co, 


acute meee ΣΤ ΠΣ 


reise hers 


Sees? 
Sees a orranrn 


= x 
aa 

ὃ 

ΓΑ 

ν᾿ ἘΞ 
2s 
sl 
2% 


= 


μὰ ἷ Ἵ fs . es 

ἩΡῈς Gray et x 
a, ve A, A ne 

δια SV a Pew as: 


GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON 


OF THE 


NEW TESTAMENT 


a ’ ε “ 3 , sary 
ἀρχὴ παιδεύσεως Ἢ τῶν ὀνομάτων ἐπίσκεψις. 
EPICTETUS, Diss. i, 17, 12. 


maius quiddam atque divinius est sermo humanus quam quod totum mutis 


litterarum figuris comprehendi queat. 
HERMANN, Opusce. iii. 253. 


TA PHMATA A EQ AEAAAHKA YMIN TINEYMA ἘΣΤΙΝ KAI ZOHW EXTIN 


GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON 


OF THE 


NEW TESTAMENT 


BEING 


®Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Cestamenti 


TRANSIATED REVISED AND ENLARGED 


BY 


JOSEPH HENRY /THAYER, D.D. 


HON. LITT.D. DUBLIN 
BUSSEY PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT CRITICISM AND INTERPRETATION IN 
THE DIVINITY SCHOOL OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY 


CORRECTED EDITION 


NEW YORK - CINCINNATI - CHICAGO 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 


Oopyright, 1886, by Harrer & Brorners. 
All rights reserved. 


Copyright, 1889, by Harrer ἃ BrorHERs, 
Ali rights reserved. 


EP 4 


PREFACE. 


WARDS the close of the year 1862, the “Arnoldische Buchhandlung” in Leipng 

published the First Part of a Greek-Latin Lexicon of the New Testament, prepared, 
upon the basis of the “Clavis Novi Testamenti Philologica” of C. G. Wilke (second edition, 
2 vols. 1851), by Professor C. L. Wit1natp Grimm of Jena. In his Prospectus Professor 
Grimm announced it as his purpose not only (in accordance with the improvements in classical 
lexicography embodied in the Paris edition of Stephen’s Thesaurus and in the fifth edition of 
Passow’s Dictionary edited by Rost and his coadjutors) to exhibit the historical growth of a 
word’s significations and accordingly in selecting his vouchers for New Testament usage to 
show at what time and in what class of writers a given word became current, but also duly 
to notice the usage of the Septuagint and of the Old Testament Apocrypha, and especially to 
produce a Lexicon which should correspond to the present condition of textual criticism, of 
exegesis, and of biblical theology. He devoted more than seven years to his task. The 
successive Parts of his work received, as they appeared, the outspoken commendation of 
scholars diverging as widely in their views as Hupfeld and Hengstenberg; and since its 
completion in 1868 it has been generally acknowledged to be by far the best Lexicon of the 
New Testament extant. 

An arrangement was early made with Professor Grimm and his publisher to reproduce 
the book in English, and an announcement of the same was given in the Bibliotheca Sacra for 
October 1864 (p. 886). The work of translating was promptly begun; but it was protracted by 
engrossing professional duties, and in particular by the necessity —as it seemed — of preparing 
the authorized translation of Liinemann’s edition of Winer’s New Testament Grammar, which 
was followed by a translation of the New Testament Grammar of Alexander Buttmann. 
Meantime a new edition of Professor Grimm’s work was called for. To the typographical 
aecuracy of this edition liberal contributions were made from this side the water. It appeared 
in its completed form in 1879. “Admurable”, “unequalled”, “invaluable”, are some of the 
epithets it elicited from eminent judges in England; while as representing the estimate of 
the book by competent critics in Germany a few sentences may be quoted from Professor 
Schiirer’s review of it in the Theologische Literaturzeitung for January 5, 1878: “The use of 
Protessor Grimm’s book for years has convinced me that it is not only unquestionably the 
best among existing New Testament Lexicons, but that, apart from all comparisons, it is a work 


VI PREFACE. 


of the highest intrinsic merit, and one which is admirably adapted to initiate a learner into an 
acquaintance with the language of the New Testament. It ought to be regarded by every 
student as one of the first and most necessary requisites for the study of the New Testament, 
and consequently for the study of Theology in general.” 

Both Professor Grimm and his publisher courteously gave me permission to make such 
changes in his work as might in my judgment the better adapt it to the needs of English- 
speaking students. But the emphatic commendation it called out from all quarters, in a 
strain similar to the specimens just given, determined me to dismiss the thought of issuing 
a new book prepared on my predecessor’s as a basis, and —alike in justice to him and for 
the satisfaction of students —to reproduce his second edition in its integrity (with only the 
silent correction of obvious oversights), and to introduce my additions in such a form as should 
render them distinguishable at once from Professor Grimm’s work. (See [] in the list of 
“Explanations and Abbreviations” given below.) This decision has occasionally imposed on 
me some reserve and entailed some embarrassments. But notwithstanding all minor draw- 
backs the procedure will, I am sure, commend itself in the end, not only on the score of 
justice to the independent claims and responsibility of both authors, but also on account of 
the increased assurance (or, at least, the broader outlook) thus afforded the student respect- 
ing debatable matters, — whether of philology, of criticism, or of interpretation. 

Some of the leading objects with the editor in his work of revision were stated in 
connection with a few specimen pages privately printed and circulated in 1881, and may here 
be repeated in substance as follows: to verify all references (biblical, classical, and—so far 
as practicable— modern) ; to note more generally the extra-biblical usage of words; to give 
the derivation of words in cases where it is agreed upon by the best etymologists and is of 
interest to the general student; to render complete the enumeration of (representative) verbal 
forms actually found in the New Testament (and exclude all others); to append to every verb 
a list of those of its compounds which occur in the Greek Testament; to supply the New 
Testament passages accidentally omitted in words marked at the end with an asterisk; to note 
more fully the variations in the Greek text of current editions; to introduce brief discussions 
of New Testament synonyms; to give the more noteworthy renderings not only of the 
“ Authorized Version” but also of the Revised New Testament; to multiply cross references ; 
references to grammatical works, both sacred (Winer, Buttmann, Green, etc.) and classical 
(Kihner, Kriiger, Jelf, Donaldson, Goodwin, etc.); also to the best English and American 
Commentaries (Lightfoot, Ellicott, Westcott, Alford, Morison, Beet, Hackett, Alexander, The 
Speaker’s Commentary, The New Testament Commentary, etc.), as well as to the latest 
exegetical works that have appeared on the Continent (Weiss, Heinrici, Keil, Godet, Oltramare, 
etc.); and to the recent Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopedias (Smith, Alexander’s Kitto, 
McClintock and Strong, the completed Riehm, the new Herzog, etc.), besides the various 
Lives of Christ and of the Apostle Paul. 

Respecting a few of these specifications an additional remark or two may be in place: 

One of the most prominent and persistent embarrassments encountered by the New 
Testament lexicographer is occasioned by the diversity of readings in the current editions of 
the Greek text. A slight change in the form or even in the punctuation of a passage may 


PREFACE. Υ͂ΤΙ 


entail a change in its construction, and consequently in its classification in the Lexicon. In 
the absence of an acknowledged consensus of scholars in favor of any one of the extant 
printed texts to the exclusion of its rivals, it is incumbent on any Lexicon which aspires after 
general currency to reckon alike with them all. Professor Grimm originally took account of 
the text of the ‘ Receptus’, together with that of Griesbach, of Lachmann, and of Tischendorf. 
In his seconé edition, he made occasional reference also to the readings of Tregelles. In the 
present work not only have the textual statements of Grimm’s second edition undergone 
thorough revision (see, for example, “Griesbach ” in the list of “ Explanations and Abbrevia- 
tions”), but the readings (whether in the text or the margin) of the editions of Tregelles and 
of Westcott and Hort have also been carefully noted. 

Again: the frequent reference, in the discussion of synonymous terms, to the distinctions 
holding in classic usage (as they are laid down by Schmidt in his voluminous work) must not 
be regarded as designed to modify the definitions given in the severaJ articles. On the 
contrary, the exposition of classic usage is often intended merely to serve as a standard of 
comparison by which the direction and degree of a word’s change in meaning can be measured. 
When so employed, the information given will often start suggestions alike interesting and 
instructive. 

On points of etymology the statements of Professor Grimm have been allowed to stand, 
although, in form at least, they often fail to accord with modern philological methods. But 
they have been supplemented by references to the works of Curtius and Fick, or even more 
frequently, perhaps, to the Etymological Dictionary of Vanicek, as the most compendious 
digest of the views of specialists. The meaning of radical words and of the component parts 
of compounds is added, except when it is indubitably suggested by the derivative, or when 
such words may be found in their proper place in the Lexicon. 

The nature and use of the New Testament writings require that the lexicographer should 
not be hampered by a too rigid adherence to the rules of scientific lexicography. A student 
often wants to know not so much the inherent meaning of a word as the particular sense it 
bears in a given context or discussion: —or, to state the same truth from another point of 
view, the lexicographer often cannot assign a particular New Testament reference to one or 
another of the acknowledged significations of a word without indicating his exposition of the 
passage in which the reference occurs. In such a case he is compelled to assume, at least, to 
some extent, the functions of the exegete, although he can and should refrain from rehearsing 
the general arguments which support the interpretation adopted, as well as from arraying the 
objections to opposing interpretations. 

Professor Grimm, in his Preface, with reason calls attention to the labor he has expended 
upon the explanation of doctrinal terms, while yet guarding himself against encroaching upon 
the province of the dogmatic theologian. In this particular the editor has endeavored to enter 
into his labors. Any one who consults such articles as αἰών, αἰώνιος, βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ etc., 
δίκαιος and its cognates, δόξα, ἐλπίς, ζωή, θάνατος, θεός, κόσμος, κύριος, πίστις, πνεῦμα, σάρξ, σοφία, σώζω 
and its cognates, υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, Χριστός, and the like, will find, it is believed, all 
the materials needed for a complete exposition of the biblical contents of those terms. On the 
comparatively few points respecting which doctrinal opinions still differ, references have been 


Vill PREFACE 


added to representative discussions on both sides, or to authors whose views may be regarded 
as supplementing or correcting those of Professor Grimm. s 

Convenience often prescribes that the archzological or historical facts requisite to the 
understanding of a passage be given the student on the spot, even though he be referred for 
fuller information to the works specially devoted to such topics. In this particular, too, the 
editor has been guided by the example of his predecessor; yet with the constant exercise of 
self-restraint lest the book be encumbered with unnecessary material, and be robbed of that 
succinctness which is one of the distinctive excellences of the original. 

In making his supplementary references and remarks the editor has been governed at 
different times by different considerations, corresponding to the different classes for whose 
use the Lexicon is designed. Primarily, indeed, it is intended to satisfy the needs and to 
guide the researches of the average student; although the specialist will often find it 
serviceable, and on the other hand the beginner will find that he has not been forgotten. 
Accordingly, a caveat must be entered against the hasty inference that the mention of a 
different interpretation from that given by Professor Grimm always and of necessity implies 
dissent from him. It may be intended merely to inform the student that the meaning of the 
passage is still in debate. And the particular works selected for reference have been chosen — 
now because they seem best suited to supplement the statements or references of the origi- 
nal; now because they furnish the most copious references to other discussions of the same 
topic ; now because they are familiar works or those to which a student can readily get access; 
now, again, because unfamiliar and likely otherwise to escape him altogether. 

It is in deference, also, to the wants of the ordinary student that the references to 
grammatical works — particularly Winer and Buttmann — have been greatly multiplied. The 
expert can easily train his eye to run over them; and yet even for him they may have their 
use, not only as giving him the opinion of eminent philologists on a passage in question, but 
also as continually recalling his attention to those philological considerations on which the 
decision of exegetical questions must mainly rest. 

Moreover, in the case of a literature so limited in compass as the New Testament, it 
seems undesirable that even a beginner should be subjected to the inconvenience, expense, and 
especially the loss of facility, incident to a change of text-books. He will accordingly find 
that not only have his wants been heeded in the body of the Lexicon, but that at the close of 
the Appendix a list of verbal forms has been added especially for his benefit. The other 
portions of the Appendix will furnish students interested in the history of the New Testament 
vocabulary, or investigating questions — whether of criticism, authorship, or biblical theology 
—which involve its word-lists, with fuller and more trustworthy collections than can be found 
elsewhere. 


Should I attempt, in conclusion, to record the names of all those who during the many 
years in which this work has been preparing have encouraged or assisted me by word or pen, 
by counsel or book, the list would be a long one. Express acknowledgments, however, mast be 
made to GrorceE B. Jewett, D.D., of Salem and to Professor W. W. Eaton now of Middlebury 
College, Vermont. The former has verified and re-veritied ali uhe biblical and classical! 


PREFACE. Ix 


references, besides noting in the main the various readings of the critical texts, and rendering 
valuable aid in correcting many of the proofs; the latter has gathered the passages omitted 
from words marked with a final asterisk, completed and corrected the enumeration of verbal 
forms, catalogued the compound verbs, had an eye to matters of etymology and accentuation, 
and in many other particulars given the work the benefit of his conscientious and scholarly 
labor. To these names one other would be added were it longer written on earth. Had the 
lamented Dr. ABror been spared to make good his generous offer to read the final proofs, every 
user of the book would doubtless have had occasion to thank him. He did, however, go 
through the manuscript and add with his own hand the variant verse-notation, in accordance 
with the results of investigation subsequently given to the learned world in his Excursus on 
the subject published in the First Part of the Prolegomena to Tischendorf’s Editio Octava 
Critica Major. 

To Dr. Caspar Rent Grecory of Leipzig (now Professor-elect at Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity, Baltimore) my thanks are due for the privilege of using the sheets of the Prolegomena 
just named in advance of their publication; and to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press, 
Oxford, for a similar courtesy in the case of the Seventh Edition of Liddell and Scott’s 
Lexicon. 


No one can have a keener sense than the editor has of the shortcomings of the present 
volume. But he is convinced that whatever supersedes it must be the joint product of several 
laborers, having at their command larger resources than he has enjoyed, and ampler leisure 
than falls to the lot of the average teacher. Meantime, may the present work so approve itself 
to students of the Sacred Volume as to enlist their co-operation with him in ridding it of every 
remaining blemish 

— iva ὃ λόγος τοῦ κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται. 


J. H. THAYER. 
CaMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS. 
Dec. 25, 1885. 


In issuing this “Corrected Edition” opportunity has been taken not only to revise the 
supplementary pages (725 sq.), but to add in the body of the work (as circumstances per- 
mitted) an occasional reference to special monographs on Biblical topics which have been 
published during the last three years, as well as to the Fourth Volume of Schmidt’s Synonymik 
(1886), and also to works which (like Meisterhans) have appeared in an improved edition. 
The Third edition (1888) of Grimm, however, has yielded little new material; and Dr. Hatch’s 
“ Essays in Biblical Greek ” comes to hand too late to permit references to its valuable dis- 
cussions of words to be inserted. 

To the correspondents, both in England and this country, who have called my attention to 
errata, I beg to express my thanks; and I would earnestly ask all who use the book to send 
me similar favors in time to come : — ἀτελὲς οὐδὲν οὐδενὸς μέτρον. 


April 10, 1889. 


LIST OF ANCIENT AUTHORS 


QUOTED OR REFERRED TO IN THE LEXICON. 


N. B. In the preparation of this list, free use has been made of the lists in the Lexicons of Liddell and Scott and of Sophocles, also 
of Freund’s Triennium Philologicum (1874) vols. i. and ii., of Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography, of Smith and Wace’s 
Dictionary of Christian Biography, of Engelmann’s Bibliotheca Scriptorum Classicorum (8th ed. 1880), and of other current works of 


B.O. AD. 
ARE TARUB 4 ὡς πὶ πὶ πὶ πὶ εἰ ot ΤΣ 801 
FAC GE Bo og πὶ τς Ae 4501 
ARISTEAS! , Bh chy Moet & 270 
FARIBRUDES; ἘΞ ARGUS) © 5) he, 6, - 160 
ARISTOPHANES. . . “444, [380 
ARISTOPHANES, the grammarian 200 
ARISTOTLE . *384, 1322 
ARRIAN (pupil ba friend τ Epictetus) *c. 100 
ARTEMIDORUS DatLpi1anus (oneiro- 

Gite ἔρος ὁ το cree Goo 160 
ATHANASIUS .. S60 +373 
ATHENAEUS, the grammarian .. . 228 
ATHENAGORAS of Athens . . . . . 177? 
AveustTINE, Bp. of Hippo. 7430 
Avsonivus, DecImus Magnus ... tc. 390 
Basrivs (see Rutherford, Babrius, Intr. 

ch. i.) (some say 50?) c. 225 
BARNABAS, Epistle written Crettats. as c. 100? 
Baruch, Apocryphal Book of . . . ὁ Ὁ: 751 
Basilica, τμ6 3. . . mule? ae ο. 900 
Basti THE GREAT, Bp. ‘of ‘Casarea . 1379 
LEME fb 5 GF oo fc 450 
Bel and the Dragon. . . « « « « 2dcent.? 

ΒΊΟΝ Ὁ κὶ os oo eo 75 200 

CAESAR, rome πῖπτε: . . tMarch 15, 44 

ὉΑΥΤΥ ΜΆΘΗΤΕ τς et τ τ τς τς 260 

Canons and Constitutions, Apostolic. . Sd and 4th cent 
CaPpitro.ints, Jutivs (one of the “ Hist. 

August. scriptoressex”) .... ce. 310 
CEBERI gta ΠΣ προ κ᾿ τ - 399 
ΘἘΡΒΕΝΠΗΙ oes melas) ἡμὴ τὰ (ὦ, ἧς 1050 


1 But his letter is spurious; see Hody, De Bibl. text. orig. 1. 1.; 
A. Kurz, Arist. ep. ete (Bern 1872). 


reference. An asterisk (*) before a date denotes birth, an obelisk (t) death. 
B.C A.D. 
Acuittes TaTius . . 5001 
Acts of Paul and Thecla, of Pilate, of 
Thomas, of Peter and Paul, of Barna- 
bas, etc., at the earliest from . 2d cent. on 
IALAN vei veins: tic! t's) crate) ‘outs’ c. 180 
INEGI Grete Dolo oS τ ἐς 345 
IARSGHYOUS)% © = ς ee 2. 2025, 1450 
PAMSOE amelie, (en fel fel ie) Wis) te) ΑΔ ie 570 
JATIETURM oN at fc oo οἷς ας aos ο. 500 
AGAEHAROHIDES) is 6) i) ie © olen ΠῚ 
AtcaEus MYTILENAEUS .... . 610 
AE GEEHRON@=0 te) a) σ᾽ Σ᾽ fe) fol fe 200? 
UE GMA Pot Matava te: api benlisl. aan e) te 610 
ALEXANDER APHRODISIENSIS . . . 200 
AERIS) τς Se evades 350 
AMBROSE, Bp. of Milan. myiasis) Fears 374 
AMMIANUS MaRCELLINUS .... Το. 400 
Ammonivs, the grammarian. . . . 390 
ANA CREON? ΣΡ ἘΝ cj ὦν oP ἔν Σ 530 
ANAXANDRIDES ... . ais 350 
ANAXTMAMDER' sc, Ne, us) ΡΝ 580 
IAN DOGIDES. 2. 2. δἰ ρα oe alpen 405 
PAREIPHANES) τὸς. oo, 6) 0a" si 5 oe 380 
ANTIPHON ΕΓ 412 
Antoninus, M. ἐὐπαττρ τ, Ἢ εὶς, 1180 
APOLLopoRts of Athens 5, το 140 
APOLLoNIUS DyscoLus ..... 140 
ApoLtonius Ruopius. ..... 200 
APPIAN > ete ant ie 150 
APPULEIUS . . . Sa 160 
AQuUILA are τ the 0. Τ. ) : {eo raaiesyee 
ARATUS ρον ἘΝ 270 
ARCHILOCHUS . : A 700 
ARCHIMEDES, the mathematician AD 250 
ARCHYTAS . - .« δ: 400 


1 But the current Fables are not his; on the History of Greek 
Fable, see Rutherford, Babrius, Introd. ch. ii, 
2 Only a few fragments of the odes ascribed to him are genuine. 


53 The law-book of the Byzantine Empire, founded upon the work 
of Justinian and consisting of sixty books. It was begun under 
the emperor Basil of Macedonia (+886), completed under his son 
Leo, and revised in 945 under Constantine Porphyrogenitus; (ed. 
Heimbach, 6 vols. 1833-70). 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


Β.0. 
Cetsus, A. Cornexius, the medical 
ὈΥΡΕΟΡ τ π᾿ Ἀπ δι τ et Ὁ ta’ ten ὁ δ we 
ΟΡ ΗΕΗΙΝ τιν δ ἵν νἀ ὦ γον ἄν.» 320 


CHARITON . . 5 . ὁ ahs 
Curysirrus of Tyana (in Athenaeus) 
Curysostom, Dio, the orator, see Dio Chrys. 
Curysostom, Joun, Bp. of Constan- 
tinople. . . 
CxcERO) = κι. « « 
Cremens ALEXANDRINUS . . 
Ciemens Romanus, Epistle ae . 
CLEOMEDES. . « © «© « s οἷ» κα 
(ον τι ΠΣ Δ ὦ ἐῶ Ὁ 
ConsTaNTINUS PORPHYROGENITUS, 
emperorfrom . +... + « « e 
Constitutiones apostolicae. . . « «+ « 


. tDec. 7, 43 


tk Gud en cena eol Apes 
CRUDTAS οι, ἢ 411 
CORSTAS: js, ον ἐν eel lem γα γεν ἡ 401 
CURDIUS ἀπολο εν γε δι ἐτον 
CYpRIAN. .. Ce crc ΞΎΟΙΣ 
Cyrit of ear iia CO Oo ae 
Crrizt of Jerusalem . . . ὁ τ « « 
DEMOORIQUSHE ste is) τ οὐ ese) Ὁ 430 


DEMOSTHENES. . =» « « « « « *385, 1322 
Dexippus, the historian .... ὁ 
Drpymus of Alexandria . ... . 

DIO 'CASSIUB Ms, te) ies τὰ ἰδ. ἦρι ἢ 

Dio CHRYSOSTOM . . « « « « 


IDTOOGES τ Ἐπ Neleiay wo) eles 470 
Dioporus SicuLus . . « « « « « 40 
Diogenes LABRTIUS . . «το Ὁ 
Diocnetvs, Epistleto . . . . . . 
Dionysius Pseupo-AREOPAGITA . . 
Dionysius of Halicarnassus. . . . 80 
Dionysius PERIEGETES .... 9 
DOTOSCORIDES San fs fe fo evista ee 
ὌΣΡΕ ΝΑ. τς is, sen fe te Pee iter fa 300 
Ecclesiasticus (Wisdom af Jesus the 

Son of Sirach; Grk. trans.) . . . 6. 132? 
Ennius .. nue Oe Pie een +169 
Enoch, Book ae * + © « « « 2d cent. on 
ΕΡΗΒΕΜ Syrus . . op Coie) 
JERIGHARMUB Vs, si veces) os ee 480 
WIPIOTRTUS! oe 6 ὁ πὴ οροιν cele 
YPIOURUS ells) προ νι ΡΟ {510 
ἘΠΡΙΕΝΎΝΗΡΝ:, τ, 6. ὑπ᾿ Ye. πόα Ὁ tance 600 


Eprpuantius, Bp. of Salamis . . . 
ERATOSTHENES. . ac it c. 196 
Esdras, First Book of ( ὙΠ “πὴ Third) 1580 οοπῦ. ? 
Esdras, Second Book of (Vulgate Fourth) 


Esther, Additions to . . .. . + 2dcent.? 
Etymologicum Magnum ..... . 

OBUHUB .. αὖ ς τον τς ὡς ὦ eos. s,s 350 
GGLUD. .smeee eke i αὐ ἢ 6 εν 300 


EUPOLIS . « « © ς © © © © © Ὁ 429 
EURIPIDES . . « « - « » “480, [206 
Evsesivs, Bp. of Ciara ἜΑ ΣῊ Σ 
Eusrarturus of Constantinople, gram: 

PAATIAN ον τὴ τι eM ep opel eh ἴον 


ΧΗ 


911-959 


8d and 4th cent. 


50 

$257 
[444 
1386 


c. 270 
6. 395 
200 
100 


c. 200 
2d or 3d cent. 
500? 


300? 
100 ? 


ce. 375 


100 


7403 


lst cent 1 


1000? 


tc. 340 


1160 


4 Called Pamphili (as friend of the martyr Pamphilus). 


Evrtuymivs ZicaBenvus or Zigadenus 


(Zygadenus) . . . « Ὁ = ow ὁ 
ELORUS; JULIUS = « «|» «) ei lelus 
GALEN. . . . . 

GELLIUs, Aviats (author of Noctes 

Atticas)) ἧς ὦτα αν οτος: 
GENESIUS .... yeas 


Geoponica (20 bks. on agriculime com- 

piled by Cassianus Bassus). . . . 
Germanus of pore eniey the 

younger. . ΡΝ 
Οὐποιλβ of Tieoptini’c sie ete Pal We 
Grecory of Nazianzus. . . . 
Grecory of Nyssa . . 5 . . « « 
Harpocration (lexicon to the Ten 

Attic Orators) . . . 
HECATAEUS. . . adie 
HEGESIPPUS (qucteds in ἘΠ ΠΣ 2 
Hexroporvs, Bp. of Tricca in Thessaly 
Heracrives Ponricus (but the Alleg. 

Homer. are spurious). . . . + + 
HIERACLITUS τ ὁ s « 6 « « « ὁ 


PIGRMAS so %res, a Gee Nic se ἢ 
FIERMIPPUB ὦ Teel ss © is 8 
HIERMOGENES. τς 6 ν τ πον ‘e 


Hrro ALEXANDRINUS . . . « ὁ 

Heropian, the grammarian . . . - 
Heropian, the historian ... . 
HERODOTUS. ». » « « « « « 


B.C. 


510 


390 
500 


432 


250 


. “484, [408 


Hesiop . . Gyn ἘΠ ΡΠ 
Hesycuius of Alexandria, the lexicog- 

TAPLOL? τ ἡ πὸ cop ho te ae’ ΚΗ ΟΣ 
HIEROCLES . . - Snape Us ite 
H1rRONYMCS, see Semis: 

ἘΠῚ ΙΒΥΤΗ Aha %s fe. ss τ to) 
HIPPOCRATES . + + 6 « © + ὁ 430 
HIPPOLYTUB) ὦ ὦ» fo) is isi ale 
HIPPONAR 5 «= i ee te wie 540 
Hirtivs (the continuator of Cacsar’s 

Commentaries). . «© « « 6 « = [48 
HoMER .. . μι ἢ 9001 
HoraPo.to, grammarian τ ΜΗ͂ΝΕΣ 
ἘΠ ΟΝ. πον πρὶ ote. +8 
FIVPERIDES els ele ue) en alemetoes 
IgnaTIUS. . tres sites 
IrENAEUS, Bp. of yer sit ΕΣ 
ΕΑ ΘΗ si Ge! ©. le: ‘es PPS otc, ἢ 370 
Isiporus HIsPALENs!s, ἘΠῚ of Seville 
TsoGHATES) <..\s- so .iie) Se eee een 400, 595 
JAMBLICHUS. . . 
Jeremiah, Ep. of (6th ch. of Baruch) 

Jerome (Sophronius (1) Eusebius Hie- 

TONYIUS) τ woe 5 ὦ et ee 
JOANNES DAMASCENUS. « - « Ὁ 
Joannes Moscous - - . + « « e 
JOSEPHUS: « 5 © « κι © jee aie 
UGA Y «io, ον 25: . 175-100 


JuLi1an, Roman emperor from .. - 


Justinian, Roman emperor from . . 
Justin, the historian... + « « 
JUSTIN MARTYR ἡ τὸν ὦ ππο τ νν 
JUVENAT ὁ γῦρο eto et eter 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


A.D. 


1100 
c. 125 
*131, to. GR 


150 
950 


c. 925 
c. 1230 


1390 
[895 


8501 


6.175 
890? 


140? 
170 


160 
7240 


6007 


360 


800 
lst cent. Υ 


1420 
780 
1620 
75 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


B.C. 
GACTANTIUS. © “τ τὴ « δ᾽ © ὁ 
Lampripivs, the historian . CeO} uc 
Leo ‘Philosophus’,emperor. . . « 
Lizantvs, the rhetorician. . . . ὁ 
bie ete Oo OOOO Don. "59 
LONGINUS ὁ 2 « «+ + «© © © © Ὁ 
Loneus .. - cop oo 0 ὦ Ὁ 
Lucan, the epic poet το ΝΕ Ὁ 
Lucian of Samosata, the satirist . . 
Lucrtivs, the Roman satirist . . . [103 
Lucretius, the Roman poet . . « « 155 
ΠΥ ΘΟΡΉΒΟΝ Go ooo a o oo oO (S27) 
Lycurcus of Athens, the orator . . 1329 
TEYNGEDS\c ic) - ee 300 
Lystas, the Athenian prey: opened 

In EDM G G 6 o O06 00 0 410 
ΠΟΣΕΥΡΕΠΗ ΤΣ Neliicl! (eo) © οἷς ΕΞ Ὁ 434 
Macarius .. Σὰ Ὁ ὦ 
Maccabees, First Book of . « « « 105-63? 
Maccabees, Second Book of... « « © 75% 
Maccabees, Third Book of . +... + 
Maccabees, Fourth Book UR - - ~ Ist. cent? 
IMACHON) 2 «ὁ - = Σ cD ὦ 280 
Macropius. . . plo, 0h 
Matauas, Joun, the ἘΞΕΤΕ Ono 
Manasses, Prayerof . . . . « .« Istcent.? 
Manerno, the leas eae onc 300 
Marcion. . . . 5 Δ νας Ὁ 
Maximus Ta oO oc ys 150 
Meta, Pomrontvs, the omen geog- 

Tapher . . τ . Ot Oat. One 
MELEAGER, the ἐπα ει: of the epi- 

gram. anthologies . . .... . 60 
Me ito, Bp. of Sardis . . . . - ς 
MENANDER, the poet. . . ... . 325 
ΜΈΝΑΝΡΕΕ, the Byzantine historian . 
Mimnermus, the poet-. . . - ¢. 600 
Morris, the “ Atticist” and lexicog- 

EVN. oy GGG ὧν αν, OG) cleo 8 
ἹΜΟΒΟΒΙΟΚ τς ΡΠ ΤΠ 
Moscuts - - Cie Oe inc ich Ὁ Ὁ 200 
Musonius Reece CDi SQ O20 io. 

INE MESUUS\ te) τ = is) Nel Neuecn etre 
ΝΈΡΟΝΣ GO 9 0 0 65 0 0 6 4 ΟΝ 
NICANDER .. ta he 1602 
Nicrrnorvs, patriarch. of Constanti- 

nople «=. . . : 
Nicerworus Biccusaare the nes 

HAM ig 6 G ὃ 
NicrrHorus Φιπτίξπυνο, τε ατπεῖτο ne 

torian : 
NIcetas Nooweranns Ἐπ Ghoninee)s 

Byzantine historian . 

Nicodemus, Gospel of, see dies of Pilate 
Nicotaus DaMAsceNnuUS .. . . 14 


Nicomacuts GERASENUS. . . 

Nitus, the pupil and friend of John 
Chrysostom oy BLO 

Nownus of Panopolis in iiieece Bere 
the poet . . . 

Nomenivs of Apameia, fie philoso: 
pher (as quoted by Origen). . . . 


A.D. 
310 
310 
886 
350 
Τ17 
250 
400 ὁ 
165 
160? 


c. 350 


c. 401 


420 
600 ? 


140 


45 


¢e. 175 


420 


6. 150 


XIII 


B.C 

Numentus (as quoted by Athen.) . . 6. 350 

‘Ocennus Lucanus . .... ++ 400% 

OrcumeEntus, Bp. of Trica . . . . 

Oxtymrroporus, the Neo-Platonie phi- 
losopher . . 

Oppian of essere in 1 Cilicia (anc 

of the ἁλιευτικά) 

Oprian of Apameia in Sys (auth. of 

the κυνηγετικά) » 2 2 2 2 2 © 
QEIGENG ys) f=) ον 5, δ) le) κὶ σ᾽ ofits 
Orosius PauLus. « »« »« + « « « 
Onphacay 166. τ΄ παν κα 9 
(Oem νοῦ OO) Gi Oso Dec) oO 
PALAEPHATUS . . « . . ? 
Parras, Bp. of Hierapolis, “first half of 
PAUSANIAS . 2 οὐ + « Ὁ I0 
Petrus ALEXANDRINUS . . « « « 
PHALARIS, spurious epistles of . . . 
PHAVORINUS, VARINUS! . . « « - 
PHILEMON, COMICUS τς « © « 830 
1242010) Ge 4G) GOD) ON OOO) οἱ OOO 
PHILODEMUS ..- «© « «+ « «© « « 50 
PHILOSTRATUS. . SOO Ὁ ὦ 
PHOCYLIDES δ . 540 
Psrupo-PHocyLiDESs fe the " Sibyl. 

Ὅσα αν on Cro Oy ua 
Puortits (Patriarch οὗ Constantinople) 
Purynicues, the grammarian . . . 
PHYLARCHUS .. . cusps 210 


PrInDAR O21 Geen pee Aeschylus), t444 
Prato, Comicus, contemporary of Ari- 

stophanes. . . Oo do Ὁ δ᾽ Ὁ 427 
Prato, the piloce pian 50 9 Oo 27; {97 
PLAUTUS . = τ Belo daa f ites 
Purvy the elder, the πιρίπτσσίῃτθ ΡΞ: 

Puriyy the younger, the nephew and 

adopted son of the preceding . . . 
Prorines, the philosopher . .. . 
PLUTARCH . . . 

Poxtux, author of the  νοκαδὶ τόν . 
PoryaEnus, author of the orparnyh- 

MATa. «© « Ὁ ἀν το 
ῬΟΡΕΒΙΠΕ « - «ἰ- -ἰ = {122 
ἘΟΙΧΟΛῈΡ . . - sie obra \Ate 
Porrnuyry, pupil of Plotinus . ° 
PosIpIPrUs . Ξ 280 
Posipontius, rinleseanee (aes of 

Ciceroand Pompey) . .... - 78 
Procits, aes aloo ἢ ον. 
PROPERTIUS - - οὐκ co co ὦ οἰ ρήπη 
Protevangelium ΝΣ ἀν 
Psalter of Solomon. . . . « - . 63-48? 
PsELtus the younger, phileeogher δ 
ῬτΟΙΕΝΥ, the geographer As ee 
PYTHAGORAS .. - . 581 


QUINTILIAN, eee πεῖν of 
Pliny the younger. . . . « « 
Quintus SMYRNAEUS . . . « « - 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


A.D. 


39 
237 
Ist cent. ἢ 


850 
180 


{79 


{118 
270 
7120 
180 


163 


$155, Feb.23 
270 


[95 
380? 


1 The Latin name of the Italian Guarino Favorino, who died 
A.D. 1537, and was the author of a Greek Lexicon compiled mainly 


from SuYdas, Hesychius, Harpocration, Eustathius, 
chus. Ist ed. Rome, 1523, and often elsewhere since. 


and Phryni- 


ANCIENT AUTHORS. 


B.C. 
SALLusT . . . . *86, 135 
Sapientia (Sal.), see Wisin of Solomon. 
SaprHo 
Seneca, L. Anwazs, the philosopher 
(son of the rhetorician) 
Septuagint, Greek translation of 0. T. ὋΣ 
Sextus Empiricus . 
Sibylline Oracles, of various dates, rang- 
ing perhaps from Se Owe GeO 
Sirius Irauicus, pot. ..... 
Simonipes of Amorgos, “ Iambo- 
STaphus? τις ον τ τ 
Srmonipes of Ceos (author of the epi- 
taph on the Spartans that fell at 
Thermopylae) . . 2 « « ὁ « 
Sme.icius, the commentator on Aris- 
totle and Epictetus . . . . + « 
Sirach, see Ecclesiasticus. 
Socrates ‘Scholasticus’, of Constan- 
tinople, historian . . . « « « ὁ 
Socratgs (in Stobaeus) . ... - 
Soxinus, surnamed Polyhistor . . 
Solomon, Psalms of, see Psalter ete. 
Solomon, Wisdom of, see Wisdom ete. 
Soton, the lawgiver and poet. . . . 594 
Song of the Three Children. . . . 2d cent.? 


610 


280-150 


170 


693 


525 


Sopuoctes . - - + + «6 « 496, $406 
Sopnronius of eto Bt Patera 

ΞΟΠ ΑΕΗ stems sede Me Ne) ie fe ? 
Sozomen, historian .... ὁ 

Starivs, the Roman poet. . . . ὁ 


Sropaeus, i.e. John of Stobi in Mace- 
donia (compiler of Anthol.) . . . 


Srrano, the geographer .... . *66 
SrRaTon, epigrammatist τε ε 
STRATTIS, comic poet A 407 
Suetonius, the historian, find of 

Pliny the younger . . . » » « « 
Suipas, the lexicographer. . . . 
Susanna... retina tiast Ist cent. ? 
SyMMACHUS ΠΕ ΠΕ το τ of the Ο. T. 

anto'Greek)) “5% τος τειν te ° 
Synesrus, pagan philosopher and 

bishop of Ptolemais . ..... 
TPAGUTUSS © So: © os 0 seach vet tate 
TavTran . . a teres 
Teaching of the Twelve Apcitien 0.0 0 
AEERENOH sais 1c? 0 ὑπ lel ete nou eh BD 


XIV 


A.D. 


165 
2251 


to the 4th cent. 


110] 


500 


439 


800? 


638 


450 
196 


500? 
$24 
1501 


1160 
1100? 


2003 


410 
16.117 
c. 160 

2d cent. ? 


TERTULLIAN . . nits 
Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs a 
SEHBAGES(.| τὸν τ οἴ elton eiate 
‘THEMISTIOS'. τ ΠΣ τος πὸ τ ΟΝ 
ἘΕΕΘΟΙ ΠΡΟ Ss hemo o do o © 
IRARODORET fyi) ex, os urls) aeons 
Tueoporus MerocuiTa . .. . 
TueEoporTIon (translator of O. T. into 
Greek)/hefore: a) π΄ ὁ 2) cee 
THEOGNIS ... τ τ - 
TueEoruius, Bp. of igntock . ἜΤ 
THEOPHRASTUS, pupil and successor of 
Aristotle . . . .. 
TueEopuy act, Abp. of Bulgaria ao 
THEOPHYLACT SIMOCATTA . . . « 
Tuomas Macister, lexicographer and 
gTammarian . . . » « © « » » 
IREVEYDIDES) τὐς τ ei y Ne 
TIBULLUS Ξ 
Timaevs, thie figtoman of Sicily .. 
Trmaeus the Sophist, author of Lexicon 
to Plato ... . 
Trmagevs of Locri, Pythagorean phi 
losopher . . τ τ ὃ 
Timon, the «Silographus” or satirist . 
TIMOCLES .. . RO 
Tobit τῷ ἵν 
TRYPHIODORUS, ἃ τρίτον; ὧν Ὁ 
ὙΖΕΥΖΕΒ, Byzantine grammarian and 
OGL ier ae) Mee Tm 
VaLerius Maximus .... Ὁ. 
Varro, ‘vir Romanorum eruditissi- 
18 (Cains) Oe 6 6 feo 
VEGETIUS, on the artof war. .. . 
VERGIL . . a ἢ 
VITRUVIUS, the only ‘Roman writer on 
architecture . . . 
Voriscus, historian (cf. Gapitolinus),< 
Wisdom of Solomon (abbr. Sap.) . . 
Xenopuanes, founder of the Eleatic 
philosophyw<)) =: is) ergs) ne 1 19) 6 
Xenopoon. .. . .  (Anabasis) 
Xenopuon of Ephesus, romancer . . 
Zeno of Citium .... . 
ZeENopDOTDS, first librarian at eran 
dria. . . 5) St ΨΨ.0Ὸ 
ZONARAS, the ΕΣ Here ce oO. 2 
Zosimus, Roman historian ... - 


νυ δ ον» 


on, τ fe 


Βα. 


280 


822 


423 
{18 
260 


3752 
c. 279 
350 


- ce. 2002 


126 

{19 

30 

c. 100? 


540 
401 


290 


280 


ANCIENT AUTHORS, 


A.D. 
{220 1 
c. 1253 
855 


420 
1800 


160 


180 


1078 
610 


1810 


2501 


4201 


c. 310 


1118 


LIST OF BOOKS 


REFERRED TO MERELY BY THEIR AUTHOR’S NAME OR BY SOME EXTREME 
ABRIDGMENT OF THE TITLE. 


Alberti = Joannes Alberti, Observationes Philologicae in 
sacros Novi Foederis Libros. Lugd. Bat., 1725. 

Aristotle: when pages are cited, the reference is to the 
edition of the Berlin Academy (edited by Bekker and 
Brandis ; index by Bonitz) 5 vols. 4to, 1831-1870. Of the 
Rheteric, Sandys’s edition of Cope (3 vols., Cambridge, 
1877) has been used. 

Biumlein = W. Béumlein, Untersuchungen iiber griechi- 
sche Partikeln. Stuttgart, 1861. 

B.D. = Dr. William Smith’s Dictionary of the Bible, 3 vols. 
London, 1860-64. The American.edition (4 vols., N. Y. 
1868-1870), revised and edited by Professors Hackett and 
Abbot, has been the edition used, and is occasionally 
referred to by the abbreviation “ Am. ed.” 

BB. DD. = Bible Dictionaries :— comprising especially the 
work just named, and the third edition of Kitto’s Cyclo- 
pedia of Biblical Literature, edited by Dr. W. L. Alex- 
ander: 3 vols., Edinburgh, 1870. 

Buhdy.= G. Bernhardy, Wissenschaftliche Syntax der 
Griechischen Sprache. Berlin, 1829. 

B. = Alexander Buttmann, Grammar of the New Testament 
Greek. (Authorized Translation with numerous Addi- 
tions and Corrections by the Author: Andover, 1873.) 
Unless otherwise indicated, the reference is to the page 
of the translation, with the corresponding nage of the 
German original added in a parenthesis. 

Bttm. Ausf. Spr. or Sprehl. = Philipp Buttmann, Ausfiihr- 
liche Griechische Sprachlehre. (2d ed., 1st vol. 1830, 2d 
vol. 1839.) 

Bitm. Gram. = Philipp Buttmann’s Griechische Gram- 
matik. The edition used (though not the latest) is the 
twenty-first (edited by Alexander Buttmann: Berlin, 
1863). Its sections agree with those of the eighteenth 
edition, translated by Dr. Robinson and published by 
Harper & Brothers, 1851. When the page is given, the 
translation is referred to. 

Bttm. Lexil. = Philipp Buttmann’s Lexilogus ἃ. s. w. (1st 
vol. 2d ed. and 2d vol. Berlin, 1825.) The work was 
translated and edited by J. R. Fishlake, and issued in one 
volume by John Murray, London, 1836. 

“Bible Educator” =a collection (with the preceding name) 
of miscellaneous papers on biblical topics by various 
writers under the editorship of Rev. Professor E. H. 


Plumptre, and published in 4 vols. (without date) by 
Cassell, Petter, and Galpin. 

Chandler = Henry W. Chandler, A Practical Introduction to 
Greek Accentuation. Second edition, revised: Oxford, 
1881. 

Cremer = Hermann Cremer, Biblisch-theologisches Worter- 
buch der Neutestamentlichen Gricitit. ‘Third greatly 
enlarged and improved Edition’: Gotha, 1883. Of the 
‘Fourth enlarged and improved Edition’ nine parts 
(comprising nearly two thirds of the work) have come to 
hand, and are occasionally referred to. A translation 
of the second German edition was published in 1878 
by the Messrs. Clark. 

Curtius = Georg Curtius, Grundziige der Griechischen Ety- 
mologie. Fifth edition, with the co-operation of Ernst 
Windisch: Leipzig, 1879. 

Dict. of Antiq. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiqui- 
ties. Edited by Dr. William Smith. Second edition: 
Boston and London, 1869, also 1873. 

Dict. of Biog. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography 
and Mythology. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 3 vols. 
Boston and London, 1849. 

Dict. of Chris. Antiq. = A Dictionary of Christian Antiqui- 
ties, being a Continuation of the Dictionary of the Bible. 
Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Samuel 
Cheetham. 2 vols. 1875-1880. 

Dict. of Chris. Biog. = A Dictionary of Christian Biogra- 
phy, Literature, Sects and Doctrines; etc. Edited by 
Dr. William Smith and Professor Henry Wace: vol. 
i. 1877; vol. ii. 1880; vol. iii. 1882; (not yet complete). 

Dict. of Geogr. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geogra- 
phy. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 2 vols. 1854-1857. 

Edersheim = Alfred Edersheim, The Life and Times of 
Jesus the Messiah. 2 vols. Second edition, stereotyped. 
London and New York, 1884. 

Elsner = J. Elsner, Observationes sacrae in Novi Foederis 
libros ete. 2 vols., Traj. ad Rhen. 1720, 1728. 

Etym. Magn.—the Etymologicum Magnum (see List of 
Ancient Authors, ete.) Gaisford’s edition (1 vol. folio, 
Oxford, 1848) has been used. 

Fick = August Fick, Vergleichendes Worterbuch der In. 
dogermanischen Sprachen. Third edition. 4 vols. Godt 
tingen, 1874-1876. 


List or Books. 


Gottling = Carl Goetiling, Allgemeine Lehre vom Accent 
der griechischen Sprache. Jena, 1835. 

Goodwin = W. W. Goodwin, Syntax of the Moods and 
Tenses of the Greek Verb. 4th edition revised. Boston 
and Cambridge, 1871. 

Graecus Venetus =the Greek version of the Pentateuch, 
Proy., Ruth, Canticles, Eccl., Lam., Dan., according to a 
unique MS. in the Library of St. Mark’s, Venice; edited 
by O. ν. Gebhardt. Lips. 1875, 8vo pp. 592. 

Green =Thomas Sheldon Green, A Treatise on the Grammar 
of the New Testament etc. ete. A new Edition. Lon- 
don, Samuel Bagster and Sons, 1862. 

Also, by the same author “ Critical Notes on the New 
Testament, supplementary to his Treatise on the Gram- 
mar of the New Testament Dialect.” London, Samuel 
Bagster and Sons, 1867. 

Hamburger=J/. [amburger, Real-Encyclopadie fiir Bibel und 
Talmud. Strelitz. First Part 1870; Second Part 1883. 

Herm. ad Vig., see Vig. ed. Herm. 

Herzog = Real-Encyklopiidie fiir Protestantische Theologie 
und Kirche. Edited by Herzog. 21 vols. with index, 


1854-1868. 5 
Herzog 2 or ed. 2 =a second edition of the above (edited by 


Herzog t, Plitt t,and Hauck), begun in 1877 and not yet 
complete. 

Hesych. = Hesychius (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) 
The edition used is that of M. Schmidt (5 vols. Jena, 
1858-1868) 

Jelf = W. EL. Jelf, A Grammar of the Greek Language. 
Third edition. Oxford and London, 2 vols. 1861. (Sub- 
sequent editions have been issued, but without, it is 
believed, material alteration.) 

Kautzsch= 2. Kautzsch, Grammatik des Biblisch-Arama- 
ischen. Leipzig, 1884. 

Keim = Theodor Keim, Geschichte Jesu von Nazara τι. 5. w. 
8 vols. Ziirich, 1867-1872. 

Klotz ad Devar. = Matthaeus Devarius, Liber de Graecae 
Linguae Particulis, ed. R. Klotz, Lips., vol. i. 1835, vol. 
li. sect. 1, 1840, vol. ii. sect. 2, 1842. 

Krebs, Observv. = J. T. Krebsii Observationes in Nov. Test. 
e Flavio Josepho Lips. 1755. 

Kriiger = K. W. Kriiger, Griechische Sprachlehre fiir Schu- 
len. Fourth improved and enlarged edition, 1861 sq. 
Kypke, Observv.= ὦ. D. Kypke, Observationes sacrae in 
Novi Foederis libros ex auctoribus potissimum Graecis et 

antiquitatibus. 2 vols. Wratisl. 1755. 

L. and S.= Liddell and Scott, Greek-English Lexicon ete. 
Seventh edition, 1883. 

Lob. ad Phryn., see Phryn. ed. Lob. 

Loesner = C. F. Loesneri Observationes ad Novum Test. e 
Philone Alexandrino. Lips. 1777. 

Lghtft.= Dr. John Lightfoot, the learned Hebraist of the 
17th century. 

Bp. Lghtft. = J. B. Lightfoot, D.D., Bishop of Durham; tae 
8th edition of his commentary on the Epistle to the Gala 
tians is the one referred to, the 7th edition of his com- 
mentary on Philippians, the 7th edition of his commen- 
tary on Colossians and Philemon. 

Lipsius = K. H. A. Lipsius, Grammatische Untersuchungen 
iiber die Biblische Griicitiit (edited by Prof. R. A. Lip- 
sius, the author’s son). Leipzig, 1863. 

Matthiae = August Matthda, Ausfiihrlich Griechische Gram- 
matik. Third edition, 3 Pts., Leipz. 1835. 


xVI 


List or Books, 


McC. and S.= McClintock and Strong's Cyclopedia of 
Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical Literature. 10 
vols. 1867-1881; with Supplement, vol. i. (1885), vol. ii. 
with Addenda (1887). New York : Harper and Brothers. 

Meisterhans = K. Me/sterhans, Grammatik der <Attischen 
Inschriften. Berlin, 1885. (2d edition, 1888.) 

Mullach= F. W. A. Mullach, Grammatik der Griechischen 
Vulgarsprache ἃ. 5. w. Berlin, 1856. 

Munthe= C. Δ΄. Munthe, Observationes philolog. in sacros 
Noy. Test. libros ex Diod. Sic. collectae etc. (Hafn. et 
Lips. 1755.) 

Palairet = 2. Palairet, Observationes philol.-crit. in sacros 
Novi Foederis libros ete. Lugd. Bat. 1752. 

Pape= W Pape, Griechisch-Deutsches Handwirterbuch. 
Second edition. 2 vols. Brunswick, 1866. A continuation 
of the preceding work is the “ Wérterbuch der Griechi- 
schen Eigennamen.” Third edition, edited by G. E. Ben- 
seler. 1863-1870. : 

Passow = Franz Passow’s Handworterbuch der Griechischen 
Sprache as re-edited by Rost, Palm, and others. Leipz. 
1841-1857. 

Phryn. ed. Lob.=Phrynichi Eclogae Nominum et Verbo- 
rum Atticorum etc. as edited by C. A. Lobeck. Leipzig, 
1820. (Cf. Rutherford.) 

Poll. = Pollux (see List of Ancient Authors, ete.) The 
edition used is that published at Amsterdam, 1 vol. folio, 
1706. (The most serviceable is that of William Dindorf, 
5 vols. 8vo, Leipzig, 1824.) 

Pss. of Sol.= Psalter of Solomon; see List of Ancient 
Authors, ete. 

Raphel= G. Raphelii annotationes in Sacram Scripturam 
...ex Xen., Polyb., Arrian., et Herodoto collectae. 2 
vols. Lugd. Bat. 1747. 

Riddell, Platonic Idioms= A Digest of Idioms given as an 
Appendix to “ The Apology of Plato” as edited by the 
Rey. James Riddell, M. A.; Oxford, 1867. 

Riehm (or Riehkm, HWB.) = Handworterbuch des Biblischen 
Altertums u.s.w. edited by Professor Edward C. A. 
Riehm in nineteen parts (2 vols.) 1875-1884. 

Rutherford, New Phryn.=The New Phrynichus, being a 
revised text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phryni- 
chus, ete., by W. Gunion Rutherford. London, 1881. 

Schaff-Herzog =A Religious Encyclopedia etc. by Philip 
Schaff and associates. 3 vols. 1882-1884. Funk and 
Wagnalls, New York. Revised edition, 1887. 

Schenkel (or Schenkel, BL.) = Bibel-Lexikon u. 5. w. edited 
by Professor Daniel Schenkel. 5 vols. Leipz. 1869-1875. 

Schmidt = J. H. Heinrich Schmidt, Synonymik der Griechi- 
schen Sprache. 4 vols. Leipz. 1876, 1878, 1879, 1886. 

Schéttgen = Christiani Schoettgenii Horae Hebraicae et Tal- 
mudicae ete. 2vols. Dresden and Leipzig, 1733, 1742. 

Schiirer = Emil Schiirer, Lehrbuch der Neutestamentlichen 
Zeitgeschichte. Leipzig, 1874. The “Second Part” of a 
new and revised edition has already appeared under the 
title of Geschichte des Jiidischen Volkes im Zeitalter 
Jesu Christi, and to this new edition (for the portion of 
the original work which it covers) the references have 
been made, although for convenience the title of the 
first edition has been retained. An English translation 
is appearing at Edinburgh (T. and T. Clark). 

Scrivener, F. H. A.:— A Plain Introduction to the Criticism 
of the New Testament etc. Third Edition. Cambridge 
and London, 1883. 


List oF Books. 


Bezae Codex Cantabrigiensis ete. Cambridge and 
London, 1864. 3 

A Full Collation of the Codex Sinaiticus with the 
Received Text of the New Testament etc. Second 
Edition, Revised. Cambridge and London, 1867. 

Six Lectures on the Text of the New Testament etc. 
Cambridge and London, 1875. 

Sept.—the translation of the Old Testament into Greek 
known as the Septuagint. Unless otherwise stated, the 
sixth edition of Tischendorf’s text (edited by Nestle) is 
referred to ; 2 vols. (with supplement), Leipzig, 1880. The 
double verse-notation occasionally given in the Apocry- 
phal books has reference to the edition of the Apocrypha 
and select Pseudepigrapha by O. F. Fritzsche; Leipzig, 
1871. Readings peculiar to the Complutensian, Aldine, 
Vatican, or Alexandrian form of the text are marked 
respectively by an appended Comp., Ald., Vat., Alex. 
For the first two the testimony of the edition of Lam- 
bert Bos, Franck. 1709, has been relied on. 

The abbreviations Aq., Symm., Theod. or Theodot., 
appended to a reference to the O. T. denote respectively 
the Greek versions ascribed to Aquila, Symmachus, and 
Theodotion ; see List of Ancient Authors, etc. 

“Lag.” designates the text as edited by Paul Lagarde, 
of which the first half appeared at Gottingen in 1883. 

Soph. = EL. A. Sophocles, Greek Lexicon of the Roman and 
Byzantine Periods (from B.c. 146 to a.p. 1100.) | Bos- 
ton: Little, Brown & Co. 1870. The forerunner (once 
or twice referred to) of the above work bears the title 
“A Glossary of Later and Byzantine Greek. Forming 
vol. vii. (new series) of the Memoirs of the American 
Academy.” Cambridge, 1860. 

Steph. Thes. =the “ Thesaurus Graecae Linguae” of Henry 
Stephen as edited by Hase and the Dindorfs. 8 vois. 
Paris, 1831-1865. Occasionally the London (Valpy’s) 
edition (1816-1826) of the same work has been referred 
to. 


Snid. = Snidas (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford’s 
edition (2 vols. folio, Oxford, 1834) has been followed. 
‘Teaching ’=The Teaching of the Twelve Apostles (Ac 

bax} τῶν δώδεκα ἀποστόλων.) The edition of Harnack 


XVII 


List oF Books. 


(in Gebhardt and Harnack’s Texte und Untersuchungen 
us.w. Second vol., Pts. i. and ii., Leipzig 1884) has 
been followed, together with his division of the chapters 
into verses. 

Thiersch= Friedrich Thiersch, Griechische Grammatik ἃ, 8. w. 
Third edition. Leipzig, 1826. 

Trench= Abp. R. C. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testa- 
ment. Ninth edition, improved. London, 1880. 

Vanitéek = Alois Vaniéek, Griechisch-Lateinisches Etymolo- 
gisches Worterbuch. 2 vols. Leipz. 1877. 

By the same author is “‘ Fremdworter im Griechischen 
und Lateinischen.” Leipzig, 1878. 

Veitch = William Veitch, Greek Verbs irregular and de- 
fective, etc. New Edition. Oxford, 1879. 

Vig. ed. Herm.= Vigeri de praecipuis Graecae dictionis 
Idiotismis. Edited by G. Hermann. Fourth edition. 
Leipzig, 1834. A meagre abridgment and translation by 
Rey. John Seager was published at London in 1828. 

Vulg.—= the translation into Latin known as the Vulgate. 
Professor Tischendorf’s edition (Leipzig, 1864) has been 
followed. 

Wetst. or Wetstein=J. J. Wetstein’s Novum Testamen- 
tum Graecum ete. 2vols. folio. Amsterdam, 1751, 1752. 

W.= G. B. Winer, Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testa- 
ment etc. Revised and Authorized Translation of the 
seventh (German) edition of the original, edited by Liine- 
mann; Andover, 1883. Unless otherwise indicated, it is 
referred to by pages, the corresponding page of the orig- 
inal being added in a parenthesis. When Dr. Moulton’s 
translation of the sixth German edition is referred to, 
that fact is stated. 

Win. RWB.=G. B. Winer, Biblisches Realworterbuch 
us.w. Third edition. 2 vols., Leipzig and New York, 
1849, 

Win. De verb. Comp. ete. = G. B. Winer, De verborum 
cum praepositionibus compositerum in Novo Testamente 
usu. Five academic programs; Leipzig, "848. 


Other titles, it 1s believed, are so fully given as to be easily 
verifiable. 


EXPLANATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 


As respects Punctuation —it should be noticed, that 
since only those verbal forms (or their representatives) are 
given in the Lexicon which actually occur in the Greek 
Testament, it becomes necessary to distinguish between a 
form of the Present Tense which is in use, and one which 
is given merely to secure for a verb its place in the alphabet. 
This is done by putting a semi-colon after a Present which 
actually occurs, aud a colon after a Present which is a 
mere alphabetic locum tenens. 

Further: a punctuation-mark inserted before a classic 
voucher or a reference to the Old Testament (whether such 
voucher or reference be included in a parenthesis or not) 
indicates that said voucher or reference applies to other 
passages, definitions, ete., besides the one which it imme- 
diately follows. The same principle governs the insertion 
or the omission of a comma after such abbreviations as 
“absol.”, “ pass.”, etc. 

A hyphen has been placed between the component parts 
of Greek compounds only in case each separate part is in 
actual use; otherwise the hyphen is omitted. 


[1 Brackets have been used to mark additions by the Amer- 
ican editor. To avoid, however, a complexity which 
might prove to the reader confusing, they have been 
occasionally dispensed with when the editorial additions 
serve only to complete a statement already made in part 
by Professor Grimm (as, in enumerating the forms of 
verbs, the readings of the critical editors, the verbs com- 
pounded with σύν which observe assimilation, etc. etc.) ; 
but in no instance have they been intentionally omitted 
where the omission might seem to attribute to Professor 
Grimm an opinion for which he is not responsible. 


= An asterisk at the close of an article indicates that all the 
instances of the word’s occurrence in the New Testament 
are noticed in the article. Of the 5594 words composing 
the vocabulary of the New Testament 5300 are marked 
with an asterisk. To this extent, therefore, the present 
work may serve as a concordance as well as a lexicon 


A superior * or» or 5 etc. appended to a verse-numeral 
designates the first, second, third, etc., occurrence of a given 
word or construction in that verse. The same letters ap- 
pended to a page-numeral designate respectively the first, 
second, third, columns of that page. A small a. Ὁ. c. ete. 
after a page-numeral designates the subdivision of the page. 


The various forms of the GREEK Text referred to are 
represented by the following abbreviations : 

R or Rec. = what is commonly known as the Textus Recep- 
tus. Dr. F. H. A. Scrivener’s last edition (Cambridge 
and London 1877) has been taken as the standard To 
designate a particular form of this “ Protean text” an 
abbreviation has been appended in superior type; as, ™ 
for Elzevir, * for Stephen, >* for Beza, ¢™s for Erasmus. 

G or Grsb. = the Greek text of Griesbach as given in his 
manual edition, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1805. Owing to a dis- 
regard of the signs by which Griesbach indicated his 
judgment respecting the various degrees of probability 
belonging to different readings, he is cited not infre- 
quently, even in critical works, as supporting readings 
which he expressly questioned, but was not quite ready 
to expel from the text. 

L or Lchm. = Lachmann’s Greek text as given in his larger 
edition, 2 vols., Berlin, 1842 and 1850. When the text 
of his smaller or stereotyped edition (Berlin, 1831,) is re- 
ferred to, the abbreviation “ min.” or “ ster.” is added to 
his initial. 

T or Tdf.=the text of Tischendorf’s “Editio Octava 
Critica Major” (Leipzig, 1869-1872). 

Tr or Treg. =“ The Greek New Testament” ete. by S. P. 
Tregelles (London, 1857-1879). 

WH=“ The New Testament in the Original Greek. The 
Text Revised by Brooke Foss Westcott D.D. and Fen- 
ton John Anthony Hort D.D. Cambridge and London, 
Macmillan and Co. 1881.” 

KC=“Novum Testamentum ad Fidem Codicis Vaticani” 
as edited by Professors Kuenen and Cobet (Leyden, 
1860). 

The textual variations noticed are of course mainly those 
which affect the individual word or construction under dis- 
cussion. Where an extended passage or entire section is 
textually debatable (as, for example, Mk. xvi. 9-20; Jn. v. 
8 fin-4; vii. 53 fin. —vili. 11), that fact is assumed to be 
known, or at least it is not stated under every word contained 
in the passage. 


As respects the NUMBERING OF THE VERSES — the edition 
of Robert Stephen, in 2 vols. 16°, Geneva 1551, has been 


1 Respecting the edition issued by the Bible Society, which was 
followed by Professor Grimm, see Carl Bertheau in the ‘Iheolo- 
gische Literaturzeitung for 1877, No. 5, pp. 103-106. 


EXPLANATIONS AND 


followed as the standard (as it is in the critical editions of 
Tregelles, Westcott and Hort, etc.). Variations from this 
standard are indicated by subjoining the variant verse-nu- 
meral within marks of parenthesis. The similar addition 
in the case of references to the Old Testament indicates the 
variation between the Hebrew notation and the Greek. 


Tn quotations from the ΕΝ ΘΤ ΒΗ BrsLE— 
A. V.= the current or so-called “‘ Authorized Version ἢ 
R. V.=the Revised New Testament of 1881. But when a 
rendering is ascribed to the former version it may be 
assumed to be retained also in the latter, unless the con- 
trary be expressly stated. A translation preceded by 
R. V.is found in the Revision only. 


A. S. = Anglo-Saxon. 

Abp. = Archbishop. 

absol. = absolutely. 

acc. or accus. = accusative. 

ace. to = according to. 

ad 1. or ad loc. =at or on the passage. 

al. = others or elsewhere. 

al. al. =others otherwise. 

Ald. =the Aldine text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List 
of Books). 

Alex. =the Alexandrian text of the Septuagint (see Sept. 
in List of Books). 

ap. = (quoted) in 

App. = Appendix. 

appos. = apposition. 

Aq.= Aquila (see Sept. in List of Books). 

art. = article. 

augm. =augment. 

auth. or author. = author or authorities. 

B. or Bttm. see List of Books. 

B. D. or BB. DD. see List of Books. 

betw. = between. 

Bibl. = Biblical. 

Bp. = Bishop. 

br. =brackets or enclose in brackets. 

c. before a date =abont. 

Cantabr. = Cambridge. 

cf. =compare. 


ch. = chapter. 
6]. =clause. 
cod., codd. = manuscript, manuscripts. 


Com., Comm.=commentary, commentaries. 

comp. = compound, compounded, ete. 

compar. = comparative. 

Comp. or Compl. =the Complutensian text of the Septua- 
gint (see Sept. in List of Books). 

contr. = contracted, contract. 

dim. or dimin. = diminutive. 

dir. disc. =direct discourse. 

e. g. = for example. 

esp. = especially. 


ΧΙΧ 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


eX., exx. =example, examples. 

exc. = except. 

excrpt.—=an excerpt or extract. 

fin. or ad fin. =at or near the end. 

G or Grsb. = Griesbach’s Greek text (see above). 

Graec. Ven. = Graecus Venetus (see List of Books). 

i. e. = that is. 

ib. or ibid.=in the same place. 

indir. disc. = indirect discourse. 

init. or ad init.—at or near the beginning. 

in 1. or in loc. = in or on the passage. 

i. q- =the same as, or equivalent to. 

KC= Kuenen and Cobet’s edition of the Vatican text (see 
above). 

L or Lchm. = Lachmann’s Greek text (see above). 

L. and S. = Liddell and Scott (see List of Books). 

1, or lib.= book. 

1.c., ll. cc. passage cited, passages cited. 

Lag.=Lagarde’s edition of the Septuagint (see Sept. in 
List of Books). 

mrg.—the marginal reading (of a critical edition of the 
Greek Testament). 

Opp. = Works. 

opp. to= opposed to. 

paral. =the parallel accounts (in the Synoptic aay 

Pt. or pt. = part. 

6. V. = which see. 

R or Rec. = the common Greek text (see above). 

r.= root. 

rel. or relat. = relative. 


Skr. = Sanskrit. 

586.» 546. = following. 

Steph. = Stephanus’s Thesaurus (see List of Books). 

Stud. u. Krit.=the Studien und Kritiken, a leading Ger. 
man Theological Quarterly. 

8. V.=under the word. 

Symm.= Symmachus, translator of the Old Testament into 
Greek (see Sept. in the List of Books). 

T or Tdf. = Tischendorf’s Greek text (see above). 

Theod. or Theodot. = Theodotion (see Sept. in the List of 
Books). 

Tr or Treg. = Tregelles’s Greek text (see above). 

τι. i.=as below. 

τι. 5. =as above. 

- =see. 

var. = variant or variants (various readings). 

Vat.=the Vatican Greek text (see above, and Sept. in the 
List of Books). 

Vulg.=the Vulgate (see List of Books). 

w.=with (especially before abbreviated names of cases). 

writ. = writer, writers, writings. 

WH= Westcott and Hort’s Greek text (see above). 


Other abbreviations will, it is hoped, explain themselves. 


a vj) Yr 
Ara) ag! = eth, οι me! 


δ". 
ΠΝ { 
ΠῚ 8 «ἢ 
: F 
| @Ay 


ὙΠ ΥᾺ eh, i ἊΝ gia 
‘ Ad Bes aye ΚΝ as karly 
τὰ 
Pi e) Ὁ Pe μ᾽. ἐκ γῇ 
a gn ke ΩΝ 
| coe ae 3 -1ie a ἐλ ποδὶ 
abel) ἣν, δι a ιν 


5 ai Ae ne ee νιον i ΣΝ 
16 ΡΟΝ ae. \ poral nu el A) ἦι 


aids ὶ We) 
his 4 EAN ah ti τὴ aA ic? Re eee 
' Fae ta aves >) eae ᾿ aby ᾿ 


7 i raul ee ρον teat q 
: αν ΤᾺ δ» Me. ed. ᾿ Cogn 0,471 a he ΦΩ͂ 


ΝΣ ΠῚ ἢ ον μία αν ῦ Wes a Oe ee if 


᾿ ea Typ eae eee: ΡΝ 
ιν. -δεϊε μι © 2 Ἂι oe, ΝΥ Ἢ fy A a 
‘ oo 441 a eee ae. A A alee Ts 
é @ 2 4! “ἃ: 7. ¥ 
wr “ae ἀ ΩΝ hegre % 
nyo ἐμ ἘΝ ὁ Axe Er 7 ; 
‘or ὧν Ὁ ¢ eu 7 ΓΟ ἌΝ ay te μΝ 
ai ὡς " " ᾿ nf Νὰ el Ὕ ΨΩ aE tag iad i 
Re RIES | on 3 PCY Fin et μο 
7 ΒΕ ᾿ εὖ 
ye ie see eile ie i anaes εἰν, 
m+) τ' ΝΙΝ 1 ad Tia myers = 
a6 “iy RYE: be “Wane yas ee 
I δ ἫΝ τ; Γν ΠΣ eee! nb ima ad Vi 
Me es 7 δ ah “ph pak wre 
oni |. ἜΣ ae ἡ sh Lalas Mace hs ke 
νυν}. AA ie ky 1d A Wa geal ἃ 
4 ‘sate tang” ae LAS eh ah hy ΝΥΝ 
ν ijagty a ” a, Aig Vee! μεν ν af 06} 
a, 4 aye Ο j ἯΙ eC ae ‘ 
Ee le Epo 
ἡ eg) Pa ΕΟ ἐν 
i) atm Lae To ΩΣ Ἵ 
Jo ἊΨ ι "» f Ms fi Witla 4A 
Py τ 4.5. 4 og may? ia ‘US eet 
"Διὶ fittest τω Mee ¢ ἄν" ῥ ih Cogan 8. ν.- “Ὁ. ᾿ ; . 
Ν ᾿ radi VD) νὰ Με 
ἣ δ wi ἡ τῶ We) Stee a9 oe ἸΝ Oy meh a 
1) φοάυ (9 4 SG ter. ει ὟΝ vis 0h ἣν oe 3 4 ἱ 
γ sie: νυ ἐν ἡ. γε ied ue 
“ Pr 649) τ Δ ΘΝ i 
; Δ. λα τ ἐκ tintin 
t har a a par at ey ΒΝ ' ἪΝ aly 
Ai Mo ‘ 
> (hi ἐ 
ι y ᾿ i ᾿ 
4 i] Wy ᾿ ia { 


NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON. 


A 


A a, ἄλφα 


A, a, ἄλφα, τό, the first letter of the Greek alphabet, 
opening the series which the letter ὦ closes. Hence the 
expression ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ A [LT Tr WH adda] καὶ τὸ Ὡ 
,2 LWH], Rev. 1. 8, 11 Rec., which is explained by the 
appended words ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος, Xxi. 6, and by the 
further addition ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος, xxii. 13. On 
the meaning of the phrase ef. Rev. xi. 17; Is. xli. 4; 
xliv. 6; xlviii. 12; [esp. B. D. Am. ed. p. 73]. A, 
when prefixed to words as an inseparable syllable, is 
1. privative (στερητικόν), like the Lat. in-, the Eng. 
un-, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is 
prefixed, as ἀβαρής ; or signifying what is contrary te it, 
as ἄτιμος, ἀτιμόω ; before vowels generally av-, as ἀναίτιος. 
2. copulative (ἀθροιστικόν), akin to the particle ἅμα 
{ef. Curtius § 598], indicating community and fellow- 
ship, as in adeAdds, ἀκόλουθος. Hence it is 3. in- 
tensive (ἐπιτατικόν); strengthening the force of terms, 
like the Lat. con in composition; as ἀτενίζω fr. ἀτενής 
[yet cf. W.100(95)]. This use, however, is doubted or 
denied now by many [e. g. Lob. Path. Element. i. 34 
sq-]. Cf. Kiihner i. 741, § 339 Anm. 5; [Jelf § 3425]; 
Bitm. Gram. § 120 Anm. 11; [Donaldson, Gram. p.334; 
New Crat. §§ 185, 213; L. and S.s. v.].* 

᾿Ααρών, indecl. prop. name (6 ᾿Ααρών, -ὥνος in Joseph.), 
JOS (fr. the unused Hebr. radical TON, — Syr. pac” 
libidinosus, lascivus, —[enlightened, Fiirst; ace. to Die- 
trich wealthy, or fluent, like 12)8], ace. to Philo, de 
ebriet. § 32, fr. ὙΠ mountain and equiv. to dpewds), Aaron, 
the brother of Moses, the first high-priest of the Israel- 
ites and the head of the whole sacerdotal order: Lk. i. 5; 
Acts vii. 40; Heb. ν. 4: vii. 11; ix. 4." 

᾿Αβαδδών, indecl., 11728, 1. ruin, destruction, (fr. 
38 to perish), Job xxxi. 12. 2. the place of destruc- 
tion i.q. Orcus, joined with Sinw, Job xxvi. 6; Proy. 
xv. 11. 3. as a proper name it is given to the an- 
gel-prince of the infernal regions, the minister of death 
and author of havoe on earth, and is rendered in Greek 
by ᾿Απολλύων Destroyer, Rev. ix. 11.* 


᾿Αβιάθαρ 


ἀβαρής, -és, (βάρος weight), without weight, light; trop. 
not burdensome: ἀβαρῇ ὑμῖν ἐμαυτὸν ἐτήρησα I have 
avoided burdening you with expense on my account, 
2 Co. xi. 9; see 1 Th. ii. 9, cf. 6. (Fr. Aristot. down.)* 

᾿Αββὰ [WH -βά], Hebr. 28 father, in the Chald. em- 
phatic state, 838 i. e. ὁ πατήρ, a customary title of God in 
prayer. Whenever it occurs in the N. T. (Mk. xiv. 36; 
Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6) it has the Greek interpretation 
subjoined to it; this is apparently to be explained by 
the fact that the Chaldee 83s, through frequent use in 
prayer, gradually acquired the nature of a most sacred 
proper name, to which the Greek-speaking Jews added 
the appellative from their own tongue.* 

"ABA [WH ἽΑβ. (see their Intr. § 408)], indecl. prop. 
name (in Joseph. [e. g. antt. 1, 2, 1] “ABeNos, -ov), 927 
(breath, vanity), Abel, the second son born to Adam 
(Gen. iv. 2 sqq.), so called from his short life and sudden 
death [cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 5], (Job vii. 16; Ps. xxxix. 
6): Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; Heb. xi. 4; xii. 24.* 

*ABid, indecl. prop. name (Joseph. antt. 7, 10, 3; 8, 
10, 1 6 ASias [W. § 6,1 m.], -α), 7238 and 338 (my 
father is Jehovah), Abia [or Abijah, cf. B. Ὁ. s.v.], 
1. aking of Judah, son of Rehoboam: Mt. i. 7 (1 K. xiv. 
Sl weve!) > 2. a priest, the head of a sacerdotal 
family, from whom, when David divided the priests into 
twenty-four classes (1 Chr. xxiv. 10), the class Abia, 
the eighth in order, took its name: Lk. i. 5.* 

᾿Αβιάθαρ, indecl. prop. name (though in Joseph. antt. 
6, 14, 6 ᾿Αβιάθαρος, -ov), ὙΠ (father of abundance), 
Abiathar, a certain Hebrew high-priest: Mk. ii. 26,— 
where he is by mistake confounded with Ahimelech his 
father (1 S. xxi. 1 sqq.); [yet cf. 1 S. xxii. 20 with 1 
Chr. xviii. 16; xxiv. 6, 31; also 2 S. xv. 24-29; 1 Καὶ. 11. 
26, 27 with 2 S. viii. 17; 1 Chr. xxiv. 6, 31. It would 
seem that double names were esp. common in the case 
of priests (cf. 1 Mace. ii. 1-5; Joseph. vit. §§ 1, 2) 
and that father and son often bore the same name (cf 
Lk. i. 5, 59; Joseph. 1. 6. and antt. 20,9, 1). See Mo 
Clellan ad loc. and B. D. Am. ed. p. 7].* 


᾿Αβιληνὴη 2 


᾿Αβιληνή [WH ᾿Αβειλ. (see 5. v. εἰ }7, -ῆς, η, (SC. χώρα, 
the district belonging to the city Abila), Abilene, the 
name of a region lying between Lebanon and Hermon 
towards Phoenicia, 18 miles distant from Damascus and 
37 [ace. to the Itin. Anton. 38] from Heliopolis: Lk. iii. 
1. Cf. Λυσανίας [and B. D. 5. v.].* 

᾿Αβιούδ, 6, indecl. prop. name, 73728 (father of the 
Jews (al. of glory]), Abiud, son of Zorobabel or Zerub- 
babel: Mt. i. 13.* 

*ABpadp [Rec*t ‘ABp.; cf. Τά. Proleg. p.106] (Joseph. 
"ABpapos, -ov), D138 (father of a multitude, cf. Gen. 
xvii. 5), Abraham, the renowned founder of the Jewish 
nation: Mt. i. 1 sq.; xxii. 32; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. viii. 33; 
Acts iii. 25; Heb. vii. 1 sqq., andelsewhere. He is ex- 
tolled by the apostle Paulas a pattern of faith, Ro. iv. 1 
844. 17 sqq-; Gal. iii. 6 (cf. Heb. xi. 8), on which account 
all believers in Christ have a claim to the title sons or 
posterity of Abraham, Gal. iii. 7, 29; cf. Ro. iv. 11. 

ἄβυσσος, in classic Greek an ad/j., -os, τον, (fr. 6 βυσσός 
i. q. βυθός), bottomless (so perhaps in Sap. x. 19), un- 
bounded (πλοῦτος ἄβυσσος, Aeschyl. Sept. (931) 950). 
In the Scriptures ἡ ἄβυσσος (Sept. for DITA) se. χώρα, the 
pit, the immeasurable depth, the abyss. Hence of ‘the 
deep’ sea: Gen. i. 2; vii. 11; Deut. viii. 7; Sir. i. 3; 
xvi. 18, ete.; of Orcus (a very deep gulf or chasm in the 
lowest parts of the earth: Ps. xx. (1xxi.) 21 ἐκ τῶν ἀβύσ- 
coy τῆς γῆς, Eur. Phoen. 1632 (1605) raprapov ἄβυσσα 
χάσματα, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 5 ἀβύσσων ἀνεξιχνίαστα 
κλίματα, ibid. 59, 3 6 ἐπιβλέπων ἐν ταῖς ἀβύσσοις, of God; 
[Act. Thom. 32 ὁ τὴν ἄβυσσον τοῦ ταρτάρου οἰκῶν, of the 
ἀγασοη 7), both as the common receptacle of the dead, 
Ro. x. 7, and especially as the abode of demons, Lk. viii. 
31; Rev. ix. 1 sq. 11; xi. 7; xvii.8;xx.1,3. Among prof. 
auth. used as a subst. only by Diog. Laért. 4, (5,) 27 κατῆλ- 
es εἰς μέλαιναν Πλουτέως ἄβυσσον. Cf. Knapp, Scripta 
var. Arg. p.554 sq.; [J. G. Miiller, Philo’s Lehre von der 
Weltschépfung, p. 173 sq.; B. D. Am. ed. 5. v. Deep].” 

“AyaBos(on the breathing see WH. Intr. § 408], -ου, ὁ, 
the name of a Christian prophet, Agabus: Acts xi. 28; 
xxi. 10. (Perhaps from 23p to love [ef. B. Ὁ. 8. v.].)* 

ἀγαθοεργέω, -@; (fr. the unused ἘΡΓῺ — equiv. to 
ἔρδω, ἐργάζομαι ---- and ἀγαθόν); to be ἀγαθοεργός, benefi- 
cent (towards the poor, the needy): 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. 
do good}. Cf. ἀγαθουργέω. Found besides only in 600]. 
writ., but in the sense to do well, act rightly.* 

ἀγαθο-ποιέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ; (fr. dyabo- 
ποιός) 5 1. to do good, do something which profits 
others: Mk. iii. 4 [Tdf. ἀγαθὸν ποιῆσαι; Lk. vi. 9]; to 
show one’s self beneficent, Acts xiv. 17 Rec.; τινά, to do 
some one a favor, io benefit, Lk. vi. 33, 35, (equiv. to 
207, Zeph.i.12; Num. x. 32; Tob. xii. 13, etc.). 2 
to do well, do right: 1 Pet. ii. 15, 20 (opp. to ἁμαρτάνω) ; 
iii. 6,17; 3 Jn. 11. (Not found in secular authors, ex- 
cept in a few of the later in an astrological sense, to 
Furnish a good omen.)* 

ἀγαθοποιΐα [WH -ποιία (see I,e)], -as, ἡ, @ course of 
right action, well-doing: ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ, 1 Pet. iv. 19 1. q. 
ἀγαθοποιοῦντες acting uprightly (ef. xii. Patr. Jos. ὃ 18]; 


ἀγαθὸς 


if we read here with L Tr mre. ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐαις we must 
understand it of single acts of rectitude [ef. W. § 27, 3; 
B. § 123, 2]. (In ecel. writ. ἀγαθοπ. denotes benefi- 
cence.)* 

ἀγαθοποιός, -dv, acting rightly, doing well: 1 Pet. ii. 14. 
(Sir. xlii. 14; Plut. de Is. et Osir. § 42.]* 

ἀγαθός, -7, -όν, (akin to ἄγαμαι to wonder at, think 
highly of, ἀγαστός admirable, as explained by Plato, 
Crat. p. 412 ο. [al. al.; ef. Donaldson, New Crat. § 8287), 
in general denotes “ perfectus, . . . qui habet in se ac 
facit omnia quae habere et facere debet pro notione 
nominis, oflicio ac lege” (Irmisch ad Hdian. 1, 4, p. 
134), excelling in any respect, distinguished, good. It 
can be predicated of persons, things, conditions, quali- 
ties and affections of the soul, deeds, times and sea- 
sons. To this general signif. can be traced back all 
those senses which the word gathers fr. the connec- 
tion in which it stands; 1. of a good constitution or 
nature: γῆ, Lk. viii. 8; δένδρον, Mt. vii. 18, in sense 
equiv. to ‘fertile soil,’ ‘a fruitful tree,’ (Xen. oec. 16, 7 
γῆ ἀγαθή, . . . γῆ κακή, an. 2, 4, 22 χώρας πολλῆς kK. ἀγαθῆς 
οὔσης). In Lk. viii. 15 ἀγαθὴ καρδία corresponds to the 
fig. expression “good ground”, and denotes a soul in- 
clined to goodness, and accordingly eager to learn sav- 
ing truth and ready to bear the fruits (καρποὺς ἀγαθούς, 
Jas. iii. 17) of a Christian life. 2. useful, salutary: 
δόσις ἀγαθή (joined to δώρημα τέλειον) a gift which is 
truly a gift, salutary, Jas. i. 17; δόματα ἀγαθά, Mt. vii. 
115 ἐντολὴ ay. a commandment profitable to those who 
keep it, Ro. vii. 12, ace. to a Grk. scholium equiv. to εἰς 
τὸ συμφέρον εἰσηγουμένη, hence the question in vs. 13: τὸ 
οὖν ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ γέγονε θάνατος; ay. μερίς the ‘good 
part,’ which insures salvation to him who chooses it, 
Lk. x. 425 ἔργον ay. (differently in Ro. ii. 7, ete.) the 
saving work of God, i. e. substantially, the Christian 
life, due to divine efficiency, Phil. i. 6 [ef. the Comm. 
ad loc.]; εἰς ἀγαθόν for good, to advantage, Ro. viii. 28 
(Sir. vii. 13; πάντα τοῖς εὐσεβέσι εἰς ἀγαθά, ... τοῖς duap- 
τωλοῖς εἰς κακά, Sir. XXXix. 27; τὸ κακὸν . «. « γίγνεται εἰς 
ἀγαθόν, Theognis 162); good for, suited to something : 
πρὸς οἰκοδομήν, Eph. iv. 29 [ef. W. 363 (340)] (Xen. 
mem.4,6,10). 3. of the feeling awakened by what is 
good, pleasant, agreeable, joyful, happy: ἡμέραι ay. 1 Pet. 
iii. 10 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Sir. xiv. 14; 1 Mace. 
x. 55); ἐλπίς, 2 Th. ii. 16 (μακαρία ἐλπίς, ΤΙΣ. ii. 13) ; 
συνείδησις, a peaceful conscience, i. q. consciousness of 
rectitude, Acts xxiii. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5,19; 1 Pet. iii. 15; 
reconciled to God, vs. 21. 4. excellent, distinguished : 
so τὶ ἀγαθόν, Jn. i. 46 (47). 5. upright, honorable : 
Mt. xii. 34; xix.16; Lk. vi. 45; Acts xi. 24; 1 Pet. iii. 
11, etc.; πονηροὶ x. ἀγαθοί, Mt. ν. 45; xxii. 10; dyad. καὶ 
δίκαιος, Lk. xxiii. 50; καρδία ἀγαθὴ x. καλή, Lk. viii. 15 
(see καλός, b.); fulfilling the duty or service demanded, 
δοῦλε ἀγαθὲ x. moré, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; upright, free 
from guile, particularly from a desire to corrupt the 
people, Jn. vii. 12; pre-eminently of God, as consum- 
mately and essentially good, Mt. xix. 17 (Mk. x. 18; 
Lk. xviii. 19) ; dy. θησαυρός in Mt. xii. 35; Lk. vi. 45 


ἀγαθουργέω 


denotes the soul considered as the repository of pure 
thoughts which are brought forth in speech; πίστις dy. 
the fidelity due from a servant to his master, Tit. ii. 10 
(WH mrg. om.]; on dyad. ἔργον, ay. ἔργα, see ἔργον. 
In a narrower sense, benevolent, kind, generous: Mt. 
xx. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 18; μνεία, 1 Th. iii. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii. 
20) ; beneficent (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 4; 210, Jer. xxxiii. 11; 
Ps. xxxiv. 9; Cic. nat. deor. 2, 25, 64 “optimus i. e. 
beneficentissimus”), Ro. v. 7, where the meaning is, 
Hardly for an innocent man does one encounter death; 
for if he even dares hazard his life for another, he does 
so for a benefactor (one from whom he has received 
favors); cf. W. 117 (111); [Gifford in the Speaker’s 
Com. p. 123]. The neuter used substantively de- 
notes 1. a good thing, convenience, advantage, and 
in partic. a. in the plur., external goods, riches: Lk. i. 
53; xii. 18 sq. (Sir. xiv. 4; Sap. vii. 11); τὰ ἀγαθά σου 
comforts and delights which thy wealth procured for 
thee in abundance, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to κακά, as in Sir. 
xi. 14); outward and inward good things, Gal. vi. 6, cf. 
Wieseler ad loc. b. the benefits of the Messianic king- 
dom: Ro. x. 15; τὰ μέλλοντα dy. Heb. ix. 11; x. 1. 2. 
what is upright, honorable, and acceptable to God: Ro. 
xii. 25 ἐργάζεσθαι τὸ dy. Ro. ii. 10; Eph. iv. 28; πράσσειν, 
Ro. ix. 11; [2 Co. v.10]; διώκειν, 1 Th. v. 15; μιμεῖ- 
σθαι, 3 In. 11; κολλᾶσθαι τῷ ay. Ro. xii. 9; τί με ἐρωτᾷς 
περὶ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ, Mt. xix. 17 G L T Tr WH, where the 
word expresses the general idea of right. Spec., what 
is salutary, suited to the course of human affairs: in the 
phrase διάκονος εἰς τὸ dy. Ro. xiii, 4; of rendering ser- 
vice, Gal. vi. 10; Ro. xii. 21; τὸ dy. cov the favor thou 
conferrest, Philem. 14. 

[“ It is to be regarded as a peculiarity in the usage of the 
Sept. that 210 good is predominantly [1] rendered by καλός. 
... The translator of Gen. uses ἀγαθός only in the neut., 
good, goods, and this has been to a degree the model for the 
other translators. ... In the Greek Ὁ. T., where οἱ δίκαιοι is 
the technical designation of the pious, of ἀγαθοί or 6 ἀγαθός 
does not occur in so general a sense. The ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός is 
peculiar only to the Prov. (xiii. 22, 24; xv. 3); cf. besides 
the solitary instance in 1 Kings ii.32. Thus even in the usage 
of the O. T. we are reminded of Christ’s words, Mk. x. 18, 
ovtels ἀγαθὺς εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ θεός. In the O. T. the term ‘right- 
eous’ makes reference rather to a covenant and to one’s rela- 
tion to a positive standard ; ἀγαθός would express the abso- 
lute idea of moral goodness” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. 
bibl. Sprachgeist, Leipz. 1859, p. 60). Cf. Tittm. p. 19. On 
the comparison of ἀγαθός see B. 27 (24).] : 

ἀγαθουργέω, -@; Acts xiv. 17 L T Tr WH for R ἀγαθο- 
ποιῶ. ‘The contracted form is the rarer [cf. WH. App. 
p- 145], see ἀγαθοεργέω ; but cf. κακοῦργος, tepoupyéw-* 

ἀγαθωσύνη, -ης, ἡ, [on its formation see W. 95 (90); 
WH. App. p. 152], found only in bibl. and ecel. writ., 
uprightness of heart and life, [A. V. goodness]: 2 Th. i. 
11; Gal. v. 22 (unless here it denote kindness, benefi- 
cence); Ro. xv. 14; Eph. v. 9. [Cf. Trench § lkxiii.; 
Ellic. and Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.]* 

ἀγαλλιάομαι, see ἀγαλλιάω. 

ἀγαλλίασις, -ews, 7, (ἀγαλλιάω), not used by prof. writ. 
but often by the Sept.; erultation, extreme joy: Lk. i. 


ὡς 


ayaTraw 


14, 44; Acts ii. 46; Jude 24. Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliy. 
(xlv.) 8) oil of gladness with which persons were 
anointed at feasts (Ps. xxiii. 5), and which the writer, 
alluding to the inaugural ceremony of anointing, uses 
as an emblem of the divine power and majesty to which 
the Son of God has been exalted.* 

ἀγαλλιάω, -@, and -doua, (but the act. is not used 
exc. in Lk. i. 47 [ἠγαλλίασα], in Rev. xix. 7 [ἀγαλ- 
λιῶμεν] 1, Τ' Tr WH [and in 1 Pet. i. 8 WH Tr mrz. 
(ἀγαλλιᾶτε), cf. WH. App. p. 1097); 1 aor. ἠγαλλιασά- 
μην, and (with a mid. signif.) ἠγαλλιάθην (Jn. v. 35; 
Rec. ἠγαλλιάσθην) ; a word of Hellenistic coinage (fr. 
ἀγάλλομαι to rejoice, glory [yet cf. B. 51 (45)]), often in 
Sept. (for 53, γὴν, 12), wiv). to erult, rejoice exceed- 
ingly: Mt. v.12; Lk. x. 21; Acts ii. 26; xvi. 34; 1 Pet. 
i. 8; iv. 13; ἔν τινι, 1 Pet. i. 6, dat. of the thing in 
which the joy originates [ef. W. § 33 a.; B. 185 (160)]; 
but Jn. v. 35 means, ‘to rejoice while his light shone’ 
[i. e. in (the midst of) ete.]. ἐπί τινι, Lk. i. 47; foll. by 
ἵνα, Jn. viii. 56 that he should see, rejoiced because it 
had been promised him that he should see. This divine 
promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise; cf. 
W. 339 (318); B. 239 (206). On this word see Gelpke 
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 645 sq.* 

G-yapos, -ov, (γάμος), unmarried: 1 Co. vii. 8, 32; 
used even of women, 1 Co. vii. 11, 34 (Eur. Hel. 690 [and 
elsewhere]), where the Grks. commonly said ἄνανδρος." 

ἀγανακτέω, -ὦ ; 1 aor. ἠγανάκτησα; (as πλεονεκτέω COMES 
fr. πλοενέκτης, and this fr. πλέον and ἔχω, so through a 
conjectural ἀγανάκτης fr. ἄγαν and ἄχομαι to feel pain, 
grieve, [al. al.]); to be indignant, moved with indigna- 
tion: Mt. xxi.15; xxvi.8; Mk. x. 14; xiv.43 περί τινος 
[ef. W. § 33 4.1, Mt. xx. 24; Mk. x. 413 foll. by dre, Lk. 
xiii. 14. (From Hdt. down.) * 

ἀγανάκτησις, -ews, ἡ, indignation : 2Co. vii.11. [(From | 
Plat. on.) ]* 

ἀγαπάω, -&; [impf. ἠγάπων] ; fut.dyarjow; 1 aor. ἦγά- 
moa; pé. act. [1 pers. plur. 7yampxapev 1 Jn. iv. 10 WH 
txt.], ptep. ἠγαπηκώς (2 Tim. iv. 8); Pass., [pres. dya- 
πῶμαι]; pf. ptep. ἤγαπημένος ; 1 fut. ἀγαπηθήσομαι; (akin 
to ἄγαμαι [Fick, Pt. iv. 12; see ἀγαθός, init.]); to love, 
to be full of good-will and exhibit the same: LK. vii. 47; 
1 Jn. iv. 7 sq.; with ace. of the person, to have a pre- 
ference for, wish well to, regard the welfare of: Mt. ν. 43 
sqq-; xix. 19; Lk. vii. 5; Jn. xi. 5; Ro. xiii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 
11; xii.15; Gal. v.14; Eph. v. 25, 28; 1 Pet. i. 22, and 
elsewhere; often in 1 Ep. of Jn. of the love of Chris- 
tians towards one another; of the benevolence which 
God, in providing salvation for men, has exhibited by 
sending his Son to them and giving him up to death, 
dn. iii. 16; Ro. viii. 87; 2 Th. ii. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 11, 19; 
[noteworthy is Jude 1 L T Tr WH τοῖς ἐν θεῷ πατρὶ 
ἠγαπημένοις ; see ev, I. 4, and ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 
12]; of the love which led Christ, in procurmg human 
salvation, to undergo sufferings and death, Gal. ii. 20; 
Eph. v. 2; οὗ the love with which God regards Christ, 
Jn. iii. 35; [v. 20 L mrg.]; x. 17; xv. 9; Eph. i. 6 
When used of love to a master, God or Christ, the word 


ἀγάπη 


involves the idea of affectionate reverence, prompt obe- 
dience, grateful recognition of benefits received: Mt. vi. 
24; xxii.37; Ro. viii. 28; 1 Co. ii. 9; viii. 3; Jas. i. 12; 
1 Pet. i. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 10, 20, and elsewhere. With an 
ace. of the thing ἀγαπάω denotes fo take pleasure in the 
thing, prize it above other things, be unwilling to abandon it 
or do without it: δικαιοσύνην, Heb. i. 9 (i. 6. steadfastly 
to cleave to); τὴν δόξαν, Jn. xii. 43; ty πρωτοκαθεδρίαν, 
LK. xi. 43; τὸ σκότος and τὸ φῶς, In. ili. 19; τὸν κόσμον, 
1 Jn. ii. 155 τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα, 2 Tim. iv. 10, — both which 
last phrases signify to set the heart on earthly advan- 
tages and joys; τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτῶν, Rev. xii. 11; ζωήν, 
1 Pet. iii. 10 (to derive pleasure from life, render it 
agreeable to himself); to welcome with desire, long for : 
τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, 2 Tim. iv. 8 (Sap.i.1; vi. 13; Sir. 
iv. 12, etc.; so of a person: ἤγαπήθη, Sap. iv. 10, cf. 
Grimm ad loc.). Concerning the unique proof of love 
which Jesus gave the apostles by washing their feet, it 
is said ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς, Jn. xiii. 1, cf. Liicke or Meyer 
ad loc. [but al. take ἠγάπ. here more comprehensively, 
see Weiss’s Mey., Godet, Westcott, Keil]. The combi- 
nation ἀγάπην ἀγαπᾶν twa occurs, when a relative inter- 
venes, in Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. ii. 4, (2 S. xiii. 15 where 
τὸ μῖσος ὃ ἐμίσησεν αὐτήν is contrasted; cf. Gen. xlix. 25 
εὐλόγησέ σε εὐλογίαν ; Ps. Sal. xvii. 35 [in cod. Pseude- 
pig. Vet. Test. ed. Fabric. i. p. 966; Libri Apocr. ete., 
ed. Fritzsche, p. 588] δόξαν ἣν ἐδόξασεν αὐτήν) ; cf. W. 
§ 82, 2; [B. 148 sq. (129)]; Grimm on 1 Mace. ii. 54. 

On the difference betw. ἀγαπάω and φιλέω, see φιλέω. 
Cf. ἀγάπη, 1 fin. 

ἀγάπη, -ἧς, ἡ, ἃ purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyt- 
tenbach, following Reiske’s conjecture, long ago re- 
stored ἀγαπήσων in place of ἀγάπης, ὧν in Plut. sympos. 
quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof. 
auth. fr. [Aristot.], Plut. on used ἀγάπησις. “The Sept. 
use ἀγάπη for 138, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8; 
vii. 6; viii. 4,6, 7; [It is noticeable that the word first 
makes its appearance as a current term in the Song 
of Sol.;—certainly no undesigned evidence respect- 
ing the idea which the Alex. translators had of the 
love in this Song” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl. 
Sprachgeist, p. 63)]; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1,6; [2 S. xiii. 
15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo 
and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it. 
Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas.; it 
occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and 
Rey., but frequently in the writings of Paul, John, Peter, 
Jude” (Bretschn. Lex. s. v.-); [Philo, deus immut. § 14]. 

In signification it follows the verb ἀγαπάω; conse- 
quently it denotes 1. affection, good-will, love, bene- 
volence: Jn. xv. 13; Ro. xiii. 10; 1 Jn. iv. 18. Of the 
love of men to men; esp. of that love of Christians 
towards Christians which is enjoined and prompted by 
their religion, whether the love be viewed as in the 
soul or as expressed: Mt. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. xiii. 1-4, 8; 
xiv. 1; 2 Co. ii. 4; Gal. v. 6; Philem. 5, 7; 1 Tim. i. 
5; Heb. vi. 10; x. 24; Jn. xiii. 35; 1 Jn. iv. 7; Rev. 
ii. 4,19, etc. Of the love of men towards θα ἡ ἀγάπη 


4 ἀγαπητός 


τοῦ θεοῦ (obj. gen. [W. 185 (175)]), Lk. xi. 42; ὅπ. v. 
42; 1 Jn. ii. 15 (τοῦ πατρός) ; iii. 17; iv. 12; v. 3. Of 
the love of God towards men: Ro. v. 8; viii. 39; 2 Co. 
xiii. 13 (14). Of the love of God towards Christ: Jn. xv. 
10; xvii. 26. Of the love of Christ towards men: 
Jn. xv. 9 sq.; 2 Co. v. 14; Ro. viii. 35; Eph. iii. 19. 
In construction: dy. εἴς τινα, 2 Co. ii. 8 [?]; Eph. 1. 
15 [L WH om. Tr mrg. br. τὴν ἀγάπην] ; τῇ ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐν 
ἡμῖν i. 6. love going forth from your soul and taking up 
its abode as it were in ours, i. q. your love to us, 2 Co. 
viii. 7 [W. 193 (181 sq.); B. 329 (283)]; μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν 
i. 6. is present with (embraces) you, 1 Co. xvi. 24; μεθ᾽ 
ἡμῶν i. 6. seen among us, 1 Jn. iv. 17. Phrases: ἔχειν 
ἀγάπην εἴς τινα, 2 Co. ii. 4; Col. i. 4 [L T Tr, but WH 
br.]; 1 Pet. iv. 8; ἀγάπην διδόναι to give a proof of 
love, 1 Jn. iii. 1; ἀγαπᾶν ἀγάπην τινά, In. xvii. 26; 
Eph. ii. 4 (v. in ἀγαπάω, sub fin.) ; dy. rod πνεύματος i. 6. 
enkindled by the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 30; ὁ vids τῆς 
ἀγάπης the Son who is the object of love, i. q. ἀγαπητός, 
Col. 1. 18 (W. 237 (222); [B. 162 (141)]); ὁ θεὸς τῆς 
dy. the author of love, 2 Co. xiii. 11; κόπος τῆς dy. 
troublesome service, toil, undertaken from love, 1 Th. 
i. 33 dy. τῆς ἀληθείας love which embraces the truth, 
2 Th. ii. 10; ὁ θεὸς ἀγάπη ἐστίν God is wholly love, his 
nature is summed up in love, 1 Jn. iv. 8,16; φίλημα 
ἀγάπης a kiss as a sign among Christians of mutual affee- 
tion, 1 Pet. v. 14; διὰ τὴν dy. that love may have oppor- 
tunity of influencing thee (‘in order to give scope to the 
power of love’ De W., Wies.), Philem. 9, cf. 14; ἐν 
ἀγάπῃ lovingly, in an affectionate spirit, 1 Co. iv. 21; 
on love as a basis [al. in love as the sphere or element], 
Eph. iv. 15 (where ἐν dy. is to be connected not with 
ἀληθεύοντες but with αὐξήσωμεν), vs. 16; ἐξ ἀγάπης influ- 
enced by love, Phil. i. 17 (16) ; κατὰ ἀγάπην in a manner 
befitting love, Ro. xiv. 15. Love is mentioned together 
with faith and hope in 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Th. i. 3; 
v. 8; Col. i. 4 sq.; Heb. x. 22-24. On the words 
ἀγάπη, ἀγαπᾶν, cf. Gelpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, 
p- 646 sq.; on the idea and nature of.Christian love 
see Késtlin, Lehrbgr. des Ev. Joh. ete. p. 248 sqq., 
332 sqq.; Rickert, Theologie, ii. 452 sqq.; Lipsius, 
Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 188 sqq.; [Reuss, Théol. 
Chrét. livr. vii. chap. 13]. 2. Plur. ἀγάπαι, -ῶν, 
agapae, love-feasts, feasts expressing and fostering mu- 
tual love which used to be held by Christians before the 
celebration of the Lord’s supper, and at which the 
poorer Christians mingled with the wealthier and par- 
took in common with the rest of food provided at the 
expense of the wealthy: Jude 12 (and in 2 Pet. ii. 13 
L Tr txt. WH mrg.), ef. 1 Co. xi. 17 sqq.; Acts ii. 42, 
46; xx. 7; Tertull. Apol. c. 39, and ad Martyr. ο. 3; 
Cypr. ad Quirin. 3,3; Drescher, De vet. christ. Agapis. 
Giess. 1824; Mangold in Schenkel i. 53 sq.; [B. D.s. v. 
Love-Feasts; Dict. of Christ. Antiq. 5. v. Agapae; more 
fully in McC. and S. s. v. Agape]. 

ἀγαπητός, τή, -dv, (ἀγαπάω), beloved, esteemed, dear, 
favorite; (opp. to ἐχθρός, Ro. xi. 28): 6 vids μου (τοῦ 
Θεοῦ) ὁ ἀγαπητός, of Jesus, the Messiah, Mt. 111. 17 


"Ayap 


fhere WH mrg. take ὁ dy. absol., connecting it with 
what follows]; xii. 18; xvii. 5; Mk. i. 11; ix. 7; Lk. 
iii. 22; ix. 35 (where Lmrg. T Tr WH ὁ ἐκλελεγμένος) ; 
2 Pet. i. 17, cf. Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xx. 13; [cf. Ascensio 
Isa. (ed. Dillmann) vii. 23 sq.; viii. 18, 25,ete.].  dya- 
πητοὶ Θεοῦ [W. 194 (182 sq.) ; B. 190 (165)] is applied 
to Christians as being reconciled to God and judged by 
him to be worthy of eternal life: Ro. i. 7, οἵ. xi. 28; 
1 Th. i. 4; Col. iii. 12, (Sept., Ps. lix. (Ix.) 7; evii. 
(eviii.) 7; exxvi. (exxvii.) 2, ἀγαπητοί σου and αὐτοῦ, of 
pious Israelites). But Christians, bound together by 
mutual love, are ἀγαπητοί also to one another (Philem. 
16; 1 Tim. vi. 2); hence they are dignified with this 
epithet very often in tender address, both indirect (Ro. 
xvi. 5, 8; Col. iv. 14; Eph. vi. 21, ete.) and direct 
(Ro. xii. 19; 1 Co. iv. 14; [Philem. 2 Rec.]; Heb. vi. 
9. ΠΗ 1. 10.7.1 Pet. 1.11 2e beta. 15 [1 πὸ ἀπ 
GLTTr WH)],ete.). Generally foll. by the gen.; once 
by the dat. ἀγαπ. ἡμῖν, 1 Th. ii. 8 [yet ef. W. § 31, 2; 
B. 190 (165) ]. ἀγαπητὸς ἐν κυρίῳ beloved in the fel- 
lowship of Christ, equiv. to dear fellow-Christian, Ro. 
xvi. 8. [Not used in the Fourth Gospel or the Rey. In 
class. Grk. fr. Hom. Il. 6, 401 on; cf. Cope on Aristot. 
rhet. 1, 7, 41.] 

"Ayap [WH “Ay. (see their Intr. § 408)], ἡ, indecl., 
(in Joseph. ᾿Αγάρα, -ns), 13) (flight), Hagar, a bond- 
maid of Abraham, and by him the mother of Ishmael 
(Gen. xvi.): Gal. iv. 24, [25 L txt. T om. Tr br.]. 
Since the Arabians according to Paul (who had for- 
merly dwelt among them, Gal. i. 17) called the rocky 
Mt. Sinai by a name similar in sound to 119 ( lee 
i. e. rock), the apostle in the passage referred“ to em- 
ploys the name Hagar allegorically to denote the servile 
sense of fear with which the Mosaic economy imbued 
its subjects. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. pp. 978, 2366 note; 
Bp. Lghtft.’s remarks appended to his Com. on Gal. 
cae 

ἀγγαρεύω ; fut. dyyapevow; 1 aor. ἠγγάρευσα ; to em- 
ploy a courier, despatch a mounted messenger. A word 
of Persian origin [used by Menander, Sicyon. 4], but 
adopted also into Lat. (Vulg. angariare). ”Ayyapou were 
public couriers (tabellarii), stationed by appointment 
of the king of Persia at fixed localities, with horses 
ready for use, in order to transmit royal messages from 
one to another and so convey them the more speedily to 
their destination. See Hdt. 8, 98 [and Rawlinson’s 
note]; Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 17 (9); cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. 
s. v. ΠΛ; [B. D. s. v. Angareuo; Vanitek, Fremd- 
worter 8. v. @yyapos]. These couriers had authority to 
press into their service, in case of need, horses, vessels, 
even men they met, [cf. Joseph. antt. 13, 2,3]. Hence 
dyyapevew τινά denotes to compel one to go a journey, 
to bear a burden, or to perform any other service: 
Mt. v. 41 (ὅστις σε ἀγγαρεύσει μίλιον ἔν i. e. whoever 
shall compel thee to go one mile) ; xxvii. 32 (jyyapevoay 
ἵνα ἄρῃ i. e. they forced him to carry), so Mk. xv. 21.* 

ἀγγεῖον, -ov, Td, (i. 4. TO ἄγγος). a vessel, receptacle: 


Mt. xiii. 48 [R G 12]; xxv. 4. (From Hdt. down.) * 


ἄγγελος 


ἀγγελία, -ας, 7, (ἄγγελος), @ message, announcement, 
thing announced ; precept declared, 1 Jn. i. 5 (where 
Ree. has ἐπαγγελία) [ef. Is. xxviii. 9]; iii. 11. [From 
Hom. down. ]* 

ἀγγέλλω; [1 aor. ἤγγειλα, Jn. iv. 51 T (for ἀπήγγ. 
RGLTr br.)]; (ἄγγελος) ; to announce: ἀγγέλλουσα, 
Jn. xx. 18 LT Tr WH, for R G ἀπαγγέλλ. [From Hom. 
down. Comp.: ἀν-, ἀπ-, δι-, e&-, én-, mpo-en-, κατ-, 
προ-κατ-, παρ-αγγέλλω.} * 

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is 
sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vil. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; 
Jas. li. 25. [Fr. Hom. down. ] 2. In the Scriptures, 
both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host 
of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish 
and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the 
universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute 
his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk.i. 13; Lk. 
xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts 
vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, ef. Heb. i. 14), now to 
make them known to men (LK. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq.; 
Acts x. 3; xxvii. 23; Mt. i. 20; ii. 13; xxviii. 5; Jn. 
xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions ἄγγελος 
(angel, messenger of God, 3x90) and ἄγγελοι κυρίου or 
ayy. τοῦ θεοῦ. They are subject not only to God but 
also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, ef. Eph. i. 
21; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as hereafter to return 
to judgment surrounded by a multitude of them as ser- 
vants and attendants: Mt. xiii. 41, 49; xvi. 27; xxiv. 
31; xxv. 31; 2 Th.i. 7, ef. Jude 14. Single angels 
have the charge of separate elements; as fire, Rev. xiv. 
18; waters, Rey. xvi. 5, ef. vii. 1 sq.; Jn. v. 4 [R L}. 
Respecting the ἄγγελος τῆς ἀβύσσου, Rev. ix. 11, see 
᾿Αβαδδών, 3. Guardian angels of individuals are men- 
tioned in Mt. xvuii. 10; Acts xii.15. ‘ The angels of the 
churches’ in Rey. i. 20; ii. 1, 8, 12, 18; iii. 1, 7, 14 are not 
their presbyters or bishops, but heavenly spirits who exer- 
cise such a superintendence and guardianship over them 
that whatever in their assemblies is worthy of praise or 
of censure is counted to the praise or the blame of their 
angels also, as though the latter infused their spirit into 
the assemblies; cf. De Wette, Diisterdieck, [Alford,] on 
Rey. i. 20, and Liicke, Einl. in ἃ. Offenb. ἃ. Johan. ii. 
p- 429 sq. ed. 2; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 199 sq.]. 
διὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους that she may show reverence for the 
angels, invisibly present in the religious assemblies of 
Christians, and not displease them, 1 Co. xi. 10. ὠῴφθη 
ἀγγέλοις in 1 Tim. iii. 16 is probably to be explained 
neither of angels to whom Christ exhibited himself in 
heaven, nor of demons triumphed over by him in the 
nether world, but of the apostles, his messengers, to 
whom he appeared after his resurrection. This appel- 
lation, which is certainly extraordinary, is easily un- 
derstood from the nature of the hymn from which the 
passage ἐφανερώθη . . . ἐν δόξῃ seems to have been taken; 
ef. W. 639 sq. (594), [for other interpretations see Ellic. 
ad loc.]. In Jn.i. 51 (52) angels are employed, by a beau- 
tiful image borrowed from Gen. xxviii. 12, to represent 
the divine power that will aid Jesus in the discharge 


ἄγγος 


of his Messianic oflice, and the signal proofs to appear 
in his history of a divine superintendence. Certain of 
the angels have proved faithless to the trust committed 
to them by God, and have given themselves up to sin, 
Jude 6; 2 Pet. ii. 4 (Enoch ο. vi. ete., ef. Gen. vi. 2), and 
now obey the devil, Mt. xxv. 41; Rev. xii. 7, ef. 1 Co. 
vi. 3 [yet on this last passage οἵ. Meyer; he and others 
maintain that dyy. without an epithet or limitation never 
in the N. T. signifies other than good angels]. Hence 
ἄγγελος Saray is trop. used in 2 Co. xii. 7 to denote 
a grievous bodily malady sent by Satan. See δαίμων ; 
[Soph. Lex. s. v. ἄγγελος ; and for the literature on the 
whole subject B. 1). Am. ed. s. v. Angels, — and to the 
reff. there given add G. LZ. Hahn, Theol. des N. T., i. 
pp- 260-384; Delitzsch in Riehm 8. v. Engel; Kiibel 
in Herzog ed. 2, ibid.]. 

ἄγγος, -εος, τό, (plur. ἄγγη), 1. 4. ἀγγεῖον q. v.: Mt. 
ΧΙ. 48 T Tr WH. (From Hom. down; [ef. Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 23].) * 

ἄγε, (properly impv. of ἄγω), come! come now! used, 
as it often is in the classics (W. 516 (481)), even when 
more than one is addressed: Jas. iv. 13; v. 1.* 

ἀγέλη, -ης, ἡ, (ἄγω to drive), a herd: Mt. viii. 30 sqq.; 
Mk. ν. 11, 13; Lk. viii. 32 sq. (From Hom. down.) * 

ἀγενεαλόγητος, -ov, 6, (yeveadoyew), of whose descent 
there is no account (in the O. T.), [R. V. without gene- 
alogy]: Heb. vii. 3 (vs. 6 μὴ yeveadoyotpevos). No- 
where found in prof. auth.* 

ἀγενής, τέος (-ois), ὁ, ἦ, (qév0s), opp. to εὐγενής, of no 
family, a man of base birth, a man of no name or repu- 
tation; often used by prof. writ., also in the secondary 
sense iynoble, cowardly, mean, base. In the N. T. only 
in 1 Co. i. 28, ra ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου i. 6. those who among 
men are held of no account; on the use of a neut. adj. 
in ref. to persons, see W. 178 (167) ; [B. 122 (107)].* 

ἁγιάζω; 1 aor. ἡγίασα; Pass., [pres. ἁγιάζομαι] ; pf. ἡγί- 
agua; 1 aor. ἡγιάσθην; a word for which the Greeks use 
ἁγίζειν, but very freq. in bibl. (as equiv. to wap, Wp) 
and 600]. writ.; to make ἅγιον, render or declare sacred 
or holy, consecrate. Hence it denotes 1. to render 
or acknowledge to be venerable, io hallow: τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Mt. vi. 9 (so of God, Is. xxix. 23; Ezek. xx. 41; 
xxxvili. 23; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 4); [Lk. xi. 2]; τὸν 
Χριστόν, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (RG θεόν). Since the stamp 
of sacredness passes over from the holiness of God to 
whatever has any connection with God, ἁγιάζειν de- 
notes 2. to separate from things profane and dedicate to 
God, to consecrate and so render inviolable; a. things 
(πᾶν πρωτότοκον, τὰ ἀρσενικά, Deut. xv. 193 ἡμέραν, Ex. 
xx. 8; οἶκον, 2 Chr, vii. 16, ete.) : τὸν χρυσόν, Mt. xxiii. 
17; τὸ δῶρον, vs. 19; σκεῦος, 2 Tim. ii. 21. b. persons. 
So Christ is said by undergoing death to consecrate 
himself to God, whose will he in that way fulfils, Jn. 
xvii. 19; God is said ἁγιάσαι Christ, i. 6. to have selected 
him for his service (cf. ἀφορίζειν, Gal. i. 15) by having 
committed to him the office of Messiah, Jn. x. 36, cf. 
Jer. i. 5; Sir. xxxvi. 12 [ἐξ αὐτῶν ἡγίασε, καὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν 
ἤγγισεν, of his selection of men for the priesthood]; xlv. 


ἅγιος 


ZS Abb ey Since only what is pure and without 
blemish can be devoted and offered to God (Lev. xxii. 
20; Deut. xv. 21; xvii. 1), ἁγιάζω signifies 3. to 
purify, (ἀπὸ τῶν ἀκαθαρσιῶν is added in Ley. xvi. 19; 
2S. xi. 4); and a. to cleanse externally (πρὸς τὴν τῆς 
σαρκὸς καθαρότητα), to purify levitically: Heb. ix. 13; 
1 Tim. iv. 5. b. to purify by expiation, free from the 
guilt of sin: 1 Co. vi. 11; Eph. v. 26; Heb. x. 10, 14, 29; 
xili, 12; ii. 11 (equiv. to 193, Ex. xxix. 33, 36); cf. 
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 340 sqq., [Eng. trans. ii. 68 
sq.]. ὁ. to purify internally by reformation of soul: In. 
xvii. 17, 19 (through knowledge of the truth, cf. Jn. viii. 
32); 1 Th. v. 23; 1 Co. i. 2 (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ in the 
fellowship of Christ, the Holy One); Ro. xv. 16 (ἐν 
πνεύματι ἁγίῳ imbued with the Holy Spirit, the divine 
source of holiness); Jude 1 (L T Tr WH ἠγαπημένοις 
[q- v-]); Rev. xxii. 11. In general, Christians are 
called ἡγιασμένοι [ef. Deut. xxxiii. 3], as those who, 
freed from the impurity of wickedness, have been 
brought near to God by their faith and sanctity, Acts 
xx. 32; xxvi. 18. In 1 Co. vii. 14 ἁγιάζεσθαι is used in 
a peculiar sense of those who, although not Christians 
themselves, are yet, by marriage with a Christian, with- 
drawn from the contamination of heathen impiety and 
brought under the saving influence of the Holy Spirit dis- 
playing itself among Christians; cf. Neander ad loc.* 

ἁγιασμός, -ov, 6, a word used only by bibl. and eccl. 
writ. (for in Diod. 4, 39; Dion. Hal. 1, 21, ἁγισμός is 
the more correct reading), signifying 1. consecration, 
purification, τὸ ἁγιάζειν. 2. the effect of consecration: 
sanctification of heart and life, 1 Co. i. 30 (Christ is he to 
whom we are indebted for sanctification) ; 1 Th. iv. 7; 
Ro. vi. 19, 22, 1 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. xii. 14; ἁγιασμὸς 
πνεύματος sanctification wrought by the Holy Spirit, 2 Th. 
ii. 13; 1 Pet.i.2. It is opposed to lust in 1 Th. iv. 3 sq. 
( is used in a ritual sense, Judg. xvii. 3 [Alex.]; Ezek. 
xlv. 4; [Am. ii. 11]; Sir. vii. 31, ete.) [On its use in 
the N. T. ef. Ellic. on 1 Th. iv. 3; iii. 13.]* 

ἅγιος, -a, -ov, (fr. τὸ dyos religious awe, reverence ; 
dl, ἅζομαι, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents, 
[Curtius § 1187), rare in prof. auth.; very frequent in 
the sacred writ.; in the Sept. for wap; 1. properly 
reverend, worthy of veneration: τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. i. 
49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev. 
iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, ete.), i. q. ἔνδοξος. Hence used a. of 
things which on account of some connection with God 
possess a certain distinction and claim to reverence, as 
places sacred to God which are not to be profaned, 
Acts vii. 83; τόπος ἅγιος the temple, Mt. xxiv. 15 (on 
which pass. see βδέλυγμα, ¢.); Acts vi. 13; xxi. 28; the 
holy land or Palestine, 2 Mace. i. 29; ii. 18; τὸ ἅγιον and 
τὰ ἅγια [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. ix. 1, 24 (cf. 
Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec. that part of 
the temple or tabernacle which is called ‘the holy 
place’ (WAPD, Ezek. xxxvii. 28; xlv. 18), Heb. ix. 2 
[here Rect reads ἁγία]; ἅγια ἁγίων [ W. 246 (231), cf. Ex. 
xxix. 87; xxx. 10, ete.] the most hallowed portion of 
the temple, ‘the holy of holies,’ (Ex. xxvi. 33 [ef. Joseph. 


a 
ἅγιος 


antt. 8, 6, 47), Heb. ix. 8, in ref. to which the simple 
τὰ ἅγια is also used: Heb. ix. 8, 25; x. 19; xiii. 11; 
fig. of heaven, Heb. viii. 2; ix. 8,12; x. 19; ἁγία πόλις 
Jerusalem, on account of the temple there, Mt. iv. 5; 
xxvii. 53; Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 2; xxii. 19, (Is. xlviii. 2; 
Neh. xi. 1,18 [Compl.], ete.) ; τὸ ὄρος τὸ ἅγιον, because 
Christ’s transfiguration occurred there, 2 Pet. i. 18; 
ἡ (θεοῦ) ἁγία διαθήκη i. 6. which is the more sacred be- 
cause made by God himself, Lk. i. 72; τὸ ἅγιον, that 
worshipful offspring of divine power, Lk. i. 35; the 
blessing of the gospel, Mt. vii. 6; ἁγιωτάτη πίστις, faith 
(quaecredituri.e.the object of faith) which came from 
God and is therefore to be heeded most sacredly, Jude 
20; in the same sense ἁγία ἐντολή, 2 Pet. ii. 215 κλῆσις 
ἁγία, because it is the invitation of God and claims us 
as his, 2 Tim. i. 9; ἅγιαι γραφαί (τὰ βιβλία τὰ ἅγια, 
1 Mace. xii. 9), which came from God and contain his 
words, Ro. i. 2. b. of persons whose services God 
employs; as for example, apostles, Eph. iii. 5; angels, 
1 Th. iii. 13; Mt. xxv. 31 [Rec.]; Rev. xiv. 10; Jude 
14; prophets, Acts iii. 21; Lk. i. 70, (Sap. xi. 1); (oi) 
ἅγιοι (τοῦ) θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι, 2 Pet. i. 21 [ἢ GL Tr txt.]; 
worthies of the O. T. accepted by God for their piety, 
Mt. xxvii. 52; 1 Pet. iii. 5. 2. set apart for God, 
to be, as it were, exclusively his; foll. by a gen. or 
dat.: τῷ κυρίῳ, Lk. ii. 23; τοῦ θεοῦ (i. 4. ἐκλεκτὸς τοῦ 
θεοῦ) of Christ, ΜΚ. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34, and ace. to the true 
reading in Jn. vi. 69, cf. x. 36; he is called also ὁ ἅγιος 
παῖς τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts iv. 30, and simply ὁ ἅγιος, 1 Jn. ii. 
20. Just as the Israelites claimed for themselves the 
title οἱ ἅγιοι, because God selected them from the other 
nations to lead a life acceptable to him and rejoice in 
his favor and protection (Dan. vii. 18, 22; 2 Esdr. 
viii. 28), so this appellation is very often in the N. T. 
transferred to Christians, as those whom God has se- 
lected ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου (Jn. xvii. 14, 16), that under the 
influence of the Holy Spirit they may be rendered, 
through holiness, partakers of salvation in the kingdom 
of God: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Ex. xix. 6), ef. vs. 5; Acts ix. 13, 
S27 41... χχυ]. 10; ΝΟ: 1 1: Ville 27: Xi. Los) Xvi. 15 
1 Co. vi. 1, 2; Phil. iv. 21 sq.; Col. i. 12; Heb. vi. 10; 
Jude 3; Rev. v. 8, etc.; [ef. B. D. Am. ed. 8. v. Saints]. 
3. of sacrifices and offerings; prepared for God with 
solemn rite, pure, clean, (opp. to ἀκάθαρτος) : 1 Co. vii. 
14, (cf. Eph. v. 3); connected with ἄμωμος, Eph. i. 4; 
y. 27; Col. i. 22; ἀπαρχή, Ro. xi. 16; θυσία, Ro. xii. 1. 
Hence 4. in a moral sense, pure, sinless, upright, 
holy: 1 Pet. i. 16 (Lev. xix. 2; xi. 44); 1 Co. vii. 34; 
δίκαιος x. ἅγιος, of John the Baptist, Mk. vi. 20; ἅγιος x. 
δίκαιος, of Christ, Acts iii. 14; distinctively of him, Rev. 
iii. 7; vi. 10; of God pre-eminently, 1 Pet. i. 15; Jn. 
xvii. 115 ἅγιαι ἀναστροφαί, 2 Pet. iii. 11; νόμος and 
ἐντολή, i. 6. containing nothing exceptionable, Ro. vii. 
12; φίλημα, such a kiss as is a sign of the purest love, 
1 Th. v. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 12; Ro. xvi. 16. 
On the phrase τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα and τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, 
see πνεῦμα, 4 ἃ. Cf. Diestel, Die Heiligkeit Gottes, 
in Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. iv. p. 1 sqq.; [Baudissin, 


ἁγνιζα 


Stud. z. Semitisch. Religionsgesch. Heft ii. p. 8 sqq.; 
Delitzsch in Herzog ed. 2, v. 714 sqq.; esp.] Cremer, 
Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 32 sqq. [trans. of 2d ed. p. 34 
sqq-; Oehler in Herzog xix. 618 sqq.; Zezschwitz, Pro- 
fangricitit τι. 5. w. p. 15 sqq.; Trench § Ixxxviil. ; Camp- 
bell, Dissertations, diss. vi., pt. iv. ; esp. Schmidt ch. 181]. 

ἁγιότης, -ητος, 7), sanctity, in a moral sense; holiness: 
2 Co. i. 12 L T Tr WH; Heb. xii. 10. (Besides only 
in 2 Mace. xy. 2; [cf. W. 25, and on words of thir 
termination Lob. ad Phryn. p. 350].) * 

ἁγιωσύνη [on the see reff. in ἀγαθωσύνη, init.], -ης, 7, 
a word unknown to prof. auth. [B. 73 (64)]; 1. (God’s 
incomparable) majesty, (joined to μεγαλοπρέπεια, Ps. xev. 
(xevi.) 6, cf. exliv. (exlv.) 5): πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης a spirit 
to which belongs ἁγιωσύνη, not equiv. to πνεῦμα ἅγιον, 
but the divine [?] spiritual nature in Christ as contrasted 
with his σάρξ, Ro. i. 4; cf. Riickert ad loc., and Zeller 
in his Theol. Jahrbb. for 1842, p. 486 sqq.; [yet cf. 
Mey. ad loc.; Gifford (in the Speaker’s Com.). Most 
commentators (cf. e. g. Ellic. on Thess. as below) regard 
the word as uniformly and only signifying holiness]. 
2. moral purity: 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Co. vii. 1.* 

ἀγκάλη, -ης, 7, (ἀγκή, ἀγκάς [fr. r. ak to bend, curve, 
ef. Lat. uncus, angulus, Eng. angle, ete.; cf. Curtius § 1; 
Vaniéek p. 2 sq.]), the curve or inner angle of the arm: 
δέξασθαι εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας, Lk. ii. 28. The Greeks also 
said ἀγκὰς λαβεῖν, ἐν ἀγκάλαις περιφέρειν, etc., see ἐναγ- 
καλίζομαι. [(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.)]* 

ἄγκιστρον, -ov, τό, (fr. an unused ἀγκίζω to angle [see 
the preceding word]), a jfish-hook: Mt. xvii. 27.* 

ἄγκυρα, -as, 7, [see ἀγκάλη], an anchor — [ancient an- 
chors resembled modern in form: were of iron, provided 
with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities often 
but by no means always without flukes ; see Roschach in 
Daremberg and Saglio’s Dict. des Antiq. (1873) p. 267; 
Guhl and Koner p. 258]: ῥίπτειν to cast (Lat. jacere), 
Acts xxvii. 29 ; ἐκτείνειν, vs. 30; περιαιρεῖν, vs. 40. Fig- 
uratively, any stay or safeguard: as hope, Heb. vi. 19; 
Eur. Hee. 78 (80); Heliod. vii. p. 352 (350).* 

ἄγναφος, -ov, ὁ, 7, (γνάπτω to dress or full cloth, ef. 
appados), unmilled, unfulled, undressed: Mt. ix. 16; Mk. 
ii. 21. [Cf. Moeris 5. v. ἄκναπτον ; Thom. Mag. p. 12, 14.]* 

ἁγνεία [WH dyvia (see I, ¢)], -as, ἡ, (ἁγνεύω), purity, 
sinlessness of life: 1 Tim. iv. 12; v. 2. (Of a Nazirite, 
Num. vi. 2, 21.) [From Soph. O. T. 864 down.] * 

dyvitw; 1 aor. ἥγνισα; pf. ptep. act. ἡγνικώς ; pass. 
ἡγνισμένος ; 1 aor. pass. ἡγνίσθην [ W. 252 (237) ]; (ἁγνός); 
to purify ; 1. ceremonially: ἐμαυτόν, Jo. xi. 55 (to 
cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means 
of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices); the pass. 
has a reflexive force, to take upon one’s self a purifica- 
tion, Acts xxi. 24, 26; xxiv. 18 (13, Num. vi. 3), and 
is used of Nazirites or those who had taken upon them- 
selves a temporary or a life-long vow to abstain from wine 
and all kinds of intoxicating drink, from every defilement 
and from shaving the head [cf. BB. DD. 5. v. Nazarite]. 
2. morally: τὰς καρδίας, Jas. iv. 8; τὰς Wuyds, 1 Pet. is 
22; ἑαυτόν, 1 Jn. iii. 3. (Soph., Eur., Plut., al.)* 


ἁγνισμός 


ἁγνισμός, -od, 6, purification, lustration, [Dion. Hal. 8, 
22, i. p. 469, 13; Plut. de defect. orac. 15]: Acts xxi. 26 
(equiv. to 173, Num. vi. 5), Naziritic; see ἁγνίζω, 1.* 

ἀγνοέω (TNO [cf. γινώσκω), -d, [impy. ἀγνοείτω 1 Co. 
xiv. 38 R G Tr txt. WH mrg.]; impf. ἠγνόουν; 1 aor. 
nyvonoa; [Pass., pres. dyvootpat, ptcp. ayvoovpevos; fr. 
Hom. down]; a. to be ignorant, not to know: absol., 
1 Tim. i. 13; τινά, ri, Acts xiii. 27; xvii. 23; Ro. x. 3; 
ἔν τινι (as in [Test. Jos. § 14] Fabricii Pseudepigr. ii. 
p-: 717 [but the reading ἠγνόουν ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοις is now 
given here; see Test. xii. Patr. ad fid. cod. Cant. ete., ed. 
Sinker, Cambr. 1869]), 2 Pet. ii. 12, unless one prefer to 
resolve the expression thus: ἐν τούτοις, ἃ ἀγνοοῦσι βλασ- 
φημοῦντες, W. 629 (584), [οἵ. B. 287 (246) ]; foll. by ὅτι, 
Ro. ii. 4; vi. 3; vii. 1; 1 Co. xiv. 38 (where the antece- 
dent clause ὅτι κτλ. is to be supplied again); οὐ θέλω 
ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν, a phrase often used by Paul, [an emphatic ] 
scitole: foll. by an ace. of the obj., Ro. xi. 25; ὑπέρ τινος; 
ὅτι, 2 Co. i. 8; περί τινος, 1 Co. xii. 1; 1 Th. iv. 13; foll. 
by ὅτι, Ro. i. 13; 1 Co.x.1; in the pass. ἀγνοεῖται ‘he 
is not known’ i. e. ace. to the context ‘he is disregarded,’ 
1 Co. xiv. 881, T Tr mrg. WH txt. ; ἀγνοούμενοι (opp. 
to ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι) men unknown, obscure, 2 Co. vi. 9; 
ἀγνοούμενός τινι unknown to one, Gal. i. 22; οὐκ ἀγνοεῖν 
to know very well, ri, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10). Ὁ. not 
to understand: τί, Mk. ix. 82; Lk. ix. 46. ce. to err, sin 
through mistake, spoken mildly of those wKo are not 
high-handed or wilful transgressors (Sir. v.15; 2 Mace. 
xi. 31): Heb. v. 2, on which see Delitzsch.* 

ἀγνόημα, -ros, τό, a sin, (strictly, that committed through 
ignorance or thoughtlessness [A. V. error]): Heb. ix. 7 
(1 Mace. xiii. 39; Tob. iii. 3; Sir. xxiii. 2); cf. ἀγνοέω, c. 
[and Trench ὃ lxvi.].* 

ἄγνοια, -as, ἡ, [fr. Aeschyl. down], want of knowledge, 
ignorance, esp. of divihe things: Acts xvii. 30; 1 Pet. 
i. 14; such as is inexcusable, Eph. iv. 18 (Sap. xiv. 
22); of moral blindness, Acts iii. 17. [Cf. dyvoéw.]* 

ἁγνός, -7, -όν, (ἅζομαι, see ἅγιος) ; 1. exciting rever- 
ence, venerable, sacred : mip καὶ ἡ σποδός, 2 Mace. xiii. 
8; Eur. El. 812. 2. pure (Eur. Or. 1604 ἁγνὸς yap 
εἶμι χεῖρας, GAN ov τὰς φρένας, Hipp. 316 sq. dyvas... 
χεῖρας αἵματος φέρεις, χεῖρες μὲν ἁγναί, φρὴν δ᾽ ἔχει 
μίασμα); a. pure from carnality, chaste, modest: Tit. 
ii. 5; παρθένος an unsullied virgin, 2 Co. xi. 2 (4 Mace. 
xviii. 7). b. pure from every fuult, immaculate: 2 Co. 
vii. 11; Phil. iv. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; 1 Pet. iii. 2; 1 Jn. iii. 
3 (of God [yet cf. ἐκεῖνος 1 b.]); Jas. iii. 17. (From Hom. 

down.) [Cf. reff. s. v. ἅγιος, fin. ; Weste. on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]* 
τ΄ dyvérns, τητος, ἡ, [ἁγνός], purity, uprightness of life : 
2 Co. vi. 6; in 2 Co. xi. 3 some critical authorities 
add καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος after ἁπλότητος (so L Tr txt., but 
Tr mrg. WH br.), others read τῆς ἁγνότητος καὶ before 
amor. Found once in prof. auth., see Boeckh, Corp. 
Inserr. i. p.583 no. 1133 1. 15: δικαιοσύνης ἕνεκεν καὶ ἁγνό- 
τητος.“ 

ἁγνῶς, adv., purely, with sincerity: Phil. i. 16 (17).* 

ἀγνωσία, -as, 7, (γνῶσις), want of knowledge, igno- 
vance: 1 Pet. ii. 15; 1 Co. xv. 34, (Sap. xiii. 1).* 


8 ἀγραυλέω 


ἄ-γνωστος, -ον, [fr. Hom. down], unknown: Acts xvii. 
23 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. 8. v. Altar].* 

ἀγορά, -as, ἡ, (ἀγείρω, pf. ἤγορα. to collect), [fr. Hom. 
down] ; 1. any collection of men, congregation, as- 
sembly. 2. place where assemblies are held; in the 
N. T. the forum or public place, —where trials are held, 
Acts xvi. 19; and the citizens resort, Acts xvii. 17; and 
commodities are exposed for sale, Mk. vii. 4 (ἀπ᾿ ἀγορᾶς 
sc. ἐλθόντες on returning from the market if they have 
not washed themselves they eat not; W. § 66, 2 d. note); 
accordingly, the most frequented part of a city or vil- 
lage: Mt. xi. 16, (LK. vii. 32); Mk. vi. 56; Mt. xx. 3; 
xxii. 7; Mk. xii. 38; [Lk. xi. 43]; xx.46. [See B. Ὁ. 
Am. ed. s. v. Market.]* 

ἀγοράζω ; [impf. ἠγόραζον ; fut. ἀγοράσω] ; 1 aor. ἦγό- 
paca; Pass., pf. ptep. ἠγορασμένος ; 1 20r. ἠγοράσθην; 
(ἀγορά); 1. to frequent the market-place. 2. to buy 
(properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.]; 
used a. literally: absol.. Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; 
Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; τί, Mt. xiii. 44, 46; 
xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi.5; with παρά 
and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept., 
Polyb.]; ἐκ and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen. 
of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said . 
to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it 
were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly 
understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9,10]; 1 Co. vii. 
23 (with gen. of price added; see τιμή, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1. 
He is also said to have bought them for God ἐν τῷ 
αἵματι αὐτοῦ, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they, 
too, are spoken of as purchased ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, Rev. xiv. 3, 
and ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, vs. 4, so that they are withdrawn 
from the earth (and its miseries) and from (wicked) 
men. But ἀγοράζω does not mean redeem (ἐξαγομάζω), 
—as is commonly said. [Comp.: ἐξ-αγοράζω.] 

ἀγοραῖος (rarely -aia), -αἴον, (ἀγορά), relating to the 
market-place; 1. frequenting the market-place, (either 
transacting business, as the κάπηλοι, or) sauntering idly, 
(Lat. subrostranus, subbasilicanus, Germ. Pflastertreter, 
our loafer): Acts xvii. 5, (Plat. Prot. 347 ¢. ἀγοραῖοι καὶ 
φαῦλοι, Arstph. ran. 1015, al.). 2. of affairs usually 
transacted in the market-place: ἀγοραῖοι (sc. ἡμέραι [ W. 
590 (549)] or σύνοδοι [Mey. et al.]) ἄγονται, judicial 
days or assemblies, [A. V. mrg. court-days], Acts xix. 
88 (τὰς dyopaious ποιεῖσθαι, Strabo 13, p. 932), but many 
think we ought to read ἀγύραιοι here, so G L ef. W. 
53 (52); but see [Alf. and Tdf. ad loc.; Lipsius, Gram. 
Untersuch. p. 26;] Meyer on Acts xvii. 5; Gottling 
p- 297; [Chandler ed. 1 p. 269].* 

ἄγρα, -as, 9, [ἄγω]; 1. acatching, hunting: Lk. v. 4. 
2. the thing caught: ἡ ἄγρα τῶν ἰχθύων ‘the catch or haul 
of fish’ i. 6. the fishes taken [A. V. draught], Lk. ν. 9.* 

ἀγράμματος, -ov, [γράμμα], illiterate, without learning: 
Acts iy. 13 (i. e. unversed in the learning of the Jewish 
schools ; cf. Jn. vii. 15 γράμματα μὴ pepabnkas).* 

ἀγρ-αυλέω, -ὦ ; to be an ἄγραυλος (ἀγρός, αὐλή), 1. & 
to live in the fields, be under the open sky, even by night: 
Lk. ii. 8, (Strabo p. 301 a.; Plut. Num. 4).* 


ἀγρεύω 


ἀγρεύω: 1 aor. ἤγρευσα; (ἄγραν ; to catch (properly, 
wild animals, fishes): fig., Mk. xii. 13 ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσι 
λόγῳ in order to entrap him by some inconsiderate re- 
mark elicited from him in conversation, cf. Lk. xx. 20. 
(In Anthol. it often denotes to ensnare in the toils of 
love, captivate; cf. maybevo, Mt. xxii. 15; σαγηνεύω, 
Leian. Tim. 25.) * 
ἀγρι-έλαιος, -ον, (ἄγριος and ἔλαιος or ἐλαία, like ἀγριάμ- 
πελοςὺ; 1. of or belonging to the oleaster, or wild olive, 
(σκυτάλην ἀγριέλαιον, Anthol. 9, 237, 4; [ef. Lob. Para- 
lip. p. 376]); spoken of a scion, Ro. xi. 17. 2. As 
subst. ἡ ἀγριέλαιος the oleaster, the wild olive, (opp. to 
καλλιέλαιος [cf. Aristot. plant. 1, 67}, also called by the 
Greeks κότινος, Ro. xi. 243 ef. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 
495 sqq. [See B. Ὁ. s. v. Olive, and Tristram, Nat. 
Hist. of the Bible, s. v. Olive. The latter says, p. 377, 
‘ ‘the wild olive must not be confounded with the Oleaster 
or Oil-tree ’.]* 
ἄγριος, -a,-ov, (ἀγρός), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. living 
or growing in the fields or the woods, used of animals in 
a state of nature, and of plants which grow without 
culture: μέλε ἄγριον wild honey, either that which is 
deposited by bees in hollow trees, clefts of rocks, on the 
bare ground (1 S. xiv. 25 [cf. vs. 26]), ete., or more cor- 
rectly that which distils from certain trees, and is gath- 
ered when it has become hard, (Diod. Sic. 19, 94 fin. 
speaking of the Nabathaean Arabians says φύεται παρ᾽ 
αὐτοῖς μέλι πολὺ τὸ καλούμενον ἄγριον, ᾧ χρῶνται ποτῷ 
μεθ᾽ ὕδατος ; cf. Suid. and esp. Suicer 5. ν. ἀκρίς): Mt. iii. 
4; ΜΚ. 1. 6. 2. fierce, untamed: κύματα θαλάσσης, 
Jude 13 (Sap. xiv. 1).* 
᾿Αγρίππας, -a (respecting this gen. see W. § 8, 1 p. 60 
(59); B. 20 (18)), 6, see Ἡρώδης, (3 and) 4. 
ἀγρός, -οὔ, ὁ, [fr. ἄγω ; prop. a drove or driving-place, 
then, pasturage; cf. Lat. ager, Germ. Acker, Eng. acre; 
Fick, Pt. i. p. 8]; a. a field, the country: Mt. vi. 28; 
xxiv. 18, Lk.xv.15; [Mk.xi.8 TTr WH], ete. b. 
1. q. χωρίον, a piece of land, bit of tillage: Actsiv. 37; Mk. 
x. 29; Mt. xiii. 24, 27, etc. Ο. οἱ aypot the farms, 
country-seats, neighboring hamlets: Mk. ν. 14 (opp. to 
πόλις) ; Vi. 36; Lk. ix. 12. [(From Hom. on.)] 
ἀγρυπνέω, -@; (ἄγρυπνος equiv. to aimvos); to be sleep- 
less, keep awake, watch, (i. 4ᾳ. γρηγορέω [see below]) ; 
[fr. Theognis down]; trop. to be circumspect, attentive, 
ready: Mk. xiii. 33; Lk. xxi. 36; εἴς τι, to be intent 
upon a thing, Eph. vi. 18; ὑπέρ twos, to exercise, con- 
stant vigilance over something (an image drawn from 
shepherds), Heb. xiii. 17. [SYN. ἀγρυπνεῖν, ypnyo- 
ρεῖν, νήφειν: “ἀγρυπνεῖν may be taken to express sim- 
ply ... absence of sleep, and, pointedly, the absence of 
it when due to nature, and thence a wikeful frame of 
mind as opposed to listlessness; while γρηγορεῖν (the 
offspring of ἐγρήγορα) represents a waking state as 
the effect of some arousing effort... i. 6. a more stir- 
ring image than the former. The group of synonyms 
is completed by νήφειν, which signifies ἢ state untouched 
by any slumberous or beclouding influences, and thence, 
one that is guarded against advances of drowsiness or 


9 


ayo 
bewilderment. Thus it becomes a term for warinesg 
(cf. vape καὶ μέμνασ᾽ ἀπιστεῖν) against spiritual dangers 
| and beguilements, 1 Pet. v. 8, ete.” Green, Crit. Notes 
on the N. T. (note on Mk. xiii. 33 sq.).]* 
ἀγρυπνία, -as, 7, sleeplessness, watching: 2 Co. vi. 5; 
xi. 217. [From Hdt. down.]* 
ἄγω ; impf. ἦγον; fut. ἄξω ; 2 aor. ἤγαγον, inf. ἀγαγεῖν, 
(more rarely 1 aor. ἦξα, in ἐπάγω 2 Pet. ii. 5); Pass., 
pres. ἄγομαι; impf. ἠγόμην; 1 aor. ἤχθην ; 1 fut. ἀχθή- 
copa; [fr. Hom. down]; to drive, lead. 1. properly 
[A. V. ordinarily, to bring]; a. to lead by laying 
hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of desti- 
nation: of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7; Lk. xix. 35; Mk. xi. 
7 (T Tr WH φέρουσιν) ; [Lk. xix. 30]; τινά foll. by εἰς 
with ace. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2 ¢.]; x. 
34; (ἤγαγον k. εἰσήγαγον eis, Lk. xxii. 54); Jn. xviii. 23; 
Acts vi. 12; ix. 2; xvii. 5 [RG]; xxi. 34; xxii. 5, 24 
Rec. ; xxiii. 10, 31; ἐπί with ace., Acts xvii. 19; ἕως, 
Lk. iv. 29; πρός twa, to persons, Lk. [iv. 40]; xviii. 
40; Acts ix. 27; Jn.viii.3[Ree.]. Ὄ. to lead by accom- 
panying to (into) any place: εἰς, Acts xi. 26 (25); ἕως. 
Acts xvii. 15; πρός τινα, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43); ix. 
13; Acts xxiii. 18; foll. by dat. of pers. to whom, Acts 
xxi. 16 on which see W. 214 (201) at length, [cf. B. 
284 (244)], (1 Mace. vii. 2 ἄγειν αὐτοὺς αὐτῷ). c. to 
lead with one's self, attach to one’s self as an attendant: 
τινά, 2 Tim. iv. 11; 1 Th. iv. 14, (Joseph. antt. 10, 9, 6 
ἀπῆρεν εἰς τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἄγων καὶ Ἱερεμίαν). Some refer 
Acts xxi. 16 to this head, resolving it ἄγοντες Μνάσωνα 
map ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν, but incorrectly, see W. [and B.] as 
above. ἃ. to conduct, bring: twa, [Lk. xix. 27]; Jn. 
vii. 45; [xix. 4, 13]; Acts v. 21, 26, [27]; xix. 37; xx. 
12; xxv. 6, 23; πῶλον, Mk. xi. 2 (where T Tr WH 
φέρετε) ; (Lk. xix. 30, see a. above]; teva τινι or τί τινι, 
Mt. xxi. 2; Acts xiii. 23 G L T Tr WH. e. to lead 
away, to a court of justice, magistrate, ete.: simply, 
Mk. xiii. 11; [Acts xxv. 17]; ἐπί with acc., Mt. x. 18; 
Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH dzayopevous) ; [Lk. xxiii. 1]; 
Acts [ix. 21]; xviii. 12; (often in Attic) ; [πρός with 
acc., Jn. xviii. 13 L T Tr WH]; to punishment: simply 
(2 Mace. vi. 29; vii. 18, ete.), Jn. xix. 16 Grsb. (R καὶ 
ἀπήγαγον, which L T Tr WH have expunged); with 
telic inf., Lk. xxiii. 32; [foll. by ἵνα, Mk. xv. 20 Lehm.]; 
ἐπὶ σφαγήν, Acts viii. 32, (ἐπὶ θανάτῳ, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 
3; an. 1, 6, 10). 2. tropically ; a. to lead, guide, 
direct: Jn. x. 163; els μετάνοιαν, Ro. ii. 4. b. to lead 
through, conduct, to something, become the author of 
good or of evil to some one: εἰς δόξαν, Heb. ii. 10, (εἰς 
[al. ἐπὶ] καλοκἀγαθίαν, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 14; εἰς δουλείαν, 
Dem. p. 213, 28). c. to move, impel, of forces and 
influences affecting the mind: Lk. iv. 1 (where read ἐν 
τῇ ἐρήμῳ [with L txt. T Tr WH )]); πνεύματι θεοῦ ἄγεσθαι, 
Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; ἐπιθυμίαις, 2 Tim. iii. 6; sim- 
ply, urged on by blind impulse, 1 Co. xii. 2— unless im- 
pelled by Satan’s influence be preferable, cf. 1 Co. x. 20; 
Eph. ii. 2; [B. 383 (328) sq.]. 3. to pass a day, 
keep or celebrate a feast, etc. : τρίτην ἡμέραν ἄγει sc. ὁ 
Ἰσραήλ, Lk. xxiv. 21 [others (see Meyer) supply αὐτός 


ἀγωγή 


or ὁ Ἰησοῦς ; still others take ἄγει as impers., one passes, 
Vulg. tertia dies est; see B.134 (118)]; γενεσίων ayope- 
σων, Mt. xiv.6 RG; ἀγοραῖοι (q. v. 2), Acts xix. 38; often 
in the O. T. Apoer. (ef. Wahl, Clavis Apocr. s. v. ἄγω, 
8), in Hdt. and Attie writ. 4. intrans. to go, depart, 
ΟὟ. § 38, 1, p. 251 (236); [B. 144 (126)]): ἄγωμεν let 
us go, Mt. xxvi. 46; Mk. xiv. 42; Jn. xiv. 31; πρός 
τινα, Jn. xi. 15; εἰς with ace. of place, Mk. i. 38; Jn. 
xi. 7, (Epict. diss. 8, 22, 55 ἄγωμεν ἐπὶ τὸν ἀνθύπατον) ; 
{foll. by iva, Jn. xi. 16. Comp.: dv, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, συν-απ-, 
δι-, εἰσ-. παρ-εισ-, ἐξ-, ἐπ-. KAT-, μετ-. Tap-, περι-, TPO-, προσ-, 
Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.1" 

1. prop- 


συν-, ἐπι-συν-, ὑπ-άγω. 
ἀγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ. (fr. ἄγω, like ἐδωδή fr. ἔδω) ; 
erly, a leading. 2. figuratively, a. trans. a conduct- 
ing, training, education, discipline. Ὁ. intrans. the life 
led, way or course of life (a use which arose from the 
fuller expression ἀγωγὴ τοῦ βίου, in Polyb. 4, 74,1. 4; οἵ. 
Germ. Lebensfiihrung) : 2 Tim. iii. 10 [R. V. conduct], 
(Esth. ii. 20; 2 Mace. iv. 16; ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀγωγή, Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 6; ἁγνὴ dywyn, ibid. 48, 1). Often in 
prof. auth. in all these senses.* 
ἀγών, -ὥνος, 6, (ἄγω); 1. a place of assembly (Hom. 
Tl. 7, 298; 18,376); spec. the place in which the Greeks 
assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pythian, 
the Olympian); hence 2. a contest, of athletes, run- 
ners, charioteers. In a fig. sense, a. in the phrase 
(used by the Greeks, see τρέχω, b.) τρέχειν τὸν ἀγῶνα, 
Heb. xii. 1, that is to say ‘ Amid all hindrances let us 
exert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of 
perfection set before the followers of Christ’; any 
struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing 
in the way of faith, holiness, and a desire to spread the 
gospel: 1 Th. ii. 2; Phil. i. 30; 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. 
iv. 7. b. intense solicitude, anxiety: περί τινος, Col. 
ii. 1 [ef. Eur. Ph. 1350; Polyb. 4, 56,4]. On the ethical 
use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games οἵ. 
Grimm on Sap. iv. 1; [Howson, Metaphors of St. Paul, 
Essay iv.; Conyb. and Hows. Life and Epp. of St. 
Paul, ch. xx.; Me. and S. iii. 733° sq.; BB.DD. 8. v. 
Games].* 
ἀγωνία, -as, 75 1. i. q. ἀγών, which see. 2. Τὸ 18 
often used, from Dem. (on the Crown p. 236, 19 ἢν ὁ 
Φίλιππος ἐν φόβῳ καὶ πολλῇ ἀγωνίᾳ) down, of severe 
mental struggles and emotions, agony, anguish: Lk. 
xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; (2 Mace. iii. 14, 
16; xv.19; Joseph. antt. 11,8, 4 6 ἀρχιερεὺς ἦν ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ 
καὶ δέει). [Cf. Field, Otium Norv. iii. on Lk. 1. 6.1" 
ἀγωνίζομαι ; impf. ἠγωνιζύμην ; pf. ἠἡγώνισμαι; ἃ depon. 
mid. verb [οἵ. W. 260 (244)]; (ἀγών) ; 1. to enter a 
contest; contend in the gymnastic games: 1 Co. ix. 25. 
2. univ. to contend with adversaries, fight: foll. by ἵνα 
μή, Jn. xviii. 36. 3. fig. to contend, struggle, with 
difficulties and dangers antagonistic to the gospel: Col. 
i. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 10 (L T Tr txt. WH txt.; for Rec. 
ὀνειδιζόμεθα) ; ἀγωνίζομαι ἀγῶνα (often used by the 
Greeks also, esp. the Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 
ae 4. to endeavor with strenuous zeal, strive, to obtain 
something ; foll. by an inf., Lk. xiii. 24 ; ὑπέρ τινος ἐν ταῖς 


10 


ἀδελφός 

προσευχαῖς. ἵνα. Col. iv. 12. [Comp.: ἀντ-, ἐπ-» κατ-ν 
συν-αγωνίζομαι.}" 

᾿Αδάμ, indecl. prop. name (but in Joseph.” Aéapos, -ov), 
DW (i. 6. ace. to Philo, de leg. alleg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62 
ed. Mang., γήϊνος ; ace. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 γηγενής ; 
ace. to Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 2 πυρρός, with which Gesenius 
agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first 
man and the parent of the whole human race: Lk. iii. 38 ; 
Ro. v.14; 1 Co. xv. 22, 45; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq.; Jude 14. 
In accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the 
former Adam (}1W877 D1), the first man, the author 
of ‘all our woe,’ and the latter Adam (}}7n87 078), 
the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ 
is called ὁ ἔσχατος ᾿Αδάμ (see ἔσχατος, 1) and contrasted 
with ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος ; Ro. v. 14 6 μέλλων se. ᾿Αδάμ. 
[2. one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 WH mrg. 
(cf. ’Adpeiv).]* 

ἀδάπανος, -ov, (δαπάνη), without expense, requiring no 
outlay: 1 Co. ix. 18 (wa ἀδάπανον θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 
‘that I may make Christian instruction gratuitous’).* 

᾿Αδϑί or “Added T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and 
8. v. €t,¢],6, the indecl. prop. name of one of the ances- 
tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.* 

ἀδελφή, -ῆς, ἡ. (see ἀδελφός), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sis- 
ter ; 1. a full, own sister (i.e. by birth): Mt. xix. 
29; Lk. x. 39 sq.; Jn. xi. 1, 3, 5; xix. 25; Ro. xvi. 15, 
ete.; respecting the sisters of Christ, mentioned in Mt. 
xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3, see ἀδελφός, 1. 2. one connected 
by the tie of the Christian religion: 1 Co. vii. 153; ix. 5; 
Philem. 2 L'T Tr WH; Jas. ii. 15; with a subj. gen., a 
Christian woman especially dear to one, Ro. xvi. 1. 

ἀδελφός, -οῦ, ὁ, (fr. a copulative and δελφύς, from the 
same womb; cf. ἀγάστωρ), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. a 
brother (whether born of the same two parents, or only 
of the same father or the same mother): Mt. i. 2; iv. 18, 
and often. That ‘the brethren of Jesus,’ Mt. xii. 46, 47 
[but WH only in mrg.]; xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 3 (in the 
last two passages also sisters); Lk. viii. 19 sq.; Jn. ii. 
12; vii. 8; Acts i. 14; Gal. i. 19; 1 Co. 1. 5, are 
neither sons of Joseph by a wife married before Mary 
(which is the account in the Apocryphal Gospels [ef. 
Thilo, Cod. Apocr. N. T. i. 8362 sq.]), nor cousins, the 
children of Alpheus or Cleophas [i. 6. Clopas] and Mary 
a sister of the mother of Jesus (the current opinion 
among the doctors of the church since Jerome and Au- 
sustine [ef. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal., diss. ii.]), accord- 
ing to that use of language by which ἀδελφός like the 
Hebr. τὶ denotes any blood-relation or kinsman (Gen. 
xiv. 16; 1 S. xx. 29; 2 K. x. 18: 1 Chr. xxiii. 22, 
ete.), but own brothers, born after Jesus, is clear prin- 
cipally from Mt. i. 25 [only in R G]; Lk. ii. 7— where, 
had Mary borne no other children after Jesus, instead 
of υἱὸν πρωτότοκον, the expression υἱὸν μονογενῆ would 
have been used, as well as from Acts i. 14, ef. Jn. vii. 5, 
where the Lord’s brethren are distinguished from the 
apostles. See further on this point under Ἰάκωβος, 3. 
(Cf. B. D. s. v. Brother; Andrews, Life of our Lord, 
pp- 104-116; Bib. Sacr. for 1864, pp. 855-869; for 1869 


ἀδελφοτης 


pp: 745-758; Laurent, N. T. Studien pp. 153-193; Mc- 
Clellan, note on Mt. xiii. 55.) 2. according to a 
flebr. use of ms (Ex. ii. 11; iv. 18, etc.), hardly to be 
met with in prof. auth., having the same national ances- 
tor, belonging to the same people, countryman; so the 
Jews (as the σπέρμα ᾿Αβραάμ. υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ, cf. Acts xiii. 
26; [in Deut. xv. 3 opp. to ὁ ἀλλότριος, οἵ. xvii. 15; 
xv. 12; Philo de septen. § 9 init.]) are called ἀδελφοί: 
Mt. v. 47; Acts iii. 22 (Deut. xviii. 15); vii. 23; xxii. 
5; xxviii. 15, 21; Ro. ix. 3; in address, Acts ii. 29; 
111. 17; xxiii. 1; Heb. vii. 5. 3. just as in Lev. xix. 
17 the word ΤΣ is used interchangeably with }> (but, 
as vss. 16, 18 show, in speaking of /sraelites), so in the 
sayings of Christ, Mt. v. 22, 24; vii. 3 sqq., ἀδελφός is 
used for ὁ πλησίον to denote (as appears from Lk. x. 
29 564.) any fellow-man, — as having one and the same 
father with others, viz. God (Heb. ii. 11), and as de- 
scended from the same first ancestor (Acts xvii. 26) ; 
cf. Epict. diss. 1, 13, 3. 4. a fellow-believer, united to 
another by the bond of affection; so most frequently of 
Christians, constituting as it were but a single family: 
Mt. xxiii. 8; Jn. xxi. 23; Acts vi. 3 [Lchm. om.]; ix. 
ΘῸ: ἘΠῚ. 1: (Χ18]. 1 2; 1 Couweliles ἘΠῚ Ὁ 14: ete: san 
courteous address, Ro. i. 13; vii. 1; 1 Co. i. 10; 1 Jn. 
ii. 7 Rec., and often elsewhere ; yet in the phraseology 
of John it has reference to the new life unto which men 
are begotten again by the efficiency of a common father, 
even God: 1 Jn. ii. 9 sqq.; 111. 10, 14, ete., ef. v. 1. 
5. an associate in employment or office: 1 Co. i. 1; 
2Co.i. 1; ii. 13(12); Eph. vi. 21; Col. i. 1. 6. brethren 
of Christ is used of, a. his brothers by blood; see 1 
above. b. all men: Mt. xxv. 40 [Lchm. br.]; Heb. ii. 
11 sq. [al. refer these exx. to 4.1] c. apostles: Mt. 
xxviii. 10: Jn. xx. 17. d. Christians, as those who are 
destined to be exalted to the same heavenly δόξα (q. v. 
1Π. 4b.) which he enjoys: Ro. viii. 29. 

ἀδελφότης, -ητος, ἡ, brotherhood; the abstract for the 
concrete, a band of brothers i. e. of Christians, Chris- 
tian brethren: 1 Pet. ii. 17; v. 9. (1 Mace. xii. 10, 17, 
the connection of allied nations; 4 Mace. ix. 23; x. 3, 
the connection of brothers; Dio Chrys. ii. 137 [ed. 
Reiske]; often in eccl. writ.) * 

ἄδηλος, -ov, (δῆλος), not manifest: Lk. xi. 44; indis- 
tinct, uncertain, obscure: φωνή, 1 Co. xiv. 8. (In Grk. 
auth. fr. Hes. down.) [Cf. d7)os,fin.; Schmidt ch. 130.]* 

ἀδηλότης, -ητος, ἡ, uncertainty: 1 Tim. vi. 17 πλούτου 
ἀδηλότητι equiv. to πλούτῳ ἀδήλῳ, ef. W. § 34, 8 ἃ. 
[Polyb., Dion. Hal., Philo.]* 

ἀδήλως, adv., uncertainly: 1 Co. ix. 26 οὕτω τρέχω, 
ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως i. 6. not uncertain whither; cf. Mey. 
ad loc. [(Thuc., al.)]* 

ἀδημονέω, -d; (fr. the unused ἀδήμων, and this fr. a 
priv. and δῆμος ; accordingly uncomfortable, as not at 
home, cf. Germ. unheimisch, unheimlich; cf. Bitm. Lexil. 
ii. 136 [Fishlake’s trans. p. 29 sq. But Lob. (Pathol. 
Proleg. p. 238, cf. p. 160) et al. connect it with ἀδήμων, 
ἀδῆσαι; see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 26]); to be troubled, 
distressed: Mt. xxvi. 37; Mk. xiv. 33; Phil. ii. 26. 


11 


ἀδικέω 


(Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 8 ἀδημονῆσαι τὰς ψυχάς, and often in 
prof. auth.) * 

“Αιδης, ἅδης, -ov, ὁ, (for the older ᾿Αἴδης, which Hom. 
uses, and this fr. a priv. and ἰδεῖν, not to be seen, [ οἴ. Lob. 
Path. Element. ii. 6 sq.]); in the classics 1. a prop. 
name, Hades, Pluto, the god of the lower regions; so in 
Hom. always. 2. an appellative, Orcus, the nether world, 
the realm of the dead [ οἵ. Theoer. idyll. 2,159 schol. τὴν τοῦ 
ἅδου κρούει πύλην" τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν ἀποθανεῖται]. Τη the Sept. 
the Hebr. 5ixw is almost always rendered by this word 
(once by θάνατος, 2 ὃ. xxii. 6); it denotes, therefore, in 
bibl. Grk. Orcus, the infernal regions, a dark (Job x. 
21) and dismal place (but cf. yéevva and παράδεισος) in 
the very depths of the earth (Job xi. 8; Is. lvii. 9; 
Am. ix. 2, ete.; see ἄβυσσος), the common receptacle 
of disembodied spirits: Lk. xvi. 23; εἰς ἄδου sc. δόμον, 
Acts ii. 27, 31, ace. to a very common ellipsis, cf. W. 
592 (550) [B. 171 (149)]; (but L T Tr WH in vs. 27 
and T WH in both verses read eis ἅδην ; so Sept. Ps. xv. 
(xvi.) 10); πύλαι ddov, Mt. xvi. 18 (πυλωροὶ adov, Job 
xxxvili. 17; see πύλη) ; κλεῖς τοῦ ἅδου, Rev. i. 18; 
Hades as a power is personified, 1 Co. xv. 55 (where L 
T Tr WH read θάνατε for R G ἅδη [ef. Acts ii. 24 Tr 
mrg.]); Rev. vi. 8; xx.13 sq. Metaph. ἕως ἅδου [κατα- 
βαίνειν or] καταβιβάζεσθαι to [go or] be thrust down 
into the depth of misery and disgrace: Mt. xi. 23 [here 
L Tr WH καταβαίνειν] ; Lk. x. 15 [here Tr mrg. WH txt. 
καταβαίνειν]. [See esp. Boettcher, De Inferis, s. v.”Acdns 
in Grk. index. On the existence and locality of Hades 
ef. Greswell on the Parables, App. ch. x. vol. v. pt. ii. 
pp- 261-406; on the doctrinal significance of the word 
see the BB.DD. and E. R. Craven in Lange on Rey. 
pp- 864-377. ]* 

ἀ-διά-κριτος, -ov, (διακρίνω to distinguish); 1. wndis- 
tinguished and undistinguishable: φωνή, Polyb. 15, 12, 9; 
λόγος, Leian. Jup. Trag. 25; for 343, Gen. i. 2 Symm. 
2. without dubiousness, ambiguity, or uncertainty (see 
διακρίνω, Pass. and Mid. 3 [al. without variance, cf. δια- 
κρίνω, 2]): ἡ ἄνωθεν σοφία, Jas. iii. 17 (Ignat. ad Eph. 
3,2 Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς τὸ ἀδιάκριτον ἡμῶν ζῆν [yet al. take 
the word here i. 4- inseparable, ef. Zahn in Patr. Apost. 
Opp., ed. Gebh., Harn. and Zahn, fase. 11. p. 7; see also 
in general Zahn, Ignatius, p. 429 note!; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Ignat. 1. c.; Soph. Lex.s.v. Used from Hippoer. down. }).* 

ἀδιάλειπτος, -ov, (διαλείπω to intermit, leave off), uninter- 
mitted, unceasing: Ro. ix. 2; 2 Tim.i.3. [Tim. Loer. 98 e.]* 

ἀδιαλείπτως, adv., without intermission, incessantly, as- 
siduously: Ro.i.9; 1 Th. i. 2 (3); ii-13; v.17. [Polyb., 
Diod., Strabo; 1 Mace. xii. 11.]* 

ἀ-δια-φθορία, -as, ἡ, (fr. ἀδιάφθορος incorrupt, incor- 
ruptible; and this from ἀδιαφθείρω), incorruptibility, 
soundness, integrity: of mind, ἐν τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ, Tit. ii. 
7 (LT Tr WH ἀφθορίαν). Not found in the classics." 

ἀδικέω, -@; [fut. ἀδικήσω]; 1 aor. ἠδίκησα; Pass., 
[pres. ἀδικοῦμαι}; 1 aor. ἠδικήθην ; literally to be ἄδικος. 
1. absolutely; a. to act unjustly or wickedly, to sin: 
Rey. xxii. 11; Col. iii. 25. Ὁ. to be a criminal, to have 
violated the laws in some way: Acts xxv. 11, (often so 


ἀδίκημα 


in Grk. writ. [ef. W. § 40, 2 6.1). ¢. todo wrong: 1 Co. 
vi. 8; 2 Co. vii. 12. d. to do hurt: Rev. ix. 19. Zh 
transitively; a. ri, to do some wrong, sin in some re- 
spect: Col. iii. 25 (ὃ ἠδίκησε ‘the wrong which he hath 
done’). b. τινά, to wrong some one, act wickedly 
towards him: Acts vii. 26 sq. (by blows); Mt. xx. 13 
(by fraud); 2 Co. vii. 2; pass. ἀδικεῖσθαι to be 
wronged, 2 Co. vii. 12; Acts vii. 24; mid. ἀδικοῦμαι 
to suffer one’s self to be wronged, take wrong [W. 
§ 38, 3; cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 87 sq.]: 1 Co. 
vi. 7; τινὰ οὐδέν [B. § 131,10; W. 227 (213)], Acts 
xxy. 10; Gal. iv. 12; τινά τι, Philem. 18; [ἀδικούμενοι 
μισθὸν ἀδικίας (ΤᾺ. V. suffering wrong as the hire of 
wrong-doing), 2 Pet. ii. 13 WH Tr mrg.]. 
to hurt, damage, harm (in this sense by Greeks of every 
period): Lk. x. 19; Rev. vi. 6; vii. 2 sq.; ix. 4, 10; 
xi. 5; pass. οὐ μὴ ἀδικηθῇ ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου shall suffer 
no violence from death, Rev. ii. 11.* 

ἀδίκημα, -ros, τό, (ἀδικέω), [fr. Hdt. on], a misdeed [τὸ 
ἄδικον . . . ὅταν πραχθῇ. ἀδίκημά ἐστιν, Aristot. Eth. Nic. 
5, 7]: Acts xviii. 14; xxiv. 20; Rev. xviii. 5.* 

ἀδικία, -as, ἡ, (ἄδικος), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. injustice, 
of a judge: Lk. xviii. 6; Ro. ix. 14. 2. unrighteous- 
ness of heart and life; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 25 Grsb.; 
Acts viii. 23 (see σύνδεσμος); Ro. i. 18, 29; ii. 8; vi. 
13; 2 Tim. ii. 19; opp. to ἡ ἀλήθεια, 1 Co. xiii. 6; 2 Th. 
ii. 12; opp. to ἡ δικαιοσύνη, Ro. iii. 5; Heb. i. 9 Tdf.; 
owing to the context, the guilt of unrighteousness, 1 Jn. 
i. 9; ἀπάτη τῆς ἀδικίας deceit which unrighteousness 
uses, 2 Th. ii. 10; μισθὸς ἀδικίας reward (i. e. penalty) 
due to unrighteousness, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [see ἀδικέω, 2 b. 
fin.]. b, spec., unrighteousness by which others are 
deceived: Jn. vii. 18 (opp. to ἀληθής) ; μαμωνᾶς τῆς 
ἀδικίας deceitful riches, Lk. xvi. 9 (cf. ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου, 
Mt. xiii. 22; others think ‘riches wrongly acquired’; 
[others, riches apt to be used unrighteously; cf. vs. 8 and 
Mey. ad loc.]) ; κόσμος τῆς ἀδικίας, a phrase having ref- 
erence to sins of the tongue, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. κόσμος, 8) ; 
treachery, Lk. xvi. 8 (οἰκονόμος τῆς ἀδικίας, [al. take it 
generally, ‘acting unrighteously’]). 38. a deed violat- 
ing law and justice, act of unrighteousness: πᾶσα ἀδικία 
ἁμαρτία ἐστί, 1 Jn. v.17; ἐργάται τῆς ἀδικίας, Lk. xiii. 27; 
ai ἀδικίαι iniquities, misdeeds, Heb. viii. 12 (fr. Sept. 
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 345 ef. Dan. iv. 20 (24)); μισθὸς 
ἀδικίας reward obtained by wrong-doing, Acts i. 18; 
2 Pet. ii. 15; spee., the wrong of depriving another 
of what is his, 2 Co. xii. 13 (where a favor is ironically 
called ad:xia).* 

ἄδικος, -ov, (δίκη), [fr. Hes. down]; descriptive of one 
who violates or has violated justice ; 1. unjust, (of 
God as judge): Ro. iii. 5; Eeb. vi. 10. 2. of one 
who breaks God’s laws, unrighteous, sinful, (see ἀδικία, 
2): [1 Co. vi. 9]; opp. to δίκαιος, Mt. v. 45; Acts xxiv. 
15; 1 Pet. iii. 18; opp. to εὐσεβής, 2 Pet. ii. 9; in this 
sense ace. to Jewish speech the Gentiles are called 
ἄδικοι, 1 Co. vi. 1 (see ἁμαρτωλός, b. B.). 3. spec., of 
one who deals fraudulently with others, Lk. xviii. 11; 
who is false to a trust, Lk. xvi. 10 (opp. to πιστός); 


c. τινά, 


2 ἀδύνατος 


deceitful, μαμωνᾶς, ibid. vs. 11 (for other interpretations 
see ἀδικία, 2 b.).* 

ἀδίκως, adv., unjustly, undeservedly, without fault: πά- 
σχειν, 1 Pet. 11. 19 [A. V. wrongfully. (Fr. Hdt. on.)]* 

᾿Αδμείν, ὁ, Admin, the indecl. prop. name of one of 
the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. 111. 33, where Tdf. reads 
τοῦ ᾿Αδμεὶν rod ᾿Αρνεί for Rec. τοῦ ᾿Αράμ (4. v.), [and WI 
txt. substitute the same reading for τοῦ ᾿Αμιναδάβ τοῦ ~ 
Apap of R G, but in their mrg.’Addp (q. ν. 2) for ᾿Αδμείν ; 
on the spelling of the word see their App. p. 155].* 

ἀ-δόκιμος, -ov, (δόκιμος), [fr. Eur. down], not standing 
the test, not approved; properly of metals and coin, 
ἀργύριον, Is. i. 22; Prov. xxv. 4; νόμισμα, Plat. lege. 
v. p. 742 a, al.; hence, which does not prove itself to 
be such as it ought: γῆ, of sterile soil, Heb. vi. 8; in a 
moral sense [A. V. reprobate], 1 Co. ix. 27; 2 Co. xiii. 
5-7; νοῦς, Ro. i. 28; περὶ τὴν πίστιν, 2 Tim. iii. 8; 
hence, unfit for something: πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἀδ. 
Titi, 16. 

ἄδολος, -ον, (δόλος), [fr. Pind. down], guileless; of 
things, unadulterated, pure: of milk, 1 Pet. ii. 2. [Cf. 
Trench § lvi.]* 

᾿Αδραμυττηνός, -7, -όν, adj., of Adramyttium ( Αδραμύτ- 
τιον, ᾿Αδραμύττειον, ᾿Αδραμμύτειον [also ’Atpapur., etc., cf. 
Poppo, Thue. pt. i. vol. ii. p. 441 sq.; Wetst. on Acts, 
as below; WH “Αδραμυντηνός, cf. their Intr. § 408 and 
App. p- 1607), a sea-port of Mysia: Acts xxvii. 2, [mod- 
ern Edremit, Ydramit, Adramiti, ete.; cf. Me. and S. 
s. v. Adramyttium].* 

᾿Αδρίας [WH ‘Adp.], του, 6, Adrias, the Adriatic Sea 
i. e., in a wide sense, the sea between Greece and Italy: 
Acts xxvii. 27, [ef. B. D. 5. v. Adria; Dict. of Grk. & 
Rom. Geog. s. ν. Adriaticum Mare].* 

ἁδρότης [Rect adp.], -nros, 7, or better (cf. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. ii. 417) ἁδροτής, -jros, [on the accent cf. Ebeling, 
Lex. Hom. 5. v.; Chandler §§ 634, 635], (fr. ddpos 
thick, stout, full-grown, strong, rich [2 K. x. 6, 11, ete.]), 
in Grk. writ. it follows the signif. of the adj. ἁδρός ; once 
in the N. T.: 2 Co. viii. 20, bountiful collection, great 
liberality, [R. V. bounty]. (ἁδροσύνη, of an abundant 
harvest, Hes. épy. 471.) * 

ἀδυνατέω, -@: fut. ἀδυνατήσω ; (ἀδύνατος); a. not to 
have strength, to be weak ; always so of persons in classic 
Grk. b. a thing ἀδυνατεῖ, cannot be done, is impos- 
sible; so only in the Sept. and N. T.: οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει 
mapa τῷ θεῷ [τοῦ θεοῦ L mrg. T Tr WH] πᾶν ῥῆμα, 
Lk. i. 37 (Sept. Gen. xviii. 14) [al. retain the act. sense 
here: from God no word shall be without power, see 
mapa, I. Ὁ. ef. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.]; 
οὐδὲν ἀδυνατήσει ὑμῖν, Mt. xvii. 20, (Job xlii. 2).* 

ἀ-δύνατος, -ov, (δύναμαι), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. without 
strength, impotent: τοῖς ποσί, Acts xiv. 8; fig. of Chris- 
tians whose faith is not yet quite firm, Ro. xv. 1 (opp. 
to δυνατός). 42. impossible (in contrast with δυνατόν) : 
παρά τινι, for (with) any one, Mt. xix. 26; Mk. x. 27; Lk. 
xviii. 27; τὸ ἀδύν. τοῦ νόμου ‘ what the law could not do’ 
(this God effected by, etc.; [al. take τὸ ἀδύν. here as nom. 
absol., cf. B. 381 (326); W. 574 (534); Meyer or Gif- 


abw 
2 


ford ad loc.]), Ro. viii. 3; foll. by ace. with inf., Heb. 
vi. 4,18; x.4; by inf., Heb. xi. 6." 

ἄδω (ἀείδω); common in Grk. of every period; in 
Sept. for 73w ; to sing, chant; 1. intrans.: τινί, to the 
praise of any one (Judith xvi. 1 (2)), Eph. v. 19; Col. 
iii. 16, (in both passages of the lyrical emotion of a 
devout and grateful soul). 2. trans.: ὠδήν, Rev. v. 
ἀρ σιν 8.» πνν θὲ 

ἀεί, [see αἰών], adv., [fr. Hom. down], always; 1. per- 
petually, incessantly: Acts vii. 51; 2 Co. iv. 11; vi. 10; 
Tit.i.12; Heb.iii.10. 42. invariably, at any and every 
time when according to the circumstances something is 
or ought to be done again: Mk. xv. 8 [T WH om.] (at 
every feast); 1 Pet. iii. 15; 2 Pet. i. 12.* 

ἀετός, -οῦ, ὁ, (like Lat. avis, fr. ἄημι on account of its 
wind-like flight [ef. Curtius § 596]), [fr. Hom. down], in 
Sept. for 7), an eagle: Rev. iv.7; viii. 13 (Rec. ἀγγέλου): 
xii. 14. In Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii. 37 (as in Job xxxix. 
30; Proy. xxx. 17) it is better, since eagles are said 
seldom or never to go in quest of carrion, to understand 
with many interpreters either the vultur percnopterus, 
which resembles an eagle (Plin. ἢ. n. 10, 3 “quarti 
generis — viz. aquilarum — est percnopterus”), or the 
vullur barbatus. Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Adler; [ Tristram, 
Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 172 sqq.]. The meaning of 
the proverb [cf. exx. in Wetst. on Mt. 1. 6.1 quoted in 
both passages is, ‘where there are sinners (cf. πτῶμα), 
there judgments from heaven will not be wanting’.* 

ἄζυμος, -ov, (ζύμη), Hebr. 78, unfermented, free from 
leaven; properly: ἄρτοι, Ex. xxix. 2; Joseph. antt. 
3, 6,6; hence the neut. plur. ra ἄζυμα, ΓΝ 2, unleavened 
loaves; ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν ἀζύμων, NI¥DT IM, the (paschal) 
festival at which for seven days the Israelites were 
accustomed to eat unleavened bread in commemoration 
of their exit from Egypt (Ex. xxiii. 15; Lev. xxiii. 6), 
Lk. xxii. 1; ἡ πρώτη (sc. ἡμέρα) τῶν ag. Mt. xxvi. 17; 
Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7; 
xx. 6; the paschal festival itself is called ra ἄζυμα, Mk. 
xiv. 1, [ef. 1 Esdr. i. 10,19; W.176 (166); B. 23 (21)]. 
Figuratively : Christians, if such as they ought to be, 
are called ἄζυμοι i. 6. devoid of the leaven of iniquity, 
free from faults, 1 Co. v. 7; and are admonished 
ἑορτάζειν ἐν ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας, to keep festival with the 
unleavened bread of sincerity and truth, vs. 8. (The 
word occurs twice in prof. auth., viz. Athen. 3, 74 
(ἄρτον) ἄζυμον, Plat. Tim. p. 74 d. ἄζυμος σάρξ flesh not 
yet quite formed, [add Galen de alim. fac. 1, 2].)* 

᾿Αζώρ, Azor, the indecl. prop. name of one of the 
ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13 sq.* 

"Αἴωτος, -ov, ἡ, IW, Azotus, Ashdod, one of the five 
chief cities of the Philistines, lying between Ashkelon 
and Jamnia [i. e. Jabneel] and near the Mediterranean : 
Acts viii. 40; at present a petty village, Esdid. A suc- 
cinct history of the city is given by Gesenius, Thesaur. 
iii. p. 1366; Raumer, Palastina, p. 174; [Alex.’s Kitto 
or Me. and 5. 5. v. Ashdod].* 

ἀηδία, -as, ἡ, (fr. ἀηδής, and this fr. a priv. and ἦδος 
pleasure, delight), [fr. Lysip. down]; 1. unpleasant- 


ai ἡμέραι τῶν ag. Acts xii. 3 ; 


13 


ἀθετέω 


ness, annoyance. 2. dislike, hatred: ἐν ἀηδίᾳ, cod. 
Cantabr. in Lk. xxiii. 12 for Rec. ἐν ἔχθρᾳ." 

ἀήρ, ἀέρος, 6, (ἄημι, dw, (cf. ἄνεμος, init.]), the air (par- 
ticularly the lower and denser, as distinguished from the 
higher and rarer 6 αἰθήρ, cf. Hom. Il. 14, 288), the at- 
mospheric region: Acts xxii. 23; 1 Th. iv. 17; Rey. ix. 
2; xvi. 17; ὁ ἄρχων τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ ἀέρος in Eph. ii. 2 
signifies ‘the ruler of the powers (spirits, see ἐξουσία 
4 ο. BB.) in the air,’ 1. 6. the devil, the prince of the de- 
mons that according to Jewish opinion fill the realm of 
air (cf. Mey. ad loc.; [B. D. Am. ed. 5. ν. Air; Stuart 
in Bib. Sacr. for 1843, p. 139 sq.]). Sometimes indeed, 
ἀήρ denotes a hazy, obscure atmosphere (Hom. Il. 17, 
644; 3,381; 5, 356,ete.; Polyb. 18, 3,7), but is nowhere 
quite equiv. to oxdéros, —the sense which many injudi- 
ciously assign it in Eph. 1. 6. ἀέρα δέρειν (cf. verberat 
ictibus auras, Verg. Aen. 5, 377, of pugilists who miss 
their aim) 1. 6. to contend in vain, 1 Co. ix. 26; εἰς 
ἀέρα λαλεῖν (verba ventis profundere, Lucr. 4, 929 (932)) 
‘to speak into the air’ i. e. without effect, used of 
those who speak what is not understood by the hearers, 
1 Co. xiv. 9* 

ἀθανασία, -as, 7, (ἀθάνατος), immortality: 1 Co. xv. 
53 sq.; 1 Tim. vi. 16 where God is described as ὁ μόνος 
ἔχων ἀθανασίαν. because he possesses it essentially —‘éx 
τῆς οἰκείας οὐσίας. οὐκ ἐκ θελήματος ἄλλου, καθάπερ οἱ λοιποὶ 
πάντες ἀθάνατοι᾽ Justin, quaest. et resp. ad orthod. 61 
p- 84 ed. Otto. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) * 

ἀ-θέμιτος, -ov, a later form for the ancient and prefer- 
able ἀθέμιστος, (θεμιτός, θεμιστός, θεμίζω, θέμις law, 
right), contrary to law and justice, prohibited by law, 
illicit, criminal: 1 Pet. iv. 3 [here A. V. abominable]; 
ἀθέμιτόν ἐστί τινι with inf., Acts x. 28." 

G-Bc0s, -ov, (Geos), [fr. Pind. down], without God, know- 
ing and worshipping no God, in which sense Ael. ν. h. 
2, 31 declares ὅτι μηδεὶς τῶν βαρβάρων ἄθεος ; in classic 
auth. generally slighting the gods, impious, repudiating 
the gods recognized by the state, in which sense certain 
Greek philosophers, the Jews (Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 14, 4), 
and subsequently Christians were called ἄθεοι by the 
heathen (Justin, apol. 1, 13, ete.). In Eph. ii. 12 of 
one who neither knows nor worships the true God; 
so of the heathen (cf. 1 Th. iv. 5; Gal. iv. 8); Clem. 
Alex. protr. ii. 23 p. 19 Pott. ἀθέους . . . ot τὸν ὄντως ὄντα 
θεὸν ἠγνοήκασι, Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 25 αἰγυπτιακὴ ἀθεότης, 


Hos. ἵν. 15 Symm. οἶκος ἀθεΐας a house in which idols are 


worshipped, Ignat. ad Trall. 10 ἄθεοι τουτέστιν ἄπιστοι 
(of the Docetae); [al. understand Eph. 1. 6. passively 
deserted of God, Vulg. sine Deo; on the various mean- 
ings of the word see Mey. (or Ellic.)].* 

ἄ-θεσμος, -ov, (θεσμός, lawless, [A. V. wicked]; of one 
who breaks through the restraints of law and gratifies 
[Sept., Diod., Philo, 


his lusts: 2 Pet. ii. 7; iii. 17. 
Joseph., Plut.]* 

ἀθετέω, -ὥ ; fut. dbernow; 1 aor. ἠθέτησα ; a word met 
with first (yet very often) in Sept. and Polyb.; a. 
properly, to render ἄθετον ; do away with θετόν τι 1. e. 
something laid down, prescribed, established : διαθήκην, Gal. 


ἀθέτησις 


iii. 15, (1 Mace. xi. 86; 2 Mace. xiii. 25, οἷο.) ; acc. to 
the context, ‘to act towards anything as though it were 
annulled’; hence to deprive a law of force by opinions 
or acts opposed to it, to transgress it, Mk. vii. 9; Heb. 
x. 28, (Ezek. xxii. 26); πίστιν, to break one’s promise 
or engagement, 1 Tim. v. 12; (Polyb. 8, 2, 5; 11, 29, 3, 
al.; Diod. excerpt. [i. e. de virt. et vit.] p. 562, 67). 
Hence Ῥ. fo thwart the efficacy of anything, nullify, 
make void, frustrate: τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. vii. 30 
(they rendered ineflicacious the saving purpose of God); 
τὴν σύνεσιν to render prudent plans of no effect, 1 Co. 
i. 19 (Is. xxix. 14 [where κρύψω, yet cf. Bos’s note]). 
c. to reject, refuse, slight: τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. ii. 21 
[al. refer this to b.]; of persons: Mk. vi. 26 (by break- 
ing the promise given her); Lk. x. 16; Jn. xii. 48; 
1 Th. iv. 8; Jude 8 (for which καταφρονεῖν is used in 
the parallel pass. 2 Pet. ii. 10). [For exx. of the use 
of this word see Soph. Lex. s. v.]* 

ἀθέτησις, -ews, ἡ, (ἀθετέω, q. νι; like νουθέτησις fr. 
νουθετεῖν), abolition: Heb. vii. 18; ix. 26; (found occa- 
sionally in later authors, as Cicero ad Att. 6, 9; Diog. 
Laért. 3, 39, 66; in the grammarians rejection; more 
frequently in eccl. writ.).* 

᾿Αθῆναι, -av, ai, (on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166)), 
Athens, the most celebrated city of Greece: Acts xvii. 
15 sq.; xviii. 1; 1 Th. iii. 1.* 

᾿Αθηναῖος, -ala, -aiov, Athenian: Acts xvii. 21 sq.* 

ἀθλέω, -d; [1 aor. subjune. 3 pers. sing. ἀθλήσῃ] ; 
(ἄθλος a contest); to engage in a contest, contend in 
public games (e. g. Olympian, Pythian, Isthmian), with 
the poniard [?], gauntlet, quoit, in wrestling, running, 
or any other way: 2 Tim. ii. 5; (often in classic auth. 
who also use the form ἀθλεύω). [Comp.: συν-αθλέω.] " 

ἄθλησις, -ews, 7, contest, combat, (freq. fr. Polyb. down) ; 
fig. ἄθλησις παθημάτων a struggle with sufferings, trials, 
Heb. x. 32; [of martyrdom, Ign. mart. 4; Clem. mart. 25].* 

ἀθροίζω: pf. pass. ptep. ἠθροισμένος ; (fr. ἀθρόος i. α. 
θρόος [a noisy crowd, noise], with a copulative [see A, 
a, 2]); to collect together, assemble; pass. to be assembled, 
to convene: Lk. xxiv. 33 LT Tr WH. ([Soph.,] Xen., 
Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.; O. T. Apocr.; sometimes in 
Sept. for pap.) [Comp.: éx-, συν-αθροίζω.] * 

ἀθυμέω, -@ ; common among the Greeks fr. [Aeschyl., ] 
Thue. down; to be ἄθυμος (θυμός spirit, courage), to be 
disheartened, dispirited, broken in spirit: Col. iii. 21. 
(Sept. 1 5. i. 6 sq., ete.; Judith vii. 22; 1 Mace. iv. 
27.)* 

ἀθῶος [ἢ G Tr], more correctly ἀθῷος (L WH and T 
[but not in his Sept. There is want of agreement among 
both the ancient gramm. and modern scholars; ef. Steph. 
Thes. i. col. 875 c.; Lob. Path. Element. i. 440 sq. (cf. 
li. 377) ; see 1, 4]), τον, (θωή [i. 6. θωϊη. cf. Etym. Mag. 
p- 26, 24] punishment), [fr. Plat. down], unpunished, 
innocent: αἷμα ἀθῷον, Mt. xxvii. 4 [Tr mrg. WH txt. 
δίκαιον], (Deut. xxvii. 25; 1 S. xix. 5, ete.; 1 Mace. i. 
87; 2 Mace. i. 8); ἀπό τινος, after the Hebr. [2 2 
({ Num. xxxii. 22; cf. Gen. xxiv. 41; 2 S. iii. 28; W.197 
(185); B. 158 (138)]), ‘innocent (and therefore far) 


14 


Αἰθίοψ 


from,’ innocent of, Matt. xxvii. 24 (the guilt of the mur- 
der of this innocent man cannot be laid upon me) ; ἀπὸ 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2 [cf. Num. ν. 31]. 
The Greeks say ἀθῷός τινος [both in the sense of free 
from and unpunished for].* 

atyeos [WH -yos; see their App. p. 154, and I, ¢], 
-εία, -etov, (aig, gen. -γός goat, male or female), of a goat, 
(cf. καμήλειος, ἵππειος, ὕειος, προβάτειος, etc.) : Heb. xi. 
37. [From Hom. down.]* 

αἰγιαλός, -οὔ, 6, the shore of the sea, beach, [fr. Hom. 
down]: Mt. xiii. 2, 48; Jn. xxi. 4; Acts xxi. 5; xxvii. 
39,40. (Many derive the word from ἄγνυμι and dds, as 
though equiv. to axrn, the place where the sea breaks ; 
others fr. αἶγες billows and ds [Curtius § 140; Vaniéek p. 
83]; others fr. ἀΐσσω and ἅλς [Schenkl, L. and S., s. vy. ], 
the place where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.) * 

Αἰγύπτιος, -a, -ov, a gentile adjective, Egyptian: Acts 
vii. 22, 24, 28; xxi. 38; Heb. xi. 29.* 

Αἴγυπτος, -ov, 7, [always without the art., B. 87 (76); 
W. § 18, 5 a.], the proper name of a well-known coun- 
try, Egypt: Mt. ii. 13 sq.; Acts ii. 10; Heb. iii. 16, ete. ; 
more fully γῆ Αἴγυπτος, Acts vii. 36 [not L WH Tr txt.], 
40; xiii. 17; Heb. viii. 9; Jude 5, (Ex. v. 12; vi. 26, 
ete.; 1 Mace. i. 19; Bar. i. 19 sq., ete.) ; ἡ γῆ Αἴγυπτος, 
Acts vii. 11; ἐν Αἰγύπτου se. γῇ, Heb. xi. 26 Lehm., 
but cf. Bleek ad loc.; B. 171 (149); [W. 384 (359)]. 
In Rev. xi. 8 Avy. is figuratively used for Jerusalem i. 6. 
for the Jewish nation viewed as persecuting Christ and 
his followers, and so to be likened to the Egyptians in 
their ancient hostility to the true God and their endeay- 
ors to crush his people. 

ἀΐδιος, -ov, (for deidios fr. ἀεί), eternal, everlasting : 
(Sap. vii. 26) Ro. i. 20; Jude 6. (Hom. hymn. 29, 3; 
Hes. scut. 310, and fr. Thue. down in prose; [freq. in 
Philo, e. g. de profug. § 18 (ζωὴ ἀΐδιος), § 31; de opif. 
mund. § 2, § 61; de cherub. § 1, § 2, § 3; de post. 
Cain. § 11 fin. Syn. see αἰώνιος.) * 

αἰδώς, (-oos) -ovs, 7; fr. Hom. down; a sense of shame, 
modesty: 1 Tim. ii.9; reverence, Heb. xii. 28 (λατρεύειν 
θεῷ μετὰ αἰδοῦς καὶ εὐλαβείας. but L T Tr WH εὐλαβείας 
καὶ δέους). [SYN. αἰδώς, αἰσχύνη: Ammonius distin- 
cuishes the words as follows, αἰδὼς καὶ αἰσχύνη διαφέρει, 
ὅτι ἡ μὲν αἰδώς ἐστιν ἐντροπὴ πρὸς ἕκαστον, ὡς σεβομένως 
τις ἔχει - αἰσχύνη δ᾽ ἐφ᾽ οἷς ἕκαστος ἁμαρτὼν αἰσχύνεται. ὡς 
μὴ δέον τι πράξας. καὶ αἰδεῖται μέν τις τὸν πατέρα " αἰσχύνε- 
ται δὲ ὃς μεθύσκεται, ete., οἴο. ; accordingly αἰδ. is promi- 
nently objective in its reference, having regard to 
others; while aicy. is subjective, making reference to 
one’s self and one’s actions. Cf. Schmidt ch. 140. It is 
often said that ‘aid. precedes and prevents the shame- 
ful act, αἰσχ- reflects upon its consequences in the shame 
it brings with it’ (Cope, Aristot. rhet. 5, 6, 1). aid. 
is the nobler word, aicx. the stronger; while “aid. would 
always restrain a good man from an unworthy act, aicy. 
would sometimes restrain a bad one.” Trench 88 xix. 
56. lie 

Αἰθίοψ, -οπος. 6, (atm to burn, and ὧψ [ὄψ᾽] the face ; 
swarthy), Ethiopian (Hebr. v3): Acts viii. 27, here 


εἷμα 


the reference is to upper Ethiopia, called Habesh or 
Abyssinia, a country of Africa adjoining Egypt and 
including the island Meroé; [see Dillmann in Schenkel 
i. 285 sqq.; Alex.’s Kitto or Me. and S. 8. v. Ethiopia. 
Cf. Bib. Saer. for 1866, p. 515).* 

αἷμα, -ros, τό, blood, whether of men or of animals; 
1. a. simply and generally: Jn. xix. 34; Rev. viii. 7 
56. ; xi. 6; xvi. 3 sq. 6” (on which passages cf. Ex. vii. 
20 544.) ; xix. 13; ῥύσις αἵματος, Mk. v. 25, [(πηγὴ αἷμ. 
29)]; Lk. viii. 43 sq.; θρόμβοι αἵματος, Lk. xxii. 44 
[L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where 
the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden, 
Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; cf. Lev. iii. 17; vil. 16 (26); 
xvii. 10; see Knobel on Ley. vii. 26 sq.; [Kalisch on 
Lev., Preliminary Essay ὃ 1]; Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 
94. ὍὌ. As it was anciently believed that the blood is 
the seat of the life (Lev. xvii. 11; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl. 
Psychol. pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans. p. 281 sqq-)]), the 
phrase σὰρξ x. αἷμα (D7) 3, a common phrase in Rab- 
binical writers), or in inverse order αἷμα x. σάρξ, denotes 
man’s living body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co. 
xv. 50; Heb. ii. 14, and so hints at the contrast between 
man and God (or even the more exalted creatures, Eph. 
vi. 12) as to suggest his feebleness, Eph. vi. 12 (Sir. xiv. 
18), which is conspicuous as respects the knowledge of 
divine things, Gal. 1. 16: Mt. xvi.17. ο. Since the 
first germs of animal life are thought to be in the blood 
(Sap. vii. 2; Eustath. ad Il. 6, 211 (ii. 104, 2) τὸ δὲ αἵματος 
ἀντὶ τοῦ σπέρματός φασιν οἱ σοφοὶ, as τοῦ σπέρματος ὕλην 
τὸ αἷμα ἔχοντος), the word serves to denote generation 
and origin (in the classics also) : Jn. i. 13 (on the plur. 
ef. W.177 (166)); Acts xvii. 26 [R G]. da. It is 
used of those things which by their redness resemble 
blood : ai. σταφυλῆς the juice of the grape [* the blood 
of grapes,’ Gen. xlix. 11; Deut. xxxii. 14], Sir. xxxix. 
26; 1.15; 1 Mace. vi. 34, ete.; Achill. Tat. ii. 2; ref- 
erence to this is made in Rev. xiv. 18-20. εἰς αἷμα, 
of the moon, Acts ii. 20 (Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)), 1. 4ᾳ. ὡς αἷμα, 
Rev. vi. 12. 2. blood shed or to be shed by violence 
(very often also in the classics); a.: Lk. xiii. 1 (the 
meaning is, whom Pilate had ordered to be massacred 
while they were sacrificing, so that their blood mingled 
with the blood [yet ef. W. 623 (579)] of the victims) ; 
ai. ἀθῷον [or δίκαιον Tr mrg. WH txt.] the blood of an 
innocent [or righteous] man viz. to be shed, Mt. xxvii. 
4; ἐκχεῖν and ἐκχύνειν αἷμα (D7 Jaw, Gen. ix. 6; Is. lix. 
7, ete.) to shed blood, slay, Mt. xxiii. 85; Lk. xi. 50; 
Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6" [here Tdf. 
αἵματα] ; hence αἷμα is used for the bloody death itself : 
Mt. xxiii. 30, 35; xxvii. 24; Lk. xi. 51; Acts [ii. 19, 
yet cf. 1d. above;] xx. 26; Rey. xvii. 6; μέχρις αἵμα- 
tos unto blood i.e. so as to undergo a bloody death, 
Heb. xii. 4, (τὸν αἴτιον τῆς... μέχρις αἵματος στάσεως, 
Heliod. 7, 8); τιμὴ αἵματος ‘price of blood’ i. 6. price 
received for murder, Mt. xxvii. 6; ἀγρὸς αἵματος field 
bought with the price of blood, Mt. xxvii. 8, i. q. χωρίον 
αἵματος, Acts i. 19 — unless in this latter passage we 
prefer the explanation, which agrees better with the 


15 


aipoppoew 


context, ‘the field dyed with the blood of Judas’; 
the guilt and punishment of bloodshed, in the following 
Hebraistic expressions: ἐν αὐτῇ αἵματα (Rec. αἷμα [so L 
Tr WH)) εὑρέθη i. 6. it was discovered that she was 
guilty of murders, Rev. xviii. 24 (cf. πόλις αἱμάτων, 
Ezek. xxiv. 6); τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς (sc. ἐλθέτω) let 
the penalty of the bloodshed fall on us, Mt. xxvii. 25; 
τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν (sc. ἐλθέτω) let the 
guilt of your destruction be reckoned to your own ac- 
count, Acts xviii. 6 (cf. 2 S. 1. 16; Josh. ii. 19, ete.) ; 
ἐπάγειν τὸ αἷμά τινος ἐπί twa to cause the punishment of 
a murder to be visited on any one, Acts v. 28; ἐκζητεῖν 
τὸ αἷμά τινος ἀπό Twos ("3 Ὑ2 /D DI 3, 2 S.. iv. 11% 
Ezek. iii. 18, 20; xxxiii. 8), to exact of any one the 
penalty for another’s death, Lk. xi. 50; the same idea 
is expressed by ἐκδικεῖν τὸ αἷμά twos, Rey. vi. 10; xix. 
2. Ῥ. It is used specially of the blood of sacrificial 
victims having a purifying or expiating power (Ley. 
xvii. 11): Heb. ix. 7, 12 sq. 18-22, 25; x. 4; xi. 28; 
xiii. 11. 6. Frequent mention is made in the N.T. 
of the blood of Christ (αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 Co. x. 16; 
Tov κυρίου, Xi. 27; τοῦ dpviov, Rev. vii. 14; xii. 11, cf. 
xix. 13) shed on the cross (ai. rod σταυροῦ, Col. i. 20) for 
the salvation of many, Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24, cf. 
Lk. xxii. 20; the pledge of redemption, Eph. i. 7 (ἀπο- 
λύτρωσις διὰ τοῦ ai. αὐτοῦ ; so too in Col. i. 14 Rec.); 
1 Pet. i. 19 (see ἀγοράζω, 2b.) ; having expiatory effi- 
cacy, Ro. iii. 25; Heb. ix. 12; by which believers are 
purified and are cleansed from the guilt of sin, Heb. ix. 
14; xii. 24; [xili.12]; 1 Jn.i. 7 (cf. 1 Jn. v. 6, 8); Rev. 
i. 5; vii. 14; 1 Pet. i. 2; are rendered acceptable to 
God, Ro. v. 9, and find access into the heavenly sanc- 
tuary, Heb. x. 19; by which the Gentiles are brought 
to God and the blessings of his kingdom, Eph. ii. 13, 
and in general all rational beings on earth and in 
heaven are reconciled to God, Col. i. 20; with which 
Christ purchased for himself the church, Acts xx. 28, 
and gathered it for God, Rev. v. 9. Moreover, since 
Christ’s dying blood served to establish new religious 
institutions and a new relationship between men and 
God, it is likened also to a federative or covenant sacri- 
fice: τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης the blood by the shedding of 
which the covenant should be ratified, Mt. xxvi. 28; 
Mk. xiv. 24, or has been ratified, Heb. x. 29; xiii. 20 
(cf. ix. 20); add, 1 Co. xi. 25; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject 
this pass.] (in both which the meaning is, ‘ this cup con- 
taining wine, an emblem of blood, is rendered by the 
shedding of my blood an emblem of the new covenant’), 
1 Co. xi. 27; (ef. Cie. pro Sestio 10, 24 foedus san- 
guine meo ictum sanciri, Liv. 23, 8 sanguine Hannibalis 
sanciam Romanum foedus). πίνειν τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ (i. e. 
of Christ), to appropriate the saving results of Christ’s 
death, Jn. vi.53 sq. 56. [ Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 34 5.1" 
αἱματεκχυσία, -as, 7, (αἷμα and ἐκχύνω), shedding of 
blood: Heb. ix. 22. Several times also in ecel. writ.* 
αἱμορροέω, -@; to be αἱμόρροος (αἷμα and péw), to suffe> 
from a flow of blood: Mt. ix. 20. (Sept. Lev. xv. 33, 
where it means menstruous, and in medical writ.) * 


Aivéas 


16 


αι βω 


Αἰνέας, -ov, ὁ, Ae’neas, the prop. name of the para- | Am. ed. 8. v. Sects; Burton, Bampt. Lect. for 1829; 


lytic cured by Peter: Acts ix. 33 sq.* 

αἴνεσις, -ews, 7, (αἰνέω), praise: θυσία αἰνέσεως (MII 
mann, Ley. vii. 13), Heb. xiii. 15 a thank-offering, 
ΓΑ. V. ‘sacrifice of praise ’], presented to God for some 
benefit received; see θυσία, Ὁ. (αἴνεσις often occurs in 
Sept., but not in prof. auth.) * 

αἰνέω, -3; (found in prof. auth. of every age [“ only 
twice in good Attie prose” (where émaw. mapaw. ete. 
take its place), Veitch], but esp. freq. in Sept. and the 
Apoer. of the O. T.; from αἶνος) ; to praise, extol: τὸν 
θεόν, Lk. ii. 13, 20; xix. 87; xxiv. 53 [WH om. Tr txt. 
br.]; Acts ii. 47; iii. 8 sq.; Ro. xv. 11; with dat. of 
person, τῷ θεῷ, to sing praises in honor of God, Rev. 
xix. 5 L T Tr WH, as Sept. in 2 Chr. vii. 3 (for 
5 Mn), 1 Chr. xvi. 36; xxiii. 5; Jer. xx. 13 ete. (for 
ἢ 55m) 5 [W.§ 31,1; B.176 (153). Comp. ἐπ-, παρ- 
awvéw. |.* 

αἴνιγμα, -ros, τό, (common fr. [Pind. frag. 165 (190),] 
Aeschyl. down; fr. αἰνίσσομαι or aivirropai τι to express 
something obscurely, [fr. αἶνος, 4. ν.7); 1. an obscure 
saying, an enigma, Hebr. WN (Judg. xiv. 13, Sept. 
πρόβλημα). 2. an obscure thing: 1 Co. xiii. 12, where 
ἐν αἰνίγματι is not equiv. to αἰνιγματικῶς i. 6. ἀμαυρῶς 
obscurely, but denotes the object in the discerning of 
which wé are engaged, as βλέπειν ἔν τινι, Mt. vi. 4; cf. 
De Wette ad loc.; the apostle has in mind Num. xii. 
8 Sept.: ἐν εἴδει καὶ οὐ δὲ αἰνιγμάτων. [Al. take ἐν lo- 
cally, of the sphere in which we are looking; al. refer 
the pass. to 1. and take ἐν instrumentally. ]* 

alvos, -ov, 6, (often used by the Grk. poets) ; 
saying, proverb. 2. praise, laudatory discourse : 
xxi. 16 (Ps. viii. 3); Lk. xviii. 43.* 

Alvéy, 7, (either a strengthened form of 1}}" and equiv. 
to 2}, or a Chaldaie plur. i. q. })7y springs; [al. al.]), 
Aenon, indecl. prop. name, either of a place, or of a 
fountain, not far from Salim: Jn. iii. 23, [thought to be 
Wady Far’ah, running from Mt. Ebal to the Jordan; see 
Conder in “ Pal. Explor. Fund” for July 1874, p.191 sq.; 
Tent Work in Palestine, i. 91 sq.; esp. Stevens in Journ. of 
Exeget.Soc., Dec. 1883, pp. 128-141. Cf. B.D. Am. ed.].* 

αἵρεσις, -ews, 7); 1. (fr. aipéw), act of taking, cap- 
ture: τῆς πόλεως, the storming of a city; in prof. auth. 
2. (fr. aipéopar), choosing, choice, very often in prof. 
writ.: Sept. Lev. xxii. 18; 1 Mace. viii. 30. 3. that 
which is chosen, a chosen course of thought and action; 
hence one’s chosen opinion, tenet; acc. to the context, 
an opinion varying from the true exposition of the 
Christian faith (heresy): 2 Pet. ii. 1 (cf. De Wette ad 
loc.), and in eccl. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. 8. v.]. 4. ἃ 
body of men separating themselves from others and 
following their own tenets [a sect or party]: as the Sad- 
ducees, Acts v. 17; the Pharisees, Acts xv. 5; xxvi. 5; 
the Christians, Acts xxiv. 5, 14 (in both instances with 
a suggestion of reproach) ; xxviii. 22, (in Diog. Laért. 
1 (13,) 18 sq., al., used of the schools of philosophy). 
5. dissensions arising from diversity of opinions and 
aims: Gal. v. 20; 1 Co. xi.19. [Cf. Mey. Il. ος.; B.D. 


ἽΞ α 
Μι. 


JSrom the ground, take up: 


Campbell, Diss. on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt. iv.] * 

aiperitw: 1 aor. ἡρέτισα [Treg. ἡρ., see I,¢]; (fr. afpe- 
τός, see aipew); fo choose: Mt. xii. 18. (Often in Sept. in 
O. T. Apocr. and in 600]. writ.; the mid. is found in 
Ctes. Pers. § 9 [ef. Hdt. ed. Schweig. vi. 2, p. 354]. Cf. 
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 144.) * 

αἱρετικός, -7, -όν, [see aipew]; 1. fitted or able to 
take or choose a thing ; rare in prof. auth. 2. schis- 
nate FOROS, a follower of false doctrine: Tit. iii. 10.* 

aipéw, -d : [thought by some to be akin to ἄγρα, dypéw, 
χείρ, Eng. grip, ete.; ef. Bttm. Lexil. i. 131— but see 
Curtius § 117]; to take. In the N. T. in the mid. 
only: fut. αἱρήσομαι ; 2 aor. εἱλόμην, but G L T Tr WH 
εἱλάμην, 2 Th. ii. 13, ef. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. 
App. p. 165;] W. § 13, 1a.; B. 40 (35), see ἀπέρχομαι 
init.; [ptep. ἑλόμενος, Heb. xi. 25]; to take for one’s self, to 
choose, prefer: Phil. i. 22; 2 Th. ii. 13; μᾶλλον foll. 
by inf. with ἢ (common in Attic), Heb. xi. 25. [Compr.: 
ἀν-, ap-, di; ἐξ-, καθ-, περι-, mpo-atpew. | * 

αἴρω (contr. fr. poet. deipw); fut. ἀρῶ; 1 aor. ἦρα, 
inf. ἄραι, impv. dpov; pf. ἦρκα (Col. ii. 14); Pass., 
(pres. αἴρομαι]; pf. ἦρμαι (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. ἤρθην; 
(on the rejection of iota subser. in these tenses see 
Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439 ;[W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut. 
dpOjcopa; [fr. Hom. down]; in the Sept. generally i. q. 
NWI; to lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise 
stones, Jn. viii. 59; serpents, 
Mk. xvi. 18; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise up- 
wards, elevate, lift up: the hand, Rey. x. 5; the eyes, 
Jn. xi. 41; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, ery 
out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof. writ.) ; 
τὴν ψυχήν, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly 
(with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, ete.) ; in Jn. x. 
24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and 
hope, cf. Liicke [or Meyer] ad loc. ¢. to draw up: 
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 (ἀνασπᾶν, Hab. i. 15); σκάφην, Acts 
xxvii. 17; anchors from the bottom of the sea, Acts xxvii. 
13, where supply τὰς ἀγκύρας; cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W. 
594 (552); B. 146 (127)]. 2. to take upon one’s self 
and carry what has been raised, to bear: twa ἐπὶ χειρῶν, 
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11, (Ps. xe. (xci.) 12); a sick man, 
Mk. ii. 3; ζυγόν, Mt. xi. 29 (Lam. iii. 27); a bed, Mt. 
ix.6; Mk. ii. 9, 11 sq.; Lk. v. 24 sq.; Jn. v. 8-12; 
τὸν σταυρόν, Mt. [x. 38 Lehm. mrg.]; xvi. 24; xxvii. 32; 
Lk. ix. 23; Mk. viii. 34; x. 21 [in R Lbr.]; xv. 21; [AiOov,! 
Rey. xviii. 21; to carry with one, [A. V. take]: Mk. vi. 8: 
Lk. ix. 3; xxii. 36. Both of these ideas are expressed 
in class. Grk. by the mid. αἴρεσθαι. 3. to bear away 
what has been raised, carry off; a. to move from its 
place: Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23, (ἄρθητι be thou taken up, 
removed [B. 52 (45)], sc. from thy place); Mt. xxii. 
13 [Rec.]; Jn. ii. 16; xi. 39, 41; xx. 1. b. to take 
off or away what is attached to anything: Jn. xix. 31, 
38 sq.; to tear away, Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; to rend 
away, cut off, Jn. xv. 2. c. to remove: 1 Co. v. 2 
(cast out from the church, where ἀρθῇ should be read 
for Rec. ἐξαρθῇ); tropically: faults, Eph. iv. 31; me 


> , 
αἰσθάνομαι 


ἁμαρτίαν, Jn. i. 29, [86 Lehm. in br.], to remove the guilt 
and punishment of sin by expiation, or to cause that sin 
be neither imputed nor punished (αἴρειν ἁμάρτημα, 1 S. 
xv. 25; ἀνόμημα, 1 S. xxv. 28, i. 6. to grant pardon for 
an offence) ; but in 1 Jn. iii. 5 ras ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν αἴρειν 
is to cause our sins to cease, i. e. that we no longer sin, 
while we enter into fellowship with Christ, who is free 
from sin, and abide in that fellowship, cf. vs. 6. d. to 
carry off, carry away with one: Mt. xiv. 12, 20; xv. 37; 
xx. 14; xxiv. 17 sq.; Mk. vi. 29, 43; viii. 8, 19 sq.; 
xill. 15 sq.5 Lk. ix. 17; xvii. 31; Jn. xx, 2, 13, 15; 
Acts xx. 9. 6. to appropriate what is taken: Lk. 
xix. 21 sq.; Mk. xv. 24. f. to take away from another 
what is his or what is committed to him, to take by force: 
Lk. vi. 30; xi. 52; τὶ ἀπό with gen. of pers., Mt. xiii. 
LR ΧΕΙ 48: σαν. 28; 1. Vill 12, 15.1 πἰς. 1245 96. 
[Mt. xxv. 29]; ΜΕ. iv. (15), 25; Jn. x. 18; xvi. 22; 
perhaps also with the mere gen. of the pers. from whom 
anything is taken, Lk. vi. 29; xi. 22; Jn. xi. 48, unless 
one prefer to regard these as possessive gen. β΄. to take 
and apply to any use: Acts xxi. 11; 1 Co. vi. 15. h. to 
take from among the living, either by a natural death, 
Jn. xvii. 15 (ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου take away from intercourse 
with the world), or by violence, Mt. xxiv. 39;. Lk. 
xxiii. 18; Jn. xix. 15; Acts xxi. 36; with the addition 
of ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, Acts xxii. 22; αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ 
αὐτοῦ. of a bloody death inflicted upon one, Acts viii. 33 
(Is. liii. 8). i. of things; to take out of the way, de- 
stroy: χειρόγραφον, Col. ii. 14; cause to cease: τὴν 
κρίσιν, Acts viii. 33 (Is. 1π|. 8). [Comp.: ἀπ-, é&, ἐπ-, 
μετ-, συν-, ὑπερ-αίρω.} * 

αἰσθάνομαι : 2 aor. ἠσθόμην ; [fr. Aeschyl. down]; 
depon. mid. to perceive ; 1. by the bodily senses ; 
2. with the mind; to understand: Lk. ix. 45.* 

αἴσθησις, -ews, 7, (αἰσθάνομαι), [fr. Eurip. down], per- 
ception, not only by the senses but also by the intellect ; 
cognition, discernment; (in the Sept., Prov. i. 22; ii. 10, 
ete., i. q- Ny): Phil. i. 9, of moral discernment, the 
understanding of ethical matters, as is plain from what 
is added in vs. 10.* 

αἰσθητήριον, -ov, To, an organ of perception, external 
sense, [Hippoc.]; Plat. Ax. 366 a.; Aristot. polit. 4, 3, 
9, al.; faculty of the mind for perceiving, understanding, 
judging, Heb. v. 14, (Jer. iv. 19 αἰσθητ. τῆς καρδίας. 
4 Mace. ii. 22 [com. text] τὰ ἔνδον αἰσθητήρια)" 

αἰσχροκερδής, -ἐς, (αἰσχρός and κέρδος ; cf. αἰσχροπαθής 
in Philo [de mere. meretr. § 47), eager for base gain, 
[greedy of filthy lucre]: 1 Tim. iii. 3 Ree., 8; Tit. i. 7. 
(Hdt. 1, 187; Xen., Plat., al.; [ef. turpilucricupidus, 
Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 63].) * 

αἰσχροκερδῶς, adv., from eagerness for base gain, [ for 
Jilthy lucre]: 1 Pet. v. 2, ef. Tit. i. 11. Not found 
elsewhere.* 

aloxpodoyla, -as, ἡ, (fr. αἰσχρολόγος, and this fr. αἰσχρός 
and λέγω), foul speaking (Tertull. turpiloguium), low and 
obscene speech, [R. V. shameful speaking]: Col. iii. 8. 
(Xen., Aristot., Polyb.) [Cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.; Trench 
§ xxxiv.]* 


11 


ΓΈ" 
αὐτέεω 


αἰσχρός, -ά, -όν, (fr. αἶσχος baseness, disgrace), base, dis- 
honorable: 1 Co. xi. 6; xiv. 35; Eph. v. 12; Tit. i.11.* 

αἰσχρότης, -ητος, 7, baseness, dishonor: Eph. y. 4 
ΓΑ. V. filthiness]. (Plat. Gorg. 525 a.)* 

αἰσχύνη, -ης, 7, (αἶσχος [cf. aicxpds}); 1. subjec- 
tively, the confusion of one who is ashamed of anything, 
sense of shame: er αἰσχύνης suffused with shame, Lk. 
xiv. 9; τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης those things which 
shame conceals, opp. to φανέρωσις τῆς ἀληθείας, 2 Co. iv. 
2 (evil arts of which one ought tobe ashamed). 2. ob- 
jectively, ignominy: visited on one by the wicked, Heb. 
xii. 2; which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 19 
(opp. to δόξα). 3. a thing to be ashamed of: ἡ αἰσχύνη 
τῆς γυμνότητος (gen. of appos.).nakedness to be ashamed 
of, Rev. iii. 18, ef. xvi. 15; plur. [ef. W. 176 (166)] ai 
αἰσχῦναι basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13. 
[(Aeschyl., Hdt., al.) Syn. see αἰδώς, fin.]* 

αἰσχύνω: (αἶσχος [cf. αἰσχρός); 1. to disfigure: 
πρόσωπον, Hom. Il. 18, 24, and many others. 2. to 
dishonor: Sept. Prov. xxix. 15. 3. to suffuse with 
shame, make ashamed: Sir. xiii. 7. In the N. T. only 
pass., αἰσχύνομαι: fut. αἰσχυνθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἠσχύνθην; to 
be suffused with shame, be made ashamed, be ashamed : 
2 Co. x. 8; Phil. i. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 16; μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν 
ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ that we may not in shame shrink from him, 
1 Jn. ii. 28 (Sir. xxi. 22 αἰσχυνθήσεται ἀπὸ προσώπου 
[Is. i. 29; Jer. xii. 13; cf. B. § 147, 2]); foil. by inf. 
(on which see W. 346 (325)), Lk. xvi. 8. [Comp.: ἐπ- 
(μαι), κατ-αισχύνω.} * 

αἰτέω, -ῶ; fut. αἰτήσω:; 1 aor. ἤτησα: pf. ἤτηκα ; Mid., 
pres. αἰτοῦμαι ; impf. ἠτούμην ; fut. αἰτήσομαι ; 1 aor. 
ἡτησάμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to ask; mid. to ask for 
one’s self, request for one’s self; absol.: Jas. i. 6; Mt. 
vii. 7; mid., Jas. iv. 3; Jn. xvi. 26; Mk. xv. 8; airei- 
σθαί τι, Jn. xv. 7; Mt. xiv. 7; Mk. vi. 24; x. 38; xi. 24; 
xv. 43; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 52; Acts xxv. 3, 15, 
ete. ; αἰτεῖν with ace. of the pers. to whom the request 
is made: Mt. v. 42; vi. 8; Lk. vi. 30; αἰτεῖσθαι with 
acc. of the pers. asked for— whether to be released, 
Mt. xxvii. 20; Mk. xv. 6 [here T WH Tr mre. παραιτ. 
q- v-]; Lk. xxiii. 25; or bestowed as a gift, Acts xiii. 
21; αἰτεῖν τι ἀπό twos, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt.; 
[Lk. xii. 20 Tr WH]; 1 Jn. v. 15 L T Tr WH; (so 
αἰτεῖσθαι in Plut. Galb. 20) [ef. B. 149 (130)]; ri παρά 
τινος, Acts iii. 2; Mt. xx. 20 R G T Tr mre. WH mrg.; 
Jas. i.5; 1 Jn. v.15 RG; foll. by the inf., In. iv. 9; 
mid., Acts ix. 2; [αἰτεῖν τι ἐν τ. ὀνόματι Χριστοῦ, Jn. xiv. 
13; xvi. 24 (see ὄνομα, 2 e.); τὶ ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ. Mt. 
xxi. 22]; αἰτεῖν τινά τι, Mt. vii. 9; Lk. xi. 11; Mk. vi. 
22; Jn. [xiv. 14 T but L WH Tr mre. br.]; xvi. 23; 
ὑπέρ twos foll. by iva, Col. i. 9 [ef. B. 237 (204)]; αἰτεῖ- 
σθαι with the ace. and inf., Lk. xxiii. 23; Acts iii. 14; 
with inf. only, Acts vii. 46 (ἠτήσατο εὑρεῖν he asked that 
he himself might find ; others wrongly translate ἠτήσατο 
desired) ; Eph. iii. 13. With the idea of demanding 
prominent : αἰτεῖν τι, Lk. i. 63; 1 Co. i. 22; τινά τι, Lk. 
xii. 48; 1 Pet. iii. 15. 


[The constructions of this word in the Greek Bible, the 


αἴτημα 


Apost. Fathers, ete., are exhibited in detail by Prof. Ezra 
Abbot in the No. Am. Rey. for Jan. 1872, p. 182 sq. He 
there shows also (in opposition to Trench, § Χ]., and others) 
that it is not “ the constant word for the seeking of the infe- 
rior from the superior,” and so differing from épwrdw, which 
has been assumed to imply ‘a certain equality or familiarity 
between the parties’; that the distinction between the words 
does not turn upon the relative dignity of the person asking 
and the person asked; but that airéw signifies to ask for 
something to be given not done, giving prominence to the 
thing asked for rather than the person, and hence is rarely 
used in exhortation. *Epwrdw, on the other hand, is to re- 
quest a person to do (rarely to give) something ; referring 
more directly to the person, it is naturally used in exhorta- 
tion, etc. ‘The views of Trench are also rejected by Cremer, 
4te Aufl. s.v. The latter distinguishes airéw from similar 
words as follows: “airéw denotes the request of the will, 
ἐπιθυμέω that of the sensibilities, δέομαι the asking of 
need, while ἐρωτάω marks the form of the request, as does 
εὔχεσθαι also, which in classic Greek is the proper expres- 
sion for a request directed to the gods and embodying itself 
in prayer.” Ἐρωτάω, airéw and δέομαι are also compared 
briefly by Green, Critical Notes, ete. (on Jn. xiv. 13, 16). 
who concludes of épwrdw “it cannot serve to indicate directly 
any peculiar position, absolute or relative, of the agent. 
The use of the word may, therefore, be viewed as having 
relation to the manner and cast of the request, namely, when 
carrying a certain freedom of aim and bearing; a thing 
inseparable from the act of direct interrogation”; cf. further 
Schmidt ch. 7. Comp.: ἀπ-, ἐξ-, ἐπ-, παρ-(-μαι), προσ-αιτέω.] 

αἴτημα, -τος, τό, (αἰτέω), [fr. Plato down], what is or 
has been asked for: Lk. xxiii. 24; plur. LA. V. requests], 
Phil. iv. 6 [ef. Ellie. ad loc.]; things asked for, 1 Jn. v. 
15. [See the preceding word, and Trench § li.]* 

αἰτία, -as, 7); 1. cause, reason: Acts x. 21; xxii. 
24; xxviii. 20; κατὰ πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for every cause, Mt. 
xix. 3; 8¢ ἣν αἰτίαν for which cause, wherefore, Lk. viii. 
47; 2 Tim. i. 6,12; Tit. i. 13; Heb. 11. 11; ef. Grimm 
on 2 Mace. iv. 28. 2. cause for which one is worthy 
of punishment; crime of which one is accused: Mt. 
xxvil. 37; Mk. xv. 26; Jn. xviii. 38; xix. 4, [6; Acts 
xxiil. 28]; αἰτία θανάτου [A. V. cause of death] crime 
deserving the punishment of death, Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 
18. 3. charge of crime, accusation: Acts xxv. 18, 27. 
(All these signif. in prof. writ. also; [but L. and S. now 
make signif. 3 the primary].) In Mt. xix. 10 the words 
εἰ οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ αἰτία τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μετὰ τῆς γυναικός find a 
simple explanation in a Latinism (causa i. q. res: si ita res 
se habet, ete.) if the case of the man with his wife is so.* 

αἰτίαμα, -ros, τό, see αἰτίωμα. 

[αἰτιάομαι, -ῶμαι : fo accuse, bring a charge against; 
ἡτιασάμεθα is a various reading in Ro. iii. 9 for the 
προῃτιασάμεθα of the printed texts. (Prov. xix. 3; Sir. 
xxix. 5; freq. in prof. writ.) Syn. see κατηγορέω."] 

αἴτιος, -a, τὸν, that in which the cause of anything 
resides, causative, causing. Hence 1. 6 αἴτιος the 
author: σωτηρίας, Heb. v. 9 (the same phrase is freq. 
in prof. writ.; cf. the opp. ai. τῆς ἀπωλείας in Bel and 
the Dragon vs. 41; τῶν κακῶν, 2 Mace. xiii. 4; Leian. 
Tim. 36 ed. Lips.; τῶν ἀγαθῶν, Isocr. ad Phil. 49 p. 
106 a.; cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 94 sq.). 2. τὸ 


18 


v4 
atL@p 


αἴτιον i. q. ἡ αἰτία; a. cause: Acts xix. 40 [ef. B. 
400 (342) n.]. Ὁ. crime, offence: Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 22. 
(αἴτιος culprit.) [See αἰτία, 8.1" 

αἰτίωμα, -τος, τό, (αἰτιάομαι) ; in Acts xxv. 7 the read- 
ing of the best codd. adopted by ἃ L T Tr WH for Ree. 
aitiapa: accusation, charge of guilt. (A form not found 
in other writ.; [yet Mey. notes αἰτίωσις for αἰτίασις, 
Eustath. p. 1422, 21; see B. 73; WH. App. p. 166].)* 

αἰφνίδιος, -ον, (αἴφνης, ἀφανής, ἄφνω q. v.), unexpected, 
sudden, unforeseen: Lk. xxi. 34 [here WH ἐφνίδ., see 
their Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151]; 1 Th. v. 3. (Sap. 
xvii. 14; 2 Mace. xiv. 17; 3 Mace. iii. 24; Aeschyl., 
Thue. 2, 61 τὸ αἰφνίδιον καὶ ἀπροσδόκητον, Polyb., Joseph., 
Plut., Dion. Hal., al.) * 

αἰχμαλωσία, -as, ἡ, (αἰχμάλωτος, q. v.), captivity: Rey. 
xiii. 10; abstr. for coner. i. q. αἰχμάλωτοι (ef. ἀδελφότης 
above), Eph. iv. 8 (fr. Ps. xvii. (Ixviii.) 19, [ef. B. 148 
(129); W. 225 (211)]); also εἴ τις αἰχμαλωσίαν συνάγει 
(ace. to the common but doubtless corrupt text), Rev. 
xiii. 10 (as in Num. xxxi. 12, ete.). [Polyb., Diod., 
Joseph., Plut., al.]* 

αἰχμαλωτεύω; 1 aor. ἠχμαλώτευσα; a later word (ef. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 92 (88)]); to make captive, 
take captive: 2 Tim. iii. 6 Rec.; freq. in the Sept. and 
O. T. Apoer. ; to lead captive: Eph. iv. 8 (Ezek. xii. 3; 
[1 Esdr. vi. 15]).* 

αἰχμαλωτίζω; 1 fut. pass. αἰχμαλωτισθήσομαι; a. 
equiy. to αἰχμάλωτον ποιῶ, which the earlier Greeks use. 
b. to lead away captive: foll. by eis with ace. of place, 
Lk. xxi. 24, (1 Mace. x. 33; Tob.i. 10). ο. fig. to sub- 
Jugate, bring under control: 2 Co. x. 5 (on which passage 
see νόημα, 2); τινά τινι, Ro. vii. 23 [yet T Tr δὲ ete. in- 
sert ἐν before the dat.]; to take captive one’s mind, capti- 
vate: γυναικάρια, 2 Tim. iii. 6 [not Rec.], (Judith xvi. 9 
τὸ κάλλος αὐτῆς ἠχμαλώτισε ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ). The word 
is used also in the Sept., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Arr., 
Heliod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 91 (87); Ellic. 
on 2 Tim. 1. ¢.].* 

alxp-ddwros, -ov, (fr. αἰχμή a spear and ἁλωτός, verbal 
adj. fr. ἁλῶναι, prop. taken by the spear), [fr. Aeschyl. 
down], captive: Lk. iv. 18 (19).* 

αἰών, -dvos, ὁ, (as if αἰὲν ---- poet. for dei —ay, so teaches 
Aristot. de caelo 1, 11, 9, vol. i. p. 279», 27; [so Proclus 
lib. iv. in Plat. Timaeo p. 241; et al.]; but more prob- 
able is the conjecture [ef. Etym. Magn. 41, 11] that 
αἰών is so connected with ἄημι to breathe, blow, as to 
denote properly that which causes life, vital force; cf. 
Harless on Eph. ii. 3). [But αἰών (ΞΞΞ αἰξών) is now gen- 
erally connected with αἰεί, ἀεί, Skr. évas (aivas), Lat. 
aevum, Goth. aivs, Germ. ewig, Eng. aye, ever; cf. Curtius 
§ 585; Fick, Pt. i. p.27; Vaniéek p. 79; Benfey, Wur- 
zellex. i. p. 7 sq.; Schleicher, Compend. ed. 2, p. 400; 
Pott, Etym. Forsch., ed. 2, ii. 2, p. 442; Ebeling, Lex. 
Hom. s. v.; L. and S. s. v. det; Cremer, edd. 2, 3,4 (al- 
though in ed. 1 he agreed with Prof. Grimm); Pott and 
Fick, however, connect it with Skr. dyus rather than 
évas, although both these forms are derived from i to 
go (see Pott, Schleicher, Fick, VWanitek, u. s.).] In 


7 
αιὼν 


Greek authors 1. age (Lat. aevum, which is αἰών 
with the Aeolic digamma), a human lifetime (in Hom., 
Hdt., Pind., Tragie poets), life itself (Hom. Il. 5, 685 
μὲ καὶ λίποι αἰών etc.). 2. an unbroken age, perpetuity 
of time, eternity, (Plat. Tim. p. 37 d. 38 ἃ. ; Tim. Loer. 
p- 97d. [quoted belew]; Plut., al.). With this signifi- 
cation the Hebrew 2nd Rabbinic idea of the word o71p 
(of which in the Sept. αἰών is the equiv.) combines in 
the bibl. and eccl. writ. Hence in the N. T. used 
1. a. uniy.: in the phrases εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, Day (Gen. 
vi. 3), for ever, Jn. vi. 51, 58; xiv. 16; Heb. v. 63 Vi. 
20, ete.; and strengthened εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος, Heb. 
i. 8 [fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7 Alex., cf. W. § 36, 2] (Tob. 
vi. 18; Ps. Ixxxii. (ixxxiii.) 18, ete.); εἰς αἰῶνα, Jude 
13; εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος unto the day which is eternity 
(gen. of appos.), 2 Pet. iii. 18 [ef. Sir. xviii. 10 (9)]; 
with a negation: ever, Jn. iv. 14 [Lchm. in br.]; viii. 
51; x. 28; xi. 26; xiii. 8; 1 Co. viii. 13; or not for 
ever, not always, Jn. viii. 35; εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας unto the 
ages, i. e. as long as time shall be (the plur. denotes the 
individual ages whose sum is eternity): [Lk. i. 33]; 
Ro. i. 25; ix. 5; xi. 36; [xvi. 27 R G Tr WH]; 2 Co. 
xi. 31; Heb. xiii. 8; εἰς πάντας τ. αἰῶνας, Jude 25; εἰς 
τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων (in which expression the endless 
future is divided up into various periods, the shorter of 
which are comprehended in the longer [ef. W. § 36, 2; 
among the various phrases to express duration com- 
posed of this word with prep. or adjuncts, (which to the 
number of more than fifteen are to be found in the 
Sept., cf. Vaugkan on Ro. i. 25), this combination of 
the double plural seems to be peculiar to the N. T.]): 
[Ro. xvi. 27 L ΤΊ; Gal. i. 5; [Phil. iv. 20]; 1 Tim. i. 
ioe Τ τῆς ἰν: 185. 1 Pet. ἢν: Uti); Rev: 1. 6; 18; av. 
DRS Ve IDE Ὑ1 Ἐν ἈΞ OR ΧΙ 15. χυν: 7: Σῖχ. 5.; aoe 
10; xxii. 5; εἰς αἰῶνας αἰώνων, Rev. xiv. 11; 6 αἰὼν τῶν 
αἰώνων the (whole) age embracing the (shorter) ages, 
Eph. iii. 21 (cf. Mey. [or Ellic.] ad loe.); ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων 
from the ages down, from eternity, Col. i. 26; Eph. iii. 
9; πρὸ τῶν αἰώνων before time was, before the founda- 
tion of the world, 1 Co. ii. 7; πρόθεσις τῶν αἰώνων 
eternal purpose, Eph. iii. 11. ὍὌ. in hyperbolic and 
popular usage: ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰῶνος (ον, Gen. vi. 4, cf. 
Deut. xxxii. 7) from the most ancient time down, (within 
the memory of man), from of old, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21; 
xv. 18, (Tob. iv. 12 οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰῶνος ; 
Longin. 34 τοὺς ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος ῥήτορας) ; also ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος, 
Jn. ix. 32, (1 Esdr. ii. 19, 22 (23); Diod. iv. 83 of the 
temple of Venus τὴν ἐξ αἰῶνος ἀρχὴν λαβόν, 17, 1 τοὺς 
ἐξ αἰῶνος βασιλεῖς, [excerpt. de legat. xl.] p. 632 τὴν ἐξ 
αἰῶνος παραδεδομένην ἐλευθερίαν). 2. by meton. of the 
container for the contained, of αἰῶνες denotes the worlds, 
the universe, i. e. the aggregate of things contained in 
time, [on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)]: Heb. 
i. 2; xi. 3; and (Ὁ) 1 Tim. i. 17; [Rev. xv. 3 WH 
txt.; cf. Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 13; Tob. xiii. 6, 10; Sir. 
xxxvi. 22; Philo de plant. Noé § 12 bis; de mundo 
§ 7; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 7; Clem. Rom. 1Cor. 61, 2; 
35, 3 (πατὴρ τ. a.); 55, 6 (θεὸς τ. a.); Constt. Ap. 7, 34; 


19 


2° 
αἰὼν 


see Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. evc.i. p. 106 n.]. So 
αἰών in Sap. xiii. 9; xiv. 6; xviii. 4; the same use oc- 
curs in the Talmud, Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic; οἴ. Bleek, 
Hebriaerbr. ii. 1, p. 36 sqq.; (Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 
1036; (ef. the use of οἱ αἰῶνες in the Fathers i. q. the 
world of mankind, 6. g. Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 2}. 3. As 
the Jews distinguished 739 07ij7 the time before the 
Messiah, and 837 D7iyD the time after the advent of the 
Messiah (cf. Riehm, Lehrb. ἃ. Hebrierbr. p. 204 sqq.; 
[Schiirer § 29,9]), so most of the N. T. writers distin- 
guish ὁ αἰὼν οὗτος his age (also simply 6 αἰών, Mt. xiii. 22; 
Mk. iv. 19 GL Τ Tr WH; ὁ ἐνεστὼς αἰών, Gal. i. 4; ὁ 
νῦν αἰών, 1 Tim. vi.17; [2 Tim. iv. 10]; Tit. ii. 12), the 
time before the appointed return or truly Messianic ad- 
vent of Christ (1. 6. the παρουσία, q. v-), the period of insta- 
bility, weakness, impiety, wickedness, calamity, misery, 
—and αἰὼν μέλλων the future age (also ὁ αἰὼν ἐκεῖνος, Lk. 
xx. 35; 6 αἰὼν ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Lk. xviii. 30; Mk. x. 30; 
οἱ αἰῶνες of ἐπερχόμενοι, Eph. ii. 7), i. 6. the age after 
the return of Christ in majesty, the period of the con- 
summate establishment of the divine kingdom and all 
its blessings: Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i. 21; ef. Fritzsche on 
Rom. vol. iii. 22 sq. Hence the things of ‘this age’ 
are mentioned in the N. T. with censure: ὁ αἰὼν οὗτος, 
by meton. men controlled by the thoughts and pursuits 
of this present time, Ro. xii. 2, the same who are called 
υἱοὶ τοῦ ai. τούτου in Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 34; κατὰ τὸν αἰῶνα 
τοῦ κόσμου τούτου conformably to the age to which this 
(wicked) world belongs, Eph. ii. 2 [ef. Trench § lix. 
sub fin.]; ᾿ἀγαπᾶν τὸν viv αἰῶνα, 2 Tim. iv. 10 (see 
dyamdw); ἄρχοντες τοῦ ai. τούτου, 1 Co. ii. 6 (see ἄρχων); 
ὁ θεὸς τοῦ ai. τούτου the devil, who rules the thoughts 
and deeds of the men of this age, 2 Co. iv. 4; ai μέριμναι 
τοῦ αἰῶνος the anxieties for the things of this age, Mk. 
iv. 19; πλούσιος ἐν τῷ viv αἰῶνι rich in worldly wealth, 
1 Tim. vi. 17; σοφία τοῦ ai. rovr. such wisdom as be- 
longs to this age, — full of error, arrogant, hostile to 
the gospel, 1 Co. ii. 6; συζητητὴς τοῦ ai. rovr. disputer, 
sophist, such as we now find him, 1 Co. i. 20; συντέλεια 
τοῦ ai. τούτ. the end, or rather consummation, of the age 
preceding Christ’s return, with which will be connected 
the resurrection of the dead, the last judgment, the de- 
molition of this world and its restoration to a more ex- 
cellent condition [ef. 4 Esdr. vii. 43], Mt. xiii. 39 sq. 49; 
xxiv. 3; xxviii. 20; it is called συντέλεια τῶν αἰώνων in 
Heb. ix. 26 [so Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 10, test. Benj. 11 
(ef. Vorstman p. 133) ]; τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων the ends (last 
part) of the ages before the return of Christ, 1 Co. x. 11; 
δυνάμεις τοῦ μέλλοντος αἰῶνος powers which present them- 
selves from the future or divine order of things, i.e. the 
Holy Spirit, Heb. vi.5 ; τοῦ αἰῶνος ἐκείνου τυχεῖν ἴο partake 
of the blessings of the future age, Lk. xx. 35. Among 
the N. T. writers James does not use the word αἰών. 
[On the word in its relation to κόσμος see Trench ὃ lix. 
Its biblical sense and its relation to Ὁ 71} are discussed by 
Stuart, Exeget. Essays on Words relating to Fut. Punish- 
ment, Andover, 1830 (and Presbyt. Publ. Committee, Phil.) ; 
Tayler Lewis in Lange’s Com. on Eccl. pp. 44-51; J. W. 
Hanson, Aion-Aionios, (pp. 174), Chicago, 16 See esp. 


αἰὼν 


E. Abbot, Literature of the Doctrine of a Future Life, etc., 
(New York, 1867), Index of subjects 8. v. For its meanings 
in 600]. writ. see Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. i. col. 140 sqq., ef. 
ii. col. 1609; Huet, Origeniana (App. to vol. iv. of De la 
Rue’s Origen) lib. ii. c. ii. quaest. 11, § 26. Its use in Hom., 
Hes., Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Eur., Aristot., Plato, Tim. 
Locr., is exhibited in detail by E. 5. Goodwin in the Christ. 
Exam. for March and May, 1831, March and May, 1832. 
“On αἰών as the complete period, either of each particular life 
or of all existence, see Arist. cael. 1, 9, 15; on aidy and 
χρόνος, cf. Philo [quis rer. div. her. § 34] i. 496, 18 sq.; [de 
mut. nom. ὃ 47] ἰ. 619,10 54. L.and S. ed.6; see also Philo 
de alleg. leg. iii. 8; quod deus immut. § 6 fin.; de prof. ὃ 11; 
de praem. et poen. § 15; and (de mund. opif. § 7) esp. J. G. 
Miiller, Phi\v’s Lehre y. ἃ. Weltschopfung, p. 168 (Berl. 1864). 
Schmidt (ch. 44) gives the distinction, for substance, as fol- 
lows: both words denote the abstract idea of time and with 
special reference to its extent or duration; χρόνος is the 
general designation for time, which can be divided up into 
portions, each of which is in its turn a χρόνος ; on the other 
hand, αἰών, which in the concrete and simple language of 
Homer (Pindar and the Tragedians) denetes the allotted 
lifetime, even the life, of the individual (Il. 4,478 μινυνθάδιος 
δέ οἱ αἰών etc.), in Attic prose differs from χρόνος by denot- 
ing time unlimited and boundless, which is not conceived of 
as divisible into αἰῶνες (contrast here biblical usage and see 
below), but rather into χρόνοι. In philosophical speech it is 
without beginning also. Cf. Tim. Locr. 97 ο. d. χρόνω δὲ τὰ 
μέρεα τάσδε τὰς περιόδως λέγοντι, ἃς ἐκόσμησεν ὃ Beds σὺν 
κόσμῳ: οὐ γὰρ hv πρὸ κόσμω ἄστρα" διόπερ οὐδ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸς οὐδ᾽ 
ὡρᾶν περίοδοι͵ αἷς μετρέεται ὁ γεννατὸς χρόνος οὗτος. εἰκὼν 
δέ ἐστι τῶ ἀγεννάτω χρόνω, ὃν αἰῶνα ποταγορεύομες " ὡς 
γὰρ ποτ᾽ ἀΐδιον παράδειγμα, τὸν ἰδανικὸν κόσμον, ὅδε ὁ wpavds 
ἐγεννάθη, οὕτως ὡς πρὸς παράδειγμα, τὸν αἰῶνα, ὅδε ὁ χρόνος 
σὺν κόσμῳ ἐδαμιουργήθη --- αἴτον Plato, Timaeus p. 37 d. 
(where see Stallbaum’s note and reff.) ; Isocr. 8, 84 τοὺς δὲ 
μετ᾽ εὐσεβείας κ. δικαιοσύνης ζῶντας (ὁρῶ) ἔν τε τοῖς παροῦσι 
χρόνοις ἀσφαλῶς διάγοντας καὶ περὶ τοῦ σύμπαντος αἰῶνος 
ἡδίους τὰς ἐλπίδας ἔχοντας. ‘The adj. ἄχρονος independent 
of time, above and beyond all time, is synon. with αἰώνιος ; 
where time (with its subdivisions and limitations) ends eter- 
nity begins: Nonnus, metaph. evang. Johan. i. 1, &xpovos ἦν, 
ἀκίχητος, ἐν ἀρρήτῳ λόγος ἀρχῇ. Thoroughly Platonic in 
cast are the definitions of Gregory of Nazianzus (orat. 
XXXViil. 8) αἰὼν yap οὔτε χρόνος οὔτε χρόνου τι μέρος " οὐδὲ 
γὰρ μετρητόν, ἄλλ᾽ ὅπερ ἡμῖν ὁ χρόνος ἡλίου φορᾷ μετρούμενος, 
τοῦτο τοῖς ἀϊδίοις αἰών, τὸ συμπαρεκτεινόμενον τοῖς οὖσιν οἷόν 
τι χρονικὸν κίνημα καὶ διάστημα (Suicer u. s.). So Clem. 
Alex. strom. i. 13, p. 750 ἃ. ed. Migne, Ὁ γ᾽ οὖν αἰὼν τοῦ 
χρόνου τὸ μέλλον καὶ τὸ ἐνεστὼς, αὐτὰρ δὴ καὶ τὸ παρῳχηκὸς 
ἀκαριαίως συνίστησι. Instances from extra-biblical writ. .of 
the use of αἰών in the plural are: τὸν am αἰώνων μύθον, 
Anthol. vol. iii. pt. ii. p. 55 ed. Jacobs; εἰς αἰῶνας, ibid. vol. 
iv. epigr. 492 ; ἐκ περιτροπῆς αἰώνων, Joseph. b. 1. 3, 8, 5; εἰς 
αἰῶνας διαμένει, Sext. Empir. adv. Phys. i. 62. The dis- 
cussions which have been raised respecting the word may 
give interest to additional reff. to its use by Philo and Jo- 
sephus. Philo: ὁ πᾶς (ἅπας, σύμπας) or πᾶς (etc.) 5 αἰών: 
de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de cherub. § 1 (a noteworthy passage, 
ef. de congressu ernd. § 11 and reff. s. v. θάνατος) ; de sacrif. 
Ab. et Caini § 11; quod det. pot. § 48; quod deus immut. 
§ 1, § 24; de plantat. § 27; de sobrietate § 13; de migr. Abr. 
§ 2; de prof. § 9; de mut. nom. § 34; de somn. ii. § 15, § 31, 
§ 38; de legat. ad Gaium § 38; (6) μακρὸς ai.: de sacrif. Ab. 
et Caini § Ὁ de ebrietate § 47; de prof. § 20; ai. μήκιστος: 


20 


ay 
αἰώνιος 


de sobrietate § 5; de prof. § 21; ὁ ἄπειρος αἰ. : de legat. ad 
Gaium § 11; 6 ἔμπροσθεν ai.: de praem et. poen. § 6 ; αἱ, 
πολύς: de Abrah. § 46; τίς ai.: de merc. meretr. § 1; δι᾽ al.: 
de cherub, § 26; de plantat. § 27; eis τὸν ai.: de gigant. ὃ 5; 
ἐν (τῷ) αἰ. : de mut. nom. § 2 (bis) (note the restriction) j 
quod deus immut. § 6; ἐξ ai.: de somn. i. § 3; ἐπ᾽ ai.: de 
plantat. § 12 (bis); de mundo ὃ 7; πρὸ ai.: de mut. nom. 
ἡ 2; πρὸς ai.: de mut. nom. § 11; (6) ai.: de prof. § 18; de 
alleg. leg. ili. § 70; de cherub. ὃ 22; de migr. Abr. § 22; de 
somn. i. § 18, § 22; de Josepho § 5; de vita Moys. ii. § 3; 
de decalogo ὃ 14; de victimis § 3; frag. in Mang. ii. 660 
(Richter vi. p. 219); de plantat. § 12 (bis); de mundo ὃ 7. 
Josephus: (δ) πᾶς αἰών : antt. 1, 18,7; 8, 8,10; ¢. Ap. 2, 
11, 3; 2, 22,1; μακρὸς ai.: antt. 2, 7,3; πολὺς ai.: c. Ap. 2, 
31, 1; τοσοῦτος ai.: c. Ap. 1, 8, 4; πλῆθος αἰῶνος : antt 
prooem. ὃ 3; ἀπ᾽ ai.: b.j. prooem. § 4; δι᾽ ai.: antt. 1,18, 8: 
4, 6,4; b. j. 6, 2,1; εἰς (τὸν) ai.: antt. 4, 8,18; δ, 1, 27; 7, 
9, 5; 7, 14, 5; ἐξ ai.: b. j. 5, 10,5; (6) ai: antt. 19,2, 2; 
b. j. 1, 21, 10; plur. (see above) 3, 8,5. See αἰώνιος. 

αἰώνιος, -ov, and (in 2 Th. ii. 16; Heb. ix. 12; Num. 
xxv. 13; Plat. Tim. p. 38 b. [see below]; Diod. i. 1; 
[ef. WH. App. p. 157; W. 69 (67); B. 26 (23)]) -os, 
-a, τον, (αἰών); 1. without beginning or end, thal which 
always has been and always will be: θεὸς, Ro. xvi. 26, (ὁ 
μόνος αἰώνιος, 2 Mace. i. 25); πνεῦμα, Heb. ix. 14. 2: 
without beginning: χρόνοις αἰωνίοις, Ro. xvi. 253 πρὸ χρό- 
νων αἰωνίων, 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2; εὐαγγέλιον a σοβροὶ 
whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. the saving purpose 
of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. 3. with- 
oul end, never to cease, everlasting: 2 Co. iv. 18 (opp. to 
πρόσκαιρος) ; αἰώνιον αὐτόν, joined to thee forever as a 
sharer of the same eternal life, Philem. 15; βάρος d0éns, 
2 Co. iv. 17; βασιλεία, 2 Pet. i. 11; δόξα, 2 Tim. ii. 10; 
1 Pet. v.10; ζωή (see ζωή, 2 b.); κληρονομία, Heb. ix. 
15; λύτρωσις, Heb. ix. 12; παράκλησις, 2 Th. ii. 16; 
σκηναί, abodes to be occupied forever, Lk. xvi. 9 (the 
habitations of the blessed in heaven are referred to, ef. 
Jn. xiv. 2, [also, dabo eis tabernacula aeterna, quae 
praeparaveram illis, 4 Esdr. (Fritzsche 5 Esdr.) ii. 11]; 
similarly Hades is called αἰώνιος τόπος, Tob. iii. 6, ef. 
Eccl. xii. 5); σωτηρία, Heb. v. 9; [so Mk. xvi. WH, in 
the (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]. Opposite ideas 
are: κόλασις, Mt. xxv. 46; κρίμα, Heb. vi. 2; κρίσις, 
Mk. iii. 29 (Rec. [but L T WH Tr txt. ἁμαρτήματος ; 
in Acta Thom. § 47, p. 227 Tdf., ἔσται σοι τοῦτο εἰς ἄφεσιν 
ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ λύτρον αἰωνίων παραπτωμάτων, it has been 
plausibly conjectured we should read λύτρον αἰώνιον (cf. 
Heb. ix. 12)]); ὄλεθρος [Lehm. txt. ὀλέθριος, 2 Th. i. 
9, (4 Mace. x. 15); πῦρ, Mt. xxv. 41, (4 Mace. xii. 12 
αἰωνίῳ πυρὶ x. βασάνοις, αἵ εἰς ὅλον τὸν αἰῶνα οὐκ ἀνήσουσί 
σε). 

[Of the examples οὗ αἰώνιος from Philo (with whom it is 
less common than ἀΐδιος, 4. v-, of which there are some fifty 
instances) the following are noteworthy: de mut. nom. § 2; 
de caritate ὃ 17; κόλασις ai. frag. in Mang. ii. 667 fin. 
(Richter vi. 229 mid.) ; ef. de praem. et poen. ὃ 12. Other 
exx. are de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de poster. Caini § 35; quod 
deus immut. § 30; quis rer. div. her. § 58; de congressu 
quaer. erud. § 19; de prof. § 38; de somn, ii. § 43; de Jose- 
pho § 24; guod omn. prob. lib. § 4, § 18; de ebrietate § 32; 
de Abrah. § 10; ζωὴ ai.: de prof. § 15; θεὸς (δ) αἰ. : de plan 


᾽ ἐκ 
ἀκαθαρσία 


tat. § 2, § 18 (bis), § 20 (bis); de mundo ὃ 2. From. Jose- 
phus: antt. 7, 14, 5; 12, 7,3; 15, 10, 5; b.j. 1, 33, 2; 6, 2, 
1; κλέος ai.: antt. 4, 6,5; b.j. 3, 8,5; μνήμη ai.: antt. 1, 
13, 4; 6, 14,4; 10, 11,7; 15, 11,1: οἶκον μὲν αἰώνιον ἔχεις 
(of God), antt. 8, 4,2; ἐφυλάχθη ὁ ᾿Ιωάννης δεσμοῖς αἰωνίοις, 
ΠΣ. τρί 984s 

Syn. ἀΐδιος, αἰώνιος: ἀΐδ. covers the complete philo- 
sophic idea — without beginning and without end ; also either 
without beginning or without end; as respects the past, it 
is applied to what has existed time out of mind. αἰώνιος (fr. 
Plato on) gives prominence to the immeasurableness of eter- 
nity (while such words as συνεχής continuous, unintermitted, 
διατελής perpetual, lasting to the end, are not so applicable 
to an abstract term, like αἰών) ; αἰώνιος accordingly is esp. 
adapted to supersensaous things, see the N. T. Cf. Tim. 
Locr. 96 c. θεὸν δὲ τὸν μὲν αἰώνιον νόος dpi) μόνος etc.; Plat. 
Tim. 37 d. (and Stallbaum ad loc.); 38 b. ¢.; legg. x. p. 
904 a. ἀνώλεθρον δὲ ὃν γενόμενον, GAA’ οὐκ αἰώνιον. Cf. also 
Plato’s διαιώνιος (Tim. 38 b.; 39 e.). Schmidt ch. 45.] 

ἀκαθαρσία, -as, 7, (ἀκάθαρτος), [fr. Hippoer. down], 
uncleanness ; a. physical: Mt. xxiii. 27. b. in a 
moral sense, the impurity of lustful, luxurious, profli- 
gate living: Ro. i. 24; vi. 19; 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v. 
19; Eph. iv. 19; v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. iv. 7; used 
of impure motives in 1 Th. ii. 3. (Dem. p. 553, 12.) 
Cf. Tittmann i. p. 150 sq.* 

ἀκαθάρτης, -ητος, 7, impurity: Rev. xvii. 4;— not found 
elsewhere, and the true reading here is τὰ ἀκάθαρτα τῆς." 

ἀκάθαρτος, -ov, (kabaipw), [fr. Soph. down], in the Sept. 
i. q. $V, not cleansed, unclean ; a. inaceremonial 
sense, that which must be abstained from according to 
the levitical law, lest impurity be contracted: Acts x. 
14; xi. 8 (of food); Acts x. 28; 1 Co. vii. 14 (of 
men); 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. Is. lii. 11, of things pertain- 
ing to idolatry); Rev. xviii. 2 (of birds). b. in a 
moral sense, unclean in thought and life (freq. in Plat.) : 
Eph. v. 5; τὰ ἀκάθαρτα τῆς πορνείας, Rev. xvii. 4 (ace. 
to the true reading); πνεύματα, demons, bad angels, [in 
twenty-three pass. of the Gospels, Acts, Rev.]: Mt. x. 
1; xu. 43; Mk.i. 23, 26; i. 11, ete.; Lk. iv. 38, 36; vi. 
18, ete.; Acts v. 16; viii. 7; Rev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2, 
(πνεύματα πονηρά in Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; 
xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq.). 

ἀκαιρέομαι, -odar: [impf. ἠκαιρούμην ; (ἄκαιρος inop- 
portune) ; to lack opportunity, (opp. to εὐκαιρέω ): Phil. 
iv. 10. (Phot., Suid., Zonar.; ἀκαιρεῖν, Diod. excerp. 
Vat. ed. Mai p. 30 [frag. 1. x. § 7, ed. Dind.].)* 


ἀκαίρως, (καιρός), adv., unseasonably, [A. V. out-of 


season], (opp. to εὐκαίρως) : 2 Tim. iv. 2 (whether sea- 
sonable for men or not). (Sir. xxxv. 4; [Aeschyl. Ag. 
808]; Plat. de rep. x. p. 606 b.; Tim. 33 a.; 86 ¢.; 
Xen. Eph. 5, 7; Joseph. antt. 6, 7, 2, al.) * 

ἄ-κακος, -ov, (κακός) ; a. without guile or fraud, 
harmless; free from quilt: Heb. vii. 26; [ef. Clement. 
frag. 8 ed. Jacobson, (Bp. Lghtft. S. Clement of Rome 
etc. p. 219): ἄκακος 6 Πατὴρ πνεῦμα ἔδωκεν ἄκακον. 
b. fearing no evil from others, distrusting no one, (cf. 
Eng. guileless]: Ro. xvi. 18. ({Aeschyl.,] Plat., Dem., 
Polyb., al.; Sept.) (Cf. Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. p. 
27 sq.]* 


21 


ἀκαταστασία 


ἄκανθα, -ης, ἡ, (ἀκή a point [but see in ἀκμή]); a. a 
thorn, bramble-bush, brier: Mt. vii. 16; Lk. vi. 44; Heb. 
vi. 8; εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας i. 6. among the seeds of thorns, Mt. 
xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7 [L mrg. ἐπί], 18 [Tdf. ἐπί]; Lk. viii. 
14 (vs. 7 ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἀκανθῶν) ; ἐπὶ τὰς ἀκ. i. 6. upon 
ground in which seeds of thorns were lying hidden, 
Mt. xiii. 7. b. a thorny plant: στέφανον ἐξ ἀκανθῶν, 
Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2,—-for bare thorns might have 
caused delirium or even death; what species of plant is 
referred to, is not clear. Some boldly read ἀκάνθων, 
from ἄκανθος, acanthus, bear’s-foot; but the meaning of 
ἄκανθα is somewhat comprehensive even in prof. writ. ; 
ef. the class. Grk. Lexx. s. v. [On the “Crown of 
thorns” see BB.DD. s. v., and for reff. Me. and 5.7" 

ἀκάνθινος, -ον, (ἄκανθα ; cf. auapdvtwos), thorny, woven 
out of the twigs of a thorny plant: Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix. 
5. ,([5. xxxiv. 13.) Cf. the preceding word.* 

ἄ-καρπος, -ov, (καρπός), [fr. Aeschyl. down], without 
fru, barren; 1. prop.: δένδρα, Jude 12. 2. metaph. 
not yielding what it ought to yield, [A. V. unfruitful]: 
Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; destitute of good deeds, Tit. 
iii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 8; contributing nothing to the instruc- 
tion, improvement, comfort, of others, 1 Co. xiv. 14; 
by litotes pernicious, Eph. ν. 11, (Sap. xv. 4; οἵ. Grimm 
on Sap. i. 11).* 

ἀ-κατά-γνωστος, -ov, (καταγινώσκω), that cannot be con- 
demned, not to be censured: Tit. ii. 8. (2 Mace. iv. 47, 
and several times in eccl. writ.) * 

ἀ-κατα-κάλυπτος, -ov, (κατακαλύπτω), not covered, un- 
veiled: 1 Co. xi. 5,13. (Polyb. 15, 27, 2; [Sept., Philo].) * 

ἀ-κατά-κριτος, -ov, (katakpivw), uncondemned ; punished 
without being tried: Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25. (Not 
found in prof. writ.) * 

ἀ-κατά-λυτος, -ov, (καταλύω), indissoluble; not subject to 
destruction, [A. V. endless]: ζωή, Heb. vii. 16. (4 Mace. 
x. 11; Dion. Hal. 10, 31.) * 

ἀκατάπαστος, -ov,—found only in 2 Pet. ii. 14 in codd. 
A and B, from which L WH Tr mrg. have adopted 
it instead of the Rec. ἀκαταπαύστους. q. v- It may be 
derived fr. πατέομαι, pf. πέπασμαι, to taste, eat; whence 
ἀκατάπαστος insatiable. In prof. writ. κατάπαστος [which 
Bttm. conjectures may have been the original reading] 
signifies besprinkled, soiled, from καταπάσσω to besprin- 
kle. For a fuller discussion of this various reading see 
B. 65 (57), [and WH. App. p. 170].* 

ἀκατάπαυστος, -ον, (kararavw), unable to stop, unceas- 
ing; passively, not quieted, that cannot be quieted; with 
gen. of thing (on which cf. W. § 30, 4), 2 Pet. ii. 14 
ΓΒ G T Tr txt.] (eyes not quieted with sin, se. which 
they commit with adulterous look). (Polyb., Diod., 
Joseph., Plut.)* 

ἀκαταστασία, -as, 7, (ἀκατάστατος), instability, a state 
of disorder, disturbance, confusion: 1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas. 
iii. 16; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.14,1; [Prov. xxvi. 28; Tob. 
iv. 13]); plur. disturbances, disorders: of dissensions, 
2 Co. xii. 20; of seditions, 2 Co. vi. 5 (cf. Mey. ad loc.) ; 
of the tumults or commotions of war, Lk. xxi. 9. (Polyb., 
Dion. Hal.) * oe 


ἀκατάστατος 


ἀκατά-στατος, -ον, (καθίστημι), unstable, inconstant, 
restless: «185. 1. 8, and 1, T Tr WH in iii. 8 also, but less 
fitly; [cf. Hermae Past. 1. ii. mand. 2, 3 πονηρὸν πνεῦμά 
ἐστιν ἡ καταλαλιά, καὶ ἀκατάστατον δαιμόνιον. μηδέποτε 
εἰρηνεῦον, ἀλλά etc.]. ([Hippoer. et al.] Polyb. 7, 4, 6, 
al. [Sept. Is. liv. 11].) * 

ἀκατάσχετος, -ov, (κατέχω to restrain, control), that 
cannot be restrained: Jas. iii. 8 R G. (Job xxxi. 11; 
3 Mace. vi. 17; Diod. 17, 38 ἀκατ. δάκρυα, al.)* 

᾿Ακελδαμά, or ᾿Ακελδαμάχ (Lehm.), [or ᾿Ακελδ. WH 
(see their Intr. § 408)], or ᾿Αχελδαμάχ (T Tr), fr. Chald. 
NDT Opn (field of blood), Akeldama: Acts i. 19; see 
αἷμα, 2a. [Β. Ὁ. s.v.3 esp. Kautzsch, Gram. pp. 8, 1787." 

ἀκέραιος, -ov, (κεράννυμιν) ; a. unmixed, pure, as 
wine, metals. b. of the mind, without admixture of 
evil, free from guile, innocent, simple: Mt. x. 16; Ro. 
xvi. 19; Phil. ii. 15; (and freq. in prof. writ.). [Cf. 
Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.; Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. 27 sq. |* 

ἀκλινής, -és, (κλίνω), not inclining, firm, unmoved: Heb. 
x. 23. (Freq. in prof. writ.) * 

ἀκμάζω: 1 aor. ἤκμασα; (ἀκμή); to flourish, come to 
maturity: Rey. xiv. 18. (Very freq. in prof. writ.) * 

ἀκμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (cf. ἀκή [on the accent cf. Chandler § 116; 
but the word is ‘a mere figment of the grammarians,’ 
Pape (yet cf. L. and 8.) s. v.], αἰχμή, Lat. acies, acuo) ; 
among the Greeks a. prop. a point, to prick with (cf. 
[the classic] αἰχμή). Ὅν. extremity, climax, acme, highest 
degree. c. the present point of time. Hence accus. 
[W. 230 (216), 464 (432 sq.); B. 153 (134)] ἀκμήν with 
adverbial force, i. q. ἔτι, even now, even yet: Mt. xv. 16. 
(Theocr. id. 4, 60; Polyb. 4, 36, 8; Strat. epigr. 3 p. 
101 ed. Lips.; Strabo 1]. i. [e. 3 prol.] p. 56; Plut. de 
glor. Athen. 2, 85, al.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 123.* 


ἀκοή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. an assumed pf. form ἤκοα, cf. ἀγορά, 


above [but cf. Epic axoun; Curtius p. 555]); 1. hear- 
ing, by which one perceives sounds; sense of hearing: 
1 Co. xii. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 8. Hebraistically, ἀκοῇ ἀκούειν 
by hearing to hear i. e. to perceive by hearing, Mt. xiii. 
14; Acts xxviii. 26, (Is. vi. 9); cf. W. § 44, 8 Rem. 3 
Ρ. 339; § 54, 3 p. 466; [B. 183 sq. (159)]. 2. the 
organ of hearing, the ear: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii.1; 2 Tim. 
iv. 8, 4; Acts xvii. 20; Heb. v. 11. 3. thing heard; 
a. instruction, namely oral; spec. the preaching of the 
gospel, [A. V. txt. report]: Jn. xii. 838; Ro. x. 16 sq. (τίς 
ἐπίστευσε τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν; fr. Is. liii. 1, Hebr. AyD, which 
in 2S. iv. 4, ete, is rendered ἀγγελία); ἀκοὴ πίστεως 
preaching on the necessity of faith, (Germ. Glaubens- 
predigt), Gal. iii. 2,5; λόγος ἀκοῆς i. q. X. ἀκουσθείς [cf. 
W. 531 (494 sq.)]: 1 Th. ii. 13; Heb. iv. 2. b. hear- 
say, report, rumor; τινός, concerning any one: Mt. iv. 
24; xiv. 1; xxiv. 6; Mk. i. 28; xiii. 7. (Freq. in Grk. 
writ.) * 

ἀκολουθέω, -@; fut. ἀκολουθήσω; impf. ἠκολούθουν ; 
1 aor. ἠκολούθησα; pf. ἠκολούθηκα (Mk. x. 28 1, Τ Tr 
WH); (fr. ἀκόλουθος, and this fr. a copulative and κέλευ- 
θοὸς road, prop. walking the same road) ; 1. to follow 
one who precedes, join him as his attendant, accompany 
him: Mtsiv. 25; viii. 19; ix. 19; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 7; 


29 


“ὦ 


ἀκούω 


ν. 24, [37 Lehm.]; xiv. δ1 [ἢ G]; Lk. xxii. 39,54; xxiii. 
27; Jn. i. 37 sq. 43 (44); vi. 2; xviii. 15; xx. 6, ete.; 
Acts xii. 8; xiii. 43; xxi. 36; 1 Co. x. 4; distinguished 
fr. προάγειν in Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9; trop. τὰ ἔργα 
αὐτῶν ἀκολουθεῖ per’ αὐτῶν, their good deeds will accom- 
pany them to the presence of God the judge to be 
rewarded by him, Rev. xiv. 13; on the other hand, 
ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῆς ai ἁμαρτίαι ἄχρι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Rev. xviii. 
5, but here for ἠκολούθησαν (ἃ 1, Τ Tr WH have re- 
stored ἐκολλήθησαν; [σημεῖα τοῖς πιστεύσασιν ἀκολουθήσει 
ταῦτα, Mk. xvi. 17 Tr WH txt. (where ἃ]. παρακολ. q. ν.}]. 
to follow one in time, succeed one: Rey. xiv. 8 sq. 
(Hdian. 1, 14, 12 (6) τὰ γοῦν ἀκολουθήσαντα, al.) Since 
among the ancients disciples were accustomed to accou:- 
pany their masters on their walks and journeys — [al. 
derive the usage that follows from the figurative sense 
of the word directly ; cf. 6. g. 2 Mace. viii. 36 τὸ 
ἀκολουθεῖν τοῖς νόμοις; M. Antonin. 1. vii. § 31 ἀκολού- 
θησον θεῷ, and Gataker ad loc. ], ἀκολουθέω denotes 2. 
to join one as a disciple, become or be his disciple; side 
with his party, [A. V. follow him]: Mt. iv. 20, 22; ix. 9; 
xix. 27 sq-; Mk.i. 18; viii. 34; Lk. v. 11, 27, ete.; 
Jn. viii. 12 (where Jesus likens himself to a torch which 
the disciple follows); οὐκ ἀκολουθεῖ ἡμῖν he is not of 
our band of thy disciples, Mk. ix. 38. 0 cleave stead- 
Jastly to one, conform wholly to his example, in living and if 
need be in dying also: Mt. x. 38; xvi. 24; In. xii. 26; 
xxi. 22. This verb is not found in the Epp. exe. in 
1 Co. x. 4. As in the classics, it is joined mostly with 
a dat. of the obj.; sometimes with μετά τινος, Lk. ix. 49; 
Rev. vi. 8 [Treg. mrg. dat.]; xiv. 13; (so also in Grk. 
writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 353 sq.; [Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 458 54.7) ; ὀπίσω twos, Mt. x. 38; Mk. 
viii. 34 (where ἢ L WII Tr mre. ἐλθεῖν), Hebr. Era] 
sy5a cams, cf. 1 K. xix. 21; see W. 234 (219); [B. 172 
(150), ef. ἀκολ. κατόπιν τινός, Arstph. Plut. 13. Come.: 
e&, én-, κατ-, map-, συν- akodovbe |. 

ἀκούω [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense ef. W. 
274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. ἤκουον ; fut. (in 
best Grk. usage) ἀκούσομαι, Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL; 
Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 RG; xvii. 32; [xxi. 22]; xxv. 
22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form) 
ἀκούσω. Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x. 
16; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26]; Ro. x. 14 
ΓΒ 617; and T Tr WH in Jn. v. 25, 28, (ef. W.82 (79); B. 
53 (46) [Veitch 5. v.]); [1 aor. ἤκουσα; Jn. iii. 32, ete.]; pf. 
ἀκήκοα; Pass.,[ pres. ἀκούομαι; 1 fut.axovaOncopar]; 1 aor. 
ἠκούσθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; tohear. I. absol. 1. tobe 
endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf): Mk. vii. 
37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt.xi.5. 2. to attend to (use the facul- 
ty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in 
exhortations: ἀκούετε, Mk. iv. 3; ἀκούσατε, Jas. ii. 5; 
ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, [in both 
T WHom. Tr br. ἀκούειν] ; Mk. iv. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 35 (34); 
ὁ ἔχων οὖς ἀκουσάτω, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22, 
ete. 3. trop. to understand, perceive the sense of 
what is said: Mt. xiii. 15 sq.; Mk. viii. 18; 1 Co. xiv. 
2. II. with an object [Β. § 132, 17; W. 199 (187 sq.)]5 


ἀκούω 


ἃ, ἀκούω τι, to hear something ; a. to perceive by the 
ear what is announced in one’s presence, (fo hear im- 
mediately): τὴν φωνήν, Mt. xii. 19; Jn. iii. 8; Rev. 
iv. 1; v.11; xviii. 4; Acts xxii. 9, ete.; τὸν ἀσπασμόν, 
Lk. i. 41 (cf. 44); Γαλιλαίαν, the name ‘Galilee,’ Lk. 
xxiii. 6 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. Tad.; ef. B. 166 (145) ]; 
ἀνάστασιν νεκρῶν, the phrase “ἀνάστ. νεκρῶν, Acts xvii. 
32; τὸν λόγον, Mk. v. 36 [ἢ GL] (on this pass. see παρα- 
κούω, 2); Mt. xix. 22; Jn. v. 24, ete.; τοὺς λόγους, 
Acts ii. 22; v. 24; Mt. vii. 24; ῥήματα, 2 Co. xii. 4; 
τί λέγουσιν, Mt. xxi. 16;  pass., Mt. ii. 18; Rev. xviii. 
22 sq.; τὶ ἔκ twos, 2 Co. xii. 6 [R G]; foll. by ὅτι [B. 
300 (257 sq.)], Acts xxii. 2; Mk. xvi. 11; Jn. iv. 42; 
xiv. 28. b. to get by hearing, learn (from the mouth 
of the teacher or narrator): Acts xv. 17; Mt. x. 27 (ὃ 
eis TO οὖς ἀκούετε, What is taught you in secret) ; Ro. xv. 
21; Eph. i. 13; Col. i. 6; Jn. xiv. 24; 1 Jn. ii. 7, 24; 
iii. 11; Χριστόν i. 6. to become acquainted with Christ 
from apostolic teaching, Eph. iv. 21 (cf. μαθεῖν τὸν Χριστόν, 
vs. 20 [B. 166 (144) note; W.199 (187) note]); _ pass., 
Lk. xii. 3; Heb. ii. 1; τὶ with gen. of pers. fr. whom 
one hears, Acts i. 4 ; τὶ παρά twos, Jn. vill. 26,40; xv. 
15; Acts x. 22; xxviii. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 2, (Thue. 6, 93; 
Xen. an. 1, 2, 5 [here Dind. om. παρά] ; Plat. rep. vi. 


twos, without an obj. expressed, Jn. i. 40 (41)]; ἐκ 
twos, Jn. xii. 34 (ἐκ τοῦ νόμου, from attendance on its 
public reading); ἀπό with gen. of pers., 1 Jn.i.5; with 
περί twos added, Acts ix. 13; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. v. 21, 
27, 33, 38,43. ο. ἀκούω τι. a thing comes to one’s ears, to 
Jind out (by hearsay), learn, (hear [(of)| mediately): 
with ace. of thing, τὰ ἔργα, Mt. xi. 2; ὅσα ἐποίει, Mk. 
iii. 8 [Treg. txt. ποιεῖ] ; πολέμους, Lk. xxi. 9; Mt. xxiv. 
6; Mk. xiii. 7; to learn, absol. viz. what has just been 
mentioned: Mt. ii. 3; xxii. 7 [R L]; Mk. ii. 17; iii. 
21; Gal. i. 18; Eph. i. 15; Col. i. 4; Philem. 5, ete. 
foll. by ὅτι, Mt. ii. 22; iv. 12; xx. 30; Mk. vi. 55; 
Ἐν πὸ Ave ἢ: ike) 95: ἈΝ Θ᾽ ΚΗ ΤΣ Gals 1 29" 
περί τινος, Mk. vii. 25; τὶ περί τινος, Lk. ix. 9; xvi. 2; 
xxiii. 8[RGL]; foll. by an ace. with ptep. [B. 303 
(260)]: Lk. iv. 23; Acts vii. 12; 2 Th. iii. 11; 3 Jn. 
4; foll. by ace. with inf. in two instances [ef. B. 1. c.]: 
Jn. xii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 18. pass.: Acts xi. 22 (ἠκούσθη 
6 λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας was brought to the ears) ; 
1 Co. v. 1 (ἀκούεται πορνεία ἐν ὑμῖν) ; Mt. xxviii. 14 
(ἐὰν ἀκουσθῇ τοῦτο ἐπὶ [L Tr WH mrs. ὑπὸ] τοῦ ἡγεμό- 
vos); Mk. 11.1 ; Jn. ix. 32 ἠκούσθη ὅτι. ἃ. to give ear 
to teaching or teacher: τοὺς λόγους, Mt. χ. 14: to follow 
with attentive hearing, τὸν λόγον, Jn. viii. 48 ; τὰ ῥήματα 
τοῦ θεοῦ, 47. e. to comprehend, understand, (like Lat. 
audio): Mk. iv. 33; Gal. iv. 21 [(Lehm. mrg. avaywo- 
oxete) yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]; (Gen. xi. 7). 2. ἀκούειν is 
not joined with the genitive of the obj. unless one hear 
the person or thing with his own ears [B. 166 (144)]; 
a. with gen. of a person; simply; a. to perceive any 
one’s voice: οὗ i.e. of Christ, whose voice is heard in 
the instruction of his messengers (Lk. x. 16), Ro. x. 14, 
[W. 199 (187) note?}. B. to give ear to one, listen, 


25 


| ipa, Ex. xviii. 19) means 
p- 506 d., al.; [B. 166 (145); W. 199 (188)]); [mapa | 


ἀκριβής 


hearken, (Germ. ihm zuhéren, ihn anhéren): Mt. ii. 9; 
ME. vii. 14; xii. 37; Lk. it. 46; x. 16; xv. 1; xix. 48; 
xxi. 38; Acts xvii. 32; xxiv. 24 (in both these pass. 
τινὸς περί τινος): XXV. 22; Jn. vi.60. y. to yield to, hear 
and obey, hear to one, (Germ. auf einen héren) : Mt. xvii. 
5, (MK. ix. 7; Lk. ix. 35); Jn. iii. 29; x. 8; Acts iii. 
22 sq.; iv. 19; vii. 37 [RG]; 1 Jn. iv. 5 sq. Hence 
δ. its use by John in the sense to listen to, have regard 
to, of God answering the prayers of men: Jn. ix. 31; xi. 
41; 1 Jn. ν. 14 sq. (the Sept. render pow by εἰσακούω). 
e. with gen. of pers. and ptep. [B. 301 (259)]: Mk. xiv. 
58; LK. xviii. 36; Jn. i. 37; vii. 32; Acts ii. 6, 11; 
Rey. xvi. 5; ἤκουσα τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου λέγοντος, Rev. xvi. 
7GLT [Tr WH cod.Sin.], a poetic personification ; 
cf. De Wette ad loc., W. § 30, 11. b. with gen. of a 
thing: τῆς βλασφημίας, Mk. xiv. 64 (Lcehm. τὴν βλα- 
σφημίαν, as in Mt. xxvi. 65; the acc. merely denotes the 
object; τῆς βλασφ. is equiv. in sense to αὐτοῦ βλασφημοῦν- 
tos, [cf. B. 166 (145)]); τῶν λόγων, Lk. vi. 47, (Mt. vii. 
24 τοὺς λόγους) ; Jn. vii. 40 (1, T Tr WH cod. Sin., but 
R Ὁ τὸν λόγον, [cf. B.u.s.]); συμφωνίας x. χορῶν, Lk. xv. 
253 τοῦ στεναγμοῦ, Acts vii. 34; τῆς ἀπολογίας, Acts 
xxii. 1. The frequent phrase ἀκούειν τῆς φωνῆς (i. q. POW 
a. to perceive the distinct 
words of a voice: Jn. v. 25,28; Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii. 
i. Hebs it 7, 155 ἀν. 1 bev.rsive 19: ΧΙ 9. B. fo 
yield obedience to the voice: Jn. v. 25 (οἱ ἀκούσαντες sc. 
τῆς φωνῆς); X. 16, 27; xviii. 37; Rev. iii. 20. In Jn. 
xii. 47; xviii. 37; Lk. vi. 47; Acts xxii. 1, it is better 
to consider the pron. μοῦ which precedes as a possess. 
gen. rather than, with B. 167 (145 sq.), to assume a 
double gen. of the object, one of the pers. and one of 
the thing. The Johannean phrase ἀκούειν παρὰ τοῦ 
θεοῦ, or τὶ παρὰ θεοῦ, signifies a. to perceive in the soul 
the inward communication of God: Jn. vi. 45. b. to be 
taught by God’s inward communication: Jn. viii. 26, 40, 
(so, too, the simple ἀκούειν in v. 30); 10 be taught by the 
devil, acc. to the reading of LT Tr WH, ἠκούσατε 
παρὰ τοῦ πατρός, in Jn. viii. 38. For the rest ef. B. 165 
(144) sqq.; 301 (258) sqq. [Comp.: &-, εἰσ-, éx-, παρ-, 
mpo-, ὑπ- ακούω.] 

ἀκρασία, -as, 7, (ἀκρατής), want of self-control, inconti- 
nence, intemperance: Mt. xxiii. 25 (Grsb. ἀδικία) ; 1 Co. 
vii. 5. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.524sq. [(Aristot. on.) ]* 

ἀκρατής, -€s, Zen. -€os, -οῦς, (κράτος), without self-con- 
trol, intemperate: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Freq. in prof. writ. fr. 
Plato and Xen. down.) * 

ἄκρατος, -ov, (κεράννυμι), unmixed, pure: Rev. xiv. 10 
(of wine undiluted with water, as freq. in prof. writ. 
and Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15)).* 

ἀκρίβεια, -eias, ἡ, (ἀκριβής), exactness, exactest care: 
Acts xxii. 3 (κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ νόμου in accordance 
with the strictness of the Mosaic law, [cf. Isoc. areop. 
Ρ. 147 6.7). [From Thue. down.]* 

ἀκριβής, -€s, zen. -ods, exact, careful. The neut. compar. 


| is used adverbially in Acts xviii. 26; xxiii. 15, 20; xxiv. 


22; ἡ ἀκριβεστάτη αἵρεσις the straitest sect i.e. the most 
precise and rigorous in interpreting the Mosaic law, and 


ἀκριβόω 


in observing even the more minute precepts of the law 
and of tradition, Acts xxvi. 5. [From Hdt. down.]* 

ἀκριβόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἠκρίβωσα; (ἀκριβή); 1. in prof. 
writ. to know accurately, to do exactly. 2. to investi- 
gate diligently: Mt. ii. 7, 16, (ἀκριβῶς ἐξετάζειν, vs. 8) ; 
Aristot. gen. anim. 5, 1; Philo, m. opif. § 25 μετὰ πάσης 
ἐξετάσεως ἀκριβοῦντες. [Al. to learn exactly, ascertain; 
ef. Fritz. or Mey. on Mt. u. 8.7" 

ἀκριβῶς, adv., exactly, accurately, diligently: Mt. ii. 8; 
Lk. i. 3; Acts xviii. 25; 1 Th. v. 2; ἀκριβῶς περιπατεῖν 
to live carefully, cireumspectly, deviating in no respect 
from the law of duty, Eph. v.15. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.]* 

ἀκρίς, -idos, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], a locust, particu- 
larly that species which especially infests oriental coun- 
tries, stripping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of 
them almost every spring are carried by the wind from 
Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that coun- 
try migrate to regions farther north, until they perish 
by falling into the sea. The Orientals are accustomed 
to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned 
with salt [or prepared in other ways], and the Israelites 
also (acc. to Lev. xi. 22) were permitted to eat them; 
(cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Heuschrecken; Furrer in Schen- 
kel iii. p. 78 sq.; [BB.DD.s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of 
the Bible, p. 813 sqq.]): Mt. iii. 4; Mk.i.6. A marvel- 
lous and infernal kind of locusts is described in Rev. ix. 
3, 7, cf. 2, 5 sq. 8-12; see Diisterdieck ad loc.* 

ἀκροατήριον, -ov, τό, (ἀκροάομαι to be a hearer), place 
of assemblage for hearing, auditorium; like this Lat. 
word in Roman Law, axpoar. in Acts xxv. 23 denotes a 
place set apart for hearing and deciding cases, [yet cf. 
Mey. ad loc.}. (Several times in Plut. and other later 
writers.) * 

ἀκροατής, -ov, 6, (ἀκροάομαι, [see the preceding word]), 
a hearer: τοῦ νόμου, Ro. ii. 13; τοῦ λόγου, Jas. i. 22 sq. 
25. (Thuce., Isocr., Plat., Dem., Plut.) * 

ἀκροβυστία, -as, 7, (a word unknown to the Greeks, 
who used ἡ ἀκροποσθία and τὸ ἀκροπόσθιον, fr. πόσθη i. 6. 
membrum virile. Accordingly it is likely that τὴν πόσθην 
of the Greeks was pronounced τὴν βύστην by the Alex- 
andrians, and ἀκροβυστία said instead of ἀκροποσθία --- 
i. 6. τὸ ἄκρον τῆς πόσθης ; cf. the acute remarks of 
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 136, together with the 
opinion which Winer prefers 99 (94), [and Cremer, 3te 
Aufl. s. v.]), in the Sept. the equiv. of mw the prepuce, 
the skin covering the glans penis; a. prop.: Acts xi. 
8; Ro. ii. 25, 26°; 1 Co. vii. 19; Gal. v. δ: vi. 15; Col. 
iii. 11; (Judith xiv. 10; 1 Mace. i. 15); ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ 
ὧν having the foreskin ( Tertull. praeputiatus), uncir- 
cumcised i.e. Gentile, Ro. iv. 10; ἐν ἀκρ. sc. dv, 1 Co. 
vii. 18; equiv. to the same is δ ἀκροβυστίας, Ro. iv. 11; 
ἡ ἐν τῇ ἀκροβ. πίστις the faith which one has while he is 
uncircumcised, Ro.iv.11sq. b. by meton. of the abstr. 
for the coner., having the foreskin is equiv. to a Gentile: 
Ro. ii. 26 *; iii. 30; iv. 9; Eph. ii. 11; ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβ. 
one uncircumcised by birth ora Gentile, opp. toa Jew who 
shows himself aGentile in character, Ro.ii. 27; evayyé- 
λιον τῆς axpo8. gospel to be preached to the Gentiles, Gal. 


24 


ἀλάβαστρον 


ἘΠ: ce. in a transferred sense: ἡ ὄχροβ. τῆς σαρκός 
(opp. to the περιτομή ἀχειροποίητος or regeneration, Col. 
ii. 11), the condition in which the corrupt desires rooted 
in the σάρξ were not yet extinct, Col. ii. 13 (the expression 
is derived from the circumstance that the foreskin was 
the sign of impurity and alienation from God, [ef. B. D. 
s. v. Cireumcision]}).* 

dxpo-ywviatos, -aia, -atov, a word wholly bibl. and eccl., 
[W. 99 (94); 236 (221)], (ἄκρος extreme, and γωνία 
corner, angle), placed at the extreme corner; λίθος cor- 
ner-stone; used of Christ, 1 Pet. ii. 6; Eph. ii. 20; Sept. 
Is. xxviii. 16 for 735 132. For as the corner-stone 
holds together two walls, ,so Christ joins together as 
Christians, into one body dedicated to God, those who 
were formerly Jews and Gentiles, Eph. ii. 20 [yet cf. 
Mey. ad loc.] compared with vss. 14, 16-19, 21 sq. 
And as a corner-stone contributes to sustain the edifice, 
but nevertheless some fall in going around the corner 
carelessly ; so some are built up by the aid of Christ, 
while others stumbling at Christ perish, 1 Pet. ii. 6-8; 
see γωνία, ἃ." 

ἀκροθίνιον, -ου, τό, (fr. ἄκρος extreme, and θίς, gen. 
θινός, a heap; extremity, topmost part of a heap), gener- 
ally in plur. τὰ ἀκροθίνια the first-fruits, whether of crops 
or of spoils (among the Greeks customarily selected from 
the topmost part of the heaps and offered to the gods, 
Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 35); in the Bible only once: Heb. vii. 
4, of booty. (Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., Thue., Plut., al.) * 

ἄκρος, -a, -ov, (ἀκή point [see ἀκμή), [fr. Hom. down], 
highest, extreme; τὸ ἄκρον the topmost point, the extremity 
[ef. B. 94 (82)]: Lk. xvi. 24; Heb. xi. 21 [see προσ- 
κυνέω, a. fin.]; ἄκρα, ἄκρον γῆς, οὐρανοῦ, the farthest 
bounds, uttermost parts, end, of the earth, of heaven: 
Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; cf. Deut. iv. 32; xxviii. 64; 
Is. xiii. 5; Jer. xii. 12.* 

᾽᾿Ακύλας, -ov, [but no gen. seems to be extant, see B. 20 
(18)], 6, Aquila, a Jew of Pontus, a tent-maker, convert 
to Christ, companion and ally of Paul in propagating 
the Christian religion: Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; Ro. xvi. 
8; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Tim. iv. 19; [see B. D.].* 

ἀκυρόω, -@; 1 aor. ἠκύρωσα; (ἄκυρος without author- 
ity, not binding, void; fr. κῦρος force, authority), to 
render void, deprive of force and authority, (opp. to κυρόω 
to confirm, make valid): ἐντολήν, Mt. xv. 6 [R G; 
νόμον, ibid. T WH mrg.]; λόγον [ibid. L Tr WH txt.]; 
Mk. vii. 13, (cf. dOeréw) ; διαθήκην, Gal. iii. 17. ([1 Esdr. 
vi. 31]; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut.)* 

ἀκωλύτως, adv., (κωλύω), without hindrance : 
xxviii. 31. [Plato, Epict., Hdian.]* 

ἄκων, ἄκουσα, ἧκον, (contr. fr. ἀέκων, a priv. and ἕκων 
willing), not of one’s own will, unwilling: 1 Co. ix. 17. 
(Very freq. among the Greeks.) * 

[ἅλα, τό, read by Tdf. in Mt. v. 13; Mk. ix. 50; Lk. 
xiv. 34; see ἅλας. 

ἀλάβαστρον, -ov, τό, (in the plur. in Theocer. 15, 114; 
Anth. Pal. 9,153; in other prof. writ. 6 and ἡ ἀλάβα- 
orpos; [the older and more correct spelling drops the 
p, cf. Steph. Thesaur. 8. v. 1885 d.; L. and S. s. v. ἀλά- 


Acts 


Τὰ 
ἀλαζονεία 


βαστρος), a box made of alabaster, in which unguents are 
preserved, (Plin. h. n. 13, 2 (3), [al. 13, 19,] “ unguenta 
optime servantur in alabastris’’) ; with the addition of 
μύρον (as in Leian. dial. mer. 14, 2; [Hadt. 3, 20]): Lk. 
vii. 37; Mt. xxvi. 7; Mk. xiv. 3 (where L T adopt τὸν 
ἀλάβ., Tr WH [Mey.] τὴν ad.; Mt. and Lk. do not add 
the article, so that it is not clear in what gender they 
use the word, [ef. Tdf.’s crit. note ad loc.]). Cf. Win. 
RWB. [or B. D.] s. v. Alabaster.* 

ἀλαζονεία, and ἀλαζονία (which spelling, not uncommon 
in later Grk., T WH adopt [see I, ¢]), -as, ἡ, (fr. adago- 
νεύομαι i. 6. to act the ἀλαζών, 4: V-); a. in prof. writ. 
[fr. Arstph. down] generally empty, braggart talk, some- 
times also empty display in act, swagger. For illustration 
see Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 12; mem. 1, 7; Aristot. eth. Nic. 
4,13, p. 1127 ed. Bekk.; [also Trench § xxix.]. b. 
an insolent and empty assurance, which trusts in its own 
power and resources and shamefully despises and violates 
divine laws and human rights: 2 Mace. ix. 8; Sap. v. 8. 
ο. an impious and empty presumption which trusts in the 
stability of earthly things, [R. V. vaunting]: Jas. iv. 16 
(where the plur. has reference to the various occasions 
on which this presumption shows itself; [ef. W. § 27, 3; 
B. 77 (67)])3; τοῦ βίου, display in one’s style of living, 
[R. V. vainglory], 1 Jn. ii. 16.* 

ἀλαζών, -dvos, ὁ, ἡ, (ἄλη wandering), [fr. Arstph. on], 
an empty pretender, a boaster: Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2. 
[Trench §xxix.; Tittmanni. p. 73sq.; Schmidt ch. 172, 2. ]* 

ἀλαλάζω ; [fr. Pind. down]; a. prop. to repeat fre- 
quently the cry ἀλαλά, as soldiers used to do on entering 
battle. b. univ. to utter a joyful shout: Ps. xlvi. 
(xlvii.) 2; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 2; and in prof. writ. c. to 
wail, lament: Mk. v. 38, (τ Jer. iv. 8; xxxii. 20 (xxv. 
34)); cf. ὀλολύζω, Lat. ululare. [Syn.see κλαίω fin.] ἃ. 
to ring loudly, to clang: 1 Co. xiii. 1, [cf. ἐν κυμβάλοις 
ἀλαλαγμοῦ, Ps. cl. 5 |.* 

ἀλάλητος, -ov, (λαλητός fr. λαλέω ; [ef. W. 23]), not to 
be uttered, not to be expressed in words: στεναγμοί mute 
sighs, the expression of which is suppressed by grief, 
Ro. viii. 26, [al. ‘which (from their nature) cannot be 
uttered’; cf. Mey. ad loc.; W. 97 (92)]. (Anth. Pal. 5, 
4 συνίστορα ἀλαλήτων i. 6. of love-secrets.) * 

ἄ-λαλος, -ov, (λάλος talking, talkative), [fr. Aeschyl. 
on], speechless, dumb, wanting the faculty of speech: Mk. 
vii. 37; πνεῦμα, Mk. ix. 17, 25, because the defects of 
demoniacs were thought to proceed from the nature and 
peculiarities of the demons by which they were pos- 
sessed. (Sept. Ps. xxxvii. (xxxvili.) 14; xxx. (xxxi.) 
19; ἀλάλου καὶ κακοῦ πνεύματος πλήρης, Plut. de orac. 
def. 51 p. 438 b.) * 

ἅλας, -atos, τό, (a later form, found in Sept. and N. T. 
[Aristot. de mirab. ause. § 138; Plut. qu. conv. iv. 4, 3, 3], 
ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 220; dat. Gare Col. iv. 6), and 
Gs, ἁλός, 6, (the classic form [fr. Hom. down]; Sir. 
Xxii. 15 (13); xliii. 19; Sap. x. 7; 1 Mace. x. 29, etc. ; 
Mk. ix. 49 ἁλί dat. [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br.], 
and in vs. 50 L T Tr WH ἅλα ace. [yet without the 


9 


~ 


5 


ἀλεκτοροφωνία 


in Mk. ix. 50 [also Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34 (where see 
his note)] (similar to γάλα, gen. γάλατος, a form noted 
by certain grammarians, see [WH. App. p. 158;] 
Kiuhner i. 353 sq.; but see what Fritzsche, Com. on Sir. 
(xxxix. 26) p. 226 sq., says in opposition) ; salt; 1. 
Salt with which food is seasoned and sacrifices are 
sprinkled: Mk. ix.49 RG; cf. ἁλίζω. 2. ἅλας τῆς γῆς. 
those kinds of saline matter used to fertilize arable 
land, Mt. v. 13°; here salt as a condiment cannot be 
understood, since this renders land sterile (Deut. xxix. 
23; Zeph. ii. 9; Judg. ix. 45); cf. Grohmann in Kauf- 
fer’s Bibl. Studien, 1844, p. 82 sqq. The meaning is, 
‘It is your prerogative to impart to mankind (likened 
to arable land) the influences required for a life of deyo- 
tion to God.’ In the statement immediately following, 
ἐὰν δὲ ἅλας κτλ.» the comparison seems to be drawn from 
salt as a condiment, so that two figures are blended; 
[but it is better to adopt this latter meaning throughout 
the pass., and take γῆ to denote the mass of mankind, 
see 8. v. 4 b. and ef. Tholuck et al. ad loc.]. In Mk. 
ix. 50* and Lk. xiv. 34 salt is a symbol of that health 
and vigor of soul which is essential to Christian virtue ; 
[ef. Mey. on the former pass. ]. 3. Salt is a symbol 
of lasting concord, Mk. ix. 50 °, because it protects food 
from putrefaction and preserves it unchanged. Ac- 
cordingly, in the solemn ratification of compacts, the 
Orientals were, and are to this day, accustomed to par- 
take of salt together. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salz; 
[BB.DD. s. v. Salt]; Knobel on Levitieus p. 370. 4. 
Wisdom and grace exhibited in speech : Col. iv. 6 [where 
see Bp. Lghtft.].* 

ἴἤΑλασσα: Acts xxvii. 8; cf. Aacaia. 

[ἁλεεύς, 6, T WH uniformly for ἁλιεύς, see Tdf.’s note 
on Mk. i. i6 and N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. 1. ; esp. ed. 8, 
Proleg. p. 82 sq-; WH. App. p. 151.] 

ἀλείφω : impf. ἤλειφον; 1 aor. ἤλειψα; 1 aor. mid. 
impv. ἄλειψαι; [allied with λίπτος grease; cf. Curtius 
§ 340; Vanicek p. 811; Peile p. 407; fr. Hom. down]; 
to anoint: twa or τί, Mk. xvi. 1; Jn. xii. 3; τινά or τί 
τινι [W. 227 (213)], as ἐλαίῳ, Lk. vii. 46"; Mk. vi. 13; 
Jas. v. 14; μύρῳ, Jn. xi. 2; Lk. vii. 38, 46%; Mid.: 
Mt. vi. 17 (lit. ‘anoint for thyself thy head,’ unge tibi 
caput tuum; cf. W. 257 (242); B. 192 (166 sq.)). Cf. 
Win. RWB. 5. v. Salbe; [B.D. or McC. and S. 5. v. 
Anoint, ete. SYN. : “ ἀλείφειν 151}16 mundane and profane, 
χρίειν the sacred and religious, word.” Trench ὃ xxxviii. 
Comp. : ἐξεαλείφω }.* 

ἀλεκτοροφωνία, -as, 7, (ἀλέκτωρ and φωνή [W. 957), 
the crowing of a cock, cock-crowing: Aesop. fab. 79 [44]. 
Used of the third watch of the night: Mk. xiii. 35; in 
this passage the watches are enumerated into which the 
Jews, following the Roman method, divided the night; 
[ef. Win. RWB. 5. v. Nachtwachen; B. 1). 5. ν. Watches 
of Night; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Cock-crowing ; Wetst. on 
Mt. xiv. 25; Wieseler, Chron. Syn. p. 406 note]. (For 
writ. who use this word see Lod. ad Phryn. p. 229, [and 
add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.) Strab. 7, frag. 35 p. 83, 24; 


art.] with nom. τὸ ἅλας), finally, nom. and ace. ἅλα Tdf. | Orig. i. 825 b.; Constt. Ap. 5, 18; 5, 19; 8, 34].)* 


ἀλέκτωρ 


ἀλέκτωρ, -opos, 6, acock, (Lat. gallus gallinaceus) : Mt. 
xxvi. 34, 74sq.; Mk. xiv. 30,68 [Lehm. br.], 72; Lk. xxii. 
34,60 sq.; Jn. xiii.38; xviii. 27. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
229; (Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 307; W. 23; see also 
BB.DD.s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 221 sq. 5 
esp. Egli, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Theol., 1879 p. 517 sqq.].* 
᾿Αλεξανδρεύς, -έως, 6, an Alexandrian, a native or a resi- 
dent of Alexandria (a celebrated city of Egypt): Acts 
vi. 9: xviii. 24. [(Plut. Pomp. 49, 6; al.)]* 
᾿Αλεξανδρινός [ct. Tdf.’s note on Acts xxvii. 6; GL Tr 
Cobet, al. -δρῖνος ; Chandler ὃ 397 note], τή, τόν, Alexan- 
drian: Acts xxvii. 6; xxviii. 11. [(Polyb. 34, 8, 7.)]* 
᾿Αλέξανδρος [i. 6. defender of men], -ov, 6, Alexander ; 
1. a son of that Simon of Cyrene who carried the cross 
of Jesus: Mk. xv. 21. 2. a certain man of the kin- 
dred of the high priest: Acts iv. 6. 3. a certain 
Jew: Acts xix. 33. 4. a certain coppersmith, an op- 
ponent of the apostle Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim. iv. 
14; [al. doubt whether both these passages relate to the 
same man; cf. 6. g. Ellic. on the former ].* 
ἄλευρον, -ov, τό, (ἀλεύω to grind), wheaten flour, meal: 
Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21. Hesych. ἄλευρα κυρίως τὰ τοῦ 
σίτου, ἄλφιτα δὲ τῶν κριθῶν. (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Jo- 
seph., al.) * 
ἀλήθεια, -as, ἡ, (ἀληθής), [fr. Hom. down], verity, truth. 
I. objectively; 1. univ. what is true in any matier 
under consideration (opp. to what is feigned, fictitious, 
false): Jas. iii. 14; ὀλήθειαν λέγειν, ἐρεῖν, Jn. viii. 45 sq.; 
xvi. 7; Ro. ix. 14 1 Co. xii. 6; 1 Tim. ii. 7; εἶπεν αὐτῷ 
πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν, everything as it really was, Mk. v. 
33, (so in classics); μαρτυρεῖν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ to testify ac- 
cording to the true state of the case, Jn. v. 33; ina 
broader sense, λαλεῖν ἀλήθειαν to speak always according 
to truth, Eph. iv. 25; [ἀληθείας ῥήματα ἀποφθέγγομαι, as 
opp- to the vagaries of madness, Acts xxvi. 25]; ἀλήθεια 
ἐγένετο, was shown to be true by the event, 2 Co. vii. 14. 
ἐν ἀληθείᾳ in truth, truly, as the case is, according to 
fact: Mt. xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 23 sq. (as accords with the 
divine nature); 2 Co. vii. 14; Col. i. 6; ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας 
a. truly, in truth, according to truth: Mk. xii. 32; Lk. 
iv. 25, (Job ix. 2 Sept.; Philo, vit. Moys.i.§ 1). Ὁ. of 
a truth, in reality, in fact, certainly: Mk. xii. 14; Lk. 
xx. 21; [xxii. 59]; Acts iv. 27; x. 34, (Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 23, 5 and 47, 3); [ef. W. § 51, 2f.; B. 336 (289) ]; 
κατ᾽ ἀλήθειαν in accordance with fact, i. 6. (ace. to the 
context) justly, without partiality: Ro. ii. 2; etre mpo- 
φάσει, εἴτε ἀληθείᾳ. Phil. i. 18; ἐν ἔργῳ xk. ἀληθείᾳ, 
1 Jn. iii. 18 [Ree. om. ἐν; so Eph. iv. 21 WH mrg.]. 
2. In reference to religion, the word denotes what is 
true in things appertaining to God and the duties of man, 
(‘moral and religious truth’); and that a. with the 
greatest latitude, in the sceptical question ri ἐστιν ἀλή- 
Geva, Jn. xviii. 38; b. the true notions of God which 
are open to human reason without his supernatural in- 
tervention: Ro. i. 18; also ἡ ἀλήθεια θεοῦ the truth of 
which God is the author, Ro. i. 25, cf. 19, (ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, Evang. Nicod. ¢. 5,2; accordingly it is not, as 
many interpret the phrase, the true nature of God [yet 


26 


ἀληθεύω 


see Mey. ad loc.]); truth, the embodiment of which the 
Jews sought in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 20, ¢. the truth, 
as taught in the Christian religion, respecting God and 
the execution of his purposes through Christ, and respect- 
ing the duties of man, opposed alike to the superstitions 
of the Gentiles and the inventions of the Jews, and 
to the corrupt opinions and precepts of false teachers 
even among Christians: ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγ. the truth 
which is the gospel or which the gospel presents, Gal. ii. 
5, 14, [ef. W. § 34, 3 a.]; and absol. ἡ ἀλήθεια and 
ἀλήθεια: Jn. i. 14, 17; viii. 32, 40; [xvi 13]; xvii. 19; 
1 Jn. 1. 8; ii. 4, 21; 2Jn.1-3; Gal. iii. 1 (Ree.); v. 7; 
2 Co. iv. 2; xiii. 8; Eph. iv. 2452 Dh.ii.410, 12; 1 
Tim. ii. 7 (ἐν πίστει x. ἀληθείᾳ in faith and truth, of 
which I became a partaker through faith) ; iii. 15; iv. 
8; vi. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 18; iii. 8; iv. 4; Tit. i. 14; 2 Pet. 
i. 12; [8 Jn. 8,12]; ὁ λόγος τῆς ἀληθείας, Col. i. 5; Eph. 
i. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; λόγος ἀληθείας, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i. 
18; ὁδὸς τῆς ad. 2 Pet. ii. 2; πίστις ἀληθείας, 2 Th. ii. 
13 [W. 186 (175)]; ὑπακοὴ τῆς ad. 1 Pet. i. 22; ἐπίγνω- 
σις τῆς GA. Heb. x. 26; 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 25; 111. 
7; [Tit. i. 1]; πνεῦμα τῆς ad. the Spirit (of God) which 
is truth (1 Jn. v.6) and imbues men with the knowledge 
of the truth, Jn. xiv.17; [xvi. 13]; xv. 26; 1 Jn. iv. 6; 
ἐγώ εἶμι ἡ ἀλήθεια I am he in whom the truth is summed 
up and impersonated, Jn. xiv. 6; ἡ ἀλήθειά σου [ Rec. | 
(i. 6. θεοῦ) the truth which is in thee and proceeds from 
thee, Jn. xvii. 17; [ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοί i. 6. 
controls, actuates, me, 2 Co. xi. 10]; εἶναι ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 
to be eager to know the truth, Jn. xviii. 37 (see ἐκ, II. 7, 
and eiui,V. 3 d.); to proceed from the truth, 1 Jn. ii. 21; 
to be prompted and controlled by the truth, 1 Jn. iii. 19; 
μαρτυρεῖν τῇ ἀληθ. to give testimony in favor of the 
truth in order to establish its authority among men, Jn. 
xviii. 37; ἀλήθειαν ποιεῖν to exemplify truth in the life, 
to express the form of truth in one’s habits of thought 
and modes of living, Jn. iii. 21; 1 Jn. i. 6, (Tob. xiii. 6; 
iv. 6; cf. Neh. ix. 33; ὁδὸν ἀληθείας αἱρετίζεσθαι, Ps. 
exvili. (exix.) 30); so also περιπατεῖν ἐν τῇ ad. 2 Jn. 4; 
3 Jn. 3 sq.; ἀπειθεῖν τῇ aX. is just the opposite, Ro. ii. 8; 
so also πλανηθῆναι ἀπὸ τῆς ad. Jas. v. 19. II. sub- 
jectively; truth as a personal excellence; that candor 
of mind which is free from affectation, pretence, simula- 
tion, falsehood, deceit: Jn. viii. 44; sincerity of mind 
and integrity of character, or a mode of life in harmony 
with divine truth: 1 Co. v. 8; xiii. 6 (opp. to ἀδικία) ; 
Eph. iv. 21 [see I. 1 b. above]; v. 9; [vi. 14]; σοῦ ἡ 
ἀλήθεια the truth as it is discerned in thee, thy habit of 
thinking and acting in congruity with truth, 3 Jn. 3; 
ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ θεοῦ which belongs to God, i. 6. his holi- 
ness [but cf. περισσεύω. 1 b. fin.], Ro. iii. 7; spee. ve- 
racity (of God in keeping his promises), Ro. xv. 8; ἐν 
ἀληθείᾳ sincerely and truthfully, 2Jn.1; 3Jn.1. The 
word is not found in Rev. ({nor in 1 Thess., Philem., 
Jude]). Cf. Hélemann, “ Bibelstudien”, (Lpz. 1859) 1te 
Abth. p.8sqq.; [| Wendt in Stud. u. Krit., 1883, p. 511 sqq.]* 

ἀληθεύω ; in prof. writ. ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Aristot., 
al.) fo speak the truth; a. to teach the truth: τινί 


ἀληθής 


Gal. iv. 16. b. to profess the truth (true doctrine) : 
Eph. iv. 15. [R. V. mrg. in both pass. to deal truly.]* 
ἀληθής, -€s, (a priv. and λήθω, λαθεῖν [AavOavw), τὸ 
λῆθος, --- cf. ἀμαθής ; lit. not hidden, unconcealed), [fr. 
Hom. down]; 1 true: Jn. ivy. 18; x. 415 xix. 35; 
1 Jn. ii. 8, 27; Acts xii. 9 (an actual occurrence, opp. 
to ὅραμα); Phil. iv. 8; μαρτυρία, Jn. v. 31 sq.; Vill. 
13 sq. 17; xxi. 24; 3 Jn. 12; Tit. 1. 13; κρίσις, just, 
Jn. viii. 16 (L T Tr WH ἀληθινή) ; παροιμία, 2 Pet. ii. 
22; χάρις, grace which can be trusted, 1 Pet. v. 12. 
2. loving the truth, speaking the truth, truthful: Mt. xxii. 
16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. vii. 18; 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to 
πλάνος); of God, Jn. iii. 33; viii. 26; Ro. iii. 4 (opp. to 
ψεύστης). 3. i. 4. ἀληθινός, 1: In. vi. 55 (LT Tr 
ὝΨΗ; for Rec. ἀληθῶς), as in Sap. xii. 27, where ἀληθὴς 
θεός is contrasted with obs ἐδόκουν θεούς. Cf. Riickert, 
Abendmahl, p. 266 sq. [On the distinction betw. this 
word and the next, see Trench § viii. ; Schmidt ch. 178, 6.]* 
ἀληθινός, -7, -dv, (freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato down; 
[twenty-three times in Jn.’s writ.; only five (ace. to 
Lchm. six) times in the rest of the N. T.]) ; 1. “that 
which has not only the name and semblance, but the real 
nature corresponding to the name” (Tittmann p. 155; 
[‘‘ particularly applied to express that which is all that it 
pretends to be, for instance, pure gold as opp. to adul- 
terated metal” Donaldson, New Crat. § 258; see, at 
length, Trench § viii.]), in every respect corresponding to 
the idea signified by the name, real and true, genuine; 
a. opp. to what is fictitious, counterfeit, imaginary, 
simulated, pretended: θεός (DDN TON, 2 Chr. xv. 3), 
1 Th. i. 9; Heb. ix. 14 Lehm.; Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. v. 20. 
(ἀληθινοὶ φίλοι, Dem. Phil. 3, p. 113, 27.) b. it con- 
trasts realities with their semblances: σκηνή, Heb. viii. 
2; the sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24. (ὁ ἵππος contrasted 
with 6 ἐν τῇ εἰκόνι, Ael. v. h. 2, 3.) c. opp. to what is 
imperfect, defective, frail, uncertain: Jn. iv. 23, 37; vii. 
28; used without adjunct of Jesus as the true Messiah, 
Rev. iii. 7; φῶς, Jn. i. 9; 1 In. 11. 8; κρίσις, Jn. viii. 16 
(L T Tr WH; Is. lix. 4); κρίσεις, Rev. xvi. 7; xix. 2; 
ἄρτος, as nourishing the soul unto life everlasting, Jn. 
vi. 32; ἄμπελος, Jn. χν. 1: μαρτυρία, Jn. xix. 35; μάρτυς, 
Rey. iii. 14; δεσπότης, Rev. vi. 10; ὁδοί, Rev. xv. 3; 
coupled with πιστός, Rev. iii. 14; xix. 11; substantively, 
τὸ ἀληθινόν the genuine, real good, opp. to external 
riches, Lk. xvi. 11, ([οἷς μὲν yap ἀληθινὸς πλοῦτος ἐν 
οὐρανῷ, Philo de praem. et poen. ὃ 17, p. 425 ed. 
Mang.; ef. Wetst. on Lk. 1. c.]; ἀθληταί, Polyb. 1, 6, 6). 
2. i. 4. ἀληθής, true, veracious, sincere, (often so in Sept.) : 
καρδία. Heb. x. 22 (μετ᾽ ἀληθείας ᾽ν καρδίᾳ ἀληθινὴ, Is. 
XXXvVill. 3); λόγοι, Rev. [xix. 9]; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, ( Plut. 
apoph. p. 184 e.). [Cf. Cremer 4te Aufl. 5. v. ἀλήθεια. * 
ἀλήθω ; (a com. Grk. form for the Attie ἀλέω, cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 151); to grind: Mt. xxiv. 41; Lk. xvii. 
35. It was the custom to send women and female slaves 
to the mill-houses [?] to turn the hand-mills (Ex. xi. 5), 
who were called by the Greeks γυναῖκες ἀλετρίδες (Hom. 
Od. 20, 105); [ef. B. D. 5. v. Mill].* 
ἀληθῶς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], truly, of a truth, in 


27 


ἀλλά 


reality; most cercainly: Jn. 1. 47 (48) ; iv.42; vi. 14,55 
Rec.; vii. 26, 40; viii. 31; xvii. 8; Mt. xiv. 33; xxvi. 
73; [Mk. xiv. 70; Mt.] xxvii. 54; [Mk. xv. 39]; Lk. 
Ix, 20; Xi. 44° xxi. 3s Acts xin 115 1) Th 1013; 1 In 
li. 5.* 

ἁλιεύς, -έως, ὁ, (GAs, ἁλός, the sea), [fr. Hom. down]; 
a fisherman, fisher: Mt. iv. 18 sq.; Mk. i. 16 sq.; Lk. 
vy. 2, —in all which pass. T and WH have ἁλεεῖς fr. the 
form ἁλεεύς, q. V-* 

ἁλιεύω ; (ἁλιεύς) ; to fish: Jn. xxi. 3. [Philo, Plut.]* 

ἁλίω : (GAs, ἁλός, salt); to salt, season with salt, sprin- 
kle with salt; only the fut. pass. is found in the N. T.: 
ἐν τίνι ἁλισθήσεται; by what means can its saltness be 
restored? Mt. v.13; θυσία ἁλὶ ἁλισθήσεται, the sacrifice 
is sprinkled with salt and thus rendered acceptable to 
God, Mk. ix. 49 [R GL Tr txt. br.], (Lev. ii. 13; Ezek. 
xliii. 24; Joseph. antt. 8, 9, 1; οἵ. Knobel on Ley. 
Ρ. 369 sq.; Win. RWB. 5. v. Salz; [BB.DD. 5. v. Salt]); 
πᾶς πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται, every true Christian is rendered 
ripe for a holy and happy association with God in his 
kingdom by fire, i. e. by the pain of afflictions and 
trials, which if endured with constancy tend to purge 
and strengthen the soul, Mk. ix. 49. But this ex- 
tremely difficult passage is explained differently by 
others ; [ef. Meyer, who also briefly reviews the history 
of its exposition]. (Used by the Sept., Aristot., [ef. 
Soph. Lex.]; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10 [shorter form] dAi- 
σθητε ἐν Χριστῷ. iva μὴ διαφθαρῇ τις ἐν ὑμῖν.) [Comp.: 
συν-αλίζω. --- but see the word. ]* 

ἀλίσγημα, -ros, τό, (ἀλισγέω to pollute, which occurs 
Sir. xl. 29; Dan. i. 8; Mal. i. 7,12; akin to ἀλίνω. ἀλινέω 
to besmear [Lat. linere, ef. Lob. Pathol. Element. p. 21; 
Rhemat. p. 123; Steph., Hesych., Sturz, De Dial. Alex. 
p- 145]), pollution, contamination: Acts xy. 20 (rod 
ἀπέχεσθαι κτὰ. to beware of pollution from the use 
of meats left from the heathen sacrifices, ef. vs. 29). 
Neither ἀλισγέω nor ἀλίσγημα occurs in Grk. writ.* 

ἀλλά, an adversative particle, derived from ἄλλα, 
neut. of the adj. ἄλλος, which was originally pronounced 
ἀλλός (cf. Klotz ad Dévar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, 
other things se. than those just mentioned. It differs 
from δέ, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [ef. W. 441 
sq. (411)]. 1. But. So related to the preceding words 
that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to con- 
cessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6; 
Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii. 
48; Ro. v. 14 sq.; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; 
Phil. ii. 27 (ἀλλ᾽ ὁ θεός etc.), ete. 2. an objection: 
Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 
3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7; 
xe 29: 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk. 
xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, 
nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp. 
with καί added, Lk. xii. 7; xvi. 21; xxiv. 22. ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, 
but... not even (Germ. ja nicht einmal): Lk. xxiii. 15; 
Acts xix. 2; 1 Co. iii. 2 [Rec. οὔτε]; cf. Fritzsche or 
Mk. p. 157. 6. or forms a transition to the cardinay 
matter, especially before imperatives: Mt. ix. 18; Mk. 


ἀλλά 


ix. 22; xvi. 7; Lk. vii. 7; Jn. viii. 26; xvi. 4; Acts ix. 
6 [not Rec.]; x. 20; xxvi. 16. 7. it is put ellipti- 
cally: ἀλλ᾽ iva, i. 6. ἀλλὰ τοῦτο γέγονεν. ἵνα. Mk. xiv. 49; 
Jn. xiii. 18; xv. 25; 1 Jn. i. 19. 8. after a condi- 
tional or concessive protasis it signifies, at the begin- 
ning of the apodosis, yet [ef. W. 442 (411)]: after καὶ 
ei, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [RG]; Mk. xiv. 29 RGL, (2 Mace. 
viii. 15); after εἰ καί, Mk. xiv. 29 [T Tr WH]; 2 Co. 
iv. 16; v. 16; xi. 6; Col. ii. 5, (2 Mace. vi. 26); after 
ei, 1 Co. ix. 2; Ro. vi. 5, (1 Mace. ii. 20); after ἐάν, 
1 Co. iv. 15; after εἴπερ, 1 Co. viii. 6 [L Tr mrg. WH br. 
ἀλλ᾽}; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 93 sq.; Kiihner ii. 
p- 827, § 535 Anm. 6. 9. after a preceding μέν: Mk. 
ix. 13 [T om. Tr br. μέν]; Acts iv. 16; Ro. xiv. 20; 
1 Co. xiv. 17. 10. it is joined to other particles; 
ἀλλά ye [Grsb. ἀλλάγε] (twice in the N. T.): yet at least, 
1 Co. ix. 2; yet surely (aber freilich), Lk. xxiv. 21 [L T 
Tr WH add καί yea and ete.]}, cf. Bornemann ad loc. 
In the more elegant Greek writers these particles are 
not combined without the interposition of the most 
emphatic wore between them; cf. Bornemann l. c¢.; 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 15 sq. 24 sq.; Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 
101; [W. 444 (413)]. ἀλλ᾽ 7 (arising from the blending 
of the two statements οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἤ and οὐδὲν ἄλλο, ἀλλά) 
save only, except: 1 Co. iii. 5 (where ἀλλ᾽ ἢ omitted 
by G L T Tr WH is spurious); Lk. xii. 51, (Sir. 
Xxxvii. 12; xliv. 10); and after ἄλλα itself, 2 Co. i. 13 
[here Lchm. br. ἀλλ᾽ before 7]; cf. Klotz u. s. ii. 31 sqq.; 
Kiihner ii. p. 824 sq. § 535, 6; W. 442 (412); [B. 374 
(320)]. ἀλλ᾽ οὐ but not, yet not: Heb. iii. 16 (if punctu- 
ated παρεπίκραναν : ἀλλ᾽ οὐ) for ‘but why do I ask? did 
not all,’ ete.; cf. Bleek ad loc. [W. 442 (411)]. ἀλλ᾽ 
οὐχί will he not rather? Lk. xvii. 8. 11. preceded by 
a negation: but (Lat. sed, Germ. sondern) ; 1. οὐκ 
(μή) . - . ἀλλά: Mt. xix. 11; Mk. v. 39; Jn. vii. 16; 
1 Co. i. 17; vii. 10, 19 [οὐδέν]; 2 Co. vii. 9; 1 Tim. v. 
23 [μηκέτι], ete. By a rhetorical construction οὐκ 
εὐνὴν ἀλλά sometimes is logically equiv. to not so much 

..as: Mk. ix. 37 (οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστεί- 
λαντά pe); Mt. x. 20; Jn. xii. 443 Acts v. 4; 1 Co. xv. 
10; 1 Th. iv. 8; by this form of speech the emphasis is 
laid on the second member; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 
773 sqq.; W- § δῦ, 8 b.; [B. 356 (306)]. οὐ μόνον... 
ἀλλὰ καί not only... but also: Jn. v. 18; xi. 52 [ἀλλ᾽ 
ἵνα καί, etc.]; Ro. i. 32, and very often. When καί is 
omitted (as in the Lat. non solum... sed), the grada- 
tion is strengthened: Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. adds καί]; 
1 Jn. v. 6; ἀλλὰ πολλῷ μᾶλλον, Phil. ii. 12; ef. Fritzsche 
1. 6. p. 786 sqq.; W. 498 (464); [B. 369 sq. (317)]. 
2. The negation to which ἀλλά pertains is suppressed, 
but can easily be supplied upon reflection [W. 442 
(412)]: Mt. xi. 7-9; Lk. vii. 24-26, (in each passage, 
before ἀλλά supply ‘ you will say you did not go out into 
the wilderness for this purpose’); Acts xix. 2 (we have 
not received the Holy Spirit, but ...); Gal. ii. 3 (they 
said not one word in opposition to me, but...) ; 2 Co. 
vii. 11 (where before ἀλλά, repeated six times by ana- 
phora, supply οὐ μόνον with the accus. of the preceding 


28 


ἅλλομαι 


word). It is used in answers to questions having the 
force of a negation [W. 442 (412)]: Jn. vii. 49; Acts 
xv. 11; 1 Co. x. 20. ἀλλὰ ἵνα [or ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα, cf. W. 40; 
B. 10] elliptical after a negation [W. 316 sq. (297); 
620 (576); Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 sq.]: Jn. i. 8 (sup- 
ply ἀλλὰ ἦλθεν, iva) ; ix. 3 (ἀλλὰ τυφλὸς ἐγένετο [or eye 
νήθη], ἵνα) ; Mk. iv. 22 (ἀλλὰ τοιοῦτο ἐγένετο, ἵνα). [The 
best Mss. seem to elide the final a before nouns, but 
not before verbs” Scrivener, Plain Introduction, ete., 
p- 14; but see Dr. Gregory’s full exhibition of the facts 
in Tdf. Proleg. p. 93 sq., from which it appears that 
“elision is commonly or almost always omitted before a, 
almost always before v, often before ε and η, rarely 
before o and o, never before «; and it should be noticed 
that this coincides with the fact that the familiar words 
ἐν, ἵνα, ὅτι, ov, ὡς, prefer the form dAX’”; see also WH. 
App. p. 146. Cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p. 10.] 

ἀλλάσσω : fut. ἀλλάξω; 1 aor. ἤλλαξα; 2 fut. pass. 
ἀλλαγήσομαι ; (ἄλλος) ; [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to change: 
to cause one thing to cease and another to take its 
place, τὰ ἔθη, Acts vi. 14; τὴν φωνήν to vary the voice, 
i. 6. to speak in a different manner according to the 
different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and 
form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now 
severely, now gently, Gal. iv. 20 [but see Meyer ad 
loc.]. to exchange one thing for another: τὶ ἔν τινι; 
Ro. i. 23 (2 VA Ps. ev. (evi.) 20; the Greeks say ἀλ- 
λάσσειν τί τινος [cf. W. 206 (194), 388 (363); Vaughan 
on Βοπι.]. 6.7). to transform: 1 Co. xv. 51 sq.; Heb. i. 
12. [Comp.: ἀπ- δὲ-» κατ-, ἀπο-κατ-. pet-, συν-αλλάσσω.} " 

ἀλλαχόθεν, adv., from another place: Jn. x. 1 (i. 4. 
ἄλλοθεν [which the grammarians prefer, Thom. Mag. 
ed. Ritschl p. 10, 13; Moeris ed. Piers. p. 11]; ef. 
ἑκασταχόθεν, πανταχόθεν). [(Antiph., al.)}* 

ἀλλαχοῦ, adv., i. 4. ἄλλοθι, elsewhere, in another place: 
Mk. i. 38 (T Tr txt. WH Tr mrg. br.). Cf. Borne- 
mann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 127 sq. [Soph., 
Xen., al.; see Thom. M. and Moer. as in the preced. 
word. ]* 

ἀλληγορέω, -ὦ : [pres. pass. ptep. ἀλληγορούμενος]; i. 6. 
ἄλλο μὲν ἀγορεύω, ἄλλο δὲ νοέω, “aliud verbis, aliud 
sensu ostendo” (Quint. instt. 8, 6, 44), to speak alle- 
gorically or in a figure: Gal. iv. 24. (Philo, Joseph., 
Plut., and gram. writ.; [ef. Mey. on Gal. 1. c.].) * 

ἀλληλούϊα, [WH. ‘AAA. and -a; see Intr. § 408], Hebr. 
m-199n, praise ye the Lord, Hallelujah: Rev. xix. 1, 3 sq. 
6. [Sept. Pss. passim; Tob. xiii. 18; 3 Mace. vii. 13.]* 

ἀλλήλων, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat. 
τοις; -als, τοῖς ; ACC. -OUS, -as, -a, ONE another ; reciprocally, 
mutually: Mt. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35; Acts xxviii. 25; 
Ro. i. 12; Jas. v. 16; Rey. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Hom. 
down. ] 

ἀλλογενής, -€s, (ἄλλος and γένος), sprung from another 
race, a foreigner, alien: Lk. xvii. 18. (In Sept. [Gen. 
xvii. 27; Ex. xii. 43, ete.], but nowhere in prof. writ.)* 

ἄλλομαι; impf. ἡλλόμην ; aor. ἡλάμην and ἡλόμην (Bttm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 108; [W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)]); to 
leap (Lat. salio): Acts iii. 8; xiv. 10 (Rec. ἥλλετο: 


ἄλλος 


GLT Tr WH jaro); to spring up, gush up, of water, 
Jn. iy. 14, (as in Lat. salire, Verg. ecl. 5, 47; Suet. 
Octay. 82). [Comp.: e&, ἐφ-άλλομαι.] * 

ἄλλος, -7, -o, [cf. Lat. alius, Germ. alles, Eng. else; fr. 
Hom. down], another, other; a. absol.: Mt. xxvii. 
42; xx. 3; Mk. vi. 15; Acts xix. 32; xxi. 34 (ἄλλοι 
μὲν ἄλλο), and often. b. as an adj.: Mt. ii. 12; iv. 
21; Jn. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 29 (ἄλλη συνείδησις 1. 6. ἡ συν. 
ἄλλου τινός). ο. with the art.: ὁ ἄλλος the other (of 
two), Mt. v. 39; xii. 13, etc. [cf. B. 32 (28), 122 (107)]; 
of ἄλλοι all others, the remainder, the rest: Jn. xxi. 8; 
1 Co. xiv. 29. 

[Syy. ἄλλος, ἕτερος: &A. as compared with ér. denotes 
numerical in distinction from qualitative difference; &A. adds 
(‘one besides’), ἕτ. distinguishes (‘one of two’); every ér. 
is an &A., but not every ἄλ. is a €r.; ἄλ. generally ‘ denotes 
simply distinction of individuals, ἕτερος involves the sec- 
ondary idea of difference of kind’; e. g.2 Co. xi. 4; Gal.i. 
6,7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass.; Trench 
§ xcv.; Schmidt ch. 198.] 

ἀλλοτριο-επίσκοπος (1, Τ Tr WH ἀλλοτριεπ.), -ov, 6, 
(ἀλλότριος and ἐπίσκοπος), one who takes the supervision 
of affairs pertaining to others and in no wise to himself, [a 
meddler in other men’s matters |: 1 Pet. iv. 15 (the writer 
seems to refer to those who, with holy but intemperate 
zeal, meddle with the affairs of the Gentiles — whether 
public or private, civil or sacred —in order to make them 
conform to the Christian standard). [Hilgenfeld (cf. 
Einl. ins N. T. p. 630) would make it equiv. to the Lat. 
delator.| The word is found again only in Dion. Areop. 
ep. 8 p. 783 (of one who intrudes into another’s office), 
and [Germ. of Const. ep. 2 ad Cypr. ce. 9, in] Coteler. 
Eccl. Graec. Mon. ii. 481 b.; [ef. W. 25, 99 (94)].* 

ἀλλότριος, -a, τον; 1. belonging to another (opp. to 
ἴδιος), not one’s own: Heb. ix. 25; Ro. xiv. 4; xv. 20; 
2 Co. x. 15 sq.; 1 Tim. v. 22; Jn. x. 5. in neut., Lk. 
xvi. 12 (opp. to τὸ ὑμέτερον). 2. foreign, strange: 
yi, Acts vii. 6; Heb. xi. 9; not of one’s own family, 
alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Hom. I. 
5, 214; Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).* 

ἀλλόφυλος, -ov, (ἄλλος, and φῦλον race), foreign, (in 
prof. auth. fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thue. down); when used in 
Hellenistic Grk. in opp. to a Jew, it signifies a Gen- 
tile, [A. V. one of another nation]: Acts x. 28. (Philo, 
Joseph.)* 

ἄλλως, ady., (ἄλλος), [fr. Hom. down], otherwise : 
1 Tim. v. 25 (τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, which are of a different 
sort i. 6. which are not καλὰ ἔργα, [al. which are not 
πρόδηλα ])." 

ἀλοάω, -ῶ; (connected with ἡ ἅλως or ἡ ἀλωή, the 
floor on which grain is trodden or threshed out); to 
thresh, (Ammon. τὸ ἐπὶ τῇ ἅλῳ πατεῖν καὶ τρίβειν τὰς 
στάχυας) : 1 Co. ix. [9], 10; 1 Tim. v. 18 (Deut. xxv. 
4). In prof. auth. fr. Arstph., Plato down.* 

G-Aoyos, -ov, (λόγος reason) ; 1. destitute of reason, 
brute: ζῶα, brute animals, Jude 10; 2 Pet. ii. 12, (Sap. 
xi. 16; Xen. Hier. 7, 3, al.). 2. contrary to reason, 
absurd: Acts xxv. 27, (Xen. Ages. 11, 1; Thue. 6, 85; 
often in Plat., Isocr., al.).* 


9 ἀλώπηξ 


ἀλόη [on the accent see Chandler § 149], -ης. 4, (com- 
monly ξυλαλόη, ἀγάλλοχον), Plut., the aloe, aloes: Jn. 
xix. 39. The name of an aromatic tree which grows in 
eastern India and Cochin China, and whose soft and 
bitter wood the Orientals used in fumigation and in 
embalming the dead (as, acc. to Hdt., the Egyptians 
did), Hebr. Ὁ and nidnx [see Muhlau and Volck 
8. vv.], Num. xxiv. 6; Ps. xlv. 9; Prov. vii. 17; Cant. 
iv. 14. Arab. Alluwe; Linn.: Excoecaria A gallochum. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Aloé [Low § 235; BB.DD].* 

GAs, ἁλός, 6, see ἅλας. 

ἁλυκός, -7, -dv, salt (i. q. dApupds): Jas. 111. 12. 
({Hippocr., Arstph.,] Plat. Tim. p. 65 e.; Aristot., 
Theophr., al.) * 

ἄλυπος, -ov, (λύπη), free from pain or grief: Phil. ii. 28. 
(Very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Plat. down.)* 

ἄλυσις, or as it is com. written ἅλυσις [see WH. App. 
Ρ. 144], -ews, 7, (fr. a priv. and Ave, because a chain is 
ἄλυτος i. 6. not to be loosed [al. fr. r. val, and allied w. 
εἰλέω to restrain, ἁλίζω to collect, crowd; Curtius § 660; 
Vaniéek p. 898]), a chain, bond, by which the body, or 
any part of it (the hands, feet), is bound: Mk. v. 3; Acts 
xxi. 33; xxviii. 20; Rev. xx. 1; ἐν ἁλύσει in chains, a 
prisoner, Eph. vi. 20; οὐκ ἐπαισχύνθη τὴν Gd. pov he was 
not ashamed of my bonds i. e. did not desert me be- 
cause I was a prisoner, 2 Tim. i. 16. spec. used of a 
manacle or hand-cuff, the chain by which the hands are 
bound together [yet ef. Mey. on Mk. u.i.; per contra 
esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 8]: Mk. v. 4; [LKk. viii. 29]; 
Acts xii. 6 sq. (From Hat. down.)* 

ἀλυσιτελής, -€s, (λυσιτελής, see λυσιτελέω), UNprosit- 
able, (Xen. vectig. 4,6); by litotes, hurtful, pernicious: 
Heb. xiii. 17. (From [Hippocr.,] Xen. down.)* 

ἄλφα, τό, indecl.: Rey. 1. 8; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. See A. 

᾿Αλφαῖος [WH ‘Ad®., see their Intr. § 408], -αίου, 6, 
cao, cf. ὯΠ| ’Ayyaios, Hag. i. 1), Alpheus or Alpheus; 
1. the father of Levi the publican: Mk. ii. 14, see Aevi, 
4. 2. the father of James the less, so called, one of 
the twelve apostles: Mt. x. 3; ΜΕ. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; 
Actsi. 13. He seems to be the same person who in Jn. 
xix. 25 (cf. Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40) is called Κλωπᾶς 
after a different pronunciation of the Hebr. “57M acc. 
to which N was changed into x, as M09 φασέκ, 2 Chr. 
xxx. 1. Cf. Ἰάκωβος, 2; [B. D. Am. ed. 5. v. Alpheus; 
also Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. pp. 256, 267 (Am. ed. pp. 
92,103); Wetzel in Stud. u. Krit. for 1853, p. 620 sq. J." 

ἅλων, -wvos, 7, (in Sept. also 6, cf. Ruth iii. 2; Job 
Xxxix. 12), i. q. ἡ ἅλως, gen. ἅλω, a ground-plot or thresh- 
ing-floor, i. 6. a place in the field itself, made hard after 
the harvest by a roller, where the grain was threshed 
out: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. In both these pass., by 
meton. of the container for the thing contained, ἅλων is 
the heap of grain, the flooring, already indeed threshed 
out, but still mixed with chaff and straw, like Hebr. 
173, Ruth iii. 2; Job xxxix. 12 (Sept. in each place 
adGva) ; [al. adhere to the primary meaning. Used by 
Aristot. de vent. 3, Opp. ii. 913", 14].* 


ἀλώπηξ, -exos, 7, α for: Mt. vill. 20; LE. ix. 58. 


ἅλωσις 


Metaph. a sly and crafty man: Lk. xiii. 32; (in the 
same sense often in the Grk. writ., as Solon in Plut. Sol. 
30, 2; Pind. Pyth. 2, 141; Plut. Sulla 28, 5).* 

ἅλωσις, -ews, ἡ, (ἁλόω, ἁλίσκομαι to be caught), a catch- 
ing, capture: 2 Pet. ii. 12 εἰς ἅλωσιν to be taken, [some 
would here take the word actively: to take]. (Fr. 
Pind. and Hdt. down.) * 

ἅμα [Skr. sa, sama; Eng. same; Lat. simul; Germ. 
sammt, ete.; Curtius § 449; Vanitek p. 972. Fr. Hom. 
down]; 1. adv., at the same time, at once, together: 
Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; Col. iv. 8; 1 Tim. v. 13; 
Philem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ro. 111, 12. 2. 
prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat. : Mt. xiii. 
29. ἅμα πρωΐ early in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, (in Grk. 
writ. ἅμα τῷ ἡλίῳ, ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ). In 1 Th. iv. 17 and 
y. 10, where ἅμα is foll. by σύν, ἅμα is an adv. (at the 
same time) and must be joined to the verb.* 

[ϑυν. ἅμα, ὁμοῦ: the distinction given by Ammonius 
(de diff. voc. s. v.) et al., that ἅμα is temporal, ὁμοῦ local, 
seems to hold in the main; yet see Ro. iii. 12, and cf. Hesych. 
s. v.] 

ἀμαθής, -és, zen. -ods, (μανθάνω, whence ἔμαθον, τὸ μάθος, 
cf. ἀληθής), unlearned, ignorant: 2 Pet. 111. 16. (In Grk. 
writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 

ἀμαράντινος, -ov, (fr. dudpavros, as pddwos made of 
roses, fr. ῥόδον a rose; cf. ἀκάνθινος), composed of ama- 
ranth (a flower, so called because it never withers or 
fades, and when plucked off revives if moistened with 
water; hence it is a symbol of perpetuity and immor- 
tality, [see Paradise Lost iii. 353 sqq.]; Plin. ἢ. π. 21 
(15), 23 [al. 47]): στέφανος, 1 Pet. v.4. (Found besides 
only in Philostr. her. 19, p. 741; [and (conjecturally) in 
Boeckh, Corp. Inserr.155, 39, e. B. C. 340].) * 

ἀμάραντος, -ov, (fr. papaivw; cf. ἀμίαντος. ἄφαντος, etc.), 
not fading away, unfading, perennial; Vulg. immarcesci- 
bilis; (hence the name of the flower, [Diose. 4, 57, al.]; 
see duapdvtwos): 1 Pet. i. 4. Found elsewhere only in 
Sap. vi. 13; [ζωὴ dap. Sibyll. 8, 411; Boeckh, Corp. 
Inserr. ii. p. 1124, no. 2942 ο, 4; Leian. Dom. ec. 97." 

ἁμαρτάνω ; fut. ἁμαρτήσω (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15; 
in the latter pass. LT Tr WH give ἁμαρτήσωμεν for 
RG ἁμαρτήσομεν), in class. Grk. ἁμαρτήσομαι; 1 aor. 
(later) ἡμάρτησα, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, 16 (ef. W. 
82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. ἥμαρτον; pf. ἡμάρτηκα; 
(ace. to a conjecture of Bitm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. a priv. 
and μείρω. peipopat, μέρος, prop. to be without a share in, 
sc. the mark); prop. to miss the mark, (Hom. Il. 8, 311, 
ete.; with gen. of the thing missed, Hom. II. 10, 372; 
4,491; τοῦ σκοποῦ, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a.; τῆς ὁδοῦ, 
Arstph. Plut. 961, al.); then to err, be mistaken; lastly 
to miss or wander from the path of uprightness and honor, 
to door go wrong. [Even the Sept., although the Hebr. 
son also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve 
duapt. exclusively for the idea of sin; and where the 
Hebr. signifies to miss one’s aim in the literal sense, 
they avail themselves of expressive compounds, in par- 
ticular ἐξαμαρτάνειν, Judg. xx. 16.” Zezschwitz, Profan- 
graec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63 sq.] In the N. T. 


30 


ἁμαρτία 


to wander from the law of God, violate God’s law, sin; 
a. absol.: Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. v. 14; viii. 11; ix. 2 sq.3 
1 Jn. i. 10; ii. 1; iii. 6, 8 sq.; v.18; Ro. ii. 12; iii. 23; 
v. 12, 14, 16; vi. 15; 1 Co. vii. 28, 36; xv. 34; Eph. 
iv. 26% 1 Timi wv. 20Gb sited eb. 1 1.0.5} 26 
(ἑκουσίως) ; [2 Pet. 11. 4]; of the violation of civil laws, 
which Christians regard as also the transgression of divine 
law, 1 Pet. ii. 20. Ὁ. ἁμαρτάνειν ἁμαρτίαν to commit 
(lit. sin) a sin, 1 Jn. ν. 10, (μεγάλην ἁμαρτίαν, Ex. xxxii. 
30 sq. Hebr. ANON NM; αἰσχρὰν dy. Soph. Phil. 1249; 
μεγάλα ἁμαρτήματα ἁμαρτάνειν, Plat. Phaedo p.113 e.); ef. 
ἀγαπάω, sub fin. ἁμαρτάνειν εἴς τινα |B. 173 (150); W. 233 
(219)]: Mt. xviii. 15 (LT Wilom. Tr mrg. br. εἰς σέ), 
21; Lk. xv. 18, 21; xvii. 3 Rec., 4; 1 Co. viii. 12; ri ets 
Καίσαρα, Acts xxy. 8; εἰς τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα, 1 Co. vi. 18, (εἰς 
αὑτούς τε καὶ εἰς ἄλλους, Plat. rep. 3, p. 896 a.; εἰς τὸ 
θεῖον, Plat. Phaedr. p. 342 ¢.; εἰς θεούς, Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 
19, ete.; [ο΄ du. κυρίῳ θεῷ, Bar. i. 13; ii. 5]); Hebraisti- 
cally, ἐνώπιόν (7397) τινος [B. § 146, 1] in the presence of, 
before any one, the one wronged by the sinful act being, 
as it were, present and looking on: Lk. xv. 18, 21, (1 S. 
vii. 6; Tob. iii. 3, ete.; [ef. ἔναντι κυρίου, Bar. i. 17]). 
[For reff. see ἁμαρτία. Comp.: προ-αμαρτάνω. ἢ 
ἁμάρτημα, -ros, τό, (fr. ἁμαρτέω i. 4. ἁμαρτάνω, ef. adi- 
κημα, Gdicynua), a sin, evil deed, [“ Differunt ἡ ἁμαρτία et 
τὸ ἁμάρτημα ut Latinorum peccat us et peccatum. Nam 
τὸ ἁμάρτημα et peccatum proprie malum facinus indi- 
cant; contra ἡ ἁμαρτία et peccatus primum peccationem, 
τὸ peccare, deinde peccatum, rem consequentem, valent.” 
Fritzsche ; see ἁμαρτία, fin. ; ef. also Trench § lxvi.]: Mk. 
iii. 28, and (LT Tr txt. WH) 29; iv. 12 (where GT Tr 
txt. WH om. L Tr mre. br. τὰ dpapr.) ; Ro. iii. 25; 1 Co. 
vi. 18; 2 Pet. 1. 9 (Β [1 WH txt. Tr mrg.] ἁμαρτιῶν). 
Tn prof. auth. fr. Soph. and Thue. down; [of bodily de- 
fects, Plato, Gorg. 479 a.; ἅμ μνημονικόν, Cic. ad Att. 
13, 21; ἅμ. γραφικόν, Polyb. 34, 3,11; ὅταν μὲν παραλόγως 
ἡ βλάβη γένηται, ἀτύχημα" ὅταν δὲ μὴ παραλόγως, ἄνευ δὲ 
κακίας, ἁμιίρτημα - ὅταν δὲ εἰδὼς μὲν μὴ προβουλεύσας δέ, 
ἀδίκημα, Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 10 p. 1135", 16 sq.].* 
ἁμαρτία, -as, 9, (fr. 2 aor. ἁμαρτεῖν, as ἀποτυχία fr. 
ἀποτυχεῖν), a failing to hit the mark (see ἁμαρτάνω). In 
Grk. writ. (fr. Aeschyl. and Thue. down). 1st, an error 
of the understanding (cf. Ackermann, Das Christl. im 
Plato, p. 59 Anm. 3 [Eng. trans. (S. R. Asbury, 1861) 
Ρ. ὅΤ η. 997). 2d, a bad action, evil deed. In the N. T. 
always in an ethical sense, and 1. equiv. to τὸ ἁμαρ- 
ravew α sinning, whether it occurs by omission or com- 
mission, in thought and feeling or in speech and actior 
(cf. Cie. de fin. 3, 9): Ro. v. 12 sq. 20; ὑφ᾽ ἁμαρτίαν 
εἶναι held down in sin, Ro. iii. 9; ἐπιμένειν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Ro. 
Vi. 1; ἀποθνήσκειν τῇ dp. and ζῆν ἐν αὐτῇ, Ro. vi. 2; τὴν dp. 
γινώσκειν, Ro. vii. 7; 2 Co. v. 21; νεκρὸς τῇ dp. Ro. vi. 
11; περὶ ἁμαρτίας to break the power of sin, Ro. viii. 3 [cf. 
Mey.]; σῶμα τῆς ἅμ. the body as the instrument of sin, 
Ro. vi. 6; ἀπάτη τῆς ἅμ. the craft by which sin is accus- 
tomed to deceive, Heb. iii. 13; ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἁμ. [ἀνομίας 
T Tr txt. WH éxt.] the man so possessed by sin that he 
seems unable to exist without it, the man utterly given up 


ἁμαρτία 


to sin, 2 Th. ii. 3 [W. § 34, 3 Note 2]. In this sense ἡ 
ἁμαρτία (i. 4. τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν) as a power exercising domin- 
ion over men (sin as a principle and power) is rhetorically 
represented as an imperial personage in the phrases 7 
ἅμ. βασιλεύει, κυριεύει, κατεργάζεται, Ro. v. 21; vi. 12, 
14; vii. 17, 20; δουλεύειν τῇ ἁμ. Ro. vi. 6; δοῦλος τῆς 
dp. In. viii. 84 [WH br. Gom. τῆς dp. ]; Ro. vi. 17; νόμος 
τῆς dp. the dictate of sin or an impulse proceeding from 
it, Ro. vii. 23; viii. 2; δύναμις τῆς du. 1 Co. xv. 563; (the 
prosopopeia occurs in Gen. iv. 7 and, ace. to the read- 
ing ἁμαρτία, in Sir. xxvii. 10). Thus ἁμαρτία in sense, 
but not in signification, is the source whence the 
several evil acts proceed; but it never denotes vitiosity. 
2. that which is done wrong, committed or resultant sin, 
an offence, a violation of the divine law in thought or in 
act (ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐστὶν ἡ ἀνομία, 1 Jn. 111. 4}; a. generally: 
Jas. i. 15; Jn. viii. 46 (where ἅμαρτ. must be taken to 
mean neither error, nor craft by which Jesus is corrupt- 
ing the people, but sin viewed generally, as is well 
shown by Liicke ad loc. and Ullmann in the Stud. u. 
Krit. for 1842, p. 667 sqq. [ef. his Siindlosigkeit Jesu 
p- 66 sqq. (Eng. trans. of 7th ed. p. 71 sq.)]; the 
thought is, ‘If any one convicts me of sin, then you may 
lawfully question the truth and divinity of my doctrine, 
for sin hinders the perception of truth’); χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας 
so that he did not commit sin, Heb. iv. 15; ποιεῖν duap- 
τίαν and τὴν dp. Jn. viii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 7; 
1 Pet. ii. 22; ἔχειν ἁμαρτίαν to have sin as though it were 
one’s odious private property, or to have done something 
needing expiation, i. q. to have committed sin, Jn. ix. 
41; xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; 1 Jn.i. 8, (so αἷμα ἔχειν, of one 
who has committed murder, Eur. Or. 514); very often 
in the plur. ἁμαρτίαι [in the Synopt. Gospels the sing. 
occurs but once: Mt. xii. 31]: 1 Th. ii. 16; [Jas. v. 16 
LT Tr WH]; Rev. xviii. 4 sq., ete.; πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν, 
Jas. v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 8; ποιεῖν ἁμαρτίας. Jas. v. 15; also 
in the expressions ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν, ἀφιέναι τὰς dp., ete. 
(see ἀφίημι, 1 d.), in which the word does not of itself 
᾿ denote the guilt or penalty of sins, but the sins are con- 
ceived of as removed so to speak from God’s sight, 
regarded by him as not having been done, and there- 
fore are not punished. ἐν ἅμαρτ. σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος thou 
wast covered all over with sins when thou wast born, 
i. 6. didst sin abundantly before thou wast born, Jn. ix. 
34; ἐν ταῖς du. ἀποθνήσκειν to die loaded with evil deeds, 
therefore unreformed, Jn. viii. 24; ἔτι ἐν ἁμαρτίαις εἶναι 
still to have one’s sins, se. unexpiated, 1 Co. xv. 17. 
b. some particular evil deed: τὴν dp. ταύτην, Acts vii. 60; 
πᾶσα ἁμαρτία, Mt. xii. 31; ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον, 1 Jn. v. 16 
(an offence of such gravity that a Christian lapses from 
the state of ζωή received from Christ into the state of 
θάνατος (cf. θάνατος, 2) in which he was before he be- 
came united to Christ by faith; cf. Liicke, De Wette, [esp. 
Westcott, ad 1.1). 3. collectively, the complex or 
aggregate of sins committed either by a single person or by 
many : αἴρειν τὴν dp. τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. i. 29 (see αἴρω. 3 
&.) ; ἀποθνήσκειν ἐ» τῇ du. Jn. viii. 21 (see 2 a. sub fin.) ; 
περὶ ἁμαρτίας, sc. θυσίας [ W. 583 (542); B. 393 (336) ], 


91 


ἄμεμπτος 


expiatory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (acc. to the usage of the 
Sept., who sometimes so translate the Hebr. HXNUM and 
nxon, e.g. Lev. ν. 11; vil. 27 (37); Ps. xxxix. (x1) 7); 
χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας having no fellowship with the sin which 
he is about [7] to expiate, Heb. ix. 28. 4. abstract for 
the concrete, i. q. ἁμαρτωλός : Ro. vii. 7 (ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία, 
opp. to ὁ νόμος ἅγιος, vs. 12); 2 Co. v. 21 (τὸν... ἁμαρτίαν 
ἐποίησεν he treated him, who knew not sin, as a sinner). 
Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. 289 sqq.; [see ἁμάρτημα; 
Trench § Ixvi.]. 

ἀμάρτυρος, -ον; (μάρτυς), without witness or testimony, 
unattested: Acts xiv.17. (Thue., Dem., Joseph., Plut., 
Leian., Hdian.) * 

ἁμαρτωλός, -ov, (fr. the form ἁμάρτω, as φείδωλος from 
φείδομαι), devoted to sin, a (masc. or fem.) sinner. In 
the N. T. distinctions are so drawn that one is called 
ἁμαρτωλός who is a. not free from sin. In this sense 
all men are sinners; as, Mt. ix.13; Mk. 1.17; Lk. vy. 8, 
32; xiii. 2; xviii. 13; Ro. iii. 7; v.[8],19; 1 Tim.i.15; 
Heb. vii. 306. ῬΌ. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked; 
a. univ.: 1 Tim.i.9; Jude 15; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. vi. 82-- 
34; vii. 37, 39; xv. 7,10; Jn. ix. 16, 24 sq. 31; Gal. ii. 
17; Heb. xii. 3; Jas. iv.8; v.20; 1 Pet.iv.18; ἁμαρτία 
itself is called ἁμαρτωλός, Ro. vii. 13. β. spec., of men 
stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g. 
the tax-gatherers: Lk. xv. 2; xviii. 13; xix. 7; hence the 
combination τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτωλοί, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; xi. 19; 
Mk. ii. 15 sq.; Lk. v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1. heathen, 
called by the Jews sinners κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν (1 Mace. i. 34; 
ii. 48, 62; Tob. xiii. 6): Mt. xxvi. 45 [?]; Mk. xiv. 41; 
Lk. xxiv. 7; Gal. ii. 15. (The word is found often in 
Sept., as the equiv. of NOM and pw, and in the O. T. 
Apocr.; very seldom in Grk. writ., as Aristot. eth. Nic. 
2,9 p. 11099, 33; Plut. de audiend. poét. 7, p. 25 ¢.)* 

ἄμαχος, -ον, (μάχη), in Grk. writ. [fr. Pind. down] 
commonly not to be withstood, invincible; more rarely 
abstaining from fighting, (Xen. Cyr. 4,1, 16; Hell. 4, 4, 
9); in the N. T. twice metaph. not contentious: 1 Tim. 
ἘΠΕ 5:17. Abii Pea! 

ἀμάω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἤμησα; (fr. ἅμα together; hence to 
gather together, cf. Germ. sammeln; [al. regard the init. 
a as euphonic and the word as allied to Lat. meto, Eng. 
mow, thus making the sense of cutting primary, and that 
of gathering in secondary; cf. Vaniéek p. 673]); freq. in 
the Grk. poets, to reap, mow down: τὰς χώρας, Jas. v. 4." 

ἀμέθυστος, -ov, 7, amethyst, a precious stone of a violet 
and purple color (Ex. xxviii. 19; ace. to Phavorinus so 
called διὰ τὸ ἀπείργειν τῆς μέθης [so Plut. quaest. conviv. 
iil. 153,161) > Reversi) 205 Cr. 1)..5..ν.}" 

ἀμελέω, -@; fut. ἀμελήσω ; 1 aor. ἠμέλησα : (fr. ἀμελής, 
and this fr. a priv. and μέλω to care for); very com. in 
prof. auth.; to be careless of, to neglect: τινός, Heb. ii. 3; 
viii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 14; foll. by inf., 2 Pet. i. 12 RG; 
without a case, ἀμελήσαντες (not caring for what had just 
been said [A. V. they made light of it]), Mt. xxii. 5.* 

ἄτμεμπτος, -ov, (μέμφομαι to blame), blameless, deserv- 
ing no censure (Tertull. irreprehensibilis), free from fault 
or defect: Lk.i.6; Phil. ii. 15; iii. 6; 1 Th. iii. 18 ΓΗ 


ἀμέμπτως 3 


mrg. ἀμέμπτως]; Heb. viii. 7 (in which nothing is lack- 
ing); in Sept. i. q. DA, «700 1. 1, 8 etc. Com. in Grk. 
writ. (Cf. Trench § ciii.]* 

ἀμέμπτως, adv., blamelessly, so that there is no cause for 
censure: 1 Th. ii. 10; [11]. 18 WH mrg.]; v. 23. [Fr. 
Aeschyl. down. Cf. Trench § ciii.]* 

ἀμέριμνος, -ov, (μέριμνα), free from anxiety, free from 
care: Mt. xxviii. 14; 1 Co. vii. 32 (free from earthly 
cares). (Sap. vi. 16; vii. 23; Hdian. 2, 4, 3; 3, 7,11; 
Anth. 9, 359, 5; [in pass. sense, Soph. Ajax 1206].) * 

ἀ-μετάθετος, -ov, (μετατίθημι), not transposed, not to be 
transferred ; fixed, unalterable: Heb. vi. 18; τὸ ἀμετάθε- 
tov as subst., immutability, Heb. vi.17. (8 Mace. v. 1; 
Polyb., Diod., Plut.) * 

ἀμετα-κίνητος, -ον, (μετακινέω), not to be moved from its 
place, unmoved; metaph. firmly persistent, [A. V. unmov- 
able]: 1 Co. xv. 58. (Plat. ep. 7, p. 343 a.; Dion. Hal. 
8, 74; [Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 16,9; 2, 32,3; 2, 35, 4].)* 

ἀμεταμέλητος, -ov, (μεταμέλομαι, μεταμέλει), not re- 
pented of, unregretted: Ro. xi. 29; σωτηρία, by litotes, 
salvation affording supreme joy, 2 Co. vii. 10 [al. con- 
nect it with μετάνοιαν]. (Plat., Polyb., Plut.) * 

ἀμετανόητος, -ov, (μετανοέω, q. V.), admitting no change 
of mind (amendment), unrepentant, impenitent: Ro. ii. 5. 
(In Leian. Abdic. 11 [passively], i. q. ἀμεταμέλητος, q. ν.; 
[Philo de praem. et poen. § 3].)* 

ἄμετρος, -ov, (μέτρον a measure), without measure, im- 
mense: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. (εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχᾶσθαι to 
boast to an immense extent, i. e. beyond measure, ex- 
cessively). (Plat., Xen., Anthol. iv. p. 170, and ii. 206, 
ed. Jacobs. )* 

ἀμήν, Hebr. 1285 1. verbal adj. (fr. [23 to prop; 
Niph. to be firm), firm, metaph. faithful: ὁ ἀμήν, Rev. 
iii. 14 (where is added ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστὸς K. ἀληθινός). 2. 
it came to be used as an adverb by which something is 
asserted or confirmed: a. at the beginning of a dis- 
course, surely, of a truth, truly; so freq. in the discourses 
of Christ in Mt. Mk. and Lk.: ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν “1 sol- 
emnly declare unto you,’ e.g. Mt. v.18; Mk. iii. 28; 
Lk. iv. 34. The repetition of the word (ἀμὴν ἀμήν), em- 
ployed by John alone inhis Gospel (twenty-five times), has 
the force of a superlative, most assuredly: Jn. i. 51 (52); 
iii. 8. Ὁ. at the close of a sentence; so it is, so be it, 
may it be fulfilled (γένοιτο, Sept. Num. ν. 22; Deut. xxvii. 
15, ete.): Ro.i. 25; ix.5; Gal.i.5; Eph. iii. 21; Phil. iv. 
20; 1 Tim.i.17; Heb. xiii. 21; 1 Pet. iv. 11; Rev. i. 6, 
and often; cf. Jer. xi. 5; xxxv. (xxviii.) 6; 1 K. i. 30. 
Τὸ was a custom, which passed over from the synagogues 
iato the Christian assemblies, that when he who had 
read or discoursed had offered up a solemn prayer to 
God, the others in attendance responded Amen, and 
thus made the substance of what was uttered their own: 
1 Co. xiv. 16 (τὸ ἀμήν, the well-known response Amen), 
cf. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii. 15 sqq.; Neh. v. 13; viii. 6. 
2 Co. i. 20 ai ἐπαγγελίαι .... τὸ ναί, Kal... τὸ ἀμήν, i. 6. 
had shown themselves most sure. [Cf. B. D.s. v. Amen.] 

ἀμήτωρ, -opos, 6,7, (μήτηρ), without a mother, mother- 
tess; in Grk. writ. 1. born wethout a mother, e. g. 


2 ᾿Αμπλίας 


Minerva, Eur. Phoen. 666 sq., ἃ]. ; God himself, inasmuch 
as he is without origin, Lact. instt. 4, 13, 2. 2. bereft 
of a mother, Hdt. 4, 154, al. 3. born of a base or un- 
known mother, Eur. Ion 109 ef. 837. 4. unmotherly, 
unworthy of the name of mother: μήτηρ ἀμήτωρ, Soph. 
El. 1154. Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 305 sqq. 5. 
in a signif. unused by the Greeks, ‘ whose mother is not 
recorded in the genealogy’: of Melchizedek, Heb. vii. 3; 
(of Sarah by Philo in de temul. § 14, and rer. div. haer. 
§ 12; [ef. Bleek u.s.]); ef. the classic ἀνολυμπιάς." 

ἀμίαντος, -ov, (μιαίνω), not defiled, unsoiled ; free from 
that by which the nature of a thing is deformed and de- 
based, or its force and vigor impaired: κοίτη pure, free 
from adultery, Heb. xiii. 4; κληρονομία (without defect), 
1 Pet. 1. 4; θρησκεία, Jas. i. 27; pure from sin, Heb. vii. 
26. (Also in the Grk. writ.; in an ethical sense, Plat. 
lege. 6, p. 777 e.; Plut. Pericl. c. 39 βίος καθαρὸς καὶ 
ἀμίαντος." 

᾿Αμιναδάβ, 6, IPD (servant of the prince, [8]. my 
people are noble; but cf. B. D. s. v.]), [A. V. Aminadab)], 
the prop. name of one of the ancestors of Christ (1 Chr. 
ii. 10 [A. V. Amminadab]): Mt. i. 4; Lk. iii. 33 [mot 
WH. See B. Ὁ. 5. v.].* 

ἄμμος, -ov, ἡ, sand; ace. to a Hebr. comparison ἄμ. τῆς 
θαλάσσης and ἄμ. παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς Gad. are used for 
an innumerable multitude, Ro. ix. 27; Heb. xi. 12; 
Rev. xx. 8, equiv. to xii. 18 (xiii. 1). Ace. to the con- 
text sandy ground, Mt. vii. 26. (Xen., Plat., Theophr. 
often, Plut., Sept. often.) * 

ἀμνός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Soph. and Arstph. down], a lamb: 
Acts viii. 32; 1 Pet. i. 19; rod θεοῦ, consecrated to God, 
Jn. i. 29, 36. In these passages Christ is likened to a 
sacrificial lamb on account of his death, innocently and 
patiently endured, to expiate sin. See ἀρνίον." 

ἀμοιβή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. ἀμείβω, as ἀλοιφή fr. ἀλείφω, στοιβή 
fr. στείβω), a very com. word with the Greeks, requital, 
recompense, in a good and a bad sense (fr. the signif. of 
the mid. ἀμείβομαι to requite, return like for ike): ina 
good sense, 1 Tim. v. 4.* 

ἄμπελος, -ov, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], a vine: Mt. xxvi. 29; 
ΜΚ. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii. 18; Jas. iii, 12. In Jn. xv. 1,4 sq. 
Christ calls himself a vine, because, as the vine imparts 
to its branches sap and productiveness, so Christ infuses 
into his followers his own divine strength and life. du. 
τῆς γῆς in Rey. xiv. 18 [Rec* om. τῆς ἀμπ.], 19, signifies 
the enemies of Christ, who, ripe for destruction, are 
likened to clusters of grapes, to be cut off, thrown into 
the wine-press, and trodden there.* 

ἀμπελουργός, -ov, ὁ, ἡ, (fr. ἄμπελος and ἘΡΓΩ), a vine- 
dresser: Lk. xiii. 7. (Arstph., Plut., Geopon., al.; Sept. 
for D73.)* 

ἀμπελών, -vos, ὁ, a vineyard: Mt. xx. 1 sqq.; xxi. 28, 
[33], 39 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sqq.; Lk. [xiii 6]; xx. 9 sqq.; 
1 Co. ix. 7. (Sept.; Diod. 4,6; Plut. pro nobilit. c. 3.)* 

᾿Αμπλίας [T ᾿Αμπλίατος, Tr WH Limrg. ᾿Αμπλιᾶτος ; 
hence accent ᾿Αμπλιᾶς ; cf. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 505; 
Chandler § 32], -ov, 6, Amplias (a contraction from the 
Lat. Ampliatus, which form appears in some authorities, 


᾿Αμπλίατος 


ef. W. 102 (97)), a certain Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi. 
8. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p.174; οἵ. The Atheneum 
for March 4, 1882, p. 289 sq.]* 

᾿Αμπλίατος (Tdf.) or more correctly ᾿Αμπλιᾶτος (L 
mrg. Tr WH) i. q. ᾿Αμπλίας, q. ν. 

ἀμύνω: 1 aor. mid. ἠμυνάμην; [allied w. Lat. munio, 
moenia, ete., Vanitek p. 731; Curtius § 451]; in Grk. 
writ. [fr. Hom. down] to ward off, keep off any thing 
from any one, τί τινι, ace. of the thing and dat. of pers. ; 
hence, with a simple dat. of the pers., to aid, assist any 
one (Thue. 1, 50; 3, 67, al.). Mid. ἀμύνομαι, with acc. 
of pers., to keep off, ward off, any one from one’s self; to 
defend one’s self against any one (so also 2 Mace..x. 17; 
Sap. xi. 3; Sept. Josh. x. 13); to take vengeance on any 
one (Xen. an. 2, 3, 23; Joseph. antt. 9, 1, 2): Acts vii. 
24, where in thought supply τὸν ἀδικοῦντα [cf. B. 194 
(168) note; W. 258 (242)].* 

ἀμφιάζω; [fr. ἀμφί, lit. to put around]; fo put on, 
clothe: in Lk. xii. 28 L WH ἀμφιάζει for Rec. ἀμφιέννυσι. 
(A later Grk. word; Sept. [2 K. xvii. 9 Alex.]; Job 
xxix. 14; [xxxi. 19]; xl.5; Ps. xxii. 6 Symm.; several 
times in Themist.; οἵ. Btém. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 112; [Veitch 
s.v.; Β. 49 (42 sq-); Steph. s. v. col. 201 e. quotes from 
Cram. Anecdot. Ox. vol. ii. p. 338, 31 τὸ μὲν ἀμφιέζω ἐστὶ 
κοινῶς, τὸ δὲ ἀμφιάζω Δωρικὸν, ὥσπερ τὸ ὑποπιέζω καὶ 
ὑποπιάζω].) Cf. ἀμφιέζω." 

ἀμφι-βάλλω ; to throw around, i. 4. περιβάλλω, of a gar- 
ment (Hom. Od. 14, 342); to cast to and fro now to one 
side now to the other: anet, Mk. i. 16 α 1, Τ Tr WH [ace. 
to T Tr WH used absol.; cf. of ἀμφιβολεῖς, Is. xix. 8]. 
(Hab. i. 17.)* 

ἀμφίβληστρον, -ov, τό, (ἀμφιβάλλω), in Grk. writ. any- 
thing thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains, 
a garment; spec. a net for fishing, [casting-net]: Mk. i. 
16 RGL; Mt.iv.18. (Sept.; Hes. seut. 215; Hat. 1, 
141; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Syn. see δίκτυον, and cf. 
Trench ὃ lxiv.; B. Ὁ. 5. v. net.]* 

ἀμφιέζω, 1. q. ἀμφιέννυμι; in Lk. xii. 28 ἀμφιέζει T Tr. 
Cf. ἀμφιάζω. 

ἀμφι-έννυμι ; pf. pass. ἠμφίεσμαι ; (ἔννυμι) ; [fr. Hom. 
down ]; to put on, to clothe: Lk. xii. 28 (RG; ef. ἀμφιέζωγ:; 
Mt. vi. 30; ἔν τινι [Β. 191 (166)], Lk. vii. 25; Mt. xi. 8.* 

᾿Αμφίπολις, -ews, 7, Amphipolis, the metropolis of 
Macedonia Prima [ef. B. D. s. v. Macedonia]; so called, 
because the Strymon flowed around it [Thue. 4, 102]; 
formerly called ’Evvéa ὁδοί (Thue. 1,100): Acts xvii. 1 
[see B. D.].* 

ἄμφοδον, -ov, τό, (ἀμφί, ὁδός), prop. a road round any- 
thing, @ street, [Hesych. ἄμ φ οδα- ai ῥύμαι. ἀγυιαί. δίοδοι 
(al. διέξοδοι διορυγμαί, al. ἡ πλατεία) ; Lex. in Bekk. An- 
ecdota i. p. 205, 14 "Audodov: ἡ ὥσπερ ἐκ τετραγώνου 
Soph. Lex.; Wetst. on 
28 (where see Tdf.’s 
xxx. 16 (xlix. 27), and 


διαγεγραμμένη ὁδός. For exx. see 
Mk. 1. ο.; cod. D in Acts xix. 
note) |]: Mk. xi.4. (Jer. xvii. 27; 
in Grk. writ.) * 

ἀμφότεροι, -ar, -a, (fr. Hom. down], both of two, both the 
one and the other: Mt. ix. 17, ete.; τὰ ἀμφότερα, Acts 
xxiii. 8; Eph. ii. 14. 


33 


av 


ἀμώμητος, -ov, (μωμάομαι), that cannot be censured, 
blameless: Phil. ii. 15 R G (cf. τέκνα μωμητά, Deut. 
xxxii. 5); 2 Pet. iii. 14. (Hom. Il. 12, 109; [Hesiod, 
Pind., al.;] Plut. frat. amor. 18; often in Anthol.)* 

ἄμωμον, -ov, τό, amomum, a fragrant plant of India, 
having the foliage of the white vine [al. ampeloleuce]} 
and seed, in clusters like grapes, from which ointment 
was made (Plin. h. n. 12, 13 [28]): Rev. xviii. 13 GL 
TTrWH. [See B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]* 

ἄμωμος, -ov, (μῶμος), without blemish, free from faulti- 
ness, as a victim without spot or blemish: 1 Pet. i. 19 
(Lev. xxii. 21); Heb. ix. 14; in both places allusion is 
made to the sinless life of Christ. Ethically, without 
blemish, faultless, unblamable: Eph. i. 4; v. 27; Col. i. 
22; Phil. ii. 15 LTTrWH; Jude 24; Rey. xiv. 5. 
(Often in Sept.; [Hesiod, Simon., Iambl.], Hdt. 2, 177; 
Aeschyl. Pers. 185; Theoer. 18, 25.) [Syn. see Trench 
§ ciii.; Tittmann i. 29 sq.]* 

᾿Αμών, 6, indecl., Amon, (7588 artificer [but ef. B. D.]), 
king of Judah, son of Manasseh, and father of Josiah: 
Mt.i.10, [LT Tr WH -μώς. Cf. B. D.].* 

᾿Αμώς, 6, Amos, (jj strong), indecl. prop. name of one 
of Christ’s ancestors: [Mt. i. 10 L T Tr WH]; Lk. iii. 25.* 

ἄν, a particle indicating that something can or could 
occur on certain conditions, or by the combination of 
certain fortuitous causes. In Lat. it has no equivalent ; 
nor do the Eng. haply, perchance, Germ. wohl (wol), 
etwa, exactly and everywhere correspond to it. The 
use of this particle in the N. T., illustrated by copious 
exx. fr: Grk. writ., is shown by W. § 42; [ef. B. 216 
(186) 544. Its use in classic Grk. is fully exhibited (by 
Prof. Goodwin) in L. and S. s. v.]. 

It is joined 1. in the apodoses of hypothetical sen- 
tences 1. with the Impf., where the Lat. uses the 
impf. subjunctive, e. g. Lk. vii. 39 (ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν, sciret, 
he would know) ; Lk. xvii. 6 (ἐλέγετε ἄν ye would say) ; Mt. 
xxiii. 80 (non essemus, we should not have been); Jn. 
v. 46; vili.42; ix. 41; xv. 19; xviii. 36; 1 Co. xi. 31; 
Gal. i. 10; iii. 21 [but WH mrg. br.]; Heb. iv. 8; viii. 4, 
7.. 2. with the indic. Aor. (where the Lat. uses the 
plpf. subj. like the fut. pf. subj., J would have done it), 
to express what would have been, if this or that either 
were (εἰ with the impf. in the protasis preceding), or 
had been (e? with the aor. or plpf. preceding): Mt. xi. 
21 and Lk. x. 13 (ἄν μετενόησαν they would have re- 
pented); Mt. xi. 23; xii. 7 (ye would not have con- 
demned); Mt. xxiv. 48 (he would have watched), 22 and 
Mk. xiii. 20 (no one would have been saved, i.e.all even now 
would have to be regarded as those who had perished ; 
ef. W. 304 (286)); Jn. iv. 10 (thou wouldst have asked); 
xiv. 2 (εἶπον ἄν I would have said so); 28 (ye would have 
rejoiced); Ro. ix. 29 (we should have become); 1 Co. ii. 
8; Gal. iv. 15 (RG); Acts xviii. 14. Sometimes the 
condition is not expressly stated, but is easily gathered 
from what is said: Lk. xix. 23 and Mt. xxv. 27 (1 should 
have received it back with interest, sc. if thou hadst given 
it to the bankers). 3. with the Plupf.: Jn. xi. 21 
[R Tr mrg.] (οὐκ ἂν ἐτεθνήκει [LT Tr txt. WH ἀπέθανεν 


“ 


av 


would not have died, for which, in 32, the aor. οὐκ ἂν 
ἀπέθανεν ; Jn. xiv. 7 [not Tdf.] (εἰ with the plpf. preced- 
ing); 1 Jn. ii. 19 (they would have remained with us). 
Sometimes (as in Grk. writ., esp. the later) ἄν is omitted, 
in order to intimate that the thing wanted but little 
(impf.) or had wanted but little (plpf. or aor.) of being 
done, which yet was not done because the condition was 
not fulfilled (ef. Alex. Btim. in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1858, 
p- 489 sqq.; [N. T. Gram. p. 225 (194)]; Fritzsche on 
Rom. vol. ii. 33; W. § 42, 2 p. 305 (286)), 6. g. Jn. viii. 39 
(where the ἄν is spurious); xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; Acts 
xxvi. 32; Ro. vii. 7; Gal. iv. 15 (ἄν before ἐδώκατε 
has been correctly expunged by LT Tr WH). II. 
Joined to relative pronouns, relative adverbs, and ad- 
verbs of time and quality, it has the same force as the 
Lat. cumque or cunque, -ever, -soever, (Germ. irgend, 
etwa). 1. foll. by a past tense of the Indicative, when 
some matter of fact, something certain, is spoken οἵ; 
where, “when the thing itself which is said to have 
been done is certain, the notion of uncertainty involved 
in ἄν belongs rather to the relative, whether pronoun or 
particle” (Klotz ad Dev. p. 145) [ef. W. § 42, 3.a.]; ὅσοι 
ἄν as many as: Mk. vi. 56 (ὅσοι ἂν ἥπτοντο [ἥψαντο L 
txt. T Tr txt. WH] αὐτοῦ as many as touched him (cf. B. 
216 (187)]); Mk. xi. 24 (ὅσα ἂν προσευχόμενοι αἰτεῖσθε 
[Grsb. om. dv], but L txt. T Tr WH have rightly restored 
ὅσα προσεύχεσθε κ. αἰτεῖσθε). καθότι av in so far or so ofien 
as, according as, (Germ. je nachdem gerade) : Acts ii. 45; 
iv. 35. ὡς ἄν: 1 Co. xii. 2 (in whatever manner ye were 
led [ef. B. § 139, 13; 383(329)sq.]). 2. foll. bya Sub- 
junctive, a. the Present, concerning that which 
may have been done, or is usually or constantly done 
(where the Germ. uses mégen); ἡνίκα av whensoever, as 
oflen as: 2 Co. iii. 15 LT Tr WH; ὃς ἄν whoever, be he 
who hemay: Mt. xvi. 25 (LT Tr WH ἐάν) ; [Mk. viii. 35 
(where T Tr WII fut. indic.; see WH. App. p. 172)]; 
Lk. x. 5 (L T Tr WH aor.), 8; Gal. v.17 (T Tr WH ἐάν, 
Lbr. ἐάν); 1 Jn. ii. 5; iii. 17; Ro. ix. 15 (Ex. xxxiii. 19) ; 
xvi. 2; 1 Co. xi. 27, ete. ὅστις av: 1 Co. xvi. 2 [Tr WH 
ἐάν; WH mre. aor.]; Col. iii. 17 (Ltxt. Tr WH ἐάν). ὅσοι 
av: Mt. vii. 12 (T WH ἐάν); xxii. 9 (LT Tr WH ἐάν). 
ὅπου ἄν whithersoever: Lk. ix. 57 (L Tr ἐάν) ; Rev. xiv. 4 
(L Tr [T ed. 7 not 8, WH] have adopted ὑπάγει, defended 
also by B. 228 (196)); Jas. iii. 4 (RGLTrmrg. in 
br.). ὁσάκις ἄν how oflen soever: 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. (where 
LT Tr WH ἐάν). ὡς ἄν in what way soever: 1 Th. ii. 7 
({ef. Ellic. ad loc.; B. 232 (200)], LT Tr WH ἐάν). Ὄ. 
the Aorist, where the Lat. uses the fut. pf.; ὃς av: Mt. 
v. 21, 22 (εἴπῃ whoever, if ever any one shall have said) ; 
31 sq. [in vs. 32 L T Tr WH read πᾶς ὁ ἀπολύων]; x. 
11; xxvi. 48 (Tdf. ἐάν); Mk. 111. 29, 35; ix.41,ete. ὅστις 
av: Mt. x. 33 [L Tr WH txt. om. ay]; xii. 50; Jn. xiv. 
13 [Tr mrg. WH pres.]; Acts iii. 23 (Tdf. ἐάν), ete. ὅσοι 
ἄν: Mt. xxi. 22 (Tres. ἐάν) ; xxiii. 8 (T WH ἐάν); Mk. iii. 
28 (Tr WH éav); Lk. ix. 5 (LT Tr WH pres.) ; Jn. xi. 
22; Acts ii. 39 (Lehm. ods); iii. 22. ὅπου av: Mk. 
xiv. 9 (T WH ἐάνν; ix. 18 (LT Tr WH ἐάν). ἄχρις οὗ 


ἄν until (donec): 1 Co. xv. 25 Rec.; Rev. ii. 25. ἕως ἄν | ιέρος], (Polyb. 4, 20, 10 ἀνὰ μέρος ἄδειν). 


94 


ἜΝ 
ανα 


until (usque dum): Mt. ii. 18; x. 11; xxii. 44; Mk. vi. 
10; Lk. xxi. 32; 1 Co. iv. 5, ete. ἡνίκα ἄν, of fut. time, 
not until then, when .. .or then at length, when ...: 2Co. 
iii. 16 (T WH txt. ἐάν) [ef. Kiihner ii. 951; Jelf ii. 565]. 
ὡς ἄν as soon as [B. 232 (200)]: 1 Co. xi. 34; Phil. ii. 
23. ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἂν ἐγερθῇ, Lk. xiii. 25 (from the time, what- 
ever the time is, when he shall have risen up). But ἐάν 
(q. v-) is also joined to the pronouns and adverbs men- 
tioned, instead of av; and in many places the Mss. and 
edd. fluctuate between ἄν and ἐάν, (exx. of which have 
already been adduced); [ef. Tdf. Proles. p. 96; WH. 
App. p. 173 “ predominantly ἄν is found after conso- 
nants, and ἐάν after vowels’’]. Finally, to this head 
must be referred ὅταν (i. 4. ὅτε ἄν) with the indic. and 
much oftener with the subj. (see ὅταν), and ὅπως ἄν, al- 
though this last came to be used as a final conjunction 
in the sense, that, if it be possible: Lk. ii. 85; Acts iii. 
20 (19); xv.17; Ro. 111. 4 ; see ὅπως, II.1b. [Cf. W.309 
(290 sq.); B. 234 (201).] 111. ἄν is joined to the 
Optat. [W. 303 (284); B. 217 (188)]; when a certain 
condition is laid down, as in wishes, 7 would that ete.: 
Acts xxvi. 29 (εὐξαίμην [Tdf. εὐξάμην ἄν I could pray, se. 
did it depend on me) ; in direct questions [W.1.c.; B. 
254 (219)]: Acts viii. 31 (πῶς ἂν δυναίμην ; i.e. on what 
condition, by what possibility, could I? cf. Xen. oee. 11, 
5); Acts xvii. 18 (τί ἂν θέλοι . . . λέγειν what would he 
say ? it being assumed that he wishes to utter some defi- 
nite notion or other); Acts ii. 12RG; in dependent 
sentences and indirect questions in which the nar- 
rator introduces another’s thought [W. § 42,4; B.l.e.]: 
Lk. i. 62; vi. 11; ix.46; [xv. 26 L br. Tr WH;; cf. xviii. 
36 Lbr. Trbr. WH mrg.]; Acts v. 24; x. 17; xvii. 20 
RG. IV. dvis found without a mood in 1 Co. vii. 5 
(εἰ μή τι ἄν [WH br. ἄν], except perhaps, sc. γένοιτο, [but 
cf. Bttm. as below]). ὡς ἄν, adverbially, tanquam (so 
already the Vule.), as if: 2 Co. x. 9 (like ὥσπερ ἄν in Grk. 
writ. ; cf. Kiihner ii. 210 [§ 398 Anm. 4; Jelf § 430]; B. 
219 (189); [L. and S. 8. v. D. 111.7). 

ἄν, contr. from ἐάν, if; foll. by the subjune.: Jn. xx. 
23 [Lchm. ἐάν. Also by the (pres.) indie. in 1 Jn. v. 15 
Lehm.; see B. 223 (192); W. 295 (277)]. Further, 
LT Tr WH have received dy in Jn. xiii. 20; xvi. 23; 
[so WH Jn. xii. 32; cf. W. 291 (274); B. 72 (63)].* 

ἀνά, prep., prop. upwards, up, (ef. the adv. ἄνω, opp. to 
κατά and κάτω), denoting motion from a lower place to a 
higher [cf. W. 398 (372) n.]; rare in the N. T. and only 
with the accus. 1. in the expressions ἀνὰ μέσον (or 
jointly ἀνάμεσον [so R* Tr in Rev. vii. 17]) into the midst, 
in the midst, amidst, among, between, — with gen. of place, 
Mt. xiii. 25; Mk. vii. 31; Rev. vii. 17 [on this pass. see 
μέσος, 2 sub fin.]; of pers., 1 Co. vi. 5, with which cf. 
Sir. xxv. 18(17) ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ (Fritz. τῶν) πλησίον αὐτοῦ; 
ef. W. § 27, 1 fin. [B. 332 (285)], (Sir. xxvii. 2; 1 Mace. vii. 
28; xiii. 40, ete.; in Sept. for 71N3, Ex. xxvi. 28; Josh. 
xvi. 9; xix. 1; Diod. 2,4 ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν χειλέων [see peaos, 
97}; ἀνὰ μέρος, (Vulg. per partes), in turn, one after an- 
other, in succession: 1 Co. xiv. 27 [where Rec*t writes ava- 
2. joined to 


ἀναβαθμός 


numerals, it has a distributive force [W. 398 (372); B. 
331 sq. (285)]: In. ii. 6 (ava μετρητὰς δύο ἣ τρεῖς two or 
three metretz apiece); Mt. xx. 9 sq. (ἔλαβον ἀνὰ δηνάριον 
they received each a denarius) ; Lk. ix. 3 [Tr br. WH om. 
ἀνά; ix. 14]; x. 1 (ava δύο [WH ava δύο [δύο]] two by 
two); Mk. vi. 40 (1, Τ Tr WH xara); [Rev. iv. 8]; and 
very often in Grk. writ.; cf. W. 395 (372). It is used 
adverbially in Rey. xxi. 21 (ava εἷς ἕκαστος, like ava τέσ- 
capes, Plut. Aem. 32; cf. W. 249 (234); [B. 30 (26)]). 
3. Prefixed to verbs ava signifies, a. upwards, up, up 
to, (Lat. ad, Germ. auf), as in ἀνακρούειν, ἀναβαίνειν, 
ἀναβάλλειν, ἀνακράζειν, etc. b. it corresponds to the 
Lat. ad (Germ. an), to [indicating the goal], as in dvay- 
γέλλειν [al. would refer this to d.], ἀνάπτειν. c. it de- 
notes repetition, renewal, i. q. denuo, anew, over again, as 
d. it corresponds to the Lat. re, retro, back, 


Cf. Win. 


in ἀναγεννᾶν. 
backwards, as in ἀνακάμπτειν, ἀναχωρεῖν, ete. 
De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 3 sq.* 

ἀνα-βαθμός, -ov, ὁ, (βαθμός, and this fr. Baive) ; ἜΣ 
an ascent. 2. a means of going up, a flight of steps, 
a stair: Acts xxi. 35,40. Exx. fr. Grk. writ. in Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 324 sq.* 

ἀνα-βαίνω ; [impf. ἀνέβαινον Acts iii. 1; fut. ἀναβήσομαι 
Ro. x. 6, after Deut. xxx. 12]; pf. ἀναβέβηκα; 2 aor. 
ἀνέβην, ptcp. ἀναβάς, impy. avaBa Rey. iv. 1 (ἀνάβηθι 
Lehm.), plur. ἀνάβατε (for RG ἀνάβητε) Rev. xi. 12 L 
TTr[ WH; cf. WH. App. p. 168°]; W. §14, 1h.; [B. 54 
(47); fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 1225 a. to gu up, 
move to a higher place, ascend: a tree (emi), Lk. xix. 
4; upon the roof of a house (ἐπί), Lk. v. 19; into a ship 
(eis), Mk. vi. 51; [Mt. xv. 39 GTrtxt.; Acts xxi. 6 
Tdf.]; εἰς τὸ ὄρος, Mt. v. 1; Lk. ix. 28; MK. iii. 13; εἰς τὸ 
ὑπερῷον, Acts i. 13; εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, Ro. x. 6; Rey. xi. 12; 
εἰς τὸν οὐρ. is omitted, but to be supplied, in Jn. i. 51 (52) ; 
vi. 62, and in the phrase ava. πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Jn. xx. 17. 
(it is commonly maintained that those persons are fig. 
said ἀναβεβηκέναι eis τὸν οὐρανόν, who have penetrated the 
heavenly mysteries: Jn. iii. 13, cf. Deut. xxx. 12; Prov. 
xxiv. 27 (xxx.4); Bar.iii.29. But in these latter pass. 
also the expression is to be understood literally. Andas 
respects Jn. iii. 13, it must be remembered that Christ 
brought his knowledge of the divine counsels with him 
from heaven, inasmuch as he had dwelt there prior to 
his incarnation. Now the natural language was οὐδεὶς 
ἦν ev τῷ οὐρανῷ ; but the expression ἀναβέβηκεν is used 
because none but Christ could get there except by as- 
cending. Accordingly εἰ μή refers merely to the idea, 
involved in ἀναβέβηκον, of a past residence inheaven. 
Cf. Meyer [or Westcott] ad loc.) Used of travelling toa 
higher place: εἰς Ἱεροσόλ. Mt. xx. 17 sq.; Mk. x. 32 sq., 
etc. ; eis τὸ ἱερόν, Jn. vii. 14; Lk. xviii. 10. Often the place 
to or into which the ascent is made is not mentioned, but 
is easily understood from the context: Acts viii. 31 (into 
the chariot) ; Mk. xv. 8 (to the palace of the governor, 
acc. to the reading ἀναβάς restored by L T Tr txt. WH 
for RG ἀναβοήσας), ete.; or the place alone is men- 
tioned from which (ἀπό, ἐκ) the ascent is made: Mt. iii. 
16; Acts viii. 39; Rev. xi. 7. Ὁ. in a wider sense 


30 


ἀνάγαιον 


of things rising up, to rise, mount, be borne up, spring 
up: of a fish swimming up, Mt. xvii. 27; of smoke rising 
up, Rey. viii. 4; ix. 2; of plants springing up from the 
ground, - Mt. xiii. 7; Mk. iv. 7, 32, (as in Grk. writ.; 
Theophr. hist. plant. 8, 3, and Hebr. 793); of things 
which come up in one’s mind (Lat. suboriri) : avaBaiv. ἐπὶ 
τὴν καρδ. or ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, Lk. xxiv. 38; 1 Co. ii. 9; Acts 
vii. 23 (ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν x. it came into his mind 1. 6. he re- 
solved, foll. by inf.), after the Hebr. 3>-5xx my, Jer. iii. 
16, ete. [B. 135 (118)]. Of messages, prayers, deeds, 
brought up or reported to one in a higher place: Acts 
x. 4; xxi. 31 (tidings came up to the tribune of the 
cohort, who dwelt in the tower Antonia). [Comp.: προσ-; 
ovy-avaBaive. | 

ἀνα-βάλλω: 2 aor. mid. ἀνεβαλόμην ; 1. to throw or 
toss up. 2. to put back or off, delay, postpone, (very 
often in Grk. writ.) ; in this sense also in mid. (prop. to 
defer for one’s self): twa, to hold back, delay; ina 
forensic sense to put off any one (Lat. ampliare, Cic. 
Verr. act. 2, 1, 9 § 26) i. e. to defer hearing and decid- 
ing (adjourn) any one’s case: Acts xxiv. 22; cf. Kypke 
[or Wetst.] ad loc.* 

ἀνα-βιβάζω: 1 aor. dveSiBaca; to cause to go up or as- 
cend, to draw up, (often in Sept. and Grk. writ.): Mt. 
xiii. 48, (Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 2 πρὸς τὴν γῆν ἀνεβίβαζε τὰς 
ἑαυτοῦ Tpunpets).* 

ἀνα-βλέπω ; 1 aor. ἀνέβλεψα; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. 
to look up: Mk. viii. 24, [25 RGL]; xvi. 4; Lk. xix. 5; 
xxi.1; Acts xxii. 13; εἴς twa, ibid.; εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, Mt. 
xiv. 19; Mk. vi. 41; vii. 34, (Plat. Axioch. p. 370b.; 
Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 9). 2. to recover (lost) sight: Mt. xi. 
5; xx. 34; Lk. xviii. 41 sqq., ete. ([Hdt. 2, 111;] Plat. 
Phaedrus p. 243 b. παραχρῆμα ἀνέβλεψε, Arstph. Plut. 
126); used somewhat loosely also of the man blind from 
birth who was cured by Christ, Jn. ix. 11 (12) (cf. Meyer 
ad loc.), 17 sq. (Paus. 4, 12, 7 (10) συνέβη τὸν ᾿Οφιονέα 

«τὸν ἐκ γενετῆς τυφλὸν ἀναβλέψαι). Cf. Win. De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 7 sq. 

ἀνάτβλεψις, -ews, 7, recovery of sight: Lk. iv. 18 (19), 
(Sept. Is. Ixi. 1). [Aristot.]* 

ἀνα-βοάω, -ῶ: 1 aor. dveBdnoa; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down]; to raise a cry, to cry out anything, say it shout- 
ing: Lk. ix. 38 (LT Tr WH ἐβόησε) ; Mk. xv. 8 (where 
read ἀναβάς, see ἀναβαίνω, a. sub fin.) ; with the addition 
of φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, Mt. xxvii. 46 [Tr WH Limrg. ἐβόησε], 
(as Gen. xxvii. 38; Is. xxxvi. 13, etc.). Cf. Win. De 
verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 6 sq.; [and see Soda, fin.].* 

ἀνα-βολή, -ῆς, 7, (ἀναβάλλω, q. V.), often in Grk. writ., 
a putting off, delay: ποιεῖσθαι ἀναβολήν to interpose (lit. 
make) delay, Acts xxv. 17, (as in Thue. 2,42; Dion. Hal. 
11, 33; Plut. Camill.'¢. 35).* 

ἀνάγαιον, -ov, τό, (fr. ava and γαῖα i. 6. γῆ). prop. any- 
thing above the ground; hence a room in the upper part 
of a house: Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxii. 12,(in GL T Tr WH). 
Also written ἀνώγαιον (which Tdf. formerly adopted ; 
ef. Xen. an. 5, 4, 29 [where Dind. dvaxeiwv]), ἀνώγεον 
(Rece.), ἀνώγεων ; on this variety in writing cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 297 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 358]; 


ἀναγγέλλω 


Fritzsche on Mk. p. 611 sq.; Β. 18 (12); [WH. App. 
p- 151).* 

ἀν-αγγέλλω ; impf. ἀνήγγελλον ; [fut. ἀναγγελῶ]: 1 aor. 
ἀνήγγειλα; 2 aor. pass. ἀνηγγέλην, Ro. xv. 21; 1 Pet. 1.12 
(several times in Sept.; 1 Mace. ii. 31; W. 82 (78); 
[Veitch s. v. ἀγγέλλω]) ; to announce, make known, [ οἵ. 
ἀνά, 8 Ὁ.7: ri, Acts xix. 18; foll. by ὅτι; Jn. v. 15 [L mrg. 
WH txt. T εἶπεν]; ὅσα xrd. Acts xiv. 27; (Mk. v.19 R 
GLurg.]; [absol. with εἰς, Mk. v. 14 Rec.]; equiv. to 
disclose: τί τινι, Jn. iv. 25; xvi. 13-15; used of the for- 
mal proclamation of the Christian religion: Acts xx. 
20; 1 Pet.i.12; 1Jn.i.5; περί twos, Ro. xv. 21 (Is. lii. 
15); to report, bring back tidings, rehearse, used as in 
Grk. writers (Aeschyl. Prom. 664 (661); Xen. an. 1, 3, 
21; Polyb. 25, 2, 7) of messengers reporting what they 
have seen or heard, [cf. ava u. 5.7: τί, Acts xvi. 38 
(where L T Tr WH amnyy.); 2 Co. vii. 7. 

ἀνα-γεννάω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἀνεγέννησα ; pf. pass. ἀναγεγέν- 
νημαι; to produce again, beget again, beget anew; metaph.: 
twa, thoroughly to change the mind of one, so that he 
lives a new life and one conformed to the will of God, 
1 Pet. i.3; passively ἔκ τινος, ibid. i. 23. (In the same 
sense in 600]. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. 5. v.]. Among prof. 
auth. used by Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 1 τῶν ἐκ τοῦ στασιάζειν 
αὐτοῖς ἀναγεννωμένων [yet Bekker ἂν γενομένων] δεινῶν 
which originated.)* 

ἀνα-γινώσκω ; [impf. ἀνεγίνωσκεν Acts viii. 28]; 2 aor. 
ἀνέγνων, [inf. ἀναγνῶναι Lk. iv. 16], ptep. ἀναγνούς ; Pass., 
[pres. ἀναγινώσκομαι); 1 aor. ἀνεγνώσθην ; in prof. auth. 
1. to distinguish between, to recognize, to know accurately, 
to acknowledge; hence 2. to read, (in this signif. 
[“ first in Pind. O. 10 (11). 1”] fr. [Arstph.,] Thue. 
down): ri, Mt. xxii. 31; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. vi. 3; Jn. xix. 
20; Acts viii. 30,32; 2 Co.i.13; [Gal. iv. 21 Lchm. 
mrg.]; Rev.i.3; ν. 4 Rec.; twa, one’s book, Acts viii. 
28, 30; ἐν with dat. of the book, Mt. xii. 5; xxi.42; Mk. 
xii. 26; with ellipsis of ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, Lk. x. 26; foll. by ὅτι 
[objective], Mt. xix.4; [foll. by ὅτι recitative, Mt. xxi. 
16]; τί ἐποίησε, Mt. xii. 3; Mk. ii. 25. The obj. not 
mentioned, but to be understood from what precedes : 
Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Acts xv. 31; xxiii. 34; Eph. 
iii. 4; pass. 2 Co. iii. 2. to read to others, read aloud: 
2 Co. iii. 15; Acts xv. 21, (in both places Μωῦσῆς i. q. 
the books of Moses); [Lk. iv. 16; Acts xiii. 27]; 1 Th. 
v. 27; Col. iv. 16.* 

ἀναγκάζω ; [impf. ἠνάγκαζον); 1 aor. ἠνάγκασα; 1 aor. 
pass. ἠναγκάσθην; (fr. ἀνάγκη) ; [fr. Soph. down]; to 
necessitate, compel, drive to, constrain, whether by force, 
threats, ete., or by persuasion, entreaties, ete., or by 
other means: τινά, 2 Co. xii. 11 (by your behavior 
towards me); τινά foll. by inf., Acts xxvi. 11; xxviii. 
19; Gal. ii. 3,14 (by your example); vi. 12; Mt. xiv. 
22; Mk. vi. 45; LK. xiv. 23.* 

ἀναγκαῖος, -ala, -aiov, (ἀνάγκη). [fr. Hom. down (in vari- 
ous senses) ], necessary ; a. what one cannot do with- 
out, indispensable: 1 Co. xii. 22 (τὰ μέλη) ; Tit. iii. 14 
(χρεῖαι). b. connected by the bonds of nature or of 
friendship: Acts x. 24 (ἀναγκαῖοι [A. V. near] φίλοι). 


36 


> av 
ἀναδείκνυμι 


c. what ought according to the law of duty to be done, 
what is required by the condition of things: Phil. i. 24. 
ἀναγκαῖόν ἐστι foll. by ace. with inf., Acts xiii. 46; Heb. 
Vill. 3. ἀναγκαῖον ἡγεῖσθαι to deem necessary, foll. by 
inf., Phil. ii. 25; 2 Co. ix. 5.* 

ἀναγκαστῶς, adv., by force or constraint; opp. to éxov- 
ciws, 1 Pet.v. 2. (Plat. Ax. p. 366 a.)* 

ἀνάγκη, -ης, ἡ ; 1. necessity, imposed either by the 
external condition of things, or by the law of duty, re- 
gard to one’s advantage, custom, argument: κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην 
perforce (opp. to κατὰ ἑκούσιον), Philem. 14; ἐξ ἀνάγκης 
of necessity, compelled, 2 Co. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 12 (neces- 
sarily) ; ἔχω ἀνάγκην I have (am compelled by) neces- 
sity, (also in Grk. writ.) : 1 Co. vii. 37; Heb. vii. 27; foll. 
by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 RLbr.; Jude 3; ἀν. μοι 
ἐπίκειται necessity is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16; ἀνάγκη 
(i. q. ἀναγκαῖόν ἐστι) foll. by inf.: Mt. xviii. 7; Ro. xiii. 
5; Heb. ix. 16, 23, (so Grk. writ.). 2. in a sense rare 
in the classies (Diod. 4, 43), but very common in Hellen- 
istic writ. (also in Joseph. Ὁ. j. 5, 13, 7, ete.; see W. 30), 
calamity, distress, straits: Lk. xxi. 23; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Th. 
iii. 7; plur. ἐν ἀνάγκαις, 2 Co. vi. 4; xii. 10." 

ἀνα-γνωρίζω : 1 aor. pass. ἀνεγνωρίσθην ; to recognize : 
Acts vii. 13 [Tr txt. WH txt. éyywpion] was recognized 
by his brethren, cf. Gen. xlv.1. (Plat. politic. p. 258 a. 
ἀναγνωρίζειν τοὺς συγγενεῖς." 

ἀνά-γνωσις, -ews, 7, (ἀναγινώσκω, q. γ.}}; a. a know- 
ing again, owning. Ὁ. reading, [fr. Plato on]: Acts 
xiii. 15; 2 Co. iii. 14; 1 Tim. iv. 13. (Neh. viii. 8 i. q. 
R p>)" 

ἀν-άγω : 2 aor. ἀνήγαγον, inf. ἀναγαγεῖν, [ptep. dvaya- 
yov]; Pass., [pres. avayopar]; 1 aor. [ef. sub fin.] ἀνή- 
χθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead up, to lead or bring into 
a higher place; foll. by εἰς with acc. of the place: Lk. 
ii. 22; iv. 5 [Δ Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.]; xxii. 66 [T 
Tr WH ἀπήγαγον); Acts ix. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 (εἰς 
τ. ἔρημον, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan). τινὰ ἐκ 
νεκρῶν fr. the dead in the world below, to the upper 
world, Heb. xiii. 20; Ro. x. 7; τινὰ τῷ λαῷ to bring one 
forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place), 
and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4; 
θυσίαν τῷ εἰδώλῳ to offer sacrifice to the idol, because 
the victim is lifted up on the altar, Acts vii. 41. Navi- 
gators are κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν said ἀνάγεσθαι (pass. [or mid. ]) 
when they /aunch out, set sail, put to sea, (so ἀναγωγή 
in Justin. Mart. dial. ο. Tr. c. 142 [and in the elassies]) : 
Lk. viii. 22; Acts xiii. 13; xvi. 11; xviii. 21; xx. 3,13; 
xxi. [1], 2; xxvii. 2, 4, 12, 21; xxviii. 10 sq. (Polyb. 
1, 21,4; 23, 3, ete.) [Comp.: éz-avayo.]* 

dva-Selkvupe: 1 aor. ἀνέδειξα, [impv. ἀνάδειξον ; fr. Soph. 
down]; to lift up anything on high and exhibit it for all 
to behold (Germ. aufzeigen) ; hence to show accurately, 
clearly, to disclose what was hidden, (2 Mace. ii. 8 ef. 
6): Acts i. 24 (show which of these two thou hast 
chosen). Hence ἀναδ. τινά to proclaim any one as elected 
to an office, to announce as appointed (king, general, 
etc., messenger): Lk. x. 1, (2 Mace. ix. 14, 28, 25; x. 
11; xiv. 12, 26; 1 Esdr. i. 35; viii. 23; Polyb. 4, 48, 


ἀνάδειξις 


8; 51, 3; Diod. i. 66; 15, 98; Plut. Caes. 37, etc.; 
Hdian. 2, 12, 5 (3), al.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. 
iii. p. 12 sq.* 

Gyd-Bekis, -ews, ἡ, (ἀναδείκνυμι, 4. V-), @ pointing out, 
public showing forth; τῶν χρόνων, Sir. xliii. 6. a pro- 
claiming, announcing, inaugurating, of such as are elected 
to office (Plut. Mar. 8 ὑπάτων ἀνάδειξις [cf. Polyb. 15, 26, 
17): Lk. i. 80 (until the day when he was announced 
[A. V. of his shewing] to the people as the forerunner 
of the Messiah; this announcement he himself made at 
the command of God, Lk. iii. 2 sqq.).* 

ἀνα-δέχομαι : 1 aor. ἀνεδεξάμην ; fr. Hom. down; to 
take up, take upon one’s self, undertake, assume; hence 
to receive, entertain any one hospitably: Acts xxviii. 7; 
to entertain in one’s mind: ras ἐπαγγελίας, i. 6. to em- 
brace them with faith, Heb. xi. 17.* 

dva-SiSopr: 2 aor. ptep. avadovs; 41. to give forth, 
send up, so of the earth producing plants, of plants 
yielding fruit, ete.; in prof. auth. 2. acc. to the sec- 
ond sense which ἀνά has in composition [see ἀνά, 3 b.], 
to deliver up, hand over: ἐπιστολήν, Acts xxiii. 33, (the 
same phrase in Polyb. [29, 10, 7] and Plut.).* 

ἀνα-ζάω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἀνέζησα; a word found only in the 
N. T. and 660]. writ.; to live again, recover life; a 
prop., in Rec. of Ro. xiv. 9; Rev. xx. 5. b. trop. 
one is said ἀναζῆν who has been νεκρός in a trop. sense ; 
a. to be restored to a correct life: of one who returns to 
a better moral state, Lk. xv. 24 [WH mrg. ἔζησεν] ([A. V. 
is alive again], cf. Mey. ad loc.), 32 (I Tr WH ἔζησε). 
B. to revive, regain strength and vigor: Ro. vii. 9; sin is 
alive, indeed, and vigorous among men ever since the 
fall of Adam; yet it is destitute of power (νεκρά ἐστι) 
in innocent children ignorant of the law; but when they 
come to a knowledge of the law, sin recovers its power 
in them also. Others less aptly explain ἀνέζησε here 
began to live, sprang into life, (Germ. lebte auf ).* 

ἀνα-ζητέω, -@; [impf. ἀνεζήτουν); 1 aor. ἀνεζήτησα; ‘to 
run through with the eyes any series or succession of 
men or things, and so to seek out, search through, make 
diligent search, Germ. daran hinsuchen, aufsuchen’ (Win. 
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 14): τινά, Lk. ii. 44, (and 
45 Ltxt. T Tr WH); Acts xi. 25. (See exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. [fr. Plato on] in Win. 1. c.) * 

ἀνα-ζώννυμι : to gird up; mid. to gird up one’s self or 
for one’s self: ἀναζωσάμενοι tas ὀσφύας, 1 Pet. i. 13, 1. 6. 
prepared, —a metaphor derived from the practice of the 
Orientals, who in order to be unimpeded in their move- 
ments were accustomed, when about to start on a jour- 
ney or engage in any work, to bind their long and flow- 
ing garments closely around their bodies and fasten them 
with a leathern girdle; cf. περιζώννυμε. (Sept. Jude. 
xviii. 16; Prov. xxix. 35 (xxxi. 17); Dio Chrys. or. 72, 
2, ed. Emp. p. 729; Didym. ap. Athen. 4, (17) p. 139 
Ὁ: 31.}" 

ἀνα-ζωπυρέω, -ῶ ; (τὸ ζώπυρον i.e. a. the remains of 
a fire, embers; 6. that by which the fire is kindled 
anew or lighted up, a pair of bellows) ; to kindle anew, 
rekindle, resuscitate, [yet on the force of ἀνα- cf. Ellic. 


37 


ἀναθεματίζω 


on 2 Tim. as below]; generally trop., to kindle up, in- 
flame, one’s mind, strength, zeal, (Xen. de re equest. 10, 
16 of a horse roused to his utmost; Hell. 5, 4,46; An- 
tonin. 7, 2 φαντασίας ; Plut. Pericl. 1,4; Pomp. 41, 2; 
49,5; Plat. Charm. p. 156 d.; etc.) : τὸ χάρισμα, 2 Tim. 
i. 6, i. 6. τὸ πνεῦμα, vs. 7. Intrans. to be enkindled, to 
gain strength: Gen. xlv. 27; 1 Macc. xiii. 7, and in prof. 
auth.; ἀναζωπυρησάτω ἡ πίστις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 27, 3 
[see Gebh. and Harn. ad loc.].* 

ἀνα-θάλλω: 2 aor. avéCadov; (Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 7; 
Sap. iv. 4; very rare in Grk. writ. and only in the poets, 
ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 195; [Veitch s. v. θάλλω ; W. 
87 (83); B. 59 (52)]); to shoot up, sprout again, grow 
green again, flourish again, (Hom. Il. 1, 236; Ael. y. h. 
5,4); trop. of those whose condition and affairs are 
becoming more prosperous: Phil. iv. 10 dveOadere τὸ 
ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ φρονεῖν ye have revived so as to take thought for 
me [the inf. being the Grk. accus., or accus. of specifica- 
tion, W. 317 (298); cf. Ellic. ad loc.]. Others, ace. to 
a trans. use of the verb found only in the Sept. (Ezek. 
xvii. 24; Sir. i. 18, ete.), render ye have revived (allowed 
to revive) your thought for me [the inf. being taken as an 
object-ace., W. 323 (303); B. 263 (226); cf. Bp. Lghtft. 
ad loc.]; against whom see Meyer ad loc.* 

ἀνάθεμα, -ros, τό, (i. 4. TO ἀνατεθειμένον) ; 1. prop. 
a thing set up or laid by in order to be kept; spec. a 
votive offering, which after being consecrated to a god 
was hung upon the walls or columns of his temple, or put 
in some other conspicuous place: 2 Mace. ii. 13, (Plut. 
Pelop. c. 25); Lk. xxi. 5 in LT, for ἀναθήμασι RG Tr 
WH,;; for the two forms are sometimes confounded in the 
codd.; Moeris, ἀνάθημα ἀττικῶς, ἀνάθεμα ἑλληνικῶς. CE. 
ἐπίθημα, ἐπίθεμα, etc., in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 249 [cf. 445; 
Paral. 417; see also Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p.41]. 2. 
ἀνάθεμα in the Sept. is generally the translation of the 
Heb. D1n, α thing devoted to God without hope of being 
redeemed, and, if an animal, to be slain [Lev. xxvii. 28, 
29]; therefore a person or thing doomed to destruction, 
Josh. vi. 17; vii. 12, ete. [W. 32]; a thing abominable 
and detestable, an accursed thing, Deut. vii. 26. Hence 
in the N. T. ἀνάθεμα denotes 8. acurse: ἀναθέματι ava- 
θεματίζειν, Acts xxiii. 14 [W. 466 (434); B. 184 (159)]. 
b. a man accursed, devoted to the direst woes (i. q. ἐπι- 
κατάρατος) : ἀνάθεμα ἔστω, Gal. i. 8 sq.; 1 Co. xvi. 22; 
ἀνάθεμα λέγειν τινά to execrate one, 1 Co. xii. 3 (RG, 
but L T Tr WH have restored ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς, sc. ἔστω); 
ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Ro. ix. 3 (pregnantly i. q. 
doomed and so separated from Christ). Cf. the full re- 
marks on this word in Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 247 
sqq-; Wieseler on Gal. p. 39 sqq.; [a trans. of the latter 
by Prof. Riddle in Schaff’s Lange on Rom. p. 302 sqq. ; 
see also Trench $y.; Bp. Lightfoot on Gal. 1. ο.; Elli- 
cott ibid.; Tholuck on Rom. 1. c.; BB.DD. 5. vv. Anath- 
ema, Excommunication].* 

Gva-Separitw; 1 aor. ἀνεθεμάτισα; (ἀνάθεμα. q.V-); ἃ 
purely bibl. and eccl. word, to declare anathema or ac- 
cursed; in the Sept. i. q. DIM to devote to destruction, 
(Josh. vi. 21, ete.; 1 Mace. v. 5); ἑαυτόν to declare one’s 


᾿ ; 
ἀναθεωρέω 


self liable to the severest divine penalties, Acts xxiii. 
12, 21; ἀναθέματι ἀναθεματίζειν (Deut. xiii. 15; xx. 17, 
LW. § 54, 3; B. 184 (159) ]) ἑαυτόν foll. by inf., to bind 
one’s self under a curse to do something, Acts xxiii. 14. 
absol., to asseverate with direful imprecations: Mk. xiv. 
71. [Comp.: κατ-αναθεματίζω. " 
ἀνα-θεωρέω, -ῶ ; prop. ‘to survey a series of things from 
the lowest to the highest, Germ. daran hinsehen, ldngs 
durchsehen’, [to look along up or through], (Win. De verb. 
comp. Pt. iii. p. 3); hence to look at attentively, to observe 
accurately, consider well: ri, Acts xvii. 23, Heb. xiii. 7. 
(Diod. Sic. 12, 15 ἐξ ἐπιπολῆς μὲν θεωρούμενος ..- - ἀναθεω- 
ρούμενος δὲ καὶ per’ ἀκριβείας ἐξεταζόμενος ; 14, 109; 2, 
5; Leian. vit. auct. 2; necyom. 15; Plut. Aem. P. 1 
[uncertain]; Cat. min. 14; [adv. Colot. 21, 2].)* 
dva-Onpa, -ros, τό, (ἀνατίθημι), a gift consecrated and 
laid up in a temple, a votive offering (see ἀνάθεμα, 1): Lk. 
xxi. 5 [RGTrWH]. (3 Mace. iii. 17; ef. Grimm on 
2 Mace. iii. 2; κοσμεῖν ἀναθήμασι occurs also in 2 Mace. 
ix. 16; Plato, Alcib. ii. § 12, p. 148 e. ἀναθήμασί τε κε- 
κοσμήκαμεν τὰ ἱερὰ αὐτῶν, Hdt. 1, 183 τὸ μὲν δὴ ἱερὸν 
οὕτω κεκόσμηται - ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἴδια ἀναθήματα πολλά." 
ἀναίδεια (T WH ἀναιδία ; see I, ει), -ας, ἡ, (ἀναιδής, and 
this fr. ἡ αἰδώς a sense of shame); fr. Hom. down; 
shamelessness, impudence: Lk. xi. 8 (of an importunate 
man, persisting in his entreaties; [A. V. importunity]).* 
ἀν-αίρεσις, -ews, 7), (fr. ἀναιρέω, 2, q. ν.), a destroying, 
killing, murder, ‘taking off’: Acts viii. 1; xxii. 20 Ree. 
(Sept. only in Num. xi. 15; Judg. xv. 17; Jud. xv. 4; 
2 Mace. v.13. Xen. Hell. 6, 3,5; Hdian. 2, 13, 1.)* 
ἀν-αιρέω, -ῶ; fut. ἀνελῶ, 2 Th. ii. 8 (LT Tr WH tat. ef. 
Jud. vii. 13; Dion. Hal. 11,18; Diod. Sic. 2, 25; ef. W. 
82 (78); [B. 53 (47); Veitch s. v. aipéw, “ perh. late 
ἑλῶ "7), for the usual ἀναιρήσω ; 2 aor. ἀνεῖλον ; 2 aor. mid. 
ἀνειλόμην (but ἀνείλατο Acts vii. 21, ἀνεῖλαν Acts x. 39, 
ἀνείλατε Acts ii. 23, in GLT Tr WH, after the Alex. 
form, cf. W. 73 (71) sq.; B. 39 (34) sq. [see aipéw]) ; 
Pass., pres. ἀναιροῦμαι; 1 aor. ἀνῃρέθην; Ἃ. to take up, 


to lift up (from the ground); mid. to take up for myself 


as mine, to own, (an exposed infant): Acts vii. 21; (so 
ἀναιρεῖσθαι, Arstph. nub. 531; Epict. diss. 1, 23, 7; 
[Plut. Anton. 36, 3; fortuna Rom. 8; fratern. am. 18, 
ete. ]). 2. to take away, abolish; a. ordinances, es- 
tablished customs, (to abrogate): Heb. x.9: b. aman, 
to put out of the way, slay, kill, (often so in Sept. and 


Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 66] Thue. down): Mt. ii. 16; Lk. 


Ἐπ 2; xxiii. 32; Acts ii. 23; v. 33, 36; vii. 28; ix. 28 
sq. 29; x. 39; xii. 2; xiii. 28; xxii. 20; xxiii. 15, 21, 27; 
xxy. 3; xxvi.10; 2 Th.ii.8 LT Tr WH txt.; ἑαυτόν, to 
kill one’s self, Acts xvi. 27.* 

ἀν-αίτιος, -ov, (αἰτία) guiltless, innocent: Mt. xii. 5, 7. 
(Often in Grk. writ.; Deut. xxi. 8 sq. i. q. pai Sus. 62.)* 

ἀνα-καθ-ίζω : 1 aor. dvexabioa; to raise one’s self and 
sit upright; to sit up, sit erect: Lk. vii. 15 [Lehm. mrg. 
WHure. ἐκάθισεν]; Acts ix. 40. (Xen. eyn. 5, 7, 19; 
Plut. Alex. ο. 14; and often in medical writ.; with 
ἑαυτόν, Plut. Philop. c. 20; mid. in sume sense, Plat. 
Phaedo e. 3 p. 60 b.)* 


38 


ἀνακεφαλαιόω 


ἀνα-καινίζω ; (kaos); to renew, renovate, (cf. Germ. 
auffrischen) : twa eis μετάνοιαν so to renew that he shall 
repent, Heb. vi. 6. (Isoer. Areop. 3; Philo, leg. ad Gaium 
§ 11; Joseph. antt. 9, 8,2; Plut. Marcell. c. 6; Leian. 
Philop. c. 12; Sept. Ps. cii. (ciii.) 5; ciii. (civ.) 30, ete.; 
eccl. writ.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10.* 

ἀνα-καινόω, -@: [pres. pass. dvaxawovpa]; a word 
peculiar to the apostle Paul; prop. to cause lo grow up 
(ava) new, to make new; pass., new strength and vigor 
is given to me, 2 Co. iv. 16; to be changed into a new 
kind of life, opposed to the former corrupt state, Col. 
iii. 10. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10 [or Mey. 
on Col. l.c.; Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 16, 17 dvaxawwo- 
ποιέω. Cf. Késtlin in Herzog ed. 2, i. 477 sq.]* 

ἀνα-καίνωσις, -ews, 7, α renewal, renovation, complete 
change for the better, (cf. avaxawéw) : τοῦ νοός. object. gen., 
Ro. xii. 2; πνεύματος ἁγίου, effected by the Holy Spirit, 
Tit. iii. 5. (Etym. Magn., Suid.; [Herm. vis. 3, 8, 9; 
other eccl. writ.]; the simple καίνωσις is found only in 
Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 10.) [Cf Trench § xviii.]* 

ἀνα-καλύπτω : [Pass., pres. ptep. ἀνακαλυπτόμενος ; pf. 
ptep. dvaxexaduppevos | ; to unveil, to uncover (by 
drawing back the veil), (i. q. ma, Job xii. 22; Ps. xvii. 
(xviii.) 16): κάλυμμα . . . μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον the veil... 
not being lifted (lit. unveiled) [so WH punctuate, see 
W. 534 (497); but LT Alf. ete. take the ptep. as a 
neut. acc. absol. referring to the clause that follows with 
ὅτι : it not being revealed that, ete.; (for ἀνακαλ. in this 
sense see Polyb. 4, 85,6; Tob. xii. 7,11); see Meyer ad 
loe.], is used allegor. of a hindrance to the understand- 
ing, 2 Co. iii. 14, (ἀνακαλύπτειν συγκάλυμμα, Deut. xxii. 
30 Alex.) ; ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ with unveiled face, 
2 Co. iii. 18, is also used allegor. of a mind not blinded, 
but disposed to perceive the glorious majesty of Christ. 
(The word is used by Eur., Xen., [Aristot. de sens. 5, 
vol. i. p. 444", 25], Polyb., Plut.)* 

ἀνα-κάμπτω: fut. ἀνακάμψω; 1 aor. ἀνέκαμψα; to bend 
back, turn back. In the N. T. (as often in prof. auth. ; 
in Sept. i. q. 2) intrans. to return: Mt. ii. 12; Lk. 
x. 6 (where the meaning is, ‘ your salutation shall i1eturn 
to you, as if not spoken”); Acts xviii. 21; Heb. xi. 15.* 

ἀνά-κειμαι ; [impf. 3 pers. sing. ἀνέκειτο] ; depon. mid. 
to be laid up, laid: Mk. v. 40 R Lbr. [ef. Eng. to lay out]. 
In later Grk. to lie at table (on the lectus tricliniaris (ef. 
B.D. s. v. Meals]; the earlier Greeks used κεῖσθαι, κατα- 
κεῖσθαι. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 sq.; Fritzsche [or 
Wetst.] on Mt. ix. 10): Mt. ix. 10; xxii. 10 sq.; xxvi. 
7,20; Mk. [vi. 26 T Tr WH]; xiv. 18; xvi. 14; Lk. vii. 
37 (LT Tr WH κατάκειται) ; xxii. 27; Jn. xii. 2 (Rec. 
Generally, to eat together, to 
Comp.: συν-ανά- 


ovvavakeip.) ; Xill. 23, 28. 
dine: Jn. vi. 11. [Cf. ἀναπίπτω, fin. 
κειμαι.} * 

ἀνα-κεφαλαιόω, -ὥ : [pres. pass. ἀνακεφαλαιοῦμαι; 1 aor. 
mid. inf. ἀνακεφαλαιώσασθαι) ;; (fr. κεφαλαιόω, q. ν.» and 
this fr. κεφάλαιον, q. V.); to sum up (again), to repeat 
summarily and so to condense into a summary (as, the 
substance of a speech; Quintil. 6. 1 ‘rerum repetitio et 
congregatio, quae graece ἀνακεφαλαίωσις dicitur ’, [ἔργον 


ἀνακλίνω 


ῥητορικῆς - - - ἀνακεφαλαιώσασθαι πρὸς ἀνάμνησιν, Aristot. 
frag. 123, vol. ν. p. 1499", 887); so in Ro. xiii. 9. In 
Eph. i. 10 God is said ἀνακεφαλαιώσασθαι τὰ πάντα ἐν τῷ 
Χριστῷ, to bring together again for himself (note the 
mid.) all things and beings (hitherto disunited by sin) 
into one combined state of fellowship in Christ, the uni- 
versal bond, [ef. Mey. or Ellic. on Eph. 1. 6.1; (Protev. 
Jac. 13 εἰς ἐμὲ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία Adap, where cf. 
Thilo).* 

ἀνα-κλίνω : fut. ἀνακλινῶ; 1 aor. ἀνέκλινα; Pass., 1 aor. 
ἀνεκλίθην;; fut. ἀνακλιθήσομαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to lean 
against, lean upon ; a. to lay down: twa, Lk. ii. 7 (ἐν 
(τῇ) φάτνῃ). b. to make or bid to recline: Mk. vi. 39 
(ἐπέταξεν αὐτοῖς, sc. the disciples, ἀνακλῖναι [-κλιθῆναι L 
WH txt.] πάντας i.e. the people); Lk. ix 15 (T Tr WH 
κατέκλιναν) ; xii. 81. Pass. to lie back, recline, lie down: 
Mt. xiv. 19; of those reclining at table and at feasts, 
Lk. vii. 36 (RG); xiii. 29; Mt. viii. 11,—in the last 
two pass. used fig. of participation in future blessedness 
in the Messiah’s kingdom.* 

ἀνα-κόπτω: 1 aor. ἀνέκοψα; to beat back:, check, (as the 
course of a ship, Theophr. char. 24 (25), 1 [var.]): 
τινά foll. by an inf. [A. V. hinder], Gal. ν. 7 Rec., where 
the preceding ἐτρέχετε shows that Paul was thinking of 
an obstructed road; cf. eyxérrw.* 

dva-kpatw: 1 aor. [rare and late,” Veitch s. v. κράζω; 
B. 61 (53)] ἀνέκραξα; 2 aor. ἀνέκραγον (Lk. xxiii. 18 T 
Tr txt. WH); 0 raise a cry from the depth of the throat, 
to cry out: Mk.i. 23; vi.49; Lk. iv. 33; viii. 28; xxiii. 
18. Exx. fr. prof. auth. in Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. 
iii. p. 6 sq.* 

dva-kpivw ; 1 aor. ἀνέκρινα; Pass., [pres. avaxpivopac] ; 
1 aor. ἀνεκρίθην ; (freq. in Grk. writ., esp. Attic); prop. 
by looking through a series (ava) of objects or particulars 
to distinguish (κρίνω) or search after. Hence a. to 
investigate, examine, inquire into, scrutinize, sift, ques- 
tion: Acts xvii. 11 (ras γραφάς); 1 Co. x. 25, 27 (not 
anxiously questioning, sc. whether the meat set before 
you be the residue from heathen sacrifices). Spee. in a 
forensic sense (often also in Grk. writ.) of a judge, to 
hold an investigation ; to interrogate, examine, the ac- 
cused or the witnesses; absol.: Lk. xxiii. 14; Acts xxiv. 
8. τινά, Acts xii. 19; xxviii. 18; pass., Actsiv.9. Paul 
has in mind this judicial use (as his preceding term 
ἀπολογία shows) when in 1 Co. ix. 3 he speaks of τοῖς 
ἐμὲ ἀνακρίνουσι. investigating me, whether I am a true 
apostle. b. univ. to judge of, estimate, determine (the 
excellence or defects of any person or thing): τί, 1 Co. 
ii. 15; τινά, 1 Co. iv. 3 sq.; pass., 1 Co. ii. [14], 15; xiv. 
24. [Cf. Lghtft. Fresh Revision, ete. iv. § 3 (p. 67 sq. 
Am. ed.).]* 

ἀνά-κρισις, -ews, 7, an examination; as a law-term 
among the Greeks, the preliminary investigation held 
for the purpose of gathering evidence for the informa- 
tion of the judges (Meier and Schémann, Att. Process, 
pp- 27, [622; cf. Dict. of Antiq. s. v.]); this seems to 
be the sense of the word in Acts xxv. 26.* 

ἀνα-κυλίω: 1. fo roll up. 2. to roll back: dvaxe- 


39 


ἀνάλυσις 


κύλισται ὁ λίθος, ΜΚ. xvi.4 T Tr WH. (Alexis in Athen. 
vi. p. 237 ¢.; Leian. de luctu 8; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.)* 

dva-KimTw: 1 aor. avexua; to raise or lift one’s self 
up; a. one’s body: Lk. xiii. 11; Jn. viii. 7,10; (Xen. 
de re equ. 7, 10, al.; Sept. Job x. 15). b. one’s soul; 
to be elated, exalted: Lk. xxi. 28; (Xen. oec. 11, 5; 
Joseph. b. j. 6, 8, 5, al.).* 

ἀνα-λαμβάνω ; 2 aor. ἀνέλαβον; 1 aor. pass. ἀνελήφθην 
(ἀνελήμφθην LT Tr WH; cf. W. p. 48 [B. 62 (54); 
Veitch (5. ν. λαμβάνω) ; see λαμβάνω, and 5. v. M, μ7); [fr. 
Hdt. down]; 1. to take up, raise: εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, Mk. 
xvi. 19; Acts i. 11; x. 16, (Sept. 2 K. ii. 11); without 
case, Acts i. 2, 22; 1 Tim. iii. 16 [ef. W. 413 (385)], 
(Sir. xlviii. 9). 2. to take up (a thing in order to 
carry or use it): Acts viil.43; Eph. vi. 13,16. to take 
to one’s self: twa, in order to conduct him, Acts xxiii. 
31; or as a companion, 2 Tim. iv. 11; or in Acts xx. 13 
sq. to take up sc. into the ship.* 

ἀνάληψις (ἀνάλημψις 1, Τ Tr WH; see M, p), -εως, 9, 
(ἀναλαμβάνω), [fr. Hippoer. down], a taking up: Lk. ix. 
51 (sc. εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν of the ascension of Jesus into 
heaven; [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi § 18; Swicer, 
Thesaur. Eccles. s. y.; and Meyer on Lk. 1. c.]).* 

ἀν-αλίσκω : fr. the pres. ἀναλόω [3 pers. sing. ἀναλοῖ, 
2 Th. i.8 WH mrg.] come the fut. ἀναλώσω; 1 aor. 
ἀνήλωσα and ἀνάλωσα [see Veitch]; 1 aor. pass. ἀνηλώ- 
θην; (the simple verb is found only in the pass. ἁλίσκομαι 
to be taken; but a in ἁλίσκομαι is short, in ἀναλίσκω 
long; οἵ. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 113; [Veitch s. vv.; “the 
diff. quantity, the act. form, the trans. sense of the pf., 
and above all the difference of sense, indicate a diff. 
origin for the two verbs.” lL. and 5.7); [fr. Pind. 
down]; 1. to expend; to consume, 6. g. χρήματα (to 
spend money ; very often in Xen.). 2. to consume, 
use up, destroy: Lk. ix. 54; Gal. v.15; 2 Th. ii. 8 RG 
WH ure. (Sept. Jer. xxvii. (1.) 7; Prov. xxiii. 28; Gen. 
xli. 30, ete.) [Comp.: κατ-, προσ-αναλίσκω.] * 

ἀναλογία, -as, 7, (ἀνάλογος conformable, proportional), 
proportion: κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως, 1. q. κατὰ TO 
μέτρον πίστεως received from God, Ro. xii. 6, ef. 8. 
(Plat., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.)* 

ἀνα-λογίζομαι : 1 aor. ἀνελογισάμην : dep. mid. to think 
over, ponder, consider: commonly with ace. of the thing, 
but in Heb. xii. 3 with ace. of the pers. ‘to consider by 
weighing, comparing,’ ete. (3 Mace. vii. 7. Often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Plat. and Xen. down.) * 

ἄναλος, -ov, (GAs salt), saltless, unsalted, (ἄρτοι ἄναλοι, 
Aristot. probl. 21, 5, 1; ἄρτος ἄναλος, Plut. symp. v. 
quaest. 10 § 1): ἅλας ἄναλον salt destitute of pungency, 
Mk. ix. 50.* 

[ἀναλόω, see ἀναλίσκω. | 

ἀνάλυσις, -ews, 7. (ἀναλύω. q- V-); 1. an unloosing 
(as of things woven), a dissolving (into separate parts). 
2. departure, (a metaphor drawn from loosing from 
moorings preparatory to setting sail, cf. Hom. Od. 15, 
548; [or, ace. to others, fr. breaking up an encampment; 
cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 23]), Germ. Aufbruch: 2 Tim. 
iv. 6 (departure from life; Philo in Flace. § 21 [p. 544 


ἀναλύω 


ed. Mang. ] ἡ ἐκ τοῦ βίου τελευταία ἀνάλυσις ; [Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 44, 5 ἔγκαρπον k. τελείαν ἔσχον τὴν ἀνάλυσιν; Euseb. 
h. e. 8, 32, 1 μαρτυρίῳ τὸν βίον ἀναλῦσαι, cf. 3, 34]. CE. 
ἀνάλυσις ἀπὸ συνουσίας, Joseph. antt. 19, 4, 1).* 

ava-Avw: fut. ἀναλύσω ; 1 aor. ἀνέλυσα; 1. to un- 
loose, undo again, (as, woven threads). 2. to depart, 
Germ. aufbrechen, break up (see ἀνάλυσις, 2), 80 very 
often in Grk. writ.; to depart from life: Phil. i. 23, 
(Leian. Philops. ὁ. 14 ὀκτωκαιδεκαέτης ὧν avehvev; add 
Ael. v. h. 4, 23; [ἀνέλυσεν ὁ ἐπίσκοπος Πλάτων ἐν κυρίῳ, 
Acta et mart. Matth. § 817). to return, ἐκ τῶν γάμων, 
Lk. xii. 36 [B. 145 (127); for exx.] ef. Kuinoel [and 
Wetstein] ad loc.; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 25.* 

ἀναμάρτητος, -ov, (fr. ἀν priv. and the form dyapréw), 
sinless, both one who has not sinned, and one who cannot 
sin. In the former sense in Jn. viii. 7; Deut. xxix. 19; 
2 Mace. viii. 4; xii. 42; [Test. xii. Patr. test. Benj. 
§ 3]. On the use of this word fr. Hat. down, cf. {7{|- 
mann, Siindlosigkeit Jesu, p. 91 sq. [(abridged in) Eng. 
trans. p. 99; Cremer s. v.].* 

ἀνα-μένω; [fr. Hom. down]; τινά, to wait for one 
(Germ. erharren, or rather heranharren [i. 6. to await 
one whose coming is known or foreseen]), with the 
added notion of patience and trust: 1 Th. i. 10 [ef. El- 
licott ad loc.]. Good Greek; ef. Win. De verb. comp. 
ete. Pt. iii. p. 15 sq.* 

[ἀνα-μέρος, i. 6. ἀνὰ μέρος, see ava, 1.] 

[ἀνά-μεσον, i. 6. ἀνὰ μέσον, see ἀνά, 1.] 

ἀνα-μιμνήσκω ; fut. ἀναμνήσω (fr. the form μνάω) ; Pass., 
[pres. ἀναμιμνήσκομαι]; 1 aor. ἀνεμνήσθην; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to call to remembrance, to remind: twa tt one of 
a thing [W. § 32, 4a.], 1 Co. ἵν. 17; to admonish, τινά 
foll. by inf., 2 Tim. i. 6. Pass. to recall to one’s own mind, 
to remember; absol.: Mk. xi. 21. with gen. of the thing, 
Mk. xiv. 72 Ree. τί, Mk. xiv. 72 LT Tr WH; context- 
ually, to (remember and) weigh well, consider: 2 Co. vii. 
15; Heb. x. 32; cf. W. § 30, 10c.; [B. § 132, 14]; 
Matth. ii. p. 820 sq. Syn. 
see ἀνάμνησις fin.]* 

ἀνάμνησις, -ews, 7, (ἀναμιμνήσκω), a remembering, recol- 
lection: εἰς τ. ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν to call me (affectionately) 
to remembrance, Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co. 
xi. 24sq. ἐν αὐταῖς (sc. θυσίαις) ἀνάμνησις ἁμαρτιῶν in 
offering sacrifices there is a remembrance of sins, i. 6. 
the memory of sins committed is revived by the sacri- 
fices, Heb. x. 8. In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.* 

[SyYN. ἀνάμνησις, ὑπόμνησις : The distinction between these 
words as stated by Ammonius et al. — viz. that ἀνάμν. denotes 
an unassisted recalling, ὑπόμν. a remembrance prompted by 
another, —seems to be not wholly without warrant; note 
the force of ὑπό (cf. our ‘sug-gest’). But even in class. Grk. 
the words are easily interchangeable. Schmidt ch. 14; 
Trench § evii. 6, ef. p. 61 note; Ellic. or Holtzm. on 2 Tim. 
1: Ὁ 

sss -6: to renew, (often in Grk. writ.); Pass. [W. 
§ 39, 3 N. 3; for the mid. has an act. or reciprocal 
force, cf. 1 Mace. xii. 1 and Grimm ad loc.] ἀνανεοῦσθαι 
τῷ πνεύματι to be renewed in mind, i. 6. to be spiritually 
transformed, to take on a new mind [see vois, 1 b. fin.; 


[Come.: ἐπ-αναμιμνήσκω. 


40 


ἀναπαύω 


πνεῦμα, fin.}, Eph. iv. 38. Cf. Tittmann i. p. 60; [Trench 
§§ lx. xviii.], and ἀνακαινόω above.* 

dva-vidw : [‘in good auth. apparently confined to the 
pres.’; 1 aor. ἀνένηψα!] ; to return to soberness (ἐκ μέθης, 
which is added by Grk. writ.) ; metaph.: 2 Tim. ii. 26 
ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος [W. § 66, 2 d.] to be set free 
from the snare of the devil and to return to a sound mind 
[‘one’s sober senses’]. (Philo, lege. alleg. ii. § 16 dva- 
νήφει, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι μετανοεῖ; add Joseph. antt. 6, 11, 10; 
Ceb. tab. 9; Antonin. 6, 31; Charit. 5,1.) [See ἀγρυ- 
πνέω, fin. }* 

*Avavias [ WH. ‘Avav., see their Intr. § 408], -a [but on 
the gen. cf. B. 20 (18)], ὁ, Ananias (733m, fr. 137) to be 
gracious, and 7: Jehovah, [ef. Mey. on Acts v. 1]): 
1. a certain Christian [at Jerusalem], the husband of 
Sapphira: Acts ν. 1-6. 2. a Christian of Damascus: 
Acts ix. 10-18; xxii. 12 sqq. 3. a son of Nedebaeus, 
and high priest of the Jews c. A. Ὁ. 47-59. In the year 
66 he was slain by the Sicarii: Acts xxiii. 2 sq.; xxiv. 
1 sq.; Joseph. antt. 20, 5, 2; 6,2; 9, 2-4; b.j. 2,17, 6; 
9: [CE Ba Dave = 

ἀν-αντίτρρητος [WH ἀναντίρητος ; see P, p],-ov, (a priv., 
ἀντί, and ῥητός fr. PEQ to say), not contradicted and not 
to be contradicted ; undeniable, [not to be gainsaid]; in the 
latter sense, Acts xix. 36. (Occasionaily in Grk. writ. 
fr. Polyb. down.)* 

ἀναντιρρήτως [WH ἀναντιρήτως, see their App. p. 163, 
and P, p], adv., without contradiction: Acts x. 29 (I came 
without gainsaying). Polyb. 23, 8, 11, [al.].* 

ἀν-άξιος, -ov, (a priv. and ἄξιος), [fr. Soph. down], un- 
worthy (rwds): unfit for a thing, 1 Co. vi. 2.* 

ἀν-αξίως, adv., [fr. Soph. down], in an unworthy man- 
ner: 1 Co. xi. 27, and 29 Rec. [Cf. W. 463 (431).]* 

ἀνά-παυσις, -ews, 7, (ἀναπαύω), [fr. Mimnerm., Pind. 
down]; 1. intermission, cessation, of any motion, busi- 
ness, labor: ἀνάπαυσιν οὐκ ἔχουσι λέγοντες [Rec. λέγοντα] 
equiv. to οὐκ ἀναπαύονται λέγοντες they incessantly say, 
Rev. iv. 8. 2. rest, recreation: Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi. 
24; Rey. xiv. 11, (and often in Grk. writ.); blessed 
tranquillity of soul, Mt. xi. 29, (Sir. vi. [27] 28; li. 27; 
Sap. iv. 7). [The word denotes a temporary rest, a 
respite, 6. g. of soldiers; cf. Schmidt ch. 25; Bp. Lghtft. 
on Philem. 7; Trench § xli.] * 

ἀνα-παύω: fut. ἀναπαύσω; 1 aor. ἀνέπαυσα; pf. pass. 
ἀναπέπαυμαι ; Mid., [pres. dvaravopat]; fut. ἀναπαύσομαι 
(Rev. vi. 11 [Lehm. ed. min., Tdf. edd. 2, 7, WH; but 
GL T Tr with R -σωνται]), and in the colloquial speech 
of inferior Grk. ἀναπαήσομαι (Rev. xiv. 13 LT Tr WH, 
cf. Bttm. (57) esp. Eng. trans. p. 64 sq.; Kiihner i. 886 ; 
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 128; WH. App. p. 170]; see also in 
ἐπαναπαύωγ; 1 aor. ἀνεπαυσάμην ; (a common verb fr. 
Hom. down): to cause or permit one to cease from any 
movement ox labor in order te recover and collect his 
strength (note the prefix ἀνά and distinguish fr. κατα- 
παύω, [see ἀνάπαυσις, fin.]), to give rest, refresh; mid. to 
give one’s self rest, take rest. So in mid. absol. of rest after 
travelling, Mk. vi. 81; and for taking sleep, Mt. xxvi. 
45; Mk. xiy. 41; of the sweet repose one enjoys after 


ἀναπείθω 


toil, Lk. xii. 19; to keep quiet, of calm and patient expec- 
tation, Rev. vi. 11; of the blessed rest of the dead, 
Rev. xiv. 13 (ἐκ τῶν κόπων exempt from toils [ef. B. 158 
(138)]; Plat. Critias in. ἐκ μακρᾶς ὁδοῦ). By a Hebraism 
(oy 113, Isa. xi. 2) τὸ πνεῦμα ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἀναπαύεται rests 
upon you, to actuate you, 1 Pet. iv.14. Act. to refresh, 
the soul of any one: τινά, Mt. xi. 28; τὸ πνεῦμά τινος, 
1 Co. xvi. 18; τὰ σπλάγχνα τινός, Philem. 20. In pass., 
Philem. 7; 2 Co. vii. 13 (ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν from your 
sight, attentions, intercourse). [COMP.: én-, aur (-pat).]* 

dva-rre(Ow ; fo stir up by persuasion (cf. Germ. aufreizen), 
to solicit, incite: τινά τι ποιῆσαι, Acts xviii. 13. So also 
in Hdt., Thue., Plat., Xen., al.* 

ἀνάπειρος, a false spelling (arising from itacism, [cf. 
Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 9, 22: διὰ τοῦ ἡ τὴν 
τρίτην, ov διὰ τῆς et διφθύόγγου ὡς of ἀμαθεῖς} in some 
Mss. in Lk. xiv. 13, 21 (and adopted by L Tr WH; [see 
WH. App. p. 1517) for ἀνάπηρος, q. v. 


ἀνα-πέμπω : 1 aor. ἀνέπεμψα:; [fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. | 


down]; 1. to send up; i.e. a. toa higher place; 
b. to a person higher in office, authority, power, (Plut. 
Marius c. 17; [Philo de creat. princip. § 8; Joseph. b. j. 
2, 20, 5]): τινὰ πρός τινα, Lk. xxiii. 7, 15; Acts xxv. 21 
LTTrWH. 42. to send back: twa, Philem. 12 (11); 
τινά τινι, Lk. xxiii. 11.* 

ἀνα-πηδάω: [1 aor. ptep. ἀναπηδήσας] ;; (Hom. Il. 11, 
379; often in Plat., Xen., Dem.); to leap up, spring up, 
start up: ἀναπηδήσας, Mk. x.50 L T Tr WH; ef. Fritzsche 
ad loc. ( 5. xx. 34; Prov. xviii. 4 [Ald. etce.]; Tob. 
li. 4; vi. 3; vii. 6.)* 

ἀνά-πηρος, -ov, (prop. πηρός fr. the lowest part to the 
highest —ava; hence Suid. 6 καθ᾽ ὑπερβολὴν πεπηρωμένος, 
[ef. Lob. Path. Elementa i. 195]), disabled in the limbs, 
maimed, crippled; injured in, or bereft of, some member 
of the body: LK. xiv. 13, 21 ἀναπήρους. χωλούς, τυφλούς. 
In both these pass. L Tr WH have adopted with certain 
Mss. the spelling dvareipovs — manifestly false, as aris- 
ing from itacism. (Plat. Crito p.53 a. χωλοὶ καὶ τυφλοὶ 
καὶ ἄλλοι ἀνάπηροι; Aristot. h. a. 7, 6 [vol. i. p. 585%, 
29° γίνονται ἐξ ἀναπήρων ἀνάπηροι ; Lys. ap. Suid. ῥῖνα καὶ 
ὦτα ἀνάπηρος ; 2 Mace. viii. 24 τοῖς μέλεσιν ἀναπήρους." 

ἀνα-πίπτω: 2 aor. ἀνέπεσον, 3 pers. plur. ἀνέπεσον Mk. 
vi. 40 (Τ Tr WH ἀνέπεσαν) : Jn. vi. 10 (LT Tr WH 
averecav), inf. ἀναπεσεῖν, impv. ἀνάπεσε Lk. xiv. 10 (Ree. 
ἀνάπεσον fr. 1 aor. ἀνέπεσα, [(Grsb. ἀνάπεσαι i. e. 1 aor. 
mid. impv.)]); Lk. xvii. 7 [RG ἀνάπεσαι, cf. WH. App. 
Ρ. 164; Ταῦ, Proleg. p. 123; see πίπτω]. ptep. ἀναπεσών ; 
cf. W. § 13, 1 p. 73 (71); [B. 39 (34) sq., 67 (59); fr. 
Eur. down]; to lie back, lie down: absol., Mk. vi. 40; 
Jn. vi. 10, (se. on the ground) ; ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Mt. xv. 35; ἐπὶ 
τῆς γῆς. Mk. viii. 6. In later Grk. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 216; [W. 23 (22)]) for ἀνακλίνομαι to recline at table: 
Lk. xi. 37; xiv. 10; xvii. 7; xxii. 14; Jn. xiii. 12; xxi. 
20 [al. refer this to the following signif.]. to lean back, 
Jn. xiii. 25 L Tr WH. [It denotes an act rather than a 
state, and in the last pass. differs from ἀνάκειμαι, vs. 23, 
by indicating a change of position. ]* 

ἀνα-πληρόω, -@; fut. ἀναπληρώσω; 1 aor. ἀνεπλήρωσα; 


41 


- 
ἀνάστασις 


[pres. pass. ἀναπληροῦμαι] ; (ἀνά to, up to, 6. g. to filla 
vessel up to the brim; up to the appointed measure or 
standard, Germ. anfiillen); [fr. Eurip. down]; ab 
to fill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, 6 p. 223) ; 
hence trop. ἁμαρτίας, 1 Th. ii. 16 (to add what is still 
wanting to complete the number of their sins; on the 
meaning, cf. Gen. xv. 16; Dan. viii. 23; ix. 24; Mt. xxiii. 
32; 2 Mace. vi. 14). ἀναπληροῦται ἡ προφητεία the 
prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completely corre- 
sponds to it, Mt. xiii. 14. τὸν νόμον to fulfil i. 6. observe 
the law perfectly, Gal. vi. 2, (Barn. ep. 21 ἀναπλ. πᾶσαν 
ἐντολήν) ; τὸν τόπον τινός to fill the place of any one, 
1 Co. xiv. 16 (after the rabbin. pipn ΠᾺΡ to hold the 
position of any one, [yet ef. Mey. ad loc.]). 2. to 
supply : τὸ ὑστέρημα, Phil. ii. 30, (Col. i. 24) ; 1 Co. xvi. 17 
(they by their presence supplied your place in your ab- 
sence) ; cf. Plat. symp. p. 188 6. ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τι ἐξέλιπον, σὸν 
ἔργον (sc. ἐστίν) ἀναπληρῶσαι. Cf. Win. De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 11 sq.; [Ellic. on Phil. 1. c., or Mey. 
on Gal. ]. 6. Comp.: ἀντ-, προσ-αναπληρόω }.* 

ἀναπολόγητος, -ov, without defence or excuse, Ro. i. 20; 
also that cannot be defended, inexcusable, Ro. ii. 1. 
(Polyb., Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 46; Plut. Brut. 46, al.) * 

ἀνα-πτύσσω: 1 aor. ἀνέπτυξα; (ava—cf. the Germ. auf 
i. q. auseinander, see avakiw —and πτύσσω to fold up, 
roll together); to unroll, [i. e. open for reading]: τὸ 
βιβλίον (as in Hat. 1, 48 and 125), Lk. iv. 17 [RG ΤΊ, 
(2 K. xix. 14). The books of the Hebrews were rolls 
(nv) fastened to [one or] two smooth rods and fur- 
nished with handles, so that they could be rolled up and 
unrolled; [ef. B. D.s. v. Writing ].* 

ἀν-άπτω; 1 aor. ἀνῆψα; 1 aor. pass. ἀνήφθην; to light 
up, kindle: Lk. xii. 49; Acts xxviii. 2[R 67; Jas. iii. 5. 
[From Hat. down.] * 

ἀν-αρίθμητος, -ov, (a priv. and ἀριθμέω), innumerable: 
Heb. xi. 12. [From Pind. down.]* 

dva-celw; 1 aor. ἀνέσεισα; to shake up; trop. to stir 
up, excite, rouse: τὸν ὄχλον, Mk. xv. 11; τὸν λαόν, Lk. 
xxiii. 5. (So in Diod. 13, 91; 14, 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 
8, 81.)* 

dva-ckevatw; (σκευάζω, fr. σκεῦος a vessel, utensil) ; 
1. to pack up baggage (Lat. vasa colligere) in order to 
carry tt away to another place: Xen. an. 5, 10, (6, 2) 8. 
Mid. to move one’s furniture (when setting out for some 
other place, Xen. Cyr. 8, 5,4 ὅταν δὲ ἀνασκευάζωνται, 
συντίθησι μὲν ἕκαστος τὰ σκεύη) ; hence 2. of an 
enemy dismantling, plundering, a place (Thuc. 4, 116); 
to overthrow, ravage, destroy, towns, lands, etc.; trop. 
ψυχάς, to turn away violently from a right state, to un- 
settle, subvert: Acts xv. 24.* 

ἀνα-σπάω, -@: ἀνασπάσω; 1 aor. pass. ἀνεσπάσθην; to 
draw up: Lk. xiv.5; Acts xi. 10. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἀνάστασις, -ews, 7, (ἀνίστημι), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; 
1. a raising up, rising, (e. g. fr. a seat): Lk. ii. 34 (opp. 
to πτῶσις; the meaning is ‘It lies [or ‘is set’ A. V.] 
like a stone, which some will lay hold of in order to 
climb; but others will strike against it and fall’). 2. 
arising from the dead (eccl. Lat. resurrectio), [Aeschyl 


ἀναστατόω 


Eum. 648]; a. thatof Christ: Actsi. 22; ii.31; iv. 
33; Ro. vi.5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 21; with the addi- 
tion of νεκρῶν, Ro. i. 4 (a generic phrase : the resurrection- 
of-the-dead, although it has come to pass as yet only in 
the case of Christ alone; cf. Acts xvii. 32; W. § 30, 2a. 
fin.); ἐκ νεκρῶν, 1 Pet.i.3. Ὁ. that of all men at the 
end of the present age. This is called simply ἀνάστασις 
or ἡ ἀνάστασις, Mt. xxii. 23, [28], 30; Mk. xii. 18, 23; 
Lk. xx. 27, 33, 36; Jn. xi. 24; Acts xvii. 18; xxiii. 8; 2 
Tim. ii. 18; by meton. i. q. the author of resurrection, Jn. 
xi. 25; with the addition of ἡ ἐκ νεκρῶν, Lk. xx. 35; Acts 
iv. 2; or simply of τῶν νεκρῶν [on the distinction which 
some (e. g, Van Hengel on Ro. i. 4; Van Hengel and Bp. 
Lehtft. on Phil. iii. 11; Cremer s. v.) would make between 
these phrases, see W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78)], Mt. xxii. 
31; Acts xvii. 32; xxiii. 6; xxiv. 15 [Rec.], 21; xxvi. 
23; 1 Co. xv. 12 sq. 21,42; Heb. vi. 2. ἀνάστ. ζωῆς res- 
urrection to life (av. εἰς Conv, 2 Mace. vii. 14 [ef. Dan. xii. 
2]), and ἀν. τῆς κρίσεως resurrection to judgment, Jn. v. 
29, (on the genitives cf. W. 188 (177)); the former is ἡ 
ἀνάστ. τῶν δικαίων, Lk. xiv. 14; κρείττων ἀνάστασις, Heb. 
xi. 35 (so called in comparison with a continuance of life 
on earth, which is spoken of as an ἀνάστασις by a kind of 
license; [ef. W. 460 (429)]). ἡ dvaor. ἡ πρώτη in Rev. 
xx. 5 sq. will be that of true Christians, and at the end 
of a thousand years will be followed by a second resur- 
rection, that of all the rest of mankind, Rev. xx. 12 sqq. 
On the question whether and in what sense Paul also 
believed in two resurrections, separated from each other 
by a definite space of time, ef. Grimm in the Zeitschr. 
fiir wissenschaftl. Theol., 1873, p. 388 sq. c. the res- 
urrection of certain in ancient Jewish story who were 
restored to life before burial: Heb. xi. 35.* 

ἀναστατόω, -@; 1 aor. ἀνεστάτωσα; a verb found no- 
where in prof. auth., but [in Dan. vii. 23 Sept.; Deut. 
xxix. 27 Graec. Venet.] several times in the O. T. frag- 
ments of Aquila [e. g. Ps. x. 1] and Symmachus [e. g. 
Ps. lviii. 11; Is. xxii. 3], and in Eustathius, (fr. ἀνάστατος, 
driven from one’s abode, outcast, or roused up from 
one’s situation; accordingly equiv. to ἀνάστατον ποιῶ), 
to stir up, excite, unsetile; foll. by an ace. a. to excite 
tumults and seditions in the State: Acts xvii. 6; xxi. 
38. ὍῬ. to upset, unsettle, minds by disseminating 
religious error: Gal. v. 12.* 

ἀνα-σταυρόω, -&; to raise up upon across, crucify, (ava 
as in ἀνασκολοπίζω) : Heb. vi. 6, (very often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hdt. down). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. 
iii. p. 9 sq.; [Winer admits that in Heb. 1. c. the meaning 
to crucify again, or afresh, may also be assigned to this 
verb legitimately, and that the absence of a precedent 
in prof. writ. for such a sense is, from the nature of the 
case, not surprising ].* 

dva-crevatw: 1 aor. avecrevata; to draw sighs up from 
the bottom of the breast, to sigh deeply: Mk. viii. 12. 
(Lam. i. 4; Sir. xxv. 18 (17); 2 Mace. vi. 30, and in 
Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. choéph. 335,] Hdt. 1, 86 down.) * 

ἀνα-στρέφω: fut. ἀναστρέψω; [1 aor. ἀνέστρεψα; Pass., 
pres. ἀναστρέφομαι]; 2 aor. ἀνεστράφην; 1. to turn 


42 


ἀνατίθημι 


upside down, overturn: τὰς τραπέζας, Jn. ii. 15, (δίφρους, 
Hom. Il. 23, 436). 2. to turn back; intrans. [W. 
251 (236)] to return, like the Lat. reverto i. q. revertor, 
(as in Grk. writ.; in Sept. i. q. 33%): Acts v. 22; xv. 
16 (here ἀναστρέψω καί has not like the Hebr. 23¥ the 
force of an adverb, again, but God in the Messiah’s 
advent returns to his people, whom he is conceived of 
as having previously abandoned; ef. W. 469 (437)). 
3. to turn hither and thither; pass. reflexively, to turn 
one’s self about, sojourn, dwell, év in a place ; a. liter- 
ally: Mt. xvii. 22, where L TWH Tr txt. συστρεφομένων, 
cf. Keim ii. p. 581 [Eng. trans. iv. p. 303]. (Josh. v. ὃ: 
Ezek. xix. 6, and in Grk. writ.) b. like the Hebr. 
ya to walk, of the manner of life and moral character, 
to conduct one’s self, behave one’s self, live: 2 Co. i. 12 
(ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ) ; 1 Tim. iii. 15 (ἐν οἴκῳ θεοῦ) ; Eph. ii. 3 
(ἐν οἷς among whom); 2 Pet. ii. 18 (ἐν πλάνῃ). simply 
to conduct or behave one’s self, ‘walk’, (Germ. wandeln) : 
1 Pet.i.17; Heb. x. 33; (καλῶς) xiii. 18. [Cf. its use 
e.g. in Xen. an. 2, 5, 14; Polyb.1, 9,7; 74,13; 86,5 
ete., (see ἀναστροφή, fin.); Prov. xx. 7 Sept.; Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 21, 8; ete.]* 

ἀνα-στροφή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. the pass. ἀναστρέφομαι, see the 
preceding word), prop. ‘walk,’ i. e. manner of life, be- 
havior, conduct, (Germ. Lebenswandel): Gal.i.13; Eph. 
iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 12; Jas. iii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 15,183 ii. 12; 
iii. 1 sq. 16; 2 Pet. ii. 7; plur. ἅγιαι ἀναστροφαί the ways 
in which holy living shows itself, 2 Pet. iii. 11. Hence 
life in so far as it is comprised in conduct, Heb. xiii. 7. 
(This word, in the senses given, is found in Grk. writ. 
fr. Polyb. 4, 82,1 down; in the Scriptures first in Tob. 
iv. 14; 2 Mace. v. 8; add Epict. diss. 1, 9,5; 4, 7, 5, 
[and (fr. Soph. Lex. s.v.) Agatharchides 134, 12; 153, 
8; Aristeas 16].)* 

dva-réccopar; [1 aor. mid. inf. dvarafacOac}; (mid. 
of ἀνατάσσω),, to put together in order, arrange, compose : 
διήγησιν, Lk. i. 1 (so to construct [R. V. draw up] a nar- 
rative that the sequence of events may be evident. 
Found besides only in Plut. de sollert. anim. c. 12, where 
it denotes to go regularly through a thing again, re- 
hearse it; [in Ecel. ii. 20 Ald., and in eccl. writ. e. g. 
Tren. 3, 21, 2 sub fin.]).* 

ἀνα-τέλλω; 1 aor. ἀνέτειλα; pf. ἀνατέταλκα:; a. trans. 
to cause to rise: τὸν ἥλιον, Mt. v. 45, (of the earth bring- 
ing forth plants, Gen. iii, 18; of a river producing 
something, Hom. Il. 5, 777). b. intrans. to rise, arise: 
light, Mt. iv. 16, (Is. lviii. 10); the sun, Mt. xiii. 6; Mk. 
iv.6; xvi. 2; Jas. i. 11; the clouds, Lk. xii. 54; φωσφό- 
pos, 2 Pet.i.19. trop. to rise from, be descended from, 
Heb. vii. 14. The earlier Greeks commonly used ava- 
τέλλειν of the sun and moon, and ἐπιτέλλειν of the stars; 
but Aelian., Paus., Stob. and other later writ. neglect 
this distinction; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 124 sq. (Comp. : 
ἐξιαινατέλλω.] ἢ 

ἀνα-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. ἀνεθέμην ; [in various senses fr. 
Hom. down]; in the mid. voice to set forth a thing 
drawn forth, as it were, from some corner (avd), to set 
forth [in words], declare, [R. V. lay before]: τινί τι, Acts 


ἀνατολή 


xxv. 14; Gal. ii. 2, (2 Mace. iii. 9; [Μῖο. vii. 57; Artem. 
oneir. 2, 64 τινὶ τὸ ὄναρ; Diog. Laért. 2, 17, 16 p. 191 
ed. Heubn.; Plut. amat. narr. p. 772d.) Cf. Fritzschio- 
rum Opusce. p. 169; [Holsten, Zum Evang. des Paulus 
u. 4. Petrus p. 256 sq. Comp.: προσ-ανατίθημι.] * 

ἀνατολή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. ἀνατέλλω, 4. V-), as in Grk. writ. ; 
1. a rising (of the sun and stars); light rising ἐξ ὕψους, 
LK. i. 78. 2. the east (the quarter of the sun’s ris- 
ing): Mt. ii. 2,9; Rev. xxi. 13 (Grsb. ἀνατολῶν) ; Hdian. 
2, 8, 18 (10); 3, 5,1; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 14, 3,[6; 1, 26, 
6; Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 5,6; Ignat. ad Ro. 2, 2; Melito ap. Euseb. 
h. e. 4, 26, 14; with ἡλίου added, Rev. vii. 2[RGT Tr 
WHtst.]; Plur. eastern regions, the east, [W. 176 (166) ]: 
Mt. ii. 1; viii. 11; xxiv. 27; LK. xiii. 29, (Sept., Hdt., 
Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.; Philo in Flace. § 7); with the 
addition of ἡλίου, Rev. xvi. 12 [-Ajs T Tr txt. WH txt.; 
vii. 2L WH org. }.* 

ἀνα-τρέπω ; [1 aor. ἀνέτρεψα]; to overthrow, overturn, de 
stroy: [τὰς τραπέζας, Jn. ii. 15 WH txt.] ; ethically, to sub 
vert: οἴκους families, Tit.i.11. τὴν τινων πίστιν, 2 Tim. 
ii. 18. (Common in Grk. writ., and in the same sense. )* 

dva-tpépw : 2 aor. pass. ἀνετράφην ; pf. pass. ptep. ἀνα- 
τεθραμμένος ; 1 aor. mid. ἀνεθρεψάμην; to nurse up, nour- 
ish up, (Germ. aufndhren, auffiittern); prop. of young 
children and animals nourished to promote their growth 
(Xen. mem. 4, 3, 10, ete.; Sap. vii. 4); to bring up: Lk. 
iv.16 T WHmrg.; Acts vii. 20 sq.; with the predomi- 
nant idea of forming the mind, Acts xxii. 3, (4 Mace. 
x. 2, and often in Grk. writ.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. 
ete. Pt. iii. p. 4.* 

dva-paivw: 1 aor. ἀνέφανα, Doric for the more com. 
ἀνέφηνα, (Acts xxi. 3 RT WH [with Erasm., Steph., 
Mill]; cf. Passow p. 2199; [ Veitch, and L. and S.,s. v. 
daira; W.89 (85); B. 41 (35)]; see ἐπιφαίνω) ; Pass., 
[pres. avapaivopar]; 2 aor. ἀνεφάνην ; [fr. Hom. down]; 
to bring to light, hold up to view, show; Pass. to appear, 
be made apparent: Lk. xix.11. An unusual phrase is 
ἀναφανέντες τὴν Κύπρον having sighted Cyprus, for avapa- 
veians ἡμῖν τῆς Κύπρου, Acts xxi. 3; cf. B. 190 (164); W. 
§ 39, 1a. p. 260 (244); here R* T WH [see above] read 
ἀναφάναντες τὴν K. after we had rendered Cyprus visible 
(to us); [R. V. had come in sight of Cyprus.}.* 

ἀνα-φέρω ; fut. ἀνοίσω (Ley. xiv. 20; Num. xiv. 33, 
etc.) ; 1 aor. dvnveyxa; 2 aor. ἀνήνεγκον ; [see reff. s. v. 
φέρω; impf. pass. ἀνεφερόμην; fr. Hom. down]; 1. to 
carry or bring up, to lead up; men to a higher place: 
Mt. xvii. 1; Mk. ix. 2; pass., Lk. xxiv. 51 [Tdf.om. WH 
reject the cl.]. ἀναφέρειν ras ἁμαρτίας ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον, 1 Pet. 
ii. 24 (to bear sins up on the cross, se. in order to expi- 
ate them by suffering death, [ef. W.428sq.(399)]). 2. 
to pul upon the altar, to bring to the altar, to offer, (Sept. 
for myn of presentation as a priestly act, ef. Kurtz 
on Hebr. p. 154 sq.), θυσίας, θυσίαν. etc., (Isa. lvii. 6, 
ete.): Heb. vii. 27; xiii. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 5; with ἐπὶ τὸ 
θυσιαστήριον added, Jas. ii. 21, (Gen. viii. 20; Lev. xiv. 
20; [Bar.i.10; 1 Mace. iv. 557); [éavrov, Heb. vii. 27, 
TTrmrg. WH mrg. προσενέγκας]. Cf. Kurtzu.s. 3. 


43 


᾿Ανδρόνικος 


to lift up on one’s self, to take upon one’s self, i. e. to place 
on one’s self anything as a load to be upborne, to sus- 
tain: τὰς ἁμαρτίας i. 6. by meton. their punishment, Heb. 
ix. 28 (Is. lili. 12; τὴν πορνείαν, Num. xiv. 33); cf. Win. 
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 5 sq.* 

ἀνα-φωνέω, -ὥ: 1 aor. ἀνεφώνησα; to cry out with a loud 
voice, call aloud, exclaim: Lk.i.42. (1 Chr. xv. 28; xvi. 
4; [Aristot. de mund. 6, vol. i. p. 400", 18]; Polyb., 
often in Plut.)* 

ἀνά χυσις, -ews, 7, (ἀναχέω [to pour forth]), rare in Grk. 
writ. [Strabo, Philo, Plut.; ἀν. ψυχῆς, in a good sense, 
Philo de decal. § 10 mid.]; an overflowing, a pouring 
out: metaph., 1 Pet. iv. 4 ἀσωτίας ἀνάχυσις the excess 
(flood) of riot in which a dissolute life pours itself 
forth.* 

ἀνα-χωρέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἀνεχώρησα; (freq. in Grk. writ.) ; 
1. to go back, return: Mt. ii. 12 sq. [al. refer this to next 
head]. 2. towithdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room: 
Mt. ix. 24. b. of those who through fear seek some 
other place, or shun sight: Mt. ii. 14, 22; iv.12; xii. 15; 
xiv. 13; xv. 21; xxvii. 5; Mk. iii. 7; Jn. vi. 15 [Tdf. 
φεύγει}; Acts xxiii. 19 (κατ᾽ ἰδίαν) ; xxvi. 31.* 

ἀνά ψυξις, -ews, ἡ. (ἀναψύχω, 4. V-), α cooling, refresh- 
ing: Acts iii. 20 (19), of the Messianic blessedness to be 
ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven; Vulg. 
refrigerium. (Ex. viii. 15; Philo de Abr. § 29; Strabo 
10, p. 459; and in 6060]. writ.)* 

ava-pixw: 1 aor. ἀνέψυξα; to cool again, to cool off, 
recover from the effects of heat, (Hom. Od. 4, 568; Il. 5, 
795; Plut. Aem. P. 25, ete.); trop. to refresh: τινά, one’s 
spirit, by fellowship, consolation, kindnesses, 2 Tim. i. 
16. (intrans. to recover breath, take the air, cool off, re- 
vive, refresh one’s self, in Sept. [Ps. xxxviil. (xxxix.) 14; 
2S. xvi. 14; Ex. xxiii. 12; 1S. xvi. 23; ete., in] 2 Mace. 
iv. 46; xiii. 11; and in the later Grk. writ.)* 

ἀνδραποδιστής, -ov, 6, (fr. ἀνδραποδίζω, and this fr. τὸ 
avdparodov —fr. ἀνήρ and ποῦς ---ἃ slave, a man taken in 
war and sold into slavery), a slave-dealer, kidnapper, 
man-stealer, i. e. as well one who unjustly reduces free 
men to slavery, as one who steals the slaves of others 
and sells them: 1 Tim. i. 10. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., 
Dem., Isocer., Lys., Polyb.)* 

᾿Ανδρέας, -ov, 6, Andrew, (a Grk. name [meaning 
manly; for its occurrence, see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ; 
B. D. 5. v. Andrew, init.]), a native of Bethsaida in 
Galilee, brother of Simon Peter, a disciple of John the 
Baptist, afterwards an apostle of Christ: Jn. i. 40, 44 
(41, 45); vi.8; xii. 22; Mt.iv.18; x.2; Mk.i. 16, 29; 
iii. 18; xiii. 3; Lk. vi.14; Actsi. 13.* 

ἀνδρίζω: (ἀνήρ) ; to make a man of or make brave, 
(Xen. oec. 5, 4). Mid. pres. ἀνδρίζομαι; to show one’s 
self a man, be brave: 1 Co. xvi. 13 [A. V. quit you like 
men]. (Often in Sept.; Sir. xxxiv. 25; 1 Mace. ii. 64; 
Xen., Plat., App., Plut., al.)* 

᾿Ανδρόνικος, -ov, 6, Androni’cus, (a Grk. name, [lit. man 
of victory; for its occurrence see Pape, Eigennamen, 
s. v.]), a Jewish Christian and a kinsman of Paul: Ro 
xvi. 7." 


ἀνδροφόνος 


ἀνδρο-φόνος, -ου, ὅ, a manslayer: 1 Tim.i.9. (2 Mace. 
ix. 28; Hom., Plat., Dem., al.) [Cf. φονεύς. " 

ἀν-έγκλητος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐγκαλέω, q. V.), that can- 
not be called to account, unreprovable, unaccused, blame- 
less: 1Co.i. 8; Col. i. 22; 1 Tim. iii. 10; Tit. i. 6 sq. (8 
Mace. v. 31; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) (Cf. 
Trench ὃ ciii.]* 

ἀν-εκδιήγητος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐκδιηγέομαι, 4. V-), un- 
speakable, indescribable: 2 Co. ix. 15 δωρεά, to describe 
and commemorate which words fail. (Only in eccl. writ. 
[Clem. Rom.1Cor. 20, 5; 49,4; Athenag., Theoph., al. ].)* 

ἀν-εκ-λάλητος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐκλαλέω), unspeakable : 
1 Pet. i. 8 (to which words are inadequate). ([Diose. 
medicam. p. 93 ed. Kiihn]; Heliod. 6, 15 p. 252 (296); 
and in eccl. writ.)* 

ἀνέκλειπτος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐκλείπω to fail), unfailing: 
Lk. xii. 33. ([Hyperid. p. 58* ed. Teubner] ; Diod. 4, 
84; 1, 36, cf. 3,16; Plut. de orac. defect. p. 438 d., and 
in eccl. writ.)* 

ἀν-εκτός, -ov, and in later Grk. also -ds, -y, -ov [ef. W. 
68 (67); B. 25 (22)], (ἀνέχομαι to bear, endure); fr. 
Hom. down; bearable, tolerable: ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται the 
lot will be more tolerable, Mt. x. 15; xi. 22, 24; Mk. 
vi. 11 RLbr.;- Lk. x. 12, 14. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.)* 

ἀν-ελεήμων, -ov, 56. -ovos, (a priv. and ἐλεήμων), without 
mercy, merciless: Ro. i. 31. ({Aristot. rhet. Alex. 37 
p- 1442", 13]; Prov. v. 9, ete.; Sir. xiii. 12, ete.; Sap. xii. 
bess. ΤΣ 

ἀν-έλεος, -ov, without mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 18 LT 
Tr WH, unusual form for avitews RG. The Greeks 
said ἀνηλεής and ἀνελεής, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 710 sq. ; 
W. 100 (95). 

ἀνεμίζω: (ἄνεμος) ; to agitate or drive by the wind; pres. 
pass. ptep. ἀνεμιζόμενος, Jas.i.6. Besides only in schol. 
on Hom. Od. 12, 336 ἔνθα ἦν σκέπη πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀνεμίζεσθαι, 
[Hesych. 5. v. ἀναψύξαι: ἀνεμίσαι; Joannes Moschus 
(in Patr. Graec. Ixxxvii. p. 3044 a.) ἀνεμίζοντος τοῦ πλοίου 
velificante nave]. The Greeks said ἀνεμόω. Cf. κλυδω- 
νίζομαι." 

ἄνεμος, -ov, 6, (ἄω, ἄημι to breathe, blow, [but etymolo- 
gists connect ἄω with Skr. vd, Grk. ἀήρ, Lat. ventus, 
Eng. wind, and ἄνεμος with Skr. an to breathe, etc. ; cf. 
Curtius §§ 419, 587; Vanitek p. 28]), [fr. Hom. down], 
wind, a violent agitation and stream of air, [ef. (Trench 
§ Ixxiii.) πνεῦμα, 1 fin.]: Mt. xi. 7; xiv. 24; Jas. iii. 4, 
etc.; of a very strong and tempestuous wind: Mt. vii. 
25; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. viii. 24, ete. οἱ τέσσαρες ἄνεμοι, the 
four principal or cardinal winds (Jer. xxv. 15 (xlix. 36)), 
τῆς γῆς, Rev. vii. 1; hence the four quarters of the 
heavens (whence the cardinal winds blow): Mt. xxiv. 
31; Mk. xiii. 27; (Ezek. xxxvii. 9; 1 Chr. ix. 24). 
Metaph. ἄνεμος τῆς διδασκαλίας, variability and empti- 
ness [?] of teaching, Eph. iv. 14. 

ἀν-ένδεκτος, -ov, (a priv. and évdexros, and this fr. évde- 
χομαι, q. v.), that cannot be admitted, inadmissible, unal- 
lowable, improper: ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστι τοῦ μὴ ἐλθεῖν it cannot 
be but that they will come, Lk. xvii. 1 [W. 328 (308) ; 


44 


> , 
αἀνέχω 


B. 269 (231)]. (Artem. oneir. 2, 70 ὁ ἀριθμὸς πρὸς τὸν 
μέλλοντα χρόνον avevdexros, [Diog. Laért. 7, 80], and sev- 
eral times in eccl. and Byzant. writ.) * 

ἀνεξερεύνητος, T Tr WH -ραύνητος [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 
81; B. 58 (50); Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 117; 
see épavvaw], -ov, (a priv. and ἐξ-ερευνάω), that cannot be 
searched out: Ro. xi. 33. (Symm. Proy. xxv. 3; Jer. 
xvii. 9. Dio Cass. 69, 14.)* 

ἀνεξί-κακος, -ov, (fr. the fut. of ἀνέχομαι, and κακόν; ef. 
classic ἀλεξίκακος, duvnoixaxos), patient of ills and wrongs, 
forbearing: 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Leian. jud. voe. 9; [Justin 
M. apol. 1, 16 init.; Pollux 5, 138].)* 

ἀνεξιχνίαστος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐξιχνιάζω to trace out), 
that cannot be traced out, that cannot be comprehended, 
ΓΑ. V. unsearchable]: Ro. xi. 33; Eph. iii. 8. (Job v. 
9; ix. 10; [xxxiv. 24]; Or. Manass. 6 [see Sept. ed. 
Tdf., Proleg. § xxix.]; several times in eccl. writ.)* 

ἀν-επ-αίσχυντος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐπαισχύνω), (Vulg. 
inconfusibilis), having no cause to be ashamed: 2 Tim. ii. 
15. ({Joseph. antt. 18, 7,1]; unused in Grk. writ. [W. 
236 (221)].)* 

ἀν-επίτληπτος [LT Tr WH -λημπτος ; see M, μ7, -ον, (a 
priv. and ἐπιλαμβάνω), prop. not apprehended, that cannot 
be laid hold of; hence that cannot be reprehended, not open 
to censure, irreproachable, ['Tittmann i. p. 31; Trench 
§ ciii.]: 1 Tim. iii. 2; ν. 7; vi.14. (Freq. in Grk. writ. 
fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)* 

ἀν-έρχομαι : 2 aor. ἀνῆλθον; [fr. Hom. down]; to go 
up: Jn. vi. 3; to a higher place; to Jerusalem, Gal. i. 17 
(L Tr mrg. ἀπῆλθον], 18; (1 K. xiii. 12). [Comp.: 
ἐπ-ανέρχομαι.} * 

ἄν-εσις, -ews, 7, (ἀνίημι to let loose, slacken, anything 
tense, 6. g. a bow), a loosening, relaxing; spoken of a 
more tolerable condition in captivity: ἔχειν ἄνεσιν to be 
held in less rigorous confinement [R. V. have indulgence], 
Acts xxiv. 23, (Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 10 φυλακὴ μὲν yap καὶ 
τήρησις ἦν, μετὰ μέντοι ἀνέσεως τῆς εἰς δίαιταν). relief, 
rest, from persecutions, 2 Th. i. 7; from the troubles of 
poverty, 2 Co. viii. 13; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Co. 
ii. 13 (12); vii.5. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. [Hat. 
5, 28] down.) [Sy¥n. see ἀνάπαυσις, fin.]* 

ἀν-ετάζω ; pres. pass. ἀνετάζομαι; (ἐτάζω to examine, 
test); to investigate, examine; τινά, to examine judicially : 
Acts xxii. 24, 29. (Jude. vi. 29 cod. Alex.; Sus. [i. 6. 
Dan. (Theod.) init.] 14; [Anaph. Pilati A 6 p. 417 ed. 
Taf.]. Not found in prof. auth.)* 

ἄνευ, prep. with gen., without: 1 Pet. iii. 1; iv. 9. 
with gen. of the pers. without one’s will or intervention, 
(often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down): Mt. x. 29. 
[Compared with χωρίς, see Tittm. i. p. 93 sq.; Ellic. on 
Eph. ii. 12; Green, Crit. Notes, ete. (on Ro. iii. 28).]* 

ἀν-εύ-θετος, -ov, not convenient, not commodious, not fil: 
Acts xxvii.12. (Unused by Grk. writ.; [Moschion 53].)* 

ἀν-ευρίσκω : 2 aor. ἀνεῦρον, 3 pers. plur. dvedpav, Lk. 
ii. 16 (T Tr WH; see εὑρίσκω) ; to find out by search: 
τινά, Lk. ii. 16; Acts xxi. 4. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hat. 
down.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. 111. p. 13 sq.” 

ἀν-έχω: in the N. T. only in the mid. ἀνέχομαι; fut. 


ἀνεψιός 


ἀνέξομαι (W. 83 (79)): impf. ἠνειχόμην 2 Co. xi. [1 Rec*!7], 
4 [Rec.] (GTTrWH rg. ἀνειχύμην [ef. Moeris ed. 
Piers. p. 176; (but L WH txt. in vs. 4 avéy.); οἵ. WH. 
App. p. 162; W. 72 (70); B. 35 (31)]); 2 aor. ἠνεσχό- 
μην Acts xviii. 14 (LT Tr WH ἀνεσχόμην, reff. τι. s.); 
to hold up, (6. g. κεφαλήν, χεῖρας, Hom. et al.) ; hence in 
mid. to hold one’s self erect and firm (against any pers. 
or thing), to sustain, to bear (with equanimity), to bear 
with, endure, with a gen. of the pers. (in Grk. writ. the 
accus. is more com., both of the pers. and of the thing), 
of his opinions, actions, οἷο. Mt. xvii.17; Mk. ix. 19; 
Lk. ix. 41; 2Co. xi. 19; Eph. iv. 2; Col.iii.13. foll. by 
gen. of the thing: 2 Th. i. 4 [WH mre. evey.] (ais by 
attraction for ὧν, unless as be preferred [B. 161 (140); 
ef. W. 202 (190)]). foll. by μικρόν τι with gen. of both 
pers. and thing, 2 Co. xi. 1 (ace. to the reading pov 
μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης [Re*’* LT TrWH]; cf. Meyer 
ad loc.). without a case, 1 Co. iv. 12 (we endure).  foll. 
by εἴ τις, 2 Co. xi. 206. Owing to the context, to bear 
with i. e. to listen: with gen. of the pers., Acts xviii. 14; 
of the thing, 2 Tim. iv. 3; Heb. xiii. 22. [Comp.: προσ- 
avéexa. | * 

ἀνεψιός, -ov, ὁ, [for ἅ-νεπτ-ιός con-nepot-ius, cf. Lat. ne- 
pos, Germ. nichte, Eng. nephew, niece; Curtius § 342], a 


cousin: Col.iv.10. (Num. xxxvi.11; Tob. vii.2.) [Cf. | 


Lob. ad Phryn. p. 306; but esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.; 
also B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Sister’s Son. ] * 

ἄνηθον, -ov, τό, dill, anise [(?); ef. BB.DD.s. v.; Tris- 
tram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 419 sq.]: Mt. xxiii. 23. 
(Arstph. nub. 982; [Aristot., al.]; often in Theophr. 
hist. pl.) * 

ἀν-ήκω ; [impf. ἀνῆκεν); in Grk. writ. to have come up 
to, arrived at, to reach to, pertain to, foll. generally by 
εἴς τε; hence in later writ. ἀνήκει τί τινι something apper- 
tains to one, is due to him se. to be rendered or performed 
by others (1 Mace. x. 42; xi. 35; 2 Mace. xiv. 8), and 
then ethically τὸ ἀνῆκον what is due, duty, [R. V. befitting], 
Philem. 8; τὰ οὐκ ἀνήκοντα unbecoming, discreditable, 
Eph. v. 4 (LT Tr WH ἃ οὐκ ἀνῆκεν. W. 486 (452); [B. 
350 (301) ]); impers. ὡς ἀνῆκε as was fitting, sc. ever 
since ye were converted to Christ, Col. iii. 18, [W. 270 
(254); ef. B. 217 (187) and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].* 

ἀν-ήμερος, -ov (a priv. and ἥμερος). not tame, savage, 
fierce: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Anaecr. 1, 7] 
Aeschyl. down.)* 

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ, a man, Lat. vir. The meanings of this 
word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage ; 
for it is employed 1. with a reference to sex, and 
so to distinguish a man from a woman; either a. asa 
male: Acts viii. 12; xvii.12; 1 Tim.ii.12; or b. asa 
husband: Mt.i.16; Mk. x.2; Jn. iv. 16 sqq.; Ro..vii. 2 
sqq:; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq.; Gal. iv. 27; 1 Tim. iii. 2,12; Tit. 
i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband: Mt.i.19; Rev. 
xxi. 2, ete. 2. with a reference to age, and to dis- 
tinguish an adult man from a boy: Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38 
(where ἄνδρες, γυναῖκες and παιδία are discriminated) ; 
with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue: 
1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to νήπιος) ; Eph. iv. 13; Jas. iii. 2, (in 


45 


ἄνθραξ 


the last two pass. τέλειος ἀνήρ). 3. univ. any male 
person, a man; so where tis might have been used: 
Lk. viii. 41; ix.38; Acts νἱ. 11; x.5,ete. where ἀνήρ 
and τὶς are united: Lk. viii. 27; Actsv.1; x.1. or 
ἀνήρ and ὅς he who, etc.: Ro. iv. 8; Jas.i.12. where 
mention is made of something usually done by men, not 
by women: Lk. xxii. 63; Acts v.36. where angels or 
other heavenly beings are said to have borne the forms 
of men: Lk. ix. 30; xxiv.4; Acts x. 30. where it is so 
connected with an adjective as to give the adj. the force 
of a substantive: ἀνὴρ ἁμαρτωλός a sinner, Lk. ν. 8; 
λεπροὶ ἄνδρες, Lk. xvii. 12; or is joined to appellatives: 
ἀνὴρ φονεύς, Acts iii. 14; av. προφήτης, Lk. xxiv. 19, 
(821 WS, Judg. vi. 8; [cef. W. 30; § 59,1; B. 82 (72); 
other reff. 5. v. ἄνθρωπος, 4 a. fin.]); or to gentile names: 
ἄνδρες Νινευῖται, Mt. xii. 41; ἀνὴρ ᾿Ιουδαῖος, Acts xxii. 3; 
av. Αἰθίοψ, Acts viii. 27; avd. Κύπριοι, Acts xi. 20; esp. 
in addresses of honor and respect [W. § 65, 5d.; B. 
82 (72)], Actsi.11; ii. 14; xiii. 16; xvii. 22, ete.; even 
ἄνδρες ἀδελφοί, Acts i. 16; [1]. 29,37; vii. 2]; xiii. [15], 
26, ete. 4. when persons of either sex are included, 
but named after the more important: Mt. xiv. 35; Acts 
iv.4; [Meyer seems inclined (see his com. on Acts 
1. c.) to dispute even these examples; but al. would refer 
several other instances (esp. Lk. xi. 31; Jas. i. 20) to 
the same head]. 

ἀνθ-ίστημι : pf. ἀνθέστηκα ; 2 aor. αντέστην, [impy. ἀν- 
τίστητε!, inf. ἀντιστῆναι ; Mid., pres. ἀνθίσταμαι ; impf. 
ἀνθιστάμην : (ἀντί and ἵστημι); to set against; as in Grk. 
writ., in the mid., and in the pf. plpf. [having pres. and 
impf. force, W. 274 (257)] and 2 aor. act., fo set one’s 
self against, to withstand, resist, oppose: pf. act., Ro. ix. 
19; xiii. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 15 [RG]. 2 aor. act., Mt. v. 39; 
Lk. xxi. 15; Acts vi. 10; Gal. ii. 11; Eph. vi. 13; 2 Tim. 
iii. 8; [iv. 15 LT Tr WH]. impvy., Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. v. 
9. Mid.: pres., 2 Tim. iii. 8. impf., Acts xiii. 8.* 

ἀνθ-ομολογέομαι, -οὔμαι : [impf. ἀνθωμολογούμην ]; (ἀντί 
and ὁμολογέομαι) ; in Grk. writ. (fr. Dem. down) 1. 
to reply by professing or by confessing. 2. to agree 
mutually (in turn), to make a compact. 8. to acknovl- 
edge in the presence of (ἀντί before, over against; cf. 
ἐξομυλογεῖσθαι ἔναντι κυρίου, 2 Chr. vii. 6) any one, (see 
Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 19 sq.): τὰς ἁμαρτίας 
to confess sins, Joseph. antt. 8, 10, 3 [Bekk. reads avopo- 
Noyoupevovs]; cf. 1 Esdr. viii. 88 (90). τινί, to declare 
something in honor of one, to celebrate his praises, give 
thanks to him, Lk. ii. 38; (for WN in Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 
13; 3 Mace. vi. 33; [Dan. iv. 31 (34) Sept.; Test. xii. 
Patr. test. Jud. § 1]).* 

ἄνθος, -eos, τό, [fr. Hom. down]; a flower: Jas. i. 10 
56: 1 Pet. 1.°24* 

ἀνθρακιά [on accent cf. Etym. Magn. 801, 21; Chand- 
ler ὃ 95], -as, 7, a heap of burning coals: Jn. xviii. 18; 
xxi. 9. (Sir. xi. 32; 4 Macc. ix. 20; Hom. Ii. 9, 213, 
ete.) [Cf. BB.DD. 8. v. Coal.]* 

ἄνθραξ, -axos, 6, coal, (also, fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down, 
a live coal), ἄνθρ. πυρός a coal of fire i. e. a burning or 
live coal; Ro. xii. 20 ἄνθρ. πυρὸς σωρεύειν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν 


> ta 
ἀνθρωπάρεσκος 


τινος, ἃ proverbial expression, fr. Prov. xxv. 22, signify- 
ing to call up, by the favors you confer on your enemy, 
the memory in him of the wrong he has done you (which 
shall pain him as if live coals were heaped on his head), 
that he may the more readily repent. The Arabians 
call things that cause very acute mental pain burning 
coals of the heart and fire in the liver; cf. Gesenius in 
Rosenmiiller’s Bibl.-exeg. Repert. i. p. 140 sq. [or in his 
Thesaurus i. 280; cf. also BB.DD. s. v. Coal]. * 

ἀνθρωπ-άρεσκος, -ov, (ἄνθρωπος and ἄρεσκος agreeable, 
pleasing, insinuating; cf. εὐάρεσκος, δυσάρεσκος, αὐτά- 
peoxos in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 621); only in bibl. and 

heccl. writ. [W. 25]: studying to please men, courting the 

favor of men: Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22. (Ps. lii. (liii.) 6 ; 
[Ps. Sal. iv. 8, 10].)* 

ἀνθρώπινος, -ivn, -wov, (ἄνθρωπος), [fr. Hdt. down], 
human; applied to things belonging to men: χεῖρες, 
Acts xvii. 25 LT Tr WH; φύσις, Jas. iii. 7; or insti- 
tuted by men: κτίσις, [q. ν. 3], 1 Pet. ii. 13; adjusted to 
the strength of man: πειρασμός [R. V. a temptation such 
as man can bear], 1 Co. x. 18 (ef. Neander [and Heinrici] 
ad loe.; Pollux 3, 27, 131 ὃ οὐκ ἄν τις ὑπομένειεν, ὃ οὐκ ἄν 
τις ἐνέγκῃ - - - τὸ δὲ ἐναντίον, κουφόν, εὔφορον, ὀϊστόν, ἀν- 
θρώπινον, ἀνεκτόν). Opp. to divine things, with the im- 
plied idea of defect or weakness: 1 Co. ii. 4 Rec.; 13 
(σοφία, originating with man); iv. 3 (ἀνθρωπίνη ἡμέρα 
the judicial day of men, i.e. human judgment). ἀνθρώ- 
πινον λέγω, Ro. vi. 19 (I say what is human, speak as 
is usual among men, who do not always suitably weigh 
the force of their words; by this expression the apos- 
tle apologizes for the use of the phrase δουλωθῆναι τῇ 
δικαιοσύνῃ." 

ἀνθρωποκτόνος, -ov, (κτείνω to kill), a manslayer, mur- 
derer: Jn. viii. 44. contextually, to be deemed equal to 
a murderer, 1 Jn. iii. 15. (Eur. Iph. T. (382) 389.) [Cf. 
Trench § Ixxxiii. and φονεύς." 

ἄνθρωπος, -ov, 6, [perh. fr. ἀνήρ and oy, i. e. man’s face; 
Curtius § 422; Vaniéek p.9. From Hom. down]; man. 
Tt is used 1. univ., with ref. to the genus or nature, 
without distinction of sex, a human being, whether male 
or female: Jn. xvi. 31. And in this sense a. with the 
article, generically, so as to include all human individ- 
uals: Mt. iv. 4 (ἐπ᾿ ἄρτῳ ζήσεται 6 ἄνθρωπος) ; Mt. xii. 35 
(ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθ. every good person); Mt. xv. 11, 18; Mk. 
ii. 27; vil. 15, 18, 20; Lk.iv.4; Jn. ii. 25 [W. § 18, 8]; 
vii. 51; Ro. vii.1,ete. b. so that a man is distinguished 
from beings of a different race or order; a. from ani- 
mals, plants, ete.: Lk. v.10; Mt.iv.19; xii. 12; 2 Pet. 
ii. 16; Rev. ix. 4, 7, 10, 15,18; xi. 13, ete. β. from 
God, from Christ as divine, and from angels: Mt. x. 32; 
xix. 6; Mk. x. 9; Lk. 11. 15 [Ὁ WH om., L Tr br.] (opp. 
to angels); Jn. x. 33; Acts x. 26; xiv.11; 1 Th. ii. 13; 
Gal. i. 10, 12; 1 Co. iii. 21; vii. 23; Phil.ii. 7,7 (8); 1 Tim. 
ii. 5; Heb. viii. 2; xiii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 4, ete. ec. with 
the added notion of weakness, by which man is led 
into mistake or prompted to sin: οὐκ ἄνθρωποί (RG 


capkikot) ἐστε; 1 Co. iii. 4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1 Co. ii. 5; 
ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1 Pet. iv. 2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε. 


40 


ἄνθρωπος 


ye conduct yourselves as men, 1 Co. iii. 3; λαλεῖν or 
λέγειν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, to speak according to human modes 
of thinking, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii.5; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω, 
I speak as a man to whom analogies from human affairs 
present themselves, while I illustrate divine things by an 
example drawn from ordinary human life, Gal. iii. 15; 
κατὰ dvOp. θηριομαχεῖν, as man is wont to fight, urged on by 
the desire of gain, honor and other earthly advantages, 
1 Co, xv. 32; οὐκ ἔστι κατὰ avOp. is not accommodated 
to the opinions and desires of men, Gal. i. 11; [for exx. 
of κατὰ ἄνθ. in prof. auth. see Wetstein on Rom. u. 8.7; 
with the accessory notion of malignity: προσέχετε 
ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Mt. x. 17; εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, Mt. 
xvii. 22; Lk. ἴχ. 44. ἅ. with the adjunct notion of 
contempt, (as sometimes in Grk. writ.) : Jn. v. 12; the 
address ὦ ἄνθρωπε, or ἄνθρωπε, is one either of contempt 
and disdainful pity, Ro. ix. 20 (Plat. Gorg. p. 452 b. σὺ 
δὲ... τίς εἶ, ὦ ἄνθρωπε), or of gentle rebuke, Lk. xxii. 
58,60. ‘The word serves to suggest commiseration: ἴδε 
[T Tr WH ἰδοὺ] 6 ἄνθρ. behold the man in question, mal- 
treated, defenceless, Jn. xix. 5. 6. with a reference 
to the twofold nature of man, ὁ ἔσω and ὁ ἔξω ἄνθρωπος, 
soul and body: Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; 2 Co. iv. 16, 
(Plat. rep. 9, 589 a. ὁ ἐντὸς ἄνθρωπος ; Plotin. Enn. 5, 1, 
10 ὁ εἴσω avOp.; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 61 sq; [Mey. 
on Ro. ]. c.; Ellie. on Eph. 1. 6.1); ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας 
ἄνθρ. 1 Pet. iii. 4. f. with a reference to the twofold 
moral condition of man, 6 παλαιός (the corrupt) and 6 
καινὸς (ὁ νέος) avOp. (the truly Christian man, conformed 
to the nature of God): Ro. vi. 6; Eph. ii. 15; iv. 22, 24; 
Col. iii. 9 sq. g. with a reference to the sex, (context- 
ually) a male: Jn. vii. 22 sq. 2. indefinitely, without 
the article, ἄνθρωπος, a. some one, a (certain) man, 
when who he is either is not known or is not import- 
ant: 1. α. τὶς, Mt. xvii. 14; xxi. 28; xxii. 11; Mk. xii. 1; 
xiv. 13; Lk. v. 18; xiii. 19, ete. with the addition of ris, 
Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 30; xiv. 2,16; xv.11; xvi. 1,19; 
Jn.v.5. in address, where the speaker either cannot 
or will not give the name, Lk. v. 20; or where the writer 
addresses any and every reader, Ro. ii. 1, 8, Ὁ. where 
what is said holds of every man, so that ἄνθρ. is equiv. 
to the Germ. indef. man, one: Ro. iii. 28; 1 Co. iv. 1; 
vii. 1; xi. 28; Gal. ii. 16. So also where opp. to domes- 
tics, Mt. x. 36; to a wife, Mt. xix. 10; to a father, Mt. 
x. 835; to the master of a household, Lk. xii. 36 sq.,—in 
which passages many, confounding sense and signifi- 
cation, incorrectly say that the word ἄνθρ. signifies father 
of a family, husband, son, servant. 3. in the plur. of 
ἄνθρ. is sometimes (the) people, Germ. die Leute: Mt. 
v. 18, 16; vi. 5, 18; viii. 27; xvi. 13; Lk. xi. 44; Mk. 
viii. 24, 27; Jn. iv. 28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων (nemo homi- 
num) no one, Mk. xi. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 16. 4. It is joined 
a. to another substantive, —a quasi-predicate of office, 
or employment, or characteristic, —the idea of the pred- 
icate predominating [W. § 59,1]: ἄνθρωπος ἔμπορος a 
merchant (-man), Mt. xiii. 45 [WH txt. om. dvp.]; οἶκο- 
δεσπότης, Mt. xiii. 52; xx. 1; xxi. 33; βασιλεύς, Mt. 
xviii. 23; xxii. 2; φάγος, Mt. xi. 19. (So in Hebr. 


τὰ ΄ 
ἀνθυπατεύω 


Ὁ WN a eunuch, Jer. xxxviii. 7 sq., 1π3 ws a priest, 
Ley. xxi. 9; also in Grk. writ.: ἄνθ. ὁδίτης, Hom. Il. 16, 
263, al.; cf. Matthiae ὃ 430, 6; [Kriiger § 57, 1,1]; but 
in Attic this combination generally has a contemptuous 
force; cf. Bnhdy. p. 48; in Lat. homo gladiator, Cic. 
epp. ad diversos 12, 22,1). b. to a gentile noun: ἄνθ. 
Κυρηναῖος, Mt. xxvii. 32; *Iovdaios, Acts xxi. 39; Ῥω- 
paios, Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25, (ace. to the context, a Ro- 
man citizen). 5. ὁ avOp., with the article, the partic- 
ular man under consideration, who he is being plain 
from the context: Mt. xii. 13; xxvi. 72; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. 
xxiii. 6; Jn. iv. 50. οὗτος ὁ av6., Lk. xiv. 30; Jn. ix. 16, 
24 [L Trmrg. WH]; xi. 47; ὁ ἄνθ. οὗτος, Mk. xiv. 
71; Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 47; Jn. ix. 24 [RG TTrtxt.]; 
xviii. 17; Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 31,32. ὁ av0. 
ἐκεῖνος, Mt. xii. 45; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. 6. Phrases: 
6 ἄνθ. τῆς ἁμαρτίας (or with T Tr txt.WH txt. τ. ἀνομίας), 
2 Th. ii. 3, see ἁμαρτία, 1 p. 80 sq. ἄνθ. τοῦ θεοῦ a man 
devoted to the service of God, God’s minister: 1 Tim. 
vi. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 17, (of the evangelists, the associates 
of the apostles) ; 2 Pet.i. 21 (of prophets, like DN WN 
often in the O. T.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 85). For 
6 vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου and viol τῶν avOp., see under vids. 
ἀνθ-υπατεύω ; (ἀντί for i.e. in lieu or stead of any one, 
and ὑπατεύω to be ὕπατος, to be supreme, to be consul) ; 
to be proconsul: Acts xviii. 12[RG; cf. B. 169 (147)]. 
(Plut. comp. Dem. 6. Cic. ο. 3; Hdian. 7, 5, 2.) * 
ἀνθ-ύπατος, -ov, 6, [see the preceding word ], proconsul: 
Acts xiii. 7, 8,12; xviii. 12 L T Tr WH; xix. 38. The 
emperor Augustus divided the Roman provinces into 
senatorial and imperial. The former were presided 
over by proconsuls; the latter were administered by 
legates of the emperor, sometimes called also proprae- 
tors. (Polyb., Dion. H., Leian., Plut., and often in Dio 
Cass.) [B.D.s. v. Proconsul; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Prov- 
ince; esp. Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rey. for 1878, 
p: 289 sq.]* 
ἀν-ίημι, [ptep. plur. ἀνιέντες]: 2 aor. subj. ava, ptep. 
plur. ἀνέντες ; 1 aor. pass. dveOnv; to send back; to relax; 
contextually, to loosen: ri, Acts xvi. 26, (rods δεσμούς, 
Plut. Alex. M. 73); xxvii. 40. trop. τὴν ἀπειλήν, to give 
up, omit, calm [?], Eph. vi. 9; (τὴν ἔχθραν, Thue. 3, 10; 
τὴν ὀργήν, Plut. Alex. M.70). to leave, not to uphold, to 
let sink: Heb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. 6).* 
(iAews, Attic for ἵλαος), without 
mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 18 [RG]. Found nowhere 
else [οχο. Hdian. epim. 257]. Cf. ἀνέλεος." ; 
ἄνιπτος, -ov, (νίπτω to wash), unwashed: Mt. xv. 20; 
Mk. vii. 2, and RLmrg.in 5. (Hom. Il. 6, 266, etc.)* 
ἀν-ίστημι : fut. ἀναστήσω; 1 aor. ἀνέστησα: 2 aor. ἀν- 
ἔστην, impy. ἀνάστηθι and (Acts xii. 7; Eph. v. 14 and 
L WH tat. in Acts ix. 11) ἀνάστα (W. § 14, 1h.; [B. 47 
(40)]); Mid., pres. ἀνίσταμαι: fut. ἀναστήσομαι; [fr. 
Hom. down]; I. Transitively, in the pres. 1 
aor. and fut. act., to cause to rise, raise up, (Dp); 
a. prop. of one lying down: Actsix.41. b. toraise up 
from death: Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54; Acts ii. 32; xiii. 34, 
(so in Grk. writ.). ο. to raise up, cause to be born: 


ἀν-ίλεως, των, Fen. -w, 


47 


"Avvas 


σπέρμα offspring (Gen. xxxviii. 8), Mt. xxii. 24, [ef. W. 
33 (32)]; τὸν Χριστόν, Acts ii. 30 Ree. to cause to ap- 
pear, bring forward, τινά tut one for any one’s succor: 
προφήτην, Acts iii. 22; vii. 37; τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Acts iii. 
26. II. Intransitively, in the pf. plpf. and 2 
aor. act., and in the mid. ; 1. to rise, stand up; used 
a. of persons lying down (on a couch or bed): Mk. i. 
35; v.42; Lk. viii. 55; xi. 7; Acts ix. 34,40. of per- 
sons lying on the ground: Mk. ix. 27; Lk. xvii. 19; 
xxii. 46; Acts ix. 6. b. of persons seated: Lk. iv. 16 
(ἀνέστη ἀναγνῶναι); Mt. xxvi.62; Mk. xiv. 60; Acts 
Xxill. 9. ¢. of those who leave a place to go elsewhere. 
Mt. ix.9; Mk. ii. 14; [x.50 RG]; Lk. iv. 38; xxiii. 1; 
Acts ix. 39. Hence of those who prepare themselves 
for a journey, (Germ. sich aufmachen) : Mk. vii. 24; x. 
1; Lk. i. 39; xv. 18, 20; Acts x. 20; xxii. 10. In the 
same way the Hebr. Dap (esp. Dp.) is put before verbs 
of going, departing, etc., according to the well 
known oriental custom to omit nothing contributing to 
the full pictorial delineation of an action or event; hence 
formerly Dp) and ἀναστάς were sometimes incorrectly 
said to be redundant; cf. W. 608 (565). ἀναστῆναι ἀπό 
to rise up from something, i. e. from what one has been 
doing while either sitting or prostrate on the ground: 
Lk. xxii. 45. ἃ. of the dead; 2 aor., with ἐκ νεκρῶν 
added: Mt. xvii. 9 RG WH mrg.; Mk. ix. 9 8q-5 ἈΠ: 25; 
Lk. xvi. 31; xxiv. 46; Jn. xx.9; Eph. v. 14 (here fig.) ; 
with ἐκ νεκρῶν omitted: Mk. viii. 31; xvi. 9; Lk. ix. 8, 
19, (22 LT Trmrg. WH mrg.]; xxiv. 7; Ro. xiv. 9 Rec.; 
so (without ἐκ vexp.) in the fut. mid. also: Mt. xii. 41; 
[xvii. 23 L WH mrg.]; xx. 19 [RGLTrmre. WH mrz.]; 
Mk. x. 34; Lk. xi. 32; xviii. 33; Jn. xi. 23 sq.; 1 Th. iv. 
16. 2. to arise, appear, stand forth; of kings, proph- 
ets, priests, leaders of insurgents: Acts v. 36 sq.; vii. 
18. mid., Ro. xv.12; Heb. vii. 11,15. of those about 
to enter into conversation or dispute with any one, Lk. 
x. 25; Acts vi. 9; or to undertake some business, Acts 
v.6; or to attempt something against others, Acts vy. 17. 
Hence ἀναστῆναι ἐπί twa to rise up against any one: Mk. 
iii. 26, (Oy Dyp). [SyN. see ἐγείρω, fin. Comp.: én, 
ἐξ-ανίστημι.] 

Αννα [WH Αννα, see their Intr. § 408], -as [on this 
gen. ef. B. 17 (15); Ph. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 138], ἡ, 
Anna, (7:1) grace), the prop. name of a woman (so in 
1S i. 2sqq.; ii. 1 Alex.; Tob. i. 9, 20, ete.), a prophetess, 
in other respects unknown: Lk. ii. 36.* 

"Avvas [WH “Avvas, see their Intr. § 408], -a (on this 
gen. cf. W. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59)), ὁ, (in Joseph. "Avaves; fr. 
Hebr. 31m to be gracious), a high-priest of the Jews, 
elevated to the pontificate by Quirinius the governor of 
Syria c. Α. Ὁ. 6 or 7; but afterwards, a. D. 15, deposed 
by Valerius Gratus, the procurator of Judzea, who put in 
his place, first Ismael, son of Phabi, and shortly after 
Eleazar, son of Annas. From the latter, the office 
passed to Simon; from Simon ec. A.p. 18 to Caiaphas, 
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.); but Annas, even after he 
had been put out of office, continued to have great influ- 
ence: Jn. xviii. 13, 24. This explains the mistake [but 


ἀνοητος 


see reff. below (esp. to Schiirer), and cf. ἀρχιερεύς, 2] by 
which Luke, in his Gospel iii. 2 (ace. to the true read- 
ing dpxtepéws) and in Acts iv. 6, attributes to him the 
pontificate long after he had beer removed from office. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Annas; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 
135 sq.; Schiirer in the Zeitschr. fiir wissensch. Theol. 
for 1876, p. 580 sq. [also in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23 
iv.; and BB.DD. s. v.].* 

ἀ-νόητος, -ov, (νοητός fr. νοέω) ; 1. not understood, 
unintelligible ; 2. generally active, not understanding, 
unwise, foolish: Ro.i.14 (opp. to σοφοί) ; Lk. xxiv. 25; 
Gal. iii. 1, 3; Tit. iii. 3. ἐπιθυμίαι ἀνόητοι, 1 Tim. vi. 9. 
(Proy. xvii. 28; Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 13; and often in Attic 
writ.; [ef. Trench § lxxv.; Ellic. on Gal. iii. 1; Schmidt 
ch.147 § 20].)* 

ἄνοια, -as, 7, (ἄνους [i. 6. ἄνοος without understand- 
ing]), want of understanding, folly: 2 Tim. iii. 9. mad- 
ness expressing itself in rage, Lk. vi. 11, [δύο δ᾽ ἀνοίας 
γένη, τὸ μὲν μανίαν, τὸ δὲ ἀμαθίαν, Plato, Tim. p. 86 b.]. 
({Theogn. 453]; Hdt. 6,69; Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.)* 

ἀν-οίγω ; (dvd, οἴγω i. 6. οἴγνυμι) ; fut. ἀνοίξω; 1 aor. 
ἤνοιξα and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) ἀνέῳξα 
(an earlier form) [and ἠνέῳξα WH in Jn. ix. 17, 32 (cf. 
Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when corrected), but without iota 
subser.; see I, +]; 2 pf. avéwya (to be or stand open; cf. 
Bum. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 sq.; (Rutherford, New Phryn. 
Ρ. 247; Veitch s. v.]; the Attic writ. give this force 
mostly to the pf. pass.); Pass., [pres. dvotyoua Mt. vii. 
8LTrtxt. Wi mrg.; Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; pf. 
ptep. ἀνεῳγμένος and ἠνεῳγμένος, (ἠνοιγμένος Acts ix. 8 
Tdf.); 1 aor. ἀνεῴχθην, ἠνεῴχθην. and ἠνοίχθην. inf. ave- 
ῳχθῆναι (with double augm. Lk. iii. 21); 2 aor. ἠνοίγην 
(the usual later form); 1 fut. ἀνοιχθήσομαι (Lk. xi. 9 
Tdf., 10 LT); 2 fut. ἀνοιγήσομαι ; (on these forms, in 
the use of which both codd. and edd. differ much, ef. 
( Tdf. Proleg. p. 121 sq.]; WH. App. pp. 161, 170; Bim. 
Gram. p. 280 [21st Germ. ed.]; Bum. N. T. Gr. 63 (55); 
W. 72 (70) and 83 (79); [Veitch s. v.]); to open: a 
door, a gate, Acts v. 19; xii. 10,14; xvi. 26 sq.; Rev. 
iv. 1; very often in Grk. writ. Metaph., to give en- 
trance into the soul, Rey. iii. 20; to furnish opportunity 
to do something, Acts xiv. 27; Col. iv. 3; pass., of an 
opportunity offered, 1 Co. xvi. 9; 2 Co. ii. 12; Rev. iii. 
8; cf. θύρα. simply ἀνοίγειν τινί to open (the door [B. 
145 (127)]) to one; prop.: Lk. xii. 36; Acts v. 23; xii. 
16; Jn. x. 3; ina proverbial saying, to grant something 
asked for, Mt. vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq.; parabolically, to 
give access to the blessings of God’s kingdom, Mt. xxv. 
11; Lk. xiii. 25; Rev. iii. 17. τοὺς θησαυρούς, Mt. ii. 11, 
(Sir. xliii. 14; Eur. Ion 923); τὰ μνημεῖα, Mt. xxvii. 52; 
tapos, Ro. iii. 13; τὸ φρέαρ, Rev. ix. 2. heaven is said to 
be opened and something to descend fr. it, Mt. iii. 16; Lk. 
iii. 21; Jn. i. 51 (52); Acts x. 11; or something is said 
to be seen there, Acts vii. 56 RG; Rev. xi. 19 (6 ναὸς 
. - - 6 ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ) ; [xv. 5]; xix.11. ἀνοίγ. τὸ στόμα: of 
a fish’s mouth, Mt. xvii. 27; Hebraistically, of those who 
begin to speak [W. 33 (32), 608 (565)], Mt. v.2; Acts 
Vili. 32, 35; x. 34; xviii. 14; foll. by eis βλασφημίαν [-pias 


48 


ἀνόμως 


LT ΤΥ WH], Rev. xiii. 6; ἐν παραβολαῖς, i.e. to make 
use of (A. V. in), Mt. xiii. 35, (Ps. Lxxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2; 
ἐν ἔπεσι Leian. Philops. § 33); πρός τινα, 2 Co. vi. 11 (τὸ 
στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγε πρὸς ὑμᾶς our mouth is open towards 
you, i. e. we speak freely to you, we keep nothing back) ; 
the mouth of one is said to be opened who recovers the 
power of speech, Lk. i. 64; of the earth yawning, Rey. 
xii. 16. ἀν. ἀκοάς τινος i. 6. to restore the faculty of hear- 
ing, Mk. vii. 35 (LT Tr WH). ἀν. τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς [W. 
33 (32)], to part the eyelids so as to see, Acts ix. 8, 40; 
τινός, to restore one’s sight, Mt. ix. 30; xx. 33; Jn. ix. 
10, 14, 17, 21, 26, 30, 32; x. 21; xi. 37; metaph., Acts 
xxvi. 18 (to open the eyes of one’s mind). ἀνοίγω τὴν 
σφραγίδα, to unseal, Rev. ν. 9; vi. 1, 3,5, 7, 9,12; viii. 1; 
dv. τὸ βιβλίον, Βιβλαρίδιον, to unroll, Lk. iv. 17 L Tr WH; 
Rev. v. 2-5; x. 2, 8; xx. 12. (Comp.: δι-ανοίγω.] ὃ 

ἀν-οικο-δομέω, -@: fut. ἀνοικοδομήσω; to build again, 
(Vulg. reaedifico): Acts xv.16. ([Thue. 1,89, 3]; Diod. 
11, 39; Plut. Them. 19; Cam. 31; Hdian. 8, 2, 12 [5 
ed. Bekk.].)* 

ἄνοιξις, -ews, 7, (ἀνοίγω, q. ν.), an opening: ἐν ἀνοίξει 
τοῦ στόματός μου as often as I open my mouth to speak, 
Eph. vi. 19. (Thue. 4, 68, 4; τῶν πυλῶν, id. 4, 67, 3; 
χειλῶν, Plut. mor. [symp. 1. ix. quaest. 2, 3] p. 738 c.)* 

ἀνομία, -as, ἡ, (ἄνομος) ; 1. prop. the condition of 
one without law, — either because ignorant °f it, or because 
violating it. 2. contempt and violation of law, iniquity, 
wickedness: Mt. xxiii. 28; xxiv. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 (T Trtxt. 
WH tat. ; cf. ἁμαρτία, 1 p. 30 sq.), 7; Tit. ii. 14; 1 In. iii. 
4. opp. to ἡ δικαιοσύνη, 2 Co. vi. 14; Heb. i. 9 [not Tdf.], 
(Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24 ἀνομίᾳ μᾶλλον ἢ δικαιοσύνῃ χρώμενοι); 
and to ἡ δικαιοσύνη and ὁ ἁγιασμός, Ro. vi. 19 (τῇ ἀνομίᾳ 
εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν to iniquity — personified —in order to work 
iniquity) ; ποιεῖν THY ἀνομίαν to do iniquity, act wickedly, 
Mt. xiii. 41; 1 Jn. iii. 4; in the same sense, ἐργάζεσθαι 
τὴν av. Mt. vii. 23; plur. ai ἀνομίαι manifestations of dis- 
regard for law, iniquities, evil deeds: Ro. iv. 7 (Ps. xxxi. 
(xxxii.) 1); Heb. viii. 12 [RGL]; x.17. (In Grk. 
writ. fr. [Hdt. 1, 96] Thue. down; often in Sept.) [Syn. 
cf. Trench § lxvi.; Tittm. i. 48; Ellic. on Tit. ii. 14.]* 

ἄνομος, -ov, (νόμος) ; 1. destitute of (the Mosaic) 
law: used of Gentiles, 1 Co. ix. 21, (without any sugges- 
tion of ‘iniquity’; just asin Add. to Esth. iv. 42, where 
ἄνομοι ἀπερίτμητοι and ἀλλότριοι are used together). 2. 
departing from the law, a violator of the law, lawless, 
wicked; (Vulg. iniquus; [also injustus]): Mk. xv. 28 [Β 
LTrbr.]; Lk. xxii. 37; Acts ii. 23, (so in Grk. writ.) ; 
opp. to ὁ δίκαιος, 1 Tim.i.9; ὁ ἄνομος (κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν). he in 
whom all iniquity has as it were fixed its abode, 2 Th. 
ii.8; ἄν. ἔργον an unlawful deed, 2 Pet. ii. 8; free from 
law, not subject to law, [Vulg. sine lege]: μὴ ὧν ἄνομος 
θεοῦ [B. 169 (147)] (Rec. θεῷ), 1 Co. ix. 21. (Very 
often in Sept.) [Sy¥n. see ἀνομία, fin.]* 

ἀνόμως, adv., without the law (see ἄνομος, 1), without a 
knowledge of the law: ἀν. ἁμαρτάνειν to sin in ignorance 
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 12; ἀπόλλυσθαι to perish, but 
not by sentence of the Mosaic law, ibid. (ἀνόμως ζῆν to 
live ignorant of law and discipline, Isoc. panegyr. ce. 10 


ἀνορθόω 


§ 39; ἀνόμως ἀπόλλυσθαι to be slain contrary to law, as 
in wars, seditions, ete., ibid. c. 44 § 168. In Grk. writ. 
generally unjustly, wickedly, as 2 Mace. viii. 17.)* 

ἀν-ορθόω, -ῶ : fut. ἀνορθώσω; 1 aor. ἀνώρθωσα; 1 aor. 
pass. ἀνωρθώθην (Lk. xiii. 13; without the aug. ἀνορθώθην 
LTTr; cf.[ WH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (30); [W. 73] 
(70)); 1. to set up, make erect: a crooked person, Lk. 
xiii. 13 (she was made straight, stood erect); drooping 
hands and relaxed knees (to raise them up by restoring 
their strength), Heb. xii. 12. 2. to rear again, build 
anew: σκηνήν, Acts xv. 16 (Hdt. 1,19 τὸν mov... τὸν 
ἐνέπρησαν; 8, 140; Xen. Hell. 4, 8, 12, ete.; in various 
senses in Sept.).* 

ἀν-ὀσιος, -ov, (a priv. and ὅσιος, q. v.), unholy, impious, 
wicked: 1 Tim. i. 9; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (In Grk. writ. from 
ΓΑ βοῦν]. and] Hat. down.) * 

ἀνοχή, -ῆς, 7, (compare ἀνέχομαί τινος, 5. V. ἀνέχω p. 45), 
toleration, forbearance ; in this sense only in Ro. ii. 4; 
iii. 26 (25). (In Grk. writ.a holding back, delaying, 
fr. ἀνέχω to hold back, hinder.) [Cf. Trench § liii.]* 

ἀντ-αγωνίζομαι ; fo struggle, fight; πρός τι, against a 
thing, Heb. xii. 4 [ef. W. § 52, 4,3]. (Xen., Plat., Dem., 
ete.)* 

ἀντ-άλλαγμα, -ros, τό, (ἀντί in place of, in turn, and 
ἄλλαγμα see ἀλλάσσω), that which is given in place of 
another thing by way of exchange ; what is given either in 
order to keep or to acquire anything: Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. 
vili. 37, where the sense is, ‘nothing equals in value the 
soul’s salvation.’ Christ transfers a proverbial expres- 
sion respecting the supreme value of the natural life 
(Hom. Il. 9, 401 οὐ yap ἐμοὶ ψυχῆς ἀντάξιον) to the life 
eternal. (Ruthiv.7; Jer. xv.13; Sir. vi. 15, ete.; Eur. 
Or. 1157; Joseph. b. j. 1, 18, 3.)* 

ἀντ-ανα-πληρόω, -@; (ἀντί and ἀναπληρόω, q. Vv.) ; to fill 
up in turn: Col. i. 24 (the meaning is, ‘what is wanting 
of the afflictions of Christ to be borne by me, that I 
supply in order to repay the benefits which Christ con- 
ferred on me by filling up the measure of the afflictions 
laid upon him’); [Mey., Ellic., ete., explain the word 
(with Wetst.) by “ἀντὶ ὑστερήματος succedit ἀναπλήρωμα᾽; 
but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc., who also quotes the pas- 
sages where the word occurs]. (Dem. p. 182, 22; Dio 
Cass. 44,48; Apollon. Dysc. de constr. orat. i. pp. 14, 
1 [ef. Bttm. ad loc.]; 114, 8; 258, 3; 337, 4.)* 

ἀντ-απο-δίδωμι: fut. ἀνταποδώσω; 2 aor. inf. ἀνταποδοῦ- 
vat; 1 fut. pass. ἀνταποδοθήσομαι : (ἀντί for something 
received, in return, ἀποδίδωμι to give back); to repay, 
requite ; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv. 14; Ro. xi. 35; 
εὐχαριστίαν τινί, 1 Th. iii. 9. Ὄ. in a bad sense, of 
penalty and vengeance; absol.: Ro. xii. 19; Heb. x. 
30, (Deut. xxxii. 35); θλίψιν τινί, 2 Th. 1.6. (Very 
often in the Sept. and Apocr., in both senses; in Grk. 
writ. fr. [Hdt.] Thue. down.)* 

ἀντ-από-δομα, -ros, τό, (see ἀνταποδίδωμε), the thing paid 
back, requital; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv.12. __ b. 
in a bad sense: Ro. xi. 9. (In Sept. i. q. 5303, Judg. ix. 
16 [ Alex.], etc. ; the Greeks say ἀνταπόδοσις [ cf. W. 25].)* 

ἀντ-από-δοσις, -ews, 7, recompense: Col. iii. 24. 


49 


(In | 


ἀντι 


Sept. i. ᾳ- 5903, Is. lix. 18, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. 
down.)* 

ἀντ-απο-κρίνομαι ; 1 aor. pass. ἀνταπεκρίθην [see ἀπο- 
κρίνω, ii.]; to contradict in reply, to answer by contradict- 
ing, reply against: τινὶ πρός τι, Lk. xiv. 6; (Sept. Judg. 
y. 29 [Alex.]; Job xvi. 8; xxxii. 12; Aesop. fab. 172 
ed. de Furia, [p. 353 ed. Coray]). Hence i. 4: to alter- 
cate, dispute: with dat. of pers. Ro. ix. 20. (In a mathe 
matical sense, to correspond to each other or be parallel, 
in Nicomach. arithm. 1, 8, 11 p. 77 a. [p. 17 ed. Hoche].) 
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 17.* 

ἀντ-εῖπον, a 2 aor. used instead of the verb ἀντιλέγειν, 
to speak against, gainsay; [fr. Aeschyl. down]: Lk. xxi. 
15; Acts iv.14. Cf. εἶπον." 

ἀντ-έχω: Mid., [pres. dvtéyopar]; fut. ἀνθέξομαι; to 
hoid before or against, hold back, withstand, endure}; in 
the N. T. only in Mid. to keep one’s self directly opposite 
to any one, hold to him firmly, cleave to, paying heed to 
him: τινός, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; τῶν ἀσθενῶν, to aid 
them, care for them, 1 Th. v. 14; τοῦ λόγου. to hold to, 
hold it fast, Tit.i. 9. (Deut. xxxii. 41; Is. lvi. 4, 6; Prov. 
iii. 18, ete., and often in Grk. writ.) Cf. Kiihner 
§ 520 b. [2te Aufl. § 416, 2; ef. Jelf § 536]; W. 202 (190); 
[B. 161 (140)].* 

ἀντί [before ὧν, ἀνθ᾽ ; elsewhere neglecting elision] a 
preposition foll. by the gen. (answering to the Lat. ante 
and the Germ. prefixes ant-, ent-), in the use of which 
the N. T. writ. coincide with the Greek (W. 364 (341)); 
1. prop. it seems to have signified over against, opposite 
to, before, in a local sense (Bttm. Gram. p. 412; [ef. Cur- 
tius § 204]). Hence 2. indicating exchange, suc- 
cession, for, instead of, in place of (something). a. univ. 
instead of: ἀντὶ ἰχθύος ὄφιν, Lk. xi. 11; ἀντὶ περιβολαίου 
to serve as a covering, 1 Co. xi. 15; ἀντὶ τοῦ λέγειν, Jas. 
iv. 15, (ἀντὶ τοῦ with inf. often in Grk. writ. [W. 329 
(309); B. 263 (226)]). b. of that for which any thing 
is given, received, endured: Mt. v. 38; xvii. 27 (to 
release me and thyself from obligation) ; Heb. xii. 2 (to 
obtain the joy; ef. Bleek, Liinemann, or Delitzsch ad 
loc.) ; of the price of sale (or purchase): Heb. xii. 16; 
λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν, Mt. xx. 28; Mk.x.45. Then c. 
of recompense: κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόναι, Ro. xii. 17; 
1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9, (Sap. xi. 16 (15)). ἀνθ᾽ ὧν 
equiv. to ἀντὶ τούτων, ὅτι for that, because : Lk. i. 20; xix. 
44; Acts xii. 23; 2 Th. ii. 10, (also in prof. auth. [exx. 
in Wetst. on Luke i. 20]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 710; [W. 
364 (342), ef. 162 (153); B. 105 (92)]; Hebr. wx ANA, 
Deut. xxi. 14; 2K. xxii. 17). d. of the cause: ἀνθ᾽ dy 
wherefore, Lk. xii. 3; ἀντὶ τούτου for this cause, Eph. v- 
31. 6. of succession to the place of another: ‘Ap y. 
βασιλεύει ἀντὶ Ηρώδου in place of Herod, Mt. ii. 22, (1 K. 
xi. 44; Hdt.1, 108; Xen. an. 1, 1,4). χάριν ἀντὶ χάρι- 
ros grace in the place of grace, grace succeeding grace 
perpetually, i. 6. the richest abundance of grace, Jn. i. 
16, (Theogn. vs. 344 ἀντ᾽ ἀνιῶν ἀνίας [yet cf. the context 
vs. 342 (vss. 780 and 778 ed. Welcker); more appro- 
priate are the reff. to Philo, i. 254 ed. Mang. (de poster. 
Caini § 48, vol. ii. 89 ed. Richter), and Chrys. de sacer- 


ἀντιβάλλω 


dot. 1. vi. ο. 18 § 6227). 3. As a prefix, it denotes 
a. opposite, over against: ἀντιπέραν, ἀντιπαρέρχεσθαι. Ὁ. 
the mutual efficiency of two: ἀντιβάλλειν, ἀντικαλεῖν, 
ἀντιλοιδορεῖν. ο. requital: ἀντιμισθία, ἀνταποδίδωμι. ἃ. 
hostile opposition: ἀντίχριστος. 6. official substitution, 
instead of: ἀνθύπατος." 

ἀντι-βάλλω; fo throw in turn, (prop. Thue. 7, 25; Plut. 
Nie. 25): λόγους πρὸς ἀλλήλους to exchange words with 
one another, Lk. xxiv. 17, [οἷν 2 Mace. xi. 13].* 

ἀντι-δια-τίθημι : [pres. mid. ἀντιδιατίθεμαι) ; in mid. to 
place one’s self in opposition, to oppose: of heretics, 2'Tim. 
ii. 25, cf. De Wette [or Holtzm.] ad loc.; (several times 
in eccl. writ.; in the act. to dispose in turn, to take in hand 
in turn: τινά, Diod. exe. p. 602 [vol. v. p. 105, 24 ed. 
Dind.; absol. to retaliate, Philo de spec. legg. § 15; de 
concupise. § 4]).* 

ἀντίδικος, -ov, (δίκη) ; as subst. ὁ ἀντίδικος 8. απ op- 
ponent in a suit at law: Mt. ν. 25; Lk. xii. 58; xviii. 3, 
(Xen., Plat., often in the Attic orators). b. univ. an 
adversary, enemy, (Aeschyl. Ag. 41; Sir. xxiii. 9; 1S. 
ii. 10; Is. xli. 11, etc.): 1 Pet. v. 8 (unless we prefer to 
regard the devil as here called ἀντίδικος because he ac- 
cuses men before God).* 

ἀντίθεσις, [(τίθημι), fr. Plato down],-ews, ἡ; 8. Op- 
position. b. that which is opposed: 1 Tim. vi. 20 (av- 
τιθέσεις τῆς ψευδων. γνώσ. the inventions of false knowl- 
edge, either mutually oppugnant, or opposed to true 
Christian doctrine).* 

ἀντι-καθ-ίστημι : 2 aor. ἀντικατέστην ; [fr. Hdt. down]; 
in the trans. tenses 1. to put in place of another. 
2. to place in opposition, (to dispose troops, set an army 
in line of battle); in the intrans. tenses, 0 stand against, 
resist: Heb. xii. 4, (Thue. 1, 62. 71).* 

ἀντι-καλέω, -@: 1 aor. ἀντεκάλεσα; to invite in turn: 
τινά, Lk. xiv. 12. [Xen. conviv. 1, 15.]* 

ἀντί-κειμαι ; 1. to be set over against, lie opposite to, 
in a local sense, ([Hippocr. de aére p. 282 Foes. (191 
Chart.) ; Strab. 7, 7,5]; Hdian. 6, 2, 4 (2 Bekk.) ; 3, 15, 
17 (8 Bekk.); [ef. Aristot. de caelo 1, 8 p. 277°, 23]). 2. 
to oppose, be adverse to, withstand: τινί, Lk. xiii. 17; xxi. 
15; Gal. v.17; 1 Tim.i.10. simply (6) ἀντικείμενος, an 
adversary, [Tittmann ii. 9]: 1 Co. xvi. 9; Phil. i. 28; 2 Th. 
ii. 4; 1 Tim. v.14. (Dio Cass. 39,8. Ex. xxiii. 22; 2 
Mace. x. 26, οἷο. ; [see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * 

ἀντικρύ (1 TWH ἄντικρυς [Chandler § 881; Treg. 
ἀντικρύς. Cf. Lob. Path. Elementa ii. 283]; ad Phryn. p. 
444; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 500 sq.]; Bttm. Ausf. 
Spr ii. 366), adv. of place, over against, opposite: with 
gen., Acts xx. 15. (Often in Grk. writ.; Philo de vict. 
off. § 3; de vit. Moys. iii. §7; in Flace. § 10.) * 

dvrt-AapBavw: Mid., [pres. ἀντιλαμβάνομαι}; 2 aor. 
ἀντελαβόμην; to take in turn or in return, to receive one 
thing for another given, to receive instead of; in mid., 
freq. in Attic prose writ., 1. to lay hold of, hold fast 
to, anything: τινός. 2. to take a person or thing in 
order as it were to be held, to take to, embrace; witha 
gen. of the pers., to help, succor: Lk. i. 54; Acts xx. 35, 
(Diod. 11, 13; Dio Cass. 40, 27; 46,45; often in Sept.). 


50 : 


| tioned in the N. T.; 


᾿Αντιόχεια 


with a gen. of the thing, to be a partaker, partake of. 
τῆς evepyeoias of the benefit of the services rendered by 
the slaves, 1 Tim. vi. 2; ef. De Wette ad loc. (unre ἐσθί- 
ov πλειόνων ἡδονῶν ἀντιλήψεται, Porphyr. de abstin. 1, 
46; [cf. Euseb. h. 6. 4, 15, 37 and exx. in Field, Otium 
Norv. pars. iii. ad]. ¢.]) [Comp.: συν-αντι-λαμβάνομαι. " 

ἀντι-λέγω ; [impf. ἀντέλεγον] ; to speak against, gainsay, 
contradict; absol.: Acts xiii. 45 [L Tr WH om.]; xxviii. 
19; Titi. 9. τινί, Acts xiii. 45. foll. by μή and ace. with 
inf.: Lk. xx. 27 [Lmrg. Tr WH λέγοντες], (as in Grk. 
writ.; see Passow [or L. and 5.1 s. v.; [W. § 65, 2 B.; 
B. 355 (305)]). to oppose one’s self to one, decline to obey 
him, declare one’s self against him, refuse to have anything 
to do with him, [ef. W. 28 (22)]:, τινί, Jn. xix. 12, (Leian. 
dial. inferor. 30, 3); absol., Ro. x. 21 [ef. Meyer]; Tit. 
ii. 9, (Achill. Tat. 5, 27). Pass. ἀντιλέγομαι I am dis- 
puted, assent or compliance is refused me, (W. § 39, 1): 
Lk. ii. 34; Acts xxviii. 22.* 

ἀντί-ληψις [LT Tr WH -λημψις; see M, μ]; -εως, 7, (ἀντι- 
λαμβάνομαι), in prof. auth. mutual acceptance (Thue. 1, 
120), a laying hold of, apprehension, perception, objection 
of a disputant, ete. In bibl. speech aid, help, (Ps. xxi. 
20 [ef. vs. 1]; 1 Esdr. viii. 27; Sir. xi. 12; li. 7; 2 Mace. 
xv. 7, ete.); plur., 1 Co. xii. 28, the ministrations of 
the deacons, who have care of the poor and the sick.* 

ἀντιλογία,-ας, ἡ, (ἀντίλογος, and this fr. ἀντιλέγω), [fr. 
Hdt. down]; 1. gainsaying, contradiction: Heb. vii. 7; 
with the added notion of strife, Heb. vi. 16, (Ex. xviii. 
16; Deut. xix.17,ete.). 2. opposition in act, [this sense 
is disputed by some, e. g. Liin. on Heb. as below, Mey. 
on Ro. x. 21 (see ἀντιλέγω); contra ef. Fritzsche on Ro. 
le.]: Heb. xii. 3; rebellion, Jude 11, (Prov. xvii. 11).* 

ἀντι-λοιδορέω -ὥ: [impf. avreAorddpovr ; to revile in turn, 
to retort railing: 1 Pet. ii. 23. (Leian. conviv. 40; Plut. 
Anton. 42; [de inimic. util. § 5].)* 

ἀντί-λυτρον, -ov, τό, whatis given in exchange for another 
as the price of his redemption, ransom: 1 Tim. ii. 6. (An 
uncert. translator in Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9; Orph. lith. 587; 
[cf. W. 25].)* 

ἀντι-μετρέω, -@: fut. pass. ἀντιμετρηθήσομαι ; to measure 
back, measure in return: Mt. vii. 2 Rec.; Lk. vi. 38 [L. 
mrg. WH mrg. μετρέω], (in a proverbial phrase, i. q. to 
repay; Leian. amor. ec. 19).* 

ἀντιμισθία, -as, ἡ, (ἀντίμισθος remunerating) a re- 
ward given in compensation, requital, recompense; a. in 
a good sense: 2 Co. vi. 13 (τὴν αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν πλατύν- 
θητε καὶ ὑμεῖς, a concise expression for Be ye also en- 
larged i. e. enlarge your hearts, just as I have done (vs. 
11), that so ye may recompense me, —for τὸ αὐτό, 6 ἐστιν 
ἀντιμισθία; cf. W. 530 (493), and § 66, 1 b.; [B. 190 
(164); 396 (339)]). b. in a bad sense: Ro. i. 27. 
(Found besides only in Theoph. Ant.; Clem. Al.; [Clem. 
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 3.5; 9, 7; 11, 6], and other Fathers. )* 

*Avrioxeva, -as, 7, Antioch, the name (derived fr. various 
monarchs) of several Asiatic cities, two of which are men- 
1. The most celebrated of all, 
and the capital of Syria, was situated on the river Oron- 
tes, founded by Seleucus [I. sometimes (cf. Suidas s. v. 


᾿Αντιοχεύς 


Σέλευκος, col. 3277 b. ed. Gaisf.) called] Nicanor [else- 
where (cf. id. col. 2137 Ὁ. s. v. Κολασσαεύς) son of Ni- 
canor; but commonly Nicator (cf. Appian de rebus 
Syr. § 57; Spanh. de numis. diss. vii. § 3, vol. i. p. 413) ], 
and named in honor of his father Antiochus. Many 
Ἕλληνισταί, Greek-Jews, lived in it; and there those 
who professed the name of Christ were first called 
Christians : Acts xi. 19 sqq.; xiii. 1; xiv. 26; xv. 22 sqq.; 
Gal. ii. 11; ef. Reuss in Schenkel i. 141 sq.; [BB. DD. 
s.v.; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 121-126; also the 
latter in the Dict. of Geogr. 5. v.; Renan, Les Apotres, 
ch. xii. ]. 2. A city of Phrygia, but called in Acts 
xiii. 14 Antioch of Pisidia [or ace. to the erit. texts the 
Pisidian Antioch (see Πισίδιος}] because it was on the 
confines of Pisidia, (more exactly ἡ πρὸς Πισιδίᾳ, Strabo 
12, p. 577, 8): Acts xiv. 19, 21; 2 Tim. iii. 11. This 
was founded also by Seleucus Nicator, [ef. BB. DD. s. v.; 
Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 168 sqq. ].* 

᾿Αντιοχεύς, -έως, 6, an Antiochian, a native of Antioch : 
Acts vi. 5.* 

ἀντι-παρέρχομαι: 2 aor. avtimapnddoy; to pass by op- 
posite to, [A. V. to pass by on the other side]: Lk. x. 31 sq. 
(where the meaning is, ‘he passed by on the side oppo- 
site to the wounded man, showing no compassion for 
him’). (Anthol. Pal. 12, 8; to come to one’s assistance 
against a thing, Sap. xvi. 10. Found besides in ecel. and 
Byzant. writ.) ἢ 

᾿Αντίπας [Τ α΄. ᾿Αντείπας, see 8. v. et, ],-a (cf. W. § 8, 1; 
[B. 20 (18)]), 6, Antipas (contr. fr. ᾿Αντίπατρος W. 103 
(97)), a Christian of Pergamum who suffered martyrdom, 
otherwise unknown: Rev. ii. 13. On the absurd inter- 
pretations of this name, ef. Diisterd. [Alf., Lee, al.] ad 
loc. Fr. Gérres in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 
1878, p. 257 sqq., endeavors to discredit the opinion 
that he was martyred, but by insufficient arguments.* 

᾿Αντιπατρίς, -ίδος, ἡ, Antipatris, a city situated between 
Joppa and Cesarea, in a very fertile region, not far 
from the coast ; formerly called Χαβαρζαβᾶ [al. Kapapoa- 
Ba (or -caBa) | (Joseph. antt. 13, 15, 1), and afterwards 
rebuilt by Herod the Great and named Antipatris in 
honor of his father Antipater (Joseph. b. j. 1, 21, 9): Acts 
xxiii. 31. Cf. Robinson, Researches ete. iii. 45 sq. ; Later 
Researches, iii. 138 sq., [also Bib. Sacr. for 1843 pp. 478— 
498; and for 1853 p. 528 sq. ].* 

ἀντι-πέραν, or (ace. to the later forms fr. Polyb. down) 
ἀντίπερα [T WH], ἀντιπέρα [L Tr; ef. B. 321; Lob. 
Path. Elem. ii. 206; Chandler § 867], adv. of place, over 
against, on the opposite shore, on the other side, witha gen. : 
Lk. viii. 26.* 

ἀντι-πίπτω; a. to fall upon, run against, [fr. Aristot. 
down]; b. to be adverse, oppose, strive against: τινί, 
Acts vii. 51. (Ex. xxvi.5; xxxvi.12ed. Compl.; Num. 
xxvii. 14; often in Polyb., Plut.)* 

ἀντι-στρατεύομαι ; 1. to make a military expedition, 
or take the field, against any one: Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 26. 
2. to oppose, war against: τινί, Ro. vii. 23. (Aristaenet. 
2, 1, 13.)* 

ἀντι-τάσσω or -ττω : [ pres. mid. ἀντιτάσσομαι ; to range 


51 


> , 
ἄντλέεω 


in battle against; mid. to oppose one’s self, resist: τινί, 
Ro. xiii. 2; Jas.iv.6; v.63; 1 Pet. v.5; ef. Prov. iii. 34. 
absol., Acts xviii. 6. (Used by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
down.) * 

ἀντί-τυπος, -ov, (τύπτω), in Grk. writ. 1. prop. a. 
actively, repelling a blow, striking back, echoing, reflecting 
light; resisting, rough, hard. b. passively, struck back, 
repelled. 2. metaph. rough, harsh, obstinate, hostile. 
In the N. T. language ἀντίτυπον as a subst. means af 
a thing formed after some pattern (τύπος [q. v- 4 a.]), 
(Germ. Abbild): Heb. ix. 24 [R. V. like in pattern). 
2. a thing resembling another, its counterpart; something 
in the Messianic times which answers to the type (see 
τύπος, 4 γ.) prefiguring it in the O. T. (Germ. Gegenbild, 
Eng. antitype), as baptism corresponds to the deluge : 
1 Pet. iii. 21 [R. V. txt. after a true likeness ].* 

ἀντίχχριστος, -ov, 6, (ἀντί against and Χριστός, like 
ἀντίθεος opposing God, in Philo de somn. 1. ii. § 27, ete., 
Justin, quaest. et resp. p. 463 c. and other Fathers; [see 
Soph. Lex. s.v., ef. Trench ὃ xxx.]), the adversary of the 
Messiah, a most pestilent being, to appear just before the 
Messiah’s advent, concerning whom the Jews had con- 
ceived diverse opinions, derived partly fr. Dan. xi. 36 
sqq-; Vii. 25; viii. 25, partly fr. Ezek. xxxviii. xxxix. 
Cf. Eisenmenger, Entdecktes Judenthum, ii. 704 sqq.; 
Gesenius in Ersch and Gruber’s Eneyel. iv. 292 sqq. 
s. v. Antichrist ; Béhmer, Die Lehre ν. Antichrist nach 
Schneckenburger, in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. vol. 
iv. p. 405 sqq. The name 6 ἀντίχριστος was formed 
perhaps by John, the only writer in the N. T. who uses 
it, [five times]; he employs it of the corrupt power and 
influence hostile to Christian interests, especially that 
which is at work in false teachers who have come from the 
bosom of the church and are engaged in disseminating 
error: 1 Jn. ii. 18 (where the meaning is, ‘what ye have 
heard concerning Antichrist, as about to make his ap- 
pearance just before the return of Christ, is now fulfilled 
in the many false teachers, most worthy to be called 
antichrists,’ [on the om. of the art. ef. B. 89 (78) }); 1 Jn. 
iv. 3; and of the false teachers themselves, 1 Jn. ii. 22; 2 
Jn. 7. In Paul and the Rey. the idea but not thename 
of Antichrist is found; yet the conception differs from 
that of John. For Paul teaches that Antichrist will be an 
individual man [cf. B. D. as below], of the very worst 
character (τὸν ἄνθρ. τῆς ἁμαρτίας; see ἁμαρτία, 1), in- 
stigated by the devil to try to palm himself off as God: 
2 Th. ii. 3-10. The author of the Apocalypse discovers 
the power of Antichrist in the sway of imperial Rome, 
and his person in the Emperor Nero, soon to return 
from the dead: Rey. xiii. and xvii. (Often in ecel. 
writ.) [See B. D.s.v. (Am. ed. for additional reff.), also 
Β. Ὁ. 5. v. Thess. 2d Ep. to the; Kahler in Herzog ed. 
2, i. 446 sq.; Westcott, Epp. of St. John, pp. 68, 89.|* 

ἀντλέω, -@; 1 aor. ἤντλησα ; pb. ἤντληκα ; (fr. ὁ ἄντλος, 
or τὸ ἄντλον, bilge-water, [or rather, the place in the hold 
where it settles, Eustath. com. in Hom. 1728, 58 ὁ τόπος 
ἔνθα ὕδωρ συρρέει, τό τε ἄνωθεν καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἁρμονιῶν })};} 8. 
prop. to draw out a ship’s bilge-water, to bale or pump 


ἄντλημα ξ 


out. b. univ. to draw water: Jn. ii. 8; iv. 15; ὕδωρ, 
Jn. ii. 9; iv. 7. (Gen. xxiv. 18, 20; Ex. ii. 16, 19; Is. 
xii. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

ἄντλημα, -ros, τό; a. prop. what is drawn, (Dioscor. 4, 
64). b. the act of drawing water, (Plut. mor. [de solert. 
an. 21,1] p. 974 6. [but this example belongs rather under 
9.7). σ. a@ thing to draw with [ef. W. 93 (89)], bucket 
and rope let down into a well: Jn. iv. 11.* 

ἀντοφθαλμέω, -ὦὥ ; (ἀντόφθαλμος looking in the eye) ; 
1. prop. to look against or straight at. 2. metaph. to 
bear up against, withstand : τῷ ἀνέμῳ, of a ship, [ef. our 
‘look the wind in the eye,’ ‘face’ (R. V.) the wind]: Acts 
xxvil.15. (Sap. xii. 14; often in Polyb.; in eccl. writ.)* 

ἄνυδρος, -ov, (a priv. and ὕδωρ), without water: πηγαί, 
2 Pet. 11. 17; τόποι, desert places, Mt. xii. 43 ; Lk. xi. 24, 
(ἡ ἄνυδρος the desert, Is. xliii. 19; Hdt. 3, 4, ete. ; in Sept. 
often γῆ ἄνυδρος), [desert places were believed to be the 
haunts of demons; see Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv. 14 (in Sept.), 
and Gesen. or Alex. on the former pass.; cf. further, 
Bar. iv. 35; Tob. viii. 3; 4 Mace. xviii. 8; (Enoch x. 4) ; 
Rev. xviii. 2; ef. ἃ. Zeitschr. ἃ. deutsch. morgenl. Gesell. 
xxi. 609]; νεφέλαι, waterless clouds (Vere. georg. 3, 197 
sq. arida nubila), which promise rain but yield none, 
Jude 12. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 

ἀν-υπόκριτος, -ov, (a priv. and ὑποκρίνομαι), unfeigned, 
undisguised: Ro. xii. 9; 2 Co. vi. 6; 1 Tim. i.5; 2 Tim. 
i. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22; Jas. iii. 17. (Sap. v.19; xviii. 16. Not 
found in prof. auth., except the adv. ἀνυποκρίτως in 
Antonin. 8, 5.)* 

ἀνυπότακτος, -ov, (a priv. and ὑποτάσσω) ; 1. [pas- 
sively] not made subject, unsubjected : Heb. ii. 8, [Artem. 
oneir. 2, 30]. 2. [actively] that cannot be subjected 
to control, disobedient, unruly, refractory: 1 Tim.i.9 ; Tit. 
i. 6, 10, ([Epict. 2, 10,1; 4, 1, 161; Philo, quis rer. div. 
her. § 1]; διήγησις ἀνυπ. a narrative which the reader 
cannot classify, i. 6. confused, Polyb. 3, 36, 4; 3,38,4; 5, 
21, 4).* 

ἄνω, adv., [fr. Hom. down]; a. above, in a higher 
place, (opp. to κάτω) : Acts ii. 19; with the article, ὁ, ἡ, 
τὸ ἄνω : Gal. iv. 26 (ἡ ἄνω Ἱερουσαλήμ the upper i. 6. the 
heavenly Jerusalem) ; Phil. iii. 14 (ἡ ἄνω κλῆσις the call- 
ing made in heaven, equiv. to ἐπουράνιος, Heb. iii. 1); 
the neut. plur. ra ἄνω as subst., heavenly things, Col. iii. 
1 sq.; ἐκ τῶν ἄνω from heaven, Jn. viii. 23. ἕως ἄνω, Jn. 
ii. 7 (up to the brim). Ὁ. upwards, up, on high: In. xi. 
41 (αἴρω) ; Heb. xii. 15 (ἄνω φύει)." 

ἀνώγαιον and ἀνώγεον, see under ἀνάγαιον. 

ἄνωθεν, (dvw),adv.; a. from above, froma higher place: 
ἀπὸ ἄνωθεν (W. § 50, 7 N. 1), Mt. xxvii. 51 ['Tdf. om. 
ἀπό] ; Mk. xv. 38; ἐκ τῶν ἄνωθεν from the upper part, 
from the top, Jn. xix. 23. Often (also in Grk. writ.) 
used of things which come from heaven, or from God as 
dwelling in heaven: Jn. iii. 31; xix.11; Jas. i. 173 iii. 
15,17. Ὁ. from the first: Lk. i. 3; then, from the begin- 
ning on, from the very first: Acts xxvi.5. Hence ο. 
anew, over again, indicating repetition, (a use some- 
what rare, but wrongly denied by many [Mey. among 
them ; cf. his comm. on Jn. and Gal. as below]) : Jn. iii. 3, 


2 


ἄξιος 


7 ἄν. γεννηθῆναι, where others explain it from above, i. e. 
from heaven. But, ace. to this explanation, Nicodemus 
ought to have wondered how it was possible for any one 
to be born from heaven; but this he did not say; [ef. 
Westcott, Com. on Jn. p.63]. Of the repetition of phys- 
ical birth, we read in Artem. oneir. 1, 13 (14) p. 18 
[i. p. 26 ed. Reiff] (ἀνδρὶ) ἔτι τῷ ἔχοντι ἔγκυον γυναῖκα 
σημαίνει παῖδα αὐτῷ γεννήσεσθαι ὅμοιον κατὰ πάντα. οὕτω 
yap ἄνωθεν αὐτὸς δόξειε γεννᾶσθαι; cf. Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 
3 φιλίαν ἄνωθεν ποιεῖσθαι, where a little before stands 
προτέρα φιλία; add, Martyr. Polye. 1, 1; [also Socrates 
in Stob. flor. exxiv. 41, iv. 135 ed. Meineke (iii. 438 ed. 
Gaisf.); Harpocration, Lex. s. vv. ἀναδικάσασθαι, ἀναθέ- 
σθαι, ἀναποδιζόμενα, ἀνασύνταξις ; Canon. apost. 46 (al. 39, 
Coteler. patr. apost. opp. i. 444); Pseudo-Basil, de bapt. 
1, 2, 7 (iii. 1537); Origen in Joann. t. xx. ο. 12 (opp. iv. 
322 ο. Dela Rue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fourth 
Gospel, etc. (Boston 1880) p. 34 sq.]. πάλιν ἄνωθεν (on 
this combination of synonymous words ef. Kiihner § 534, 
1; [Jelf § 777, 1]; Grimm on Sap. xix. 5 (6)): Gal. iv. 9 
(again, since ye were in bondage once before).* 

ἀνωτερικός, -1), -όν, (ἀνώτερος), Upper: τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, 
Acts xix. 1 (i.e. the part of Asia Minor more remote 
from the Mediterranean, farther east). (The word is 
used by [Hippocr. and] Galen.)* 

ἀνώτερος, -έρα, -epov, (compar. fr. ἄνω, cf. κατώτερος, 
see W. §11, 2 ον; [B. 28 (24 sq.)]), higher. ‘The 
neut. ἀνώτερον as ady., higher; a. of motion, to a higher 
place, (up higher): Lk. xiv.10. Ὄ. of rest, in a higher 
place, above i.e. in the immediately preceding part of 
the passage quoted, Heb. x. 8. Similarly Polyb. 3, 1, 1 
τρίτῃ ἀνώτερον βίβλῳ. (In Lev. xi. 21, with gen.)* 

ἀν-ωφελής, -€s, (a priv. and ὄφελος) ; fr. Aeschyl. down; 
unprofitable, useless: Tit. iii. 9. Neut. as subst. in Heb. 
vii. 18 (διὰ τὸ αὐτῆς ἀνωφελές on account of its unprofita- 
bleness).* 

ἀξίνη, -ης, ἡ, ([perh. fr.] ἄγνυμι, fut. ἄξω, to break), an 
axe: Lk. iii. 9; Mt.iii.10. (As old as Hom. and Hat.)* 

ἄξιος, -a, -ov, (fr. ἄγω, ἄξω ; therefore prop. drawing 
down the scale; hence) a. weighing, having weight; 
with a gen. having the weight of (weighing as much as) 
another thing, of like value, worth as much: Bods ἄξιος, 
Hom. II. 23, 885; with gen. of price [W. 206 (194)], 
as ἄξ. δέκα μνῶν, common in Attic writ.; πᾶν τίμιον οὐκ 
ἄξιον αὐτῆς (σοφίας) ἐστι, Prov. iii. 15; viii. 11; οὐκ 
ἔστι σταθμὸς πᾶς ἄξιος ἐγκρατοῦς ψυχῆς, Sir. xxvi. 15; 
οὐκ ἄξια πρὸς τ. δόξαν are of no weight in comparison 
with the glory, i. 6. are not to be put on an equality 
with the glory, Ro. viii. 18; ef. Fritzsche ad loc. and 
W. 405 (378); [B. 540 (292)]. Ὁ. befitting, congru- 
ous, corresponding, τινός, to a thing: τῆς μετανοίας, Mt. 
iii. 8; Lk. iii. 8; Acts xxvi. 20; ἄξια ὧν ἐπράξαμεν, Lk. 
xxiii. 41. ἄξιόν ἐστι it is befitting: a. it is meet, 2 Th. 
i. 3 (4 Mace. xvii. 8); B. it is worth the while, foll. by 
τοῦ with ace. and inf., 1 Co. xvi. 4;— (in both senses very 
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hdt. down, and often 
with ἐστί omitted). c. of one who has merited any- 
thing, worthy, — both in a good reference and a bad; 


ἀξιόω 


a. ἰπ ἃ good sense; with a gen. of the thing: Mt. x. 
10; Lk. vii.4; [x. 7]; Acts xiii. 46; 1 Tim.i. 15; iv. 9; 
v. 18; vi.1. foll. by the aor. inf.: Lk. xv. 19, 21; Acts 
xiii. 25; Rev. iv. 11; v. 2,4,9,12; foll. by ἵνα : Jn. i. 27 
(wa λύσω, a construction somewhat rare; cf. Dem. pro 
cor. p. 279, 9 ἀξιοῦν, iva βοηθήσῃ [ (dubious) ; see s. v. iva, 
Il. 2 init. and c.]) ; foll. by ὅς with a finite verb (like Lat. 
dignus, qui): Lk. vii. 4 [B. 229 (198)]. It stands alone, 
but so that the context makes it plain of what one is 
said to be worthy: Mt. x. 11 (to lodge with); Mt. x. 13 
(sc. τῆς εἰρήνης) ; Mt. xxii. 8 (se. of the favor of an invi- 
tation); Rev. iii. 4 (sc. to walk with me, clothed in 
white). with a gen. of the person, — worthy of one’s 
fellowship, and of the blessings connected with it: Mt. 
x. 37 sq-; Heb. xi. 38, (rod θεοῦ, Sap. iii.5; Ignat. ad 
Eph. 2). β. ina bad sense; with a gen. of the thing: 
πληγῶν, Lk. xii. 48; θανάτου, Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts [xxiii 
29]; xxv. 11, [25]; xxvi. 31; Ro. i. 32; absol.: Rev. 
xvi. 6 (se. to drink blood).* 

ἀξιόω, -@; impf. ἠξίουν ; 1 aor. ἠξίωσα: Pass., pf. ἠξίω- 
pac; 1 fut. ἀξιωθήσομαι; (ἄξιος) ; as in Grk. writ. a. 
to think meet, fil, right: foll. by an inf., Acts xv. 38; 
XXViii. 22. Ὁ. to judge worthy, deem deserving: twa 
with an inf. of the object, Lk. vii. 7; τινά τινος, 2 Th. i. 
11; pass. with gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. v. 17; Heb. iii. 
3; x.29. [Come.: xar-aftdo. | * 

ἀξίως, adv., suitably; worthily, in a manner worthy of: 
with the gen., Ro. xvi. 2; Phil. i. 27; Col.i.10; 1 Th. 
ii. 12; Eph.iv.1; 3Jn.6. [From Soph. down.]* 

ἀ-όρατος, -ov, (dpdw), either, not seen i. 6. unseen, or 
that cannot be seen i. e. invisible. In the latter sense 
of God in Col. i. 15; 1 Tim.i.17; Heb. xi. 27; τὰ ἀόρατα 
αὐτοῦ his (God’s) invisible nature [perfections], Ro. i. 
20; τὰ ὁρατὰ καὶ τὰ ἀόρατα, Col. i. 16. (Gen. i. 2; Is. 
xlv. 3; 2 Macc. ix.5; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.)* 

ἀπ-αγγέλλω ; impf. ἀπήγγελλον ; fut. ἀπαγγελῶ; 1 aor. 
ἀπήγγειλα; 2 aor. pass. ἀπηγγέλην (Lk. viii. 20); [fr. 
Hom. down]; 1. ἀπό twos to bring tidings (froma 
person or thing), bring word, report: Jn. iv. 51 [RG L 
Tr br.]; Acts iv. 23; v. 22; [xv. 27]; with dat. of the pers., 
Mt. ii. 8; xiv. 12; xxviii. 8, [8 (9) Rec.], 10; Mk. xvi. 
[10], 13; Acts v. 25; xi. 13; [xxiii 16,19]; τινί τι, [Mt. 
xi. 4; xxviii. 11 (here Tdf. dvayy.)]; Mk. [v.19 (L mrg. 
R Ὁ dvayy.)]; vi. 30; Lk. [vii. 22; ix. 36]; xiv. 21; xxiv. 
9; Acts xi. 13; [xii. 17; xvi. 381, T Tr WH; xxiii. 17]; 
τινί foll. by ὅτι, Lk. xviii. 37; [Jn. xx. 18 RG; foll. by 
πῶς, Lk. viii. 36]; τὶ πρός twa, Acts xvi. 36; τινὶ περί 
twos, Lk. vii. 18; xiii. 1; τὶ περί τινος, Acts xxviii. 21; 
[foll. by λέγων and direct disc., Acts xxii. 26]; foll. by 
ace. with inf., Acts xii. 14; εἰς with ace. of place, to 
carry tidings to a place, Mk. v. 14 (Rec. ἀνήγγ.); Lk. 
viii. 34; with addition of an acc. of the thing announced, 
Mt. viii. 33, (Xen. an. 6, 2 (4), 25; Joseph. antt. 5, 11, 
3; εἰς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, Am. iv. 13 Sept.). 2. to pro- 
claim (ἀπό, because what one announces he openly lays, 
as it were, off from himself, οἵ. Germ. ab kiindigen), to 


5 


ΠῚ 
vo 


ἀπαλλάσσω 


i. 2sq.; by teaching and commanding, τινί τι, Mt. viii. 
33; τινί, with inf., Acts xxvi. 20; [xvii. 30 TWHTr 
mrg.]; by avowing and praising, Lk. viii. 47; τινί τι, 
Heb. ii. 12 (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 23 [yet Sept. dpyqcopar])) ; 
(Mt. xii. 18]; foll. by ὅτι, 1 Co. xiv. 25.* 

ἀπ-άγχω [cf. Lat. angustus, anzius, Eng. anguish, ete.; 
Curtius § 166]: 1 aor. mid. ἀπηγξάμην ; to throttle, stran- 
gle, in order to put out of the way (ἀπό away, cf. ἀπο- 
κτείνω to kill off), Hom. Od. 19, 230; mid. to hang one’s 
self, to end one’s life by hanging: Mt. xxvii. 5. (2S. xvii. 
23; Tob. iii. 10; in Attic from Aeschy]. down.)* 

ἀπ-άγω; [impf. ἀπῆγον (Lk. xxiii. 26 Tr mre. WH 
mrg.)]; 2 aor. ἀπήγαγον; Pass., [pres. ἀπάγομαι]; 1 aor. 
annxOnv; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead away: Lk. xiii. 15 
(se. ἀπὸ τῆς φάτνης); Acts xxiii. 10 (Lehm. [ed. min.]); 
17 (se. hence); xxiv. 7 [RG] (away, ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ἡμῶν) ; 
1 Co. xii. 2 (led astray πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα). Used esp. of 
those led off to trial, prison, punishment: Mt. xxvi. 57; 
xxvii. 2,31; Mk. xiv. 44,53; χν. 16; Lk. xxi.12 (T Tr 
WH); [xxii. 66 T Tr WH]; xxiii. 26; Jn. xviii. 13 RG 
[ἤγαγον LT Tr WH]; xix. 16 Rec.; Acts xii. 19; (so 
also in Grk. writ.). Used of a way leading to a certain 
end: Mt. vii. 13, 14 (eis τὴν ἀπώλειαν. εἰς τὴν ζωήν). 
[Comp. : συν-απάγω.] " 

ἀπαίδευτος, -ov, (παιδεύω), without instruction and dis- 
cipline, uneducated, ignorant, rude, [W. 96 (92)]: ζητή- 
σεις, stupid questions, 2 Tim. ii. 23. (In classies fr. 
(Eurip.,] Xen. down; Sept.; Joseph.)* 

ἀπ-αίρω: 1 aor. pass. ἀπήρθην; to lift off, take or carry 
away; pass., ἀπό twos to be taken away from any one: 
Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 20; Lk. v.35. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
down.) * 

ἀπ-αιτέω, -; to ask*back, demand back, exact something 
due (Sir. xx. 15 (14) σήμερον δανειεῖ καὶ αὔριον ἀπαιτήσει): 
Lk. vi. 30; τὴν ψυχήν cov ἀπαιτοῦσιν [Tr WH αἰτοῦσιν] 
thy soul, intrusted to thee by God for a time, is demanded 
back, Lk. xii. 20, (Sap. xv. 8 τὸ τῆς Ψυχῆς ἀπαιτηθεὶς 
χρέος). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 

ἀπ-αλγέω, -ὦ : [pf. ptep. ἀπηλγηκώς]}; to cease to feel 
pain or grief; a. to bear troubles with greater equa- 
nimity, cease to feel pain at: Thue. 2, 61 ete. b. to 
become callous, insensible to pain, apathetic : so those wha 
have become insensible to truth and honor and shame 
are called ἀπηλγηκότες [A. V. past feeling] in Eph. iv. 
19. (Polyb. 1, 35, 5 ἀπηλγηκυίας ψυχάς dispirited and 
useless for war, [ef. Polyb. 16, 12, 7].)* 

ἀπ-αλλάσσω: 1 aor. ἀπήλλαξα; Pass., [pres. ἀπαλλάσ- 
σομαι]: pf. inf. ἀπηλλάχθαι; (ἀλλάσσω to change; ἀπό, 
86. τινός) ; com. in Grk. writ.; to remove, release; pass. 
to be removed, to depart: am’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους, Acts xix. 
12 (Plat. Eryx. 401 ¢. εἰ αἱ νόσοι ἀπαλλαγείησαν ἐκ τῶν 
σωμάτων) ; in a transferred and esp. in a legal sense, 
ἀπό with gen. of pers., to be set free, the opponent being 
appeased and withdrawing the suit, to be quit of one: 
Lk. xii. 58, (so with a simple gen. of pers. Xen. mem. 2, 
9,6). Hence univ. to set free, deliver: τινά, Heb. ii. 15; 


make known openly, declare: univ., περί twos, 1 Th. i. 9; | (in prof. auth. the gen. of the thing freed fr. is often 
‘rut περί τ. Jn. xvi. 25 LT Tr WH); by teaching, ri, 1 Jn. | added; cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1, p. 339 sq.).* 


ἀπαλλοτριόω 


ἀπ-αλλοτριόω, -ὥ: pf. pass. ptep. ἀπηλλοτριωμένος ; to 
alienate, estrange; pass. to be rendered ἀλλότριος, to be 
shut out from one’s fellowship and intimacy: τινός, Eph. 
ji. 12; iv. 18; se. rod θεοῦ, Col. i. 21, (equiv. to 74/, used 
of those who have estranged themselves fr. God, Ps. 
Ivii. (Iviii.) 4; Is. i. 4 [Ald. ete.]; Ezek. xiv. 5,7; [Test. 
xii. Patr. test. Benj. § 10]; τῶν πατρίων δογμάτων, 3 Mace. 
i. 3; ἀπαλλοτριοῦν τινα τοῦ καλῶς ἔχοντος, Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor. 14,2). (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hippoer.,] Plato down.)* 
ἁπαλός, -7, -dv, tender: of the branch of a tree, when full 
of sap, Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28. [From Hom. down. ]* 
ἀπ-αντάω, -ῶὥ : fut. ἀπαντήσω (Mk. xiv. 13; but in better 
Grk. ἀπαντήσομαι, cf. W. 83 (79); [B. 53 (46)]); 1 aor. 
ἀπήντησα; to go to meet; in past tenses, to meet: τινί, Mt. 
xxviii. 9[Τ Tr WH ὑπ-}; Mk. v. 2 RG; xiv. 13; Lk. xvii. 
12[L WHom. Tr br. dat.; T WH mrg. read in-|; Jn. iv. 
51 RG; Acts xvi. 16 [RG L]. Inamilitary sense of a 
hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 RG, as in 1 S. xxii. 17; 2 
S. i. 15; 1 Mace. xi. 15, 68 and often in Grk. writ.* 
ἀπάντησις, -ews, 7, (ἀπαντάω), α meeting; eis ἀπάντησίν 
τινος or τινι to meet one: Mt. xxv.1 RG; vs. 6; Acts 
xxviii. 15; 1 Th. iv. 17. (Polyb. 5, 26,8; Diod. 18, 59; 
very often in Sept. equiv. to ΠΕΡ) [cf. W. 807.) * 
ἅπαξ, adv., once, one time, [fr. ΠΣ; down]; a. univ.: 
2 Co. xi. 25; Heb. ix. 26 sq.; 1 Pet. iii. 20 Rec.; ἔτι 
ἅπαξ, Heb. xii. 26 sq. ; ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, Heb. ix. 7, [Hat. 
2, 59, ete.]. Ὁ. like Lat. semel, used of what is so done 
as to be of perpetual validity and never need repetition, 
once for all: Heb.vi.4; x.2; 1 Pet. iii. 18; Jude vss. 3, 
5. 6. καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς indicates a definite number [the 
double καί emphasizing the repetition, both once and 
again i. 6.1 twice: 1 Th.ii.18; Phil. iv. 16; on the other 
hand, ἅπαξ καὶ δίς means [once and again i. e.] several 
times, repeatedly: Neh. xiii. 20; 1 Mace. iii. 30. Cf. 
Schott on 1 Th. ii. 18, p. 86; [Meyer on Phil. 1. c.].* 
ἀ-παρά-βατος, -ov, (wapaSaivw), fr. the phrase παραβαί- 
ve νόμον to transgress i. 6. to violate, signifying either 
unviolated, or not to be violated, inviolable: ἱερωσύνη un- 
changeable and therefore not liable to pass to a successor, 
Heb. vii. 24; cf. Bleek and Delitzsch ad loc. (A later 
word, ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313; in Joseph., Plut., al.)* 
ἀπαρα-σκεύαστος, -ov, (παρασκευάζω), unprepared : 2 Co. 
ix. 4. (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 15; an. 1, 1, 6 [var.]; 2,3, 21; 
Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 41; Hdian. 3, 9,19 [(11) ed. Bekk.]; 
adv. ἀπαρασκευάστως, [ Aristot. rhet. Alex. 9 p. 1480" 3]; 
Clem. hom. 32, 15.) * 
ἀπ-αρνέομαι, -οὔμαι : depon. verb; fut. ἀπαρνήσομαι: 1 
aor. ἀπηρνησάμην ; 1 fut. pass. ἀπαρνηθήσομαι with a pass. 
signif. (Lk. xii. 9, as in Soph. Phil. 527, [ef. B. 53 (46)]); 
to deny (ab nego): τινά, to affirm that one has no acquaint- 
ance or connection with him; of Peter denying Christ : 
Mt. xxvi. 34 sq. 75; Mk. xiv. 30 sq. 72; [Lk. xxii. 61]; 
Jn. xiii. 38 RGLmrg.; more fully ἀπ. μὴ εἰδέναι Ἰησοῦν, 
LK. xxii. 34 (L Tr WH om. μή, concerning which ef. 
Kuhner ii. p. 761; [Jelf § 749, 1; W. § 65, 2 8.; B. 355 
(305)]). ἑαυτόν to forget one’s self, lose sizht of one’s 
self and one’s own interests: Mt. xvi. 24; Mk. viii. 34; 
Lk. ix. 23 R WH mrg.* 


54 


“ 
απαᾶς 


ἀπάρτι [so Tdf. in Jn., T and Tr in Βον.7, or rather ἀπ᾿ 
ἄρτι (cf. W. § 5, 2 p. 45, and 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275), 
Lipsius p. 127]; see ἄρτι), adv., from now, henceforth: 
Mt. xxiii. 39; xxvi. 29, 64 (in Lk. xxii. 69 ἀπὸ τοῦ viv); 
Jn. i. 51 (52) Rec. ; xiii. 19; xiv. 7; Rev. xiv. 13 (where 
connect ἀπ᾽ ἄρτι with μακάριοι). In the Grk. of the O.T. it 
is not found (for the Sept. render ΤΠ} by ἀπὸ τοῦ viv), 
and scarcely [yet L. and S. cite Arstph. Pl. 388; Plat. 
Com. Sop. 10] in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. 
For the similar term which the classic writ. employ is 
to be written as one word, and oxytone (viz. amapri), 
and has a different signif. (viz. completely, exactly) ; cf. 
Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. i. p. 296; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
20 sq.* 

ἀπαρτισμός, -ov, 6, (ἀπαρτίζω to finish, complete), com- 
pletion: Lk. xiv. 28. Found besides only in Dion. Hal. 
de comp. verb. ο. 24; [Apollon. Dyse. de adv. p. 532, 7, 
al.; cf. W. p. 24].* 

ἀπ-αρχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. ἀπάρχομαι : a. to offer firstlings 
or first-fruits; ὁ. to take away the first-fruits; cf. ἀπό in 
ἀποδεκατόω), in Sept. generally equiv. to Mw) ; the first- 
Jruits of the productions of the earth (both those in a 
natural state and those prepared for use by hand), which 
were offered to God; ef. Win. R WB. s. ν. Erstlinge, 
[BB.DD. s. v. First-fruits]: ἡ ἀπαρχή sc. rod φυράματος, 
the first portion of the dough, from which sacred loaves 
were to be prepared (Num. xv. 19-21), Ro. xi. 16. 
Hence, in a transferred use, employed a. of persons 
consecrated to God, leading the rest in time: ἀπ. τῆς 
’Ayaias the first person in Achaia to enroll himself as a 
Christian, 1 Co. xvi. 15; with εἰς Χριστόν added, Ro. 
xvi. 5; with a reference to the moral creation effected 
by Christianity all the Christians of that age are called 
ἀπαρχήτις (a kind of first-fruits) τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ κτισμάτων, 
Jas. i. 18 (see Huther ad loc.), [noteworthy is εἵλατο ὑμᾶς ὁ 
θεὸς ἀπαρχήν ete. as first-fruits} 2 Th. ii. 13 L Tr mre. 
WH mrg.; Christ is called ἀπ. τῶν κεκοιμημένων as the 
first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep, 
1 Co. xv. 20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify 
that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is 
guaranteed ; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as 
it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the har- 
vest). b. of persons superior in excellence to others 
of the same class: so in Rev. xiv. 4 of a certain 
class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ 
beyond all others, (Schol. ad Eur. Or. 96 ἀπαρχὴ ἔλέ- 
γετο ov μόνον τὸ πρῶτον τῇ τάξει. ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ πρῶτον τῇ 
τιμῇ). 6. οἱ ἔχοντες τὴν ἀπ. τοῦ πνεύματος who have the 
first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (rod πν. 
is gen. of apposition), Ro. viii. 23; ef. what Winer § 59, 
8 a. says in opposition to those [e. g. Meyer, but see 
Weiss in ed. 6] who take τοῦ mv. as a partitive gen., 
so that oi ἔχ. τ. ἀπ. τοῦ mv. are distinguished from the 
great multitude who will receive the Spirit subsequently. 
(in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down.) * 

ἅπας, -aca, -av, (fr. ἅμα [οΥ rather 4 (Skr. sa; cf. a 
copulative), see Curtius § 598 ; Vanicek p. 972] and πᾶς; 
stronger than the simple πᾶς), [fr. Hom. down]; quite 


ἀπασπάζομαι 


all, the whole, all together, all; it is either placed before 
a subst. having the art., as Lk. iii. 21; viii. 37; xix. 37; 
or placed after, as Mk. xvi. 15 (εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἅπαντα into 
all parts of the world); Lk. iv. 6 (this dominion whole-ly 
i.e. all parts of this dominion which you see); xix. 48. 
used absolutely, —in the mase., as Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. iii. 
16 [Tf WH Trmrg. πᾶσιν] ; [iv-40 WH tst. Tr mrg.]; v. 
26; ix. 15 [WH mrg. πάντας] ; Mk. xi. 32 [Lchm. πάντες]; 
Jas. iii. 2;—in the neut., as Mt. xxviii. 11; Lk. v. 28 
[RG]; Acts ii. 44; iv. 32 [L WH Tr mrg. πάντα] ; x. 8; 
xi. 10; Eph. vi. 13; once in John viz. iv. 25 T Tr WH; 
[ἅπαντες οὗτοι, Acts ii. 7 LT; ἅπαντες ὑμεῖς, Gal. iii. 28 T 
Tr; cf. was, II. 1 fin. Rarely used by Paul; most fre- 
quently by Luke. On its occurrence, ef. Alford, Grk. 
Test. vol. ii. Proleg. p. 81; Ellicott on 1 Tim. i. 16]. 

ἀπ-ασπάζομαι: 1 aor. dmnomacdpny; to salute on leav- 
ing, bid farewell, take leave of : τινά, Acts xxi. 6 L T Tr 
WH. (Himer. eclog. ex Phot. 11, p. 194.) * 

ἀπατάω.- ὥ; 1 aor. pass. ἡπατήθην ; (ἀπάτη); fr. Hom. 
down ; to cheat, deceive, bequile: τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ [RT Tr 
WH org., air. G, éavr. L WH txt.], Jas. i. 263 τινά τινι, one 
with a thing, Eph. v. 6; pass. 1 Tim.1i. 14 (where L T Tr 
WH ἐξαπατηθεῖσα). cf. Gen. iii. 13. [Comr.. ef-arataw.]* 

ἀπάτη, -ys, ἡ. [fr- Hom. down], deceit, deceitfulness : 
Col. ii. 8; rod πλούτου, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19 ; τῆς ἀδικίας, 
2 Th. ii. 10; τῆς ἁμαρτίας, Heb. iii. 13; ai ἐπιθυμίαι τῆς 
ἀπάτης the lusts excited by deceit, i.e. by deceitful influ- 
ences seducing to sin, Eph. iv. 22, (others, ‘deceitful 
lusts’; but cf. Mey. ad loc.). Plur. ἀπάται: 2 Pet. ii. 13 
(where L Tr txt. WH mrg. ἐν ἀγάπαις), by a paragram 
(or verbal play) applied to the agapae or love-feasts (cf. 
ἀγάπη, 2), because these were transformed by base men 
into seductive revels.* 

ἀπάτωρ, -opos, 6, 7, (πατήρ), a word which has almost 
the same variety of senses as ἀμήτωρ, q.v-; [fr. Soph. 
down]; [without father i. e.] whose father is not recorded 
in the genealogies: Heb. vii. 3.* 

ἀπ-αύγασμα, -ros, τό, (fr. ἀπαυγάζω to emit brightness, 
and this fr. αὐγή brightness; cf. drockiacpa, ἀπείκασμα, 
ἀπεικόνισμα, ἀπήχημα), reflected brightness: Christ is 
called in Heb. i. 3 ἀπαύγ. τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ, inasmuch 
as he perfectly reflects the majesty of God; so that the 
same thing is declared here of Christ metaphysically, 
which he says of himself in an ethical sense in Jn. xii. 
45 (xiv. 9): 6 θεωρῶν ἐμὲ θεωρεῖ τὸν πέμψαντά pe. (Sap. 
vii. 26 ; Philo, mund. opif. § 51; plant. Noé § 12; de con- 
cup. ὃ 11; and often in eccl. writ.; see more fully in 
Grimm on Sap.1.c., p. 161 54.) [Some interpreters still 
adhere to the signif. effulgence or radiance (as distin- 
guished from refulgence or reflection), see Kurtz ad 
loc. ; Soph. Lex. s. v.; Cremer s. y.]* 

ἀπ-εῖδον, (ἀπό and εἶδον, 2 aor. of obsol. εἴδω), serves as 
2 aor. of ἀφοράω. (cf. Germ. ab sehen) ; 1. to look 
away from one thing and at another. 2. to look at 
from somewhere, either from a distance or froma certain 
present condition of things; to perceive: ὡς ἂν ἀπίδω (L 
T Tr WH aide [see ἀφεῖδον}) τὰ περὶ ἐμέ as soon as I 
shall have seen what issue my affairs will have [A. V. 


5d 


> , 
ἀπείιρᾶστος 


how it will go with me], Phil. ii. 23. 
5, etc.) * 

ἀπείθεια [ WH -θία, exc. in Heb. as below (see 1, t)],-as, 
ἡ; (ἀπειθής), disobedience, (Jerome, inobedientia), obsti- 
nacy, and in the N.T. particularly obstinate opposition to 
the divine will: Ro. xi. 30, 32; Heb. iv. 6,11; υἱοὶ τ. ἀπει- 
θείας, those who are animated by this obstinacy (see 
vids, 2), used of the Gentiles: Eph. ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii. 
6 [RGLbr.]. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5; Plut., al.) * 

ἀπειθέω, -ὦ; impf. ἠπείθουν; 1 aor. ἠπείθησα: to be ἀπειθής 
(ᾳ V-); not to allow one’s self to be persuaded ; not to com- 
ply with; a. to refuse or withhold belief (in Christ, in 
the gospel; opp. to πιστεύω) : τῷ υἱῷ, In. iii. 36; τῷ 
λόγῳ, 1 Pet. ii. 8; iii. 1; absol. of those who reject the 
gospel, [R. V. to be disobedient; cf. b.]: Acts xiv. 2; 
xvii. 5 [Rec.]; xix. 9; Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 7(T Tr WH 
ἀπιστοῦσιν). b. to refuse belief and obedience: with dat. 
of thing or of pers., Ro. ii. 8 (τῇ ἀληθείᾳν ; xi. 30 sq. (τῷ 
6e@) ; 1 Pet.iv. 17; absol., Ro. x. 21 (Is. lxv. 2) ; Heb. iii. 
18; xi. 31; 1 Pet. iii. 20. (In Sept. com. equiv. to 179, 
7D; in Grk. writ. often fr. Aeschyl. Ag. 1049 down; in 
Hom. et al. ἀπιθεῖν.) * 

ἀπειθής, -€s, gen. -ods, (πείθομαι), impersuasible, uncom- 
pliant, contumacious, [A. V. disobedient]: absol., Lk. i. 
17; Tit.i.16; iii. 3; τινί, 2 Tim. 111. 2; Ro. i. 30; Acts 
xxvi. 19. (Deut. xxi. 18; Num. xx. 10; Is. xxx. 9; 
Zech. vii. 12; in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down; [in Theogn. 
1235 actively not persuasive].) * 

ἀπειλέω, -ῶ : impf. ἠπείλουν ; 1 aor. mid. ἠπειλησάμην; 
to threaten, menace: 1 Pet. ii. 23; in mid., ace. to later 
Grk. usage ([App. bell. civ. 3, 29]; Polyaen. 7, 35, 2), 
actively [B. 54 (47)]: Acts iv. 17 (ἀπειλῇ [L T Tr WH 
om.] ἀπειλεῖσθαι, with dat. of pers. foll. by μή with inf., 
with sternest threats to forbid one to ete., W. ὃ 54, 3; 
[B. 183 (159)]). (From Hom. down.) [Comp.: προσ- 
arrethew. | * 

ἀπειλή, -ῆς, ἡ. @ threatening, threat: Acts iv. 17 R G (ef. 
ἀπειλέω), 29; ix.1; Eph. vi. 9. (From Hom. down.) * 

ἄπ-ειμι ; (εἰμί to be); [fr. Hom. down]; to be away, be 
absent: 1 Co. v. 8; 2 Co. x. 1,113 xiii. 2,10; Col. ii. 5; 
Phil. i. 27; [in all cases exe. Col. 1. 6. opp. to πάρειμι]. " 

ἄπ-ειμι : impf. 3 pers. plur. ἀπήεσαν ; (εἶμι to go); [fr. 
Hom. down]; to go away, depart: Acts xvii. 10.* 

ἀπ-εῖπον : (εἶπον, 2 aor. fr. obsol. ἔπω) ; 1. to speak 
out, set forth, declare, (Hom. Il. 7, 416 ἀγγελίην ἀπέειπεν, 
9, 309 τὸν μῦθον ἀποειπεῖν). 2. to forbid: 1 K. xi. 2, 
and in Attic writ. 3. to give up, renounce: with ace. 
of the thing, Job x. 3 (for OND), and often in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down. In the same sense 1 aor. mid. ἀπειπάμην, 
2 Co. iv. 2 [see WH. App. p. 164], (cf. αἰσχύνη, 1); so 
too in Hdt.1, 59; 5, 56; 7,14, [etc.], and the later writ. 
fr. Polyb. down.* 

drrel(pac-tos, -ov, (πειράζω), as well untempted as un- 
temptable: ἀπείραστος κακῶν that cannot be tempted by 
evil, not liable to temptation to sin, Jas. i. 13; cf. the 
full remarks on this pass. in W. § 30, 4 [ef. 8. 16, 3 a.; B. 
170 (148)]. (Joseph. b. 1. 5, 9,3; 7, 8, 1, and ecel. writ 
The Greeks said ἀπείρατος. fr. retpaw.) * 


(In Sept., Jon. iv. 


ἄπειρος 


ἄπειρος, -ον, (πεῖρα trial, experience), inexperienced in. 
without experience of, with gen. of the thing (as in Grk. 
writ.) : Heb. v.18. [(Pind. and Hdt. down.)]* 

ἀπ-εκ- δέχομαι ; [impf. ἀπεξεδεχόμην] ; assiduously and 
patiently to wait for, (cf. Eng. wait it out]: absol., 1 Pet. 
iii. 20 (Ree. ἐκδέχομαι) ; τί, Ro. viii. 19, 23, 25; 1 Co. i. 
7; Gal. ν. 5 (on this pass. cf. ἐλπίς sub fin.) ; with the 
ace. of a pers., Christ in his return from heaven: Phil. 
iii. 20; Heb. ix. 28. Cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritz 
schiorum Opusce. p. 155 sq.; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. 
iv. p. 14; [Ellic. on Gal. 1. 5.1. (Searcely found out of 
the N. T.; Heliod. Aeth. 2, 35; 7, 23.)* 

Gar-ek-Stopar: 1 aor. ἀπεκδυσάμην ; 1. wholly to put 
off from one’s self (ἀπό denoting separation fr. what is 
put off): τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον, Col. iii. 9. 2. wholly 
to strip off for one’s self (for one’s own advantage), de- 
spoil, disarm: τινά, Col. ii. 15. ΟΕ. Win. De verb. comp. 
etc. Pt. iv. p. 14 sq., [esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. ii.15]. (Jo- 
seph. antt. 6, 14, 2 ἀπεκδὺς [but ed. Bekk. perexdds] τὴν 
βασιλικὴν ἐσθῆτα.) * 

ἀπ-ἐκ-δυσις, -εως, ἡ, (ἀπεκδύομαι, q.V-), a putting off; 
laying aside: Col. ii. 11. (Not found in Grk. writ.) * 

ἀπ-ελαύνω: 1 aor. ἀπήλασα; to drive away, drive off: 
Acts xviii. 16. (Com. in Grk. writ.) * 

ἀπ-ελεγμός, -00, ὁ, (ἀπελέγχω to convict, expose, refute ; 
ἔλεγμός conviction, refutation, in Sept. for ἔλεγξις), 
censure, repudiation of a thing shown to be worthless: 
ἐλθεῖν εἰς ἀπελεγμόν to be proved to be worthless, to be 
disesteemed, come into contempt [R. V. disrepute], Acts 
xix. 27. (Not used by prof. auth.)* 

ἀπ-ελεύθερος, -ov, ὁ, ἡ, @ manumitted slave, a freedman, 
(ἀπό, cf. Germ. los, [set free fr om bondage ]) : rod κυρίου, 
presented with (spiritual) freedom by the Lord, 1 Co. 
vii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) * 

᾿Απέλλης [better -λλῆς (so all edd.); see Chandler 
§§ 59, 60], -οὔ, 6, Apelles, the prop. name of a certain 
Christian: Ro. xvi. 10. (Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 
174.]* 

ἀπ-ελπίζω (Lchm. ἀφελπίζω, [ef. gram. reff. s. v. apei- 
8ov]); to despair [W. 24]: μηδὲν ἀπελπίζοντες nothing 
despairing se. of the hoped-for recompense from God the 
requiter, Lk. vi. 35, [T WH mrg. μηδένα ἀπελπ.; if this 
reading is to be tolerated it may be rendered despairing 
of noone, or even causing no one to despair (ef. the 
Jerus. Syriac). Tdf. himself seems half inclined to take 
μηδένα as neut. plur., a form thought to be not wholly un- 
precedented ; ef. Steph. Thesaur. v. col. 962]. (Is. xxix. 
19; 2 Mace. ix. 18; Sir. xxii. 21; [xxvii. 21; Judith ix. 
11]; often in Polyb. and Diod. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)* 

ἀπ-έναντι, adv., with gen. [B. 319 (273)]; 1. over 
against, opposite: tod τάφου, Mt. xxvii. 61; [τοῦ γαζοφυ- 
Aaxiov, Mk. xii. 41 Tr txt. WH mrg.]. 2. in sight of, 
before: Mt. xxi. 2 RG; xxvii. 24 (here L Tr WH txt. 
κατέναντι); Acts iii. 16; Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 
2). 3. in opposition to, against: τῶν δογμάτων Kai- 
σαρος, Acts xvii. 7. (Common in Sept. and Apocr.; 
Polyb. 1, 86, 3.)* 

ἀπέραντος, -ov, (περαίνω to go through, finish; cf. ἀμά- 


56 


ἀπέρχομαι 


pavros), that cannot be passed through, boundless, endless 5 
yeveahoyia, protracted interminably, 1 Tim. i. 4. (Job 
xxxvi. 26; 3 Macc. ii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down.) * 

ἀπερισπάστως, adv., (περισπάω, q. V-), without distrac- 
tion, without solicitude: 1 Co. vii. 35. (The adjective 
occurs in Sap. xvi. 11; Sir. xli. 1; often in Polyb. [the 
adv. in 2, 20, 10; 4,18, 6; 12, 28,4; cf. W. 463 (431)] 
and Plut.) * 

ἀ-περίττμητος, -ov, (περιτέμνω), uncircumcised ; metaph. 
ἀπερίτμητοι τῇ καρδίᾳ (Jer. ix. 26; Ezek. xliv. 7) καὶ τ. 
ὠσί (Jer. vi. 10) whose heart and ears are covered, i. e. 
whose soul and senses are closed to divine admonitions, 
obdurate, Acts vii. 51. (Often in Sept. for oy; 1 Mace. 
i. 48; ii. 46; [Philo de migr. Abr. $39]; Plut. am. 
prol. 3.) * 

ἀπ-έρχομαι ; fut. ἀπελεύσομαι (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. xv. 
28; W. 86 (82)); 2 aor. ἀπῆλθον (ἀπῆλθα in Rev. x. 9 
[where RG Tr -θον], ἀπῆλθαν LT Tr WH in Mt. xxii. 
22; Rev. xxi. 1, 4 [(but here WH txt. only), ete., and 
WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; cf. W. § 13,1; Mullach p. 17 sq. 
[226]; B. 39 (34); [.Soph. Lex. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; 
WH. App. p. 164 sq.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. p. lxiv.; 
Scrivener, Introd. p. 562; Collation, ete., p. liv. sq.]); 
pf. ἀπελήλυθα (Jas. i. 24); plpf. ἀπεληλύθειν (In. iv. 8) ; 
[fr. Hom. down]; to go away (fr. a place), to depart; 
1. properly, a. absol.: Mt. xiii. 25; xix. 22; Mk. v. 
20; Lk. viii. 39; xvii. 23; Jn. xvi. 7, ete. Ptep. ἀπελθών 
with indic. or subj. of other verbs in past time to go 
(away) and ete.: Mt. xiii. 28,46; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25; 
xxvi. 36; xxvii. 5; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 37; Lk. v.14. Ὁ. with 
specification of the place into which, or of the per- 
son to whom or from whom one departs: eis with 
ace. of place, Mt. v. 30 L T Tr WH; xiv.15; xvi. 21; 
xxii. 5; Mk. vi. 86; ix. 43; Jn. iv. 8; Ro. xv. 28, ete.; 
eis ὁδὸν ἐθνῶν, Mt. x. 5; eis τὸ πέραν, Mt. viii. 18; Mk. 
Vili. 13; [8¢ ὑμῶν εἰς Maxed. 2 Co. i. 16 Lehm. txt.]; ἐπί 
with ace. of place, Lk. [xxiii. 33 R GT]; xxiv. 24; ἐπί 
with ace. of the business which one goes to attend to: 
ἐπί (the true reading for R G εἰς) τὴν ἐμπορίαν αὐτοῦ, Mt. 
xxii. 5; ἐκεῖ, Mt. 11. 22; ἔξω with gen., Acts iv. 15; πρός 
τινα, Mt. xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Rev. x. 9; ἀπό τινος, Lk. i. 38; 
viii. 37. Hebraistically (ef. "M8 39M) ἀπέρχ. ὀπίσω 
τινός to go away in order to follow any one, go afler him 
figuratively, i. e. to follow his party, follow him as a leader: 
Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; in the same sense ἀπέρχ. πρός τινα, 
Jn. vi. 68; Xen. an. 1, 9,16 (29); used also of those 
who seek any one for vile purposes, Jude 7. Lexicog- 
raphers (following Suidas, ‘améA6y- ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐπανέλθῃ ᾽) 
incorrectly ascribe to ἀπέρχεσθαι also the idea of return- 
ing, going back,— misled by the fact that a going away 
is often at the same time a going back. But where this 
is the case, it is made evident either by the connection, 
as in Lk. vii. 24, or by some adjunct, as εἰς τὸν οἶκον 
αὐτοῦ, Mt. ix. 7; Mk. vii. 80, (οἴκαδε, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 6); 
πρὸς ἑαυτόν [Treg. mp. αὐτόν] home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G, 
but L Tr br. TWH reject the vs.]; Jn. xx. 10 [here T 
Tr πρὸς αὐτούς. WH π. air. (see atrov)]; eis τὰ ὀπίσω, 
Jn. vi. 66 (to return home); xviii. 6 (to draw back, re- 


ἀπέχω 


treat). 2. trop.: of departing evils and sufferings, 
Mk. i. 42; Lk. v.13 (ἡ λέπρα ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ); Rev. 
ix. 12; xi. 14; of good things taken away from one, Rev. 
xviii. 14 [Β 6]; of an evanescent state of things, Rev. 
xxi. 1 (Rec. παρῆλθε), 4; of a report going forth or 
spread eis, Mt. iv. 24 [Treg. mrg. ἐξῆλθεν]. 

an-éxw; [impf. ἀπεῖχον Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt. ; 
pres. mid. ἀπέχομαι] ; 1. trans. a. to hold back, 
keep off, prevent, (Hom. Il. 1, 97 [Zenod.]; 6, 96; Plat. 
Crat. c. 23 p.407b.). Ὄ. to have wholly or in full, to 
have received (what one had a right to expect or de- 
mand; cf. ἀποδιδόναι, ἀπολαμβάνειν, | Win. De verb. comp. 
ete. Pt. iv. p.8; Gram. 275 (258); B. 203 (176); ace. to 
Bp. Lghtft. (on Phil. iv. 18) ἀπό denotes corres pon- 
dence, i. e. of the contents to the capacity, of the pos- 
session to the desire, etc.]): τινά, Philem. 15; μισθόν, 
Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16; παράκλησιν, Lk. vi. 24; πάντα, Phil. iv. 
18; (often so in Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 
l.c.]). Hence oc. ἀπέχει, impers., it is enough, suffi- 
cient: Mk. xiv. 41, where the explanation is ‘ye have 
slept now long enough’; so that Christ takes away the 
permission, just given to his disciples, of sleeping longer; 
cf. Meyer ad loc.; (in the same sense in (Pseudo-) 
Anacr. in Odar. (15) 28, 33; Cyril Alex. on Hag. ii. 
9 [but the true reading here seems to be ἀπέχω, see P. E. 
Pusey’s ed. Oxon. 1868]). 2. intrans. to be away, 
absent, distant, [B. 144 (126)]: absol., Lk. xv. 20; ἀπό, 
Lk. vii. 6; xxiv. 13; Mt. [xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; xv. 
8; Mk. vii. 6, (Is. xxix. 13). 3. Mid. to hold one’s self 
off, abstain: amo twos, from any thing, Acts xv. 20 
[RG]; 1 Th. iv. 3; v. 22, (Jobi. 1; ii. 3; Ezek. viii. 6) ; 
τινός, Acts xv. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 3; 1 Pet.ii.11. (So in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀπιστέω, -@; [impf. ἠπίστουν); 1 aor. ἠπίστησα; (ἄπι- 
στος); 1. to betray a trust, be unfaithful: 2 Tim. ii. 13 
(opp. to πιστὸς μένει) ; Ro. iii. 3; [al. deny this sense in 
the N. T.; cf. Morison or Mey. on Rom. I. c.; Ellic. on 
2 Tim. |. ¢.]. 2. to have no belief, disbelieve: in the 
news of Christ’s resurrection, Mk. xvi. 11; Lk. xxiv. 
41; with dat. of pers., Lk. xxiv. 11; in the tidings con- 
cerning Jesus the Messiah, Mk. xvi. 16 (opp. to m- 
στεύω), [sol Pet. ii. 7 Τ Tr WH]; Acts xxviii. 24. (In 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)* 

ἀπιστία, -as, 7, (fr. ἄπιστος), want of faith and trust; 
1. unfaithfulness, faithlessness, (of persons betraying a 
trust): Ro. iii. 3 [cf. reff. s. v. ἀπιστέω, 1]. 2. want of 
Saith, unbelief: shown in withholding belief in the divine 
power, Mk. xvi. 14, or in the power and promises of 
God, Ro. iv. 20; Heb. iii. 19; in the divine mission of 
Jesus, Mt. xiii. 58; Mk. vi.6; by opposition to the gos- 
pel, 1 Tim. 1. 18; with the added notion of obstinacy, 
Ro. xi. 20, 23; Heb. iii. 12. contextually, weakness of 
faith: Mt. xvii. 20 (where LT Tr WH ὀλιγοπιστίαν) ; 
Mk. ix. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. and Hdt. down.)* 

ἄπιστος, -ov, (πιστός), [fr. Hom. down], without faith 


or trust; 1. unfaithful, faithless, (not to be trusted, 
perfidious): Lk. xii. 46; Rev. xxi.8. 2. incredible, 


of things: Acts xxvi. 8; (Xen. Hiero 1, 9; symp. 4, 


57 


ἀπὸ 


49; Cyr. 3,1, 26; Plat. Phaedr. 245 c.; Joseph. antt. 6, 
10, 2, ete.). 3. unbelieving, incredulous: of Thomas 
disbelieving the news of the resurrection of Jesus, Jn. 
xx. 27; of those who refuse belief in the gosnel, 1 Co. 
vi. 6; vii. 12-15; x. 27; xiv. 22 sqq.; [1 Tim. v. 8]; 
with the added idea of impiety and wickedness, 2 Co. 
iv. 4; vi. 14 sq. of those among the Christians them- 
selves who reject the true faith, Tit. i. 15. without 
trust (in God), Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix.19; Lk. ix. 41." 
ἁπλότης, -ητος, 7, singleness, simplicity, sincerity, men- 
tal honesty; the virtue of one who is free from pretence 
and dissimulation, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 
3; Hell. 6,1,18,down): ἐν ἁπλότητι (1, Τ Tr WH ἁγιό- 
TTL) καὶ εἰλικρινείᾳ θεοῦ i. 6. infused by God through the 
Spirit [W. § 36, 3 b.], 2 Co. i. 12; ἐν ἅπλ. τῆς καρδίας 
(229 Ww, 1 Chr. xxix. 17), Col. iii. 22; Eph. vi. 5, (Sap. 
i. 1); εἰς Χριστόν. sincerity of mind towards Christ, i. e. 
single-hearted faith in Christ, as opp. to false wisdom 
in matters pertaining to Christianity, 2 Co. xi.3; ἐν 
ἁπλότητι in simplicity, i. 6. without self-seeking, Ro. xii. 
8. openness of heart manifesting itself by benefactions, 
liberality, (Joseph. antt. 7, 13,4; but in opposition see 
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 62 sq.]: 2 Co. viii. 2; ix. 11, 
13 (τῆς κοινωνίας, manifested by fellowship). Cf. Kling 
s. v. ‘ Einfalt’ in Herzog iii. p. 723 sq.* 

ἁπλοῦς, -7, -ovv, (contr. fr. -dos, -6n, -dov), [fr. Aeschyl. 
down], simple, single, (in which there is nothing compli- 
cated or confused; without folds, [ef. Trench § lvi.]) ; 
whole; of the eye, good, fulfilling its office, sound: Mt. 
vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, —[al. contend that the moral sense 
of the word is the only sense lexically warranted; ef. 
Test. xii. Patr. test. Isach. § 3 οὐ κατελάλησά τινος, ete. 
πορευόμενος ἐν ἁπλότητι ὀφθαλμῶν, ibid. § 4 πάντα ὁρᾷ 
ἐν ἁπλότητι, μὴ ἐπιδεχύμενος ὀφθαλμοῖς πονηρίας ἀπὸ τῆς 
πλάνης τοῦ κόσμου; yet cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xii. 8].* 
ἁπλῶς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], simply, openly, frank- 
ly, sincerely: Jas. i. 5 (led solely by his desire to bless).* 
ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, 
(Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), 
Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On 
its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 
1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 
321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words 
beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. 
§ 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order 
to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, 
but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by 
this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used 

I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, 
after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, 
removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, 
ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπά- 
σθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 
ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ, Mt. 
vii. 4: ἀφ᾽ [L WH τ tat. παρ᾽ (q. v. 1. 8.}} ἧς ἐκβεβλήκει 
δαιμόνια, Mk. xvi. 9; καθεῖλε ἀπὸ θρόνων, Lk.i.52. 2. of 
the separation of apart from the whole; where of 
a whole some part is taken: ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱματίου, Mt. ix. 16; 


ΑἹ , 
απο 


ἀπὸ μελισσίου κηρίου, Lk. xxiv. 42 [RG, but ΤῊ Ἐν. the 
clause]; ἀπὸ τῶν ὀψαρίων, Jn. xxi. 10; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ πλοίου 
fragments of the ship, Acts xxvii. 44; ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ 
τῆς τιμῆς, Acts v. 2; ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος, Acts ἅν 
17; ἐκλεξάμενος ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. vi. 13; τίνα ἀπὸ τῶν δύο, 
Mt. xxvii. 21; ὃν ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, sc. τινές [R. 
V. whom certain of the children of Israel did price (cf. 
τὶς, 2.c.); but al. refer this to I. 2 ἃ. aa. fin. q. v.], Mt. 
xxvii. 9, (ἐξῆλθον ἀπὸ τῶν ἱερέων, sc. τινές, 1 Mace. vii. 
33); after verbs of eating and drinking (usually joined 
in Grk. to the simple gen. of the thing [ef. B. 159 (139); 
W..198 (186) sq.]): Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28; πίνειν ἀπό, 
Lk. xxii. 18 (elsewhere in the N. T. ἐκ). 3. of any 
kind of separation of one thing from another by which 
the union or fellowship of the two is destroyed; 
a. after verbs of averting, loosening, liberating, ransom- 
ing, preserving: see ἀγοράζω, ἀπαλλάσσω, ἀποστρέφω, 
ἐλευθερόω. θεραπεύω, καθαρίζω, λούω, λυτρόω, λύω, ῥύομαι, 
σώζω, φυλάσσω, ete. b. after verbs of desisting, abstain- 
ing, avoiding, ete.: see ἀπέχω, παύω, καταπαύω, βλέπω, 
προσέχω, φυλάσσομαι, etc. ὁ. after verbs of concealing 
and hindering: see κρύπτω, κωλύω. παρακαλύπτω. ἃ. 
Concise constructions, [ef. esp. B. 322 (277)]: ἀνάθεμα 
ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Ro. ix. 3 (see ἀνάθεμα sub fin.) ; λούειν 
ἀπὸ τῶν πληγῶν to wash away the blood from the stripes, 
Acts xvi. 33; μετανοεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας by repentance to 
turn away from wickedness, Acts viii. 22; ἀποθνήσκειν 
ἀπό twos by death to be freed from a thing, Col. ii. 20; 
φθείρεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἁπλότητος to be corrupted and thus 
led away from singleness of heart, 2 Co. xi. 3; εἰσακου- 
σθεὶς ἀπὸ τ. εὐλαβείας heard and accordingly delivered 
from his fear, Heb. v. 7 (al. heard for i. e. on account of 
his godly fear [cf. II. 2b. below]). 4. of a state of 
separation, i.e. of distance; and a. of distance of 
Place,—of the local terminus from which: Mt. xxiii. 
34; xxiv. 81, etc.; after μακράν, Mt. viii. 30; Mk. xii. 
34; Jn. xxi. 8; after ἀπέχειν, see ἀπέχω 2; ἀπὸ ἄνωθεν 
ἕως κάτω, Mk. xv. 38; ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, Mt. xxvii. 55, ete. 
[ef. B. τὸ (62); W. § 65, 2]. Ace. to later Grk. usage 
it is put before nouns indicating local distance: Jn. xi. 
18 (ἦν ἐγγὺς ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκαπέντε about fifteen fur- 
longs off) ; Jn. xxi. 8: Rev. xiv. 20, (Diod. i. 51 ἐπάνω τῆς 
πόλεως ἀπὸ δέκα σχοίνων λίμνην ὥρυξε, [also 1,97; 4,56; 
16,46; 17,112; 18,40; 19, 25, etc.; cf. Soph. Lex. 
s. v. 5]; Joseph. b. j. 1, 3, 5 τοῦτο ἀφ᾽ ἑξακοσίων σταδίων 
ἐντεῦθέν ἐστιν, Plut. Aem. Paul. ο. 18, 5 ὥστε τοὺς πρώ- 
Tous νεκροὺς ἀπὸ δυοῖν σταδίων καταπεσεῖν, vit. Oth. ο. 11, 
1 κατεστρατοπέδευσεν ἀπὸ πεντήκοντα σταδίων, vit. Philop. 
c. 4, 8 ἦν γὰρ ἀγρὸς αὐτῷ ἀπὸ σταδίων εἴκοσι τῆς πόλεως); 
ef. W. 557 (518) sq.; [Β. 153 (133)]. ὍὌ. of distance 
of Time,—of the temporal terminus from which, (Lat. 
inde a): ἀπὸ τῆς Spas ἐκείνης, Mt. ix. 22; xvii. 18; Jn. 
xix. 27; ἀπ᾽ ἐκ. τῆς ἡμέρας, Mt. xxii. 46; Jn. xi. 53; [ἀπὸ 
πρώτης ἡμέρας. Actsxx.18; Phil.i.5 (LT Tr WH τῆς πρ. 
nu-]; ap ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων, Acts xv. 7; ἀπ᾽ ἐτῶν, Lk. viii. 
43; Ro. xv. 23; ἀπ᾿ αἰῶνος and ἀπὸ τ. αἰώνων, Lk. i. 70, 
etc.; am ἀρχῆς, Mt. xix. 4, 8, ete.;. ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, 
Mt. xiii. 35 [LT Tr WHom. κοσμ.], etc.; ἀπὸ κτίσεως 


58 


ἥν ὧν 
απο 


κόσμου, Ro. i. 20; ἀπὸ βρέφους from a child, 2 Tim. iii. 
15; ἀπὸ τῆς παρθενίας, Lk. ii. 36; ad’ ἧς (se. ἡμέρας) since, 
Lk. vii. 45; Acts xxiv.11; 2 Pet. iii. 4; ἀφ᾽ ἧς ἡμέρας, 
Col. i. 6, 9; ἀφ᾽ οὗ equiv. to ἀπὸ τούτου ὅτε (cf. B. 82 
(71); 105 (92)], Lk. xiii. 25; xxiv. 21; Rev. xvi. 18, 
(Hat. 2, 44; and in Attic) ; ἀφ᾽ οὗ after τρία ἔτη, Lk. xiii. 
7T Tr WH; ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν from the present, henceforth, Lk. i. 
48; v.10; xii. 52; xxii. 69; Acts xviii. 6; 2 Co. v. 16; 
ἀπὸ τότε, Mt. iv. 17; xvi. 21; xxvi. 16; Lk. xvi. 16; ἀπὸ 
πέρυσι since last year, a year ago, 2 Co. viii. 10; ix. 2; 
ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Acts xxviii. 23; οἵ. W. 422 (393); [B. 320 
(275)]; Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 47, 461. ο. of distance of 
Order or Rank,—of the terminus from which in any 
succession of things or persons: ἀπὸ διετοῦς (se. παιδός) 
καὶ κατωτέρω, Mt. ii. 16, (τοὺς Aeviras ἀπὸ εἰκοσαετοῦς 
καὶ ἐπάνω, Num. i. 20; 2 Esdr. iii. 8); ἀπὸ ᾿Αβραὰμ ἕως 
Δαυείδ, Mt. i. 17: ἕβδομος ἀπὸ ᾿Αδάμ, Jude 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ 
ἕως μεγάλου, Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό 
τινος, Mt. xx. 8; Lk. xxiii. 5; xxiv. 27; Jn. viii. 9; Acts 
vill. 35; x. 37. 

II. of Origin; whether of local origin, the place 
whence; or of causal origin, the cause from which. 1. 
of the Place whence anything is, comes, befalls, is 
taken; a. after verbs of coming; see ἔρχομαι, ἥκω, ete. : 
ἀπὸ [L Tr WH ἀπ᾽ dyopas se. ἐλθόντες, Mk. vii. 4; ἄγγελος 
ἀπ᾽ (τοῦ) οὐρανοῦ, Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass. ]; 
τὸν am’ οὐρανῶν sc. λαλοῦντα, Heb. xii. 25, ete.; of the 
country, province, town, village, from which any one has 
originated or proceeded [cf. W. 364 (342); B. 324 
(279)]: Mt. 11. 1; iv. 25; Jn. i. 44 (45); xi. 15 μία ἀπὸ 
ὄρους Σινᾶ, Gal. iv. 24. Hence ὁ or οἱ ἀπό τινος a native of, 
a man of, some place: ὁ ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ the Nazarene, Mt. 
xxi. 11; 6 ἀπὸ ᾿Δριμαθαίας. Mk. xv. 43; Jn. xix. 38 [here 
GLTr WH om. 6]; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰόππης, Acts x. 23; of ἀπὸ 
᾿Ιταλίας the Italians, Heb. xiii. 24 [ef. W. § 66, 6]. A 
great number of exx. fr. prof. writ. are given by Wieseler, 
Untersuch. iib. ἃ. Hebrierbr. 2te Hiilfte, p- 14 sq. b. 
of the party or society from which one has proceeded, 
i.e. a member of the sect or society, a disciple or votary 
of it: of ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, Acts xii. 1; of ἀπὸ τῆς αἱρέ- 
σεως τῶν Φαρισαίων, Acts xv. 5, (asin Grk. writ.: οἱ ἀπὸ 
τῆς Στοᾶς, of ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Ακαδημίας, etc.). ὁ. of the material 
from which a thing is made: ἀπὸ τριχῶν καμήλου. Mt. 
iii. 4 [W. 370 (347); B. 324 (279)]. d. trop. of that 
from or by which a thing is known: ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν 
ἐπιγινώσκειν, Mt. vii. 16, 20 [here Lehm. ἐκ τ. x. ete.] 
(Lys. in Andoc. ὃ 6; Aeschin. ady. Tim. p. 69 ed. 
Reiske) ; μανθάνειν ἀπό twos to learn from the example 
of any one, Mt. xi. 29; xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; but in 
Gal. iii. 2; Col. i. 7; Heb. v. 8, μανθ. ἀπό τινος means 
to learn from one’s teaching or training [ef. B. 324 
(279) c.; W. 372 (348)]. 6. after verbs of seeking, in- 
quiring, demanding : ἀπαιτεῖν, Lk. xii. 20[Tr WH air.]; 
(nreiv, 1 Th. ii. 6 (alternating there with ἐκ [ οἵ. W. § 50, 
2]); ἐκζητεῖν, Lk. xi. 50 sq.; see αἰτέω. 2. of causal 
origin, or the Cause; and a. of the material cause, 
so called, or of that which supplies the material for the 
maintenance of the action expressed by the verb: so 


Sey, 
απο 


γεμίζεσθαι. χορτάζεσθαι, πλουτεῖν, διακονεῖν ἀπότινος͵ --- 566 
those verbs. b. of the cause on account of which 
anything is or is done, where commonly it can be ren- 
dered for (Lat. prae, Germ. vor): οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ὄχλου, Lk. xix. 3; οὐκέτι ἴσχυσαν ἀπὸ τοῦ πλήθους, Jn. 
xxi. 6, (Judith ii. 20); ἀπὸ τ. δόξης τοῦ φωτός, Acts xxii. 
11; [here many would bring in Heb. ν. 7 (W. 371 (348) ; 
B. 322 (276)), see I.3d.above]. c. of themoving or 
im pelling cause (Lat. ex, prae; Germ. aus, vor), for, 
out of : ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ ὑπάγει, Mt. xiii. 44; ἀπὸ τοῦ 
φόβου for fear, Mt. xiv. 26; xxviii. 4; Lk. xxi. 26. 
Hebraistically : φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό τινος (12 NY), Mt. x. 28; 
Lk. xii. 4; φεύγειν ἀπό τινος (732 033), to flee for fear of 
one, Jn. x. 5; Mk. xiv. 52 (RG, but L Tr mrg. br. ἀπ᾽ 
αὐτῶν) ; Rev. ix.6; cf. φεύγω and W. 223 (209 sq.). ἃ. 
of the efficient cause, viz. of things from the force of 
which anything proceeds, and of persons from whose 
will, power, authority, command, favor, order, influence, 
direction, anything is to be sought; aa. in general: ἀπὸ 
τοῦ ὕπνου by force of the sleep, Acts xx. 9; ἀπὸ σοῦ 
σημεῖον, Mt. xii. 35; ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν, 2 Co. ili. 18 
(from the glory which we behold for ourselves [ef. W. 
254 (238)] in a mirror, goes out a glory in which we 
share, ef. Meyer ad lov.) ; ἀπὸ κυρίου πνεύματος by the 
Spirit of the Lord [yet ef. B. 343 (295)], ibid.; ὄλεθρον 
ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ κυρίου destruction proceeding from the 
(incensed, wrathful) countenance of the Lord, 2 Th. 
i. 9 (on this passage, to be explained after Jer. iv. 26 
Sept., ef. Ewald); on the other hand, ἀνάψυξις ἀπὸ προ- 
σώπου τ. x. Acts ili. 20 (19); ἀπεκτάνθησαν ἀπὸ (Rec. ὑπό) 
τῶν πληγῶν, Rey. ix. 18. ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυ- 
τοῦ, an expression esp. com. in John, of himself (myself, 
ete.), from his own disposition or judgment, as distin- 
guished from another’s instruction, [ef. W. 372 (348)]: 
Dk. xit. 57; xxi. 30; Jn. v. 19; 30; πὶ 51; xiv. 10; xvi. 
13; xviii. 34 [L Tr WH ἀπὸ ceavr.]; 2 Co. iii-5; x. 7[T 
Tr WH ἐφ᾽ ἑ. (see ἐπί A.I. 1 ¢’.)]; of one’s own will and 
motion, as opp. to the command and authority of another: 
Jn. vii. 17 sq. 28; viii. 42; x. 18, (Num. xvi. 28) ; by one’s 
own power: Jn. xv. 4; by one’s power and on one’s own 
judgment: Jn. viii. 28; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in 
Kypke, Observ. i. p. 391. (CE. εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ᾽ (al. ἐφ᾽ see 
ἐπί A. 1.1 8.) ἑαυτῶν, Acts xxi. 23 WH txt.] after verbs 
of learning, knowing, receiving, ἀπό is used of him to whom 
we are indebted for what we know, receive, possess, [cf. W. 
370 (347) n., also De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p.7 sq.; B. 324 
(279) ; Mey. on 1 Co. xi. 23; per contra Bp. Lghtft. 
on Gal. i. 12]: ἀκούειν, Acts ix. 13; 1Jn.i. 5; γινώσκειν, 
Mk. xv. 45; λαμβάνειν, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; 1 Jn. ii. 27; iii. 
22 Lf Tr WH; ἔχει 1 Jn. iv. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3, ete. ; 
παραλαμβάνειν, 1 Co. xi. 23; δέχεσθαι, Acts xxviii. 21; 
respecting μανθάνειν see above, II. 1 d.; λατρεύω τῷ θεῷ 
ἀπὸ προγόνων after the manner of the λατρεία received 
from my forefathers [ef. W. 372 (349); B. 322 (277)], 2 
Tim. i. 3. γίνεταί pot, 1 Co. i. 30; iv. 5; χάρις ἀπὸ θεοῦ 
or τοῦ θεοῦ, from God, the author, bestower, Ro. i. 7; 1 
Co. i. 3; ( 8]. 1. 3, and often; καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ θεοῦ, Phil. i. 28. 
ἀπόστολος ἀπό etc., constituted an apostie by autbority 


59 


ἀποβαίνω 


and commission, etc. [ef. W. 418 (390)], Gal.i.1. after 
πάσχειν, Mt. xvi. 21; [akin to this, ace. to many, is Mt. 
XXvii. 9 Gy ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, R. V. mrg. 
whom they priced on the part of the sons of Israel; but see 
in I. 2 above]. bb. When ἀπό is used after passives 
(which is rare in the better Grk. auth., cf. Bnhdy. p. 222 
sqq-; [B.325 (280); W. 371 (347 sq.) ]), the connection 
between the cause and the effect is conceived of as looser 
and more remote than that indicated by ὑπό, and may 
often be expressed by on the part of (Germ. von Seiten), 
ΓΑ. V. generally of]: ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ἀποδεδειγμένον ap- 
proved (by miracles) according to God’s will and ap- 
pointment, Acts ii. 22; ἀπὸ θεοῦ πειράζομαι the cause of 
my temptation is to be sought in God, Jas. i. 13; ἀπε- 
στερημένος [T Tr WH ἀφυστερ.] ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν by your fraud, 
Jas. ν. 4: ἀποδοκιμάζεσθαι, Lk. xvii. 25; [ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία 
ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων, Lk. vii. 35 ace. to some; see δικαιόω. 2}; 
τόπον ἡτοιμασμένον ἀπὸ Tov θεοῦ by the will and direction 
of God, Rev. xii. 6 ; ὀχλούμενοι ἀπὸ (Ree. ὑπό, [see ὀχλέω }) 
πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτ. Lk. vi. 18 (whose annoyance by dis- 
eases [(?) ef. vs. 17] proceeded from unclean spirits 
ΓΑ. V. vexed (troubled) with ete.]) ; ἀπὸ τ. σαρκὸς ἐσπιλω- 
μένον by touching the flesh, Jude 23 ; [add Lk. i. 26 T Tr 
WH ἀπεστάλη 6 ἄγγελος ἀπὸ (R GL imo) τοῦ θεοῦ]. As 
in prof. auth. so also in the N. T. the Mss. sometimes 
vary between ἀπό and ὑπό: 6. g. in Mk. viii. 31; [LK. viii. 
43]; Acts iv. 36; [x. 17, 33; xv. 4]; Ro. xiii. 1; [xv. 
24]; Rev ix. 18; see W. 370 (347) sq.; B. 325 (280) 
56. ; [ef. Vincent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. 
§ 41]. 

III. Phrases having a quasi-adverbial force, and in- 
dicating the manner or degree in which anything is 
done or occurs, are the following: ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν ὑμῶν 
from your hearts, i. e. willingly and sincerely, Mt. xviii. 
353 ἀπὸ μέρους in part, 2 Co. i. 14; 11. 5; Ro. xi. 25; xv. 
24; ἀπὸ μιᾶς se. either φωνῆς with one voice, or γνώμης or 
ψυχῆς with one consent, one mind, Lk. xiv. 18 (cf. Kuinoel 
ad loc.; [W. 423 (394) ; 591 (549 sq.); yet see Lob. Par- 
alip. p. 3657). 

IV. The extraordinary construction ἀπὸ 6 ὧν (for Ree. 
ἀπὸ τοῦ 6) Kat ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος. Rev. i. 4, finds its ex- 
planation in the fact that the writer seems to have used 
the words 6 ὧν κτλ. as an indeclinable noun, for the 
purpose of indicating the meaning of the proper name 
m7; cf. W. § 10, 2 fin.; [B. 50 (43)]. 

V. In composition ἀπό indicates separation, liberation, 
cessation, departure, as in ἀποβάλλω, ἀποκόπτω. ἀποκυλίω, 
ἀπολύω, ἀπολύτρωσις. ἀπαλγέω, ἀπέρχομαι : finishing and 
completion, as in ἀπαρτίζω, ἀποτελέω : refers to the pat- 
tern from which a copy is taken, as in ἀπογράφειν, ἀφομοι- 
οὖν, ete.; or to him from whom the action proceeds, as 
in ἀποδείκνυμι, ἀποτολμάω, ete. 

ἀπο-βαίνω: fut. ἀποβήσομαι; 2 aor. ἀπέβην: 1. to 
come down from: a ship (so even in Hom.), ἀπό. Lk. v. 2 
(Tr mre. br. az αὐτῶν]: εἰς τὴν γῆν, In. xxi. 9. 2. 
trop. fo turn out, ‘eventuate,’ (so fr. Hdt. down): ἀποβή- 
σεται ὑμῖν εἰς μαρτύριον it will issue, turn out, Lk. xxi. 13; εἰς 
σωτηρίαν, Phil. i. 19. (Job xiii. 16 ; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) * 


ἀποβάλλω 


ἀπο-βάλλω : 2 aor. ἀπέβαλον ; [fr. Hom. down]; to throw 
off, cast away: a garment, Mk. x. 50. _ trop. confidence, 
Heb. x. 35.* 

ἀπο-βλέπω : [impf. ἀπέβλεπον] ; to turn the eyes away 
from other things and fix them on some one thing; to look 
at attentively : eis τε (often in Grk. writ.) ; trop. to look 
with steadfast mental gaze: εἰς τ. μισθαποδοσίαν, Heb. xi. 
26 [W. § 66, 2d.].* 

ἀπό-βλητος, -ov, thrown away, to be thrown away, re- 
jected, despised, abominated: as unclean, 1 Tim. iv. 4, 
(in Hos. ix. 3 Symm. equiv. to 820 unclean; Hom. 1]. 2, 
861; 3, 65; Leian., Plut.).* 

ἀπο-βολή, -ῆς, ἡ, @ throwing away; 1. rejection, re- 
pudiation, (ἀποβάλλεσθαι to throw away from one’s self, 
cast uff, repudiate) : Ro. xi. 15 (opp. to πρόσλημψις αὐτῶν, 
objec. gen.). 2. a losing, loss, (fr. ἀποβάλλω in the 
sense of lose): Acts xxvii. 22 ἀποβολὴ ψυχῆς οὐδεμία 
ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν no one of you shall lose his life [W. § 67, 
1. 6.1. (Plat., Plut., al.) * 

ἀπο-γίνομαι : [2 aor. ἀπεγενύμην :; 1. to be removed 
from, depart. 2. to die, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
down); hence trop. ἀπογ- τινί to die to any thing: ταῖς 
ἁμαρτίαις ἀπογενόμενοι i. e. become utterly alienated from 
our sins, 1 Pet. ii. 24 [W. § 52, 4, 1 d.; B. 178 (155)].* 

ἀπο-γραφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἀπογράφω) ; a. a writing off, trans- 
cript (from some pattern). b. an enrolment (or regis- 
tration) in the public records of persons together with their 
property and income, as the basis of an ἀποτίμησις (census 
or valuation), i.e. that it might appear how much tax 
should be levied upon each one: Lk. ii. 2; Acts v. 37; 
on the occurrence spoken of in both pass. ef. Schiirer, 
Ntl. Zeitzesch. § 17, pp. 251, 262-286, and books there 
mentioned; [McClellan i. 392-399; B. 1). 5. v. Taxing].* 

ἀπο-γράφω: Mid., [pres. inf. ἀπογράφεσθαι) :1 aor. 
inf. ἀπογράψασθαι; [pf. pass. ptep. ἀπογεγραμμένος ; fr. 
Hdt. down]; a. to write off, copy (from some pattern). 
b. to enter in a register or records; spec. to enter in the 
public records the names of men, their property and income, 
to enroll, (cf. ἀπογραφή: b.); mid.to have one’s self registered, 
toenroll one’s self [W.§ 38, 3]: Lk. ii. 1, 3, 5; pass. of ἐν 
οὐρανοῖς ἀπογεγραμμένοι those whose names are inscribed 
in the heavenly register, Heb. xii. 23 (the reference is 
to the dead already received into the heavenly city, the 
figure being drawn from civil communities on earth, 
whose citizens are enrolled in a register).* 

ἀπο-δείκνυμι ; 1 aor. ἀπέδειξα ; pf. pass. ptep. ἀποδεδειγ- 
μένος ; (freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Nem. 6, 80 down); 
1. prop. to point away from one’s self, to point out, show 
forth; to expose to view, exhibit, (Hdt. 3, 122 and often) : 
1Co.iv. 9. Hence 2. to declare: twa, to show, prove 
what kind of a person any one is, Acts ii. 22 (where cod. 
Daivesthe gloss [8eSoxip jacpevor) ; 2 Th. ii.4 [Lehm. mrg. 
ἀποδειγνύοντα]. to prove by arguments, demonstrate: Acts 
xxv. 7. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 16 sq.* 

ἀπόδειξις, -ews, 7, (ἀποδείκνυμι, q. v-), [fr. Hdt. down]; 
a. a making manifest, showing forth. b. a demonstration, 
proof: ἀπόδειξις πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως a proof by the 
Spirit and power of God, operating in me, and stirring in 


60 


ἀποδίδωμι 


the minds of my hearers the most holy emotions and 
thus persuading them, 1 Co. ii. 4 (contextually opposed 
to proof by rhetorical arts and philosophic arguments, 
—the sense in which the Greek philosophers use the 
word ; [see Heinrici, Corinthierbr. i. p. 103 sq.]).* 
ἀπο-δεκατεύω, Lk. xviii. 12, for ἀποδεκατόω q.v.; [cf. 
WH. App. p. 171). 
ἀπο-δεκατόω, -@, inf. pres. ἀποδεκατοῖν, Heb. vii. 5 T 
Tr WH (ef. Delitzsch ad loc. ; B. 44 (388); [Tdf.’s note 
ad loc. ; WH. Intr. §410]); (8exarow q. v.); a bibl. and 
eccl. word ; Sept. for wy; to tithe i.e. 1. with ace. of 
the thing, to give, pay, a tenth of any thing: Mt. xxiii. 23; 
Lk. xi. 42; xviii. 12 where T WH, after codd. δὲ" B only, 
have adopted ἀποδεκατεύω, for which the simple δεκατεύω 
is more common in Grk. writ.; (Gen. xxviii. 22; Deut. 
xiv.21(22)). 2. τινά, fo exact, receive, atenth from any 
one: Heb. vii. 5; (1S. viii. 15,17). [B.D.s. v. Tithe.]* 
ἀπό-δεκτος [so L T WH accent (and Ree. in 1 Tim. ii. 
38) ; al. ἀποδεκτός, cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 498; Gottling p. 313 
sq-; Chandler § 529 sq.], τον, (see ἀποδέχομαι), a later 
word, accepted, acceptable, agreeable: 1 Tim. ii. 3; v. 4." 
ἀπο-δέχομαι; depon. mid. ; impf. ἀπεδεχόμην ; 1 aor. ἀπε- 
δεξάμην; 1 aor. pass. ἀπεδέχθην ; common in Grk. writ., 
esp. the Attic, fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. used only by 
Luke; to accept what is offered from without (ἀπό, cf. Lat. 
excipio), to accept from, receive: τινά, simply, to give 
one access to one’s self, Lk. ix. 11 L T Tr WH; Acts 
xxviii. 30; with emphasis [cf. Tob. vii. 17 and Fritzsche 
ad loc.], to receive with joy, Lk. viii. 40; to receive to 
hospitality, Acts xxi. 17 L T Tr WH; to grant one ac- 
cess to one’s self in the capacity in which he wishes to be 
regarded, e. g. as the messenger of others, Acts xv. 4 (L 
T Tr WH παρεδέχθησαν) ; asa Christian, Acts xviii. 27; 
metaph. τί, to receive into the mind with assent: to ap- 
prove, Acts xxiv. 3; to believe, τὸν λόγον, Acts ii. 41; (so 
in Grk. writ. esp. Plato; ef. Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 232).* 
ἀποδημέω, -@; 1 aor. ἀπεδήμησα; (ἀπόδημος, 4. γ.); to 
go away to foreign parts, go abroad : Mt. xxi. 33; xxv. 14 
sq-; Mk. xii.1; Lk. xv. 13 (εἰς χώραν) ; xx.9. (In Grk. 
writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * 
ἀπό-δημος, -ov, (fr. ἀπό and δῆμος the people), away 
from one’s people, gone abroad: Mk. xiii. 34 [R. V. so- 
journing in another country]. [From Pind. down.]* 
ἀπο-δίδωμι, pres. ptep. neut. ἀποδιδοῦν (fr. the form 
-διδόω, Rey. xxii. 2, where T Tr WH mrg. -διδούς [see 
WH. App. p. 167]) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἀπεδίδουν (for the 
more com. ἀπεδίδοσαν, Acts iv. 33; cf. W. § 14, 1c.) ; fut. 
ἀποδώσω; 1 aor. ἀπέδωκα; 2 aor. ἀπέδων, impy. ἀπόδυς. 
subj. 3 pers. sing. ἀποδῷ and in 1 Thess. v. 15 Tdf. ἀποδοῖ 
(see δίδωμι), opt. 3 pers. sing. ἀποδώῃ [or rather, -δῴη ; for 
-δώῃ is a subjunctive form] (2 Tim. iv. 14, for ἀποδοίη, 
cf. W.§ 14, 1 g.; B. 46 (40); yet L T Tr WH ἀποδώσει) ; 
Pass., 1 aor. inf. ἀποδοθῆναι: Mid., 2 aor. ἀπεδόμην, 3 pers. 
sing. ἀπέδοτο (Heb. xii. 16, where L WH ἀπέδετο; cf. B. 
47 (41); Delitzsch on Hebr. p. 632 note; [ WH. App. p. 
167]); a common verb in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, and 
the N. T. does not deviate at all from their use of it; 
prop. to put away by giving, to give up, give over, (Germ 


ἀποδιορίζω 


abgeben, [cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 12 sq. 
who regards ἀπό as denoting to give from some reserved 
store, or to give over something which might have been 
retained, or to lay off some burden of debt or duty; cf. 
Cope on Aristot. rhet.1,1,7]); 1. to deliver, relinquish 
what is one’s own: τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, Mt. xxvii. 58; hence 
in mid. to give away for one’s own profit what is one’s own, 
i. e. to sell [W. 253 (238)]: ri, Acts v. 8; Heb. xii. 16; 
τινά, Acts vii. 9, (often in this sense in Grk. writ., esp. 
the Attic, fr. Hdt. 1, 70 down; in Sept. for 933, Gen. 
xxv. 33 οἷο. ; Bar. vi. [i.e. Ep. Jer.] 27 (28)). 2. to 
pay off, discharge, what is due, (because a debt, like a 
burden, is thrown off, ἀπό, by being paid) : a debt (Germ. 
abtragen), Mt. v. 26; xviii. 25-30, 34; Lk. vii. 42; x. 35; 
xii. 59; wages, Mt. xx.8; tribute and other dues to the 
government, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk. xii.17; Lk. xX. 25; Ro. 
xiii. 7; produce due, Mt. xxi. 41; Heb. xii. 11; Rev. xxii. 
2; ὅρκους things promised under oath, Mt. v. 33, cf. 
Num. xxx. 3, (εὐχήν a vow, Deut. xxiii. 21, ete.) ; con- 
jugal duty, 1 Co. vii. 3 ; ἀμοιβάς grateful requitals, 1 Tim. 
ν. 4; λόγον to render account: Mt. xii. 36; Lk. xvi. 2; 
Acts xix. 40; Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. Tr txt.; Heb. xiii. 17; 
1 Pet. iv. 5; μαρτύριον to give testimony (as something 
officially due), Acts iv. 33. Hence 3. to give back, re- 
store: Lk. iv. 20; [vii. 15 Lechm. mrg.]; ix. 42; xix. 8. 
4. to requite, recompense, in a good or a bad sense: Mt. 
vi. 4, 6, 18; xvi. 27; Ro. ii. 6; 2 Tim. iv. [8], 14; Rev. 
xviii. 6; xxii. 12; κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, Ro. xii. 17; 1 Th. v. 
15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. [Comp.: ἀντ-αποδίδωμι.7 ἢ 

ἀπο-δι-ορίζω ; (διορίζω, and this fr. ὅρος a limit); by 
drawing boundaries 10 disjoin, part, separate from anoth- 
er: Jude 19 (οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες ἑαυτούς those who by 
their wickedness separate themselves from the living 
fellowship of Christians; if €avr. be dropped, with Rec 
GLT Tr WH, the rendering is making divisions or sep- 
arations). (Aristot. pol. 4, 4, 13 [p. 1290», 25].)* 

ἀπο-δοκιμάζω : (see δοκιμάζω); 1 aor. ἀπεδοκίμασα; Pass., 
1 aor. ἀτεδοκιμάσθην ; pf. ptep. ἀποδεδοκιμασμένος ; to dis- 
approve, reject, repudiate: Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. viii. 31; xii. 
10; Lk. ix. 22; xvii. 25; xx. 17; 1 Pet. ii.4, 7; Heb. xii. 
17. (Equiv. to 089 in Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 22; Jer. viii. 9, 
etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 6, 130 down.)* 

ἀπο δοχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἀποδέχομαι, q. ν.), reception, admis- 
sion, acceptance, approbation, [ A. V. acceptation]: 1 Tim. 
i.15;iv.9. (Polyb. 2, 56,1; 6, 2, 13, ete. ; ὁ λόγος ἀπο- 
δοχῆς τυγχάνει id. 1, 5,5; Diod. 4, 84; Joseph. antt. 6, 14, 
4; al. [ef. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 124].)* 

ἀπόθεσις, -ews, ἡ, [ἀποτίθημιἼ. a putting off or away: 2 
Pet. i. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 21. [In various senses fr. Hippoe. 
and Plato down. ]* 

ἀπο-θήκη, -ης, ἡ, (ἀποτίθημι), a place in which any thing 
is laid by or up; a storehouse, granary, [A. V. garner, 
barn]: Mt. iii. 12; vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; xii. 18, 
24. (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 26; Thue. 6, 97.)* 

ἀπο-θησαυρίζω ; to put away, lay by in store, to treasure 
away, [seponendo thesaurum colligere, Win. De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 10]; to store up abundance for future 
use: 1 Tim. vi. 19. [Sir. iii.4; Diod., Joseph., Epict., al.]* 


61 


5 ; 
ἀποθνήσκω 


ἀπο-θλίβω ; fo press on all sides, squeeze, press hard : Lk. 
viii.45. (Num. xxii. 25; used also of pressing out grapes 
and olives, Diod. 3, 62; Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 2; [al.].)* 

ἀποθνήσκω, impf. ἀπέθνησκον (Lk. viii. 42); 2 aor. 
ἀπέθανον ; fut. ἀποθανοῦμαι, Ro. ν. 7; Jn. viii. 21, 24, 
(see θνήσκω) ; found in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to die 
(ἀπό, so as to be no more; [cf. Lat. emorior; Eng. die 
of f or out, pass away]; Germ. ab sterben, ver sterben) ; 
I. used properly 1. of the natural death of men: 
Mt. ix. 24; xxii. 24; Lk. xvi. 22; Jn. iv.47; Ro. vii. 2, 
and very often; ἀποθνήσκοντες ἄνθρωποι subject to death, 
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 [B. 206 (178) }. 2. of the violent 
death — both of animals, Mt. viii. 32, and of men, Mt. 
xxvi. 35; Acts xxi. 13 ete.; 1 Pet. iii. 18 L T Tr WH txt.; 
ev φόνῳ μαχαίρας, Heb. xi. 37; of the punishment of 
death, Heb. x. 28; often of the violent death which 
Christ suffered, as Jn. xii. 33; Ro. v. 6, ete. 3. 
Phrases: ἀποθνήσκ. ἔκ twos to perish by means of some- 
thing, [ef. Eng. to die of], Rev. viii. 11; ἐν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, 
ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις, fixed in sin, hence to die unreformed, 
Jn. viii. 21, 24; ἐν τῷ ᾿Αδάμ by connection with Adam, 
1 Co. xv. 22; ἐν κυρίῳ in fellowship with, and trusting in, 
the Lord, Rev. xiv. 13; ἀποθνήσκ. τι to die a certain 
death, Ro. vi. 10, (θάνατον μακρόν, Charit. p. 12 ed. D’Or- 
ville []. i. 6. 8 p. 17, 6 ed. Beck; ef. W. 227 (213); B. 149 
(180)]); τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, used of Christ, ‘that he might 
not have to busy himself more with the sin of men,’ Ro. 
vi. 10; ἑαυτῷ to become one’s own master, independent, 
by dying, Ro. xiv. 7 [cf. Meyer]; τῷ κυρίῳ to become 
subject to the Lord’s will by dying, Ro. xiv. 8 [ef. Mey.]; 
διά τινα i. 6. to save one, 1 Co. viii. 11; on the phrases ἀπὸο- 
θνήσκ. περί and ὑπέρ twos, see περί I. c. δ. and ὑπέρ I. 
2and 3. Oratorically, although the proper signification 
of the verb is retained, καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἀποθνήσκω I meet 
death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Co. xv. 31, 
cf. 2 Co. vi. 9. 4. of trees which dry up, Jude 12; of 
seeds, which while being resolvea into their elements in 
the ground seem fo perish by rotting, Jn. xii. 24 ; 1 Co. xv. 
36. II. tropically, in various senses ; 1. of eternal 
death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery, 
and that, too, already beginning on earth: Ro. viii. 13; 
Jn. vi. 50; xi. 26. 2. of moral death, in various 
senses; a. to be deprived of real life, 1. 6. esp. of the 
power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope 
of future blessedness, Ro. vii. 10; of the spiritual torpor 
of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ, 
the fountain of true life, Rev. iii. 2. Ὁ. with dat. of the 
thing [cf. W. 210 (197); 428 (398); B. 178 (155)], to 
become wholly alienated from a thing, and freed from 
all connection with it: τῷ νόμῳ, Gal. ii. 19, which must 
also be supplied with ἀποθανόντες (for so we must read 
for Rec®!? ἀποθανόντο ς) in Ro. vii. 6 [ef. W. 159 (150) ]; 
τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Ro. vi. 2 (in another sense in vs. 10; see I. 
3 above); ἀπὸ τῶν στοιχείων τοῦ κόσμου so that your re- 
lation to etc. has passed away, Col. ii. 20, (ἀπὸ τῶν παθῶν, 
Porphyr. de abst. animal. 1, 41 [cf. B. 322 (277) ; W. 370 
(347)]); true Christians are said simply ἀποθανεῖν, as hav- 
ing put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them 


ἀποκαθίστημι 


away from God, Col. iii. 3; since they owe this habit of 
mind to the death of Christ, they are said also ἀποθανεῖν 
σὺν Χριστῷ, Ro. vi. 8; Col. ii. 20. [Comp.: συναπο- 
θνήσκω.] 

ἀπο-καθ-ίστημι, ἀποκαθιστάω (Mk. ix. 12 ἀποκαθιστᾷ 
RG), and ἀποκαθιστάνω (Mk. ix. 12 LT Tr [but WH 
ἀποκατιστάνω, see their App. p. 168]; Acts i. 6; ef. W. 
78 (75); [B. 44 sq. (39)]); fut. ἀποκαταστήσω ; 2 aor. 
ἀπεκατέστην (with double augm., (cf. Ex. iv. 7; Jer. xxiii. 
8], Mk. viii. 25 T Tr WH); 1 aor. pass. ἀποκατεστάθην 
or, ace. to the better reading, with double augm. ἀπεκατε- 
στάθην, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. vi. 10 Ignat. ad Smyrn. 
11; ΘΓ WH. App. p. 162]; W. 72 (69 sq.) ; [B. 35 (31)]; 
Mullach p. 22); asin Grk. writ. fo restore to its former state ; 
2 avr. act. to be in its former state: used of parts of the 
body restored to health, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. vi. 
10; of a man cured of blindness, Mk. viii. 25; of the 
restoration of dominion, Acts i. 6 (1 Mace. xv. 3); of 
the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Mt. xvii. 
11; Mk. ix. 12; of a man at a distance from his friends 
and to be restored to them, Heb. xiii. 19." 

ἀπο-καλύπτω : fut. ἀποκαλύψω ; 1 aor. ἀπεκάλυψα; [ Pass., 
pres. ἀποκαλύπτομαι); 1 aor. amexadipOnv; 1 fut. ἀπο- 
καλυφθήσομαι; in Grk. writ. fr.[Hdt. and] Plat. down; in 
Sept. equiv. to792; 1. prop. to uncover, lay open what 
has been veiled or covered up; to disclose, make bare: Ex. 
xx. 26; Lev. xviii. 11 sqq.; Num. v. 18; Sus. 32; ra 
στήθη, Plat. Prot. p. 352 a.; τὴν κεφαλήν, Plut. Crass. 6. 
2. metaph. to make known, make manifest, disclose, 
what before was unknown; a. pass. of any method 
whatever by which something before unknown becomes 
evident: Mt. x. 26; Lk. xii. 2. b. pass. of matters which 
come to light from things done: Lk. ii. 35 [some 
make the verb mid. here}; Jn. xii. 38 (Is. lili. 1); Ro. i. 
18; from the gospel: Ro. i. 17. ὁ. ἀποκαλύπτειν τί 
tux is used of God revealing to men things unknown 
[Dan. ii. 19 Theod., 22, 28; Ps. χουν]. (xeviii.) 2; 1S. ii. 
27, ef. iii. 21], especially those relating to salvation : — 
whether by deeds, Mt. xi. 25; xvi. 17; Lk. x. 21 (by in- 
timacy with Christ, by his words and acts) ;— or by the 
Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 10; xiv. 30; Eph. iii. 5; Phil. iii. 15; 
1 Pet. i. 12; τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί who, what, how great 
his Son is, in my soul, Gal. i. 16. Of Christ teaching men: 
Mt. xi. 27; Lk. x. 22. d. pass. of things, previously 
non-existent, coming into being and to view: as, ἡ δόξα, 
Ro. viii. 18 (eis ἡμᾶς to be conferred on us); 1 Pet. v. 
1; ἡ σωτηρία, 1 Pet. 1. 5; ἡ πίστις, Gal. ii. 23; the day 
of judgment, 1 Co. iii. 13. 6. pass. of persons, previ- 
ously concealed, making their appearance in public: of 
Christ, who will return from heaven where he is now 
hidden (Col. iii. 3) to the earth, Lk. xvii. 30; of Anti- 
christ, 2 Th. ii. 3, 6, 8.5 

{On this word (and the foll.) cf. Westcott, Introd. to the 
Study of the Gospels, p. 9 sq. (Am. ed. 34 sq.) ; Liicke, Einl. 
in ἃ. Offenb. ἃ. Johan. 2d ed. p. 18 sqq.; esp. F. G. Δ. van 
Bell, Disput. theolog. de vocabulis φανεροῦν et ἀποκαλύπτειν in 
N. T., Lugd. Bat., 1849. φανερόω is thought to describe an ex- 


ternal manifestation, to the senses and hence open to all, but 
single or isolated ; ἀποκαλύπτω an internal disclosure, to the 


2 ἀποκαραδοκία 


6 


believer, and abiding. The ἀποκάλυψις or unveiling precedes 
and produces the φανέρωσις or manifestution ; the former looks 
toward the object revealed, the latter toward the persons to 
whom the revelation is made. Others, however, seem to 
question the possibility of discrimination; see e. g. Fritz- 
sche on Rom. vol. ii. 149. Cf. 1 Co. iii. 13.] 

ἀπο-κάλυψις, -ews, ἡ, (ἀποκαλύπτω. q. V.),an uncovering; 
1. prop. a laying bare, making naked (1 S. xx. 30). 
2. tropically, in N. T. and 600]. language [see end], a. 
a disclosure of truth, instruction, concerning divine 
things before unknown—esp. those relating to the 
Christian salvation — given to the soul by God himself, 
or by the ascended Christ, esp. through the operation of 
the Holy Spirit (1 Co. ii. 10), and so to be distinguished 
from other methods of instruction; hence, κατὰ ἀποκά- 
λυψιν γνωρίζεσθαι, Eph. 111. 3. πνεῦμα ἀποκαλύψεως, a 
spirit received from God disclosing what and how great 
are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 17, cf. 18. with gen. 
of the obj., rod μυστηρίου, Ro. xvi. 25. with gen. of the 
subj., κυρίου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by 
ecstasies and visions, [so 7]); Gal. 1. 12; Rev. i. 1 (rey- 
elation of future things relating to the consummation of 
the divine kingdom) ; κατ᾽ ἀποκάλυψιν, Gal. ii. 2; λαλεῖν 
ἐν ἀποκ. to speak on the ground of [al. in the form of] 
a revelation, agreeably to a revelation received, 1 Co. 
xiv. 6; equiv. to ἀποκεκαλυμμένον, in the phrase ἀποκά- 
λυψιν ἔχειν, 1 Co. xiv. 26. b. equiv. to τὸ ἀποκαλύ- 
πτεσθαι as used of events by which things or states or 
persons hitherto withdrawn from view are made visible 
to all, manifestation, appearance, cf. ἀποκαλύπτω, 2, ἃ. 
and e.: φῶς eis ἀποκάλ. ἐθνῶν a light to appear to the 
Gentiles[al. render ‘a light for a revelation (of divine 
truth) to the Gentiles,’ and so refer the use toa. above], 
Lk. ii. 32; ἀποκ. δικαιοκρισίας θεοῦ, Ro. ii. 5; τῶν υἱῶν 
τοῦ θεοῦ. the event in which it will appear who and what 
the sons of God are, by the glory received from God at 
the last day, Ro. viii. 19; τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ, of the 
glory clothed with which he will return from heaven, 1 
Pet. iv. 13; of this return itself the phrase is used aro- 
κάλυψις τοῦ κυρίου "I. Χριστοῦ : 2 Th. i. 7; 1 Co.i. 7; 1 Pet. 
i. 7,13. (Among Grk. writ. Plut. uses the word once, 
Cat. maj. ο. 20, of the denudation of the body, {also in 
Paul. Aemil. 14 4. ὑδάτων ; in Quomodo adul. ab amic. 32 
ἀ. ἁμαρτίας ; ef. Sir. xi. 27; xxii. 22 ete. See Trench 
§ xciv. and reff. s. v. ἀποκαλύπτω, fin.])* 

ἀπο-καραδοκία, -as, ἡ, (fr. ἀποκαραδοκεῖν, and this fr. ἀπό, 
κάρα the head, and δοκεῖν in the Ion. dial. to watch ; 
hence καραδοκεῖν [Hdt. 7. 163, 168; Xen. mem. 3, 5, 6; 
Eur., al.] to watch with head erect or outstretched, to 
direct attention to anything, to wait for in suspense; 
ἀποκαραδοκεῖν (Polyb. 16, 2, 8; 18, 31, 4; 22, 19, 3; 
[Plut. parall. p. 310, 43, vol. vii. p. 235 ed. Reiske]; 
Joseph. b.j. 3, 7, 26, and in Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 7 Aq. for 
55innn), anxiously [?] to look forth from one’s post. 
But the prefix ἀπό refers also to time (like the Germ. 
ab in abwarten, [ οἵ. Eng. wait it out]), so that it signifies 
constancy in expecting; hence the noun, found in Paul 
alone and but twice, denotes), anxious Ὁ] and persistent 
expectation: Ro. viii. 19; Phil. i. 20. This word is very 


ἀποκαταλλάσσω 6 


fully discussed by C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum 
Opusce. p. 150 sqq.; [cf. Ellic. and Lghtft. on Phil. 1. e.].* 

ἀπο-κατ-αλλάσσω or-7Tw: 1 aor. ἀποκατήλλαξα; 2 aor. 
pass. ἀποκατηλλάγητε (Col. i. 22 (21) L Tr mrg. WH mrg.); 
to reconcile completely (ἀπό), [al. to reconcile back again, 
bring back to a former state of harmony; Ellice. on Eph. 
ii.16; Bp. Lehtft. or Bleek on Col. i. 20; Win. De verb. 
comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 7 sq-; yet see Mey. on Eph. 1. c.; 
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 278; (see ἀπό V.) |, (cf. καταλ- 
Adoow): Col. i. 22 (21) [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; τινά 
τινι, Eph. ii. 16; concisely, πάντα εἰς αὑτόν [better αὐτόν 
with edd.; cf. B. p. 111 (97) and 5. v. αὑτοῦ], to draw to 
himself by reconciliation, or so to reconcile that they 
should be devoted to himself, Col. i. 20 [W. 212 (200) 
but ef. § 49, a.c.6.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor 
in the Grk. O. T.) * 

ἀπο-κατά-στασις., -ews, 7, (ἀποκαθίστημι. q. V-), restora- 
tion: τῶν πάντων, the restoration not only of the true 
theocracy but also of that more perfect state of (even 
physical) things which existed before the fall, Acts iii. 
21; cf. Meyer ad loc. (Often in Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.)* 

[ἀπο-κατ-ιστάνω, see ἀποκαθίστημι.] 

ἀπό-κειμαι ; fo be laid away, laid by, reserved, (ἀπό as in 
ἀποθησαυρίζω [q- v-], ἀποθήκη); a. prop.: Lk. xix. 20. 
b. metaph., with dat. of pers., reserved for one, awaiting 
him: Col. i. 5 (ἐλπίς hoped-for blessedness) ; 2 Tim. iv. 
8 (στέφανος) ; Heb. ix. 27 (ἀποθανεῖν, as in 4 Mace. viii. 
10). (In both senses in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down.) * 

ἀποκεφαλίζω: 1 aor. ἀπεκεφάλισα; (κεφαλή); to cut off 
the head, behead, decapitate: Mt. xiv. 10; Mk. vi. 16, 27 
(28); Lk. ix. 9. A later Grk. word: [Sept. Ps. fin.] ; 
Epict. diss. 1, 1, 19; 24; 29; Artem. oneir. 1, 35; ef. 
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 690 sqq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 341." 

ἀπο-κλείω : 1 aor. ἀπέκλεισα ; to shut up: τὴν θύραν, Lk. 
xiii. 25. (Gen. xix.10; 2S. xiii. 17sq.; often in Hdt.; 
in Attic prose writ. fr. Thuc. down.) * 

ἀπο-ικόπτω : 1 aor. ἀπέκοψα:; fut. mid. ἀποκόψομαι ; to 
cut off, amputate: Mk. ix. 43, [45]; Jn. xviii. 10, 26; 
Acts xxvii. 32; ὄφελον καὶ ἀποκόψονται I would that they 
(who urge the necessity of circumcision would not only 
circumcise themselves, but) would even mutilate them- 
selves (or cut off their privy parts), Gal. v.12. ἀποκό- 
πτεσθαι occurs in this sense in Deut. xxiii. 1; [Philo de 
alles. leg. iii. 3 ; de vict. off. § 13; ef. de spec. legg.i.§7]; 
Epict. diss. 2, 20,19; Leian. Eun. 8; [Dion Cass. 79, 11; 
Diod. Sic. 3, 31], and other pass. quoted by Wetst.. ad 
loc. [and Soph. Lex.s.v.]. Others incorrectly: I would 
that they would cut themselves off from the society of 
Christians, quit it altogether; [cf. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft. 
ad loc. ].* 

ἀπό-κριμα, -ros, τό, (ἀποκρίνομαι, q. Vv.in amoxpive), an 
answer: 2 Co. i. 9, where the meaning is, ‘On asking 
myself whether I should come out safe from mortal peril, 
I answered, “I must die.”’ (Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 6 of 
an answer (rescript) of the Roman senate; [similarly in 
Polyb. exept. Vat. 12, 26°, 1].)* 

amo-xpivw : [Pass., 1 aor. ἀπεκρίθην : 1 fut. ἀποκριθήσο- 


3 ἀποκρύπτω 


μαι]; i. to part, separate; Pass. to be parted, separated, 
(1 aor. ἀπεκρίθην was separated, Hom. Il. v. 12; Thue. 
2,49; [4, 72]; Theoph. de caus. plant. 6, 14, 10; [other 
exx. in Veitchs. v.]). ii. to give sentence against one, de- 
cide that he has lost; hence Mid., [pres. ἀποκρίνομαι; 1 aor. 
3 pers. sing. ἀπεκρίνατο] ; (to give forth a decision from 
myself [W. 253 (238) ]), to give answer, to reply; so from 
Thuc. down (and even in Hat. 5, 49 [Gaisf.]; 8, 101 
[Gaisf., Bekk.], who generally uses ὑ πο κρίνομαι). But. 
the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. do not give this 
sense to the pass. tenses ἀπεκρίθην, ἀποκριθήσομαι. “The 
example adduced from Plat. Alcib. Secund. p. 149 b. [ef. 
Stallb. p. 388] is justly discredited by Sturz, De dial. Alex. 
p- 148, since it is without parallel, the author of the dia- 
logue is uncertain, and, moreover, the common form is 
sometimes introduced by copyists.” Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 
108; [ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 186 sq.; Veitch 
s. v.; W. 23 (22)]. But from Polyb. down ἀποκριθῆναι 
and ἀποκρίνασθαι are used indiscriminately, and in the 
Bible the pass. forms are by far the more common. In the 
N. T. the aor. middle ἀπεκρίνατο is found only in Mt. 
xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61; Lk. iii. 16; xxiii. 9; Jn. v. 17, 
19; xii. 23[RGLTr mrg.]; Acts iii. 12; in the great 
majority of places ἀπεκρίθη is used; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B. 
51 (44)]- 1. to give an answer to a question proposed, 
to answer; a. simply: καλῶς, Mk. xii. 28; νουνεχῶς, 34; 
ὀρθῶς. Lk. x. 28; πρός τι, Mt. xxvii. 14. b. with acc.: 
λόγον, Mt. xxii. 46 ; οὐδέν, Mt. xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61; xv. 
4 sq. 6. with dat. ete.: ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ, Col. iv. 6; together 
with the words which the answerer uses, Jn. v. 7, 113; vi. 
7, 68, etc.; the dat. omitted: Jn. vii. 46; viii. 19, 49, ete. 
πρός twa, Acts xxv. 16. joined with φάναι, or λέγειν, or 
εἰπεῖν, in the form of a ptcp., as ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε or ἔφη 
or λέγει : Mt. iv. 4; vill. 8; xv. 13; LK. ix. 19; xiii: 2; 
Mk. x. 3, ete.; or ἀπεκρίθη λέγων: Mt. xxv. 9, 37, 44; 
Lk. iv.4 [R GL); viii. 50[RGTrmrg. br.]; Jn. i. 26; 
x. 33 [Ree.]; xii. 23. But John far more frequently says 
ἀπεκρίθη καὶ εἶπε : Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 19; iv. 13; vii. 16, 20 
[R 61, 52, ete. d. foll. by the inf.: Lk. xx. 7; foll. by 
the ace. with inf.: Acts xxv. 4; foll. by ὅτε : Acts xxv. 16. 
2. In imitation of the Hebr. 733: (Gesenius, Thesaur. 
ii. p. 1047) to begin to speak, but always where something 
has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks 
refer [W. 19]: Mt. xi. 25; xii. 38; xv. 15; xvii. 4; xxii. 
1; xxviii.5; Mk. ix.5,[6 T Tr WH]; x. 24; xi. 14; xii. 
35; Lk. xiv. 3; Jn. ii.18; v.17; Acts iii. 12; Rev. vii. 
13. (Sept. [Deut. xxvi. 5]; Is. xiv. 10; Zech. i. 10; 
iii. 4, etc.; 1 Mace. ii. 17; viii. 19; 2 Mace. xv. 14.) 
(Comp. : avt-aroxpivopat. | 

ἀπό-κρισις. -ews, 7, (ἀποκρίνομαι. see droxpive), a reply- 
ing, an answer: Lk. ii. 47; xx. 26; Jn. i. 22; xix. 9. 
(From [Theognis, 1167 ed. Bekk., 345 ed. Welck., andj 
Hat. down.) * 

ἀπο-κρύπτω: 1 aor. ἀπέκρυψα:; pf. pass. ptep. ἀποκεκρυμ- 
μένος; a. to hide: ri, Mt. xxv. 18 (L T Tr WH ἔκρυψε). 
b. Pass. in the sense of concealing, keeping secret : σοφία, 
1 Co. ii. 7; μυστήριον, Col. i. 26 (opp. to Pavepoda Gar) ; 
with the addition of ἐν τῷ θεῷ, Eph. iii. 9; ri ἀπό twos, 


ἀπόκρυφος 


Lk. x. 21; Mt. xi. 25 (1, Ὁ Tr WH ἔκρυψας), in imitation 
of the Hebr. 19, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 10; exviii. (cxix.) 
19; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 17; ef. κρύπτω, [B. 149 (130) ; 
189 (1638); W. 227 (213)]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

ἀπόκρυφος,-ον, (ἀποκρύπτων. hidden, secreted : Mk. iv. 22; 
Lk. viii. 17. stored up: Col. 11. 8. (Dan. xi. 43 [ Theod.]; 
Is. xlv. 3; 1 Mace. i. 23; Xen., Eur.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on 
the word, Col. 1. c., antl Ign. i. 351 sq.].)* 

ἀπο-κτείνω, and Aeol. -«τέννω (Mt. x. 28 LT Tr; Mk 
xii 5G LT Tr; Lk. xii. 4 LT Tr; 2 Co. 1. T Tr; 
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507 sq.; [7 Proleg. p. 79]; W. 
83 (79); [B.61 (54) ]), ἀποκτένω (Grsb. in Mt. x. 28; Lk. 
xii. 4), ἀποκταίνω (Lehm. in 2 Co. iii. 6; Rev. xiii. 10), 
ἀποκτέννυντες (Mk. xii. 5 WH); fut. ἀποκτενῶ; 1 aor. 
ἀπέκτεινα ; Pass., pres. inf. ἀποκτέννεσθαι (Rev. vi. 11 
ΟἿ, Τ Τὰ WH); 1 aor. ἀπεκτάνθην (Bim. Ausf. Spr. ii. 
227; W.1.c.; [B. 41 (35 sq.)]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. 
prop. to kill in any way whatever, (ἀπό i. e. so as to put 
out of the way; cf. [Eng. to kill of], Germ. abschlach- 
ten): Mt. xvi. 21; xxii. 6; Mk. vi. 19; ix. 31; Jn. v.18; 
viii. 22; Acts iii. 15; Rev. ii. 18, and very often ; [ἀποκτ. 
ἐν θανάτῳ, Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, ef. B. 184 (159); W. 339 
(319)]. to destroy (allow to perish): Mk. iii. 4 [yet al. 
take it here absol., fo kill]. 2. metaph. fo extinguish, 
abolish: τὴν ἔχθραν, Eph. ii. 16; to inflict moral death, Ro. 
vii. 11 (see ἀποθνήσκω, 11. 2) ; to deprive of spiritual life 
and procure eternal misery, 2 Co. iii. 6 [Lehm. ἀποκταίνει ; 
see above ]. 

ἀπο-κυέω, -@, OF ἀποκύω, (hence 8 pers. sing. pres. either 
ἀποκυεῖ [80 WII] or ἀποκύει, Jas. 1. 15; ef. W. 88 (84); 
B. 62 (54))3 1 aor. ἀπεκύησα ; (κύω. or κυέω, to be preg- 
nant; cf. ἔγκυος) ; 10 bring forth from the womb, give 
birth to: τινά, Jas. i. 15; to produce, ibid. 18. (4 Mace. 
xv. 17; Dion. Hal. 1, 70; Plut., Leian., Ael. v. h. 5, 4; 
Hdian. 1, 5, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; 1, 4, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.].)* 

ἀπο-κυλίω: fut. ἀποκυλίσω ; 1 aor. ἀπεκύλισα; pf. pass. 
[3 pers. sing. ἀποκεκύλισται Mk. xvi. 4 RG L but T Tr 
WH avakex.], ptep. ἀποκεκυλισμένος ; to roll off or away: 
Mt. xxviii. 2; Mk. xvi. 3; Lk. xxiv.2. (Gen. xxix. 3, 8, 
10; Judith xiii. 9; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 37; 5, 11, 3; 
Leian. rhet. praec. 3.) But see ἀνακυλίω." 

ἀπολαμβάνω ; fut. ἀπολήψομαι (Col. iii. 24; 1, Τ Tr 
WH ἀπολήμψεσθε; see λαμβάνω) ; 2 aor. ἀπέλαβον ; 2 aor. 
mid. ἀπελαβόμην; fr. Hdt. down; 1. fo receive (from 
another, ἀπό [cf. Mey. on Gal. iv. 5; Ellie. ibid. and Win. 
De verb. comp. ete. as below]) what is due or promised 
(cf. ἀποδίδωμι, 2): τ. υἱοθεσίαν the adoption promised to 
believers, Gal. iv. 5; τὰ ἀγαθά σου thy good things, “ which 
thou couldst expect and as it were demand, which seemed 
due to thee” (Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 13), 
Lk. xvi.25. Hence 2. to take again or back, to recover: 
Lk. vi. 34 [T Tr txt. WH λαβεῖν]; xv. 27; and to receive 
by way of retribution: Lk. xviii. 30 (L txt. Tr mrg. WH 
txt. λάβῃ); xxiii. 41; Ro. i. 27; 2 Jn. 3; Col. iii. 24. 
3. to take from others, take apart or aside; Mid. τινά, to 
take a person with one aside out of the view of others: 
with the addition of ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου κατ᾽ ἰδίαν in Mk. vii. 


64 


ἀποόλλιυμε 


33, (Joseph. b. 1. 2, 7, 2; and in the Act., 2 Mace. vi. 22; 
Ὑστάσπεα ἀπολαβὼν μοῦνον, dt. 1, 209; Arstph. ran. 
78; ἰδίᾳ ἕνα τῶν τριῶν ἀπολαβών, App. b. civ. 5, 40). 
4. to receive any one hospitably: 3 Jn. 8, where L T Tr 
WTI have restored ὑπολαμβάνειν." 

ἀπόλαυσις, -ews, 7, (fr. ἀπολαύω to enjoy), enjoyment 
(Lat. fructus): 1 Tim. vi. 17 (εἰς ἀπόλαυσιν to enjoy) ; 
Heb. xi. 25 (ἁμαρτίας ἀπόλ. pleasure born of sin). (In 
Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. and] Thue. down.)* 

ἀπο-λείπω : [impf. ἀπέλειπον, WH txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 18, 
20; Tit. i. 5]; 2 aor. ἀπέλιπον ; (fr. Hom. down]; 1. to 
leave, leave behind: one in some place, Tit. i. 5 L T Tr 
WIL; 2 Tim. iv. 18, 20. Pass. ἀπολείπεται it remains, is 
reserved: Heb. iv. 9; x. 26; foll. by acc. and inf., Heb. 
iv. 6. 2. to desert, forsake: a place, Jude 6.* 

ἀπο-λείχω : [impf. ἀπέλειχον] ; to lick off, lick up: Lk. 
xvi. 21 RG; ef. ἐπιλείχω. ([Apollon. Rhod. 4, 478]; 
Athen. vi. ὁ. 13 p. 250 a.) * 

ἀπ-όλλυμι and ἀπολλύω ([ἀπολλύει Jn. xii. 25 T Tr WH], 
impv. ἀπόλλυε Ro. xiv. 15, [ef. B. 45 (39); WH. App. p. 
168 sq.}); fut. ἀπολέσω and (1 Co. i. 19 ἀπολῶ fr. a pass. 
in the O. T., where often) ἀπολῶ (cf. W. 83 (80); [B. 
64 (56)]); 1 δον. ἀπώλεσα; to destroy; Mid., pres. ἀπόλ- 
λυμαι; [impf. 3 pers. plur. ἀπώλλυντο 1 Co. x. 9 T Tr 
WII]; fut. ἀπολοῦμαι ; 2 aor. ἀπωλόμην ; (2 pf. act. ptep. 
ἀπολωλώς) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to perish. 1. to destroy 
i. 6. to put out of the way entirely, abolish, put an end to, 
ruin: Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 84; xvii. 27, 29; Jude 5; τὴν 
σοφίαν render useless, cause its emptiness to be perceived, 
1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Sept. of Is. xxix. 14); to kill: Mt. ii. 13; 
xii. 14; Mk. ix. 22; xi. 18; Jn. x. 10, ete.; contextually, 
to declare that one must be put to death: Mt. xxvii. 20; 
metaph. to devote or give over to eternal misery: Mt. x. 
28; Jas. iv. 12; contextually, by one’s conduct to cause 
another to lose eternal salvation: Ro. xiv. 15. Mid. to 
perish, to be lost, ruined, destroyed; a. of persons; a. 
properly: Mt. viii. 25; Lk. xiii. 3, 5, 33; Jn. xi. 50; 2 
Pet. iii. 6; Jude 11, ete.; ἀπόλλυμαι λιμῷ, Lk. xv. 17; ἐν 
μαχαίρᾳ, Mt. xxvi. 52; καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀπολλύ- 
μενοι, 2 Co. iv. 9. β. tropically, to incur the loss of true 
or eternal life; to be delivered up to eternal misery: Jn. 
iii. 15 [R Lbr.], 16; x. 28; xvii. 12, (it must be borne in 
mind, that ace. to John’s conception eternal life begins 
on earth, just as soon as one becomes united to Christ by 
faith); Ro. ii. 12; 1 Co. viii. 11; xv. 18; 2 Pet. ili. 9. 
Hence of σωζόμενοι they to whom it belongs to partake of 
salvation, and of ἀπολλύμενοι those to whom it belongs to 
perish or to be consigned to eternal misery, are con- 
trasted by Paul: 1 Co. i. 18; 2Co. ii. 15; iv. 3; 2 Th. ii. 
10, (on these pres. pteps. cf. W. 342 (321); B. 206 
(178)). b. of things; to be blotted out, to vanish away : 
ἡ εὐπρέπεια, Jas. i. 11; the heavens, Heb.i. 11 (fr. Ps. ci. 
(cii.) 27); to perish, —of things which on being thrown 
away are decomposed, as μέλος τοῦ σώματος. Mt. v. 29 
84. ; remnants of bread, Jn. vi. 12; — or which perish in 
some other way, as βρῶσις, Jn. vi. 27; χρυσίον, 1 Pet. i. 7; 
—or which are ruined so that they can no longer subserve. 
the use for which they were designed, as of ἀσκοί: Mt. 


᾿Απολλύων 


ix. 17; ΜΚ. ii. 22; Lk. ν. 37. 2. to destroy i.e. to lose ; 
a. prop.: Mt. x. 42; Mk. ix. 41 (τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ); Lk. 
xv. 4, 8, 9; ix. 25; xvii. 33; Jn. xii. 25; 2 Jn. 8, ete. 
Ὁ. metaph. Christ is said to lose any one of his followers 
(whom the Father has drawn to discipleship) if such a 
one becomes wicked and fails of salvation: Jn. vi. 39, cf. 
xviii. 9. Mid. to be lost: θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Lk. xxi. 
18; 6. ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Acts xxvii. 34 (Ree. πεσεῖται) ; 
τὰ λαμπρὰ ἀπώλετο ἀπό gov, Rev. xviii. 14 (Rec. ἀπῆλθε). 
Used of sheep, straying from the flock: prop. Lk. xv. 4 
(τὸ ἀπολωλός, in Mt. xviii. 12 τὸ πλανώμενον). Metaph. 


in accordance with the O. T. comparison of the people | 


of Israel to a flock (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 6; Ezek. xxxiv. 4, 
16), the Jews, neglected by their religious teachers, left 
to themselves and thereby in danger of losing eternal sal- 
vation, wandering about as it were without guidance, are 
called τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα τοῦ οἴκου Ἰσραήλ: Mt. x. 
6; xv. 24, (Is. liii.6; 1 Pet. ii. 25); and Christ, reclaim- 
ing them from wickedness, is likened to a shepherd and 
is said ζητεῖν καὶ σώζειν τὸ ἀπολωλός : Lk. xix. 10; Mt. 
xviii. 11 Ree. [Comp.: συν-απόλλυμι.] 

᾿Απολλύων, -ovtos, 6, (ptep. fr. ἀπολλύω), Apollyon (a 
prop. name, formed by the author of the Apocalypse), 
i. e. Destroyer: Rey. ix. 11; οἵ. ᾿Αβάδδων, [and B. Ὁ. 
Stavall se 

᾿Απολλωνία, -as, ἡ, Apollonia, a maritime city of Mace- 
donia, about a day’s journey [ace. to the Antonine Itiner- 
ary 32 Roman miles] from Amphipolis, through which 
Paul passed on his way to Thessalonica [36 miles fur- 
ther]: Acts xvii.1. [See B. D.s. v.]* 

᾿Απολλώς [acc. to some, contr. fr. ᾿Απολλώνιος, W. 102 
(97) ; ace. to others, the ὁ is lengthened, cf. Fick, Griech. 
Personennamen, p. xxi.], gen. τώ (cf. B. 20 (18) sq.; [W- 
62 (61)]), accus. τώ (Acts xix. 1) and -ών (1 Co. iv. 6 T 
Tr WH; Tit. ii. 13 T WH; cf. [WH. App. p. 157]; 
Kiihner i. p. 315), ὁ, Apollos, an Alexandrian Jew who 
became a Christian and a teacher of Christianity, 
attached to the apostle Paul: Acts xviii. 24; xix. 1; 1 
Co. i. 12; iii. 4 sqq. 22; iv. 6; xvi. 12; Tit. iii. 13.* 

ἀπολογέομαι, -οὔμαι ; impf. ἀπελογούμην (Acts xxvi. 1); 
1 aor. ἀπελογησάμην; 1 aor. pass. inf. ἀπολογηθῆναι, in a 
reflex. sense (Lk. xxi. 14) ; a depon. mid. verb (fr. λόγος), 
prop. to speak so as to absolve (amd) one’s self, talk one’s 
self off of a charge ete. ; 1. to defend one’s self, make 
one’s defence: absol., Lk. xxi. 14; Acts xxvi. 1; foll. by 
ὅτι, Acts xxv. 8; τί, to bring forward something in de- 
fence of one’s self, Lk. xii. 11; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so 
in Grk. writ. also) ; τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπ. either I bring for- 
ward what contributes to my defence [Ὁ], or I plead my own 


cause [R. V. make my defence], Acts xxiv. 10; περί with | 


gen. of the thing and ἐπί with gen. of pers., concerning a 
thing before one’s tribunal, Acts xxvi. 2; with dat. of 
the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that 
Iam innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in 
one’s eyes [A. V. unto], Acts xix. 33; 2 Co. xii. 19, (Plat. 
Prot. p. 359 a.; often in Leian., Plut. ; [ef. B. 172 (149)]). 
2. to defend a person or a thing (so not infreq. in 
prot. auth.): Ro. ii. 15 (where ace. to the context the 


65 


, 
ἀπολύω 


deeds of men must be understood as defended) ; τὰ περὶ 
ἐμοῦ, Acts xxvi. 2 (but see under 1).* 

ἀπολογία, -as, 7}, (See απολογέομαι), verbal defence, speech 
in defence: Acts xxv. 16; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 7, 17 
(16); 2 Tim. iv. 16; with a dat. of the pers. who is to hear 
the defence, to whom one labors to excuse or to make 
good his cause: 1 Co. ix. 3; 1 Pet. ili. 15; in the same 
sense ἡ ἀπολ. ἡ πρός Twa, Acts xxii. 1, (Xen. mem. 4, 8, 5).* 

ἀπο-λούω : to wash off or away; in the N. T. twice in 
1 aor. mid. figuratively [cf. Philo de mut. nom. § 6, i. p. 
585 ed. Mang.]: ἀπελούσασθε, 1 Co. vi. 11; βάπτισαι καὶ 
ἀπύλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου, Acts xxii. 16. For the sin- 
ner is unclean, polluted as it were by the filth of his sins. 
Whoever obtains remission of sins has his sins put, so to 
speak, out of God’s sight, —is cleansed from them in 
the sight of God. Remission is [represented as] ob- 
tained by undergoing baptism; hence those who have 
gone down into the baptismal bath [/avacrum, ef. Tit. 
iii, 5; Eph. v. 26] are said ἀπολούσασθαι to have washed 
themselves, or tas ἅμαρτ. ἀπολούσασθαι to have washed 
away their sins, i.e.to have been cleansed from their 
sins.* 

ἀπο-λύτρωσις, -ews, 7, (fr. ἀπολυτρόω signifying a. to 
redeem one by paying the price, cf. λύτρον : Plut. Pomp. 
24; Sept. Ex. xxi. 8; Zeph. iii. 1; Ὁ. to let one go 
free on receiving the price: Plat. legg. 11 p. 919 a.; 
Polyb. 22, 21, 8; [ef.] Diod. 13, 24), a releasing effected 
by payment of ransom; redemption, deliverance, liberation 
procured by the paymentofaransom; 1. prop.: πόλεων 
αἰχμαλώτων, Plut. Pomp. 24 (the only pass. in prof. writ. 
where the word has as yet been noted; [add, Joseph. 
antt. 12, 2,3; Diod. frag. |. xxxvii. 5, 3 p. 149, 6 Dind.; 
Philo, quod omn. prob. lib. § 17]). 2. everywhere in 
the N. T. metaph., viz. deliverance effected through the 
death of Christ from the retributive wrath of a holy God 
and the merited penalty of sin: Ro. iii. 24; Eph. i. 7; 
Col. i. 14, (cf. ἐξαγοράζω. ἀγοράζω, λυτρόω, ete. [and 
Trench § Ixxvii.]) ; ἀπολύτρ. τῶν παραβάσεων deliverance 
from the penalty of transgressions, effected through 
their expiation, Heb. ix. 15, (ef. Delitzsch ad loc. and 
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 178); ἡμέρα ἀπολυτρώσεως, 
the last day, when consummate liberation is experienced 
from the sin still lingering even in the regenerate, and 
from all the ills and troubles of this life, Eph. iv. 30; in 
the same sense the word is apparently to be taken in 1 
Co. i. 30 (where Christ himself is said to be redemption, 
i.e. the author of redemption, the one without whom we 
could have none), and is to be taken in the phrase azo- 
λύτρ. τῆς περιποιήσεως, Eph. i. 14, the redemption which 
will come to his possession, or to the men who are God’s 
own through Christ, (ef. Meyer ad loc.) ; τοῦ σώματος, 
deliverance of the body from frailty and mortality, Ro. 
viii. 23 [W. 187 (176)]; deliverance from the hatred 
and persecutions of enemies by the return of Christ 
from heaven, Lk. xxi. 28, ef. xviii. 7 sq.; deliverance or 
release from torture, Heb. xi. 35.* 

ἀπο-λύω ; [impf. dméAvov]; fut. ἀπολύσω : 1 aor. ἀπέ- 
Avoa; Pass., pf. ἀπολέλυμαι ; 1 aor. ἀπελύθην ; [fut. ἀπο- 


ἅπομασσω 


λυθήσομαι] ; impf. mid. ἀπελυόμην (Acts xxviii. 25) ; used 
in the N. T. only in the historical books and in Heb. 
xiii. 23; fo loose from, sever by loosening, undo, [see ἀπό, 
Veils 1. to set free: τινά twos (so in Grk. writ. even 
fr. Hom. down), to liberate one from a thing (as from a 
bond), Lk. xiii. 12 (ἀπολέλυσαι [thou hast been loosed 
i.e.] be thou free from [ef. W. § 40, 4] τῆς ἀσθενείας [LT 
ἀπὸτ. ἀσθ.7). 2. to let go, dismiss, (to detain no longer) ; 
τινά, a. ἃ suppliant to whom liberty to depart is given 
by a decisive answer: Mt. xv. 23; Lk. ii. 29 (‘me whom 
thou hadst determined to keep on earth until I had seen 
the salvation prepared for Israel, ef. vs. 26, thou art now 
dismissing with my wish accomplished, and this dismis- 
sion is at the same time dismission also from life’ —in ref- 
erence to which ἀπολύειν is used in Num. xx. 29; Tob. 
iii. 6; [cf. Gen. xv. 2; 2 Mace. vii. 9; Plut. consol. ad 
Apoll. §13 ef. 11 fin.]); [Acts xxiii. 22]. b. to bid de- 
part, send away: Mt. xiv. 15, 22 sq.; xv. 32, 39; Mk. vi. 
36,45; viii. 3, 9; Lk. viii. 38; ix. 12; xiv. 4; Acts xiii. 3; 
xix. 41 (τὴν ἐκκλησίαν) ; pass. Acts xv. 30, 33. 3. to 
let go free, torelease; a. a captive, i. 6. to loose his bonds 
and bid him depart, to give him liberty to depart: Lk. 
xxii. 68 [R GL Trin br.]; xxiii. 22; Jn. xix. 10; Acts 
xvi. 35 sq.; xxvi. 32 (ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο [might have 
been set at liberty, cf. B. 217 (187), § 139, 27¢.; W. 305 
(286) 1. 6.7 might be free; pf. as in Lk. xiii. 12 [see 1 above, 
and W. 334 (313)]); Acts xxviii. 18 ; Heb. xiii. 23 ; amon. 
τινά τινι to release one to one, grant him his liberty: Mt. 
xxvii. 15, 17, 21, 26; Mk. xv. 6, 9, 11,15; Lk. xxiii. [16], 
17[R L in br.], 18, 20, 25; (Jn. xviii. 89]. Ῥ. to acquit 
one accused of a crime and set him at liberty: Jn. xix. 
12; Actsiii.13. ὁ. indulgently to grant a prisoner leave 
to depart: Acts iv. 21,23; v.40; xvii.9. ἃ. to release a 
debtor, i. e. not to press one’s claim against him, to remit 
his debt: Mt. xviii. 27; metaph. to pardon another his 
offences against me: Lk. vi. 37, (τῆς ἁμαρτίας ἀπολύεσθαι, 
2 Mace. xii. 45). 4. used of divorce, as ἀπολύω τὴν 
γυναῖκα to dismiss from the house, to repudiate: Mt. i. 
19; v. 31sq.; xix. 3, 7-9; Mk. x. 2, 4, 11; LK. xvi. 18; 
[1 Esdr. ix. 36]; and improperly a wife deserting her 
husband is said τὸν ἄνδρα ἀπολύειν in ΜΚ. x. 12 [ef. Diod. 
12, 18] (unless, as is more probable, Mark, contrary to 
historic accuracy [yet ef. Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 10], makes 
Jesus speak in accordance with Greek and Roman usage, 
ace. to which wives also repudiated their husbands [reff. 
in Mey. ad1.]) ; (ef. τυ, Jer. iii. 8; Deut. xxi. 14; xxii. 
19, 29). 5. Mid. ἀπολύομαι, prop. to send one’s self 
away; to depart [W. 253 (238)]: Acts xxviii. 25 (re- 
turned home; Ex. xxxiii. 11).* 

ἀπο-μάσσω: (μάσσω to touch with the hands, handle, 
work with the hands, knead), to wipe off; Mid. ἀπομάσ- 
copa to wipe one’s self off, to wipe off for one’s self: τὸν 
κονιορτὸν ὑμῖν, Lk. x. 11. (in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. 
down.) * 

ἀπο-νέμω ; (νέμω to dispense a portion, to distribute), fo 
assign, portion out, (ἀπό as in ἀποδίδωμι [q- v., cf. ἀπό. V.]): 
τινί τι Viz. τιμήν, Showing honor, 1 Pet. iii. 7, (so Hdian. 
1, 8, 13 τὴν τιμὴν καὶ THY εὐχαριστίαν, Joseph. antt. 1, 7, 


06 


ἀπορρίπτω 


1; τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ πᾶσαν ἐντροπήν, Ignat. ad Magnes. 3; 
first found in [Simon. 97 in Anthol. Pal. 7, 253, 2 (vol. i. 
Ρ- 64 ed. Jacobs)]; Pind. Isthm. 2, 68; often in Plat., 
Aristot., Plut., al.).* 

ἀπο-νίπτω : to wash off; 1 aor. mid. ἀπενιψάμην;; in 
mid. to wash one’s self off, to wash off for one’s self: τὰς 
χεῖρας, Mt. xxvii. 24, cf. Deut. xxi.6 sq. (The earlier 
Greeks say arovi¢e — but with fut. ἀπονίψω. 1 aor. ἀπέ- 
va; the later, as Theophr. char. 25 [30 (17)]; Plut. 
Phoe. 18; Athen. iv. ¢. 31 p. 149 ¢., ἀπονίπτω, although 
this is found [but in the mid.] even in Hom. Od. 18, 
179.)* 

ἀπο-πίπτω: 2 aor. ἀπέπεσον; [(cf. πίπτω) ; fr. Hom. 
down]; to fall off, slip down from: Acts ix. 18 [W. § 52, 
ἈΠ ΠΝ 

ἀπο-πλανάω, -ὥ; 1 aor. pass. ἀπεπλανήθην; to cause to 
go astray, trop. to lead away from the truth to error: τινά, 
Mk. xiii. 22; pass. to go astray, stray away from: ἀπὸ τῆς 
πίστεως, 1 Tim. vi. 10. ({Hippocr.]; Plat. Ax. p. 369 d.; 
Polyb. 3, 57, 4; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) * 

ἀπο-πλέω ; 1 aor. ἀπέπλευσα; [fr. Hom. down]; to sail 
away, depart by ship, set sail: Acts xiii. 4; xiv. 26; xx. 
Lon evan Lee 

ἀπο-πλύνω : [1 aor. ἀπέπλυνα (?)]; to wash off: Lk. v. 2 
(where L Tr WH txt. ἔπλυνον, TWH mre. -av, for R ἃ 
ἀπέπλυναν [possibly an impf. form, cf. B. 40 (35); 
Soph. Glossary, ete. p. 90]). (Hom. Od. 6, 95; Plat., 
Plut., and subseq. writ.; Sept. 2S. xix. 24, [ef. Jer. ii. 22; 
iv. 14; Ezek. xvi. 9 var.].) * 

ἀπο-πνίγω: 1 aor. amémuéa; 2 aor. pass. ἀπεπνίγην; 
(ἀπό as in ἀποκτείνω q. ν. [ef. to choke off ]); to choke: 
Mt. xiii. 7 (T WH mre. émméav) ; Lk. viii. 7 (of seed over- 
laid by thorns and killed by them) ; to suffocate with 
water, to drown, Lk. viii. 33 (as in Dem. 32, 6 [i.e.p. 
883, 28 ete.; schol. ad Eur. Or. 812]).* 

ἀπορέω, - : impf. 3 pers. sing. ἠπόρει (Mk. vi. 20 TWH 
Trmrg.) ; [pres. mid. ἀποροῦμαι] ; to be ἄπορος (fr. a priv. 
and πόρος a transit, ford, way, revenue, resource), i. e. 
to be without resources, to be in straits, to be left wanting, 
to be embarrassed, to be in doubt, not to know which way 
to turn; [impf. in Mk. vi. 20 (see above) πολλὰ ἠπόρει he 
was in perplexity about many things or much perplexed 
(ef. Thue. 5, 40,3; Xen. Hell. 6, 1, 4; Hdt. 3,4; 4,179; 
Aristot. meteorolog. 1, 1) ; elsewhere] Mid. to be at a loss 
with one’s self, be in doubt; not to know how to decide or 
what to do, to be perplexed: absol. 2 Co. iv. 8; περί τινος, 
Lk. xxiv.4 LT Tr WH; περὶ τίνος τις λέγει; Jn. xiii. 22 ; 
ἀποροῦμαι ἐν ὑμῖν I am perplexed about you, I know not 
how to deal with you, in what style to address you, Gal. 
iv. 20; ἀπορούμενος ἐγὼ εἰς [T Tr WH om. εἰς] τὴν περὶ 
τούτου [-των L T Tr WH] ζήτησιν I being perplexed how 
to decide in reference to the inquiry concerning him [or 
these things], Acts xxv. 20. (Often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 
down; often also in Sept.) [Comp.: 8c, eamopéw.]* 

ἀπορία, -as, 9, (ἀπορέω, 4. V-), the state of one who is 
ἄπορος, perplexity: Lk. xxi.25. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. 
[Pind. and] Hdt. down; Sept.) * 

ἀπο-ρρίπτω: 1 aor. ἀπέρριψα [T WH write with one p; 


ἀπορφανιζω 


see P,p]; [fr. Hom. down]; to throw away, cast down; re- 
flexively, to cast one’s self down: Acts xxvii. 43 [R.V. cast 
themselves overboard]. (Soin Lcian. ver. hist. 1, 30 var. ; 
[Chariton 3, 5, see D’Orville ad loc.]; οἵ. W. 251 (236) ; 
[B. 145 (127)].)* 

ἀπ-ορφανίζω: [1 aor. pass. ptep. ἀπορφανισθείς] ; (fr. 
ὀρφανός bereft, and ἀπό se. τινός), to bereave of a parent or 
parents, (so Aeschyl. choéph. 247 (249)); hence metaph. 
ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν bereft of your intercourse and 
society, 1 Th. ii. 17 [here Rec*!# (by mistake) ἀποφανι- 
obevtes |.* 

ἀπο-σκευάζω: 1 aor. mid. ἀπεσκευασάμην; (σκευάζω to 
prepare, provide, fr. σκεῦος a utensil), to carry off goods 


and chattels; to pack up and carry off; mid. to carry off 


one’s personal property or provide for its carrying away, 
(Polyb. 4, 81, 11; Diod. 13, 91; Dion. Hal. 9, 23, etc.) : 
ἀποσκευασάμενοι having collected and removed our bag- 
gage, Acts xxi. 15; but L T Tr WH read ἐπισκευασάμε- 
νοι (qj. V.).* 

ἀπο-σκίασμα, -ros, τό, (σκιάζω. fr. σκιά), a shade cast by 
one object upon another, a shadow: τροπῆς ἀποσκίασμα 
shadow caused by revolution, Jas.i.17. Cf. ἀπαύγασμα." 

ἀπο-σπάω, -@; 1 aor. ἀπέσπασα; 1 aor. pass. ἀπεσπάσθην; 
to draw off, tear away: τ. μάχαιραν to draw one’s sword, Mt. 
xxvi. 51 (ἐκσπᾶν τ. pay. (or ῥομφαίαν), 1S. xvii. 51 [Alex. 
ete.]; σπᾶν, 1 Chr. xi. 11; Mk. xiv. 47); ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς 
μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν to draw away the disciples to their 
own party, Acts xx. 30, (very similarly, Ael. v. ἢ. 13, 32). 
Pass. reflexively: ἀποσπασθέντες am αὐτῶν having torn 
ourselves from the embrace of our friends, Acts xxi. 1; 
ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν he parted, tore himself, from them 
about a stone’s cast, Lk. xxii. 41; cf. Meyer adloc. (In 
prof. auth. fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down.) * 

ἀποστασία, -as, 7, (ἀφίσταμαι), a falling away, defection, 
apostasy; in the Bible sc. from the true religion: Acts 
xxi. 21; 2 Th. ii. 3; ([Josh. xxii. 22; 2 Chr. xxix. 19; 
xxxiii. 19]; Jer. ii. 19 ; xxxvi. (xxix.) 32 Compl. ; 1 Mace. 
ii. 15). The earlier Greeks say ἀπόστασις ; see Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 528; [W. 24].* 

ἀποστάσιον, -ov, τό, very seldom in native Grk. writ., 
defection, of a freedman from his patron, Dem. 35, 48 
[940, 16]; in the Bible 1. divorce, repudiation: Mt. 
xix. 7; Mk. x. 4 (βιβλίον ἀποστασίου, equiv. to DD 
nid book or bill of divorce, Deut. xxiv. 1, 3; [Is. 1. ie 
Jer. iii. 8]). 2. α bill of divorce: Mt.v. 31. Grotius 
ad loc. and Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. ad loc., give a copy 
of one.* : 

ἀπο-στεγάζω: 1 aor. ἀπεστέγασα; (στεγάζω, fr. στέγη) ; 
to uncover, take off the roof: Mk. ii. 4 (Jesus, with his 
hearers, was in the ὑπερῷον q. v., and it was the roof of 
this which those who were bringing the sick man to Jesus 
are said to have ‘dug out’; [cf. B. D. s. v. House, p. 
1104]). (Strabo 4, 4, 6, p. 303; 8, 3, 30, p. 542.) * 

ἀπο-στέλλω; fut. ἀποστελῶ ; 1 aor. ἀπέστειλα; pf. ἀπέ- 
σταλκα, [3 pers. plur. ἀπέσταλκαν Acts xvi. 36 LT Tr WH 
(see γίνομαι init.) ; Pass., pres. drooreAAopat |; pf. ἀπέσταλ- 
pat; 2 aor. ἀπεστάλην ; [fr. Soph. down]; prop. to send 
off; sena away ; 1. to order (one) to go to a place ap- 


6/ 


5 τς 
ἀποστέλλω 


pointed; a. either persons sent with commissions, 
or things intended for some one. So, very frequently, 
Jesus teaches that God sent him, as Mt. x. 40; Mk. ix. 
37; Lk. x.16; Jn. v. 36, ete. he, too, is said to have sent 
his apostles, i. 6. to have appointed them: Mk. vi. 7; Mt. 
x.16; Lk. xxii. 35; Jn. xx. 21, etc. messengers are sent: 
LK. vii. 3 ; ix. 52; x. 1; servants, Mk. vi. 27; xii. 2; Mt. 
xxi. 36; xxii. 3; an embassy, Lk. xiv. 32; xix. 14; an- 
gels, Mk. xiii. 27; Mt. xxiv. 31, ete. Things are said 
to be sent, which are ordered to be led away or con- 
veyed to any one, as Mt. xxi. 3; Mk. xi. 3; τὸ δρέπανον 
i.e. reapers, Mk. iv. 29 [al. take ἀποστέλλω here of 
the “ putting forth” of the sickle, i. e. of the act of reap- 
ing; cf. Joel (iii. 18) iv. 13; Rev. xiv. 15 (s. v. πέμπω, b.) }; 
τὸν λόγον, Acts x. 36; xiii. 26 (1, T Tr WH ἐξαπεστάλη) ; 
τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν (equiv. to τὸ ἐπηγγελμένον, i. 6. the prom- 
ised Holy Spirit) ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς, Lk. xxiv. 49 [T Tr WH ἐξα- 
ποστέλλω ; τὶ διὰ χειρός τινος, after the Hebr. 1713, Acts 
χὶ. 80. Ὁ. The Place of the sending is specified : ἀποστ. 
εἴς τινα τόπον, Mt. xx. 2; Lk. i. 26; Acts vii. 34; x. 8; 
xix. 22; 2 Tim. iv. 12; Rev. v. 6, ete. God sent Jesus eis 
τὸν κόσμον : Jn. iii. 17; x. 36; xvii. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9. εἰς 
[unto 1.6.1 among: Mt. xv. 24; Lk. xi.49; Acts [xxii. 21 
WH mrg.]; xxvi.17; [ἐν (by a pregnant or a Lat. con- 
struction) cf. W. $50, 4; B. 329 (283): Mt. x. 16; Lk. 
x. 3; yet see 1 a. above]; ὀπίσω τινός, Lk. xix. 14; ἔμπρο- 
σθέν twos, Jn. iii. 28; and πρὸ προσώπου τινός, after 
the Hebr. 359, before (to precede) one: Mt. xi. 10; 
Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; x. 1. πρός twa, to one: Mt. xxi. 
34, 37; Mk. xii. 2 sq.; Lk. vii. 3, 20; Jn. v. 33; Acts 
viii. 14; 2 Co. xii. 17, ete. Whence,or by or from 
whom, one is sent: ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. i. 26 (T Tr 
WH aro) ; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jn. i. 6 (Sir. xv. 9); ἀπό with gen. 
of pers., from the house of any one: Acts x.17 [T WH 
Tr mrg. ὑπό], 21 Rec. ; ἐκ with gen. of place: Jn. i. 19. 
c. The Object of the mission is indicated by an infin. 
following: Mk. iii. 14; Mt. xxii. 3; Lk.i.19; iv. 18 (Is. 
lxi. 1, [on the pf. cf. W. 272 (255); B. 197 (171)]); Lk. 
ix. 2; Jn. iv. 38; 1 Co.i.17; Rev. xxii. 6. [foll. by εἰς for. 
eis διακονίαν, Heb. i. 14. foll. by wa: Mk. xii. 2,13; Lk. 
xx.10, 20; Jn.i. 193 111. 17; vii. 32; 1Jn.iv. 9. [foll. by 
ὅπως: Actsix.17.] foll. by an ace. withinf.: Acts v. 21. 
foll. by twa with a pred. ace. : Acts iii. 26 (εὐλογοῦντα 
ὑμᾶς to confer God’s blessing on you [cf. B. 203 (176) 
sqq-]) ; Acts vii. 35 (ἄρχοντα, to be aruler); 1 Jn. iv. 10. 
ἃ. ἀποστέλλειν by itself, without an ace. [ef. W. 594 
(552); B. 146 (128)]: as ἀποστέλλειν πρός τινα, Jn. ν. 
33; with the addition of the ptep. λέγων, λέγουσα, λέ- 
γοντες, to say through a messenger : Mt. xxvii. 19; MK. iii. 
31 [here φωνοῦντες αὐτόν R G, καλοῦντες ait. 1, T Tr 
WH); Jn. xi. 3; Acts xiii. 15; [xxi. 25 περὶ τῶν πεπιστευ- 
κότων ἐθνῶν ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν (L Tr txt. WH txt.) xpi- 
vavres ete. we sent word, giving judgment, ete.]. When 
one accomplished anything through a messenger, it is ex- 
pressed thus: ἀποστείλας or πέμψας he did so and so; as, 
ἀποστείλας ἀνεῖλε, Mt. ii. 16; Mk. vi. 17; Acts vii. 14; 
Rey. i. 1; (so also the Greeks, as Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 6 πέμψας 
ἠρώτα, Plut. de liber. educ. c. 14 πέμψας ἀνεῖλε τὸν Θεό- 


ἀποστερέω 


κριτον ; and Sept. 2 K. vi. 18 ἀποστεῖλας λήψομαι αὐτόν). 
2. to send away i. 6. to dismiss; a. to allow one to de- 
part: τινὰ ἐν ἀφέσει, that he may be in a state of liberty, 
Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. Iviii. 6). b. to order one to depart, 
send off: Mk. viii. 26; τινὰ κενόν, Mk. xii. 8. ὁ. to drive 
away: Mk. v.10. [Comp.: ἐξ-, συν-αποστέλλω. SYN. see 
πέμπω, fin. | 

ἀπο-στερέω, -&; 1 aor. ἀπεστέρησα; [Pass., pres. ἀπο- 
στεροῦμαι]; pf. ptep. ἀπεστερημένος ; to defraud, rob, de- 
spoil: absol., Mk. x. 19; 1 Co. vi. 8; ἀλλήλους to with- 
hold themselves from one another, of those who mutually 
deny themselves cohabitation, 1 Co. vii.5. Mid. to allow 
one’s self to be defrauded [W. § 38, 3]: 1 Co. vi. 7; τινά 
τινις (as in Grk. writ.), to deprive one of a thing; pass. 
ἀπεστερημένοι τῆς ἀληθείας, 1 Tim. vi. 5 [W. 196 (185); B. 
158 (138) ]; τί to defraud ofa thing, to withdraw or keep 
back a thing by fraud: pass. μισθὸς ἀπεστερημένος, Jas. 
v. 4 (T Tr WH ἀφυστερημένος, see ἀφυστερέω ; [cf. also 
ἀπό, II. 2 ἃ. bb. p. 59°]), (Deut. xxiv. 14 [(16) Alex.]; 
Mal. iii. 5).* 

ἀπο-στολή. -ῆς. ἡ. (ἀποστέλλω) ; 1. a sending away: 
Τιμολέοντος εἰς Σικελίαν, Plut. Timol. 1, ete.; of the 
sending off of a fleet, Thue. 8,9; also of consuls with an 
army, i. e. of an expedition, Polyb. 26, 7, 1. 2. a send- 
ing away i. e. dismission, release: Sept. Eccl. viii. 8. 
3. a thing sent, esp of gifts: 1 K. ix. 16 [Alex.]; 1 Mace. 
ii. 18 ete. cf. Grimm ad loc. 4. in the N. T. the office 
and dignity of the apostles of Christ, (Vulg. apostolatus), 
apostolate, apostleship: Acts i. 25; Ro. i.5; 1 Co. ix. 2; 
Gal. ii. 8." 

ἀπόστολος, -ov, 6; 1. a delegate, messenger, one sent 
forth with orders, (Hat. 1, 21 ; 5, 38; for mow in 1 K. xiv. 
6 [Alex.]; rabbin. m-u/) : Jn. xiii. 16 (where ὁ ἀπόστ. and 
ὁ πέμψας αὐτόν are contrasted) ; foll. by a gen., as τῶν ἐκ- 
κλησιῶν, 2 Co. viii. 23; Phil. ii. 25; andor. τῆς ὁμολογίας 
ἡμῶν the apostle whom we confess, of Christ, God’s chief 
messenger, who has brought the κλῆσις ἐπουράνιος, as 
compared with Moses, whom the Jews confess, Heb. iii. 
rE 2. Specially applied to the twelve disciples whom 
Christ selected, out of the multitude of his adherents, to 
be his constant companions and the heralds to proclaim to 
men the kingdom of God: Mt. x. 14; Lk. vi. 13; Acts i. 
26; Rey. xxi. 14, and often, but nowhere in the Gospel 
and Epistlesof John; [the word ἀπόστολος occurs. 79 
times in the N. T., and of these 68 instances are in St. 
Luke and St. Paul.” Bp. Lghtft.]. With these apostles 
Paul claimed equality, because through a heavenly inter- 
vention he had been appointed by the ascended Christ 
himself to preach the gospel among the Gentiles, and 
owed his knowledge of the way of salvation not to man’s 
instruction but to direct revelation from Christ himself, 
and moreover had evinced his apostolic qualifications by 
many signal proofs: Gal. i. 1, 11 sq.; ii. 8; 1Co.i. 17; 
ix. 1 sq.; xv. 8-10; 2 Co. iii. 2sqq. ; xii. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 7; 
2 Tim. i. 11, ef. Acts xxvi. 12-20. According to Paul, 
apostles surpassed as well the various other orders of 
Christian teachers (ef. διδάσκαλος, εὐαγγελιστής, mpo- 
φήτης), as also the rest of those on whom the special 


68 


ἀποσυνώγωγος 


gifts (cf. χάρισμα) of the Holy Spirit had been bestowed, 
by receiving a richer and more copious conferment of 
the Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28sq.; Eph.iv.11. Certain false 
teachers are rated sharply for arrogating to themselves 
the name and authority of apostles of Christ: 2 Co. xi. 
5, 13; Rev. ii. 2. 3. Ina broader sense the name is 
transferred to other eminent Christian teachers; as 
Barnabas, Acts xiv. 14, and perhaps also Timothy and 
Silvanus, 1 Th. ii. 7 (6), ef. too Ro. xvi. 7 (?). But in 
Lk. xi. 49; Eph. iii. 5; Rev. xviii. 20, ‘ apostles’ is to be 
taken in the narrower sense. [On the application of 
the term see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. pp. 92-101; Har. 
nack on ‘Teaching’ ete. 11, 3; ef BB.DD.s. ν.] 
ἀποστοματίζω ; (στοματίζω --- ποῖ extant —from στόμαν; 
prop. to speak ἀπὸ στόματος, (cf. ἀποστηθίζω) ; 1. to 
recite from memory: Themist. or. 20 p. 238 ed. Hard. ; 
to repeat to a pupil (anything) for him to commit to mem- 
ory: Plat. Euthyd. p. 276 ο., 277 a.; used of a Sibyl 
prophesying, Plut. Thes. 24. 2. to ply with questions, 
catechize, and so to entice to [off-hand] answers : τινά, Lk. 
xi. 53.* 
ἀπο-στρέφω ; fut. ἀποστρέψω ; 1 aor. ἀπέστρεψα; 2 aor. 
pass. ἀπεστράφην:; [pres. mid. ἀποστρέφομαι; fr. Hom. 
down]; 1. to turn away: twa or τὶ ἀπό twos, 2 Tim. iv. 
4 (τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας) ; to remove anything from 
any one, Ro. xi. 26 (Is. lix. 20); ἀποστρέφειν τινά simply, 
to turn him away from allegiance to any one, tempt to 
defection, [A. V. pervert], Lk. xxiii. 14. 2. to turn 
back, return, bring back: Mt. xxvi. 52 (put back thy 
sword into its sheath); Mt. xxvii. 3, of Judas bringing 
back the shekels, where T Tr WH ἔστρεψε, [cf. Test. xii. 
Patr. test. Jos. § 17]. (Inthe same sense for 2 τ, Gen. 
xiv. 16; xxviii. 15; xliii. 11 (12), 20 (21), ete.; Bar. i. 
8; ii. 34, ete.) 3. intrans. to turn one’s self away, turn 
back, return: ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν, Acts iii. 26, ef. 19, (ἀπὸ 
ἁμαρτίας, Sir. viii. 5; xvii. 21 [26 Tdf.]; to return from 
a place, Gen. xviii. 33 ; 1 Mace. xi. 54, ete.; [see Kneucker 
on Bar. i. 13]; Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 12); cf. Meyer on Acts 
l. c.; [al. (with A. V.) take it actively here: in turning 
away every one of you, ete.]. 4. Mid., with 2 aor. 
pass., fo turn one’s self away from, with ace. of the obj. 
(cf. [Jelf § 548 obs. 1; Kriig. § 47, 23,1]; B. 192 (166)); 
to reject, refuse: τινά, Mt. v. 42; Heb. xii. 25; τὴν ἀλή- 
θειαν, Tit. i. 14; in the sense of deserting, τινά, 2 Vim. i. 15.* 
ἀπο-στυγέω, -@; to dislike, abhor, have a horror of: Ro. 
xii. 9; (Hdt. 2, 47; 6, 129; Soph., Eur., al.). The 
word is fully diseussed by Fritzsche ad loc. [who takes 
the ἀπο- as expressive of separation (cf. Lat. re for- 
midare), al. regard it as intensive; (see ἀπό, V.)].* 
ἀποσυνάγωγος, -ov, (συναγωγή; 4- V-), excluded from the 
sacred assemblies of the Israelites ; excommunicated, PAs. 
put out of the synagogue]: Jn. ix. 22; xii. 42; xvi. 2. 
Whether it denotes also exclusion fr. all intercourse with 
Israelites (2 Esdr. x. 8), must apparently be left in 
doubt; ef. Win. [or Riehm] R W Β. s. ν. Bann ; Wieseler 
on Gal. i. 8, p. 45 sqq. [reproduced by Prof. Ridale in 
Schaff’s Lange’s Romans pp. 304-306; ef. B. Ὁ. 8. v. 
Excommunication]. (Not found in prof. auth.)* 


ἀποτάσσω 


ἀποτάσσω: to set apart, to separate; in the N. T. only 
in Mid. ἀποτάσσομαι ; 1 aor. ἀπεταξάμην; 1. prop. to 
separate one’s self, withdraw one’s self from any one, i.e. 
to take leave of, bid farewell to, (Vulg. valefacio [ete.]) : 
τινί, Mk. vi. 46; Lk. ix. 61; Acts xviii. 18,21 [here L T 
Tr om. the dat.]; 2 Co. ii. 13. (That the early Grk. 
writ. never so used the word, but said ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα, is 
shown by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 23 sq.; [οἷ. W. 23 (22); 
B. 179 (156)].) 2. trop. to renounce, forsake: τινί, 
Lk. xiv. 33. (So also Joseph. antt. 11, 6,8; Phil. alle. 
ili. § 48; ταῖς τοῦ βίου φροντίσι, Euseb. ἢ. 6. 2, 17, 5; [τῷ 
βίῳ, Ignat. ad Philadelph. 11, 1; cf. Herm. mand. 6, 2, 
9; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor.6, 4 and 5 where see Gebh. and 
Harn. for other exx., also Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * 

ἀπο-τελέω, -@ ; [1 aor. pass. ptep. ἀποτελεσθείς ; fo per- 
feet; to bring quite to an end: ἰάσεις, accomplish, Lk. xiii. 
32 (LT Tr WH for R ἃ ἐπιτελῶ) ; ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀποτελε- 
σθεῖσα having come to maturity, Jas.i.15. (Hdt., Xen., 
Plat., and subseq. writ.) * 

ἀπο-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. ἀπεθέμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to 
put off or aside; in the N. T. only mid. to put off from 
one’s self: τὰ ἱμάτια, Acts vii. 58 ; [to lay up or away, ἐν τῇ 
φυλακῇ (i. e. put), Mt. xiv. 3 L T Tr WH (so εἰς φυλα- 
κήν, Lev. xxiv. 12; Num. xv. 34; 2 Chr. xviii. 26; Polyb. 
24, 8, 8; Diod. 4, 49, etc.)]; trop. those things are said 
to be put off or away which any one gives up, renounces: 
as τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους, Ro. xiii. 12; — Eph. iv. 22 [οἵ W. 
347 (325); B.274 (236) ], 25; Col. iii. 8; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. 
ii. 1; Heb. xii. 1 ; (τὴν ὀργήν, Plut. Coriol. 19; τὸν πλοῦ- 
τον, τὴν μαλακίαν, etc. Luc. dial. mort. 10, 8; τ. ἐλευθερίαν 
kx. παρρησίαν, ibid. 9, ete.).* 

ἀπο-ττινάσσω: 1 aor. ἀπετίναξα ; [1 aor. mid. ptep. ἀπο- 
τιναξάμενος, Acts xxviii. 5 Tr mrg.] ; to shake off: Lk. ix. 
5; Acts xxviii. 5. (1 5. x. 2; Lam. ii. 7; Eur. Bacch. 
253; [ἀποτιναχθῇ, Galen 6, 821 ed. Kiihn].) * 

aro-tivw and ἀπο-τίω: fut. ἀποτίσω; (ἀπό as in ἀποδί- 
δωμι [cf. also ἀπό, V.]), to pay off, repay: Philem. 19. 
(Often in Sept. for now; in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀπο-τολμάω, -ὦ ; prop. to be bold of one’s self (ἀπό [q. ν. 
V.]), i. 6. to assume boldness, make bold: Ro. x. 20; οἵ. 
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt.iv. p.15. (Occasionally in 
Thue., Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) * 

ἀποτομία, -as, 7, (the nature of that which is ἀπότομος, 
cut off, abrupt, precipitous like a cliff, rough; fr. ἀπο- 
τέμνω), prop. sharpness, (differing fr. ἀποτομή a cutting 
off, a segment); severity, roughness, rigor: Ro. xi. 22 
(where opp. to χρηστότης, as in Plut. de lib. edue. c. 18 
to πραότης, in Dion. Hal. 8, 61 to τὸ ἐπιεικές, and in Diod. 
p- 591 [exept. Ixxxiii. (frag. 1. 32, 27, 3 Dind.)] to jpe- 
porns).* 

ἀποτόμως, adv., (cf. ἀποτομία) ; a. abruptly, precipi- 
tously. b. trop. sharply, severely, [ef. our curtly]: Tit. i. 
13; 2 Co. xiii. 10. On the adj. ἀπότομος οἴ. Grimm on 
Sap. p. 121 [who in illustration of its use in Sap. v. 20, 
22; vi. 5, 11; xi. 10; xii. 9; xviii. 15, refers to the 
similar metaph. use in Diod. 2, 57; Longin. de sublim. 
27; and the use of the Lat. abscisus in Val. Max. 2, 7, 


69 


ἀπόχρησις 


ἀπο-τρέπω : [fr. Hom. down]; to turn away; ΜΙᾺ. [pres. 
ἀποτρέπομαι, impv. ἀπυτρέπου) to turn one’s self away 
JSrom, to shun, avoid: τινά or τί (see ἀποστρέφω sub fin.) 
2 Tim. iii. 5. (4 Mace. i. 33; Aeschyl. Sept. 1060; Eur. 
Iph. Aul. 336; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 815°, 18; Polyb. 
al.].)* 

ἀπ-ουσία, -as, 7, (ἀπεῖναι), absence: Phil. ii. 12. 
Aeschyl. down. ]* 

ἀπο-φέρω: 1 aor. ἀπήνεγκα ; 2 aor. inf. ἀπενεγκεῖν ; Pass., 
[pres. inf. dropépeoOar|; 1 aor. inf. ἀπενεχθῆναι; [fr- 
Hom. down]; to carry off, take away: τινά, with the idea 
of violence included, Mk. xv. 1; εἰς τόπον τινά, Rev. xvii. 
3; xxi. 10; pass. Lk. xvi. 22. to carry or bring away 
(Lat. defero) : ri eis with ace. of place, 1 Co. xvi. 3; τὶ 
ἀπό twos ἐπί twa, with pass., Acts xix. 12 (LT Tr WH 
for Rec. ἐπιφέρεσθαι)" 

ἀπο-φεύγω [ptcp. in 2 Pet. ii. 18 LT Tr WH; W. 342 
(321)]; 2 aor. ἀπέφυγον; [fr. (Hom.) batrach. 42, 47 
down]; to flee from, escape; with acc., 2 Pet. ii. 18 
(where L T wrongly put a comma after ἀποφ. [W. 529 
(492)]), 20; with gen., by virtue of the prep. [B. 158 
(138); W. § 52, 4, 1 ¢.], 2 Pet. i. 4.* 

ἀποφθέγγομαι; 1 aor. ἀπεφθεγξάμην ; to speak out, 
speak forth, pronounce, not a word of every-day speech, 
but one “belonging to dignified and elevated discourse, 
like the Lat. profari, pronuntiare; properly it has the 
force of to utter or declare one’s self, give one’s opinion, 
(einen Ausspruch thun), and is used not only of prophets 
(see Kypke on Acts ii. 4,— adding from the Sept. Ezek. 
xiii. 9; Mic. v. 12; 1 Chr. xxv. 1), but also of wise men 
and philosophers (Diog. Laért. 1,63; 73; 79; whose 
pointed sayings the Greeks call ἀποφθέγματα, Cic. off. 1, 
29)”; [see φθέγγομαι]. Accordingly, “it is used of the 
utterances of the Christians, and esp. Peter, on that illus- 
trious day of Pentecost after they had been fired by the 
Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4, 14; and also of the disclosures 
made by Paul to [before] king Agrippa concerning the 
ἀποκάλυψις κυρίου that had been given him, Acts xxvi. 
25.” Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 16.* 

ἀπο-φορτίζομαι ; (φορτίζω to load; φόρτος a load), to 
disburden one’s self; ri, to lay down a load, unlade, dis- 
charge: τὸν γόμον, of a ship, Acts xxi. 3; οἵ. Meyer and 
De Wette ad loc.; W. 349 (328) sq. (Elsewhere also 
used of sailors lightening ship during a storm in order to 
avoid shipwreck: Philo de praem. et poen. ὃ 5 xuSep- 
VITNS, χειμώνων ἐπιγινομένων, ἀποφορτίζεται ; Athen. 2, 5, 
p- 37 ¢. sq. where it occurs twice.) * 

ἀπό-χρησις, -ews, 7, (ἀποχράομαι to use to the full, to 
abuse), abuse, misuse: Col. ii. 22 ἅ ἐστιν πάντα εἰς φθορὰν 
τῇ ἀποχρήσει “all which (i. 6. things forbidden) tend to 
destruction (bring destruction) by abuse”; Paul says 
this from the standpoint of the false teachers, who in 
any use of those things whatever saw an “abuse,” i.e. a 
blameworthy use. In opposition to those who treat the 
clause as parenthetical and understand ἀπόχρησις to 
mean consumption by use (a being used up, as in Plut. 
moral. p. 267 f. [quaest. Rom. 18]), so that the words do 


[From 


14, ete.; see also Polyb. 17, 11, 2; Polyc. ad Phil. 6, 17." | not give the sentiment of the false teachers but Paul’s 


ὠποχωρέω 


judgment of it, very similar to that set forth in Mt. xv. 
17; 1 Co. vi. 13, cf. De Wette ad loc. [But see Meyer, 
Ellicott, Lightfoot. ]}* E 

ἀπο-χωρέω, -@; 1 aor. ἀπεχώρησα; [fr. Thue. down]; 
to go away, depart: ἐπό twos, Mt. vii. 23; Τὴ κ- ἀκ 89); 
Acts xiii. 13; [8050]. Lk. xx. 20 Tr mrg.].* 

ἀπο-χωρίζω: [1 aor. pass. drexapicOny]; to separate, 
sever, (often in Plato) ; to part asunder: pass. 6 οὐρανὸς 
ἀπεχωρίσθη, Rev. vi. 14; reflexively, to separate one’s 
self, depart from: ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς an’ ἀλλήλων, Acts 
xv. 89." 

ἀπο-ψύχω ; to breathe out life, expire; to faint or swoon 
away: Lk. xxi. 26. (So Thue. 1, 134; Bion 1, 9, al.; 
4 Mace. xv. 18.)* 

"Ἄππιος, -ov, 6, Appius, a Roman praenomen ; ᾿Αππίου 
φόρον Appii Forum (Cic. ad Att. 2,10; Hor. sat. 1, 5, 
3), [R. V. The Market of Appius], the name of a town 
in Italy, situated 43 Roman miles from Rome on the 
Appian way,— (this road was paved with square [(?) 
polygonal] stone by the censor Appius Claudius Caecus, 
B. C. 312, and led through the porta Capena to Capua, 
and thence as far as Brundisium) : Acts xxviii. 15. [Cf. 
BB.DD.]* 

ἀπρόσ-ιτος, -ov, (προσιέναι to go to), unapproachable, in- 
accessible: φῶς ἀπρόσιτον, 1 Tim. vi. 16. (Polyb., Diod., 
[Strabo], Philo, Leian., Plut.; φέγγος ἀπρόσιτον, Tatian 
c. 20; δόξα [φῶς], Chrys. [vi. 66 ed. Montf.] on Is. 
vi. 2.)* 

ἀπρόσκοπος, -ov, (προσκόπτω, q- V- ) ; 1. actively, 
having nothing for one to strike against; not causing to 
stumble; a. prop.: ὁδός, a smooth road, Sir. xxxv. 
(xxxii.) 21. b. metaph. not leading others into sin by 
one’s mode of life: 1 Co. x. 32. 2. passively, a. not 
striking against or stumbling; metaph. not led into sin; 
blameless: Phil. i. 10 (joined with εἰλικρινεῖς). Ὁ. with- 
out offence: συνείδησις, not troubled and distressed by a 
consciousness of sin, Acts xxiv. 16. (Not found in prof. 
auth. [exe. Sext. Emp. 1, 195 (p. 644, 13 Bekk.)].)* 

ἀπροσωπολήπτως [-λήμπτως LT Tr WH; cf. reff. s. v. 
M, μ]. ἃ word of Hellenistic origin, (a priv. and προσω- 
πολήπτης, q- V-), without respect of persons, i.e. impar- 
tially: 1 Pet. i. 17, (Ep. of Barn. 4,12; [Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor.1,3]). (The adj. ἀπροσωπόληπτος occurs here and 
there in eccl. writ.) * 

ἄπταιστος, -ov (Taio, q. v-), not stumbling, standing 
Jirm, exempt from falling, (prop., of a horse, Xen. de re 
eq. 1,6); metaph.: Jude 24. [Cf. W. 97 (92); B. 42 
(37).]* 

ἅπτω:; 1 aor. ptep. ἅψας ; (cf. Lat. apto, Germ. heften) ; 
[fr. Hom. down]; 1. prop. to fasten to, make adhere 
to; hence, spec. to fasten fire to a thing, to kindle, set on 
Jire, (often so in Attic) : λύχνον, Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 33; xv. 
8, (Arstph. nub. 57; Theophr. char. 20 (18); Joseph. 
antt. 4, 3,4); mip, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. WH wepe 
αψάντων]; πυράν, Acts xxviili.2 LT Tr WH. 2. Mid., 
[pres. ἅπτομαι]; impf. ἡπτόμην [Mk. vi. 56 RG Tr mrg.]; 
1 aor. ἡψάμην; in Sept. generally for 323, 37393; prop. 
to fasten one’s self to, adhere to, cling to, (Hom. Il. 8, 67); 


70 


ἀπώλεια 


a. to touch, foll. by the obj. in gen. [W. § 80, 8 ο.; B.167 
(146); ef. Donaldson p. 483]: Mt. viii. 3; Mk. iii. 10; 
vii. 33; viii. 22, etc.; Lk. xviii. 15; xxii. 51, very 
often in Mt., Mk. and Lk. In Jn. xx. 17, μή μου ἅπτου is 
to be explained thus: Do not handle me to see whether 
Tam still clothed with a body ; there is no need of such 
an examination, “for not yet” etc.; cf. Baume:- Crusius and 
Meyer ad loc. [as given by Hackett in Bib. Sacer. for 
1868, p. 779 sq., or B. D. Am. ed. p. 1813 54.1. b. yuvar- 
kos, of carnal intercourse with a woman, or cohabitation, 
1 Co. vii. 1, like the Lat. tangere, Hor. sat. 1, 2,54; Ter. 
Heaut. 4, 4,15, and the Hebr. 33, Gen. xx. 6; Prov. vi. 
29, (Plat. de legge. viii. 840 a.; Plut. Alex. Magn. ο. 21). 
c. with allusion to the levitical precept ἀκαθάρτου μὴ 
ἅπτεσθε, have no intercourse with the Gentiles, no fel- 
lowship in their heathenish practices, 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. 
Is. lii. 11) ; and in the Jewish sense, μὴ ἅψῃ Col. 11. 21 
(the things not to be touched appear to be both women 
and certain kinds of food, so that celibacy and abstinence 
from various kinds of food and drink are recommended ; 
cf. De Wette ad loc. [but also Meyer and Bp. Lehtft. ; 
on the distinction between the stronger term ἅπτεσθαι 
(to handle?) and the more delicate θιγεῖν (to touch?) cf. 
the two commentators just named and Trench § xvii. In 
classic Grk. also ἅπτεσθαι is the stronger term, denoting 
often to lay hold of, hold fast, appropriate ; in its carnal 
reference differing from θιγγάνειν by suggesting unlaw- 
fulness. θιγγάνειν is used of touching by the hand as a 
means of knowledge, handling for a purpose; ψηλαφᾶν 
signifies to feel around with the fingers or hands, esp. in 
searching for something, often to grope, fumble, ef. ψηλα- 
φίνδα blindman’s buff. Schmidt ch. 10.]). ἅ. to touch i.e. 
assail: τινός, any one, 1 Jn. v. 18, (1 Chr. xvi. 22, ete.). 
[Comp. : ἀν-, καθ-, περιτάπτω.] 

᾿Απφία, -ας, ἡ, Apphia, name of a woman: Philem. 2. 
[Apparently a Phrygian name expressive of endearment, 
cf. Suidae Lex. ed. Gaisf. col. 534 a. "Ama: ἀδελφῆς κ- 
ἀδελφοῦ ὑποκόρισμα, ete. cf. ᾿Απφύς. See fully in Bp. 
Lghtft.’s Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 306 sqq-]* 

ἀπ-ωθέω, -6: to thrust away, push away, repel; in the 
N. T. only Mid., pres. ἀπωθέομαι (-odpar) ; 1 aor. ἀπωσάμην 
(for which the better writ. used ἀπεωσάμην, cf. W 90 (86): 
B. 69 (61)) ; to thrust away from one’s self, to drive away 
from one’s self, i. e. to repudiate, reject, refuse: τινά, Acts 
vii. 27, 39; xiii. 46; Ro. xi. 1 sq.; 1 Tim. i. 19. (Jer. 
ii. 36 (37); iv. 80; vi. 19; Ps. xeiii. (xciv.) 14 and often. 
In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀπώλεια, -as, 9, (fr. ἀπόλλυμι, q- V-); 1. actively, a 
destroying, utter destruction: as, of vessels, Ro. ix. 22; 
τοῦ μύρου, waste, Mk. xiv. 4 (in Mt. xxvi. 8 without a 
gen.), (in Polyb. 6, 59, 5 consumption, opp. to τήρησις); 
the putting of a man to death, Acts xxv. 16 Rec.; by 
meton. a destructive thing or opinion: in plur. 2 
Pet. ii. 2 Rec. ; but the correct reading ἀσελγείαις was 
long ago adopted here. 2. passively, a perishing, ruin, 
destruction; a. in general: τὸ ἀργύριόν σου σύν σοι εἴη εἰς 
ἀπ. let thy money perish with thee, Acts viii. 20; βυθίζειν 
τινὰ εἰς ὄλεθρον x. ἀπώλειαν, with the inelzde@ 9352. of 


apa 


misery, 1 Tim. vi. 9; αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας destructive opin- 
ions, 2 Pet. ii. 1; ἐπάγειν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπώλειαν, ibid. cf. vs. 3. 
b. in particular, the destruction which consists in the loss 
of eternal life, eternal misery, perdition, the lot of those 
excluded from the kingdom of God: Rev. xvii. 8, 11, ef. 
xix. 20; Phil. iii. 19; 2 Pet. iii. 16; opp. to ἡ περιποίησις 
τῆς ψυχῆς, Heb. x. 39; to ἡ ζωή, Mt. vii. 13; to σωτηρία, 
Phil. i. 28. ὁ vids τῆς ἀπωλείας, a man doomed to eternal 
misery (a Hebraism, see vids, 2): 2 Th. ii. 3 (of Anti- 
christ) ; Jn. xvii. 12 (of Judas, the traitor) ; ἡμέρα κρίσεως 
k. ἀπωλείας τῶν ἀσεβῶν, 2 Pet. iii. 7. (In prof. auth. fr. 
Polyb. u. 5. [but see Aristot. probl. 17, 3, 2, vol. ii. p. 916", 
26; 29,14, 10 ibid. 952», 26; Nicom. eth. 4, 1 ibid. 1120", 
2, ete.]; often in the Sept. and O. 'T. Apocr.)* 

ἄρα, an illative particle (akin, as it seems, to the verbal 
root APQ to join, to be fitted, [cf. Curtius § 488 ; Vanitek 
p- 47]), whose use among native Greeks is illustrated 
fully by Kiihner ii. §$ 509, 545; [Jelf §§ 787-789], 
and Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 160-180, among others; [for 
a statement of diverse views see Biumlein, Griech. Par- 
tikeln, p. 19 sq.]. It intimates that, “under these cir- 
cumstances something either is so or becomes so” (Klotz 
loc. p. 167): Lat. igitur, consequently, [differing from 
οὖν in ‘denoting a subjective impression rather than a 
positive conclusion.” L. and S. (see 5 below)]. In the 
N. T. it is used frequently by Paul, but in the writings 
of John and in the so-called Catholic Epistles it does 
not occur. On its use in the N. T. cf. W. §§ 53, 8 a. and 
61,6. Itis found 1. subjoined to another word : Ro. 
vii. 21; viii.1; Gal. iii. 7; ἐπεὶ ἄρα since, if it were other- 
wise, 1 Co. vii. 14; [v. 10, cf. B. §149,5]. When placed 
after pronouns and interrogative particles, it refers to a 
preceding assertion or fact, or even to something exist- 
ing only inthe mind. τίς ἄρα who then? Mt. xviii. 1 (1. e. 
one certainly will be the greater, who then?); Mt. xix. 
25 (i. e. certainly some will be saved; you say that the 
rich will not; who then?); Mt. xix. 27; xxiv. 45 (I bid 
you be ready; who then etc.? the question follows from 
this command of mine); Mk. iv. 41; Lk. i. 66 (from all 
these things doubtless something follows ; what, then ?) ; 
LK. viii. 25 ; xii. 42; xxii. 23 (it will be one of us, which 
then ?); Acts xii. 18 (Peter has disappeared; what, then, 
has become of him?). εἰ ἄρα, Mk. xi. 13 (whether, since 
the tree had leaves, he might also find some fruit on it) ; 
Acts vii. 1 [Ree.] (ἄρα equiv. to ‘since the witnesses tes- 
tify thus’); Acts viii. 22 (if, since thy sin is so grievous, 
perhaps the thought ete.) ; εἴπερ dpa, 1 Co. xv. 15, (Δ) τ, 
εἰ dpa, Gen. xviii. 3). οὐκ dpa, Acts xxi. 38 (thou hast 
a knowledge of Greek; art thou not then the Egyptian, 
as I suspected ?); μήτι dpa (Lat. num igitur), did I then 
ete., 2 Co. i. 17. 2. By a use doubtful in Grk. writ. 
(ef. B. 371 (318); [W. 558 (519)]) it is placed at the 
beginning of a sentence; and so, so then, accordingly, 
equiv. to ὥστε with a finite verb: ἄρα μαρτυρεῖτε [μάρτυ- 
pes ἐστε T Tr WH], Lk. xi. 48 (Mt. xxiii. 81 ὥστε pap- 
tupeite); Ro. x. 17; 1 Co. xv. 18; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (in 
LT Tr WH noconditional protasis preceding) ; 2 Co. vii. 
12; Gal. iv. 31 (LT Tr WH &é); Heb. iv. 9. 3. inan 


71 


ἄραφος 


apodosis, after a protasis with εἰ, in order to bring out 
what follows as a matter of course, (Germ. so ist ja the 
obvious inference is): Lk. xi. 20; Mt. xii. 28; 2 Co. ν. 
14 (15) (R G, a protasis with εἰ preceding); Gal. ii. 
21; iii. 29; v.11; Heb. xii. 8; joined to another word, 
1 Co. xv. 14. 4. with yé, rendering it more pointed, 
dpaye [14 Tr uniformly ἄρα ye; so R WH in Acts xvii. 
27; cf. W. p.45; Lips. Gram. Untersuch. p. 123], surely 
then, so then, (Lat. itaque ergo): Mt. vii. 20; xvii. 26; 
Acts xi. 18 (1, T Tr WH om. γέ) ; and subjoined to a 
word, Acts xvii. 27 [W. 299 (281)]. 5. ἄρα οὖν, a 
combination peculiar to Paul, at the beginning of a sen- 
tence (W. 445 (414); B. 371 (318), [dpa ad internam 
potius caussam spectat, οὖν magis ad externam.” Kotz 
ad Devar. ii. p. 717; ἄρα is the more logical, οὖν the 
more formal connective; “ ἄρα is illative, οὖν continua- 
tive,” Win. 1. ο.; ef. also Kushner § 545, 3]), [R. V.] so 
then, (Lat. hine igitur) : Ro. v. 18; vii. 3, 25; viii. 12; ix. 
16, 18; xiv. 12 (L Tr om. WH br. οὖν) ; 19 [L mre. ἄρα]; 
Galfyi, 10: phat 19. Phys 65 2. ΤῊ: 1 15. 

dpa, an interrogative particle [“implying anxiety 
or impatience on the part of the questioner.” L. and 
S. s. v.], (of the same root as the preceding ἄρα, and only 
differing from it in that more vocal stress is laid upon 
the first syllable, which is therefore circumflexed) ; 1: 
num igitur, i. e. marking an inferential question to which 
a negative answer is expected: Lk. xviii. 8; with ye 
rendering it more pointed, dpa ye [G T dpaye]: Acts viii. 
30; [ἄρα οὖν... . διώκομεν Lehm. ed. min. also maj. mrg. 
are we then pursuing ete. Ro. xiv. 19]. 2. ergone i.e. 
a question to which an affirmative answer is expected, 
in an interrogative apodosis, (Germ. so ist also wohl ?), 
he is then? Gal. ii. 17 (where others [e. g. Lchm.] write 
dpa, so that this example is referred to those mentioned 
under dpa, 3, and is rendered Christ is then a minister of 
sin; but μὴ γένοιτο, which follows, is everywhere by 
Paul opposed to a question). Cf. W. 510 (475) sq. [also 
B. 247 (213), 371 (318); Herm. ad Vig. p. 820 sqq.; 
Klotz ad Deyar. ii. p. 180 sqq.; speaking somewhat 
loosely, it may be said “ ἄρα expresses bewilderment as 
to a possible conclusion. . . dpa hesitates, while ἄρα con- 
eludes.” Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.].* 

ἀρά, -as, ἡ. 1. a prayer; asupplication ; much often- 
er 2. an imprecation, curse, malediction, (cf. κατάραν ; 
so in Ro. iii. 14 (ef. Ps. ix. 28 (x. 7)), and often in Sept. 
(in both senses in native Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

*ApaBila, -as, 7, [fr. Hdt. down], Arabia, a well-known 
peninsula of Asia, lying towards Africa, and bounded by 
Egypt, Palestine, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, the 
Gulf of Arabia, the Persian Gulf, the Red Sea [and the 
Ocean]: Gal. i. 17; iv. 25.* 

[ἀραβών Tdf., see ἀρραβών.] 

[dpaye, see dpa, 4. | 

[apdye, see ἄρα. 1.] 

᾿Αράμ, Aram [or Ram], indecl. prop. name of one of 
the male ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 3 sq.; Lk. iii. 33 
{not T WH Tr mrg.; see ᾿Αδμείν and ᾿Αρνεώ." 

ἄραφος T Tr for ἄρραφος, q. v- 


*Apayy 


"Apaw, -a8os, 6, an Arabian: Acts ii. 11.* 

ἀργέω, -@; (to be ἀργός, 4. ν.} 10 be idle, inactive ; con- 
textually, to linger, delay: 2 Pet. ii. 3 οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι 
οὐκ ἀργεῖ, i.e. whose punishment has long been impend- 
ing and will shortly fall. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.) 
[Comp. : κατ-αργέω.] " 

ἀργός, -dv, and in later writ. fr. Aristot. hist. anim. 10, 
40 [vol. i. p. 627*, 15] on and consequently also in the 
N. T. with the fem. apyn, which among the early Greeks 
Epimenides alone is said to have used, Tit.i. 12; ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 104 sq.; id. Paralip. p. 455 sqq.; W. 68 
(67), [cf. 24; B. 25 (23)], (contr. fr. depyos which Hom. 
uses, fr. a priv. and ἔργον without work, without labor, 
doing nothing), inactive, idle; a. free from labor, at 
leisure, (ἀργὸν εἶναι, Hdt. 5, 6): Mt. xx. 8, 6 [Rec.]; 1 
Tim. v. 18. b. lazy, shunning the labor which one ought 
to perform, (Hom. Il. 9, 320 6, τ᾽ ἀεργὸς ἀνήρ, 6, τε πολλὰ 
éopyas) : πίστις, Jas. ii. 20 (LT Tr WH for RG νεκρά); 
γαστέρες ἀργαί i. 6. idle gluttons, fr. Epimenides, Tit. i. 12 
(Nicet. ann. 7, 4. 135 ἃ. εἰς ἀργὰς γαστέρας ὀχετηγήσας) ; 
ἀργὸς καὶ ἄκαρπος εἴς τι, 2 Ῥοῦ. i. 8. ὁ. of things from 
which no profit is derived, although they can and ought 
to be productive; as of fields, trees, gold and silver, (cf. 
Grimm on Sap. xiv. 5; [L. and Κ᾽. s. v. 1. 27}; unprojit- 
able, ῥῆμα ἀργόν, by litotes i. q. pernicious (see ἄκαρπος): 
Mt. xii. 36.* 

[Syn. ἀργός, βραδύς, νωθρός: apy. idle, involving blame- 
worthiness ; Bp. slow (tardy), having a purely temporal ref- 
erence and no necessary bad sense ; νωθρ. sluggish, descrip- 
tive of constitutional qualities and suggestive of censure. 
Schmidt ch. 49; Trench § civ.] 

ἀργύρεος -οῦς, -€a -ἃ, -εον -οῦν, of silver; in the contracted 
formin Acts xix. 24 [but WII br.]; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev. 
ix. 20. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἀργύριον, -ov, τό, (fr. ἄργυρος, q. v-), [fr. Hdt. down]; 
1. silver: Acts iii. 6; vii. 16; xx. 33; 1 Pet.i.18; [1 
Co. iii. 12 T Tr WH]. 2. money: simply, Mt. xxv. 
18, 27; Mk. xiv. 11; Lk. ix. 8; xix. 15, 23; xxii. 5; Acts 
viii. 20; plur., Mt. xxviii. [12], 15. 3. Spec. a silver 
coin, silver-piece, (Luther, Silberling), Spy, σίκλος, shekel 
[see B. Ὁ. s. v.], i. e. a coin in cireulation among the 
Jews after the exile, from the time of Simon (ce. B.c. 
141) down (cf. 1 Mace. xv. 6 sq. [yet see B. Ὁ. 8. v. 
Money, and reff. in Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 7]) ; ac- 
cording to Josephus (antt. 3, 8, 2) equal to the Attic 
tetradrachm or the Alexandrian didrachm (ef. 
στατήρ [B. D. 5. v. Piece of Silver]) : Mt. xxvi. 15; xxvii. 
3,5 sq. 9. In Acts xix. 19, ἀργυρίου μυριάδες πέντε fifly 
thousand pieces of silver (Germ. 50,000 in Silber i. q. 
Silbergeld), doubtless drachmas [ef. δηνάριον] are meant ; 
cf. Meyer [et al.] ad loc.* 

ἀργυροκόπος, -ov, 6, (ἄργυρος and κόπτω to beat, ham- 
mer; a silver-beater), a silversmith: Acts xix. 24. (Judg. 
xvii. 4; Jer. vi. 29. Plut. de vitand. aere alien. ce. 7.) * 

ἄργυρος, -ov, 6, (ἀργός shining), [fr. Hom. down], silver : 
1 Co. iii. 12 [T Tr WH ἀργύριον (reference is made to 
the silver with which the columns of noble buildings 
were covered and the rafters adorned); by meton. 
things made of silver, silver-work, vessels, images of the 


72 


᾿Αρέτας 


gods, etc.: Acts xvii. 29; Jas. v. 3; Rev. xviii. 12. silver 
coin: Mt. x. 9.* 

"Apevos [Tdi. “Aptos] πάγος, -ov, 6, Areopagus (a rocky 
height in the city of Athens not far from the Acropolis 
toward the west; πάγος a hill,”Apecos belonging to (Ares) 
Mars, Mars’ Hill; so called, because, as the story went, 
Mars, having slain Halirrhothius, son of Neptune, for the 
attempted violation of his daughter Alcippe, was tried 
for the murder here before the twelve gods as judges; 
Pausan. Attic. 1, 28, 5), the place where the judges con- 
vened who, by appointment of Solon, had jurisdiction of 
capital offences, (as wilful murder, arson, poisoning, ma- 
licious wounding, and breach of the established religious 
usages). The court itself was called Areopagus from 
the place where it sat, also Areum judicium (Tacit. 
ann. 2, 55), and curia Martis (Juv. sat. 9, 101). To 
that hill the apostle Paul was led, not to defend himself 
before the judges, but that he might set forth his 
opinions on divine subjects to a greater multitude of 
people, flocking together there and eager to hear some- 
thing new: Acts xvii. 19-22; ef. vs. 32. Cf. J. H. Krause 
in Pauly’s Real-Encycl. 2te Aufl. i. 2 p. 1497 sqq. 8. v. 
Areopag; [ Grote, Hist. of Greece, index 8. v.; Dicts. of 
Geogr. and Antiq.; BB.DD. s. v. Areopagus; and on 
Paul’s discourse, esp. B. D. Am. ed. s. vy. Mars’ Hill].* 

᾿Αρεοπαγίτης, “Γαΐ. -γείτης [see 8. v. et, ¢], του, 6, (fr. the 
preceding [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 697 sq.]), a member of the 
court of Areopagus, an Areopagite: Acts xvii. 34." 

ἀρεσκεία (T WH -κία [see I. c]), -as, ἡ, (fr. ἀρεσκεύω to 
be complaisant; hence not to be written [with R GL 
Tr] dpéoxeca, [cf. Chandler § 99; W. § 6, 1 ¢.; B. 12 
(11)]), desire to please: περιπατεῖν ἀξίως τοῦ κυρίου εἰς 
πᾶσαν ἀρεσκείαν, to please him in all things, Col. i. 10; 
(of the desire to please God, in Philo, opif. § 50; de 
profug. § 17; de victim. § 3sub fin. In native Grk. writ. 
commonly in a bad sense: Theophr. char. 3 (5); Polyb. 
31, 26,5; Diod. 13, 53; al.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.]).* 

ἀρέσκω ; impf. ἤρεσκον ; fut. apéow; 1 aor. pera; (APQ 
[see dpa init.]); [fr. Hom. down]; a. to please: τινί, Mt. 
xiv. 6; Mk. vi. 22; Ro. viii. 8; xv. 2; 1 Th. ii. 15; iv. 1; 
1 Co. vii. 32-34; Gal. i. 10; 2 Tim. ii. 4; ἐνώπιόν 
τινος, after the Hebr. .)}3, Acts vi. 5, (1 K. iii. 10; Gen. 
xxxiv. 18, ete.). b. to strive to please; to accommodate 
one’s self to the opinions, desires, interests of others: τινί, 
1 Co. x. 33 (πάντα πᾶσιν ἀρέσκω) ; 1 ΤῊ. ii. 4. ἀρέσκειν 
ἑαυτῷ, to please one’s self and therefore to have an eye 
to one’s own interests: Ro. xv. 1, 3.* 

ἀρεστός, -ή, -όν, (ἀρέσκων, pleasing, agreeable: τινί, Jn. 
viii. 29; Acts xii. 3; ἐνώπιόν τινος, 1 Jn. iii. 22 (ef. 
ἀρέσκω, a.) ; ἄρεστόν ἐστι foll. by ace. with inf. it is jit, 
Acts vi. 2 [yet cf. Meyer ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. 
[Soph.] Hdt. down.)* 

*Apéras [WH ‘Ap., see their Intr. § 408], -a (cf. W. 
§ 8, 1; [B. 20 (18)]), 6, Aretas, (a name common to many 
of the kings of Arabia Petraea or Nabathaean Arabia 
[cf. B. D.s.v. Nebaioth] ; cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 
§ 17 Ὁ. p. 233 sq.); an Arabian king who made war (A. D. 
36) on his son-in-law Herod Antipas for having repu 


ἀρετή fi 


diated his daughter; and with such success as complete- 
ly to destroy his army (Joseph. antt. 18, 5). In conse- 
quence of this, Vitellius, governor of Syria, being ordered 
by Tiberius to march an army against Aretas, prepared 
for the war. But Tiberius meantime having died 
[March 16, a. D. 37], he recalled his troops from the 
march, dismissed them to their winter quarters, and 
departed to Rome. After his departure Aretas held 
sway over the region of Damascus (how acquired we do 
not know), and placed an ethnarch over the city : 2 Co. 
xi. 82. Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v.; Wieseler in Herzog i. 
p- 488 sq.; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 238 sq.; Schiirer in 
Riehm p. 83 sq.; [B. D. Am. ed. s. ν. Aretas; Meyer 
on Acts, Einl. § 4 (cf. ibid. ed. Wendt) ).* 

ἀρετή, -ῆς, ἡ, [see ἄρα init.], a word of very wide signi- 
fication in Grk. writ.; any excellence of a person (in 
body or mind) or of a thing, an eminent endowment, prop- 
erty or quality. Used of the human ;-nind and in an 
ethical sense, itdenotes 1. a virtuous course of thought, 
feeling and action; virtue, moral goodness, (Sap. iv. 1; 
ν. 13; often in 4 Mace. and in Grk. writ.): 2 Pet. i. 5 
[al. take it here specifically, viz. moral vigor; οἵ. next 
head]. 2. any particular moral excellence, as modesty, 
purity; hence (plur. ai ἀρεταί, Sap. viii. 7; often in 4 
Mace. and in the Grk. philosophers) τὶς ἀρετή, Phil. iv. 
8. Used of God, it denotes a. his power: 2 Pet. i. 3. 
b. in the plur. his excellences, perfections, ‘ which shine 
forth in our gratuitous calling and in the whole work of 
our salvation’ (Jn. Gerhard): 1 Pet. ii. 9. (In Sept. for 
Wn splendor, glory, Hab. iii. 3, of God; Zech. vi. 13, of 
the Messiah; in plur. for nibgnn praises, of God, Is. xliii. 
51. xii, 12. xiii.) 7)" : 

ἀρήν, 6, nom. not in use; the other cases are by syncope 
apvos (for ἀρένος), ἀρνί, ἄρνα ; plur. ἄρνες, ἀρνῶν, ἀρνάσι, 
ἄρνας, a sheep, α ἰαπιῦ : Lk. x. 8. (Gen. xxx. 32; Ex. 
xxiii. 19, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀριθμέω, -@: 1 aor. ἠρίθμησα; pf. pass. ἠρίθμημαι: 
(ἀριθμός) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to number: Mt. x. 30; Lk. 
xii. 7; Rev. vii. 9. [Comp.: κατ-αριθμέω. " 

ἀριθμός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], a number; a. a fixed 
and definite number: τὸν ἀριθμὸν πεντακισχίλιοι, in num- 
ber, Jn. vi. 10, (2 Mace. viii. 16; 3 Mace. v. 2, and often 
in Grk. writ.; W. 230 (216); [B. 153 (134)]); ἐκ τοῦ 
ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα, Lk. xxii. 3; dp. ἀνθρώπου, a number 
whose letters indicate a certain man, Rey. xiii. 18. Ὁ. 
an indefinite number, i. q. a multitude: Acts vi. 7; xi. 
21; Rev. xx. 8. 

᾿Αριμαθαία [WH “‘Ap., see their Intr. § 408], -as, 7, 
Arimathea, Webr. 7199 (a height), the name of several 
cities of Palestine; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1275. 
The one mentioned in Mt. xxvii. 57; Mk. xv. 43; Lk. 
xxiii. 51; Jn. xix. 38 appears to have been the same as 
that which was the birthplace and residence of Samuel, 
in Mount Ephraim: 1 S. i. 1, 19, ete. Sept. ᾿Αρμαθαΐμ, 
and without the art. ‘Paya6éu, and ace. to another read- 
ing ῬῬαμαθαΐμ, 1 Macc. xi. 84; ‘Payaéd in Joseph. antt. 
13, 4,9. Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 34; Keim, Jesus 
von Naz. iii. 514; [B. D. Am. ed.].* 


2 


9 Appayedou 


᾿Αρίσταρχος, -ov, ὁ, [lit. best-ruling], A ristarchus, a cer- 
tain Christian of Thessalonica, a ‘fellow-captive’ with 
Paul [ef. B. D. Am. ed.; Bp. Lehtft. and Mey. on Col. as 
below]: Acts xix. 29; xx. 4; xxvii. 2; Col. iv. 10; 
Philem. 24.* 

ἀριστάω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἠρίστησα; (τὸ ἄριστον, 4. V-); a. 
to breakfast: Jn. xxi. 12, 15; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4,1; and 
often in Attic). b. by later usage to dive: παρά τινι, 
Lk. xi. 37; (Gen. xliii. 24; Ael. v. h. 9, 19).* 

ἀριστερός, -d, -όν, left: Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xxiii. 33; [Mk. 
x. 37 T Tr WH, on the plur. ef. W. § 27, 3]; ὅπλα ἀρι- 
στερά i. 6. carried in the left hand, defensive weapons, 2 
Co. vi. 7. [From Hom. down.]* 

᾿Αριστόβουλος, -ov, 6, [ lit. best-counselling], A ristobulus, 
a certain Christian [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. ν. and Bp. Lghtét. 
on Phil. p. 174 sq.]: Ro. xvi. 10.* 

ἄριστον, -ov, τό, [fr. Hom. down]; a. the first food, 
taken early in the morning before work, breakfast; 
dinner was called δεῖπνον. But the later Greeks called 
breakfast τὸ ἀκράτισμα, and dinner ἄμιστον i. 6. δεῖπνον 
μεσημβρινόν, Athen. 1, 9,10 p.11b.; and so in the Ν. Τὶ 
Hence Ὁ. dinner: Lk. xiv. 12 (ποιεῖν ἄριστον ἢ δεῖπνον, 
to which others are invited); Lk. xi. 38; Mt. xxii. 4 
(ἑτοιμάζειν). [B. D.s.v. Meals; Becker’s Charicles, se. 
vi. excurs. i. (Eng. trans. p. 312 sq.).] * 

ἀρκετός, -ή, -dv, (apxéw), sufficient: Mt. vi. 84 (where 
the meaning is, ‘ Let the present day’s trouble suffice for 
a man, and let him not rashly increase it by anticipating 
the cares of days to come’; [on the neut. cf. W. § 58, 5; 
B. 127 (111) ]); ἀρκετόν τῷ μαθητῇ [A.V. it is enough for 
the disciple 1.6. let him be content ete., foll. by ἵνα, Mt. x. 
25; foll. by an inf., 1 Pet. iv. 8. (Chrysipp. ap. Athen. 
8, 79 p. 113 b.) * 

ἀρκέω. @; 1 aor. ἤρκεσα ; [Pass., pres. ἀρκοῦμαι]: 1 fut. 
ἀρκεσθήσομαι ; to be possessed of unfailing strength; to be 
strong, to suffice, to be enough (as against any danger; 
hence to defend, ward off, in Hom.; [al. make this the 
radical meaning, cf. Lat arceo; Curtius § 7]): with dat. 
of pers., Mt. xxv. 9; Jn. vi. 7; ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου my 
crace is sufficient for thee, sc. to enable thee to bear the 
evil manfully; there is, therefore, no reason why thou 
shouldst ask for its removal, 2 Co. xii. 9; impersonally, 
ἀρκεῖ ἡμῖν ’tis enough for us, we are content, Jn. xiv. 8. 
Pass. (as in Grk. writ.) to be satisfied, contented: τινί, 
with a thing, Lk. iii. 14; Heb. xiii. 5; 1 Tim. vi. 8; (2 
Mace. v. 15); ἐπί τινι, 8 Jn. 10. [Come.: én-apkéw.]* 

ἄρκτος, -ov, 6, 7, or [so GL Τ Tr WH] ἄρκος, -ov, ὁ, 7, 
a bear: Rey. xiii. 2. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἅρμα, -aros, τό, (fr. APO to join, fit; ateam), a chariot: 
Acts viii. 28 sq. 38; of war-chariots (i. 6. armed with 
scythes) we read ἅρματα ἵππων πολλῶν chariots drawn by 
many horses, Rev. ix. 9, (Joel ii. 5. In Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down).* 

“Αρμαγεδών [Grsb. ’App., WH*Ap Μαγεδών, see their 
Intr. 8 408; Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] or (so Rec.) Appayeddav, 
Har-Magedon or Armageddon, indecl. prop. name of an 
imaginary place: Rey. xvi. 16. Many, following Beza 
and Glassius, suppose that the name is compounded of 


ἁρμόξω 


‘J mountain, and $439 or 117139. Sept. Μαγεδώ, Μαγεδδώ. 
Megiddo was a city of the Manassites, situated in the 
great plain of the tribe of Issachar, and famous for a 
double slaughter, first of the Canaanites (Judg. v. 19), 
and again of the Israelites (2 K. xxiii. 29 sq.; 2 Chr. 
χχχν. 22, cf. Zech. xii. 11); so that in the Apocalypse 
it would signify the place where the kings opposing 
Christ were to be destroyed with a slaughter like that 
which the Canaanites or the Israelites had experienced 
of old. But since those two overthrows are said to have 
taken place ἐπὶ ὕδατε May. (Judg. 1. 6.) and ἐν τῷ 
πεδίῳ May. (2 Chr. 1. 6.), it is not easy to perceive 
what can be the meaning of the mountain of Megiddo, 
which could be none other than Carmel. Hence, for 
one, I think the conjecture of L. Capellus [i. 6. Louis 
Cappel (akin to that of Drusius, see the Comm.)] to be 
far more easy and probable, viz. that ᾿Αρμαγεδὼν is for 
“‘Appapeyedav, compounded of 821M destruction, and 
jp. + [Wieseler (Zur Gesch. ἃ. N. T. Schrift, p. 188), 
Hitzig (in Hilgenf. Einl. p. 440 n.), al., revive the deriva- 
tion (ef. Hiller, Simonis, al.) fr. "2 Ἢ city of Megiddo.]* 

ἁρμόζω, Attic ἁρμόττω : 1 aor. mid. ἡρμοσάμην ; (dppos, 
q: V-)3 1. to join, to fit together; so in Hom. of car- 
penters, fastening together beams and planks to build 
houses, ships, ete. 2. of marriage: ἁρμόζειν τινὶ τὴν 
θυγατέρα (Hat. 9, 108) to betroth a daughter to any one; 
pass. ἁρμόζεται γυνὴ ἀνδρί, Sept. Prov. xix. 14; mid. 
ἁρμόσασθαι τὴν θυγατέρα twos (Hat. 5, 32; 47; 6, 65) 
to join to one’s self, i. 6. to marry, the daughter of any 
one; ἁρμόσασθαί τινί τινα to betroth, to give one in mar- 
riage to any one: 2 Co. xi. 2, and often in Philo, cf. 
Loesner ad loc.; the mid. cannot be said to be used 
actively, but refers to him to whom the care of betroth- 
ing has been committed; [ef. B. 193 (167); per contra 
Mey. ad loc.; W. 258 (242) ].* 

ἁρμός, -ov, 6, (APO to join, fit), a joining, a joint: Heb. 
iv. 12. (Soph., Xen., al.; Sir. xxvii. 2.) * 

ἄρνας, see ἀρήν. 

*Apvel, 6, indecl. prop. name of one of the ancestors of 
Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 T WH Tr mrg.* 

ἀρνέομαι, -οὔμαι ; fut. ἀρνήσομαι ; impf. ἠρνούμην ; 1 aor. 
ἠρνησάμην (rare in Attic, where generally ἠρνήθην, cf. 
Matth. i. p. 538 [better Veitch 5. v.]); pf. ἤρνημαι ; a 
depon. verb [(fr. Hom. down) ] signifying 1. to deny, 
i. 6. εἰπεῖν... οὐκ [to say... not, contradict]: Mk. xiv. 70; 
Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. i. 20; xviii. 25, 27; Lk. viii. 45; Acts 
iv. 16; foll. by ὅτι οὐ instead of simple ὅτι, in order to 
make the negation more strong and explicit: Mt. xxvi. 
72; 1 Jn. ii. 22; (on the same use in Grk. writ. οἵ. 
Kiuhner ii. p. 761; [Jelf ii. 450; W. § 65,2 8.; B. 355 
(305))). 2. to deny, with an ace. of the pers., in 
various senses: a. dpv. Ἰησοῦν is used of followers of 
Jesus who, for fear of death or persecution, deny that 
Jesus is their master, and desert his cause, [to disown]: 
Mt. x. 33; Lk. xii. 9; [Jn. xiii. 38 L txt. T Tr WH]; 
2 Tim. ii. 12, (ἀρν. τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ. Rev. iii. 8, means 
the same); and on the other hand, of Jesus, denying 
that one is his follower: Mt. x. 33; 2 Tim. ii. 12. 


74 


ἁρπάξζω 


Ὁ. ἀρν. God and Christ, is used of those who by cher- 
ishing and disseminating pernicious opinions and immo- 
rality are adjudged to have apostatized from God and 
Christ : 1 Jn. ii. 22 (ef. iv. 2; 2Jn. 7-11); Jude4; 2 Pet. 
ii. 1. 6. ἀρν. ἑαυτόν to deny himself, is used in two senses, 
a. to disregard his own interests : Lk. ix. 23 [R WH mrg. 
ἀπαρν.}; cf. ἀπαρνέομαι. β. to prove false to himself, act 
entirely unlike himself: 2 Tim. ii. 13. 3. to deny 1. 6. 
abnegate, abjure; ri, to renounce a thing, forsake it: τὴν 
ἀσέβειαν κ. τὰς ἐπιθυμίας, Tit. ii. 12; by act to show es- 
trangement from a thing: τὴν πίστιν, 1 Tim. v. 8; Rev. 
ii. 13; τὴν δύναμιν τῆς εὐσεβείας, 2 Tim. iii. 5. 4. not 
to accept, to reject, refuse, something offered : τινά, Acts 
iii. 14; vil. 35; with an inf. indicating the thing, Heb. 
xi. 24. [ComP.: ἀπ-αρνέομαι.Ἴ 

ἀρνίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. ἀρήν, 4. v.), [fr. Lys. down], 
a little lamb, a lamb: Rev. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his fol- 
lowers τὰ ἀρνία pov in Jn. xxi. 15; τὸ ἀρνίον is used of 
Christ, innocently suffering and dying to expiate the 
sins of men, very often in Rey., as v. 6, 8,12, etc. (Jer. 
xi. 19; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 4, 6; Joseph. antt. 
3, 8, 10.) * 

Gporpidw, -@ ; (ἄροτρον, q. v-); to plough: Lk. xvii. 7; 
1 Co. ix. 10. (Deut. xxii. 10; [1 K. xix. 19]; Mice. iii. 
12. In Grk. writ. fr. Theophr. down for the more 
ancient dpdw; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 254 sq. [W. 24].) * 

ἄροτρον, -ov, τό, (ἀρόω to plough), a plough: Lk. ix. 62. 
Cn Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἁρπαγή, -ῆς, 7, (ἁρπάζω), rapine, pillage; 1. the act 
of plundering, robbery: Heb. x. 34. 2. plunder, spoil : 
Mt. xxiii. 25; Lk. xi. 89. (Is. iii. 14; Nah.ii. 12. In 
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

ἁρπαγμός, -od, 6, (ἁρπάζων ; 1. the act of seizing, rob- 
bery, (so Plut. de lib. edue.c. 15 (al. 14, 37), vol. ii. 12 a. 
the only instance of its use noted in prof. auth.). 2 
a thing seized or to be seized, booty: ἁρπαγμὸν ἡγεῖσθαί τι 
to deem anything a prize,—a thing to be seized upon 
or to be held fast, retained, Phil. ii. 6; on the meaning 
of this pass. see poppy; (ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι ἅρπαγμα, 
Euseb. h. e. 8, 12, 2; vit. Const. 2, 31; [Comm. in Lue. 
vi., ef. Mai, Nov. Bibl. Patr. iv. p. 165]; Heliod. 7, 11 
and 20; 8, 7; [Plut. de Alex. virt. 1,8 p. 330 d.]; ut om- 
nium bona praedam tuam duceres, Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 15, 39 ; 
{see Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. p. 133 sq. (cf. p. 111) ; Wetstein 
ad loc.; Cremer 4te Aufl. p. 153 sq.]).” 

ἁρπάζω ; fut. ἁρπάσω [Veitchs. v.; ef. Rutherford, New 
Phryn. p. 407]; 1 aor. ἥρπασα; Pass., 1 aor. ἡρπάσθην ; 
2 aor. ἡρπάγην (2 Co. xii. 2,4; Sap. iv. 11; οἵ. W. 83 
(80); [B. 54 (47); WH. App. p.170]); 2 fut. ἁρπαγή- 
σομαι; [(Lat. rapio; Curtius § 331); fr. Hom. down]; 
to seize, carry off by force: τί, [Mt. xii. 29 not RG, (see 
daprdtw)]; Jn. x. 12; to seize on, claim for one’s self 
eagerly: τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. xi. 12, (Xen. an. 6, 
5, 18, ete.) ; to snatch out or away: τί, Mt. xiii. 19; τὶ ἐκ 
χειρός Twos, Jn. x. 28 54. : τινὰ ἐκ πυρός, proverbial, to 
rescue from the danger of destruction, Jude 23, (Am. 
iv.11; Zech. iii. 2); τινά, to seize and carry off speedily, 
Jn. vi. 15; Acts xxiii. 10; used of divine power trans 


ἅρπαξ 


ferring a person marvellously and swiftly from one place 
to another, to snatch or catch away: Acts vill. 39; pass. 
πρὸς τ. θεόν, Rev. xii. 5; foll. by ἔως with gen. of place, 
2 Co. xii. 2; εἰς τ. παράδεισον, 2 Co. xii. 4; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 
Th. iv. 17. [Comp.: 61-, συν-αρπάζω. 1 

ἅρπαξ, -ayos, ὃ, adj., rapacious, ravenous : Mt. vii. 15; 
Lk. xviii. 11; as subst. a robber, an extortioner: 1 Co. v. 
10 sq.; vi. 10. (In both uses fr. [Arstph.], Xen. down.)* 

ἀρραβών [Tdf. ἀραβών : 2 Co. i. 22 (so Lehm.) ; v. 5, 
(but not in Eph. i. 14),.see his Proleg. p.80; WH. App. 
p. 148; ef. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; B. 32 (28 sq.) ; ef. P, ρ]»τῶνος, 6, 
(Hebr. 1,31» Gen. xxxviii. 17 54. 20; fr. ap to 
pledge; a word which seems to have passed from the 
Phenicians to the Greeks, and thence into Latin), an 
earnest, i. e. money which in purchases is given as a 
pledge that the full amount will subsequently be paid 
[Suid. 5. v. ἀραβών], (ef. [obs. Eng. earlespenny ; caution- 
money], Germ. Kaufschilling, Haftpfennig) : 2 Co. i. 22; 
vy. 5, τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ πνεύματος 1. 6. τὸ πνεῦμα ὡς ἀρρα- 
Bava sc. τῆς κληρονομίας, as is expressed in full in Eph. 
i. 14 [ef. W. § 59, 8 a.; B. 78 (68)]; for the gift of the 
Holy Spirit, comprising as it does the δυνάμεις τοῦ μέλ- 
Aovros αἰῶνος (Heb. vi. 5), is both a foretaste and a 
pledge of future blessedness ; cf. 5. v. ἀπαρχή, c. [B.D. 
s. v. Earnest.] (Isae. 8, 23 [p. 210 ed. Reiske]; Aristot. 
pol. 1, 4, 5 [p. 1259, 12]; al.) * 

ἄρραφος, T Tr WH ἄραφος (cf. W. 48; B. 32 (29); 
[WH. App. p. 163; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; cf. P, p]), -ov, 
(ῥάπτω to sew together), not sewed together, without a 
seam: Jn. xix. 23.* 

ἄρρην, see ἄρσην. 

ἄρ-ρητος, -ον, (ῥητός, fr. ΡΕΩ); a. unsaid, unspoken: 
Hom. Od. 14, 466, and often in Attic. b. unspeakable 
(on account of its sacredness), (Hat. 5, 83, and often in 
other writ.): 2 Co. xii. 4, explained by what follows: 
ἁ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἀνθρώπῳ λαλῆσαι." 

ἄρρωστος, -ον, (ῥώννυμι, q. ν.), without strength, weak; 
sick: Mt. xiv. 14; Mk. vi. 5, 13; xvi.18; 1 Co. xi. 30. 
({Hippocr.], Xen., Plut.) * 

ἀρσενοκοίτης, -ov, 6, (ἄρσην a male; κοίτη a bed), one 
who lies with a male as with a female, a sudomite: 1 Co. 
vi. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10. (Anthol. 9, 686, 5; eccl. writ.)* 

ἄρσην, -evos, 6, ἄρσεν, τό, also (acc. to R G in Rey. xii. 
5, 13, and in many edd., that of Tdf. included, in Ro. i. 
27° ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 78; [W. 227) ἄρρην, 
-evos, 6, ἄρρεν, τό, [fr. Hom. down], male: Mt. xix. 4; 
Mk. x. 6; Lk. ii. 23; Ro.i. 27; Gal. iii. 28; Rev. xii..5, 
13 (where Lehm. reads ἄρσεναν ; on which Alex. form 
of the ace. ef. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; 66 (64); Mullach p. 22 [cf. 
p- 162]; B.13 (12); [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 36; Τὰ Proleg. 
p- 118; Miiller’s note on Barn. ep. 6, 2 p. 158; WH. 
App. p. 157; Scrivener, Collation ete. p. liv.]).* 

*Aprepas, -a, ὁ, (abbreviated fr. ᾿Αρτεμίδωρος [i. 6. gift 
of Artemis], cf. W. 102 (97); [B. 20 (17 sq.); Lob. 
Pathol. Proleg. p. 505 sq.; Chandler § 32]), Artemas, a 
friend of Paul the apostle: Tit. iii. 12. [Cf. B. Ὁ. s. v.]* 

"Aprepis, τιδος and -tos, 7, Artemis, that is to say, 
the so-called Tauric or Persian or Ephesian Ar- 


18 


uw 
apTos 


temis, the goddess of many Asiatic peoples, to be dis- 
tinguished from the Artemis of the Greeks, the sister of 
Apollo; οἴ. Grimm on 2 Mace. p. 39; [B. D.s. v. Diana]. 
A very splendid temple was built to her at Ephesus, 
which was set on fire by Herostratus and reduced to 
ashes; but afterwards, in the time of Alexander the 
Great, it was rebuilt in a style of still greater magnifi- 
cence: Acts xix. 24, 27 sq.34 sq. Cf. Stark in Schenkel 
i. p. 604 sq. s. v. Diana; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus, 
Lond. 1877 ].* 

ἀρτέμων, -ovos (LT Tr WH -avos, cf. W. 8 9,1d.; [B. 
24 (22)]), 6, top-sail [or foresail?] of a ship: Acts xxvii. 
40; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [esp. Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. 
of St. Paul, p. 192 sq.; Graser in the Philologus, 3d 
suppl. 1865, p. 201 sqq. ].* 

ἄρτι, adv., acc. to its deriv. (fr. AP to draw close to- 
gether, to join, Lat. arto; [ef. Curtius § 488]) denoting 
time closely connected ; 1. in Attic “just now, this 
moment, (Germ. gerade, eben), marking something begun 
or finished even now, just before the time in which we 
are speaking ” (Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 20): Mt. ix. 18; 
1 Th. iii. 6, and perhaps Rev. xii. 10. 2. acc. to later 
Grk. usage univ. now, at this time; opp. to past time: 
Jn. ix. 19, 25; xiii. 33; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Gal.i.9 sq. opp. 
tofuture time: Jn. xiii. 37; xvi. 12, 31; 2 Th. ii. 7; opp. 
to fut. time subsequent to the return of Christ: 1 Co. 
xiii. 12; 1 Pet.i.6,8. of present time most closely lim- 
ited, at this very time, this moment: Mt. iii. 15; xxvi. 53; 
Jn. xiii. 7; Gal. iv. 20. ἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας, 1 Co. iv. 11; 
ἕως ἄρτι, hitherto; until now, up to this time: Mt. xi. 12; 
Jn. ii. 10; v.17; xvi. 24; 1 Co.iv. 13; viii. 7; xv.6; 1 Jn. 
ii. 9. ἀπ᾽ ἄρτι, see ἀπάρτι above. Cf. Lobeck ad Phryn. 
p- 18 sqq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 70 sq.].* 

[Syn. ἄρτι, ἤδη, viv: Roughly speaking, it may be said 
that ἄρτι just now, even now, properly marks time closely con- 
nected with the present; later, strictly present time, (see 
above, and compare in Eng. “just now” i. 6. ἃ moment ago, 
and “just now” (emphat.) i.e. at this precise time). νῦν now, 
marks a definite point (or period) of time, the (objective) 
immediate present. ἤδη now (already) with a suggested ref- 
erence to some other time or to some expectation, the sub- 
jective present (i.e. so regarded by the writer). ἤδη and 
ἄρτι are associated in 2 Thess. ii. 7; νῦν and ἤδη in 1 Jn. iv. 
3. See Kiihner $§ 498,499; Baumlein, Partikeln, p. 138 sqq. ; 
Eliic. on 1 Thess. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. iv. 6.] 

ἀρτι-γέννητος. -ον. (ἄρτι and γεννάω), just born, new- 
born: 1 Pet. ii. 2. (Leian. Alex. 13 ; Long. past. 1, (7) 
9; 2, (8) 4.)* 

ἄρτιος, -a, -ov, (APQ to fit, [ef. Curtius § 488); ub 
Jitted. 2. complete, perfect, [having reference appar- 
ently to ‘special aptitude for given uses’]; so 2 Tim. 
iii. 17, [ef. Ellicott ad loc.; Trench § xxii.]. (In Grk 
writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἄρτος, -ov, 6, (fr. APO to fit, put together, [cf. Etym 
Magn. 150, 36—but doubtful]), bread; Hebr. ὉΠ: 
1. food composed of flour mixed with water and baked ; 
the Israelites made it in the form of an oblong or round 
cake, as thick as one’s thumb, and as large as a plate or 


platter (cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Backen; [BB.DD.]); 


ἀρτύω 


hence it was not cut, but broken (see κλάσις and κλάω) : 
Mt. iv. 3; vii. 9; xiv.17,19; Mk. vi.36 [T Tr WH om. 
Lbr.], 37 sq.; Lk. iv. 3; xxiv. 30; Jn. vi. 5 sqq.; Acts 
xxvii. 35, and often; ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως. loaves conse- 
crated to Jehovah, see πρόθεσις ; on the bread used at the 
love-feasts and the sacred supper [W. 35], ef. Mt. xxvi. 
26; Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; Acts ii. 42,46; xx. 7; 1 
Co. x. 16 sq.; xi. 26-28. 2. As in Grk. writ., and like 
the Hebr. om, food of any kind; Mt. vi. 11; Mk. vi. 8; 
Lk. xi. 3; 2 Co. ix. 10; ὁ ἄρτος τῶν τέκνων the food served 
to the children, Mk. vii. 27; ἄρτον φαγεῖν or ἐσθίειν to 
take food, to eat (on9 55) [W. 33 (32)]: Mk. iii. 20; 
Lk. xiv. 1, 15; Mt. xv. 2; dprov aye παρά τινος to 
take food supplied by one, 2 Th. iii. 8; τὸν ἑαυτοῦ dpr. 
ἐσθίειν to eat the food which one has procured for him- 
self by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; μήτε ἄρτον ἐσθίων. 
μήτε οἶνον πίνων. abstaining from the usual sustenance, 
or using it sparingly, Lk. vii. 33; τρώγειν τὸν ἄρτον μετά 
twos to be one’s table-companion, his familiar friend, Jn. 
xiii. 18 (Ps. xl. (xli.) 10). In Jn. vi. 32-35 Jesus calls him- 
self τὸν ἄρτον τοῦ θεοῦ, τ. a. ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τ. a. τῆς ζωῆς. 
as the divine λύγος, come from heaven, who containing 
in himself the source of heavenly life supplies celestial 
nutriment to souls that they may attain to life eternal. 

ἀρτύω: fut. ἀρτύσω; Pass., pf. ἤρτυμαι.. 1 fut. ἀρτυθή- 
σομαι; (APQ to fit); to prepare, arrange ; often soin Hom. 
In the comic writers and epigrammatists used of pre- 
paring food, to season, make savory, ([τὰ ὄψα, Aristot. 
eth. Nic. 8, 13 p. 1118", 29]; ἠρτυμένος οἶνο;, Theophr. 
de odor. § 51 [frag. 4, ο. 11]); so Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 
34; metaph. ὁ λόγος ἅλατι nprupevos, full of wisdom and 
grace and hence pleasant and wholesome, Col. iv. 6.* 

᾿Αρφαξάδ, 6, Arphaxad, (1W3318), son of Shem (Gen. 
X. 22, 245 xi. 10, 12, [ef. Jos. antt. 1, 6,47): Lk. iii. 36.* 

ἀρχ-άγγελος, -ov, 6, (fr. ἄρχι, q- V., and ἄγγελος). a bibl. 
and 660]. word, archangel, i. 6. chief of the angels (Hebr. 
Ww chief, prince, Dan. x. 20; xii. 1), or one of the princes 
and leaders of the angels (DYN O WH, Dan. x. 13): 
1 Th. iv. 16; Jude 9. For the Jews after the exile dis- 
tinguished several orders of angels, and some (as the 
author of the book of Enoch, ix. 1 sqq.; ef. Dillmann 
ad loc. p. 97 sq.) reckoned four angels (answering to 
the four sides of the throne of God) of the highest rank; 
but others, and apparently the majority (Tob. xii. 15, 
where ef. Fritzsche; Rev. viii. 2), reckoned seven 
(after the pattern of the seven Amshaspands, the hich- 
est spirits in the religion of Zoroaster). See 8. vv. Γὰ- 
βριήλ and Μιχαήλ." 

ἀρχαῖος, -αία, -αἴον, (fr. ἀρχή beginning, hence) prop. 
that has been from the beginning, original, primeval, old, 
ancient, used of men, things, times, conditions: Lk. ix. 
8,19; Acts xv. 7, 21; xxi. 16; 2 Pet. ii. 5; Rev. xii. 9; 
Xx. 2; of ἀρχαῖοι the ancients, the early Israelites: Mt. 
y. 21, 27 [Ree.], 33; τὰ ἀρχαῖα the man’s previous moral 
condition: 2 Co. v. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and 
Hat. down.)* ; 

|Syv. ἀρχαῖος, παλαιός: in mad. the simple idea of 
time dominates, while apy. (“ σημαίνει καὶ τὸ ἀρχῆς ἔχεσθαι," 


τὸ ἀρχή 


and so) often carries with it a suggestion of nature or origi- 
nal character. Cf. Schmidt ch. 46; Trench ὃ lxvii.] 

*Apxé-Aaos, -ου, 6, Archelaus, (fr. dpyw and dads, ruling 
the people), a son of Herod the Great by Malthace, the 
Samaritan. He and his brother Antipas were brought 
up with a certain private man at Rome (Joseph. antt. 
17,1, 3). After the death of his father he ruled ten 
years as ethnarch over Judwa, Samaria, and Idumaa, 
(with the exception of the cities Gaza, Gadara, and 
Hippo). TheJews and Samaritans having accused him 
at Rome of tyranny, he was banished by the emperor 
(Augustus) to Vienna of the Allobroges, and died there 
(Joseph. antt. 17, 9, 3; 11,4; 13, 2; b. j. 2,7, 3): Mt. 
ii. 22. [See B. D. 5. v. and ef. Ἡρώδης.] " 

ἀρχή, -7s, 7, (fr. Hom. down], in Sept. mostly equiv. to 
UND, MUN, monn; 1. beginning, origin; a. used 
absolutely, of the beginning of all things: ἐν ἀρχῇ, Jn. i. 
1 sq. (Gen. i. 1); ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς. Mt. xix. 4 (with which ef. 
Xen. mem. 1, 4, 5 ὁ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ποιῶν ἀνθρώπους), 8; In. 
Vili. 44; 1 Jn. i. 1; ii. 13 sq.; iii. 8; more fully ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς 
κτίσεως or κύσμου. Mt. xxiv. 21 3 Mk. x. 6 3 xiii. 19; 2 Th. 
ii. 13 (where L[Trmrg. WH mrg.] ἀπαρχήν, 4- v-) ; 2 Pet. 
iii. 4; κατ᾽ apya , Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 20). b. ina 
relative sense, of the beginning of the thing spoken of: 
ἐξ ἀρχῆς, fr. the time when Jesus gathered disciples, Jn. 
vi. 64; xvi. 4; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς. Jn. xv. 27 (since I appeared in 
public); as soon as instruction was imparted, 1 Jn. ii. 
[1], 24; iii. 11; 2 Jn. 5 sq.; more fully ἐν ἀρχῇ τοῦ eday- 
yeXiov, Phil. iv. 15 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2 [see note in 
Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. and cf.] Polye. ad Philipp. 11, 3); 
from the beginning of the gospel history, Lk. i. 2; from 
the commencement of life, Acts xxvi. 4; ἐν ἀρχῇ; in the 
beginning, when the church was founded, Acts xi. 15. 
The ace. ἀρχήν [ef. W. 124 (118): Bp. Lehtft. on Col. i. 
18] and τὴν ἀρχήν in the Grk. writ. (cf. Lennep ad Pha- 
larid. p. 82 sqq. and p. 94 sqq. ed. Lips.; Briickner in De 
Wette’s Hdbch. on John p. 151) is often used adver- 
bially, i. q. ὅλως altogether, (properly. an ace. of “ direc- 
tion towards’: usque ad initium, [ef. W. 230 (216); B. 
153 (134)]), commonly followed by a negative, but not 
always [cf. e.g. Dio Cass. frag. 101 (93 Dind.); xlv. 34 
(Dind. vol. ii. p. 194); lix. 20; Ixii. 4; see, further, 
Lycurg. § 125 ed. Miitzner]; hence that extremely difli- 
cult passage, Jn. viii. 25 rv. . . ὑμῖν, must in my opinion 
be interpreted as follows: / am altogether or wholly (i. e. in 
all respects, precisely) that which I even speak to you (1 
not only am, but also declare to you what I am; therefore 
you have no need to question me), [ef. W. 464 (432); B. 
253 (218) |. ἀρχὴν λαμβάνειν to take beginning, to begin, 
Heb. ii. 3. with the addition of the gen. of the thing 
spoken of : ὠδινων. Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9) [(here 
R G plur.): to” σημείων, Jn. ii. 11]; ἡμερῶν, Heb. vii. 3; 
τοῦ εὐαγγελίου. that from which the gospel history took 
its beginning, Mk. i. 1; τῆς ὑποστάσεως, the confidence 
with which we have made a beginning, opp. to μέχρε 
τέλους. Heb. iii. 14. τὰ στοιχεῖα τῆς ἀρχῆς, Heb. v. 12 
(τῆς ἀρχῆς is added for greater explicitness, as in Lat. ru- 
dimenta prima, Liv.1,3; Justin. hist. 7,5; and prima 


ἀρχηγός T 


elementa, Horat. sat. 1, 1, 26, ete.); ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ λόγος equiv. to ὁ τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγος ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς; 
i. 6. the instruction concerning Christ such as it was at 
the very outset [cf. W. 188 (177); B. 155 (136) ], Heb. 
vi.l. 2. the person or thing that commences, the first per- 
son or thing in aseries, the leader : Col.i. 18; Rev. i. 8 Ree.; 
xxi. 6; xxii. 13; (Deut. xxi. 17; Job xl. 14 (19), etc.). 
8. that by which anything begins to be, the origin, active 
cause (a sense in which the philosopher Anaximander, 
8th cent. B. c., is said to have been the first to use the 
word; ef. Simpl. on Aristot. phys. f. 9 p. 326 ed. Brandis 
and 32 p. 334 ed. Brandis, [ef. Teichmiiller, Stud. zur 
Gesch. ἃ. Begriffe, pp. 48 sqq. 560 sqq.]): ἡ ἀρχὴ τῆς 
κτίσεως, of Christ as the divine λόγος. Rey. iii. 14 (cf. 
Diisterdieck ad loc.; Clem. Al. protrept. 1, p. 6 ed. 
Potter, [p. 30 ed. Sylb.] ὁ λόγος ἀρχὴ θεῖα τῶν πάντων ; 
in Evang. Nicod. ὁ. 23 [p. 308 ed. Tdf., p. 736 ed. 
Thilo] the devil is called ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ θανάτου καὶ ῥίζα 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας). 4. the extremity of a thing: of the cor- 
ners of a sail, Acts x. 11; xi. 5; (Hdt. 4, 60; Diod. 
4, 35; al.). 5. the first place, principality, rule, magis- 
tracy, [cf. Eng. ‘ authorities’, (ἄρχω twos): Lk. xii. 11; 
xx. 20; Tit. iii. 1; office given in charge (Gen. xl. 13, 21; 
2 Mace. iv. 10, ete.), Jude 6. Hence the term is trans- 
ferred by Paul to angels and demons holding dominions 
entrusted to them in the order of things (see ἄγγελος, 
2 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 21]): 
Ro. viii. 88; 1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. i. 21; iii. 10; vi. 12; 
Col. 1.16 ; 11.10, 15. See ἐξουσία, 4c. BS. * 

ἀρχηνός, -dv, adj., leading, furnishing the first cause or 
occasion: Eur. Hipp. 881; Plat. Crat. p. 401 d.; chiefly 
used as subst. 6, 7, ἀρχηγός. (ἀρχή and ἄγω): 1. the 
chief leader, prince: of Christ, Acts v. 31; (Aeschyl. 
Ag. 259; Thue. 1, 132; Sept. Is. iii. 5 sq.; 2 Chr. xxiii. 
14, and often). 2. one that takes the lead in any thing 
(1 Maee. x. 47 dpy. λόγων εἰρηνικῶν) and thus affords an 
example, a predecessor in a matter: τῆς πίστεως. of Christ, 
Heb. xii. 2 (who in the pre-eminence of his faith far sur- 
passed the examples of faith commemorated in ch. xi.), 
[al. bring this under the next head; yet ef. Kurtz ad 
loc.]. So ἀρχηγός ἁμαρτίας, Mic. i. 13; ζήλους, Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1 ; τῆς στάσεως καὶ διχυστασίας, ibid. 51, 
1; τῆς ἀποστασίας, of the devil, Iren. 4, 40, 1; τοιαύτης 
φιλοσοφίας, of Thales, Aristot. met. 1, 3, 7 [p. 983° 20]. 
Hence 3. the author: τῆς ζωῆς, Acts iii. 15; τῆς σωτη- 
pias, Heb. ii. 10. (Often so in prof. auth. : τῶν πάντων, 
of God, [Plato] Tim. Locr. p. 96 ¢.; τοῦ γένους τῶν. ἀν- 
θρώπων, of God, Diod. 5, 72; ἀρχηγὸς καὶ αἴτιος. leader and 
author, are often joined, as Polyb. 1, 66, 10; Hdian. 2, 6, 
22 [14 ed. Bekk.]). Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii.1, p.301 sq.* 

ἄρχι, (fr. dpyw, ἀρχός), an inseparable prefix, usually 
to names of office or dignity, to designate the one who 
is placed over the rest that hold the office (Germ. Ober-, 
Erz-, (Eng. arch- (chief-, high-)]), as ἀρχάγγελος, apxe- 
ποίμην [q. V-], ἀρχιερεύς, ἀρχίατρος, ἀρχιευνοῦχος, ἀρχυπε- 
ρέτης (in Egypt. inscriptions), ete., most of which belong 
to Alexand. and Byzant. Grk. Cf. Thiersch, De Pen- 
tateuchi versione Alex. p. 77 sq. 


- 


ἀρχιερεύς 


ἀρχ-ιερατικός, -7, -dv, (ἄρχι and ἱερατικός, and this fr. 
iepdopa [to be a priest]), high-priestly, pontifical : γένος, 
Acts iv. 6, [so Corp. Inserr. Graec. no. 4363; see Schiirer 
as cited s. v. ἀρχιερεύς, 2 fin.]. (Joseph. antt. 4, 4, 7; 6, 
6,3; 15, 8,1.) " 

ἀρχ-ιερεύς, -έως, 6, chief priest, high-priest. 1. He who 
above a others was honored with the title of priest, the 
chief of the priests, 917137 j3 (Lev. xxi. 10; Num. xxxv. 
25, [later UNI 7113, 2 K. xxv. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 11, εἴς. }) : 
Mt. xxvi. 3, and often in the Gospels, the Acts, and the 
Ep. to the Heb. It was lawful for him to perform the 
common duties of the priesthood; but his chief duty 
was, once a year on the day of atonement, to enter the 
Holy of holies (from which the other priests were ex- 
cluded) and offer sacrifice for his own sins and the sins 
of the people (Lev. xvi.; Heb. ix. 7, 25), and to preside 
over the Sanhedrin, or supreme Council, when convened 
for judicial deliberations (Mt. xxvi. 3; Acts xxii. ὃ; 
xxiii. 2). According to the Mosaic law no one could 
aspire to the high-priesthood unless he were of the tribe 
of Aaron, and descended moreover from a high-priestly 
family ; and he on whom the office was conferred held 
it tilldeath. But from the time of Antiochus Epiphanes, 
when the kings of the Seleucid and afterwards the 
Herodian princes and the Romans arrogated to them- 
selves the power of appointing the high-priests, the office 
neither remained vested in the pontifical family nor was 
conferred on any one for life; but it became venal, and 
could be transferred from one to another according to 
the will of civil or military rulers. Hence it came to 
pass, that during the one hundred and seven years inter- 
vening between Herod the Great and the destruction of 
the holy city, twenty-eight persons held the pontifical 
dignity (Joseph. antt. 20, 10; see “Avvas). Cf. Win. 
R W Β. 5. v. Hoherpriester; Oehler in Herzog vi. p. 198 
sqq-; [BB.DD. 5. vv. Highpriest, Priest, ete. The 
names of the 28 (27?) above alluded to are given, to- 
gether with a brief notice of each, in an art. by Schiirer 
in the Stud. ἃ. Krit. for 1872, pp. 597-607]. 2. The 
plur. ἀρχιερεῖς, which occurs often in the Gospels and 
Acts, as Mt. ii. 4; xvi. 21; xxvi.3; xxvii. 41; Mk. viii. 31; 
xiv. 1; xv.1; Lk. xix. 47; xxii. 52, 66; xxiii. 4; xxiv. 20; 
dn. vii. 32; xi.573 xviii. 35; Acts iv. 23; v. 24; ix. 14, 
21; xxii. 20; xxiii. 14, etc., and in Josephus, comprises, 
in addition to the one actually holding the high-priestly 
office, both those who had previously discharged it and 
although deposed continued to have great power in the 
State (Joseph. vita 38; b. j. 2,12, 6: 4,3,7:9; 4,4, 3; 
see “Avvas above), as well as the members of the families 
from which high-priests were created, provided they had 
much influence in public affairs (Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 2). 
See on this point the learned discussion by Schiirer, Die 
ἀρχιερεῖς im N.T., in the Stud. ἃ. Krit. for 1872, p. 
593 sqq. and in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23 iii. p. 407 
sqq- [Prof. Schiirer, besides reviewing the opinions of 
the more recent writers, contends that in no instance 
where indubitable reference to the heads of the twenty- 
four classes is wads (neither in the Sept. 1 Chr. xxiv 


ἀρχιποίμην 


8 sq.; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 14; Ezra x. 5; Neh. xii. 7; nor in 
Joseph. antt. 7, 14, 7) are they called ἀρχιερεῖς ; that the 
nearest approximations to this term are periphrases 
such as ἄρχοντες τῶν ἱερέων, Neh. xii. 7, or φύλαρχοι τῶν 
ἱερέων, Esra apocr. (1 Esdr.) viii. 92 (94) ; Joseph. antt. 
11, 5,4; and that the word ἀρχιερεῖς was restricted in its 
application to those who actually held, or had held, the 
high-priestly office, together with the members of the 
few prominent families from which the high-priests still 
continued to be selected, cf. Acts iv. 6; Joseph. b. j. 4, 
3, 6.] 3. In the Ep. to the Heb. Christ is called 
‘high-priest,’ because by undergoing a bloody death he 
offered himself as an expiatory sacrifice to God, and 
has entered the heavenly sanctuary where he continually 
intercedes on our behalf: ii. 17; iii. 1; iv. 14; v. 10; 
vi. 20; vii. 26; viii. 1; ix.11; ef. Winzer, De sacerdotis 
officio, quod Christo tribuitur in Ep. ad Hebr. (three 
Programs), Leips. 1825 sq. ; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des He- 
briierbriefes, ii. pp. 431-488. In Grk. writ. the word is 
used by Hat. 2, [(37), 142,] 143 and 151; Plat. legg. 12 
p- 947 a.; Polyb. 23, 1, 2; 32, 22, 5; Plut. Numac. 9, 
al.; [often in Inserr.]; once (viz. Ley. iv. 3) in the 
Sept., where ἱερεὺς μέγας is usual, in the O. T. Apocr. 1 
Esdr. ν. 40; ix. 40, and often in the bks. of Macc. 

ἀρχι-ποίμην, -evos [so L T Tr WH KC (after Mss.), but 
Grsb. al. -μήν, -μένος ; ef. Lob. Paralip. p 195 sq.; Steph. 
Thesaur. s. v.; Chandler § 580], 6, a bibl. word [Test. 
xii. Patr. test. Jud. § 8], chief shepherd: of Christ the 
head of the church, 1 Pet. v. 4; see ποιμήν, b.* 

"Apyimmos [Chandler § 308], -ου, 6, [i. 6. master of the 
horse], Archippus, a certain Christian at Colosse : Col. 
iv. 17; Philem. 2. [Cf. B. Ὁ. 5. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 
and Philem. p. 308 sq.]* 

ἀρχισυνάγωγος, -ov, 6, (συναγωγή), ruler of a synagogue, 
noian wea: Mk. ν. 22, 35 sq. 38; Lk. viii. 49 ; xiii. 14; 
Acts xiii. 15; xviii. 8,17. It was his duty to select the 
readers or teachers in the synagogue, to examine the 
discourses of the public speakers, and to see that all 
things were done with decency and in accordance with 
ancestral usage; [cf. Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Synagogue]. 
(Not found in prof. writ. ; [yet Schiirer (Theol. Literatur- 
Zeit., 1878, p. 5) refers to Corp. Inserr. Graec. no 2007 £. 
(Addenda ii. p. 994), no. 2221° (ii. p. 1031), nos. 9894, 
9906; Mommsen, Inscrr. Regni Neap. no. 3657; Garrucci, 
Cimitero degli antichi Ebrei, p. 67; Lampridius, Vita 
Alexandr. Sever. c. 28; Vopiscus, Vit. Saturnin. ec. 8; 
Codex Theodos. xvi. 8, 4, 13, 14; also Acta Pilat. in 
Tdf.’s Ev. Apocr. ed. 2, pp. 221, 270, 275, 284; Justin. 
dial. c. Tryph. ο. 137; Epiph. haer. 30,18; Euseb. ἢ. 6. 
7, 10, 4; see fully in his Gemeindeverfassung der Juden 
in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt 
(Leips. 1879), p. 25 sq-].)* 

ἀρχιτέκτων, -ovos, ὁ, (τέκτων, q. V-), α master-builder, 
architect, the superintendent in the erection of buildings: 
1 Co. iii. 10. (Hdt., Xen., Plat. and subseq. writ.; Is. 
111. 3; Sir. xxxviii. 27; 2 Macc. ii. 29.) * 

ἀρχι-τελώνης, -ov, 6, a chief of the tax-collectors, chief 
publican: Lk. xix. 2. [See τελώνης. " 


78 


ἄρχω 


ἀρχιυ-τρίκλινος, -ου; ὁ, (τρίκλινον [or -vos (sc. οἶκος), ἃ room 
with three couches ]), he superintendent of a dining-room, 
a τρικλινιάρχης, table-master: Jn. ii. 8 sq. [ef. B.D. s. v. 
Governor}. It differs from “the master of a feast,” 
συμποσιάρχης; toast-master, who was one of the guests se- 
lected by lot to prescribe to the rest the mode of drink- 
ing; ef. Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 1. But it was the duty of 
the ἀρχιτρίκλινος to place in order the tables and couches, 
arrange the courses, taste the food and wine beforehand, 
ete. (Heliod. 7, 27.) [Some regard the distinction be- 
tween the two words as obliterated in later Grk.; οἵ. 
Soph. Lex. s. v., and Schaff’s Lange’s Com. on Jn. 1. 6.1" 

ἄρχομαι, see ἄρχω. 

ἄρχω ; [fr. Hom. down]; to be first. 1. to be the first 
to do (anything), to begin, —a sense not found in the 
Grk. Bible. 2. to be chief, leader, ruler: twos [B. 169 
(147) ], Mk. x. 42; Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10). See ἄρχων. 
Mid., pres. ἄρχομαι ; fut. ἄρξομαι (once [twice], Lk. xiii. 
26 [but not Tr mrg. WH mrg.; xxiii. 30]); 1 aor. ἠρξά- 
μην; to begin, make a beginning: ἀπό twos, Acts x. 37 
[B. 79 (69); ef. Matth. § 558]; 1 Pet. iv. 17; by bra- 
chylogy ἀρξάμενος ἀπό τινος ἕως τινός for, having begun 
from some person or thing (and continued or continu- 
ing) to some person or thing: Mt. xx.8; Jn. viii. 9 [i.e. 
Rec.]; Acts i. 22; ef. W. § 66, 1 c.; [B. 374 (320)]; ἀρξά- 
μενον is used impers. and absol. a beginning being made, 
Lk. xxiv. 27 (so in Hadt. 3, 91; cf. W. 624 (580) ; [B. 374 
sq. (321)]); carelessly, ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ Μωυσέως καὶ ἀπὸ 
πάντων προφητῶν διηρμήνευεν for, beginning from Mo- 
ses he went through all the prophets, Lk. xxiv. 27; W. 
§ 67, 2; [B. 374 (320 sq.)]. ὧν ἤρξατο ποιεῖν re καὶ διδά- 
σκειν, ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας which he began and continued both 
to do and to teach, until ete., Acts i. 1 [W. § 66, 1 ¢.; B. 
u.s.]. ἔΑρχομαι is connected with an inf. and that so of- 
ten, esp. in the historical books, that formerly most inter- 
preters thought it constituted a periphrasis for the finite 
form of the verb standing in the inf., as ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν 
for ἐκήρυξε. But through the influence principally of 
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 539 sq.), ef. W. § 65, 7 d., it is now 
conceded that the theory of a periphrasis of this kind was 
arash assumption, and that there is scarcely an example 
which cannot be reduced to one of the following classes : 
a. the idea of beginning has more or less weight or im- 
portance, so that it is brought out by a separate word : 
Mt. xi. 7 (the disciples of John having retired, Christ 
began to speak concerning John, which he did not do 
while they were present) ; Lk. iii. 8 (do not even begin 
to say; make not even an attempt to excuse yourselves) ; 
Lk. xv. 14 (the beginning of want followed hard upon the 
squandering of his goods) ; Lk. xxi. 28; 2Co. iii. 1; esp. 
when the beginning of an action is contrasted with its 
continuance or its repetition, Mk. vi. 7; viii. 31 (εἴ. ix. 
31; x. 33 sq.); or with the end of it, Lk. xiv. 30 (opp. 
to ἐκτελέσαι) ; Jn. xiii. 5 (cf. 12). b. apy. denotes some- 
thing as begun by some one, others following : Acts xxvii. 
35 sq. [W. §65,7d.]. ο. dpy. indicates that a thing was 
but just begun when it was interrupted by something 
else: Mt. xii. 1 (they had begun to pluck ears of corn, 


ἄρχων 


but they were prevented from continuing by the inter- 
ference of the Pharisees); Mt. xxvi. 22 (Jesus answered 
before all had finished), 74; Mk. ii. 23; iv. 1 (he had 
scarcely begun to teach, when a multitude gathered unto 
him); Mk. vi. 2; x. 41; Lk. v.21; xii. 45 sq.; xiii. 23; 
Acts xi. 15 (cf. x. 44); xviii. 26, and often. d. the ac- 
tion itself, instead of its beginning, might indeed have 
been mentioned; but in order that the more attention 
may be given to occurrences which seem to the writer 
to be of special importance, their initial stage, their be- 
ginning, is expressly pointed out: Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xiv. 
18; Acts ii. 4, ete. 6. apy. occurs in a sentence which 
has grown out of the blending of two statements: Mt. iv. 
17; xvi. 21 (fr. ἀπὸ τότε ἐκήρυξε... . ἔδειξε, and τότε 
ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν ... δεικνύειν). The inf. is wanting 
when discoverable from the context: ἀρχόμενος, sc. to 
discharge the Messianic office, Lk. iii. 23 [W. 349 
(828) ]; ἀρξάμενος sc. λέγειν, Acts xi. 4. [Comp.: ἐν- 
(μαι), mpo-ev-(-par), ὑπ-, mpo-Um -dpxa. | 

ἄρχων, -ovros, ὁ, (pres. ptep. of the verb ἄρχω), [fr. 
Aeschyl. down], a ruler, commander, chief, leader: used 
of Jesus, ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς, Rev. i. 5; of the 
rulers of nations, Mt. xx. 25; Acts iv. 26; vii. 35; 


univ. of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 3; Acts xxiii. 5; espe- 


cially judges, Lk. xii. 58; Acts vii. 27, 35 (where note 
the antithesis: whom they refused as ἄρχοντα καὶ δικα- 
στήν, him God sent as apyovra— leader, ruler 
my); Acts xvi. 19. of ἄρχοντες τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, those 
who in the present age (see αἰών, 3) by nobility of birth, 
learning and wisdom, power and authority, wield the 
greatest influence, whether among Jews or Gentiles, 1 Co. 
li. 6, 8; cf. Neander ad loc. p. 62 sqq. Of the members 
of the Jewish Sanhedrin: Lk. xxiii. 13, 35; xxiv. 20; 
Jn. ili. 1; vii. 26, 48; xii.42; Actsiii.17; iv. 5, 8; xiii. 
27; xiv. 5. of the officers presiding over synagogues : 
Mt. ix. 18,23; Lk. viii. 41 (ἄρχων τῆς συναγωγῆς, cf. Mk. 
v. 22 ἀρχισυνάγωγος). and perhaps also Lk. xviii. 18; 
ἄρχων τῶν Φαρισαίων, one who has great influence among 
the Pharisees, Lk. xiv. 1. of the devil, the prince of 
evil spirits: (6) ἄρχων τῶν δαιμονίων, Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24; 
Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15 ; 6 ἄρχ. τοῦ κόσμου, the ruler of the 
irreligious mass of mankind, Jn. xii. 31; xiv. 30; xvi. 11, 
(in rabbin. writ. Dyn WW); ἄρχ. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, 
[enat. ad Eph. 19, 1 [ad Magn. 1, 3]; ἄρχων τοῦ καιροῦ τῆς 
cvonias, Barn. ep. 18,2); τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ ἀέρος, Eph. ii. 2 
(see ἀήρ). [See Hort in Dict. of Chris. Biog., s.v. Archon. }* 

ἄρωμα, -ros, τό, (fr. APO to prepare, whence ἀρτύω ‘to 
season; [ἃ]. connect it with r. ar (dpow) to plough (cf. 
Gen. xxvii. 27) ; al. al.]), spice, perfume: Mk. xvi. 1; Lk. 
xxiii. 56; xxiv.1; Jn. xix.40. (2 K.xx.13; Esth. ii. 12; 
Cant. iv.10,16. [Hippocr.], Xen., Theophr. and subseq. 
writ.) * 

᾿Ασά, 6, (Chald. δὲ to cure), Asa, king of Judah, son 
of king Abijah (1 K. xv. 8 sqq.): Mt.i.7 sq. [LT Tr 
WH read ᾿Ασάφ q. v.]* 

ἀσαίνω : in 1 Th. iii. 8, Kuenen and Cobet (in their 
N. T. ad fidem cod. Vat., Lugd. 1860 [pref. p. xe.]), fol- 
dowing Lehm. [who followed Valckenaer in following J. 


καὶ λυτρω- 


- 


9 ἀσέλγεια 


J. Reiske (Animad. ad Polyb. p. 68) ; see Valck. Opusce. 
11. 246-249] in his larger edit., conjectured and received 
into their text μηδὲν ἀσαίνεσθαι, which they think to be 
equiv. to ἄχθεσθαι, χαλεπῶς φέρειν. But there is no ne- 
cessity for changing the Rec. (see σαίνω, 2 Ὁ. 8.), nor can 
it be shown that ἀσαίνω is used by Grk. writ. for ἀσάω." 

ἀσάλευτος, -ον, (σαλεύω), unshaken, unmoved: prop. 
Acts xxvii. 41; metaph. βασιλεία, not liable to disorder 
and overthrow, firm, stable, Heb. xii. 28. (Eur. Bacch. 
391; ἐλευθερία, Diod. 2, 48 ; εὐδαιμονία, ibid. 3,47; ἡσυχία, 
Plat. Ax. 370 d.; Plut., al.) * 

*Acad, ὁ, [8 51. collector), a man’s name, a clerical 
error for R G ᾽᾿Ασά (4: v.), adopted by L T Tr WH in 
Mt. i. 7 sq.* 

ἄσβεστος, -ov, (σβέννυμι), unquenched (Ovid, inexstinc- 
tus), unquenchable (Vulg. inexstinguibilis) : πῦρ, Mt. iii. 
12; Lk. iii. 17; Mk. ix.43,and RG Lbr. in 45. (Often 
in Hom.; πῦρ ἄσβ. of the perpetual fire of Vesta, Dion. 
Hal. antt. 1, 76; [of the fire on the altar, Philo de 
ebriet. ὃ 34 (Mang. i. 378); de vict. off. § 5 (Mang. ii. 
254); of the fire of the magi, Strabo 15, (3) 15; see 
also Plut. symp. 1. vii. probl. 4; Aelian. nat. an. 5,3; cf. 
Heinichen on Euseb. h. 6. 6, 41, 15].) * 

ἀσέβεια, -as, ἡ, (ἀσεβής, 4. V-), want of reverence towards 
God, impiety, ungodliness: Ro. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 16; Tit. 
ii. 12; plur. ungodly thoughts and deeds, Ro. xi. 26 (fr. 
Is. lix. 20); τὰ ἔργα ἀσεβείας [Treg. br. ἀσεβ.7 works of 
ungodliness, a Hebraism, Jude 15, οἵ. W. § 34, 3 b.; [B. 
§ 132, 10]; ai ἐπιθυμίαι τῶν ἀσεβειῶν their desires to do 
ungodly deeds, Jude 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur.], Plat. 
and Xen. down; in the Sept. it corresponds chiefly to 
pwa.)* 

ἀσεβέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἠσέβησα; (ἀσεβής, 4. v-); from 
[Aeschyl.], Xen. and Plato down; to be ungodly, act im- 
piously: 2 Pet. ii. 6; ἀσεβεῖν ἔργα ἀσεβείας [ Tres. br. 
ἀσεβείας], Jude 15, cf. W. 222 (209); [B. 149 (130)]. 
(Equiv. to pwa, Zeph. 111. 11; yw, Dan. ix. 5.) * 

ἀσεβής, -és, (σέβω to reverence); fr. Aeschyl. and 
Thue. down, Sept. for pw; destitute of reverential awe 
towards God, contemning God, impious: Ro. iv. 5; v. 63 
1 Tim. i. 9 (joined here with ἁμαρτωλός, as in 1 Pet. iv. 
18); 2 Pet. ii. 5; iii. 7; Jude 4, 15.* 

ἀσέλγεια, -as, 7, the conduct and character of one who 
is ἀσελγής (a word which some suppose to be com- 
pounded of a priv. and Σέλγη, the name of a city in Pi- 
sidia whose citizens excelled in strictness of morals [so 
Etym. Magn. 152, 38; per contra ef. Suidas 603 d.]; 
others of a intens. and σαλαγεῖν to disturb, raise a din; 
others, and now the majority, of a priv. and σέλγω i. q. 
θέλγω. not affecting pleasantly, exciting disgust), wn- 
bridled lust, excess, licentiousnéss, lasciviousness, wanton- 
ness, outrageousness, shamelessness, insolence: Mk. vii. 
22 (where it is uncertain what particular vice is spoken 
of); of gluttony and venery, Jude 4; plur., 1 Pet. iv. 3; 
2 Pet. ii. 2 (for Rec. ἀπωλείαις), 18; of carnality, 
lasciviousness: 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v.19; Eph.iv. 19; 2 
Pet. ii. 7; plur. “wanton (acts or) manners, as filthy 
words, indecent bodily movements, unchaste handling of 


ἄσημος 


males and females, etc.” (Fritzsche), Ro. xiii. 18. (In 
bibl. Grk. besides only in Sap. xiv. 26 and 3 Mace. ii. 26. 
Among Grk. writ. used by Plat., Isocr. et sqq.; at length 
by Plut. [Lucull. 887 and Leian. [dial. meretr. 6] of the 
wantonness of women [Zob. ad Phryn. p.184n.].) Cf. 
Tittmann i. p. 151 sq.; [esp. Trench § xvi.].* 

ἄσημος, -ov, (σῆμα a mark), unmarked or unstamped 
(money); unknown, of no mark, insignificant, ignoble : 
Acts xxi. 39. (3 Mace. i. 3; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; 
trop. fr. Eur. down.) * 

᾿Ασήρ, 6, an indecl. Hebr. prop. name, (wk [i. e. hap- 
py, Gen. xxx. 13]), (in Joseph. "Aanpos, του, 6), Asher, 
the eighth son of the patriarch Jacob: Lk. ii. 36; Rev. 
vii. 6.” 

ἀσθένεια, -as, 7, (ἀσθενής), [fr. Hdt. down], want of 
strength, weakness, infirmity; a. of Body; a. its native 
weakness and frailty: 1 Co. xv.43; 2 Co. xiii.4. B. feeble- 
ness of health; sickness: Jn. v.5; xi. 4; Lk. xiii. 11,12; 
Gal. iv. 13 (ἀσθένεια τῆς σαρκός) ; Heb. xi. 34; in plur.: 
Mt. viii. 17; Lk. v.15; viii. 2; Acts xxviii. 9; 1 Tim. v. 
23. b. of Soul; want of the strength and capacity re- 
quisite a. to understand a thing: Ro. vi. 19 (where ἀσθ. 
σαρκός denotes the weakness of human nature). B. to do 
things great and glorious, as want of human wisdom, of 
skill in speaking, in the management of men: 1 Co. ii. 
3. y. to restrain corrupt desires ; proclivity to sin: Heb. 
v. 2; vii. 28; plur. the various kinds of this proclivity, 
Heb. iv. 15. δ. to bear trials and troubles: Ro. viii. 26 
(where read τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ for Ree. ταῖς ἀσθενείαις) ; 2 Co. 
xi. 30; xii. 9; plur. the mental [?] states in which this 
weakness manifests itself: 2 Co. xii. 5, 9 sq.* 

ἀσϑθενέω, -ὥ ; impf. ἠσθένουν ; pf. ἠσθένηκα (2 Co. xi. 21 
LT TrWH); 1 δου. ἠσθένησα; (ἀσθενής); [fr. Eur. down]; 
to be weak, feeble; univ. to be without strength, power- 
less: Ro. viii. 3; rhetorically, of one who purposely ab- 
stains from the use of his strength, 2 Co. xiii. 4; and 
of one who has no occasion to prove his strength, 2 Co. 
xiii. 9; contextually, to be unable to wield and hold sway 


over others, 2 Co. xi. 21; by oxymoron, ὅταν ἀσθενῶ. τότε | 


δυνατός εἰμι when I am weak in human strength, then am 
I strong in strength divine, 2 Co. xii. 10; εἴς twa, to be 
weak towards one, 2 Co. xiii. 3; witha dat. of the respect 
added: πίστει, to be weak in faith, Ro. iv. 19; πίστει, to 
be doubtful about things lawful and unlawful to a Chris- 
tian, Ro. xiv. 1; simple ἀσθενεῖν with the same idea sug- 
gested, Ro. xiv. 2, 21 [Ὁ WH om. Tr mrg. br.]; 1 Co. 
viii. 9 Rec., 11 sq.; τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ; who is 
weak (in his feelings and conviction about things law- 
ful), and I am not filled with a compassionate sense of 
the same weakness? 2 Co. xi. 29. contextually, to be 
weak in means, needy, poor: Acts xx. 35 (so [Arstph. 
pax 636]; Eur. in Stob. 145 vol. ii. 168 ed. Gaisf.), ef. 
De Wette [more fully Hackett, per contra Meyer] ad 
loc. Specially of debility in health: with νόσοις added, 
Lk. iv. 40; simply, to be feeble, sick: Lk. vii. 10 [RG Tr 
mrg. br.]; Mt. xxv. 36, 39 L txt. T Tr WH; Jn. iv. 46; 
xi. 1-3, 6; Acts ix. 37; Phil. ii. 26 sq.; 2 Tim. iv. 20; 
Jas. v. 14; of ἀσθενοῦντες, and ἀσθενοῦντες, the sick, sick 


80 


᾿Ασιάρχης 


folks: Mt. x. 8; Mk. vi. 56; Lk. ix. 2Rec.; Jn. v. 3, 7, 
13 Tdf.; vi. 2; Acts xix. ΤῸ» 

ἀσθένημα, -aros, τό, (ἀσθενέω), infirmity: Ro. xv. 1 
(where used of error arising from weakness of mind). 
[In a physical sense in Aristot. hist. an. 11, 7 vol. i. 638°, 
37; gen. an. 1, 18 ibid. p. 726° 15.]* 

ἀσθενής, -és, (τὸ σθένος strength), weak, infirm, feeble : 
(fr. Pind. down]; a. univ.: Mt. xxvi.41; Mk. xiv. 38; 
1 Pet. iii. 7; τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ, the act of God in which 
weakness seems to appear, viz. that the suffering of the 
cross should be borne by the Messiah,1 Co. i. 25. Ὁ. spec.: 
contextually, unable to achieve anything great, 1 Co. iv. 
10; destitute of power among men, 1 Co. i. 27 [Lchm. 
br.]; weaker and inferior, μέλος, 1 Co. xii. 22; sluggish 
in doing right, Ro. v. 6; wanting in manliness and dig- 
nity, 2 Co. x. 10; used of the religious systems anterior 
to Christ, as having no power to promote piety and sal- 
vation, Gal. iv. 9; Heb. vii. 18; wanting in decision 
about things lawful and unlawful (see ἀσθενέω), 1 Co. 
Vil! 7,9 LT Tr WH, 10%) ix; 22") Thy ν. 12 cos Γ 
the body, feeble, sick: Mt. xxv. 39 R G L mrg., 48 sq.; 
Lk. ix. 2 L Tr br.; x. 9; Acts iv. 9; v. 15 sq.; 1 Co. 
xi. 30.* 

᾿Ασία, -as, ἡ, Asia; 1. Asia proper, ἡ ἰδίως καλου- 
μένη Agia (Ptol. 5,2), or proconsular Asia[often so called 
from the 16th cent. down; but correctly speaking it was 
a provincia co nsularis, although the ruler of it was vested 
with ‘proconsular power.’ The ‘Asia’ of the N. T. 
must not be confounded with the ‘ Asia proconsularis’ 
of the 4th cent.], embracing Mysia, Lydia, Phrycia and 
Caria [cf. Cic. pro Flac. ο. 27]: Acts vi. 9 [L om. Tr mrg. 
br.]; xvi. 6 sqq.; 1 Pet.i. 1; Rev.i.4; and, apparently, Acts 
xix. 26; xx. 16; 2Co. i. 8; 2 Tim.i.15,ete. Cf. Win. 
RW B.s. v. Asien; Stark in Schenkel i. p. 261 sq. ; [BB. 
DD. s. v. Asia; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii. ; 
Wieseler, Chron. ἃ. apost. Zeit. p. 31 sqq.]- PB tN 
part of proconsular Asia, embracing Mysia, Lydia, and 
Caria, (Plin. h. n. 5, 27, (28) [al. 5, 1007) : Acts ii. 9. 

*Actavés, -οῦὔ, 6, a native of Asia, Asian, Asiatic: Acts 
xx. 4. ((Thue., al.)]* 

᾿Ασιάρχης, -ov, 6, an Asiarch, President of Asia: Acts 
xix. 31. Each of the cities of proconsular Asia, at the 
autumnal equinox, assembled its most honorable and 
opulent citizens, in order to select one to preside over 
the games to be exhibited that year, at his expense, in 
honor of the gods and the Roman emperor. Thereupon 
each city reported the name of the person selected to a 
general assembly held in some leading city, as Ephesus, 
Smyrna, Sardis. This general council, called τὸ κοινόν, 
selected ten out of the number of candidates, and sent 
them to the proconsul; and the proconsul, apparently, 
chose one of these ten to preside over the rest. This 
explains how it is that in Acts ]. 6. several Asiarchs 
are spoken of, while Eusebius h. e. 4, 15, 27 mentions 
only one; [perhaps also the title outlasted the ser- 
vice]. Cf. Meyer on Acts l.c.; Win. RWB. s. v. 
Asiarchen; [BB.DD.s. v.; but esp. Le Bas et Wadding- 
ton, Voyage Archéol. Inserr. part. v. p. 244 sq.; Kuhn, 


ἀσιτία 


Die stiidtische u. biirgerl. Verf. des rom. Reichs, i. 106 
sqq-; Marquardt, Rom. S‘aatsverwalt. i. 374 sqq-; Stark 
in Schenkel i. 263; esp. Bp. Lght/t. Polycarp, p. 987 sqq-]-* 

ἀσιτία, -ας, ἡ, (ἄσιτος 4. V.), abstinence from food (wheth- 
er voluntary or enforced): πολλή long, Acts xxvil. 21. 
(Hat. 3, 52; Eur. Suppl. 1105; [Aristot. probl. 10,35; 
eth. Nic. 10 p. 1180°, 9]; Joseph. antt. 12, 7; al.)* 

a&-ouros,-ov, (σῖτος). fasting; without having eaten: Acts 
xxvii. 33. (Hom. Od. 4, 788; then fr. Soph. and Thue. 
down.)* 

ἀσκέω,-ῶ; 1. fo form by art, to adorn; in Homer. 
2. to exercise (one’s self), take pains, labor, strive; foll. 
by an inf. (as in Xen. mem. 2, 1, 6; Cyr. 5, 5, 12, ete.) : 
Acts xxiv. 16.* 

ἀσκός, -οῦ, 6, a leathern bag or bottle,in which water or 
wine was kept: Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37 sq. 
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept.) [BB.DD. 
5. v. Bottle; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 92.] * 

ἀσμένως, adv., (for ἡσμένως ; fr. ἥδομαι), with joy, glad- 
ly: Acts ii. 41 [Ree.]; xxi. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
[the adv. fr. Aeschyl.] down.) * 

ἄσοφος, -ov, (σοφός), unwise, foolish: Eph. ν. 15. 
[From Theogn. down.]* 

ἀσπάζομαι ; [impf. ἠσπαζόμην] ; 1 aor. ἠἡσπασάμην ; (fr. 
σπάω with a intensive [q. y., but cf. ν᾽ ἀπιζθκ p. 1163 ; 
Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 324 sq.]; hence prop. to draw to 
one’s self [W. § 38, 7 fin.]; cf. doxaipw for σκαίρω. ἀσπαί- 
po for σπαίρω, ἀσπαρίζω for σπαρίζω) ; [fr. Hom. down]; 
a. with an acc. of the pers., to salute one, greet, bid wel- 
come, wish well to, (the Israelites, on meeting and at 
parting, generally used the formula 7 DI7W); used 
of those accosting any one: Mt. x. 12; Mk. ix. 15; xv. 
18; Lk. i. 40; Acts xxi. 19. of those who visit one to 
see him a little while, departing almost immediately af- 
terwards: Acts xviii. 22; xxi. 7; like the Lat. sa/utare, 
our ‘pay one’s respects to,’ of those who show regard for 
a distinguished person by visiting him: Acts xxv. 13, 
(Joseph. antt. 1,19, 5;6,11,1). of those who greet one 
whom they meet in the way: Mt. v.47 (in the East even 
now Christians and Mohammedans do not salute each 
other) ; Lk. x. 4 (asa salutation was made not merely by 
a slight gesture and a few words, but generally by em- 
bracing and kissing, a journey was retarded by saluting 
frequently). of those departing and bidding farewell: 
Acts xx. 1; xxi. 6 [RG]. of the absent, saluting by 
letter: Ro. xvi. 3, 5-23; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Co. xiii. 12 
(13); Phil. iv. 21 sq.; Col. iv. 10-12, 14 sq.; 1 Th. ν. 26, 
ete. ἐν φιλήματι: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 
12; 1 Pet. v.14. b. with an ace. of the thing, to receive 
joyfully, welcome : ras ἐπαγγελίας, Heb. xi. 13, (τὴν συμ- 
φοράν, Eur. Ion 587; τὴν εὔνοιαν, Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 3 ; 
τοὺς λόγους, ibid. 7, 8, 4; so saluto, Verg. Aen. 3, 524). 
[Comp.: ἀπ-ασπάζομαι. 

ἀσπασμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (ἀσπάζομαι). α salutation, —either 
oral: Mt. xxiii. 7; Mk. xii.38; Lk. i. 29, 41,44; χὶ. 48; 
xx. 46; or written: 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col. iv. 18; 2 Th. iii. 
17. [From Theogn. down.]* 

ἄσπιλος, -ov, (σπῖλος a spot), spotless: ἀμνός. 1 Pet. i. 


81 


ἀστήρ 


19; (ἵππος, Hdian. 5, 6, 16 [7 ed. Bekk.}; μῆλον, Anthol. 
Pal. 6, 252, 3). metaph. free from censure, irreproach- 
able, 1 Tim. vi. 14; free from vice, unsullied, 2 Pet. iii. 
14; ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου, Jas. i. 27 [B. § 132, 5]. (In ecel. 
writ.) * 

ἀσπίς, -ίδος, 7, an asp, a small and most venomous ser- 
pent, the bite of which is fatal unless the part bitten be 
immediately cut away: Ro. iii. 13. (Deut. xxxii. 33, 
Is. xxx. 6 [etc. Hdt., Aristot., al.] Ael. nat. an. 2, 24; 6, 
38; Plut. mor. p. 380 f. i. e. de Isid. et Osir. § 74; Op- 
pian. cyn. 3,433.) [Cf. BB.DD.s. v. Asp; Tristram, Nat. 
Hist. of the Bible, p. 270 sqq.]* 

ἄσπονδος, -ov, (σπονδή a libation, which, as a kind of 
sacrifice, accompanied the making of treaties and com- 
pacts; cf. Lat. spondere) ; [fr. Thue. down]; 1. with- 
out a treaty or covenant; of things not mutually agreed 
upon, e. g. abstinence from hostilities, Thue. 1, 37, ete. 
2. that cannot be persuaded to enter into a covenant, im- 
placable, (in this sense fr. Aeschyl. down; esp. in the 
phrase ἄσπονδος πόλεμος, Dem. pro cor. p. 314, 16; 
Polyb. 1, 65, 6; [Philo de sacrif. §4]; Οἷς. ad Att. 9, 
10, 5; [ef. Trench § lii.]): joined with ἄστοργος, Ro. i. 
31 Rec.; 2 Tim. iii. 3.* 

ἀσσάριον, -ov, To, an assarium or assarius, the name of 
acoin equal to the tenth part of a drachma [see δηνάριον, 
(dimin. of the Lat. as, Rabbin. 108), [a penny]: Mt. x. 
29; Lk. xii. 6. (Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. 
Farthing. ]* 

ἄσσον, adv., nearer, (compar. of ἄγχι near [ef. éyyis]) : 
Acts xxvii. 13 [here Rec.**’Aac. (or”Aaa. q. v-), Rec?® εἰς 
ἄσσ., (ef. Tdf. ad loc.) ; but see Meyer]. (Hom., Hdt., 
tragic poets; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 4.) * 

“Aooos [so all edd., perh. better-oods ; Chandler § 317, 
ef. §319; Pape, Eigennamen s. v.], -ov, 7, Assos, a mari- 
time city in Asia Minor, on the Hgean Sea [Gulf of 
Adramyttium], and nine [ace. to Tab. Peuting. (ed. 
Fortia d’Urban, Paris 1845, p. 170) 20 to 25] miles [see 
Hackett on Acts as below] distant [to the S.] from Troas, 
acity of Lesser Phrygia: Acts xx. 13 54. ; [formerly read 
also in Acts xxvii. 13 after the Vulg.; οἵ. ἄσσον. See 
Papers of the Archzol. Inst. of America, Classical 
Series i. (1882) esp. pp. 60 sqq-].” 

ἀστατέω, -ῶ; (ἄστατος unstable, strolling about; cf. 
ἀκατάστατος) ; to wander about, to rove without a settled 
abode, [A. V. to have no certain dwelling-place]: 1 Co. iv. 
11. (Anthol. Pal. appendix 39, 4.) * 

ἀστεῖος, -ov, (ἄστυ a city) ; 1. of the city; of pol- 
ished manners (opp. to ἄγροικος rustic), genteel, (fr. Xen. 
and Plat. down). 2. elegant (of body), comely, fair, 
(Judith xi. 23; Aristaenet. 1,4, 1 and 19, 8): of Moses 
(Ex. ii. 2), Heb. xi. 23; with τῷ θεῷ added, unto God, 
God being judge, i.e. truly fair, Acts vii. 20; ef. W.§ 31,4 
a. p. 212 (199) ; [248 (232)]; B. 179 (156); (Philo, vit. 
Moys. i. § 3, says of Moses γεννηθεὶς ὁ παῖς εὐθὺς ὄψιν eve- 
φηνεν ἀστειοτέραν ἣ κατ᾽ ἰδιώτην). [Cf. Trench ὃ cvi.}* 

ἀστήρ, -έρος, ὁ, [fr. r. star (prob. as strewn over the 
sky), cf. ἄστρον, Lat. stella, Germ. Stern, Eng. star; F ick, 
Pt. i. 250; Curtius § 205; Vanicek p. 1146; fr. Hom. 


ἀστήρικτος 


down]; a star: Mt. ii. 7, 9, 10 [ace. -έραν δὲ" C; see 
ἄρσην fin.]; xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. 
vi. 13; viii. 10-12; ix. 1; xii. 1,4; ὁ ἀστὴρ αὐτοῦ, the 
star betokening his birth, Mt. ii. 2 (i. e. ‘the star of the 
Messiah,’ on which ef. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeo- 
rum § 14; Anger, Der Stern der Weisen, in Niedner’s 
Zeitschr. f. ἃ. histor. Theol. for 1847, fase. 3; [B. D.s. v. 
Star of the Wise Men]); by the figure of the seven 
stars which Christ holds in his right hand, Rey. i. 16; 
ii. 1; iii. 1, are signified the angels of the seven churches, 
under the direction of Christ, ibid. i. 20; see what was 
said s. v. ἄγγελος, 2. ἀστὴρ 6 mpwivds the morning star, 
Rey. xxii. 16 [Rec. opOpwos]; ii. 28 (δώσω αὐτῷ τὸν ἀστέρα 
τ. πρωϊνόν I will give to him the morning star, that he 
may be irradiated with its splendor and outshine all 
others, i. e. I will cause his heavenly glory to excel that 
of others). ἀστέρες mAavnra, wandering stars, Jude 13 
(these are not planets, the motion of which is scarcely 
noticed by the commonalty, but far more probably comets, 
which Jude regards as stars which have left the course 
prescribed them by God, and wander about at will —cf. 
Enoch xviii. 15, and soare a fit symbol of men πλανῶντες 
kai πλανώμενοι, 2 Tim. 111. 13).* 

ἀστήρικτος, -ov, (atnpitw), unstable, unsteadfast : 2 Pet. 
ii. 14; iii. 16. (Anthol. Pal. 6, 203, 11.) * 

ἄστοργος, -ov, (στοργή love of kindred), without natural 
affection: Ro. i. 31; 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Aeschin., Theocr., 
Plut., al.) * 

ἀστοχέω, -ὥ: 1 aor. ἠστόχησα; (to be ἄστοχος, fr. 
oroxos a mark), fo deviate from, miss, (the mark): with 
gen. [W. § 30, 6], to deviate from anything, 1 Tim. i. 6 
(Sir. vii. 19; viii. 9); mepi τι, 1 Tim. vi. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 
18. (Polyb., Plut., Leian., [al.].)* 

ἀστραπή, -ῆς, ἡ, lightning: Lk. x. 18; xvii. 24; Mt. xxiv. 
27; xxviii. 3; plur., Rev. iv.5; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi.18; 
of the gleam of a lamp, Lk. xi. 36 [so Aeschy]l. frag. (fr. 
schol. on Soph. Oed. Col. 1047) 188 Ahrens, 372 Dind.].* 

dotparrw; (later form στράπτω, see ἀσπάζομαι init. 
[prob. allied with ἀστήρ q. v.]); to lighten, (Hom. Il. 9, 
237; 17, 595, and often in Attic): Lk. xvii. 24. of 
dazzling objects: ἐσθής (RG ἐσθήσεις), Lk. xxiv. 4 
(and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. Oed. Col. 1067; 
Eur. Phoen. 111,down). [Comp.: ἐξ-, περι-αστράπτω. | * 

ἄστρον, -ov, τό, [(see ἀστήρ init.), fr. Hom.down]; 1. 
a group of stars, a constellation ; but not infreq. also 2. 
i.q. ἀστήρ a star: Lk. xxi. 25; Acts xxvii. 20; Heb. xi. 
12; the image of a star, Acts vii. 43.* 

᾿Α-σύγικριτος [TWH ᾿Ασύνκρ.], -ov, 6, (a priv. and 
συγκρίνω to compare; incomparable); Asyncritus, the 
name of an unknown Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi. 14.* 

ἀσύμφωνος. -ov, not agreeing in sound, dissonant, inhar- 
monious, at variance: πρὸς ἀλλήλους (Diod. 4, 1), Acts 
xxviii. 25. (Sap. xviii. 10; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 8, 1]; 
Plat., Plut., fal.].) * 

ἀσύνετος, -ov, unintelligent, without understanding: Mt. 
xy. 16; Mk. vii. 18; stupid: Ro.i. 21; x.19. In imita- 
tion of the Hebr. 533, ungodly (Sap. i. 5; Sir. xv. 7 sq. 
Let. ἀσυνετεῖν, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 158]), because a wicked 


82 


> ,΄ 
ασωτια 


man has no mind for the things which make for salva- 
tion: Ro. i. 31 [al. adhere here to the Grk. usage; ef. 
Fritzsche ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) [Cf. 
σοφός, fin.]* 

ἀσύνθετος, -ov, 1. uncompounded, simple, (Plat., 
Aristot., al.). 2. (cvrridepat to covenant), covenant- 
breaking, faithless: Ro. i. 31 (so in Jer. iii. 8, 11; Dem. 
de falsa leg. p. 383, 6; cf. Pape and Passow s. v.; ἀσυν- 
θετεῖν to be faithless [Ps. lxxii. (Ixxiii.) 15; 2 Esdr. x. 2; 
Neh. i. 8, ete.]; ἀσυνθεσία transgression, 1 Chr. ix. 1 
[Ald., Compl. ; 2 Esdr. ix. 2,4; Jer. iii. 7]; εὐσυνθετεῖν 
to keep faith; [ef. Trench § lii.]).* 

ἀσφάλεια, -as, ἡ, (ἀσφαλής), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; a. 
Jirmness, stability: ἐν πάσῃ dog. most securely, Acts v. 
23. trop. certainty, undoubled truth: λόγων (see λόγος, 
I. 7), Lk. i. 4, (τοῦ λόγου, the certainty of a proof, Xen. 
mem. 4, 6,15). b. security from enemies and dangers, 
safety: 1 Th. v. 3 (opp. to κίνδυνος, Xen. mem. 3, 12, 7).* 

ἀσφαλής, -és, (σφάλλω to make to totter or fall, to 
cheat, [cf. Lat. fallo, Germ. fallen, ete., Eng. fall, fail], 
σφάλλομαι to fall, to reel), [fr. Hom. down]; a. firm 
(that can be relied on, confided in) : ἄγκυρα, Heb. vi. 19 
(where L and Tr have received as the form of ace. sing. 
ἀσφαλήν [Tdf. 7 -Ajv; οἵ. Tdf. ad loc.; Delitzsch, Com. 
ad loc.] see ἄρσην). trop. certain, true: Acts xxv. 26; 
τὸ ἀσφαλές, Acts xxi. 84; xxii. 30. b. suited to confirm: 
τινί, Phil. iii. 1 (so Joseph. antt. 3, 2, 1).* 

ἀσφαλίζω : 1 aor. pass. inf. ἀσφαλισθῆναι; 1 aor. mid. 
ἠσφαλισάμην ; (ἀσφαλής) ; esp. freq. fr. Polyb. down; to 
make firm, to make secure against harm ; pass. to be made 
secure: Mt. xxvii. 64 (ὁ τάφος) [B. 52 (46)]; mid. 
prop. to make secure for one’s self or for one’s own ad- 
vantage, (often in Polyb.): Mt. xxvii. 65 sq.; to make 
fast τοὺς πόδας εἰς τὸ ξύλον, Acts xvi. 24 [W. § 66, 2 d.3 
B. § 147, 8].* 

ἀσφαλῶς, adv., [fr. Hom. down], safely (so as to prevent 
escape): Mk. xiv. 44; Acts xvi. 23. assuredly: γινώ- 
σκειν, Acts ii. 36 (εἰδότες, Sap. xviii. 6).* 

ἀσχημονέω, -@; (to be ἀσχήμων, deformed ; τὴν κεφα- 
λὴν ἀσχημονεῖν, of a bald man, Ael. ν. h. 11, 4) ; 10 act un- 
becomingly ({Eur.], Xen., Plat., al.) : 1 Co. xiii. 5; ἐπί τινα, 
towards one, i. e. contextually, to prepare disgrace for 
her, 1 Co. vii. 36.* 

ἀσχημοσύνη, -ns, 7, (ἀσχήμων ); fr. Plato down; un- 
seemliness, an unseemly deed: Ro. i. 27; of the pudenda, 
one’s nakedness, shame: Rev. xvi. 15, as in Ex. xx. 20; 
Deut. xxiii. 14, ete. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.)* 

ἀσχήμων, -ovos, neut. ἄσχημον, (σχῆμα); a: deformed. 
b. indecent, unseemly: 1 Co. xii. 23, opp. to εὐσχήμων. 
({Hadt.], Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) * 

ἀσωτία, -as, 7, (the character of an ἄσωτος, i. e. of an 
abandoned man, one that cannot be saved, fr. cad, σύω 
i. q. σώξω, [a-cw-ro-s, Curtius § 570]; hence prop. incor- 
rigibleness), an abandoned, dissolute, life; profligacy, prod- 
igality, [R. V. riot]: Eph. v. 18; Tit. i. 6; 1 Pet. iv. 4; 
(Prov. xxviii. 7; 2 Mace. vi. 4. Plat. rep. 8, p. 560 e.; 
Aristot. eth. Nic. 4, 1, 5 (3) p. 1120", 3; Polyb. 32, 20, 
9; 40, 12, 7; cf. Cic. Tusc. 3, 8; Hdian. 2, 5, 2 (1 ed. 


ἀσώτως 


Bekk.), and elsewhere). Cf. Tittmann i. p. 152 sq.; 
[Trench § xvi.].* 

ἀσώτως, adv., (adj. dowros,on which see dowria), dis- 
solutely, profligately: ζὴν (Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 8), Lk. 
xy. 13 [A. V. riotous living 7." 

ἀτακτέω, -@: 1 aor. ἠτάκτησα; to be ἄτακτος, to be disor- 
derly; a. prop. of soldiers marching out of order or 
quitting the ranks: Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 6, etc. Hence Ὅ. 
to be neglectful of duty, to be lawless: Xen. Cyr. 8,1, 22; 
oec. 5, 15; Lys. 141, 18 [i. 6. 6. Alcib. or. 1 § 18], ἃ]. ο. 
to lead a disorderly life: 2 Th. iii. 7, ef. 11.* 

ἄτακτος, -ov, (τάσσω), disorderly, out of the ranks, 
(often so of soldiers); irregular, inordinate (ἄτακτοι 
ἡδοναί immoderate pleasures, Plat. legge. 2, 660 b.; Plut. 
de lib. educ. ο. 7), deviating from the prescribed order or 
rule: 1 Th. v. 14, cf. 2 Th. iii. 6. (In Grk. writ. fr. 
[Hdt. and] Thue. down; often in Plat.) * 

ἀτάκτως, adv., disorderly: 2 Th. 111. 6 ἀτάκτως περιπα- 
τεῖν, which is explained by the added καὶ μὴ κατὰ τὴν 
παράδοσιν ἣν παρέλαβε παρ᾽ ἡμῶν; cf. ibid. 11, where it is 
explained by μηδὲν ἐργαζόμενοι, ἀλλὰ περιεργαζόμενοι. 
(Often in Plato.) * 

ἄτεκνος, -ov, (τέκνον), without offspring, childless: Lk. 
xx. 28-30. (Gen. xv. 2; Sir. xvi. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. 
Hesiod opp. 600 down.)* 

arevitw; 1 aor. ἠτένισα; (fr. ἀτενής stretched, intent, 
and this fr. τείνω and a intensive ; [yet cf. W. § 16,4 B. a. 
fin.,and 8. v. A, a, 3]); to fix the eyes on, gaze upon: with 
dat. of pers., Lk. iv. 20; xxii. 56; Acts iii. 12; x.4; xiv. 9; 
xxiii. 1; foll. by εἰς with ace. of pers., Acts iii. 4; vi. 15; 
xiii. 9; metaph. to fix one’s mind on one as an example, 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9,2; ets τι, Acts i. 10; vii. 55; 2 Co. 
iii. 7, 13; ets τι, to look into anything, Acts xi. 6. (3 
Mace. ii. 26. [Aristot.], Polyb. 6, 11, 5 [i. e. 6, 11%, 12 
Dind.]; Diod. 3, 39 [Dind. évar.]; Joseph. b. j. 5, 12, 3; 
Leian. cont. 16, al.) * 

ἄτερ, prep., freq. in the poets [fr. Hom. down], rare 
in prose writ. fr. Plat. [?] down; without, apart from: 
with gen. [ Dion. Hal. 3,10; Plut. Num. 14, Cat. min. 5]; 
in the Bible only in 2 Mace. xii. 15; Lk. xxii. 6 (ἄτερ 
ὄχλου in the absence of the multitude; hence, without 
tumult), 35. [‘ Teaching’ 3,10; Herm. sim. 5, 4, 5.]* 

ἀτιμάζω; 1 aor. ἠτίμασα ; [Pass., pres. ἀτιμάζομαι);: 1 
aor. inf. ἀτιμασθῆναι ; (fr. ἄτιμος ; hence) to make ἄτιμος, 
to dishonor, insult, treat with contumely, whether in word, 
in deed, or in thought: [Mk. xii. 4 T Tr mre. WH (ef. 
ἀτιμάω and -ud@)]; Lk. xx. 11; Jn. viii. 49; Acts v. 41; 
Ro. ii. 23; Jas. ii. 6 [W. § 40, 5, 2; B. 202 (175)]. Pass.: 
Ro. i. 24, on which οἵ. W. 326 (305 sq.); [and § 39, 3 
N. 3]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept.) * 

ἀτιμάω, -@: [1 aor. ἠτίμησα!; (τιμή); to deprive of 
honor, despise, treat with contempt or contumely : twa, Mk. 
xii. 4 L Tr txt. ἠτίμησαν (see ἀτιμάζω and -μόω). (In 
Grk. writ. [chiefly Epic] fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἀτιμία, -as, 7, (ἄτιμος), dishonor, ignominy, disgrace, [fr. 
Hom. down]: 1 Co. xi. 14; opp. to δόξα, 2 Co. vi. 8; 1 
Co. xv. 43 (ἐν ἀτιμίᾳ sc. ὄν, in a state of diszrace, used 
of the unseemliness and offensiveness of a dead body) ; 


83 


αὐθάδης 


κατ᾽ ἀτιμίαν equiv. to ἀτίμως, with contempt sc. of myself, 
2 Co. xi. 21 [R. V. by way of disparagement, cf. κατά, 11. 
fin.]; πάθη ἀτιμίας base lusts, vile passions, Ro. i. 26, cf. 
W.§ 34,3 b.; [Β. 8 132,10]. εἰς ἀτιμίαν for a dishonor- 
able use, of vessels, opp. to τιμή : Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 
20." 

ἄτιμος, -ον, (τιμή) ; fr. Hom. down; without honor, un- 
honored, dishonored: Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi. 4; 1 Co. iv. 
10 (opp. to ἔνδοξος) ; base, of less esteem: 1 Co. xii. 23 
[here the neut. plur. of the compar., ἀτιμότερα (Rec. 
ἀτιμώτεραλ) |.” 

ἀτιμόω, -@: [pf. pass. ptep. ἠτιμωμένος ; (ἄτιμος) ; fr. 
Aeschyl. down ; (o dishonor, mark with disgrace: Mk. xii. 
4 RG, see ἀτιμάω [and ἀτιμάζω ]." 

ἀτμίς, -idos, ἡ, vapor: Jas. iv. 14; καπνοῦ (Joel ii. 30 
[al. iii. 87}, Acts ii. 19 [opp. to καπνός in Aristot. meteor. 
2, 4 p. 359%, 29 sq., to νέφος ibid. 1, 9 p. 346°, 32]. 
(In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 75 and] Plat. Tim. p. 86 e. 
down.) * 

G-ropos, -ov, (τέμνω to cut), that cannot be cut in two or 
divided, indivisible, [ Plat. Soph. 229 ἃ. ; of time, Aristot. 
phys. 8,8 p. 263°, 27]: 
xv. 52.* 

ἄτοπος, -ov, (τύπος), out of place; not befitting, unbe- 
coming, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down; very often in 
Plato); in later Grk. in an ethical sense, improper, 
wicked: Lk. xxiii. 41 (ἄτοπόν τι πράσσειν, as in Job xxvii. 
6; 2 Mace. xiv. 23); Acts xxv. 5 LT Tr WH; (Sept. 
for ys Job iv. 8; xi. 11, etc. Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 6; 
Plut. de aud. poét. ὁ. 3 φαυλά and ἄτοπα) ; of men: 2 Th. 
111. 2 (ἄτοποι καὶ πονηροί ; Luth. unartig, more correctly 
unrighteous [(iniquus), A. V. unreasonable, cf. Ellic. ad 
loc.]). inconvenient, harmful: Acts xxviii. 6 μηδὲν ἄτοπον 
eis αὐτὸν γινόμενον, no injury, no harm coming to him, 
(Thue. 2, 49; Joseph. antt. 11, 5, 2; Hdian. 4, 11, 7 [4, 
ed. Bekk.]).* 

᾿Αττάλεια [-Aia T WH (see I, ¢) ], -as, ἡ, A ttalia, a mar- 
itime city of Pamphylia in Asia, very near the borders 
of Lycia, built and named by Attalus Philadelphus, king 
of Pergamum; now Antali [or Adalia; cf. Dict. of Geog.]: 
Acts xiv. 25.* 

αὐγάζω: 1 aor. inf. αὐγάσαι ; (αὐγή); 1. in Grk. 
writ. transitively, to beam upon, irradiate. 2. in the 
Bible intrans. to be bright, to shine forth: 2 Co. iv. 4 [L 
mrg. Tr mrg. xatavy. see φωτισμός, b.], (Lev. xiii. 24-28, 
[ete.]). [Comp.: δὲ-, xar-avyato.]* 

αὐγή, -ῆς, ἡ, brightness, radiance, (cf. Germ. Auge [eye], 
of which the tragic poets sometimes use αὐγή, see Pape 
for L. and S.; ef. Lat. dumina]), especially of the sun; 
hence ἡλίου is often added (Hom. and sqq.), daylight; 
hence ἄχρις [-ρι T Tr WH] αὐγῆς even till break of day, 
Acts xx. 11 (Polyaen. 4, 18 p. 386 κατὰ τὴν πρώτην αὐγὴν 
τῆς ἡμέρας). [SYN. see φέγγος. fin.]* 

Αὔγουστος, -ov, 6, Augustus [ef. Eng. Majesty; see 
σεβαστός, 2}, the surname of G. JuliusCaesar Octavia- 
nus, the first Roman emperor: Lk. ii. 1.* 

αὐθάδης, -es, (fr. αὐτός and ἥδομαι), selfpleasing, self= 
willed, arrogant: Tit.i. 7; 2 Pet.ii.10. (Gen. xlix. 3,7; 


ἐν ἀτόμῳ in a moment, 1 Co. 


> / 
αὐθαίρετος 


Prov. xxi. 24. In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down.) [Trench § xciii.]* 

αὐθ-αίρετος, -ov, (fr. αὐτός and αἱρέομαι), self-chosen ; in 
Grk. writ. esp. of states or conditions, as δουλεία, Thue. 
6, 40, ete., more rarely of persons; voluntary, of free 
choice, of one’s own accord, (as στρατηγός, Xen. an. 5, 7, 
29, explained § 28 by és ἑαυτὸν ἔληται) : 2 Co. viii. 3, 17.* 

αὐθεντέω, -ὦ ; (a bibl. and eccl. word; fr. αὐθέντης contr. 
fr. αὐτοέντης, and this fr. αὐτός and ἔντεα arms [al. ἕντης, 
ef. Hesych. συνέντης - συνεργός ; cf. Lobeck, Technol. p. 
121]; hence a. acc. to earlier usage, one who with his 
own hand kills either others or himself. ὃ. in later Grk. 
writ. one who does a thing himself, the author (τῆς πράξεως, 
Polyb. 23, 14, 2, ete.) ; one who acts on his own authority, 
autocratic, i. q. αὐτοκράτωρ an absolute master ; ef. Lobeck 
ad Phryn. p. 120 [also as above; cf. W. § 2,1 6.7); to 
govern one, exercise dominion over one: twos, 1 Tim. 
i. 12 

αὐλέω, -@: 1 aor. ηὔλησα ; [pres. pass. ptcp. τὸ αὐλού- 
μενον]; (αὐλός) ; to play on the flute, to pipe: Mt. xi.17; 
Lk. vii. 32; 1.Co. xiv. 7. (Fr. [Alem., Hdt.,] Xen. and 
Plat. down.) * 

αὐλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (dw to blow; hence) prop. a place open to 
the air (διαπνεύμενος τόπος αὐλὴ λέγεται, Athen. 5, 15 p. 
189 b.); 1. among the Greeks in Homer’s time an 
uncovered space around the house, enclosed by a wall, in 
which the stables stood (Hom. Od. 9, 185; Il. 4, 433); 
hence among the Orientals that roofless enclosure in the 
open country in which flocks were herded at night, a sheep- 
fold: Jn. x. 1, 16. 2. the uncovered court-yard of the 
house, Hebr. 131, Sept. addy, Vulg. atrium. In the O. T. 
particularly of the courts of the tabernacle and of the 
temple at Jerusalem; so in the N. T. once: Rev. xi. 2 
(τὴν αὐλὴν τὴν ἔξωθεν [Rec ἔσωθεν] rod ναοῦ). The 
dwellings of the higher classes usually had two αὐλαί, one 
exterior, between the door and the street, called also 
προαύλιον (q. v.); the other interior, surrounded by the 
buildings of the dwelling itself. The latter is mentioned 
Mt. xxvi. 69 (where ἔξω is opp. to the room in which the 
judges were sitting); Mk. xiv. 66; Lk. xxii.55. Cf. Win. 
RWB. s. v. Hauser ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. ν. Court; BB.DD. 
s. v. House]. 3. the house itself, a palace: Mt. xxvi. 
8, 58; Mk. xiv. 54; xv. 16; Lk. xi. 21; Jn. xviii. 15, and 
so very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 4, 74 down [cf. 
Eustath. 1483, 39 τῷ τῆς αὐλῆς ὀνόματι τὰ δώματα δηλοῖ, 
Suid. col. 652 6. αὐλή - ἡ τοῦ βασιλέως οἰκία. Yet this sense 
is denied to the N. T. by Meyer et al.; see Mey. on Mt. 
eae 

αὐλητής, -οὔ, 6, (αὐλέω), a flute-player : Mt. ix. 23; Rev. 
xviii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn. and] Hat. 6, 60 
down.) * 

αὐλίζομαι : depon.; impf. ηὐλιζόμην; 1 aor. ηὐλίσθην 
[Veitch s. v.; B.51 (44); W.§ 39, 2]; (αὐλή) ; in Sept. 
mostly for po; 1. prop. to lodge in the court-yard 
esp. at night; of flocks and shepherds. 2. to pass the 
night in the open air, bivouac. 3. univ. to pass the 
night, lodge: so Mt. xxi. 17; Lk. xxi. 37 (ἐξερχόμενος 
ηὐλίζετο eis τὸ ὄρος, going out to pass the night he retired 


84 


αὐτάρκεια 


to the mountain; ef. B. § 147, 15). 
Hom. down.)* 

αὐλός, -ov, 6, (a, αὔω), (fr. Hom. down], a pipe: 1Co. 
xiv. τ. [Cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch. v.]* 

αὐξάνω, and earlier (the only form in Pind. and Soph. 
[Veitch s. v. says, ‘Hes. Mimnerm. Soph. Thue. always 
have av& or avfoua, and Pind. except αὐξάνοι Fr. 130 
(Bergk)’}) αὔξω (Eph. ii. 21; Col. ii. 19) ; impf. nvéavov; 
fut. αὐξήσω ; 1 aor. ηὔξησα; [Pass., pres. αὐξάνομαι] ; 1 aor. 
ηὐξήθην; 1. trans. to cause to grow, to augment: 1 
Co. iii. 6 sq.; 2Co.ix.10. Pass. to grow, increase, become 
greater: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv.8 L T Tr WH; 2 Co.x. 15; 
Col. i. 6 [not Rec.]; εἰς τὴν ἐπίγνωσιν τοῦ θεοῦ unto the 
knowledge of God, Col. i. 10 (GL T Tr WH τῇ ἐπιγνώσει. 
τοῦ θεοῦ): εἰς σωτηρίαν [not Rec.] to the attaining of sal- 
vation, 1 Pet. ii. 2. 2. ace. to later usage (fr. Aristot. 
an. post. 1,13 p. 78°, 6, ete., down; but nowhere in Sept. 
(ef. B. 54 (47); 145 (127); W. § 38, 1}) intrans. to grow, 
increase: of plants, Mt. vi. 28; Mk. iv. 8 Rec.; Lk. xii. 
27 [not Tdf.; Trmrg. br. αὐξ.} ; Lk. xiii. 19; of infants, 
Lk. i. 80; ii. 40; of a multitude of people, Acts vii. 17. 
of inward Christian growth: εἰς Χριστόν, in reference to 
LW. 397 (371); yet ef. Ellic. ad loe.] Christ, Eph. iv. 
15; εἰς ναόν, so as to form a temple, Eph. ii. 21; ἐν χάριτι, 
2 Pet. iii. 18; with an ace. of the substance, τὴν αὔξησιν, 
Col. ii. 19 [ef. W. § 32,2; B.§ 131, 5, also Bp. Leghtft.’s 
note ad loc.]; of the external increase of the gospel 
it is said ὁ λόγος ηὔξανε: Acts vi. 7; xii. 24; xix. 20; 
of the growing authority of a teacher and the number of 
his adherents (opp. to ἐλαττοῦσθαι), Jn. iii. 30. [Comp.: 
συν-, Urep-avéave. | * 

αὔξησις, -ews, ἡ. (αὔξω), increase, growth: Eph. iv. 16; 
τοῦ θεοῦ, effected by God, Col. ii. 19; cf. Meyer ad lvoe. 
({Hat.], Thue., Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) * 

αὔξω, see αὐξάνω. 

αὔριον, adv., (fr. αὔρα the morning air, and this fr. αὔω 
to breathe, blow; [ace. to al. akin to nas, Lat. aurora; 
Curtius § 613, cf. Vaniéek p. 944]), to-morrow (Lat. cras) : 
Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; Acts xxiii. 15 Rec., 20; xxv. 22; 
1 Co. xv. 32 (fr. Is. xxii. 13) ; σήμερον καὶ αὔριον, LK. xiii. 
32 sq.; Jas. iv. 13 [Rec.t G; al. σήμ. ἢ αὔρ.]. ἡ αὔριον se. 
ἡμέρα [W. § 64, 5; B. § 123, 8] the morrow, Mt. vi. 34; 
Acts iv. 3; ἐπὶ τὴν αὔριον, on the morrow, i. 6. the next 
morning, Lk. x. 35; Acts iv. 5; τὸ [L τὰ; WH om.] τῆς 
αὔριον, what the morrow will bring forth, Jas. iv. 14. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

αὐστηρός, -d, -dv. (fr. atw to dry up), harsh (Lat. au- 
sterus), stringent of taste, αὐστηρὸν καὶ γλυκὺ (καὶ πικρόν), 
Plat. Ἰοσσ. 10, 897 a.; οἶνος, Diog. Laért. 7, 111. of 
mind and manners, harsh, rough, rigid, [ef. Trench 
8 xiv.]: Lk. xix. 21, 22; (Polyb. 4, 20, 7; Diog. Laért. 
7, 26, etc. 2 Mace. xiv. 30).* 

αὐτάρκεια, -as, ἡ, (αὐτάρκης, 4. V-), α perfect condition 
of life, in which no aid or support is needed; equiv. to 
τελειότης κτήσεως ἀγαθῶν, Plat. def. p. 412 b.; often in 
Aristot. [defined by him (pol. 7, 5 init. p. 1326", 29) as 
follows: τὸ πάντα ὑπάρχειν x. δεῖσθαι μηθενὸς αὐτάρκες ; οἷ. 


Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 117; hence, α sufficiency of the 


(In Grk. writ. fr. 


αὐτάρκης 


necessaries of life: 2 Co. ix. 8; subjectively, a mind con- 
tented with its lot, contentment: 1 Tim. vi. 6; (Diog. 
Laért. 10, 130).* 

αὐτάρκης [on the accent see Chandler § 705],-es, (αὐτός, 
dpxew), [fr. Aeschyl. down ], sufficient for one’s self, strong 
enough or possessing enough to need no aid or support; 
independent of external circumstances; often in Grk. 
writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 1, 32 down. Subjectively, 
contented with one’s lot, with one’s means, though the slender- 
est: Phil. iv. 11, (so Sir. xl. 18; Polyb. 6, 48, 7; Diog. 
Laért. 2, 24 of Socrates, αὐτάρκης καὶ σεμνός). [CE. αὐτάρ- 
κεια.} * 

αὐτο-κατά-κριτος, -ov, (αὐτός, κατακρίνω), self-condemned : 
Tit. iii. 11; (eccl. writ. [ef. W. § 34, 3]).* 

αὐτόματος, -ov, and -7, -ov, (fr. αὐτός and μέμαα to desire 
eagerly, fr. obsol. theme pdw), moved by one’s own inc 
pulse, or acting withvut the instigation or intervention of 
another, (fr. Hom. down) ; often of the earth producing 
plants of itself, and of the plants themselves and fruits 
growing without culture; [on its adverbial use cf. W. 
8 54, 2]: Mk. iv.28; (Hdt. 2, 94; 8, 138; Plat. polit. p. 
212 a.; [Theophr. h. p. 2,1]; Diod. 1, 8, ete. Lev. xxv. 
5,11). of gates opening of their own accord: Acts xii. 
10, (so in Hom. Il. 5, 749; Xen. Hell. 6, 4,7; Apoll. 
Rh. 4, 41; Plut. Timol. 12; Nonn. Dion. 44, 21; [Dion 
Cass. 44, 17]).* 

αὐτόπτης, -ov, 6, (αὐτός, ΟΠΤΩῚ, seeing with one’s own 
eyes, an eye-witness, (cf. αὐτήκοος one who has himself 
heard a thing): Lk.i. 2. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* 

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with 
the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself 
it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has 
either been previously mentioned or, when the whole 
discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is 
used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. 
far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this 
very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they de- 
viate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On 
classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which 
dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger 
pp- 732-736.] 

I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to 
distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with 
another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik 
When used to express Opposition or Distinction, 
it is added a. to the subjects implied in the verb, the 
personal pronouns ἐγώ, ἡμεῖς, σύ, etc., being omitted: Lk. 
v. 37 (αὐτὸς ἐκχυθήσεται the wine, as opp. to the skins) ; 
LK. xxii. 71 (αὐτοὶ yap ἠκούσαμεν we ourselves, opp. to 
witnesses whose testimony could have been taken); Jn. 
li. 25 (αὐτὸς ἐγίνωσκεν. opp. to testimony he might have 
called for); Jn. iv. 42 (we ourselves, not thou only) ; Jn. 
ix. 21 [T Tr WH om.]; Acts xviii. 15 (ὄψεσθε αὐτοί) ; 
xx. 34; xxii. 19; 1 Th.i. 9, etc.; with a negative added, 
‘he does not himself do this or that,’ i. e. he leaves it to 
others: Lk. vi. 42 (αὐτός, viz. thou, οὐ BAérav); LK. xi. 
46 (αὐτοί. viz. ye, ov mpoowavere), 52; Jn. xviii. 28; 3 


85 


> 7+ 
auTos 


Jn. 10. With the addition of καί to indicate that a thing 
is ascribed to one equally with others: Lk. xiv. 12 
(μήποτε καὶ αὐτοί σε ἀντικαλέσωσι) ; XVi. 28; Acts ii. 22 
[α 1,7 Τὰ ΜῊ οῃι. καί]; Jn. iv. 45; xvii. 19,21: Phil. 
ii. 24, etc. In other pass. καὶ αὐτός is added to a subject 
expressly mentioned, and is placed after it ; and in trans- 
lation may be joined to the predicate and rendered like- 
wise: Lk. i. 36 (ἡ συγγενής σου καὶ αὐτὴ συνειληφυῖα υἱόν 
tly kinswoman herself also, i. e. as well as thou); Mt. 
xxvii. 57 (ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἐμαθήτευσε [LT Tr WH txt. -τεύθη] 
τῷ Ἰησοῦν); Lk. xxiii. 51 [RG]; Mk. xv. 43; Acts viii. 
13 (ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσε) ; XV. 32; xxi. 245 1 
Jn. ii. 6; Gal. ii. 17; Heb. xiii. 8. b. it is added to 
subjects expressed, whether to pronouns personal or 
demonstrative, or to nouns proper or common: Jn. iii. 
28 (αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς ye yourselves bear witness, not only have 
I affirmed), Acts xx. 30 (ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν from among 
your own selves, not only from other quarters) ; Ro. xv. 
14 (καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγώ I of myself also, not only assured by 
report, cf. i. 8); 1 Co. v. 13 (ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν from your 
own society, opp. to them that are without, of whose 
character God must be the judge) ; 1 Co. vii. 35; xi. 13; 
1 Th. iv. 9; αὐτοὶ οὗτοι, Acts xxiv. 20; αὐτοῦ τούτου 
(mase.), Acts xxv. 25; Ἰησοῦς αὐτός Jesus himself, per- 
sonally, opp. to those who baptized by his command, 
Jn. iv. 2; αὐτὸς Ἰησοῦς, opp. to those who believed on 
him on account of his miracles, Jn. ii. 24; Jesus himself, 
not others only, Jn. iv. 44; air. Δαυείδ, opp. to the doc- 
tors of the law, whose decision did not seem quite to 
agree with the words of David, Mk. xii. 36 sq.; Lk. xx. 
42; αὐτὸς ὁ Σατανᾶς, opp. to his ministers, 2 Co. xi. 14; 
αὐτὸς ὁ θεός, God himself, not another, Rev. xxi. 3; αὐτὰ 
τὰ ἐπουράνια, the heavenly things themselves [1. e. sanc- 
tuary ], opp. to its copies, Heb. ix. 23 [see ἐπουράνιος, 1 6.1. 
c. it is used to distinguish one not only from his compan- 
ions, disciples, servants, — as Mk. ii. 25 (αὐτὸς καὶ of μετ᾽ 
avrod) ; Jn. ii. 12; iv. 53; xviii. 1,— but also from things 
done by him or belonging to him, as Jn. vii. 4 (ri ποιεῖ καὶ 
ζητεῖ αὐτός [L Tr mrg. WH mrg. airo)) ; 1 Co. iii. 15 (τινὸς 
τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται. αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται) : Lk. xxiv. 15 
(αὐτὸς (6) Ἰησοῦς, Jesus himself in person, opp. to their 
previous conversation about him). ἃ. self to the exclu- 
sion of others, i. e. he etc. alone, by one’s self: Mk. vi. 31 
(ὑμεῖς αὐτοί ye alone, unattended by any of the people; 
ef. Fritzsche ad loc.) ; Jn. xiv. 11 (διὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτά [WH 
mrg. αὐτοῦ); Ro. vii. 25 (αὐτὸς ἐγώ I alone, unaided by 
the Spirit of Christ; ef. viii. 2); 2 Co. xii. 13 (αὐτὸς ἐγώ, 
unlike the other preachers of the gospel) ; Rev. xix. 12; 
ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 733 iii.; Matth. § 467, 5; Kiihner 
§ 468 Anm. 2; [Jelf § 656, 3]; with the addition of 
μόνος (as often in Attic writ.): Jn. vi. 15. 6. self, not 
prompted or influenced by another, i. e. of one’s self, of 
one’s own accord: Jn. xvi. 27 (so even Hom. I]. 17, 254; 
and among Attic writ. esp. Xen.). 2. When it gives 
Prominence, it answers a. to our emphatic he, she, 
it: Mt. i. 21 (αὐτὸς σώσει HE and noother); Mt. v. 4-10 
(αὐτοῦ) : vi. 4 [RG]; xvii. 5 (αὐτοῦ deovere); LK. vi. 35; 
xvii. 16 ; xxiv. 21; Jn. ix. 21 (αὐτὸς [T Tr WH om.]... 


αὐτός 


αὐτὸν .. . αὐτός); Acts x. 42[L txt. Tr txt. WH otros]; 
Gal. iv. 17 (αὐτούς) ; Eph. ii. 10 (αὐτοῦ) ; Col.i. 17; 1 Jn. 
ii. 2; iv. 5; Jas.ii.6sq. So in Grk. writ. also fr. Hom. 
down; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 734 ν. It is used with the same 
force after relative sentences, where Greek prose uses 
οὗτος : Mt. xii. 50 (ὅστις ἂν ποιήσῃ - . . , αὐτός pov ἀδελφός 
ἐστιν, where in ΜΚ. iii. 35 οὗτος) ; Mt. xxvi. 48 ; Mk. xiv. 
44; cf. B. 107 (94) sq. Less emphatically, αὐτός is put 
before subjects, serving to recall them again: Mt. iii. 4 
(αὐτὸς δὲ "Iwdvyns now he, whom I spoke of, John) ; Mk. 
Vi. 17 (αὐτὸς yap Ἡρώδης) ; Ro. viii. 16 (αὐτὸ τὸ πνεῦμα). 
b. it points out some one as chief, leader, master of 
the rest (often so in Grk., as in the well-known phrase of 
the Pythagoreans αὐτὸς ἔφα [ef. W. § 22, 3,4 and p. 150 
(142)]): of Christ, Mt. viii. 24; Mk. iv. 38; vi. 47; viii. 
29; Lk. v.16 sq.; ix. 51; x. 38; of God, Lk. vi. 35; 
Heb. xiii. 5; 1 Jn. iv. 19 [not Lehm.]. ο. it answers 
to our very, just, exactly, (Germ. eben, gerade): Ro. ix. 3 
(αὐτὸς ἐγώ I myself, the very man who seems to be inimi- 
cal to the Israelites); 2 Co. x. 1 (I myself, who bore 
myself lowly in your presence, as ye said); αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα. 
Jn. v. 36; often in Luke ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ or ὥρᾳ, αὐτῷ 
τῷ καιρῷ, in that very day, hour, season: Lk. ii. 38; x. 21; 
χ 12; xiii. 1, 831; xx. 19; xxiii. 12; xxiv. 13, 33; Acts 
xvi. 18. In the writings of Paul αὐτὸ τοῦτο this very 
thing: Gal. ii. 10; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 6; εἰς αὐτὸ 
τοῦτο for this very purpose, on this very account: Ro. ix. 
17; xiii. 6; 2 Co. v. 5; Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; and in 
the same sense [for this very thing] the simple accus. 
(as in Attic, ef. Matth. § 470, 7; Kiihner ii. 267 Anm. 6; 
W. § 21 N. 2) τοῦτο αὐτό, 2 Co. ii. 3 [but see Mey. ad 
loe.], and αὐτὸ τοῦτο, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. reads here αὐτοί]. 
ἃ. even, Lat. vel, adeo, (in Hom. ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
733 ii.) : καὶ αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις, Ro. viii. 21; οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτή, 
1 Co. xi. 14; καὶ [Tr om. L WH br. καὶ] αὐτὸς 6 υἱός, 1 Co. 
xv. 28; καὶ αὐτὴ Σάρρα even Sarah herself, although a 
feeble old woman, Heb. xi. 11 [yet WH mrg. reads the 
dat. αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ; see καταβολή, 1]. 

II. αὐτός has the force of a simple personal pronoun 
of the third person, answering to our unemphatic ἦε, she, 
it; and that 1. as in classic Grk., in the oblique 
cases, him, her, it, them, etc.: numberless instances, — 
as in the gen. absolute, 6. g. αὐτοῦ ἐλθόντος, λαλήσαντος, 
etc.; or in the ace. with inf., εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολο- 
γήτους, Ro. i. 20; or after prepositions, ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ, 
ete.; or where it indicates the possessor, 6 πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ; 
or a person as the (dir. or indir.) object of an active 
verb, as ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ, Mt. vii. 9; ἀσπάσασθε αὐτήν, Mt. 
x. 12; ἀφεὶς αὐτούς, Mt. xxvi. 44; ἦν διανεύων αὐτοῖς, Lk. 
i. 22; οὐκ εἴα αὐτὰ λαλεῖν, Lk. iv. 41; ἡ σκοτία αὐτὸ οὐ 
κατέλαβε, Jn.i.5. But see αὑτοῦ below. 2. Contrary 
to Grk. usage, in the N. T. even in the Nominative it 
is put for a simple personal pronoun of the third person, 
where the Greeks say οὗτος or ὁ δέ, or use no pronoun at 
all. This has been convincingly shown by B. 107 (93) 
866: ; and yet some of the examples adduced by him are not 
decisive, but either must be or can be referred to the usage 
illustrated under I. 1;—those in which αὐτός is used of 


86 


αὐτός 


Christ, apparently to 1. 1 Ὁ. But, in my opinion, the 
question is settled even by the following: αὐτός, Mt. 
xiv. 2; Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. i. 22; xv. 14; so too in the Sept. 
(cf. Thiersch, De Pentat. vers. Alex. p. 98); Sir. xlix. 7; 
Tob. vi. 11; αὐτοί, Mk. ii. 8 (οὕτως αὐτοὶ διαλογίζονται in 
Grsb.); Lk. ix. 36; xiv. 1; xxii. 23; αὐτό, Lk. xi. 14 
(Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.]. Whether αὐτή and αὐταί 
also are so used, is doubtful; οἵ. B. 109 (95). 3. 
Sometimes in the oblique cases the pron. is omitted, 
being evident from the context: Mk. vi. 5 (ἐπιθείς, se. 
αὐτοῖς) ; Jn. iii. 34 (δίδωσι, sc. αὐτῷ) ; In. x. 29 (δέδωκέ 
μοι, 80. αὐτούς) ; Acts xiii. 3 (ἀπέλυσαν, sc. αὐτούς); Rev. 
xviii. 21 (ἔβαλεν, sc. αὐτόν), ete. 4. Not infrequently 
αὐτός in the oblique cases is added to the verb, although 
the case belonging to this very verb has preceded: Mt. 
Vili. 1 (καταβάντι δὲ αὐτῷ [L Tr WH gen. absol.] ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ὄρους ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ) ; Mt. iv. 16; v. 40; viii. 23, 28 
[RG]; ix. 28; xxv. 29 (ἀπὸ [om. by LT Tr WH] τοῦ μὴ 
ἔχοντος ... ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ); xxvi. 71 [RG@Lbr.T]; ΜΚ. ν. 2 
[RG]; ix. 38 [Β ΟἹ; Jn. xv. 2 (πᾶν κλῆμα... . αἴρει αὐτό); 
Acts vii. 21 [Β 67; Jas. iv. 17; Rev. ii. 7; vi. 4 [LTr 
mrg. br.]; ef. W. § 22,4 a.; B. 142 (125). Doubtless 
the writer, while writing the earlier words with the in- 
tention of joining them to the leading verb to follow, 
marked off these very words as a clause by themselves, 
as if they formed a protasis; and so, when he came to 
the leading verb, he construed it just as though it were 
to form an apodosis. 5. By a Hebraism αὐτός is used 
redundantly in relative sentences: ἧς εἶχε τὸ θυγάτριον 
αὐτῆς, Mk. vii. 25 ; οὗ τῷ μώλωπι αὐτοῦ, 1 Pet. ii. 24 (RG 
T, but Tr mrg. br. αὐτοῦ) ; esp. in the Apocalypse: ἣν 
οὐδεὶς δύναται κλεῖσαι αὐτήν, Rev. iii. 8 (ace. to the true 
text); οἷς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς, Rev. vii. 2; add vs. 9; xiii. 12; 
xvii. 9; far oftener in the Sept.; rare in Grk. writ. [fr. 
Callim. ep. 44]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 709; [B. § 143, 1]; W. 
§ 22,4 b. where add to the exx. Hdian. 8, 6, 10 [5 Bekk.] 
ols ἐπιφοιτῶσι αὐτοῖς τὰς λοιπὰς πόλεις πύλαι ἀνοίγνυντο. 
But to this construction must not be referred Mt. iii. 12 
οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ, nor 1 Pet. ii. 24 ὃς τὰς 
ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν αὐτὸς ἀνήνεγκεν. For in the latter pas- 
sage αὐτός is in contrast with us, who must otherwise 
have paid the penalty of our sins; and in the former the 
sense is, ‘he holds his winnowing-shovel in his hand.’ 
6. Very often αὐτός is used rather laxly, where the 
subject or the object to which it must be referred is not 
expressly indicated, but must be gathered especially 
from some preceding name of a province or city, or from 
the context : Mt. iv. 23 (περιῆγεν τὴν Γαλιλαίαν διδάσκων ἐν 
ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν, i. 6. of the Galileans); Acts viii. 5 
(Σαμαρείας ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς. i. 6. τοῖς Σαμαρείταις) ; Xx. 2 
(αὐτούς. i. 6. the inhabitants τῶν μερῶν ἐκείνων) ; 2 Co. ii. 
13 (αὐτοῖς. i.e. the Christians of Troas); Mt. xix. 2 (ὄχλοι 
πολλοὶ καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς. i.e. their sick); 1 Pet. iii. 
14 (φόβον αὐτῶν. i. 6. of those who may be able κακῶσαι 
you, vs. 13); Lk. xxiii. 51 (τῇ βουλῇ αὐτῶν, i. 6. of those 
with whom he had been a βουλευτής) ; Heb. viii. 8 (αὐτοῖς 
([L T WH Tr mrg. αὐτούς : see μέμφομαι] i. 6. τοῖς Exovee 
τὴν διαθήκην τὴν πρώτην) ; Lk. ii. 22 (τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ αὐτῶν, 


αὐτοῦ 


of the purification prescribed by the law of Moses to 
women in child-bed); Jn. viii. 44 (ψεύστης ἐστὶν καὶ ὁ 
πατὴρ αὐτοῦ, i. 6. of the liar; cf. Baumg.-Crusius and 
Meyer ad loc.). By this rather careless use of the pro- 
noun it came about that at length αὐτοί alone might be 
used for ἄνθρωποι: Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14, 17 
[here T WH Tr mrg. αὐτόν]; cf. W. § 22, 3; B. § 127, 8. 
7. Sometimes, in relative sentences consisting of several 
members, the second member is not joined to the first by 
the relative és, but by a loose connection proceeds with 
καὶ αὐτός ; as, Lk. xvii. 31; Acts iii. 13 (ὃν ὑμεῖς παρεδώκατε 
καὶ ἠρνήσασθε αὐτόν [1, T WH om. Tr br. αὐτόν]) ; 1 Co. 
viii. 6 (ἐξ οὗ τὰ πάντα καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν, for καὶ els ὃν 
ἡμεῖς) ; 2 Pet. ii. 3. This is the usage likewise of Greek 
as well as of Hebrew; cf. W. 149 (141); [B. 283 (243)]; 
Buhdy. p. 304. 

III. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό, with the article, the same ; 
1. without a noun: 6 αὐτός, immutable, Heb. i. 12; xiii. 
8, (Thue. 2, 61); τὸ αὐτό: --- ποιεῖν, Mt. v. 46 [ἢ GT 
WH txt., 47 L T Tr WH]; LK. vi. 33; λέγειν, to profess 
the same opinion, 1 Co. i. 10; ὀνειδίζειν, not in the same 
manner but reproached him with the same, cast on him 
the same reproach, Mt. xxvii. 44, (ὀνειδίζειν τοιαῦτα, Soph. 
Oed. Col. 1002). τὰ αὐτά: Acts xv. 27; Ro. ii. 1; Eph. 
vi. 9. ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό [Rec* passim ἐπιτοαυτό)] (Hesych. 
ὁμοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν αὐτὸν τόπον); to the same place, in the same 
place: Mt. xxii. 34; Actsi. 15; ii.1; 1 Co. xi. 20; xiv. 23, 
(Ps. ii. 2; 2S. ii. 13; 3 Mace. iii.1; Sus. 14); together: 
Lk. xvii. 35; Acts iii. 1 [L T Tr WH join it to ch. 
ii.; 1 Co. vii. 5]; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, (Vulg. simul), together : 
Acts xiv. 1 (for 1m, Ex. xxvi. 24; 1 K. iii. 18; exx. fr. 
Grk. writ. are given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 69 sqq.). 
Like adj. of equality ὁ αὐτός is foll. by the dat.: ἕν καὶ 
τὸ αὐτὸ τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ, 1 Co. xi. 5, (Sap. xviii. 11; 4 Mace. 
viii. 5; x. 2, 13, and often in Grk. writ., ef. W. 150 (141)). 
2. With a noun added: Mt. xxvi. 44; Mk. xiv. 39 (τὸν 
αὐτὸν Aéyov) ; Lk. vi. 38 [Β G L mrg.] (τῷ αὐτῷ μέτρῳ) ; 
Phil. i. 30; 1 Co. i. 10 (ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ vot); 1 Co. xii. 4 (τὸ 
δὲ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα), etc. τὰ αὐτά (with the force of a subst. 
the same kind) τῶν παθημάτων, 1 Pet. v.9. [CE£. raira.] 

αὐτοῦ, prop. neuter genitive of the pron. αὐτός. in that 
place, there, here: Mt. xxvi. 36; [LKk. ix. 27 (RL de)]; 
Acts xv. 34 (a spurious vs. [see WH. App. ad loc. }) ; xviii. 
19 (L Tr mrg. ἐκεῖ) ; xxi. 4 (Lchm. avrois).* 

αὑτοῦ, -ῆς, -ov, of himself, herself, itself, i. q. ἑαυτοῦ, 4. ν. 
Tt is very common in the edd. of the N. T. by the Elzevirs, 
Griesbach, Knapp, al.; but Bengel, Matthaei, Lchm., 
Tdf., Trg. have everywhere substituted αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, etc. 
for αὑτοῦ, αὑτῷ, etc. “For I have observed that the 
former are used almost constantly [not always then? 
Grimm] not only in uncial codd. of the viii. ix. and x. 
cent., butalso in many others (and not N. T. codd. alone). 
That this is the correct mode of writing is proved also 
by numerous examples where the pron. is joined to prep- 
ositions; for these last are often found written not eq, 
ad, μεθ, καθ, av6, etc., but em, az, pet, κατ, avr.” Tdf. 
Proleg. ad N. T., ed. 2 p. xxvi. [ed. 8 p. 126]; cf. his 
Proleg. ad Sept., ed. 1 p. Ixx. [ed. 4 p. xxxiii. (not in 


87 


apaipew 


ed. 6)]. Bleek entertains the same opinion and sets it 
forth at length ir ‘is note on Heb. i. 3, vol. 11. 1 p. 
67 sqq. The questio. ard to decide, not only be- 
cause the breathings and acvents are wanting in the 
oldest codd., but also because it often depends upon the 
mere preference of the writer or speaker whether he 
will speak in his own person, or ace. to the thought of 
the person spoken of. Certainly in the large majority 
of the passages in the N. T. αὐτοῦ is correctly restored; 
but apparently we ought to write δύ αὑτοῦ (Rec. ἑαυτοῦ 
[so L mrg. T WH)), Ro. xiv. 14 [L txt. Tr 8? air.]; εἰς 
αὑτόν, Col. i. 20 [4]. εἰς αὐτ.1; αὐτὸς περὶ αὑτοῦ [T Tr txt. 
WH ἑαυτοῦ], Jn.ix.21. Cf. ὙΥ..151 (143); [B.111(97) sq.; 
Bp. Lehtft. on Col.1. c., and see esp. Hort in Westcott and 
Hort’s Grk. Test., App. p. 144 sq.; these editors have in- 
troduced the aspirated form into their text “nearly twen- 
ty times” (6. g. Mt. vi. 34; Lk. xii. 17, 21; xxiii. 12; xxiv. 
12; Jn. ii. 24 ; xiii. 32; xix.17; xx.10; Acts xiv.17; Ro. 
1.27; 2Co.iii.5; Eph.ii. 15; Phil. iii. 21; 1 Jn. v.10; 
Rev. viii. 6, ete.). Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 432]. 

αὐτόφωρος, -ov, (αὐτός and dap a thief, φωρά a theft), 
[fr. Soph. down]; prop. caught in the act of theft; then 
univ. caught in the act of perpetrating any other crime; 
very often in the phrases ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ (as one word 
ἐπαυτοφώρῳ) τινὰ λαμβάνειν, pass. λαμβάνεσθαι, καταλαμ- 
βάνεσθαι, ἁλίσκεσθαι, (fr. Hdt. 6, 72 on), the crime being 
specified by a participle: μοιχευομένη, Jn. viii. 4 [ἢ G], 
asin Ael. nat. an. 11,15; Plut. mor. vi. p. 446 ed. Tauchn. 
[x. p. 723 ed. Reiske, cf. Nicias 4, 5; Eumen. 2, 2]; Sext. 
Empir. ady. Rhet. 65 [p. 151 ed. Fabric. ].* 

αὐτό-χειρ, -pos, 6, (αὐτός and χείρ, cf. μακρόχειρ, ἀδικό- 
χειρ), doing a thing with one’s own hand: Acts xxvii. 19. 
(Often in the tragedians and Attic orators.) * 

αὐχέω ; (in pres. and impf. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
but rare in prose); prop. fo lift up the neck, hence to 
boast: μεγάλα αὐχεῖ, Jas. iii. 5 L T Tr WH for R G pe- 
γαλαυχεῖ q. τ." 

αὐχμηρός, -d, -όν, (αὐχμέω to be squalid), squalid, dirty, 
(Xen., Plat., sqq.), and since dirty things are destitute of 
brightness, dark: 2 Pet. i. 19, Aristot. de color. 3 τὸ 
λαμπρὸν ἢ στίλβον... ἢ τοὐναντίον αὐχμηρὸν καὶ ἀλαμπές. 
(Hesych., Suidas, Pollux.) * 

ἀφ-αιρέω, -ῶ : fut. ἀφαιρήσω (Rey. xxii. 19 Ree. [fr. 
Erasmus, apparently on no Ms. authority; see Tdi.’s 
note]), and ἀφελῶ (ibid.G LT Tr WH; on this rarer fut. 
ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 100) ; 2 aor. ἀφεῖλον ; 1 fut. pass. 
ἀφαιρεθήσομαι ; Mid., pres. adatpodpar; 2 aor. ἀφειλόμην ; 
[see aipéw]; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to take from, 
take away, remove, carry off: ti, Lk. i. 25; to cut off, τὸ 
ὠτίον, Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. xiv.47[L T Tr WH τὸ ὠτάριον}:; 
Lk. xxii. 50 [τὸ οὖς, (τὴν κεφαλήν τινος, 1 Mace. vii. 47; 
for ΓΞ, 1 S. xvii. 51); to take away, τὶ ἀπό with gen. 
of a thing, Rey. xxii. 19; τὶ ἀπό with gen. of pers. Lk. 
x. 42 [T WH om. L Tr br. ἀπό], (Gen. xxxi. 31; Job 
xxxvi. 7; Prov. iv. 16 [Alex.], ete.); mid. (prop. to 
take away or bear off for one’s self), Lk. xvi. 3, (Lev. 
iv. 10; Mice. ii. 8; in Grk. writ. with a simple gen. for 
ἀπό twos); ἀφαιρεῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας to take away sins, of 


ἀφανής 


victims expiating them, Heb. x. 4, (Jer. xi. 15; Sir. xlvii. 
11); mid. of God putting out of his sight, remembering 
no more, the sins committed by men, i. 6. granting par- 
don for sins (see ἁμαρτία, 2 a.): Ro. xi. 27." 

ἀφανής, -és, (puivw), not manifest, hidden: Heb. iv. 13. 
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down.) [Cf. 
δῆλος, and Schmidt ch. 150.]* 

ἀφανίζω ; [Pass., pres. ἀφανίζομαι7 ; 1 aor. ἠφανίσθην ; 
(ἀφανής); a. to snatch out of sight, to put out of view, to 
make unseen, (Xen. an. 3, 4, 8 ἥλιον νεφέλη mapaxav aca 
ἠφάνισε sc. τὴν πόλιν, Plat. Phil. 66 a. ἀφανίζοντες κρύ- 
mropev). b. to cause to vanish away, to destroy, consume 1 
Mt. vi. 19 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. and Sept. [ef. B. 
§ 130, 5]); Pass. to perish: Acts xiii. 41 (Luth. vor 
Schrecken vergehen) ; to vanish away, Jas. iv. 14, (Hat. 7, 
6; 167; Plat. et sqq-). ©. to deprive of lustre, render 
unsightly; to disfigure: τὸ πρόσωπον, Mt. vi. 16.* 

ἀφανισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (ἀφανίζω, q. v.), disappearance; de- 
struction: Heb. viii. 13. (Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
Leian., al.; often in Sept., particularly for 72w and 
mw.) * 

ἄφαντος. -ov, (fr. φαίνομαι), taken out of sight, made 
invisible: ἄφαντος ἐγένετο an’ αὐτῶν, he departed from 
them suddenly and in a way unseen, he vanished, Lk. 
xxiv. 31. (In poets fr. Hom. down; later in prose writ. 
also; Diod. 4, 65 ἐμπεσὼν eis τὸ χάσμα... . ἄφαντος ἐγένετο, 
Plut. orac. def. ὁ. 1. Sometimes angels, withdrawing 
suddenly from human view, are said ἀφαν εἴς γίνεσθαι: 
2 Mace. iii. 34; Acta Thom. ὃ § 27 and 43.) * 

ἀφεδρών, -dvos, 6, apparently a word of Macedonian 
origin, which Suidas calls ‘barbarous’; the place into 
which the alvine discharges are voided; a privy, sink; 
found only in Mt. xv. 17; Mk. vii. 19. It appears to 
be derived not from ἀφ᾽ ἑδρῶν a podicibus, but from 
ἄφεδρος, the same Macedon. word which in Lev. xii. 5; 
xv. 19 5646. answers to the Hebr. ΤΠ) sordes menstruorum. 
Cf. Fischer’s full discussion of the word in his De vitiis 
lexx. N. T. p. 698 sqq.* 

ἀφειδία (ἀφείδεια Lehm., see s. v. €t,¢),-as, 7, (the dispo- 
sition of a man who is ἀφειδής, unsparing), unsparing 
severity: with gen. of the object, rod σώματος. Col. ii. 23 
(τῶν σωμάτων ἀφειδεῖν, Lys. 2, 25 (193, 5); Diod. 13, 60; 
79 etc. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. 6.7; in Plat. defin. p. 
412 ἃ. ἀφειδία means liberality).* 

ἀφ-εἴδον, i. q. ἀπεῖδον, q. ν. Cf. B. 7; Mullaen p. 22; 
W. 45 (44); [ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 91 sq., Sept. ed. 4 Proleg. 
p- Xxxiii.; Scrivener’s ed. of cod. Cantab. Intr. p. xlvii. 
(11); esp. WH. App. p. 143 sq., Meisterhans 8 20, and 
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 23; Curtius p. 687 sq.]. 

ἀφελότης, -ητος, ἡ, (fr. ἀφελής without rock, smooth, 
plain, and this fr. φελλεύς rocky land), simplicity, [A.V. 
singleness]: καρδίας, Acts ii. 46, (found only here [and in 
eccl. writ.]. The Greeks used apéAea).* 

ἀφ-ελπίζω, i. q. ἀπελπίζω, q. v.; cf. ἀφεῖδον. 

ἄφεσις, -ews, ἡ. (ἀφίημι); 1. release, as from bond- 
age, imprisonment, ete.: Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. Ixi. 1 sq.; 
Polyb. 1, 79, 12, ete.). 2. ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν forgiveness, 
pardon, of sins (prop. the letting them go, as if they had 


38 


ἀφίημι 


not been committed [see at length Trench § xxxiii.]), 
remission of their penalty: Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. i. 4; Lk. 
i. 77; iii. 3; xxiv. 47; Acts ii. 38; v. 31; χ. 48: xiii. 38; 
xxvi. 18; Col. i. 145 τῶν παραπτωμάτων, Eph. i. 7; and 
simply ἄφεσις : Mk. iii. 29; Heb. ix. 22; x. 18, (φόνου, 
Plat. legg. 9 p. 869 d.; ἐγκλημάτων, Diod. 20, 44 [so 
Dion. Hal. 1. 8 § 50, see also 7, 33; 7, 46; esp. 7, 64; 
ἁμαρτημάτων, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 17; al.]).* 

ἁφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἅπτω to fasten together, to fit), (Vulg. 
Junctura [and nexus]), bond, connection, [ A. V. joint (see 
esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below) ]: Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii. 
19. (Plut. Anton. ec. 27.)* 

ἀφθαρσία, -as, ἡ, (ἄφθαρτος, cf. ἀκαθαρσία), (Tertull. 
and subseq. writ. incorruptibilitas, Vulg. incorruptio [and 
incorruptela]), incorruption, perpetuity: τοῦ κόσμου, Philo 
de incorr. mund. § 11; it is ascribed to τὸ θεῖον in Plut. 
Arist. ο. 6; of the body of man exempt from decay after 
the resurrection, 1 Co. xv. 42 (ἐν apé. se. ὄν), 50, 53 sq.; 
of a blessed immortality (Sap. ii. 23; vi. 19; 4 Mace. 
xvii. 12), Ro. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 10. τινὰ ἀγαπᾶν ἐν ἀφθαρ- 
cia to love one with never diminishing love, Eph. vi. 
24 [cf. Mey. ad loc. The word seems to have the meau- 
ing purity, sincerity, incorruptness in Tit. ii. 7 Ree.**].* 

ἄφθαρτος, -ov, (φθείρω), uncorrupted, not liable to cor- 
ruption or decay, imperishable: of things, 1 Co. ix. 25; 
1 Pet. i. 4, 23; iii. 4; [ἀφθ. κήρυγμα τῆς αἰωνίου σωτηρίας, 
Mk. xvi. WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]. —im- 
mortal: of the risen dead, 1 Co. xv. 52; of God, Ro. i. 
23; 1 Tim. i. 17. (Sap. xii. 1; xviii. 4. [Aristot.], 
Plut., Leian., al. [Cf. Trench § Lxviii.])* 

ἀ-φθορία, -as, ἡ, (ἄφθορος uncorrupted, fr. φθείρων, un- 
corruptness: ‘Tit. ii. 7 LL T Tr WH; see ἀδιαφθορία." 

ἀφ-ίημι ; pres. 2 pers. sing. ἀφεῖς (fr. the form apéw, 
Rev. ii. 20 for Ree. ἐᾷς), [3 pers. plur. ἀφιοῦσιν Rev. xi. 
9 Tdf. edd. 2, 7, ἔν. a form ἀφιέω ; cf. B. 48 (42)]; impf. 3 
pers. sing. ἤφιε, with the augm. before the prep., Mk. i. 
34; xi. 16, fr. the form apiw; whence also pres. 1 pers. 
plur. ἀφίομεν Lk. xi. 4 L T Tr WH for ἀφίεμεν Ree. and 
3 pers. apiovow Rev. xi. 9 L T Tr WH; [see WH. App. 
p-: 167]; fut. ἀφήσω; 1 aor. ἀφῆκα, 2 pers. sing. -xes Rev. 
ii. 4 T Tr WH (cf. κοπιάω] ; 2 aor. impv. ἄφες, ἄφετε, subj. 
8 pers. sing. ἀφῇ, 2 pers. plur. ἀφῆτε, [inf. ἀφεῖναι (Mt. 
xxiii. 23 L T Tr WH; LK. v. 21 L txt. T Tr WH)], 
ptep. ἀφείς, ἀφέντες ; Pass., pres. ἀφίεμαι, [yet 3 pers. 
plur. apiovra Jn. xx. 23 WH mrg. ete.; cf. ἀφίω above]; 
pf. 3 pers. plur. ἀφέωνται (a Doric form [ef. W. § 14, 3 a.; 
B 49 (42); Kiihner § 285, 4], Mt. ix. 2,5; Mk. ii. 5, [9] 
—in both these Gospels L [exe. in Mk. mrg.] T Tr WH 
have restored the pres. 3 pers. plur. ἀφίενται; Lk. v. 20, 
23; vii. 47, [48]; Jn. xx. 23 L txt. T Tr txt. WH txt. ; 
1 Jn. ii. 12) ; 1 aor. ἀφέθην; fut. ἀφεθήσομαι ; ef. W. § 14, 
3; B. 48 (42); [WH. App. p. 167; Veitch 8. v. tye]; 
(fr. ἀπό and inne); [fr. Hom. down]; to send from (ἀπό) 
one’s self; 1. to send away; a. to bid go away or 
depart: τοὺς ὄχλους, Mt. xiii. 36 [al. refer this to 3 be- 
low]; τὴν γυναῖκα, of a husband putting away his wife, 
1 Co. vii. 11-13, (Hdt. 5, 39; and subst. ἄφεσις, Plut. 
Pomp. c. 42, 6). b. to send forth, yield up, emit: rd 


ἀφίημι 


πνεῦμα, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 59 (τὴν ψυχήν, Gen. xxxv. 
18; Hdt. 4, 190 and often in other Grk. writ. [see πνεῦμα, 
27), φωνήν to utter a cry (emittere vocem, Liv. 1, 58), Mk. 
xv. 37 (Gen. xlv. 2 and often in Grk. writ. ; [ef. Heinichen 
on Euseb. h.e. 8,14, 17]). ο. to let go, let alone, let be; 
a. to disregard: Mt. xv. 14. 8. to leave, not to discuss 
now, a topic, used of teachers, writers, speakers, etc. : 
Heb. vi. 1, (Eur. Andr. 392; Theophr. char. praef. § 3; 
for other examples fr. Grk. writ. see Bleek on Heb. vol. 
ii. 2 p. 144 sq.), [al. take the word in Heb. 1. c. as expres- 
sive of the duty of the readers, rather than the purpose of 
the writer; and consequently refer the passage to 3 be- 
low]. y- to omit, neglect: Mt. xxiii. 23, [Lk. xi.42 R ΟἹ; 
ΜΚ. vii. 8; Ko.i.27. ἃ. to iet go, give up, a debt, by not 
demanding it (opp. to κρατεῖν, Jn. xx. 23), i. 6. to remit, 
forgive: τὸ δάνειον, Mt. xviii. 27; τὴν ὀφειλήν, Mt. xviii. 
32; τὰ ὀφειλήματα, Mt. vi. 12; τὰ παραπτώματα. vi. 14 sq. ; 
Mk. xi. 25 sq. [Τ Tr WH om. verse 26]; ras ἁμαρτίας, ra 
ἁμαρτήματα, tas ἀνομίας, Mt. ix. 2, 5 sq.; xii. 31; Mk. ii. 5, 
7; iii. 28; Lk. v. 20 sq. 23; Ro. iv. 7 (fr. Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 
1); 1 Jn. i. 9; Jas. v.15, (Is. xxii. 14 ; xxxiii. 24, etc.) ; 
τ. ἐπίνοιαν τῆς καρδίας, Acts viii. 22, (τὴν αἰτίαν, Hat. 6, 
30; τὰ χρέα, Ael. ν. h. 14, 24); absolutely, ἀφιέναι τινί to 
forgive one: Mt. xii. 32; xviii. 21, 35; Mk. iv. 12; Lk. 
xi. 4; xii. 10; xvii. 3 sq.; xxiii. 34 [L br. WH reject the 


pass.]. 6. to give up, keep no longer: τὴν πρώτην ἀγάπην, 
Rey.ii.4. 2. to permit, allow, not to hinder; a. foll. by 


a pres. inf. [B. 258 (222)]: Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16 ἄφετε 
ἔρχεσθαι καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά, Mt. xiii. 30; Mk. i. 34; Jn. 
xi. 44; xviii. 8. by the aor. inf.: Mt. viii. 22; xxiii. 13 
(14); Mk. v. 37; vii. 12, 27; Lk. viii. 51; ix. 60; xii. 39; 
Rev. xi. 9. Ὁ. without an inf.: Mt. iii. 15 (ἄφες ἄρτι per- 
mit it just now). with acc. of the pers. or thing permitted: 
Mt. iii. 15 τότε ἀφίησιν αὐτόν, Mk. ν. 19; xi. 6; xiv. 6; Lk. 
xiii. 8; Jn. xii. 7 RG; xi. 48; Acts v.38 (LT Tr WH; 
RG ἐάσατε) ; Rev. ii. 20 (Rec. ἐᾷς). ©. ἀφίημι τινί τι, to 
give up a thing to one: Mt. v.40 (ἄφες αὐτῷ καὶ τὸ ἱμάτιον). 
ἃ. foll. by va: Mk. xi. 16; Jn. xii. 7 LT Tr WH, a later 
construction, cf. W. § 44, 8; B. 238 (205). 6. foll. by 
the simple hortative subjunec.: Mt. vii. 4; Lk. vi. 42 
(ἄφες ἐκβάλωνγ ; Mt. xxvii. 49; Mk. xv. 36, (ἄφετε ἴδωμεν) ; 
Epict. diss. 1, 9, 15 ἄφες δείξωμεν, 3, 12, 15 ἄφες ἴδω. 
Cf. B. 209 (181) sq.; W. 285 (268). 3. to leave, go 
away from one; to depart from any one, a. in order to 
go to another place: Mt. xxii. 22; xxvi. 44; Mk. viii. 13 
(Mt. xvi. 4 καταλιπών); xii. 12; xiii. 34; Jn. iv. 3; xvi. 
28. b. to depart from one whom one wishes to quit: 
Mt. iv. 11; so of diseases departing, ἀφῆκέν τινα ὁ πυρετός, 
Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31; Lk. iv. 39; Jn.iv.52. c. to de- 
part from one and leave him to himself, so that all mutual 
claims are abandoned : τὸν πατέρα, Mt. iv. 22; Mk. i. 20; 
Mt. xviii. 12 (Lk. xv. 4 καταλείπει). Thus also ἀφιέναι 
τὰ ἑαυτοῦ to leave possessions, home, ete.: Mt. iv. 20; 
xix. 27, 29; Mk. i. 18; x. 28sq.; Lk. v. 11; xviii. 28 sq. 
d. to desert one (wrongfully): Mt. xxvi. 56; Mk. xiv. 
50; ὅπ. χ. 12. 6. to goaway leaving something behind: 
Mt. v. 24; Jn. iv. 28. f. to leave one by not taking him 
as a companion : opp. to παραλαμβάνειν, Mt. xxiv. 40 sq. ; 


89 


ἀφομοιόω 


LK. xvii. 34 sq. 6. to leave on dying, leave behind one: 
τέκνα, γυναῖκα, Mt. xxii. 25; Mk. xii. 20, 22, (Lk. xx. 31 
καταλείπω). hh. to leave so that what is left may re- 
main, leave remaining: ov μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον 
(or λίθῳ], Mt. χχῖν. 2; Mk. χη]. 2; Lk. χχὶ. θ.. i. ἀφιέναι 
foll. by the δος. of ἃ noun or pron. with an acc. of the 
predicate [B. § 144, 18]: Lk. x. 30 (ἡμιθανῆ) ; In. xiv. 
18 (τινὰ ὀρφανόν) ; Mt. xxiii. 38; Lk. xiii. 35, (but Lchm. 
om. ἔρημος in both pass., WH txt. om. in Mt., G T Tr 
WH om. in Luke; that being omitted, ἀφιέναι means to 
abandon, to leave destitute of God’s help); Acts xiv.17 
(ἀμάρτυρον ἑαυτόν [L T Tr αὐτόν (WH air. q. ν.}7). 

ἀφοικνέομαι, -ovpar: 2 aor. ἀφικύμην ; (ἱκνέομαι to come) ; 
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to come from 
(ἀπό) a place (but often the prep. has almost lost its 
force) ; to come to, arrive at; inthe N. T. once, tropically : 
Ro. xvi. 19 (ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο your obedi- 
ence has reached the ears of [A. V. is come abroad unto] 
all men; Sir. xlvii. 16 εἰς νήσους ἀφίκετο τὸ ὄνομά σου. 
Joseph. antt. 19, 1, 16 εἰς τὸ θέατρον . . . ἀφίκετο ὁ λόγος)" 

ἀ φιλ-άγαθος, -ον, (a priv. and φιλάγαθος). opposed to 
goodness and good men, [R. V. no lover of good]; found 
only in 2 Tim. iii. 3.* 

ἀφιλ-άργυρος. -ov, (a priv. and φιλάργυρος), not loving 
money, not avaricious; only in the N. T., twice viz. 1 
Tim. iii. 3; Heb. xiii. 5. [Cf. Trench ὃ xxiv.]* 

ἄφοιξις, -ews, ἡ, (ἀφικνέομαι), in Grk. writ. generally 
arrival; more rarely departure, as Hdt. 9, 17; Dem. 
1463, 7; [1484, 8]; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,47; 3 Mace. vii. 
18; and so in Acts xx. 29.* 

ἀφτίστημι: 1 aor. ἀπέστησα; 2 aor. ἀπέστην: Mid., 
pres. ἀφίσταμαι, impv. ἀφίστασο (1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec.; οἵ. 
W. § 14,1 e.); [impf. ἀφιστάμην]; fut. ἀποστήσομαι:; 
1. transitively, in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. active, to 
make stand off, cause to withdraw, to remove; trop. to 
excite to revolt: Acts v. 37 (ἀπέστησε Aadv.. . ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 
drew away after him; τινὰ ἀπό τινος, Deut. vii. 4, and in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 76 down). 2. intransitively, 
in pf., plpf., 2 aor. active, to stand off, stand aloof, in 
various senses [as in Grk. writ.] acc. to the context : ἀπό 
with gen. of pers. to go away, depart, from any one, Lk. 
xiii. 27 (fr. Ps. vi. 9; ef. Mt. vii. 23 ἀποχωρεῖτε ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ); 
Acts xii. 10; xix.9; to desert, withdraw from, one, Acts 
xv. 38; to cease to vex one, Lk. iv. 13; Acts v. 38; xxii. 
29; 2 Co. xii. 8; to fall away, become faithless, ἀπὸ θεοῦ, 
Heb. iii. 12; to shun, flee from, ἀπὸ τῆς ἀδικίας, 2 Tim. 
ii. 19. Mid. to withdraw one’s self from: absol. to fall 
away, Lk. viii. 13 ; [τῆς πίστεως, 1 Tim. iv. 1, ef. W. 427, 
428 (398)]; to keep one’s self away from, absent one’s 
self from, Lk. ii. 37 (οὐκ ἀφίστατο ἀπὸ [T Tr WH om. 
ἀπὸ] τοῦ ἱεροῦ, she was in the temple every day); from 
any one’s society or fellowship, 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec.* 

ἄφνω, adv., (akin to αἴφνης, see in αἰφνίδιος above), sud- 
denly: Acts ii. 2; xvi. 26; xxviii.6. (Sept.; [Aeschyl.], 
Thue. and subseq. writ.) * 

ἀφόβως, adv., (φόβος), without fear, boldiy: Lk. i. 74; 
Phil. i. 14; 1 Co. xvi. 10; Jude 12. [From Xen. down.]* 

ἀφ-ομοιόω, -@ : [pf. pass. ptep. ἀφωμοιωμένος (on augm. 


apopaw 


see WH. App. p. 161)]; to cause a model to pass off 
(ἀπό) into an image or shape like it, —to express itself in 
it, (cf. ἀπεικάζειν, ἀπεικονίζειν, ἀποπλάσσειν, ἀπομιμεῖσθαι); 
to copy ; to produce a fac-simile : τὰ καλὰ εἴδη, of painters, 
Xen. mem. 3, 10, 2; often in Plato. Pass. to be made 
like, rendered similar: so Heb. vii. 3. (Ep. Jer. 4 (5), 
62 (63), 70 (71); and in Plato.) * 

ἀφ-οράω, -@; to turn the eyes away from other things 
and fix them on something; cf. ἀποβλέπω. trop. to turn 
one’s mind to: eis τινα, Heb. xii. 2 [W. § 66, 2 d.], (εἰς 
θεόν, 4 Mace. xvii. 10; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. ef. Bleek 
on Heb. vol. ii. 2 p. 862). Further, ef. ἀπεῖδον." 

ad-opitw; impf. ἀφώριζον ; Attic fut. ἀφοριῶ Mt. xxv. 32 
(T WH adopiow); xiii. 49, [W. § 13,1 ο.; B.37 (32)]; 
1 aor. ἀφώρισα; Pass., pf. ptep. ἀφωρισμένος ; 1 aor. 
impv. ἀφορίσθητε ; (ὁρίζω to make a ὅρος or boundary) ; 
to mark off from (amo) others by boundaries, to limit, to 
separate: ἑαυτόν, from others, Gal. ii. 12; τοὺς μαθητάς, 
from thosé unwilling to obey the gospel, Acts xix. 9; ἐκ 
μέσου τινῶν, Mt. xiii. 49; ἀπό twos, xxv. 32. Pass. in a 
reflex. sense: 2 Co. vi. 17. absol.: in a bad sense, 
to exclude as disreputable, Lk. vi. 22; in a good sense, τινὰ 
εἴς τι, (0 appoint, set apart, one for some purpose (to do 
something), Acts xiii. 2; Ro. i. 1; τινά foll. by a telic 
inf., Gal. i. 15 [(?) seethe Comm. adloc.]. ({Soph.], Eur., 
Plat., Isocr., Dem., Polyb., al.; very often in Sept. esp. for 
S337, PI, OG, 0, etc.) * 

ἀφορμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἀπό and ὁρμή q. v.); 1. prop. a 
place from which a movement or attack is made, a base 
of operations: Thue. 1, 90 (τὴν Πελοπόννησον πᾶσιν ava- 
χώρησίν τε καὶ ἀφορμὴν ἱκανὴν εἶναι); Polyb. 1,41,6. 2. 
metaph. that by which endeavor is excited and from which 
it goes forth ; that which gives occasion and supplies matter 
for an undertaking, the incentive ; the resources we avail 
ourselves of in attempting or performing anything: Xen. 
mem. 3, 12, 4 (τοῖς ἑαυτῶν παισὶ καλλίους ἀφορμὰς eis τὸν 
βίον καταλείπουσι), and often in Grk. writ. ; λαμβάνειν, to 
take oceasion, find an incentive, Ro. vii. 8, 11 ; διδόναι, 2 
Co. v. 12; 1 Tim. v. 14, (3 Mace. iii. 2; both phrases often 
also in Grk. writ.) ; 2 Co. xi. 12; Gal. v.13. On the mean- 
ings of this word see Viger. ed. Herm. p. 81 sq.; Phryn. 
ed. Lob. p. 223 sq.; (Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 304].* 

ἀφρίζω ; (ἀφρός) ; to foam: Mk. ix.18,20. (Soph. El. 
719; Diod. 3, 10; Athen. 11, 43 p. 472 a.; [al.].) 
[Comp.: ἐπ-αφρίζω.} " 

ἀφρός, -οὔ, 6, foam: Lk. ix. 39. (Hom. Il. 20, 168; 
[].1.}»" 

ἀφροσύνη, -ης, ἡ, (ἄφρων), foolishness, folly, senseless- 
ness: 2 Co. xi. 1, 17, 21; thoughtlessness, recklessness, Mk. 
vii. 22. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἄφρων, -ovos, ὁ, 7), -ov, τό, (fr. a priv. and φρήν, cf. εὖὔ- 
ῴρων, σώφρων), [fr. Hom. down], prop. without reason 
([εἴδωλα, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 4]; of beasts, ibid. 1, 4, 14), 
senseless, foolish, stupid ; without reflection or intelligence, 
acting rashly: Lk. xi. 40; xii. 20; Ro. ii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 
36; 2 Co. xi. 16, 19 (opp. to φρόνιμος, asin Prov. xi. 29) ; 
2 Co. xii. 6,11; Eph. ν. 17 (opp. to συνιέντες); 1 Pet. 
ii. 15. [A strong term; cf. Schmidt ch. 147 § 17.]* 


90 


ἀχλύς 


ἀφ-υπνόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἀφύπνωσα ; (ὑπνόω to put to sleep, 


to sleep); a. to awaken from sleep (Anthol. Pal. 9, 517, 
5). b. to fail asleep, to fall off to sleep: Lk. viii. 23; 


for this the ancient Greeks used καθυπνόω; see Lobeck 
ad Phryn. p. 224. [Herm. vis. 1, 1.]* 

ἀφ-υστερέω, τῶ: (a later Grk. word) ; 1. to be be- 
hindhand, come too late (ἀπὸ so as to be far from, or to 
fail, a person or thing); used of persons not present at 
the right time: Polyb. 22, 5, 2; Posidon. ap. Athen. 4, 
37 ((. 6. 4 p.151e.); [al.]; ἀπὸ ἀγαθῆς ἡμέρας to fail (to 
make use of) a good day, to let the opportunity pass by, 
Sir. xiv. 14. 2. transitively, to cause to fail, to with- 
draw, take away from, defraud: τὸ μάννα σου οὐκ ἀφυστέ- 
pnoas ἀπὸ στόματος αὐτῶν, Neh. ix. 20 (for 373) to with- 
hold); pf. pass. ptep. ἀφυστερημένος (μισθός), Jas. ν. 4 
T Tr WH after καὶ Β΄", [Ree. ἀπεστερημένος, see ἀποστε- 
pew, also 8. v. ἀπό, II. 2 d. bb., p. 8951." 

ἄφωνος, -ov, (φωνή), voiceless, dumb; without the faculty 
of speech; used of idols, 1 Co. xii. 2 (ef. Ps. exv. 5 (exiii. 
13); Hab. ii. 18); of beasts, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 1 Co. xiv. 10 
τοσαῦτα γένη φωνῶν καὶ οὐδὲν αὐτῶν [LT Tr WH om. 
αὐτ.] ἄφωνον, i. 6. there is no language destitute of the 
power of language, [R. V. txt. no kind (of voice) is with- 
out signification], (cf. the phrases Bios ἀβίωτος a life un- 
worthy of the name of life, χάρις ἄχαρις). used of one 
that is patiently silent or dumb: ἀμνός, Acts viii. 32 fr. 
Is. 1π|. τ. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theog.], Pind., Aeschyl. 
down.)* 

"Axat [WH "Ayas], 6, (so Sept. for M8 possessing, pos- 
sessor; in Joseph. ᾿Αχάζης, -ov, ὁ), Ahaz, king of Judah, 
(fr. c. B.C. 741 to 6. B. Ο. 725; cf. Β. D.s. v. Israel, king- 
dom of], (2 K. xvi. 1 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxviii. 16 sqq.; Is. vii. 1 
844.) : Mt. i. 9.* 

*Axata [WH ᾿Αχαία (see 1, ¢)], -as, 9, Achaia; al: 
in a restricted sense, the maritime region of northern 
Peloponnesus. 2. in a broader sense, fr. B. Cc. 146 
on [yet see Dict. of Geog. s. v.], a Roman province em- 
bracing all Greece except Thessaly. So in the N. T.: 
Acts xviii. 12, 27; xix. 21; Ro. xv. 26; xvi. 5 Rec.; 1 
Co. xvi. 15; 2 Co.i. 1; ix. 2; xi. 10; 1 Th.i.7sq. [B.D. 
ΒΥ 

᾿Αχαϊκός, -od, ὁ, Achaicus, the name of a Christian of 
Corinth : 1 Co. xvi. 17.* 

ἀχάριστος, -ov, (χαρίζομαι), ungracious; a. unpleasing 
(Hom. Od. 8, 236; 20,392; Xen. oec. 7, 37; al.). b. 
unthankful (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 90 down): Lk. 
vi. 35; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Sir. xxix. 17; Sap. xvi. 29.)* 

["Axas, Mt. i. 9 WH; Ξε Αχαζ. 

᾿Αχείμ, 6, Achim, prop. name of one of the ancestors 
of Christ, not mentioned in the O. T.: Mt. i. 14.* 

ἀχειρο-ποίητος, -ov, (χειροποίητος, q. V-), not made with 
hands : Mk. xiv. 58; 2 Co. v. 1; Col. ii. 11 [where ef. Bp. 
Lehtft.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor in the Sept. 
[W. § 34, 3].)* 

[AxeASapax : Acts i. 19 T Tr for αὶ α ᾿Ακελδαμά q. v.] 

ἀχλύς, -vos, 7, α mist, dimness, (Lat. caligo), esp. over 
the eyes, (a poetic word, often in Hom.; then in Hesiod, 
Aeschyl.; in prose writ. fr. [Aristot. meteor. 2, 8 p. 367°, 


ἀχρεῖος 


17 ete. and] Polyb. 34, 11, 15 on; [of a cataract, Dios- 
cor. Cf. Trench ὃ 6.7): Acts xiii.11. (Joseph. antt. 9, 
4, 3 τὰς τῶν πολεμίων ὄψεις ἀμαυρῶσαι τὸν θεὸν παρεκάλει 
ἀχλὺν αὐταῖς ἐπιβαλόντα. Metaph. of the mind, Clem. 
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6 ἀχλύος γέμειν.) * 

ἀχρεῖος, -ov, (χρεῖος useful), useless, good for nothing: 
Mt. xxv. 30 (δοῦλος, ef. Plat. Ale. i. 17 p. 122 b. τῶν 
οἰκετῶν τὸν ἀχρειότατον) ; by an hyperbole of pious mod- 
esty in Lk. xvii. 10 ‘the servant’ calls himself aypetov, 
because, although he has done all, yet he has done noth- 
ing except what he ought to have done; accordingly 
he possesses no merit, and could only claim to be called 
‘profitable,’ should he do more than what he is bound to 
do; cf. Bengel ad loc. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54 ἀχρεῖον καὶ ἀνωφελές. Sept. 
2 S. vi. 22 equiv. to aw low, base.) [Syn. cf. Tittmann 
ii. p. 11 sq.; Ellic. on Philem. 11.]* 

ax peda, -ὥῶ: 1 aor. pass. ἠχρειώθην ; (ἀχρεῖος, 4. V-); 10 
make useless, render unserviceable: of character, Ro. iii. 
12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3), where L mrg. T Tr WH read 
ἠχρεώθησαν fr. the rarer ἄχρεος i. q- ἀχρεῖος. (Several 
times prop. in Polyb.) * 

ἄχρηστος, -ov, (χρηστός, and this fr. χράομαι), useless, 
unprojitable: Philem. 11 (here opp. to εὔχρηστος). (In 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. 6. Batrach. 70; Theogn.] down.) 
[Syn. ef. Tittmann ii. 11 sq.; Trench ὃ ο. 17; Ellic. on 
Philem. 11.]* 

ἄχρι and ἄχρις (the latter of which in the N. T. is 
nowhere placed before a consonant, but the former be- 
fore both vowels and consonants, although euphony is 
so far regarded that we almost constantly find ἄχρι ἧς 
ἡμέρας, ἄχρις ov, cf. B. 10 (9); [W. 42]; and ἄχρι οὗ is 
not used except in Acts vii. 18 and Rev. ii. 25 by L T 
Tr WH and Lk. xxi. 24 by T Tr WH; [to these in- 
stances must now be added 1 Co. xi. 26 T WH; xv. 25 
T WH; Ro. xi. 25 WH (see their App. p. 148); on the 
usage in secular authors (‘where -pz is the only Attic 
form, but in later auth. the Epic -pis prevailed’, L. and 
S. s. v.) ef. Lobeck, Pathol. Elementa, vol. ii. p. 210 sq.; 
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 64; further, Klotz ad Devar. 
vol. ii. 1 p. 230 sq.}); a particle indicating the terminus 
ad quem. (Onits use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz u.s. p. 
224 sqq.) It has the force now of a prep. now of a 
conj., even to; until, to the time that; (on its derivation 
see below). 1. asa Preposition it takes the gen. 
[ef. W. § 54, 6], and is used a. of Place: Acts xi. 5; 
xiii. 6; xx. 4 [Ὁ Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.]; xxviii. 
15; 2 Co. x. 13 sq.; Heb. iv. 12 (see μερισμός, 2); Rev. 
xiv. 20; xvili. 5. b. of Time: ἄχρι καιροῦ; until a sea- 
son that seemed to him opportune, Lk. iv. 13 [but ef. 
καιρός, 2 a.]; until a certain time, for a season, Acts 
xiii. 11; [ἄχρι (vel μέχρι, q. ν- 1 a.) τοῦ θερισμοῦ, Mt. xiii. 
80 WH mrs. ef. ἕως, II. 5]; ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας until the day 
that etc. Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2; 
[ἄχρι (Ree. et al. ws) τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς, Acts i. 22 Tdf.]; 
ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας and ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, Acts 


91 


ἄψυχος 


li. 29; xxiii. 1; xxvi. 22; ἄχρι [-ρις R G] ἡμερῶν πέντε 
even to the space of five days, i. e. after [A. V. in] five 
days, Acts xx. 6; ἄχρις [-pe Τ᾿ Tr WH] αὐγῆς, Acts xx. 11; 
Gyoe τοῦ νῦν, Ro. viii. 22; Phil. 1. 5; ἄχρι τέλους, Heb. 
vi. 11; Rev. ii. 26; see besides, Acts 111. 21; [xxii. 22]; 
Ro: v2 13> 1 Cosivs 11: 2.00. a: 14; Gal iv: 2: 
Phil. i. 6 [-pp LT WH]. c. of Manner and Degree: 
ἄχρι θανάτου, Acts xxii. 4 (even to delivering unto 
death) ; Rey. ii. 10 (to the enduring of death itself) ; Rev. 
xii. 11; and, in the opinion of many interpreters, Heb. 
iv. 12 [see μερισμός, 2]. ἃ. joined to the rel. οὗ (ἄχρις 
οὗ for ἄχρι τούτου, @) it has the force of a conjunc- 
tion, until, to the time that: foll. by the indic. pret., of 
things that actually occurred and up to the beginning of 
which something continued, Acts vii. 18 (ἄχρις οὗ 
ἀνέστη βασιλεύς) ; XXvii. 33. foll. by a subj. aor. having 
the force of a fut. pf., Lk. xxi. 24 LT Tr WH; Ro. xi. 
25; 1 Co. xi. 26 [Rec. ἄχρις οὗ ἄν]; Gal. iii. 19 [not 
WH txt. (see 2 below)]; iv. 19 [T Tr WH μέχρις]; 
Rey. vii. 3 Rec. G; ἄχρις οὗ av until, whenever it may 
be [ef. W. § 42, 5 b.], 1 Co. xv. 25 [Rec.]; Rev. ii. 25. 
with indie. pres. as long as: Heb. iii. 13; cf. Bleek ad loc. 
and B. 231 (199). 2. ἄχρις without οὗ has the force 
of a simple Conjunction, until, to the time that: 
foll. by subj. aor., Lk. xxi. 24 RG; Rev. vii. 3 L T Tr 
WH; xv. 8; [xvii. 17 Rec.]; xx. 3, [5 ~ LT Tr WH]; 
with indic. fut., Rev. xvii. 17 [L T Tr WH]; [ἄχρις av 
foll. by subj. aor., Gal. iii. 19 WH txt. (see 1 ἃ. above) ]. 
Since ἄχρι is akin to ἀκή and dxpos [but cf. Vanicek p. 
22; Curtius § 166], and μέχρι to μῆκος, μακρός, by the 
use of the former particle the reach to which a thing is 
said to extend is likened toa height, by the use of 
μέχρι, toalength; ἄχρι, indicating ascent, signifies up 
to; μέχρι, indicating extent, is unto, as far as; cf. Klotz 
τι. s. p. 225 sq. But this primitive distinction is often 
disregarded, and each particle used of the same thing; 
ef. ἄχρι τέλους. Heb. vi. 11; μέχρι τέλους, ibid. iii. 6, 14; 
Xen. symp. 4, 37 περίεστί μοι καὶ ἐσθίοντι ἄχρι τοῦ μὴ 
πεινῆν ἀφικέσθαι καὶ πίνοντι μέχρι τοῦ μὴ διψῆν. ΟΥ̓. Fritz- 
sche on Ro. v. 13, vol. i. p. 808 sqq-; [Ellic. on 2 Tim. 
ii. 9. ἔΑχρι occurs 20 times in the writings of Luke; else- 
where in the four Gospels only in Mt. xxiv. 38.].* 

ἄχυρον, -ov, τό, a stalk of grain from which the kernels 
have been beaten out; straw broken up by a threshing 
machine, chaff: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. (In Grk. writ. 
fr. Hdt. 4, 72; Xen. oec. 18. 1, 2, 6 down; mostly in plur. 
τὰ ἄχυρα; in Job xxi. 18 Sept. also of the chaff wont to 
be driven away by the wind.) * 

ἀψευδής, -ἐς, (ψεῦδος), without lie, truthful: Tit. i. 2. 
(in Grk. writ. fr. Hes. theog. 233 down.) * 

ἄψινθος. -ov, 7, wormwood, Absinthe: Rev. viii. 11; 6 
ἄἅψινθος ibid. is given as a prop. name to the star which 
fell into the waters and made them bitter.* 

ἄψυχος, -ov, (ψυχή), without a soul, lifeless : 1 Co. xiv. 7. 
(In Grk. writ. from [Archil., Simon. and] Aeschylus 
down.) * 


92 


Baar 


Βαάλ [so accented also by Pape (Eigenn. s. v.), Kue- 
nen and Cobet (Ro. as ἸΡΕΙΟ ΤΣ but 1, Τ (yet the name 
of the month, 1 K. vi. 5 (38), Baad) Tr WH ete. Βάαλ; 
so Etym. Magn. 194, 19; Suid. 1746 ἃ. ete. Dind. in 
Steph. Thesaur. s. v. Βάαλ or Baad |, ὁ, 7, an indecl. noun 
(Hebr. 93, Chald. 73 contr. fr. 713), lord: Ro. xi. 4. 
This was the name of the supreme heavenly divinity 
worshipped by the Shemitic nations (the Pheenicians, 
Canaanites, Babylonians, Assyrians), often also by the 
Israelites themselves, and represented by the Sun: τῇ 
Badd, Ro. xi. 4. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v. 
and J. G. Miiller in Herzog i. p. 637 sqq.; Merz in Schen- 
kel i. 322 sqq-; Schlottmann in Riehm p. 126 sq. Since 
in this form the supreme power of nature generating 
all things, and consequently a male deity, was wor- 
shipped, with which the female deity Astarte was as- 
sociated, it is hard to explain why the Sept. in some 
places say ὁ Βαή (Num. xxii. 41; Judg. ii. 13; 1 K. xvi. 
31; xix. 18, etc.), in others ἡ Baad (Hos. ii. 8; 1 S. vii. 
4, ete. [yet see Dillmann, as below, p. 617]). Among 
the various conjectures on this subject the easiest is 
this: that the Sept. called the deity ἡ Bada in derision, 
as weak and impotent, just as the Arabs call idols 
goddesses and the Rabbins DITDR ; so Gesenius in 
Rosenmiiller’ s Repert. i. p. 139 and Tholuek on Ro. 1. ο.; 
[yet ef. Dillmann, as below, p. 602; for other opinions 
and reff. see Meyer ad loc.; ef. W. § 27,6 Ν. 1. But 
Prof. Dillmann shows (in the Monatsbericht d. Akad. zu 
Berlin, 16 Juni 1881, p. 601 sqq.), that the Jews (just 
as they abstained from pronouncing the word Jehovah) 
avoided uttering the abhorred name of Baal (Ex. xxiii. 
13); Asia substitute i in Aramaic they read Mp0, sont 

or 87309, and in Greek αἰσχύνη (cf. 1 K. xviii. 19, 25). 
This substitute in Grk. was suggested by the use of 
the fem. article. Hence we find i in the Sept. ἡ B. every- 
where in the prophetic bks. Jer., Zeph., Hos., ete., while 
in the Pentateuch it does not prevail, nor even in Judges, 
Sam., Kings, (exc. 1 S. vii. 4; 2 K. xxi. 3). It disap- 
pears, too, (when the worship of Baal had died out) in 
the later versions of Aq., Sym., ete. The apostle’s use in 
Ro. 1. c. accords with the sacred custom ; cf. the substi- 
tution of the Hebr. nw3 in Ish-bosheth, Mephi-bosheth, | 
ete. 2 S. ii. 8, 10; iv. 4 with 1 Chr. viii. 33, 34, also 2S. 
xi. 21 with Judg. vi. 32; ete.]* 

Βαβυλών, -dvos, ἡ, (Hebr. a3 fr. 553 to confound, ace. 
to Gen. xi. 9; ef. Aeschyl. Pers. 52 Βαβυλὼν δ᾽ ἡ ἡ πολύ- 
χρυσος πάμμικτον ὄχλον πέμπει σύρδην. But more cor- 
rectly, as it seems, fr. 53 383 the gate i. e. the court or 
city of Belus [Assyr. Bab-Il the Gate of God; (perh. of 
Tl, the supreme God); ef. Schrader, Keilinschr. ἃ. d. | 


Babive 


Alt. Test. 2te Aufl. p. 127 sq.; Oppert in the Zeitsch. d. 
Deutsch. Morg. Gesellschaft, viii. p. 4357), Babylon, 
formerly a very celebrated and large city, the residence 
of the Babylonian kings, situated on both banks of the 
Euphrates. Cyrus had formerly captured it, but Darius 
Ilystaspis threw down its gates and walls, and Xerxes 
destroyed [Ὁ] the temple of Belus. At length the city 
was reduced almost to a solitude, the population hav- 
ing been drawn off by the neighboring Seleucia, built 
on the Tigris by Seleucus Nicanor. [Cf. Prof. Rawlin- 
son in Β. D.s.v. and his Herodotus, vol. i. Essays vi. 
and viii., vol. ii. Essay iv.] The name is used in the 
Neues 1. of the city itself: Acts vii. 43; 1 Pet. 
v. 13 (where some have understood Babylon, a small 
town in Egypt, to be referred to; but in opposition ef. 
Mayerhoff, Kini. in die petrin. Schriften, p. 126 sqq.; 
[ef. 3 fin. below]). 2. of the territory, Babylonia: 
Mt. i. 11 sq. 17; [often so in Grk. writ.]. 3. alle- 
gorically, of Rome as the most corrupt seat of idolatry 
and the enemy of Christianity : Rev. xiv. 8 [here Rec.* 
Βαβουλών]; Xvi. 19; xvii. 5; xviii. 2, 10, 21, (in the 
opinion of some 1 Pet. v. 13 also; [ef. 1 fin. above]).* 

βαθέως, adv., deeply : ὄρθρου βαθέως se. ὄντος (cf. Bnhdy. 
p- 338), deep in the morning, at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1 
LT Tr WH; so Meyer ad loc. But βαθέως here is more 
correctly taken as the Attic form of the gen. fr. βαθύς, 
4. v-; ef. B. 26 (23); [Lob. Phryn. p. 247].* 

βαθμός, -od, 6, (fr. obsol. Baw i. q. Baiva, like σταθμός 
[fr. Gorn-pe]), threshold, step; of a grade of dignity and 
wholesome influence in the church, [R. V. standing], 1 
Tim. iii. 13 [ef. Ellic. ad loc.]. (Used by [Sept. 1S. v. 
5; 2K. xx. 9; also Sir. vi. 86]; Strabo, [Plut.], Leian., 
Appian, Artemid., [al.]; cf. ob. ad Phryn. p. 324.) * 

βάθος, -εος (-ovs), τό, (connected with the obsol. verb 
βάζω, βάω [but ef. Curtius § 635; Vanitek p. 195]; cf. 
βαθύς, βάσσων, and ὁ βυθός, ὁ βυσσός ; Germ. Boden), 
depth, height, — [ace. as measured down or up]; ule 
prop. : Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; Ro. viii. 39 (opp. to ὕψωμα); 
Eph. iii. 18 (opp. to ὕψος) ; of ‘the deep’ sea (the ‘high 
seas’), Lk. v. 4. 2. metaph.: ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία 
αὐτῶν, deep, extreme, poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2; τὰ βάθη τοῦ 
θεοῦ the deep things of God, things hidden and above 
man’s scrutiny, esp. the divine-eounsels, 1 Co. ii. 10 (τοῦ 
Σατανᾶ, Rev. ii. 24 Ree.; καρδίας ἀνθρώπου, Judith viii. 
14; [τὰ B. τῆς θείας γνώσεως, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 40,1 (cf. 
Lghtft. ad loc.)]); inexhaustible abundance, immense 
amount, πλούτου, Ro. xi. 33 (so also Soph. Aj. 130; βαθὺς 


᾿πλοῦτος, Ael. v. h. 3, 18; κακῶν, [Aeschyl. Pers. 465, 


712]; Eur. Hel. 303; Sept. Prov. xviii. 3).* 
βαθύνω : [impf. ἐβάθυνον] ; (βαθύς) ; to make deep : Lk. 


βαθύς 


vi. 48, where ἔσκαψε καὶ ἐβάθυνε is not used for βαθέως 
ἔσκαψε, but ἐβάθυνε expresses the continuation of the 
work, [he dug and deepened i. e. went deep]; cf. W. § 54, 
5. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

βαθύς, -εἴα, -v, [cf. βάθος, deep; prop.: Jn. iv. 11. 
metaph.: ὕπνος, a deep sleep, Acts xx. 9 (Sir. xxii. 7; 
often also in Grk. writ.) ; ὄρθρος (see βαθέως), Lk. xxiv. 
1 ([Arstph. vesp. 216]; Plat. Crito 43 ἃ. ; Polyaen. 4, 9, 
1; ἔτι βαθέος ὄρθρον, Plat. Prot. 310 a. [cf. also Philo 
de mutat. nom. ὃ 30; de vita Moys. i. § 32]); τὰ βαθέα 
τοῦ Σατανᾶ, Rey. ii. 24 (G 1, Τ Tr WH; ef. βάθος)." 

βαΐον [al. also βάϊον (or even Baiov, Chandler ed. 1 p. 
272) ; on its deriv. (fr. the Egyptian) ef. Steph. Thesaur. 
8. V. Bais], -ov, τό, a palin-branch ; with τῶν φοινίκων added 
[so Test. xii. Patr. test. Naph. § 5] (after the fashion of 
οἰκοδεσπότης τῆς οἰκίας, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν, [cf. W. 603 
(561)7), Jn. xii. 13. (A bibl. and eccles. word: 1 Mace. 
xiii. 51; Cant. vii. 8 Symm.; Lev. xxiii. 40 unknown trans. 
Tn the Grk. church Palm-Sunday is called ἡ κυριακὴ τῶν 
βαΐων. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 18 sqq.; 
[Sturz, Dial. Maced. ete. p. 88 sq.; esp. Soph. Lex.s.v.].)* 

Βαλαάμ, ὁ, indecl., (in Sept. for oy, ace. to Gesenius 
[ perhaps” ] fr. 53 and Dy non-populus, i. e. foreign ; ace. 
to Jo. Simonis equiv. to Dy » 3 a swallowing up of the 
people; in Joseph. 6 Badayos), Balaam (or Bileam), a 
native of Pethor a city of Mesopotamia, endued by Je- 
hovah with prophetic power. He was hired by Balak 
(see Βαλάκ) to curse the Israelites ; and influenced by the 
love of reward, he wished to gratify Balak; but he was 
compelled by Jehovah’s power to bless them (Num. xxii— 
xxiv. ; Deut. xxiii. 5 sq.; Josh. xiii. 22; xxiv. 9; Mie. vi. 
5). Hence the later Jews saw in him a most abandoned 
deceiver: Rev. ii. 14; 2 Pet.ii.15; Jude 11. Cf. Win. 
RWB. [and BB.DD.] 5. v.* 

Βαλάκ, ὁ, indecl., ( pa empty [so Gesen. in his Thesaur., 
but in his later works he adopts (with Fiirst et al.) an act. 
sense ‘one who makes empty,’ ‘a devastator,’ ‘spoiler’ ; 
see BD. Am. ed. s. v.]), Balak, king of the Moabites 
(Num. xxii. 2 sq. and elsewhere): Rev. ii. 14.* 

βαλάντιον and Baddavriov (so L T Tr WH; ef. [Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 79]; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 620; W. p.43; Passow, 
Lex. [also L. and 5.7 s. y.), του, τό, α money-bag, purse : 
Lk. x. 4; xii. 33; xxii. 35 sq. (Sept. Job xiv.17 cf. [Simon. 
181]; Arstph. ran. 772; Xen. symp. 4, 2; Plat. Gorg. 
p- 508 e.; Hdian. 5, 4, 4 [3 ed. Bekk.], and other writ.) * 

βάλλω; fut. Bara; pf. βέβληκα ; 2 aor. ἔβαλον (3 pers. 
plur. ἔβαλον in Lk. xxiii. 34; Acts xvi. 23, ἔβαλαν, {π6 
Alex. form, in Acts xvi. 37 L T Tr WH; [Rev. xviii. 19 
Lehm., see WH. App. p. 165 and] for reff. ἀπέρχομαι 
init.) ; Pass., [pres. βάλλομαι] ; pf. βέβλημαι ; plpf. ἐβε- 
βλήμην; 1 aor. ἐβλήθην; 1 fut. βληθήσομαι ; to throw, — 
either with force, or without force yet with a purpose, 
or even carelessly ; 1. with force and effort: 
βάλλειν τινὰ ῥαπίσμασι to smite one with slaps, to buffet, 
ΜΚ. xiv. 65 Rec. (an imitation of the phrases, τινὰ βάλ- 
Aew λίθοις, βέλεσι, τόξοις, etc., κακοῖς, ψόγῳ, σκώμμασι. 
etc., in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow i. p. 487; [L. and S.s. v. 
T. 1 and 3]; for the Rec. ἔβαλλον we must read with 


93 


βάλλω 


Fritzsche and Schott ἔβαλον, fr. which arose ἔλαβον, 
adopted by L T Tr WIL; βαλεῖν and λαβεῖν are often 
confounded in codd. ; οἵ. Grimm on 2 Mace. y. 6; [Seriv- 
ener, Introd. p. 107) ; βάλλειν λίθους ἐπί τινι or τινα, Jn. 
Vili. (7), 59; χοῦν ἐπὶ τὰς κεφαλάς, Rey. xviii. 19 [WH 
mrg. ἐπέβ.]; κονιορτὸν eis τὸν ἀέρα, Acts xxii. 23; τὶ εἰς 
τὴν θάλασσαν, Mk. ix. 42; Rev. viii. 8; xviii. 21; εἰς τὸ 
πῦρ, Mt. iii. 10; xviii. 8; Lk. iii. 9; Mk. ix. 22; Jn. xv. 
6; εἰς κλίβανον, Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; εἰς γέενναν, Mt. v. 
[29], 30[R G]; Mk. ix. 47; eis τ. γῆν, Rev. viii. 5, 7; xii. 
4, 9, 13; εἰς τ. ληνόν, Rev. xiv. 19; εἰς τ. λιμνήν, Rev. xix. 
20; xx. 10, 14 sq. ; εἰς τ. ἄβυσσον, Rey. xx. 3; absol. and 
in the pass. to be violently displaced from a position 
gained, Rey. xii. 10 LT Tr WH. an attack of disease 
is said βάλλειν τινὰ εἰς κλίνην, Rev. ii. 22; Pass. to lie sich 
abed, be prostrated by sickness: βέβλημαι ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. 
ix. 2; Mk. vii. 30 [RG Lmrg.]; with ἐπὶ κλίνης omitted, 
Mt. viii. 6, 14, cf. Lk. xvi. 20; τινὰ εἰς φυλακήν, to cast one 
into prison, Mt. v. 25; xviii. 30; Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19 
{RG 11], 25; Jn. iii. 24; Acts xvi. 23 sq. 37; Rev. ii. 10; 
[B. ἐπί τινα τὴν χεῖρα or Tas χεῖρας to lay hand or hands 
on one, apprehend him, Jn. vii. 44 L Tr WH, also 30 L 
mrg.]; δρέπανον eis γῆν to apply with force, thrust in, the 
sickle, Rey. xiv. 19; μάχαιραν βάλλειν (to cast, send) ἐπὶ 
τ. γῆν, Mt. x. 34, which phrase gave rise to another 
found in the same passage. viz. εἰρήνην Badd. ἐπὶ τ. γῆν 
to cast (send) peace; ἔξω, to cast out or forth: Mt. v. 
13; xiii. 48; Lk. xiv. 35 (34); 1 Jn. iv. 18; Jn. xv. 6; 
ἑαυτὸν κάτω to cast one’s self down: Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9; 
ἑαυτὸν εἰς τ. θάλασσαν, Jn. xxi. 7; pass.in a reflex. sense 
[B. 52 (45)], βλήθητι, Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23; ri ἀφ᾽ 
ἑαυτοῦ to cast a thing from one’s self, throw it away: Mt. 
vy. 29 sq.; xviii. 8; ὕδωρ ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, Rev. xii. 15 sq. 
(cast out of his mouth, Luther schoss aus ihrem Munde) ; 
ἐνώπιον with gen. of place, to cast before (eagerly lay 
down), Rev. iv. 10; of a tree casting its fruit because 
violently shaken by the wind, Rev. vi. 13. Intrans. to 
rush (throw one’s self [ef. W. 251 (236) ; 381 (357) note; 
B. 145 (127)]): Acts xxvii. 14; (Hom. II. 11, 722; 23, 
462, and other writ.; [ef. L. and S. 5. ν. III. 17). 2. 
without force and effort; to throw or let go of a thing 
without caring where it falls: κλῆρον to cast a lot into the 
urn [B. D. s. v. Lot], Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24; Lk. 
xxiii. 34; Jn. xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19; (κύβους, Plat. 
lege. 12 p. 968 6. and in other writ.). to scatter: κόπρια 
[Ree.* κοπρίαν], LK. xiii. 8; seed ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Mk. iv. 26; 
eis κῆπον, Lk. xiii. 19. 10 throw, cast, into: ἀργύριον εἰς 
τὸν xopBavav [L mrg. Tr mrg. κορβᾶν], Mt. xxvii. 6; 
χαλκόν, δῶρα, ete., εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον, Mk. xii. 41-44 ; 
Lk. xxi. 1-4, cf. Jn. xii. 6. βάλλειν τί τινι, to throw, cast, 
a thing to: τὸν ἄρτον τοῖς κυναρίοις, Mt. xv. 26; Mk. vii. 
27; ἔμπροσθέν twos, Mt. vii. 6; ἐνώπιόν τινος, Rey. ii. 14 
(see σκάνδαλον, Ὁ. B.) ; to give over to one’s care uncertain 
about the result: ἀργύριον τοῖς τραπεζίταις, to deposit, Mt. 
xxv. 27. of fluids, to pour, to pour in: foll. by eis, Mt. 
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37; Jn. xiii. 5, (οἶνον eis τὸν 
πίθον, Epictet. 4, 13, 12; of rivers, ῥόον εἰς ἅλα, Ap. Rhod. 
2, 401, ete.; Sept. Judg. vi. 19 [Ald., Compl.]); to pour 


βαπτίζω 


out, ἐπί twos, Mt. xxvi. 12. 3. to move, give motion 
to, not with force yet with attention and for a pur- 
pose; ets τι; to put into, insert: Mk. vii. 33 (rods δακτύλους 
εἰς τὰ Gra) ; Jn. XX. 25, 27; xviii. 11; yadivous εἰς τὸ στόμα, 
Jas. iii. 3; to let down, cast down: Jn. v. 7; Mt. iv. 18 
[ef. Mk. i. 16 Ree.]; Mt. xvii. 27. Metaph. : εἰς τὴν καρδί- 
αν τινός, to suggest, Jn. xiii. 2 (ri ἐν θυμῷ τινος, Hom. Od. 
1, 201; 14, 269; εἰς νοῦν, schol. ad Pind. Pyth. 4, 133; 
al.; ἐμβάλλειν εἰς νοῦν τινι, Plut. vit. Timol. 6. 3). [Comr.: 
Gut, ἀνα-, ἀντι-, ἀπο-. δια-, €k-, ἐμ-, παρ-εμ-, ἐπι-, κατα-, 
μετα-, mapa-, περι-, προ-, συμ-, ὑπερ-, ὑπο-βάλλω.] 
βαπτίζω ; [impf. ἐβάπτιζον] ; fut. βαπτίσω ; 1 aor. ἐβά- 
mica; Pass., [pres. βαπτίζομαι] ; impf. ἐβαπτιζόμην ; pf. 
ptep. βεβαπτισμένος ; 1 aor. ἐβαπτίσθην ; 1 fut. βαπτισθή- 
copat; 1 aor. mid. ἐβαπτισάμην ; (frequent. [?] fr. Barre, 
like βαλλίζω fr. βάλλω) ; here and there in Plat., Polyb., 
Diod., Strab., Joseph., Plut., al. I. 1. prop. to dip 
repeatedly, to immerge, submerge, (of vessels sunk, Polyb. 
1,51, 6; 8, 8,4; of animals, Diod. 1, 36). 2. to cleanse 
by dipping or submerging, to wash, to make clean with 
water ; in the mid. and the 1 aor. pass. to wash one’s self, 
bathe; so Mk. vii. 4 [where WH txt. ῥαντίσωνται]; Lk. 
xi. 38, (2 K. v. 14 ἐβαπτίσατο ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ, for 520; 
Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 30; Judith xii. 7). 3. metaph. to 
overwhelm, as ἰδιώτας ταῖς εἰσφοραῖς, Diod. 1, 73; ὀφλήμασι, 
Plut. Galba 21 ; τῇ συμφορᾷ βεβαπτισμένος, Heliod. Aeth. 
2,3; and alone, to inflict great and abounding calamities 
on one : ἐβάπτισαν τὴν πόλιν, Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 4, 3, 3; ἡ ἀνομία 
pe βαπτίζει, Is. xxi. 4 Sept. ; hence βαπτίζεσθαι βάπτισμα 
(cf. W. 225 (211); [B. 148 (129)]; ef. λούεσθαι τὸ λου- 
τρόν, Ael. de nat. an. 3, 42), to be overwhelmed with ca- 
lamities, of those who must bear them, Mt. xx. 22 sq. Rec. ; 
Mk. x. 38 sq.: Lk. xii. 50, (ef. the Germ. etwas auszubaden 
haben, and the use of the word 6. g. respecting those who 
cross a river with difficulty, gos τῶν μαστῶν of πεζοὶ Ba- 
πτιζύμενοι διέβαινον, Polyb. 3, 72,4; [for exx. see Soph. 
Lex. s. v.; also T. J. Conant, Baptizein, its meaning and 
use, N. Y. 1864 (printed also as an App. to their revised 
version of the Gosp. of Mt. by the “ Am. Bible Union”) ; 
and esp. four works by J. W. Dale entitled Classic, Ju- 
daic, Johannic, Christic, Baptism, Phil. 1867 sqq.; 1). Δ. 
Ford, Studies on the Bapt. Quest. (including a review of 
Dr. Dale’s works), Bost. 1879]). II. Inthe N. T. it 
is used particularly of the rite of sacred ablution, first in- 
stituted by John the Baptist, afterwards by Christ’s com- 
mand received by Christians and adjusted to the con- 
tents and nature of their religion (see βάπτισμα, 3), viz. 
an immersion in water, performed as a sign of the re- 
moval of sin, and administered to those who, impelled by 
a desire for salvation, sought admission to the benefits 
of the Messiah’s kingdom ; [for patristic reff. respecting 
the mode, ministrant, subjects, ete. of the rite, ef. Soph. 
Lex. s. v.; Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Baptism]. a. The 
word is used absolutely, to administer the rite of ablu- 
tion, to baptize, (Vulg. baptizo; Tertull. tingo, tinguo, [cf. 
mergito, de corona mil. § 3]): Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 25 sq. 28; 
ili. 22 sq. 26; iv. 2; x. 40; 1 Co. i. 17; with the cognate 
noun τὸ βάπτισμα, Acts xix. 4; ὁ βαπτίζων substantively 


94 


βάπτισμα 


i. q. 6 βαπτιστης, Mk. vi. 14, [34 T Tr WH]. τινά, Jn. 
iv. 1; Acts viii. 38; 1 Co.i.14,16. Pass. to be baptized : 
Mt. iii. 13 sq. 16; Mk. xvi. 16; Lk. ili. 21; Acts ii. 41; 
viii. 12, 13, [36]; x.47; xvi. 15; 1 Co.i.15L T Tr WH; 
x.2L T Tr mrg. WH mrg. Pass. in a reflex. sense [i. e. 
Mid. ef. W. § 38, 3], to allow one’s self to be initiated by 
baptism, to receive baptism: Lk. [iii. 7,12]; vii. 30; Acts ii. 
38; ix. 18; xvi.33; xviii. 8; with the cognate noun τὸ βά- 
πτισμα added, Lk. vii. 29; 1 aor. mid., 1 Co. x.2 (1, T Tr 
mrg.WH mmrg. ἐβαπτίσθησαν [ef. W. § 38, 4 b.]) ; Acts xxii. 
16. foll. by a dat. of the thing with which baptism is per- 
formed, ὕδατι, see bb. below. b. with Prepositions; 
aa. eis, to mark the element into which the immersion 
is made: εἰς τὸν ᾿Ιορδάνην, Mk. i. 9. to mark the end: 
eis μετάνοιαν, to bind one to repentance, Mt. iii. 11; εἰς 
τὸ ᾿Ιωάννου βάπτισμα, to bind to the duties imposed by 
John’s baptism, Acts xix. 3 [ef. W. 397 (371)]; εἰς ὄνομά 
twos, to profess the name (see évoua,2) of one whose fol- 
lower we become, Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts viii. 16; xix. 5; 
1 Co. i. 13,15; εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν, to obtain the forgive- 
ness of sins, Acts ii. 38; eis τὸν Moony, to follow Moses 
as a leader, 1 Co. x. 2. to indicate the effect: εἰς ἐν 
σῶμα. to unite together into one body by baptism, 1 Co. 
xil. 13; εἰς Χριστόν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ. to bring by bap- 
tism into fellowship with Christ, into fellowship in his 
death, by which fellowship we have died to sin, Gal. iii. 
27; Ro. vi. 3, [ef. Mey. on the latter pass., Ellic. on the 
former]. bb. év, with dat. of the thing in which one is 
immersed: ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ, Mk. i. 5; ἐν τῷ ὕδατι, Jn. i. 31 
(L T Tr WH ἐν ὕδ.. but ef. Mey. ad loc. [who makes the 
art. deictic]). of the thing used in baptizing: ἐν ὕδατι, 
Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 8 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. ev]; 
Jn. i. 26, 33; cf. B. § 133, 19; [ef. W. 412 (384); see 
ev, 1.5 d.a.]; with the simple dat., ὕδατι, Lk. iii. 16 ; 
Acts 1. 5; xi. 16. ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ, to imbue richly with 
the Holy Spirit, (just as its large bestowment is called an 
outpouring): Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8 [L Trbr. ἐν]; Lk. iii. 
16; Jn.i. 33; Acts i.5; xi. 16; with the addition καὶ πυρί 
to overwhelm with fire (those who do not repent), i. e. to 
subject them to the terrible penalties of hell, Mt. iii. 11. 
ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου, by the authority of the Lord, Acts 
x. 48. cc. Vass. ἐπὶ [L Tr WH ἐν] τῷ ὀνόματι ᾿Ιησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, relying on the name of Jesus Christ, i. e. repos- 
ing one’s hope on him, Acts ii. 38. dd. ὑπὲρ τῶν 
νεκρῶν on behalf of the dead, i. 6. to promote their eternal 
salvation by undergoing baptism in their stead, 1 Co. xv. 
29; of. [W.175 (165) ; 279 (262); 382 (358); Meyer (or 
Beet) ad loc.]; esp. Neander ad loc.; Riickert, Progr. 
on the passage, Jen. 1847; Pare in Ewald’s Jahrb. ἃ. 
bibl. Wissensch. ix. p. 247; (cf. B. Ὁ. 8. v. Baptism XIL. 
Alex.’s Kitto ibid. VI.].* 

βάπτισμα. -ros, τό, (βαπτίζων, a word peculiar to N. T. 
and eccl. writ., immersion, submersion ; 1. used trop. 
of calamities and afflictions with which one is quite over- 
whelmed : Mt. xx. 22 sq. Rec.; Mk. x. 38 sq.; Lk. xii. 50, 
(see βαπτίζω. I. 3). 2. of John’s baptism, that 
purificatory rite by which men on confessing their sins 
were bound to a spiritual reformation, obtained the par- 


βαπτισμός 9 
don of their past sins and became qualified for the benefits 
of the Messiah’s kingdom soon to be set up: Mt. iii. 7; 
xxi. 25; Mk. xi. 30; Lk. vii. 29; xx. 4; Actsi. 22; x. 37; 
xviii. 25 ; [xix. 3]; βάπτ. μετανοίας, binding to repentance 
[W. 188 (177)], Mk. i. 4; Lk. iii. 3; Acts xiii. 24; xix. 4. 
3. of Christian baptism; this, according to the view 
of the apostles, is a rite of sacred immersion, commanded 
by Christ, by which men confessing their sins and pro- 
fessing their faith in Christ are born again by the Holy 
Spirit unto a new life, come into the fellowship of Christ 
and the church (1 Co. xii. 13), and are made par- 
takers of eternal salvation; [but see art. “Baptism” in 
BB.DD., McC. and S., Schaff-Herzog]: Eph. iv. 5; Col. 
ii. 12 [L mrg. Tr -μῷ q. v.]; 1 Pet. iii. 21; εἰς τὸν θάνατον, 
Ro. vi. 4 (see βαπτίζω, 11. b. aa. fin.). [Trench § xcix.]* 

βαπτισμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (βαπτίζω), a washing, purification 
effected by means of water: Mk. νἱῖ. 4, 8 [RGL Tr in 
br.] (ξεστῶν καὶ ποτηρίων) ; of the washings prescribed 
by the Mosaic law, Heb. ix. 10. βαπτισμῶν διδαχῆς 
equiv. to διδαχῆς περὶ βαπτισμῶν, Heb. vi. 2 [where L txt. 
WH txt. βαπτ. διδαχήν], which seems to mean an expo- 
sition of the difference between the washings prescribed 
by the Mosaic law and Christian baptism. (Among 
prof. writ. Josephus alone, antt. 18, 5, 2, uses the word, 
and of John’s baptism; [respecting its interchange with 
βάπτισμα cf. exx. in Soph. Lex. 5. v. 2 and Bp. Lghtft. 
on Col. ii. 12, where L mrg. Tr read βαπτισμός; cf. 
Trench § xcix.].) * 

βαπτιστής, -οῦ, 6, (βαπτίζω). a baptizer; one who ad- 
ministers the rite of baptism; the surname of John, the 
forerunner of Christ: Mt. iii. 1; xi. 11 sq.; [xiv. 2, 8; 
xvi. 14; xvii. 13]; Mk. vi. 24 [T Tr WH τοῦ βαπτίζοντος], 
25; viii. 28; Lk. vii. 20, 28 [T Tr WHom.], 33; ix. 19; also 
given him by Josephus, antt. 18,5, 2, and found in no other 
prof. writ. [Joh. d. Tiiufer by Breest (1881), Kohler (’84).]* 

Barre: [fut. Bayo, Jn. xiii. 26 T Tr WH]; 1 aor. 
Bafa; pf. pass. ptep. βεβαμμένος : in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; in Sept. for 530 ; a. to dip, dip in, immerse: ti, 
Jn. xiii. 26 [but in 26" Lehm. ἐμβάψας, as in 26° L txt. 
RG}; foll. by a gen. of the thing into which the object is 
dipped (because only a part of it is touched by the act 
of dipping), Lk. xvi. 24 (cf. ἅπτεσθαί τινος, λούεσθαι ποτα- 
poo, Hom. Il. 5, 6; 6, 508; cf. B. § 132, 25; [W. § 30, 
8 6.7). b. to dip into dye, to dye, color: ἱμάτιον αἵματι, 
Rey. xix. 13 [Tdf. περιρεραμμένον, see s. Vv. repippaive ; 
WH ῥεραντισμένον, see ῥαντίζω]. (Hdt. 7, 67; Anth. 11, 
68; Joseph. antt. 3, 6,1.) [Comp.: ἐμ-βάπτω.] * 

Bap, Chald. 43 [cf. Ps. ii. 12; Prov. xxxi. 2]; Bap Ἰωνᾶ 
son of Jonah (or Jonas): Mt. xvi. 17, where L T WH 
Βαριωνᾶ (q. v-) Barjonah (or Barjonas), as if a surname, 
like Βαρνάβας, ete. [R.V. Bar-Jonah. Cf. Ἰωνᾶς, 3.1" 

Βαραββᾶς, -a, 4, (fr. 13 son, and 838 father, hence son 
of a father i. 6. of a master [cf. Mt. xxiii. 97), a captive 
robber whom the Jews begged Pilate to release instead of 
Christ: Mt. xxvii. 16 sq. (where codd. mentioned by 
Origen, and some other authorities, place Ἰησοῦν before 
βαραββᾶν, approved by Fritzsche, De Wette, Meyer, 
Bieek, al.; [ef. WH. App. and Tdf.’s note ad loc.; also 


- 


5 Βαρθολομαῖος 
Treg. Printed Text, etc. p. 194 sq.]), 20 sq. 26; Mk. xv. 
7,11,15; Lk. xxiii. 18; Jn. xviii. 40.* 

Bapax, ὁ, indecl., (013 lightning), Barak, ἃ commander 
of the Israelites (Judg. iv. 6, 8): Heb. xi. 32. [BB.DD.]* 

Bapax(as, -ov, 6, [717973 Jehovah blesses], Barachiah : 
in Mt. xxiii. 35 said to have been the father of the Zach- 
ariah slain in the temple ; cf. Ζαχαρίας." 

βάρβαρος, -ov ; 1. prop. one whose speech is rude, 
rough, harsh, as if repeating the syllables βαρβάρ (cf. 
Strabo 14, 2, 28 p.662; ὠνοματοπεποίηται ἡ λέξις, Etym. 
Magn. [188,11 (but Gaisf. reads Bpayyos for βάρβαρος) ; 
cf. Curtius § 394; Vanicek p. 561]); hence 2. 
one who speaks a foreign or strange language which is 
not understood by another (Hdt. 2, 158 βαρβάρους πάντας 
οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι καλέουσι τοὺς μὴ σφίσι ὁμογλώσσους, Ovid. 
trist. 5, 10, 37 barbarus hic ego sum, quia non intelligor 
ulli) ; so 1 Co. xiv. 11. 3. The Greeks used BapBapos 
of any foreigner ignorant of the Greek language and the 
Greek culture, whether mental or moral, with the added 
notion, after the Persian war, of rudeness and brutality. 
Hence the word is applied in the N. T., but not re- 
proachfully, in Acts xxviii. 2, 4, to the inhabitants of 
Malta [i. e. Μελίτη, q- v-], who were of Phenician or 
Punie origin; and to those nations that had, indeed, 
some refinement of manners, but not the opportunity of 
becoming Christians, as the Scythians, Col. iii. 11 | but 
οἵ. Bp. Lghtft. ad loe.]. But the phrase "EAAqves τε καὶ 
βάρβαροι forms also a periphrasis for all peoples, or indi- 
cates their diversity yet without reproach to foreigners 
(Plat. Theaet. p. 175 a.; Isocr. Euag. c. 17 p. 192b.; 
Joseph. antt. 4, 2,1 and in other writ.) ; so in Ro. i. 14. 
(In Philo de Abr. § 45 sub fin. of all nations not Jews. 
Josephus Ὁ. j. prooem. 1 reckons the Jews among bar- 
barians.) Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. ii. 21 p. 61; [Bp. 
Lghtft. on Col. u. s.; B.D. 5. v. Barbarian ].* 

βαρέω, -ὦ: to burden, weigh down, depress; in the N. T. 
found only in Pass., viz. pres. ptep. βαρούμενοι, impv. 
βαρείσθω; 1 aor. ἐβαρήθην ; pf. ptep. βεβαρημένος ; the 
better writ. do not use the pres.; they use only the 
pteps. βεβαρηώς and βεβαρημένος; see Matth. § 227; W. 
83 (80); [Β. 84 (47); Veitchs.v.]. Used simply: éo be 
weighed down, oppressed, with external evils and calami- 
ties, 2 Co. i. 8; of the mental oppression which the 
thought of inevitable death occasions, 2 Co. v.4; ὀφθαλ- 
pot BeBapnpevor, sc. ὕπνῳ, weighed down with sleep, Mk. 
xiv. 40 (LT Tr WH καταβαρυνόμενοι) ; Mt. xxvi. 43; 
with ὕπνῳ added, Lk. ix. 32; ἐν (3) κραιπάλῃ, Lk. xxi. 
34 Ree. βαρυνθῶσιν, [see βαρύνω], (Hom. Od. 19, 122 
οἴνῳ BeBapnores, Diod. Sic. 4, 38 τῇ νόσῳ); μὴ βαρείσθω 
let it not be burdened, sc. with their expense, 1 Tim. v. 
16, (εἰσφοραῖς, Dio Cass. 46, 32). [Comp.: ém-, κατα- 
Bapéw. | * 

βαρέως, adv., (βαρύς, q. V-), heavily, with difficulty: Mt. 
xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 27, (Is. vi. 10). [From Hdt. on.]* 

Βαρθολομαῖος, -ov, 6, Con 3 son of Tolmai), Bar- 
tholomew, one of the twelve apostles of Christ: Mt. x. 3; 
Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14; Actsi.13. [See Ναθαναήλ and 
BB.DD.] * 


Βαριησοῦς 


Βαρτιησοῦς, ὁ, (13 son, iw Jesus), Bar-Jesus, a cer- 
tain false prophet: Acts xiii. 6 [where Tdf. -cod; see 
his note. Cf. ᾿Ελύμας." 

Bap-wvas, -a [cf. B. 20 (17sq.)], 6, (fr. 13 son, and 
ΤῊ" Jonah [al. jiny i.e. Johanan, Jona, John; cf. Mey. 
on Jn. i. 42 (43) and Lghtft. as below]), Bar-Jonah [or 
Bar-Jonas], the surname of the apostle Peter: Mt. xvi. 17 
[LT WH; in Jn. i. 42 (43); xxi. 15 sqq. son of John; 
see Lglitft. Fresh Revision, ete., p. 159 note (Am. ed. 
p- 137 note)]; see in Bap and Ἰωνᾶς, 2.* 

BapvaBas, -a [B. 20 (18)], ὁ, (13 son, and N23; ace. to 
Luke’s interpretation vids παρακλήσεως, i. 6. excelling in 
the power τῆς παρακλήσεως, Acts iv. 36; see παράκλησις, 
5), Barnabas, the surname of Joses [better Joseph], a 
Levite, a native of Cyprus. He was a distinguished 
teacher of the Christian religion, and a companion and 
colleague of Paul: Acts ix. 27; xi. 22, [25 Rec.], 30; xii. 
25; xili—xv.; 1 Co.ix.6; Gal. ii. 1, 9,13; Col. iv. 10.* 

βάρος, -cos, τό, heaviness, weight, burden, trouble: load, 
ἐπιτιθέναι τινί (Xen. oec. 17, 9), to impose upon one difli- 
cult requirements, Acts xv. 28; βάλλειν ἐπί τινα, Rev. ii. 
24 (where the meaning is, ‘I put upon you no other in- 
junction which it might be difficult to observe’; ef. 
Diisterdieck ad loc.); βαστάζειν τὸ βάρος τινός, i. 6. either 
the burden of a thing, as τὸ βάρος τῆς ἡμέρας the weari- 
some labor of the day Mt. xx. 12, or that which a person 
bears, as in Gal. vi. 2 (where used of troublesome moral 
taults; the meaning is, ‘bear one another’s faults’). 
αἰώνιον βάρος δύξης a weight of glory never to cease, i. 6. 
vast and transcendent glory (blessedness), 2 Co. iv. 17; 
ef. W. § 34, 3; (πλούτου, Plut. Alex. M. 48). weight i. q. 
authority: ἐν βάρει εἶναι to have authority and influence, 
1 Th. ii. 7 (6), (so also in Grk. writ.; ef. Wesseling on 
Diod. Sic. 4, 61; [exx. in Suidas s. v.]). [Syn. see 
ὄγκος. * 

Βαρσαβᾶς [-ca83as LT ΤΥ ὙΠ; see WH. App. p. 
1591, -a [B. 20 (18) 1, ὁ, Barsabas [or Barsabbas] (i. 6. 
son of Saba [al. Zaba |) ; 1. the surname of a certain 
Joseph: Acts i. 23, [B. D. s. v. Joseph Barsabas]. 2. 
the surname of a certain Judas: Acts xv. 22, [B. D.s. v. 
Judas Barsabas].* 

Bap-ripatos [Tdf. -μαῖος, yet cf. Chandler § 253], -ov, 6, 
(son of Timzus), Bartimeus, a certain blind man: Mk. 
x. 40." 

Bapive: to weigh down, overcharge: Lk. xxi. 34 (1 aor. 
pass. subj.) βαρυνθῶσιν Ree. [cf. W. 83 (80); B. 54 (47)], 
for βαρηθῶσιν ; see Bapéw. [Comp.: xata-Bapvva.]* 

βαρύς, -εἴα, -ύ, heavy; 1. prop. i.e. heavy in weight: 
φορτίον, Mt. xxiii. 4 (in xi. 30 we have the opposite, 
ἐλαφρόν). 2. metaph. a. burdensome: ἐντολή, the 
keeping of which is grievous, 1 Jn. v.3. b. severe, stern: 
ἐπιστολή, 2 Co. x. 10 [al. imposing, impressive, cf. Wet- 
stein ad loc.]. ο. weighty, i.e. of great moment: τὰ βαρύ- 
τερα τοῦ νύμου the weightier precepts of the law, Mt. 
xxiii. 23; αἰτιάματα [better αἰτιώματα (q. v.)], Acts xxv. 
7. ἃἅ. violent, cruel, unsparing, [A. V. grievous]: λύκοι, 
Acts xx. 29 (so also Hom. Π. i. 89; Xen. Ages. 11, 12).* 


βαρύτιμος, -ον, (βαρύς and τιμή), of weighty (i.e. great) 


96 


βασιλεία 


value, very precious, costly: Mt. xxvi. 7 [RG Tr txt. 
WH], (so Strabo 17 p. 798; selling at a great price, 
Heliod. 2, 30 [var.]; possessed of great honor, Aeschyl. 
suppl. 25 [but Dindorf (Lex. 5. v.) gives here (after a 
schol.) severely punishing]).* 

Bacavitw: [impf. ἐβασάνιζον); 1 aor. ἐβασάνισα; Pass., 
[pres. βασανίζομαι]) ;; 1 aor. ἐβασανίσθην; 1 fut. βασανι- 
σθήσομαι; (βάσανος); 1. prop. to test (metals) by the 
touchstone. 2. to question by applying torture. 3. 
to torture (2 Mace. vii.13); hence 4. univ. to ver with 
grievous pains (of body or mind), to torment: twa, Mt. 
vili. 29; Mk. v. 7; Lk. viii. 28; 2 Pet. 11. 8; Rev. xi. 10; 
passively, Mt. viii. 6; Rev. ix.5; xx.10; of the pains of 
child-birth, Rey. xii. 2 (cf. Anthol. 2, p. 205 ed. Jacobs) ; 
with ἐν and the dat. of the material in which one is tor- 
mented, Rey. xiv. 10. 5. Pass. to be harassed, dis- 
tressed ; of those who at sea are struggling with a head 
wind, Mk. vi. 48; of a ship tossed by the waves, Mt. 
xiv. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. Often in O. T. 
Apocr.) * 

βασανισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (βασανίζω, q- V-) ; 1. a testing by 
the touchstone or by torture. 2. torment, torture; a. 
the act of tormenting: Rev. ix. 5. b. the state or con- 
dition of those tormented: Rev. xviii. 7,10,15; ὁ κάπνος 
τοῦ βασανισμοῦ αὐτῶν the smoke of the fire by which they 
are tormented, Rev. xiv.11. (4 Mace. ix. 6; xi. 2; [al.]; 
bad wine is called βασανισμός by Alexis in Athen. 1, 56 
p- 80£.)* 

βασανιστής, -ov, ὁ, (Bacavitw), one who elicits the truth 
by the use of the rack, an inquisitor, torturer, ({Antiphon ; 
al.}; Dem. p. 978,11; Philo in Flace. § 11 end; [de 
concupise. § 1; quod omn. prob. lib. 16; Plut. an vitios. 
ad infel. suff. § 2]); used in Mt. xviii. 34 of a jailer 
(δεσμοφύλαξ Acts xvi. 23), doubtless because the busi- 
ness of torturing was also assigned to him.* 

βάσανος, -ov, 7, [Curtius p. 439]; a. the touchstone, 
[ealled also basanite, Lat. lapis Lydius], by which gold 
and other metals are tested. b. the rack or instrument 
of torture by which one is forced to divulge the truth. c. 
torture, torment, acute pains : used of the pains of disease, 
Mt. iv. 24; of the torments of the wicked after death, 
ἐν βασάνοις ὑπάρχειν, Lk. xvi. 23 (Sap. iii. 1; 4 Mace. 
xiii. 14); hence 6 τόπος τῆς βασάνου is used of Gehenna, 
Lk. xvi. 28. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn.], Pind. down.) * 

βασιλεία, -as, ἡ, (fr. βασιλεύω ; to be distinguished fr. 
βασίλεια a queen; cf. iepeia priesthood fr. iepedw, and 
ἱέρεια a priestess fr. ἱερεύς), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. royal 
power, kingship, dominion, rule: Lk. i. 33; xix. 12, 15; 
xxii. 29; Jn. xviii. 36; Acts i. 6; Heb. i. 8; 1 Co. xv. 
24; Rev. xvii. 12; of the royal power of Jesus as the 
triumphant Messiah, in the phrase ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῇ Bac. 
αὐτοῦ, i. 6. to come in his kingship, clothed with this pow- 
er: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [εἰς τὴν 8. L mrg. Tr mrg. 
WH txt.]; of the royal power and dignity conferred on 
Christians in the Messiah’s kingdom: Rev. i. 6 (ace. to 
Tr txt. WH mre. ἐποίησεν ἡμῖν or L ἡμῶν [yet RG TWH 
txt. Tr mrg. ἡμᾶς] βασιλείαν [Rec. βασιλεῖς); τοῦ θεοῦ, 
the royal power and dignity belonging to God, Rev. xu. 


βασιλεία 


10. 2. a kingdom i. 6. the territory subject to the 
rule of a king: Mt. xii. 25 sq.; xxiv. 7; Mk. iii. 24; vi. 
23; xiii. 8; Lk. xi. 17; xxi. 10; plur.: Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 
5; Heb. xi. 33. 3. Frequent in the N. T. in refer- 
ence to the Reign of the Messiah are the following 
phrases: ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ (NTINI 899990, Targ. Is. 
xl. 9; Mic. iv. 7), prop. the kingdom over which God rules; 

ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Χριστοῦ (NVWT ΒΗ Targ. Jonath. ad 
᾿ς lili. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, which will be 
founded by God through the Messiah and over which the 
Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; ἡ Bac. τῶν 
οὐρανῶν, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33 
times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is 
of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ. 
nown mao is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed 
universally, not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes 
simply ἡ βασιλεία : Mt. iv. 23, ete.; Jas. ii. 5; once ἡ Bac. 
τοῦ Δαυείδ, because it was supposed the Messiah would be 
one of David’s descendants and a king very like David, 
Mk. xi. 10; once also ἡ Bac. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ, Eph. ν. 
5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel — 
who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after 
four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one an- 
other and the last of them shown itself hostile to the 
people of God, at length its despotism should be broken, 
and the empire of the world pass over for ever to the holy 
people of God (Dan. ii. 44; vii. 14, 18, 27) — the Jews 
were expecting a kingdom of the greatest felicity, which 
God through the Messiah would set up, raising the dead 
to life again and renovating earth and heaven; and that 
in this kingdom they would bear sway for ever over all 
the nations of the world. This kingdom was called the 
kingdom of God or the kingdom of the Messiah; and in 
this sense must these terms be understood in the utter- 
ances of the Jews and of the disciples of Jesus when 
conversing with him, as Mt. xviii. 1; xx. 21; Mk. xi. 10; 
Lk. xvii. 20; xix. 11. But Jesus employed the phrase 
kingdom of God or of heaven to indicate that perfect order 
of things which he was about to establish, in which all those 
of every nation who should believe in him were to be gathered 
together into one society, dedicated and intimately united 
to God, and made partakers of eternal salvation. This 
kingdom is spoken of as now begun and actually pres- 
ent, inasmuch as its foundations have already been 
laid by Christ and its benefits realized among men 
that believe in him: Mt. xi. 12; xii. 28; xii. 41 (in 
ἢ this pass. its earthly condition is spoken of, in which it 
includes bad subjects as well as good); Lk. xvii. 21; 1 
Co. iv. 20; Ro. xiv. 17 (where the meaning is, ‘the es- 
sence of the kingdom of God is not to be found in ques- 
tions about eating and drinking’); Col. i. 13. But far 
more frequently the kingdom of heaven is spoken of as 
a future blessing, since its consummate establishment 
is to be looked for on Christ’s solemn return from the 
skies, the dead being called to life again, the ills and 
wrongs which burden the present state of things being 
done away, the powers hostile to God being vanquished : 
Mt. vi. 10; viii. 11; xxvi. 29: Mk. ix. 1; xv. 43; LK. ix. 


97 


βασιλεία 


27; xiii. 28 sq.; xiv. 15; xxii. 18; 2 Ῥρί. i. 11; also in 
the phrases εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τ. Bac. τ. οὐρανῶν or τ θεοῦ: 
Mt. v. 20; vii. 21; xviii. 3; xix. 23, 24; ΜΕ. ix. 47; x. 
23, 24, 25; Lk. xviii. 24 [T Tr txt. WH εἰσπορεύονται], 
25; Jn. iii. 5; Acts xiv. 22; κληρονόμος τῆς βασιλείας, 
Jas. li. 5; κληρονομεῖν τ. β. τ. θ.: see ἃ. below. By a sin- 
gular use ἡ fac. τοῦ κυρίου ἡ ἐπουράνιος God’s heavenly 
kingdom, in 2 Tim. iv. 18, denotes the exalted and perfect 
order of things which already exists in heaven, and into 
which true Christians are ushered immediately after 
death; cf. Phil. i. 23; Heb. xii. 22 sq. The phrase Bac. 
τῶν οὐρανῶν or τοῦ θεοῦ, while retaining its meaning king- 
dom of heaven or of God, must be understood, according 
to the requirements of the context, a. of the beginning, 
growth, potency, of the divine kingdom: Mt. xiii. 31-33; 
Mk. iv. 30; Lk. xiii. 18. Ὁ. of its fortunes: Mt. xiii. 24; 
Mk. iv. 26. c. of the conditions to be complied with in 
order to reception among its citizens: Mt. xviii. 23; xx. 
1; xxii. 2; xxv. 1. d. of its blessings and benefits, 
whether present or future: Mt. xiii. 44 sq.; Lk. vi. 20; 
also in the phrases ζητεῖν τὴν Bao. τ. θεοῦ, Mt. vi. 33 
[L T WH om. τ. θεοῦ]; Lk. xii. 31 [αὐτοῦ L txt. T Tr 
WH]; δέχεσθαι τ. Bac. τ. 6. ὡς παιδίον, Mk. x. 15; Lk. 
xviil. 17; κληρονομεῖν τ. B. τ. 6. Mt. xxv. 34; 1 Co. vi. 
9 sq-; xv- 50; Gal. v. 21; see in κληρονομέω, 2. 6. of 
the congregation of those who constitute the royal ‘city 
of God’: ποιεῖν τινας βασιλείαν, Rev. i. 6 ἃ T WH txt. 
Tr mrg. [cf. 1 above]; v. 10 (here R G βασιλεῖς, so R in 
the preceding pass.), ef. Ex. xix. 6. Further, the foll. 
expressions are noteworthy: of persons fit for admis- 
sion into the divine kingdom it is said αὐτῶν or τοιούτων 
ἐστὶν ἡ Bac. τῶν ovp. or τοῦ θεοῦ: Mt. v. 3, 10; xix. 14; 
Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. διδόναι τινὶ τ. Bac. is used of 
God, making men partners of his kingdom, Lk. xii. 32; 
παραλαμβάνειν of those who are made partners, Heb. xii. 
28. διὰ τὴν Bac. τ. op. to advance the interests of the 
heavenly kingdom, Mt. xix. 12; ἕνεκεν τῆς Bac. τ. 6. for the 
sake of becoming a partner in the kingdom of God, Lk. 
xviii. 29. Those who announce the near approach of the 
kingdom, and describe its nature, and set forth the condi- 
tions of obtaining citizenship in it, are said διαγγέλλειν τ. 
Bao. τ. θ. 1.Κ. ix. 60; εὐαγγελίζεσθαι τὴν B. τ. 6. Lk. iv. 43; 
viii. 1; xvi. 16; περὶ τῆς Bac. τ. 6. Acts viii. 12; κηρύσσειν 
τὴν Bao. τ. 6. Lk. ix. 2; Acts xx. 25; xxviii. 31; τὸ εὐαγ- 
γέλιον τῆς Bac. Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; xxiv. 14; with the addi- 
tion of τοῦ θεοῦ, Mk. i. 14 RL br. ἤγγικεν ἡ βασ. τ. οὐρ. 
or τοῦ θεοῦ, is used of its institution as close at hand: Mt. 
iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15; Lk. x. 9,11. it is said ἔρχεσθαι 
i. e. to be established, in Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20; 
Mk. xi. 10. In accordance with the comparison which 
likens the kingdom of God to a palace, the power of ad- 
mitting into it and of excluding from it is called κλεῖς 
τῆς B. τ. ovp. Mt. xvi. 19; κλείειν τὴν β. τ. οὐρ. to keep 
from entering, Mt. xxiii.13 (14). υἱοὶ τῆς Bac. are those 
to whom the prophetic promise of the heavenly kingdom 
extends : used of the Jews, Mt. viii. 12; of those gathered 
out of all nations who have shown themselves worthy af 
a share in this kingdom, Mt. xiii. 38. (In the O. 11. 


βασίλειος 


Apoer. ἡ Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ denotes God’s rule, the divine ad- 
ministration, Sap. vi. 5; x. 10; Tob. xiii. 1; so too in Ps. 
cii. (ciii.) 19; civ. (ev.) 11-13; Dan. iv. 33; vi. 26; the 
universe subjest to God’s sway, God’s royal domain, Song 
of the Three Children 32; ἡ βασιλεία, simply, the O. T. 
theocratic commonwealth, 2 Macc. i. 7.) Cf. Fleck, De 
reeno divino, Lips. 1829; Baumg.-Crusius, Bibl. Theol. 
p- 147 sqq.; Tholuck, Die Bergrede Christi, Ste Aufl. p. 
55 sqq. [on Mt. v. 3]; Célln, Bibl. Theol. i. p. 567 sqq., 
ii. p. 108 sqq-; Schmid, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 262 sqq. 
ed. 4; Baur, Neutest. Theol. p. 69 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. d. N. T. § 13; [also in his Leben Jesu, bk. iv. ch. 
2]; Schiirer, [Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29 (esp. par. 8) and 
reff. there; also] in the Jahrbb. fiir protest. Theol., 
1876, pp. 166-187 (cf. Lipsius ibid. 1878, p.189); [B.D. 
Am. ed. 5. v. Kingdom of Heaven, and reff. there]. 

βασίλειος, (rarely -eia), -evov, royal, kingly, regal: 1 Pet. 
ii. 9. As subst. τὸ βασίλειον (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 3; Prov. 
xviii. 19 Sept.; Joseph. antt. 6, 12,4), and much oftener 
(fr. Hdt. 1, 30 down) in plur. τὰ βασίλεια (Sept. Esth. 
i. 9, etc.), the royal palace: Lk. vii. 25 [A. V. kings’ 
courts |." 

βασιλεύς, -€ws, 6, leader of the people, prince, com- 
mander, lord of the land, king; univ.: οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς 
γῆς, Mt. xvii. 25; Rev. xvi. 14[L T Tr WH om. τῆς γῆς ]» 
ete.; τῶν ἐθνῶν, Lk. xxii. 25; of the king of Egypt, Acts 
vii. 10, 18; Heb. xi. 23, 27; of David, Mt.i. 6; Acts xiii. 
22; of Herod the Great and his successors, Mt. ii. 1 sqq.; 
Lk.i.5; Acts xii. 1; xxv. 13; of a tetrarch, Mt. xiv. 9; 
Mk. vi. 14, 22, (of the son of aking, Xen. oec. 4, 16 ; “re- 
ges Syriae, regis Antiochi pueros, scitis Romae nuper 
fuisse,” Cic. Verr. ii. 4, 27, cf. de senectute 17,59; [Verg. 
Aen. 9, 2287); of a Roman emperor, 1 Tim. ii. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 
17, cf. Rev. xvii. 9 (10), (so in prof. writ. in the Roman 
age, as in Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 6; Hdian. 2, 4, 8 [4 Bekk.]; 
of the son of the emperor, ibid. 1, 5, 15 [5 Bekk.]); of 
the Messiah, ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, Mt. ii. 2, ete.; τοῦ 
Ἰσραήλ, Mk. xv. 32; Jn. i. 49 (50); xii. 13; of Chris- 
tians, as to reign over the world with Christ in the mil- 
lennial kingdom, Rev. i. 6; v. 10 (Ree. in both pass. and 
Grsb. in the latter; see βασιλεία, 3 e.); of God, the su- 
preme ruler over all, Mt. v. 835; 1 Tim. i. 17 (see αἰών, 
2); Rev. xv. 3; βασιλεὺς βασιλέων, Rev. xvii. 14 [but 
here as in xix. 16 of the Victorious Messiah]; ὁ Bac. 
τῶν βασιλευόντων, 1 Tim. vi. 15, (2 Mace. xiii. 4; 3 Mace. 
y. 35; Enoch 9,4; [84,2; Philo de decal. § 10]; cf. [κύ- 
pwos τῶν Bao. Dan. ii. 47]; κύριος τ. κυρίων, Deut. x. 17; 
Ps. exxxv. (exxxvi.) 3; [so of the king of the Par- 
thians, Plut. Pomp. ὃ 38, 17). 

βασιλεύω ; fut. βασιλεύσω ; 1 aor. ἐβασίλευσα; (βασι- 
λεύς) ; —in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] with gen. or dat., 
in the sacred writ., after the Hebr. (Sy win), foll. by 
emi with gen. of place, Mt. ii. 22 (where LT WH om. 
‘irbr. ἐπί) ; Rev. v.10; foll. by ἐπί with acc. of the 
pers., Lk. i. 33; xix. 14,27; Ro. v.14; [ef. W. 206 (193 
sq.); B. 169 (147) ]—to be king, to exercise kingly power, 
«9 reign: univ., 1 Tim. vi. 15; Lk. xix. 14,27; of the 
governor of a country, although not possessing kingly 


98 


Bacrato 


rank, Mt. ii. 22; of God, Rev. xi. 15, 17; xix. 6; of the 
rule of Jesus, the Messiah, Lk. i. 33; 1 Co. xv. 25; Rev. 
xi. 15; of the reign of Christians in the millennium, 
Rey. v. 10; xx. 4, 6; xxii. 5; hence Paul transfers the 
word to denote the supreme moral dignity, liberty, bless- 
edness, which will be enjoyed by Christ’s redeemed ones: 
Ro. v. 17 (ef. De Wette and Thol. ad loc.) ; 1 Co. iv. 8. 
Metaph. to exercise the highest influence, to control: Ro. 
ν. 14, 17, 21; vi. 12. The aor. ἐβασίλευσα denotes J 
obtained royal power, became king, have come to reign, in 
1 Co. iv. 8 [ef. W. 302 (283); B. 215 (185)]; Rev. xi. 
17; xix. 6, (as often in Sept. and prof. writ.; ef. Grimm 
on 1 Mace. p. 11; Breitenbach or Kiihner on Xen. 
mem. 1, 1,18; on the aor. to express entrance into a 
state, see Bnhdy. p. 382; Kriiger § 53, 5,1; [Kihner 
§ 386, 5; Goodwin § 19 Ν. 17). [Comp.: ovp-Bacr- 
devo. | * 

βασιλικός, -7, -dv, of or belonging to a king, kingly, 
royal, regal; of a man, the officer or minister of a prince, 
a courtier: Jn. iv. 46, 49, (Polyb. 4, 76, 2; Plut. Sol. 27; 
often in Joseph.). subject to a king: of a country, Acts 
xii. 20. befitting or worthy of a king, royal: ἐσθής, Acts 
xii. 21. Hence metaph. principal, chief: νόμος, Jas. ii. 
8 (Plat. Min. p. 317 ο. τὸ ὀρθὸν νόμος ἐστὶ βασιλικός, 
Xen. symp. 1, 8 βασιλικὸν κάλλος ; 4 Mace. xiv. 2).* 

[βασιλίσκος, -ov, 6, (dimin. of βασιλεύς), a petty king; 
a reading noted by WH in their (rejected) marg. of Jn. 
iv. 46,49. (Polyb., al.)*] 

βασίλισσα, -ης, 7, queen: Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; Acts 
viii. 27; Rey. xviii. 7. (Xen. oee. 9, 15; Aristot. oec. 
9 [in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 84; ef. frag. 385 (fr. Poll. 8, 
90) p. 1542", 25]; Polyb. 23, 18, 2 [exerpt. Vales. 7], 
and often in later writ.; Sept.; Joseph.; the Atticists 
prefer the forms βασιλίς and βασίλεια; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 225; [on the termination, corresponding to Eng. -ess, 
οἵ. W. 24; B. 73; Soph. Lex. p. 37; Sturz, De dial. 
Maced. et Alex. p. 151 sqq.; Curtius p. 653].) * 

βάσις, -εως. ἡ, (BAQ, Baivw) ; 1. a stepping, walk- 
ing, (Aeschyl., Soph., al.). 2. that with which one 
steps, the foot: Acts iii. 7, (Plat. Tim. p. 92a. et al.; 
Sap. xiii. 18).* 

Backalvw: 1 aor. ἐβάσκανα, on which form cf. W. [75 
(72)]; 83 (80); [B. 41 (85); Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25 sq.; 
Paralip. p. 21sq.]; (βάζω, βάσκω [φάσκω] to speak, talk) ; 
τινά [W. 223 (209)]; 1. to speak ill of one, to slander, 
traduce him, (Dem. 8, 19 [94,19]; Ael. v. h. 2, 13, ete.). 
2. to bring evil on one by feigned praise or an evil eye, 
to charm, bewitch one, (Aristot. probl. 20, 34 [p. 926%, 
24]; Theocr. 6,39; Ael. nat. an. 1, 35); hence, of those 
who lead away others into error by wicked arts (Diod. 
4,6): Gal. iii. 1. Cf Schott [or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc. ; 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 462.* 

βαστάζω; fut. βαστάσω; laor.¢€Bacraca; 1. to take 
up with the hands: λίθους, Jn. x. 31, (λᾶαν, Hom. Od. 11, 
594; τὴν μάχαιραν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 7). 
2. to take up in order to carry or bear; to put upon one’s 
self (something) to be carried; to bear what is burden- 
some: τὸν σταυρόν, Jn. xix.17; Lk. xiv. 27, (see orarrds 


Batos 


2a. and b.); Metaph.: βαστάζειν τι, to be equal to un- 
derstanding a matter and receiving it calmly, Jn. xvi. 
12 (Epict. ench. 29,5); φορτίον, Gal. vi. 5; βαστάσει 
τὸ κρίμα, must take upon himself the condemnation of 
the judge, Gal. v. 10 (9 Nw, Mic. vii. 9). Hence 
to bear, endure: Mt. xx. 12; Acts xv. 10 (ζυγόν); Ro. 
xv.1; Gal. vi. 2; Rev. 11. 2588. (Epict. diss. 1, 3, 2; 
Anthol. 5, 9, 3; in this sense the Greeks more com- 
monly use φέρειν.) 3. simply to bear, carry: Mt. iii. 
11; Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. vii. 14; xxii. 10; Rev. xvii. 7; 
pass., Acts iii. 2; xxi. 35. τὸ ὄνομά pov ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν, 
so to bear it that it may be in the presence of Gentiles, 
i. e. by preaching to carry the knowledge of my name 
to the Gentiles, Acts ix. 15. to carry on one’s person: 
Lk. x. 4; Gal. vi. 17 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; of the womb 
carrying the fetus, Lk. xi. 27; to sustain, i. e. uphold, 
support: Ro. xi. 18. 4. by a use unknown to Attic 
writ., to bear away, carry off: νόσους, to take away or 
remove by curing them, Mt. viii. 17 (Galen de compos. 
medicam. per gen. 2, 14 [339 ed. Bas.] Wopas re θερα- 
mevet καὶ ὑπώπια βαστάζει) [al. refer the use in Mt. ]. c. 
to 2; cf. Meyer]. Jn. xii. 6 (ἐβάσταζε used to pilfer [R. 
V. txt. took away; ef. our ‘shop/ifiing’, though perh. this 
lift is a diff. word, see Skeat s. v.]); Jn. xx. 15, (Polyb. 
1, 48, 2 ὁ ἄνεμος τοὺς πύργους τῇ Bia βαστάζει, Apollod. 
bibl. 2, 6, 2; 8, 4, 8; Athen. 2, 26 p. 46 f.; 15, 48 p. 693e.; 
very many instances fr. Joseph. are given by Krebs, 
Observy. p. 152 sqq.). [Sywn. ef. Schmidt ch. 105.]* 

βάτος, -ov, 7 and (in Mk. xii. 26 GLTTr WH) ὁ, 
(the latter acc. to Moeris, Attic; the former Hellenistic; 
οἵ. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 532; W. 63 (62) [ef. 36; B. 12 
(11)]), [fr. Hom. down], a thorn or bramble-bush [cf. 
B. Ὁ. s. v. Bush]: Lk. vi. 44; Acts vii. 30, 35; ἐπὶ τοῦ 
(τῆς) βάτου at the Bush, i. e. where it tells about the Bush, 
Mk. xii. 26; Lk. xx. 37; ef. Fritzsche on Ro. xi. 2; [B.D. 
s. v. Bible IV. 1].* 

βάτος, -ov, 6, Hebr. n3 a bath, [A. V. measure], a Jew- 
ish measure of liquids containing 72 sextarii [between 
8 and 9 gal.], (Joseph. antt. 8, 2, 9): Lk. xvi. 6 [see B.D. 
s.v. Weights and Measures II. 2].* 

βάτραχος, -ov, 6, a frog, (fr. Hom. [i. 6. Batrach., and 
Hat.] down): Rev. xvi. 13.* 

βαττολογέω [T WH βατταλ. (with δὲ B, see WH. App. 
p- 152)],-@: 1 aor. subj. βαττολογήσω; a. to stammer, 
and, since stammerers are accustomed to repeat the 
same sounds, b. to repeat the same things over and 
over, to use many and idle words, to babble, prate; so. Mt. 
vi. 7, where it is explained by ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ, (Vulg. 
multum loqui; [A. V. to use vain repetitions]); cf. Tho- 
luck ad loe. Some suppose the word to be derived from 
Battus, a king of Cyrene, who is said to have stuttered 
(Hat. 4, 155); others from Battus, an author of tedious 
and wordy poems; but comparing βατταρίζειν, which 
has the same meaning, and βάρβαρος (4: v-), it seems 
far more probable that the word is onomatopoetic. (Sim- 
plic. in Epict. [ench. 30 fin.] p. 340 ed. Schweigh.) * 

βδέλυγμα, -τος, τό, (βδελύσσομαι). a bibl. and eccl. word; 
in Sept. mostly for 731A, also for γ᾽ spy and γγ), α foul 


99 


BeBatow 


thing (loathsome on acct. of its stench), a detestable thing; 
(Tertull. abominamentum) ; Luth. Greuel; ΓΑ. V. abom- 
ination]; a. univ.: Lk. xvi. 15. b. in the O. T. often 
used of idols and things pertaining to idolatry, to be 
held in abomination by the Israelites; as 1 K. xi. 6 (5); 
xx. (xxi.) 26; 2 K. xvi. 3; xxi. 2; 1 Esdr. vii. 13; Sap. 
xii. 23; xiv. 11; hence in the N. T. in Rev. xvii. 4 sq. 
of idol-worship and its impurities; ποιεῖν βδέλυγμα «x. 
ψεῦδος, Rev. xxi. 27. c. the expression τὸ 86. τῆς ἐρη- 
μώσεως the desolating abomination [4]. take the gen. al. ; 

g. Mey. as gen. epex.] in Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14, 
(1 Mace. i. 54), seems to designate some terrible event 
in the Jewish war by which the temple was desecrated, 
perh. that related by Joseph. b. 1. 4, 9, 11 sqq. (Sept. 
Dan. xi. 31; xii. 11, βδ. (τῆς) ἐ ἐρημώσεως for Ὁ Ὁ Y3pv 
and onw “wv, Dan. ix. 27 88. τῶν ἐρημώσεων for Ὁ" spe 
Dw the abomination (or abominations) wrought by the 
desolator, i. 6. not the statue of Jupiter Olympius, but a 
little idol-altar placed upon the altar of whole burnt- 
offerings; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 31; Hengstenberg, 
Authentie des Daniel, p. 85 sq.; [the principal explana- 
tions of the N. T. phrase are noticed in Dr. Jas. Mori- 
son’s Com. on Mt. 1. e.].) * 

βδελυκτός, -7, ov, (βδελύσσομαι), abominable, detestable : 
Tit. i. 16. (Besides only in Prov. xvii. 15; Sir. xli. 5; 
2 Mace. i. 27; [ef. Philo de victim. offer. § 12 sub fin.].)* 

βδελύσσω : (βδέω quietly to break wind, to stink) ; 
1. to render foul, to cause to be abhorred: τὴν ὀσμήν, Ex. 
y. 21; to defile, pollute: ras ψυχάς, τ. ψυχήν, Lev. xi. 43 ; 
xx. 25; 1 Mace. i. 48; pf. pass. ptep. ἐβδελυγμένος abomi- 
nable, Rev. xxi. 8, (Lev. xviii. 30; Prov. viii. 7; Job xv. 
16; 3 Mace. vi. 9; βδελυσσόμενος, 2 Mace. v. 8). In 
native Grk. writ. neither the act. nor the pass. is found. 
2. βδελύσσομαι; depon. mid. (1 aor. ἐβδελυξάμην often 
in Sept. [Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 10]; in Grk. writ. depon. pas- 
sive, and fr. Arstph. down) ; prop. to turn one’s self away 
from on account of the stench; metaph. to abhor, detest: 
ri, Ro. ii. 22.* 

βέβαιος, -αία (W. 69 (67); B. 25 (22)), -aov, (BAQ, 
Baive), [fr. Aeschyl. down], stable, fast, firm; prop. : ἄγκυ- 
pa, Heb. vi. 19; metaph. sure, trusty: ἐπαγγελία, Ro. τν. 
16; κλῆσις καὶ ἐκλογή, 2 Pet. i. 10; λόγος προφητικός. 2 
Pet. i. 19; unshaken, constant, Heb. iii. 14; ἐλπίς, 2 Co. 
i. 7 (6), (4 Mace. xvii. 4) ; παρρησία, Heb. iii. 6 (but WH 
Tr mrg. in br.) ; valid and therefore inviolable, λόγος, 
Heb. ii. 2; διαθήκη, Heb. ix. 17. (With the same mean- 
ings in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

βεβαιόω, -@; fut. βεβαιώσω ; 1 aor. ἐβεβαίωσα; Pass., 
[pres. βεβαιοῦμαι] : 1 aor. ἐβεβαιώθην ; (βέβαιος) ; to make 
Jirm, establish, confirm, make sure : τὸν λόγον, to prove its 
truth and divinity, Mk. xvi. 20; ras ἐπαγγελίας make 
good the promises by the event, i. e. fulfil them, Ro. xv. 
8 (so also in Grk. writ. as Diod. 1,5); Pass. : τὸ μαρτύριον 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 Co.i. 6; ἡ σωτηρία . . . εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐβεβαιώθη, 
a constructio praegnans [ W. ὃ 66, 2 d.] which may be re- 
solved into εἰς ἡμᾶς παρεδόθη καὶ ἐν ἡμῖν βέβαιος ἐγένετο, 
Heb. ii. 3 οὗ. 2; see βέβαιος. of men made steadfast and 
constant in soul: Heb. xiii. 9; 1 Co. i. 8 (βεβαιώσει ὑμᾶς 


βεβαίωσις 


ἀνεγκλήτους will so confirm you that ye may be unre- 
provable [W. § 59, 6 fin.]); 2 Co. i. 21 (βεβαιῶν ἡμᾶς 
εἰς Χριστόν, causing us to be steadfast in our fellowship 
with Christ; cf. Meyer ad loc.); ἐν τῇ πίστει, Col. ii. 7 
[LT Tr WH om. ἐν]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Thue. and Plat. 
down.) [Comp.: δια-βεβαιόομαι.} * 

βεβαίωσις, -ews, ἡ. (βεβαιόω), confirmation: τοῦ εὐαγγε- 
λίου, Phil. i. 7; εἰς βεβαίωσιν to produce confidence, Heb. 
vi. 16. (Sap. vi. 19. Thue., Plut., Dio Cass., [al.]) * 

βέβηλος, -ov, (BAQ, βαίνω, βηλός threshold) ; 1. ac- 
cessible, lawful to be trodden; prop. used of places; hence 
2. profane, equiv. to ὙΠ [i- e. unhallowed, common], 
Lev. x. 10; 1S. xxi.4; opp. to ἅγιος (as in [Ezek. xxii. 
26]; Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18): 1 Tim. iv. 7; vi. 20; 
2 Tim. ii. 16; of men, profane i.e. ungodly: 1 Tim. i. 9; 
Heb. xii. 16. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) 
[Cf. Trench § ci.]* 

βεβηλόω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ἐβεβήλωσα; (βέβηλος) ; to profane, 
desecrate: τὸ σάββατον, Mt. xii. 5; τὸ ἱερόν, Acts xxiv. 6. 
(Often in Sept. for 55n; Judith ix. 8; 1 Mace. ii. 12, 
etc. ; Heliod. 2, 25.) * 

Βεελζεβούλ and, as written by some [yet no Greek] 
authorities, Βεελζεβούβ [cod. B Βεεζεβούλ, so cod. δὲ exc. 
in Mk. iii. 22; adopted by WH, see their App. p. 159; ef. 
B. 6], 6, indecl., Beelzebul or Beelzebub, a name of Satan, 
the prince of evil spirits: Mt. x. 25; xii. 24, 27; Mk. iii. 
22; Lk. xi.15,18,19. The form Βεελζεβούλ is composed 
of daar (rabbin. for 52; dung) and 5y3, lord of dung 
or of filth, i. e. of idolatry; ef. Lightfoot on Mt. xii. 24. 
The few who follow Jerome in preferring the form BeeA- 
ζεβούβ derive the name fr. 3337 Sys, lord of flies, a false 
god of the Ekronites (2 K. i. 2) having the power to 
drive away troublesome flies, and think the Jews trans- 
ferred the name to Satan in contempt. Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Beelzebub: and J. G. M(iiller) in Herzog vol. i. p. 
768 sqq-; [BB.DD.; cf. also Meyer and Dr. Jas. Mori- 
son on Mt. x. 25; some,as Weiss (on Mk.1.c.; Bibl. Theol. 
§ 23-a.), doubt alike whether the true derivation of the 
name has yet been hit upon, and whether it denotes Satan 
or only some subordinate ‘ Prince of demons’]. (Besides 
only in eccl. writ., as Ev. Nicod. 6. 1 sq.) * 

Βελίαλ, ὁ, (Ὁ» 73 worthlessness, wickedness), Belial, a 
name of Satan, 2 Co. vi. 15 in Rec.be#*!4 L. But Βελίαρ 
(q- v-) is preferable, [see WH. App. p. 159; B. 6].* 

BeAlap, 6, indecl., Beliar, a name of Satan in 2 Co. vi. 
15 Rec.** GT Tr WH, ete. This form is either to be as- 
cribed (as most suppose) to the harsh Syriae pronuncia- 
tion of the word Βελίαλ (q. v.), or must be derived from 
ἼΩΝ ‘3 lord of the forest, i.e. who rules over forests and 
deserts, (cf. Sept. Is. xiii. 21; Mt. xii. 43; [BB.DD. s. v. 
Belial, esp. Alex.’s Kitto]). Often in eccl. writ.* 

βελόνη, -ης, 7, (βέλος); a. the point of a spear. b. a 
needle: Lk. xviii. 25 LT TrWH;; see ῥαφίς. ([Batr.130], 
Arstph., Aeschin., Aristot., al.; ef. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 90.)* 

βέλος, -eos, τό, (βάλλω), a missile, a dart, javelin, arrow: 
Eph. vi. 16. [From Hom. down.]* 

βελτίων, -ov, gen. -ovos, better; neut. adverbially in 2 
‘Lim. i. 18 [W. 242 (227); B. 27 (24). Soph., Thue., al.j* 


100 


B ηθεσδά 


Βενιαμίν [-μείν 1, T Tr WH; see WH. App. 155, and 
8. V. εἰ, 47,6, (72.231. e. 72}-}3 son of the right hand, i. 6. 
of good fortune, Gen. xxxv. 18), Benjamin, Jacob’s 
twelfth son; φυλὴ Βενιαμίν the tribe of Benjamin: Acts 
xiii. 21; Ro. xi. 1; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. vii. 8.* 

Βερνίκη, -ns, ἡ, (for Βερενίκη, and this the Macedonic 
form [cf. Sturz, De dial. Mae. p. 31] of Φερενίκη [i. 6. vie- 
torious]), Bernice or Berenice, daughter of Herod Agrip- 
pa the elder. She married first her uncle Herod, king 
of Chalcis, and after his death Polemon, king of Cilicia. 
Deserting him soon afterwards, she returned to her 
brother Agrippa, with whom previously when a widow 
she was said to have lived incestuously. Finally she 
became for a time the mistress of the emperor Titus 
(Joseph. antt. 19, 5,1; 20, 7,1 and 8; Tacit. hist. 2, 2 
and 81; Suet. Tit. 7): Acts xxv. 13, 23; xxvi. 30. Cf. 
Hausrath in Schenkel i. p. 396 sq.; [Farrar, St. Paul, ii. 
599 sq.].* 

Bépota, -as, 7, (also Beppota [i. e. well-watered]), Berwa, 
a city of Macedonia, near Pella, at the foot of Mount 
Bermius: Acts xvii. 10, 13.* 

Bepotaios, -a, -ov, Beraan: Acts xx. 4.* 

[Βηδσαϊδά, viven by L mrg. Tr mrg. in Lk. x. 13 where 
Rec. etc. Βηθσαϊδά, q- ν.} 

Βηθαβαρά, -as, [-pa Rec.b*, indecl.], ἡ, (ΠἼ2}» m3 
place of crossing, i. e. where there is a crossing or ford, 
οἵ. Germ. Furthhausen), Bethabara: Jn. i. 28 Ree. [in 
Rec.*” of 1st decl., but cf. W. 61 (60)]; see [WH. 
App. ad loc. and] Βηθανία, 2." 

Βηθανία, -as, ἡ, (72) 12 house of depression or misery 
[ef. B.D. Am. ed.]), Bethany; 1. a town or village 
beyond the Mount of Olives, fifteen furlongs from Jeru- 
salem: Jn. xi. 1, 18; xii. 1; Mt. xxi. 17; xxvi.6; Lk. xix. 
29 [here WH give the accus.-md (see their App. p. 160), 
ef. Tr mrg.]; xxiv. 50; Mk. xi. 1, 11 sq.; xiv. 3; nowa 
little Arab hamlet, of from 20 to 30 families, called el- 
*Aziriyeh or el-’Azir (the Arabic name of Lazarus) ; cb. 
Robinson i. 431 sq.; [BB.DD. 5. v.]. 2. a town or 
village on the east bank of the Jordan, where John bap- 
tized: Jn. i. 28 L T Tr WH, [see the preceding word]. 
But Origen, although confessing that in his day nearly 
all the codd. read ἐν Βηθανίᾳ, declares that when he 
journeyed through those parts he did not find any place 
of that name, but that Bethabara was pointed out as the 
place where John had baptized; the statement is con- 
firmed by Eusebius and Jerome also, who were well ac- 
quainted with the region. Hence it is most probable that 
Bethany disappeared after the Apostles’ time, and was 
restored under the name of Bethabara; οἵ. Liicke ad 
loc. p. 391 sqq. [Cf. Prof. J. A. Paine in Phila. S. 5. 
Times for Apr. 16, 1881, p. 243 sq.]* 

Βηθεσδά, ἡ, indec., (Chald. 830m 13, i. 6. house of 
mercy, or place for receiving and caring for the sick), 
Bethesda, the name of a pool near the sheep-gate at 
Jerusalem, the waters of which had curative powers: 
Jn. v. 2 here Lmrg. WH mrg. read Βηθσαϊδά, T WH txt. 
ByOtaba (q. v.)]- What locality in the modern city is 
its representative is not clear; ef. Win. RWB. s. v.; 


Βηθζαθά 


Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 117 84ᾳ.; Robinson i. 330 sq. 
342 sq.; [B.D. s. v.; “The Recovery of Jerusalem” 
(see index) ].* 

Βηθίαθά, ἡ, (perh. fr. Chald. xpi 13 house of olives; 
not, as some suppose, SAIN "3 house of newness, Germ. 
Neuhaus, since it cannot be shown that the Hebr. Π is 
ever represented by the Grk. ¢), Bethzatha: Jn. v. 2 
T [WH txt.] after codd. δὲ LD and other authorities 
(no doubt a corrupt reading, yet approved by Keim ii. 
p- 177, [see also WH. App. ad loc.]), for Rec. Βηθεσδά, 
q-v. (CE. Kautzsch, Gram. ἃ. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.] * 

Βηθλεέμ, ἡ, [indecl.], (in Joseph. not only so [antt. 8, 
10, 1], but also Βηθλεέμη, -ης, antt. 6, 8,1; 11, 7; [7, 1, 
3]; ἀπὸ Βηθλέμων, 5, 2, 8; ἐκ Βηθλεέμων, 9, 9, 15 [σε ῦ; 
13; 9, 2]), Bethlehem, (om> m3 house of bread), a little 
town, named from the fertility of its soil, six Roman 
miles south of Jerusalem; now Beit Lachm, with about 
3000 [* 5000”, Baedeker] inhabitants: Mt. ii. 1, ὃ sq. 8, 
16; Lk. ii. 4,15; Jn. vii. 42. Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.; Rob- 
inson i. p. 470 sqq-; Raumer p. 313 sqq-; Tobler, Beth- 
lehem in Paliistina u.s.w. 1849; [Socin (i.e. Baedeker), 
Habk. ete., 5. v.; Porter (i.e. Murray) ib.; BB.DD.].* 

Βηθσαϊδά [WH -σαιδά; see I, ει] and (Mt. xi. 21 RG 
T WH) -δάν, ἡ, indecl. but with ace. [which may, how- 
ever, be only the alternate form just given; ef. WH. 
App. p- 160] Βηθσαϊδάν [B. 17 (16 sq.); Win. 61 (60); 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 119 sq.], (Syr- \; Aus i. 6. house or 


place of hunting or fishing), Bethsaida; 1. a small 
city (πόλις, Jn. i. 44 (45)) or a village (κώμη. Mk. viii. 22. 
23) on the western shore of the Lake of Gennesaret: 
Jn. i. 44 (45); Mt. xi. 21; Mk. vi. 45; Lk. x. 13 [here 
Lmrg. Trmrg. Βηδσαϊῖδά: cf. Τὰ Proieg. ἃ. s.]; Jn. 
xii. 21 (where τῆς Γαλιλαίας is added). 2. a village 
in lower Gaulanitis on the eastern shore of Lake Gennes- 
aret, not far from the place where the Jordan empties 
into it. Philip the tetrarch so increased its population 
that it was reckoned as a city, and was called Julias in 
honor of Julia, the daughter of the emperor Augustus 
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2,1; Plin. ἢ. π. 5,15). Many think 
that this city is referred to in Lk. ix. 10, on account of 
Mk. vi. 32,45; Jn. vi. 1; others that the Evangelists 
disagree. Cf. Win. RWB. s. y.; Raumer p. 122 sq.; 
[BB.DD. s. v. 3. In Jn. v. 2 Lehm. mrg. WH mrg. 
read Βηθσαϊδά; see 5. v. Bnbecda.]* 

Βηθφαγή [but Lehm. uniformly, Treg. in Mt. and Mk. 
and RG in Mt. 47 (B. 15; W.52 (51); ef. Tdf. Proleg. 
p- 103); in Mt. xxi. 1 Tdf. ed. 7 -σφαγή]. 4, indecl., (fr. 
mya and 35 house of unripe figs), Bethphage, the name 
of a country-seat or hamlet (Euseb. calls it κώμη, Jerome 
villula), on the Mount of Olives, near Bethany: Mt. xxi. 
1; Mk. xi. 1 RG Trtxt. WHtxt., but Tr mrg. in br. ; 
Lk. xix. 29. [BB.DD. s. v.]* 

βῆμα, -ros, τό, (fr. BAO, Baivw), [fr. Hom. (h. Merc.), 
Pind. down]; 1. a step, pace: βῆμα ποδός the space 
which the foot covers, a foot-breadth, Acts vii. 5 (for 
537-4)3 Deut. ii. δ, cf. Xen. an. 4, 7,10; Cyr. 7, 5, 6). 
2. a raised place mounted by steps; a platform, tribune: 


101 


βιβλίον 


used of the official seat of a judge, Mt. xxvii. 19; Jn. 
xix. 13; Acts xviii. 12, 16 sq.; xxv. 6, 10, [17]; of the 
judgment-seat of Christ, Ro. xiv. 10 (LT Tr WH τοῦ 
θεοῦ); 2 Co. v.10; of the structure, resembling a throne, 
which Herod built in the theatre at Czsarea, and from 
which he used to view the games and make speeches to 
the people, Acts xii. 21; (of an orator’s pulpit, 2 Mace. 
xiii. 26; Neh. viii. 4. Xen. mem. 3, 6,1; Hdian. 2, 19, 
2 [1 ed. Bekk.]).* 

βήρυλλος, -ov, 6, ἡ, beryl, a precious stone of a pale 
green color (Plin. h. n. 37, 5 (20) [i. 6. 37, 19}: Rey. 
xxi. 20. (Tob. xiii. 17; neut. βηρύλλιον equiv. to ONY, 
Ex. xxviii. 20; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix.13)). Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Edelsteine, 11; [esp. Riehm, HWB. ib. 3 and 127." 

Bla, -as, 7; 1. strength, whether of body or of mind: 
Hom. and subseq. writ. 2. strength in violent action, 
force: pera Bias by the use of force, with violence, Acts 
y. 26; xxiv. 7[Rec.]; shock τῶν κυμάτων, Acts xxvii. 41 
[R G, but Tr txt. br. al. om. τῶν κυμάτων ; διὰ τ. βίαν τοῦ 
ὄχλου, the crowd pressing on so violently, Acts xxi. 35. 
[Syn. see δύναμις, fin.]* 

βιάζω: (Bia); to use force, to apply force; τινά, to 
force, inflict violence on, one; the Act. is very rare and 
almost exclusively poetic, [fr. Hom. down]; Pass. [B. 
58 (46)] in Mt. xi. 12 ἡ βασιλεία τ. οὐρ. βιάζεται, the king- 
dom of heaven is taken by violence, carried by storm, i. e. 
a share in the heavenly kingdom is sought for with the 
most ardent zeal and the intensest exertion; cf. Xen. 
Hell. 5, 2, 15 (23) πόλεις τὰς βεβιασμένας ; [but see Weiss, 
Jas. Morison, Norton, in loc.]. The other explanation : 
the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence sc. from its ene- 
mies, agrees neither with the time when Christ spoke the 
words, nor with the context; ef. Fritzsche, De Wette, 
Meyer, ad loc. Mid. βιάζομαι foll. by εἴς τι to force one’s 
way into a thing, (ἐς τὴν Ποτίδαιαν, Thue. 1, 63; ἐς τὸ ἔξω, 
7, 69; εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν, Polyb. 1, 74,53; εἰς τὰ ἐντός, 
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19; εἰς τὸ στρατόπεδον, Plut. Otho 
12, ete.) : εἰς τ. βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, to get a share in the | 
kingdom of God by the utmost earnestness and effort, 
Lk. xvi. 16. [Comp.: mapaScafopat.] * 

βίαιος, -α, -ον, (Bia), violent, forcible: Acts ii. 2 PACH 
mighty}. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

βιαστής, -00, 6, (βιάζω) ; Δ. strong, forceful: Pind. 
Ol. 9, 114 [75]; Pyth. 4, 420 [236; but Pind. only uses 
the form Bards, so al.]. 2. using force, violent: Philo, 
agric. § 19. In Mt. xi. 12 those are called βιασταί by 
whom the kingdom of God βιάζεται, i. 6. who strive to 
obtain its privileges with the utmost eagerness and 
effort.* 

βιβλαρίδιον. -ov, τό, (dimin. of the dimin. βιβλάριον ἔτ. 
ἡ BiBdos), a little book: Rev. x. 2, 8 [L Tr WH βιβλίον, 
Taf. 2 and 7 βιβλιδάριον, 4. v-], 9,10. Not found in prof. 
auth. [Herm. vis. 2, 4, 3]; ef. W. 96 (91).* 

βιβλιδάριον, -ov, τό. (fr. βιβλίδιον. like ἐματιδάριον ἔτ. 
ἱματίδιον), a little book: Rev. x. 8 Tdf. [edd. 2 and] 7. 
(Arstph. frag. 596.) * 

βιβλίον. -ov, τό, (dimin. of βίβλος). a small book, a 
scroll: Lk. iv. 17, 20; Jn. xx. 30; Gal. iii. 10; 2 Tim. iv. 


βίβλος 


13, οἷοι; a written document; a sheet on which some- 
thing has been written, 8. ἀποστασίου [bill of divorce- 
ment]: Mt. xix.7; Mk. x.4; see ἀποστάσιον, 1. βιβλίον 
ζωῆς, the list of those whom God has appointed to eter- 
nal salvation: Rev. xiii. 8 [Ree. τῇ βίβλῳ]; xvii. 8; xx. 
12; xxi. 27; see ζωή, 2b. [From Hat. down.] 

βίβλος, -ov, 7, (or rather ἡ βύβλος [but the form βίβλ. 
more com. when it denotes a writing], the plant called 
papyrus, Theophr. hist. plant. 4, 8, 2 sq.; [Plin. h. n. 
13, 11 sq. (21 sq.)]; fr. its bark [rather, the cellular sub- 
stance of its stem (for it was an endogenous plant) ] 
paper was made [see Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 433 sq.; 
esp. Dureau de la Malle in the Mémoires de I’ Acad. ἃ. 
Inserr. ete. tom. 19 pt. 1 (1851) pp. 140-183, and (in 
correction of current misapprehensions) Prof. E. Abbot 
in the Library Journal for Nov. 1878, p.323 sq., where 
other reff. are also given ]), a written book, a roll or scroll: 
Mt. 1.1; Lk. iii. 4; Mk. xii. 26; Acts i. 20; τῆς ζωῆς, 
Phil. iv. 3; Rev. iii. 5, ete.; see βιβλίον. [From Aeschyl. 
down. | 

βιβρώσκω: pf. βέβρωκα; to eat: In. vi. 13. 
writ. fr. Hom. down; often in Sept.) * 

Βιθυνία, -as, 7, Bilhynia, a province of Asia Minor, 
bounded by the Euxine Sea, the Propontis, Mysia, 
Phrygia, Galatia, Paphlagonia: Acts xvi. 7; 1 Pet.i. 1. 
[Cf. B. D.s. v.; Dict. of Grk. and Rom. Geog. s. v.; Cony- 
beare and Howson, St. Paul, ete. ch. viii.] * 

βίος, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down]; a. life extensively, 
i.e. the period or course of life [see below and 
Trench ὃ xxvii.]: Lk. viii. 14 ; 1 Tim. ii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 4; 
1 Jn. ii. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 3 [Ree.]. b. (as often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 230, 575; Hdt., Xen.) that by which 
life is sustained, resources, wealth, [A. V. living]: Mk. 
xii. 44; Lk. viii. 43 [WH om. Tr mre. br. cl.]; xv. 12, 
30; xxi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17 [goods]. (For on? in Prov. 
xxxi. 14 (xxix. 32).)* : 

[Syv. βίος. ζωή: ¢ existence (having death as its antithe- 
sis) ; 8. the period, means, manner, of existence. Hence 
the former is more naturally used of animals, the latter οἱ 
men; cf. zoology, biography. N.'T. usage exalts ζωή, and 
so tends to debase Bios. Butsee Bp Lyf. Ign.ad Rom. 7.| 

Bid, -d: 1 aor. inf. βιῶσαι; for which in Attic the 2 
aor. inf. βιῶναι is more common, ef. W. 84 (80); [B. 54 
(48); Veitch or L. and S. 5. v.]; (Bios); [fr. Hom. down]; 
to spend life, to live: τὸν χρόνον, to pass the time, 1 Pet. iv. 
2; (Job xxix. 18; ἡμέρας, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 2). [Syn. 
see Bios, fin.]* 

βίωσις, -ews, 1), manner of living and acting, way of life : 
Acts xxvi. 4. (Sir. prolog. 10 διὰ τῆς ἐννόμου Bidceas ; 
not found in prof. auth.) * 

βιωτικός, -7, -ov, pertaining to life and the affairs of this 
life: Lk. xxi. 34; 1 Co. vi. 3 sq. (The word, not used in 
Attic, first occurs in Aristot. h. a. 9, 17, 2 [p. 616, 27]; 
χρεῖαι βιωτικαί is often used, as Polyb. 4, 73, 8; Philo, vit. 
Moys. iii. § 18 fin.; Diod. 2, 29; Artemid. oneir. 1, 31. 
Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 354 sq.) * 

βλαβερός, -ά, -όν, (βλάπτω), hurtful, injurious, (Xen. 
mem. 1, ὅ, 3 opp. to ὠφέλιμος) : 1 Tim. vi. 9 ἐπιθυμίαι 


(In Grk. 


102 


βλασφημία 


βλαβεραΐ, cf. ἡδοναὶ BA. Xen. mem. 1, 8,11. (Often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. 6. h. Mere. 36 (taken fr. Hes. opp. 
365)] down; once in Sept., Prov. x. 26.) * 

βλάπτω : fut. βλάψω ; 1 aor. ἔβλαψα ; to hurt, harm, in- 
jure: twa, Mk. xvi. 18; Lk. iv. 35. (Very often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down; Tob. xii. 2; 2 Mace. xii. 22, ete.) * 

βλαστάνω, 3 pers. sing. pres. subj. βλαστᾷ fr. the form 
βλαστάω, Mk. iv. 27 LT Tr WH (cf. B. 55 (48); [Ecel. 
ii. 6; Herm. sim. 4, 1 sq.]); 1 aor. ἐβλάστησα (cf. W. 
84 (80); [B. l-e¢.]); 1. intransitively, to sprout, bud, 
put forth leaves: Mk. iv. 27; Mt. xiii. 26; Heb. ix. 4; 
(Num. xvii. 8; Joel ii. 22, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. 
down). 2. in later Grk. writ. transitively, to produce: 
τὸν καρπόν, Jas. v.18. (Gen. i. 11, etc.) * 

Βλάστος [i. 6. a sprout], -ov, 6, Blastus, the chamber- 
lain of king Herod Agrippa I.: Acts xii. 20 [cf. Mey. 
ad loc. ].* 

βλασφημέω, -&; impf. ἐβλασφήμουν ; 1 aor. ἐβλασφή- 
pnoa; Pass., [pres. βλασφημοῦμαι]; 1 fut. βλασφημηθή- 
σομαι; (βλάσφημος, q. V-) ; to speak reproachfully, rail at, 
revile, calumniate, (Vulg. blasphemo) ; absol.: Lk. xxii. 
65; Acts xiii. 45; xviii.6; xxvi. 11; 1 Tim.i. 20; 1 Pet. 
iv.4; with ace. of pers. or thing (as in later Grk., Joseph., 
Plut., Appian, ete.): Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. iii. 28 L T Tr 
WH; xv. 29; Lk. xxiii. 39; Tit. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 7; Jude 
10; with the cognate noun βλασφημίαν, to utter blasphe- 
my (Plat. legg. 7 p. 800 c.; see ἀγαπάω ad fin.), Mk. iii. 
28 RG (where LT Tr WH ὅσα for ὅσας, see above) ; 
[foll. by ἐν, 2 Pet. ii. 12; cf. Bttm. as at end, and see 
ἀγνοέω, a.]. Pass. βλασφημοῦμαι to be evil spoken of, re- 
viled, railed at: Ro. iii. 8; xiv. 16; 1 Co. iv. 13 (T WH 
Tr mrg. δυσφημούμενοι) ; x. 30; Tit. ii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 2; 
τὸ ὄνομά τινος, Ro. ii. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 1. Spee. of those 
who by contemptuous speech intentionally come short 
of the reverence due to God or to sacred things (for 
52, 2 K. xix. 6, 22 οἵ. 4; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. x. 34); 
absol.: Mt. ix. 3; xxvi. 65; Mk.ii.7 LT Tr WH; [Jn. 
x. 36]; τὸν θεόν, Rev. xvi. 11, 21; τὴν θεάν, Acts xix. 37 
(GLTTr WH τὴν θεόν) ; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xiii. 
6; xvi. 9; τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ θεοῦ (βλασφημεῖται), 1 Pet. iv. 
14 Rec.; δόξας, Jude 8; 2 Pet. ii. 10 (see δόξα, III. 3 b. y.); 
εἰς τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ dy. Mk. iii. 29; Lk. xii. 10, (εἰς θεούς, 
Plat. rep. 2 p. 381 e.). The earlier Grks. say βλασφ. 
εἴς τινα, περί OY κατά twos; [on the N. T. constructions 
cf. W. 222 (208); 629 (584); B. 146 (128)].* 

βλασφημία, -as, 9, railing, reviling, (Vulg. blasphemia) ; 
a. univ. slander, detraction, speech injurious to another’s 
good name : Mt. xii. 31; xv. 19; Mk. iii. 28; vii. 22; Eph. 
iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; 1 Tim. vi. 4; Jude 9 (κρίσις βλα- 
σφημίας, i. 4. κρίσις βλάσφημος in 2 Pet. ii. 11, a judgment 
pronounced in reproachful terms); Rev.ii.9. ὍὌ. spe- 
cifically, impious and reproachful speech injurious to the 
divine majesty: Mt. xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 7 [RG]; xiv. 64; 
Lk. v. 21; Jn. x. 33; Rev. xiii. 5 [not Lehm.]; ὄνομα or 
ὀνόματα βλασφημίας i. q. βλάσφημα (cf. W. § 34, 3 b.; 
[B. § 132, 10]): Rev. xiii. 1; xvii. 3 [RG Tr, see γέμω]; 
τοῦ πνεύματος, gen. οὗ obj., Mt. xii. 31; πρὸς τὸν θεόν, Rev. 
xiii. 6. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al.; for ΠΣ), Ezek. xxxv. 


βλάσφημος 


12.) [BB.DD. 5. ν. Blasphemy; Campbell, Diss. on the 
Gospels, diss. ix. pt. ii.]* 

βλάσφημος, -ov, (βλάξ slugaish, stupid, and φήμη speech, 
report, [ἃ]. βλάπτω (q. v.) and φ.7), speaking evil, slan- 
derous, reproachful, railing, abusive: Acts vi. 11 (ῥήματα 
βλάσφημα eis Μωῦσῆν καὶ τὸν θεόν) ; [vi. 13 Ree. (p. BX. 
κατὰ τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου); 2 Pet. ii. 11 (see βλασφημία, 
a.); Rev. xiii. 5 [Lehm.]; βλάσφημος as subst. a blas- 
phemer: 1 Tim. i. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Is. xvi. 3; Sap. i. 
6; Sir. iii. 16; 2 Mace. ix. 28; [x. 36 (cf. 4)]; in Grk. 
writ. fr. Dem. down.) * 

βλέμμα, -ros, τό, (βλέπω); a look, glance: βλέμματι κ. ἀκοῇ 
in seeing and hearing, 2 Pet. ii. 8 [οἵ. Warfield in Presbyt. 
Rey. for 1883 p. 629 sqq.]. (Eur., Arstph., Dem., Plut., al.) * 

βλέπω ; [impf. ἔβλεπον] ; fut. βλέψω ; 1 aor. ἔβλεψα ; 
[pres. pass. βλέπομαι]; Sept. for ANI, 739, Tin, wan; 
in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; to see, discern; al 
with the bodily eye; a. to be possessed of sight, have 
the power of seeing, opp. to τυφλός : Mt. xii. 22: xiii. 16; 
xy. 31; Jn. ix. 7, 15,19, 25; Acts ix. 9; Ro. xi. 8, 10; 
Rev. iii. 18, ete. (Soph. Oed. Col. 73; Arstph. Plut. 15; 
Xen. mem. 1, 3,4; Ael. v. h. 6, 12, ete. Ex. iv. 11; 
xxiii. 8, ete. Tob. xi. 15). τὸ βλέπειν sight, the power 
of seeing, Lk. vii. 21 (GL TTrWHom. τό). b. to 
perceive by the use of the eyes, to see, look, descry; a. 
absol.: βλεπόντων αὐτῶν while they were looking, Acts i. 
9; [xxii 11 Trmrg. WH mrg.]; ἔρχου καὶ βλέπε, Rec. in 
Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7. β. with ace. of pers. or thing: Mt. 
vii. 3; xi. 4; xxiv. 2; Mk. v. 31; viii. 23sq.; xiii. 2; 
Lk. vi. 41; xxiv. 12[T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; 
Jn.i. 29; Acts iv. 14, ete.; [Rev. xviii. 18 Rec. ὁρῶντες]; 
τὴν φωνήν, him who uttered the voice, Rev. i. 12; ὅραμα, 
Acts xii. 9; he who has free access to one, as princes, 
ministers, and personal friends have to a king, is said 
BX. τὸ πρόσωπόν τινος (oan 29 N85, 2 K. xxv.19; Jer. 
lii. 25; Esth. i. 14); hence in Mt. xviii. 10 angels of 
closest access or of highest rank are referred to (see 
ἀρχάγγελος). Pass. τὰ βλεπόμενα the things that are 
seen: 2 Co. iv. 18; Heb. xi. 3 (1, Τ Tr WH τὸ βλεπόμενον, 
the sum-total or complex of things seen) ; ἐλπὶς βλεπομένη 
hope of things that are seen, i. e. that are present, Ro. 
viii. 24. c. to turn the eyes to anything, to look at, 
look upon, gaze at: γυναῖκα, Mt. v. 28; εἴς τι or τινα [ W. 
§ 33 g.], Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii. 22; Acts ili. 4; els τὸν 
οὐρανόν, Acts i. 11'T Tr WH; in the sense of looking into 
(i. e. in order to read), βιβλίον, Rev. v. 8 sq. ἃ. univ. 
to perceive by the senses, to feel: τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρόν [T WH 
om. icx.], Mt. xiv. 30, (κτύπον δέδορκα, Aeschyl. sept. 104). 
e. to discover by use, to know by experience: τί, Ro. vii. 
23; foll. by ὅτι, 2 Co. vii. 8; by attract. τὸ θηρίον, ὅτι κτλ. 
Rev. xvii. 8; ὑπὲρ ὃ βλέπει pe for ὑπὲρ τοῦτο, ὃ βλέπει με 
ὄντα, lest he think me greater than on personal knowl- 
edge he finds me to be, 2 Co. xii. 6. 2. metaph. to see 
with the mind’s eye; 8. to have (the power of) un- 
derstanding: βλέποντες ov βλέπουσι, though endued with 
understanding they do not understand, Mt. xiii. 13; Lk. 
viii. 10. b. to discern mentally, observe, perceive, dis- 
cover, understand ; absol.: 8v ἐσόπτρου. 1 Co. xiii. 12; of 


103 


Bodw 


the omniscient God βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ seeing in secret, 
where man sees nothing, Mt. vi. 4, 6,18 [here LT Tr 
WH Bi. ev τ. κρυφαίῳ]; ἐγγίζουσαν τὴν ἡμέραν, Heb. x. 
25 (fr. certain external signs); Ἰησοῦν . . . ἐστεφανωμέ- 
νον, we see (from his resurrection and from the effects 
and witness of the Holy Spirit) Jesus crowned, Heb. ii. 
9; foll. by ὅτι, Heb. iii. 19; Jas. ii. 22. ο. to turn the 
thoughts or direct the mind to a thing, to consider, contem- 
plate, look to; absol. βλέπετε take heed: Mk. xiii. 23,33; 
with an ace. of the thing or pers., 1 Co. i. 26; x. 18; 
2Co. x. 7; Phil. iii. 2; Col. 11. 5; foll. by πῶς with indie. 
[W. 300 (282); B. 255 (219)], Lk. viii. 18; 1 Co. iii. 
10; Eph. v. 15; to weigh carefully, examine, foll. by 
interrog. τί with indic. Mk. iv. 24; εἰς πρόσωπόν τινος. 
to look at i. e. have regard to one’s external condition, 
—used of those who are influenced by partiality: Mt. 
xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14. By a use not found in Grk. auth. 
ἑαυτὸν βλέπειν to look to one’s self (i. q. sibi cavere): Mk. 
xili. 9; foll. by ἵνα μή [ef. B. 242 (209)], 2 Jn. 8; βλέ- 
mew ἀπό τινος (i. q. sibi cavere ab aliquo) to beware of one 
[W. 223 (209), ef. 39 (38); B. 242 (209), ef. 323 (278)], 
Mk. viii. 15; xii. 38; look to in the sense of providing, 
taking care: foll. by ἵνα, 1 Co. xvi. 10; foll. by μή with 
subj. aor., Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii.5; Lk. xxi. 8: Acts xiii. 
40; 1 Co. viii. 9 (μήπως); x. 12; Gal. v.15; Heb. xii. 
25; foll. by μή with fut. indie., Col. ii. 8; Heb. iii. 12. 
The Grks. say ὁρᾶν pn, [οἷ. W. 503 (468 sq.); B. 242 sq. 
(209)]. 3. in a geographical sense, like Lat. specto 
[Eng. lool], of places, mountains, buildings, ete., turned 
towards any quarter, as it were facing it: foll. by κατά 
with ace., Acts xxvii. 12 [ef. B. D. Am. ed. 5. v. Phenice], 
(Sept. [Num. xxi. 20]; Ezek. xi. 1; [xliv. 1; xlvii. 1]; 
πρός, Xen. Hell. 7, 1,17; mem. 3, 8, 9; Hdian. 6, 5, 2; 
Diog. Laért. 1, 2, 48; Sept. Ezek. ix. 2; xl. 24; [xlvi. 
1]; εἰς, viii. 3, ete. [for other exx. see Soph. Lex. s. v.]). 
[Syn. see s. v. ὁράω. Comp.: dva-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐμ-, ert, 
mept-, προ-βλέπω.] 

βλητέος, -a, -ov, (βάλλω), which must be thrown or put, 
(see βάλλω, 2); found only in neut.: Mk. ii. 22 (WH 
Tom. Tr br.); Lk. v. 38 βλητέον ἐστί foll. by ace. τὸν 
οἶνον, cf. Matth. § 447, 3a.; [B. 190 (165)]. (Besides 
only in Basil i. p. 137 ο. ed. Benedict.) * 

Boavepyés ([ RG, so Suid. (ed. Gaisf. 751 a.); but] L T 
Tr WH Boammpyés), Boanerges, Hebr. 1) 523 1. 6. sons of 
thunder (as Mark himself explains it), [the name given 
by our Lord to James and John the sons of Zebedee]: 
Mk. iii. 17; 3 pronounced Boa as Noabhyim for Nebhy- 
im; see Lghift. Horae Hebr. ad loc.; wa, in Ps. lv. 15 
a tumultuous crowd, seems in Syriac to have signified 
thunder; so that the name Βοανηργές seems to denote 
fiery and destructive zeal that may be likened to a thun- 
der-storm, and to make reference to the occurrence nar- 
rated in Lk. ix.54. [Cf. Dr. Jas. Morison’s Com. on Mk. 
Le.; Kautzsch, Gram. ἃ. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.]* 

Bodw, -6; fimpf. ἐβόων Acts xxi. 34 Rec.]; 1 aor. 
ἐβόησα; (Bon); fr. Hom. down; in Sept. mostly for 
NIP, ΡΣ τ, pHs fo ery aloud, shout, (Lat. boo) ; 1. to 
raise a cry: of joy, Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); of pain, 


Boés 


Mt. xxvii. 46 Lmrg. Tr WH; Acts viii. 7. 2. to cry 
i. 6. speak with a high, strong voice: Mt. iii. 3, Mk.i. 3, Lk. 
iii. 4, Jn. i. 23, (all fr. Is. xl. 3); Mk. xv. 34; Lk. ix. 38 
(RG ἀναβ.); [xviii. 38]; Acts xvii. 6; xxi. 34 Ree.; 
xxv. 24 (RG ἐπιβ.). 3. πρός τινα to cry to one for 
help, implore his aid: Lk. xviii. 7 [T Tr WI. αὐτῷ; cf. 
W. 212 (199)], (1 S. vii. 8; 1 Chr. v. 20; Tos. vii. 14, 
ete. for Ox p2D- [Comr.: dva-, ἐπι-βοάω. " 

ἰϑυν. Bodo, καλέω, κράζω, κραυγάζω: It is not un- 
instructive to notice that in classic usage καλεῖν denotes 
‘to cry out’ for a purpose, to call; βοᾶν to cry out asa mani- 
festation of feeling; κράζειν to cry out harshly, often of 
an inarticulate and brutish sound; thus καλεῖν suggests in- 
telligence; βοᾶν sensibilities; κράζειν instincts; 
hence, βοᾶν esp.a cry for help. «pavyd¢ew, intensive of 
κράζω, denotes to cry coarsely,in contempt,etc. Cf. Schmidt 
ch. 3.] 


Boés, 6, Mt. i. 5 TWH, for Rec. Bodg, q. v- 

βοή, -ῆς, ἡ, a cry: Jas. v. 4 (of those imploring ven- 
geance). From Hom. down.* 

βοήθεια, -as, ἡ, (see Bonbéw), help: Heb. iv. 16, (often 
in Sept., chiefly for Wy and yyy; in Grk. writ. fr. 
Thuc. and Xen. down); plur. helps: Acts xxvii. 17 
[see Hackett ad loc.; B.D. 5. v. Ship 4; Smith, Voyage 
and Shipwr. of St. Paul, pp. 106 sq. 204 sq.; ef. ὑποζών- 
νυμι]." 

βοη-θέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐβοήθησα ; (fr. βοή ἃ cry and θέω 
to run); in Sept. chiefly for 7133; in Grk. writ. fr. 
[{Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; prop. to run to the ery (of 
those in danger); hence univ. to help, succor, bring aid: 
τινί, Mt. xv. 25; Mk. ix. 22, 24 (βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ, 
“quod fiduciae meae deest bonitate tua supple,” Gro- 
tius); Acts xvi. 9; xxi. 28; 2 Co. vi. 2; Heb. ii. 18; 
Rey. xii. 16.* 

βοηθός, -dv, helping, (νῆες, Hat. 5, 97; στήριγμα, Tob. 
vili. 6); mostly as subst. [so fr. Hdt. down] a helper: 
Heb. xiii. 6 (of God, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 7, as often 
in Sept.).* 

βόθυνος, -ov, 6, a pit, a ditch: Mt. xii. 11; xv. 14; Lk. 
vi. 39. (Solon in Bekker’s Aneed. i. 85; Xen. oec. 19, 
3; Theophr. hist. pl. 4, 2, 2 [(var.); al.]; Sept. 2 5. 
xviii. 17, etc.) * 

Bodh, -7s, ἡ, (βάλλω), a throw: ὡσεὶ λίθου βολήν about 
a stone’s throw, as far as a stone can be cast by the hand, 
Lk. xxii. 41, (ὡσεὶ τόξου βολήν, Gen. xxi. 16; μέχρι λίθου 
x. ἀκοντίου βολῆς, Thuc. 5, 65; ἐξ ἀκοντίου βολῆς, Xen. 
Hell. 4, 5, 15).* 

βολίζω: 1 aor. ἐβόλισα;; (Boris a missile, dart; a line 
and plummet with which mariners sound the depth of 
the sea, a sounding-lead) ; to heave the lead, take sound- 
ings: Acts xxvii. 28. (Besides only in Eustath.; [Mid. 
intrans. to sink in water, Geopon. 6, 177.) * 

βολίς, -i80s, ἡ, (βάλλω), a missile, dart, javelin: Heb. 
xii. 20 Ree. fr. Ex. xix. 13. (Neh. iv. 17; Num. xxiv. 
8; (Sap. v. 22; Hab. iii. 11]; Plut. Demetr. 3.) * 

Boét, 6, (13/3 fleetness [but see B.D. Am. ed.]), Booz, 
[more commonly] Boaz, a kinsman of Ruth, afterwards 
her (second) husband, (Ruth ii. 1 sqq.; 1 Chr. ii. 11): 


104 


βουλὴ 


Mt. i. 5 [Boos L Tr, Βοές TWH]; LK. iii. 82 [L T Tr 
WH Bods ].* 

βόρβορος, -ov, 6, dung, mire: 2 Pet. ii. 22. (Sept.; 
Aeschyl., Arstph., Plat., sqq.; ἐν βορβόρῳ κυλίεσθαι, of 
the vicious, Epict. diss. 4, 11, 29.) * 

βορρᾶς, -a [W. ὃ 8, 1; B. 20 (18)], 6, (equiv. to 
βορέας, -€ov), often [in Attic writ.], in Sept. for }j5¥; 
1. Boreas; the north-north-east wind. 2. the north: 
Lk. xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13, [ef. W. 121 (115) 8. v. pe- 
σημβρία]." 

βόσκω; as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, to feed: Mk. 
y. 14; Lk. xv. 15; ἀρνία, πρόβατα, Jn. xxi. 15, 17, (in a 
fix. dise. portraying the duty of a Christian teacher to 
promote in every way the spiritual welfare of the mem- 
bers of the church); ὁ βόσκων a herdsman: Mt. viii. 33; 
Lk. viii. 84. In Pass. and Mid. [pres. ptep. βοσκόμενος, 
οἵ. W. § 38, 2 note] of flocks or herds, to feed, graze: 
Mt. viii. 30; Mk. v. 11; Lk. viii. 32. (In Sept. for 
myy)° ‘ 

[Syn. βόσκειν, ποιμαίνειν: π΄ is the wider, B. the nar- 
rower term; the former includes oversight, the latter de- 
notes nourishment; π᾿ may be rendered tend, β. specifically 
feed. See Trench ὃ xxv.; Mey. on Jn. ἃ. s.; Schmidt ch, 200.} 

Boo dp, ὁ, (Via a torch, 2 lamp; Sept. Βεώρ, Num. 
xxii. 53 xxxi. 8; Deut. xxiii. 4; by change of } into o, 
Bocop), Bosor, the father of Balaam: 2 Pet. ii. 15 [WH 
txt. Βεώρ." 

βοτάνη, -ης, ἡ, (βόσκω), an herb fit for fodder, green 
herb, growing plant: Heb. vi. 7. (IIom., Pind., Plat., 
Eur., Diod., Ael., al. Sept. for 8274, V3n, Ivy. [Met- 
aph. of men, Ignat. ad Eph. 10, 3; ad Trall. 6,1; ad 
Philad. 3, 1].)* 

βότρυς, -vos, ὁ, a bunch or cluster of grapes: Rev. xiv. 
18 [cf. B. 14 (13)]. (Gen. xl. 10; Num. xiii. 24 sq. 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

βουλευτής, -οὔ, 6, α councillor, senator, (buleuta, Plin. 
epp.): first in Hom. Il. 6, 114; of a member of the 
Sanhedrin, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 50. (Job iii. 14; 
XU Lo) 

βουλεύω: 1. to deliberate, take counsel, resolve, give 
counsel, (Is. xxiii. 8; [fr. Hom. down)). 2. to bea 
councillor or senator, discharge the office of a senator: 
Xen. mem. 1, 1,18; Plat. Gorg. p.473 e.; [al.]. In the 
N. T. Mid., [pres. BovAevouar; impf. ἐβουλευόμην ; fut. 
βουλεύσυμαι, Lk. xiv. 31 Lmrg. TWH; 1 aor. ἐβουλευσά- 
μην]; 1. to deliberate with one’s self, consider: foll. 
by εἰ, Lk. xiv. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 6, 8). 2. to take 
counsel, resolve: foll. by inf. Acts v. 33 [RGT Tr 
mrg.]; xv. 37 [Ree.]; xxvii. 39; ri, 2 Co. i. 17; foll. 
by ἵνα, Jn. xi. 53 LT Trtxt. WH; xii. 10 [ef. W. § 38, 
3]. [Comp.: mapa- (-par), συμ-βουλεύω.] * 

βουλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (βούλομαι), fr. Hom. down; often in 
Sept. for ΤΥ τ counsel, purpose: Lk. xxiii. 51 (where 
distinguished fr. ἡ mpaéis); Acts v. 38; xxvii. 12 (see 
τίθημι. 1a.),42; plur. 1 Co. iv. 5; ἡ βουλὴ τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts 
xiii. 36; esp. of the purpose of God respecting the sal- 
vation of men through Christ: Lk. vii. 30; Acts ii. 23; 
iv. 28; [Heb. vi. 17]; πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ θεοῦ all the 


βούλημα 


contents of the divine plan, Acts xx. 27; ἡ βουλὴ τοῦ 
θελήματος αὐτοῦ the counsel of his will, Eph. i. 11.* 

βούλημα, -ros, τό, (βούλομαι). will, counsel, purpose: 
Acts xxvii. 43; Ro. ix. 19; 1 Pet. iv. 8 (Rec. θελημα). 
(2 Mace. xv. 5; in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.) [Syn. 
cf. θέλω, fin.]* 

βούλομαι, 2 pers. sing. βούλει Lk. xxii. 42 (Attic for 
βούλῃ, cf. W. 8 18, 2 a.; B. 42 (37)); impf. ἐβουλόμην 
(Attic [(cf. Veitch), yet commonly] ἠβουλύμην) ; 1 aor. 
ἐβυυλήθην (Mt. i. 19) and ἠβουλήθην (2 Jn. 12 RG; but 
al. ἐβουλήθ. cf. [WH. App. p. 162]; W.§ 12,1 ο.; B.33 
(29)) ; Sept. for τιν, yan; [fr. Hom. down]; to will, 
wish; and 1. commonly, to will deliberately, have a 
purpose, be minded : foll. by an inf., Mk. xv. 15; Acts v. 
28, 33 (L WH Tr txt. for RG T ἐβουλεύοντο) ; xii. 4; xv. 
37 (L T Tr WH for R ἐβουλεύσατο) ; xviii. 27 ; xix. 30; 
Xxil. 30; xxiii. 28; xxvii. 43; xxviii. 18; 2 Co. i. 15; 
Heb. vi. 17; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 10 (τοὺς βουλομένους se. 
ἐπιδέχεσθαι τοὺς ἀδελφούς) ; Jude 5; Jas. i. 18 (βουληθεὶς 
ἀπεκύησεν ἡμᾶς of his own free will he brought us forth, 
with which will it ill accords to say, as some do, that they 
are tempted to sin by God). with an acc. of the obj. 
τοῦτο, 2 Co. i. 17 (1, T,Tr WH for R βουλευόμενος) ; foll. 
by an ace. with inf. 2 Pet. iii. 9. of the will electing or 
choosing between two or more things, answering to 
the Lat. placet mihi: Mt. i. 19 (cf. ἐνθυμεῖσθαι. 20) ; xi. 
27 [not L mrg.]; Lk. x. 22; xxii.42; Acts xxv. 20; [1 
Co. xii. 11]; Jas. iii.4; iv.4; foll. by the subj. βούλεσθε, 
ὑμῖν ἀπολύσω; is it your will I should release unto you? 
(cf. W. § 41a. 4b.; B. § 139, 2), Jn. xviii. 39. of the 
will prescribing, foll. by an ace. with inf.: Phil. i. 
12 (γινώσκειν ὑμᾶς βούλομαι I would have you know, 
know ye); 1 Tim. ii. 8; v. 14; Tit. iii. 8. 2. of will- 
ing as an affection, to desire: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. vi. 
9 (οἱ βουλόμενοι πλουτεῖν); Acts xvii. 20; xviii. 15; 
ἐβουλόμην (on this use of the impf. see B. 217 (187) sq.; 
[cf. W. 283 (266); Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 137), Acts 
xxv. 22; Philem. 13. On the difference between βούλομαι 
and θέλω, see θέλω, fin.* 

βουνός, -ov, 6, a Cyrenaic word acc. to Hdt. 4, 199, 
which Eustath. [831, 33] on Il. 11, 710 says was used by 
Philemon [Νοθ. 1], a comic poet (of the 3d cent. B. c.). 
It was rejected by the Atticists, but from Polyb. on [who 
(5, 22, 1 sq.) uses it interchangeably with λόφος] it was 
occasionally received by the later Grk. writ. (Strabo, 
Pausan., Plut., al.) ; in Sept. very often for 32; (perh. 
fr. BAQ to ascend [ef. Hesych. βουνοί: βωμοί, and βωμίδες 
in Hdt. 2, 125 (Schmidt ch. 99, 11)]); α hill, eminence, 
mound: Lk. iii. 5 (Is. xl. 4); xxiii. 30 (Hos. x. 8). Cf. 
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 153 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. 
Ρ. 355 sq.; [Donaldson, New Crat. § 469].* 

βοῦς, Bods, ace. sing. βοῦν, [ace. plur. βόας, B. 14 (13)], 
6, ἡ, an or, a cow: Lk. xiii. 15; xiv. 5,19; Jn. ii. 14 sq.; 
1 Co. ix. 9; 1 Tim. v. 18. [From Hom. down.]* 

βραβεῖον, -ov, τό, (βραβεύς the arbiter and director of a 
contest, who awards the prize; called also βραβευτής, 
Lat. designator), the award to the victor in the games, a 
prize, (in eccl. Lat. brabeum, brabium), (Vulg. bravium) : 


105 


βρέχω 


1 Co. ix. 24; metaph. of the heavenly reward for Chris 
tian character, Phil. iii. 14. (Oppian, cyn. 4, 197; 
Lycophr. 1154; ὑπομονῆς Bp. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 5 
[where see Lghtft., Gebh. and Harn.]; ἀφθαρσίας, Mart. 
Polyce. 17.) * - 

βραβεύω ; in Grk. writ. ἔτ. Isoc.and Dem. down; 1. 
to be a βραβεύς or umpire (see βραβεῖον). 42. to decide, 
determine. 3. to direct, control, rule: Col.iii. 15 [where 
see Meyer ; contra, Bp. Lghtft. Comp.: xara-SpaRetw.]* 

Bpadivw; (βραδύς) ; to delay, be slow; 1. rarely 
trans. to render slow, retard: τὴν σωτηρίαν, Sept. Is. xlvi. 
13; pass. ὁδός, Soph. El. 1501 [ef. O. C. 1628]. Mostly 
2. intrans. to be long, to tarry, loiter, (so fr. Aeschyl. 
down): 1 Tim. iii. 15; unusually, with gen. of the thing 
which one delays to effect, 2 Pet. iii. 9 τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 
ΓΑ. V. is not slack concerning his promise] i. 6. to fulfil his 
promise; cf. W.§ 30,6 b. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22.)* 

βραδυπλοέω, -ῶ; (βραδύς and πλοῦς) ; to sail slowly: pres. 
ptep. in Acts xxvii. 7. (Artem. oneir. 4, 30.) * 

βραδύς -cia, -ύ. slow; a. prop.: εἴς τι, Jas. 1.19. Ὁ. 
metaph. dull, inactive, in mind ; stupid, slow to apprehend 
or believe, (so Hom. Il. 10, 226; opp. to συνετός, Polyb. 
4, 8, 7; τὸν νοῦν, Dion. Hal. de Att. oratt.7 [de Lys. 
judic.]; δυσμαθία- βραδυτὴς ἐν μαθήσει, Plat. defin. p. 
415 e.): with a dat. of respect, τῇ καρδίᾳ, Lk. xxiv. 25. 
[S¥YN. see ἀργός, fin.]* 

βραδυτής (on accent cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 417 sq.; 
[Chandler §§ 634, 635; W. 52 sq. (52)]), -ῆτος, ἡ, (Bpa- 
bus), slowness, delay: 2 Pet. iii. 9. (From Hom. down.) * 

βραχίων, -ovos, 6, [fr. Hom. down], the arm: the βρα- 
χίων of God is spoken of Hebraistically for the might, the 
power of God, Lk. i. 51 (cf. Deut. iv. 34; v. 15 ; xxvi. 8) ; 
Jn. xii. 38 (Is. lili. 1); Acts xiii. 17.* 

βραχύς, -εἴα. -v, short, small, little, (fr. Pind., Hdt., Thue. 
down); a. of place; neut. βραχύ adverbially, a short 
distance, a little: Acts xxvii. 28 (2S. xvi. 1; Thue. 1, 63). 
b. of time; βραχύ τι α short time, for a little while: Heb. 
ii. 7, 9, (where the writer transfers to time what the 
Sept. in Ps. vili. 6 says of rank); Acts v. 34 [here 
LT Tr WH om. τι]; μετὰ βραχύ shortly after, Lk. xxii. 58. 
c. of quantity and measure; βραχύ τι [Trtxt. WH 
om. L Tr mrg. br. τι] some little part, a little: ὅτι. vi. 7 
(βραχύ τι τοῦ μέλιτος, 1S. xiv. 29; ἔλαιον βραχύ, Joseph. 
antt. 9, 4, 2; βραχύτατος λιβανωτός, Philo de vict. off. 
§ 4); διὰ βραχέων in few sc. words, briefly, Heb. xiii. 22 
(so [Plat., Dem., al. (ef. Bleek on Heb. 1. c.)] Joseph. 
b. j. 4, 5, 4; ἐν βραχυτάτῳ δηλοῦν to show very briefly, 
Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 15).* 

βρέφος, τους, τό; a. an unborn child, embryo, fetus : 
Lk. i. 41, 44; (Hom. II. 23, 266; Plut. rep. Stoic. 41 
τὸ Bp. ἐν τῇ γαστρί). b. a new-born child, an infant, a 
babe, (so fr. Pind. down): Lk. ii. 12, 16; xviii. 15; Acts 
vii. 19; 1 Pet. ii. 2; ἀπὸ βρέφους from infancy, 2 Tim. 
iii. 15 (so ἐκ βρέφους, Anth. Pal. 9, 567).* 

Bpéxw; 1 aor. ἔβρεξα; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; 1. 
to moisten, wet, water: Lk. vii. 88 (τ. πόδας δάκρυσι, ct. 
Ps. vi. 7), 44. 2. in later writ. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 291 [W. 23]) to water with rain (Polyb. 1€, 12, 3), to 


Bpovtn 


cause to rain, to pour the rain, spoken of God: ἐπί τινα, 
Mt. v. 45; to send down like rain: κύριος ἔβρεξε θεῖον x. 
πῦρ, Gen. xix. 24; χάλαζαν, Ex. ix. 23; [μάννα, Ps. Lxxvii. 
(Ixxviii.) 24]; impers. βρέχει it rains (cf. W. § 58, 9 Ὁ. 
B.): Jas. v. 17; with added ace., πῦρ x. θεῖον, Lk. xvii. 
29 ; with added subject, ὑετός, Rev. xi. 6." 

βροντή, -ἧς, ἡ, thunder: Mk. iii. 17 (on which see 
Boavepyés) ; Jn. xii. 29; Rev. iv. 5; vi. 1; vill. 5; x. 3sq.; 
xi. 19; xiv. 2; xvi. 18; xix.6. [From Hom. down.]* 

βροχή, -ῆς, ἡ. (βρέχω, 4. V-), a later Grk. word (ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 291), a besprinkling, watering, rain: used 
of a heavy shower or violent rainstorm, Mt. vii. 25, 27; 
Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 10; civ. (ev.) 32, for DW." 

βρόχος, -ov, 6, a noose, slip-knot, by which any person 
or thing is caught, or fastened, or suspended, (fr. Hom. 
down) : βρύχον ἐπιβάλλειν τινί to throw a noose upon one, 
a fig. expression borrowed from war [or the chase] (so 
Bp. περιβάλλειν τινί, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 34; Joseph. 
b. j. 7, 7,4), i. e. by eraft or by force to bind one to some 
necessity, to constrain him to obey some command, 1 Co. 
Vii. 35.* 

Bpvypss, -00, ὁ, (βρύχω, 4. v-), a gnashing of teeth: with 
τῶν ὀδόντων added, a phrase denoting the extreme an- 
guish and utter despair of men consigned to eternal 
condemnation, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 42, 50; xxii. 13; xxiv. 
51; xxv. 30; Lk. xiii. 28. (In Sir. li. 3 βρυγμός is at- 
tributed to beasts, which gnash the teeth as they attack 
their prey; in Prov. xix. 12 Sept. for 073 snarling, 
growling; in the sense of biting, Nic. th. 716, to be de- 
rived fr. βρύκω to bite; cf. Fritzsche on Sir. as above, 
p- 308.) * 

βρύχω: [impf. ¢8pvxov]; to grind, gnash, with the 
teeth: ὀδόντας ἐπί twa, Acts vii. 54, (Job xvi. 9; Ps. 
xxxiv. (xxxv.) 16; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 12 for Dw3 PIN 
and 03% PIN; intrans. without ὀδόντας, [Hermipp. ap.] 
Plut. Pericl. 33 fin.; [Hipp. (see L. and S.)]). Of the 
same origin as βρύκω (cf. δέχω and δέκω), to bite, chew ; 
see Hermann on Soph. Philoct. 735; [Ellendt, Lex. 
Soph. 5. v. Bpvxw |.” 

Bevo ; 1. intrans. to abound, gush forth, teem with 
juices, ({akin to βλύω, φλύω ; see Lob. Techn. p. 22 sq.; 
Curtius p. 531], ef. Germ. Brust, Briihe); often so fr. 
Hom. down (Il. 17, 56 ἔρνος ἄνθεϊ βρύει). 2. more 
rarely trans. to send forth abundantly: absol. to teem, ἡ 
γῆ βρύει, Xen. venat. 5, 12; with an acc. of flowers, 
fruits, Χάριτες ῥύδα βρύουσι, Anacr. 44, 2 (37, 2); to send 
forth water, Jas. ili. 11.* 

βρῶμα, -ros, τό, (βρόω i. q. βιβρώσκω), that which is 
eaten, food; (fr. Thue. and Xen. down): 1 Co. viii. 8, 
13; x. 3; Ro. xiv. 15,20; plur.: Mt. xiv. 15; Mk. vii. 19; 
Lk. iii. 11; ix. 13; 1 Co. vi.13; 1 Tim. iv. 3; Heb. xiii. 
9; βρώματα x. πόματα meats and drinks, Heb. ix. 10 (as 
in Plat. legg. 11 p. 932e.; 6 p. 782 a.; Critias p. 115 b.; 
in sing. Xen. Cyr. 5, 2,17). of the soul’s aliment, i. 6. 
either instruction, 1 Co. iii. 2 (as solid food opp. to τὸ 


106 


βωμός 


γάλαν, or that which delights and truly satisfies the mind, 
Jn. iv. 34." 

βρώσιμος, -ov, (βρῶσις), eatable: Lk. xxiv. 41. (Lev. 
xix. 23; Ezek. xlvii.12. Aeschyl. Prom. 479; [Antiatt. 
in Bekker, Anecd. p. 84, 25].) * 

βρῶσις, -ews, ἡ, (βρόω, BiBpackw) ; 1. the act of eat- 
ing, (Tertull. esus): βρῶσις x. πόσις, Ro. xiv. 17 (on 
which see βασιλεία, 3); with gen. of the obj. 1 Co. viii. 
4 (Plat. de rep. 10 p. 619 c. παίδων airod); in a wider 
sense, corrosion: Mt. vi. 19 sq. 2. as almost every- 
where in Grk. writ. that which is eaten, food, aliment: 
Heb. xii. 16; εἰς βρῶσιν for food, 2 Co. ix. 10 (Sap. iv. 
5); βρῶσις καὶ [50 WH txt. Trmrg.; al. ἢ] πόσις, Col. ii. 
16, (Hom. Od. 1, 191; Plat. legg. 6, 783 ο.; Xen. mem. 
1, 3,15; [ef. Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 200 note; per 
contra Mey. or Ellic. on Col. 1. ¢.]). used of the soul’s 
aliment — either that which refreshes it, Jn. iv. 32, or 
nourishes and supports it unto life eternal, Jn. vi. 27, 55." 

βρώσκω, unused pres. whence pf. βέβρωκα; see βι- 
βρώσκω. 

βυθίζω; [pres. pass. βυθίζομαι]; (βυθός, q. v.); to 
plunge into the deep, to sink: ὥστε βυθίζεσθαι αὐτά, of 
ships (as Polyb. 2, 10,5; 16, 3,2; [Aristot., Diod., al.]), 
so that they began to sink, Lk. vy. 7; metaph. τινὰ εἰς dhe 
θρον [A. V. drown], 1 Tim. vi. 9." 

βυθός, -ov, ὁ, the bottom (of a ditch or trench, Xen. oec. 
19,11); the bottom or depth of the sea, often in Grk. writ. 
fr. Aeschyl. Prom. 432 down; the sea itself, the deep sea: 
2 Co. xi. 25, as in Ps. evi. (evii.) 24; so Lat. profundum 
in Lucan, Phars. 2, 680 “ profundi ora videns.” * 

βυρσεύς, -έως, ὁ, (βύρσα a skin stripped off, a hide), a 
tanner: Acts ix. 43; x. 6,52. (Artem. oneir. 4, 56.) 
[Cf. B.D. Am. ed. 5. v. Tanner.] * 

βύσσινος, -7, -ov, (ἡ βύσσος, q. v.; cf. ἀκάνθινος, ἀμα- 
pavrwos), made of fine linen; neut. βύσσινον se. ἱμάτιον 
ΟΥ̓. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)]), (a) fine linen (garment): 
Rev. xviii. 12 (Rec. βύσσου), 16; xix. 8, 14 [WHmrg. 
λευκοβύσσινον (for βύσσινον λευκόν)]. (Gen. xli. 42; 
1 Chr. xv. 27. Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Diod. 1, 85; Plut., 
al) * 

βύσσος, -ov, 7, [ Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v.], byssus, a 
species of Egyptian flax (found also in India and Achaia) 
—or linen made from it—very costly, delicate, soft, 
white, and also of a yellow color, (see respecting it 
Pollux, onomast. 1. 7 ο. 17 § 75): Lk. xvi. 19; Rev. xviii. 
12 Rec. (In Sept. generally for ww, also 713, ef. 1 Chr. 
xv. 27; 2 Chr. v. 12; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Baumwolle; 
[BB.DD. s. vv. Byssus and Linen]. Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 
1 sq-; 3, 7, 2; Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 20 [p. 71 ed. 
Olear.]; on the flax of Achaia growing about Elis, cf. 
Pansan. 5; 5,623) 7, 54. 2). 

βωμός, -οὔ, 6, (see βουνός), an elevated place; very 
freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a raised place on 
which to offer sacrifice, an altar: Acts xvii. 23. (Often 
in Sept. for M317.) * 


107 


TaB Bada 


Ταββαθά [-θά WH], ἡ, indecl., Gabbatha, Chald. 803), 
(Hebr. 33 the back); hence a raised place, an elevation, 
(cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche, Ueber die Verdienste Tholucks 
u.s.w. Ὁ. 102 sq.; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. luth. Theol. 
for 1876, p.605 ; [ Wiinsche, Neue Beitriige u.s.w. p. 560]; 
but see the somewhat diff. opinion of Keim, Jesu von 
Nazara, iii. 865): Jn. xix. 13, where is added the 
rather loose interpretation λιθόστρωτον, i. 6. a stone pave- 
ment, which some interpreters think was a portable 
pavement, or the square blocks such as the Roman gen- 
erals carried with them, to be laid down not only under 
their seats in general, but also under those they occupied 
in administering justice (cf. Suet. Jul. Caes. 46 and 
Casaubon ad loc.). This opinion is opposed by the cir- 
cumstance that John is not accustomed to add a Greek 
interpretation except to the Hebr. names of fixed Jewish 
localities, cf. v. 2; ix. 7; xix. 17; and that this is so in 
the present case is evident from the fact that he has 
said εἰς τόπον; i. 6. in a definite locality which had that 
name. Besides, it cannot be proved that that custom of 
the military commanders was followed also by the gov- 
ernors of provinces residing in cities. Doubtless the 
Chaldaic name was given to the spot from its shape, 
the Greek name from the nature of its pavement. 
Cf. below under λιθόστρωτον; Win. RWB. s. v. Litho- 
stroton; [BB.DD.s. v. Gabbatha; Tholuck, Beitriige 
zur Spracherkliirung u.s.w. p. 119 sqq.].* 

Ταβριήλ, ὁ, (98°23, fr. 722 strong man, hero, and 5x 
God), indecl., Gabriel, one of the angel-princes or chiefs 
of the angels (Dan. viii. 16; ix. 21): Lk. i. 19, 26; see 
ἀρχάγγελος [and reff. 5. v. ἄγγελος, fin-; BB.DD. 5. v.].* 

yayypatva, -ης, 7, (ypdw or ypaivw to gnaw, eat), a gan- 
grene, a disease by which any part of the body suffering 
from inflammation becomes so corrupted that, unless 
a remedy be seasonably applied, the evil continually 
spreads, attacks other parts, and at last eats away the 
bones: 2 Tim. ii. 17 [where ef. Ellic.]. (Medical writ. 
[ef. Wetst. ad 1. c.]; Plut. diser. am. et adulat. c. 36.) * 

T48, ὁ, (13 fortune, cf. Gen. xxx. 11; [xlix. 19; on the 
meaning of the word see B.D. s. v.]), indecl., Gad, the 
seventh son of the patriarch Jacob, by Zilpah, Leah’s 
maid: Rev. vii. 5.* 

Γαδαρηνός, -7, -dv, (fr. the prop. name Tadapa; cf. the 
adj. ᾿Αβιληνή, Maydadnvn), of Gadara, a Gadarene. Gad- 
ara was the capital of Perea (Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 4, 7, 3), 
situated opposite the southern extremity of the Lake 
of Gennesaret to the south-east, but at some distance 
from the lake on the banks of the river Hieromax (Plin. 
h. n. 5, 16), 60 stadia from the city Tiberias (Joseph. 
vita 65), inhabited chiefly by Gentiles (Joseph. antt. 17, 


γαζοφυλάκιον 


11,4); cf. Win. RWB.s.v. Gadara; Riietschi in Herzog 
iv. p. 636 sq.; Kneucker in Schenkel ii. 313 sq.; Riehm, 
HWB. p. 454; [BB.DD. 5. ν.]. χώρα τῶν Γαδαρηνῶν 
the country of the Gadarenes, Godaris: Mk. ν. 1 Ree.; 
Lk. viii. 26 Ree., 37 RG [but here ἡ περίχωρος τῶν Τ΄.], 
and in Mt. viii. 28 TTrWH; but the Mss. differ in 
these pass.; see Γερασηνοί and Tepyeonvoi.* 

γάζα, -ns, ἡ, a Persian word, adopted by the Greeks 
and Latins (Cie. off. 2, 22), the royal treasury, treasure, 
riches, (Curt. 3, 13, 5 pecuniam regiam, quam gazam 
Persae vocant): Acts viii. 27. ([Theophr.], Polyb., 
Diod. 17, 35 and 64; Plut., al. Sept. 2 Esdr. ν. 17; 
vii. 20.) * 

Tata, -ης [B. 17 (15)], ἡ, (Mt 1. e. strong, fortified, 
(cf. Valentia) ; the }) being represented by y, οἵ. 772)" 
Topoppa), formerly a celebrated city of the Philistines, 
situated on a hill near the southern border of the land 
of Israel, between Raphia and Ascalon, twenty stadia 
[‘at the most,’ Arrian.exp. Alex. 2, 26; “seven,” Strabo 
16, 30] from the sea and eleven geographical miles from 
Jerusalem. It was fortified and surrounded by a mas- 
sive wall. Although held by a Persian garrison, Alex- 
ander the Great captured it after a siege of two months, 
but did not destroy it ([Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 4]; Diod. 
17,48; Plut. Alex. 25; Curt. 4,6 sq.). Afterwards, in 
the year B. c. 96, Alexander Jannezus, king of the Jews, 
took it after a year’s siege and destroyed it (Joseph. 
antt. 13, 13, 38). Gabinius rebuilt it B. c. 58 (Joseph. 
l.¢. 14, 5, 3). Finally the emperor Augustus gave it 
[B. c. 30] to Herod the Great (Joseph. 1. ὁ. 15, 7, 3), 
after whose death it was annexed to Syria (Joseph. 1. ec. 
17, 11,4). Modern Ghuzzeh [or Ghazzeh], an unforti- 
fied town, having an area of two English miles, with 
between fifteen and sixteen thousand inhabitants. Men- 
tioned in the N. T. in Acts viii. 26, where the words 
αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος refer to ἡ ὁδός : Philip is bidden to take 
the way which is ἔρημος, solitary; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [W. 
§ 18, 9 N. 3; B. 104 (91)]. <A full history of the city 
is given by Stark, Gaza τι. ἃ. philistiiische Kiiste. Jena, 
1852; a briefer account by Win. RWB. [see also BB. 
DD.] 5. v. Gaza; Arnold in Herzog iv. p. 671 sqq.* 

γαζο-φυλάκιον, -ου, τό, (fr. γάζα. q. ν.. and φυλακή ; hence 
i. 4: θησαυροφυλάκιον, Hesych.), a repository of treasure, 
esp. of public treasure, a treasury: Esth. iii. 9; 1 Esdr. 
viii. 18, 44; 1 Mace. iii. 28. In Sept. used for naw 
and ΓΞ) of apartments constructed in the courts of the 
temple, in which not only the sacred offerings and things 
needful for the temple service were kept, but in which 
also the priests, etc., dwelt: Neh. xiii. 7; x. 37 sqq.; of 
the sacred treasury, in which not only treasure but also 


Τάϊος 


the public records (i Mace. xiv. 49; ef. Grimm ad loc.) 
were stored, and the property of widows and orphans was 
deposited (2 Mace. iii. 10; cf. Grimm ad loc.) : 1 Mace. 
xiv. 49; 2 Mace. iii. 6, 28, 40; iv. 42; v.18. Josephus 
speaks of both γαζοφυλάκεα (plur.) in the women’s court 
of Herod’s temple, Ὁ. 1. 5, 5, 2; 6, 5, 2; and τὸ ya¢op., 
antt. 19, 6,1. Inthe N. T.,in Mk. xii. 41,43; Lk. xxi. 
1; Jn. viii. 20 (ἐν τῷ yao. al, near, the treasury [yet 
ef. W. § 48, a. 1 ¢.]), τὸ γαζ. seems to be used of that re- 
ceptacle mentioned by the Rabbins to which were fitted 
thirteen chests or boxes, NDiW i. e. (rumpets, so called 
from their shape, and into which were put the contribu- 
tions made voluntarily or paid yearly by the Jews for 
the service of the temple and the support of the poor; 
ef. Lightfoot, Morae Hebr. et Talm. p. 536 sq.; Liicke 
[Tholuck, or Godet] on Jn. viii. 20; [B.D. Am. ed.s. v. 
Treasury]. (Strabo 2 p. 319 [i. 6. 7, 6, 1]-)* 

Τάϊος [WH Γαῖος (ef. I, e)], του, 6, Gaius or Caius; the 
name of a Christian 1. of Derbe: Acts xx.4. 2. of 
Macedonia: Acts xix. 29. 3. of Corinth, Paul’s host 
during his [second] sojourn there: Ro. xvi. 23; 1 Co. i. 
14. 4. of an unknown Christian, to whom the third 
Ep. of John was addressed: 3 Jn. vs. 1. [B.D. Am. ed. 
ον. Gaius; Farrar, Early Days of Christianity, ii. 506.) * 

γάλα, -Aaxros [cf. Lat. lac; Curtius § 123], τό, {from 
Hom. down], milk: 1 Co. ix. 7. Metaph. of the less 
difficult truths of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 2; Heb. 
y. 12 sq. (Quintil. 2, 4, 5 “doctoribus hoe esse curae 
yelim, ut teneras adhue mentes more nutricum mollius 
alant et satiari velut quodam jucundioris disciplinae 
lacte patiantur,” [ef. Siegfried, Philo von Alex. p. 329, 
cf. p. 3017); of the word of God, by which souls newly 
regenerate are healthfully nourished unto growth in the 
Christian life, 1 Pet. ii. 2." 

Ταλάτης, -ov, 6, α Galatian, (see Tadaria): Gal. iii. 1. 
(1 Mace. viii. 2; 2 Mace. viii. 20.)* 

Ταλατία, -as, 7, Galatia, Gallogrecia, a region of Asia 
Minor, bounded by Paphlagonia, Pontus, Cappadocia, 
Lyeaonia, Phrygia, and Bithynia. It took its name from 
those Gallic tribes that crossed into Asia Minor B. c. 278, 
and after roaming about there for a time at length set- 
tled down permanently in the above-mentioned region, 
and intermarried with the Greeks. From B.c. 189 on, 
though subject to the Romans, they were governed by 
their own chiefs; but B.c. 24 [4]. 25] their country was 
formally reduced to a Roman province, (ef. Liv. 37, 8; 
38, 16 and 18; Joseph. antt. 16,6; Strabo 12, 5, 1 p. 567; 
Flor. 2, 11 [i. e. 1, 27]): Gal. i. 2; 1 Co. xvi.1; 2 Tim. 
iv.10[T Tr mrg. Γαλλίαν]; 1 Pet.i.1. Cf. Grimm, Ueb. 
ἃ. (keltische) Nationalitiét der kleinasiat. Galater, in 
the Stud. u. Krit. for 1876, p. 199 sqq.; replied to by Κὶ 
Wieseler, Die deutsche Nationalitiit ἃ. kleinas. Galater. 
Giitersl. 1877; [but see Hertzberg in the Stud. u. Krit. 
for 1878, pp. 525-541; Bp. Lghtft. in his Com. on Gal., 
Dissertation i. also Intr. § 17." 

Ταλατικός, -7, -dv, Galatian, belonging to Galatia: Acts 
xvi. 6; xviii. 23.* 

γαλήνη, -ns, ἡ, (adj. 6, ἡ, γαληνός calm, cheerful), calm- 


108 


γαμέω 


ness, stillness of the sea, a calm: Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 39; 
Lk. viii. 24. (From Hom. down.) * 

Ταλιλαία.-ας. ἡ, Galilee, (fr. ay “oan, 2K. xv. 29; by ban, 
ΤΌΝ. KX. 1: ΣΧ ΘΟ» oa y3s 1 K. ix. 11, i. 6. the circle 
or circuit, by which name even before the exile a cer- 
tain district of northern Palestine was designated ; Sept. 
Γαλιλαία) ; the name of ἃ region of northern Palestine, 
bounded on the north by Syria, on the west by Sidon, 
‘Tyre, Ptolemais and their territories and the promontory 
of Carmel, on the south by Samaria and on the east by 
the Jordan. It was dividedinto Upper Galilee (extend- 
ing from the borders of Tyre and Sidon to the sources of 
the Jordan), and Lower Galilee (which, lower and more 
level, embraced the lands of the tribes of Issachar and 
Zebulun and the part of Naphtali bordering on the Sea of 
Galilee): ἡ ἄνω καὶ ἡ κάτω Γαλιλαία (Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 3, 3, 1, 
where its boundaries are given). It was a very fertile 
region, populous, having 204 towns and villages (Joseph. 
vit. 45), and inasmuch as it had, esp. in the upper part, 
many Gentiles among its inhabitants (Judg. i. 30-33; 
Strabo 16, 54 p. 760), it was called, Mt. iv. 15, Γαλιλαία 
τῶν ἐθνῶν (Is. viii. 23 (ix. 1)), and, 1 Mace. v. 15, Γαλιλαία 
ἀλλοφύλων. Often mentioned in the Gospels, and three 
times in the Acts, viz. ix. 31; x. 37; xiii. 31. [Cf. Mer- 
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, Boston 1881.] 

Ταλιλαῖος, -aia, -αἴον, Galilean, a native of Galilee: Mt. 
xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 70; Lk. xiii. 1 sq.; xxii. 595 xxiii. 65 
dn. ive45 Acts 1 11} τῶΨι 7) ν. δ." 

Ταλλία, -as, ἡ, Gallia: 2 Tim. iv. 10 T Tr mrg., by 
which is to be understood Galatia in Asia Minor or Γαλ- 
Na ἡ ἐῴα, App. b. civ. 2,49. [See esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. 
on Gal. pp. 8, 31 (Am. ed. pp. 11, 37).]* 

Γαλλίων, -wvos, 6, Gallio, proconsul of Achaia, elder 
brother of L. Annaeus Seneca the philosopher. His 
original name was Marcus Annucus Novatus, but after 
his adoption into the family of Junius Gallio the rheto- 
rician, he was called Gallio: Acts xviii. 12,14, 17. [Cf. 
B.D. Am. ed.; Farrar, St. Paul, i. 566 sq.]* 

Ταμαλιήλ, ὁ, Orweona recompense of God [God the 
avenger, Fiirst]; Num. i. 10; ii. 20), indecl., Gamaliel 
(distinguished by the Jews from his grandson of the 
same name by the title p17, the elder), a Pharisee and 
doctor of the law, son of R. Simeon, grandson of Tillel, 
and teacher of the apostle Paul. 116 is said to have had 
very great influence in the Sanhedrin, and to have died 
eighteen years before the destruction of Jerusalem. A 
man of permanent renown among the Jews: Acts v. 34; 
xxii. 3. Cf. Grdlz, Gesch. d. Juden, iii. p. 289 sqq.; 
Schenkel, BL. ii. p. 328 sqq-; [esp. Alex.’s Kitto 8. v. 
Gamaliel I. (cf. Farrar, St. Paul, i. 44 and exe. v.)].* 

γαμέω, -@; impf. ἐγάμουν (Lk. xvii. 27); 1 aor. ἔγημα 
(the classic form, [Mt. xxii. 25 L T Tr WII]; Lk. xiv. 
20; 1 Co. vii. 28" RG, 385) and ἐγάμησα (the later form, 
Mt. v. 32; [xxii 25 RG]; Mk. vi.17; x. 11; 1 Co. vii. 
9, [28° L T Tr WH], 33); pf. γεγάμηκα; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐγαμήθην ; (cf. W. 84 (80) ; B. 55 (48); Bitm. Ausf. Spr. 
ii. 134; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 742; [Veitch s. v.]); 1. 
used of the man, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, fo lead 


γαμίζω 


in marriage, take to wife; a. with the addition οὗ γυναῖκα 
or other ace.: Mt. v. 32 [here WH br. the cl.]; xix. 9; 
Mk. vi. 17; x.11; Lk. xiv. 20; xvi. 18. b. without a 
case, absol. to get married, to marry, [cf. B. 145 (127)]: 
Mt. xix. 10; xxii. 25, 30; xxiv. 38; Mk. xii. 25; Lk. xvii. 
27; xx. 34 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 28, 33; (Ael. v. h. 4, 1; of yeya- 
μηκότες, Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4; opp. to ἄγαμοι, Xen. symp. 
9,7). Pass. and Mid. γαμέομαί τινι, of women [ Lat. nu- 
bere alicui, cf. B. § 133, 8], to give one’s self in marriage 
[W. § 38, 3]: 1 aor. pass., Mk. x. 12 (where L T Tr WH 
γαμήσῃ ἄλλον for RG γαμηθῇ ἄλλῳ) ; 1 Co. vii. 39. PA, 
contrary to Grk. usage, the Act. γαμεῖν is used of women, 
to give one’s self in marriage; and a. with the ace.: 
Mk. x. 12 L T Tr WH (see above); b. absol.: 1 Co. 
vii. 28, 34 (ἡ γαμήσασα, opp. to ἡ ἄγαμος) ; 1 Tim. v. 11, 
14, 3. absol. of both sexes: 1 Tim. iv. 3; 1 Co. vii. 
9 sq. 36 (γαμείτωσαν, sc. the virgin and he who seeks her 
to wife). In the O. T. γαμεῖν occurs only in 2 Mace. 
xiv. 25.* 

γαμίζω; [Pass., pres. γαμίζομαι; impf. ἐγαμιζόμην] ; 
(γάμος) ; to give a daughter in marriage: 1 Co. vii. 38* 
[L T Tr WH, 38°] GL T Tr WH; Pass.: Mt. xxii. 30 
LT Tr WH; [xxiv. 88 TWH]; Mk. xii. 25; Lk. xvii. 
27; xx. 35 [WH mrg. γαμίσκονται]. (The word is men- 
tioned in Apoll. de constr. 3, 31 p. 280, 10 ed. Bekk.) 
[Comp.: ἐκ-γαμίζω.} * 

γαμίσκω, i. 4. γαμίζω, q. v.[Mt. xxiv. 38 Lchm.]; Pass. 
[pres. γαμίσκομαι] ; Mk. xii. 25 RG; Lk. xx. 34 L T Tr 
WH, [35 WH mrg.; cf. W. 92 (88); and Tdf.’s note 
on Mt. xxii. 30]. (Aristot. pol. 7, 14,4 ete.) [Comp.: 
ἐκ-γαμίσκω. * 

γάμος, -ov, ὁ, [prob. fr. τ. gam to bind, unite; Curtius 
p- 546 sq.], asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom.down; Ἁ1. a wed- 
ding or marriage-festival: Jn. ii. 1 sq.; Rev. xix. 7 (un- 
der the figure of a marriage here is represented the inti- 
mate and everlasting union of Christ, at his return from 
heaven, with his church) ; τὸ δεῖπνον τοῦ γάμου, ibid. 9 (a 
symbol of the future blessings of the Messiah’s kingdom) ; 
esp. a wedding-banquet, a marriage-feast: Mt. xxii. 8, 10 
[here T WH Tr mrg. νυμφών], 11, 12; plur. (referring 
apparently to the several acts of feasting), Mt. xxii. 2 
sqq: 9; xxv. 10; Lk. xii. 36; xiv. 8, (cf. W. ὃ 27, 3; B. 
23 (21)). 2. marriage, matrimony: Heb. xiii. 4.* 

γάρ, a conjunction, which ace. to its composition, γέ 
and dpa (i. 4. ἄρ), is properly a particle of affirma- 
tion and conclusion, denoting truly therefore, verily 
as the case stands, “ the thing is first aflirmed by the par- 
ticle yé, and then is referred to what precedes by the 
force of the particle dpa” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p. 
232; οἵ. Kiihner ii. p. 724; [Jelf § 786; W. 445 (415) 
sq-]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently 
the reason and nature of something previously men- 
tioned are set forth, it comes to pass that, by the use 
of this particle, either the reason and cause of a forego- 
ing statement is added, whence arises the causal or 
argumentative force of the particle, for (Lat. nam, 
enim; Germ. denn) ; or some previous declaration is ex- 
plained, whence γάρ takes on an ex plicative force: 


109 


YP 
Sor, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet, Germ. ndmilich). 
Thus the force of the particle is either conclusive, 
or demonstrative, or explicative and declara- 
tory; cf. Rost in Passow’s Lex. i. p. 535 sqq.; Kiihner 
li. pp. 724 sqq. 852 sqq.; [ef. L. andS.s. v.]. The use 
of the particle in the N. T. does not differ from that in 
the classics. 

I. Its primary and original Conclusive force is 
seen in questions (in Grk. writ. also in exclamations) and 
answers expressed with emotion; where, acc. to the con- 
nexion, it may be freely represented by assuredly, verily, 
forsooth, why, then, ete. : ἐν yap τούτῳ ete. ye profess not 
to know whence he is; herein then is assuredly a mar- 
vellous thing, why, herein etc. Jn. ix. 30; ob yap, ἀλλὰ 
etc. by no means in this state of things, nay verily, but 
ete. Acts xvi. 37; certainly, if that is the case, 1 Co. viii. 
11 LT Tr WH. It is joined to interrogative particles 
and pronouns: μὴ yap ete. Jn. vii. 41 (do ye then sup- 
pose that the Christ comes out of Galilee? What, doth 
the Christ, ete.?); μὴ yap -..ovx, 1 Co. xi. 22 (what! 
since ye are so eager to eat and drink, have ye nol, ete.?) ; 
tis yap, τί γάρ: Mt. xxvii. 23 (τί yap κακὸν ἐποίησεν, ye 
demand that he be crucified like a malefactor, Why, what 
evil hath he done?); Mt. ix. 5 (your thoughts are evil; 
which then do ye suppose to be the easier, etc. ?) ;Mt. xvi. 
26; xxiii. 17,19; Lk. ix. 25; Acts xix. 35; ri yap; for ri 
γάρ ἐστι, what then ? i.e. what, under these circumstances, 
ought to be the conclusion? Phil. i. 18 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; 
πῶς yap, Acts viii. 31; cf. Klotz |. c. p. 245 sqq.; Kiihner 
ii. p. 726; [Jelf ii. p. 608]; W. 447 (416). Here belongs 
also the vexed passage LK. xviii. 14 ἢ yap ἐκεῖνος (so GT 
Tr mrg., but L WH Tr txt. wap’ ἐκεῖνον) or do ye sup- 
pose then that that man went down approved of God? 
cf. W. 241 (226). 

II. It adduces the Cause or gives the Reason of 
a preceding statement or opinion ; 1. univ.: Mt. ii. 
δ: vas 24 ΜῈ τον ax. 8... Moker eae 18: σαὶ Alone ers 
25; Acts ii. 25; Ro.i. 9,11; 1 Co. xi.5; Heb.ii. 8; 1 Jn. 
ii. 19; Rev. i. 3, and very often. In Jn. iv. 44 yap 
assigns the reason why now at length Jesus betook him- 
self into Galilee; for the authority denied to a prophet 
in his own country (Galilee), he had previously to seek 
and obtain among strangers; cf. 45; Meyer [yet see ed. 
6 (Weiss)] ad loc.; Strauss, Leben Jesu, i. 725 ed. 3; 
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 385 sq. ed. 1 [Am. trans. pp. 
100, 168]; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl. Wissensch. x. p. 108 
566. 2. Often the sentences are connected in such a 
way that either some particular statement is established 
by a general proposition (‘the particular by the uni- 
versal’), as in Mt. vii. 8 ; xiii. 12; xxii. 14; Mk. iv. 22, 
253; Jn. iii. 20; 1 Co. xii. 12; Heb. v. 13, etc.; or what 
has ‘been stated generally, is proved to be correctly 
stated by a particular instance (‘the universal by the 
particular’): Mk. vii. 10; Lk. xii. 52,58; Ro. vii. 2; 1 
Co. i. 26; xii. 8. 3. To sentences in which some- 
thing is commanded or forbidden, yap annexes the rea- 
son why the thing must either be done or avoided: Mt. 
i. 20 sq.; ii. 20; iii. 9; vii. 2; Ro. xiii. 11; Col. iii. 3; 


γάρ 


1 Th. iv. 3; Heb. ii. 2, and very often. In Phil. ii. 13 
yap connects the verse with vs. 12 thus: work out your 
salvation with most intense earnestness, for nothing 
short of this accords with God’s saving efficiency within 
your souls, to whom you owe both the good desire and 
the power to execute that desire. 4. To questions, 
yap annexes the reason why the question is asked: Mt. 
ii. 2 (we ask this with good reason, for we have seen 
the star which announces his birth); Mt. xxii. 28; Ro. 
xiv. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Gal. i. 10. 5. Frequently the 
statement which contains the cause is interrogative; ris, 
tiydp: Lk. xxii. 27; Ro. iv. 3; xi. 34; 1 Co.ii. 16; vii. 
16; Heb.i.5; xii. 7; τί yap for τί γάρ ἐστι, Ro. iii. 3 (ef. 
Fritzsche ad loc.; [Ellic. on Phil. i. 18]); ἵνα τί γάρ, 1 
Co. x. 29; ποία yap, Jas. iv. 14 [WH txt. om. Tr br. yap]. 
6. Sometimes in answers it is so used to make good the 
substance of a preceding question that it can be ren- 
dered yea, assuredly: 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Th. ii. 20; cf. 
Kuhner ii. p. 724. 7. Sometimes it confirms, not a sin- 
gle statement, but the point of an entire discussion: Ro. 
ii. 25 (it is no advantage to a wicked Jew, for ete.). On 
the other hand, it may so confirm but a single thought 
as to involve the force of asseveration and be rendered 
assuredly, yea: Ro. xv. 27 (εὐδόκησαν yap); so also καὶ 
yap, Phil. ii. 27. 8. It is often said that the sentence 
of which yap introduces the cause, or renders the reason, 
is not expressed, but must be gathered from the con- 
text and supplied in thought. But that this ellipsis 
is wholly imaginary is clearly shown by Klotz ad Devar. 
ii. 1 p. 236 sq., ef. W. 446 (415) sq. The particle is 
everywhere used in reference to something expressly 
stated. Suflice it to append a very few examples; the 
true nature of many others is shown under the remain- 
ing heads of this article: In Mt. v. 12 before yap some 
supply ‘nor does this happen to you alone’; but the rea- 
son is added why a great reward in heaven is reserved 
for those who suffer persecution, which reason consists 
in this, that the prophets also suffered persecution, and 
that their reward is great no one can doubt. In Ro. viii. 
18 some have supplied ‘do not shrink from this suffer- 
ing with Christ’; but on the use of yap here, see III. a. 
below. On Mk. vii. 28 [T Tr WH om. L br. yap], 
where before καὶ yap some supply ‘but help me,’ or ‘ yet 
we do not suffer even the dogs to perish with hunger,’ 
‘see 10 b. below. In Acts ix. 11 before yap many supply 
‘he will listen to thee’; but it introduces the reason for 
the precedingcommand. 9. When in successive state- 
ments ydp is repeated twice or thrice, or even four or five 
times, either a. one and the same thought is confirmed 
by as many arguments, each having its own force, as there 
are repetitions of the particle [Mey. denies the codrdi- 
nate use of yap in the N.T., asserting that the first is 
argumentative, the second ex plicative, see his Comm. 
on the pass. to follow, also on Ro. viii. 6]: Mt. vi. 32; Ro. 
xvi. 18 sq.; or b. every succeeding statement contains 
the reason for its immediate predecessor, so that the state- 
ments are subordinate one to another: Mk. vi. 52; Mt. 
xvi. 25-27; Jn. 111. 19sq.; v.21sq.; Acts ii. 15; Ro. iv. 


110 


γέ 


13-15 ; viii. 3 sq. 5 sq.; 1 Co. iii. 8 sq.; ix. 15-17 (where 
five times in GL T Tr WH); 1 Co. xvi. 7; Jas. ii. 10, 
etc.; or c. it is repeated in a different sense: Mk. ix. 
39-41; Ro. v. 6 sq. (where ef. W. 453 (422)); x. 2-5 
(four times) ; Jas. iv. 14 [WH txt. om. Tr br. the first yap, 
LWHnrg. om. the second]. 10. καὶ γάρ (on which cf. 
Kihner ii. p. 854 sq.; W.448 (417); [Ellic. on 2 Thess. 
iii. 10]) is a. for, and truly, (elenim, namque, [the sim- 
ple rendering for is regarded as inexact by many; cf. 
Mey. on 2 Co. xiii. 4 and see Hartung, Partikeln, i137 sq.; 
Kriiger § 69, 32, 21]): Mk. xiv. 70; Lk. xxii. 37 [L Tr 
br. yap]; 1 Co. v. 7; xi. 9; xii. 13. Ὁ. for also, for even, 
(nam etiam): Mt. viii. 9; Mk. x. 45; Lk. vi. 32; Jn. iv. 
45; 1 Co. xii. 14, ete. In Mk. vii. 28 καὶ yap [RG L br.] 
τὰ κυνάρια ete. the woman, by adducing an example, con- 
firms what Christ had said, but the example is of such a 
sort as also to prove that her request ought to be granted. 
τὲ yap for indeed (Germ. denn ja): Ro. vii. 7; ef. Fritz- 
sche ad loc.; W. 448 (417). ἰδοὺ yap, see under ἰδού. 

III. It serves to explain, make clear, illus- 
trate, a preceding thought or word: for i. q. that is, 
namely ; a. so that it begins an exposition of the 
thing just announced [cf. W. 454 (423) sq.]: Mt. i. 18 
[RG]; xix.12; Lk. xi. 30; xviii. 32. In Ro. viii. 18 yap 
introduces a statement setting forth the nature of the 
συνδοξασθῆναι just mentioned. Ὄ. so that the explana- 
tion is intercalated into the discourse, or even added by 
way of appendix: Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16; ii. 15; v. 42; 
Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. xvi. 5. In Mk. xvi. 4 the information 
ἦν yap μέγας σφόδρα is added to throw light on all that 
has been previously said (in vs. 3 sq.) about the stone. 

Iv. As respects Position: yap never occupies the 
first place in a sentence, but the second, or third, or even 
the fourth (ὁ τοῦ θεοῦ yap vids, 2 Co. i. 19 —ace. to true 
text). Moreover, ‘not the number but the nature 
of the word after which it stands is the point to be no- 
ticed,” Hermann on Soph. Phil. 1437. 

γαστήρ, -pds (poet. -épos), 7, in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. 
down ; in Sept. for 103; 1. the belly; by meton. of 
the whole for a part, 2. Lat. uterus, the womb: ἐν ya- 
στρὶ ἔχειν to be with child [see ἔχω, I. 1 b.]: Mt. i. 18, 23; 
xxiv. 19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23; 1 Th.v. 3; Rev. xii. 
2; (in Sept. for 777, Gen. xvi. 4 sq.; xxxviii. 25; Is. 
vii. 14, οἷο. ; Hdt. 3, 32 and vit. Hom. 2; Artem. oneir. 
2,18 p. 105; 3, 32 p.177; Pausan., Hdian., al.); ovA- 
λαμβάνεσθαι ἐν γαστρί to conceive, become pregnant, Lk. 
1. 81. 3. the stomach; by synecdoche a glutton, gor- 
mandizer, aman who is as it were all stomach, Hes. theog. 
26 (so also yaorpis, Arstph. av. 1604; Ael. v. h. 1, 28; and 
Lat. venter in Lucil. sat. 2, 24 ed. Gerl. ‘ vivite ventres’) : 
γαστέρες dpyai, Tit. i. 12; see ἀργός, Ὁ." 

γέ, an enclitic particle, answering exactly to no one 
word in Lat. or Eng.; used by the bibl. writ. much more 
rarely than by Grk. writ. How the Greeks use it, is 
shown by (among others) Hermann ad Vig. p. 822 sqq.: 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 272 sqq.; Rost in Passow’s Lex. 
i. p. 538 sqq.; [L. and S.s.v.; 7. S. vans in Journ. 
of class. and saer. Philol. for 1857, p. 187 sqq.]. It indi- 


γέ abt 


eates that the meaning of the word to which it belongs 
has especial prominence, and therefore that that word 
is to be distinguished from the rest of the sentence and 
uttered with greater emphasis. This distinction “ can 
be made in two ways, by mentioning either the least 
important or the most; thus it happens that yé seems 
to have contrary significations: at least and even” (Her- 
mann I. c. p. 822). 1. where what is least is indi- 
cated; indeed, truly, at least: διά ye τὴν ἀναίδειαν, Lk. xi. 
8 (where, since the force of the statement lies in the 
substantive not in the preposition, the Greek should have 
read διὰ τήν ye avaid., cf. Klotz 1. ο. p. 327; Rost Ι. 6. p. 
542; [L.and 8. 5. v. IV.]); διά ye τὸ παρέχειν μοι κόπον, at 
least for this reason, that she troubleth me [A. V. yet 
because ete.], Lk. xviii. 5 (better Greek διὰ τό ye ete.). 
2. where what is most or greatest is indicated ; even: 
ὅς ye the very one who ete., precisely he who ete. (Germ. 
der es ja ist, welcher ete.), Ro. viii. 32; ef. Klotz 1. e. p. 
305; Matthiae, Lex. Euripid. i. p. 613 sq. 3. joined 
to other particles it strengthens their force; a. ἀλλά ye 
[so most edd.] or ἀλλάγε [Grsb.] (cf. W. § 5, 2): Lk. 
xxiv. 21; 1 Co. ix. 2; see ἀλλά, 1.10. b. dpa ye or dpaye, 
see dpa,4. ἄρά ye, see dpa,1. c. etye[soGT, but L Tr 
WH εἴ γε: cf. W.u.s.; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 123], 
foll. by the indie. if indeed, seeing that, “of a thing be- 
lieved to be correctly assumed” (Herm. ad Vig. p. 831; 
ef. Fritzsche, Praeliminarien u.s.w. p. 67 sqq.; Anger, 
Laodicenerbrief, p. 46; [W.448 (417 sq.). Others hold 
that Hermann’s statement does not apply to the N. T. 
instances. Acc. to Meyer (see notes on 2 Co. ν. 3; Eph. 
iii. 2; Gal. iii. 4) the certainty of the assumption resides 
not in the particle but in the context; so Ellicott (on Gal. 
l.c., Eph. 1.c.); cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. ο.; Col. i. 23. Her- 
mann’s canon, though assented to by Bornemann (Cyrop. 
2, 2, 3 p. 132), Stallbaum (Meno p. 36), al., is qualified 
by Béumlein (Partikeln, p. 64 sq.), who holds that γέ 
often has no other effect than to emphasize the condition 
expressed by ei; οἵ. also Winer ed. Moulton p. 5011), if, 
that is to say; on the assumption that, (see εἴπερ s. v. εἰ, III. 


13): Eph. iii. 2; iv. 21; Col. i. 23; with καί added, if 


that also, if it be indeed, (Germ. wenn denn auch): εἴγε 
[L Tr WH mre. εἴ περ] καὶ ἐνδυσάμενοι, οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθ. 
if indeed we shall be found actually clothed (with a new 
body), not naked, 2 Co. v. 3 (ef. Meyer ad loc.) ; εἴγε καὶ 
εἰκῆ SC. τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε, if indeed, as I believe, ye have 
experienced such benefits in vain, and have not already 
received harm from your inclination to Judaism, Gal. iii. 
4 [yet οἵ. Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft., al. ad loc.]. ἃ. εἰ dé 
μῆγε Lor εἰ δὲ μή ye Lehm. Treg.] (also in Plat., Arstph., 
Plut., al. ; ef. Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue. p. 95; Klotz ad 
Devar. ii. 2 p. 527), stronger than εἰ δὲ μή [B. 393 (336 
sq-); ef. W. 583 (543); 605 (563) ; Mey. on 2 Cor. xi. 16], 
a. after affirmative sentences, but unless perchance, but 
if not: Mt. vi. 1; Lk. x. 6; xiii. 9. β. after negative sen- 
tences, otherwise, else, in the contrary event: Mt. ix. 17; 
Lk. v. 36 sq.; xiv. 32; 2Co.xi.16. 6. καίγε [so GT, 
but L Tr WH καί ye; cf. reff. under εἴγε above], (cf. 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 319; [W.438 (408)]), a. and at 


Γεθσημανῆ 


least: Lk. xix. 42 [Tr txt. WH om. LL Trmrg. Ὀγ.1. β. 
and truly, yea indeed, yea and: Acts ii. 18; xvii. 27 LT 
Tr WH. f. καίτοιγε [so GT WH, but 1, καίτοι ye, Tr 
καί τοι ye; cf. reff. under c. above. Cf. Klotz ad Devar. 
ii. 2 p. 654; W. 444 (413)], although indeed, and yet 
indeed: Jn. iv. 2; also in Acts xiv. 17 [RG]; xvii. 27 
Ree. 6. μενοῦνγε see in its place. h. μήτιγε; see μήτι, 
[and in its place].* 

Γεδεών, ὁ, indecl. [in the Bible (ef. B. p. 15 (14)), and 
in Suidas (6. g. 1737 a.) ; but] in Joseph. antt. 5, 6, [3 and] 
4 Τεδεών, -dvos, (1}} 2 cutting off, [al. tree-feller i. e. 
mighty warrior], fr. 33), Gideon, a leader of the Israel- 
ites, who delivered them from the power of the Midianites 
(Judg. vi—viii.) : Heb. xi. 32 [where A. V. unfortunately 
follows the Grk. spelling Ge deon].* 

γέεννα [al. would accent yeévva, deriving it through the 
Chaldee. In Mk. ix. 45 Rec." yéeva], -ys [B. 17 (15)], 
ἡ, (fr. DI 5, Neh. xi. 30; more fully 037-;3 δ 52, Josh. 
xv. 8; xviii. 16; 2 Chr. xxviii. 3; Jer. vii. 32; 037733 73, 
2K. xxiii. 10 K’thibh; Chald. Ὁ) 112, the valley of the 
son of lamentation, or of the sons of lamentation, the 
valley of lamentation, 039 being used for 07) lamenta- 
tion; see Hiller, Onomasticum; ef. Hitzig [and Graf] on 
Jer. vii. 31; [Béttcher, De Inferis, i. p. 82 sqq.]; ace. to 
the com. opinion 037 is the name of a man), Gehenna, 
the name of a valley on the S. and E. of Jerusalem [yet 
apparently beginning on the W., ef. Josh. xv. 8; Pressel 
in Herzog s. v.], which was so called from the cries of 
the little children who were thrown into the fiery arms 
of Moloch [q.v.], i. 6. of an idol having the form of a 
bull. The Jews so abhorred the place after these horri- 
ble sacrifices had been abolished by king Josiah (2 K. 
xxiii. 10), that they cast into it not only all manner of 
refuse, but even the dead bodies of animals and of un- 
buried criminals who had been executed. And since 
fires were always needed to consume the dead bodies, 
that the air might not become tainted by their putrefac- 
tion, it came to pass that the place was called γέεννα τοῦ 
πυρός [this common explanation of the descriptive gen. 
tov πυρός is found in Rabbi David Kimchi (fl. ¢. a. p. 
1200) on Ps. xxvii. 13. Some suppose the gen. to refer 
not to purifying fires but to the fires of Molech; others 
regard it as the natural symbol of penalty (cf. Lev. x. 2; 
Num. xvi. 35; 2 K.i.; Ps. xi. 6; also Mt. iii. 11; xiii. 42; 
2 Th. i. 8, etc.). See Béttcher,u.s. p. 84; Mey., (Thol.,) 
Wetst. on Mt. v. 22]; and then this name was transferred 
to that place in Hades where the wicked after death will 
suffer punishment: Mt. v. 22, 29 sq.; x. 28; Lk. xii. 5; 
Mk. ix. 43, 45; Jas. iii. 6; γέεννα τοῦ πυρός, Mt. v. 22; 
xviii. 9; Mk. ix.47[RGTrmrg. br.]; κρίσις τῆς γεέννης, 
Mt. xxiii. 33; υἱὸς τῆς γεέννης, worthy of punishment in 
Gehenna, Mt. xxiii. 156. Further, οἵ. Dillmann, Buch 
Henoch, 27, 1 sq. p. 131 sq.; [B. Ὁ. Am. ed.; Béticher, 
τι. s. p. 80 sqq.; Hamburger, Real-Encycl., Abth. τ. s. v. 
Holle; Bartlett, Life and Death eternal, App. H.].* 

Τεθσημανῆ, or Τεθσημανεί (T WH), or Τεθσημανεῖ (1, 
Tr); [on the accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; W. 
§6,1m.; indecl. B. 15 (14)], (fr. Na press, and δ) οὔτ), 


γείτων 


Gethsemane, the name of ἃ ‘ place’ (χωρίον [an enclosure 
or landed property]) at the foot of the Mount of Olives, 
beyond the torrent Kidron: Mt. xxvi. 36; Mk. xiv. 32. 
[B. Ὁ. Am. ed. 8. v.]* 

γείτων, -ovos, 6, ἡ, [fr. γῆ, hence originally ‘of the same 
land,’ οἵ. Curtius § 132], fr. Hom. down, a neighbor: Lk. 
xiv. 12; xv. 6, 9; Jn. ix. 8.* 

γελάω, -ὦ ; fut. γελάσω (in Grk. writ. more com. γελάσο- 
pat[ B. 53 (46); W.84 (80) ]); [fr. Hom. down]; to laugh: 
Lk. vi. 21 (opp. to κλαίω), 25. [Comp.: κατα-γελάω.} " 

γέλως, -wros, ὁ, laughter: Jas.iv.9. [From Hom. down. ]* 

γεμίζω : 1 aor. ἐγέμισα;; Pass., [pres. γεμίζομαι] ; 1 aor. 
ἐγεμίσθην; (γέμω, 4. v-); lo fill, fill full; a. absol. in 
pass.: Mk. iv. 37; Lk. xiv. 23. b. τί τινος, to fill a thing 
full of something : Mk. xv. 36; Jn. ii. 7; vi. 13; Rev. xv. 
8, (Aeschyl. Ag. 443; al.); ri ἀπό τινος, of that which 
is used for filling, Lk. xv. 16 [not WH Trmrg.]; also in 
the same sense τὶ ἔκ τινος, Rev. viii. 5; [ef. Lk. xv. 16 in 
WH mrg.], (19 xn, Ex. xvi. 32; Jer. li. 34, ete. [cf. 
W. § 30, 8b.; B. 163 (143)]).* 

γέμω, defect. verb, used only in pres. and impf., [in 
N.T. only in pres. indice. and ptep.]; fo be full, filled full; 
a. τινός (as generally in Grk. writ.) : Mt. xxiii. 25 Lehm., 
27; Lk. xi. 39; Ro. iii. 14 (fr. Ps. ix. 28 (x.7)) ; Rev. iv. 
6,8; v.8; xv. 7; xvii. 3 R G (see below), 4; xxi. 9. b. 
ἔκ τινος : Mt. xxiii. 25 (γέμουσιν ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς [Lom. Tr br. 
ἐξ] their contents are derived from plunder; see γεμίζω, 
b. [and reff. there]). ο. Hebraistically (see πληρόω, 1 
{ef. B.164 (143); W. § 30, 8 b.]), with ace. of the mate- 
rial, γέμοντα [ Treg. γέμον τὰ] ὀνόματα βλασφημίας, Rev. 
xvii. 8 [L T Tr WH (see above and οἵ. Β. 80 (70))].* 

γενεά, -Gs, ἡ, (TENQ, γίνομαι [cf. Curtius p.610]) ; Sept. 
often for 7; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 1. abe- 
getting, birth, nativity: Hdt. 3, 33 ; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 8, ete. ; 
{others make the collective sense the primary signif., 
see Curtius u. s.]. 2. passively, that which has been 
begotten, men of the same stock, a family; a. prop. as 
early as Hom.; equiv. to nmnawn, Gen. xxxi. 3, ete.; 
σώζειν Ραχάβην κ' τὴν γενεὰν αὐτῆς, Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 5. 
the several ranks in a natural descent, the successive mem- 
bers of a genealogy: Mt. i. 17, (ἑβδόμη γενεὰ οὗτός ἐστιν 
ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου, Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 2). b. metaph. a 
race of men very like each other in endowments, pursuits, 
character ; and esp. in a bad sense a perverse race: Mt. 
xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41; xvi. 8; [Acts ii. 40]. 
3. the whole multitude of men living at the same time: Mt. 
xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30; Lk. i. 48 (πᾶσαι ai yeveai) ; xxi. 
32; Phil. ii. 15; used esp. of the Jewish race living at 
one and the same period: Mt. xi. 16; xii. 39, 41 sq. 45; 
xvi. 4; xxiii. 36; Mk. viii. 12, 38; Lk. xi. 29 sq. 32, 50 
564.: Xvil. 25; Acts xiii. 36; Heb. iii. 10; ἄνθρωποι τῆς 
γενεᾶς ταύτης, Lk. vii. 31; ἄνδρες τῆς γεν. ταύ. Lk. xi. 31; 
τὴν δὲ γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται, who can describe the 
wickedness of the present generation, Acts viii. 33 (fr. 
Is. 111. 8 Sept.) [but ef. Mey. ad loc.]. 4. an age (i.e. 
the time ordinarily occupied by each successive genera- 
tion), the space of from 30 to 33 years (Hat. 2, 142 et al.; 
Heraclit. in Plut. def. orac. ὁ. 11), or 6 χρόνος. ἐν ᾧ yer 


112 


yeveTn 


vavra παρέχει τὸν ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγεννημένον ὁ γεννήσας (Plut. 
l.c.); in the N. T. com. in plur.: Eph. iii. 5 [W. § 81, 
9 a.; B. 186 (161)]; παρῳχημέναις γενεαῖς in ages gone 
by, Acts xiv. 16; ἀπὸ τῶν γενεῶν for ages, since the gener- 
ations began, Col. i. 26; ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων from the gen- 
erations of old, from ancient times down, Acts xv. 21; εἰς 
γενεὰς γενεῶν unto generations of generations, through 
all ages, for ever, (a phrase which assumes that the longer 
ages are made up of shorter; see αἰών, 1 a.): Lk. i. 50 
RL (ΟΠ 7475, Is. li. 8) ; εἰς γενεὰς x. γενεάς unto genera- 
tions and generations, ibid. T Tr WH equiv. to wn 75, 
Ps. Ixxxix. 2 sq.; Is. xxxiv. 17; very often in Sept.; [add, 
els πάσας Tas γενεὰς τοῦ αἰῶνος τῶν αἰώνων, Eph. iii. 21, cf. 
Ellic. ad loc.] (γενεά is used of a century in Gen? xv. 16, 
cf. Knobel ad loc., and on the senses of the word see the 
full remarks of Keim iii. 206 [v. 245 Eng. trans.]).* 

γενεαλογέω, -@: [pres. pass. γενεαλογοῦμαι7; to act the 
genealogist (γενεά and λέγω), to recount a family’s origin 
and lineage, trace ancestry, (often in Hdt.; Xen., Plat., 
Theophr., Leian., Ael., al.; [Sept. 1 Chr. v. 2]); pass. to 
draw one’s origin, derive one’s pedigree: ἔκ twos, Heb. 
vii. 6.* 

yeveadoyla, -as, 7, a genealogy, a record of descent or 
lineage, (Plat. Crat. p. 396 ο.; Polyb. 9, 2, 1; Dion. Hal. 
antt. 1,11; [al.]. Sept. [edd. Ald., Compl.] 1 Chr. vii. 
5, 7; ix. 22; [iv. 33 Compl.; Ezra viii. 1 ib.]); in plur. 
of the orders of @ons, according to the doctrine of the 
Gnostics: 1 Tim. 1. 4; Tit. iii. 9; ef. De Wette on Tit. i. 
14 [substantially reproduced by Alf. on 1 Tim. 1. ¢.; see 
also Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe, pp. 126 sq. 134 sq. 143]. 

yevéora, -ων, ra [cf. W. 176 (166) ], (fr. the adj. γενέ- 
σιος fr. γένεσις), a birth-day celebration, a birth-day feast: 
Mk. vi. 21; Mt. xiv. 6; (Alciphr. epp. 3, 18 and 55; Dio 
Cass. 47, 18, ete.; ἡ γενέσιος ἡμέρα, Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 7). 
The earlier Greeks used γενέσια of funeral commemora- 
tions, a festival commemorative of a deceased friend 
(Lat. feriae denicales), see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 103 sq. ; 
[ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 184; W. 24 (23)]. Cf. 
Keim ii. p. 516 [iv. 223 Eng. trans. ].* 

γένεσις, -ews, 7, (TEN@ [Curtius § 128]), in Grk. writ. 
for the first time in Hom. Il. 14, 201 [ef. 246]; 1. 
source, origin: βίβλος γενέσεώς τινος a book of one’s lia- 
eage, i. e. in which his ancestry or his progeny are enu- 
merated (i. q. niToIM 750, Gen. v. 1, ete.), [Mt. i. 11. 
2. used of birth, nativity, in Mt. i. 18 and Lk. i. 14, for 
Ree. γέννησις (ἡμέραι τῆς γενέσεώς μου equiv. to ἀφ᾽ οὗ 
ἐγεννήθην, Judith xii. 18 ef. 20); πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως 
his native (natural) face, Jas. i. 23. 3. of that which 
follows origin, viz. existence, life: ὁ τροχὸς τῆς γενέσεως 
the wheel [cf. Eng. “ machinery ”] of life, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. 
Grimm on Sap. vii. 5); but others explain it the wheel 
of human origin which as soon as men are born begins 
to run, i. 6. the course [cf. Eng. “ round "7 of life.* 

γενετή, -ῆς, ἡ, (TENQ, γίνομαι), (cf. Germ. die Geworden- 
heit), birth; hence very often ἐκ γενετῆς from birth on 
(Hom. Il. 24, 535; Aristot. eth. Nic. 6, 13, 1 p. 1144", 6 
etc.; Polyb. 3, 20,4; Diod. 5, 32, al.; Sept. Lev. xxv. 47) : 
Jn. ix. 1.* 


qevnpa 


γένημα, -aros, τό, (fr. γίνομαι), a form supported by the 
best Mss. in Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xii. 18; xxii. 
18; 2 Co. ix. 10, and therefore adopted by T [see his 
Proleg. p. 79] Tr [L WH (see WH. App. p. 148 and be- 
low) ], printed by Grsb. only in Lk. xii. 18; 2 Co. ix. 10, 
but given by no grammarian, and therefore attributed by 
Fritzsche (on Mk. p. 619 sq.) to the carelessness of tran- 
scribers, — for Ree. [but in Lk. ]. ο. Re reads γενημ.] yev- 
νημα, q- V- In Mk. xiv. 25 Lehm. has retained the com- 
mon reading; [and in Lk. xii. 18 Trtxt. WH have 
σῖτον. In Ezek. xxxvi. 30 codd. A B read γενήματα." 

γεννάω, -@ ; fut. γεννήσω ; 1 aor. ἐγέννησα; pf. yeyevynka; 
[Pass., pres. γεννάομαι, -ῶμαι]; pf. yeyevynpar; 1 aor. 
ἐγεννήθην ; (fr. γέννα, poetic for γένος) ; in Grk. writ. fr. 
Pind. down; in Sept. for 37°; to beget; 1. properly : 
of men begetting children, Mt. i. 1-16; Acts vii. 8, 29; 
foll. by ἐκ with gen. of the mother, Mt. i. 3, 5, 6; more 
rarely of women giving birth to children, Lk. i. 13, 57; 
xxiii. 29; Jn. xvi. 215; εἰς δουλείαν to bear a child unto 
bondage, that will be a slave, Gal. iv. 24, ({ Xen. de rep. 
Lae. 1, 3]; Leian. de sacrif.6; Plut. de liber. educ. 5; 
al.; Sept. Is. xvi. 9; 4 Mace. x. 2, etc.). Pass. to be 
begotten: τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ γεννηθέν that which is begotten in 
her womb, Mt. i. 20; to be born: Mt. ii. 1, 4 [W. 266 
(250) ; B. 203 (176) ]; xix. 12; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21; Lk. 
i. 35; Jn. 111. 4; [Acts vii. 20]; Ro. ix. 11; Heb. xi. 23; 
with the addition εἰς τὸν κόσμον, Jn. xvi. 21; foll. by ἐν 
with dat. of place, Acts xxii. 3; ἀπό twos, to spring from 
one as father, Heb. xi. 12 [L WH mrg. ἐγενήθ. see Tdf. 
al loc.]; ἔκ twos to be born of a mother, Mt. i. 16; ἐκ 
πορνείας, Jn. Vili. 41; ἐξ αἱμάτων, ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρός, Jn. 
i. 135 ἐκ τῆς σαρκός, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.*' γεγενημ.}; ἐν duap- 
τίαις ὅλος, Jn. ix. 34 (see ἁμαρτία, 32 ἃ.) ; εἴς τι, to be born 
for something, Jn. xviii. 37; 2 Pet. ii. 12 [Tdf. γεγενημ. 
so Rec.*te]; with an adj.: τυφλὸς γεγέννημαι, Jn. ix. 2, 
19 sq. 832; “Ῥωμαῖος to be supplied, Acts xxii. 28; τῇ 
διαλέκτῳ, ἐν ἡ ἐγεννήθημεν, Acts ii. 8 ; γεννηθεὶς κατὰ σάρκα 
begotten or born according to (by) the working of nat- 
ural passion; κατὰ πνεῦμα according to (by) the working 
of the divine promise, Gal. iv. 29, ef. 23. 2. metaph. 
a. univ. to engender, cause to arise, excite: μάχας, 2 Tim. 
ii. 23 (βλάβην, λύπην, etc. in Grk. writ.). Ὁ. in a Jew- 
ish sense, of one who brings others over to his way of 
life: ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα I am the author of your Christian 
life, 1 Co. iv. 15; Philem. 10, (Sanhedr. fol. 19, 2 “If 
one teaches the son of his neighbor the law, the Serip- 
ture reckons this the same as though he had begotten 
him”; [ef. Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 8]}). ο. after Ps. ii. 7, 
it is used of God making Christ his son; a. formally to 
show him to be the Messiah (υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ), viz. by the 
resurrection: Acts xiii. 38. B. to be the author of the 
divine nature which he possesses [but ef. the Comm. on 
the pass. that follow]: Heb. i. 5; v.5. da. peculiarly, in 
the Gospel and 1 Ep. of John, of God conferring upon 
men the nature and disposition of his sons, imparting to 
them spiritual life, i.e. by his own holy power prompting 
and persuading souls to put faith in Christ and live a 
new life consecrated to himself; absol.: 1 Jn. v. 1; 

8 


113 


γένος 


mostly in pass., ἐκ θεοῦ or ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ ἐγεννήθησαν, γεγέν- 
νηται, γεγεννημένος, etc.: Jn. i. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 29 [Rec.** ye- 
γένηται); ili. 9; iv. 7; ν. 1, 4, 18; also ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος 
γεννᾶσθαι, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.* yeyernp.], 8; ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ 
πνεύματος (because that moral generation is effected in 
receiving baptism [(?) ef. Schaff’s Lange, Godet, West- 
cott, on the words, and reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 8), In. iii. 5; 
ἄνωθεν γεννᾶσθαι, Jn. ill. 3, 7 (see ἄνωθεν, c.) equiv. to 
[Comp.: ava-yevvda. " 

γέννημα, -ros, τό, (fr. yervaw), that which has been be- 
gotien or born; a. as in the earlier Grk. writ. fr. Soph. 
down, the offspring, progeny, of men or of animals: ἐχι- 
δνῶν, Mt. iii. 7; xii. 34; xxiii. 33; Lk. iii. 7; (γυναικῶν, 
Sir. x. 18). Ὁ: fr. Polyb. [1, 71, 1 etc.] on [ef. W. 23], 
the fruits of the earth, products of agriculture, (in Sept. 
often γεννήματα τῆς γῆς): Lk. xii. 18 (where Tr [txt. 
WIL] τὸν σῖτον) ; τῆς ἀμπέλου, Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; 
Lk. xxii. 18; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 286. Metaph. fruit, 
reward, profit: τῆς δικαιοσύνης, 2 Co. ix. 10, (Hos. x. 12; 
τῆς σοφίας, Sir. 1. 17; vi. 19). Further, see γένημα." 

Γεννησαρέτ [so ἃ T Tr WI], -ρέθ [Lchm. in Mt. xiv. 
34], [Tevnoaper Rec. in Mk. vi. 53; οἵ. Tdf. ed. 2 Proleg. 
p- xxxv., ed. 7 Proleg. p. liv. note*], (Targums 70°33 or 
30193 [ace. to Delitzsch (Romerbr. in d. Hebr. iibers. Ρ. 
27) 90734, 10333]; Γεννησάρ, 1 Mace. xi. 67; Joseph. b.j. 
2, 20, 6 ete.; Genesara, Plin. 5, 15), Gennesarel, a very 
lovely and fertile region on the Sea of Galilee (Joseph. 
b. 7. 8, 10, 7): ἡ γῆ Γεννησ. Mt. xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53; ἡ 
λίμνη Γεννησ. Lk. v. 1, anciently 733 Ὁ", Num. xxxiv. 
11, or ΠΥ 29. Dd, Josh. xii. 3, fr. the city N23, Deut. iii. 17, 
which was near by; called in the Gospels ἡ θάλασσα τῆς 
Γαλιλαίας, Mk. i. 16; Mt. iv. 18; ἡ θάλασσα τῆς Τιβερι- 
ddos, Jn. vi. 1; xxi. 1. The lake, acc. to Joseph. b. j. 3, 
10, 7, is 140 stadia long and 40 wide; [its extreme di- 
mensions now are said to average 121m. by 63 m., and 
its level to be nea=ly 700 ft. below that of the Mediter- 
ranean]. Cf. Riietschi in Herzog v. p. 6 sq.; Furrer in 
Schenkel ii. p. 822 sqq.; [Wilson in “The Recovery of 
Jerusalem,” Pt. ii.; Robinson, Phys. Geog. of the Holy 
Land, p. 199 sqq.; BB.DD. For conjectures respecting 
the derivation of the word cf. Alex.’s Kitto sub fin. ; Mer- 
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, § vii.].* 

γέννησις, -ews, 7, (γεννάω), a begetting, engendering, 
(often so in Plat.) ; nativity, birth: Rec. in Mt. i. 18 and 
Lk. i. 14; see γένεσις, 2." 

γεννητός, -ἡ, -dv, (γεννάω), begotten, born, (often in Plat. ; 
Diod. 1, 6 sqq.); after the Hebr. (WS Wy, Job xiv. 1, 
etc.), γεννητοὶ γυναικῶν [B. 169 (147), born of women] 
is a periphrasis for men, with the implied idea of weak- 
ness and frailty: Mt. xi. 11; Lk. vii. 28.* 

γένος, -ous, τό, (TENQ, γίνομαι), race; a. offspring : 
τινός, Acts xvii. 28 sq. (fr. the poet Aratus) ; Rev. xxii. 
16. Ὁ. family: Acts [iv. 6, see ἀρχιερεύς, 2 fin.]; vii. 13 
[8]. refer this to 6.7; xiii. 26. ο. stock, race: Acts vii. 
19; 2 Co. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 5; Gal. i. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 9; (Gen. 
xi. 6; xvii. 14, ete. for DJ); nation (i. 6. nationality or 
descent from a particular people): Mk. vii. 26; Acts iv. 
36; xvili. 2, 24. ἃ. coner. the aggregate of many wndt 


τέκνον θεοῦ γίνεσθαι, i. 12. 


Γερασηνός 


viduals of the same nature, kind, sort, species: Mt. xiii. 47 ; 
xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; Mk. ix. 29; 1 Co. 
xii. 10, 28; xiv. 10. (With the same significations in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

Τερασηνός, -οῦ, ὁ, Gerasene, i.e. belonging to the city 

Gerasa (ra Γέρασα, Joseph. b. 1. 8, 8, 3): Mt. viii. 28 

Lehm.]; Mk. v. 1 [L TWH Tr txt.]; Lk. viii. 26 and 37 
(L Tr WH] ace. to very many codd. seen by Origen. But 
since Gerasa was a city situated in the southern part of 
Ferwa (Joseph. 1. c., ef. 4, 9,1), or in Arabia (Orig. 
opp. iv. 140 ed. De la Rue), that cannot be referred to 
here; see Γαδαρηνός, and the next word.* 

Γεργεσηνός, -7, -dv, Gergesene, belonging to the city 
Gergesa, which is assumed to have been situated on the 
eastern shore of Lake Gennesaret: Mt. viii. 28 Rec. But 
this reading depends on the authority and opinion of 
Origen, who thought the variants found in his Mss. 
Γαδαρηνῶν and Γερασηνῶν (see these words) must be made 
to conform to the testimony of those who said that there 
was formerly a certain city Gergesa near the lake. But 
Josephus knows nothing of it, and states expressly (antt. 
1, 6, 2), that no trace of the ancient Gergesites [A. V. 
Girgashites, cf. B. D. s. v.] (mentioned Gen. xv. 20; 
Josh. xxiv. 11) had survived, except the names preserved 
in the O. T. Hence in Mt. viii. 28 we must read Tada- 
ρηνῶν [so T Tr WH] and suppose that the jurisdiction 
of the city Gadara extended quite to the Lakeof Gennes- 
aret; but that Matthew (viii. 34) erroneously thought 
that this city was situated on the lake itself. For in Mk. 
y. 14 sq.; Lk. viii. 34, there is no objection to the sup- 
position that the men came to Jesus from the rural dis- 
tricts alone. [But for the light thrown on this matter 
by modern research, see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gadara; 
Thomson, The Land and the Book, ii. 84 sqq.; Wilson 
in “ The Recovery of Jerusalem ” p. 286 sq.]* 

γερουσία, -as, 7, (adj. γερούσιος, belonging to old 
men, γέρων), a senate, council of elders; used in prof. 
auth. of the chief council of nations and cities (ἐν ταῖς 
πόλεσι ai yepovoia, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 16; in the O. T. of 
the chief council not only of the whole people of Israel, 
Ex. iii. 16, ete.; 1 Mace. xii. 6, ete. ; but also of cities, 
Deut. xix. 12, ete.) ; of the Great Council, the Sanhedrin 
of the Jews: Acts v. 21, where to τὸ συνέδριον is added 
καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ and indeed (καί 
explicative) all the senate, to signify the full Sanhedrin. 
[Cf. Schiirer, Die Gemeindeverfassung d. Juden in Rom 
in ἃ. Kaiserzeit nach ἃ. Inschriften dargestellt. Leips. 
1879, p. 18 sq.; Hatch, Bamp. Lects. for 1880, p. 64 sq.]* 

γέρων, -ovros, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], an old man: Jn. iii. 4. 
[Syn. οἵ. Augustine in Trench § evii. 2.]* 

γεύω: [οἵ. Lat. gusto, Germ. kosten; Curtius § 131]; to 
cause to taste, to give one a taste of, τινά (Gen. xxv. 30). 
In the N. T. only Mid. γεύομαι : fut. γεύσομαι ; 1 aor. 
ἐγευσάμην; 1. (0 taste, try the flavor of: Mt. xxvii. 34; 
contrary to better Grk. usage (ef. W. § 30, 7c. [and p. 36; 
Antuol. Pal. 6, 120]) with ace. of the obj.: Jn. ii.9. 2. 
to taste, i.e. perceive the flavor of, partake of, enjoy: 
τινος, Lk. xiv. 24 (yevoerai μου τοῦ δείπνου, i. e. shall par- 


114 


yh 


take of my banquet); hence, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down, i. q. to feel, make trial of, experience: twos, Heb. 
vi. 4; ῥῆμα θεοῦ, ib. 5, (τῆς γνώσεως, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
36,2). asin Chald., Syr. and Rabbin. writers, γεύεσθαι 
tov θανάτου [W. 33 (32)]: Mt. xvi. 28; Mk. ix. 1; Lk. 
ix. 27; Jn. viii. 52; Heb. ii. 9; [ef. Wetstein on Mt. 1. c.; 
Meyer on Jn. 1. c.; Bleek, Liinem., Alf. on Heb. 1. e.]. 
foll. by ὅτι: 1 Pet. ii. 3 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 9). 3. to 
take food, eat: absol., Acts x. 10; xx. 11; οἵ. Kypke, 
Observy. ii. p. 47; to take nourishment, eat —[but sub- 
stantially as above], with gen. μηδενός, Acts xxiii. 14; with 
the ellipsis of a gen. denoting unlawful food, Col. ii. 21.* 

γεωργέω, -ὦ : [pres. pass. yewpyoduat]; (γεωργός, 4. V-) ; 
to practise agriculture, to till the ground: τὴν γῆν (Plat. 
Theag. p. 121 b.; Eryx. p. 392 d.; [al.]; 1 Esdr. iv. 6; 
1 Mace. xiv. 8); Pass.: Heb. vi. 7.* 

γεώργιον, -ov, τό, a (cultivated) field: 1 Co. iii. 9 LA. V. 
husbandry (with marg. tillage)]. (Prov. xxiv. 45 (30); 
xxxi. 16 (xxix. 34) ; Theag. in schol. Pind. Nem. 8, 21; 
Strabo 14, 5, 6 p. 671; [al.].)* 

γεωργός, -οὔ, 6, (fr. γῆ and EPYQ), fr. [Hdt.], Xen. and 
Plat. down; a husbandman, tiller of the soil: 2 Tim. ii. 
6; Jas. v. 7; several times in Sept. ; used of a vine-dresser 
(Ael. nat. an. 7, 28; [Plat. Theaet. p. 178 d.; al.]) in 
Mt. xxi. 33 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sq. 7,9; Lk. xx. 9 sq. 14, 
16; Jn. xv. 1.* 

γῆ; gen. γῆς, 7, (contr. fr. yéa, poet. γαῖα), Sept. very 
often for γι and ΤΣ, earth; 1. arable land: Mt. 
xiii. 5, 8, 23; Mk. iv. 8, 20, 26, 28, 31; Lk. xiii. 7; xiv. 
35 (34); Jn. xii. 24; Heb. vi. 7; Jas. v. 7; Rev. ix. 4; 
of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed, 
with the implied idea of frailty and weakness: ἐκ γῆς 
χοϊκός, 1 Co. xv. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a 
standing-place, (Germ. Boden) : Mt. x. 29; xv. 35; xxiii. 
85; xxvii. 51; Mk. viii. 6; ix. 20; xiv. 35; Lk. xxii. 44 
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; xxiv. 5; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [i.e 
Rec.]; Acts ix. 4, 8. 3. the main /and, opp. to sea or 
water: Mk. iv. 1; vi. 47; Lk. ν. 8; viii. 27; Jn. vi. 21; 
xxi. 8 sq. 11; Rev. xii. 12. 4. the earth as a whole, 
the world (Lat. terrarum orbis); a. the earth as opp. 
to the heavens: Mt. v. 18, 35; vi.10; xvi.19; xviii. 18; 
xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. ii. 14; Jn. xii. 32; Acts ii. 19; 
iv. 24; 2 Pet. iii. 5,7, 10,13; Rev. xxi. 1; τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 
the things and beings that are on the earth, Eph. i. 10; 
Col. i. 16 [T WHom. L Trbr. τά]; involving a suggestion 
of mutability, frailty, infirmity, alike in thought and in 
action, Mt. vi. 19; τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς (equiv. to τὰ ἐπίγεια, 
Phil. iii. 19) terrestrial goods, pleasures, honors, Col. iii. 
2 (opp. to τὰ ἄνω) ; τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς the mem- 
bers of your earthly body, as it were the abode and 
instruments of corrupt desires, Col. iii. 5; ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς 
. .. λαλεῖ (in contrast with Christ as having come from 
heaven) he who is of earthly (human) origin, has an 
earthly nature, and speaks as his earthly origin and 
nature prompt, Jn. iii. 31. b. the inhabited earth, the 
abode of men and animals: Lk. xxi. 35; Actsi. 8; x. 12; 
xi. 6; xvii. 26; Heb. xi. 13; Rev. iii. 10; αἴρειν ἕωην 
τινος ΟΥ Twa ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, Acts Vili. 33; xxi. 22; KAnpo- 


γῆρας 


νομεῖν τὴν γῆν (See κληρονομέω, 2), Mt. v. 5 (4); πῦρ βάλ- 
λειν ἐπὶ [ Rec. εἰς] τὴν γῆν, i. e. among men, LK. xii. 49, ef. 
51 and Mt. x. 34; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς among men, LK. xviii. 8; 
Jn. xvii. 4. 5. a country, land enclosed within fixed 
boundaries, a tract of land, territory, region; simply, when 
it is plain from the context what land is meant, as that 
of the Jews: Lk. iv. 25; xxi. 23; Ro. ix. 28; Jas. v. 
17; with a gentile noun added [then, as a rule, anar- 
throus, W. 121 (114 sq.)]: γῆ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. ii. 20 sq.; 
᾿Ιούδα, Mt. ii. 6 ; Γεννησαρέτ, Mt. xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53; Σο- 
δόμων x. Τομόρρων, Mt. x. 15; xi. 24; Χαλδαίων, Acts vii. 
4; Αἴγυπτος, (see Αἴγυπτος) ; ἡ ᾿Ιουδαία γῆ, Jn. iii. 22; 
with the addition of an adj.: ἀλλοτρία, Acts vii. 6 ; ἐκείνη, 
Mt. ix. 26, 31; with gen. of pers. one’s country, native 
land, Acts vii. 3. 

γῆρας, -aos (-ws), Ion. ynpeos, dat. ynpet, γήρει, τό, [fr. 
Hom. down], old age: Lk. i. 36 ἐν γήρει GL T Tr 
WH for Ree. ἐν γήρᾳ, a form found without var. in Sir. 
xxv. 3; [also Ps. xci. (xcii.) 15; ef. Gen. xv. 15 Alex.; 
xxi. 7 ib.; xxv. 8 ib.; 1 Chr. xxix. 28 ib.; Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 10, 7 var.; ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117]; Fritzsche 
on Sir. iii. 12; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 155; W. 
(36 and] 64 (62); [B. 15 (14)].* 

γηράσκω or γηράω: 1 aor. ἐγήρασα; fr. Hom. down; [cf. 
W. 92 (88); Donaldson, New Crat. § 387]; to grow old: 
Jn. xxi. 18; of things, institutions, ete., to fail from age, 
be obsolescent: Heb. viii. 13 (to be deprived of force and 
authority ; [here associated with παλαιούμενος --- the lat- 
ter (used only of things) marking the lapse of time, while 
γηράσκων carries with it a suggestion of the waning 
strength, the decay, incident to old age (cf. Schmidt ch. 
46,7; Theophr. caus. pl. 6, 7,5): “that which is becom- 
ing old and faileth for age” etc.]}).* 

γίνομαι (in Ionic prose writ.and in com. Grk. fr. Aristot. 
on for Attic γίγνομαι) ; [impf. ἐγινόμην  ; fut. γενήσομαι ; 2 
aor. ἐγενόμην (often in 3 pers. sing. optat. γένοιτο ; [ptep. 
yevapevos, Lk. xxiv. 22 Tdf. ed. 7]), and, with no diff. in 
signif., 1 aor. pass. ἐγενήθην, rejected by the Atticists (cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108 sq.; [Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 
75, 6 sq.]), not rare in later Grk., common in Sept. (Acts 
iv. 4; 1 Th. ii. 14; 1 Co. xv. 10, etc.), impv. γενηθήτω (Mt. 
vi. 10; xv. 28, ete.) ; pf. γεγένημαι and γέγονα, 3 pers. plur. 
γέγοναν L T Tr WH in Ro. xvi. 7 and Rey. xxi. 6 (cf. 
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. p. 
37 sq.; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 187]; W. 36 and 76 (73) 
sq-; Mullach p. 16; B. 43 (37 sq.)), [ptep. γεγονώς] ; 
plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγεγόνει (Jn. vi. 17 [not Tdf.];. Acts 
iv. 22 [where L T Tr WH γεγόνει, cf. W. § 12, 9; B. 33 
(29); Tdf.’s note on the pass.]); to become, and 

1. to become, i. 6. to come into existence, begin to be, re- 
ceive being: absol., Jn. i. 15, 30 (ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν) ; 
In. viii. 58 (πρὶν ᾿Αβραὰμ γενέσθαι) ; 1 Co. xv. 37 (τὸ σῶμα 
τὸ γενησόμενον) ; ἔκ Twos, [0 be born, Ro. i. 3 (ἐκ σπέρματος 
Δαυΐδ); Gal. iv. 4 (ἐκ γυναικός) ; Mt. xxi. 19 (μηκέτι ἐκ 
σοῦ καρπὸς γένηται, come from) ; of the origin of all things, 
Heb. xi. 3; διά τινος, Jn.i. 3,10. to rise, arise, come on, 
appear, of occurrences in nature or in life: as γίνεται 
βροντή, Jn. xii. 29; ἀστραπή, Rev. viii. 5; σεισμός, Rev. 


115 


γίνομαι 


[vi. 12; xi. 13]; xvi. 18; γαλήνη, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 
39; Lk. viii. 24; λαῖλαψ, Mk. iv. 37; γογγυσμός, Acts 
vi. 1; ζήτησις, Jn. iii. 25 [foll. by ἐκ of origin ; στάσις καὶ 
ζήτησις), Acts xv. 2 [Grsb. questions ¢jr., Rec. reads 
συζήτ.]; πόλεμος, Rey. xii. 7; ἡ βασιλεία [or ai B.] κτλ. 
Rey. xi. 15; xii. 10; χαρά, Acts viii. 8, and in many other 
exx. Here belong also the phrases γίνεται ἡμέρα it be- 
comes day, day comes on, Lk. iv. 42; vi. 13; xxii. 66; 
Acts xii. 18; xvi. 35; xxiii. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39; y. ὀψέ 
evening comes, Mk. xi. 19, i. q. y. ὀψία, Mt. viii. 16, xiv. 
15, 23; xvi. 2[T br. WH reject the pass.]; xxvi. 20; 
Mk. xiv. 17; Jn. vi. 16, ete.; mpwia, Mt. xxvii. 1; Jn. 
xxi. 4; νύξ, Acts xxvii. 27 [cf. 5. v. ἐπιγίν. 2]; σκοτία, Jn. 
vi. 17 [not Tdf.]. Hence 

2. to become i. q. to come to pass, happen, of events; 
a. univ.: Mt. v. 18; xxiv. 6, 20, 34; Lk. i. 20; xii. 54; 
xxi. 28; Jn. 1. 28; xiii. 19, etc.; τοῦτο γέγονεν, i a etc. 
this hath come to pass that ete., Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4; xxvi. 
ὅθ; τὰ γενόμενα or γινόμενα, Mt. xviii. 31; xxvii. 54; 
xxvili. 11; Lk. xxiii. 48; [ef. ra γενόμενα ἀγαθά, Heb. 
ix. 11 ΠΎΝΗ txt. Trmrg.]; τὸ γενόμενον, Lk. xxiii. 47; 
τὸ γεγονός, Mk. v. 14; Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH 
reject the vs.]; Acts iv. 21; τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ γεγονός, Lk. ii. 
15; τὰ μέλλοντα γίνεσθαι, Lk. xxi. 36; Acts xxvi. 22; τὴν 
ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι, 2 Tim. ii. 18; θανάτου γενομένου 
a death having taken place (Germ. nach erfolgtem Tode), 
Heb. ix. 15. μὴ γένοιτο, a formula esp. freq. in Paul (and 
in Epictetus, cf. Schweigh. Index Graec. in Epict. p. 392), 
far be it! God forbid! [ef. Morison, Exposition of Rom. 
lii., Ὁ. 31 sq.]: Lk. xx.16; Ro. iii. 4, 6, 31; vi. 2, 15; vii. 
7,13; ix.14; xi. 1,11; 1 Co. vi.15; Gal. ii. 17; iii. 21 
(equiv. to myn, Josh. xxii. 29, ete.) ; ef. Sturz, De dial. 
Maced. ete. p. 204 sq.; τί γέγονεν, ὅτι etc. what has come 
to pass, that etc. i. q. for what reason, why? Jn. xiv. 22 (τί 
ἐγένετο, ὅτι... Eccles. vii. 11 (10); τί ἐστιν, ὡς ete., Eur. 
Troad. 889). Ὄ. Very common in the first three Gos- 
pels, esp. that of Luke, and in the Acts, is the phrase καὶ 
ἐγένετο (73?) foll. by 1); ef. W. § 65, 4 6. [also § 44, 3 ¢.], 
and esp. B. § 141,6. a. καὶ ἐγένετο καί with a finite verb: 
Mk. ii. 15 ([Tr txt. καὶ γίνεται], TWH καὶ yiv. [foll. by 
ace. and inf.]); Lk. ii. 15 [R G Lbr. Trbr.]; viii. 1; xiv. 
1; xvii. 11; xix. 15; xxiv. 15 [WH br. καί]; foll. by καὶ 
ἰδού, Mt. ix. 10 [T om. καί before i8.]; Lk. xxiv. 4. β. 
much oftener καί is not repeated: Mt. vii. 28; Mk. iv. 4; 
Lk. i. 23; ii. [15 TWH], 46; vi. 12; vii. 11; ix. 18, 33; xi. 
1; xix. 29; xxiv. 30. γ. καὶ éyév. foll. by acc. with inf. : 
Mk. ii. 23 [W. 578 (537) note]; Lk. vi. 1,6 [RG éyev. δὲ 
καί]. c. In like manner ἐγένετο δέ a. foll. by καί with 
a finite verb: Lk. v.1; ix. 28 [WH txt. om. L br. καί, 
51; x.38RGT,LTrmrg. br. καί]; Actsv.7. 8. ἐγένετο 
δέ foll. by a fin. verb without καί : Lk. i. 8; ii. 1,6; [vi. 
12RGL); viii. 40 [WH Tr txt. om. ἐγέν.7; ix. 37; xi. 
14, 27. y. éyevero δέ foll. by ace. with inf.: Lk. iii. 21; 
[vi. 1,6 LT Tr WH, 12T Tr WH]; xvi. 2 
5; ix. 3 [without δέ], 32, 37; xi. 26 RG; xi 
16; xix. 1]; xxviii.8,[17]. δ. ἐγέν. δέ [ὡς δὲ 
by rod with inf.: Acts x. 25 (Rec. om. τοῦ), ef. Mey. ad 
loc. and W. 328 (307); [B.270(232)]. ἃ. with dat. of 


γίνομαι 


pers. fo occur or happen to one, befall one: foll. by inf., 
Acts xx. 16; ἐὰν γένηται (Sc. αὐτῷ) εὑρεῖν αὐτό, if it happen 
to him, Mt. xviii. 13; ἐμοὶ δὲ μὴ γένοιτο καυχᾶσθαι far be il 
from me to glory, Gal. vi. 14, (Gen. xliv. 7, 17; 1 K. xx. 
(xxi.) 3; Alciphr. epp. 1, 26); foll. by ace. with inf. it 
happened to me, that ete.: Acts xi. 26 LT Tr WH [but 
ace. implied]; xxii. 6, 17, [ef. W. 323 (303); B. 305 
(262)]; with adverbs, go, fare, (Germ. ergehen) : εὖ, Eph. 
vi. 3, (μὴ γένοιτό σοι οὕτω κακῶς, Ael. ν. h. 9, 36). with 
specification of the thing befalling one: τί γέγονεν [L T 
Trtxt. WH eyev.] αὐτῷ, Acts vii. 40 (fr. Ex. xxxii. 1); 
ἐγένετο [1, Tr WH ἐγίνετο] πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος fear came 
upon, Acts ii. 43.— Mk. iv. 11; ix. 21; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. ν. 
14; xv. 7; Ro. xi. 25; 1 Co. iv.5; 2Co.i.8 [GLTTr 
WH om. dat.]; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 1 Pet. iv. 12; with the 
ellipsis of ἡμῖν, Jn. 1.17. ἐγένετο (αὐτῷ) γνώμη a purpose 
occurred to him, he determined, Acts xx. 3 [B. 268 (230), 
but T Tr WH read ἐγέν. γνώμης; see below, 5 6. a.]. 
foll. by prepositions: ἐπ᾿ αὐτῇ upon (Germ. bei or an) 
her, Mk. v. 33 [RG Lbr.]; ets τινα, Acts xxviii. 6. 

3. to arise, appear in history, come upon the stage: 
of men appearing in public, Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 6, [on which 
two pass. cf. W. 350 (328); B. 308 (264) sq.]; 2 Pet. ii. 
1; γεγόνασι, have arisen and now exist, 1 Jn. ii. 18. 

4. to be made, done, finished: τὰ ἔργα, Heb. iv. 3; διὰ 
χειρῶν, of things fabricated, Acts xix. 26; of miracles 10 
be performed, wrought: διὰ τῶν χειρῶν twos, Mk. vi. 2; 
διά τινος, Acts ii. 43; iv. 16,30; xii. 9; ὑπό τινος, Lk. ix. 
7 (RL [but the latter br. ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ); xiii. 17; xxiii. 8; 
γενόμενα eis Kapapv. done unto (on) Capernaum i. e. for 
its benefit (W. 416 (388) ; [ef. B. 333 (286) ]), Lk. iv. 23 
[Ree. ἐν τῇ K.]. of commands, decisions, purposes, re- 
quests, ete. to be done, executed : Mt. vi. 10; xxi. 21; xxvi. 
42; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xiv. 22; xxiii. 24; Acts xxi. 14; ye- 
νήσεται 6 λόγος will be accomplished the saying, 1 Co. xy. 
54. joined to nouns implying a certain action: ἡ ἀπώ- 
λεια γέγονε, Mk. xiv. 4; ἀπογραφή, Lk. ii. 2; ἐπαγγελία 
γενομένη ὑπὸ θεοῦ given by God, Acts xxvi. 6; ἀνάκρισις, 
Acts xxv. 26; νόμου μετάθεσις, Heb. vii. 12; ἄφεσις, Heb. 
ix. 22. of institutions, laws, ete. to be established, en- 
acted: τὸ σάββατον ἐγένετο, the institution of the Sabbath, 
Mk. ii. 275 6 νόμος, Gal. iii. 17 ; οὐ γέγονεν οὕτως hath not 
been so ordained, Mt. xix. 8. of feasts, marriages, en- 
tertainments, to be kept, celebrated: τὸ πάσχα, Mt. xxvi. 
2 (i. q. MWY), 2 Κα. xxiii. 22); τὸ σάββατον, Mk. vi. 2; τὰ 
ἐγκαίνια, Jn. x. 22; [γενεσίοις γενυμένοις (cf. W. § 31, 9b.; 
RG γενεσίων ἀγομένων), Mt. xiv. 6], (ra ᾿Ολύμπια, Xen. 
Hell. 7, 4, 28; Ἴσθμια, 4, 5,1); γάμος, Jn. 11. 1. οὕτως 
γένηται ἐν ἐμοί so done with me, in my case, 1 Co. ix. 15. 

5. to become, be made, “in passages where it is speci- 
fied who or what a person or thing is or has been ren- 
dered, as respects quality, condition, place, rank, charac- 
ter” (Wahl, Clavis Apocr. V. T. p. 101). a. with a 
predicate added, expressed by a subst. or an adj.: of λίθοι 
οὗτοι ἄρτοι γένωνται, Mt. iv. 3; Lk. iv. 3; ὕδωρ οἶνον γεγε- 
νημένον, Jn. ii. 9 ; ἀρχιερεὺς γενόμενος, Heb. vi. 30 ; διάκονος, 
Col. i. 25; ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο, Jn. i. 14 ; ἀνήρ, 1 Co. xiii. 
11, and many other exx. ; χάρις οὐκέτι γίνεται χάρις grace 


116 


γίνομαι 


ceases to have the nature of grace, can no longer be called 
grace, Ro. xi. ὃ; ἄκαρπος γίνεται, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; 
—in Mt. xvii. 2; Lk. viii. 17; Jn. v. 6, and many other 
places. contextually, to show one’s self, prove one’s self: 
Lk. x. 86; xix. 17; xxiv. 19; Ro. xi. 84; xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 
18 Rec.; 1 Th. i. 6; ii. 7; Heb. xi. 6, ete. ; esp. in exhor- 
tations: γίνεσθε, Mt. x. 16; xxiv. 44; Lk. vi. 36; Eph. 
iv. 32; Col. 111. 155; μὴ γίνου, Jn. xx. 27; μὴ γίνεσθε, Mt. 
vi. 16; Eph. v. 7,17; 1 Co. x. 7; μὴ γινώμεθα, Gal. v. 26 ; 
hence used declaratively, i. q. to be found, shown: Lk. 
xiii. 2 (that it was shown by their fate that they were 
sinners); Ro. iii. 4; 2 Co. vii. 14: --- γίνομαί τινί τις to 
show one’s self (to be) some one to one: 1 Co. ix. 20, 
22. Ὄ. with an interrog. pron. as predicate : τί ὁ Πέτρος 
ἐγένετο what had become of Peter, Acts xii. 18 [cf. use of 
τί eyev.in Act. Phil. in Hell. § 23, Τὰ Acta apost. apoer. 
p- 104]. c. γίνεσθαι ὡς or ὡσεί twa to become as or like 
toone: Mt. x. 25; xviii.3; xxviii.4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. xxii. 
44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Ro. ix. 29 (fr. Is. i. 9); 
1 Co. iv.13; 68]. ἵν. 12. ἃ. γίνεσθαι εἴς τι Lo become i. e. 
be changed into something, come to be, issue in, something 
(Germ. zu etwas werden) : ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας, Mt. 
xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx. 17; Acts iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 7, 
—all after Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 22. Lk. xiii. 19 (εἰς δένδρον 
peya); Jn. xvi. 20; Acts v. 36; Ro. xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Lxviii. 
(lxix.) 23); 1 Th. iii. 5; Rev. viii. 11; xvi. 19, ete. (equiv. to 
5 7°71; but the expression is also classic; cf. W. § 29, 3a. ; 
B.150(131)). 6. γίνεσθαι with Cases; a. with the gen. 
to become the property of any one, to come into the power 
of a person or thing, [ef. W. § 30,5; esp. B. 162 (142)]: 
Lk. xx. 14 [L mrg. ἔσται], 33; Rev. xi. 15 ; [γνώμης, Acts 
xx. 3 T Tr WH (ef. ἐλπίδος μεγάλης yiv. Plut. Phoe. 23, 
4)]; προφητεία ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται NO One Can ex- 
plain prophecy by his own mental power (it is not a mat- 
ter of subjective interpretation), but to explain it one 
needs the same illumination of the Holy Spirit in which 
it originated, for ete. 2 Pet. i. 20. γενέσθαι with a gen. 
indicating one’s age, (to be) so many years old: Lk. ii. 
42;1Tim.v.9. 8B. with the dat. [ef. W. 210 sq. (198)]: 
γίνεσθαι ἀνδρί to become a man’s wife, Ro. vii. 3 sq. (77 
wed, Lev. xxii. 12; Ruthi.12,ete.). _f. joined to prep- 
ositions with their substantives; ἔν tun, to come or pass 
into a certain state [cf. B. 330 (284) ]: ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ, Lk, xxii. 
44 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.]; ἐν ἐκστάσει, Acts xxii. 
17; ἐν πνεύματι, Rev. i. 10; iv. 2; ἐν δόξῃ [R. V. came with 
(in) glory], 2 Co. iii. 7; ἐν παραβάσει, 1 Tim. ii. 14; ἐν 
ἑαυτῷ, to come to himself, recover reason, Acts xii. 11 
(also in Grk. writ.; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 749); ἐν 
Χριστῷ, to be brought to the fellowship of Christ, to be- 
come a Christian, Ro. xvi. 7; ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων, to 
become like men, Phil. ii. 7; ἐν λόγῳ κολακείας [R. V. 
were we found using] flattering speech, 1 Th. ii.5. ἐπάνω 
τινός to be placed over a thing, Lk. xix. 19. μετά τινος or 
σύν τινι to become one’s companion, associate with him: 
Mk. xvi. 10; Acts vii. 38; xx. 18; ὑπό τινα to be made 
subject to one, Gal. ἵν. 4. [Cf.h.below.] 6. with speci- 
fication of the terminus of motion or the place of rest : εἰς 
with acc. of place, to come to some place, arrive at some 


γινώσκω 


thing, Acts xx. 16; xxi. 17; χχν. 15; ὡς ἐγένετο... εἰς 
τὰ ὦτά μου when the voice came into my ears, Lk. i. 44; 
eis with ace. of pers., of evils coming upon one, Rev. xvi. 2 
RG; of blessings, Gal. iii. 14; 1 Th.i.5 [Lchm. πρός; Acts 
xxvi. 6 L T Tr WH]; γενέσθαι ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου, Lk. xxii. 
40; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Jn. vi. 21 [Tdf. ἐπὶ τὴν y.]; ὧδε, ib. 25 
(ἐκεῖ, Xen. an. 6,3 [5], 20; [ef. B. 71]); ἐπί with ace. of 
place, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts xxi. 35; (Jn. vi. 21 Tdf.]; 
ἐγένετο διωγμὸς ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, Acts viii. 1; ἐγένετο 
φόβος or θάμβος ἐπὶ πάντας. Lk. i. 65; iv. 86: Acts v. 5, 
11; [ἔκστασις, Acts x. 10 (Ree. ἐπέπεσεν) ; ἕλκος κακὸν 
kK. πονηρὸν ἐπὶ τ. ἀνθρώπους, Rey. xvi. 2 1, Tr WI; 
ἐγένετο ῥῆμα ἐπί τινα, λύγος Or φωνὴ πρός twa (came to) : 
Lk. iii. 2; Jn. x. 35; Acts vii. 31 [Ree.]; x. 18, (Gen. xv. 
1, 4; Jer. i. 2,11; xiii. 8; Ezek. vi. 1; Hos. 1. 1); [ἐπαγ- 
γελία, Acts xiii. 32; xxvi. 6 Rec.]; κατά with ace. of place, 
Lk. x. 32[Tr WH om.]; Acts xxvii. 7, (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 
15); κατά with gen. : τὸ γενόμενον ῥῆμα καθ᾽ ὅλης τῆς Ἴου- 
δαίας the matter the report of which spread throughout 
all Judza, Acts x. 37; πρός twa, 2 Jn. 12 (Ree. ἐλθεῖν) ; 
1 Co. ii. 3; σύν τινι, to be joined to one as an associate, 
Lk. ii. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3,8); ἐγγὺς γίνεσθαι, Eph. ii. 13; 
τινός, Jn. vi. 19; h. [with ἐκ of the source (see 1 
above): Mk. i. 11 (Tdf. om. éeyév.); ix. 7 (T Trmrg. 
WH); Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35; Acts xix. 34]; γίνεσθαι ἐκ 
μέσου, to be taken out of the way, 2 Th. ii. 7; γενέσθαι 
ὁμοθυμαδόν, of many come together in one place, Acts xv. 
25 ef. ii. 1 [but only in RG; γενομένοις ὁμοθυμαδόν in xv. 
25 may mean either having become of one mind, or possi- 
bly having come together with one accord. On the alleged 
use of γίνομαι in the N. T. as. interchangeable with εἰμί 
see Fritzschior. Opusce. p. 284 note. Comp.: ἀπο- d:a-, 
ἐπι-, Tapa-, συμ- Tapa-, Tpo-yivopat. | 

γινώσκω (Attic γιγνώσκω, see γίνομαι init.; fr. TNOQ, 
as βιβρώσκω fr. BPOQ); [impf. ἐγίνωσκον); fut. γνώσομαι ; 
2 aor. ἔγνων (fr. TNQMI), impv. γνῶθι, γνώτω, subj. γνῶ 
(3 pers. sing. γνοῖ, Mk. v. 43; ix. 30; Lk. xix.15 LT Tr 
WH, for RG γνῷ [B. p. 46 (40); cf. δίδωμε init.]), inf. 
γνῶναι, ptep. γνούς ; pf. ἔγνωκα (Jn. xvii. 7; 3 pers. plur. 
ἔγνωκαν for ἐγνώκασι, see reff. in γίνομαι init.); plpf. 
ἐγνώκειν ; Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. γινώσκεται (Mk. xiii. 
23 Trmrg.)]; pf. ἔγνωσμαι ; 1 aor. ἐγνώσθην ; fut. γνωσθή- 
gona; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. for yp; Lat. 
nosco, novi (i. 6. gnosco, gnovi) ; 

I. univ. 1. to learn to know, come to know, get a 
knowledge of; pass. to become known: with ace., Mt. xxii. 
18; Mk. v.43; Actsxxi. 34; 1 Co. iv. 19; 2 Co.ii.4; Col. 
iv. 8; 1 Th. iii. 5,etc. Pass., Mt. x. 26; Acts ix. 24; Phil. 
iv. 5, ete.; [impers. γινώσκεται, Mk. xiii. 28 Trmrg.T 2, 7]; 
τὶ ἔκ τινος, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44; 1 Jn. iv. 6; τινὰ or ri 
ἕν τινι; to find a sign ina thing by which to know, to recog- 
nize in or by something, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35; 1 
Jn. iv. 2; κατὰ τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο, the truth of this promise, 
Lk. i. 18 (Gen. xv. 8) ; περὶ τῆς διδαχῆς, Jn. vii. 17. often 
the object is not added, but is readily understood from 
what precedes: Mt. ix. 30; xii. 15 (the consultation held 
by the Pharisees) ; Mk. vii. 24 (he would have no one 
know that he was present); Mk. ix. 30; Ro. x. 19, ete.; 


117 


γινώσκω 


foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xxi. 45; Jn.iv.1; v. 6; xii. 9, ete.; foll. 
by the interrog. ri, Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xvi. 4; ἀπό τινος, to 
learn from one, Mk. xv. 45. with ace. of pers. to recog- 
nize as worthy of intimacy and love, to own; so those 
whom God has judged worthy of the blessings of the gos- 
pel are said ὑπὸ τοῦ θευῦ γινώσκεσθαι. 1 Co. viii. 3; Gal. 
iv. 9, [on both cf. W. § 39, 3 Note 2; B. 55 (48)]; neg- 
atively, in the sentence of Christ οὐδέποτε ἔγνων ὑμᾶς, I 
never knew you, never had any acquaintance with you, 
Mt. vii. 23. 10 perceive, feel : ἔγνω τῷ σώματι, ὅτι etc. Nik. 
ν. 29; ἔγνων δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν an’ ἐμοῦ, Lk. viii. 46. 
2. to know, understand, perceive, have knowledge of; a. 
to understand : with ace., τὰ λεγόμενα, Lk. xviii. 34; ἃ 
ἀναγινώσκεις, Acts viii. 30; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. 
viii. 27 sq.; 2 Co. xiii. 6; Gal.iii. 7; Jas. ii. 20; foll. by 
interrog, τί, Jn. x. 6; xiii. 12, 28; ὃ κατεργάζομαι ov γι- 
νώσκω I do not understand what I am doing, my conduct 
is inexplicable to me, Ro. vii. 15. Ὅ. to know: τὸ θέλημα, 
Lk. xii. 47; τὰς καρδίας, Lk. xvi. 15 ; τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 
ignorant of sin, i. 6. not conscious of having committed it, 
2 Co. v. 21; ἐπιστολὴ γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη, 2 Co. 
iii. 2; τινά, to know one, his person, character, mind, 
plans: Jn. i. 48 (49); ii. 24; Acts xix. 15; 2 Tim. ii. 19 
(fr. Num. xvi. 5); foll. by ὅτε, Jn. xxi. 17; Phil. i. 12; 
Jas. i. 3; 2 Pet. i. 20; foll. by ace. with inf. Heb. x. 34; 
foll. by an indirect question, Rey. iii. 3; ἑλληνιστὶ ywaor. 
to know Greek (graece scire, Cic. de fin. 2, 5): Acts xxi. 
37, (ἐπίστασθαι συριστί, Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 81; graece nescire, 
Cie. pro Flac. 4, 10); ἴστε (Ree. ἐστε) γινώσκοντες ye 
know, understanding etc. [R. V. ye know of a surety, 
ete.], Eph. v. 5; see W. 355 (333) ; [ef. B. 51 (44); 314 
(269)]. impv. γινώσκετε know ye: Mt. xxiv. 32 sq. 43; 
Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. x. 11; Jn. xv.18; Acts ii. 36; Heb. xiii. 
23; 1 ὅπ. ii. 29. 3. by a Hebraistic euphemism [ef. 
W. 18], found also in Grk. writ. fr. the Alexandrian age 
down, γινώσκω is used of the carnal connection of male 
and female, rem cum aliquo or aliqua habere (cf. our 
have a [criminal] intimacy with): of a husband, Mt. i. 
25; of the woman, Lk. i. 34; (Gen. iv. 1, 17; xix. 8; 1 
S. i. 19, ete.; Judith xvi. 22; Callim. epigr. 58,3; often 
in Plut.; ef. Végelin, Plut. Brut. p. 10 sqq.; so also Lat. 
cognosco, Ovid. met. 4, 596; novi, Justin. hist. 27, 3, 11). 

II. In particular γινώσκω, to become acquainted with, 
to know, is employed in the N. T. of the knowledge of 
God and Christ, and of the things relating to them or pro- 
ceeding from them; a. τὸν θεόν, the one, true God, in 
contrast with the polytheism of the Gentiles: Ro. i. 21; 
Gal. iv. 9; also τὸν μόνον ἀληθινὸν θεόν. Jn. xvii. 3 cf. 1 Jn. 
v. 20; τὸν θεόν, the nature and will of God, in contrast 
with the false wisdom of both Jews and Gentiles, 1 Co. 
i. 21; τὸν πατέρα, the nature of God the Father, esp. 
the holy will and affection by which he aims to sanctify 
and redeem men through Christ, Jn. viii. 55; xvi. 3; 
1 Jn. ii. 3 sq. 14 (13); iii. 1, 6; iv. 8; a peculiar knowl- 
edge of God the Father is claimed by Christ for him- 
self, Jn. x. 15; xvii. 25; γνῶθι τὸν κύριον, the precepts 
of the Lord, Heb. viii. 11; τὸ θέλημα (of God), Ro. ii. 
18; νοῦν κυρίου, Ro. xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 16; τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ 


γινώσκω 


θεοῦ, 1 Co. ii. 8; τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb. iii. 10 (fr. 
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10). b. Χριστόν, his blessings, Phil. 
iii. 10; in Χριστὸν ἐγνωκέναι κατὰ σάρκα, 2 Co. v. 16, 
Paul speaks of that knowledge of Christ which he had 
before his conversion, and by which he knew him merely 
in the form of a servant, and therefore had not yet seen 
in him the Son of God. Acc. toJ olin’s usage, γινώσκειν, 
ἐγνωκέναι Χριστόν denotes to come to know, to know, his 
Messianic dignity (Jn. xvii. 3; vi. 69); his divinity (τὸν 
ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς; 1 In. ii. 13 sq. cf. Jn. i. 10), his consummate 
kindness towards us, and the benefits redoundinz to us 
from fellowship with him (in Christ’s words γινώσκομαι 
ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμῶν, Jn. x. 14 [ace. to the crit. texts γινώσκουσίν 
pe τὰ ἐμά]); his love of God (Jn. xiv. 31); his sinless 
holiness (1 Jn. iii. 6). Johnunitesmorevew and γινώσκειν, 
at one time putting morevew first: vi. 69 [ef. Schaff’s 
Lange or Mey. ad loc.]; but at another time γινώσκειν: 
x. 38 (ace. to RG, for which L T Tr WH read ἵνα γνῶτε 
καὶ γινώσκητε [R. V. know and understand]) ; xvii. 8 [L 
br. κ' ἔγν.7; 1Jn. iv. 16 (the love of God). ¢. y. ra τοῦ 
πνεύματος the things which proceed from the Spirit, 1 Co. 
ii. 14; τὸ πνεῦμα τ. ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πν. τῆς πλάνης, 1 In. iv. 
6; τὰ μυστήρια τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, Mt. xiii. 11; τὴν 
ἀλήθειαν, Jn. viii. 32; 2 Jn. 1; absol., of the knowledge 
of divine things, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of the knowledge of 
things lawful for a Christian, 1 Co. viii. 2. 

[Syn. γινώσκειν, εἰδέναι, ἐπίστασθαι, συνιέναι: 
In classic usage (cf. Schmidt ch. 13), γινώσκειν, distinguished 
from the rest by its original inchoative force, denotes a dis- 
criminating apprehension of external impressions, a knowl- 
edge grounded in personal experience. εἰδέναι, lit. ‘to have 
seen with the mind’s eye,’ signifies a clear and purely mental 
perception, in contrast both to conjecture and to knowledge 
derived from others. ἐπίστασθαι primarily expresses the 
knowledge obtained by proximity to the thing known (cf. 
our understand, Germ. verstehen) ; then knowledge viewed as 
the result of prolonged practice, in opposition to the process 
of learning on the one hand, and to the uncertain knowledge 
of a dilettante on the other. συνιέναι implies native insight, 
the soul’s capacity of itself not only to lay hold of the phe- 
nomena of the outer world through the senses, but by combi- 
nation (σύν and ἱέναι) to arrive at their underlying laws. 
Hence συνιέναι may mark an antithesis to sense-perception ; 
whereas γινώσκειν marks an advance upon it. As applied 
6. g. to a work of literature, γινώσκειν expresses an acquaint- 
ance with it; ἐπίστασθαι the knowledge of its contents; 
συνιέναι the understanding of it, a comprehension of its mean- 
ing. γινώσκειν and εἰδέναι most readily come into contrast 
with each other; if εἰδέναι ἃ ἐπίστασθαι are contrasted, the 
former refers more to natural, the latter to acquired knowl- 
edge. In the N. T., as might be expected, these distinctions 
are somewhat less sharply marked. Such passages as John 
i. 26, 31, 48 (49) ; vii. 27 sq.; xxi. 17; 2Co. ν. 16; 1 Jn. v. 20 
may seem to indicate that, sometimes at least, γινώσκω and 
οἶδα are nearly interchangeable; yet see Jn. iii. 10, 11 ; viii. 
55 (yet cf. xvii. 25); 1 Jn. ii. 29 (know. . . perceive), and the 
characteristic use of εἰδέναι by John to describe our Lord’s 
direct insight into divine things: iii. 11; v.32 (contrast 42) ; 
Vii. 29; vill. 55; xii. 50, etc; cf. Bp. Lghtft.’s note on Gal. 
iv. 9; Green, ‘Critical Notes’ etc. p. 75 (on Jn. viii. 55); 
Westcott on John ii. 24. γινώσκω and ἐπίσταμαι are associ- 
ated in Acts xix. 15 (cf. Green, as above, p. 97); olda and 


118 


γλῶσσα 


γινώσκω in! Ὁ, 11. 11; Eph ν. 5 ; οἶδα and ἐπίσταμαι in Jude 
10. Οομρ.: ἀνα-, δια-, ἐπι-, κατα-, προ-γινώσκω. 

γλεῦκος, -ous, τό, must, the sweet juice pressed from the 
grape; Nicand. alex. 184, 299; Plut., al.; Job xxxii. 19; 
sweet wine: Acts ii. 13. [Cf BB. DD. 5. v. Wine.]* 

γλυκύς, -εἴα, τύ, sweet: Jas. iii. 11 (opp. to πικρόν); 12 
(opp. to ἁλυκόν); Rey. x. 9, [10]. [From Hom. down.]* 

γλῶσσα, -ns, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], the tongue ; 1. the 
tongue, a member of the body, the organ of speech: Mk. 
vii. 88, 35; Lk. i. 64; xvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Jas. i. 26; 
iii. 5, 6, 8; 1 Pet. iii 10; 1 Jn. iii. 18; [Rev. xvi. 10]. 
By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistic, that 
member of the body which is chiefly engaged in some act 
has ascribed to it what belongs to the man; the tongue 
is so used in Acts ii. 26 (Πγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά pov); Ro. 
iii. 13; xiv.11; Phil.ii. 11 (the tongue of every man) ; of 
the little tongue-like flames symbolizing the gift of foreign 
tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a tongue, i. 6. the language 
used by a particular people in distinction from that of 
other nations: Acts ii. 11; hencein later Jewish usage (Is. 
Ixvi. 18; Dan. iii. 4; v. 19 Theod.; vi. 25; vii. 14 Theod.; 
Jud. iii. 8) joined with φυλή, λαός, ἔθνος, it serves to desig- 
nate people of various languages [cf. W. 32], Rev. v. 9; 
vii. 9; χ. 11; xi. 9; xiii. 7; xiv.6; xvii. 15. λαλεῖν ére- 
pas γλώσσαις to speak with other than their native i. 6. in 
foreign tongues, Acts ii. 4 cf. 6-11; γλώσσαις λαλεῖν και- 
vais to speak with new tongues which the speaker has not 
learned previously, Mk. xvi. 17 [but Tr txt. WH txt. om. 
Tr mrg. br. καιναῖς ]; cf. De Wette on Acts p. 27 sqq. [cor- 
rect and supplement his reff. by Mey. on 1 Co. xii. 10; 
cf. also B. D. s. v. Tongues, Gifi of]. From both these 
expressions must be carefully distinguished the simple 
phrases λαλεῖν γλώσσαις, γλώσσαις λαλεῖν, λαλεῖν γλώσσῃ, 
γλώσσῃ λαλεῖν (and προσεύχεσθαι γλώσσῃ, 1 Co. xiv. 14), 
to speak with (in) a tongue (the organ of speech), to speak 
with tongues ; this, as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 7 sqq., is the 
gift of men who, rapt in an ecstasy and no longer quite 
masters of their own reason and consciousness, pour forth 
their glowing spiritual emotions in strange utterances, 
rugged, dark, disconnected, quite unfitted to instruct or to 
influence the minds of others: Acts x. 46; xix. 6; 1 Co. 
xii. 30; xiii. 1; xiv. 2,4-6, 13, 18, 23, 27,39. The origin of 
the expression is apparently to be found in the fact, that 
in Hebrew the tongue is spoken of as the leading instru- 
ment by which the praises of God are proclaimed (ἡ τῶν 
θείων ὕμνων μελῳδός, 4 Mace. x. 21, ef. Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 
28; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 17; Lxx. (Ixxi.) 24; exxv. (exxvi.) 2; Acts 
ii. 26; Phil. ii. 11; λαλεῖν ἐν γλώσσῃ, Ps. xxviii. (xxxix.) 
4), and that according to the more rigorous conception 
of inspiration nothing human in an inspired man was 
thought to be active except the tongue, put in motion by 
the Holy Spirit (καταχρῆται ἕτερος αὐτοῦ τοῖς φωνητηρίοις 
ὀργάνοις, στόματι καὶ γλώττῃ πρὸς μήνυσιν ὧν ἂν θέλῃ, 
Philo, rer. div. haer. § 53, [i.510 ed. Mang.]) ; hence the 
contrast 644 τοῦ vods (crit. edd. τῷ vot | λαλεῖν, 1 Co. xiv. 
19 cf. 9. The plur. in the phrase γλώσσαις λαλεῖν, used 
even of a single person (1 Co. xiv. 5 sq.), refers to the 
various motions of the tongue. By meton. of the cause for 


γλωσσόκομον 


the effect, γλῶσσαι tongues are equiv. to λόγοι ἐν γλώσσῃ 
(1 Co. xiv. 19) words spoken in a tongue (Zungenvortra- 
ge): xiii. 8; xiv. 22; γένη γλωσσῶν, 1 Co. xii. 10, 28, of 
which two kinds are mentioned viz. προσευχή and ψαλμός, 
1 Co. xiv. 15; γλῶσσαν ἔχω, something to utter with a 
tongue, 1 Co. xiv. 26. [On ‘Speaking with Tongues’ 
see, in addition to the discussions above referred to, 
Wendt in the 5th ed. of Meyer on Acts (ii. 4); Heinrici, 
Korinthierbriefe, i. 372 sqq.; Schaff, Hist. of the Chr. 
Church, i. 234-245 (1882); Farrar, St. Paul, i. 95 sqq.]* 

γλωσσόκομον, -ov, τό, (for the earlier γλωσσοκομεῖον or 
γλωσσοκόύμιον [W. 24 (23), 94 (90); yet see Boeckh, 
Corp. inserr. 2448, viii. 25, 31], fr. yAdooa and κομέω to 
tend); a. acase in which to keep the mouth-pieces of 
wind instruments. b. a small box for other uses also; esp. 
a casket, purse to keep money in: Jn. xii. 6; xiii. 29; cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 98 sq. (For })78 a chest, 2 Chr. xxiv. 
8, 10 sq.; Joseph. antt. 6, 1, 2; Plut., Longin., al.) * 

γναφεύς, -έως, 6, (also [earlier] κναφεύς, fr. γνάπτω or 
κνάπτω to card), a fuller: Mk. ix. 3. (Hdt., Xen., and 
566. : Sept. Is. vii. 3; xxxvi. 2; 2 K. xviii. 17.) * 

γνήσιος, -a, -ον, (by syncope for γενήσιος fr. γίνομαι, 
yev-, (ef. Curtius § 128]), legitimately born, not spurious ; 
genuine, true, sincere: Phil. iv. 3; 1 Tim. i. 2; Tit. 1.4; 
τὸ τῆς ἀγάπης γνήσιον i. 4. τὴν γνησιότητα [A. V. the sin- 
cerity}, 2 Co. viii. 8. (From Hom. down.) * 

γνησίως, adv., genuinely, faithfully, sincerely: Phil. ii. 
20. [From Eur. down. ]* 

γνόφος, -ov, -6, (for the earlier [and poetic] δνόφος, 
akin to νέφος [so Bitm. Lexil. ii. 266; but see Curtius 
pp: 704 sq. 706, ef. 535; Vanicek p. 1070]), darkness, 
gloom: Heb. xii. 18. (Aristot. de mund. ο. 2 fin. p. 392, 
12; Leian. de mort. Peregr. 43; Dio Chrys.; Sept. also 
for jaya cloud, Deut. iv. 11, ete. and for Saw. ‘thick 
cloud,’ Ex. xx. 21, ete.; [Trench ὃ c.].) * 

γνώμη, -ns, 9, (fr. γινώσκω) ; 1. the faculty of know- 
ing, mind, reason. 2. that which is thought or known, 
one’smind; a. view, judgment, opinion: 1 Co.i. 10; Rey. 
xvii. 13. b. mind concerning what ought to be done, 
aa. by one’s self, resolve, purpose, intention: ἐγένετο 
γνώμη [T Tr WH γνώμης, see γίνομαι 5 6. α.] τοῦ ὑποστρέ- 
φειν, Acts xx. 3 [Β. 268 (230)]. bb. by others, judg- 
ment, advice: διδόναι γνώμην, 1 Co. vii. 25, [40]; 2 Co. viii. 
10. cc. decree: Rev. xvii. 17; χωρὶς τῆς σῆς γνώμης, 
without thy consent, Philem. 14. (In the same senses in 
Grk. writ.; [οἷς Schmidt, ch. 13, 9; Mey. on 1 Co. i. 10].) * 

γνωρίζω ; fut. γνωρίσω (Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. vi. 21; Col. 
iv. 7), Attic 16 (Col. iv. 9 [L WH -ίσω; B. 37 (32); 
WH. App. p. 163]); 1 aor. ἐγνώρισα; Pass., [pres. γνωρί- 
Coat]; 1 aor. ἐγνωρίσθην; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
down [see ad fin.]; Sept. for yin and Chald. pryn; 
1. trans. to make known: ri, Ro. ix. 22 sq.; τί τινι, Lk. 
ii. 15; Jn. xv. 15; xvii. 26; Acts ii. 28; 2 Co. viii. 1; 
Eph. iii. 5, 10, [pass. in these two exx.]; Eph. vi. 21; 
Col. iv. 7,9; 2 Pet. 1. 16; τινὶ τὸ μυστήριον, Eph. i. 9; 
iii. 3 [G LT Tr WH read the pass.]; vi. 19; τινὶ ὅτι, 
1 Co. xii. 3; τινί τι, ὅτι 1. GQ. τινὶ ὅτι τι, Gal. i. 11; foll. by 
τί interrog. Col. i. 27; περί τινος, Lk. ii. 17 LT Tr WH; 


119 


γνωστὸς 


γνωριζέσθω πρὸς τὸν θεόν be brought to the knowledge of 
God, Phil. iv. 6 ; γνωρίζεσθαι εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη to be made 
known unto all the nations, Ro. xvi. 26; contextually 
and emphatically i. q. to recall to one’s mind, as though 
what is made known had escaped him, 1 Co. xy. 1; with 
ace. of pers. [(Plut. Fab. Max. 21, 6)], in pass., to 
become known, be recognized: Acts vii. 13 Tr txt. WH 
txt. 2. intrans. to know: τί αἱρήσομαι, ov γνωρίζω, Phil. 
i. 22 [WH mrg. punctuate τί aip.; οὐ Ὑν.} some refer 
this to 1 (R. V.mrg. I do not make known), cf. Mey. ad 
loc. In earlier Grk. γνωρίζω signifies either ‘to gain a 
knowledge of,’ or ‘ to have thorough knowledge of.’ Its 
later (and N. T.) causative force seems to be found 
only in Aeschyl. Prom. 487; cf. Schmidt vol. i. p. 287; 
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1.c. Comp.: dva-, δια-γνωρίζω." 

γνῶσις, -ews, 7, (γινώσκω), [fr. Thuc. down], knowl- 
edge: with gen. of the obj., σωτηρίας, Lk. i. 77; τοῦ 
θεοῦ, the knowledge of God, such as is offered in the 
gospel, 2 Co. ii. 14, esp. in Paul’s exposition of it, 2 Co. 
x. 5; τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. iv. 6; 
ἸΙησοῦ Χριστοῦ, of Christ as a saviour, Phil. iii. 8; 2 Pet. 
iii. 18; with subj. gen. τοῦ θεοῦ, the knowledge of things 
which belongs to God, Ro. xi. 33. γνῶσις, by itself, sig- 
nifies in general intelligence, understanding: Eph. iii. 19; 
the general knowledge of the Christian religion, Ro. xv. 
14; 1 Co. i. 5; the deeper, more perfect and enlarged 
knowledge of this religion, such as belongs to the more 
advanced, 1 Co. xii. 8; xiii. 2, 8; xiv. 6; 2Co. vi. 6; viii. 7; 
xi. 6; esp. of things lawful and unlawful for Christians, 1 
Co. viii. 1,7, 10 sq.; the higher knowledge of Christian 
and divine things which false teachers boast of, ψευδώνυ- 
μος γνῶσις, 1 Tim. vi. 20 [ef. Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe, 
p- 132 sq.]; moral wisdom, such as is seen in right living, 
2 Pet. i. 5; and in intercourse with others : 
wisely, 1 Pet. iii. 7. objective knowledge: what is known 
concerning divine things and human duties, Ro. ii. 20; 
Col. ii. 3; concerning salvation through Christ, Lk. xi. 
52. Where γνῶσις and σοφία are used together the for- 
mer seems to be knowledge regarded by itself, the 
latter wisdom as exhibited in action: Ro. xi. 33; 1 
Co. xii. 8; Col. ii.3. [yv. is simply intuitive, cod. is 
ratiocinative also; yv. applies chiefly to the appre- 
hension of truths, cod. superadds the power of reason- 
ing about them and tracing their relations.” Bp. Lehtft. 
on Col.l.c. To much the same effect Fritzsche (on Ro. 
1. ¢.), “yv. perspicientia veri, cod. sapientia aut mentis 
sollertia, que cognita intellectaque veritate utatur, ut res 
efficiendas efficiat.” Meyer (on 1 Co. 1. 6.) nearly re- 
verses Lehtft.’s distinction ; elsewhere, however (6. σ᾿ on 
Col. 1. c., ef. i. 9), he and others regard cod. merely as 
the more general, yv. as the more restricted and special 
term. Cf. Lghtft. u. s.; Trench ἃ lxxv.]* 

γνώστης, -ov, ὁ, (a knower), an expert; a connoisseur: 
Acts xxvi. 3. (Plut. Flam. ο. 4; θεὸς ὁ τῶν κρυπτῶν 
γνώστης, Hist. Sus. vs. 42; of those who divine the future, 
1S. xxviii. 3, 9, etc.) * 

γνωστός, -7, -όν, known: Acts ix. 42; τινί, Jn. xviii. 15 
sq.; Actsi.19; χν. 18 RL; xix. 17; xxviii. 22; γνωστὸν 


κατὰ γνῶσιν, 


γογγύζω 


ἔστω ὑμῖν be it known to you: Acts ii. 14; iv. 10; xiii. 38; 
xxviii. 28; contextually, notable, Acts iv. 16; γνωστὸν 
ποιεῖν to make known, disclose: Acts xv. 17 sq. GT Tr 
WH [al. construe γνωστ. as pred. of ταῦτα: R. V. mrg. 
who doeth these things which were known; cf. Mey. ad 
loe.]. τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, either thal which may be 
known of God, or i. q. γνῶσις τοῦ θεοῦ, for both come to 
the same thing: Ro. i. 19; ef. Fritzsche ad loc. and W. 
235 (220), [and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. plur. οἱ 
γνωστοί acquaintance, intimates, (Ps. Xxx. (Xxxi.) 12; 
[Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 9,19]; Neh. v.10): Lk. ii. 44; xxiii. 
49. (In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

γογγύζω ; impf. ἐγόγγυζον ; 1 aor. éyoyyuoa; to murmur, 
mutter, grumble, say anything in a low tone, (ace. to Pollux 
and Phavorinus used of the cooing of doves, like the 
τονθρύζω and τονθορύζω of the more elegant Grk. writ. ; 
cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 358; [W. 22; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 
ii. 14]); hence of those who confer together secretly, ri 
περί τινος, Jn. vil. 32; of those who discontentedly com- 
plain: 1 Co. x. 10; πρός τινα, Lk. v. 30; per’ ἀλλήλων, 
Jn. vi. 43; κατά τινος, Mt. xx. 11; περί τινος, Jn. vi. 41, 
61. (Sept.; Antonin. 2, 3; Epict. diss. 1, 29, 55; 4, 1, 
79; [al.].) [Comp.: δια- γογγύζω.] * 

γογγυσμός, -οῦ, 6, (γογγύζω, q. ν.}, @ murmur, murmur- 
ing, muttering; applied to a. secret debate: περί twos, 
Jn. vii. 12. Ὁ. secret displeasure, not openly avowed: 
πρός twa, Acts vi. 1; in plur. χωρὶς or ἄνευ yoyyvopav 
without querulous discontent, without murmurings, i. e. 
with a cheerful and willing mind, Phil. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iv. 
9 (where L T Tr WH read the sing.). (Ex. xvi. 7 sqq. ; 
Sap. i. 10 sq. ; Antonin. 9, 37.) * 

γογγυστής, -ov, 6, a murmurer, (Vulg., Augustine, mur- 
murator), one who discontentedly complains (against 
God; for μεμψίμοιροι is added): Jude 10. [Prov. xxvi. 
21 Theod., 22 Symm.; xxvi. 20, 22 Graec. Ven.]* 

γόης, τητος, ὁ, (yodw to bewail, howl) ; 1. a wailer, 
howler: Aeschyl. choéph. 823 [Hermann et al. γοητής ]. 
2. a juggler, enchanter, (because incantations used to be 
uttered in a kind of howl). 3. a deceiver, impostor : 
2 Tim. iii. 13; (Hdt., Eur., Plat., and subseq. writ.).” 

Γολγοθά [Tr WH, or -θὰ R G LT (see Τὰ Proleg. 
p- 102; Kautzsch p. 10); 4150 -ὁθ L WH mrg. in Jn. xix. 
17; ace. -av Tdf. in Mk. xv. 22 (WH-ay, see their App. 
p- 160), elsewhere indecl., W. 61 (60)], Golgotha, Chald. 
79252, Heb. nada (fr. 551 to roll), i. 6. κρανίον, a skuil 
[Lat. calvaria], the name of a place outside of Jerusa- 
lem where Jesus was crucified; so called, apparently, 
because its form resembled a skull: Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk. 
xv. 22; Jn. xix.17. Cf. Tobler, Golgatha. St. Gall. 1851; 
Furrer in Schenkel ii. 506 sqq.; Keim, Jesus von Naz. 
iii. 404 sq.; [Porter in Alex.’s Kitto 5. v.; F. Howe, The 
true Site of Calvary, N. Y., 1871].* 

Tépoppa [or Γομόρρα, cf. Chandler § 167], -as, ἡ, and -ὧν, 
ra, (cf. B. 18 (16); Tdf Proleg. p. 116; WH. App. p. 
156], Gomorrah, (1.2), cf. 71) Gaza), the name of a city 
in the eastern part of Judea, destroyed by the same earth- 
quake [ef. B. D.s. ν. Sea, The Salt] with Sodom and its 
neighbor cities: Gen. xix. 24. Their site is now occu- 


120 


γράμμα 


pied by the Asphaltic Lake or Dead Sea [ef. BB. DD. 
s. vv. Gomorrah and Sodom]: Mt. x. 15; Mk. vi. 11 RL 
in br.; Ro. ix. 29; 2 Pet. ii. 6; Jude 7.* 

γόμος, -ov, ὁ, (γέμω); a. the lading or freight of a ship, 
cargo, merchandise conveyed ina ship: Acts xxi. 3, (Hat. 
1, 194; [Aeschyl.], Dem., al.; [in Sept. the load of a 
beast of burden, Ex. xxiii.5; 2.K.v.17]). Ὁ. any mer- 
chandise: Rev. xviii. 11 sq.* 

γονεύς, -€ws, ὁ, (TENQ, γέγονα), [Hom. h. Cer., Hes., 
al.] ; a begetter, parent; plur. οἱ γονεῖς the parents: Lk. it 
41,43 Ltxt. T Tr WH; [viii. 56]; xxi. 16; Jn. ix. 2, 3, 
20, 22, 23; 2Co. xii.14; Ro.i.30; Eph. vi.1; Col. iii. 
20; 2 Tim. iii. 2; ace. plur. γονεῖς: Mt. x. 21; [xix. 29 
Lehm. mrg.]; Lk. ii. 27; [xviii 29]; Mk. xiii. 12; [Jn. 
ix. 18]; on this form οἵ. W. § 9, 2; [B. 14 (13)].* 

γόνυ, γύνατος, τό, [fr. Hom. down], the knee: Heb. xii. 
12; τιθέναι τὰ γόνατα to bend the knees, kneel down, of 
persons supplicating: Lk. xxii. 41; Acts vii. 60; ix. 40; 
xx. 36; xxi. 5; of [mock] worshippers, Mk. xv. 19, so 
also προσπίπτειν τοῖς γόνασί twos, Lk. ν. 8 (of a suppliant 
in Eur. Or. 1332); κάμπτειν τὰ γόνατα to bow the knee, of 
those worshipping God or Christ: τινί, Ro. xi. 4; πρός 
twa, Eph. iii. 14; reflexively, γόνυ κάμπτει τινί, fo i.e. in 
honor of one, Ro. xiv. 11 (1 K. xix. 18) ; ἐν ὀνόματι ᾿Ιησοῦ, 
Phil. ii. 10 (Is. xlv. 28)." 

γονυπετέω, -@; 1 aor. ptep. γονυπετήσας; (γονυπετής, 
and this fr. γόνυ and ΠΕΤῺ i. q. πίπτω) ; to fall on the 
knees, the act of one imploring aid, and of one express- 
ing reverence and honor: τινί, Mt. xvii. 14 Ree.; τινά, 
ibid.G L T Tr WI; Mk. i.40 RG Tr txt. br. WH br.; x. 
17; ef. W. 210 (197); [B. 147 sq. (129)]; ἔμπροσθέν 
twos, Mt. xxvii. 29. (Polyb., Heliod.; eccl. writ.) * 

γράμμα, -ros, τό, (γράφω), that which has been written ; 
1. a letter i. e. the character: Lk. xxiii. 388 [R G Lbr. Tr 
mrg. br.]; Gal. vi. 11. 2. any writing, a document or 
record; a. a note of hand, bill, bond, account, written ac- 
knowledgment of debt, (as scriptio in Varr. sat. Men. 8, 1 
[ef. Edersheim ii. 268 sqq.]): Lk. xvi. 6 sq. ((Joseph. 
antt. 18, 6,3], in Ltxt. T Tr WH plur. τὰ γράμματα; so 
of one document also in Antiph. p. 114, (30); Dem. p. 
1034, 16; Vulg. cautio). b. a letter, an epistle: Acts 
xxviii. 21; (Hdt. 5, 14; Thue. 8, 50; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 
26, etc.). ©. τὰ ἱερὰ γράμματα the sacred writings (of the 
O. T.; [so Joseph. antt. prooem. § 3; 10, 10,4 fin.; 6. Ap. 
1, 10; Philo, de vit. Moys. 3, 39; de praem. et poen. § 14; 
leg. ad Gai. § 29, ete.— but always rai. y.]): 2 Tim. iii. 15 
[here T WHom. L Tr br. ra]; γράμμα i. q. the written 
law of Moses, Ro. ii. 27; Μωῦσέως γράμματα, Jn. ν. 47. 
Since the Jews so clave to the letter of the law that 
it not only became to them a mere letter but also a hin- 
drance to true religion, Paul calls it γράμμα in a disparag- 
ing sense, and contrasts it with τὸ πνεῦμα i.e. the divine 
Spirit, whether operative in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 29, 
or in the gospel, by which Christians are governed, Ro. 
vii. 6; 2 Co. iii. 6 sq. [but in vs. 7RGT WH read the 
plur. written in letters, so Lmrg. Tr mrg.]. 3. ra 
γράμματα, like the Lat. litterae, Eng. letters, i. 4. learning: 
Acts xxvi. 24; εἰδέναι, μεμαθηκέναι yp. (cf. Germ. studirt 


γραμματεύς 


haben), of sacred learning, Jn. vii.15. (μανθάνειν, ἐπίστα- 
σθαι. etc., γράμματα are used by the Greeks of the rudi- 
ments of learning; cf. Passow i. p. 571; [L. and S. 8. v. 
1. 5.» 

γραμματεύς, -έως, (acc. plur. -eis, W. 8.9, 2; [Β. 14 
(13)]), 6, (γράμμα), Sept. for 35 and "δῷ; 1. in 
prof. auth. and here and there in the O. T. [e. g. 2S. 
vill. 17; xx. 25; 2 K. xix. 2; xxv. 19; Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 2], 
a clerk, scribe, esp. a public scribe, secretary, recorder, 
whose office and influence differed in different states: 
Acts xix. 35, (Sir. x. 5); [ef. Lghtfl. in The Contemp. 
Rey. for 1878, p. 294; Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus, 
App. Inserr. fr. the Great Theatre, p. 49 n.]. 2. in 
the Bible, a man learned in the Mosaic law and in the 
sacred writings, an interpreter, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 34; 1 
Co. i. 20, (called also vopixds in Lk. x. 25, and νομοδιδά- 
σκαλος in Lk. v.17; [Meyer (on Mt. xxii. 35), while deny- 
ing any essential diff. betw. γραμματεύς and νομικύς 
(cf. Lk. xi. 52, 53 — yet see crit. txts.), regards the latter 
name as the more specific (a jurisconsult) and Classic, 
yp- as the more general (a learned man) and Hebraistic ; 
it is also the more common in the Apoer., where vou. 
occurs only 4 Mace. v. 3. As teachers they were called 
νομοδιδάσκαλοι. Cf. Β. D.s. v. Lawyer, also s.v. Scribes 
I. 1 note]}); Jer. viii. 8 (ef. ii. 8); Neh. viii. 1 sq.; xii. 
26, 36; 2 Esdr. vii. 6, 11, and esp. Sir. xxxviii. 24, 31 
sqq-; xxxix. 1-11. The γραμματεῖς explained the mean- 
ing of the sacred oracles, Mt. ii. 4 [γρ. τοῦ λαοῦ, Josh. i. 10; 
1 Mace. v. 42; cf. Sir. xliv. 4]; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11; xii. 
35; examined into the more difficult and subtile ques- 
tions of the law, Mt. ix.3; Mk. ii. 6 sq.; xii. 28; added 
to the Mosaic law decisions of various kinds thought to 
elucidate its meaning and scope, and did this to the detri- 
ment of religion, Mt. v. 20; xv. 1 sqq.; xxiii. 2 sqq.; Mk. 
vii. 1 sqq.; ef. Lk. xi. 46. Since the advice of men skilled 
in the law was needed in the examination of causes and 
the solution of difficult questions, they were enrolled in 
the Sanhedrin; and accordingly in the N. T. they are 
often mentioned in connection with the priests and elders 
of the people: Mt. xxi. 15; xxvi.3 RG; Mk. xi. 18, 27; 
xiv, 1; xv- ἢ; Lk. xix. 47; xx.1; xxii-2. Cf. Schirer, 
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 25 ii.; A/épper in Schenkel v. 247 
sqq-; [and thorough articles in BB.DD. 5. v. Scribes; cf. 
W. Robertson Smith, The O. T. in the Jewish Ch., Lect. 
iii. ]. 3. univ. a religious teacher: γραμματεὺς pabnrev- 
θεὶς εἰς τὴν βασιλ. τῶν οὐρ. a teacher so instructed that 
from his learning and ability to teach advantage may 
redound to the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xiii. 52 [but G T 
Tr WH read μαθ. τῇ βασιλείᾳ (L ἐν τ. B.); and many in- 
terpret made a disciple unto the k. of h. (which is person- 
ified); see μαθητεύω, fin.]. 

γραπτός, -7, -dv, written: Ro. ii.15. [Gorg. apol. Palam. 
p- 190 sub fin. ; Sept.; al.]* 

γραφή, -ῆς, 7, (γράφω. cf. γλυφή and γλύφω): a. α 
writing, thing written, [fr. Soph. down] : πᾶσα γραφή every 
scripture sc. of the O. T., 2 Tim. iii. 16; plur. γραφαὶ 
ἅγιαι, holy scriptures, the sacred books (of the O. T.), 
Ro. i. 2; προφητικαί, Ro. xvi. 26 ; ai γραφαὶ τῶν προφητῶν. 


121 


γράφω 


Mt. xxvi. 56. b. ἡ γραφή, the Scripture κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν, the 
holy scripture (of the O.'T.), —and used to denote either 
the book itself, or its contents [some would restrict the 
sing. γραφή always to ἃ particular passage; see Bp. 
Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 22]: Jn. vii. 38; x. 35; Acts viii. 32; 
Ro. iv. 3; Gal. iii. 22; iv. 30; Jas. ii. 8; 1 Pet.ii. 6; 2 
Pet. i. 20; also in plur. ai γραφαί: Mt. xxi. 42; xxvi. 54; 
MK. xiv. 49; Lk. xxiv. 27; Jn. v. 39; Acts xvii. 2, 11; 
xviii. 24, 28; 1 Co. χν. 8 sq.; once ai ypapai comprehends 
also the books of the N. T. already begun to be collected 
into a canon, 2 Pet. iii. 16; by meton. ἡ γραφή is used 
for God speaking in it: Ro. ix. 17; Gal. iv. 30; ἡ γραφή 
is introduced as a person and distinguished from God in 
Gal. iii.8. εἰδέναι tas γραφάς, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii. 24; 
συνιέναι, Lk. xxiv. 45. ο. a certain portion or section of 
holy Scripture: Mk. xii. 10; Lk. iv. 21; Jn. xix. 37; Acts 
i. 16. [Cf£. B.D. 5. v. Scripture.] 

γράφω ; [impf. ἔγραφον]; fut. γράψω; 1 aor. ἔγραψα; 
pf. γέγραφα; Pass., [pres. γράφομαι]; pf. γέγραμμαι ; 
[plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγέγραπτο, Rev. xvii. 8 Lchm.]; 2 
aor. ἐγράφην ; (prop. to grave, scrape, scratch, engrave ; 
ef. Germ. graben, eingraben ; γράψεν δὲ οἱ ὀστέον ἄχρις 
αἰχμή, Hom. Il. 17, 599; σήματα γράψας ἐν πίνακι, ib. 6, 
169; hence to draw letters), towrite; 1. with reference 
to the form of the letters; to delineate (or form) letters 
on a tablet, parchment, paper, or other material: τῷ 8a- 
κτύλῳ ἔγραφεν eis τὴν γῆν made figures on the ground, Jn. 
viii. 6 Rec. ; οὕτω γράφω so am I accustomed to form my 
letters, 2 Thess. iii. 17; πηλίκοις γράμμασι ἔγραψα with 
how large (and so, ill-formed [?]) letters I have written, 
Gal. vi. 11; ef. Winer, Riickert, Hilgenfeld ad loe. [for 
the views of those who regard éyp. as covering the close 
of the Ep. only, see Bp. Lghtft. and Mey.; cf. W. 278 
(261); B. 198 (171 sq.)]. 2. with reference to the 
contentsof the writing; a. to express in written char- 
acters, foll. by the words expressed : ἔγραψε λέγων: Ἰωάν- 
ms ἐστὶ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, Lk. i. 63; μὴ γράφε- ὁ βασιλεὺς 
τῶν Ἰουδαίων κτὰ. Jn. xix. 21; γράψον. μακάριοι κτλ. 
Rev. xiv. 18. γράφω τι, Jn. xix. 22; pass. Rev. i. 3; τὶ 
ἐπί τι, Rev. ii. 17; xix. 165 τὶ ἐπί τινα, iil. 12; ἐπί τινος. 
xiv. 1.  b. to commit to writing (things not to be for- 
gotten), write down, record : Rev. i. 19 (γράψον ἃ εἶδες); 
x. 4; γράφειν eis βιβλίον, Rev. i. 11; ἐπὶ τὸ βιβλίον τῆς 
ζωῆς, Rev. xvii. 8: yeypapu. ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ [or τῇ βίβλῳ, ἐν 
τοῖς βιβλίοις, Rev. xiii. 8; xx. 12,15; xxi. 27; xxii. 18, 
19; τὰ ὀνόματα ὑμῶν ἐγράφη [ἐν-(ἐγ- Tr see N,v) yéyp-T Tr 
WH] ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. i.e. that ye have been enrolled 
with those for whom eternal blessedness has been pre- 
pared, Lk. x. 20; γράφειν ri τινι, to record something for 
some one’s use, Lk.i.3. ὁ. ἐγράφη and γέγραπται (in the 
Synoptists and Paul), and γεγραμμένον ἐστί (in John), 
are used of those things which stand written in the sacred 
books (of the O. T.); absol. γέγραπται. foll. by the quo- 
tation fr. the sacred vol.: Mt. iv. 4, 6 Sq. 105) αν 15); 
Mk. vii. 6; xi. 17; xiv. 27; Lk. iv. 8: xix. 46: xaos 
γέγραπται, Acts xv. 15, very often in Paul, as Ro. i. 17; 
ii. 24; iii. 4 [see below]; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 9; 2 Co. viii. 15; 
ix. 9; καθάπερ yeyp. Ro. xi. 8 T Tr WH; [iii. 4 T Tr 


“ραώδης 1 


WH); γέγραπται γάρ, Mt. xxvi. 31; Lk. ἵν. 10; Acts 
xxiii. 5; Ro. xii. 19; xiv. 115; 1 Co. iii. 19; Gal. iii. 10, 13 
Rec. ; iv. 22, 27; ὁ λόγος ὁ γεγραμμένος, 1 Co. xv. 54; κατὰ 
τὸ γεγραμμένον, 2 Co. iv. 13; γεγραμμένον ἐστί, Jn. ii. 17; 
vi. 31; xii. 14; ἐγράφη δὲ πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν, 1 Co. x. 
11; ἐγράφη δι᾽ ἡμᾶς for our sake, Ro. iv. 24; 1 Co. ix. 10; 
with the name of the author of the written words or of 
the books in which they are found: γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ 
ψαλμῶν, Acts i. 20; ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν, Acts vii. 42; 
ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ [R WH δευτέρῳ] ψαλμῷ, Acts xiii. 33; ἐν 
Ἡσαΐᾳ, ΜΚ. i. 2 [not Rec.], ete. τινά or τί to write of i. 6. 
in writing to mention or refer to a person or a thing: ὃν 
ἔγραψε Μωῦσῆς whom Moses had in mind in writing of 
the Messiah, or whose likeness Moses delineated, Jn. i. 
45 (46); Μωῦσῆς γράφει τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου, 
Moses, writing the words ὅτι ὁ ποιήσας αὐτά κτλ., points 
out the righteousness which is of the law, Ro. x. ὅ. γέ- 
γραπται, γράφειν, etc. περί τινος, concerning one: Mt. 
xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21; Jn. v. 46; Acts xiii. 29; ἐπὶ τὸν 
υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, that it should find fulfilment in him, 
MK. ix. 12 sq. [ef. ἕνα, I. 2b.]; ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, on him i. 6. of 
him (cf. W. 393 (368) [and ἐπί, Β. 2f. B.]), Jn. xii. 16; 
τὰ γεγραμμένα τῷ υἱῷ Tod avOp. written for him, allotted 
to him in Scripture, i. e. to be accomplished in his ca- 
reer, Lk. xviii. 31; cf. W. § 31, 4; [yet cf. B. 178 (154)]; 
Μωῦσῆς ἔγραψεν ὑμῖν iva ete. Moses in the Scripture com- 
manded us that ete. [ef. B. 237 (204)], Mk. xii. 19; Lk. 
xx. 28. ἃ. γράφειν τινί to write to one i. 6. by writing (in 
a written epistle) to give information, directions, etc. to 
one: Ro. xv. 15; 2 Co. ii. 4, 9 [dat. implied]; vii. 12; 
Philem. 21; 2 Pet. iii. 15; 1 Jn. ii. 12 sqq.; δι᾽ ὀλίγων, 1 
Pet. v. 12; διὰ μέλανος καὶ καλάμου, 3 Jn. 13; foll. by the 
words written or to be written in the letter: Acts xy. 
23; Rev. ii. 1,8, 12,18; iii. 1, 7,145 γράφειν τινί τι, 1 Co. 
xiv. 37; 2 Co.i. 13; ii.3[LT Tr WH om. the dat.]; Gal. 
i, 20; 1 Tim.iii. 14; 1 Jn.i.4 [RGL); ii. 1; περί τινος, 
1 Jn. ii. 26; Actsxxv. 26; 2Co.ix.1; 1 Th.iv.9; v. 1; 
Jude 3; διὰ χειρός τινος, to senda letter by one, Acts xv. 
23 [see χείρ] ; γράφειν τινί, foll. by an inf., by letter to 
bid one do a thing, Acts xviii. 27; foll. by μή with inf. 
(to forbid, write one not to ete.), 1 Co. ν. 9, 11. 3. 
to fill with writing, (Germ. beschreiben) : βιβλίον yeypap- 
μένον ἔσωθεν καὶ ὄπισθεν a volume written within and be- 
hind, on the back, hence on both sides, Rev. v. 1 (Ezek. 
ii. 10); ef. Diisterdieck, [ Alford, al.] ad loc. 4. to 
draw up in writing, compose : βιβλίον, Mk. x. 4; Jn. xxi. 
25 [Tdf. om. the vs.; see WII. App. ad loc.]; τίτλον, In. 
xix. 19; ἐπιστολήν, Acts xxiii. 25; 2 Pet. iii. 1; ἐντολήν 
τινι to write a commandment to one, Mk. x. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 7 
sq-; 2Jn.5. [Comp.: ἀπο-, éy-, ἐπι-, κατα-; mpo-ypapa. | 

γραώδης, -es, (fr. γραῦς an old woman, and εἶδος), old- 
womanish, anile, [A. V. old wives’]: 1 Tim. iv. 7. (Strabo 
1 p. 32 [p. 44 ed. Sieben.]; Galen; al.) * 

γρηγορέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐγρηγόρησα; (fr. ἐγρήγορα, to have 
been roused from sleep, to be awake, pf. of ἐγείρω ; cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 118 sq.; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 158; 
[W. 26 (25); 92 (88)]); to watch; 1. prop.: Mt. 
xxiv. 43; xxvi. 88, 40; Mk. xiii. 34; xiv. 34,37; Lk. xii. 


22 


γυμνότης 


37, 39 RGL Trtxt. WH txt. As to sleep is often i. q. 
to die, so once, 1 Th. v. 10, ypny. means to live, be alive 
on earth. 2. Metaph. to watch i.e. give strict attention 
to, be cautious, active:— to take heed lest through remiss- 
ness and indolence some destructive calamity suddenly 
overtake one, Mt. xxiv. 42; xxv. 13; Mk. xiii. 35, [37]; 
Rev. xvi. 15; or lest one be led to forsake Christ, Mt. 
xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; or lest one fall into sin, 1 Th. v. 
6; 1 Co. xvi. 13; 1 Pet. v. 8; Rev. iii. 2 56. ; or be cor- 
rupted by errors, Acts xx. 31; ἔν τινι, to be watchful in, 
employ the most punctilious care in a thing: Col. iv. 2. 
(Sept. ; [Bar. ii. 9; 1 Mace. xii. 27; Aristot. plant. 1, 2 
p- 816°, 29. 37]; Joseph. antt.11,3,4; Achill. Tat. ; al.) 
[SYN. see dypurvéw. Comp.: δια- γρηγορέω.] " 

γυμνάζω; [pf. pass. ptep. γεγυμνασμένος}; (γυμνός) ; 
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; 11. prop. to ez- 
ercise naked (in the palzstra). 2. to exercise vigor- 
ously, in any way, either the body or the mind: ἑαυτὸν 
πρὸς εὐσέβειαν. of one who strives earnestly to become 
godly, 1 Tim. iv. 7; γεγυμνασμένος exercised, Heb. ν. 14; 
ΧΙ. 11; καρδίαν γεγυμν. πλεονεξίας (Rec. πλεονεξίαις), a 
soul that covetousness or the love of gain has trained in 
its crafty ways, 2 Pet. ii. 14; cf. W. § 30, 4.* 

γυμνασία, -as, ἡ, (γυμνάζω); a. prop. the exercise of 
the body in the palestra. b. any exercise whatever: 
σωματικὴ γυμνασία, the exercise of conscientiousness rel- 
ative to the body, such as is characteristic of ascetics 
and consists in abstinence from matrimony and certain 
kinds of food, 1 Tim. iv. 8. (4 Mace. xi. 19. In Grk. 
writ. fr. Plat. legg. i. p. 648 ec. down.) * 

γυμνητεύω (γυμνϊτεύω LT Tr WH; [ef. Τα, Proleg. 
p- 81; W. 92 (88)]); (γυμνήτης) ; [A. V. literally to be 
naked i. e.] to be lightly or poorly clad: 1 Co.iv.11. (So 
in Dio Chrys. 25, 3 and other later writ.; fo be a light- 
armed soldier, Plut. Aem. 16; Dio Cass. 47, 34, 2.) * 

γυμνός, -7, -dv, in Sept. for DVy and DI}, naked, not 
covered ; 1. prop. a. unclad, without clothing: Mk. 
xiv. 52; Rev. iii. 17; xvi. 15; xvii. 16; τὸ γυμνόν, sub- 
stantively, the naked body: ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ, Mk. xiv. 51; cf. 
Fritzsche ad loc.; (τὰ γυμνά, Leian. nay. 38). b. ill- 
clad: Mt. xxv. 36, 38, 43 sq.; Acts xix. 16 (with torn 
garments) ; Jas. ii. 15; (Job xxii. 6; xxiv. 10; xxvi. 6). 
ce. clad in the undergarment only (the outer garment or 
cloak being laid aside): Jn. xxi. 7; (1S. xix. 24; Is. xx. 
2; Hes. opp. 389; often in Attic; so nudus, Verg. Georg. 
15/299). d. of the soul, whose garment is the body, 
stript of the body, without a body: 2 Co. v. 3, (Plat. Crat. 
c. 20 p. 403 Ὁ. ἡ ψυχὴ γυμνὴ τοῦ σώματος). 2. metaph. 
a. naked, i. e. open, laid bare: Heb. iv. 13, (γυμνὸς ὁ ἅδης 
ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ, Job xxvi. 6; exx. fr. Grk. auth. see in 
Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 585). b. only, mere, bare, i. q. 
ψιλός (like Lat. nudus) : γυμνὸς κόκκος, mere grain, not 
the plant itself, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 24, 5 
σπέρματα πεσόντα εἰς THY γῆν ξηρὰ καὶ γυμνὰ διαλύεται)" 

γυμνότης, -nros, ἧ, (γυμνός), nakedness: of the body, 
Rev. iii. 18 (see αἰσχύνη, 3); used of want of clothing, 
Ro. viii. 35; 2 Co. xi. 27. (Deut. xxviii. 48; Antonin. 
11, 27.) * 


γυναικάριον 


γυναικάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. γυνή), a little woman; | 
used contemptuously in 2 Tim. iii. ὁ [A. V. silly women ; 
ef. Lat. muliercula}. (Diocles. com. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 
87, 4; Antonin. 5, 11; occasionally in Epictet.) On | 
dimin. ending in ἄριον see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180; Fritz- 
sche on Mk. p. 638; [cef. W. 24, 96 (91) ].* 

γυναικεῖος, -εία, -eiov, of or belonging to a woman, femi- 
nine, female: 1 Pet. iii. 7. (From Hom. down; Sept.) * 

γυνή, -αικός, ἡ; 1. univ. a woman of any age, wheth- 
er a virgin, or married, or a widow: Mt. ix. 20; xiii. 33; 
xxvii. 55; Lk. xiii. 11; Acts v. 14, ete.; ἡ μεμνηστευμένη 
τινὶ γυνή, Lk. ii. 5 RG; ἡ ὕπανδρος γυνή, Ro. vii. 2 ; γυνὴ 
xnpa, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14); xvii. 9; femina vidua, | 
Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife: 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq.; | 
Eph. ν. 22, ete.; γυνή τινος, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; xix. 3,5; Acts 
v. 1, 7; 1 Co. vii. 2; Eph. v. 28; Rev. ii. 20 [G L WH 
mrg.], ete. of a betrothed woman: Mt. i. 20, 24. ἡ γυνὴ 
τοῦ πατρός his step-mother: 1 Co. v. 1 (38 NW, Lev. xviii. 
8). ἔχειν γυναῖκα : Mt. xiv.4; xxii. 28; Mk. vi. 18; xii. 
23; Lk. xx. 33; see ἔχω, I. 2b. fin. γύναι, as a form of 
address, may be used — either in indignation, Lk. xxii. 
57; or in admiration, Mt. xv. 28; or in kindness and 
favor, Lk. xiii. 12; Jn. iv. 21; or in respect, Jn. ii. 4; 
xix. 26, (as in Hom. Il. 3, 204; Od. 19, 221; Joseph. antt. 
1, 16, 3). 


123 


δαιμόνιον 


Téy, 6,.(2)4), indecl. prop. name, Gog, king of the land 
of Magog [q. ν. in BB.DD.}, who it is said in Ezek. 
XXXvViii. sq. will come from the remote north, with innu- 
merable hosts of his own nation as well as of allies, and 
will attack the people of Israel, reéstablished after the 
exile; but by divine interposition he will be utterly de- 
stroyed. Hence in Rey. xx. 8 sq. ὁ Tey and ὁ Maywy 
are used collectively to designate the nations that at the 
close of the millennial reign, instigated by Satan, will 
break forth from the four quarters of the earth against 
the Messiah’s kingdom, but will be destroyed by fire 
from heaven.” 

γωνία, -as, ἡ, [fr. Hdt. down], an angle, i.e. a. an 
external angle, corner (Germ. Ecke): τῶν πλατειῶν, Mt. 
vi. 5; κεφαλὴ γωνίας, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx. 
17; Actsiv.11; 1 Pet. ii. 7, (73D νυ, Ps. cxvii. (exviii.) 
22), the head of the corner, i. 6. the corner-stone, (axpo- 
γωνιαῖος, q. V.); αἱ τέσσαρες γωνίαι τῆς γῆς, the four ex- 
treme limits of the earth, Rev. vii. 1; xx. 8. Ὁ. like 
Germ. Winkel, Lat. angulus, Eng. (internal) corner, 


| i.q-a@ secret place: Acts xxvi. 26, (so Plat. Gorg. p. 485 ἃ. 
| βίον βιῶναι ἐν γωνίᾳ, Epict. diss. 2, 12,17; [for other ex- 
_ amples see Wetstein on Acts 1. c.; Stallbaum on Plato 


Ib Cal) ee 


ὯΝ 


Δαβίδ (the form in Ree. after the more recent codd. 
[minuscules, ef. Tdf. on Mt. i. 1, and Treg. on Lk. iii. 
817), Δαυΐδ (Grsb., Schott, Knapp, Theile, al.), and Aav- 
εἰδ (LT Tr WH [on the εἰ see WH. App. p. 155 and 
s.v. et,e]; οἵ. W. p.44; Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 538; 
in Joseph. [antt. 6, 8,1 sqq. also Nicol. of Damase. fr. 31 p. 
114] Aavidys, -ov), 6, (ΠῚ, and esp. after the exile 11, 
[i. e. beloved]), David, indecl. name of by far the most 
celebrated king of the Israelites: Mt. i. 1, 6,17, ete. ἡ 
σκηνὴ A. Acts xv. 16; ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ A. Rev. iii. 7; ὁ θρόνος 
A. Lk. i. 32; ὃ vids A., a name of the Messiah, viz. the 
descendant of David and heir to his throne (see υἱός, 
1 b.); ἡ ῥίζα A. the offspring of David, Rev. v. 5; xxii. 
16; ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ A. Mk. xi. 10 (see βασιλεία, 3); ἐν 
Δαυΐδ, in the book of the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [al. 
take it personally, cf. i. 1 sq.; yet see ἐν, I. 1 4.1. 

δαιμονίζομαι; 1 aor. pass. ptep. δαιμονισθείς ; (Saluwv) ; 
to be under the power of a demon: ἄλλος κατ᾽ ἄλλην δαιμο- 
νίζεται τύχην, Philem. in Stob. ecl. phys. 1 p. 196; of 
the insane, Plut. symp. 7, 5, 4, and in other later auth. 
In the N. T. δαιμονιζόμενοι are persons afflicted with 
especially severe diseases, either bodily or mental (such 
as paralysis, blindness, deafness, loss of speech, epilepsy, ' 


melancholy, insanity, ete.), whose bodies in the opinion 
of the Jews demons (see δαιμόνιον) had entered, and so 
held possession of them as not only to afflict them with 
ills, but also to dethrone the reason and take its place 
themselves; accordingly the possessed were wont to ex- 
press the mind and consciousness of the demons dwell- 
ing in them; and their cure was thought to require the 
expulsion of the demon — [but on this subject see B.D. 
Am. ed. s. ν. Demoniacs and reff. there; Weiss, Leben 
Jesu bk. iii. ch. 6]: Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16, 28,33; ix. 32; 
xii. 22; xv. 22; Mk. i. 32; v. 15 sq.; Jn. x. 21; δαιμο- 
νισθείς, that had been possessed by a demon [demons], 
Mk. v.18; Lk. viii. 36. They are said also to be ὀχλού- 
μενοι ὑπὸ or ἀπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων. Lk. vi. 18 [T Tr 
WH ἐνοχλ.}; Acts v.16; καταδυναστευόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ δια- 
βόλου i. 6. by his ministers, the demons, Acts x. 38.* 
δαιμόνιον, -ov, τό, (neut. of adj. δαιμόνιος, -a, -ov, divine, 
fr. δαίμων ; equiv. to τὸ θεῖον) ; 1. the divine Power, 
deity, divinity; so sometimes in prof. auth. as Joseph. 
b. j. 1, 2,8; Ael. vy. h. 12, 57; in plur. καινὰ δαιμόνια, 
Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1 sq., and once in the N. T. ξένα δαιμό- 
va, Acts xvii. 18. 2. a spirit, a being inferior to God, 
superior to men [πᾶν τὸ δαιμόνιον μεταξύ ἐστι θεοῦ τε καὶ 


δαιμονιώδης 1 


θνητοῦ, Plat. symp. 23 p. 202 6. (where see Stallbaum)], 
in both a good sense and a bad; thus Jesus, after his 
resurrection, said to his disciples οὐκ εἰμὶ δαιμόνιον ἀσώ- 
ματον, as Ienat. (ad Smyrn. 3, 2) records it; πνεῦμα 
δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (gen. of apposition), Lk. iv. 33; 
(πονηρόν, Tob. iii. 8,17; δαιμόνιον ἣ πνεῦμα πονηρόν, ibid. 
vi. 8). But elsewhere in the Scriptures used, without 
an adjunct, of evil spirits or the messengers and ministers 
of the devil [W. 23 (22)]: Lk. iv. 35; ix. 1,42; x. 17; 
Jn. x. 21; Jas. ii. 19; (Ps. xe. (xci.) 6; Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv. 
14; Tob. vi. 18; viii. 3; Bar. iv. 35); πνεύματα δαιμονίων 
(Ree. δαιμόνων) i.e. of that rank of spirits that are 
demons (gen. of appos.), Rev. xvi. 14; ἄρχων τῶν δαιμο- 
νίων, the prince of the demons, or the devil: Mt. ix. 34; 
xii. 24; Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15; they are said εἰσέρχεσθαι 
εἴς τινα, to enter into (the body of) one to vex him with 
diseases (see δαιμονίζομαι) : Lk. viii. 30, 32 sq.; ἐκβλη- 
θῆναι and ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος ΟΥ ἀπό τινος, when they are 
forced to come out of one to restore him to health: Mt. 
ix. 83; xvii. 18; Mk. vii. 29, 80; Lk. iv. 35, 41; viii. 2, 
33,35. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια, is used of those who compel 
demons to come out: Mt. vii. 22; xii. 27 sq.; Mk. i. 34, 
39; Lk. ix.49, ete. ἔχειν δαιμόνιον, to have a demon, be 
possessed by a demon, is said of those who either suffer 
from some exceptionally severe disease, Lk. iv. 33; viii. 
27 (ex. δαιμόνια) ; or act and speak as though they were 
mad, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; Jn. vii. 20; viii. 48 sq. 52; 
x. 20. According to a Jewish opinion which passed 
over to the Christians, the demons are the gods of the 
Gentiles and the authors of idolatry; hence δαιμόνια 
stands for DDN Ps. xev. (xevi.) 5, and ow Deut. 
xxxii. 17; Ps. cy. (evi.) 37, ef. Bar. iv. 7: προσκυνεῖν τὰ 
δαιμόνια καὶ τὰ εἴδωλα, Rey. ix. 20. The apostle Paul, 
though teaching that the gods of the Gentiles are a fiction 
(1 Co. viii. 4; x. 19), thinks that the conception of them 
has been put into the minds of men by demons, who 
appropriate to their own use and honor the sacrifices 
offered tu idols. Ilence what the Gentiles θύουσι, he 
says δαιμονίοις θύουσιν καὶ οὐ θεῷ, 1 Co. x. 20 (fr. the 
Sept. of Deut. xxxii. 17, cf. Bar. iv. 7), and those who 
frequent the sacrificial feasts of the Gentiles come into 
fellowship with demons, 1 Co. x. 20 sq.; [ef. Baudissin, 
Stud. zur semit. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (St. ii. 4) p. 110 
sqq-]- Pernicious errors are disseminated by demons 
even among Christians, seducing them from the truth, 
1 Tim.iv.1. Josephus also makes mention of δαιμόνια 
taking possession of men, antt. 6, 11, 2 sq.; 6, 8, 2; 8, 
2,5; but he sees in them, not as the N. T. writers do, 
bad angels, but the spirits of wicked men deceased, b. j. 
7, 6, 8. 

δαιμονιώδης, -es, (δαιμόνιον, q. v., and εἶδος), resembling 
or proceeding from an evil spirit, demon-like: Jas. iii. 15. 
[Schol. Arstph. ran. 295; Ps. xe. 6 Symm.] * 

δαίμων, -ovos, 6, ἡ ; 1. in Grk. auth. a god, a god- 
dess; an inferior deity, whether good or bad; hence 
ἀγαθοδαίμονες and κακοδαίμονες are distinguished [ef. W. 
23 (22)]. 2. Inthe N. T. an evil spirit (see δαιμόνιον, 
2): Mt. viii. 31; Mk. v.12 [RL]; Lk. viii. 29 [RGL 


24 


Δαμασκηνός 


mrg.]; Rev. xvi. 14 (Rec.); xviii. 2 (where LT Tr WH 
δαιμονίων). [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. y. Demon; ef. δαι- 
poviCopat. | * 

δάκνω; (obite; a. prop. withthe teeth. Ὄ. metaph. 
to wound the soul, cut, lacerate, rend with reproaches : 
Gal. v. 15. So even in Hom. Il. 5, 493 μῦθος δάκε 
φρένας, Menand. ap. Athen. 12, 77 p. 552 e., and times 
without number in other auth.* 

δάκρυ, -vos, τό, and τὸ δάκρυον, -ov, {fr. Hom. down], 
a tear: Mk. ix. 24 RG; Acts χχ. 19, 31; 2Co.ii.4; 2 
Tim. i.4; Heb. v. 7; xii. 17. The (nom.) form τὸ δά- 
κρυον in Rey. vii. 17; xxi. 4, (Is. xxv. 8). dat. plur. 
δάκρυσι in Lk. vii. 88, 44, (Ps. exxv. (exxvi.) 5; Lam. 
ii. 11).* 

δακρύω: 1 aor. ἐδάκρυσα; to weep, shed tears: Jn. xi. 
35. [From Hom. down. Syn. see κλαίω, fin.]* 

δακτύλιος, -ov, 6, (fr. δάκτυλος, because decorating the 
fingers), a ring: Lk. xv. 22. (From Hdt. down.) * 

δάκτυλος, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Batrach. 45 and Hdt. down], a 
Jinger: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xi. 46; xvi. 24; Mk. vii. 33; 
Jn. viii. 6 Rec.; xx. 25,27; ἐν δακτύλῳ θεοῦ, by the power 
of God, divine eflicieney by which something is made 
visible to men, Lk. xi. 20 (Mt. xii. 28 ἐν πνεύματι θεοῦν; 
Ex. viii. 19, [cf. xxxi. 18; Ps. viii. 41." 

Δαλμανουθά [on the accent ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103), ἡ, 
Daimanutha, the name of a little town or village not far 
from Magdala [better Magadan (q. v.)], or lying within 
its territory: Mk. viii. 10 (ef. Mt. xv. 39), see Fritzsche 
ad loc. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]. Derivation of the name 
uncertain; cf. Keim ii. 528 [(Eng. trans. iv. 238), who 
associates it with Zalmonah, Num. xxxiii. 41 sq., but 
mentions other opinions. Furrer in the Zeitschr. des 
Deutsch. Palaestin.-Vereins for 1879, p. 58 sqq. identi- 
fies it with Minyeh (abbrev. Manutha, Lat. mensa) ].* 

Δαλματία [Lechm. Δελμ. (“ prob. Alexandrian but pos- 
sibly genuine,” Hort) ], -as, ἡ, Dalmatia, a part of Illyri- 
cum on the Adriatic Sea; on the east adjoining Pannonia 
and upper Moesia, on the north separated from Liburnia 
by the river Titius, and extending southwards as far as 
to the river Drinus and the city Lissus [cf. Dict. of Geog. 
s.v.; Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, ii. 126 sq.; Lewin, St. 
Paul, ii. 8357]: 2 Tim. iv. 10." 

Sapdtw: 1 aor. edduaca; Pass., [pres. δαμάζομαι] ; pf. 
δεδάμασμαι; [akin to Lat. domo, dominus, Goth. gatam- 
jan; Eng. tame; cf. Curtius § 260]; com. fr. Ilom. 
down; to tame: Mk. ν. 4; Jas. iii. 7; to restrain, curb, 
τὴν γλῶσσαν, Jas. 111. 8.* 

δάμαλις, -ews, ἡ, (fem. of ὁ δαμάλης a young bullock 
or steer), a@ young cow, heifer, (Aeschyl., Dion. Hal., 
Leian., al.); used in Num. xix. 2, 6, 9 sq. for 779 and 
in Heb. ix. 13 of the red heifer with whose ashes, by the 
Mosaic law, those were to be sprinkled who had become 
defiled. (Besides in Sept. chiefly for may.) te 

Δάμαρις, -ἰδος, ἡ, Damaris, a woman of Athens con- 
verted by Paul: Acts xvii. 34; [ef. Mey. ad loc.; B.D. 
s. Vv. ].” 

Δαμασκηνός, -7, -ov, 0f Damascus, Damascene; sub- 
stantively of Δαμασκηνοί : 2 Co. xi. 82." 


Aapackos 1 


βαμασκός, -ov, ἡ, Damascus, (Hebr. pvr), a very an- 
cient (Gen. xiv. 15), celebrated, flourishing city of Syria, 
lying in a most lovely and fertile plain at the eastern 
base of Antilibanus. It had a great number of Jews 
among its inhabitants (Joseph. b. 1. 2, 20, 2 ef. 7, 8, 7). 
Still one of the most opulent cities of western Asia, 
having about 109,000 inhabitants [in 1859 about 
150,000; of these 6,000 were Jews, and 15,000 Chris- 
tians” (Porter)]: Acts ix. 2 sqq.; xxii. 5 sqq.; 2Co. xi. 
32; Gal.i.17. (Cf. BB.DD.s.v., esp. Alex.’s Kitto.]* 

δανείζω (T WH δανίζω [see I, ε]}; 1 aor. ἐδάνεισα (Lk. 
vi. 34 Ltxt. T WH Tr mrg.); 1 aor. mid. ἐδανεισάμην ; 
(δάνειον, q. v-); [fr. Arstph. down]; to lend money: Lk. 
vi. 34 sq.; Mid. to have money lent to one’s self, to take a 
loan, borrow οἴ. W.§ 38, 3; Riddell, Platon. idioms, § 87]: 
Mt. v. 42. (Deut. xv. 6,8; Prov. xix.17; in Grk. auth. 
fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) * 

[Syn.: δανείζω, κίχρημι: δ. to lend on interest, as a 
business transaction ; κίχρ. to /end, grant the use of, asa 
friendly act.| 

δάνειον [WH δάνιον, see I, ε], -είου, τό, (Savos a gift), 
a loan: Mt. xviii. 27. (Deut. xv. 8; xxiv. 13 (11); 
Aristot. eth. Nic. 9, 2, 3; Diod.1, 79; Plut.; al.) * 

δανειστής (T WH δανιστής [see I, 7); -od, 6, (δανείζω, 
4: ν.), @ money-lender, creditor: Lk. vii. 41. (2 Κα. iv. 1; 


Ps. eviii. (cix.) 11; Prov. xxix. 13; Sir. xxix. 28. Dem. 
p- 885, 18; Plut. Sol. 13, 5; de vitand. aere, ete. 7, 8; 
[al.].)* 


δανίζω, see δανείζω. 

Δανιήλ, ὁ, Ces and 5807 i. 6. judge of God [or God 
is my judge]), Daniel, prop. name of a Jewish prophet, 
conspicuous for his wisdom, to whom are ascribed the 
well-known prophecies composed between B. C. 167-164; 
[but cf. BB.DD.]: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec.* 

[δάνιον, see δάνειον.] 

δανιστής, see δανειστής. 

ϑαπανάω, -ῶ: fut. δαπανήσω; 1 aor. ἐδαπάνησα; (δαπάνη) ; 
fr. [Πα0. and] Thue. down; fo incur expense, expend, 
spend: τί, Mk. v. 26 (1 Mace. xiv. 32); ἐπί with dat. of 
pers., for one, in his favor, Acts xxi. 24; ὑπέρ τινος, 2 Co. 
xii. 15. in a bad sense, 0 waste, squander, consume: 
πάντα, Lk. xv. 14; ἵνα ἐν ταῖς ἡδοναῖς ὑμῶν δαπανήσητε, 
that ye may consume, waste what ye receive, in luxuri- 
ous indulgence —[év marking the realm in rather than 
the object on]: Jas. iv. 3. [Comp.: ἐκ-, rpoo- δαπανάω.] * 

δαπάνη, -ης, ἡ, (fr. δάπτω to tear, consume, [akin are 
δεῖπνον, Lat. daps; Curtius § 261]), expense, cost: Lk. xiv. 
28. (2 Esdr. vi. 4; 1 Mace. iii. 30, ete. Among Grk. 
writ. Hes. opp. 721, Pind., Eur., Thuc., et sqq.) * 

Aave(S and Δαυΐδ, see Δαβίδ. 

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 
2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, 
but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more 
freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other 
books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. 
{On its general neglect of elision (when the next word 
begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. 
Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ 


ΟἹ δὲ 


univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is 
added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν 
yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ 
ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; 
it opposes persons to persons or things previously men- 
tioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: 
ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 
2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ 
viol τῆς βασιλείας, Mt. viii. 12; ai ἀλώπεκες .. 
τοῦ avOp. Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58; πᾶς ὁ dads... οἱ δὲ 
Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. vii. 29 sq.; 6 δὲ πνευματικός, 1 Co. ii. 15, 
and often; — or with a slight discrimination, ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ: 
Mk. 1.45; v. 84; vi. 37; vii.6; Mt. xiii. 29, 37,52; xv. 
23 sqq-; Lk. iv. 40,43; v. 16; vi. 8; viii. 10,54; xv. 29; 
οἱ δέ, Mt. ii. 5; Mk. iii. 4; viii. 28, etc., ete.; with the addi- 
tion also of a prop. name, as ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς : Mt. viii. 22 
[Tdf. om. 7I.]; ix. 12 [RG Trbr.], 22 [Tdf. om. Ἰ.1; xiii. 
57; Mk.i.41[RGLmrg. Tr mrg.]; ἀποκρ. δὲ (6) Σίμων, 
Lk. vii. 48 RG Lbr.; ἡ δὲ Μαρία, Lk. ii. 19, ete. 2. 
pev... δέ, 566 μέν. 3. after negative sentences, but, 
but rather (Germ. wohl aber): Mt. vi. 19 sq. (μὴ θησαυ- 
ρίζετε . . . θησαυρίζετε δέ); x. 5sq.; Acts xii. 9, 14; lo. 
iii. 4; iv. 5; 1 Co.i. 10; vii. 37; 1 Th. v. 21 [mot Rec.]; 
Eph. iv. 14 sq.; Heb. ii. 5 sq.; iv. 13, 15; ix. 12; x. 26 sq.; 
xii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 12 (οὐχ ἑαυτοῖς ὑμῖν [Ree. ἡμ.] δέ) ; Jas. 
i. 13 501} ii. 11. 4. it is joined to terms which are re- 
peated with a certain emphasis, and with such additions 
as tend to explain and establish them more exactly; in 
this use of the particle we may supply a suppressed neg- 
ative clause [and give its force in Eng. by inserting / 
say, and that, so then, etc.]: Ro. iii. 21 sq. (not that com- 
mon δικαιοσύνη which the Jews boast of and strive after, 
but δικαιοσ. διὰ πίστεως) ; Ro. ix. 30; 1 Co. ii. 6 (σοφίαν 
δὲ οὐ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου) ; Gal. ii. 2 (I went up, not of my 
own accord, but ete.); Phil. ii. 8; ef. A/otz ad Dev. ii. 
2 p. 361 sq.; L. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. ii. col. 928 ; [ef. 
W. 443 (412}1. 5. it serves to mark a transition to 
something new (δέ metabatic) ; by this use of the parti- 
cle, the new addition is distinguished from and, as it were, 
opposed to what goes before: Mt. i. 183; 11. 19; x. 21; 
Lk. xii. 13; xiii. 1; Jn. vii. 14,37; Actsvi. 1; Ro. viii. 
28; 1 Co. vii. 1; viii. 1, ete., ete. ; so also in the phrase 
ἐγένετο δέ, see γίνομαι, 2 c. 6. it introduces explana- 
tions and separates them from the things to be explained : 
Jn. iii. 19; vi. 39; 1 Co. i. 12; vii. 6, 29; Eph. ν. 32, ete. ; — 
esp. remarks and explanations intercalated into the dis- 
course, or added, as it were, by way of appendix: Mk. v. 
13 (ἦσαν δέ ete. R Lbr.) ; xv. 25; xvi. 8[ RG]; Jn. vi. 10; 
Owing 


. ὁ δὲ υἱὸς 


ix. 14; xii. 3; τοῦτο δὲ γέγονε, Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4. 
to this use, the particle not infrequently came to be con- 
founded in the Mss. (of prof. writ. also) with yap; ef. 
Winer on Gal. i. 11; Fritzsche on Mk. xiv. 2; also his 
Com. on Rom. vol. i. pp. 284, 265; ii. p. 476; iii. p. 196; 
[W. 452 (421); B. 363 (312)). 7. after a parenthe- 
sis or an explanation which had led away from the sub- 
ject under discussion, it serves to take up the discourse 
again [οἵ. W. 443 (412)]: Mt. iii.4; Lk. iv. 1; Ro. v. 8; 
2 Co. ii. 12; v. 8; x. 2; Eph. ii. 4; ef. Klotz ad Devar. 


δέησις 1 


ii. 2 p. 376 sq. 8. it introduces the apodosis and, 
as it were, opposes it to the protasis: Acts xi.17 RG (1 
Mace. xiv. 29; 2 Mace. i. 34); after a participial con- 
struction which has the force of a protasis : Col. i. 22 (21); 
cf. Matthiae ii. 1470; Kiihner ii. 818; LJelf $770]; Klotz 
τ. 5. p. 370 sq.; [B. 364 (312)]. 9. kat... δέ, but... 
also, yea and, moreover also : Mt. x. 18; xvi. 18; Lk. ii. 35 
[WH txt.om. L Tr br. δέ] ; Jn. vi. 51; xv. 27; Acts iil. 24; 
xxii. 29; Ro. xi. 23; 2 Tim. 111. 12; 1Jn.i.3; 2 Pet. 1. 
5; cf. Klotz u.s. p. 645 sq.; B. 364 (312); [also W. 443 
(413); Ellic. on 1 Tim. iii. 10; Mey. on Jn. vi. 511]. καὶ 
ἐὰν δέ yea even if: In. viii. 16. 10. δέ never stands 
as the first word in the sentence, but generally second ; 
and when the words to which it is added cannot be sep- 
arated, it stands third (as in Mt. x. 11; xviii. 25; Mk. iv. 
34; Lk. x. 31; Acts xvii. 6; xxviii. 6; Gal. iii. 23; 2 Tim. 
iii. 8, ete.; in οὐ μόνον δέ, Ro. v. 3, 11, ete.), or even in 
the fourth place, Mt. x. 18; Jn. vi. 51; viii. 16 sq.; 1 Jn. 
1. 3; 1 Co. iv. 18; [Lk. xxii. 69 LT Tr WH]. 

δέησις, -εως, 7, (δέομαι); 1. need, indigence, (Ps. xxi. 
(xxii.) 25; Aeschin. dial. 2, 39 sq.; [Plato, Eryx. 405 6. 
bis]; Aristot. rhet. 2, 7 [ii. p. 1385", 27]). 2. a seck- 
ing, asking, entreating, entreaty, (fr. Plat. down) ; in the 
N.T. requests addressed by men to God (Germ. Bittge- 
bet, supplication); univ.: Jas. v. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 12; as 
often in the Sept., joined with προσευχή (i. 6. any pious 
address to God [see below]): Acts i. 14 Ree.; Eph. vi. 
18; Phil. iv. 6; plur.2 Tim. i. 3; joined with zpocevyai, 
1 Tim. v. 5; with νηστεῖαι, Lk. ii. 37; ποιεῖσθαι δέησιν, 
Phil. i. 4; π. δεήσεις, Lk. v. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 1. contextu- 
ally, of prayers imploring God’s aid in some particular 
matter: Lk. i. 13; Phil. i. 19; plur. Heb. v. 7; suppli- 
cation for others: [2 Co.i. 11]; περί τινος, Eph. vi. 18; 
ὑπέρ τινος, 2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; with the addition 
mpos. τὸν θεόν, Ro. x. 1.* 

[ϑυν. δέησις, προσευχή, ἔντευνξις: mp. as Prof. 
Grimm remarks, is unrestricted as respects its contents, 
while 5. is petitionary; moreover zp. is a word of sacred char- 
acter, being limited to prayer to God, whereas δ. may also be 
used of a request addressed toman. In Byzantine Grk. it is 
used of a written supplication (like our petition) ; cf. Soph. 
Lex.s.v. See more at length Trench § li.; also Bp. Lehtft. 
on Phil. iv. 6; Ellic. on Eph. vi. 18; ef. Schmidt ch. vii. In 
1 Tim. ii. 1 to these two words is added ἔντευξις, which ex- 
presses confiding access to God; thus, in combination, δέησις 
gives prominence to the expression of personal need, προσ- 
εὐχή to the element of devotion, ἔντευξις to that of child- 
like confidence, by representing prayer as the heart’s con- 
verse with God. See Huther’s extended note ad loc. ; Ellic. 
ad loc.; Trench u. s.] 


Set; subjune. pres. δέῃ; impf. ἔδει ; an impers. verb 
[ef. B. § 132, 12; cf. § 131, 3; fr. Hom. down]; (δέω, 
sc. twos, to have need of, be in want of; ef. Germ. es 
bedarf), it is necessary, there is need of, it behooves, is 
right and proper: foll. either by the inf. alone (cf. our 
one ought), or by the ace. withdnf. [cf. B. 147 (129)], 
it denotes any sort of necessity; as a. necessity 
lying in the nature of the case: Jn. iii. 30; 2 Tim. ii. 
6. b. necessity brought on by circumstances or by 


6 δεικνύω 


| the conduct of others toward us: Mt. xxvi. 35 (κἂν δέῃ 
| pe amoOaveiv), cf. Mk. xiv. 31; Jn. iv. 4; Acts xxvii. 21; 


2 Co. xi. 30; [xii. 1 L T Tr WHtxt.]; or imposed by a 
condition of mind: Lk. ii. 49; xix. 5. ce. necessity in 
reference to what is required to attain some end: Lk. 
xii. 12; Jn. iii. 7; Acts ix. 6; xvi. 30; 1 Co. xi. 19; Heb. 
ix. 26 (on this cf. W. 283 (266); [also B. 216 (187) ; 
225 (195)]); Heb. xi. 6. d. a necessity of law and 
command, of duty, equity: Mt. xviii. 38; xxiii. 23; Lk. 
Hi, 425 xiii. 143) xyed25 Rvs ex 7... Ons ay. (20); 
Acts v. 29; xv. 5; Ro. i. 27 (ἀντιμισθίαν, ἣν ἔδει, sc. ἀπο- 
λαμβάνεσθαι, the recompense due by the law of God); 
Ro. viii. 26; xii. 3; 1 Co. viii. 2, ete. or of office: Lk. 
iv.43; xiii. 33; Jn.ix.4; x.16; Eph. vi. 20; Col. iv. 4; 
2 Tim. ii. 24. e. necessity established by the counsel 
and decree of God, esp. by that purpose of his which 
relates to the salvation of men by the intervention of 
Christ and which is disclosed in the O. T. prophecies: 
Mt. xvii. 10; xxiv.6; Mk.ix.11; Actsiv.12; 1 Co. xv. 
53; in this use, esp. of what Christ was destined finally 
to undergo, his sufferings, death, resurrection, ascen- 
sion: Lk. xxiv. 46[RGLbr.]; Mt. xxvi. 54; Jn. iii. 14; 
Acts iii. 21, ete. (of the necessity of γα in Hat. 5, 33; 
with the addition κατὰ τὸ θεοπρόπιον, 8, 53; Thue. 5, 26.) 

[Syn.: δεῖ, χρή: δεῖ seems to be more suggestive of 
moral obligation, denoting esp. that constraint which arises 
from divine appointment ; whereas χρή signifies rather the 
necessity resulting from time and circumstance. Schmidt 
ch. 150.] 


δεῖγμα, -ros, τό, (δείκνυμι) ; a. prop. thing shown. 
b. a specimen of any thing, example, pattern: πυρὸς 
αἰωνίου, set forth as a warning, Jude 7. (From Xen., 
Plat., Isocr. down.) * 

δειγματίζω : 1 aor. eSerypdtica; (δεῖγμα); to make an 
example of, to show as an example; twa, to expose one 
to disgrace (cf. παραδειγματίζω, θεατρίζω) : Mt. i. 19 LT 
Tr WH; Col.ii.15. A word unknown to Grk. writ. 
[ΟΕ Act. Petr. et Paul. § 33; W. 25 (24); 91 (87); 
δειγματισμός occurs on the Rosetta stone, line 30; Boeckh, 
Inserr. 4697. Comp. : mapa-deryparita.]* 

δεικνύω (δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δεικνύεις, Jn. ii. 18; τοῦ 
δεικνύοντος, Rev. xxii. 8 [not Tdf.]) and δείκνυμι (1 Co. 
xii. 31; Mt.iv.8; Jn. v. 20; ef. B. 45 (39)); fut. δείξω; 
1 aor. ἔδειξα; 1 aor. pass. ptep. δειχθείς (Heb. viii. 5) ; 
Sept. mostly for ANID; 10 show, exhibit; 1. prop. to 
show i. e. expose to the eyes: τινί τι, Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 5; 
xx. 24 (for Rec. ἐπιδείξ.); xxii. 12; xxiv. 40 [RGL, 
but Tom. Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Mk. xiv. 15; Jn. 
xx. 20; Acts vii. 3; ὁδόν τινι, metaph., in which one 
ought to go, i. e. to teach one what he ought to do, 1 Co. 
xii. 31; κατὰ τὸν τύπον τὸν δειχθέντα σοι, Leb. viii. 5; 
ἑαυτὸν δεικνύναι τινί to expose one’s self to the view of 
one, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν 
πατέρα render the Father visible to us, Jn. xiv. 8 sq.; of 
things presented to one in a vision: τινί τε, Rev. xvii. 1; 
xxi. 9 sq.; xxii 1, 8; δεῖξαί τινι, ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι, Rev. i. 1; 
iv. 1; xxii. 6. to show, i. q. to bring to pass, produce 
what_can be seen (Germ. sehen lassen) ; of miracles per- 


δειλία il 


formed in presence of others to be seen by them: σημεῖον, 
Jn. ii. 18, (Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] 66; σῆμα, Hom. Od. 3, 
174; Il. 13, 244); ἔργα ἔκ twos, works done by the aid 
of one, Jn. x. 32; τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, spoken 
of God, as the author of Christ’s visible return, 1 Tim. 
vi. 15; ἔργα δεικνύειν is used differently in Jn. v. 20, to 
show works to one for him to do. 2. metaph. a. 
with ace. of the thing, to give the evidence or proof of a 
thing: πίστιν, Jas. ii. 18; τὶ ἔκ τινος, as THY πίστιν ἐκ τῶν 
ἔργων, ibid. ; τὰ ἔργα ἐκ τῆς καλῆς ἀναστροφῆς, Jas. iii. 13. 
b. to show by words, to teach: foll. by ὅτι. Mt. xvi. 21 
(διδάσκειν in Mk. viii. 31 for δεικνύειν) ; foll. by an inf. 
Acts x. 28. [Comp.: dva-, ἀπο-, év-, ἐπι-, ὑπο-δείκνυμι. * 

δειλία, -as, 7, (δειλός), timidity, fearfulness, cowardice : 
2 Tim.i. 7. (Soph., [Hdt.], Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc., and 
subseq. writ.) * 

[Syn. δειλία, φόβος, εὐλάβεια: “of these three words 
the first is used always in a bad sense; the second is a mid- 
dle term, capable of a good interpretation, capable of an evil, 
and lying pretty evenly between the two; the third is quite 
predominantly used in a good sense, though it too has not 
altogether escaped being employed in an evil.” Trench § x. 
q. v.; cf. δέος.] 


δειλιάω, -@; (δειλία, q. v.) ; to be timid, fearful: Jn. xiv. 
27. (Deut. xxxi. 6; i. 21 and often in Sept. ; Sir. xxii. 
16; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 16; 4 Mace. xiv. 4. Diod. 20, 78. 
The Greeks prefer the comp. ἀποδειλιῶ.) * 

δειλός, -7, -ov, (δείδω to fear), timid, fearful: Mt. viii. 
26; Mk. iv. 40; in Rev. xxi. 8 of Christians who through 
cowardice give way under persecutions and apostatize. 
(From Hom. down.) * 

δεῖνα, 6, 7, τό ; gen. δεῖνος ; dat. dei; ace. τὸν, τὴν, τὸ 
δεῖνα (cf. Matthiae § 151), such a one, a certain one, i.e. 
one whose name 1 cannot call on the instant, or whose 
name it is of no importance to mention; once in the 
Scriptures, viz. Mt. xxvi. 18. (Arstph., Dem., al.) * 

δεινῶς, adv., (δεινός). terribly, grievously: Mt. viii. 6; 
Lk. xi. 53. [From Hdt. down.]* 

δειπνέω, -@: [fut. δειπνήσω}; 1 aor. ἐδείπνησα; (δεῖ- 
mvov); to sup: Lk. xvii. 8; xxii. 20 [WI reject the 
whole pass., see their App.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; in an alle- 
gory, δειπνήσω per αὐτοῦ, I will make him to share in 
my most intimate and blissful intercourse: Rev. iii. 20.* 

δεῖπνον, -ov, τό, and acc. to a rare and late form 6 
δεῖπνος in Lk. xiv. 16 Lehm. [ef. Tdf. on Rev. xix. 9, 17, 
also W. 65 (64); on deriv. cf. δαπάνη], (in Hom. the 
morning meal or breakfast, ef. Passow [more fully L. and 
S.]s.v.; this the Greeks afterwards call τὸ ἄριστον q. ν. 
{and reff. there], designating as τὸ δεῖπνον the evening 
meal or supper) ; 1. supper, esp. a formal meal usu- 
ally held at evening: Lk. xiv. 17, 24; Jn. xiii. 2,4; xxi. 
20; plur.: Mt. xxiii. 6; Mk. xii. 39; Lk. (xi. 43 Lehm. 
in br.) ; xx. 46; used of the Messiah’s feast, symbolizing 
salvation in the kingdom of heaven: Rey. xix. 9, 17; 
κυριακὸν δεῖπνον (see κυριακός, 1), 1 Co. xi. 20; ποιεῖν 
δεῖπνον, Lk. xiv. 12 (ἄριστον ἢ δεῖπνον) ; 16 (Dan. v. 1 
[Theodot.]); with the addition τινί, Mk. vi. 21; Jn. 
xii. 2. 2. univ. food taken at evening: 1 Co. xi. 21.* 


7 ΖΔεκάπολις 


δεισιδαιμονία, -ας, ἡ, (δεισιδαίμων), fear of the gods; 1. 
in ἃ good sense, reverence for the gods, piety, religion: 
Polyb. 6, 56, 7; Joseph. antt. 10, 3, 2; καὶ θεοφιλὴς 
βίος, Diod. 1, 70. 2. i. 4. ἡ δειλία πρὸς τὸ δαιμόνιον 
(Theophr. char. 16 (22) init. [ef. Jebb p. 263 sq.]); su- 
perstition : [Polyb. 12, 24,5]; Plut. [Sol. 12, 4]; Alex. 75, 
1; de adulat. et am. 25, and in his Essay περὶ τῆς δεισι- 
δαιμονίας; Antonin. 6, 30 θεοσεβὴς χωρὶς δεισιδαιμονίας. 
3. religion, in an objective sense; in which sense Jose- 
phus, antt. 19, 5, 3, says Claudius commanded the Jews 
μὴ τὰς τῶν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν δεισιδαιμονίας eEovdevitew. Festus 
in the presence of Agrippa the Jewish king employs 
the word ambiguously and cautiously, in Acts xxv. 19, 
of the Jewish religion, viz. so as to leave his own judg- 
ment concerning its truth in suspense. Cf. Zezschwitz, 
Profangriicitiit u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 59; [K. F. Her- 
mann, Lehrb. d. gottesdienstl. Alterthiimer, 8 8 note 6; 
Trench § xlviii.; (ef. Kenrick, Bibl. Essays, 1864, p. 108 
sqq-; Field, Otium Norv. iii. p. 80 sq.)].* 

δεισι-δαίμων, -ον, gen. -ovos, (δείδω to fear, and δαίμων 
deity), fearing the deity or deities, like the Lat. religiosus; 
used either 1. in a good sense, reverencing god or the 
gods, pious, religious: Xen. Cyr. 3,3, 58; Ages. 11, 8; 
Aristot. pol. 5,11 [p. 1315", 1]; or 2. in a bad sense, 
superstitious : Theophr. char. 16 (22); Diod. 1, 62; 4, 
51; Plut. de adul. 6. 16; de superstit. c. 10 sq. Paul 
in the opening of his address to the Athenians, Acts 
xvii. 22, calls them, with kindly ambiguity, κατὰ πάντα 
δεισιδαιμονεστέρους (sc. than the rest of the Greeks [W. 
244 (229)], cf. Meyer ad loc.), as being devout without 
the knowledge of the true God; cf. Bengel ad loc.* 

δέκα, οἱ, αἱ. τά, [fr. Hom. down], ten: Mt. xx. 24, ete. 
θλίψις ἡμερῶν δέκα, i.e. to last a short time: Rey. ii. 10; 
ef. Dan. i. 12, 14; Num. xi. 19; Ter. heaut. 5, 1, 36 
decem dierum vix mi est familia. 

Sexa-Svo, rare in the earlier writ., frequent in the later 
(see Passow 8. v. δέκα [esp. Soph. Lex. 5. v.; ef. W. 23 
(22); Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18]), and in Sept.; i. q. 
δώδεκα, twelve: Acts xix. 7 and xxiv. 11, in both places 
LT Tr WH δώδεκα : [Rev. xxi. 16 Tdf. edd. 2, τ." 

[Sexa-<£, sixteen: Rev. xiii. 18 Lmrg. (Sept., al.) *] 

[δεκα-οκτώ for δέκα καὶ ὀκτώ, eighteen: Tdf. in Lk. xiii. 4, 
11, but WH om. L Tr br. καί ; ef. s. v. καί, I. 1 b.*] 

δεκα-πέντε, for the earlier πεντεκαίδεκα, fifteen: Jn. xi. 
18; Acts xxvii. 28; Gal. i. 18; [Gen. vii. 20 Ald., 
Compl.; Ex. xxvii. 15; 1 Mace. x. 40; Polyb. 3, 56, 3 
var.; Diod. 2,13; Plut. Dion 38, 1; al.; cf. δεκαδύο]." 

Δεκά-πολις, -ews, 7), Decapolis (regio decapolitana, Plin. 
h. n. 5, 16.17), i. e. a region embracing ten cities. This 
name is borne by a district of the tribe of Manasseh 
beyond the Jordan and bordering upon Syria, embrac- 
ing ten principal cities with smaller towns also scattered 
in among them. But the ancient geographers vary in 
their enumeration of these ten cities. Pliny 1. ὁ. reckons 
Damascus among them,.which Josephus seems to have 
excluded, calling Seythopolis μεγίστην τῆς δεκαπόλεως, 
b. 1. 8, 9, 7. All seem to agree in this, that Gadara, 
Hippo, Pella and Seythopolis were of the number. Cf. 


δεκατέσσαρες 


Win. RWB. 5. ν. Decapolis; Vaihinger in Herzog iii. 
325 sq.; Riehm, HWB. 266 sq.; [BB.DD.s. v.]: Mt. 
iv. 25; Mk. v. 20; vii. 81." 

δεκα-τέσσαρες, -wy, oi, ai, -capa, τά, fourteen: Mt. i. 17; 
2 Co. xii. 2; 6]. 1. 1. [Gen. xxxi.41; Tob. viii. 19; x. 
7; Polyb. 1, 36, 11; ef. dexadvo.]* 

δεκάτη, -ης, ἡ; (δέκατος), the tenth part of any thing, 
a tithe; specially the tenth part of booty taken from the 
enemy: Heb. vii. 2,4; the tithes of the fruits of the 
earth and of the flocks, which, by the law of Moses, were 
presented to the Levites in the congregation of Israel: 
Heb. vii. 8 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Simon. 133 Bgk. ; 
Hat. 2, 135]; 4, 152 down; Sept. for wyn.) (Cf. 
BB.DD. s. v. Tithe.]* 

δέκατος, -η, -ov, (δέκα), [fr. Hom. down], the tenth: Jn. 
i. 39 (40); Rev. xxi. 20; τὸ δέκατον, subst., the tenth 
part: Rev. xi. 18." 

δεκατόω, -@: pf. dedexatwxa; pf. pass. δεδεκάτωμαι ; (δέ- 
κατος); fo exact or receive the tenth part (for which Grk. 
writ. use δεκατεύω [W. 24]): with ace. of pers. from 
whom, Heb. vii. 6 [on the pf. ef. W. § 40, 4a.; Lghtft. 
St. Clement, App. p. 414]; Pass. to pay tithes (Vulg. 
decimor): Heb. vii. 9. (Neh. x. 37.) [Comp.: ἀπο- 
Sexarow. |* 

δεκτός, -7, -ov, (δέχομαι), accepted, acceptable: Lk. iv. 
24; Phil. iv. 18; τινί, Acts x. 35; the phrases καιρὸς 
dexros, 2 Co. vi. 2 (Is. xlix. 8 for }j¥7 ny), and ἐιμαυτὸς 
δεκτός, Lk. iv. 19 (Is. lxi. 2 for i¥7 3Y), denote that 
most blessed time when salvation and the free favors of 
God profusely abound. (Ex. xxviii. 34; Is. lvi. 7, [ete.]. 
Among prof. auth. used by Jambl. protr. symb. § 20 
p- 350.) * 

δελεάζω ; [pres. pass. δελεάζομαι]; (SéAeapabait); 1. 
prop. to bait, catch by a bait: Xen. mem. 2, 1, 4, et al. 
2. as often in prof. auth., metaph. fo beguile by blandish- 
ments, allure, entice, deceive: twa, 2 Pet. ii. 14,18; Jas. 
i. 14, on this pass. οἵ. Philo, quod omn. prob. lib. ἃ 22 
πρὸς ἐπιθυμίας ἐλαύνεται ἢ ὑφ᾽ ἡδονῆς δελεάζεται." 

[Δελματία see Δαλματία.] 

δένδρον, -ου, τό, a tree: Mt. vii. 17, ete.; γίνεσθαι δένδρον 
or eis δένδρον, to grow to the shape and size of a tree, 
Mt. xiii. 32; Lk. xiii, 19. [(Hom., Hdt.), Arstph., 
Thue. down. ] 

δεξιο-βόλος, -ov, 6, (fr. δεξιός and βάλλω), throwing with 
the right hand, a slinger, an archer: Acts xxiii. 23 in 
Lchm. ed. min.; ef. the foll. word.* 

δεξιολάβος, -ov, ὁ, (δεξιός and λαμβάνω), a word un- 
known to the earlier writ., found in Constant. Por- 
phyrogenitus (10th cent.) de them. 1, 1, who speaks 
of δεξιολάβοι, as a kind of soldiers, in company with 
bow-men (τοξοφόροι) and peltasts; [they are also men- 
tioned by Theoph. Simoc. (hist. 4, 1) in the 7th cent. ; 
see the quotations in Meyer]. Since in Acts xxiii. 23 
two hundred of them are ordered to be ready, appar- 
ently spearmen are referred to (carrying a lance in the 
right hand); and so the Vulg. has taken it. The great 
number spoken of conflicts with the interpretation of 
those who suppose them to be soldiers whose duty it was 


128 


δεξιὸς 


to guard captives bound by a chain on the right hand. 
Meyer ad loc. understands them to be [either] javelin- 
men [or slingers].* 

δεξιός, -c, -dv, (fr. δέχομαι, fut. δέξομαι, or fr. δέκω, which 
is akin to deixvyse; prop. of that hand which is wont to 
take hold of as well as to point out; just as ἄξιος comes fr. 
ἄξω, fut. of ἄγω ; [cf. Curtius §§ 11, 266]), the right: Mt. 
ν. 29, 39; Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xviii. 10; Rev. x. 2; ἡ δεξιὰ 
χείρ, Mt. v. 30; Lk. vi. 6; Acts iii. 7; Rev. i. 16; xiii. 
16; and (with χείρ omitted) ἡ δεξιά (like ἡ ἀριστερά), 
Mt. vi. 3; xxvii. 29; Rev. i. 20; 11. 1; ν. 7; ἐπὶ τὴν δεξιάν 
[on the right hand i. 6.1 at the right side, Rev. y. 1 [but 
al. take it more closely, in the right hand; cf. vs. 7 and 
xx. 1]; διδόναι τὴν δεξιάν or τὰς δεξιάς, to pledge either 
a mutual friendship, or a compact, by joining the right 
hands: Gal. ii. 9 (1 Mace. vi. 58; xi. 50, 62, 66; xiii. 50; 
2 Mace. xi. 26; xii. 11; xiii. 22; ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. 
ii. pp. 566 and 599; and in prof. auth. as Xen. an. 1, 6, 
6; 2,5, 3; Joseph. antt. 18, 9, 3 δεξιάν re καὶ πίστιν διδόναι 
τινί) ; God is said to have done something τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 
with his right hand i.e., ace. to Hebr. idiom, by his own 
power [ef. W. 214 (201)]: Acts ii. 33; v. 31; τὰ ὅπλα τὰ 
δεξιά, arms carried in the right hand and used for attack, 
as the sword, the spear, καὶ ἀριστερά those carried in the 
left hand, for the purpose of defence, as the shield: 2 
Co. vi. 7; τὰ δεξιὰ μέρη τοῦ πλοίου, Jn. xxi. 6. τὰ δεξιά 
the right side [W.176 (166)]: ΜΚ. xvi. ὅ; ἐκ δεξιῶν 
twos on one’s right hand (Lat. ad alicutus dextram), Mt. 
xxv. 33 sq.; xxvii. 38; Mk. xv. 27; Lk.i. 11; xxiii. 33; 
εἶναι, Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8, he is at my right 
hand, se. asa leader, to sustain me). Asin thisexpression 
the Greeks use the prep. ἐκ, so the Hebrews sometimes 
use |) (72 from i.e. at the right, “3 Oxo from i. e. 
at the side of any one) and the Romans ab (sedere a 
deztra alicuius, proximum esse ab aliquo), because they 
define the position of one standing or sitting next another 
by proceeding from the one next to whom he is said to 
stand or sit [ef. W. 367 (344)]. καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν x. ἐξ 
εὐωνύμων τινὸς βασιλέως, to occupy the places of honor 
nearest the king, Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. x. 37, 40; (3 
“3 ro, 1 K.ii. 19; Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 10). Hence, after 
Ps. cix. (ex.) 1 as applied to the Messiah (Mt. xxii. 44; 
Mk. xii. 36; Lk. xx. 42), Christ is said to have ascended 
καθῆσθαι or καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν (at or on the right hand) of 
God, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; xvi. 19; Lk. xxii. 69; 
Acts ii. 34; Heb. i. 13; εἶναι or καθίσαι ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, 
Ro. viii. 34; Eph.i. 20; Col. iii. 1; Heb. i. 3; viii.1; x.12; 
xii. 2, — to indicate that he has become a partner in God’s 
universal government (cf. Knapp, De J. Chr. ad dextram 
dei sedente, in his Scripta var. arg. p. 41 sqq.; [Stuart, 
Com. on Heb., excurs. iv.]). That these expressions are 
tobe understood in this figurative sense, and not of a fixed 
and definite place in the highest heavens (as Chr. Ir. 
Fritzsche in Nov. Opusce. acad. p. 209 sqq. tries to prove, 
after the orthodox theologians of the reformed church), 
will be questioned by no one who carefully considers 
Rev. iii. 21. Christ is once spoken of as ἑστὼς ἐκ δεξιῶν 
τοῦ θεοῦ, as though in indignation at his adversaries [acc. 


δευμαι 


to others, to welcome his martyred servant] he had risen 
from his heavenly throne, Acts vii. 55 sq. 

δέομαι ; 3 pers. sing. impf. ἐδέετο (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 220; W. 46; [Veitch s. ν. δέω fo need fin.]), Lk. viii. 
38 (where Lcehm. ἐδεεῖτο, Tr WH ἐδεῖτο ; cf. Mey. ad loc.; 
[WH. App. p. 166]; B.55 (48)); 1 aor. ἐδεήθην ; (fr. 
δέω to want, need; whence mid. δέομαι to stand in need 
of, want for one’s self); [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to want, 
lack: twos. 2. to desire, long for: twos. 9. to ask, 
beg, (Germ. bitten); a. univ. — the thing asked for be- 
ing evident from the context: with gen. of the pers. from 
whom, Gal. iv. 12; the thing sought being specified 
in direct discourse: Ik. v. 12; viii. 28; ix. 38 (ace. to 
the reading ἐπίβλεψον RL); Acts viii. 34 (δέομαί cov, 
περὶ Tivos ὁ προφήτης λέγει τοῦτο; of whom, I pray thee, 
doth the prophet say this?); Acts xxi. 39; 2 Co. v. 20; 
foll. by the inf., Lk. viii. 38; ix. 38 (ace. to the reading 
ἐπιβλέψαι Tr WH); Acts xxvi. 3 (where G LT Tr WH 
om. σοῦ after δέομαι) ; foll. by ἵνα, Lk. ix. 40 (cf. W. 335 
(315); [B. 258 (222)]); foll. by ro with inf. 2 Co. x. 2 
[ef. B. 263 (226), 279 (239); W. 321, 322 (301 54.}]; 
with gen. of pers. and ace. of thing, 2 Co. viii.4 (GL Ὁ 
Tr WH; for Ree. adds δέξασθαι ἡμᾶς without warrant), 
[ef. B. 164 (143); W.198 (186)]. Ὁ. spec. of requests 
addressed to God; absol. to pray, make supplication : Acts 
iv. 31; τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts x. 2; foll. by εἰ ἄρα, Acts viii. 22 
[B. 256 (220); W. 300 (282) ]; τοῦ κυρίου, ὅπως etc. Mt. 
ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; without the gen. θεοῦ, --- foll. by εἴ πως, 
Ro. i. 10 [ef. W. and B. Il. ec.]; by ἵνα, LK. xxi. 36; xxii. 
32; by the telic εἰς ro, 1 Th. iii. 10 [cf. B. 265 (228)]; 
umép τινος πρὸς τὸν κύριον. ὅπως. Acts viii. 24. [SYN. see 
αἰτέω and δέησις. COMP.: προσ-δέομαι.] " 

δέον, -οντος, τό. (ptep. of δεῖ, q. ν.). fr. [Soph. and] Hat. 
down, that of which there is need, which is requisite, due, 
proper : δέον ἐστί there is need, 1 Pet. i. 6 [T Tr txt. WH 
om. Tr mrg. br. é.]; foll. by ace. with inf. Acts xix. 36; 
τὰ μὴ δέοντα that are not proper, 1 Tim. ν. 13.* 

δέος, -ous, τό, (δείδω), [fr. Hom. down], fear, awe : pera 
εὐλαβείας καὶ δέους, Heb. xii. 28 L T Tr WH.* 

[Synx. δέος (apprehension), Φ ὁ Bos (fear): Ammonius s. v. 
δ. says δέος καὶ φόβος διαφέρει" Seos μὲν γάρ ἐστι πολυχρό- 
vios κακοῦ ὑπόνοια. φόβος δὲ ἣ παραυτίκα πτόησις. Plato 
(Laches p. 198 ".) : δέος γὰρ εἶναι προσδοκίαν μέλλοντος κακοῦ. 
Cf. Stallbaum on Plato’s Protag. p. 167; Schmidt ch. 139 ; 
and see 8. v. δειλία.] 

AepBaios, -ov, 6, of Derbe, a native of Derbe: Acts xx. 4.* 

Δέρβη, -ns, ἡ, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia, on the confines 
of Isauria, [on its supposed site see Lewin, St. Paul, i. 
151 sq.; B.D.s.v.; cf. Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, Index 
8. v.]: Acts xiv. 6, 20; xvi. 1.* 

δέρμα, -ros, τό, (fr. dépw or Seipw, as κέρμα fr. κείρω). a 
skin, hide, leather: Heb. xi. 37. (Hom. et sqq.) * 

δερμάτινος, -n, -ov, (δέρμα), made of skin, leathern (Vulg. 
pelliceus): Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6; cf. 2 K.i. 8. (Iom., 
Hadt., Plat., Strab., al.) * 

δέρω; 1 aor. ἔδειμα : 2 fut. pass. δαρήσομαι; 1. to 
flay, skin: Hom. II. 1,459; 23, 167, ete. 2. to beat, 
thrash, smite, (cf. Germ. durchgerben, [low Eng. hide]), so 
sometimes in prof. auth. fr. Arstph. ran. 619 [ef. vesp. 

9 


129 


δεσμοφύλαξ 


485] down: τινά, Mt. xxi. 35; Mk. xii. 3,5; Lk. xx. 10 
sq-; xxii. 63; Jn. xviii. 23; Acts v. 40; xvi. 37; xxii. 
19; εἰς πρόσωπον δέρειν τινά, 2 Co. xi. 20; ἀέρα δέρειν 
(see ἀήρ), 1 Co. ix. 26; Pass.: Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xii. 47 
(δαρήσεται πολλάς, sc. πληγάς, will be beaten with many 
stripes) ; 48, (ὀλίγας, cf. Xen. an. 5, 8, 12 παίειν ὀλίγας. 
Soph. El. 1415 παίειν διπλῆν, Arstph. nub. 968 (972) 
τύπτεσθαι πολλάς. Plat. lege. 8 p. 845 a. μαστιγοῦσθαι 
πληγάς; cf. [W. 589 (548)]; B. [82 (72)]: § 134, 6).* 

δεσμεύω ; [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. ἐδεσμεύετο (Lk. 
viii. 29 T Tr WH)]; (δεσμός); 4. to put in chains: 
Lk. viii. 29 T Tr WH; Acts xxii. 4; (Sept. Judg. xvi. 11; 
Eur. Bacch. 616; Xen. Hier. 6, 14; Plat. lege. 7 p. 
808 d.). b. to bind up, bind together: φορτία, Mt. xxiii. 
4; (δράγματα, Gen. xxxvii.7; Judith viii. 3. [Hes. opp. 
479, al. j).* 

δεσμέω. -ὦ : [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. ἐδεσμεῖτο] ; to bind, 
tie: Lk. viii.29 RG L; see δεσμεύω. ({ Aristot. de plant. 
1, 2 p. 817°, 21; al.]; Heliod. 8, 9.) * 

δέσμη, -7s, or as others write it [e. ¢. Ree. T; yet ef. 
Lob. Paralip. p. 396; Chandler ὃ 132] δεσμή, -ῆς, 7, (δέω), 
a bundle: Mt. xiii. 30. (Ex. xii. 22. Dem., Dion. 
Hal., al.)* ν᾿ 

δέσμιος, -ov, 6, bound, in bonds, a captive, a prisoner, 
[fr. Soph. down]: Mt. xxvii. 15 sq.; Mk. xv. 6; Acts 
xvi. 25, 27; xxiii. 18; xxv. 14, 27; xxviii. 16 [RG], 
17; Heb. x. 34 GLT Tr txt. WH; xiii. 3; ὁ δέσμιος 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, whom Christ, i. 6. his truth which I 
have preached, has put in bonds (W. 189 (178) ; [B. 169 
(147) ]), Eph. iii. 1; 2 Tim.i.8 ; Philem. 1, 9; in the same 
sense ὁ δέσμιος ἐν κυρίῳ, Eph. iv. 1; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on 
Philem. 13].* 

δεσμός, -οῦ. ὁ. (δέω). [fr. Hom. down], a band or bond: 
Mk. vii. 35 (ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ, i. 6. the 
impediment in his speech was removed); Lk. xiii. 16 
(λυθῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ. of a woman bowed together, 
held fast as it were by a bond). The plur. form ra δε- 
cpa, the more com. form in Grk. writ. (W. 63 (62) [cf. B. 
23 (21); see below]), is found in Lk. viii. 29; Acts xvi. 
26; xx. 23; the other form oi δεσμοί in Phil. i. 13 (ὥστε 
τοὺς δεσμούς μου φανεροὺς ἐν Χριστῷ γενέσθαι, so that my 
captivity became manifest as made for the cause of Christ), 
[“ δεσμά sunt vincula quibus quis constringitur, sed δε- 
σμός est in carcerem conjectio et captivitas in vinculis ... 
Utraque forma et ceteri Graeci omnes et Attici utuntur, 
sed non promiscue ut inter se permutari possint.” Cobet 
as quoted in Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 353]; the gen. 
and dat. in Acts xxii. 30 Rec.; xxiii. 29; xxvi. 29, 31; 
Phil. i. 7, 14, 16 (17); Col. iv. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 9; Philem. 
10; Heb. x. 34 R Tr mrg.; xi. 36; Jude 6; ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 
τοῦ εὐαγγελίον. in the captivity into which the preaching 
of the gospel has thrown me, Philem. 13 [W. 189 (178) ; 
ef. ref. 5. v. δέσμιος, fin. ].* 

δεσμο-φύλαξ, -κος, 6, (δεσμός and φύλαξ. like θησαυρο- 
φύλαξ [ef. W. 100 (95)]), α keeper of a prison, a jailer : 
Acts xvi. 23, 27,36. (Joseph. antt. 2, 5,1; Leian. Tox. 
30; [Artem. oneir. 3, 60; al.]; ἀρχιδεσμοφύλαξ, Gen 
XXxix. 21-23.) * 


δεσμωτηριον 


δεσμωτήριον, -ου, τό, a prison, jail: Mt. xi. 2; Acts v. 
21,23; xvi. 26. (Gen. xl. 3; [Hdt.], Thue., Plat., Dem., 


al) 
δεσμώτης, -ov, 6, one bound, a prisoner: Acts xxvil. 
1,42. (Gen. xxxix. 20; Bar. 1.9; Hdt., Aeschyl., Soph., 


Thuc., subseq. writ.) * 

δεσπότης, -ov, 6, [fr. Pind. down], a master, lord (as of 
δοῦλοι, οἰκέται) : 1 Tim. vi. 1, [2]; 2 Tim. ii. 21; Tit. ii. 
9; 1 Pet. ii. 18; God is thus addressed by one who calls 
himself his δοῦλος : Lk. ii. 29, ef. Acts iv. 24, 29, (δεσπό- 
της τῶν πάντων, Job ν-. 8; Sap. vi. 8); Christ is so called, 
as one who has bought his servants, 2 Pet. ii. 1; rules 
over his church, Jude 4 [some take 6. here as designating 
God; ef. R. V. mrg.]; and whose prerogative it is to 
take vengeance on those who persecute his followers, 
Rev. vi. 10." 

[ϑυν. δεσπότης, κύριος: δ. was strictly the correla- 
tive of slave, δοῦλος, and hence denoted absolute ownership 
and uncontrolled power; κύριος had a wider meaning, appli- 
cable to the various ranks and relations of life, and not sug- 
gestive either of property or of absolutism. Ammonius s. vy. 
δεσπότης says δ. 6 τῶν ἀργυρωνήτων " κύριος δὲ καὶ πατὴρ υἱοῦ 
καὶ αὐτός τις ἑαυτοῦ. So Philo, quis rer. div. heres § 6 ὥστε 
τὸν δεσπότην κύριον εἶναι Kal ἔτι ὡσανεὶ φοβερὸν κύριον, οὐ 
μόνον τὸ κῦρος καὶ τὸ κράτος ἁπάντων ἀνημμένον, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
δέος καὶ φόβον ἱκανὸν ἐμποιῆσαι. Cf. Trench § xxviii.; Wool- 
sey, in Bib. Sacr. for 1861, p. 599 sq.; Schmidt ch. 161, 5.] 

δεῦρο, adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. of place, a. hither; 
to this place. b. in urging and calling, here! come! 
(Sept. esp. for 7? and 739) > Mt. xix. 21; Mk. x. 21; 1k. 
xviii. 22; Jn. xi. 43 (δεῦρο ἔξω come forth). Acts vii. 34; 
Rev. xvii. 1; xxi. 9; δεῦρο εἰς γῆν, ἣν κτλ. Acts vii. 3 
(δεῦρο εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου, 1 K.i. 53; eis Πτολεμαΐδα, 1 Mace. 
ΧΙ. 45). 2. of time, hitherto, now: ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο up to 
this time, Ro. i. 13 (μέχρι δεῦρο, [Plat. lege. 7 p. 811 ¢.]; 
Athen. 1, 62 p. 34 ο.; Plut. vit. Num. 4; Pomp. 24).* 

δεῦτε, adv., used when two or more are addressed [cf. 
B. 70 (61)]; perhaps fr. δεῦρ᾽ ire [yet see Bitm. Gram. 
2116 Aufl. § 115 Anm. 8], see δεῦρο, 1; 1. fr. Hom. 
down, come hither, come here, come: foll. by an impyv., 
δεῦτε, κληρονομήσατε, Mt. xxv. 34; δεῦτε, ἴδετε, Mt. xxviii. 
6; Jn. iv. 29; δεῦτε, ἀριστήσατε, Jn. xxi. 12; δεῦτε, συνά- 
χθητε (Ree. 8. καὶ συνάγεσθε), Rev. xix. 17. δεῦτε ὀπίσω 
μου come after me, be my disciples: Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17, 
(equiv. to ΠΝ 399, 2 K. vi. 19) ; δεῦτε εἰς τ. γάμους. Mt. 
xxii. 4; εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, Mk. vi. 31; δεῦτε πρός pe, Mt. 
xi. 28. 2. It gets the force of an interjection, come ! 
come now! foll. by a hortat. subj.: δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν, 
Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. xii. 7 and RG in Lk. xx. 14. (Sept. 
mostly for 337, sometimes for 393.) * 

δευτεραῖος, -aia, -aiov, (δεύτερος), [Hdt., Xen., al.], of 
or belonging to the second; of one who comes, or does a 
thing, on the second day (cf. τριταῖος, τεταρταῖος, etc.) : 
δευτεραῖοι ἤλθομεν, Acts xxviii. 13; cf. W. § 54, 2; [B. 
§ 123, 97." 

δευτερό-πρωτος, -ov, second-jirst (cf. δευτερέσχατος sec- 
ond-last, last but one): ἐν σαββάτῳ δευτεροπρώτῳ in Lk. 
vi. 1 seems to be, the second of the first sabbaths after the 
feast of the Passover; cf. Redslob in the Intellizenzblatt 


130 


δέχομαι 


zur Hall. Lit. Zeit. 1847, N. 70; Ewald, Jahrbb. ἃ. bibl. 
Wissensch. i. p. 72; [WH. App. ad loc.]. The various 
opinions of others are reviewed by Meyer [and McClel- 
lan] ad loc. and Liibkert in the Stud. und Krit. for 1835, 
p- 664 sqq. (Eustrat. in vita Eutych. n. 95 calls the first 
Sunday after Easter δευτεροπρώτην κυριακήν). [But the 
genuineness of the word is questionable. It is wanting in 
NBL1, 33, 69 and some other authorities. Hence Tr txt. 
WH om. the word, L Tr mrg. br. it. Tischendorf, after 
expunging it in his 2d ed., restored it in his 7th, subse- 
quently put it in brackets, and finally (ed. 8) inserted 
it again. It is questioned or discarded, by Mey., Bleck, 
Alf., Weiss (on Mk. p. 101), Holtz., Hilgenf., Volkm., 
Farrar (Com. ad loc. and Life of Christ i.435), al. For 
the evidence see Tdf.’s note, and for discussions of it 
see WH. App. ad loc. ; Scrivener, Intr. p.515 sq. ; Green, 
“Developed Criticism ” ad loc.]* 

δεύτερος, -έρα, -epov, [fr. Hom. down; Curtius § 277], 
second: Mt. xxii. 26; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xii. 38; Jn. iv. 54; 
Rev. iv. 7, etc.; the second, the other of two: Mt. xxii. 
39; Mk. xii. 31; 1 Co. xv. 47; Tit. iii. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 1; 
Heb. viii. 7; x. 9; δεύτερος θάνατος (see θάνατος, 3), Rev. 
ii, 11; xx. 14; xxi. 8; δευτέρα χάρις in 2 Co. i. 15 is not 
a double benefit, but a second, opp. to the former which 
the Corinthians would have had if Paul in passing 
through Achaia into Macedonia had visited them πρότε- 
pov, [WH txt. Trmrg. read δευτ. χαράν, q. ν.]. The 
neuter δεύτερον is used adverbially in the second place, a 
second time [cf. W. § 37,5 Note 1]: Jn. iii. 4; Rev. xix. 
3; πάλιν is added, as often in Grk. writ. (see ἄνωθεν, 
fin.): Jn. xxi. 16; also τὸ δεύτερον, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Jude 
5; ἐκ δευτέρου (1 Mace. ix. 1), Mk. xiv. 72; Jn. ix. 24; 
Acts xi. 9; Heb. ix. 28; ef. W. § 51, 1d.; with πάλιν added, 
Mt. xxvi. 42; Acts x. 15, (Hom. Od. 3, 161 ἐπὶ δεύτερον 
αὖτις) ; ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ at the second time, Acts vii. 13 (when 
they had come the second time) ; δεύτερον in a partition, 
then, in the second place: 1 Co. xii. 28. 

S€xopar; [fut. 2 pers. plur. δέξεσθε. Eph. vi. 17 Rec.**]; 
laor. ἐδεξάμην ; pf. δέδεγμαι (Acts viii. 14) ; depon. mid.; 
Sept. mostly for np; 1. fo take with the hand: τὸ 
γράμμα [L txt. T Tr WH τὰ γράμματα], Lk. xvi. 6 sq.; τὸ 
ποτήριον, Lk. xxii. 17; to take hold of, take up, τ. περι- 
κεφαλαίαν, τ. μάχαιραν, Eph. vi. 17; τὸ παιδίον εἰς τὰς 
ἀγκάλας. Lk. ii. 28. ᾿ 2. to take up, receive, (Germ. auf- 
nehmen, annehmen); a. used of a place receiving one: 
ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν δέξασθαι (οὐρ. is subject), Acts iii. 21, (Plat. 
Theaet. p. 177 a. τελευτήσαντας αὐτοὺς... ὁ τῶν κακῶν 
καθαρὸς τόπος οὐ δέξεται). b. with acc. of pers. to receive, 
grant access to, a visitor; not to refuse intercourse or friend- 
ship: Lk. ix. 11 RG; Jn. iv. 45; 2 Co. vii. 15; Gal. iv. 
14; Col. iv.10; to receive to hospitality, Mt. x. 14, 40 sq. ; 
Mk. vi. 11; Lk. ix. 5,53; x. 8,10; Acts xxi. 17 Rec.; 
Heb. xi. 31, (often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) ; παιδίον, 
to receive into one’s family in order to bring up and edu- 
cate, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; Lk. ix. 48; to receive eis 
τ. οἴκους, τὰς σκηνάς, Lk. xvi. 4,9; δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά pov, to 
thyself in heaven, Acts vii. 59. c. with ace. of the thing 
offered in speaking, teaching, instructing; to receive fa- 


δέω 


vorably, give ear to, embrace, make one’s own, approve, 
not to reject: τὸν λόγον, Lk. viii. 13; Acts vili. 14; xi. 
1; xvii. 11; 1 ΤῊ. 1. 6; ii. 13; Jas. i. 21; τὰ τοῦ πνεύ- 
ματος, 1 Co. ii. 14; τὴν παράκλησιν, 2 Co. viii. 17; τὴν ἀγάπην 
τῆς ἀληθείας sc. commended to them, 2 Th. ii. 10; [add 
the elliptical constr. in Mt. xi. 14], (often in Grk. writ.) ; 
to receive a benefit offered, not to reject it, 2 Co. viii. 4 
Rec. ἃ. to receive i. q. to take upon one’s self, sustain, 
bear, endure : twa, his bearing and behavior, 2 Co. xi. 16, 
(τὴν ἀδικίαν, Hebr. xw3, Gen. 1. 17; πᾶν, ὃ ἐὰν ἐπαχθῇ, 
Sir. ii. 4; μῦθον χαλεπόν, Hom. Od. 20, 271, and often in 
Grk. writ.). 3. to receive, get, (Germ. empfangen) : 
ἐπιστολάς. Acts xxii. 5; γράμματα, Acts xxviii. 21; τὴν 
βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, to become a partaker of the benefits 
of God’s kingdom, Mk. x.15; Lk. xviii.17; λόγια ζῶντα, 
Acts vii. 58 ; εὐαγγέλιον, 2 Co. xi. 4; τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ, 
2 Co. vi. 1;—i. q. to learn: Phil. iv. 18 [(?) see the 
Comm. ad loc. ].* 

[Syn. δέχομαι, λαμβάνω: The earlier classic use 
of these verbs sustains in the main the distinction laid down 
in the glossaries (e. g. Ammonius s. v. λαβεῖν: λαβεῖν μέν 
ἐστι, τὸ κείμενόν τι ἀνελέσθαι: δέξασθαι δέ, τὸ διδόμενον ἐκ 
χειρός), and the suggestion of ἃ self-prompted taking still 
adheres to A. in many connexions (cf. λαβεῖν τινα γυναῖκα, 
ἀρχὴν λαβεῖν) in distinction from a receiving of what is 
offered ; in use, however, the words overlap and distinctions 
disappear ; yet the suggestion of a welcoming or an ap- 
propriating reception generally cleaves to δ. See Schmidt 
ch. 107, who treats of the comp. of δ. indetail. Comp.: ava-, 
ἀπο-, δια-, εἰσ-, ἐκ-, ἀπ-ἐκ-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, Tapa-, προσ-, ὑπο-δέχομαι.] 

δέω : [fut. δήσω] ; 1 aor. ἔδησα ; pf. ptep. δεδεκώς (Acts 
xxii. 29) ; Pass., pf. δέδεμαι ; 1 aor. inf. δεθῆναι (Acts xxi. 
33); Sept. chiefly for 0%; [fr. Hom. down] ; to bind, tie, 
fasten; 1. prop.: τί, εἰς δεσμάς, Mt. xiii. 30 [Tr WH 
br. G prob. om. εἰς, ef. B. 150 (131) ; W. 225 (211) ]; ὀθόνη 
τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς δεδεμ. a sheet bound by the four cor- 
ners (to the sky), Acts x. 11 (GL T Tr WH om. δεδεμ. 
kai); an animal, to prevent it from straying about, ὄνος 
δεδεμένη, πῶλος δεδεμένος, Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix. 
30; with πρὸς τ. θύραν added, Mk. xi. 4; with ace. of 
pers. to bind, to fasten with chains, to throw into chains : 

᾿ ἀγγέλους, Rev. ix. 14; a madman, πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι, Mk. 
y. 3 sq.; captives, Mt. [xii. 29]; xiv. 3; xxii. 13; xxvii. 
2; Mk. [iii. 27]; vi.17; xv.1; Jn. xviii.12; Acts ix. 14; 
xxi. 11; xxii. 29; Rev. xx. 2; Pass., Mk. xv.7; Jn. xviii. 
24; Acts ix. 2, 21 (in the last two pass. δεδεμένον ἄγειν 
τινά); Acts xxi. 13; xxii. 5; xxiv.27; Col. iv. 3; ἁλύσεσι, 
Acts xii. 6; xxi. 33; ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ ov δέδεται, fiz. for 
these bonds of mine in no way hinder its course, i. e. 
the preaching, extension, and eflicacy of the gospel, 2 
Tim. ii. 9; the bodies of the dead, which were wont to 
be bound with bandages and linen cloths: 6 τεθνηκὼς 
δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας κ. Tas χεῖρας κειρίαις. bound hand and 
foot with grave-cloths, Jn. χὶ. 44 ; τὸ σῶμα ὀθονίοις (Τα. 
2, 7 ἐν ὀθον.). to swathe in linen cloths, Jn. xix. 406. 2. 
metaph. a. Satan is said δῆσαι a woman bent together, 
i. e. by means of a demon, as his messenger, taking pos- 
session of the woman and preventing her from standing 
upright, Lk. xiii. 16 cf. 11. b. to bind, i. e. put under 


131 


δηλόω 


obligation, sc. of law, duty, οἷο. : δεδεμένος τῷ πνεύματε, 
bound or constrained in my spirit, i. e. compelled by my 
convictions, Acts xx. 22 (so not infreq. in Grk. auth. 
as Plat. rep. 8 p. 567 d. ἀνάγκῃ δέδεται ἢ προστάττει αὐ- 
τῷ) ; with dat. of pers. δεδέσθαι τινί to be bound to one: 
ἀνδρί, of a wife, Ro. vii. 2; γυναικί, of a husband, 1 Co. 
vii. 27; δέδεται absol., opp. to ἐλευθέρα ἐστί, ibid. 39; 
(Achill. Tat. 1, 11 p. 41 ἄλλῃ δέδεμαι παρθένῳ, Jambl. 
vit. Pyth. 11, 56 τὴν μὲν ἄγαμον, ... τὴν δὲ πρὸς ἄνδρα be- 
δεμένην). ec. by ἃ Chald. and rabbin. idiom (equiv. to 
0x) to forbid, prohibit, declare to be illicit: Mt. xvi. 
19; xviii. 18. [Comp.: κατα-, rept-, συν-, ὑπο-δέω.] * 

δή, (shortened fr. ἤδη [al. al.]), a particle which, the 
Epic phrases δὴ τότε, δὴ yap excepted, is never placed 
at the beginning of a sentence, but is joined to some pre- 
ceding word, and indicates that “what it introduces can 
be taken as something settled, laid down in deed and in 
truth” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 392): now therefore, 
then, verily, in truth, (Lat. jam, igitur, sane, ete.—al- 
though neither Lat., Germ., [nor Eng.] has a word pre- 
cisely equiv. to 67). 1. added to relative pronouns: 
ὃς δή who is such a one as, who preéminently, who then, 
Mt. xiii. 23. 2. joined to imperatives and hortatory 
subjunctives it signifies that the thing enjoined must be 
done forthwith, at once [cf. W. § 43, 3 a.], so that it may 
be evident that it is being done (cf. Passow i. p. 612”), 
where the Lat. says agedum, jam, Germ. doch, nur, [ Eng. 
now, only, but]: Lk. ii. 15; Acts [vi. 3 LL WH mre. br.]; 
xill. 2; xv. 36; 1 Co. vi. 20, (Sir. xliv. 1). 3. surely, 
certainly: 2 Co. xii. 1 RG* 

δηλαυγῶς, (fr. δῆλος and αὐγή), radiantly, in full light, 
clearly: Mk. viii. 25 TWH mre. with codd. 8*CLA for 
Rec. τηλαυγῶς. Hesych. says δηλαυγῶς - ἄγαν φανερῶς ; 
add δηλαυγέσι τεκμηρίοις, Democrit. in Fabricius, Biblioth. 
Gr. iv. p. 333. With the exception of this word [δηλο- 
ποιέω, (Plut. Pericl. 33, 8; al.)] and the very rare δηλο- 
φανής, δῆλος is not found in composition.* 

δῆλος, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], clear, evident, manifest : 
Mt. xxvi. 73; δῆλον se. ἐστίν it is manifest, evident, foll. 
by ore (4 Mace. ii. 7; Xen. an. 1, 3, 9; al.): 1 Co. xv. 27 
[here some would take the words adverbially and paren- 
thetically 1. 6. δηλονότι manifestly cf. W. § 64, 2 a.]; Gal. 
iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi. 7 (here L T Tr WH om. δῆλον)" 

[Syn. δῆλος, φανερός: δ. evident, what is known and un- 
derstood, φ. manifest, as opp. to what is concealed or invisible ; 
δ. points rather to inner perception, φ. to outward appear- 
ance. Cf. Schmidt ch. 129.] - 


δηλόω, -ὦ ; [impf. ἐδήλουν ; fut. δηλώσω]; 1 aor. ἐδή- 
λωσα; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐδηλοῦτο (1 Pet. i. 11 
WH mrg.)]; 1 aor. ἐδηλώθην ; (δῆλος) ; Sept. for yin 
and sometimes for ΤΠ ΤΙ ; in Grk. auth. fr. [ Aeschyl. and] 
Hdt. down; to make manifest: ri, 1 Co. iii. 13; to make 
known by relating, to declare: τί, Col. i. 8; τινὶ περί τινος, 
ὅτι, 1 Co. i. 11; to give one to understand, to indicate, 
signify: τί, Heb. xii. 27; 2 Pet. i. 14; foll. by ace. with 
inf. Heb. ix. 8; εἴς τι, point unto, 1 Pet. i. 11.* 


[Syy. δηλόω, ἐμφανίζω: eu. to manifest to the sight, 
make visible; δ. to render evident to the mind, of such dis- 
closures as exhibit character or suggest inferences ; hence 


Anpas 


esp. of prophetical, typical, or other supernatural disclosures. 
Cf. Schmidt ch. 129 ὃ 6; Bleek on Heb. ix. 8.] 

Anpas, ὁ, Demas, (prop. name, contracted apparently 
fr. Δημήτριος, cf. W. 103 (97); [on its declension, ef. B. 
20 (18) ]),a companion of Paul, who deserted the apos- 
tle when he was a prisoner at Rome and returned to 
Thessalonica: Col. iv. 14; Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. 10.* 

ϑημηγορέω, -@ : [impf. ἐδημηγόρουν ; (to be a Snunyopos, 
fr. δῆμος and ἀγορεύω to harangue the people) ; to address 
a public assembly, make a speech to the people: ἐδημηγόρει 
πρὸς αὐτούς [A. V. made an oration], Acts xii. 21. (Ar- 
stph., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. Prov. xxx. 31 (xxiv. 66); 
4 Mace. v. 15.)* 

Δημήτριος, -ov, 6, Demetrius ; 
Ephesus, a heathen: Acts xix. 24, 38. 
Christian : 3 Jn. 12. 

δημιουργός, -οῦ, ὁ, (δήμιος public, belonging to the peo- 
ple, and EPTQ; cf. iepoupyds, ἀμπελουργύς, ete.), often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; a. prop. a workman for the 
public. b. univ. the author of any work, an artisan, 
Sramer, builder: τεχνίτης x. δημιουργός, Heb. xi. 10; (Xen. 
mem. 1,4, 7 [ef. 9] σοφοῦ twos δημιουργοῦ τέχνημα. God 
is called 6 τοῦ οὐρανοῦ δημιουργός in Plat. rep. 7 p. 530 a.; 
ὁ δημ. τῶν ὅλων in Joseph. antt. 1, 7,1, and often in eccl. 
writ. from Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20,11; 26,1; 33, 2 on; 
[ef. Philo, de mut. nom. § 4; de opif. mund. ed. Miiller 
Ρ. 133; Piper, Einl. in monument. Theol. § 26; Soph. 
Lex. s. v.]. In the Scriptures, besides, only in 2 Mace. 
iv. 1 κακῶν δημ.). [CFf. Trench § ev.]* 

δῆμος, -ov, 6, the people, the mass of the people assembled 
in a public place: Acts xii. 22; xix. 33; dyew [RG], 
εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὸν δῆμον: Acts xvii. 5 [LT Tr WH προαγ.]; 
xix. 30. [From Hom. down.]* 

[ϑυν. δῆμος, λαός: inclassic Grk. δῆμος denotes the peo- 
ple as organized into a body politic, λαός the unorganized 
people at large. But in biblical Grk. λαός is used esp. of the 
chosen people of God; δῆμος on the other hand (found only 
in Acts) denotes the people of a heathen city. Cf. Trench 
§ xcviii.; Schmidt ch. 199.] 

δημόσιος, -a, -ov, esp. freq. in Attic; belonging to the 
people or slate, public (opp. to ἴδιος): Acts v. 18; in dat. 
fem. δημοσίᾳ used adverbially (opp. to ἰδίᾳ) [ef. W. 591 
(549) note}, publicly, in public places, in view ofall: Acts 


1. a silversmith of 
2. a certain 


XVi. 37; Xvilil. 28; δημ. καὶ κατ᾽ οἴκους, Acts xx. 20; (2 
Mace. vi. 10; 3 Mace. ii. 27; in Grk. writ. also by public 
authority, at the public expense).* 

δηνάριον, -ov, τό. [Plut., Epict., al.], a Lat. word, a de- 
narius, a silver coin, originally consisting of ten [whence 
its name], afterwards [fr. B. c. 217 on] of sixteen asses; 
about [3.898 grams, i. e. 81 pence or 162 cents; rapidly 
debased fr. Nero on; ef. BB.DD. s. v. Denarius]: Mt. 
XVill. 28; xx. 2, 9,13; xxii. 19; Mk. vi. 37; xii. 15; xiv. 
5; Lk. vii. 41; x. 35; xx. 24; Jn. vi. 7; xii.5; Rev. vi. 
6 [ef. W. 587 (546); B. 164 (143)]; τὸ ἀνὰ δηνάριον se. 
év the pay of a denarius apiece promised to each work- 
man, Mt. xx. 10 T Tr [txt., Trmrg. WH br. τό]." 

δή-ποτε (fr. δή and ποτέ), adv., now at length (jam 
aliquando) ; at any time ; at last, ete., just exactly ; Thence 
it generalizes a relative, like the Lat. cumque ; see Lob. 


1382 


Ἵ διά 


ad Phryn. p. 373]: ᾧ δήποτε νοσήματι, with whatsoever 
disease, Jn. v. 4 (RG, but L οἱῳδηποτοῦν)." 

δή-που [L WH δή που; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 
123 sq.], adv., (fr. δή and πού), prop. now in some way, 
whatever that way is; it is used when something is affirmed 
in a slightly ironical manner, as if with an affectation of 
uncertainty, perhaps, doubtless, verily : ob δήπου not surely 
(Germ. doch nicht etwa), hardly I trow; (ef. Rost in 
Passow i. p. 613"; Klotzad Devar. ii. 2 p. 427 sq.). Once 
in Scripture: Heb. ii. 16.* 

[Ala, see Zevs.] 

διά, [“ written δ before a vowel, exc. in prop. names 
and 2 Co. v. 7; Ro. viii. 10” Td: Proleg. p. 94], akin 
to dis and Lat. dis in composition, prop. denoting a divis- 
ion into two or more parts; a preposition taking the 
gen. and the ace. In its use the bibl. writ. differ in no 
respect fr. the Grk.; ef. W. 377 (353) sqq.; 398 (3872) sq. 

A. with the GENITIVE: through; I. of Place; 
1. prop. after verbs denoting an extension, or a motion, 
or an act, that occurs through any place: δ ἄλλης ὁδοῦ 
ἀναχωρεῖν, Mt. ii. 12; δύ ἀνύδρων τόπων, Mt. xii. 43; διὰ 
τῆς Σαμαρείας, Jn. iv.4; διὰ τῆς θύρας, Jn. x. 1 sq.; add, 
Mt. xix. 24; Mk. ii. 23; x. 25; xi. 16; Lk. iv. 80; v.19; 
XViil. 25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Heb. ix. 11 sq.; xi. 29, etc.; δὲ 
ὑμῶν, through your city, Ro. xv. 28; [on διὰ πάντων, 
Acts ix. 32, see πᾶς, I]. 1]; ὁ διὰ πάντων, diffusing his 
saving influence through all, Eph. iv. 6; σώζεσθαι dia 
πυρός, 1 Co. iii. 15; διασώς. δι’ ὕδατος, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Ev. 
Nicod. e. 9 p. 568 sq. ed. Thilo [p. 228 ed. Tdf.] διὰ 
θαλάσσης ὡς διὰ ξηρᾶς); βλέπειν Se ἐσόπτρου, 1 Co. xiii. © 
12 [εἰς W. 880 (350)]. Add the adverbial phrase 6? 
ὅλου from top to bottom, throughout, Jn. xix. 23 (met- 
aph. in every way, 1 Mace. vi. 18). From this use of 
the preposition has come 2. its tropical use of a 
state or condition in which (prop. passing through 
which as through a space) one does or suffers some- 
thing, where we, with a different conception, employ 
with, in, ete. (Germ. bei, unter, mit): ὁ διὰ γράμματος x. 
περιτομῆς παραβάτης νόμου, Ro. ii. 27 [W. 380 (355) ]; of 
πιστεύοντες dt ἀκροβυστίας who believe though uncireum- 
cised (see ἀκροβυστία, a.), Ro. iv. 11; διὰ προσκόμματος 
ἐσθίειν, with offence, or so as to be an offence [ef. W. 380 
(356), and see πρόσκομμα], Ro. xiv. 20; διὰ πίστεως περι- 
πατεῖν, ov διὰ εἴδους (see εἶδος, 1), 2 Co. v. 7; τὰ διὰ 
[Lehm. mre. (cf. Trmrg.) τὰ ἴδια (see Mey. ad loc.) | τοῦ 
σώματος, done in the body (i. e. while we were clothed 
with our earthly body [al. take διά here instrumentally ; 
see III. 2 below]), 2 Co. v. 10; διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων, 2 Co. 
ii. 4; διὰ δύξης, clothed with glory, 2 Co. iii. 11; ἔρχεσθαι, 
εἰσέργ- διά twos with a thing, Heb. ix. 12; 1 Jn. v. 6, [but 
cf. W. 380 (355)]; δὲ ὑπομονῆς, Ro. viii. 25, (διὰ πένθους 
τὸ γῆρας διάγειν, Xen. Cyr. 4, 6, 6; ef. Matthiae ii. 
p- 1358). 

II. of Time [ef. W. 380 (356); Ellic. or Mey. on 
Gal. ii. 1; Fritzsche as below]; 1. of continued 
time; hence a. of the time throughout (during) which 
anything is done: Mt. xxvi. 61; Mk. xiv. 58; δι ὅλης 
(τῆς RG) νυκτός, Lk. v. 5; διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb. ii. 15; 


δια 


διὰ παντός [so L WH Tr (exc. Mk. ν. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53)], 
or written together διαπαντός [so GT (exe. in Mt.) ; ef. 
W. 46 (45); Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 125], continually, 
always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. ν. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii. 
25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); x. 2; xxiv. 16; Ro. xi. 10 (fr. 
Ps. Ixviii. (Lxix.) 24); 2 Th. iii. 16; Heb. ix. 6; xiii. 15, 
(often in Grk. writ.). b. of the time within which a 
thing is done: διὰ τῆς νυκτός (1, Τ Tr WH διὰ νυκτός), by 
night, Acts ν. 19; xvi. 9; xvii. 10; xxiii. 31, (Palaeph. 
1,10); δύ ἡμερῶν τεσσαράκοντα, repeatedly within the 
space of forty days, Acts i. 3;— (denying this use of the 
prep., C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 
164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted 
under a. [see Win., Ellic., Mey. u. s.]). 2. of time 
elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed 
through: Gal. ii. 1 [ef. W. 380 (356)]; δὲ ἡμερῶν, 
(some) days having intervened, after (some) days, Mk. ii. 
1; δὲ ἐτῶν πλειόνων, Acts xxiv. 17; exx. fr. Grk. auth. in 
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 50; [W. 380 (356); L. and S.s.v. A. 
IL. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 2; Field, Otium Norv. iii. p. 14]. 

III. of the Means or Instrument by which any- 
thing is effected; because what is done by means of a 
person or thing seems to pass as it were through the 
same [cf. W. 378 (354) ]. 1. of one who is the author 
of the action as well as its instrument, or of the effi- 
cient cause: δὲ αὐτοῦ (i. 6. τοῦ θεοῦ) τὰ πάντα Se. ἐστίν 
or ἐγένετο, Ro. xi. 36; also δύ οὗ, Heb. ii. 10; δι᾿ οὗ ἐκλή- 
θητε, 1 Co.i. 9; add [Gal. iv. 7 1, T Tr WH, see below]; 
Heb. vii. 21 (ἡ ἰατρικὴ πᾶσα διὰ τοῦ θεοῦ τούτου, i. 6. Aes- 
eulapius, κυβερνᾶται, Plat. symp. p. 186 6. : cf. Fritzsche 
on Rom. vol. i. p. 15, [and for exx. Soph. Lex. 5. ν. 17); of 
him to whom that is due which any one has or has done; 
hence i. q. by the fault of any one: δ οὗ τὸ σκάνδαλον 
ἔρχεται, Mt. xviii. 7; δι᾽ ἑνὸς avOp. ἡ ἁμαρτία... εἰσῆλθε, 
Ro. v. 13, cf. 16-19; ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, Ro. viii. 3; 
by the merit, aid, favor of any one: ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσι 
διά ete. Ro. v.17, cf. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 21; διὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ. 
and the like: Ro. ν. 1 sq. 11; Acts x. 43; Gal. iv. 7 
[Ree., but see above]; δοξάζειν τ. θεὸν διὰ ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 
1 Pet. iv. 11, and εὐχαριστεῖν τῷ θεῷ διὰ “Ino. Xp. Ro. i. 
8; vii. 25 (where L T Tr WH txt. χάρις τῷ θεῷ); Col. iii. 
17, — because the possibility both of glorifying God and 
of giving thanks to him is due to the kindness of Christ; 
καυχᾶσθαι ἐν τῷ θεῷ διὰ Ino. Xp. Ro. v.11; ἀναπαύεσθαι 
διά τινος, Philem. 7; οἱ πεπιστευκότες διὰ τῆς χάριτος. Acts 
XVili. 27; πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες διὰ cov. . . διὰ τῆς 
σῆς προνοίας, Acts xxiv. 3 (8): ὑπερνικᾶν διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπή- 
σαντος ἡμᾶς, Ro. viii. 37; περισσεύειν διά τινος. by the 
increase which comes from one, Phil. i. 26; 2 Co. i. 5; 
ix. 12; διὰ τῆς ὑμῶν δεήσεως. Phil. i.19; add, Philem. 22; 
Ro. i. 12; 2Co.i.4; Gal. iv. 23; 1 Pet.i.5. 2. of the 
instrument used to accomplish a thing, or of the instru- 
mental cause in the stricter sense: —with gen. of 
pers. by the service, the intervention of, any one; with gen. 
of thing, by means of, with the help of, any thing; a. in 
passages where a subject expressly mentioned is said to 
do or to have done a thing by some person or by some 
thing: Mk. xvi. 20 (τοῦ κυρίου τὸν λόγον βεβαιοῦντος διὰ 


133 


διά 


| τ. σημείων) ; Lk.i. 70; Acts i. 16; ii. 22 (τέρασι x. σημεί- 
ots, ois ἐποίησε δι᾿ αὐτοῦ ὁ θεός); Vili. 20; x. 36; xv. 23 
(γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν) ; Xx. 28; xxi. 19; xxviii. 
25; Ro. ii. 16; iii. 31; vii. 13; [viii. 11 Rec.bez εἰς L ed. 
min. TWH txt.]; xv. 18; xvi. 18; 1 Co. i. 21 [cf. W. 
381 (357)]; ii. 10; iv. 15; νἱ. 14; xiv.9,19[RG]; xv. 
57; 2Co.i.4; iv. 14 RG; v.18, 20; ix. 13 [ef. W. 381 
(357)]; χ. 9; xii. 17; Eph.i.5; ii. 16; Col. i. 20, 22; ii. 
8; 1Th.iv.14; 2Th.ii.14; Tit. iii.5; Heb.i.2,3[R 
Gi ears veg) νῶι 9 5 26's) xt; 19.15.91: 
Rev. i. 1; γῆ ἐξ ὕδατος (material cause) x. δι᾿ ὕδατος συνε- 
στῶσα τῷ τοῦ θεοῦ λόγῳ, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [W. 419 (390) cf. 
217 (204)]. b. in passages in which the author or prin- 
cipal cause is not mentioned, but is easily understood 
from the nature of the case, or from the context: Ro. i. 
12; 1 Co. xi. 12 [ef. W. 381 (357)]; Phil. i. 20; 1 Th. iii. 
7; 2 Th. ii. 2,15; Heb. xi. 39 [cf. W. u.s., also § 50, 3]; 
xii. 11,15; 1 Pet. i. 7; διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων, by the me- 
diation (intervention) of many witnesses, they being 
summoned for that purpose [cf. W. 378 (354); A. V. 
among), 2 Tim. ii. 2. Where it is evident from the relig- 
ious conceptions of the Bible that God is the author or 
first cause: Jn. xi. 4; Acts v. 12; Eph. iii. 10; iv. 16; 
Col. ii. 19; 2 Tim. i. 6; Heb. x. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 6; σώζε- 
σθαι διὰ τ. πίστεως, Eph. ii. 8; συνεγείρεσθαι διὰ τ. rior. 
Col. ii. 12; δικαιοῦσθαι διὰ τ. πίστ. Cal. ii. 16, cf. Ro. iii. 
30; in the phrases διὰ τοῦ Ἴησ. Χριστοῦ, and the like: 
Jn.i. 17; iii. 17; Acts xiii. 38; Ro.i.5; v. 9; 1 Co. xv. 
57; 1Jn.iv.9; Phil. i. 11; διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, 1 Co. xv. 
2; Eph. iii. 6; διὰ λόγου θεοῦ, 1 Pet. i. 23, ef. 3: διὰ 
νόμου, Ro. iii. 27; iv. 13; δύ ἀποκαλύψεως "Inc. Xp. Gal. 
| 1.12, ef. 15 sq.; διὰ τοῦ (ἁγίου) πνεύματος, Ro. v. 5; 1 Co. 
xii. 8; Eph. iii. 16; πιστεύειν διά τινος (see πιστεύω, 
1b. y.), Jn. i. 7; 1 Co. iii. 5; σημεῖον γέγονε δι᾿ αὐτῶν, 
Acts iv. 16; ὁ λόγος δι᾿ ἀγγέλων λαληθείς. Heb. ii. 2, ef. 
Gal. iii. 19; ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωῦσέως ἐδόθη. Jn. i. 173; in pas- 
sages in which something is said to have been spoken 
through the O. T. prophets, or some one of them [ef. 
Lghift. Fresh Revision ete. p. 121 sq.1: Mt. ii. 5,17 LT 
Tr WH, 23; [iii. 3 LT Tr WH); iv.14; viii. 17; xii. 
17: xxi. 4; xxiv. 15; xxvii. 9; Acts ii. 16; or to have 
been so written: Lk. xviii. 31; with the added mention 
of the first cause: ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου διὰ τοῦ mpod. Mt. i. 22; 
ii. 15, ef. Lk. i. 70; Acts i. 16; xxviii. 25; Ro. i. 2; in 
passages relating to the Logos: πάντα δὲ αὐτοῦ (i. 6. 
through the divine Logos [ef. W. 379 (355) ]}) ἐγένετο or 
ἐκτίσθη: Jn. i. 3; 1 Co. viii. 6 (where he is expressly 
distincuished from the first cause: εξ αὐτοῦ [W. 419 
(391)]); Col. i. 16 [W. 1. ς.], ef. Heb. i. 2, (Philo de 
cherub. § 35). The instrumental cause and the princi- 
pal are distinguished in 1 Co. xi. 12 (διὰ τῆς γυναικός... 
ἐκ τοῦ Ged); Gal. i. 1 (ἀπ᾿ ἀνθρώπων . . . δι᾿ ἀνθρώπου [ef. 
W. 418 (390)]). 3. with the gen. of a thing διά is used 
to denote the manner in which a thing is done, or the 
formal cause: εἶπε διὰ παραβολῆς. Lk. viii. 4; εἶπε δι᾿ 

épaparos, Acts xvili. 9; ἀπαγγέλλειν διὰ λόγου, by word of 
| mouth, Acts xv. 27; τῷ λόγῳ δι᾿ ἐπιστολῶν, 2 Co. x. 11, 
| ef. 2 Th. ii. 15; πίστις evepyoupern δι᾿ ἀγάπης. Gal. v. 6; 


διά 


κεχάρισται δι’ ἐπαγγελίας. Gal. iii. 18; δουλεύειν διὰ τῆς 
ἀγάπης, Gal. ν. 18; ἐπιστέλλειν διὰ βραχέων, Heb. xiii. 
22; γράφειν Se ὀλίγων, 1 Pet. ν. 12, (Plat. Gorg. p. 449 b. 
διὰ μακρῶν λόγους ποιεῖσθαι [see ὀλίγος, fin.; ef. W. § 51, 
1b.]); διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος, 2 Jn. 12; διὰ μέλανος x. 
καλάμου, 3 Jn. 13, (Plut. Sol. 17,3). Τὸ this head I 
should refer also the use of διά τινος in exhortations ete., 
where one seeks to strengthen his exhortation by the 
mention of a thing or a person held sacred by those 
whom he is admonishing (διά equiv. to by an allusion to, 
by reminding you of (ef. W. 381 (857)]): Ro. xii. 1; 
xv. 80; 1Co.i.10; 2Co.x.1; 1 Th. iv. 2 [yet cf. W.379 
(355) note]; 2 Th. 111. 12 RG. 

B. with the AccusaTIvE [W. 398 (372) sq.]. 1. of 
Place; through; often so in the Grk. poets, once in the 
N. T. ace. to LT Tr WH viz. Lk. xvii. 11 διὰ μέσον 
Σαμαρείας, for RG διὰ μέσου Sap. [but see μέσος, 2]. 

II. of the Ground or Reason on account of which 
anything is or is not done; by reason of, because of 
(Germ. aus Grund). 1. of the reason for whicha 
thing is done, or of the efficient reason, when for 
greater perspicuity it may be rendered by [ef. Kuhner 
8 434 Anm.]; a. with ace. of the thing: δι ἥν, viz. 
τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμέραν (prop. by reason of which day i. 6. 
because it will come [οἵ. W. 400 (373)]), 2 Pet. iii. 12; 
διὰ τ. λόγον (prop. by reason of the word i. e. because 
the word has cleansing power), Jn. xv. 3; διὰ τὸ θέλημά 
σου (Vule. propter voluntatem tuam i. e. because thou 
didst will it), Rev. iv. 11; add, Rev. xii. 11; xiii. 14, 
(ἀναβιώσκεται διὰ τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς φύσιν, Plato, symp. p. 
203 e.); ef. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 1. ὍὌ. with ace. of 
the person, by whose will, agency, favor, fault, any- 
thing is or is done: διὰ τὸν πατέρα... . dv ἐμέ (prop. be- 
cause the father lives... because I live [ef. W. 399 
(373) ]), Jn. vi. 57; διὰ τὸν ὑποτάξαντα, by the will of 
him who subjected it, opp. to οὐχ ἑκοῦσα, Ro. viii. 20 
[ef. Win. 399 (373) note]; μὴ εἴπῃς ὅτι διὰ κύριον ἀπέ- 
στην. Sir. xv. 11; so too in the Grk. writ. of every age; 
ef. Kriiger § 68, 23; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 25. Much 
oftener 2. of the reason or cause on account 
of which anything is or is done, or ought to be done; 
on account of, because of; a. in the phrases διὰ τοῦτο 
for this cause; for this reason; therefore; on this account; 
since this is so: Mt. vi. 25; xii. 27, 31; xiii. 13, ete.; 
ΜΕ. vi. 14; xi. 24; Lk. xi. 49; xiv. 20; Jn. vi. 65; ix. 
23; Acts ii. 26; Ro. i. 26; iv. 16; v.12; xiii.6; xv. 9; 
1 Co. iv. 17; xi. 10, 30; 2 Co. iv. 1; Eph. i. 15; v. 17; 
vi. 13; Col.i.9; 1 Th. ii. 13; iii. 5,7; 2 Th. ii. 11; 2 Tim. 
ii. 10; Heb. i. 9; ii. 1; 1 Jn. iv. 5; 3'Jdn. 10; Rev. vii. 
15; xii. 12; xviii. 8. foll. by ὅτε, for this cause... be- 
cause, therefore ... because: Jn. vy. 16, 18; viii. 47; x. 
17; xii. 18, 39; 1 Jn. iii. 1; ef. Tholuck ed.7 on Jn. x. 
17, [he questions, at least for x. 17 and xii. 39, the canon 
of Meyer (on xii. 39), Luthardt (on x. 17), al., that in this 
phrase in Jn. the τοῦτο always looks backwards]. in the 
opposite order (when the words that precede with ὅτι are 
to be emphasized): Jn. xv. 19. It indicates the end 
and purpose, being foll. either by ἵνα, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 


134 


διά 


Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15, (in the opp. order, Jn. i. 31); or 
by ὅπως, Heb. ix. 15. διὰ τί [so L Tr WH] and written 
together διατί [so GT; ef. W.45; Lipsius, Gram. Unters. 
p- 126], why? wherefore? Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; xvii. 19; 
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 30; Jn. vii.45; Acts v. 3; Ro. ix. 32; 1 
Co. vi. 7; Rev. xvii. 7. δι᾿ ἣν αἰτίαν, see αἰτία, 1. τίς ἡ αἰτία, 
δι ἥν, Acts x. 21; xxiii. 28; διὰ ταύτην τὴν αἰτίαν, Acts 
XXVili. 20; διὰ ταῦτα, Eph. v.6,ete. b. used, with theace. 
of any noun, of the mental affection by which one is im- 
pelled to some act [Eng. for; ef. W. 399 (372)]: διὰ φθό- 
νον, because prompted by envy, for envy, Mt. xxvii. 18; 
Mk. xv. 10; διὰ τὸν φόβον τινός, Jn. vii. 13; xix. 38; xx. 
19; Rev. xviii. 10,15; διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην, Eph. ii. 4. 
of any other cause on account of which one is said to do 
or to have done something, —as in Mt. xiv. 3,9; xv. 3, 6; 
Jn. iv. 39, 41 sq.; xii. 11; xiv. 11; Acts xxviii. 2; Ro. 
iii. 25 (διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν τῶν mpoyey- ἅμαρτημ. because of the 
pretermission ete., i. e. because he had left the sins un- 
punished); Ro. vi. 19; xv. 15; 2 Co. ix. 14; Gal. iv. 13 
(δι ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκός, on account of an infirmity of the 
flesh, i. 6. detained among you by sickness; cf. Wieseler 
{or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc.) ;— or to suffer or have suffered 
something, Mt. xxiv. 9; xxvii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts 
xxi. 85; 2Co. iv. 11; Col. iii. 6; 1 Pet. iii. 14; Rev. i. 9; 
vi. 9; —or to have obtained something, Heb. ii. 9; v.14; 1 
Jn. ii. 12 ;—or to be or to become something, Ro. viii. 10; 
xi. 28; Eph. iv. 18; Heb. v. 12 [W. 399 (373)]; vii. 18. 
of the im peding cause, where by reason of some per- 
son or thing something is said to have been impossible: 
Mt. xiii. 58; xvii. 20; Mk. ii.4; Lk. v. 19; viii. 19; Acts 
xxi. 34; Heb. iii. 19; iv. 6. διά with the ace. of a pers. 
is often i. q. for the benefit of, [Eng. for the sake of |}: Mk. 
ii. 27; Jn. xi. 42; xii. 30; 1 Co. xi. 9; Heb. 1. 14; vi. 7; 
διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς, Mt. xxiv. 22; Mk. xiii. 20; 2 Tim. ii. 
10; διὰ Χριστόν for Christ’s sake, to promote his cause, 
1 Co. iv. 10; δύ ὑμᾶς, Jn. xii. 30; 2 Co. iv. 15; viii. 9; 
Phil. i. 24; 1 Th. 1. 5. Sed twa, because of the example 
set by one: 2 Co. ii. 10; Ro. ii. 24; 2 Pet. 11. 2; διὰ τὸν 
Χριστόν for Christ, to become a partner of Christ, Phil. 
iii. 7 (equiv. to ἵνα Χριστὸν κερδήσω;, vs. 8). 6. διὰ τό, 
because that, for that, is placed before the inf., — either 
standing alone, as Lk. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 23 ;— or having a 
subject ace. expressed, as Mt. xxiv. 12; Mk. v. 4; Lk. ii. 
4; xix.11; Acts iv. 2; xii. 20; xviii. 2; xxvii. 4, 9; xxviii. 
18; Phil. i. 7; Heb. vii. 24; x. 2; Jas. iv. 2; — or with its 
subject acc. evident from the context, as Mt. xiii. 6; Mk. 
iv. 6; Lk. xi. 8; xviii.5; xxiii.8; Acts viii. 11; xviii. 3. 

C. In Composition διά indicates 1. a passing 
through space or time, through, (διαβαίνω, διέρχομαι, διῦ- 
λίζω, ete.) ; hence 2. continuity of time (διαμένω, δια- 
τελέω, διατηρέω). and completeness of action (διακαθαρίζω, 
διαζώννυμι). 3. distribution (διαδίδωμι, διαγγέλλω, δια- 
φημίζω). 4. separation (διαλύω, διαιρέω). 5. rival- 
ry and endeavor (διαπίνω, διακατελέγχομαι; οἵ. Herm. ad 
Vig. p. 854; [Winer, as below, p. 6]). 6. transition 
from one state to another (διαλλάσσω; διορθόω). (Cf. Win- 
er, De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v.; Walckenaer on Hat. 5, 
18; Cattier. Gazophyl. ed. Abresch, Cant. 1810, p. 39; A. 


διαβαίνω 


Rieder, Ueb. d. mit mehr als ein. priip. zusammeng. verba 
im N. T. p.17 sq.] No one of the N. T. writers makes 
more freq. use of verbs compounded with διά than Luke, 
[see the list in Winer, τι. s. p. 3 note; on their constr. W. 
§ 52, 4, 8]. 

Sia-Batvw: 2 aor. διέβην, inf. διαβῆναι, ptep. διαβάς ; as 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; (Plin. pertranseo) ; to pass 
through, cross over; a. transitively : τὴν θάλασσαν ὡς διὰ 
ξηρᾶς, Heb. xi. 29. _b. intrans.: πρός twa, Lk. xvi. 26; 
εἰς with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 9; (for 72,1 S. xiii. 7).* 

δια-βάλλω: 1 aor. pass. διεβλήθην ; 1. prop. to throw 
over or across, to send over, (τὶ διά τινος). 2. very often, 
fr. Hdt. down, to traduce, calumniate, slander, accuse, 
defame (cf. Lat. perstringere, Germ. durchziehen, [διά 
as it were from one to another; see Winer, De verb. 
comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 17]), not only of those who bring a 
false charge against one (διέβλητο πρὸς αὐτὸν ἀδίκως, 
Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 3), but also of those who disseminate 
the truth concerning a man, but do so maliciously, insidi- 
ously, with hostility [cf. Lucian’s Essay de calumn. non 
temere credend.], (Dan. iii. 8 Sept.; Dan. vi. 24 Theo- 
dot.) ; so διεβλήθη αὐτῷ ὡς διασκορπίζων, Lk. xvi. 1 (with 
dat. of pers. to whom the charge is made, also in Hadt. 5, 
35, et al.; τινὰ πρός twa, Hdt. 5, 96, et al.; foll. by ὡς 
with ptep., Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 23; Plat. epp. 7 p. 334 a.). 
[S¥YN. see κατηγορέω.] * 

δια-βεβαιόομαι (-οὔμαι) ; mid. to affirm strongly, assert 
confidently, [ef. W. 253 (238)]: περί twos (Polyb. 12, 
11 (12), 6), 1 Tim. i. 7 [ef. WH. App. p. 167]; Tit. iii. 
8. (Dem. p. 220, 4; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut., Ael.) * 

δια-βλέπω : fut. διαβλέψω; 1 aor. διέβλεψα:; to look 
through, penetrate by vision; a. to look fixedly, stare 
straight before one (Plat. Phaedo p. 86 d.): διέβλεψε, of 
a blind man recovering sight, Mk. viii. 25 T WH Tr txt. 
[some refer this tob.]. _b. to see clearly: foll. by an inf. 
expressing the purpose, Mt. vii. 5; Lk. vi.42. (Aristot., 
Plut.) * 

διάβολος, -ov, (διαβάλλω, q. ν.); prone to slander, slander- 
ous, accusing falsely, (Arstph., Andoc., Plut., al.): 1 
Tim. iii. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. ii. 3; as subst. ὁ διάβολος, 
a calumniator, false accuser, slanderer, [see κατηγορέω. 
fin.], (Xen. Ages. 11, 5; [Aristot., al.]): Sept. Esth. vii. 
4; viii. 1. In the Bible and in eccl. writ. ὁ διάβολος 
[also διάβ. without the art.; cf. W. 124 (118); B. 89 
(78)] is applied κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν to the one called in Hebr. 
jOwn, ὁ σατανᾶς (q. v.), viz. Satan, the prince of demons, 
the author of evil, persecuting good men (Jobi.; Zech. 
iii. 1 sqq., cf. Rev. xii. 10), estranging mankind from God 
and enticing them to sin, and afflicting them with dis- 
eases by means of demons who take possession of their 
bodies at his bidding; the malignant enemy of God and 
the Messiah: Mt. iv. 1, 5, [8, 11]; xiii. 39; xxv. 41; Lk. 
iv. 2, [3, 5 RL, 6, 13]; viii. 12; Jn. xiii.2; Acts x. 38; 
Eph. iv. 27; vi. 11; 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb. 
ii. 14; Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. ν. 8; Jude 9; Rev. ii. 10; xii. 
9,12; xx. 2,10; (Sap. ii. 24; [ef. Ps. eviii. (cix.) 6; 1 Chr. 
xxi. 17). Men who resemble the devil in mind and will 
are said εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου to be of the devil, prop. to de- 


135 


διώγω 


rive their origin from the devil, trop. to depend upon the 
devil in thought and action, to be prompted and governed 
by him: Jn. viii. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 8; the same are called 
τέκνα τοῦ dia. children of the devil, 1 Jn. iii. 10; υἱοὶ 
τοῦ 6. sons of the devil, Acts xiii. 10, cf. Mt. xiii. 38; Jn. 
vil. 38; 1Jn.iii. 10. The name διάβολος is fig. applied 
to a man who, by opposing the cause of God, may be 
said to act the part of the devil or to side with him: Jn. 
vi. 70, cf. Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 88. [Cf. σατᾶν fin.]* 

δι-αγγέλλω ; 2 aor. pass. διηγγέλην ; fr. Pind. down; to 
carry a message through, announce everywhere, through 
places, through assemblies of men, ete.; to publish abroad, 
declare, [see διά, C. 3]: τί, Lk. ix. 60; Acts xxi. 26 (διαγ- 
γέλλων, sc. to all who were in the temple and were 
knowing to the affair) ; with the addition ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ» 
Ro. ix. 17 fr. Ex. ix. 16. (Lev. xxv. 9; Josh. vi.10; Ps. 
ii. 7; [Iviii. (lix.) 13]; Sir. xliii. 2; 2 Mace. iii. 34.) * 

διά-γε, see γέ, 1. 

δια-γίνομαι : 2 aor. διεγενόμην ; 1. to be through, con- 
tinue. 2. to be between, intervene; hence in Grk. writ. 
fr. Isaeus (p. 84, 14, 9 [or. de Hagn. hered.] χρόνων διαγε- 
νομένων) down, the aor. is used of time, to have intervened, 
elapsed, passed meanwhile, (ef. χρόνου μεταξὺ διαγενομένου 
Lys. 93, 6]: ἡμερῶν διαγενομένων τινῶν, Acts xxv. 13; 
ἱκανοῦ χρόνου διαγενομένου, Acts xxvii. 9 ; διαγενομένου τοῦ 
σαββάτου, Mk. xvi. 1.* 

δια-γινώσκω ; fut. διαγνώσομαι; 1. to distinguish (Lat. 
dignosco), i. 6. to know accurately, ascertain exactly: τί, 
Acts xxiii. 15; (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. 
in a legal sense, to examine, determine, decide, (cf. Cic. 
cognosco): τὰ καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς your case, Acts xxiv. 22; (2 
Mace. ix. 15; Dem. p. 629, 25; p. 545, 9; al.).* 

δια-γνωρίζω: 1 aor. διεγνώρισα ; to publish abroad, make 
known thoroughly: περί twos, Lk. ii. 17 RG. - Besides, 
only in [ Philo, quod det. pot. § 26, i. 210, 16 ed. Mang. 
and] in Schol. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 787, 15 to discriminate.* 

διάγνωσις, -ews, 7, (see διαγινώσκω) ; 1. a distin- 
guishing. 2. in a legal sense (Lat. cognitio), examina- 
tion, opinion, decision, (Sap. iii. 18; Plat. lege. 9 p.865c.): 
Acts xxv. 21.* 

δια-γογγύζω : impf. διεγόγγυζον: to murmur (διά i.e. 
either through a whole crowd, or ‘among one another,’ 
Germ. durch einander [cf. διά, C.]); hence it is always 
used of many indignantly complaining (see γογγύζω) : 
Lk. xv. 2; xix.7. (Ex. xvi. 2, 7,8; [Num. xiv. 2]; Josh. 
ix. 24 (18), ete.; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 24; Clem. Alex. i. 
p- 528 ed. Pott.; Heliod. 7, 27, and in some Byzant. writ.) 
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 16 sq.* 

δια-γρηγορέω, -@: 1 aor. διεγρηγόρησα; to watch through, 
(Hdian. 3, 4, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.] πάσης τῆς νυκτὸς... δια- 
γρηγορήσαντες, Niceph. Greg. Hist. Byz. p. 205 f. and 571 
a.) ; to remain awake: Lk. ix. 32 (for they had overcome 
the force of sleep, with which they were weighed down, 
βεβαρημ. ὕπνῳ) ; [al. (e.g. R. V. txt.) to be fully awake, 
ef. Niceph. τ. s. p. 205 f. δόξαν ἀπεβαλόμην ὥσπερ οἱ δια- 
γρηγορήσαντες Ta ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις ὀνείρατα; Win. De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 11 sq.].* 

δι-άγω ; 1. to lead through, lead across, send across. 


διαδέχομαι 


2. with τὸν βίον, τὸν χρόνον, etc., added or understood, 
to pass: Biov, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (very often in Grk. writ.) ; 
διάγειν ἔν τινι, sc. τὸν βίον to live [W. 593 (551 sq.) ; B. 
144 (126)], Tit. iii. 3 (ἐν φιλοσοφίᾳ, Plat. Phaedr. p. 
259 d.; ἐν εἰρήνῃ καὶ σχολῇ, Plut. Timol. 3).* 

δια-δέχομαι : 1 aor. διεδεξάμην ; prop. to receive through 
another anything left or bequeathed by him, to receive in 
succession, receive in turn, succeed to: τὴν σκηνήν the 
tabernacle, Acts vii. 45. (τὴν ἀρχήν, τὴν βασιλείαν, etc., 
in Polyb., Diod., Joseph., 41.) [Cf. δέχομαι. 1" 

διάδημα, -ros, τό, (διαδέω to bind round), a diadem, i. e. 
the blue band marked with white with which Persian 
kings used to bind on the turban or tiara; the kingly or- 
nament for the head: Rey. xii. 3; xiii. 1; xix. 12. (Xen. 
Cyr. 8,3,13; Esth.i.11; ii. 17 for 133 1 Mace. i. 9.)* 

[Syn. διάδημα, στέφανος: στ. like the Lat. corona is 
a crown in the sense of ἃ chaplet, wreath, or garland — the 
badge of “victory in the games, of civic worth, of military 
valor, of nuptial joy, of festal gladness”; διάδημα is a crown 
as the badge of royalty, βασιλείας γνώρισμα (Lucian, Pisce. 35). 
Cf. Trench § xxiii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 1; Dict. of 
Christ. Antiq. s. v. Coronation p. 4648sq.; B.D. Am. ed.s.v. 
Diadem; but cf. στέφανος, ἃ.] 

δια-δίδωμι ; fut. διαδιδώσω (Rey. xvii. 13 Rec.) ; 1 aor. 
διέδωκα ; 2 aor. impv. διάδος ; Pass., impf. 8 pers. sing. 
διεδίδοτο (Acts iv. 35), for which L T Tr WH read διε- 
δίδετο (see ἀποδίδωμι) ; 1. to distribute, divide among 
several [cf. διά, Ο. 3]: ri, Lk. xi. 22; ri τινι, Lk. xviii. 22 
(Lehm. δός) ; Jn. vi. 11 (Tdf. ἔδωκεν) ; pass. Acts iv. 35. 
Its meaning is esp. illustrated by Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 7 τὸν 
Κῦρον λαβόντα τῶν κρεῶν διαδιδόναι τοῖς . . . θεραπευταῖς 
. «+ τοιαῦτα ἐποίει, ἕως διεδίδου πάντα ἃ ἔλαβε κρέα. 2) 
to give over, deliver: τί τινι, Rev. xvii. 13; but here GL 
T Tr WH have restored διδύασι (cf. δίδωμι, init.).* 

διά-δοχος, -ov, 6, ἡ, (διαδέχομαι), succecdiny, a successor : 
Acts xxiv. 27. (Sir. xlvi. 1; [xlviii. 8]; 2 Mace. xiv. 26; 
often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 5, 26 down.) * 

δια-ζωννύω or διαζώννυμιε : 1 aor. διέζωσα ; 1 aor. mid. 
διεζωσάμην ; pf. pass. ptep. διεζωσμένος ; to bind or gird 
all around (6a; this force of the prep. appears in the 
trop. use of the verb in Plut. Brut. 31, 2. as δ᾽ ἡ φλὸξ ῥυεῖσα 
καὶ διαζώσασα πανταχόθεν τὴν πόλιν διέλαμψε ToA- 
Ay): ἑαυτόν, Jn. xiii. 4; Pass. διαζώννυμαί τι to be girded : 
@ (by attraction for 6 [yet cf. Mey.]) ἦν διεζωσμένος, Jn. 
xiii. 5; Mid. διαζώννυμαί τι to gird one’s self with a thing, 
gird a thing around one’s self; In. xxi. 7; (Ezek. xxiii. 
15 [Alex.]. in Grk. writ. occasionally fr. Thue. on). 
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 13.* 

διαθήκη, -ης, 7, (διατίθημι) ; 1. a disposition, arrange- 
ment, of any sort, which one wishes to be valid, (Germ. 
Verordnung, Willensverfiigung): Gal. iii. 15, where un- 
der the name of ἃ man’s disposition is meant specifically a 
testament, so far forth as it is a specimen and example of 
that disposition [cf. Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; esp. the 
last disposal which one makes of his earthly possessions 
after his death, a testament or will (so in Grk. writ. fr. 
[Arstph.], Plat. lege. 11 p. 922 ¢. sqq. down): Heb. ix. 
16 sq. 2. a compact, covenant (Arstph. av. 440), 
very often in the Seriptures for M3 (Vulg. testamen- 


136 . 


διαθήκη 


tum). For the word covenant is used to denote the close 
relationship which God entered into, first with Noah 
(Gen. vi. 18; ix. 9 sqq. [ef. Sir. sliv. 18]), then with 
Abraham, Isaac and Jacob and their posterity (Lev. 
xxvi. 42 [ef. 2 Mace. i. 2]), but esp. with Abraham (Gen. 
xv. and xvii.), and afterwards through Moses with the 
people of Israel (Ex. xxiv.; Deut. v. 2; xxviii. 69 (xxix. 
1)). By this last covenant the Israelites are bound to 
obey God's will as expressed and solemnly promulged in 
the Mosaic law; and he promises them his almighty 
protection and blessings of every kind in this world, 
but threatens transgressors with the severest punish- 
ments. Hence in the N.'T. we find mention of ai πλάκες 
τῆς διαθήκης (ST NIN, Deut. ix. 9, 15), the tables of 
the law, on which the duties of the covenant were inscribed 
(Ex. xx.); of ἡ κιβωτὸς τῆς διαθ. (37 7178, Deut. x. 
8; xxxi. 9; Josh. iii. 6, ete.), the ark of the covenant or 
law, in which those tables were deposited, Heb. ix. 4 ; 
Rey. xi. 19; of ἡ διαθήκη περιτομῆς the covenant of cir- 
cumcision, made with Abraham, whose sign and seal was 
circumcision (Gen. xvii. 10 sqq.), Acts vii. 8; of τὸ αἷμα 
τῆς διαθήκης the blood of the victims, by the shedding and 
sprinkling of which the Mosaic covenant was ratified, 
Hleb. ix. 20 fr. Ex. xxiv. 8; of αἱ διαθῆκαι the covenants, 
one made with Abraham, the other through Moses with 
the Israelites, Ro. ix. 4 [L txt. Tr mre. ἡ διαθήκη] (Sap. 
xviii. 22; Sir. xliv. 11; 2 Mace. viii. 15; Ep. of Barn. 9; 
[ef. W. 177 (166)])5; of ai διαθῆκαι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, the 
covenants to which the promise of salvation through the 
Messiah was annexed, Eph. ii. 12 (συνθῆκαι ἀγαθῶν ὑπο- 
σχέσεων, Sap. xii. 21); for Christian salvation is the 
fulfilment of the divine promises annexed to those cov- 
enants, esp. to that made with Abraham: Lk. i. 72 sq.: 
Acts iii. 25; Ro. xi. 27; Gal. iii. 17 (where διαθήκη is 
God’s arrangement i. e. the promise made to Abraham). 
As the new and far more excellent bond of friendship 
which God in the Messiah’s time would enter into with 
the people of Israel is called DWAIN 173, καινὴ διαθήκη 
(Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31),—which divine promise Christ 
has made good (Leb. viii. 8-10; x. 16), — we find in the 
N. Τὸ two distinct covenants spoken of, δύο διαθῆκαι (Gal. 
iv. 24), viz. the Mosaic and the Christian, with the 
former of which (τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ, Heb. ix. 15, 18, ef. 
viii. 9) the latter is contrasted, as καινὴ διαθήκη, Mt. xxvi- 
28; Mk. xiv. 24 (in both pass. in RGL [in Mt. in Tr 
also]) ; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; 
2 Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8; κρείττων διαθήκη, Heb. vii. 22; 
αἰώνιος διαθήκη, Heb. xiii. 20; and Christ is called xpetr- 
Tovos OY καινῆς or νέας διαθήκης μεσίτης : Heb. viii. 6; ix. 
15; xii. 24. This new covenant binds men to exercise 
faith in Christ, and God promises them grace and salva- 
tion eternal. This covenant Christ set up and ratified by 
undergoing death; hence the phrases τὸ αἷμα τῆς καινῆς 
διαθήκης, τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης. (see αἷμα sub fin.), [Heb. 
x. 297; τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης. my blood by the shed- 
dine of which the covenant is established, Mt. xxvi. 28 
T WH and Mk. xiv. 24 T Tr WII (on two gen. after one 
noun cf. Matthiae § 380, Anm.1; Kiihner ii. p. 288 sq.; 


διαίρεσις 


[Jelf § 543, 1, οἵ. § 466; W.§ 30,3 Note 3; Β. 155 (136)]). 
By metonymy of the contained for the container ἡ παλαιὰ 
διαθήκη is used in 2 Co. iii. 14 of the sacred books of the 
0. T. because in them the conditions and principles of 
the older covenant were recorded. Finally must be 
noted the amphiboly or twofold use [οἵ. Philo de mut. 
nom. § 6] by which the writer to the Hebrews, in ix. 16 
sq-, substitutes for the meaning covenant which διαθήκη 
bears elsewhere in the Ep. that of /estament (see 1 above), 
and likens Christ to a testator, — not only because the 
author regards eternal blessedness as an inheritance be- 
queathed by Christ, but also because he is endeavoring 
to show, both that the attainment of eternal salvation is 
made possible for the disciples of Christ by his death 
(ix. 15), and that even the Mosaic covenant had been 
consecrated by blood (18 sqq.). This, apparently, led 
the Latin Vulgate to render διαθήκη wherever it occurs 
in the Bible [i. e. in the New Test., not always in the 
Old; see B.D. s. v. Covenant, and B.D. Am. ed. 5. v. 
Testament} by the word ‘estamentum.* 

δι-αίρεσις, -ews, 7, (διαιρέω, q- V-) ; 1. division, dis- 
tribution, (Hat., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. distinction, differ- 
ence, (Plat. Soph. p. 267 b. τίνα διαίρεσιν ἀγνωσίας τε καὶ 


γνώσεως θήσομεν ; al.) ; in particular, a distinction arising | 


from a different distribution to different persons, [A.V. 
diversity]: 1 Co. xii. 4-6, cf. 11 διαιροῦν ἰδίᾳ ἑκάστῳ καθὼς 
βούλεται." 

δι-αιρέω, -ῶ; 2 aor. διεῖλον ; 1. to divide into parts, 
to part, to tear, cleave or cut asunder, (Hom. and subseq. 
writ.; Gen. xv. 10; 1 K. iii. 25). 2. to distribute: τί 
τινε (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 51; Hell. 3, 2, 10): Lk. xv. 12; 1 
Co. xii. 11; (Josh. xviii. 5; 1 Chr. xxiii. 6, ete.).* 

[δια-καθαίρω : 1 aor. διεκάθαρα (un-Attic and later form ; 
ef. Moeris, ed. Piers. p. 137; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25; Veitch 
s. v. kaOaipw), inf. διακαθᾶραι : to cleanse (throughly cf. διά, 
C. 2 ie.) thoroughly: Lk. iii. 17 TWH Lurg. Tr mre. ; 
for RG διακαθαρίζω. (Fr. Arstph. and Plat. down.) *] 

δια-καθαρίζω: fut. διακαθαριῶ [ B. 37 (32); W.$ 13,1 ¢.; 
WH. App. p. 163]; to cleanse thoroughly, (Vulg. per- 
mundo): τὴν ἅλωνα, Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17 [T WH ete. 
διακαθᾶραι, q. v.]. (Not found in prof. auth., who use 
διακαθαίρω, as τὴν ἅλω, Alciphr. ep. 3, 26.) * 

δια-κατ-ελέγχομαι : impf. διακατηλεγχόμην ; 10 confute 
with rivalry and effort or in a contest (on this use of the 
prep. διά in compos. ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 854; [al. give 
it here the sense of completeness ; see διά, C. 2]): with 
dat. of pers. [W. § 31,1f.; B. 177 (154) ]; not found exe. 
in Acts xviii. 28 [R. V. powerfully confuted].* 

διακονέω, -d; impf. διηκόνουν (as if the verb were com- 
pounded of διά and axovéw, for the rarer and earlier form 
ἐδιακόνουν, cf. B. 35 (31) ; Ph. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. §86 Anm. 
6; Kriiger § 28, 14, 13); [fut. διακονήσω]: 1 aor. διηκό- 
ynoa (for the earlier ἐδιακύόνησα) : Pass., pres. ptep. δια- 
κονούμενος ; 1 aor. inf. διακονηθῆναι. ptcp. διακονηθείς : 
(διάκονος, q. v-) ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.], Hdt. down ; to 
be a servant, attendant, domestic; to serve, wait upon; 1. 
univ.: [absol. ὁ διακονῶν, Lk. xxii. 26]; with dat. of 
pers. to minister to one; render ministering offices to : In. 


137 


διακονία 


xii. 26; Acts xix. 22; Philem. 13; Pass. to be served, 
ministered unto (W. § 39,1; [B. 188 (163)]): Mt. xx. 
28; Mk. x. 45. 2. Like the Lat. ministrare, to wait 
at table and offer food and drink to the quests, (cf. W. 593 
(552)]: with dat. of pers., Mt. iv. 11; viii. 15; Mk.i. 13, 
31; Lk. iv. 39; xii. 37; xvii. 8; absol. 6 διακονῶν, Lk. 
xxii. 27; soalso of women preparing food, Lk. x. 40; Jn. 
xii. 2; (Menand. ap. Athen. 6 ο. 46, p. 245 c.; Anaer. 
4, 6; al.; pass. διακονεῖσθαι ὑπό τινος, Diod. 5, 28; Philo, 
vit. contempl. § 9). 3. to minister i.e. supply food and 
the necessaries of life: with dat. of pers., Mt. xxv. 44; 
xxvil. 55; Mk. xv. 41; διηκόνουν αὐτοῖς ἐκ (Rec. ἀπὸ) 
τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐταῖς, Lk. viii. 3; to relieve one’s neces- 
sities (6. g. by collecting alms): Ro. xv. 25 ; Heb. vi. 10; 
τραπέζαις , to provide, take care of, distribute, the things 
necessary to sustain life, Acts vi. 2. absol., those are 
said διακονεῖν. i. 6. to take care of the poor and the sick, 
who administer the office of deacon (see διάκονος, 2) in 
the Christian churches, to serve as deacons: 1 Tim. iii. 
10, 13; 1 Pet. iv. 11 [many take this last ex. in a gen- 
eral rather than an official sense]. 4. with ace. 
of the thing, to minister i. e. attend to, anything, that may 
serve another’s interests: χάρις διακονουμένη ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, 2 
Co. viii. 19; [ἁδροτής, ibid. 20]; ὅσα διηκόνησε, how many 
things I owe to his ministration, 2 Tim. i. 18; ἐπιστολὴ 
διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, an epistle written, as it were, by 
our serving as amanuenses, 2 Co. iii. 8. with ace. of the 
thing and dat. of pers., to minister a thing unto one, to 
serve one with or by supplying any thing: 1 Pet. i. 12; τὶ 
εἰς ἑαυτούς, i. 6. eis ἀλλήλους to one another, for mutual 
use, 1 Pet. iv. 10.* 

διακονία. -as. ἡ. (διάκονος), [fr. Thue., Plat. down], ser- 
vice, ministering, esp. of those who execute the commands 
of others; 1. univ.: 2 Tim. iv. 11; Heb. i. 14. Zz 
of those who by the command of God proclaim and pro- 
mote religion among men; 8. of the office of Moses: 
ἡ διακ. τοῦ θανάτου. concisely for the ministration by 
which the law is promulgated that threatens and brings 
death, 2 Co. iii. 7; τῆς κατακρίσεως, the ministration by 
which condemnation is announced, ibid. 9. b. of the 
office of the apostles and its administration: Acts i. 
17, 25; xx. 24; xxi. 19; Ro. xi. 138; 2 Co. iv. 1; vi. 3; 
1 Tim. i. 12; τοῦ λόγου, Acts vi. 4; τοῦ πνεύματος. the 
ministry whose office it is to cause men to obtain and 
be governed by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. iii. 8; τῆς δικαιο- 
σύνης. by which men are taught how they may become 
righteous with God, ibid. 9; τῆς καταλλαγῆς, the ministry 
whose work it is to induce men to embrace the offered 
reconciliation with God, 2 Co. v. 18; πρὸς τὴν ὑμῶν δια- 
κονίαν. that by preaching the gospel I might minister 
unto you, 2 Co. xi. 8. ὁ. of the ministration or service 
of all who, endowed by God with powers of mind and 
heart peculiarly adapted to this end, endeavor zealously 
and laboriously to promote the cause of Christ among 
men, as apostles, prophets, evangelists, elders, ete. : 1 Co. 
xii.5; Eph. iv. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 5. What ministry is re- 
ferred to in Col. iv. 17 is not clear. 3. the ministra- 
tion of those who render to others the offices of Christian 


διάκονος 


affection: 1 Co. xvi. 15; Rev. ii. 19, esp. of those who 
succor need by either collecting or bestowing benefac- 
tions [ Acts xii. 25]; the care of the poor, the supplying 
or distributing of charities, (Luther uses Handreichung) : 
Acts vi. 1; 2 Co. ix. 13; ἡ διακονία ἡ εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. 
viii. 4; ix. 1; ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας, the ministration 
rendered through this λειτουργία, 2 Co. ix. 12; πέμπειν 
eis διακονίαν τινί, to send a thing to one for the relief of 
his want [A. V. to send relief unto], Acts xi. 29 (κομίζειν 
χρήματα πολλὰ εἰς διακονίαν τῶν χηρῶν, Acta Thomae § δῦ, 
p- 233 ed. Tdf.); ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱερουσαλ. “ my min- 
istration in bringing the money collected by me, a minis- 
tration intended for Jerusalem” (Fritzsche), Ro. xv. 31 
[here L Tr mrg. read ἡ Swpodopia . . . ἐν ete. ]. 4. the 
office of deacon in the primitive church (see διάκονος, 
2): Ro. xii. 7. 5. the service of those who prepare 
and present food: Lk. x. 40 (as in Xen. oee. 7, 41).* 
διάκονος, -ov, 6, 7, (of uncert. origin, but by no means, 
as was formerly thought, compounded of διά and κόνις, 
so as to mean prop. ‘raising dust by hastening’; cf. 
ἐγκονεῖν ; for a in the prep. διά is short, in διάκονος lone. 
Bum. Lexil. i. p. 218 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 231 sq.] thinks 
it is derived fr. obsol. διάκω i. q. διήκω [allied with διώκω ; 
cf. Vanicek p. 3687); one who executes the commands 
of another, esp. of a master; a servant, attendant, min- 
ister ; 1. uniy.: of the servant of a king, Mt. xxii. 
13; with gen. of the pers. served, Mt. xx. 26; xxiii. 11; 
Mk. ix. 35; x. 43, (in which pass. it is used fig. of those 
who advance others’ interests even at the sacrifice of their 
own) ; τῆς ἐκκλησίας, of one who does what promotes the 
welfare and prosperity of the church, Col. i. 25; διάκονοι 
τοῦ θεοῦ, those through whom God carries on his admin- 
istration on earth, as magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4; teachers 
of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 5; 2 Co. vi. 4; 1 Th. iii. 
2KRTTrWI txt. Lmre.; the same are called διάκονοι 
(τοῦ) Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. xi. 23; Col. i. 7; 1 Tim. iv. 6; ἐν κυρίῳ, 
in the cause of the Lord, Col. iv. 7; [Eph. vi. 21]; 6 διάκ. 
pov my follower, Jn. xii. 26; τοῦ Σατανᾶ, whom Satan 
uses as a servant, 2 Co. xi. 15; [dpaprias, Gal. ii. 17]; 
διάκ. περιτομῆς (abstr. for coner.), of Christ, who labored 
for the salvation of the circumcised i. e. the Jews, Ro. xv. 
8; with gen. of the thing to which service is rendered, 
i.e. to which one is devoted: καινῆς διαθήκης, 2 Co. iii. 6 ; 
τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, Eph. iii. 7; Col. i. 23; δικαιοσύνης, 2 Co. 
pay 15: 2. a deacon, one who, by virtue of the office 
assigned him by the church, cares for the poor and has 
charge of and distributes the money collected for their 
use, [ef. BB.DD., Dict. of Christ. Antiq., Schaff-Herzog 
s. v. Deacon; Bp. Lghift. Com. on Phil. dissert. i. §i.; 
Julius Miiller, Dogmatische Abhandlungen, p. 560 
sqq-]: Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim. iii. 8, 12, ef. Acts vi. 3 sqq.; 
ἡ διάκονος, a deaconess (ministra, Plin. epp- 10, 97), a wo- 
man to whom the care of either poor or sick women was 
entrusted, Ro. xvi.1 [ef. Dicts. as above, s. v. Deaconess; 
Lghtft. as above p. 191; B. D. 5. ν᾿ Phebe}. 3. a 
waiter, one who serves food and drink: Jn. ii. 5, 9, as in 
Xen. mem. 1, 5, 2; Hier. 3, 11 (4, 2); Polyb. 31, 4, 5; 
Leian. de merced. cond. § 26; Athen. 7, p- 291 a.; 10, 


138 


διακρίνω 


420 6. ; see διακονέω, 2 and -νία, 5; [also Wetst. on Mt. iv. 
111" 

[Syn. διάκονος, δοῦλος, θεράπων, ὑπηρέτης: “διά. 
kovos represents the servant in his activity for the work; not 
in his relation, either servile, as that of the δοῦλος, or more 
voluntary, as in the case of the θεράπων, to a person” 
Trench; [yet cf. 6. g. Ro. xiii.4; 2 Cor. vi. 4 ete.]. δοῦλος 
opp. to ἐλεύθερος, and correlate to δεσπότης or κύριος, denotes 
a bondman, one who sustains a permanent servile relation to 
another. θεράπων is the voluntary performer of services, 
whether as a freeman or a slave ; it is a nobler, tenderer word 
than δοῦλος. ὑπηρ. acc. to its etymol. suggests subordi- 
nation. Cf. Trench ὃ ix.; B. D.s. ν. Minister; Mey. on 
Eph. iii. 7; Schmidt ch. 164.] 

διακόσιοι, -ar, -α (wo hundred: Mk. vi. 37; Jn. vi. 7, ete. 

δι-ακούω : fut. διακούσομαι ; prop. to hear one through, 
hear to the end, hear with care, hear fully, (ef. διά, C. 2] 
(Xen., Plat., sqq.) : of a judge trying a cause, Acts xxiii. 
353; so in Deut. i. 16; Dio Cass. 80, 53 (36).* 

δια-κρίνω ; impf. διέκρινον ; 1 aor. διέκρινα ; Mid., [pres. 
διακρίνομαι ] ; impf. διεκρινόμην ; 1 aor. διεκρίθην (in prof. 
auth. in a pass. sense, to be separated ; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B. 
52 (45)]) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; in Sept. chiefly 
for DAY, also for 7. ἼΠ| ete. 1. to separate, make a dis- 
tinction, discriminate, [cf. διά, C. 4]: οὐδὲν διέκρινε μεταξὺ 
ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν, Acts xv. 9; μηδὲν διακρίναντα, making 
no difference, sc. between Jews and Gentiles, Acts xi. 12 
LT Tr WH; like the Lat. distinguo, used emphatically : 
to distinguish or separate a person or thing from the rest, 
in effect i.q. to prefer, yield to him the preference or 
honor: τινά, 1 Co. iv. 7 [ef. W. 452 (421)]; τὸ σῶμα (τοῦ 
κυρίου), 1 Co. xi. 29. 2. to learn by discrimination, 
to try, decide: Mt. xvi. 8 [T br. WI reject the pass.]; 1 
Co. xiv. 29; ἑαυτόν, 1 Co. xi. 31; to determine, give judg- 
ment, decide a dispute: 1 Co. vi. 5. Pass.and Mid. to be 
parted, to separate one’s self from; 1. to withdraw from 
one, desert him (Thue. 1, 105; 3,9); of heretics withdraw- 
ing from the society of true Christians (Sozom. 7, 2 [p. 705 
ed. Vales. ] ἐκ τούτου of μὲν διακριθέντες ἰδίᾳ ἐκκλησίαζον) : 
Jude 22 ace. to the (preferable) reading of LT Tr txt. 
ἐλέγχετε διακρινομένους, those who separate themselves from 
you, i.e. who apostatize ; instead of the Ree. ἐλεεῖτε δια- 
κρινόμενοι, which is to be rendered, making for yourselves 
a selection; ef. Huther ad loc.; [others though adopting 
the reading preferred above, refer é:axp. to the following 
head and translate it while they dispute with you; but 
WII (see their App.) Tr mrg. follow codd. 8B and a few 
other author. in reading ἐλεᾶτε διακρινομένους ace. to 
which δίακρ. is probably to be referred to signification 3: 
R. V. txt. “on some have mercy, who are indoubt”). 42. 
to separate one’s self in a hostile spirit, to oppose, strive 
with, dispute, contend: with dat. of pers. Jude 9, (Polyb. 
2, 22,11 [ef. W. § 31,1¢.; B.177(154)]); πρός τινα, Acts 
xi. 2, (Hdt. 9, 58). 3. in a sense not found in prof. 
auth. to be at variance with one’s self, hesitate, doubt: Mt. 
xxi. 21; Ro. xiv. 23; Jas. i. 6; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, Mk. xi. 
23 ; ἐν ἑαυτῷ [i. 6. -τοῖς ], Jas. ii. 4 [4]. refer this to 1: do 
ye not make distinctions among yourselves]; μηδὲν διακρι- 
νόμενος, nothing doubting i. 6. wholly free from doubt, 


διάκρισις 


Jas. i. 6; without any hesitation as to whether it be law- 
ful or not, Acts x. 20 and acc. to RG in xi. 12; οὐ διε- 
κρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ he did not hesitate through want of faith, 
Ro. iv. 20.* 

ϑιά-κρισις, -ews, 7, (διακρίνω), a distinguishing, discern- 
ing, judging: πνευμάτων, 1 Co. xii. 10; καλοῦ τε Kal κακοῦ, 
Heb. v. 14; μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν not for the pur- 
pose of passing judgment on opinions, as to which one is 
to be preferred as the more correct, Ro. xiv. 1 [see d:a- 
λογισμός, 1]. (Xen., Plat., al.) * 

δια-κωλύω : impf. διεκώλυον ; (διά in this compound does 
not denote effort as is com. said, but separation, 
Lat. dis, cf. Germ. verhindern, Lat. prohibere; cf. δια- 
κλείω, to separate by shutting, shut out; cf. Win. De verb. 
comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 17 sq.); to hinder, prevent: twa, 
Mt. iii. 14 [on the tense cf. W. § 40,3 ο.; B. 205 (178)]. 
(From Soph. and Thue. down.) * 

διαλλαλέω: impf. διελάλουν ; impf. pass. διελαλούμην; 
to converse together, to talk with, (διά denoting by turns, 
or one with another; see διακατελέγχομαι), τί, pass. 
[were talked of ], Lk. i. 65; πρὸς ἀλλήλους (as Polyb. 23, 
9, 6), τί dv ποιήσειαν [-σαιεν al. ], of the conference of men 
deliberating, Lk. vi. 11. (Eur. Cyel. 175.) * 

δια-λέγομαι ; impf. διελεγόμην ; [1 aor. 3 pers. sing. δὲε- 
λέξατο (LT Tr WH in Acts xvii. 2; xviii. 19)]; 1 aor. 
διελέχθην ; (mid. of διαλέγω, to select, distinguish) ; at: 
to think different things with one’s self, mingle thought with 
thought (cf. διαλογίζομαι) ; to ponder, revolve in mind ; so 
in Hom. 2. as very freq. in Attic, to converse, dis- 
course with one, argue, discuss: absol., Acts [xviii. 4]; 
xix. 8 sq.; [xx. 9]; περί τινος, Acts xxiv. 25; τινί, with 
one, Acts xvii. 17; xviii. 19; xx. 7; Heb. xii. 5; ἀπὸ τῶν 
γραφῶν, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts 
xvii. 2; πρός twa, Acts xvii. 17; xxiv. 12; with the idea 
of disputing prominent: πρὸς ἀλλήλους, foll. by interrog. 
tis, Mk. ix. 34; περί twos, Jude 9.* 

δια-λείπω : [2 aor. διέλιπον] ; to interpose a delay, to in- 
termit, leave off for a time something already begun: ov 
διέλιπε [T WH mre. διέλειπεν] καταφιλοῦσα (on the ptep. 
οἵ. W. § 45, 4 a.; [B. 300 (257)]), she has not ceased 
kissing, has continually kissed, Lk. vii. 45. (Is. v. 14; 
Jer. xvii. 8; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

διά-λεκτος, -ov, ἡ, (διαλέγω) ; 1. conversation, speech, 
discourse, language (Plat., Dem., al.). 2. fr. Polyb. 
[ef. Aristot. probl. 10, 38 τοῦ ἀνθρώπου pia φωνή, ἀλλὰ 
διάλεκτοι πολλαί] down, the tongue or language peculiar 
to any people: Acts i. 19; ii. 6,8; xxi. 40; xxii. 2; xxvi. 
14. (Polyb.1, 80, 6; 3, 22,3; 40, 6,3 sq.; μεθερμηνεύειν 
εἰς τὴν "Ἑλλήνων διάλεκτον, Diod. 1, 37; πᾶσα μὲν διάλεκτος, 
ἡ δ᾽ ἑλληνικὴ διαφερόντως ὀνομάτων πλουτεῖ, Philo, vit. 
Moys. ii. § 7; [ef. Miiller on Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 22, 4 fin.].)* 

[δια-λιμπάνω (or -λυμπάνω) : impf. διελίμπανον : to in- 
lermit, cease: κλαίων οὐ διελίμπανεν, Acts viii. 24 WH (re- 
jected) mrg.; cf. W. 345 sq. (323 sq.); B. 300 (257). 
(Tobit x. 7; Galen in Hippoer. Epid. 1, 3; ef. Bornem. 
on Acts |. c.; Veitch s. v. λιμπάνω.) *] 

δι-αλλάσσω: 2 aor. pass. διηλλάγην; (see διά, C. 6); 
1. to change: τὶ ἀντί twos [cf. W. 206 (194)]. 2. to 


139 


διαμαρτύρομαι 


change the mind of any one, to reconcile (so fr. [Aeschyi.| 
Thue. down): τινά τινι. Pass. to be reconciled, τινί, to re- 
new friendship with one: Mt. v. 24; (1 5. xxix. 4; 1 
Esdr. iv. 31). See Fritzsche’s learned discussion of this 
word in his Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [in opp. to 
Tittmann’s view that it implies mutual enmity; see 
καταλλάσσω, fin.]; cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. pp. 
7,10; [ Tholuck, Bergrede Christi, p.171 (on Mt. v. 24) ].* 

δια-λογίζομαι ; dep. mid.; impf. διελογιζόμην ; [1 aor. 
διελογισάμην, Lk. xx. 14 Lehm.]; (διά as in διαλέγομαι) ; 
to bring together different reasons, to reckon up the reasons, 
to reason, revolve in one’s mind, deliberate: simply, Lk. 1. 
29; v. 21; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, Mk. ii. 6, 8; Lk. v. 22; with ad- 
dition of περί τινος, Lk. iii. 15 ; ἐν ἑαυτῷ [or -τοῖς], with- 
in himself, etc., Mk. ii. 8; Lk. xii. 175; ἐν ἑαυτοῖς i. q. ἐν 
ἀλλήλοις among themselves, Mt. xvi. 7 sq.; πρὸς ἑαυτούς 
i. q. πρὸς ἀλλήλους, one turned towards another, one with 
another, Mk. ix. 88 Rec.; xi. 31 LT Tr WH; Lk. xx. 
14; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, Mk. viii. 16; παρ᾽ ἑαυτοῖς [see παρά, 
ΤΙ. ς.1, Mt. xxi. 25 [L Tr WH txt. ἐν €.]; ὅτι, Jn. xi. 50 
Rec. ; ὅτε equiv. to περὶ τούτου ὅτι, Mk. viii. 17. (For 
awn several times in the Psalms; 2 Mace. xii. 43; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Plat. and Xen. down.) * 

Sia-hoyirpds, -οῦ, ὁ, (διαλογίζομαι), Sept. for Taw 
and Chald. jr, in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down, the thinking 
of a man deliberating with himself; hence 1. a thought, 
inward reasoning: Lk. ii. 35; v. 22; vi. 8; ix. 46 sq.; 
Ro. xiv. 1 [yet some bring this under 2]; the reasoning 
of those who think themselves to be wise, Ro. i. 21; 1 
Co. iii. 20; an opinion: κριταὶ διαλογισμῶν πονηρῶν judges 
with evil thoughts, i.e. who follow perverse opinions, rep- 
rehensible principles, Jas. ii. 4 [ef. W. 187 (176) ]; pur- 
pose, design: Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21. 2. a deliberat- 
ing, questioning, about what is true: Lk. xxiv. 38; when 
in reference to what ought to be done, hesitation, doubt- 
ing: χωρὶς γογγυσμῶν καὶ διαλογισμῶν, Phil. ii. 14 [‘ yoyy. 
is the moral, διαλ. the intellectual rebellion against 
God’ Bp. Lghtft.]; χωρὶς ὀργῆς x. διαλογισμοῦ, 1 Tim. ii. 
8; [in the last two pass. al. still advocate the rendering 
disputing; yet cf. Mey. on Phil. 1. e.].* 

δια-λύω : 1 aor. pass. διελύθην ; to dissolve [ef. διά, C. 4]: 
in Acts v. 36 of a body of men broken up and dispersed, 
as often in Grk. writ.” 

δια-μαρτύρομαι ; dep. mid.; impf. διεμαρτυρόμην (Acts 
ii. 40 Ree.); 1 aor. διεμαρτυράμην; in Sept. mostly for 
vy; often in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down; see a multitude 
of exx. fr. them in Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 20 
566. to call gods and men to witness [ διά, with the int er- 
position of gods and men; ef. Ellic. (after Win.) on 1 
Tim. v. 21]; 1. to testify, i. 6. earnestly, religiously to 
charge: foll. by an impv. Acts ii. 40; ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ x. 
Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, 2 Tim. iv.1, (2 K. xvii. 13; Xen. Cyr. 7, 
1,17 σὺ μὴ πρότερον ἔμβαλλε τοῖς πολεμίοις, διαμαρτύρομαι, 
πρίν ete.) ; also with ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ κτλ. foll. by ἵνα [ οἵ. 
B. 237 (204)], 1 Tim. v. 21, (foll. by μή, Ex. xix. 21); 
foll. by the inf. 2 Tim. ii. 14 [not Lehm.], (Neh. ix. 26). 
2. to altest, testify to, solemnly affirm: Acts xx. 23; 1 Th. 
iv. 6; Heb. ii. 6; foll. by ὅτι, Acts x. 42; with dat. of pers. 


διαμαχομαι 


to give solemn testimony to one, Lk. xvi. 28; with ace. of 
the obj. to confirm a thing by (the interposition of) 
testimony, to testify, cause it to be believed: τὸν λόγον τοῦ 
κυρίου, Acts Vili. 25; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, Acts xx. 245 τὴν Bar 


σιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xxviii. 23; for all the apostolic in- | 


struction came back finally to testimony respecting things 
which they themselves had seen or heard, or which had 
been disclosed to them by divine revelation, (Acts i. 21 
86.; ν. 32; χ. 41; xxii. 18) ; with the addition of εἰς and 
an acc. of the place unto which the testimony is borne: 
τὰ περὶ ἐμοῦ εἰς Ἱερουσ. Acts xxiii. 11; with the addition 
of a dat. of the pers. to whom the testimony is given : τοῖς 
Ἰουδαίοις τὸν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, the Messianic dignity of 
Jesus, Acts xviii. 5; Ἰουδ. τὴν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν, the 
necessity of repentance and faith, Acts xx. 21, (τῇ Ἱερουσ. 
τὰς ἀνομίας, into what sins she has fallen, Ezek. xvi. 2).* 

δια-μάχομαι : impf. διεμαχόμην; to fight it out; contend 
fiercely: of disputants, Acts xxiii. 9. (Sir. viii. 1, 3; 
very freq. in Attic writ.) * 

δια-μένω ; [impf. διέμενον] ; 2 pers. sing. fut. διαμενεῖς 
(IIeb. i. 11 Knapp, Bleek, al., for Rec. [ἃ LT Tr 
WH al.] διαμένεις) ; 1 aor. διέμεινα ; pf. διαμεμένηκα ; fo 


stay permanently, remain permanently, continue, (cf. per- | 


dure; διά, C. 2] (Philo de gigant. ὃ 7 πνεῦμα θεῖον μένειν 
δυνατὸν ἐν ψυχῇ. διαμένειν δὲ ἀδύνατον) : Gal. ii. 5; opp. 
to ἀπόλλυμαι, Heb. i. 11 fr. Ps. ci. (ci) 27; with an adj. 
or adv. added denoting the condition : διέμεινε κωφός, Lk. 
i. 22; οὕτω, as they are, 2 Pet. 111. 4; to persevere: ἔν τινι, 
Lk. xxii. 28. (Xen., Plat. and subseq. writ.) * 
δια-μερίζω : impf. διεμέριζον ; 1 aor. impy. 2 pers. plur. 
dtapepiocare; Pass., [pres. διαμερίζομαι] ; pf. ptep. διαμε- 
μερισμένος; 1 aor. διεμερίσθην; fut. διαμερισθήσομαι : | Mid., 
pres. διαμερίζομαι ; 1 aor. διεμερισάμην ; to divide ; a: 
to cleave asunder, cut in pieces: ζῶα διαμερισθέντα se. by 
the butcher, Plat. legg. 8 p. 849 d.; ace. to a use pecu- 
liar to Lk. in pass. to be divided into opposing parts, to be 
at variance, in dissension: ἐπί twa, against one, Lk. xi. 
17 sq.3 ἐπί τινι, xii. 52 sq. 2. to distribute (Plat. polit. 
p- 289 ¢.; in Sept. chiefly for ΟΠ): τί, Mk. xv. 24 Rec.; 
τί τινι, Lk. xxii. 17 (where L T Tr WH εἰς ἑαυτούς for 
RG ἑαυτοῖς); Acts ii. 45; Pass. Acts ii. 3; Mid. to dis- 
tribute among themselves: τί, Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24 
GLT Tr WH; Lk. xxiii. 34; with ἑαυτοῖς added, [Mt. 
xxvii. 35 Rec.]; Jn. xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii-) 19.* 
δια-μερισμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (διαμερίζω), division ; 1. a part- 
ing, distribution: Plat. lege. 6 p. 771 d.; Diod. 11, 47; 
Joseph. antt. 10, 11, 7, Sept. Ezek. xlviii. 29; Mic. vii. 
12. 2. disunion, dissension: opp. to εἰρήνη, Lk. xii. 
51; see διαμερίζω. 1." 
διαινέμω: 1 aor. pass. διενεμέθην ; to distribute, divide, 
(Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq-): pass. εἰς τὸν λαόν to be dis- 
seminated, spread, among the people, Acts iv. 17.* 
Sia-vetw ; 10 express one’s meaning by a sign, nod to, 
beckon to, wink at, (διά, because “the sign is conceived of 
as passing through the intervening space to him to whom 
it is made” Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 4): Lk. 
1.22. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Sir. xxvii. 22; Diod. 3; 
18; 17 37; Leian. ver. hist. 2, 44; Icarom. 15; [al.].)* 


140 


διαπεράω 


δια-νόημα, -ros, τό, (διανοέω to think), a thought: Lk. xi. 
17. (Sept. ; Sir.; often in Plat.) * 

διάνοια, -as, ἡ, (διά and vods), Sept. for 35 and 325; 
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl.] Hdt. down; a: 
the mind as the faculty of understanding, feeling, desiring : 
Mt. xxii. 37; Mk. xii. 30 [Tr mrg. br.]; Lk.x. 27; Eph. 
1.18 Rec. ; iv. 18; Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; 1 Pet. 1.18. 2. 
understanding: 1 Jn. v. 20. 3. mind i. e. spirit (Lat. 
animus), way of thinking and feeling: Col. i. 21; Lk. i. 
51; 2 Pet. iii. 1. 4. thought; plur. contextually in a 
bad sense, evi! thoughts: Eph. ii. 3, as in Num. xv. 39 
μνησθήσεσθε πασῶν τῶν ἐντολῶν κυρίου . . καὶ ov διαστρα- 
φήσεσθε ὀπίσω τῶν διανοιῶν ὑμῶν." 

δι-αν-οίγω ; impf. διήνοιγον:; 1 aor. διήνοιξα : Pass., 1 aor. 
διηνοίχθην ; [2 aor. dinvotynv]; pf. ptep. διηνυιγμένος (Acts 
vii. 50 1. Ὁ Tr WH) ; [on variations of augm. see reff. s. v. 
ἀνοίγω] : Sept. chiefly for MP5 and NN}; occasionally in 
prof. auth. fr. Plat. Lys. p. 210 a. down; to open by di- 
viding or drawing asunder (8ut), to open thoroughly (what 
had been closed) ; 1. prop.: ἄρσεν διανοῖγον μήτραν, 
ἃ male opening the womb (the closed matrix), i. e. the 
first-born, Lk. ii. 23 (Ex. xiii. 2, ete.); οὐρανούς, pass., 
Acts vii. 01, Τ Tr WH; the ears, the eyes, i. 6. to restore 
or to give hearing, sight: Mk. vii. 34, 35 RG; Lk. xxiv. 
31, (Gen. iii. 5, 7; Is. xxxv. 5; 2 K. vi. 17, ete.). 2 
trop.: τὰς γραφάς, to open the sense of the Scriptures, 
explain them, Lk. xxiv. 32; τὸν νοῦν τινος to open the 
mind of one, i. e. cause him to understand a thing, Lk. 
xxiv. 45; τὴν καρδίαν to open one’s soul, i. 6. to rouse in 
one the faculty of understanding or the desire of learn- 
ing, Acts xvi. 14, (2 Mace. i. 4; Themist. orat. 2 de 
Constantio imp. [p. 29 ed. Harduin] διανοίγεταί μου ἡ καρ- 
dia x. διαυγεστέρα γίνεται ἡ ψυχή) : absol., foll. by ὅτε, to 
explain, expound se. αὐτάς, i. 6. τὰς γραφάς, Acts xvii. 3. 
ΟΕ Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 19 sq.* 

δια-νυκτερεύω ; (opp. to διημερεύω) ; to spend the night, 
to pass the whole night, [οἵ. διά, C.1): ἔν τινι, in any em- 
ployment, Lk. vi. 12. (Diod. 15, 62; Antonin. 7, 66; Plut. 
mor. p. 950 b.; Hdian. 1, 16,12 [5 Bekk.]; Joseph. antt. 
6,13, 9; b.j. 2, 14, 7 [Job ii. 9; Phil. incorr. mund. § 2; 
in Flac. § 6]; with τὴν νύκτα added, Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 3.) * 

δι-ανύω: 1 aor. ptep. διανύσας ; 0 accomplish fully, bring 
quite to an end, finish: τὸν πλοῦν, Acts xxi. 7. (2 Mace. 
xii. 17; fr. Hom. down.) [Cf. Field, Otium Norv. iii. 
p- 85 sq.]* 

δια-παντός, see διά, A. ΤΙ. 1. a. 

δια-παρα-τριβή, -ῆς, ἡ. constant contention, incessant 
wrangling ov slrife, (παρατριβή attrition; contention, 
wrangling); a word justly adopted in 1 Tim. vi. 5 by 
GLT Tr WH (for Ree. παραδιατριβαί, q. ¥.) ; not found 
elsewhere [exe. Clem. Al. ete.]; cf. W. 102 (96). Cf. 
the double compounds διαπαρατηρεῖν, 2 S. iii. 30; also 
(doubtful, it must be confessed), διαπαρακύπτομαι, 1 Κα. 
vi. 4 Ald.: διαπαροξύνω, Joseph. antt. 10, 7,5. [Steph. 
gives also διαπαράγω, Greg. Nyss. ii. 177 b.; διαπαρα- 
λαμβάνω : διαπαρασιωπάω, Joseph. Genes. p. 9 a.; δια- 
παρασύρω. Schol. Lucian. ii. 796 Hemst.] * 

δια-περάω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. διεπέρασα; (0 pass over, cross over, 


διαπλέω 


e.g. ariver, a lake: Mt. ix. 1; xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53 [here 
T WH follow with ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν for (to) the land (εἴ. R. V. 
mrg.)]; foll. by εἰς with acc. of place, Mk. v. 21; Acts 
xxi. 2; πρός with acc. of pers. Lk. xvi. 26. ([Eur.], Ar- 
stph., Xen., subseq. writ. ; Sept. for 12).) * 

Sia-rA€w: 1 aor. ptep. διαπλεύσας ; (Plin. pernavigo), 
to sail across: πέλαγος (as often in Grk. writ.), Acts 
xxvii. 5 [W. § 52, 4, 8].* 

δια-πονέω : 0 work out laboriously, make complete by la- 
bor. Mid. [pres. διαπονοῦμαι); with 1 aor. pass. διεπο- 
νήθην (for which Attie writ. διεπονησάμην); a. to exert 
one’s self, strive; b. to manage with pains, accomplish 
with great labor ; in prof. auth. in both senses [fr. Aeschyl. 
down]. c. to be troubled, displeased, offended, pained, 
[ef. colloq. Eng. to be worked up; W. 23 (22)]: Acts iv. 
2; xvi. 18. (Aquila in Gen. vi. 6; 1 5. xx. 30; Sept. in 
Eeel. x. 9 for 383; Hesych. διαπονηθείς - λυπηθείς.) * 

δια-“πορεύω : fo cause one to pass through a place ; to'car- 
ry across ; Pass., [pres. διαπορεύομαι ; impf. διεπορευύμην] ; 
with fut. mid. [(not found in N. T.) ; fr. Hdt. down]; to 
journey through a place, go through: as in Grk. writ. foll. 
by διά with gen. of place, Mk. ii. 23 L Tr WH txt.; Lk. 
vi. 1; foll. by ace. [W. 8 52, 4, 8] fo travel through: Acts 
xvi.4; absol.: Lk. xvili.36; Ro. xv. 24; with the addition 
κατὰ πόλεις καὶ κώμας, Lk. xiii. 22. [SyN. see ἔρχομαι.} " 

δι-απορέω, -ὦ : impf. διηπόρουν ; Mid., [pres. inf. διαπο- 
ρεῖσθαι (Lk. xxiv. 4 RG)]; impf. διηπορούμην (Acts ii. 
12 T Tr WH); in the Grk. Bible only in [Dan. ii. 3 
Symm. and] Luke; prop. thoroughly (διαγἀπορέω (q- V-), 
to be entirely at a loss, to be in perplexity: absol. Acts ii. 
12; foll. by διὰ τό with inf. Lk. ix. 7; περί τινος, Lk. xxiv. 
4 (here the mid. is to be at a loss with one’s self, for which 
LT Tr WH read the simple ἀπορεῖσθαι) ; Acts v. 24; ἐν 
ἑαυτῷ foll. by indir. discourse, Acts x.17. (Plat., Aristot., 
Polyb., Diod., Philo, Plut., al.) * 

δια-πραγματεύομαι : 1 aor. διεπραγματευσάμην; thorough- 
ly, earnestly (διά) to undertake a business, Dion. Hal. 3, 72; 
contextually, to undertake a business for the sake of gain: 
Lk. xix. 15. (In Plat. Phaedo p.77 ἃ. 95 6. to examine 
thoroughly.) * 

δια-πρίω : impf. pass. διεπριόμην ; to saw asunder or in 
twain, to divide by a saw: 1 Chr. xx. 3; Plat. conv. p. 
193 a.; Arstph. eqq. 768,and elsewhere. Pass. trop. to 
be sawn through mentally, i. e. to be rent with vexation, 
[A. V. cut to the heart], Acts v. 33; with the addition 
ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν, Acts vii. 54 (cf. Lk. ii. 35); μεγάλως 
ἐχαλέπαινον καὶ διεπρίοντο καθ᾽ ἡμῶν, Euseb. ἢ. 6. 5, 1, 6 
[15 ed. Heinich. ; ef. Gataker, Advers. misc. col. 916 g.].* 

δι-αρπάζω: fut. διαρπάσω; 1 aor. [subj. 3 pers. sing. 
διαρπάσῃ, inf. διαρπάσαι ; to plunder: Mt. xii. 29° (where 
LT Tr WH ἁρπάσαι). 29” (ἢ T Tr WH); Mk. iii. 27. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

δια-ρρήγνυμι and διαρρήσσω (Lk. viii. 29 [RG; see be- 
low]); 1 aor. διέρρηξα ; impf. pass. 3 pers. sine. διερρήγνυτο 
(Lk. v. 6, where Lehm. txt. διερήγνυτο and T Tr WH 
διερήσσετο (1, mrg. duepp.), also L T Tr WH διαρήσσων 
in Lk. viii. 29; [WH have διέρηξεν in Mt. xxvi. 65, 
and διαρήξας in Mk. xiv. 63; see their App. p. 163, and 


141 


διασπορά 


8. συ. Ρ, p]) ; to break asunder, burst through, rend asunder : 
τὰ δεσμά, Lk. viii. 29 ; τὸ δίκτυον, pass., Lk. v. 6; τὰ ἱμάτια, 
χιτῶνας, to rend, which was done by the Jews in extreme 
indignation or in deep grief [cf. B. D.s. v. Dress, 4]: Mt. 
xxvi. 65; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts xiv. 14, cf. Gen. xxxvii. 29, 
34, etc.; 1 Mace. xi. 71; Joseph. b.j. 2, 15,4. (Sept., 
[Hom.], Soph., Xen., subseq. writ.) * 

διασαφέω, -@: 1 aor. duecabnoa; (σαφής clear) ; 1. 
to make clear or plain, to explain, unfold, declare: τὴν 
παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 36 L Tr txt. WH; (Eur. Phoen. 
398; Plat. lege. 6, 754 ἃ. : ἃ]. ; Polyb. 2, 1,1; 3, 52,5). 2. 
of things done, to declare i. e. to tell, announce, narrate : 
Mt. xviii. 31; (2 Mace. 1, 18; Polyb. 1,46, 4; 2, 27, 3). 
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 622 sqq.; Win. De 
verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 11.* 

δια-σείω : 1 aor. διέσεισα; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; 
to shake thoroughly ; trop. to make to tremble, to terrify (Job 
iv. 14 for TMD), to agitate; like concutio in juridical 
Latin, to extort from one by intimidation money or other 
property : τινά, Lk. iii. 14 [A. V. do violence to]; 3 Mace. 
vii. 21 ; the Basilica; [Heinichen on Euseb. h.e. 7,30, 71." 

δια-σκορπίζω ; 1 aor. διεσκόρπισα; Pass., pf. ptep. dre- 
σκορπισμένος ; 1 aor. διεσκορπίσθην ; 1 fut. διεσκορπισθή- 
σομαι ; often in Sept., more rarely in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. 
1,47,4; 27, 2,10 on (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W. 257); 
to scatter abroad, disperse: Jn. xi. 52 (opp. to συνάγω) ; 
of the enemy, Lk. i. 51; Acts v. 37, (Num. x. 35, ete. ; 
Joseph. antt. 8, 15,4; Ael. v. h. 13, 46 (1, 6) ὁ δράκων 
τοὺς μὲν διεσκόρπισε, τοὺς δὲ ἀπέκτεινε). of a flock of 
sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31 (fr. Zech. xiii. 7); Mk. xiv. 27; of 
property, to squander, waste: Lk. xv. 13; xvi. 1, (like d:a- 
σπείρω in Soph. El. 1291). like the Hebr. 777 (Sept. 
Ezek. v. 2, 10,12 [Ald.], ete.) of grain, to scatter i. e. to 
winnow (i. 6. to throw the grain a considerable distance, or 
up into the air, that it may be separated from the chaff; 
opp: to συνάγω, to gather the wheat, freed from the chaff, 
into the granary [cf. BB.DD. 5. v. Agriculture]): Mt. 
Xxv. 24, 26.* 

Sta-omdw: Pass., [pf. inf. διεσπᾶσθαι); 1 aor. διεσπά- 
σθην; to rend asunder, break asunder: τὰς ἁλύσεις, Mk. 
ν. 4 (ras νευράς, Judg. xvi. 9); of a man, fo tear in 
pieces: Acts xxiii. 10, (rods ἄνδρας κρεουργηδόν, Hat. 3, 
13).* 

δια-σπείρω: 2 aor. pass. Sveamapny; to scatter abroad, 
disperse; Pass. of those who are driven to different places, 
Acts viii. 1, 4; xi. 19. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] 
Hat. down ; very often in Sept.) * 

δια-σπορά, -ᾶς, 7, (διασπείρω, cf. such words as ἀγορά, 
διαφθοράν), (Vulg. dispersio), a scattering, dispersion: ἀτό- 
pov, opp. to σύμμιξις x. παράζευξις, Plut. mor. p. 1105 a. ; in 
the Sept. used of the Israelites dispersed among foreign 
nations, Deut. xxviii. 25; xxx. 4; esp. of their Babylo- 
nian exile, Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 17; Is. xlix. 6; Judith v. 
19; abstr. for coner. of the exiles themselves, Ps. exlvi. 
(exlvii.) 2 (i. q. D7) expelled, outcasts) ; 2 Macc. i. 27; 
εἰς τ. διασπορὰν τῶν Ἑλλήνων unto those dispersed among 
the Greeks [W. § 30, 2 a.], Jn. vii. 35. Transferred to 
Christians [i. 6. Jewish Christians (?)] scattered abroad 


διαστέλλω 


142 : 


διατίθημι 


among the Gentiles: Jas. i. 1 (ἐν τῇ διασπορᾷ. sc. οὖσι); | Jewish opinion that angels were employed as God’s 


παρεπίδημοι διασπορᾶς Πόντου, sojourners far away from 
home, in Pontus, 1 Pet. i. 1 (see παρεπίδημος). [BB.DD. 
s. v. Dispersion; esp. Schiirer, N. Τὶ Zeitgesch. § 31.]* 

δια-σστέλλω: to draw asunder, divide, distinguish, dis- 
pose, order, (Plat., Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut.; often in 
Sept.) ; Pass. τὸ διαστελλόμενον, the injunction: Heb. xii. 
20, (2 Mace. xiv. 28). Mid., [ pres. διαστέλλομαι] ; impf. 
διεστελλόμην ; 1 aor. διεστειλάμην ; to open one’s self i.e. 
one’s mind, to set forth distinctly, (Aristot., Polyb.); 
hence in the N. T. [so Ezek. iii. 18, 19; Judith xi. 12] 
to admonish, order, charge: τινί, Mk. viii. 15; Acts xv. 
24; foll. by ἵνα [ef. B. 237 (204) ], Mt. xvi. 20 R T Tr WH 
mrg.; Mk. vii. 36; ix. 9; διεστείλατο πολλά, iva etc. Mk. 
v. 48." 

διάστημα, -ros, τό, [(διαστῆνᾳι}, an interval, distance; 
space of time: ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστ. Acts v. 7, ([ἐκ πολλοῦ 
διαστήματος, Aristot. de audib. p. 800°, 5 ete.]; rerpaeres δ. 
Polyb. 9, 1, 1; [σύμπας ὁ χρόνος ἡμερῶν κ. νυκτῶν ἐστι διά- 
στημα, Philo, alleg. leg. i. § 2 etc., see Siegfried 5. v. p. 
66]).* 

δια-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (διαστέλλω, cf. ἀνατολήν, a distinction, 
difference: Ro. iii. 22; x. 12; of the difference of the 
sounds made by musical instruments, 1 Co. xiv. 7. 
({Aristot., Theophr.], Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

δια-στρέφω; 1 aor. inf. διαστρέψαι : pf. pass. ptep. die- 
στραμμένος [οἵ. WH. App. p. 170 sq.]; fr. Aeschyl. down; 
a. to distort, turn aside: τὰς ὁδοὺς κυρίου tas εὐθείας, fig- 
uratively (Prov. x. 10), to oppose, plot against, the saving 
purposes and plans of God, Acts xiii. 10. Hence Ὁ. 
to turn aside from the right path, to pervert, corrupt: τὸ 
ἔθνος, Lk. xxiii. 2 (Polyb. 5, 41,1; 8, 24,3); τινὰ ἀπό 
τινος, to corrupt and so turn one aside from ete. Acts 
xiii. 8, (Ex. v. 4; voluptates animum detorquent a vir- 
tute, Cic.); διεστραμμένος perverse, corrupt, wicked: Mt. 
xvii. 17; Lk. ix. 41; Acts xx. 30; Phil. ii. 15.* 

δια-σώζω: 1 aor. διέσωσα; 1 aor. pass. διεσώθην;; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; often in Sept., esp. for o> and 
ywin; to preserve through danger, to bring safe through ; 
to save i. e. cure one who is sick (cf. our colloq. bring 
him through): Lk. vii. 3; pass. Mt. xiv. 36; to save i. 6. 
keep safe, keep from perishing: Acts xxvii. 43; to save 
out of danger, rescue: Acts xxviii. 1; ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης, 
ibid. 4 ; —as very often in Grk. writ. (see exx. in Win. 
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 9 sq.) with specification of 
the person to whom or of the place to which one is 
brought safe through: πρὸς Φήλικα, Acts xxiii. 24; ἐπὶ 
τὴν γῆν, Acts xxvii. 44; εἴς τι, 1 Pet. iii. 20.* 
| δια-ταγή, -ἧς, ἡ, (διατάσσω), a purely bibl. [2 Esdr. iv. 
11] and eccl. word (for which the Greeks use διάταξις), 
a disposition, arrangement, ordinance: Ro. xiii. 2; édd- 
Bere τὸν νόμον eis διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων, Acts vii. 53, ye re- 
ceived the law, influenced by the authority of the ordain- 
ing angels, or because ye thought it your duty to receive 
what was enjoined by angels (at the ministration of an- 
gels [nearly i. q. as being the ordinances ete.], similar 
to εἰς ὄνομα δέχεσθαι. Mt. x. 41; see eis, B. II. 2 d.; [W. 
398 (372), cf. 228 (214), also B. 151 (131)]). On the 


assistants in the solemn proclamation of the Mosaic law, 
ef. Deut. xxxiii. 2 Sept.; Acts vii. 38; Gal. iii. 19; Heb. 
ii. 2; Joseph. antt. 15, 5,3; [Philo de somn. i. § 22; Bp. 
Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. ¢.].* 

Sid-raypa, -ros, τό, (διατάσσων. an injunction, mandate: 
Heb. xi. 23 [Lehm. δόγμα]. (2 Esdr. vii. 11; Add. Esth. 
iii. 14 [in Tdf. ch. iii. fin., line 14]; Sap. xi. 8; Philo, 
decal. ὃ 4; Diod. 18, 64; Plut. Marcell. c. 24 fin.; 
[al.].) * 

δια-ταράσσω, or τττω: 1 aor. pass. διεταράχθην ; to agi- 
tate greatly, trouble greatly, (Lat. perturbare): Lk. i. 29. 
(Plat., Xen., al.) * 

Sia-racow; 1 aor. διέταξα;; pf. inf. διατεταχέναι (Acts 
xviii. 2 [not Tdf.]); Pass., pf. ptep. διατεταγμένος ; 1 aor. 
ptep. διαταχθείς ; 2 aor. ptep. διαταγείς ; Mid., pres. δια- 
τάσσομαι; fut. διατάξομαι; 1 aor. διεταξάμην; (on the 
force of διά cf. Germ. verordnen, [ Lat. disponere, Win. 
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 7 sq.]); to arrange, ap- 
point, ordain, prescribe, give order: τινί, Mt. xi. 1; 1 Co. 
xvi. 1; foll. by ace. with inf., Lk. viii. 55; Acts xviii. 2 
{here T reray. Tr mrg. br. dca-; τινί foll. by inf. 1 Co. ix, 
14]; τί, pass., ὁ νόμος διαταγεὶς δι᾿ ἀγγέλων (see διαταγή) : 
Gal. iii. 19, (Hes. opp. 274); τινί τι, pass.: Lk. iii. 13; 
xvii. 9 [Rec.], 10; Acts xxiii. 31. Mid.: 1 Co. vii. 17; 
οὕτω ἦν διατεταγμένος (cf. W. 262 (246); [B. 193 (167)]), 
Acts xx. 13; τινί, Tit. i. 5; ri, 1 Co. xi. 34; τινί, foll. by 
inf.: Acts vil. 44; xxiv. 23. [Comp.: ἐπι-διατάσσομαι.] * 

δια-τελέω, -@; to bring thoroughly to an end, accomplish, 
[ef. διά, C. 2]; with the addition of τὸν βίον, τὸν χρόνον, 
etc., it is joined to participles or adjectives and denotes 
the continuousness of the act or state expressed by the 
ptep. or adj. (as in Hdt. 6,117; 7,111; Plat. apol. p. 
31 a.); oftener, however, without the accus. it is joined 
with the same force simply to the pteps. or adjs.: thus 
ἄσιτοι διατελεῖτε ye continue fasting, constantly fast, Acts 
xxvii. 33 (so ἀσφαλέστερος [al. -raros] διατελεῖ, Thue. 1, 
34; often in Xen.; W. 348 (326); [B. 304 (261)]).* 

δια-τηρέω, -ῶ ; 3 pers. sing. impf. διετήρει ; to keep con- 
tinually or carefully (see διά, C. 2): Lk. ii. 51, (Gen. 
XXXVii. 11); ἐμαυτὸν ἔκ τινος (cf. τηρεῖν ἔκ τινος, Jn. xvii. 
15), to keep one’s self (pure) from a thing, Acts xv. 29; 
ἀπό twos for 7¥ foll. by 713, Ps. xi. (xii-) 8. (Plat., 
Dem., Polyb., al.) * 

δια-τί, see διά, B. I. 2 ἃ. p. 134°. 

δια-τίθημι : fo place separately, dispose, arrange, appoint, 
[ef. διά, C. 3]. In the N. T. only in Mid., pres. διατίθε- 
μαι; 2 aor. διεθέμην ; fut. διαθήσομαι ; 1. to arrange, 
dispose of, one’s own affairs; a. τί, of something that 
belongs to one (often so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. down) ; 
with dat. of pers. added, in one’s favor, to one’s advan- 
tage; hence to assign a thing to another as his possession : 
τινὶ βασιλείαν (to appoint), Lk. xxii. 29. b. to dispose 
of by will, make a testament: Heb. ix. 16 sq.; (Plat. lege. 
11 p. 924e.; with διαθήκην added, ibid. p. 923 ¢., ete.). 
2. διατίθεμαι διαθήκην τινί (73 N¥ N73 ΛΞ, Jer. xxxvill 
(xxxi.) 31 sqq.), to make a covenant, enter into cove- 
nant, with one, [ef. W. 225 (211); B. 148 (129 sq.)]: 


διατρίβω 


Heb. viii. 10, (Gen. xv. 18) ; πρός τινα, Acts iii. 25; Heb. 
x. 16, (Deut. vii. 2); μετά τινος, 1 Mace. i. 11. The 
Grks. said συντίθεμαι πρός τινα, ai πρός twa συνθῆκαι, 
Xen. Cyr. 3,1, 21. [Comp.: ἀντι-διατίθημι.] " 

δια-τρίβω ; impf. διέτριβον; 1 aor. διέτριψα; to rub 
between, rub hard, (prop. Hom. Il. 11, 847, al.) ; to wear 
away, consume; χρόνον or ἡμέρας, to spend, pass time: 
Acts xiv. 3, 28; xvi. 12; xx.6; xxv. 6, 14, (Lev. xiv. 8; 
Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.); simply to stay, tarry, [cf. B. 
145 (127); W. 593 (552)]: Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54 [WH Tr 
txt. ἔμεινεν]; Acts xii. 19; xiv. 18 (Lchm. ed. min.); xv. 
35; (Judith x. 2; 2 Mace. xiv. 23, and often in prof. 
auth. fr. Hom. 1]. 19, 150 down).* 

δια-τροφή, -ῆς, 7, (διατρέφω to support), sustenance : 
1 Tim. vi. 8. (Xen. vect. 4, 49; Menand. ap. Stob. 
floril. 61, 1 [vol. ii. 386 ed. Gaisf.]; Diod. 19, 32; Epict. 
ench. 12; Joseph. antt. 2, 5,7; 4, 8,21; often in Plut.; 
1 Mace. vi. 49.) * 

δι-αυγάζω: 1 aor. διηύγασα; to shine through, (Vulg. 
elucesco), to dawn; of daylight breaking through the 
darkness of night (Polyb. 3, 104, 5, [ef. Act. Andr. 8 
p- 116 ed. Tdf.]): 2 Pet. 1. 19. [Plut. de plac. philos. 
3, 3, 2; al. (see Soph. Lex. s. v.).]* 

διαυγής, -€s, (αὐγή); translucent, transparent: Rey. xxi. 
21, for the Rec. διαφανής. ([Aristot.], Philo, Apoll. 
Rh., Leian., Plut., Themist.; often in the Anthol.) * 

διαφανής, -ἐς, (διαφαίνω to show through), transparent, 
translucent: Rey. xxi. 21 Rec.; see diavyns. (Hadt., 
Arstph., Plat., al.) * 

δια-φέρω ; 2 aor. διήνεγκον [but the subj. 3 pers. sing. 
διενέγκῃ (MK. xi. 16), the only aor. form which occurs, 
can come as well fr. 1 aor. diujveyxa; cf. Veitch s. v. 
φέρω, fin.]; Pass., [pres. duapepopar]; impf. διεφερόμην ; 
[fr. Hom. (h. Mere. 255), Pind. down]; 1. to bear or 
carry through any place: σκεῦος διὰ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, Mk. xi. 
16. 2. to carry different ways,i.e. a. trans. to carry 
in different directions, to different places: thus persons 
are said διαφέρεσθαι, who are carried hither and thither 
ina ship, driven to and fro, Acts xxvii. 27, (Strab. 3, 2, 7 
p- 144; σκάφος ὑπ᾽ ἐναντίων πνευμάτων διαφερόμενον, Philo, 
migr. Abr. § 27; Leian. Hermot. 28; often in Plut.); 
metaph. to spread abroad: διεφέρετο ὁ λόγος τοῦ κυρίου 
δί ὅλης τῆς χώρας, Acts xiii. 49, (ἀγγελίας, Leian. dial. 
deor. 24,15; φήμη διαφέρεται, Plut. mor. p. 163 4.). Ὄ. 
intrans. (like the Lat. differo) to differ: δοκιμάζειν τὰ 
διαφέροντα to test, prove, the things that differ, i. e. to 
distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful, 
Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, (διάκρισις καλοῦ τε καὶ κακοῦ. Heb. 
v. 14); ef. Thol. Com. on Rom. p. 111 ed. 5.; Theoph. 
Ant. ad Autol. p. 6 ed. Otto δοκιμάζοντες τὰ διαφέροντα, 
ἤτοι Pas, ἢ σκότος, ἢ λευκὸν, ἢ μέλαν KTA.); [al., adopting a 
secondary sense of each verb in the above passages, trans- 
late (cf. A. V.) to approve the things that excel; see Mey. 
(yet cf. ed. Weiss) on Ro. 1. ο.; Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.]. 
διαφέρω τινός, to differ from one, i. 6. to excel, surpass 
one: Mt. vi. 26; x. 31; xii. 12; Lk. xii. 7, 24, (often so 
in Attic auth.) ; τινὸς ἔν τινι, 1 Co. xv. 41; [τινὸς οὐδέν, 
Gal. iv. 1]. ο. impersonally, διαφέρει it makes a differ- 


143 


διαχλευάζω 


ence, it matters, is of importance: οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει it 
matters nothing to me, Gal. ii. 6, (Plat. Prot. p. 316 Ὁ. 
ἡμῖν οὐδὲν διαφέρει, p. 358 e.; de rep. 1 p. 340¢c.; Dem. 
124, 3 (in Phil. 3,50); Polyb. 3, 21,9; Ael. v. ἢ. 1, 25; 
al.; [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 394; Wetst. on Gal. 1. c.]).* 

δια-φεύγω: [2 aor. διέφυγον]; fr. Hdt. down; to 7166 
through danger, to escape: Acts xxvii. 42, (Prov. xix. 5; 
Josh. viii. 22).* 

δια-φημίζω; 1 aor. διεφήμισα; 1 aor. pass. διεφημίσθην ; 
to spread abroad, blaze abroad: τὸν λόγον, Mk. i. 45; Mt. 
xxviii. 15 [T WH mrg. ἐφημίσθ. ] ; τινά, to spread abroad 
his fame, verbally diffuse his renown, Mt. ix. 31; in Lat. 
diffamare aliquem, but in a bad sense. (Rarely in Grk. 
writ., as Arat. phaen. 221; Dion. Hal. 11, 46; Palaeph. 
incred. 14, 4; [cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 
14 sq.].) * 

διαφθείρω; 1 aor. διέφθειρα ; Pass., [pres. διαφθείρο- 
par]; pf. ptep. διεφθαρμένος ; 2 aor. διεφθάρην; Sept. 
very often for nmv, occasionally for an; in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down; 1. to change for the worse, to cor- 
rupt: minds, morals; τὴν γῆν, i.e. the men that in- 
habit the earth, Rey. xi. 18; διεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν, 1 Tim. 
vi. 5, (τὴν διάνοιαν, Plat. legg. 10 p. 888 a.; τὴν γνώμην, 
Dion. Hal. antt.5, 21; τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, Xen. an. 4, 5, 12). 
2. to destroy, ruin, (Lat. perdere); a. to consume, of bodily 
vigor and strength: ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται [is 
decaying |, 2 Co. iv. 16; of the worm or moth that eats pro- 
visions, clothing, ete. Lk. xii. 33. b. to destroy (Lat. de- 
lere) : Rev. viii. 9; to kill, διαφθείρειν τοὺς etc. Rev. xi. 18." 

δια-φθορά, -as, 7, (διαφθείρω), corruption, destruction; 
in the N. T. that destruction which is effected by the de- 
cay of the body after death: Acts ii. 27, 31; xiii. 34-37 
[οἷ W. $65, 10], see εἴδω, I. 5 and ὑποστρέφω, 2. (Sept. 
for nnw; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)* 

διάφορος, -ov, (διαφέρω) ; 1. different, varying in 
kind, (Hdt. and sqq.): Ro. xii. 6; Heb. ix. 10. 2. 
excellent, surpassing, ({Diod.], Polyb., Plut., al.) : com- 
par. duapopwrepos, Heb. i. 4; viii. 6.* 

δια-φυλάσσω: 1 aor. inf. διαφυλάξαι; fr. Hdt. down; 
to guard carefully: twa, Lk. iv. 10 fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 11. 
“The seventy chose to employ this term esp. of God’s 
providential care; ef. Gen. xxviii. 15; Josh. xxiv. 17; 
Ps. xl. (xli.) 3. Hence it came to pass that the later 
writers at the close of their letters used to write διαφυ- 
λάττοι, διαφυλάξοι ὑμᾶς ὁ θεός, cf. Theodoret. iii. pp. 800, 
818, 826, (edd. Schulze, Nosselt, ete. Hal.).” Win. De 
verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16.* 

δια-χειρίζω : 1 aor. mid. διεχειρισάμην ; to move by the use 
of the hands, take in hand, manage, administer, govern, (fr. 
[Andoe., Lys.], Xen. and Platodown). Mid. to lay hands 
on, slay, kill [with one’s own hand]: τινά (Polyb. 8, 23, 8; 
Diod. 18, 46; Joseph., Dion. Hal., Plut., Hdian.), Acts 
y. 305 xxvi- 21." 

δια-χλευάζω ; fo deride, scoff, mock, [* deridere i. e. 
ridendo exagitare” Win.]: Acts ii. 13 G LT Tr WH. 
(Plat. Ax. p. 364 b.; Dem. p. 1221, 26 [adv. Polycl. 491: 
Aeschin. dial. 3,2; Polyb. 17,4, 4; al.; eccles. writ.) ΟἹ. 
Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 17.* 


ὀιαχωρίξω 


δια-χωρίζω: fo separate thoroughly or wholly (cf. διά, Ο. 
2), (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept.). Pass. pres. δια- 
χωρίζομαι ([in reflex. sense] cf. ἀποχωρίζω) to separate 
one’s self, depart, (Gen. xiii. 9,11, 14; Diod. 4,53): ἀπό 
twos, Lk. ix. 33.* 

διδακτικός, -7, -όν, (i. 4. διδασκαλικός in Grk. writ.), apt 
and skilful in teaching: 1 Tim. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 24. (δι- 
δακτικὴ ἀρετή, the virtue which renders one teachable, 
docility, Philo, praem. et poen. § 4; [de congressu erud. 
8 11)" 

διδακτός, -7, -όν, (διδάσκω); 1. ‘hat can be taught 
(Pind., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. taught, instructed, foll. by 
gen. by one [οἵ. W. 189 (178); 194 (182); B. 169 (147)]: 
τοῦ θεοῦ, by God, Jn. vi. 45 fr. Is. liv. 13; πνεύματος ἁγίου 
[GL T Tr WH om. ἁγίου], by the (Holy) Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 
13. (νουθετήματα κείνης διδακτά, Soph. El. 344.) * 

διδασκαλία, -as, ἡ, (διδάσκαλος), (fr. Pind. down]; 1. 
teaching, instruction: Ro. xii. 7; xv. 4 (εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν 
διδασκαλίαν, that we might be taught, [A. V. for our 
learning]); 1 Tim. iv. 18, 16; v.17; 2 Tim. iii. 10, 16; 
Witsdisy 7. 2. teaching i.e. that which is taught, doc- 
trine: Eph. iv. 14; 1 Tim.i. 10; iv. 6; vi.1,3; 2 Tim. iv. 
3; Tit.i.9; ii. 1,10; plur. διδασκαλίαι /eachings, precepts, 
(fr. Is. xxix. 13), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; ἀνθρώπων. Col. ii. 
22; δαιμονίων, 1 Tim. iv. 1.* 

διδάσκαλος, -ov, 6, (διδάσκω). a teacher; in the N. T. one 
who teaches concerning the things of God, and the duties 
of man: 1. of one who is fitted to teach, or thinks 
himself so: Heb. v. 12; Ro. ii. 20. 2. of the teachers 
of the Jewish religion: Lk. ii. 46; Jn. iii. 10; hence the 
Hebr. 37 is rendered in Greek διδάσκαλος : Jn.i. 38 (39) ; 
xx. 16; cf. below, under ῥαββί, and Pressel in Herzog 
xu. p. 471 sq.; [Campbell, Dissert. on the Gospels, diss. 
Vii. pt. 2]. 3. of those who by their great power as 
teachers drew crowds about them; a. of John the Bap- 
tist: Lk.iii.12. Ὁ. of Jesus: Jn.i.38 (39); iii. 2; viii. 4; 
xi. 28; xiii. 13 sq.; xx. 16; often in the first three Gospels. 
4. by preéminence used of Jesus by himself, as the one 
who showed men the way of salvation: Mt. xxiii. 8 L T 
Tr WH. 5. of the apostles: ὁ διδάσκαλος τῶν ἐθνῶν, 
of Paul, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11. 6. of those who 
in the religious assemblies of Christians undertook the 
work of teaching, with the special assistance of the Holy 
Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Eph. iv. 11; Acts xiii. 1, ef. 
Jas. iii. 1. 7. of false teachers among Christians: 2 
Tim. iv. 3. [Hom. (h. Mere. 556), Aeschyl., al.] 

διδάσκω ; impf. ἐδίδασκον ; fut. διδάξω: 1 aor. ἐδίδαξα; 
1 aor. pass. ἐδιδάχθην; (AAQ [ef. Vaniéek p. 8277); [fr. 
Hom. down]; Sept. for y-jn, 7717, and esp. for 1; 
to teach; 1. absol. a. to hold discourse with others 
in order to instruct them, deliver didactic discourses: Mt. 
iv. 23; xxi. 23; Mk. i. 21; vi.6; xiv. 49; Lk. iv. 15; v. 
17; vi. 6; Jn. vi. 59; vii. 14; xviii. 20, and often in the 
Gospels; 1 Tim. ii. 12. b. to be a teacher (see διδά- 
orodos, 6): Ro. xii. 7. ὁ. to discharge the office of teach- 
e» conduct one’s self as a teacher: 1 Co. iv. 17. 2. in 


144 


διδαχὴ 


(of which no well-attested example remains exc. one in 
Plut. Marcell. c. 12), with dat. of person : τῷ Βαλάκ, Rev. 
ii. 14 (ace. to the reading now generally accepted for the 
Rec.be#«lz τὸν Bad.) ; ef. B. 149 (130); W. 228 (209), ef. 
227 (213). b. ace. to the regular use, with ace. of pers., 
to teach one: used of Jesus and the apostles uttering in 
public what they wished their hearers to know and re- 
member, Mt. v. 2; Mk. i. 22; ii. 13; iv. 2; Lk. v. 3; Jn. 
vill. 2; Acts iv. 2; v. 25; xx. 20; rods Ἕλληνας, to act 
the part of a teacher among the Greeks, Jn. vii. 35; used 
of those who enjoin upon others to observe some ordi- 
nance, to embrace some opinion, or to obey some pre- 
cept: Mt. v. 19; Acts xv. 1; Heb. viii. 11; with esp. 
reference to the addition which the teacher makes to 
the knowledge of the one he teaches, to impart instruc- 
tion, instil doctrine into one: Acts xi. 26; xxi. 28; Jn. 
ix. 84: Ro. ii. 21; Col. iii. 16; 1 Jn. ii. 27; Rev. ii. 20. 
c. the thing taught or enjoined is indicated by a foll. 
ὅτι: Mk. viii. 81; 1 Co. xi. 14; by a foll. infin., Lk. xi. 
1; Mt. xxviii. 20; Rev. ii. 14; περί τινος, 1 In. ii. 27; 
ἐν Χριστῷ διδαχθῆναι, to be taught in the fellowship of 
Christ, Eph. iv. 21; foll. by an ace. of the thing, to teach 
i.e. prescribe a thing: διδασκαλίας, ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων, 
precepts which are commandments of men (fr. Is. xxix. 
13), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7, [B. 148 (129)]; τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Lk. xx. 21: ταῦτα, 1 Tim. 
iv. 113 ἃ μὴ δεῖ, Tit. i115 10 explain, expound, a thing: 
Acts xviii. 11, 25; xxviii. 31; ἀποστασίαν ἀπὸ Μωῦσέως, 
the necessity of forsaking Moses, Acts xxi. 21. d. with 
ace. of pers. and of thing, to teach one something [W. 226 
sq. (212); B. 149 (130)]: [ἐκεῖνος ὑμᾶς διδάξει πάντα, 
Jn. xiv. 26]; τοῦ διδάσκειν ὑμᾶς τινα τὰ στοιχεῖα, Leb. v. 
12 (where RG TTrand others read—not so well— 
τίνα: [but ef. B. 260 (224) note, 268 (230) note]) ; ἑτέρους 
διδάξαι, sc. αὐτά, 2 Tim. ii. 2; hence pass. διδαχθῆναί re 
[B. 188 (163); W. 229 (215)]: Gal. i. 12 (ἐδιδάχθην, se. 
αὐτόν, 2 Th. ii. 15. 

διδαχή. -ῆς, ἡ, (διδάσκω). [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. teach- 
ing, Viz. that which is taught: Mk.i. 27; Jn. vii. 16; Acts 
xvii. 19; Ro. [vi. 17]; xvi. 17; 2 Jn. 10; Rev. ii. 24; ἡ 
διδ. τινος. one’s doctrine, i. 6. what he teaches: Mt. vii. 
28; xvi. 12; xxii. 33; Mk.i. 22; xi. 18; Lk. iv. 32; Jn. 
xviii. 19; Acts v. 28; Rev. ii. 14 sq.; ἡ διδαχή of God, 
τοῦ κυρίου, τοῦ Χριστοῦ, the doctrine which has God, 
Christ, the Lord, for its author and supporter: Jn. vii. 
17; Acts xiii. 12; 2Jn. 9; with the gen. of the object, 
doctrine, teaching, concerning something: Heb. vi. 2 [W. 
187 (176); 192 (181); 551 (513)]; plur. Heb. xiii. 9. 
2. [the act of] teaching, instruction, (cf. διδασκαλία [on the 
supposed distinction betw. the two words and their use 
in the N. T. see Ellic. on 2 Tim. iv. 2; they are asso- 
ciated in 2 Tim. iv. 2,3; Tit.i.9]): Actsii.42; 2 Tim. 
iv. 2; ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ. while he was teaching, a phrase by 
which the Evangelist indicates that he is about to cite 
some of the many words which Jesus spoke at that 
time, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; τοῦ κατὰ τὴν διδαχὴν πιστοῦ 


construction; a. either in imitation of the Hebr. 5 Ὑ9 λόγου, the faithful word which is in accordance with the 


(Job xxi. 22), or by an irregular use of the later Greeks 


received (2 Tim. iii. 14) instruction, Tit. i. 9; in partic- 


ὃ ἰδραχμον 


ular, the teaching of the διδάσκαλος (η. v. 6) in the relig- 
ious assemblies of Christians: λαλεῖν ἐν διδαχῇ to speak 
in the way of teaching, in distinction from other modes 
of speaking in public, 1 Co. xiv. 6 ; ἔχω διδαχήν, to have 
something to teach, ibid. 26.* 

δίδραχμον. -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. δίδραχμος. -ov, sc. 
νόμισμα; fr. dis and δραχμή), a didrachmon or double- 
drachma, a silver coin equal to two Attie drachmas or 
one Alexandrian, or half a shekel, [about one third of a 
dollar] (see in ἀργύριον, 3): Mt. xvii. 34. (Sept. often 
for 9pw; [Poll., Galen].) * 

δίδυμος, τη: -ov, and -os, -ov, twofold, twain, (double, Hom. 
Od. 19, 227; as τρίδυμος triple, τετράδυμος quadruple, 
ἑπτάδυμος) ; hence twin (se. παῖς, as τρίδυμοι παῖδες. viol, 
Germ. Drillinge, three born at a birth), Hebr. oxn, a 
surname of the apostle Thomas [ef. Luthardt on the 
first of the foll. pass.; B.D. s.v. Thomas]: Jn. xi. 16; 
xx. 24; xxi. 2. (Hom. I]. 23, 641.) * 

δίδωμι (διδῶ, Rev. iii. 9 LT WH; [δίδω Tr, yet see 
WH. App. p. 167]), 3 pers. plur. διδόασι (Rev. xvii. 13 
[not Rec.]), impv. δίδου (Mt. v. 42 RG); impf. 3 pers. 
sing. ἐδίδου, 3 pers. plur. ἐδίδουν (ἐδίδοσαν, Jn. xix. 3 LT 
Tr WH [see ἔχω); fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ἔδωκα [2 pers. 
sing. -xes, Jn. xvii. 7 Trmrg., 8 Trmrg.; cf. reff. s. v. 
κοπιάω)], subjunc. δώσῃ [and δώσωμεν] fr. an imaginary 
indic. form ἔδωσα, [ Mk. vi. 37 T Trmrg.]; Jn. xvii. 2 (Tr 
mrg. WH δώσει) ; Rev. viii. 3 (LT Tr WH δώσει; cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; B. 36 (31); W. 79 (76); [Veitch 
s. v. 618. fin., also Soph. Lex. s. v. and esp. Intr. p. 40; 
WH. App. p. 172]); pf. δέδωκα [on the interchange 
between the forms of the pf. and of the aor. in this verb 
ef. B. 199 (172)]; plpf. ἐδεδώκειν and without augm. 
[W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)] dedaxew, Mk. xiv. 44; and L 
txt. T Tr WH in Lk. xix. 15; 3 pers. plur. δεδώκεισαν, Jn. 
xi. 57; 2 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. δῷ [δώῃ, Jn. xv. 16 Tr 
mrg.; Eph. i.17 WH mrg.; 2 Tim. ii. 25 LWHmrg.; 
δοῖ, Mk. viii. 37 T Tr WH;; cf. B. 46 (40); WH. App. p. 
168; Kuenen and Cobet, praef. p. lxi.], plur. δῶμεν, δῶτε, 
δῶσιν, optat. 3 pers. sing. δῴη for δοίη, Ro. xv. 5; [2 Th. 
iii. 16]; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18; [ii. 25 T Tr WH txt.; Eph. i. 
17RG;; iii. 16 RG] and elsewhere among the variants 
([ef. W. § 14,1 g.; B. 46 (40), ef. § 139, 37 and 62]; see 
[WH. App. u.s.; Τα Proleg. p. 122;] Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 346; [Kiihner § 282 Anm. 2; Veitch 5. v. δίδωμι ad 
fin.]), impv. δός, Sore, inf. δοῦναι. ptep. δούς ; Pass., pf. 
δέδομαι; 1 aor. ἐδόθην ; 1 fut. δοθήσομαι; cf. B. 45 (39) 
sq-; [WHu.s.]. In the Sept. times without number for 
112, sometimes for D3w; and for Chald. 37>; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to give; 

A. absolutely and generally: μακάριόν ἐστι μᾶλλον 
διδόναι, ἢ λαμβάνειν, Acts xx. 35. 

B. In construction; I. τινί τι, to give something 
to some one, —in various senses; 1. of one’s own ac- 
cord to give one something, to his advantage; to bestow, 
give asa gift: Mt. iv. 9; Lk. i. 32; xii. 32, and often; 
δόματα [cf. B. 148 (129)], Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13; Eph. 
iv. 8 (Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); τὰ ὑπάρχοντα what thou 
hast τοῖς πτωχοῖς, Mt. xix. 21; χρήματα, Acts xxiv. 26. 


145 


δίδωμι 


2. to grant, give to one asking, let have: Mt. xii. 39; xiv. 
7 54.; Xvi. 4; xx. 23; Mk. vi. 22, 255 viii. 12; x. 40; 
Lk. xi. 29; xv. 16; Jn. xi. 22; xiv.16; xv.16; xvi. 23; 
Acts iii. 6; Jas.i.5; [noteworthy is 1 Jn. v. 16 δώσει (se. 
prob. 6 θεός) αὐτῷ ζωὴν τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσιν etc., where 
αὐτῷ seems to be an ethical dat. and τ. ἅμαρ. dependent 
on the verb; see B. 133 (116) note, cf. 179 (156); W.523 
(487), cf. 530 (494)]; in contradistinction from what 
one claims: Jn. iii. 27; xix. 11. 3. to supply, furnish, 
necessary things: as ἄρτον τινί, Mt. vi. 11; Lk. xi. 3; Jn. 
vi. 32,513 τροφήν, Mt. xxiv. 45; βρῶσιν, In. vi. 27; be- 
sides in Mt. xxv. 15, 28 sq.; Mk. ii. 26; iv. 25; Lk. vi. 
4; vill. 18; xii.42; xix. 24,26; Jn.iv. 10, 14,15; Eph. 
vi. 19. 4. to give over, deliver,i.e. a. to reach out, 
extend, present: as Mt. xiv. 19; xvii.27; Mk. vi. 41; 
xiv. 22 sq.; Lk. ix. 16; xxii.19; τὸ ψωμίον, In. xiii. 26 ; 
τὸ ποτήριον, Jn. xviii. 11; Rev. xvi. 19; ras χεῖρας διδό- 
vat to give one the hand, Acts ix. 41; Gal. ii. 9. Ὁ. of a 
writing: ἀποστάσιον, Mt. v.31. c. to give to one’s care, 
intrust, commit; aa. something to be administered; 
univ.: παντὶ @ ἐδόθη πολύ, Lk. xii. 48; property, money, 
Mt. xxv. 15; Lk. xix. 13,15; ἀμπελῶνα, a vineyard to 
be cultivated, Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 16; ras κλεῖς [κλεῖδας] 
τῆς Bac. Mt. xvi. 19; τὴν κρίσιν, Jn. v. 22; κρίμα, Rev. 
xx. 4; τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἑαυτῶν, Rev. xvii. 13 [not Ree.]; τὰ 
ἔργα, ἵνα τελειώσω αὐτά, Jn. ν. 36; τὸ ἔργον, va ποιήσω, 
Jn. xvii. 4; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, to be declared, Jn. xvi. 11 
[not Rec.,12 T Tr WH]. bb. to give or commit to some 
one something to be religiously observed : διαθήκην περιτο- 
μῆς, Acts vii. 8; τὴν περιτομήν, the ordinance of circum- 
cision, Jn. vii. 22; τὸν νόμον, ibid. vs. 19; λόγια ζῶντα. 
Acts vii. 38. 5. to give what is due or obligatory, to 
pay: wages or reward, Mt. xx. 4,14; xxvi. 15; Rey. xi. 
18; ἀργύριον, as a reward, Mk. xiv. 11; Lk. xxii. 5; 
taxes, tribute, tithes, ete.: Mt. xvii. 27; xxii. 17; Mk. 
xii. 14 (15) ; Lk. xx. 22; xxiii. 2; Heb. vii. 4; θυσίαν se. τῷ 
κυρίῳ, Lk. ii. 24 (θυσίαν ἀποδοῦναι τῷ θεῷ, Joseph. antt. 
7, 9,1); λόγον, render account, Ro. xiv. 12 [L txt. Tr txt. 
ἀποδ.]. 6. δίδωμι is joined with nouns denoting an 
act or an effect; and a. the act or effect of him who 
gives, in such a sense that what he is said διδόναι (either 
absolutely or with dat. of pers.) he is conceived of as 
effecting, or as becoming its author. Hence δίδωμι 
joined with a noun can often be changed into an active 
verb expressing the effecting of that which the noun de- 
notes. Thus διδόναι αἶνον τῷ θεῷ is equiv. to αἰνεῖν τὸν 
θεόν, Lk. xviii. 43; ἀπόκρισίν τινι i. η. ἀποκρίνεσθαι, In. 
i. 22; xix. 9; ἐγκοπὴν δοῦναι τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ i. 4. ἐγκόπτειν 
τὸ evayy. to hinder (the progress of) the gospel, 1 Co. 
ix. 12; ἐντολήν τινι i. 4. ἐντέλλεσθαί τινι, In. xi. 575 xii. 
49; ΧΗ. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 23; δόξαν τινί i. q. δοξάζειν τινά (see 
δόξα, 11.}: ἐργασίαν, after the Lat. operam dare, take 
pains, [A. V. give diligence], i. q. ἐργάζεσθαι, Lk. xii. 58; 
[συμβούλιον, cf. the Lat. consilium dare, i. q. συμβουλεύ- 
εσθαι. Mk. iii. 6 Trtxt. WH txt.]; διαστολήν τινι i. α. 
διαστέλλειν τι, 1 Co. xiv. 7; παραγγελίαν, 1 Th. iv. 2; 
παράκλησιν, 2 Th. ii. 16; ἔλεος 1. 4. ἐλεεῖν, 2 Tim. i. 16, 
18; ἀγάπην, show [ A. V. bestow], 1 Jn. iii. 1; ἐκδίκησιν, 


δίδωμι 


2 Th. i. 8; βασανισμόν, Rev. xviii. 7; ῥάπισμα 1. q- parri- 
ew τινά, Jn. xviii. 22; xix. ὃ; φίλημα i. q. φιλεῖν τινα, 
Lk. vii. 45. or b. the noun denotes something to be 
done by him to whom it is said to be given: διδόναι τινὶ 
μετάνοιαν, to cause him to repent, Acts v. 31; xi. 18; 
γνῶσιν σωτηρίας, Lk. i. 77; ἐλπίδα τινί, 2 Th. ii. 16. th 
Joined with nouns denoting strength, faculty, power, 
virtue, δίδωμι (revi re) is equiv. to fo furnish, endue, (one 
with a thing): Lk. xxi. 15 (δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα x. σοφίαν) ; 
Acts vii. 10; ἐξουσίαν, Mt. ix. 8; x. 1; Lk. x. 19; Jn. 
xvii. 2; Rev. ii. 26; vi. 8; xiii. 7; διάνοιαν, 1 Jn. v. 20; 
σύνεσιν, 2 Tim. ii. 7; and in the very common phrase 
διδόναι τὸ πνεῦμα. [1΄.- 8. τινί τινος to give to one (ἃ 
part) of ete.: Rey. ii. 17 (6 1 Ὁ Tr WH) δώσω αὐτῷ τοῦ 
μάννα, cf. W. 198 (186); B. 159 (139).] 

11. δίδωμί τι without a dative, and δίδωμί τινα. 1. 
δίδωμί τι; a. with the force of to cause, produce, give 
forth from one’s self: ὑετόν, from heaven, Jas. v. 18; 
καρπόν, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7, 8 sq., (Deut. xxv. 19; Sir. 
xxiii. 25); σημεῖα, Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22 [not Tdf.]; 
Acts ii. 19, (Ex. vii. 9; Deut. xiii. 1, etc.) ; ὑπόδειγμα, 
Jn. xiii. 15; φέγγος, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24, (φῶς, 
Is. xiii. 10); φωνήν, 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; διὰ τῆς γλώσσης 
λόγον, ibid. 9; γνώμην, to give one’s opinion, to give ad- 
vice, 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 10. Ὄ. διδόναι κλήρους 
Ori 102, Lev. xvi. 8), to give i. e. hand out lots, se. to 
be cast into the urn [see κλῆρος, 1], Acts i. 26. ὁ. δίδωμί 
τι with pred. ace. : Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45, (to give up as a 
λύτρον) ; Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 37, (to pay as an equiv- 
alent). 2. δίδωμί τινα; a. where the noun refers to 
the office one bears, to appoint: κριτάς, Acts xiii. 20. Ὁ. 
to cause to come forth: δίδωμι ἐκ τῆς συναγωγῆς τοῦ Σατανᾶ 
τῶν λεγόντων (se. τινάς [ef. B. 158 (138); W. § 59, 4 b.]), 
Rev. iii. 9; so also the sea, death, Hades, are said to 
give (up) the dead who have been engulfed or received 
by them, Rev. xx. 13. 3. δίδωμί τινά τινι; a. to give 
one to some one as his own: as the object of his saving 
care, Heb. ii. 13; 10 give one to some one, to follow him 
as a leader and master, Jn. vi. 37, 39; x. 29; xvii. 6, 9, 
12 [but see B. I. 4. c. aa. above], 24; xviii. 9; in these 
pass. God is said to have given certain men to Christ, 
i. e. to have disposed them to acknowledge Christ as the 
author and medium of their salvation, and to enter into 
intimate relations with him, hence Christ calls them ‘his 
own’ (ra ἐμά, Jn. x. 14). b. to give one to some one to 
care for his interests: Jn. iii. 16 (ἔδωκεν sc. αὐτῷ, i. 6. TO 
κόσμῳ); Acts xiii. 21. ὁ. to give one to some one to whom 
he already belonged, to return: Lk. vii. 15 (ix. 42 ἀπέ- 
δωκε [so Lmrg. in vii. 157). ἃ. δίδωμι ἐμαυτόν τινι, to 
one demanding of me something, J give myself up as it 
were; an hyperbole for disregarding entirely my private 
interests, I give as much as ever I can: 2 Co. viii. 5. 4. 
δίδωμί τινα with a predicate ace.: ἑαυτὸν τύπον, to render 
or set forth one’s self as an example, 2 Th. iii. 9; with 
a predicate of dignity, office, function, and a dat. of 
the person added for whose benefit some one invested 
with said dignity or office is given, that is, is bestowed : 
αὐτὸν ἔδωκεν κεφαλὴν ὑπὲρ πάντα TH ἐκκλησίᾳ, head over 


140 


δίδωμι 


all things to the church, Eph. i. 22; ἔδωκεν τοὺς μὲν ἀπο- 
στόλους κτλ. SC. TH ἐκκλησίᾳ, Eph. iv. 11. For in neither 
of these passages are we obliged, with many interpreters, 
to translate the word appointed, made, after the use of 
the Hebr. }3; esp. since in the second Paul seems to 
wish to confirm the words quoted in vs. 8, ἔδωκε δόματα 
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις. Those in the church whom Christ has 
endued with gifts and functions for the common advan- 
tage the apostle reckons among the δόματα given by him 
after his ascension to heaven. 

111. Phrases in which to the verb δίδωμι, either stand- 
ing alone or joined to cases, there is added 1. an 
infinitive, either alone or with an accusative ; δίδωμί τινι 
foll. by an infin. denoting the object: δίδωμί τινι φαγεῖν, 
give, supply, something to eat, give food [B. 261 (224); 
W. 318 sq. (299) ], Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35,42; Mk. vi. 37; 
νυν. 43; Lk. viii. 55; ix. 13; Rev. ii. 7; πιεῖν, Jn. iv. 7, 10; 
with the addition of an object ace. depending on the 
φαγεῖν or πιεῖν : Mt. xxvii. 34; Mk. xv. 23 [RG 19]; with 
an ace. added depending on the verb δίδωμι : Jn. vi. 31; 
Rey. xvi. 6; foll. by an infin. indicating design [ef. B. 
τι. s.], 10 grant or permit one to ete.: Lk. i. 73 sq. (δοῦναι 
ἡμῖν ἀφόβως λατρεύειν aito) ; Jn. v.26; Acts iv. 29; Ro. 
xv. 5; Eph. iii. 16; Rev. iii. 21; vi. 4; vii. 2; [foll. by εἰς 
with the infin. ; Ro. xv. 16, ef. B. 265 (228)]; by a constr. 
borrowed from the Hebrew, καὶ δώσω τοῖς . . . καὶ προφη- 
τεύσουσι, Rey. xi. 3; in the passive, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv. 
11 (ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι [G 1, Τ Tr WH om. γνῶναι] to you 
it has been granted ete.) ; foll. by the ace. and inf.: 
δῴη [LT Tr WH δῷ] ὑμῖν... κατοικῆσαι τὸν Χριστὸν ἐν 
ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν, Eph. iii. 16 54. ; ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ 
γενέσθαι, Acts x. 40; οὐ δώσεις τὸν ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν δια- 
φθοράν (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10), Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35. ὩΣ 
δίδωμί τινι, foll. by ἵνα, to grant or permit, that ete. [B. 
238 (205); W. 387 (316), cf. 545 (507)]: Mk. x. 37; Rev. 
xix. 8. 10 commission, Rev. ix. 5. 

IV. δίδωμί τι, or τινί τι, or τινί or τινά, foll. by a prep- 
psition with a noun (or pronoun) ; 1. τινὶ ἔκ twos [cf. 
W. 5 28,1; B. 159 (139)]: δότε ἡμῖν (a part) ἐκ τοῦ ἐλαίου 
ὑμῶν, Mt. xxv. 8; ἐκ τῶν ἄρτων, easily to be supplied from 
the context, Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4; ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος αὐτοῦ 
ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν, 1 Jn. iv. 13; otherwise in Jn. iii. 34 6 θεὸς οὐ 
δίδωσι τὸ πνεῦμα ἐκ μέτρου, by measure i. 6. according to 
measure, moderately, [ef. W. § 51, 1 d.]; otherwise in 
Rev. iii. 9 δίδωμι ἐκ τῆς συναγωγῆς, (see II. 2 b. above). 
τινὶ ἀπό twos: Lk. xx. 10 iva ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶ- 
νος δῶσιν [LT Tr WH δώσουσιν] αὐτῷ, sc. the portion 
due. τί foll. by εἰς with a noun, fo give something to be 
put into, Lk. vi. 38 μέτρον δώσουσιν εἰς τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν 
(shall they give i. 6. pour into your bosom), or upon, Lk. 
xv. 22 δότε δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ (put a ring on 
his hand) ; εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν for the field, to pay its price, Mt. 
xxvii. 10; τινί τι els τὰς χεῖρας, to commit a thing to one, 
deliver it into one’s power: Jn. xiii. 3 (Hebr. 72 112 13, 
Gen. ix. 2; xiv. 20; Ex. iv. 21); εἰς τ. διάνοιαν, or ἐπὶ τὰς 
καρδίας (Jer. xxviii. (xxxi.) 33), put into the mind, fasten 
upon the heart, Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; or εἰς τ. καρδίας with 
inf. of the thing, Rev. xvii. 17; (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 20 διδόναι 


διεγείρω 


τινί τι εἰς τὴν ψυχήν). ἑαυτὸν διδόναι εἰς with ace. of place, 
to betake one’s self somewhere, to go into some place: 
Acts xix. 31, (εἰς τόπους παραβόλους, Polyb. 5, 14, 9; εἰς 
τόπους τραχεῖς, Diod. 14,81; εἰς τὰς ἐρημίας, Diod. 5, 59; 
Joseph. antt. 15, 7,7; εἰς κώμην τινά, Joseph. antt. 7, 9, 7). 
2. δίδωμί τι ἔν τινι; 1. 6. to be or remain in, so that it is in, 
[ef. W. 414 (386); B. 329 (283)]: ἐν τῇ χειρί τινος, Jn. 
iii. 35; ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις, 2 Co. i. 22; ἐν τῇ καρδ. τινός, 2 Co. 
viii. 16, (ef. 1 K. x. 24); εἰρήνην δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ to bring 
peace to be on earth, Lk. xii. 51. 3. δίδωμί τι ὑπέρ 
twos, give up for etc. [ef. W. 383 (358) sq.]: Jn. vi. 51; 
ἑαυτὸν ὑπέρ twos, Tit. ii. 14; ἑαυτὸν ἀντίλυτρον ὑπέρ τινος, 
1 Tim. ii. 6 ; ἑαυτὸν περὶ [ αὶ WH txt. ὑπέρ ; cf. περί, 1. ο. δ. 
τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, for sins, i. 6. to expiate them, Gal. i. 4. 
4. διδόναι τινὶ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα, τὴν πρᾶξιν, to give one acc. 
to his works, to render to one the reward of his deeds: 
Rev. ii. 23 [Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 4]; (οἴ. ἀποδώσει, Mt. xvi. 
27; Ro. ii. 6). 5. Hebraistically, δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου 
θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην I have set before thee a door opened 
i. e. have caused the door to be open to thee, Rev. iii. 8. 

[Syn. διδόναι, δωρεῖσθαι: 8:5. to give in general, an- 
tithetic to λαμβάνειν ; δωρ. specific, to bestow, present ; 55. might 
be used even of evils, but δωρ. could be used of such things 
only ironically ; see δόμα, fin. CoMmp.: ἀνα-, ἀπο-, ἂντ-απο-, 
δια-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, μετα-, Tapa-, mpo- Sidwyu.| 

δι-εγείρω ; 1 aor. διήγειρα; Pass., impf. διηγειρόμην [but 
Tr WH (Tedd. 2, 7) διεγείρετο in Jn. vi. 18, cf. B. 34 (30); 
WH. App. p. 161]; 1 aor. ptep. διεγερθείς ; to wake up, 
awaken, arouse (from repose; differing from the simple 
eyeipw, which has a wider meaning); from sleep: τινά, 
Mk. iv. 38 [here T Tr WH eyeipovow]; Lk. viii. 24; pass., 
Lk. viii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; Mk. iv. 39; with the addi- 
tion ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, Mt. i. 24 (LT Tr WH ἐγερθείς) ; from 
repose, quiet: in pass. of the sea, which begins to be agi- 
tated, to rise, Jn. vi. 18. Metaph. to arouse the mind; 
stir up, render active: 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1, as in 2 Mace. 
xv. 10, τινὰ τοῖς θυμοῖς. (Several times in the O.T. 
Apocr. [ef. W. 102 (97)]; Hippoer., [Aristot.], Hdian.; 
occasionally in Anthol.) * 

δι-ενθυμέομαι, -οὔμαι ; 10 weigh in the mind, consider : περί 
τινος, Acts x. 19, for Rec. ἐνθυμ. (Besides, only in eccl. 
writ.) * 

SreE€pxopar: [2 aor. διεξῆλθον]; to go out through 
something: διεξελθοῦσα, sc. διὰ φρυγάνων, Acts xxviii. 3 
Tdf. edd. 2, 7. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph., Hdt.], 
Eur. down.) * 

δι-ἐξοδος, -ov, 7; fr. Hdt. down; a way out through, 
outlet, exit: διέξοδοι τῶν ὁδῶν, Mt. xxii. 9, lit. ways through 
which ways go out, i.e. ace. to the context and the design 
of the parable places before the city where the roads from 
the country terminate, therefore outlets of the country high- 
ways, the same being also their entrances; [ef. Ob. 14; 
Ezek. xxi. 21; the R. V. renders it partings of the high- 
ways]. The phrase figuratively represents the territory 
of heathen nations, into which the apostles were about to 
go forth, (as is well shown by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. 
p- 634 sqq.). Used of the boundaries of countries, it is 
equiv. to the Hebr. nixyin, Num. xxxiv. 4 sq. 8 sq., and 


147 


διέρχομαι 


often in the book of Joshua, [cf. Rieder, Die zusammen- 
gesetzten Verba u. s. w. p. 18. Others understand the 
crossings or thoroughfares here to represent the most 
frequented spots. ] * 

δι-ερμηνεία, -as, 7, (διερμηνεύω, q.v.), interpretation: of 
obscure utterances, 1 Co. xii. 10 Ltxt. (Not yet found 
elsewhere.) * 

δι-ερμηνευτής, -οὔ, 6, (διερμηνεύω, 4. v.), an interpreter: 
1 Co. xiv. 28 [L Tr WH mrg. ἑρμην.]. (Eccles. writ.) * 

δι-ερμηνεύω ; impf. διηρμήνευον and (without augm. cf. 
B. 34 (30)) διερμήνευον (Lk. xxiv. 27 L Tr mrg.); 1 aor. 
(also without augm.; so “all early Mss.” Hort) διερ- 
pnvevoa (Lk. 1. c. T Tr txt. WH); [pres. pass. διερμηνεύο- 
pa]; to interpret [ διά intensifying by marking transition, 
(cf. Germ. verdeutlichen); Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. 
v. p- 10sq.]; 1. to unfold the meaning of what is said, 
explain, expound : ri, Lk. xxiv. 27; absolutely, 1 Co. xii. 
SOs χαν ὅΣ 1.5.2. 2. to translate into one’s native 
language: Acts ix. 36, (2 Mace. i. 36; Polyb. 3, 22, 3, 
and several times in Philo [ef. Siegfried, Glossar. Phil. 
8. v. ]).* 

δι-έρχομαι ; impf. διηρχόμην ; fut. διελεύσομαι (Lk. ii. 
35; see W. 86 (82); [οἵ. B. 58 (50)]); 2 aor. διῆλθον; 
pf. ptep. διεληλυθώς (Heb. iv. 14); [fr. Hom. down]; 
1. where διά has the force of through (Lat. per; [cf. 
διά, C.]): to go through, pass through, [on its construe- 
tions cf. W. § 52,4, 8]; a. διά τινος, to go, walk, jour- 
ney, pass through a place (Germ. den Durchweg neh- 
men): Mt. xii. 43; xix. 24 RL Tr mrg. WH mrg.; Mk. 
x. 25 [Rec.* εἰσελθεῖν] ; Lk. xi. 24; xviii. 25 L Trmrg.; 
Jn. iv. 4; 1 Co. x.1; διὰ μέσου αὐτῶν, through the midst 
of a crowd, Lk. iv. 30; Jo. viii. 59 Rec.; [διὰ μέσου (1, T 
Tr WH 6. μέσον, see διά, B. I.) Σαμαρείας, Lk. xvii. 11]; 
δι’ ὑμῶν, i. 6. διὰ τῆς χώρας ὑμῶν, 2 Co. i. 16 (where Lchm. 
txt. ἀπελθεῖν) ; [διὰ πάντων sc. τῶν ἁγίων (see πᾶς, II. 1), 
Acts ix. 32]. Ὁ. with ace. to travel the road which leads 
through a place, go, pass, travel through a region: Lk. 
xix. 1; Acts xii. 10; xiii. 6; xiv. 24; xv. 3, 41; xvi. 6; 
XVii. 23 (ra σεβάσματα) ; xviii. 23; xix. 1,21; xx. 2; 1Co. 
xvi. 5; Heb. iv. 14; of a thing: τὴν ψυχὴν διελεύσεται 
ῥομφαία, penetrate, pierce, Lk. ii. 35, (of a spear, dart, 
with gen. Hom. II. 20, 263; 23, 876). ο. absolutely : 
ἐκείνης sc. ὁδοῦ (δι᾿ before ἐκείνης in Rec. is spurious) ἤμελ- 
he διέρχεσθαι, for he was to pass that way, Lk. xix. 4. 
ἃ. with specification of the goal or limit, so that the pre} 
fix διά makes reference to the intervening space to be 
passed through or gone over: ἐνθάδε, Jn. iv. 15 T WH. 
Tr mrg.; [εἰς τὴν ᾿Αχαίαν, Acts xviii. 27]; εἰς τὸ πέραν, 
to go, cross, over to the farther shore, Mk. iv. 35; Lk. 
Vill. 22; ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους, passed 
through unto all men, so that no one could escape its 
power, Ro. v. 12; ἕως τινός, go even unto, ete. Lk. ii. 15; 
Acts ix. 38; xi. 19, 22 RG[W. 609 (566)]. 2. where 
διά answers to the Latin dis [cf. διά, C.]; to go to differ- 
ent places (2 Chr. xvii. 9; Am. vi. 2): Acts viii. 4, 40; 
[x. 88]; διελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Πέργης having departed from 
Perga sc. to various places, Acts xiii. 14 [al. refer this 
to 1, understanding διελθόντες of passing through the ex- 


διερωτάω 


tent of country]; ἐν οἷς διῆλθον among whom i.e. in 
whose country J went about, or visited different places, 
Acts xx. 253; διήρχοντο κατὰ τὰς κώμας they went about 
in various directions from one village to another, Lk. ix. 
6; of a report, to spread, go abroad: διέρχεται ὁ λόγος, 
Lk. v. 15; Thue. 6, 46; Xen. an. 1, 4, 7. [Sy¥N. see 
€pxopat. |* 

δι-ερωτάω: 1 aor. ptep. διερωτήσας ; [0 ask through (i. 6. 
ask many, one after another): ri, to find out by asking, 
to inquire out, Acts x. 17. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., 
Dio Cass. 43, 10; 48, 8.) ΟἿ, Win. De verb. comp. ete. 
Pt.-v. p. 15." 

διετής, -és, (Sis and ἔτος), [fr. Hdt. down], of two years, 
two years old: ἀπὸ διετοῦς sc. παιδός, Mt. ii. 16, ef. Fritzsche 
ad loe.; [others take διετοῦς here as neut.; see Meyer ].* 

διετία, -as, 7, (from διετής, cf. τριετία, τετραετία), the 
space of two years: Acts xxiv. 27; xxviii. 30. (Philo 
in Flace. § 16; [Graec. Ven. Gen. xli. 1; xlv. 5].)* 

δι-ηγέομαι, -οὔμαι, [impvy. 2 pers. sing. διηγοῦ, ptep. διη- 
youpevos]; fut. διηγήσομαι; 1 aor. διηγησάμην ; to lead or 
carry a narration through to the end, (cf. the fig. use of 
Germ. durchfiihren) ; set forth, recount, relate in full: 
absol. Heb. xi. 82; ri, describe, Acts viii. 33 (see γενεά, 
3); τινί foll. by indir. dise., πῶς ete., Mk. v. 16; Acts ix. 
27; xii. 17 [here T om. Tr br. the dat.]; foll. by ἃ εἶδον, 
Mk. ix. 9; ὅσα ἐποίησε or ἐποίησαν, Lk. viii. 39; ix, 10. 
(Arstph., Thue., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. often for 750.) 
[Comp. : ἐκ-διηγέομαι.} * 

δι-ήγησις, -ews, 7, (διηγέομαι), a narration, narrative : 
Lk. i. 1; used of the Gospel narratives also in Euseb. 
h. e. 3, 24, 7; 3,39, 12; ef. Grimmin the Jahrbb. f. deutsche 
Theol. 1871, p. 36. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sir. vi. 35 
(34); ix. 15, ete.; 2 Mace. ii. 32; vi. 17.) * 

δι-ηνεκής, -ἐς, (fr. διήνεγκα, διαφέρω, as the simple 
nvexns fr. ἤνεγκα, φέρω), fr. Hom. down, continuous: 
εἰς τὸ διηνεκές, continually, Heb. vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 14, (dr 
κτάτωρ ἐς τὸ διηνεκὲς ἡρέθη, App. b. c. 1, 4).* 

διθάλασσος, -ov, (Sis and θάλασσαν ; 1. resembling 
[or forming] two seas: thus of the Euxine Sea, Strab. 2, 
5, 22; Dion. Per. 156. 2. lying between two seas, i.e. 
washed by the sea on both sides (Dio Chrys. 5 p. 83): 
τόπος διθάλασσος, an isthmus or tongue of land, the ex- 
tremity of which is covered by the waves, Acts xxvii. 
41; al. understand here a projecting reef or bar against 
which the waves dash on both sides; in opposition cf. 
Meyer ad loc. (In Clem. hom. p. 20, ed. Dressel [Ep. 
Petr. ad Jacob. § 14], men ἀλόγιστοι x. ἐνδοιάζοντες περὶ 
τῶν τῆς ἀληθείας ἐπαγγελμάτων are allegorically styled 
τόποι διθάλασσοι δὲ καὶ θηριώδεις.) * 

δι-ἱκνέομαι [LL WH div. (see I, +) ], τοῦμαι ; to go through, 
penetrate, pierce: Heb. iv. 12. (Ex. xxvi. 28; Thuc., 
Theophr., Plut., al.; in Homer transitively, to go through 
in narrating.)* 

διΐστημι: 1 aor. διέστησα;; 2 aor. διέστην ; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to place separately, put asunder, disjoin; in the 
mid. [or pass.] and the pf. and 2 aor. act. to stand apart, 
to part, depart: βραχὺ δὲ διαστήσαντες, sc. ἑαυτούς or τὴν 
ναῦν (cf. B. 47 (41)), when they had gone a little distance 


148 


δίκαιος 


viz. from the place before mentioned, i. 6. having gone 
a little farther, Acts xxvii. 28; of time: διαστάσης ὥρας 
μιᾶς one hour having intervened, Lk. xxii. 59; διέστη 
ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν parted, withdrew from them, Lk. xxiv. 51.* 

δι-᾿σχυρίζομαι [12 WH ducy. (see I,¢) }: imp. δσχυριζό- 
μην; 1. to lean upon. 2. to affirm stoully, assert 
confidently: Lk. xxii. 59; Acts xii. 15. (Lys., Isae., 
Plat., Dem., Joseph. antt. 2, 6,4; Ael. hist. an. 7, 18; 
Dio Cass. 57, 23; al.) * 

[δικάζω ; 1 aor. pass. ἐδικάσθην ; fr. Ilom. down; to 
Judge, pass judgment: absol. Lk. vi. 37 Tr mre. (al. κα- 
ταδικ.)."} 

δικαιοκρισία, -ας, ἡ, righteous judgment: Ro. ii. 5. (an 
uncert. trans. in Hos. vi. 5 [where Sept. κρίμα]; ‘Test. 
xii. patr. [test. Levi § 3] p. 547, and [8 15] p. 581, ed. 
Fabric. ; Justin. Mart. resp. de resurrect. xi. (15) 28 p. 
360 ed. tert. Otto; [Hippol. p. 801 a.ed. Migne]; Basil 
iii. p. 476 ἃ. ed. Garn. or p. 694 ed. Par. alt. 1839. [Cf. 
W. 25; 99 (94)]-)* 

δίκαιος, -aia, -αιον, (fr. δίκη right), [fr. Hom. down], 
prop. the Hebr. pas, observant of ἡ δίκη, righteous, ob- 
serving divine and human laws; one who is such as he 
ought to be; (Germ. rechtbeschaffen; in the earlier lan- 
euage, whence appropriated by Luther, gerecht in a 
broad sense; in Grk. writ. used even of physical things, 
as ἵππος, Xen. mem. 4, 4,5; γήδιον δικαιότατον, most fer- 
tile, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 38; [ἅρμα δίκαιον, ib. 2, 2, 26]); al 
in a wide sense, upright, righteous, virtuous, keeping the 
commands of God; a. univ.: Mt. i. 19 (the meaning is, 
it was not consistent with his uprightness to expose his 
betrothed to public reproach); Mt. x. 41; xiii. 43, 49; 
xxiii. 28; xxv. 37,46; Lk. i. 6,17; xiv. 145 xviii. 9; xx. 
20; Ro. v. 7 [ef. W. 117 (111)]; 1 Tim.i. 9; Jas. v. 6, 
16; 1 Pet. 111. 12; 1 Jn. iii. 7, [10 Lehm.]; Rev. xxii. 
11; opp. to ἁμαρτωλοὶ καὶ ἀσεβεῖς, 1 Pet. iv. 18; δίκαιοι 
καὶ ἄδικοι, Mt. v.45; Acts xxiv. 15; used of O. 'T. char- 
acters noted for piety and probity: Mt. xiii. 17; [xxiii. 
29]; Heb. xii. 23; thus of Abel, Mt. xxiii. 35; Heb. xi. 
4; of Lot, 2 Pet. ii. 7 sq. (Sap. x. 4 sq.) ; of those who 
seem to themselves to be righteous, who pride them- 
selves on their virtues, whether real or imaginary: Mt. 
ix. 13; Mk. ii.17; Lk. v. 32; xv. 7, (Eccl. vii. 17 (16)). 
Joined with εὐλαβής, Lk. ii. 25 (ἤθη εὐλαβῆ κ. δίκαια, τὸ 
δίκαιον x. εὐλαβές, Plat. polit. p. 311 a. b.); with ἅγιος, 
Mk. vi. 20; with ἀγαθός, Lk. xxiii. 50; with φοβούμενος τὸν 
θεόν, Acts x. 22; ἔργα δίκαια, opp. to πονηρά, 1 Jn. ili, 12. 
Neut. τὸ δίκαιον, that which regard for duty demands, what 
is right: 2 Pet.i. 13; plur. Phil. iv. 8; δίκαιόν ἐστι, Eph. 
vi. 1; Phil. i. 7; with the addition of ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, God 
being judge, Actsiv. 19. b. the negative idea predomi- 
nating: innocent, fauliless, guiltless, (for 50), Prov. i. 11; 
Job ix. 23, ete.) ; thus used of Christ in the speech of 
Gentiles: Mt. xxvii. 19, 24 RG Lbr. Tr br. WH mrg. ; 
Lk. xxiii. 47; αἷμα δίκαιον (Prov. vi. 17; Joel iii. 19 
(24); Jon. i. 14), Mt. xxiii. 35; [xxvii. 4 Tr mrg. WII 
txt.]; ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία x. δικαία (having no fellowship 
with sin [al. al., see the Comm. ad loc.]) x. ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 
12. 6. preéminently, of him whose way of thinking, 


δικαιοσύνη 


feeling, and acting is wholly conformed to the will of 
God, and who therefore needs no rectification in heart or 
life ; in this sense Christ alone can be called δίκαιος : Acts 
vii. 52; xxii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 18; 1 Jn. 11. 1; ἅγιος κ- δίκαιος, 
Acts iii. 14; among the rest of mankind it is rightly de- 
nied that one δίκαιος can be found, Ro. iii. 10 (Keel. vii. 
21 (20) ἄνθρωπος οὐκ ἔστι δίκαιος ἐν τῇ yi), ὃς ποιήσει ἀγαθὸν 
καὶ οὐχ ἁμαρτήσεται). of God: holy, Ro. iii. 26 (where 
it is to be closely rendered just or righteous, on account 
of the following καὶ τὸν δικαιοῦντα and the justifier or who 
pronounces righteous, but the substantial meaning is 
holy, that quality by virtue of which he hates and pun- 
ishes sin); 1 Jn. ii. 29. 
God, acceptable to God, (Germ. gottwohlgefillig): Ro. v. 
19; with the addition ἐκ πίστεως, acceptable to God by 
faith [W. 136 (129)]: Ro. i. 17; Gal. iii. 11; Heb. x. 38; 
Six. mapa τῷ θεῷ, Ro. ii. 13. 2. In 2 narrower sense, 
rendering to each his due; and that ina judicial sense, pass- 
ing just judgment on others, whether expressed in words or 
shown by the manner of dealing with them: Tit. i. 8; 
so of God recompensing men impartially according to 
their deeds, Rev. xvi. 5; in the same sense also in Jn. 
xvii. 25 (who does not award the same fate to the loving 
and faithful disciples of Christ and to ‘the world’); 1 
Jn. i. 9 (who executes the laws of his government, and 
therefore also the law concerning the pardon of sins) ; 
ὁ δίκαιος κριτής, of Christ, 2 Tim. iv. 8; κρίσις δικαία, Jn. 
v. 30; vii. 24; 2 Th. i. 5; plur., Rev. xvi. 7; xix. 2; ai 
ὁδοὶ τ. θεοῦ δίκαιαι x. ἀληθιναί, Rey. xv. 3; neut. τὸ δίκαιον, 
what is due to others, Col. iv. 1; what is agreeable to 
justice and law, Lk. xii. 57; δίκαιον se. ἐστίν, it is agreeable 
to justice, 2 Th. i. 6; accordant with deserts, Mt. xx. 4, 
and 7 Ree. [See reff. 5. ν. δικαιόω, fin. ; cf. ἀγαθός, fin.] * 

δικαιοσύνη, -ης, 7), (δίκαιος) ; most frequently in Sept. 
for pr and ΠΡῚΝ, rarely for 10m]; the virtue or quality 
or state of one who is δίκαιος; 1. in the broad sense, 
the state of him who is such as he ought to be, righteousness 
(Germ. Rechtbeschaffenheit) ; the condition acceptable to 
God (Germ. Gottwohlgefdlligkeit); a. univ.: λόγος τῆς 
δικαιοσύνης (like λόγος τῆς καταλλαγῆς; A. τοῦ σταυροῦ), 
the doctrine concerning the way in which man may at- 
tain to a state approved of God, Heb. v. 13; βασιλεὺς 
δικαιοσύνης, the king who himself has the approbation of 
God, and who renders his subjects acceptable to God, 
Heb. vii. 2; οἵ. Bleek ad loc. b. integrity, virtue, purity 
of life, uprightness, correctness in thinking, feeling, and 
acting: Mt. iii. 15; v. 6, 10,20; vii 1 GL Τ ΤΥ WH; Acts 
xiii. 10; xxiv. 25; Ro. vi. 13, 16, 18-20 (opp. to ἁμαρτία, 
ἀνομία, and ἀκαθαρσία) ; Ro. viii. 10 (opp. to ἁμαρτία) ; 
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [see e.]) ; 2 Co. vi. 7, 14 (opp. to ἀνομία, as in 
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24); 2 Co. xi. 15; Eph. v. 9; vi. 14; Phil. 
1.11; 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 22; iii. 16; iv. 8; Tit. iii. 5; 
Heb. i. 9; xii. 11; Jas. iii. 18; 1 Pet. iii. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 5, 
21; iii. 13, and very often in the O. T. ; ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης, 
walking in the way of righteousness i. q. an upright, 
righteous, man, Mt. xxi. 32; τοῦ θεοῦ, the righteousness 
which God demands, Mt. vi. 33; Jas. i. 20; of righteous- 
ness which manifests itself in beneficence : 2 Co. ix. 9 sq. 


149 


d. contextually, approved of 


΄ 
δικαιοσ vl?) 


(cf. Tob. xiv. 11; Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1151; so 
Chald. 937%, Dan. iv. 24, andin the Talmud and rabbin. 
writ. [Bustorf. col. 1891 (p. 941 ed. Fischer) ; cf.W. 527}; 
where δικ. καὶ ὁσιότης are connected, — Lk. i. 75; Eph. 
iv. 24, (Sap. ix. 3; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 4 and occasion- 
ally in prof. writ.),—the former denotes right conduct 
towards men, the latter piety towards God (ef. Plat. 
Gorg. p. 507 b.; Grimm on Sap. p. 181 sq.; [ef. Trench 
§ Ixxxviii. p. 328 sq.; for additional exx. see Wetst. on 
Eph. 1. ¢.; ef. ὅσιος}; εὐσέβεια x. δικαιοσύνη, Diod. 1, 2) ; 
ποιεῖν τὴν δικαιοσ. to do righteousness, to live uprightly : 
1 Jn. 11. 29; iii. 7; iii. 10 [not Lehm.]; and in Rey. xxii. 
11 ace. to the text now accepted ; in like manner ἐργάζε- 
σθαι δικαιοσύνην, Acts x. 35; Heb. xi. 33; ζῆν τῇ δικαιο- 
σύνῃ, to live, devote the life, to righteousness, 1 Pet. ii. 24; 
πληροῦν πᾶσαν δικαιοσύνην, to perform completely whatever 
isright, Mt. iii.15. When aflirmed of Christ, δικαιοσύνη 
denotes his perfect moral purity, integrity, sinlessness: 
Jn. xvi. 8, 10; when used of God, his holiness: Ro. iii. 
5, 25 sq. c. in the writings of PAUL ἡ δικαιοσύνη has a 
peculiar meaning, opposed to the views of the Jews and 
Judaizing Christians. To understand this meaning, the 
foll. facts esp. must be kept in view: the Jews as a peo- 
ple, and very many who had become converts from among 
them to Christianity, supposed that they secured the 
favor of God by works conformed to the require- 
ments of the Mosaic law, as though by way of merit; and 
that they would thus attain to eternal salvation. But this 
law demands perfect obedience to all its precepts, 
and threatens condemnation to those who do not render 
such obedience (Gal. iii. 10, 12). Obedience of this 
kind no one has rendered (Ro. iii. 10), neither Jews nor 
Gentiles (Ro. i. 24—ii. 1),—for with the latter the 
natural law of right written on their souls takes the place 
of the Mosaic law (Ro. ii. 14 sq.). On this account Paul 
proclaims the love of God, in that by giving up Christ, 
his Son, to die as an expiatory sacrifice for the sins of 
men he has attested his grace and good-will to mankind, 
so that they can hope for salvation as if they had not 
sinned. But the way to obtain this hope, he teaches, is 
only through faith (see πίστις [esp. 1 Ὁ. and 4.7), by 
which a man appropriates that grace of God revealed 
and pledged in Christ; and this faith is reckoned by 
God to the man as δικαιοσύνη; that is to say, δ. denotes 
the state acceptable to God which becomes a sinner’s posses- 
sion through that faith by which he embraces the grace of 
God offered him in the expiatory death of Jesus Christ 
(see δικαιόω, 3 b.). In this sense ἡ δικαιοσύνη is used 
without an adjunct in Ro. iv. 5 sq. 11; v.17, 21; ix. 30 sq.; 
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [see b.]) ; 1 Co. i. 30; Gal. v. 5; δικαιοσύνη 
θεοῦ, ἡ τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιοσύνη, the righteousness which God 
ascribes, what God declares to be righteousness [W. 186 
(175)], Ro. i. 17; iii. 21; x. 3; by a pregnant use, equiv. 
to that divine arrangement by which God leads men to a 
state acceptable to him, Ro. x. 4; as abstract for con- 
crete, equiv. to those whom God accounts righteous, 2 
Co. v. 215 dix. θεοῦ διὰ πίστεως, Ro. iii. 22; ἡ δικ. τῆς 
πίστεως, Which is acquired by faith, or seen in faith, Ro. 


δικαιόω 


iv. 11, 18; ἡ ἐκ θεοῦ δικαιοσ. which comes from God, i. 6. 
is adjudged, imputed, Phil. iii. 9 (where the addition ἐπὶ 
τῇ πίστει depends on ἔχων, having . . . founded upon faith 
[ef. W. 137 (180); 392 (367); yet cf. Ellic. ad loc.]) ; 
ἡ ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσ. which comes from faith, Ro. ix. 30; 
x. 6; ἡ διὰ πίστεως Χριστοῦ, Phil. iii. 9; ἡ κατὰ πίστιν δι- 
καιοσ. according to, appropriate to, faith, Heb. xi. 7 (but 
it should be kept in mind that the conception of ‘ faith’ 
in the Ep. to the Heb. is broader than in Paul’s writings 
{ef. 6. σα. Kurtz ad loc.]); Christ is called δικαιοσύνη, as 
being the one without whom there is no righteousness, 
as the author of righteousness, 1 Co. i. 30; εἰς δικαιοσύνην, 
unto righteousness as the result, to obtain righteousness, 
Ro. x. 4, 10; ἡ πίστις λογίζεταί τινι εἰς δικαιοσύνην faith 
is reckoned to one for righteousness, i. 6. is so taken into 
account, that righteousness is ascribed to it or recognized 
in it: Ro. iv. 3, 6,9, 22; Gal. iii. 6; Jas. ii. 23; ἡ διακονία 
τῆς δικαιοσ. (see διακονία, 2 b.), 2 Co. iii. 9. Opposed to 
this δικαιοσύνη arising from faith is ἡ ἐκ νόμου dSixaoo., a 
state acceptable to God which is supposed to result from 
obedience to the law, Ro. x. 5 sq. ; ἡ dix. ἐν νόμῳ relying on 
the law, i.e. on imaginary obedience to it, Phil. iii. 6; ἡ 
ἰδία δικαιοσ. and ἡ ἐμὴ δικ.» such as one supposes that he 
has acquired for himself by his own works, Ro. x. 3; 
Phil. iii. 9, cf. Gal. ii. 21; iii. 21. 2. in a closer sense, 
justice, or the virtue which gives each one his due; it is said 
to belong to God and Christ, as bestowing ἰσότιμον πίστιν 
upon all Christians impartially, 2 Pet. i.1; of judicial 
justice, Ro. ix. 28 RGTrmrg. in br.; κρίνειν ἐν δικαιο- 
σύνῃ, Acts xvii. 31; Rey. xix. 11. [See reff. s. v. δικαιόω, 
fin.]* 

δικαιόω, -d ; fut. δικαιώσω ; 1 aor. ἐδικαίωσα; Pass., [pres. 
δικαιοῦμαι] : pf. δεδικαίωμαι ; 1 aor. ἐδικαιώθην ; fut. δικαιω- 
θήσομαι; (δίκαιος); Sept. for pay and ΟΣ; 1. 
prop. (ace. to the analogy of other verbs ending in da, as 
τυφλόω. δουλόω) to make δίκαιος ; to render righteous or 
such as he ought to be; (Vulg. justifico) ; but this mean- 
ing is extremely rare, if not altogether doubtful; ἐδικαί- 
@oa τὴν καρδίαν μου stands for 237 ‘yt in Ps. Lxxii. 
(Ixxiii.) 13 (unless 7 have shown my heart to be upright 
be preferred as the rendering of the Greek there). 2. 
τινά, fo show, exhibit, evince, one to be righteous, such 
as he is and wishes himself to be considered (Ezek. xvi. 
51 sq.3; τὴν Ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, Jer. iii. 11, and, probably, d:- 
καιοῦν δίκαιον, Is. lili. 11): ἡ σοφία ἐδικαιώθη ἀπὸ τῶν 
τέκνων αὐτῆς, the wisdom taught and exemplified by John 
the Baptist, and by Jesus, gained from its disciples (i. e. 
from their life, character, and deeds) the benefit of be- 
ing shown to be righteous, i. 6. true and divine [οἵ. B. 
322 (277); al. interpret, was acknowledged to be right- 
eous on the part of (nearly i. q. by) her children; ef. B. 
325 (280); see ἀπό, 11. 2 d. bb.], Lk. vii. 35; Mt. xi. 19 
{here T Tr txt. WH read ἔργων i. 6. by her works]; 
Pass., of Christ: ἐδικαιώθη ἐν πνεύματι, evinced to be 
righteous as to his spiritual (divine [(?) cf. 6. g. Ellic. ad 
loc., or Mey. on Ro. i. 47) nature, 1 Tim. iii. 16; of God: 
ὅπως δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, Ro. iii. 4 fr. Ps. |. (li.) 6 
(αύριος μόνος δικαιωθήσεται, Sir. xviii. 2); pass. used re- 


150 


δικαιόω 


flexively, to show one’s self righteous : of men, Rev. xxii. 
11 Rec.; (τί δικαιωθῶμεν ; Gen. xliv. 16). 3. τινά, to 
declare, pronounce, one to be just, righteous, or such 
as he ought to be, (cf. ὁμοιόω to declare to be like, liken i. e. 
compare; ὁσιόω, Sap. vi. 11; ἀξιόω, which never means 
to make worthy, but to judge worthy, to declare worthy, 
to treat as worthy; see also κοινόω, 2 b.); a. with the 
negative idea predominant, to declare guiltless one 
accused or who may be accused, acquit of a charge or 
reproach, (Deut. xxv. 1; Sir. xiii. 22 (21), ete.; an un- 
just judge is said δικαιοῦν τὸν ἀσεβὴ in Ex. xxiii. 7; Is. v. 
23): ἑαυτόν, Lk. x. 29; pass. οὐ δεδικαίωμαι, sc. with God, 
1 Co. iv. 4; pregnantly with ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν added, to 
be declared innocent and therefore to be absolved from 
the charge of sins [ef. B. 322 (277)], Acts xiii. 38 (39) 
(so ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας, Sir. xxvi. 29; simply, to be absolved, se. 
from the payment of a vow, Sir. xviii. 22 (21)); hence 
figuratively, by a usage not met with elsewhere, to be freed, 
ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, from its dominion, Ro. vi. 7, where cf. 
Fritzsche or [(less fully) Meyer]. b. with the posi- 
tive idea predominant, fo judge, declare, pronounce, 
righteous and therefore acceptable, (God is said δικαιοῦν 
δίκαιον, 1 Κα. viii. 32): ἑαυτόν, Lk. xvi. 15; ἐδικαίωσαν τὸν 
θεόν declared God to be righteous, i.e. by receiving the 
baptism declared that it had been prescribed by God 
rightly, Lk. vii. 29; pass. by God, Ro. ii. 13; ἐξ ἔργων 
ἐδικαιώθη, got his reputation for righteousness (sc. with 
his countrymen [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]) by 
works, Ro. iv. 2; ἐκ τῶν λόγων, by thy words, in contrast 
with καταδικάζεσθαι, sc. by God, Mt. xii. 37. Especially 
is it so used, in the technical phraseology of Paul, re- 
specting God who judges and declares such men as put 
faith in Christ to be righteous and acceptable to him, 
and accordingly fit to receive the pardon of their sins 
and eternal life (see δικαιοσύνη. 1 ¢.): thus absolutely, 
δικαιοῦν twa, Ro. iii. 26; iv. 5; viii. 30, 33 (se. ἡμᾶς, opp. 
to ἐγκαλεῖν) ; with the addition of ἐκ (in consequence of) 
πίστεως, Ro. iii. 30; Gal. iii. 8; of διὰ τῆς πίστεως, Ro. 
iii. 30; men are said δικαιοῦσθαι, δικαιωθῆναι, τῇ χάριτι 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Tit. iii. 7; δωρεὰν τῇ χάρ. τ. θεοῦ, Ro. iii. 24; 
πίστει, Ro. iii. 28; ἐκ πίστεως, by means of faith, Ro. v. 
1; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 24; ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ (as the 
meritorious cause of their acceptance, as the old 
theologians say, faith being the apprehending or 
subjective cause), Ro. v. 9; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου 
Ἰησοῦ καὶ ἐν τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμῶν, by confessing the 
name of the Lord (which implies faith in him, Ro. x. 10, 
cf. 2 Co. iv. 13), and by the Spirit of God (which has 
awakened faith in the soul), 1 Co. vi. 11; ἐν Χριστῷ 
through Christ, Gal. ii. 17; Acts xiii. 39; it is vehement- 
ly denied by Paul, that a man δικαιοῦται ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, 
Gal. ii. 16,—with the addition ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ, i. 6. of 
God, Ro. iii. 20, ef. vs. 28; iv. 2, (see δικαιοσύνη, 1 6. sub 
fin.) ; a statement which is affirmed by James in ii. 21, 
24 sq. (though he says simply ἐξ ἔργων δικαιοῦται, signifi- 
cantly omitting νόμου) ; to the same purport Paul de- 
nies that a man δικαιοῦται ἐν νόμῳ. in obeying the law, or 
by keeping it, Gal. v. 4; with the addition παρὰ τῷ θεῷ, 


δικαίωμα 


in the sight of God, Gal. iii. 11. Lk. xviii. 14 teaches 
that a man δικαιοῦται by deep sorrow for his sins, which 
so humbles him that he hopes for salvation only from 
divine grace. 

The Pauline conceptions of δίκαιος, δικαιοσύνη, δικαιόω, 
are elucidated esp. by Winzer, De vocabulis δίκαιος, etc., 
in Ep. ad Rom., Lips. 1831; Usteri, Paulin. Lehrbegriff 
p- 86 sq. ed. 4 ete.; Neander, Gesch. der Pflanzung u.s.w. 
ii. p. 567 sqq. et passim, ed. 3, [Robinson’s trans. of ed. 
4, pp. 382 sqq-, 417 sqq.]; Baur, Paulus p. 572 sqq. 
[(Zeller’s) ed. 2, vol. ii. 145-183; Eng. trans. vol. ii. p. 
134 sqq.]; Rauwenhoff, Disqvisitio ete., Lugd. Bat. 1852; 
Lipsius, Die paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, Lpz. 1853; 
Schmid, Bibl. Theologie des N. T. p. 562 sqq. ed. 2, [p. 
558 sqq. ed. 4; Eng. trans. p. 495 sq.]; Ernesti, Vom 
Ursprung der Siinde u.s.w. i. p. 152 sqq. ; Messner, Lehre 
der Apostel, p. 256 sqq., [summary by S. R. Asbury in 
Bib. Sacr. for 1870, p. 140 sq.]; Jul. Kostlin in the 
Jahrbb. fiir deutsche Theol. 1856 fase. 1 p. 85 sqq.-; 
Wieseler, Commentar ii. d. Br. an d. Galater, p. 176 sqq. 
[see in Schaff’s Lange’s Rom. p. 122 sq.]; Aahnis, Lu- 
therische Dogmatik, Bd. i. p. 592 sqq.; Philippi, Dog- 
matik, v. 1 p. 208 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. § 65; 
Ritschl, Die christl. Lehre v. d. Versohnung ἃ. Rechtf. 
ii. 318 sqq.; P/fleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 172 sqq. [Eng. 
trans. vol. i. p. 171 sqq.; but esp. Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit. 
Expos. of the Third Chap. of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 
163-198. On the patristic usage see Reithmayr, Gala- 
terbrief, p. 177 sq.; Cremer, Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 
285; Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.]. 

Tn classic Grk. δικαιόω (Ionic δικαιέω, Η αἴ.) is ul 
i. q. δίκαιον νομίζω, to deem right or fair: ri, often foll. 
by the inf.; to choose what is right and fair, hence univ. 
to choose, desire, decide: Hdt., Soph., Thuc., al. 25 
with ace. of person, τὸ δίκαιον ποιῶ τινα to do one justice, 
in a bad sense, viz. to condemn, punish, one: Hdt., Thuc., 
Plat., al.; hence δικαιοῦσθαι, to have justice done one’s 
self, to suffer justice, be treated rightly, opp. to ἀδικεῖσθαι, 
Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 9, 11 p. 1136*, 18 sqq. (In like 
manner the German rechtfertigen in its early forensic 
use bore a bad sense viz. to try judicially (so for ἀνακρί- 
νειν, Acts xii. 19 Luther), then condemn; execute judg- 
ment, esp. put to death.) * 

δικαίωμα, -ros, τό, (fr. δικαιόω ; ὃ δεδικαίωται or τὸ δεδι- 
katwpevov), Sept. very often for pn, apn, and vawn; for 
msn, Deut. xxx. 16; 1 K. ii. 3; plur. occasionally for 
DNpd; 1. that which has ξέρη deemed right so as to 
have the force of law; a. what has been established and 
ordained by law, an ordinance: univ. of an appointment 
of God having the force of law, Ro. i. 32; plur. used of 
the divine precepts of the Mosaic law: τοῦ κυρίου, Lk. 
i. 6; τοῦ νόμου, Ro. ii. 26; τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου, collec- 
tively, of the (moral) precepts of the same law, Ro. viii. 
4; δικαιώματα λατρείας, precepts concerning the public 
worship of God, Heb. ix. 1; δικαιώματα σαρκός, laws re- 
specting bodily purity [(?) ef. vii. 16], ibid. vs. 10. b. 
a judicial decision, sentence; of God —either the favor- 
able judgment by which he acquits men and declares 


151 


δίλογος 


them acceptable to him, Ro. v. 16; or unfavorable: sen- 
tence of condemnation, Rev. xv. 4, (punishment, Plat. lege. 
9,864e.). 2. arighteous act or deed: τὰ δικαιώματα τῶν 
ἁγίων, Rev. xix. 8 (τῶν πατέρων, Bar. ii. 19) ; ἑνὸς δικαί- 
aya, the righteous act of one (Christ) in his giving him- 
self up to death, opp. to the first sin of Adam, Ro. vy. 18, 
(Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 7, 7 p. 1185", 12 sq. καλεῖται δὲ 
μᾶλλον δικαιοπράγημα τὸ κοινόν, δικαίωμα δὲ τὸ ἐπανόρθωμα 
τοῦ ἀδικήματος, [ οἷ. rhet. 1,13, 1 and Cope’s note on 1, 3, 
91). (CE. reff. in δικαιόω.] * 

δικαίως, adv., [fr. Hom. down]; 1. justly, agreeably 
to right: κρίνειν (see δίκαιος, 2), 1 Pet. ii. 23; to suffer, 
Lk. xxiii. 41. 2. properly, as is right: 1 Co. xv. 34. 
3. Ue agreeably to the law of rectitude: 1 Th. ii. 
10 (ὁσίως καὶ δικαίως, as Plat. rep. 1 p. 331 a. [cf. τος 
§ Ixxxviii. p. 8281); Tit. ii. 12.* 

δικαίωσις, -ews, 7, (fr. δικαιόω. equiv. to τὸ δικαιοῦν, the 
act τοῦ δικαιοῦντος ; in extra-bibl. writ. fr. Thuc. on, the 
justification or defence of a cause; sentence of condem- 
nation; judgment in reference to what is just), the act 
of God’s declaring men free from guilt and acceptable to 
him; adjudging to be righteous, [A. V. justification]: διὰ 
τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν, because God wished to declare us 
righteous, Ro. iv. 25; εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς, unto acquittal, 
which brings with it the bestowment of life, Ro. v. 18. 
[Οἵ reff. in δικαιόω.} * 

δικαστής, -ov, ὁ, (δικάζω), a judge, arbitrator, umpire: 
Lk. xii. 14 [here crit. texts κριτήν]; Acts vii. 27 (fr. Ex. 
ii. 14); Acts vii. 35. (Sept. for uDv; in Grk. writ. fr. 
[Aeschyl. and] Hat. on.) * 

[Syn. δικαστής, κριτής: acc. to etymol. and classic usage 
δ. is the more dignified and official term; «. gives prominence 
to the mental process, whether the ‘judge’ be a magistrate 
or not. Schmidt ch. 18, 6.] 

δίκη, -ης, 7, [allied with δείκνυμι, Curtius § 14], fr. 
Hom. down; 1. custom, usage, [ef. Schmidt ch. 18, 
4 cf.3]. 2. right, justice. 3. asuitatlaw. 4.4 
judicial hearing, judicial decision, esp. a sentence of con- 
demnation; so in Acts xxv. 15 [L T Tr WH καταδίκην]. 
5. execution of the sentence, punishment, (Sap. xviii. 11; 
2 Mace. viii. 11): δίκην ὑπέχειν, Jude 7; δίκην τίνειν 
(Soph. El. 298; Aj. 113; Eur. Or. 7), to suffer punish- 
ment, 2 Th. i. 9. 6. the goddess Justice, avenging 
justice: Acts xxviii. 4, as in Grk. writ. often fr. Hes. 
theog. 902 on; (of the avenging justice of God, personi- 
fied, Sap. i. 8, ete.; ef. Grimm ad loc. and Com. on 4 
Mace. p. 318, [he cites 4 Mace. iv. 13, 21}; viii. 13, 21; 
ix. 9; xi. 3; xii. 12; xviii. 22; Philo adv. Flacc. ὃ 18; 
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 8]).* 

δίκτυον, -ov, τό, [perhaps fr. AIKEIN to cast, cf. Etym. 
Maen. col. 275, 21], a net: Mt. iv. 20 sq.; Mk. i. 18 sq. ; 
Lk. ν. 2, 4-6; Jn. xxi. 6, 8,11. (Hom. et sqq.) ἢ" 

[Syn. δίκτυον, ἀμφίβληστρον, caynv7: δ. seems to be 
the general name for nets of all kinds; whereas aug. and cay. 
designate specifically nets for fishing: — the former a cast- 
ing-net, generally pear-shaped ; the latter a seine or drag-net. 
Cf. Trench § lxiv.; B.D. 5. v. Net.] 

δίλογος, -ov, (δίς and λέγω) ; 
twice, repeating: Poll. 2, 118 p. 212 ed. Hemst.; 


1. saying the same thing 
whence 


διό 


διλογεῖν and διλογία, Xen. de re equ. 8, 2. 2. double- 
tongued, double in speech, saying one thing with one person, 
another with another (with intent to deceive): 1 Tim. 
iii. 8.* 

διό, conjunction i. q. d¢ 6, [fr. Thue. and Plato down], 
wherefore, on which account: Mt. xxvii. 8; Lk. i. 35; vil. 
7; Acts x. 29; Ro. i. 24; ii. 1; 1 Co. xii. 3; 2 Co. vi. 17; 
Heb. iii. 7; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. i. 13, and often. [Cf. W. 
445 (414); B. 233 (200); on Paul’s use, see Ellic. on 
Gal. iv. 31.] 

δι-οδεύω : impf. διώδευον; [1 aor. diadevoa) ; 1. to 
pass or travel through: τόπον τινά, Acts xvii. 1; (Sept., 
Polyb., Plut., al.). 2. to travel hither and thither, go 
about: with κατὰ πόλιν καὶ κώμην added, through city 
and village, Lk. viii. 1.* 

Διονύσιος, -ov, ὁ, Dionysius, an Athenian, a member 
of the Areopagus, converted to Christianity by Paul’s 
instrumentality: Acts xvii. 34. [Cf. B.D.s. v.]* 

διό-περ, conjunction, (fr. διό and the enclitie particle 
πέρ [q- v-]), [fr. Thue. down]; on which very account, 
ΓΑ. V. wherefore],: 1 Co. viii. 13 [Treg. διό περ]; x. 14; 
xiv. 13 where L T Tr WH διό." 

διοπετής, -és, (fr. Διός of Zeus, and πέτω for πίπτω ; in 
prof. writ. also διϊπετής), fallen from Zeus, i. e. from 
heaven: τὸ διοπετές, sc. ἄγαλμα (which is expressed in 
Eur. Iph. T. 977; Hdian. 1, 11, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.; ef. W. 
234 (219); 592 (551)]), an image of the Ephesian Ar- 
temis which was supposed to have fallen from heaven, 
Acts xix. 35; [ef. Meyer ad loc.; Farrar, St. Paul, ii. 
13 sq.].* 

διόρθωμα, -τος, τό, (fr. διορθόω to set right); correction, 
amendment, reform: Acts xxiv. 2 (3) LT Tr WH for 
RG κατορθωμάτων. (Hippoer., Aristot., Polyb. 3, 13; 
Plut. Num.17; Diog. Laért. 10,121; [ef. Zob.ad Phryn. 
Ρ. 250 sq.].) * 

δι-όρθωσις, -ews, 7, (fr. διορθόω) ; 1. prop. in a 
physical sense, a making straight, restoring to its natural 
and normal condition something which in some way pro- 
trudes or has got out of line, as (in Hippoer.) broken or 
misshapen limbs. 2. of acts and institutions, refor- 
mation: καιρὸς διορθώσεως a season of reformation, or 
the perfecting of things, referring to the times of the 
Messiah, Heb. ix. 10. (Aristot. Pol. 3, 1, 4 [p. 1275, 
13]; νόμου, de mund. 6 p. 400", 29; [ef. Joseph. c. Ap. 
2, 20, 2]; Polyb. 3, 118, 12 τῶν πολιτευμάτων, Diod. 1, 
75 τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων, Joseph. antt. 2, 4,4; b. j. 1, 20,1; 
al.; [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 250 sq.].)* 

δι-ορύσσω ; Pass., 1 aor. inf. διορυχθῆναι (Mt. xxiv. 43 
T Tr WH; LK. xii. 39 TWH Trmrg.); 2 aor. inf. διο- 
ρυγῆναι, [cf. WH. App. p. 170; fr. Hom. down]; to dig 
through: a house (Xen. symp. 4, 30; Job xxiv. 16 Sept.), 
Mt. xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 39; absol. Mt. vi. 19 sq. [W. 594 
(552); B. 146 (127)]* 

[Atés, see Ais. | 

Διόσ-κουροι (Phrynichus prefers the form Διόσκοροι ; 
in earlier Attic the dual τὼ Διοσκόρω was more usual, cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 235), -ων, oi, (fr. Διός of Zeus, and 
κοῦρος or κόρος boy, as κόρη girl), Dioscuri, the name 


152 


δίστομος 


given to Castor and [(Polydeuces, the Roman) ] Pollux, 
the twin sons of Zeus and Leda, tutelary deities of 
sailors: Acts xxviii. 11 [R. V. The Twin Brothers; ef. 
B.D. s. vy. Castor and Pollux." 

δι-ότι, conjunction, equiv. to διὰ τοῦτο, ὅτι; 1. on 
this account that, because, [ef. W. 445 (415}7: Lk. ii. 7; 
xxi. 28; Acts [xiii. 35, where RG διό]; xvii. 31 Ree.; 
xx. 26 TWH Trmrg.; xxii. 18; 1 Co. xv. 9; Gal. ii. 16 
(LT Tr WH ore); Phil. 11. 26; 1 Th. ii. 8; iv. 6; Heb. 
xi. 5, 23; Jas. iv. 3; 1 Pet. i. 16, 24; ii. 6 [Rec. διὸ καί]. 
2. for (cf. Fritzsche on Ro. i. 19, vol. i. p. 57 sq.; [per 
contra Mey. ad loc.; Ellic. on Gal. ii. 16; (ef. Jebb in 
Vincent and Dickson, Modern Greek ete. ed. 2, App. 
§ 80, 3)]): Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 20 Ree. ; xviii. 10; Ro. i. 19, 
21; iii. 20; viii. 7; (1 Th. ii. 18 L T Tr WH for RG 
διό); [1 Pet. i. 16 Tdf. From Hdt. down.]* 

Διοτρεφής [LL WH -τρέφης ; cf. Chandler §§ 684, 637], 
6, (fr. Διός and τρέφω, nourished by Zeus, or foster-child 
of Zeus), Diotrephes, a Christian man, but proud and 
arrogant: 3 Jn. vs.9sq. [Cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.]* 

διπλόος (-ovs), -dn (-ἢ), -dov (-odv), [fr. Hom. down], 
twofold, double: 1 Tim. ν. 17; Rev. xviii. 6; διπλότερος 
(a compar. found also in Appian. hist. praef. § 10, from 
the positive form διπλός [ B. 27 (24) }) ὑμῶν, twofold more 
than yourselves, Mt. xxiii. 15 [(cf. Just. M. dial. 122)).* 

διπλόω, -@: [1 aor. ἐδίπλωσα]; (διπλόος) ; to double: 
διπλώσατε αὐτῇ [only RG] διπλᾶ [ra δ. T Tr WH br.] 
i.e. return to her double, repay in double measure the 
evils she has brought upon you, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. 
double unto her the double}. (Xen. Hell. 6,5, 19; Plut. 
Cam. 41; Diog. Laért. 6, 22.) * 

δίς, adv., [Curtius § 277; fr. Hom. down], twice: Mk. 
xiv. 30,72; dis τοῦ σαββάτου twice in the week, Lk. xviii. 
12; καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς (see ἅπαξ, c.), Phil. iv. 16; 1 Th. ii. 
18. In the phrase δὶς ἀποθανόντα, Jude 12, δίς is not 
equiv. to completely, absolutely; but the figure is so ad- 
justed to the fact, that men are represented as twice 
dead in a moral sense, first as not having yet been re- 
generated, and secondly as having fallen from a state of 
grace ; see ἀποθνήσκω, 1. 4; [but ef. the various interp. 
as given in (Mey.) Huther or in Schaff’s Lange (Fronm.) 
ad loc. Inthe Baby]. Talm. (Ber. 10 a.) we read, ‘ Thou 
art dead here below, and thou shalt have no part in the 
life to come’ 1." 

Als, an unused nominat. for Ζεύς, gen. Διός, ace. Δία 
(Aiav, Acts xiv. 12 Tdf. ed. 7; see in ἄρρην and B. 14 
(373)), Zeus, Jupiter, the supreme divinity in the belief 
of Greeks and Romans; the father of gods and men: 
Acts xiv. 12sq. (2 Mace. vi. 2.) [Cf. Ζεύς.) ὃ 

δισ-μυριάς, -άδος, ἡ, twice ten thousand, two myriads : 
Rev. ix.16 LT (WH δὲς μυριάδες), for RG δύο μυριάδες." 

διστάζω: 1 aor. ἐδίστασα; (dis); to doubt, waver: Mt. 
xiv. 31; xxviii. 17. (Plat., [Soph.], Aristot., Plut., al.) * 

δίστομος, -ov, (Sis and στόμα), having a double mouth, 
as a river, Polyb. 34, 10, 5; [ὁδοί i. e. branching, Soph. 
Ο. Ο. 9007. As στόμα is used of the edge of a sword and 
of other weapons, so δίστομος has the meaning two-edged : 
used of a sword in Heb. iv. 12; Rey. i. 16; ii. 12, and 


δισχίλιοι 


ace. to Schott in xix. 15; also Judges iii. 16; Prov. v. 4; 
Ps. exlix. 6; Sir. xxi. 3; ξίφος, Eur. Hel. 983." 

δισ-χίλιοι, -at, -a, two thousand: Mk. v. 13. 
Hat. down. ]* 

δι-υλίζω [πὶ ἃ T Tr διῦλ. (see Y, v)]; (ὑλίζω to defecate, 
cleanse from dregs or filth) ; to filter through, strain thor- 
oughly, pour through a filter: τὸν κώνωπα, to rid wine of a 
gnat by filtering, strain out, Mt. xxiii. 24. (Amos vi. 6 
διυλισμένος οἶνος, Artem. oneir. 4, 48 ἔδοξαν διυλίζειν 
πρότερον τὸν οἶνον, Dioscor. 2, 86 διὰ ῥάκους λινοῦ διυλισθέν, 
[et passim; Plut. quaest. conviv. 6,7, 1, 5]; Archyt. ap. 
Stob. floril. i. p. 13, 40 metaph. θεὸς εἰλικρινῆ καὶ διυλι- 
σμέναν ἔχει τὴν aperav.) * 

διχάζω: 1 aor. inf. διχάσαι; (diya) ; to cut into two parts, 
cleave asunder, dissever: Plat. polit. p. 264 d.; metaph. 
διχάζω τινὰ κατά Twos, to set one at variance with [lit. 
against] another: Mt. x. 35. [Cf. Fischer, De vitiis 
lexx. etc. p. 334 sq.]* 

διχοστασία, -as, 7, (διχοστατέω to stand apart), dissen- 
sion, division; plur.: Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. iii. 3 [Ree.]; 
Gal. v. 20. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Solon in Dem. 
p- 423, 4 and Hdt. 5, 75 on; [1 Mace. iii. 29].)* 

διχοτομέω, -d: fut. διχοτομήσω ; (διχοτόμος cutting in 
two) ; to cut into two parts (Ex. xxix. 17): Mt. xxiv. 51; 
Lk. xii. 46, —in these passages many suppose reference 
to be made to that most cruel mode of punishment, in use 
among the Hebrews (1S. xv. 33) and other ancient nations 
(see Win. RWB. s. v. Lebensstrafen; [B. D. s. v. Pun- 
ishments, III. Ὁ. 3; esp. Wetstein on Mt. 1. 9.1), by which 
criminals and captives were cut in two. But in the text 
the words which follow, and which imply that the one 
thus ‘cut asunder’ is still surviving, oppose this interpre- 
tation; so that here the word is more fitly translated cut 
up by scourging, scourge severely, [but see Meyer on Mt. 
1. 6.1. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) * 

διψάω, -d, subjunc. pres. 3 pers. sing. dupa (Jn. vii. 37; 
Ro. xii. 20; often so fr. the Maced. age on for the Attic 
διψῆ, cf. W. § 13, 3 b.; [B. 44 (88)]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
61); fut. διψήσω; 1 aor. ἐδίψησα; (dia thirst); [ν΄ 
Hom. down]; {0 thirst; 1. absolutely, to suffer thirst; 
suffer from thirst: prop., Mt. xxv. 35, 37, 42, 44; In. iv. 
15; xix. 28; Ro. xii. 20; 1 Co. iv. 11; figuratively, those 
are said to thirst who painfully feel their want of, and 
eagerly long for, those things by which the soul is re- 
freshed, supported, strengthened: Jn. iv. 13 sq.; vi. 35; 
vii. 37; Rev. vii. 16; xxi. 6; xxii. 17; (Sir. xxiv. 21 (20); 
li. 24). 2. with an ace. of the thing desired: τὴν δι- 
καιοσύνην, Mt. v. 6, (Ps. lxii. (Ixiii.) 2; in the better Grk. 
writ. with gen.; cf. W. § 30,10 b.; [B. 147 (129) ]; ἐλευθε- 
pias, Plat. rep. 8 p. 562 ο. ; τιμῆς, Plut. Cat. maj. 11; al.; 
ΟἿ 17) -* 

δίψος, -eos (-ous), τό, thirst: 2 Co. xi. 27. 
down, for the older dia. ] * 

δίψυχος, -ov, (Sis and ψυχή), double-minded; a. wa- 
vering, uncertain, doubting: Jas. i. 8, (οἱ δίψυχοι καὶ of 
διστάζοντες περὶ τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ δυνάμεως, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
11, 2; ταλαίπωροί εἰσιν οἱ δίψυχοι, οἱ διστάζοντες τὴν ψυχήν 
[8]. τῇ ψυχῇ, ibid. 23, 3; μὴ γίνου δίψυχος ἐν προσευχῇ 


[From 


[From Thue. 


153 


δόγμα 


σου, εἰ ἔσται ἣ ov, Constt. apostol. 7,11; μὴ γίνου δίψυχος 
ἐν προσευχῇ σου, μακάριος γὰρ 6 μὴ διστάσας, Ignat. ad 
Heron. 7; [cf. reff. in Miiller’s note on Barn. ep. 19,57). 
b. divided in interest se. between God and the world: 
Jas.iv.8. Not found in prof. writ. [ Philo, frag. ii. 663 |.” 

διωγμός, -ov, 6, (διώκω). persecution: Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv. 
17; x. 30; Acts viii. 1; xiii. 50; Ro. viii. 35; plur., 2 Co. 
xii. 10; 2 ΤῊ. 1. 4; 2 Tim. iii.11. [Fr. Aeschyl. down. ]* 

διώκτης, -ov, 6, (διώκω), @ persecutor: 1 Tim. i. 13. 
Not found in prof. writ.* 

διώκω ; impf. ἐδίωκον ; fut. διώξω (Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. 
xxi. 12; Jn. xv. 20; 2S. xxii. 38; Sap. xix. 2; a rarer 
form for the more com. Attic διώξομαι, ef. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. ii. 154; W.84 (80); [B. 53 (46); esp. Veitch s. v.; 
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 377]); 1 aor. ἐδίωξα ; Pass., 
[pres. διώκομαι]; pf. ptep. dediwypevos; 1 fut. διωχθήσομαι; 
(fr. δίω to flee) ; Sept. commonly for 17; 1. 
to run or flee, put to flight, drive away: (τινὰ) ἀπὸ πόλεως 
εἰς πόλιν, Mt. xxiii. 34, cf. x. 23 Grsb. 2. to run swiftly 
in order to catch some person or thing, to run after; absol. 
(Hom. Il. 23, 8344; Soph. El. 738, ete.; διώκειν δρόμῳ, 
Xen. an. 6, 5, 25; ef. 7, 2, 20), to press on: fig. of one 
who in a race runs swiftly to reach the goal, Phil. iii. 12 
(where distinguished fr. καταλαμβάνειν, [cf. Hdt. 9, 58; 
Leian. Hermot. 77]), vs. 14. fo pursue (in a hostile 
manner): τινά, Acts xxvi. 11; Rev. xii. 138. Hence, 
3. in any way whatever to harass, trouble, molest one; 
to persecute, (cf. Lat. persequor, Germ. verfolgen) : Mt. 
v. 10-12, 44; x. 23; Lk. xxi. 12; [xi. 49 WH Tr mrg.]; 
Jn. v. 16; xv. 20; Acts vii. 52; ix. 4 sq.; xxil. 4, 7 sq.; 
XXvi. 14 sq.; Ro. xii. 14; 1 Co. iv. 12; xv. 9; 2 Co. iv. 
9; Gal. i. 13, 23; iv. 29; v. 11; Phil. iii. 6; 2 Tim. ii. 
12; Pass. with a dat. denoting the cause, to be maltreated, 
suffer persecution on account of something, Gal. vi. 12 
[here L mrg. T read διώκονται (al. -κωνται), see WH. App. 
p- 169; on the dat. see W. § 31, 6 c.; B. 186 (161)]. 
4. without the idea of hostility, to run after, follow after : 
some one, Lk. xvii. 23. 5. metaph. with ace. of thing, 
to pursue i. e. to seek afler eagerly, earnestly endeavor to 
acquire: Ro. ix. 30 (distinguished here fr. καταλαμβά- 
vew); 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 22, (in both pass. opp. to 
φεύγειν) ; νόμον δικαιοσύνης, Ro. ix. 31, (Prov. xv. 9; τὸ δέ- 
καιον, Deut. xvi. 20; Sir. xxvii. 8, where distinguished fr. 
καταλαμβάνειν) ; τ. φιλοξενίαν, Ro. xii. 13; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης. 
Ro. xiv. 19 [here Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH mrg. T read δὲ 
ὦκομεν (for the διώκωμεν of al.), see WH. App. p. 169]; τ. 
ἀγάπην, 1 Co. xiv. 1; τὸ ἀγαθόν, 1 Th. v. 15; εἰρήνην, Heb. 
xii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 11 (here joined with ζητεῖν rv) ; times 
without number in Grk. writ. (fr. Hom. Il. 17, 75 διώκειν 
ἀκίχητα On; as τιμάς, ἀρετήν, τὰ καλά, [cf. W. 30.]). 
[Comp.: ék-, κατα-διώκω. | * 

δόγμα, -ros, τό, (fr. δοκέω. and equiv. to τὸ δεδογμένον). 
an opinion, a judgment (Plat., al.), doctrine, decree, ordi- 
nance; 1. of public decrees (as τῆς πόλεως, Plat. lege. 
1 p. 644 d.; of the Roman Senate, [Polyb. 6, 13, 2]; 
Hdian. 7, 10, 8 [5 ed. Bekk.]): of rulers, Lk. ii. 1; Acts 
xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 23 Lchm., (Theodot. in Dan. ii. 13; 111. 
10; iv. 3; vi. 13, ete., — where the Sept. use other words). 


to make 


δογματίζω 


2. of the rules and requirements of the law of Moses, 3 
Mace. i. 3; διατήρησις τῶν ἁγίων δογμάτων, Philo, alleg. 
legge. i. § 16; carrying a suggestion of severity, and of 
threatened punishment, τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασι, 
the law containing precepts in the form of decrees [ A. V. 
the law of commandments contained in ordinances], Eph. 
ii. 15; τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον τοῖς δόγμασι equiv. to τὸ 
τοῖς δόγμασι (dat. of instrument) ὃν καθ᾽ ἡμῶν, the bond 
against us by its decrees, Col. ii. 14; ef. W.§ 31, 10 Note 1, 
[B. 92 (80); on both pass. see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.]. 
3. of certain decrees of the apostles relative to right 
living: Acts xvi. 4. (Of all the precepts of the Chris- 
tian religion: βεβαιωθῆναι ἐν τοῖς δόγμασιν τοῦ κυρίου καὶ 
τῶν ἀποστύλων, Ignat. ad Magnes. 13, 1; of the precepts 
(‘sentences ’ or tenets) of philosophers, in the later prof. 
writ. : Cie. acad. 2, 9, 27 de suis decretis, quae philosophi 
voeant dogmata.) [On the use of the word in general, 
see Bp. Lghtft. as above; (οἴ. Teaching’ ete. 11, 3).]* 

δογματίζω : fo decree, command, enjoin, lay down an or- 
dinance: Diod. 4, 83, ete.; Esth. iii. 9; 2 Mace. x. 8 [ete.]; 
Sept. (not Theodot.) Dan. ii. 13; Pass. [pres. δογματίζο- 
μαι}; ordinances are imposed upon me, I suffer ordinances 
to be imposed upon me: Col. ii. 20 [R. V. do ye subject 
yourselves to ordinances; ef. W. § 39,1 a.; B. 188 (163) ; 
Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ].* 

δοκέω, -ὥ ; impf. ἐδόκουν ; 1 aor. ἔδοξα ; (akin to δέχομαι 
or δέκομαι, whence δόκος an assumption, opinion, [οἵ. Lat. 
decus, decet, dignus; Curtius § 15; cf. his Das Verbum, 
i. pp. 376, 3821}; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to be of opin- 
ion, think, suppose : foll. by ace. with inf., Mk. vi. 49 [RG 
L Tr]; 2 Co. xi. 16; 1 Co. xii. 23 ; with an inf. relating 
to the same subject as that of δοκέω itself, Lk. viii. 18 
(ὃ δοκεῖ ἔχειν) ; xxiv. 37 (ἐδόκουν πνεῦμα θεωρεῖν) ; In. 
v. 39; xvi. 2; Acts xii. 9; xxvii. 13; 1 Co. iil. 18; vii. 
40; vili. 25 x. 12; xiv. 375 Gal. vi. 3; Phil. ni.4; Jas. 1. 
26, μὴ δόξητε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς do not suppose that ye 
may think, Mt. iii. 9; οἵ. Fritzsche ad loe. [0]]. by ὅτι, 
Mt. vi. 7; xxvi. 53; [Mk. vi. 49 T WH]; Lk. xii. 51; 
xiii. 2, 4; xix.11; Jn. v. 45; xi. 13, [81 T Tr WH]; xiii. 
29; xx. 15; 1 Co. iv. 9; 2 Co. xii. 19; Jas.iv.5. so used 
that the object is easily understood from the context : Mt. 
xxiv. 44 (jj ὥρᾳ ov δοκεῖτε ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεται) ; 
Lk. xii. 40; xvii. 9 [RG L br. Tr mre. br.]; forming a 
parenthesis in the midst of a question: πόσῳ, δοκεῖτε, 
χείρονος ἀξιωθήσεται τιμωρίας; Heb. x. 29; (Arstph. 
Acharn. 12 πῶς τοῦτ᾽ ἔσεισέ μου. δοκεῖς, τὴν καρδίαν; 
Anacr. 40, 15 [i. 6. 35 (33), 16] πόσον, δοκεῖς, πονοῦσιν, 
ἔρως, ὅσους σὺ βάλλεις ;). [Syn. see ἡγέομαι, ἤπ.7 ae 
intrans. to seem, be accounted, reputed: Lk. x. 36; xxii. 
24; Acts xvii. 18; xxv. 27; 1 Co. xii. 22; 2 Co. x. 9; 
Heb. xii. 11; ἔδοξα ἐμαυτῷ δεῖν πρᾶξαι. I seemed to my- 
self, i.e. I thought, Acts xxi. 9 fick BE rat (92) οἱ 
δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν those that are accounted to rule, who 
are recognized as rulers, Mk. x. 42; of δοκοῦντες εἶναί τι 
those who are reputed to be somewhat (of importance), 
and therefore have influence, Gal. ii. 6, [9], (Plat. Euthyd. 
p- 303 6.) ; simply, of δοκοῦντες those highly esteemed, of 
repute, looked up to, influential, Gal. ii. 2 (often in Grk. 


154 


δοκιμη 


writ. as Eur. Hec. 295, where ef. Schiifer ; [ef. W. § 45, 
17). By way of courtesy, things certain are sometimes 
said δοκεῖν, as in Heb. iv. 1 (cf. Cie. offic. 8, 2, 6 ut tute 
tibi defuisse videare) ; 1 Co. xi. 16 [but ef. Mey. ad loe.]; 
ef. W. § 65, 7 ο. 3. impers. δοκεῖ μοι, it seems to me; 
i.e. a. I think, judge: thus in questions, ri σοι (ὑμῖν) 
δοκεῖ; Mt. xvii. 25 ; xviii. 12; xxi. 28; xxii. 17, 42; xxvi. 
66; Jn. xi. 56; κατὰ τὸ δοκοῦν αὐτοῖς as seemed good 
to them, Heb. xii. 10, (Leian. Tim. § 25, and παρὰ τὸ 
δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, Thue. 1,84). b. ἔδοξέ μοι it seemed good to, 
pleased, me; I determined: foll. by inf., Lk. i. 8; Acts xv. 
22, 25, 28, 34 Ree.; also often in Grk. writ. Comp.: 
εὐ-, συν- ev- δοκέω." 

[Syn. δοκεῖν, φαίνεσθαι: φαίν. (primarily of luminous 
bodies) makes reference to the actual external appear- 
ance, generally correct but possibly deceptive; 50x. refers 
to the subjective judgment, which may or may not 
conform to the fact. Hence such a combination as δοκεῖ 
φαίνεσθαι is no pleonasm. Cf. Trench ὃ Ιχχχ. ; Schmidt 
ch. 15.] 

δοκιμάζω ; [fut. δοκιμάσω]; 1 aor. ἐδοκίμασα; Pass., 
[pres. δοκιμάζομαι); pf. δεδοκίμασμαι ; (δόκιμος); Sept. 
chiefly for }D3; as in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt., Thue.], Xen. 
and Plat. on, to try; 1. to test, examine, prove, scruti- 
nize (to see whether a thing be genuine or not), as 
metals: χρυσίον διὰ πυρός (Isocr. p. 240 d. [i. 6. Pana- 
then. § 14]; ad Demon. p. 7 b. [here Bekk. βασανίζομεν]; 
Sept., Prov. viii. 10; Sir. ii.5; Sap. iii. 6; ἄργυρον, Prov. 
xvii. 8, [ef. Zech. xiii. 9]), 1 Pet. i. 7; other things: Lk. 
xii. 56; xiv. 19; 2 Co. viii. 8; Gal. vi. 4; 1 Th. ii. 4; v. 21; 
τὰ διαφέροντα, Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, [al. refer these pass. 
to 2; see διαφέρω, 2 b.]; men, 1 Tim. iii. 10 (in the pass.) ; 
ἑαυτόν, 1 Co. xi. 28; 2 Co. xiii. 5, (cf. ἐξετάζειν ἑαυτόν, Xen. 
mem. 2, 5, 1 and 4); θεόν, Heb. iii. 9 (RG, fr. Ps. xeiv. 
(xey.) 9; on the sense of the phrase see πειράζω, 2 ἃ. 8.) ; 
τὰ πνεύματα, foll. by εἰ whether ete. 1 Jn. iv. 1; foll. by 
indir. dise., Ro. xii. 2; 1 Co. iii. 13; Eph. v. 10. 2. to 
recognize as genuine after examination, to approve, deem 
worthy: 1 Co. xvi. 3; τινὰ σπουδαῖον ὄντα, 2 Co. viii. 22; 
ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει for ἐν τούτῳ, ὃ δοκιμάζει in that which he 
approves, deems right, Ro. xiv. 22; δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ 
θεοῦ πιστευθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον we have been approved by 
God to be intrusted with the business of pointing out to 
men the way of salvation, 1 Th. ii. 4; οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν τὸν 
θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει they did not think God worthy to 
be kept in knowledge, Ro. i. 28. [On δοκιμάζω (as com- 
pared with πειράζω) see Trench ὃ lxxiv.; Cremer s. y. 
πειράζω. COMP.: ἀποδοκιμάζω.] * 

δοκιμασία, -as, ἡ, a proving, putting to the proof: πει- 
patew ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ to tempt by proving, Heb. iii. 9 LT 
Tr WH. ({Lys.], Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.; 
λίθος δοκιμασίας, Sir. vi. 21.) * 

δοκιμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (δόκιμος) ; 1. in an active sense, a 
proving, trial: θλίψεως, through affliction, 2 Co. viii. 2. 
2. approvedness, tried character: Ro. vy. 4; 2 Co. ii. 9; 
Phil. ii. 22; τῆς διακονίας, exhibited in the contribution, 
2 Co. ix. 13. 3. a proof [objectively], a specimen of 
tried worth: 2 Co. xiii. 8. (Diose. 4, 186 (183); occa- 
sionally in eccl. writ.) * 


δοκίμιον 


δοκίμιον, -ου, τό, (δοκιμήγ ; 1. i. 4. τὸ δοκιμάζειν, the 
proving: τῆς πίστεως, Jas.i.3. 42. that by which some- 
thing is tried or proved, a test: Dion. Hal. ars rhet. 11; 
γλῶσσα γεύσεως δοκίμιον, Longin. de sublim. 32,5; δοκί- 
puov δὲ στρατιωτῶν κάματος, Hdian. 2, 10, 12 [6 ed. 
Bekk.]; in Sept. of a crucible or furnace for smelting: 
Prov. xxvii. 21; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7. 3. equiv. to δοκιμή, 
2: ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως, your proved faith, 1 Pet. i. 7. 
This word is treated of fully by Fritzsche in his Priili- 
minarien u.s.w. pp. 40, 44.* 

δόκιμος, -ov, (δέχομαι); fr. Hdt. down; 1. prop. 
accepted, particularly of coins and metals, Gen. xxiii. 16; 
2 Chr. ix. 17; Leian. Herm. 68, ete.; hence univ. proved, 
tried: in the N. T. one who is of tried faith and integ- 
rity [R. V. approved], Ro. xvi. 10 (τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ, 
the approved servant of Christ); 1 Co. xi. 19; 2 Co. x. 
18; xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 15 (παριστάναι ἑαυτὸν δόκιμον τῷ 
6ep); Jas. i. 12. 2. accepted i. q. acceptable, pleasing : 
evdpeotos τῷ θεῷ k. δόκιμος [L mrg. -μοις] τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, 
Ro. xiv. 18." 

δοκός, -od, ἡ, (fr. δέκομαι for δέχομαι, in so far as it has 
the idea of bearing [οἵ. Curtius § 117); fr. Hom. down; 
a beam: Mt. vii. 3-5; Lk. vi. 41 sq.* 

δόλιος, -a, -ον, (δόλος) ; fr. Hom. on; deceitful: 2 Co. 
xi. 13.* 

δολιόω : (δύλιος) ; to deceive, use deceit: in Ro. iii. 13, 
fr. Ps. ν. 10, impf. ἐδολιοῦσαν an Alexandrian form for 
ἐδολίουν, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 349; W.§ 13, 2f.; Mul- 
lach p. 16; B. 43 (37); [ef. ἔχω]. (Not found in prof. 
writ.; [Numb. xxv. 18; Ps. civ. (ev.) 25. Cf. W. 26 
(25)}.)* 

δόλος, -ov, 6, (fr. δέλω to catch with a bait [(?); Lat. 
dolus, cf. Curtius § 271]; see δελεάζω above); prop. bait, 
Hom. Od. 12, 252; a lure, snare; hence craft, deceit, 
guile: Mt. xxvi. 4; Mk. xiv. 1; vii. 22; Jn. i. 47 (48); 
Acts xiii. 10; 2 Co. xii. 16; Ro. i. 29; 1 Th.ii.3 (οὐκ 
ἔστι ev δόλῳ, there is no deceit under it); 1 Pet. ii. [1], 
22, and Rev. xiv. 5 Ree., after Is. lili. 9; λαλεῖν δόλον 
to speak deceitfully (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiyv.) 14), 1 Pet. 
iii. 10.* 

δολόω, -ὦ; (δόλος) ; 1. to ensnare: Hes., Hdt. and 
succeeding writers. 2. to corrupt, ([βδέλλιον and 
λίβανον, Dioscor. 1, 80. 81]; τὸν οἶνον, Lcian. Hermot. 59) : 
τὸν λύγον τοῦ θεοῦ, divine truth by mingling with it wrong 
notions, 2 Co. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § lxii. and see καπη- 
Nevo. ] * 

δόμα, -ros, τό, (δίδωμι), a gift: Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13; 
Eph. iv. 8; Phil. iv. 17. (Plat. def. p. 415b.; Plut.; 
often in Sept., chiefly for 3m.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. 
Ρ- 291 sq. [who quotes Varro de ling. Lat. 1. iv. p. 48 ed. 
Bip. “dos erit pecunia si nuptiarum causa data: haec 
Graece δωτίνη, ita enim hoe Siculi: ab eodem Donum. 
Nam Graece ut ipsi δῶρον, ut alii δόμα, etut Attici δόσις.᾽7" 

[Syw. δόμα, δόσις, δῶρον, δωρεά: δόσ. act. a giving, pass. 
thing given, cf. medical “dose”; δῶρ. specific “ present,” yet 
not always gratuitous or wholly unsuggestive of recom- 
pense ; but δωρεά differs from δῶρ. in denoting a gift which 
is also a gratuity, hence of the benefactions of a sover- 


155 


δόξα 


eign; a δόσις θεοῦ is what God confers as possessor of all 
things; a δωρεὰ θεοῦ is an expression of his favor; a δῶρον 
θεοῦ is something which becomes the recipient’s abiding pos- 
session. Philo de cherub. ὃ 25, says πάνυ ἐκδήλως παριστάς 
(Num. xxviii. 2), ὅτι τῶν ὄντων τὰ μὲν χάριτος μέσης ἠξίωται, 
ἢ καλεῖται δόσις, τὰ δὲ ἀμείνονος, ἣς ὄνομα οἰκεῖον δωρεά. 
Again, de leg. alleg. iii. § 70 (on the same bibl. pass.), δια- 
τηρήσεις ὅτι δῶρα δομάτων διαφέρουσι: τὰ μὲν yap ἔμφασιν 
μεγέθους τελείων ἀγαθῶν δηλοῦσιν... τὰ δὲ εἰς βραχύτατον 
ἔσταλται κτλ. Hence δόμα, δόσις, gift; δωρεά, δῶρον, henefac- 
tion, bounty, ete.; yet cf. 6. g. Test. xii. Patr. test. Zab. § 1 
ἐγώ εἶμι Ζαβουλών, δόσις ἀγαθὴ τοῖς γονεῦσί μου, with Gen. 
Xxx. 30 δεδώρηται 6 θεός μοι δῶρον καλὸν... κ- ἐκάλεσε τὸ 
ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Ζαβουλών. Cf. Schmidt ch. 106.] 

δόξα, -ης, ἡ, (δοκέω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. most freq. 
for 7/33, several times for ΤΊ, 177, ete. ; 

I. opinion, judgment, view: in this sense very often in 
prof. writ.; but in the Bible only in 4 Mace. ν. 17 (18). 

II. opinion, estimate, whether good or bad, concerning 
some one; but (like the Lat. existimatio) in prof. writ. 
generally, in the saered writ. always, good opinion con- 
cerning one, and as resulting from that, praise, honor, 
glory: Lk. xiv. 10; Heb. iii. 3; 1 Pet. v. 4; opp. to 
ἀτιμία, 2 Co. vi. 8; opp. to αἰσχύνη, Phil. iii. 19; joined 
with τιμή, Ro. ii. 7,10; 1 Pet. i. 7; 2 Pet.i.17; δόξα τινός, 
praise or honor coming to some one, Lk. ii. 32; Eph. iii. 
13; coming from some one, Jn. viii. 54; xii. 43; τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων, τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. xii. 43 ; Ro. iii. 23 ; persons whose 
excellence is to redound to the glory of others are called 
their δόξα: thus, ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, 1 Th. ii. 20; 
ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν δόξα Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. viii. 238. ζητεῖν τὴν ἰδίαν 
δόξαν, or τ. δόξ. αὐτοῦ, Jn. vii. 18; viii. 50; of God, to 
endeavor to promote the glory of God, Jn. vii. 18; 
Enreiv δόξαν ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, 1 Th. ii. 6; τὴν δόξαν τ. παρὰ 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. v. 44; λαμβάνειν δόξαν (Lat. captare hono- 
rem) to seek to receive, catch at glory, Jn. v. 41,44; to 
receive glory, 2 Pet. i. 17; Rev. v. 12; τὴν δόξαν, the glory 
due [cf. W. 105 (100) sq.; B. 88 (77); Ellic. on Gal. i. 
5, cf. B. 89 (78)], Rev. iv. 11; διδόναι δόξαν τῷ θεῷ, 
mim 32d Diy or (Jer. xiii. 16) 11, to give or ascribe 
glory to God, why and how being evident in each 
ease from the context: thus, by declaring one’s grati- 
tude to God for a benefit received, Lk. xvii. 18; by not 
distrusting God’s promises, Ro. iv. 20; by celebrating 
his praises, Rev. iv. 9; xi. 13; xiv. 7; [xvi. 9]; xix. 7 
(τὴν δόξαν the glory due); by rendering its due honor 
to God’s majesty, Acts xii. 23; δὸς δόξαν τῷ θεῷ, ac- 
knowledge that God knows all things, and show that 
you believe it by the confession you are about to make, 
Jn. ix. 24, ef. 1S. vi. 5; Josh. vii. 19; Ev. Nicod. ec. 14 [p. 
622 ed. Thilo, 296 ed. Tdf.]; cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 12. 
εἰς δόξαν θεοῦ, so as to honor God, to promote his glory 
(among men): Ro. xv. 7; 1 Co. x. 31; Phil.i. 11; 11. 11; 
εἰς τὴν δόξ. τ. θεοῦ, Ro. iii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 15; τῷ θεῷ πρὸς 
δόξαν, 2 Co. i. 20; πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κυρίου δόξαν, 2 Co. viii. 19 ; 
ὑπὲρ τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ. Jn. xi. 4; in doxologies: δόξα ἐν 
ὑψίστοις θεῷ. Lk. ii. 14, cf. xix. 38; αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα, Ro. xi. 
36 ; Eph. iii. 21; 2 Pet. iii. 18; 6 ἡ δόξα, Ro. xvi. 27; Gal. 
i. 5; 2 Tim. iv. 18 ; Heb. xiii. 21; τῷ θεῷ ἡ δόξα, Phil. iv. 


δόξα 


20; τιμὴ καὶ δόξα, 1 Tim. i. 17. [Even in classic Grk. 
δόξα is a word of wide signif., ranging from one’s private 
opinion, fancy, to public opinion, repute, renown 
(κλέος ; cf. the relation of φήμη to φάναι). Coupled with 
τιμή it denotes rather the splendid condition (evident 
glory), τιμή the estimate and acknowledgment of it 
(paid honor).] 

III. As a translation of the Hebr. 325, in a use for- 
eign to Grk. writ. [W. 32], splendor, brightness ; Le 
properly : τοῦ φωτός, Acts xxii. 11; of the sun, moon, 
stars, 1 Co. xy. 40 sq. ; used of the heavenly brightness, 
by which God was conceived of as surrounded, Lk. ii. 9; 
Acts vii. 55, and by which heavenly beings were sur- 
rounded when they appeared on earth, Lk. ix. 31; Rev. 
xviii. 1; with which the face of Moses was once made 
luminous, 2 Co. iii. 7, and also Christ in his transfigura- 
tion, Lk. ix. 32; δύξα τοῦ κυρίου, in Sept. equiv. to 23 
nim, in the targ. and talm. 77°3W, Shekinah or Shechi- 
nah [see BB.DD. s. v.], the glory of the Lord, and simply 
ἡ δόξα, a bright cloud by which God made manifest to 
men his presence and power on earth (Ex. xxiv. 17; xl. 
28 (34) sqq., ete.) : Ro.ix.4; Rey. xv. 8; xxi. 11, 23; hence, 
ὁ beds τῆς δόξης (God to whom belongs δόξα) ὥφθη, Acts 
Vil. 2; Χερουβεὶν δόξης, on whom the divine glory rests 
(so δόξα without the article, Ex. xl. 28 (34); 1S. iv. 22; 
Sir. xlix. 8), Heb. ix. 5. 2. magnificence, excellence, 
preéminence, dignity, grace: βασιλεῖαι τοῦ κόσμου k. ἡ δόξα 
αὐτῶν, i. 6. their resources, wealth, the magnificence and 
ereatness of their cities, their fertile lands, their throng- 
ing population, Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 6; ἡ δόξα τῶν βασιλείων 
τῆς γῆς, Rev. xxi. [24; τῶν ἐθνῶν, ibid.] 26; used of 
royal state, splendid apparel, and the like: Mt. vi. 29; 
Lk. xii. 27, (Esth. v.1; Joseph. antt. 8, 6,5); glorious form 
and appearance: e. g. of human bodies restored to life, 
opp. to ἡ ἀτιμία which characterized them when they 
were buried, 1 Co. xv. 43; ἡ δόξα τῆς σαρκός “omne id, 
quod in rebus humanis magnificum dicitur ” (Calvin), 1 
Pet. i. 24; εἶναί τινι δόξα to be aglory, ornament, to one, 
1 Co. xi. 15 ; univ. preéminence, excellence: 2 Co. iii. 8-11. 
3. majesty; a. that which belongs to God; and a. the 
kingly majesty which belongs to him as the supreme 
ruler; so in pass. where it is joined with βασιλεία, δύναμις, 
κράτος, ἐξουσία. and the like: Mt. vi. 13 Rec.; esp. in 
doxologies, 1 Pet. iv. 11; v.11 RG; Jude 25; Rev. i. 
6; these pass. I have preferred to distinguish fr. those 
cited above, II. fin., and yet in pass. similar to each other 
in form it is not always clear whether δόξα is used to de- 
note praise and honor, or regal majesty, as in Rev. vii. 
12 ἡ εὐλογία x. ἡ δόξα x. ἡ σοφία κ. ἡ εὐχαριστία K. ἡ τιμὴ 
x. ἡ ἰσχύς, Rey. xix. 1 ἡ σωτηρία x. ἡ δόξα κ. ἡ τιμὴ κ- ἡ 
δύναμις ; likewise in Rev. v. 12, [13]. of the judicial 
majesty of God as exhibited at the last day, Jude vs. 24. 
ἀνὴρ εἰκὼν k. δόξα θεοῦ ὑπάρχων, whose function of govern- 
ment reflects the majesty of the divine ruler, 1 Co. xi. 7; 
(7) γυνὴ δόξα ἀνδρός, because in her the preéminence and 
authority of her husband are conspicuous, ibid. β. maj- 
esty in the sense of the absolute perfection of the 
deity : Ro. i. 23; 2 Co. iv.6; Heb.i.3; 2 Pet.i.17; 1 Pet. 


156 


δόξα 


iv. 14; ἐν δόξῃ i. α. ἐνδόξως, i. 6. as accords with his di- 
vine perfection, Phil. iv. 19 [ef. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft. 
ad loc.}]; of the majesty of his saving grace: Ro. ix. 23; 
Eph. i. 12, 14, 18; iii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 11; 2 Pet. i. 8 [W. 
381 (356)]; more fully δόξα τῆς χάριτος, Eph.i. 6; ὁ πα- 
typ τῆς δόξης, the Father whose characteristic is majesty, 
Eph. i. 17; the majesty of God as exhibited in deeds of 
power: Jn. xi. 40; Ro. vi. 4 (whence δόξα for ty, Sept. 
Is. xii. 2; xlv. 24); hence τὸ κράτος τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ, the 
might in which his majesty excels, Col. i. 11. Ὁ. maj- 
esty which belongs to Christ; and a. the kingly 
majesty of the Messiah, to which belongs his kingly state, 
the splendor of his external appearance, the retinue of 
angels, and the like (see in III. 1): Mk. x. 37; in this 
sense it is said that Christ will come hereafter to set up 
the Messianic kingdom ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός, clothed by 
the Father in kingly array, Mt. xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38 ; 
Lk. ix. 26; μετὰ δυνάμεως x. δόξης πολλῆς, Mt. xxiv. 30; 
Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27 cf. Mt. xxv. 31; Tit. ii. 13; 1 Pet. 
iv. 13; also καθίσαι ἐπὶ θρόνου δύξης αὐτοῦ, Mt. xix. 28; 
xxv. 31, cf. 1S. ii. 8; ἡ δόξα τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ, the majesty 
of his Messianic power with which he will punish his 
adversaries, 2 Th.i. 9. β. the absolutely perfect inward 
or personal excellence of Christ: 2 Co. iii. 18; iv. 4; in 
which he excels by virtue of his nature as ὁ θεῖος λόγος, 
Jn. 1. 14; xii 41; of which majesty he gave tokens in 
the miracles he performed, Jn. ii. 11 cf. xi. 40; ὁ κύριος 
τῆς δόξης, 1 Co. 11. 8; Jas. ii. 1. y. the majesty (glory) of 
angels, as apparent in their exterior brightness, Lk. ix. 
26; in a wider sense, in which angels are called δόξαι as 
being spiritual beings of preeminent dignity: Jude vs. 8; 
2 Pet. ii. 10. 4. amost glorious condition, most exalted 
state; a. of that condition with God the Father in heav- 
en to which Christ was raised after he had achieved his 
work on earth: Lk. xxiv. 26; Jn. xvii. 5 (where he is 
said to have been in the same condition before his incar- 
nation, and even before the beginning of the world); ib. 
22, 24; Heb. ii. 7,9; 1 Pet. i. 11, 21; τὸ σῶμα τῆς δόξης 
αὐτοῦ, the body in which his glorious condition is mani- 
fested, Phil. iii. 21; ἀνελήφθη ἐν δόξῃ, was taken up (into 
heaven) so that he is now ἐν δόξῃ, 1 Tim. iii. 16 [ef. W. 
413 (385); B. 328 (283)]. Ὁ. the glorious condition of 
blessedness into which it.is appointed and promised that 
true Christians shall enter after their Saviour’s return from 
heaven: Ro. viii. 18, 21; ix. 23; 2 Co. iv.17; Col. i. 27 
(twice ; ef. Meyer ad loc.) ; iii. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. ii. 
10; 1 Pet. vy. 1; which condition begins to be enjoyed 
even now through the devout contemplation of the divine 
majesty of Christ, and its influence upon those who con- 
template it, 2 Co. iii. 18; and this condition will include 
not only the blessedness of the soul, but also the gain of 
amore excellent body (1 Co. xv. 43; Phil. iii. 21); ef. 
Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 203 sqq.-; ἡ δόξα 
τοῦ θεοῦ, which God bestows, Ro. v. 2; 1 Th. ii. 12; δόξα 
τοῦ κυρ. Hu. "Ino. Xp. the same in which Christ rejoices, 
2 Th. ii. 14 (ef. Ro. viii. 17, ete.); εἰς δόξαν ἡμῶν, to 
render us partakers of δόξα, 1 Co. 11. 7. Cf. Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. des N. T. § 76 d.* 


δοξάζω 


δοξάζω; [impf. ἐδόξαζον] ; fut. δοξάσω ; 1 aor. ἐδόξασα; 
Pass., [ pres. δοξάζομαι]; pf. δεδόξασμαι ; 1 aor. ἐδοξάσθην ; 
(δόξα); Vulg. honorifico, glorifico, clarifico ; Sept. chiefly 
for 723, several times for 983, (in Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq. 
35 δοξάζεσθαι stands for 1 to shine) ; 1. to think, 
suppose, be of opinion, (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat., 
Thuc., et sqq.; nowhere in this sense in the sacred writ- 
ings). 2. fr. Polyb. (6, 53, 10 δεδοξασμένοι ἐπ᾽ ἀρετῇ) on 
to praise, extol, magnify, celebrate: twa, pass., Mt. vi. 2; 
Lk. iv. 15; ἑαυτόν, to glorify one’s self, Jn. viii. 54; Rev. 
XViil. 7; τὸν λόγον Tod κυρίου, Acts xiii. 48; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ 
κυρίου, Rev. xv.4; τὸν θεόν, Mt. v. 16; ix. 8; xv. 31; Mk. 
1.12; Lk. v. 25 sq.; vii. 16; xiii. 13; xvii. 15; xviii. 43; 
xxiii. 47; Acts xi. 18; xxi. 20 [Rec. κύριον] ; Ro. xv. 6, 
9 [W. § 44,3 b.; 332 (311)]; 1 Pet. ii. 12; iv. 14 Ree.; 
with the addition of ἐπί τινι, for something, LK. ii. 20; 
Acts iv. 21; 2 Co. ix. 13; ἐν ἐμοί, on account of me (prop- 
erly, finding in me matter for giving praise [οἵ. W. 387 
(362) sq.]), Gal. i. 24; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ, 1 Pet. iv. 16 L 
T Tr WH. 3. to honor, do honor to, hold in honor: 
τὴν διακονίαν pov, by the most devoted administration of 
it endeavoring to convert as many Gentilesas possible to 
Christ, Ro. xi. 13 ; a member of the body, 1 Co. xii. 26; 
θεόν, to worship, Ro. i. 21; with the adjunct ἐν τῷ σώματι, 
by keeping the body pure and sound, 1 Co. vi. 20; τῷ 
θανάτῳ, to undergo death for the honor of God, Jn. xxi. 
19. 4. By ause not found in prof. writ. to make glori- 
ous, adorn with lustre, clothe with splendor; a. to impart 
glory to something, render it excellent: pf. pass. δεδόξα- 
copa toexcel, be preeminent; δεδοξασμένος excelling, emi- 
nent, glorious, 2 Co. iii. 10; δεδοξασμένη χάρα surpassing 
i. e. heavenly joy, [A. V. full of glory], 1 Pet.i. 8. b. 
to make renowned, render illustrious, i. e. to cause the 
dignity and worth of some person or thing to become mani- 
fest and acknowledged : τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ, 2 Th. iii. 1; 
Christ, the Son of God, Jn. viii. 54; xi. 4; xvi. 14; xvii. 
10; God the Father, Jn. xiii. 31 sq.; xiv. 13; xv. 8; xvii. 
1,4; 1 Ῥρῖ. ἵν. 11 ; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. xii. 28. ο. to 
exalt to a glorious rank or condition (Is. xliv. 23; lv. 5, 
etc. ; joined to ὑψοῦν, Is. iv. 2; Esth. iii. 1): ody ἑαυτὸν 
ἐδόξασε did not assume to himself the dignity (equiv. to 
οὐχ ἑαυτῷ τὴν τιμὴν ἔλαβε, vs. 4), the words γενηθῆναι ap- 
χιερέα being added epexegetically (W. § 44, 1), Heb. v. 
5; of God exalting, or rather restoring, Christ his Son 
to a state of glory in heaven: Jn. vii. 39; xii. 16, [23]; 
xiii. 31 sq.; xvil. 1,5; Acts iii. 13; (see δόξα, II. 4 a.); 
of God bringing Christians to a heavenly dignity and 
condition, (see δόξα, IIT. 4 b.): Ro. viii. 80. [Comp.: 
év-, συν-δοξάζω.} * 

Aopxas, -ddos, 7, (prop. a wild she-goat, a gazelle, “apa 
τὸ δέρκω, τὸ βλέπω: ὀξυδερκὲς yap τὸ ζῷον k. evoupartoy ” 
Etym. Magn. [284, 6]), Dorcas, a certain Christian wo- 
man: Acts ix. 36, 39; see Ταβιθά." 

δόσις. -ews, 7, (δίδωμι) ; 1. a giving, [fr. Hat. 
down]: λόγος δόσεως x. λήψεως, an account of giving 
and receiving [i. 6. debit and credit accounts ; cf. λόγος 
II. 3], Phil. iv. 15; here Paul, by a pleasant euphemism, 
refers to the pecuniary gifts, which the church bestow- 


157 


δοῦλος 


ing them enters in the account of expenses, but he him- 
self in the account of receipts; cf. Van Hengel ad loc. ; 
so δύσις καὶ λῆψις, of money given and received, Sir. xli. 
19; xhi. 7; (Herm. mand. 5, 2, 2}, and plur. Epict. diss. 2, 
951125 2. a gift, [fr. Hom. down]: Jas. 1.17. [Syn. 
see δόμα, fin. ]* 

δότης, -ov, 6, (δίδωμι), for the more usual δοτήρ, a giver, 
bestower: 2 Co. ix. 7 fr. Prov. xxii. 8. Not found else- 
where.* 

δουλαγωγέω [ Rec." -ayay-], τῶ; (δουλάγωγος, ef. παιδά- 
yoyos) ; to lead away into slavery, claim as one’s slave, 
(Diod. Sic. 12, 24, and occasionally in other later writ.) ; 
to make a slave and to treat as a slave i. 6. with severity, 
to subject to stern and rigid discipline: 1 Co. ix. 27. 
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum N. T. p. 472 sq.* 

δουλεία (Tdf. -ia, [see I, ¢]), -as, 7, (δουλεύω) ; slavery, 
bondage, the condition of a slave: τῆς φθορᾶς, the bond- 
age which consists in decay [W. § 59, 8 a., cf. B. 78 (68)], 
equiv. to the law, the necessity, of perishing, Ro. viii. 
21; used of the slavish sense of fear, devoid alike of 
buoyancy of spirit and of trust in God, such asis produced 
by the thought of death, Heb. ii. 15, as well as by the 
Mosaic law in its votaries, Ro. viii. 15 (πνεῦμα δουλείας) ; 
the Mosaic system is said to cause δουλεία on account of 
the grievous burdens its precepts impose upon its adhe- 
rents: Gal. iv. 24; ν. 1. [From Pind. down.]* 

δουλεύω; fut. δουλεύσω; 1 aor. ἐδούλευσα; pf. δεδού- 
λευκα; (δοῦλος) ; Sept. for 733; 1. prop. to be a slave, 
serve, do service: absol., Eph. vi.7; 1 Tim. vi. 2; τινί, 
Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ix. 12; said of nations in 
subjection to other nations, Jn. viii. 33; Acts vii. 7; men 
are said δουλεύειν who bear the yoke of the Mosaic law, 
Gal. iv. 25 (see δουλεία). 2. metaph. to obey, submit 
to; a. in a good sense: absol. to yield obedience, Ro. 
Vil. 6; τινί. to obey one’s commands and render to him the 
services due, Lk. xv. 29; God: Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; 
1 Th. 1. 9: κυρίῳ and τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts xx. 19; Ro. xii. 11 
(not Ree.*, see below); Eph. vi. 7; Christ: Ro. xiv. 
18; Col. iii. 24; νόμῳ θεοῦ, acc. to the context, feel myself 
bound to, Ro. vii. 25; τοῖς θεοῖς, to worship gods, Gal. iv. 
8; τῷ καιρῷ (Anth. 9,441, 6), wisely adapt one’s self to, 
Ro. xii. 11 Ree." (see above), cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; per- 
form services of kindness and Christian love : ἀλλήλοις, 
Gal. v. 13; used of those who zealously advance the in- 
terests of anything: ὡς πατρὶ τέκνον σὺν ἐμοὶ ἐδούλευσεν 
εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον equiv. to ὡς πατρὶ τέκνον δουλεύει, ἐμοὶ 
ἐδούλευσεν καὶ οὕτω σὺν ἐμοὶ ἐδούλ. etc. Phil. ii. 22 [W. 
422 (393); 577 (537)]. ὍὌ. ina bad sense, of those who 
become slaves to some base power, to yield to, give one’s 
self up to: τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Ro. vi. 6; νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας, Ro. vii. 
25; ἐπιθυμίαις x. ἡδοναῖς, Tit. iii. 8, (Xen. mem. 1, 5, 5; 
apol. Soer. 16; Plat. Phaedrus p. 238 e.; Polyb. 17, 15,16; 
Hdian. 1, 17, 22 [9 ed. Bekk.]) ; τῇ κοιλίᾳ, Ro. xvi. 18, 
(γαστρί, Anthol. 11, 410,4; Xen. mem. 1, 6, 8; abdomini 
servire, Sen. de benef. 7, 26, 4; ventri obedire, Sall. [Cat. i. 
1]); μαμωνᾷ, to devote one’s self to getting wealth : Mt. vi. 
24; Lk. xvi. 18. τοῖς στοιχείοις τοῦ κόσμου, Gal. iv. 9." 

δοῦλος, -η, -ον, (derived by most fr. δέω to tie, bind; 


δουλόω 


by some fr. AEAQ to ensnare, capture, [(?) ἃ]. al.; οἵ. 
Vanitek p. 322]); serving, subject to: παρεστήσατε τὰ 
μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, Ro. vi. 19. Then substan- 
tively, ἡ δούλη a female slave, bondmaid, handmaid: τοῦ 
θεοῦ, τοῦ κυρίου, one who worships God and submits to 
him, Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29 (iii. 2)); Lk. i. 38, 48. 
ὁ δοῦλος, Sept. for 33; 1. a slave, bondman, man of 
servile condition; a. properly: opp. to ἐλεύθερος, 1 Co. 
vii. 21; xii. 13; Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11; Rev. 
vi. 15; xiii. 16; xix. 18; opp. to κύριος, δεσπότης, οἶκο- 
δεσπότης, Mt. x, 24; xiii. 27sq.; Lk. xii. 46; Jn. xv. 15; 
Eph. vi. 5; Col. ii. 22; iv.1; 1 Tim. vi. 1; Tit. ii. 9; 
and very often. b. metaph. a. one who gives himself 
up wholly to another’s will, 1 Co. vii. 23; or dominion, 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας, Jn. vill. 834; Ro. vi. 17, 20; τῆς φθορᾶς, 2 
Pet. ii. 19, (τῶν ἡδονῶν, Athen. 12 p. 531 ¢.; τῶν χρημά- 
tov, Plut. Pelop. c. 3; τοῦ πίνειν, Ael. vy. h. 2,41). 8B. 
the δοῦλοι Χριστοῦ, τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, are those 
whose service is used by Christ in extending and ad- 
vancing his cause among men: used of apostles, Ro. i. 1; 
Galea. ΤΟΣ» ΡΣ: 02). 24 ete ἘΠ ΘΕ ν 
2 Pet. i. 1; of other preachers and teachers of the 
gospel, Col. iv. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jude vs. 1; of the 
true worshippers of Christ (who is κύριος πάντων, Acts 
x. 36), Eph. vi. 6. the δοῦλοι τοῦ θεοῦ, NIM IA}, are 
those whose agency God employs in executing his pur- 
poses: used of apostles, Acts iv. 29; xvi. 17; of Moses 
(Josh. i. 1), Rev. xv. 3; of prophets (Jer. vii. 25; xxv. 
4), Rev. i.1; x. 7; xi. 18; of all who obey God’s com- 
mands, his true worshippers, Lk. ii. 29; Rev. ii. 20; vii. 3; 
xix. 2,5; xxii. 3,6; (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 23; Lxviii. (Ixix.) 
37; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 4,21). γ. δοῦλός τινος, devoted to 
another to the disregard of one’s own interests: Mt. xx. 
27; Mk. x. 44; strenuously laboring for another’s sal- 
vation, 2 Co. iv. 5. 2. aservant, attendant, (of a king) : 
Mt. xviii. 23, 26 sqq. [Syn. see διάκονος. 

δουλόω, -@: fut δουλώσω ; 1 aor. ἐδούλωσα ; pf. pass. 
δεδούλωμαι ; 1 aor. pass. ἐδουλώθην ; (δοῦλος) ; [fr. Aes- 
chyl. and Hdt. down]; to make a slave of, reduce to bond- 
age; a. prop.: τινά, Acts vii. 6; τούτῳ καὶ [yet T WH 
om. Tr br. καὶ] δεδούλωται to him he has also been made a 
bondman, 2 Pet. ii. 19. _b. metaph.: ἐμαυτόν τινι give 
myself wholly to one’s needs and service, make myself a 
bondman to him, 1 Co. ix.19 ; δουλοῦσθαί τινι. to be made 
subject to the rule of some one, 6. g. τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ, τῷ 
θεῷ. Ko. vi. 18, 22; likewise ὑπό τι, Gal. iv. 3; δεδουλω- 
μένος οἴνῳ, wholly given up to, enslaved to, Tit. ii. 3 
(δουλεύειν οἴνῳ, Liban. epist. 319); δεδούλωμαι ἔν τινι, to 
be under bondage, held by constraint of law or necessity, 
in some matter, 1 Co. vii. 15. [Comp.: κατα-δουλόω. " 

δοχή, -ἧς, ἢ, (δέχομαι to receive as a guest), a feast, 
banquet, [ οἷ. our reception]: δοχὴν ποιῶ, Lk. ν. 29; xiv. 
13. (i. q. MAWND, Gen. [xxi. 8]; xxvi. 30; Esth. i. 3; v. 
4 sqq-; Athen. 8 p. 348 f.; Plut. moral. p- 1102 b. [i. 6. 
non posse suay. vivi etc. 21, 9].) * 

δράκων, -ovros, 6, (apparently fr. δέρκομαι, 2 aor. ἔδρα- 
cov; hence δράκων prop. equiv. to ὀξὺ βλέπων [Etym. 
Magen. 286, 7; cf. Curtius § 13]); Sept. chiefly for pan; 


158 


δύναμαι 


a dragon, a great serpent, a fabulous animal, (so as early 
as Hom. Il. 2, 308 sq., ete.). From it, after Gen. iii. 
1 sqq., is derived the fig. description of the devil in Rev. 
xii. 8-17; xiii. 2,4,11; xvi. 13; xx. 2. (Cf. Baudissin, 
Studien zur semitisch. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (iy. 4) p. 
281 sqq-]* 

δράμω, fo run, see τρέχω. 

δράσσομαι; to grasp with the hand, to take: τινά, 1 Co. 
iii. 19 [B. 291 (250); W. 352 (330)]. (In Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down; Sept.) * 

δραχμή, -7s, ἡ, (δράσσομαι. [hence prop. a grip, a hand- 
ful]), [fr. Hdt. down], a drachma, a silver coin of [near- 
ly] the same weight as the Roman denarius (see δηνάριον) : 
Lk. xv. 8sq.* 

δρέπανον, -ov, τό, (i. q. δρεπάνη, fr. δρέπω to pluck, pluck 
off), a sickle, a pruning-hook, ahooked vine-knife, such as 
reapers and vine-dressers use: Mk. iv. 29; Rey. xiv. 
14-19. (Hom. and subseq. writ.; Sept.) * 

δρόμος, -ov, ὅ, (fr. APAMQ [q. v.]; cf. νόμος, τρόμος, and 
the like), a course (Hom. et sqq.); in the N. Τὶ fig., the 
course of life or of office : πληροῦσθαι τὸν δρόμον, Acts xiii. 
25; τελειοῦν, Acts xx. 24; τελεῖν, 2 Tim. iv. 7.* 

Δρουσίλλα [al. Δρούσιλλα, cf. Chandler § 120], -ys, ἡ, 
Drusilla, daughter of Agrippa the elder, wife of Felix, 
the governor of Juda, a most licentious woman (Joseph. 
antt. 20, 7, 1 sq.): Acts xxiv. 24; cf. Win. RWB. [and - 
B. D.] 5. v.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19, 4.* 

δύναμαι, depon. verb, pres. indic. 2 pers. sing. δύνασαι 
and, acc. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr. 
Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ. also (cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 359; [ WH. App. p.168; W.§ 18, 2b.; Veitch 
8. v.]), δύνῃ (Mk. ix. 22 sq. L T Tr WH; [Lk. xvi. 2 
T WH Tr txt. ]; Rey. ii. 2); impf. ἐδυνάμην and Attic 
ἠδυνάμην, between which forms the Mss. and editions are 
almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk. 
Vili. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read 78., so 
RG in Mt. xxvi. 9; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rev. xiv. 3; 
on the other hand, in Mt. xxii. 46; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; 
Rey. xiv. 3, L T Tr WH all read ἐδ., so T WH in Mt. 
xxvi. 9; RGin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. WH. App. p. 162; 
W. § 12, 1b.; B. 83 (29) ]; fut. δυνήσομαι ; 1 aor. ἠδυνήθην 
and (in Mk. vii. 24 T WH, after codd. 8B only; in Mt. 
xvii. 16 cod. B) ἠδυνάσθην (cf. [WH τι. 5. and p. 169]; 
Kiihner § 343 5. v.; [Veitch s. v.; W. 84 (81); B. 33 
(29); Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 402]); Sept. for ΠΩΣ; ἐδ 
be able, have power, whether by virtue of one’s own ability 
and resources, or of a state of mind, or through favora- 
ble circumstances, or by permission of law or custom ; 
a. foll. by an inf. [W. $44, 3] pres. or aor. (on the dis- 
tinction between which, cf. W. § 44,7). a. foli. ny a 
pres. inf.: Mt. vi. 24; ix. 15; Mikiiie 7.52. 11|5 23... lukceayae 
39; Jn. iii. 2; ν. 19: Acts xxvii. 1δ: 1 Co. x. 21; eb. 
v. 7; 1 Jn. iii. 9; Rev. ix. 20, and often. β. foll. by an 
aor. inf.: Mt. iii. 9; v.14; Mk. i. 45; ii. 4; v. 3; Lk. viii. 
19; xiii. 11; Jn. iii. 3 sq.3 vi. 52; vii. 34,36; Acts iv. 16 
ΓΒ 6]; v.39; x. 47; Ro. viii. 39; xvi. 25; 1 Co. ii. 14; 
iii. 1; vi. 5; 2 Co. iii. 7; Gal. iii. 21; Eph. iii. 4,20; 1 Th. 
iii. 9; 1 Tim. vi. 7, 16; 2 Tim. ii. 13; 111. 7, 15; Heb. 11. 


δύναμις 


18; iii. 19; [xi. 19 Lchm.]; Jas. i. 21; Rev. 111. 8; v. 3; 
v.. 17, and very often. b. with inf. omitted, as being 
easily supplied from the context: Mt. xvi. 3 [here T br. 
WH reject the pass.]; xx. 22; Mk. vi.19; x.39; Lk. ix. 
40; xvi. 26; xix. 3; Ro. viii. 7. c. joined with an accus. 
δύναμαί τι, to be able to do something (cf. Germ. ich vermag 
etwas): Mk. ix. 22; Lk. xii. 26; 2 Co. xiii. 8, (and in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on). 4. absol., like the Lat. possum 
(as in Caes. b. gall. 1, 18, 6), i. q. to be able, capable, 
strong, powerful: 1 Co. iii. 2; x. 13. (2 Chr. xxxii. 13; 
1 Mace. v. 40 sq.: in 2 Mace. xi. 13 cod. Alex., and 
often in Grk. writ. as Eur. Or. 889; Thue. 4, 105; Xen. 
an. 4, 5, 11 sq.; Isoc., Dem., Aeschin.) 

δύναμις, -ews, 7; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for on, 77931, 
ty, MD, 8I¥ (an army, a host); strength, ability, power ; 
a. univ. inherent power, power residing in a thing by vir- 
tue of its nature, or which a person or thing exerts and 
puts forth: Lk. i.17; Acts iv. 7; 1 Co. iv. 20; 2 Co. iv. 
7; xii. 9 (ἡ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται [RG τελειοῦται ]) ; 
xiii. 4; 1 ΤῊ. 1. 5; Heb. vii. 16; xi.34; Rev. i. 16; xvii. 
13; ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει, Acts iii. 12; μεγάλῃ δυνάμει, Acts iv. 33; 
ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν, Mt. xxv. 15; ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, 
beyond our power, 2 Co. i. 8; ἐν δυνάμει se. ὦν, endued 
with power, Lk. iv. 36; 1 Co. xv. 43; so in the phrase 
ἔρχεσθαι ἐν δυνάμει, Mk. ix. 1; powerfully, Col. i. 29; 2 
Th. i. 11; contextually i.q. evidently, Ro. i. 4; ἐν δυνάμει 
σημείων x. τεράτων, through the power which I exerted 
upon their souls by performing miracles, Ro. xv. 19 ; dvr. 
eis τι; Heb. xi. 11; δύν. ἐπὶ τὰ δαιμόνια καὶ νόσους θερα- 
πεύειν, Lk. ix.1; ἡ δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμος, Sin exer- 
cises its power (upon the soul) through the law, i. 6. 
through the abuse of the law, 1 Co. xv. 56; τῆς ἀναστάσεως 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, the power which the resurrection of Christ 
has, for instructing, reforming, elevating, tranquillizing, 
the soul, Phil. iii. 10; τῆς εὐσεβείας, inhering in godliness 
and operating upon souls, 2 Tim. iii. 5; δυνάμεις μέλλοντος 
αἰῶνος (see αἰών, 3), Heb. vi. 5; τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς δυνάμεως 
(see πνεῦμα, 5), 1 Pet. iv. 14 Lehm.; 2 Tim. i. 7 ; δύναμις 
is used of the power of angels: Eph. i. 21 [ef. Mey. 
ad loc.]; 2 Pet. ii. 11; of the power of the devil and 
evil spirits, 1 Co. xv. 24; τοῦ ἐχθροῦ, i. 6. of the devil, 
Lk. x. 19; τοῦ δράκοντος, Rev. xiii. 2; angels, as excelling 
in power, are called δυνάμεις [cf. (Philo de mutat. nom. 
§ 8 δυνάμεις ἀσώματοι) Mey. as above; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Col. i. 16; see ἄγγελος]: Ro. viii. 38; 1 Pet. iii. 22. ἡ 
δύναμις τοῦ θεοῦ, univ. the power of God: Mt. xxii. 
29; Mk. xii. 24; Lk. xxii. 69; Acts viii. 10; Ro. i. 20; 
ix. 17; 1 Co. ν]. 14; δύναμις ὑψίστου, Lk. i. 35; ἡ δύναμις, 
esp. in doxologies, the kingly power of God, Mt. vi. 
13 Rec. ; Rev. iv. 11; vii. 12; xi. 17; xii. 10; xv. 8; xix. 
1; and the abstract for the concrete (as 993239 in Jew- 
ish writ.; οἵ. Buztorf, Lex. talm. col. 385 [p. 201 sq. ed. 
Fischer]) equiv. to ὁ δυνατός, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; 
δύναμις τοῦ θεοῦ is used of the divine power considered 
as acting upon the minds of men, 1 Co. ii. 5; 2 Co. vi. 
7; Eph. iii. 7, 20; [2 Tim.i. 8; 1 Pet. i. 5]; εἴς τινα, 2 
Co. xiii. 4 [but WH in br.]; Eph. i. 19; ἐνδύεσθαι δύναμιν 
€€ vyous, Lk. xxiv. 49; by meton. things or persons in 


159 


δύναμ᾽ς 


which God’s saving power shows its efficacy are called δυ- 
νάμεις θεοῦ : thus ὁ Χριστός, 1 Co. i. 24; ὁ λόγος τοῦ σταυροῦ, 
1 Οο. 1. 18 ; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, with the addition εἰς σωτηρίαν 
παντὶ ete. Ro. i. 16 [cf. W. § 36,3 b.]. δύναμις is ascribed 
to Christ, now in one sense and now in another: a power 
to heal disease proceeds from him, Mk. ν. 30; Lk. v. 17; 
vi. 19; viii.46; the kingly power of the Messiah is his, 
Mt. xxiv. 30; ἘΜῈ: xiii. 26]; Lk. xxi. 27; 2 Pet. i.16; 
Rey. v. 12; ἄγγελοι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ (see ἄγγελος. 2), 
ministering to his power, 2 Thess. i. 7 [ W. § 34, 3 b. note]; 
metaphysical [or essential] power, viz. that which 
belongs to him as ὁ θεῖος λόγος, in the expression τὸ ῥῆμα 
τῆς δυνάμ. αὐτοῦ the word uttered by his power, equiv. 
to his most powerful will and energy, Heb.i. 3; moral 
power, operating on the soul, 2 Co. xii. 9 RG; and called 
ἡ θεῖα αὐτοῦ δύναμις in 2 Pet. i. 3; ἡ δύναμις τοῦ κυρίου, 
the power of Christ invisibly present and operative in a 
Christian church formally assembled, 1 Co. v. 4. δύναμις 
Tov ἁγίου πνεύματος: Acts 1.8 [W.125 (119)]; am». 
ἅγιον x. δύναμις, Acts x. 38; ἀπόδειξις πνεύματος καὶ δυ- 
νάμεως (see ἀπόδειξις, b.), 1 Co. ii. 45 ἐν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ 
πνεύματος, under or full of the power of the Holy Spirit, 
Lk. iv. 14; ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου, by the power and 
influence of the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 13; by the power 
which, under the influence of the Holy Spirit, I exerted 
upon their souls, Ro. xv.19. Ὅ. specifically, the power 
of performing miracles: Acts vi. 8; πᾶσα δύναμις, every 
kind of power of working miracles (with the addition 
καὶ σημείοις x. τέρασι). 2 Th. ii. 9; plur.: [Mt. xiii. 54; 
xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14]; 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Gal. iit. 5; ἐνερ- 
γήματα δυνάμεων, 1 Co. xii. 10; by meton. of the cause for 
the effect, a mighty work [οἵ. W. 32; Trench § xci.]: δύ- 
ναμιν ποιεῖν, Mk. vi. 5; ix. 39; so in the plur., Mk. vi. 2; 
Lk. xix. 37; joined with σημεῖα, Acts viii. 13; with σημεῖα 
x. τέρατα, Acts ii. 22; 2 Co. xii. 12; Heb. ii. 4 [?]; ποιεῖν 
δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; [xiii. 58]; Acts xix. 11; γίνονται 
δυνάμεις, Mt. xi. 20 sq. 23; Lk. x. 13. ce. moral power 
and excellence of soul: 1 Οὐ. ἵν. 19; 2 Co. iv. 7; Eph. iii. 
16; Col.i.11. ἃ. the power and influence which belong to 
riches; (pecuniary ability), wealth: τοῦ στρήνους, ‘riches 
ministering to luxury’ (Grotius), Rev. xviii. 3; κατὰ δύ- 
ναμιν καὶ ὑπὲρ [al. rapa] δύναμιν, according to their means, 
yea, beyond their means, 2 Co. viii. 3; (in this sense, for 
Son, Sept. Deut. viii. 17 sq.; Ruth iv. 11; not infreq. in 
Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 34; an.7,7,21(36)). 6. 
power and resources arising from numbers: Rev. iii. 8. 
f. power consisting in or resting upon armies, forces, 
hosts, (so, both in sing. and in plur., often in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hdt., Thue., Xen. on; in the Sept. and in Apoer.) ; 
hence δυνάμεις τοῦ οὐρανοῦ the hosts of heaven, Hebraisti- 
cally the stars: Mt. xxiv. 29; Lk. xxi. 26; and ὃ. ἐν τοῖς 
οὐρανοῖς, Mk. xiii. 25; equiv. to DWM NI¥, 2 K. xvii. 
16; xxili.4; Is. xxxiv. 4; Jer. vili. 2; Dan. viii. 10, ete. 
[ef. σαβαώθ].  g. Like the Lat. vis and potestas, equiv- 
to the (force i. e.) meaning of a word or expression: 1 
Co. xiv. 11; (Plat. Crat. p. 394 b.; Polyb. 20, 9, 11; 
Dion. Hal. 1, 68; Dio Cass. 55, 8: al.).* 

[Syn. Bla δύναμις, ἐνέργεια, ἐξουσία, ἰσχύς, κράτος: 


ovvajLow 


δια force, effective, often oppressive power, exhibiting itself 
in single deeds of violence; δύν. power, natural ability, gen- 
eral andinherent ; evépy. working, power in exercise, opera- 
tive power; ἐξουσ. primarily liberty of action ; then, authority 
—eitheras delegated power, or as unrestrained, arbitrary 
power ; icx. strength, power (esp. physical) as an endowment ; 
κράτος, might, relative and manifested power — in the N. T. 
chiefly of God ; τὸ κράτος τῆς ἰσχ. Eph. vi. 10, ἡ évépy. τῆς Suv. 
Eph. iii. 7, ἡ ἐνέργ. τοῦ xp. τῆς ἰσχ. Eph.i.19. Cf. Schmidt 
ch. 148 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 19.] 

δυναμόω, -@: [pres. pass. δυναμοῦμαι] ; to make strong, 
confirm, strengthen: Col. i. 11; [Eph. vi. 10 WH mrg.]; 
1 aor. ἐδυναμώθησαν, Heb. xi. 34 (RG éved.). (Ps. lxvii. 
(Ixviii.) 29; Eccl. x. 10; Dan. ix. 27 [Theod.; Ps. lxiv. 
(Ixv.) 4 Aq.; Job xxxvi. 9 Aq.] and occasionally in 660]. 
and Byz. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 605; [W. 26 
(25)]-) [Comr.: ἐν-δυναμόω.] ἡ 

δυνάστης, -ov, ὁ, (δύναμαι) : fr. [Soph. and] Hat. on; 
powerful ; 1. a prince, potentate: Lk. i. 52; used of 
God (Sir. xlvi. 5; 2 Mace. xv. 3, 23, ete.; of Zeus, Soph. 
Ant. 608), 1 Tim. vi. 15. 2. a courtier, high officer, 
royal minister: Acts viii. 27 [A. V. (a eunuch) of great 
authority; but see Meyer ad loc.], (δυνάσται Φαραώ, Gen. 
ΤΣ 

δυνατέω, -@; (δυνατός) ; to be powerful or mighty; show 
one’s self powerful: 2 Co. xiii. 3 (opp. to ἀσθενῶ) ; to be 
able, have power : foll. by an inf., Ro. xiv. 4 L T Tr WH; 
2 Co. ix.8 L T Tr WH. Not found in prof. writ. nor 
in the Sept.* 

δυνατός, -7, -dv, (δύναμαι) ; [fr. Pind. down], Sept. for 
31; able, powerful, mighty, strong; 1. absolutely; a. 
mighty in wealth and influence: 1 Co. i. 26; (Rev. vi. 15 
Rec.); οἱ δυνατοί, the chief men, Acts xxv. 5, (Joseph. 
b. j. 1, 12, 4 ἧκον ᾿Ιουδαίων οἱ δυνατοί; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 1; 
Thue. 1,89; Polyb. 9, 23,4). ὁ δυνατός, the preéminently 
mighty one, almighty God, Lk. i.49. b. strong in soul: 
to bear calamities and trials with fortitude and patience, 
2 Co. xii. 10; strong in Christian virtue, 2 Co. xiii. 9; 
firm in conviction and faith, Ro. xv. 1. 2. in con- 
struction; a. δυνατός εἶμι with inf., to be able (to do some- 
thing; [B. 260 (224); W. 319 (299) ]): Lk. xiv. 31; Acts 
xi. 17; Ro. iv. 21; xi. 23; xiv.4 RG; 2 Co.ix.8 RG; 
2 Tim. i. 12; Tit.i. 9; Heb. xi. 19 (Lehm. δύναται) ; Jas. 
lil. 2. b. δυνατὸς ἔν τινι, mighty i. 6. excelling in some- 
thing: ἐν ἔργῳ x. λόγῳ, Lk. xxiv. 19; ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις, 
Acts vil. 22; ἐν γραφαῖς, excelling in knowledge of the 
Scriptures, Acts xviii. 24. c. πρός τι, mighty i.e. having 
power for something: 2 Co. x. 4. ἃ. neuter δυνατόν [in 
pass. sense, cf. B. 190 (165) ] possible: εἰ δυνατόν (ἐστι), 
Mt. xxiv. 24; xxvi. 39; Mk. xiii. 22; xiv. 35; Ro. xii. 
18; Gal. iv. 15; οὐκ ἦν δυνατόν foll. by inf. Acts ii. 24; 
δυνατόν τί ἐστί τινι [B. 190 (165)], Mk. ix. 23; xiv. 36; 
Acts xx. 16; παρὰ θεῷ πάντα δυνατά ἐστι, Mt. xix. 26; Mk. 
x. 27; Lk. xviii. 27. τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, what his power 
could do, equiv. to τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ, Ro. ix. 22, cf. W. 
§ 34, 2.* 

δύνω, δύω: 2 aor. ἔδυν; 1 aor. (in Grk. writ. transi- 
tively) ἔδυσα (Mk. i. 32 L Tr WH), ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. 
ii. p. 156 sq.; W. p. 84 (81); B. 56 (49); [Veitch 5. vv.]; 


160 


δυσερμήνευτος 


to go into, enter; go under, be plunged into, sink in: ir the 
N. T. twice of the setting sun (sinking as it were into the 
sea), Mk. i. 32; Lk.iv.40. So times without number in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on; Sept., Gen. xxviii. 11; Lev. xxii. 
7, ete.; Tob. ii. 4; 1 Mace. x. 50. [Comp.: ἐκ-, ἀπ-εκ- 
(μαι), év-, ἐπ-εν-, παρ-εισ-, ἐπι-δύνω. * 

δύο, genit. indecl. δύο (as in Epic, and occasionally in 
Hadt., Thue., Xen., Polyb., al. for δυοῖν, more common in 
Attic [see Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 289 sq.]); dat. 
δυσί, δυσίν, ([-σί in Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts xxi. 33 
(Tr -civ),-oivin Mt. xxii. 40; Mk. xvi.12; Lk. xii.52(RG 
-ai); Acts xii. 6 (R GL-oi) ; Heb. x. 28; Rev. xi.3 (RG 
-ai) ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.98; WH. App. p. 147]—a form not 
found in the older and better writ., met with in Hippocr., 
Aristot., Theophr., frequent fr. Polyb. on, for the Attic 
δυοῖν); ace. δύο (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 210; Brim. Ausf. 
Spr. i. p. 276 sq.; W. § 9, 2 b.; Passow i. p. 729); two: 
absol., οὐκ ἔτι εἰσὶ δύο, ἀλλὰ σὰρξ μία, Mt. xix. 6; Mk. x. 8; 
δύο ἣ τρεῖς, Mt. xviii. 20; 1 Co. xiv. 29; τρεῖς ἐπὶ δυσὶ x. δύο 
ἐπὶ τρισί, Lk. xii. 52; ava and κατὰ δύο, two by two [W. 
898 (372); 401 (374); B. 30 (26)], Lk. ix.3 [WH om. 
Tr br. ἀνά]; x. 1 [WH ava δύο [ δύο]; ef. Acta Philip. 
8 36, ed. Tdf. p. 92]; Jn. ii. 6 [apiece]; 1 Co. xiv. 27; δύο 
δύο two and two, Mk. vi. 7 (so, after the Hebr., in Gen. 
vi. 19, 20; but the phrase is not altogether foreign even 
to the Grk. poets, as Aeschyl. Pers. 981 pupia pupia for 
κατὰ μυριάδας. cf. W. 249 (234), [ef. 39 (38) ]); neut. εἰς 
δύο into two parts, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; with gen. 
δύο τῶν μαθητῶν(αὐτοῦ), ΜΚ. xi. 1; xiv. 13; Lk. xix. 29; 
[Mt. xi. 2 RG]; τῶν οἰκετῶν, Acts x. 7. δύο ἐξ αὐτῶν, 
Lk. xxiv. 13 [ef. Bttm. 158 (138); Win. 203 (191)]. 
with a noun or pronoun: δύο δαιμονιζόμενοι, Mt. viii. 28. 
δύο μάχαιραι, Lk. xxii. 38; ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων, Mt. 
xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1; δυσὶ κυρίοις, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 
13; εἶδε δύο ἀδελφούς, Mt. iv. 18; preceded by the article, 
of δύο the two, the twain: Mt. xix. 5; Mk. x. 8; 1 Co. vi. 
16; Eph. v. 31; τοὺς δύο, Eph. ii. 15; ai [Rec. only] δύο 
διαθῆκαι, Gal. iv. 24; οὗτοι [ Lchm. br. οὗτ.] of δύο υἱοί μου, 
Mt. xx. 21; περὶ τῶν δύο ἀδελφῶν, Mt. xx. 24; ἐν ταύταις 
ταῖς δυσὶν ἐντολαῖς, Mt. xxii. 40; τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας, Mt. xiv. 
19; Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16; δύο δηνάρια, Lk. x. 35. 

Sus, an inseparable prefix conveying the idea of diffi- 
culty, opposition, injuriousness or the like, and 
corresponding to our mis-, un- [Curtius § 278]; opp. to ed. 

δυσ-βάστακτος. -ov, (Bacratw), hard [A. V. grievous] to 
be borne: Mt. xxiii. 4 [T WH txt. om. Tr br. δυσβάστ.] 
and Lk. xi. 46 φορτία δυσβάστακτα, said of precepts hard 
to obey, and irksome. (Sept. Prov. xxvii. 3; Philo, omn. 
prob. lib. §5; Plut. quaest. nat. c. 16, 4 p. 915 f.)* 

δυσεντερία, -as, 7, (ἔντερον intestine), dysentery, (Lat. 
tormina intestinorum, bowei-complaint): Acts xxviii. ἃ 
RG; see the foll. word. (Hippocr. and med. writ.; 
Hat., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., al.) * 

δυσεντέριον, -ov, τό, a later form for ducevrepia, ἢ. V- : 
Acts xxviii. 8 LT Tr WH. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 518.* 

δυσερμήνευτος, -ov, (ἑρμηνεύω), hard to interpret, diffi- 
cult of explanation: Heb.y.11. (Diod. 2, 52; Philo ce 

somn. ὃ 32 fin.; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) * 


δύσις 


[δύσις, -ews, 7; 1. a sinking or setting, esp. of the 
heavenly bodies; 2. of the quarter in which the sun 
sets, the west: Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘ Shorter Conclu- 
sion.’ (So both in sing. and in plur.: Aristot. de mund. 
3 p. 393,17; 4 p. 394”, 21; Polyb. 1, 42, 5 ete.)*] 

δύσκολος, -ov, (κόλον food) ; 1. prop. hard to find 
agreeable food for, fastidious about food. 2. difficult 
to please, always finding fault; (Eur., Arstph., Xen., 
Plat., al.). 3. univ. difficult (Xen. oec. 15, 10 ἡ yewp- 
yia δύσκολός ἐστι μαθεῖν) : πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστι; foll. by ace. 
with inf., Mk. x. 24.* 

δυσκόλως, adv., (δύσκολος), [fr. Plato down], with diffi- 
culty: Mt. xix. 23; Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24.* 

δυσμή, -ῆς. ἡ. [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], much often- 
er in plur. [W. § 27, 3] δυσμαί, ai, (δύω or δύνω, q.v-), 
se. ἡλίου, the setting of the sun: Lk. xii. 54 [ace. to the 
reading of T WH Tr mrg. ἐπὶ 5. may possibly be un- 
derstood of time (cf. W. 375 sq. (352)); see ἐπί, A.IL.; 
al. take the prep. locally, over, in, and give δυσμ. the 
meaning which follows ; see ἐπί, A. I. 1 b.]; the region of 
sunset, the west, [anarthrous, W.121 (115) ]: Rev. xxi. 13; 
ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ δυσμῶν, from all regions or nations, Mt. 
Vili. 11; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29; in Hebr. ΣΤ ΝΥ, 
Josh. i. 4. Often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. on, both with 
and without ἡλίου." 

δυσνόητος, -ov, (νοέω), hard to be understood : 2 Pet. 111. 
16. (χρησμός, Leian. Alex. 54; Diog. Laért. 9, 13 δυσ- 
νόητύν τε καὶ δυσεξήγητον ; [ Aristot. plant. 1,1 p. 816%,3].)* 

δυσφημέω, -ὦ : [ pres. pass. δυσφημοῦμαι] ; (δύσφημος) ; 
to use ill words, defame ; pass. to be defamed, 1 Co. iv. 13 
TWH Trmrg. (1 Mace. vii. 41; in Grk. writ. fr. Aes- 
chyl. Agam. 1078 down.) * 

δυσφημία, -as, 7, both the condition of a δύσφημος, i. 6. 
of one who is defamed, viz. ill-repute, and the action of 
one who uses opprobrious languag. viz. defamation, re- 
proach: διὰ δυσφημίας x. εὐφημίας [ A. V. by evil report and 
good report), 2 Co. vi. 8. (1 Mace. vii. 38; 3 Mace. ii. 
26. Dion. H. 6, 48; Plut. de gen. Soer. § 18 p. 587 f.) * 

δύω, see dive. 

δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; 
x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; 
Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve 
apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. 
BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε 

δωδέκατος, -n, -ov, twelfth: Rev. xxi. 20. [ Fr. Hom. on. }* 

δωδεκά-φυλον, -ov, τό, (fr. δώδεκα. and φυλή tribe), the 
twelve tribes, used collectively of the Israelitish people, as 
consisting of twelve tribes: Acts xxvi. 7. (Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 55, 6; Prot. Jac. ὁ. 1, 3; λαὸς 6 δωδεκάφυλος, Orac. 
Sibyll. Cf. δεκάφυλος, τετράφυλος, Hat. 5, 66; [W. 100 
(95)].)" 


101 


δωροφορία 


δῶμα, -τος, τό, (δέμω to build) ; 1. a building, house, 
(Hom. et sqq-). 2. a part of a building, dining-room, 
hall, (Hom. et sqq.). 3. in the Script. equiv. to 23, 
house-top, roof [W. 23]: Mt.xxiv. 17; Mk. xiii. 15; Lk. 
ν. 19; xvii. 81. The house-tops of the Orientals were 
(and still are) level, and were frequented not only for 
walking but also for meditation and prayer: Acts x. 9; 
hence ἐπὶ δωμάτων, on the house-tops, i. 6. in public: Mt. 
x. 27; Lk. xii. 3; ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα... . κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοὺς παντὸς 
Ἰσραήλ, 2 5. xvi. 22.* 

δωρεά, -ἂς, ἡ, (δίδωμι) ; from [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; 
a gift: Jn. iv. 10; Acts viii. 20; xi. 17; Ro. v. 15; 2 Co. 
ix. 15; Heh. vi. 4 ; ἡ χάρις ἐδόθη κατὰ τὸ μέτρον τῆς δωρεᾶς 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, according to the measure.in which Christ 
gave it, Eph. iv. 7; with an epexegetical gen. of the 
thing given, viz. τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος, Acts ii. 38; x. 45; 
δικαιοσύνης, Ro. v. 17 [L WH Tr mrg. br. τ. dap.]; τῆς 
χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, Eph. iii. 7. The ace. δωρεάν (prop. as 
a gift, gift-wise [cf. W. 230 (216); B. 153 (134)]) is used 
adverbially ; Sept. for 03m; 8. freely, for naught, gratis, 
gratuitously : Mt. x. 8; Ro. iii. 24; 2 Co. xi. 7; 2 Th. iii. 8; 
Rey. xxi. 6; xxii. 17, (Polyb. 18,17, 7; Ex. xxi. 11 ; δωρεὰν 
ἄνευ ἀργυρίου, Is. lii. 3). b. by a usage of which as yet 
no example has been noted fr. Grk. writ., without just 
cause, unnecessarily: Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 5; 
XXxxiv. (xxxv.) 19); Gal. ii. 21, (Job i.9[?]; Ps. xxxiv. 
(xxxv.) 7 [where Symm. ἀναιτίως ] ; so the Lat. gratuitus: 
Liv. 2, 42 gratuitus furor, Sen. epp. 105, 3 [bk. xviii. ep. 
2, § 3] odium aut est ex offensa... aut gratuitum). [Syn. 
see δόμα, fin. }* 

δωρεάν, see δωρεά. 

δωρέω, -@: 10 present, bestow, (Hes., Pind., Hdt., al.) ; 
pass. Lev. vii. 5 (Heb. text vs. 15). But much more 
frequently as depon. mid. δωρέομαι, -odpat (Hom. et sqq.): 
1 aor. ἐδωρησάμην ; pf. δεδώρημαι ; τινί τι, Mk. xv. 45; 
ΒΟΟΣ 5: 4: 

δώρημα. -τος, τό, (δωρέομαιν) ; a gift, bounty, benefaction : 
Ro. v.16; Jas.i. 17. ({Aeschyl.], Soph., Xen., al.) [Cf. 
δόμα, fin. | ἢ 

Sapov, -ov, τό. [fr. Hom. down], Sept. generally for 
j27P, often also for ANID and Ww; α gift, present: Eph. 
ii. 8; Rev. xi. 10; of gifts offered as an expression of 
honor, Mt. ii. 11; of sacrifices and other gifts offered to 
God, Mt. v. 23 sq.; viii. 4; xv.5; xxiii. 18 sq. ; Mk. vii. 
11; Heb. v. 1; viii. 3 sq.; ix. 9; xi. 4; of money cast into 
the treasury for the purposes of the temple and for the 
support of the poor, Lk. xxi. 1, [4]. [S¥N. see δόμα, fin. ] * 

δωροφορία, -as, 7), (δωρυφόρος bringing gifts), he offering 
of a gift or of gifis: Ro. xv. 31 L Trmrg. ef. διακονία, 3. 
(Aleiphr. 1, 6; Pollux 4, 47 [p. 371 ed. Hemst.]; several 
times in eccles. writ.) ἢ 


162 


E 


ἔα 


ἔα, an interjection expressive of indignation, or of 
wonder mixed with fear, (derived apparently from the 
impv. pres. of the verb ἐᾶν (acc. to others a natural, 
instinctive, sound]), freq. in the Attic poets, rare in 
prose writ. (as Plat. Prot. p. 314 d.), ha! ah!: Mk. i. 
24 RG; Lk. iv. 34; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 32 sq.* 
ἐάν ; I. aconditional particle (derived fr. εἰ ἄν), which 
makes reference to time and to experience, introducing 
something future, but not determining, before the event, 
whether it is certainly to take place; if, in case, (Lat. 
si; Germ. wenn; im Fall, dass; falls; wofern); οἴ.» among 
others, Hermann ad Viger. p.832; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 
p- 450 sqq.; W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with 
the Subjunctive, according to the regular usage of the 
more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the 
subjunc. Present: Mt. vi. 22 (ἐὰν οὖν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου 
ἁπλοῦς 7, if it be the case, as to which I do not know, 
that thine eye etc.); ibid. 23; xvii. 20; Lk. x. 6; Jn. vii. 
17; viii. 54 [RGL mrg.]; ix. 31; xi. 9,10; Acts v. 38; 
xiii. 41; Ro. ii. 25 sq.; 1 Co.ix.16; Gal. v. 2; 1 Tim. i. 
8 [not Lehm.]; Heb. xiii. 23; 1 Jn. i. 9; ii. 3, 15 ete. 
Ὁ. with the subjunc. Aorist, corresponding to the Lat. 
fut. perf.: Mt. iv. 9 (ἐὰν προσκυνήσῃς μοι if thou shalt 
have worshipped me) ; v. 46; ix. 21; Mk. iii. 24; ix. 50; 
Lk. xiv. 34; xvii. 4; xx. 28; Jn. v. 43; xi. 57; Ro. vii. 2; 
x. 9; 1 Co. vii. 8, 39: vill. 10; xvi. 10 (ἐὰν ἔλθῃ Τιμό- 
6eos; for although he was already on his way to Cor- 
inth, yet some hindrance might still prevent his arriv- 
ing) ; 2 Co. ix.4; Gal. vi. 1; Jas. ii. 2; 1 Jn. v. 16 [Lehm. 
pres. ]; Rev. iii. 20, and often ; also in the oratio obliqua, 
where the better Grk. writ. use the Optative : Jn. ix. 22; 
xi. 57; Acts ix. 2 (W. 294 (276); [ef. B. 224 (193)]). 
The difference between the Pres. and the Aor. may be seen 
especially from the following passages: 2 Tim. ii. 5 ἐὰν 
δὲ καὶ ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ, 1 
Co. xiv. 23 ἐὰν οὖν συνέλθῃη ἡ ἐκκλησία . . . καὶ πάντες γλώσ- 
cats λαλῶσιν, εἰσέλθωσι δὲ ἰδιῶται ἢ ἄπιστοι, vs. 24 ἐὰν δὲ 
πάντες προφητεύωσιν, εἰσέλθῃ δέ τις ἄπιστος, Mt. xxi. 21 
ἐὰν ἔχητε πίστιν καὶ μὴ διακριθῆτε. Also εἰ (“quod per 
-se nihil significat praeter conditionem,” Klotz 1. ¢. p. 
455) and ἐάν are distinguished in propositions subjoined 
the one to the other [W. 296 (277 sq.)]: Jn. xiii. 17 εἰ 
ταῦτα οἴδατε. μακάριοί ἐστε, ἐὰν ποιῆτε αὐτά, JN. iii. 12; 1 
Co. vii. 36; in statements antithetic, Acts v. 38 sq.; or 
parallel, Mk. iii. 24-26. Finally, where one of the evan- 
gelists uses εἰ another has ἐάν, but so that each particle 
retains its own force, inasmuch as one and the same thing 
is differently conceived of by the different minds: Mk. 
ix.43 ἐὰν σκανδαλίζῃ [-Aion Lmrg. T WH txt.] ἡ χείρ σου, 
and vs. 47 ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, i. 6. if so 


ἐάν 


be that ete.; on the other hand, Matthew, in xviii. 8 sq. 
and v. 29 sq. concerning the same thing saysei. ο. irreg- 
ularly, but to be explained as an imitation of the Hebr. ox 
which is also a particle of time (cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. s. v. 
4), ἐάν with the Subjune. Aor. is used of things which the 
speaker or writer thinks will certainly take place, where 
ὅταν when, whenever, should have been used: ἐὰν ὑψωθῶ, 
Jn. xii. 32; ἐὰν πορευθῶ, Jn. xiv. 3; ἐὰν φανερωθῇ, 1 Jn. 
ii. 28 (L Τ Tr WH, for ὅταν RG) ; iii. 2; ἐὰν ἀκούσητε, 
Heb. iii. 7 fr. Ps. xciv. (xev.) 8; (ἐὰν εἰσέλθης εἰς τὸν 
νυμφῶνα, Tob. vi. 17 (16) [al. ὅταν] ; ἐὰν ἀποθάνω, θάψον 
με, Tob. iv. 8, cf. vs. 4 ὅταν ἀποθάνῃ, θάψον αὐτήν; for OR 
when, Is. xxiv. 13; Am. vii. 2). ἅ. sometimes when the 
particle is used with the Subj. Aor. the futurity of a thing 
is not so much aflirmed as imagined, it being known to 
be something which never could happen: ἐὰν εἴπῃ ὁ 
ποῦς, if the foot should say, or were to say, 1 Co. xii. 
15; ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, 1 Co. xiv. 6. 
2. By a somewhat negligent use, met with from the 
time of Aristotle on, ἐάν is connected also with the I n- 
dicative, [cf. Klotz 1. 6. p. 468 sqq.; Kithner § 575 
Anm.5; W. 295 (277); B. 221 (191) sq.; Tdf. Proleg. 
p- 124 sq.; WH. App. p. 171; Soph. Lex. s. v.; Vin- 
cent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. § 77]; and 
a. with the indic. Future, in meaning akin, as is well 
known, to the subjunc.: [ἐὰν δύο συμφωνήσουσιν, Mt. 
xvili. 19 T Tr]; ἐὰν οὗτοι σιωπήσουσι, Lk. xix. 40 LT  Γτ 
WH; ἐὰν... ὁδηγήσει, Acts viii. 31 T Tr WH, (ἐὰν βεβη- 
λώσουσιν αὐτά, Ley. xxii.9); butalso  b. with the indic. 
Present: ἐὰν daveiCere, Lk. vi. 34 Lmrg. Trtxt.; ἐὰν 
στήκετε, 1 Th. iii. 8 T Trtxt. WH; ἐάν τε ἀποθνήσκομεν, 
Ro. xiv. 8 Lehm. with an indic. Preterite, but one 
having the force of a Pres.: éavy[Lchm. ἂν] οἴδαμεν, 1 Jn. 
y. 15 without var. 3. ἐάν joined with other particles ; 
a. ἐὰν δὲ καί but if also, but even if, [A. V. but and if (re- 
tained by R. V. in 1 Co.)]; with the Subjunc.: Mt. xviii. 
17; 1 Co. vii. 11, 28; 2 Tim.ii.5. ὍὌ. ἐὰν καί : Gal. vi. 
1. cc. ἐὰν μή if not, unless, except; with the subjunc. 
Present: Mt. x. 18; Lk. xiii. 3 [Lchm. txt. aor.]; Acts 
xv. 1 [Rec.]; 1 Co. viii. 8; ix. 16 [RGLmrg. TWH 
mrg.]; Jas. ii. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 21; with the subjune. Aorist : 
Mt. vi. 15; xviii. 35; Mk. iii. 27; Jn. 111. 3; viii. 24; 1 Co. 
xiv. 6 sq. 9; Ro. x.15; [xi. 23 RL]; 2 Tim. ii.5; Rev. ii. 
5,22 [RL], and often. with the Indicative pres. : ἐὰν μὴ 
πιστεύετε, Jn. x. 38 Ταῦ. In some passages, although the 
particles ἐὰν μή retain their native force of uniess, if not, 
yet so far as the sense is concerned one may translate 
them but that, without : Mt. xxvi. 42 (the cup cannot pass 
by without my drinking it); οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτόν, ἐὰν 
μὴ φανερωθῇ (Treg.), there is nothing hid, but that it shall 


ASA 
ἐάνπερ 


be made manifest (properly, nothing whatever is hid, ex- 
cept that it should be made manifest), Mk. iv. 22; οὐδείς 
ἐστιν, ὃς ἀφῆκεν οἰκίαν... ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ, but that shall re 
ceive (properly, unless he shall receive .. . it cannot be 
said that any one has left), Mk. x. 29, 30, [ef. B. § 149, 6. 
On the supposed use of ἐὰν μή (εἰ μή) as equiv. to ἀλλά, 
ef. Mey. on Mt. xii. 4; Gal. i. 7; ii. 16; Fritzsche on Ro. 
xiv. 14 fin.; Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. ll. ee. See εἰ, 
Til.8¢.8.] ἃἅ. ἐάνπερ [L Tr separately, ἐάν rep] if only, 
if indeed: Heb. iii. 6 (where L br. περ, and T Tr WH 
read ἐάν), 14; vi. 3; it occurs neither in the Sept. nor in 
the O. T. Apocr. ; on its use in Grk. writ. cf. Klotz, 1. e. 
|p. 483 sq. 6. ἐάντε... ἐάν Te, sive... sive, whether... 
or: Ro. xiv. 8; (often in Sept. for DN ... DN, as Ex. xix. 
13; Lev. iii. 1; Deut. xviii. 3). Cf. Kotz, |. ο. p. 479 
sq-; Kiihner ὃ 541; [B. 221 (191)]. 
seexav. II. The classic use of the conditional par- 
ticle ἐάν also in the contracted form ἄν (see p. 34” above) 
seems to have led the biblical writers of both Testaments 
to connect ἐάν with relative pronouns and adverbs in- 
stead of the potential particle ἄν, as ὃς ἐάν [so Tdf. in 
12 places], 6 ἐάν [so Tdf. uniformly], ete. (this use 
among prof. writ. is very doubtful, ef. W. p. 310 (291); 
B. 72 (63)): Mt. v.19; x. 14[RG]; xv.5; Mk. vi. 22 
sq.; Lk. ix. 48[WH ἄν]; xvii. 33; Acts vii. 7 [ΚΒ GT]; 
1 Co. vi. 18; Eph. vi. 8 [RG Ltxt.]; 3 In. 5, ete.; ὅπου 
ἐάν, Mt. viii. 19; xxvi.13; Mk. vi. 10[L Tr ἄν]. ὁσάκις 
ἐάν, Rey. xi. 6. οὗ ἐάν, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (1 Mace. vi. 36). 
καθὸ ἐάν, 2 Co. viii. 12 [Tdf. av; ὅστις ἐάν, Gal. v.10 T 
Tr WH; ἥτις ἐάν, Acts iii. 23 Tdf. For many other exx. 
see Soph. Lex. 5. v. ἐάν, 3.] In many places the codd. 
vary between ἐάν and ἄν; cf. ἄν, II. p. 34; [andesp. Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 96]. 
ἐάν-περ, see ἐάν, I. 3 ἃ. 
ἑαυτοῦ, -7s, -ov, etc. or (contracted) αὑτοῦ, -js, -ov, (see 
p- 87); plur. ἑαυτῶν ; dat. -ois, -ais, -ois, etc. ; reflexive 
pronoun of the 3d person. It is used 1. of the 3d 
pers. sing. and plur., to denote that the agent and the 
person acted on are the same; as, σώζειν ἑαυτόν, Mt. 
xxvil. 42; Mk. xv. 31; Lk. xxiii. 35; ὑψοῦν ἑαυτόν, Mt. 
xxiii. 12, ete. ἑαυτῷ, ἑαυτόν are also often added to 
middle verbs: διεμερίσαντο ἑαυτοῖς, Jn. xix. 24 (Xen. 
mem. 1, 6,13 ποιεῖσθαι ἑαυτῷ φίλον) ; cf. W. § 38, 6; [B. 
§ 135,6]. Of the phrases into which this pronoun enters 
we notice the following: ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, see ἀπό, II. 2d. aa. ; 
δ ἑαυτοῦ of itself, i. 6. in its own nature, Ro. xiv. 14 [Tr 
L txt. read atr.]; ἐν ἑαυτῷ, see in διαλογίζεσθαι. λέγειν, 
εἰπεῖν. εἰς ἑαυτὸν ἔρχεσθαι to come to one’s self, to ἃ 
better mind, Lk. xv. 17 (Diod. 13, 95). καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν by 
one’s self, alone: Acts xxviii. 16; Jas.ii. 17. παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, 
by him i.e. at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2 (Xen. mem. 3, 13, 3). 
πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to himself i. 6. to his home, Lk. xxiv. 12 
[RG; T om., WH (but with air.) reject, L Tr (but the 
latter with air.) br., the verse]; Jn. xx. 10 [T Tr air. 
(see αὑτοῦ) ]; with [ef. our to] himself, i. 6. in his own mind, 
προσεύχεσθαι, Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf. om.], (2 Mace. xi. 13) ; 
in the gen., joined with a noun, it has the force of a pos- 
sessive pronoun, as τοὺς ἑαυτῶν vexpovs: Mt. viii. 22; Lk. 


f. κἄν for καὶ ἐάν, 


163 


‘EBpaios 

ix. 60. 2. It serves as reflexive also to the Ist and 2d 
pers., as often in classic Greek, when no ambiguity is 
thereby occasioned; thus, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς equiv. to ἐν ἡμῖν av- 
τοῖς, Ro. yiii. 23; ἑαυτούς equiv. to ἡμᾶς αὐτούς, 1 Co. xi. 
31; ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ i. q. ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ [read by L Tr WH], Jn. 
xviii. 34; ἑαυτόν i. 4. σεαυτόν [read by 1, T Tr WH], Ro. 
xili. 9; ἑαυτοῖς for ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς. Mt. xxiii. 31, etc.; cf. Mat- 
thiae § 489 II.; W.§ 22, 5; [B. § 127, 15]. 3. It is 
used frequently in the plural for the reciprocal pronoun 
ἀλλήλων, ἀλλήλοις, ἀλλήλους, reciprocally, mutually, one 
another: Mt. xvi. 7; xxi. 38; Mk. x. 26 [Trmrg. WH 
αὐτόν]; xvi. 3; Lk. xx. 5; Eph. iv. 32; Col. iii. 13,16; 
1 Pet. iv. 8, 10; see Matthiae § 489 III. ; Kihnerii. p. 497 
sq-; Bnhdy. p. 273; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 13]. 

édw, -@; impf. εἴων ; fut. ἐάσω ; 1 8ογ. εἴασα; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. to allow, permit, let: foll. by the inf., οὐκ 
ἂν εἴασε διορυγῆναι [T Tr WH -χθῆναι], Mt. xxiv. 43; by 
the acc. of the person and the inf., Lk. iv. 41 (οὐκ εἴα αὐτὰ 
λαλεῖν); Acts xiv. 16; xxiii. 32; xxvii. 32; xxviii.4; 1 Co. 
x. 13; by the ace. alone, when the inf. is easily supplied 
from the context, οὐκ εἴασεν αὐτούς, sc. πορευθῆναι, Acts 
Xvi. 7; οὐκ εἴων αὐτόν, sc. εἰσελθεῖν, Acts xix. 30; [ef. W. 
476 (444) ]. 2. τινά, to suffer one to do what he wishes, 
not to restrain, to let alone: Rev. ii. 20 Rec.; Acts v. 38 
RG; ἐᾶτε se. αὐτούς, is spoken by Christ to the apostles, 
meaning, ‘do not resist them, let them alone,’ (the fol- 
lowing ἕως τούτου is to be separated from what precedes; 
[8]. connect the words closely, and render ‘ suffer them 
to go even to this extreme’; but cf. Mey. ad loc. ed. 
Weiss]), Lk. xxii. 51. 3. To give up, let go, leave: 
τὰς ἀγκύρας... εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, they let down into 
the sea [i. 6. abandoned; cf. B. D. Am. δα. p. 8009" bot.], 
Acts xxvii. 40. [Comp.: mpoo-edw. |* 

ἑβδομήκοντα, οἱ, ai, τά, [fr. Hdt. down], seventy: Acts 
vii. 14 [here Rec.* ἑβδομηκονταπέντε]):; XXiii. 23; xxvii. 
37; οἱ ἑβδομήκοντα [ ἐβδ. δύο L br. WH br.], the seventy 
disciples whom Jesus sent out in addition to the twelve 
apostles: Lk. x. 1,17. [B. D. Am. ed. 8. v. Seventy Dis- 
ciples. ] * 

[ἑβδομηκοντατέξ for ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ, seventy-six: Acts 
xxvii. 37 Rec.*] 

ἑβδομηκοντάκις, [Gen. iv. 24], seventy times: ἑβδομηκον- 
τάκις ἑπτά, seventy times seven times, i. e. countless times, 
Mt. xviii. 22 [cf. W. 8 37,5 Note 2; B. 30 (26) and see 
ἑπτά, fin.; al. (cf. R. V. mrg.) seventy-seven times, see 
Mey. ad loc. ].* 

[ἑβδομηκοντα-πέντε, seventy-five: Acts vii. 14 Rec.c# 
(Gen. xxv. 7; Ex. xxxix. 6 (xxxviii. 27); 1 Esdr. v.12).*] 

ἕβδομος, -n, -ov, seventh: In. iv. 52; Heb. iv. 4; Jude 
14; Rev. viii. 1; xi. 15, ete. [From Hom. down.] 

Ἐβέρ [R* G], more correctly [L T WH]”E§ep [on the 
accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Treg. E8., οἵ. 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. § 408; cf. B. D.s. v. 
Heber], 6, Eber or Heber, indeclinable proper name of a 
Hebrew: Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24 sq.).* 

Ἕβραϊκός, -7, -dv, Hebrew: Lk. xxiii. 38 (RGL br. Tr 
mre. br.).* 
Ἕβραϊος [WH ’Efp., see their Intr. § 408], -ov, 6, a 


“EBpais 


Hebrew (7 2y a name first given to Abraham, Gen. xiv. 
13, afterwards transferred to his posterity descended 
from Isaac and Jacob; by it in the O. 'T. the Israelites 
are both distinguished from and designated by foreign- 
ers, as afterwards by Pausan., Plutarch, al. The name 


is now generally derived from 43 for 7737 7p 1. 6. of 


the region beyond the Euphrates, whence ‘2) equiv. to 
one who comes from the region beyond the Euphrates; Gen. 
xiv. 13 Sept. 6 περάτης. Cf. Gesenius, Gesch. d. hebr. 
Sprache ἃ. Schrift, p. 11 sq.; Thesaurus, ii. p. 987; 
Knobel, Volkertafel der Genesis, p. 176 sqq.; Bleek, Einl. 
ind. A. T. ed. 1, p. 73 sq. [Eng. trans. i. 76 sq.]; [B. Ὁ. 
s.v. Hebrew. For Syn. see Iovdaios.]). Inthe N.T. 1. 
any one of the Jewish or Israelitish nation: 2 Co. xi. 22; 
Phil. iii. 5. (In this sense Euseb. ἢ. e. 2, 4, 3 calls Philo, 
the Alexandrian Jew, Ἑβραῖος, although his education 
was Greek, and he had little [if any] knowledge even of 
the Hebrew language; and in Praep. evang. 8, 8, 34 he 
applies the same word to Aristobulus, who was both an 
Alexandrian, and a Greek-speaking Jew.) 2. In a nar- 
rower sense those are called “Ἑβραῖοι who lived in Pales- 
tine and used the language of the country, i. e. Chaldee; 
from whom are distinguished οἱ Ἑλληνισταί, q. v- That 
name adhered to them even after they had gone over to 
Christianity: Acts vi.1. (Philo in his de conf. lingg.§ 26 
makes a contrast between Ἑβραῖοι and ἡμεῖς ; and in his 
de congr. erud. grat. § 8 he calls Greek ἡ ἡμετέρα διάλεκτος. 
Hence in this sense he does not reckon himself as a He- 
brew.) 3. All Jewish Christians, whether they spoke 
Aramaic or Greek, equiv. to πιστοὶ ἐξ Ἑβραίων ; so in the 
heading of the Epistle to the Hebrews; called by Euseb. 
h. e. 3, 4, 2 of ἐξ Ἑβραίων ὄντες. [Cf. K. Wieseler, Unters. 
u. ἃ. Hebraerbrief, 2te Halfte. Kiel, 1861, pp. 25-30.]* 
“Efpats [WH ’Ep., see their Intr. § 408], -iSos, ἡ, He- 
brew, the Hebrew language; not that however in which 
the O. T. was written, but the Chaldee (not Syro-Chal- 
daic, as it is commonly but incorrectly called; ef. A. 
Th. Hoffmann, Grammat. Syriac. p. 14), which at the 
time of Jesus and the apostles had long superseded it 
in Palestine: Acts xxi. 40; xxii. 2; xxvi. 14; EBpats φωνή, 
4 Mace. xii. 7; xvi. 15. [Cf. B. Ὁ. 5. v. Shemitie Lan- 
guages etc.; ib. Am. ed.s.v. Lang. of the New Test. ]* 
‘EBpaiorl [WH ἜἜβρ., see their Intr. § 408], adv., 
(€Bpaitw), in Hebrew, i. e. in Chaldee (see the foregoing 
word and reff.) : Jn. v. 2; xix. 13,17, 20; [xx. 16 T Tr 
WH Lbr.]; Rev. ix. 11; xvi. 16. [Sir. prol. line 13.]* 
ἐγγίζω ; imp. ἤγγιζον ; Attic fut. ἐγγιῶ (Jas. iv.8 [Bttm. 
37 (32); W. § 13, 1 e.]); 1 aor. ἤγγισα; pf. ἤγγικα; 
(ἐγγύς) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. and Diod. on; Sept. for 
Wj) and 3p. 
to another: Polyb. 8, 6, 7; Sept., Gen. xlviii. 10; Is. v. 
8. 2. intrans. 10. draw or come near, to approach ; 
absol., Mt. xxi. 34; Lk. xviii. 40; [xix. 41]; xxi. 28; 
Xxil. 1; xxiv. 15; Acts vil. 17; 


1. trans. to bring near, to join one thing 


xxi. 33; xxiii. 15; [ Heb. 
x. 25]; pf. ἤγγικε has come nigh, is at hand: ἡ βασιλ. τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Mt. iii. 2; x. 7; Mk.1.15; Lk. x. 11; with 
the addition ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς, vs. 9; ἡ ἐρήμωσις, Lk. xxi. 20; ἡ 
ὥρα. Mt. xxvi. 45; ὁ παραδιδούς pe, Mt. xxvi. 46; [Mk. 


iv. 17; 


164 ἐγγύς 


xiv. 42 (where Tdf. ἤγγισεν}; ὁ καιρός, Lk. xxi. 8; ἡ 
ἡμέρα, Ro. xiii. 12; τὸ τέλος, 1 Pet. iv. 7; ἡ παρουσία τοῦ 
κυρίου, Jas. v. 8. Construed with the dat. of the person or 
the place approached: Lk. vii. 12; xv. 1, 25; xxii. 47; 
Acts ix. 3; x.9; xxii. 6; ἐγγίζειν τῷ θεῷ (in Sept. used esp. 
of the priests entering the temple to offer sacrifices or to 
perform other ministrations there, Ex. xix. 22; xxxiv. 30; 
Ley. x. 3, etc.) : to worship God, Mt. xv. 8 Ree., fr. Is. 
xxix. 13; to turn one’s thoughts to God, to become ac- 
quainted with him, Heb. vii. 19 ; Jas. iv. 8; ὁ θεὸς ἐγγίζει 
τινί, God draws near to one in the bestowment of his 
grace and help, Jas. iv.8. Foll. by εἰς and the ace. of the 
place: Mt. xxi. 1; Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xviii. 35; xix. 29; xxiv. 
28; [foll. by πρός w. the dat., Lk. xix. 37, see B. § 147, 28; 
al. regard this as a pregn. constr., ef. W. §§ 48, e.; 66, 
2d.J; μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισε, to draw nigh unto, be at the 
point of, death, Phil. ii. 30 (ἐγγίζειν εἰς θάνατον, Job xxxiii. 
22); with an adv. of place, ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει, Lk. 
xii. 38. [Comp.: mpoo-eyyitw. | * 

[€yyore, neut. plur. superl. (fr. ἐγγύς) as adv., nearest, 
next: WH (rejected) mrg. in Mk. vi. 36 (al. κύκλῳ)."} 

€y-ypadw [Ἴ WH evyp., see ἐν, III. 3]: pf. pass. ἐγγέ- 
ypappa; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; to engrave ; in- 
scribe, write in or on: τί, pass. with dat. of the means 
[with] and foll. by ἐν with dat. of the place (in minds, 
tablets), 2 Co. iii. 2,3; to record, enrol: τὰ ὀνόματα, pass. 
τ κι σ᾿ 20 in ὙΜΈΕΠ 

éyyvos, -ov, 6, 9, a surety, (Cic. and Vulg. sponsor): 
κρείττονος διαθήκης ἔγγυος, he by whom we get full assur- 
ance of the more excellent covenant made by God with 
us, and of the truth and stability of the promises con- 
nected with it, Heb. vii. 22. (2 Mace. x. 28; Sir. xxix. 
15 sq. Xen. vect. 4,20; Aeschin. Epp. 11,12 p. 128 a.; 
Aristot. oec. 2, 22 [vol. ii. p. 1850", 19], Polyb., Diod., al.)* 

ἐγγύς, adv., (fr. ἐν and yviov [limb, hand], at hand; [but 
rather allied w. ἄγχι. ayy, anzius, anguish, ete.; see 
Curtius § 166; Vanicek p. 22]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 
for 2 ; near; 1. of Place and position; a. 
prop. : absol. Jn. xix. 42, [ef. also 20 G 1, Τ Tr WH (but 
see below)]; with gen. (Matthiae ὃ 339, 1 p. 812; W. 
195 (188); [471 (439); Β. § 132, 247), Lk. xix.11; Jn. 
iii. 23; vi. 19, 23; xi. 18,54; xix. 20 [Rec., but see above]; 
Acts i. 12; with dat. (Matthiae § 386, 6; Kiihner ὃ 428, 
13; [Jelf § 592, 2]), Acts ix. 38; xxvii. 8. b. trop- 
ically; of ἐγγύς, those who are near of access to God i.e. 
Jews, and οἱ μακράν, those who are alien from the true 
God and the blessings of the theocracy, i. e. Gentiles : 
Eph. ii. 17 (cf. Is. lvii. 19) ; ἐγγὺς γίνεσθαι, to be brought 
near, se. to the blessings of the kingdom of God, Eph. ii. 
13, (so with the Rabbins not infrequently to make nigh 
is equiv. to to make a proselyte, cf. Wetstein ad 1. ¢.; 
[Schéttgen, Horae ete. i. 761 sq.; Valek. Schol. i. 363]) ; 
ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, near thee i. e. at hand, already. 
as it were, in thy mind, Ro. x. 8 fr. Deut. xxx. 14, [ef. 
B.§ 129,11; W. 465 (434) ]. 2. of Time; concern- 
ing things imminent and soon to come to pass: Mt. xxiv. 
32: xxvi. 18; Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30, 31; Jn. 11. 13; 


vi. 4; vii. 2; xi. 55; Rev.i. 3; xxii. 10; of the near ad- 


ἐγγύτερον 


vent of persons: ὁ κύριος ἐγγύς, of Christ’s return from 
heaven, Phil. iv. 5 (in another sense, of God in Ps. exliv. 
(exlv.) 18); with the addition ἐπὶ θύραις, at the door, 
Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; ἐγγὺς κατάρας, near to being 
cursed, Heb. vi. 8; ἀφανισμοῦ, soon to vanish, Heb. viii. 
18." 

ἐγγύτερον, neut. of the compar. ἐγγύτερος (fr. ἐγγύς), 
used adverbially, nearer: Ro. xiii. 11.* 

éyelpw; fut. ἐγερῶ; 1 aor. ἤγειρα; Pass., pres. ἐγείρο- 
pat, impv. 2 pers. sing. ἐγείρου (Mk. ii. 9 Tr WH), Lk. 
viii. 54 (where L Tr WH ἔγειρε), 2 pers. plur. ἐγείρεσθε; 
pf. ἐγήγερμαι; 1 aor. ἠγέρθην (cf. B. 52 (45); W. § 38, 
1]; 1 fut. ἐγερθήσομαι; Mid., 1 aor. impy. ἔγειμαι Ree. ; 
but, after good codd., Grsb. has in many pass. and lately 
LT Tr WH have everywhere in the N. T. restored 
ἔγειρε, pres. act. impv. used intransitively and employed as 
a formula for arousing ; properly, rise, i. e. up / come! cf. 
dye; soin Eur. Iph. A.624; Arstph. ran. 340; οἵ. Fritzsche 
on Mk. p. 55; [B. 56 (49), 144 (126) sq.; Kiihner 8 373, 
2]; Sept. generally for yn and O°); to arouse, cause 
to rise; 1. asin Grk. writ. fr. Homer down, to arouse 
From sleep, to awake: Acts xii. 7; [Mk. iv. 38 T Tr WH]; 
pass. to be awaked, wake up, (A. V. arise, often including 
thus the subseq. action (cf. 3 below) ]: Mt. xxv. 7; Mk. iv. 
27; [ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, Mt.i. 24 LT Tr WH); ἐγερθείς with 
the impv. Mt. ii. 13, 20; with a finite verb, Mt. ii. 14, 21; 
viii. 26; [LK. viii. 24 R GL Trmrg.]; ἐγείρεσθε, Mt. xxvi. 
46; Mk. xiv. 42. Metaph. ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι, to arise 
from a state of moral sloth to an active life devoted to 
God, Ro. xiii. 11; likewise ἔγειρε [Ree. -par] arise, ὁ 
καθεύδων, Eph. v. 14. 
death, to recall the dead to life: with νεκρούς added, Jn. 
v.21; Acts xxvi. 8; 2Co.i. 9. ἔγειρε [Ree. -par] arise, 
Mk. ν. 41; pass. ἐγείρου, Lk. viii. 54 [ἢ α ΤΊ; ἐγέρθητι, 
arise from death, Lk. vii. 14; ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί, Mt. xi. 
5; Lk. vil. 22; xx.37; 1 Co. xv. 15, 16, 29, 32, (Is. xxvi. 
19); ἐγείρειν ἐκ νεκρῶν, from the company of the dead 
[ef. W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78)], Jn. xii. 1,9; Acts iii. 15; 
iv. 10; xiii. 30; Ro. iv. 24; viii. 11; x. 9; Gal. i. 1; Eph. 
TOR (01. 10 ΤῸ ebb ats 10... ebs κι. 19.:.1 Pet-a 20): 
pass., Ro. vi. 4, 9; vii. 4; 1 Co. xv. 12, 20; Jn. ii. 22; xxi. 
14; Mk. vi. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. ἐκ vexp.]; Lk. ix. 7; 
[Mt. xvii. 9 L T Tr WH txt.]; ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, Mt. xiv. 
25 xxvii. 64; xxviii. 7, (νεκρὸν ἐκ θανάτου καὶ ἐξ adov, Sir. 
xlviii. 5; for PO, 2 K. iv. 31); ἐγείρειν simply: Acts 
v. 30; x.40; xiii. 37; 1 Co. vi. 14; 2Co. iv. 14; pass., Mt. 
xvi. 21; xvii. 23 [L WH mre. ἀναστήσεται]; [xx.19 T Tr 
txt. WH txt.]; xxvi. 32; xxvii. 63; Mk. [vi. 16 T WH 
(see above) ]; xvi. 6; Lk. xxiv. 6 [WH reject the clause], 
34; Ro. iv. 25; 1 Co. xv. 4, ete. 3. in later usage gen- 
erally to cause to rise, raise, from a seat, bed, ete.; pass. 
and mid. fo rise, arise; used a. of one sitting: éyet- 
pera [L. Tr WH ἠγέρθη ταχύ. Jn. xi. 29, ef. vs. 20; pres. 
act. imperative ἔγειρε (see above), Mk. x. 49 [not Ree. }, 
cf. vs. 46 ; hence (like the Hebr. 03), Gen. xxii. 3; 1 Chr. 
xxii. 19), in the redundant manner spoken of s. v. ἀνίστημι, 
II. 1 e. it is used before verbs of going, ete.: ἐγερθεὶς 
ἠκολούθει [-ησεν RG] αὐτῷ, Mt. ix. 19; ἔγειρε [R G -ραι] 


165 


2. to arouse from the sleep of 


ἐγκαίνια 
καὶ μέτρησον, Rey. χὶ. 1. ὍὌ. of one reclining: ἐγείρεται 
ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου, Jn. xili. 45 ἐγείρεσθε, Jn. xiv. 81. ο. of 
one lying, to raise up: ἤγειρεν αὐτόν, Acts x. 26; ἐγέρθητε 
arise, Mt. xvii. 7; ἔγειρε (see above) Acts iii. 6 [L Tr 
txt. br.]; ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς he rose from the earth, 
Acts ix. 8; 10 [raise up i. e.] draw out an animal from a 
pit, Mt. xii. 11. ἃ. of one ‘down’ with disease, lying 
sick: act., Mk. ix. 27; Acts iii. 7; ἐγερεῖ αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος. 
will cause him to recover, Jas. v. 15; pass. Mt. viii. 15, 
ἔγειρε ([ Rec. -ραι, so Grsb. (doubtfully in Mt.) ], see above) 
arise: Mt. ix.5; Jn.v.8; Acts iii. 6 [T WH om. Tr br. ]. 
4. To raise up, produce, cause to appear; a. to cause to 
appear, bring before the public (any one who is to attract 
the attention of men): ἤγειρε τῷ ᾿Ισραὴλ σωτῆρα, Acts 
xiii. 23 Ree.; ἤγειρεν αὐτυῖς τὸν Δαυεὶδ eis βασιλέα, Acts 
xiii. 22 (so DDT, Judg. ii. 18; iii. 9,15); pass. ἐγείρομαι, 
to come before the public, to appear, arise: Mt. xi. 11; xxiv. 
11, 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Lk. vii. 16; Jn. vii. 52 [cf. W. 266 
(250); B. 204 (177)]; contextually, to appear before a 
judge: Mt. xii.42; Lk. xi. 81. ὍὌ. ἐπί τινα to raise up, 
incite, stir up, against one; pass. to rise against: Mt. xxiv. 
7; Mk. xiii.8; Lk. xxi.10. 6. to raise up i. 6. cause to 
be born: τέκνα τινί, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; κέρας σωτηρίας, 
Lk. i. 69 (see ἀνίστημε, I. c. ἐξανίστημι, 1); θλίψιν τοῖς 
δεσμοῖς μου, to cause affliction to arise to my bonds, i. e. 
the misery of my imprisonment to be increased by trib- 
ulation, Phil. i. 16 (17) 1. Tr WH. ἃἅ. of buildings, 
to raise, construct, erect: τὸν ναόν, Jn. ii. 19 sq. (so DDT, 
Deut. xvi. 22; 1 Καὶ. xvi. 32. Aelian. de nat. an. 11, 10; 
Joseph. antt. 4, 6,5; Hdian. 3, 15, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; 8, 2,12 
[5 ed. Bekk.]; Leian. Psendomant. § 19; Anthol. 9, 696. 
1 Esdr. v. 43; Sir. xlix.13; Lat. excito turrem, Caes. b. «. 
5, 40; sepulcrum, Cie. legg. 2, 27,68). [Ammonius: ava- 
στῆναι καὶ ἐγερθῆναι διαφέρει: ἀναστῆναι μὲν yap ἐπὶ 
ἔργον, ἐγερθῆναι δὲ ἐξ ὕπνου; ef. also Thom. Mag. 
ed. Ritschl p. 14, 10 sq. But see exx. above. Comp.: 
δι-. ἐξ-, ἐπ-, συν-εγείρω.] 

ἔγερσις, -ews, 1), (ἐγείρω). a rousing, excitation : τοῦ θυμοῦ. 
Plat. Tim. p. 70 ¢.; a rising up, Ps. exxxviii. (exxxix.) 
2; resurrection from death: Mt. xxvii. 53.* 

ἐγκάθετος [T WH ἐνκ., see ἐν, IIT. 3], -ov, 6, 9, (ἐγκαθί- 
nue [to send down in (secretly)]), suborned to lie in 
wait; a lier-in-wait, spy, (cf. Lat. insidiator; Eng. insid- 
ious]: used in Lk. xx. 20 of one who is suborned by 
others to entrap a man by crafty words. (Plat. Ax. p. 
368 6. ; Dem. p. 1483, 1; Joseph. b. j.6,5, 2; Polyb. 13, 
5, 1, al.; Sept., Job [xix. 12]; xxxi. 9.)* 

ἐγκαίνια [1 WH evx., see ἐν, IIT. 3], -ων, ra, (fr. ἐν and | 
kawvos) ; only in bibl. and 660]. writ., [on the plur. cf. W. 
§ 27, 3; B. 23 (21)]; dedication, consecration; thus in 2 
Esdr. vi. 16, 17; Neh. xii. 27 for 931M; in particular, 
[Vulg. encaenium i. 6. renovation], an annual feast cele- 
brated eight days beginning on the 25th of Chisley (mid- 
dle of our December), instituted by Judas Maccabaeus 
[B. c. 164] in memory of the cleansing of the temple from 
the pollutions of Antiochus Epiphanes (αἱ ἡμέραι ἐγκαι- 
νισμοῦ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου, 1 Mace. iv. 59): Jn. x. 22. Cf. 
Win. RWB. [aso Riehm, HWB.] s. v. Kirchweihfest ; 


ἐγκαινίζω 


Oehler in Herzog iv. p. 389; Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 54; 
iv. 52; Dillmann in Schenkel iii. 534 sq.; [BB.DD. 
(esp. Kitto) s. v. Dedication, Feast of the].* 

éy-Katvitw [ΠῚ Wil ἐνκ., see ἐν, ΠῚ. 3}: 1 aor. ἐνεκαίνισα; 
pf. pass. ἐγκεκαίνισμαι ; a word exclusively bibl. and ecel. 
[W. 33]; to innovate, i. e. 1. torenew: 2 Chr. xv. 8. 
2. to do anew, again: σημεῖα, Sir. Xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 6. 
3. to initiate, consecrate, dedicate, (Deut. xx. 5; 1 K. 
vill. 63; 1. xi. 14, etc.): διαθήκην, Heb. ix. 18; ὁδόν, 
Heb. x. 20." 

éy-kakéw, -@ [(see below); 1 aor. évexdxnoa]; (κακός); 
[prop. to behave badly in; hence] to be weary in any- 
thing, or fo lose courage, flag, faint: adopted by L T Tr 
WHI in place of R ἃ ἐκκακέω (q. v.) in Lk. xviii. 1; 2 Co. 
iv. 1,16; Gal. vi. 9; Eph. iii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 13 — except 
that T WIL write ἐνκ. in Lk. xviii. 1; Gal. vi. 9; Eph. 
iii. 13; so WH in 2 Th. iii. 13, also; see ἐν, III. 3; [ef. 
Tdf.’s note on 2 Co. iv. 1; Meyer ibid., who thinks that 
ἐκκ. may have been a colloquial form. See the full exhi- 
bition of the usage of the Mss. given by Dr. Gregory in 
his Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8, p. 78.] (Found a few times in 
Symmachus [Gen. xxvii. 46; Num. xxi. 5; Is. vii. 16; 
also Proy. iii. 11 Theod.]; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 2, 2; in 
prof. writ. only in Polyb. 4, 19, 10 τὸ πέμπειν τὰς βοηθείας 
ἐνεκάκησαν they culpably neglected to send aid, [add 
Philo de confus. lingg. § 13 (Mang. i. 412, 36) οὐκ ἐκκα- 
κούμενος ἐκνάμφθην .)* 

ἐγ-καλέω | see ev, III. 37 -ὦ ; fut. ἐγκαλέσω ; impf. ἐνεκά- 
Aovy; [ pres. pass. ἐγκαλοῦμαι ] ; prop. to call (something) in 
some one (ἐν [i. e. prob. in his case; or possibly, as rooted 
in him]); hence, fo call to account, bring a charge against. 
accuse: as in classic Grk. foll. by dat. of the person [ef. 
W. $30, 9 a.], Acts xix. 38; xxiii. 28, (Sir. xlvi. 19) ; κατά 
with gen. of the pers. to come forward as accuser against, 
bring a charge against: Ro. viii. 33. Pass. to be accused 
(ef. B. $134, 4, [§ 133, 9; yet ef. Mey. on Acts as below, 
W..u.s.]); with gen. of the thing: στάσεως, Acts xix. 
40, (ἀσεβείας ἐς τὸν Τιβέριον ἐγκληθείς, Dio Cass. 58, 4; 
act. with dat. of the pers. and gen. of the thing, Plut. 
Arist. 10,9; see W.u.s.; Matthiae § 369); περὶ rov- 
των, ὧν ἐγκαλοῦμαι, unless this is to be resolved into περὶ 
τούτων ἅ etc., ace. to the well-known construction ἐγκα- 
λεῖν τινί τι, Acts xxvi. 2; περί twos (act. Diod. 11, 83) 
Acts xxiii. 29; xxvi. 7, [B. § 133, 9]. (In Grk. writ. fr. 
Soph. and Xen. down.) [Syn. see κατηγυρέω, fin.]* 

éy-kata-Aelrw [Acts ii. 27, 31, TWH ἐνκ.; T also in 
Ro. ix. 29, see his note and cf. ἐν, III. 3]; [impf. ἐγκατέ- 
Aecrov (WII txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16)]; fut. ἐγκαταλείψω; 
2 aor. ἐγκατέλιπον ; Pass., [pres. ἐγκαταλείπομαι} ; 1 aor. 
ἐγκατελείφθην; Sept. for 373); 1. to abandon, desert, 
(ἐν equiv. to ἔν τινι, in some place or condition), i. 6. to 
leave in straits, leave helpless, (colloq. leave in the lurch) : 
τινά, Mt. xxvii. 46 and Mk. xv. 34 tr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2; 
Heb. xiii. 5; pass. 2 Co. iv. 9; after the Hebr. 3:y with 
ch τινὰ εἰς ἄδου [or ἄδην], by forsaking one to let him go 
into Hades, abandon unto Hades, Acts ii. 27, 31 (not R). 
to desert, forsake : τινά, 2 Vim. iv. 10, 16; τὴν ἐπισυναγωγήν, 


Heb. x. 25. 2. to leave behind among, to leave surviv- 


166 


ἐγκράτεια 
ing: ἡμῖν σπέρμα, Ro. ix. 29 fr. Is. i. 9. (Hes. opp. 376, 
Thue., sqq.)* 

ἐγ-κατ-οικέω [Ἴ WH eve., see ἐν, III. 3], -@; to dwell 
among: ἐν αὐτοῖς among them, 2 Pet. ii. 8. (Very rare 
in prof. writ. as [Hdt. 4, 204]; Eur. frag. [188] ap. Dion 
Chrys. or. 73 fin.; Polyb. 18, 26, 13.) * 

éy-kavxdopar [T WH ἐνκ., see ἐν, III. 3]; to glory in: 
foll. by ἐν with dat. of the obj. (Ps. li. (lii.) 8; xevi. (xevii.) 
7; ev. (evi.) 47), 2 ΤῊ. 1.41, Ὁ Tr WH. (With simple 
dat. of thing in 600]. writ. and Aesop’s Fables.) * 

ἐγ-κεντρίζω [T WH ἐνκ., see ἐν, IIL. 3]: 1 aor. ἐνεκέν- 
tpica; Pass., 1 aor. ἐνεκεντρίσθην ; 1 fut. ἐγκεντρισθήσομαι; 
to cut into for the sake of inserting a scion; to inoculate, 
ingrafl, graft in, (Aristot. ap. Athen. 14, 68 [p. 653 d.]; 
Theophr. h. p. 2, 2,5; Antonin. 11, 8): τινά, Ro. xi. 17, 
19, 23, 24 [ef. W. § 52, 4,5]; in these pass. Paul likens 
the heathen who by becoming Christians have been ad- 
mitted into fellowship with the people for whom the 
Messianic salvation is destined, to scions from wild trees 
inserted into a cultivated stock ; [ef. Beet on vs. 24; 
Β. Ὁ. s. ν. Olive].* 

ἔγκλημα [see ev, IIT. 81, -τος, τό, (ἐγκαλέω), accusation : 
the crime of which one is accused, Acts xxv. 16; ἔγκλημα 
ἔχειν, to have laid to one’s charge, be accused of a crime, 
Acts xxiii. 29. (Often in Attic writ. fr. Soph. and Thue. 
on.) * 

ace see κατηγορέω; cf. Isoc. 16, 2 τὰς μὲν yap δίκας 
ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἐγκλημάτων λαγχάνουσι, τὰς δὲ κατη γο- 
ρίας ὑπὲρ τῶν τῆς πόλεως πραγμάτων ποιοῦνται, καὶ πλείω 
χρόνον διατρίβουσι τὸν πατέρα μουδιαβάλλοντες ἢ κτλ.] 

ἐγ-κομβόομαι [see ἐν, ITI. 3], -οὔμαι : [1 aor. mid. ἐνεκομ- 
βωσάμην]; (fr. ἐν and κομβόω to knot, tie, and this fr. 
κόμβος knot, band, (Germ. Schleife), by which two things 
are fastened together), to fasten or gird on one’s self; the 
ἐγκόμβωμα was the white scarf or apron of slaves, which 
was fastened to the girdle of the vest [ἐξωμίς], and dis- 
tinguished slaves from freemen; hence 1 Pet. v. 5 τὴν 
tarewopp. ἐγκομβώσασθε. gird yourselves with humility 
as your servile garb (ἐγκόμβωμαλ i. e. by putting on humil- 
ity show your subjection one to another. That this idea 
lies in the phrase is shown by C. F. A. Fritzsche, with his 
usual learning, in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 259 sqq.* 

ἐγ-κοπή [ WE eve. T ἐκκ.. see ἐν, IIT. 81, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐγκόπτω), 
properly, a cutting (made in the road to impede an en- 
emy in pursuit [(?)], hence), a hindrance: 1 Co. ix. 12. 
(Diod. 1, 32; Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. p. 157, 15 (22) ; 
Longin. de sublim. 41, 3; [al.].)* 

ἐγ-κόπτω [in Acts T WH évx., so T in 1 Pet. where R 
ἐκκ.; see ἐν, III. 3]; 1 aor. ἐνέκοψα; Pass., [ pres. ἐγκόπτο- 
μαι]; impf. ἐνεκοπτόμην ; to cut into, to impede one’s course 
by cutting off his way; hence univ. to hinder (Hesych. : 
ἐμποδίζω, διακωλύω) ; with dat. of the obj., Polyb. 24, 1, 
12; in the N. T. with acc. of the obj., 1 Th. ii. 18; foll. 
by inf., Gal. v. 7 (see ἀνακόπτω) ; inf. preceded by τοῦ, 
Ro. xv. 22; εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐγκόπτεσθαι τὰς προσευχὰς ὑμῶν, that 
ye be not hindered from praying (together), 1 Pet. iii. 
7; i. q.to detain [ A. V. to be tedious unto] one, Acts XXlv. 
4 [ef. Valcken. Schol. i. 600 sq.].* 
ἐγκράτεια [see ev, III. 3], -as, ἡ, (ἐγκρατής), self-control, 


ἐγκρατεύομαι 


Lat. continentia, temperantia, (the virtue of one who mas- 
ters his desires and passions, especially his sensual ap- 
petites): Acts xxiv. 25; Gal. v. 23 (22); 2 Pet. i. 6. 
(Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sir. xviii. 29; 4 Mace. v. 34.) * 

ἐγκρατεύομαι [see ἐν, III. 3]; depon. mid.; to be 861}. 
controlled, continent (ἐγκρατής); to exhibit self-government, 
conduct one’s self temperately: [used absol. Gen. xliii. 
30]; with dat. of respect, τῇ γλώσσῃ, Sir. xix. 6 var.; 
πάντα, in everything, every way, 1 Co. ix. 25 (ina figure 
drawn from athletes, who in preparing themselves for 
the games abstained from unwholesome food, wine, and 
sexual indulgence) ; οὐκ éyxparever Oa, said of those who 
cannot curb sexual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. Though this 
word does not occur in the earlier Grk. writ. that have 
come down to us [exc. in Aristot.eth. Eudem. 2, 7 p. 
1228", 13 ed. Bekk.], yet its use is approved of by Phry- 
nichus ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 25].* 

ἐγκρατής [see ἐν, III. 3], -ές, (κράτος) ; 1. prop. 
equiv. to ὁ ἐν κράτει ὦν, strong, robust: Aeschyl., Thuc., 
sqq- 2. having power over, possessed of (a thing), 
with a gen. of the object; so fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down. 
3. mastering, controlling, curbing, restraining : ἀφροδισίων, 
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1 ; ἡδονῆς, ibid. 4, 5, 10; ἑαυτοῦ, Plat. ; 
absol. (without a gen.), controlling one’s self, temperate, 
continent, ([Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 4 p. 1140", 10 sqq.]; Sir. 
xxvi. 15; Sap. viii. 21; Philo de Jos. § 11): Tit. i. 8.* 

ἐγκρίνω [T WH evx., see ἐν, III. 3]: [1 aor. ἐνέκρινα] ; 
to reckon among, judge among: twa τινι, to judge one 
worthy of being admitted to a certain class [A. V. to 
number with], 2Co.x.12. (From Xen. and Plato down.) ἢ 

ἐγ-κρύπτω : 1 aor. evexpua; to conceal in something, 
τὶ ets te (Diod. 3, 63 ; Apollod. 1, 5,1 § 4); contextually, 
to mingle one thing with another: Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 
21 here T Tr WH ἔκρυψεν. (τί τινι, Hom. Od. 5, 488.) * 

ἔγκυος [WH ἔνκ., see ἐν, II. 8.1, τον, for the more 
usual ἐγκύμων, (fr. ἐν and κύω), big with child, pregnant: 
Lk. ii. 5. (Hdt.1, 5 ete. ; Diod. 4, 2; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 
33.)* 

éy-xplw [see ev, IIT. 3]: 1 aor. act. impv. ἔγχρισον, mid. 
(in T Tr) ἔγχρισαι [but L WH 1 aor. act. infin. ἐγχρῖσαι 
(Grsb. ἐγχρίσαι ; cf. Veitch s. v. χρίω, fin.)]; to rub in, 
besmear, anoint ; Mid. to anoint for one’s self: τοὺς ὀφθαλ- 
pous, Rey. iii. 18 [ef. Bttm. 149 sq. (131); W.§ 32, 4 a.]. 
(Tob. vi. 9; xi. 7; Strab., Anthol., Epict., al.)* 

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. 
ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 
1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, 
generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, 
as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); 
Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; 
ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρι- 
σαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are 
used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, 
as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; 
Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, 
hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: 
Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 
2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. 


167 


ἐδαφιζω 


are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with 
prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω pov, Mt. 
iii. 11; ἰσχυρότερός pov, ibid.; τίς μου ἥψατο, Mk. ν. 31; 
λέγει por, Rev. v. 5; ἀρνήσηταί pe, Mt. x. 33; Lk. xii. 9, 
(on the accent in these expressions cf. W. § 6, 3; [Lip- 
situs, Gram. Untersuch. p. 59 sqq.; Lob. Path. Elementa 
ii. p. 323 sq.; Tdf. N.T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. Ixi. sq.; ed. 8 
p-104]); but δι᾿ ἐμοῦ, κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ, πρὸ ἐμοῦ, etc., σὺν, ἐν ἐμοί, 
περὶ, δι᾽, ἐπ᾽, κατ᾽, εἰς ἐμέ. The only exception is πρός, to 
which the enclitic μέ is generally joined, Mt. xxv. 36; 
Mk. ix. 19, and very often; very rarely πρὸς ἐμέ, Jn. 
vi. 37%, and ace. to LT Tr WH in Acts xxii. 8, 13; 
xxiv. 19; [also Acts xxiii. 22 T Tr WH; Jn. vi. 35 and 
45 T Trtxt.WH; Lk.i.43 TWH; Mt. xix. 14; Jn. vi. 
37°, 65, Tdf.; Jn. vi. 44 Tr txt. WH mrg.; 1 Co. xvi. 11 
L Tr; but πρὸς μέ, Mt. iii. 14 Tdf. and xi. 28 Grsb.; cf. 
Lipsius u. s. p. 61 note]. Moreover, the full forms ἐμοῦ, 
ἐμοί, ἐμέ are used in case of emphasis or antithesis; thus, 
ἐμοῦ, Lk. x. 16 ; ἐμοί, Jn. vii. 23; x. 38, etc.; ἐμέ, Mk. xiv. 
7; In. vii. 7, ete. 3. Asin classic Greek, μοῦ and ἡμῶν 
are very often used for the possessive pronouns ἐμός and 
ἡμέτερος [B. ὃ 127, 21]; and when soused, a. they are 
generally placed after their substantives, as ὁ οἶκός pov, ἡ 
ζωὴ ἡμῶν, ete. — the fuller form ἐμοῦ only for the sake of 
distinction or antithesis [cf. B. § 127, 22], as μητέρα αὐτοῦ 
καὶ ἐμοῦ, Ro. xvi. 13; πίστεως ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ, Ro. i. 12. 
But Ὄ. they are sometimes placed before substantives, 
even which have the article, when no emphasis resides 
in the pron. or antithesis is involved in its use [W. § 22, 
7N.1; B.u.s.]: μου τοὺς λόγους, Mt. vii. 24, 26; even 
before prepositions, μου ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην, Mt. viii. 8; less 
frequently ἡμῶν, as ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν, Acts xvi. 20; it is 
prefixed for emphasis in ἡμῶν τὸ πολίτευμα, Phil. iii. 20, 
cf. W. u. s.; Rost ὃ 99, 4 p. 452 sqq. 7th ed. adduces a 
multitude of exx. fr. Grk. auth.; [ef. Kriiger, § 47, 9, 12 
who states the rule as follows: when joined to a subst. 
having the art. the reflexive gen., with αὐτοῦ ipsius, 
and ἀλλήλων, requires the attributive position, the 
personal gen., and αὐτοῦ ejus, the partitive posi- 
tion ]. 4. τί ἐμοὶ (ἡμῖν) καὶ cot (ὑμῖν) ; what have 1 
(we) to do with thee (you) ? [ef. B. 138 (121); W. 211 
(198) ; 585 (544) }: Mt. viii. 29; Mk.i. 24; v. 7; Lk. viii. 
28; Jn.ii.4; Heb. 721 ὅτ, Judg. xi. 12; 2K. iii. 13, 
2S. xvi. 10; 2 Chr. xxxv. 21; 1 Esdr. i. 24; also in 
classic Greek; cf. Gell. n. a. 1, 2; Epict. diss. 2, 9, 16; 
τί ἡμῖν x. αὐτῷ, ibid. 1,1, 16; τί ἐμοὶ καὶ αὐτοῖς, ibid. 1, 27, 
13; 22,15. τί yap μοι, what does it concern me? what 
have I to do ete.: 1 Co. v.12; ef. Bos, Ellipses Graec. p. 
599, ed. Schaefer; Bnhdy. p. 98; Kriiger § 48, 3, 9; 
Kihner ii. 364 sq.; [B. as above, also 394 (337); W. 
586 (545)]. 

ἐδαφίζω : Attic fut. ἐδαφιῶ [B. 37 (32); W.§ 13, 1¢.]; 
(see ἔδαφος) ; to throw to the ground,—both of cities, 
buildings, to raze, level with the earth, and of men; in 
both applications in Lk. xix. 44 [by zeugma (?) ef. W. 
§ 66, 3 6.1. (Ps. exxxvi. (exxxvii.) 9; Is. iii. 26; Ezek. 
xxxi. 12; Hos. xiv. 1 (xiii. 16); Am. ix. 14 [Ald.]; rare in 
prof. writ., as [ Aristot. probl. 23, 29]; Polyb. 6, 33, 6.)* 


ἔδαφος 


ἔδαφος, -εος (-ous), τό, bottom, base, ground: πίπτειν εἰς 
τὸ ἔδαφος, Acts xxii. 7. (Sept. ; in class. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

ἑδραῖος, (rarely fem. -aia [W. § 11, 1]),-aiov, (ἔδρα seat, 
chair) ; 1. sitting, sedentary, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2: 
firm, immovable, steadfast, (Eur., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T. 
metaph., of those who are fixed in purpose: 1 Co. xv. 
58; Col. i. 23; ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, 1 Co. vii. 37." 

ἑδραίωμα, -ros, τύ, (ἑδραιόω to make stable, settle firmly), 
a slay, prop, support, (Vulg. firmamentum) : 1 Tim. iii. 15 
[A.V. ground]. (Eccl. writ.)* 

᾿Εζεκίας [WH ‘E¢-; L -κείας, see Tif. Proleg. p. 85], 
(mM strength of Jehovah, i. e. strength given by Je- 
hovah; Germ. Gotthard; Sept. Ἐζεκίας), [gen. -ov, ef. B. 
17 (16) no. 8], Hezekiah, king of Judah (2 K. xviii. 1 
sqq.; xx. 1 sqq.; Is. xxxviii. 1 sqq.): Mt. i. 9, 10.* 

ἐθελο-θρησκεία [Ἴ WH -xia, see I, ¢], -as, ἡ, (fr. ἐθέλω 
and θρησκεία, q. ν. [ef. W. 100 (95) ]), voluntary, arbitrary 
worship, (Wulg. superstitio), [A. V. will-worship], i. 6. 
worship which one devises and prescribes for himself, 
contrary to the contents and nature of the faith which 
ought to be directed to Christ; said of the misdirected 
zeal and practices of ascetics: Col. ii. 23; Suid. ἐθελο- 
θρησκεῖ " ἰδίῳ θελήματι σέβει τὸ δοκοῦν. Cf. ἐθελόδουλος, 
ἐθελοδουλεία, ἐθελοπμόξενος one who acts the part of a 
proxenus without having been appointed to the office, 
ete. The explanation of others : simulated, counterfeit re- 
ligion (cf. in Greek lexicons ἐθελοφιλόσοφος. ἐθελόκωφος, 
etc.), does not square so well with the context. (The 
word is found besides in Mansi, Collect. Concil. vol. iv. 
Ρ- 1380, and in Theodoret, vol. iv. ep. clxi. p. [1460 b. 
ed. Migne].1331, Ialle ed.; [Euseb. h. 6. 6, 12,1; Jerome 
ep. exxi. vol. i. 1034 ed. Migne]. Epiph. haer. 1, 16 [i. 
p- 318, 3 ed. Dind.] attributes ἐθελοπερισσο θρησκεία 
to the Pharisees.)* 

ἐθέλω, see θέλω. 

ἐθίζω : (ἔθος 4. v-); fo accustom; Pass. to be accustomed ; 
pi. ptep. τὸ εἰθισμένον usage, custom: τοῦ νόμου, pre- 
scribed by the law, Lk. ii. 27. (Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc., 
Xen., Plat., al.) * 

ἐθνάρχης, -ov, 6, (fr. ἔθνος and ἄρχω), [i. q. founder of 
a nation, Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 56], an ethnarch, one 
set over a people as ruler, but without the authority and 
name of king (Leian. in Macrob. $17 ἀντὶ ἐθνάρχου 
βασιλεὺς ἀναγορευθεὶς Βοσπόρου ; so Re governor whom 
the Alexandrian Jews used to have was called ἐθνάρχης, 
of whom Josephus says, antt. 14,7, 2, ὃς διοικεῖ τε τὸ ἔθνος 
καὶ διαιτᾷ κρίσεις καὶ συμβολαίων ἐπιμελεῖται καὶ προσταγ- 
μάτων, ὡς ἂν πολιτείας ἄρχων αὐτοτελοῦς ; likewise Simon 
Maceabaeus, 1 Mace. xiv. 47; xv. 1, 2 ; Joseph. antt. 
13, 6,6; cf. [19, 5, 2]; b.j. 2, 6,3): 2 Co. xi. 326 ἐθνάρχης 
᾿Αρέτα τοῦ Biches the governor of Damascene Syria, 
ruling in the name of kine Aretas[(q.v.); ef. B. D.s. v. 
Governor, 11 }.* 

ἐθνικός, -ἡ, -όν, (ἔθνος. ; 1. adapted to the genius or 
customs of a people, peculiar to a people, national : Polyb., 
Diod., al. 2. suited to the manners or language of for- 
eigners, strange, foreign; so in the grammarians {ef. our 


168 


εἰ, b 


‘ gentile’). 3. in the N. T. savoring of the nature of 
pagans, alien to the worship of the true God, heathenish; 
substantively, ὁ ἐθνικός the pagan, the Gentile: Mt. xviii. 
17; plur., Mt. v. 47 GLT Tr WH; vi. 7; and 3 Jn. 7 
Lk Ir WH 

ἐθνικῶς, adv., (see ἐθνικός), like the Gentiles : 
[W. 463 (431). 
7, 561. 

ἔθνος, -ους, τό; 1. a multitude (whether of men or 
of beasts) associated or living together ; a company, troop, 
swarm: ἔθνος ἑταίρων, ἔθνος ᾿Αχαιῶν, ἔθνος λαῶν, Hom. 1]. ; 
ἔθνος μελισσάων, 2,87; μυιάων ἔθνεα, ib. 469. 2. α 
multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (τὸ 
ἔθνος τὸ θῆλυ ἢ τὸ ἄρρεν, Xen. oec. 7, 26): πᾶν ἔθνος 
ἀνθρώπων, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems 
to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation: Mt. 
xxi. 43; Acts x. 35, ete.; ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, Mt. xxiv. 7; 
ΜΚ. xiii. 8; οἱ ἄρχοντες, of βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mt. xx. 25; 
Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people, 
Lk. vii. δ; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 35; Acts x. 
22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4; xxviii. 19. 4. (ra) ἔθνη, 
like 0127 in the O. T., foreign nations not worshipping 
the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [ οἴ. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt. 
iv. 15 (Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7 RG; ef. 
Rev. xv. 3 GL T Tr WH mrg. after Jn. x. 7], and very 
often; in plain contradistinction to the Jews: Ro. iii. 
29; ix. 24; [1 Co.i.23 GL T Tr WH]; Gal. ii. 8, ete.; ὁ 
λαὸς (τοῦ θεοῦ, Jews) καὶ τὰ ἔθνη, Lk. ii. 32; Acts xxvi. 
17, 23; Ro. xv. 10. 5. Paul uses τὰ ἔθνη even of Gen- 
tile Christians: Ro. xi. 13; xv. 27; xvi. 43 Gal. ii. 12 
(opp. vs. 13 to οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι i. 6. Jewish Christians), vs. 14; 
Eph. iii. 1, ef. iv. 17 [W. § 59, 4 a.; B. 130 (114)]. 

ἔθος, -eos (τους), [cf. ἦθος], τό, fr. Aeschyl. [Agam. 
728 (?); better fr. Soph.] down, custom: Lk. xxii. 39; 
ἔθος ἐστί τινι foll. by an inf., Jn. xix. 40; Acts xxv. 16; 
Heb. x. 25; contextually, usage prescribed by law, in- 
stitute, prescription, rite: Lk. i. 9; ii. 42; Acts xvi. 21; 
XX1. 215; xxvi. 3; xxviii. 17; περιτέμνεσθαι τῷ ἔθει Μωϊσέως, 
Acts xv. 1; ἀλλάξει τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκε Maiions, Acts vi. 14." 

ἔθω (of the pres. only the ptep. ἔθων is used, in Hom.) : 
pf. εἴωθα, to be accustomed, used, wont; [plpf. as impf. 
(W. 274 (257 sq.)) εἰώθειν  ; foll. by inf.: Mt. xxvii. 15; 
Mk. x. 1. Ptep. τὸ εἰωθός in a pass. sense, that which is 
wont; usage, custom: κατὰ τὸ εἰωθός τινι as One’s custom 
is, as is his wont, Lk. iv. 16; Acts xvii. 2.* 

fet, τ ec and « are freq. interchanged in N. T. spelling. 
This is due partly to itacism, partly to the endeavor to mark 
the . sound as long or short. See the remarks on this subject 
in WH. App. p. 152 sq. (ef. Intr. § 399); Td: Proleg. p. 83 
sq.; Soph. Lex.s. ν. εἰ. The use of, « for εἰ is noticed s. v. 1,6; 
instances in which εἰ is substituted for « are the foll.: ’ABec 
Anvh WH; ᾿Αδδεί T Tr WH; Avreizas T; ᾿Αρεοπαγείτης Τὶ 
Βενιαμείν LT Tr WH; Δαυείδ 1, Τ Tr WH; Ἐφεκείας L; 
’EAauelrns TWH; Ἐλεισάβετ WH; Ἐσλεί T Tr WH; Εὐ- 
νείκη Rec.**; “HAei T Tr WH; Ἠλείας T WH; Ἱερειχώ T 
WH; Ἱεροσολυμείτης T WH; Ἰσραηλείτης T WH, 80 Tr in 
Jn. i. 47 (48); Ἰωσείας L T Tr WH; Keis L T Tr WH; 
Kupetvos Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; Aeveis T WH, so Trexc. in Mk. 
ii. 14; Aevefrns T WH, so Tr exe. in Acts iv. 36; Aeveitixds 
TWH. Μελχεί T Tr WH; Νηρεί T Tr WH; Νινευείτης T 


Gal. ii. 14, 
Apollon. Dysk. p. 190, 5; Diog. Laért. 


εἰ 109 εἰ 


WH, s0 Trin Mt. xii. 41; Ὀζείας L T Tr WH; Πειλᾶτος T 
WH; Σεμεείν T Tr WH; Ταβειθά WH; Χερουβείν 1, T 
Tr WH (-βίμ RG); Χοραζείν T Tr WH; ἀφείδεια L; εἰδέα 
T Tr WH; ἐπαρχεία T WH; ἐπιπόθεια WH; ἡλεί T ; πανοικεί 
TWH; ῥαββεί T WH; ῥαββουνεί WH; σαβαχθανεί Tr 
WH; ταλειθά WH; τάχειον WH; τραπεζείτης T WH.| 

el, is first a conditional particle, ἐγ (Lat. si) ; secondly, 
an interrogative particle, whether, (Lat. an, num, ne). 

I. εἰ CoNDITIONAL (on the difference between it and 
ἐάν, see ἐάν, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety 
of conditions, with various tenses and moods; viz. ἘΣ 
with the Indicative of all tenses, when anything is 
simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to 
have been done, or to be about to be, (W. § 41 b., 2; ef. 42, 
2; [Β. 220(190)]). a. withthe Ind. Present; a. foll. 
in the apodosis by the ind. pres.: Mt. xix. 10 (εἰ οὕτως 
ἐστὶν ἡ αἰτία... οὐ συμφέρει γαμῆσαι) ; xi. 14; Ro. vii. 
16, 20; viii. 25; xiv.15; 1 Co.ix.17; Gal. ii. 18; v.18; 
Heb. xii. 8; Jas. ii. 8 sq., etc. B. foll. by an Imperative 
in the apodosis, — either the pres., as [Mt. xix. 17 L Tr 
txt. WH txt.]; Mk. iv. 23; vii. 16 RG L; Jn.xv.18; Acts 
xiii. 15; xxv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 12, 15; Jas. ili. 14, ete.; or the 
aor., as Mt. v. 29, 30; viii. 31; xix. 17 [RG T Trmre. 
Wil mrg.]; Mk. ix. 22 [cf. B. 55 (48) ]; Uk. xxii. 67 (66) ; 
1 Co. vii. 9. y. foll. by the Future in the apodosis: Lk. 
xvi. 31; Acts v. 39 LT Tr ΝΗ; xix. 39; Ro. viii. 11, 13; 
2Co. xi. 30, ete. δ. foll. by the Perfect or the Aorist in 
the apodosis, where it is declared that, if this or that is, 
something else has or has not occurred: Mt. xii. 26, 28; 
Lk. xi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 16; Gal. ii. 21; Ro. iv. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 20. 
ε- foll. by the Imperfect, either with or without ἄν, where 
in the protasis something is simply assumed to be, but the 
apodosis shows that what has been assumed cannot be 
the case. Three passages falling under this head have 
a doubtful or disputed text: εἰ ἔχετε (T Tr WH, for the 
RG Letyere) .. . ἐλέγετε ἄν etc. Lk. xvii. 65 ef... μνημο- 
vevovow (T Tr, for R GL WH ἐμνημόνευον) . . . εἶχον ἄν, 
Heb. xi. 15 (where by the pres. tense the writer refers 
to the language of the Jewish Fathers as at present re- 
corded in the sacred Seriptures; cf. τοιαῦτα λέγοντες vs. 
14); εἰ τέκνα τοῦ ᾽Αβρ. ἐστε (G LT Tr WH, for R ἦτε) 

. . ἐποιεῖτε ({ WH txt. mou.) R Ladd ἄν), Jn. viii. 39; cf. 
Btim. in Stud. u. Krit. for 1858 p. 474 sqq. ΓΝ, T. Gram. 
§ 139, 26; but cf. Mey. on [.Κ.]. 6.1. But 2 Οο. χὶ. 4 εἰ... 
κηρύσσει... ἀνείχεσθε GT Tr WH mrg. (ἀνέχεσθε 1, WH 
txt.) must not be referred to this head; here Paul in the 
protasis supposes something which actually occurred, 
in the apodosis censures a thing which actually occurred 
viz. the readiness with which his readers gave ear con- 
tinually (this is indicated by the impf.) to false teachers. 
On the difficulty of the passage οἵ. Holsten in the Zeit- 
schr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874,p. 1 sqq.; [ef. also B. 
226 (195) ; but W. 306 (287) and Mey. ad loc.]. {. with 
a question as the apodosis: Mt. vi. 23; Jn. v. 47; vii. 23; 
vili. 46; 1 Pet. ii. 20. Ὁ. with the Ind. Future: Mt. 
xxvi. 33; Jas. ii. 11 RG; 1 Pet.ii. 20. c. with the Ind. 
Perfect: Jn.xi.12; Actsxvi.15; Ro. vi. 5; xi. 6 (where 
after εἰ supply λεῖμμα γέγονεν fr. what precedes), 2 Co. ii. 
5; v.16; vii.14. d. with the Ind. A orist,—foll. by the 


Pres. in the apodosis, Lk. xix. 8; Ro. iv. 2; xv. 27; foll. 
by a question in the apodosis, Lk. xvi. 11, 12; Jn. xviii. 
23; 1Co.iv. 7; ix.11; foll. by the Aor. in the apodosis, 
Rey. xx. 15; by the Impv. in the apodosis, Jn. xviii. 23 ; 
xx. 15; Ro. xi. 17 sq.; 1 Tim. v. 9, 10; Philem. 18; by 
the Fut. in the apodosis, Jn. xiii. 32; xv. 20; Heb. xii. 
25 (where supply οὐκ ἐκφευξόμεθα in the apodosis). 2. 
Not infrequently, when a conclusion is drawn from some- 
thing that is quite certain, εἰ with the Indic. is used argu- 
mentatively so as to be equiv. in sense to ἐπεί, (cf. the 
use of Germ. wenn) [cf. W. 448 (418) ]: Mt. xii. 28; Lk. 
xxiii. 31; Jn. vii.4; Ro. v.17; vi. 5; vili.31; xi. 6, 12; 
Col. ii. 20; iii. 1, ete. 3. When it is said what would 
have been, or what would be now or in the future, if 
something else were or had been, εἰ is used with the Impf., 
Plpf., and Aor. ind.; in the apodosis it is followed in 
direct disc. by ἄν with the impf. or the plpf. or the aor. ; 
sometimes ay is omitted, (on the causes of the omission, 
see B. § 139, 27) ; sometimes the apodosis is made a ques- 
tion, [cf. W. 304 (285) sq.]. a. εἰ with the Impf., foll. 
in the apodosis by ἄν with the impf.: Mt. xxiii. 30; Lk. 
Vii. 39 (εἰ οὗτος ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if thisman were 
a prophet, he would know); Jn. v. 46; viii. 42; ix. 41; 
xv. 19; 1 Co. xi. 31; Gal. i. 10; Heb. viii. 4, 7 (if... 
were etc. there would not be sought ete. viz. in the O. T. 
passage quoted vs. 8); by a question in the apodosis: 
1 Co. xii. 19; Heb. vii. 11; by ἄν with the aor., where 
the Latin uses the plupf. subjune.: Jn. xi. 32 (εἰ ἧς ὧδε 
if thou hadst been here, οὐκ ἂν ἀπέθανέ μου ὁ ἀδελφός my 
brother would not have died [when he did (cf. below) ; 
B. § 139, 25 regards the impf. in prot. as expressing dur- 
ation]); Jn. iv. 10; xviii. 30 (εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος κακοποιός, οὐκ 
ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν, we would not have delivered 
him to thee); Acts xviii. 14; by ἄν with the plupf.: Jn. 
xi. 21 (εἰ ἧς ὧδε... οὐκ ἂν ἐτεθνήκει. would not have died 
{and be now dead; ef. W. 304 (285) and see above; but 
Ι, Τ Tr txt. WH read the aor. here also]}); 1 Jn. ii. 19. 
b. εἰ with the Plpf., foll. in the apodosis by ἄν with the 
plpf. or the aor., in the sense of the Latin plpf. subj. : 
Mt. xii. 7 (εἰ ἐγνώκειτε if ye had understood i.e. if ye 
knew, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους ye would not 
have condemned the guiltless) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 and Lk. xii. 
39, (εἰ #de if he had perceived i. e. if he knew, ἐγρηγόρη- 
σεν ἄν he would have watched, se. before the thief had 
approached [Tr txt. WH om. ἄν in Lk. 1. ¢.]) ; Jn. iv. 10; 
viii. 19; xiv. 7[RGL]. ο. with the Aor. in the same 
sense as the Lat. plpf. subjune. : εἰ ἐδόθη νόμος . . . ὄντως 
ἂν ἐκ νόμου ἦν ἡ δικαιοσύνη if a law had been given, right- 
eousness would in truth come from the law, Gal. iii. 21; 
εἰ αὐτοὺς ᾿Ιησοῦς κατέπαυσεν if Joshua had given them 
rest, οὐκ ἂν περὶ ἄλλης ἐλάλει he would not be speaking, 
sc. in the passage quoted, Heb. iv. 8; apodosis without 
ἄν, Jn. xv. 22, see av I. 3 p. 33 sq. 4. As in classic 
Greek, εἰ with the Ind. is often joined to verbs expressing 
wonder, surprise, or other strong emotion (where ὅτι 
might have been expected), when the thing spoken of is 
either not quite certain, or, although certain, yet in ac- 
cordance with the well-known Greek urbanity is repre- 


εἰ 170 εἰ 


sented as not quite free from doubt (Matthiae ii. p. 1474 
sq-; Kiihner ii. p. 887 sq.; [Jelf § 804, 9]; W. § 60, 6; [Β. 
§ 139, 827}. Thus it is joined —to the verb θαυμάζω : ἐθαύ- 
pater, εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκε, for the matter had not yet been in- 
vestigated; hence it is added ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτόν, εἰ ἤδη 
([RGTTrmrg. WH mrg. mada} ἀπέθανεν, Mk. xv. 44; 
μὴ θαυμάζετε, εἰ μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος (the thing is certain) 
1 Jn. 1.18: τὸ the phrase ἄπιστον κρίνεται: Acts xxvi. 
8, (with παράδοξον preceding, Leian. dial. mort. 13, 1); 
to καλόν ἐστιν and λυσιτελεῖ: Mk. ix. 42 and Lk. xvii. 2 
(Mt. xviii. 6 has συμφέρει, wa); Mt. xxvi. 24 and Mk. 
xiv. 21; to μέγα ἐστί: 1 Co. ix. 11 (on which see 8 below); 
2 Co. xi. 15; τί θέλω, εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη (τὸ πῦρ), how would I 
if (i.e. that) it were already kindled (but it has not yet 
been kindled), Lk. xii. 49 (al. al., but cf. Meyer ad loc.; [so 
B. l.c.; ef. W 448 (418); see ris, 1 6. y. fin.]; Sir. xxiii. 
14 θελήσεις, εἰ μὴ €yevvnOns; [in addition to the other inter- 
pretations noticed by Win. and Mey. ll. ec. mention may 
be made of that which takes θέλω as subjunc.: what am 
J to choose if (as I may well assume) it has already been 
nindled; ef. Green, ‘Crit. Notes’ ad loc.]). 5. Con- 
trary to Greek usage, in imitation of the Hebr. Dx, εἰ with 
the Indic. is so used in oaths and asseverations that by 
aposiopesis the formula of imprecation [constituting 
the apodosis] is suppressed (W. § 55 fin.; B. § 149, 4): 
ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, εἰ δοθήσεται . . . σημεῖον (fully expressed, 
‘may God punish me, if it shall be σίνϑη, 1. 6. it shall by 
no means be given), Mk. viii. 12; dpooa, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται 
εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου (fully, ‘let my name no longer be 
Jehovah, if they shall enter’ ete.), Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3, fr. 
Ps. xeiv. (xev.) 11 Sept. (Hebr. ox, Gen. xiv. 23; Num. 
xiv. 30; 1S. xiv. 45, ete.; we have the full expression 
in 1 S. iii. 17; Cant. ii. 7, ete.). 6. Sometimes, as in 
classic Grk., after a protasis with εἰ and the Indic., the 
apodosis is suppressed on account of mental agitation 
and left to be supplied by the reader or the hearer from 
the context, (ef. W. 599 sq. (557)): εἰ βούλει παρενεγκεῖν 
τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο (sc. mapéveyxe [but here L Tr WH 
adopt the impy. in place of the inf.; yet ef. B. 396 
(339)]), Lk. xxii. 42; εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ ἢ ayye- 
λος, supply in place of an apodosis the question what 
then? Acts xxiii. 9 (the apod. added in Rec., μὴ θεο- 
μαχῶμεν, is spurious); εἰ ἔγνως . . - τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην σου, 
sc. ἐπίστευες ἂν ἐμοί, Lk. xix. 42 [Β. 396 (339) ]. vf 
The conditional εἰ is joined with the O ptative, to in- 
dicate that the condition is merely thought of or 
stated as a possibility, (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 
491 sqq.; W. 293 (275) sq.; B. § 139, 24). No example 
of this construction is found in the Gospels; very few 
in the rest of the N.T. 4. univ. in short intercalated 
clauses: εἰ τύχοι if it so chance. it may be, (see τυγχάνω, 
2), 1 Co. xiv. 10; xv. 37; εἰ θέλοι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 
Pet. iii. 17 (Rec. θέλει). b. where it indicates that 
something may occur repeatedly (cf. Klotz l. ¢. p. 
492 sq.): εἰ καὶ πάσχοιτε, 1 Pet. 111. 14 [cf. W.u.s.]. ο. 
where the condition represents the mind and judgment 
of others: εἰς ὃν ἐβουλεύοντο [R G-cavro], εἰ δύναιντο 
ἐξῶσαι [WH txt. ἐκσῶσαι (4. v.)] τὸ πλοῖον, into which 


bay [or rather ‘upon which beach’; see ἐξωθέω] they 
determined to run the ship, if they could; as though the 
navigators had said among themselves, ἐξώσομεν, εἰ δυνά- 
μεθα, Acts xxvii. 39; so also εἴ τι ἔχοιεν πρός pe, if they 
think they have anything against me, Acts xxiv. 19. 
8. with the Subjunctive, when it is assumed that 
something may take place, but whether it will in reality is 
unknown before the event, in order to make the event 
seem to be more certain than if ἐάν were used (Klotz 
l.c. p. 500 sqq.; W. 294 (276) sq.; B. § 139, 22): εἰ... 
θερίσωμεν, 1 Co. ix. 11 Tdf. edd. 2, 7, [Lehm. mrg.; al. 
-copev]; (Sept. Gen. xliii. 3 sq.; Sir. xxii. 26; 4 Mace. 
vi. 20). But see III. below, under εἰ μή, εἰ μήτι, εἴ πως, 
εἴτε... εἴτε, εἴ τις. 

II. εἰ INTERROGATIVE, whether. “The conditional 
particle gets this force if a question is asked about any- 
thing, whether it is or is not so, and that about which 
the question is put is uttered as it were conditionally ” 
(Klotz 1. ας. p. 508; [W. § 57,1; Bttm. 248 (214) sqq ; 
254 (218) sq.]). 1. As in Grk. writ. in an indirect 
question after verbs of seeing, asking, deliberating, 
knowing, saying, etc. a. with the Indic. Present: 
as οὐδ᾽ εἰ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἔστιν. ἠκούσαμεν (prop., acc. to 
the conditional force of the particle, ‘if there is [i. 6. has 
appeared, been given; cf. εἰμί, I. 2] a Holy Spirit, we did 
not even hear’), Acts xix. 2; ἴδωμεν, εἰ ἔρχεται, Mt. xxvii. 
49; Mk. xv. 36; βουλεύεται [T WH L mrg. -σεται]. εἰ 
δυνατός ἐστιν, Lk. xiv. 31; ἵνα εἴπῃς, εἰ σὺ εἶ, Mt. xxvi. 
63; [ἵνα γνῶ τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν εἰ (WH mrg. 7) . - ὑπήκοοί 
ἐστε, 2 Co. ii. 9 (see WH. Intr. § 404)]; after οὐκ οἶδα, 
Jn. ix. 25; after κρίνατε, Acts iv. 19; δοκιμάζετε [(?), 
πειράζετε], 2 Co. xiii. 5. b. with the Indic. Future 
[ef. W. 300 (282); B. § 139, 61 b.]: δεήθητι, εἰ ἄρα 
ἀφεθήσεταί σοι, Acts viii. 22; τί οἶδας, εἰ... σώσεις, 1 
Co. vii. 16; παρετήρουν, εἰ θεραπεύσει | Tdf. -rever], Mk. iii. 
2 and in Lk. vi. 7 [RG WH mrg.]; ἦλθεν (sc. to see), εἰ 
dpa tt εὑρήσει, Mk. xi. 13. ο. with the Indic. Aorist: 
οὐκ οἶδα. εἴ τινα ἄλλον ἐβάπτισα. whether I baptized, 1 Co. 
i. 16; ἐπηρώτησαν, εἰ πάλαι [L Tr txt. WH txt. ἤδη] ἀπέ: 
θανεν, whether he were long dead, Mk. xv. 44; εἰπέ μοι, 
ei... ἀπέδοσθε, Actsv.8. ἃ. with the Subjunctive 
Aorist [ef. B. 255 sq. (220); W. 298 (280) sq.]: διώκω, 
εἰ καὶ καταλάβω I press on (sc. πειρώμενος OF σκοπῶν, try- 
ing to see), whether I may also lay hold, Phil. iii. 12. 
So si is used in Latin, e. g. Nep. vit. Hann. 8 Hannibal 
... Africam accessit in finibus Cyrenaeorum (sc. exper- 
turus), si forte Carthaginienses ad bellum possent induci ; 
Caes. b. g. 1, 8, 4 si perrumpere possent, conati; add 
Caes. b. g. 2, 9, 1. Cf. Kiihner ii. p. 1032 sq.; (Jelf 
§ 877 b.]. 2. Contrary to the usage of Grk. auth., 
like the Hebr. ox and interrog. ΤΊ, it is used in the Sept. 
and the N. T. (esp. by Luke) also in direct ques- 
tions (ef. the colloq. use of the Germ. 0b; e. g. ob ich’s 
wohl thun soll?) ; cf. W. § 57, 1; B. 248 (214), and, in 
opposition to those who have striven to absolve the sa- 
cred writers from this misuse of the particle (esp. Fritz- 
sche and Meyer [see the latter’s note on Mt. xii. 10 and 
Lk. xiii. 23; he quotes with approval the language of 


εἰ 171 εἰ 


Ast (Lexicon Platon. vol. i. 601), ‘dubitanter inter- 
rogat, ita ut interrogatio videatur directa esse’]), cf. 
Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 30 566. : -- εἶπέ 
τις αὐτῷ, κύριε, εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι; Lk. xiii. 23; κύριε, 
εἰ πατάξομεν ἐν μαχαίρᾳ [-py T Tr WH]; Lk. xxii. 49; 
κύριε, εἰ... ἀποκαθιστάνεις τ. βασιλείαν; Actsi. 6; cf. be- 
sides, Mt. xii. 10; xix. 3; Mk. viii. 23 (ace. to the read- 
ing of [Tdf. 2, 7} Tr [mrg. WH txt.] εἴ τι βλέπεις for 
RGLTTr txt. WH mrg. βλέπει) ; Acts xix. 2, etc. (Gen. 
xvii. 17; xliii. 6; 1S. x. 24, etc.; in the O. T. Apocr. 2 
Mace. vii. 7; xv. 3; 4 Mace. xviii. 17 fr. Ezek. xxxvii. 
3 Sept.; Tob. v. 5). 

III. εἰ with other particles and with the indef. pron. 
εἰ dpa, see ἄρα, 1. ae εἴγε, see γέ, 8 c. 
3. εἰ δὲ καί, a. but ifalso, so that καί belongs to some 
word that follows: Lk. xi. 18 (but if Satan also). Ὁ. 
but though, but even if, so that καί belongs to εἰ : 1 Co. iv. 
7; 2Co. iv. 3; v.16 [RG; al. om. δέ]; xi. 6; see 6 below. 
4. εἰ δὲ μή, bul if not; if it is or were otherwise, [B. 393 
(336 sq.), ef. 345 (297) ; W. as below]: Jn. xiv. 2 (εἰ δὲ 
μή: SC. οὕτως ἦν), 11 (εἰ δὲ μή, Sc. ἐμοὶ πιστεύετε, i. e. my 
words). As in these passages so generally the phrase 
stands where a word or clause must be repeated in 
thought from what immediately precedes; it thus has 
the force of the Lat. alioquin, otherwise, or else, [W. 583 
(543) ]: Rev. ii. 5, 16; also after negative declarations, 
Mk. ii. 21 sq.; ef. Matthiae § 617 b. 5. εἰ δὲ μήγε, see 
γέ, 3d. 6. εἰκαί, a. if even, if also, (cf. εἰ δὲ καί, 8 ἃ., 
[and 7 below]): 1 Co. vii. 21 [ef. Mey. ad loec.; Bp. 
Lghtft. on Philem. p. 324]; 2 Co. xi.15. Ὁ. though, al- 
though: Lk. xi. 8; 2 Co. iv. 16; vii. 8,12; Phil. ii. 17; 
Col. ii. 5 [εἰ yap καί] ; Heb. vi. 9; with the optat. 1 Pet. 
111. 14; see I. 7 b. above. 7. καὶ εἰ, even if: Mk. xiv. 
29[T Tr WH εἰ καί]; 1 Pet. iii. 1; ef. Klotz 1. ο. p- 519 
[who says, “In εἰ καί the conditional particle εἰ has 
the greater force; in καὶ εἰ the conjunctive particle 
καί. Hence καὶ εἰ is used of what is only assumed to 
be true; εἰ καί, on the other hand, of what is as it is said 
to be.” Biaumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 151) says, “ In 
εἰ καί the καί naturally belongs to the conditional clause 
and is taken up into it, if even; in the combination καὶ 
εἰ the καί belongs to the consequent clause, even if. 
Sometimes however the difference disappears.” Kriiger 
(§ 65, 5, 15): “with καὶ εἰ, the leading clause is rezarded 
as holding under every condition, even the one 
stated, which appears to be the most extreme; with εἰ 
καί the condition, which may also come to pass, is re- 
garded as a matter of indifference in reference 
to the leading clause ;” Sauppe (on Dem. Ol. ii. § 20) is 
very explicit: “ καὶ εἰ and εἰ καί both indicate that some- 
thing conflicts with what is expressed in the leading 
clause, but that that is (or is done) notwithstanding. καὶ 
ei, however, represents the thing adduced in the condi- 
tional sentence to be the only thing conflicting ; but when 
the conditional particle precedes (εἰ καί), the represen- 
tation is that something which is (or may be) accom- 
panied by many others (καί) conflicts ineffectually. Ac- 
cordingly the phrase καὶ εἰ greatly augments the force of 


τὶς, τὶ. ἘΣ 


what follows, εἰ καί lays less emphasis upon it; although 
it is evident that εἰ καί can often be substituted for καὶ 
ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413); Ellic. on 
Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, § 41; Paley, 
Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. εἰ μή, a. in a conditional 
protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses 
as the simple εἰ, see 1. above, if not, unless, except, [W. 
477 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33; | 
xv. 22, 24; Ro. vii. 7, ete. b. it serves, with the entire. 
following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been 
said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308) ]: Mk. 
vi. 5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition εἰ μὴ 
ἑκάστῳ κτλ. strives to prevent any one in applying what 
had been said a little while before, viz. οὐ δεδούλωται . . - 
ἐν τοιούτοις to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironi- 
cal answers, unless perchance, save forsooth that, (Kiih- 
ner ὃ 577, 7; [Jelf § 860, 5 Obs.]): εἰ μὴ χρήζομεν κτλ. 
2 Co. iii. 1 Ree. ο. εἰ μή very often coalesce into one 
particle, as it were, which takes the same verb as the 
preceding negation: unless, i. q. except, save, [Kiihner 
§ 577, 8; Β. 869 (308)]; α. univ.: Mt. xi. 27; xii. 39; 
Mk. ii. 26; viii. 14; Jn. iii. 13; Ro. vii. 7; xiii. 1, 8; 1 
Co. viii. 4; xii. 3; 2 Co. xii. 5, ete. as in classic Greek, 
μόνος, μόνον, is added pleonastically: Mt. xvii. 8; xxi. 
19; xxiv. 36; Acts xi. 19; Phil. iv. 15; Rev. xiii. 17, ete. 
β. after negatives joined to nouns it is so used as to re- 
fer to the negative alone (hence many have regarded it 
as used for ἀλλά [i.e. as being not exceptive but ad- 
versative]), and can be rendered in Lat. sed tantum, 
but only: Mt. xii. 4 (οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν οὐδὲ τοῖς μετ᾽ 
αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσι μόνοις, as if οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν φαγεῖν 
alone preceded) ; Lk. iv. 26 sq.; Ro. xiv. 14; Rey. ix. 
4; xxi. 27 (ἐὰν μή 15 so used in Gal. ii. 16; on Gal. i. 19 
see Ἰάκωβος, 3); cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 195; 
[see ἐάν, I. 3 c. and reff.]. γ. when preceded by the in- 
terrogative τίς in questions having a negative force: Mk. 
τ. 1 ke 21. Ros χὶς 15)5) 1 Coie 11: 2| Conary ὃ: xis 
13; Heb. iii. 18; 1 Jn.ii. 22; v.5; (Xen. oec. 9,1; Ar- 
stph. eqq. 615). δ. with other conjunctions: εἰ μὴ ἵνα, 
Jn. x.10; εἰ μὴ ὅταν, Mk. ix. 9; ri ἐστιν, εἰ μὴ ὅτι etc., 2 
Co. xii. 13; Eph. iv. 9. e. it has its own verb, and 
makes a phrase by itself: ὃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλο, εἰ μή τινές 
εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς which means nothing else, save 
that there are some who trouble you, Gal. i. 7 [so 
Winer (Com. ad loc.) et al.; but see Meyer]. ἃ. ἐκτὸς 
εἰ μή, arising from the blending of the two expressions 
εἰ μή and ἐκτὸς εἰ, like the Lat. nisi si equiv. to praeter- 
quam si, except in case, except: 1 Tim. v. 19; with the 
indic. aor. 1 Co. xv. 2; with the subjune. pres. 1 Co. xiv. 
δ; (Leian. de luctu c. 19; dial. meret. 1, 2, ete.). Cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 459; W.§ 65, 8 ο. ; [B. indexs. v. ἐκτὸς 
εἰ μή]. 9. εἰ μήν, assuredly, surely, in oaths: Heb. vi. 
14 LT Tr WH (for RG# μήν [q. v-]) and several times 
in Sept. as Ezek. xxxiii. 27; xxxiv. 8; [ef. xxxvi. 5; 
XXxvili. 19; 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 23], ete.; here, if εἰ did not 
come from 7 by itacism, εἰ μήν must be explained as a 
confusion of the Hebraistic εἰ μή (see I. 5 above) and 
the Grk. formula of asseveration 4 μήν ; cf. Bleek on Heb. 


εἰ 112 


vol. ii. 2 p. 248 sqq., and what Fritzsche says on the 
other side, Com. on Bar. ii. 29; Judithi. 12; [cf. Kneu- 
cker on Bar. 1. c.; B. 359 (308); Τὰ Proleg. p.59; WH. 
App. p. 151; B. D.s. v. New Testament, I. 811. 10. 
εἰ μή τι Or μήτι, unless in some respect, unless perchance, 
unless indeed: ironically, with the indic. pres. 2 Co. xiii. 
5; hesitatingly, with the subjune. aor. Lk. ix. 13; cf. 
Meyer ad loc. [also W. 294 (276); B. 221 (191)]; εἰ μή 
τι ἄν: 1 Co. vil. 5, see ἄν, LV. 11. εἰ ov (fully discussed 
by W. ὃ 55, 2c. and B. 345 (297) sqq.), ifnot; this com- 
bination is used much more frequently in the N. T. than 
in the more elegant Grk. auth.; it differs from εἰ μή in 
this, that in the latter μή belongs to the particle εἰ, while 
in εἰ οὐ the οὐ refers to some following word and denies 
it emphatically, not infrequently even coalescing with it 
intoasingleidea. a. when the idea to which οὐ belongs 
is antithetic a. toa positive term, either preceding 
or following: εἰ δὲ οὐ μοιχεύεις φονεύεις δέ, Jas. ii. 11 
fin R G the fut.]; εἰ γὰρ ὁ θεὸς . .. οὐκ ἐφείσατο, .. - 
ἀλλὰ. 
δώσει... διά γε - « « δώσει, Lk. xi. 8; εἰ οὐ Td... εἰ δὲ 
ποιῶ, Jn. χ. 87 564. ; εἰ γὰρ ἐπιστεύετε .... εἰ δὲ - - - οὐ πι- 
orevere, Jn. ν. 46 54.; add, Mk. xi. 26 RGL; Ro. viii. 
9; 1Co.ix. 2; xi.6; Jas.iii.2. B. to some other idea 
which is negative (formally or virtually): εἰ... 


. . παρέδωκεν εἰς κρίσιν, 2 Pet. 11. 4 sq.; εἰ καὶ οὐ 


+ OUK 
dxovovow, ove... πεισθήσονται, Lk. xvi. 31; ei... οὐκ 
ἐφείσατο, οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται [ Rec. -σηται], Ro. xi. 21; add, 
1 Co. xv. 13, 15-17; 2 Th. iii. 10; foll. in the apodosis 
by a question having the force of a negative: Lk. xvi. 
11 sq.; Jn. iii. 12; 1 Tim. iii.5. 0. the od denies with 
emphasis the idea to which it belongs: καλὸν ἦν αὐτῷ, εἰ 
οὐκ ἐγεννήθη, good were it for him not to have been born, 
Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. δ. the whole emphasis is 
placed on the negative itself : εἰ σὺ οὐκ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, Jn. 
i. 25. ὍὌ. the οὐ coalesces, as it were, with the word to 
which it belongs into a single idea: εἰ δὲ οὐκ ἐγκρατεύον- 
ται, if they are incontinent, 1 Co. vii. 9; εἴ τις τῶν ἰδίων 
οὐ προνοεῖ [or -εῖται T Tr txt. WH mrg.], neglects, 1 
Tim. v. 8; add, Lk. xiv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 22; Rev. xx. 15, 
ete. 12. εἰ οὖν, if then: Mt. vi. 23; vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13, 
36; Jn. xiii. 14; xviii. 8; Acts xi. 17; Col. iii. 1; Philem. 
17. [On εἰ μὲν οὖν see μέν 11]. 4.) 13. εἴπερ [50 ΤΎΝΗ 
(exe. in 2 Co. ν. 3 mrg.), but L Tr εἴ περ; cf. W. 45; 
Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 123], (εἰ and πέρ, and this ap- 
parently from περί), prop. if on the whole; if only, pro- 
vided that, is used “of a thing which is assumed to be, 
but whether rightly or wrongly is left in doubt ” (Herm. 
ad Vig. p. 831, [so W. 448 (417); but ef. Bdumlein, 
Griech. Partikeln, p. 202 (cf. 64 bot.) ; K/otz ad Devar. ii. 
2 p. 528, and esp. s. v. εἴγε (in γέ, 3 6.) and the reff. to 
Mey., Lghtft., Ellic., there given]): Ro. viii. 9,17; 1 Co. 
vill. 5; xv. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 3 (where L T Tr WH εἰν; by 
a species of rhetorical politeness it is used of that about 
which there is no doubt: 2 Th. i. 6; Ro. iii. 30 L T Tr 
WH; 2 Co. v. 3 L Tr WH mre. 14. εἴ πως [L Tr 


WH] or εἴπως [ἃ ΤΊ, if in any way, if by any means, if 


possibly: with the optat. pres. (see I. 7 above), Acts 
xxvii. 12; interrogatively, with the indic. fut. Ro. i. 10; 


| 


εἴδω 


with the subjune. aor., so that before εἰ the word σκοπῶν 
or πειρώμενος must be mentally supplied (see II. 1 ἃ. 
above): Ro. xi. 14; Phil. iii. 11. 15. εἴτε. .. εἴτε, 
a. whether... or [as disjunc. conjunce., sive ... sive; ef. 
W. 440 (409 sq.) ; B. 221 (191) ], without a verb follow- 
ing: Ro. xii. 6-8; 1 Co. iii. 22; viii. 5; 2 Co. v. 9sq.; 
Phil. i. 18, 20, 27; 2 Th. ii. 15; Col. i. 16, 20; 1 Pet. ii 
. etre, 1 Co. xv. 11; foll. by the indic. 
pres., 1 Co. xii. 26; xiii. 8; 2 Co. i. 6; foll. by the sub- 
june. pres. 1 Th. v. 10, where the use of the subjune. 
was occasioned by the subjunc. ζήσωμεν in the leading 
clause; cf. W. 294 (276); Β.221 (191). b. 
[as indirect interrogatives, utrum...an; cf. B. 250(215)] 
(see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Matthiae p. 1476 sq.) : after 
οὐκ vida, 2 Co. xii. 2sq. 116. εἴ τις, εἴ τε: exx. of this 
combination have already been given among the preced- 
ing; here may be added εἴ τις ἕτερος, εἴ τι ἕτερον, and if 
(there be) any other person or thing, —a phrase used as 
a conclusion after the mention or enumeration of several 
particulars belonging to the same class (in the classics 
εἴ τις ἄλλος, εἰ Kal τις ἄλλος, καὶ εἴ TL ἄλλο, etc., in Hdt., 
Xen., Plat., al.): Ro. xiii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10; εἴ τις with 
subjune. pres. Rey. xi. 5 Ree.; with the subjune. aor., 
ibid. T Tr WH txt. 

[elye, see ye, 8 c.] 

εἰδέα, -as, ἡ, Mt. xxviii. 3 T Tr WH, a poet. form for ἐδέα, 
q.-v. [ef. WH. App. p. 1591, (Bar. vi. [ep. Jer. ] 62; Arstph. 
Thesm. 438 var.). Cf. B.5; [W. 48 (47); see εἰ; 67." 

εἶδος, -ous, τό, (EIAQ), in Sept. chiefly for AND and 
48h; prop. that which strikes the eye, which is exposed 
to view; 1. the external appearance, form, figure, 
shape, (so fr. Hom. down): Jn. ν. 37; σωματικῷ cide, 
Lk. iii. 22; τὸ εἶδος τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, Lk. ix. 29; διὰ 
εἴδους, as encompassed with the visible appearance (of 
eternal things), (see διά, A. I. 2), 2 Co. ν. 7, — com. ex- 
plained, by sight i. e. beholding (Luth.: im Schauen) ; 
but no ex. has yet been adduced fr. any Grk. writ. in 
which εἶδος is used actively, like the Lat. species, of vision; 
(στόμα κατὰ στόμα, ἐν εἴδ ει, καὶ οὐ δι᾿ ὁραμάτων καὶ ἐνυ- 
πνίων, Clem. homil. 17, 18; οἵ. Num. xii. 8 Sept.). “Ἔ 
form, kind : ἀπὸ παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ ἀπέχεσθε, i. 6. from 
every kind of evil or wrong, 1 Th. v. 22 [cf. πονηρός, sub 
fin.]; (Joseph. antt. 10, 3,1 πᾶν εἶδος πονηρίας. The 
Grks., esp. Plato, oppose τὸ εἶδος to τὸ γένος, as the Lat. 
does species to genus. Cf. Schmidt ch. 182, 2).* 

εἴδω, ἴδω. Lat. video, [Skr. vid, pf. veda know, vind-a- 
mi jind, (cf. Vedas) ; Curtius § 282], an obsol. form of 
the present tense, the place of which is supplied by ὁμάω. 
The tenses coming from eté and retained by usage form 
two families, of which one signifies to see, the other to 
know. 

L 2 aor. εἶδον, the com. form, with the term. of the 
1 aor. (see reff. s. v. ἀπέρχομαι, init.) εἶδα, Rev. xvii. 3 
L,6 LT Tr; 1 pers. plur. εἴδαμεν, LT Tr WH in Acts 
iv. 20; Mk. ii. 12; Tr WH in Mt. xxv. 37; WHin Mt. 
xxv. 38; Mk. ix. 38; Lk. ix. 49; 3 pers. plur. εἶδαν, 
T WH in LK. ix. 832; Tr WH in Lk. x. 24; Acts vi. 15; 
xxviii. 4; T Tr WH in Mk. vi. 50; L T Tr WI in Jn 


ς ” > 
13 sq.3 εἴτε οὖν... 


whether ...or 


» 
€.0@ 


i. 39 (40); Acts ix.35; xii. 16; WH in Mk. vi. 33; add 
ἴδαν Tdf. in Mt. xiii.17; Lk. x. 24; ἴδον (an Epic form, 
ef. Matthiae i. p. 564; [Veitch p. 215]; very freq. in 
Sept. and in 1 Mace., ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 543; on 
the freq. interchange of ἴδον and εἶδον in codd., ef. Jacobs 
ad Achill. Tat. 2, 24; [ WH. App. pp. 162, 164; Tdf. 
Sept. Proleg. p. lx.; N.T. Proleg. p. 89; B. 39 (34)]), 
Tdf. in Rev. iv. 1; vi. 1, 2,5, 8, 9,12; vii.l,etc.; 3 pers. 
sing. ἴδεν, Tdf. in Lk. v. 2; Rev.i.2; 2 pers. plur. ἴδετε, 
Phil. i. 80 Rec.; 3 pers. plur. ἴδον, Τα. in [LK. ii. 20]; 
Jn. xix. 6; subjunc. ἴδω; impv. ἴδε (Attic ἰδέ, cf. W. § 6, 
1 a.; [B. 62 (54); Géitling, Accentl. 82), [2 pers. plur. 
ἴδετε, Jn. i. 39 (40) RGL]; inf. ἰδεῖν ; ptep. ἰδών ; (Sept. 
mostly for 78, sometimes for 717 and 7); fo see (have 
seen), be seeing (saw), i.e. 1. to perceive (with the 
eyes; Lat. conspicere, Germ. erblicken); a. univ. twa 
or ti: Mt. ii. 2; iv. 16; xiv. 14; xxviii. 6; Mk.i. 10, 16; 
ii. 14; Lk. v. 26; vii. 22; Jn.i.47 (48) sq.; vi. 26; xix. 
6; Actsix. 35; xii. 16; Gal. i.19; 1 Tim. vi. 16, and very 
often. οὐδέποτε οὕτως eidupev we never saw in such fash- 
ion, i. 6. such a sight never befell us, Mk. ii. 12, old Germ. 
also hat man nicht gesehen, seit etc.; ef. Kuinoel ad Mat. 
p- 280 ed. 4. ἰδεῖν τι and ἀκοῦσαί τι are conjoined in Lk. 
vii. 22; Acts xxii. 14; 1 Co. ii.9; Jas. v. 11; ἰδεῖν and 
ἰδεῖν τι are also used by those to whom something is pre- 
sented in vision, as the author of the Apocalypse relates 
that he saw this or that: Rev. i. 12,17; iv. 1 [here εἶδον 
x. ἰδού a formula peculiar to Rey. ; see ἰδού, sub fin.]; v. 
1 sq. 6, 11; vi. 9; vii. 1,9, etc.; Jn. xii. 41; ἰδεῖν ὅραμα, 
Acts x. 17; xvi. 10; ἰδεῖν ἐν ὁράματι, Acts ix. 12 [RG]; 
x. 3; ἐν τῇ ὁράσει, Rev. ix. 17; elliptically ἰδεῖν τι ἔκ τινος 
sc. ἐκπορευθέν, Rev. xvi. 13, cf. 1.10; Hebraistically (on 
which see W. § 45, 8; B. § 144, 30) ἰδὼν εἶδον I have 
surely seen: Acts vii. 34 after Ex. iii. 7. Frequent in 
the historical books of the N. T. is the ptep. ἰδών, ἰδόντες, 
continuing the narrative, placed before a finite verb, and 
either having an ace. added, as in Mt. ii. 10; iii. 7; v. 1; 
vill. 34; Mk. v. 22; ix. 20; Lk. ii. 48; vii.13; Jn.v.6; 
vi. 14; Acts xiii. 12; xiv. 11, etc.; or the acc. is omitted, 
as being evident from the context: Mt. ix. 8, 11; xxi. 
20; Mk. x. 14; Lk. i. 12; ii.17; Acts iii. 12; vii. 31, etc. 
b. with the ace. of a pers. or a thing, and a ptep. (cf. 
W. §45,4a.]: Mt. iii. 7,165; viii.14; Mk. i. 16; vi. 33; 
Lk. ix. 49; xxi. 2; Jn. i. 33, 47 (48) sq.; Acts iii. 9; 
xi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 10; 1Jn.v.16; Rev. ix. 1, and often. 
ce. foll. by ὅτι : Mk. ii. 16 L T Tr WH; ix. 25; Jn. vi. 
22,24, ete. . foll. by an indirect question with the 
indic.: with ris, Lk. xix. 3; with τί, Mk. v. 14; with 
πηλίκος, Gal. vi. 11. 8. ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, a formula of invi- 
tation, the use of which leaves the object of the seeing to 
be inferred by the hearers from the matter under consid- 
eration: Jn. xi. 34 (35); i. 46 (47) (here ἴδε is equiv. to 
by seeing learn, sc. that Jesus is the Messiah), and Grsb. 
in Rev. vi. 1, 5; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) (where T Tr WH 
ἔρχ- κι ὄψεσθε). The Rabbins use the phrases 7) 8) 
and 81) 82 to command attention. f. ἰδεῖν used 
absol. and πιστεύειν are contrasted in Jn. xx. 29. 2. 
like the Lat. video, to perceive by any of the senses: Mt. 


173 


εἴδω 


xxvii. 54; ΜΚ. χυ. 39; Lk. xvii. 15. 3. univ. to per- 
ceive, notice, discern, discover: τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν, Mt. ix. 2; 
τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν, ib. 4 (where L Tr WH tat. εἰδώς 
for ἰδών) ; τ. διαλογισμὸν τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν, Lk. ix. 47 [ 
WH txt. Tr mre. εἰδώς] ; ἴδε with ace. of the thing, Ro. 
xi. 22; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xxvii. 3, 24; Acts xii.3; xiv. 9; 
xvi. 19; Gal. ii. 7, 14; ἴδε, drt, Jn. vii. 52; ἰδεῖν τινα, ὅτε, 
ΜΚ. xii. 84 [Tr br. the ace. ]. 4. to see, i. e. to turn 
the eyes, the mind, the attention to anything ; a. lo 
pay attention, observe: foll. by εἰ interrog. Mt. xxvii. 49 ; 
by ποταπός, 1 Jn. iii. 1. b. περί τινος (cf. Lat. videre de 
aliqua re), to see about something [A. V. to consider of ], 
i.e. to ascertain what must be done about it, Acts xv. 6. 
c. to inspect, examine: τί, Lk. xiv. 18. ἃ. τινά, to look 
at, behold : Jn. xxi. 21; Mk. viii. 33. 5. to experience, 
τί, any state or condition [cf. W. 17]: as τὸν θάνατον, Lk. 
ii. 26; Heb. xi. 5, (Joseph. antt. 9, 2, 2 [oidev]), cf. Jn. 
viii. 51 (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 49); τὴν διαφθοράν, to 
pass into a state of corruption, be dissolved, Acts ii. 27, 
31; xiii. 35-37, (Ps. xv.-(xvi.) 10); τὴν βασιλ. τ. θεοῦ, 
to partake of salvation in the kingdom of God, Jn. iii. 
3; πένθος, Rev. xviii. 7; τὴν δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ, by some mar- 
vellous event get a signal experience of the beneficent 
power of God, Jn. xi. 40; στενοχωρίας, 1 Mace. xiii. 3, 
(ἀλόχου χάριν, Hom. Il. 11, 243); on the same use of the 
verb ΤΙ Ὁ and the Lat. videre, cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. 
p- 1246. ἡμέραν, to live to see a day (a time) and en- 
joy the blessings it brings: ἡμέρας ἀγαθάς, 1 Pet. iii. 10 
fr. Ps. xxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; τὴν ἡμέραν ἐμήν (Christ’s lan- 
guage) the time when I should exercise my saving power 
on earth, Jn. viii. 56; εἶδε se. τ. Hp. ἐμήν, from the abode 
of the blessed in paradise he in spirit saw my day, ibid. 
(see ἀγαλλιάω, sub fin.) ; ἐπιθυμήσετε μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν... - 
ἰδεῖν, ye will wish that even a single day of the blessed 
coming age of the Messiah may break upon your 
wretched times, Lk. xvii. 22; so in Grk. writ., esp. the 
poets, ἧμαρ, ἡμέραν ἰδεῖν, in Latin videre diem; cf. Kuinoel 
on Jn. viii. 56. 6. with ace. of pers. to see i. e. have 
an interview with, to visit: Lk. viii. 20; Jn. xii. 21; Acts 
xvi. 40; xxviii. 20; Ro. i. 11; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Phil. i. 27; 
1 Th. iii. 6; 2 Tim.i.4; 3Jn. 14; τὸ πρόσωπόν twos: 1 Th. 
ii. 17; iii. 10, (Leian. dial. ἃ. 24, 2 [ef. Rutherford on Babr. 
11, 9]); with an ace. of place, to visit, go to: Acts xix. 21. 

[Syn.: ‘When εἶδον, ἰδεῖν are called “ momentary preter- 
ites,” it must not be supposed that thereby a quickly-past 
action is designated ; these forms merely present the action 
without reference to its duration.... The un- 
augmented moods, too, are not exclusively past, but present 
or future as well, — the last most decidedly in the imperative. 
Now it is obvious that when a perception is stated without 
regard to its duration, its form or mode cannot have 
prominence; hence ἰδεῖν is much less physical than ὁρᾶν. 
ἰδεῖν denotes to perceive with the eyes; ὁρᾶν [q. γ.], on the 
other hand, to see, i. e. it marks the use and action of the 
eye as the principal thing. Perception as denoted by ἰδεῖν, 
when conceived of as completed, permits the sensuous ele 
ment to be forgotten and abides merely as an activity of the 
soul; for οἶδα, εἰδέναι, signifies not “to have seen,” but “to 
know.”’ Schmidt ch. xi. Comp.: am-, ἐπ-, mpo-, συν-, ὑπερ- 
εἴδο».1 


εἴδω 


Il. 2 pf. οἶδα, οἶδας (1 Co. vii. 16; Jn. xxi. 15, for the 
more com. οἶσθα). οἴδαμεν (for ἴσμεν, more com. in Grk.), 
οἴδατε (ἴστε, the more usual classic form, is found only in 
Eph. v.5 G LT Tr WH and Heb. xii. 17, [prob. also in 
Jas. i. 19 ace. to the reading of L'T Tr WH; but see be- 
low]), οἴδασε (and once the Attic ἴσασι, Acts xxvi. 4), 
impv. tore, once, Jas. i. 19 L T Tr WH, [but see above], 
subjune. εἰδῶ, inf. εἰδέναι, ptep. εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα (Mk. ν. 33; 
Acts ν. 7); plpf. ἤδειν, 2 pers. everywhere ἤδεις, 3 pers. 
ἤδει, plur. 2 pers. ἤδειτε, 3 pers. ἤδεισαν (for the more com. 
ἤδεσαν [Veitch p. 218; B. 43 (38)]); fut. εἰδήσω (Heb. 
viii. 11); ef. W. 84 (81); B. 51 (44); Sept. chiefly for 
yw; like the Lat. novi it has the signification of a pres- 
ent to know, understand; and the plpf. the signif. of an 
impf.; [ef. W. 274 (257) ]. 

1. to know: with ace. of the thing, Mt. xxv. 13; Mk. 
x. 19; Jn. x. 4; χα. 17: xiv.4; Actsv.7; Ro. νὰν; 1 
Co. ii. 2; Rev. ii. 2, 9, ete.; rodro[Rec.; al. πάντα] foll. 
by ὅτι ete. Jude 5; with ace. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 72, 74; 
Jn. i. 31; vi. 42; Acts iii. 16; 2 Co. v.16, etc.; τὸν θεόν, 
Tit. i. 16, cf. Jn. viii. 19; xv. 21; Gentiles are called οἱ 
μὴ εἰδότες τ. θεόν in 1 Th. iv. 5; 2 Th.i. 8, ef. Gal. iv. 8; 
the predicate of the person,is added (as often in Attic), 
εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον, sc. ὄντα, Mk. vi. 20 [B. 304 
(261)]; in the form of a ptep. 2 Co. xii. 2. to an accus. 
of the object by attraction (W. § 66,5 a.; B. 377 (323)) 
an epexegetical clause is added [cef. esp. B. 301 (258)], 
with drt, 1 Co. xvi. 15; 2 Co. xii. 3 sq.; Acts xvi. 3; or 
an indirect question [B. 250 (215) sq.], Mk. i. 24; Lk. 
iv. 34; xiii. 25, 27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29. εἰδέναι is used 
with the ace. and inf. in Lk. iv. 41; 1 Pet. v. 9; foll. by 


often; οἴδαμεν foll. by ὅτι is not infrequently, so far as 
the sense is concerned, equiv. to it ts well known, ac- 
knowledged : Mt. xxii. 16 ; Lk. xx. 21; Jn. iii. 2; ix. 31; 
Ro. ii. 2; iii. 19 ; vil. 14; viii. 22,28; 2Co. v. 1; 1 Tim. i. 
8; 1 In. iii. 2; v. 20; ef. Lightfoot [in his Horae Hebr. 
et Talm.] and Baumg.-Crusius on Jn. iii. 2. freq., esp. 
in Paul, is the interrog. formula οὐκ οἴδατε and ἢ οὐκ 
οἴδατε ὅτι, by which something well known is commended 
to one for his thoughtful consideration: Ro. xi. 2; 1 Co. 
iii. 16; v.63 vi. 2sq. 9, 15 sq. 19; ix. 13, 24; οὐκ οἴδατε 
foll. by an indir. quest. Lk. ix. 55 [Ree.]; οὐκ οἶδας ὅτι, Jn. 
xix. 10; οὐκ ἤδειτε, Lk. ii. 49; εἰδέναι foll. by an indir. 
quest. [cf. B. u. s.], Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. ix. 21, 25, 30; xiv. 
5; xx. 13; 1 Co.i. 16; vii. 16; 2Co. xii. 2sq.; Ro. viii. 
26; Eph. vi. 21; 1 Tim. iii. 15, and very often. 2. to 
know i. 6. get knowledge of, understand, perceive; a. any 
fact: as, ras ἐνθυμήσεις, Mt. xii. 25; τὴν ὑπόκρισιν, Mk. 
xii. 15; τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς αὐτῶν, Lk. vi. 8; xi. 17; with 
the addition of ἐν ἑαυτῷ foll. by ὅτι, Jn. vi. 61. Ὁ. the 
force and meaning of something, which has a definite 
meaning: 1 Co. ii. 11 sq.; τὴν παραβολήν, Mk. iv. 13; 
μυστήρια, 1 Co. xiii. 2; foll. by an indir. quest. Eph. i. 18. 
c. asin class. Grk., foll. by an inf. in the sense of to know 
how (Lat. calleo, to be skilled in): Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 
15. x01556; Bhilhiv. 123 1 Th.iv.4; 1 Tim: 111 55 Jas: 
iv. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 9; ὡς οἴδατε, sc. ἀσφαλίσασθαι, Mt. xxvii. 


174 


εἴκοσι 


65. 3. Hebraistically, εἰδέναι τινά to have regard for 
one, cherish, pay attention to: 1 Th. v.12, (Sept. Gen. 
xxxix. 6 for pt). [SYN. see γινώσκω.] 

εἰδωλεῖον [-Acov T WH; see I, ε], -ου, τό, (εἴδωλον, 4. V-; 
οἵ. ᾿Ασκληπεῖον, ᾿Απολλωνεῖον, Ἡρακλεῖον, ete, [W. 95 
(90) ]), an idol’s temple, temple consecrated to idols: 1 Co. 
viii. 10 (1 Mace. i. 47; x. 83; 1 Esdr. ii. 9; not found 
in prof. auth.; for in the frag. fr. Soph. [152 Dind.] in 
Plut. de amico et adul. c. 86 ἑδώλια has of late been 
restored ).* 

εἰδωλόθυτος, -ov, (εἴδωλον and θύω), a bibl. and eccl. 
word [W. 26; 100 (94) ], sacrificed to idols; τὸ εἰδωλόθυ- 
τον and τὰ εἰδωλόθυτα denote the flesh left over from the 
heathen sacrifices ; it was either eaten at feasts, or sold 
(by the poor and the miserly) in the market: Acts xv. 
29; xxi. 25; 1 Co. viii. 1, 4, 7,10; x.19, 28 (here L txt. 
T Tr WH read ἱερόθυτον, q. v.); Rev. ii. 14, 20. [CE. 
Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 308 sq.]* ; 

εἰδωλο-λατρεία [-rpia WH; see I, ¢], -as, 7, (εἴδωλον, 
4: v., and λατρεία), (Tertull. al. idololatria), the worship 
of false gods, idolatry: Gal. ν. 20; used of the formal sac- 
rificial feasts held in honor of false gods, 1 Co. x. 14; of 
avarice, as a worship of Mammon [q. v. ], Col. iii. 5 [Bp. 
Lehtft. ad loc. ]; in plur., the vices springing from idolatry 
and peculiar to it, 1 Pet. iv. 8. (Ecel. writ. [ef. W. 26].)* 

εἰδωλολάτρης, -ov, ὁ, (εἴδωλον, and λάτρις i. 6. a hireling, 
servant, slave), a worshipper of false gods, an idolater, 
(Tertull. idololatres) : 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15; 
any one, even a Christian, participant in any way in the 
worship of heathen, 1 Co. v. 11; vi. 9; esp. one who at- 
tends their sacrificial feasts and eats of the remains of 
the offered victims, 1 Co. x. 7; a covetous man, as a 
worshipper of Mammon, Eph. v. 5; ef. Meyer ad loc. 
(Eccl. writ. [ef. W. 100 (94 sq-)].)* 

εἴδωλον, -ov, τό, (εἶδος [cf. W. 96 (91); Etym. Magn. 
296, 97), in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, an image, likeness, 
i. e. whatever represents the form of an object, either 
real or imaginary; used of the shades of the departed 
(in Hom.), of apparitions, spectres, phantoms of the 
mind, ete.; in bibl. writ. [an idol, i. e.] 1. the image 
of a heathen god: Acts νἱϊ. 41; 1 Co. xii. 2; Rey. ix. 20, 
(Is. xxx. 22; 2 Chr. xxiii. 17, ete.; θεῶν ἢ δαιμόνων 
εἴδωλα, Polyb. 31, 3, 13); 2. a false god: Acts xv. 
20 (on which see ἀλίσγημα) ; Ro. ii. 22; 1 Co. viii. 4, 7 ; 
x. 19; 2 Co. vi. 16; 1 Th.i. 9, (often in Sept.) ; φυλάσ- 
σειν ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τ. εἰδώλων, to guard one’s self from all 
manner of fellowship with heathen worship, 1 Jn. v. 21.* 

εἰκῆ (1, WH Re εἰκῇ ; ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 342; 
B. 69 (61); [W.$5,4e.; Jelf § 324 Obs. 6; Kuhner 
$336 Anm. 7; esp. Etym. Magn. 78, 26 sq.; and reff. s. v. 
I, 17), adv.; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; 1. in- 
considerately, without purpose, without just cause : Mt. v. 
22 RGTrbr.; Ro. xiii. 4 (i.e. ‘not to hide it in the 
seabbard, but to draw it’ Fritzsche); Col. ii. 18. 2. 
in vain; without success or effect: 1 Co. xv. 2; Gal. iii. 
4; iv. 11. [From Xenophon, Aeschyl. down.]* 

εἴκοσι for -σιν; Tdf. uses ox ten times before a conso- 
nant, and says -ov “etiam ante vocalem fere semper in 


εἴκω 


codd. antiquiss.” Proleg. p. 98: WH everywhere -σι- 
ef. their App. p. 148; B. 9], oi, ai, ra, twenty: Lk. xiv. 
31; Acts i. 15, ete. [From Hom. down. ] 

εἴκω : 1 aor. εἶξα ; to yield, (A. V. give place]: τινί, Gal. 
ii. 5. (From Hom. down.) [Comp.: ὑπ-είκω.] * 

EIKO: whence 2 pf. ἔοικα with the force of a pres. 
[W. 274 (257)]; to be like: τινί, Jas. i. 6, 23. [From 
Hom. down. }* 

εἰκών, -dvos, (acc. εἰκόναν, Rey. xiii. 14 Lehm.; see 
ἄρσην ), ἡ, (EIKQ, q. v.); [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; 
Sept. mostly for Dox ; an image, figure, likeness; a. Mt. 
xxii. 20; Mk. xii. 16; Lk. xx. 24; Ro. i. 23; 1 Co. xv. 49; 
Rev. xiii. 14 sq.; xiv. 9,11; xv. 2; xvi. 2; xix. 20; xx. 4; 
ἡ εἰκὼν τῶν πραγμάτων, the image of the things (sc. the 
heavenly things), in Heb. x. 1, is opp. to ἡ σκιά, just as 
in Cie. de off. 3, 17 solida et expressa effigies is opp. to 
umbra; εἰκὼν τ. θεοῦ is used of the moral likeness of re- 
newed men to God, Col. iii. 10; εἰκὼν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ 
the image of the Son of God, into which true Christians 
are transformed, is likeness not only to the heavenly 
body (cf. 1 Co. xv. 49; Phil. iii. 21), but also to the most 
holy and blessed state of mind, which Christ possesses : 
Ro. viii. 29; 2Co.iii. 18. b. metonymically, εἰκών twos, 
the image of one; one in whom the likeness of any one 
is seen: εἰκὼν θεοῦ is applied to man, on account of his 
power of command (see δόξα, III. 3 a. a.), 1 Co. xi. 7; to 
Christ, on account of his divine nature and absolute 
moral excellence, Col. i. 15; 2 Co. iv. 4; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. 
and Mey. on Col. 1. c.].* 

[Syn. εἰκών, ὁμοίωμα : du. denotes often not mere 
similarity but likeness (see ὁμοίωμα, b. and cf. Mey. on Ro. i. 
23), visible conformity to its object ; εἰκ. adds to the idea of 
likeness the suggestions of representation (as a de- 
rived likeness) and manifestation. Cf. Trench ὃ xv.; 
Lghtft. u. 5.] 

εἰλικρίνεια (-ia T [ WH, 5661, ἐ; on the breathing see 
WH. App. p. 1447), -as, ἡ, (εἰλικρινής, q. V-), purity, sin- 
cerity, ingenuousness : 1 Co. v. 8; 2 Co. ii. 17; τοῦ θεοῦ, 
which God effects by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. i. 12 [W. 
§ 36, 3b.]. (Theophr., Sext. Empir., Stob.) * 

εἰλικρινής, -ἐς, ([on the breathing see WH. App. p. 
144; L.and 5. 5. v. fin.]; com. supposed to be fr. εἵλη or 
ἕλη sunlight, and κρίνω, prop. found pure when unfolded 
and examined by the sun’s light; hence some write eid. 
[see reff. above]; acc. to the conjecture of others fr. 
εἶλος, εἰλεῖν, prop. sifted and cleansed by rapid move- 
ment or rolling to and fro), pure, unsullied, sincere ; of the 
soul, an εἰλικρινής man: Phil. i. 10; διάνοια, 2 Pet. iii. 1. 
(Sap. vii. 25, where ef. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb.; [see, on the 
word, also Trench ὃ lxxxv.]; [Hippocr.], Xen., Plat., 
[Aristot., Plut.], Polyb., Philo, [al.].) * 

[Syn. εἰλικρινής, καθαρός: Acc. to Trench u.s. the 
former word expresses freedom from the falsehoods, the 
latter from the defile ments, of the flesh and of the world.] 

εἱλίσσω, Ionic and poetic and occasional in later prose 
for ἑλίσσω [W. § 2, 1 a.]: [pres. pass. εἱλίσσομαι] ; (εἴλω 
to press close, to roll up, [ef. L. and S. s. v. fin.]), to roll 
up or together: Rev. vi. 14 RG; but LT Tr WH have 
restored ἑλισσόμ. (From Hom. down.) * 


17 


r 


5 εἰμὶ 


εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ 
(Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), 
impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 
31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω 
(or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. 
plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. 
—ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. 
ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. 
RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ 
Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. 
form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 
35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, 
etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts 
xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. 
ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 
149, 152; fut. ἔσομαι; cf. W.§ 14, 2; B.49 sq. (43); to 
be; 

I. εἰμί has the force of a predicate [i.e. is the sub- 
stantive verb]: to be,i.e. 1. toexist; a. passages 
in which the idea of the verb preponderates, and some 
person or thing is said to exist by way of distinction 
from things non-existent: ἔστιν ὁ θεός, Heb. xi. 6; ὁ 
ὧν καὶ ὁ ἦν [W. 68 (66), cf. 182 (172); B. 50 (43)], Rev. 
1. 4, [8 ; iv. 8]; xi. 17; xvi. 5; ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λόγος, Jn. i. 1; 
πρὶν ᾿Αβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί, Jn. viii. 58 [so WH mre. 
in 24, 28; xiii. 19 (see II. 5 below)]; πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον 
εἶναι, Jn. xvii. 5; ἦν, καὶ οὐκ ἔστι καίπερ ἐστίν Rec., ace. 
to the better reading καὶ πάρεσται [ἃ Tr WH, but LT 
παρέσται, correctly ; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. § 108 Anm. 20; 
Chandler § 803], Rev. xvii. 8; ἐσμέν, Acts xvii. 28; τὰ 
μὴ ὄντα and τὰ ὄντα things that are not, things that are, 
Ro. iv. 17; things that have some or have no influence, 
of some or of no account, 1 Co. i. 28, (ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς οὐκ 
ὄντας καὶ ἠθέλησεν ἐκ μὴ ὄντος εἶναι ἡμᾶς, Clem. Rom. 2 
Cor. i. 8 [ef. Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. and esp. on Herm. 
vis. 1,1, 6]). Hence Ὁ. i. q. to live: εἰ ἤμεθα [or ἦμεν 
Rec. ] ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had been 
(viz. living) in the days of our fathers, Mt. xxiii. 30; 
οὐκ εἶναι is used (as in class. Grk., cf. Passow i. p. 792, 
[L. and S.s.v. A. I. 1]) of the dead [who are not, are no 
more]: Mt.ii.18. c. i. q. to stay, remain, be in a place: 
Mt. ii. 13,15; Mk. i.45[L WH br. ἦν]; v. 21; Lk.i. 80; 
see V.4 below. ἃ. i. q. to be found, the subject being 
anarthrous; as, ἦν ἄνθρωπος there was (found, Germ. es 
gab) a man, ete.: Lk. xvi. 1, 19; xviii. 23; Jn. iii. 1; 
iv. 6; v. 2; vi. 10; 1 Co. viii. 5; xii. 4-6; xiv. 10; xv. 
44; 1 Jn. ν. 16, and often; ἔσονται ἐμπαῖκται, Jude 18; 
ἔστι, ἦν, ἔσται with a negative: οὐκ ἔστι δίκαιος there is 
not (sc. found) a righteous man, Ro. iii. 10; add 12, 18; 
χρόνος οὐκ ἔσται ἔτι there shall be no longer time, Rev. x. 
6; add, Rev. xxii. 3,5 [Ree. adds ἐκεῖ]; xxi. 25 [here ἐκεῖ 
stands]; ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν, 1 Co. xy. 12; μὴ εἶναι 
ἀνάστασιν, Mt. xxii. 23 and its parall.; Acts xxiii. 8. Here 
belong also the phrases εἰσίν, of etc., οἵτινες ete., there are 
(some) who ete.: Mt. xvi. 28; xix. 12; Mk. ix.1; Lk. ix. 
27; Jn. vi. 64; Acts xi. 20; οὐδείς ἐστιν, ὅς, Mk. ix. 39 
sq.; x. 29; Lk. i. 61, xviii. 29; with a noun added, ἕξ 


εἰμί 


ἡμέραι εἰσίν, ἐν αἷς ete. Lk. xiii. 14; τίς ἐστιν, ὅς, Mt. vii. 9 
[1 Tr WH om. éor.]; xii. 11 [Tr om. WH br. ἐστ.}; ἔστιν 
6 with a ptep. there is (viz. is not wanting) one that ete. 
Jn. ν. 32 [7], 45; viii. 50. 6. when used of things, 
events, facts, etc., εἶναι 15 i. 4. to happen, take place: 
νῦν κρίσις ἐστίν, Jn. xii. 31; γογγυσμὸς ἦν, Jn. vii. 12: 
θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ, Mk. xiv. 2; σχίσμα, σχίσματα, Jn. ix. 
16; 1Co.i.10; xii. 25; ἔριδες, 1 Co.i. 11; αἱρέσεις, 1 Co. 
xi. 19; πένθος, πόνος, κραυγή, Rey. xxi. 4; ἔσονται λιμοὶ 
x. λοιμοὶ [ἢ G Tr mrg. in br., al. om. x. λοιμ.] κ' σεισμοί, 
Mt. xxiv. 7; ἀνάγκη μεγάλη, Lk. xxi. 23 ; ἀνάστασιν μέλ- 
λειν ἔσεσθαι, Acts xxiv. 15. οὗ times and seasons: χειμών 
ἐστιν, Jn. x. 22; νύξ, In. xiii. 30; ψῦχος, Jn. xviii. 18; 
καύσων, Lk. xii. 55; ἑσπέρα, Acts iv. 3; πρωΐα, Jn. xviii. 28 
[Ree.]; σκοτία, Jn. xx. 1; ἔστι, ἦν Spa,—as ἕκτη, Lk. 
xxiii. 44; Jn. iv. 6; xix. 14 [L T Tr WH]; i. 39 (40), 
ete.; also of feasts: Jn. v. 1, 10; ix. 14; Acts xii. 3; Lk. 
xxiii. 54; Mk. xv. 42. univ. τὸ ἐσόμενον what will be, 
follow, happen: Lk. xxii. 49; πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; Mt. xxiv. 
33 πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; Lk. i. 34; after the Hebr., καὶ ἔσται 
(equiv. to 7:)) foll. by the fut. of another verb: Acts ii. 
17 (fr. Joel ii. 28 (iii. 1)) ; 21 (fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) ; Acts 
iii. 23; Ro. ix. 26 (fr. Hos. i. 10 (ii. 1)). 
what then is it? i. e. how stands the case? what follows 
therefore? Acts xxi. 22; 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. 2. i. 4. 
πάρειμι, to be present; to be at hand; to be in store: οἶνος 
οὐκ ἔστιν, Jn. ii. 3 Tdf.; παμπόλλου [ Rec.] ὄχλον ὄντος, 
when there was present, Mk. viii. 1; add, ii.15; Mt. xii. 
10 RG; Heb. viii. 4; οὔπω yap ἢν πνεῦμα (ἅγιον), was 
not yet present, i.e. had not yet been given [which some 
authorities add], Jn. vii. 39; so also in the words εἰ πνεῦμα 
ἅγιον ἔστιν [but RG Tr accent ἅγιόν eor., cf. Chandler 
. ὄντα σῖτα, that there was 


poet: Deg Sted | 
τι οὺν ἐστιν; 


§ 938], Acts xix. 2; ἀκούσας .. 
an abundance of grain, Acts vii. 12; δύναμις κυρίου ἦν εἰς 
τὸ ἰᾶσθαι αὐτούς. was present to heal them, Lk. ν. 17. 
3. ἔστιν with inf., as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down (see 
Passow i. p. 792 sq.; [L. and 5. 5. v. A. VI.]; see exx. 
fr. the O. T. Apoer. in Wahi, Clavis apocryph. p. 155), 
it is possible to ete.; with a negative (as more com. in 
classic Grk. also), it is impossible: Heb. ix. 5; 1 Co. xi. 
20, [ef. W. § 44, 2 b.]. 

II. εἰμί [as a copula] connects the subject with the 
predicate, where the sentence shows who or what a per- 
son or thing is as respects character, nature, disposition, 
race, power, dignity, greatness, age, ete. 1. univ. : 
ἐγώ εἰμι πρεσβύτης, Lk. i. 18; ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ. Lk. i. 19; 
ἔρημός ἐστιν ὁ τόπος, Mt. xiv. 15; προφήτης εἶ σύ, In. iv. 
19; σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, Mt. xxvi. 635 καθαροί ἐστε, Jn. xiii. 
10; ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ ἅλας τῆς γῆς, Mt. ν. 13; Ιουδαίους εἶναι 
ἑαυτούς, Rev. iii. 9, ef. ii. 9, and countless other exx. 2. 
εἰμί, as a copula, indicates that the subject is or is to be 
compared to the thing expressed by the predicate: ἡ 
σφραγίς pou τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε, ye are, as it were, 
the seal attesting my apostleship, i. e. your faith is proof 
that the name of apostle is given me rightfully, 1 Co. ix. 
2; ἡ ἐπιστολὴ (sc. συστατική, cf. vs. 1) ὑμεῖς ἐστε, i. 6. ye 
yourselves are like a letter of recommendation for me, 
or ye serve as a substitute for a letter of recommenda- 


176 


εἰμι 


tion, 2 Co. iii. 2; τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ σῶμά μου, this which I 
now hand to you is, as it were, my body, Mt. xxvi. 26; 
Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; ὑμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐστέ [L txt. 
T Tr txt. WH ἡμεῖς... ἐσμέν] ye [we] are to be regarded 
as the temple of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 Co. vi. 19; ὁ θεὸς 
ναὸς αὐτῆς ἐστίν [ἐστι(ν) RG Tr], x. τὸ ἀρνίον, they are to 
be regarded as its temple, they occupy the place of a tem- 
ple in the city because present with every one in it, Rev. 
xxi. 22. Hence 8. εἶναι, getting an explicative 
force, is often i. q. to denote, signify, import, as ὁ ἀγρός 
ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος. Mt. xiii. 37-39, 19 sq. 22.sq.; Lk. viii. 11 
sq- 14 sq.; Gal. iv. 24 sq.; Rev. xvii. 15; xix. 8, (Sept. 
Gen. xli. 26 sq.; Ezek. xxxvii. 11); τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν [so T Wil 
uniformly, exe. that WH om. ν ἐφελκ. in Heb. ii. 14], 
Lehm. τουτέστιν [exe. in Ro. x. 6, 7,8; also Treg. exe. in 
Mt. xxvii. 46; Mk. vii. 2; Actsi.19; Ro. ix. 8; x. 6, 7, 8; 
sometimes written τοῦτό ἐστιν, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 111; οἵ. 
W. 45; B. 11 (10)], an explanatory formula (equiv. to 
τοῦτο σημαίνει) which is either inserted into the discourse 
as a parenthesis, or annexed to words as an apposition 
[ef. W. 530 (493); B.400 (342). Itis to be distinguished 
from τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν: τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν introduces an incidental 
explanation for the most part of the language; τοῦτο 
δέ ἐστιν subjoins an explanatory statement, relating gen- 
erally to the thought; (ef. our “that is to say,” and 
“that is”); see Ro. i. 12 and Fritzsche ad loc.]- Mt. 
xxvii. 46; Mk. vii. 2; Acts i.19; Ro. vii. 18; x. 6-8; 
Philem. 12; Heb. ii. 14; vii. 5, ete.; likewise 6 ἐστι, Mk. 
iii. 17; vii. 11, 34; Heb. vii. 2; 6 ἐστι μεθερμηνευόμενον, 
this signifies, when interpreted, etc. Mk. xv. 34; Acts iv. 
36; see 6 c. below. 4. In the Bible far more frequent- 
ly than in prof. auth., and in the N. T. much oftener in 
the historical than in the other books, a participle 
without the article serves as the predicate, being 
connected with the subject by the verb εἶναι (ef. W. § 45, 
5 and esp. B. 309 (265) sqq.); and 8. so as to form a 
mere periphrasis of the finite verb; α. with the Pres- 
ent ptep. is formed—a periphrasis of the pres.: ἐστὶ 
προσαναπληροῦσα.. - . καὶ περισσεύουσα, 2 Co. ix. 12,;—a 
periph. of the impf. or of the aor., mostly in Mark and 
Luke [B. 312 (268)]: ἦν καθεύδων, Mk. iv. 38; ἦν mpod- 
yor, X. 32; ἦν συγκαθήμενος, xiv. 54; ἦν διανεύων, Lk. i. 
22; ἦσαν καθήμενοι, ν. 17; ἦν ἐκβάλλων, xi. 14; ἦσαν Kabe- 
ὥόμενοι [Lehm., al. καθήμενοι]. Acts ii. 2, and other exx. ; 
once in Paul, Phil. ii. 26 ἐπιποθῶν ἦν ; --- ἃ periph. of the 
fut.: ἔσονται πίπτοντες [ἐκπ. R G], Mk. xiii. 25. B. with 
the Perfect ptep. is formed—a periph. of the aor. 
[impf. (?)]: ἦν ἑστώς, Lk. v. 1;—a periph. of the plpf. : 
ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες, συνεληλυθυῖαι, Lk. v.17; xxiii. 55; esp. 
with the pf. pass. ptep.: ἦν ἡ ἐπιγραφὴ ἐπιγεγραμμένη, Mk. 
XV. 26; ἦν αὐτῷ κεχρηματισμένον, Lk. ii. 26; ἦν τεθραμμένος, 
Lk. iv. 16 ; add, viii. 2; xxiii.51; Actsi.17,ete. sy. once 
with an Aorist ptep. a periph. of the plpf. is formed: 
ἦν... βληθεὶς (ἢ GL Tr mrg. βεβλημένος) ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ, 
Lk. xxiii. 19 T Tr txt. WH; on the same use of the aor. 
sometimes in Grk. writ. cf. Passow i. p. 793; [L and S. 
s. v. B. 2; yet ef. B. § 144, 24 fin.]. Ὁ. so as to indi- 
cate continuance in any act or state [B. 310 sq. 


ΓΝ 
ebul 


(266)]: ἦν διδάσκων was wont to teach, Mk. i. 22; Lk. 
iv. 31; xix. 47; ἦν [T Tr txt. WH ἦλθεν] κηρύσσων, Mk. 
i. 39; Lk. iv. 44; ἦσαν νηστεύοντες held their fast, Mk. ii. 
18; ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες were talking, Mk. ix. 4; ἦν συγκύ- 
mrovoa, Lk. xiii. 11; ἦν θέλων, Lk. xxiii. 8; ἦν προσδεχό- 
μενος, Mk. xv. 43 (Lk. xxiii. 51 προσεδέχετο) ; once in 
Paul, Gal. i. 23 ἦσαν ἀκούοντες. with the Future [ef. 
B. 311 (267)]: ἔσται δεδεμένον, ἔσται λελυμένον, i. q. shall 
remain bound, shall remain loosed, Mt. xvi. 19; ἔσται 
πατουμένη shall continue to be trodden down, Lk. xxi. 24, 
and other exx. ο. to signify that one is in the act of 
doing something: ἦν ἐρχόμενον was in the act of coming, 
Jn. i. 9 [ef. Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc.}; ἦν ὑποστρέφων, Acts 
viii. 28. ἃ. the combination of εἶναι with a ptep. seems 
intended also to give the verbal idea more force and 
prominence by putting it in the form of a noun [see B. 
and W. ἃ. 5.7: ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά (Germ. wohlha- 
bend, [Eng. was one that had]), Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; 
ἔσῃ σιωπῶν, Lk. i. 20; ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος (obedient, in sub- 
jection), Lk. ii. 51 ; ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, be thou ruler over, 
Lk. xix. 17 ; ἦν συνευδοκῶν, Acts vill. 1; ζῶν εἶμι, Rev.i. 18, 
and in other exx. three timesin Paul: εἰ... 
ἐσμὲν μόνον if we are those who have only hoped, or to 
whom nothing is left but hope, 1 Co. xv. 19; qv... καταλ- 
λάσσων, the reconciler, 2 Co. v.19 ; dria ἐστι λόγον ἔχοντα 
σοφίας, are things having a reputation of wisdom, Col. ii. 
23, (Matthiae § 560 [(so Kiihner § 353 Anm. 3)] gives 
exx. fr. prof. auth. in which several words intervene be- 
tween εἶναι and the ptep.). 6. Of quite another sort are 
those exx. in which εἶναι has its own force, being equiv. 
to to be found, to be present, to stay, (see I. above), and 
the ptep. is added to express an act or condition of the 
subject (cf. B. § 144, 27): ἐν τοῖς μνήμασι... ἦν (was 
1. 6. stayed) κράζων, Mk. v. 5; ἦν δὲ ἐκεῖ (was kept there) 
τον βοσκομένη, Mk. v. 11; Mt. viii. 30; ἦσαν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 
ἀναβαίνοντες, Luther correctly, they were in the road, go- 
ing up etc. Mk. x. 32; εἰσὶν ἄνδρες . . - εὐχὴν ἔχοντες, Acts 
xxi. 23; add, Mt. xii. 10 [RG]; xxvii. 55; Mk. ii. 6, (in 
the last two exx. ἦσαν were present) ; Lk. iv. 33; Jn.i. 28; 
ili. 23; Acts xxv. 14; Ro. iii. 12, ete.; ἄνωθέν ἐστιν, 
καταβαῖνον etc. (insert a comma after ἐστίν), is from above, 
καταβαῖνον etc. being added by way of explanation, Jas. 
i. 17 (ef. B. 310 (266)]. 5. The formula ἐγώ εἰμι (I 
am he), freq. in the Gospels, esp. in John, must have its 
predicate supplied mentally, inasmuch as it is evident 
from the context (cf. Kriiger § 60, 7); thus, ἐγώ εἰμι, 
sc. Ἰησοῦς 6 Naf. Jn. xviii. 5 [here L mrg. expresses 6 
Ἰησοῦς, WH mrg. Ἴησ.], 6, 8; itis J whom you see, not 
another, Mt. xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Lk. xxiv. 36 (Lcehm. 
in br.) ; Jn. vi. 20; se. ὁ καθήμενος x. προσαιτῶν, Jn. ix. 
9; simply εἰμί, J am teacher and Lord, Jn. xiii. 13; οὐκ 
εἰμί sc. ἐξ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii. 58; Jn. xviii. 25; 7 am not 
Elijah, Jn. i. 21; spec. Iam the Messiah, Mk. xiii. 6 ; 
xiv. 62; Lk. xxi. 8; Jn. iv. 26; viii. 24, 28; xiii. 19; I 
am the Son of God, Lk. xxii. 70 (like 17 73x, Deut. 
xxxii. 39; Is. xliii. 10); cf. Keim iii. 320 [Eng. trans. vi. 
34; Hofmann, Schriftbeweis, i. 63 sq.]. The third pers. 
is used in the same way: ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν, SC. ὁ vids τοῦ θεοῦ, 


ἠλπικότες 


177 


Pg 
εἰμί 


Jn. ix. 37; se. ὁ παραδώσων ἐμέ, Jn. xiii. 26. 6. Of 
the phrases having a pronoun in place of a predi- 
cate, the following deserve notice: a. τίς εἶμι, εἶ, ἐστίν, 
a formula of inquiry, used by those desiring — either to 
know what sort of a man one is whom they see, or what 
his name is, Jn.i.19; viii. 25; xxi. 12; Acts xxvi. 15;— 
or that they may see the face of some one spoken of, and 
that he may be pointed out to them, Lk. xix. 3; Jn. ix. 
36; od τίς ef ὁ with a ptep., who (i. 6. how petty) art thou, 
that ete.? the question of one administering a rebuke and 
contemptuously denying another’s right to do a thing, 
Ro. ix. 20; xiv. 4, (Strabo 6, 2, 4 Ρ- 271 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ 
τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθόγραφον;); ἐγὼ τίς εἶμι; who 
(how small) am 7? the language of one holding a modest 
opinion of himself and recognizing his weakness, Acts 
xi. 17, cf. Ex.iii. 11. b. εἰμὶ ris, like sum aliquis in Lat., 
to be somebody (eminent): Acts ν. 363; εἶναί τι, like the 
Lat. aliquid esse, to be something (i. e. something excel- 
lent): Gal. ii. 6; vi. 3; in these phrases ris and τὶ are 
emphatic; ef. Kiihner § 470, 3; [W.170(161); Β. 114 
(100)]; εἶναί τι after a negative, to be nothing, 1 Co. iii. 
7, ef. Mey. ad loc. ; also in questions having a negative 
force, 1 Co. x. 19 [ef. W. § 6, 2]. οὐδέν εἰμι, 1 Co. xiii. 
2; 2 Co. xil. 11; οὐδέν ἐστιν, it is nothing, is of no ac- 
count, Mt. xxiii. 16,18; Jn. viii. 54; Acts xxi. 24; 1 Co. 
vil. 19. σ. τίς ἐστι, 6. σ. ἡ παραβολή, what does it mean ? 
what is the explanation of the thing? Lk. viii. 9 τίς εἴη ἡ 
παραβολὴ αὕτη; Acts x. 17 τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα; Mk. i. 27 
τί ἐστι τοῦτο; what is this ? expressive of astonishment, 
LK. xv. 26 τί εἴη ταῦτα; what might be the cause of the 
noise he heard? Lk. xviii. 36; Jn. x. 6 τίνα ἦν, ἃ ἐλάλει 
αὐτοῖς. τί ἐστι what does it mean? Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; 
Lk. xx. 17; Jn. xvi. 17 sq. ; τί ἐστιν εἰ μὴ ὅτι, Eph. iv. 9; 
see II. 3 above. ἃ. οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτό ἐστιν foll. by a 
noun, equiv. to in this is seen, is contained, ete. a. is so 
employed that the pronoun refers to something which 
has just been said: οὗτος yap ἐστι ὁ νόμος, the law is 
summed up in what I have just mentioned, comes to this, 
Mt. vii. 12. β. in John’s usage it is so employed that 
the pronoun serves as the subject, which is defined by a 
noun that follows, and this noun itself is a substitute as 
it were for the predicate: αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ νίκη .. . ἡ πίστις 
ἡμῶν, 1 In. v. 4; αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία τοῦ θεοῦ, ἣν etc. 
1Jn.v.9 Ree. οὗτος, αὕτη. τοῦτό ἐστι foll. by ὅτι [Β. 105 
(92) ; ef. W. 161 (152)]: In. iii. 19; 1 ὅπ.1. δ; v. 11, 14; 
foll. by ἵνα (to say that something ought to be done, or 
that something is desired or demanded [ef. W. 338 
(317); B. 240 (207)]): In. vi. 29, 39 sq.; xv. 12; 1 Jn. 
iii. 11, 23; v. 3; foll. by dre ete. Jn. i. 19 [W. 438 (408) ]. 
7. The participle ὦν, οὖσα. dv, ὄντες. ὄντα. joined to a sub- 
stantive or an adjective, has the force of an intercalated 
clause, and may be translated since or although I am, thou 
art, ete., [here the Eng. use of the ptep. agrees in the main 
with the Grk.]: εἰ οὖν ὑμεῖς, πονηροὶ ὄντες, οἴδατε, Mt. vii. 
11; add, xii. 34; Lk. xx. 36; Jn. iii. 4: iv. 9: Acts xvi. 21; 
Ro. v. 10; 1 Co. viii. 7; Gal. ii. 3; Jas. iii. 4, and often; 
twice with other participles, used adjectively [B. 310 


(266)]: ὄντες ἀπηλλοτριωμένοι, Col. i. 21; ἐσκοτισμένοι 


ar 
εἰμι 


[R G, al. -τωμενοι], Eph. iv. 18. 8. Sometimes the 
copula ἔστιν (with the accent [see Chandler ὃ 938 ]) stands 
at the beginning of a sentence, to emphasize the truth of 
what the sentence affirms or denies: Lk. viii. 11; 1 Tim. 
vi. 6; ἔστι δὲ πίστις etc. Heb. xi. 1 (although some explain 
it here [as a subst. verb], ‘ but faith exists’ or ‘is found,’ 
to wit in the examples adduced immediately after [see 
W.§ 7, 3]); several times so used in Philo in statements 
(quoted by Delitzsch on Heb. xi. 1) resembling defini- 
tions. οὐκ ἔστιν : Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. xii. 27; Acts x. 34; 
1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas. iii. 15. 

III. εἰμί joined with Adverbs; 1. with adverbs 
of place; a. where? to be, be busy, somewhere: ἐκεῖ, 
Mt. ii. 15; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 1 [L om. Tr br. ἦν], ete. ; 
ἐνθάδε, Acts xvi. 28; ἔσω, Jn. xx. 263; οὗ, Mt. ii. 9; xviii. 
20; Actsxvi. 13; ὅπου, Mk. ii.4; v.40; Jn. vi. 62; Acts 
xvii. 1, ete.; ποῦ, Mt. ii. 2; Jn. vii. 11, ete.; ὧδε, Mt. 
xxvill. 6; Mk. ix. 5, ete. b. with adverbs of dis- 
tance: ἀπέναντί τινος, Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 2); 
ἐκτός τινος, 2 Co. xii. 2, [8 χωρίς τ. LT Tr WH]; ἐμπρο- 
σθέν twos, Lk. xiv. 2; ἐντός twos, Lk. xvii. 21 ; ἐνώπιόν 
twos, Rey. 1. 4 ; vii. 15; μακρὰν ἀπό τινος, Jn. xxi. 8; Mk. 
xii. 34; πόρρω, Lk. xiv. 32; ἐπάνω, Jn. 111. 81", [31 GT 
WU mrg. om. the cl.]; of the situation of regions and 
places: ἀντιπέρα [or -τίπερα etc. see 8. v.] τινός, Lk. viii. 
26; ἐγγύς, -- που standing absol. Jn. xix. 42; now with 
gen., Jn. xi. 18; xix. 20, etce.; now with dat., Acts ix. 38; 
xxvii. 8. c. whence? to be from some quarter, i. 6. to 
come, originate, from: πόθεν, Mt. xxi. 25; Lk. xiii. 25, 
27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29; xix. 9; ii. 9 (πόθεν ἐστίν se. ὁ 
οἶνος, whence the wine was procured) ; ἐντεῦθεν, Jn. xviii. 
36. 2. with adverbs of quality; οὕτως εἰμί, to be 
thus or so, to be such; absol. Mt. xiii. 49; with ἐν ὑμῖν 
added, Mt. xx. 26 [here RG T ἔσται] ; οὕτως ἔσται. so will 
it bei.e. come to pass, Mt. xiii. 40, (49 [see above]) ; 
οὕτως ἐστίν or ἔσται, of things, events, etc., such is or will 
be the state of the case [W. 465 (434) ]: Mt. xix. 10; xxiv. 
27, 37,39; Mk. iv. 26; Ro. iv. 18 (Gen. xv. 5); so of 
persons, Jn. iii. 8. καθώς ἐστιν as, even as, he ete. is, 1 
Jn. iii. 2, 7; iv. 17; εἰμὶ ὥσπερ τις to be, to do as one, 
to imitate him, be like him, Mt. vi. 5 [RG]; Lk. xviii. 
11{RGTWH txt.]; ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ ete. regard him 
as a heathen and a publican, i. e. have no fellowship with 
him, Mt. xviii. 17; εἰμὶ ὡς or ὡσεί τις, to be as i. 6. like 
or equal to any one, Mt. [vi. 5 LT Tr WH]; xxii. 30; 
xxvili. 3; Lk. xi. 44; [xviii. 11 L Tr WH mrg.]; xxii. 
27; 1 Co. vii. 29 54. ; τὰ σπλάγχνα περισσοτέρως els ὑμᾶς 
ἐστιν he is moved with the more abundant love toward 
you, 2 Co. vii. 15. — But see each adverb in its place. 

IV. εἰμί with the oblique cases of substantives or of 
pronouns ; 1. εἶναί ri vos, like the Lat. alicuwus esse, 
i. 4: fo pertain to a person or a thing, denotes any kind of 
possession or connection (Possessive Genitive); οἵ. Kri- 
ger 847, 6,4sqq.; W.§ 30,5b.; B.§132,11. a. of things 
which one owns: ἔσται σοῦ πᾶσα [ Ree. πάντα], Lk. iv. 7; 
ov ἐστὶν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, Acts xxi. 11; add, Mk. xii. 7; Jn. 
x. 12; xix. 24;—or for the possession of which he is 
fitted : τινός ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τ. οὐρ. or τοῦ θεοῦ, he is fit 


178 


εἰμι 


for a share in the kingdom of God, Mt. v. 8,10; xix. 14; 
Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. πάντα ὑμῶν ἐστι, all things 
serve your interests and promote your salvation, 1 Co. 
iii. 21. b. of things which proceed from one: 2 Co. iv. 
7. 6. to be of one’s party, be devoted to one: 1 Co. i. 12; 
2 Tim. ii. 19; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Mk. ix. 41; Ro. viii. 9; 1 Co. 
1. 12; 2Co. x. 7; hence also τῆς ὁδοῦ (se. τοῦ κυρίου) εἶμαι, 
Acts ix. 2 [ef. B. 163 (142)]. ἅ. to be subject to one ; to 
be in his hands or power: Mt. xxii. 28; Acts xxvii. 23; 
Ro. ix. 16; xiv. 8; 1 Co. iii. 23; vi. 19, 20 Ree.; πνεύμα- 
τος, Lk.ix.55 Ree. Hence e. tobe suitable, fit, for one: 
Actsi. 7. Ὁ tobe ofakind or class: εἶναι νυκτός, σκότους, 
ἡμέρας, 1 Th. v. 5, ὃ ; or to be of the number of [a partit. 
gen., cf. B. 159 (139) ]: Acts xxiii. 6; 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim. 
i. 15. g. with a gen. of quality: Heb. x. 39; xii. 11. 
h. witha gen. of age: Mk. v. 42; Lk. iii. 23; Acts iy. 22, 
(Tob. xiv. 11). With this use (viz. 1) of εἶναι, those ex- 
amples must not be confounded in which a predicate 
nominative is to be repeated from the subject (ef. Kriiger 
$47, 6,1): οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων, sc. θεός, 
Mt. xxii. 32, ef. Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38; ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα 
οὐκ ἔστι δαιμονιζομένου, sc. ῥήματα, Jn. x. 21; οὐκ ἔστιν 
ἀκαταστασίας ὁ θεός, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης, 1 Co. xiv. 33; ἄλλο 
βιβλίον, 6 ἐστι τῆς ζωῆς, Rev. xx. 12; add, 2 Co. ii. 3; 
1 Pet. iii. 3. 2. εἰμί with the dative (cf. Kriiger 
§ 48, 3 [who appears to regard the dat. as expressing a 
less close or necessary relationship than the gen.]; W. 
§ 31,2); a. ἔστι μοι, ἡμῖν, ete. it is mine, ours, ete., I, we, 
ete., have: Lk. i. 7; ii. 7,10; xiv. 10; Jn. xviii. 10, 39; 
xix. 40; Acts vii. 5; vill. 21; x. 6; Ro. ix. 2,9; 1Co. 
ix. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 11, and often. οὐκ ἔστι ἡμῖν [al. ὑμ.] ἡ 
πάλη πρός etc. we have not a struggle against ete. Eph. 
vi. 12; εἰσὶν ἡμῖν we have here ete. Acts xxi. 28; τί 
ἔσται ἡμῖν what shall we have? what will be given us? 
Mt. xix. 27; ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία the promise belongs 
to you, Acts ii. 89. b. εἶναί τινί τι lo be something to (or 
for) some one, used of various relations, as of service, 
protection, etc.: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς ἐστί μοι οὗτος, SC. τοῦ 
with inf. Acts ix. 15; ἔσεσθέ μοι μάρτυρες, Acts [i. 8 
RG, cf.] xxii. 15; ἔσομαι αὐτῷ θεὸς x. αὐτὸς ἔσται por 
vids, Rev. xxi. 7; ἔσονταί μοι λαός, 2 Co. vi. 16 [RG]; 
εἰς TO εἶναι αὐτὸν... πατέρα... τοῖς etc. Ro. iv. 11. ὁ. 
εἶναί τινί τι, to be to one as or for something, to pass for 
ete.: 1Co.i. 183 ii. 14; ix. 2, ef. Mt. xviii. 17. ἃ. εἶναί 
τινί τι, to be i. 6. conduce, redound to one for (or as) 
something (cf. Kriiger § 48, 8, 5): 1 Co. xi. 14 sq.; 2 
Co. ii. 15; Phil. i. 28; οὐαὶ δέ μοί ἐστι, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hos. 
ix. 12). 6. ἔσται τινί, will come upon, befall, happen to, 
one: Mt. xvi. 22; Lk.i. 45. f. Acts xxiv. 11 οὐ πλείους 
εἰσί μοι ἡμέραι ἣ δεκαδύο [L T Tr WH om. ἢ and read 
δώδεκα] not more than twelve days are (sc. passed) to 
me i.e. it is not more than twelve days. Lk. i. 36 οὗτος 
μὴν ἔκτος ἐστὶν αὐτῇ this is the sixth month to (with) her. 
Those passages must not be brought under this head in 
which the dative does not belong to the verb but de- 
pends on an adjective, as καλός, κοινωνός, φίλος, ete. 

V. εἰμί with Prepositions and their cases. 1. 
ἀπὸ τινος (τόπου), to come from, be a native of: Jn.1.44 


εἰμί 


(45) [οἵ. ἀπό, Π1|.1 4.1. 2. εἴς τι, a. tohave betaken 
one’s self to some place and to be there, to have gone into 
(cf. W. § 50, 4 b.; [B. 333 (286)]): εἰς οἶκον, Mk. ii. 1 
[RG; al. ἐν]; εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν, Mk. xiii. 16 [RG]; εἰς τ. 
κοίτην, Lk. xi. 7; cis τὸν κόλπον, Jn. i. 18, where cf. 
Tholuck, [W. 415 (387); B. u.s.]; (on Acts viii. 20 see 
ἀπώλεια, 2a.). metaph. fo come to: eis χολὴν πικρίας 
(hast fallen into), Acts viii.23. b. to be directed towards 
a thing: ὥστε τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν ... εἶναι εἰς θεόν, 1 Pet. 
i. 21; to tend to anything: Ro. xi. 36 [W. § 50,6]. ο. 
to be for i. e. conduce or inure to, serve for, [B. 150 (131) 
sq-; W. § 29, 3a.]:1 Co. xiv. 22; Col. ii. 22; Jas. v.35 ἐμοὶ 
εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστι, it results for me in, i. 6. I account it, 
a very small thing, 1 Co. iv. 3, (eis ὠφέλειαν, Aesop. fab. 
124, 2). ἃ. In imitation of the Hebr. 777 foll. by 7, 
εἶναι εἴς Twa ΟΥ τι Stands where the Greeks use a nomi- 
native [W. and B. u. s.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. εἰς, 3]: 
Mt. xix. 5 and Mk. x. 8 and 1 Co. vi. 16 and Eph. v. 31 
ἔσονται εἰς σάρκα μίαν (fr. Gen. ii. 24); 1 Jn. v. 8 εἰς τὸ ἔν 
εἰσιν, unite, conspire, towards one and the same result, 
agreein one; 2Co. vi. 18 (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 1); Heb. 
i. 5 (2 5. vii. 14) ; viii. 10. 3. ἔκ τινος, a. tobeof 
i. 6. a part of any thing, to belong to, etc. [W. 368 (345) ; 
ef. B. 159 (139)]: 1 Co. xii. 15 sq.3 ἔκ τίνων, of the num- 
ber of: Mt. xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 69 sq.; Lk. xxii. 58; Jn. 
i. 24; vi. 64,71 [RT]; vii. 50; x. 26; xviii. 17, 25; Acts 
xxi. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 6; 1 Jn. ii. 19; Rev. xvii. 11, (Xen. 
mem. 3, 6,17); ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τινων, Lk. xxii. 3. ὍὌ. to 
be of i. e. to have originated, sprung, come, from [W. § 51, 
1 ἃ.; B. 327 (281 sq.) ]: Lk. xxiii. 7; Jn. i. 46 (47); iii. 31 
(ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς); iv. 22; vii. 52; vill. 23; xviii. 36; Acts 
iv. 6; xix. 25; xxiii. 34; Gal. iii. 21; 1Jn.iv. 7; ὅς ἐστιν 
ἐξ ὑμῶν, your fellow-countryman, Col.iv. 9. ὁ. to be of 
i.e. proceed from one as the author [W. 366 (344) sq.; 
B. 327 (281)]: Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17; Acts v. 38 sq.; 
2 Co. iv. 7; 1 Jn. ii. 16; Heb. ii. 11; εἶναι ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ 
ἀνθρώπων, to be instituted by the authority of God, by 
the authority of men, Mt. xxi. 25; Mk. xi. 30; Lk. xx. 4; 
to be begotten of one, Mt.i. 20. ἃ. to be of i.e. be con- 
nected with one; to be related to, [ef. Win. § 51,1 d.; ef. 
in ἐκ, II. 1 a. and 7]: 6 νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως, has no 
connection with faith, Gal. iii. 12; ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι 
(Luth. mit Werken umgehen), Gal. iii. 10; esp. in John’s 
usage, to depend on the power of one, to be prompted and 
governed by one, and reflect his character: thus εἶναι ἐκ 
τοῦ διαβόλου, Jn. viii. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 8; ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ, 1 
Jn. 111. 12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16; 1 Jn. 
iv. 5; when this expression is used of wickedness, it is 
equiv. to produced by the world and pertaining to it, 1 
Jn. ii. 16; opp. to ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ εἶναι, Jn. viii. 47; 1 Jn. iv. 
1-3; this latter phrase is used esp. of true Christians, as 
begotten anew by the Spirit of God (see γεννάω, 2 d.) : 
1 Jn. iv. 4,6; v. 19; 3 Jn. 11 ; ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι, either 
to come from the love of truth as an effect, as 1 Jn. ii. 
21, or, if used of a man, to be led and governed by 
the love and pursuit of truth, as Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. iii. 
19; ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστί, he who is from the 
earth as respects origin bears the nature of this his earth- 


119 


εἰμὶ 


ly origin, is earthly, Jn. iii. 81. 6. to be of i. e. formed 
from: Rev. xxi. 21; 1Co. xi. 8. 4 Ev revs, a. with 
dat. of place, to be in i. 6. be present, to stay, dwell; a. 
prop.: Mt. xxiv. 26; Lk. ii. 49, etc.; on the surface of a 
place (Germ. auf), as ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, Mk. x. 32 and elsewhere; 
ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ, Lk. xv. 25. at: ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. viii. 
34 ; to live, dwell, as in a city: Lk. xviii. 3; Acts ix. 10; 
Phil. i. 1; 1 Co. i. 2, ete.; of God, ἐν οὐρανοῖς, Eph. vi. 9; 
of things which are found, met with, in a place: 2 Tim. 
ii. 20, ete. β. things so pertaining to locality that one 
can, in a proper sense, be in them or be surrounded by 
them, are spoken of in the same way metaph. and 
improp., as εἶναι ἐν τῷ φωτί, ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ: 1 Jn. ii. 9, 
11; 1 ΤῊ. ν. 4; ἐν σαρκί, Ro. vii. 5; viii. 8, (see σάρξ, 4). 
b. to be ina state or condition [see B. 330 (284); ef. 
W. § 29, 3b. and ἐν, I. 5 6.7: ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Lk. xi. 21; ἐν 
ἐχθρᾷ, Xxiii. 12; ἐν κρίματι, ibid. 40; ἐν περιτομῇ, ἐν axpo- 
βυστίᾳ, Ro. iv. 10; ἐν δόξῃ, 2 Co. iii. 8, οἷς. ; hence 
spoken of ills which one is afflicted with: ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος, 
Mk. v. 25; Lk. viii. 43, (ἐν τῇ νόσῳ, Soph. Aj. 271; in 
morbo esse, Cie. Tuse. 3, 4, 9); of wickedness in which 
one is, as it were, merged, ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις, 1 Co. xv. 17; 
of holiness, in which one perseveres, ἐν πίστει, 2 Co. xiii. 
5. ¢. tobe in possession of, provided with a thing [W.386 
(361)]: Phil. iv. 11; ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ, Lk. iv. 32; ἐν βάρει (see 
Bapos,fin.),1 Th. ii. 7 (6). . to be occupied in a thing 
(Bnhdy. p. 210; [see ev, I.5 g.]): ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, in cele- 
brating the feast, Jn. ii. 23; to be sedulously devoted to 
ΓΑ. V. give one’s self wholly to] a thing, 1 Tim. iv. 15, 
(Hor. epp. 1, 1, 11 omnis in hoe 8111). e. a person or 
thing is said to bein one, i. e. in his soul: thus, God (by 
his power and influence) in the prophets, 1 Co. xiv. 25; 
Christ (i. e. his holy mind and power) in the souls of his 
disciples or of Christians, Jn. xvii. 26; 2 Co. xiii. 5; τὸ 
πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας, Jn. xiv. 17; friends are said to be 
ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ of one who loves them, 2 Co. vii. 3. vices, 
virtues, and the like, are said to be inone: as δόλος, Jn. 
1.47 (48); ἀδικία, Jn. vii. 18; ἄγνοια, Eph. iv. 18 ; ἁμαρτία, 
1 Jn. iii. 5; ἀλήθεια, Jn. viii. 44; 2 Co. xi. 10; Eph. iv. 
21; 1Jn.i. 8; ii 4, (ἀλήθεια καὶ κρίσις, 1 Mace. vii. 18); 
ἀγάπη, Jn. xvii. 26; 1 Jn. ii. 153 ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ (τ. θεοῦ) 
οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν, God’s word has not left its impress on 
our souls, 1 Jn. i. 10; τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ, the efli- 
cacy or influence of the light is not in his soul, [rather, 
an obvious physical fact is used to suggest a spiritual 
truth: the light is not in him, does not shine from within 
outwards], Jn. xi. 10; oxoria, 1Jn.i.5; σκάνδαλον, 1 Jn. 
ii. 10 i. e. there is nothing within him to seduce him to 
sin (cf. Diisterdieck and Huther ad loc.). Acts xiii. 15 
(if ye have in mind any word of exhortation ete. [W. 
218 (204 sq.)]). f. ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι is said a. of 
Christians, as being rooted, so to speak, in him, i.e. inti- 
mately united to him, 1 Jn. ii.5; v.20; 8. of all men, 
because the ground of their creation and continued being 
is to be found in him alone, Acts xvii. 28. g. witha 
dat. of the pers. to be in, —[i. 6. either] among the num- 
ber of: Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40; Lk. ii. 44; Ro. i. 6; 
—[or, in the midst of: Acts ii. 29; vii. 44 Rec., ete.] 


εἰμί 


h. noteworthy, further, are the following: ἔστι τι ἕν τινι 
there is something (to blame) in one, Acts xxv. 5; some- 
thing is (founded [A. V. stand]) in a thing, 1 Co. ii. 5; 
οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν οὐδενὶ ἄλλῳ ἡ σωτηρία salvation is (laid up, 
embodied) in none other, can be expected from none, 
Acts iv. 12; with dat. of the thing, is (contained, wrapped 
up) in something: Eph. v. 18; Heb. x. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 18. 
5. εἰμὶ ἐπί a. τινός, to be on: ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, Lk. 
Xvii. 31; ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Jn. xx. 7; to be (set) over a 
thing, Acts viii. 27; to preside, rule, over, Ro. ix. 5. Ὁ. 
revi, to be at [W. 392 (367)]: ἐπὶ θύραις, Mt. xxiv. 33; 
Mk. xiii. 29. ο. τινά, tobe uponone: χάρις ἦν ἐπί τινα, 
was with him, assisted him, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33; πνεῦμα 
ἦν ἐπί twa, had come upon one, was impelling him, Lk. ii. 
25, ef. Lk. iv. 18; Sept. Is. lxi. 1; add, Gal. vi. 16; εἶναι 
ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, to be (assembled) together [cf. αὐτός, 111. 1], 
Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44; of cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5 (ace. 
to the reading ἦτε for Rec. συνέρχεσθε). 6. εἰμί 
a. τινός, to be against one, to oppose him: Mt. 
xii. 30; Lk. ix. 50; xi. 23; Gal. v. 23; Ro. viii. 31 (opp. 
to ὑπέρ τινος, as in Mk. ix. 40). 


κατά 


b. κατά τι, according 
to something : κατὰ σάρκα, κατὰ πνεῦμα, to bear the char- 
acter, have the nature, of the flesh or of the Spirit, Ro. 
viii. 5; εἶναι κατ᾽ ἄνθρωπον, Gal. i. 11; κατ᾽ ἀλήθειαν, Ro. ii. 
bs 7. μετά τινος, a. to be with (i. e. to associate 
with) one: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. iii. 14; v.18; Lk. vi. 3; Jn. 
iii. 26 ; xii. 17; xvi. 32; Acts ix. 39, and often in the Gos- 
pels; Rey. xxi. 3; of ships accompanying one, Mk. iv. 36; 
of what is present with one for his profit, 2 Jn. 2; Ro. xvi. 
20; Hebraistically, to be with one i.e. as a help, (of God, 
becoming the companion, as it were, of the righteous) : 
Lk. i. 66; Jn. iii. 2; viii. 29; xvi. 32; Acts vii. 9; x. 38; xi. 
215; xviii. 10; 2Co. xiii. 11; Phil. iv. 9; 2 Jn. 3, cf. Mt. 
xxviii. 20, (Gen. xxi. 20; Judg. vi. 12, ete.). b. to be 
(i. 6. to codperate) with: Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (Xen. 
an. 1, 3, 5 [Δ]. ἰέναι). 8. εἰμὲ παρά a. τινός, to 
(have come and so) be from one: Christ is said εἶναι 
mapa τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. vi. 46; vii. 29; ix. 16, 33; τὶ mapa 
twos, is from i. 6. given by one. Jn. xvii. 7. b. revi, to 
be with one: Mt. xxii. 255 οὐκ εἶναι mapa τῷ θεῷ is used 
to describe qualities alien to God, as προσωπολημψία, 
Ro. ii. 11; Eph. vi. 9; ἀδικία, Ro. ix. 14. ο. revd (τόπον), 
by, by the side of: Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. 9. πρός 
τινα (cf. W. 405 (378)], a. towards: πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστί 
it is towards evening, Lk. xxiv. 29. Ὁ. by (turned tow- 
ards): Mk. iv. 1. ὁ. with one: Mt. xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3; 
ix.19; Lk. ix. 41; Jn. i. 1 [ef. Mey. ad loc.]. 10. σύν 
τινι, a. to associate with one: Lk. xxii. 56; xxiv. 44; 
Acts xiii. 7; Phil. i. 23; Col. 11. δ᾽; 1 ΤΉ. ἵν. 17. b. to be 
the companion of one, to accompany him: Lk. vii. 12 [Re* 
T Tr br. WH]; viii. 38; Actsiv. 13; xxii. 9; 2 Pet. i. 
18. c. to be an adherent of one, be on his side: Acts v. 
17; xiv.4[A. V. fo hold with], (Xen. Cyr. 5,4,87). 11. 
εἰμὶ ὑπέρ a. τινός, to be for one, tu favor his side: 
ΜΚ. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50; Ro. viii. 31, (opp. to εἰμὶ κατά 
twos). b. τινά, to be above one, to surpass, excel him: 
Lk. vi. 40. 12. ὑπό τινα [ef. B. 341 (293)], a. to 
be under (i. e. subject to) one: Mt. viii. 9 RG T Tr; Ro. 


180 


, 
εὐπον 


iii. 9; vi. 14 8η.; Gal. iii. 10, 25; v.18; 1 Tim. vi. 1. b. 
to be (locally) under a thing: e. g. under a tree, Jn. i. 48 
(49); acloud, 1 Co.x.1. Further, see each preposition 
in its own place. 

VI. As in classical Greek, so also in the N. T. εἰμί is 
very often omitted (ef. Winer § 64, I. 2, who gives nu- 
merous exx. [ef. 596 (555) ; 350 (328 sq.) |; B. 136 (119) 
sq-), ἐστίν most frequently of all the parts: Lk. iv. 18; 
Ro. xi. 36; 1 Co. iv. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 16; Heb. v. 13, ete. ; 
in exclamations, Acts xix. 28, 34; in questions, Ro. ix. 
14; 2 Co. vi. 14-16; τί yap, Phil. 1.18; Ro. iii. 3; τί οὖν, 
Ro. iii. 9; vi. 15; also εἶ, Rev. xv. 4; εἰμί, 2 Co. xi. 6; 
ἐσμέν, ἐστέ, 1 Co. iv. 10; εἰσί, Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. xiii. 8, ete. ; 
the impv. ἔστω, Ro. xii. 9; Heb. xiii. 4 sq.; ἔστε, Ro. xii. 
9; 1 Pet. 111. 8; εἴη in wishes, Mt. xvi. 22; Gal. vi. 16, 
ete.; even the subjunc. 7 after ἵνα, Ro. iv. 16; 2Co. viii. 
11 [after ὅπως, 13; often the ptep. ὦν, ὄντες, as (see B. 
§ 144, 18) in Mk. vi. 20; Acts xxvii. 33; in the expres- 
sions οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς. ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, οἱ ὑπὸ νόμον, etc. 
[ομν. : ἄπ-, ἕν-, (ἔξ-εστι,) map-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι.} 

εἶμι, fo go, approved of by some in Jn. vii. 84, 36, for 
the ordinary εἰμί, but cf. W. § 6,2; [B. 50 (43). Comp. : 
ἄπ-, εἴσ-, €&-, ἐπ-, σύν-ειμι.] * 

εἵνεκεν, See ἕνεκα, ἕνεκεν. 

εἴσπερ, see εἰ, IIT. 18. 

εἶπον, 2 aor. act. fr. ἢ obsol. pres. EQ [late Epic and 
in composition ; see Veitch] (cf. ἔπος [Curtius § 6207), 
Ton. EIN (like ἐρωτάω, eipwr.; ἑλίσσω, εἷλίσσ.) ; sub- 
june. εἴπω, impv. εἶπέ, inf. εἰπεῖν, ptcp. εἰπών; 1 aor. 
εἶπα (Jn. x. 34 RGT Tr WH, fr. Ps. Ixxxi. (1xxxii.) 
6; Acts xxvi. 15 L T Tr WH; Heb iii. 10 Lchm. fr. 
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10; add [Mk. ix. 18 T WH Tr txt.]; 
Job xxix. 18; xxxii. 8, etce.; Sir. xxiv. 31 (29); 1 
Mace. vi. 11, ete.; ef. Kiihner i. 817, [esp. Veitch s. v. 
pp- 232, 233]), 2 pers. εἶπας (Mt. xxvi. 25, [64]; Mk. xii. 
32 [not T WH; Jn. iv. 17 where T WH again -res ; Lk. 
xx. 39]), 3 pers. plur. εἶπαν (often in L T Tr WH {i. ὁ. 
out of the 127 instances in which the choice lies between 
3 pers. plur. ~rov of the Ree. and ray, the latter ending 
has been adopted by L in 56, by T in 82, by Tr in 74, by 
WH in 104, cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123], e.g. Mt. xii. 2; xxvii. 
6; Jn. xviii. 30, etc.) ; impv. εἰπόν (ΜΚ. xiii. 41, T Tr 
WH; Lk. x. 40 TWH Trmrg.; Acts xxviii. 26 G LT 
Tr WH, [also Mt. iv. 3 WH; xviii. 17 TWH; xxii. 17 
T WHTr mrg.; xxiv. 3 WH; Lk. xx. 2T Tr WH; xxii. 
(66)67 T Tr WH; Jn. x. 24 T WH], for the Attic εἶπον, 
ef. W.§6, 1 Κι; [Chandler § 775]; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 
515 sqq.; [but Win. (p.85 (81)) regards εἰπόν as impy. 
of the 2nd aor.; ef., too, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 348; B. 57 
(50); esp. Fritz. 1. 6.7), in the remaining persons εἰπάτω 
(Rev. xxii. 17), εἴπατε (Mt. [x. 27; xxi. 5]; xxii. 4; xxvi. 
18, ete.; Mk. [xi. 3]; xiv. 14; xvi. 7; (LK. x. 10; xiii. 
32; xx. 3; Col. iv. 177), εἰπάτωσαν (Acts xxiv. 20) also 
freq. in Attic, [Veitch s. v.; WH. App. p. 164; Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 219]; ptep., after the form chiefly Ion., 
εἴπας ([Jn. xi. 28 Tr WH]; Acts vii. 37 L T Tr WH 
[also xxii. 24; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 35]); the fut. ἐρῶ is from the 
Epic pres. εἴρω [cf. Lob. Technol. p. 137]; on the other 


“ 
εἶπον 


hand, from PEO come pf. εἴρηκα, 3 pers. plur. εἰρήκασιν 
(Acts xvii. 28), εἴρηκαν (Rev. xix. 3; see γίνομαι), inf. 
εἰρηκέναι, Heb. x. 15 L'T Tr WH; Pass., pf. 3 pers. 
sing. εἴρηται, ptep. εἰρημένον ; plpf. εἰρήκειν ; 1 aor. ἐρρέθην 
(Rev. vi. 11; ix.4 and R G T WH in Mt. v. 21 sqq.; 
LT Tr WH in Ro. ix. 12, 26; Gal. iii. 16), [“ strict ” 
(cf. Veitch p. 575) ] Attic ἐρρήθην (Mt. v. 21 sqq.L Tr; 
RG in Ro. ix. 12, 26; Gal. iii. 16; [ef. B. 57 (50); WH. 
App. Ρ. 1007), ptep. ῥηθείς, ῥηθέν ; Sept.for 18 ; Cospeak, 
say, whether orally or by letter ; 

1. with an accus. of the obj.: 8. with acc. of the 
thing: εἰπεῖν λόγον, Mt. viii. 8 Rec. ; Jn. ii. 22 [L T Tr 
WH]; vii. 36; xviii. 9, 32; ῥῆμα, Mk. xiv. 72 [Knapp 
et al.]; εἰπεῖν λόγον εἴς τινα, i. 4. βλασφημεῖν, Lk. xii. 10; 
also κατά twos, Mt. xii. 32; ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, so lo say (a 
phrase freq. in class. Grk., ef. Weiske, De pleonasmis gr. p. 
47; Matthiae § 545; Delitzsch on Heb. as below; [Kiih- 
ner § 585, 3; Kriiger ὃ 55, 1,2; Goodwin $100; W. 449 
(419); 317 (298)]), Heb. vii. 9, (opp. to ἀκριβεῖ λόγῳ, 
Plat. rep. 1, 341 b.); τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Mk. ν. 33; ἀλήθειαν 
ἐρῶ, 2 Co. xii. 6 ; τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἴρηκας, Jn. ἵν. 18 [W. 464 
(433) π.1; τί εἴπω ; what shall I say? (the expression of 
one who is in doubt what to say), Jn. xii. 27; πῶς ἐρεῖ τὸ 
ἀμὴν ...; 1 Co. xiv. 16; τί ἐροῦμεν ; or τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν; 
what shall we say? i. 6. what reply can we make? or, to 
what does that bring us? only in the Ep. to the Ro. 
[W. § 40, 6] viz. 111. 5; vi. 1; vii. 7; ix. 14, 30; with πρὸς 
ταῦτα added, viii. 31; εἰπεῖν τι περί τινος, Jn. Vii. 39; x. 
41. Sayings from the O. T. which are quoted in the 
New are usually introduced as follows: τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ 
[LT Tr WH om. τοῦ] κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου, Mt. i. 22 ; 
ii. 15; ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. xxii. 31; ὑπὸ τοῦ προφήτου Ree. 
Mt. xxvii. 35, ef. ii. 17; τὸ ῥηθὲν διά twos, Mt. ii. 17 LT 
pra 5. νον 1; χα 17..χῖρ So); Xx. 4: 
ΧΧΥΙΪ. 9; τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφ. Acts ii. 16; τὸ εἰρημέ- 
νον, Lk. ii. 24; Acts xiii. 40; Ro. iv. 18; ἐρρέθη, Mt. v. 
21, etc. ; καθὼς εἴρηκεν, Heb.iv. 3. b. with ace. of the 
pers. to speak of, designate by words: ὃν εἶπον, Jn. i. 15 
{(not WH txt.) ; B. 377 (323); ef. Ro. iv. 1 WH txt. (say 
971; ὁ ῥηθείς, Mt. iii. 8. εἰπεῖν τινα καλῶς, to speak well 
of one, praise him, Lk. vi. 26, (εὖ εἰπεῖν τινα, Hom. Od. 1, 
302); κακῶς, to speakill of one, Acts xxiii. 5 fr. Ex. xxii. 
28; cf. Kihner § 409, 2; 411, 5; [W. § 32,1b.8.; B. 
146 (128)]. ο. with an ellipsis of the acc. αὐτό (see 
αὐτός, 11. 3): Lk. xxii. 67; Jn. ix. 27; xvi. 4, ete. σὺ 
εἶπας (SC. αὐτό), i. 6. you have just expressed it in words; 
that’s it; it is just as you say: Mt. xxvi. 25, 64, [a rabbin- 
ical formula; for exx. cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein on vs. 
25; al. seem to regard the answer as non-committal, 
e.g. Origen on ys. 64 (opp. iii. 910 De la Rue); Wiinsche, 
Erliut. der Evang. aus Talmud usw. on vs. 25; but cf. 
the ἐγώ εἶμι of Mk. xiv. 62; in Mt. xxvi. 64 WH mrg. 
take it interrogatively ]. 2. the person, to whom a 
thing is said, isindicated a. by a dat.: εἰπεῖν τί τινι, Lk. 
vii. 40, and very often; εἶπον ὑμῖν se. αὐτό, 1 (have just) 
told it you; this is what I mean; let this be the word: Mt. 
xxvili. 7; cf. Bnhdy. p. 381; [Jelf ὃ 403, 1; Goodwin 
§ 19,5; esp. (for exx.) Herm. Vig. p. 746]. 


. ἢ 
τινὶ περὶ 


181 


,» 
εἶπον 
τινος [cf. W. § 47,4], Mt. xvii. 13; Jn. xviii. 84. to say 
anything to one by way of censure, Mt. xxi. 3; to cast 


in one’s teeth, ἐρεῖτέ μοι τὴν παραβολήν, Lk. iv. 23. to 
tell what anything means, 6. g. τὸ μυστήριον, Rev. xvii. 7 
b. by the use of a prep.: πρός τινα [cf. B. 172 (150) ; 
Kriiger § 48, 7, 13], to say (a thing) to one, as Lk. iv. 
23; v. 4; xii. 16, and many other places in Luke; to 
say a thing in reference to one [W. 405 (378) ], Mk. 
xii. 12; Lk. xviii. 9; xx. 19. 3. εἶπον, to say, speak, 
simply and without an ace. of the obj., i. 6. merely to de 
clare in words, to use language; a. with the addition of 
an adverb or of some other adjunct : ὁμοίως, Mt. xxvi. 35; 
ὡσαύτως, Mt. xxi. 30; καθώς, Mt. xxviii.6; Lk. xxiv. 24; 
Jn. 1. 23; vii. 38; εἶπε διὰ παραβολῆς, making use of a 
parable [see διά, A. III. 3] he spake, Lk. viii. 4; ἐν παρα- 
βολαῖς, Mt. xxii. 1; with an instrumental dative: εἶπε 
λόγῳ, say in (using only) a (single) word, se. that my ser- 
vant shall be healed, Mt. viii. 8 (where Ree. λόγον) ; Lk. 
vii. 7. b. with the words spoken added in direct dis- 
course; so a hundred times in the historical books of the 
N.T., as Mt. ix. 4sq.; viii. 32; [xv. 4 L Tr WH], ete.; 
1 Co. xii. 15; [2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt. T Tr WH, (cf. 4 below) ]; 
Heb. i. 5; iii. 10; x. 7,[15 L T Tr WH], 30; xii. 21; Jas. 
ii. 3, 11; Jude 9; Rey. vii. 14; πέμψας εἶπεν he said by 
a messenger or messengers, Mt. xi. 2sq. The following 
and other phrases are freq. in the Synoptic Gospels: ὁ δὲ 
ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, as Mt. iv. 4; xv. 18; καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, 
Mt. χχῖν. 4; ἀποκριθεῖσα ἡ μήτηρ εἶπεν, Lk. i. 60; ἀποκριθεὶς 
ὁ Σίμων εἶπεν, Lk. vii. 43, εἴς. ; ἀποκριθέντες δὲ εἶπον [-παν 
T Tr WH], Lk. xx. 24; but John usually writes ἀπεκρίθη 
καὶ εἶπεν : Jn.i.48 (49); ii. 19; iii. 105 iv. 10, 13,17; vi. 
26, 29; vii. 16, 20[R G], 52; ix.11[R GL br.], 30, 861, 
Tr mrg. om. WH br. x. εἶπ.]; xiii. 7; xiv. 23; xviii. 30; 
- [εἶπαν αὐτῷ λέγοντες, Mk. viii. 28 TWH Tr mrg., cf. 
xii. 26]. c. foll. by ὅτι : Mt. xxviii. 7; Mk.xvi.7; Jn. 
vi. 36; vii. 42; viii. 55; xi. 40; xvi. 15; xviii. 8; 1 Jn.i.6, 
8,10; 1Co. i. 15; xiv. 23; xv. 27 [L br. WH mrg. om. 
ὅτι]. ἃ. foll. by ace. and inf. : τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν ᾿Αβραὰμ τὸν 
πατέρα ἡμῶν εὑρηκέναι [WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. εὑρηκ.; 
cf. 1 Ὁ. above] xara σάρκα; Ro. iv. 1. 4. εἰπεῖν some- 
times involves in it the idea of commanding [cf. B. 275 
sq. (237)]: foll. by the inf., εἶπε δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν, Mk. 
v. 48; εἰπὲ τῷ ἀδελφῷ μου μερίσασθαι per’ ἐμοῦ τὴν KAnpo- 
νομίαν, Lk. xii. 13; ὅσα ἂν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν (sc. τηρεῖν [in- 
serted in R G]), τηρεῖτε, Mt. xxiii. 3, (Sap. ix. 8). [0]]. 
by the ace. and inf., ὁ εἰπὼν ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψαι, 2 Co. 
iv. 6 [ΓΒ GL mrg., ef. B. 273 sq. (235); but Ltxt. T Tr 
WH read λάμψει, thus changing the construction fr. the 
ace. with infin. to direct discourse, see 3b. above]; 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ (for ἑαυτῷ, see αὑτοῦ) φωνηθῆναι τοὺς δούλους 
τούτους. he commanded to be called for him (i. 6. to him) 
these servants, Lk. xix. 15; οἵ. W. § 44, 3 b.; Kriiger 
§ 55, 3,13. [0]]. by ἵνα with the subjune.: Mt. iv. 3; xx. 
21; LK. iv. 3; to εἰπεῖν is added a dat. of the pers. bidden 
to do something, Mk. iii. 9; Lk. x. 40 ef. iv. 3; Rev. 
vi. 11; ix. 4. “Moreover, notice that ἵνα and ὄφρα are 
often used by the later poets after verbs of command- 
ing;” Hermann ad Vig. p. 849; ef. W. § 44.8; [B. 237 


¥ 
ELTT WS 


(204)). 


5. By a Hebraism εἰπεῖν ἐν ἑαυτῷ (like V8 


182 


εἰρηνικός 


of harmony; οἵ. Mey. δὰ loc.]. The Hebrews in invok- 


353, Deut. viii. 17; Ps. x. 6 (ix. 27); xiii. (xiv.) 1; Esth. | ing blessings on a man called out ᾿ Ὁ pibw (Judg. vi. 
i- J 5 > Ἷ 4 - [- 


vi. 6) is equiv. to to think (because thinking is a silent 
soliloquy): Mt. ix. 3; Lk. vii. 39; xvi.3; xviii. 4 (else- 
where also λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ) ; and εἰπεῖν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 
amounts to the same, Lk. xii. 45; Ro. x. 6; but in other 
passages εἶπον, ἔλεγον, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς isi. 4. ἐν ἀλλήλοις : Mt. 
xxi. 38; see λέγω, 11.1 ἃ. 6. εἰπεῖν τινα with a pred- 
icate accus. to call, style, one: ἐκείνους εἶπε θεούς, Jn. x. 
35; ὑμᾶς εἴρηκα φίλους, Jn. xv. 15; (Hom. Od. 19, 334; 
Xen. apol. Socr. § 15; Leian. Tim. § 20). [Comp.: dvr-, 
ἀπ-, mpo- εἴπον. 

εἴ-πως, see εἰ, IIT. 14. 

εἰρηνεύω ; (εἰρήνη) ; 1. to make peace: 1 Mace. vi. 
60; Dio Cass. 77, 12, ete. 2. to cultivate or keep peace, 
i. 6. harmony ; ἰ0 be at peace, live in peace: 2 Co. xiii. 11; 
ἐν ἀλλήλοις, Mk. ix. 50; ἐν ἑαυτοῖς [T Tr αὐτοῖς), 1 Th. 
y. 133; μετά twos, Ro. xii. 18; (Plat. Theaet. p. 180 b.; 
Dio Cass. 42, 15, ete.; Sept.).* 

εἰρήνη, -ns, 9, (apparently fr. εἴρω to join; [al. fr. εἴρω 
i.q-Aéyo; Etym. Magn. 303, 41; Vaniéek p. 892; Lob. 
Path. Proleg. p. 194; Benfey, Wurzellex. ii. p. 7]), Sept. 
chiefly for Dw; [fr. Hom. down]; peace, i. e. l. a 
state of national tranquillity ; exemption from the rage and 
havoc of war: Rey. vi. 4; πολλὴ εἰρήνη, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ; 
τὰ [WH txt. om. τά] πρὸς εἰρήνην, things that look tow- 
ards peace, as an armistice, conditions for the restoration 
of peace, Lk. xiv. 32; αἰτεῖσθαι εἰρήνην, Acts xii. 20; 
ἔχειν εἰρήνην, of the church free from persecutions, Acts 
TS (ols 2. peace between individuals, i. e. harmony, 
concord: Mt. x. 34; Lk. xii. 51; Acts vii. 26; Ro. xiv. 
17; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v.22; Eph.ii.17; iv.3; i.q. the 
author of peace, Eph. ii. 14 [ef. B. 125 (109)]; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 
where harmony prevails, in a peaceful mind, Jas. iii. 18 ; 
ὁδὸς εἰρήνης, way leading to peace, a course of life pro- 
moting harmony, Ro. iii. 17 (fr. Is. lix. 8) ; per’ εἰρήνης, 
in a mild and friendly spirit, Heb. xi. 31; ποιεῖν εἰρήνην, 
to promote concord, Jas. iii. 18; to effect it, Eph. ii. 15; 
Gyre, 1 Pet. iii. 115 διώκειν, 2 Tim. ii. 22; with pera 
πάντων added, Heb. xii. 14; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης διώκειν, Ro. 
xiv. 19 [cf. B. 95 (83); W. 109 (108 sq.)]. spee. good 
order, opp. to ἀκαταστασία, 1 Co. xiv. 33. 3. after the 
Hebr. D)9v, security, safety, prosperity, felicity, (because 
peace and harmony make and keep things safe and pros- 
perous): Lk. xix. 42; Heb. vii. 2; εἰρήνη x. ἀσφάλεια, 
opp- to ὄλεθρος, 1 Th. v. 3; ἐν εἰρήνῃ ἐστὶ τὰ ὑπάρχοντα 
αὐτοῦ, his goods are secure from hostile attack, Lk. xi. 
21; ὕπαγε εἰς εἰρήνην, Mk. v. 34, and πορεύου εἰς eip. Lk. 
vii. 50; viii. 48, a formula of wishing well, blessing, ad- 
dressed by the Hebrews to departing friends (οἷ 7, 
1S. i.17; xx. 42, ete.; properly, depart into a place or 
state of peace; \ cf. B. 184 (160)]); πορεύεσθαι ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 
Acts xvi. 36, and ὑπάγετε ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Jas. ii. 16, go in peace 
i. e. may happiness attend you; ἀπολύειν τινὰ μετ᾽ εἰρήνης, 
to dismiss one with good wishes, Acts xy. 33; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 
with my wish fulfilled, and therefore happy, Lk. ii. 29 
(see drove, 2 a.) ; προπέμπειν τινὰ ἐν eip. free from dan- 
ger, safe, 1 Co. xvi. 11 [al. take it of inward peace or 


23; Dan. x. 19) ; from this is to be derived the explana- 
tion of those expressions which refer apparently to the 
Messianic blessings (see 4 below): εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ 
τούτῳ, let peace, blessedness, come to this household, Lk. 
x. 5; υἱὸς εἰρήνης, worthy of peace [cf. W. § 34, 3 N. 2; 
B. 161 sq. (141) ], Lk. x. 6; ἐλθέτω ἡ εἰρήνη ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν. let 
the peace which ye wish it come upon it, i. e. be its lot, 
Mt. x. 13; to the same purport ἐπαναπ. ἡ εἰρ. ip. ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν, 
Lk. x. 6; ἡ εἰρ. by. πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπιστραφήτω, let your peace 
return to you, because it could not rest upon it, i. e. let 
it be just as if ye had not uttered the wish, Mt. x. 13. 
4. spec. the Messiah’s peace: Lk. ii. 14; ὁδὸς εἰρήνης, the 
way that leads to peace (salvation), Lk. i. 79; εἰρ. ἐν 
οὐρανῷ, peace, salvation, is prepared for us in heaven, 
Lk. xix. 38; εὐαγγελίζεσθαι εἰρήνην, Acts x. 36. 5. acc. 
to a conception distinctly peculiar to Christianity, the 
tranquil state of a soul assured of its salvation through 
Christ, and so fearing nothing from God and content with 
its earthly lot, of whatsoever sort that is: Ro. viii. 6; ἐν 
εἰρήνῃ sc. ὄντες is used of those who, assured of salvation, 
tranquilly await the return of Christ and the transfor- 
mation of all things which will accompany that event, 
2 Pet. iii. 14; [πληροῦν πάσης - . . εἰρήνης ἐν τῷ πιστεύειν, 
Ro. xv. 13 (where L mrg. ἐν a εἰρήνῃ) } ; ἔχειν ἐν Χριστῷ 
εἰρήνην (opp: to ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ θλίψιν ἔχειν), In. xvi. 33; 
ἔχειν elp. πρὸς τ. θεόν, with God, Ro. v. 1, (εἰρ. πρός τινα, 
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 b.; ef. Diod. 21, 12; [ef Mey. on Ro. 
1. οὐ; W. 186 (175) ; 406 (379)]); εὐαγγελίζεσθαι εἰρήνην, 
Ro. x. 15 [RG Tr mrg. in br.]; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς εἰρήνης, 
Eph. vi. 15 ; in the expression εἰρήνην ἀφίημι κτλ. Jn. Xiv. 
27, in which Christ, with allusion to the usual Jewish 
formula at leave-taking (see 3 above), says that he not 
merely wishes, but gives peace; ἡ εἰρήνη τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
which comes from Christ, Col. iii. 15 [Rec. θεοῦ]; τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Phil. iv. 7, [ef.W. 186 (175)]. Comprehensively of 
every kind of peace (blessing), yet with a predominance 
apparently of the notion of peace with God, εἰρήνη is used 
—in the salutations of Christ after his resurrection, εἰρήνη 
ὑμῖν (029 Did), Lk. xxiv. 36 [T om. WH reject the 
cl.]; Jn. xx. 19, 21, 26; in the phrases ὁ κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, 
the Lord who is the author and promoter of peace, 2 
Th. iii. 16; ὁ θεὸς τῆς εἰρ. Ro. xv. 33; xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 
11; Phil. iv. 9; 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. xiii. 20; in the salu- 
tations at the beginning and the close of the apostolic 
Epp.: Ro. i. 7; 1 Co. i. 3; 2Co. i. 2; Gal. i. 8; vi. 16; 
Eph. i.2; vi. 23; Phil. i. 2; Col. i. 2; 1 Th.i. 1; 2 Th. 
i. 2; iii. 16; 1 Tim.i.2; 2 Tim.i. 2; Tit.i.4; [Philem. 3]; 
1 Pet. i. ὃ; v.14; 2 Pet.i.2; 2Jn.3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); [Jude 
2]; Rev. i. 4. Cf. Kling in Herzog iv. p. 596 sq. 8. V- 
Friede mit Gott; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 83 b.; 
[ Otto in the Jahrbb. fiir deutsch. Theol. for 1867, p. 678 
sqq-; ef. W. 549 (511)]. 6. of the blessed state of 
devout and upright men after death (Sap. iii. 8): Ro. 
ii. 10.* 

εἰρηνικός, -7, -όν, 1. relating to peace: ἐπιστῆμαι, the 
arts of peace, Xen. oec. 1, 17; ἔργα, ibid. 6, 1; χρεῖαι, 


εἰρηνοποιέω 


Diod. 5, 31; often in 1 Mace. 2. peaceable, pacific, 
loving peace: Jas. iii. 17; (Plat., Isoc., al. ; Sept.). 3. 
bringing peace with it, peaceful, salutary, (see εἰρήνη, 3): 
Heb. xii. 11.* 

εἰρηνο-ποιέω, -@: [1 aor. eipnvoroinaa]; (εἰρηνοποιός) ; 
to make peace, establish harmony: Col. i. 20. (Prov. x. 
10; in Mid., Hermes ap. Stob. eclog. ph. 1, 52 [984].)* 

εἰρηνοποιός, -dv, masc. a peace-maker (Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 
4; Dio Cass.) ; pacific, loving peace: Mt. v. 9; [others 
(cf. A. V.) dispute this secondary meaning ; see Meyer 
ad loc. ].* 

εἴρω, fut. ἐρῶ, see εἶπον. 

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting 
entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, 
for, among. It is used 

A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, 
coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, 
throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or 
of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands be- 
fore nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or 
one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, 
Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. 
οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 
23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; 
ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 
9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; 
ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας 
or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 
9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete. ; εἰς αὐτόν, of ademon entering 
the body of a man, Mk. ix. 25. with ace. of pers. (Germ. 
zu jemand hinein), into the house of one (cf. Kiihner 
§ 432, 1,1 a.; [Jelf § 625, 1a.]): εἰς τὴν Λυδίαν, Acts 
xvi. 40 Rec., but here more correctly πρός with G L T Tr 
WH; cf. W. § 49, a, a. (εἰς ἐμαυτόν, Sap. viii. 18). γίνομαι 
eis with ace. of place, see γίνομαι, 5g. b. before names 
of cities, villages, and countries, εἰς may be rendered 
simply to, towards, (Germ. nach ; as if it indicated merely 
motion towards a destination; [cf. W. § 49, a, a.]); as 
εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, eis Δαμασκόν, εἰς Βέροιαν, etc. ; εἰς Σπανίαν, 
Αἴγυπτον, Γαλιλαίαν, etc. ; but itis not to be so translated 
in such phrases as εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν γῆν, ete., Jn. iii. 22; 
Mt. ii. 12 ef. 20, 21; εἰς ra μέρη τῆς Γαλιλαίας, Mt. ii. 22, 
ete. c. elliptical expressions are —eis ἅδου, se. δόμον, 
Acts ii. 27 [Rece.], 31 [not T WH]; see Gdns, 2. ἐπιστολαὶ 
eis Δαμασκόν, to be carried to D., Acts ix. 2; ἡ διακονία 
μου ἡ εἰς [L Trmrg. ἐν] Ἵερουσ. (see in διακονία, 3), Ro. 
xy. 31; ef. Bnhdy. p. 216. ἃἅ. eis means among (in 
among) before nouns comprising a multitude; as, εἰς 
τοὺς λῃστάς, Lk. x. 36; εἰς [L mrg. ἐπὶ] τὰς ἀκάνθας. Mk. 
iv. 7 (for which Lk. viii. 7 gives ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἀκανθῶν) ; 
or before persons, Mk. viii. 19 sq.; Lk. xi. 49; Jn. xxi. 
23; Acts xviii. 6; xx. 29; xxii. 21, 30; xxvi. 17; see 
ἀποστέλλω, 1 b.; or before a collective noun in the 
singular number, as eis τὸν δῆμον, Acts xvii. 5; xix. 30; 
eis τὸν ὄχλον, Acts xiv. 14; εἰς τὸν λαόν, Acts iv.17. 2. 
If the surface only of the place entered is touched or 
occupied, eis, like the Lat. in, may [often] be rendered 
on, upon, (Germ. auf), [sometimes by unto, — (idioms 


183 


εἰς 


vary) ], to mark the limit reached, or where one sets foot. 
Of this sort are εἰς τὸ πέραν [A. V. unto], Mt. viii. 18, 
xiv. 22; Mk. iv. 35; εἰς τὴν γῆν, Lk. xii. 49 (L T Tr WH 
ἐπί); Acts xxvi. 14; Rev. viii. 5,7; ix. 3; xii. 4, 9; εἰς 
τὴν κλίνην, Rev. ii. 22; εἰς ὁδόν, Mt. x. 5; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. 
i. 79; εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, Mk. xi. 8° [L mrg. ἐν w. dat., 8° RG 
11; εἰς τ. ἀγρόν, Mt. xxii. 5; Mk. xiii. 16; εἰς τὸ ὄρος 
[or εἰς ὄρ.; here A. V.uses into], Mt. v. 1; xiv. 23; xv. 
29; xvii.1; Mk. iii.13; ix.2; Lk. ix.28; Jn. vi.3, ete.; 
els τὰ δεξιά, Jn. xxi. 6; σπείρειν εἴς τι (τὴν σάρκα), Gal. vi. 
8 [here A. V. unto; cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; ἀναπίπτειν εἰς 
τύπον, Lk. xiv. 10; δέχομαι εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας, Lk. ii. 28 ; 
τύπτειν eis τὴν κεφαλήν, Mt. xxvii. 30, [εἰς τὴν σιαγόνα, 
Lk. vi. 29 Tdf.; ῥαπίζειν εἰς τ. σιαγόνα, Mt. ν. 591, Τ Tr 
txt. WH, where RG ἐπί], and in other phrases. 3. 
of motion (not into a place itself, but) into the vicinity 
of a place; where it may be rendered to, near, towards, 
(cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 81 sq. [for exx. only]): εἰς 7. 
θάλασσαν, Mk. iii. 7G 1, Ὁ Trmrg.; εἰς πόλιν, Jn. iv. 5 cf. 
28 ; εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, Jn. xi. 31, 38; xx. 1, 8 sq. 8; ἐγγίζειν 
eis ete. Mt. xxi. 1; ΜΚ. xi. 1; Lk. xviii. 35; xix. 29; εἰς 
τοὺς φραγμούς, Lk. xiv. 23; πίπτειν εἰς τ. πόδας, αἱ, In. xi. 32 
[T Tr WH πρός]; κλίνειν τὸ πρόσωπον εἰς τ. γῆν, Lk. xxiv. 
5; εἰς τὴν χεῖρα, on, Lk. xv. 22. 4. of the limit to 
which; with ace. of place, as far as, even to: Ἀάμπειν 
ex ...eis, Lk. xvii. 24; with ace. plur. of pers. to, unto: 
Acts xxiii. 15 (εἰς ὑμᾶς, for R G πρός) ; Ro. v. 12; xvi. 19; 
2 Co. ix. 5 [L Tr πρός]; x. 14. 5. of local direc- 
tion; a. after verbs of seeing: ἐπαίρειν τοὺς ὀφθαλ- 
μοὺς εἴς τι, τινα, Lk. vi. 20; βλέπειν, Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii. 
22; Acts iii. 4; ἀναβλέπειν, Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16; 
Acts xxii. 13; ἐμβλέπειν, Mt. vi. 26; ἀτενίζειν, α.ν. Ὁ. 
after verbs of saying, teaching, announcing, 
ete. (cf. Germ. die Rede richten an ete.; Lat. dicere ad 
or coram; [Eng. direct one’s remarks to or towards]; 
exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Bnhdy. p. 217; Passow 
i. p. 802°; [L. and S. s.v. I. b. 3]; Kriiger § 68, 21, 6): 
κηρύσσειν, AS ἦν κηρύσσων eis Tas συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν εἰς 
ὅλην τὴν Ταλιλ. preaching to the synagogues throughout all 
Galilee, Mk. i. 89 (Ree. ἐν ταῖς ovvay., as Lk. iv. 44 
[where T WH Tr txt. now εἰς ; οἵ. W. 416 (387) ; B. 333 
(287); but in Mk. 1. ο. T Tr txt. WH now read ἦλθεν 
κηρύσσων Krd.]); τὸ εὐαγγ. εἰς ὅλον τ. κόσμον, Mk. xiv. 9; 
εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, Mk. xiii. 10; Lk. xxiv. 47; εἰς ὑμᾶς, 1 
Th. 11. 9; ἀπαγγέλλειν [Ree. dvayy.] re εἰς, Mk. v. 14; Lk. 
Vili. 34; γνωρίζειν, Ro. xvi. 26; εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, 2 Co. x. 
16; εἰς ὑμᾶς, 1 Pet. i. 25; λέγειν [Ree. ; al. λαλεῖν] εἰς τὸν 
κόσμον, Jn. viii. 26 ; [λαλεῖν τὸν λόγον εἰς τὴν Πέργην, Acts 
xiv. 25 T WH mrg.]; διαμαρτύρεσθαι and μαρτυρεῖν, Acts 
Xxiil. 11. 

II. of Time; 1. it denotes entrance intoa 
period which is penetrated, as it were, i. 6. duration 
through a time, (Lat. in; Germ. hinein, hinaus) : εἰς τὸν 
αἰῶνα, and the like, see αἰών, 1 a.; εἰς τὸ διηνεκές, Heb. 
vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 14; εἰς ἔτη πολλά, Lk. xii. 193 τῇ ἐπι- 
φωσκούσῃ (ἡμέρᾳ) εἰς μίαν σαββάτων, dawning into [ A. V. 
towards] the first day of the week, Mt. xxviii.1. Hence 
2. of the time in which a thing is done; because he 


εἰς 


who does or experiences a thing at any time is conceived 
of as, so to speak, entering into that time: εἰς τὸν καιρὸν 
αὐτῶν, in their season, Lk. i. 20; εἰς τὸ μέλλον 50. ἔτος, 
the next year, [but 5. v. μέλλω, 1. Grimm seems to take 
the phrase indefinitely, ‘henceforth (cf. Grk. txt.) ], Lk. 
xiii. 9; εἰς τὸ μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next sabbath, Acts 
xiii. 42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν, again (for the second, third, time), 
2 Co. xiii. 2. 3. of the (temporal) limit for which 
anything is or is done; Lat. in; our for, unto: Rey. 
ix. 153 els τὴν αὔριον sc. ἡμέραν, for the morrow, Mt. vi. 
34; Acts iv. 3; εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως, 2 Pet. ii. 9; iii. 7; εἰς 
ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ, Phil. i. 10; ii. 16; εἰς ἡμέραν ἀπολυτρώ- 
σεως, Eph. iv. 30. 4. of the (temporal) limit to 
which; unto i. e. even to, until: Acts xxv. 21; 1 Th. iv. 
15; εἰς ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν, 2 Tim. i. 12. On the phrase 
εἰς τέλος. See τέλος, 1 a. 

B. Used MerapHORICALLy, εἰς 
of entering into anything, 1. where one thing is 
said to be changed into another, or to be separated into 
parts, or where several persons or things are said to be 
collected or combined into one, ete. : 
Phil. i. 19; γίνεσθαι εἴς τι, see γίνομαι, 5 d.; εἶναι εἴς τι, 
see εἰμί, V. 2 [a. fin.] c. and d.; στρέφειν τι εἴς τι, Rey. 
xi. 6; μεταστρέφειν, Acts ii. 20; Jas. iv. 9; μεταλλάσσειν, 
Ro. i. 26; μετασχηματίζεσθαι, 2 Co. xi. 13 56. ; συνοικο- 
δομεῖσθαι, Eph. ii. 22; κτίζειν τινὰ eis, Eph. 11. 15; λαμ- 
Bavew τι eis, Heb. xi. 8; λογίζεσθαι εἴς τι, see λογίζομαι, 
la. ἐσχίσθη eis δύο, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38, (Polyb. 
2, 16, 11 σχίζεται εἰς δύο pépn); δέειν εἰς Seopas, Mt. xiii. 
30 [ἃ om. Tr WH br. eis]; εἰς ἕν τελειοῦσθαι, In. xvii. 
23; συνάγειν εἰς ἕν. Jn. xi.52. 2. after verbs of going, 
coming, leading, ete., εἰς is joined to nouns desig- 
nating the condition or state into which one passes, 
falls, ete. : εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς THY βασιλ. τῶν οὐραν. OY τοῦ θεοῦ, 
see βασιλεία, 3 p. 97°; εἰς τ. ζωήν, Mt. xviii. 8; xix. 17; 
xxv. 46; εἰς τ. χαράν, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον, 


I. retains the force 


> , " 
ἀποβαίνειν εἴς τι, 


ib. 40 ; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς κρίσιν, In. ν. 24; εἰσφέρειν, εἰσέρχ. 
εἰς πειρασμόν, Mt. vi. 18; xxvi.41; Mk. xiv. 38 [TWH 
ἔλθητε] ; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὸ χεῖρον, Mk. v. 20 ; εἰς ἀπελεγμόν, 
Acts xix. 27 ; εἰς προκοπήν, Phil. i. 12; μεταβαίνειν εἰς τ. 
ζωήν, In. vy. 24; 1 Jn. iii, 14; πορεύεσθαι εἰς θάνατον, Lk. 
xxii. 33; ὑπάγειν els ἀπώλειαν, Rev. xvii. 8, 11; ὑπάγειν 
or πορεύεσθαι eis εἰρήνην. see εἰμήνη, 3; ὑποστρέφειν eis 
διαφθοράν, Acts ΧΙ. 34; συντρέχειν εἰς ἀνάχυσιν, 1 Pet. 
iv. 4; βάλλειν εἰς θλίψιν, Rev. ii. 22; 
μανίαν, Acts xxvi. 24; peraorpépew and στρέφειν εἴς τι, 
Acts ii. 20; Rev. xi. 6; ὁδηγεῖν εἰς τ. ἀλήθειαν [T ἐν τῇ ad.], 
Jn. xvi. 13; αἰχμαλωτίζειν εἰς ὑπακοήν, 2 Co. x. 5; mapa- 
διδόναι εἰς θλίψιν, Mt. xxiv. 9; εἰς θάνατον, 2 Co. iv. 11; 
eis κρίμα θανάτου, Lk. xxiv. 20; συγκλείειν eis ἀπείθειαν, 
Ro. xi. 32; ἐμπίπτειν εἰς κρίμα, εἰς ὀνειδισμὸν καὶ παγίδα, 
εἰς πειρασμόν, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.; vi. 9. 3. it is used of 
the business which one enters into, i. e. of what he 
undertakes : εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τ. κόπον τινός, to take up and 
earry on a labor begun by another, Jn. iv. 38; τρέχειν 
eis πόλεμον, Rev. ix. 9; ἔρχομαι eis ἀποκαλύψεις, I come, 
in my narrative, to revelations i. e. to the mention of 
them, 2 Co. xii. 1. 


περιτρέπειν εἰς 


184 


? 
εἐς 


II. εἰς after words indicating motion or direc- 
tion or end; 1. it denotes motion to something, 
after verbs of going, coming, leading, calling, ete., and 
answers to the Lat. ad, to: καλεῖν twa εἰς γάμον. γάμους, 
δεῖπνον, ete. to invite to, etc., Mt. xxii. 3; Lk. xiv. 8, 10; 
Jn. ii. 2; καλεῖν τινα εἰς μετάνοιαν, etce., Lk. ν. 32; 2 Th. 
ii. 14; ἄγειν τινὰ εἰς μετάνοιαν, Ro. ii. 4; ἐπιστρέφειν eis 
τὸ φῶς, Acts xxvi. 18 ; ἐκτρέπεσθαι eis ματαιολογίαν, 1 
Tim. i. 6 ; μετατίθεσθαι εἰς ἕτερον εὐαγγέλ. Gal. i. 6; χωρῆ- 
σαι εἰς μετάνοιαν, 2 Pet. 111. 9, ete. 2. of ethical di- 
rection or reference; a. univ. of acts in which the 
mind is directed towards, or looks to, something : βλέπειν 
εἰς πρόσωπόν τινος (see βλέπω, 2¢.); ἀποβλέπειν εἰς τ. 
μισθαποδοσίαν, 16}. xi. 26; ἀφορᾶν cis... Ἰησοῦν, ib. 
xii. 2 (see A. I. 5 a. above); πιστεύειν εἴς τινα, and the 
like, ef. under πιστεύω, πίστις, ἐλπίζω, [ἐλπίς], etc. ; ém- 
θυμίαν ἔχειν εἴς τι, directed towards ete. Phil. i. 23; 
λέγειν εἴς τινα, to speak with reference to one, Acts ii. 25 
(Diod. Sic. 11, 50); λέγειν τι εἴς τι, to say something 
in reference to something, Eph. v. 32; λαλεῖν τι εἴς τι, 
to speak something relating to something, Heb. vii. 14; 
ὀμνύειν εἴς τι, to swear with the mind directed towards, 
Mt. v. 35; εὐδοκεῖν ets τινα, Mt. xii. 18 [RG]; 2 Pet.i. 
17. b. forone’s advantage or disadvantage; 
for, for the benefit of, to the advantage of: εἰς ἡμᾶς, Eph. 
i. 193 εἰς ὑμᾶς, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [but WH br.]; Eph. iii. 2; 
Col. i. 25; πλουτεῖν εἰς θεόν, to abound in riches made 
to subserve God’s purposes and promote his glory, Lk. 
xii. 21 [so too W. 397 (371); but ef. Mey. ed. Weiss ad 
loc.]; Christ is said πλουτεῖν εἰς πάντας, to abound in 
riches redéunding to the salvation of all men, Ro. x. 12; 
πλεονάζειν εἴς τι, Phil. iv. 17; ἐλεημοσύνην ποιεῖν εἰς τὸ 
ἔθνος, Acts xxiv. 17; εἰς τοὺς πτωχούς, for the benefit 
of the poor, Ro. xv. 26; εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; 1x. 
1, ef. 133 κοπιᾶν εἴς τινα, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11; εἰς Χριστόν, 
to the advantage and honor of Christ, Philem. 6; ἐργά- 
ζεσθαί τι εἴς τινα, Mk. xiv. 6 Rec.; 3 Jn. 5; λειτουργὸς eis 
τὰ ἔθνη, Ro. xv. 16; γενόμενα εἰς Καφαρναούμ (for Rec. 
ἐν Καπερναούμ [cf. W. 416 (888) ; B. 333 (286)]), Lk. 
iv. 23. β. unto in a disadvantageous sense, (against) : 
μηδὲν ἄτοπον eis αὐτὸν γενόμενον, Acts xxviii. 6. ὁ. of 
the mood οὐ inclination, affecting one towards any 
person or thing; of one’s mode of action towards; 
a. in a good sense: ἀγάπη εἴς τινα, unto, towards, one, 
Ro. v. 8; 2Co. ii. 4,8; Col. i.4, 1 Th. iii. 12; τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς 
ἀλλήλους φρονεῖν, Ro. xii. 16; φιλόστοργος, ib. 10; φιλό- 
tevos, 1 Pet. iv. 9; χρηστός, Eph. iv. 32; ἀποκαταλ- 
λάσσειν εἰς αὑτόν [8]. adr. see αὑτοῦ], Col. i. 20 [cf. W. 
397 (371)]. β. ina bad sense: ἁμαρτάνειν εἴς τινα (see 
ἁμαρτάνω, b.); λόγον εἰπεῖν and βλασφημεῖν εἴς τινα, Lk. 
xii. 10; Mk. iii. 29; βλάσφημος εἴς τινα. Acts vi. 11; 
βλασφημῶν λέγω εἴς τινα, Lk. xxii. 65; ἐπιβουλὴ εἴς τινα, 
Acts xxiii. 30; ἔχθρα, Ro. viii. 7; ἀντιλογία, Heb. xii- 
3; θαρρεῖν εἴς τινα, 2 Co.x.1. ἃ. of reference or 
relation; with respect to, in reference to; as regards, 
(ef. Kiihner ii. 408 ¢.; [Jelf § 625, 3 6.7}: Lk. vii. 30; 
Acts xxv. 20 [Τ Tr WH om. eis]; Ro. iv. 20; xv. 2; 2 
Co. x. 16; xiii. 3; Gal. vi. 4; Eph. iii. 16; Phil. i. 5; ii. 


> 
ets 


22; 1 Th. v. 18; εἰς τί ἐδίστασας ; ‘ (looking) unto what 
(i. 6. wherefore) didst thou doubt ? Mt. xiv. 31; ef. Her- 
mann ad Oed. C. 528’ (Fritzsche). of the considera- 
tion influencing one to do anything: μετανοεῖν εἰς 
κἠρυγμά τινος, at the preaching of one, 1. 6. out of regard 
to the substance of his preaching, Mt. xii. 41; δέχεσθαί 
twa εἰς ὄνομά twos, Mt. x. 41 sq.3 εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 
(see διαταγή), Acts vii. ὅ8. 6. with acc. of the pers. 
towards (Germ. nach einem hin), but in sense nearly 
equiv. to the simple dat. to, unto, after verbs of ap prov- 
ing, manifesting, showing one’s self: ἀποδεδειγ- 
μένος εἰς ὑμᾶς, Acts 11. 22 ; ἔνδειξιν ἐνδείκνυσθαι, 2 Co. viii. 
24; φανερωθέντες eis ὑμᾶς, 2 Co. xi. 6 (1, Τ Tr WH φανε- 
ρώσαντες SC. τὴν γνῶσιν). 3. it denotes the end; 
and a. the end to which a thing reaches or extends, 
i.e.measure or degree: [ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, Mk. iv. 
8T Tr txt. WH; cf. B. 30 (27); L. and 5. 5. v. A. II. 
2]; εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα, 2 Co. x. 13; εἰς περισσείαν, 2 Co. x. 15; 
eis ὑπερβολήν (often in Grk. writ., as Eur. Hipp. 939; 
Aeschin. f. leg. § 4), 2 Co. ἵν. 17. of the limit: εἰς τὸ σω- 
φρονεῖν. unto moderation, modesty, i. e. not beyond it, Ro. 
xii. 8. Ὅ. the end which athing isadaptedtoattain 
(a use akin to that in B. 11. 2 b.; [ef. W. 213 (200)]): 
ἀργὸς k. ἄκαρπος εἴς τι, 2 Pet. i. 8; εὔθετος, Lk. ix. 62 RG; 
xiv. 35 (34); εὔχρηστος, 2 Tim. iv. 11; χρήσιμος, 2 Tim. 
ii. 14 RG, δυναμούμενος, Col. i. 11; θεοδίδακτος, 1 Th. iv. 
9; βραδύς, Jas. i. 19; σοφός, Ro. xvi. 19; φῶς eis ἀποκά- 
λυψιν, Lk. ii. 32; δύναμις εἰς ete. Ro. i. 16; Heb. xi. 11; 
ἀναγεννᾶν eis, 1 Pet. i. 3 sq.; ἀνακαινόω, Col. ili. 10; σο- 
φίζειν τινὰ eis, 2 Tim. 111. 15; ἰσχύειν εἰς, Mt. ν. 18. c. 
the end which one has in view, i.e. object, purpose; 
a. associated with other prepositions [cf. W. § 50,5]: ἐκ 
πίστεως εἰς πίστιν, to produce faith, Ro. i. 17, cf. Fritzsche, 
Meyer, Van Hengel, ad loc. ; ἐξ αὐτοῦ καὶ δ᾿ αὐτοῦ καὶ εἰς 
αὐτόν, answering to his purposes (the final cause), Ro. xi. 
36; ἐξ οὗ τὰ πάντα καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν, 1 Co. viii. 6; δ αὐτοῦ 
καὶ εἰς αὐτόν (see διά, A. III. 2 b. sub fin.), Col. i. 16; 
δ αὐτοῦ εἰς αὑτόν, Col. i. 20. β. shorter phrases: εἰς 
τοῦτο, to this end, ΜΕ. i. 38; [LK. iv. 48 RG Tr mre.]; 
εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο [R. V. for this very thing], 2 Co. v. 5; eis 
touro... wa ete. Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. iii. 8; Ro. xiv. 9; 2 
Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. iv. 6; eis αὐτὸ τοῦτο... ὅπως etc. Ro. 
ix. 17; ἵνα, Col. iv. 8; Eph. vi. 22; εἰς ri, to what purpose, 
Mt. xxvi. 8; Mk. xiv. 4; εἰς 6, to which end, for which 
cause, 2 Th. i. 11; Col. i. 29. y. univ. : βαπτίζω εἴς τινα, 
τι (see βαπτίζω, II. b. aa.) ; παιδαγωγὸς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν, 
Gal. ili. 24; συγκεκλεισμένοι εἰς τ. πίστιν, that we might 
the more readily embrace the faith when its time should 
come, Gal. iii. 23; φρουρούμενοι εἰς τὴν σωτηρίαν, that 
future salvation may be yours, 1 Pet. i. 5; ἀγοράζειν εἰς 
τ. ἑορτήν, Jn. xiii. 29; εἰς ὄλεθρον σαρκός, 1 Co. v. 5; εἰς 
τ. ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν, Ro. xv. 4, and in many other exx. 
esp. after verbs of appointing, choosing, preparing, do- 
ing, coming, sending, etc.: κεῖμαι, Lk. ii. 34; Phil. i. 17 
(16); 1 Th. iii. 3; τάσσω, 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; τάσσομαι, Acts 
xili. 48 ; ἀφορίζω, Ro. i.1; Acts xiii. 2; προορίζω, Eph. 
1. δ; 1 Co. ii. 7; αἱρέομαι, 2 Th. ii. 13; τίθεμαι, 1 Tim. i. 
12; 1 Pet. ii. 8; xarapritw, Ro. ix. 22 sg.: ἀποστέλλω. 


185 


> 
εις 


Heb. i. 14; πέμπω, 1 ΤῊ. iii. 2,5; Col. iv. 8; Phil. iv. 10 
[L br. eis]; 1 Pet.ii.14; ἔρχομαι, Jn. ix.39; ποιεῖν τι εἰς, 
1 Co. x. 31; xi. 24. Modelled after the Hebr. are the 
phrases, ἐγείρειν twa eis βασιλέα, fo be king, Acts xiii. 22 ; 
ἀνατρέφεσθαί τινα εἰς υἱόν, Acts vii. 21; τέθεικά σε εἰς 
φῶς ἐθνῶν, Acts xiii. 47 (fr. Is. xlix. 6 Α16χ.); cf. Gesenius, 
Lehrgeb. p. 814; B. 150 (131) ; [W.§ 32,4b.]. δ. εἴς τι, 
indicating purpose, often depends not on any one pre- 
ceding word with which it coalesces into a single phrase, 
but has the force of a telic clause added to the already 
complete preceding statement ; thus, eis δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ. 
Ro. xv. 7; Phil. i. 11; ii. 11; εἰς φόβον, that ye should 
fear, Ro. viii. 15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, that he might show, Ro. 
iii. 25; εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, to procure eternal life (sc. for 
those mentioned), Jn. iv. 14; vi. 27, (in which passages 
the phrase is by many interpp. [e. g. De Wette, Mey., 
Lange; ef. W. 397 (371) note] incorrectly joined with 
ἅἄλλεσθαι and μένειν (ef. Thol., Luthardt, al.]); Ro. v. 
21; 1 Tim. i. 16; Jude 21; add, Mt. viii. 4; xxvii. 7; 
Mk. vi. 11; Acts xi. 18; Ro. x. 4; Phil. i. 25; ii. 16; 2 
Tim. ii. 25; Rev. xxii. 2, ete. ε- eis τό foll. by an inf., 
a favorite construction with Paul (cf. B. 264 (227) sq.; 
Harmsen in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874, 
pp- 345-360), is like the Lat. ad with the gerundive. It 
is of two kinds; either aa. εἰς τό combines with the 
verb on which it depends into a single sentence, as παρα- 
δώσουσιν αὐτὸν... εἰς τὸ ἐμπαῖξαι, (Vulg. ad deludendum), 
Mt. xx. 19; εἰς τὸ σταυρωθῆναι, Mt. xxvi. 2; οἰκοδομηθή- 
σεται εἰς τὸ Ta εἰδωλόθυτα ἐσθίειν, (Vulg. aedificabitur ad 
manducandum idolothyta), 1 Co. viii. 10; μὴ οἰκίας οὐκ 
ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν k. πίνειν, 1 Co. xi. 22; εἰς τὸ προσφέρειν 
δῶρά τε καὶ θυσίας καθίσταται, (Vulg. ad offerenda munera 
et hostias), Heb. viii. 3; add, Heb. ix. 28; 1 Th. ii. 16; 
iy. 9; Phil. i. 23; or BB. εἰς τό with the inf. has the 
force of a separate telic clause (equiv. to iva with the 
subjunc.), [Meyer (on Ro. i. 20) asserts that this is its 
uniform force, at least in Ro. (cf. his note on 2 Co. viii. 
6); on the other hand, Harmsen (u. s.) denies the telic 
force of εἰς τό before an inf. Present; cf. also W. 329 
(309); esp. B. as above and p. 265 note; Ellic. on 1 
Thess. ii. 12; and see below, ἃ. fin.]: Lk. xx. 20 
RG; Acts iii. 19 [T WH πρός]; Ro. i. 11; iv. 16, 18; 
xi. 11; xii.2; xv. 8,13; 1 Co. ix.18; x.6; Gal. iii. 17; 
Eph. i. 12,18; 1 Th. ii. 12, 16; iii.5; 2 Th.i. 5; ii. 2,10; 
Jas. i.18; Heb. ii. 17 ; vil. 25; ix. 14, 285; xii. 10; xiii. 21; 
εἰς τὸ μή, lest, 2 Co. iv. 4; 1 Pet. iii. 7. d. the end by 
which a thing is completed, i-e. the result or ef- 
fect: Actsx.4; Ro. vi. 19 (εἰς τ. ἀνομίαν [but WH br.], 
so that iniquity was the result); x. 10; xiii. 14; 1 Co. 
xi. 17; 2 Co. ii. 16; Eph. v. 2, ete.; eis τό with inf. so 
that [cf. B8. above]: Ro.i. 20; 2 Co. viii. 6. 

C. CONSTRUCTIONS in some respects PECULIAR. 
1. Various forms of pregnant and brachylogical 
construction (W. § 66, 2; [less fully, B. 327 (282)]; 
Buhdy. p. 348 sq.) : σώζειν τινὰ εἰς ete. to save by trans- 
lating into ete. 2 Tim. iv. 18 [see σώζω, b. sub fin.]; δια- 
σώζειν, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Sept. Gen. xix. 19, and often in 
Grk. writ.) ; μισθοῦσθαι ἐργάτας εἰς τ. ἀμπελῶνα, to go 


els 


into ete. Mt. xx. 1; ἐλευθεροῦν eis ete. Ro. viil. 21; ἀπο- 


διδόναι τινὰ εἰς Αἴγυπτον, Acts vii. 9; ἔνοχος els yeevvay, | 
to depart into ete. [cf. B. 170 (148) note], Mt. v. 22; κλᾶν 


eis twas, to break and distribute among etc. Mk. viii. 19; 
ἀσφαλίζεσθαι εἰς τὸ ξύλον, Acts xvi. 24; κτᾶσθαι χρυσὸν 
εἰς τ. ζώνας, Mt. x. 9; ἐντετυλιγμένον εἰς ἕνα τόπον, rolled 
up and laid away in ete. Jn. xx. 7. 2. Akin to this is 
the very common use of eis after verbs signifying rest 
or continuance in a place, because the idea of a pre- 
vious motion into the place spoken of is involved (cf. W. 
§ 50, 4b.; B. 332 (286) sq.; Kiihner ii. p. 317; [Jelf 
§ 646, 1]; Bnhdy. p. 215; [yet cf. also exx. in Soph. Lex. 
8. V. eis, 1]) : εὑρέθη eis” ACwror, 56. transferred or carried 
off to, Acts viii. 40, cf. 39 πνεῦμα κυρίου ἥρπασε τὸν Φίλιπ- 
mov, (Esth. i. 5 rots ἔθνεσι τοῖς εὑρεθεῖσιν εἰς τ. πόλιν ; 
so φανεῖσθαι is foll. by eis in 2 Mace. i. 33; vil. 22). δεῖ 
με THY ἑυρτὴν ποιῆσαι εἰς Ἱεροσ. sc. by going, Acts xviii. 21 
Rec.; likewise ἑτοίμως ἔχω ἀποθανεῖν εἰς Ἵεροσ. Acts xxi. 
18 (Ἡφαιστίων εἰς ᾿Εκβάτανα ἀπέθανε, Ael. v. h. 7, 8); 
συνέβαλεν ἡμῖν εἰς Ἄσσον, Acts xx. 14; ἡ μέλλουσα δόξα 
εἰς ἡμᾶς ἀποκαλυφθῆναι, which shall be revealed (and 
conferred) on us, Ro. viii. 18. κατοικεῖν eis πόλιν, εἰς γῆν, 
to come into a city and dwell there, Mt. ii. 23; iv. 13; 
Acts vii. 4, [ef. Num. xxxv. 33; 2 Chr. xix.4ete.]; also 
παροικεῖν, Heb. xi. 9 (ἐνοικεῖν, Xen. an. 1, 2, 24); στῆναι, 
ἑστηκέναι (because it is nearly equiv. to to have placed 
one’s self) εἴς τι, Lk. vi. 8; Jn. xx. 19, 26; 1 Pet. v. 12; 
καθῆσθαι, to have gone unto a place and to be sitting 
there, Mk. xiii. 3; 2 Th. ii. 4, (on this use of these two 
verbs in Grk. auth. ef. Matthiae ii. p. 1344 sq.; [ef. W. 
and B.u.s.]). εἶναι εἰς with ace. of place see εἰμί, V. 2 a.; 
οἱ εἰς τ. οἶκόν μου 56. ὄντες, Lk. ix. 61; τοῖς εἰς μακράν Sc. 
οὖσι (Germ. ins Ferne hin befindlich), Acts ii. 89, συνά- 
γεσθαι foll. by εἰς with ace. of place: to go toa place and 
assemble there, Mt. xxvi. 3 and Acts iv. 5 RT, (1 Esdr. 
v.46 (47); ix.3). Sometimesa word implying motion, 
occurring in the same sentence, seems to have occasioned 
the connection of a verb of rest with eis, as it were by 
a kind of attraction [B. u. 5.7: ἐξερχόμενος ηὐλίζετο eis τὸ 
ὄρος, Lk. xxi. 37; ἀκούσας . .. ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον 
[ Ree. σῖτα ἐν Αἰγ.] ἐξαπέστειλεν ete. Acts vii. 12 ; παραδώ- 
σουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια x. εἰς συναγωγὰς δαρήσεσθε, Mk. 
ΧΙ. 9 [W. 416 (387), B. 333 (287)]; ὕπαγε, νίψαι [but 
L br.] εἰς τ. κολυμβήθραν, Jn. ix. 7, although νίπτεσθαι 
eis τι can also be used (as λούεσθαι εἰς τὸ βαλανεῖον, Alci- 
phr. epp. 3, 43; eis λουτρῶνας, Athen. 10 p. 438 e.; λού- 
ew τινὰ eis σκάφην, Epict. diss. 3, 22, 71), since the water 
with which one bathes flows down into the pool. Cf. 
Beyer, De praepositt. εἰς et évin N. T. permutatione. 
Lips. 1824, 4to. 

D. ADVERBIAL Purases (cf. Matthiae § 578 d.): 
eis τέλος (See τέλος. 1 a.) ; εἰς τὸ πάλιν, See A. II. 2 above; 
eis τὸ παντελές, perfectly, utterly, Lk. xiii. 11 [ef. W. § 51, 
1 c.]; εἰς κενόν (see κενός, 3); εἰς ὑπάντησιν and els ἀπάν- 
Taw, see each subst. 

In composition εἰς is equiv. to the Lat. in and ad. 

els, μία, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, a cardinal numeral, 
one. Used 1. univ. a. in opp. to many; and 


186 


els 


a. added to nouns after the manner of an adjective: 
Mt. xxv. 15 (opp. to πέντε, δύο) ; Ro. v. 12 (opp. to πάν- 
tes); Mt. xx. 13; xxvii. 15; Lk. xvii. 34 [but L WH br.]; 
Acts xxviii. 13; 1 Co. x. 8; Jas. iv. 13 [R G], and often; 
παρὰ μίαν sc. πληγήν [W. 589 (548); B. 82 (72)], save 
one [W. § 49, g.], 2 Co. xi. 24; with the article, ὁ εἷς 
ἄνθρωπος, the one man, of whom I have spoken, Ro. ν. 
15. β. substantively, with a partit. gen.,—to denote 
one, whichever it may be: μίαν τῶν ἐντολῶν, one command- 
ment, whichever of the whole number it may be, Mt. v. 
19; add, Mt. vi. 29; xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42; Lk. xii. 27; 
xvii. 2, 22; or, that one is required to be singled out 
from a certain number: Lk. xxiii. 39; Jn. xix. 34, ete. 
foll. by ἐκ with the gen. of a noun signifying a whole, to 
denote that one of (out of) a company did this or that: 
Mt. xxii. 35; xxvi. 21; xxvii. 48; Mk. xiv. 18; Lk. xvii. 
15; Jn. i. 40 (41); vi. 8, 70; xii. 2 [Τ WH Tr mre. in 
br.], 4 [Tr om. ἐκ]; xiii. 21, 23 [Rec. om. ἐκ]; xviii. 26; 
Rev. v. 5; vii. 13; 1χ. 18 ; xiii. 3 [Rec. om. ἐκ]. γ. absol.: 
Mt. xxiii. 8-10; Heb. ii. 11; xi. 12; and where it takes 
the place of a predicate, Gal. iii. 20 [ef. W. 593 (551) ], 
28 (ye that adhere to Christ make one person, just as 
the Lord himself); συνάγειν eis ἕν, to gather together into 
one, Jn. xi. 52; ποιεῖν τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν, Eph. ii. 14; with 
the article, ὁ εἷς, the one, whom I have named, Ro. v. 15, 
19. b. in opp. to a division into parts, and in ethi- 
cal matters to dissensions: ἕν σῶμα, πολλὰ μέλη, Ro. 
xii. 4 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 12, 20; ἕν εἶναι, to be united most 
closely (in will, spirit), Jn. x. 30; xvii. 11, 21-23; ἐν ἑνὶ 
πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ. Phil. i. 27 ef. Acts iv. 32, (ef. Cic. 
Lael. 25 (92) amicitiae vis est in eo, ut unus quasi ani- 
mus fiat ex pluribus) ; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (see ἀπό. III. p. 59°), 
Lk. xiv.18. 6. with a negative following joined to the 
verb, eis... οὐ or μή, (one... not,i. e.) no one, (more 
explicit and emphatic than οὐδείς) : ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν ov πεσεῖ- 
ται, Mt. x. 29; besides, Mt. ν. 18; Lk. xi. 46; xii. 6; this 
usage is not only Hebraistic (as that language has no 
particular word to express the notion of none), but also 
Greek (Arstph. 600]. 153; thesm. 549; Xen. an. 5,6, 12; 
Dion. Hal. verb. comp. 18, ete.), cf. W. 172 (163); [B. 
121 (106)]. 2. emphatically, so that others are 
excluded, and εἷς is the same ἃ8. 8. a single (Lat. unus 
i. q. unicus) ; joined to nouns: Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. viii. 14 
(ov... εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον); Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xii. 52; Jn. xi. 
50; vii. 21; 1 Co. xii. 19; Eph. iv. 5, ete.; absol.: 1 Co. 
ix. 24; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); 1 Tim. ii. 5; Jas. iv. 12, ete.; 
οὐδὲ εἷς, not even one: Mt. xxvii. 14; Jn. i. 8; Acts iv. 
32; Ro. iii.10; 1 Co. vi. 5 [Β G]; οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός [there 
is not so much as one], Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3; 
cf. Lat. omnes ad unum, alltoaman. Neut. ἕν, one thing, 
exclusive of the rest; one thing before all others: Mk. x. 
21; Lk. xviii. 22; x. 42 [but WH only txt.]; Jn. ix. 25; 
Phil. iii. 13 (14); “45.11.10. Ὅ. alone: οὐδεὶς... εἰ μὴ 
εἷς ὁ θεός, Mk. ii. 7 (for which in Lk. v. 21 μόνος ὁ θεός); 
Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii.19. ὁ. one and the same (not at 
variance with, in accord with one’s self): Ro. iii. 30; 
Rey. xvii. 13, 17 [Lom.]; xviii. 8; τὸ ἕν φρονεῖν, Phil. 
ii. 2 [WH mrg. αὐτό]; ἕν εἶναι are one, i.e. are of the 


εἷς 


_ same importance and esteem, 1 Co. iii. 8; εἰς τὸ ἕν εἶναι 
(see εἰμί, V.2d.),1 Jn. v.8; more fully τὸ ἕν καὶ τὸ αὐτό, 
1 Co. xii. 11; ἐν καὶ τὸ αὐτό τινι, 1 Co. xi. 5. 3. the 
numerical force of εἷς is often so weakened that it hardly 
differs from the indef. pron. τὶς, or from our indef. article 
(W. 117 (111). [cf. 29 note 2; B. 85 (74)]): Mt. viii. 19 
(εἷς γραμματεύς) ; Xix. 16; xxvi. 69; Jn. vi. 9 (παιδάριον 
ἕν, where T Tr WH om. and L br. ἕν) ; Rev. viii. 13; ix. 
13, (Arstph. av. 1292; Xen. mem. 3, 3,12; Plat. de rep. 
6 p. 494d.; legge. 9 p. 855 d., etc.; esp. later writ. ; 
[Tob. i. 19; ii. 3; 3 Esdr. iv. 18; Gen. xxi. 15; 25S. ii. 
18; Judith xiv. 6]; so the Hebr. 1m, Dan. viii. 3; Gen. 
soot. ἐπ i Sh th DP Ἢ Le seat (xx.) 13; see Gesenius, 
Lehrgeb. p. 655); εἷς τις (Lat. unus aliquis), a certain 
one; one, I know not who; one who need not be named: 
with a subst. Mk. xiv. 51 (L Tr WHom. εἷς) ; or foll. 
by a gen. Mk. xiv. 47 where L Tr om. WH br. tis; foll. 
by ἐκ, ἐξ, with gen.: Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xi. 49, (ἔν τι τῶν 
ῥημάτων, Judith ii. 13, and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Wet- 
stein on Mk. xiv. 51; Matthiae § 487). 4. it is used 
distributively [W. § 26, 2; esp. B. 102 (90)]; 
καὶ eis, one... and one: Mt. xvii. 4; xx. 21; xxiv. 40 LT 
Tr WH, 41; xxvii. 38; Mk. iv. 8 [RGL WH mrg.], 20 
[RG L Tr mrg. WH mrg. in br.]; ix. 5; x. 37; xv. 27; Lk. 
ix. 33; Jn. xx. 12; Gal. iv. 22; (in Grk. auth. εἷς pév... εἷς 
δέ, as Aristot. eth. 6, 1,5; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 4); with the art. 
prefixed, 6 eis the one, Lk. xxiv. 18RG; foll. by ὁ εἷς, the 
one... the other, Mt. xxiv. 40 RG; foll. by ὁ ἕτερος, Mt. 
vi. 24: LK. vii. 41; xvi. 13>; xvii. 34 R WH; xviii. 10 
RGT WH org.; Acts xxiii. 6; εἷς (without the art.) 
... 6 ἕτερος: Lk. xvi. 13°; xvii. 34 G LT Tr; xviii. 10 
L Tr WH txt.; πέντε. .. ὃ εἷς .. . 6 ἄλλος, Rev. xvii. 10. 
b. εἷς ἕκαστος. every one: Actsii. 6 ; xx. 31; Eph. iv. 16; 
Col. iv. 6; foll. by a partit. gen.: Lk. iv. 40; xvi. 5; Acts 
li. 3; xvil. 27; xxi. 26; 1Co. xii.18; Eph.iv. 7; 1 Th. 
ii. 11; cf. B. 102 (89) sq.; ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος (see ἀνά. 2), 
Rev. xxi. 21. c. a solecism, com. in later Grk. (cf. 
Leian. soloec. [Pseudosoph.] ὃ 9; W.§ 37,3; B. 30 (26) 
sq-; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 613 sq.; [ Soph. Lex.s. v. καθεῖς ]), 
is καθ᾽ eis, and in combination καθεῖς, (so that either κατά 
is used adverbially, or eis as indeclinable): ὁ καθ᾽ εἷς, i. q. 
eis ἕκαστος, Ro. xii. 5 (where L T Tr WH τὸ καθ᾽ εἷς, as 
respects each one, severally; cf. what is said against this 
reading by Fritzsche, Com. iii. p. 44 sq., and in its favor 
by Meyer); with a partit. gen. 3 Mace. v. 34; εἷς καθ᾽ 
ΓΤ WHTr mre. κατὰ] cis, every one, one by one, Mk. xiv. 
19; Jn. viii. 9; καθ᾽ ἕνα, καθ᾽ ἕν, (as in Grk. writ.), of a 
series, one by one, successively: καθ᾽ ἕν, all in succession, 
Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες. 1 Co. xiv. 31 
(Xen. venat. 6, 14) ; καθ᾽ ἕν ἕκαστον, Acts xxi. 19 (Xen. 
Cyr. 1, 6, 22 (27); Ages. 7, 1) ; ὑμεῖς οἱ καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστος. 
ye severally, every one, Eph. ν. 33. 5. like the Hebr. 
IM, εἷς is put for the ordinal πρῶτος, first [W- § 37, 1; 
B. 29 (26)]: μία σαββάτων the first day of the week, Mt. 
xxvill.1; Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xx. 1, 19; Acts 
xx. 7; 1 Co. xvi.2[L T Tr WH pia caSfarov]; (in Grk. 
writ. so used only when joined with other ordinal num- 
bers, as εἷς καὶ τριηκοστός, Hdt. 5, 89; Diod. 16, 71. Cic. 


= 
a. εἰς. .- 


187 


εἰσέρχομαι 


[Cf£. Soph. Lex. 


de senect. 5 uno et octogesimo anno. 
5. V.])- 

εἰσ-άγω : 2 aor. εἰσήγαγον ; [pres. pass. εἰσάγομαι] ; [fr. 
Hom. down]; Sept. chiefly for 8°27; 1. to lead in: 
τινά foll. by εἰς with ace. of place, Lk. xxii. 54 [Tr mrg. 
br.]; Acts ix. 8; xxi. 28, 29, 37; xxii. 24 (for Rec. ἄγε- 
σθαι) ; ὧδε, Lk. xiv. 21; the place into which not being 
expressly noted: Jn. xviii. 16 (sc. εἰς τὴν αὐλήν) ; Heb. 1. 
6 ὅταν... . εἰσαγάγῃ; λέγει, God, having in view the time 
when he shall have again brought in the first-born into the 
world (i. 6. at the time of the παρουσία) says etc. 2. 
to bring in, the place into which not being expressly 
stated: Acts vii. 45 (sc. eis τὴν γῆν); Lk. 11. 27 (sc. εἰς 
τὸ ἱερόν). [COMP.: παρ-εισάγω.} " 

εἰσ-ακούω : fut. εἰσακούσομαι; Pass., 1 aor. εἰσηκούσθην ; 
1 fut. εἰσακουσθήσομαι ; Sept. very often for pow, but 
also for 73) to answer; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 1]. 8, 97 
down ; to hearken unto, to give ear to; i. e. 1. to give 
heed to, comply with, admonition; to obey (Lat. obedio 
i. e. ob-audio) : τινός, 1 Co. xiv. 21, (Deut.i. 43; ix. 23; 
Sir. iii. 6, etc.). 2. to listen to, assent to, a request; 
pass. to be heard, to have one’s request granted; a. of 
persons offering up prayers to God: Heb. vy. 7 (on which 
see ἀπό, I. 8 ἃ. fin.); Mt.vi.7. b. of the prayers offered 
up: Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 31, (Ps. iv. 2; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiy.) 
29 (26), ete.).* 

elo-S€xopar: fut. εἰσδέξομαι ; to receive kindly, i. e. con- 
textually, to treat with favor: twa, 2 Co. vi. 11. [From 
Pind. and Soph. down. Syn. ef. δέχομαι, fin.]* 

εἴσ-ειμι, inf. εἰσιέναι ; impf. εἰσήειν; (εἶμι [ef. B. 50 
(43)]); [fr. Hom. down]; to go into, enter: foll. by εἰς 
with the name of the place (ef. Win. De verb. comp. ete. 
Pt. ii. p. 11), Acts iii. 3; xxi. 26; Heb. ix. 6 [W. 267 
(251)]; πρός τινα, Acts xxi. 18.* 

εἰσ-έρχομαι ; fut. εἰσελεύσομαι ; 2 aor. εἰσῆλθον, 2 pers. 
plur. εἰσήλθατε (Lk. xi. 52, but Rec. -@ere), impy. εἰσέλθατε 
(Mt. vii. 13 but R ἃ -θετε, [3d pers. sing. -θάτω Mk. xiii. 
15, R G -θέτω]) ; see ἀπέρχομαι, init. ; pi. εἰσελήλυθα, 3 
pers. plur. εἰσελήλυθαν (Jas. v. 4, for RG εἰσεληλύθασιν, 
see γίνομαι, init.); Sept. mostly for 8)3; to go or come 
into or in; to enter; 1. prop., of men and of animals: 
foll. by eis with specification of the place (cf. Win. De 
verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 12 sq-), as into a house, 
into a city, Mt. viii. 5; x. 12; Mk. ii. 1; xi. 11; Acts 
xxiii. 16, 33, and often. without specification of place, 
—when mention of it has already been made, as Mt. ix. 
25; [Mk. vii. 25 Tdf.]; Lk. vii. 45; xiv. 23; xv. 28 ef. 
25; xxiv.3; Actsi. 13; v. 7,10; x. 25; 1 Co. xiv. 23 sq. ; 
or it can be easily supplied from the context, as Lk. xiii. 
24; xvii. 7; εἰς is also added to signify among: Acts 
xix. 30; xx. 29; εἰσέρχ. δεά τινος, to enter (a place) 
through something: διὰ τῆς πύλης, to enter the king- 
dom of God (compared to a palace) through the gate, 
Mt. vii. 13; Lk. xiii. 24; διὰ τῆς θύρας eis τ. αὐλήν, Jn. 
x. 1 sq.; add, Mt. xix. 24 GT Tr txt. WH txt.; [Mk. x. 
25 R* Lmrg. Trmrg.]; Lk. xviii. 25 RG T Tr txt. WH; 
εἰσέρχ. ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην, by entering to come under the 
roof, i. e. enter my house, Mt. viii. 8; with adverbs: 


εἰσέρχομαι 


ὅπου, Mk. xiv. 14; Ileb. vi. 20; ὧδε, Mt. xxii. 12; ἔσω, 
Mt. xxvi. 58; εἰς with ace. of pers., into one’s house, 
Acts xvi. 40, but on this pass. see εἰς, A. I. 1a. εἰσέρχ. πρός 
τινα, to one, i.e. into his house, visit, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. i. 
23; Acts x. 8; xi. 3; xvi. 40 GL TTrWH; xxviii. 8; 
Rey. iii. 20; to an assembly of persons, Acts xvii. 2. 
Moreover the following deserve notice: a. the phrase 
εἰσέρχεσθαι καὶ ἐξέρχεσθαι, to go in and out, (the Hebr. 
ANS) NID, or reversed Nj} NNY, usually denotes one’s 
whole mode of living and acting, Deut. xxviii. 6; 1 S. 
xxix. 6, ete.; ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 184 sq.), is used 
of familiar intercourse with one: ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ ᾧ εἰσῆλθε 
x. ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ὁ κύριος, equiv. to εἰσῆλθε ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς k. 
ἐξῆλθε ἀφ᾽ ἡμ. Acts i. 21, (Eur. Phoen. 536 ἐς οἴκους εἰσῆλθε 
x. ἐξηλθ᾽ [W. 624 sq. (580); but ef. B. 390 (334)]); fig- 
uratively, of moral pursuits unimpeded by difficulties, 
Jn. x. 9. Ὅ. εἰσέρχ. εἰς is joined with nouns designat- 
ing not a place, but what occurs in a place: εἰς τοὺς 
γάμους, Mt. xxv. 10; εἰς τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου, 21, 28. c. 
εἰσελθεῖν εἴς τινα is used of demons or of Satan taking 
possession of the body of a person: Mk. ix. 25; Lk. viii. 
30; xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27. ἃ. of things: —as of food, that 
enters into the eater’s mouth, Mt. xv. 11; Acts xi. 8; 
fizuratively, hope is called ἄγκυρα εἰσερχομένη εἰς τὸ ἐσώ- 
τερον τοῦ καταπετάσματος, i.e. we firmly rely on the hope 
that we shall be received into heaven, 160. vi. 19; cries 
of complaint are said εἰσέρχ. εἰς τὰ ὦτά τινος, i. 6. to be 
heard, Jas. v. 4; of forces and influences: πνεῦμα ζωῆς 
εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (Tr om. WH br. ἐν; Ree. ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς 
[B.338 (291)]), a pregnant construction, the breath of life 
entered into and remained in them, Rev. xi. 11 [W. § 50, 
4; B. 329 (283)]. 2. Metaph. used, a. of entrance 
into any condition, state of things, society, employment : 
εἰς τ. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43, 45; εἰς 
τ. βασιλ. τῶν οὐρανῶν or τοῦ θεοῦ (see βασιλεία, 3 p. 97>): 
τοὺς εἰσερχομένους, that are trying to enter, or rather, 
that have taken the road to enter, are (engaged in) en- 
tering, Mt. xxiii. 15 (14); Lk. xi. 52; used absol. of 
those who come into (i.e. become members of) the 
Christian church, Ro. xi. 25, (hence in 1 Co. v. 12 sq. of 
ἔσω and οἱ ἔξω are distinguished) ; eis τ. κατάπαυσιν, Heb. 
iii. 11,18; iv. 1,3, 5sq.10sq.; εἰς τὴν δόξαν, Lk. xxiv. 26; 
εἰς πειρασμόν, to come (i. 6. fall) intotemptation, Mt. xxvi. 
41; Mk. xiv. 88 [Ὁ WH ἔλθητε]; Lk. xxii. 40, 46; εἰς 
τὸν Korrov τινός (see eis, B. I. 3), Jn. iv. 38. εἰσέρχεσθ. 
εἰς τ. κόσμον, to enter the world [ef. W. 187, is α. i. q- 
to arise, come into existence, begin to be [i. 6. among men]: 
used thus of sin and death, Ro. v. 12; of death, Sap. ii. 
24; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3, 4; of idols, Sap. xiv. 14. 8B. 
of men, to come into life: whether by birth, Antonin. 6, 
56; or by divine creation, Philo, opif. mund. 8 25. y. 
to come before the public: 2JIn.7 [Ree.]; to come*to men, 
of Christ, Jn. xviii. 37; εἰσερχόμ. εἰς τ. κόσμον, when he 
cometh into the world, i.e. when he was on the point of 
entering it, viz. at his incarnation, Heb. x. ὅ. b. of 
thoughts coming into the mind: εἰσῆλθε διαλογισμὸς ἐν 
αὐτοῖς, a pregnant construction, ‘here came in and estab- 
lished itself within [al. take ἐν outwardly: among (cf. 


188 


€ Ira 


dcadoy. fin.) ] them, Lk. ix. 46 [ef. W. 413 (385)]. The 
Grks. fr. Ilom. down use εἰσέρχεσθαί τινα of thoughts and 
feelings, as φόβος, μένος, πόθος, etc. [cf. W. 427 (398). 
Comp. ἐπ-, παρ-, συν- εἰσέρχομαι.) 

εἰσ-καλέομαι, -οὔμαι, (mid. of εἰσκαλέω) : 1 aor. ptep. 
εἰσκαλεσάμενος ; to call in unto one’s self, to invite in to 
one’s house: τινά, Acts x. 23. [Polyb., al.]* 

εἴσ-οδος, -ov, ἡ, (ὁδός), [fr. Ilom. on], an entrance, i. e. 
both the place or way leading into a place (as. a gate), and 
the act of entering ; only in the latter sense in the N. T. 
With gen. of place, τῶν ἁγίων, entrance into the holy place, 
i.e. reception into heaven, Heb. x. 19 [but in 20 appar- 
ently called ὁ δός]; εἰς τ. βασιλείαν τοῦ κυρίου, 2 Pet. 1. 
11; of the act of coming forward to administer an oflice, 
Acts xiii. 24; with πρός τινα added, 1 Th. i. 9; ii. 1." 

εἰσ-πηδάω, -@: 1 aor. εἰσεπήδησα; to spring in: εἰς τὸν 
ὄχλον, Acts xiv. 14 Ree. (see ἐκπηδάω) ; to rush in impet- 
uously, Acts xvi. 29. (Xen., Dem., al.; Sept. Am. v.19.) * 

εἰσ-πορεύομαι (pass. of εἰσπορεύω to lead into, Eur. El. 
1285); impf. εἰσεπορευόμην (Mk. vi. 56); to go into, 
enter ; 1. prop. a. of persons: foll. by εἰς with ace. 
of place, Mk. i. 21; vi. 56; xi.2; Acts iii. 2; ὅπου, Mk. 
v. 40; οὗ, Lk. xxii. 10 [R G, ef. B. 71 (62); W.§54, 7); 
without specification of place where that is evident from 
the context, Lk. viii. 16; xi. 33; xix. 80; κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους, 
to enter house after house [A. V. every house, see κατά, 
Il. 3 a. a.], Acts viii. 3; πρός twa, to visit one at his 
dwelling, Acts xxviii. 30; εἰσπορεύεσθαι x. ἐκπορεύεσθαι 
μετά τινος, to associate with one, Acts ix. 28 (ἐνώπιόν Twos, 
Tob. v. 18; see εἰσέρχομαι, 1 a.). b. when used of 
things it isi. q. to be carried into or put into: so of 
food, which is put into the mouth, Mk. vii. 15, 18, [19]; 
Mt. xv. 17, (see εἰσέρχομαι, 1 d.). 2. metaph.: | εἰς 
τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. xviii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; see 
βασιλεία, 3 p. 97%]; of affections entering the soul, Mk. 
iv. 19; see εἰσέρχομαι, 2b. (Of the earlier Grk. writ. 
Xen. alone uses this verb, Cyr. 2, 3, 21; Sept. often 
for §)3.) * 

elo-tpéxw: 2 aor. εἰσέδραμον ; to run in: Acts xi. 14. 
[Thue., Xen., al.] * 

elo-bépw; 1 aor. εἰσήνεγκα ; 2 aor. εἰσήνεγκον ; [pres. 
pass. εἰσφέρομαι ; fr. Hom. down]; to bring into, in or to; 
a. ri, foll. by eis with ace. of place, 1 Tim. vi. 7; pass. 
Heb. xiii. 11; τινά se. εἰς τ. οἰκίαν, Lk. vy. 18 sq.3 [τινὰ 
ἐπὶ τ. συναγωγάς ete. Lk. xii. 11 T Tr txt. WH]; τὶ εἰς 
τὰς ἀκοάς τινος, i.e. to tell one a thing, Acts xvii. 20 
(φέρειν τι εἰς τὰ ὦτά τινος, Soph. Aj. 149). Ὁ. to lead 


into: τινὰ εἰς πειρασμόν, Mt. vi. 13; Lk. xi. 4. [Comp.: 


παρ-εἰσφέρω.] * 

εἶτα, adv. of time, then; next; after that: Mk. viii. 25 ; 
Lk. viii. 12; Jn. xiii. δ; xix. 27; xx. 27; Jas.i. 15; with 
the addition of a gen. absol. to define it more precisely 
Mk. iv. 17; asin classic Grk., it stands in enumerations, 
to mark a sequence depending either on temporal 
succession, as Mk. iv. 28 (see εἶτεν) ; 1 Co. xv. 5-7 (εἶτα 
ΓΤ ἔπειτα. so in mrg. Tr WH]... ἔπειτα... ἔπειτα... - 
εἶτα [T ἔπειτα, so in mrg. L Tr WH]); 1 Co. xv. 24 
(ἔπειτα. «. εἶτα) ; 1 Tim. ii. 13; or on the nature of the 


εἴτε 


things enumerated, 1 Co. xii. 28 (πρῶτον... . δεύτερον 

..Tpitrov...émera... εἶτα for which L T Tr WH 
ἔπειτα); [1 Tim. iii. 10]; in arguments it serves to add 
a new reason, furthermore (Germ. sodann) : Heb. xii. 9.* 

etre, see ei, III. 15. 

εἶτεν a very rare [Ionic] form for εἶτα (q. v.) : Mk. iv. 
28 TWH. [Cf£. Kuenen et Cobet, Nov. Test. ete. praef. 
p. xxxiii.; Zob. Phryn. p. 124, also Pathol. Gr. Element. 
ii. 155; Steph. Thesaur. s. v. and 8. v. émecrev.]* 

εἴωθα, see ἔθω. 

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the gen- 
itive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as 
separation from, something with which there has been 
close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν 
in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. 
W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used 

I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from 
which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, 
from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, 
Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; 
ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after 
verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, free- 
ing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας 
eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the 
body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here 
L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the 
body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258) ; W. 346 (324); Mey. 
ed. Weiss ad loc.]; ἐκ τῶν μνημείων, Mt. viii. 28; xxvii. 
533; ἐκπορεύεσθαι, Mt. xv. 11, 18 sq.; καταβαίνειν ἐκ 
τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Mt. xxviii. 2; Jn. i. 32; iii. 13; vi. 33; ἐξ- 
ἄγειν, Acts xii. 17; φεύγειν, Acts xxvii. 30; καλεῖν, Mt. ii. 
15; metaph. ἐκ τοῦ σκότους εἰς τὸ φῶς, 1 Pet. ii. 9; ἐκβάλ- 
Rew τὸ κάρφος ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ, Mt. vii. [4 (R ἃ ἀπό)], 5; 
Lk. vi. 42 (opp. to ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ) ; τὶ ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ. Mt. 
xii. 35 [but see under II. 9 below] ; xiii. 53 ; τὸ δαιμόνιον 
ἔκ τινος, out of the body of one, Mk. vii. 26; ἀποκυλίειν 
τὸν λίθον ἐκ [L Tr txt. ἀπό; οἵ. W. 364 (342) note] τῆς 
θύρας, Mk. xvi.3; αἴρειν, Jn. xx. 1 sq.; κινέω, Rev. vi. 14; 
σώζειν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, Jude 5; διασώζειν ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης, 
Acts xxviii. 4. Metaph., ἐκ τῆς χειρός τινος, out of the 
power of one [ef. B. 182 (158)]: after ἐξέρχεσθαι, Jn. x. 
39; after ἀπάγειν, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; after ἁρπάζειν, Jn. 
x. 28 sq.; after ἐξαιρεῖσθαι, Acts xii. 11; after ῥύεσθαι, 
Lk. i. 74; after σωτηρία, Lk. i. 71. after πίνειν, of the 
thing out of which one drinks [differently in II. 9 below]: 
ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23; 1 Co. xi. 28; ἐκ 
πέτρας, 1 Co. x. 4 ; ἐκ τοῦ φρέατος. Jn. iv. 12; after ἐσθίειν, 
of the place whence the food is derived, ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, 1 Co. 
ix. 13 [but T Tr WH read ra éxxrd.]. οὗ the place forth 
from which one does something : διδάσκειν ἐκ τοῦ πλοίου, 
Lk. ν. 3 [here Tdf. ἐν ete.]. It is joined also to nouns 
designating not a place, but what is done in a place: 
ἐγείρεσθαι ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου. Jn. xiii. 4; ἀναλύειν ἐκ τῶν 
γάμων, Lk. xii. 36. 2. from the midst (of a group, 
number, company, community) of many; a. after 
verbs of going, leading, choosing, removing, 
etc. a. before collective nouns, as ἐξολεθρεύω ἐκ τοῦ 
λαοῦ. Acts iii. 23; προβιβάζω or συμβιβάζω ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, 


189 


᾽ 
εκ 


Acts xix. 88; ἐκλέγειν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. xv. 19. ἐκ 
μέσου τινῶν ἀφορίζειν, Mt. xiii.49; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Acts xvii. 
33; ἁρπάζειν, Acts xxiii. 10; ἐξαίρειν, 1 Co. ν. 13; ἐκ 
πάσης φυλῆς κ γλώσσης ἀγοράζειν, Rev. ν. 9; ἐκ παντὸς 
γένους συνάγειν, Mt. xiii. 47. β. before plurals: ἀνιστάναι 
τινὰ ἔκ τινων, Acts iii. 22; ἐκ νεκρῶν, Acts xvii. 31; ἀνί- 
σταταί τις ἐκ νεκρῶν, Acts x. 41; xvii. 3; ἐγείρειν τινὰ ἐκ 
νεκρῶν, Jn. xii. 1, 9,17; Acts iii. 15; iv. 10; xiii. 30; 
Heb. xi. 19, ete.; ἡ ἀνάστασις ἐκ νεκρῶν, Lk. xx. 35; 1 Pet. 
i. 3; ἀνάγειν τινὰ ἐκ νεκρῶν, Ro. x. 7; ἐκλέγειν, Acts i. 24; 
xv. 22; καλεῖν, Ro. ix. 24; ἐγένετο ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν ete. Jn. 
iii. 25 [but ef. IL. 1 b.; W. 368 (345)]. Ῥ. before words 
signifying quantity: after eis, as Mt. x. 29; xxvi. 21; 
Lk. xvii. 15, and often; πολλοί, Jn. xi. 19, 45, ete.; of 
πλείους (πλείονες), 1 Co. xv. 6; οὐδείς, Jn. vii. 19; xvi. 
5, and elsewhere; χιλιάδες ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς, Rev. vii. 4; 
after the indef. τὶς, Lk. xi. 15; xii. 13; Jn. vi. 64; vii. 
48; τὶς γυνὴ ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, Lk. xi. 27; with τινές to be 
added mentally [ef. W. 203(191) ; B. 158 (138)]: Jn. ix. 
40 [(?) better, vii. 40]; xvi. 17; Rev. xi. 9, (1 Esdr. v. 
45 (44)); τινάς : Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. χὶ. 49; xxi.16; 2Jn. 
4; Rev. ii. 10; cf. Fritzsche, Conjectanea in N. T. p. 36 
note; after the interrog. ris, who? Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xi. 
5, ete.; τίς πατήρ, Lk. xi. 11 [LS Tr WH]; preceded 
by a generic noun: ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τῶν ete. Jn. iii. 1. ὁ. 
εἶναι ἔκ τινων, to be of the number, company, fellowship, 
ete., of ; see εἰμί, V. 3 a. 3. from a local surface, 
as sometimes the Lat. ex for de; down from: καταβαίνειν 
ἐκ tov ὄρους (Hom. Il. 13, 17; Xen. an. 7, 4, 12; Sept. 
Ex. xix. 14; xxxii.1; Deut. ix. 15; x. 5; Josh. ii. 23), 
Mt. xvii. 9 (for the more com. ἀπὸ τοῦ dp. of Rec. and the 
parallel pass. Mk. ix. 9 [here L WH txt. Tr mre. ἐκ]: 
Lk. ix.37; [ef. Mt. viii. 1]); θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπόλ- 
Aura (unless we prefer to regard ἐκ as prompted here 
by the conception of the hair as fixed in the skin), 
LK. xxi. 18 ; Acts xxvii. 34 [here L T Tr WH ἀπό; cf. 
W. 364 (342) note]; ἐκπίπτειν ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν, of the chains 
with which the hands had been bound, Acts xii: 7; 
κρέμασθαι ἔκ twos, Acts xxviii. 4, (1 Mace. i. 61; 2 Mace. 
vi. 10; so the Grks. fr. Hom. down) ; φαγεῖν ἐκ τοῦ 
θυσιαστηρίου, the things laid upon the altar, Heb. xiii. 
10. Akin to this is ἐξελθεῖν ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ, from an abode 
with God (for the more usual ἀπὸ τ. θεοῦ), Jn. viii. 42. 
4. of the direction whence; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Lat. a der- 
tra, lit. from i.e. (Germ. zu) on the right, see δεξιός ; so 
ἐκ δεξιᾶς, ἐξ ἀριστερᾶς. sc. χώρας [or χειρός which is 
sometimes expressed ; W. 592 οἵ. 591 ; B. 82 (73}7, (also 
in Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 15); ἐξ ἐναντίας, over 
against, Mk. xv. 39 (Hdt. 8, 6; Sir. xxxvii. 9; 1 Mace. 
iv. 34; Sap. iv. 20); metaph. [W. 8 51, 1 d.] ὁ ἐξ ἐναν- 
tias [A. V. he that is of the contrary part], our opponent, 
adversary, Tit. ii. 8; ἐκ ῥιζῶν, from the roots, i. 6. utterly, 
Mk. xi. 20 (Job xxviii. 9; xxxi. 12). 5. of the con- 
dition or state out of which one comes or is brought : 
σώζειν ἐκ θανάτου, Heb. v. 7; Jas. v. 20; ἔρχεσθαι ἐκ 
{Lehm. ἀπὸ] θλίψεως, Rev. vii. 14; μεταβαίνειν ἐκ τοῦ 
θανάτου εἰς τ. ζωήν, Jn. ν. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14; ἐγερθῆναι ἐξ 
ὕπνου, Ro. xiii. 11 [ef. W. 366 (344) note]; ζῶντε: ἐκ 


ἐκ 190 ἐκ 


νεκρῶν, alive from being dead (i. 6. who had been dead 
and were alive again), Ro. vi. 13; ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν i. 6. of 
those that had been νεκροί, Ro. xi. 15, (ἐλεύθερος ἐκ δούλου 
kal πλούσιος ἐκ πτωχοῦ γεγονώς, Dem. p. 270 fin.; ἐκ 
πλουσίου πένητα γενέσθαι καὶ ἐκ βασιλέως ἰδιώτην φανῆναι, 
Xen. an. 7, 7, 28; γίγνομαι τυφλὸς ἐκ δεδορκότος, Soph. 
O.T. 454; ἔλαφον ἐξ ἀνδρὸς γενέσθαι, Palaeph. 3, 2; 
add, Lys. adv. Ergocl. init.; Tac. ann. 1, 74 ex pauperi- 
bus d'vites, ex contemtis metuendi). Also of the state 
out of the midst of which one does something : ἐκ πολλῆς 
θλίψεως γράφειν, 2 Co. ii. 4. 6. of any kind of sep- 
aration or dissolution of connection witha thing 
or person [ef. B. 157 (138)]: ἀναπαύεσθαι ἐκ (released 
from) τῶν κόπων, Rey. xiv. 13; ἀνανήφειν ἐκ (set free 
from) τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος, 2 Tim. ii. 26; μετανοῶν ἐκ 
ete. Rey. ii. 21 sq.; ix. 30 sq.; xvi. 11; ἐπιστρέφειν [LT 
Tr WH ὑποστρ.] ἐκ (11, ἀπό], by severing their connec- 
tion with) τῆς ἐντολῆς, 2 Pet. 11. 21; τηρεῖν twa ἐκ ete. to 
keep one at a distance from ete. [ef. B. 327 (281)], Jn. 
xvii. 15; Rev. iii. 10; also διατηρεῖν, Acts xv. 29; νικᾶν ἔκ 
twos, by conquest to free one’s self from the power of one 
[ef. B. 147 (128); W. 367 (844)], Rev. xv. 2; ὑψοῦσθαι ἐκ 
τῆς γῆς, to be so lifted up as to dissolve present relations 
to the earth [‘ taken out of the sphere of earthly action’ 
Westcott], Jn. xii. 32; ἐλεύθερος ἐκ πάντων (elsewhere 
always ἀπό twos), 1 Co. ix. 19. 7. Hebraistically : 
ἐκδικεῖν τὸ αἷμά τινος ἐκ χειρός τινος (WD DA Op), 2 K. 
ix. 7), to avenge the blood (murder) of one at the hand 
of (on) the slayer, Rev. xix. 2[B. 182 (158)]; κρίνειν τὸ 
κρίμα τινὸς ἔκ τινος, to judge one’s judgment on one, 
vindicate by venzcance on [cf. B. u. 5.7, Rev. xviii. 20 
(ef. Sept. Ps. exviii. (exix.) 84). 

II. of the ΟΠΙΟΙΝ, SourcE, CavsE; 1. of gen- 
eration, birth, race, lineage, nativity; a. after 
verbs of begetting, being born, ete.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχειν 
ἔκ τινος, Mt. 1. 18 οἵ. 20; κοίτην ἔχειν ἔκ τ. Ro. ix. 10; γεν- 
vay τινα ἐκ with gen. of the woman, Mt. i. 8, 5 sq. 16; 
γίνεσθαι ἐκ γυναικός, to be born of a woman, Gal. iv. 4 
οἵ. 22 sq.3 γεννᾶσθαι ἐξ αἱμάτων, ἐκ θελήματος σαρκός, Jn. 
1. 18: ἐκ τῆς σαρκός, Jn. iii. 6; ἐκ πορνείας, Jn. viii. 41 ; 
ἐγείρειν τινὶ τέκνα ἐκ, Mt. 11]. 9; Lk. 111. 8; (τὶς) ἐκ καρποῦ 
τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, Acts ii. 80 (Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 11); ἡ 
In a supernatural 
sense: τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ sc. ὄν, from the divine nature 
[ef. W. 193 (182)], 1 Co. ii. 12 ef. Rev. ii. 11; men are 
said γεννᾶσθαι ἐκ πνεύματος, Jn. iii. 5 sq- 83 γεγεννημένοι 
εἶναι ἐκ θεοῦ (see γεννάω, 2 d.), and to the same purport 
εἶναι ἐκ θεοῦ, 1 Jn. iv. 4, 63 ν. 19, (see εἰμί, V. 3 ἃ. [and 
cf. 7 below]). Ὁ. εἶναι, γενέσθαι, ἔρχεσθαι, etc., ἐκ with 
the name of the city, race, people, tribe, family, ete., to 
spring or originate from, come from: ἐκ Ναζαρὲτ εἶναι, Jn. 
1.46 (47); ἐκ πόλεως, i. 44 (45) ; ἐξ ὧν, se. πατέρων [?], Ro. 
ix. 5; ἐξ οἴκου τινός, Lk. i. 27; ii. 4: ἐκ γένους. Phil. iii. 
5; Actsiv. 6; “ESpatos ἐξ “Εβραίων, Phil. iii. 5; ἐκ φυλῆς, 
Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. xi.1; ἐξ Ἰούδα, Heb. vii. 
14; ἐκ σπέρματός twos, Jn. vii. 42; Ro.i. 3; xi.1; with- 
out a verb: ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί, sinners of Gentile birth, 
Gal. ii.15; of the country to which any one belongs: εἶναι 


᾽ πο τος 
ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, Ro. ii. 27. 


ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρώδου, Lk. xxiii. 7; ἐξ ἐπαρχίας, Acts 
xxiii. 34; ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς, In. iii. 31. 2. of any oth- 
er kind of origin: καπνὸς ἐκ τῆς δόξης τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. 
xv. 8; ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἐστί, comes from the Jews, Jn. 
iv. 22; εἶναι ἔκ τινος, to proceed from any one as the au- 
thor, Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17, 22; Ro. ii. 29; 2Co. iv. 7; 1 
Jn. ii. 16, 21, ete.; with ἐστίν to be mentally supplied: Ro. 
xi. 36; 1 Co. viii. 6, (see εἰς, B. II. 3c. a.); 1 Co. xi. 12; 
2 Co. iii.5; v.18; Gal. ν. 8; ἔργα ἐκ τοῦ πατρός μου, works 
of which my father is the author, i. e. which I, endued 
with my father’s power, have wrought, Jn. x. 32; οἶκο- 
δομὴ ἐκ θεοῦ. whose author is God, 2 Co. v. 1; χάρισμα, 1 
Co. vil. 7; δεδομένον ἐκ τοῦ πατρός, Jn. vi. 65; add, Jn. 
xviii. 3; 1 Co. vii. 7. ἡ ἐκ θεοῦ δικαιοσύνη. that comes 
from God, i.e. is adjudged by him, Phil. iii. 9; ἡ ἐξ ὑμῶν 
ἐν ἡμῖν [WII txt. ἡμ. ἐν dp. | ἀγάπη. love proceeding from 
you and taking up its abode in us, i. e. your love the in- 
fluence of which we feel [W. 193 (181 sq.); B. 157 
(137) ], 2 Co. viii. 7; ὁ ἐξ ὑμῶν Gros, your zeal, 2 Co. ix. 
2[RG; cf. W.u.s.note; B. u. 5.7; βλασφημία ἔκ τινος, 
calumny from i. 6. disseminated by, Rev. ii. 9 [not Ree. }; 
εἶναι ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, see εἰμί, V. 3 c.; with the 
suggested idea of a nature and disposition derived from 
one’s origin: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτυυ, is not of 
earthly origin nor of earthly nature, Jn. xviii. 36; ἐκ τῆς 
γῆς ἐστιν, is of an earthly nature, Jn. ili. 31; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 
λαλεῖν, to speak as an earthly origin prompts, ibid. ; hu- 
man virtues are said fo be from God, as having their 
prototype in God and being wrought in the soul by his 
power, ἡ ἀγάπη ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ eorw,1Jn.iv.7. 3. of the 
material out of which a thing is made, ete.: ἡ γυνὴ ἐκ 
tov ἀνδρός, from “one of his ribs,” 1 Co. xi. 12; στέφα- 
νον ἐξ ἀκανθῶν, Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2; add, Jn. ii. 15; 
ix. 6; Ro. ix. 21; 1 Co. xv. 47; Rev. xviii. 12; xxi. 21. 
Akin is 4. its use to note the price, because the 
money is, as it were, changed into that which is bought, 
(the simple gen. of price is more common, cf. W. 206 
(194); [B. § 132,13]): ἀγοράζειν τι ἔκ τινος, Mt. xxvii. 7, 
(Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] 24); κτᾶσθαι ἐκ, Acts i. 18, (ὠνεῖ- 
σθαι ἐκ, Palaeph. 46, 3 sq.); συμφωνεῖν ἐκ Σηναρίου (be- 
cause the agreement comes from the promised denary [cf. 
W.368 (345); B.u.s.]), Mt. xx. 2. Cognate to this is the 
phrase ποιεῖν ἑαυτῷ φίλους ἐκ τοῦ pauwva, Lk. xvi.9. 5. 
esp. after neut. and pass. verbs, ἐκ is used of the cause 
(whether thing or person) by which the act expressed 
by the accompanying verb is aided, sustained, ef- 
feeted: ὠφελεῖσθαι ἔκ τινος, Mt. xv. 5; Mk. vii. 11; 
ζημιοῦσθαι. 2 Co. vii. 9; λυπεῖσθαι, 2 Co. ii. 2; esp. in the 
Apocalypse: ἀδικεῖσθαι, Rev. 11. 113 ἀποθανεῖν, viii. 11; 
[dmoxreiverOar], ix. 18; φωτίζεσθαι. xviii. 1; σκοτίζεσθαι 
[LT WH oxorotada],ix. 2; πυροῦσθαι, iil. 18; γεμίζεσθαι, 
xv. 8 (ef. Is. vi. 4); Jn. vi. 13; γέμειν, Mt. xxiii. 25 
(where L om. Tr br. ἐξ); πληροῦσθαι, Jn. xii. 3 [ Treg. 
marge. ἐπλήσθη: χορτάζεσθαι. Rev. xix. 21; πλουτεῖν, 
xviii. 3, 19; μεθύσκεσθαι. μεθύειν, xvii. 2, 6 [not Treg. 
mare.]; Gv ex, Ro. i. 17; 1 Cox ax. 14's Gals 5... 1: 
αὔξησιν ποιεῖσθαι. Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii. 19; τελειοῦσθαι, 
22; κεκοπιακώς, Jn. iv. 6, (Ael. v. h. 3, 23 ἐκ τοῦ 


“23 


Jas. ii. 


eke Ὶ 191 ἐκ 


πότου ἐκάθευδεν). Also after active verbs: γεμίζειν, Jn. vi. 
13; Rey. viii. 5; ποτίζειν, Rev. xiv. 8; [on ἐκ with the 
gen. after verbs of fulness, cf. B. 163 (142 sq.); W. 201 
(189) ]. 6. of that on which a thing depends, or 
from which it results: οὐκ ἔστιν ἡ ζωὴ ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόν- 
των, does not depend upon possessions, i. e. possessions 
cannot secure life, Lk. xii. 15; εὐπορία ἡμῶν ἐστι ἐκ τῆς 
ἐργασίας ταύτης, Acts xix. 25; τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, as far as de- 
pends on you, Ro. xii. 18; in the Pauline phrases δίκαιος, 
δικαιοσύνη, δικαιοῦν ἐκ πίστεως. ἐξ ἔργων, see [the several 
words, esp. ] p- 150; ἐξ (as the result of, in consequence of) 
ἔργων λαβεῖν τὸ πνεῦμα, Gal. 111. 2,5; ἐξ ἀναστάσεως λαβεῖν 
τοὺς νεκρούς. Heb. xi. 35; ἐσταυρώθη ἐξ ἀσθενείας. 2 Co. 
xiii.4; add, Ro. xi.6; Gal. iii. 18, 21 sq.; Eph. ii. 8 sq. 
7. of the power on which any one depends, by which 
he is prompted and governed, whose character he 
reflects: ἐκ θεοῦ (equiv. to θεόπνευστονῚ) λαλεῖν, 2 Co. ii. 17; 
in the Johannean expressions, εἶναι ἐκ θεοῦ. Jn. viii. 47 
(in a different sense above, II. 1 a.) ; ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου. ἐκ 
τοῦ πονηροῦ. ἐκ TOU κόσμου, See εἰμί, V. 3 d.; ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 
εἶναι, to be led by a desire to know the truth, be a lover 
of the truth, Jn. xviii. 37; 1 ὅπ. 111. 19; of ἐκ νόμου, the 
subjects of the law, Ro. iv. 14; οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας equiv. to 
οἱ ἐριθευόμενοι (cf. ἐριθεία], Ro. ii. 8; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως equiv. 
to ὁ πιστεύων, Ro. iii. 26; ἴγ. 16. εἶναι ἔκ τινος also means 
to be bound to one, connected with him; to have relations 
with him; see εἰμί, V. 3d.; hence the periphrasis of ἐκ 
περιτομῆς, the circumcised: Acts xi. 2; Ro. iv. 12; Gal. 
ii. 12; of ὄντες ἐκ περιτομῆς, Col. iv. 11; οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 
πιστοί, Jewish Christians, Acts x. 45. 8. of the 
cause for which: ἐκ τοῦ πόνου, for pain, Rev. xvi. 10; 
of the reason for (because of) which: Rev. viii. 13; xvi. 
11; ἐκ τούτου, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; cf. Meyer on these 
pass. [who urges that ἐκ τούτου used of time denotes 
“the point of departure of a temporal series” (W. 367 
(344)): from this time on, thenceforth. This argument 
seems not to be decisive in the second example (Jn. xix. 
12), for there the verb is in the imperfect. On the 
use of the phrase in classic Grk. see L. and S.s. v. ἐκ, I. 
1; Kruger §68,17, 7. Cf. our Eng. upon this, hereupon, 
in which the temporal sense and the causal often seem 
to blend. See below, IV. 1 fin.]. 9. of the supply 
out of (from) which a thing is taken, given, received, 
eaten, drunk, ete. [cf. W. § 30, 7 and 8; B. 159 (139) 
sqq-]: λαμβάνειν ἐκ, Jn. i. 16; xvi. 14 sq.; διδόναι, διαδι- 
δόναι, Mt. xxv. 8; Jn. vi. 11; 1 Jn.iv. 13; ἐσθίειν, 1 Co. 
ix. 7; xi. 28; φαγεῖν, Jn. vi. 26, 50sq.; Rev. ii. 7; pere- 
χειν, 1 Co. x. 17 (but see peréyw) ; πίνειν, Mt. xxvi. 29; 
Mk. xiv. 25; Jn. iv. 13 sq.; Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3, (differ- 
ently in I. 1 above) ; λαλεῖν ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων, Jn. viii. 445; ἐκ 
τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας, Mt. xii. 34; ἐκβάλλειν, ib. 
35 [this belongs here only in case θησαυρός is taken in the 
sense of treasure not treasury (the contents as distin- 
guished from the re pository); cf. I. 1 above, and s. v. 
θησαυρός]; βάλλειν ἐκ (a part), Mk. xii. 44; Lk. xxi. 4. 
10. of that from which any thing is obtained: συλ- 
λέγειν ἐξ ἀκανθῶν, τρυγᾶν ἐκ βάτου, Lk. vi. 44; θερίζειν 
ἐκ, Gal. vi. 8. 


11. of the whole of which anything | 


is a part: 1 Co. xii. 15 sq. [ef. W. 368 (345)]. 12 
of the source; a. univ.: ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλάλησα, Jn. 
ΧΗ. 49, (οὐδὲν ἐκ σαυτῆς λέγεις, Soph. El. 344). b. of 
the source of conduct, as to be found in the state of 
the soul, its feelings, virtues, vices, etc.: ἐκ καρδίας, 
Ro. vi. 17; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 23, (1 Mace. 
vili. 27; ἐκ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀσπάζεσθαι, Xen. oec. 10, 4); ἐκ 
καθαρᾶς καρδίας, 1 Tim. i. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 22; 1 Pet. i. 22 
[L T Tr WH om. καθ.]; ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας... ψυχῆς 
. . . διανοίας κτὰ. Mk. xii. 30 sqq. (Sap. viii. 21; 4 Mace. 
vii. 18); ἐκ πίστεως, Ro. xiv. 23; ἐξ εἰλικρινείας, 2 Co. ii. 
17; ἐξ ἐριθείας, Phil. i. 16 (17) [yet see ἐριθεία]. cc. of 
the source of knowledge: κατηχεῖσθαι ἐκ, Ro. ii. 18; 
ἀκούειν ἐκ, Jn. xii. 34; γινώσκειν, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44; 
1 Jn. iv. 6; ἐποπτεύειν, 1 Pet. ii. 12. δεικνύναι, Jas. ii. 
18; ὁρίζειν, to declare, prove to be, Ro. i. 4 [οἴ 5. v. 
ὁρίζω, 2 and Mey. ad loc. ]. 13. of that from which a 
rule of judging or acting is derived; after, accord- 
ing to, [ οἵ. W. 368 (345)]: κρίνειν ἐκ, Lk. xix. 22 [A. V. 
out of thine own mouth, ete.]; Rev. xx. 12 (Xen. Cyr. 
2, 2, 21 ἐκ τῶν ἔργων κρίνεσθαι) ; δικαιοῦν, καταδικάζειν, 
Mt. xii. 37; ὀνομάζειν ἐκ, Eph. iii. 15 (Hom. Il. 10, 68; 
Soph. O. T. 1036, ete.) ; ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, according to your 
ability, 2 Co. viii. 11. 

I. By Arrraction, common in classic Grk. (cf. W. 
§ 66,6; [B. 377 sq. (323)]), two prepositions coalesce 
as it were into one, so that ἐκ seems to be used for ἐν, 
thus ἄραι τὰ ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ concisely for ra ἐν τῇ 
οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἐξ αὐτῆς. Mt. xxiv. 17; ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 
δώσει for ὁ πατὴρ 6 ἐν οὐρανῷ δώσει ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Lk. xi. 
135 τὴν ἐκ Λαοδικείας ἐπιστολήν for τὴν εἰς Λαοδικ. γεγραμ- 
μένην καὶ ἐκ Λαοδικείας κομιστέαν, Col. iv. 16, (2 Mace. 
iii. 18). [To this constr. some would refer ἐπιγνοὺς ἐν 
ἑαυτῷ τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν. Mk. v. 30, resoly- 
ing τὴν ἐν αὐτῷ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν ἐξ αὐτοῦ; cf. Field, 
Otium Norvicense, pars iii. ad loc.] 

IV. of Tre [W. 367 (344); 1. of the (temporal) 
point from which; Lat. ez, inde a; from, from ... on, 
since: ἐκ χρόνων ἱκανῶν, Lk. viii. 27 [RG Trmrg.]; ἐκ 
γενετῆς, Jn. ix. 1 (Hom. Il. 24, 535; Od. 18, 6); ἐκ κοι- 
Nas μητρός (see κοιλία, 4) ; ἐκ νεότητος, Mt. xix. 20 [RG]; 
Mk. x. 20; Lk. xviii. 21; Acts xxvi. 4 (Hom. Il. 14, 86); 
ἐκ τοῦ αἰῶνος (see αἰών, 1 b.), Jn. ix. 32 (Ael. v. h. 6,13; 
12, 64 ἐξ αἰῶνος) ; ἐξ ἀρχῆς: Jn. vi. 64; xvi. 4; ἐκ γενεῶν 
ἀρχαίων, Acts xv. 21 ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτώ, Acts ix. 33; ἐκ ποὰ- 
λῶν ἐτῶν, Acts xxiv. 10; ἐξ αὐτῆς (sc. ὥρας), furthwith, 
instantly (see ἐξαυτῆς) ; ἐξ ἱκανοῦ [ (sc. χρόνου) ; but L T 
Tr WH here ἐξ ἱκανῶν χρόνων], of a long time, Lk. xxiii. ; 
8, (ἐκ πολλοῦ, Thue. 1, 68; 2, 88); with an adverb: ἐκ 
παιδιόθεν, Mk. ix. 21 L T Tr WH, (ἐκ πρωΐθεν, 1 Mace. 
x. 80), cf. W. § 65, 2; [B. 70 (62)]. Many interpreters 
translate ἐκ τούτου, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12, from this time, 
but cf. IL. 8 above. 2. of succession in time, a 
temporal series: ἐκ δευτέρου (as it were, proceeding 
From, beginning from the second), a second time (see 
δεύτερος) : ἐκ τρίτου. Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. ἐκ τρίτ.]; 
ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας (diem ex die, Cic. ad Att. 7, 26; Caes. 
b. g. 1, 16, 4; diem de die. Liv. 5, 48) from day to day, 


ἕκαστος 


day after day, 2 Pet. ii. 8, (Gen. xxxix. 10; Num. xxx. 
15; [2 Chr. xxiv. 11]; Sir. v. 7; Eur. Rhes. 437 (445) 
etc.; ἔτος ἐξ ἔτους, Lev. xxv. 50; ἐνιαυτὸν ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ, 
Deut. xv. 20). 

V. ApversiaL Purases (cf. W. § 51, 1 d.J, in which 
lies the idea 1. of direction whence: ἐξ ἐναν- 
τίας, cf. I. 4 above. 2. of source: ἐκ συμφώνου, by 
consent, by agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5; ἐξ ἀνάγκης of neces- 
sity, i. e. by compulsion, 2 Co. ix. 7; necessarily, Heb. 
vii. 12. 3. of the measure or standard: ἐκ pe- 
ρους, so that each is a part of the whole, proportion- 
ately, [R.V.mrg. each in his part], 1 Co. xii. 27, ef. 
Meyer ad loc.; in part, partly, 1 Co. xiii. 9 sqq.; ἐκ 
μέτρου i. q. μετρίως, by measure, moderately, sparingly, 
Jn. iii. 34; ἐξ ἰσότητος, by equality, in equal proportion, 
2 Co. viii. 13 (14) (ἐξ ἴσου, Hdt. 7, 135); ἐκ περισσοῦ, 
beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WH om. Tr. br.]. 

VI. In ComposiTIOoNn ἐκ denotes 1. egress: ἐκβαίνω, 
ἐξέρχομαι. 2. emission, removal, separation: ἐκβάλλω, 
ἐκπέμπω, ἐξαιρέω. 3. origin: ἔκγονος. 4. public- 
ity: ἐξαγγέλλω. 5. the unfolding, opening out, of 
something tied together or rolled up: éxreiva, ἐκπετάννυμι. 
6. is i. q. utterly, entirely, παντελῶς, [cf. Eng. out and 
out], denoting completion and perfection: ἐκπληρύω, 
ἐκτελέω. Cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 120 sq. 

ἕκαστος, -7, -ov, Sept. for wx, [fr. Hom. down], each, 
a. joined to a substantive: ἕκαστον δένδρον, 
Lk. vi. 44; ἑκάστῳ στρατιώτῃ, Jn. xix. 23; κατὰ μῆνα 
ἕκαστον, every month, Rev. xxii. 2 [not Ree.]; καθ᾽ 
ἑκάστην ἡμέραν, Leb. iii. 13; ef. W. 111 (106); B. § 127, 
30. preceded by εἷς, Lat. unusquisque, every one: with 
a substantive, Eph. iv. 16; Rev. xxii. 2 Ree. b. used 
substantively: Jn. vii. 53 [Rec.]; Acts iv. 35; Ro. ii. 
6; Gal. vi. 4, ete.; once plur. ἕκαστοι : Rev. vi. 11 Ree. 
With a partitive genitive added: ἡμῶν, Ro. xiv. 12; 
ὑμῶν, Lk. xiii. 15; 1 Co. 1. 12; Heb. vi. 11; αὐτῶν, Jn. 
vi. 7 [ἢ ΟἹ; τῶν σπερμάτων, 1 Co. xv. 38. εἷς ἕκαστος, 
every one (see εἷς, 4 b.): without a partit. gen., Acts xx. 
31; Col. iv. 6; with a partit. gen., Lk. iv. 40; Acts ii. 3; 
xvil. 27; 1 Co. xii. 18, ete. €xaoros, when it denotes 
individually, every one of many, is often added apposi- 
tively to nouns and pronouns and verbs in the plural 
number, (Matthiae ii. p. 764 sq.; [W. 516 (481); B. 
131 (114)]): ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος, Acts 11. 8; σκορ- 


every; 


πισθῆτε ἕκαστος, Jn. xvi. 32; ἐπορεύοντο mavres..., 
ἕκαστος ..., Lk. ii. 3; add, Acts iii. 26; 1 Pet. iv. 10; 
Rey. v. 8; xx. 13; likewise eis ἕκαστος, Acts ii. 6; xxi. 
26; ὑμεῖς oi καθ᾽ ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἀγαπάτω, 
you one by one, each one of you severally, Eph. v. 33. 
In imitation of the Hebr., ἕκαστος τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ 
ans? wes, Gen. xxvi. 31), Mt. xviii. 35; pera τοῦ πλη- 
σίον αὐτοῦ (YI-ON wR, Judg. vi. 29, ete.), Eph. iv. 25, 
ef. Heb. viii. 11 Ree. 

ἑκάστοτε, adv., at every time, always: 2 Pet. i. 15. 
(Hat., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.) * 

ἑκατόν, oi, ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], a hundred: Mt. 
xiii. 8 (sc. καρπούς) ; xviii. 12; Jn. xix. 39, ete. 

ἑκατοντεέτης [R (ὑ ΤΊ, -es, and éxarovraerns [L Tr WH], 


19 


2 ἐκβάλλω 


-és, (fr. ἑκατόν ἀπ ἔτος ; on the want of uniformity in ac- 
centuation among authors, copyists, and grammarians 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 406 sq.; W. §6,1b.; B. 29 (26); 
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. δεκέτης ; esp. 
Chandler §§ 703, 709; Géttling p. 323 sq.]), centenarian, 
a hundred years old: Ro.iv.19. (Pind. Pyth. 4, 502.) * 

ἑκατονταπλασίων, -ov, a hundredfold, a hundred times 
as much: Mt. xix. 29 [RG]; Mk. x. 30; Lk. viii. 8. (2 
S. xxiv. 3; Xen. oec. 2, 3.) * 

ἑκατοντάρχης, -ov, 6, (ἕκατον and apyw; on the termi- 
nations apyns and ἀρχὸς see the full exposition in W. 
61 (60); ef. B. 73 (64); Bornemann, Schol. ad Lue. p. 
151 sq.; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156 sq-]), 
a centurion: Mt. viii. [5 and 8 Tdf.],13 GL T Tr WI; 
[xxvii. 54 ΤΊ; Lk. vii. [2 (?)], 6 TWH; [xxiii. 47 T 
Tr WH]; Acts x. 1, 22; xxi.32 LT Tr WH; [xxii. 26 
LT WH]; xxiv. 23; xxvii. 1,6 L T Tr WH, 11 GLT 
Tr WH, 31, 43 L T Tr WH; gen. plur. T WH in Acts 
xxiii. 17, 23. (Aeschyl. ap. Athen. 1 p. 11 d.; Hat. 
7, 81; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.). See the foll. word.* 

ἑκατόνταρχος, -ου, 6, i. q. ἑκατοντάρχης, q- ν-: Mt. viii. 5, 
8 [in 5, 8, Tdf. -άρχης], 13 Rec.; xxvii. 54 [Tdf. -dpyns]; 
Lk. vii. 2, 6 [T WH -dpyns]; xxiii. 47 [T Tr WH -ἀρ- 
χης]; Acts xxi. 32 RG; xxii. 25, 26 [L T WH -apyns]; 
xxvii. 6 [RG, 11 Rec., 43 RG], also xxviii. 16 Kee.; 
gen. plur., Acts xxiii. 17 and 23 RGL Tr. (Xen. Cyr. 
5, 3,41; Plut., al.)* (Cf. Meisterhans p. 53 sq.]* 

ἐκ-βαίνω : 2 aor. ἐξέβην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to go out: 
Heb. xi. 15 LT Tr ΝῊ." 

é-BadAAw; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐξέβαλλον (Mk. vi. 13 
[Tr mrg. aor.]); fut. ἐκβαλῶ ; plpf. ἐκβεβλήκειν (without 
augm., Mk. xvi. 9; cf. W. § 12,9; B. 33 (29)); 2 aor. 
ἐξέβαλον; [Pass. and Mid. pres. ἐκβάλλομαι]:: 1 aor. 
pass. e&BAnOnv; fut. pass. ἐκβληθήσομαι:; [fr. Hom. 
down]; Sept. generally for w73, occasionally for ΝΥ, 
wn, yown; to cast out; to drive out; to send out; 
1. with the included notion of more or less vio 
lence; a. to drive out, (cast oul): a person, Mt. xxi. 
12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 15 (ἐκ); Lk. xx. 12, ete.; pass. 
Mt. viii. 12 [T WH (rejected) mrg. ἐξελεύσονται) ; δαιμό- 
va, Mt. vii. 22; viii. 16,31; ix.33; Mk.i. 34,39; Lk. 
xi. 20; xiii. 32, ete.; ἔκ τινος, Mk. vii. 26; ἀπό, Mk. xvi. 
9 [LWHTrtxt. παρά]; ἔν τινι, by, through [W. 889 
(364)], Mt. ix..34; xii. 24, 27 sq.; Mk. iii. 22; LK. xi. 15, 
19 sq.; τῷ ὀνόματί Twos, Mt. vii. 22; [Mk. ix. 38 R*G]; 
ἐπὶ τῷ dv. τινος, Lk. ix. 49 [WH Trmrg. ev; ἐν τῷ ov. Mk. 
ix. 38 R= L T Tr WH]; λόγῳ, Mt. viii. 16; τινὰ ἔξω 
τῆς πόλεως, Lk. iv. 29; Acts vil. 58. Ὄ. to cast out: 
τινά foll. by ἔξω, Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34 sq. ; xii. 31 (se. out 
of the world, i. e. be deprived of the power and influ- 
ence he exercises in the world); Lk. xiii. 28; ἔξω with 
gen., Mt. xxi. 39; Mk. xii.8; Lk. xx.15. athing: 
excrement from the belly into the sink, Mt. xv. 17; 
mid. ἐκβαλλόμενοι (i. 6. for themselves, that they might 
the more easily save the ship and thereby their lives) 
τὸν σῖτον eis τ. θάλασσαν, Acts xxvii. 38. c. to expel 
a person from a society: to banish from a family, Gal. 
iv. 30 (Gen. xxi. 10); ἐκ [Tdf. om. ἐκ] τῆς ἐκκλησίας, 3 


ἔκβασις 


Jn.10. ἅ. to compel one to depart: ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων, Acts 
xiii. 50; to bid one depart, in stern though not violent 
language, Mt. ix. 25; Mk. v.40; Acts ix. 40; xvi. 37 
(where distinguished fr. ἐξάγειν) ; to bid one go forth 
to do some business, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 38. e. so em- 
ployed that the rapid motion of the one going is trans- 
ferred to the one sending forth; to command or cause 
one to depart in haste: Mk. i. 43; Jas. ii. 25; τὰ πάντα 
(se. πρόβατα), to let them out of the fold so that they 
rush forth, [al. to thrust them forth by laying hold of 
them], Jn. x. 4. f. to draw out with force, tear out: 
τί. Mk. ix. 47. g. with the implication of force over- 
coming opposing force; to cause a thing to move straight 
on to its intended goal: τὴν κρίσιν εἰς νῖκος, Mt. xii. 20. 
h. to reject with contempt; to cast off or away: τὸ ὄνομά 
τινος ὡς πονηρόν, Lk. vi. 22, (Plat. Crito p. 46 b.; de rep. 
2 p. 377 ¢.; Soph. O. C. 636, 646; of actors driven from 
the stage, hissed and hooted off, Dem. p. 449, 19). 2. 
without the notion of violence; 8. to draw out, 
extract, one thing inserted in another: τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν 
τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ, Lk. vi. 42; ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ, ibid. and Mt. 
vii. 5; ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀφθ. 4 (where LT Tr WH ἐκ). Ὅ. to 
bring out of, to draw or bring forth: τὶ ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ, 
Mt. xii. 35; xiii. 52; money from a purse, Lk. x. 35. 
c. to except, to leave out, i. 6. not receive: τί, foll. by ἔξω 
[or ἔξωθεν], Rev. xi. 2 (leave out from the things to be 
measured, equiv. to μὴ αὐτὴν μετρήσῃς). ἃ. foll. by eis 
with ace. of place, to lead one forth or away somewhere 
with a force which he cannot resist: Mk. i. 12. [On the 
pleonastic phrase ἐκβ. ἔξω (or ἔξωθεν) ef. W. § 65, 2.] 

ἔκ-βασις, -ews, ἡ, (ἐκβαίνω) ; 1. an egress, way out, 
(Hom., et al.): applied fig. to the way of escape trom 
temptation into which one εἰσέρχεται or εἰσφέρεται (see 
these words), 1 Co. x. 13. 2. in a sense foreign to 
prof. auth., the issue [(cf. its objective sense e. g. Epict. 
diss. 2, 7, 9)] i. q. end: used of the end of life, Sap. ii. 
17; ἐκβ. τῆς ἀναστροφῆς τινων, in Heb. xiii. 7, is not 
merely the end of their physical life, but the manner in 
which they closed a well-spent life as exhibited by their 
spirit in dying; οἵ. Delitzsch ad loc.* 

ἐκ-βολή. -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐκβάλλω) ; a. a casting out. b. 
spec. the throwing overboard of goods and lading whereby 
sailors lighten a ship in a storm to keep her from sinking, 
(Aeschyl. sept. 769; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 1, 5 [p. 1110», 
9]; Leian. de mere. cond. 1): ποιεῖσθαι ἐκβολήν, Lat. 
jacturam facere, to throw the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii. 
18; with τῶν σκευῶν added, Sept. Jon. i. 5; τῶν φορτίων, 
Poll. 1, 99 p. 70 ed. Hemsterh.* 

ék-yapitw; Pass., [pres. exyapi¢ouac]; impf. ἐξεγαμι- 
ζύμην; to give away (ἐκ out of the house [ef. W. 102 
(97)]) i marriage: a daughter, 1 Co. vii. 38° RG, 
[ibid.” Rec.]; Mt. xxiv. 38 RGTrtxt. Pass. to marry, 
to be given in marriage, Mt. xxii. 30 RG [ef. Tdf.’s note 
ad loc.]; Lk. xvii. 27 RG; see γαμίζω. Not found 
elsewhere.* 

ἐκ-γαμίσκω, i. 4. ἐκγαμίζω. q. v.: Pass. [pres. éxya- 
μίσκομαι]; Lk. xx. 34 sq. RG; cf. yapioxw and Fritzsche 
on Mk. p. 529 sqq. Not found elsewhere.* 


193 


ἐκδικέω 


ἔκ-γονος, -ον, (ἐκγίνομαι), sprung from one, born, begotten. 
(Hom. and sqq-); commonly as a subst. 6, ἡ ἔκγονυς, οἱ 
ἔκγονοι, a son, daughter, offspring, children, descendants ; 
in Sept. com. in neut. plur. ἔκγονα and ra ἔκγονα, for 
178, Deut. vii. 13 [Alex.]; xxviii. 4, ete.; ONsNy, 
Is. xlviii. 19; lxi. 9; 13» Is. xlix. 15; also in Sir. xl. 15; 
xliv. 11, ete. In the N. T. once: 1 Tim. v. 4 τέκνα ἢ 
ἔκγονα, grandchildren, [(A. V. renders it by the obsol. 
nephews; ef. Eastwood and Wright, Bible Word-Book, 
or B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Nephew) ].* 

ἐκ-δαπανάω : [fut. éxdaravyow ; 1 fut. pass. ἐκδαπανα- 
θήσομαι; to exhaust by expending, to spend wholly, use 
up: τὰς προσόδους, Polyb. 25, 8,4. Pass. reflexively, to 
spend one’s self wholly: foll. by ὑπέρ twos, of one who con- 
sumes strength and life in laboring for others’ salvation, 
2 Co. xii. 15; cf. Kypke ad loc. ; [Soph. Lex. 8. v.].* 

ἐκ-δέχομαι ; impf. efedexounv; (ἐκ from some person 
or quarter) ; 1. to receive, accept, ([Hom.], Aeschyl., 
Hadt., sqq-). 2. to look for, expect, wait for, await: τί, 
Jn. ν. 8 RL; Heb. xi. 10; Jas. v.7; τινά, Acts xvii. 
16; 1 Co. xvi. 11; ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε wait for one 
another, 56. until each shall have received his food, 1 Co. 
xi. 33, cf. 21; foll. by ἕως etc. Heb. x. 13; [absol. 1 Pet. 
iii. 20 Ree., but see Tdf.’s note ad loc.]. Rarely with 
this meaning in prof. auth., as Soph. Phil. 123; Apollod. 
1,9, 27§ 8; ἕως ἂν γένηταί τι, Dion. Hal. 6,67. [Comp.: 
ἀπ-εκδέχομαι. Cf. δέχομαι, fin. ]* 

ἔκ-δηλος, -ov, (δῆλος), evident, clear, conspicuous: 2 Tim. 
iii. 9. (Hom. Il. 5, 2; Dem. p. 24, 10; Polyb.)* 

ἐκδημέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. ἐκδημῆσαι ; (ἔκδημος away from 
home) ; 1. to go abroad (Hat., Soph., Plat., Joseph., 
al.); hence univ. to emigrate, depart: ἐκ τοῦ σώματος, 
from the body as the earthly abode of the spirit, 2 Co. 
v. 8. 2. to be or live abroad: 2 Co. v. 9; ἀπὸ τοῦ 
κυρίου, abode with whom is promised us, 2 Co. v. 6; in 
these exx. opp. to ἐνδημῶ, q. v.* 

ék-SiSwpr: Mid., fut. ἐκδώσομαι; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. 
ἐξέδοτο, T WH ἐξέδετο (see ἀποδίδωμι) ; a com. word in 
Grk. auth. fr. Hom. 1]. 3,459 on; to give out of one’s 
house, power, hand, stores ; to give out, give up, give over; 
hence also to let out for hire, to farm out, Hdt. 1, 68; 
γεωργίαι δὲ ἐκδεδομέναι δούλοις, Plat. legg. 7 p. 806 d.; 
al. In the N. T., Mid. fo let out for one’s advantage: 
Mt. xxi. 33, 41 [Rec. ἐκδόσεται, cf. Tdf.’s note; B. 47 
(41)]; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xx. 9." 

ἐκ-δι-ηγέομαι, -οὔμαι ; dep. mid.; prop. to narrate in full 
or wholly; univ. to relate, tell, declare: τί, Acts xiii. 41 
(Hab. i. 5); xv. 3. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 23 p. 1484", 
4]; Joseph., [Philo], Galen, [al.]; Sept.) * 

ἐκδικέω, -@; fut. ἐκδικήσω ; 1 aor. ἐξεδίκησα ; (ἔκδικος. 
q- V-); Sept. for Dp3, 1pa, VAY; 
one’s right, do one justice, [A. V. avenge]: Lk. xviii. 5 
(1 Mace. vi. 22); τινὰ ἀπό twos, to protect, defend, one 
person from another, Lk. xviii. 3; ἑαυτόν, to avenge one’s 
self, Ro. xii. 19. Ὁ. τί, to avenge a thing (i. 6. to pun- 
ish a person for a thing): τὴν παρακοήν, 2 Co. x. 6; τὸ 
αἷμά τινος ἀπό or ἔκ τινος, to demand in punishment the 
blood of one from another, i. e. to exact of the murderer 


a. τινά, to vindicate 


εκὸικησις 


the penalty of his crime, [A. V. avenge one’s blood on 
or at the hand of]: Rev. vi. 10; xix. 2; see ἐκ, I. 7. 
(In Grk. auth. fr. [Apollod.], Diod. down.) * 

ἐκ-δίκησις, -ews, ἡ, (ἐκδικέω, q. V.), Sept. for 7/9) and 
ὉΡ2, TAPS, Daw (Ezek. xvi. 38; xxiii. 45) and pway; 
a revenging; vengeance, punishment: Ro. xii. 19 and 
Heb. x. 30 fr. Deut. xxxii. 35; 2 Co. vii. 11; Lk. xxi. 
22; ποιεῖν τὴν ἐκδίκησίν twos, to vindicate one from 
wrongs, accomplish the avenging of, Lk. xviii. 7 sq.; 
τινί, to avenge an injured person, Acts vii. 24 (Judg. xi. 
36); ἐκδίκησίς τινος, objec. gen., the punishment of one, 
1 Pet. ii. 14; διδόναι ἐκδίκησίν τινι, to inflict punishment 
‘on, [render vengeance to] one, 2 Th. i. 8; cf. [Sir. xii. 
6]; Ezek. xxv. 14. (Polyb. 3, 8, 10.) * 

ἔκδικος, -ov, (δίκη right, justice, penalty) ; 1. with- 
out law and justice (cf. Lat. exler), unjust: Aeschyl., 
Soph., Eur., Ael.n.an.16,5. 2. exacting penalty from 
(€x) one; an avenger, punisher: Ro. xiii. 4; περί τινος, 
1 Th. iv. 6; (Sap. xii. 12; Sir. xxx. 6; 4 Mace. xv. 26 
(29); [Plut. de garrul. § 14 p. 509 f.]; Hdian. 7, 4, 10 
[5 ed. Bekk.; al.]).* 

ἐκ-διώκω : fut. ἐκδιώξω ; 1 aor. ἐξεδίωξα; 1. to drive 
out, banish: τινά, Lk. xi. 49 [here WH Tr mrg. διώξουσιν ; 
some refer this to 2]; (Thue. 1, 24; Leian. Tim. 10; 
Sept. 1 Chr. viii. 13; Joel ii. 20, ete.). 2. to pursue 
i. q. to persecute, oppress with calamities: τινά, 1 Th. ii. 
15 [some refer this to 1]; (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 157; Sir. 
xxx. 19; Dem. 883, 27).* 

ἔκ-δοτος, -ov, (ἐκδίδωμι), given over, delivered up, (to 
enemies, or to the power, the will, of some one): λαμβά- 
νειν τινὰ ἔκδοτον, Acts ii. 23 (but λαβόντες is rejected by 
GLTTrWH); διδόναι or ποιεῖν τινα exd. Hdt. 3, 1; 
Dem. 648, 25; Joseph. antt. 6, 13,9; Palaeph. 41, 2; 
al.; Bel and the Dragon vs. 22; 
θανάτῳ, Ignat. ad Smyrn. 4, 2.* 

ἐκ-δοχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐκδέχομαι), the act or manner of receiv- 
ing from; hence in prof. auth. 1. reception. 2. 
succession. 3. [ἃ taking in a certain sense, i. 6.7 
interpretation. 4. once in the sacred writings, expec- 
tation, awaiting, [cf. ἐκδέχομαι, 2]: Heb. x. 27.* 

ἐκ-δύω: 1 aor. ἐξέδυσα; 1 aor. mid. ἐξεδυσάμην ; (δύων ; 
to take off: twa, to strip one of his garments, Mt. xxvii. 
28 [ΤΠ WH mrg. evdvc.]; Lk. x. 30; τινά τι (as in Grk. 
fr. Hom. down), [a thing from a person]: Mt. xxvii. 31; 
Mk. xy. 20; Mid. to take off from one’s self, to put off 
one’s raiment, (Xen. Ag. 1, 28; Hell. 3, 4,19); fig. to 
put off the body, the clothing of the soul, [A. V. be un- 
clothed]: 2 Co. ν. 4; the reading ἐκδυσάμενοι, adopted 
in vs. 3 by certain crities [e. g. Mill, Tdf. 7, Reiche, al.], 
is due to a correction by the copyists; see γυμνός, 1 ἃ. 
[Comp.: ἀπ-εκδύομαι. " 

ἐκεῖ, adv. of place, there; a. properly: Mt. ii. 13, 
15; v. 24, and freq. In LK. xiii. 28 ἐκεῖ is not used for 
ev ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ foll. by ὅταν (at that time... when 
etc.), but means in that place whither ye have been ban- 
ished; cf. Meyer ad loc. οἱ ἐκεῖ, se. ὄντες, Standing 
there, Mt. xxvi. 71 [Tr mrg. αὐτοὶ ἐκεῖ]. It answers to 
a relative adv.: οὗ τὸ πνεῦμα, ἐκεῖ ἐλευθερία, 2 Co. iii. 17 


ἑαυτὸν ἔκδ. διδόναι τῷ 


194 


ἐκεῖνος 


Rec.; Mt. vi. 21; xviii. 20; xxiv. 28; Mk. vi.10; Lk. 
xii. 34; Hebraistically, where a preceding adv. or rel. 
pron. has already attracted the verb, ἐκεῖ is added to 
this verb pleonastically: Rey. xii. 6 GT Tr WH (ὅπου 
ἔχει ἐκεῖ τόπον), 14 (ὅπου τρέφεται ἐκεῖ) ; cf. Deut. iv. 5, 
14, 26; 1 Mace. xiv. 34, and what was said p. 86", 5 
on the pron. αὐτός after a relative. b. by a negligent 
use common also in the classics it stands after verbs of 
motion for ἐκεῖσε, thither: so after ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. ii. 
22; μεταβαίνω, Mt. xvii. 20; ὑπάγω, Jn. xi. 8; ἔρχομαι, 
Jn. xviii. 3; προπέμπομαι, Ro. xv. 24; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
pp- 43 sq. 128; Hermann on Soph. Antig. 515; Trachin. 
1006; Bttm. on Philoct. 481; W. § 54,7; B. 71 (62) 
and 378 (324). 

ἐκεῖθεν, adv. of place, thence, from that place, [A. V. 
sometimes from thence]: Mt. iv. 21; Mk. vi. 1; Lk. ix. 4; 
Jn. iv. 43; Acts xiii.4; and often in the historical bks. 
of the N. T. οἱ ἐκεῖθεν elliptically for οἱ ἐκεῖθεν διαβῆναι 
θέλοντες, Lk. xvi. 26 (where L WH om. oi). 

ἐκεῖνος, -7, -o, (fr. ἐκεῖ, prop. the one there, οἵ. Germ. 
dortig, der dort), demonst. pron., that man, woman, thing 
(Lat. ille, illa, illud); properly of persons, things, times, 
places somewhat remote from the speaker. 1. used ab- 
solutely, a. in antithesis, referring to the more remote 
subject: opp. to οὗτος, Lk. xviii. 14; Jas. iv. 15; ὑμῖν 

. . ἐκείνοις, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv. 11; ἐκεῖνοι - - . ἡμεῖς, 
Heb. xii. 25; ἄλλοι . . . ἄλλοι. . . ἐκεῖνος, Jn. 1x. 9; ἐκεῖ- 
voy... ἐμέ, JN. iii. 30; οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι... ἐκεῖνος δέ, In. ii. 
20 sq.; ὁ μὲν κύριος ᾿Ιησοῦς [RG Τ' οπι. Ἰ. WH Tr mrg. 
br.] . .. ἐκεῖνοι δέ, Mk. xvi. 19 sq., ete. b. of noted per- 
sons (as in classic Grk.): in a bad sense, that notorious 
man, Jn. vii. 11; ix. 28; in a good sense, —of the Lord 
Jesus, 1 Jn. ii. 6; iii. 3, 5,7, 16; iv. 17; of the Holy Spirit, 
with an apposition added, ἐκεῖνος, τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας, 
Jn. xvi. 18. c. referring to a noun immediately pre- 
ceding, he, she, it, (Lat. is, ea, id, Germ. selbiger) : Jn. vii. 
45; v.46; Mk. xvi. 11; Acts iii. 13, ete.; cf. W. § 23, 1; 
{B. 104 (91). Here perhaps may be noticed its use to- 
gether with αὐτός of the same subject in the same sen- 
tence: ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ (i. 6. the devil) εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου 
θέλημα, 2 Tim. ii. 26; cf. Thue. 1, 132,65; 4, 29,3; Xen. 
Cyr. 4,5, 20; see Riddell, Apol. of Plato, App. § 49; 
Kiihner § 467, 12; cf. ζωγρέω, 2]; equiv. to an emphatic 
(Germ. er) he, ete., Mt. xvii. 27; Jn. i. 8; v.43; Tit. iii. 
7; equiv. to the forcibly uttered Germ. der (that one 
etc.), in which sense it serves to recall and lay stress upon 
nouns just before used [ef. our resumptive the same; W. 
§ 23,4]: Jn. i. 18; v.39; xii. 48; xiv. 26; xv. 26; esp. 
is it thus resumptive of a subject expressed participially 
[B. 306 (262 sq.)]: Mk. vii. 15 [T WHom. Tr br. the 
pron. ], 20; Jn.i. 33; ix. 37 (ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν, sc. ὁ vids τοῦ 
θεοῦ, see εἰμί, 11. 5); Jn. x. 1; xiv. 21; Ro. xiv. 14; 2 
Co. x. 18; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 33 ὁ yap λόγχην ἀκονῶν, ἐκεῖ- 
vos καὶ τὴν Ψυχήν τι παρακονᾷ). ἃ. foll. by ὅτι, Mt. 
xxiv. 43; foll. by ὅς, Jn. xiii. 26; Ro. xiv. 15. 2: 
joined with nouns, and then the noun with the article 
either precedes, or (somewhat more rarely) follows ἡ" 
ΟὟ. 162 (153)), [B. 119 (104) sq.]; 8. in contrasts: 


ἐκεῖσε 


ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη, Heb. viii. 7. ὍὌ. used to distinguish 
accurately from others the things or the persons spoken 
of, (Germ. selbig): Mt. vii. 25,27; x.15; xviii. 32; Mk. 
iii. 24 sq.; Lk. vi. 48 sq.; Jn. xviii. 15, and often; esp. 
of Time,—and of time past: ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις, 
Dan 0°03, at that time which has been spoken of; said of 
time which the writer either cannot or will not define 
more precisely and yet wishes to be connected with the 
time of the events just narrated: Mt. iii. 1; Mk.i. 9; 
viii. 1; Lk. ii. 1, (Ex. ii. 11; Judg. xviii. 1; 1 5. xxviii. 
1); ef. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 106 sq.; at the time under 
consideration: Lk. iv. 2; ix. 36; the same phrase is used 
of time future: Mt. xxiv. 19; Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29 
(ili. 2)); Rev. ix. 6; likewise in the singular, ἐν ἐκείνῃ 
τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, Lk. xvii. 31; Jn. xvi. 23,26. But the solemn 
phrase ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμέρα, οΥ ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη, simply sets future 
time in opposition to the present, that fateful day, that 
decisive day, when the Messiah will come to judge: Mt. 
vii. 22> LK. vi. 235 x. 12; 2 Th.1.10; 2 Tim.1. 12,18; 
Rey. xvi. 14 (where L T Tr WH om. ἐκείνης) ; so in the 
phrase 6 αἰὼν ἐκεῖνος, Lk. xx. 35. 3. ἐκείνης (in Ree. δὲ 
ἐκείνης), scil. ὁδοῦ, adverbially, (by) that way: Lk. xix. 
4; W. § 64, 5; [B. 171 (149); see ποῖος, fin.]. John’s 
use of the pronoun ἐκεῖνος is discussed by Steztz in the 
Stud. u. Krit. for 1859, p. 497 sqq.; 1861, p. 267 sqq., 
and by Alex. Buttmann, ibid. 1860, p. 505 sqq. and in 
Hilgenfeld’s Zeitsch. fiir wissenschaftl. Theol. 1862, p. 
204 sqq-; Buttmann clearly proves in opp. to Steitz 
that John’s usage deviates in no respect from the 
Greek; Steitz, however, resorts to psychological consid- 
erations in the case of Jn. xix. 35, [regarding ἐκ. there 
as expressing the writer’s inward assurance. But Steitz 
is now understood to have modified his published 
views. | 

ἐκεῖσε, adv. of place, thither, towards that place: Acts 
xxi. 3, on which see W. 349 (328); used for ἐκεῖ in the 
pregn. constr. τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, collected there, Acts 
xxii. 5, (Acta Thomae § 8); cf. W. § 54, 7.* 

ἐκ-ζητέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐξεζήτησα; Pass., 1 aor. ἐξεζητήθην; 
1 fut. ἐκζητηθήσομαι; (ἐκ out from a secret place, from 
all sides) ; Sept. very often for w77, also for wp3, ete. ; 
a. to seek out, search for: properly, twa, 1 Mace. ix. 26; 
figuratively: τὸν κύριον, τὸν θεόν, to seek the favor of 
God, worship him, Acts xv. 17; Ro. iii. 11 [Tr mrg. WH 


mrg. ζητῶν]; Heb. xi. 6, (Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2; xxxiii. 
(xxxiv.) 5; Ixviii. (Ixix.) 33; Amos v. 4, etc.). b. to 


seek out i. 6. investigate, scrutinize: τί, Sir. xxxix. 1, 3; 
περί τινος, to examine into anything, 1 Pet. i. 10, where 
it is joined with ἐξερευνᾶν [to seek out and search out], 
as in 1 Mace. ix. 26. ce. to seek out for one’s self, beg, 
crave: Heb. xii. 17. ἃ. to demand back, require: τὸ 
αἷμα τῶν προφητῶν ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, to take ven- 
geance on this generation for the slaughter of the proph- 
ets (after the Hebr., cf. 2S. ἵν. 11: Ezek. iii. 18; see ἐκ, 
I. 7): Lk. xi. 50, [51]. (In prof. auth. thus far only a 
single passage has been noted in which this word ap- 
pears, Arisiid. or. 8, i. p. 488 [i. 6. orat. 38, i. p. 726 ed. 
Dind.].) * 


195 


ἐκκλησία 


ἐκ-ζήτησις, (ἐκζητέω. α. ν.), -εως, ἧ; 1. an investigat- 
ing. 2. a subject of subtle inquiry and dispute, [R. V. 
questioning]: 1 Tim. i. 4 T Tr [WH; see Ellic. ad loc. 
and cf. οἰκονομία]. (Basil Caes., Didym. Al.) * 

ἐκ-θαμβέω, -ῶ: Pass., [pres. ἐκθαμβοῦμαι]; 1 aor. ἐξε- 
θαμβήθην ; (ἔκθαμβος, α. v-) ; 1. trans. to throw into 
amazement or terror; to alarm thoroughly, to terrify: Sir. 
xxx. 9; [Job xxxiii. 7 Aq., Compl. ]. 2. intrans. to 
be struck with amazement; to be thoroughly amazed, as- 
tounded; in Grk. writ. once, Orph. Arg. 1217. In the 
N. T. only in the pass. and by Mark: to be amazed, for 
joy at the unexpected coming of Christ, ix. 15; to be 
struck with terror, xvi. 5 sq.; joined with ἀδημονεῖν, 
xiv. 33.* 

ἔκ-θαμβος, -ov, (θάμβος, cf. ἔκφοβος), quite astonished, 
amazed: Acts iii. 11. (Polyb. 20, 10, 9. Eccl. and 
Byzant. writ.; terrifying, dreadful, Dan. vii. 7 Theod.) * 

ἐκ-θαυμάζω : [impf. ἐξεθαύμαζον] ; to wonder or marvel 
greatly (see ἐκ, VI. 6): ἐπί τινι, at one, Mk. xii. 17 T WH. 
(Sir. xxvii. 23; xliii. 18; Dion. Hal., Longin., al.) * 

ἔκ-θετος, -ov, (ἐκτίθημι), cast out, exposed: ποιεῖν ἔκθετα 
(equiv. to ἐκτιθέναι) τὰ βρέφη, Acts vii. 19. (Eur. Andr. 
70; [Manetho, apoteles. 6, 52].)* 

ἐκ-καθαίρω : 1 aor. ἐξεκάθαρα [on the a ef. B. 41 (35)]; 
(ἐκ either i. q. utterly or for ἔκ twos); in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. Il. 2, 153 down; to cleanse out, clean thoroughly : 
ἐμαυτὸν ἀπό τινος, to avoid defilement from one and so 
keep one’s self pure, 2 Tim. 1i. 21; with acc. of the thing 
by the removal of which something is made clean, [ A. V. 
purge out],1Co.v.7. (For ἢν i. q. to cleanse, Judg. vii. 
4 var.; for 13 i. q. to take away, Deut. xxvi. 13.) * 

ék-kalw: 1 aor. pass. ἐξεκαύθην ; 1. to burn out. 
2. to set on fire. pass. to be kindled, to burn, (Hdt. and 
sqq-; often in Sept.) : properly, of fire; metaph. of the 
fire and glow of the passions (of anger, Job iii. 17; Sir. 
xvi. 6, and often in Plut.) ; of lust, Ro. i. 27, (Alciphr. 3, 
67 οὕτως ἐξεκαύθην εἰς Epwra).* 

ἐκκακέω, -ὦ ; [1 aor. ἐξεκάκησα] ; (κακός) ; to be utterly 
spiritless, to be wearied out, exhausted; see ἐγκακέω [cf. 
ἡ 251: 

ἐκ-κεντέω, -ῶ : 1 aor. ἐξεκέντησα ; 1. to put out, dig 
out: τὰ ὄμματα, Aristot. h. a. 2, 17 [p. 508, 6}; 6, 
5. 2. to dig through, transfix, pierce: twa, Rev. i. 7; 
ὄψονται εἰς ὃν (i. 6. εἰς τοῦτον, ὃν [οἵ. W. 158 (150) ]}) ἐξε- 
κέντησαν, Jn. xix. 87. (Polyb. 5, 56, 12; Polyaen. ὅ, 3, 
8; for ἼΡΤ, Judg. ix. 54; 199 to kill, Num. xxii. 29. 2 
Mace. xii. 6. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexice. ete. p.540 sq.)* 

ἐκ-κλάω: 1 aor. pass. é&exdacOnv; to break off; to cut 
off: Ro. xi. 17, 19, 20 R GT WH (on this vs. see κλάω). 
(Sept. Ley. i. 17; Plat. rep. 10 p. 611 d.; Plut., Alciphr., 
al.) * 

ἐκ-κλείω : 1 aor. inf. éxxAeioar; 1 aor. pass. ἐξεκλείσθην: 
[fr. (Hdt.) Eur. down]; to shut out: Gal. iv. 17 (viz. 
from intercourse with me and with teachers codperating 
with me) ; i. q. to turn out of doors: to prevent the ap- 
proach of one, pass. in Ro. iii. 27.* 

ἐκκλησία, -as, 7, (fr. ἔκκλητος called out or forth, and 
this fr. ἐκκαλέω) ; prop. a gathering of citizens called out 


* 


ἐκκλησία 


from their homes into some public place; an assembly; so 
used 1. among the Greeks from Thue. [ef. Hdt. 3, 
142] down, an assembly of the people convened at the 
public place of council for the purpose of deliberating: 
Acts xix. 39. 2. in the Sept. often equiv. to 77>, the 
assembly of the Israelites, Judg. xxi. 8; 1 Chr. xxix. 1, 
ete., esp. when gathered for sacred purposes, Deut. xxxi. 
30 (xxxii. 1); Josh. viii. 35 (ix. 8), etc.; in the N. T. 
thusin Acts vii. 38; Ileb. ii. 12. 3. any gathering or 
throng of men assembled by chance or tumultuously : Acts 
χῖς. 90.421: 4. in the Christian sense, a. an assem- 
bly of Christians gathered for worship: ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ, in the 
religious meeting, 1 Co. xiv. 19, 35; ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις, 
ib. 84 ; συνέρχεσθαι ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ, 1 Co. xi. 18; cf. W.§ 50, 
4a. b. acompany of Christians, or of those who, hoping 
for eternal salvation through Jesus Christ, observe their 
own religious rites, hold their own religious meetings, 
and manage their own affairs according to regulations 
prescribed for the body for order’s sake; aa. those 
who anywhere, in city or village, constitute such a com- 
pany and are united into one body: Acts v. 11; viii. 
8; 1 Co. iv. 17; vi. 4; Phil. iv. 15; 3 Jn. 6 [ef. W. 122 
(116)]; with specification of place, Acts viii. 1 ; χα ΦΧ 
Ro. xvi. 1; 1 Co. iv.17; νἱ. 4 ; Rev. 11.1, 8, οἷς. ; Θεσσα- 
λονικέων, 1 ΤῊ. i. 1; 2 ΤῊ. i. 13; Λαοδικέων, Col. iv. 16; 
with gen. of the possessor, rod θεοῦ (equiv. to 717 op, 
Num. xvi. 3; xx. 4), 1 Co. xi. 22; and mention of the 
place, 1 Co. i. 2; 2Co.i.1. Plur. ai ἐκκλησίαι: Acts xv. 
41; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 19; Rev. i. 4; iii. 6, etc. ; 
with τοῦ θεοῦ added, 1 Th. ii. 14; 2 Th.i.4; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
Ro. xvi. 16; with mention of the place, as τῆς ᾿Ασίας, 
Γαλατίας, ete.: 1 Co. xvi. 1,19; 2 Co. viii. 1; Gal. i. 2; 
τῆς Ἰουδαίας ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ, joined to Christ [see ἐν, I. 6b. ], 
i. e. Christian assemblies, in contrast with those of the 
Jews, Gal. i. 22; ἐκκλησίαι τῶν ἐθνῶν, gathered from the 
Gentiles, Ro. xvi. 4; τῶν ἁγίων, composed of the saints, 
1 Co. xiv. 83. ἡ ἐκκλησία κατ᾽ οἶκόν twos, the church in 
one’s house, i. e. the company of Christians belonging to 
a person’s family; others less aptly understand the 
phrase of the Christians accustomed to meet for worship 
in the house of some one (for as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 
23, the whole Corinthian church was accustomed to 
assemble in one and the same place; [but see Bp. 
Lehtft. on Col. iv. 157): Ro. xvi. 5; 1 Co. xvi. 19; Col. iv. 
15; Philem. 2. ἡ ἐκκλησία is used even by 
Christ while on earth of the company of his adherents 
in any city or village: Mt.xviii.17. bb. the whole body 
of Christians scattered throughout the earth; collectively, 
all who worship and honor God and Christ in whatever 
place they may be: Mt. xvi. 18 (where perhaps the Evan- 
gelist employs τὴν ἐκκλησίαν although Christ may have 
said τὴν βασιλείαν μου); 1 Co. xii. 28; Eph. i. 22; iii. 10; 
29, 32; Phil. iii. 6; Col. i. 18, 24; with 
gen. of the possessor : τοῦ κυρίου, Acts xx. 28 [R Tr mrg. 
WI τ. θεοῦ]; τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. i.13; 1 Co.xv. 9; 1 Tim. iii. 15. 
ce. the name is transferred to the assembly of faithful 
Christians already dead and received into heaven: Heb. 
xii. 23 (on this pass. see in ἀπογράφω, b. and πρωτότοκος, 


The name 


v. 23 866. oie 


196 


ἐκλέγω 


fin.). [In general, see Trench ὁ 1, and B. D.’s. v. Chureh, 
also Am. ed.; and for patristic usage Soph. Lex. 8. v.] 

ἐκ-κλίνω [ Ro. xvi. 17 T Tr WH]; 1 aor. ἐξέκλινα ; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down; Sept. chiefly for 110 and 703; 
intrans. fo turn aside, deviate (from the right way and 
course, Mal. ii. 8, [ef. Deut. v. 32]); metaph. and absol. 
to turn (one’s self) away [B. 144 (126) sq.; W. 251 
(236)], either from the path of rectitude, Ro. iii. 12 
(Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3); or from evil (a malis declinare, 
Cie. Tuse. 4, 6): ἀπὸ κακοῦ, 1 Pet. iii. 11 (Ps. xxxiii. 
(xxxiv.) 15; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 27; Prov. iii. 7); ἀπό with 
gen. of pers. to turn away from, keep aloof from, one’s 
society; to shun one: Ro. xvi. 17, (ots, Ignat. ad Eph. 
fa 

ἐκ-κολυμβάω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. ἐκκολυμβήσας ; fo swim 
outof: Acts xxvii. 42. (Eur. Hel. 1609; Diod., Dion. 
Hal.)* 

ék-kop(tw: impf. pass. ἐξεκομιζόμην ; 10 carry out; adead 
man for burial (Polyb. 35, 6, 2; Plut. Agis 21; Hdian. 
2,1, 5 [2 ed. Bekk.], ete.; in Lat. efferre): Lk. vii. 12.* 

ἐκ-κοπή, -ῆς, ἡ, [Polyb., Plut., al.], see ἐγκοπή. 

ἐκ-κόπτω : fut. ἐκκόψω ; 1 aor. impy. ἔκκοψον, subjune. 
ἐκκόψω ; [Pass., pres. ἐκκόπτομαι] ; 2 aor. ἐξεκόπην ; 2 fut. 
ἐκκοπήσομαι ; to cul oul, cutoff; a. properly: of a tree, 
Mt. iii. 10; vii. 19; Lk. iii. 9; xiii. 7, 9, (Hdt. 9, 97, 
ete.) ; a hand, aneye: Mt. v. 80; xviii. 8, (τὸν ὀφθαλμόν, 
Dem. p. 744, (13) 17); pass. ἔκ τινος, a branch from a 
tree, Ro. xi. 22,24. b. figuratively: τὴν ἀφορμήν, to cut 
off oceasion, 2 Co. xi. 12, (τὴν ἐλπίδα, Job xix. 10). In 
1 Pet. iii. 7 read ἐγκόπτεσθαι ; see ἐγκόπτω." 

ἐκ-κρέμαμαι (mid. of ἐκκρεμάννυμι, cf. Bim. Ausf. Spr. 
ii. 224 sq.; [Veitch s. v. κρέμαμαι]; B. 61 (55)) : [impf. 
ἐξεκρεμάμην]; to hang from: ἐξεκρέματο αὐτοῦ ἀκούων, 
hung upon his lips (Verg. Aen. 4, 79), Lk. xix. 48, where 
T WH ἐξεκρέμετο, after codd. 8B, a form which T con- 
jectures “a vulgari usu haud alienum fuisse;” [cf. B.u.s.; 
WH. App. p- 168]. (Plat., Philo, Plut., al.) * 

ἐκ-κρέμομαι, see the preceding word. 

ἐκ-λαλέω, -@: 1 aor. inf. ἐκλαλῆσαι ; fo speak out, di- 
vulge: τινί, foll. by ὅτι, Acts xxiii. 22. (Judith xi. 9; 
Demosth., Philo, Dio Cass., al.) * 

ἐκ-λάμπω : fut. ἐκλάμψω ; lo shine forth: Mt. xiii. 48; 
Dan. xii. ὃ var. (Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

ἐκ-λανθάνω : to cause to forget; Mid. to forget; pf. ἐκλέ- 
Anopat, foll. by gen.: Heb. xii. 5. (Tom. et sqq.) * 

ἐκ-λέγω : pf. pass. ptep. ἐκλελεγμένος, once in Lk. ix, 
35 Lmre. T Tr WH; Mid., impf. ἐξελεγόμην (Lk. xiv. 7); 
1 aor. ἐξελεξάμην ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 
33; 10 pick out, choose; in the N. T. (exc. Lk. ix. 35, 
where the reading is doubtful) always mid., ἐκλέγομαι, to 
pick or choose out for one’s self: ti, Lk. x. 425\ xiv. 7; 
τινά, one from among many (of Jesus choosing his disci- 
ples), Jn. vi. 70; xiii. 18; xv. 16; Acts i. 2; ἀπό τινων, 
from a number of persons (Sir. xlv. 16), Lk. vi. 133 ἐκ 
τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. xv. 19; used of choosing one for an office, 
Acts vi. 5; foll. by ἔκ τινων, Acts i. 24; to discharge 
some business, Acts xv. 22, 25; ἐν ἡμῖν (al. ὑμῖν) ἐξελέ- 
aro ὁ θεός, foll. by the ace. and inf. denoting the end, 


ἐκλείπω 


God made choice among ιι 1. 6. in our ranks, Acts xv. 7, 
where formerly many, misled by the Hebr. 3 ὝΠ3 (1 5. 
xvi. 9; 1 K. viii. 16, ete., and the Sept. of these pass.), 
wrongly regarded ἐν ἡμῖν as the object on which the mind 
of the chooser was as it were fixed; [W. § 32, 3 a.; B. 
159 (138)]. Especially is God said ἐκλέξασθαι those 
whom he has judged fit to receive his favors and sepa- 
rated from the rest of mankind to be peculiarly his own 
and to be attended continually by his gracious oversight: 
thus of the Israelites, Acts xiii. 17 (Deut. xiv. 2, 
[ef. iv. 37]; 2 Mace. v.19); of Christians, as those 
whom he has set apart from among the irreligious mul- 
titude as dear unto himself, and whom he has rendered, 
through faith in Christ, citizens in the Messianic king- 
dom: Mk. xiii. 20; 1 Co. i. 27 sq.; with two ace. one of 
the object, the other of the predicate [W. § 32, 4 b.], 
Jas. ii..5; τινὰ ἐν Χριστῷ, so that the ground of the choice 
lies in Christ and his merits, foll. by ace. with inf. denot- 
ing the end, Eph. i. 4. In Lk. ix. 35 Lmrg. T Tr WH 
Jesus is called ὁ vids τοῦ θεοῦ ὁ ἐκλελεγμένος (ἢ G L txt. 
ἀγαπητός), as being dear to God beyond all others and 
exalted by him to the preéminent dignity of Messiah ; 
but see ἐκλεκτός, 1 b.* 

ἐκ-λείπω ; fut. ἐκλείψω ; 2 aor. ἐξέλιπον ; 1. trans. 
a. to leave out, omit, pass by. b. to leave, quit, (a place) : 
τὸ ζῆν, τὸν βίον, to die, 2 Mace. x. 13; 3 Mace. ii. 23; 
Soph. Electr. 1131; Polyb. 2, 41, 2, al.; Dion. Hal. 1, 24; 
Lue. Macrob. 12; Alciphr. 3, 28. 2. intrans. to fail; 
ie. to leave off, cease, stop: τὰ ἔτη, Heb. i. 12 fr. Ps. ci. 
(cii.) 28 (where for DDA); ἡ πίστις, Lk. xxii. 32; riches, 
ace. to the reading ἐκλίπῃ (L txt. T Tr WH), Lk. xvi. 
9 (often so in Grk. writ., and the Sept. as Jer. vii. 28 ; 
xxviii. (li.) 30). as often in classic Grk. fr. Thue. 
down, it is used of the failing or eclipse of the light of 
the sun and the moon: τοῦ ἡλίου ἐκλιπόντος [WH ἐκλεί- 
movros], the sun having failed [or failing], Lk. xxiii. 45 
Tdf.; on this (without doubt the true) reading [see esp. 
WH. App. ad loe., and] cf., besides Tdf.’s note, Keim 
iii. 440 [Eng. trans. vi. 173] (Sir. xvii. 31 (26)). to 
expire, die; so acc. to RG L mre. ἐκλίπητε in Lk. xvi. 9, 
(Tob. xiv. 11; Sap. v. 13; Sept. for 313, Gen. xxv. 8, 
etc.; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 29; Lam.i.19; for nin, Jer. xlix. 
(slii.) 17,22. Plat. lege. 6, 759 e.; 9,856 e.; Xen. Cyr. 
8, 7, 26).* 

ἐκ-λεκτός, -7, -όν, (ἐκλέγω), picked out, chosen; rare in 
Grk. writ., as Thue. 6, 100; Plat. lege. 11 p. 938 b.; 12, 
948 ἃ.» ete.; Sept. for 13n3 and "73; in the N. T. ΤΙΣ 
chosen by God, and a. to obtain salvation through 
Christ (see ἐκλέγω); hence Christians are called οἱ 
ἐκλεκτοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ, the chosen or elect of God, [ef. W. 35 
(34); 234 (219)], (AI "3, said of pious Israelites, 
Is. Ixv. 9, 15, 23; Ps. civ. (cv.) 43, cf. Sap. iv. 15): Lk. 
xviii. 7; Ro. viii. 33; Col. iii. 12; Tit.i.1; without the 
gen. θεοῦ, Mt. xxiv. 22,24; Mk. xiii. 20, 22; 1 Pet. 1.1; 
with the addition of rod Χριστοῦ, as gen. of possessor, 
Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27 [Τ᾿ Trom.gen.]; κλητοὶ καὶ 
ἐκλεκτοὶ K. πιστοί, Rev. xvii. 14; γένος ἐκλεκτόν, 1 Pet. ii. 
9 (fr. Is. xliii. 20, ef. Add. to Esth. viii. 40 [vi. 17, p. 64 


197 


ἐκλύω 


ed. Fritz.]); ἐκλεκτοί, those who have become true par- 
takers of the Christian salvation are contrasted with 
κλητοί, those who have been invited but who have not 
shown themselves fitted to obtain it, [al. regard the 
‘called’ and the ‘chosen’ here as alike partakers of 
salvation, but the latter as the ‘choice ones’ (see 2 be- 
low), distinguished above the former; cf. Jas. Morison 
or Meyer ad loc. }, Mt. xx. 16 [here T WH om. Tr br. the 
cl.]; xxii. 14; finally, those are called ἐκλεκτοί who are 
destined for salvation but have not yet been brought to 
it, 2 Tim. ii. 10 [but οἵ. Huther or Ellie. ad loc. ]. b. 
The Messiah is called preéminently ὁ ἐκλεκτὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, 
as appointed by God to the most exalted office conceiv- 
able: Lk. xxiii. 35, ef. ix. 85 Lmrg.T Tr WH; cf. 
Dillmann, Das Buch Henoch [iibers. u. erklirt; allgem. 
Einl.], p. xxiii. ce. Angels are called ἐκλεκτοί, as 
those whom God has chosen out from other created 
beings to be peculiarly associated with him, and his high- 
est ministers in governing the universe: 1 Tim. v. 21; 
see ἅγιος, 1b.; μαρτύρομαι δὲ ἐγὼ μὲν ὑμῶν τὰ ἅγια καὶ 
τοὺς ἱεροὺς ἀγγέλου ς τοῦ θεοῦ, Joseph. b. 1. 2,16, 4 sub 
fin.; [yet al. explain by 2 Pet. 11. 4; Jude 6; ef. Ellic. on 
1 Tim. 1. ¢.]. 2. univ. choice, select, i. e. the best of 
its kind or class, excellent, preéminent: applied to cer- 
tain individual Christians, 2 Jn. 1, 13; with ἐν κυρίῳ 
added, eminent as a Christian (see ἐν, I. 6 b.), Ro. 
xvi. 13; of things: λίθος, 1 Pet. ii. 4, [6], (Is. xxviii. 16; 2 
Esdr. v. 8; Enoch c. 8 Grk. txt., ed. Dillmann p. 82 sq.).* 

ἐκλογή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐκλέγω), election, choice ; a. the act 
of picking out, choosing: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς (gen. of quality ; 
ef. W. § 34, 3 b.; [B.161 (140 sq.) ]), 1. q. ἐκλεκτόν, se. τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Acts ix. 15; spec. used of ‘that act of God’s free 
will by which before the foundation of the world he de- 
creed his blessings to certain persons ;—7 κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν 
πρόθεσις, the decree made from choice [ A. V. the purpose 
ace. to election, cf. W. 193 (182)], Ro. ix. 11 (ef. Fritz- 
sche ad loc. p. 298 sqq.) ;— particularly that by which 
he determined to bless certain persons through Christ, 
Ro. xi. 28; κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν χάριτος. according to an election 
which is due to grace, or a gracious election, Ro. xi. 5; 
with gen. of the pers. elected, 1 Th. i. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10. 
Ὁ. the thing or person chosen: i. q. ἐκλεκτοί, Ro. xi. 7. 
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Dion. Hal., al.)* 

ἐκ-λύω : [Pass., pres. ἐκλύομαι}; pf. ptep. ἐκλελυμένος ; 
1 aor. e€eAvOnv; 1 fut. ἐκλυθήσομαι ; often in τὶς. writ. 
fr. [Hom.]. Aeschyl. down ; 1. to loose, unloose (cf. 
Germ. auslésen), to set free: τινά τινος and ἔκ τινος. 2. 
to dissolve; metaph. to weaken, relax, exhaust, (Sept. Josh. 
x. 6; Jer. xlv. (xxxviii.) 4; Aristot. ἢ. an. 9, 1 sub fin. 
[p. 610%, 27]; Joseph. antt. 8, 11,3; 13, 8,1). Com- 
monly in the Pass. 8. to have one’s strength relaxed, to 
be enfeebled through exhaustion, to grow weak, grow weary, 
be tired out, (often so in Grk. writ.): of the body, Mt. 
ix. 36 Rec.; xv. 32; Mk. vili. 3; thus for Ay, 1 S. xiv. 
28; 2S. xvii. 29; for 797, 2S. iv. 1 ete.; of the mind, 
Gal. vi. 9 (μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι if we faint not, sc. in well-do- 
ing). Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 17. b. to despond, 
become faint-hearted: Heb. xii. 5, (Deut. xx. 3; Prov. 


ἐκμάσσω 


ili. 11); with ταῖς ψυχαῖς added, Heb. xii. 3; τοῖς σώ- 
μασι, ταῖς ψυχαῖς, Polyb. 20,4, 7; τῇ ψυχῇ, 29, 6, 14; 
40, 12, 7; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. ix. 8; 2 Mace. iii. 24.* 

ἐκ-μάσσω ; impf. ἐξέμασσον ; 1 aor. ἐξέμαξα; to wipe 
off, to wipe away: with acc. of object and dat. of instru- 
ment, Lk. vii. 38,44; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3; xiii. 5. (Soph., 
Eur., Hippoer., Aristot., al. Sir. xii. 11; Bar. vi. (ep. 
Jer.) 12, 23 (13, 24).)* 

ἐκ-μυκτηρίζω : impf. ἐξεμυκτήριζον; to deride by turning 
up the nose, to sneer at, scoff at: twa, Lk. xvi. 143 xxiii. 
35. (For ay), Ps. ii. 4; [xxxiv. (xxxv.) 16]; 2 K. xix. 
21 [here the simple verb]; 1 Esdr. i. 49 Alex.; Ev. 
Nicod. ο. 10. Prof. writ. use the simple verb (fr. μυκτήρ 
the nose) ; [cf. W. 25].)* 

ék-vevw: 1 aor. ἐξένευσα; 1. to bend to one side (τῇ 
κεφαλῇ, Xen. ven. 10,12). 2. to take one’s self away, 
withdraw: Jn. vy. 13, where Chrysostom says that ἐξέ- 
veuce is equiv. to ἐξέκλινε; but others derive the form 
from ἐκνέω, 4. v. (Sept. for 30, Judg. iv. 18 Alex. ; 739, 
to turn one’s self, Judg. xviii. 26 Alex.; 2 K. ii. 24; xxiii. 
16; [add 3 Mace. iii. 22; Joseph. antt. 7,4, 2]. In prof. 
auth. also transitively, fo avoid a thing; as τὰ βέλη, Diod. 
15, 87; πληγήν, ib. 17, 100.) * 

ἐκ-νέω: 1. properly, to swim away, escape by swim- 
ming, (Thue. 2, 90). 2. to escape, slip away secretly, 
({Pind. ΟἹ. 13, 163]; Eur. Hipp. 470, ete.) ; in this sense 
many interpp. take ἐξένευσε in Jn. ν. 13. But Jesus 
withdrew not to avoid danger but the admiration of the 
people; for the danger first arose after his withdrawal.* 

ἐκινήφω: 1 aor. ἐξένηψα:; a. prop. /o return to one’s 
self from drunkenness, become sober, (Gen. ix. 24; {1 S. 
xxv. 37]; Joeli. 5; [Sir. xxiv. (xxxi.) 2]; Lynceus ap. 
Ath. 4, 5 p. 130 b.). b. metaph. to return to soberness 
of mind (cf. ἀνανήφω) : 1 Co. xv. 34, (Plut. Dem. 20).* 

ἑκούσιος, -ov, (ἑκών ), voluntary: κατὰ ἑκούσιον, of free 
will, Philem. 14. (Num. xv. 3; καθ᾽ ἑκουσίαν, Thue. 8, 
27—[“ The word understood in the one case appears to 
be τρόπον (Porphyr. de abst. 1, 9 καθ᾽ ἑκούσιον τρόπον, 
comp. Eur. Med. 751 ἑκουσίῳ τρόπῳ) ; inthe other, γνώμην 
so ἑκουσίᾳ (doubtful, see L. and S.], ἐξ ἑκουσίας, ete. ;” 
ef. Lobeck, Phryn. p. 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. l.c.; ef. 
W. 463 (432)].)* 

ἑκουσίως, adv., [fr. Eur. down], voluntarily, willingly, 
of one’s own accord: Heb. x. 26 (ἐκ. ἁμαρτάνειν [A. V. 
to sin wilfully] is tacitly opposed to sins committed 
inconsiderately, and from ignorance or from weakness) ; 
1 Pet. v. 2.* 

ἔκ-παλαι, adv., (fr. ἐκ and πάλαι. formed like ἔκτοτε [cf. 
W. 24 (23); 422 (393); B. 321 (275)]), from of old; of 
a long time: 2 Pet. ii. 3; iii. 5. (A later Grk. word, fr. 
Philo down; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 45 sqq-)* 

ἐκ-πειράζω ; fut. ἐκπειράσω : [1 aor. ἐξεπείρασα. 1 Co. x. 
9 Lmrg. T WH mrg.]; a word wholly biblical [put by 
Philo (de congr. erud. grat. 8.30, Mang. i. 543) for Sept. 
πειράζ. in quoting Deut. viii. 2]; to prove, test, thoroughly 
[A. V. tempt]: τινά, his mind and judgment, Lk. x. 25; 
τὸν θεόν, to put to proof God’s character and power: 
Mt. iv. 7; Lk. iv. 12, after Deut. vi. 16, where for D3; 


198 


ἐκπλήσσω 


τὸν Χριστόν, by irreligion and immorality to test the 
patience or the avenging power of Christ (exalted to 
God’s right hand), 1 Co. x. 9" [(yet L T WH Tr txt. 
κύριον), 9° Lmrg.T WH mrg. Cf. Ps. lxxvii. (Ixxviii-) 
18]. 

ἐκ-πέμπω : 1 aor. ἐξέπεμψα; 1 aor. pass. ptep. ἐκπεμ- 
φθείς ; to send forth, send away: Acts xiii. 4; xvii. 10. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

ἐκ-περισσῶς, adv., exceedingly, out of measure, the more: 
used of intense earnestness, Mk. xiv. 31 LT TrWH 
(for Rec. ἐκ περισσοῦ ); not found elsewhere. But see 
ὑπερεκπερισσῶς." 

éx-reravvupt: 1 aor. ἐξεπέτασα; to spread out, stretch 
Forth: τὰς χεῖρας πρός twa, Ro. x. 21 fr. Is. xv. 2. (Eur., 
Polyb., Plut., Anthol., al.) * 

ἐκ-πηδάω, -@: 1 aor. eEenndaca; to spring out, leap 
forth: eis τ. ὄχλον, Acts xiv. 14 GL T Tr WH. (eis τὸν 
λαόν, Judith xiv. 17; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] Hat. 
down. Deut. xxxiii. 22.) * 

ἐκ-πίπτω ; pf. ἐκπέπτωκα ; 2 aor. ἐξέπεσον ; 1 aor. ἐξέ- 
meoa (Acts xii. 7 LT Tr WH; Gal. ν. 4; on this aor. 
see [πίπτω and] ἀπέρχομαι) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to fall 
out of, to fall down from; 1. prop.: ai ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν 
χειρῶν (see ἐκ. I. 3 [ef. W. 427 (398) and De verb. comp. 
ete. Pt. ii. p. 11]), Acts xii. 7 (ἐκ τῆς θήκης, Is. vi. 13; 
ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Is. xiv. 12); absol.: Mk. xiii. 25 RG; 
Acts xxvii. 32; Jas. i. 11; 1 Pet. i. 24; of navigators, 
ἐκπ. eis (i. 6. from a straight course) to fall off i. 6. be 
driven into (cf. Stallbaum on Plato’s Phileb. p. 106 sq. ; 
al. supply ‘from deep water,’ and render ἐκπ. to be cast 
away], Acts xxvii. 17, 25, 29, in this last vs. LT Tr WH 
have adopted ἐκπ. κατά, (often in Grk. writ., as eis γῆν, 
Eur. Hel. 409; εἰς τὸν λιμένα, Thue. 2, 92). 2. met- 
aph. a. τινός [W. 427 (398), and De verb. comp. ete. 
τι. 5.7, to fall from a thing, to lose it: τῆς χάριτος, Gal. v. 
4; τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ, 2 Pet. iii. 17, (τῆς πρὸς τὸν δῆμον 
εὐνοίας, Plut. Tib. Gracch. 21; βασιλείας, Joseph. antt. 
7,9, 2; also with prepositions, ἐκ τῶν ἐόντων, Hat. 3, 14; 
ἀπὸ τῶν ἐλπίδων, Thue. 8, 81); πόθεν, Rev. ii. 5 Ree. 
(ἐκεῖθεν, Ael. ν. h. 4, 7). b. absol. to perish; to fail, 
(properly, to fall from a place which one cannot keep, 
fall from its position) : ἡ ἀγάπη. 1 Co. xiii. 8 RG; to fall 
powerless, fall to the ground, be without effect: of the 
divine promise of salvation by Christ, Ro. ix. 6.* 

ἐκ-πλέω : [impf. ἐξέπλεον]; 1 aor. efemevaa; to sail 
from, sail away, depart by ship: ἀπό with gen. of place, 
Acts xx. 6; eis with ace. of place, Acts xv. 39; xviii. 18. 
[Soph., Hdt., Thuc., al-]* 

ἐκ-πληρόω: pf. ἐκπεπλήρωκα; to fill full, to fill up com- 
pletely; metaph. τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, to fulfil i. e. make good : 
Acts xiii. 33 (32), as in Polyb. 1,67, 1. [From Hat. 
down. |* 

ἐκ- πλήρωσις, -ews, 7, @ completing, fulfilment: τ. ἡμερῶν 
τ. ἁγνισμοῦ, the time when the days of purification are 
to end, Acts xxi. 26. [Dion. Hal., Strab., Philo, al.]* 

ἐκ-πλήσσω, Tw: Pass., [pres. ἐκπλήσσομαι or -rropat 
(so RG Mt. xiii. 54; Tr WH Acts xiii. 12)]; impf. e& 
exAnoodunv; 2 aor. ἐξεπλάγην ; com. in Grk. fr. Hom 


2 , 
εκπνεω 


down; prop. to strike out, expel by a blow, drive out or 
away; to cast off by a blow, to drive out; commonly, to 
strike one out of self-possession, to strike with panic, shock, 
astonish; Pass. to be struck with astonishment, astonished, 
amazed ; absol.: Mt. xiii. 54; xix. 25; Mk. vi. 2; x. 26; 
Lk. ii. 48; used of the glad amazement of the wonder- 
ing people, Mk. vii. 37; ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ, Mt. vii. 28; xxii. 
33; Mk. i. 22; xi. 18; Lk.iv.32; Acts xiii. 12; [ἐπὶ τῇ peya- 
λειότητι, Lk. ix. 43], (ἐπὶ τῷ κάλλει, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27; 
ἐπὶ τῇ θέᾳ, Ael. v. h. 12,41; [W.§ 33, b.]; by the Greeks 
also with simple dat. and with ace. of the thing, as Sap. 
xili. 4; 2 Mace. vii. 12). [Syn. see φοβέω, fin. ]* 

ἐκ-πνέω: 1 aor. ἐξέπνευσα ; to breathe out, breathe out 
one’s life, breathe one’s last, expire: Mk. xv. 37, 39; Lk. 
xxiii. 46, and often in Grk. writ., both without an object 
(fr. [Soph. Aj. 1026] Eur. down), and with βίον or ψυχήν 
added (fr. Aeschyl. down).* 

ἐκ- πορεύομαι ; impf. ἐξεπορευόμην ; fut. ἐκπορεύσομαι:; 
(pass. [mid., ef. πορεύω] οἵ ἐκπορεύω to make to go forth, 
to lead out, with fut. mid.) ; [fr. Xen. down]; Sept. for 
ΒΥ; to go forth, go out, depart; 1. prop.; with men- 
tion of the place whence: ἀπό, Mt. xx. 29; Mk. x. 46; 
ἔξω (τῆς πόλεως), Mk. xi. 19; ἐκ, Mk. xiii. 1; ἐκεῖθεν, Mk. 
vi. 11; παρά τινος, from one’s abode, one’s vicinity, Jn. 
xv. 26, (ἀκούσωμεν τὰ ἐκπορευόμενα mapa κυρίου, Ezek. 
xxxiii. 30); without mention of the place whence or 
whither, which must be learned from the context: Lk. 
iii. 7; Acts xxv. 4; with mention of the end to which: 
ἐπί τινα, Rey. xvi. 14; πρός twa, Mt. iii. 5; Mk. 1. 53 ἐκ- 
πορεύεσθαι εἰς ὁδόν, to go forth from some place into the 
road [or on his way, cf. ὁδός, 1 b.], Mk. x. 17; on Acts 
ix. 28 see εἰσπορεύομαι, 1 a. demons, when expelled, are 
said to go out (sc. from the human body): Mt. xvii. 21 
RGL; Actsxix.12GLT Tr WH. [food (excrement) ] 
to go out i. 6. be discharged, Mk. vii. 19. to come forth, 
ἐκ τῶν μνημείων, of the dead who are restored to life and 
leave the tomb, Jn. v. 29. 2. fig. to come forth, to issue, 
to proceed: with the adjuncts ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, ἐκ τῆς 
καρδίας, ἐκ τοῦ στόματος. of feelings, affections, deeds, 
sayings, Mt. xv. 11,18; Mk. vii. 15 L T Tr WH, 20; Lk. 
iv. 22; Eph. iv. 29; [ἔσωθεν ἐκ τῆς καρδίας, Mk. vii. 21; 
with ἔσωθεν alone, ibid. 23]; πᾶν ῥῆμα ἐκπορ. διὰ στόματος 
θεοῦ, every appointment whereby God bids a man to be 
nourished and preserved, Mt. iv. 4, fr. Deut. viii. 3. to 
break forth: of lightnings, flames, etc., ἔκ τινος, Rev. iv. 5; 
ix. 17 sq.; xi. 5. to flow forth: of a river (ἔκ r.), Rev. 
xxii. 1. to project, from the mouth of one: of a sword, 
Rev. i. 16; xix. 15, 21 Ree. to spread abroad, of a ru- 
mor : foll. by eis, Lk. iv. 87. [Syn. ef. ἔρχομαι, fin. ]* 

ἐκ-πορνεύω: 1 aor. ptep. fem. ἐκπορνεύσασα ; (the prefix 
ἐκ seems to indicate a lust that gluts itself, satisfies itself 
completely); Sept. often for 731; to go a whoring, ‘give 
one’s self over to fornication’ A. V.: Jude 7. Not found 
in prof. writ. [Test. xii. Patr. test. Dan ὃ 5; Poll. 6, 30 
(126).]* 

éx-rriw: 1 aor. ἐξέπτυσα; to spit out (Hom. Od. 5, 322, 
etc.) ; trop. to reject, spurn, loathe: ri, Gal. iv. 14, in 


which sense the Greeks used καταπτύειν, προσπτύειν. | 


199 


ἐκτείνω 


πτύειν, and Philo παραπτύειν ; cf. Kypke and Loesner [or 
Ellic.] on Gal. 1. ο. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 17.* 

ἐκ-ριζόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐξερίζωσα ; Pass., 1 aor. ἐξεριζώθην; 
1 fut. ἐκριζωθήσομαι; to root out, pluck up by the roots: τί, 
Mt. xiii. 29; xv. 13; Lk. xvii. 6; Jude12. (Jer. i. 10; 
Zeph. ii. 4; Sir. 111. 9; [Sap. iv.4]; 1 Mace. v. 51 [Alex.]; 
2 Mace. xii. 7; [Sibyll. frag. 2, 21; al.]; Geopon.) * 

ἔκ-στασις, -ews, ἡ, (ἐξίστημι); 1. univ. in Grk. writ. 
any casting down of a thing from its proper place or state ; 
displacement, (Aristot., Plut.). 2. a throwing of the 
mind out of its normal state, alienation of mind, whether 
such as makes a lunatic (διανοίας, Deut. xxviii. 28; τῶν 
λογισμῶν, Plut. Sol. 8), or that of the man who by some 
sudden emotion is transported as it were out of himself, 
so that in this rapt condition, although he is awake, his 
mind is so drawn off from all surrounding objects and 
wholly fixed on things divine that he sees nothing but the 
forms and images lying within, and thinks that he per- 
ceives with his bodily eyes and ears realities shown him 
by God, (Philo, quis rerum divin. heres ὃ 53 [ef. 51; B. D. 
s.v. Trance; Delitzsch, Psychol. v. 57): ἐπέπεσεν [ Rec., al. 
ἐγένετο] ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις, Acts x. 10; εἶδεν ἐν ἐκστάσει 
ὅραμα, Acts xi. 5; γενέσθαι ἐν ἐκστάσει, Acts xxii. 17, ef. 
2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 3. In the O. T. and the New amaze- 
ment [ef. Longin. 1,4; Stob. flor. tit. 104, 7], the state of 
one who, either owing to the importance or the novelty of 
an event, is thrown into a state of blended fear and won- 
der: εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις, Mk. xvi. 8; ἐξέστη- 
σαν ἐκστάσει μεγάλη, Mk. ν. 42 (Ezek. χχνὶ. 16); ἔκστασις 
ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας, Lk. v. 26; ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους κ. ἐκστά- 
σεως, Acts iii. 10; (for 777, trembling, Gen. xxvii. 33 ; 
1 5. xiv. 15, etc.; 9, fear, 2 Chr. xiv. 14, etc.).* 

ἐκ-στρέφω: pf. pass. ἐξέστραμμαι ; 1. toturn or twist 
out, tear up, (Hom. Il. 17, 58). 2. to turn inside out, 
invert; trop. to change for the worse, pervert, corrupt, 
(Arstph. nub. 554; Sept. Deut. xxxii. 20): Tit. iii. 11.* 

[ἐκ-σώζω : 1 aor. ἐξέσωσα; to save from, either to keep 
or to rescue from danger (fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down) : 
εἰς αἰγιαλὸν ἐκσῶσαι τὸ πλοῖον to bring the ship safe to 
shore, Acts xxvii. 39 WH txt.; al. ἐξῶσαι, see ἐξωθέω, and 
ἘΠῚ Wey] 

ἐκ-ταράσσω ; post-classical ; fo agitate, trouble, exceed- 
ingly: τ. πόλιν, Acts xvi. 20. (τ. δῆμον, Plut. Coriol. 19, 
and the like often in Dion Cass. Ps. xvii. (xvili.) 5; 
Sap. xvii. 3, etc.) * 

éx-telvw; fut. ἐκτενῶ; 1 aor. ἐξέτεινα ; [fr. Aeschyl., 
Soph., Hdt. down]; Sept. com. for 703, w13 and now; 
to stretch out, stretch forth: τὴν χεῖρα (often in Sept.), 
Mt. viii. 3; xii. 13; xiv. 31; xxvi. 51; Mk. i. 41; iii. 
5; Lk. v. 18: vi. 10; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xxvi. 1; with 
the addition of ἐπί twa, over, towards, against one — 
either to point out something, Mt. xii. 49, or to lay 
hold of a person in order to do him violence, Lk. xxii. 
53; ἐκτ. τ. χεῖρα eis ἴασιν. spoken of God, Acts iv. 30; 
ἀγκύρας. properly, to carry forward [R. V. /ay out] the 
cable to which the anchor is fastened, i. e. to cast anchor, 
[the idea of extending the cables runs into that of car- 
rying out and dropping the anchors ” (Hackett) ; ef. B. D. 


ἐκτελέω 


Am. ed. p. 8009" last par.], Acts xxvii. 30. [Comr.: ἐπ-ν 
ὑπερ-εκτείνω. ἢ" 

ἐκ-τελέω, -ῶ : 1 aor. inf. ἐκτελέσαι; fo finish, complete: 
Lk. xiv. 29 sq. (From Hom. down; i. q- 53, Deut. 
xxxii. 45.) * 

ἐκ-τένεια, -as, ἡ, (ἐκτενής), a later Grk. word, (cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 311); 8. prop. extension. Ὅ. intentness 
(of mind), earnestness: ἐν éxreveia, earnestly, Acts xxvi. 7. 
(2 Mace. xiv. 38; Judith iv. 9. Cf. Grimm on 3 Mace. 
vi. 41 [where he refers to Cic. ad Att. 10, 17, 1 

ἐκτενής, -és, (ἐκτείνω), prop. stretched out; fig. intent, 
earnest, assiduous : προσευχή, Acts xii. ὃ RG (εὐχή, Ignat. 
[interpol.] ad Eph. 10; δέησις x. ἱκεσία, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
59,2); ἀγάπη, 1 Pet. iv. 8. Neut. of the compar. éxre- 
νέστερον, as adv., more intently, more earnestly, Lk. xxii. 44 
[12 br. WH reject the pass.]. (ἐκτενὴς φίλος, Aeschyl. 
suppl. 983; Polyb. 22, 5,4; then very often fr. Philo 
on; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311.) * 

ἐκτενῶς, adv., earnestly, fervently: Acts xii. 5 LT Tr 
WIL; ἀγαπᾶν. 1 Pet. i. 22. (Jonah iii. 8; Joel i. 14; 3 
Mace. ν. 9. Polyb. ete. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311; [W. 
25; 463 (431)].)* 

ἐκ-τίθημι : 1 aor. pass. ptep. ἐκτεθείς ; Mid., impf. ἐξετι- 
θέμην ; 2 aor. e&ebeunv; to place or set out, expose; Ὶ- 
prop.: an infant, Acts vii. 21; (Sap. xviii. 5; [Hdt. 1, 
112]; Arstph. nub. 531; Ael. v. h. 2,7; Leian. de 
sacrif. 5, and often). 2. Mid. metaph. /o set forth, de- 
clare, expound: Acts xi. 4; τί, Acts xviii. 26; xxviii. 23; 
([Aristot. passim]; Diod. 12, 18; Joseph. antt. 1, 12, 2; 
Athen. 7 p. 278 d.; al.).* 

ἐκ-τινάσσω: 1 aor. impv. ἐκτινάξατε ; 1 aor. mid. ptep. 
ἐκτιναξάμενος ; 10 shake off, so that something adhering 
shall fall: τὸν χοῦν, Mk. vi. 11; τὸν κονιορτόν, Mt. x. 14 
(where the gen. τῶν ποδῶν does not depend on the verb 
but on the subst. [L T WH mrg., however, insert ék]}) ; 
by this symbolic act a person expresses extreme con- 
tempt for another and refuses to have any further inter- 
course with him [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Dust] ; Mid. to shake 
off for (the cleansing of) one’s self: τ. κονιορτὸν... 
Twa, against one, Acts xiii. 51; τὰ ἱμάτια, dust from gar- 
ments, Acts xviii. 6; [ef. B. D. u.s.; Neh. v.13]. (/o knock 
out, rods ὀδόντας. Hom. Il. 16, 348; Plut. Cat. maj. 14.)* 

ἕκτος, -n, -ov, the sixth: Mt. xx. 5, ete. [From Hom. 
down. | 

ἐκτός, adv., (opp. to ἐντός, q. v-), outside, beyond; a. 
τὸ ἐκτός, the outside, exterior, with possess. gen., Mt. xxiii. 
On the pleonastic 


ae, 
επι 


26 (cf. τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου, 25). 
phrase ἐκτὸς εἰ μή, see εἰ, IIT. 8 ἃ. 
a prep. [ef. W. § 54,6], and is foll. by the gen. [so even 
in Hom.}]; a. outside of: ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος out of the 
body, i. e. freed from it, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. (in vs. 3 L T Tr 
WH read χωρίς for ἐκτός) : εἶναι ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώμ. [ A. V. 
without the body i. 6.1, does not pertain to the body, 1 
Co. vi. 18. β. beyond, besides, except: Acts xxvi. 22 
(where the constr. is οὐδὲν λέγων ἐκτὸς τούτων, ἅτε of. . « 
ἐλάλησαν ete. [cf. B. 287 (246) ; W. 158 (149) sq-]); 1 
Co. xv. 27. (Sept. for 335 foll. by 112, Judg. viii. 26; 
qadp, 1K. x. 13; 2 Chr. ix. 12; xvii. 19.)* 


200 


b. It has the force of | 


expevya 


ἐκ-τρέπω : Pass., [pres. exrpémopat]; 2 aor. ἐξετράπην: 
2 fut. ἐκτραπήσομαι; 1. 10 turn or twist out; pass. in 
a medical sense, in a fig. of the limbs: ἵνα μὴ τὸ χωλὸν 
extpar, lest it be wrenched out of (its proper) place, 
dislocated, [R. V. mrg. put out of joint], (see exx. of this 
use fr. med. writ. in Steph. Thesaur. iii. col. 607 d.), i. 6. 
lest he who is weak in a state of grace fall therefrom, 
Heb. xii. 13 [but Liinem., Delitzsch, al., still adhere to 
the meaning turn aside, go astray; cf. A. V., R. V. txt.]. 
2. to turn off or aside; pass. in a mid. sense [cf. B. 192 
(166 sq.)], to turn one’s self aside, to be turned aside; (in- 
trans.) to turn aside; Hesych.: ἐξετράπησαν - ἐξέκλιναν, 
(τῆς ὁδοῦ, Leian. dial. deor. 25, 2; Ael. v. h. 14, 49 [48]; 
ἔξω τῆς ὁδοῦ, Arr. exp. Al. 3, 21, 7 [4]; absol. Xen. an. 
4, 5,15; Arstph. Plut. 837; with mention of the place 
to which, Hat. 6, 34; Plat. Soph. p. 222 a.; al.); figu- 
ratively : εἰς ματαιολογίαν, 1 Tim. i. 6; ἐπὶ τοὺς μύθους, 2 
Tim. iv. 4; ὀπίσω τινός, to turn away from one in order to 
follow another, 1 Tim. ν. 15, (εἰς ἀδίκους πράξεις, Joseph. 
antt. 8, 10, 2). with ace. to turn away from, to shun a 
thing, to avoid meeting or associating with one: τὰς Kevo- 
φωνίας, 1 Tim. vi. 20, (τὸν ἔλεγχον, Polyb. 35, 4, 14; 
Γάλλους ἐκτρέπεσθαι καὶ σύνοδον φεύγειν τὴν μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, 
Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 40).* 

ἐκ-τρέφω ; fr. Aeschyl. down; 1. fo nourish up to 
maturity; then univ. to nourish: τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σάρκα, Eph. 
vy. 29. 2. to nurture, bring up: τὰ τέκνα, Eph. vi. 4." 

[ἔκτρομος. adj., (cf. expoBos), trembling exceedingly, ex- 
ceedingly terrified : Heb. xii. 21 Tr mrg. WH mrg., after 
eodd. Sin. and Clarom. (al. ἔντρομος, 4. v-). Not found 
elsewhere.* ] 

ἔκ-τρωμα. -ros, τό, (ἐκτιτρώσκω to cause or to suffer abor- 
tion; like ἔκβρωμα fr. ἐκβιβρώσκω), an abortion, abortive 
birth; an untimely birth: 1 Co. xv. 8, where Paul likens 
himself to an ἔκτρωμα, and in vs. 9 explains in what sense: 
that he is as inferior to the rest of the apostles as an im- 
mature birth comes short of a mature one, and is no more 


* worthy of the name of an apostle than an abortion is of 


the name of achild. (Num. xii. 12; Eccl. vi. 3; Job 
iii. 16; in Grk. first used by Aristot. de gen. an. 4, 5, 4 
ΓΡ. 773, 18]; but, as Phrynichus shows, p. 208 sq. ed. 
Lob., [288 sq. ed. Rutherford], ἄμβλωμα and ἐξάμβλωμα 
are preferable ; [Huztable in “ Expositor” for Apr. 1882 
p- 277 sqq.; Bp. Lghtft. Ignat. ad Rom. 9 p. 230 sq.].)* 

ἐκ-φέρω : fut. ἐξοίσω; 1 aor. ἐξήνεγκα ; 2 aor. ἐξήνεγκον; 
1. to carry out, to bear forth: τινά, Acts v. 15; the dead 
for burial, Acts v. 6, 9 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. I]. 24, 786 down; see ἐκκομίζω); τί, Lk. xv. 22; 1 
Tim. vi. 7. 2. to (bring i. e.) lead out: twa, Mk. viii. 
23 T Tr txt. WH. 3. to bring forth i. e. produce : of 
the earth bearing plants, Heb. vi. 8 [cf. W. § 45, 6 a.]; 
(Hat. 1,193; Xen. oec. 16,5; 4.6]. ν. ἢ. 3, 18 and often ; 
Sept., Gen. i. 12; Hag. i. 11; Cant. ii. 13).* 

ἐκ-φεύγω : fut. expevEouar; pf. ἐκπέφευγα; 2 aor. ἐξ- 
épvyov; [fr. Hom. down]; to flee out of, flee away; a. 
to seek safety in flight; absol. Acts xvi. 27; ἐκ τοῦ οἴκου, 
Acts xix. 16. b. fo escape: 1 Th. v. 3; Heb. ii. 3; τί, 
Lk. xxi. 36; Ro. ii. 3; τινά, Heb. xii. 25 L T Tr WH; 


ἐκφοβέω 2 
[τὰς χεῖράς τινος, 2 Co. xi. 33. Cf. ΥΥ. 8 52, 4,4 ; B. 146 
(128) 54ᾳ.1." 

ἐκ-φοβέω, -a; to frighten away, to terrify ; to throw into 
violent fright: τινά, 2 Co. x.9. (Deut. xxviii. 26; Zeph. 
iii. 13, ete.; Thuc., Plat., al.) * 

ἔκφοβος, -ov, stricken with fear or terror, exceedingly 
frightened, terrified: Mk. ix. 6; Heb. xii. 21 fr. Deut. ix. 
19. (Aristot. physiogn. 6 [p. 812°, 291; Plut. Fab. 6.)* 

ἐκ-φύω;; 2 aor. pass. ἐξεφύην (W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60) ; 
Kriiger § 40, s. v. φύω ; [ Veitch ibid.]) ; [fr. Hom. down]; 
to generate or produce from; to cause to grow out: ὅταν ὁ 
κλάδος . . . τὰ φύλλα ἐκφύῃ (subj. pres.), when the branch 
has become tender and puts forth leaves, R (not ΒΡ) GT 
WH in Mt. xxiv. 32 and Mk. xiii. 28; [al., retaining the 
same accentuation, regard it as 2 aor. act. subj. intrans., 
with ra φύλ. as subject; but against the change of sub- 
ject see Meyer or Weiss]. But Fritzsche, Lchm., Treg., 
al. have with reason restored [after Erasmus] ἐκφυῇ (2 
aor. pass. subj.), which Grsb. had approved: when the 
leaves have grown out,—so that τὰ φύλλα is the subject.* 

ἐκ-χέω and (a form censured by the grammarians, see 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 726) ἐκχύνω (whence pres. pass. ptep. 
ἐκχυνόμενος and, in L T Tr WH after the Aeolic form, 
ἐκχυννόμενος [cf. B. 69 (61); W.§ 2,1d.; Taf. Proleg. 
p- 79]: Mt. xxiii. 35; xxvi. 28: Mk. xiv. 24; Lk. xi. 50 
[where Tr txt. WH txt. ἐκκεχυμένον for ἐκχυννόμενον ; 
xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]); impv. plur. ἐκχέετε 
(Rey. xvi. 1 LT WH; on which uncontr. form cf. Bit. 
Gram. p. 196 [p. 174 Robinson’s trans.]; B. 44 (38); 
[some would make it a 2 aor., see WH. App. p. 165]); 
fut. ἐκχεῶ (Acts ii. 17 sq.; Ex. xxix. 12), for which the 
earlier Greek used ἐκχεύσω (W. 77 (74); [ef. 85 (82); 
esp. B. 68 (60)]); 1 aor. ἐξέχεα, 3 pers. sing. ἐξέχεε 
({whereas the 3 sing. of the im pf. is contr. τέχεε -€xet, 
ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 299 sq.]; ef. Bétm. Gram. 
p- 196 note **[Eng. trans. u. 5. note ¢]), inf. ἐκχέαι (Ro. 
iii. 15; Is. lix. 7; Ezek. ix. 8); Pass., [pres. ἐκχεῖται, 
Mk. ii. 22 RG LTrmrg.br.; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐξεχεῖτο, 
Acts xxii. 20 R G, ἐξεχύννετο L T Tr WH); pf. ἐκκέ- 
χυμαι; 1 aor. ἐξεχύθην; 1 fut. ἐκχυθήσομαι (see B. 69 
(60) sq.); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 72; to pour out; 
a. prop.: φιάλην, by meton. of the container for the 
contained, Rev. xvi. 1-4, 8, 10, 12, 17; of wine, which 
when the vessel is burst runs out and is lost, Mt. ix. 17; 
Mk. ii. 22 [RGLTrmrg. in br.]; Lk. v. 37; used of 
other things usually guarded with care which are poured 
forth or cast out: of money, Jn. ii. 15; ἐξεχύθη τὰ σπλάγ- 
xva, of the ruptured body of a man, Acts i. 18 (ἐξεχύθη 
ἡ κοιλία αὐτοῦ εἰς τ. γῆν, οἵ a man thrust through with a 
sword, 3 5. χχ. 10). The phrase αἷμα ἐκχεῖν or ἐκχύ- 
v(v)ew is freq. used of bloodshed: [Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 
50; Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6° (where Tdf. 
aizata)]|; see αἷμα, 2a. b. metaph. i. q. to bestow or 
distribute largely (cf. Fritzsche on Tob. iv. 17 and Sir. 
i. 8): τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον or ἀπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος. i. 6. the 
abundant bestowal of the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33 fr. 
Joel ii. 28, 29 (iii. 1, 2); ἐπί τινα, Acts ii. 17 sq.: x. 45; 
Tit. iii. 6; ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ev ταῖς καρδίαις 


01 


ἐλαιών 


ἡμῶν διὰ rv. ἁγίου, the Holy Spirit gives our souls ἃ rich 
sense of the greatness of God’s love for us, Ro. v. 5; 
(ὀργήν, Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 8, [ef. xvi.11]). The pass., 
like the Lat. effundor, me effundo, is used of those who 
give themselves up to a thing, rush headlong into it, (γέ- 
λωτι, Alciphr.; εἰς ἑταίρας, Polyb. 32, 11,4): absol. τῇ 
πλάνῃ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ μισθοῦ ἐξεχύθησαν, led astray by the 
hire of Balaam (i. 6. by the same love of reward as Ba- 
laam) they gave themselves up, sc. to wickedness, Jude 
11, (so ἐκχυθῆναι in Arstph. vesp. 1469 is used absol. of 
one giving himself up to joy. The passage in Jude is 
generally explained thus: “for hire they gave themselves 
up to [R. V. ran riotously in] the error of Balaam”; cf. 
W. 206 (194) [and De Wette (ed. Briickner) ad loc.]).* 

ἐκ-χύνω, and (1, T Tr WH) ἐκχύννω, see ἐκχέω. 
[Come.: ὑπερ- εκχύνω.] 

ἐκ-χωρέω, -@; [fr. Soph. and Hdt. on}; to depart from; 
to remove from in the sense of fleeing from: Lk. xxi. 21. 
(For n73, Am. vii. 12.) * 

ἐκ-ψύχω: 1 aor. ἐξέψυξα; to expire, to breathe out one’s 
life (see éxmvéw): Acts v. 5,10; xii. 23. (Hippocr., 
Jambl.) * 

ἑκών, -ovca, -dv, unforced, voluntary, willing, of one’s 
own will, of one’s own accord: Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 17. 
[From Hom. down. ]* 

ἐλαία, -as, ἡ. [fr Hom. down], Sept. for ΠῚ; 1. an 
olive tree: Ro. xi. 17, 24; plur. Rev. xi. 4. τὸ ὄρος τῶν 
ἐλαιῶν (for OI 7, Zech. xiv. 4), the Mount of Olives, 
so called from the multitude of olive-trees which grew 
upon it, distant from Jerusalem (Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6) 
five stadia eastward (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Oelberg; Ar- 
nold in Herzog x. p. 549 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 
354 sq.; [Grove and Porter in BB.DD.]}): Mt. xxi. 1; 
xxiv: 3; xxvi. 30; Mk. xi. 1; xiii. 3; xiv. 26; Lk. xix. 
37; xxii. 39; Jn. viii. 1 Rec.; (on Lk. xix. 29; xxi. 37, 
see ἐλαιών). 2. an olive, the fruit of the olive-tree: 
das. iii. 12.* 

ἔλαιον, -ov, τό, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for jaw, 
also for 17737; olive-oil: used for feeding lamps, Mt. xxv. 
3 sq. 8; for healing the sick, Mk. vi. 13; Lk. x. 34; Jas. 
v.14; for anointing the head and body at feasts (Athen. 
15, c. 11) [ef. s. v. μύρον], Lk. vii. 46; Heb. i. 9 (on 
which pass. see ἀγαλλίασις) ; mentioned among articles 
of commerce. Lk. xvi. 6; Rev. vi. 6; xviii. 13. Cf. Win. 
RWB. s. v. Oel; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 354, Schneder- 
mann, Die bibl. Symbolik des Oelbaumes u. d. Oeles, in 
the Zeitschr. f. ἃ. luth. Theol. for 1874, p. 4 sqq-; [B. Ὁ. 
s. v. Oil, Π. 4; and Mey. ed. Weiss on Mk. vi. 13].* 

ἐλαιών, -dvos, 6, (the ending ὧν in derivative nouns in- 
dicating a place set with trees of the kind designated 
by the primitive, as δαφνών, ἰτεών, δρυμών, κεδρών, cf. 
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 422 sqq.; Kihneri. p. 711; [Jelf 
§ 335 d.]); an olive-orchard, a place planted with olive 
trees, i.e. the Mount of Olives [ A.V. Olivet] (see ἐλαία. 1) : 
Acts i. 12 (διὰ τοῦ ἐλαιῶνος ὄρους, Joseph. antt. 7, 9, 2). 
In Lk. xix. 29; xxi. 37 also we should write τὸ ὄρος τὸ 
καλούμενον ἐλαιών (so 1, T Tr, [but WH with RG -ὧν]): 
likewise in Joseph. antt. 20, 8,6 πρὸς ὄρος τὸ προσαγο 


Ἐλαμίτης 


ρευόμενον ἐλαιών; b. 1. 2,13, 5 and 5, 2, 3 εἰς (κατὰ) 
ἐλαιὼν καλούμενον ὄρος ; 6, 2, 8 κατὰ τὸ ἐλαιὼν ὄρος ; [but 
in Joseph. ll. ec. Bekker edits τῶν]. Cf. Fritzsche on 
Mk. p. 794 sq.; B. 22 (19 sq.); W. 182 (171) n. 1; [but 
see WH. App. p. 158°]. (The Sept. sometimes render 
nv freely by ἐλαιών, as Ex. xxiii. 11; Deut. vi. 11; 15. 
viii. 14, ete.; not found in Grk. writ.) * 

᾿Ἐλαμίτης (T WH’ ᾿Ἐλαμείτης, [see 5. v. et, 67}. του; 6, an 
Elamite, i. e. an inhabitant of the province of Elymais, 
a region stretching southwards to the Persian Gulf, but 
the boundaries of which are variously given (ef. Win. 
RWB. 5. v. Elam; Vaihinger in Herzog iii. p. 747 sqq.; 
Dilimann in Schenkel ii. p. 91 sq-; Schrader in Riehm 
p- 358 sq.; Grimm on 1 Mace. vi. 1; [BB.DD. s. vv. 
Elam, Elamites]): Actsii.9. (Is. xxi. 2; in Grk. writ. 
ἘἘλυμαῖος, and so Judith i. 6.) * 

ἐλάσσων [in Jn., Ro.] or -rrwy [in Heb., 1 Tim.; ef. B. 
7], τον, (compar. of the Epic adj. ἐλαχύς equiv. to μικρός), 
[fr. Hom. down], less, —either in age (younger), Ro. ix. 
12; or in rank, Heb. vii. 7; or in excellence, worse (opp. 
to καλός), Jn. ii. 10. Neuter ἔλαττον, adverbially, less 
[se. than ete., A. V. under; cf. W. 239 (225); 595 sq. 
(654); B. 127 sq. (112)]: 1 Tim. v. 9-* 

ἐλαττονέω [B. 7], τῶ: 1 aor. ἠλαττόνησα ;; (ἔλαττον) ; 
not found in prof. auth. [yet see Aristot. de plant. 2, 3 
p- 825%, 23]; to be less, inferior, (in possessions): 2 Co. 
viii. 15 fr. Ex. xvi. 18. (Prov. xi. 24; Sir. xix. (5) 6; 
also transitively, to make less, diminish: Gen. viii. 3; 
Prov. xiv. 34; 2 Mace. xiii. 19, ete.) * 

ἐλαττόω [B. 7], τῶ: 1 aor. ἠλάττωσα; Pass., [pres. 
ἐλαττοῦμαι] ; pf. ptep. ἠλαττωμένος ; (ἐλάττων) ; to make 
less or inferior: τινά, in dignity, Heb. ii. 7; Pass. to be 
made less or inferior: in dignity, Heb. ii. 9; to decrease 
(opp. to αὐξάνω), in authority and popularity, Jn. iii. 30. 
(Many times in Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. on.) * 

ἐλαύνω ; pf. ptep. ἐληλακώς ; Pass., [pres. edavvopac] ; 
impf. ἠλαυνόμην ; to drive: of the wind driving ships or 
clouds, Jas. iii. 4; 2 Pet. ii. 17; of sailors propelling a 
vessel by oars, to row, Mk. vi. 48; to be carried in a 
ship, to sail, Jn. vi. 19, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; often also with νῆα or ναῦν added); of demons 
driving to some place the men whom they possess, Lk. 
viii. 29. [Comp.: ἀπ-, συν-ελαύνω.] * 

ἐλαφρία, -as, 7), (ἐλαφρός, lightness; used of levity and 
fickleness of mind, 2 Co.i. 17; a later word, cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 343.* 

ἐλαφρός, -d, -dv, light in weight, quick, agile; a light 
φορτίον is used fig. concerning the commandments of 
Jesus, easy to be kept, Mt. xi. 30; neut. τὸ ἐλαφρόν, 
substantively, the lightness: τῆς θλίψεως ΓΑ. V. our light 
affliction], 2 Co. iv. 17. (From Hom. down.) * 

ἐλάχιστος, -η, -ov, (superl. of the adj. μικρός, but com- 
ing fr. ἐλαχύς), [(Hom. h. Mere. 578), Hdt. down], small- 
est, least, — whether in size: Jas. iii. 4; in amount: of 
the management of affairs, πιστὸς ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ, Lk. xvi. 
10 (opp. to ἐν πολλῷ); xix. 17; ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ ἄδικος, Lk. 
xvi. 10; in importance: what is of the least moment, 
1 Co. vi. 2; in authority: of commandments, Mt. νυ. 19; 


202 


ἐλέγχω 


in the estimation of men: of persons, Mt. xxv. 40, 45: 
in rank and excellence: of persons, Mt. v.19; 1 Co. xv. 
9; of a town, Mt. ii. 6. οὐδὲ [RG οὔτε] ἐλάχιστον, not 
even a very small thing, Lk. xii. 26; ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν 
ἐστι (see εἰμί, V. 2 ¢.), 1 Co. iv. 8." 

ἐλαχιστότερος, -a, -ov, (compar. formed fr. the superl. 
ἐλάχιστος ; there is also a superl. ἐλαχιστότατος ; “it is 
well known that this kind of double comparison is com- 
mon in the poets; but in prose, it is regarded as faulty.” 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 136; ef. W. § 11, 2 b., [also 27 (26) ; 
B. 28 (25)]), less than the least, lower than the lowest: 
Eph. iii. 8.* 

ἐλάω, see ἐλαύνω. 

Ἐλεάζαρ, (713'78 whom God helps), 6, indecl., Eleazar, 
one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 15.* 

ἐλεάω, adopted for the more com. ἐλεέω (q. v.) by LT Tr 
WH in Ro. ix. 16 and Jude 23, [also by WH Tr mrg. in 
22]; (Prov. xxi. 26 cod. Vat.; 4 Mace. ix. 3 var.; Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 13, 2; Polye. ad Philip. 2, 2). Cf. W. 85 
(82); B. 57 (50); [Mullach p. 252; WH. App. p. 166; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122].* 

ἐλεγμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (el€yxw), correction, reproof, censure : 2 
Tim. iii. 16 L T Tr WH for RG ἔλεγχον. (Sir. xxi. 6; 
χχχν. (xxxii.) 17, ete.; for AMD\A chastisement, punish- 
ment, 2 K. xix. 3; Ps. exlix. 7; [Is. xxxvii. 3; etc.]. Not 
found in prof. writ.)* 

ἔλεγξις, -ews, 7, (ἐλέγχω, 4. v-), refutation, rebuke ; 
(Vulg. correptio; Augustine, convictio): ἔλεγξιν ἔσχεν 
ἰδίας παρανομίας, he was rebuked for his own transgres- 
sion, 2 Pet. ii. 16. (Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 22 [p. 74 ed. 
Olear.]; Sept., Job xxi. 4; xxiii. 2, for Mw complaint ; 
[Protevangel. Jacob. 16, 1 τὸ ὕδωρ τῆς ἐλέγξεως κυρίου 
(Sept. Num. ν. 18 τὸ ὕδωρ τοῦ ἐλεγμοῦ) J.) * 

ἔλεγχος, -ov, ὅ, (ἐλέγχω) ; 1. a proof, that by which 
a thing is proved or tested, (τὸ πρᾶγμα τὸν ἔλεγχον δώσει, 
Dem. 44, 15 [i. 6. in Phil. 1, 15]; τῆς εὐψυχίας, Eur. Here. 
fur. 162; ἐνθάδ᾽ ὁ ἔλεγχος τοῦ πράγματος, Epict. diss. 3, 10, 
11; al.): τῶν for rather, πραγμάτων] οὐ βλεπομένων, 
that by which invisible things are proved (and we are 
convinced of their reality), Heb. xi. 1 (Vulg. argumen- 
tum non apparentium [Tdf. rerum arg. non parentum]) ; 
[al. take the word here (in accordance with the preced- 
ing ὑπόστασις, q. v-) of the inward result of proving viz. 
a conviction; see Liinem. ad loc.]. 2. conviction (Au- 
gustine, convictio) : πρὸς ἔλεγχον, for convicting one of 
his sinfulness, 2 Tim. iii. 16 RG. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al. ; 
Sept. chiefly for NM3/n.)* 

ἐλέγχω ; fut. ἐλέγξω ; 1 aor. inf. ἐλέγξαι, impy. ἔλεγξον; 
[Pass., pres. ἐλέγχομαι ; 1 aor. ἐλέγχθην] ; Sept. for M37; 
1. to convict, refute, confute, generally with a suggestion 
of the shame of the person convicted, [* ἐλέγχειν hat ei- 
gentlich nicht die Bedeutung ‘ tadeln, schmihen, zurecht- 
weisen, welche ihm die Lexika zuschreiben, sondern 
bedeutet nichts als iiberfiihren” (Schmidt ch. iv. § 12)]: 
twa, of crime, fault, or error; of sin, 1 Co. xiv. 24; 
ἐλεγχόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου ὡς παραβάται, Jas. ii. 9; ὑπὸ 
τῆς συνειδήσεως, Jn. viii. 9 RG (Philo, opp. ii. p- 649 
[ed. Mang., vi. 203 ed. Richter, frag. περὶ ἀναστάσεως καὶ 


ἐλεεινός 


κρίσεως] τὸ συνειδὸς ἔλεγχος ἀδέκαστος καὶ πάντων ἀψευ- 
δέστατος) ; foll. by περί with gen. of thing, Jn. viii. 46 ; 
xvi. 8, and L T Tr WH in Jude 15, (Arstph. Plut. 574) ; 
contextually, by conviction to bring to light, to expose: τί, 
Jn. iii. 20, cf. 21; Eph. v. 11, 13, (Arstph. eccl. 485; 
τὰ κρυπτά, Artem. oneir. 1, 68; ἐπιστάμενος, ws εἰ καὶ 
λάθοι ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ K- μὴ ἐλεγχθείη, Hdian. 3, 12, 11 [4 ed. 
Bekk. ]; al.) ; used of the exposure and confutation of false 
teachers of Christianity, Tit.i.9,13; ταῦτα ἔλεγχε; utter 
these things by way of refutation, Tit. ii. 15. 2. to 
Jind fault with, correct ; a. by word; to reprehend se- 
verely, chide, admonish, reprove: Jude 22 1, Τ Tr txt.; 
1 Tim. v. 20; 2 Tim. iv. 2; τινὰ περί τινος, Lk. iii. 19; 
contextually, to call to account, show one his fault, de- 
mand an explanation : twa, from some one, Mt. xviii. 15. 
b. by deed; to chasten, punish, (ace. to the trans. of the 
Hebr. main, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 2, ete.; Sap. xii. 2): 
Heb. xii. 5 (fr. Prov. iii. 11); Rev. iii. 19. [On this 
word cf. J. C. Hare, The Mission of the Comforter, 
note L; Trench §iv. Comp.: ἐξ, δια-κατ-(-μαι).} ἢ 

ἐλεεινός, -ἡ, -όν, (ἔλεος), fr. Hom. down, to be pitied, 
miserable: Rev. iii. 17, [where WH have adopted the 
Attic form ἐλεινός, see their App. p. 145]; compar. 1 
(Ὁ Ἐν 19: 0 Ἷ ἵν: 99. (94.}}}" 

ἐλεέω, -ῶ; fut. ἐλεήσω; 1 aor. ἠλέησα; Pass., 1 aor. 
ἠλεήθην ; 1fut.eenOjoouac; pf. ptep. ἠλεημένος ; (ἔλεος) ; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. most freq. for [271 to be gracious, 
also for DM to have mercy; several times for Son to 
spare, and DM) to console; to have mercy on: twa |W. 
§ 32, 1b. a.], to succor one afflicted or seeking aid, Mt. 
ix. 27; xv. 22; xvii. 15; xvili. 33; xx. 30 sq.; Mk. v. 19 
[here, by zeugma (W. § 66, 2 e.), the ὅσα is brought 
over with an adverbial force (W. 463 (431 sq.), how]; 
x. 47sq.; Lk. xvi. 24; xvii. 13; xviii. 38 sq.; Phil. 11. 
27; Jude 22 Rec.; absol. to succor the afflicted, to bring 
help to the wretched, [A. V. to show mercy], Ro. xii. 8; 
pass. to experience [ A. V. obtain] mercy, Mt. v. 7. Spee. 
of God granting even to the unworthy favor, benefits, 
opportunities, and particularly salvation by Christ: Ro. 
ix. 15,16 R G (see ἐλεάω), 18; xi. 32; pass., Ro. xi. 30 sq. 5 
1) Co. viis 25) 2.Co; iv. 1:1 Dim. i. 13; 1165 1 Pet. i: 10* 

[Syn. ἐλεέω, οἰκτείρω: ἐλ. to feel sympathy with the 
misery of another, esp. such sympathy as manifests itself in 
act, less freq. in word; whereas ofr. denotes the inward 
feeling of compassion which abides in the heart. A criminal 
begs ἔλεος of his judge; but hopeless suffering is often 
the object of οἰκτιρμός. Schmidt ch. 143. On the other 
hand, Fritzsche (Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 315) makes οἰκτ. 
and its derivatives the stronger terms: ἐλ. the generic word 
for the feeling excited by another’s misery ; οἶκτ. the same, 
esp. when it calls (or is suited to call) out exclamations 
and tears. | 

ἐλεημοσύνη. -ης, ἡ, (ἐλεήμων). Sept. for ποτὶ and ΠΡῚΣ 
(see δικαιοσύνη, 1 b.); 1. mercy, pity (Callim. in Del. 
152; Is. xxxviii. 18; Sir. xvii. 22 (24), etc.), esp. as ex- 
hibited in giving alms, charity: Mt. vi. 4; ποιεῖν ἐλεημο- 
σύνην, to practise the virtue of mercy or beneficence, to 
show one’s compassion, [ A. V. do alms], (ef. the similar 
phrases δικαιοσίνην, ἀλήθειαν, etc. ποιεῖν), Mt. vi. 1 Rec., 


203 


ἔλεος 


2, 8, (Sir. νι]. 10; Tob. iv. 7; xii. 8, ete.; for ton ny, 
Gen. xlvii. 29); ἐλεημοσύνας, acts of beneficence, bene. 
factions [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 77 (67)], Acts x. 2; εἴς 
τινα, Acts xxiv. 17. Hence 2. the benefaction itself, 
a donation to the poor, alms, (the Germ. Almosen [and 
the Eng. alms] being [alike] a corruption of the Grk. 
word): ἐλεημοσύνην διδόναι [(Diog. Laért. 5, 17)], Lk. 
xi. 415 xii. 33 ; αἰτεῖν, Acts iil. 2; λαμβάνειν, ib. 3; πρὸς τὴν 
ἐλεημοσ. for (the purpose of asking) alms, Acts iii. 10; 
plur., Acts ix. 36; x. 4, 31.* 

ἐλεήμων, -ov, merciful: Mt. v. 7; Heb. ii. 17. 
Hom. Od. 5, 191 on; Sept.]* 

[ἐλεινός, see eNeewwos. | 

ἔλεος, -ov, ὁ, mercy: that of God towards sinners, Tit. 
ili. 5; ἔλεον λαμβάνειν, to receive i. 6. experience, Heb. 
iv.16; that of men: readiness to help those in trouble, 
Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7 (fr. Hos. vi. 6); Mt. xxiii. 23. But 
in all these pass. LT Tr WH have adopted the neut. 
form τὸ ἔλεος (q. v.), much more com. in Hellenistic 
writ. than the mase. ὁ ἔλεος, which is the only form in 
classic Grk. [Soph. (Lex. s. v.) notes τὸ ἔλ. in Polyb. 1, 88, 
2; and Pape in Diod. Sic. 3, 18 var.]. The Grk. Mss. 
of the O. T. also freq. waver between the two forms. 
Cf. [WH. App. p. 158]; W. 66 (64); B. 22 (20).* 

ἔλεος, -ovs, τό, (a form more common in Hellenistic 
Grk. than the classic ὁ ἔλεος, q. v-), mercy; kindness or 
good will towards the miserable and afflicted, joined with 
a desire to relieve them; 1. of men towards men: 
Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; xxiii. 23, (in these three pass. ace. to 
LT Tr WH); Jas. ii. 13; ili. 17; ποιεῖν ἔλεος, to exer- 
cise the virtue of mercy, show one’s self merciful, Jas. 
ii. 13; with the addition of pera twos (in imitation of the 
very com. Hebr. phrase 7D Ὁ» ION wy, Gen. xxi. 23; 
xxiv. 12; Judg. i. 24, ete.; ef. T hiersch, De Pentateuchi 
vers. Alex. p. 147; [W. 33 (32); 376 (353) ]), to show, 
afford, mercy to one, Lk. x. 37. 2. of God towards 
men; a. univ.: Lk.i. 50; in benedictions: Gal. vi. 16; 
1 Tim. i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2; [(prob.) Tit. i. 4 RL]; 2 Jn. 
3; Jude 2. ἐμεγάλυνε κύριος τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ᾽ αὐτῆς. 
magnified his mercy towards her, i. 6. showed distin- 
guished mercy to her, (after the Hebr., see Gen. xix. 19), 
Lk. i. 58. Ὁ. esp. the merey and clemency of God in 
providing and offering to men salvation by Christ: Lk. 
i. 54; Ro. xv. 9; Eph. ii. 4; [Tit. iii. 5 LT Tr WH; Heb. 
iv. 16 L T Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 3; σπλάγχνα ἐλέους (gen. 
of quality [ef. W. 611 (568)]), wherein mercy dwells, 
—as we should say, the heart of mercy, Lk. i. 78; ποιεῖν 
ἔλεος μετά twos (see 1 above), Lk. i. 72; σκεύη ἐλέους, 
vessels (fitted for the reception) of mercy, i. e. men 
whom God has made fit to obtain salvation through 
Christ, Ro. ix. 23; τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει. by (in consequence 
of, moved by) the mercy shown you in your conversion 
to Christ, Ro. xi. 31 [ef. W. § 22, 7 (ef. § 61,3 a.); B. 157 
(137)]. 3. the mercy of Christ, whereby at his 
return to judgment he will bless true Christians with 
eternal life: Jude 21; [2 Tim. i. 16, 18, (on the repeti- 
tion of κύριος in 18 ef. Gen. xix. 24; 1S. ili. 215 xv. 
22; 2Chr. vii. 2; Gen. i. 27, etc. W. § 22, 2); but Prof. 


[From 


ἐλευθερία 2 


‘ 

Grimm understands κύριος here as referring to God; 
see κύριος, c.a.]. [Cf. Trench § xlvii.; and see ἐλεέω 
fin.}* 

ἐλευθερία, -as, ἡ. (ἐλεύθερος), liberty, [fr. Pind., Hat. 
down]; in the N.'T. 4. liberty to do or to omit things 
having no relation to salvation, 1 Co. x. 29; from the 
yoke of the Mosaic law, Gal. ii. 4; v. 1,13; 1 Pet. ii. 16; 
from Jewish errors so blinding the mental vision that it 
does not discern the majesty of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17; free- 
dom from the dominion of corrupt desires, so that we do 
by the free impulse of the soul what the will of God re- 
quires : 6 νόμος τῆς ἐλευθερίας, i. e. the Christian religion, 
which furnishes that rule of right living by which the 
liberty just mentioned is attained, Jas. i. 25; ii. 12; free- 
dom from the restraints and miseries of earthly frailty: 
so in the expression ἡ ἐλευθερία τῆς δόξης (epexeget. 
gen. [W. 531 (494) ]), manifested in the glorious condi- 
tion of the future life, Ro. viii. 21. Ὁ. fancied liberty, 
i. e. license, the liberty to do as one pleases, 2 Pet. ii. 19. 
J.C. Erler, Commentatio exeg. de libertatis christianae 
notione in N. T. libris obvia, 1830, (an essay I have never 
had the good fortune to see).* 

ἐλεύθερος, -Epa, -epov, (EAEY@Q@ i. q. ἔρχομαι [so Curtius, 
Ρ. 497, after Etym. Magn. 329, 43; Suid. col. 1202 a. ed: 
Gaisf.; but al. al., cf. Vaniéek p. 61]; hence, prop. one 
who can go whither he pleases), [fr. Hom. down], 
Sept. for wan, free ; 1. freeborn; in a civil sense, 
one who is not a slave: Jn. viii. 33; 1 Co. vii. 22; xii. 13; 
Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11; Rev. vi. 15; xiii. 16; 
xix. 18; fem., Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 sq. (opp. to ἡ παιδίσκη): 
of one who ceases to be a slave, freed, manumitted : γίνε- 
σθαι ἐλεύθερον, 1 Co. vii. 21. 2. free, exempt, unre- 
strained, not bound by an obligation: 1 Co. ix.1; ἐκ 
πάντων (see ἐκ, I. 6 fin.), 1 Co. ix. 19; ἀπότινος, free from 
i. e. no longer under obligation to, so that one may 
now do what was formerly forbidden by the person or 
thing to which he was bound, Ro. vii. 8 [ef. W. 196 sq. 
(185); B. 157 sq. (188), 269 (231)]; foll. by an inf. [W. 
319 (299); B. 260 (224)], ἐλευθέρα eoriv.. . γαμηθῆναι 
she is free to be married, has liberty to marry, 1 Co. vii. 
39; exempt from paying tribute or tax, Mt. xvii. 26. 
3. in an ethical sense: free from the yoke of the 
Mosaic law, Gal. iv. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 16; from the bondage 
of sin, Jn. viii. 36; left to one’s own will and pleasure, 
with dat. of respect, τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ, so far as relates to 
righteousness, us respects righteousness, Ro. vi. 20 (W. 
Gist 1k. 5) B: § 1335 12) 

ἐλευθερόω, -@: fut. ἐλευθερώσω; 1 aor. ἠλευθέρωσα; 
Pass., 1 aor. ἠλευθερώθην ; 1 fut. ἐλευθερωθήσομαι; (ἐλεύ- 
Oepos); [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to make free, set at liberty: 
from the dominion of sin, Jn. viii. 32, 36; τινὰ ἀπό twos, 
one from another’s control [W. 196 sq. (185); B. 157 
sq- (138)]: ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τ. ἁμαρτίας K. τοῦ θανάτου (see 
νόμος, 1), Ro. viii. 2; ἀπὸ τ. ἁμαρτίας. from the dominion 
of sin, Ro. vi. 18, 22; ἀπὸ τ. δουλείας τ. POopas εἰς τ. 
ἐλευθερίαν, to liberate from bondage (see δουλεία) and to 
bring (transfer) info ete. (see εἰς, C. 1), Ro. viii. 21; 
with a dat. commodi, τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ. that we might be pos- 


04 


ἕλκω 


sessors of liberty, Gal. v.1; ef. B. § 133, 12 [and Bp. 
Lghtft. ad loc. ].* 

ἔλευσις, -ews, ἡ, (ἔρχομαι), a coming, advent, (Dion. 
Hal. 8, 59): Acts vii. 52. (ἐν τῇ ἐλεύσει αὐτοῦ, i. 6. of 
Christ, καὶ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῇ ὑστέρᾳ. Act. Thom. 28; plur. 
ai ἐλεύσεις, of the first and the second coming of Christ 
to earth, [ren. 1, 10.) * 

ἐλεφάντινος, -ίνη, -ινον, (ἐλέφας), of ivory: Rev. xviii. 
12. [Aleae., Arstph., Polyb., al.]* 

᾿Ελιακείμ, (Ὁ ΡΝ whom God set up), Eliakim, one of 
the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13; Lk. iii. 30.* 

[ἕλιγμα, -ατος. τό, (ἑλίσσω). a roll: Jn. xix. 39 WH txt., 
where al. read piypa,q.v. (Athen., Anth. P., al.)*] 

Ἐλιέζερ, (τ my God is help), Eliezer, one of the 
ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 29." 

᾿ΕἘλιούδ. (fr. 58 and jn glory, [?]), Zliud, one of the 
ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 14 sq.* 

Ἐλισάβετ [WHI Ἔλεισ., see WH. App. p. 155, and 
8. V. et, ¢], (IVINS my God is my oath, i. 6. a worshipper 
of God), Elisabeth, wife of Zacharias the priest and 
mother of John the Baptist: Lk. i. 5 sqq.* 

Ἔλισσαϊος and (so |. T) Ἑ λισαῖος [ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 
107; Tr WH ᾿Ἐλισαῖος, cf. WH. App. p. 159], -ov, 6, 
(yds my God is salvation), Elisha, a distinguished 
O. T. prophet, the disciple, companion, and successor of 
Elijah (1 K. xix. 16 sq.; 2 KX. i—xiii.): Lk. iv. 27.* 

ἑλίσσω : fut. ἑλίξω [Recs ed.]; [pres. pass. ἑλίσσομαι; 
fr. Hom. down]; to roll up, fold together: Heb. i. 12 
[where TTrmrg. ἀλλάξεις}, and Rey. vi. 14 LT Tr 
WH; see εἱλίσσω." 

ἕλκος, -eos (-ous), [ef. Lat. uleus, ulcerare; perh. akin 
to ἕλκω (Etym. Magn. 331, 3; 641, 3), yet cf. Curtius 
§ 23], τό; 1. a wound, esp. a suppurated wound; so 
in Hom. and earlier writ. 2. fr. [Thue.], Theophr., 
Polyb. on, a sore, an ulcer: Rey. xvi. 2; plur., Lk. xvi. 
21; Rev. xvi.11. (for pny, Ex. ix. 9; Job ii. 7, ete.) * 

ἑλκόω, -@: to make sore, cause to ulcerate (Hippocr. 
and Med. writ.); Pass. to be ulcerated; pf. ptep. pass. 
ἡλκωμένος (LT Tr WH eidxop. [ WH. App. p. 161; W. 
§ 12, 8; B. 34 (30)]), full of sores: Lk. xvi. 20, (Xen. 
de re. eq. 1, 4; 5, 1).* 

ἑλκύω, see Eka. 

ἕλκω (and in later writ. ἑλκύω also [Veitch 5. v.; W. 
86 (82)]); impf. εἷλκον (Acts xxi. 30); fut. ἑλκύσω [ἐλκ. 
Rec Jn. xii. 32]; 1 aor. εἵλκυσα ([inf. (Jn. xxi. 6) 
ἑλκύσαι Rez εἰς L T WH, -κῦσαι R* G Tr]; ef. Brim. Ausf. 
Spr. § 114, vol. ii. p. 171; Kriiger § 40 5. v.; [Lob. 
Paralip. p. 35 sq.; Veitch s. v.]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
for 2: to draw; 1. prop.: τὸ δίκτυον, Jn. xxi. 6, 
11; μάχαιραν, i. 6. unsheathe, Jn. xviii. 10 (Soph. Ant. 
1208 (1233), ete.); τινά, a person forcibly and against 
his will (our drag, drag off), ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ, Acts xxi. 30; 
els τὴν ἀγοράν, Acts xvi. 19; εἰς κριτήρια, Jas. ii. 6 (πρὸς 
τὸν δῆμον, Arstph. 644. 710; and in Latin, as Caes. b. g. 
1, 53 (54, 4) cum trinis catenis vinctus traheretur, Liv. 
2, 27 eum a lictoribus jam fraheretur). 2. metaph. 
to draw by inward power, lead, impel: Jn. vi. 44 (so in 
Grk. also; as émOupias... Axovons ἐπὶ ἡδονάς, Plat. 


‘EdXas 


Phaedr. p. 238 a.; ὑπὸ τῆς ἡδονῆς ἑλκόμενοι, Ael. h. a. 6, 
31; likewise 4 Mace. xiv. 13; xv.8 (11). ¢rahit sua 
quemque voluptas, Vergil, ecl. 2,65): πάντας ἑλκύσω πρὸς 
ἐμαυτόν, 1 by my moral, my spiritual, influence will win 
over to myself the hearts of all, Jn. xii. 32. Cf. Mey. 
on Jn. vi. 44; [Trench § xxi. Comp.: ἐξέλκω.] * 

Ἕλλάς, -ados, 7, Greece i.e. Greece proper, as opp. to 
Macedonia, i. q. ᾿Αχαΐα (4. v-) in the time of the Ro- 
mans: Acts xx. 2 [cf. Wetsteim ad loc.; Mey. on xviii. 
197" 

Ἕλλην, -nvos, 6; 1. a Greek by nationality, whether 
a native of the main land or of the Greek islands or 
colonies: Acts xviii. 17 Rec.; “Ἑλληνές τε καὶ βάρβαροι, 
Ro. i. 14. 2. in a wider sense the name embraces 
all nations not Jews that made the language, cus- 
toms, and learning of the Greeks their own; so that 
where Ἕλληνες are opp. to Jews, the primary reference 
is to a difference of religion and worship: Jn. vii. 35 (cf. 
Meyer ad loc.) ; Acts xi. 20 GLT Tr [ef. B.D. Am. ed. 
p- 967]; Acts xvi. 1, 3; [xxi. 28]; 1 Co. i. 22, 23 Rec.; 
Gal. ii. 3, (Joseph. antt. 20, 11, 2) ; Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ Ἑλλη- 
ves, and the like: Acts xiv.1; xviii.4; xix.10,17; xx. 
PA Ot Gs) 19. 10 1.9); x. 12: 1 Co: 1524s xi325 
xii. 13; Gal. iii. 28; Col. iii. 11. The word is used in 
the same wide sense by the Grk. church Fathers, ef. 
Otto on Tatian p. 2; [Soph. Lex. s. v.]. The Ἕλληνες 
spoken of in Jn. xii. 20 and Acts xvii. 4 are Jewish 
proselytes from the Gentiles; see προσήλυτος, 2. [ΟἿ 
B. Ὁ. 5. v. Greece ete. (esp. Am. ed.) ] * 

Ἑλληνικός, -7, -όν. Greek, Grecian: Lk. xxiii. 38 [T 
WH Tr txt. om. L Tr mrg. br. the el.]; Rev. ix. 11. 
[From Aeschyl., Hdt. down. ]* 

Ἕλληνίς, -id0s, ἡ; 1. a Greek woman. 2. a Gen- 
tile woman; not a Jewess (see Ἕλλην, 2): Mk. vii. 26; 
Acts xvii. 12.* 

“Ἑλληνιστής, -ov, 6, (fr. ἑλληνίζω to copy the manners 
and worship of the Greeks or to use the Greek language 
[W. 94 (89 sq.), ef. 28]), a Hellenist, i. e. one who imi- 
tates the manners and customs or the worship of the 
Greeks, and uses the Greek tongue; employed in the 
N. T. of Jews born in foreign lands and speaking Greek, 
[Grecian Jews|: Acts xi. 20 R [WH; see inEAAn», 2]; 
ix. 29; the name adhered to them even after they had 
embraced Christianity, Acts vi. 1, where it is opp. to 
οἱ Ἑβραῖοι. q. v. Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Hellenisten; 
Reuss in Herzog v. p. 701 sqq.; [BB.DD. s. v. Hellen- 
ist: Farrar, St. Paul, ch. vii.; Wetst. on Acts vi. 1].* 

Ἑλληνιστί, adv., (ἑλληνίζω), in Greek, i. 6. in the 
Greek language: Jn. xix. 20; Acts xxi. 37. [Xen. an. 
ZAG 8. 415 

ἐλλογάω, i. 4. ἐλλογέω. 4. V- 

ἐλλογέω [see ἐν. III. 3], -ὦ ; [Pass., 3 pers. sing. pres. 
ἐλλογεῖται RG Ltxt TTr; impf. ἐλλογᾶτο Lmrg. WH; 
cf. WH. App. p. 166; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Mullach p. 
252; B. 57 sq. (50); W. 85 (82)]; (λόγος a reckoning, 
account) ; to reckon in, set to one’s account, lay to one’s 
charge, impute: τοῦτο ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγει (LT Tr WH ἐλλόγα 
[see reff. above]), charge this to my account, Philem. 


205 


ἐλπίς 


18; sin the penalty of which is under consideration, Ro. 
v. 13, where cf. Fritzsche p. 311. (Inscr. ap. Boeckh 
i. p. 850 [no. 1732 a.; Bp. Lghtft. adds Edict. Diocl. in 
Corp. Inserr. Lat. iii. p. 836; see further his note on 
Philem. 18; cf. B. 57 sq. (50)].) * 

᾿Ἔλμωδάμ (Lehm. Ἑλμαδάμ, T Tr WH ᾿Ἐλμαδάμ [on the 
breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 1077), ὁ, Elmodam 
or Elmadam, proper name of one of the ancestors of 
Christ: Lk. iii. 28.* 

ἐλπίζω; impf. ἤλπιζον; Attic fut. ἐλπιῶ (Mt. xii. 21, 
and often in Sept. [(whence in Ro. xy. 12); ef. B. 37 
(32); W.§13,1¢.]; the com. form ἐλπίσω does not 
occur in bibl. Grk.); 1 aor. ἤλπισα; pf. ἤλπικα ; [pres. 
pass. ἐλπίζομαι] ; (ἐλπίς, 4- v-); Sept. for M3 to trust; 
Mon to flee for refuge ; Sm to wait, to hope; to hope 
(in a religious sense, to wait for salvation with joy and 
full of confidence): τί, Ro. viii. 24 sq.; 1 Co. xiii. 7; 
(τὰ) ἐλπιζόμενα, things hoped for, Heb. xi. 1 [but WH 
mrg. connect ἐλπ. with the foll. tpayp.]; once with dat. 
of the obj. on which the hope rests, hopefully to trust 
in: τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ (as in prof. auth. once τῇ τύχῃ, 
Thue. 3, 97, 2), Mt. xii. 21 GLTTr WH [cf. B. 176 
(153)]; καθώς, 2 Co. viii. δ. foll. by an inf. relating to 
the subject of the verb ἐλπίζω [cf. W. 331 (311); B. 
259 (223)]: Lk. vi. 34; xxiii. 8; Acts xxvi.7; Ro. xv. 
24; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Phil. ii. [19], 23; 1 Tim. iii. 14; 2 Jn. 
12; 3Jn.14; foll. by a pf. inf. 2 Co. v. 11; foll. by ὅτι 
with a pres. Lk. xxiv. 21; ὅτε with a fut., Acts xxiv. 26; 
2 Co. i. 13; xiii. 6; Philem. 22. Peculiar to bibl. Grk. 
is the constr. of this verb with prepositions and a case 
of noun or pron. (cf. B. 175 (152) sq. [ef. 337 (290); 
W. § 33, d.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. iv. 10]): εἴς τινα, to direct 
hope unto one, Jn. v. 45 (pf. ἠλπίκατε. in whom you have 
put your hope, and rely upon it [W. § 40, 4 a.]); 1 
Pet. iii. 5 L TTrWH; with addition of ὅτι with fut. 
2 Co. i. 10 [L txt. Tr WH br. ὅτι, and so detach the foll. 
clause]; ἐπί τινι, to build hope on one, as on a foundation, 
(often in Sept.), Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10); 1 Tim. iv. 
10; vi. 17; ἔν tum, to repose hope in one, 1 Co. xv. 19; 
foll. by inf. Phil. ii. 19; ἐπί with ace. fo direct hope 
towards something: ἐπί τι, to hope to receive something, 
1 Pet. i. 13; ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, of those who hope for some- 
thing from God, 1 Pet. iii. 5 RG; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and 
often in Sept.). [Comp.: ἀπ-, προ-ελπίζω. * 

ἐλπίς [sometimes written ἑλπίς ἢ so WH in Ro. viii. 
20; Tdf.in Acts ii. 26; see (in 2 below, and) the reff. 
s. V. ἀφεῖδον], -ἰδος, ἡ, (ἔλπω to make to hope), Sept. for 
nua and m3, trust; TOM that in which one confides 
or to which he flees for refuge; MpA expectation, hope; 
in the classics a vox media, i. e. expectation whether of 
good or of ill; 1. rarely in a bad sense, expectation 
of evil, fear; as, τῶν κακῶν ἐλπίς. Leian. Tyrannic. ec. 
3; τοῦ φόβου ἐλπίς, Thuc. 7, 61; κακὴ ἐλπίς. Plat. rep. 
1 p. 330 e. [ef. legg. 1 p. 644 c. fin.]; πονηρὰ edz. Is. 
XXvili. 19 Sept. 2. much more freq. in the classics, 
and always in the N. T., in a good sense: expectation of 
good, hope; and in the Christian sense, joyful and con- 
fident expectation of eternal salvation: Acts xxiii. 63 


᾿Ελύμας 


xxvi. 7; Ro. v. 4.Βη.; xii. 12; xv. 13; 1 Co. xiii. 185; 1 
Pet. i. 3; iii. 15; ἀγαθὴ ἐλπίς (often in prof. auth., as 
Plat. Phaedo67c.; plur. ἐλπίδες ἀγαθαί, lege. 1 p. 649 b.; 
Xen. Ages. 1, 27), 2 Th. ii. 16; ἐλπὶς βλεπομένη. hope 
whose object is seen, Ro. viii. 24; ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος, 
God, the author of hope, Ro. xv. 13; ἡ πληροφορία τῆς 
ἐλπίδος. fulness i. 6. certainty and strength of hope, Heb. 
vi. 11; ἡ ὁμολογία τῆς ἐλπ- the confession of those things 
which we hope for, Heb. x. 23; τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπ- hope 
wherein we glory, Heb. iii. 6; ἐπεισαγωγὴ κρείττονος ἐὰ- 
ridos, the bringing in of a better hope, Heb. vii. 19; 
ἐλπίς with gen. of the subj., Acts xxviii. 20; 2 Co. i. 7 
(6); Phil. i. 20; with gen. of the obj., Acts xxvii. 20; 
Ro. v. 2; 1 Co. ix.10; 1 ΤᾺ. ν. 8; Tit. iii. 7; with gen. 
of the thing on which the hope depends, ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργα- 
σίας αὐτῶν, Acts xvi. 19; τῆς κλήσεως, Eph. i. 18; iv. 4; 
Tov εὐαγγελίου, Col. i. 23; with gen. of the pers. in whom 
hope is reposed, 1 Th. i. 3 [ef. B. 155 (136)]. ἐπ᾽ [or ἐφ᾽ 
—so Actsii. 26 LT; Ro. iv. 18 L; viii. 20 (21) T WH; cf. 
Scrivener, Introd. ete. p.565 ; (but see above, init.) ] ἐλπίδι, 
relying on hope, having hope, in hope, (Eur. Here. fur. 
804; Diod. Sic. 13, 21; ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι ἀγαθῇ. Xen. mem. 2, 
1, 18) [W. 394 (368), cf. 425 (396); B. 337 (290)]: 
Acts ii. 26 (of a return to life); Ro. iv. 18; with gen. 
of the thing hoped for added: ζωῆς αἰωνίου, Tit. i. 2; 
τοῦ μετέχειν, 1 Co. ix. 10 [GLT Tr WH); in hope, foll. 
by ὅτι, Ro. viii. 20 (21) [but Tdf. reads διότι}; on ac- 
count of the hope, for the hope [B. 165 (144) ], with gen. 
of the thing on which the hope rests, Acts xxvi. 6. παρ᾽ 
ἐλπίδα, beyond, against, hope [W. 404 (377)]: Ro. iv. 18 
(i. e. where the laws of nature left no room for hope). 
ἔχειν ἐλπίδα (often in Grk. writ.): Ro. xv. 4; 2 Co. 
iii. 12; with an inf. belonging to the person hoping, 2 
Co. x. 15; ἐλπίδα ἔχειν εἰς [Tdf. πρὸς] θεόν, foll. by ace. 
with inf. Acts xxiv. 15, (eis Χριστὸν ἔχειν τὰς ἐλπίδας, 
Acta Thomae § 28; [τ. ἐλπίδα εἰς τ. Ἰησοῦν ἐν τ. πνεύ- 
ματι ἔχοντες, Barn. ep. 11, 117}; ἐπί with dat. of pers. 1 
Jn. iii. 3; ἐλπίδα μὴ ἔχοντες, (of the heathen) having no 
hope (of salvation), Eph. ii. 12; 1 Th. iv. 13; ἡ ἐλπίς 
ἐστιν εἰς θεόν, directed unto God, 1 Pet. i. 21. By meton. 
it denotes 8. the author of hope, or he who is its foun- 
dation, (often so in Grk. auth., as Aeschyl. choéph. 
Thue. 3, 57; [ef. Ignat. ad Eph. 21, 2; ad Magn. 
11 fin.; ad Philad. 11, 2; ad Trall. inser. and 2, 2, ete.]): 
1 Tim. i. 1; 1 Th. ii. 19; with gen. of obj. added, τῆς 
δόξης, Col. i. 27. Ὄ. the thing hoped for: προσδέ- 
χεσθαι τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, Tit. ii. 13; ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης 
ἀπεκδέχεσθαι, the thing hoped for, which is righteous- 
ness [cf. Mey. ed. Sieffert ad 1.2, Gal. v. 5, (προσδοκῶν 
τὰς ὑπὸ θεοῦ ἐλπίδας. 2 Mace. vii. 14); διὰ ἐλπίδα τὴν ἀπο- 


776; 


κειμένην ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, Col. i. 5; κρατῆσαι τῆς προκειμέ- 
νης ἐλπίδος, Heb. vi. 18 (ef. Bleek ad loc.). — Zéckler, 
De vi ac notione vocis ἐλπίς in N. T. Gissae 1856.* 
*Edvpas, ὁ, [B. 20 (18) ], Elymas, an appellative name 
which Luke interprets as μάγος, --- derived either, as is 
Si 
commonly supposed, fr. the Arabic mole (elymon), 


΄ 
i. 6. wise; or, ace. to the more probable opinion of De- 


206 


ἐμβατεύω 


litzsch (Zeitschrift f. ἃ. Luth. Theol. 1877, p- 7), fr. the 
Aramaic 82°98 powerful: Acts xiii. 8. [BB.DD.s. v.]* 
ἐλωΐ (LT Ἑλωΐ, (WH doi; see I, 47), Eloi, Syriac 


form (QatX, ‘To8)for Hebr. °>x (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2): 
Mk. xv. 54. [Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. ἃ. Bibl.-Aram. p. 11.]* 


ἐμαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -od, (fr. ἐμοῦ and αὐτοῦ), reflexive pro- 
noun of Ist pers., of myself, used only in gen., dat., and 
ace. sing. [ef. B. 110 (96) sqq.]: ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ, see ἀπό, 11. 
2 d.aa.; ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτόν, under my control, Mt. viii. 9; Lk. 
vil. 8; ἐμαυτόν, myself, as opp. to Christ, the supposed 
minister of sin (vs. 17), Gal. ii. 18; tacitly opp. to an 
animal offered in sacrifice, Jn. xvii. 19; negligently for 
αὐτὸς ἐμέ, 1 Co. iv. 3 [yet οἵ. Mey. ad loc.]. As in Grk. 
writers (Matthiae § 148 Anm. 2, i. p. 354; Passow s. v. 
p- 883), its force is sometimes so weakened that it 
scarcely differs from the simple pers. pron. of the first 
person [yet denied by Meyer], as Jn. xii. 32; xiv. 21; 
Philem. 13. 

ἐμ-βαίνω [see ἐν, III. 3]; 2 aor. ἐνέβην, inf. ἐμβῆναι. 
ptep. ἐμβάς ; [fr. Hom. down]; to go into, step into: Jn. 
ν. 4 RL; εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, to embark, Mt. viii. 23, and 
often. 

ἐμ-βάλλω [see ἐν, III. 3]: 2 aor. inf. ἐμβαλεῖν ; to throw 
in, cast into: eis, Lk. xii.5. [From Hom. down. Comp.: 
παρ-εμβάλλω.} * 

ἐμ-βάπτω [see ἐν, III. 3]: 1 aor. ptep. ἐμβάψας:; to dip 
in: τί, Jn. xiii. 26" Lchm., 26 RG Ltxt.; τὴν χεῖρα ἐν 
τῷ τρυβλίῳ, Mt. xxvi. 23; mid. 6 ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ 
[Lehm. adds τὴν χεῖρα] εἰς τὸ [WH add ἕν in br.] τρι- 
βλίον, Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Xep., al.) * 

ἐμβατεύω [see ἐν, III. 3]; (ἐμβάτης stepping in, going 
in); to enter; 1. prop.: πόλιν, Eur. El. 595; πατρί- 
δος, Soph. O. T. 825; εἰς τὸ ὄρος, Joseph. antt. 2, 12,1: 
to frequent, haunt, often of gods frequenting favorite 
spots, as νῆσον, Aeschyl. Pers. 449; τῷ χωρίῳ, Dion. 
Hal. antt. 1, 77; often to come into possession of a thing: 
thus εἰς ναῦν, Dem. p. 894, 7 [6 Dind.]; τὴν γῆν, Josh. 
xix. 51 Sept.; to invade, make a hostile incursion into, εἰς 
with ace. of place, 1 Mace. xii. 25, ete. 2. _ tropically, 
(cf. Germ. eingehen); a. to go into details in narrating: 
absol. 2 Mace. ii. 30. ὍὌ. to investigate, search into, scru- 
tinize minutely: ταῖς ἐπιστήμαις, Philo, plant. Noé § 19; 
ἃ μὴ ἑώρακε ἐμβατεύων, things which he has not seen, i. 6. 
things denied to the sight (cf. 1 Jn. iv. 20), Col. ii. 18, — 
where, if with GL [in ed. min., but in ed. maj. rein- 
serted, yet in br.] T Tr WH Huther, Meyer, we expunge 
μή, we must render, “going into curious and subtile 
speculation about things which he has seen in visions 
granted him”; but ef. Baumg.-Crusius ad loc. and W. 
§ 55, 8 e.; [also Reiche (Com. crit.), Bleek, Hofm., al., 
defend the μή. But see Tdf. and WH. ad loc., and Bp. 
Lghtft.’s ‘detached note’; ef. B. 349 (300). Some in- 
terpret “(conceitedly) taking his stand on the things 
which” ete.; see under 1]; Phavor. ἐμβατεῦσαι: ἐπιβῆναι 
τὰ ἔνδον ἐξερευνῆσαι ἣ σκοπῆσαι ; [similarly Hesych. 2293, 
vol. ii. p. 73 ed. Schmidt, ef. his note; further see reff. 
in Suidas, col. 1213 d.].* 


ἐμβιβάξω 


ἐμ-βιβάζω: 1 aor. ἐνεβίβασα; to put in or on, lead in, 
cause to enter; as often in the Greek writ. twa eis τὸ 
πλοῖον : Acts xxvii. 6.* 

ἐμ-βλέπω [see ἐν, III. 3]; impf. ἐνέβλεπον ; 1 aor. ἐνέ- 
βλεψα, ptep. ἐμβλέψας ; to turn one’s eyes on; look at; 
1. prop.: with ace. Mk. viii. 25, (Anth. 11, 3; Sept. 
Judg. xvi. 27 [Alex.]); τινί (Plat. rep. 10, 608 d.; Polyb. 
15, 28, 3, and elsewhere), Mt. xix. 26; Mk. x. 21, 27; 
xiv. 67; Lk. xx. 17; xxii. 61; Jn. i. 36, 42 (43), (in all 
these pass. ἐμβλέψας αὐτῷ or αὐτοῖς λέγει or εἶπεν, cf. Xen. 
Cyr. 1, 3, 2 ἐμβλέπων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν). εἰς τ. οὐρανόν, Acts i. 
11 RGL, (εἰς τ. γῆν, Is. v. 30; viii. 22; εἰς ὀφθαλμόν, 
Plat. Ale. 1 p. 132 e.). Absol., οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον I beheld 
not, i. 6. the power of looking upon (se. surrounding 
objects) was taken away from me, Acts xxii. 11 [Trmrg. 
WH umrg. ἔβλεπ.], (2 Chr. xx. 24 [Ald.]; Xen. mem. 3, 
11, 10). 2. fig. to look at with the mind, to consider: 
Mt. vi. 26, (Is. li. 1 sq.; Sir. ii. 10; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 15; 
with ace. only, Is. v. 12; with dat., 2 Mace. xii. 45).* 

ἐμ-θριμάομαι [see ev, III. 3], -ῶμαι, depon. verb, pres. 
ptep. ἐμβριμώμενος (Jn. xi. 38, where Tdf. ἐμβριμού pe- 
vos; See ἐρωτάω, init.); impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐνεβριμῶντο 
(Mk. xiv. 5, where Tdf. -μοῦντο, cf. ἐρωτάω u.s.); 1 
aor. ἐνεβριμησάμην, and (Mt. ix. 30 LT Tr WH) ἐνε- 
βριμήθην [B. 52 (46)]; (βριμάομαι, fr. βρίμη, to be 
moved with anger) ; to snort in (of horses; Germ. darein 
schnauben): Aeschyl. sept. 461; to be very angry, to be 
moved with indignation: τινί (Liban.), Mk. xiv. 5 (see 
above); absol., with addition of ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Jn. xi. 38; 
with dat. of respect, ib. 33. In a sense unknown to 
prof. auth. to charge with earnest admonition, sternly to 
charge, threateningly to enjoin: Mt. ix. 30; Mk. i. 43.* 

ἐμέω, -ὦ [(cf. Skr. vam, Lat. vom-ere; Curtius § 452; 
Vanitek p. 886 sq.)]: 1 aor. inf. ἐμέσαι ; to vomit, vomit 
forth, throw up, fr. Hom. down: τινὰ ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, i. 6. 
to reject with extreme disgust, Rev. iii. 16.* 

ἐμ-μαίνομαι [see ἐν, III. 3]; τινί, to rage against.[A. V. 
to be exceedingly mad against] one: Acts xxvi. 11; be- 
sides only in Joseph. antt. 17, 6, 5.* 

᾿Ἐμμανονήλ, 6, Immanuel, (fr. 13 and 5s, God with 
us), i. q. savior, a name given to Christ by Matthew, i. 
23, after Is. vii. 14. Ace. to the orthodox interpreta- 
tion the name denotes the same as θεάνθρωπος, and has 
reference to the personal union of the human nature 
and the divine in Christ. [See BB. DD. 5. v.]* 

*Eppaots (in Joseph. 4150 ᾿Αμμαούς), ἡ, 2mmaus (Lat. 
gen. -untis), a village 30 stadia from Jerusalem (ace. 
to the true reading [so Dind. and Bekk.] in Joseph. b. j. 
7, 6, 63; not, as is com. said, foll. the authority of Luke, 
60 stadia), apparently represented by the modern Kulo- 
nieh (cf. Ewald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel, 2te Ausg. 
vi. p. 675 sq.; [Caspari, Chronolog. and Geograph. 
Intr. to the Life of Christ $191; Sepp, Jerus. u. ἃ. heil. 
Land, i. 52]): Lk. xxiv. 13. There was a town of the 
same name in the level country of Judza, 175 stadia 
from Jerusalem, noted for its hot springs and for the 
slaughter of the Syrians routed by Judas Maccabaeus, 
1 Mace. iii. 40, 57; afterwards fortified by Bacchides, 


207 


ἐμπαίζω 


the Syrian leader, 1 Mace. ix. 50, and from the 3d cent. 
on called Nicopolis [B. D.s.v. Emmaus or Nicopolis]. 
A third place of the same name was situated near Tibe- 
rias, and was famous for its medicinal springs. Cf. Keim 
iii. p. 555 sq. (Eng. trans. vi. 306 sq.) ; Wolf in Riehm p. 
376 sq.; [esp. Hackett in B. D. Am. ed. p. 731].* 

ἐμμένω [Tdf. ἐνμένω. Acts xiv. 22; see ἐν, III. 3]; 1 
aor. ἐνέμεινα ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; (Augustine, 
immaneo), to remain in, continue; a. prop.ina place: ἔν 
τινι; Acts xxviii. 80 T Tr WH. b. to persevere in 
anything, a state of mind, ete.; to hold fast, be true to, 
abide by, keep: τῇ πίστει, Acts xiv. 22 (νόμῳ, ὅρκοις, ete. 
in the Grk. writ.) ; ἔν τινε (more rarely so in the classics, 
as ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς, Thue. 4, 118; ἐν τῇ πίστει. Polyb. 3, 
70, 4): ἐν [so RG only] τοῖς γεγραμμένοις, Gal. iii. 10 fr. 
Deut. xxvii. 26; ἐν τῇ διαθήκῃ, Heb. viii. 9 fr. Jer. xxxviii. 
(xxxi.) 32. [Cf W. $52, 4, 5.]* 

ἐμμέσῳ, i. 4ᾳ. ἐν μέσῳ, (see μέσος, 2): Rev. i. 13; ii. 1; 
iv. 6; v. 6; xxii. 2, in Tdf. ed. 7; [see his Proleg. p. xlviii., 
(but nowhere in ed. 8, see the Proleg. p. 76 sq.); ef. 
WH. App. p. 150; B. 8}. 

Ἔμμόρ (Ἐμμώρ LT Tr, [but WH ‘Eppop, see their 
Intr. § 408] ), 6, (119M i. e. ass), Emmor [or Hamor, 
ace. to the Hebr.], proper name of a man: Acts vil. 16 ; 
see concerning him, Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 sq.* 

ἐμός, -7, -dv, (fr. ἐμοῦ), possess. pron. of the first pers., 
mine; a. that which I have; what I possess: Jn. iv. 34; 
xiii. 35; [xv. 11 ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ (see μένω, I. 1 b. a.) ]; xviii. 
36; Ro. x. 1; Philem. 12, and often; τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί, with 
my own hand [B. 117 (102) note], 1 Co. xvi. 21; Gal. 
vi. 11; Col. iv. 18; as a predicate, Jn. vii. 16; xiv. 24; 
xvi. 15; substantively, τὸ ἐμόν that which is mine, mine 
own, esp. my money, Mt. xxv. 27; divine truth, in the 
knowledge of which I excel, Jn. xvi. 15; univ. in plur. 
τὰ ἐμά my goods, Mt. xx. 15; Lk. χν. 81. b. proceeding 
from me: οἱ ἐμοὶ λόγοι, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26 [here 
Tr mrg. br. λόγ.] ; ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμός, Jn. viii. 37; ἡ ἐντολὴ 
ἡ ἐμή, In. xv. 12; ἡ ἐμὴ διδαχή, Jn. vii. 16, and in other 
exx. 6. pertaining or relating to me; a. appointed 
for me: 6 καιρὸς ὁ ἐμός, Jn. vii. 6. B. equiv. to a gen. 
of the object: ἡ ἐμὴ ἀνάμνησις, Lk. xxii. 19: 1 Co. xi. 
24; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given by W. § 22, 7; [Kuh- 
ner ὃ 454, Anm. 11; Kriiger 8 47, 7, 8]. y. ἔστιν ἐμόν 
it is mine, equiv. to, it rests with me: Mt. xx. 23; Mk. 
x. 40. In connecting the article with this pron. the 
N. T. writ. do not deviate fr. Attic usage; cf. B. 
§ 124, 6. 

ἐμπαιγμονή [see ἐν, IIT. 3], -Hs, ἡ, (€umaifw), derision. 
mockery: 2 Pet. iii. 3GLTTr WH. Not found else- 
where.* 

ἐμ-παιγμός [see ἐν, III. 3], -od, ὁ, (ἐμπαίζω). unknown 
to prof. auth., a mocking, scoffing: Heb. xi. 36; Ezek. 
xxii. 4; Sir. xxvii. 28; Sap. xii. 25; [Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii-) 
8]; torture inflicted in mockery, 2 Mace. vii. 7 [etc.].* 

ἐμ-παίζω [see ἐν, III. 3]; impf. ἐνέπαιζον : fut. ἐμπαίξω 
(Mk. x. 34 for the more com. -ξοῦμαι and -fopar) ; 1 aor. 
évéraéa (for the older ἐνέπαισα) ; Pass., 1 aor. ἐνεπαίχθην 
(Mt. ii. 16, for the older everraia@ny) ; 1 fut. ἐμπαιχθήσομαι; 


εμπαίκτης 


(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 340 sq.; Kriiger ὃ 40 8. ν. παίζω ; 
[Veitch ibid.]; B. 64 (56) sq.); to play in, τινί, Ps. 
ciii. (civ.) 26; Eur. Bacch. 867. to play with, trifle with, 
(Lat. illudere) i.e. a. to mock: absol., Mt. xx. 19; 
xxvii. 41; Mk. x. 84: xv. 31; Lk. xxiii. 11; τινί (Hat. 
4, 184), Mt. xxvii. 29, [31]; Mk. xv. 20; Lk. xiv. 29; 
xxii. 63; xxiii. 36; in pass. Lk. xviii. 32. b. to delude, 
deceive, (Soph. Ant. 799); in pass. Mt. ii. 16, (Jer. x. 
15)" 

ἐμ-παίκτης [see ἐν, III. 3], -ov, ὁ, (ἐμπαίζω), a mocker, 
a scoffer: 2 Pet. iii. 3; Jude 18; playing like children, 
Is. iii. 4. Not used by prof. auth.” 

ἐμ-περι-πατέω [Ἴ WH ἐν-, see ἐν, IIT. 3], -@: fut. ἐμπε- 
ριπατήσω; to go about in, walk in: ἕν τισι, among per- 
sons, 2 Co. vi. 16 fr. Lev. xxvi. 12. (Jobi. 7; Sap. xix. 
20; [Philo, Plut.], Leian., Achill. Tat., al.) * 

ἐμ-πίπλημι [not eure p mA. (see ἐν, ITI. 3); for eupho- 
ny’s sake, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95; Veitch p. 536] and 
ἐμπιπλάω (fr. which form comes the pres. ptep. ἐμπιπλῶν, 
Acts xiv. 17 [W.§ 14,1f.; B. 66 (58)]); 1 aor. ἐνέπλησα; 
1 aor. pass. ἐνεπλήσθην; pf. pass. ptep. ἐμπεπλησμένος ; 
Sept. for "9 and in pass. often for 3% to be satiated; 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to fill up, fill full: τινά 
τινος, to bestow something bountifully on one, Lk. i. 53; 
Acts xiv. 17, (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 14; Ps. evi. (evii.) 9; 
Is. xxix. 19; Sir. iv. 12); to fill with food, i. e. satisfy, 
satiale ; pass., Lk. vi. 25; Jn. vi. 12, (Deut. vi. 11; viii. 
10; Ruth ii. 14; Neh. ix. 25, ete.) ; to take one’s jill of, 
glut one’s desire for: pass. with gen. of pers., one’s inter- 
course and companionship, Ro. xv. 24; ef. Kypke ad 
loc. : τοῦ κάλλους αὐτῆς, gazing at her beauty, Sus. 32.* 

ἐμ-πιπράω [see ἐν, III. 3], (for the more com. ἐμπίπρημι, 
fr. πίμπρημι to burn ; on the dropping of the μ οἴ. ἐμπίπλημι. 
init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; to burn, set on jire; pres. infin. 
pass. éumurpac Gato be (inflamed, and so) swollen (Hesyeh. 
. φυσᾶν: Etym. Magn. 672, 23 πιμπρᾶσαι: φυ- 
σῶσαι ; Joseph. antt.3, 11, 6; ete.) ; of the human body 
fo swell up: from the bite of a viper, Acts xxviii. 6 
Tdf., for RG ete. πίμπρασθαι, ἃ. v. [and Veitch s. v. 
πίμπρημι]." 

ἐμ-πίπτω [see ἐν, IIL. 3]; fut. ἐμπεσοῦμαι; 2 aor. ἐν- 
érecov; [fr. Ilom. down]; to fall into: εἰς βόθυνον, Mt. 
xii. 11, and Ltxt. T Tr WH in Lk. vi. 39; eis φρέαρ, 
Lk. xiv.5 [RG]; to fall among robbers, eis τοὺς ληστάς, 
Lk. x. 36, and in metaph. phrases, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.; vi. 
9; els χεῖράς τινος, into one’s power: τοῦ θεοῦ, to incur 
(livine penalties, Heb. x. 31, as in 2 S. xxiv. 14; 1 Chr. 
xxi. 18 ;. Sir. ii. 18.* 

ἐμ-πλέκω [see ev, IIT. 3]: Pass., [pres. ἐμπλέκομαι]; 2 
aor. ptep. ἐμπλακείς ; lo inweave; trop.in pass., with dat. 
of thing, fo entangle, involve in: 2 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. ii. 
20. (From Aeschyl. down.) * 

ἐμ-πλοκή [sce ev, IIT. 3], -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐμπλέκων), an inter- 
weaving, braiding, a knot: τριχῶν [Lehm. om.], an elab- 
orate gathering of the hair into knots, Vulg. capillatura, 
[A. V. plaiting). 1 Pet. iii. 3 (κομῆς, Strab. 17 p- 828).* 

ἐμ-πνέω [Ἴ" WH ev-, see ἐν, III. 3]; 1. to breathe 
in or on, [fr. Hom. down]. 2. to inhale, (Aeschyl., 


πιμπρᾶν « 


208 


ἔμπροσθεν 


Plat., al.); with partitive gen., ἀπειλῆς x. φόνου, threat- 
ening and slaughter were so to speak the element from 
which he drew his breath, Acts ix. 1; see Meyer ad loc., 
οἵ. W. § 30, 9 ¢.; [B. 167 (146)]; ἐμπνέον ζωῆς, Sept. 
Josh. x. 40." 

ἐμ-πορεύομαι [see ἐν, III. 3]: depon. pass. with fut. mid. 
ἐμπορεύσομαι ; (fr. ἔμπορος, q. v-) ; to go a trading, to travel 
Jor business, to traffic, trade, (Thue. et sqq.; Sept.) : Jas. 
iv. 13 [R" G here give the 1 aor. subj. -σώμεθα] ; with 
the ace. of a thing, to import for sale (as ἔλαιον εἰς Αἴγυ- 
πτον, Sept. Hos. xii. 1; πορφύραν ἀπὸ Φοινίκης, Diog. Laért. 
7, 2; γλαῦκας, Leian. Nigrin. init.) ; 10. deal in; tousea 
thing or a person for gain, [A. V. make merchandise of], 
(ὥραν τοῦ σώματος, Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 8; ᾿Ασπασία ἐνεπο- 
pevero πλήθη γυναικῶν, Athen. 13 p. 569 f.): 2 Pet. ii. 3; 
cf. W. 223 (209); [B. 147 (129)].* 

ἐμπορία [see ἐν, III. 3], -as, ἡ, (ἔμπορος), trade, mer- 
chandise: Mt. xxii. 5. (Hesiod, sqq.; Sept.) * 

ἐμπόριον [see ev, III. 3], -ov, τό, (ἔμπορος), a place 
where trade is carried on, esp. a seaport; a mart, emporium; 
(Plin. forum nundinarium): οἶκος ἐμπορίου a market 
house (epexeget. gen. [W. § 59, 8 a.; A. V. a house of 
merchandise]), Jn. ii. 16. (From Hdt. down; Sept.) * 

ἔμ-πορος [see ἐν, III. 3], -ov, 6, (πόρος) ; ΠΝ αν ὁ 
ἐπ᾽ ἀλλοτρίας νεὼς πλέων μισθοῦ, ὁ ἐπιβάτης ; so Hesych., 
with whom agree Phavorinus and the Schol. ad Arstph. 
Plut. 521; and so the word is used by Homer. 2. 
after Hom. one on a journey, whether by sea or by land, 
esp. for traffic; henee 3. a merchant, (opp. to κάπηλος 
a retailer, petty tradesman): Rev. xviii. 3, 11, 15, 23; 
ἄνθρωπος ἔμπορος (see ἄνθρωπος, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 45 [WII 
txt. om. dvOp.]. (Sept. for 7d and 554.) * 

ἐμ-πρήθω : 1 aor. ἐνέπρησα; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
yw and MXN; 10. burn; destroy by fire: τὴν πόλιν, Mt. 
ΣΤ: (ip 

ἔμ-προσθϑεν (Tdf. in Rev. iv. 6 ἔνπρ. [see ev, IIT. 3; ef. 
Bttm. 87), adv. of place and of time, (fr. ἐν and πρύσθεν, 
prop. in the fore part); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. chiefly 
for “259; before. In the N. Τ᾿ used only of place; 
1. adverbially, in front, before: Rey. iv. 6 (opp. to ὄπι- 
ober, as in Palaeph. 29, 2). before: πορεύεσθαι, to pre- 
cede, to go before, Lk. xix. 28; προδρωμὼν ἔμπροσθεν, ib. 
4[T WH eis τὸ eump., ef. Hdt. 4, 61 (8, 89)], like mpo- 
πορεύεσθαι ἔμπροσθεν, Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 23 [fig. Plato, Gorg. 
Ρ. 497 a. πρόϊθι εἰς τὸ ἔμπρ.); τὰ ἔμπροσθεν the things 
which lie before one advancing, the goal set before one, 
Phil. iii. 18 (14) (opp. to τὰ ὀπίσω). 2. it serves as a 
prep., with the gen. [B. 319 (274); W. § 54,6]; a. be- 
fore, i. e. in that local region which is in front of a per- 
son or a thing: Mt. v. 24; vii. 6; Lk. v.19; xiv. 2; to 
prostrate one’s self ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ποδῶν τινος, Rev. xix. 
10; xxii. 8; yovumereiv ἔμπρ. twos, Mt. xxvii. 29; πορεύ- 
εσθαι ἔμπ. τινος, to go before one, Jn. x. 43 ἀποστέλ- 
λεσθαι Eur. τινος, to be sent before one, Jn. iii. 28; 
σαλπίζειν ἔμπ. twos, Mt. vi. 2; τὴν ὁδὸν κατασκευάσαι, 
where ἔμπρ. τινος is nearly equiv. to a dat. [οἵ. B. 172 
(150)], Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2 Rec.; Lk. vii. 27. b. δε’ 
fore, in the presence of, i. 4. opposite to, over against 


ἐμπτύω 


ore: στῆναι, Mt. xXvii. 11; ὁμολογεῖν and ἀρνεῖσθαι [B. 
176 (153) ], Mt. x. 32 sq.; xxvi. 70; Lk. xii. 8, [9 Lchm.]; 
also Gal. ii. 14; 1 Th.i.3; ii. 19; iii. 9, 13; before one, 
i.e. at his tribunal: Mt. xxv. 32; xxvii. 11; Lk. xxi. 
36; Acts xviii. 17; 2Co.v.10; 1 Th. ii. 19; [1 Jn. iii. 
19]. Here belong the expressions εὐδοκία, θέλημά ἐστι 
ἔμπροσθεν θεοῦ, it is the good pleasure, the will of God, Mt. 
xi. 26; xviii. 14; Lk. x. 21, formed after Chald. usage ; 
for in 1 S. xii. 22 the words TIM? NIN, God wills, Jona- 
than the targumist renders ~ 01) sp; cf. Fischer, De 
vitiis lexx. N. T. ete. p. 329 sq.; [ef. B.172(150)]. ο. 
before i. 6. in the sight of one: Mt. v. 16; vi. 1; xvii. 2; 
xxiii. 13 (14); Mk. ii. 12 T Trmrg. WH; ix. 2; Lk. xix. 
27; Jn. xii. 37; Actsx.4 1,  Ύ ΜΗ. d. before, de- 
noting rank: γεγονέναι ἔμπρ. τινος, to have obtained 
greater dignity than another, Jn. i. 15, 30, also 27 R L 
br.; (Gen. xlviii. 20 ἔθηκε tov ᾿Εφραϊμ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ 
Μανασσῆ; (cf. Plat. lege. 1,631 d.; 5,743 e.; 7,805 d.]).* 

ἐμ-πτύω [see ev, II]. 3]; impf. ἐνέπτυον ; fut. ἐμπτύσω ; 
1 aor. everrvoa; fut. pass. ἐμπτυσθήσομαι; [fr. Hdt. 
down]; to spit upon: τινί, Mk. x. 34; xiv. 65; xv. 19; 
εἰς τὸ πρόσωπόν τινος. Mt. xxvi. 67 (Num. xii. 14; Plut. 
ii. p. 189 a. [i. 6. reg. et imper. apotheg. Phoc. 17]; κατὰ 
τὸ πρόσωπ. τινι, Deut. xxv. 9); εἴς τινα, Mt. xxvii. 30; 
Pass. to be spit upon: Lk. xviii. 32. Muson. ap. Stob. 
floril. 19,16. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. x. 17; [ Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 66].* 

ἐμφανής [see ev, III. 3], -ἐς, (ἐμφαίνω to show in, ex- 
hibit), manifest: γίνομαι τινί, in its literal sense, Acts 
x. 40; fig., of God giving proofs of his saving grace and 
thus manifesting himself, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. Ixy. 1. [From 
Aeschyl. down. ]* 

ἐμφανίζω [see ἐν, III. 3]; fut. ἐμφανίσω [B. 37 (32)]; 
1 aor. ἐνεφάνισα ; 1 aor. pass. ἐνεφανίσθην ; fr. Xen. and 
Plato down; (ἐμφανής); 1. to manifest, exhibit to 
view : ἑαυτόν τινι, prop. to present one’s self to the sight of 
another, manifest one’s self to (Ex. xxxiii. 13), Jn. xiv. 
22; metaph. of Christ giving evidence by the action of 
the Holy Spirit on the souls of the disciples that he is 
alive in heaven, Jn. xiv. 21. Pass. to show one’s self, 
come to view, appear, be manifest: τινί (of spectres, Sap. 
xvii. 4 ; αὐτοῖς θεοὺς ἐμφανίζεσθαι λέγοντες, Diog. Laért. 
prooem. 7; so of God, Joseph. antt. 1, 13,1), Mt. xxvii. 
53; τῷ προσώπῳ τοῦ θεοῦ, of Christ appearing before God 
in heaven, Heb. ix. 24; (of God imparting to souls the 
knowledge of himself, Sap. i. 2; Theoph. Ant. ad Autol. 
ΠΣ YE 2. to indicate, disclose, declare, make known : 
foll. by ὅτι, Heb. xi. 14; with dat. of pers. Acts xxiii. 15; 
τὶ πρός τινα, ib. 22; τὶ κατά twos, to report or declare 
a thing against a person, to inform against one, Acts 
xxlv. 1; xxv. 2; περί twos, about one, Acts xxv. 15. 
[Syn. see dAdo. ]* 

ἔμτφοβος [see ἐν, IIT. 3], -ov, (φόβος), thrown into fear, 
terrified, affrighted: Lk. xxiv. 5,[37]; Acts χ. 4; (xxii. 
9 Rec.) ; xxiv. 25; Rev. xi. 13. Theophr. char. 25 (24), 
1; [1 Mace. xiii. 2; in a good sense, Sir. xix. 24 (21)]. 
(Actively, inspiring fear, terrible, Soph. O. C. 39.) * 

ἐμ-φυσάω, -ὦ [see ev, III. 3]: 1 aor. ἐνεφύσησα; to blow 


209 ἐν 


or breathe on: τινά, Jn. xx. 22, where Jesus, after the 
manner of the Hebrew prophets, expresses by the sym- 
bolic act of breathing upon the apostles the communi- 
cation of the Holy Spirit to them, — having in view the 
primary meaning of the words M3 and πνεῦμα [cf. 6. g. 
Ezek. xxxvii. 5]. (Sept.; Diose., Aret., Geop., al.; [to 
inflate, Aristot., al.].) * 

ἔμτφυτος [see ev, HI. 3], -ov, (ἐμφύω to implant), in 
prof. auth. [fr. Hdt. down] inborn, implanted by nature ; 
cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdb. on Sap. [xii. 10] p. 224; im- 
planted by others’ instruction: thus Jas. i. 21 τὸν ἔμφυτον 
λόγον, the doctrine implanted by your teachers [al. by 
God: cf. Briickner in De Wette, or Huther ad loc.], 
δέξασθε ἐν πραὕὔτητι, receive like mellow soil, as it were.* 
_ty,,a preposition taking the dative after it; Hebr. 3; 
Lat. in with abl.; Eng. in, on, at, with, by, among. [W. 
§ 48 ἃ.; B. 328 (282) sq.] It is used 

I. LocaLiy; 1. of Place proper; a. in the in- 
terior of some whole; within the limits of some space: 
ἐν γαστρί, Mt. i. 18; ἐν Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 1; ἐν τῇ πόλει, 
Lk. vii. 37; ἐν τῇ ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ, ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ἐν τῷ 
οὐρανῷ, and innumerable other exx. b. in (on) the 
surface of a place, (Germ. auf): ἐν τῷ ὄρει, Jn. iv. 20 
sq.; Heb. viii. 5; ἐν πλαξί, 2 Co. iii. 3; ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ, Mt. 
xx. 3; ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, Mt. v. 25, ete. c. of proximity, αἱ, 
near, by: ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν, Mt. vi. 5; ἐν τῷ 
Σιλωάμ, at the fountain Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4; ἐν τῷ yalo- 
φυλακίῳ, Jn. viii. 20 [see B.D. Am.ed. 5. v. Treasury : 
and on this pass. and the preceding οἵ. W. 385 (360) ]; 
καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ θεοῦ etc., at the right hand: Heb. i. 
3; vill. 1; Eph. i. 20. d. of the contents of a writ- 
ing, book, ete.: ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ, 1 Co. v. 9; ἐν κεφαλίδι 
βιβλίου γράφειν, Heb. x. 7; ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ, τῷ βιβλίῳ, Rev. 
xiii. 8; Gal. iii. 10; ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, Lk. xxiv. 44; Jn. i. 45 
(46); ἐν τοῖς προφήταις, in the book of the prophets, 
Acts xiii. 40; ἐν Ἡλίᾳ, in that portion of Scripture 
which treats of Elijah, Ro. xi. 2, cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; 
[Delitzsch, Brief ἃ. ἃ. Romer, p.12; W. 385 (360) ; B. 331 
(285)]; ἐν Δαυΐδ, in the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [see 
Δαβίδ, fin.]; ἐν τῷ “Qoné, in the prophecies of Hosea, 
Ro. ix. 25. e. trop. applied to things not perceived 
by the senses, as ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις, Mt. v. 28; 
xiii. 19; 2 Co. iv. 6, and often; ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι, 2 Co. 
v. 11. 2. with dat. of a Person, in the person, 
nature, soul, thought of any one: thus ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται 
ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν, it lies hidden as it were in the bosom of 
God until it shall come forth to view, Col. iii. 3, cf. Eph. 
iii. 9; ἐν αὐτῷ, i. e. in the person of Christ, κατοικεῖ πᾶν 
τὸ πλήρωμα ete., Col. i. 19; ii. 8 [(Ὁ). 9]. phrases in 
which ἡ ἁμαρτία is said to dwell in men, Ro. vii. 17 sq. ; 
or ὁ Χριστὸς (the mind, power, life of Christ) εἶναι, [Jn. 
xvii. 26]; Ro. viii. 10; 2 Co. xiii 5; μένειν, Jn. vi. 56; 
[xv. 4,5]; ὧην, Gal. ii. 20; μορφοῦσθαι, Gal. iv. 19; λαλεῖν. 
2 Co. xiii. 3; ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ εἶναι, 1 Jn. i. 10; μένειν, 
Jn. v. 38; ἐνοικεῖν or οἰκεῖν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Col. iii. 
16; τὸ πνεῦμα (of God, of Christ), Ro. viii. 9,11; 1 Co. 
iii. 16; 2 Tim. i. 14; τὸ ἔν tux χάρισμα, 1 Tim. iv. 14; 
2 Tim. i. 6; ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι, Mt. xiv. 2; Eph. ii. 2; 1 Co. 


ἐν 210 ἐὰ 


xii. 6, 
vii. 8. after verbs of revealing, manifesting: 
καλύψαι ἐν ἐμοί, in my soul, Gal. i. 16; φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν 
αὐτοῖς, Ro. i. 19. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, within one’s self 
i.e. in the soul, spirit, heart: after the verbs εἰδέναι. 
Jn. vi. 61; εἰπεῖν, Lk. vii. 39; xviii. 4; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, Jn. 
xi. 88; στενάζειν, Ro. viii. 23; διαλογίζεσθαι, Mk. 11. 8 
(alternating there with ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις, cf. vs. 6); Lk. 
xil. 17; διαπορεῖν, Acts x. 17; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21; 

'Lk. vii. 49; also 2 Co. i. 9; for other exx. of Tin: 
kinds, see om V.4e. 3. it answers to the Germ. an 
[on; often freely to be rendered in the case of, with, ete. 
W. § 48, a. 3a.], when used 8. of the person or 
thing on whom or on which some power is oper- 
ative: ἵνα οὕτω γένηται ἐν ἐμοί, 1 Co. ix. 15; ποιεῖν τι ἔν 
τινι, Mt. xvii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31; ef. Matthiae ii. p. 1341; 
[W.u.s. and 218 (204 sq.); B.149(130)]. Ὅ. of that 
in which something is manifest [W.u.s.]: μανθάνειν 
ἔν τινι, 1 Co. iv. 6; γινώσκειν, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35; 
1 Jn. iii. 19 (exx. fr. the classics are given by Passow 
i. 2 p. 908°; [ef. L.andS.s.v. A. III.]); likewise of that 
in which a thing is sought: ζητεῖν ἔν τινι, 1 Co. iv. 2. 
c. after verbs of stumbling, striking: προσκόπτειν, 
Ro. xiv. 21; πταίειν, Jas. ii. 10; σκανδαλίζεσθαι, q. Vv. in 
its place. 4. with, among, in the presence of, with dat. 
of pers. (also often in the classics; ef. Matthiae ii. p. 
1340; W. 385 (3860) and 217 sq. (204)): 1 Co. ii. 6; ἐν 
ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, Mt. xxi. 42; ἐν ἐμοί, in my judement, 
1 Co. xiv. 11; [perh. add Jude 1 LT Tr WH; but ef. 
6 b. below]. To this head some refer ἐν ὑμῖν, 1 Co. vi. 
2, interpreting it in your assembly, cf. Meyer ad loc.; 
but see 5 ἃ. y. 5. used of that with which a person 
is surrounded, equipped, furnished, assisted, 
or acts, [W. ὃ 48,a.1b.]; a. ini. q. among, with col- 
lective nouns: ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ, Mk. v. 30 [W. 414 (386)]; 
ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, among the men of this age, Mk. viii. 
88; ἐν τῷ γένει pou, in my nation i. e. among my country- 
men, Gal. i. 14; esp. with dat. plur. of persons, as ἐν 
ἡμῖν, ἐν ὑμῖν, among us, among you, ἐν ἀλλήλοις, among 
yourselves, one with another: Mt. ii. 6; xi. 11; Mk. ix. 
60; Lk.i.1; Jn.i. 14; xiii. 35; Acts ii. 29; 1 Co. iii. 18; 
v.1, and often. _b. of the garments with (in) which 
one is clad: ἐν ἐνδύμασι and the like, Mt. vii. 15; Mk. 
xii. 88; Lk. xxiv.4; Jn. xx.12; Acts x. 30; Heb. xi. 
87; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. iii. 4; ἠμφιεσμένον ev ἱματίοις, Mt. 
xi. 8 [T Tr WH om. L br. ivar.]; Lk. vii. 25; περιβάλλε- 
σθαι ἐν ἱματίοις, Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4 [L WH txt.om. ἐν]. ο. 
of that which one either leads or brings with hin, or 
with which he is fur nished or equipped; esp. after 
verbs of coming, (ἐν of ace ompaniment), where we 
often say with: ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντᾶν, Lk. xiv. 31; 
ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι, Jude 14; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 17; 

εἰσέρχεσθαι ἐν αἵματι, Heb. ix. 25; ἐν τῷ ὕδατι k. ἐν τῷ 
αἵματι, 1 ὅπ. v. 6 (i. e. with the water of baptism and 
the blood of atonement, by means of both which he has 
procured the pardon of our sins, of which fact we are 
assured by the testimony of the Holy Spirit); ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 
1 Co. iv. 21; ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας, Ro. xv. 29: ὠθάνειν 


> 
απο- 


ete.; ἐνεργεῖσθαι, Col. i. 29; κατεργάζεσθαι, Ro. | ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, 2 Co. x. 14; ἐν πνεύματι x. δυνάμει Ἥλιου, 


imbued or furnished with the spirit and power of Elijah, 
Lk. i. 17; ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ, furnished with the regal 
power of the Messiah, possessed of his kingly power, 
[Β. 330 (284)]: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [WH txt. L 
mrg. Trmrg. εἰς τὴν B.]. Akin is its use ἃ. of the 
instrument or means by or with which anything is 
accomplished, owing to the influence of the Hebr. prep. 
3 much more common in the sacred writ. than in prof. 
auth. (οἵ. W. § 48, a. ὃ d.; B. 181 (157) and 329 (283) 
sq-), where we say with, ἢ; means of, by (through); a 
in phrases in which the primitive force of the prep. is 
discernible, as ἐν πυρὶ κατακαίειν, Rey. xvii. 16 [Tom. 
WH br. ἐν]; ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν or ἀρτύειν, Mt. v. 13; Mk. 
ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 34; ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκάνειν, Rey. vii. 145 
ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν, Heb. ix. 22; ἐν ὕδατι βαπτίζειν, Mt. 
iii. 11, ete. (see βαπτίζω, 11. b. bb.). β. with the dat., 
where the simple dat. of the instrument might have been 
used, esp. in the Revelation: ἐν μαχαίρᾳ, ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ 
ἀποκτείνειν, Rey. vi. 8; xiii. 10; πατάσσειν, Lk. xxii. 49; 
ἀπόλλυσθαι, Mt. xxvi. 52; καταπατεῖν ἐν τοῖς ποσίν, Mt. 
vii. 6 ; ἐν βραχίονι αὐτοῦ, Lk. i. 51; ἐν δακτύλῳ θεοῦ, Lk. 
xi. 20, and in other exx.; of things relating to the soul, 
as ἐν ἁγιασμῷ, 2 Th. ii. 13 [W. 417 (388)]; 1 Pet. i. 2; 

ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει, 2 Co. vii. 7; ἐν προσευχῇ, Mt. xvii. 21 
[TWH om. Tr br. the vs.]; εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ, Eph. 
1.35; δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι, Ro. y.9. Ὑ. more rarely 
with dat. of pers., meaning aided by one, by the interven- 
tion or agency of some one, by (means of) one, [ef. W. 
389 (364); B. 329 (283) sq.]: ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν Saipo- 
viov, Mt. ix. 34; ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις, 1 Co. xiv. 21; κρίνειν 
τ. οἰκουμένην ev ἀνδρί, Acts xvii. 31; ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ 
κόσμος (preceded by οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν), 1 Co. 
vi. 2; ἐργάζεσθαι ἕν τινι, Sir. xiii. 4; xxx. 18, 84, δ. 
foll. by an inf. with the article, in that (Germ. dadurch 
dass), or like the Lat. gerund [or Eng. participial noun; 
ef. B. 264 (227)]: Acts iii . 26; iv. 30; Heb. ii. 8; viii. 
18. 6. of the state or condition in which anything 
is done or any one exists, acts, suffers; out of a great 
number of exx. (see also in γίνομαι, 5 f., and εἰμί, V.4 
b.) it is sufficient to cite: ἐν βασάνοις, Lk. xvi. 23; ἐν 
τῷ θανάτῳ, 1 Jn. iii. 14; ἐν ζωῇ, Ro. v.10; ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς, 
Philem. 13; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1 Pet. i. 6; ἐν ὁμοιώματι 
σαρκός, Ro. viii. 3; ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι, 1 Th. ii. 2; ἐν δόξη, 
Phil. iv. 19; 2 Co. iii. 7 sq.; σπείρεται ἐν φθορᾷ κτλ. it 
(se. that which is sown) is sown in a state of corrup- 
tion, sc. ὄν, 1 Co. xv. 42 sq.3 ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν, to be pre- 
pared, in readiness, 2 Co. x. 6; ἐν ἐκστάσει, Acts xi. 5; 
xxii. 17; very often so used of virtues and vices, as ἐν 
εὐσεβείᾳ κ. σεμνότητι, 1 Tim. ii. 2; ἐν ἁγιασμῷ, 1 Tim. ii. 
15; ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς, Ro. vi. 4; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ, 
Ro. iii. 26 (25); ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ, Tit. iii. 3; ἐν ravoup 
γίᾳ, 2 Co. iv. 2; also with an adverbial force: as & 
δυνάμει, powerfully, with power [W. § 51,1 6.; B. 33¢ 
(284)], Mk. ix. 1; Ro.i.4; Col. i. 29; 2 ΤῊ. 1. 115 κρίνειν 
ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, Acts xvii. 31; Rey. xix. 11; ἐν χαρᾷ, in joy, 
joyful, Ro. xv. 82; ἐν éxreveia, Acts xxvi. 7; ἐν σπουδῇ, 
Ro. xii. 8; ἐν χάριτι, Gal.i.6; 2 Th. 11. 16; ἐν τάχει. Lk. 


> 
εν 


xviii. 8; Ro. xvi. 30; Rev.i.1. [Here perh. may be 
introduced the noteworthy adv. phrase ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις, 
with all this, Lk. xvi. 26 Lmrg. T Trmrg. WH for RG 
ἐπὶ π. τ. (see ἐπί, B. 2 d.); also ἐν πᾶσιν, in all things 
[R. V. withal], Eph. vi.16 Ltxt.TTrWH.] A similar 
use occurs in speaking f. of the form in which any- 
thing appears or is exhibited, where ἐν may be repre- 
sented by the Germ. als [Eng. as]; twice so in the 
N. T.: σοφίαν λαλεῖν ἐν μυστηρίῳ (as a mystery [here 
A. V.in]), 1 Co. ii. 7; ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ὑποδείγματι πίπτειν, 
Heb. iv. 11 [(A. V. after); al. regard this as a preg- 
nant constr., the ἐν marking rest after motion (R. V.mrg. 
into); cf. Kurtz or Liinem. ad loc.; B. 329 (283); and 
7 below]; (διδόναι τι ἐν δωρεᾷ, 2 Mace. iv. 30; Polyb. 23, 
3,4; 26, 7,5; ἐν μερίδι, Sir. xxvi. 3; λαμβάνειν τι ev 
φέρνῃ, Polyb. 28, 17,9; exx. fr. Plato are given by Ast, 
Lex. Plat. i. p. 702; Lat. in mandatis dare i.e. to be 
considered as orders, Caes. b. g. 1,43). [Here perhaps 
may be noticed the apparent use of ἐν to denote “the 
measure or standard” (W. § 48, a. 8 b.; Bunhdy. 
p: 211): ἐν μέτρῳ, Eph. iv. 16 (see μέτρον, 2); ἔφερεν ev 
ἑξήκοντα etc. Mk. iv. 8 WH txt. (note the εἰς, q. v- B. II. 
3a.); καρποφοροῦσιν ἐν τριάκοντα ete. ibid. 20 T Tr txt. 
WH txt.; but some would take ἐν here distributively, 
οἵ. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 8.1 g. of the things in (with) 
which one is busied: 1 Tim. iv. 15; Col. iv. 2; ἐν ois, 
Acts xxvi. 12; ἐν αὐτῷ, in preaching the gospel, Eph. 
vi. 20; ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, in celebrating the feast, Jn. ii. 23 
[L Tr br. ἐν]; ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, in giving instruction, while 
teaching, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; see εἰμί, V.4d.; Passow 
i. p. 910°; [L. and 5. 5. v. I. 1]. h. of that in which 
anything is embodied or summed up: ἐν αὐτῷ ζωὴ 
ἦν, i. 6. that life of which created beings were made par- 
takers was comprehended in him, Jn. i. 4; ἐν τούτῳ τῷ 
λόγῳ ἀνακεφαλαιοῦται, Ro. xiii. 9, (on Eph. i. 10 see ava- 
κεφαλαιόω) ; πᾶσαν τ. συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα 
πέντε, comprised in, consisting of, seventy-five souls, Acts 
vii. 14 [W. 391 (366) ]. 6. of that in which any per- 
son or thing is inherently fixed, implanted, or 
with which it isintimately connected; a. of the 
whole in which a part inheres: prop., μένειν ἐν τῇ 
ἀμπέλῳ, In. xv. 4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλά, Ro. xii. 4; 
fig. κρεμᾶσθαι ἔν τινι, Mt. xxii. 40. b. of a person to 
whom another is wholly joined and to whose power 
and influence he is subject, so that the former may be 
likened to the place in which the latter lives and 
moves. So used in the writings of Paul and of John 
particularly of intimate relationship with God or with 
Christ, and for the most part involving contextually the 
idea of power and blessing resulting from that union; 
thus, εἶναι or μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί or ἐν τῷ θεῷ, of Christ, 
Jn. x. 38; xiv. 10 sq.; of Christians, 1 Jn. iii. 234; iv. 13, 
15 sq.; εἶναι or μένειν in Christ, of his disciples and wor- 
shippers, Jn. xiv. 20; xv.4sq.; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ K. ἐν TO 
πατρί. 1 Jn. ii. 24; ἐν θεῷ, i. 6. amplified and strength- 
ened in the fellowship of God and the consciousness of 
that fellowship, ἐργάζεσθαί τι; Jn. iii. 21; παρρησιάζεσθαι, 


211 ἐν 


ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. 
on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in 
Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: 
Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; 
Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; 
ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. 
iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν 
αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most 
intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ 
"Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; 
κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to 
die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in 
it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such 
union with Christ is the basis on which actions and 
virtues rest, the expression is equivalent in meaning 
to by virtue of spiritual fellowship or union with Christ; 
in this sense it is joined to the following words and 
phrases: πέπεισμαι, Ro. xiv. 14 [W. u.s. and 390 note]; 
πεποιθέναι, Gal. v.10; Phil. i. 14; 2 Th. iii. 4; παρρησίαν 
ἔχειν, Philem. 8; ἐλπίζειν, Phil. ii. 19; καύχησιν ἔχειν, 
Ro. xv. 17; 1 Co. xv. 31; ἀνῆκεν, Col. iii. 18; τὸ αὐτὸ 
φρονεῖν, Phil. iv. 3; ὑπακούειν, Eph. vi. 1 [Lom. Tr WH 
br. ἐν κι]; φῶς, Eph. v. 8; αὔξει, 11. 21; ζωοποιεῖσθαι. 1 
Co. xv. 22; ὁ κόπος οὐκ ἔστι κενός, ib. 58; ἅγιος, Phil. 
i. 1; ἡγιασμένος, 1 Co. i. 2; λαλεῖν, 2 Co. ii. 17; xii. 19; 
ἀλήθειαν λέγειν, Ro. ix. 1; λέγειν x. μαρτύρεσθαι, Eph. iv. 
17. Hence it denotes the Christian aim, nature, 
quality of any action or virtue; thus, εὐάρεστον ἐν 
κυρίῳ, Col. iii. 20 GL T Tr WH; προσδέχεσθαί τινα, Ro. 
xvi. 2; Phil. ii. 29; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα, No. xvi. 8, 22; 1 Co. 
xvi. 19; κοπιᾶν, Ro. xvi. 12 [W. 390 note; Lbr. the cl.]; 
γαμηθῆναι, 1 Co. vii. 39; χαίρειν, Phil. iii. 1; iv. 4, 10; 
παρακαλεῖν, 1 Th. iv. 1; προΐστασθαί twos, 1 Th. ν. 12;— 
or is equiv. to in things pertaining to Christ, in the cause 
of Christ: νήπιος, 1 Co. iii. 1; φρόνιμος, 1 Co. iv. 10; 
παιδαγωγοί, 15; ὁδοί pov, 17; θύρας por ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν 
κυρίῳ, in the kingdom of the Lord, 2 Co. ii. 12. διεκαι- 
οὔσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, by faith in Christ, Gal. 11. 17. Finally, 
it serves as a periphrasis for Christian (whether 
person or thing): τοὺς ἐκ τῶν Ναρκίσσου τοὺς ὄντας ἐν 
κυρίῳ (opp. to those of the family of Narcissus who were 
not Christians), Ro. xvi. 11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Xp. a Chris- 
tian, 2 Co. xii. 2; ai ἐκκλησίαι ai ἐν Xp. Gal. i. 22; 1 Th. 
ii. 143 of νεκροὶ ἐν Xp. those of the dead who are Chris- 
tians, 1 Th. iv. 16; ἐκλεκτὸς ἐν x. a Christian of mark, 
Ro. xvi. 13; δόκιμος ev Xp. an approved Christian, Ro. 
xvi. 10; δέσμιος ἐν κυρ. a Christian prisoner (tacitly opp. 
to prisoners of another sort [W. 388 (363) ]), Eph. iv. 
1; πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν x. Eph. vi. 21; Col. iv. 7; διακονία, 
17; ἐν Xp. γεννᾶν twa, to be the author of one’s Christian 
life or life devoted to Christ, 1 Co. iv. 15; δεσμοὶ ἐν Xp. 
bonds occasioned by one’s fellowship with Christ, Phil. 
i. 13 [al. connect ἐν Xp. here with φανερούς]: it might 
be freely rendered as Christians, as a Christian, in 1 Co. 
ix. 1 sq.; Philem. 16. ἐν πνεύματι (ἁγίῳ) εἶναι, to be in 
the power of, be actuated by, inspired by, the Holy Spirit: 


1 Th. ii. 2. Of frequent use by Paul are the phrases | Ro. viii. 9 (here in opp. to ἐν σαρκί) ; γίνεσθαι, Rev. i 


ἐν 


10; iv. 2; ἐν πνεύματι θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 1 Co. xii. 3; ἐν πνεύ- 
ματι ΟΥ̓ ἐν πν. τῷ ἁγίῳ or ἐν mv. θεοῦ sc. ὦν, (being) ini. 6. 
under the power of the Spirit, moved by the Spirit [οἵ. B. 
330 (283 sq.); W. 390 (364 sq.)]: Mt. xxii. 43; Mk. xii. 
36; Lk. ii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev. xvii. 3; xxi. 10. ἄνθρω- 
πος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ, sc. av, in the power of an un- 
clean spirit, possessed by one, Mk. i. 23; ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ 
κεῖσθαι, to be held in the power of Satan, 1Jn.v.19. οἱ 
ἐν νόμῳ, subject to the control of the law, Ro. 111. 19. ἐν 
τῷ ᾿Αδὰμ ἀποθνήσκειν, through connection with Adam, 1 
Co. xv. 22. c. of that in which other things are con- 
tained and upheld, as their cause and origin: ἐν 
αὐτῷ (i.e. in God) ζῶμεν κτλ. in God is found the cause 
why we live, Acts xvii. 28; ἐν αὐτῷ (in Christ, as the 
divine hypostatic λόγος) ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα, in him resides 
the cause why all things were originally created, Col. i. 16 
(the cause both instrumental and final as well, for 
ἐν αὐτῷ is immediately afterwards resolved into δ αὐτοῦ 
x. εἰς αὐτόν (cf. W. § 50, 6 and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]); τὰ 
πάντα ἐν αὐτῷ συνέστηκε. Col. i. 17; ἐν ᾿Ισαὰκ κληθήσεταί 
σοι σπέρμα, Ro. ix. 7; Heb. xi. 18, fr. Gen. xxi. 12; ἁγιά- 
ζεσθαι ἐν with dat. of thing, Heb. x. 10, cf. 1 Co. vi. 11; 
ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν, in this lies the reason why we be- 
lieve, Jn. xvi. 30, cf. 1 Co.iv.4; ἐν ᾧ equiv. to ἐν τούτῳ, 
ὅτι, [in that], since: Ro. viii. 3; Heb. ii. 18; vi. 17, [see 
8e. below]. Closely related is the use of ἐν d. of 
that which gives opportunity, the occasion: ἔφυγεν 
ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ (on i. e. at this word; cf. W. § 48, a. 
3c.), Acts vii.29. 6. after certain verbs denoting an 
affection, because the affection inheres or resides, as 
it were, in that to which it relates, [cf. B. 185 (160 sq.) ; 
W. 232 (217 sq.) ]; see εὐδοκέω, εὐδοκία, εὐφραίνομαι. καυ- 
χάομαι, χαίρω, ete.; likewise sometimes after ἐλπίζω, 
πιστεύω, πίστις, (which see in their prop. places), be- 
cause faith and hope are placed in what is believed or 
hoped for. 7. after verbs implying motion ev w. 
the dat. is so used as to seem, according to our laws of 
speech, to be employed for eis with the ace.; but it in- 
dicates the idea of rest and continuance succeeding the 
motion; cf. W. § 50,4; B. 328 (282) sq.: thus after 
ἀποστέλλω, Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3; εἰσέρχεσθαι, Lk. ix. 46; 
Rey. xi. 11 [not RTr; WH br. ἐν]; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Lk. vii. 
17; 1 Th.i. 8, (but not after ἔρχεσθαι in Lk. xxiii. 42, 
on which pass. see 5 6. above); καταβαίνειν, Jn. v.4 [RL; 
cf. W.§ 50,4 ἃ.1: ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων, 
that they may abide in ete. Lk. i. 17; καλεῖν ἐν εἰρήνῃ, ἐν 
ἁγιασμῷ, ἐν μιᾷ ἐλπίδι, equiv. to εἰς τὸ εἶναι ἡμᾶς (ὑμᾶς) 
ἐν οἷα. : 1 Co. νἱϊ. 15; 1 ΤῊ. ἵν. 7; Eph. iv. 4; esp. after 
τιθέναι and ἱστάναι, which words see in their places. On 
the same use of the prep., common in Homer, somewhat 
rare in the classic auth., but recurring freq. in writ. of 
a later age, see W.1.c.; Passow i. 2 p. 909°; [ef. L. and 
S.s. v. I. 8]. 8. Constructions somewhat pecul- 
jar: a. ἐν Αἰγύπτου sc. γῇ (by an ellipsis com. in Grk. 
writ., cf. Passow i. 2 p. 908°; [L. and S. 5. v. I. 2]; W. 
384 (359); [B. 171 (149)]): Heb. xi. 26 [Lchm.]; put 
see Αἴγυπτος. ὍὌ. expressions shaped by the Hebr. 
idiom: ἀγοράζειν ἐν with dat. of price (for the price is 


212 ἐν 


the means by which a thing is bought [cf. W. § 48, a. 
8.6.7), Rev. v. 9, (ἐν ἀργυρίῳ, 1 Chr. xxi. 24). ἀλλάσ- 
σειν τι ἔν τινι (see ἀλλάσσω), to exchange one thing for 
another (prop. to change something and have the ex- 
change in [ef. W. 388 (363) note; 206 (194)]): Ro. i. 
23, 25 [here μετήλλαξαν]. ὄμνυμι ἔν τινι (3 aw), cf. 
Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1355; [W. § 32, 1 b.; B. 
147 (128)]), to swear by (i. 6. the name of some one 
being interposed), or as it were relying on, supported 
by, some one [ef. W. 389 (364)]: Mt. v. 34-36; xxiii. 


16, 18-22; Rev. x. 6. C. ὁμολογῶ ἔν τινι after the 


Syriac (5 wrod {not the Hebr., see Fritzsche on Mt. 


= 

p- 386; B.176 (153); W. § 82, 3b., yet cf. § 4, a.]), 
prop. to confess in one’s case (or when one’s cause is at 
stake (cf. W.1.¢.; Fritzsche l.c.; Weiss, Das Matthius 
evang. p. 278 note} (and in Mey. on Mt. ed. 7)]), the 
nature of the confession being evident from the context; 
as, to confess one to be my master and lord, or to be my 
worshipper: Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8; [ef. Westcott, Canon, 
p- 305 ποία 1]. ἃἅ. on the very com. phrase ἐν ὀνόματί 
τινος, see ὄνομα (esp. 2). [e. the phrase ἐν ᾧ varies in 
meaning acc. to the varying sense of ἐν. It may be, a. 
local, wherein (i. q. ἐν τούτῳ ἐν ᾧ): Ro. ii. 1; xiv. 22; 
2 Co. xi. 12. β. temporal, while (cf. IL. below; W. 
§ 48, a. 2): Mk. ii. 19; Lk. v. 34; Jn. v. 7; Lk. xix. 
13 (Rec. ἕως, 4. ν.). γ. instrumental, whereby: Ro. xiv. 
21. δ. causal, Eng. in that (see Mdlzner, Eng. Gram., 
trans. by Grece, iii. 452, — concomitance passing over 
into causal dependence, or the substratum of the ac- 
tion being regarded as that on which its existence 
depends; cf. ‘in those circumstances I did so and so’), 
on the ground of this that, because: Ro. viii. 3, ete.; see 
in 6c. above. Acc. to the last two uses, the phrase 
may be resolved into ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι or ἐν τούτῳ 6 (cf. W. 
§ 23,2 Ὁ. and b.); on its use see W. 387 (362) note; B. 
331 (284 sq.); Bnhdy. p. 211; esp. Fritzsche on Rom. 
vol. ii. p. 93 sq.] ᾿ 

II. With the notion of ΤῚΜΕ ἐν marks 8. periods 
and portions of time in which anything occurs, in, on, 
at, during: ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, ἐν τῇ νυκτί, Jn. xi. 9 sq., etc. ; 
ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις, Mt. iii. 1, ete.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Μι. 
xii. 2, and in many other exx.; ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ, at the sec- 
ond time, Acts vii. 13; ἐν τῷ καθεξῆς, Lk. viii. 1; ἐν τῷ 
μεταξύ, in the meantime [W. 592 sq. (551)], In. iv. 31; 
[ev ἐσχάτῳ χρόνῳ, Jude 18 Rec.]. _—-b._ before substan- 
tives signifying an event, it is sometimes equiv. to at the 
time of this or that event, (Germ. bei); thus ἐν τῇ παλιγ- 
yevecia, Mt. xix. 28; ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ or μου, 1 Co. 
xv. 23; 1 Th. ii. 19; iii. 13 ΕἸ. § 50,5]; Phil. ii. 12; 1 
Jn. ii. 28 ; ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει, Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23 ; Lk. 
xiv. 14; xx. 33; ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι, at (the sounding 
of) the last trumpet, 1 Co. xv. 52; ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει of 
Christ, 2 Th. i. 7; 1 Pet. i. 7,13; iv. 13. ce. before in- 
finitives with the article [B. 263 (226) sq.; W. § 44, 6]; 
before the inf. present it signifies while, as: Mt. xiii. 4 
(ἐν τῷ σπείρειν), 25 (ἐν τ. καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους); Mt. 
xxvii. 12; Mk. vi.48; Lk. i. 21 [ef. Β. 1. ¢.]; xxiv. 51; 


ἐναγκαλίζομαι 


before the inf. aorist, 
ἃ. within, in 


1 Co. xi. 21; Gal. iv. 18, etc.; 
when, after that: Lk. ix. 36; xix. 15, ete. 


the course of: ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις, Mt. xxvii. 40; Mk. xv. | 
29 [L T Trom. WH br. ἐν] ; Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WH br. ev], | 


20; cf. W. § 48, a. 2; [B. § 188, 26]. 
III. In Composition. Prefixed to Adjectives ἐν 


denotes lying or situated in some place or condition, | 


possessed of or noted for something; as in ἐνάλιος, ἔνδο- 
fos, ἔμφοβος. Prefixed to Verbs it signifies 1. re- 


maining, staying, continuing in some place, state, or con- | 


dition; as, ἔνειμι, ἐμμένω, ἐνοικέω. 2. motion into 
something, entering into, mingling in; as, ἐμβαίνω, ἐμ- 
βατεύω, ἐγκαλέω (summon to court), ἐγγράφω, ἐγκρύπτω. 
3. in ἐμφυσάω, ἐμπρήθω, ἐμπτύω it answers to Germ. an 
(on). 

Before 8, μ, 7, >, ψ, ἐν changes to ἐμ-, before y, κ, &, x, to 
éy-, before A to ἐλ-, although this assimilation is neglected 
also in the older codd. [in x “ not often changed,” Scrivener, 
Collation ete. p. lvi.; “in some words assimilation is con- 
stant ace. to all or at least all primary Mss. while in a com- 
paratively small number of cases authority is divided. Speak- 
ing generally, assimilation is the rule in compounds of ἐν, re- 
tention of yin those of σύν (Prof. Hort). Following manu- 
script authority T WH write evypdpw, ἐνκάθετος, ἐνκαίνια, 
ἐνκαινίζω, ἐνκατοικέω, ἐνκαυχάομαι, ἐνκεντρίζω, ἐνκρίνω, ἐνπε- 
ριπατέω, ἐνπνέω; T ἐνκόπτω; WH ἐνκοπή, ἔνκυος ; but L Τ' 
Tr WH retain ἐγκαλέω, ἔγκλημα, ἔγκομβόομαι, ἐγκράτεια, 
ἐγκρατεύομαι, ἐγκρατής, ἐγχρίω, ἐλλογέω (-dw), ἐμβαίνω, ἐμ- 
βάλλω, ἐμβάπτω, ἐμβατεύω, ἐμβλέπω, ἐμβριμάομαι, ἐμμαίνομαι, 
ἐμπαιγμονή, ἐμπαιγμός, ἐμπαίζω, ἐμπαίκτης, ἐμπίπλημι, ἐμ- 
πίπτω, ἐμπλέκω, ἐμπλοκή, ἐμπορεύομαι, ἐμπορία, ἐμπόριον, ἔμ- 
πορος, ἐμπτύω, ἐμφανής, ἐμφανίζω, ἔμφοβος, ἔμφυτος ; LT ΤῊ 
ἔγκυος; L Tr WH ἐμμένω, ἔμπροσθεν ; 1, Tr ἐγγράφω, 
ἐγκάθετος, ἐγκαίνια, ἐγκαινίζω, ἐγκακέω, ἐγκαταλείπω, ἐγκατ- 
οἰκέω, ἐγκαυχάομαι, ἐγκεντρίζω, ἐγκοπή, ἐγκόπτω, ἐγκρίνω, 
ἐμπεριπατέω, ἐμπνέω; T ἐμπιπράω; TWH are not uniform 
in ἐγκακέω, ἐγκαταλείπω ; nor T in ἐμμένω, ἔμπροσθεν ; nor 
WH in ἐγκόπτω. --- Add LT Tr WH ἀνέγκλητος, παρεμ- 
βάλλω, παρεμβολή. See Gregory in the Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8, 
p- 76 sqq.; Hortin WH. App. p. 149; Bttm.in Stud. u. Krit. 
for 1862, p. 179 sq.; esp. Meisterhans p. 46.] 


ἐν-αγκαλίζομαι : 1 aor. ptep. ἐναγκαλισάμενος ; (mid. 
1. q. εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας δέχομαι, Lk. ii. 28) ; to take into the 
arms, embrace: twa, Mk. ix. 36; x. 16. (Prov. vi. 10; 
xxiv. 48 (33); Meleag. in Anth. 7, 476,10; Plut.; Al- 
ciphr. epp. 2, 4; al.) * 

ἐν-άλιος, -ov, or ἐνάλιος, -a, -ov, [ef. W. § 11, 1], (ds 
the sea), that which is in the sea, marine ; plur. τὰ ἐνάλια 
marine animals, Jas. iii. 7. (Often in Grk. writ.; the 
Epic form εἰνάλιος as old as Hom.) * 

ἔν-αντι, adv., (ἐν and ἀντί, prop. in that part of space 
which is opposite), before : as a prep. foll. by a gen. [B. 
319 (273)]; ἔναντι τοῦ θεοῦ, M17 155, before God, i. e. 
in the temple, Lk. i. 8 [Tr mre. ἐναντίον] : in the juds- 
ment of God, Acts viii. 21 G LT Tr WH; [ἔναντι Φαραώ, 
Acts vii. 10 Tdf.; cf. B. 180 (156)]. (Very often in 
Sept., and in the Palestin. Apocr. of the O. T.; but no- 
where in prof. auth.) * 

év-avrlos, -a, -ov, (ἀντίος set against), [fr. Hom. down], 
prop. that which is over against; opposite; used ale 


215 


ἕνδεκα 


primarily of place; opposite, contrary: of the wind 
(Xen. an. 4, 5, 3), Mt. xiv. 24; Mk. vi. 48; Acts xxvii. 
4; ἐξ ἐναντίας [W.591 (550) ; B. 82 (71)], opposite, over 
against (see ἐκ, I. 4), with gen. Mk. xv. 39. 2. me- 
taph. opposed as an adversary, hostile, antagonistic in feel- 
ing or act: 1 Th. ii. 15 (on which pass. [for confirmatory 
reff. to anc. auth.] οἵ. Grimm on 3 Mace. vii. 4 [on the 
other hand, see Liinem. on 1 Thess. l. 9.7); ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας, 
an opponent [A. V. he that is of the contrary part], Tit. ii. 
8; ἐναντίον ποιεῖν τί τινι, to do something against one, 
Acts xxviii. 17 ; ἐναντία πράττειν πρὸς τὸ ὄνομά τινος, Acts 
xxvi. 9. Neutr. ἐναντίον, adv., as a prep. is constr. with 
the gen. [B. 319 (273) ], before, in the sight of, in the pres- 
ence of, one (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. often 
for *357 and *yy3 also for *}>yD): Mk. ii. 12 (T Tr mre. 
WH ἔμπροσθεν); Lk. xx. 26; Acts vii. 10 (ἐναντίον 
Φαραώ, when he stood before Pharaoh [here Tdf. ἔναντι, 
4: v-]); Acts viii. 32; Hebraistically, in the judgment, 
estimation, of one, Lk. xxiv. 19; [i. 6 T Tr WH], (Gen. 
Xx. 9, ete.). [τὸ ἐναντίον 1. 6. τοὐναντίον see in its place. | * 

ἐν-άρχομαι : 1 aor. ἐνηρξάμην ; to begin, make a begin- 
ning: with dat. of the thing fr. which the beginning is 
made, Gal. 111. 3; ri, Phil. i. 6; 2 Co. viii. 6 Lehm. ed. 
min. (Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian.; generally with 
gen. of the thing begun, as in Sir. xxxvi. 29 (26) ; xxxviii. 
16; 1 Mace. ix. 54. in Eur. with ace., of beginning sac- 
rificial rites; at length, to govern, rule, with gen. Josh. 
x. 24 Sept.) [Compe.: mpo-evapxopat. | * 

ἔνατος, see ἔννατος. 

ἐν-γράφω, see ἐν, III. 2 and 3. 

ἐνδεής, -€s, (fr. ἐνδέω to lack, mid. to be in need of), 
needy, destitute: Acts iv. 34. (From [Soph.], Hadt. 
down ; Sept.) * 

ἔν-δειγμα, -ros, τό, (ἐνδείκνυμι), token, evidence, proof, 
[A. V. manifest token]: 2 Th. i. 5 [ef. B. 153 (184)]. 
(Plat. Critias p. 110 b.; Dem. 423, 13.) * 

ἐν-δείκνυμι : fo point out, (Lat. indicare; Germ. anzei- 
gen), fr. Pind. down; in mid. first in Hom.; in the N. T. 
only in Mid. : [pres. évdeixvupac]; 1 aor. ἐνεδειξάμην ; prop. 
to show one’s self in something, show something in one’s 
self (ef. B. 192 (166) ]; 1. to show, demonstrate, prove, 
whether by arguments or by acts: ri, Ro. ix. 22 (joined 
with γνωρίσαι) ; Eph. ii. 7; Tit. ii. 10; iii. 2; Heb. vi. 
11; with two acc., the one of the object, the other of 
the predicate, Ro. ii. 15; ri ἔν τινι, dat. of the pers., Ro. 
ix. 17 (fr. Ex. ix. 16 [ef. W. 254 (238)]); 1 Tim.i. 16; ri 
εἰς τὸ ὄνομά Twos, Heb. vi. 10; τὴν ἔνδειξιν ἐνδείκνυσθαι (as 
in Plat. legg. 12 p. 966 b.; cf. W. 295 (211)); εἴς τινα, 
2 Co. viii. 24. 2. to manifest, display, put forth: τινὶ 
(dat. of pers.) κακά, 2 Tim. iv. 14; Gen. ]. 15, 17." 

ἔν-δειξις, -ews, ἡ, (ἐνδείκνυμι), demonstration, proof: i.e. 
manifestation, made in act, τῆς δικαιοσύνης, Ro. iii. 25 sq. ; 
τῆς ἀγάπης, 2 Co. viii. 24; i. q. sign, evidence, ΓΑ. V. 
evident token], ἀπωλείας, Phil. i. 28. [Plat., al.]* 

ἕν-δεκα, οἱ, ai, τά, eleven: of ἕνδεκα, the eleven apostles 
of Christ remaining after the death of Judas the traitor, 
Mt. xxviii. 16; Mk. xvi. 14; Lk. xxiv. 9, 33; Acts i. 26; 
ii. 14. [From Hom. down.] * 


PLY 
ἑνδέκατος 


ἑν-δέκατος, -άτη, -ατον, eleventh: Mt. xx. 6,9; Rey. xxi. 
20. [From Hom. down.]* 

év-Sexopar; fo receive, approve of, admit, allow, (as τὸν 
λόγον, Hdt. 1, 60). Impersonally, ἐνδέχεται it can be 
allowed, is possible, may be, (often thus in Grk. prose fr. 
Thue. down): foll. by ace. w. inf. Lk. xiii. 33, ef. xvii. 1. 
[Cf. δέχομαι, fin.]* 

ἐνδημέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. ἐνδημῆσαι; (ἔνδημος one who is 
among his own people or in his own land, one who does 
not travel abroad; opp. to ἔκδημος), prop. to be among 
one’s own people, dwell in one’s own country, stay at home 
(opp. to ἐκδημέω, ἀποδημέω ; see those words); i. q. to 
have a fixed abode, be at home, ἐν τῷ σώματι, of life on 
earth, 2 Co. ν. 6, 9; πρὸς τὸν κύριον, of life in heaven, ib. 
8. (Rare in the classics, as Lys. p. 114, 36.) * 

ἐνδιδύσκω (i. 4. ἐνδύω [ef. B. 56 (49)]); impf. mid. 
ἐνεδιδυσκόμην ; to put on, clothe: twa πορφύραν, Mk. xv. 
17 L T Tr WH; mid. to put on one’s self, be clothed in 
[w. ace. B. 191 (166); W.§ 32,5]: ἱμάτιον, Lk. viii. 27 
[RGLTr mrg.]; πορφύραν, βύσσον, Lk. xvi. 19; (2 5. 
i. 24; xiii. 18; Prov. xxix. 39 (xxxi. 21); Judith ix. 1; 
Sir. |. 11; Joseph. b. j. 7, 2).* 

ἔνδικος, -ov, (δίκη), according to right, righteous, just : 
Ro. iii. 8; Heb. ii. 2. (Pind., Trag., Plat.) * 

ἐν-δόμησις (ἐνδομέω to build in), and ἐνδώμησις T Tr WIL 
({see WH. App. p. 152] δωμάω to build), -ews, 4, that 
which is built in, (Germ. Einbau): τοῦ τείχους, the mate- 
rial built into the wall, i. e. of which the wall was com- 
posed, Rey. xxi. 18; elsewhere only in Joseph. antt. 15, 
9, 6, of a mole built into the sea to form a breakwater, 
and so construct a harbor.* 

ἐν-δοξάζω : 1 aor. pass. ἐνεδοξάσθην ; to make ἔνδοξος, to 
glorify, adorn with glory, (Vulg. glorifico, clarifico) : in 
pass. 2 Th. i. 12; ἐνδοξασθῆναι ev τοῖς ἁγίοις, that his glory 
may be seen in the saints, i. e. in the glory, blessedness, 
conferred on them, 2 Th. i. 10. (Ex. xiv. 4; Ezek. 
XXViii. 22, ete.; Sir. xxxviil. 6. Not found in prof. auth.) * 

ἔνδοξος, -ov, (δόξα), held in good or in great esteem, of 
high repute; a. illustrious, honorable, esteemed, (Xen., 
Plat., sqq.): 1 Co. iv. 10, (thus in Sept. for 733), 1 S. ix. 
6; xxii. 14; Is. xxiii. 8, ete.; Sir. xi. 6; xliv. 1, ete.). 
b. notable, glorious: τὰ ἔνδοξα, wonderful deeds, [A. V. 
glorious things], Lk. xiii. 17; (for Ni8753, Ex. xxxiv. 10). 
ce. splendid: of clothing, [A. V. gorgeous], Lk. vii. 25; 
figuratively i. q. free from sin, Eph. v. 27.* 

ἔνδυμα, -ros, τό, (ἐνδύω), garment, raiment, (Gell., Lact. 
indumentum) : Mt. vi. 25, 28; Lk. xii. 23; spec. acloak, 
an outer garment: Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 11 sq. (€vd. γάμου a 
wedding garment) ; Mt. xxviii.3; 8 προβάτων, sheep’s 
clothing, i. e. the skins of sheep, Mt. vii. 15 [al. take 
the phrase figuratively: ‘with a lamb-like exterior ’]. 
({Strab. 3, 3, 7]; Joseph. b. j. 5, 5, 7; [antt. 3, 7, 2]; 
Plut. Sol. 8; Sept. for w339.) * 

ἐν-δυναμόω, -@; 1 aor. éveduvduwoa; Pass., [pres. impv. 
2 pers. sing. ἐνδυνάμου, 2 pers. plur. ἐνδυναμοῦσθε] ; impf. 
3 pers. sing. ἐνεδυναμοῦτο; 1 aor. ἐνεδυναμώθην; (fr. ἐν- 
δύναμος equiv. to ὁ ἐν δυνάμεζ dv); to make strong, endue 
with strength, strengthen: twa, Phil. iv. 13; 1 Tim.i.12; 2 


214 


ἐνδώμησις 


Tim. ἵν. 17; passively, fo receive strength, be strengthened, 
increase in strength: Acts ix. 22; ἔν τινι, in anything, 2 
Tim. ii. 1; ἐν κυρίῳ, in union with the Lord, Eph. vi. 10; 
with dat. of respect, τῇ πίστει, Ro. iv. 20; ἀπὸ ἀσθενείας, 
to recover strength from weakness or disease, Heb. xi. 
34 RG; (in a bad sense, be bold, headstrong, Ps. li. (lii.) 
9; [Judg. vi. 34 Alex., Ald., Compl.; 1 Chr. xii. 18 
Alex.; Gen. vii. 20 Aq.]; elsewhere only in eccl. writ.).* 

ἐν-δύνω [2 Tim. iii. 6] and ἐν-δύω [Mk. xv. 17 RG]; 
1 aor. ἐνέδυσα ; 1 aor. mid. evedvoaunv; pf. ptep. mid. or 
pass. ἐνδεδυμένος ; Sept. for ¥37; as in the classics, af 
trans. (prop. to envelop in, to hidein), to put on: τινά τι, 
a. in a literal sense, fo put on, clothe with a garment: Mt. 
xxvii. 31; [with τινά alone, ib. 28 L WH mre.]; Mk. xv. 
17 RG, 20; Lk. xv. 22. Mid. to put on one’s self, be 
clothed with: ré[B.191 (166); ef. W. § 32,5], Mt. vi. 25; 
Lk. xii. 22; [vili. 27 T WH Tr txt.]; Mk. vi. 9; Acts 
xii. 21; ἐνδεδυμένος with acc. of a thing, Mk. i. 6; Mt. 
xxii. 11 [B. 148 (129); cf. W. § 32, 2]; Rev.i.18; xv. 
6; xix. 14; ἐνδυσάμενος (opp. to γυμνός) clothed with a 
body, 2 Co. v. 3, on which pass.see γέ, 3 6., (Aristot. de 
anima 1, 3 fin. p. 407>, 23 ψυχὴν . . . ἐνδύεσθαι σῶμα). 
b. in metaphorical phrases: of armor fig. so called, 
ἐνδύεσθαί τὰ ὅπλα [L mrg. ἔργα] τοῦ φωτός, Ro. xiii. 12; 
τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ, τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης, Eph. 
vi. 11, 14; θώρακα πίστεως, 1 Th. ν. 8 (with double ace., 
of obj. and pred., θώρακα δικαιοσύνην, Sap. v. 19 (18), 
[ef. Is. lix. 17]; prop. ὅπλα, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 18; τὸν θώ- 
paka,an.1,8,3). tobe furnished with anything, adorned 
with a virtue, as if clothed with a garment, ἐνδύεσθαι 
ἀφθαρσίαν, ἀθανασίαν, 1 Co. xv. 53 sq.; [σπλάγχνα οἰκτιρ- 
pod, Col. iii. 12]; δύναμιν, Lk. xxiv. 49, (ἰσχύν, Is. li. 9; 
[lii. 1; δύναμιν, εὐπρέπειαν, Ps. xcii. (xciii.) 1; αἰσχύνην, 
Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 26; cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 18; 1 Mace. i. 
29; δικαιοσύνην, Job xxix. 14; Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 9; 
σωτηρίαν, ibid. 16; ete.]; dvew ἀλκήν, Hom. Il. [9, 231]; 
19, 36; ἕννυσθαι and ἐπιέννυσθαι ἀλκήν, 1]. 20, 381; Od. 
9, 214 ete.; many similar exx. in Hebr. and Arabic, 
ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. 742; Lat. induere novum in- 
genium, Liv. 8, 33); τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον, i.e. a new pur- 
pose and life, Eph. iv. 24; Col. iii. 10; Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, 
to become so possessed of the mind of Christ as in 
thought, feeling, and action to resemble him and, as it 
were, reproduce the life he lived, Ro. xiii. 14; Gal. iii. 
27; (similarly the Greeks and Romans said [ef. W. 30], 
τὸν Ταρκύνιον ἐνδύεσθαι, Dion. lial. 11, 5,5; ῥίψας τὸν 
στρατιώτην ἐνέδυ τὸν σοφιστήν, Liban. ep. 968 ; prodi- 
torem et hostem induere, Tac. ann. 16, 28; cf. Fritzsche 
on Rom. iii. p. 143 sq.; Wieseler on Gal. p. 317 sqq.; 
[Gataker, Advers. mise. 1, 9 p. 223 sqq.]). 2. in- 
trans. to creep into, insinuate one’s self into; to enter: ἐν- 
δύνοντες εἰς τὰς οἰκίας, 2 Tim. iii.6. [Comp.: ἐπ-ενδύω.] " 

ἔν-δυσις, -ews, 7, (ἐνδύων, a putting on, (Germ. das An- 
ziehen, der Anzug): τῶν ἱματίων, 1 Pet. iii. 3; (clothing, 
Job xli.4; Athen. 12 p. 550c¢.; Dio Cass. 78, 3; an 
entering, Plat. Crat. p. 419 ¢.).* 

ἐν-δύω, see ἐνδύνω. 

ἐν-δώμησις. see ἐνδόμησις. 


ἐνέγκω 2 


ἐνέγκω, see φέρω. 

ἐν-έδρα, -as, 7, (fr. ἐν and ἕδρα a seat), a lying in wait, 
ambush: Acts xxiii. 16 [Rec τὸ ἔνεδρον, q. v-]; ἐνέδραν 
ποιεῖν, Acts xxv. 3. (Sept.; Thuc., 544.) * 

ἐνεδρεύω ; (ἐνέδρα) ; to lie in wait for, to lay wait for, 
prepare a trap for: τινά, a person, Lk. xi. 54 [G om. éved. 
αὖτ., T om. αὐτόν]; Acts xxiii. 21. (Thuc., Xen., sqq.; 
Sept.) * 

ἔνεδρον, -ov, τό, i. q. ἐνέδρα, a lying in wait, an ambush : 
Acts xxiii. 16 Ree. (Sept.; Sap. xiv. 21; Sir. xi. 29; 1 
Mace. ix. 40, ete.; not found in prof. auth.) * 

ἐν-ειλέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐνείλησα; to roll in, wind in: twa 
τινι, one in anything, Mk. xv. 46. (1S. xxi. 9; [ Aristot. 
mund. 4 p. 396%, 14; Philo], Plut., Artemid., Philostr., 
al.) * 

ἔν-ειμι ; (etn); [fr. Hom. down]; to be in: τὰ ἐνόντα 
what is within, i. e. the soul, Lk. xi. 41 (equiv. to τὸ 
ἔσωθεν ὑμῶν, vs. 39); this is to be regarded as an ironi- 
cal exhortation (similar to that in Amos iv. 4) adjusted 
to the Pharisees’ own views: ‘as-respects your soul (τὰ 
ἐνόντα ace. absol.), give alms (to the needy), and behold 
all things are clean unto you (in your opinion)’; cf. 
Bornemann ad loc. Most interpreters think τὰ ἐνόντα 
to be the things that are within the cup and the platter (obj. 
ace. after δότε, with ἐλεημ. as pred. acc. ], and to be spoken 
of unjustly acquired riches to be expended in charity. 
[Still others (following the same construction) take ra 
ἐνόντα (sc. δοῦναι) in the sense of the things within your 
power, (R. V.mrg. which ye can); cf. Steph. Thesaur. 
' s. v. col. 1055 a.; but see Mey. ed. Weiss ad loe.] More- 
over, in the opinion of many ἔνι, [1 Co. vi. 5 GLT Tr 
WH; Jas. i. 17;] Gal. iii. 28; Col. 111. 11 ete., is con- 
tracted from ἔνεστι; but see below under ἔνι. ἢ 

ἕνεκα (only before consonants [ Rec. three times (Grsb. 
twice) out of twenty-five]), and ἕνεκεν [R G 19 times, L 
(out of 26) 21 times, Tr 20, WH 18, T 17], or in a form 
at first Ionic εἵνεκεν (Lk. iv. 18 [Rec. &.; xviii. 29 T 
WH; Acts xxviii. 20 TWH]; 2 Co. iii. 10 [RGLmrg. 
év.]; vii. 12 [RG], both the last forms alike before con- 
sonants and vowels [cf. s. v. N,v; W. §5,1d.1; Β. 10 
(9); Kriiger (dialects) § 68, 19,1; WH. App. Ρ. 1137), 
a prep. foll. by the genitive, on account of, for the sake 
of, for: Mt. v. 10 sq.; xvi. 25; xix. 29; Mk. viii. 35; Lk. 
vi. 22; Acts xxviii. 20; Ro. viii. 36; 2 Co. iii. 10; ἕνεκεν 
τούτου, for this cause, therefore, Mt. xix. 5; τούτων, Acts 
xXxvi. 21; τίνος ἕνεκεν, for what cause, wherefore, Acts 
xix. 32; before rod with inf. expressing purpose [ W. 329 
(309); B. 266 (228)], 2 Co. vii. 12; οὗ εἵνεκεν, because, 
Lk. iv. 18; cf. Meyer ad loc. 

ἐνενήκοντα, See ἐννενήκοντα. 

ἐνεός, 566 ἐννεός. 

ἐνέργεια, -as, ἥ, (ἐνεργής, q- ν.), working, efficiency; in 
the N. T. used only of superhuman power, whether of 
God or of the devil; of God: Eph. iii. 7; Col. ii. 12; 
ἡ ἐνέργεια ἡ ἐνεργουμένη, Col. i. 29; with a relative inter- 
vening, ἐνεργεῖν ἐνέργειαν, Eph. i. 19 sq.; κατ᾽ ἐνέργειαν 
ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους, ace. to the working which 
agrees with the measure of (is commensurate with) 


15 


ἐνευλογεω 


every single part, Eph. iv. 16; κατὰ τ. ἐνέργειαν τοῦ 
δύνασθαι αὐτόν rd. according to the efficiency by which 
he is able to subject all things to himself, Phil. iii. 21. 
evepy. τοῦ Σατανᾶ, 2 Th. ii. 9; πλάνης, the power with 
which error works, vs. 11. (Sap. vii. 17, ete.; 2 Mace. 
li. 29; τῆς προνοίας, 3 Macc. iy. 21; not found in Sept.; 
in the classics first in Aristot.; [on ἐνέργεια, ἐνεργεῖν, 
of diabolic influences, οἵ. Miller on Barn. ep. 19, 6].) 
[Syn. see δύναμις, fin. ]* 

ἐνεργέω, τῶ; 1 aor. ἐνήργησα; pt. ἐνήργηκα (Eph. i. 20 
LT WH txt. Trmrg.); (ἐνεργός [see evepyqs]) ; a 
intrans. to be operative, be at work, put forth power: foll. 
by ἐν with dat. of pers., Mt. xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14; Eph. ii. 
2; foll. by the dat. of advantage (dat. com.; [ef. Bp. 
Lghtft. on Gal. as below]), to work for one, aid one, εἴς τι, 
unto (the accomplishing of) something [W. 397 (371)]: 
εἰς ἀποστολήν; unto the assumption [or discharge] of the 
apostolic office; εἰς τὰ ἔθνη. i. 4: εἰς ἀποστολὴν [ef. W. 
§ 66, 2d.; Β. 8 147, 8] τῶν ἐθνῶν, Gal. ii. 8. 2. trans. 
to effect: τί, 1 Co. xii. 11; [Eph. 1. 11]; ἐνεργεῖν ἐνέρ- 
γειαν, Eph. i. 19 sq.; ri ἔν τινι, dat. of pers., 1 Co. xii. 6 
[B. 124 (109)]; Gal. iii. 5; Phil. ii 13. 8. Mid., 
pres. ἐνεργοῦμαι ; [impf. ἐνηργούμην] ; (not found in the 
O. T. or in prof. auth., and in the N. T. used only by 
Paul and James [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as below]); it 
is used only of things (cf. W. § 38,6 fin.; [B. 193 (167)]), 
to display one’s activity, show one’s self operative: [2 Th. 
ii. 7 (see μυστήριον, 2 fin.)]; foll. by ἐν with dat. of the 
thing, where, Ro. vii. 5; ἐν with dat. of the condition, 
2 Co. i. 6; ἐν with dat. of pers. in whose mind a thing 
shows itself active, 2 Co. iv.12; Eph. iii. 20; Col.i. 29; 
1 Th. ii. 13; foll. by διά with gen. of thing, Gal. ν. 6. 
In Jas. ν. 16 ἐνεργουμένη does not have the force of an 
adj., but gives the reason why the δέησις of a righteous 
man has outward success, viz. as due to the fact that 
it exhibits its activity [“works”] (inwardly), i. e. is 
solemn and earnest. (The act. [and pass.] in Grk. writ. 
fr. Aristot. down.) [Onthis word ef. (besides Bp. Lghtft. 
on Gal. ii. 8; v.6) Fritzsche and Vaughan on Ro. vii. 5; 
Ellic. on Gal. ii. 8.]* 

ἐνέργημα, -ros, τό, (evepyéw), thing wrought; effect, op- 
eration: plur. [R. V. workings], 1 Co. xii. 6; with the ad- 
dition of the epexeget. gen. δυνάμεων, ibid. 10. (Polyb., 
Diod., Antonin., [al.].) * 

ἐνεργής, -ἐς, (i. 4. ἐνεργός, equiv. to ὁ ὧν ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ 
[Eng. at work]), active: Heb. ἵν. 12: by a somewhat in- 
congruous fig., in 1 Co. xvi. 9 a θύρα ἐνεργής is spoken 
of, ‘an opportunity for the working of the gospel’; 
evepy. γίνομαι ἔν τινι, in something, Philem. ys. 6. ([Aris- 
tot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) * 

ἐν-εστώς, see ἐνίστημι. 

ἐν-ευλογέω, -ῶ : 1 fut. pass. ἐνευλογηθήσομαι; (the prep. 
seems to refer to the pers. on whom the blessing is 
conferred ; οἵ. Germ. einsegnen); to confer benefits on, 
to bless: pass. foll. by ἐν with dat. of that in which lies 
the ground of the blessing received or expected, Acts 
lil. 25 (where the Ree. gives τῷ σπέρμ., dat. of the in- 
strument; [WH read the simple εὐλογ.7); Gal. iii. 8, 


ἐνέχω 


where Rec.>*¢ has the simple εὐλογ. (Gen. xii. 3; 
xvill. 18; xxvi. 4 Alex.; [Ps. lxxi. (Ixxii.) 17 Ald., 
Compl.]; Sir. xliv. 21; not found in prof. auth.) * 

ἐν-έχω ; impf. ἐνεῖχον ; [pres. pass. evéxouat]; to have 
within, to hold in; a. pass. to be held, be entangled, 
be held ensnared, with a dat. of the thing in which one 
is held captive, — very often in Grk. writ., both lit. (as 
τῇ πάγῃ; Hat. 2, 121, 2) and fig. (as ἀγγελίᾳ, Pind. Pyth. 
8, 69; φιλοτιμίᾳ, Eur. Iph. A. 527; κακῷ, Epict. diss. 3, 
22,93): ζυγῷ δουλείας, Gal. v. 1; [θλίψεσιν, 2 Th. i. 4 
Wl mrg.], (ἀσεβείαις, 3 Mace. vi. 10). 
to be enraged with, set one’s self against, hold a grudge 
against some one: Mk. vi. 19; Lk. xi. 53, (Gen. xlix. 23); 
the expression is elliptical, and occurs in full (χόλον τινί 
to have anger in one’s self against another) in Hat. 1, 118; 
8, 27; 6,119; see a similar ellipsis under προσέχω. [In 
this last case the ellipsis supplied is τὸν νοῦν, W. 593 
(552); B. 144 (126); Meyer et al. would supply the 
same after évéyew in Mk. and Lk. ll. ee. and render the 
phrase to have (an eye) on, watch with hostility; but 
De Wette, Bleek, al. agree with Grimm. Many take the 
expression in Lk. l.c. outwardly, to press upon (R. V. 
txt.); see Steph. Thes. s. v.; L. and 8S. 5. v.; Hesych. 
ἐνέχει: μνησικακεῖ. EYKELT at. |* 

ἐνθά-δε, adv., (fr. ἔνθα and the enclitic δέ; Kriiger 8 9, 
8, 1 and 2; [ef. W. 472 (440); B. 71 (62)]), [fr. Hom. 
down]; a. here: Lk. xxiv.41; Acts x.18; xvi. 28; xvii. 
6; xxv. 24. b. hither: Jn. iv. 15 sq.; Acts xxv. 17.* 

ἔνθεν, adv., (fr. ἐν and the syllable θεν, indicating the 
place whence), hence: Mt. xvii. 20 LT'TrWH; Lk. 
xvi. 26 GLTTrWH. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἐνθυμέομαι, -οὔμαι; a depon. pass.; 1 aor. ptep. ἐνθυ- 
μηθείς ; fr. Aeschyl. down, with the object now in the 
gen. now in the ace.; οἵ. Matthiae § 349, ii. p. 823; 
Kihner § 417 Anm. 9, ii. p. 310; [Jelf § 485]; Kriiger 
ὃ 47, 11,1 and 2; (fr. ἐν and θυμός) ; to bring to mind, 
revolve in mind, ponder: τί, Mt. i. 20; ix. 4; to think, 
to deliberate: mepi twos, about anything, Acts x. 19 
Rec. (So also Sap. vi. 16; Plat. rep. 10 p.595a.; 1806. 
ep. 9 p. 614, § 9 Bekk.) [Comp.: δι -ενθυμέομαι.] * 

ἐνθύμησις, -ews, ἡ, α thinking, consideration: Acts xvii. 
29 [A. V. device]; plur. thoughts: Mt. ix. 4; xii. 25; 
Heb. iv. 12 [here Lmrg.sing.]. (Rare in the classics; 
Hippoer., Eur., Thuc., Leian.) * 

ἔνι i. 4- evi, the accent being thrown back, same as ἐν, 
used adverbially [W. § 50, 7 N. 2] for ἔνεστι, is in, is 
among, has place, is present, (Hom. Od. 21, 218; Thue. 
2,40): Gal. iii. 28 (three times); Col. iii. 11; Jas. i. 17; 
with addition of ἐν ὑμῖν, 1 Co. vi. 5 (where Ree. ἔστιν); 
in prof. auth. fr. Soph. and Thue. on very often, it can 
be, is possible, ts lawful; [here some would place Jas. 1. ο.7. 
The opinion of many 6. g. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 642; 
Meyer on Gal. l. c.; ef. Ellic. ibid.] that ἔνε is a con- 
tracted form for ἔνεστι is opposed by the like use of 
πάρα, ava, which can hardly be supposed to be con- 
tracted from πάρεστι, ἄνεστι; cf. Kriigzer § 9,11,4; W. 
80 (77); Géttling, Lehre v. Accent ete. p. 380; [Chan- 
dler ὃ 917 sq.; B. 72 (64); Zob. Path. Element. ii. 315].* 


Ὁ. ἐνέχω τινί, 


210 


ἐννενηκονταεννεα 


ἐνιαυτός, -οὔ, ὁ, a year: Jn. xi. 49, 51; xviii. 13; Acts 
xi. 26; xviii. 11; Jas. v.17; Rey. ix. 15; plur., of the 
Jewish years of Jubilee, Gal. iv. 10 [οἵ. Ellic. ad loc.]; 
ποιεῖν ἐνιαυτόν, to spend a year, Jas. iv. 13; ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνι- 
αὐτοῦ. Heb. ix. 7 (like ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας, Lk. xvii. 4), 
[ef. W. § 30, 8 N. 1; Kriiger § 47,10, 4]; κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτόν, 
yearly, Web. ix. 25; x. 1,3, (Thue. 1,93; Xen. oec. 4,6; 
an. 3, 2, 12); in a wider sense, for some fixed and defi- 
nite period of time: Lk. iv. 19 (fr. Is. Ixi. 2), on which 
pass. see δεκτός. [From Hom. down.]* 

(Syn. ἐνιαυτός, ἔτος: originally ἐν. seems to have de- 
noted (yet ef. Curtius § 210) a year viewed as a cycle or 
period of time, ἔτ. as a division or sectional portion of time.] 

ἐν-ίστημι : pf. ἐνέστηκα, ptep. ἐνεστηκώς (Ileb. ix. 9), 
and by syncope ἐνεστώς ; fut. mid. ἐνστήσομαι ; to place 
in or among; to put in; in pf., plpf., 2 aor., and in mid. 
(prop. as it were fo stand in sight, stand near) to be upon, 
impend, threaten: 2 Th. ii. 2; fut. mid. 2 Tim. iii. 1. 
pf. ptep. close at hand, 1 Co. vii. 26; as often in Grk. 
writ. (in the grammarians 6 ἐνεστώς sc. χρόνος is the 
present tense [cf. Philo de plant. Noe § 27 τριμερὴς χρόνος, 
ὃς εἰς τὸν παρεληλυθότα καὶ ἐνεστῶτα καὶ μέλλοντα τέμνε- 
σθαι πέφυκεν |), present : ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐνεστώς, [{6}0. ix. 9; τὰ 
ἐνεστῶτα opp. to τὰ μέλλοντα, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; 
6 ἐνεστὼς αἰὼν πονηρός in tacit contrast with τῷ μέλλοντε 
αἰῶνι, Gal. i. 4, (Basil. ep. 57 ad Melet. [iii. p. 151 ο. ed. 
Benedict. ] ὠφέλιμα διδάγματα ἣ ἐφόδια πρός τε τὸν ἐνεστῶτα 
αἰῶνα καὶ τὸν μέλλοντα). [Many (so R. V.) would adopt 
the meaning present in 2 Th. ii. 2 and 1 Co. vii. 26 also; 
but ef. Mey. on Gal. 1. 6.71" 

ἐν-ισχύω; 1 aor. evicyvoa; [cf. B. 145 (127)]; Li 
intrans. fo grow strong, to receive strength: Acts ix. 19 
[here WH Tr mrg. ἐνισχύθη]; (Aristot., Theophr., Diod., 
Sept.). 2. trans. /o make strong, to strengthen, (2 ὃ. 
xxii. 40; Sir. 1.4; Hippoer. leg. p. 2, 26 ὁ χρόνος ταῦτα 
πάντα ἐνισχύει) ; to strengthen one in soul, to inspirit: 
Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass. ].* 

ἐνκ-, see ἐγκ- and 8. v. ἐν, III. 3. 

[év-pévw, see ἐμμένω and s. v. ἐν, II. 3.] 

ἔννατος or ἔνατος (which latter form, supported by the 
authority alike of codd. and of inscrr., has been every- 
where restored by L T Tr WH; cf. [s.v. N,v; Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 80]; Kriiger § 24, 2,12; W.43; [found once 
(Rev. xxi. 20) in Rec."]), τ-άτη, -arov, [fr. Hom. down], 
ninth: Rey. xxi. 20; the ἐνάτη ὥρα, spoken of in Mt. xx. 
5; xxvii. 45 sq.; Mk. xv. 33 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 44; Acts iii. 
1; x. 3, 30, corresponds to our 3 o’clock in the after- 
noon; for the sixth hour of the Jews coincides with the 
twelfth of the day as divided by our method, and the 
first hour of the day with them is the same as the sixth 
with us. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Hour.]* 

ἐννέα, of, ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], nine: Lk. xvii. 17; 
see the foll. word.® 

ἐννενηκοντα-εννέα, more correctly ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα (i. e. 
written separately, and the first word with a single ν, as 
by LT Tr WH;; cf. [s. v. N,v; Tdf. Proleg. p.80; WH. 
App. p- 148]; W. 43 sq.; Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue. 
Ρ. 95). ninety-nine: Mt. xviii. 12 sq.; Lk. xv. 4, 7.* 


> ͵ 
€VVEOS 


ἐννεός, more correctly ἐνεός (L T Tr WH [cef. the pre- 
ceding word ]), -ov, 6, (it seems to be identical with dvews 
i. q. unused dvavos, ἄναος, fr. dw, αὔω to cry out, hence 
without sound, mute), dumb, mute, destitute of the power 
of speech, (Plat., Aristot.): Is. lvi. 10, ef. Prov. xvii. 28; 
ἐνεὸν μὴ δυνάμενον λαλῆσαι. of an idol, Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 
40; unable to speak for terror, struck dumb, astounded : 
so εἱστήκεισαν ἐνεοί, stood speechless (Vulg. stabant stupe- 
facti), Acts ix.7; Hesych. ἐμβροντηθέντες" ἐνεοὶ γενόμενοι. 
Cf. Alberti, Glossar. in N. T. p. 69. In the same sense 
ἀπηνεώθη, Dan. iv. 16 Theodot., fr. amevedw.* 

ἐν-νεύω : impf. ἐνένευον ; to nod to, signify or express by 
a nod or sign: τινί τι, Lk. i. 62. (Arstph. in Babyloniis 
frag. 58 [i.e. 22 ed. Brunck, 16 p. 455 Didot]; Leian. 
dial. meretr. 12,1; with ὀφθαλμῷ added, Prov. vi. 13; x. 
10.)* 

ἔννοια, -as, 4, (νοῦς); 1. the act of thinking, consid- 
eration, meditation; (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a thought, no- 
tion, conception; (Plat. Phaedo p. 73 c., etc.; esp. in phil- 
osoph. writ., as Cic. Tuse. 1, 24, 57; Acad. 2,7 and 10; 
Epict. diss. 2, 11, 2 sq-, ete.; Plut. plac. philos. 4, 11, 1; 
Diog. Laért. 3, 79). 3. mind, understanding, will ; 
manner of thinking and feeling ; Germ. Gesinnung, (Eur. 
Hel. 1026; Diod. 2, 30 var. ; τοιαύτην ἔννοιαν ἐμποιεῖν τινι; 
Isoc. p. 112d.; τήρησον τὴν ἐμὴν βουλὴν καὶ ἔννοιαν, Prov. 
iii. 21; φυλάσσειν ἔννοιαν ἀγαθήν, v. 2): so 1 Pet. iv. 1; 
plur. with καρδίας added (as in Prov. xxiii. 19), Heb. 
iv. 12 [A. V. intents of the heart], cf. Sap. ii. 14.* 

ἔν-νομος, -ov, (νόμος) ; 1. bound to the law; bound 
by the law: Χριστῷ. or more correctly Χριστοῦ LT Tr 
WH, 1 Co. ix. 21 [ef. B. § 132, 23]. 2. as in Grk. writ. 
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl. down, lawful, regular: Acts xix. 39 
[on which see Bp. Lahti. in The Contemp. Rev. for 
1878, p. 295; Wood, Ephesus ete., App. p. 38].* 

évvuxos, -ov, (νύξ). nightly, nocturnal, (Hom., Pind., 
Trage.). Neut. adverbially, by night: Mk. i. 35, where 
LT Tr WH have neut. plur. ἔννυχα [cf. W. 463 (432) ; 
B. § 128, 27." 

ἐν-οικέω, -ῶ: fut. ἐνοικήσω : 1 aor. ἐνῴκησα; Sept. for 
Iw; to dwell in; in the N. T. with ἔν τινι, dat. of pers. 
in one, everywhere metaphorically, to dwell in one and 
influence him (for good) : ἔν τινι, in a person’s soul, of the 
Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 11; 2 Tim. i. 14; of πίστις, 2 Tim. 
i. 5; [of sin, Ro. vii. 17 T WH (for simple οἰκεῖν): ἐν 
ὑμῖν, in your assembly, of Christian truth, Col. iii. 16; ἐν 
αὐτοῖς. in a Christian church, of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 
Co. iii. 16; [al. understand the phrase in Col. and Co. 
ll. ee. internally, “in your hearts”; but see Meyer].* 

ἐν-όντα. Td, See Evert. 

ἐν-ορκίζω ; to adjure, put under oath, solemnly entreat, 
with two ace., one of him who is adjured, one of him by 
whom he is adjured [B. 147 (128)]: 1 Th.v.27L T Tr 
WH, for RG ὁρκίζω, [on the inf. [0]}. ef. B. 276 (237)]. 
Elsewhere not found except once [twice] in mid. ἐνορ- 
κίζομαι in Boeckh, Inserr. ii. p. 42, no. 1933 ; [and Joseph. 
antt. 8, 15, 4 Dind., also Bekk.]; the subst. ἐνορκισμός 
occurs in Synes. [1413 b. Migne]; once also ἐνορκέω in 
Schol. ad Leian. Catapl. ο. 23 ἐνορκῶ σε κατὰ τοῦ πατρός: 


217 


ἔνοχος 


[to which Soph. Lex. 8. v. adds Porph. Adm. 208, 18 
ἐνορκῶ σε eis τὸν θεὸν ἵνα ἀπέλθῃς." 

ἑνότης, -ητος, 7, (fr. εἷς, ἑνός, one), unity (Aristot., 
Plat.) ; i. q. unanimity, agreement : with gen., τῆς πίστεως, 
Eph. iv. 13; τοῦ πνεύματος, ib. vs. 3.* 

ἐν-οχλέω, -@; [pres. pass. ptep. évoxAovpevos]; (ὀχλέω, 
fr. ὄχλος a crowd, annoyance); in the classics fr. Ar 
stph., Xen., Plat. on; fo excite disturbance, to trouble, 
annoy, (ἐν, ina person) ; in Grk. writ. foll. by both τινά 
and τινί; pass. with ἀπό τινος, Lk. vi. 18 T Tr WH; 
absol. of the growth of a poisonous plant, fig. represent- 
ing the man who corrupts the faith, piety, character, of 
the Christian church: Heb. xii. 15 fr. Deut. xxix. 18 
after cod. Alex. which gives ἐνοχλῇ for ἐν χολῇ, which 
agreeably to the Hebr. text is the reading of cod. Vat. 
(Gen. xlviii.1; 1S. xix.14,ete.) [Comp.: map-evoxdéw.- |* 

ἔνοχος, -ov, i. 4- 6 evexduevos, one who is held in any- 
thing, so that he cannot escape; bound, under obligation, 
subject to, liable: with gen. of the thing by which one is 
bound, δουλείας, Heb. ii. 15 ; used of one who is held by, 
possessed with, love and zeal for anything; thus τῶν 
βιβλίων. Sir. prolog. 9; with dat. τοῖς ἐρωτικοῖς, Plut. ; 
{on supposed distinctions in meaning betw. the constr. 
w. the gen. and w. the dat. (6. ¢. ‘the constr. with the dat. 
expresses liability, that with the gen. carries the mean- 
ing further and implies either the actual or the right- 
ful hold.’ Green) see Schafer on Demosth. v. p. 323; 
cf. W.-§ 28, 2; B. 170 (148)]. As in Grk. writ., chiefly 
in a forensic sense, denoting the connection of a person 
either with his crime, or with the penalty or trial, or with 
that against whom or which he has offended; so as 
absol. guilty, worthy of punishment: Lev. xx. 9,11, 13, 16, 
27; 1 Mace. xiv. 45. Ὄ. with gen. of the thing by the 
violation of which guilt is contracted, guilty of anything: 
τοῦ σώματος κ. τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ κυρίου, guilty of a crime 
committed against the body and blood of the Lord, 1 Co. 
xi. 27 [see Meyer; W. 202 (190 sq.)]; πάντων, sc. ἐνταὰλ- 
μάτων, Jas. ii. 10; οἱ ἔνοχοί σου. Is. liv.17. ο. with gen. 
of the crime: αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος [an eternal sin], Mk. iii. 
29 LT Tr txt. WH; (τῶν βιαίων, Plat. lege. 11, 914 e.; 
κλοπῆς, Philo de Jos. 8 37; ἱεροσυλίας, 2 Mace. xiii. 6; 
Aristot. oec. 2 [p. 1849", 19], and in other exx.; but much 
oftener in the classics with dat. of the crime; οἵ. Passow or 
[L. and 5.7 5.ν.). d. with gen. of the penalty : θανάτου. 
Mk. xiv. 64; Mt. xxvi. 66; Gen. xxvi. 11; αἰωνίου κρίσεως, 
Mk. iii. 29 Rec.; δεσμοῦ [al. dat.], Dem. p. 1229, 11. e. 
with dat. of the tribunal; liable to this or that tribunal i. 6. 
to punishment to be imposed by this or that tribunal: 
τῇ κρίσει, τῷ συνεδρίῳ, Mt. v. 21 sq.; ἔνοχος γραφῇ: to be 
indicted, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 64; ef. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr. 
ii. 1 p. 340 sq.; [W. 210 (198)].  f. by a use unknown 
to Grk. writ. it is connected with εἰς and the ace. of the 
place where the punishment is to be suffered: εἰς τ. γέεν- 
vay τοῦ πυρός. a pregn. constr. [W. 213 (200); 621 (577)] 
(but ef. B. 170 (148) [who regards it as a vivid cireumlo- 
cution for the dat.; ef. Green, Crit. Notes (ad loc.) ‘liable 
as far’ in respect of penal consequence ‘as the fiery ἃ.) 
viz. to go away or be cast into etc. Mt. v. 22.* 


ἔνταλμα 


ἐνπ- see ἐμπ- and 5. v. ἐν, IIT. 3 fine print. 
évradpa, -ros, τό, (ἐντέλλομαι [see evreAAw]), @ precept: 
plur., Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; Col. 11. 22. (Is. xxix. 13 
διδάσκοντες ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων ; [Job xxiii.11,12]. Not 
found in prof. auth.; [W. 25].)* 
ἐνταφιάζω ; 1 aor. inf. ἐνταφιάσαι; to see to τὰ ἐντάφια 
(fr. ἐν and τάφος), i. 6. to prepare a body for burial, by 
the use of every requisite provision and funereal adorn- 
ment, to wit, baths, vestments, flowers, wreaths, per- 
fumes, libations, etc.; to lay out a corpse (Lat. pollin- 
gere): Mt. xxvi. 12; Jn.xix.40. (Gen.1. 2 sq.; Anthol. 
411, 125, 5; Plut. de esu carn. 1, 5, 7 mor. p. 999 = 
ἐνταφιασμός, -ov, 6, (ἐνταφιάζω, q. V-), preparation of a 
body for burial: Mk. xiv.8; Jn. xii. 7. (Schol. ad Eur. 
Phoen. 1654; [Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 1009].) * 
ἐν-τέλλω : (τέλλω equiv. to τελέω) ; several times in 
the poets (Pind. Olymp. 7, 73) and the later writers 
(ἐντέταλκε, Joseph. antt. 7,14, 5 [but Bekk. évrerad Oar]; 
καθὼς ἐντέταλταί σοι, passively, Sir. vii. 31); generally, 
and so always in the N. T., depon. mid. ἐντέλλομαι; fut. 
ἐντελοῦμαι; 1 aor. ἐνετειλάμην ; pf. 3 pers. sing. ἐντέταλται 
(Acts xiii. 47) ; Sept. very often for 3%; to order, com- 
mand to be done, enjoin: περί twos, Heb. xi. 22; ἐνετεί- 
λατο λέγων, Mt. χν. 4 [RT]; τινί, Actsi. 2; [with λέγων 
added, Mt. xvii. 9]; with οὕτω added, Acts xiii. 47; καθώς, 
(Mk. xi. 6 RL mrg.]; Jn. xiv. 31 RGT; foll. by inf. Mt. 
xix. 7; τινί, foll. by inf. [B. § 141, 2; 275 (237)], In. viii. 
5 Ree.; τινί, iva (ef. B. 237 (204) ], Mk. xiii. 34 (Joseph. 
antt. 7, 14,5; 8,14, 2); τινί τι, Mt. xxviii. 20; Mk. x. 3; 
Jn. xv. 14,17; τινὶ περί τινος, gen. of pers., Mt. iv. 6; Lk. 
iv. 10, fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 11 sq. διαθήκην ἐντέλλεσθαι πρός 
twa, to command to be delivered to one, Heb. ix. 20; ef. 
ἐνετείλατο αὐτῷ πρὸς λαὸν αὐτοῦ, Sir. χ]ν. 3; the phrase 
ἐντέλλεσθαι (τινί) διαθήκην occurs also in Josh. xxiii. 16; 
Judg. ii. 20; Jer. xi. 4; Ps. ex. (exi.) 9, but in another 
sense, as appears from the full expression διαθήκην, ἣν 
ἐνετείλατο ὑμῖν ποιεῖν, Deut. iv. 13. [Syn. see κελεύω, 
fin.] * 
ἐντεῦθεν, adv. of place, from this place, hence, (as ἐκεῖ- 
θεν thence): Mt. xvii. 20 RG; Lk. iv. 9; xiii. 31; xvi. 
26 Rec.; Jn. ii. 16; [vii. 3]; xiv. 31; xviii. 36; ἐντεῦθεν 
k. ἐντεῦθεν, on the one side and the other, on each side: Jn. 
xix. 18; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. [ef. Num. xxii. 24; Dan. xii. 
5 Theodot.]; metaph. hence, i. e. from that cause or ori- 
gin, from this source, i. 4. ἐκ τούτου [see ἐκ, II. 8], Jas. iv. 
1 [W. 161 (152); B. 400 (342)].* 
ἔν-τενξις, -ews, ἡ, (ἐντυγχάνω, q. v.), a falling in with, 
meeting with, (ai τοῖς λῃσταῖς ἐντεύξεις, Plat. politic. 
p- 298d.) ; an interview, a coming together, to visit, con- 
verse, or for any other cause; that for which an interview 
ts hed, a conference or conversation (Polyb., Diod., al.), a 
petition, supplication (Diod. 16, 55; Joseph. antt. 15, 3, 
8; Plut. Tib. Gracch. 11); used of prayer to God: 1 
Tim. iv. 5; plur. [A. V. intercessions], 1 Tim. ii. 1, (Plut. 


Num. 14 ποιεῖσθαι τὰς πρὸς τὸ θεῖον ἐντεύξεις). [S¥N. 5561 


ϑέησις. fin.] - 
ἔντιμος, -ον, (τιμή), held in honor, prized; hence, pre- 
tious: λίθος, 1 Pet. ii. 4, 6, (Is. xxviii. 16); honorable, 


218 


ἔντος 


noble, Lk. xiv. 8; τινί, dear to one, Lk. vii. 2; ἔντιμον 
ἔχειν τινά to hold one dear or in honor, to value higily, 
Phil. ii. 29. [(Soph., Plat., al.)]* 

ἐντολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐντέλλω Or ἐντέλλομαι, 4. v-), fr. Pind. 
and Hdt. down; Sept. often for ΤῚΝ, in the Pss. the 
plur. ἐντολαΐ also for Dpa; an order, command, charge, 
precept ; 1. univ. a charge, injunction: Lk. xv. 29; 
ἐντολὴν λαμβάνειν παρά τινος, Jn. x. 18; πρός τινα, Acts 
XVii. 15; λαβεῖν ἐντολὰς περί τινος, Col. iv. 10; that which 
is prescribed to one by reason of his office, ἐντολὴν ἔχειν 
foll. by inf., Heb. vii. 5; ἐντολὴν διδόναι τινί, Jn. xiv. 31 
LTr WH; with τί εἴπῃ added, of Christ, whom God 
commanded what to teach to men, Jn. xii. 49; ἡ ἐντολὴ 
αὐτοῦ, of God, respecting the same thing, vs. 50. 2. 
a commandment, i. e. a prescribed rule in accordance with 
which a thing is done; a. univ. ἐντολὴ σαρκική [-ἰνη ἃ 
LT Tr WH], a precept relating to lineage, Heb. vii. 16; 
of the Mosaic precept concerning the priesthood, Heb. 
vii. 18; of a magistrate’s order or edict: ἐντολὴν διδόναι, 
iva, Jn. xi. 57. Ὁ. ethically; a. used of the command- 
ments of the Mosaic law: ἡ ἐντολὴ τοῦ θεοῦ, what God 
prescribes in the law of Moses, Mt. xv. 3, (and RG in 
vs. 6); Mk. vii. 8sq.; esp. of particular precepts of this 
law as distinguished from ὁ νόμος (the law) their body 
or sum: Mt. xxii. 36,38; Mk. x. 5; xii. 28sqq.; Ro. vii. 
8-13; xiii. 9; Eph. vi. 2; Heb. ix. 19; κατὰ τ. ἐντολήν, 
according to the precept of the law, Lk. xxiii. 56; plur., 
Mt. [v. 19]; xxii. 40; Mk. x. 19; (LK. xviii. 20]; τηρεῖν 
τὰς ἐντολάς, Mt. xix. 17; πορεύεσθαι ἐν τ. ἐντολαῖς, Lk. i. 
6; ὁ νόμος τῶν ἐντολῶν, the law containing the precepts, 
Eph. ii. 15 (see δόγμα, 2). β. of the precepts of Jewish 
tradition: ἐντολαὶ ἀνθρώπων, Tit. 1. 14. y. univ. of the 
commandments of God, esp. as promulgated in the Chris- 
tian religion: 1 Jn. iii. 23; iv. 21; v. 3; ἐντολὴν διδόναι, 
1 Jn. iii. 23 ; ἐντολὴν ἔχειν, ἵνα, 1 Jn. iv. 21; ἐντολὴν λαβεῖν 
παρὰ τοῦ πατρός, 2 Jn. 4; τήρησις ἐντολῶν θεοῦ, 1 Co. vii. 
19; τηρεῖν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, 1 Jn. 11. 3 sq.; iii. 22, 24; v. 
2 [here L T Tr WH ποιῶμεν], 3; or τοῦ θεοῦ, Rey. xii. 
17; xiv. 12; ποιεῖν ras ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, Rey. xxii. 14 RG; 
περιπατεῖν κατὰ τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, 2 Jn. 6; of those 
things which God commanded to be done by Christ, Jn. 
xv. 10°; of the precepts of Christ relative to the orderly 
management of affairs in religious assemblies, 1 Co. xiv. 
37 RGLTr WH; of the moral precepts of Christ and 
his apostles: ἐντολὴν διδόναι, ἵνα, Jn. xiii. 345 ἐντολὴν 
γράφειν, 1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; [2 Jn. 5]; τὰς ἐντολὰς τηρεῖν, Jn. 
[xiv. 15]; xv. 10°; ἔχειν ras evr. x. τηρεῖν αὐτάς, “habere 
in memoria et servare in vita” (Augustine), Jn. xiv. 21; 
αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ evr. iva, Jn. xv. 12, cf. 1 In. iii. 28. ἡ ἐντολή, 
collectively, of the whole body of the moral precepts of 
Christianity: 1 Tim. vi. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 2, (thus 
ἡ ἐντολὴ τοῦ θεοῦ, Polye. ad Phil. 5).* 

ἐντόπιος, -ov, (τόπος), a dweller in a place; a resident or 
native of a place: Acts xxi.12. (Sope. (Ti, xiat., al.) * 

ante, αν.» ([fr. ἐν], opp. to exis). within, inside: with 
gen. ἐντὸς ὑμῶν, within you, i. e. *n the midst of you, Lk. 
xvii. 21, (ἐντὸς αὐτῶν, Xen. an. 1, 10, 3 [but see the 
pass.]; ἐντὸς τούτων, Hell. 2, 3, 19; al.) ; others, within 


3. 4 2 
εντρέπω “ 


you (i. e. in your souls), a meaning which the use of the 
word permits (ἐντός pov, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 43 ον]. 
(cix.) 22, ete.; [Hippol. ref. haer. 5, 7.8; Petrus Alex. 
ep. can. 57), but not the context; τὸ ἐντός, the inside, 
Mt. xxiii. 26.* 

ἐν-τρέπω ; [Mid., pres. ἐντρέπομαι ; impf. ἐνετρεπόμην  ; 
2 aor. pass. ἐνετράπην ; 2 fut. mid. [1. 6. pass. with mid. 
force, B. 52 (45) ] ἐντραπήσομαι ; prop. to turn about, so 
in pass. even in Hom. ; τινά, prop. to turn one upon him- 
self, i. 6. to shame one, 1 Co. iv. 14 (Diog. Laért. 2, 29 ; 
Ael. v. h. 3,17; Sept.); pass. to be ashamed: 2 Th. iii. 
14; Tit. ii. 8. Mid., τινά, to reverence a person: Mt. 
xxi 373 Mk. xi. 6; Lk. xviii. 2,4; xx.13; Heb. xii 9; 
Ex. x. 3; Sap. ii. 10; Polyb. 9, 36,10; 30, 9, 2; θεούς, 
Diod. 19, 7; soin Grk. writ., esp. fr. Plut. on; the earlier 
Greeks said ἐντρέπεσθαί τινος ; so also Polyb. 9, 31, 6; [ef. 
W. § 32, 1b. a.; B. 192 (166)].* 

ἐν-τρέφω : [pres. pass. ptcp. ἐντρεφόμενος]; to nourish 
in: τινά τινι, a person in a thing; metaph. to educate, 
form the mind : τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, 1 Tim. iv. 6; τοῖς 
νόμοις, Plat. lege. 7 p. 798 a.; Philo, vict. offer. § 10 sub 
fin.; τοῖς ἱεροῖς γράμμασι, Phil. leg. ad Gai. § 29 sub fin.* 

ἔν-τρομος, -ov, (τρόμος. cf. ἔμφοβος). trembling, terrified : 
Acts vii. 32 and xvi. 29 ἔντρ. γενόμενος, becoming tremu- 
lous, made to tremble; Heb. xii. 21 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. 
ἔκτρομος; q. v-]. (Sept.; 1 Mace. xiii. 2; Plut. Fab. 3.) * 

ἐν-τροπή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐντρέπω, q. V-), shame: πρὸς ἐντροπὴν 
ὑμῖν λέγω [or λαλῶ], to arouse your shame, 1 Co. vi. 5; 
xv. 34. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 26; lxviii. (Ixix.) 8, 20; 
respect, reverence, Soph., Polyb., Joseph., al.) * 

ἐν-τρυφάω, -@; (see τρυφάω and τρυφή) ; to live in lur- 
ury, live delicately or luxuriously, to revel in: ἐν ταῖς 
ἀπάταις [L Tr txt. WH mrg. ἀγάπαις, see ἀγάπη. 2] αὐτῶν, 
(on the meaning see ἀπάτη), 2 Pet. ii. 13 [ef. W. 8 52, 4, 
5]. (Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 30; Diod. 19, 71; also to take de- 
light in: ἐν ἀγαθοῖς, Is. lv. 2; with dat. of thing, 4 Mace. 
viii. 7; Hdian. 3, 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.].) * 

ἐν-τυγχάνω ; 2 aor. ἐνέτυχον ; generally with a dat. 
either of pers. or of thing; 1. to light upon a person 
or a thing, fall in with, hit upon, a person or a thing; so 
often in Attic. 2. to go to or meet a person, esp. for 
the purpose of conversation, consultation, or supplication, 
(Polyb., Plut., Aelian, al.) : with the addition περί twos, 
gen. of person, for the purpose of consulting about a per- 
son, Acts xxv. 24 [R. V. made suit]; to make petition: 
ἐνέτυχον τῷ κυρίῳ καὶ ἐδεήθην αὐτοῦ, Sap. viii. 21; ἐνέτυχον 
τῷ βασιλεῖ τὴν ἀπόλυσιν . . . αἰτούμενοι, 3 Mace. vi. 37; 
hence, to pray, entreat: ὑπέρ with gen. of pers. to make 
intercession for any one (the dat. of the pers. approached 
in prayer being omitted, as evident from the context), 
Ro. viii. 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, (foll. by περί with gen. of 
person, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 56, 1); τινὶ κατά τινος, [to 
plead with one against any one], to accuse one to any one, 
Ro. xi. 2, ef. 1 Mace. viii. 32; x. 61, 63 sq.; xi. 25. (Not 
found in Sept.) [Come.: ὑπερ-εντυγχάνω.] * 

ἐν-τυλίσσω: 1 aor. ἐνετύλιξα ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐντετυλιγ- 
μένος; toroll in, wrap in: τινὰ σινδόνι. Mt. xxvii. 59 (ἐν σ. 


Tr, [ἐν] o. WH); Lk. xxiii. 53; Ev. Nicod. ο. 11 fin. to 


19 


ref 
ἐνώπιον 


roll up, wrap togetner: pass. Jn. xx. 7. 
692; nub. 987; Athen. 3 p. 106 sq.) * 

ἐν-τυπόω, -@: pf. pass. ptcp. evrerum@pevos ; to engrave, 
imprint (a figure) : [foll. by dat. (Ree. with éy) ], 2 Co. iii. 
7 [ef. W. 634 sq. (589) ]. (Aristot., Dio Cass., Plut., and 
in earlier frag. in Athen.)* 

ἐν-υβρίζω : 1 aor. ptep. ἐνυβρίσας ; to treat with con- 
tumely: Heb. x. 29. (From Soph. on.) ἢ 

ἐνυπνιάζω (ἐνύπνιον, q. Vv.) : to dream (Aristot. h. an. 4, 
10, ete.), and dep. ἐνυπνιάζομαι (Hippocr., Plut. Brut. e. 
24); so always in the Bible, for Ὁ ΤΊ, with fut. pass. 
ἐνυπνιασθήσομαι, and com. with aor. pass. ἐνυπνιάσθην, 
more rarely mid. ἐνυπνιασάμην (Gen. xxxvii.9; Jude. vii. 
13); ἐνύπνια ἐνυπνιάζεσθαι (in Sept. for minion Don), 
to dream (divinely suggested) dreams: Acts ii. 17 fr. 
Joel iii. 1 (ii. 28); but the reading ἐνυπνίοις (ἐνυπνιά- 
ζεσθαι) was long ago restored, which reading also cod. 
Alex. gives in Joel. Metaph. to be beguiled with sensual 
images and carried away to an impious course of conduct: 
Jude 8.* 

ἐνύπνιον, -ov, τό, (ἐν and ὕπνος, what appears in sleep; 
fr. Aeschyl. down), a dream (Lat. insomnium), a vision 
which presents itself to one in sleep: Acts ii. 17, on 
which pass. see ἐνυπνιάζω. (Sept. for n\n.) * 

ἐνώπιον, neut. of the adj. ἐνώπιος, -ov, (i. 4. ὁ ἐν ὠπὶ ὦν, 
one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152; Sept. Ex. xxxiii. 
11; ἄρτοι ἐνώπιοι, Ex. xxv. 29); used adverbially it gets 
the force of a preposition [W. § 54,6; B. 319 (274)], 
and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any 
prof. auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in 
Sept. for .)}3 and +99, also for 33) and 33375 among 
N. T. writ. used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the 
Rev., but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used 
1. of occupied place: in that place which is before, or over 
against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns 
his eyes; @. prop.: εἶναι ἐνώπ. τινος, Rev. i. 4; vii. 15; 
[xiv. 5 Rec.]; so that εἶναι must be mentally supplied 
before ἐνώπιον, Rev. iv. 5 sq.; viii. 3; ix.13; after στῆναι, 
Acts x. 30; ἑστηκέναι, Rev. vil. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4; xii. 4; 
xx. 12; παρεστηκέναι, Lk. i. 19; Acts iv. 10; ἱστάναι, 
Acts vi. 6; καθῆσθαι, Rev. xi. 16; θύρα ἀνεῳγμένη ἐν. 
τινος, i. 4- a door opened for one (see θύρα, c. y. [B. 173 
(150)]), Rev. iii. 8; after verbs signifying motion to a 
place: τιθέναι, Lk. v.18 ; ἀναβαίνειν, Rev. viii. 4; βάλλειν, 
Rey. iv. 10; πίπτειν or πεσεῖν (of worshippers), Rev. 
iv.10; v.8; [vii. 11]; προσκυνεῖν, Lk. iv. 7; Rev. iii. 9; 
xv. 4, [ΟΕ B. u. s.; 147 (129); W. 214 (201)]. Ῥ: in 
metaphorical phrases after verbs signifying motion: 
βαστάζειν τὸ ὄνομα... . ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν (see βαστάζω. 3), 
Acts ix. 15; σκάνδαλα βάλλειν ἐνώπ. τινος, to cast stum- 
bling-blocks (incitements to sin) before one, Rey. ii. 14; 
after προέρχεσθαι, to go before one like a herald, Lk. i. 
17; [after προπορεύεσθαι, Lk. i.76 WH]. in phrases in 
which something is supposed to be done by one while 
standing or appearing in the presence of another [cf. 
B. 176 (153)]: atter ἀρνεῖσθαι, Lk. xii. 9 (Lehm. ἔμπρο- 
abev) ; [ἀπαρνεῖσθαι. ibid.]; ὁμολογεῖν, Rev. iii. 5 [Rec. 
ἐξομ.]; κατηγορεῖν, Rev. xii. 10; [ἄδειν, Rev. xiv. 3]; 


(Arstph. Plut. 


᾿Ενώς 


καυχᾶσθαι, to come before God and glory, 1 Co. i. 29; 
δικαιοῦν ἑαυτόν, Lk. xvi. 15. ὁ. ig. apud (with) ; in the 
soul of any one: χαρὰ γίνεται ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων, Lk. 
xv. 10 [al. understand this of God’s joy, by reverent 
suggestion described as in the presence of the angels; cf. 
ἐν oup. VS. 7]; ἔσται σοι δόξα ἐνώπ. τῶν συνανακειμένων, Lk. 
xiv. 10 [8]. take this outwardly; cf. 2 below]; after 
verbs of remembering and forgetting: es μνημό- 
συνον evar. (L.'T Tr WH ἔμπροσθεν) τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts x. 4; 
μνησθῆναι evar. τ. θεοῦ, Acts x. 31; Rev. xvi. 19; ἐπιλε- 
λησμένον evar. τ. θεοῦ, Lk. xii. 6 [ef. B. § 134, 3). 2, 
before one’s eyes; in one’s presence and sight or hearing ; 
a. prop.: φαγεῖν ἐνώπ. τινος, Lk. xxiv. 43; this same 
phrase signifies a living together in Lk. xiii. 26 (258. 
xi. 13; 1 Καὶ. i. 25); σημεῖα ποιεῖν, Jn. xx. 30; ἀνακρίνειν, 
Lk. xxiii. 14; ἐνώπ. πολλῶν μαρτύρων, 1 Tim. vi. 12; add 
Lk. [v. 25]; viii. 47; Acts xix. 9, 19; xxvii. 35; [1 Tim. 
v. 20]; 3 Jn. 6; Rev. iii. 5; [xiii. 13; xiv. 10]: b. 
metaph. : πίστιν ἔχε ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, have faith, satisfied 
with this that it is not hidden from the sight of God, 
Ro. xiv. 22; ἁμαρτάνειν ἐν. τινος (see ἁμαρτάνω ad fin.), 
Lk. xv. 18, 21; esp. in affirmations, oaths, adjurations: 
ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, τοῦ κυρίου, etc., Gal. i. 20; 1 Tim. v. 21; 
vi. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 14; iv.1. Hence those are said to do 
something in the presence of one who have him present 
to their thought, who set him before their mind’s eye: 
προωρώμην [mpoop. L T Tr WH] τὸν κύριον evar. pov, 
Acts ii. 25; ταπεινοῦσθαι ἐν. τοῦ κυρίου, Jas. iv. 10, (Sir. 
ii. 17). ὁ. atthe instance of any one, by his power and 
authority: Rey. xiii. 12, 14; xix. 206. d. before the eyes 
of one, i.e. if he turns his eyes thither: Heb. iv. 13 (where 
οὐκ ἀφανὴς ἐνώπ. αὐτοῦ is explained by the following 
γυμνὰ .. . τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ ; cf. Job xxvi. 6 γυμνὸς 6 
Gdns ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ, before his look, to his view). 6. be- 
Jore one i. e. he looking on and judging, in one’s judg- 
ment [W. 32; B.172 (150); § 133,14]: ἐφάνησαν evar. 
αὐτῶν ὡσεὶ λῆρος. Lk. xxiv. 11 (ef. Greek Ἡρακλείδῃ 
λῆρος πάντα δοκεῖ εἶναι) ; SO esp. ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, τοῦ 
κυρίου, after the foll. words: τὰ ἀρεστά, 1 Jn. iii. 22; 
βδέλυγμα, Lk. xvi. 15; δίκαιος, Lk. i. 6 (T Tr WH ἐναν- 
tiov); Acts iv. 19; δικαιοῦσθαι, Ro. iii. 20; εὐάρεστος, 
Heb. xiii. 21; εὐθύς, Acts viii. 21 Rec.; καλόν, ar ddexrov, 
1 Tim. ii.3; v.4; Ro. xii. 17; 2Co. viii. 21; μέγας, Lk. 
1.15; πολυτελές, 1 Pet. iii. 4; πεπληρωμένος, Rev. iii. 2; 
ἀρέσκειν, Acts vi. 5 (Deut. i. 23 [Alex.]; 2S. iii. 36; 
[W. § 33, 1.7}: in the sight of God i. e. God looking on 
and approving: Lk.i.75; Acts x. 333; 2Co. iv. 2; vii. 12. 
in the sight of God, or with God: εὑρίσκειν χάριν (j) 8¥1 
often in the O. T.), to be approved by God, please him, 
Acts vii. 46.* 

*Evés (WIN [i. 6. man, mortal]), Enos, son of Seth 
(Gen. iv. 26): Lk. iii. 38.* 

ἐνωτίζομαι : in bibl. writ. depon. mid.; 1 aor. impy. 2 
pers. plur. ἐνωτίσασθε ; i. q. ἐν ὠτίοις δέχομαι (Hesych.), 
to receive into the ear; give ear to: ri, Acts ii. 14; Sept. 
for ;ixt; elsewhere only in 660]. and Byzant. writ., 
and in these also as depon. pass. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis 
lexice. p. 693 sq.; (Sturz, Dial. Alex. p.166; W. 33].* 


220 


ἐξάγω 


Ἐνώχ [WH Ἑνώχ, see their Intr. § 4087, (“Avayos, 
του, 6, Joseph. antt. 1, 3,4; Hebr. ΠΤ initiated or initi- 
ating, [ef. B. 1). s.v.]), Znoch, father of Methuselah (Lk. 
iii. 37); on account of his extraordinary piety taken up 
alive by God to heaven (Gen. v. 18-24; Heb. xi. 5; [οἷ 
Sir. xliv. 16; Joseph. antt. 1, 3, 4]); in the opinion of 
later Jews the most renowned antediluvian prophet; to 
whom, towards the end of the second century before 
Christ, was falsely attributed an apocalyptical book 
which was afterwards combined with fragments of other 
apocryphal books, and preserved by the Fathers in 
Greek fragments and entire in an Ethiopic transla- 
tion. This translation, having been found among the 
Abyssinian Christians towards the close of the last cen- 
tury, has been edited by Richard Laurence, archbishop of 
Cashel (“ Libri Henoch versio aethiopica.”” Oxon. 1838), 
and by A. Dillmann (“ Liber Henoch, aethiopice.” Lips. 
1851); it was translated into English by R. Laurence 
(1st ed. 1821; 3d ed. 1838 [reprinted (Scribners, N. Y.) 
1883; also (with notes) by G. H. Schodde (Andover, 
1882) ], into German by A. G. Hoffman (Jen. 1833-38, 2 
vols.) and by A. Dillmann (Lips. 1853) ; each of the last 
two translators added a commentary. From this book is 
taken the ‘ prophecy’ in Jude 14 sq.; [ef. B.D. (Am. ed.), 
also Dict. of Chris. Biog., s. ν. Enoch, The Book of].* 

ef, see ἐκ. 

ἕξ, of, ai, τά, indecl. numeral, siz: Mt. xvii. 1; Lk. 
xiii. 14, ete. 

ἐξ-αγγέλλω : 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. ἐξαγγείλητε ; 
first in Hom. 1]. 5, 390; properly, to tell out or forth 
[see ἐκ, VI. 4], to declare abroad, divulge, publish: [Mk. 
xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; with He- 
braistic emphasis, to make known by praising or proclaim- 
ing, to celebrate, [A. V. show forth]: 1 Pet. ii. 9. (For 
39D, Ps. lxxii. (Ixxiii.) 28; Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 13, ef. Sir. 
xliv. 15.) * 

eE-ayopdtw: 1 aor. ἐξηγόρασα;; [pres. mid. ἐξαγοράζυ- 
μαι]; 1. to redeem i. 6. by payment of a price to re- 
cover from the power of another, to ransom, buy off, [ οἵ. 
ἐκ, VI. 2]: prop. θεραπαινίδα, Diod. 36,1 p. 530; metaph. 
of Christ freeing men from the dominion of the Mosaic! 
law at the price of his vicarious death (see ἀγοράζω. 
2b.), τινά, Gal. iv. 5; with addition of ἐκ τῆς κατάρας τοῦ 
νόμου, Gal. iii. 13. 2. to buy up, Polyb. 3, 42, 2; Plut. 
Crass. 2; Mid. ri, to buy up for one’s self, for one’s use 
[W. § 38, 2b.; B. 192 (166 sq.)]: trop. in the obscure 
phrase ἐξαγ. τὸν καιρόν, Eph. v. 16 and Col. iv. 5, where 
the meaning seems to be to make a wise and sacred use 
of every opportunity for doing good, so that zeal and 
well-doing are as it were the purchase-money by which 
we make the time our own; (act. ἐξαγοράζειν καιρόν, to 
seek [to gain time (A. V.) i. e.] delay, Dan. ii. 8; mid. 
with ace. of thing, ‘by ransom to avert evil from one’s 
self’, ‘to buy one’s self off or deliver one’s self from 
evil’: διὰ μιᾶς Spas τὴν αἰώνιον κόλασιν ἐξαγοραζόμενοι, of 
the martyrs, Mart. Polye. 2, 3).* 

eE-dyw; 2 aor. ἐξήγαγον ; Sept. often for yin; to lead 
out [ef. ἐκ, VI. 1]: twa (the place whence being sup 


ἐξαιρέω 


plied in thought), Mk. xv. 20 (of the city to punishment 
[but Lehm. dyovow]); Acts xvi. 37, 39; v. 19 and xvi. 
39 (from prison) ; Acts vii. 36 (from Egypt); Jn. x. 3 
(sheep from the fold); with ἔξω added [in RG Lbr.], 
Lk. xxiv. 50; ἔξω τῆς κώμης, Mk. viii. 23 RG L Trmrg. 
[ef. W. 603 (561)]; with the addition of ἐκ w. gen. of 
place, Acts vii. 40; xii. 17; xiii. 17; Heb. viii. 9; foll. 
by eis with ace. of place, Acts xxi. 38.* 

ἐξαιρέω, -o: 2 aor. impv. ἔξελε; Mid., [pres. ptep. 
ἐξαιρούμενος); 2 aor. ἐξειλόμην and in Alex. form (LT 
Tr WH) ἐξειλάμην (Acts vii. 10 [so Grsb.]; xii. 11 [so 
Grsb.]; xxiii. 27; see reff. in [aipéw and] ἀπέρχομαι), 
inf. ἐξελέσθαι (Acts vii. 34); Sept. usually for x3 to 
take out (cf. ἐκ, VI. 2]; 1. to pluck out, draw out, i. e. 
to root out: tov ὀφθαλμόν, Mt. v. 29; xviii. 9. 2. Mid. 
a. to choose out (for one’s self), select, one person from 
many: Acts xxvi. 17 (so for \n3 in Is. xlix. 7 [but there 
the Sept. has ἐξελεξάμην; perh. Is. xlviii. 10 is meant] 
and sometimes in Grk. writ.; first in Hom. Od. 14, 232) 
[4]. refer Acts l. c. to the next head; (see Hackett ad 
loc.) ]. Ὁ. to rescue, deliver, (prop. to cause to be res- 
cued, but the middle force is lost [ef. W. 253 (238)]): 
twa, Acts vii. 84; xxiii. 27; τινὰ ἔκ τινος, Acts vii. 10; 
xii. 11; Gal. i. 4; (Ex. iii. 8, ete.; Aeschyl. suppl. 924; 
Hadt. 3, 137; Dem. 256, 3; Polyb. 1, 11, 11).* 

ἐξκαίρω : fut. ἐξαρῶ (1 Co. v.13 Rec.) ; 1 aor. impv. 2 
pers. plur. ἐξάρατε (ib. ἃ 1, 1 Tr WH); 1 aor. pass. ἐξήρ- 
θην, to lift up or take away out of a place; to remove [οἵ. 
ἐκ, VI. 2]: τινὰ ἐκ, one from a company, 1 Co. v. 2 Ree. 
[see αἴρω, 8 6.1; vs. 13 fr. Deut. [xix. 19 or] xxiv. 9.* 

ἐξκαιτέω, -@: 1 aor. mid. ἐξητησάμην; to ask from, de- 
mand of, (cf. ἐκ, VI. 2]. Mid. to ask from (or beg) for 
one’s self: twa, to ask that one be given up to one from 
the power of another, —in both senses, either for good, 
to beg one from another, ask for the pardon, the safety, of 
some one, (Xen. an. 1, 1,3; Dem. p. 546, 22; Plut. Per. 
32; Palaeph. 41, 2); or in a bad sense, for torture, for 
punishment, (Plut. mor. p. 417 d. de defect. orac. 14; in 
prof. auth. often with this sense in the act.) ; so of Satan 
asking the apostles out of the power and keeping of God 
to be tried by afflictions (allusion being made to Job i. 
1-12): Lk. xxii. 31 (Test. xii. Patr. p. 729 [test. Benj. 
§ 3] ἐὰν τὰ πνεύματα τοῦ Βελίαρ εἰς πᾶσαν πονηρίαν θλί- 
ψέεως ἐξαιτήσωνται buas).* 

ἐξαίφνης [WH ἐξέφνης (exc. in Acts xxii. 6), see 
their App. p. 151], adv., (αἴφνης, ἄφνω, ἄφνως suddenly), 
of a sudden, suddenly, unexpectedly: Mk. xiii. 36; Lk. 
li. 13; ix. 39; Actsix. 3; xxii.6. (Hom. et al.; Sept.)* 

ἐξ-ακολουθέω, -@: fut. ἐξακολουθήσω; 1 aor. ptep. ἐξα- 
KodovOncas; to follow out or up, tread in one’s steps; a. 
τῇ ὁδῷ twos, metaph., to imitate one’s way of acting: 
2 Pet. ii. 15, ef. Is. lvi. 11. b. to follow one’s author- 
ity: μύθοις, 2 Pet.i.16; Joseph. antt. prooem. 4, (ἀρχη- 
yots, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14,1; δυσὶ βασιλεῦσι, Test. xii. 
Patr. p. 643 [test. Zeb. § 9]). ce. to comply with, yield 
lo: ἀσελγείαις [Rec. ἀπωλείαις]. 2 Pet. ii. 2, (πνεύμασι 
πλάνης, Test. xii. Patr. p. 665 [test. Napht. § 3; τοῖς 
πονηροῖς διαβουλίοις, xii. Patr. p. 628 test. Is. § 6]; cf. 


221 


ἐξαποστέλλω 


also Am. ii. 4; Job xxxi.9; Sir. ν. 2). Among prof. 
auth. Polyb., Plut. occasionally use the word; [add Dion. 
Hal. de comp. verb. § 24 p. 188, 7; Epictet. diss. 1, 22, 
16].* 

ἑξακόσιοι, -at, -a, siz hundred: Rev. [xiii. 18]; xiv. 20." 

ἐξαλείφω : fut. ἐξαλείψω; 1 aor. ptep. ἐξαλείψνας ; 1 
aor. pass. infin. ἐξαλειφθῆναι [(WH -λιφθῆναι; see their 
App. p. 154, and 5. v. I, « below) ]; 1. (ἐξ- denoting 
completeness (cf. ἐκ, VI. 67), to anoint or wash in 
every part, hence to besmear: i. q. cover with lime (to white- 
wash or plaster), τὸ τεῖχος, Thue. 3, 20; τοὺς τοίχους τοῦ 
ἱεροῦ [here to overlay with gold ete.], 1 Chr. xxix. 4; τὴν 
οἰκίαν, Lev. xiv. 42 (for M30). 2. (e& denoting re- 
moval [cf. ἐκ, VI. 2]), to wipe off, wipe away: δάκρυον 
ἀπὸ [(GLT Tr WH ἐκ] τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν, Rev. vii. 17; 
xxi. 4 [ἢ α WHureg., al. ἐκ]; to obliterate, erase, wipe 
out, blot out, (Aeschyl., Hdt., al.; Sept. for 7m): τί, Col. 
ii. 14; τὸ ὄνομα ἐκ τῆς βίβλου, Rev. iii. 5 (Ps. Lxviii. 
(Ixix.) 29, cf. Deut. ix. 14; xxv. 6); τὰς ἁμαρτίας, the 
cuilt of sins, Acts iii. 19, (Ps. eviii. (cix.) 13; τὸ ἀνό- 
μῆμα, τὰς ἀνομίας, Is. xliii. 25; Ps. 1. (li.) 11; Sir. xlvi. 
20; τ. ἁμαρτίας ἀπαλείφειν, 3 Mace. ii. 19).* 

e€-ddAopat; to leap up: Acts iii. 8. (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 
27, et al.; Sept. Is. lv. 12.) * 

eEavaoracts, -ews, 7, (ἐξανίστημι, 4. V.), a rising up 
(Polyb. 8, 55,4); α rising again, resurrection: τῶν νεκρῶν 
or (L T Tr WH) ἡ ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν, Phil. iii. 11.* 

ἐξ-ανα-τέλλω : 1 aor. ἐξανέτειλα ; 1. trans. to make 
spring up, cause to shoot forth: Gen. ii. 9, ete. 2. in- 
trans. to spring up: Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5. (Rare in 
prof. auth. [ef. W. 102 (97)].)* 

ἐξ-αν-ίστημι: 1 aor. ἐξανέστησα; 2 aor. ἐξινέστην; 1. 
to make rise up, to raise up, to produce: omeppa, Mk. xii. 
19; Lk. xx. 28, (Hebr. yo, op, Gen. xxviii. 8). 2. 
2 aor. act. to rise in an assembly to speak (as in Xen. an. 
6, 1, 30): Acts xv. 5.* 

ἐξαπατάω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἐξηπάτησα; 1 aor. pass. ptep. 
fem. ἐξαπατηθεῖσα; (€& strengthens the simple verb [cf. 
ἐκ, VI. 67), to deceive: Ro. vii. 11; xvi. 18; 1 Co. iii. 18; 
2 Co. xi. 3; 2 Th. ii. 3; pass. 1 Tim. ii. 14 [L T Tr WH]. 
(From Hom. down; twice in the O. T. viz. Ex. viii. 29; 
Sus. vs. 56.) * 

ἐξάπινα, (a somewhat rare later Grk. form for ἐξαπίνης, 
ἐξαίφνης, α- v- [W. § 2, 1 4.1), adv., suddenly: Mk. ix. 8. 
(Sept.; Jambl., Zonar., al.; Byzant.) * 

ἐξ-απορέω and (so in the Bible) depon. pass. ἐξαπορέο- 
pat, -odpar; 1 aor. ἐξηπορήθην; to be utierly at a loss, be 
utterly destitute of measures or resources, to renounce all 
hope, be in despair, [ef. ἐκ, VI. 6], (Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
al.): 2 Co. iv. 8 (where it is distinguished fr. the simple 
ἀπορέομαι) ; τινός of anything: τοῦ ζῆν, 2 Co. i. 8, on this 
gen. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 828 sq. (rod ἀργυρίου, to be ulterly 
in want of, Dion. Hal. 7, 18; act. with dat. of respect, 
τοῖς λογισμοῖς, Polyb. 1, 62, 1; once in the O. T. absol. 
Ps. Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 16).* 

ἐξ-απο-στέλλω ; fut. ἐξαποστελῶ; 1 aor. ἐξαπέστειλα; 
[2 aor. pass. ἐξαπεστάλην]; Sept. very often for Mov; 
prop. to send away from one’s self (ἀπό) out of the place 


ἐξαρτίξω 


or out of doors (ἐκ [q. ν. VI. 2]); 1. to send forth: 
“τινά, with commissions, Acts vii. 12; [xii. 11]; Gal. iv. 
4; foll. by inf. of purpose, Acts xi. 22 (but 1, T Tr WH 
om. the inf.) ; εἰς ἔθνη, unto the Gentiles, Acts xxii. 21 
[WH mrg. droor.]; used also of powers, influences, 
things, (see ἀποστέλλω, 1 a.) : τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, the prom- 
ised blessing, Lk. xxiv.49 T Tr WH; τὸ πνεῦμα εἰς τὰς 
καρδίας, to send forth i.e. impart the Spirit to our hearts, 
Gal. iv. 6; [τὸ .. . κήρυγμα τῆς αἰωνίου σωτηρίας, Mk. xvi. 
WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; ὑμῖν ὁ λόγος 
...€farectddn, the message was sent forth, i. 6. com- 
manded to be announced, to you, Acts xiii. 26 LT Tr 
WH. 2. to send away: τινὰ εἰς etc. Acts ix. 30; foll. 
by inf. of purpose, Acts xvii. 14; τινὰ κενόν, Lk. 1. 53; 
xx. 10, 11., (Dem., Polyb., Diod.) * 
eEapritw: 1 aor. inf. ἐξαρτίσαι ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐξηρτι- 
opevos; (see ἄρτιος, 2); rare in prof. auth.; to complete, 
Jinish; a. to furnish perfectly: twa, pass., πρός τι, 2 
Tim. iii. 17 (πολεμεῖν... τοῖς ἅπασι καλῶς ἐξηρτισμένοι, 
Joseph. ἀπε. 8, 3,2). b. τὰς ἡμέρας, to finish, accomplish, 
(as it were, to render the days complete): Acts xxi. 5 
(so ἀπαρτίζειν τὴν ὀκτάμηνον, Hipp. epid. ii. 180 [ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 447 sq. ]).* 
ἐξιαστράπτω. 1. prop. to send forth lightning, to 
lighten. 2. to flash out like lightning, to shine, be ra- 
diant: of garments, Lk. ix. 29; (of gleaming arms, Nah. 
iii. 3; Ezek. i. 4, 7; φόβῳ x. κἀλλεῖ πολλῷ Tryphiodor. 
103 ; [ef. W. 102 (97)]).* 
ἐξ-αυτῆς and ἐξ αὐτῆς [so Rec. Mk. vi. 25], (sc. τῆς ὥρας 
[W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), on the instant; forth- 
with: Mk. vi. 25; Acts x. 83; xi. 11: xxi. 32: xxiii. 30 
[RG WH]; Phil. ii. 28. (Cratin. in Bekk. anecd. i. 
p- 94; Theogn., Arat., Polyb., Joseph., al.) * 
ἐξεγείρω [1 Co. vi. 14 Lehm. txt.]; fut. ἐξεγερῶ ; 1 aor. 
ἐξήγειρα ; to arouse, raise up (from sleep; Soph., Eur., 
Xen., al.) ; from the dead (Aeschyl. cho. 495), 1 Co. vi. 
14. to rouse up, stir up, incite: τινά, to resistance, Ro. ix. 
17 (τὸν θυμόν twos, 2 Mace. xiii. 4, cf. 2 Chr. xxxvi. 22), 
where some explain the words ἐξήγειρά σε I have raised 
thee up into life, caused thee to exist, or I have raised thee 
to a public position, set thee up as king (Joseph. antt. 8, 
11, 1 βασιλεὺς yap ἐξεγείρεται ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦν ; but the objec- 
tion to these interpretations lies in the fact that Paul 
draws from vs. 17 what he says in vs. 18, and therefore 
e€eyeipew must be nearly synonymous with σκληρύνειν, 
[but see Meyer].* 
ἔξειμι ; impf. ἐξήεσαν ; (εἶμι) ; to go out, go forth: foll. 
in Ree. by ἐκ with gen. of place, Acts xiii. 42; without 
mention of the place, that being known from the context, 
Acts xvii. 15; xx. 7; ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν (from the water), to es- 
cape to the land, Acts xxvii. 43.* 
ἔξειμι from εἰμί, see ἔξεστι. 
ἐξτελέγχω : 1 aor. inf. ἐξελέγξαι; (ἐξ strengthens the 
simple verb [cf. ἐκ, VI.6]); to prove to be in the wrong, 
convict, (chiefly in Attic writ.) : by punishing, τινὰ rept | 
twos, Jude 15 Ree. (see ἐλέγχω, 1) of God as judge, as | 
in Is. ii. 4; Mice. iv. 3 for pyain.* 
ἐξέλκω : [pres. pass. ptep. ἐξελκόμενος ; to draw out, 


222 


ἐξέρχομαι 


(Hom., Pind., Attic writ.) ; metaph. i. q. to lure forth, 
ΓΑ. V. draw away]: ὑπὸ τῆς . . . ἐπιθυμίας ἐξελκόμενος, 
Jas. i. 14, where the metaphor is taken from hunting 
and fishing: as game is lured from its covert, so man by 
lust is allured from the safety of self-restraint to sin. 
[The language of hunting seems to be transferred here 
(so elsewhere, cf. Wetst. ad loe.) to the seductions of a 
harlot, personated by ἐπιθυμία ; see tixtw.]* 

ἐξεέλω, see ἐξαιρέω. 

ἐξέραμα, -τος, τό, (fr. ἐξεράω to eject, cast forth, vomit 
forth; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 64), vomit; what is cast out 
by vomiting: 2 Pet. ii. 22, cf. Prov. xxvi. 11. (Dioscor. 
de venenis ὁ. 19 (p. 29 ed. Spreng.) [an example of the 
verb. Cf. Wetst. on Pet. 1. c., and esp. Gataker, Advers. 
miscell. col. 853 sq. ].) * 

[é€-epavvaw T Tr WII for ἐξερευνάω, q. ν. ; see ἐραυνάω. 

ἐξεερευνάω, -ὦὥ : 1 aor. ἐξηρεύνησα ; fo scarch out, search 
anxiously and diligently: περί twos, 1 Pet. i. 10 [where 
T Tr WH ἐξεραυν. q. v.]. (1 Mace. iii. 48; ix. 26; Sept. 
Soph., Eur., Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

ἐξέρχομαι ; impf. eEnpyounv; fut. ἐξελεύσομαι; 2 aor. 
ἐξῆλθον, plur. 2 pers. ἐξήλθετε, 3 pers. ἐξῆλθον, and in 
LT Tr WH the Atex. forms (see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ἐξήλ- 
Gare (Mt. xi. 7, 8,9; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 48, ete.), ἐξῆλθαν 
(1 Jn. ii. 19; 2Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Ao0v; 3 Jn. 7, ete.]); pe. 
ἐξελήλυθα;: plpf. ἐξεληλύθειν (Lk. viii. 38, ete.) ; Sept. for 
N¥? times without number ; to go or come out of; 1. 
properly; a. with mention of the place out of which 
one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of 
those who leave a place of their own accord: with the 
gen. alone, Mt. x.14 (1, Τ Tr WH insert ἔξω) ; Acts xvi. 
39RG. foll. by ἐκ : Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii. 
59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, ete. foll. 
by ἔξω with gen. — with addition of εἰς and ace. of place, 
Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or παρά with ace. of place, 
Acts xvi. 13; or πρός twa, ace. of pers., Heb. xiii. 13. 
ἐξέρχ. ἀπό with gen. of place, Mt. xiii. 1 RG; Mk. xi. 
12; Lk. ix. 5; Phil. iv. 15; [Heb. xi. 15 RG]; e&épy. 
ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xv. 21; Mk. vi. 1,10; Lk. ix. 4; [xi. 53 T Tr 
txt. WH txt.]; Jn. iv. 43; ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον, Mt. xii. 44; Lk. 
xi. 24 [yet see β. below]. ἐξέρχ. ἐκ ete. to come forth 


from, out of, a place: Mt. viii. 28; Rev. xiv. 15, 17, 18 


(Lom. WH br. ἐξῆλ.7; xv. 6; ἐξελθεῖν ἀπό, to come out 
(towards one) from, Mt. xv. 22. In the Gospel of John 
Christ, who by his incarnation left his place with God 
in heaven, is said ἐξελθεῖν παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ: xvi. 27 and RG 
Limrg. in vs. 28; ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, xiii. 3; xvi. 305 ἐκ τοῦ — 
θεοῦ, from his place with God, from God’s abode, viii. 42 
and L txt. T Tr WH in xvi. 38. B. of those expelled or 
cast out (esp. of demons driven forth from a body of 
which they have held possession) : ἔκ twos, gen. of pers.: 
Mk. i. 25 sq.3 v. 8 [Lmrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; Lk. iv. 35 R Tr 
mrg.; or ἀπό twos, Mt. xii. 43; xvii. 18 ; Lk. iv. 35 L T Tr 
txt. WH; viii. 29, 33, 35; xi. 24 [yet see a. above]; Acts 
xvi. 18; [xix.12 Ree.]. y. of those who come forth, or 
are let go, from confinement in which they have been 
kept (e. g. from prison): Mt. v. 26; Acts xvi. 406. b. 
without mention of the place from which one goes out; 


ἐξέρχομαι 


a. where the place from which one goes forth (as a house, 
city, ship) has just been mentioned: Mt. [viii. 12 Tdf.]; 
ix. 31 sq. (from the house, vs. 28); x. 11 (se. ἐκεῖθεν, i. 6. 
ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἢ κώμης ἐκείνης) ; xii. 14 (οἵ. 9) ; xviii. 28 (cf. 
24); xiv. 14; ΜΚ. i. 45 (ef. 48 ἐξέβαλεν αὐτόν) ; Lk. i. 22 
(from the temple) ; viii. 27; x. 35 [Rec.]; Jn. xiii. 30, 31 
(30), ete.; so also when the verb ἐξέρχεσθαι refers to the 
departure of demons: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13; vii. 30; 
ix. 29; Acts viii. 7; xvi. 19 (where for the name of the 
demon itself is substituted the descriptive clause ἡ ἐλπὶς 
β. where one is said to 
have gone forth to do something, and it is obvious that he 
has gone forth from his home, or at least from the place 
where he has been staying: foll. by an inf., Mt. xi. 8; 
xiii. 3 [inf. w. rod]; xx.1; Mk. iii. 21; iv. 3 [RG inf. w. 
τοῦ (Tr br. rod) ]; ν. 14 Rec.; Lk. vii. 25 sq.; Acts xx. 1; 
Rey. xx. 8; with the addition of ἐπί τινα (against), Mt. 
xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52; εἰς τοῦτο, Mk. i. 38; 
ἵνα, Rey. vi. 2; also without any inf. or conjunction indi- 
cating the purpose: Mk. vi. 12; viii. 11; xiv. 16; xvi. 20; 
Lk. v. 27; ix. 6; Jn. xxi. 3; Acts x. 23; xx. 11; 2 Co. viii. 
17; foll. by εἰς with ace. of place: Mt. xxii. 10; xxvi. 30, 
71; Mk. viii. 27; xi. 11; Lk. vi. 12; xiv. 21, 23; Jn.i. 43 
(44); Acts xi. 25; xiv. 20; 2 Co. ii. 13; the place to 
which one goes forth being evident either from what goes 
before or from the context: Mt. xxiv. 26 (se. εἰς τὴν ἔρη- 
pov); xxvii. 32 (from the city to the place of crucifixion) ; 
ἐξέρχ. alone is used of a people quitting the land which 
they had previously inhabited, Acts vii. 7, cf. Heb. xi. 8; 
of angels coming forth from heaven, Mt. xiii. 49. ἐξέρχ. 
εἰς ἀπάντησίν Twos, to meet one, Mt. xxv. 1 [LT Tr WH 
ὑπάντ.], 6; [eis ἀπάντ. or ὑπάντ. ] τινί, Jn. xii. 13; Acts 
xxviii. 15 RG; εἰς συνάντησίν τινι, Mt. viii. 34 [L T Tr 
WH ὑπάντ.]. Agreeably to the oriental redundancy of 
style in description (see ἀνίστημει, II. 1 ¢.), the participle 
ἐξελθών is often placed before another finite verb of de- 
parture: Mt. viii. 32; xv. 21; xxiv. 1 (ἐξελθών [from the 
temple, see xxi. 23] ἐπορεύετο ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, he departed 
from its vicinity); Mk. xvi. 8; Lk. xxii. 39; Acts xii. 9, 
17; xvi. 36,40; xxi.5,8. 2. figuratively; a. ἔκ τινων, 
ἐκ μέσου τινῶν, to go out from some assembly, i. e. to for- 
sake it: 1 Jn. ii. 19 (opp. to μεμενήκεισαν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν); 2 
Co. νἱ. 17. b. to come forth from physically, arise from, 
to be born of: ἐκ with gen. of the place from which one 
comes by birth, Mt. ii. 6 (fr. Mic. v. 2); ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος 
τινός, Hebr. O°S9T2 ΝΥ (Gen. xxxv. 11; 1 K. viii. 19; 
* [ef. W. 83 (32)]), Heb. vii. 5. ὁ. ἐκ χειρός τινος, to go 
forth from one’s power, escape from it in safety: Jn. x. 
89. ἅ. εἰς τὸν κόσμον, to come forth (from privacy) into 
the world, before the public, (of those who by novelty of 
opinion attract attention): 1Jn.iv.1. 6. of things; 
α. of report, rumors, messages, precepts, etc., i. q. fo be 
uttered, to be heard: φωνή. Rev. xvi. 17; xix. 5; i. q. to be 
made known, declared : ὃ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ foll. by ἀπό τινων, 
from their city or church, 1 Co. xiv. 36; i. q. to spread, 
be diffused: ἡ φήμη, Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv. 14; ἡ ἀκοή, Mk. 
2,2; | Mt. iv. 24 Trmrg.]; ὁ φθόγγος, τὰ ῥήματα, Ro. x. 
18; ὁ λόγος the word, saying, Jn. xxi. 23; Lk. vii. 17; 


τ. ἐργασίας αὐτῶν; see 2 6. 6.). 


223 ἑξῆς 


ἡ πίστις τινός, the report of one’s faith, 1 Th.i. 8; i. q. 
to be proclaimed: δόγμα, an imperial edict, παρά twos, zen. 
pers., Lk. ii. 1. B. to come forth i. q. be emitted, as from 
the heart, the mouth, etc.: Mt. xv. 18 sq.; Jas. iii. 10; 
[ef. ῥομφαία ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, Rev. xix. 21G LT Tr 
WH]; i. q. to flow forth from the body: Jn. xix. 34; i. q. 
to emanate, issue: Lk. viii. 46; Rev. xiv. 20. y. ἐξέρχε- 
σθαι (ἀπ᾽ ἀνατολῶν), used of a sudden flash of lightning, 
Mt. xxiv. 27. δ. that ἐξέρχεσθαι in Acts xvi. 19 (on 
which see 1 b. a. above) is used also of a thing’s vanish- 
ing, viz. of a hope which has disappeared, arises from 
the circumstance that the demon that had gone out had 
been the hope of those who complain that their hope 
has gone out. On the phrase εἰσέρχεσθαι x. ἐξέρχεσθαι 
see in εἰσέρχομαι, 1 a. [Comp.: διςεξέρχομαι.] 

ἔξεστι, impers. verb, (fr. the unused ἔξειμι), it is law- 
ful; a. foll. by the pres. inf.: Mt. xii. 2, 10 [Tdf. inf. 
aor.], 12; xiv.4; Lk. vi. 2 [Β α ΤΊ; xiv.3 [LT Tr WH 
inf. aor.]; with the aor. inf.: Mt. [xv. 26 1, ΤΊ; xxii. 
17; xxvii. 6; Mk. iii. 4; xii.14; Lk. vi. 9; Acts ii. 29 
(ἐξὸν εἰπεῖν scil. ἔστω, allow me, [ἃ]. supply ἐστί, B. 318 
(273); W.§ 64, I. 2a., cf. § 2,1 4.7); with the inf. omitted 
because readily suggested by the context, Mk. ii. 24 and 
Ree. in Acts viii. 37. Ὁ. foll. by dat. of pers. and a pres. 
inf.: Mk. vi. 18; Acts xvi. 21; xxii. 25; and an aor. inf. : 
Mt. xix.3 [LT WH om. dat.]; xx. 15; Mk. ii. 26[RG 
L Tr txt.]; x. 2; Lk. xx. 22 RGL; Jn. v.10; xviii. 31; 
Acts xxi. 37; ἐξὸν ἦν, Mt. xii. 4; ἃ οὐκ ἐξόν, se. ἐστί, 2 Co. 
xii. 4; with the inf. omitted, as being evident from the 
context: πάντα (μοι) ἔξεστιν, 50. ποιεῖν, 1 Co. vi. 125 x. 23. 
c. foll. by the ace. and inf.: Lk. vi. 4; xx. 22T Tr WH ; 
so here and there even in classic writ.; ef. Rost § 127 
Anm. 2; Kiihner § 475 Anm. 2; [B. § 142, 2].* 

ἐξετάζω : 1 aor. impy. 2 pers. plur. ἐξετάσατε, inf. ἐξε- 
τάσαι; to search out; to examine strictly, inquire: περὶ 
twos and with the adv. ἀκριβῶς added, Mt. ii. 8; foll. by 
an indir. quest. Mt. x. 11; τινά inquire of some one, foll. 
by a direct question, Jn. xxi.12. (Sept.; often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Thue. down.) * 

[ἐξέφνης, see ἐξαίφνης. 

ἐξ-ηγέομαι, -οῦμαι ; impf. ἐξηγούμην ; 1 aor. ἐξηγησάμην; 
1. prop. to lead out, be leader, go before, (Hom. et al.). 
2. metaph. (cf. Germ. ausfiihren) to draw out in narra- 
tive, unfold in teaching; a. to recount, rehearse: [w. acc. 
of the thing and dat. of pers., Acts x. 8]; w. ace. of thing, 
Lk. xxiv. 35; Acts xxi. 19; without an acc., [01]. by rel. 
pron. or adv., ὅσα ἐποίησεν, Acts xv.12; καθώς, 14, (so in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 130, Judg. vii. 13, 
ete.). Ὁ. to unfold, declare: Jn.i. 18 (sc. the things re- 
lating to God; also used in Grk. writ. of the interpreta- 
tion of things sacred and divine, oracles, dreams, ete. ; οἵ. 
Meyer ad loc. ; Alberti, Observationes ete. p. 207 sq-).* 

ἑξήκοντα, οἱ, ai, τά, sixty: Mt. xiii. 8, 23, ete. 

ἑξῆς, adv., (fr. ἔχω, fut. ἕξω; cf. ἔχομαί twos to cleave 
to, come next to, a thing), successively, in order, (fr. Hom. 
down); 6, 7, τὸ ἑξῆς, the next following, the next in suc- 
cession: son ἑξῆς ἡμέρα, Lk. ix. 37; elliptically ἐν τῇ ἑξῆς, 
sc. ἡμέρᾳ, Lk. vii. 11 (here WH txt. Tr txt. L mrg. ἐν 


ἐξηχέω 


τῷ ἑξῆς sc. χρόνῳ, soon afterwards); τῇ ἑξῆς, 56. ἡμέρᾳ, 
Acts xxi. 1; xxv. 17; xxvii. 18.* 

ἐξεηχέω, -ὦ : fo sound forth, emit sound, resound; pass. 
ἐξηχεῖταί τι the sound of something is borne forth, is 
propagated : ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται 6 λύγυς τοῦ κυρίου, from 
your city or from your church the word of the Lord 
has sounded forth i. 6. has been disseminated by report, 1 
Th. i. 8, cf. De Wette ad loc. (Joel iii. 14 (iv. 19); Sir. 
xl. 13; 3 Mace. iii. 2. Polyb. 30, 4, 7 [mot Dind.]; Philo 
in Flace. § 6; [quis rer. div. her. §4]; Byzant.) * 

ἕξις, -ews, ἡ, (ἔχω, fut. ἔξω), a habit, whether of body or 
of mind (Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) ; @ power acquired by 
custom, practice, use, (“firma quaedam facilitas, quae apud 
Graecos és nominatur,” Quint. 10, 1 init.); so Heb. 
y. 14, (ἐν τούτοις ἱκανὴν Ew περιποιησάμενος, Sir. prol. 7 ; 
ἕξιν ἔχειν γραμματικῆς, Polyb. 10,47, 7; ἐν τοῖς πολεμικοῖς, 
21, 7, 3; ἐν ἀστρολογίᾳ μεγίστην ἕξιν ἔχειν, Diod. 2, 31; 
λογικὴν ἔξιν περιποιούμενος, Philo, alleg. lege. 1, 4).* 

ἐξιίστημι: likewise ἐξιστάω and ἐξιστάνω (Acts viii. 9 
ptep. ἐξιστῶν RG, ἐξιστάνων LT Tr WH [see ἵστημι]) ; 
1 aor. ἐξέστησα ; 2 aor. ἐξέστην ; pf. inf. ἐξεστακέναι; Mid., 
[pres. inf. ἐξίστασθαι] ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐξίσταντο ; 
1. In pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act. to throw out of position, 
to displace: twa τοῦ φρονεῖν, to throw one out of his 
mind, drive one out of his senses, Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; 
φρενῶν, Eur. Bacch. 850; hence simply to amaze, astonish, 
throw into wonderment: twa, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts viii. 9. 
2. In perf., pluperf., 2 aor. act. and also the mid., a. to 
be amazed, astounded: Mt. xii. 23; Mk. ii. 12; Lk. viii. 
56; Acts ii. 7, 12; viii. 13; ix. 21; x. 45; xii. 16, (Sept. 
for ὙΠ, to tremble, Ex. xix. 18; Ruth iii. 8, ete.) ; ἐξέ- 
στησαν ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ, they were amazed with a great 
amazement (see ἔκστασις, 3), Mk. ν. 42; ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξί- 
σταντο, Mk. vi.51; with dat. of the thing: μαγείαις ἐξ- 
eoraxeva, had been put beside themselves with magic 
arts, carried away with wonder at them, Acts viii. 11 
[but this form of the perf. is transitive; cf. B. 48 (41); 
Veitch 339]; ἐξίσταντο ἐπί with dat. of thing, Lk. ii. 47 
(Ex. xix. 18; Sap.v. 2). b. to be out of one’s mind, be- 
side one’s self, insane: 2 Co. ν. 13 (opp. to σωφρονεῖν) ; 
Mk. iii. 21 [ef. Β. 198 (171); W.§40,5b.]; (Grk. writ., 
where they use the word in this sense, generally add 
τοῦ φρονεῖν, τῶν φρενῶν : Isoc., Eur., Polyb., al.).* 

ἐξ-ισχύω : 1 aor. subjune. 2 pers. plur. ἐξισχύσητε, to 
be eminently able, to have full strength, [cf. ἐκ, VI. 6]: 
foll. by an inf. Eph. iii. 18. (Sir. vii. 6; rare in Grk. 
writ., as Dioscor., Strab., Plut.) * 

ἔξοδος, -ov, ἡ. (ὁδός, exit, i. 6. departure: Heb. xi. 22; 
metaph. ἡ ἔξοδός twos the close of one’s career, one’s 
final fate, Lk. ix. 31; departure from life, decease: 2 Pet. 
i. 15, as in Sap. iii. 2; vii. 6; [Philo de caritate § 4]; 
with addition of τοῦ ζῆν, Joseph. antt. 4, 8,2; [of τοῦ 
βίου, Just. dial. c, Tryph. ὃ 1057." 

ἐξολοθρεύω and (acc. to the reading best attested by 
the oldest Mss. of the Sept. and received by LT Tr WH 
[see ὀλοθρεύω ]) ἐξολεθρεύω:: fut. pass. ἐξολοθρευθήσομαι; 
to destroy out of its place, destroy utterly, to extrpate: ἐκ 
tev λαοῦ, Acts iii. 23. (Often in the Sept., and in the 


224 


ἐξουδενόω 


O. T. Apoer., and in Test. xii. Patr.; Joseph. antt. 3, 
11, 1; 11, 6, 6; hardly in native Grk. writ.) * 

ἐξομολογέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐξωμολόγησα; Mid., [pres. ἐξ- 
ομολογοῦμαι); fut. ἐξομολογήσομαι; [1 aor. subj. 3 pers. 
sing. -γήσηται, Phil. ii. 11 RG Ltxt. Tr txt. WH]; (ἐξ 
either forth from the heart, freely, or publicly, openly (cf. 
W. 102 (97)]); act. and depon. mid. to confess, to pro- 
| fess ; 1. to confess: τὰς ἁμαρτίας, Mt. iii. 6; Mk. i. 5; 
(Jas. v.16 L T Tr WH), (Joseph. antt. 8, 4, 6; [ef. Ὁ. j. 
5, 10,5; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51,3; Barn. ep. 19, 12]); 
tas πράξεις, Acts xix. 18; τὰ παραπτώματα, Jas. v. 16 
RG; (ἧτταν, Plut. Eum. ο. 17; τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἄνευ βασά- 
νων, id. Anton. ο. 59). 2. to profess i. 6. to acknoul- 
edge openly and joyfully: τὸ ὄνομά twos, Rev. iii. 5 Ree.; 
foll. by ὅτι, Phil. ii. 11;, with dat. of pers. [ef. W. § 31, 
1f.; B. 176 (153)] to one’s honor, i. e. to celebrate, give 
praise to (so Sept. for 5 mn, Ps. xxix. (xxx.) 5; ev. 
(evi.) 47; exxi. (exxii.) 4, ete.; [W. 827): Ro. xiv. 11; 
xv. 9 fr. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 50, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 3); 
τινί (dat. of pers.) foll. by ore: Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21. 
to profess that one will do something, lo promise, agree, 
engage: Lk. xxii. 6 [Lehm. om.]; (in this sense the 
Greeks and Josephus use ὁμολογεῖν)" 

ἐξόν, see ἔξεστι. 

ἐξ-ορκίζω ; 1. to exact an oath, to force to an oath, 
(Dem., Polyb., Apollod., Diod., Plut., al.), for which the 
earlier Grks. used ἐξορκόω, [cf. W.102(97)]. 2. to ad- 
jure: twa κατά Twos, one by a person [cf. κατά, I. 2 ἃ.], 
foll. by ἵνα [B. 237 (205) ], Mt. xxvi. 65; (Gen. xxiv. 3).* 

éEopkiorts, -οὔ, ὁ, (ἐξορκίζω) ; 1. he who exacts an 
oath of another. 2. an exorcist, i. e. one who employs 
a formula of conjuration for expelling demons: Acts 
xix.13. (Joseph. antt. 8, 2,5; Leian. epigr. in Anthol. 
11, 427; often in the church Fathers.) * 

ἐξορύσσω: 1 aor. ptcp. e€opvéavres; fr. Hdt. down ; 
1. to dig out: τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς (prop. to pluck out the 
eyes; so Judg. xvi. 21 [Alex.]; 1S. xi. 2; Hdt. 8, 116; 
Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 1; Leian. dial. deor. 1, 1; al.) καὶ 
διδόναι τινί, metaph. to renounce the most precious things 
for another’s advantage, Gal. iv. 15 (similar expressions 
see in Ter. adelph. 4, 5, 67; Hor. sat. 2, 5, 35; [Wet- 
stein ad loc.]); in opposition to a very few interp. who, 
assuming that Paul suffered from a weakness of the 
eyes, understand the words literally, “ Ye would have 
plucked out your sound eyes and have put them into 
me,” see Meyer ad loc.; [ef. reff. s. v. σκόλοψ, fin.]. 2. 
to dig through: τὴν στέγην, Mk. ii. 4.* 

ἐξ-ουδενέω, -@: 1 aor. pass. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. ἐξου- 
δενηθῇ ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐξουδενημένος ; to hold and treat 
as of no account, utterly to despise : τὸν λόγον, pass., 2 Co. 
x. 10 Lehm. to set at nought, treat with contumely: a 
person, pass., Mk. ix. 12 L Tr WH, (Ezek. xxi. 10). Cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182; [B. 28 (25); W. 91 (87); Soph. 
Lex. s. v.; WH. App. p. 166].* 

éEovSevéw, τῶ: [1 aor. pass. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. 
ἐξουδενωθῇ; i. 4. ἐξουδενέω, 4. v-: Mk. ix. 12 RG; often 
in Sept., esp. for 713 and ox. (Cf. reff. in the preced- 
ing word.]* 


ἐξουθενέω 


ἐξουθενέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ἐξουθένησα ; Pass., pf. ptep. ἐξου- 
θενημένος; [1 aor. ptep. ἐξουθενηθείς] , (see οὐδείς); to 
make of no account, to despise utterly: τινά, Lk. xviii. 9; 
Ro. xiv. 3,10; 1 Co.xvi.11; ri, 1 Th. v. 20; Gal. iv. 14 
(where it is coupled with ἐκπτύω ); in pass. of ἐξουθενη- 
μένοι, 1 Co. vi. 4; τὰ ἐξουθενημένα. 1 Co. i. 28 (see ayevns) ; 
ὁ λόγος ἐξουθενημένος, 2 Co. x. 10 [here Lehm. ἐξουδ.}; 
ὁ (λίθος 6) ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν οἰκοδομούντων, set at 
nought, i. 6. rejected, cast aside, Acts ἵν. 11. 700 treat 
with contempt (i. 6. ace. to the context, with mockery): 
Lk. xxiii. 11; (for 133, Prov. i. 7; 773, Ezek. xxii. 8, ete.; 
DN, 1S. viii. 7. Sap.iv.18; 2 Mace. i. 27; Barn. ep. 7, 
9; and other eccl. writ.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182; 
[and reff. 5. v. ἐξουδενέω, fin. ].* 

ἐξουθενόω, i. 4. ἐξουθενέω, «.. v-: Mk. ix. 12 Tdf.* 

ἐξουσία, -as, 7, (fr. ἔξεστι, ἐξόν, q. v-), fr. Eur., Xen., 
Plato down; Sept. for mw and Chald. Ow; power. 
1. power of choice, liberty of doing as one pleases; 
leave or permission: 1 Co. ix. 12, 18; ἔχειν ἐξουσίαν, 
2 Th. iii. 9; with an inf. added indicating the thing to 
be done, Jn. x. 18; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq.; Heb. xiii. 10 [WH 
br. €&.]; foll. by an inf. with τοῦ, 1 Co. ix. 6 (LT Tr 
ΝῊ οπι. τοῦ) ; with a gen. of the thing or the pers. with 
regard to which one has the power to decide: Ro. 
ix. 21 (where an explanatory infin. is added [B. 260 
(224)]); 1 Co. ix. 12; ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον τῆς ζωῆς, permission 
to use the tree of life, Rev. xxii. 14 [see ἐπί, C. I. 2e.]; 
ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν περὶ τοῦ ἰδίου θελήματος (opp. to ἀνάγκην 
ἔχειν [οἵ. W. § 30, 3 N.5]), 1 Co. vii. 37; ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ 
ἐξουσίᾳ, [appointed, see τίθημι. 1 a. sub fin.] according to 
his own choice, Actsi. 7; ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν. i.e. at 
thy free disposal, Acts v. 4; used of liberty under the 
gospel, as opp. to the yoke of the Mosaic law, 1 Co. viii. 
9. 2. physical and mental power; the ability or 
strength with which one is endued, which he either possesses 
or exercises: Mt. ix. 8; Acts viii. 19; Rev. ix. 3, 19; 
xiii. 2,4; xviii. 1; foll. by an inf. of the thing to be 
done, Mk. iii. 15; Lk. xii.5; Jn.i.12; Rev. ix. 10; xi. 
6; xiii. 5; foll. by rod with the inf. Lk. x. 19; αὕτη ἐστὶν 
ἡ ἐξουσία Tov σκότους, this is the power that darkness 
exerts, Lk. xxii. 53; ποιεῖν ἐξουσίαν to exert power, give 
exhibitions of power, Rev. xiii. 12; ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ εἶναι, to be 
possessed of power and influence, Lk. iv. 32; also ἐξου- 
σίαν ἔχειν (both expressions refer to the ability and 
weight which Jesus exhibited in his teaching) Mt. vii. 
29; [Mk. i. 22]; κατ᾽ ἐξουσίαν powerfully, Mk. i. 27; also 
ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ, Lk. iv. 36. 3. the power of authority 
(influence) and of right: Mt. xxi. 23; Mk. xi. 28; Lk. 
xx. 2; spoken of the authority of an apostle, 2 Co. x. 8; 
xiii. 10; of the divine authority granted to Jesus as 
Messiah, with the inf. of the thing to be done, Mt. ix. 6; 
Mk. ii. 10; Lk. v. 24; Jn. v. 27; ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ; clothed 
in what authority (i. e. thine own or God’s?), Mt. xxi. 
23, 24, 27; Mk. xi. 28, 29, 33; Lk. xx. 2, 8; delegated 
authority (Germ. Vollmacht, authorization): παρά twos, 
with gen. of the pers. by whom the authority is given, or 
received, Acts ix. 14; xxvi.10,12[RG]. 4. the power 
af rule or government (the power of him whose will 


225 


ἐξουσιάξω 


and commands must be submitted to by others and 
obeyed, [generally translated authority]); a. uniy.: Mt. 
xxvili. 18; Jude 25; Rey. xii. 10; xvii. 13; λαμβάνειν 
ἐξουσίαν ws βασιλεύς, Rev. xvii. 12; εἰμὶ ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν, 1 
am under authority, Mt. viii. 9; with τασσόμενος added, 
(Mt. viii. 9 L WH br.]; Lk. vii. 8; ἐξουσία τινός, gen. 
of the object, authority (to be exercised) over, as τῶν 
πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων, Mk. vi. 7; with ὥστε ἐκβάλλειν 
αὐτά added, Mt. χ. 1; ἐξουσίαν πάσης σαρκός, authority 
over all mankind, Jn. xvii. 2, (πάσης σαρκὸς κυρείαν, Bel 
and the Drag. vs. 5); [gen. of the subject, τοῦ Σατανᾶ, 
Acts xxvi. 18]; ἐπί τινα, power over one, so as to be able 
to subdue, drive out, destroy, Rev. vi. 8; ἐπὶ ra δαιμόνια, 
Lk. ix. 1; or to hold submissive to one’s will, Rev. xiii. 
7; ἐπὶ τὰς πληγάς, the power to inflict plagues and to 
put an end to them, Rey. xvi. 9; ἐπὶ τῶν ἐθνῶν, over the 
heathen nations, Rev. ii. 26; ἐπί τινος, to destroy one, 
Rev. xx. 6; ἔχειν ἐξουσίαν ἐπὶ τοῦ πυρός, to preside, have 
control, over fire, to hold it subject to his will, Rev. xiv. 
18; ἐπὶ τῶν ὑδάτων, xi. 6; ἐπάνω τινὸς ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν, to 
be ruler over a thing, Lk. xix.17. ὍὌ. specifically, a. 
of the power of judicial decision; ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν 
with an inf. of the thing decided: σταυρῶσαι and ἀπολῦ- 
σαί twa, Jn. xix. 10; foll. by κατά τινος, the power of 
deciding against one, ibid. 11; παραδοῦναί twa... τῇ 
ἐξουσίᾳ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος, Lk. xx. 20. β. of authority to 
manage domestic affairs: Mk. xiii. 34. c. me- 
tonymically, a. a thing subject to authority or rule: Lk. 
iv. 6; jurisdiction: ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρώδου ἐστίν, Lk. 
xxiii. 7 (1 Mace. vi. 11 [ef. Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 2; Is. xxxix. 
2]). B. one who possesses authority; (cf. the Lat. use 
of honestates, dignitates, auctoritates [so the Eng. authori- 
ties, dignities, etc.] in reference to persons ) ; aa. a 
ruler, human magistrate, (Dion. Hal. 8, 44; 11, 32): 
Ro. xiii. 1-3; plur.: Lk. xii. 11; Ro. xiii. 1; Tit. ii. 
1. BB. the leading and more powerful among created be- 
ings superior to man, spiritual potentates; used in the 
plur. of a certain class of angels (see ἀρχή. δύναμις, θρόνος. 
κυριότης) : Col. i. 16; 1 Pet. iii. 22, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. 
vol. ii. p. 226 sq.; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. 6.1); with ἐν 
τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις added, Eph. iii. 10; πᾶσα ἐξουσία, 1 Co. 
xy. 24; Eph. i. 21; Col. ii. 10; used also of demons: 
in the plur., Eph. vi. 12; Col. ii. 15; collectively [ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 469], ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ ἀέρος (see ἀήρ), Eph. ii. 
2; τοῦ σκότους, Col. i. 13 [al. refer this to 4 a. (or ὁ. a.) 
above (cf. Lk. xxii. 53 in 2), and regard σκότος as per- 
sonified; see σκότος, b.]. d. a sign of the husband’s 
authority over his wife, i. e. the veil with which propriety 
required a woman to cover herself, 1 Co. xi. 10 (as Ba- 
σιλεία is used by Diodorus 1, 47 for the sign of regal 
power, i.e. acrown). [Syn. see δύναμις, fin. On the inf. 
after ἐξ. and ἐξ. ἔχειν cf. B. 260 (223 sq.).]* 

éEovordtw; 1 fut. pass. ἐξουσιασθήσομαι; (ἐξουσία) ; 
i. q. ἐξουσίαν ἔχω, to have power or authority, use power : 
[ἐν πλείοσι ἐξ. πολλῶν μοναρχίων, Aristot. eth. Eud. 1, 5 
p- 1216", 2]; ἐν ἀτίμοις, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 44; τινός, to 
be master of any one, exercise authority over one, Lk. xxii. 
25; τοῦ σώματος, to be master of the body, i. 6. to have 


ἐξοχή 2 


full and entire authority over the body, to hold the body 
subject to one’s will, 1 Co. vii. 4. Pass. foll. by ὑπό twos, 
to be brought under the power of any one, 1 Co. vi. 12. 
(Sept. several times in Neh. and Eccl., chiefly for own 
and vbw.) [Comp.: κατ-εξουσιάζω.] * 

ἐξοχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. ἐξέχω to stand out, be prominent; ef. 
ὑπεροχή); 1. prop. in Grk. writ. any prominence or 
projection, as the peak or summit of a mountain (ἐπ᾽ 
ἐξοχῇ πέτρας, Job xxxix. 28 Sept.); in medical writ. a 
protuberance, swelling, wart, ete. 2. metaph. eminence, 
excellence, superiority, (Cie. ad Att. 4, 15, 7 ἐξοχὴ in 
nullo est, pecunia omnium dignitatem exaequat); ay» 
Spes of κατ᾽ ἐξοχὴν ὄντες τῆς πόλεως, the prominent men 
of the city, Acts xxv. 23.* 

éEumvitw: 1 aor. subjune. ἐξυπνίσω ; (ὕπνος) ; to wake 
up, awaken out of sleep: [trans. αὐτόν], Jn. xi. 11. 
({Judg. xvi. 14]; 1 K. iii. 15; Job xiv. 12; Antonin. 6, 
31; Plut. [de solert. anim. 29,4]; Test. xii. Patr. [Levi 
§ 8; Jud. § 25, ete.]; the better Grks. said ἀφυπνίζω, 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 224; [W. § 2, 1d.].)* 

ἔξυπνος, -ov, (ὕπνος), roused out of sleep: Acts xvi. 27. 
(1 Esdr. iii. 3; (Joseph. antt. 11, 3, 2].) * 

ἔξω, adv., (fr. ἐξ, as ἔσω and εἴσω fr. ἐς andeis); 1. 
without, out of doors; a. adverbially: Mk. xi. 4; joined 
with verbs: ἑστάναι, Mt. xii. 46,47 [WH txt. om. the 
vs.]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; Jn. xviii. 16; xx. 
11 [Lehm. om.]; καθῆσθαι, Mt. xxvi. 69; or with some 
other verb declaring that the person without is doing 
something, Mk. iii. 31. Preceded by the art. ὁ ἔξω, 
absol. he who is without, prop. of place; metaph., in 
plur., those who do not belong to the Christian church [ οἵ. 
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; Mey. on Mk. as below]: 
1 Co. v. 12, 13; Col. iv. 5; 1 Th.iv.12; those who are 
not of the number of the apostles, Mk. iv. 11[ (ef. Meyer) 
WH umrg. ἔξωθεν, q. v-]. With a noun added: ai ἔξω 
πόλεις, foreign, Acts xxvi. 11; ὁ ἔξω ἄνθρωπος, the outer 
man, i. 6. the body (see ἄνθρωπος, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv.16. Ὄ. 
it takes the place of a prep. and is joined with the gen., 
without i. 6. out of, outside of, [W. § 54,6]: Lk. xiii. 33; 
Acts xxi. 5; Heb. xiii. 11, 12. 2. after the verbs of 
going, sending, placing, leading, drawing, ete., 
which commonly take prepositions or adverbs signifying 
rest in a place rather than those expressive of motion 
toward a place, ἔξω has the force of the Lat. foras (Germ. 
hinaus, heraus), forth out, out of; a. adverbially, after 
the verbs ἐξέρχομαι, Mt. xxvi. 75; Mk. xiv. 68; Lk. xxii. 
62; Jn. xix. 4,5; Rev. iii. 12; ayo, Jn. xix.4,13; προάγω, 
Acts xvi. 30; ἐξάγω, Lk. xxiv. 50 [RG Lbr.]; βάλλω and 
ἐκβάλλω, Mt. v. 13; xiii. 48; Lk. viii. 54 RG; xiii. 28; 
xiv. 35 (34); Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34, 35; xii. 31; xv. 6; Acts 
ix. 40; 1 Jn. iv. 18; Rev. xi. 2 RG; δεῦρο ἔξω, In. xi. 
43; ἔξω ποιεῖν τινα, Acts v.34. Ὄ. as a prep. with the 
gen.: after ἀπελθεῖν, Acts iv. 15; ἀποστέλλειν, Mk. v. 
10; ἐκβάλλειν, Mk. xii. 8; Lk. iv. 29; xx. 15; Acts vii. 
58; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Mt. xxi. 17; Acts xvi. 13; Heb. xiii. 13; 
ἐκπορεύεσθαι, Mk. xi. 19; ἐξάγειν, Mk. viii. 23 [RGLTr 
mrg.]; σύρειν twa, Acts xiv. 19; ἕλκειν τινά, Acts xxi. 30. 


ἔξωθεν, adv., (fr. ἔξω, opp. to ἔσωθεν fr. ἔσω; cf. 


6 ἐπαγγελία 


ἄνωθεν, πόρρωθεν), from without, outward, [ef. W. 472 
(440)]; 41. adverbially: (outwardly), Mt. xxiii. 27 sq.; 
Mk. vii. 18; 2 Co. vii. 5; τὸ ἔξωθεν, the outside, the exte- 
rior, Mt. xxiii. 25; Lk. xi. 39 sq.; ἐκβάλλειν ἔξωθεν (for 
RG ἔξω), Rey. xi. 2” LT Tr WH; οἱ ἔξωθεν for of ἔξω, 
those who do not belong to the Christian church, 1 Tim. 
iii. 7; [ef. Mk. iv. 11 WH mrg. and 5. v. ἔξω, 1 a.]; ὁ ἔξωθεν 
κόσμος the outward adorning, 1 Pet.iii.3. 2. as a prep- 
osition with the gen. [ef. W. § 54,6]: Mk. vii. 15; Rev. 
xi. 2° (R’*** GLT Tr WH; xiv. 20 where Ree. ἔξω]." 

ἐξ-ωθέω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἔξωσα [so accented by GT ed. 7 Tr, 
but L WH ἐξῶσα] and in Tdf. ἐξέωσα [ WH. App. p. 162] 
(cf. W. p. 90 (86); [B. 69 (61); Steph. Thesaur. and 
Veitch s. v. ὠθέω]) ; to thrust out; expel from one’s abode: 
Acts vii. 45, (Thue., Xen., al.). fo propel, drive: τὸ 
πλοῖον εἰς αἰγιαλόν, Acts xxvii. 39 [WI txt. ἐκσῶσαι; 
see ἐκσώζω], (the same use in Thuc., Xen., al.).* 

ἐξώτερος, -€pa, -epor, (a comparative fr. ἔξω, cf. ἐσώτερος, 
ἀνώτερος, κατώτερος), OUuler: τὸ σκότος τὸ ἐξώτερον, the 
darkness outside the limits of the lighted palace (to 
which the Messiah’s kingdom is here likened), Mt. viii. 
12; xxii. 13; xxv. 30. [(Sept.; Strabo, al.)]* 

ἔοικα, see EIKQ. 

ἑορτάζω ; (ἑορτή); to keep a feast-day, celebrate a fes- 
tival: 1 Co. ν. 8, on which pass. see ἄζυμος. (Sept. for 
din; Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al.; ὁρτάζω, Hat.) * 

ἑορτή, -ῆς, ἡ, Sept. for 39; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 
in Hadt. ὁρτή; α feast-day, festival: Lk. ii. 42; Jn. v. 1; 
vi. 4; vii. 2,37; Col. ii. 16; ἡ ἑορτὴ τοῦ πάσχα: Lk. ii. 
41 [W. 215 (202); B. 186 (161)]; Jn. xiii. 1; iq. ἡ 
ἑορτὴ τῶν ἀζύμων, Lk. xxii. 1; ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, during the 
feast, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2; Jn. iv. 45; vii. 11; xii. 
ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, to be engaged in celebrating the 
feast, Jn. ii. 23, ef. Baumg.-Crusius and Meyer ad loc. ; 
eis τὴν ἑορτήν, for the feast, Jn. xiii. 29; ἀναβαίνειν (to 
Jerusalem) eis τὴν ἑορτήν, In. vii. 8,10; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν 
ἑορτήν, Jn. iv. 45; xi. 56; xii. 12; τῆς ἑορτῆς μεσούσης, 
in the midst of the feast, Jn. vii. 14; κατὰ ἑορτήν, at 
every feast [see κατά, II. 3 a. 8.], Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk. xv. 
6; Lk. xxiii. 17 [Ree.]; τὴν ἑορτὴν ποιεῖν to keep, cele- 
brate, the feast, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς 
ἑορτῆς, after the custom of the feast, Lk. ii. 42.* 

ἐπ-αγγελία, -as, ἡ, (emayyeAkw); 1. announcement: 
1 Jn. i. 5 (Ree., where ἀγγελία was long since restored) ; 
κατ᾽ ἐπαγγελίαν ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, to proclaim life 
in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 [W. 402 (376); 
cf. κατά, Π. fin. But others give ἐπαγγ.: here as else- 
where the sense of promise, cf. 2 below]. 2. promise; 
a. the act of promising, a promise given or to be given: 
προσδέχεσθαι τὴν ἀπὸ τινος ἐπαγγελίαν (assent; the ref- 
erence is to a promise to surrender Pau! to the power 
and sentence of the Jews), Acts xxiii. 91; [add, ἐπαγγε- 
Alas ὁ λόγος οὗτος, Ro. ix. 9]. It is used also of the 
divine promises of blessing, esp. of the benefits of salva- 
tion by Christ, [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 14]: Acts vii. 
17; Ro. iv. 14, 16; [plur. Ro. ix. 4]; Gal. iii. 17 sq. 21; 
iv. 23; Heb. xi. 17; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (on which see βραδύνω. 5); 
Heb. viii. 6; xi. 9; foll. by the inf. Heb. iv. 1; γίνεταί 


- 
203; εἶναι 


ἐπαγγέλλω 2 


τινι, Ro. iv. 13; πρός τινα, Acts ΧΙ]. 32; xxvi. 6; ἐρρήθη 
τινί, Gal. iii. 16; ἐστί τινι, belongs to one, Acts 11. 39; 
ἐπαγγέλλεσθαι τὴν ἐπ. 1 Jn. ii. 25; ἔχειν ἐπαγγελίας, to 
have received, Heb. vii. 6; 2 Co. vii. 1, [ef W. 177 
(166)]; to have linked to it, 1 Tim. iv. 8; εἶναι ἐν ἐπαγγε- 
Xia, joined with a promise [8]. al.; οἵ. W. 391 (366)], 
Eph. vi. 2; ἡ γῆ τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, the promised land, Heb. 
xi. 9; τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, born in accordance with 
the promise, Ro. ix. 8; Gal. iv. 28; τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἐπαγ- 
γελίας τὸ ἅγιον, the promised Spirit, Eph. i. 13; αἱ διαθῆ- 
kat τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, covenants to which was united the 
promise (of salvation through the Messiah), Eph. ii. 12; 
ἡ ἐπαγγελία τοῦ θεοῦ, given by God, Ro. iv. 20; in the 
plur. 2 Co. i. 20; ai ἐπαγγελίαι τῶν πατέρων, the promises 
made to the fathers, Ro. xv. 8; with the gen. of the 
object, τῆς ζωῆς, 1 Tim. iv. 8; τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ, 2 
Pet. iii. 4; κατ᾽ ἐπαγγελίαν according to promise, Acts 
xiii. 23; Gal. iii. 29; δ ἐπαγγελίας, Gal. iii. 18. Ὁ. by 
meton. a promised good or blessing (cf. ἐλπίς, sub fin.) : 
Gal. iii. 22; Eph. iii. 6 [yet here cf. Mey. or Ellic.]; 
ἀποστέλλειν τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ πατρός pov, the blessing 
promised by my Father, Lk. xxiv. 49; περιμένειν, Acts 
1.4; κομίζεσθαι τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, Heb. x. 36; xi. [13 T Tr 
WH, προσδέχεσθαι Li], 39; λαμβάνειν τὰς ἐπαγγελίας, 
Heb. xi. 18 [RG]; ἐπιτυγχάνειν ἐπαγγελιῶν, ib. vs. 33; 
κληρονομεῖν τὰς ἐπαγγελίας, Heb. vi. 12; ἐπιτυγχάνειν τῆς 
ἐπαγγελίας, ib. 15; κληρονόμοι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, VS. 17 — (to 
reconcile Heb. vi. 12, 15, 17 with xi. 13, 39, which at 
first sight seem to be in conflict, we must hold, in ac- 
cordance with xii. 22-24, that the O. T. saints, after the 
expiatory sacrifice offered at length to God by Christ, 
were made partakers of the heavenly blessings before 
Christ’s return from heaven; [al. explain the appar- 
ent contradiction by the difference between the initial 
and the consummate reception of the promise; see 
the Comm. ad 1.]); with the epexeget. gen. λαβεῖν τὴν 
ἐπαγγελίαν Tov ἁγίου πνεύματος, the promised blessing, 
which is the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33; Gal. iii. 14, [ef. 
W. § 34, 3 a. fin.]; τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονο- 
plas, Heb. ix.15. ([Dem. 519, 8; Aristot. eth. Nic. 10, 
1 p. 1164*, 29]; Polyb. 1, 43, 6, and often; Diod. 1, 5; 
Joseph. antt. 3, 5,1; 5, 8,11; 1 Mace. x. 15.)* 
ἐπ-αγγέλλω : [pres. mid. ἐπαγγέλλομαι]: pf. pass. and 
mid. ἐπήγγελμαι; 1 aor. mid. ἐπηγγειλάμην ; from Hom. 
down ; 1. to announce. 2. to promise: pass. @ 
ἐπήγγελται, to whom the promise hath been made, Gal. 
iii. 19. Mid. to announce concerning one’s self; i.e. 
1. to announce that one is about to do or to furnish some- 
thing, i. e. to promise (of one’s own accord), to engage 
(voluntarily) : ὁ ἐπαγγειλάμενος, Heb. x. 23 ; xi. 11; ἐπήγ- 
yeAra, he hath promised, foll. by λέγων, Heb. xii. 26; 
τινί, to give a promise to one, Heb. vi. 13; τί, Ro. iv. 21; 
Tit. i. 2; τινί τι, Jas. i. 12; ii. δ᾽; 2 Pet. ii. 19; ἐπαγγελίαν, 
to give a promise, 1 Jn. ii. 25 (Esth. iv. 7; [cf. W. 225 
(211) ; B. 148 (129)]); foll. by the inf. [ef. W. § 44, 7¢.]: 
Mk. xiv. 11; Acts vii. 5. 2. to profess; τί, 6. . an art, 
to profess one’s self skilled in it (τὴν ἀρετήν. Xen. mem. 
1, 2, 7; τὴν στρατιάν, Hell. 3, 4, 3; σοφίαν, Diog. Laért. 


27 ἐπαίρω 


prooem. 12; σωφροσύνην, Clem. Al. paedag. 3, 4 p. 299, 
27 ed. Klotz; [ef. L.and S. 5. v. 5]): θεοσέβειαν, 1 Tim. 
ii. 10; γνῶσιν, vi. 21. [Comp. προ-επαγγέλλω.] * 

ἐπ-άγγελμα, -ros, τό, (ἐπαγγέλλω), α promise: 2 Pet. i. 
4; iii. 13. (Dem., Isoc., al.) * 

ἐπ-άγω, [pres. ptep. ἐπάγων]; 1 aor. ptep. ἐπάξας (W. 
p- 82 (78); [Veitch 5. v. @yw]); 2 aor. inf. ἐπαγαγεῖν ; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 8°27; to lead or bring upon: 
τινί τι, to bring a thing on one, i. 6. to cause something te 
befall one, usually something evil, 2 Pet. ii. 1, 5, (πῆμα, 
Hesiod. opp. 240; ἄταν, Soph. Ajax 1189; γῆρας νόσους 
ἐπάγει, Plat. Tim. 33 a.; ἑαυτοῖς δουλείαν, Dem. p. 424, 9 ; 
δεινά, Palaeph. 6, 7; κακά, Bar. iv. 29; ἀμέτρητον ὕδωρ, 3 
Mace. ii.4, and in other exx.; in the Sept. ἐπί τινά τι, as 
κακά, Jer. vi. 19; xi. 11, ete.; πληγήν, Ex. ΧΙ. 1; also ina 
good sense, as ἀγαθά, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 42; τινὶ εὐφρο- 
σύνην, Bar. iv. 29). ἐπάγειν τὸ αἷμά twos ἐπί τινα, to bring 
the blood of one upon any one, i. e. lay upon one the guilt 
of, make him answerable for, the violent death inflicted 
on another: Acts v. 28, (like ἐπάγειν ἁμαρτίαν ἐπί τινα, 
Gen. xx. 9; Ex. xxxii. 21, 34; ἁμαρτίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα, 
Ex. xxxiv. 7).* 

ἐπ-αγωνίζομαι ; to contend: τινί, for a thing, Jude 3. 
(τῷ ᾿Αννίβᾳ, against Hannibal, Plut. Fab. 23, 2; ταῖς 
νίκαις, added a new contest to his victories, id. Cim. 13, 
4; by others in diff. senses.) * 

ἐπ-αθροίζω: [pres. pass. ptcp. ἐπαθροιζόμενος |; to gather 
together (to others already present): pass. in Lk. xi. 29. 
(Plut. Anton. 44, 1.) * 

᾿Ἐπαίνετος [so W. § 6,11. (cf. Chandler § 325); Ἔπαι- 
vetos Rec T; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Lipsius, Gram. 
Unters. p. 30 sq.; Roehl, Inserr. index iii.], (ἐπαινέω), 
του, 6, Epenetus, the name of a Christian mentioned in 
Ro. xvi. 5." 

ἐπ-αινέω, -@; fut. ἐπαινέσω (1 Co. xi. 22, for the more 
com. ἐπαινέσομαι, cf. W. 86 (82) ; [B. 53 (46)]; L txt. Tr 
mre. ἐπαινῶ) ; 1 aor. ἐπήνεσα;; (ἔπαινος) ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 5m and maw; to approve, to praise, (with the 
ἐπί cf. Germ. be- in beloben [Passow 8. v. ἐπί, IV. C. 3 
cc.]) : τινά, Ro. xv. 11; 1 Co. xi. 22; τινά, foll. by ὅτε [ef. 
W. § 30, 9 b.], Lk. xvi. 8; 1 Co. xi. 2; absol., foll. by 
ὅτι, 1 Co. xi. 17.* 

ἔπ-αινος, -ου, ὁ, (ἐπί and αἶνος [as it were, a tale for an- 
other; cf. Bitm. Lexil. ὃ 83, 4; Schmidt ch. 1557) ; ap- 
probation, commendation, praise: Phil. iv. 8; ἔκ τινος, 
bestowed by one, Ro. ii. 29; ἔπαινον ἔχειν ἔκ τινος, gen. 
of pers., Ro. xiii. 3; ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ 
θεοῦ, 1 Co. iv. 5; with gen. of the pers. to whom the 
praise is given, Ro. ii. 29; 2 Co. viii. 18; εἰς ἔπαινον, to 
the obtaining of praise, 1 Pet. i. 7; εἰς ἔπαινόν τινος, that 
a pers. or thing may be praised, Eph. i. 6,14; Phil. i.11; 
[πέμπεσθαι εἰς ἔπ. τινος, 1 Pet. 11. 14]; εἶναι εἰς ἔπαινόν 
τινος to be a praise to a pers. or thing, Eph. i. 13." 

ἐπ-αίρω; 1 aor. ἐπῆρα, ptcp. ἐπάρας, impv. 2 pers. plur. 
ἐπάρατε, inf. ἐπᾶραι ; pf. ἐπῆρκα (Jn. xiii. 18 Tdf.); [Pass. 
and Mid., pres. éraipopat]; 1 aor. pass. ἐπήρθην ; (on the 
om. of iota subser. see αἴρω init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. 
chiefly for 871, also for ὉΠ; ἰο lift up, raise up, raise 


ἐπαισχύνομαι 


onhigh: τὸν ἀρτέμονα, to hoist up, Acts xxvii. 40 (τὰ ἱστία. 
Plut. mor. p. 870 [de Herod. malign. ὃ 39]); ras χεῖρας, 
in offering prayer, 1 Tim. ii. 8 (Neh. viii. 6; Ps. exxxiii. 
(exxxiv.) 2); in blessing, Lk. xxiv. 50 [ef. W. § 65, 4¢.] 
(Lev. ix. 22 [yet here ἐξάρας]; Sir. 1. 20); τὰς κεφαλάς, 
of the timid and sorrowful recovering spirit, Lk. xxi. 
28 (so αὐχένα, Philo de prof. § 20); τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, to 
look up, Mt. xvii. 8; Lk. xvi. 23; Jn. iv. 35; vi. 5; εἴς 
twa, Lk. vi. 20; εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, Lk. xviii. 13; Jn. xvii. 
1; τὴν φωνήν, Lk. xi. 27; Acts ii. 14; xiv. 11; xxii. 22, 
(Dem. 449, 13; Sept. Judg. ii. 4; ix. 7; 2S. xiii. 36); 
τὴν πτέρναν ἐπί twa, to lift the heel against one (see 
πτέρνα), Jn. xiii. 18. Pass. ἐπήρθη, was taken up (of 
Christ, taken up into heaven), Acts i. 9; reflex. and 
metaph. fo be lifted up with pride, to exalt one’s self: 2 
Co. xi. 20 (Jer. xiii. 15; Ps. xlvi. (xlvii.) 10; Sir. xi. 4; 
xxxv. (xxxii.) 1; 1 Mace. i. 3; ii. 63; Arstph. nub. 810; 
Thue. 4, 18; Aeschin. 87, 24; with dat. of the thing of 
which one is proud, Prov. iii. 5; Zeph. i. 11; Hat. 9, 
49; Thue. 1, 120; Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 24); —on 2 Co. x. 
5 see ὕψωμα." 

ἐπ-αισχύνομαι ; fut. ἐπαισχυνθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐπῃσχύνθην, 
and with neglect οἵ augm. ἐπαισχύνθην (2 Tim. i. 101, Ὁ 
Tr WH; ef.[ WH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (30); [W. § 12 
fin.]); fr. Aeschyl. down; to be ashamed (ἐπί on account 
of [ef. Is. i. 29 Alex. ; Ellic. on 2 Tim. i. 8]; see αἰσχύνω) : 
absol. 2 Tim. i. 12; τινά [on the aceus. ef. W. § 32, 1 b.a.; 
B. 192 (166) ], of a person, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; ri, of 
a thing, Ro. i. 16; 2Tim.i. 8,16; ἐπί τινι, dat. of a thing, 
Xo. vi. 21; foll. by the inf. Heb. ii. 11; with the ace. of 
a pers. and the inf. of a thing, Heb. xi. 16. (Twice in 
the Sept.: Is. i. 29 [Alex. ]; Job xxxiv. 19.) * 

ἐπ-αιτέω, -ῶ ; 1. to ask besides, ask for more: Hom. 
Tl. 23, 593. 2. to ask again and again, importunately : 
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1416; to beg, to ask alms: Lk. xvi. 3; 
(xviii. 35 LT Tr WH]; (Ps. eviii. (cix.) 10; Sir. xl. 28; 
Soph. Oed. Col. 1364).* 

ἐπ-ακολουθέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐπηκολούθησα ; to follow (close) 
upon, follow afier; in the N. T. only metaph. τοῖς ἔχνεσί 
twos, to tread in one’s footsteps, i. e. to imitate his ex- 
ample, 1 Pet. ii. 21; with the dat. of a pers. 1 Tim. v. 
24 (opp. to mpodyw, to go before; the meaning is, ‘ the 
sins of some men are manifest now, even before they are 
called to account, but the misdeeds of others are exposed 


vy. 10; used, with the dat. of the pers. to be mentally sup- 
plied, of the miracles accompanying the preaching of 
Christ’s ministers, Mk. xvi. 20. (Arstph., Thue., Xen., 
Plato, sqq.; occasionally in Sept.) * 

ér-axotw: 1 aor. ἐπήκουσα ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. often 
for Niy and pow; 
ceive by the ear. 


1. to give ear to, listen to; to per- 
2. to listen toi. 6. hear with favor, 
grant one’s prayer, (Aeschyl. choéph. 725; τῶν εὐχῶν, 
Leian. Tim. 34): τινός, to hearken to one, 2 Co. vi. 2 fr. 
Ts. xlix. 8; often so in Sept.* 

ἐπ-ακροάομαι, -ὥμαι : 3 pers. plur. impf. ἐπηκροῶντο ; fo 
listen to: with the gen. of a pers. Acts xvi. 25. (Plat. 


99 


8 ἐπάνω 


comic. in Bekk. anecd. p. 360; Leian. Iearom. 1; Test. 
xii. Patr. p. 710, test. Jos. § 8.) * 

ἐπ-άν, conj. (fr. ἐπεί and dv), afler, when: with the sub- 
june. pres. Lk. xi. 34; with the subjune. aor., answering 
to the Lat. fut. exact. (fut. perf.), Mt. ii. 8; Lk. xi. 22. 
Cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, p. 547." 

ἐπάναγκες, (ἀνάγκη, [hence lit. on compulsion]), neces- 
sarily : πλὴν τῶν ἐπάναγκες τούτων, besides these things 
which are necessarily imposed, Acts xv. 38 [B. 27 (24)]. 
(Hdt., Andoc., Plato, Dem., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., 
Aeclian, Epict.) * 

ἐπ-αν-άγω; 2 aor. inf. ἐπαναγαγεῖν, impy. ἐπανάγαγε, 
[ptep. ἐπαναγαγών, Mt. xxi. 18 T WII txt.Trmrg.]; 1. 
lit. fo lead up upon, sc. τὸ πλοῖον, a ship upon the deep, 
i.e. fo put out, Lk. v. 3 (Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 28; 2 Mace. 
xii. 4) ; with εἰς τὸ βάθος added, into the deep, ibid. 4. 
2. to lead back; intrans. to return [ef. B. 144 (126)]: 
Mt. xxi. 18; (2 Mace. ix. 21; Xen. Cyr. 4, 1,3; Polyb., 
Diod., Joseph., Hdian., al.).* 

ἐπ-ανα-μιμνήσκω ; fo recall to mind again: τινά, remind- 
ing one, Ro. xv. 15. (Rare; Plato, legg. 3 p. 688 a.; 
Dem. 74, (7) 9; [Aristot.].) * 

ἐπ-ανα-παύω: 1. to cause to rest upon anything: 
Sept. in Judg. xvi. 26 ace. to cod. Alex.; Greg. Nyss. 
2. Mid., [pres. ἐπαναπαύομαι ; fut. ἐπαναπαύσομαι, and 
(Lk. x. 6 T WH after codd. 8B) ἐπαναπαήσομαι (see 
ἀναπαύων ; to rest upon anything: τινί, metaph. τῷ νόμῳ, 
to lean upon, trust to, Ro. ii. 17 (Mie. iii. 11; 1 Mace. viii. 
12). 10 settle upon, fix its abode upon ; ἐπί twa, with the 
included idea of antecedent motion towards (see eis, C. 2 
p: 186°) : ἡ εἰρήνη ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν i. 6. shall rest, remain, upon 
him or it, Lk. x. 6 (τὸ πνεῦμα ἐπί twa, Num. xi. 25; 2 Καὶ, 
ii. 15; ἐπί τινι, Num. xi. 26 var.).* 

ἐπ-αν-έρχομαι ; 2 aor. ἐπανῆλθον; to return, come back 
again: Lk. x. 35; xix. 15. (Hdt.; freq. in Attic writ.) * 

ἐπ-αν-ίστημι: fut. mid. ἐπαναστήσομαι; to cause lo rise 
up against, to raise up against; Mid. to rise up against 
(Hadt., Arstph., Thue., Polyb., al.) : ἐπί τινα, Mt. x. 21; 
Mk. xiii. 12, as in Deut. xix. 11; xxii. 26; Mic. vii. 6.* 

ἐπ-αν-όρθωσις, -ews, 7, (€mavopOdw), restoration to an up- 
right or a right state; correction, improvement, (in Grk. 
writ. fr. Dem. down): of life and character, 2 Tim. iii. 
16 [cf. τὸν Oedv .. . χρόνον ye πρὸς ἐπανόρθωσιν (αὐτοῖς) 


| προσιζάνειν, Plut. de sera num. vind. 6]; with rod βίου 
when finally judgment is held’; cf. Huther [or Ellic.] | 
ad loc.) ; ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ, to be devoted to good works, 1 Tim. | 


added, Polyb. 1, 35,1; Epict. diss. 3, 21,15; σεαυτοῦ, 
id. ench. 51,1; [ἠθικὴ δὲ τὰ πρὸς ἀνθρωπίνων ἐπανόρθωσιν 
ἠθῶν, Philo de ebriet. § 22; οἵ. de confus. lingg. § 36 fin.]; 
(cf. ἐπανορθοῦν καὶ εἰς μετάνοιαν ἀπάγειν, Joseph. antt. 4, 
6, 10)." 

ἐπ-άνω, adv., (ἐπί and ἄνω [οἵ. W. 102 (97); B. 319 
(273)]}), Hdt. et sqq.; often in the Sept.; above; 1. 
adverbially, a. of place: Lk. xi. 44; b. of number; 
beyond, more than: πραθῆναι ἐπάνω τριακοσίων δηναρίων, 
sold for more than three hundred denaries, Mk. xiv. 5; 
ὥφθη ἐπάνω πεντακοσίοις ἀδελφοῖς, by more than five hun- 
dred brethren, 1 Co. xv. 6; ef. W. § 37, 5; [B. 168 
(146) ]. 2. as a preposition it is joined with the gen. 
[W. § 54,6], a. of place: Mt. ii. 9; v.14; xxi. 7 RG; 


ἐπάρατος 


xxiii. 18, 20, [22]; xxvii. 37; xxviii. 2; Lk. iv. 39; [χ. 
19]; Rev. vi. 8 [WH br. the gen.]; xx. 3, [11 Tr txt.]. 
b. of dignity and power: ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπάνω τινός, Lk. 
xix. 17, [19]; ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστί, Jn. iii. 81", [815 (but 
here GT WH mre. om. the cl.) }.* 

ἐπ-άρατος, -ov, (ἐπαράομαι [to call down curses upon]), 
accursed: Jn. vii. 49 LT TrWH. (Thuc., Plato, Aes- 
chin., Dio Cass., al.) * 

ἐπ-αρκέω, -@; 1 aor. [ἐπήρκεσα], subjunc. ἐπαρκέσω; 
properly, to avail or be strong enough for . . . (see ἀρκέω); 
hence a. to ward off or drive away, τί τινι, a thing for 
another’s advantage i. q. a thing from any one (Hom.), 
to defend. b. to aid, give assistance, relieve, (Hdt., 
Aeschyl., al.) : τινί, 1 Tim. v. 10; Mid. to give aid from 
one’s own resources, 1 Tim. v.16 ace. to the reading 
ἐπαρκείσθω (1, txt. T Tr WH mrg.) for ἐπαρκείτω (RG L 
mrg. WH txt.); (κατὰ δύναμιν ἀλλήλοις ἐπαρκεῖν, Xen. 
mem. 2, 7, 1).* 

émdpxetos, -ov, belonging to an ἔπαρχος or prefect; ἡ 
ἐπάρχειος 80. ἐξουσία, i. q. ἡ ἐπαρχία (see the foll. word), 
a prefecture, province: Acts xxv.1TWHmrg. So ἡ 
ἐπάρχιος, Euseb. ἢ. 6. 2, 10, 3 (with the var. ἐπάρχειον) ; 
Ὁ 96. 95 δ᾽ 99. 9» 66 τηϑῦ: ΕΔ]: 8, 1; 19. 11." 

ἐπαρχία [-χεία IT WH (see εἰ, «)], -as, ἡ, (fr. ἔπαρχος 
i.e. ὁ ἐπ᾿ ἀρχῇ ὧν the one in command, prefect, gov- 
ernor), prefecture; 1. 6. 1. the office of ἔπαρχος or 
prefect. 2. the region subject to a prefect; a province 
of the Roman empire, either a larger province, or an ap- 
pendage to a larger province, as Palestine was to that 
of Syria [ef. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. p. 144 sqq.]: Acts xxiii. 
34; xxv. 1 [see the preced. word]; (Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
Dio Cass.). Cf. Krebs, Observv. ete. p. 256 sqq.; Fischer, 
De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 432 sqq.; [BB.DD. (esp. Kitto) 
s. v. Province ].* 

ἔπ-αυλις, -ews, ἡ, (ἐπί and αὖλις tent, place to pass the 
night in; hence a country-house, cottage, cabin, fold), 
a farm; a dwelling, [A. V. habitation]: Acts i. 20 fr. Ps. 
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 26. (Diod., Plut., al.; also a camp, military 
quarters, Plato, Polyb.) * 

ἐπ-αύριον, adv. of time, i. q. ἐπ᾽ αὔριον, on the morrow ; 
in the N. T. τῇ ἐπαύριον, se. ἡμέρᾳ, the next day, on the 
morrow: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk. xi. 12; Jn. i. 29; Acts x. 
9, ete.; Sept. for NINN. 

ἐπ-αυτοφώρῳ, see aitépwpos, p. 87°. 

*Eradpas, -a [B. 20 (17 sq.) ], 6, Epaphras, a Christian 
man mentioned in Col. i. 7; iv. 12; Philem. 23. The 
conjecture of some that the name is contracted from 
᾿Ἐπαφρόδιτος (4. v. [ef. W. 103 (97)]) and hence that 
these two names belong to one and the same man, is not 
probable; [see B. D. Am. ed. 5. v. Epaphras; Bp. Lehtft. 
Com. on Phil. p. 61 note 4]. The name is com. in 
inscriptions.* 

ἐπ-αφρίζω: to foam up (Mosch. 5,5); /0 cast out as 
foam, foam out: τί, Jude 13 calls the godless and grace- 
less set of whom he speaks κύματα ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν 
αἰσχύνας, i. 6. (dropping the figure) impelled by their 
restless passions, they unblushingly exhibit, in word and 
deed, their base and abandoned spirit ; cf. Is. lvii. 20." 


229 


ἐπείπερ 


᾿Επαφρόδιτος, -ου, ὁ, (fr. ᾿Αφροδίτη, prop. ‘charming’), 
Epaphroditus, an associate with Paul in the ministry: 
Phil. ii. 25; iv. 18. See Ἐπαφρᾶς above.* 

ἐπ-εγείρω: 1 aor. ἐπήγειρα ; to raise or excite against: 
τὶ ἐπί twa, Acts xiii. 50 (διωγμόν) ; κατά twos, to stir up 
against one: ras ψυχὰς ... κατὰ τῶν ἀδελφῶν, Acts xiv. 2." 

ἐπεί, [fr. temporal ἐπί and εἰ, lit. thereupon when; Cur- 
tius, Erliut. ete. p. 182; cf. Etym. Magn. 356, 7], conjunc- 
tion, (Lat. cum), when, since, [ef. W.§ 53,1]; used 1. 
of time, after; so once in the N. Τ᾿: Lk. vii. 1 (where 
LT Tr txt. WH txt. ἐπειδή). 2. of cause, etc., since, 
seeing that, because: Mt. xviii. 32; [xxi. 46 T Tr WH]; 
xxvil. 6; Mk. xv. 42; Lk.i. 34; Jn. xiii. 29; xix. 31; 
1 Co. xiv. 12; 2Co. xi. 18}; xiii.3; Heb. v. 2,11; vi. 13; 
ix. 17; xi. 11; ἐπεὶ οὖν since then, Heb. ii. 14; iv. 6. 
Agreeably to a very common abbreviation of speech, 
we must often supply in thought between ἐπεί and the 
proposition depending upon it some such phrase as if it 
is (or were) otherwise; so that the particle, although 
retaining the force of since, is yet to be rendered other- 
wise, else, or for then, (Germ. sonst); so in Ro. xi. 6, 22; 
Heb. ix. 26; ἐπεὶ dpa, 1 Co. v. 10; vii. 14, [ef. W. § 53, 
8 a.]; ἐπεί alone before a question [cf. W. 480 (447); 
B. 233 (200)]: Ro. iii. 6; 1 Co. xiv. 16; xv. 29; Heb. x. 
2; (4 Mace. i. 33; 11. 7,19; vi. 34 (35); vii. 21; viii. 8). 
Cf. Matthiae § 618; [B. § 149, 5].* 

ἐπει-δή, conjunction, (fr. ἐπεί and δή), Lat. cwm jam, 
when now, since now, [ οἵ. W. 434 (404), 448 (417); Ellic. 
on Phil. ii. 26]; 1. of time; when now, after that; 
so once in the N. T.: Lk. vii. 1 LT Tr txt. WH txt. 2. 
of cause; since, seeing that, forasmuch as: Mt. xxi. 46 
[RGL]; Lk. xi. 6: Acts xiii. 46; xiv. 12; xv. 24; 1 Co. 
i. 21, 22; xiv. 16; xv. 21; [2 Co. v. 4 Rec.**]; Phil. ii. 26.* 

ἐπει-δή-περ [ἐπειδή περ Lehm.], conjunction, (fr. ἐπεί, 
δή and πέρ), seeing that, forasmuch as; Itala and Vulg. 
quoniam quidem, since now, [ οἵ. W. 448 (417)]: Lk. i. 1. 
(Aristot. phys. 8, 5 [p. 256", 25]; Dion. Hal. 2, 72; Philo 
ad Gai. § 25, and Attic writ. fr. Thue. down.) * 

ἐπ-εῖδον [ Tdf. 7 ἐφεῖδον] ; impv. ἔπιδε (Lchm. ἔφιδε, cf. 
W.§5,1d.14; B. 7; [reff. 5. v. apetSov]; besides see 
εἴδω, I.); to look upon, to regard: foll. by a telie inf., 
ἐπεῖδεν ἀφελεῖν τὸ ὄνειδός pov ([R. V. looked upon me to 
take away ete.], Germ. hat hergeblickt), Lk. i. 25; ἐπί τι, 
to look upon (for the purpose of punishing, ef. Lat. ani- 
madvertere), Acts iv. 29.* 

ἔπ-ειμι ; (ἐπί, and εἶμι to go); to come upon, approach ; 
of time, to come on, be at hand; ptep. ἐπιών, -οὔσα, -dv, 
next, following: τῇ ἐπιούσῃ, 50. ἡμέρᾳ, on the following 
day, Acts xvi. 11; xx. 15; xxi. 18, (Polyb. 2, 25, 11; 
5, 13, 10; Joseph. antt. 3, 1,6; [Prov. xxvii. 1]; ete.); 
with ἡμέρᾳ added (as in the earlier writ. fr. Hdt. down), 
Acts vii. 26; τῇ ἐπιούσῃ νυκτί, Acts xxiii. 11. Cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 464.* 

ἐπεί-περ, conjunction, (ἐπεί, πέρ). since indeed, since at 
all events; [it introduces a “known and unquestioned 
certainty 7: Ro. iii. 30 RG (but L Tr εἴ rep, TWH 
Cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 784; [Baumlein p. 204; 
Fr. the Tragg. down. ]* 


εἴπερ). 


W. 448 (417). 


ἐπεισαγωγὴ 


290 


ἐπερώτημα 


ἐπ-εισ-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἥ, a bringing in besides or in addition | Acts viii. 24; xiii. 40 [L T Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br. 


to what is or has been brought m: κρείττονος ἐλπίδος, Heb. 
vii. 19. (Un Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 2 used of the introduction 
of a new wife in place of one repudiated; ἑτέρων ἰητρῶν, 
Hippocr. p- 27 [vol. i. p. 81 ed Kiithn]; προσώπων, of 
characters in a play, Dion. Hal. ser. cens. 2, 10; in the 
plur. of places for letting in the enemy, Thue. 8, 92.) * 

ἐπ-εισ-έρχομαι : fut. ἐπεισελεύσομαι; 1. to come in 
besides or to those who are already within; to enter after- 
wards, (Hdt., Thue., Plato, al.). 2. to come in upon, 
come upon by entering; to enter against: ἐπί τινα, ace. of 
pers., Lk. xxi. 35 LT Trtxt. WH; with simple dat. of 
pers. 1 Mace. xvi. 16.* 

ἔπειτα, adv., (ἐπί, εἶτα), thereupon, thereafter, then, 
afterwards; used a. of time: Mk. vii. 5 RG; Lk. 
xvi. 7; Gal. i. 21; Jas. iv. 14; μετὰ τοῦτο is added re- 
dundantly in Jn. xi. 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc.; W. § 65, 2; 
[B. 897 (340)]); a more definite specification of time is 
added epexegetically, μετὰ ἔτη τρία, Gal. i. 18; διὰ de 
in enumerations it is 
a. of time and order: πρῶτον. - - ἔπειτα, 1 Co. 
xv. 46; 1 Th. iv. 17; πρότερον ... . ἔπειτα, Heb. vii. 27; 
ἀπαρχὴ - - - ἔπειτα, 1 Co. xv. 23; εἶτα [but T Tr mrg. WH 
mre. ἔπειτα] . . . ἔπειτα, 1 Co. xv. 5, 6; ἔπειτα .΄- . ἔπειτα, 
ib. 7 Lmre. T Trmrg. WH mrg. β. of order alone: 
πρῶτον... . ἔπειτα, eb. vii. 2; τρίτον . « . ἔπειτα . « . ἔπει- 
τα (RG εἶτα), 1 Co. xii. 28." 

ἐπ-έκεινα (i. q. ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνα se. μέρη [cf. W. § 6, 11. fin.]), 
ady., beyond: with the gen., Βαβυλῶνος, Acts vil. 43. 
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down both with and without 
the gen.; in the Sept. Am. v. 27; Gen. xxxv. 16; Jer. 
peo UF) 

ἐπ-εκ-τείνω : [pres. mid. ptep. ἐπεκτεινόμενος] ; to 
stretch out to or towards; Mid. to stretch (one’s self) for- 
ward to: with dat. of thing indicating the direction [W. 
§ 52, 4, 7], Phil. iii. 13 (14), (see ἔμπροσθεν, 1 fin.).* 

ἐπενδύτης, -ov, ὁ, (ἐπενδύνω or ἐπενδύω, q. V., [ef. W. 25 ; 
94 (90)]), an upper garment, (Tertull. superindumentum) : 
Jn. xxi. 7, where it seems to denote a kind of linen blouse 
or frock which fishermen used to wear at their work. 
(Soph. frag. 391 Dind. [(248 Ahrens) ; Poll. 7,45 p. 717]; 
Sept. twice [thrice] for ὁ}, 1S. xviii. 4 [Alex.]; 2 5. 
xiii. 18; [add Lev. viii. 7 Alex.].) * 

ἐπ-εν-δύω : 1 aor. mid. inf. ἐπενδύσασθαι; to put on over 
[A. V. to be clothed upon): 2 Co. v. 2, 4. (Plut. Pelop. 
11; actively, Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 12.) * 

ἐπ-έρχομαι ; fut. ἐπελεύσομαι; 2 aor. ἐπῆλθον (3 pers. 
plur. ἐπῆλθαν, Acts xiv. 19 L T Tr WH); Sept. chiefly 
for 813; 1. fo come to, to arrive; a. univ., foll. by 
ἀπό with a gen. of place, Acts xiv. 19. b. of time; to 
come on, be at hand, be fulure: ἐν τοῖς αἰῶσι τοῖς ἐπερχο- 
μένοις, Eph. ii. 7, (Is. xli. 4, 22, 23; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down); of that which time will bring, to impend: ἡ τα- 


κατεσσάρων ἐτῶν, Gal. 11. 1. b. 
used 


λαιπωρία ἡ ἐπερχομένη, Jas. v. 1; τινί, Lk. xxi. 26, (Is. 
Ixiii. 4; also of things favorable, ἡ εὐλογία, Sir. iii. 8). 
2. to come upon, ove riake, one; so even in Hom., as of 
steep, τινά, Od. 4, 793; 10,31; tui, 12, 311; of disease, 
11, 200; ἐπί τινα, a. of calamities: Lk. xxi. 35 RG; 


‘| will, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. Lxv. 1. 


ἐφ᾽ v.], (Gen. xlii. 21; Mic. iii, 11; Zeph. ii. 2; 2 Ch. xx. 
9; Jer. v. 12 [here #&er]). b. of the Holy Spirit, de 
scending and operating in one: Lk. i. 35; Acts i. 8. c. 
of an enemy attacking one: ἐπελθὼν νικήσῃ αὐτόν, Lk. xi. 
22; (Hom. Il. 12, 136; 1 S. xxx. 23; w. dat. of pers. 
Hdian. 1, 8, 12 [6 Bekk.]).” 

ἐπ-ερωτάω, -ῶ ; impf. ἐπηρώτων: fut. ἐπερωτήσω; 1 aor. 
ἐπηρώτησα: 1 aor. pass. ptep. émepwrnbeis ; Sept. mostly 
for 78wW, sometimes for W171, 1. fo accost one with an 
inquiry, put a question to, inquire of, ask, interrogate, 
[ἐπί directive, uniformly in the N.T.; Mey. on Mk. 
xi. 29 (ef. ἐπί, D. 2)]: τινά, Mk. ix. 325 xii. 34; Mt. xxii. 
46; Lk. ii. 46; 1 Co. xiv. 35; Jn. xviii. 21 RG: τινά τι; 
ask one any thing, Mk. vii. 17 LT Tr WH; xi. 29; Lk. 
xx. 40; τινὰ περί τινος, one about a thing, Mk. vii. 17 RG; 
(Lk. ix. 45 Lehm.], (Hdt. 1, 32; Dem. 1072, 12): foll. 
by λέγων with the words used by the questioner, Mt. xii. 
10; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11; xii. 18; Lk. iii.10, 145 xx. 27; 
xxiii. 3 [R G L], and often in the Synoptic Gospels; foll. 
by εἰ, whether, Mk. viii. 23; xv. 445 Lk. xxiii. 6; or some 
other form of the indirect question, Acts xxiii. 34; ἐπηρώ- 
tov λέγοντες [LT Tr WH om. dey. ], τίς εἴη, Lk. viii. 9; 
ἐπερωτᾶν θεόν to consult God (Num. xxiii. 3; Josh. ix. 20 
(14); Judg.i. 1; xviii.5; Is. xix. 3, ete.; Thue. 1, 118, 
[ete.]), hence to seek to know God’s purpose and to do his 
2. by a usage foreign 
to the Greeks, 4o address one with a request or demand ; 
to ask of or demand of one: foll. by the inf. Mt. xvi. 1 (so 
ἐπερ. τινά τι, Hebr. Onw, in Ps. exxxvi. (cxxxvil.) 3; [this 
sense is disputed by some; see Zezschwitz as referred to 
at end of next word; cf. Weiss on Mt. 1. ο., and see 
ἐρωτάω, 2). 

ἐπ-ερώτημα, -ros, τό, (ἐπερωτάω) ; 1. an inquiry, a 
question: Hat. 6,67; Thue. 3, 53. 68. 2. a demand; 
so for the Chald. x>xw in Dan. iv. 14 Theod.; see ἐπερω- 
Td, 2. 3. As the terms of inquiry and demand often 
include the idea of desire, the word thus gets the signi- 
fication of earnest seeking, i. 6. a craving, an intense de 
sire (so ἐπερωτᾶν εἴς τι; to long for something, 2S. xi. 7 — 
[but surely the phrase here (like ἢ Osv) means simply 
to ask in reference to, ask about]). If this use of the 
word is conceded, it affords us the easiest and most con- 
gruous explanation of that vexed passage 1 Pet. tii. 21: 
“which (baptism) now saves us [you] not because in re- 
ceiving it we [ye] have put away the filth of the flesh, 
but because we [ye] have earnestly sought a conscience 
reconciled to God ” (συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς gen. of the obj., 
as opp. to σαρκὸς ῥύπου). It is doubtful, indeed, whether 
εἰς θεόν is to be joined with ἐπερώτημα, and signifies a 


_eraving directed unto God [W. 194 (182) — yet less fully 


and decidedly than in ed. 5, p. 216 sq.], or with συνείδησις, 
and denotes the attitude of the conscience towards (in 
relation to) God; the latter construction is favored by a 
comparison of Acts xxiv. 16 ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν 
πρὸς τὸν θεόν. The signification of ἐπερ. which is ap- 
proved by others, viz. stipulation, agreement, is first met 
with in the Byzantine writers on law; “moreover, the 


sued 
εἐπέχω 


formula κατὰ τὸ ἐπερώτημα τῆς σεμνοτάτης βουλῆς, common 
in inscriptions of the age of the Antonines and the follow- 
ing Cesars, exhibits no new sense of the word éir:patnua; 
for this formula does not mean ‘ace. to the decree of the 
senate’ (ex senatus consulto, the Grk. for which is κατὰ 
ta δόξαντα τῇ βουλῇ), but ‘after inquiry of or application 
to the senate,’ i. 6. ‘ with government sanction.’” Ze- 
zschwitz, Petri ap. de Christi ad inferos descensu senten- 
tia (Lips. 1857) p. 45; [ Farrar, Early Days of Christi- 
anity,i. 138 n.; Kahler, Das Gewissen, i. 1 (Halle 1878) 
pp- 331-338. Others would adhere to the (more ana- 
logical) passive sense of ἐπερ. viz. ‘the thing asked 
(the demand) of a good conscience towards God’ i. q. 
the avowal of consecration unto him].* 

ἐπ-έχω ; impf. ἐπεῖχον ; 2 aor. ἐπέσχον ; 1. to have 
or hold upon, apply: sc. τὸν νοῦν, to observe, attend to, foll. 
by an indir. quest., Lk. xiv. 7; τινί, dat. of pers., to give 
attention to one, Acts iii. 5; 1 Tim. iv. 16, (with dat. of a 
thing, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 2; 2 Mace. ix. 25; Polyb. 3, 43, 
2, ete.; fully ὀφθαλμόν τινι, Leian. dial. mar. 1, 2). a 
to hold towards, hold forth, present : λόγον ζωῆς, asa light, 
by which illumined ye are the lights of the world, Phil. ii. 
16 [Δ]. al., cf. Mey. or Ellic. ad loc.]. 3. to check ((cef. 
Eng. hold up], Germ. anhalten): se. ἐμαυτόν, to delay, 
stop, stay, Acts xix. 22, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 
[ef. W. § 38,1; B. 144 (126); Fritzsche on Sir. v. 17." 

ἐπηρεάζω ; (ἐπήρεια [spiteful abuse, cf. Aristot. rhet. 2, 
2, 47); to insult; to treat abusively, use despitefully; to re- 
vile: τινά, Mt. v. 44 RG; Lk. vi. 28, (with dat. of pers., 
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 31; 3, 5, 16); in a forensic sense, to 
accuse falsely: with the acc. of a thing, 1 Pet. iii. 16. 
(Xen., Isaeus, Dem., Philo, Plut., Leian., Hdian.; to 
threaten, Hat. 6, 9 [but ef. Cope on Aristot. u. s.].)* 

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. 
én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some in- 
stances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts 
ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects 
elision before proper names beginning with a vowel 
(exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s 
txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; 
cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. 
local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the 
dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. 
super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). 

A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 
(289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on 
which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with 
the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abid- 
ing, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; 
of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 
34; ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, Mt. xxiv.17; Lk. xvii. 31; ἐπ’ ἐρη- 
pias (cf. on a desert), Mk. viii. 4; ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν, Mt. 
xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64; ἐπὶ (τῆς) γῆς, Mt. vi. 10; ix. 6; xxiii. 
9; xxviii. 18; Lk. xxi. 25; Acts ii. 19, and very often; 
ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης. on (the surface of) the sea, Mt. xiv. 
25 RG; 26 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 48, [49]; Rev. v. 13, 
and, ace. to the interp. of many, Jn. vi. 19; butef. Baumg.- 
Crusius ad loc. [per contra, οἵ. Liicke ad loc.; Meyer on 


231 


ἐπὶ 


Με.]. ς.1, (Jobix.8; βαδίζειν ἐφ᾽ ὕδατος, Leian. philops. 
13; ἐπὶ τοῦ πελάγους διαθέοντες, ν. h. 2,4; [Ατΐοπι. oneir. 
3, 16]; on ἃ different sense of the phrase ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσ- 
σης see 2 a. below [W. 374 (351)]); ποιεῖν σημεῖα ἐπὶ τῶν 
ἀσθενούντων, to be seen upon the bodies of men, exter- 
nally, (on the sick [ef. W.375 (351)]), Jn. vi. 2; ἐκάθισα 
and κάθημαι [καθέζομαι] ἐπί, Mt. xix. 28; xxiii. 2; xxiv. 
3; xxv. 31; xxvii.19; Jn. xix.13; Actsxx.9; Rey. ix. 
17, ete. ; ἔστην, ἔστηκα ἐπί, Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi.40; Rey. 
x. 5,8; where parts of the body are spoken of : ἐπὶ χειρῶν, 
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11; ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς, Jn. xx. 7; 1 Co. 
xi.10; Rev. x.1 RG [al. ace.]; xii. 1; σινδόνα ἐπὶ γυμνοῦ, 
MK. xiv. 51; ἐπὶ τοῦ μετώπου [or -πων], Rev. vii. 3; ix. 
4; xill. 16 [Rec., al. ace.]; xiv.9. _ b. Like the prep. ἐν 
(see the exposition s. v. ἐν, 1. 7 p. 212"), so also ἐπί with 
the gen. is used after verbs expressing motion to indi- 
cate the rest following the motion; thus after βάλλειν, 
Mk. iv. 26; Mt. xxvi. 12; σπείρειν, Mk. iv. 31; τιθέναι, 
Jn. xix. 19; Acts v.15; [Lk. viii. 16 L T Tr WH]; 
ἐπιτιθέναι, Lk. viii. 16 [RG]; καθιέναι, Acts x. 11; πίπτειν, 
MK. ix. 20; xiv. 35; ἐπιγράφειν, Heb. x.16 RG; ἑλκύειν, 
Jn. xxi. 11 RG; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb. vi. 7; Rey. iii. 10; [dva- 
τέλλειν, Lk. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH]; γενόμενος ἐπὶ τοῦ 
τόπου (cf. our having arrived on the spot), Lk. xxii. 40, 
[ef. W. p. 376 (352) and see below, C. I. 1b. fin.]. κρεμᾶν 
τινα ἐπί (Hebr. oy mon, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 22, etc.), 
for which the Latin has suspendere ez, de, a, and alicui, 
Acts v.30; x. 39; Gal.iii-13. ὁ. fig. used of that upon 
which any thing rests, (like our upon) [ef. W. 375 
(351); B. 336 (289); Ellic. on 1 Tim. as below]: ἵνα 
σταθῇ ἐπὶ στόματος ete. ("9-» Ὁ)» Deut. xix. 15), rest- 
ing on the declaration, etc., Mt. xviii. 16 ; 2 Co. xiii. 1; 
more simply ἐπὶ μαρτύρων, 1 Tim. v. 19; in the adv. phrase 
ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (on the ground of truth), see ἀλήθεια, 1. 1. 
[e’. akin is its use (with a personal or a reflex. pron.) to 
denote dependence, as in λογιζέσθω ἐφ᾽ (al. ἀφ᾽ q. v. 
ΤΙ. 2d. aa.) ἑαυτοῦ, 2 Co. x. 7T Tr WH (for himself, i. e. 
apart from and independently of others; R. V. with him- 
self); cf. Kiihner ii. 432; L.andS.s.v.A.Lid] 4d. 
fig. used of things, affairs, persons, which one is 
setover, over which he exercises power; Lat. 
supra, our over [cf. below, B. 2 Ὁ. and (Ὁ. I. 3 e.]: ἐπὶ 
πάντων, Ro. ix. 5; Eph. iv. 6 (where ἐπί, διά and ἐν are 
distinguished); καθίστημί τινα ἐπί twos, Mt. xxiv. 45; 
xxy. 21, 23; Lk. xii. 42; Acts vi. 3, (Gen. xxxix. 4, 5; 
1 Mace. vi. 14; x. 37, ete.; Plat. rep. 5 p. 460 b., etc.); 
δίδωμί τινι ἐξουσίαν ἐπί τινος, Rev. ii. 26; ἔχω ἐξουσίαν 
ἐπί τινος, Rev. xx.6; βασιλεύειν ἐπί τινος. Mt. ii. 22 RG 
Tr br.; Rev. νυ. 10; ἔχειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ βασιλέα. Rev. ix. 11; 
ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐπὶ τῶν βασιλέων, Rey. xvii. 18 ; ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ 
τῆς γάζης, who was over the treasury, Acts viii. 27; 6 ἐπὶ 
τοῦ κοιτῶνος, he who presided over the bed-chamber, the 
chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (Passow i. 2 p. 1035* gives 
many exx. fr. Grk. auth. [ef. L. and S. s. v. A. III. 1; Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 474; Soph. Lex. s. v.]; for exx. fr. the O. T. 
Apocer. see Wahi, Clavis Apocr. p. 218"). 6. of that to 
which the mental act looks or refers: λέγειν ἐπί 
twos, to speak upon (of) a thing, Gal. iii. 16 (Plato, 


ἐπί 


Charm. p. 155 d.; legg. 2 p. 602 d.; Ael. v. h. 1, 30; 
seribere super re, Οἷς. ad Att. 16, 6 ; disserere super, Tac. 
ann. 6, 28; ef. W. 375 (351); [B. 886 (289)]).  f. of 
one on whom an obligation has been laid: εὐχὴν ἔχειν 
ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, have (taken) on themselves a vow, have 
bound themselves by a vow, Acts xxi. 23 [WH txt. aq’ 
éaur. (see ἀπό, 11. 2 d. aa.) ]. 2. used of vicinity, 
i.e. of the place at, near, hard by, which, (Germ. bei, an) ; 
a. prop. κόλπος ὁ ἐπὶ ποσιδηΐου, Hdt. 7, 115; ἐπὶ τῶν 
θυρῶν, [Acts v. 381, Τ Tr WH] (1 Mace. i. 55; [Plut. 
G. Gracch. 14, 3 p. 841 c.]); ef. Matthiae ii. p. 1366 
§ 584; Passow 8. v. p. 1034”; [L. and 8. s.v. I. 1 a. sub 
fin.]. But the exx. of this signification adduced from 
the N. T. [with the exception of Acts 1. c.] (and most 
of those fr. Grk. auth. also) are such as to allow the ren- 
dering of ἐπί by super also, over or above [so W. 374 sq. 
(351)]: ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης at the sea, upon the shore, or 
above the sea, for the shore overhung the sea, Jn. vi. 19 
(? [ef. 1 a. above]); xxi. 1, (Ex. xiv. 2; Deut. i. 40; 1 
Mace. xiv. 34; xv- 11; Polyb. 1, 44, 4; cf. the French 
Boulogne sur mer, Chdlons sur Marne, [Eng. Stratford 
on Avon], οἷο. ; ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ, Ezek. i. 1; [Xen. an. 
4, 3, 28]; ἐπὶ τοῦ Ἰορδάνου, 2 K. ii. 7); ἐσθίειν ἐπὶ τῆς 
τραπέζης τινός (Germ. iiber Jemands Tische essen, (cf. 
Eng. over one’s food, over one’s cups, ete.]), food and 
drink placed upon the table, Lk. xxii. 30 ef. 21; συκῆν 
ἐπὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ, a fig-tree above (i. 6. higher than) the way, 
Mt. xxi.19. Ὅ. before, with gen. of a pers., in the pres- 
ence of one as spectator, or auditor, [W. 375 (351); B. 
336 (289)]: Mt. xxviii. 14 [L Tr WH mrg. ὑπό]; Mk. 
ΧΙ. 9; Acts xxiv. 19, 20; xxv. 9; xxvi. 2; 1 Co. vi. 1, 
6; 2 Co. vii. 14; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [some bring this under IT. 
below; see paprupéw]; ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος, Acts 
xxv. 10. 6. ἐπὶ τοῦ (Rec. τῆς) βάτου at the bush, i.e. at 
the place in the sacred volume where the bush is spoken 
of, Mk. xii. 26 (see ev, I. 1 d.). II. of Time when; 
with gen. of a pers. in the time or age of a man, [“in the 
days of” |; at the time when an office was held by one; 
under the administration of, (cf. W. 375 (352); B. 336 
(289)]: Mk. ii. 26; Lk. iii. 2; iv. 27; Acts xi. 28; (1 
Mace. xiii. 42; xiv. 27, [for other exx. in which this 
phrase is equiv. to “in or of the reign ete. of,” and is 
preceded by a specification of the year etc., see B. D. 
Am. ed. p. 651 note’]; 2 Mace. viii. 19; xv. 22; for 
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i. 2 p. 1035, 
[less fully in L. and S.s.v. Α. 11.7). with the gen. of a 
thing, at the time of any occurrence: ἐπὶ τῆς μετοικεσίας 
Βαβυλῶνος, at the time of the deportation to Babylon, 


Mt. i. 11; [on LK. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH see δυσμή]:; of 


the time when any occupation is (or was) carried on: ἐπὶ 
τῶν προσευχῶν pov, Lat. in precibus meis, at my prayers, 
when I am praying, Ro. i. 10 (9); Eph. i. 16; 1 Th. i. 
2; Philem. 4. of time itself, ἐπ᾽ ἐσχάτων and (ace. to 


another reading) ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν (lit. at the end of 


the days): 2 Pet. iii. 3; Heb. i. 2 (1), (for the Hebr. 
DDT WINNS, Gen. xlix.1; Num. xxiv. 14; Jer. xxxvii. 
(xxx.) 24; Mic.iv. 1; Dan. x. 14); ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου, 


Jude 18 LT TrWH; [τῶν χρόνων, 1 Pet.i.20 LT ΤΥ ΗΠ. 


23 


2 ἐπὶ 


B. with the Dative, used of Place [W. 392 (366) 
sq-; B. 336 (289) sq.]; and 1. properly; a. of the 
place where or in which (Lat. in with the abl. 
Germ. auf with the dat.) [Eng. on, ete.], where contin- 
uance, position, situation, ete., are spoken of : ἐφ᾽ 6 (L 
txt. T Tr WH ὅπου) κατέκειτο, Mk. ii. 4; λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ 
[-θον T Tr WH), Mk. xiii. 2; ἐπὶ πίνακι, Mt. xiv. 8, 11; 
Mk. vi. 25; ἐπὶ τοῖς κραββάτοις, Mk. vi. 55; ἀνακλῖναι 
πάντας ἐπὶ τῷ χόρτῳ, Mk. vi. 39; ἐπέκειτο ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ. lay 
upon it, Jn. xi. 38; ἐφ᾽ ἵπποις, Rev. xix. 14. Ὅ. of the 
place in which (Lat. in with the abl., Germ. au/ 
with the ace.), after verbs expressing motion towards 
a place, to denote a remaining in the place after the 
motion, [ Eng. upon, at, ete.]: βάλλειν λίθον eri tem, dat. of 
pers., Jn. viii. 7 Ree. ; οἰκοδομεῖν, Mt. xvi. 18 ; ἐποικοδομεῖν, 
Eph. ii. 20; ἐπιβάλλειν, Mt. ix. 16 (Lk. v. 36 ἐπιβάλλειν 
ἐπί τι) ; ἐπιρράπτειν, Mk. ii. 21 (where L T Tr WH have 
ἐπί with acc.); ἐπιπίπτειν, Acts viii. 16. c. of the 
place above which (Lat. super, Germ. iiber, [Eng. 
over]): ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, over his head, Lk. xxiii. 38 (for which 
Mt. xxvii. 37 ἐπάνω τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ). ἅ. of the 
place at, or by, or near which: ἐπὶ θύραις and ἐπὶ τῇ 
θύρᾳ, Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Acts v. 9. (and often 
in Grk. writ.; ef. Passow s. v. p. 1037"; [L. and S. s. v. 
B. I. 1a.; οἵ. A. I. 2 a. above]); ἐπὶ τῇ προβατικῇ, In. 
v. 2; ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ, Rev. ix. 14; ἐπὶ τῇ στυᾷ, Acts iii. 
11; em [LT Tr WU παρ᾽] αὐτοῖς ἐπιμεῖναι, Acts xxviii. 
14. 2. Metaph.; a. of that upon which any action, 
effect, condition, rests as a basis or support; prop. 
upon the ground of; and a. of that upon which any- 
thing is sustained or upheld: ζῆν ἐπί τινι, to sus- 
tain life on (by) a thing, Mt. iv. 4 (where L Tr, the sec- 
ond time, ἐν; [οἵ. W. 389 (364) note]); Lk. iv. 4, (Deut. 
viii. 3 for Sp mn; Plat. Alcib. 1 p. 105 ¢.; Plut. de 
cup. divit. 7 p. 526d.; Aleiphr. epp. 3, 7, ete.) ; συνιέναι 
ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις, to understand by reasoning built upon 
the loaves, Mk. vi. 52 [ef. W. 392 (367) ; B. 337 (290) ]. 
β. of that upon which anything rests (our upon): 
em ἐλπίδι [see in ἐλπίς, 2], supported by hope, in hope, 
(ef. W. § 51, 2f.], Acts ii. 26; Ro. iv. 18; 1 Co. ix. 10, 
{differently in e. below]; to do any thing ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί 
twos, relying upon the namei. e. the authority of any 
one [cf. W. 393 (867)]: ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί pov, 
appropriating to themselves the name of Messiah, which 
belongs to me, Mt. xxiv. 5; Mk. xiii. 6; Lk. xxi. 8, (in 
which pass. λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ Χριστός is added by 
way of explanation) ; βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπὶ [L Tr WH ἐν] τῷ 
ov. Χριστοῦ, 80 as to repose your hope and confidence in his 
Messianic authority, Acts ii. 38; δέχεσθαί τινα ἐπὶ τῷ ov. 
μου, to receive one because he bears my name, is devoted 
to my authority and instruction, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; 
Lk. ix. 48. to do anything upon the name of Christ, his 
name being introduced, appeal being made to his authority 
and command: as κηρύσσειν, διδάσκειν, ete., Lk. xxiv. 47 ; 
Acts iv. 17, 18; ν. 28,40; δύναμιν ποιεῖν, δαιμόνια ἐκβάλ.: 
Aew, using his name as a formula of exorcism, [οἵ. W. 
393 (367)], Mk. ix. 39; Lk.ix.49 [WH Trmrg. ἐν]. y. 
of that unon which as a foundation any super- 


επι 


structure is reared: νομοθετεῖσθαι, Heb. vii. 11 (ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτῇ, for which L T Tr WH have ἐπ᾿ αὐτῆς); viii. 6 ; after 
verbs of trusting, believing, hoping, ete.: 
σθαι eri τινι, 3 In. 10; παρρησιάζεσθαι, Acts xiv. 3; πεποι- 
θέναι, Mt. xxvii. 43 L txt. WH mrg.; Lk. xi. 22; xviii. 
9; Mk. x. 24 [T WHom. Trmre. br. the cl.]; 2 Co. 1. 
9; Heb. ii. 13; πιστεύειν, Lk. xxiv. 25; Ro. ix. 33; x.11, 
etc.; ἐλπίζειν (see ἐλπίζω), [cf. C.I.2¢.a. below]. δ. of 
the reason or motive underlying words and deeds, 
so that ἐπί is equiv. to for, on account of, [W.394 (368); 
B. 337 (290)]: Mt. xix. 9 RG T Tr WH txt.; Lk. v. 5 
(ἐπὶ τῷ ῥήματί σου, at thy word, Germ. auf; [ef. W. 8.48, 
ο. d.; in reliance on]); Acts iii. 16 [WH om.]; iv. 9; 
xi. 19 [L Tr mrg. have the gen.]; xxi. 24; 1 Co. viii. 11 
(dro\AvoSat ἐπί τινι, Germ. zu Grunde gehen iiber ete. 
[cf. W. 394 (368) note, but L T Tr WH read év]) ; Phil. 
ili. 2; after αἰνεῖν, Lk. ἢ. 20; δοξάζειν, Actsiv. 21; 2Co. 
ix. 13 [ef. W. 381 (357) ]; μαρτυρεῖν, Heb. xi. 4; εὐχαρι- 
στεῖν ete. to give thanks for,1 Co.i.4; 2 Co. ix.15; Phil. 
1.5; 1 Th.iii.9. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ (equiv. to ἐπὶ τούτῳ, ὅτι for that, 
on the ground of this, that) because that, because, Ro. v. 
12 (on the various interpp. of this pass. see Dietzsch, 
Adam und Christus. Bonn 1871, p. 50 sqq.) ; 2 Co. v. 4 
[Rec* ἐπειδή; Phil. iii. 12, (ἐφ᾽ ᾧ--ὁ σατανᾶς ---οὐκἴσχυσε 
θανατῶσαι αὐτούς. Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 29 p. 138 ed. Otto ; 
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ Γεννάδιον ἔγραψεν, for the reason that he had ac- 
eused Gennadius, Synes. ep. 73; ef. Hermann ad Vig. 
p- 710; the better Greeks commonly used ἐφ᾽ ois in the 
same sense, cf. W. 394 (368) ; [Fritzsche or Mey. on Ro. 
l. c.; Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.]). Used esp. after verbs sig- 
nifying a mental affection or emotion, where we 
also often say over (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i. 
2, p. 1039; Kriiger § 68, 41, 6; [cf. W.393 (368) c.]): 
as ἀγαλλιᾶν, Lk. i. 47; χαίρειν. Mt. xviii. 13; Lk. i. 14; 
xiii. 17; Ro. xvi. 19, ete.; χαρὰ ἔσται, Lk. xv. 7; χαρὰν 
(Ree. χάριν) ἔχω, Philem. 7; παρακαλεῖν, παρακαλεῖσθαι, 
2 Co. i. 4; νὴῖ. 19: 1 Th. iii. 7; κλαίειν, Lk. xix. 41 RG; 
κοπετὸν ποιεῖν, Acts Vill. 2; κόπτεσθαι. Rev. xviii. 9 [T Tr 
WH txt. the acc.]; ὀδυνᾶσθαι, Acts xx. 38; ddodvCeww, 
Jas. v. 1; orvyvagew, Mk. x. 22; συλλυπεῖσθαι. Mk. iii. 
5; μετανοεῖν ἐπί, to grieve over, repent of, 2 Co. xii. 21; 
σπλαγχνίζεσθαι, Mt. xiv. 14 GLT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 34 
RG; Lk. vii. 13 [Tdf. the ace.]; μακροθυμεῖν, Mt. xviii. 
26 [Tr the acc.], 29 [L Tr the ace.]; Lk. xviii. 7 [see 
μακροθυμέω, 2]; Jas. v.7; ὀργίζεσθαι, Rey. xii. 17 [Lchm. 
om. ἐπί]; ἐκπλήσσεσθαι, Mt. vii. 28; Mk.i. 22; Lk. iv. 32; 
Acts xiii. 12; διαταράσσεσθαι, Lk. i. 29; ἐξίστασθαι, Lk. ii. 
47; θαμβεῖσθαι, Mk. x. 24; θάμβος, Lk. v.9; Acts iii. 10; 
θαυμάζειν, Mk. xii. 17; Lk. ii. 33 ; iv. 22; ix. 43; xx. 26; 
Acts iii. 12 ; καυχᾶσθαι. Ro. v. 2; ἐπαισχύνεσθαι, Ro. vi. 21; 
παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν twa ἐπί τινι, Ro. x. 19. ε. of 
the rule, orcondition [W. 394 (368) d.]: ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι, a 
hope being held out or given, Ro. viii. 20; Tit. i. 2, (differ- 
ently in β. above) ; ἐπὶ δυσὶν . . . μάρτυσιν, on condition 
that two witnesses testify to the matter in question, [at 
(the mouth of) two etc.; cf. W. 392 (367)], Heb. x. 28; 
ἐπὶ νεκροῖς, equiv. to ὄντων νεκρῶν (in the case of the dead), 
if any one has died, Heb. ix. 17. ἵ. of the purpose 


ἀρκεῖ- 


ae 
επι 


and end [unto, for; W. 394 (368) e.]: ἐπ᾽ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ, 
to worship and profess his name, Acts xv. 14 Rec. ; καλεῖν 
τινα ἐπί τινι, Lat. ad aliquid, Gal. v.13; 1 Th. iv. 7, (ἐπὶ 
ξενίᾳ, Xen. an. 7, 6,3; cf. W. u. ss); κτισθέντες ἐπὶ ἔργοις 
ἀγαθοῖς, Eph. ii. 10; φρονεῖν ἐπί τινι to take thought for 
a thing, Phil. iv. 10; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ (bya later Grk. impropriety 
for ἐπὶ τίνι, cf. W. § 24,4; [B. § 139, 59; but on the ex- 
treme doubtfulness of this alleged use of ὅς in direct 
questions, see Pres. T. D. Woolsey in the Bibliotheca 
Sacra for Apr. 1874, p.314 sqq.]) πάρει; for what pur- 
pose art thou.come? WVulg. ad quid [8]. quod] venisti? 
Mt. xxvi. 50 R [but GL T Tr WH ἐφ᾽ ὅδ, see C. 1. 2¢.y. 
aa. below] (Theoph. ἐπὶ ποίῳ σκοπῷ; εἴ. Hdt. 7, 146 
πυθόμενος, ἐπ᾽ οἷσι ἦλθον ; [but the view of many ancient 
expositors which explains the passage by an aposiopesis : 
“that for which thou hast come—do” is thoroughly es- 
tablished by Dr. Woolsey u.s.]). of the issue or unde- 
signed result: λογομαχεῖν ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόν- 
των, 2 Tim. ii. 14; (τοῖς ἐπὶ ὠφελείᾳ πεποιημένοις ἐπὶ βλάβῃ 
χρῆσθαι, Xen. mem. 2, 3,19). 4. of the pattern or 
standard [A. V. after; W. 394 (368) f.]: καλεῖν twa 
ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί τινος, to call one after the name of another, 
Lk. i. 59 (Neh. vii. 63 [W. 410 (382)]); ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματί 
twos after the likeness of a thing, Ro. v.14. Ὁ. of that 
over which one is placed, for its care or adminis- 
tration: ἐπὶ τοῖς ὑπάρχουσί twa καθιστάναι, Lk. xii. 44 
(cf. A. I. 1 d. above, [also C. I. 2 e. below]; Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 474 sq.; Bnhdy. p. 249; [W. 393 (367) a.]). 
c. used of a hostile aim, against (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down, see Passow i. 2 Ὁ. 1036*; [ef. L. and 8. 5. v. 
B. 1.1 ¢.; W. 392 (367); B. 337 (290)]): Lk. xii.52sq.; 
θλίψις γενομένη ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ [-vov, L Tr mrg.], Acts xi. 19 
[A.V.about]. ἃἅ. of that to which anything is added 
(so that it is, as it were, upon it) ; in addition to; over and 
above, [W. 393 (367 sq.) b.]: 2 Co. vii. 13 (LT Tr WH 
ἐπὶ δὲ τῇ παρακλήσει ὑμῶν [but L T Tr WH ἡμῶν] περισ- 
σοτέρως κτλ. but in addition to the comfort given (us) by 
you, we rejoiced the more exceedingly ete. [A. V. in ete. 
(of condition) ]); κερδαίνειν τι ἐπί τινι, Mt. xxv. 20, 22 
RG; ἔχειν λύπην ἐπὶ λύπῃ, Phil. ii. 27 Ree. (Eur. Iph. T. 
197 φόνος ἐπὶ φόνῳ, Troad. 596 ἐπὶ δ᾽ ἄλγεσιν ἄλγεα. Soph. 
O. C. 544 ἐπὶ νόσῳ νόσον; [ef. Mey. on Phil. l.c.; but 
GLTTr WH give the ace., see Ὁ. I. 2 ce. below]) ; προσ- 
τιθέναι ἐπί, Lk. iii. 20; ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοις. besides all this, 
Lk. xvi. 26 [L mrg. T Tr mrg. WH ἐν; see ἐν, I. 5 e. 
p- 211°]; Eph. vi. 16 [L txt. T Tr WH ἐν (and there is 
no τούτοις) ; see ev, τι. 5.7; Col. iii. 14, (Sir. xxxvii. 15; 1 
Mace. x. 42; [classic exx. in Wetst. on Lk. 1. ¢.]); add also 
Heb. viii. 1 [see Liinem. ad loc.]; ix. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 16. 
e. of that which is connected as an adjunct (esp. of 
time) with the principal matter under consideration, (in 
Germ. generally bei, i. 6. at, on, etc.) [W. 392 (367)]: 
εὐχαριστῶ τῷ θεῷ μου ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν. at every men- 
tion of you, as often as I call you to mind, Phil. i. 3 [but 
see Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft. ad l.,and 5. v. πᾶς, 1. 2]; σπέν- 
δομαι ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ, while engaged in (busied over) the 
sacrifice, Phil. ii. 17; ἐπὶ συντελείᾳ τῶν αἰώνων, Heb. ix. 
26; ἐπὶ τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ, ib. 15; σπείρειν and θερίζειν 


ἐπί 


ἐπ᾽ εὐλογίαις, so that blessings attend, i. 6. bountifully, 
freely, 2 Co. ix. 6; ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ, 1 Th. iii. 7; ἐπὶ τῷ 
παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν while your anger lasts, Eph. iv. 26; ἐπὶ 
τούτῳ meanwhile, i.e. while this was going on [(?), upon 
this], Jn.iv.27. Ἐν of the object of anaction,and a. 
where the Germ. uses an, [ Eng. on (nearly i. q. to) ]: πράσ- 
σειν τι ἐπί τινι, Acts v. 35 (like δρᾶν τι ἐπί τινι, Hdt. 3, 14; 
Ael. n.an. 11, 11); ef. Bnhdy. p. 250 bot.; [but see B. 
337 (290)]; ὃ γέγονεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ, Mk. ν. 33 [Τ Tr WH om. 
Lbr. ἐπί] ; ἀναπληροῦσθαι, Mt. xiii. 14 Rec. β. where 
the Germ. says iiber, [Eng. upon, of, concerning], after 
verbs of writing, speaking, thinking: γεγραμμένα 
ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, Jn. xii. 16 (Πα. 1, 66); προφητεύειν, Rev. x. 11; 
μαρτυρεῖν, xxii. 16 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. [see μαρτυρέω, 
a.|, (δόξα ἐπὶ τῇ εὐσεβείᾳ, an opinion about, on, piety, 4 
Mace. v. 17 (18)). 

C. with the Accusative [W. § 49,1.; B. 337 (290) 
56.7; I. of Place; 1. properly; a. of the place 
above, over, which, our up on, on to: after verbs 
signifying motion and continuance, ἐλθεῖν, περιπα- 
rew ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα, Mt. xiv. 28 sq.; ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, ib. 
25 LT Tr WH, 26 R G, (πλεῖν ἐπὶ πόντον, Hom. Od. 1, 
183); ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Mt. xv. 85; ἐπὶ τὸ στῆθός 
τινος, Jn. χχὶ. 20; ἀνακλιθῆναι ἐπὶ τοὺς χόρτους, Mt. xiv. 
19 RG; κατοικεῖν ἐπὶ πᾶν τὸ πρόσωπον (1, Τ' Tr WH παν- 
τὸς προσώπου [οἷ. πᾶς, I. 1 6.7) τῆς γῆς, Acts xvii. 26; 
καθῆσθαι, Lk. xxi. 35; ἦλθε λιμὸς ἐφ᾽ ὅλην τὴν γῆν, Acts 
vil. 11; σκότος ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, Mt. xxvii. 45. 
over i.e. along: εἱστήκει ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλόν, Mt. xiii. 2 [W. 
408 (380); differently in ἃ. below]. b. of motion to 
a place whose surface is occupied or touched (Germ. 
auf with the ace.), upon, unto, ete.; after verbs of going, 
coming, ascending, descending, falling, ete.: 
πορεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν ὁδόν, Acts viii. 26; ix. 11; ἐπὶ τὰς 
διεξόδους, Mt. xxii. 9; προέρχεσθαι, Acts xx. 13 [here Tr 
WH mre. προσέρχ.]; φεύγειν, Mt. xxiv. 16 (where L Tr 
WH txt. eis); ἐξέρχεσθαι, Lk. viii. 27; ἐξιέναι, Acts xxvii. 
48 ἐπιβαίνειν, Mt. xxi. 5; ἀναβαίνειν, Lk. v.19; xix. 4; 
Acts x. 9; Rev. xx. 9; καταβαίνειν, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. 
WH reject the pass.]; Rev. xvi. 21; ἀπέρχεσθαι, Lk. 
xxiii. 33 [L Tr WH ἔρχεσθαι] ; πίπτειν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας, 
Acts x. 253 ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, to fall upon the face, Mt. xvii. 
6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v.12; xvii. 16; 1Co. xiv. 25; Rev. vii. 11. 
After verbs of placing, leading, bringing, build- 
ing, laying, throwing, ete.: τιθέναι, Mt. v. 15; Lk. 
xi. 33 ; ἐπιτιθέναι, Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk.xv.5; Actsxv. 10, ete.; 
τιθέναι τὰ γόνατα ἐπί, Acts xxi. 5; οἰκοδομεῖν, Mt. vii. 24, 
26; Lk. vi. 49; Ro. xv. 20; ἐποικοδομεῖν, 1 Co. iii. 12; 
θεμελιοῦν, Lk. vi. 48; βάλλειν, Jn. viii. 59; Rev. ii. 24; 
xiv. 16; xviii. 19 ; ἐπιβάλλειν, Lk. v. 86 (ἐπιβ. ἐπί τινι, Mt. 
ix. 16); ἐπιβάλλειν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπί τινα, Mt. xxvi. 50, ete. 
(see em Baddow, 1 a.); ἐπιρρίπτειν, Lk. xix. 35 and tropi- 
cally 1 Pet. v. 7; pamigew, Mt. v. 39 [LT Tr txt. WH 
eis]; τύπτειν, Lk. vi. 29 [Tdf. ets]; ἀναβιβάζειν, Mt. xiii. 
48 [not Lehm. txt.]; ἐπιβιβάζειν, Lk. x. 34; κατάγειν, Lk. 
v. 11; σωρεύειν, Ro. xii. 20; διδόναι, Lk. vii. 44; xix. 23; 
Rey. viii. 3; ἀναφέρειν, 1 Pet. ii. 24; κρεμᾶν, Mt. xviii. 6 
LT Tr WH περί]; γράφειν, Rev. ii. 17; iii. 12; xix. 16; 


234 


ΕΓ 
ἐπι 


ἐπιγράφειν, Heb. viii. 10. After verbs which include an- 
other verb signifying motion, or transfer, or entrance 
into, (where Germ. uses auf or iiber; our on, to, ete.) : 
ἀνατέλλειν, Mt. v. 45; βρέχειν, ibid.; πνέειν, Rev. vii. 1 
(here we see the difference betw. ἐπί with the gen. to 
blow over a thing, Germ. iiber, and ἐπί with the ace. to 
blow on a thing, to come blowing upon it, Germ. einen 
anwehen, wehend auf einen kommen); [apparently nearly 
the same view of the distinction betw. the eases is taken 
by Thiersch § 274, 6; Hermann on Eur. Alcest. 845. 
But Kriiger (δ 68, 40, 3), Kithner (ii. ἃ 438, I. 1 b.), al., 
regard ἐς with the acc. as denoting merely movement 
towards a place, while é. with the gen. involves the idea 
of actual or intended arrival; ef. L. and S.s.v. A. I. 1. 
Still others hold the two expressions to be substantially 
synonymous: e.g. Bitm. Gram. § 147 (p. 417 Ene. 
trans.); Matthiae § 584; Passow p. 1034°;— esp. in 
the N. T., see W. 409 sq. (382); 408 (381) note; B. 338 
(291). On the variations of case with this prep. in the 
Rey. οἵ. Alford on iv. 2]; διασωθῆναι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Acts 
xxvii. 44. ὁ. It is used of persons over whom anything 
is done, that thereby some benefit may accrue to them, 
(Germ. iiber with the dat.) [W. 408 (381) note]: ὀνομά- 
ζειν τὸ ὄνομα ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐπί τινα, to name the name of Jesus 
(as a spell, a magic formula) over one, se. that help 
may come to him from that name, Acts xix. 13; προσ- 
εύχεσθαι ἐπί twa, Jas. v. 14. d. As εἰς (q. ν. C. 2 p. 
1805), so ἐπί also stands after verbs of rest and con- 
tinuance [B. 337 (290) sq.; W. § 49,1. 1]: καθεύδειν 
ἐπί τι, Mk. iv. 38; στῆναι, Rev. xi. 11; σταθῆναι ἐπί τι, 
Rev. xii. 18 (xiii. 1); ἑστηκέναι, Jn. xxi. 4 (ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλόν 
LT Tr mrg. WH mrg.; otherwise where many are 
spoken of; see a. fin. above); Rev. xiv. 1; καθῆσθαι, 
Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2 [Ree. dat.]; xi. 16; xiv. 
14,16 [L T Tr WH txt. gen.]; xvii. 3; xix. 113 κεκα- 
θικέναι, καθίσαι, Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix. 30; Jn. xii. 14; 
Rev. xx. 4; καθίσεσθαι, Mt. xix. 28; σκηνοῦν, Rev. vii. 
15; κεῖσθαι, 2 Co. 111. 153 κατακεῖσθαι, Lk. v. 25 T Tr 
WH); εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, to be together, assembled, in 
the same place: Lk. xvii. 35; Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44,— 
to come together, of sexual intercourse, 1 Co. vii. 5 GL 
T Tr WH; συνελθεῖν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό have convened, come 
together, to the same place, 1 Co. xiv. 23 [L txt. ἐλθεῖν] ; 
simply ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 56. ὄντες, together, Acts iii. 1 [but LT 
Tr WH (so R. V.) connect ἐπὶ r. a. here with ii. 47]; 2S. 
ii. 13 [ef. B. 338 (291)]. 6. used of motion or arrival 
into the vicinity of a place (not to the place itself) ; 
near; to,as faras; (Germ.an, bei, zu, hin... 2): ἐπὶ τὸ 
μνημεῖον [or μνῆμα], Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 12 [L Tr br. T 
om. WH reject the vs. ], 22, 24; ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς, Acts 
xxi. 35; ἔρχεσθαι ἐπί τι ὕδωρ, Acts vill. 36; ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην, 
Acts xii. 10; ἐπιστῆναι ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα, Acts χ. 17; κατα- 
βαίνειν ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, Jn. vi. 16, ete., ete.; with the ace. 
of a pers. to, near to one: Jn. xix. 33; Acts xxv. 12; 2 Th. 
ii.1; Rey. xvi. 14; esp. to judges, kings, etc., i. q. to their 
tribunal: Mt. x.18; Lk. xii. 58; xxi.12; xxiii. 1; Acts 
ix. 21; xvi. 19. alsoin pregn. constr. after verbs of sit- 
ting, standing, ete.: καθῆσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον, Mt. ix. 


ἐπί 235 : 


9; Mk. ii. 14; ἑστηκέναι ἐπί, Rev. iii. 20; xv. 2; ἐπιστῆναι 
ἐπί, Acts x. 17; xi. 11; ἐπὶ τὴν δεξιάν on the right hand, 
Rey.v.1. f. of mere direction towardsa terminus 
(so that the terminus itself is not reached) : πορεύεσθαι ἐπὶ 
τὸ ἀπολωλός, to recover it (where we say afler), Lk. xv. 
4; ἐκτείνειν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπί, against one, to take him, Lk. 
xxii. 533; towards one, in pointing him out, Mt. xii. 49; 
ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐπὶ λῃστήν, to take a robber, Mt. xxvi. 55; 
Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52, cf. Lk. xiv. 31. 2. It is 
used metaphorically, a. with the ace. of a pers. after 
verbs of coming, falling, bringing, ete. a. of 
evils befalling (falling ‘upon’) one, and of pertur- 
bations coming upon the mind: τὸ αἷμά twos (the 
penalty for slaying him) ἥκει or ἔρχεται eri teva, Mt. xxiii. 
35 sq.; xxvii. 25; ἐπάγειν τὸ αἷμά twos ἐπί τινα, Acts Vv. 
28; ἔρχεσθαι and ἥκειν ἐπί τινα, of other evils, Jn. xviii. 
4; Eph. v. 6; Rev. iii. 3; after γίνεσθαι, Lk. i. 65; iv. 
36; Acts v.5; ἐπέρχεσθαι [ἐπεισέρχ. LT Tr WH], Lk. 
xxi. 85; ἐπιπίπτειν, Lk.i.12; Acts xiii. 11[L T Tr WH 
πίπτειν); xix.17[L Traimrew]; Ro. xv. 3 (fr. Ps. lxviii. 
(Ilxix.) 10); Rev. xi. 11 [Ree. πίπτειν] ; ἐπιστῆναι, Lk. 
xxi. 34. B. of blessings coming upon one: after ἔρχεσθαι, 
Mt. x. 13; ἐπιπίπτειν, of a trance, Acts x.10 [LT Tr 
WH γίνεσθαι] ; ἐπισκηνοῦν, 2 Co. xii. 9; ἔφθασεν and 
ἤγγικεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς (upon you se. fr. heaven, [cf. W. 407 
(380) note]) ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. x. 9; 
the Holy Spirit is said at one time ἐπί τινα 
ἐκχεῖσθαι, Acts ii. 17 sq.; x. 45; Tit. iii. 6; at another, 
ἀποστέλλεσθαι [or ἐξαποστέλ. T Tr WH], Lk. xxiv. 49; 
again, ἐπέρχεσθαι, Acts i. 8; once more, καταβαίνειν, Mk. 
i. 10 [Ltxt.T Tr WHeis]; Lk. iii. 22; Jn.i.33; ἔπεσεν 
6 κλῆρος ἐπί τινα, Acts i. 26; after words of rest and 
continuance : χάρις ἦν ἐπί twa, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33; 
éravaravec Oa, Lk.x.6; the Holy Spirit is said at one 
time ἐπί τινα μένειν, descending upon one to remain on 
him, Jn. i. 32 sq. [B. 338 (291) ]; and again ἀναπαύεσθαι, 
1 Pet. iv. 14. Ῥ. of one upon whom anything is im- 
posed, as a burden, office, duty, ete.: τὴν μέριμναν ἐπιρ- 
ρίπτειν ἐπὶ θεόν, 1 Pet. v. 7; συντελεῖν διαθήκην ἐπί twa, to 
put a covenant upon one, to be kept by him, Heb. viii. 8, 
(in Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 6 79 Oy 13 ΓΞ isto make a 
covenant against one). Ο. of that to which anything is 
added, [Eng. upon (nearly i. q. after) ]: λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, 
Phil. ii. 27 GL T Tr WH (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 27; Ezek. 
vii. 26; [esp. Is. xxviii. 10, 13; cf. Lat. super in Liv. 1, 
50; 22, 54 ete.]; see above, B. 2d.); [so some take 
οἶκος ἐπ᾽ οἶκον, Lk. xi. 17, B. 338 (291) ; see οἶκος, 2]; ἐπι- 
καλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί τινα (see ἐπικαλέω, 2 [and B. 338 (291) ]), 
to call (put) a name upon one, Acts xv. 17; Jas. ii. 7. 
ἃ. of the number or degree reached; Lat. usque ad 
[W. 8. 49,1. 8 ἃ.1: ἐπὶ σταδίους δώδεκα, Rev. xxi. 16 [Ἐπ᾿ 
T Tr WH txt. gen.] (Xen. mem. 1, 4, 17; an. 1,7, 15; 
Polyb. 3, 54,7; Song of the Three 23); ἐπὶ τρίς, Vulg. 
per ter, for three times, thrice: Acts x. 163; xi. 10 (so εἰς 
tpis, Hdt. 1, 86; Xen. an. 6, 4, 16. 19; Cyr. 7, 1, 4 ete. 
[ef. W. 422 (394)]); ἐπὶ πλεῖον more widely, to a greater 
degree, further, the more, [differently below, II. 1]: Acts 
iv. 17; [xx.9 WH mrg.]; 2 Tim. ii. 16; iii. 9; ἐφ᾽ 


xi. 20. 


ἐπὶ 


ὅσον, forasmuch as, inasmuch as, [differently II. 1 be- 
low]: Mt. xxv. 40,45; Ro. xi. 13. 6. of care, pow- 
er, control over anything, (Germ. tier with the acc.) 
[W. § 49,1. 3 b.], (ef. above, A. I. 1d. and B. 2 b.): Ba- 
σιλεύειν ἐπί twa (Hebr. Sy Swi), Lk.i.33; xix. 14, 27; 
Ro. v. 14; ἡγούμενον em Αἴγυπτον, Acts vii. 10; καθίστημι, 
Heb. ii. 7 R [ dr. Ps. viii. a); LTr WH rails ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον 
αὐτοῦ sc. ἐστί, Heb. iii. 6 ; ἱερέα μέγαν ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ 
se. καθεστηκότα, Heb. x. 21 ; καθιστάναι δικαστὴν ἐπί, Lk. 
xii. 14 (ἄρχοντα, Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 fin.) ; ἐξουσία, Lk. x. 19 ; 
Rey. vi. 8; xvi. 9; xxii. 14; φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, Lk. ii. 8 ; 
of usurped dignity : ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐπὶ πάντα λεγόμενον θεόν, 
2 Th. ii. 4 ef. Dan. xi. 36 sq. [4]. refer the use in Th. |. e. to 
g. y-88-below]. Akin to this is the expression πιστὸς ἐπί 
τι (because fidelity is as it were spread over the things 
intrusted toits care), Mt.xxv. 21. f. of the end which 
the mind reaches or to which it is led; Lat. ad, to, 
unto: ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐπί τινα, esp. to God, 
Lk.i.17; Actsix. 35; xi. 21; xiv. 15; xxvi. 20; Gal. iv. 
9; 1 Pet.ii.25. 6. of direction towards a person 
or athing; a. after verbs of trusting and hoping, 
(Germ. auf, upon; see above, Β. 2 a. y.): after ἐλπίζειν, 
1 Pet. i. 13; iii. 5 RG; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and often in Sept.) ; 
πιστεύειν, Acts ix.42; xi. 17; xvi.31; xxii. 19; Ro. iv. 
24; πίστις, Heb. vi.1; πεποιθέναι, Mt. xxvii. 43 (where 
L txt. WH mrg. ἐπί with dat.). β. of the feelings, 
affections, emotions, Germ. iiber, over: κόπτομαι, 
Rey. i. 7; xviii. 9 [RG L WH org. w. dat.]; κλαίω, Lk. 
xxiii. 28; Rey. xviii. 9; εὐφραίνεσθαι, Rev. xviii. 20 [ἃ L 
T Tr WH w. dat.]. unto, towards, Lat. erga: σπλαγχνί- 
Copa, Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2; ix. 22; [μακροθυμέω, Mt. 
xviii. 26 Tr, 29 L Tr]; χρηστός, Lk. vi. 35; χρηστότης, Ro. 
xi. 22; Eph.ii.7.  y. of the direction of the will and 
action; aa. of purposeand end [W. § 49, 1. 3d.]: ἐπὶ 
τὸ βάπτισμα αὐτοῦ, to receive his baptism, Mt. iii. 7; ἐπὶ 
θεωρίαν ταύτην, Lk. xxiii. 48 ; ἐφ᾽ ὃ πάρει, Mt. xxvi. 50 GL 
T Tr WH (see above, B. 2 a. ¢.); where aim and result 
coalesce: ἐπὶ τὸ συμφέρον, Heb. xii. 10. BB. of things 
done with hostility; against: after ἀποτομία, Ro. xi. 
22; ἀναστῆναι, Mk. iii. 26; ἐγείρεσθαι, Mt. xxiv. 7; Mk. 
xiii. 8; Lk. xxi. 10; ἐπεγείρειν διωγμόν, Acts xiii. 50; μερι- 
σθῆναι, Mt. xii. 26; Mk. iii. 24 sq.; ἐπαίρειν τι ἐπί, Jn. 
xiii. 18; μάρτυρ, 2 Co. i. 23; μαρτύριον, Lk. ix. 5; ἀσχη- 
poveiv, 1 Co. vii. 36 (εἴς τινα, Dion. Hal. 2, 26); μοιχᾶσθαι, 
Mk. x. 11; τολμᾶν, 2 Co. x. 2; βρύχειν ὀδόντας, Acts vii. 
54. yy. of that to which one refers in writing or 
speaking [cf. W. § 49,1. 3 d.]: after λέγειν. Heb. vii. 
13; ὁ οὖν μακαρισμὸς - . . ἀκροβυστίαν, sc. λέγεται [ W. 
587 (546), ef. B. 394 (338)], Ro. iv. 9; προφητεία, 1 Tim. 
i. 18; on Mk. ix. 12 sq. see γράφω, 2c. δδ. uponi. 6. 
in reference to; for: after βάλλειν κλῆρον, MK. xv. 24; 
Jn. xix. 24; ef. Fritzsche on Mark p. 686 [who com- 
pares Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19, and remarks that an Attic 
writ. would have said ἐπί reve]. II. of Time [W. 
§49,1.2]; 1. of time during or for [‘for the space of”] 
which (Germ. auf, wihrend): ἐπὶ ἔτη τρία, Lk. iv. 25 
[R GT WH mrg.]; ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους, Acts xiii. 31; add 
also xvi. 18; xvii. 2; xviii. 20; xix. 10; Heb. xi. 30, ete., 


and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; οἵ. Passow s. v. 
p- 1044, [L. and S. s. v. C. IL]; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον χρόνον for so 
long time as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 89; Gal. iv. 1; and 
simply ἐφ᾽ ὅσον as long as [differently in I. 2 ἃ. above], 
Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet.i.13; ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν long enough, for a con- 
siderable time, Acts xx. 11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον somewhat long, 
too long [differently in I. 3 ἃ. above]: Acts xx. 9 [not 
WII mrg., see u. 5.7; xxiv. 4. 2. about, towards, 
(Germ. gegen): ἐπὶ τὴν αὔριον on the morrow, Lk. x. 35; 
Acts iv. 5; ἐπὶ τὴν ὥραν τῆς προσευχῆς: Acts iii. 1; ἐπὶ 
τὸ πρωΐ, Mk. xv. 1 [R 6Τ; rarely so in Grk. writ., as 
Arr. exp. Al. 3, 18, 11 (7) ἐπὶ [al. ὑπὸ] τὴν ἕω. 

D. In Composition ἐπί denotes 1. continuance, 
rest, influence upon or over any person or thing: ἐπί- 
yetos, ἐπουράνιος, ἐπιδημέω, ἐπαναπαύομαι, etc. 2. mo- 
tion, approach, direction towards or to anything: ἐπα- 
κούω, ἐπιβοάω, ἐπιβλέπω, ἐπεκτείνω, etc. 3. imposi- 
tion: ἐπικαθίζω, ἐπιτίθημι, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιβαρέω, ἐπιγράφω, 
ἐπιρρίπτω. ἐπιτάσσω, ete. 4. accumulation, increase, 
addition: ἐπεισαγωγή, ἐπισυνάγω, ἐπισωρεύω, ἐπικαλέω 
(by acognomen), ete. 5. repetition: ἐπαιτέω, ἐπαναμι- 
μνήσκω, ete. 6. up, upward: ἐπαίρω, ἐπανάγω. ἐπαφρίζω, 
ete. 7. against: ἐπιβουλή, ἐπανίστημι, ἐπίορκος, ἐπι- 
ορκέω, ete. 8. superintendence: ἐπιστάτης. 

ἐπι-βαίνω ; 2 aor. ἐπέβην ; pf. ptep. ἐπιβεβηκώς: 1. 
to get upon, mount: ἐπί τι, Mt. xxi. 5 (Xen. 116]]. 3, 4,1, 
etc.; Gen. xxiv. 61); τῷ πλοίῳ [to embark in], Acts 
xxvil. 2 (Thue. 7, 70); εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, Acts xxi. 6 RG; 
used without a case, of going aboard (a ship), Acts xxi. 
2; lo go up: eis Ἱεροσόλ. Acts xxi. 4 L T Tr WH, [yet 
al. refer this to 2]. 2. to set foot in, enter: εἰς with 
the ace. of place, Acts xx. 18; with the dat. of place 
(as also in Grk. writ.), Acts xxv. 1.” 

ἐπι-βάλλω ; impf. ἐπέβαλλον ; fut. ἐπιβαλῶ; 2 aor. ἐπέ- 
βαλον, [8 pers. plur.-Aav, Acts xxi. 27 Τ Tr WH; Mk. xiv. 
46 T WH, (see ἀπέρχομαι, init.)]; 1. Transitively, a. 
to cast upon: τινὶ βρόχον, 1 Co. vii. 35 ; τινὶ τὰ ἱμάτια, Mk. 
xi. 7; [χοῦν ἐπὶ ras κεφ. Rev. xviii. 19 WH mre. ]; to lay 
upon, ἐπί τινα τὴν χεῖρα OY Tas χεῖρας, used of seizing one 
to lead him off as a prisoner: Mt. xxvi. 50; Mk. xiv.46 
RGL; Lk. xx. 19; xxi.12; Jn. vii. 30 [Τὸ mre. Bade], 
44 (L Tr WH the simple βάλλειν); Acts v. 18; xxi. 27, 
(for the Hebr. “2 5s Ὑ mow, Gen. xxii. 12); also τὰς 
χεῖράς τινι, Mk. xiv. 46 T Tr WH; Acts iv. 3, (Polyb. 3, 
2,8; 5,5; Leian. Tim. 4); ἐπιβάλλειν τὰς χεῖρας foll. by 
the inf. indicating the purpose, Acts xii. 1; τὴν χεῖρα 
ἐπ᾽ ἄροτρον, to put the hand to the plough (to begin 
work), Lk. ix. 62. b. to put (i.e. sew) on: ἐπίβλημα 
ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον, Lk. v. 36 37 ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ, Mt. ix. 16. 2. In- 
trans. (asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, [ef. W. 251 (236) ; 
J. 144 (126) sq.]) to throw one’s self upon, rush upon: 
εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, Of waves rushing intoa ship, Mk. iv. 87; to 
put one’s mind upon a thing, attend to, with the dat. of 
the thing: τούτῳ γὰρ ἐπιβάλλων for if you think thereon, 
Antonin. 10, 30; μηδενὶ yap ἐπιβάλλειν μηδετέραν (i. 6. 
τὴν αἴσθησιν καὶ τὴν νόησιν) χωρὶς τοῦ προσπίπτοντος εἰδώ- 
λου, Plut. plac. phil. 4, 8; absol. ἐπιβαλών, sc. τῷ ῥήματι 
τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, when he had considered the utterance of 


ἐπιβαίνω 2 


36 


ἐπίγειος 


Jesus, Mk. xiv. 72; ef. Kypke, [Wetst., McClellan] ad 
loc.; B. 145 (127); [and for the diff. interpp. see Mey. 
and esp. Morison ad loe. }. 3. Impersonally, ἐπιβάλλει 
μοι it belongs to me, falls to my share: τὸ ἐπιβάλλον (sc. 
pol) μέρος τῆς οὐσίας, Lk. xv. 12 (κτημάτων τὸ ἐπιβάλλον, 
Hat. 4, 115; τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτοῖς μέρος, Diod. 14, 17, and 
the like often in other writ. [see Meyer; σοὶ ἐπιβάλλει ἡ 
κληρονομία, Tob. vi. 12 (ef. 11. 17; 1 Mace. x. 30, ete.) ]).* 

ἐπι-βαρέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. ἐπιβαρῆσαι : to put a burden 
upon, to load, [ οἵ. ἐπί, 1). 3]; trop. to be burdensome ; so in 
the N. T.: τινά, 1 Th.ii.9; 2 Th. iii. 8; absol. iva μὴ ἐπι- 
βαρῶ ‘that I press not too heavily’ i. 6. lest I give pain by 
too severe language, 2 Co. ii.5. (Dion. Hal., Appian.) * 

ἐπι-βιβάζω: 1 aor. ἐπεβίβασα; to cause lo mount; to 
place upon, [οἷ. ἐπί, 1). 3): τινὰ or τὶ ἐπί τι, Lk. x. 84; 
xix. 35; Acts xxiii. 24. (Thue., Plat., Diod., al.; Sept. 
several times for 3°37.) * 

ἐπι-βλέπω:; 1 aor. ἐπέβλεψα; in the Sept. often for 
an and 7739, also for M81; to turn the eyes upon, to 
look upon, gaze upon, (ἐπί upon (cf. ἐπί, D. 37} : ἐπί τινα, 
contextually, to look upon one with a feeling of admura- 
tion and respect, to look up to, regard, Jas. ii. 3; contextu- 
ally, to look upon in pity for the sake of giving aid, i. q. 
to have regard for, to regard, Lk. ix. 38 (where for ἐπί- 
βλεψον [RL] and eriB\evar[G ΤΊ write [with Tr WH] 
ἐπιβλέψαι, 1 aor. act. inf.; ef. Bornemann, Schol. ad loc., 
and above in δέομαι, 3 a., [also B. 273 (234) note]); ἐπὶ 
τὴν ταπείνωσίν τινος, Lk. i. 48; often in the O. T. in the 
same sense, as 1 5. i. 11; ix. 16; Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 16; 
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 17; Tob. iii.3,ete. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph. 
and Plato down, both lit. and fig.) * 

ém(-BAnpa, -ros, τό. (ἐπιβάλλων, that which is thrown or 
put upon a thing, or that which is added to it; an addition ; 
spec. that which is sewed onto cover arent, a patch; Vule. 
assumentum [(also commissura)], (i. q. ἐπίρραμα) : Mt. 
ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; Lk. v. 36. ([Sept., Plut., Arr.] * 

ἐπι-βοάω, -@; to cry oul to [οἵ. ἐπί, 1). 2], cry out: foll. 
by ace. with inf. Acts xxv. 24 RG, [but L T Tr WH 
Bod, q. ν. 2,and fin. From Hom., Hdt. down].* 

ἐπι-βουλή, -ἢς, ἡ, α plan formed against one [οἵ. ἐπί, D. 
7], a plot: Acts ix. 34; γίνεταί τινι ἐπιβουλὴ ὑπό τινος, 
Acts xx. 8; εἴς τινα, Acts xxiii. 30; plur. Acts xx. 19. 
(From [Idt.], Thue. down.) * 

ἐπι-γαμβρεύω : fut. ἐπιγαμβρεύσω; to be related to by 

marriage, enter into affinity with; 1. Sept. for jANNA, to 
become any one’s father-in-law or son-in-law: τινί, Gen. 
xxxiv. 9; 1S. xviii. 22 sqq.; 2 Chr. xviii.1; 2 Esdr. ix. 
14; 1 Mace. x. 54, 56. 2. τινά, for 03°, to marry the 
widow of a brother who has died childless: Gen. xxxviii. 
8; Mt. xxii. 24, where allusion is made to the levirate 
law recorded in Deut. xxv. 5-10; οἵ. Win. RWB. s. ν. 
Leviratsehe; [BB. DD. 5. v. Marriage]. (Not found in 
native Grk. auth. [exe. schol. ad Eur. Or. 574 sqq.; cf. 
W. 26].)* 

érl-yetos, -ov, (ἐπί and γῆ), existing upon the earth, 
earthly, terrestrial: οἰκία, the house we live in on earth, 
spoken of the body with which we are clothed in this 
world, 2 Co. v. 1; σώματα ἐπίγεια, opp. to ἐπουράνια, 1 


ET uy Wopate 


Co. xy. 40; absolutely, of ἐπίγειοι (opp. to οἱ ἐπουράνιοι 
and οἱ καταχθόνιοι), those who are on earth, the inhabit- 
ants of the earth, men, Phil. ii. 10; τὰ ἐπίγεια, things 
done on earth, spoken of the new birth wrought by the 
Holy Spirit, Jn. iii. 12; cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. 
p- 212 sq.; τὰ ἐπίγεια φρονεῖν, to set the mind on the 
pleasures and good things of earth, Phil. iii. 19; σοφία 
ἐπίγειος (epp. to ἡ ἄνωθεν κατερχομένη), the wisdom of 
man, liable to error and misleading, Jas. iii. 15. (From 
Plato down; nowhere in the O. T.) * 

ἐπι-γίνομαι : 2 aor. ἐπεγενόμην ; 
happen afterwards; to be born after. 
arrive: of time, τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐπεγένετο, Acts 
xxvii. 27 L [ed. ster.], T [edd. 2, 7]; (ἔαρος ἐπιγίγνεται 
ὥρη, Hom. Il. 6, 148). 3. fo arise, spring up, come on: 
ἐπιγενομένου vorov, a south wind having sprung up, Acts 
xxviii. 13; (Thue. 3, 74; 4, 30).* 

ἐπι-γινώσκω; [impf. ereyivwoxor]; fut. ἐπιγνώσομαι ; 2 


1. to become or 
2. to come to, 


aor. ἐπέγνων ; pf. ἐπέγνωκα; [Pass., pres. emuywookopar; 
1 aor. ἐπεγνώσθην); (ἐπί denotes mental direction tow- 
ards, application to, that which is known) ; in the Sept. 
chiefly for yt. and 933, 1373 1. to become thorough- 
ly acquainted with, to know thoroughly; to know accu- 
rately, know well, [see reff. s. v. ἐπίγνωσις, init.]: 1 Co. 
xiii. 12 (where γινώσκω ἐκ μέρους and ἐπιγιν. i. e. to know 
thoroughly, know well, divine things, are contrasted [ W. 
§ 39, 3 N.2]); with an ace. of the thing, Lk. i. 4; 2 Co.i. 
13 ; τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ, Col. i. 6 ; τὴν ἀλήθειαν, 1 Tim. iv. 3; 
τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης, 2 Pet. ii. 21 [ef. B. 805 (262)]; 
τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. i. 32; τὶ foll. by ὅτε (by the fa- 
miliar attraction [W. 626 (581); B. 376 (322); some 
bring this ex. under 2 a. in the sense of acknowledge]), 
1 Co. xiv. 37; τινά, one’s character, will, deeds, deserts, 
ete., 1 Co. xvi. 18; 2 Co.i. 14; [pass. opp. to ἀγνοούμενοι, 
2 Co. vi. 9]; τινὰ ἀπό τινος (gen. of thing), Mt. vii. 16, 20 
[Lehm. ἐκ] (“a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cogno- 
scere,” for the more common ez, Caes. b. ¢. 1, 22, 2 [οἵ. B. 
324 (278sq.); W. 372 (348)]); by attraction τινά, ὅτι 
ete. 2 Co. xili. 55 ἐπιγινώσκει τὸν υἱόν, τὸν πατέρα. Mt. xi. 
27. 2. univ. fo know; a. to recognize: τινά, i. 6. by 
sight, hearing, or certain signs, to perceive who a person 
is, Mt. xiv. 35; Mk. vi.54; Lk. xxiv. 16,31; Mk. vi. 33 
[RT, but G WH mre. without the accus.]; by attrac- 
tion, τινά, ὅτι, Acts ili. 10; iv. 133; τινά, his rank and 
authority, Mt. xvii. 12; with ace. of the thing, to recog- 
nize a thing to be what it really is: τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ Πέτρου, 
Acts xii. 145 τὴν γῆν, Acts xxvii. 39. Ὅ. to know i. q. 
to perceive: ri, Lk. v. 22; ἐν ἑαυτῷ, foll. by ace. of the 
thing with a ptep. [B. 301 (258)], Mk. v. 30; foll. by ὅτι, 
LK. i. 22; τῷ πνεύματι foll. by ὅτε, Mk. ii. 8. ὁ. to know 
i.e. to find out, ascertain: sc. αὐτό, Acts ix. 30; foll. by 
ὅτι, Lk. vii. 37; xxiii. 7; Acts xix. 34; xxii. 29; xxiv. 11 
LT Tr WH; xxviii. 1; ri, foll. by an indirect quest., 
Acts xxiii. 28 L T Tr WH; [δι᾿ ἣν αἰτίαν ete. Acts xxii. 
24]; mapa τινος (gen. of pers.) περί τινος (gen. of thing), 
Acts xxiv. 8. ἃ. to knowi.e. to understand : Acts xxv. 
10. [From Hom. down. ]* ‘ 

ἐπίγγνωσις, -ews, 7), (ἐπιγινώσκω. q. ν. [cf. also Bp. Lghtft. 


237 


ἐπιδημέω 


on Col. i. 9; Trench § Ιχχν. ad fin.]), precise and cor- 
rect knowledge; used in the N. T. of the knowledge of 
things ethical and divine: absol., Phil. i. 9; Col. iii. 10; 
κατ᾽ ἐπίγνωσιν, Ro. x. 2; with gen. of the thing known, 
Col. i. 9; ii. 2; Philem. 6; τῆς ἀληθείας, 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 
Tim. ii. 25; iii. 7; Tit. i. 1; Heb. x. 263; τῆς ἁμαρτίας, 
Ro. iii. 20; with gen. of the person known ;— of God. 
esp. the knowledge of his holy will and of the blessings 
which he has bestowed and constantly bestows on men 
through Christ: Eph. i. 17; Col. i. 10; 2 Pet. i. 2; οἱ 
Christ, i.e. the true knowledge of Christ’s nature, dig- 
nity, benefits: Eph. iv. 13; 2 Pet. i. 8; ii. 20; of God 
and Christ : 2 Pet. i. 2; θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει; i. 6. to keep 
the knowledge of the one true God which has illumined 
the soul, Ro. i. 28. (Polyb., Plut., Hdian., [al.]; Sept. 
occasionally for ΠΡῚ; 2 Mace. ix. 11.) * 

ἐπι-γραφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (emtypapw), an inscription, tille: in 
the N. T. of an inscription in black letters upon a 
whitened tablet [B. D. 5. vy. Cross], Lk. xxiii. 38; with 
the gen. τῆς αἰτίας, i. 6. of the accusation, Mk. xv. 26, 
(γράμματα τὴν αἰτίαν τῆς θανατώσεως αὐτοῦ δηλοῦντα, Dio 
Cass. 54, 3; cf. Sueton. Calig. 32; Domit. 10); of the 
inscription on a coin: Mt. xxii. 20; Mk. xii. 16; Lk. xx. 
24. (From Thue. down.) ἢ 

ἐπι-γράφω : fut. ἐπιγράψω ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐπεγεγραμ- 
μένος ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπεγέγραπτο ; to write upon, in- 
scribe: ἐπιγραφήν, Mk. xv. 26 and L Tr br. in Lk. xxiii. 
38; ὀνόματα, Rev. xxi. 12; ἔν τινι, Acts xvii. 23; fig. to 
write upon the mind, i. e. to fix indelibly upon it, cause 
to cleave to it and to be always vividly present to it: 
νόμους ἐπὶ καρδίας [-δίαν T WH mrg.], Heb. viii. 10; ἐπὶ 
τῶν διανοιῶν, Heb. x. 16 RG, ἐπὶ τὴν διάνοιαν, ibid. 1, T 
Tr WH, (τοὺς λόγους ἐπὶ τὸ πλάτος τῆς καρδίας, Prov. 
vii. 3). [From Hom. down. ] * 

ἐπι-δείκνυμι ; 1 aor. ἐπέδειξα ; [ pres. mid. ἐπιδείκνυμαι]; 
to exhibit, show, [as though for ex position or exami- 
nation (Schmidt ch. 127, 5); fr. Pind., Hdt. down.]; 
a. to bring forth to view: τί, Mt. xxii. 19; and Lk. xx. 24 
Ree.; τί τινι, Lk. xxiv. 40 RG; ἑαυτόν τινι, Lk. xvii. 14; 
to show i. 6. bid to look at, τί τινι, Mt. xxiv. 1; to show 
i. 6. furnish to be looked at, produce what may be looked 
at: σημεῖον, Mt. xvi. 1; Mid. with ace. of the thing, to 
display something belonging to one’s self: χιτῶνας, the 
tunics as their own, Acts ix. 39 [see Meyer]. b. to prove, 
demonstrate, set forth to be known and acknowledged: 
Heb. vi. 17; foll. by the ace. and inf. Acts xviii. 28.* 

ἐπι-δέχομαι ; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to receive hospi-' 
tably: twa, 3 Jn. 10 (Polyb. 22, 1, 3). 2. to admit, i. e. 
not to reject: τινά, one’s authority, 3 Jn. 9 (τοὺς λόγους, 
1 Mace. x. 46; παιδείαν, Sir. li. 26). [Cf δέχομαι, fin. ] * 

ἐπιδημέω, -@; (emidnuos) ; 1. to be present among 
one’s people, in one’s city or in one’s native land, [cf. ἐπί, 
Ὁ. 1], (Thue., Plato, al.; opp. to ἀποδημεῖν, Xen. Cyr. 
7,5, 69 ; ἐπιδημεῖν ἐν τῷδε τῷ βίῳ, Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 12 
[p- 88 ed. Otto]). 2. to be a sojourner, a foreign resi- 
dent, among any people, in any country: Acts ii. 10; of 
ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι. Acts xvii. 21; (Xen., Plato, Theophr., 
Leian., Aelian, al.).* 


ἐπιδιατάσσομαι 


ἐπι-δια-τάσσομαι : to ordain besides, to add something to 
what has been ordained, {cf. ἐπί, 1). 4]: Gal. 11,18. Not 
found elsewhere.* 

ἐπι-δίδωμι : 3 pers. sing. impf. ἐπεδίδου ; fut. ἐπιδώσω ; 
1 aor. ἐπέδωκα; 2 aor. ptep. plur. ἐπιδόντες ; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐπεδόθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to give over; 1. to hand, 
give by handing: τινί τι, Mt. vii. 9 sq.; Lk. xi. 11 sq. ; 
xxiv. 30,42; Jn. xiii. 26 [RGL]; Acts xv. 30; pass. 
LK. iv. 17. 2. to give over, i.e. give up to the power or 
* will of one (Germ. preisgeben) : Acts xxvii. 15 (se. ἑαυτούς 
or τὸ πλοῖον τῷ ἀνέμῳ). 

ἐπι-δι-ορθόω (see διόρθωσις) : to set in order besides or 
further (what still remains to be set in order, [ef. ἐπί, 1). 
417): Tit.i. 5, where, for the common reading ἐπιδιορθώσῃ 
(1 aor. mid. subjunc.), Lehm. has adopted ἐπιδιορθώσῃς 
(1 aor. act. subjune.). Found also in inscriptions 
(Boeckh ii. 409, 9), and in 600]. writ.* 

ἐἔπι-δύω ; to go down, set (of the sun): Eph. iv. 26, on 
which see ἐπί, B.2 6. (Deut. xxiv.17 (15); Jer. xv. 9; 
[Philo de spec. legg. 28]; and with tmesis, Hom. 1]. 2, 
413.)* 

ἔπιείκεια [WH -xia, see I, ε7, -as, 7, (ἐπιεικής, 4- V-), 
mildness, gentleness, fairness, [‘sweet reasonableness’ 
(Matthew Arnold)]: Acts xxiv. 4; joined with πραότης 
[4- v-], 2 Co. x.1; Plut. Pericl. 39; with φιλανθρωπία, 
Polyb. 1, 14, 4; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 36; with χρηστότης, 
Hdian. 5, 1,12 [6 ed. Bekk.]. Cf. Plato, defin. p. 412 b.; 
Aristot. eth. Nic.5, 10. (Bar. ii. 27; Sap. ii. 19 ; xii. 18; 
2 Mace. ii. 22; 3 Macc. iii. 15.) * 

[Syn. ἐπιείκεια, πραότης: “ap. magis ad animum, 
ἐπι. vero magis ad exteriorem conversationem pertinet” 
(Estius on 2Co. x. 1). “xp. virtus magis absoluta; ἐπι. 
magis refertur ad alios” (Bengel, ibid.). See at length 
Trench ὃ xliii.] 

ἐπιεικής, -€s, (εἰκός, what is reasonable) ; 1. seemly, 
suitable, (fr. Hom. down). 2. equitable, fair, mild, 
gentle: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. iii. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 18; Jas. iii. 17. 
Neut. τὸ ἐπιεικὲς (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down) 
ὑμῶν i. 4. ἡ ἐπιείκεια ὑμῶν, Phil. iv. 5. 
θπ.7" 

ἐπι-ζητέω, -ῶ ; impf. ἐπεζήτουν ; 1 aor. ἐπεζήτησα ; fr. 
Ildt. down ; Sept. for wy and in 1S. xx.1; Ecel. vii. 29 
(28) for wpa; to inquire for, seek for, search for, seek 
diligently, (Germ. herbeisuchen [the ém- seems to be di- 
rective rather than intensive]): τινά, Lk. iv. 42 (for Ree. 
ἐζήτουν) ; Acts xii. 19; i. q. to desire, wish for, crave: τί, 
Mt. vi. 32; Lk. xii. 30; Ro. xi. 7; Phil. iv.17; Heb. xi. 
14; ΧΙ. 14; περί τινος, Acts xix. 39 [RG ΤΊ (but if 
your inquiry or desire has reference to other matters) ; 
with the inf. Acts xiii. 7 (as in Polyb. 3, 57, 7; Diod. 19, 
8); 1. q. to demand, clamor for: σημεῖον, Mt. xii. 39; xvi. 
4; Mk. viii. 12 RG; Lk. xi. 29 (where T Tr WH (pret 
{as L T Tr WH in Mk. 1. c.]).* 

ἐπιθανάτιος, -ov, (θάνατος), doomed to death: 1 Co. iv. 
9. (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 35.) * 

ἐπίθεσις, -ews, 9, (ἐπιτίθημι), a laying on, imposition: 
τῶν χειρῶν, Acts viii. 18; 1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim.i. 6; Heb. 
vi. 2. The imposition of hands, χειροθεσία, was a sacred 


[See ἐπιείκεια, 


238 


᾽ ΄ 
ἐπιθυμία 


rite transmitted by the Jews to the Christians, and em- 
ployed in praying for another, or in conferring upon him 
divine blessings, especially bodily health, or the Holy 
Spirit (at the administration of baptism and the inaugu- 
ration to their office of the teachers and ministers of the 
church): Gen. xlviii. 14; Num. xxvii. 18, 23; Deut. 
xxxiv. 9; 2K. v.11, etc.; Mt. xix.18; Mk. xvi. 18; Acts 
vi. 6; xiii. 3; xix. 6,ete. [See B. D. 5. v. Baptism (sup- 
plement) ; McCl. and Strong and Dict. of Chris. Antiq. 
8, v- Imposition of Hands. ]* 

ἐπιθυμέω, -ὦ ; [impf. ἐπεθύμουν ; fut. ἐπιθυμήσω ; 1 aor. 
ἐπεθύμησα; (θυμός); fr. Aeschyl. down; Sept. for 738 
and 12m; prop. to keep the θυμός turned upon a thing, 
hence [cf. our to set one’s heart upon] to have a desire for, 
long for; absol. to desire [A. V. lust], Jas. iv. 2; to lust 
after, covet, of those who seek things forbidden, Ro. vii. 
7; xiii. 9 (fr. Ex. xx. 17); 1 Co. x. 6, (4 Mace. ii. 6); 
κατά Twos, to have desires opposed to [A.V. lust against] a 
thing, Gal. v. 17 [B. 335 (288)]; τινός, to long for, covet 
a thing, Acts xx. 33; 1 Tim. iii. 1; of sexual desire, 
γυναικός, Mt. v. 28 Ree. [see below] (παιδὸς ἢ γυναικός, 
Xen. an. 4, 1, 14; with the gen. also in Ex. xxxiv. 24; 
Proy. xxi. 26; xxiii. 3,6; Sap. vi.12; Sir. xxiv. 19 (18), 
etc.) ; contrary to the usage of the better Grk. writ. with 
the ace. of the object, Mt. v. 28 L Tr (WH br.), and with- 
out an obj. Tdf. (Ex. xx. 17; Deut.v. 21; Mie. ii. 2; Sap. 
xvi. 3; Sir. i. 26 (23), ete.; ef. W. § 30, 10b.); as often 
in Grk. writ., foll. by the inf.: Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. xv. 16; 
[xvi. 21]; xvii. 22; 1 Pet. i. 12; Rev. ix. 6; foll. by the 
ace. with the inf. Heb. vi. 11; ἐπιθυμίᾳ ἐπεθύμησα I have 
greatly desired, Lk. xxii. 15; οἵ. W. § 54, 3; B. § 133, 
22.4." 

ἐπιθυμητής, -οὔ, 6, (ἐπιθυμέω), one who longs for, a 
craver, lover, one eager for: κακῶν, 1 Co. x. 6 (Num. xi. 
4). In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.* 

ἐπιθυμία, -as, ἡ, (ἐπιθυμέω), [fr. Hdt. on], Sept. chiefly 
for MINN, TN, WWM; desire, craving, longing: Lk. xxii. 
15 (on which see in ἐπιθυμέω, fin.); Rev. xviii. 14; τὴν 
ἐπιθυμίαν ἔχειν εἴς τι, the desire directed towards, Phil. 1. 
23; ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ with great desire, 1 Th. ii. 17; 
plur. αἱ περὶ τὰ λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mk. iv. 19 [W. § 30, 3 N. 
5]; spec. desire for what is forbidden, lust, (Vulg. con- 
cupiscentia) : Ro. vii. 7sq.; Jas. i. 14 sq. ; 2 Pet.i.4; πάθος 
ἐπιθυμίας, 1 Th. iv. 5; ἐπιθυμία κακή, Col. iii. 5, (Prov. xxi. 
26; [xii. 12]; Plat. legg. 9 p. 854 ἃ. ; πονηρά, Xen. mem. 
1, 2, 64; ἀγαθή, Sir. xiv. 14 where see Fritzsche, [who 
cites also Prov. xi. 23; xiii. 12]); plur., Gal. v. 24; 1 
Tim. vi. 9; 2 Tim. ii. 22; iv. 3; 1 Pet.i.14; iv. 2; with 
a gen. of the object, ἐπιθυμία μιασμοῦ, for unclean inter- 
course, 2 Pet. ii. 10 [al. with W. § 34, 3 Ὁ. take μιασμ. as 
gen. of quality]; with a gen. of the subject, ai ἐπιθυμίαι 
τῶν καρδιῶν, Ro. i. 24; with a gen. of the thing by which 
the desire is excited, ἡ ἐπιθυμία τοῦ κόσμου, 1 In. ii. 
17; τοῦ σώματος, Ro. vi. 12; τῆς ἀπάτης (see ἀπάτη), 
Eph. iv. 22; τῆς σαρκός, τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν, 1 Jn. ii. 16 (cf. 
Huther ad loc.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 18; τελεῖν ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκός, 
Gal. ν. 16; αἱ σαρκικαὶ ἐπιθυμίαι. 1 Pet. ii. 11 (ψυχικαί, 
σωματικαί, 4 Mace. i. 32); αἱ κοσμικαὶ ἐπιθυμίαι, Tit. 11. 


“τικαθίζω 


12; εἰς ἐπιθυμίας to arouse lusts, Ro. xiii. 14; ποιεῖν τὰς 
ἐπιδυμέας, In. viii. 44; ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις, Ro. vi. 
12 [LT Tr WH]; δουλεύειν ἐπιθυμίαις (see δουλεύω, 2 
b.), Tit. iii. 3; ἄγεσθαι ἐπιθυμίαις, 2 Tim. iii. 6; πορεύε- 
σθαι ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις, 1 Pet. iv. 3; πορεύεσθαι κατὰ τὰς ἐπι- 
θυμίας, Jude 16, 18; 2 Pet. iii. 3; ἀναστρέφεσθαι ἐν ταῖς 
ἐπιθυμίαις τῆς σαρκός, Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. ef. πάθος, and 
see Trench § Ixxxvii.] * 

ἐπι-καθ-ίζω: 1 aor. ἐπεκάθισα; 1. to cause to sit 
upon, to set upon: Mt. xxi. 7 Rec.*# 2. intrans. to sit 
upon: Matt. 1. ο. [Ree.*] GL T Tr WH al.* 

ἐπι-καλέω, -ῶ : 1 aor. ἐπεκάλεσα; [ Pass. and Mid., pres. 
ἐπικαλοῦμαι); pf. pass. ἐπικέκλημαι ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. 
emexekAnro, and with neglect of augm. [ef. W. § 12, 9; B. 
33 (29) ] ἐπικέκλητο (Acts xxvi. 32 Lehm.); 1 aor. pass. 
ἐπεκλήθην ; fut. mid. ἐπικαλέσομαι; 1 aor. mid. ἐπεκαλε- 
σάμην ; Sept. very often for 87) ; 1. to put a name 
upon, to surname: τινά (Xen., Plato, al.), Mt. x. 25 α 
T Tr WH (Ree. ἐκάλεσαν) ; pass. 6 ἐπικαλούμενος, he who 
is surnamed, Lk. xxii. 3 RGL; Acts χ. 18; xi. 13; xii. 
12; xv. 22 RG; also ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται, Acts x. 5, 32; ὁ ἐπι- 
κληθείς, Mt. x. 3 [RG]; Acts iv. 36; xii. 25; 1. q. ὃς ἐπε- 
κλήθη, Acts i. 23. Pass. with the force of a mid. [ef. W. 
§ 38, 3], to permit one’s self to be surnamed: Heb. xi. 16; 
Mid. w. τινά : 1 Pet. i. 17 εἰ πατέρα ἐπικαλεῖσθε τὸν etc. 1. 6. 
if ye call (for yourselves) on him as father, i. 6. if ye sur- 
name him your father. 2. ἐπικαλεῖται τὸ ὄνομά τινος 
ἐπί τινα, after the Hebr. “5 Dy “3 Dw NIP), the name 
of one is named upon some one, i. e. he is called by his 
name or declared to be dedicated to him (cf. Gesenius, 
Thesaur. iii. p. 1232"): Acts xv. 17 fr. Am. ix. 12 (the 
name referred to is the people of God); Jas. ii. 7 (the 
name of τοῦ Χριστοῦ). 3. τινί with the ace. of the 
object; prop. to call something to one [cf. Eng. to ery out 
upon (or against) one]; to charge something to one as a 
crime or reproach; to summon one on any charge, prose- 
cute one for a crime; to blame one for, accuse one of, 
(Arstph. pax 663; Thue. 2, 27; 3, 36; Plat. lege. 6, 
761 e.; 7, 809 e.; Dio Cass. 36, 28; 40,41 and often in 
the orators [cf. 5. v. karnyopéw]) : εἰ τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ Βεελ- 
ζεβοὺλ ἐπεκάλεσαν (i. 6. accused of commerce with Beel- 
zebul, of receiving his help, cf. Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24; Mk. 
iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15), πόσῳ μᾶλλον τοῖς οἰκιακοῖς αὐτοῦ, Mt. 
x. 25 L WHumrg. after cod. Vat. (see 1 above), a read- 
ing defended by Rettig in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1838, 
Ρ. 477 sqq. and by Alex. Bttm. in the same journal for 
1860, p. 343, and also in his N. T. Gram. 151 (132); 
[also by Weiss in Mey. ed. 7 ad loc.]. But this expres- 
sion (Beelzebul for the help of Beelzebul) is too hard 
not to be suggestive of the emendation of some ignorant 
scribe, who took offence because (with the exception of 
this passage) the enemies of Jesus are nowhere in the 
Gospels said to have called him by the name of Beelze- 
bul. 4. to call upon (like Germ. anrufen), to invoke ; 
Mid. to call upon for one’s self, in one’s behalf: any one 
as a helper, Acts vii. 59, where supply τὸν κύριον Ἰησοῦν 
(βοηθόν, Plat. Euthyd. p. 297 ¢c.; Diod. 5, 79); τινὰ 
μάρτυρα, as my witness, 2 Co. i. 23 (Plat. legg. 2, 664 ο.); 


239 


ἐπικουρία 


as a judge, i.e. to appeal to one, make appeal unto: 'και- 
oapa, Acts xxv. 11 sq. ; ΧΧΥΪ. 32: xxviii. 19; [τὸν Σεβα- 
στόν, Acts xxv. 25]; foll. by the inf. pass. Acts xxv. 21 (to 
be reserved). 5. Hebraistically (like ΠῚ Dwa Np 
to call upon by pronouncing the name of Jehovah, Gen. 
iv. 26; xii. 8; 2 K. v. 11, ete.; ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 
1281" [or Hebr. Lex. 8. ν. 8p]; an expression finding 
its explanation in the fact that prayers addressed to God 
ordinarily began with an invocation of the divine name: 
Ps. iii. 2; vi. 2; vii. 2, ete.) ἐπικαλοῦμαι τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου, 
1 call upon (on my behalf) the name of the Lord, i.e. to 
invoke, adore, worship, the Lord, i.e. Christ: Acts ii. 21 
(fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)); ix. 14, 21; xxii. 16; Ro. x. 13 
sq:; 1 Co. i. 2; τὸν κύριον, Ro. x. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 22; 
(often in Grk. writ. ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τοὺς θεούς, as Xen. Cyr. 
7, 1, 35; Plat. Tim. p.27¢.; Polyb. 15, 1, 13).* 

ἐπι-κάλυμμα, -τος, τό, (ἐπικαλύπτω), α covering, veil; 
prop. in Sept.: Ex. xxvi. 14; xxxvi. 19 Compl. [ef. 
xxxix. 21 Tdf.]; metaph. i. q. a pretext, cloak: τῆς κακίας, 
1 Pet. ii. 16 (πλοῦτος δὲ πολλῶν ἐπικάλυμμ᾽ ἐστὶ κακῶν, 
Menand. ap. Stob. flor. 91, 19 [iii. 191 ed. Gaisf.]; 
“quaerentes libidinibus suis patrocinium et velamen- 
tum,” Seneca, vita beata 12).* 

ἐπι-καλύπτω : [1 aor. ἐπεκαλύφθην]; to cover over: ai 
ἁμαρτίαι ἐπικαλύπτονται, are covered over so as not to 
come to view, i. e. are pardoned, Ro. iv. 7 fr. Ps. xxxi. 
(G@xxi) Πὰν; 

ἐπι-κατ-άρατος. -ov, (ἐπικαταράομαι to imprecate curses 
upon), only in bibl. and eccl. use, accursed, execrable, ex- 
posed to divine vengeance, lying under God’s curse: Jn. 
vii. 49 RG; Gal. iii. 10 (Deut. xxvii. 26) ; ibid. 13 (Deut. 
xxi. 23); (Sap. iii. 12 (13); xiv. 8; 4 Mace. ii. 19; in 
Sept. often for 7398).* 

ἐπίςκειμαι ; impf. ἐπεκείμην; to lie upon or over, rest 
upon, be laid or placed upon; a. prop.: ἐπί τινι; Jn. xi. 
38; sc. on the burning coals, Jn. xxi.9. b. figuratively, 
a. of things: of the pressure of a violent tempest, yet 
μῶνος ἐπικειμένου, Acts xxvii. 20 (Plut. Timol. 28, 7) ; 
ἀνάγκη μοι ἐπίκειται, is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hom. 
Tl. 6, 458) ; ἐπικείμενα, of observances imposed on a man 
by law, Heb. ix. 10 [ef. W. 635 (589)]. β. of men; to 
press upon, to be urgent: with dat. of pers. Lk. v. 1; 
ἐπέκειντο αἰτούμενοι, Lk. xxiii. 23 (πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἐπέκειτο 
ἀξιῶν, Joseph. antt. 18, 6,6; μᾶλλον ἐπέκειντο βλάσφη- 
μοῦντες, 20, ὅ, 3).* 

ἐπι-κέλλω : [1 aor. ἐπέκειλα]; to run a ship ashore, to 
bring to land; so fr. Hom. Od. 9, 148 down; ἐπέκειλαν 
(RG ἐπώκειλαν) τὴν ναῦν, Acts xxvii. 41 L T Tr WH; 
but in opposition see Meyer ad loc. [Cf. B. Ὁ. Am. ed. 
p. 3009.]* 

[ἐπι-κεφάλαιον, -ov, τό, head-money, poll-taz, (Aristot. oec. 
2 p. 13465, 4 and 13489, 32): Mk. xii. 14 WH (rejected) 
mre. for κῆνσον (al.).*] 

᾿Επικούρειος [-ριος T WH; see I, εἾ. -ov, 6, Epicurean, 
belonging to the sect of Epicurus, the philosopher: Acts 
xvii. 18.* 

ἐπικουρία, -as, 7), (ἐπικουρέω to aid), aid, succor: Acta 
Xxvi. 22. (Sap. xiii. 18; fr. Thuc. and Eur. down.) * 


ἐπεζρινω 


ἐπι-κρινω: 1 aor. επέκρινα ; to adjudge, approve oy one’s 
decision, decree, give sentence: fall. by the acc. with inf., 
Lk. xxiii. 24. (Plato, Dem., Plut., Hdian., al.) * 

ἐπι-λαμβάνω; 2 aor. mid. ἐπελαβόμην ; to take in addi- 
tion [ef. ἐπί, D. 4], to take, lay hold of, take possession 
of, overtake, attain to. In the Bible only in the mid.; 
Sept. for m8 and Pina; a. prop. to lay hold of or to 
seize upon anything with the hands (Germ. sich an etwas 
anhalten) : τῶν ἀφλάστων νηός, Hat. 6, 1143; hence, univ. 
to take hold of, lay hold of: with gen. of pers., Mt. xiv. 
31; Lk. ix.47 [Tr WH acc.]; (xxiii. 26 RG); Acts 
xvii. 19; xxi. 30, 33; with ace. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 26 L 
T Tr WH, but in opposition see Meyer; for where the 
ptep. ἐπιλαβόμενος is in this sense joined with an acc., 
the ace., by the σχῆμα ἀπὸ κοινοῦ, depends also upon the 
accompanying finite verb (cf. B. § 132, 9; [so W. (ed. 
Liinem.) 202 (190)]): Actsix. 27; xvi. 19; xviii. 17, ef. 
Lk. xiv. 4. with the gen. of a thing: τῆς χεῖρός τινος. 
Mk. viii. 23; Acts xxiii. 19; of a leader, and thus met- 
aph. of God, Heb. viii. 9 [ef. W. 571 (531); B. 316 
(271)]; with gen. of a pers. and of a thing: eA. τινος 
λόγου, ῥήματος, to take any one in his speech, i. 6. to lay 
hold of something said by him which can be turned 
against him, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr λόγον]. 26 [WH Tr mre. τοῦ 
for αὐτοῦ]: ἐπιὰλ. τῆς αἰωνίου [al. ὄντως) ζωῆς, to seize 
upon, lay hold of, i. e. to struggle to obtain eternal life, 
1 Tim. vi. 12, 19, [ef. W. 312 (293)]. b. by a metaph. 
drawn from laying hold of another to rescue him from 
peril, to help, to succor, (οἵ. Germ. sich eines annehmen) : 
τινός, Heb. ii. 16; in this sense used besides only in Sir. 
iv. 11 and Schol. ad Aeschyl. Pers. 739. In Appian.bel. 
civ. 4, 96 the act. is thus used with the dat.: ἡμῖν τὸ 
δαιμόνιον ἐπιλαμβάνει." 

ἐπι-λανθάνομαι ; pf. pass. ἐπιλέλησμαι ; 2 aor. mid. ἐπε- 
λαθόμην ; Sept. often for N2w; lo forget: foll. by the inf., 
Mt. xvi. 5; Mk. viii. 14; foll. by an indir. quest. Jas. 
i. 24; in the sense of neglecting, no longer caring for: 
with the gen., Heb. vi. 10; xiii. 2,16; with the ace. (cf. 
W. § 30, 10 c.; Matthiae 8 347 Anm. 2, ii. p. 820 sq.), 
Phil. iii. 13 (14); with a pass. signification (Is. xxiii. 16; 
Sir. il. 14; xxxii. (xxxv.) 9; Sap. 11. 4, ete. [ef. B. 52 
(46)]): ἐπιλελησμένος forgotten, given over to oblivion, 
i.e. uncared for, ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ before God i. 6. by 
God (Sir. xxiii. 14), Lk. xii. 6. [(From Hom. on.)]* 

ἐπι-λέγω : [pres. pass. ptep. ἐπιλεγόμενος] ; 1 aor. mid. 
ptep. ἐπιλεξάμενος ; 1. to say besides (cf. ἐπί, D. 4], 
(Ildt. et al.) ; to surname (Plato, leze. 3 p. 700 b.): in 
pass. Jn. v. 2 [Tdf. τὸ Xey.], unless the meaning to name 
(put a name upon) be preferred here; cf. ἐπονομάζω. 
2. to choose for (Hat. et sqq. ; Sept.) ; mid. to choose for 
one’s self: Acts xv. 40 (2S. x. 9; Hdt. 3,157; Thue. 
7, 19; Diod. 3, 73 (74); 14,12; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4, 
and others).* 

ἐπι-λείπω : fut. ἐπιλείψω : to fail, not to suffice for (any 
purpose, for the attainment of an end): τινὰ ὁ χρόνος, 
time fails one, Heb. xi. 82 and many like exx. in Grk. 
writ. fr. Dem. down; see Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 
p- 818.* 


240 


ἐπιμενω 


ἐπι-λείχω : impf. ἐπέλειχον ; to lick the surface of, dick 
over ([ οἵ, ἐπί, 1). 17; Germ. belecken): with the acc. of a 
thing, Lk. xvi. 21 L T Tr WH; (in Long. past. 1, 24 
(11) a var. for énurpéxo).* 

ἐπιλησμονή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπιλήσμων forgetful [W. 93 (89)]), 
Sorgetfulness : ἀκροατὴς ἐπιλησμονῆς, a forgetful hearer 
[ef. W. § 34, 3b.; Β. 101 (140)], Jas. i. 25. (Sir. xi. 27 
(25).)* 

érl-hourros, -ov, (λοιπός), remaining besides, left over, 
(ef. ἐπί, 1). 4]: 1 Pet.iv.2. (Sept.; Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
down.) * 

ἐπί-λυσις, -ews, 7, (ἐπιλύω, . ν.), a loosening, unloosing 
(Germ. A uflésung); metaph. interpretation: 2 Pet. i. 
20, on which pass. see γίνομαι, 5 e.a. (Gen. xl. 8 Aq.; 
Heliod. 1, 18 ; but not Philo, vitacontempl. § 10, where 
ἐπιδείξεως was long ago restored.) * 

ἐπι-λύω : impf. ἐπέλυον ; 1 fut. pass. ἐπιλυθήσομαι; a. 
properly, to unloose, untie (Germ. auflisen) anything 
knotted or bound or sealed up; (Xen., Theoer., Hdian.). 
b. to clear (a controversy), to decide, settle: Acts xix. 
395 to explain (what is obscure and hard to understand) : 
Mk. iv. 34 (as in Gen. xli. 12 var.; Philo, vita contempl. 
§ 10; de agricult. § 3; Sext. Empir. 2, 246; γρίφους, 
Athen. 10 p. 449 e.; also in mid., Athen. 10 p. 450 f.; 
Joseph. antt. 8, 6, 5, and often by the Scholiasts).* 

ἐπι-μαρτυρέω, -@; 10 bear witness to, establish by testi- 
mony: foll. by the ace. with inf., 1 Pet. v.12. (Plato, 
Joseph., Plut., Leian., al.) [Comp.: συν-επιμαρτυρέω. * 

ἐπιμέλεια. -as, ἡ, (ἐπιμελής careful), care, attention: Acts 
Xxvil. 8. (Prov. 111. 8; 1 Mace. xvi. 14; 2 Mace. xi. 23; 
very com. in Grk. prose writ., not used in the poets.)* 

ἐπι-μελέομαι, -odpar, and ἐπιμέλομαι: fut. ἐπιμελήσομαι; 
1 aor. ἐπεμελήθην ; with gen. of the object, to take care of 
a person or thing (ἐπί denoting direction of the mind 
toward the object cared for [ef. ἐπί, 1). 27}: Lk. x. 84 sq. ; 
1 Tim. iii. 5. (Gen. xliv. 21; 1 Mace. xi. 37; 1 Esdr. 
vi. 26; used by Grk. writ. esp. of prose fr. Hdt. down.) * 

ἐπιμελῶς, adv., diligently, carefully: Lk. xv. 8.* 

ἐπι-μένω ; [impf. ἐπέμενον] ; fut. ἐπιμενῶ; 1 aor. ἐπέ- 
pewa; to stay αἱ or with; to tarry still; still to abide, to 
continue, remain; a. prop. of tarrying in a place: ἐν 
᾿Εφέσῳ. 1 Co. xvi. 8; ἐν τῇ σαρκί, to live still longer on 
earth, Phil. i. 24 (G T WH om. ἐν); αὐτοῦ, there, Acts xv. 
34 [Rec.]; xxi. 4 [Lehm. αὐτοῖς 1; with dat. of thing: τῇ 
σαρκί, to abide as it were a captive to life on earth, Phil. 
i. 24 GT WH; ἐπί τινι, with one, Acts xxviii. 14 [LT 
Tr WH παρ᾽]; πρός τινα, with one, 1 Co. xvi. 7; Gal. i. 
18; with specification of time how long: Acts x. 48; 
xxi. 4, 10; xxviii. 12,14; 1 Co.xvi. 7. b. trop. to per- 
severe, continue; with dat. of the thing continued in 
[ef. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p.10 sq.] : τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, 
Ro. vi. 1; τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ, Ro. xi. 23; τῇ πίστει, Col. 1. 23; in 
the work of teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 16 (τῷ μὴ ἀδικεῖν, Xen. 
oec. 14, 7; τῇ μνηστείᾳ, ΔΕ]. ν. ἢ. 10,15); with dat. of the 
blessing for which one keeps himself fit: τῇ χάριτι, Acts 
xiii. 43 Ree.; τῇ χρηστότητι, Ro. xi. 22; with a ptep. 
denoting the action persisted in: Jn. viii. 7 Rec.; Acts 
xii. 16; cf. B. 299 sq. (257); [W. § 54, 4].* 


225 


\ 


> ΄ 
επινευὼω 


ἐπι-νεύω: 1 aor. ἐπένευσα; fr. Hom. down; to nod to; 
trop. (by anod) to express approval, to assent: Acts xviii. 
20, as often in Grk. writ.* 

ἐπίνοια, -as, 7), (ἐπινοέω to think on, devise), thought, 
purpose: Acts viii. 22. (Jer. xx. 10; Sap. vi. 17, ete.; 
often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Thue. down.) * 

ἐπιορκέω, -@: fut. ἐπιορκήσω, cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v., and 
§ 39, 12,4; [Veitch s.v.; B.53 (46)]; (émtopkos, q.v-) ; 
to swear falsely, forswear one’s self: Mt. v. 33. 
xiv. 28; 1 Esdr. i. 46; by Grk. writ. fr. [lom. down.) * 

ἐπίςορκος, -ov, (fr. ἐπί [q. ν. D. 7] against, and ὅρκος) ; 
[mase. as subst.] a false swearer, a perjurer: 1'Tim.i. 10. 
(From Hom. down.) * 

ἐπιοῦσα, See ἔπειμι. 

ἐπιούσιος, -ον, a word found only in Mt. νἱ. 11 and Lk. xi. 

o ν᾽ 
3, in the phrase ἄρτος ἐπιούσιος ([Pesh.] Syr. (Sous 
> 


iaiay, the bread of our necessity, i. e. necessary for 
us [but the Curetonian (earlier) Syriac reads Lauds] 
continual ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below, I. 3 p. 214 sqq.; Tay- 
lor, Sayings of the Jewish Fathers, p. 139 sq.]; Itala 
[Old Lat.] panis quotidianus). Origen testifies [de orat. 
27] that the word was not in use in ordinary speech, and 
accordingly seems to have been coined by the Evange- 
lists themselves. Many commentators, as Beza, Kui- 
noel, Tholuck, Ewald, Bleek. Keim, Cremer, following 
Origen, Jerome (who in Mt. only translates by the bar- 
barous phrase panis supersubstantialis), Theophylact, 
Euthymius Zigabenus, explain the word by bread for 
sustenance, which serves to sustain life, deriving the word 
from οὐσία, after the analogy of ἐξούσιος, ἐνούσιος. But 
οὐσία very rarely, and only in philosophic language, is 
equiv. to ὕπαρξις, as in Plato, Theaet. p. 185 6. (opp. to 
τὸ μὴ εἶναι), Aristot. de part. anim. i. 1 (ἡ yap γένεσις 
ἕνεκα τῆς οὐσίας ἐστίν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ ἡ οὐσία ἕνεκα τῆς γενέσεως ; 
for other exx. see Bonitz’s Index to Aristot. p. 544), and 
generally denotes either essence, real nature, or sub- 
stance, property, resources. On this account Leo Meyer 
(in Kuhn, Zeitschr. f. vergleich. Sprachkunde, vii. pp. 
401-430), Kamphausen (Gebet des Herrn, pp. 86-102), 
with whom Keim (ai. 278 sq. [ Eng. trans. iii. 340]), Weiss 
(Mt. 1. e.), Delitzsch (Zeitschr. f. ἃ. luth. Theol. 1876 p. 
402), agree, prefer to derive the word from ἐπεῖναι (and 
in particular fr. the ptep. ἐπών, ἐπούσιος for ἐπύντιος, see 
below) to be present, and to understand it bread which is 
ready at hand or suffices, so that Christ is conjectured to 
have said in Chald. ΕΣ ΡΥ 89M (cf. ΤΙ OM? my allow- 
ance of bread, Prov. xxx. 8) or something of the sort. 
But this opinion, like the preceding, encounters the great 
objection (to mention no other) that, although the cin ἐπί 
is retained before a vowel in certain words (as émopkos, 
ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιόσσομαι, ete. [cf. Bp. Lehtft., as below, I. 
§ 17}, yet in ἐπεῖναι and words derived from it, ἐπουσία, 
ἐπουσιώδης, it is always elided. Therefore much more cor- 
rectly do Grotius, Scaliger, Wetstein, Fischer (De vitiis 
lexx. ete. p. 306 sqq-), Valckenaer, Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 
267 sqq.), Winer (97 (92)), Bretschneider, Wahl, Meyer, 
[Bp. Lghtft. (Revision ete., App.)] and others, compar- 


241 


(Sap. | 


ἐπιποθέω 


ing the words ἑκούσιος, ἐθελούσιος, γερούσιος, (fr. ἑκών, ἐθέ- 
λων, γέρων, for ἑκόντιος, ἐθελόντιος, γερόντιος, cf. Kiihner i. 
§ 63, 3 and § 994,1 Anm. 2), conjecture that the adjec- 
tive ἐπιούσιος is formed from ἐπιών, ἐπιοῦσα, with refer- 
ence to the familiar expression ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (see ἔπειμι), 
and ἄρτος ἐπιούσιος is equiv. to ἄρτος τῆς ἐπιούσης ἡμέρας, 
food for (i. 6. necessary or sufficient for) the morrow. 
Thus ἐπιούσιον and σήμερον admirably answer to each 
other, and that state of mind is portrayed which, piously 
contented with food sufficing from one day to the next, in 
praying to God for sustenance does not go beyond the 
absolute necessity of the nearest future. This explana- 
tion is also recommended by the fact that in the Gospel 
according to the Hebrews, as Jerome testifies, the word 
ἐπιούσιος was represented by the Aramaic qn, “quod 
dicitur crastinus”’; hence it would seem that Christ him- 
self used the Chaldaic expression qn09 =) nom. Nor 
is the prayer, so understood, at variance with the mind 
of Christ as expressed in Mt. vi. 34, but on the contrary 
harmonizes with it finely; for his hearers are bidden 
to ask of God, in order that they may themselves be 
relieved of anxiety for the morrow. [See Bp. Lehtft., 
as above, pp. 195-234; McClellan, The New Test. ete. 
pp: 632-647; Tholuck, Bergpredigt, Mt. 1. ¢., for earlier 
reff. | * 

ἐπι-πίπτω ; 2 aor. ἐπέπεσον, 3 pers. plur. ἐπέπεσαν, Ro. 
xv. 3 L T Tr WH [ef. ἀπέρχομαι init.]; pf. ptep. exure- 
πτωκώς; [see πίπτω]; Sept. for 55); to fall upon; to 
rush or press upon ; a. prop.: τινί, upon one, Mk. iii. 
10; to lie upon one, Acts xx. 10; ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλόν τινος, 
to fall into one’s embrace, Lk. xv. 20; Acts xx. 37, (Gen. 
xlvi. 29; Tobit xi. 8, 12; 3 Mace. v. 49); to fall back 
upon, ἐπὶ τὸ στῆθός Twos, Jn. xiii. 25RGT. b. metaph. 
ἐπί twa, to fall upon one, i. 6. to seize, take possession of 
him: φόβος, Lk.i. 12; Acts xix. 17 [L Tr ἔπεσεν]; Rev. 
xi. 111, T Tr WH; ἔκστασις, Acts x. 10 Rec.; ἀχλύς, 
Acts xiii 11[RG]. used also of the Holy Spirit, in its 
inspiration and impulse: ἐπί τινι, Acts vill. 16; ἐπί τινα, 
x. 44 [Lchm. ἔπεσε] ; xi. 15, (Ezek. xi. 5); of reproaches 
cast upon one: Ro. xv. 8 [Noteworthy is the absol. 
use in Acts xxiii. 7 WH mrg. ἐπέπεσεν (al. ἐγένετο) στά- 
σις. (From Hat. down.) ]* 

ἐπι-πλήσσω: 1 aor. ἐπέπληξα; a. prop. to strike 
upon, beat upon: Hom. 1]. 10, 500. b. trop. to chas- 
lise with words, to chide, upbraid, rebuke: 1 Tim. v. 1. 
(Hom. Il. 12, 211; Xen., Plato, Polyb., al.) * 

ἐπι-ποθέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐπεπόθησα; prop. πόθον ἔχω ἐπί 
τι [i. 6. ἐπί is directive, not intensive; cf. ἐπί, D. 2] 
(ef. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 30 sq.) ; to long for, de- 
sire: foll. by the inf. 2 Co. v. 2; ἰδεῖν τινα, Ro.i. 11; 1 
Th. iii. 6; 2 Tim. i. 4; Phil. ii. 26 L br. WH txt. br.; τί, 
1 Pet. ii. 2 (ἐπί τι, Ps. xli. (xlii.) 2); twa, to be possessed 
with a desire for, long for, [W. § 30. 10 b.], Phil. ii. 26 
RGTTrWH arg. ; to pursue with love, to long after: 
2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 8, (ras ἐντολὰς θεοῦ, Ps. exviii. 
(cxix.) 131); absol. to lust [i. 6. harbor forbidden desire]: 
Jas. iv. 5, on which pass. see φθόνος. (Hadt., Plat., Diod., 
Plut., Leian.)* 


> ͵ 
ἐπιπόθησις 


ἐπι-πόθησις, -εως, ἡ, longing: 2 Co. vii. 7,11. (Ezek. 
xxiii. 11 Aq.; Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 21,131 p. 527 a.) " 

ἐπι-πόθητος, -ov, longed for: Phil.iv.1. ({[Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 65,1; Barn. ep. 1,3]; App. Hisp. 43; Eustath.; 
[ef. W. § 34, 3].)* 

ἐπιποθία [ WII -πόθεια, see 5. V. εἰ; ¢],-as, 9, longing: Ro. 
Xv. 23; ἅπαξ λεγόμ. [On the passage cf. B. 294 (252). ]* 

ἐπι-πορεύομαι ; fo go or journey lo: πρός twa, Lk. viii. 
4; (foll. by ἐπί with the acc. Ep. Jer. 61 (62); Polyb. 4, 
9, 2; freq. used by Polyb. with the simple ace. of place: 
both to go to, traverse regions, cities (so τὴν γῆν, Ezek. 
xxxix. 14 for 72) ; τὰς δυνάμεις, 3 Mace. i. 4), and also 
to make a hostile inroad, overrun, march over).* 

ἐπι-ρράπτω (T Tr WH ἐπιράπτω, see P, p); (ῥάπτω to 
sew); to sew upon, sew to: ἐπί τινι [RG; al. τινα], Mk. 
nS 21* 

ἐπι-ρρίπτω (LT Tr WH ἐπιρίπτω, see P, p): 1 aor. 
ἐπέρριψα; (ῥίπτων ; to throw upon, place upon: τὶ ἐπί τι, 
Lk. xix. 35; (Vulg. projicere, to throw away, throw off) : 
τὴν μέριμναν ἐπὶ θεόν, i. 6. to cast upon, give up to, God, 
1 Pet. ν. 7, fr. Ps. liv. (lv.) 23. [Occasionally fr. Hom. 
Od. 5, 310 down.]* 

ἐπίσημος, -ov, (ojpaasign,mark); 1. prop. having 
a mark on it, marked, stamped, coined: ἀργύριον, χρυσός, 
(Hat., Thue., Xen., Polyb., Joseph.). 2. trop. marked 
(Lat. insignis). both in a good and bad sense ; in a good 
sense, of note, illustrious: Ro. xvi. 7 (Hdt. et sqq.-) ; 
in a bad sense, notorious, infamous: Mt. xxvii. 16 (Eur. 
Or. 249; Joseph. antt. 5,7, 1; Plut. Fab. Max. 14; al.).* 

ἐπισιτισμός, -οὔ, 6, (ἐπισιτίζομαι to provision one’s 
self) ; 1. a foraging, providing food, (Xen., Plut., 
al.). 2. supplies, provisions, food [A. V. victuals]: Lk. 
ix. 12 (Sept., Xen., Dem., Hdian., al.).* 

ἐπι-σκέπτομαι ; fut. 3 pers. sing. ἐπισκέψεται, Lk. i. 78 
Trmrg. WH; 1 aor. ἐπεσκεψάμην; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. 
often for ἼΡ9; to look upon or after, to inspect, examine 
with the eyes; 8. τινά, in order to see how he is, i. 6. to 
visit, go to see one: Acts vii. 23; xv. 36, (Judg. xv. 1); 
the poor and afflicted, Jas. i. 27; the sick, Mt. xxv. 36, 
43, (Sir. vii. 35; Xen. mem. 3, 11, 10; Plut. mor. p. 129 ο. 
[de sanitate praecept. 15 init.]; Leian. philops. 6, and in 
med. writ.). Ὁ. Hebraistically, to look upon in order to 
help or to benefit, i. q. to look after, have a care for, pro- 
vide for, of God: τινά, Lk. vii. 16; Heb. ii. 6, (Gen. xxi. 
1; Ex. iv. 31; Ps. viii. 5; Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 15; Sir. xlvi. 
14; Jud. viii. 33, ete.) ; foll. by a telic inf. Acts xv. 14; 
absol. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 21) yet with a statement of 
the effect and definite blessing added, Lk. i. 68; ἐπε- 
σκέψατο [WH Tr mrg. ἐπισκέψεται] ἡμᾶς ἀνατολὴ ἐξ 
ὕψους a light from on high hath looked [al. shall look] 
upon us (ef. our the sun looks down on us, etc.), i. 6. sal- 
vation from God has come to us, Lk. i. 78. (in the O. T. 
used also in a bad sense of God as punishing, Ps. 
Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 33; Jer. ix. 25; xi. 22, ete.) c. to 
look (about) for, look out (one to choose, employ, etc.) : 
Acts vi. 3.* 

ἐπι-σκευάζω: to furnish with things necessary; Mid. to 
furnish one’s self or for one’s self: ἐπισκευασάμενοι, hay- 


24 


9 


2 ἐπισκοπῆ, 
ing gathered and made ready the things necessary for 
the journes, Acts xxi. 15 LT Tr WH, for R G ἀποσκευ- 
ασάμενοι (which see in its place).* 

ἐπι-σκηνόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐπεσκήνωσα; to fix a tent or habi- 
tation on: ἐπὶ ras οἰκίας, to take possession of and live 
in the houses (of the citizens), Polyb. 4, 18, 8; ταῖς 
οἰκίαις, 4, 72,13; trop. ἐπί τινα, of the power of Christ 
descending upon one, working within him and giving 
him help, [A. V. rest upon], 2 Co. xii. 9.* 

ἐπι-σκιάζω ; [impf. ἐπεσκίαζον, Lk. ix. 84 Lmrg.T Tr 
txt. WH]; fut. émioxidow; 1 aor. ἐπεσκίασα; to throw a 
shadow upon, to envelop in shadow, to overshadow: τινί, 
Acts v. 15. From a vaporous cloud that casts a 
shadow the word is transferred to a shining cloud 
surrounding and enveloping persons with brightness: 
τινά, Mt. xvii. 5; Lk. ix. 34; τινί, Mk. ix. 1. Tropi- 
cally, of the Holy Spirit exerting creative energy upon 
the womb of the virgin Mary and impregnating it, (a 
use of the word which seems to have been drawn from 
the familiar O. T. idea of a cloud as symbolizing the 
immediate presence and power of God): with the dat. 
Lk. i. 35. (In prof. auth. generally w. an ace. of the 
object and in the sense of obscuring: Hdt. 1,209; Soph., 
Aristot., Theophr., Philo, Leian., Hdian., Geop. Sept. 
for 20 to cover, Ps. xe. (xci.) 4; exxxix. (exl.) 8; for 
jaw, Ex. xl. 29 (35) ἐπεσκίαζεν ἐπὶ τὴν σκηνὴν ἡ νεφέλη ; 
[ef. W. 8 52, 4, 7].)* 

ἔπι-σκοπέω, -@; to look upon, inspect, oversee, look after, 
care for: spoken of the eare of the church which rested 
upon the presbyters, 1 Pet. v. 2 [T WH om.] (with τὴν 
ἐκκλησίαν added, Ignat. ad Rom. 9,1); foll. by μή [q. v- 
Il. 1 a.] i. q. Lat. caveo, to look carefully, beware: Heb. 
xii. 15. (Often by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

ἐπι-σκοπή, -7s, ἡ, (ἐπισκοπέω), inspection, visitation, 
(Germ. Besichtigung) ; a. prop.: εἰς ἐπισκ. τοῦ παιδός 
to visit the boy, Leian. dial. deor. 20, 6; with this ex- 
ception no example of the word in prof. writ. has yet 
been noted. b. In biblical Grk., after the Hebr. 
17p2, that act by which God looks into and searches 
out the ways, deeds, character, of men, in order to ad- 
judge thein their lot accordingly, whether joyous or sad; 
inspection, investigation, visitation, (Vulg. usually visita- 
tio): so univ. ἐν ἐπισκοπῇ Ψυχῶν, when he shall search 
the souls of men, i. 6. in the time of divine judgment, 
Sap. iii. 13; also ἐν ὥρᾳ ἐπισκοπῆς, Sir. xviii. 20 (19); 
so perhaps ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπισκοπῆς, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [see below]; 
in a good sense, of God’s gracious care: τὸν καιρὸν τῆς 
ἐπισκοπῆς σου. i. 6. τὸν καιρὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεσκέψατο σε ὁ θεός, 
in which God showed himself gracious toward thee and 
offered thee salvation through Christ (see ἐπισκέπτομαι, 
b.), Lk. xix. 44; ἐν καιρῷ ἐπισκοπῆς, in the time of divine 
reward, 1 Pet. v. 6 Lchm.; also, in the opinion of many 
commentators, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [al. associate this pass. with 
Lk. xix. 44 above; cf. De Wette (ed. Briickner) οἱ 
Huther ad loc.]; fr. the O. T. cf. Gen. 1. 24 sq.; Job 
xxxiv. 9; Sap. ii. 20; iii. 7, ete. with a bad reference. 
of divine punishment: Ex. iii. 16; Is.x.3; Jer. x.15 
Sap. xiv. 11; xix. 14 (15); [ete.; cf. Soph. Lex. 8. ν.} 


ἐπίσκοπος 


Ὁ. after the analogy of the Hebr. Mp2 (Num. iv. 16; 
1 Chr. xxiv. 19 [here Sept. ἐπίσκεψις], etc.), oversight 
i. 6. overseership, office, charge; Vulz. episcopatus: Acts 
i. 20, fr. Ps. eviii. (cix.) 8; spec. the office of a bishop 
(the overseer or presiding officer of a Christian 
church): 1 Tim. iii. 1, and in 600]. writ.* 
ἐπίσκοπος, -ov, ὁ, (ἐπισκέπτομαι), an overseer, A Man 
charged with the duty of seeing that things to be done 
by others are done rightly, any curator, guardian, or 
superintendent; Sept. for Vp5, Judg. ix. 28; Neh. xi. 
9,14, 22; 2 K. xi. 15, ete.; 1 Macc. i.51. The word 
has the same comprehensive sense in Grk. writ. fr. 
Homer Odys. 8, 163; Il. 22, 255 down; hence in the 
N. ‘T. ἐπίσκ. τῶν ψυχών guardian of souls, one who 
watches over their welfare: 1 Pet. ii. 25 ([τὸν παντὸς 
πνεύματος κτίστην κ. ἐπίσκοπον, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 3]; 
ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ προστάτης τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦς Xp. ibid. 
61, 3; [ef. Sir. i. 67), ef. Heb. xiii. 17. spec. the super- 
‘ intendent, head or overseer of any Christian church; Vulg. 
episcopus: Acts xx. 28; Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit. i. 
7; see πρεσβύτερος, 2 b.; [and for the later use of the 
word, see Dict. of Chris. Antiq. 5. v. Bishop].* 
ἐπι-σπάω, -@: fr. Aeschyl. down; to draw on: μὴ ἐπι- 
σπάσθω, sc. ἀκροβυστίαν, let him not draw on his fore- 
skin (Hesych. μὴ ἐπισπάσθω - μὴ ἑλκυέτω τὸ δέρμα) [ A. V. 
let him not become uncircumcised], 1 Co. vii. 18. From 
the days of Antiochus Epiphanes [B. c. 175-164] down 
(1 Mace. i. 15; Joseph. antt. 12, 5, 1), there had been 
Jews who, in order to conceal from heathen persecutors 
or scoffers the external sign of their nationality, sought 
artificially to compel nature to reproduce the prepuce, 
by extending or drawing forward with an iron instru- 
ment the remnant of it still left, so as to cover the 
glans. The Rabbins called such persons 0°31w, from 
2 to draw out, see Buxtorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1274 [(ed. 
Fischer ii. 645 sq.). Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Circumcision, 
esp. McC. and S. ibid. 11. 2.]* 
ἐπι-σπείρω: 1 aor. ἐπέσπειρα ; 10 sow above or besides: 
Mt. xiii. 25 LT TrWH. (Hadt., Theophr., [al.].) * 
ἐπίσταμαι (seems to be the Ionic form of the Mid. of 
ἐφίστημι. Isocrates, Aristot., al., also use ἐπιστῆσαι τὴν 
διάνοιαν, τὸν νοῦν, ἑαυτόν for to put one’s attention on, fix 
one’s thoughts on; indeed, the simple ἐπιστῆσαι is used 
in the same sense, by an ellipsis analogous to that of 
τὸν νοῦν with the verbs προσέχειν, ἐπέχειν, and of τὴν ὄψιν 
with προσβάλλειν; see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 281 sq. 
Hence ἐπίσταμαι is prop. to turn one’s self or one’s mind 
to, put one’s thought upon a thing); fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. chiefly for yt}; (cf. Germ. sich worauf verstehen) ; 
a. to be acquainted with: ri, Acts xviii. 25; Jas. iv. 14; 
Jude 10; τινά, Acts xix. 15; with reference to what is 
said or is to be interpreted, to understand: Mk. xiv. 68; 
1 Tim. vi. 4. b. to know: περί twos, Acts xxvi. 26; 
foll.-by an ace. with a ptep. Acts xxiv. 10 [W. 346 (324); 
B. 301 (258)]; foll. by ὅτι, Acts xv. 7; xix. 25; xxii. 
19; foll. by ὡς, Acts x. 28; by πῶς, Acts xx. 18; by ποῦ, 
Heb. xi. 8. [Syn. see γινώσκω. ἢ 
ἐπίστασις, -ews, 7, (ἐφίστημι, ἐφίσταμαι), an advanc- 


243 


ἐπιστρέφω 


ing, approach; incursion, onset, press: τῆς κακίας (Vulg. 
malorum incursio), 2 Mace. vi. 8, where cf. Grimm; used 
of the pressure of a multitude asking help, counsel, etc., 
τινί (on which dat. ef. W. § 31, 3; [B. 180 (156) ]; Kiihner 
§ 424, 1) to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 LT Tr WH (but others 
would have us translate it here by oversight, attention, 
care, a com. meaning of the word in Polyb.); used of a 
tumultuous gathering in Acts xxiv.12LTTrWH. Cf. 
Beas se 

ἐπιστάτης, -ov, ὁ, (ἐφίστημι), any sort of a superintend- 
ent or overseer (often so in prof. writ., and several times 
in Sept., as Ex. i. 11; v.14; 1 K. v.16; 2 K. xxv. 19; 
Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 26; 2 Chr. ii 2; xxxi.12); a master, 
used in this sense for "3 by the disciples [ef. Lk. xvii. 
13] when addressing Jesus, who called him thus “ not 
from the fact that he was a teacher, but because of his 
authority” (Bretschneider) ; found only in Luke: v. 5; 
Vili. 24,45; ix. 33,49; xvii. 13.* 

ἐπι-στέλλω : 1 aor. ἐπέστειλα; prop. to send to one a 
message, command, (Hdt. et sqq.); ἐπιστολάς, to send 
by letter, write a letter, Plato, epp. p. 363 b., hence 
simply to write a letter [cf. W. § 3, 1 b.]: revi, Heb. xiii. 
22 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7,1; 47, 3; 62,1; and often in 
Grk. writ.) ; to enjoin by letter, to write instructions: Acts 
xxi. 25 RGTTrmrg.WHmrg.;  foll. by τοῦ with an 
inf. expressing purpose [cf. W. 326 (306); B. 270 
(232)]: Acts xv. 20.* 

ἐπιστήμων, -ον, gen. -ονος, (ἐπίσταμαι), intelligent, ex- 
perienced, [esp. one having the knowledge of an ex pert; 
ef. Schmidt ch. 13 §§ 10, 13]: Jas. iii. 13. (From Hom. 
down; Sept.) * 

ἐπι-στηρίζω; 1 aor. ἐπεστήριξα; a later word; fo estab- 
lish besides, strengthen more; to render more firm, confirm: 
τινά, one’s Christian faith, Acts xiv. 22; xv. 32, 41; 
xviii. 23 RG* 

ἐπι-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπιστέλλω), a letter, epistle: Acts xv. 
30; Ro. xvi. 22; 1 Co. v. 9, ete.; plur., Acts ix. 2; 2Co. 
x. 10, ete.; ἐπιστολαὶ συστατικαί, letters of commendation, 
2 Co. iii. 1 [W. 176 (165). On the possible use of the 
plur. of this word interchangeably with the sing. (cf. 
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 113, 8), see Bp. Lghtft. and 
Meyer on Phil. iii. 1. (Eur., Thue., al.)] - 

ἐπι-στομίζω ; (στόμα) ; prop. to bridle or stop up the 
mouth; metaph. to stop the mouth, reduce to silence: Tit. 
i. 11. (Plato, Gorg. p. 482e.; Dem. 85, 4; often in 
Plut. and Leian.) * 

ἐπι-στρέφω ; fut. ἐπιστρέψω; 1 aor. ἐπέστρεψα; 2 aor. 
pass. ἐπεστράφην; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 394, 33D 
and 3973, 739, and times without number for 337 and 
wT; 1. transitively, a. to turn to: ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, to 
the worship of the true God, Acts xxvi. 20. b. to cause 
to return, to bring back; fig. τινὰ ἐπὶ κύριον τὸν θεόν, to the 
love and obedience of God, Lk. i. 16; ἐπὶ τέκνα, to love 
for the children, Lk. i. 17; ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων, that they 
may bein [R. V. to walk in] the wisdom of the righteous, 
Lk. i. 17; τινὰ ἐπί τινα, supply from the context ἐπὶ τὴν 
ἀλήθειαν and ἐπὶ τὴν ὁδόν, Jas. v. 19 sq. 2. intrans. 
ΟΥ̓. § 38, 1 [cf. p. 26; B. 144 (126 sq.)]); a. fo turn, 


ἐπιστροφή 


to turn one’s self: ἐπὶ τὸν κύριον and ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, of Gen- 
tiles passing over to the religion of Christ, Acts ix. 35; 
xi. 21; xiv. 15; xv. 19; xxvi. 20, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 25; πρός 
τι, Acts ix. 40; πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 9; 2 Co. iii. 16; 
ἀπό Twos εἴς τι, Acts χχνὶ. 18. Ὁ. to turn one’s self about, 
turn back: absol. Acts xvi. 18; foll. by an inf. express- 
ing purpose, Rev. i. 12. ο. to return, turn back, come 
back; a. properly: Lk. ii. 20 Rec.; viii. 55; Acts xv. 36; 
with the addition of ὀπίσω (as in Ael. v. h. 1, 6 [var.]), 
foll. by an inf. of purpose, Mt. xxiv. 18; foll. by εἰς with 
acc. of place, Mt. xii. 44; [Lk. ii. 39 TWH Trmrg.]; εἰς 
τὰ ὀπίσω, Mk. xiii. 16; Lk. xvii. 31; ἐπί re, to, 2 Pet. ii. 
22. β. metaph.: ἐπί τι, Gal. iv. 9; ἐπί τινα, Lk. xvii. 4 
Rec., but G om. ἐπί σε; πρός τινα, ibid. LT Tr WH; ἐκ 
τῆς ἐντολῆς, to leave the commandment and turn back to 
a worse mental and moral condition, 2 Pet. ii. 21 RG; 
absol. to turn back morally, to reform: Mt. xiii. 15; Mk. 
iv. 12; Lk. xxii. 32; Acts iii. 19; xxviii. 27. In the mid. 
and 2 aor. pass. a. fo turn one’s self about, to turn 
around: absol., Mt. ix. 22 RG; Mk. v.30; viii. 33; Jn. 
xxi. 30. b. to return: foll. by πρός [WH txt. ἐπί] twa, 
Mt. x. 13 (on which pass. see εἰρήνη, 3 fin.) ; ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, 
1 Pet. ii. 25 (see 2a. above); toreturn to a better mind, 
repent, Jn. xii. 40 [R G].* 

ἐπι-στροφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπιστρέφω), conversion (of Gentiles 
fr. idolatry to the true God [ef. W. 26]): Acts xv. 3. 
(Cf. Sir. xlix. 2; xviii. 21 (20); in Grk. writ. in many 
other senses.) * 

ém-ovy-dyw ; fut. ἐπισυνάξω ; 1 aor. inf. ἐπισυνάξαι; 2 
aor. inf. émovvayayeiv; Pass., pf. ptep. ἐπισυνηγμένος ; 
1 aor. ptep. ἐπισυναχθείς ; [fut. ἐπισυναχθήσομαι, Lk. xvii. 
37 T Tr WH]; Sept. several times for Dx, y2p; OD; 
1. to gather together besides, to bring together to others 
already assembled, (Polyb.). 2. to gather together 
against (Mic. iv. 11; Zech. xii. 3; 1 Macc. iii. 58, etc.). 
3. to gather together in one place (ἐπί to): Mt. xxiii. 37; 
xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; Lk. xiii.34; Pass.: Mk. i.33; Lk. 
xii. 1; xvii. 37 T Tr WH, (Ps. ci. (cii.) 23; ev. (evi.) 47; 
2 Mace. i. 27, etc.; Aesop 142).* 

ἔπι-συν-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπισυνάγω, 4. ν.); 8. a gather- 
ing together in one place, i. q. τὸ ἐπισυνάγεσθαι (2 Mace. 
ii. 7): ἐπί τινα, to one, 2 Th.ii.1.  b. (the religious) 
assembly (of Christians): Heb. x. 25. * 

ἐπυσυν-τρέχω ; fo run together besides (i. 6. to others 
already gathered): Mk. ix. 25. Not used by prof. 
writ.* 

ἐπι-σύστασις, -ews, ἡ, (ἐπισυνίσταμαι to collect togeth- 
er, conspire against) a gathering together or combining 
against or at. Hence 1. a hostile banding together or 
concourse: ποιεῖν ἐπισύστασιν, to excite a riotous gather- 
ing of the people, make a mob, Acts xxiv. 12 RG; 1 
Esdr. v. 70 Alex.; Sext. Empir. adv. eth. p. 127 [p.571, 
20 ed. Bekk.; cf. Philo in Flac. § 1]; τινός, against one, 
Num. xxvi. 9; a conspiracy, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 20. 2. 
a troublesome throng of persons seeking help, counsel, 
comfort: τινός, thronging to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 R G (see 
ἐπίστασις) ; Luther, dass ich werde angelaufen.* 

ἐπισφαλής, -és, (σφάλλω to cause to fall), prone to fall: 


244 


ἐπιτίθημι 


πλοῦς, a dangerous voyage, Actsxxvii.9. (Plato, Polyb., 
Plut., al.) * 

ἐπ-ισχύω : [impf. ἐπίσχυον]; 1. trans. [0 give addi- 
tional strength ; to make stronger, (Sir. xxix. 1; Xen. oec. 
11, 13). 2. intrans. to receive greater strength, grow 
stronger, (1 Mace. vi. 6; Theophr., Diod.): ἐπίσχυον 
λέγοντες, they were the more urgent saying, i. 6. they 
alleged the more vehemently, Lk. xxiii. 5.* 

ἐπι-σωρεύω : fut. ἐπισωρεύσω; to heap up, accumulate 
in piles: διδασκάλους, to choose for themselves and run 
after a great number of teachers, 2 Tim. iv. 3. (Plut- 
Athen., Artemid., al.) * 

ἐπι-ταγή, -ἧς, ἡ, (ἐπιτάσσω), an injunction, mandate, 
command : Ro. xvi. 26; 1 Co. vii. 25; 1 Tim.i.1; Tit. i. 3;° 
μετὰ πάσης ἐπιταγῆς, with every possible form of author- 
ity, Tit. ii. 15; κατ᾽ ἐπιταγήν, by way of command, 1 Co. 
vii. 6; 2Co. viii. 8. (Sap. xiv. 16, ete.; Polyb., Diod.) * 

ἐπι-τάσσω; 1 aor. ἐπέταξα; (rdcaw); to enjoin upon, 
order, command, charge: absol. Lk. xiv. 22; τινί, Mk. i. 
27; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 86 ; viii. 25; τινὶ τὸ ἀνῆκον, Philem. 8; 
τινί foll. by the inf., Mk. vi. 39; Lk. viii. 31; Acts xxiii. 
2; foll. by ace. and inf. Mk. vi. 27; foll. by direct dis- 
course, Mk. ix. 25. (Several times in Sept. ; Grk. writ. 
fr. Hdt. down.) [Syn. see κελεύω, fin. ]* 

ἐπι-τελέω, -@; fut. emireAéow; 1 aor. ἐπετέλεσα ; [pres. 
mid. and pass. ἐπιτελοῦμαι] ; 1. to bring to an end, 
accomplish, perfect, execute, complete: substantively, τὸ 
ἐπιτελέσαι, 2 Co. viii.11; τί, Lk. xiii. 32[R 617; Ro. xv. 
28; 2 Co. vii. 1; viii. 6,11; Phil.i.6; Heb. viii.5; ras 
λατρείας, to perform religious services, discharge relig- 
ious rites, Heb. ix. 6 (similarly in prof. writ., as θρησκείας, 
Hat. 2, 37; ὁρτάς, 4, 186; θυσίαν, θυσίας, 2, 63; 4, 26; 
Hdian. 1. 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]; Aecrov,yias, Philo de som. 
i. $37). Mid. (in Grk. writ. to take upon one’s self: τὰ 
τοῦ γήρως, the burdens of old age, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 8; 
θάνατον, Xen. apol. 33; with the force of the act.: τί, 
Polyb. 1, 40,16; 2,58, 10) to make an end for one’s self, 
i. 6. to leave off (cf. παύω) : τῇ σαρκί, so as to give your- 
selves up to the flesh, stop with, rest in it, Gal. iii. 3 [oth- 
ers take it passively here: are ye perfected in ete., cf. 
Meyer]. 2. to appoint to, impose upon: τινὶ παθήματα, 
in pass. 1 Pet. v. 9 (τὴν δίκην, Plat. legg. 10 fin.).* 

ἐπιτήδειος, -εία, -etov, also -os, -ov, [cf. W. § 11, 1], (ene 
mes, adv., enough; and this acc. to Buttmann fr. ἐπὶ 
τάδε [? cf. Vaniéek p. 271]); 1. fit, suitable, conven- 
ient, advantageous. 2. needful; plur. ra ἐπιτήδεια esp. 
the necessaries of life (Thue. et sqq.): with addition of 
τοῦ σώματος. Jas. ii. 10." 

ἐπι-τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. ἐπιτιθέασι (Mt. xxiii. 4; οἵ. W. 
§ 14, 1b.; Β. 44 (38); Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 505; Kiih- 
ner i. p. 643; [Jelf § 274; and on this and foll. forms 
see Veitch 5. vv. τίθημι, τιθέω]), impy. ἐπιτίθει (1 Tim. 
ν. 22; see Matthiae § 210, 2 and 6; Bittm. Ausf. Spr. i. 
Ρ. 508; Kiihner § 209, 5; [Jelf § 274 obs. 4]); impf. 3 
pers. plur. ἐπετίθουν (Acts viii. 17 RG), ἐπετίθεσαν (ib. 
LT Tr WH; ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 509; Β. 45 (39)); 
fut. ἐπιθήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπέθηκα; 2 aor. ἐπέθην, impv. ἐπίθες 
(Mt. ix. 18; Gen. xlviii. 18; Judg. xviii. 19); Mid., 


[pres. ἐπιτίθεμαι] ; fut. ἐπιθήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐπεθέμην ; [1 
aor. pass. ἐπετέθην (Mk. iv. 21 RG)]; in Sept. chiefly 
for }D3, Dw and DWI; 1. Active: a. to put or lay 
upon: τὶ ἐπί τι, Mt. xxiii. 4; xxvii. 29R GL; Mk. iv. 21 
RG; Lk. xv. 5; Jn. ix. [6 WH txt. Tr mrg.], 15; [xix. 2 
Lumrg., see below]; Acts xv. 10 [οἵ. W. 318 (298); B. 
261 (224)]; xxviii. 3; τὶ ἐπί twos, gen. of thing, Mt. 
xxvii. 29 T Tr WH; ἐν with dat. of thing, Mt. xxvii. 29 
LT Tr WH; τὴν χεῖρα [or τὰς χεῖρας or χεῖρας] ἐπί τινα, 
Mt. ix. 18; Mk. viii. 25 [(( WH Tr txt. ἔθηκεν); xvi. 18; 
Acts viii. 17; [ix. 17]; Rev.i.17 Ree.; ἐπί τινα πληγάς, 
calamities, Rey. xxii. 18 [but see Ὁ. below]; ἐπάνω τινός, 
Mt. xxi. 7 RG; xxvii. 375; ἐπί τινος, Lk. viii. 16 RG; τί 
τινι, Lk. xxiii. 26; Jn. xix. 2 [not L mrg., see above] ; 
Acts xv. 28; τινὶ ὄνομα, Mk. iii. 16 sq. ; τινὶ τὰς χεῖρας, Mt. 
xix. 13 [ef. B. 233 (201) ; W. 288 (270 sq.) ], 15; Mk. v. 
23; [vili. 23, here Tr mrg. αὐτοῦ] ; Lk. iv. 40; xiii. 13; 
Acts vi. 6; viii. 19; xiii. 3; xix.6; xxviii.8; 1 Tim. v. 
22; [τινὶ τὴν χεῖρα, Mk. vii. 32]; χεῖρα [ RG, χεῖρας or 
τὰς χεῖρας L T Tr WH], Acts ix. 12; τινὶ πληγάς, to in- 
flict blows, lay stripes on one, Lk. x. 30; Acts xvi. 
23. b. toadd to: Rev. xxii. 18 (opp. to ἀφαιρεῖν vs. 19). 
2. Middle; a. tohave put on, bid to be laid on; τὶ ἐπί τι 
(Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,4): τὰ πρὸς τὴν χρείαν, sc. τινί, to provide 
one with the things needed [al. put on board se. the ship], 
Acts xxviii. 10. b. to lay or throw one’s self upon; with 
dat. of pers. to attack one, to make an assault on one: 
Acts xviii. 10; Ex. xxi. 14; xviii. 11; 2 Chr. xxiii. 13, 
and often in prof. writ.; cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W. 593 
(552). Come.: συν-επιτίθημι.} * 

ἐπι-τιμάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπετίμα, 3 pers. plur. 
ἐπετίμων; 1 aor. ἐπετίμησα; Sept. for 11; in Grk. 
writ. 1. to show honor to, to honor: twa, Hdt. 6, 39. 
2. to raise the price of: 6 σῖτος ἐπετιμήθη, Dem. 918, 22; 
al. 3. to adjudge, award, (fr. τιμή in the sense of 
merited penalty): τὴν δίκην, Hat. 4, 43. 4. to tax with 
fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so 
Thue., Xen., Plato, Dem., al.) : absol. 2 Tim. iv. 2; τινί, 
charge one with wrong, Lk. [ix. 55]; xvii. 3; xxiii. 40; 
to rebuke —in order to curb one’s ferocity or violence 
(hence many formerly gave the word the meaning to re- 
strain; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 325), Mt. 
Vili. 26; xvii. 18; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. iv. 39,41; viii. 24; ix. 
42; Jude 9 [where Rec. strangely ἐπιτιμῆσαι (1 aor. 
act. inf.) for -unoa (opt. 3 pers. sing.)]; or to keep one 
away from another, Mt. xix. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; Mk. x. 
13; foll. by ἵνα (with a verb expressing the opposite of 
what is censured): Mt. xx. 31; Mk. x. 48; Lk. xviii. 
39; with the addition of λέγων [καὶ λέγει, or the like] 
and direct discourse: Mk. i. 25 [T om. WH br. λέγων]; 
Vili. 33; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 35; xxiii. 40, (cf. Ps. ev. (evi.) 9; 
exviil. (cxix.) 21; Zech. iii. 2; and the use of Ἢ} inNah. 
i. 4; Mal. iii. 11). Elsewhere in a milder sense, to ad- 
monish or charge sharply: τινί, Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 30; 
LK. ix. 21 (ἐπιτιμήσας αὐτοῖς παρήγγειλεν, foll. by the inf.), 
xix. 39; with iva added, Mt. xvi. 20 L WH txt.; Mk. 
Vili. 30; ἵνα μή, Mt. xii. 16; Mk. iii. 12. [Cf. Trench 
§ iv; Schmidt ch. 4, 11.]* 


> ΄ Ω 
ἐπιτιμάω 2 


45 


ἐπιφάνεια 


ἐπιτιμία, -ας. ἡ. (ἐπιτιμάω). punishment (in Grk. writ. τὸ 
ἐπιτίμιον) : 2 Co. 11. 6 [B. § 147, 29]. (Sap. iii. 10; [4}.1.}" 

[ἐπι-το-αυτό, Rec.** in Acts i. 15; ii. 1, etc.; see αὐτός, 
III. 1, and cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Unters. p. 125 sq.] 

ἐπι-τρέπω ; 1 aor. ἐπέτρεψα; Pass., [pres. ἐπιτρέπομαι]; 
2 aor. ἐπετράπην; pf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπιτέτραπται (1 Co. 
xiv. 34 RG); fr. Hom. down; 1. to turn to, transfer, 
commit, intrust. 2. to permit, allow, give leave: 1 Co. 
xvi. 7; Heb. vi. 3; τινί, Mk. v.13; Jn. xix. 38; with an 
inf. added, Mt. viii. 21; xix. 8; Lk. viii. 32; ix. 59, 61; 
Acts xxi. 89 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 12; and without the dat. Mk. 
x. 4; foll. by ace. with inf. Acts xxvii. 3 (where L T Tr 
WH πορευθέντι) ; cf. Xen. an. 7, 7,8; Plato, legg. 5 p. 
730d. Pass. ἐπιτρέπεταί τινι, with inf.: Acts xxvi. 1; 
XXvill. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 34.* 

[ἐπιτροπεύω; (fr. Hdt. down); to he ἐπίτροπος or proc- 
urator: of Pontius Pilate in Lk. iii. 1 WH (rejected) 
mrg.; see their App. ad loc.” ] 

ἐπι-τροπή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐπιτρέπω), permission, power, commis- 
sion: Acts xxvi.12. (From Thue. down.) * 

ἐπίτροπος, -ov, ὁ, (ἐπιτρέπω), univ. one to whose care or 
honor anything has been intrusted; a curator, guardian, 
(Pind. Ol. 1, 171, et al.; Philo de mundo § 7 ὁ θεὸς καὶ 
πατὴρ καὶ τεχνίτης καὶ ἐπίτροπος τῶν ἐν οὐρανῷ τε καὶ ἐν 
κόσμῳ). Spec. 1. a steward or manager of a house- 
hold, or of lands ; an overseer: Mt. xx. 8; Lk. viii. 3; 
Xen. oec. 12, 2; 21,9; (Aristot. oec. 1, 5 [p. 1344, 26] 
δούλων δὲ εἴδη δύο, ἐπίτροπος καὶ ἐργάτης). 2. one who 
has the care and tutelage of children, either where the 
father is dead (a guardian of minors: 2 Mace. xi. 1; 
xiii. 2; ἐπίτροπος ὀρφάνων, Plato, lege. 6 p. 766 c.; Plut. 
Lye. 3; Cam. 15), or where the father still lives (Ael. 
vy. h. 3, 26): Gal. iv. 2.* 

ἐπι-τυγχάνω: 2 aor. ἐπέτυχον ; 1. to light or hit 
upon any person or thing (Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plato). 
2. to attain to, obtain: Jas. iv. 2; with gen. of thing, 
Heb. vi. 15; xi. 33; with ace. of thing: τοῦτο, Ro. xi. 7 
(where Rec. τούτου). Cf. Matthiae § 328; [W. 200 
(188) ].* 

ém-palvw; 1 aor. inf. ἐπιφᾶναι (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
24 sqq.; W.89 (85); Β. 41 (35); [Sept. Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 
17; exvii. (exviii.) 27, cf. Ixvi. (Ixvii.) 2]); 2 aor. pass. 
ἐπεφάνην; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. to show to or 
upon; to bring to light. 2. intrans. and in Pass. to 
appear, become visible; a. prop.: of stars, Acts xxvii. 
20 (Theocr. 2, 11); τινί, to one, Lk. i. 79. b. fig. i. q. 
to become clearly known, to show one’s self: Tit. iii. 4; 
τινί, Tit. ii. 11.* 

ἐπιφάνεια, -as, ἡ, (ἐπιφανής), an appearing, appearance, 
(Tertull. apparentia); often used by the Greeks of a 
glorious manifestation of the gods, and esp. of their ad- 
vent to help; in 2 Mace. of signal deeds and events 
betokening the presence and power of God as helper; 
οἵ. Grimm on Mace. p. 60 sq. 75, [but esp. the thorough 
exposition by Prof. Abbot (on Titus ii. 13 Note B) in 
the Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and Exegesis, i. p. 16 sq. 
(1882)]. In the N. T. the ‘advent’ of Christ, — not 
only that which has already taken place and by which 


ἐπιφανής 


his presence and power appear in the saving light he 
has shed upon mankind, 2 Tim. i. 10 (note the word 
φωτίσαντος in this pass.); but also that illustrious return 
from heaven to earth hereafter to occur: 1 Tim. vi. 14; 
2 Tim. iv. 1,8; ‘Tit. ii. 13 [on which see esp. Prof. Abbot 
u. 5.1; ἡ ἐπιφάνεια (i. 6. the breaking forth) τῆς mapov- 
σίας αὐτοῦ, 2 Th. ii. 8. [Cf. Trench § xciv.]* 

ἐπιφανής, -€s, (emupaivw), conspicuous, manifest, ilus- 
trious: Acts ii. 20 [Tdf. om.] fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4) ; the 
Sept. here and in Judg. xiii. 6 [Alex.]; Hab. i. 7; Mal. 
i. 14 thus render the word $1) terrible, deriving it in- 
correctly from 787 and so confounding it with 7873." 

ἐπι-φαύσκω (i. q. the ἐπιφώσκω of Grk. writ., ef. W. 
90 (85); B. 67 (59)): fut. ἐπιφαύσω; to shine upon: 
τινί, Eph. ν. 14, where the meaning is, Christ will pour 
upon thee the light of divine truth as the sun gives light 
to men aroused from sleep. (Job xxv. 5; xxxi. 26; 
[xli. 9]; Acta Thomae § 34.) * 

ἐπι-φέρω ; [impf. ἐπέφερον); 2 aor. inf. ἐπενεγκεῖν; 
[pres. pass. ἐπιφέρομαι} ; 1. to bring upon, bring for- 
ward : αἰτίαν, of accusers (as in Hdt. 1, 26, and in Attic 
writ. fr. Thue. down; Polyb. 5, 41, 3; 40, 5,2; Joseph. 
antt. 2, 6, 7; 4, 8, 23; Hdian. 3, 8, 13 (6 ed. Bekk.)), 
Acts xxv. 18 (where LT Tr WH ἔφερον) ; κρίσιν, Jude 
9. 2. to lay upon, to inflict: τὴν ὀργήν, Ro. iii. 5 
(πληγήν, Joseph. antt. 2, 14, 2). 3. to bring uponi.e. 
in addition, to add, increase: θλίψιν τοῖς δεσμοῖς, Phil. i. 
16 (17) Ree., but on this pass. see ἐγείρω, 4 ¢.; (πῦρ 
ἐπιφέρειν πυρί, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 18; [ef. W. § 52, 
4, 7]). 4. to put upon, cast upon, impose, (φάρμακον, 
Plat. ep. 8 p. 354 b.): τὶ ἐπί τινα, in pass., Acts xix. 12, 
where L T Tr WH ἀποφέρεσθαι, q. v.* 

ἐπι-φωνέω, -@: [impf. ἐπεφώνουν]; to call out to, shout: 
foll. by direct disc., Lk. xxiii. 21; Acts xii. 22; foll. by 
the dat. of a pers., Acts xxii. 24; ri, Acts xxi. 34 LT 
Tr WH. [(Soph. on.)]* 

ἐπι-φώσκω ; [impf. ἐπέφωσκον ; to grow light, to dawn 
[ef. B. 68 (60)]: Lk. xxiii. 54; foll. by εἰς, Mt. xxviii. 
1, on which see εἰς, A. II. 1.* 

ἐπιχειρέω, -@: impf. ἐπεχείρουν; 1 aor. ἐπεχείρησα; 
(xelp) 5 1. prop. to put the hand to (Hom. Od. 24, 
386, 395). 2. often fr. Hdt. down, to take in hand, 
undertake, attempt, (anything to be done), foll. by the 
inf.: Lk.i.1; Acts ix. 29; xix.13; (2 Mace. ii. 29; vii. 
19). Grimm treats of this word more at length in the 
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 36 sq.* 

ém-xéo; fr. Hom. down; to pour upon: ri, Lk. x. 34 
(se. ἐπὶ τὰ τραύματα ; Gen. xxviii. 18; Lev. ν. 11).* 

ἐπι-χορηγέω, τῶ; 1 aor. impy. ἐπιχορηγήσατε; Pass., 
[pres. ἐπιχορηγοῦμαι]; 1 fut. ἐπιχορηγηθήσομαι; (see xopn- 
yew); to supply, furnish, present, (Germ. darreichen) : 
τινί τι, 2 Co. ix. 10; Gal. iii. δ; i. 4: to show or afford 
by deeds: τὴν ἀρετήν, 2 Pet. i. 5; in pass., εἴσοδος, fur- 
nished, provided, 2 Pet. i. 11; Pass. to be supplied, min- 
istered unto, assisted, (so the simple χορηγεῖσθαι in Xen. 
rep. Athen. 1,13; Polyb. 3, 75,3; 4, 77,2; 9, 44,1; 
Sir. xliv. 6; 3 Mace. vi. 40): Col. ii. 19, where Vulg. 
subministratum. (Rare in prof. writ. as Dion. Hal. 1, 


246 


Μ 
επος 


42; Phal. ep. 50; Diog. Laért. 5, 67; [Alex. Aphr. 
probl. 1, 81].) * 

ém-xopnyla, -as, ἡ, (ἐπιχορηγέω, q. V-), (Vulg. submin- 
istratio), a supplying, supply: Eph. iv. 16; Phil. i. 19. 
(Eecl. writers.) * 

ἐπι-χρίω: 1 aor. ἐπέχρισα; to spread on, anoint: τὶ ἐπί 
τι, anything upon anything, Jn. ix. 6 [WH txt. Tr mrg. 
ἐπέθηκεν] ; τί, to anoint anything (sc. with anything), 
ibid. 11. (Hom. Od. 21,179; Leian. hist. serib. 62.) * 

ἐπ-οικοδομέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐπῳκοδόμησα, and without 
augm. ἐποικοδόμησα (1 Co. iii. 14 T Tr WH; ef. Tdf.’s 
note on Acts vii. 47, [see οἰκοδομέω ]) ; Pass., pres. ἐποι- 
κοδομοῦμαι; 1 aor. ptep. ἐποικοδομηθέντες ; in the N. T. 
only in the fig. which likens a company of Christian 
believers to an edifice or temple; to build upon, build up, 
(Vulg. superaedifico); absol. [like our Eng. build up] 
viz. ‘to finish the structure of which the foundation has 
already been laid,’ i. 6. in plain language. to give con- 
stant increase in Christian knowledge and in a life con- 
formed thereto: Acts xx. 32 (where L T Tr WH oikod. 
[Vulg. aedifico]); 1 Co. iii. 10; (1 Pet. ii. 5 Tdf.); ἐπὶ 
τὸν θεμέλιον, 1 Co. iii. 12; τί, ibid. 14; ἐν Χριστῷ, with 
the pass., in fellowship with Christ to grow in spiritual 
life, Col. ii. 7; ἐποικοδυμηθ. ἐπὶ θεμελίῳ τῶν ἀποστόλων, 
on the foundation laid by the apostles, i. e. (dropping 
the fig.) gathered together into a church by the apostles’ 
preaching of the gospel, Eph. ii. 20; ἐποικοδομεῖν ἑαυτὸν 
τῇ πίστει, Jude 20, where the sense is, ‘resting on your 
most holy faith as a foundation, make progress, rise like 
an edifice higher and higher.’ (Thuc., Xen., Plato, al.) * 

ἐπτοκέλλω: 1 aor. ἐπώκειλα; to drive upon, strike 
against: τὴν ναῦν [i. 6. 10. run the ship ashore], Acts 
xxvii. 41 RG; see ἐπικέλλω. (Hat. 6, 16; 7, 182; 
Thue. 4, 26.) * 

ἐπ-ονομάζω : [pres. pass. ἐπονομάζομαι]; fr. Hdt. down; 
Sept. for NIP; to put a name upon, name; Pass. to be 
named: Ro. ii. 17; ef. Fritzsche ad loc.* 

ἐπ-οπτεύω [ptep. 1 Pet. ii. 12 LT TrWH]; 1 aor. 
ptep. ἐποπτεύσαντες ; 1. to be an overseer (Homer, 
Hesiod). 2. univ. to look upon, view attentively; to 
watch (Aeschyl., Dem., al.): ri, 1 Pet. iii. 2; ἔκ τινος, 
80. τὴν ἀναστροφήν, 1 Pet. ii. 12." 

ἐπόπτης, -ov, 6, (fr. unused ἐπόπτωλ) ; 1. an over- 
seer, inspector, see ἐπίσκοπος; (Aeschyl., Pind., al.; of 
God, in 2 Mace. iii. 39; vii. 35; 3 Mace. ii. 21; Add. 
to Esth. ν. 1; ἀνθρωπίνων ἔργων, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 
3). 2. a spectator, eye-witness of anything: so in 2 
Pet. i. 16; inasmuch as those were called ἐπόπται by 
the Grks. who had attained to the third [i. e. the high- 
est] grade of the Eleusinian mysteries (Plut. Alcib. 22, 
and elsewh.), the word seems to be used here to desig- 
nate those privileged to be present at the heavenly spec- 
tacle of the transfiguration of Christ.* 

ἔπος, -εος, (-ovs), τό, @ word: ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν (see εἶπον, 
1 a. p. 181"), Heb. vii. 9." 


[ϑυν. ἔπος seems primarily to designate a word as an ar- 
ticulate manifestation of a mental state, and so to differ from 
ῥῆμα (q. v.),the mere vocable; for its relation to λόγος see 
λόγος 1. 1.] 


ἐπουράνιος 


ἐπ-ουράνιος, -ον, (οὐρανός), prop. existing in or above 
heaven, heavenly ; 1. existing in heaven: 6 πατὴρ ἐπου- 
panos, i. e. God, Mt. xviii. 85 Ree. (θεοί, θεός, Hom. Od. 
17,484; Ll. 6, 131, ete.; 3 Mace. vi. 28; vii. 6); οἱ ἐπου- 
ράνιοι the heavenly beings, the inhabitants of heaven, 
(Leian. dial. deor. 4, 3; of the gods, in Theoer. 25, 5): 
of angels, in epp. to ἐπίγειοι and καταχθόνιοι, Phil. ii. 10 ; 
Ignat. ad Trall. 9, [ef. Polye. ad Philipp. 2]; σώματα, 
the bodies of the stars (which the apostle, ace. to the 
universal ancient conception, seems to have regarded as 
animate [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 376; Gfrérer, Philo 
ete. 2te Aufl. p. 349 sq.; Siegfried, Philo von Alex. p. 
306; yet cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad loc.], cf. Job xxxviii. 7; 
Enoch xviii. 14 sqq.) and of the angels, 1 Co. xv. 40; ἡ 
βασιλεία ἡ ἐπουρ. (on which see p. 97), 2 Tim. iv. 18; sub- 
stantially the same as ἡ πατρὶς ἡ ἐπουρ. Heb. xi. 16 
and Ἱερουσαλὴμ ἐπουρ. xii. 22; κλῆσις, a calling made 
(by God) in heaven, Heb. iii. 1 [al. would include a ref. 
to its end as well as to its origin; cf. Liinem. ad loc. ], 
ef. Phil. iii. 14 [Bp. Lghtft. cites Philo, plant. Noé 
§ 6]. The neut. τὰ ἐπουράνια denotes [οἵ. W. § 34, 2] 
a. the things that take place in heaven, i. e. the purposes 
of God to grant salvation to men through the death of 
Christ: Jn. iii. 12 (see ἐπίγειος). b. the heavenly re- 
gions, i. e. heaven itself, the abode of God and angels: 
Eph. i. 8, 20 (where Lehm. txt. οὐρανοῖς) ; ii. 6; iii. 10; 
the lower heavens, or the heaven of the clouds, Eph. vi. 
12 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s.v. Air]. c. the heavenly temple 
or sanctuary: Heb. viii. 5; ix. 23. 2. of heavenly 
origin and nature: 1 Co. xv. 48 sq. (opp. to χοϊκός) ; ἡ 
δωρεὰ ἡ ἐπουρ. Heb. vi. 4.* 
οἱ, al, τά, seven: Mt. xii. 45; xv. 34; Mk. viii. 5 
sq-; Lk. ii. 36; Acts vi. 8, ete.; often in the Apocalypse; 
οἱ ἑπτά, sc. διάκονοι, Acts xxi. 8. In Mt. xviii. 22 it is 
joined (instead of ἑπτάκις) to the numeral adv. ἑβδομη- 
κοντάκις, in imitation of the Hebr. yaw, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 
164; Proy. xxiv. 16; [see ἑβδομηκοντάκις, and cf. Keil, 
Com. on Mt. 1. e.]. 

ἑπτάκις, (ἑπτά), seven times: Mt. xviii. 21 sq.; Lk. xvii. 
4. [(Pind., Arstph., al.)]* 

émraxis-x (Atot, -at,-a, seven thousand: Ro. xi.4. [(Hdt.)]* 

ἔπω, see εἶπον. 

"Epac-ros, -ov, 6, Hrastus, (ἐραστός beloved, [ef. Chan- 
dler § 325; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 30]), the name 
of two Christians : 1. the companion of the apostle 
Paul, Acts xix. 22; 2. the city treasurer of Corinth, 
Ro. xvi. 23. Which of the two is meant in 2 Tim. iv. 
20 cannot be determined.* 

ἐραυνάω, a later and esp. Alexandrian [ef. Sturz, Dial. 
Maced. et Alex. p. 117] form for ἐρευνάω, 4. ν. Cf. Tdf. 
ed. 7 min. Proleg. p. xxxvii.; [ed. maj. p. Xxxiv.; esp. 
ed. 8 Proleg. p. 81 sq.]; B. 58 (50). 

ἐργάζομαι; depon. mid.; impf. εἰργαζόμην (ἠργαζόμην, 
Acts xviii. 3 LT Tr WH; [so elsewh. at times; this 
var. in augm. is found in the aor. also]; cf. W. § 12, 8; 
B. 33 (29 sq.); Steph. Thesaur. iii. 1970 e.; [Curtius, Das 
Verbum, i. 124; Cramer, Anecd. 4,412; Veitch s. v.]); 
1 aor. εἰργασάμην (npyac. Mt. xxv. 16; [xxvi. 10]; Mk. 


Arey: 
ἑπτά, 


247 


ἐργασία 


xiv. 6, in T WH, [add, 2 Jn. 8 WH and Hebr. xi. 33 T 
Tr WH; cf. reff. as above]); pf. εἴργασμαι, in a pass. 
sense [cf. W. § 38, 7e.], Jn. iii. 21, as often in Grk. 
writ. [ef. Veitch 5. v.]; (ἔργον) ; Sept. for oy3, ἽΞ»» 
sometimes for TW} ; 1. absol. a. to work, labor, do 
work: it is opp. to inactivity or idleness, Lk. xiii. 14; 
Jn. v.17; ix.4; 2 Th. iii. 10; with addition of ταῖς 
χερσί, 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Th. iv. 11; with acc. of time: 
νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, 2 Th. iii. 8 [but Ltxt.T Tr WH the 
gen., as in 1 Th. ii. 9 (see ἡμέρα, 1 a.); cf. W. § 30, 11 
and Ellice. on 1 Tim. v. 5]; with the predominant idea 
of working for pay, Mt. xxi. 28 (ἐν τῷ ἀμπελῶνι); Acts 
xvili. 3; 1 Co. ix. 6; 2 Th. iii. 12; ace. to the concep- 
tion characteristic of Paul, ὁ ἐργαζόμενος he that does 
works conformed to the law (Germ. der Werkthdtige) : 
Ro. iv.4sq. b. to trade, to make gains by trading, (cf. 
our “do business”): ἔν tu, with a thing, Mt. xxv. 16 
(often so by Dem.). 2. trans. a. (to work i. e.) to 
do, work out: ri, Col. iii. 23; 2 Jn. 8 (with which [ace. 
to reading of L T Tr txt.] ef. 1 Co. xv. 58 end); μηδέν, 
2 Th. iii. 11; ἔργον, Acts xiii. 41 (Oyd bya, Hab. i. 5); 
ἔργον καλὸν εἴς twa, Mt. xxvi. 10; ἔν τινι (dat. of pers. 
[ef. W. 218 (205)]), Mk. xiv. 6 [Ree. εἰς ἐμέ]; ἔργα, 
wrought, pass., Jn. iii. 21; τὰ ἔργα τοῦ θεοῦ, what God 
wishes to be done, Jn. vi. 28; ix. 4; τοῦ κυρίου, to give 
one’s strength to the work which the Lord wishes to 
have done, 1 Co. xvi. 10; τὸ ἀγαθόν, [Ro. ii. 10]; Eph. 
iv. 28; πρός τινα, Gal. vi. 10; κακόν τινί τι, Ro. xiii. 10 
(τινά τι is more com. in Grk. writ. [Kiihner § 411, 5]); 
τί εἴς twa, ὃ Jn. 5. with ace. of virtues or vices, (10 work 
i. e.) to exercise, perform, commit: δικαιοσύνην, Acts x. 
35; Heb. xi. 33, (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 2; Zeph. ii. 3); τὴν dvo- 
μίαν, Mt. vii. 23 (Ps. v. 6 and often in Sept.) ; ἁμαρτίαν, 
Jas. ii. 9. σημεῖον, bring to pass, effect, Jn. vi. 30; τὰ 
ἱερά, to be busied with the holy things i. 6. to administer 
those things that pertain to worship, which was the busi- 
ness of priests and among the Jews of the Levites also, 
1 Co. ix. 13; τὴν θάλασσαν lit. work the sea (mare exerceo, 
Justin. hist. 43, 3) i. e. to be employed on [ef. “ do busi- 
ness on,” Ps. evii. 23] and make one’s living from it, Rev. 
xviii. 17 (so of sailors and fishermen also in native Grk. 
writ., as Aristot. probl. 38, 2 [p. 966°, 26]; Dion. Hal. 
antt. 3,46; App. Punic. 2; [Lcian. de elect. 5; W. 223 
(209)]). to cause to exist, produce: τί, so (for RG xa- 
τεργάζεται) 2 Co. vii. 10 LT Tr WH; Jas. i. 20 LT Tr 
WH. b. to work for, earn by working, to acquire, (cf. 
Germ. erarbeiten) : τὴν βρῶσιν, Jn. vi. 27 (χρήματα, 1141. 
1, 24; τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, Xen. mem. 2, 8, 2; Dem. 1358, 12: 
ἀργύριον, Plato, Hipp. maj. p. 282 d.; βίον, Andoc. myst. 
[18, 42] 144 Bekk.; θησαυρούς, Theodot. Prov. xxi. 6; 
βρῶμα, Palaeph. 21, 2; al.); ace. to many interpreters 
also 2 Jn. 8; but see 2 ἃ. above. [Comp.: κατ-, mept-, 
mpoo-epyatouat. | * 

ἐργασία, -as, ἡ, (ἐργάζομαι) ; 1. i. q. τὸ ἐργάζεσθαι, 
a working, performing: ἀκαθαρσίας, Eph. iv. 19. 2. 
work, business: Acts xix. 25 (Xen. oec. 6, 8 et al.). 
3. gain got by work, profit: Acts xvi. 19; παρέχειν ἐργα- 
σίαν τινί, ib. 16; xix. 24 [yet al. refer this to 2 above]; 


ἐργάτης 


(Xen. mem. 3, 10,1; eyneg. 3,3; Polyb. 4, 50, 3). 4. 
endeavor, pains, [A. V. diligence]: δίδωμι ἐργασίαν, after 
the Latinism operam do, Lk. xii. 58 (Hermog. de invent. 
3, 5, 7).* 

ἐργάτης, -ov, 6, (ἐργάζυμαιλ) ; 1. as in Grk. writ. a 
workman, a laborer: usually one who works for hire, Mt. 
x. 10; Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. v. 18; esp. an agricultural laborer, 
Mt. ix. 37sq.; xx. 1sq.8; Lk. x. 2; Jas. ν. 4, (Sap. xvii. 
16) ; those whose labor artificers employ [i. e. workmen 
in the restricted sense], Acts xix. 25 (opp. to τοῖς rexvi- 
ταις [A. V. craftsmen], ib. 24), ef. Bengel ad loc.; those 
who as teachers labor to propagate and promote Christi- 
anity among men: 2 Co. xi. 13; Phil. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 
15, cf. Mt. ix. 37 sq.; Lk. x. 2. 
worker, perpetrator : τῆς ἀδικίας, Lk. xiii. 27 (τῆς ἀνομίας, 
1 Mace. iii. 6 ; τῶν καλῶν καὶ σεμνῶν. Xen. mem. 2, 1, 27).* 

ἔργον, -ου, τό, anciently Fepyov, (Germ.Werk, [ Eng. work; 
ef. Vanitek p. 9227); Sept. for Ὁ}, 772y, and count- 
less times for man and wy; work i. 6. 1. busi- 
ness, employment, that with which any one is occupied : 
Mk. xiii. 34 (διδόναι τινὶ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ); Acts xiv. 26 
(πληροῦν) ; 1 Tim. iii. 1; thus of the work of salvation 
committed by God to Christ: διδόναι and τελειοῦν, Jn. 
xvii. 4; of the work to be done by the apostles and other 
Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding officers of 
the religious assemblies, Acts xiii. 2; xv. 38; 1 Th. v. 
13; Phil. i. 22; τὸ ἔργον τινός, yen. of the subj., the work 
which one does, service which one either performs or 
ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; ἔργον ποιεῖν τινος to do 
the work of one (i. 6. incumbent upon him), εὐαγγελι- 
στοῦ, 2 Tim. iv.5; τὸ ἔργον τινός i. e. assigned by one and 
to be done for his sake: τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ τελειοῦν, used 
of Christ, Jn. iv. 34; (τοῦ) Χριστοῦ (WH txt. Tr mre. 
κυρίου), Phil. ii. 30: τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Co. xv. 58; xvi. 10; with 
geu. of thing, εἰς ἔργον διακονίας, Eph. iv. 12, which means 
either to the work in which the ministry consists, the 
work performed in undertaking the ministry, or to the 
execution of the ministry. of that which one under- 
takes to do, enterprise, undertaking: Acts ν. 38 (Deut. 
xv. 10; Sap. ii. 12). 2. any product whatever, any 
thing accomplished by hand, art, industry, mind, (i. q. ποί- 
nua, κτίσμα) : 1 Co. iii. 13-15; with the addition of τῶν 
χειρῶν, things formed by the hand of man, Acts vii. 41; 
of the works of God visible in the created world, Heb. 
i. 10, and often in Sept.; τὰ ἐν τῇ γῇ ἔργα. the works of 
nature and of art (Bengel), 2 Pet. iii. 10; of the arrange- 
ments of God for men’s salvation: Acts xv. 18 Rec. ; τὸ 
ἔργ. τοῦ θεοῦ what God works in man, i. 6. a life dedi- 
cated to God and Christ, Ro. xiv. 20; to the same effect, 
substantially, ἔργον ἀγαθόν, Phil. i. 6 (see ἀγαθός, 2); τὰ 
ἔργα τοῦ διαβόλου, sins and all the misery that springs 
from them, 1 Jn. iii. 8. 3. an act, deed, thing done: 
the idea of working is emphasized in opp. to that which 
is less than work, Jas. i. 25; Tit. i. 16; τὸ ἔργον is dis- 
tinguished fr. ὁ λόγος : Lk. xxiv. 19; Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co. 
x. 11; Col. iii. 17; 2 Th. 11. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 18, (Sir. iii. 8) ; 
plur. ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἐν ἔργοις, Acts vii. 22 (4 Mace. v. 38 
(37); for the same or similar contrasts, com. in Grk. 


2. one who does, a 


248 


‘ 


ἔργον 


writ., see Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 268 sq.; Bergler on 
Alciphr. p. 54; Bornemann and Kiihner on Xen. mem. 
2, 3, 6; Passow 8. v. p. 1159; [L.and 5. 8. ν. 1. 4; Lob. 
Paralip. pp. 64 sq., 525 sq.]). ἔργα is used of the acts 
of God—both as creator, Heb. iv. 10; and as goy- 
ernor, Jn. ix. 3; Acts xiii. 41; Rev. xv. 3; of sundry 
signal acts of Christ, to rouse men to believe in him 
and to accomplish their salvation: Mt. xi. 2 [ef. ἔργα 
τῆς σοφίας ib. 19 T WH Tr txt. ], and esp. in the Gosp. of 
John, as v. 20, 36; vii. 3; x.38; xiv. 11 sq.; xv. 24, (cf. 
Grimm, Instit. theol. dogmat. p. 63, ed. 2); they are 
called ra ἔργα τοῦ πατρός, i. 6. done at the bidding and 
by the aid of the Father, Jn. x. 37; ix. 3 sq., cf. x. 25, 32; 
xiv. 10; καλά, as beneficent, Jn. x. 32 sq.; and connected 
with the verbs δεικνύναι, ποιεῖν, ἐργάζεσθαι, τελειοῦν. ἔργα 
is applied to the conduct of men, measured by the 
standard of religion and righteousness, — whether bad, 
Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. xi. 48; Jn. iii. 20; Rev. ii.6; xvi. 11, 
ete.; or good, Jn. 111. 21 ; Jas. ii. 14, 17 sq. 20-22, 24-26 ; 
iii. 13; Rey. ii. 5, 9 [Ree.], 19; iii. 8; νόμος ἔργων, the 
law which demands good works, Ro. iii. 27; with a 
suggestion of toil, or struggle with hindrances, in the 
phrase καταπαύειν ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ, Heb. iv. 10; to 
recompense one κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ, Ro. ii. 6; 2 Tim. iv. 
14; Rev. ii. 23 (Ps. Ixi. (Ixii.) 13), ef. 2Co. xi. 15; Rev. 
xviii. 6; xx.12sq.; the sing. τὸ ἔργον is used collectively 
of an aggregate of actions (Germ. das Handeln), Jas. i. 
4; τινός, gen. of pers. and subj., his whole way of feeling 
and acting, his aims and endeavors: Gal. vi.4; 1 Pet. i. 
17; Rey. xxii. 12; τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, the course of action 
demanded by the law, Ro. ii. 15. With epithets: ἀγαθὸν 
ἔργον, i. e. either a benefaction, 2 Co. ix. 8; plur. Acts 
ix. 36; or every good work springing from piety, Ro. ii. 
7; Cola 105 2. Dheno17 > Dit. ἃ. 165) 2 ims 11. 21. ane 
17; Heb. xiii. 21 [T WHom. épy.]; plur. Eph. ii. 10; 
or what harmonizes with the order of society, Ro. xiii. 
3; Tit.iii. 1; ἔργον καλόν, a good deed, noble action, (see 
καλός, Ὁ. andc.): Mt. xxvi.10; Mk. xiv. 6; plur. (often 
in Attic writ.), Mt. v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25; vi.18; Tit. 
ii. 7; ili. 8,14; Heb. x. 24; 1 Pet. in. 12; τὰ ἔργα τὰ ἐν 
δικαιοσύνῃ equiv. to τὰ δίκαια, Tit. 111. 5; τὰ ἔργα τοῦ θεοῦ, 
the works required and approved by God, Jn. vi. 28 
(Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 10; 1 Esdr. vii. 9, 15), in the same 
sense ἔργα pov i. 6. of Christ, Rev. ii. 26; ἔργον πίστεως, 
wrought by faith, the course of conduct which springs 
from faith, 1 Th. i. 3; 2 ΤῊ. 1.11 ; ἔργα ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας, 
Acts xxvi. 20; ἔργα πεπληρωμένα ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. 
iii. 2; ἔργα πονηρά, Col. i. 21; 2 Jn. 11, ef. Jn. iii. 19; vii. 
7; 1 Jn. iii. 12; ἔργα νεκρά, works devoid of that life 
which has its source in God, works so to speak unwrought, 
which at the last judgment will fail of the approval of 
God and of all reward: Heb. vi. 1; ix. 14; ἄκαρπα, Eph. 
v. 11 (ἄχρηστα, Sap. iii. 11; the wicked man μετὰ τῶν 
ἔργων αὐτοῦ συναπολεῖται, Barn. ep. 21,1); ἄνομα, 2 Pet. 
ii. 8; ἔργα ἀσεβείας, Jude 15; τοῦ σκότους, done in dark- 
ness, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v. 11; [opp. to ἔργ. τοῦ φωτός, 
Ro. xiii. 12 L mrg.]; in Paul’s writ. ἔργα νόμου, works 
demanded by and agreeing with the law (cf. Wieseler, 


ἐρεθίζω 


Com. iib. d. Br. an d. Gal. p. 194 sqq.): Ro. iii. 20, 28; 
ix. 32 Rec.; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 2, 5,10; and simply ἔργα: 
Ro. iv. 2, 6; ix. 12 (11); ib.32GLTTr WH; xi. 6; 
Eph. ii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 9, (see δικαιόω, 3b.). τὰ ἔργα τινὸς 
ποιεῖν, to do works the same as or like to those of anoth- 
er, to follow in action another’s example: Abraham’s, 
Jn. viii. 39; that of the devil, Jn. viii. 41. 

ἐρεθίζω ; 1 aor. ἠρέθισα ; (ἐρέθω to excite) ; to stir up, 
excite, stimulate: τινά, in a good sense, 2 Co. ix. 2; as 
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, in a bad sense, fo pro- 
voke: Col. iii. 21, where Lehm. mapopyitere.* 

ἐρείδω: to fix, prop firmly; intrans., 1 aor. ptep. ἐρεί- 
σασα (ἡ mpgpa), stuck [R. V. struck], Acts xxvii. 41. 
(From Hom. down.) * 4 

épevyopar: fut. ἐρεύξομαι ; 1. to spit or spue out, 
(Hom.). 2. to be emptied, discharge itself, used of 
streams (App. Mithr. c. 103); with the ace. to empty, 
discharge, cast forth, of rivers and waters: Lev. xi. 10 
Sept. 3. by a usage foreign to classic Greek [W. 23 
(22 sq.)], to pour forth words, to speak out, utter: Mt. xiii. 
35 (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2; οἵ. xviii. (xix.) 3; exliv. 7 
[Alex.]). The word is more fully treated of by Lobeck 
ad Phryn. p. 63; [ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 138].* 

ἐρευνάω, -@ ; 1 aor. impv. ἐρεύνησον ; (ἡ ἔρευνα a search) ; 
fr. Hom. down; to search, examine into: absol. Jn. vii. 
52; ri, Jn. v. 39; Ro. viii. 27; 1 Co. ii. 10; Rev. ii. 23 
with which passage cf. Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; xx. 12; foll. 
by an indir. quest. 1 Pet. i. 11 (2S.x.3; Prov. xx. 27). 
The form ἐραυνάω (q. v. in its place) T Tr WH have 
received everywhere into the text, but Lchm. only in 
Rev. ii. 23. [Comp.: ἐξ- ερευνάω.] ἢ 

ἐρημία, -as, 7, (ἔρημος). a solitude, an uninhabited re- 
gion, a waste: Mt. xv. 33; Mk. viii.4; Heb. xi. 38; opp. 
to πόλις, 2 Co. xi. 26, as in Joseph. antt. 2, 3, 1.* 

ἔρημος, -ov, (in classic Grk. also-os, -n, -ov, ef. W. § 11, 
1; [B. 25 (23); on its accent οἵ. Chandler 88 393, 394; 
W. 52 (51)]); 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, unin- 
habited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 32; Lk. 
iv. 42; ix.10[RGL], 12; Acts i. 20,ete.; ἡ ὁδός, leading 
through a desert, Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see Γάζα, 
sub fin. of persons: deserted by others; deprived of the aid 
and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances, 
kindred ; bereft; (so often by Grk. writ. of every age, as 
Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pers. 734; Arstph. pax 112; ἔρημός 
τε καὶ ὑπὸ πάντων καταλειφθείς, Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed. 
Bekk.]; of a flock deserted-by the shepherd, Hom. II. 5, 
140) : γυνή, ἃ woman neglected by her husband, from 
whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is. 
liv.1; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ’s presence, in- 
struction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 {L and WH txt. om.]; 
Lk. xiii. 35 Ree.; ef. Bleek, Erklir. d. drei ersten Evv. 
ii. p. 206, (cf. Bar. iv.19; Add. to Esth. viii. 27 (vi. 13) ; 
2 Mace. viii. 35). 2. subst. ἡ ἔρημος, sc. χώρα ; Sept. 
often for 13719 ; α desert, wilderness, (Hat. 3, 102): Mt. 
xxiv. 26; Rev. xii. 6,14; xvii. 3; af ἔρημοι, desert places, 
lonely regions: Lk. i. 80; v. 16; viii. 29. an unculti- 
vated region fit for pasturage, Lk. xv. 4. used of the 
desert of Judea [cf. W. § 18, 1], Mt. iii. 1; Mk. 1. 3 sq.; 


249 


ἐριφιον 


LK. i. 80; iii. 2,4; Jn. i. 23; of the desert of Arabia, 
Acts vii. 30, 36, 38, 42, 44; 1 Co. x. 5; Heb. 111. 8, 17. 
Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Wiiste; Furrer in Schenkel v. 680 
5664. ; [B. Ὁ. 5. vv. Desert and Wilderness (Am. ed.) ]. 

ἐρημόω, -@: Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. (cf. B. 38 (33)) 
ἐρημοῦται] ; pf. ptep. ἠρημωμένος ; 1 aor. ἠρημώθην;; (ἔρη- 
pos); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. usually for 29n, 2707, oDwv; 
to make desolate, lay waste; in the N.'T. only inthe Pass. : 
πόλιν, Rev. xviii. 19; to ruin, bring to desolation: Ba- 
σιλείαν, Mt. xii. 25; Lk. xi. 17; to reduce to naught: 
πλοῦτον, Rev. xviii. 17 (16) ; ἠρημωμένην καὶ γυμνὴν ποιεῖν 
twa, to despoil one, strip her of her treasures, Rey. xvii. 
16." 

ἐρήμωσις, -ews, 7, (ἐρημόω), a making desolate, desola- 
tion: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 20; see βδέ- 
λυγμα, 6. (Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 9, 13; Sept. several times 
for 737n, wv, ete.) * 

épltw: [fut. ἐρίσω, cf. B. 37 (32)]; (ἔρις) ; to wrangle, 
engage in strife, (Lat. rizari): Mt. xii. 19, where by the 
phrase οὐκ ἐρίσει the Evangelist seems to describe the 
calm temper of Jesus in contrast with the vehemence of 
the Jewish doctors wrangling together about tenets and 
practices. [(From Hom. down.)]* 

ἐριθεία (not ἐρίθεια, cf. W. § 6, 1 g.; [Chandler ὃ 997) 
[-θία WH; seeI,cand 7df. Proleg. p. 881, -etas, ἡ. (ἐριθεύω 
to spin wool, work in wool, Heliod.1, 5; Mid. in the same 
sense, Tob. ii. 11 ; used of those who electioneer for office, 
courting popular applause by trickery and low arts, Ar- 
istot. polit. 5, 3; the verb is derived from ἔριθος working 
for hire, a hireling; fr. the Maced. age down. a spinner 
or weaver, a worker in wool, Is. xxxviii. 12 Sept.; a 
mean, sordid fellow), electioneering or intriguing for office, 
Aristot. pol. 5, 2 and 3 [pp. 1302, 4 and 13034, 14]; hence, 
apparently, in the N. T. a courting distinction, a desire 
to put one’s self forward, a partisan and factious spirit 
which does not disdain low aris; partisanship, factiousness: 
Jas. iii. 14, 16; κατ᾽ ἐριθείαν, Phil. ii. 3; Ignat. ad Phila- 
delph. § 8; οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας (see ἐκ, II. 7), Phil. i. 16 (17) [yet 
see ἐκ, II. 12 b.]; i. q. contending against God, Ro. ii. 8 
[yet cf. Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]; in the plur. ai ἐριθεῖαι 
[W. § 27,3; B. $123, 2]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20. See 
the very full and learned discussion of the word by 
Fritzsche in his Com. on Rom. i. p. 143 sq.; [of which a 
summary is given by Ellic. on Gal. v. 20. See further 
on its derivation, Lobeck, Path.. Proleg. p. 365; cf. W. 
94 (89)].* 

ἔριον. -ov, τό, (dimin. of τὸ ἔρος or etpos), wool: Heb. 
ix. 19; Rev. i. 14. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἔρις, -ιδος, 7, ace. ἔριν (Phil. i. 15), pl. ἔριδες (1 Co. i. 
11) and épes (2 Co. xii. 20 [RG Trtxt.; Gal. v.20RG 
WHnrsg.]; Tit. iii. 9 [R GLTr]; see [WH. App. p. 
157]; Lob.ad Phryn. p. 326; Matthiae § 80 note 8; Bitm. 
Ausf. Spr. p. 191 sq.; [W. 65 (63); B. 24 (22)]); conten- 
tion, strife, wrangling: Ro. i. 29; xiii. 13; 1 Co. i. 11; 
iii. 3; 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20; Phil. i. 15; 1 Tim. vi. 4; 
Tit. iii. 9. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἐρίφιον, -ov. τό, and ἔριφος, -ov, 6, a kid, a young goat: 
Mt. xxv. 32 sq.; Lk. xv. 29. [Ath. 14, p. 661 b.]* 


Eppas 


Ἑρμᾶς, acc. Ἑρμᾶν (cf. B. 20 (18)], ὁ, (Doric for 
Ἑρμῆς), Hermas, a certain Christian (whom Origen and 
others thought to be the author of the book entitled 
“The Shepherd” [cf. Sa/mon in Dict. of Chris. Biog. 
8. v. Hermas 27) : Ro. xvi. 14." 

ἑρμηνεία [ WH -via; 5661, ¢], -as, 9, (ἑρμηνεύω), interpre- 
tation (of what has been spoken more or less obscurely 
by others): 1 Co. xii. 10 [L txt. depp. q. ν.1; xiv. 26. 
[From Plato down.]* 

ἑρμηνευτής, -οὔ, 6, (ἑρμηνεύω, q. V.), an interpreter: 1 
Co. xiv. 28 LTrWHmrg. (Plat. politic. p. 290 ο.; for 
yoo in Gen. xlii. 23.) * 

ἑρμηνεύω : [pres. pass. ἑρμηνεύομαι] ; (fr. ἙἭ μῆς, who 
was held to be the god of speech, writing, eloquence, 
learning) ; 1. to explain in words, expound: [Soph., 
Eur.], Xen., Plato, al. 2. to interpret, i. e. to trans- 
late what has been spoken or written in a foreign tongue 
into the vernacular (Xen. an. 5, 4,4): Jn.i. 38 (39) RG 
T, 42 (43); ix. 7; Heb. vii.2. (2 Esdr. iv. 7 for D272.) 
[Comp.: dc, μεθ-ερμηνεύω.] " 

Ἑρμῆς, acc. Ἑρμῆν, 6, prop. name, Hermes; ae 
Greek deity called by the Romans Mercurius (Mercury): 
Acts xiv. 12. 2. a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14." 

‘Eppoyévns, [i. 6. born of Hermes; Tdf.’Eppoy.], τους, 6, 
Hermogenes, a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 15.* 

ἑρπετόν, -ov, τό, (fr. ἕρπω to creep, crawl, [Lat. serpo; 
hence serpent, and fr. same root, reptile; Vanicek p. 
1030 sq.]), @ creeping thing, reptile; by prof. writ. used 
chiefly of serpents; in Hom. Od. 4, 418; Xen. mem. 1, 
4, 11 an animal of any sort; in bibl. Grk. opp. to quad- 
rupeds and birds, Acts x. 12; xi. 6; Ro. i. 23; and to 
marine animals also, Jas. iii. 7; on this last pass. ef. Gen. 
ix. 3. (Sept. for wp) and yyw.) * 

ἐρυθρός, -ά, -dv, red; fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. only 
in the phrase ἡ ἐρυθρὰ θάλασσα the Red Sea (fr. Hat. 
down [cf. Rawlinson’s Herod. vol. i. p. 143]), i. 6. the 
Indian Ocean washing the shores of Arabia and Persia, 
with its two gulfs, of which the one lying on the east is 
called the Persian Gulf, the other on the opposite side 
the Arabian. Inthe N. T. the phrase denotes the upper 
part of the Arabian Gulf (the Herodpolite Gulf, so called 
[i. 6. Gulf of Suez]), through which the Israelites made 
their passage out of Egypt to the shore of Arabia: Acts 
vii. 36; Heb. xi. 29. (Sept. for ἢ) Ὁ", the sea of sedge or 
sea-weed [cf. B. D. as below]. Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. 
Meer rothes; Pressel in Herzog ix. p. 239 sqq.; Furrer 
in Schenkel iv. 150 sqq.; [B. D.s. vv. Red Sea and Red 
Sea, Passage of; Trumbull, Kadesh-Barnea, p. 352sqq. J-)* 

ἔρχομαι, impy. ἔρχου. ἔρχεσθε, (for the Attic ἴθι, tre fr. 
εἶμι); impf. ἠρχόμην (for ἤειν and ya more com. in Attic) ; 
fut. ἐλεύσομαι; ---- (on these forms cf. [esp. Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 103 sqq.; Veitch 5. v.]; Matthiae § 234; 
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 182 sq.; Kriiger § 40 5. v.; Kiihner 
§343; W.§ 15s. v.; [B. 58 (50)]); pf. ἐλήλυθα; plpf. 
ἐληλύθειν; 2 aor. ἦλθον and (occasionally by LT Tr WH 
[together or severally ]—as Mt. vi. 10; [vii. 25, 27; x.13; 
xiv. 34; xxv. 86; Mk. i. 29; vi. 29; Lk. i. 59; ii. 16; v. 7; 
Vi. 17; viii. 35; x1. 2; xxiii. 33; xxiv. 1,23]; Jn. [1.39 (40); 


250 


ἔρχομαι 


iii. 26]; iv. 27; [xii. 97; Acts xii. 10; [xiv. 24]; xxviii. 
14 sq. etc.) in the Alexandrian form ἦλθα (see ἀπέρχομαι 
init. for reff.); Sept. for x13, rarely for ANN and 72; 
[fr. Hom. down] ; I. to come; 1. prop. a. of 
persons; a. univ. to come from one place into another, 
and used both of persons arriving,—as in Mt. viii. 9; xxii. 
3; Lk. vii. 8; xiv. 17 [here WH mrg. read the inf., see 
their Intr. § 404], 20; Jn. v.7; Actsx. 29; Rev. xxii. 7, 
and very often; of ἐρχόμενοι x. of ὑπάγοντες, Mk. vi. 31; 
—and of those returning, as in Jn. iv. 27; ix. 7; Ro. ix. 
9. Constructions: foll. by ἀπό w. gen. of place, Mk. 
vii. 1; xv. 21; Acts xviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 9; w. gen. of pers., 
Mk. v. 35; Jn. iii. 2; Gal. ii. 12, ete. ; foll. by ἐκ w. gen. of 
place, Lk. ν. 17 [L txt. συνέρχ.]; Jn. iii. 31, ete.; foll. by 
eis w. ace. of place, to come into: as els τ. οἰκίαν, τὸν οἶκον, 
Mt. ii. 11; viii. 14; Mk. i. 29; v. 88, ete. ; εἰς τὴν πόλιν, 
Mt. ix. 1, and many other exx.; foll. by εἰς to, towards, 
Jn. xx. 3sq.; εἰς τὸ πέραν, of persons going in a boat, 
Mt. viii. 28; of persons departing ἐκ - - . eis, Jn. iv. 54; 
διά w. gen. of place foll. by εἰς (Ree. πρός) to, Mk. vii. 31; 
εἰς τ. ἑορτήν, to celebrate the feast, Jn. iv. 45; xi. 56; ἐν 
w. dat. of the thing with which one is equipped, Ro. xv. 
29; 1 Co. iv. 21; foll. by ἐπί νυ. ace. of place, (Germ. 
tiber, over), Mt. xiv. 28; (Germ. auf), Mk. vi. 53; (Germ. 
an), Lk. xix. 5; [xxiii. 33 L Tr]; Acts xii. 10, 12; to 
w. ace. of the thing, Mt. iii. 7; xxi. 19; Mk. xi. 13; xvi. 
2; Lk. xxiv. 1; τ. ace. of pers., Jn. xix. 33; to one’s 
tribunal, Acts xxiv. 8 Rec.; against one, of a military 
leader, Lk. xiv. 313 κατά w.acc., Lk. x.33; Acts xvi. 7; 
mapa w. gen. of pers. Lk. viii. 49 [Lehm. ἀπό]; w. ace. 
of place, to [the side of], Mt. xv. 29, πρός to, w. acc. of 
pers., Mt. iii. 14; vii. 15; [xiv. 25 L T Tr WH]; Mk. ix. 
14; Lk. i. 43; Jn. i. 29; 2 Co. xiii. 1, and very often, esp. 
in the Gospels; ἀπό τινος (gen. of pers.) πρός τινα, 1 Th. 
iii. 6; with simple dat. of pers. (prop. dat. commodi or 
incommodi [cf. W. § 22,7 N. 2; B. 179 (155)]): Mt. 
xxi. 5; Rev. ii. 5,16, (exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. 
p- 1184* bot.; [Land 8S. 5. v. Π. 47). with adverbs 
of place: πόθεν, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14; Rev. vii. 13; ἄνωθεν, 
Jn. iii. 31; ὄπισθεν, Mk. v. 27; ὧδε, Mt. viii. 29; Acts 
ix. 21; ἐνθάδε, Jn. iv. 15 [RGLTr], 16; ἐκεῖ, Jn. 
xviii. 3 [ef. W. 472 (44v)]; ποῦ, Heb. xi. 8; ἕως τινός, 
Lk. iv. 42; ἄχρι τινός, Acts xi. 5. The purpose for 
which one comes is indicated —either by an inf., Mk. 
[ν. 141,7 Tr WH]; xv. 36; Lk.i. 59; iii. 12; Jn. iv. 15 
[T WH &épx.], and very often; or by a fut. ptep., Mt. 
xxvii. 49; Acts viii. 27; or by a foll. ἵνα, Jn. xii. 9; εἰς 
τοῦτο, ἵνα, Acts ix. 21; or by διά τινα, Jn. xii. 9. As 
one whois about to do something in a place must neces- 
sarily come thither, in ‘the popular narrative style the 
phrases ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, ete., are usually placed be- 
fore verbs of action: Mt. xiii. 19, 25; Mk. ii. 18; iv. 15; 
v. 33; vi. 29; xii.9; xiv. 37; Lk. viii. 12, 47; Jn. vi.15; 
xi. 48: xii. 92: xix. 38; xx. 19, 26; xxi. 138; 3 Jn. 8; 
Rey. v. 7; xvii. 1; xxi.9; ἔρχου x. ἴδε (or βλέπε), In. i. 
46 (47); xi. 84; [and Ree. in] Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, [also 
Grsb. exe. in vs. 3]; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) ((T Tr WH 
ὄψεσθε], see εἴδω, I. 1 e.); — or ἐλθών is used, foll. by 8 


ἔρχομαι 


finite verb: Mt. ii. 8; viii. 7; ix. 10,18; xii. 44; xiv. 12, 
33 [R GL]; xviii. 81 ; xxvii. 64; xxviii. 13 ; Mk. vii. 25 
[Tdf. εἰσελθ.1; xii. 14, 42; xiv. 45; xvi. 1; Acts xvi. 37, 
39 ; — or ἐρχόμενος, foll. by a finite verb : LK. xiii. 14; xvi. 
21; xviii. 5. in other places ἐλθών must be rendered 
when I (thou, he, ete.) am come: Jn. xvi. 8; 2 Co. xii. 20; 
Phil. i. 27 (opp. to ἀπών). 8. to come i. 6. to appear, 
make one’s appearance, come before the public: so κατ᾽ 
ἐξοχήν of the Messiah, Lk. iii. 16; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 27, 31; 
Heb. x. 37, who is styled preeminently ὁ ἐρχόμενος, i. 6. 
he that cometh (i. 6. is about to come) ace. to prophetic 
promise and universal expectation, the coming one [W. 
341 (320); B. 204 (176 sq.)]: Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii. 19 sq.; 
with εἰς τὸν κόσμον added, Jn. vi. 14; xi. 27; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 
τοῦ κυρίου, he who is already coming clothed with divine 
authority i. 6. the Messiah, — the shout of the people joy- 
fully welcoming Jesus as he was entering Jerusalem, — 
taken fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 25 sq.: Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; 
Mk. xi. 9; LK. xiii. 35; xix. 38 [Tdf. om. epy. (so WH 
in their first mrg.)]; Jn. xii.13. ἔρχεσθαι used of Elijah 
who was to return fr. heaven as the forerunner of the 
Messiah: Mt. xi. 14; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11-13; of John 
the Baptist, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; Jn. i. 31; with eis 
μαρτυρίαν added, Jn. i. 7; of Antichrist, 1 Jn. ii. 18; of 
“false Christs” and other deceivers, false teachers, ete. : 
Mt. xxiv. 5; Mk. xiii. 6; Lk. xxi. 8, (in these pass. with 
the addition ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί pov, relying on my name, i. e. 
arrogating to themselves and simulating my Messianic 
dignity); Jn. x. 8; 2Co. xi. 4; 2 Pet.iii. 3; Rev. xvii. 
10; with the addition ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ in his own 
authority and of his own free-will, Jn. v.43. of the Holy 
Spirit, who is represented as a person coming to be the 
invisible helper of Christ’s disciples after his departure 
from the world: Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 7sq. 13. of the ap- 
pearance of Jesus among men, as a religious 
teacher and the author of salvation: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 
34; Jn. v.43; vii. 28; viii. 42; with the addition of εἰς 
τ. κόσμον foll. by iva, Jn. xii.46; xviii. 37: εἰς κρίμα, iva, 
Jn. ix. 39; foll. by a telicinf. 1 Tim. i. 15; ἔρχεσθαι ὀπίσω 
τινός, after one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 30; 
ὁ ἐλθὼν δι’ ὕδατος καὶ αἵματος. a terse expression for, ‘he 
that publicly appeared and approved himself (to be 
God’s son and ambassador) by accomplishing expiation 
through the ordinance of baptism and the bloody death 
which he underwent ’[cf. p. 210* bot.], 1 Jn. v. 6; ἔρχε- 
σθαι foll. by a telic inf., Mt. v. 17; x.34sq.; Lk. xix. 10; 
*foll. by ἵνα, Jn. x. 10; ἐληλυθέναι and ἔρχεσθαι ἐν σαρκί 
are used of the form in which Christ as the divine Logos 
appeared among men: 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3[Rec.]; 2Jn. 7. of 
the return of Jesus hereafter from heavenin 
majesty: Mt. x. 23; Actsi.11; 1Co.iv.5; xi. 26; 1 
Th. v. 2; 2 Th. i. 10; with ἐν τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ added, Mt. 
xvi. 27; xxv. 31; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν 
(borne on the clouds) μετὰ δυνάμεως x. δόξης, Mt. xxiv. 
30; ἐν νεφέλαις, ἐν νεφέλῃ κτὰλ., Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27; 
ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ (see ἐν, I. 5c. p. 210° top), Mt. xvi. 
28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [eis τὴν 8. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.] 
b. of time, like the Lat. venio: with nouns of time, as 


251 


ἔρχομαι 


ἔρχονται ἡμέραι, in a fut. sense, will come [cf. Β. 204 (176 
sq-); W. § 40, 2a.], Lk. xxiii. 29; Heb. viii. 8 fr. Jer. 
XXXViil. (xxxi.) 31; ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι, Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 
20; Lk.v. 35; xvii. 22; xxi. 6; ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα, Lk. xxii. 
7; Rev. vi. 17; ἔρχεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jn. iv. 21, 23; ν. 25; 
xvi. 25; foll. by iva, Jn. xvi. 2,32; ἦλθεν, is come, i. 6. is 
present, Jn. xvi. 4, 21; Rev. xiv. 7,15; ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, 
ἵνα, Jn. xii. 23; xiii. 1 (L T Tr WH ἦλθεν) ; xvi. 32 ; xvii. 
1; ἐληλύθει ἡ Spa αὐτοῦ, had come (Lat. aderat), Jn. vii. 
30; viii. 20; ἔρχ. νύξ, Jn. ἴχ. 4; ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Th. 
v. 2; καιροί, Acts iii. 19. with names of events that oc- 
cur at a definite time: 6 θερισμός, Jn. iv. 35 ; 6 γάμος τοῦ 
dpviov, Rey. xix. 7; ἦλθεν ἡ κρίσις, Rev. xviii. 10. in imi- 
tation of the Hebr. san, 6, 9, τὸ ἐρχόμενος, -ένη, -ενον, is 
i.q. to come, future [ οἵ. B. and W.u. 5.1: ὁ αἰών, Mk. x. 30; 
LK. xviii. 30; ἡ ἑορτή, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; ἡ ὀργή, 1 Th. 
i. 10; τὰ ἐρχόμενα, things to come, Jn. xvi. 13 (O°N37 the 
times to come, Is. xxvii. 6); in the periphrasis of the 
name of Jehovah, 6 ὧν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, it is 
equiv. to ἐσόμενος, Rev. 1.4; iv. 8. ο. of things and 
events (so very often in Grk. auth. also) ; of the advent 
of natural events: ποταμοί, Mt. vii. 25 [Β 67; κατακλυ- 
σμός, Lk. xvii. 27; λιμός, Acts vii. 11; of the rain coming 
down ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Heb. vi. 7; of alighting birds, Mt. xiii. 
4, 32; Mk. iv. 4; of a voice that is heard (Hom. Il. 10, 
139), foll. by ἐκ with gen. of place, Mt. iii. 17 [?] ; Mk. ix. 
7([T WHTr mre. ἐγένετο]; Jn. xii. 28; of things that are 
brought: ὁ λύχνος, Mk. iv. 21 (ἐπιστολή, Liban. ep. 
458; other exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given in Kypke, Kui- 
noel, al., on Mk. 1.c.). 2. metaph. a. of Christ’s 
invisible return from heaven, i. e. of the power 
which through the Holy Spirit he will exert in the souls 
of his disciples: Jn. xiv. 18, 23; of his invisible advent 
in the death of believers, by which he takes them to 
himself into heaven, Jn. xiv. 3. Ὅ. equiv. to to come 
into being, arise, come forth, show itself, find place or in- 
fluence : τὰ σκάνδαλα, Mt. xviii. 7; Lk. xvii. 1; τὰ ἀγαθά, 
Ro. iii. 8 (Jer. xvii. 6) ; τὸ τέλειον, 1 Co. xiii. 10; ἡ πίστις, 
Gal. iii. 23, 25; ἡ ἀποστασία, 2 Th. ii. 3; ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ 
θεοῦ, i. q. be established, Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20, 
etc.; 4 ἐντολή, i. 4- became known, Ro. vii. 38. ο. with 
Prepositions: ἐκ τῆς [Lehm. ἀπὸ] θλίψεως, suffered 
tribulation, Rev. vii. 14. foll. by εἰς, to come (fall) into 
or unto: εἰς τὸ χεῖρον, into a worse condition, Mk. v. 26; 
εἰς πειρασμόν, Mk. xiv. 38 T WH; εἰς ἀπελεγμόν (see 
ἀπελεγμός), Acts xix. 27; eis τὴν ὥραν ταύτην, Jn. xii. 27; 
εἰς κρίσιν, to become liable to judgment, Jn. v. 24; εἰς 
ἐπίγνωσιν, to attain to knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Tim. 
iii. 7; εἰς τὸ φανερόν, to come to light, Mk. iv. 22; εἰς 
προκοπὴν ἔλήλυθε, has turned out for the advancement, 
Phil. i. 12; ἔρχ. ets τι, to come to a thing, is used of a 
writer who after discussing other matters passes on to 
a new topic, 2 Co. xii. 1; εἰς ἑαυτόν, to come to one’s 
senses, return to a healthy state of mind, Lk. xv. 17 
(Epict. diss. 3, 1,15; Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. § 3, p. 
702 ed. Fabric.). ἔρχ. ἐπί twa to come upon one: ina 
bad sense, of calamities, Jn. xviii. 4; in a good sense, of 
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Acts xix. 6: to devolve 


ἐρῶ 


upon one, of the guilt and punishment of murder, Mt. 
xxiii. 35. ἔρχ. πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, to commit one’s self to 
the instruction of Jesus and enter into fellowship with 
him, Jn. v. 40; vi. 35, 37, 44, 45, 65; πρὸς τὸ φῶς, to sub- 
mit one’s self to the power of the light, Jn. iii. 20 sq. 
II. tog0: ὀπίσω τινός (INN 77), to follow one, Mt. xvi. 
24; [Mk. viii. 34 R L Tr mrg. WH]; Lk. ix. 23; xiv. 
27, (Gen. xxiv. 5, 8; xxxvii. 17, and elsewhere); πρός 
twa, Lk. xv. 20; σύν τινι, to accompany one, Jn. xxi. 3 
(ef. B. 210 (182)]; ὁδὸν ἔρχεσθαι, Lk. ii. 44 [ef. W. 
226 (212)]. [Comp.: dv, ἐπ-αν-, am-, δι-, εἰσ-, ἐπ-εις-, παρ- 
«ἰσ-, συν-εισ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-. κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, 
προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.] 

[Syn.: ἔρχεσθαι, (βαίνειν, πορεύεσθαι, χωρεῖν: 
with the N.T. use of these verbs and their compounds it may be 
interesting to compare the distinctions ordinarily recognized 
in classic Grk., where ἔρχεσθαι denotes motion or progress 
generally, and of any sort, hence to come and (esp. ἐλθεῖν) 
arrive at, as well as to go(Balvew). βαίνειν primarily signi- 
fies to walk, take steps, picturing the mode of motion; to go 
away. πορεύεσθαι expresses motion in general, —often con- 
fined within certain limits, or giving prominence to the 
bearing; hence the regular word for the march of an 
army. χωρεῖν alwaysemphasizes the idea of separation, 
change of place, and does not, like 6. g. πορεύεσθαι, note the 
external and perceptible motion, —(a man may be recog- 
nized by his πορεία). Cf. Schmidt ch. xxvii.] 

ἐρῶ, see εἶπον. 

ἐρωτάω, -ῶ, [(1πῇ. -τᾶν L T Tr, -τᾷν RG WH; 5661, 2)7; 
impf. 3 pers. plur. ἠρώτων and (in Mt.xv. 23 LT Tr WH, 
Mk. iv. 10 Tdf.) ἠρώτουν, cf. B. 44 (38); [W. 85 (82); 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Soph. Lex. p.41; WH. App. p. 166; 
Mullach, Griech. Vulgarspr. p. 252]; fut: ἐρωτήσω; 1 aor. 
ἠρώτησα; Sept. for Sxw; to ask, i. 6. 1. as in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down to question: absol., Lk. xxii. 68; Jn. 
viii. 7 [R]; τινά, Jn. ix. 21; xvi. 19, 30; [xviii. 21 where 
Rec. ézep.], ete.; with the addition of λέγων and the 
words of the questioner: Mt. xvi. 13; Lk. xix. 31 [om. 
λέγων; xxiii. 3 T Tr WH]; Jn.i. 19, 21; v.12; ix.19; 
xvi. 5; τινά τι [cf. W. § 32, 4 a.], Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. iv. 10; 
Lk. xx. 3; Jn. xvi. 23 [al. refer this to 2]; τινὰ περί τινος, 
Lk. ix. 45 [Lehm. ἐπερ.] ; Jn. xviii. 19. 2. to ask i.e. 
to request, entreat, beg, beseech, after the Hebr. >xvi, in a 
sense very rare in prof. auth. (Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 14 [but 
here the text is uncertain; substitute antt. 7, 8, 1; ef. 
Dr. Ezra Abbot in No. Am. Rey. for 1872, p. 173 note]; 
Babr. fab. [42, 3]; 97,3; Apoll. synt. p. 289, 20; ef. W. 
pp- 30 and 32): τινά, Jn. xiv. 16; with the addition of 
λέγων and the words of the asker, Mt. xv. 23; Jn. xii. 
21; foll. by impv. alone [B. 272 sq. (234)], Lk. xiv. 18 
sq-; Phil iv. 3; foll. by ta [ef. W. § 44, 8 a.; B. 237 
(204)], Mk. vii. 26; Lk. vii. 36; xvi. 27; Jn. iv. 47; 
xvii. 15; xix. 31,38; 2 Jn. 5; 1 Th.iv.1; by ὅπως, Lk. 
vil. 3; xi. 37; Acts xxiii. 20; by the inf. [B. 258 (222); 
ef. W. 335 (315)], Lk. v. 3; viii. 37; Jn. iv. 40; Acts 
iii. 35 x. 48; xxiii. 18; 1 Th. ν. 12 ; τινὰ περί τινος, Lk. 
iv. 38; Jn. xvii. 9, 20; 1 Jn. ν. 16; ὑπέρ τινος [foll. by 
eis w. inf.; cf. B. 265 (228)], 2 Th. ii. 1 86. : ἐρωτᾶν τὰ 
[WH txt. om. τά] πρὸς εἰρήνην (see εἰρήνη, 1), Lk. xiv. 32. 
[Sy¥n. see airéa, fin. Comp.: δι-, ἐπ-ερωτάω.] 


252 


ἐσθίω 


ἐσθής, -jros, ἡ, (fr. ἕννυμι, ἔσθην, hence it would be 
more correctly written ἑσθής [so Rec.* in Lk.], ef. 
Kiihner i. p. 217, 3), formerly βεσθής (cf. Lat. vestis, 
Germ. Weste, Eng. vest, etc.), clothing, raiment, apparel: 
Lk. xxiii. 11; xxiv.4 LL TTr WH; Actsi.10 RG; x. 30; 
xii. 21; Jas. ii. 2 sq. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἔσθησις [ Rec." ἔσθ.], -ews, ἡ, (fr. ἐσθέω, and this fr. 
ἐσθής, 4. ν.), clothing, apparel: plur., Lk. xxiv. 4 R G; 
Acts i. 10 LT Tr WH; [cf. Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18; 
Euseb. h. 6. 2, 6, 7 and Heinichen’s note]. (Rare in prof. 
writ. [Aristot. rhet. 2, 8, 14 var.]; cf. W. § 2,1.) * 

ἐσθίω and ἔσθω, q. v., (lengthened forms of ἔδω [cf. 
Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. p. 4297}; impf. ἤσθιον; 2 aor. 
ἔφαγον (fr. PATO); fut. φάγομαι (2 pers. φάγεσαι, Lk. 
xvii. 8 [reff. 5. v. κατακαυχάομαι, init.]), for the classic 
ἔδομαι, see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 185; Kiihner i. p. 824; 
LW. 89 (85); B. 58 (51); but esp. Veitch s. v.]; Sept. 
for Ὧ2Ν) (fr. Hom. down]; to eat; Vulg. manduco, [edo, 
ete.]; (of animals, to devour); a. absol.: Mt. xiv. 20 
54.; Xv. 37, 38; xxvi. 26; Mk. vi. 31; viii. 8; Jn. iv. 31, 
and often; ἐν τῷ φαγεῖν, in eating (the supper), 1 Co. 
xi. 21; διδόναι τινὶ φαγεῖν, to give one (something) to 
eat, Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35,42; Mk.v.43; vi.37; Lk.ix. 
13, (and with addition of an ace. of the thing to be eaten, 
Jn. vi. 31, 52; ἔκ τινος, Rev. ii. 7; [ef. W. 198 (187) sq-])5; 
φέρειν τινὶ φαγεῖν, to bring one (something) to eat, Jn. 
iv. 33; spec. in opp. to abstinence from certain kinds of 
food, Ro. xiv. 3, 20; ἐσθίειν x. πίνειν (and φαγεῖν x. πιεῖν), 
to use food and drink to satisfy one’s hunger and thirst, 
1 Co. xi. 22; contextually, to be supported at the ex- 
pense of others, 1 Co. ix. 4; not to shun choice food and 
in a word to be rather a free-liver, opp. to the narrow 
and scrupulous notions of those who abstain from the 
use of wine and certain kinds of food, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. 
vii. 34; opp. to fasting (τὸ νηστεύειν), Lk. v. 33; of 
those who, careless about other and esp. graver matters, 
lead an easy, merry life, Lk. xii. 19; xvii. 27 sq.; 1 Co. 
xy. 32, (Is. xxii. 13); of the jovial use of a sacrificial 
feast, 1 Co. x. 7 fr. Ex. xxxii. 6; preceded by a nega- 
tive, to abstain from all nourishment, Acts xxiii. 12, 21; 
to use a spare diet, spoken of an ascetic mode of life, 
Mt. xi. 18; of fasting, Acts ix. 9; ἐσθίειν (x. πίνειν) μετά 
twos, to dine, feast, (in company) with one, Mt. ix. 11; 
Mk. ii. 16; Lk. v. 30; with one (he providing the enter- 
tainment), i. 6. at his house, Lk. vii. 36; μετὰ τῶν μεθυόν- 
των ete., of luxurious revelling, Mt. xxiv. 49; Lk. xii. 
45; ἐπὶ τραπέζης τοῦ Χριστοῦ, the food and drink spread 
out on Christ’s table, i. e. to enjoy the blessings of the 
salvation procured by Christ (which is likened to a ban- 
quet), Lk. xxii. 30; ἐσθίειν τινί, to one’s honor, Ro. xiv. 
6. b. construed w. an ace. of the thing, to eat (con- 
sume) a thing [W. 198 (187) note]: Mt. vi. 25; Mk.i. 
6; Jn. iv. 32; vi. 31; Ro. xiv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 13; x. 25, 
ete.; ἄρτον, to take food, eat a meal, (after the Hebr. 
pm> Sox, Gen. xliii. 25; Ex. ii. 20; 1S. xx. 24; Prov. 
xxiii. 7), Mt. xv. 2; Mk. iii. 20; Lk. xiv. 1, 15; τὸν éav- 
τοῦ ἄρτον, obtained by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; ἄρτον 
παρά τινος (gen. of pers.) to be supported by one, 2 Th. 


ἔσθω 


iii. 8; τὰ παρά τινος, the things supplied by one, Uk. x. 
7, i. q. τὰ παρατιθέμενα in vs. 8 [οἵ. W. 366 (343)]; 1 Co. 
x. 27; μήτε ἄρτον ἐσθ. μήτε οἶνον πίνειν, to live frugally, 
LK. vii. 33; τὸ κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν, to celebrate the 
Lord’s supper, 1 Co. xi. 20; τὸ πάσχα, to eat the paschal 
lamb, celebrate the paschal supper, Mt. xxvi.17; Mk. 
xiv. 12,14; Lk. xxii. 8, 11, 15,16 LT Tr WH; Jn. 
XVili. 28; tas θυσίας, to celebrate the sacrificial feasts, 
said of Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; of animals, in Lk. xv. 16 
(where ὧν stands by attraction for ἅ, because ἐσθίειν 
with a simple gen. of thing is nowhere found in the N. 
T. [W. 198 (187) note]). by a usage hardly to be met 
with in class. Grk. (W. § 28,1; [B. 159 (139)]), ἔκ τινος, 
to (take and) eat of a thing: Lk. xxii. 16 [RG]; Jn. vi. 
26, 50 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 28; on the other hand, ἐκ τοῦ καρποῦ 
(LT Tr WH τὸν καρπόν), ἐκ τοῦ γάλακτος ἐσθίειν, in 1 Co. 
ix. 7, is to support one’s self by the sale of the fruit and 
the milk [but cf. B. as above, and Meyer ad loc.]. ἐκ 
with gen. of place: ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, draw their support from 
the temple, i. e. from the sacrifices and offerings, 1 Co. 
ix. 13 [but T Tr WH read τὰ ἐκ τ. i]; also ἐκ θυσιαστη- 
piov, i. e. from the things laid on the altar, Heb. xiii. 10 
[W. 366 (344)]. by a Hebraism (13 5D), ἀπό τινος (cf. 
W. 199 (187)]: Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28. Metaph. to 
devour, consume: twa, Heb. x. 27; ri, Rev. xvii. 16; of 
rust, Jas. v. 3. [Comp.: κατ-, συν-εσθίω. 

ἔσθω, i. q. ἐσθίω, a poetic form in use fr. Hom. down, 
very rare in prose writ.; from it are extant in the N. T. 
the ptep. ἔσθων in Mk. i. 6 T Tr WH; [Lk. x.7 LT Tr 
WH]; Lk. vii. 33 L Tr WH, [also 34 WH]; the pres. 
subj. 2 pers. plur. ἔσθητε in Lk. xxii. 30 LT Tr WH; 
[ef. κατεσθίω]. It occurs several times in the Sept., as 
Lev. xvii. 10; Judg. xiv. 9 [Alex.]; Is. ix. 20; Sir. xx. 
16; ἔσθετε, Lev. xix. 26. Cf. [Τὰ Proleg. p. 81]; B. 
58 (51). 

Ἔσλεί (T Tr WH, [see WH. App. p. 155, and 5. v. 
εἰ, 41) or Ἔσλί, 6, Esli, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. 
iii. 25.* 

ἔσ-οπτρον, -ov, τό, (ONTO), a mirror: 1 Co. xiii. 12; 
Jas. i. 23. (Sap. vii. 26; Sir. xii. 11; Pind. Nem. 7, 20; 
Anaer. 11, [7 (6)] 3; Plut.; al.) The mirrors of the 
ancients were made, not of glass [cf. B.D. 5. v. Glass, 
fin.], but of steel; Plin. ἢ. n. 33, (9) 45; 34, (17) 48 
[but see the pass. just referred to, and B.D. s. v. mirror].* 

ἑσπέρα, -as, ἡ, (ἔσπερος of or at evening), evening, even- 
tide: Acts iv. 3; xxviii. 23; πρὸς ἑσπ. ἐστίν, it is towards 
evening, Lk. xxiv. 29. [From Pind. and Hdt. down.]* 

[ἑσπερινός, -7, -dv, belonging to the evening, evening: 
φυλακή, Lk. xii. 38 WH (rejected) mrg. (Sept.; Xen., 
Dio Cass., Athen., al.)*] 

*Ecpop [or Ἐσρών in Lk. ΒΦ Ltxt. Trmrg.; WH 
‘Eop., see their Intr. § 408], 6, Esrom or Hezrom or Hes- 
ron, one of Christ’s ancestors: Mt. i. 3; Lk. iii. 33.* 

['Eopév or Ἕσρ. see the preceding word. ] 

ἔσχατος, -7, -ov, (ἔτ. ἔχω, ἔσχον adhering, clinging close; 
[ace. to al. (Curtius § 583 b.) superl. fr. ἐξ, the outer- 
most]), Sept. for }i7N8, MINN; [fr. Hom. down]; ez- 
treme, last in time or in place; 1. joined to nouns: 


253 


ἔσχατος 


τόπος, the last in a series of places [A. V. lowest], Lk 
xiv. 9 sq.; ina temporal succession, the last: ἔσχατος 
ἐχθρός, that remains after the rest have been conquered, 
1 Co. xv. 26; κοδράντης, that remains when the rest 
have one after another been spent, Mt. v. 26; so λεπτόν, 
Lk. xii. 59; ἡ ἐσχ. σάλπιγξ, the trumpet after which no 
other will sound, 1 Co. xv. 52, ef. Meyer ad loc.; ai ἔσχ. 
πληγαί, Rey. xv. 1; xxi. 9; ἡ ἐσχάτη ἡμέρα τῆς ἑορτῆς, 
Jn. vii. 37. When two are contrasted it is i. q. the 
latier, opp. to 6 πρῶτος the former (Deut. xxiv. 1-4): 
thus ra ἔργα (opp. to τῶν πρώτων), Rev. ii. 19; ἡ πλάνη, 
Mt. xxvii. 64 (where the meaning is, ‘lest the latter 
deception, caused by the false story of his resurrection, 
do more harm than the former, which was about to pro- 
duce belief in a false Messiah’); ὁ ἔσχατος “Addy, the 
latter Adam, i. 6. the Messiah (see ᾿Αδάμ, 1), 1 Co. xv. 
45. ἡ éox. ἡμέρα, the last day (of all days), denotes 
that with which the present age (719 Dyna, see αἰών, 
3) which precedes the times of the Messiah or the glori- 
ous return of Christ from heaven will be closed: Jn. vi. 
39 sq. 44, [54]; xi. 24; xii. 48. of the time nearest the 
return of Christ from heaven and the consummation of 
the divine kingdom, the foll. phrases are used: ἐσχάτῃ 
ὥρα, 1 Jn. ii. 18; ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχ. 1 Pet. i. 5; ἐν ea. χρόνῳ. 
Jude 18 Rece., én’ ἐσχάτου χρόνου ibid. Tr WH; ἐν ἐσχά- 
ταις ἡμέραις, Acts ii. 17; Jas. v. 3; 2 Tim. iii. 1; for other 
phrases of the sort see 2 a. below; ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτων τῶν χρό- 
νων, 1 Pet. i. 20 RG, see below. 2. ὁ, 7, τὸ ἔσχ. absol. 
or with the genitive, a. of time: οἱ ἔσχατοι, who had 
come to work last, Mt. xx. 8, 12, [14]; the meaning of 
the saying ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι is Not 
always the same: in Lk. xiii. 30 it signifies, those who 
were last invited to enter the divine kingdom will be 
first to enter when the opportunity comes, i. e. they will 
be admitted forthwith, while others, and those too who 
were first among the invited, will be shut out then as 
coming too late; in Mt. xix. 30; xx. 16 it means, the 
same portion in the future kingdom of God will through 
his goodness be assigned to those invited last as to 
those invited first, although the latter may think they 
deserve something better; cf. Mk. x. 31. ὁ πρῶτος x. ὁ 
ἔσχ-. i. 6. the eternal, Rev. i. 11 Rec., 17; ii. 8; xxii. 
13. ἔσχατος as a predicate joined to a verb adverbially 
[ef. W. 131 (124); § 54, 2]: Mk. xii. 6; ἐσχάτη (RG; 
but see below) πάντων ἀπέθανε, Mk. xii. 22. ἔσχατον, 
ἔσχατα, used substantively [cf. B. 94 (82) § 125, 6] 
in phrases, of the time immediately preceding Christ’s 
return from heaven and the consummation of the divine 
kingdom: ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτου or ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, Heb. i. 2 
(1); 2 Pet. iii. 3, (Barn. ep. 16, 5); τῶν χρόνων, 1 Pet. 
i. 20; ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου, Jude 18 L T (see 1 above, and 
ἐπί, A. II. fin.), ef. Riehm, Lehrbegr. ἃ. Hebrierbriefes, 
p- 205 sq. τὰ ἔσχατα with gen. of pers. the last state of 
one: Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. ii. 20 [but without 
gen. of pers.]. Neut. ἔσχατον, adv., lastly: [w. gen. of 
pers., Mk. xii. 22 LT ΤΥ ΓΗ]; 1 Co. xv. 8. b. of 
space: τὸ ἔσχατον τῆς γῆς, the uttermost part, the end, 
of the earth, Actsi. 8; xiii. 47. c. of rank, grade of 


ἐσγάτως 


worth, last i. 6. lowest: Mk. ix. 85; ὅπ. viii. 9 Rec. ; 1Co. 
Ve ie 

ἐσχάτως, adv., extremely, [Xen. an. 2, 6, 1; Aristot., 
al. 1; exxdrws ἔχειν (in extremis esse), to be in the last 
gasp, at the point of death: Mk. ν. 23. Diod. excerpt. 
Vales. p. 242 [i. e. fr. 1. 10 § 2,4 Dind.]; Artem. oneir. 
8,60. The phrase is censured by the Atticists; οἵ. 
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 704 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
389; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 178 sq.; [Win. 26].* 

ἔσω, adv., (fr. és, for εἴσω [fr. Hom. on] fr. eis; ef. W. 
52; [B. 72 (63); Rutherford, New Phryn. p.432]); 1. 
to within, into: Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54; with gen. 
Mk. xv. 16 [W. § 54, 6]. 2. within: Jn. xx. 26; Acts 
ν. 233 ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος, the internal, inner man, i. 6. the 
soul, conscience, (see ἄνθρωπος, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv. 16 LT Tr 
WH; Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; οἱ ἔσω, those who belong 
to the Christian brotherhood (opp. to οἱ ἔξω [q. v. in 
ὄξω, 1 a.]), 1 Co. v. 12.° 

ἔσωθεν, (ἔσω), adv. of place, fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down; [1. adverbially 5] a. from within (Vulg. de 
intus, ab intus, intrinsecus, [ete.]) : Mk. vii. 21, 23; Lk. 
xi. 7; 2 Co. vii. 5. b. within (cf. W. § 54, 7): Mt. 
vii. 15; xxiii. 25, 27, 28; Rev. iv. 8; ν. 1 [cf. γράφω, 3]; 
ὁ ἔσωθεν ἄνθρωπος, 2 Co. iv. 16 RG (see ἔσω, 2); τὸ 
ἔσωθεν, that which is within, the inside, Lk. xi. 40; with 
gen. of pers. i. q. your soul, ibid. 89. [2. as a prep. with 
the gen. (W § 54,6): Rev. xi. 2 Rec." (see ἔξωθεν, 2).]* 

ἐσώτερος, -€pa, -epov, (compar. of ἔσω, [cf. B. 28 (24 
sq.) ]), inner: Acts xvi. 24; τὸ ἐσώτερον τοῦ καταπετά- 
σματος, the inner space which is behind the veil, i. 6. the 
shrine, the Holy of holies, said of heaven by a fig. drawn 
from the earthly temple, Heb. vi. 19.* 

ἑταῖρος, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 1; @ comrade, 
mate, partner, [A. V. fellow]: Mt. xi. 16 (where T Tr 
WHI τοῖς ἑτέροις [q- v- 1 b., and οἵ. WH. Intr. § 4047); 
νοῦ. in kindly address, friend (my good friend): Mt. xx. 
19. χχιϊ 19: χα 0. 

ἑτερό-γλωσσος, -ov, 6, (ἕτερος and γλῶσσα), one who 
speaks [another i. e.] a foreign tongue (opp. to ὁμόγλωσ- 
cos): Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 1 Aq.; Polyb. 24, 9,5; Strab. 
8 p. 333; [Philo, confus. lingg. § 3; al.]; but different- 
ly in 1 Co. xiv. 21, viz. one who speaks what is utterly 
strange and unintelligible to others unless interpreted ; 
see what is said about ‘speaking with tongues’ under 
γλῶσσα, 2.* 

ἑτεροδιδασκαλέω, -@; (ἕτερος and διδάσκαλος, cf. κακο- 
διδασκαλεῖν, Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 10, 5); to teach other or 
different doctrine i. e. deviating from the truth: 1 Tim. 
i. 3; vi. 3. (Ignat. ad Polye. 3, and al. eccl. writ.) * 

ἑτερο-ζυγέω, -@; (érepdtvyos yoked with a different 
yoke; used in Ley. xix. 19 of the union of beasts of 
different kinds, e.g. an ox and an ass), to come under 
an unequal or different yoke (Beza, impari jugo copulor), 
to be unequally yoked : τινί (on the dat. see W. § 31, 10 
N.4; B. § 133, 8), trop. to have fellowship with one who is 
not an equal: 2 Co. vi. 14, where the apostle is forbid- 
ding Christians to have intercourse with idolaters.* 

ἕτερος, -έρα, -epov, the other; another, other; [fr. Hom. 


254 


wy 
ετι 


on]; Sept. chiefly ἴου Ἴπβ. Itrefers 1. tonumber. 
as opp. to some former pers. or thing; a. without the 
article, other: joined to a noun (which noun denotes some 
number or class within which others are distinguished 
from the one), Mt. xii. 45 and Lk. xi. 26, ἑπτὰ ἕτερα 
πνεύματα, i. 6. from the number of the πνεύματα or demons 
seven others, to be distinguished from the one already 
mentioned; add, Mk. xvi. 12; Lk. vi. 6; ix. 56, ete. ; Jn. 
xix. 37; Acts ii. 40; iv. 12, ete. ; Ro. vii. 8; viii. 39; xiii. 9; 
ἕτεραι yeveal, other than the present, i. e. past generations, 
Eph. iii. 5; as in class. Grk. ἄλλος, so sometimes also 
ἕτερος is elegantly joiaed toa noun that is in apposition: 
twice so in Lk., viz. ἕτεροι δύο κακοῦργοι two others, who 
were malefactors [Bttm. differently § 150, 3], Lk. xxiii. 
325 ἑτέρους ἑβδομηκοντα equiv. to ἑτέρους μαθητάς, οἵτινες 
ἦσαν ἐβδ. Lk. x. 1; reliqua privata aedificia for ‘the rest 
of the buildings, which were private’ Caes. Ὁ. g. 1, 5; ef. 
Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue. p. 147 sq.; W. 530 (493); 
[Joseph. ec. Ap.1,15,3and Miiller’s note]. simply, with- 
out a noun, i. q. ἄλλος τις another, Lk. ix. 59; xxii. 58; 
Acts i. 20; Ro. vii. 4; ἕτεροι πολλοί, Mt. xv. 80; Lk. viii. 
3; Acts xv. 35; οὐδὲν ἕτερον, Acts xvii. 21; ἕτερα, other 
matters, Acts xix. 39 RGT; πολλὰ καὶ ἕτερα, many 
other things also [hardly “also,” see καί, I. 3; cf. remark 
s. V. πολύς, d. a. fin.], Lk. iii. 18 ; ἕτερος with gen. of pers. 
Gal. i. 19; τὰ ἑτέρων (opp. to τὰ ἑαυτοῦ), Phil. ii. 4; ἔτ. 
with ris added, Acts viii. 34; neut. 1 Tim. i. 10; [ἐν 
ἑτέρῳ, introducing a quotation, Heb. ν. 6, οἵ. Win. 592 
(551) —but in Acts xiii. 35 supply Ψψαλμῷ]. in partitive 
formulas: ado... ἕτεροι δέ, Heb. xi. 36 ef. Acts ii. 13 ; 
ὁ mparos ... ἕτερος, Lk. xiv. 19 sq.3 xvi. 7; 6 δεύτερος 
... ἕτερος, Lk. xix. 20 (where 1, T Tr WH ὁ ἕτερος); 
twes... ἕτεροι δέ, Lk. xi. 16; ᾧ μὲν... « ἄλλῳ de... 
ἑτέρῳ δὲ «.. ἄλλῳ δέ, 1 Co. xii. 9 sq.; οἱ μὲν «. ἄλλοι [L οἱ] 
bé... ἕτεροι δέ, Mt. xvi. 14. ὍὌ. with the article, the 
other (of two): οἱ ἕτεροι, the others, the other party, Mt. 
xi. 16 T Tr WH (see ἑταῖρος). distinctively : εἷς or 6 
els ... 6 ἕτερος, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 13; xvii. 
34 sq.; xviii. 10; xxiii. 40; τὸ ἕτερον πλοῖον, Lk. v. 7; 
τῇ δὲ ἑτέρᾳ sc. ἡμέρᾳ, the next day, the day after, Acts 
xx. 15; xxvii. 8, (Xen. Cyr. 4,6, 10, [al.]). ὁ ἕτερος, the 
other, when the relation of conduct to others is under 
consideration is cften put by way of example for any 
other person whatever, and stands for ‘the other affected 
by the action in question’ [and may be trans. thy neigh- 
bor, thy fellow, ete.]: Ro. ii. 1; xiii. 8; 1 Co. vi.1; x. 24, 
29; xiv. 17; Gal. vi. 4; [Jas. iv. 12 RG]; plur. οἱ, ai, 
τὰ ἕτεροι, -at, -a, the others 1. 6. the rest, Lk. iv.43. It re- 
fers 2. toquality; another i. e. one not of the same 
nature, form, class, kind; different, (so in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down): Ro. vii. 23; 1 Co. xiv. 21; xv. 40; 2 Co. 
xi. 4; Gal. i. 6; Heb. vii. 11, 13,15; Jas. ii. 25; Jude 7. 
[Syn. see ἄλλος. 


ἑτέρως, adv., otherwise, differently: Phil. iii.15. [From 
Hom. (apparently) down.] * 
ἔτι, adv., as yet, yet, still; 1. of time; a. ofa 


thing which went on formerly, whereas now a differ- 
ent state of things exists or has begun to exist: arded 


Ve 4 
ἑτοιμάζω 


to ἃ ptep., Mt. xxvii. 63; Lk. xxiv. 6, 44: Acts ix. 1; 
xviii. 18; 2 Th. ii. 5; with gen. absol.: ἔτι (δὲ) αὐτοῦ 
λαλοῦντος, Mt. xii. 46; xvil. 5; xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43; 
Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47; add, Lk. ix. 42; xxiv. 41; Jn. xx. 
1; Acts x. 44; Ro. v. 8; Heb. ix. 8; with a finite verb, 
Heb. vii. 10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning 
of a sentence: ἔτι yap Χριστὸς ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθ. . . . ἀπέ- 
Gave, Ro. v. 6; cf. W. § 61, 5 p. 553 (515); [B. 389 
(333)]; with another notation of time, so that it may be 
trans. even (cf. Lat. jam) : ἔτι ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός, Lk. i. 15 
(ἔτι ἐκ Bpépeos, Anthol. 9, 567,1; ἔτι am ἀρχῆς, Plut. 
consol. ad Apoll. 6 p. 104 d.). ὍὌ. of a thing which 
continues at present, even now: Mk. viii. 17 RG; Lk. 
xiv. 22; Gal. i. 10; 1 Co. xv. 17; with νῦν added, 1 Co. 
iii. 2 [L WH br. ἔτι]; further, longer, (where it is 
thought strange that, when one thing has established 
itself, another has not been altered or abolished, but is 
still adhered to or continues): Ro. iii. 7; vi. 2; ix. 19; 
Gal. v.11. ο. with negatives: od... ἔτι, οὐκ ἔτι, no 
longer, no more, Lk. xvi. 2; xx. 36; xxi. 1,4; xxii. 3; 
ἵνα μὴ ἔτι lest longer, that... no more, Rev. xx. ὃ; οὐ μὴ 
ἔτι, Rey. iii. 12; xviii. 21-23 ; οὐδείς, μηδείς, -δεμία, -δὲν 
ἔτι, nobody, nothing more, Mt. v.13; Heb. x. 2, (see μηκέτι, 
οὐκέτι). 2. of degree and increase; with the 
comparative, even, yet: Phil. i. 9; Heb. vii. 15, (W. 
240 (225)). of what remains, [yet]: Jn. iv. 35; vii. 33; 
xii. 35; xiii. 33; Mt. xix. 20; Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xviii. 22; 
of what is added, besides, more, further: ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb. 
xii. 26 sq. ; ἔτι ἕνα ἢ δύο, Mt. xviii. 16; add, Mt. xxvi. 65 ; 
Heb. xi. 32; ἔτι δέ yea moreover, and further, (Lat. prae- 
terea vero), Heb. xi. 36 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1; Diod. 1, 
74; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 4); ἔτι δὲ καί (but or) yea 
moreover also (Lat. praeterea vero etiam), Lk. xiv. 26 R 
GT Lumrg.; Acts ii. 26 ; ἔτι τε καί and moreover too (Lat. 
insuperque adeo), Lk. xiv. 26 L txt. Tr WH; Acts xxi. 
28, [ef. B. § 149, 8; W. 578 (537) note]. 

ἑτοιμάζω ; fut. ἑτοιμάσω ; 1 aor. ἡτοίμασα ; pf. ἡτοίμακα 
(Mt. xxii. 4 LT Tr WH); Pass., pf. ἡτοίμασμαι; 1 aor. 
ἡτοιμάσθην; (ἔτοιμος) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often 
for }213 and 7.33; to make ready, prepare: absol. to 
make the necessary preparations, get everything ready, Lk. 
xii. 47; of preparing a feast, Lk. xxii. 9, 12, (Gen. xliii. 
15; 1 Chr. xii. 39); w. dat. of pers.,for one: of prepar- 
ing a lodging, Lk. ix. 52 [W. 594 (552); B. § 130, 5]; 
a supper, Mk. xiv. 15; also w. a telic inf. added, Mt. xxvi. 
17; foll. by ἵνα [ef. B. 237 (205)], Mk. xiv. 12; w. 
ace. of the thing: ἃ ἡτοίμασας the things which thou hast 
prepared (as a store), Lk. xii. 20; [ri δειπνήσω, Lk. xvii. 
'8]; τὸ ἄριστον, Mt. xxii. 4; τὸ πάσχα, Mt. xxvi. 19; Mk. 
xiv. 16; Lk. xxii. 8,13; ἀρώματα, Lk. xxiii. 56; xxiv. 1; 
τόπον Twi, In. xiv. 2 sq.; ξενίαν, Philem. 22; [συμβούλιον, 
Mk. xv. 1 TWH mrg., cf. cupB.]; τὴν ὁδὸν κυρίου (by a 
fig. drawn from the oriental custom of sending on before 
kings on their journeys persons to level the roads and 
make them passable), to prepare the minds of men to 
give the Messiah a fit reception and secure his blessings: 
Mt. iii. 3; ΜΚ. 1. 3; Lk. iii. 4, (fr. Is. xl. 3); i. 765 [ἵνα ἑτοι- 
μασθῇ ἡ ὁδὸς τῶν βασιλέων, Rev. xvi. 12]; w. acc. of pers., 


255 


¥ 
€TOS 


στρατιώτας, Acts xxiii. 23; τινί τινα, one for one, LK. i. 
17; ἑαυτόν, Rev. xix. 7; foll. by iva [ef. B. 237 (205)], 
Rev. viii. 6; ἡτοιμασμένη ὡς νύμφη, i. 6. beautifully 
adorned, Rev. xxi. 2; ἡτοιμασμ. εἴς τι, prepared i. 6. fit 
for accomplishing any thing, 2 Tim. ii. 21; Rey. ix. 7; 
prepared i.e. kept in readiness, εἰς τὴν ὥραν κ. ἡμέραν 
etc., for the hour and day se. predetermined, Rey. ix. 15. 
In a peculiar sense God is said ἑτοιμάσαι τι for men, i. 6. 
to have caused good or ill to befall them, almost i. q. to 
have ordained ; of blessings: ri, Lk. ii. 31; Rev. xii. 6; 
τινί τι, Mt. xx. 23; xxv. 34; Mk. x. 40; [1 Co. ii. 9]; 
Heb. xi. 16; of punishment: τινί τι, Mt. xxv. 41. 
[Comp.: προ-ετοιμάζω.} ἢ 

ἑτοιμασία, -ας, 7, (ἑτοιμάζω, cf. θαυμασία, εἰκασία, ἐρ- 
yacia) ; 1. the act of preparing : τῆς τροφῆς, Sap. xiii. 
12; τῶν κλιναρίων, Artem. oneir. 2, 57. 2. i. q. ἑτοι- 
porns, the condition of a pers. or thing so far forth as pre- 
pared, preparedness, readiness: Hipp. p. 24 [i. 74 ed. 
Kiihn]; Joseph. antt. 10, 1,2; readiness of mind (Germ. 
Bereitwilligkeit), τῆς καρδίας, Ps. ix. 88 (x. 17): ἐν ἑτοι- 
μασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, with the promptitude and alacrity 
which the gospel produces, Eph. vi. 15.* 

ἕτοιμος (on the accent cf. [Chandler ὃ 394]; W. 52 
(51)), τ (2 Co. ix. 5; 1 Pet. i. 5), τον, and -os, τον (Mt. 
xxv. 10 [cf. WH. App. p. 151"; W. § 11,1; B. 25 (22)]); 
fr. Hom. down; prepared, ready; a. of things: Mt. 
xxii. 4, 8, [(Lk. xiv. 17)]; Mk. xiv. 15 [Lbr. ér.]; 2 Co. 
ix. 5; ready to hand: ra ἕτοιμα, the things (made) ready 
(in advance by others), i. e. the Christian churches al- 
ready founded by them, 2 Co. x. 16; i. q. opportune, 
seasonable, ὁ καιρός, Jn. vii. 6; σωτηρία ἑτοίμη ἀποκαλυ- 
φθῆναι, on the point of being revealed, 1 Pet.i.5. Ὅ. of 
persons ; ready, prepared : to do something, Acts xxiii. 
21; to receive one coming, Mt. xxiv. 44; xxv. 10; Lk. 
xii. 40; πρός τι, for (the doing of) a thing, Tit. iii. 1; 
1 Pet. iii. 15; foll. by the inf. [ef. B. 260 (224)], Lk. 
xxii. 33; by rod with inf., Acts xxiii. 15 [B. § 140, 15; 
W. 8 44,4a.]; ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχω, to be in readiness, foll. by 
the inf. (Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 34 sub fin.): 2 Co. x. 6 
[ef. W. 332 (311)]. (For 713)» Ex. xix. 11,15; Josh. 
viii. 4, ete.) * 

ἑτοίμως, adv., [fr. Thue. on], readily; ἑτοίμως ἔχω to 
be ready: foll. by inf., Acts xxi. 13; 2 Co. xii. 14; 1 
Pet. iv. 5 [(not WH)]. (Sept. Dan. iii. 15; Diod. 16, 
28; Joseph. antt. 12, 4,2; 13, 1,1.) * 

ἔτος, -ους, [gen. plur. ἐτῶν, cf. B. 14 (13)], τό, [fr. 
Hom. down], Hebr. τ), α year: Lk. iii. 1; Acts vii. 
80; Heb. i. 12; 2 Pet. iii. 8; Rev. xx. 3, ete.; ἔτη ἔχειν, 
to have passed years, Jn. viii. 57; with ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ 
added, Jn. v. 5 [ef. W. § 32, 6]; εἶναι, γίνεσθαι, yeyove- 
vat ἐτῶν, 6. g. δώδεκα, to be twelve years old [ef. Eng. (a 
boy) of twelve years]: Mk. v.42; Lk. ii. 42; iii. 23 [ef. 
W. 349 (328)]; viii. 42; Actsiv. 22; γεγονυῖα ἔλαττον 
ἐτῶν ἑξήκοντα, less than sixty years old, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W. 
590 (549)]; dat. plur., of the space of time within which 
a thing is done [W. § 31, 9a.; B. § 133, 26], Jn. ii. 20; 
Acts xiii. 20; ace., in answer to the quest. how long?: 
Mt. ix. 20; Mk. ν. 25; Lk. ii. 86; xiii. 7 sq. 11,16; xv. 


εὖ 256 


29; Acts vii. 6, 36, 42; Heb. iii. 10 (9), 17; Rev. xx. 2, 
4,6. preceded bya prep.: ἀπό, from... on, since, Lk. 
viii. 43; Ro. xv. 23; in the same sense ἐκ, Acts ix. 33; 
xxiv. 10[A. V. of many years}; διά with gen., ... years 
having intervened, i. 6. after [see διά, 11. 2]: Acts xxiv. 
17; Gal. ii. 1; εἰς, for... years, Lk. xii. 19; ἐπί with 
ace. (see ἐπί, C. II. 1 p. 235° bot.), for (the space of), 
Acts xix. 10; μετά with ace., after, Gal. 1. 18; iii. 17; 
πρό with gen., before [Eng. ago; cf. πρό, b.], 2 Co. xii. 2; 
κατ᾽ ἔτος, yearly, Lk. ii. 41. [SYN. cf. ἐνιαυτός. 

εὖ, adv., (prop. ev, the unused neut. of the adj. evs in 
ITom.), well: εὖ πράσσω, not as many interp. take it, 
contrary to ordinary Grk. usage, to do well 1. 6. act 
rightly (which in Greek is expressed by ὀρθῶς or καλῶς 
πράσσω), but to be well off, fare well, prosper, Acts xv. 
29 [R. V. it shall be well with you] (Xen. mem. 1, 6, 8; 
2,4,6; 4, 2,26; oec. 11,8; Joseph. antt. 12,4, 1; ὅστις 
καλῶς πράττει, οὐχὶ καὶ εὖ πράττει; Plat. Ale. i. p. 116 b.; 
εἰ εὖ πράττουσι ἀδικοῦντες, Prot. p. 333 d.; εἴ τις ἄλλος εὖ 
μὲν ἐποίησεν ὑμᾶς εὖ πράττων, Dem. 469, 14; and some 
began their letters with εὖ πράττειν, cf. 2 Mace. ix. 19; 
Diog. Laért. 3, 61 and Menagius (Ménage) in loc. In 
one passage alone, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 14, the drift of the 
discussion permits Socrates to deviate from common 
usage by attaching to the phrase the notion of right con- 
duet, acting well; [yet this sense occurs in eccles. Grk., 
see e. g. Justin M. apol. 1, 28 and Otto’s note; ef. L. 
and S. s. v. πράσσω, IV.]); ἵνα εὖ σοι γένηται that it 
may be well, things may turn out well, with thee, Eph. 
vi. 3 (Gen. xii. 13; [Ex. xx. 12]; Deut. iv. 40; [v. 16]; 
Orat. Az. [i. e. Song of the Three Children] vs. 6); εὖ 
ποιεῖν τινα, to do one good, Mk. xiv. 7 [here T om. the 
ace.; L Tr WH read dat.], (Judith x. 16; Bar. vi. (i.e. 
Ep. Jer.) 37 (88); Sir. xiv. 11; Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,30). In 
commendations, εὖ (δοῦλε ἀγαθέ), well! well done! Mt. 
xxv. 21, 23; Lk. xix.17 RG; Xen. venat. 6, 20; see 
εὖγε." 

Eva [WH Εὔα (see their Introd. § 408); Rec. Eva, so 
G Tr in 1 Tim. ii. 13, where R* Eda], -as [B. 17 (15)], 
ἡ, (730, explained Gen. iii. 20), Eve, the wife of Adam : 
2 Co. xi. 8; 1 Tim. ii. 13.* 

εὐαγγελίζω : 1 aor. εὐηγγέλισα (Rev. x. 7; xiv. 6; 1S. 
xxxi. 9; 2S. xviii. 19; W. 71 (69); [B. 35 (30)]); Pass., 
pres. εὐαγγελίζομαι : pf. ptep. εὐηγγελισμένοι (Heb. iv. 
2); 1 aor. εὐηγγελίσθην; Mid., pres. evayyed (Copat ; impf. 
εὐηγγελιζόμην (Acts viii. 25 LT Tr WH); 1 aor. εὐηγγε- 
λισάμην ; (εὐάγγελος bringing good news); Sept. for 
Wa; to bring good news, to announce glad tidings; Vulg. 
evangelizo [ete.]; used in the O. T. of any kind of good 
news: 1S. xxxi. 9; 2. 5.1. 30; 1 Chr.x.9; of the joyful 
tidings of God’s kindnesses, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 10; τὸ σω- 
τήριον θεοῦ, Ps. χον. (xevi.) 2; in particular, of the 
Messianic blessings: Is. xl. 9; lii. 7; lx. 6; lxi. 1, ete.; 
in the N. T. used esp. of the glad tidings of the coming 
kingdom of God, and of the salvation to be obtained in 
it through Christ, and of what relates to this salvation. 

L Inthe Active (rarein Grk. auth. also, in fact found 
only in later Grk., as Polyaen. 5,7; εὐηγγελίκει αὐτῷ, 


εὐαγγελίζω 


Dio Cass. 61, 13; οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268; [W. 241): 
w. dat. of the pers. to whom the news is brought, Rev. 
x. 7 Ree.; w. ace. of the pers. to whom the announce- 
ment is made, ibid. G LT Tr WH; Rev. xiv. 6 RG; bya 
construction not found elsewhere, ἐπί τινα (cf. Germ. die 
Botschaft an einen bringen), ibid. GL T Tr WH. Il. 
Passive [ef. W. 229 (215); B. 188 (163)]; of persons, 
glad tidings are brought to one, one has glad tidings pro- 
claimed to him: Mt. xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22; Heb. iv. 2,6; of 
things, to be proclaimed: εὐαγγελίζεται ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ 
θεοῦ, the glad tidings are published of the kingdom of 
God close at hand, Lk. xvi. 16; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, the joyful 
announcement of man’s salvation is delivered, Gal. i. 11 
[Β. 148 (129 sq.)]; τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν εἰς ὑμᾶς, the 
word of good tidings brought unto you (see εἰς, A. I. 5 
b. [ef. W. 213 (200) ]), 1 Pet. i. 25; impers. εὐηγγελίσθη 
τινί, the good news of salvation was declared, 1 Pet. iv. 
6. III. as deponent Middle (in Grk. writ. fr. 
Arstph. eqq. 643 down), to proclaim glad tidings; spec. 
to instruct (men) concerning the things that pertain to 
Christian salvation: simply, Lk. ix. 6; xx. 1; Acts xiv. 
7; Ro. xv. 20; 1 Co.i. 17; ix. 16,18; rim λόγῳ εὐηγγε- 
λισάμην ὑμῖν εἰ κατέχετε, if ye hold fast in your minds 
with what word (i. e. with what interpretation; for he 
contrasts his own view of Christian salvation with his 
opponents’ doctrine of the resurrection) I preached to 
you the glad tidings of salvation, 1 Co. xv. 2. w. dat. 
of pers. (as com. in Grk. writ.), to any one: Lk. iv. 18 
fr. Is. lxi. 1; spec. to bring to one the good tidings con- 
cerning Jesus as the Messiah: Gal.i.8; iv. 13; Ro. i. 
15; evayy. w. ace. of the thing: univ., τὴν πίστιν τινός, 
to bring good tidings of the faith in which one excels, 
1 Th. iii. 6; of Messianic blessings: εἰρήνην, Acts x. 36; 
Ro. x. 15 [RG Tr mrg. br.] (fr. Is. lii. 7) ; τὴν βασιλείαν 
τ. θεοῦ, Lk. viii. 1; τὰ περὶ τῆς Bac. τ. θεοῦ, Acts viii. 12 
(where GLT Tr WH om. τά ; cf. Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 2 
ὁ μὲν... τῇ γυναικὶ περὶ τούτων εὐηγγελίζετο) ; THY πίστιν, 
the necessity of having faith in Christ, Gal. i. 28. τί 
τινι [Β. 150 (181) ], Lk. i. 19; ii. 10; Acts xvii. 18 [T Tr 
WHom. dat.]; Eph. ii. 17; τινὶ τ. Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. iv. 
43; evayy. ᾿Ιησοῦν τὸν Χριστόν or (so L T Tr WH) τὸν 
Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, to proclaim the glad news of Jesus the 
Christ, Acts v. 42, and (which comes to the same thing) 
τὸν κύριον Ἰησοῦν, Acts xi. 20; τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν τοῖς 
ἔθνεσι, among the Gentiles, Gal. i. 16; τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν τινι, 
Acts viii. 35; with καὶ τὴν ἀνάστασίν τινι added, Acts 
xvii. 18 (where T Tr WH om. αὐτοῖς) ; τὸν λόγον, to an- 
nounce the glad tidings of the Messiah, or of the king- 
dom of God, or of eternal salvation offered through 
Christ, Acts viii. 4; τὸν λόγον τοῦ κυρίου, Acts xv. 35; 
τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, 1 Co. xv. 1; w. dat. of the pers. added to 
whom it is preached, 2 Co. xi. 7; τὸν πλοῦτον [τὸ πλοῦ- 
τος] τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι, among the Gentiles [but 
LT Tr WHom. ἐν], Eph. 111. 8. By a constr. unknown 
to the earlier Grks. (cf. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 268), with 
ace. of the pers. to whom the announcement is made 
[W. 223 (209)]: Lk. iii. 18; Acts xvi. 10; Gal. i. 9 
(where it is interchanged with evayy. τινι vs. 8); 1 Pet. 


εὐαγγέλιον 


i 12, (Justin M. apol. 1, 33); τινά τι, ace. of the thing 
(Alciphr. epp. 3, 12; Heliod. 2.10; Euseb. h. e. 3, 4; 
[ef. W. 227 (213); B. 150 (131)]), foll. by ὅτε ete. Acts 
xiii. 32; τινά foll. by inf. Acts xiv. 15; τὰς κώμας, τὰς 
πόλεις, Acts vill. 25, 40; xiv. 21; [eis τὰ ὑπερέκεινα, 
1 Co. x. 16 (ef. W. 213 (200), and II. above). Comp.: 
τρο-ευαγγελίζομαι. * 

εὐαγγέλιον, -ov, τό, (εὐάγγελος [cf. εὐαγγελίζω), Hebr. 
mwa and ΤΠ3 ; 1. a reward for good tidings (cf. 
ra διδασκάλια, the fees given the διδάσκαλος), Hom. Od. 
14, 152; Οἷς. ad Att. 2,3 and 12; 13,40; Plut. Demetr. 
17; Ages. 33; Sept. 2S. iv. 10. 2. good tidings: 
Leian. asin. 26; App. Ὁ. civ. 4,20; Plut.; al.; plur. 
Sept. 2S. xviii. 22, 25, com. txt.; but in each place εὐαγ- 
γελία should apparently be restored, on account of vs. 20 
ἀνὴρ εὐαγγελίας. Inthe N.T.spec. a. the glad tidings 
of the kingdom of God soon to be set up, and subsequently 
also of Jesus, the Messiah, the founder of this kingdom: 
ME. i. 155 viii. 35; x. 29; xiii. 10; xiv.9; xvi.15; Mt. 
xxvi. 13; w. agen. of the obj. added: τῆς βασιλείας, Mt. 
iv. 23; ix. 85; xxiv. 14; Mk.i.14 ΒΤ, τ. After the 
death of Christ the term τὸ εὐαγγέλιον comprises also 
the preaching of (concerning) Jesus Christ as having 
suffered death on the cross to procure eternal salvation 
for men inthe kingdom of God, but as restored to life 
and exalted to the right hand of God in heaven, thence 
to return in majesty to consummate the kingdom of God; 
so that it may be more briefly defined as the glad tidings 
of salvation through Christ; the proclamation of the grace 
of God manifested and pledged in Christ; the gospel 
[A-S. god-spell (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.)]: Acts 
xv. ἐ Roo. 16 GL TTr WH; x.16; xi. 28; 1 Co: iv. 
15; ix. 14,18[G LT Tr WH], 23; xv.1; 2 Co. viii. 18; 
Gal. ii. 2; Eph. iii. 6; vi. 19 [L WH br. evay.}; Phil. i. 5, 
ἡ 1. 1 (LG) 5 [1|.22. ΘΕ εἰς, Β5Π:2. ἃ.}; iv.3; [ay ek 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2]; 1 ΤῊ. 11. 4; 2 ΤΊπι. 1. 8,10; w. 
gen. of the obj., the gospel concerning etc.: τοῦ Χριστοῦ 
[ef. W. 186 (175) sq.], Ro. i. 16 Rec.; xv. 19, 29 Rec. ; 
1 Co. ix. 12, 18 [Ree.]; 2 Co. ii. 12; ix.13; x. 14; Gal. 
i. 7; Phil. i. 27; 1 Th. iii. 2; τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν "Inc. Xp. 
2 Th. i. 8 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. Χριστοῦ}; τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Ro. i. 9 ef. Mk. i. 1; τῆς σωτηρίας ὑμῶν, Eph. i. 13; 
τῆς εἰρήνης, Eph. vi. 15; τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xx. 
34: τῆς δύξης τοῦ μακαρίου θεοῦ. 1 Tim. i. 11; τῆς δόξης 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. iv. 4. ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, the 
truth contained in the gospel [ef. W. 236 (221 sq.)], 
Gai. ii. 5, 14; Col. i. 5; ἡ ἐλπὶς τοῦ evayy. the hope which 
the gospel awakens and strengthens, Col. i. 23; ἡ πίστις 
tov evayy. the faith given the gospel, Phil. i. 27; of 
δεσμοὶ τ. evayy. (see δεσμός. fin.), Philem. 13; ἕτερον 
evayy- of another sort, i. 6. different from the true doc- 
trine concerning Christian salvation, Gal. i. 6; 2 Co. xi. 
4; αἰώνιον evayy. the contents of which were decreed by 
God from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. with gen. of the au- 
thor; and that a. of the author of the subject-matter 
or facts on which the glad tidings of man’s salvation 
rest, and who wished these glad tidings to be conveyed 
to men: τὸ evayy. Tov θεοῦ. Ro. xv. 16; 2 Co. xi. 7; 1 Th. 


261 


εὐγενὴς 


ii. 2, 8 sq.; 1 Pet. iv. 17; more fully τοῦ θεοῦ περὶ τοῦ 
υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, Ro. i. 1-3. B. of the author of the partic- 
ular mode in which the subject-matter of the gospel is 
understood (conception of the gospel) and taught to 
others; thus Paul calls his exposition of the gospel (and 
that of the teachers who agree with him), in opposition 
to that of those teaching differently, ro evayy. ἡμῶι : 
2 Co. iv. 3, [ef. τὸ εὐ. τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ. Gal. i. 
11]; κατὰ τὸ evayy. pov, as I expound it, Ro. ii. 16; xvi. 
25; 2 Tim. ii. 8. y- of him who preaches the gospel: 
ἡμῶν, 1 Th.i.5; 2 Th. ii. 14. with gen. of those to 
whom it is announced: τῆς περιτομῆς (i. 6. τῶν περιτετμη- 
μένων), to be preached to the circumcised or Jews; and 
τὸ εὐ. τῆς ἀκροβυστίας, to be carried to the Gentiles, Gal. 
sy Ub b. As the Messianic rank of Jesus was proved 
by his words, his deeds, and his death, the narrative of 
the sayings, deeds, and death of Jesus Christ came to be 
called εὐαγγέλιον : so perhaps in Mk. i. 1; for the pas- 
sage may also mean, ‘glad tidings concerning Jesus 
Christ began to be prociaimed even as it is written,’ viz. 
by John the Baptist; cf. De Wette ad loe. At length 
the name was given to a written narrative of the glad 
tidings; so in the titles of the Gospels, on which see 
κατά, II. 8 ο. α. [On the eccl. senses of the word, see 
Soph. Lex. 5. v.] * 

εὐαγγελιστής, -οῦ, 6, (εὐαγγελίζω), a bibl. and eccl. word, 
a bringer of good tidings, an evangelist (Vulg. evangelis- 
ta). This name is given in the N. T. to those heralds of 
salvation through Christ who are not apostles: Acts xxi. 
8; Eph. iv. 11; 2 Tim. iv. 5. [B. D.s. v. Evangelist.]* 

ebapertéw, -@: 1 aor. inf. εὐαρεστῆσαι ; pf. inf. εὐηρε- 
στηκέναι, and without augm. εἰαρεστηκ. Heb. xi. 5 L WH 
[ef. WH. App. p. 162; B. 35 (30)]; to be well-pleasing : 
τῷ θεῷ (Sept. for OT ONA-NN JoAND, Gen. v. 22, 24; 
vi. 9), Heb. xi. 5 sq. (Sir. xliv. 16; Philo de Abr. § 6; 
de exsecr. 8 9; τινί, Diod. 14, 4). Pass. pres. evape- 
στοῦμαι ; τινί [Β. 188 (163); W. § 39,1 a.], fo be well 
pleased with a thing: Heb. xiii. 16 (Diod. 3, 55; 20,79; 
Diog. Laért. 10, 137).* 

εὐ-άρεστος, -ov, (fr. εὖ and dpeords), well-pleasing, ac- 
ceptable: Ro. xii. 2; τινί, to one, Ro. xii. 1; xiv. 18; 2 Co. 
v. 9; Eph. v. 10; Phil. iv. 18; ἔν τινι, in anything, Tit. ii. 
9; ἐν κυρίῳ (see ἐν I. 6 b., p. 211° mid.), Col. iii. 20 (R om. 
ev); ἐνώπιον with gen. of pers., in one’s judgment: Heb. 
xiii. 21. (Sap. iv. 10; ix. 10; Clem. Al. [strom. 2, 19 p. 
481, 21 ete.; Just. M. apol. 1, 44 sub fin.; Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor. 49, 5].) See the foll. word.* 

εὐταρέστως, adv., in a manner well-pleasing to one, ac- 
ceptably: τῷ θεῷ, Heb. xii. 28. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5; 
gladly, willingly, Epict. diss. 1, 12, 21; frag. 11.) * 

Εὔβουλος, -ov, 6, [lit. of good counsel], Eubulus, a 
Christian: 2 Tim. iv. 21.* 

εὖ“ γε, used in commendation, well done! Lk. xix.17 LT 
Tr WH. (Arstph., Plat., al.; Sept. for msm.) Cf. ed, fin.* 

εὐγενής, -ἐς, (fr. εὖ and γένος) ; 1. well-born, of noble 
race: Lk. xix. 12 (ofa prince) ; 1 Co.i. 26. 2. noble- 
minded: compar. εὐγενέστερος, Acts xvii. 11. (Sept.; 
often in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. and Tragg. down.) * 


εὐδία 


εὐδία, -ας, ἡ, (fr. εὔδιος, -ov, and this fr. εὖ and Ζεύς, 
gen. Διός, Zeus, the ruler of the air and sky), a serene 
sky, fair weather: Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the 
passage]. (Sir. iii. 15; Pind., Aeschyl., Hippocr., Xen., 
and 566.) * 

εὐ-δοκέω, -@; impf. 1 pers. plur. εὐδοκοῦμεν (1 Th. ii. 8 
[where WH after cod. Vat. nidox.; W.and B. as below]); 
1 aor. εὐδύκησα and (in Heb. x. 6, 8, L T Tr; 1 Co. x. 5 
LTr WH; Ro. xv. 26, 27 and 1 Th. iii. 1 T Tr WH ; Mt. 
xii. 18 Τ Tr; Mt. iii. 17 T; Col.i. 19 L mrg.) ηὐδόκησα, 
ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 456 and 140; W. ΤΙ (69); [Β. 
84 (30); ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 120; WH. App. p. 162]; (fr. 
εὖ and δοκέω, ef. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 370, who treats 
of the word fully and with his usual learning [ef. W. 
101 (95)]); Sept. mostly for ΤΙΝ Ἢ; among Grk. writ. 
used esp. by Polyb., Diod., and Dion. Hal.; 1. asin 
prof. auth., foll. by an infin., it seems good to one, is one’s 
good pleasure; to think it good, choose, determine, decide : 
Lk. xii. 832; 1 Co. i. 21; Gal. i.15; once foll. by ace. w. 
inf., Col.i. 19 [ef. Bp. Lghtft.; W. § 64, 3b.; B. § 129,16]; 
with the included idea of kindness accompanying the de- 
cision, Ro. xv. 26 sq.; to do willingly what is signified by 
the inf., to be ready to, 1 Th. ii. 8; to prefer, choose rather, 
[A. V. we thought it good], 1 Th. iii. 1; Sir. xxv. 16; 
more fully μᾶλλον εὐδοκῶ, 2 Co. v. 8. 2. by a usage 
peculiar to bibl. writ., foll. by ἔν τινι, to be well pleased 
with, take pleasure in, a pers. or thing [ef. W. 38, 232 
(218); B. 185 (160)]: Mt. iii. 17; xii. 18 Tr; xvii. 
5; Mk. i. 11; Lk. iii. 22, [on the tense in the preceding 
pass. cf. W. 278 (261); Β. 198 (171)]; 1Co.x.5; 2 Co. 
xii. 10; 2 Th. 11. 12 RGLbr.; Heb. χ. 88, (3 yan, 2 5. 
xxii. 20; Mal. ii. 17; 3 πιεῖν, Ps. exlix. 4). foll. by ets 
τινα (i.e. when directing the mind, turning the thoughts, 
unto), to be favorably inclined towards one [ef. W. § 31, 
5; B. § 133, 23]: Mt. xii. 18 RG; 2 Pet.i.17; w. sim- 
ple ace. of pers. to be favorable to, take pleasure in [οἵ. 
W. 222 (209)]: Mt. xii. 18 L TWH; with ace. of the 
thing : Heb. x. 6, 8, (Ps. 1. (11.) 18, 21; Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 2; 
Gen. xxxiii. 10; Lev. xxvi. 34, 41); as in Grk. writ. 
also, w. the dat. of the pers. or thing with which one is 
well pleased: 2 Th. ii. 12 T Tr WH (see above); 1 
Mace. i. 43; 1 Esdr. iv. 39. [Comp.: συν-ευδοκέω.] ἢ 

εὐδοκία, -as, ἡ, (fr. εὐδοκέω, as εὐλογία fr. εὐλογέω), 
unknown to prof. auth. [ Boeckh, Inserr. 5960], found in 
the O. T. in some of the Pss. (for ΤΣ) and often in Sir.; 
on itef. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 371 sq.; [esp. Bp. Lghtft. 
on Phil.i.15]; prop. beneplacitum (Vulg. [ed. Clement. ] 
Eph. i. 9); 1. will, choice: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21, 
(on both pass. see ἔμπροσθεν, 2 b.); Sir. 1. 27 (24); 
XxXxvi. 13, ete. ; in particular, good-will, kindly intent, be- 
nevolence: Eph. i. 5,9; Phil. ii. 13, (Ps. 1. (11.) 20; Sir. ii. 
16; xi. 17 (15) ete.) ; δι᾿ εὐδοκίαν, prompted by good will, 
bli ei.) 15: 2. delight, pleasure, satisfaction: with 
gen. of the thing that pleases, 2 Th.i. 11; ἐν ἀνθρώποις 
εὐδοκία, either among men pleasure produced by salva- 
tion, or God’s pleasure in men, Lk. ii. 14 RG Tr mrg. 
WH mrg.; ἄνθρωποι εὐδοκίας, men in whom God is well 
p.eased [i.e. not a particular class of men (viz. believ- 


258 


εὐθύνω 


ers), but the whole race, contemplated as blessed in 
Christ’s birth], ibid. L T Tr txt. WH txt. [see WH. 
App. ad loc.; Field, Otium Norv. iii. ad loe.], (Ps. exliv. 
(exlv.) 16; Sir. ix. 12). 3. desire (for delight in any 
absent thing easily begets a longing for it): Ro. x. 1; 
ef. Philippi and Tholuck ad loc.* 

εὐεργεσία, -as, ἡ, (εὐεργέτης); a good deed, benefit: 1 
Tim. vi. 2 (on which see ἀντιλαμβάνω, 2); with gen. 
of the pers. on whom the benefit is conferred [W. 185 
(174)], Actsiv. 9. (2 Mace. vi. 13; ix. 26; Sap. xvi. 11, 
24; in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down.) * 

evepyetéw, -@; (εὐεργέτης), 10 do good, bestow benefits : 
Acts x. 38. (Sept.; often in Attie writ.) * 

εὐεργέτης, -ov, 6, a benefactor (fr. Pind. and Hat. 
down); it was also a title of honor, conferred on such 
as had done their country service, and upon princes; 
equiv. to Soter, Pater Patriae: Lk. xxii. 25. (Cf. Hat. 
8, 85; Thuc. 1, 129; Xen. vect 8, 11; Hell. 6, 1, 4; 
Plat. de virt. p. 379 b.; al.; ef. 2 Mace. iv. 2; joined 
with σωτήρ, Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 3, 9, 8; Addit. to Esth. vi. 12 
[Tdf. viii. l. 25]; Diod. 11, 26.)* 

εὔθετος, -ov, (fr. εὖ and θετός), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hippocr. down; prop. well-placed; a. fit: εἴς τι, 
Lk. ix. 62 RG; xiv. 35 (34), (Diod. 2, 57 et al.) ; with 
dat. of the thing for which: Lk. ix. 62 LT Tr WH (τῷ 
πράγματι, Nicol. Stob. fl. 14, 7 [149,4]). Ὅ. useful: 
τινί, Heb. vi. 7 [some would make the dat. here depend 
on the ptep.]; (of time, seasonable, Ps, xxxi. (xxxii.) 6; 
Susan. 15).* 

εὐθέως, adv., (fr. εὐθύς. straightway, immediately, forth- 
with: Mt. iv. 20, 22; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks., 
esp. Mark’s Gospel [where, however, T Tr WH have 
substituted εὐθύς in some 35 out of 41 cases]; elsewhere 
only in Gal. i. 16 ; Jas. i. 24; Rev. iv. 2, (for o8nd, Job 
ν. 3). shortly, soon: 8 Jn. 14. [From Soph. down. ] 

εὐθυδρομέω, -@: 1 aor. εὐθυδρόμησα [see εὐδοκέω] ; (εὐ- 
θυδρόμος, i.e. εὐθύς and δρόμος) ; to make a straight course, 
run a straight course: foll. by eis w. ace. of place, Acts 
xvi. 11; εὐθυδρομήπας ἦλθον eis, Acts xxi. 1. (Philo, 
alleg. lege. iii. § 79; de agricult. § 40.) * 

εὐθυμέω, -@; (εὔθυιιος) ; 1. trans. to put in good 
spirits, gladden, make cheerful, (Aeschyl. in Plat. de rep. 
2, 383 b.). Mid. to be of good spirits, to be cheerful, (Xen., 


Plat.). 2. intrans. to be joyful, be of good cheer, of 
good courage: Acts xxvii. 22, 25; Jas. v.13. (Eur. 


Cycel. 530; Plut. de tranquill. anim. 2 and 9.) * 

εὔϑυμος, -ov, (εὖ and θυμός); 1. well-disposed, kind, 
(Hom. Οἁ. 14,03). 2. of good cheer, of good courage: Acts 
xxvii. 36; [compar. as adv. xxiv. 10 Ree. (see εὐθύμως), 
(Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; 2 Mace. xi. 26).* 

εὐθύμως, adv., [Aeschyl., Xen., al.|, cheerfully: Acts 
xxiv. 10 L T Tr WH, for Ree. εὐθυμότερον the more con- 
Jfidently.* 

εὐθύνω ; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. εὐθύνατε; (εὐθύς) ; 
a. to make straight, level, plain: τὴν ὁδόν, Jn. i. 23 (Sir. 
ii. 6; xxxvii. 15). b. to lead or guide straight. to keep 
straight, to direct, (often so in Grk. writ.) : 6 εὐθύνων, the 
steersman, helmsman of a ship, Jas. iii. 4. (Eur. Cyct 


εὐθύς 


15; of ἃ charioteer, Num. xxii. 
[Come. 3 κατ-ευθύνω. = 

εὐθύς, -εἴα, -¥, Sept. for qw>, [fr. Pind. down], straight; 
a. prop. straight, level: of a way, [Mt. iii. 3]; Mk. i. 3; 
Lk. iii. 4; Actsix.11; εἰς εὐθεῖαν (1, Τ Tr WH εἰς εὐθείας), 
se. ὅδόν (an ellipsis com. also in class. Grk. ef. W. § 64, 
5), Lk. iii. 5; εὐθεῖα ὁδός the straight, the right way, is fig. 
used of true religion as a rule of life leading to its goal 
i. e. to salvation, 2 Pet. ii. 15; ai ὁδοὶ κυρίου, the right 
and saving purposes of God, Acts xiii. 10 (Song of the 


23; Isoer. Ὁ. 9; al.) 


259 


Three ys. 3). b. trop. straightforward, upright, true, 
sincere, (as often in prof. auth.): καρδία, Acts viii. 21 
(εὐθεῖς τῇ καρδίᾳ often in the Pss., as vii. 11; xxxi. 
(xxxil.) 11; xxxv. («xxvi.) 11).* 

εὐθύς, adv., [fr. Pind. down], i. 4. εὐθέως, with which it 
is often interchanged in the Mss. [see εὐθέως] ; straight- 
way, immediately, forthwith: Mt. iii. 16; xiii. 20; Jn. 
xiii. 32, ete. [Cf. Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 145.] 

εὐθύτης, τητος, ἡ, (fr. the adj. εὐθύς), rectitude, upright- 
ness: trop. ῥάβδος εὐθύτητος, an impartial and righteous 
government, Heb. i. 8 fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7.* 

εὐκαιρέω, -ὦ : impf. εὐκαίρουν [so L T Tr WH in Mk. 


vi. 31; RG in Acts xvii. 21] and ηὐκαίρουν [RG in 
Mk. l.e.; LT Tr WH in Acts 1. 6.1, (betw. which the 
Mss. vary, see εὐδοκέω, init.) ; 1 aor. subjunc. εὐκαιρήσω ; 
(εὔκαιρος) ; a later word, fr. Polyb. onwards (cf. Lob. 


ad Phryn. p.125sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 205; 
Suph. Lex. s. v.]); to have opportunity: 1 Co. xvi. 12; to 
have leisure, foll. by an inf., to do something, Mk. vi. 31 
[{(Plut. ii. p. 223 ἃ. Cleom. Anax. §9)]; to give one’s 
time to a thing, εἴς τι, Acts xvii. 21.* 

εὐκαιρία, -as, 7, (εὔκαιρος), seasonable time, opportunity : 
ζητεῖν e€vk., foll. by [ἵνα B. 237 (205) ], Mt. xxvi. 16; 
(Lk. xxii. 6 Lehm. mrg.]; by rod with inf. Lk. xxii. 6. 
(Sept.; in Grk. writ. first in Plat. Phaedr. p. 272 a.) * 

εὔ-καιρος, -ov, (εὖ and καιρός), seasonable, timely, oppor- 
tune: βοήθεια, Heb. iv. 16; ἡμέρα eve. a convenient day, 
Mk. vi. 21. (2 Mace. xiv. 29; [Ps. ciii. (civ.) 27; Soph. 
O. C. 32]; Theophr., Polyb., al.) * 


εὐκαίρως, adv., seasonably, opportunely; when the op- 
portunity occurs: Mk. xiv. 11; opp. to ἀκαίρως (4. v-), 
2 Tim. iv. 2. (Xen. Ages. 8,3; Plat. and sqq.; Sir. 
Xvill. 22.) * 

€U-KoTros, -ov, (εὖ and κόπος), that can be done with 
easy labor; easy: Polyb. et al.; Sir. xxii. 15; 1 Mace. 
iii. 18; in the N. T. only in the phrase εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστι, 
—foll. by inf., Mt. ix.5; Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23; by ace. w. 
inf., Mt. xix. 24; Mk. x. 25; Lk. xvi. 17; xviii. 25.* 

εὐλάβεια, -είας, 7, the character and conduct of one who 
is εὐλαβής (4. ν.); 1. caution, circumspection, dis- 
eretion: Soph., Eur., Plat., Dem., sqq.; Sept. Prov. 
Xxvill. 14; joined w. πρόνοια, Plut. Marcell. 9; used of 
the prudent delay of Fabius Maximus, Polyb. 3, 105, 8; 
ἡ «vA. σώζει πάντα, Arstph. av. 377; i. q. avoidance, 
πληγῶν, Plat. lege. 7 p. 815 a. et al. (in which sense Zeno 
the Stoic contrasts ἡ εὐλάβ. caution, as a εὔλογος ἔκκλισις 
a reasonable shunning, with ὁ φόβος, Diog. Laért. 7, 116, | 
ef. Cie. Tuse. 4, 6, 13). 


εὐλογέω 


πρὸς τὸ θεῖον εὐλ. Diod. 13,12; Plut. Camill. 21; de ser. 
num. vind. ὁ. 4, and elsewh.; πρὸς τοὺς νόμους, Plut. Ages. 
15; θεοῦ, objec. gen., Philo, Cherub. § 9; simply reverence 
towards God, godly fear, picty: Heb. xii. 28 and, in the 
opinion of many, also v. 7 [cf. ἀπό, II. 2 b.; see below]. 
3. fear, anxiety, dread: Sap. xvii. 8; for 781, Josh. 
xxii. 24; Joseph. antt.11, 6,9; Plut. Fab. 1 (the εὐβουλία 
of Fabius seemed to be εὐλάβεια) ; so, most probably, in 
Heb. ν. 7 (see [above and] ἀπό, I. 3 d.), for by using 
this more select word the writer, skilled as he was in the 
Greek tongue, speaks more reverently of the Son of 
God than if he had used φόβος. [SyN. see δειλία, fin. ; 
ef. Trench § xlviii.; Delitzsch on Heb. ν. 7.]* 

εὐλαβέομαι, -οὔμαι : 1 aor. ptep. εὐλαβηθείς ; prop. to 
show one’s self εὐλαβής, i. 6. 1. to act cautiously, cir- 
cumspectly, (Tragg., Xen., Plato, and sqq.). 2. to be- 
ware, fear: as in 1 Mace. iii. 80; xii. 40 [ Alex. ete.] and 
often in prof. auth., foll. by μή lest [B. 241 sq. (208)], 
Acts xxiii. 10 RG (Deut. ii. 4; 1S. xviii. 29; Job xiii. 
25; Jer. v. 22; Dan. iv. 2; 2 Mace. viii. 16; Sir. xli. 3). 
3. to reverence, stand in awe of, (τὸν θεόν, Plat. lege. 9 
p- 879 e.; Sept. Prov. ii. 8; xxiv. 28 (xxx. 5); Nah. i. 
7): God’s declaration, Heb. xi. 7.* 

εὐλαβής, -és, (εὖ and λαβεῖν), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. 
down ; 1. taking hold weil, i. 6. carefully and surely; 
cautious. 2. reverencing God, pious, religious, [A. V. 
devout]: Acts ii. 5; viii. 2, (Mic. vii. 2 [Alex. ete.]); 
joined with δίκαιος (as in Plat. polit. p. 311 b.): Lk. ii. 
25; εὐλ. κατὰ τὸν νόμον, Acts xxii. 12 LT Tr WH. [Cf. 
reff. 5. ν. εὐλάβεια, fin. ]* 

evhoyew,-@; fut. εὐλογήσω : impf. εὐλόγουν and ηὐλόγουν 
(Mk. x. 16, where the Mss. fluctuate betw. the two forms 
[ef. WH. App. p. 162]); 1 aor. εὐλόγησα (ηὐλόγησα, Mt. 
xiv. 19 LTr; Lk. xxiv. 30 L; Heb. xi. 20 and 21 L); 
pf. εὐλόγηκα (ηὐλόγηκα, Heb. vii. 6 L; see εὐδοκέω init. [ef. 
Veitch s. v.; Tdf. on Lk. 1. 6.7}; Pass., pf. ptep. εὐλογη- 
μένος; 1 fut. εὐλογηθήσομαι; (εὔλογος); Sept. very often 
for 773 and 773; Vulg. benedico; mostly w. acc. of the 
obj., to bless one; 1. as in Grk. writ., to praise, cele- 
brate with praises: τὸν θεόν, Lk. i. 64; ii. 28; xxiv. 
51, 53 [Tdf. om.]; Jas. iii. 9; absol. in the giving of 
thanks: Mt. xiv. 19; xxvi. 26 [cf. 8 below]; Mk. vi. 41; 
viii. 7 RG T[?]; xiv. 22 [ef. 3 below]; Lk. xxiv. 30; 
1 Co. xiv. 16. (When used in this sense εὐλογεῖν differs 
from εὐχαριστεῖν in referring rather to the form, edy. to 
the substance of the thanksgiving.) By a usage 
purely bibl. and eccl. like the Hebr. 373, 2. to in- 
voke blessings : τινά, upon one, Mt. v.44 Ree.; Lk. vi. 28; 
Ro. xii. 14; absol., 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Pet. iii. 9; of one tak- 
ing leave, Lk. xxiv. 50 sq.; of one at the point of death, 
Heb. xi. 20 sq. (Gen. xlviii. 9); in congratulations, Heb. 
vii. 1, 6 sq. (Gen. xiv. 19); Mk. x.16 RGL; Lk. ii. 34; 
εὐλογημένος (3173), praised, blessed, [ef. εὐλογητός}: Mt. 
xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9sq.; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38; Jn. 
xii. 13, (in all which pass. it is an acclamation borrowed 
fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 26). 3. with acc. of a thing, fo 
consecrate a thing with solemn prayers; to ask God’s bless- 


2. reverence, veneration: 7 | ing on a thing, pray him ‘o bless it to one’s use, pronounce 


εὐλογητὸς 


a consecratory blessing on: ἰχθύδια, Mk. viii. 71, Tr WH; 
τοὺς ἄρτους, Lk. ix. 16; τὸ ποτήριον, 1 Co. x. 16; τὴν 
θυσίαν, 1S. ix. 13; and perh. τὸν ἄρτον, Mt. xxvi. 26; 
Mk. xiv. 22, (but see above under 1); ef. Riickert, Das 
Abendmahl, p. 220 sq. 4. of God, to cause to prosper, 
to make happy, to bestow blessings on, (cf. W. 32): τινά, 
Acts iii. 26; foll. by ἐν with dat. of the blessing, ἐν πάσῃ 
εὐλογίᾳ, with every kind of blessing, Eph. i. 3 (ἐν ἀγαθοῖς, 
Test. xii. Patr. [test. Jos. § 18] p. 722 [ἐν εὐλογίαις γῆς, 
ἐν πρωτογενήμασι καρπῶν, test. Isach. § 5 p. 626 sq.]); 
εὐλογῶν εὐλογήσω σε (after the Hebr., Gen. xxii. 17; see 
εἴδω, 1. 1 a. [for reff.]), I will bestow on thee the greatest 
blessings, Heb. vi. 14; Gal. iii. 8 Rec.“ °* (see 
yew), 9; εὐλογημένος favored of God, blessed, Lk. i. 42° 
(cf. Deut. xxviii. 4); ἐν γυναιξί, blessed among women, 
i. 6. before all other women, Lk. i. 28 RGLTr txt. br.; 
42°, (cf. W. 246 (231); [B. 83 (73)]); εὐλογημένοι τοῦ 
πατρός (i. q. ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός. like εὐλ. ὑπὸ θεοῦ, Is. ἴχ]. 9; 
Ixv. 23; cf. W. 189 (178) and 8 30,4; [ef. B. § 132, 23]), 
appointed to eternal salvation by my father, Mt. xxv. 34. 
[Comp.: ἐν-, κατ-ευλογέω.] * 

εὐλογητός, -dv, (εὐλογέω), Sept. for 3373, a bibl. and 
eccl. word; blessed, praised, Vulg. benedictus: applied 
to God, Lk. i. 68; Ro. i. 25; ix. 5 [on its position here 
ef. W. 551 (512 sq.); Ps. xviii. (Ixvii.) 20; Gen. xxvii. 
29; Pss. of Sol. 8,40. 41; also1 K. x. 9; 2Chr.ix. 8; Job 
i. 21; Ps. exii. (exili.) 2; Ruthii.19; Dan. ii. 20, and esp. 
the elaborate discussion of Ro. 1. c. by Professors Dwight 
and Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. ete. i. pp. 22-55, 
87-154 (1882)]; 2 Co. i. 3; xi. 31; Eph.i. 3; 1 Pet. 1. 
3; ef. B. § 129, 22 Rem. [contra, W. 586 (545); Mey. on 
Gal. i. 5]; absol. ὁ εὐλογητός, of God: Mk. xiv. 61. [The 
distinction betw. εὐλογητός and εὐλογημένος is thus stated 
by Philo (de migr. Abr. § 19, i. 453 Mang.): εὐλογητός, 
οὐ μόνον εὐλογημένος - . . . τὸ μὲν yap τῷ πεφυκέναι. τὸ δὲ 


ἐνευλο- 


τῷ νομίζεσθαι λέγεται μόνον . . . τῷ πεφυκέναι εὐλογίας 
ἄξιον... ὅπερ εὐλογητὸν ἐν τοῖς χρησμοῖς ᾷδεται. Cf. 
Gen. xiv. 19, 20; 1 S. xxv. 32,33; Tob. xi. 16 cod. 
Sin.; contra, Jud. xiii. 18. EvAoynrés is applied to 
men in Gen. xxiv. 31; xxvi. 29; Deut. vii. 14; Judg. 
1S. xv. 13; Ruthii. 20; Jud. and Tob. τι. 5. ete. 
See Prof. Abbot’s careful exposition τι. s. p. 152 sq.]* 
εὐλογία, -as, ἡ, (εὔλογος) ; Sept. for 7373; Vulg. bene- 
dictio; as in class. Grk. 1. praise, laudation, pane- 
gyric: of God or Christ, Rev. v. 12, 13; vii. 12. BA. 
fine discourse, polished language: Plat. rep. 3 p. 400 d.; 
Luce. Lexiph. 1; in a bad sense, language artfully adapted 
to captivate the hearer, fair speaking, fine speeches: 
Ro. xvi. 18 (joined with χρηστολογία, the latter relating 
to the substance, εὐλογία to the expression); plur. in 


XVil. 2; 


Aesop, fab. 229 p. 150 ed. Cor. ἐὰν σὺ εὐλογίας εὐπορῇς, 
ἔγωγέ σου οὐ κήδομαι. [but why not gen. sing.?]. Bya 
usage unknown to native Grks. 3. an invocation of 
blessings, benediction: Heb. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 10, (Gen. 
XXxvii. 35 sq. 38, al.; Sir. iii. 8; xxxvii. 24; Joseph. antt. 
4, 8,44); see εὐλογέω, 2. 4. consecration: τὸ ποτήριον 
τῆς εὐλογίας, the consecrated cup (for that this is the 
meaning is evident from the explanatory adjunct ὃ εὐλο- 


260 


εὐοδόω 


γοῦμεν, see εὐλογέω 3 [Δ]. al.; ef. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad 
loc.; W. 189 (178)]), 1 Co. x. 16. 5. a (concrete) 
blessing, benefit, (Deut. xi. 26, ete.; Sir. vii. 32; xxxix. 
22, etc.); univ. 1 Pet. iii. 9; of the blessings of Chris- 
tianity, Ro. xv. 29; Eph. i. 3; ἡ εὐλογία τοῦ ’ABp. the 
salvation (by the Messiah) promised to Abraham, Gal. 
iii. 14; of the continual fertility of the soil granted by 
God, Heb. vi. 7 (Lev. xxv. 21; ὑετὸς εὐλογίας, Ezek. 
xxxiv. 26; cf. εὐλογεῖν ἀγρόν, Gen. xxvii. 27); of the bless- 
ing of a collection sent from Christians to their brethren, 
2 Co. ix. 5 (of the gifts of men, Gen. xxxiii. 11; Judg. i. 
15; 1S. xxv. 27); ἐπ᾽ εὐλογίαις, that blessings may ac- 
crue, bountifully (opp. to φειδομένως, 2 Co. ix. 6 (see ἐπί, 
B. 2 6. p. 234* top).* 

εὐ-μετά-δοτος, -ov, (ed and μεταδίδωμι), ready or free to 
impart; liberal: 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. ready to distribute}. 
(Antonin. 1, 14; 6, 48.) * 

Ἑὐνίκη [R* -νείκη (see et, «); lit. conquering well], -ns, 
ἡ, Eunice, the mother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. δ." 

εὐ-νοέω, -@; (evvoos); fo wish (one) well; to be well-dis- 
posed, of a peaceable spirit: τινί, towards any one, Mt. 
v.25. (3 Mace. vii. 11; Soph., Arstph., Xen., Polyb., 
Plut., Hdian.) * 

εὔνοια, -as, 7, (evvoos), good-will, kindness: 1 Co. vii. ὃ 
Ree. ; μετ᾽ εὐνοίας, Eph. vi. 7. [From Aeschyl. down. ] * 

εὐνουχίζω: 1 aor. εὐνούχισα; 1 aor. pass. edvovxia@ny ; 
[on the augm. ef. B. 34 (30); WH. App. p. 162]; to cas- 
trate, unman: pass. ὑπό twos, Mt. xix. 12"; metaph. 
εὐνουχ. ἑαυτόν to make one’s self a eunuch, viz. by ab- 
staining (like a eunuch) from marriage, Mt. xix. 122 (Jo 
seph. antt. 10, 2, 2; Leian., Dio Cass., al.) * 

εὐνοῦχος, -ov, 6, (fr. εὐνή a bed, and ἔχω), Sept. 0°70; 
fr. Hdt. down; prop. a bed-keeper, bed-quard, superin- 
tendent of the bedchamber, chamberlain, in the palace of 
oriental monarchs who support numerous wives; the 


| superintendent of the women’s apartment or harem, an 


office held by eunuchs; hence a. an emasculated 
man, a eunuch: Mt. xix. 12%. But eunuchs in ori- 
ental courts held other offices of greater or less impor- 
tance, like the oversight of the treasury, held by the 
Ethiopian eunuch mentioned in Acts viii. 27, 34, 36, 35 
sq.; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 973; [B. D. 5. v. Eunuch}. 
b. one naturally incapacitated — either for marriage, Mt. 
xix. 12"; or for begetting children, Sap. iii. 14, cf. Grimm, 
exgt. Hdb. ad loc. c. one who voluntarily abstains 
from marriage: Mt. xix. 12°. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. 
N. T. ete. p. 485 sqq. treats of the word more fully.* 

EvoSta [(lit. prosperous journey), τωδία R* (lit. fra- 
grant) ], -as, ἡ, Zuodia, a Christian woman [transformed 
by A. V. into a man, Euodias]: Phil. iv. 2 [see Bp. 
Lghtf. ad loe.].* 

εὐ-οδόω, -ῶ : [Pass., pres. εὐοδοῦμαι : fut. εὐυδωθήσομαι; 
1 aor. subj. εὐοδωθῇ, 1 Co. xvi. 2 WH mrg. who regard 
the εὐοδῶται of the text here as perf. (either ind. or 
subj.) see their App. p. 172]; (evodos) ; Sept. principally 
for Nox and myn; to grant a prosperous and expedi- 
tious journey, to lead by a direct and easy way: Gen. 
xxiv. 48; much more freq. tropically, to grant a success- 


εὐπάρεδρος 


ful issue, to cause to prosper: τί, as τὴν ὁδόν τινος, Gen. 
xxiv. 21,40; Is. lv. 11, οἷο. ; τὰ ἔργα τινός, Sap. xi. 1; in 
the Pass. always trop. to prosper, be successful : of per- 
sons, Josh. i. 8; Prov. xxviii. 13; 2 Chr. xiii. 12; xviii. 
11, ete.; 3 Jn. 2; εἴπως εὐοδωθήσομαι ἐλθεῖν if haply 1 
shall be so fortunate as lo come, Ro. i. 10; of things: 2 
Esdr. v. 8; Tob. iv. 19; 1 Mace. iii. 6, ete. ; τῷ Κλεο- 
μένεϊ εὐωδώθη τὸ πρῆγμα, Hdt. 6, 735 6, τε ἂν εὐοδῶται 
[see above, init.] whatever (business) has prospered, 
i. 6. (contextually) its gains, 1 Co. xvi. 2.* 

εὐπάρ-εδρος, -ov, (εὖ, and πάρεδρος [sitting beside]), 
sitting constantly by; assiduous: πρὸς τὸ εὐπάρεδρον τῷ 
κυρίῳ, that ye may be constantly devoted to the Lord 
and his cause, 1 Co. vii. 35, for Rec. εὐπρόσεδρον, which 
does not differ in sense, [A.V attend upon]. (Hesych. 
εὐπάρεδρον: καλῶς παραμένον.) * 

εὐ-πειθής, -és, (εὖ, and πείθομαι to comply with, obey), 
easily obeying, compliant, [A. V. easy to be intreated]: 
Jas. iii. 17. (Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) * 

ei-repl-ortaros, -ov, (fr. ed and περιΐστημι), skilfully 
surrounding i. e. besetting, sc. to prevent or retard run- 
ning: Heb. xii. 1 [some passively (cf. Isocr. 135 e.), 
well or much admired (cf. R. V. mrg.)]. (Not found 
elsewhere.) * 

εὐ-ποιΐα [-ποιία WH (cf. I, ε, fin.)], -as, 7, (εὐποιός), a 
doing good, beneficence: Heb. xiii. 16; Arr. exp. Alex. 
7, 28, 8; Alciphr. 1, 10; Leian. imag. 21; a benefit, 
kindness, Joseph. antt. 2, 11, 2; (plur. ib. 19, 9, 1).* 

εὐπορέω, and (esp. in later Grk.) mid. εὐπορέομαι, 
-ovpat: impf. 3 pers. sing. ηὐπορεῖτο (RG) and εὐπορ. (L 
T Tr WH;; for reff. see εὐδοκέω, init.) ; (εὔπορος well 
off) ; to be well off, have means: Acts xi. 29 [A. V. ace. 
to his ability]. (Lev. xxv. 26, 28, 49; often in the 
classics.) * 

εὐ-πορία, -as, ἡ, (εὔπορος, see the preced. word), riches, 
means, wealth: Acts xix. 25. (Xen., Plat., al.; in diff. 
senses in diff. auth.) * 

εὐπρέπεια, -as, ἡ, (εὐπρεπής well-looking), goodly ap- 
pearance, shapeliness, beauty, comeliness: τοῦ προσώπου, 
Jas.i.11. (Thue., Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Plut.; Sept.) * 

εὐ-πρόσ-δεκτος, -ov, (εὖ and προσδέχομαι), well-received, 
accepted, acceptable: Ro. xv. 16; 2 Co. vi. 2; viii. 12; 
τινί, Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 5. (Plut. praecept. rei publ. 
ger. c. 4, 17 p. 801 c.; eccl. writ.) * 

εὐ-πρόσ-εδρος, -ov, (ev, and mpdcedpos [sitting near]), 
see εὐπάρεδρος. 

εὐ-προσωπέω, -@ : 1 aor. inf. εὐπροσωπῆσαι; (εὐπρόσωπος 
fair of face, of good appearance) ; fo make a fair show; 
to please [ἃ weak trans. (?); yet Vulg. placere]|: ἐν 
σαρκί, in things pertaining to the flesh, Gal. vi. 12. 
(Elsewh. only in Chrysost. hom. ad Eph. xxii. § 5, Opp. 
xi. 173 c. ed. Montf. [var.] and several times in Byzant. 
writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * 

εὐρκακύλων, -wvos, 6, (fr. εὖρος and Lat. aquilo, like 
evpovoros, and euroauster [B. 16 (15)]), Vulg. euroaquilo; 
the Euraquilo, a N. Ε. wind: Acts xxvii. 14 LT Tr 
WH, for Ree. εὐροκλύδων (Grsb. εὐρυκλ.) q. v. (Not 


found elsewhere.) [B.D 3. v. Euroclydon.]* 


261 


εὑρίσκω 


εὑρίσκω ; impf. εὕρισκον (Mk. xiv. 55 [RG ΤΊ; Lk. 
xix. 48 [RG‘I’]; Acts vii. 11 [exe. Tr WH]) and more 
rarely ηὕρισκον (cf. Kiihner § 343, i. 825 sq. [esp. Veitch 
s. v. fin. ] and reff. under evdoxéw) ; fut. εὑρήσω; pf. εὕρηκα; 
1 aor. εὕρησα (which aor., unknown to the earlier Grks., 
occurs in Aesop. f. 131 [f. 41 ed. Furia, p. 333 ed. Cor.]; 
Maneth. 5, 137 and in Byzant. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 721; W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 36 (31)]), Rev. xviii. 14 
Ree. ; 2 aor. εὗρον, 1 pers. plur. in Alex. form | WH. App. 
Ρ. 164; B. 39 (34); W. § 13,1 (see ἀπέρχομαι) | εὕραμεν, 
Lk. xxiii. 2 T Tr WH, 3 pers. plur. εὗραν, Lk. viii. 35 
Tr WH; Acts v. 10 Tr (in Sept. often εὕροσαν) ; Pass., 
pres. εὑρίσκομαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing. εὑρίσκετο, Heb. xi. 
5 RG, ηὑρίσκετο 1, Τ Tr WH, (cf. Bleek and Delitzsch 
ad loe. [Veitch u. 5.7); 1 aor. εὑρέθην ; fut. εὑρεθήσομαι ; 
2 aor. mid. εὑρόμην and later εὑράμην (Heb. ix. 12, [cf. 
reff. above (on 2 aor. act.) ]); Sept. numberless times for 
NSD, sometimes for WN to attain to, and for Chald. 
naw; [fr. Hom. down]; to find; i. e. 

1. prop. to come upon, hit upon, tomeet with; a. after 
searching, to find a thing sought: absol., opp. to ζητεῖν, Mt. 
vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq. (ζήτει καὶ εὑρήσεις, Epict. diss. 4, 1, 
51); reva, Mt. ii. 8; Mk. i. 37; Lk. ii. 45; Acts xi. 26 
(25); xiii. 22; 2 Co. ii. 13 (12); 2 Tim.i.17; Rev. xx. 
15, ete.; οὐχ εὑρίσκετο, he had vanished, Heb. xi.5; witha 
specification of place added: πέραν w. gen. Jn. vi. 25; ἐν 
w. dat. Acts v. 22; εὑρέθη εἰς, Acts viii. 40 (see eis, C. 2); 
w. ace. of the thing, Mt. vii. 14; xiii. 46; xviii. 13; 
Lk. xxiv. 3; Jn. x. 9; Acts vii. 11; Ro. vii. 18 Rec., 
ete.; foll. by indir. dise., Lk. v. 19; οὐχ εὑρέθησαν, had 
disappeared, Rev. xvi. 20, οἵ. xviii. 21; w. dat. of ad- 
vantage, Rev. xx. 11; foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Mt. 
xxi. 19; Rev. xii. 8. τινὰ or τὶ ζητεῖν x. οὐχ εὑρίσκειν: 
Mt. xii. 43; xxvi.60; Mk. xiv. 55; Lk. xi. 24; xiii. 6 56. 
dn. vii. 84; Rev. ix. 6,(2K.11.17; Neh. vii.G4; Ps. ix. 
36 [x. 15]; Eccl. vii. 29; Ezek. xxii. 30; xxvi. 21 Ald. 
Comp.; Hos. ii. 7); γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται 
shall be found se. for destruction, i. e. will be unable to 
hide themselves from the doom decreed them by God, 
2 Pet. iii. 10 Tr WH, after the strange but improbable 
reading of codd. 8B and other authorities; [see 111]. 
Intr. § 365 and App. ad loc.]. b. without previous 
search, to find (by chance), to fall in with: τινά, Mt. 
xviii. 28; xxvii. 32; Jn.i. 41 (42), 45 (46) ; v.14; ix. 35; 
Acts xiii. 6; xviii. 2; xix. 1; xxviii. 14; foll. by ἐν νυ. 
dat. of place, Jn. ii. 14. ri, Mt. xiii. 44; xvii. 27; Lk. 
iv. 17; Jn. xii. 14; Acts xvii. 23; foll. by ἐν w. dat. of 
place, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9. 6. εὑρίσκω τινά or τι 
with a pred. ace. is used of those who come or return to 
a place. the predicate ptep. or adj. describing the state 
or condition in which the pers. or thing met with is 
found, or the action which one is found engaged in: 
Ww. an adj. Acts v. 10} 2 Οὐ, ix. 4; xii. 20: ov. ἃ 
ptep. [ef. B. 301 (258)], Mt. xii. 44; xx. 6; xxi. 2; 
xxiv. 46; xxvi. 40, 43; Mk. xi. 2; xiii.36; xiv. 37, 40; 
Lk. αν 125; vil. 10; viii. 35; ΧΗ ΡΟ; xii. 37, 43; xix. 30; 
XX. 25 xxiv. 2; 59: Acts νυν: 295 1x. 2: x. 97: xxi. 2° 


xxiv. 12, 18; xxvii. 6; foll. by καθώς. Mk. xiv. 16: Lk. 


, . 
εὐροκλυδων 


xix. 32; xxii. 18; foll. by a pred. substantive to which 
ὄντα must be supplied, Acts xxiv. 5 [cf. W.§ 45, 6 b.; B. 
304 (261)]. 2. tropically, to find by inquiry, thought, 
examination, scrutiny, observation, hearing; to jind out 
by practice and experience, i. e. to see, learn, discover, un- 
derstand: κατηγορίαν, Lk. vi. 7 [17 Tr txt. WH κατηγο- 
peiv]; τινά foll. by ptep. in the predicate, Acts xxiii. 29 ; 
by ὅτε, Ro. vii. 21; after an examination (πειράζειν), τινά 
[ri] w. a pred. adj. [ptep.], Rev. iii. 2; of a judge: αἰτίαν 
θανάτου. Acts xiii. 28; αἰτίαν, κακόν, ἀδίκημα ἔν τινι, Jn. 
xviii. 38; xix. 4,6; Acts xxiii. 9; xxiv. 20; after ἃ com- 
putation, w. an ace. of the price or measure, Acts xix. 
19; xxvii. 28 ; after deliberation, τὸ τί ποιήσωσι, Lk. xix. 
48; τὸ πῶς κολάσωνται αὐτούς, Acts iv. 21. Pass. εὑρί- 
oxopa to be found, i.e. to be seen, be present: Lk. ix. 36 
(Gen. xviii. 31); often like the Hebr. xy1} to be dis- 
covered, recognized, detected, to show one’s self out, of 
one’s character or state as found out by others (men, 
God, or both), (cf. W. $65, 8): εὑρέθη ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχουσα, 
Mt. i. 18; ἵνα εὑρεθῶσι καθὼς κ. ἡμεῖς, 2 Co. xi. 12; εὑ- 
ρέθη μοι ἡ ἐντολὴ εἰς θάνατον sc. οὖσα, the commandment, 
as I found by experience, brought death to me, Ro. vii. 
10; add, Lk. xvii. 18 (none showed themselves as hay- 
ing returned); Actsv. 39; 1Co. iv. 2; xv. 15; 2 Co.v. 
8; Gal. ii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev. v. 4; τινί, dat. of the 
pers. taking cognizance and judging [W.§31, 10; B. 
187 (162)], 2 Pet. 111. 14, [add 2 Co. xii. 20, yet ef. B. 
]. c. and $133, 14; W.§31,4a.]; ἵνα εὑρεθῶ ev αὐτῷ i. 6. 
ἐν Χριστῷ, sc. ὦν, Phil. iii. 9; σχήματι εὑρεθεὶς ὡς ἄνθρω- 
mos, Phil. ii. 7 (8), (Joseph. b. 1. 3, 6, 1; so the Lat. 
invenior, Cic. de amic. 19, 70; reperior, Tuscul. i. 39, 94). 
εὑρίσκειν θεόν (opp. to ζητεῖν αὐτόν, see ζητέω, 1 c. [ef. 
ἐκζητέω, a.]), to get knowledge of, come to know, God, Acts 
xvii. 27; εὑρίσκεταί (ὁ θεός) τινι, discloses the knowledge 
of himself to one, Sap. i. 2; cf. Grimm, exet. Hdb. ad 
loc. [who refers to Philo, monarch. i. § 5; Orig. ο. Cels. 
7,42]. On the other hand, in the O. T. εὑρίσκεται ὁ 
θεός is used of God hearing prayer, granting aid im- 
plored, (1 Chr. xxviii. 9; 2 Chr. xv. 2, 4, 15; Jer. xxxvi. 
(xxix.) 13); hence εὑρέθην [12 and Tr in br. WH mre. 
add ἐν] τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσι, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. xv. 1, means, 
acc. to Paul’s conception, I granted the knowledge and 
deliverance of the gospel. 3. Mid., as in Grk. writ., 
to find for one’s self, to acquire, get, obtain, procure : 
λύτρωσιν, Heb. ix. 12; contrary to better Grk. usage, 
the Act. is often used in the Scriptures in the same sense 
[ef. B. 193 (167); W. 18; 33 (32) n.J: τὴν ψυχήν, Mt. x. 
39; xvi. 25; ἀνάπαυσιν (Sir. xi. 19) ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν, 
Mt. xi. 295; μετανοίας τόπον, place for recalling the de- 
cision, changing the mind, (of his father), Heb. xii. 17 
[ef. W. 147 (139)]; σκήνωμα τῷ θεῷ. opportunity of 
building a house for God, Acts vii. 46; εὗρ. χάριν, grace, 
favor, Heb. iv. 16; χάριν παρὰ τῷ θεῷ, Lk. i. 30; ἐνώπιον 
tov θεοῦ, Acts vii. 46; ἔλεος παρὰ κυρίου, 2 Tim. i. 18; 
ΟΞ [H ἘΠ, Gen. vi. 8; xviii. 3; xxx. 27; xxxii. 6; 
Ex. xxxiii. 12; Deut. xxiv. 1, οἷο; 1 Esdr. viii. 4). 
[Comp.: ἀν-ευρίσκω. 

εὐρο-κλύδων, -wvos, 6, (fr. εὖρος the 5. E. wind, and 


262 


evaxynLocurn 


κλύδων a wave), a Κ΄. Ε΄. wind raising mighty waves: Acts 
xxvii. 14 Ree. But respectable authorities read εὐρυ- 
κλύδων, preferred by Griesbach et al., from εὐρύς broad, 
and κλύδων, a wind causing broad waves (Germ. der 
Breitspiilende, the Wide-washer); Etym. Magn. p. 772, 
30 s. Vv. τυφών " “τυφὼν γάρ ἐστιν ἡ τοῦ ἀνέμου σφοδρὰ πνοή, 
ὃς καὶ εὐρυκλύδων καλεῖται." Others εὐρακύλων, ἡ. v.* 

εὐρύ-χωρος, -ον, (εὐρύς broad, and χώρα), spacious, 
broad: Mt. vii. 13. (Sept.; Aristot. h. anim. 10, 5 [p. 
637", 32]; Diod. 19, 84; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 2; [8, 5, 3; 
ec. Ap: 1, 18, 2]-)* 

εὐσέβεια, -as, ἡ, (εὐσεβής), reverence, respect; in the 
Bible everywhere piety towards God, godliness: Acts iii. 
12; 1 Tim. ii. 2; iv. 7, 8; vi. 5sq. 11; 2 Tim. iii.5; 2 
Pet. i. 8, 6 sq.; ἡ κατ᾽ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία, the doctrine 
that promotes godliness, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [see κατά, II. 3 d.]; 
ἡ ἀλήθεια ἡ κατ᾽ εὐσέβειαν, the truth that leads to godli- 
ness, Tit. i. 1; τὸ μυστήριον τῆς εὐσεβείας, the mystery 
which is held by godliness and nourishes it, 1 Tim. iii. 
16; in plur., aims and acts of godliness, 2 Pet. iii. 11; ef. 
Pfleiderer, Paulinism. p. 477 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 209 sq. ]. 
(Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat., sqq.; often in Joseph. ; 
Sept. Prov. i. 7; xiii. 11; Is. xi. 2; Sap.x.12; often in 
4 Mace.; πρὸς τὸν θεόν, Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 2; [περὶ τὸ 
θεῖον) c. Ap. 1, 22, 25 εἰς θεοὺς καὶ γονέας, Plat. rep. 10 
p- 615c¢.) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 181.]* 

εὐ-σεβέω, -ῶ; (εὐσεβής); to be εὐσεβής (pious), to act 
piously or reverently (towards God, one’s country, magis- 
trates, relations, and all to whom dutiful regard or rey- 
erence is due); in prof. auth. foll. by ets, περί, πρός τινα; 
rarely also trans., as Aeschyl. Ag. 338 (τοὺς θεούς) and 
in the Bible: τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον, 1 Tim. v. 4; θεόν. to wor- 
ship God, Acts xvii. 23; 4 Mace. v. 24 (23) var. ; xi. 5; 
[Joseph. e. Ap. 2, 11, 1].* 

εὐσεβής, -es, (εὖ and σέβομαι), pious, dutiful (towards 
God [A.V. devout, godly]; εὐσεβέων): Acts x. 2,7; xxii. 
12 RG; 2 Pet. ii. 9. ({Theogn.], Pind., Tragg., Ar- 
stph., Plat., al.; thrice in Sept. for 27) noble, gener- 
ous, Isa. xxxii. 8; for pvq¥, Is. xxiv. 16; xxvi.7; often 
in Sir. and 4 Mace.) [Cf. Trench § xlviii.] * 

εὐσεβῶς, adv., piously, godly: ζῆν, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit. 
ii. 12. (Pind. [-Béos], Soph., Xen., Plat., al.; 4 Mace. 
vii. 21 [Fritzsche om.].)* 

εὔσημος, -ov, (εὖ and σῆμα a sign), well-marked, clear 
and definite, distinct: λόγος, 1 Co. xiv. 9 [A. V. easy to 
be understood]. (Aeschyl., [Soph.], Theophr., Polyb., 
Plut.)* 

εὔσπλαγχνος, -ov, (εὖ and σπλάγχνον, q. V.), prop. hav- 
ing strong bowels ; once so in Hippocr. p. 89 c. [ed. Foés., 
i. 197 ed. Kiihn]; in bibl. and ecel. lang. compassionate, 
tender-hearted: Eph. iv. 32; 1 Pet. iii. 8; prec. Manass. 
7 [(see Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. § 29); Test. xii. Patr. test. 
Zab. § 9; οἵ. Harnack’s note on Herm. vis. 1, ΟἿΣ 

εὐσχημόνως, adv., (see εὐσχήμων), in a seemly manner, 
decently: 1 Co. xiv. 40; περιπατεῖν, Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th 
iv. 12. (Arstph. vesp. 1210; Xen. mem. 8, 12, 4; Cyr. 
1, 3, 8 sq.; al.) * 

εὐσχημοσύνη, -ης; 7, (εὐσχήμων, q. V.), charm or elegance 


εὐσχήμων 


of figure, external beauty, decorum, modesty, seemliness 
(Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., Plut.); of external charm, 
comeliness: 1 Co. xii. 23.* 

εὐσχήμων, -ov, (εὖ, and σχῆμα the figure, Lat. habitus) ; 
1. of elegant figure, shapely, graceful, comely, bearing 
one’s self becomingly in speech or behavior, (Eur., Arstph., 
Xen., Plat.): τὰ εὐσχήμονα ἡμῶν, the comely parts of the 
body that need no covering (opp. to τὰ ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν, 

* ys. 23), 1 Co. xii. 24; of morals: πρὸς τὸ εὔσχημον, to 
promote decorum, 1 Co. vii. 35. 2. in later usage (cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 333), of good standing, honorable, in- 
fluential, wealthy, respectable, [R. V. of honorable estate]: 
Mk. xv.43; Acts xiii. 50; xvii. 12. (Joseph. de vita 
sua § 9; Plut. parallel. Graec. et Rom. ο. 15 p. 309 b.) * 

εὐτόνως, adv., (fr. evrovos, and this fr. εὖ and τείνω to 
stretch [cf. at full stretch, well strung, etc.]), vehemently, 
forcibly: Lk. xxiii. 10; Acts xviii. 28. (Josh. vi. 8; 
2 Mace. xii. 23; Xen. Hier. 9,6; Arstph. Plut. 1095; 
Diod., al.) * 

εὐτραπελία, -as, 7, (fr. εὐτράπελος, fr. ed, and τρέπω to 
turn: easily turning; nimble-witted, witty, sharp), pleas- 
antry, humor, facetiousness, ({Hippocr.], Plat. rep. 8 p. 
563a.; Diod. 15, 6; 20, 63; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 3; 
Plut., al.) ; in a bad sense, seurrility, ribaldry, low jesting 
(in which there is some acuteness) : Eph. v. 4; in a mild- 
er sense, Arist. eth. 2, 7, 13; [ἡ εὐτραπελία πεπαιδευμένη 
ὕβρις ἐστίν, rhet. 2, 12, 16 (ef. Cope in loc.) ; ef. Trench 
8 xxxiv.; Matt. Arnold, Irish Essays ete. p. 187 sqq. 
(Speech at Eton) 1882].* 

Εὔτυχος [i. 6. fortunate; on accent ef. W. 51; Chan- 
dler § 331 sq.], του, 6, Hutychus, a young man restored 
to life by Paul: Acts xx. 9.* 

εὐφημία, -as, ἡ, (εὔφημος, q- V-), prop. the utterance of 
good or auspicious words; hence good report, praise: 
2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to δυσφημία), as in Diod. 1, 2 [4 ed. 
Dind.]; Ael. v. h. 3,47. (In diff. senses in other auth. 
fr. Pind., Soph., and Plat. down.) * 

εὔφημος, -ov, (εὖ and φήμη), sounding well; uttering 
words of good omen, speaking auspiciously: neut. plur. 
εὔφημα, things spoken in a kindly spirit, with good-will 
to others, Phil. iv. 8 [A. V. of good report, (Τὶ. V. mrg. 
gracious) ]. (In very diverse senses com. in Grk. writ. 
fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

εὐ-φορέω, -ὥ: 1 aor. εὐφόρησα (Lchm. ηὐφόρησα, see 
reff. in εὐδοκέω, init.) ; (εὔφορος [bearing well]); to be 
fertile, bring forth plentifully: Lk. xii. 16. (Joseph. b. j. 
2, 21, 2; Hippocr., Geop., al.) * 

εὐφραίνω ; Pass., pres. eippaivouar; impf. εὐφραινόμην 
(Acts vii. 41, where a few codd. nidp. [οἵ. WH. App. 
p- 1027); 1 aor. εὐφράνθην and 1, T Tr WH nip. (Acts 
ii. 26; see reff. in εὐδοκέω, init.) ; 1 fut. εὐφρανθήσομαι ; 
(ed and φρήν) ; in Sept. very often actively for Maw to 
make joyful, and pass. for ΤΙΣ to be joyful, sometimes 
for 1) to sing; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to glad- 
den, make joyful: twa, 2 Co. ii. 2 (opp. to λυπεῖν). Pass. 
to be glad, to be merry, to rejoice: absol., Lk. xv. 32; 
Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9); Ro. xv. 10 (fr. Deut. 
xxxii. 43); Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); Rev. xi. 10; xii. 


263 


εὐχαριστέω 


12; ἔν τινι, to rejoice in, be delighted with, a thing, Acts 
vii. 41 (Xen. Hier. 1, 16); ἐπί τινι, Rev. xviii. 20 L T 
Tr WH (for Ree. ἐπ᾽ αὐτήν) ; of the merriment of a feast, 
Lk. xii. 19; xv. 23 sq. 29, (Deut. xiv. 25 (26); xxvii. 7); 
with λαμπρῶς added, to live sumptuously: Lk. xvi. 19 
(Hom. Od. 2, 311; Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 12).* 

Eidpdrys, -ov, 6, Euphrates, a large and celebrated 
river, which rises in the mountains of Armenia Major, 
flows through Assyria, Syria, Mesopotamia and the 
city of Babylon, and empties into the Persian Gulf, 
(Hebr. n79 [i. 6. (prob.) ‘the great stream’ (Gen. i. 
18); cf. Fried. Delitzsch, Wo lag ἃ. Par. p. 169]): Rev. 
ix. 14; xvi. 12. [B. D. 8. v. and reff. there.] * 

εὐφροσύνη, -ns, 7, (εὔφρων [well-minded, cheerful ]), fr. 
Hom. down; good cheer, joy, gladness: Acts ii. 28 (Ps. 
xv. (xvi.) 11); xiv. 17.* 

εὐχαριστέω, -; 1 aor. εὐχαρίστησα (Acts xxvii. 35) 
and ηὐχαρίστησα (Ro. i. 21 GLT Tr WH; see reff. in 
εὐδοκέω, init.) ; 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. εὐχαριστηθῇ 
(2 Co. i. 11); (εὐχάριστος, q. V-) ; 1. to be grateful, 
feel thankful; so in the decree of the Byzantines in Dem. 
pro cor. p. 257, 2. 2. to give thanks (so Posid. ap. 
Athen. 5 p. 213 e.; Polyb., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., 
Epictet., al.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 18 [W. 23 (22)]): 
τινί, esp. τῷ θεῷ, Lk. xvii. 16; Acts xxvii. 35; xxviii. 15; 
Ro. xiv. 6; xvi. 4; 1 Co. xiv. 18 [see below]; Phil. i. 3; 
Col. i. 3,12; Philem. 4; (τ. the acc. [hence as nom.] 
in the passive, iva... ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ὁ θεὸς εὐχαριστῆ- 
ται, Philo, quis rer. div. her. 836). simply, so that τῷ 
θεῷ must be added mentally: Ro. i. 21; [1 Co. xiv. 17]; 
1 Th. v. 18; esp. where the giving of thanks customary 
at the beginning of a feast, or in general before eating, 
is spoken of: Mt. xv. 36; xxvi. 27; ΜΚ. viii. 6; xiv. 23; 
Lk. xxii. 17,19; Jn. vi. 11, 23; 1 Co. xi. 24; εὐχαριστεῖν 
τῷ θεῷ διὰ Ino. Χριστοῦ, through Christ i. e. by Christ’s 
help (because both the favors for which thanks are 
given and the gratitude which prompts the thanks are 
due to Christ [ef. W. 378 (354) note]): Ro. i. 8; vii. 25 
R WH mrg.; Col. iii. 17; τῷ θεῷ ἐν ὀνόματι Χριστοῦ 
(see ὄνομα, 2e.), Eph. v. 20. Of that for or on account 
of which thanks are given to God, we find—vepi twos, 
gen. of pers., concerning, with regard to one, [1 Th. 
i. 2]; 2 Th. i. 8 [cf. Ellic. in loc.]; w. ὅτι added epex- 
egetically, Ro. i. 8 (where R G ὑπέρ); 2 Th. ii. 13; w. 
addition of ἐπί and dat. of the thing for, on account 
of, which, 1 Co. i. 4; ὑπέρ τινος, gen. of pers., Eph. i. 
16; ὑπέρ w. gen. of the thing, for, on account of, 1 Co. 
x. 30; Eph. v. 20; the matter or ground of the thanks- 
giving is expressed by a foll. ὅτε : Lk. xviii. 11; Jn. xi. 
41; 1Co.i.14; 1 Th.ii.13; Rev. xi.17; or is added 
asyndetically without ὅτι, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (λαλῶ LT Tr 
WH, for which R G λαλῶν, the ptep. declaring the cause 
which prompts to thanksgiving [W. 345 sq. (324); B. 
300 (258)]). Once edyap. τι, for a thing, in the pass. 
2 Co. i. 11 [ef. B. 148 (130); W. 222 (209)]; in the 
Fathers εὐχαριστεῖν τι is to consecrate a thing by giving 
thanks, to ‘bless’: ὁ εὐχαριστηθεὶς ἄρτος x. οἶνος, Justin 
M. apol. 1, 65 fin.; εὐχαριστηθεῖσα τροφή, ibid. c. 66; 


εἰσὶν of εὐχαριστοῦσι ψιλὸν ὕδωρ, Clem. Al. strom. i. p. 
317 ed. Sylb.; [ef. Suicer, Thesaur. i. 1269. “The 
words εὐχάριστος, εὐχαριστεῖν, εὐχαριστία, occur in St. 
Paul’s writings alone of the apostolic Epistles” (Bp. 
Lghtft.; cf. Ellic. on Col. i. 12) }.* 

εὐχαριστία, -as, ἡ, (εὐχάριστος. q- V-) 5 1. thankful- 
ness: decree of the Byzantines in Dem. p. 256, 19; 
Polyb. 8, 14, 8; Add. to Esth. vi. 4 ed. Fritz.; 2 Mace. 
ii. 27; Sir. xxxvii. 11; πρός τινα, Diod. 17, 59; Joseph. 
antt. 3, 3. 2. the giving of thanks: Acts xxiv. 3; for 
God’s blessings, 1 Co. xiv. 16; 2 Co. iv. 15; Eph. v. 4 
(cf. 1 Th. v. 18); Phil. iv. 6; Col. ii. 7; iv. 2; 1 Th. iii. 
9; 1 Tim. iv. 3 sq.; Rev. iv.9; vii.12; w. dat. of the 
pers. to whom thanks are given: τῷ θεῷ (cf. W. § 31, 3; 
[B. 180 (156) ]; Kithner § 424, 1), 2 Co. ix. 11 (τοῦ θεοῦ, 
Sap. xvi. 28); in plur., 2 Co. ix. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 1.* 

εὐχάριστος, -ov, (εὖ and χαρίζομαι), mindful of favors, 
grateful, thankful: to God, Col. iii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 
49; Plut.; al.); pleasing, agreeable [ef. Eng. grateful in 
its secondary sense]: εὐχάριστοι λόγοι, pleasant conver- 
sation, Xen. Cyr. 2, 2,1; acceptable to others, winning : 
γυνὴ εὐχάριστος ἐγείρει ἀνδρὶ δόξαν, Prov. xi. 16; liberal, 
beneficent, Diod. 18, 28." 

εὐχή, Hs, ἡ, (εὔχομαι), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. a pray- 
er to God: Jas. ν. 15. 2. a vow (often so in Sept. for 
ΤΣ and 473), also for 47) consecration, see ἁγνίζω) : εὐχὴν 
ἔχειν, to have taken a vow, Acts xviii. 18; with ἐφ᾽ 
ἑαυτῶν added (see ἐπί, A. I. 1 f. p. 232»), Acts xxi. 28." 

εὔχομαι ; impf. ηὐχόμην (Ro. ix. 3) and εὐχόμην (Acts 
xxvil. 29 T Tr, see εὐδοκέω init. [ef. Veitch 5. v.; Tdf. 
Proleg. p.121]); [1 aor. mid. εὐξάμην Acts xxvi. 29 Tdf., 
where others read the opt. -αίμην ; depon. verb, ef. W. 
§ 38, 7]; 1. to pray to God (Sept. in this sense for 
Sdann and Ny): τῷ θεῷ (as very often in class. Grk. 
fr. Hom. down [ef. W. 212 (199); B. 177 (154)]), foll. 
by ace. νυ. inf., Acts xxvi. 29; πρὸς τὸν θεόν (Xen. mem. 
1, 3, 2; symp. 4, 55; often in Sept.), foll. by ace. w. inf. 
2 Co. xiii. 7; ὑπέρ w. gen. of pers., for one, Jas. v. 16 
where L WH txt. Tr mrg. προσεύχεσθε (Xen. mem. 2, 2, 
10). [SYN. see αἰτέω, fin. ] 2. to wish: τί, 2 Co. xiii. 
9; foll. by ace. with inf. 3 Jn. 2, [al. adhere to the re- 
ligious sense, to pray, pray for, in both the preceding 
pass. ]; Acts xxvii. 29; ηὐχόμην (on this use of the impf. 
cf. W. 283 (266); B. 8. 139,15; [Bp. Lehtft. on Philem. 
13]) εἶναι, I could wish to be, Ro. ix. 3. [Comp.: 
evxopat. |* 

εὔτχρηστος, -ov, (ed and ypdopac), easy to make use of, 
useful: w. dat. of pers. 2 Tim. ii. 21; opp. to ἄχρηστος, 
Philem. 11; εἴς τι, for a thing, 2 Tim.iv.11. (Diod. 5, 
40; Sap. xiii. 13; πρός τι, Xen. mem. 3, 8, 5.) * 

εὐψυχέω, -ῶ; (εὔψυχος. ; to be of good courage, to be of 
a cheerful spirit: Phil. ii. 19. (Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 9; 
[Poll. 3, 28 § 135 fin.]; in epitaphs, εὐψύχει ! 1. q. Lat. 
have pia anima !)* 

εὐωδία, -as, ἡ, (fr. εὐώδης ; and this fr. ed and ὄζω, pf. 
ὄδωδα); a. asweet smell, fragrance, (Xen., Plat., Plut., 
Hdian., al.); metaph. Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ θεῷ. i. 6. 
(dropping the fig.) our efficiency in which the power of 


προσ- 


εὐχαριστία 204 


"Ἔφεσος 


Christ himself is at work is well-pleasing to God, 2 Co. 
ii. 15. b. a fragrant or sweet-smelling thing, incense : 
Diod. 1, 84; 1 Esdr. i. 11, ete.; hence ὀσμὴ εὐωδίας, an 
odor of something sweet-smelling, in Sept. often for 
ΤΙ) τη, an odor of acquiescence, satisfuction; a sweet 
odor, spoken of the smell of sacrifices and oblations, Ex. 
xxix. 18; Lev. i. 9, 13, 17, etc., agreeably to the ancient 
{anthropopathic] notion that God smells and is pleased 
with the odor of sacrifices, Gen. viii. 21; in the N. T. 
by a metaphor borrowed from sacrifices, a thing well- 
pleasing to God: Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18, [W. 605 (562) 
cf. 237 (222)].* 

[Εὐωδία, -as, Phil. iv. 2 Rec." for Evodia, q. v-] 

εὐώνυμος, -ον, (εὖ and ὄνομα) ; 1. of good name 
(Hes., Pind.), and of good omen (Plat. polit. p. 302 d.; 
lege. 6 p. 754e.); in the latter sense used in taking 
auguries; but those omens were euphemistically called 
εὐώνυμα which in fact were regarded as unlucky, i. e, 
which came from the left, sinister omens (for which 
a good name was desired); hence 2. left (so fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down): Acts xxi. 3; Rev. x. 2; ἐξ 
εὐωνύμων [cf. W. § 27,3; § 19s. v. δεξιά; B. 89 (78)], 
on the left hand (to the left): Mt. xx. 21, 23; xxv. 33, 
41: xxvii. 38; Mk. x. 37 [RGL], 40; xv. 27.* 

ἐφ-άλλομαι ; 2 aor. ptep. ἐφαλόμενος L T'Tr WH; (ἐπί 
and ἅλλομαι, q. v-); fr. Hom. down; to leap upon, spring 
upon: ἐπί twa, Acts xix. 16 [here RG pres. ptep.]; 
(CUSp τ δ᾽ See δ. Sanh TE) ie 

ἐφ-άπαξ [Treg. in Heb. ἐφ᾽ ἅπαξ; cf. Lipsius, gram. 
Unters. p. 127], adv., (fr. ἐπί and ἅπαξ [ef. W. 422 
(393); B. 321 (275)]), once; at once i. 6. a. our all 
al once: 1 Co. xv. 6. b. our once for all: Ro. vi. 10; 
Heb. vii. 27; ix.12; x.10. (Lcian., Dio Cass., al.) * 

ἐφεῖδον, see ἐπεῖδον. 

*Edecivos, -7, -ον, Ephesian: Rey. ii. 1 Rec.* 

᾿Εφέσιος, -a, -ov, (an) Ephesian, i. 6. a native or in- 
habitant of Ephesus: Acts xix. 28, 34 sq.; xxi. 29." 

Ἔφεσος, -ov, ἡ. “phesus, a maritime city of Asia Minor, 
capital of Ionia and, under the Romans, of proconsular 
Asia [see ’Agia], situated on the Icarian Sea between 
Smyrna and Miletus. Its chief splendor and renown 
came from the temple of Artemis, which was reckoned 
one of the wonders of the world. It was burned down 
B. C. 356 by Herostratus, rebuilt at the common expense 
of Greece under the supervision of Deinocrates (Pausan. 
7, 2,6sq.; Liv. 1,45; Plin. h.n.5, 29 (31); 36, 14 (21)), 
and in the middle of the third century after Christ utterly 
destroyed by the Goths. At Ephesus the apostle Paul 
founded a very flourishing church, to which great praise 
is awarded in Rey. ii. 1 sqq- The name of the city oc- 
curs in Acts xviii. 19, 21, 24; xix. 1,17, 26; xx. 16 sq.; 
1 Co. xv. 32; xvi. 8; Eph. i. 1 (where ἐν ᾿Εφέσῳ is omitted 
by cod. Sin. and other ancient author., [bracketed by T 
WH Trmrg.; see WH. App. ad loc.; B. D. Am. ed.s. v. 
Ephesians, The Ep. to the]); 1 Tim. i. 3; 2 Tim. i. 18; 
iv. 12; Rev. i. 11, and (acc. toG LT Tr WH) ii. 1. 
Cf. Zimmermann, Ephesus im 1. christl. Jahrh., Jena 
1874; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus (1877)].* 


ἐφενρετής 


ἐφ-ευρετής, -οῦ, ὁ, (ἐφευρίσκω to find out), an inventor, 
contriver, (Anacr. 41 (36), 3; Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 
1499): κακῶν, Ro. i. 30 (κακῶν εὑρεταί, Philo in Flace. 
64 mid.; ὁ καινῶν ἀδικημάτων εὑρετής, ibid. § 10; πάσης 
κακίας εὑρετής, 2 Mace. vii. 31; Sejanus facinorum om- 
nium repertor, Tacit. ann. 4, 11).* 

ἐφ-ημερία, -as, ἡ, (ἐφημέριος, -ov, by day, lasting or act- 
ing for a day, daily), a word not found in prof. auth. ; 
Sept. in Chron. and Neh. ; 1. a service limited to 
a stated series of days (cf. Germ. Tagdienst, Wochen- 
dienst); so used of the service of the priests and Levites: 
Neh. xiii. 30; 1 Chr. xxv. 8; 2 Chr. xiii. 10, ete. 2. 
the class or course itself of priests who for a week at a time 
performed the duties of the priestly office (Germ. Wéch- 
nerzunft): 1 Chr. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 13, ete.; 1 Esdr. i. 2, 
15; so twice in the N. T.: Lk. i. 5,8. For David di- 
vided the priests into twenty-four classes, each of which 
in its turn discharged the duties of the office for an en- 
tire week from sabbath to sabbath, 1 Chr. xxiv.4; 2 Chr. 
viii. 14; Neh. xii. 24; these classes Josephus calls πατριαί 
and ἐφημερίδες, antt. 7, 14,7; de vita sua 1; Suidas, ἐφη- 
pepia: ἡ πατριά. λέγεται δὲ καὶ ἡ τῆς ἡμέρας λειτουργία. 
Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on 3 Esdr. p. 12. [BB.DD. 5. v. 
Priests; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. ii. ch. iii.]* 

ἐφ-ήμερος, -ον, (i. q. ὁ ἐπὶ ἡμέραν av) ; 1. lasting for 
a day (Pind., Hippoer., Plut., Galen.; al.). 2. daily: 
ἡ τροφή (Diod. 3, 32; Dion. Hal. 8, 41; Aristid. ii. p. 
398 [ed. Jebb; 537 ed. Dind.]), Jas. ii. 15.* 

ἔφιδε, see ἐπεῖδον. 

ἐφ-ικνέομαι, -οὔμαι ; 2 aor. inf. ἐφικέσθαι; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to come to: ἄχρι w. gen. of pers. 2 Co. x. 13; to 
reach: εἴς τινα, ibid. 14.* 

ἐφ-ίστημι: 2 aor. ἐπέστην, ptep. ἐπιστάς, impv. ἐπίστηθι; 
pf. ptep. ἐφεστώς; to place at, place upon, place over; in 
the N. T. only in the mid. [pres. indic. 3 pers. sing. 
ἐπίσταται (for ἐφίστ.), 1 Th. ν. 3 T Tr WH; see reff. 
s. v. apeidov] and the intrans. tenses of the act., viz. pf. 
and 2 aor. (see ἀνίστημι) ; to stand by, be present: Lk. ii. 
38; Acts xxii. 20; ἐπάνω w-.gen.of pers. to stand over 
one, place one’s self above, Lk. iv. 39; used esp. of per- 
sons coming upon one suddenly: simply, Lk. x. 40; xx. 
1; Acts vi. 12; xxii. 13; xxiii. 27; of an angel, Acts xii. 
7; w. dat. of pers., Acts iv. 1; xxiii. 11; of the advent 
of angels, Lk. ii. 9; xxiv. 4, (of Hephaestus, Leian. dial. 
deor. 17,1; freq. of dreams, as Hom. Il. 10, 496; 23, 
106; Hdt. 1, 34; al.); w. dat. of place, Acts xvii. 5; 
foll. by ἐπί with acc. of place, Acts x. 17; xi. 11; of 
evils coming upon one: w. dat. of pers., 1 Th. v. 3 [see 
above]; ἐπί twa, Lk. xxi. 34 (Sap. vi. 9; xix. 1; Soph. 
O. R. 777; Thue. 3, 82). 1. 4. to be at hand i.e. be 
ready: 2 Tim. iv. 2, οἵ. Leo ad loc. (Eur. Andr. 547; 
Dem. p. 245, 11). to be at hand 1. 6. impend: of time, 2 
Tim. iv. 6. to come on, of rain, Acts xxviii. 2. [Comp.: 
κατ-, συν-εφίστημι. * 

[ἐφνίδιος, see αἰφνίδιος. 

Ἔφραίμ or (so R Tr) ’Edpaip [cf. I, ε, fin.], (© LH 
ἜἘφρέμ, Vulg. Ephrem, Efrem), Ephraim, prop. name of 
a city situated acc. to Eusebius eight [but ed. Larsow 


265 


ἔχω 


and Parthey, p. 196, 18, twenty], acc. to Jerome twenty 
miles from Jerusalem; acc. to Joseph. b. j- 4, 9, 9 not 
far from Bethel; conjectured by Robinson (Palest. i. 
444 sq. [ef. Bib. Sacr. for May 1845, p. 398 sq.]), Ewald 
et al. dissenting, to be the same as the village now called 
et-Taiyibeh, a short day’s journey N. E. of Jerusalem: 
Jn. xi. 54. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim iii. p- 7 sq- 
[Eng. trans. v. 9: esp. Schiirer, Gesch. i. 183].* 

ἐφφαθά, eplphatha, Aram. NNDNS (the ethpaal impy. 
of the verb ND3, Hebr. m2, to open), be thou opened 
(i. e. receive the power of hearing; the ears of the deaf 
and the eyes of the blind being considered as closed) : Mk. 
vii. 84. [See Kautzsch, Gram. ἃ. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10.]* 

ἐχθές and (Ree., so Grsb. in Acts and Heb.) χθές (on 
which forms οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 323 sq.; [esp. Ruth- 
erford, New Phryn. p. 370 sq.]; Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr. 
ii. 2 p. 1000; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81; W. pp. 24, 45; B. 72 
(63) ]), adv., yesterday: Jn. iv. 52; Acts vii. 28; of time 
just past, Heb. xiii. 8. [From Soph. down.]* 

ἔχθρα, -as, 7, (fr. the adj. ἐχθρός), enmity: Lk. xxiii. 
12; Eph. ii. 14 (15), 16; plur. Gal. v. 20; ἔχθρα (Lchm. 
ἐχθρά fem. adj. [Vulg. inimica]) θεοῦ, towards God, Jas. 
iv. 4 (where Tdf. τῷ θεῷ) ; εἰς θεόν, Ro. viii. 7; by meton. 
i. q. cause of enmity, Eph. ii. 14 (15) [but cf. Meyer. 
(From Pind. down.) ]* 

ἐχθρός, -a, -όν, (ἔχθος hatred) ; Sept. numberless times 
for 2y8, also for \¥, several times for δὰ) and NIWN, a 
hater ; 1. passively, hated, odious, hateful (in Hom. 
only in this sense): Ro. xi. 28 (opp. to ἀγαπητός). 2. 
actively, hostile, hating and opposing another: 1 Co. xv. 
25; 2 Th. iii. 15; w. gen. of the pers. hated or opposed, 
Jas. iv. 4 Lechm.; Gal. iv. 16, ef. Meyer or Wieseler on 
the latter pass. used of men as at enmity with God by 
their sin: Ro. νυ. 10 (ef. Ro. viii. 7; Col. i. 21; Jas. iv. 4) 
[but many take ἐχθρ. here (as in xi. 28, see 1 above) pas- 
sively; cf. Meyer]; τῇ διανοίᾳ, opposing (God) in the 
mind, Col. i. 21; ἐχθρὸς ἄνθρωπος, a man that is hostile, 
a certain enemy, Mt. xiii. 28; ὁ ἐχθρός, the hostile one 
(well known to you), i. e. κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν the devil, the most 
bitter enemy of the divine government: Lk. x. 19, ef. 
Mt. xiii. 39 (and eccl. writ.). ὁ ἐχθρός (and ἐχθρός) sub- 
stantively, enemy [so the word, whether adj. or subst., 
is trans. in A. V., exe. twice (R. V. once) foe: ἔσχατος 
ἐχθρός, 1 Co. xv. 26]: w. gen. of the pers. to whom one 
is hostile, Mt. v. 43 sq.; x. 86; xiii. 25; Lk. i. [71], 74; 
vi. 27, 85; xix. 27,43; Ro. xii. 20; Rev. xi. 5, 12; in 
the words of Ps. cix. (ex.) 1, quoted in Mt. xxii. 44; Mk. 
xii. 86; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; 1 Co. xv. 25 [Lbr.; al. 
om. gen. (see above)]; Heb. i. 13; x. 18. w. gen. of 
the thing: Acts xiii. 10; τοῦ σταυροῦ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, who 
given up to their evil passions evade the obligations 
imposed upon them by the death of Christ, Phil. iii. 18.* 

ἔχιδνα, -ης, 7, α viper: Acts xxviii. 3 (Hes., Hadt., 
Tragg., Arstph., Plat., al.); γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν offspring 
of vipers (anguigenae, Ovid, metam. 3,531), addressed to 
cunning, malignant, wicked men: Mt. iii. 7; xii. 34; 
ΧΧΙ 99: kK AMS Wee 

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. 


ἔχω 266 


5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; 
Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) 
and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. 
in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his 
N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ 
Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. 
mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; 
pf. ἔσχηκα; 

I. Transitively. 
have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; 
x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, 
ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. 
gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. 
iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a cov- 
ering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head 
covered [B. $130, 5; W. § 47, k. ef. 594 (552)], 1 Co. 
xi. 4; θώρακας, Rev. ix. 17; μάχαιραν, Jn. xviii. 10; add, 
Mt. xxvi. 7; Mk. xiv. 3; of a tree having (bearing) 
leaves, Mk. xi. 13; ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχειν, sc. ἔμβρυον, to be 
pregnant [ef. W. 594 (552); B. 144 (126)], (see γαστήρ, 
2). 
μαρτυρίαν, 1 Jn. v.10; ἐν καρδίᾳ ἔχειν τινά, to have (carry) 
one in one’s heart, to love one constantly, Phil.i. 7. ὁ. 
trop. to have (hold) possession of the mind ; said of alarm, 
agitating emotions, etc.: εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος κ. ἔκστασις, 
Mk. xvi. 8 (Job xxi. 6; Is. xiii. 8, and often in prof. 
auth.; cf. Passow 8. v. p. 1294 sq.; [L. and S.s. v. A. I. 
87). ἃἅ. to hold fast, keep: ἡ μνᾶ cov, ἣν εἶχον ἀποκει- 
μένην ἐν σουδαρίῳ, Lk. xix. 20; trop. τὸν θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν 
ἐπιγνώσει, Ro. i. 28; to keep in mind, τὰς ἐντολάς, Jn. 
xiv. 21 (see ἐντολή, sub fin.) ; τὴν μαρτυρίαν, Rev. vi. 9; 
xii. 17; xix. 10; τὸ μυστήριον τῆς πίστεως ἐν καθαρᾷ συνει- 
δήσει, 1 Tim. iii. 9; ὑποτύπωσιν ὑγιαινόντων λόγων, 2 Tim. 
i. 18. 6. to have (in itself or as a consequence), com- 
prise, involve: ἔργον, Jas. i. 4; ii. 17; κόλασιν, 1 Jn. iv. 
18; μισθαποδοσίαν, Heb. x. 385 (Sap. viii. 16). See exx. 
fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. p. 1296 sq.; [L. and S. s. v. 
A.I.8and 10]. f. by a Latinism i. q. aestimo, to re- 
gard, consider, hold as, [but this sense is still denied by 
Meyer, on Lk. as below; Mt. xiv. 5]: τινά w. ace. of the 
predicate, ἔχε με παρῃτημένον, have me excused, Lk. xiv. 
18; τινὰ ὡς προφήτην, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, (ἔχειν Tavyqy x. 
᾿Ιαμβρῆν ὡς θεούς, Ev. Nicod. 5) ; τινὰ ἔντιμον (see ἔντιμος), 
Phil. ii. 29; τὴν ψυχήν μου [G om. μου] τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ, Acts 
xx. 24 RG; τινὰ εἰς προφήτην (a Hebraism [see εἰς, B. I. 
3c.y. fin.]), for a prophet, Mt. xxi.46 L T Tr WH, cf. B. 
§ 131, 7; τινά, ὅτι ὄντως [T Tr WH ὄντως, ὅτι ete. | προ- 
φήτης ἦν, ΜΚ. xi. 32, cf. B. § 151, 1 a.; [W. § 66, 5 a.]. 
2. to have 1. 4. to own, possess; 8. external things 
such as pertain to property, riches, furniture, utensils, 
goods, food, ete.: as τὸν βίον, Lk. xxi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17; 
κτήματα, Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; θησαυρόν, Mt. xix. 21; Mk. 
x. 21; ἀγαθά, Lk. xii. 19; πρόβατα, Lk. xv. 4; Jn. x. 16; 
δραχμάς, Lk. xv. 8; πλοῖα, Rey. xviii. 19; κληρονομίαν, 
Eph. v. 5; [ef. Mt. xxi. 38 LT Tr WH, where R G κατά- 
σχωμεν᾽ ; μέρος foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xx. 
6; θυσιαστήριον, Heb. xiii. 10; ὅσα ἔχεις, Mk. x. 21; xii. 


1. to have i. q. to hold; a. to 


Metaph. ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἔχειν τὸ ἀπόκριμα, 2 Co. 1. 95 τὴν 


» 
EX@ 


44; Mt. xiii, 44, 46; xviii. 25; μηδέν, 2 Co. vi. 10; τί δὲ 
ἔχεις, 6 etc. 1 Co. iv. 7; with a pred. ace. added, εἶχον 
ἅπαντα κοινά, Acts ii. 44; absol. ἔχειν, fo have property, 
to be rich: οὐκ and μὴ ἔχειν [A. V. to have not], to be 
destitute, be poor, Mt. xiii. 12; xxv. 29; Mk. iv. 25; Lk. 
viii. 18; xix. 26; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Co. viii. 12, (Neh. viii. 
10; 1 Esdr. ix. 51, 54; Sir. xiii. 5; exx. fr. Grk. auth. 
in Passow 8. y. p. 1295"; [L. and S. s.v. A. I. 1; cf. W. 
594 (552) ]); ἐκ rod ἔχειν, in proportion to your means 
[see ἐκ, II. 13 fin.], 2 Co. viii. 11. b. Under the head 
of possession belongs the phrase ἔχειν τινά as com- 
monly used of those joined to any one by the bonds of 
nature, blood, marriage, friendship, duty, law, compact, 
and the like: πατέρα, Jn. viii. 41; ἀδελφούς, Lk. xvi. 28; 
ἄνδρα (a husband), Jn. iv. 17 sq.; Gal. iv. 27; γυναῖκα, 1 
Co. vii. 2,12 sq. 29; τέκνα, Mt. xxi. 28; xxii. 24; 1 Tim. 
iii. 4; Tit.i.6; υἱούς, Gal. iv. 22; σπέρμα, offspring, Mt. 
xxii. 25; χήρας, 1 Tim. v. 16; ἀσθενοῦντας, Lk. iv. 40; 
φίλον, Lk. xi. 5; παιδαγωγούς. 1 Co. iv. 15; ἔχειν κύριον, 
to have (be subject to) a master, Col. iv. 1; δεσπότην, 1 
Tim. vi. 2; βασιλέα, Jn. xix.15; with ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν added, 
Rey. ix. 11; ἔχει τὸν κρίνοντα αὐτόν, Jn. xii. 48; ἔχειν 
οἰκονόμον, Lk. xvi. 1; δοῦλον, Lk. xvii. 7; ἀρχιερέα, Heb. 
iv. 14; viii. 1; ποιμένα, Mt. ix. 36; ἔχων ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν στρα- 
τιώτας, Lk. vii. 8; ἔχειν τὸν υἱὸν x. τὸν πατέρα, to be in 
living union with the Son (Christ) and the Father by 
faith, knowledge, profession, 1 Jn. ii. 23; (v.12); 2Jn.9. 
With two accusatives, one of which serves as a predicate: 
πατέρα τὸν ᾿Αβραάμ, Abraham for our father, Mt. iii. 9; 
add, Acts xiii. 5; Phil. iii. 17; Heb. xii. 9; ἔχειν τινὰ 
γυναῖκα, to have (use) a woman (unlawfully) as a wife, 
Mt. xiv. 4; Mk. vi. 18; 1 Co. v. 1 [where see Meyer], (of 
lawful marriage, Xen. Cyr. 1,5,4). σα. of attend- 
ance or companionship: ἔχειν τινὰ μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Mt. 
xv. 30; xxvi. 11; Mk. ii. 19; xiv. 7; Jn. xii. 8. d. 
ἔχειν τι to have athing in readiness, have at hand, have in 
store: οὐκ ἔχομεν εἰ μὴ πέντε ἄρτους, Mt. xiv. 17; add, xv. 
34; Jn. ii. 3 [ποὺ Tdf.]; iv. 11; xii. 35; 1 Co. xi. 22; xiv. 
26; οὐκ ἔχω, ὃ παμαθήσω αὐτῷ, Lk. xi. 6; ποῦ συνάξω 
τοὺς καρπούς pou, Lk. xii. 17; τί (cf. Β. § 139, 58) φάγωσι, 
Mk. viii. 1 sq.; ἔχειν τινά, to have one at hand, be able to 
make use of : Maicéak. τ. προφήτας, Lk. xvi. 29; παρά- 
κλητον, 1 Jn. ii. 1; μάρτυρας, Heb. xii. 1; οὐδένα ἔχω ete. 
Phil. ii. 20; ἄνθρωπον, ἵνα οἴο. Jn. ν. 7. 6. a person or 
thing is said ἔχειν those things which are its parts or 
are members of his body: as χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς, 
Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; Mk. ix. 48, 45,47; οὖς, Rey. 11. 7, 11, 
ete.; dra, Mt. xi. 15; Mk. vii. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the 
ν 8.7; viii. 18; μέλη, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12; σάρκα x. 
ὀστέα, Lk. xxiv. 39; ἀκροβυστίαν, Acts xi. 3; an animal 
is said ἔχειν head, horns, wings, ete.: Rev. iv. 7 sq.; v. 
6; viii. 9; ix. 8 sqq.; xii. 3, ete.; a house, city, or wall, 
ἔχειν θεμελίους, Heb. xi. 10; Rev. xxi. 14; στάσιν, Heb. 
ix. 8; [add ἐπιστολὴν ἔχουσαν (RG περιέχ.) τὸν τύπον 
τοῦτον, Acts xxiii. 251. f. one is said to have the dis- 
eases or other ills with which he is affected or af- 
flicted: μάστιγας, Mk. iii. 10; ἀσθενείας, Acts xxviii. 9; 
wounds, Rey. xiii. 14; θλίψιν, Jn. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28; 


ἔχω 


Rey. ii. 10. Here belong the expressions δαιμόνιον ἔχειν, 
to be possessed by a demon, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33 ; viii. 
27; ὅπ. vii. 20; viii. 48 sq. 52; x. 20; Βεελζεβούλ, Mk. 
iii. 22; πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον, Mk. iii. 30; vii. 25; Lk. iv. 33; 
Acts viii. 7; πνεῦμα πονηρόν, Acts xix. 13; πνεῦμα ἐσθε- 


veias, i.e. ademon causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. 11; πνεῦμα, 


ἄλαλον, Mk. ix. 17; Neyedva, Mk. ν. 15. g. one is said 
to have intellectual or spiritual faculties, endow- 
ments, virtues, sensations, desires, emotions, 
affections, faults, defects, ete. : σοφίαν, Rev. xvii. 
9; γνῶσιν. 1 Co. viii. 1, 10; χαρίσματα, Ro. xii. 6 ; mpo- 
φητείαν, 1 Co. xiii. 2; πίστιν, Mt. xvii. 20; xxi. 21; Mk. 
xi. 22; Lk. xvii. 6; Acts xiv. 9; Ro. xiv. 22; 1 Tim. i. 
19; Philem. 5; πεποίθησιν, 2 Co. iii. 4; Phil. iii. 4; map- 
ρησίαν, Philem. 8; Heb. x. 19; 1 Jn. ii. 28; iii. 21; iv. 17; 
v. 14; ἀγάπην, Jn. v. 42; xiii. 35; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iv. 16; 
1 Co. xiii. 1 sqq.; 2 Co. ii.4; Phil. ii. 2; Philem. 5; 1 
Pet. iv. 8; ἐλπίδα (see ἐλπίς, 2 p. 200" mid.) ; ζῆλον, zeal, 
Ro. x. 2; envy, jealousy (ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ), Jas. 111. 14; χάριν 
τινί, to be thankful to one, Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2 
Tim. i. 3; θυμόν, Rev. xii. 12; ὑπομονήν, Rey. ii. 3; 
φόβον, 1 Tim. v. 20; χαράν, Philem. 7 [Rec.* χάριν]; 3 
Jn. 4 [WH txt. χάριν}; λύπην, Jn. xvi. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3; 
Phil. ii. 27; ἐπιθυμίαν, Phil. i. 23 ; ἐπιποθίαν, Ro. xv. 23; 
μνείαν τινος, 1 Th. iii. 6. συνείδησιν καλήν, ayabny, 
ἀπρόσκοπον: Acts xxiv. 16; 1 Tim. i. 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16; 
Heb. xiii. 18; συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν, Heb. x. 2; ἀγνωσίαν 
θεοῦ, 1 Co. χν. 34; ἀσθένειαν, Heb. vii. 28; ἁμαρτίαν, Jn. 
ix. 41; xv. 22, ete. h. of age and time: ἡλικίαν, 
mature years (A. V. to be of age), Jn. ix. 21, 23; ἔτη, to 
have (completed) years, be years old, Jn. viii. 57; with 
ἔν τινι added : in a state or condition, Jn. ν. 5 [W. 256 
(240) note?; B. § 147, 11]; in a place, τέσσαρας ἡμέρας 
ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ, Jn. xi. 17; beginning or end, or both, Heb. 
vii. 3; Mk. iii. 26 ; Lk. xxii. 37 [see τέλος, 1a. ]. 
τι issaid of opportunities, bonefits, advantages, 
conveniences, which one enjoys or can make use of: 
βάθος γῆς. Mt. xiii. 5; γῆν πολλήν, Mk. iv. 5; ἰκμάδα, Lk. viii. 
6; καιρόν, Gal. vi. 10; Heb. xi. 15; Rev. xii. 12; ἐξουσίαν, 
see ἐξουσία, passim; εἰρήνην διά τινος, Ro. v. 1 (where we 
must read ἔχομεν, not vith TTrWHLmrg. (ef. WH. 
Intr. § 404) ] ἔχωμεν) ; ἐλευθερίαν, Gal. ii. 4; πνεῦμα θεοῦ, 
1 Co. vii. 40; πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ, Ro. viii. 9; νοῦν Χριστοῦ, 
1Co. ii. 16; Conv, Jn. v. 47; x. 10; xx. 31; τὴν ζωήν, 1 
Jn. v. 12; ζωὴν αἰώνιον, Mt. xix. 16; Jn. iii. 15 sq. 36 
[ef. W. 266 (249)]; v. 24,39; vi.49,47, 54; 1Jn.v. 13; 
ἐπαγγελίας, 2 Co. vii. 1; Heb. vii. 6; μισθόν, Mt. v. 46; 
vi. 1; 1 Co.ix.17; τὰ αἰτήματα. the things which we have 
asked, 1 Jn. v. 15; ἔπαινον, Ro. xiii. 9; τιμήν, Jn. iv. 44; 
Heb. iii. 3; λόγον σοφίας, a reputation for wisdom, Col. 
ii. 23 [see λόγος, I. 5 fin.]; καρπόν, Ro. i. 153 vi. 21 sq.; 
χάριν, benefit, 2 Co. i. 15 [where Tr mrg. WH txt. χαράν]; 
χάρισμα, 1 Co. vii. 7; προσαγωγή". Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12; 
ἀνάπαυσιν, Rey. iv. 8; xiv. 11; ἀπόλαυσίν τινος, Heb. xi. 
25; πρόφασιν, In. xv. 22; καύχημα, that of which one 
may glory, Ro. iv. 2; Gal. vi. 4; καύχησιν, Ro. xv. 17. 
kx. ἔχειν τι is used of one on whom something has been 
laid, on whom it is incumbent as something to be 


1. ἔχειν 


267 


ν 
εχω 


borne, observed, performed, discharged: ἀνάγκην, 1 Co. 
vii. 37; ἀνάγκην foll. by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 [RL 
br. Tr mrg. br.]; Heb. vii. 27; χρείαν τινός (see χρεία, 1); 
εὐχὴν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, Acts xxi. 23 ; νόμον, Jn. xix. 7; ἐντολήν, 
2 Jn. 5; Heb. vii. 5; ἐπιταγήν, 1 Co. vii. 25; διακονίαν, 
2 Co. iv.1; πρᾶξιν, Ro. xii. 4; ἀγῶνα, Phil. i. 30; Col. ii. 
1; ἔγκλημα, Acts xxiii. 29; κρίμα, 1 Tim. vy. 12. 1. 
ἔχειν τι is used of one to whom something has been in- 
trusted: τὰς κλεῖς, Rev. i. 18; iii. 7; τὸ γλωσσόκομον, 
Jn. xii. 6; xiii. 29. m. in reference to complaints 
and disputes the foll. phrases are used: ἔχω re [or 
without an ace., cf. B. 144 (126)] κατά τινος, to have 
something to bring forward against one, to have some- 
thing to complain of in one, Mt. v. 23; Mk. xi. 25; foll. 
by ὅτι, Rev. ii. 4; ἔχω κατὰ σοῦ ὀλίγα, ὅτι ete. ib. 14 [here 
L WH arg. om. ὅτι], 20 [here α 1, T Tr WH om. ὀλ.]; 
ἔχω τι πρός τινα, to have some accusation to bring against 
one, Acts xxiv. 19; συζήτησιν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, Acts xxviil. 29 
[Ree.]; ζητήματα πρός twa, Acts xxv. 19; λόγον ἔχειν 
πρός twa, Acts xix. 38; πρᾶγμα πρός τινα, 1 Co. vi. 1; 
μομφὴν πρός τινα, Col. 111. 13 ; κρίματα μετά τινος, 1 Co. vi. 
7. n. phrases of various kinds: ἔχειν τινὰ κατὰ πρόσω- 
πον, to have one before him, in his presence, [ A. V. face to 
face; see πρόσωπον, 1 a.], Acts xxv. 16; κοίτην ἔκ τινος, 
to conceive by one, Ro. ix. 10; τοῦτο ἔχεις, ὅτι etc. thou 
hast this (which is praiseworthy [ef. W. 595 (553) }) that 
etc. Rey. ii. 6; ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν, hath nothing in me 
which is his of right, i. q. no power over me (Germ. er 
hat mir nichts on), Jn. xiv. 30; 6 ἐστιν . . . σαββάτου ἔχον 
ὁδόν, a sabbath-day’s journey distant (for the distance is 
something which the distant place has, as it were), Acts 
i. 12; cf. Kypke ad loc. 0. ἔχω with an inf. [W. 333 
(313); B. 251 (216)], a. like the Lat. habeo quod w. the 
subjunc., i. q. to be able: ἔχω ἀποδοῦναι, Mt. xviii. 25; Lk. 
vii. 42; xiv. 14; ri ποιῆσαι, Lk. xii. 4; οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν, 
they had nothing to ppose (could say nothing against 
it), Acts iv. 14; κατ᾽ οὐδενὸς εἶχε μείζονος ὁμόσαι. Heb. 
vi. 13; add, Jn. viii. 3 (Rec.); Acts xxv. 26 [cf. B. as 
above]; Eph. iv. 28; Tit. ii. 8; 2 Pet. i. 15; the inf. is 
om. and to be supplied fr. the context: ὃ ἔσχεν, sc. 
ποιῆσαι, Mk. xiv. 8; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow 
s. v. p. 1297"; [L. and S.s. v. A. III. 1]. β. is used of 
what there is a certain necessity for doing: βάπτισμα 
ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι, Lk. xii.50; ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν, vil. 40; 
ἀπαγγεῖλαι, Acts xxiii. 17,19; λαλῆσαι, 18; κατηγορῆσαι, 
Acts xxviii. 19; πολλὰ γράφειν, 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13. 

II. Intransitively. a. (Lat. me habeo) to hold one’s 
self or find one’s self so and so, to be in such or such a 
condition : ἑτοίμως ἔχω, to be ready, foll. by inf., Acts 
xxi. 13; 2 Co. xii. 14; 1 Pet. iv.5 [not WH]; ἐσχάτως 
(see ἐσχάτως), Mk. v. 23; κακῶς, to be sick, Mt. iv. 24: 
Vili. 16; ix. 12; [xvii. 15 LTrtxt. WH txt.], etc.; καλῶς, 
to be well, Mk. xvi. 18; κομψότερον, to be better, Jn. iv. 
52; πῶς, Acts xv. 36; ἐν ἑτοίμῳ, foll. by inf., 2 Co. x. 6. 
b. impersonally : ἄλλως ἔχει, it is otherwise, 1 Tim. v. 
25; οὕτως, Acts vii.1; xii. 15; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9; τὸ νῦν 
ἔχον, as things now are, for the present, Acts xxiv. 25 
(Tob. vii. 11, and exx. fr. later prof. auth. in Kypke, 


“ 
€WS 


Observy. ii. p. 124; ef. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 9; [ef. W. 463 
(432))). 

III. Mid. ἔχομαί τινος (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down), 
prop. to hold one’s self to a thing, to lay hold of a thing, 
to adhere or cling to; to be closely joined to a pers. or 
thing [ef. W. 202 (190); B. 192 (166 sq.), 161 (140) ]: 
τὰ ἐχόμενα τῆς σωτηρίας, Vulg. viciniora saluti, connected 
with salvation, or which lead to it, Heb. vi. 9, where cf. 
Bleek; ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, adjoining, neighboring, border- 
ing, next: of place, κωμοπόλεις, Mk. i. 38 (νῆσος, Isocr. 
paneg. $96; of ἐχόμενοι, neighbors, Hdt. 1, 134); of 
time, τῇ ἐχομένῃ sc. ἡμέρᾳ, the following day, Lk. xiii. 33 ; 
Acts xx. 15, (1 Mace. iv. 28; Polyb. 3, 112,1; 5, 13, 9); 
with ἡμέρᾳ added, Acts xxi. 26; σαββάτῳ, Acts xiii. 44 
(where R T Tr WH txt. ἐρχομένῳ) ; ἐνιαυτῷ, 1 Mace. iv. 
28 (with var. ἐρχομένῳ ev.) ; τοῦ ἐχομένου ἔτους, Thue. 6, 
3. [Come. : ἀν- rpoa-av-, avt-, am-, €v-, €m-, KAT-, μετ-, παρ-, 
πέερι-, Tpo-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-: ὑπ-έχω.] 

ἕως, a particle marking a limit, and 

I. as a ConsuNcTION signifying 1. the tempo- 
ral terminus ad quem, (ill, until, (Lat. donec, usque 
dum); asin the best writ. a. with an indie. pret., 
where something is spoken of which continued up to a 
certain time: Mt. ii. 9 (€s. . . ἔστη [ἐστάθη L T TrW11)) ; 
xxiv. 39, (1 Mace. x. 50; Sap. x. 14, ete.). ὍὌ. with ἄν 
and the aor. subjune. (equiv. to the Lat. fut. perf.), where 
it is left doubtful when that will take place till which it 
is said a thing will continue [ef. W. § 42, 5]: ἴσθι ἐκεῖ, 
ἕως ἂν εἴπω σοι, Mt. ii. 13; add, v. 18; x. 11; xxii. 44; Mk. 
vi. 10; xii. 36; Lk. xvii.8; xx.43; Actsii.35; Heb. i. 
13; after a negative sentence: Mt. v. 18, 26; x. 23 [T 
WH om. ἄν]; xii. 20; xvi. 28; xxiii. 39; xxiv. 34; Mk. 
ix. 1; Lk. ix. 27; xxi. 32; 1 Co.iv.5; with the aor. subj. 
without the addition of dv: Mk. vi. 45 RG; xiv. 32 [here 
Tr mrg.fut.]; Lk.xv.4; [xii. 59TTr WH; xxii. 34 L T 
Tr WH]; 2 Th. ii. 7; Heb. x. 13; Rev. vi. 11 [Ree. ἕως 
οὗ; οὐκ ἀνέζησαν ἕως τελεσθῇ τὰ χίλια ἔτη, did not live 
again till the thousand years had been finished (elapsi 
Suerint), Rev. xx.5 Ree. Cf. W.§ 41b. 8. ec. 
rarely used with the indic. pres. where the aor. subj. might 
have been expected [ W. u. s.; B. 231 (199)]: so four times 
ἕως ἔρχομαι, Lk. xix. 13 (where L T Tr WH ἐν ᾧ for as, 
but ef. Bleek ad loc.) ; Jn. xxi. 22 sq.; 1 Tim. iv. 13; ἕως 
ἀπολύει, Mk. vi. 451, Τ Tr WH, for R G ἀπολύσῃ (the 
indie. being due to a blending of dir. and indir. dise.; as 
in Plut. Lycurg. 29, 3 δεῖν οὖν ἐκείνους ἐμμένειν τοῖς Kabe- 
στῶσι νόμοις... ἕως ἐπάνεισιν). A. once with the indie. 
fut., ace. to an improbable reading in Lk. xiii. 35: ἕως ἥξει 
Tdf., ἕως ἂν ἥξει Lehm., for RG ἕως ἂν ἥξη; [but WH 
(omitting ἂν ἥξη ὅτε) read ἕως εἴπητε; Tr om. ἄν and br. 
y- 6.; cf. B. 231 (199) sq.]. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down, as long as, while, foll. by the indie. in all 
tenses, —in the N. T. only in the pres. : ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν, 
Jn. ix. 4 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. os]; ἕως (LT Tr WH ὡς) 
τὸ φῶς ἔχετε, In. xii. 35 sq., (Ews ἔτι φῶς ἐστιν, Plat. 
Phaedo p. 89 c.) ; [Mk. vi. 45 (cf. c. above)]. 

II. By a usage chiefly later it gets the force of an 
Apverp, Lat. usque ad; and 1. used of a tempo- 


more 


268 


ἕως 


ral terminus ἃ ἃ quem, until, (unto); a. like a prep- 
osition, w. a gen. of time [W. § 54, 6; B. 319 (274)]: 
ἕως αἰῶνος, Lk. i. 55 Grsb. (Ezek. xxv. 15 Alex.; 1 Chr. 
xvii. 16; Sir. xvi. 26 Fritz.; xxiv. 9, ete.); τῆς ἡμέρας, 
Mt. xxvi. 29; xxvii. 64; Lk. i. 80; Acts i, 22 [Tdf. ἄχρι]; 
to. xi. 8, ete.; ὥρας, Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk. xxiii. 
14; τῆς πεντηκοστῆς, 1 Co. xvi. 8; τέλους, 1 Co.i. 8; 2 Co. 
i. 135 τῆς σήμερον sc. ἡμέρας, Mt. xxvii. 8; τοῦ νῦν, Mt. 
xxiv. 21; Mk. xiii. 19, (1 Mace. ii. 33); χήρα ἕως ἐτῶν 
dySonx. τεσσάρων a widow (who had attained) even unto 
eighty-four years, Lk. ii. 37 LT Tr WH); before the 
names of illustrious men by which a period of time 
is marked: Mt. i.17; xi. 13; Lk. xvi.16 (where T Tr WH 
μέχρι); Acts xiii. 20; before the names of events: 
Mt. i. 17 (€ws μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος) : ii. 153 xxiii. 35; 
xxvill. 20; Lk. xi. 51; Jas. v. 7; ἕως τοῦ ἐλθεῖν, Acts vili. 
40 [B. 266 (228); ef. W. § 44.6; Judith i. 10; xi. 19, 
ete.]. ὍὌ. with the gen. of the neut. rel. pron. οὗ or ὅτου 
it gets the force of a conjunction, until, till (the time 
when); a. ἕως οὗ (first in Hdt. 2, 143; but after that 
only in later auth., as Plut. et al. [W. 296 (278) note; 
B. 230 sq. (199) ]): foll. by the indic., Mt. i. 25 [WH 
br. od]; xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21; Acts xxi. 26 [Β.]. 9.1; foll. 
by the subj. aor., equiv. to Lat. fut. pf., Mt. xiv. 22; xxvi. 
36 (where WH br. οὗ and Lehm. has ἕως οὗ av); Lk. xii. 
50 [Rec.; xv. 8 Tr WIL]; xxiv. 49; Acts xxv. 21; 2 Pet. 
i. 19; after a negative sentence, Mt. xvii. 9; Lk. xii. 59 
[RGL; xxii. 18 Tr WH]; Jn. xiii. 38; Acts xxiii. 12, 
14,21. β. ἕως ὅτου, aa. until, till (the time when): 
foll. by the indie., Jn. ix. 18; foll. by the subj. (without 
av), Lk. xiii. 8; xv. 8[RGLT); after a negation, Lk. 
xxii. 16, 18[RGLT]. ββ. as long as, whilst (Cant. i. 
12), foll. by the indic. pres., Mt. v. 25 (see ἄχρι, 1 ἃ. fin.). 
c. before adverbs of time (rarely so in the earlier and 
more elegant writ., as ἕως ὀψέ, Thue. 3, 108; [ef. W. § 54, 
6 fin.; B. 820 (275)]): ἔως ἄρτι, up to this time, until 
now [ Vig. ed. Herm. p. 388], Mt. xi. 12; Jn. ii. 10; v. 
17; xvi. 24; 1Jn.ii.9; 1Co.iv.13; viii. 7; xv.63 éws 
πότε; how long? Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41; 
Jn. x. 24; Rev. vi. 10, (Ps. xii. (xiii.) 2 54.; 2S. ii. 26; 
1 Mace. vi. 22); ἕως σήμερον, 2 Co. iii. 15. 2. ace. to 
a usage dating fr. Aristot. down, employed of the local 
terminus ad quem, unto, as far as, even to; 8. like a 
prep., with a gen. of place [W. § 54, 6; B. 319 (274)]: 
ἕως ἅδου, ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15; add, Mt. 
xxiv. 313; xxvi. 58; Mk. xiii. 27; Lk. ii. 15; iv. 29; Acts 
i. 8; xi. 19, 22; xvii. 15; xxiii. 23; 2Co. xii. 2; with 
gen. of pers., fo the place where one is: Lk. iv. 42; Acts 
ix. 38, (ἕως Ὑπερβορέων, ΔΕ]. v.h. 3,18).  b. with ad- 
verbs of place [W. and B. as in ec. above]: ἕως ἄνω, Jn. 
ii. 7; ἕως ἔσω, Mk. xiv. 54; ἕως κάτω, Mt. xxvii. 51; 
Mk. xv. 88; ἕως ὧδε, Lk. xxiii. 5 [ef. W. § 66, 1 ¢.]. 
c. with prepositions: ἕως ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, Acts xxi. 5; 
ἕως eis, Lk. xxiv. 50 [RGLmrg., but Ltxt.T Tr WH 
ἕως πρός as far as to (Polyb. 3, 82,6; 12,17,4; Gen. 
Xxxvili. 1)]; Polyb. 1, 11, 14; Ael. v. ἢ. 12, 22. 3. 
of the limit (terminus) of quantity; with an adv. of 
number: ἕως ἑπτάκις, Mt. xviii. 21; with numerals: Mt. 


Ζ, ἕ 


xxii. 20 (€ws τῶν ἑπτά) ; cf. xx. 8; Jn. viii. 9 (Rec.) ; 
Acts vill. 10; Heb. viii.11; οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός, there is 
not so much as one, Ro. iii. 12 fr. Γ 5. xiii. (xiv.) 3. 4. 
of the limit of measurement: ἕως ἡμίσους, Mk. vi. 23; 
Esth. v. 3, 6 Alex. 5. of the end or limit in acting 


[Z, f, on its substitution for o see 3, a, s-] 

Ζαβουλών, ὁ, indecl., (51 [but on the Hebr. form see 
B. D.] habitation, dwelling, Gen. xxx. 20), Vulg. Zabu- 
lon; Zebulun, the tenth son of Jacob; by meton. the 
tribe of Zebulun: Mt. iv. 13, 15; Rev. vii. 8.* 

Ζακχαῖος, -ov, 6, (31 pure, innocent; cf. 2 Esdr. ii. 9; 
Neh. vii. 14), Zaccheus, a chief tax-collector: Lk. xix. 
2, 5, 8. [B. D.s. v.]* 

Ζαρά, ὁ, (N77 a rising (of light)). indecl., Zarah [better 
Zerah], one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 3; ef. Gen. 
XXXvViii. 30." 

Ζαχαρίας, -ov, ὁ, (7931 and 37793t i. 6. whom Jehovah 
remembered), Zacharias or Zachariah or Zechariah ; 
1. a priest, the father of John the Baptist: Lk. i. 5, 
12sq. 18, 21, 40, 59, 67; iii. 2. 2. a prophet, the son 
of Jehoiada the priest, who was stoned to death in the 
mid. of the rx. cent. before Christ in the court of the 
temple: 2 Chr. xxiv. 19 sqq.; Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51. 
Yet this Zachariah is called in Mt. 1. 6. the son not of 
Jehoiada but of Barachiah. But most interpreters now 
think (and correctly) that the Evangelist confounded 
him with that more noted Zachariah the prophet who 
lived a little after the exile, and was the son of Bara- 
chiah (cf. Zech. i. 1), and whose prophecies have a place 
in the canon. For Christ, to prove that the Israelites 
throughout their sa>red history had been stained with 
the innocent blood of righteous men, adduced the first 
and the last example of the murders committed on good 
men; for the bks. of the Chron. stand last in the Hebrew 
canon. But opinions differ about this Zachariah. For 
according to an ancient tradition, which the Greek 
church follows (and which has been adopted by Chr. W. 
Miiller in the Theol. Stud. τι. Krit. for 1841, p. 673 sqq., 
and formerly by Hilgenfeld, krit. Untersuchungen iib. die 
Evangg. Justins, ete., p. 155 and die Evange. nach ihrer 
Entstehung, p. 100), Zachariah the father of John the 
Baptist is meant (cf. Protev. Jac. ὁ. 23); others think 
(so quite recently Keim, iii. 184 [ Eng. trans. v. 218], ef. 
Weiss, das Matthiiusevang. p. 499) a certain Zachariah 
son of Baruch (ace. to another reading Βαρισκαίουν. who 
during the war between the Jews and the Romans was 
slain by the zealots ἐν μέσῳ τῷ ἱερῷ, as Joseph. Ὁ. j. 4, 
5,4 relates. Those who hold this opinion believe, either 
that Jesus divinely predicted this murder and in the 


269 


Can 


and suffering: ἕως τούτου, Lk. xxii. 51 [see ἐάω, 2]; 
ἔως τοῦ θερισμοῦ, Mt. xiii. 30 L Tr WH txt.; ἕως θανάτου, 
even to death, so that I almost die, Mk. xiv. 34; Mt. 
xxvi. 38, (Sir. iv. 28; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 13; xxxvii. 2; 
4 Mace. xiv. 19). 


Z 


prophetic style said ἐφονεύσατε for φονεύσετε [cf. B. 
§137,4; W. 273 (256) n.; §40,5b.], or that the Evange- 
list, writing after the destruction of Jerusalem, by an 
anachronism put this murder into the discourse of Jesus. 
These inventions are fully refuted by Fritzsche on Mt. 
l. c., and Bleek, Erkliir. der drei ersten Evangg. ii. p. 177 


“sqq:; ef. Hilgenfeld, Einl. in ἃ. N. T. p. 487 sq.; [and 


Dr. James Morison, Com. on Mt., 1. e.; B. D.s. v. Zech- 
ariah 6 and s. v. Zacharias 11].* 

faw, -ὦ, ζῇς, ζῆ. inf. ζῆν [so LT, but RG WH -ἢ-, Tr 
also (exc. 1 Co. ix. 14; 2 Co.i. 8); ef. W. §5,4¢.; WH. 
Intr. § 410; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 5 sq.], ptep. ζῶν; 
impf. ἔζων (Ro. vii. 9, where cod. Vat. has the inferior 
form ἔζην [found again Col. iii. 7 é¢jre]; ef. Fritzsche 
on Rom. ii. p. 38; [ WH. App. p. 169; Veitch s. v.]); fut. 
in the earlier form ζήσω (Ro. vi. 2 [not Lmrg.]; Heb. 
xii. 9; LT Tr WH also in Jn. [v. 25]; vi. [51 T WH], 
57,58 [not L; xiv. 19 T Tr WH]; 2 Co. xiii. 4; Jas. iv. 
15), and much oftener [(?) five times, quotations ex- 
cepted, viz. Mt. ix. 18; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xi. 25; Ro. viii. 
13; x.5; οἵ. Moulton’s Winer p. 105] the later form, 
first used by [Hippocr. 7, 536 (see Veitch s. v.)] Dem., 
ζήσομαι; 1 aor. (unused in Attie [Hippoer., Anth. Pal., 
Plut., al. (see Veitch)]) ἔζησα (Acts xxvi. 5, ete.) ; cf. 
Bttm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. 191 sq.; B. 58 (01); Kriiger i. 
p- 172; Kiihner i. 829; W.86 (83); [Veitch s. v.]; Hebr. 
mn; [fr. (Hom.) Theogn., Aeschyl. down] ; to live; 

I. prop. 1. to live, be among the living, be alive (not 
lifeless, not dead): Acts xx. 12; Ro. vii. 1-3; 1 Co. vii. 
39; 2Co.i.8; iv. 11; 1 Th. iv. 15, 17; Rev. xix. 20, ete.; 
Ψυχὴ ζῶσα, 1 Co. xv. 45 and R Trmrg. Rev. xvi. 3; διὰ 
παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, during all their life (on earth), Heb. ii. 
15 (διατελεῖν πάντα τὸν τοῦ ζῆν χρόνον, Diod. 1, 74 [cf. B. 
262 (225)]); ἔτει ζῶν (ptep. impf. [ef. W. 341 (320)]), 
while he was yet alive, before his death, Mt. xxvii. 63; 
with ἐν σαρκί added, of the earthly life, Phil. i. 22; ὃ δὲ 
viv ζῶ ἐν σαρκί, that life which I live in an earthly body, 
Gal. ii. 20 [B. 149 (130); W. 227 (213)]; ἐν αὐτῷ ζῶμεν, 
in God is the cause why we live, Acts xvii. 28; ζῶσα 
τέθνηκε, 1 Tim. v. 6; ἐμοὶ τὸ ζῆν Χριστός, my life is de- 
voted to Christ, Christ is the aim, the goal, of my life. 
Phil. i. 21; ζῶντες are opp. to νεκροί, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. 
xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38; ζῶντες καὶ νεκροί, Acts x. 42; Ro. 
xiv. 9; 2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5; in the sense of living 


Saw 


and thriving, 2 Co. vi. 9; 1 Th. iii. 8; ᾧ) ἐν ἐμοὶ 
Χριστός, Christ is living and operative in me, i. 6. the 
holy mind and energy of Christ pervades and moves me, 
Gal. ii. 20; ἐκ δυνάμεως θεοῦ ζῆν εἴς τινα, through the 
power of God to live and be strong toward one (se. in 
correcting and judging), 2 Co. xiii. 4; in the absol. sense 
God is said to be 6 (av: Mt. xvi. 16; xxvi. 63; Jn. vi. 
57; vi. 69 Rec.; Actsxiv.15; Ro. ix. 26; 2Co. iii. 3; 
vi. 16; 1 Th.i.9; 1 Tim. iii. 15; iv. 10; vi.17 RG; 
Heb. iii. 12; ix. 14; x. 31; xii. 22; Rev. vii. 2, (Josh. 111. 
10; 2K. xix. 4,16; Is. xxxvii.4,17; Hos.i.10; Dan. 
vi. 20 Theod., 26, ete.); with the addition of εἰς τοὺς 
αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων, Rev. iv. 9; xv.7; ζῶ ἐγώ CIN—N, 
Num. xiv. 21; Is. xlix. 18, ete.) as I live, (by my life), 
the formula by which God swears by himself, Ro. xiv. 
11. i. 4. to continue to live, to be kept alive, (ὅστις ζὴν 
ἐπιθυμεῖ, πειράσθω νικᾶν. Xen. an. 3, 2, 26 (39)): ἐὰν ὁ 
κύριος θελήσῃ καὶ ζήσωμεν [-copev LT Tr WH], Jas. iv. 
15 [B. 210 (181); W. 286 (268 sq.)]; ζῆν ἐπ᾽ ἄρτῳ (Mt. 
iv.4,ete.) see ἐπί, B. 2a. a. (Tob. v. 20); ζῆν ἔκ τινος, to 
get a living from a thing, 1 Co. ix. 14; also when used 
of convalescents, Jn. iv. 50 sq.53; with ἐκ τῆς ἀρρω- 
στίας added, 2 K.i. 2; viii. 8 sq. figuratively, to live 
and be strong: ἐν τούτοις (for Ree. ἐν αὐτοῖς) in these 
vices, opp- to the ethical death by which Christians are 
wholly severed from sin (see ἀποθνήσκω, II. 2 b.), Col. iii. 
7; cf. Meyerad loc. 1. q. to be no longer dead, to recover 
life, be restored to life: Mt. ix. 18; Acts ix. 41; so of 
Jesus risen from the dead, Mk. xvi. 11; Lk. xxiv. 5, 23; 
Acts i. 3; xxv. 19; Ro. vi. 10; 2 Co. xiii.4; opp. to 
νεκρός, Rey. i. 18; ii. 8; ἔζησεν came to life, lived again, 
Ro. xiv. 9 GLT Tr WH (opp. to ἀπέθανε); Rev. xiii. 
14; xx. 4,5 [Rec. avé¢.], (Ezek. xxxvii. 9 sq.; on the 
aorist as marking entrance upon a state see βασιλεύω, 
fin.) ; ζῆν ἐκ νεκρῶν. trop. out of moral death to enter 
upon a new life, dedicated and acceptable to God, Ro. vi. 
13; [similarly in Lk. xv. 32 T Tr WH]. 1. q. not to be 
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 (where ἄνθρωποι ἀποθνήσκοντες dying 
men i. e. whose lot it is to die, are opp. to 6 ζῶν). 2. 
emphatically, and in the Messianic sense, to enjoy real 
life, i.e. to have true life and worthy of the name,—active, 
blessed, endless in the kingdom of God (or ζωὴ αἰώνιος; see 
ζωή, 2b.): Lk. x. 28; Jn.v. 25; xi. 25; Ro.i.17; viii. 
13; xiv. 9[(?) see above]; Gal. iii. 12; Heb. xii. 9; with 
the addition of ἐκ πίστεως, Heb. x. 38; of eis τὸν αἰῶνα, Jn. 
vi. 51, 58; σὺν Χριστῷ, in Christ’s society, 1 Th. v. 10; 
this life in its absolute fulness Christ enjoys, who owes it 
to God; hence he says ζῶ διὰ τὸν πατέρα, Jn. vi. 57; by 
the gift and power of Christ it is shared in by the faith- 
ful, who accordingly are said ζήσειν δι αὐτόν, Jn. vi. 57; 
δι αὐτοῦ, 1 Jn.iv.9. with a dat. denoting the respect, 
πνεύματι, 1 Pet.iv.6; ὄνομα ἔχεις ὅτι ζῇς καὶ νεκρὸς εἶ, thou 
art said to have life (i. 6. vigorous spiritual life bringing 
forth good fruit) and (yet) thou art dead (ethically), 
Rey. iii. 1. In the O. T. ζῆν denotes to live most happily 
in the enjoyment of the theocratic blessings: Lev. xviii. 5; 
Dent. iv. 1; viii. 1; xxx. 16. 3. to live i. e. pass life, 
of the manner of living and acting; of morals or char- 


270 


ζεῦγος 


acter: μετὰ ἀνδρός with acc. of time, of a married woman, 
Lk. ii. 36; χωρὶς νύμου, without recognition of the law, 
Ro. vii. 9; Φαρισαῖος, Acts xxvi. 5; also ἐν κόσμῳ, Col. ii. 
20; with ἐν and a dat. indicating the act or state of the 
soul: ἐν πίστει, Gal. 11. 20; ἐν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, to devote life 
to sin, Ro. vi. 2; with adverbs expressing the manner: 
εὐσεβῶς, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit. ii. 12; ἀσώτως, Lk. xv. 13; 
ἐθνικῶς, Gal. ii. 14; ἀδίκως, Sap. xiv. 28; ζῆν τινι (dat. 
of pers., a phrase com. in Grk. auth. also, in Lat. vivere 
alicui; ef. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 176 sqq.), to 
devote, consecrate, life to one; so to live that life results 
in benefit to some one or to his cause: τῷ θεῷ, Lk. xx. 
38; Ro. vi. 10 sq.; Gal. ii. 19, (4 Mace. xvi. 25); τῷ 
Χριστῷ, 2 Co. vy. 15; that man is said ἑαυτῷ ζῆν who 
makes his own will his law, is his own master, Ro. xiv. 
7; 2Co. v.15; ν΄. dat. of the thing to which life is de- 
voted: τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ, 1 Pet. ii. 24; πνεύματι, to be actu- 
ated by the Spirit, Gal. ν. 25; κατὰ σάρκα, as the flesh 
dictates, Ro. viii. 12 sq. 

11. Metaph. of inanimate things; a. ὕδωρ ζῶν, DD 
own (Gen. xxvi. 19; Lev. xiv. 5; ete.), living water, i. c. 
bubbling up, gushing forth, flowing, with the suggested 
idea of refreshment and salubrity (opp. to the water of 
cisterns and pools, [ef. our spring water ]), is figuratively 
used of the spirit and truth of God as satisfying the 
needs and desires of the soul: Jn. iv. 10 sq.; vii. 38; 
ἐπὶ ζώσας πηγὰς ὑδάτων, Rey. vii. 17 Ree. b. having 
vital power in itself and exerting the same upon the soul: 
ἐλπὶς ζῶσα, 1 Pet. i. 3; λόγος θεοῦ, 1 Pet.i. 23; Heb. iv. 
12; λόγια se. τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts vii. 38, cf. Deut. xxxii. 47; 
ὁδὸς ζῶσα, Heb. x. 20 (this phrase describing that char- 
acteristic of divine grace, in granting the pardon of sin 
and fellowship with God, which likens it to a way lead- 
ing to the heavenly sanctuary). Inthe same manner the 
predicate 6 ζῶν is applied to those things to which 
persons are compared who possess real life (see I. 2 
above), in the expressions λέθοι ζῶντες, 1 Pet. ii. 4; ὁ 
ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν (see ἄρτος. fin.), Jn. vi. 51; θυσία ζῶσα 
(tacitly opp. to slain victims), Ro. xii.1. [Comp.: dva-, 
συ-ζάω.] 

ἵβέννυμι, see σβέννυμι and 5. v. Σ, a, ς- 

Ζεβεδαῖος, -ου, 6, Zebedee, (131 for “731 [i. 6. my gift], 
a form of the prop. name which occurs a few times in 
the O. T., as 1 Chr. xxvii. 27 (Sept. Ζαβδί), munificent, 
[others for 7921 gift of Jehovah]; fr. 121 to give), a 
Jew, by occupation a fisherman, husband of Salome, fa- 
ther of the apostles James and John: Mt. iv. 21; x. 2 
(8); xx. 20; xxvi. 37; xxvii. 56; Mk.i. 19 sq.; iii. 17; x. 
35; Lk. ν. 10; Jn: xxi. 2:* 

ἵεστός, -7, τόν, (Céw), boiling hot, hot, [Strab., App., 
Diog. Laért., al.]; metaph. of fervor of mind and zeal: 
Rev. iii. 15 sq.* 

ζεῦγος, -εος (-ous), τό, (ζεύγνυμι to join, yoke), two 
draught-catile (horses or oxen or mules) yoked together, 
a pair or yoke of beasts: Lk. xiv. 19 (πον, 1 Kings xix. 
19, ete.; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. II. 18, 543 down). 
2. univ. a pair: Lk. ii. 24 (Hdt. 3, 130; Aeschyl. Ag. 
44; Xen. oec. 7, 18, and often in Grk. writ.).* 


EUKTN pla 
ρ 


ζευκτηρία, -as, ἡ, (fr. the adj. ζευκτήριος, fit for joining 
or binding together), a band, fastening: Acts xxvii. 40. 
Found nowhere else.* 

Ζεύς, [but gen. Διός, (dat. Aw), ace. Ala (or Δίαν), (fr. 
old nom. Ais), Zeus, corresponding to Lat. Jupiter (A. 
V.): Acts xiv. 12 (see Ais); ὁ ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς τοῦ ὄντος 
πρὸ τῆς πόλεως, the priest of Zeus whose temple was be- 
fore the city, ibid. 13 (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. See δίς." 

téw; to boil with heat, be hot; often in Grk. writ.; thus 
of water, Hom. Il. 18, 349; 21, 362 (365); metaph. 
used of ‘ boiling’ anger, love, zeal for what is good or 
bad, ete. (Tragg., Plat., Plut., al.) ; ζέων (on this uncon- 
tracted form cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. for his School Gram. 
(Robinson’s trans.)] § 105 N. 2, i. p. 481; Matthiae i. 
p- 151; [Hadley § 371 b.]) τῷ πνεύματι, fervent in spirit, 
said of zeal for what is good, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii. 11; 
ef. esp. Riickert and Fritzsche on Ro. 1. c.* 

ζηλεύω; i. q. ζηλόω, q. ν-; 1. to envy, be jealous: 
Simplicius in Epict. c. 26 p. 131 ed. Salmas. [e. 19, 2 p. 
56, 84 Didot] οὐδεὶς τῶν τ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τὸ ἀνθρώπινον ζητούντων 
φθονεῖ i) ζηλεύει ποτέ. 2. in a good sense, to imitate 
emulously, strive afier: ἔργα ἀρετῆς. ov λόγους, Democr. 
ap. Stob. flor. app. 14, 7, iv. 384 ed. Gaisf.; intrans. to 
be full of zeal for good, be zealous: Rev. iii.19 LT Tr 
txt. WH, for Ree. ζήλωσον [οἵ. WH. App. p. 171].* 

ζῆλος, -ov, 6, and (in Phil. iii. 6 L T Tr WH; [2 Co. 
ix. 2 T Tr WH)]) τὸ ζῆλος (Ignat. ad Trall. 4; διὰ ζῆλος, 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4, 8 [‘‘in Clem. Rom. 88 3, 4, 5, 6 the 
masc. and neut. seem to be interchanged without any 
law” (Lghtft.). For facts see esp. Clem. Rom. ed. 2 
Hilgenfeld (1876) p.7; cf. WH. App. p. 158; W.§9, N. 
2; B. 23 (20)]; (fr. ζέω [Curtius § 567; Vanicek p. 
757]); Sept. for τ; excitement of mind, ardor, fervor 
of spirit ; 1. zeal, ardor in embracing, pursuing, de- 
fending anything: 2 Co. vii. 11; ix. 2; κατὰ ζῆλος, as re- 
spects zeal (in maintaining religion), Phil. iii. 6; with 
gen. of the obj., zeal in behalf of, for a pers. or thing, 
Jn. ii. 17 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10; Ro. x. 2, (1 Mace. ii. 
58; Soph. O. C. 943); ὑπέρ τινος, gen. of pers., 2 Co. 
vii. 7; Col. iv. 13 Rec. with subject. gen. ζήλῳ θεοῦ, 
with a jealousy such as God has, hence most pure and 
solicitous for their salvation, 2 Co. xi. 2; the jfierceness 
of indignation, punitive zeal, πυρός (of penal fire, which 
is personified [see πῦρ, fin.]), Heb. x. 27 (Is. xxvi. 11; 
Sap. v. 18). 2. an envious and contentious rivalry, 
jealousy: Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Co. iii. 3; Jas. iii. 14, 16; ἐπλή- 
σθησαν ζήλου, Acts vy. 17; xiii. 45; plur. ζῆλοι, now the 
stirrings or motions of ζῆλος, now its outbursts and man- 
ifestations: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20; but in both pass. 
L T Tr [WH, yet in Gal. 1. ο. WH only in txt.] have 
adopted ζῆλος (ζῆλοί τε καὶ φθόνοι. Plat. lege. 3 p. 679 c.). 
[On the distinction between ζῆλος (which may be used 
in a good sense) and φθόνος (used only in a bad sense) 
ef. Trench, Syn. § xxvi.; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 11, 
1 (διὸ καὶ ἐπιεικές ἐστιν ὁ ζῆλος Kal ἐπιεικῶν, τὸ δὲ φθονεῖν 
φαῦλον καὶ φαύλων).}" 

ζηλόω, -6; 1 aor. ἐζήλωσα ; pres. pass. inf. ζηλοῦσθαι ; 
τὥλος, q. v.); Sept. for NIP; to burn with zeal; as 


271 


ζημια 


absol. to be heated or to boil [A.V. to be moved] with envy, 
hatred, anger : Acts vii. 9; xvii. 5 (where Grsb. om. 
ᾧηλώσ.) ; 1 Co. xiii. 4; Jas. iv. 2; in a good sense, to be 
zealous in the pursuit of good, Rev. iii. 19 RG Trmrg. 
(the aor. ζήλωσον marks the entrance into the mental 
state, see βασιλεύω, fin.; ἐζήλωσε, he was seized with 
indignation, 1 Mace. ii. 24). 2. trans.; τί, to desire 
earnestly, pursue: 1 Co. xii. 81; xiv. 1, 39, (Sir. li. 18; 
Thue. 2, 37; Eur. Hee. 255; Dem. 500, 2; al.); μᾶλλον 
δέ, sc. ζηλοῦτε, foll. by iva, 1 Co. xiv. 1 [B. 237 (205); ef. 
W. 577 (537)]. τινά, 8. to desire one earnestly, to strive 
after, busy one’s self about him : to exert one’s self for one 
(that he may not be torn from me), 2Co. xi. 2; to seek 
to draw over to one’s side, Gal. iv. 17 [cf. ἵνα, I. 1 d.]; 
to court one’s good will and favor, Prov. xxiii. 17; xxiv. 
1; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 1; so in the pass. to be the object 
of the zeal of others, to be zealously sought after: Gal. iv. 
18 [here Tr mrg. ζηλοῦσθε, but cf. WH. Intr. § 404]. 
b. to envy one: Gen. xxvi. 14; xxx.1; xxxvii.11; Hes. 
opp. 310; Hom. Cer. 168, 223; and in the same sense, 
ace. to some interpp., in Acts vii. 9; but there is no 
objection to considering ζηλώσαντες here as used absol. 
(see 1 above [so A.V. (not R.V.)]) and τὸν Ἰωσήφ as 
depending on the verb ἀπέδοντο alone. [Comp.: παρα- 
odbw.}* 

ζηλωτής, -οὔ, 6, (ζηλόω), one burning with zeal; a zealot; 
1. absol., for the Hebr. sap, used of God as jealous of 
any rival and sternly vindicating his control: Ex. xx. 
5; Deut. iv. 24, ete. From the time of the Maccabees 
there existed among the Jews a class of men, called 
Zealots, who rigorously adhered to the Mosaic law and 
endeavored even by a resort to violence, after the ex- 
ample of Phinehas (Num. xxv. 11, ζηλωτὴς Φινεές 4 Mace. 
xviii. 12), to prevent religion from being violated by 
others; but in the latter days of the Jewish common- 
wealth they used their holy zeal as a pretext for the basest 
crimes, Joseph. b. 1. 4, 3,9; 4,5,1; 4,6,3; 7,8,1. To 
this class perhaps Simon the apostle had belonged, and 
hence got the surname ὁ ζηλωτής : Lk. vi. 15; Actsi. 13; 
[ef. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitzesch., Index s. v. Zeloten; 
Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 237 sqq. ]. 2. with 
gen. of the obj.: w. gen. of the thing, most eagerly desirous 
of, zealous for,athing; a. to acquire a thing, [zealous 
of | (see ζηλόω, 2): 1 Co. xiv. 12; Tit. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 
13 LT Tr WH, (ἀρετῆς, Philo, praem. et poen. § 2; τῆς 
εὐσεβείας, de monarch. 1. i. § 3; εὐσεβείας x. δικαιοσύνης, 
de poenit. §1; τῶν πολεμικῶν ἔργων, Diod. 1, 73; περὶ 
τῶν ἀνηκόντων εἰς σωτηρίαν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45,1). Ὁ. 
to defend and uphold a thing, vehemently contend- 
ing for a thing, [zealous for]: νόμου, Acts xxi. 20 (2 
Mace. iv. 2); τῶν πατρικῶν παραδόσεων, Gal. i. 14 (τῶν 
αἰγυπτιακῶν πλασμάτων, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 19; τῆς 
ἀρχαίας x. σώφρονος ἀγωγῆς, Diod. excerpt. p. 611 [fr. 1. 
37, vol. ii. 564 Didot]) ; w. gen. of pers.: θεοῦ, intent on 
protecting the majesty and authority of God by contend- 
ing for the Mosaic law, Acts xxii. 3. (In prof. auth. 
also an emulator, admirer, imitator, follower of any one.)* 

{ypla, -as, ἡ, damage, loss, [Soph., Hdt. down]: Acta 


ζημιοω 2 


xxvii. 10, 21; ἡγεῖσθαι ζημίαν (Xen. mem. 2, 4, 3; τινά, 
ace. of pers., 2, 3, 2), ri, to regard a thing asa loss: Phil. 
iii. 7 (opp. to κέρδος), 8." 

ζημιόω, -@: (ζημία), to affect with damage, do damage 
to: τινά ([Thuc.], Xen., Plat.); in the N. T. only in 
Pass., fut. ζημιωθήσομαι ({ Xen. mem. 3,9, 12, al. ; but “as 
often”] in prof. auth. [fut. mid.] ζημιώσομαι in pass. 
sense; ef. Kriiger § 39, 11 Anm.; Kiihner on Xen. 
mem. u.s.; [L. and S.s.v.; Veitch s. v.]); 1 aor. ἐζημιώ- 
Onv; absol. fo sustain damage, to receive injury, suffer loss : 
1 Co. iii. 15; ἔν τινε ἔκ τινος, in a thing from one, 2 Co. 
vii. 9; with ace. of the thing: (one from whom another 
is taken away [as a penalty] by death, is said τὴν ψυχήν 
τινος ζημιοῦσθαι, Hdt. 7, 39), τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, to forfeit 
his life, i.e. acc. to the context, eternal life, Mt. xvi. 26; 
Mk. viii. 36, for which Luke, in ix. 25, ἑαυτόν i. 6. him- 
self, by being shut out from the everlasting kingdom of 
God. πάντα ἐζημιώθην, reflexive [yet see Meyer], I for- 
feited, gave up all things, I decided to suffer the loss of 
all these [(?)] things, Phil. iii. 8.* 

Znvas (ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15; W.§ 16 N. 1], -ἂν, 
[B. 20 (18)], 6, Zenas, at first a teacher of the Jewish 
law, afterwards a Christian: Tit. iii. 13. [B.D. 5. v.]* 

ζητέω, -d; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐζήτει, plur. ἐζήτουν ; fut. 
Qyrngw; 1 aor. ἐζήτησα; Pass., pres. ζητοῦμαι: impf. 3 
pers. sing. ἐζητεῖτο (Ileb. viii. 7); 1 fut. ζητηθήσομαι 
(Lk. xii. 48); [fr. Hom. on]; Sept. for w73, and much 
oftener for wpa; to seek, i. 6. 1. to seek in order to 
find; a. univ. and absol. : Mt. vii. 7sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq. 
(see εὑρίσκω. 1 a.); τινά, Mk. i. 37; Lk. ii. [45 R Lmrg.], 48; 
[iv. 42 Ree.]; Jn. vi. 24; xviii. 4,7; Acts x. 19, and 
often; foll. by ἐν νυ. dat. of place, Acts ix. 11; w. ace. of 
the thing (μαργαρίτας), of buyers, Mt. xiii. 45; something 
lost, Mt. xvili.12; Lk. xix. 10; τὶ ἔν τινι, as fruit on a 
tree, Lk. xiii. 6 sq.; ἀνάπαυσιν, a place of rest, Mt. xii. 

3; Lk. xi. 24; after the Hebr. (“3 wa3-ns wp3 [ef. 
W. 33 (32); 187) ψυχήν τινος, to seek, plot against, the 
life of one, Mt. ii. 20; Ro. xi. 3, (Ex. iv. 19, ete.); univ. 
τί ζητεῖς; what dost thou seek? what dost thou wish? 
Jn. i. 38 (39); [iv. 21]. Ὄ. do seek [i. 6. in order to find 
out} by thinking, meditating, reasoning; to inquire into: 
περὶ τίνος ζητεῖτε per ἀλλήλων; Jn. xvi. 19; foll. by indi- 
Mk. xi. 18; xiv. 1, 11; Lk. xii. 
; τὸν θεόν, to follow up the traces 
of divine majesty and power, Acts xvii. 27 (univ. to seek 
the knowledge of God, Sap. i. 1; xiii. 6; [Philo,monarch. 
i.§5]). oc. to seek after, seek for, aim at, strive after: 
εὐκαιρίαν, Mt. xxvi. 16; Lk. xxii. 6; ψευδομαρτυρίαν, Mt. 
xxvi. 59; Mk. xiv. 55; τὸν θάνατον, an opportunity to die, 
Rev. ix. 6; λύσιν, 1 Co. vii. 27; τὴν βασιλ. τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. 
vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31; τὰ ἄνω, Col. iii. 1; εἰρήνην, 1 Pet. iii. 
11; ἀφθαρσίαν etc. Ro. ii. 7; δόξαν ἔκ τινος, 1 Th. ii. 6; τὴν 
δόξαν τὴν παρά τινος, Jn. v. 44: τά twos, the property of 
one. 2 Co. xii. 14; τὴν δόξαν θεοῦ, to seek to promote the 
glory of God, Jn. vii. 18; viii. 50; τὸ θέλημά τινος, to at- 
tempt to establish, Jn. v. 30; τὸ σύμφορόν Tivos, to seek 
to further the profit or advantage of one, 1 Co. x. 33, i. q. 
ζητεῖν τά τινος. ib. x. 24; xiii.5; Phil. ii. 21; ὑμᾶς, to seek 


rect dise., πῶς, τί, τίνα: 
29; xxii. 2: 1 Pet.v.8 


2 ζυγος 


to win your souls, 2 Co. xii. 14; τὸν θεόν, to seek the favor 
of God (see ἐχζητέω, a.), Ro. x. 20; [iii. 11 Trmrg. WH 
mrg.]. foll. by inf. [B. 258 (222); W. § 44, 3] to seeki.e. 
desire, endeavor: Mt. xii. 46, [47 (WH in mrg. only)]; 
xxi. 46; Mk. [vi. 19 L Trmrg.]; xii. 12; Lk. v. 18; vi. 19; 
ix.9; Jn. v.18; vii. 4 [Β. § 142, 4], 19 sq.; Acts xiii. 8: 
xvi. 10; Ro. x. 3; Gal. i. 10; 11. 17; foll. by ἵνα [B. 237 
(205)], 1 Co. xiv. 12. 2. to seek i. e. require, demand: 
[σημεῖον, Mk. viii. 12 LT Tr WH; Lk. xi. 29 T Tr WH]; 
σοφίαν, 1 Co. i. 22; δοκιμήν, 2 Co. xiii. 3; τὶ mapa τινος, 
to crave, demand something from some one, Mk. viii. 
1; Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48; ἔν rem, dat. of pers., to seek in 
one i. 6. to require of him, foll. by ἵνα, 1 Co. iv. 2. 
(Comp.: dva-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συ-ζητέω.] 
ζήτημα, -τος, τό, (ζητέω), a question, debate: Acts xv. 2; 
xxvi. 3; νόμου, about the law, Acts xxiii. 29; περί τινος, 
Acts xviii. 15; xxv. 19. [From Soph. down.] * 
ἵήτησις, -ews, ἡ, (ζγτέω); 8. a seeking: [Hadt.], Thue. 
8,57; ἃ]. Ὁ. inquiry (Germ. die Frage): περί twos, Acts 
xxv. 20. ©. a questioning, debate: Acts xv. 2 (for Rec. 
συζήτησις); 7T Trtxt. WH; περί τινος, Jn. iii. 25. ἃ. 
a subject of questioning or debate, matter of controversy: 
1 Tim. i.4 RGL; vi. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 23; Tit. iii. 9.° 
ζιζάνιον, -ov, ro, (doubtless a word of Semitic origin; 


Arab. ὋΝ > Syr. bp) [see Schaaf, Lex. s. v. p. 148], 
Talmud put or 721; Suid. ζιζάνιον: ἡ ἐν τῷ σίτῳ aipa), 
zizanium, [ A. V. tares], a kind of darnel, bastard wheat 
[but see reff. below], resembling wheat except that the 
grains are black: Mt. xiii. 25-27, 29 sq. 36, 38, 40. 
(Geop. [for reff. see B. D. Am. ed. p. 3177 note]). Cf. 
Win. RWB. s. v. Loleh; Furrer in Schenkel B. L. iv. 57; 
[B.D., and Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, s. v. Tares].* 

Zpipva, so Tdf. in Rev. i. 11, ete., for Σμύρνα, q. v- 

Ζοροβάβελ, in Joseph. Ζοροβάβηλος, -ov, ὁ, (733M, 1. 6. 
either for 92317; dispersed in Babylonia, or for 633 piu 
begotten in Babylonia), Zerubbabel, Vulg. Zorobabel, a 
descendant of Dav id, the leader of the first colony of the 
Jews on their return from the Babylonian exile: Mt. i. 
12 sq.; Lk. iii. 27.* 

ζόφος, -ov, 6, (akin to γνόφος, δνόφος, νέφος, κνέφας. ser 
Bum. Lexil. ii. p. 266 [Fishlake’s trans. p. 378]; ef. Cur- 
tius p. 706), darkness, blackness: Heb. xii. 18 L T Tr 
WH; as in Hom. II. 15,191; 21,56, ete., used of the dark- 
ness of the nether world (cf. Grimm on Sap. xvii. 14), 
2 Pet. ii. 4; Jude 6; Coos τοῦ σκότους (cf. NyOX-Wwn, 
Ex. x. 22), the blackness of (i. e. the densest) darkness, 
2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Cf. Trench § c.]* 

ζυγός, -ov, ὁ, for which in Grk. writ. before Polyb. τὸ 
ζυγόν was more com., (fr. Cevyrupt) ; 1. a yoke; a. 
prop. such as is put on draught-cattle. b. metaph. 
used of any burden or bondage: as that of slavery, 1 
Tim. vi. 1 (Lev. xxvi. 13), δουλείας, Gal. ν. 1 (Soph. Ai. 
944; δουλοσύνης, Dem. 322, 12); of troublesome laws 
imposed on one, esp. of the Mosaic law, Acts xv. 10; 
Gal. ν. 1; hence the name is so transferred to the com- 
mands of Christ as to contrast them with the commands 
of the Pharisees which were a veritable ‘yoke’; yet 


ζύμη 


even Christ’s commands must be submitted to, though 
easier to be kept : Mt. xi. 29 sq. (less aptly in Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 16, 17 Christians are called οἱ ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγὸν τῆς 
χάριτος ἐλθόντες [ εἴ. Harnack ad loc.]). 2. a balance, 
pair of scales: Rev. vi. 5 (as in Is. xl. 12; Ley. xix. 36; 
Plat. rep. 8, 550 e.; Ael. v. h. 10, 6; al.).* 

ζύμη, -ης, ἡ, (¢é [but cf. Curtius p. 626 sq.; Vanicek, 
p- 1607), /eaven: Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21, (Ex. xii. 15; 
Ley. ii. 11; Deut. xvi. 3, ete.; Aristot. gen. an. 3, 4; Jo- 
seph. antt. 3, 10, 6; Plut. mor. p. 289 sq. [quaest. Rom. 
1097); τοῦ ἄρτου, Mt. xvi. 12; metaph. of inveterate 
mental and moral corruption, 1 Co. v. [7], 8, (Ignat. ad 
Magnes. 10); viewed in its tendency to infect others, 
ζύμη τῶν Φαρισαίων: Mt. xvi. 6,11; Mk. viii. 15; Lk. xii. 
1, which fig. Mt. xvi. 12 explains of the teaching 
of the Phar., Lk. 1. 6. more correctly [definitely ?] of their 
hypocrisy. It is applied to that which, though small 
in quantity, yet by its influence thoroughly pervades a 
thing: either in a good sense, as in the parable Mt. xiii. 
33; Lk. xiii. 21, (see ζυμόω) ; or in a bad sense, of a per- 
nicious influence, as in the proverb μικρὰ ζύμη ὅλον τὸ 
φύραμα ζυμοῖ a little leaven leaveneth the whole lump, 
which is used variously, acc. to the various things to which 
it is applied, viz. a single sin corrupts a whole church, 
1 Co. y. 6; a slight inclination to error (respecting the 
necessity of circumcision) easily perverts the whole con- 
eeption of faith, Gal. v. 9; but many interpp. explain 
the passage ‘even a few false teachers lead the whole 
church into error.’ * 

Lupe, -ὦ ; 1 aor. pass. eCupaOny; (ζύμη) ; to leaven (to 
mix leaven with dough so as to make it ferment): 1 Co. 
y. 6; Gal. v. 9, (on which pass. see ζύμη) ; ἕως ἐζυμώθη 
ὅλον, 50. τὸ ἄλευρον, words which refer to the saving 
power of the gospel, which from a small beginning will 
gradually pervade and transform the whole human race: 
Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21. (Sept., Hipp., Athen., Plut.) * 

ζωγρέω, -ῶ; pf. pass. ptcp. ἐζωγρημένος ; (ζωός alive, 

and ἀγρέω [poet. form of ἀγρεύω, 4- v-]) ; 1. to take 
alive (Hom., Hdt., Thue., Xen., al.: Sept.). 2. univ. 
to take, catch, capture: ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ δια- 
βόλου) εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα, if they are held captive to 
;do his will, 2 Tim. ii. 26 [al. make ἐζ. im’ air. paren- 
thetic and refer ἐκείνου to God; see ἐκεῖνος, 1 c.; ef. Ellic. 
in loc.]; ἀνθρώπους ἔσῃ ζωγρῶν, thou shalt catch men, 
i. e. by teaching thou shalt win their souls for the king- 
dom of God, Lk. v. 10.* 

tof, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. (aw, ζῶ). Sept. chiefly for o-m; life; 
1. univ. life, i. e. the state of one who is possessed of vital- 
ity or is animate: 1 Pet. iii. 10 (on which see ἀγαπάω) ; 
Heb. vii. 3,16; αὐτὸς (6 θεὸς) διδοὺς πᾶσιν ζωὴν x. πνοήν, 
Acts xvii. 25; πνεῦμα ζωῆς ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ, the vital spirit, 
the breath of (i. e. imparting) life, Rev. xi. 11 (Ezek. 
XXxvli. 5); πᾶσα ψυχὴ Cons, gen. of possess.,every living 
soul, Rev. xvi. 3G LT Trtxt. WH; spoken of earthly 
life: ἡ ζωή τινος, Lk. xii. 15; Acts viii. 33 (see αἴρω. 3h.); 
Jas. iv. 14; ἐν τῇ ζωῇ σου, whilst thou wast living on 
earth, LK. xvi. 25 (ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ, Sir. xxx. 5; 1. 1); ἐν 


273 


ζωή 


Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. iii. 14; Ps. exxvii. (exxviii.) 5; Sir. 
xxii.12(10)). ἐπαγγελία ζωῆς τῆς viv x. τῆς μελλούσης, ἃ 
promise looking to the present and the future life, 1 Tim. 
iv.8; ζωή and θάνατος are contrasted in Ro. viii. 38; 
1 Co. iii. 22; Phil. i. 20; of a life preserved in the midst 
of perils, with a suggestion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 12 (the 
life of Paul is meant here, which exerts a saving power 
on the Corinthians by his discharge of his apostolic 
duties) ; of the life of persons raised from the dead: ἐν 
καινότητι ζωῆς, figuratively spoken of a new mode of life, 
dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 4; of the life of Jesus after his 
resurrection, Acts ii. 28; Ro. v.10; of the same, with 
the added notion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 10 sq. 2. used 
emphatically, a. of the absolute fulness of life, both 
essential and ethical, which belongs to God, and through 
him both to the hypostatic \éyos and to Christ in whom the 
λόγος put on human nature: ὥσπερ ὁ πατὴρ ἔχει ζωὴν ev 
ἑαυτῷ, οὕτως ἔδωκεν καὶ τῷ υἱῷ ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, IN. ν. 
26; ἐν αὐτῷ (sc. τῷ λόγῳ) ζωὴ ἦν καὶ ἡ ζωὴ ἦν τὸ φῶς τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων, in him life was (comprehended), and the life 
(transfused from the Logos into created natures) was the 
light (i. 6. the intelligence) of men (because the life of 
men is self-conscious, and thus a fountain of intelligence 
springs up), Jn.i.4; ὁ λόγος τῆς ζωῆς, the Logos having 
life in itself and communicating it to others, 1 εἶπ. 1. 1; ἡ 
ζωὴ ἐφανερώθη, was manifested in Christ, clothed in flesh, 
ibid. 2. From this divine fountain of life flows forth 
that life which is next to be defined: viz. b. life real 
and genuine, “ vita quae sola vita nominanda” (Cic. de 
sen. 21, 77), a life active and vigorous, devoted to God, 
blessed, the portion even in this world of those who put their 
trust in Christ, but after the resurrection to be consummated 
by new accessions (among them a more perfect body), and 
to last forever (the writers of the O. T. have anticipated 
the conception, in their way, by employing 0° to de- 
note a happy life and every kind of blessing: Deut. xxx. 
15,19; Mal. ii.5; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Prov. viii. 35; 
xii. 28, etc.): Jn. vi. 51,63; xiv. 6; Ro. vii. 10; viii. 6, 
10; 2Co. ii. 16; Phil. ἢ. 16; [Col. iii. 4]; 2 Pet. 1. 8; 
1 Jn. v. 11, 16, 20; with the addition of τοῦ θεοῦ, sup- 
plied by God [W. 186 (175)], Eph. iv. 18; ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ, 
to be obtained in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1; 
μεταβεβηκέναι ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς ζωήν, Jn. v. 24; 1 In. iii. 
14; ὄψεσθαι τὴν ζωήν. In. iii. 36; ἔχειν ζωήν, Jn. v. 40; 
x. 10; 1Jn. v.12; with ἐν ἑαυτῷ (or -rois) added, Jn. v. 
26; [vi 53]; διδόναι, In. vi. 33; χάρις ζωῆς, the grace of 
God evident in the life obtained, 1 Pet. iii. 7; τὸ πνεῦμα 
τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ. the Spirit, the repository and 
imparter of life, and which is received by those united 
to Christ, Ro. viii. 2; 6 ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς (see ἄρτος, fin.), 
Jn. vi. 35,48; τὸ φῶς τῆς ¢. the light illumined by which 
one arrives at life, Jn. viii. 12. more fully ζωὴ αἰώνιος 
and ἡ ζωὴ ἡ αἰώνιος [ (cf. B. 90 (79)); see below]: Jn. iv. 
36; [xii. 50]; xvii. 3; 1 Jn. i. 2; ii. 25; [ῥήματα ζωῆς 
aiwv. Jn. vi. 68]; εἰς ζωὴν ai. unto the attainment of eter- 
nal life [cf. εἰς, B. 11. 3 ο. δ. p. 1855], Jn. iv. 14; vi. 27; 
διδόναι ζωὴν ai., Jn. x. 28; xvii. 2; 1 Jn. v.11; ἔχειν ζωὴν 


τῇ ζωῇ ταύτῃ, 1 Co. χν. 19: πᾶσαι ai ἡμέραι τῆς ζωῆς τινος. | ai., Jn. 111. 15, [and 16], (opp. to ἀπόλλυσθαι), 36; v. 24. 


ζωὴ 2 


39; νἱ. 40, 47, 54; χχ. 81 Lbr.; 1 ὅπ. ν. 18; οὐκ ἔχειν 
ζωὴν αἱ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, 1 Jn. iii. 15; (in Enoch xv. 4, 6 the 
wicked angels are said before their fall to have been 
spiritual and partakers of eternal and immortal life). ζωή 
and ἡ ζωή, without epithet, are used of the blessing of 
real life after the resurrection, in Mt. vii. 14; Jn. 
xi. 25; Acts iii. 15; v. 20; xi. 18; Ro. v. 17,18 (on 
which see δικαίωσις, fin.); 2 Co. ν. 4; Col. iii. 3; 2 Tim. 
i. 10; Tit. i. 2; iii. 7; ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν, life breaking forth 
from the abode of the dead, Ro. xi. 15; εἰσελθεῖν εἰς 
or. ζωήν, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43, 45, ἀνά- 
στασις ζωῆς i. q. εἰς ζωήν (2 Mace. vii. 14), Jn. v. 29 (on 
the gen. cf. W. 188 (177)) ; στέφανος τῆς ζωῆς i. 4. ἡ ζωὴ 
ὡς στέφανος, Jas. i. 12; Rev. ii. 10; ξύλον τῆς ζωῆς, the 
tree whose fruit gives and maintains eternal life, Rev. 
ii. 7; xxii. 2, 14, 19 [@ LT Tr WH], (cf. Gen. ii. 9; 
Prov. iii. 18; δένδρον ζωῆς, Prov. xi. 30; xiii. 12); ef. 
Bleek, Vorless. iib. ἃ. Apokalypse, p. 174 sq.; ὕδωρ ζωῆς, 
water the use of which serves to maintain eternal life, 
Rey. xxi. 6; xxii. 1,17; in the same sense ζωῆς πηγαὶ 
ὑδάτων, Rev. vii. 17 GLT Tr WH; ἡ βίβλος and τὸ βι- 
βλίον τῆς ζωῆς, the book in which the names of those are 
recorded to whom eternal life has been decreed: Phil. 
iv.3; Rey. 11 5s xi.8; ΧΥΙ. 85.) xx-12, 15> ΧΙ 
[xxii 19 Ree.; ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. 6.1. more fully 
ἡ ὄντως [Ree. αἰών.] ζωή, 1 Tim. vi. 19; ζωὴ αἰώνιος (ef. 
above] (Justin. de resurr. 1 p. 588 ¢. ὁ λόγος . . . διδοὺς 
ἡμῖν ἐν ἑαυτῷ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν καὶ τὴν μετὰ ταῦτα 
ζωὴν αἰώνιον), Mt. xxv. 46 (opp. to κόλασις aiwy.); Acts 
xiii. 46, 48; Ro. ii. 7; vi. 22 sq.; Gal. vi. 8; 1 Tim. vi. 
12; after ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ, Mk. x. 30 ; Lk. xviii. 
30; ἔχειν ζωὴν ai. Mt. xix. 16; κληρονομεῖν, Mt. xix. 29 ; 
Mk. x.17; Lk.x. 25; xviii. 18; εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, unto the 
attainment of life eternal, Jn. xii. 25; Ro. v. 21; 1 Tim. 
1.16; Jude 21, (Dan. xii. 2; 4 Mace. xv. 2; ἀένναος ζωή, 
2 Mace. vii. 36; ἀΐδιος ζωή, Ignat. ad Eph.19). Cf. Adst- 
lin, Lehrbegriff des Ey. Johann. ete. pp. 234 sqq. 338 
sqq-; Reuss, Johann. Theologie (in Beitriage zu d. theol. 
Wissenschaften, vol. i.) p. 76 sqq. [ef. his Hist. de la 
Théol. Chrét. bk. vii. ch. xiv.]; Lipsius, Paulin. Recht- 
fertigungslehre, pp. 152 sqq. 185 sq.; Giider in Herzog 
viii. 254 (ed. 2, 509) sqq.; B. B. Briickner, De notione 
vocis ζωή in N. T. Lips. 1858; Huther, ἃ. Bedeut. ἃ. Be- 
griffe ζωή τι. πιστεύειν im N. Τ᾽, in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche 
Theol. 1872,p.1sqq. [For the relations of the term to 
heathen conceptions ef. G. Teichmiiller, Aristot. Forsch. 
iii. p.127 sqq.] Some, as Bretschneider, Wahl, Wilke, 
esp. Kiuffer (in his book De biblica ζωῆς αἰωνίου notione. 
Dresd. 1838), maintain that ζωὴ αἰώνιος everywhere even 
in John’s writings refers to life after the resurrection; but 
in this way they are compelled not only to assume a 
prophetic use of the perf. in the saying ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου 
μεταβεβηκέναι εἰς τ. ζωήν (Jn. ν. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14), but 
also to interpret the common phrase ἔχει ζωὴν ai. as 
meaning he has eternal life as his certain portion though 


4 ζωοποιέω 


as yetonly in hope, as well as to explain ζωὴν αἱ. οὐκ 
ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ μένουσαν (1 Jn. iii. 15) of the hope of 
eternal life. [Syn. see βίος, fin.]* 

ζώνη, -ns, ἡ, (Cavvupe), [fr. Hom. down], a girdle, belt, 
serving not only to gird on flowing garments, Mt. iii. 4; 
Mk.i.6; Acts xxi. 11; Rev. i. 13; xv. 6; but also, since 
it was hollow, to carry money in [A. V. purse]: Mt. x. 
9; Mk. vi. 8; Plut. mor. p. 665 b. quaest. conviv. iv. 2, 
3, 2; “argentum in zonis habentes,” Liv. 33, 29. [B. D. 
8. v. Girdle. ]* 

ζώννυμι and ζωννύω : impf. 2 pers. sing. ἐζώννυες ; fut. 
ζώσω; 1 aor. mid. impy. ζῶσαι; to gird: τινά, Jn. xxi. 
18; Mid. to gird one’s self: Acts xii. 8 LT Tr WH. 
(Ex. xxix. 9; Hom. et al.) [Comp.: dva-, δια-, repr, 
ὑπο-ζώννυμι.) * 

ζωογονέω, -@; fut. ζωογονήσω ; pres. inf. pass. ζωογονεῖ- 
σθαι; (fr. ζωογόνος viviparous, and this fr. ζωός and 
TENQ) ; 1. prop. to bring forth alive (Theophr., 
Diod., Leian., Plut., al.). 2. to give life (Theophr. de 
caus. pl. 4,15,4; Ath. 7 p. 298¢.): τὰ πάντα, of God, 1 
Tim. vi. 18 LT Tr WH, [(18.ii.6)]. 3. in the Bible 
to preserve alive: τὴν ψυχήν, Lk. xvii. 83; pass. Acts vii. 
19. (For mq, Ex.i.17; Judg. viii. 19; [1 5. xxvii. 9, 
US IKE τσὶ (Kom) CIP) - 

ζῶον [or ζῷον (so L WH uniformly, Treg. in Heb. and 
Rey.; see Etym. Magn. 413, 24, and reff. s. v. I, ) ], του, 
τό, (ζωός alive) ; 1. a living being. 2. an animal, 
brute, beast: Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 12; Jude 10; Rev. 
iv. 6-9 [on vs. 8 ef. Β. 130 (114)], ete. 

[Syn.: ζῶον differs from θηρίον (at least ety mologi- 
cally; but cf. Schmidt as below) in giving prominence to 
the vital element, while θηρίον emphasizes the bestial 
element. Hence in Rey. as above ¢ is fitly rendered living 
creature in contradistinction to the θηρίον beast, cf. xi. 7; xiii. 
1, ete. See Trench § lxxxi.; Schmidt ii. ch. 70.] 

two-roréw, -@; fut. ζωοποιήσω; 1 aor. inf. ζωοποιῆσαι; 
Pass., pres. ζωοποιοῦμαι; 1 fut. ζωοποιηθήσομαι; 1 aor. 
ptep. ζωοποιηθείς ; (ζωοποιός making alive) ; 1. to 
produce alive, beget or bear living young, (Aristot., 
Theophr.). 2. to cause to live, make alive, give life: 
τὰ πάντα, of God, 1 Tim. vi. 13 RG [ef. Neh. ix. 6; 2K. 
ν. 7; Diogn. ep. 5 fin.]; by spiritual power to arouse and 
invigorate, 2 Co. iii. 6; Gal. iii. 21; to give ζωὴ αἰώνιος 
(in the Johannean sense), Jn. vi. 63; of the dead, fo re- 
animate, restore to life: 1 Co. xv. 45; twa, Jn. v. 21; Ro. 
iv. 17; viii. 11; pass. 1 Co. xv. 22; i. q. to give increase 
of life: thus of physical life, πρῶτον τὸ παιδίον μέλιτι, 
εἶτα γάλακτι ζωοποιεῖται, Barn. ep. c. 6,17; of the spirit, 
ζωοποιηθεὶς πνεύματι, quickened as respects the spirit, 
endued with new and greater powers of life, 1 Pet. iii. 18, 
on which ef. Lechler, Das apost. u. nachapost. Zeitalter, 
p- 182 ed. 2; [Zezschwitz, De Christi ad inferos de- 
scensu (Lips. 1857) p. 207. metaph. (Geop. 9, 11, 7) 
of seeds quickening into life, i. e. germinating, springing 
up, growing: 1 Co. xv. 36. [Comp.: cv-(woroéw.]* 


275 


H 


n 


ἤ, a disjunctive conjunction [cf. W. § 53,6]. Used 
1. to distinguish things or thoughts which either mu- 
tually exclude each other, or one of which can take the 
place of the other: or (Lat. aut, vel); a. to distin- 
guish one thing from another in words of the same con- 
struction: Mt. v. 17 (τὸν νόμον ἢ τοὺς προφήτας), 36 
(λευκὴν ἢ μέλαιναν) ; vi. 31; vii. 16; Mk. vi. 56; vii. 11 
ἘΠῚ; Lk. ii. 24; ix. 25; Ju. vii. 48; xiii. 29; Actsi. 7; 
ἘΠ 12} elven); ΜΝ'᾽Ὸ: 1 215) 1.1. 1. Covdv.) 9... Ὑἱ LO Sqreex. 
19; Gal. 1. 10, etc. b. after an interrogative or a de- 
clarative sentence, before a question designed to prove 
the same thing in another way: Mt. vii. 4, 9; xii. 29; 
xvi. 26; xxvi.53; Mk. viii. 37; Lk. xiii. 4; xiv. 31; xv. 
8; Ro. ix. 21; xiv. 10; 1Co. vi. 16. c. before a sen- 
tence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate 
that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand: 
Mt. xx. 15 (i. e. or, if thou wilt not grant this, is thine eye 
etc.); Ro. iii. 29; 1 Co. ix. 6 ; xi. 14 [Rec.]; xiv. 
36; 2 Co. xi. 7; ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε etc., Ro. vi. 3; vii. 1 (cf. vi. 
14) ; ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε etc., Ro. xi. 23 1 Co. vi.9,16,19. ἃ. 
ἢ --- 7, either... or, Mt. vi. 24; xii. 33; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts 
xxiv. 20 sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 6. 2. in a disjunctive ques- 
tion it corresponds to the Lat. an after utrum; 8. pre- 
ceded by πότερον, Jn. vii. 17; ef. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 574 
sq-; preceded by the interrog. μή, 1 Co. ix. 8; preceded 
by μήτι. 2 Co. 1. 17.  b. without an interrog. particle 


2 PIR 


22) 


in the first member of the interrogation: τί ἐστι εὐκοπώ- | 


τερον, εἰπεῖν . . . ἢ εἰπεῖν, Mt. ix. 5; Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23; 
add, Mt. xxi. 25; xxiii. 17,19; xxvii. 17; Mk. iii.4; Lk. 
vil. 19); Acts viii. 34. c.#...4...%, Mk. xiii. 35. 
3. as a comparative conj., than; a. after compara- 
tives: Mt. x. 15; xi. 22; Lk.ix.13; xvi.17; Jn. iii. 19; 
iv. 1 [Trmrg. om. WH br. 7]; Acts iv. 19; Ro. xiii. 11, 
and often. ἢ is wanting after πλείους foll. by a noun of 
number: Mt. xxvi.53 T Tr WH; Actsiv. 22; xxiii. 13, 
21; xxiv. 11 (where Rec. adds 7); cf. Matthiae § 455 
note 4; Kiihner ii. p. 847; [Jelf § 780 Obs. 1]; W. 595 
(554) ; [B. 168 (146)]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 410 sq. Ὅ. 
after €repov: Acts xvii.21. ο. πρὶν 7, before that, before, 
foll. by ace. with inf. [οἵ B. § 139, 35; W. § 44, 6, also p. 
297 (279)]: Mt.i.18; Mk. xiv. 30; Actsii.20 RGWH 
mrg.; vii. 2; foll. by the aor. subjunc., Lk. ii. 26 Tr txt. 
om. WH br. 7; xxii. 34 RG [al. ἕως; foll. by pres. optat. 
Acts xxv. 16. ἃ. after θέλω i. q. to prefer: 1 Co. xiv. 
19 (foll. by ἤπερ. 2 Macc. xiv. 42); exx. fr. Grk. auth. are 
given in Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 589 sq.; W. § 35, 2¢.; 
[Β. § 149, 7]; Kiihner ii. p. 841; [Jelf § 779 Obs. 81. 
e. after ov: Jn. xiii. 10 R G, where after od χρείαν ἔχει 
the sentence goes on as though the writer had said οὐκ 
ἄλλου τινὸς χρείαν ἔχει. [ef. W. 508 (473)]. 


f. after | 


ἡγεμών 


positive notions, to which in this way a comparative 
force is given: after καλόν ἐστι [it is good... rather 
than] i. 4. it is better, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; Mk. ix. 43, 45,47; 
ef. Menander’s saying καλὸν τὸ μὴ ζῆν, ἢ ζῆν ἀθλίως, and 
Plaut. rud. 4, 4, 70 tacita mulier est bona semper, quam 
loquens; similar exx. in the O. T. are Gen. xlix.12; Ps. 
exvil. (exviii.) 8; Jon. iv. 3, 8; Tob. vi.13; xii. 8; Sir. 
xx. 25; xxii. 15; 4 Mace. ix. 1; also after λυσιτελεῖ [it 
is gain ... rather than] i. q. it is better (Tob. iii. 6), Lk. 
xvii. 2; after χαρὰ ἔσται [there will be joy... more than}, 
Lk. xv. 7; seeexx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bitm. Gram. § 149, 7; 
[B. p. 360 (309)]; Winer, Kiihner, al., as above. 4. 
with other particles; 8. ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, see ἀλλά, I. 10 p. 28". 
Ὁ. ἢ γάρ, see γάρ, I. fin. c. ἢ καί [cf. W. § 53, 6 note], 
a. or even, or also, (Lat. aut etiam, vel etiam): [Mt. vii. 
10 LT Tr WH]; Lk. xi. 11 G LT Tr WH, 12; xviii. 
11; Ro. ii. 15; 1 Co. xvi. 6; 2Co.i.13. β. or also (Lat. 
an etiam), (in a disjunctive question): Lk. xii. 41; Ro. 
iv. 9. ἃἅ. ἤπερ, than at all (Lat. quam forte; Germ. 
als etwa), after a compar. [cf. Jelf § 779 Obs. 5]: Jn. xii. 
43 [L ἢ wep, WH mrg. ὑπέρ], (2 Mace. xiv. 42; Hom., 
Hes.). 6. ἤτοι... ἤ, either indeed [cf. Kiihner § 540, 
5]...or: Ro. vi. 16 (Sap. xi. 19; Hdt. and sqq.). 

ἡ μήν, assuredly, most certainly, full surely, (a particle 
used in asseverations, promises, oaths [ef. W. § 53, 7b.; 
Paley, Grk. Particles, p.38sq.]): Heb. vi.14 R G; see εἰ, 
III. 9. (Sept.; very often in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down.) ἢ 

ἡγεμονεύω ; (ἡγεμών) ; [fr. Hom. down]; a. to be 
leader, to lead theway. Ὁ. to rule, command: with gen. 
of a province [cf. B. 169 (147) ], to be governor of a prov- 
ince, said of a proconsul, Lk. ii. 2; of a procurator, Lk. 
τ. 1. 

ἡγεμονία, -ας, ἡ, (ἡγεμών), [Hdt., Thue., Plat., al-], 
chief command, rule, sovereignty: of the reign of ἃ Ro- 
man emperor, Lk. iii. 1; Joseph. antt. 18, 4, 2.* 

ἡγεμών, -όνος, ὁ, (ἡγέομαι), in class. Grk. a word of 
very various signification: a leader of any kind, a guide, 
ruler, prefect, president, chief, general, commander, sover- 
eign; in the N. T. spec. 1. a ‘legatus Caesaris,’ an 
officer administering a province in the name and with the 
authority of the Roman emperor; the governor of a prov- 
ince: Mt. x. 18; Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xxi. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 14. 
2. a procurator (Vulg. praeses; Luth. Landpfleger), an 
officer who was attached to a proconsul or a propraetor 
and had charge of the imperial revenues; in causes re- 
lating to these revenues he administered justice, (called 
ἐπίτροπος, διοικητής, in prof. auth.). In the smaller 
provinces also, which were so to speak appendages of 
the greater, he discharged the functions of governor of 
the province; and such was the relation of the procu- 


ἡγέομαι 


rator of Judwa to the governor of Syria (cf. Krebs, 
Observy. p. 61 sqq.; Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 432 
sqq.; Win. RWB. s. v. Procuratoren; Sieffert in Herzog 
2s. vy. Landpfleger; Krenkel in Schenkel iv. 7; [BB. 
DD. 5. v. Procurator]); so of Pilate, Felix, Festus: Mt. 
xxvii. 2, 11, 14 sq. 21, 23 [R GL Trmrg.], 27; xxviii. 
14; Lk. xx. 20; Acts xxiii. 24, 26, 33; xxiv. 1, 10; xxvi. 
80; Πιλᾶτος ὁ τῆς Ἰουδαίας ἡγεμών, Joseph. antt. 18, 3, 1; 
(Tacit. ann. 15, 44 Christus Tiberio imperitante per 
procuratorem Pontium Pilatum supplicio adfectus 
erat). 3. first, leading, chief: so of a principal town 
as the capital of the region, Mt. ii. 6, where the meaning 
is, ‘Thou art by no means least among the chief cities 
of Judah;’ others less aptly (Bleek also [(where?) ; 
in his (posthumous) Synopt. Erklirung ete. i. 119 
he repudiates this interp. (ascribed by him to Hof 
mann, Weiss. ἃ. Erfiill. ii. 56)]), ‘Thou shalt by no 
means be regarded as least among i. e. by the princes, 
the nobles, of the state.’ The saying is taken fr. Mie. v. 
2 (1), where the Hebr. ‘DNA (which the Sept. give cor- 
rectly, ἐν χιλιάσι) seems to have been read 3 3 by the 
Evangelist [ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 2007." 

ἡγέομαι, -ovpar; pf. ἥγημαι; 1 aor. ἡγησάμην ; (fr. ἄγω 
[ef. Curtius p. 688]); dep. mid.; fr. Hom. down; al. 
to lead, i.e. 8. to go before; Ὅ. to be a leader; to 
rule, command; to have authority over: in the N. T. 
so only in the pres. ptep. ἡγούμενος, a prince, of regal 
power (Ezek. xliii. 7 for 7975 Sir. xvii. 17), Mt. ii. 6; @ 
(royal) governor, viceroy, Acts vii. 10; chief, Lk. xxii. 
26 (opp. to ὁ διακονῶν) ; leading as respects influence, 
controlling in counsel, ἔν τισι, among any, Acts xv. 22; 
with gen. of the pers. over whom one rules, so of the 
overseers or leaders of Christian churches: Heb. xiii. 
7, 17, 24, (οἴκου, 2 Chr. xxxi. 13; τῶν πατριῶν, 1 Esdr. 
v. 65 (66), 67 (68); τῆς πόλεως, Judg. ix. 51 Alex.; a 
military leader, 1 Mace. ix. 30; 2 Mace. xiv. 16; used 
also in Grk. writ. of any kind of a leader, chief, com- 
mander, Soph. Phil. 386; often in Polyb.; Diod. 1, 4 and 
72; Leian. Alex. 44; al.); with gen. of the thing, rod λόγου, 
the leader in speech, chief speaker, spokesman: Acts 
xiv. 12 of Mercury, who is called also τοῦ λόγου ἡγεμών 
in Jamblich. de myster., init. 2. (like the Lat. duco) 
L q. to consider, deem, account, think: with two ace., one 
of the obj., the other of the pred., Acts xxvi. 2; Phil. ii. 
3, 6 (on which see ἁρπαγμός, 2 [W. § 44, 3 ¢.]); iii. 7 [ef. 
B. 59 (51); W. 274 (258)]; 1 Tim. i. 12; vi. 1; Heb. 
x. 29; xi. 11, 26; 2 Pet. i. 13; 11, 13; 1. 9, 15. τινὰ 
ὥς τινα, 2 Th. iii. 15 [ef. W. § 65, 1 a.]; τινὰ ὑπερεκπερισ- 
σῶς, to esteem one exceedingly, 1 Th. ν. 13 (περὶ πολλοῦ, 
Hdt. 2, 1153; περὶ πλείστου, Thuc. 2,89); w. ace. of the 
thing foll. by ὅταν. Jas. i. 2; ἀναγκαῖον, foll. by an inf., 
2 Co. ix.5; Phil. ii. 25; δίκαιον, foll. by an inf., 2 Pet. i. 
13; foll. by an ace. w. inf., Phil. iii.8. [Comp.: 8, ἐκ- 
δι-. €&, προ-ηγέομαι." 

Syn.: δοκέω 1, ἡγέομαι 3, νομίζω 2, οἴομαι: ἡγ. 
and vou. denote a belief resting not on one’s inner feeling or 
sentiment, but on the due consideration of external grounds, 
the weighing and comparing of facts; 50x. and of., on the 


276 


“ 
ἥκω 


other hand, describe a subjective judgment growing out of 
inclination or a view of facts in their relation to us. jy. 
denotes a more deliberate and careful judgment than von. ; 
of. a subjective judgment which has feeling rather than 
thought (dox.) for its ground. Cf. Schmidt ch. 17.] 

ἡδέως, adv., (fr. ἡδύς sweet, vleasant), with pleasure, 
gladly: Mk. vi. 20; xii. 37; 2 Οὐ. xi. 19. [From Suph., 
Plat. down. |* 

ἤδη, adv., [fr. Hom. down; on deriv. see Vanitek p. 
745; Peile p. 395], in the N. T. everywh. of time, now, al- 
ready, (Lat. jam): Mt. iii. 10; v. 28; xiv.15; Mk. iv. 37; 
ΧΙ. 11; Lk. vii. 6; xii. 49; [xxiv. 29 T WH Trtxt., L Tr 
mrg. br.]; Jn. iv. 35 (36), 51; xix. 28 (that all things 
were now finished and that nothing further remained 
for him to do or to suffer); Acts xxvii. 9; Ro. xiii. 11 
(that it is already time to wake up and indulge no 
longer in sleep); 1 Co. iv. 8, and often; νῦν... ἤδη, now 
already (Lat. jam nunc): 1 Jn. iv. 3; ἤδη ποτέ, now at 
last, at length now: with fut. Ro. i. 10; [with aor. Phil. 
iv. 10. Syn. see ἄρτι, fin.] 

ἥδιστα (neut. plur. of the superl. ἥδιστος fr. dvs), adv., 
most gladly (ef. ἡδέως) : 2 Co. xii. 9,15. (Soph., Xen., 
Plat., al.) * 

ἡδονή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ὕδομαι), [Simon. 117, Hdt. down], pleas- 
ure: 2 Pet. ii. 13; plur., Lk. viii. 14 (at ἡδοναὶ τ. Biov) ; 
Tit. iii. 3; Jas. iv. 3; by meton. desires for pleasure 
(Grotius, cupiditates rerum voluptariarum), Jas. iv. 1." 

ἡδύ-οσμος, -ov, (ἡδύς and ὀσμή), sweel-smelling (Plin. 


jucunde olens); neut. τὸ 76. as subst. garden-mint (i. ἢ. 


pivn, Strab. 8, 3,14 p. 344; Theophr. hist. plant. 7, 7; 
ef. caus. plant. 6, 22 (20)), a kind of small odoriferous 
herb, with which the Jews used to strew the floors of 
their houses and synagogues; (it was called by them 
nn, see Burtorf, Lex. talm. s. v. p. 1228 [p. 623 ed. 
Fischer]) : Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi.42. [BB.DD.]* 
ἦθος, -εος (-ovs), τό, (akin to ἔθος, prob. fr. EQ, whence 
ἧμαι, ἕζω, [ef. Vanitek p. 379]); a 
abode, dwelling-place, haunt, customary state, (Hom., 
Hes., Hadt., al). 2. custom, usage, (cf. Germ. Sitzen, 
Sitte); plur. τὰ ἤθη morals, character, (Lat. mores): 1 Co. 
xv. 33 fr. Menander; ef. Menand. fragm. ed. Meineke 
p- 75. (Sir. xx. 26 (25); 4 Mace. 1 CHIE, 1| 7. PIE) ys 
ἥκω; impf. ἧκον (Acts xxviii. 23, where LT Tr WI 
ANOov); fut. ἥξω; 1 aor. ἧξα (LK. xiii. 35 RG; Rey. ii. 
; iii. 9 Rec.) ; pf. ἧκα (often in Sept., as Gen. xlii. 7, 
9; xlv.16; [xlvii. 4]; Josh. ix. 12 (7); Job xvi. 22, 
etc.; in the N. T. once, Mk. viii. 3 R" LT Tr txt., see 
WH. App. p. 169; the older and more elegant writ. 
[Aeschyl., Hdt., Thue., al.] use only the pres. impf. and 
fut.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 743 sq.; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 
205; [Veitch s. v.]; W- 87 (83); [B. 59 (51)]); Sept. 
for ΜῈ: to have come, have arrived, be present, LW. 274 
(258); B. 203 (176)]; hence impf. with force of plupf. 
(ef. Matthiae ii. p. 1136; Kriiger § 53, 1, 4): absol. of 
persons, Mt. xxiv. 50; Mk. viii. 3; Lk. xii. 46; xv. 27; 
Jn. viii. 42; Heb. x. 7, 9, 37; 1Jn. v. 20; Rev. ii. 25; 
iii. 9; xv. 4; foll. by ἀπό with gen. of place, Mt. viii. 11; 
Lk. xiii. 29; by ἐκ with gen. of place, Ro. xi. 26; with 


a customary 


25; 


mre 


addition of eis w. ace. of place, Jn. iv. 47; μακρόθεν, Mk. 
Vili. 3; πρός teva, Acts xxviii. 23 Rec.; metaph. fo come 
to one i. e. seek an intimacy with one, become his fol- 
lower: Jn. vi. 37; ἐπί τινα, to come upon one (unexpect- 
edly), Rev. iii. 3. of time and events: absol., Mt. xxiv. 
14; Jn. ii. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. xviii. 8; as ἂν ἥξη [L 
T WH Tr in br. ἥξει; see above and B. 231 (199) ] (se. 
ὁ καιρός), ὅτε εἴπητε, Lk. xiii. 35; ἐπί twa, metaph. to 
come upon one, of things to be endured (as evils, calami- 
tous times): Mt. xxiii. 36; Lk. xix.43. [Comp.: dr, 
καθ-ήκω.} * 

ἡλί (L ἡλί, T ἡλεί [see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. et, 
+; on the breathing cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. 
§408; WH édwi]), a Hebr. word, “9x, my God: Mt. 
xxvii. 46. [Cf. ἐλω and the ref. there.] * 

“HAL (R* HX [on the breathing in codd. see Τὰ 
Proleg. p. 107], T Tr WH Ἡλεί [see WH. App. p. 155, 
and 5. v. εἰς ¢]), indecl., Heli, the father of Joseph, the 
husband of Mary: Lk. iii. 23.* 

Ἠλίας ([so R***G; WH Ἠλείας cf. WH. App. p. 
155; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 and see εἰ, 1, but] L Tr Ἡλίας, 
Tdf. Ἡλείας, [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. 
p- 107; WH. Intr. § 408; current edd. are not uni- 
form]), -ov [B. 17 (16), 8; but once (viz. Lk. i. 17 T Tr 
mrg. WH) -a], 6, (7998 or 37798 i.e. either ‘strength of 
Jehovah’ or ‘my God is Jehovah’), Elijah, a prophet 
born at Thisbe [but see B. D. s. v., alsos. v. Tishbite], the 
unflinching champion of the theocracy in the reigns of 
the idolatrous kings Ahab and Ahaziah. He was taken 
up to heaven without dying, whence the Jews expected 
he would return just before the advent of the Messiah, 
whom he would prepare the minds of the Israelites to 
receive (1 K. xvii—xix.; 2 K. ii. 6 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxi. 12; 
Mal. iv. 4 (iii. 22); Sir. xlviii. 1, 4, 12 [ef. Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, App. viii.]): Mt. xi. 14; xvi. 14; 
xvii. 3 sq. 10-12; xxvii. 47,49; Mk. vi. 15; vill. 28; ix. 
4 sq. 11-13; xv. 35 sq.; Lk. i. 17; iv. 25 sq.; 1x. 8, 19, 30, 
33, 54[RGL]; Jn.i. 21, 25; Jas. v.17; ἐν Ἡλίᾳ, in the 
narrative concerning Elijah, Ro. xi. 2 [see ἐν, I. 1 d.].* 

ἡλικία, -as, ἡ, (ἧλιξ mature, of full age, Hom. Od. 18, 
373 [al. of the same age; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.; 
Pape, Lex. 8. v.]); fr. Hom. down; 1. age, time of 
life; a. univ.: Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [in these pass. 
‘term or length of life’; but others refer them to 2 
below; see Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. p. 4; Jas. Mori- 
son, Com. on Mt. 1. c.] cf. πῆχυς, and De Wette, Meyer, 
Bleek on Mt. 1. c.; παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, beyond the proper 
stage of life [A. V. past age], Heb. xi. 11 (2 Mace. iv. 
40; 4 Mace. v. 4). b. adult age, maturity: ἔχειν mre 
ciav[ A. V. to be of age], Jn. ix. 21,23. ο. suitable age 
for anything; with gen. of the thing for which it is fit: 
τοῦ γάμου, Dem.; τοῦ ἤδη φρονεῖν, Plat. Eryx. p. 396 b.: 
metaph. of an attained state of mind fit for a thing: 
τοῦ πληρώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ, the age in which we are 
fitted to receive the fulness (see πλήρωμα, 1) of Christ, 
Eph. iv. 13 [al. refer this to 2; ef. Ellic. in loc.]. 2. 
stature (Dem., Plut., al.): τῇ ἡλικίᾳ μικρός, Lk. xix. 3; 
προκόπτειν ἡλικίᾳ, i. 6. in height and comeliness of stature 


277 


ἡμέρα 
(Bengel, justam proceritatem nactus est et decoram), Lk. 
ii. 52; cf. Meyer, Bleek, ad loc.* 

ἡλίκος, -η, -ov, (ἧλιξ, see ἡλικία), prop. as old as, as tall 
as; univ. (Lat. quantus): how great, Col. ii. 1; Jas. iii. 
5 [ef. B. 253 (217) ]; how small (Leian. Hermot. 5), ἡλίκον 
πῦρ, Jas. iii. 5 LT Tr WH [B. 1. c.].* 

ἥλιος, του, ὁ [often anarthrous, W. 120 (114); B. 89 
(78) ], (€An [root us to burn, ef. Curtius § 6127); Sept. for 
wow; the sun: Mt. v.45; xiii. 43; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk. iv. 
40; xxi. 25; Acts xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. i. 16, ete. 
i. q. the rays of the sun, Rev. vii. 16; i. 4: the light of 
day: μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον, of a blind man, Acts xiii. 11. 

ἥλος, -ov, 6, a nail: Jn. xx. 25. [(From Hom. on.)]* 

ἡμεῖς, see ἐγώ. 

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, (fr. ἥμερος, -ον, prop. ἡμέρα ὥρα the mild 
time, cf. Lob. Paral. p. 359; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq.; 
Vanitek p. 9487); Hebr. ny; day; used 1. of the 
natural day, or the interval between sunrise and sun- 
set, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night; a. 
prop. ἡμέρας, by day, in the daytime, [ef. collog. Eng. 
of a day; W. § 30,11; B. § 132, 26], Rev. xxi. 25; ἡμέ- 
pas k. νυκτός, day and night [ef. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob. 
Paralip. p. 62 sq.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5], Mk. v.5; Lk. 
xvili. 7; Actsix. 24; 1 ΤῊ. 11. 9; iii.10; [2 Th. iii.8 L 
txt. T Tr WH]; 1 Tim. v.5; 2 Tim.i.3; Rev. iv. 8; vii. 
15; xii. 10; xiv. 11; xx.10; ἡμέρας μέσης, at midday, 
Acts xxvi. 13; νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν [ W. 230 (216); B.§ 131, 
11], Mk. iv. 27; Acts xx. 31; 2 Th.iii.8 RG; hyper- 
bolically i. q. without intermission, λατρεύειν, Lk. ii. 37; 
Acts xxvi. 7; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day’s journey, Lk. ii. 44 
(Gen. xxxi. 23 [μιᾶς ἡμέρας ὁδόν, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 2, 9: 
ef. W. 188 (177); B.D. Am. ed. 5. v. Day’s Journey ]) ; 
Tas ἡμέρας, acc. of time [W. and B. as above], during the 
days, Lk. xxi. 37; ἐκείνην τ. ἡμέραν, In. i. 39 (40); πᾶσαν 
ἡμέραν, daily, Acts v.42; ἐκ δηναρίου τὴν ἡμέραν, so some- 
times we say, for a shilling the day, Mt. xx. 2; δώδεκά 
εἰσιν ὧραι τῆς ἡμέρας, Jn. xi. 9; to the number of days 
are added as many nights, Mt. iv. 2; xii. 40; γίνεται 
ἡμέρα, day dawns, it grows licht. Lk. iv. 42; vi. 13; xxii. 
66; Acts xii.18; xvi. 35; xxiii. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39, 
(Xen. an. 2, 2, 18; 7, 2, 34); περιπατεῖν ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ, Jn. 
xi. 95 ἡ ἡμέρα φαίνει, Rev. viii. 12; ἡ ἡμέρα κλίνει, the day 
declines, it is towards evening, Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29. b. 
metaph. the ‘day’ is regarded as the time for abstaining 
from indulgence, vice, crime, because acts of the sort are 
perpetrated at night and in darkness: 1 Th. v. 5, 8; 
hence ὁ αἰὼν οὗτος (see αἰών, 3) is likened to the night, 
αἰὼν μέλλων to day, and Christians are admonished to 
live decorously as though it were light, i. 6. as if ὁ αἰὼν 
ὁ μέλλων were already come, Ro. xiii. 12 sq. ἕως ἡμέρα 
ἐστίν while it is day, i. 6. while life gives one an oppor- 
tunity to work, Jn. ix.4. of the light of knowledge, 
2 Beta 19: 2. of the civil day, or the space of 
twenty-four hours (thus including the night): Mt. vi. 34; 
Mk. vi. 21; Lk. xiii. 14, ete.; opp. to an hour, Mt. xxv. 
13; to hours. months, years, Rey. ix. 15; Gal. iv. 10; 
ἡ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τρυφή, the revelling of a day, i. 6. ephemeral, 
very brief, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [al. refer this to 1 b. above]; 


ἡμέρα 


ἑπτάκις τῆς mu. seven times in the (space of a) day, Lk. 
xvii. 4; the dat. ἡμέρᾳ of the day on (in) which (ef. W. 
§ 31,9; B. § 133 (26)]: as τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ, Mt. xvi. 21; Mk. 
ix. 31 [Rec.]; Lk. xvii. 29 sq.; Acts ii. 41, etc.; ἡμέρᾳ x. 
ἡμέρᾳ, day by day, every day, 2 Co. iv. 16 (after the 
Hebr. py) py Esth. iii. 4, where Sept. καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέ- 
ραν, and py oy Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 20, where Sept. ἡμέραν 
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν; [cf. W. 463 (432)]); ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας (see 
ex, IV. 2), 2 Pet. ii. 8; as an ace. of time [W. 230 (215 
sq-); B. § 131, 11]: ὅλην τ. ἡμέραν, Ro. viii. 36; x. 21; 
μίαν ἡμέραν, Acts xxi. 7; and in the plur., Jn. ii. 12; iv. 
40% xi. 6; Actsix. 19; x. 48; xvi. 12; xx. 6; xxi. 4,10; 
xxv. 6, 14; xxviii. 7,12 [L dat.], 14; Gal. i. 18; Rev. xi. 
3,9. joined with Prepositions: ἀπό with gen. from 
... forth, from ...on, Mt. xxii. 46; Jn. xi.53; Acts x. 
30; xx.18; Phil. i.5; ἄχρι w. gen. until, up to, Mt. xxiv. 
88; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Actsi.2; [22 Tdf.]; ii. 29; 
xxiii. 1; xxvi. 22; ἄχρι πέντε ἡμερῶν, until five days had 
passed, i. e. after five days, Acts xx. 6; μέχρι w. gen. until, 
Mt. xxviii. 15 [L Tr, WH in br.]; ἕως w. gen. until, Mt. 
xxvii. 64; Acts i. 22 [Τ' ἄχρι]; Ro. xi. 8; διά w. gen., see 
διά, A. IL.; πρό w. gen. before, Jn. xii. 1 (on which see πρό, 
b.); ἐν w. dat. sing., Mt. xxiv.50; Lk.i.59; Jn.v.9; 1Co. 
x.8[LT Tr WH txt. om. ἐν]; Heb. iv. 4, ete.; ἐν w. dat. 
plur., Mt. xxvii.40; Mk. xv. 29[L Ὁ Trom. WH br. ἐν]; 
Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WH br. ἐν], 20, ete. ; εἰς, unto, (against), Jn. 
xii. 7; Rev. ix. 15; ἐπί w. ace. for, (Germ. auf... hin), 
Acts xiii. 31 (for many days successively) ; xvi. 18; xxvii. 
20; Heb. xi. 30; καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily [W. 401 (374 sq.) ], 
Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 49; Lk. xvi. 19; xxii. 53; Acts 
ii. 46 sq.; ili. 2; xvi. 5; xix. 9; 1 Co. xv. 31; 2 Co. xi. 
28; Heb. vii. 27; x.11; also τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, Lk. xi. 3; 
xix. 47; Acts xvii. 11 [L T Tr txt.om.WH br. τὸ], (Polyb. 
4,18, 2; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 734; [Jelf §456]; Bnhdy. p. 
329; B. 96 (84)); καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν, every day, Heb. 
iii. 13 (Xen. mem. 4, 2,12); also κατὰ πᾶσαν np. Acts 
xvii. 17; μετά, after, Mt. xvii. 1; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 63; Mk. 
vili. 31; Lk. i. 24; Jn. iv. 43; xx. 26; Actsi.5; xv. 36, 
ete. ov πλείους εἰσὶν ἐμοὶ ἡμέραι ἀφ᾽ ἧς, sc. ἡμέρας, Acts 
xxiv. 11. A specification of the number of days is 
thrust into the discourse in the nominative, as it were 
adverbially and without any grammatical connection, 
(ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 310 sq.; W. 516 (481) and § 62, 
2; [B. 139 (122)]): ἤδη ἡμέραι (Rec. ἡμέρας, by correc- 
tion) τρεῖς, Mt.xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2; ὡσεὶ ἡμέραι ὀκτώ, Lk. 
ix. 28. ἡμερῶν διαγενομένων τινῶν, certain days having 
intervened, Acts xxv. 13. ἡμέρα and ἡμέραι are used w. 
the gen. of a noun denoting a festival or some solemnity 
usually celebrated on a fixed day: τῶν ἀζύμων, Acts xii. 
33 τῆς πεντεκοστῆς, Acts ii. 1; xx. 163; τοῦ σαββάτου, 
Lk. xiii. 14, 16; Jn. xix. 315; ἡ κυριακὴ ἡμέρα, the Lord’s 
day, i. e. the day on which Christ returned to life, Sun- 
day therefore, Rey. i. 10; the foll. phrases also have 
reference to sacred or festival days: κρίνειν ἡμέραν παρ᾽ 
ἡμέραν. to exalt one day above another, and κρίνειν πᾶσαν 
ἡμέραν. to esteem every day sacred, Ro. xiv. 5; φρονεῖν 
τὴν ἡμέραν, to regard a particular day that is selected for 
religious services, Ro. xiv. 6; ἡμέρας παρατηρεῖσθαι, to 


9 


- 


78 ἡμέρα 
observe days, Gal. ἵν. 10. After the Hebr. usage, which 
in reference to a definite period of time now elapsed 
speaks of a certain number of days as fulfilled or 
completed (see Gesenius s. v. x0), we have the 
phrases ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τῆς λειτουργίας, the days 
spent in priestly service, Lk. i. 23 (when he had been 
employed in sacred duties for the appointed time) ; rod 
περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν, for him to be circumcised, Lk. ii. 21; 
τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ αὐτῶν, ib. 22; συντελεσθεισῶν ἡμερῶν, Lk. 
iv. 2; τελειωσάντων τὰς ἡμέρας, when they had spent 
there the time appointed, Lk. ii. 43; ἐν τῷ συμπληροῦ- 
σθαι τὰς ἡμ. τῆς ἀναλήψεως αὐτοῦ, when the number of 
days was now being completed which the reception of 
Jesus into heaven required, i. e. before which that re- 
ception could not oceur, Lk. ix. 51; ἡ ἐκπλήρωσις τῶν 
ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ, the fulfilment of the days required 
for the purification, Acts xxi. 26; συντελοῦνται ai ἡμέραι, 
ib. 27; ἐν τῷ συμπληροῦσθαι τ. ἡμέραν τῆς πεντεκοστῆς, 
when the measure of time needed for the day of Pente- 
cost was being completed, i. e. on the very day of Pen- 
tecost, Acts ii. 1. As in some of the exx. just adduced 
ἡμέρα is joined to the gen. of a thing to be done or to 
happen on a certain day, so also in ny. τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ, 
Jn. xii. 7; ἀναδείξεως. Lk. i. 80. with gen. of pers., ἐν 
τῇ ἡμέρᾳ σου [but 1, T Tr WH om. σου] in the day favor- 
able for thee, the day on which salvation is offered thee 
and can be obtained, Lk. xix. 42 (Polyb. 18, 5, 8 μὴ 
παρῇς τὸν καιρόν .. . σὴ νῦν ἐστιν ἡμέρα, σὸς ὁ καιρός ; 
“meus dies est, tempore accepto utimur” Sen. Med. 
1017). 3. of the last day of the present age (see 
αἰών, 3), the day in which Christ will return from heaven, 
raise the dead, hold the final judgment, and perfect his 
kingdom, the foll. expressions are used: ἡ ἡμέρα, simply, 
Ro. xiii. 12; Heb. x. 25, cf. 1 Th. ν. 4; (ἡ) ἡμέρα τοῦ 
κυρίου, Χριστοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, 
Lk. xvii. 24 ΒΟ Ύ Tr WH org.; 1 Co. 1. 8; ν. δ; 2 Οο. 
1.14: Phil. i.6,10; 1 Th.v.2; 2Th.ii. 2; 2 Pet.iii.10; ἡ 
ἡμέρα κυρίου ἡ μεγάλη, Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)) ; 
ἡμέρα ἧ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀποκαλύπτεται, Lk. xvii. 30; ἡ 


ἡμέρα τ. θεοῦ. 2 Pet. iii. 12; ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη ἡ μεγάλη τοῦ 
παντοκράτορος, Rev. xvi. 14, (even in the prophecies of 
the O.T. the day of Jehovah is spoken of, in which Jehovah 
will execute terrible judgment upon his adversaries, as 
Joel i. 15; ii. 1,115; Is. ii. 12; xiii.6,9; Am. v. 18, 20; 
Jer. xxvi. 10 (xlvi. 10); Ezek. xiii. 5; xxx. 2sqq.; Ob. 
15; Zeph. i. 7 sqq.; Mal. iii. 17); ἡ jp. ἐκείνη and ἐκείνη 
ἡ ἡμ.» Mt. vii. 22; Lk. vi. 23; x.12; xxi. 34; 2 Th.i. 10; 
2 Tim. i. 12,18; iv. 8; ἡ ἐσχάτη ἡμ.- In. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54; 
xi. 24; xii. 48; ἡμ. ἀπολυτρώσεως, Eph. iv. 30; ἐπισκοπῆς 
(see ἐπισκοπή, b.), 1 Pet. ii. 12; κρίσεως, Mt. x. 15; xi. 
22, 24; xii. 36; Mk. vi.11 RLbr.; 2 Pet. ii. 9; iii. 7, cf. 
Acts xvii. 31; τῆς κρίσεως, 1 Jn. iv. 17; ὀργῆς κι ἀποκα- 
λύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τ. θεοῦ, Ro. ii. 5 (Dyi-DY, Ezek. 
xxii. 24; ΠῚ ἫΝ OV, Zeph. ii. 3 sq.; [A Ay-or, Prov. 
xi.4; Zeph. i. 15,18, ete.]); ἡ ἡμ. ἡ μεγάλη τῆς ὀργῆς 
αὐτοῦ, Rev. vi. 17; ju. σφαγῆς, of slaughter (of the 
wicked), Jas. v. 5 [(Jer. xii. 3, ete.)]. Paul, in allusion 
to the phrase ἡμέρα κυρίου. uses the expression ἀνθρωπίνη 


ἡμέτερος 


ἡμέρα for a tribunal of assembled judges on the day of 
trial [A. V. man’s judgment] (cf. the Germ. Landtag, 
Reichstag), 1 Co. iv. 3. 4. By a Hebraistic usage 
(though one not entirely unknown to Grk. writ.; cf. 
Soph. Aj. 131, 623; Eur. Ion 720) it is used of time in 
general, (as the Lat. dies is sometimes): Jn. xiv. 20; 
xvi. 23, 26; Heb. viii. 9 [cf. B. 316 (271); W. 571 
(531) ]; τὴν ἐμὴν ἡμέραν, the time when I should appear 
among men as Messiah, Jn. viii. 56; ἐν τῇ nu τῇ πονηρᾷ, 
in the time of troubles and assaults with which demons 
try Christians, Eph. vi. 13; ἡμ. σωτηρίας, the time when 
any one is or can be saved, 2 Co. vi. 2; εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος, 
for all time, forever (see αἰών, 1 a.), 2 Pet. iii. 18; much 
oftener in the plur.: ἡμέραι πονηραί, Eph. v. 16° ἀφ᾽ ἡμε- 
ρῶν ἀρχαίων, Acts xv. 7; ai πρότερον ny. Heb. x: 32; 
πᾶσας τὰς ἡμέρας, through all days, always, Mt. xxviii. 20 
(δ τη-3, Deut. iv. 40; v. 26 (29), and very often; ἤματα 
πάντα, Hom. 1]. 8, 539; 12,133; 13, 826, ete.) ; αἱ ἔσχα- 
Tat nu. (see ἔσχατος, 1 sub fin.), Acts ii. 17; 2 Tim. iii. 1; 
Jas. v. 3; ai ἡμ. αὗται, the present time, Acts iii. 24; the 
time now spoken of, Lk. i. 39; vi. 12; Acts i. 15, ete.; 
ἐν ταῖς nu. ἐκείναις (see ἐκεῖνος, 2b. p. 195"); mpd τούτων 
τῶν ἡμερῶν, Acts v. 36; xxi. 38; πρὸς ὀλίγας ἡμ. for a 
short time, Heb. xii. 10; ἐλεύσονται jy. ὅταν ete., Mt. ix. 
15; Mk. ii. 20; Lk. v. 35; dre etc. Lk. xvii. 22; ἥξουσιν 
ἡμ. ἐπὶ σέ, καί foll. by a fut. Lk. xix. 48 ; ἔρχονται nu., καί 
011. by fut. Heb. viii. 8; ἐλεύσονται or ἔρχονται ἡμ.; ἐν αἷς 
ete., LK. xxi. 6; xxiii. 39. witha gen. of the thing done 
or to happen: τῆς ἀπογραφῆς, Acts v. 37; τῆς φωνῆς, 
Rev. x. 7; τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ. of his earthly life, Heb. ν. 
7. ai np. with the gen. of a pers., one’s time, one’s days, 
i. e. in which he lived, or held office: Mt. ii. 1; xi. 12; 
ἘΣΤῚ 30; xxiv. 37; Lk. i. 5; iv. 25; xvii. 26,28; Acts 
vii. 45; xiii. 41; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xxvi. 1; 1S. xvii. 
10; 2S. xxi.1; 1 K.x. 21; Esth.i.1; Sir. xliv. 7; xlvi. 
7; Tob. i. 2; 1 Mace xiv. 36, ete.); ai ἡμέραι τοῦ υἱοῦ 
τοῦ avOp. the time immediately preceding the return of 
Jesus Christ from heaven, Lk. xvii. 26; μίαν τῶν pu. τοῦ 
vi. τ. avOp a single day of that most blessed future time 
when, all hostile powers subdued, the Messiah will reign, 
Lk. xvii. 232. Finally, the Hebrews and the Hellenists 
who imitate them measure the duration and length also 
of human life by the number of days: πάσας ras ἡμέρας 
{[Lmrg. Trmrg. WH dat.] τῆς ζωῆς [GL T Tr WH om. ] 
ἡμῶν, during all our life, Lk. i. 75 Ree. (Gen. xlvii. 8 sq.; 
Judith x. 3: Tob. i. 2 (3); Sir. xxii. 12; xxx. 32 (24); 
1 Mace. ix. 71); προβεβηκὼς ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτοῦ, far 
advanced in age, Lk. i. 7,18; ii. 36 (O°D73 Na, [Sept. 
προβ. ἡμερῶν or ἡμέραις], Gen. xviii. 11; xxiv. 1; Josh. 
xiii. 1; [xxiii 1; 1 K.i.1; see προβαίνω, fin.]); ἀρχὴ 
ἡμερῶν, beginning of life, Heb. vii. 3 (ai ἔσχαται ἡμέραι 
τινός, one’s last days, his old age, Protev. Jac. ec. 1); 
ἡμέραι ἀγαθαί, 1 Pet. iii. 10. 

ἡμέτερος, -έρα. -epov, (ἡμεῖς), possess. pron. of the 1 
pers. plur., [fr. Hom. down], our: with a subst., Acts ii. 
11; xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. xv. 4; [1 Co. xv. 31 
Rec. >]; 2 Tim. iv. 15; 1 Jn. i. 3; ii. 23 of ἡμέτεροι, 
substantively, ‘our people,’ (the brethren): Tit. iii. 14. 


279 


ἤρεμος 


[Neut. τὸ jer. substantively: Lk. xvi. 12 WH txt. Cf. 
W. § 22, 7sqq.; B. § 127, 19 sqq.]* 

ἡ μήν, see 7. 

ἡμιθανής, -ἐς, (fr. Fue half, and θνήσκω, 2 aor. ἔθανον), 
half dead: Lk. x. 30. ({Dion. Hal. 10, 7]; Diod. 12, 62; 
Strab. 2 p. 98; Anthol. 11, 392, 4; [4 Mace. iv. 11]; 
4} 

ἥμισυς, -εια, -v; gen. ἡμίσους (Mk. vi. 23 [Sept. Ex. 
xxv. 9; etc. ], for the uncontr. form ἡμίσεος which is more 
com. in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. [fr. Hat. 
down]); neut. plur. ἡμίση, Lk. xix. 8 R G,a form in use 
from Theophr. down, for the earlier ἡμίσεα adopted by 
Lehm. (cf. Passow [also L. and 5.7 5. v.; W. § 9, 2d.; 
ἡμίσεια ἴῃ T Tr [ἡμίσια WH] seems due to acorruption of - 


, the copyists, see Steph. Thes. iv. p. 170; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. 


i. p. 248; Alex. Bitm.in Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p. 194 
sq.; [N.T. Gram. 14 (13); Tdf. Proleg. p. 118; but esp. 
WH. App. p. 1587); Sept. for ΠΥ ΤΙ, much oftener 
ὙΠ; half; it takes the gender and number of the 
annexed substantive (where τὸ ἥμισυ might have been 
expected): τὰ ἡμίση τῶν ὑπαρχόντων, Lk. xix. 8 (so Grk. 
writ. say 6 ἥμισυς τοῦ βίου, of ἡμίσεις τῶν ἱππέων, see 
Passow 8. v.; [L. and 5. 5. ν. 1. 2; Kiihner ὃ 405, 5c.]; 
τὰς ἡμίσεις τῶν δυνάμεων, 1 Mace. iii. 34,37); neut. τὸ 
ἥμισυ, substantively, the half; without the art. a half: 
ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου (Esth. v. 3; vii. 2), Mk. vi. 
235 ἥμισυν καιροῦ, Rev. xii. 14; as in class. Grk., καὶ 
ἥμισυ is added to cardinal numbers even where they are 
connected with masc. and fem. substantives, as τρεῖς 
ἡμέρας καὶ ἥμισυ, three days and a half, Rey. xi. 9, 11, 
(ὀψωνεῖν δυοῖν δραχμῶν καὶ ἡμίσους, Ath.6 p. 274 ο. ; δύο 
or ἑνὸς πήχεων καὶ ἡμίσους, Ex. xxv. 16; xxvi. 16; 
xxxviii. 1 [Alex.]); with καὶ omitted: Rey. xi. 9 Tdf. 
ed. 7 (μυριάδων ἑπτὰ ἡμίσους, Plut. Mar. 34).* 

ἡμιώριον and (1, T Tr WH) ἡμίωρον (cf. Kiihner § 185, 
6,2; [Jelf § 165, 6, 1 a.]), του. τό, (fr. ἥμε and ὥρα, ef. τὸ 
ἡμικοτύλιον, ἡμιμοίριον, ἡμικόσμιον, ἡμιχοινίκιον, ἡμιωβόλιον, 
ete.), half an ποι. Rey. viii. 1. (Strab. 2 p. 133; Geop.; 
al. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.]-) * 

ἡνίκα, a rel. adv. of time, [fr. Hom. down], at which 
time; when: foll. by the indic. pres., of a thing that 
actually takes place, 2 Co. iii. 15 RG; foll. by av with 
subj. pres., whensoever: ibid. L T Tr WH; foll. by ἄν 
and the aor. subj. with the force of the Lat. fut. pf., αἱ 
length when (whensoever it shall have ete.) : 2 Co. iii. 16; 
Ex. i. 10; Deut. vii. 12; Judith xiv. 2. [On its constr. 
see W. 296 (278) sq.; 308 (289); Β. § 139, 33.]* 

ἤπερ, see 7, 4 ἃ. 

ἤπιος, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (apparently 
derived fr. ἔπος, εἰπεῖν, so that it prop. means affable [so 
Etym. Magn. 434, 20; but ef. Vaniéek p. 32]); fr. Hom. 
down; mild, gentle: 1 Th. ii. 7 (where L WH νήπιος, q. v. 
fin.) ; πρός τινα, 2 Tim. ii. 24." 

“Hp, Lchm. “Hp [on the breathing in codd. see ΤᾺ 
Proleg. p. 107], (1) watchful, fr. 1337 to be awake), Er, 
one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 28.* 

ἤρεμος, -ov, quiet, tranquil: ἤρεμον x. ἡσύχιον βίον, 1 
Tim. ii. 2. (Leian. trag. 207; Eustath., Hesych.; com 


“Hpwéns 


parat. ἠρεμέστερος. fr. an unused ἠρεμής, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 
63; more com. in the earlier Grk. writ. is the adv. 
ἠρέμα. [Cf. W.§11 fin.; B. 28 (24).])* 

Ἡρώδης, -ov, 6, (equiv. to “Hpwidns, sprung from a hero ; 
hence the Etym. Magn. pp. 165, 43; 437, 56 directs it to 
be written Ἡρῴδης [so WH], as it is found also in certain 
inscriptions [οἷ Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 9; WH. Intr. 
§ 410; Tdf. Proleg. 109; Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]), 
Herod, the name of a royal family that flourished among 
the Jews in the time of Jesus andthe apostles. In the 
N. T. are mentioned, 1. the one who gave the family 
its name, Herod surnamed the Gireal, a son of Antipater 
of Idumxa. Appointed king of Judea B.c. 40 by the 
Roman senate at the suggestion of Antony and with the 
consent of Octavian, he at length overcame the great 
opposition which the country made to him and took 
possession of the kingdom B. c. 37; and, after the battle 
of Actium, he was confirmed in it by Octavian, whose 
favor he ever after enjoyed. He was brave and skilled 
in war, learned and sagacious; but also extremely sus- 
picious and cruel. Hence he destroyed the entire royal 
family of the Hasmonzans, put to death many of the 
Jews that opposed his government, and proceeded to 
kill even his dearly beloved wife Mariamne of the Has- 
monzean line and the two sons she had borne him. By 
these acts of bloodshed, and especially by his love and 
imitation of Roman customs and institutions and by the 
burdensome taxes imposed upon his subjects, he so 
alienated the Jews that he was unable to regain their favor 
by his splendid restoration of the temple and other acts 
of munificence. He died in the 70th year of his age, the 
37th of his reign, the 4th before the Dionysian era. ΟἿ, 
Joseph. antt. 14, 14,4; 15, 6,7; 7,4; 8,1; 16, 5,4; 
11,6, ete. In his closing years John the Baptist and 
Christ were born, Mt. ii. 1; Lk. i. 5; Matthew narrates 
in ch. ii. (ef. Macrob. sat. 2, 4) that he commanded the 
male children in Bethlehem from two years old and under 
to be slain. Cf. especially Keim in Schenkel iii. 27 
sqq-; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 15, und the books 
there mentioned. 2. Herod surnamed Antipas, son 
of Ilerod the Great and Malthace, a Samaritan woman. 
After the death of his father he was appointed by the 
Romans tetrach of Galilee and Perwa. His first wife 
was a daughter of Aretas, king of Arabia; but he sub- 
sequently repudiated her and took to himself Herodias, 
the wife of his brother Herod (see Φίλιππος, 1); and in 
consequence Aretas, his father-in-law, made war against 
him and conquered him. He cast John the Baptist into 
prison because John had rebuked him for this unlaw- 
ful connection; and afterwards, at the instigation of 
Herodias, he ordered him to be beheaded. Induced by 
her, too, he went to Rome to obtain from the emperor 
the title of king. But in consequence of accusations 
brought against him by Herod Agrippa IL. Caligula 
banished him (a.p. 39) to Lugdunum in Gaul, where he 
seems to have died. [On the statement of Joseph. (b. 
1. 2, 9, 6) that he died in Spain see the conjecture in 
B. D. s. v. Herodias.] He was light-minded, sensual, 


280 


ἭΗρωδιας 


vicious, (Joseph. antt. 17, 1,3; 8,1; 11,4; 18, 5,1; 7, 
1sq.; b.j. 2,9,6). In the N. T. he is mentioned by 
the simple name of Herod in Mt. xiv. 1, 3, 6; Mk. vi 
16-18, 20-22; viii. 15; Lk. iii. 1, 19; viii. 3; ix. 7, 9; 
ΧΙ, 31; xxiii. 7 sq. 11 sq. 15; Actsiv. 27; xiii. 1; once, 
Mk. vi. 14, he is called βασιλεύς, either improperly, or 
in the sense of royal lineage (see βασιλεύς). Cf. 
Keim 1. ὁ. p. 42 sqq.; Schiirer ]. ¢. p. 232 866. 3. 
Herod Agrippa I. (who is called by Luke simply Herod, 
by Josephus everywhere Agrippa), son of Aristobulus 
and Berenice, and grandson of Herod the Great. After 
various changes of fortune, he gained the favor of the 
emperors Caligula and Claudius to such a degree that 
he gradually obtained the government of all Palestine, 
with the title of king. He died at Cmsarea, A.p. 44, 
at the age of 54, in the seventh [or 4th, reckoning from 
the extension of his dominions by Claudius] year of his 
reign (Joseph. antt. 17, 1,2; 18, 6; 19, 4,5; 6,13 7, 
3; b.j. 2,11, 6), just after having ordered James the 
apostle, son of Zebedee, to be slain, and Peter to be cast 
into prison: Acts xii. 1, 6, 11, 19-21. Cf. Keim 1. e. p. 
49 sqq.; Schiirer 1. e. p. 290 sqq.; [Farrar, St. Paul, 
vol. ii. Excurs. vi.]. 4. (Herod) Agrippa IT., son of 
the preceding. When his father died he was a youth of 
seventeen. In 4.b. 48 he received from Claudius Cesar 
the government οἵ Chalcis, with the right of appointing 
the Jewish high-priests, together with the care and over: 
sight of the temple at Jerusalem. Four years later 
Claudius took from him Cialcis and gave him instead a 
larger dominion, viz. Batanwa, Trachonitis, and Gaul- 
anitis, with the title of king. ‘To these regions Nero, in 
A.p. 53, added Tiberias and Tarichaeae and the Perwan 
Julias, with fourteen neighboring villages. Cf. Joseph. 
antt. 19; 95 1 56.:; 2051, 8: 5,25 7,15 8,45) bay. 2; 12; 
land 8. Inthe N.T. he is mentioned in Acts xxv. 13, 
22-26; xxvi. 1 sq. (7), 19, 27 sq. 32. In the Jewish 
war, although he strove in vain to restrain the fury of 
the seditious and bellicose populace, he did not desert 
the Roman side. After the fall of Jerusalem, he was 
vested with praetorian rank and kept the kingdom en- 
tire until his death, which took place in the third year 
of the emperor Trajan, [the 73d of his life, and 52nd of 
his reign]. He was the last representative of the He- 
rodian dynasty. Cf. Keim 1. ec. p. 56 sqq.; Schiirer le. 
Ρ. 315 sqq. [Less complete accounts of the family may 
be found in BB.DD.; Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 s. v.; 
an extended narrative in Hausrath, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 
vol. i. Absehn. v. Cf. also Edersheim, Jesus the Mes- 
siah, bk. ii. ch. ii. and App. iv. ] 

Ἥρωδιανοί [ WH “HpwS., see Ἡρώδης and I, ε; οἵ. W. 
§16, 2 y.], τῶν, of, Herodians, i. 6. Herod’s partisans (οἱ 
τὰ Ἡρώδου φρονοῦντες, Joseph. antt. 14, 15, 10): Mi. 
xxii. 16; Mk. iii. 6; xii. 18. Cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz. 
iii. 130 sqq. [Eng. trans. v. p. 156 sq.], and in Schenkel 
iii. 65 sqq.; [ef. B.D. s. v.; Edersheim, Index s. v.].* 

Ἥρωδιάς [WH Ἡ ρῳδιάς, see Ἡρώδης and I, ¢], -ddos, ἡ, 
Herodias, daughter of Aristobulus and granddaughter 
of Herod the Great. She was first married to Herod 


‘“Hpawdiov 


[Philip (see Φίλιππος, 1)], son of Herod the Great, a 
man in private life; but she afterwards formed an un- 
lawful union with Herod Antipas, whom she induced 
not only to slay John the Baptist but also to make the 
journey to Rome which ruined him; at last she followed 
him into exile in Gaul (see Ἡρώδης, 2): Mt. xiv. 3, 6; 
Mk. vi. 17, 19, 22 [here WH R mre. αὐτοῦ]; Lk. iii. 19.* 

Ἡρωδίων [WH Ἢ ρῳδ., see “Howdys and I, ¢], τωνος, 6, 
Herodion, a certain Christian, [Paul’s “ kinsman” (see 
ovyyems)]: Ro. xvi. 11.* 

Ἡσαΐας (Lcehm. Ἢσ. [ef. ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 107; WH 
*Haaias, see I, 47), του [B. 17 (16), 8], 6, (so Sept. for 
yyw, Jehovah's help, fr. yw. and 7°), Zsaiah (Vulg. 
Tsaias, in the Fathers also Esaias), a celebrated Hebrew 
prophet, who prophesied in the reigns of Uzziah, Jo- 
tham, Ahaz, and Hezekiah: Mt. iii. 3; iv. 14; viii. 17; 
xii. 17; xiii. 14; (xiii. 35 acc. to the reading of cod. 
Sin. and other authorities, rightly approved of by Bleek 
[Hort (as below), al.], and received into the text by Tdf. 
{noted in mrg. by WH, see their App. ad loc.; per con- 
tra cf. Meyer or Ellicott (i. e. Plumpire in N. T. Com.) ad 
loc.]); xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. iii. 4; iv. 17; Jn. i. 23; 
xii. 38 sq. 41; Acts xxviii. 25; Ro. ix. 27,29; x. 16, 20; 
xv. 12; i. q. the book of the prophecies of Isaiah, Acts 
viii. 28, 30; ἐν (τῷ) Ἡσαΐᾳ, Mk. i. 2G Ltxt. T Tr WH.* 

Ἠσαῦ [‘Ho. Ro. ix. 13 R* Tr; Heb. xii. 16 R*; Heb. 
xi. 20 Re], ὁ, (wy 1. 6. hairy [Gen. xxv. 25; Joseph. 
antt. 1, 18, 1]), indecl., Esau, the firstborn son of Isaac: 
Ro. ix. 13; Heb. xi. 20; xii. 16.* 

ἡσσάομαι, see ἡττάω and 5. v. 3, g, ς- 

[ἥσσων, see ἥττων. | 

ἡσυχάζω; 1 aor. ἡσύχασα; (ἥσυχος [i. q. ἡσύχιος]) ; 
as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, to keep quiet,i.e. 8. 
to rest, to cease from labor: Lk. xxiii. 56. b. to lead 
α quiet life, said of those who are not running hither 
and thither, but stay at home and mind their business: 
ΕΝ πε ave Ε1- c. to be silent, i. e. to say nothing, hold 
one’s peace: Lk. xiv. 4 (3); Acts xi. 18; xxi. 14, (Job 
χχχῖϊ. 7; ἡσύχασαν καὶ οὐχ εὕροσαν λόγον, Neh. v. 8).* 

[Syy. ἡσυχάζειν, σιγᾶν, σιωπᾶν: ἧσ. describes ἃ quiet 
condition in the general, inclusive of silence; ovy. de- 
scribes a mental condition and its manifestation, especially 
in speechlessness (silence from fear, grief, awe, etc.) ; σιωπ., 
the more external and physical term, denotes abstinence 
from speech, esp. as antithetic to loquacity. Schmidt i. 
ch. 9; iv. ch. 175.] 

ἡσυχία, -as, ἡ, (fr. the adj. ἡσύχιος, q. v-; the fem. ex- 
presses the general notion [W. 95 (90)], cf. αἰτία, ἀρετή, 


281 


ἦχος 


ἐχθρά, εἰς.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. quietness: descrip- 
tive of the life of one who stays at home doing his own 
work, and does not officiously meddle with the affairs of 
others, 2 Th. iii. 12. 2. silence: Acts xxii. 2; 1 Tim. 
ii. 11 sq.* 

ἡσύχιος, -a, -ov, [(perh. akin to ἧμαι to sit, Lat. sedatus; 
ef. Curtius § 568; Vanicek p. 77)]; fr. Hom. down; 
quiet, tranquil: 1 Pet. iii. 4; Bios, 1 Tim. ii. 2; Joseph. 
antt. 13, 16, 1.* 

ἤτοι. see 7, 4 6. 

ἡττάω: (ἥττων); to make less, inferior, to overcome 
(the Act. only in Polyb., Diod., Joseph. antt. 12, 7, 1 
[other exx. in Veitch 5. v.]); Pass. ἡττάομαι, fr. [Soph. 
and] Hdt. down; pf. ἥττημαι; 1 aor. ἡττήθην (ἡσσώθην, 
2 Co. xii. 18 LT Tr WH; in opp. to which form cf. 
Fritzsche, De conform. N. T. crit. quam Lehm. ed. p. 32 
[yet see Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. ad Πα. cod. Vat. p. xe.; 
WH. App. p. 166; B. 59 (52); Veitch s.v.]); to be made 
inferior; to be overcome, worsted: in war, ὑπό τινος, 
2 Mace. x. 24; univ., τινί [cf. B. 168 (147); W. 219 
(206) ], to be conquered by one, forced to yield to one, 
2 Pet. ii. 19; absol. ib. 20. τὶ ὑπέρ twa, i. q. ἧττον ἔχω 
tt, to hold a thing inferior, set below, [on the ace. (6) ef. 
B. § 131, 10; and on the compar. use of ὑπέρ see ὑπέρ, 
Il. 2 b.], 2 Co. xii. 18." 

ἥττημα (cf. B. 7; WH. App. p. 166], -ros, τό, (ἡττάο- 
μαι); 1. a diminution, decrease: i. 6. defeat, Is. xxxi. 
8; αὐτῶν, brought upon the Jewish people in that so few 
of them had turned to Christ, Ro. xi. 12 [R. V. loss]. 
2. loss, se. as respects salvation, 1 Co. vi. 7 [R. V. txt. 
defect]. Cf. Meyer [but cf. his 6te Aufl.] on each pass. 
(Elsewhere only in 600]. writ.) * 

ἥττων or [so L ΤΊ ΤΥ WH, see Σ, o, s] ἥσσων, -ov, infe- 
rior; neut. adverbially [fr. Hom. down] Jess, 2 Co. xii. 
15; εἰς τὸ ἧσσον, for the worse (that ye may be made 
worse; opp. to eis τὸ κρεῖττον), 1 Co, xi. 17.* 

ἠχέω (-@); (ἦχος. q. v-); [fr. Hesiod down]; to sound: 
1 Co. xiii. 1; used of the roaring of the sea, Lk. xxi. 25 
Ree. [Comp.: e&, κατ-ηχέω.] " 

ἦχος [cf. Lat. echo, vor, Germ. sprechen, ete.; Vaniéek 
Ρ. 858], -ov, ὁ, and (Lk. xxi. 25 GL T Tr WH) τὸ ἦχος. 
τους (οἴ. W. 65 (64); [Β. 23 (20})17: Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 
19 p. 638; Lor ἤχους may come fr. ἠχώ, -ovs, see esp. WH. 
App. Ρ. 158"; Mey. on Lk. as below]) ; 1. a sound, 
noise: Acts ii. 2; Heb. xii. 19; spoken of the roar of 
the sea’s waves, Lk. xxi. 25 GL T Tr WH. 2. rumor, 
report: περί twos, LK. iv. 37.* 


282 


0 


Θαδδαῖος 


Θαδδαῖος, -ου, 6, (IN, perh. large-hearted or coura- 
geous, although it has not been shown that 14 equiv. to 
the Hebr. 1w can mean pectus as well as mamma; [some 
would connect the terms by the fact that the ‘child of 
one’s heart’ may be also described as a ‘bosom-child’; but 
see B.D. s. vy. Jude]), Thaddeus, a surname of the 
apostle Jude; he was also called Lebbeus and was the 
brother of James the less: Mt.x.3 RGLTr WH; Mk. 
iii. 18. [Cf. B. D. 5. v.; Keil on Mt.1.c.; WH. App. 
p- 11. The latter hold the name Λεββαῖος to be due to 
an early attempt to bring Levi (Aeveis) the publican 
(Lk. v. 27) within the Twelve. ]* 

θάλασσα [cf. B. 7], -ns, 7, (akin to ads [better, allied 
to ταράσσω etc., from its tossing; ef. Vanitek, p. 303]; 
Sept. for D>), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distine- 
tion from πέλαγος see the latter word]; a. univ.: 
Mt. xxiii. 15; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xvii. 2,6; xxi. 25; Ro. ix. 
27; 2Co. xi. 26; Heb. xi. 12;,Jas.i.6; Jude 13; Rev. 
Vil. 1-3, ete.; ἐργάζεσθαι τὴν θάλ. (see ἐργάζομαι, 2 a.), 
Rey. xviii. 17; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς Bad. (see πέλαγος, a.), Mt. 
xviii. 6; joined with γῆ and οὐρανός it forms a periph- 
rasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rev. v. 
13; x. 6 [L WHbr.]; xiv. 7, (Hage. ii. 7; Ps. exlv. 
(exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [e. Ap. 2,10,1]); among 
the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass 
is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this 
is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used 
[even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115); Β. § 124, 8b.] 
of the Mediterranean Sea: Acts x. 6,32; xvii.14; of 
the Red Sea (see ἐρυθρός), ἡ ἐρυθρὰ θάλ., Acts vii. 36; 
1 Co. x. 1 sq.; Heb. xi. 29. By a usage foreign to native 
Grk. writ. [ef. Aristot. meteor. 1, 13 p. 351%, 8 ἡ ὑπὸ 
τὸν Καύκασον λίμνη ἣν καλοῦσιν of ἐκεῖ θάλατταν, and 
Hesych. defines λίμνη: ἡ θάλασσα καὶ ὁ ὠκεανός) em- 
ployed like the Hebr. Ὁ" [e. g. Num. xxxiv. 11], by Mt. 
Mk. and Jn. (nowhere by Lk.) of the Lake of Γεννησα- 
per (4. V-): ἡ θάλ. τῆς Ταλιλαίας, Mt. iv. 18; xv. 29; Mk. 
1. 18; vii. 31, (similarly Lake Constance, der Bodensee, is 
called mare Suebicum, the Suabian Sea); τῆς Τιβεριάδος, 
Jn. xxi. 13 τῆς Γαλιλ. τῆς Τιβεριάδος (on which twofold 
gen. ef. W. § 30,3 N. 3; [B.400 (343)]), Jn. vi.1; more 
frequently simply ἡ θάλασσα: Mt. iv. 15,183 viii. 24, 26 
8q- 325 xiii. 1, etc.; Mk. ii. 135; ii. 7; iv. 1, 39; ν. 13, 
ete.; Jn. vi. 16-19, 22, 25; xxi. 7. Cf. Furrer in Schen- 
kel ii. 322 sqq.; [see ΓεννησαρέτἼ. 

θάλπω; 1. prop. to warm, keep warm, (Lat. foveo) : 
Hom. et 5366. 2. like the Lat. foveo, i. 4. to cherish 
with tender love, to foster with tender care: Eph. v. 29; 
1 Th. ii. 7; ([Theocr. 14, 38]; Alciphr. 2,4; Antonin. 
5, 1)." 


θάνατος 


Θάμαρ [Treg. ΘαμάρῚ, ἡ, (79 [i. e. palm-tree]), Ta- 
mar, prop. name of a woman, the daughter-in-law of 
Judah, son of the patriarch Jacob (Gen. xxxviii. 6): Mt. 
rose 

θαμβέω, -ῶ ; Pass., impf. ἐθαμβούμην; 1 aor. ἐθαμβήθην; 
(θάμβος, q. V-) 5 1. to be astonished: Acts ix. 6 Ree. 
(Hom., Soph., Eur.) 2. to astonish, terrify: 28. xxii. 
5; pass. to be amazed: Mk. i. 27; x. 32; foll. by ἐπί ν΄. 
dat. of the thing, Mk. x. 24; to be frightened, 1 Mace. 
vi. 8; Sap. xvii. 3; Plut. Caes. 45; Brut. 20. [Comp.: 
ex-OapBew. | * 

θάμβος [allied with τάφος amazement, fr. a Sanskrit 
root signifying to render immovable; Curtius § 233; 
Vanitek p. 1130], -ous, τό; fr. Hom. down; amazement: 
Lk. iv. 86; v. 9; Acts iii. 10.* 

θανάσιμος, -ov, (θανεῖν, θάνατος), deadly: Mk. xvi. 18. 
({Aeschyl.], Soph., Eur., Plat., sqq.) * 

θανατη-φόρος, -ov, (θάνατος and φέρω), death-bringing, 
deadly: Jas. iii. 8. (Num. xviii. 22; Job xxxiii. 23; 
4 Mace. viii. 17, 25; xv. 26; Aeschyl., Plat., Arist., 
Diod., Xen., Plut., al.) * 

θάνατος, -ov, 6, (θανεῖν); Sept. for ny) and ny, also 
for 727 pestilence [W. 29 note]; (one of the nouns often 
anarthrous, ef. W. § 19, 1s. v.; [B. § 124, 8¢.]; Grimm, 
Com. on Sap. p. 59); death; 1. prop. the death of 
the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent) 
of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is 
ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts ii. 24 [Trmrg. ἅδου] (on 
this see ddiv); Phil. ii. 27,30; Heb. vii. 23; ix. 15 sq.; 
Rev. ix. 6; xviii. 8; opp. to ζωή, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 
22; 2Co.i. 9; Phil. i. 20; with the implied idea of future 
misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. xv. 21; 2 Tim. i. 10; 
Heb. ii. 14 sq.; 1. q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12. 
Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was con- 
ceived of as being very dark, χώρα καὶ σκιὰ θανάτου 
(ayy) is equiv. to the region of thickest darkness, i. e. 
figuratively, a region enveloped in the darkness of igno- 
rance and sin: Mt. iv. 16; Lk. i. 79, (fr. Is. ix. 2); θάνα- 
ros is used of the punishment of Christ, Ro. v. 10; vi. 
8-5; 1 Co. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 10; Col. i. 22; Heb. ii. [9], 
14; σώζειν τινὰ ἐκ θανάτου, to free from the fear of death, 
to enable one to undergo death fearlessly, Heb. v. 7 [but 
al. al.]; ῥύεσθαι ἐκ θανάτου, to deliver from the danger 
of death, 2 Co. i. 10; plur. θάνατοι, deaths (i. 6. mort! 
perils) of various kinds, 2 Co. xi. 23; περίλυπος ews 
θανάτου. even unto death, i. 6. so that Iam almost dying of 
sorrow, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34, (λελύπημαι ἕως θανά- 
του, Jonah iv. 9; λύπη ἕως θανάτου, Sir. xxxvii. 2, cf. 
Jude. xvi. 16); μέχρι θανάτου, so as not to refuse to un- 
dergo even death, Phil. ii. 8; also ἄχρι θανάτου, Rey. ii. 


θάνατος 


10; xii. 11; ἐσφαγμένος εἰς θάνατον, that has received 
a deadly wound, Rev. xiii. 3; πληγὴ θανάτου, a deadly 
wound [death-stroke, cf. W. § 34, 3 b.], Rev. xiii. 3, 12; 
ἰδεῖν θάνατον, to experience death, Lk. ii. 26; Heb. xi. 
5; also γεύεσθαι θανάτου [see γεύω, 2], Mt. xvi. 28; Mk. 
ix. 1; Lk. ix. 27; διώκειν τινὰ ἄχρι θανάτου, even to de- 
struction, Acts xxii. 4; κατακρίνειν twa θανάτῳ, to con- 
demn one to death (ad mortem damnare, Tacit.), Mt. xx. 
18 [here Tdf. εἰς θάν.]1; Mk. x. 33, (see κατακρίνω, a.) ; 
πορεύεσθαι eis Gav. to undergo death, Lk. xxii. 33; mapa- 
διδόναι τινὰ εἰς Pav. that he may be put to death, Mt. 
x. 21; Mk. xiii. 12; pass. to be given over to the peril 
of death, 2 Co. iv. 11; παραδ. εἰς κρίμα θανάτου, Lk. xxiv. 
20; ἀποκτεῖναί twa ἐν θανάτῳ (a Hebraism [ef. B. 184 
(159 sq.)]), Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, [cf. W. 29 note]; αἰτία 
θανάτου (see αἰτία, 2), Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 18; ἄξιόν τι 
θανάτου, some crime worthy of the penalty of death, 
Acts xxiii. 29; xxv. 11, 25; [xxvi. 31]; Lk. xxiii. 15, 22 
[here αἴτιον (4. ν- 2b.) θαν.] ; ἔνοχος θανάτου, worthy of 
punishment by death, Mt. xxvi. 66; Mk. xiv. 64; θανάτῳ 
τελευτάτω, let him surely be put to death, Mt. xv. 4; 
Mk. vii. 10, after Ex. xxi. 17 Sept. (Hebr. n YD); οἵ. 
W. § 44 fin. N. 3; [B. u.s.]; θάν. σταυροῦ, Phil. ii. 8; 
ποίῳ θανάτῳ, by what kind of death, Jn. xii. 33; xviii. 
32; xxi. 19. The inevitable necessity of dying, shared 
alike by all men, takes on in the popular imagination 
the form of a person, a tyrant, subjugating men to 
his power and confining them in his dark dominions: 
Ro. vi. 9; 1 Co. xv. [26], 54, 56; Rev. xxi.4; Hades 
is associated with him as his partner: 1 Co. xv. 55 RG; 
Rey. i. 18 (on which see κλείς); vi. 8; xx. 13, [145], (Ps. 
xvii. (xviii.) 5; exiv. (exvi.) 3; Hos. xiii. 14; Sir. xiv. 
12). 2. metaph. the loss of that life which alone is 
worthy of the name, i. e. the misery of soul arising from 
sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the 
death of the body: 2 Co. iii. 7; Jas. i. 15, (Clem. Rom. 
2 Cor. 1, 6 says of life before conversion to Christ, 6 Bios 
ἡμῶν ὅλος ἄλλο οὐδὲν ἦν εἰ μὴ θάνατος [cf. Philo, praem. 
et poenis § 12, and reff. in 4 below]); opp. to ἡ ζωή, Ro. 
vii. 10, 13; 2 Co. ii. 16; opp. to σωτηρία, 2 Co. vii. 10; 
i. 4. the cause of death, Ro. vii. 13; σώζειν ψυχὴν ἐκ, 
θανάτου, Jas. ν. 20; μεταβεβηκέναι ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου eis τ. 
Conv, In. ν. 24; 1 In. iii. 14; μένειν ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ, 1 In. 
iii. 14; θεωρεῖν θάνατον, Jn. vill. 51; γεύεσθαι θανάτου, 52 
(see 1 above); ἁμαρτία and ἁμαρτάνειν πρὸς θάνατον (see 
ἁμαρτία, 2b.), 1 Jn. v. 16 sq. (in the rabbin. writers 
nid? Num —after Num. xviii. 22, Sept. ἁμαρτία θανατη- 
φόρος --- is a crimen capitale). 3. the miserable state 
of the wicked dead in hell is called —now simply θάνατος, 
Ro. i. 32 (Sap. i. 12 sq.; ii. 24; Tatian or. ad Graec. ec. 
13; the author of the ep. ad Diognet. ο. 10, 7 distin- 
guishes between ὁ δοκῶν ἐνθάδε θάνατος, the death of the 
body, and ὁ ὄντως θάνατος, ὃς φυλάσσεται τοῖς κατακριθη- 
σομένοις εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον) ; Now ὁ δεύτερος θάνατος 
and 6 θάν. ὁ δεύτ. (as opp. to the former death, i. 6. to 
that by which life on earth is ended), Rev. ii. 11; xx. 6, 
14°; xxi. 8, (as in the Targums on Deut. xxxiii. 6; Ps. 
xlviii. (xlix.) 11; Is. xxii. 14; lxvi. 15; [for the Grk. 


283 


θαῦμα 


use of the phrase οἵ. Plut. de facie in orbe lunae 27, 6 
p- 942 £.]; θάνατος αἰώνιος, Barn. ep. 20, 1 and in ecel. 
writ. [6 ἀΐδιος θάνατος, Philo, post. Cain. § 11 fin.; see 
also Wetstein on Rev. ii. 117). 4. In the widest 
sense, death comprises all the miseries arising from sin, 
as well physical death as the loss of a life consecrated to 
God and blessed in him on earth (Philo, alleg. legg. i. § 33 
ὁ ψυχῆς θάνατος ἀρετῆς μὲν φθορά ἐστι, κακίας δὲ ἀνάληψις, 
[de profug. § 21 θάνατος ψυχῆς ὁ μετὰ κακίας ἐστὶ βίος, 
esp. 88 10,11; quod det. pot. insid. §§ 14, 15; de poster. 
Cain. § 21, and de praem. et poen. as in 2 above]), to 
be followed by wretchedness in the lower world (opp. to 
ζωὴ αἰώνιος) : θάνατος seems to be so used in Ro. v. 12; 
vi. 16,21, [23; yet al. refer these last three exx. to 3 
above]; vii. 24; viii. 2,6; death, in this sense, is per- 
sonified in Ro. v. 14,17, 21; vii. 5. Others, in all these 
pass. as well as those cited under 2, understand physical 
death; but see Philippi on Ro. v.12; Messner, Lehre 
der Apostel, p. 210 sqq.* 

θανατόω, -; fut. θανατώσω ; 1 aor. inf. θανατῶσαι. [3 
pers. plur. subjunc. θανατώσωσι, Mt. xxvi. 59 RG]; 
Pass., [pres. θανατοῦμαι); 1 aor. ἐθανατώθην ; (fr. θάνα- 
tos); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for 127, 177, 
ete. 1. prop. to put to death: τινά, Mt. x. 21; xxvi. 
59; xxvii. 1; Mk. xiii. 12; xiv. 55; Lk. xxi. 16; 2 Co. 
vi. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 18; pass., by rhetorical hyperbole, to 
be in the state of one who is being put to death, Ro. 
vill. 36. 2. metaph. a. to make to die i. e. destroy, 
render extinct (something vigorous), Wulg. mortifico [A. 
V. mortify|: τί, Ro. viii. 13. b. Pass. with dat. of the 
thing, by death to be liberated from the bond of anything 
[lit. to be made dead in relation to; cf. W. 210 (197); B. 
178 (155)]: Ro. vii. 4.* 

θάπτω: 1 aor. ἔθαψα; 2 aor. pass. ἐτάφην ; fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. for VAP; to bury, inter, [BB.DD. s. v. Bur- 
ial; cf. Becker, Charicles, sc. ix. Excurs. p. 390 sq.]: 
τινά, Mt. viii. 21 sq. ; xiv. 12; Lk. ix. 59sq.; xvi. 22; Acts 
ii. 29; v.6, 9sq.; 1 Co. xv.4. [Comp.: συν θάπτω.} " 

Θάρα [WH Capa], 6, (MIN a journey, or a halt on a 
journey [al. ‘loiterer’]), indecl. prop. name, Terah, the 
father of Abraham: Lk. iii. 34.* 

θαρρέω (a form current fr. Plato on for the Ionic and 
earlier Attic θαρσέω), -ῶ ; 1 aor. inf. θαρρῆσαι ; [fr. Hom. 
on]; to be of good courage, to be hopeful, confident: 2 Co. 
v. 6,8; Heb. xiii. 6; to be bold: τῇ πεποιθήσει, with the 
confidence, 2 Co. x. 2; εἴς τινα, towards (against) one, 
2 Co. x.1; ἔν τινι, the grouna of my confidence is in one, 
Ι am made of good courage by one, 2 Co. vii.16. [Syn. 
see τολμάω.] * 

θαρσέω, -@; (see Oappéw) ; to be of good courage, be of 
good cheer; in the N. T. only in the impv.: θάρσει, Lk. 
viii. 48 R G; Mt. ix. 2, 22; Mk. x. 49; Acts xxiii. 11, 
(Sept. for ΝΎ ΠΤ ΟΝ, Gen. xxxv. 17, ete.); θαρσεῖτε, Mt. 
xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Jn. xvi. 33, (Sept. for ss ὙΠ ΝΣ, 
Ex. xiv. 13; Joel ii. 22, etc.). [SyN. see roApdo.] * 

θάρσος, -ovs, τό, courage, confidence: Acts xxviii. 15." 

θαῦμα, -ros, τό, (@AOMAI [to wonder at], to gaze at, 
οἵ. Bttm. Gram. ὃ 114 s.v.; Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 196 ; Curtius 


θαυμάζω 


8 808); 1. a wonderful thing. a marvel: 2 Co. xi. 14 
LTTrWH. 2. wonder: θαυμάζειν θαῦμα μέγα (cf. W. 
§ 32, 2; [B. § 131, 5]), to wonder [with great wonder 
i. e.] exceedingly, Rev. xvii. 6. (In both senses in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. Job xvii. 8; xviii. 20.) * 

θαυμάζω ; impf. ἐθαύμαζον ; fut. θαυμάσομαι (Rev. xvii. 
8 RGT Tr, a form far more com. in the best Grk. writ. 
also than θαυμάσω ; cf. Kriiger § 40 s.v.; Kihner ὃ 343 
s.v.; [Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. ἐθαύμασα ; 1 aor. pass. ἐθαυ- 
μάσθην in a mid. sense (Rey. xiii. 3 R* L Trtxt.); also 
1 fut. pass., in the sense of the mid., θαυμασθήσομαι (Re. 
xvii. 8 L WH; but the very few exx. of the mid. use in 
prof. auth. are doubtful; ef. Stephanus, Thesaur. iv. p. 
259 sq.; [yet see Veitch s.v.]); to wonder, wonder at, 
marvel: absol., Mt. viii. 10, 27; ix. 8 Rec., 33; xv. 31; 
xxi. 20; xxii. 22; xxvii. 14; Mk. v. 20; vi. 51 [Rec.; L 
br. Tr mrg. br.]; xv. 5; Lk. i. 21 [see below], 63; vill. 25; 
xi. 14; xxiv. 41; Jn. v. 20; vii. 15; Acts 11. 7; iv. 13; 
xiii. 41; Rev. xvii. 7 sq.; with ace. of the pers. Lk. vii. 
9; with ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. 
WHI reject the vs. (see πρός, I. 1 a. init. and 2b.)]; Jn. v. 
28; Acts vii. 31; θαῦμα μέγα (see θαῦμα, 2), Rev. xvii. 
6; πρόσωπον, to admire, pay regard to, one’s external 
appearance, i. e. to be influenced by partiality, Jude 16 
(Sept. for 039 871, Deut. x. 17; Job xiii. 10; Prov. 
xviii. 5; Is. ix. 14, ete.); foll. by διά τι, Mk. vi. 6; Jn. vii. 
21 where διὰ τοῦτο (omitted by Tdf.) is to be joined to vs. 
21 [so GL Tr mrg.; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loe. ; W. 
$7, 3], (Isoer. p. 52 d.; Ael. v. h. 12, 6; 14, 36); [foll. 
by ἐν w. dat. of object, ace. to the constr. adopted by 
some in Lk. i. 21 ἐθαύμ. ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν αὐτόν, at his tarry- 
ing; οἵ. W. § 33, b.; B. 264 (227); 185 (160 sq.); Sir. 
xi. 19 (21); evang. Thom. 15, 2; but see above]; foll. 
by ἐπί w. dat. of pers. Mk. xii. 17 [RG LTr]; by ἐπί w. 
dat. of the thing, Lk. ii. 33; iv. 22; ix. 43; xx. 26; [Acts 
iii. 12], (Xen., Plat., Thuc., al.; Sept.) ; περί twos, Lk. 
ii. 18; by a pregnant constr. [ef. B. 185 (161) ] ἐθαύμασεν 
ἡ γῆ ὀπίσω τοῦ θηρίου, followed the beast in wonder, Rev. 
xiii. 3 [ef. B. 59 (52)]; foll. by ὅτι. to marvel that, ete., 
Lk. xi. 38 ; Jn. iii. 7; iv. 27; Gal. i.6; by εἰ (see εἰ, I. 4), 
Mk. xv. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 18. Pass. to be wondered at, to be 
had in admiration, (Sir. xxxviii. 3; Sap. viii. 11; 4 Mace. 
xviii. 3), foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the pers. whose lot and 
condition gives matter for wondering at another, 2 Th. 
i. 10; ἐν with dat. of the thing, Is. lxi. 6. [Comp.: ἐκ- 
θαυμάζω. " 

θαυμάσιος, -α, -ον, rarely of two terminations, (θαῦμα), 
[fr. Hes., Hom. (h. Mere. 443) down], wonderful, mar- 
vellous; neut. plur. θαυμάσια (Sept. often for nix29), 
also for 875), wonderful deeds, wonders: Mt. xxi. 15. 
(Cf. Trench § xci.; better, Schmidt ch. 168, 6.] * 

θαυμαστός, -ή. -όν. (θαυμάζω). in Grk. writ. fr. [Hom. 
(h. Cer. ete.) ], Hdt., Pind. down; [interchanged in Grk. 
writ. with θαυμάσιος. cf. Lob. Path. Elem. ii. 341]; won- 
derful, marvellous ; i.e. a. worthy of pious admiration. 
admirable, excellent: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 
2; for WS, Ps. viii. 2; xcli. (xciii.) 4, (5)). Ὁ. passing 
human comprehension: Mt. xxi. 42 and Mk. xii. 11, (fr. 


( 284 


θεῖον 


Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 22 sq., where for x9), as Job xlii. 3; 
Mic. vii. 15, etc.). ο. causing amazement Joined with 
terror: Rey. xv. 1, 3, (so for 813, Ex. xv. 11, ete.). ἃἅ. 
marvellous i. 6. extraordinary, striking, surprising: 2 Co. 
xi. 14 RG (see θαῦμα, 1); Jn. ix. 80." 

Ged, -as, ἡ, (fem. of θεός), [fr. Hom. down], a goddess: 
Acts xix. 27, and Ree. also in 35, 37." 

θεάομαι, -ὥμαι : 1 aor. ἐθεασάμην ; pf. τεθέαμαι; 1 aor. 
pass. ἐθεάθην in pass. sense (Mt. νἱ. 1; xxiii. δ; Mk 
xvi. 11; Thue. 3, 38, 3; ef. Kriiger § 40 5. v.; [but 
Kriiger himself now reads δρασθέν in Thue. 1. c¢.; see 
Veitch s. v.; W. § 38,7 ¢.; B. 52 (46)]); depon. verb; 
(fr. θέα, PAOMAT, with which θαῦμα is connected, q. v-) ; 
to behold, look upon, view attentively, contemplate, (in Grk. 
writ. often used of public shows; οἵ. θέα, θέαμα, θέα- 
tpov, θεατρίζω, ete. [see below ]) : ri, Mt. xi. 7; Lk. vii. 24; 
Jn. iv. 35; xi. 45; of august things and persons that are 
looked on with admiration: τί, Jn. i. 14, 832; 1 Jn. i. 1; 
Acts xxii. 9, (2 Mace. iii. 36); τινά, with a ptep., Mk. 
xvi. 14; Acts i. 11; foll. by ὅτι, 1 Jn. iv. 14; θεαθῆναι ὑπό 
τινος, Mk. xvi. 11; πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς, in order to 
make a show to them, Mt. vi. 1; xxiii. 5; to view, take a 
view of: τί, Lk. xxiii. 55; twa, Mt. xxii.11; in the sense 
of visiting, meeting with a person, Ro. xv. 24 (2 Chr. 
xxii. 6; Joseph. antt. 16, 1,2); to learn by looking: foll. 
by ὅτι, Acts viii. 18 Ree.; to see with the eyes, 1 Jn. iv. 
12; i.q. (Lat. conspicio) to perceive: τινά, Jn. viii. 10 
RG; Acts xxi. 27; foll. by acc. with ptep., Lk. v. 27 
{not Lmrg.]; Jn. i. 38; foll. by ὅτι, Jn. vi. δ." 

Cf. O. F. Fritzsche, in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 295 sqq. 
[Ace. to Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 11, θεᾶσθαι in its earlier classic 
use denotes often a wondering regard, (cf. even in Strabo 
14, 5, τὰ ἑπτὰ θεάματα i.q. θαύματα). This specific shade of 
meaning, however, gradually faded out, and left the more 
general signification of such a looking as seeks merely the 
satisfaction of the sense of sight. Cf. θεωρέω.] 


θεατρίζω : (θέατρον. q.v.) ; prop. to bring upon the siage ; 
hence to set forth as a spectacle, expose to contempt; Pass., 
pres. ptep. θεατριζόμενος [A. V. being made a gazing- 
stock], Heb. x. 33. (Several times also in eccl. and , 
Byzant. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex.s. v.]; but in the same sense 
ἐκθεατρίζω in Polyb. 3, 91,10; al.; [ef. W. 25 (24) note; 
also Tdf. ed. 7 Proleg. p. lix. sq.].) * 

θέατρον, -ov, τό, (θεάυμαι) ; 1. a theatre, a place in 
which games and dramatic spectacles are exhibited, and 
public assemblies held (for the Greeks used the theatre 
also as a forum): Acts xix. 29, 31. 2. i. q. θέα and 
θέαμα, a public show (Aeschin. dial. socr. 3, 20; Achill. 
Tat. 1, 16 p. 55), and hence, metaph., a man who is ex- 
hibited to be gazed at and made sport of: 1 Co. iv. 9 [A. 
V. a spectacle ).* 

θεῖον, -ov, τό, (apparently the neut. of the adj. θεῖος i. q- 
divine incense, because burning brimstone was regarded 
as having power to purify, and to ward off contagion 
[but Curtius § 320 allies it w. θύω : ef. Lat. fumus, 
Eng. dust]), brimstone : Lk. xvii. 29; Rev. ix. 17 sq.; xiv. 
10; xix. 20; [xx.10]; xxi. 8. (Gen. xix. 24; Ps. x. (xi.) 
6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22; Hom. Il. 16, 228; Od. 22, 481, 


θεῖος 


493; (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 99 ¢.; Ael. v. h. 13, 15[16]; 
Hdian. 8, 4, 26 [9 ed. Bekk.].) * 

θεῖος, -εία, -etov, (θεός), [fr. Hom. down], divine: ἡ θεία 
δύναμις, 2 Pet. i. 3; φύσις (Diod. 5, 31), ibid. 4; neut. τὸ 
θεῖον, divinity, deity (Lat. numen divinum), not only 
used by the Greeks to denote the divine nature, power, 
providence, in the general, without reference to any 
individual deity (as Hdt. 3,108; Thue. 5, 70; Xen. Cyr. 
4, 2,15; Hell. 7, 5,13; mem. 1, 4, 18; Plat. Phaedr. p. 
242 ο.; Polyb. 32, 25,7; Diod. 1, 6; 13, 3; 12; 16, 60; 
Leian. de sacrif. 1; pro imagg. 13, 17. 28), but also by 
Philo (as in mundi opif. § 61; de agric. 17; leg. ad Gai. 
1), and by Josephus (antt. 1,3,4; 11,1; 2,12, 4; 5, 2, 
7; 11, 5, 1; 12, 6,3; 7,3; 13,8, 2; 10,7; 14,9,5; 17, 
2,4; 20,11, 2; Ὁ. 1. 3,8, 3; 4, 3, 10), of the one, true 
God; hence most appositely employed by Paul, out of 
regard for Gentile usage, in Acts xvii. 29.* 

θειότης, -ητος. 7, divinity, divine nature: Ro. i. 20. 
(Sap. xviii. 9; Philo in opif. § 61 fin.; Plut. symp. 665 a.; 
Leian. calumn. c. 17.) [Syn. see θεότης." 

θειώδης, -es, (fr. θεῖον brimstone [q. v.]), of brimstone, 
sulphurous: Rey. ix. 17; a later Grk. word; cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 228; [Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

θέλημα, -τος, τό, (θέλω), a word purely bibl. and eccl. 
[yet found in Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 815%, 21]; 
Sept. for yan and ΠΣ; will, i.e. a. what one wishes 
or has determined shall be done, [i. 6. objectively, thing 
willed]: Lk. xii.47; Jn. v.30; 1 Co. vii. 37; 1 ΤῊ. ν. 
18; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb. x. 10; Rev.iv.11; θέλημα τοῦ 
θεοῦ is used —of the purpose of God to bless mankind 
through Christ, Acts xxii. 14; Eph.i.9; Col. i. 9; of what 
God wishes to be done by us, Ro. xii. 2; Col. iv. 12 [W. 
111 (105) ]; 1 Pet. iv. 2; and simply τὸ θέλημα, Ro. ii. 18 
[W. 594 (553)] (Sir. xliii. 16 (17) [but here the better 
txt. now adds αὐτοῦ, see Fritzsche; in patrist. Grk., how- 
ever, θέλημα is so used even without the art.; cf. Ignat. 
ad Rom. 1,1: ad Eph. 20, 1, ete.]); τοῦ κυρίου, Eph. v. 
17; plur. commands, precepts: [Mk. iii. 35 WH. mrg.]; 
Acts xiii. 22, (Ps. cii. (ciii.) 7; 2 Mace. i. 3); ἐστὶ τὸ θέ- 
λημά twos, foll. by wa, Jn. vi. 39 sq.; 1 Co. xvi. 12, ef. 
Mt. xviii. 14; foll. by inf., 1 Pet. 11. 15; by acc. with inf,, 
1 Th. iv.3. [Cf B. 237 (204); 240 (207); W.§ 44, 8.] 
b. i. 4: τὸ θέλειν. [i. 6. the abstract act of willing, the 
subjective] will, choice: 1 Pet. iii. 17 [ef. W. 604 (562) ]; 
2 Pet. i. 21; ποιεῖν τ. θέλ. τινος (esp. of God), Mt. vii. 
21; xii. 50; xxi. 31; Mk. iii. 35 [here WH mre. the plur., 
see above]; Jn. iv. 34: vi. 38; vii. 17; ix. 31; Eph. vi. 
6; Heb. x. 7, 9,36; xiii. 21; 1 Jn.ii.17; τὸ θέλ. (1, Τ' Tr 
WH βούλημα) τινος κατεργάζεσθαι, 1 Pet. iv.3; γίνεται τὸ 
θέλ. τινος. Mt. vi. 10; xxvi. 42; Lk. χὶ. 21, ; xxii. 42; 
Acts xxi. 14; ἡ βουλὴ τοῦ θελήματος, Eph. i. 11; ἡ εὐδο- 
xia τοῦ OeX. ib. 5; ἐν τῷ θελ. τοῦ θεοῦ, if God will, Ro. i. 
10; διὰ θελήματος θεοῦ, Ro. xv. 32; 1 Co.i.1; 2Co.i.1; 
viii. 5; Eph. i.1; Col. i. 1; 2 Tim.i.1; κατὰ τὸ θέλ. 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. i. 4; [i Pet. iv. 19]; 1Jn.v. 14. iq. 
pleasure: Lk. xxiii. 25; 1. q. inclination, desire: σαρκός, 
ἀνδρός, Jn. i. 13; plur. Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. see θέλω, 
fin. ]* 


285 


θέλω 


θέλησις, -εως, 7, (θέλω), i. 4. τὸ θέλειν, α willing, will: 
Heb. 11. 4. (Ezek. xviii. 23; 2 Chr. xv. 15; Prov. viii. 35; 
Sap. xvi. 25; [Tob. xii. 18]; 2 Mace. xii. 16; 3 Mace. ii. 
26 ; [plur. in] Melissa epist. ad Char. p. 62 Orell.; ace. to 
Pollux []. 5 c. 47] a vulgarism (ἰδιωτικόν) ; [ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 353].) * 

θέλω (only in this form in the N. T.; in Grk. auth. also 
ἐθέλω [Veitch 5. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7; B. 57 (49)]); 
impf. ἤθελον ; [fut. 3 pers. sing. θελήσει, Rev. xi. 5 WII 
mrg.]; 1 aor. ἠθέλησα; (derived apparently fr. dey 
with a fuller aspiration, so that it means prop. to seize 
with the mind; but Curtius p. 726, ed. 5, regards its 
root as uncertain [he inclines, however, to the view of 
Pott, Fick, Vanicek and others, which connects it with 
a root meaning to hold to]); Sept. for 728 and yan; To 
WILL, (have in mind,) intend; i. e. 1. to be resolved 
or determined, to purpose: absol., ὁ θέλων, Ro. ix. 16; 
τοῦ θεοῦ θέλοντος if God will, Acts xviii. 21; ἐὰν ὁ κύριος 
θελήσῃ (in Attic ἐὰν θεὸς θέλῃ, ἣν οἱ θεοὶ θέλωσιν [ ef. Lob. 
u.s.]), 1 Co. iv. 19; Jas. ἵν. 15; καθὼς ἠθέλησε, 1 Co. xii. 
18; xv. 38; τί, Ro. vii. 15 sq. 19 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 36; Gal. 
v.17; with the aorist inf., Mt. xx. 14; xxvi.15; Jn. vi. 
21 (where the meaning is, they were willing to receive 
him into the ship, but that was unnecessary, because 
unexpectedly the ship was nearing the land; ef. Liicke, 
B-Crusius, Ewald, [Godet], al. ad loc.; W. § 54,4; [B. 
375 (321)]); In. vii. 44; Acts xxv.9; Col. 1. 27; 1 Th. 
ii. 18; Rev. xi. 5, ete.; with the present inf., Lk. x. 29 
RG; Jn. vi. 67; vii. 17; viii. 44; Acts xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; 
Ro. vii. 21; Gal.iv. 9 [here T Tr txt. WH txt. 1 aor. inf.]; 
with an inf. suggested by the context, Jn. v. 21 (ots θέλει, 
sc. ζωοποιῆσαι); Mt. viii. 2; Mk. iii. 13; vi. 22; Ro. ix. 
18; Rey. xi. 6, etc. οὐ θέλω to be unwilling: with the 
aorist inf., Mt. ii. 18; xv. 32; xxii. 3; Mk. vi. 26; Lk. 
xv. 28; Jn. v.40; Acts vii. 39; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Rev. ii. 21 
[ποὺ Ree.], etc.; with the present inf., Jn. vii.1; Acts 
xiv. 13; xvii. 18; 2 Th. iii. 10, ete.; with the inf. om. 
and to be gathered fr. the context, Mt. xviii. 30; xxi. 
29; Lk. xviii. 4, ete.; θέλω and ov θέλω foll. by the ace. 
with inf., Lk. i. 62; 1 Co. x. 20; on the Pauline phrase οὐ 
θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν, see ἀγνοέω, a.; corresponding to θέλω 
ὑμᾶς εἰδέναι, 1 Co. xi. 3; Col. ii. 1. θέλειν, used of a 
purpose or resolution, is contrasted with the carry- 
ing out of the purpose into act: opp. to ποιεῖν, πράσ- 
σειν, Ro. vii. 15, 19; 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. (on which latter 
pass. cf. De Wette and Meyer; W. § 61, 7b.); to ἐνερ- 
yetv, Phil. ii. 13, cf. Mk. vi. 19; Jn. vii. 44. One is said 
also θέλειν that which he is on the point of doing: Mk. 
vi. 48; Jn.i. 43 (44); and it is used thus also of things 
that tend or point to some conclusion [ef. W. § 42, 1 b.; 
B. 254 (219)]: Acts ii. 12; xvii. 20. 
τοῦτο θέλοντας this (viz. what follows, ὅτε etc.) escapes 
them of their own will, i. e. they are purposely, wilfully, 
ignorant, 2 Pet. iii. 5, where others interpret as follows: 
this (viz. what has been said previously) desiring (i. e. 
holding as their opinion [for exx. of this sense see Soph. 
Lex. s. v. 4]), they are ignorant etc.; but cf. De Wette 
ad loc. and W. § 54, 4 note; [B. § 150, 8 Rem.]. ras 


λανθάνει αὐτοὺς 


ἐπιθυμίας τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν θέλετε ποιεῖν it is your purpose 
to fulfil the lusts of your father, i. e. ye are actuated by 
him of your own free knowledge and choice, Jn. viii. 44 
[W. u.s.; B. 375 (321)]. 2. i. q. to desire, to wish: 
τί, Mt. xx. 21; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.]; 
Jn. xv. 7; 1 Co. iv. 21; 2 Co. xi.12; foll. by the aorist 
inf., Mt. v. 40; xii. 38; xvi. 25; xix. 17; Mk. x. 43 sq.; 
Lk. viii. 20; xxiii.8; Jn. v. 6,35 (ye were desirous of 
rejoicing) ; xii. 21; Gal. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 20; 1 Pet. iii. 10; 
foll. by the present inf., Jn. ix. 27; Gal. iv. 20 (ἤθελον I 
could wish, on which impf. see εὔχομαι, 2); the inf. is 
wanting and to be supplied fr. the neighboring verb, 
Mt. xvii. 12; xxvii. 15; Mk. ix. 13; Jn. xxi. 18; foll. by 
the ace. and inf., Mk. vii. 24; Lk. i. 62; Jn. xxi. 22 sq. ; 
Ro. xvi. 19; 1 Co. vii. 7,32; xiv.5; Gal. vi. 13; οὐ θέλω 
to be unwilling, (desire not): foll. by the aor. inf., Mt. 
xxiii. 4; Lk. xix. 14,27; 1 Co. x. 20; foll. by iva, Mt. vii. 
12; Mk. vi. 25; ix. 30; x.35; Lk.vi.31; Jn. xvii. 24; 
ef. W. § 44,8 b.; [B. § 139, 46]; foll. by the delib. subj. 
(aor.): θέλεις συλλέξωμεν αὐτά (cf. the Germ. willst du, 
sollen wir zusammenlesen? [Goodwin ὃ 88]), Mt. xiii. 28 ; 
add, Mt. xx. 32 [where L br. adds ἵνα]; xxvi.17; xxvii. 
17, 21; Mk. x. 51; xiv. 12; xv. 9,12 [Tr br. 6éA.]; Lk. ix. 
54; xviii. 41; xxii. 9, (cf. W. § 41 a.4b.; B. § 139, 2); 
foll. by εἰ, Lk. xii. 49 (see εἰ, I. 4); foll. by ἢ, to prefer, 
1 Co. xiv. 19 (see 7, 8 d.). 3. i. q. to love; foll. by an 
inf., to like to do a thing, be fond of doing: Mk. xii. 38; 
Lk. xx. 46; cf. W. § 54, 4; [B. § 150, 81. 4. in imi- 
tation of the Hebr. ὙΠ, to take delight, have pleasure 
[opp. by B. § 150, 8 Rem.; cf. W. § 33, a.; but see exx. 
below]: ἔν τινι, in a thing, Col. ii. 18 (ἐν καλῷ, to delight 
in goodness, Test. xii. Patr. p. 688 [test. Ash. 1; (cf. εἰς 
ζωήν, p. 635, test. Zeb. 3); Ps. exi. (exii.) 1; exlvi. 
(exlvii.) 10]; ἔν τινε, dat. of the pers., 1S. xviii. 22; 2 5. 
xv. 26; ΠῚ K.x.9]; 2 Chr. ix.8; for 3 m¥n, 1 Chr. 
Xxvill. 4). τινά, to love one: Mt. xxvii. 43 (Ps. xxi. 
(xxii.) 9; [xvii (xviii.) 20; xl. (xli.) 12]; Ezek. xviii. 
32, ef. 23; Tob. xiii. 6; opp. to μισεῖν, Ignat. ad Rom. 
8, 3; θεληθῆναι is used of those who find favor, ibid. 8, 
1). τί, Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, (fr. Hos. vi. 6) ; Heb. x. 5, 
8, (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7). As respects the distinction 
between βούλομαι and θέλω, the former seems to desig- 
nate the will which follows deliberation, the latter 
the will which proceeds from inclination. This ap- 
pears not only from Mt. i. 19, but also from the fact that 
the Sept. express the idea of pleasure, delight, by the 
verb θέλειν (see just above). The reverse of this dis- 
tinction is laid down by Bitm. Lexil. i. p. 26 [Eng. trans. 
p- 194]; Delitzsch on Heb. vi. 17. Ace. to Tittmann 
(Syn. i. p. 124) θέλειν denotes mere volition, βούλεσθαι 
inclination; [cf. Whiston on Dem. 9,53; 124, 13]. 
[Philip Buttmann’s statement of the distinction between 
the two words is quoted with approval by Schmidt (Syn. iii. 
ch. 146), who adduces in confirmation (besides many exx.) 
the assumed relationship between β. and βελπίς, éamis; the 
use of @. in the sense of ‘resolve’ in such passages as Thue. 
5,9; of θέλων i. q. ἡδέως in the poets; of 8. as parallel to 
ἐπιθυμεῖν in Dem. 29, 45, etc.; and pass. in which the two 
words occur together and £. is apparently equiv. to ‘ wish’ 


286 


θεμέλιος 


while @. stands for ‘ will,’ as Xen. an. 4, 4,5; Eur. Alc. 281, 
etc.,ete. At the same time it must be confessed that scholars 
are far from harmonious on the subject. Many agree with 
Prof. Grimm that @. gives prominence to the emotive ele- 
ment, 8. to the rational and volitive; that 6. signifies the 
choice, while 8. marks the choice as deliberate and intelligent ; 
yet they acknowledge that the words are sometimes used 
indiscriminately, and esp. that @. as the less sharply defined 
term is put where β. would be proper; see E/lendt, Lex. 
Soph.; Pape, Handworterb. ; Seiler, Worterb. ἃ. Hom.,s. v. 
βούλομαι; Suhle und Schneidewin, Handworterb.; Crosby, 
Lex. to Xen. an., 5. v. ἐθέλω; (Arnold’s) Pillon, Grk. Syn. 
§ 129; Webster, Synt. and Syn. of the Grk. Test. p. 197; 
Wilke, Clavis N. T., ed. 2, ii. 603; Schleusner, N. T. Lex. 
s. v. BovaA.; Munthe, Observy. phil. in N. T. ex Diod. Sic. ete. 
p- 3; Valckenaer, Scholia ete. ii. 23; Westermann on Dem. 
20, 111; the commentators generally on Mt. as above; Bp. 
Lghtft. on Philem. 13,14; Riddle in Schaff’s Lange on Eph. 
p- 42; this seems to be roughly intended by Ammonius 
also: βούλεσθαι μὲν ἐπὶ μόνου λεκτέον τοῦ λογικοῦ" τὸ δὲ 
θέλειν καὶ ἐπὶ ἀλόγου ζώου ; (and Eustath. on Miad 1, 112, p. 
61, 2, says οὐχ᾽ ἁπλῶς θέλω, ἀλλὰ βούλομαι, ὅπερ ἐπίτασις τοῦ 
θέλειν ἐστίν). On the other hand, L. and S. (5. ν. ἐθέλω) ; 
Passow ed. 5; Rost, Worterb. ed. 4" Schenk, Schulworterb.; 
Donaldson, Crat. ὃ 463 sq.; Wahl, Clay. Apocr., s. v. Bova.; 
Cremer 8. Vy. βούλομαι and θέλω; esp. Stallb. on Plato’s de 
repub. 4, 13 p. 437 b., (cf. too Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 19, 
19); Franke on Dem. 1, 1, substantially reverse the distinc- 
tion, as does Ellicott on 1 Tim. y. 14; Wordsworth on 1 Th. 
ii. 18. Although the latter opinion may seem to be favored 
by that view of the derivation of the words which allies Bova. 
with voluptas (Curtius § 659, ef. p. 726), and makes θέλ. sig- 
nify ‘to hold to something,’ ‘form a fixed resolve’ (see 
above, ad init.), yet the predominant usage of the N. T. 
will be evident to one who looks out the pass. referred to 
above (Fritzsche’s explanation of Mt.i.19 is hardly natu- 
ral) ; to which may be added such as Mt. ii. 18; ix. 13; xii. 
38; xv. 28; xvii. 4 (xx. 21, 32); xxvi. 15, 39 (cf. Lk. xxii. 
42); Mk. vi. 19; vii. 24; ix.30; χ. 85; xii. 38; xv. 9 (cf. Jn. 
xviii. 39), 15 (where R. V. wishing is questionable; cf. Lk. 
xxiii. 20); Lk. x. 24; xv. 28; xvi. 26; Jn. v.6; vi.11; xii. 
21; Acts x. 10; xviii. 15; Ro. vii. 19 (cf. 15, its opp. to μισῶ, 
and indeed the use of θέλω throughout this chapter) ; 1 Co. vii. 
36,39; xiv.35; Eph.i.11; 2 Th. iii. 10, ete. Such passages 
as 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 9 will be ranged now on one side, 
now on the other; cf. 1 Co. xii. 11,18. θέλω occurs in the 
N. T about five times as often as βούλομαι (on the relative 
use of the words in classic writers see Tycho Mommsen in 
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 415 sq.). The usage of the Sept. 
(beyond the particular specified by Prof. Grimm) seems to 
afford little light; see 6. g. Gen. xxiv. 5,8; Deut. xxv. 7; 
Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7, 9, ete. In modern Greek θέλω seems 
to have nearly driven βούλομαι out of use; on θέλω as an 
auxiliary cf. /ebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Handbook, App. 
§§ 60, 64. For exx. of the associated use of the words in 
classic Grk., see Steph. Thesaur. s. y. βούλομαι p. 366 d.; Bp. 
Lghtft., Cremer, and esp. Schmidt, as above ] 

θεμέλιος, -ον, (θέμα [i. 6. thing laid down]), laid down 
as a foundation, belonging to a foundation, (Diod. 5, 66; 
θεμέλιοι λίθοι, Arstph. av. 1137); generally as a subst., 
ὁ θεμέλιος [se. λίθος] (1 Co. iii. 11 sq.; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Rev. 
xxi. 19), and τὸ θεμέλιον (rarely so in Grk. writ., as [Ar 
istot. phys. auscult. 2,9 p. 200", 41: Paus. 8, 32,1; [al.]), 
the foundation (of a building, wall, city): prop., Lk. vi. 


θεμελιόω 


49; τιθέναι θεμέλιον, Lk. vi. 48; xiv. 29; plur. οἱ θεμέλιοι 
(chiefly so in Grk. writ.), Heb. xi. 10; Rey. xxi. 14, 19; 
neut. ro Oey. Acts xvi. 26 (and often in the Sept.) ; 
metaph. the foundations, beginnings, first principles, of 
an institution or system of truth: 1 Co. iii. 10, 12; the 
rudiments, first principles, of Christian life and knowl- 
edge, Heb. vi. 1 (μετανοίας gen. of apposition [W. 531 
(494)]); a course of instruction begun by a teacher, 
Ro. xv. 20; Christ is called θεμέλ. i. 6. faith in him, 
which is like a foundation laid in the soul on which is 
built up the fuller and richer knowledge of saving truth, 
1 Co. iii. 11; τῶν ἀποστόλων (gen. of appos., on account 
of what follows: ὄντος . . . Χριστοῦ, [al. say gen. of origin, 
see ἐποικοδομέω; cf. W. § 30,1; Meyer or Ellicott ad 
loc.]), of the apostles as preachers of salvation, upon 
which foundation the Christian church has been built, 
Fph. ii. 20; a solid and stable spiritual possession, on 
which resting as on a foundation they may strive to lay 
hold on eternal life, 1 Tim. vi. 19; the church is appar- 
ently called θεμ. as the foundation of the ‘city of God,’ 
2 Tim. ii. 19, cf. 20 and 1 Tim. iii. 15. (Sept. several 
times also for })278, a palace, Is. xxv. 2; Jer. vi. 5; 
Amos i. 4, ete.) * 

Ocpediow: fut. θεμελιώσω ; 1 aor. ἐθεμελίωσα ; Pass., pf. 
ptep. τεθεμελιωμένος ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. τεθεμελίωτο 
(Mt. vii. 25; Lk. vi. 48 RG; without augm. οἵ. W. § 12, 
9; [B. 33 (29); Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]); Sept. for 10°; [fr. 
Xen. down]; fo lay the foundation, to found: prop., τὴν 
γῆν, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii-) 26; Prov. iii. 19; Is. xlviii. 13, 
al.); τὶ ἐπί τι, Mt. vii. 25; Lk. vi. 48. metaph. (Diod. 
11, 68; 15,1) to make stable, establish, [A. V. ground]: 
of the soul, [1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing.] 1 Pet. v. 10 [Ree.; 
but T, Tr mrg. in br., the fut.]; pass., Eph. iii. 17 (18); 
Col. i. 25:5 

θεο-δίδακτος, -ov, (θεός and διδακτός), taught of God: 1 
Th. iv. 9. ([Barn. ep. 21, 6 (cf. Harnack’s note) ]; 
eccles. writ.)* 

θεο-λόγος, -ov, 6, (θεός and λέγω), in Grk. writ. [fr. Aris- 
tot. on] one who speaks (treats) of the gods and divine 
things, versed in sacred science ; (Grossmann, Quaestiones 
Philoneae,i. p. 8, shows that the word is used also by Philo, 
esp. of Moses [cf. de praem. et poen. §9]). This title is 
given to John in the inscription of the Apocalypse, ace. 
to the Ree. text, apparently as the publisher and interpre- 
ter of divine oracles, just as Lucian styles the same per- 
son θεολόγος in Alex. 19 that he calls προφήτης in ὁ. 22. 
The common opinion is that John was called θεολόγος in 
the same sense in which the term was used of Gregory 
of Nazianzus, viz. because he taught the θεότης of the 
λόγος. But then the wonder is, why the copyists did 
not prefer to apply the epithet to him in the title of the 
Gospel.* 

θεομαχέω, -ῶ; (θεομάχος) ; fo fight against God: Acts 
xxiii. 9 Ree. (Eur., Xen., Diod., al.; 2 Mace. vii. 19.) * 

θεομάχος, -ov, 6, (θεός and μάχομαι), fighting against 
God, resisting God: Acts ν. 39. (Symm.,Job xxvi. 5; 
Prov. ix. 18; xxi. 16; Heracl. Pont. alleg. Homer. 1; 
Lcian. Jup. tr. 45.) * 


287 


θεὸς 


θεόπνευστος, -ον, (θεός and πνέω), inspired by God: 
γραφή, i. 6. the contents of Scripture, 2 Tim. iii. 16 [see 
πᾶς, 1.1 ς.7; σοφίη, [pseudo-] Phocyl. 121 ; ὄνειροι, Plut. 
de plac. phil. 5, 2, 3 p. 904 f.; [Orac. Sibyll. 5, 406 (ef. 
308); Nonn. paraphr. ev. Ioan. 1, 99]. (ἔμπνευστος also 
is used passively, but ἄπνευστος, εὔπνευστος. πυρίπνευστος, 
[δυσδιάπνευστος), actively, [and δυσανάπνευστος appar. 
either act. or pass.; cf. W. 96 (92) note].)* 

θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 
46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 
S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 
Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. 
h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. 
§8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed 
derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after 
Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root mean- 
ing to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per con- 
tra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. 
fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; 
a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities 
or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; 
once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ 
οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν 
θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the Gentiles: Acts 
xiv. 11; xix. 26; λεγόμενοι θεοί, 1 Co. viii. 58; of φύσει μὴ 
ὄντες θεοί, Gal.iv. 8; τοῦ θεοῦ Ῥεφάν [q. v.], Acts vii. 43 ; 
of angels: εἰσὶ θεοὶ πολλοί, 1 Co. viii. δὴ (on which cf. 
Philo de somn. i. § 39 6 μὲν ἀληθείᾳ θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν, of δ᾽ ἐν 
καταχρήσει λεγόμενοι πλείους). [On the use of the sing. 
θεός (and Lat. deus) as a generic term by (later) heathen 
writ., see Norton, Genuinen. of the Gosp. 2d ed. iii. addit. 
note D; ef. Dr. Ezra Abbot in Chris. Exam. for Nov. 
1848, p. 389 sqq-; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, ch. i. 
Sii.; see Bib. Sacr. for July 1856, p.666 sq., and for addit. 
exx. Nagelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 129; also his Nachho- 
merische Theol. p. 139 sq.; Stephanus, Thes. s. v.; and 
reff. (by Prof. Abbot) in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and 
Exeg. i. p. 120 note.] 2. Whether Christ is called 
God must be determined from Jn. i.1; xx. 28; 1Jn.v. 
20; Ro. ix. 5; Tit.ii.13; Heb. i. 8 sq., ete. ; the matter 
is still in dispute among theologians; ef. Grimm, Insti- 
tutio theologiae dogmaticae, ed. 2, p. 228 sqq- [and the 
discussion (on Ro. ix. 5) by Professors Dwight and Ab- 
bot in Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. ete. τι. s., esp. pp. 42 sqq. 
113 sqq-]. 3. spoken of the only and true Gop: with 
the article, Mt. iii. 9; Mk. xiii. 19; Lk. ii. 13; Acts 
ii. 11, and very often; with prepositions: ἐκ τοῦ θ. Jn. 
viii. 42, 47 and often in John’s writ.; ὑπὸ τοῦ θ. Lk. i. 
26 [Τ Tr WH ἀπό]; Acts xxvi. 6; παρὰ τοῦ 6. Jn. viii. 
40; ix. 16 [L T Tr WH here om. art.]; παρὰ τῷ 6. Ro. 
ii. 13 [Tr txt. om. and L WH Tr mrg. br. the art.]; ix. 
14; ἐν τῷ 6. Col. iii. 3; ἐπὶ τῷ 6. Lk. i. 47; eis τὸν 6. Acts 
xxiv. 15 [Tdf. πρός] ; ἐπὶ τὸν θ. Acts xv. 19; xxvi. 18, 
20; πρὸς τὸν 6. Jn. i. 2; Acts xxiv. [15 Tdf.], 16, and 
many other exx. without the article: Mt. vi. 24; Lk. 
iii. 2; xx. 38; Ro. viii. 8, 33; 2 Co. i. 21; v.19; vi. 7; 
1 Th. ii. 5, ete.; with prepositions: ἀπὸ θεοῦ, Jn. iii. 2; 
xvi. 30; Ro. xiii. 1 [LT Tr WH ὑπό]: παρὰ θεοῦ, Jn. 3. 6; 


Geos 


ἐκ θεοῦ, Acts v. 39; 2 Co. v. 1; Phil. iii. 9; mapa θεῷ, 2 
Th. i. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 4; κατὰ θεόν, Ro. viii. 27; 2 Co. vii. 
9sq.; ef. W. § 19 5. ν. ὁ θεός τινος (gen. of pers.), the 
(guardian) God of any one, blessing and protecting him: 
Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 26 sq. [29 WH mrg. (see below) ]; 
Lk. xx. 37; Jn. xx. 17; Acts iii. 13; xiii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 
16; Heb. xi. 16; Rey. xxi. 3 [without 6; but GT Tr WH 
txt.om. the phrase]; ὁ θεύς μου, i. q. οὗ εἰμί, ᾧ καὶ λατρεύω 
(Acts xxvii. 23): Ro. i. 8; 1 Co. i. 4 [Tr mrg. br. the 
gen.]; 2 Co. xii. 21; Phil. i. 3; iv. 19; Philem. 4 ; κύριος ὁ 
θεός σου, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτῶν (in imit. of Hebr. PAIS WM, 
wx”, oToN “5, DPT): Mt. iv. 75 xxii. 37; 
Mk. xii. 29 [see above]; Lk. iv. 8,12; x. 27; Acts ii. 
39; ef. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test. p. 169; [and Bp. 
Lehtft. as quoted 5. v. κύριος, 6. a. init.]; ὁ θεὸς x. πατὴρ 
τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ : Ro. xv. 6; 2 Co.i. 3; xi. 
31 (LT Tr WH om. ἡμ. and Xp.J; Eph. i. 3; Col. i. 3 (L 
WH om. cai]; 1 Pet. i. 3; in which combination of words 
the gen. depends on 6 θεύς as well as on πατήρ, οἴ. Fritz- 
sche on Rom. iii. p. 232 sq.; [Oltramare on Ro. l.c.; 
Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. i. 4; but some would restrict it to 
the latter; cf. e. σ. Meyer on Ro. ]. ¢., Eph. l.e.; Ellie. 
on Gal. l.¢., Eph. 1. 6.7; ὁ θεὸς τοῦ κυρ. nu. Ino. Xp. Eph. 
i. 17; ὁ θεὸς x. πατὴρ ἡμῶν, Gal. i. 4; Phil. iv. 20; 1 Th. 
i. 3; iii. 11, 13; θεὸς 6 πατήρ, 1 Co. viii. 6 ; ὁ θεὸς x. πατήρ, 
1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. v. 20; Jas. i. 27; iii. 9 [Ree. ; al. κύριος 
x. π.]; ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Ro. i. 7; 1 Co.i.3; 2 Co.i. 
2; Eph. i. 2; Phil. i. 2; Col. i. 2; 2 Th. i. 2; 1 Tim.i. 
2 [Ree., al. om. ἡμ.7; Philem.3; [ὁ θεὸς πατήρ, Col. iii. 
17 LT Tr WH (ef. Bp. Leghtft. ad loc.) ; elsewhere with- 
out the art. as] θεοῦ πατρός (in which phrase the two 
words have blended as it were into one, equiv. to a prop. 
name, Germ. Gottvater [A. V. God the Father]): Phil. ii. 
11; 1 Pet. i. 2; ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρός, Gal. i. 3; Eph. vi. 23; 
2 Tim. i. 2; Tit. i. 4; mapa θεοῦ πατρός, 2 Pet. i. 17; 2 
Jn. 3; ef. Wieseler, Com. ub. d. Brief a. d. Galat. p. 10 
sqq- ὁ θεύς w. gen. of the thing of which God is the au- 
thor [ef. W. § 30,1]: τῆς ὑπομονῆς x. τῆς παρακλήσεως, Ro. 
xv. 53; τῆς ἐλπίδος, ib. 13; τῆς εἰρήνης, 33; 1 Th. v. 23; 
τῆς παρακλήσεως, 2 Co.i. 3. τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things of 
God,i.e. a. hiscounsels,1Co.ii.11. β. his interests, 
Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. sy. things due to God, Mt. 
xxii. 21; Mk. xii. 17; Lk. xx. 25. Ta πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 
things respecting, pertaining to, God, — contextually i. α. 
the sacrificial business of the priest, Ro. xv. 17; Heb. ii. 
17; v. 1; ef. Xen. rep. Lac. 13, 11; Fritzsche on Rom. 
iii. p. 262sq. Nom. ὁ θεός for the voc.: Mk. xv. 34; 
Lk. xviii. 11,13; Jn. xx. 28; Actsiv.24[RG; Heb.i. 8?]; 
x. 7; ef. W.§ 29, 2; [B. 140 (123)]. τῷ θεῷ, God being 
judge [cf. W. § 31, 4 a.; 248 (232 sq.); B. § 133, 14]: 
after δυνατός, 2 Co. x. 4; after ἀστεῖος, Acts vii. 20, (after 
ἄμεμπτος, Sap. x. 5; after μέγας, Jon. iii. 3; see ἀστεῖος, 2). 
For the expressions ἄνθρωπος θεοῦ, δύναμις θεοῦ. vids θεοῦ, 
etc., θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος etc., ὁ ζῶν θεός οἴο., see under ἄνθρω- 
πος 6, δύναμις a., υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, ἐλπίς 2, ζάω 1. 1, ete. 
4. θεός is used of whatever can in any respect be likened 
to God, or resembles him in any way: Hebraistically i. q. 
God’s representative or vicegerent, of magistrates and 


288 


θεραπεύω 


judges, Jn. x. 84 sq. after Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) 6, (of the 
wise man, Philo de mut. nom. § 22; quod omn. prob. lib. 
8 7; [ὁ σοφὸς λέγεται θεὸς τοῦ ἄφρονος . . . θεὸς πρὸς har 
τασίαν x. δόκησιν, quod det. pot. insid. § 44]; πατὴρ x. 
μήτηρ ἐμφανεῖς εἰσι θεοὶ, μιμούμενοι τὸν ἀγέννητον ἐν τῷ 
ζωοπλαστεῖν, de decal. 8 23; ὠνομάσθη (i. e. Moses) ὅλου 
τοῦ ἔθνους θεὸς x. βασιλεύς, de vita Moys. i. § 28; [de migr. 
Abr. § 15; de alleg. leg. i. 8.187); of the devil, ὁ δεὸς 
τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου (see αἰών, 3), 2 Co. iv. 4; the pers. or 
thing to which one is wholly devoted, for which alone 
he lives, 6. g. ἡ κοιλία, Phil. iii. 19. 

θεοσέβεια, -as, ἡ, (θεοσεβής), reverence towards God, 
godliness: 1 Tim. ii. 10. (Xen. an. 2, 6,26; Plat. epin. 
Ρ. 985 d.; Sept. Gen. xx. 11; Job xxviii. 28; Bar. v. 4; 
Sir. i. 25 (22); 4 Mace. i. 9 (Fritz.); vii. 6, 22 (var.).) " 

θεοσεβής, -ἐς, (θεός and σέβομαι), worshipping God, 
pious: Jn. ix. 31. (Sept.; Soph., Eur., Arstph., Xen., 
Plat., al.; [ef. Trench § xlviii.].)* 

θεοστυγής, -ἐς, (θεός and στυγέω ; cf. θεομισής, θεομυσής, 
and the subst. θεοστυγία, omitted in the lexx., Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 35, 5), hateful to God, exceptionally impious 
and wicked; (Vulg. deo odibilis) : Ro.i. 80 (Eur. Troad. 
1213 and Cyclop. 396, 602; joined with ἄδικοι in Clem. 
hom. 1, 12, where just before occurs οἱ θεὸν μισοῦντες). 
Cf. the full discussion of the word by I’ritzsche, Com. on 
Rom. i. p. 84 sqq.; [and see W. 53 sq. (53) ].* 

θεότης, τητος, ἡ, (deilas, Tertull., Augustine [de civ. 
Dei 7, 1]), deity i. e. the state of being God, Godhead: 
Col. ii. 9. (Lian. Icar. 9; Plut. de defect. orac. 10 p. 
415 c.)* 

[Syn. θεότης, Oerdtns: θεότ. deity differs from θειότ. 
divinity, as essence differs from quality or attribute; cf. 
Trench § ii.; Bp. Lghtft. or Mey. on Col. 1. ο.; Fritzsche on 
Ro. i. 20.] 

Θεόφιλος, -ov, (θεός and φίλος). Theophilus, a Christian 
to whom Luke inscribed his Gospel and Acts of the 
Apostles: Lk. i. 3; Acts 1. 1. The conjectures concern- 
ing his family, rank, nationality, are reviewed by (among 
others) Win. RWB. s. v.; Bleek on Lk. i. 3; [B. Ὁ. s.v.]; 
see also under κράτιστος." 

θεραπεία, -as, ἡ. (θεραπεύω) ; 1. service, rendered by 
any one to another. 2. spec. medical service, curing, 
healing: Lk. ix. 11; Rev. xxii. 2, ([Hippoer.], Plat., 
Tsoer., Polyb.). 3. by meton. household, i.e. body of 
attendants, servants, domestics: Mt. xxiv. 45 RG; Lk. 
xii. 42, (and often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
469; for Ὁ" 12}», Gen. xlv. 16).* 

θεραπεύω ; impf. ἐθεράπευον ; fut. θεραπεύσω ; 1 aor. ἐθε- 
ράπευσα; Pass., pres. θεραπεύομαι ; impf. ἐθεραπευόμην; 
pf. ptep. τεθεραπευμένος ; 1 aor. ἐθεραπεύθην ; (Oepay, i. 4. 
θεράπων) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. to serve, do service: 
τινά, to one; pass. θεραπ. ὑπό τινος, Acts xvii. 25. 2: 
to heal, cure, restore to health: Mt. xii.10; Mk. vi.5; Lk. 
vi. 7; ix. 6; xiii. 14; xiv. 3; τινά, Mt. iv. 24; viii. 7, 16, 
ete.; Mk. i. 34; iii. 10; Lk. iv. 23; x. 9; pass., Jn. v. 10; 
Acts iv. 14; v.16, etc.; τινὰ aro Tivos, to cure one of any 
disease, Lk. vii. 21; pass., Lk. v.15; viii. 2; θεραπεύειν 
νόσους, μαλακίαν: Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1; Mk. iii. 15 


θεραπων 


[R GL, Tr mrg. in br.]; Lk. ix. 1; a wound, pass., Rev. 
xiii. 3, 12. 

θεράπων, -ovros, 6, [perh. fr. a root to hold, have about 
one; cf. Eng. retainer; Vanitek p. 396; fr. Hom. down], 
Sept. for 32)’, an attendant, servant: of God, spoken of 
Moses discharging the duties committed to him by God, 
Heb. iii. 5 as in Num. xii. 7 54. ; Josh. i. 2; viii. 31, 33 
(ix. 4, 6); Sap. x. 16. [Sywn. see διάκονος. ] * 

θερίζω ; fut. θερίσω [B. 37 (32), cf. WH. App. p. 163 
sq-]; 1 aor. eetieaas ; 1 aor. pass. ἐθερίσθην; (θέρος) ; 
Sept. for yp; [fr. Aeschyl., Hadt. down]; to reap, har- 
vest; a. ah Mt. vi. 26; Lk. xii. 24; Jas.v. 4; [fig. 
Jn. iv. 36 (bis)]. Ὅ. in aa erbial expressions about 
sowing and reapiny: ἄλλος . . - ὁ θερίζων, one does the 
work, another gets the reward, Jn. iv. 37 sq. (where the 
meaning is ‘ye hereafter, in winning over a far greater 
number of the Samaritans to the kingdom of God, will 
enjoy the fruits of the work which I have now com- 
menced among them’ [al. do not restrict the reference 
to converted Samaritans]); θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπει- 
pas, unjustly appropriating 1o thyself the fruits of oth- 
ers’ labor, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21 sq.; ὃ ἐὰν -- - 
θερίσει, as aman has acted (on earth) so (hereafter by 
God) will he be requited, either with reward or pen- 
alty, (his deeds will determine his doom), Gal. vi. 7 
(a proverb: ut sementem feceris, ita metes, Cic. de orat. 
2, 65; [σὺ δὲ ταῦτα αἰσχρῶς μὲν ἔσπειρας κακῶς δὲ ἐθέ- 
ρισας, Aristot. rhet. 3, ὃ, 4 ; cf. Plato, Phaedr. 300 d.; see 
Meyer on Gal. 1. 6.71}; τί, to receive a thing by way of 
reward or punishment: ra σαρκικά, 1 Co. ix. 11; φθοράν, 
ζωὴν αἰώνιον, Gal. vi. 8, (σπείρειν πυρούς, θερίζειν ἀκάνθας, 
Jer. xii. 13; ὁ σπείρων φαῦλα θερίσει κακά, Prov. xxii. 8; 
ἐὰν σπείρητε κακά, πᾶσαν ταραχὴν Kai θλίψιν θερίσετε, 
Test. xii. Patr. p.576 [1. 6. test. Levi §13]); absol.: of 
the reward of well-doing, Gal. vi. 9; 2Co.ix. 6. ὁ. As 
the crops are cut down with the sickle, θερίζειν is fig. 
used for to destroy, cut off: Rey. xiv. 15; with the addi- 
tion of τὴν γῆν, to remove the wicked inhabitants of the 
earth and deliver them up to destruction, ib. 16 [τὴν 
᾿Ασίαν, Plut. reg. et. imper. apophthegm. (Antig. 1), p. 
182 a. ].* 

θερισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (θερίζω), harvest: i.q.theact of reap- 
ing, Jn. iv. 35; fig. of the gathering of men into the 
kingdom of God, ibid. i. q. the time of reaping, i. 6. 
fig. the time of final judgment, when the righteous are 
gathered into the kingdom of God and the wicked are 
delivered up to destruction, Mt. xiii. 30, 39; Mk. iv. 29. 
1. q. the crop to be reaped, i. e. fig. a multitude of men to 
be taught how to obtain salvation, Mt. ix. 37 sq. ; Lk. x. 2; 
ἐξηράνθη 6 θερισμός, the crops are ripe for the harvest, 
i. e. the time is come to destroy the wicked, Rev. xiv. 
15. (Sept. for W¥p; rare in Grk. writ., as Xen. oee. 
18, 3; Polyb. 5, 95, 5.) * 

θεριστής, -οὔ, ὁ, (θερίζω), a reaper: Mt. xiii. 30, 39. 
(Bel and the Dragon 33; Xen., Dem., Aristot., Plut., 
al.)* 

θερμαίνω : Mid., pres. θερμαίνομαι ; impf. ἐθερμαινόμην ; 
(δερμός) - fr. Hom. down; to make warm, to heat; mid. 


289 


θεωρέω 


to warm one’s self: Mk. xiv. 54, 67; Jn. xviii. 18, 25; 
Jas. ii. 16.” 

θέρμη (and θέρμα; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 331, [Ruther 
ford, New Phryn. p. 4147), -ης, ἡ, heat: Acts xxviii. 3. 
(Eccl. iv. 11; Job vi. 17; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 7; Thuc., Plat., 
Menand., al.) * 

θέρος, -ovs, τό, (θέρω to heat), summer: Mt. xxiv. 32; 
Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30. (From Iiom. down; Hebr. 
YP Prov. vi. 8; Gen. viii. 22.) * 

Θεσσαλονικεύς, -€ws, ὁ, α Thessalonian: 
sogniy Pie Δ Gere ale Ode 1. ΤΣ 

Θεσσαλονίκη, -ἡς, ἡ, Thessalonica (now Saloniki), a 
celebrated and populous city, situated on the Thermaic 
Gulf, the capital of the second [ (there were four ; ef. Liv. 
xlv. 29)] division of Macedoaia and the residence of a 
Roman governor and quaestor. It was anciently called 
Therme, but was rebuilt by Cassander, the son of Anti- 
pater, and called by its new name [which first appears 
in Polyb. 23, 11, 2] in honor of his wife Thessalonica, 
the sister of Alexander the Great; cf. Strabo 7, 330. 
Here Paul the apostle founded a Christian church: Acts 
xvii. 1, 11, 13; Phil. iv. 16; 2 Tim. iv. 10. [BB. DD. 

y.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 225 sqq.]* 

Θευδᾶς [prob. contr. fr. θεόδωρος, W. 103 (97); esp. 
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15; on its inflection cf. B. 20 (18)], 
6, Theudas, an impostor who instigated a rebellion which 
came to a wretched end in the time of Augustus: Acts 
ν. 36. Josephus (antt. 20, 5, 1) makes mention of one 
Theudas, a magician, who came into notice by pretend- 
ing that he was a prophet and was destroyed when 
Cuspius Fadus governed Judea in the time of Claudius. 
Accordingly many interpreters hold that there were two 
insurgents by the name of Theudas; while others, with 
far greater probability, suppose that the mention of 
Theudas is ascribed to Gamaliel by an anachronism on 
the part of Luke. On the different opinions of others 
ef. Meyer on Acts l.c.; Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim in 
Schenkel ν. 510 sq.; [esp. Hackett in B. D.s. v.].* 

θεωρέω, -@; impf. ἐθεώρουν; [fut. θεωρήσω, Jn. vii. 8. Ὁ 
Tr WH]; 1 aor. ἐθεώρησα ; (θεωρός a spectator, and this 
fr. θεάομαι, q. v- [ef. Vanitéek p. 407; L. and S. 8. v.; 
Allen in the Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 131 sq.J); [fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hat. down]; Sept. for 87 and Chald. nin; 
1. to be a spectator, look at, behold, Germ. schauen, (the 
θεωροί were men who attended the games or the sacri- 
fices as public deputies; οἵ. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 19); 
absol.: Mt. xxvii. 55; Mk. xv. 40; Lk. xxiii. 35; foll. 
by indir. dise., Mk. xii. 41; xv. 47; used esp. of persons 
and things looked upon as in some respect noteworthy : 
τινά, Jn. vi. 40; xvi. 10,16 sq.19; Acts iii. 16; xxv. 24; 
Rey. xi. 11 sq.; 6 θεωρῶν τὸν υἱὸν θεωρεῖ τὸν πατέρα. 
the majesty of the Father resplendent in the Son, Jn. 
xii. 45; τινά with ptep. [B. 301 (258) : Mk. ν. 15]; Lk. 
x. 18; Jn. vi. 19; [τ 12]; xx. 12, 14; [1 Jn. ii. 17]; 
ri, Lk. xiv. 29; xxi.6; xxiii.48; Acts iv. 13; τὰ σημεῖα, 
Jn. ii. 23; vi. 2 L Tr WH; Acts viii. 13, (θαυμαστὰ τέρατα. 
Sap. xix. 8); τὰ ἔργα rod Χριστοῦ, Jn. vii. 3; τί with 
ptep., Jn. xx. 6; Acts vii. 56; x. 11; foll. by ὅτι, Acts 


Acts xx. 4; 


oewpiu 


xix. 26; to view attentively, take a view of, survey: τί, 
Mt. xxviii. 1; to view mentally, consider: foll. by orat. 
obliq., Heb. vii. 4. 2. to see; i.e. a. lo perceive 
with the eyes : πνεῦμα, Lk. xxiv. 37; τινά with a ptep., ibid. 
39; τινά, Ort, Jn. ix. 8; τὸ πρόσωπόν τινος (after the Hebr.; 
see πρόσωπον, 1 a.), i. 4. to enjoy the presence of one, 
have intercourse with him, Acts xx. 38; οὐκέτε θεωρεῖν 
twa, used of one from whose sight a person has been 
withdrawn, Jn. xiv. 19; οὐ θεωρεῖ ὁ κόσμος τὸ πνεῦμα, i. 6. 
so to speak, has no eyes with which it can see the Spirit; 
he cannot render himself visible to it, cannot give it his 
presence and power, Jn. xiv.17. Ὄ. to discern, descry: 
ri, Mk. v. 38; τινά, Mk. iii. 11; Acts ix.7. ο. to ascer- 
tain, find out, by seeing : τινά with a pred. ace., Acts xvii. 
22; ri with ptep., Acts xvii. 16; xxviii. 6; ὅτι, Mk. xvi. 
4; Jn. iv. 19; xii. 19; Acts xix. 26; xxvii. 10; foll. by 
indir. disc., Acts xxi. 20; Hebraistically (see εἴδω, I. 5) 
i. q. to get knowledge of: In. vi. 62 (τ. υἱὸν τ. ἀνθρώπου 
ἀναβαίνοντα the Son of Man by death ascending; cf. Liicke, 
Meyer [yet cf. Weiss in the 6te Aufl.], Baumg.-Crusius, 
in loc.) ; τὸν θάνατον i.e. to die, Jn. viii. 51; and on the oth- 
er hand, τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Χριστοῦ, to be a partaker of the 
glory, i. e. the blessed condition in heaven, which Christ 
enjoys, Jn. xvii. 24, οἵ. 22. [Comp.: dva-, tapa-bewpéa. |* 

[ϑυν. θεωρεῖν, θεᾶσθαι, ὁρᾶν, σκοπεῖν: Bewp, is 
used primarily not of an indifferent spectator, but of one 
who looks at a thing with interest and for a purpose; θεωρ. 
would be used of a general officially reviewing or inspecting 
an army, θεᾶσθ. of a lay spectator looking at the parade. 
θεωρ. as denoting the careful observation of details can even 
be contrasted with ὁρᾶν in so far as the latter denotes only 
perception in the general; so used θεωρεῖν quite coincides 
with cxor. Schmidt i.ch. 11; see also Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on 
Mt. vii. 3. Cf. 5. vv. dpdw, σκοπέω.] 

θεωρία, -as, ἡ, (θεωρός, on which see θεωρέω init.) ; fr. 
[Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. aviewing,beholding. 2. 
that which is viewed; a spectacle, sight: Lk. xxiii. 48 (3 
Mace. ν. 24).* 

θήκη, -ης; 9, (τίθημι) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; that 
in which a thing is put or laid away, a receptacle, reposi- 


tory, chest, box: used of the sheath of a sword, Jn. xviii. 


1; Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 7; Poll. 10, (31) 144." 

θηλάζω; 1 aor. ἐθήλασα; (θηλή a breast, [οἷ Peile, 
Etym. p. 124 sq.]); 1. trans. to give the breast, give 
suck, to suckle: Mt. xxiv.19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23, 
(Lys., Aristot., al.; Sept. for p27) 5 μαστοὶ ἐθήλασαν, 
Lk. xxiii. 29 RG. 2. intrans. to suck: Mt. xxi. 16 
(Aristot., Plat., Boone al.; Sept. for P3)) ; μαστούς, Lk. 
xi. 27; Job iii. Gant viii. 1; Joel ii. 16; Theoer. 
iii. 16.* 

θῆλυς, -eva, τυ, [cf. θηλάζω, init.], of the female sex; ἡ 
θήλεια, subst. a woman, a female: Ro. i. 26 sq-; also τὸ 
tee Mt. xix. 4; Mk. x. 6; Gal. iii. 28. (Gen. i. 27; 
vii. 2; Ex. i. 16, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

aoe [Lat. fera; perh. fr. root to run, spring, prey, 
Vaniéek p. 415; cf. Curtius § 314], -as, 4; fr. Hom. 
down; α hunting of wild beasts to destroy them; hence, 
firuratively, of preparing destruction for men, [A. V. a 
trap], Ro. xi. 9, on which cf. Fritzsche.* 


290 * 


θησαυρος 


θϑηρεύω: 1 aor. inf. θηρεῦσαι ; (fr. θήρα, as ἀγρεύω fr. 
ἄγρα [cf. Schmidt ch. 72, 3]); fr. Hom. down; fo goa 
hunting, to hunt, to catch in hunting; metaph. to lay wait 
for, strive to ensnare; to catch artfully: τὶ ἐκ στόματός 
twos, Lk. xi. 54.* 

θηριομαχέω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἐθηριομάχησα; (Onpropayos); to 
Sight with wild beasts (Diod. 3,43, 7; Artem. oneir. 2, 54; 
5, 49); ef ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν ᾿Εφέσῳ, 1 Co. xv. 32 —these 
words some take literally, supposing that Paul was con- 
demned to fight with wild beasts; others explain them 
tropically of a fierce contest with brutal and ferocious 
men (so θηριομαχεῖν in Ignat. ad Rom. 5, [ete.]; οἵοις 
θηρίοις μαχόμεθα says Pompey, in App. bell. civ. 2, 61; 
see θηρίον). The former opinion encounters the objec- 
tion that Paul would not have omitted this most terrible 
of all perils from the catalogue in 2 Co. xi. 23 sqq.* 

θηρίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of 6p; hence a Little beast, little 
animal; Plat. Theaet. p. 171 e.; of bees, Theoer. 19, 6; 
but in usage it had almost always the force of its primi- 
tive; the later dimin. is θηρίδιον [ef. Epictet. diss. 2, 9, 
67); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 7°m and 773, an ani- 
mal; a wild animal, wild beast, beast : prop., Mk. i. 13; 
Acts x. 12 Ree.; xi. 6; xxviii. 4sq.; Heb. xii. 20; [Jas. 
iii. 7]; Rev. vi. 8; in Rev xi. 7 and chh. xiii.—xx., under 
the fig. of a ‘beast’ is depicted Antichrist, both his 
person and his kingdom and power, (see ἀντίχριστος); 
metaph. a brutal, bestial man, savage, ferocious, Tit. i. 
12 [colloq. ‘ugly dogs’], (so in Arstph. eqq. 273; Plut. 
439; nub. 184; [ef. Schmidt ch. 70,2; apparently never 
with allusion to the stupidity of beasts]; still other 
exx. are given by Kypke, Observy. ii. p. 379; θηρία 
ἜΣ Ignat. Smyrn. 4, οἵ. Δα Ephes. 7). [Syn. 
see (@ov. |* 

θησαυρίζω ; 1 aor. ἐθησαύρισα ; pf. pass. ptep. τεθησαυ- 
ρισμένος ; (θησαυρός); fr. Hdt. down; to gather and lay 
up, to heap up, store up: to accumulate riches, Jas. v. 3; 
τινί, Lk. xii. 21; 2 Co. xii. 14; ri, 1 Co. xvi. 2; θησαυροὺς 
ἑαυτῷ, Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; i.q. to keep in store, store up, reserve: 
pass. 2 Pet. iii. 7; metaph. so to live from day to day as 
to increase either the bitterness or the happiness of one’s 
consequent lot: ὀργὴν ἑαυτῷ, Ro. ii. 5; κακά, Prov. i. 18; 
ζωήν, Pss. of Sol. 9, 9, (εὐτυχίαν, App. Samn. 4, 3 [i.e. 
vol. i. p. 23, 31 ed. Bekk.]; τεθησαυρισμένος κατά twos 
φθόνος, Diod. 20, 36). [Comp.: ἀπο- θησαυρίζω.] " 

θησαυρός, -ov, 6, (fr. ΘΕΩ [τίθημι] with the paragog. 
term.-avpos); Sept. often for 7¥ix; Lat. thesaurus; i.e. 
1. the place in which goods and precious things are col- 
leeted and laid up;_ a. a casket, coffer, or other recep- 
tacle, in which valuables are kept: Mt.ii. 11. b. a 
treasury (Hdt., Eur., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Plut., Hdian. ; 
1 Mace. iii. 29). ο. storehouse, repository, magazine, 
(Neh. xiii. 12; Deut. xxviii. 12, ete.; App. Pun. 88, 95): 
Mt. xiii. 52 [ef. παλαιός, 1]; metaph. of the soul, as the 
repository of thoughts, feelings, purposes, ete. : (Mt. xii. 
8556 LT Tr WH, 35°]; with epex. gen. τῆς καρδίας, ibid. 
xii. 35 Rec.; Lk. vi. 45. 42. ‘the things laid up ina 
treasury; collected treasures: Mt. vi. 19-21; Lk. xi 
58 5α.; Heb. xi. 26. θησαυρὸν ἔχειν ἐν οὐρανῷ, to have 


θυγγανω 


treasure laid up for themselves in heaven, is used of those 
to whom God has appointed eternal salvation: Mt. xix. 
21; Mk. x. 21; Lk. xviii. 22; something precious, Mt. 
xiii. 44; used thus of the light of the gospel, 2 Co. iv. 7; 
with an epex. gen. τῆς σοφίας (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 9; Plat. 
Phil. p. 15 6.) x. γνώσεως, i. q. πᾶσα ἡ copia κ. γνῶσις ὡς 
θησαυροί, Col. ii. 3.* 

θιγγάνω [prob. akin to τεῖχος, fingo, fiction, etc.; Cur- 
tius § 145]: 2 aor. ἔθιγον ; to touch, handle: μηδὲ θίγῃς 
touch not sc. impure things, Col. ii. 21 [ef. ἅπτω, 2 c.]; 
τινός, Heb. xii. 20 ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Tragg., al.) ; 
like the Hebr. 333, to do violence to, injure: τινός, Heb. 
xi. 28 (Eur. Iph. Aul. 1351; ὧν ai βλάβαι αὗται θιγγά- 
νουσι, Act. Thom. § 12). [Sy¥N. see ἅπτω, 2 6" 

θλίβω; Pass., pres. θλίβομαι; pf. ptep. τεθλιμμένος ; 
[allied with flagrum, affliction; fr. Hom. down]; to press 
(as grapes), press hard upon: prop. twa [A. V. throng], 
Mk. iii. 9; ὁδὸς τεθλιμμένη a compressed way, i. 6. nar- 
row, straitened, contracted, Mt. vii. 14; metaph. fo trouble, 
afflict, distress, (Vulg. tribulo): τινά, 2 ΤῊ. 1. 6; pass. 
(Vulg. tribulor, [also angustior]; tribulationem patior) : 
2Co.i. 6; iv. 8; vii. 5; [1 Th. iii. 4; 2Th.i.7]; 1 Tim. 
v. 10; Heb. xi. 37. (of θλίβοντες for O°¥ in Sept.) 
[Comp. : dzo-, συν-θλίβω.} * 

θλίψις, or θλῖψις [so L Tr], (cf. W. § 6, 1 e.; Lipsius, 
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35), -ews, ἡ, (θλίβω), prop. α 
pressing, pressing together, pressure (Strab. p. 52; Ga- 
len); in bibl. and eccles. Grk. metaph., oppression, afflic- 
tion, tribulation, distress, straits; Vulg. tribulatio, also 
pressura (2 Co. i. 4°; Jn. xvi. [21], 33; [Phil. i. 16 (17); 
and in Col. i. 24 passio}) ; (Sept. for 7x, also for Ὃν, 
yoo, ete.): Mt. xxiv. 9; Acts vii. 11; xi. 19; Ro. xii. 12; 
9'Co. i. 4, 8: iv. 11; vi. 4; vil. 4; vill. 2; 2 Th. 1 6; 
Rey. i. 9; ii. 9,22; vii. 14; joined with στενοχωρία [cef. 
Trench § lv.], Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35, (Deut. xxviii. 53 sq.; 
Is. [vili. 22]; xxx. 6); with ἀνάγκη, 1 Th. iii.7; with 
διωγμός, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk.iv.17; 2 Th.i.4; of the afflic- 
tions of those hard pressed by siege and the calamities 
of war, Mt. xxiv. 21, 29; Mk. xiii. 19, 24; of the straits 
of want, 2 Co. viii. 13; Phil. iv. 14 [here al. give the 
word a wider reference]; Jas. i. 27; of the distress of 
a woman in child-birth, Jn. xvi. 21. θλίψιν ἔχω (i. 4. 
OriBoua), In. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28; Rev. ii. 10; θλίψις 
ἐπί τινα ἔρχεται, Acts vii. 11; ἐν θλίψει, 1 ΤῊ. 1. 6. plur.: 
Acts vii. 10; xiv. 22; xx. 28; Ro. v. 3; Eph. 111. 18:1 
Th. iii. 3; Heb. x. 33; rod Χριστοῦ, the afflictions which 
Christ had to undergo (and which, therefore, his fol- 
lowers must not shrink from), Col. i. 24 (see ἀνταναπλη- 
pow); θλίψις τῆς καρδίας (x. συνοχή), anxiety, burden of 
heart, 2 Co. ii. 4; θλίψιν ἐπιφέρειν (LT Tr WH ἐγείρειν, 
see ἐγείρω, 4c.) τοῖς δεσμοῖς τινος, to increase the misery 
of my imprisonment by causing me anxiety, Phil. i. 16 
(17).* 

θνήσκω: pf. τέθνηκα, inf. τεθνάναι and LT Tr WH 
τεθνηκέναι (in Acts xiv. 19), ptep. τεθνηκώς ; plupf. 3 
pers. sing. ἐτεθνήκει (Jn. xi. 21 Rec.) ; [fr. Hom. down]; 
Sept. for ny; to die; pf. to be dead: Mt. ii. 20; Mk. xv. 
44; Lk. vii. 12 [L br.]; viii. 49; Jn. xi. 21, Kee. in 39 


" 291 


θρῆνος 


and 41, 44; xii. 1 [Τ WH om. LTr br.]; xix. 33; Acts 
xiv. 19; xxv.19; metaph., of the loss of spiritual life: 
ζῶσα τέθνηκε, i. 6. κἂν δοκῇ ζῆν ταύτην THY αἰσθητὴν ζωήν, 
τέθνηκε κατὰ πνεῦμα (Theoph.): 1 Tim. y.6 (Philo de 
prof. § 10 ζῶντες ἔνιοι τεθνήκασι καὶ τεθνηκότες ζῶσι). 
[Comp.: ἀπο-, συν-απο-θνήσκω.} " 

θνητός, -ή, -όν, (verbal adj. fr. θνήσκω), [fr. Hom. 
down], liable to death, mortal: Ro. vi. 12; viii. 11; 1 Co. 
xv. 53 sq.; 2Co.iv.11; ν. 4. [θνητός subject to death, 
and so still living; νεκρός actually dead.]* 

θορυβάζω: (θόρυβος. 4. v-); to trouble, disturb, (i. e. 
τυρβάζω, q. v-); Pass. pres. 2 pers. sing. θορυβάζῃ in Lk. 
x. 41 LT Tr WH after codd.» BCL ete. (Not found 
elsewh. [ Soph. Lex. 5. v. quotes Euseb. of Alex. (Migne, 
Patr. Graec. vol. Ixxxvi. 1) p. 444 ¢.].) * 

θορυβέω, -ῶ : impf. ἐθορύβουν; pres. pass. θορυβοῦμαι; 
(θόρυβος) ; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to make a noise or up- 
roar, be turbulent. 2. trans. to disturb, throw into con- 
fusion: τὴν πόλιν, to “set the city on an uproar,” Acts 
xvii. 5; pass. to be troubled in mind, Acts xx. 10 [al. here 
adhere to the outward sense]; to wail tumultuously, 
Mt. ix. 23; Mk. v. 39.* 

θόρυβος, -ov, ὁ, (akin to Opdos, τύρβη. τυρβάζω, [but 
τύρβη etc. seem to come from another root; cf. Curtius 
§ 250]), α noise, tumult, uproar: of persons wailing, Mk. 
y. 38; of a clamorous and excited multitude, Mt. xxvii. 
24; of riotous persons, Acts xx. 1; xxi. 34; a tumult, 
as a breach of public order, Mt. xxvi. 5; ME. xiv. 2; 
Acts xxiv. 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; 
several times in Sept.) * 

θραύω: pf. pass. ptep. τεθραυσμένος; fr. [Hdt.], Aes- 
chyl. down, to break, break in pieces, shatter, smite through, 
(Ex. xv. 6; Num. xxiv. 17, εἴς; 2 Mace. xy. 16): τε- 
θραυσμένοι, broken by calamity ΓΑ. V. bruised], Lk. iv. 
18 (19) fr. Is. lviii. 6 for Dy3¥9. [SY¥N. see ῥήγνυμι.] * 

θρέμμα, -ros, τό, (τρέφω), whatever is fed or nursed; 


hence 1. a ward, nursling, child, (Soph., Eur., Plat., 
al.). 2. a flock, cattle, esp. sheep and goats: Jn. iv. 
12. (Xen. oec. 20, 23; Plat., Diod., Joseph., Plut., 


Leian., Aelian, al.) * 

Opnvéw, -&: impf. ἐθρήνουν ; fut. θρηνήσω ; 1 aor. ἐθρή- 
moa; (θρῆνος, 4. v-); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Son, 
10, ete. ; 1. to lament, to mourn: Jn. xvi. 20; of the 
singers of dirges, [to wail], Mt. xi.17; Lk. vii. 32. 2. 
to bewail, deplore: twa, Lk. xxiii. 27.* 

[On @pnvéw to lament, κόπτομαι to smite the breast in grief, 
λυπέομαι to be pained, saddened, πενθέω to mourn, cf. Trench 
§ Ixy. and see κλαίω fin. ; yet note that in classic Grk. λυπ. 
is the most comprehensive word, designating every species 
of pain of body or soul; and that πενθέω expresses a self- 
contained grief, never violent in its manifestations ; like our 
Eng. word “ mourn” it is associated by usage with the death 
of kindred, and like it used pregnantly to suggest that event. 
See Schmidt vol. ii. ch. 83.] 

θρῆνος, -ov, 6, (θρέομαι to cry aloud, to lament; cf. 
Germ. Thréne [(?), rather drénen; Curtius ὃ 317]), α 
lamentation: Mt. ii. 18 Ree. (Sept. for ADP, also ‘2; 
O. T. Apocr.; Hom., Pind., Tragg., Xen. Ages. 10, 3; 
Plat., al.)* 


θρησκεία 


θρησκεία Ταΐ. -ia [see I, ε7, (a later word; Ion. θρησκίη 
in Hat. [2, 18. 37]), -as, ἡ, (fr. θρησκεύω, and this fr. 
θρῆσκος, q. v-; hence apparently primarily fear of the 
gods); religious worship, esp. external, that which consists 
in ceremonies: hence in plur. θρησκίας ἐπιτελεῖν μυρίας, 
Hat. 2, 37; καθιστὰς ἁγνείας τε καὶ θρησκείας καὶ καθαρ- 
μούς, Dion. Hal. 2, 63; univ. religious worship, Jas. i. 
26 sq.; with gen. of the obj. [W. 187 (176)] τῶν ayye- 
λων, Col. ii. 18 (τῶν εἰδώλων, Sap. Xiv. 27; τῶν δαιμόνων, 
Euseb. ἢ. 6. 6, 41, 2; τῶν θεῶν, ib. 9, 9, 14; τοῦ θεοῦ, 
Hdian. 4, 8, 17 [7 ed. Bekk.]; often in Josephus [cf. 
Krebs, Observy. ete. p. 339 sq.]; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 
7); religious discipline, religion: ἡμετέρα θρησκεία, of 
Judaism, Acts xxvi. 5 (τὴν ἐμὴν θρησκείαν καταλιπών, put 
into the mouth of God by Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 1; with 
gen. of the subj. τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, 4 Mace. v. 6, 13 (12); 
Joseph. antt. 12, 5,4; Op. κοσμική, i. e. worthy to be 
embraced by all nations, a world-religion, b. j. 4, 5, 
2; piety, περὶ τ. θεόν, antt. 1, 13,15 κατὰ τὴν ἔμφυτον 
θρησκείαν τῶν βαρβάρων πρὸς τὸ βασιλικὸν ὄνομα, Charit. 
7, 6 p. 165, 18 ed. Reiske; of the reverence of An- 
tiochus the Pious for the Jewish religion, Joseph. antt. 
13, 8, 2). Cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. v. 6; [esp. Trench 
§ xlviii.].* 

θρῆσκος (T WH θρησκός, cf. [Τὰ Proleg. p. 101]; 
W.§6,1¢e.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 28), του, 6, 
fearing or worshipping God; religious, (apparently fr. 
τρέω to tremble; hence prop. trembling, fearful; cf. J. G. 
Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 121; on the 
different conjectures of others, see Passow s. v. [Cur- 
tius § 316 connects with @pa; hence ‘ to adhere to,’ ‘be 
a votary of’; ef. Vaniéek p. 395]): Jas. i. 26. (CE. 
Trench § xlviii.}* 

θριαμβεύω ; 1 aor. ptep. θριαμβεύσας ; (θρίαμβος, a hymn 
sung in festal processions in honor of Bacchus; among 
the Romans, a triumphal procession [ Lat. (riumphus, with 
which word it is thought to be allied; ef. Vaniéek p. 
317]); 1. to triumph, to celebrate a triumph, (Dion. 
Hal., App., Plut., Hdian., al.) ; τινά, over one (as Plut. 
Thes. and Rom. comp. 4): Col. ii. 15 (where it signifies 
the victory won by God over the demoniacal powers 
throuch Christ’s death). 2. by a usage unknown to 
prof. auth., with a Hiphil or causative force (cf. W. p. 23 
and § 38, 1 [ef. B. 147 (129)]), with the ace. of a pers., to 
cause one to triumph, i.e. metaph. to grant one complete 
success, 2 Co. ii. 14 [but others reject the causative 
sense; see Mey. ad loc.; Bp. Lehtft. on Col. 1. ¢.].* 

θρίξ, τριχός, dat. plur. θριξί, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], the 
hair; a. the hair of the head: Mt. v. 36; Lk. vii. 44; 
xxi. 18; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3; Acts xxvii. 34; 1 Pet. iii. 3 
[Lehm.om.]; Rev. i. 14; with τῆς κεφαλῆς added (Hom. 
Od. 18, 399. 431), Mt. x. 830; Lk. vii. 38; xii. 7. b. 
the hair of animals: Rev. ix. 8; évdedup. τρίχας καμήλου, 
with a garment made of camel’s hair, Mk. i. 6, ef. Mt. 
iii. 4; ἐν... τριχῶν καμηλείων πλέγμασιν περιεπάτησαν, 
Clem. Alex. strom. 4 p. 221 ed. Sylb.* 

θροέω, -@: (θροός clamor, tumult); in Grk. writ. to cry 
aloud, make a noise by outcry; in the N. T. to trouble, 


292 


θυγάτηρ 


frighten; Pass. pres. θροοῦμαι; to be troubled in mind, to 
be frightened, alarmed: Mt. xxiv. 6 [B. 243 (209)]; Mk. 
xiii. 7; 2 Th. ii. 2; [1 aor. ptep. OponOévres, Lk. xxiv. 37 
Trmrg. WH mrg.]. (Cant. v. 4.)* 

θρόμβος, -ov, 6, [allied with τρέφω in the sense to 
thicken; Vanicéek p. 307], a large thick drop, esp. of 
clotted blood (Aeschyl. Eum. 184); with αἵματος added 
(Aeschyl. choeph. 533, 546; Plat. Critias p. 120 a.), 
Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass. (see WH. App. 
ad loc.) ]." 

θρόνος, του, ὁ, (OPA to sit; ef. Curtius § 316), [fr. 
Hom. down], Sept. for 8D3, a throne, seat, i.e. a chair of 
state having a footstool ; assigned in the N. T. to kings, 
hence by meton. for kingly power, royalty: Lk. i. 32,52; 
Acts ii. 30. metaph. to God, the governor of the world: 
Mt. ν. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts vii. 49 (Is. Ixvi.1); Rev. i. 4; 
iii. 21; iv. 2-6, 9, 10, ete.; Heb. iv. 16; viii. 1; xii. 2, to 
the Messiah, the partner and assistant in the divine 
administration: Mt. xix. 28; xxv. 31; Rev. iii. 21; xx. 
11; xxii. 3; hence the divine power belonging to Christ, 
Heb. i. 8. to judges, i. q. tribunal or bench (Plut. mor. 
p- 807 b.): Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. xx. 4. to 
elders: Rev.iv.4; xi. 16. toSatan: Rev. ii. 13; ef. 
Bleek ad loc. to the beast (concerning which see 
θηρίον) : Rev. xvi. 10. θρόνος is used by meton. of one 
who holds dominion or exercises authority ; thus in plur. 
of angels: Col. i. 16 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ]. 

Θυάτειρα, -ων, τά, (and once -as, 4, Rev. i. 11 Lehm. 
Θυάτειραν [cf. Tdf. ad loc.; WH.App. p. 156; B.18 (16) ]), 
Thyatira, a city of Lydia, formerly Pelopia and Euhippia 
(Plin. h. n. 5, 31), now Akhissar, a colony of Macedonian 
Greeks, situated between Sardis and Pergamum on the 
river Lycus; its inhabitants gained their living by 
traflic and the art of dyeing in purple: Acts xvi. 14; 
Reyvea. 1111. 185245 Pf BoD os.ival* 

θυγάτηρ, gen. θυγατρός, dat. θυγατρί, acc. θυγατέρα, voc. 
θύγατερ, plur. θυγατέρες, acc. -€pas, ἡ, (of the same root 
as Gothie dauhtar, Eng. daughter, Germ. Tochter [Curtius 
§ 318; Vaniéek p. 4157); Hebr. n3; [fr. Hom. down]; 
a daughter: prop., Mt. ix. 18; x. 35, 37; xv. 22; Acts 
vii. 21,ete. improp. a. the vocative [or nom. as voc. 
cf. W. § 29,2; B. 8.129 a. 5; WH. App. p. 158] in kindly 
address: Mt. ix. 22; Mk. v. 34 [1| Tr WH θυγάτηρ; Lk. 
viii. 48 [Tr WH θυγάτηρ], (see υἱός 1 ἃ. fin., τέκνον b. u.). 
b. in phrases modelled after the Hebr.: a. a daughter 
of God i. 6. acceptable to God, rejoicing in God’s pecu- 
liar care and protection: 2 Co. vi. 18 (Is. xliii. 6; Sap. 
ix. 7; see υἱὸς τ. θεοῦ 4, τέκνον Ὁ. y.). β. withthe name 
of a place, city, or region, it denotes collectively all its 
inhabitants and citizens (very often so,in the O. T., as 
15. xxxvii. 22; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 19; Zeph. iii. 14, ete.) ; 
in the N. T. twice ἡ θυγ. Σιών, i. e. inhabitants of Jeru- 
salem: Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15, (Is.i. 8; x. 32; Zech. ix. 
9, etc.; see Σιών, 2). γ. θυγατέρες Ἱερουσαλήμ, women 
of Jerusalem: Lk. xxiii. 28. 8. female descendant: ai 
θυγατέρες "Aapwy, women of Aaron’s posterity, Lk. i. 5; 
θυγάτηρ ᾿Αβραάμ daughter of Abraham, i. e. a woman 
tracing her descent from Abraham, Lk. xiii. 16, (4 Maree 


θυγάτριον 


xv. 28 (25); Gen. xxviii. 8; xxxvi. 2; Judg. xi. 40; Is. 
xvi. 2, etc.). 

θυγάτριον, -ov, τό, α little daughter: Mk. v. 23; vii. 25. 
[Strattis Incert.5; Menand., Athen., Plut. reg. et imper. 
Apophtheg. p. 179 e. (Alex. 6); al.]* 

θύελλα, -ης, 7, (θύω to boil, foam, rage, as ἄελλα fr. dw, 
ἄημι), a sudden storm, tempest, whirlwind: Heb. xii. 18. 
(Deut. iv. 11; v. 22; Hom., Hes., Tragg., al.) [Cf. 
Schmidt ch. 55, 11; Trench § xxiii. fin.]* 

θύϊνος [WH om. the dier. (cf. I, «, fin.) ], τη, τον, (fr. θυία 
or Ova, the citrus, an odoriferous North-African tree 
used as incense [and for inlaying; B.D. s.v. Thyine 
wood; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 401 sq.]), 
thyine (Lat. citrinus): ξύλον, Rey. xviii. 12 as in Diose. 
1, 21; ef. Plin. h. n. 13, 30 (16).* 

θυμίαμα, -ros, τό, (θυμιάω), Sept. mostly for NOP, an 
aromatic substance burnt, incense: generally in plur., 
Rev. v. 8; viii. 3 sq.; xviii. 13; ἡ dpa τοῦ 6., when the 
incense is burned, Lk. i. 10; θυσιαστήριον τοῦ θυμ. ib. 11. 
(Soph., Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Joseph. ; Sept.) * 

θυμιατήριον, -ov, τό, (θυμιάω), prop. a utensil for fumi- 
gating or burning incense [ef. W. 96 (91)]; hence 1. 
a censer: 2 Chr. xxvi. 19; Ezek. viii. 11; Hdt. 4, 162; 
Thue. 6,46; Diod. 13,3; Joseph. antt. 4, 2,4; 8,3,8; Ael. 
Ware 19..51- 2. the altar of incense: Philo, rer. div. 
haer. § 46; vit. Moys. iii. 5 7; Joseph. antt. 3, 6,8; 3, 8, 
3; Ὁ. 1. ὅ, ὅ, δ᾽; Clem. Alex.; Orig.; and so in Heb. ix. 
4[(where Tr mre. br.), also 2 Tr mrg. in br.], where see 
Bleek, Liinemann, Delitzsch, Kurtz, in opp. to those 
[(A. V. included) ] who think it means censer; [yet cf. 
Harnack in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1876, p. 572 sq. ].* 

θυμιάω, -@: 1 aor. inf. θυμιᾶσαι [RG -doa]; (fr. θῦμα, 
and this fr. θύω, 4. v-); in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Hdt., 
Plat. dopa Sept. for wp and VHP; ἐο burn incense: 
Lk. i. 9.* 

θυμομαχέω, -@; (θυμός and μάχομαι) ; to carry on war 
with great animosity (Polyb., Diod., Dion. H., Plut.); ἡ 
be very angry, be exasperated [A.V. nighly displeased]: 
τινί, with one, Acts xii. 20. Cf. Kypke, Observy. ii 
p- 62 sq.* 

θυμός, -οὔ, 6, (fr. θύω to rush along or on, be in a heat, 
breathe violently; hence Plato correctly says, Cratyl. 
p- 419 e., θυμὸς ἀπὸ τῆς θύσεως x. ζέσεως τῆς ψυχῆς; ac- 
cordingly it signifies both the spirit panting as it were 
in the body, and the rage with which the man pants and 
swells), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. often for ἮΝ anger, and 
721 excandescentia; also for 17 ἽΓῚ aestus. In the N. T. 
1. passion, angry heat, (excandescentia, Οἷς. Tuse. 4, 9, 
21), anger forthwith boiling up and soon subsiding again, 
(ὀργή, on the other hand, denotes indignation which has 
arisen gradually and become more settled; [ef. (Plato) 
deff. 415 6. θυμός: ὁρμὴ βίαιος ἄνευ λογισμοῦ: νόσος τάξεως 
Ψυχῆς ἀλογίστου. ὀργή" 
τιμωρεῖσθαι. Greg. Naz. carm. 34 θυμὸς μέν ἐστιν ἀθρόος 
ζέσις φρενός, ὀργὴ δὲ θυμὸς ἐμμένων, Herm. mand. 5, 2, 4 
ἐκ δὲ τῆς πικρίας θυμός, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ θυμοῦ ὀργή; ef. Aristot. 
rhet. 2, 2, 1 and Cope’s note]; hence we read in Sir. 
xlviii. 10 κοπάσαι ὀργὴν mpd θυμοῦ, before it glows and 


παράκλησις τοῦ θυμικοῦ eis τὸ 


293 


θύρα 


bursts forth; [see further, on the distinction betw. the 
two words, Trench § xxxvii., and esp. Schmidt vol. iii. 
ch. 142]): Lk. iv. 28; Acts xix. 28; Eph. iv. 31; Col. 
iii. 8; Heb. xi. 27; 6 6. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xiv. 19; xv.1, 7; 
xvi. 1; ἔχειν θυμόν, to be in a passion, Rey. xii. 12 (Ael. 
ν. ἢ. 1, 14); ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός (as Sept. Mic. v. 15; Isoer. 
p- 249 ο.; Hdian. 8, 4,1; al.): Ro. ii. 8 (Ree. in the in- 
verse order; so Deut. ix. 19; xxix. 23, 28, [ef. Trench 
u. s.]); plur. θυμοί impulses and outbursts of anger [ W- 
176 (166); B. 77 (67)]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. vy. 20, (2 
Mace. iv. 25, 38; ix. 7; x. 85; xiv. 45; 4 Mace. xviii. 
20; Sap. x. 3; Soph. Aj. 718 [where see Lob.]; Plat. Pro- 
tag. p. 323 e.; [Phileb. p. 40 6. ; Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, 13]; 
Polyb. 3, 10,5; Diod. 13, 28; Joseph. b. 1. 4,5, 2; Plut. 
Cor. 1; al.). 2. glow, ardor: ὁ οἶνος τοῦ θυμοῦ [see 
οἶνος, b.] the wine of passion, inflaming wine, Germ. 
Glutwein (which either drives the drinker mad or kills 
him with its deadly heat; οἵ. Is. li. 17, 22; Jer. xxxii. 1 
(xxv. 15) sqq.): Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3; with τοῦ θεοῦ 
added, which God gives the drinker, Rev. xiv. 10; with 
τῆς ὀργῆς Tov θεοῦ added [A. V. fierceness], Rev. xvi. 19 ; 
xix. 15; ef. Ewald, Johann. Schriften, Bd. ii. p. 269 
note.* 

θυμόω, -G: 1 aor. pass. ἐθυμώθην; (θυμός); to cause 
one to become incensed, to provoke to anger; pass. (Sept. 
often for 77M) fo be wroth: Mt. ii. 16. (In Grk. writ. 
fr. [ Aeschyl. 1 Hat. down.) * 

θύρα, -as, ἡ, (fr. θύω to rush in, prop. that through 
which a rush is made; hence Germ. Thiir [Eng. door ; 
Curtius § 8197), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for ΠῚ and 
na, sometimes also for 1j:w; α (house) door; [in plur. 
i. q. Lat. fores, folding doors; ef. W. 176 (166); B. 24 
(21); ef. πύλη]; a. prop.: κλείειν etc. τὴν 6., Mt. vi. 
3; LK. xiii. 25; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; Jn. xx. 19, 
26; Acts xxi. 30; ἀνοίγειν, Acts y. 19; pass. Acts xvi. 
26 sq.; κρούειν, Acts xii. 13; διὰ τῆς 6. Jn. x. 1 54. ; πρὸς 
τὴν θ., Mk. i. 33; xi. 4 [Tr  WHom. τήν; cf. W. 123 
(116)]; Acts ili. 2; τὰ πρὸς τὴν 6. the vestibule [so B. 
§ 125, 9; al. the space or parts at (near) the door], Mk. 
li. 2; πρὸς τῇ 6. Jn. xviii. 16; ἐπὶ τῇ 6. Acts v. 9; πρὸ 
τῆς 6. Acts xii. 6; ἐπὶ τῶν θυρῶν, Acts v. 23 [RG πρό]. 
Ὁ. θύρα is used of any opening like a door, an entrance, 
way or passage into: ἡ θ. τοῦ μνημείου, of the tomb, Mt. 
xxvii. 60; xxviii. 2RG; Mk. xv. 46; xvi. 3, (Hom. Od. 
9, 243; 12, 256; al.). c. in parable and metaph. we 
find a. ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων, the door through which 
the sheep go out and in, the name of him who brings 
salvation to those who follow his guidance, Jn. x. 7, 9; 
ef. Christ. Fr. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 20 
sqq-; (in Ignat. ad Philad. 9 Christ is called ἡ θύρα τοῦ 
πατρός, δι᾽ hs εἰσέρχονται ᾿Αβραὰμ.. - . καὶ of προφῆται; cf. 
Harnack on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,3sq.). β. ‘anopen 
door’ is used of the opportunity of doing something : τῆς 
πίστεως, of getting faith, Acts xiv. 27; open to a 
teacher, i. e. the opportunity of teaching others, 2 Co. 
li. 12; Col. iv. 3; by a bold combination of metaph. and 
literal language, the phrase θύρα μεγάλη x. ἐνεργής [A. V- 
a great door and effectual] is used of a large opportunity 


θυρεός 


of teaching a great multitude the way of salvation, and 
one encouraging the hope of the most successful results: 
1 Co. xvi. 9. γι. the door of the kingdom of heaven 
(likened to a palace) denotes the conditions which 
must be complied with in order to be received into the 
kingdom of God: Lk. xiii. 24 (for Rec. πύλης); power 
of entering, access into, God’s eternal kingdom, Rev. iii. 
8 cf. 7, [but al. al.; add here Rey. iv. 1]. δ. he whose 
advent is just at hand is said ἐπὶ θύραις εἶναι, Mt. xxiv. 
33; Mk. xiii. 29, and πρὸ θυρῶν ἑστηκέναι, Jas. v. 9. ε. 
ἑστηκὼς ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν k- κρούων is said of Christ seeking 
entrance into souls, and they who comply with his en- 
treaty are said ἀνοίγειν τ. θύραν, Rey. ili. 20.* 

θυρεός, -οὔ, 6, (fr. θύρα, because shaped like a door [ef. 
W. 287), α shield (Lat. scutwn); it was large, oblong, 
and four-cornered: τὸν 0. τῆς πίστεως, i. 4. THY πίστιν ὡς 
θυρεόν, Eph. vi. 16. It differs from ἀσπίς (Lat. clipeus), 
which was smaller and circular. [Polyb., Dion. Hal., 
Plut., al.]* 

θυρίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (dimin. of θύρα, prop. a little door; Plat., 
Dio Cass.), a window: Acts xx. 9; 2 Co. xi. 33. (Arstph., 
Theophr., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

θυρωρός, -οῦ, 5, ἡ, (fr. θύρα, and dpa care; cf. ἀρκυωρός, 
πυλωρύς, τιμωρός; cf. Curtius § 501, cf. p.101; [Vanicek 
p: 900; Allen in Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 129]), α door- 
keeper, porter; male or female janitor: masc., Mk. xiii. 
34; Jn. x.3; fem. Jn. xviii. 16 sq. ([Sappho], Aeschyl., 
Hat., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Joseph., al.; Sept.) * 

θυσία, -as, ἡ, (θύω), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. for 
m3) an offering, and Ni; @ sacrifice, victim; a. 
prop.: Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, fr. Hos. vi. 6; Mk. ix. 49 
({RGLTr txt. br.], see ἁλίζω) ; Eph. v. 2; Heb. x. 5, 
26; plur., Mk. xii. 33; Lk. xiii. 1; Heb. ix. 23; [x.1,8 
(here Ree. sing.) ]; ἀνάγειν θυσίαν τινί, Acts vii. 415 ava- 
φέρειν, Heb. vii. 27, (see ἀνάγω, and ἀναφέρω 2); [δοῦναι 
θ. Lk. ii. 24]; προσφέρειν, Acts vii. 42; Heb. v. 1; viii. 
3; x. [11], 12; [xi 4]; pass. Heb. ix. 9; διὰ τῆς θυσίας 
αὐτοῦ, by his sacrifice, i. e. by the sacrifice which he 
offered (not, by offering up himself; that would have 
been expressed by διὰ τῆς θυσίας τῆς ἑαυτοῦ, or διὰ τῆς 
ἑαυτοῦ θυσίας), Heb. ix. 26; ἐσθίειν τὰς θυσίας, to eat the 
flesh left over from the victims sacrificed (viz. at the 
sacrificial feasts; cf. [Lev. vii. 15 sqq.; Deut. xii. 7 sq. 
17 sq., ete.] Win. RWB. s. v. Opfermahlzeiten), 1 Co. x. 
18. Ὁ. in expressions involving a comparison: θυσίαι 
πνευματικαί (see πνευματικός, 3 a.), 1 Pet. ii. 5; θυσία, a 
free gift, which is likened to an offered sacrifice, Phil. 
iv. 18; Heb. xiii. 16 (τοιαύταις θυσίαις, i. 6. with such 
things as substitutes for sacrifices God is well pleased) ; 
θυσία ζῶσα (see ζάω, II. b. fin.), Ro. xii. 1; ἀναφέρειν 
θυσίαν αἰνέσεως, Heb. xiii. 15 (if this meant, as it can 
mean, αἴνεσιν ὡς θυσίαν, the author would not have 


294 


θώμαξ 


added, as he has, the explanation of the words; he 
must therefore be supposed to have reproduced the 
Hebr. phrase ΤΠ ΓΙ ΤΊ3], and then defined this more 
exactly; Lev. vii. 3 (13) [ef. 2 (12)]; Ps. evi. (evii.) 22; 
see αἴνεσις); ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ .. . τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν (epex. 
gen.), in the work of exciting, nourishing, increasing, 
your faith, as if in providing a sacrifice to be offered to 
God [ef. ἐπί, p. 233° bot.], Phil. ii. 17.* 

θυσιαστήριον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. θυσιαστήριος 
[ef. W. 96 (91)], and this fr. θυσιάζω to sacrifice), a word 
found only in Philo [e. g. vita Moys. iii. § 10, cf. § 7; 
Joseph. antt. 8,4, 1] and the bibl. and 660}. writ.; Sept. 
times without number for 931; prop. an altar for the 
slaying and burning of victims; used of 1. the altar 
of whole burnt-offerings which stood in the court of the 
priests in the temple at Jerusalem [B. D. s. v. Altar]: 
Mt. v. 23 sq.; xxiii. 18-20, 35; Lk. xi. 51; 1 Co. ix. 13; 
x. 18; Heb. vii. 13; Rev. xi. 1. 2. the altar of incense, 
which stood in the sanctuary or Holy place [B. D. u. s.]: 
τὸ θυσιαστ. τοῦ θυμιάματος, Lk. i. 11 (Ex. xxx. 1); [sym- 
bolically] in Heaven: Rev. vi. 9; viii. 3, 5; ix. 13; xiv. 
USis van ἢ. 3. any other altar, Jas. ii. 21; plur. Ro. 
xi. 3; metaph., the cross on which Christ suffered an 
expiatory death: to eat of this altar i. e. to appropriate 
to one’s self the fruits of Christ’s expiatory death, Heb. 
xiii. 10.* 

θύω ; impf. ἔθυον ; 1 aor. ἔθυσα; Pass., pres. inf. θύε- 
σθαι; pf. ptep. τεθυμένος; 1 aor. ἐτύθην (1 Co. v. 7, where 
Rec." "* ἐθύθην, οἵ. W. § 5, 1d.12); [fr. Hom. down]; 
Sept. mostly for N31, also for unw, to slay ; 1. to sac- 
rifice, immolate: absol. Acts xiv. 13; τινί, dat. of pers. 
(in honor of one), Acts xiv. 18; τινί t1,1Co. x. 306. 2. 
to slay, kill: absol., Acts x.13; xi. 7; τί, Lk. xv. 23, 27, 
30; pass. Mt. xxii. 4; τὸ πάσχα, the paschal lamb, Mk. 
xiv. 12; pass., Lk. xxii. 7; 1 Co. v. 7, (Deut. xvi. 2, 6). 
3. to slaughter: absol. Jn. x. 10; τινά, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 
24; 1 Mace. vii. 19.* 

Θωμᾶς, -ἃ, ὁ, (DIN [i. 6. twin], see δίδυμος), Thomas, 
one of Christ’s apostles : Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 
15; Jn. xi. 16; xiv. 5; xx. 24-29 [in 29 Ree. only]; xxi. 
2; Actsi. 18. [B: Dis. ὙΠ" 

θώραξ, -axos, ὁ; 1. the breast, the part of the body 
from the neck to the navel, where the ribs end, (Aristot. 
hist. an. 1, 7 [cf. 8, p. 491", 28]; Eur., Plat., al.): Rev. 
ix. 9 [some refer this to the next head]. 2. a breast- 
plate or corselet consisting of two parts and protecting 
the body on both sides from the neck to the middle, 
(Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.): Rev. ix. 9,17; ἐνδύεσθαι 
τ. θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης, i. 6. δικαιοσύνην ὡς θώρακα, 
Eph. vi. 14; θώρακα πίστεως, i. 6. πίστιν ὡς θώρακα, 1 Th. 
ν. 8, (ἐνδύεσθαι δικαιοσύνην ὡς θώρακα, Is. lix. 17; ἐνδ. 
θώρακα δικαιοσύνην, Sap. v. 19 (18)).* 


295 


Tye 


[1, «: on iota subscript in Mss. and edd. of the N. T. see 
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 3 sqq.; Scrivener, Introd. etc. 
p- 42, and Index II. s.v.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. Vat., 
praef. p. xi. sq.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 109; WH. Intr. §410; W. 
8 5,4; B. pp. 11, 44sq., 69; and 8. vv. ἀθῷος, (Gov, Ἡρῴδης 
etc., πρῷρα, Τρῳάς, gdv. ι is often substituted for εἰ, esp. in 
nouns ending in ea (ca; on their accent see Chandler § 95 
sqq.), in proper names, etc.; cf. WH. App. p. 153; Intr. 
8899; Tdf. Proleg. pp. 83, 86 sq.; Scrivener, Introd. ete. p. 
10 sq.; Soph. Lex. 5. v. ΕἸ; Meisterhans p. 23 sq.; (on the 
usage of the Mss. ef. Tdf. Conlatio critica cod. Sin. c. text. 
Elz. ete. p. xviii.; Scrivener, Full Collation of the cod. Sin. 
etc. 2d ed. p. lii.). Examples of this spelling in recent edi- 
tions are the following: ayvia WH, ἀλαζονία T WH, ἀναιδία 'T 
WH, ἀπειθία WH (exc. Heb. iv. 6,11), ἀρεσκία T WH, δουλία 
T, ἐθελοθρησκία T WH, εἰδωλολατρία WH, εἰλικρινία T WH, 
ἐπιεικία WH, ἐριθία WH, ἑρμηνία WH, θρησκία 'T, ἱερατία 
WH, κακοηθία WH, κακοπαθία WH, κολακία T WH, κυβία T 
WH, μαγία T WH, μεθοδία T WH, ὀφθαλμοδουλία T WH, 
παιδία T (everywhere; see his note on Heb. xii. 5), xpayuaria 
T WH, πραὐπαθία T WH, φαρμακία T WH (now in Gal. v. 20), 
ὠφελία WH, ᾿Ατταλία T WH, Καισαρία T WH, Λαοδικία T 
WH,Sapapia T WH (Sauapirns, Sauapiris,T), Σελευκία TWH, 
Φιλαδελφία T WH; occasionally the same substitution occurs 
in other words: e.g. αἴγιος WH, ἤΑριος (πάγος) T, δανίζω T 
WH, δάνιον ΝΥ Η,δανιστής T WH, εἰδώλιον T WH, ἐξαλιφθῆναι 
WH, Ἐπικούριος T WH, ἡμίσια WH (see ἥμισυς), καταλελιμ- 
μένος WH, λίμμα WH, Νεφθαλίμ WE in Rev. vii. 6, ὀρινός 
WH, πιθός WH, σκοτινός WH, ὑπόλιμμα WH, φωτινός WH, 
χρεοφιλέτης (T?) WH; also in augm., as ἱστήκειν WH, ἴδον 
(see εἴδω I. init.); cf. WH. App. p. 162%. On ἐ as a dem- 
onst. addition to adverbs ete., see νυνί ad init. On the use 
and the omission of the mark of diresis with ὁ in certain 
words, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 108; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. 


p- 136 sqq.| 


*Ideupos, -ου [cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, (Ws [i. 6. whom Jeho- 
vah enlightens], Num. xxxii. 41), Jairus [pron. Ja-i-rus], 
aruler of the synagogue, whose daughter Jesus restored 
to life: Mk. v. 22; Lk. viii. 41. [Cf. B. Ὁ. Am. ed.s. v.]* 

Ἰακώβ, ὁ, (apy [i. e. heel-catcher, supplanter]), Ja- 
cob; 1. the second of Isaac’s sons: Mt.i. 2; viii. 113 
Jn. iv. 5 sq.; Acts vii. 8; Ro. ix. 13, ete. Hebraistically 
i. q. the descendants of Jacob: Ro. xi. 26, (Num. xxiii. 7; 
Is. xli. 8; Jer. [Hebr. txt.] xxxiii. 26; Sir. xxiii. 12; 1 
Mace. iii. 7, and often). 2. the father of Joseph, 
the husband of Mary the mother of the Saviour: Mt. i. 
15 sq. 

᾿Ιάκωβος, -ov, 6, (see the preceding word [and cf. B. 6, 
18 (16) ]), James; 1. son of Zebedee, an apostle, and 
brother of the apostle John, (commonly called James the 
greater or elder). He was slain with the sword by the 
command of king Herod Agrippa I. (c. a. p. 44): Mt. iv. 
21; x. 2 (8); xvii. 1; Mk. i. 19, 29; iii. 17; v. 37; ix. 


Ἰαμβρῆς 


2; Χ. 85, 41; xiii. 3; xiv. 88; ΓΚ. ν. 10; vi.14; viii. 51; 

28,54; Actsi.13; xii. 2. 2. James (commonly 
called the less), an apostle, son of Alpheus: Mt. x. 3; 
Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; Actsi.13; apparently identical ἡ 
with ᾿Ιάκωβος ὁ μικρός James the little [A. V. the less], the 
son of Mary, Mk. xv. 40 (Mt. xxvii. 56); xvi. 1, wife of 
Cleophas [i. 6. Clopas q. v.] or Alpheus, Jn. xix. 25; see 
in ᾿Αλφαῖος, and in Μαρία, 3. 3. James, the brother ' 
of our Lord (see ἀδελφός, 1): Mt. xiii.55; Mk. vi. 3; Gal. 
i. 19 (where εἰ μή is employed ace. to a usage illustrated 
under εἰ, III. 8 ο. B.); ii. 9,12; Acts xii. 17; xv. 13; xxi. 
18; 1 Co. xv. 7 (?); Jas. i. 1, the leader of the Jewish 
Christians, and by them surnamed ὁ δίκαιος the Just, the 
overseer (or bishop) of the church at Jerusalem down to 
the year 62 or 63 (or ace. to Hegesippus in Euseb. ἢ. 6. 2, 
23 [trans. in B. D. p. 1206] down to 69, which is hardly 
probable [see Heinichen’s note ad loc.]), in which year 
he suffered martyrdom, Joseph. antt. 20, 9,1. In opposi- 
tion to the orthodox opinion [defended in Β. Ὁ. 8. v. 
James], which identifies this James with James the son 
of Alpheus, and understands ὁ ἀδελφὸς τοῦ κυρίου to mean 
his cousin, ef. esp. Clemen in Winer’s Zeitschr. f. wis- 
sensch. Theol. for 1829, p. 351 sqq.; Blom, Diss. de τοῖς 
ἀδελφοῖς... τοῦ κυρίου. Lugd. 1839; Wilib. Grimm in 
Ersch u. Gruber’s Encycl., Sect. 2, vol. 23 p. 80 sqq.; 
Schaff, Das Verhiltniss des Jacobus, Bruders des Herrn, 
zu Jacobus Alphiii. Berl. 1842 [also his Church Hist. 
(1882) i. 272sq.]; Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief ete. p. 138 
sqq-; Hausrath in Schenkel iii. p. 175 sqq.; [Sieffert in 
Herzog ed. 2, vi. 464 sqq.; and reff. 5. v. ἀδελφός, 1 (esp. 
Bp. Lghtft.) ]. 4. Anunknown James, father of the 
apostle Judas [or Jude]: Lk. vi. 16; Acts i. 13, ace. to 
the opinion of those interpreters who think that not 
ἀδελφόν but υἱόν must be supplied in the phrase Ἰούδαν 
᾿Ιακώβου; see ἸΙούδας, 8. 

ἴαμα, -ros, τό, (ἰάομαι) ; 1. a means of healing, rem- 
edy, medicine; (Sap. xi. 4; xvi. 9; Hdt. 3, 130; Thue. 
2,51; Polyb. 7, 14, 2; Plut., Leian., al.). 2. a heal- 
ing: plur., 1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; (Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 6, ete. ; 
Plat. lege. 7 p. 790 d.).* 

ἸἸΙαμβρῆς, ὁ, and ὁ ᾿Ιαννῆς [οἵ. B. 20 (18)], Jambres 
(for which the Vulg. seems to have read Μαμβρῆς, as in 
the Babylonian Talmud tract. Menach. ὁ. 9 in the Ge- 
mara; cf. Buxtorf, Lex. Talm. p. 945 sq. [p. 481 sq. ed. 
Fischer]), and Jannes, two Egyptian magicians who in 
the presence of Pharaoh imitated the miracles of Aaron 
in order to destroy his influence with the king: 2 Tim. 
iii. 8 (cf. Ex. vii. 11 sq.). The author of the Epistle de- 
rived their names from the tradition of the Talmudists 
and the Rabbins, [cf. B.D. art. Jannes and Jambres]. 


*lavva 


These Magi are mentioned not only in the tract of the 
Babyl. Talmud just referred to, but also in the Targ. 
of Jonath. on Ex. vii. 11; the book Sohar on Num. xxii. 
22; Numenius περὶ τἀγαθοῦ in Orig. ο. Cels. 4, 51; Euseb. 
praep. evang. 9, 8; Evang. Nicod. ο. 5, and other writ. 
enumerated by Thilo in his Cod. apoer. p. 552 sq. ; [and 
Wetstein on 2 Tim. |. c¢.; Holtzmann ibid. p. 140 sq.].* 

"Tawa, (1, T Tr WH Ἰανναί) ; Jannai, Vulg. Janne 
[Tdf. txt. (cod. Amiat.) Jannae], indecl. prop. name of 
one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 24.* 

᾿Ιαννῆς. 6, see ᾿Ιαμβρῆς. 

tdopat, -ὥμαι : [perh. fr. ἰός, Lob. Technol. p. 157 sq. ; 
ef. Vanitek p. 87]; a depon. verb, whose pres., impf. 
ἰώμην, fut. ἰάσομαι, and 1 aor. mid. ἰασάμην have an act. 
siznif., but whose pf. pass. ἴαμαι, 1 aor. pass. ἰάθην, and 
1 fut. pass. ἰαθήσομαι have a pass. signif. (cf. Kriiger § 40 
s.v.; [Veitch s. v.; B.52 (46); W.§ 38, 7¢.]); [fr. Hom. 
down]; Sept. for 831; to heal, cure: τινά, Lk. iv. 18 R 
L br.; v. 17; vi. 19; ix. 2 [here T WH om. Tr br. the 
ace.], 11, 42; xiv. 4; xxii. 51; Jn. iv. 47; Acts ix. 34; 
x. 38; xxviii. 8; pass., Mt. viii. 8, 13; xv. 28; Lk. vii. 7; 
viii. 47; xvii. 15; Jn. v. 13 [Tdf. ἀσθενῶν); and Acts iii. 
11 Ree.; τινὰ ἀπό τινος. to cure (i. 6. by curing to free) 
one of [lit. from; ef. B. 322 (277)] a disease: pass., Mk. 
v. 29; Lk. vi. 18 (17). trop. to make whole i. e. to free 
from errors and sins, to bring about (one’s) salvation: 
Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) ; 
pass., 1 Pet. ii. 24; Jas. v.16; in fig. discourse, in pass.: 
Heb. xii. 18." 

Ἰαρέδ (T WII Ἰάρετ, Lehm. Ἰάρεθ; [on the accent in 
codd. see Tif. Proleg. p. 103]), 6, (Heb. 17> descent), 
Jared, indecl. prop. name (Ἰαράδης [᾿Ἰαρέδες, ed. Bekk. ] 
in Joseph. antt. 1, 2, 2), the father of Enoch (Gen. v. 
15,18; 1 Chr.i. 2 [here A. V. Jered]): Lk. iii. 37." 

ἴασις, -ews, ἡ, α healing, cure: Lk. xiii. 32; Actsiv. 22, 
30. (Prov. iii. 8; iv. 22; [Archil.], Hippocr., Soph., 
Plat., Leian., al.) * 

ἴασπις, -Sos, ἡ, [fr. Plato down], jasper; a precious 
stone of divers colors (for some are purple, others blue, 
others creen, and others of the color of brass; Plin. ἢ. n. 
37,37 (8)): Rev. iv. 3; xxi.11,18sq. [But many think 
(questionably) the diamond to be meant here; others the 
precious opal; see Riehm, AWB. 5. v. Edelsteine, 8 and 
10; B. D.s. v. Jasper; ef. ‘ Bible Educator’ ii. 352.] * 

Ἰάσων, -ovos, 6, Jason, a Thessalonian, Paul’s host : 
Acts xvii. 5-7, 9; whether he is the same who is men- 
tioned in Ro. xvi. 21 as a kinsman of Paul is uncertain." 

ἰατρός, -ov, 6, (ἰάομαι), [fr. Hom. down], a physician: 
Mt. ix. 12; Mk. ii. 17; v. 26; Lk. v. 31; viii. 43 [here 
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the el.]; Col. iv. 14; iarpé, θεράπευ- 
gov σεαυτόν, a proverb, applied to Christ in this sense: 
‘come forth from your lowly and mean condition and 
create for yourself authority and influence by perform- 
ing miracles among us also, that we may see that you 
are what you profess to be,’ Lk. iv. 23.* 

ἰδέ [so occasionally Grsb. and Rec. ες e. ¢. Gal. ν. 
2; Ro. xi. 22] and (later) ἴδε (ἰδέ ἀττικῶς ὡς τὸ εἰπέ, 
λαβέ. εὑρέ: ἴδε ἑλληνικῶς, Moeris [p. 193 ed. Pierson]: 


296 


ἴδιος 


cf. W. § Θ, 1 4.; [B. 62 (54)]), impv. fr. εἶδον, q. v.; [fr. 
Hom. down]. In so far as it retains the force of an 
imperative it is illustrated under εἴδω, I. 1 e. and 3. 
But in most places in the N. Τὶ it stands out of con- 
struction like an interjection, even when many are ad- 
dressed, [cf. B. 70 (61); and esp. 139 (121 sq.)]; Lat. 
en, ecce; see! behold! lo! a. at the beginning of 
sentences: as the utterance of one who wishes that 
something should not be neglected by another, Mt. xxvi. 
65; Mk. ii. 24; xi. 21; xili.1; Jn. v.14; xviii. 21; Ro. 
ii. 17 Ree.; equiv. to Germ. sieh’ doch [see, pray; yet 
see], Jn. xi. 86; xvi. 29; xix.4; Gal. v. 2; or of one 
who brings forward something new and unexpected, Jn. 
vii. 26; xi. 3; xii. 19; or of one pointing out or show- 
ing, Germ. hier ist, da ist, dieses ist: ἴδε ὁ τόπος (French, 
voici le lieu), Mk. xvi. 6; add, Mk. iii. 34 (L Trmrg. 
idov); Jn. i. 29, 36,47 (48); xix.5[T Tr WII ἰδού], 14, 
26 sq. (where some ἰδού) ; where we [might] use simply 
here, Mt. xxv. 25; with adverbs of place: ἴδε [RGL 
ἰδοὺ] ὧδε 6 Χριστός, ἴδε [RG ἰδοὺ] ἐκεῖ, Mk. xiii. 21. ὍὌ. 
inserted into the midst of a sentence, in such a way that 
the words which precede it serve to render the more evi- 
dent the strangeness of what follows: Mt. xxv. 20, 22; 
Jn. iii. 26. 

ἰδέα, -as, ἡ, (fr. εἶδον, ἰδεῖν), form, external appearance; 
aspect, look: Mt. xxviii. 3 (T Tr WH «idéa, q. v.), cf. 
Alberti, Observy. ad loc.; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81]. (Grk. 
writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; 2 Mace. iii. 16; for ΠΥ 
Gen. v. 3.) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 182, 3.]* 

ἴδιος, -a, -ov, (in prof. auth. [esp. Attic] also of two 
term.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. pertaining to one’s self, 
one’s own; used a. univ. of what is one’s own as opp. 
to belonging to another: τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα, Jn. x. 3 sq. 12; 
τὰ ἱμάτια τὰ ἴδια, Mk. xv. 20 RG Tr (for which T τὰ ἴδ. 
in. αὐτοῦ, L WII τὰ ig. αὐτοῦ); τὸ ἴδιον (for his own use) 
κτῆνος, Lk. x. 34; διὰ τοῦ ἰδίου αἵματος, Heb. ix. 12; xiii. 
12, (ἰδίῳ αἵματι, 4 Mace. vii. 8); τὸ ἴδιον μίσθωμα, which 
he had hired for himself (opp. to ἡ ξενία [q. v-], 23), Acts 
xxviii. 30; add, Jn. v.43; vii. 18; Acts iii. 12; xiil. 36; 
Ro. xi. 24; xiv. 4 sq.3 1 Co. iii. 8 (ἴδιον κόπον) ; vi. 185 
vii. 4,37; ix. 7; xi. 21; Gal. vi.5; 1 Tim. ill. 4,12; v. 
4; 2 Tim.i.9; iv. 3; πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, to do one’s own 
business (and not intermeddle with the affairs of others), 
1 Th. iv. 11; ἰδία ἐπίλυσις, an interpretation which one 
thinks out for himself, opp. to that which the Holy Spirit 
teaches, 2 Pet. i. 20 [see γίνομαι, 5 6. α.}]; τὴν ἰδίαν δικαιο- 
σύνην, which one imagines is his due, opp. to δικαιοσύνη 
θεοῦ, awarded by God, Ro. x. 3; ἰδία ἐπιθυμία, opp. to di- 
vine prompting, Jas. i. 14; κατὰ ras ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, opp. 
to God’s requirements, 2 Tim. iv. 3; with the possess. 
pron. αὐτῶν added [B. 118 (103); ef. W. 154 (146)], 2 
Pet. iii. 3; ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης, Tit. i. 12; with αὐτοῦ 
added, Mk. xv. 20 Tdf. (see above) ; τὰ ἴδια [ef. B. § 127, 
24], those things in which one differs from others, his nat- 
ure and personal character, —in the phrase ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων 
λαλεῖν, Jn. viii. 44; [ef. the fig. ra ἴδια τοῦ σώματος, 2 Co. 
y. 10 Lmrg. (cf. Trmrg.); see διά, A. I. 2]; ἴδιος, my 
own: ταῖς ἰδίαις γερσί (unassisted by others), 1 Co. iv. 


ἐδιώτης 


12; thine own: ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ, LK. vi. 41. Ῥ. οἵ 
what pertains to one’s property, family, dwelling, country, 
ete.; of property, οὐδὲ εἷς τι τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν 
ἴδιον εἶναι, Acts iv. 32; τὰ ἴδια, res nostrae, our own things, 
i. e. house, family, property, Lk. xviii. 28 LT Tr WH [cf. 
B. § 127, 24; W. 592 (551)]; τῇ ἰδίᾳ γενεᾷ, in his own 
generation, i. 6. in the age in which he lived, Acts xiii. 36 ; 
ἡ ἰδία πόλις, the city of which one is a citizen or inhabi- 
tant, Lk. ii. 3[ RG Trmrg.]; Mt. ix.1; τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ, 
in their native tongue, Acts i. 19 [WH om. Tr br. ἰδίᾳ]; 
ii. 6,85 ἡ ἰδία δεισιδαιμονία, their own (national) religion, 
Acts xxv. 19; οἱ ἴδιοι, one’s own people (Germ. die An- 
gehorigen), one’s fellow-countrymen, associates, Jn. i. 11, 
ef. 2 Mace. xii. 22; one’s household, persons belonging to 
the house, family, or company, Jn. xiii. 1; Acts iv. 23; 
xxiv. 23; 1 Tim. v. 8; εἰς τὰ ἴδια (Germ. in die Heimat), 
to one’s native land, home, Jn. i. 11 (meaning here, the 
land of Israel) ; xvi. 32; xix. 27, (3 Mace. vi. 27; 1 Esdr. 
v. 46 (47); for j77a-bx, Esth. v. 10; vi. 12); ὁ ἴδιος ἀνήρ, 
a husband, 1 Co. vii. 2 [B. 117 (102) note; cf. W. 154 
(146) ]; plur., Eph. v. 22; Tit. ii.5; 1 Pet. iii. 1,5; Eph. 
v. 24 RG; Col. iii. 18 R; οἱ ἴδιοι δεσπόται (of slaves), Tit. 
ii. 9. οὗ a person who may be said to belong to one, 
above all others: vids, Ro. viii. 32; πατήρ, Jn. v. 18; pa- 
θηταί, Mk. iv. 34 T WH Tr mrg. ο. harmonizing with, 
or suitable or assigned to, one’s nature, character, aims, 
acts; appropriate: τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ, Acts i. 7; τὸν ἴδιον 
μισθόν, due reward, 1 Co. iii. 8; τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα, 1 Co. xv. 
38; κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν, Mt. xxv. 15; ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ 
τάγματι, 1 Co. xv. 38 ; τὸ ἴδιον οἰκητήριον, Jude 6; εἰς τὸν 
τόπον τὸν ἴδιον, to the abode after death assigned by God 
to one ace. to his deeds, Acts i. 25 (Ignat. ad Magnes. 5; 
Baal Turim on Num. xxiv. 25 Balaam ivit in locum suum, 
i.e. in Gehennam; see τόπος, 1 a. fin.) ; καιρῷ ἰδίῳ, at a 
time suitable to the matter in hand [A. V. in due season], 
Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi. 15; Tit. i. 3. d. By 
a usage foreign to the earlier Greeks, but found in the 
church Fathers and the Byzant. writ. (see W. § 22, 7; 
ef. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 208 sq.; [B. 117 sq. (103)]), 
it takes the place of the poss. pron. αὐτοῦ: Mt. xxii. 5; 
xxv. 14; Jn. i. 41 (42), (Sap. x. 1). 2. private (in 
class. Grk. opp. to δημόσιος, κοινός) : ἰδίᾳ [οἵ. W. 591 
(549) note] adv. severally, separately, 1 Co. xii. 11 (often 
in Grk. writ.). κατ᾽ ἐδίαν (se. χώραν), a. apart: Mt. 
xiv. 13; xvii. 19; xx.17; xxiv. 3; Mk. vi. 31 sq.; vii. 
33; ix. 2, 28; xiii. 3; Lk. ix. 10; x. 23; Acts xxiii. 19, 
(Polyb. 4, 84,8); with μόνος added, Mk. ix. 2; - B. in 
private, privately: Mk. iv. 34; Gal. ii. 2, (Diod. 1, 21, 
opp. to κοινῇ, 2 Mace. iv. 5; Ignat. ad Smyrn. 7, 2). 
The word is not found in Rev. 

ἰδιώτης, -ov, ὁ, (ἴδιος), very com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
down; prop. a privale person, opp. to a magistrate, ruler, 
king; but the noun has many other meanings also, each 
one of which is understood from its antithesis, as e. g. 
a common soldier, as opp. to a military officer; a writer 
of prose, as opp. to a poet. In the N. T. an unlearned, 
illiterate, man, opp. to the learned, the educated: Acts 
iv. 13; as often in class. Grk., unskilled in any art: in 


297 


᾿Ιδουμαία 


eloquence (Isocr. p. 48 a.), with dat. of respect, τῷ λόγῳ, 
2 Co. xi. 6 [A. V. rude in speech]; a Christian who is 
not a prophet, 1 Co. xiv. 24; destitute of the ‘gift of 
tongues,’ ibid. 16, 23. [Cf. Trench § Ixxix.]* 

ἰδού, a demonstrative particle, [in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. 
down], found in the N. T. esp. in the Gospels of Matthew 
and of Luke, used very often in imitation of the Hebr. 
nan, and giving a peculiar vivacity to the style by bid- 
ding the reader or hearer to attend to what is said: be- 
hold! see! lo! It is inserted in the discourse after a 
gen. absol., Mt. i. 20; ii. 1, 13; ix. 18; xii. 46; xvii. 5; 
Xxvi.47; xxviii. 11. καὶ ἰδού is used, when at the close 
of a narrative something new is introduced, Mt. ii. 9; 
ili. 16; iv. 11; viii. 2, 24, 29,32, 34; ix. 2 54. 20; xii. 10; 
KV 224 ΧΥΙ- Ss) KIX. 10... eva. 91; ΧΧΥΪ. 51: ΧΧΥΤΙ ὦ, 
7; Lk. i. 20, 31, 36; ii. 9[R GL Tr br. ], 25; ix. 30, 38 sq.; 
x. 25; xiv. 2; xxiv.13; Acts xii.7; xvi.1; when a thing 
is specified which is unexpected yet sure, 2 Co. vi. 9 
(καὶ ἰδοὺ ζῶμεν, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4; 
when a thing is specified which seems impossible and 
yet occurs, Lk. xi. 41; Acts xxvii. 24. The simple ἰδού 
is the exclamation of one pointing out something, 
Mt. xii. 2, 47[ WH here in mre. only]; xiii. 3; xxiv. 26; 
Mk. iii. 32; Lk. ii.34; and calling attention, Mk. xv. 35 
[T Tr WH ἴδε]; Lk. xxii. 10; Jn. iv. 35; 1 Co. xv. 51; 
2 Co. v. 17; Jas. v.9; Jude 14; Rev. i. 7; ix. 12; 
xi. 14; xvi.15; xxii. 7 [Rec.]; in other places it is i. q. 
observe or consider: Mt. x. 16; xi. 8; xix. 27; xx. 18; 
xxii. 4; Mk. x. 28, 33; xiv.41; Lk. ii. 48; vii. 25; xviii. 
28, 31, etc.; also καὶ ἰδού, Mt. xxviii. 20; Lk. xiii. 30; 
ἰδοὺ γάρ, Lk. i. 44, 48; ii. 10; vi. 23; xvii. 21; Acts ix. 
11; 2 Co. vii. 11; ἰδού where examples are adduced: 
Jas. iii. 4sq.; ν. 4, 7,11; for the Hebr. 1337, so that it 
includes the copula: Lk. i. 88; i. q. here J am: Acts 
ix. 10; Heb. ii. 13. ἰδού is inserted in the midst of a 
speech, Mt. xxiii. 34 [here WH mrg. Ἰδοὺ (see the 
Comm.)]; LK. xiii.16; Acts ii. 7; xiii. 11; xx. 22, 25. 
The passages of the O. T. containing the particle which 
are quoted in the New are these: Mt. i. 23; xi. 10; xii. 
18; xxi.5; Mk.i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; Jn. xii. 15; Ro. ix. 33; 
Heb. ii.13; viii. 8; x. 7,9; 1 Pet.ii.6. Like the Hebr. 
737, ἰδού and καὶ ἰδού stand before a nominative which 
is not followed by a finite verb, in such a way as to in- 
clude the copula or predicate [ef. B. 139 (121 sq.)]: e. g. 
was heard, Mt. iii. 17; is, is or was here, exists, etc., Mt. 
xii. 10 LT Tr WH, 41; Mk. xiii. 21 RGL; Lk. v.12, 
18; vii. 37; xi.31; xiii. 11 (RG add ἦν) ; xvii. 21; xix. 
2, 20; xxii. 38, 47; xxiii. 50; Jn. xix. 26 [Rec., 27 RG]; 
Acts viii. 27, 36; 2 Co. vi. 2; Rev. vi. 2, 5, 8; vii. 9 [not 
L]; xii. 3; xiv. 14; xix. 11; xxi. 3; is approaching, Mt. 
xxv. 6 GLT Tr WH (Ree. adds ἔρχεται) ; but also in 
such a way as to have simply a demonstrative force: 
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. 

᾿Ιδουμαία, -as, ἡ, Jdumea, the name of a region be- 
tween southern Palestine and Arabia Petrea, inhabited 
by Esau or Edom (Gen. xxxvi. 30) and his posterity 
(the Edomites), (Josh. xv. 1, 21; xi. 17; xii. 7). The 
Edomites were first subjugated by David; but after 


ἱδρως 


his death they disputed Solomon’s authority and in the 
reign of Joram recovered their liberty, which they main- 
tained, transmitting from generation to generation their 
hatred of Israel, until they were conquered again by 
Hyreanus and subjected to the government of the Jews: 
Mk. iii. 8. [For details of boundary and history, see 
Bertheau in Schenkel and Porter in B. D.s. v. Edom; 
also the latter in Kitto’s Cycl. s. ν. Idumza.]* 

ἱδρώς, -Gros, ὁ, [allied w. Lat. sudor, Eng. sweat ; Cur- 
tius § 283; fr. Hom. down], sweat: Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. 
WHI reject the pass.; (Tr accents ἱδρῶς, yet cf. Chandler 
§ 667)].* 

Ἰεζάβελ ([so GT WH, L ‘teg.; Tr -βέλ 1; Ree. Ἰεζα- 
Bnd), ἡ, (Oars [‘perh. intact, chaste; cf. Agnes’ (Ge- 
senius)]), Jezebel [mod. Isabel], wife of Ahab ({e.] B. c. 
917-897; 1 K. xvi. 29), an impious and cruel queen, 
who protected idolatry and persecuted the prophets (1 
K. xvi. 31-2 K. ix. 30); in Rev. ii. 20 1, 4. a second Jez- 
ebel, the symbolic name of a woman who pretended to 
be a prophetess, and who, addicted to antinomianism, 
claimed for Christians the liberty of eating things sacri- 
ficed to idols, Rey. ii. 20.* 

Ἱεράπολις [ WH Ἱερὰ Πόλις ; ef. B. 74; Lob. ad Phryn. 
604 sq.], -ews, ἡ, Hierapolis, a city of Greater Phrygia, 
near the river Maeander[or rather, near the Lycus a few 
miles above its junction with the Maeander], not far 
from Colosse and Laodicea, now Pambuck Kulasi, [for 
reff. see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p.1sq.; B.D. Am. ed.s. v.]: 
Col. iv. 13.* 

ἱερατεία [WH -ria; cf.I,¢], -as, ἡ, (ἑερατεύω), the priest- 
hood, the office of priest: Lk. i. 9; Heb. vii. 5. (Sept. for 
7973; Aristot. pol. 7,8; Dion. Hal.; Boeckh, Inserr. ii. 
pp. 127, 23; 363, 27.) * 

ἱεράτευμα, -ros, τό, (iepate’w), [ priesthood i. e.] a. 
the office of priest. b. the order or body of priests (see 
ἀδελφότης, αἰχμαλωσία, διασπορά, θεραπεία) ; so Christians 
are called, because they have access to God and offer 
not external but ‘spiritual’ (πνευματικά) sacrifices: 1 
Pet. ii. 5; also ἱεράτ. βασίλειον, ib. 9 (after Ex. xix. 6 
Sept.), priests of kingly rank, i. e. exalted to a moral 
rank and freedom which exempts them from the control 
of every one but God and Christ. ([Ex. xxiii. 22, ete.; 
2 Mace. ii. 17]; not found in prof. auth.) * 

ἱερατεύω ; (fr. ἱεράομαι and the verbal adj. ἱερατός, 
though this adj. does not occur) ; to be priest, discharge 
the priest’s office, be busied in sacred duties: Lk. i. 8. 
(Joseph. antt. 3, 8,1; Hdian. 5, 6, 6 [8 ed. Bekk.]; Pau- 
san., Heliod., Inscrr. [see L. and 5.1; Sept. for 1773.) * 

‘Teperx, see Ἱεριχώ. 

Ἱερεμίας [WH Ἴερ. (see their Intr. § 408); so Rec. 
in Mt. xxvii. 9], -ov [B. 17 (16), 8], 6, (MV or DY, 
i. gq. 7 19% ‘Jehovah casts forth’ (his enemies?), or 
‘ Jehovah hurls’ (his thunderbolts?); ef. Bleek, Einl. in 
das A. T. § 206 p. 469, [ef. B. D. s. v. Jeremiah]), Jere- 
miah [A. V. also Jeremias, Jeremy], a famous Hebrew 
prophet, who prophesied from [67 Β. c. 627 until the de- 
struction of Jerusalem [B.c. 586]. He afterwards de- 
parted into Egypt,where he appears to have died; [cf. 


298 


ἱερόν 
B. Ὁ. 5. v. Jeremiah, I. 67: Με. 11.17; xvi. 14; xxvii. 9 (in 
the last pass. his name is given by mistake, for the words 
quoted are found in Zech. xi. 12 sq.; [ef. Prof. Brown in 
Journ. of Soe. for Bibl. Lit. and Exeg. for Dee. 1882, p. 
101 sqq.; Toy, Quot. in N. T. p. 68 sqq.; for a history 
of attempted explanations, see Dr. Jas. Morison, Com. 
on Mt. 1. c.]).* 

ἱερεύς, -€ws, ὁ, (ἱερός), [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. 1113, a 
priest; one who offers sacrifices and in general is busied 
with sacred rites ; a. prop., of the priests of the 
Gentiles, Acts xiv. 13; of the priests of the Jews, Mt. 
Vili. 4; xii. 4 sq.; Mk. i. 44; [11. 26]; Lk.i.5; v. 14; 
Jn. i. 19; Heb. vii. [14 L T Tr WH], 20 (21); viii. 4, 
ete.; of the high-priest, Acts v. 24 RG (Ex. xxxy. 18; 
1 K.i. 8; 1 Mace. xv. 1; Joseph. antt. 6, 12,1); and 
in the same sense Christ is called ἱερεύς in Heb. v. 6 (fr. 
Ps. cix. (ex.) 4); Heb. vii. 17; also ἱερεὺς μέγας, Heb. 
x. 21 (see ἀρχιερεύς, 3) [al. take the adj. here not as 
blending with iep. into a technical or official appellation, 
but as descriptive, great; cf. iv. 14]. b. metaph. of 
Christians, because, purified by the blood of Christ and 
brought into close intercourse with God, they devote 
their life to him alone (and to Christ): Rey. i. 6; v. 10; 
Oey Gin hy Ὑ 9. 

Ἱεριχώ (Tdf. Ἱερειχώ [see his Proleg. p. 85; WH. 
App. p. 155, ands. v. «+3 WH ἼἸερ. see their Intr. 
§ 408; on its accent in codd. ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 1087), 
ἡ. indecl. (on its declens. in other writ. cf. W. § 10, 2; in 
Strabo Ἱερικούς -οὔντος ; Ἱεριχοῦς, -odvros in Joseph., ef. 
W.1.c¢.; Hebr. ἡ", fr. ΤῊ Ἢ to smell, so called from its 
fertility in aromatics), Jericho, a noted city, abounding 
in balsam [i. e. perh. the opobalsamum; ef. Tristram, 
Nat. Hist. ete. p. 337; B. Ὁ. s. v. Balm], honey, cyprus 
[prob. Arab. “el-henna”; ef. Tristram u. s., s. v. Cam- 
phire], myrobalanus [ Arab. “zukkum”’], roses, and other 
fragrant productions. It was situated not far from the 
northern shore of the Dead Sea, in the tribe of Benjamin, 
between the city of Jerusalem and the river Jordan, 150 
stadia from the former and 60 from the latter. Joseph. 
b. j- 4, 8, 3 calls its territory θεῖον χωρίον. It is mentioned 
in the N. T. in Mt. xx. 29; Mk. x. 46; Lk. x. 30; xviii. 
35; xix. 1; Heb. xi. 30. As balsam was exported thence 
to other countries, we read Lk. xix. 2 that τελῶναι were 
stationed there, with an ἀρχιτελώνης, for the purpose of 
collecting the revenues. Fora fuller account of the city 
see Win. RWB. 5. v.; Arnold in Herzog vi. p. 494 sq. 5 
Furrer. in Schenkel iii. 209 54.; Keim iii. 17 sq. [Eng. 
trans. v. 21 sq.; BB.DD.s. v.; ef. also Robinson, Re- 
searches ete. i. 547 sqq.].* 

ἱερόθυτος, -ov, (fr. ἱερός and θύω, cf. εἰδωλόθυτος), sac- 
rificed, offered in sacrifice, to the gods; as in Plut. symp. 
8, 8, 3 init., used of the flesh of animals offered in sac- 
rifice: 1 Co. x. 28 Ltxt.T Tr WH. On the use of the 
word in Grk. writ. ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 159.* 

ἱερόν, -οῦ, τό, (neut. of the adj. ἱερός, -a, -dv; cf. τὸ 
dyov), [fr. Hdt. on], a sacred place, temple: of the tem- 
ple of Artemis at Ephesus, Acts xix. 27; of the temple 
at Jerusalem twice in the Sept., Ezek. xlv. 19; 1 Chr. 


ἱεροπρεπής 


xxix. 4; more freq. in the O. T. Apocr.; in the N. T. 
often in the Gospels and Acts; once elsewhere, viz. 1 Co. 
ix.13. τὸ ἱερόν and ὁ ναός differ, in that the former 
designates the whole compass of the sacred enclosure, 
embracing the entire aggregate of buildings, balconies, 
porticos, courts (viz. that of the men or Israelites, 
that of the women, that of the priests), belonging to 
the temple; the latter designates the sacred edifice prop- 
erly so called, consisting of two parts, the ‘sanctuary’ 
or‘Holy place’ (which no one except the priests was 
allowed to enter), and the‘ Holy of holies’ or ‘most 
holy place’ (see ἅγιος, 1 a.) (which was entered only 
on the great day of atonement by the high-priest alone) ; 
[ef. Trench, Syn. § 111.1. ἱερόν is employed in the N. 
T. either explicitly of the whole temple, Mt. xii. 6; 
xxiv. 1; Mk. xiii. 3; Lk. xxi. 5; xxii. 52; Acts iv. 1; 
xxiv.6; xxv.8; 1 Co. ix. 13, ete.; or so that certain 
definite parts of it must be thought of, as the courts, 
esp. where Jesus or the apostles are said to have gone up, 
or entered, ‘into the temple,’ to have taught or encoun- 
tered adversaries, and the like, ‘in the temple,’ Mt. xxi. 
12,14; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 49; Lk. xix. 47; xxi. 37; 
xxii. 53; xxiv.53; Jn. v.14; vii. 14,28; vili. 20; xviii. 
20; Acts iii. 2; v.20; xxi. 26, ete.; of the courts and 
sanctuary, Mt. xii.5; of the court of the Gentiles, 
out of which Jesus drove the buyers and sellers and 
money-changers, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; 
Jn. ii. 14 sq.; of the court of the women, Lk. ii. 37; 
of any portico or apartment, Lk. ii. 46, cf. Jn. x. 23. 
On the phrase τὸ πτερύγιον τοῦ ἱεροῦ see πτερύγιον, 2. 
ἱεροπρεπής, -és, (fr. ἱερός, and πρέπει it is becoming), 
befitting men, places, actions or things sacred to God; rev- 
erent: Tit. ii.3. (4 Mace. ix. 25; xi.19; Plat., Philo, 
Joseph., Leian.,al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii. sub fin.]* 
ἱερός, -d, -dv, [its primary sense is thought to be mighty; 
ef. Curtius § 614; Vanitek p. 88 ; yet see Schmidt u. i. ; fr. 
Hom. down], sacred, consecrated to the deity, pertaining to 
God : ἱερὰ γράμματα, sacred Scriptures, because inspired 
by God, treating of divine things and therefore to be de- 
voutly revered, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Joseph. antt. prooem. 3; 
[10, 10, 4 fin.]; b.j.6,5,4; 6. Ap.1,[10,3; 18,6]; 26, 
1; ἱεραὶ βίβλοι, antt. 2, 16,5; [e. Ap. 1,1; 23, 4], ete.; 
οὐκ ἐνετράφης οὐδὲ ἐνησκήθης τοῖς ἱεροῖς γράμμασι, Philo, 
leg. ad Gaium § 29, ed. Mang. ii. p. 574); [κήρυγμα, Mk. 
xvi. WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; neut. plur. 
as subst. τὰ ἱερά, the holy things, those which pertain to 
the worship of God in the temple, 1 Co. ix. 13, ef. ἐργάζο- 
pat, 2a. [See reff. s. v. ἅγιος, fin.; esp. Schmidt ch. 181.]* 
Ἱεροσόλυμα [WH Ἴερ.. see their Intr. § 408], -ων, τά, 
(the invariable form in Mk. and Jn., almost everywhere 
in Mt. ana Joseph. [e. Ap. 1, 22, 13, ete.; Philo, leg. ad 
Gaium ὃ 36; (ef. Polyb. 16, 39, 4); al.]), and Ἱερουσαλήμ 
[WH.lep. (see ref. u. s.)], 7, indecl., (the invariable form 
in the Sept. [Josh. x. 1, ete.; Philo de somn. ii. 39 init. ; 
so Aristot. in Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 (where see Miiller)]; 
in the N. T. where a certain sacred emphasis, so to speak, 
resides in the very name, as Gal. iv. 25 sq. [see Bp. 
Lghtft. ad loc.]; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2, 10; 


299 


ἱεροσυλέω 


thus in direct address: Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; both 
forms are used promiscuously [yet with a marked pref- 
erence for the indeclinable form] in the O. T. Apocr., 
and in the writ. of Luke and of Paul; [cf. Tdf Proleg. 
p- 119; WH. App. p. 160]. Whether there is also a 
third and unusual form Ἱεροσόλυμα, -ης, ἡ, in Mt. ii. 3; 
iii. 5, is extremely doubtful; for in the phrase ἐξεπο- 
peveto ... Ἱεροσόλυμα, iii. 5, the noun can be taken as 
a neut. plur. with a sing. verb, cf. W. § 58,3.a.; and in 
the former passage, ii. 3, the unusual coupling of the 
fem. πᾶσα with the neut. plur. Ἱεροσόλυμα is easily ex- 
plained by the supposition that the appellative idea, 4 
πόλις, was in the writer’s mind; see Fritzsche and Bleek 
ad loe.; ef. B. 18 (16); [yet see Pape, Eigennamen, s. 
v.]. Hebr. Ὁ and Οὐ}, Chald. nowi, Syr. 


~ => 

sava5o}. Many suppose that the Hebr. name is com- 
posed of w37 possession, and Dow, so that it signifies tran- 
quil possession, habitation of peace; but the matter is very 
uncertain and conjectures vary; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. 
p- 628 sq.; [B. D.s. v.]; on the earlier name of the city 
see below in Sadnp; Lat. Hierosolyma, -orum, also [ Vulg. 
e. g. codd. Amiat. and Fuld. Mt. xxiii. 37; but esp.] in 
the ch. Fathers Hierusalem, but the form Hierosolyma, 
-ae, is uncertain [yet see even Old Lat. codd. in Mt. ii. 1, 
3]),—Jerusalem [A.V. Hierusalem and Jerusalem], 
the capital of Palestine, situated nearly in the centre of 
the country, on the confines of the tribes of Benjamin 
and Judah, in a region so elevated that ἀναβαίνειν, 
my, to go up, fitly describes the approach to it from any 
quarter. The name is used in the N. T. 1. to de- 
note, either the city itself, Mt. ii. 1; Mk. iii. 8; Jn.i. 19, 
ete.; or its inhabitants, Mt. ii.3; iii. 5; xxiii.37; Lk. 
xiii. 34. 2. ἡ νῦν Ἵερουσ. [the Jerusalem that now 
is], with its present religious institutions, i. e. the Mosaic 
system, so designated from its primary external location, 
Gal. iv. 25, with which is contrasted ἡ ἄνω ‘Iep. (after the 
rabbin. phrase 79y9 Sw Ὁ ΦΥΎ", Jerusalem that is above, 
i. e. existing in heaven, according to the pattern of which 
the earthly Jerusalem AUD Sw Ὁ ὙΦΥΎ" was supposed to 
be built [cf. Schéttgen, Horae Hebr. i. 1207 sqq.]), i. e. 
metaph. the City of God founded by Christ, now wearing 
the form of the church, but after Christ’s return to put on 
the form of the perfected Messianic kingdom, Gal. iv. 26; 
Ἵερουσ. ἐπουράνιος, the heavenly Jerusalem, i. e. the heavy- 
enly abode of God, Christ, the angels, beatified men (as 
well the saints of the O. T. as Christians), and as citizens 
of which true Christians are to be regarded while still liv- 
ing on earth, Heb. xii. 22; ἡ καινὴ ‘Iep. in the visions of 
John ‘the Revelator,’ the new Jerusalem, a splendid visi- 
ble city to be let down from heaven after the renovation 
of the world, the future abode of the blessed: Rev. iii. 
τ KTM ΤΌΣ 

Ἱεροσολυμίτης [Tdf. -μείτης, see εἰ, ε; WH Ἰεροσολυ- 
μείτης, see their Intr. § 4081, -ου, 6, a citizen or inhabitant _ 
of Jerusalem: Mk.i.5; Jn. vii. 25. [Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 
WE Cire] | 

ἱερο-συλέω, -ὦ ; (ἱερόσυλος, 4. V.); to commit sacrilege, 


ἑερόσυλος 


to rob a temple: Ro. ii. 22, where the meaning is, ‘thou 
who abhorrest idols and their contamination, dost yet 
not hesitate to plunder their shrines’; cf. Fritzsche [and 
Delitzsch] ad loc. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.) * 

ἱερόσυλος, -ov, (fr. ἱερόν and συλάω), guilly of sacrilege: 
Acts xix. 37 [A. V. robbers of temples; ef. Bp. Lghtft. in 
The Contemp. Rey. for 1878, p. 294 sq.]. (2 Mace. iv. 
42; Arstph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., al.) * 

ἱερουργέω, -ὦ ; (fr. iepovpyds, and this fr. ἱερός and 
ἘΡΓΩ); ἰο be busied with sacred things; to perform sacred 
rites, (Philo, Hdian.); used esp. of persons sacrificing 
(Joseph. antt. 7, 13, 4, ete.); trans. to minister in the man- 
ner of a priest, minister in priestly service: τὸν νόμον, of 
those who defend the sanctity of the law by undergoing 
a violent death, 4 Mace. vii. 8; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, of the 
preaching of the gospel, Ro. xv. 16 (where Fritzsche 
treats of the word fully; [ef. W. 222 sq. (209) ]).* 

Ἱερουσαλήμ, see Ἱεροσόλυμα. 

ἱερωσύνη [on the w see ἀγαθωσύνη, init. ],-ys, 7, (ἱερός), 
priesthood, the priestly office: Heb. vii. 11 sq. 14 RG, 24. 
(Sir. xlv. 24; 1 Esdr. v. 38; 1 Mace. ii. 54; 111. 49; 4 
Mace. v. 34; Hdt., Plat., Dem., Diod., Joseph., Plut., 
Hdian., al.) * 

Ἴεσσαί (Ἰεσσαῖος in Joseph.), 6, Cw [ef. B. Ὁ. Am. 
ed. 5. v.]), Jesse, the father of David the king (1 S. xvi. 
1, 10; xvii. 12 Alex.; xx. 27): Mt.i.5sq.; Lk. iii. 32; 
Acts xiii. 22; Ro. xv. 12.* 

Ἰεφθάε (Ἰεφθής, -οὔ, in Joseph.), 6, ( MND" [fut. 3 sing. 
mase.], fr. MA) to open), Jephthah, the son of Gilead 
[ef. B. D. Am. ed. s. ν. Gilead, 4], and a judge of Israel 
(Judg. xi. sq.) : Heb. xi. 82." 

Ἰεχονίας, -ov, 6, (3 ὙΠ) Jehoiakin, i. e. whom Jehovah 
appointed; Sept. ᾿Ιωαχίν [(?) see B. D. Am. ed. 8. v. 
Jehoiachin]), Jechoniah, king of Judah, carried off into 
exile by Nebuchadnezzar [c.] B. c. 600 after a reign of 
three months, 2 K. xxiv. 8-17; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 9 sq.; Jer. 
lii. 81. He is mentioned Mt. i. 11 sq. But he was not, 
as is there stated, the son of Josiah, but of Jehoiakim; 
nor had he ‘brethren,’ but his father had. Accordingly 
in the Evangelist’s genealogy the names D°p‘jm and 
pam have been confounded; [cf. B. D. ἃ. s., and reff. 
there ].* 

Ἰησοῦς, -οὔ, dat. -οὔ, ace. -vdv, voc. -od, [W. § 10, 1], 
6, Jesus (ΠῚ and ace. to a later form jw, Syr. 


> ” 
Saas, i. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf; 


but later writ. gave the name the force of My31w, see 
Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ἰησοῦς ὃς ἐγένετο κατὰ τὸ 
ὄνομα αὐτοῦ μέγας ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ, of 
Joshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21 
Ἰησοῦς ἑρμηνεύεται σωτηρία κυρίου), a very Com. prop. 
name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der Jesusname, 
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or 
Talmud. Stud. xv.]. Inthe N. T. 1. Joshua [fully 
Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’ 
successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son 
of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 L T Tr 
WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of 


800 


ἐκανόὼω 


mankind: Mt. i. 21, 25; ΓΚ. i. 31; ii. 21, and very often; 
see κύριος and Χριστός. 4. Jesus Barabbas; see 
Βαραββᾶς. 5. Jesus, surnamed Justus, a Jewish 
Christian, an associate with Paul in preaching the gos- 
pel: Col. iv. 11. 

ἱκανός, -7, -όν, (fr. ik, ἱκάνω ; prop. ‘reaching to’, ‘at- 
taining to’; hence ‘adequate’); as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 
and Thue. down, sufficient; a. of number and 
quantity; with nouns, many enough, or enough with a 
gen. : ὄχλος ἱκανός, a great multitude [A. V. often much 
people}, Mk. x. 46; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26; xix. 
26; λαύς, Acts v. 87 RG; κλαυθμός, Acts xx. 81; ἀργύ- 
ρια ἱκανά, [A. V. large money, cf. the collog. ‘money 
enough’], Mt. xxviii. 12; λαμπάδες, Acts xx. 8; λόγοι; 
Lk. xxiii. 9; φῶς ἱκανόν, a considerable light [A. V. ἃ 
great light}, Acts xxii. 6. of time: ἱκανῷ χρόνῳ [οἵ. 
W. § 31, 9; B. § 133, 26] for a long time, [ Lk. viii. 27 
T Trtxt. WII]; Acts viii. 11; also ἱκανὸν χρόνον, Acts 
xiv. 3; and plur. Lk. xx. 9; ἐξ ἱκανοῦ, of a long time, 
now for a long time, Lk. xxiii. 8 RG; also ἐκ χρόνων 
ἱκανῶν, Lk. viii. 27 RG LTrmrg.; xxiii. 8 LT Tr WH; 
[ἀπὸ ἱκανῶν ἐτῶν, these many years, Ro. xv. 23 WH Tr 
txt.]; ἱκανοῦ χρόν. διαγεν. much time having elapsed, 
Acts xxvii. 9; ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν, for a long while, Acts xx. 11 
(2 Mace. viii. 25; Diod. 18, 100; Palaeph. 28); ἡμέραι 
{ef. Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. p. 89 π.}, Acts ix. 23,435 xviii. 
18; xxvii. 7. absol. ἱκανοί, many, a considerable num- 
ber: Lk. vii. 11 [RG Lbr. T Trmrg. br.]; Acts xii. 12; 
xiv. 21; xix.19; 1 Co. xi. 30, (1 Mace. xiii- 49, etc.). 
ἱκανόν ἐστιν, it is enough, i. q. enough has been said on 
this subject, Lk. xxii. 38 (for Jesus, saddened at the 
paltry ideas of the disciples, breaks off in this way the 
conversation; the Jews, when a companion uttered any 
thing absurd, were wont to use the phrase D237 39 [A. V. 
let it suffice thee, ete.], as in Deut. iii. 26, where Sept. ixa- 
νούσθω) ; ἱκανὸν τῷ τοιούτῳ ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη, sc. ἐστί, sufli- 
cient ...is this punishment, 2 Co. ii. 6; after the Lat. 
idiom satisfacere alicui, τὸ ix. ποιεῖν τινι, to take away 
from one every ground of complaint [A. V. to content], 
Mk. xv. 15 (Polyb. 82, 7, 13; App. Pun. p. 68 ed. Toll. 
[8 74, i. p. 402 ed. Schweig.]; Diog. Laért. 4, 50); τὸ 
ix. λαμβάνω (Lat. satis accipio), to take security (either 
by accepting sponsors, or by a deposit of money until 
the case had been decided), Acts xvii. 9. b. sufli- 
cient in ability, i. e. meet, fit, (Germ. tiichtig [A. V. 
worthy, able, ete.]): πρὸς tt, for something, 2 Co. ii. 10; 
foll. by an inf. [B. 260 (223 sq.)], Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 7; 
Lk. iii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 9; 2 Co. iii. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 2; foll. 
by ἵνα with subjune. [B. 240 (207); ef. W. 335 (314)]: 
Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6.* 

ἱκανότης, τητος, 7, sufficiency, ability or competency to 
do a thing: 2 Co. iii.5. (Plat. Lys. [p. 215 a.] ap. Poll.; 
[al.].) * 

ἱκανόω, τῶ: 1 aor. ikdvwoa; (ἱκανός): to make suffi- 
cient, render fit; with two acc., one of the obj. the other 
of the predicate: to equip one with adequate power to 
perform the duties of one, 2 Co. iii. 6; τινὰ εἴς τι, Col. i. 
12. [Sept.; Dion. Hal., al.]* 


ἱκετήριος 


ἱκετήριος, -a, -ov, (ἱκέτης a suppliant), pertaining to a 
suppliant, fit for a suppliant; ἡ ixernpia, as subst., sc. 
ἔλαία or ῥάβδος; 1. απ olive-branch; for suppliants 
approached the one whose aid they would implore hold- 
ing an olive-branch entwined with white wool and fillets, 
to signify that they came as suppliants [cf. Trench § li. 
sub fin.]: λαμβάνειν ἱκετηρίαν, Hdt. 5, 51; ἱκετηρίαν τιθέ- 
vat Or προβάλλεσθαι tapi τινι, etc. 2. i. q. ἱκεσία, 
supplication (Isocr. p. 186 d. var.; Polyb.; 2 Mace. ix. 
18): plur. joined with δεήσεις (Polyb. 3, 112, 8; sing. Job 
xl. 22 Sept.), Heb. v. 7.* 

ἱκμάς, -ados, ἡ, moisture: Lk. viii. 6. (Sept. Jer. xvii. 
8; Hom. 1]. 17, 392; Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 3, and often in 
other auth.) * 

Ἰκόνιον, του, τό, Iconium, a celebrated city of Asia 
Minor, which in the time of Xen. (an. 1, 2, 19) was ‘the 
last city of Phrygia,’ afterwards the capital of Lycaonia 
(Strab. 12 p. 568; Cic. ad divers. 15,4); now Konia 
[or Konieh]: Acts xiii. 51; xiv. 1,19, 21; xvi. 2; 2 Tim. 
iii. 11. Cf. Overbeck in Schenkel iii. 303 sq.; [B. D. 
(esp. Am. ed.) 3. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 144 sqq.].* 

ἱλαρός, -d, -dv, (ἵλαος propitious), cheerful, joyous, 
prompt to do anything: 2 Co. ix. 7; Prov. xix. 12; xxii. 
8; Sir. xiii. 26 (25); xxvi. 4; 3 Mace. vi. 35; Arstph., 
Xen., al.* 

ἱλαρότης, -ητος, 7, cheerfulness, readiness of mind: Ro. 
xii. 8. (Prov. xviii. 22; [Diod., Philo (de plant. Noé 
§ 40), Plut., al.]; Acta Thom. § 14.) * 

ἱλάσκομαι : (see below); in class. Grk. the mid. of an 
act. ἱλάσκω (/o render propitious, appease) never met 
with ; 1. to render propitious to one’s self, to ap- 
pease, conciliate to one’s self (fr. ἵλαος gracious, gentle) ; 
fr. Hom. down; mostly w. ace. of a pers., as θεόν, ᾿Αθή- 
νην, ete. (τὸν θεὸν ἱλάσασθαι., Joseph. antt. 6, 6,5); very 
rarely w. acc. of the thing, as τὴν ὀργήν, Plut. Cat. min. 
61 (with which cf. ἐξιλάσκεσθαι θυμόν, Prov. xvi. 14 
Sept.). In bibl. Grk. used passively, to become propitious, 
be placated or appeased ; in 1 aor. impv. ἱλάσθητι, be pro- 
pilious, be gracious, be merciful, (in prof. auth. 7An@ and 
Dor. ἵλαθε, which the gramm. regard as the pres. of an 
unused verb ἵλημι, to be propitious; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Sp. 
ii. p. 206; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 839; Passow for L. and 
S., or Veitch] s. v. ἵλημι), with dat. of the thing or the 
pers.: Lk. xviii. 13 (ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις, Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 
9; [Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 38]; τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 
11; ἱλάσθη ὁ κύριος περὶ τῆς κακίας, Ex. xxxii. 14 Alex.; 
ἱλασθήσεται κύρ. τῷ δούλῳ σου, 2 Κ. v. 18). 2. by 
an Alexandrian usage, to erpiate, make propitiation for, 
(as ἐξιλάσκεσθαι in the O. T.): τὰς ἁμαρτίας, Heb. ii. 17 
(ἡμῶν τὰς ψυχάς, Philo, alleg. leg. 3,61). [Cf. Kurtz, 
Com. on Heb. |.c.; W.227 (213); Westcott, Epp. of S. Jn. 
Ρ. 83 sq.]* 

ἱλασμός, -o0, 6, (ἱλάσκομαιν ; 1. an appeasing, 
propitiating, Vuls. propitiatio, (Plut. de sera num. vind. 
¢. 17; plur. joined with καθαρμοί, Plut. Sol. 12; with 
gen. of the obj. τῶν θεῶν, Orph. Arg. 39; Plut. Fab. 18; 
θεῶν μῆνιν ἱλασμοῦ καὶ χαριστηρίων δεομένην, vit. Camill. 
7 fin.; ποιεῖσθαι ἱλασμόν. οἵ a priest offering an expia- 


301 


᾿Γλλυρικόν 


tory sacrifice, 2 Macc. iii. 33). 2. in Alex. usage the 
means of appeasing, a propitiation: Philo, alleg. leg. iii. 
§ 61; προσοίσουσιν ἱλασμόν, for NNO, Ezek. xliv. 27; 
περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, of Christ, 1 Jn. ii. 2; iv. 10, (κριὸς 
τοῦ ἱλασμοῦ, Num. v. 8; [ef. ἡμέρα τ. ἱλασμοῦ, Lev. xxv. 
9]; also for 1°90, forgiveness, Ps. exxix. (exxx.) 4; 
Dan. ix. 9 Theodot.). [Cf. Trench ὃ lxxvii.]* 

ἱλαστήριος, -a, -ov, (ἱλάσκομαι, q. V.), relaling to ap- 
peasing or expiating, having placating or expiating force, 
expiatory: μνῆμα ἱλαστήριον, a monument built to propi- 
tiate God, Joseph. antt. 16, 7, 1; ἱλαστήριος θάνατος, 
4 Mace. xvii. 22; χεῖρας ixernpious, εἰ βούλει δὲ ἵλαστη- 
pious, ἐκτείνας θεῷ, Niceph. in act. SS. ed. Mai, vol. v. 
p- 335,17. Neut. τὸ ἱλαστήριον, as subst., a means a7 
appeasing or expiating, a propitiation, (Germ. Verséh- 
nungs- oder Siihnmittel); cf. W. 96 (91); [592 (551)]. 
So used of 1. the well-known cover of the ark of 
the covenant in the Holy of holies, which was sprinkled 
with the blood of the expiatory victim on the annual 
day of atonement (this rite signifying that the life of 
the people, the loss of which they had merited by their 
sins, was offered to God in the blood as the life of the 
victim, and that God by this ceremony was appeased 
and their sins were expiated); hence the lid of expia- 
tion, the propitiatory, Vulg. propitiatorium; Luth. Gna- 
denstuhl, [A. V. mercy-seat]: Heb. ix. 5 (Sept. Ex. xxv. 
18 sqq.; Lev. xvi. 2, ete.; more fully ἱλαστήριον ἐπίθεμα. 
Ex. xxv. 17; xxxvili. (xxxvii.) 7 (6), for the Hebr. 
Dd, fr. 75D to cover, sc. sins, i.e. to pardon). Theod- 
oret, Theophyl., Oecum., Luther, Grotius, Tholuck, 
Wilke, Philippi, Umbreit, [Cremer (4te Aufl.)] and others 
give this meaning to the word also in Ro. iii. 25, viz. 
that Christ, besprinkled with his own blood, was truly 
that which the cover or ‘mercy-seat’ had been ty pi- 
cally, i. 6. the sign and pledge of expiation; but in 
opp. to this interpretation see Fritzsche, Meyer, Van 
Hengel, [Godet, Oltramare] and others ad loc. a 
an expiatory sacrifice; a piacular victim (Vulg. propitia- 
tio): Ro. iii. 25 (after the analogy of the words χαρι- 
στήρια sacrifices expressive of gratitude, thank-offerings, 
σωτήρια sacrifices for safety obtained. On the other 
hand, in Dion Chrys. or. 11, 121, p. 355 ed. Reiske, the 
reference is not to a sacrifice but toa monument, 
as the preceding words show: καταλείψειν yap αὐτοὺς 
ἀνάθημα κάλλιστον καὶ μέγιστον τῇ Αθηνᾷ καὶ ἐπιγρά- 
ψειν, ἱλαστήριον ᾿Αχαιοὶ τῇ Ἰλιάδι). [See the full discus- 
sion of the word in Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit. Exposition of 
the Third Chap. of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 281-303.]* 

ews, των, (Attic for ἵλαος [cf. W. 22], fr. Hom. 
down). propitious, merciful: ἔσομαι ἵλ. ταῖς ἀδικίαις, i. 6. 
I will pardon, Heb. viii. 12: Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34; 
xliii. (xxxvi.) 3; also ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις, 1 K. viii. 34; 2 Chr. 
vi. 25, 27, etc.; ἵλεώς σοι, sc. ἔστω [or ein, B. ὃ 129, 22 
ὁ θεός, i. 6. God avert this from thee, Mt. xvi. 22; Sept. 
for non foll. by 4, be it far from one, 3 5. xx. 20; 
xxiii. 17.* 

Ἰλλυρικόν, -οὔ, τό, Illyricum, a region lying between 
Italy, Germany, Macedonia and Thrace, having on oné 


ἱμάς 
side the Adriatic Sea, and on the other the Danube: Ro. 
xv. 19 [ef. B. Ὁ. Am. ed.].* 

ἱμάς, -dvros, 6, (fr. ἴημι to send; 56. a vessel, which was 
tied to thongs of leather and let down into a well for the 
purpose of drawing water; hence ἱμάω also, to draw 
‘something made fast to a thong or rope [recent etymol. 
connect it w. Skt. si to bind; cf. Curtius $602; Vanitek 
Ῥ- 1041]); fr. Hom. down; a thong of leather, a strap; 
in the N. T. of the thongs with which captives or crimi- 
nals were either bound or beaten (see προτείνω), Acts 
or ties by which sandals were fastened to the feet, Mk. 
i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27, (so also in Is. v. 27; Xen. 
anab. 4, 5, 14; Plut. symp. 4, 2, 3; Suid. ἱμάς - σφαιρω- 
tip σανδαλίου, ζανίχιον, οἷον τὸ λώριον τοῦ ὑποδήματος)" 

ἱματίζω: pf. pass. ptep. ἱματισμένος ; (ἱμάτιον); to 
clothe: Mk. v.15; Lk. viii. 35. (Found neither in Sept. 
nor in prof. auth. [ef. W. 26 (25)].) * 

ἱμάτιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of tua i. 4. εἷμα, an article of 
clothing, garment; and this fr. ἔννυμι to clothe, cf. Germ. 
Hemd); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. mostly for 733, also 
for τ γον, 705, ete.; 1. a garment (of any sort): 
Mt. ix. 16; xi. 8 [RG Lbr., al. om.; ef. W. 591 (550) ; 
B. 82 (72)]; Mk. ii. 21; xv. 20; Lk. v. 36; vii. 25; Heb. 
i. 11; plur. garments, i. e. the cloak or mantle and the 
tunic [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (23)]: Mt. xvii. 2; xxiv. 
18 [Rec.]; xxvii. 31,35; Jn. xix. 23; Acts vii. 58; Jas. 
vy. 2, ete.; to rend ra ip. (see διαρρήγνυμι), Mt. xxvi. 65; 
Acts xiv. 14; xxii. 23. 2. the upper garment, the 
cloak or mantle (which was thrown over the tunic, 6 
χιτών) (Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 22]: Mt. ix. 20; 
[xxiv. 18 LT Tr WH]; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44; Jn. xix. 
2; Rey. xix. 16; it is distinguished from the χιτών in 
Mt. v.40; ΓΚ. vi. 29; [cf. Jn. xix. 23]; Actsix.39. [CE. 
Trench 81]. ; BB. DD.s. v. Dress; Edersheim, Jewish So- 
cial Life, ch. xiii.; esp. ‘Jesus the Messiah,’ i. 620 sqq-} 

ἱματισμός, -ov, 6, (iuaritw), clothing, apparel: univ., 
Lk. vii. 25; Acts xx. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 9; of the tunic, Mt. 
xxvii. 35 Ree.; Jn. xix. 24; of the cloak or mantle, Lk. 
ix. 29. (Sept.; Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Athen.) 
[Cf. Trench ὃ 1.7" 

ἱμείρω : mid. ἱμείρομαι ; (Ἵμερος desire, longing, [allied w. 
ἵλεως : Vanidek p. 88]; ef. οἰκτείρω) ; to desire, long for, 
esp. of the longing of love: ὑμῶν [W. $30, 10 b.] i. 6. your 
souls, to win them to Christ, 1 Th. ii. 8 Rec.; see ὁμείρο- 
μαι. (Sept. Job iii. 21; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in 
the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what 
place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. 
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum 
Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples 
in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. 
The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain 
thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have 
leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) 
the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the 
second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye 
zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. 


302 


“ 
iva 


I. a final Conjunction (for from local direc- 
tion, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te 
mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and 
end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα 
pn, that not, lest; it is used 

1. prop. of the purpose or end; a. foll. by the 
Optative; only twice, and then preceded by the pres. 
of a verb of praying or beseeching, where the wish 
(optatio) expressed by the prayer gave occasion for the 
use of the optat.: Eph. i. 17 but WH mrg. subj.; iii. 16 
RG; cf. W. 290 (273); B. 233 (201); and yet in both 
instances the telic force of the particle is so weakened 
that it denotes the substance rather than the end of 
the prayer; see 2 below. Ὁ. foll. by the Subjunce- 
tive, not only (according to the rule observed by the 
best Grk. writ.) after the primary tenses (pres., pf., fut.) 
or the imperative, but (in accordance with that well- 
known negligence with which in later times and esp. by 
Hellenistic writers the distinction between the subjunc. 
and the optat. was disregarded) after preterites even 
where the more elegant Grk. writ. were wont to use the 
optat.; οἵ. Hermann ad Vig. p. 847 sqq.; Klotz ad Dey. 
ii. 2 p. 616 sqq.; W. 287 (270) sqq.; B. 233 (201). a. 
after a Present: Mk. iv. 21; vii. 9; Lk. vi. 34; viii. 12; 
Xvi. 28; Jn. iii. 15; v. 34; vi.30; Acts ii. 25; xvi. 30; Ro. 
1 ΤΡ πο: xi. 95» 1. Co. vil. 29 six. 12); 2\Co.1.1:7-1Gal- 
vi. 13; Phil. iii. 8; Heb. v. 1; vi. 12; ix. 25; 1Jn.i.3; 
Rey. iii. 18; xi. 6, and often. β. after a Perfect: 
Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4; Jn. v. 23; [36 T Tr WH; cf. e.]; vi. 
88; xii. 40, 46; xiv. 29; xvi. 1,4; xvii.4; xx. 31; 1Co. 
ix. 22; 1 Jn.v.20 [here T Tr WH pres. indic.; see d.]. 
γ. after an Imperative (either pres. or aor.) : Mt. vii. 
1; ix. 6; xiv. 15; xvii. 27; xxiii. 26; Mk. xi. 25; xiii. 18; 
Jn. iv. 15; v.14; vii. 3[RGL]; x. 38; 1 Co. vii. 5; xi. 
34; 1 Tim. iv. 15; Tit. iii. 13, etce.; also after a horta- 
tive or deliberative subjunc.: Mk. i. 38; Lk. xx. 
14; Jn. vi. 5 [Re L T Tr WH]; xi. 16; Heb. iv. 16, 
ete. δ. aftera Future: Lk. xvi. 4; xviii.5; Jn. v. 20 
[here Tdf. indic. pres.; see d.]; xiv. 3,13,16; 1 Co. xv. 
28; Phil. i. 26. «. after Historic tenses: after the 
impf., Mk. iii. 2 [here L Tr fut. indic.; see 6.1; vi. 41; 
viii. 6; Lk. vi. 7; xviii. 15, ete.; after the plupf., Jn. iv. ' 
8: after the aor., Mt. xix. 13; Mk. iii. 14; xi. 28; xiv. 
10 [B. § 139, 37]; Lk. xix. 4, 15; Jn. v. 36 [RGL; ef. 
B.]; vii. 32; xii 9; Acts xix.4[?]; Ro. νἱ. 4; 2 Co. viii. 
9; Heb. ii. 14; xi. 35; 1 Tim.i.16; 1Jn.iii.5,8,ete. c. 
As prof. auth. join the final particles ὄφρα, μή. and esp. 
ὅπως. also with the future Indicative (cf. Matthiae 
§ 519, 8 ii. p. 1186 sqq.), as being in nature akin to the 
subjune., so the N. T. writ., ace. to a usage extremely 
doubtful among the better Grk. writ. (cf. Klotz 1. e. p. 
629 sq.), also join ἵνα with the same [ef. WH. App. p. 
171° sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. ἵνα, 17]: ἵνα θήσω, 1 Co. ix. 18; 
LT Tr WH in the foll. instances: σταυρώσουσιν, Mk. 
xy. 20 [not WH (see τ. s.) ], δώσουσιν, Lk. xx. 103 κενώ- 
get, 1 Co. ix. 15 [not Lehm.], [καταδουλώσουσιν, Gal. ii. 
4 (but cf. Hort in WH u.s. p. 167*)]; κερδηθήσονται, 
1 Pet. iii. 1; σφάξουσιν, Rey. vi. 4; δώσει, Rev. viii. 3; 


“ 
Wa 


προσκυνήσουσιν, [ Rev. ix. 20]; xiii. 12 [(cf. 2 a. fin. be- 
low) ]; [ἀναπαήσονται, Rev. xiv. 13 (see ἀναπαύω) οἴ. 4 b.}; L 
Tr in the foll. : κατηγορήσουσιν, Mk. iii. 2, (cf. Ὁ. ε- above) ; 
προσκυνήσουσιν, Jn. xii. 20; T Tr WH in [θεωρήσουσιν, 
Jn. vii. 3]; ξυρήσονται, Acts xxi. 24; LT WH Tr mrg. 
in ἀδικήσουσιν, Rey. ix. 4 [ (ef. 2 Ὁ. below) ]; [add, ἐρεῖ, 
Lk. xiv.10 TWHTr txt.; ἐξομολογήσεται, Phil. ii. 11 T 
L mrg. Tr mrg.; καυθήσομαι, 1 Co. xiii. 3 T; δώσει, Jn. 
xvii. 2 WH Tr mrg.; ἀναπαύσονται, Rey. vi. 11 WH; 
δώσει, Rey. xiii. 16 WH mrg.], (iva καταργήσει τὸν θάνα- 
τον kal τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν δείξει, Barn. ep. 5, 6 [so cod. 
8, but Hilgenf., Miller, Gebh., al., adopt the subjune. ; 
yet see Cunningham’s note ad loc.]); so that the fut. al- 
ternates with the subjunc.: ἵνα ἔσται . . . καὶ εἰσέλθωσιν, 
Rey. xxii. 14; γένηται καὶ ἔσῃ (Vulg. sis), Eph. vi. 3; in 
other pass. L T Tr WH have restored the indic., as wa 
ἥξουσι x. προσκυνήσουσιν ...K. γνῶσιν, Rev. iii. 9; ἵνα 
...mivnte... καὶ καθίσεσθε or καθήσεσθε [but WH txt. 
καθῆσθε] (Vulg. et sedeatis), Lk. xxii. 30; κάμψῃ x. ἐξο- 
μολογήσεται, Phil. ii. 11 [T Lmrg. Trmrg.]; ef. B. § 139, 
38; W. § 41b.1b. ἃ. By a solecism freq. in the 
eccles. and Byzant. writ. iva is joined with the indie. 
Present: 1 Co. iv. 6 (φυσιοῦσθε); Gal. iv. 17 (ζη- 
λοῦτε) ; [cf. Test. xii. Patr., test. Gad § 7; Barn. ep. 6, 
5; 7,113; Ignat. ad Eph. 4, 2; ad Trall. 8, 2, and other 
exx. in Win. and Bittm. as below; but see Hort in WH. 
App. p. 167%, cf. pp. 169°, 171 sq.]; but the indie. is very 
doubtful in the foll. passages: [Jn. iv. 15 Tr txt.]; v. 
20 (Tdf. θαυμάζετε) ; xvii. 3 T Trtxt.; Gal. vi. 12 TL 
mrg.; [1 Th.iv. 18 Lmrg.]; Tit. ii.4 TTrLmrg.; 2 Pet. 
1. 101; [1 Jn. v. 20 T Tr WH (cf. b. B. above)]; Rev. 
xii. 6 (1 Tr τρέφουσιν) ; [xiii. 17 WH mrg.]; cf. W. § 41 
b. 1 ο.; B.§ 139,39; Meyer on 1 Co. iv. 6; Wieseler on 
Gal. iv. 17; [Soph. u.s.]. (In the earlier Grk. writ. iva 
is joined with the indic. of the past tenses alone, ‘to 
denote something which would have been, if something 
else had been done, but now has not come to pass’ Her- 
mann ad Vig. p. 847, ef. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 630 sq.; 
Kihner § 553, 7 ii. 903; [Jelf § 813; ef. Jebb in App. to 
Vincent and Dickson’s Modern Greek, ὃ 79].) e. 
the final sentence is preceded by preparatory demon- 
strative expressions [W. § 23, 5]: εἰς τοῦτο, to this end, 
Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. iii. 8; Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. 
ii. 21; iii. 9; iv.6,(Barn.ep.5,1,11; [14,5]); εἰς αὐτὸ 
τοῦτο, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; διὰ τοῦτο, Jn. i. 31; 2 Co. 
xiii. 10; Philem. 15; 1 Tim. i. 16; τούτου χάριν, Tit. i. 5. 

2. In later Grk., and esp. in Hellenistic writers, the 
final force of the particle ἵνα is more or less weakened, 
so that it is frequently used where the earlier Greeks 
employed the Infinitive, yet so that the leading and 
the dependent sentence have each its own subject. The 
first extant instance of this use occurs in the Amphic- 
tyonic decree in [pseudo-] Dem. p. 279, 8 [i. 6. de coron. 
§ 155]: πρεσβεῦσαι πρὸς Φίλιππον καὶ ἀξιοῦν ἵνα βοηθήση. 
[ef. Odyss. 8, 327 λίσσεσθαι... . ἵνα νημερτὲς ἐνίσπῃ (cf. 
3, 19)], but it increased greatly in subsequent times; cf. 
W.§ 44, 8; B. 237 (204) ; [Green 171 sq.; Goodwin § 45 
N.5b.; Jebb in App. to Vincent and Dickson’s Modern 


908 


iA 
Wa 


Greek, §55]. Accordingly ἵνα stands with the subjunc. 
in such a way that it denotes the purport (or object) 
rather than the purpose of the action expressed by 
the preceding verb. This occurs a. after verbs of 
caring for, deciding, desiring, striving: βλέ- 
mew, 1 Co. xvi. 10; Col. iv. 17; 2 Jn. 8; ζητῶ, 1 Co. iv. 
2; xiv. 12; φυλάσσομαι, ἵνα μή, 2 Pet. iii. 17; μεριμνάω, 
1 Co. vii. 34; (yAda, 1 Co. xiv. 1; βουλεύομαι, Jn. xi. 53 
[RG Trmrg. συμβου.]; xii. 10; ἀφίημι, Mk. xi. 16; Jn. 
xii. 7 LT Tr WH; θέλημά ἐστι, Mt. xviii. 14; Jn. vi. 39 
sq-; θέλω, Mt. vii. 12; Mk. vi. 25; ix.30; x. 35; Lk. vi. 
31; so that it alternates with the inf., 1 Co. xiv. 5; δίδωμι, 
to grant, that, Mk. x. 37; Rev. ix. 5, ete.; ποιῷ, Rev. xiii. 
12 [here L T Tr WH indic. fut. (οἴ. 1 c. above) ]. b. 
after verbs of saying (commanding, asking, exhorting; 
but by no means after κελεύειν [cf. B. 275 (236) ]): 
εἰπεῖν, in the sense of to bid, Mt. iv. 3; Mk. iii. 9; Lk. iv. 
3; also λέγειν, Acts xix. 4; 1 Jn. v.16; ἐρρήθη, Rev. vi. 11 
[WH indie. fut.]; ix. 4 [LT Trmrg. WH indic. fut. (see 
1 6. above)]; διαμαρτύρομαι, 1 Tim. v. 21 (otherwise [viz. 
telic] in Lk. xvi. 28); ἐρωτῶ, to ask, beseech, Mk. vii. 26; 
Lk. Vii. 36; xvi. 27; Jn. iv. 47; xvii. 15, 21; xix. 31; 
2 Jn. 5; παρακαλῶ, Mt. xiv. 36; Mk. v. 10, 18; vii. 32; 
viii. 22; Lk. viii. 32; 1Co.i.10; xvi.12,15sq.; 2Co. 
viil. 6; ix.5; xii.8; 1 Th.iv.1; 2 Th. iii. 12, (Joseph. 
antt. 12, 3, 2); προσεύχομαι [q. v.], Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk. 
[sili 18]; xiv. 35; δέομαι, Lk. ix. 40; xxii. 32, (Dion. 
Hal. antt. 1, 83); ἐπιτιμῶ, Mt. xii. 16; [xvi. 20 LWH 
txt.]; xx. 31; Mk. iii. 12; viii. 30; x.48; Lk. xviii. 39; 
ἐντέλλομαι, Mk. xiii. 34; Jn. xv. 17; ἐντολὴν δίδωμι or 
λαμβάνω, Jn. xi. 57; xiii. 34; xv.12; γράφω, with the 
involved idea of prescribing, ΜΚ. ix. 12 [ef. W. 462 
(430) and the txt. of LT]; xii 19; Lk. xx. 28; δια- 
στέλλομαι, Mt. xvi. 20 [L WH txt. ἐπιτιμῶ (see above) }; 
Mk. v. 43; vii. 36; ix. 9; παραγγέλλω, Mk. vi. 8 [ef. W. 
578 (538)]; συντίθεμαι, Jn. ix. 22; ἀγγαρεύω, Mt. xxvii. 
32; Mk. xv. 21; κηρύσσω, Mk. vi. 12; ἀπαγγέλλω, Mt. 
XxVill. 10; ἐξορκίζω, Mt. xxvi. 63. [For exx. (of its use 
with the above verbs and others) drawn from the later 
Grk. writ. see Sophocles, Glossary ete. § 88, 1.] ο. 
after words by which judgment is pronounced con- 
cerning that which some one is about to do (or which is 
going to happen), as to whether it is ex pedient, be- 
fitting, proper, or not; as συμφέρει, Mt. xviii. 6; v. 
29 sq.; Jn. xi. 50; xvi. 7; λυσιτελεῖ, LK. xvii. 2; ἀρκετόν 
ἐστι, Mt. x. 25; also after ἄξιος, Jn. i. 27; ἱκανός, Mt. 
viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6; ἐλάχιστόν poi ἐστιν, ἵνα. 1 Co. iv. 3; 
ἠγαλλιάσατο, ἵνα ἴδη. In. viii. 56; χρείαν ἔχω, In. ii. 25; 
xvi. 30; 1 Jn. ii. 27; ἔδει, ἵνα ἐπὶ ξύλου πάθη, Barn. 


ep. 5, 13. [For other exx. see Soph. as above ὃ 88, 
3, 4.] d. after substantives, to which it adds a 


more exact definition of the thing; after subst. of 
time: χρόνον, iva μετανοήσῃ, Rev. ii. 21; after dpa, In. 
xii. 23; xiii. 1; xvi. 2,32, (elsewhere ὅτε, Jn. iv. 23; v. 
25); in these exx. the final force of the particle is still 
apparent; we also can say “time that she should re- 
pent” [cf. W. 339 (318); B. 240 (207)]; but in other 
expressions this force has almost disappeared, as in 


t 


(va 


ἔστιν συνήθεια ὑμῖν, va... ἀπολύσω, Jn. xviii. 39; after 
μισθός, 1 Co. ix. 18. e. it looks back to a de 
monstrative pronoun; ef. W. 338 (317); [Β. 8 139, 
45]: πόθεν μοι τοῦτο, ἵνα ἔλθῃ κτλ. for τὸ ἐλθεῖν τὴν ete. 
Lk. i. 43; esp. in John, ef. vi. 29,50; χν. 18; xvii. 8 
{here T Tr txt. indic.; see 1d. above]; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23; 
v.3; 2Jn.6; Phil. 1. 9; ἐν τούτῳ, Jn. xv. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 
. ἐξ οὐκ 
ὄντων ποιῇ τὰ γινόμενα, Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 18; after 
τόδε, Epict. diss. 2, 1, 1; [other exx. in Soph. Lex. 
8. v. 6]). 

3. According to a very ancient tenet of the gramma- 
rians, accepted by Kiihner, ὃ 553, 2 Anm. 3; [7]. S. 
Green, N. T. Gram. p. 172 sq.], and not utterly rejected 
by Alex. Bim. N. T. Gr. p. 238 sq. (206), ἵνα is alleged to 
be used not only τελικῶς, i.e. of design and end, but also 
frequently ἐκβατικῶς, i. 6. of the result, signifying with 
the issue, that; with the result, that; so tha’ (equiv. to 
ὥστε). But C. F. A. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 836 sqq. and 
Win. 338 (317) and 457 (426) sqq. have clearly shown, 
that in all the passages adduced from the N. T. to prove 
this usage the telie (or final) force prevails: thus in 
ἵνα μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωῦσέως, that the law of Moses may 
not be broken (which directs a man to be circumcised 
on the eighth and on no other day), Jn. vii. 23; οὐκ 
ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει, ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς . . . καταλάβῃ, that the day 
should overtake you (cf. the final force as brought out by 
turning the sentence into the pass. form in Germ. wm 
vom Tage erfasst zu werden), 1 ‘Th. v. 4; προσευχέσθω, 
ἵνα διερμηνεύῃ, let him pray (intent on this, or with this 
aim), that (subsequently) he may interpret, 1 Co. xiv. 
13; likewise ἐπενθήσατε, iva ete. 1 Co. v. 2, and perevdn- 
σαν, iva μή, Rev. ix. 20; μετάθεσιν, . . . ἵνα ete. that the 
change may be to this end, that ete. Heb. xii. 27; ἵνα μὴ 
---+mo.nre, that ye may not do, Gal. v.17 (where ἡ σάρξ 
and τὸ πνεῦμα are personified antagenistic forces con- 
tending for dominion over the will of the Christian; cf, 
Wieseler ad loc.) ; the words ἵνα... φραγῇ κτλ. in Ro. 
iii. 19 describe the end aimed at by the law. In many 
passages where ἵνα has seemed to interpreters to be used 
ἐκβατικῶς, the sacred writers follow the dictate of piety, 
which bids us trace all events back to God as their au- 
thor and to refer them to God’s pur poses (Jo. Dama- 
scen. orthod. fid. 4, 19 ἔθος τῇ γραφῇ, τινὰ ἐκβατικῶς 
ὀφείλοντα λέγεσθαι. αἰτιολογικῶς λέγειν) ; so that, if we 
are ever in doubt whether iva is used of design or of 
result, we can easily settle the question when we can 
interpret the passage ‘that, by God’s decree,’ or ‘that, 
according to divine purpose’ ete.; passages of this 
sort are the following: Mk. iv. 12; Lk. ix. 45; xi. 50; 
xiv. 10; Jn. iv. 36; ix. 2; xii. 40; xix. 28; Ro. v. 20; vii. 
13; vili.17; xi. 31sq.; 1 Co. vii. 29; 2Co. iv. 7; vii. 9; 
also the phrase ἵνα πληρωθῇ, wont to be used in refer- 
ence to the O. T. prophecies: Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; iv. 14; 
xii. 17 LT Tr WH; xxi. 4; xxvi. 56: xxvii. 35 Ree.; Jn. 
xiii. 18; xvii. 12; xix. 24, 36; ἵνα πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος, Jn. 
xii. 88; xv. 25, cf. xviii. 9, 32. (Cf. Win. 461 (429). 
Prof. Sophocles although giving (Lex. s. v. iva, 19) a co- 


17, (θεοῦ δὲ τὸ δυνατὸν ἐν τούτῳ δείκνυται, iva. . 


804 


wa 


pious collection of exx. of the ecbatic use of the word, 
defends its telic sense in the phrase ἵνα wAnp., by calling 
attention not merely to the substitution of ὅπως πληρ. 
in Mt. viii. 17; xiii. 35, (ef. ii. 23), but esp. to 1 Esdr. i. 
54 (els ἀναπλήρωσιν ῥήματος τοῦ κυρίου ἐν στόματι ‘lepe- 
pov) ; ii. 1 (εἰς συντέλειαν ῥήματος κυρ. κτλ.) ; 2 Esdr. 1.1 
(τοῦ τελεσθῆναι λόγον κυρίου ἀπὸ στόματος Ἱερεμίου) ; Jo- 
seph. antt. 8, 8, 2 fin. ταῦτα δ᾽ ἐπράττετο κατὰ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ 
βούλησιν ἵνα λάβῃ τέλος ἃ προεφήτευσεν ᾿Αχίας ; cf. Bib. 
Sacr.’61 p. 729 sqq. ; Luthardt’s Zeitschr. ’83 p. 632 sqq.) 

4. The elliptical use of the particle; a. the 
telic ἵνα often depends on a verb not expressed, but ta 
be repeated or educed from the context (ef. Fritzsche 
on Mt. p. 840 sq.; W. 816 (297); [B.§139,47]): ἀλλ᾽ 
(se. ἦλθεν, cf. vs. 7) ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ, In. i. 8; ἀλλ᾽ (se. 
ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον) ἵνα eis φανερὸν ἔλθῃ, Mk. iv. 22; ἀλλ᾽ 
(sc. κρατεῖτέ με) ἵνα εἴο. Mk. xiv. 49; add, Jn. xv. 25; 
1 Jn. ii. 19. b. the weakened ἵνα (see 2 above) 
with the subjune. (or indic. fut. [cf. 1 c.], Rev. xiv. 
181, Τ Tr WH) denotes something which one 
wishes to be done by another, so that before the wa 
a verb of commanding (exhorting, wishing) must 
be mentally supplied, (or, as is commonly saia, 1% 
forms a periphrasis for the imperative): wa 

ον ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ, Mk. ν. 23; ἡ γυνὴ ἵνα φόβηται 
τὸν ἄνδρα, Eph. v. 33; Gal. ii. 10; add 2 Co. viii. 7 ; ἵνα ἀνα- 
παύσωνται [1,7 Tr WH -παήσονται (see ἀναπαύω init.) |, 
Germ. sie sollen ruhen [A. V. that they may rest ete.], 
Rey. xiv. 13; [perh. also Col. iv. 16, ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad 
loe.], (2 Mace. i. 9; Epict. ench. 23 (17); diss. 4,1, 41; 
among the earlier Greeks once so, Soph. O. C. 155; in 
Latin, Cic. ad divers. 14, 20 ‘ibi ut sint omnia parata’; 
in Germ. stern commands: ‘dass du gehest!’ ‘dass du 
nicht sdumest!’ οἵ. W. § 43,5 a.; [B. 241 (208)]). c. 
ἵνα without a verb following, — which the reader is left 
to gather from the context; thus we must mentally sup- 
ply εὐαγγελιζώμεθα, εὐαγγελίζωνται in Gal. ii. 9, cf. W. 
587 (546); [B. 394 (338)]; ἵνα κατὰ χάριν, se. 7, that 
the promise may ke a gift of grace, Ro. iv. 16 [W. 598 
(556); B. 392 (836) ]; ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις 56. γένηται, 2 Co. 
vill. 13 [W. 586 (545); B. § 129, 22]; ἵνα se. γένηται, 1 
Co. i. 31, unless preference be given there to an anaco- 
luthon [W. 599 (557); B. 234 (201)]: ta... καυχάσθω 
for καυχᾶται. (ἵνα ὡς ἄνθρωπος, sc. ἐργάζῃ, Epict. diss. 3, 
28, 4.) 

5. Generally ἵνα stands first in the final sentence; 
sometimes, however, it is preceded by those words in 
which the main force of the sentence lies [W.550 (511); 
B. §151, 18]: Acts xix. 4; Ro. xi. 31 (join τῷ ὑμετέρῳ 
ἐλέει ἵνα) ; 1 Co. ix. 15 fin. [RG]; 2 Co. ii. 4; xii. 7; Gal. 
ii. 10; τὸ λοιπὸν ἵνα κτὰ. 1 Co. Vii. 29 Rec.exe εἰς 1, T. 
Among N. T. writ. John uses this particle oftener, Luke 
more rarely, than the rest; [on Jn.’s use see W. 338 
(317) sq.; 461 (430); B. 236 (203); 244 (210) note; 
§ 140, 10 and 12; on Luke’s cf. B. 235 sq. (203)]. It 
is not found in the Epistle of Jude. [For Schaeffer's 
reff. to Grk. usage (and edd.) see the Lond. (Valpy’s) 
ed. of Stephanus s. v., col. 4488.] 


ἵνα τι 


ἵνα τί [so L WH uniformly, also Tr exc. (by mistake?) 
in Mt. xxvii. 46], and written unitedly ἱνατί [so Rec.** > 
GT uniformly ; see W. $5, 2]; Lat. ut quid? i. 6. for what 
purpose? wherefore? why? an elliptical formula, due to 
the fact that a questioner begins an answer to his own 
question with the word iva, but not knowing how to com- 
plete it reverts again to the question, as if to ask what 
will complete the answer: that (what?) may or might 
happen, (ut (quid 3) fiat or fieret); see Herm. ad Vig. p. 
847; Kiihner § 587, 5 ii. p. 1020; W. § 25, 1 fin.; [B. 
§ 149, 2]: Mt. ix.4; xxvii. 46; Lk. xiii. 7; Acts iv. 25; 
vii. 26; 1 Co. x. 29. Add, from the Sept., Gen. iv. 6; 
xxv. 32; xxvii.46; Num. xiv. 3; xxii. 32 [Ald.]; Judg. 
vi. 13 [Alex.,Ald.,Compl.]; 1S.i.8; 2S. iii. 24; xv. 19; 
Job iii. 12; x. 18: Jer. ii. 29; xiv. 19; xv. 18; Dan. x. 
20 [Theodot.]; Ps. ii. 1; x. 1 (ix. 22); xxi. (xxii.) 2, 
ete.; Sir. xiv. 3; 1 Mace. ii. 7. (Arstph., nub. 1192; 
Plat. apol. c. 14 p. 26 ¢.; al.) * 

Ἰόππη (to which com. spelling the ancient lexicogra- 
phers prefer Ἰόπη, cf. Movers, Phonizier, ii. 2 p. 176 
Anm.),-ns, ἡ, (Hebr. 15) i. e. beauty, fr. 72: to shine, be 
beautiful; [al. make the name mean ‘an eminence’; al. 
al.]), Joppa, a city of Palestine on the Mediterranean, 
lying on the border of the tribes of Dan and Ephraim. 
It was subject to the Jews from the time of the Macca- 
bees. It had a celebrated but dangerous port and car- 
ried on a flourishing trade; now Ydfa (not Jaffa): Acts 
ix. 36, 38, 42 sq.; x. 5, 8, 23,32; xi.5,13. Cf. Win. RWB. 
8. v. Joppe; Riietschi in Herzog vii. p. 4 sq.; Fritzsche 
in Schenkel iii. 376 sq.; [BB.DD.]. * 

᾿Ιορδάνης, -ov [B. 17], ὁ [ef. W. § 18, ὅ ἃ.1, (IY, fr. 17) 
to descend; for other opinions about the origin of the 
name see Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 626 [cf. Alex.’s Kitto 8. v. 
Jordan]), the Jordan, the largest and most celebrated 
river of Palestine, which has its origin in numerous tor- 
rents and small streams at the foot of Anti-Lebanon, 
flows at first into Lake Samochonitis (Merom so-called; 
[mod. el-Haleh; see BB.DD. 5. v. Merom (Waters of)]), 
and issuing thence runs into the Lake of Tiberias (the 
Sea of Galilee). After quitting this lake it is augmented 
during its course by many smaller streams, and finally 
empties into the Dead Sea: Mt. iii. 5 sq. 13 ; iv. 15, 25; 
xix.1; Mk.i.5, 9; iii. 8; x.1; Lk. iii. 3; iv.1; Jn.i.28; 
iii. 26; x. 40; cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.]s. v. Jordan; 
Arnold in Herzog vii. p. 7 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iii. 
Ρ- 378 sqq.; [ Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the Holy Land, 
pp. 144-186 ].* } ; 

ἰός, -οὔ, 6, (on its very uncert. deriv. see Kreussler in 
Passow s. v.; Curtius § 591; [Vaniéek p. 9697); 1. 
poison (of animals): ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν, the 
poison of asps is under their lips, spoken of men given to 
reviling and calumniating and thereby injuring others, 
Ro. ili. 13 (fr. Ps. exxxix. (exl.) 3 (4)); by the same fig. 
(γλῶσσα) μεστὴ ἰοῦ θανατηφόρου, Jas. iii. 8; (in Grk. writ. 
fr. Pind. down). 2. rust: Jas. ν. 3; (Ezek. xxiv. 
6.11 sq.; Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.] 11 (12), 23 (24); Theogn., 
Theoer., Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Leian., al.).* 

Ἰούδα, (see ᾿Ιούδας, init. and 1), indecl., Judah, a prop. 


305 


᾿Ιουδαῖος 


name; in Sept. 1. the fourth son of the patriarch 
Jacob. 2. the tribe that sprang from him. 3. 
the region which this tribe occupied (cf. W. 114 (108)); so 
in the N. T. in Mt. ii. 6 (twice); πόλις Ἰούδα (πᾶσ. xvii. 
8), a city of the tribe of Judah, Lk. i. 39, where it is a 
matter of dispute what city is meant; the most probable 
conjecture seems to be that Hebron is referred to, —a 
city assigned to the priests, situated ‘in the hill country’ 
(Χεβρὼν ἐν τῷ ὄρει Iovda, Josh. xxi. 11), the native place 
of John the Baptist acc. to Jewish tradition. [Cf Β. Ὁ. 
Am. ed. 8. v. Juda, a City of.]* 

᾿Ιουδαία, -as, ἡ [cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (sc. γῆ, which is added 
In. iii. 22, or χώρα, Mk.i.5; fr. the adj. Ἰουδαῖος, q. v-), 
Judea (Hebr. 71337*) ; inthe O. T. a region of Palestine, 
named after the tribe of Judah, which inhabited it: 
Judg. xvii. 7-9; Ruthi.1sq.; 2S. ii. 1,ete. Its bound- 
aries are laid down in Josh. xv. 1 sqq. After the time 
of David, when the kingdom had been rent asunder, the 
name was given to the kingdom of Judah, to which were 
reckoned, besides the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, cer- 
tain cities of the tribes of Dan and Simeon, together with 
the metropolis of Jerusalem: 1 K. xiv. 21, 29; xv. 7, ete. 
In the N.T. the name is given 1. in a narrower 
sense, to the southern part of Palestine lying on this side 
of the Jordan and the Dead Sea, to distinguish it from 
Samaria, Galilee, Perea, Idumea (Mk. iii. 8): Mt. ii. 1, 
5,22; iii. 5; 1v.25; xxiv. 16; Mk. iil. 7; xiii. 14; Lk. i. 
4; Jn. iv. 3,47, 54; Acts i. 8; viii. 1, etc.; it stands for 
its inhabitants in Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5, (2 Chr. xxxii. 33; 
Xxxv. 24). 2. in a broader sense, to all Palestine: 
Lk. i. 5; [iv.44 WH Trmrg.]; vii. 17; xxiii.5; Acts ii. 
9; x. 37; xi. 1, 29, (and perh. 2 Co. i. 16; Gal. i. 22); 
πᾶσα ἡ χώρα τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας, Acts xxvi. 20; εἰς τὰ ὅρια τῆς 
᾿Ιουδαίας πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου, into the borders of Judea (in 
the broader sense) beyond the Jordan, i. e. into Perxa, 
Mt. xix. 1; on the contrary, in the parallel pass. Mk. x. 
1 RG, εἰς τὰ Gp. τῆς Ἰουδ. διὰ τοῦ πέραν τοῦ “Iopd., Jesus is 
said to have come into the borders of Juda (in the nar- 
rower sense) through Perea; but ace. to the reading of 
LT Tr WH, viz. καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰουρδ. and (in particular 
that part of Judea which lay) beyond the Jordan, Mark 
agrees with Matthew; [others regard πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδ. 
here as parall. with τῆς Ἰουδ. and like it dependent upon 
δρια]. 

ἸΙουδαΐζω ; (fr. Ἰουδαῖος, cf. Ἑλληνιστής [W. 92 (87)]), 
to adopt Jewish customs and rites, imitate the Jews. Juda- 
ize: of one who observes the ritual law of the Jews, Gal. 
ii. 14. (Esth. viii. 17; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10,3; Evang. 
Nicod. ο. 2; Plut. Cie. 7; to favor the Jews, Joseph. b. 7. 
2, 18, 2.) * 

᾿Ιουδαϊκός, -ή, -dv, Jewish: Tit.i.14. (2 Macc. viii. 11; 
xiii. 21; Joseph. antt. 20,11, 1; Philo [in Flac. § 8].)* 

᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, adv., Jewishly, afler the manner of the Jews: 
Gal. ii. 14. [(Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 3.)]* 

᾿Ιουδαῖος, -aia, -atov, (Ἰούδα), [ Aristot. (in Joseph. ce. Ap. 
1, 22, 7 where see Miiller), Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut., 
al.; Sept.; (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Jewish ; a. joined to 
nouns, belonging to the Jewish race: avnp, Acts x. 28; xxii 


᾿Ιουδαΐσμος 


8, (1 Mace. ii. 23); ἄνθρωπος, Acis xxi. 89; ψευδοπρο- 
φήτης, Acts xiii. 6; ἀρχιερεύς, Acts xix. 14 ; γυνή, Acts 
XVi. 1; xxiv. 24; γῆ, Jn. 111. 22; χώρα, Mk.i.d. b. 
without a noun, substantively, Jewish as respects birth, 
race, religion; aJew: Jn. ἵν. 9; Acts xviii. 2, 24; Ro. ii. 
28 sq.;  plur., Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9; οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι (07377), be- 
fore the exile citizens of the kingdom of Judah; after the 
exile all the Israelites [ef. Wright in B.D. 8. v. Jew]), the 
Jews, the Jewish race: Mt. ii. 2; xxvii. 11, 29; Mk. vii. 
3; xv. 2; Jn. ii. 6; iv. 22; ν. 1; xviii. 33, ete.; ᾿Ιουδαῖοί 
τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Acts xiv. 1; xviii. 4; xix. 10; 1 Co. i. 24; 
Ἰουδαῖοί re καὶ προσήλυτοι, Acts ii. 11 (10); ἔθνη τε καὶ 
Ἰουδαῖοι, Acts xiv. 5; sing., Ro. i. 16; ii. 9; of κατὰ τὰ 
ἔθνη ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, who live in foreign lands, among the Gen- 
tiles, Acts xxi. 21; Ἰουδαῖοι is used of converts from 
Judaism, Jewish Christians (see ἔθνος, 5) in Gal. ii. 13. 
[ϑυν. Ἑβραῖος, Ἰουδαῖος, Ἰσραηλίτηπ: “restricting our- 
selves to the employment of these three words in the N. T. we 
may say that in the first is predominantly noted language; 
in the second, nationality; in the third (the augustest title 
of all), theocratic privileges and glorious vocation” 
(Trench ὃ xxxix.); cf. B.D. s. vv. Hebrew, Israelite, Jew.] 
The apostle John, inasmuch as agreeably to the state 
of things in his day he looked upon the Jews as a body 
of men hostile to Christianity, with whom he had come 
to see that both he and all true Christians had nothing 
in common as respects religious matters, even in his 
record of the life of Jesus not only himself makes a dis- 
tinction between the Jews and Jesus, but ascribes to 
Jesus and his apostles language in which they distin- 
guish themselves from the Jews, as though the latter 
sprang from an alien race: Jn. xi. 8; xiii. 33. And 
those who (not only at Jerusalem, but also in Galilee, ef. 
vi. 41, 52) opposed his divine Master and his Master’s 
cause, — esp. the rulers, priests, members of the Sanhe- 
drin, Pharisees,—he does not hesitate to style of Ἰου- 
δαῖοι, since the hatred of these leaders exhibits the 
hatred of the whole nation towards Jesus: i. 19; ii. 18, 
20; v.10, 15 sq. 18; vi. 41, 52; vii. 1,11, 18; ix. 18, 22; x. 
24, 31, 33; xviii. 14. [Cf. B.D. 5. ν. Jew; Franke, Stel- 
lung d. Johannes z. Volke d. alt. Bundes. (Halle, 1882).] 

᾿Ιουδαϊσμός, -ov, ὁ, (tovdaitw), the Jewish faith and wor- 
ship, the religion of the Jews, Judaism: Gal. i. 13 sq. 
(2 Mace. ii. 21, ete.; ef. Grimm, Com. on 2 Mace. p- 61. 
[B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Judaism].) * 

᾿Ιούδας, -a, dat. -ᾳ, ace. -av, [B. 20 (18)], 6, (AIM, fr. 
the Hoph. of 77, praised, celebrated; see Gen. xxix. 
35), Judah or Judas (see below) ; 1. the fourth son 
of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. i. 2 sq-; Lk. iii. 33; Rev. v. 
5; vil. 5; by meton., the tribe of Judah, the descendants 
of Judah: Heb. vii. 14; ὁ οἶκος Ἰούδα, citizens of the 
kingdom of Judah, Heb. viii. 8. 2. Judah (or Judas) 
an unknown ancestor of Christ: Lk. iii. 26 RG L. 3. 
another of Christ’s ancestors, equally unknown: Lk. iii. 
30. 4. Judas surnamed the Galilean, a man who 
at the time of the census under Quirinus [better Quiri- 
nius], excited a revolt in Galilee: Acts v. 37 (Joseph. 
antt. 18, 1, 1, where he is called 6 PavAavirns because he 


306 


Ἴσαακ 


came from the city Gamala, near the Lake of Galilee in 
lower Gaulanitis; but he is called also ὁ Γαλιλαῖος by 
Joseph. antt. 18, 1,6; 20, 5, 2; b.j. 2,8, 1). 5. [Jw 
das| a certain Jew of Damascus: Acts ix. 11. 6. 
Judas surnamed Ἰσκαριώτης (4: v-), of Carioth (from the 
city of Kerioth, Josh. xv. 25; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 41; Amos 
ii. 2; [but see BB.DD.s. v. Kerioth]; some codd. in Jn. 
vi. 71 [ef. Tdf.’s note in loc.]; xii. 4, read ἀπὸ Καριώτου 
instead of ᾿Ισκαριώτης), the son of one Simon (who in 
Jn. vi. 71 LT Tr WH; xiii. 26 T Tr WH, is himself sur- 
named Ἰσκαριώτης), one of the apostles of Jesus, who 
betrayed him: Mt. χ. 4; xxvi. 14, 25,47; xxvii. 3; Mk. 
iii. 19; xiv. 10,43; Lk. vi. 16; xxii. 3,47 sq.; Jn. vi. 71; 
xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26,29; xviii. 2sq.5; Actsi. 16,25. Mat- 
thew (xxvii. 5), Luke (Acts i. 18), and Papias [ef. Wendt 
in Meyer’s Apostelgesch. 5te Aufl. p. 23 note] in a frag. 
quoted by Oecum. on Acts i. 18 differ in the account of 
his death, [see B. Ὁ. Am. ed. 8. v.]; on his avarice ef. 
Jn. xii. 6. 7. Judas, surnamed Barsabas [or Bare 
sabbas, see the word], a prophet of the church at Jeru- 
salem: Acts xv. 22, 27, 32. 8. Judas, an apostle, 
Jn. xiv. 22, who is called Ἰούδας ᾿Ιακώβου in Lk. vi. 16; 
Acts i. 13 (see Ἰάκωβος, 4), and, as it should seem, was 
surnamed Lebbeus or Thaddaus (see Θαδδαῖος). Ac- 
cording to the opinion of the church he wrote the Epistle 
of Jude. 9. Judas, the brother of our Lord: Mt. 
xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3,and very probably Jude 1; see ᾿Ιάκω- 
Bos, 8." 

Ἰουλία, -as, ἡ, Julia, a Christian woman [οἵ. Bp. Lghtft. 
on Philip. p. 177]: Ro. xvi. 15 [Lmrg. "Iovviav].* 

᾿Ιούλιος, -ov, 6, Julius, a Roman centurion: Acts xxvii. 
1, 3." 

*Touvias [al. -νιᾶς, as contr. fr. Junianus ; cf. W. 102 sq. 
(97)], -a [but ef. B. 17 sq. (16)], 6, Junias, a convert from 
Judaism, Paul’s kinsman and fellow-prisoner: Ro. xvi. 7 
[(here A. V. Junia (a woman’s name) which is possi- 
ble). The name oceurs again as the name of a Christian 
at Rome in Ro. xvi. 15 Lehm. mrg. (where al. TovA‘ayv). ]* 

Ἰοῦστος, -ov, 6, Justus [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 11], 
the surname 1. of Joseph, a convert from Judaism, 
who was also surnamed Barsabas [better Barsabbas q. 
v.]: Acts i. 23. 2. of Titus, a Corinthian [a Jew- 
ish proselyte]: Acts xviii. 7. 3. of a certain Jesus, 
[a Jewish Christian]: Col. iv. 11.* 

ἱππεύς, -€ws, 6, (ἵππος), a horseman: Acts xxiii. 23, 32. 
[From Hom. down.]* 

ἱππικός, -ή, -dv, equestrian ; τὸ ἱππικόν, the horse (-men), 
cavalry: Rev. ix. 16 (as Hdt. 7, 87; Xen., Plat., Polyb., 
al.; more fully τὸ ἱππικὸν στράτευμα, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 26; 
so τὸ πεζικόν, the foot (-forces), infantry, Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 
38).* 

ἊΝ του, ὅ, [Curtius § 624; Peile, Grk. and Lat- 
Etymol., Index s. v.], a horse: Jas. iii. 3; Rev. vi. 2, 4 sq. 
8; ix. 7, 9, 17, [19 GLT Tr WH]; xiv. 20; xviii. 13; xix. 
11-21. [From Hom. down.]* 

ἴρις, -ιδος, ἡ, (Iris), a rainbow: Rev.iv.3; x.1. (Hom., 
Aristot., Theophr., al.) * 

Ἰσαάκ. ὁ. indecl. (pny; fr. pn¥ to laugh: Gen. xxi. 9; 


ἰσώγγελος 


xvii. 17; in Joseph. Ἴσακος, -ov), Isaac, the son of Abra- 
ham by Sarah: Mt. i. 2; viii. 11; xxii. 32; Ro. ix. 7, 10; 
Gal. iv. 28; Heb. xi. 9, 17 sq. 20; Jas. ii. 21, ete. 

ἰσάγγελος, -ov, (taos and ἄγγελος, formed like ἰσόθεος 
[ef. ἰσάδελφος (Eur. Or. 1015), ἰσάστερος (4 Mace. xvii. 
5), and other compounds in Koumanoudes, Συναγωγή κτλ. 
p- 166 sq.]), like the angels: Lk. xx. 36. (Eccl. writ. ; 
[ef. ἴσος ἀγγέλοις γεγονώς, Philo de sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 2; 
W. § 34, 3 cf. p. 100 (95) ]-) * 

Ἰσασχάρ [Rec.*] and Ἰσαχάρ [R* GL] (Ἰσσάχαρ 
Tdf., Ἰσσαχάρ Tr WH), ὁ, (2), fr. w there is, and 
Σ᾽ a reward [(cf. Jer. xxxi. 16) yet cf. Mihlau u. Volek 
s. v.]; Joseph. Ἰσάσχαρις [᾿Ισάχαρις ]), Issachar, the son 
of the patriarch Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxx. 18): Rev. 
Lledo 

ἴσημι, found only in the Doric form ἴσαμι, to know; 
from which some derive the forms tore and ἴσμεν, con- 
tracted from toate and ἴσαμεν ; but these forms are more 
correctly derived from εἴδω, ἴσμεν i. 4. ἴδμεν, ete., (cf. 
Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 548); on the phrase tore [R ἐστε] 
γινώσκοντες, Eph. v. 5, see γινώσκω, 1. 2 Ὁ. 

Ἰσκαριώτης, and (Lchm. in Mt. x.4; TWH in Mk. 
xiv. 10; L T Tr WH in Mk. iii. 19; Lk. vi. 16) Ἰσκαριώθ, 
i.e. NYA wen; see Ἰούδας, 6 and Σίμων, 5. 

ἴσος (not ἶσος [yet often so R*°' G Tr], which is Epic; 
ef. Bornemann, Scholia in Lue. p. 4; Géttling, Lehre 
vom Accent p. 305; [Chandler § 406]; ZLipsius, Gram- 
mat. Untersuch. p. 24; [L. and S.s. v. fin.; W.52]),-n, 
τον, equal, in quality or in quantity: ἡ ton δωρεά, the same 
gift, Acts xi. 17; ἴσαι μαρτυρίαι, agreeing testimonies, 
Mk. xiv. 56,59; ἴσον ποιεῖν τινά Tu, to make one equal 
to another, in the payment of wages, Mt. xx. 12; ἑαυτὸν 
τῷ θεῷ, to claim for one’s self the nature, rank, author- 
ity, which belong to God, Jn. v. 18; τὰ ἴσα ἀπολαβεῖν, Lk. 
vi. 34. The neuters ἴσον and ἴσα are often used adver- 
bially fr. Hom. down (cf. Passow s. ν. p. 1505"; [L. and 
S.s. v.IV.1]; W.-§ 27, 3 fin.): ἴσα εἶναι (B. § 129, 11), 
of measurement, Rey. xxi. 16; of state and condition, τῷ 
θεῷ, Phil. ii. 6 (on which see in μορφή)" 

ἰσότης, -ητος, 7), (ἴσος) ; 1. equality: ἐξ ἰσότητος 
[ef. ἐκ, V. 3] by equality, 2 Co. viii. 13 (14), i. q. ὅπως 
γένηται ἰσότης, 14. 2. equity, fairness, what is equi- 
table, joined with τὸ δίκαιον : Col. iv. 1. (Eur., Plat., 
Aristot., Polyb., al.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢., yet per 
contra Meyer].) * 

ἰσότιμος, -ov, (ἴσος and τιμή), equally precious ; equally 
honored: τινί, to be esteemed equal to, ἰσότιμον ἡμῖν 
πίστιν [a like precious faith with us], concisely for πίστιν 
τῇ ἡμῶν πίστει ἰσότιμον [W. § 66, 2f.; B. § 133, 10]: 2 
Pet. i. 1. (Philo, Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) * 

ἰσόψυχος, -ov, (ἴσος and ψυχή), equal in soul [A. V. 
like-minded], (Vulg. unanimus): Phil. ii. 20. (Ps. liv. 
(lv.) 14; Aeschyl. Ag. 1470.) * 

Ἰσραήλ (Joseph. Ἰσράηλος, -ov), 6, indecl., Osi, fr. 
by and wv, wrestler with God, Gen. xxxii. 28; Hos. xii. 
4, cf. Gen. xxxy. 10), Israel, a name given to the pa- 
triarch Jacob (and borne by him in addition to his former 
name from Gen. xxxii. 28 on): ὁ οἶκος Ἰσραήλ, the family 


307 


ἵστημι 


or descendants of Israel, the race of Israel [A. V. the 
house of Israel], Mt. x.6; xv. 24; Acts vii. 42, (Ex. xvi. 
31; 1S. vii. 2, and often) ; of υἱοὶ Ἰσρ. the [sons i. 6. the 
children, the] posterity of Israel, Lk. i. 16; Acts v. 21; 
vii. 23,37; Ro. ix. 27; ai φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἴσρ., Mt. xix. 28; 
Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. vii.4. | By meton. for the posterity of 
Israel i. e. the Israelites (a name of esp. honor because 
it made reference to the promises of salvation through 
the Messiah, which were given to Jacob in preference 
to Esau, and to be fulfilled to his posterity [see Ἰουδαῖος, 
b.]): Mt. ii. 6; vili.10; ix.33; Lk.i. 54, 68,80; Acts 
iv.8 [RG]; Eph. ii.12; Ro. xi. 2, 7, 26, etc. (Ex. ν. 2; 
xi. 7, and often); ὁ λαὸς Ἴσρ., Acts iv. 10,27; γῆ Ἰσρ. 
1. 6. Palestine [(1 S. xiii. 19, ete.)], Mt. ii. 20 sq.; βασι- 
λεὺς Ἰσρ., Mt. xxvii. 42; Jn. i. 49 (50); ἡ ἐλπὶς τοῦ Ἴσρ. 
Acts xxviii. 20; ὁ Ἰσρ. τοῦ θεοῦ (gen. of possession), i. 6. 
Christians, Gal. vi. 16; ὁ Ἶσρ. κατὰ σάρκα, Israelites by 
birth, i. e. Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; in an emphat. sense, οὐ yap 
πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἴσρ. κτλ. for not all those that draw their 
bodily descent from Israel are true Israelites, i. e. are 
those whom God pronounces to be Israelites and has 
chosen to salvation, Ro. ix. 6. 

Ἰσραηλίτης (T WH Ἰσραηλείτης, Tr only in Jn. i. 47 
(48); [see Τὰ Proleg. p. 86, and cf. s. v. et, ¢]), τοῦ, 6, 
(Ἰσραήλ, q. v-), an Israelite (Hebr. ‘987%; Sept. Ἰεζραη- 
λίτης, 2 ὃ. xvii. 25), one of the race of Israel, a name 
held in honor (see Ἰσραήλ) : Jn. i. 47 (48); Ro. ix. 4; 
xi. 1; 2 Co. xi. 22; ἄνδρες Ἰσραηλῖται [W. § 65,5 ἃ. ; B. 
82 (72)], Acts ii. 22; ili. 12; v. 35; xiii. 16; [xxi. 28], 
(4 Mace. xviii. 1; Joseph. antt.2,9,1). [Cf. B. D. (Am. 
ed.) s. v. Syn. see ᾿Ιουδαῖος, b.] * 

[Ἰσσάχαρ, Ἰσσαχάρ, see Ισασχάρ.] 

ἵστημι, more rarely ἱστάω ([({ν. Hdt. down; cf. Veitch 
s. v.)] ἱστῶμεν, Ro. iii. 31 RG) and ἱστάνω ([(late; cf. 
Veitch s. v.)] ἱστάνομεν, Ro. iii. 31 LT Tr WH), [ef. B. 
44 (38) sq.; W. § 14, 1f.; 87 (83); WH. App. p. 168; 
Veitch p. 337 sq. |; fut. στήσω; 1 aor. ἔστησα; 2 aor. ἔστην; 
impv. στῆθι, inf. στῆναι, ptep. στάς ; pf. ἔστηκα [with pres. 
force; W. 274 (257)], inf. ἑστάναι [15 }2 5 νες G Tr -avae 
in Acts xii. 14] (nowhere ἑστηκέναι), ptep. mase. ἑστηκώς 
with neut. ἑστηκός, and in the shorter form ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα 
(Jn. viii. 9), with neut. ἑστώς and (LT Tr WH in Mt. 
xxiv. 15 [here R* also]; Rey. xiv. 1) éords, (ef. Bttm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 208; [Rutherford, Babrius p. 39 sq.; W. 
§ 14,1i.; Β. 48 (41)]}); plupf. εἱστήκειν [(but WH uni- 
formly ior.; see I, 4) with force of impf. W. 274 (257) ], 
3 pers. plur. εἱστήκεισαν (Mt. xii. 46; Jn. xviii. 18; Acts 
ix. 7 and L T Tr WH in Rev. vii. 11) and ἑστήκεσαν 
(Rev. vii. 11 R G [ef. W. § 14,1 a.; yet B. 43 (88)]); 
Pass., 1 aor. ἐστάθην ; 1 fut. σταθήσομαι; 1 fut. mid. στήσο- 
μαι (Rey. xviii. 15) ; 

I. TRANSITIVELY in the Pres., Impf., Fut., and 1 
Aor. δούς; likewise in the tenses of the Pass. [οἵ. B. 
47 (41) contra W. 252 (237)], (Sept. for T2yn, ODT, 
3x7); [fr. Hom. down]; to cause or make to stand; to 
place, put, set; 1. univ. a. prop. τινά, to bid to 
stand by, [set up]: Actsi. 23; vi. 13; in the presence of 
others: ἐν μεσῳ, in the midst, Jn. viii. 3, and ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, 


ἰστημι 


Acts iv. 7; ἐνώπιόν τινος, Acts vi. 6; before judges: εἰς 
αὐτούς, before the members of the Sanhedrin, Acts xxii. 
30; ἐν τῷ συνεδρίῳ, Acts ν. 27; ἐπί with gen. of the judge, 
pass. σταθήσεσθε, Mk. xiii. 9; τινὰ ἄμωμον κατενώπιόν 
τινος, to [set one i. e.] cause one to make his appearance 
faultless before ete. Jude 24; to place (i. 6. designate 
the place for one to occupy): ἐν μέσῳ τινῶν, Mt. xviii. 25 
Mk. ix. 36; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Lk. ix. 47; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Mt. xxv. 33; 
ἐπί τι (ace. of place), Mt. iv.5; Lk. iv. 9. Mid. to place 
one’s self, to stand (Germ. sich hinstellen, hintreten) : ἀπὸ 
μακρόθεν, Rev. xviii. 15; likewise in the passive: σταθείς, 
Lk. xviii. 11,40; xix. 23 [ἐστάθησαν σκυθρωποί they stood 
still, looking sad, Lk. xxiv.17 T WH Tr txt. (cf. IL. 1b. 
B.)]; Actsii14; xi. 13; with ἐν μέσῳ τινός, τινῶν, added, 
Acts xvii. 22; xxvii. 21; σταθέντες, when they had ap- 
peared (before the judge), Acts xxv. 18. B. trop. to 
make firm, fix, establish: τί, τινά, to cause a pers. or thing 
to keep his or its place; pass. to stand, be kept intact (of 
a family, a kingdom) : Mt. xii. 25 sq.; Lk. xi. 18; i. q. to 
escape in safety, Rey. vi. 17; with ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
ἀνθρ. added, Lk. xxi. 36 ; στῆσαίτινα, to cause one to pre- 
serve a right state of mind, Ro. xiv. 4 [see Meyer]; 
pass. σταθήσεται, shall be made to stand, i. e. shall be 
kept from falling, ibid. τί, to establish a thing, cause it 


to stand, i. e. to uphold or sustain the authority or force of 


any thing: Heb. x. 9 (opp. to ἀναιρεῖν) ; τὴν παράδοσιν, 
Mk. vii. 9; τὴν ἰδίαν δικαιοσ. Ro. x. 3; τὸν νόμον (opp. to 
xatapy®), Ro. iii. 31, (τὸν ὅρκον, Gen. xxvi. 33 τὴν διαθή- 
κην, Ex. vi. 4; 1 Mace. ii. 27). 1. q. to ratify, confirm: 
σταθῇ, σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα, Mt. xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1. 
to appoint, [cf. colloqg. Eng. set]: ἡμέραν, Acts xvii. 31; 
ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 59. 2. to set or place in 
a balance; to weigh: money to one (because in very early 
times, before the introduction of coinage, the metals used 
to be weighed) i. 6. to pay, Mt. xxvi. 15 (so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down; ef. Passow 8. v. p. 1508"; [L. and S. s. v. 
A. IV.]; Sept. for pw, Is. xlvi. 6; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 
9 sq.; Zech. xi. 12; 2 Esdr. viii. 25 sq.; ete.) ; this fur- 
nishes the explanation of the phrase μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς τὴν 
ἁμαρτίαν ταύτην, do not reckon to them, call them to ac- 
count for, this sin [A. V. lay not this sin to their charge], 
Acts vii. 60 [(cf. Meyer ad loc.) ]. 

11. Inrransitivecy in the Perf. and Plupf. (hay- 
ing the sense of a pres. and an impf. [see above]), also 
in 2 Aor. act., to stand; Sept. for 1¥3, 1}, D3); 1. 
prop. a. foll. by prepositions or adverbs of place: 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place [ef. B. 329 (283)], Mt. vi. 5; 
xx. 3; xxiv. 15; Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn. viii.9; xi.56; Acts 
νυν. 25; vii. 33[LT Tr WH ἐπί w. dat.]; Rev. v.6; xix. 
17; ἐνώπιόν τινος, Acts x. 30; Rev. vii. 9; vill. 2; xi. 4; 
xii. 4; πρός w. dat. of place, Jn. xviii. 16; ἐπί w. gen. 
of place (Germ. auf, upon), Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 40; 
Rev. x. 5, 8; w. gen. of the judge or tribunal, before [cf. 
ἐπί, A. 1. 2 b.J, Acts xxiv. 20; xxv. 10; πέραν with gen. 
of place, Jn. vi. 22; πρό, Acts v. 23[ RG; but LT Tr WH 
ἐπὶ τῶν θυρῶν (at, Germ. an; ef. above and see emi, A. I. 
2a.)]; xii. 14; ἔμπροσθέν τινος, before one as judge, Mt. 
XxVii. 11; κύκλῳ (τινός), around, Rev. vii. 11; μέσος ὑμῶν, 


308 


ἱστορέω 


in the midst of you, living among you, Jn. i. 26; ἐκ δεξιῶν 
τινος, Lk. i. 11; Acts vii. δῦ sq.; ἐν μέσῳ, Jn. viii. 9; πρός 
w.ace.(GLT Tr WH w. dat. [see πρός, 11.1) of place, Jn. 
xx. 11; ἐπί w. acc. of place (see ἐπί, C. I.), Mt. xiii. 2; 
Rev. iii. 20; vil. 1; xiv.1; xv. 2; ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας, to stand 
upright, Acts xxvi.16; Rev. xi. 11; παρά w. ace., Lk. v. 
2; vii. 38; εἰς, Jn. xxi. 4 (LT Trmrg. WH mrg. ἐπί [see 
ἐπί, Ο.1.1 4.7); ἐκεῖ, Mt. xxvii. 47; Mk. xi. 5; Jas. ii. 3; 
ὧδε, Mt. xvi. 28; xx.6; Mk. ix.1; Lk. ix. 27[here T Tr 
WII αὐτοῦ, q.v.]; ὅπου, ΜΚ. xiii. 14; ἔξω, Mt. xii. 46, 47 
[here WH in mrg. only]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 
25; μακρόθεν, Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 49 [RG Trtxt.]; ἀπὸ 
μακρόθεν, Rev. xviii. 10, 17; (LK. xxiii. 49 L TWH Tr 
mrg. (but ἀπό in br.) ]; πόρρωθεν, Lk. xvii. 12. b. ab- 
solutely ; a. to stand by, stand near, (in a place al- 
ready mentioned, so that the reader readily understands 
where): Mt. xxvi. 73; Jn.i. 35; iii. 29; vii. 37; xii. 29; 
Xvili. 18, 25; xx. 14; Acts xvi. 9; xxii. 25; witha ptep. 
or adj. (indicating the purpose or act or condition of 
the one standing): Mt. xx.6; Lk. xxiii. 10; Actsi. 11; 
ix. 7; xxvi. 6; opp. to καθίζειν, Heb. χ. 11 54. β. if what 
is said to stand had been in motion (walking, flowing, 
etc.), to stop, stand still: Mt. ii. 9 (Ree. ἔστη, LT Tr WH 
ἐστάθη (cf. I.1a.]); Mt. xx. 32; Mk. x. 49; Lk. viii. 44; 
Acts viii. 38. χγ. contextually, to stand immovable, stand 
Jirm, of the foundation of a building: 2 Tim. ii. 19. 2. 
metaph. a. to stand, i. e. continue safe and sound, 
stand unharmed: Acts xxvi. 22. b. to stand ready or 
prepared: with a ptep., Eph. vi. 14. c. to be of a 
steadfast mind; so in the maxim in 1 Co. x. 12. d. 
foll. by a ptep. of quality, Col. iv. 12; ὃς ἕστηκεν ἑδραῖος, 
who does not hesitate, does not waver, 1 Co. vii. 37; in 
a fig., of one who vanquishes his adversaries and holds 
the ground, Eph. vi. 13; also of one who in the midst of 
the fight holds his position πρός twa, against the foe, 
Eph. vi. 11, (ef. Ex. xiv.13; Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 13). fo 
persist, continue, persevere: τῇ πίστει, dat. commodi (so 
as not to fall from thy faith [al. take the dat. instru- 
mentally, by thy faith; οἵ. W. § 31, 6¢.; B.§ 133, 24)), 
Ro. xi. 20; ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, Jn. viii. 44 (where the meaning 
is, his nature abhors, is utterly estranged from, the truth; 
Vulg. incorrectly, in veritate non stetit; Luther, ist nicht 
bestanden ΓΔ. V. abode not ete.]; but the Ziirich version 
correctly, besteht nicht [WH read éomxev, impf. of στήκω, 
4. ν.7); ἐν τῇ χάριτι, Ro. ν. 3: ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, 1 Co. xv. 
1; εἰς ἣν (sc. χάριν) ἑστήκατε, into which ye have entered, 
that ye may stand fast in it, 1 Pet. v. 12 [but L 7 Tr WII 
read στῆτε (2 aor. act. impy. 2 pers. plur.) enter and 
stand fast; B. § 147, 16, ef. p. 329 (283)]. Ν. B. From 
ἕστηκα is formed the verb στήκω, which see in its place. 
[Comp.: av, ἐπ-αν-, ἐξ-αν-, ἀνθ-, ad-, δι-. év-, ἐξ-, ἐπ- (-pat), 
ἐφ-. κατ-εφ-, συν-εφ-, καθ-, ἀντι-καθ-, ἀπο-καθ-, μεθ-, παρ-, 
περι-, Tpo-, συν-ίστημι.} 

ἱστορέω: 1 aor. inf. ἱστορῆσαι ; (ἵστωρ [allied with οἶδα 
(ἴστω), videre (visus), etc.; Curtius § 282], -opos, one 
that has inquired into, knowing, skilled in); fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hdt. down; 1. to inquire into, examine, inves- 
tigate. 2. to find out, learn, by inquiry. 3. i 


ἐσχυρός 


gain knowledge of by visiting: something (worthy of 
being seen), τὴν χώραν, Plut. Thes. 30; Ponip. 40; τινά, 
some distinguished person, to become personally ac- 
quainted with, know face to face: Gal. i. 18; so too in 
Joseph. antt. 1, 11,4; Ὁ. j. 6,1, 8 and often in the Clem. 
homilies; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 122 note; [El- 
licott on Gal. 1. c.].* 

ἰσχυρός, -d, -όν, (ἰσχύω). [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. 
mostly for ON, Wj, PIN, DD, and Chald. PPA; strong, 
mighty; a. of living beings: strong either in body or in 
mind, Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xi. 21 sy.; Rev.v. 2; x. 
1; xviii. 21; ἐν πολέμῳ, mighty i.e. valiant, Heb. xi. 34, ef. 
Rey. xix. 18; of one who has strength of soul to sustain 
the assaults of Satan, 1 Jn. ii. 14; univ. strong, and 
therefore exhibiting many excellences, 1 Co. iv. 10 (opp. 
to ἀσθενής); compar., Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; 
mighty, —of God, 1 Co. i. 25; Rev. xviii. 8, (Deut. x. 17; 
2 Mace. i. 24, ete.) ; of Christ raised to the right hand of 
God, 1 Co. x. 22; of those who wield great influence 
among men by their rank, authority, riches, ete., τὰ ἰσχυρά 
i.q. τοὺς ἰσχυρούς (on the neut. cf. W. § 27,5), 1 Co. i. 27 
(οἱ ἰσχυροὶ τῆς γῆς, 2 K. xxiv. 15); joined with πλούσιοι, 
Rey. vi. 15 (Ree. of δυνατοί). b. of inanimate things : 
strong i. q. violent, ἄνεμος, Mt. xiv. 30 [T WH om. icy.]; 
forcibly uttered, φωνή, Rev. xviii. 2 [Rec. μεγάλη) (Ex. 
xix. 19); κραυγή. Heb. v. 7; βρονταί, Rev. xix. 6; λιμός, 
great, Lk. xv. 14; ἐπιστολαί (stern, [forcible]), 2 Co. x. 
10; strong i. q. firm, sure, παράκλησις, Heb. vi. 18; fitted 
to withstand a forcible assault, πόλιες, well fortified, Rev. 
xviii. 10 (τεῖχος, 1 Mace. i.33; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 7; πύργος, 
Judg. ix. 51). [Cf. δύναμις. fin.]* 

ἰσχύς, vos, ἡ, (ἴσχω [allied w. ἔσχον ; to holdin check), 
[fr. Hes. down], Sept. esp. for N35, 7H, ΤΡ, 79923; abil- 
ity, force, strength, might: 2 Pet. ii. 11 (joined w. δύναμις) ; 
Rey. y. 12; vii. 12; τὸ κράτος τῆς ἰσχύος, power (over ex- 
ternal things) afforded by strength, Eph. i. 19; vi. 10, 
(Is. xl. 26); ἡ δόξα τῆς icy. (see δόξα, III. 3 Ὁ. a. fin.), 
2Th.i. 9; κράζειν ἐν ἰσχύει, with strength, mightily, Rev. 
xviii. 2 Rec.; ἐξ ἰσχύος, of one’s strength, to the extent 
of one’s ability, 1 Pet. iv. 11; with ὅλης added, Mk. xii. 
30, 33; Lk. x. 27 [here L txt. T Tr WH read ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ 
ἰσχύϊ]. [Syn. see δύναμις, fin.]* 

ἰσχύω ; impf. ἴσχυον; fut. ἰσχύσω; 1 aor. ἴσχυσα; 
(ἰσχύς) ; Sept. for PIT, PS, OSD, οἴο.; to be strong, i.e. 
1. to be strong in body, to be robust, to be in sound health: 
ot ἰσχύοντες, as subst., Mt. ix. 12; Mk. ii. 17, (Soph. Tr. 
234; Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 24; joined with ὑγιαίνειν, id. mem. 
PB tl) 2. to have power, [fr. Aeschyl. down], i. e. 
a. to have a power evinced in extraordinary deeds, i. e. 
to exert, wield, power: so of the gospel, Acts xix. 20; 
Hebraistically, to have strength to overcome: οὐκ ἴσχυσαν, 
[A. V prevailed not i. 6.1 succumbed, were conquered, 
(so o> x5, Gen. xxxii. 26 (25)), Rev. xii. 8; κατά twos, 
against one, i.e. to use one’s strength against one, to 
treat him with violence, Acts xix. 16. b. i. q. to be 
of force, avail (Germ. gelten) : Heb. ix. 17; ri, Gal. v. 6, 
and Ree. in vi. 15. c. to be serviceable: εἴς τι [A. V. 
qood for], Mt. v.13. ἃ. foll. by inf. to be able, can: 


809 


Ἰωάννης 


Mt. viii. 28; xxvi.40; Mk. v. 4; [ix. 18 (inf. to be sup- 
plied)]; xiv. 37; Lk. vi. 48; viii. 43; [xiii 24]; xiv. 6,29 
54.; Xvi. 3; xx. 26; Jn. xxi.6; Acts vi. 10; χν. 10; xxv. 
7; xxvii. 16, (Plut. Pomp.58). with ace., πάντα, Phil. iv. 
13; πολύ, Jas. v.16. [Comp.: ἐν- ἐξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-ιισχύω.} " 

ἴσως, (ἴσος, q. v.), adv., [fr. Soph. down]; τὴς 
equally, in like manner. 2. agreeably to expecta- 
tion, i. e. it may be, probably; freq. an urbane expression 
of one’s reasonable hope (Germ. wohl, hoffentlich) : Lk. 
xx. 13, and often in Attic writ.* 

Ἰταλία, -as, ἡ, Italy: Acts xviii. 2; xxvii. 1, 6; Heb. 
xiii. 24.* 

Ἰταλικός, -7, -όν, (Ἰταλία), [fr. Plat. down], Italian: 
σπεῖρα ᾿Ιταλική, the Italian cohort (composed of Itaiian, 
not provincial, soldiers), Acts x. 1; ef. Schiirer, in the 
Zeitschrift f. wissensch. Theol. for 1875, p. 422 sqq.; 
[ Hackett, in B.D. Am. ed. 5. v. Italian Band].* 

*Trovpata, -as, ἡ, Jiure@a, a mountainous region, lying 
northeast of Palestine and west of Damascus (Strabo 
16 p. 756 $18; Plin.h.n.5,(23)19). Ace. to Luke (iii. 
1) at the time when John the Baptist made his public 
appearance it was subject to Philip the tetrarch, son of 
Herod the Great, although it is not mentioned by Joseph. 
(antt. 17, 8,1; 11,4, 18; 4,6 andb.j. 2, 6,3) among the 
regions assigned to this prince after his father’s death; 
(on this point οἵ. Schiirer in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. 
Theol. for 1877, p.577 sq.). It was brought under Jew- 
ish control by king Aristobulus ὁ. B.c. 100 (Joseph. antt. 
13, 11,3). Its inhabitants had been noted for robbery 
and the skilful use of the bow (Verg. geor. 2, 448; Cie. 
Phil. 13, 8, 18; Strabo 16 p. 755 sq.; Lucan, Phar. 7, 230, 
514). Cf. Miinter, Progr. de rebus Ituraeorum, Hafn. 
1824; Win. RWB.s. v. Ituraea; Aneucker in Schenkel 
iii. p. 406 sq. ; [B.D. Am. ed. 5. v.].* 

ἰχθύδιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. ἰχθύς), a little fish: Mt. xv. 
34; Mk. viii. 7. [From Arstph. on.]* 

ἰχθύς, -vos, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], a fish: Mt. vii. 10; Mk. 
vi. 38; Lk. v. 6; Jn. xxi. 11, ete.; 1 Co. xv. 39. 

ἴχνος, -eos (τους), τό, (fr. ἵκω i. q. ixvéopat, to go), [fr. 
Hom. down], a footprint, track, footstep: in the N. T. 
metaph., of imitating the example of any one, we find 
στοιχεῖν τοῖς ἴχνεσί τινος, Ro. iv. 12; περιπατεῖν τοῖς ἴχν. 
τ. 2 Co. xii. 18; ἐπακολουθεῖν τ. ἴχν. τιν. 1 Pet. ii. 21, (ἐν 
ἴχνεσί τινος ἑὸν πόδα νέμειν, Pind. Nem. 6, 27); cf. Lat. 
insistere vestigiis alicuius.* 

Ἰωάθαμ, [-θάμ WH), ὁ, (Onr i. 6. Jehovah is perfect), 
indecl., Jotham [A. V. (1611) Joatham], king of Judah, 
son of Uzziah, B.c. 758-7 to 741, or 759 to 743: Mt. i. 9." 

Ἰωάννα [Tr WII Ἰωάνα ; ef. Τὰ, Proleg. p. 79; WH. 
App. p. 159; s.v. N, ν], της, 9, (see Ἰωάννης), Joanna, the 
wife of Chuzas, Herod’s steward, and a follower of Jesus: 
Lk. viii. 3; xxiv. 10.* 

*Iwavvas, -a, and (ace. to L T Tr WH) Ἰωανάν, indecl., 
(see Ἰωάννης), 6, Joannas [or Joanan], one of the ances- 
tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 27.* 

Ἰωάννης and ([so WH uniformly, exc. in Acts iv. 6; 
xiii. 5; Rev. xxii. 8] Trin the Gospels of Lk. and Jn., [in 
the Acts, exc. iv. 6] and the Rev. [exc. xxii. 8]) "Ieavm 


᾿Ιωάννης 


{ef. Tdf. Proleg. p.79; WH. App. p. 159; Scrivener, Intr. 
p- 562 (cf. s. v. N,v)], gen. -ov, dat. -7 and (in [Mt. xi. 
4 WH; Rev. i.1 WH]; Lk. vii. 18 T Tr WH, [22 T Tr 
WH] -ee [ef. WH. App. p. 158; B.17 (16), 7]), ace. την, 
6, (ΠῚ and }3M\m, to whom Jehovah is gracious, [al. 
whom Jehovah has graciously given], Germ. Gotthold; 
Sept. Ἰωαννάν [Tdf. ᾿Ιωανάν], 1 Chr. iii. 24; Ἰωνά, 2 K. 
Xxv. 23; Ἰωάνης, 2 Chr. xxviii. 12, [cf. B.D. Am. ed.s. v. 
Johanan]}), John; in the N. T. the men of this name are, 
1. John the Baptist, the son of Zacharias the priest and 
Elisabeth, the forerunner of Christ. By order of Her- 
od Antipas he was cast into prison and afterwards be- 
headed: Mt. iii. 1; xiv. 3, and often in the histor. bks. 
of the N. T.; Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 2, [B.D. Am. ed. 8. v. 
Macherus }. 2. John the apostle, the writer of the 
Fourth Gospel, son of Zebedee and Salome, brother of 
James the elder: Mt. iv. 21; x.2(3); Mk.i.19; ix. 2, 
38; Lk. v. 10; vi. 14; Acts i. 13, and often; Gal. ii. 9. 
He is that disciple who (without mention by name) is 
spoken of in the Fourth Gospel as esp. dear to Jesus (Jn. 
xiii. 23; xix. 26; xxi. 7, 20), and acc. to the traditional 
opinion is the author of the Apocalypse, Rev. i. 1, 4, 9; 
xxi. 2 Rec.; xxii. 8. In the latter part of his life he had 
charge of the churches in Asia Minor, and died there at a 
very advanced age. That he never came into Asia Minor, 
but died in Palestine somewhat in years, the following 
writers among others have attempted to prove, though by 
considerations far from satisfactory: Liitzelberger, Die 
kirchl. Tradition iib. ἃ. Ap. Johannes u. 5. Schriften. 
Lpz. 1840; Keim, i. p. 161 sqq. [Eng. trans. i. 218 sqq.]; 
Holtzmann in Schenkel iii. p. 332 sqq.; Scholten, Der 
Ap. Johannes in Kleinasien. Aus. d. Holliind. deutsch ν. 
Spiegel. Berl. 1872. On the other side cf., besides oth- 
ers, Grimm in Erschu. Gruber’s Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. 
xxii. p. 6 sqq.; Steitz, Die Tradition iib. die Wirksam- 
keit des Joh. in Ephesus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 
for 1868, 3d Heft; Krenkel, Der Apost. Johannes. Berl. 
1868; Hilgenfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 
1872, p. 372 sqq., and for 1877, Ὁ. 508 sqq.; [also Einl. in 
ἃ. Ν. T. p. 394 sqq.]; Luthardt, Der johann. Ursprung 
des 4ten Evang. (Lpz. 1874) p. 93 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 115 
sqq-; Godet, Commentaire etc. 3d ed. vol. i. Intr. 1. i. § iv. 
p- 57 sqq.; Bleek, Einl. in d. N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 167 
sqq:; Fisher, The Beginnings of Christianity, p. 327 
sqq-]- 3. the father of the apostle Peter: Tdf. in 
Jn. i. 42 (43) and xxi. 15 sqq. (in both pass. R G Ἰωνᾶ, L 
Tr WH Ἰωάνου) [see Ἰωνᾶς, 2]. 4. a certain man 
ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ, a member of the Sanhedrin [ef. 
ἀρχιερεύς, 2]: Acts iv. 6. 5. John surnamed Mark, 
the companion of Barnabas and Paul: Acts xii. 12, 25; 
xiii. 5, 13 ; xv. 37, [Tr everywh. with one ν; so WH exe. 
in xiii. 5]; see Μάρκος. 6. John, ace. to the testi- 
mony of Papias in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39 [ef. Westcott, Canon, 
5th ed. p. 79], a disciple of Christ and afterwards a Chris- 
tian presbyter in Asia Minor, whom not a few at the 
present day, following the opinion of Dionysius of Alex- 
andria [in Euseb. h. 6. 7, 25] regard as the author of the 
Apocalypse, and accordingly esteem him as an eminent 


310 


᾿Ιωσῆς 


prophet of the primitive Christians and as the person 
referred to in Rev. i. 1,4, 9; xxi. 2 Rec.; xxii. 8. Full 
articles respecting him may be found—by Grimm in 
Ersch u. Gruber’s Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. xxiv. p. 217 
sq-; Gass in Herzog vi. p. 763 sqq.; Holtzmann in Schen- 
kel iii. p. 352 sq.; [Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biog. iii, 
398 sqq.; ef. C. L. Leimbach, Das Papiasfragment (Gotha, 
1875), esp. p. 114 sqq.]. 

ἼΩβ, ὁ, indecl., (Ὡς i.e. harassed, aMlicted [but ques- 
tioned ; see Gesenius, Lex. (8th ed., by Mihlau and Volck) 
s. v.]), Job, the man commended in the didactic poem 
which bears his name in the canon of the O. T. (ef. Ezek. 
xiv. 14, 20) for his piety, and his constancy and fortitude 
in the endurance of trials: Jas. ν. 11.* 

᾿Ιωβήδ, 6, indecl., Jobed: Mt. i. 5 and Lk. iii. 32 in L 
T Tr (WH; (yet WH in Lk. 1. c. -87A)] for RG O78, ᾿ 
q- Vv.” 

[Ἰωβήλ, see the preceding word. ] 

Ἰωδά, ὁ, indecl., Joda: Lk. iii. 26 T Tr WH, for RGL 
*lovda, see Ἰούδας, 2.* 

ἸΙωήλ, ὁ, indecl., (Oxi whose God is Jehovah, i. 4. a 
worshipper of God, [al. ‘Jehovah is God’]), Joel, the 
eminent prophet who ace. to the opinion of very many 
recent writers prophesied in the reign of Uzziah [cf. 
B. Ὁ. 5. v. Joel, 3]: Acts ii. 16.* 

Ἴωνάν and (so T Tr WH) Ἰωνάμ, 6. indecl., (see Ἰωάν- 
wns), Jonan [or Jonam], one of the ancestors of Christ: 
Lk. iii. 80." 

Ἰωνάς, -ἃ [B. 20 (17 sq.)], 6, (737 a dove), Jonah (or 
Jonas) ; 1. Jonah, the O. T. prophet, a native of 
Gath-hepher in the tribe of Zebulun. He lived during 
the reign of Jeroboam II., king of Israel (2 K. xiv. 25). 
The narrative of his miraculous experiences, constructed 
for a didactic purpose, is given in the book which bears 
his name [on the historic character of which ef. B.D. 
(esp. Am. ed.) or McC. and 5. 5. v.; also Ladd, Doctr. of 
Sacr. Script. i. 65 sqq.]: Mt. xii. 39-41; xvi. 4; Lk. xi. 
29 sq. 32. 2. Jonah (or Jonas), a fisherman, father 
of the apostle Peter: Mt. xvi. 17 [LT WH here Βαριωνᾶ, 
see Bapiavas]; Jn. i. 42 (43) [RGLmrg. Tr mrg., and 
RG in] xxi. 15, [16, 17], (see Ἰωάννης, 3).* 

Ἰωράμ, ὁ, indecl., (Ὁ ΤΠ i. 6. whom Jehovah exalted), 
Joram, the son and successor of Jehoshaphat on the 
throne of Judah, fr. [e.] B. c. 891 to 884 (2 K. viii. 16 
sqq-; 2 Chr. xxi. 2sqq.): Mt. i. 8.5 

*Iwpelp, ὁ, indecl., Jorim, one of the ancestors of Christ: 
Lk. iii. 29." 

*Iwcapdr, 6, indecl., (HALIM, i. 6. Jehovah judges), 
Jehoshaphat, king of Judah fr. [c.] B. c. 914 to 889 (1 K. 
xxii. 41 sqq.; 2 Chr. xvii—xx.): Mt. i. 8." 

ΓΙωσή (A. V. Jose, incorrectly), see Ἰωσῆς, init.] 

Ἰωσῆς, gen. Ἰωσῆ [RG in Lk. iii. 29 Ἰωσή (which A. 
V. incorrectly takes as nom. Jose)] and (LT Tr WH in 
Mk. vi. 3; xv. 40,47) Ἰωσῆτος (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 
199; B.19(17)sq.; W. § 10,1; [WH. App. p. 159*]), 
6, Joses; 1. one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 
29 ([see above]; L T Tr WH Ἰησοῦ, q. v. 3). 2. the 
own brother of Jesus: Mk. vi. 3, and RG in Mt. xiii 


᾿Ιωσήφ. 


55 (where L T Tr WH Ἰωσήφ, q. v. 6); see Ἰάκωβος, 
5: 3. the son of Mary, the sister of the mother of 
Jesus [see Μαριάμ, 3]: Mt. xxvii. 56 (where T Tr mrg. 
WH txt. Ἰωσήφ [Ἰωσῆς and Ἰωσήφ seem to have been 
diff. forms of one and the same name; cf. Renan in 
the Journ. Asiat., 1864, ser. vi. T. iv. p. 536; Frankel, 
Hodeget in Misch. p. 31 note; Béhl, Volksbibel u. s. w. 
p- 15]); Mk. xv. 40, 47. 4. a Levite, surnamed 
Βαρνάβας (4. v.): Acts iv. 36 (where LT Tr WH Ἰω- 
σήφ)." 

Ἰωσήφ, indecl., (in Joseph. ie g.c. Ap. 1, 14, 16; 32, 
3; 33, 5] ᾿Ιώσηπος)», 6, (FO, fr. 0) to add, Gen. xxx. 
23 sq. [ef. B. D. 8. v. Joseph]), Joseph ; 1. the pa- 
triarch, the eleventh son of Jacob: Jn. iv. 5; Acts vii. 
9,13 sq. 18; Heb. xi. 21 sq.; φυλὴ Ἰωσήφ, i. 6. the tribe 
of Ephraim, Rev. vii. 8. 2. the son of Jonan [or 
Jonam], one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 30. 3. 
the son of Judah [or Judas; better Joda] another an- 
cestor of Jesus: Lk. iii. 26 (where Lmrg. T Tr WH Ἰω- 
σήχ; 6. V-)- 4. the son of Mattathias, another of the 
same: Lk. iii. 24. 5. the husband of Mary, the 


811 


καθαιρέω 


mother οὗ Jesus: Mt. i. 16, 18-20, 24; 11. 18,19; Lk.i, 
27; ii. 4,10, 38 RL,43RGLmrg.; iii. 23; iv. 22; Jo 
i. 45 (46); vi. 42. 6. an own brother of our Lord: 
Mt. xiii. 55 LT Tr WH (for R ἃ Ἰωσῆς [q. v. 2]). 1 
Joseph of Arimathea, a member of the Sanhedrin, who 
favored Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 57, 59; Mk. xv. 43, 45; Lk. 
xxiii. 50; Jn. xix. 38. 8. ΕΣ πρηπαπεοιι Βαρνά- 
Bas (α. v-): Acts iv. 361, Τ Tr WH (for RG Ἰωσῆς [q. 
v. 4]). 9. Joseph called Barsabas [better Barsab- 
bas; see the word], and surnamed Justus: Acts i. 23. 
[See Ἰωσῆς, 3.] 

ἸἸωσήχ;, Josech, see Ἰωσήφ, 3. 

Ἰωσίας (1, Τ Tr WH ἸΙωσείας [see WH. App. p. 155; 
8. V. et, t]),-ov, 6, GW i. 6. whom ‘Jehovah heals’), 
Josiah, king of Judah, who restored among the Jews the 
worship of the true God, and after a reign of thirty-one 
years was slain in battle c. B. c. 611 (2 K. xxii. sq.; 2 
Chr. xxxiv. sq.): Mt. i. 10 sq.* 

ἰῶτα, τό, iota [A. V. jot], the Hebr. letter °, the small- 
est of them all; hence equiv. to the minutest part: Mt. 
v.18. [Cf. ΤΡ 


K 


κἀγώ [so the recent edd. usually, (in opp. to the κἀγώ 
ate. of Grsb. et al., cf. Herm. Vig. p. 526; W. § 5,4a.; 
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 4; cf. 1, ¢)]; (by crasis fr. 
καὶ ἐγώ [retained e. g. in Mt. xxvi. 15 T; Lk. ii. 48 WH; 
xvi. 9 T Tr WH; Nets x. 26 T Tr WH; xxvi. 29 WH 
ete.; ef. B.10; W.§ 5,3; WH. App. p. 145; esp. Taf. 
Proleg. p. 96 sq.], for the first time in Hom. I. 21, 108 
[var., ef. Od. 20, 296 var. (h. Mere. 17,3); ef. Ebeling, 
Lex. Hom. p. 6197), dat. κἀμοί [καὶ ἐμοί Acts x. 28 RG], 
acc. κἀμέ; 1. and I, the καί simply connecting: Jn. 
x. 27, ete.; and I (together), Lk. ii. 48; distributively, 
and I (in like manner): Jn. vi. 56; xv.4; xvii. 26; and 
1 (on the other hand), Jas. ii. 18 (κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω); Lk. 
xxii. 29; Acts xxii. 19; and 1 (indeed), Jn. vi. 57; Ro. 
xi. 3. at the beginning of a period, Lat. et equidem, and 
T (to speak of myself): Jn. i. 31, 33 sq.; xii. 32; 1 Co. ii. 
1; with the καί used consecutively (see under καί, I. 2 d.), 
ef. our and so: Mt. xi. 28; Jn. xx. 15; Acts xxii. 13; 2 
Co. vi.17; kayo... καί, both...and: 
οἴδατε πόθεν εἰμί, both me (my person) and my origin, 
Jn. vii. 28. 2. Talso; I as well; I likewise; in like 
manner I: so that one puts himself on a level with 
others, Mt. ii. 8; x. 32; Lk. xi.9; xvi. 9; Jn. xv. 9, [10 
Tdf.]; xvii. 18; Acts x. 26; 1Co. vii.40; 2Co. xi. 16, 
18, 21 sq.; in the second member of a comparison, after 
ὁποῖος. ὡς, καθώς, Acts xxvi. 29; 1 Co. vii. 8; xi.1; Rev. 


Seay FI 5 
κἀμὲ οἴδατε, καὶ 


ii. 28 (27); see under καί, 17. 1 ἃ. with ἃ suppression of 
the mention of those with whom the writer compares 
himself: Eph. i. 15 (as well as others); 1 Th. iii. 5 (as 
well as my comparions at Athens; ef. Liinemann ad 
loc.). κἀμοί: Lk.i.3; Acts viii. 19; 1Co.xv.8; κἀμέ: 
1Co. xvi.4. 1. 4. 1 in turn: Mt. xvi.18; xxi. 24; Lk. 
xx. 8; Gal. vi. 14. 3. even I, this selfsame I, the καί 
pointing the statement: Ro. iii. 7; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
835. 

καθά, adv. for καθ᾽ a, according as, just as: Mt. xxvii. 
10. (Xen., Polyb., Diod., al.; O. T. Apocr.; Sept. for 
WN, Gen. vii. 9, 16, etc., and for 3, Gen. xix. 8; Ex. 
xii. 35, etc.) * 

καθ-αίρεσις, -ews, 7, (καθαιρέω, q. ν.), α pulling down, 
destruction, demolition: ὀχυρωμάτων, ΓΑ. V. of strong- 
holds], 2 Co. x. 4 (τῶν τειχῶν, Xen. Hell. 2, 2, 15; 5, 1, 
35; Polyb. 23, 7,6; Diod. excerpt. leg. 13; destructio 
murorum, Suet. Galba 12); εἰς oixod... . καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν, 
for building up (increasing) not for casting down (the 
extinction of) the godly, upright, blessed life you lead in 
fellowship with Christ (see οἰκοδομή, 1): 2 Co. x. 8; xiii. 
10. [From Thue. down.]* 

καθ-αιρέω, -@; fut. καθελῶ (Lk. xii. 18 [see ἀφαιρέω, 
init.]); 2 aor. καθεῖλον, (fr. obsol. ἕλω) ; pres. pass. κα- 
θαιροῦμαι ἔτ. Hom. down; Sept. for Ὑ ὙΠ, to cause to 
go down; 017, ΚΠ), 7135 1. to take down: with- 


καθαίρω 


out the notion of violence, τινά, to detach from the cross 
one crucified, Mk. xv. 36, 46; Lk. xxiii. 53, (Polyb. 1, 86, 
6; Philo in Flace. § 10); τινὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου, Acts xiii. 
29 (Sept. Josh. viii. 29; x. 27); with the use of force, to 
throw down, cast down: τινὰ ἀπὸ θρόνου, LK. i. 52. 2. 
to pull down, demolish: τὰς ἀποθήκας, Opp. to οἰκοδομεῖν, 
Lk. xii. 18; λογισμούς, the (subtle) reasonings (of op- 
ponents) likened to fortresses, i. q. to refute, 2 Co. x. 4 
(5); to destroy, ἔθνη, Acts xiii. 19 (Jer. xxiv. 6; Thue. 1, 
4; Ael. v. h. 2, 35); τὴν μεγαλειότητά τινος, Acts xix. 27, 
where if preference is given (with LT Tr WH) to the 
reading τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς, it must be taken as a 
partitive gen. somewhat of her magnificence; cf. B. 158 
(138) note [so Meyer; cf. Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 13. Al. trans- 
late that she should even be deposed from her magnifi- 
cence; cf. W. § 30, 6; B. § 132, 5].* 

καθαίρω; pf. pass. ptep. κεκαθαρμένος ; (καθαρός) ; to 
cleanse, prop. from filth, impurity, οἴου; trees and vines 
(from useless shoots), fo prune, Jn. xv. 2 (δένδρα. . . ὑπο- 
τεμνόμενα καθαίρεται, Philo de agric. ὃ 2 [cf. de somniis 
ii. § 9 mid.]); metaph. from guilt, to expiate: pass. Heb. 
x. 2 RG [see καθαρίζω, init.], (Jer. xiii. 27; and so in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down). [Comp.: δια-, ἐκ-καθαίρω.}" 

καθάπερ, (καθ᾽ ἅπερ), according as, just as, even as, [ (“ka- 
θά marking the comparison, πέρ (akin to the prep. περί) 
the latitude of the application”): Ro. ix.13 WHtxt.; x. 
15 WII txt.; also] xi. 8 and 1 Co. x. 10in T Tr WH; 2 Co. 
iii. 13,18 [here WH mrg. καθώσπερ] : 1 ΤῊ. 11. 11: καθά- 
περ καί, Ro. iv. 6; 2 Οο.1. 14; 1 Th. iii. 6, 125 iv. 5; Heb. 
iv. 2, and RG in Heb. v.43; καθάπερ foll. by οὕτω (or 
οὕτως), Ro. xii.4; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 11. ({[From 
Arstph. down]; Sept. for Ww, Ex. vii. 6, 10.)* 

καθ-άπτω: 1 aor. καθῆψα; 1. lo fit or fasten to, 
bind on. 2. to lay hold of, fasten on (hostilely) : 
τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ, Acts xxviii. 3 [οἵ. W. 257 (241)]; τοῦ 
τραχήλου, Epict. diss. 3, 20,10. [In Mid. fr. Hom. down, 
(w. gen. fr. Hdt. on).]* 

καθαρίζω (Hellenistic for καθαίρω, which classic writ. 
use); Attic fut. [ef. B.37 (382); W. § 13, 1e.; WH. App. 
p: 163] καθαριῶ (Heb. ix. 14); 1 aor. ἐκαθάρισα [see be- 
low]; pres. pass. καθαρίζομαι; 1 aor. pass. ἐκαθαρίσθην ; 
pf. pass. ptep. κεκαθαρισμένος (Heb. x. 2 T Tr WH; on 
the forms ἐκαθερίσθη, T WII in Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42, 
[ἐκαθέρισεν, Trin Acts x.15; xi. 9] and κεκαθερισμένος 
Lehm. in Heb. x. 2, ef. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 82; WH. App. 
p- 1507; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 118; Delitzsch on 
Heb. x. 2; Kriiger Pt. ii. § 2, 2,6 p.4; [B. 29 (25sq.); W. 
43]); (καθαρός) ; Sept. mostly for 7 ; 1. to make 
clean, to cleanse ; a. from physical stains and dirt: 
e.g. utensils, Mt. xxiii. 25, [fig. 26]; Lk. xi. 39; food, 
Mk. vii. 19; τινά, a leper, to cleanse by curing, Mt. viii. 2 
sq-; X-8; xi.5; Mk. i. 40-42; Lk. iv. 27; v. 12sq.; vii. 22; 
xvii. 14, 17, (Lev. xiv.8) ; to remove by cleansing : ἡ λέπρα 
ἐκαθαρίσθη, Mt. viii. 3 (καθαριεῖς τὸ αἷμα τὸ ἀναίτιον ἐξ 
Ἰσραήλ, Deut. χῖχ. 18: ἐκαθάριζε τὴν περὶ ταῦτα συνήθειαν, 
the custom of marrying heathen women, Joseph. antt. 11, 
5,43 καθαίρειν αἷμα, Hom. 1]. 16, 667; cf. ἐκκαθαίρω). Ὁ. 
in a moral sense; a. to free from the defilement of sin 


312 


καθαρὸς 


and from faults; to purify from wickedness: ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ 
μολυσμοῦ σαρκός, 2 Co. vii. 1; τῇ πίστει τὰς καρδίας, Acts 
xv. 9 (καρδίαν ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας, Sir. xxxviii. 10); τὰς χεῖρας, 
to abstain in future from wrong-doing, Jas. iv.8. β, to 
Sree from the guilt of sin, to purify: twa ἀπὸ πάσης dpap- 
tias, 1 Jn.i. 7; [τ΄ a. a. ἀδικίας, ibid. 9]; τὴν συνείδησιν ἀπὸ 
νεκρῶν ἔργων, Heb. ix. 14; τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τῷ λουτρῷ τοῦ 
ὕδατος (instrumental dat.), Eph. v. 26; λαὸν ἑαυτῷ, Tit. 
li. 14. sy. to consecrate by cleansing or purifying: τὶ ἔν 
τινι, dat. of instr. [W. 388 (363)], Heb. ix. 22; i. 4. to 
consecrate, dedicate, τί τινι (dat. of instr.), ibid. 23. 2. 
to pronounce clean in a levitical sense: Acts x.15; xi. 9, 
(Levy. xiii. 13, 17, 23, 28). [Comp.: δια-καθαρίζω.] * 

καθαρισμός, -οῦ, 6, (καθαρίζω), acleansing, purification ; 
aritual purgation or washing, (Vulg. purgatio, purificatio, 
emundatio): used with a gen. of the subj., τῶν Iovdaiwv, 
of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals, 
Jn. ii. 6; without a gen., of baptism (a symbol of 
moral cleansing), Jn. iii. 25; with a gen. of the obj., and 
that a person, — of the levitical purification of women 
after childbirth, Lk. ii. 22; and of lepers, Mk. i. 44; Lk. 
v.14; with agen. of the thing, ἁμαρτιῶν or ἁμαρτημά- 
των, a cleansing from the guilt of sins (see καθαρίζω, 1 Ὁ. 
B.): wrought now by baptism, 2 Pet. i. 9, now by the ex- 
piatory sacrifice of Christ, Heb. i. 3 on which ef. Kurtz, 
Com. p. 70; (Ex. xxx. 10; τῆς ἁμαρτίας pov, Job vii. 21; 
of an atonement, Leian. asin. 22).* 

καθαρός, -d, -dv; [akin to Lat. castus, in-cestus, Eng. 
chaste, chasten; Curtius § 26; Vanitek p. 177]; fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. mostly for WW ; clean, pure, (free from the 
admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulter- 
ates, corrupts) ; a. physically : Mt. xxiii. 26; xxvii. 
59; Heb. x. 22 (23); Rev. xv. 6; xix. 8, 14, and Ree. in 
xxii. 1; χρυσίον, purified by fire, Rev. xxi. 18, 21; ina 
similitude, like a vine cleansed by pruning and so fitted 
to bear fruit, Jn. xv.3; ὁ NeAoup.. . - καθαρὸς ὅλος (where 
the idea which Christ expresses figuratively is as follows: 
‘he whose inmost nature has been renovated does not 
need radical renewal, but only to be cleansed from 
every several fault into which he may fall through inter- 
course with the unrenewed world’), Jn. xiii. 10. b. 
in a levitical sense ; clean, i. 6. the use of which is not for- 
bidden, imparts no uncleanness: πάντα καθαρά, Ro. xiv. 
207 10 1.10: ce. ethically; free from corrupt desire, 
from sin and guilt: Tit.i.15; ὑμεῖς καθαροΐ, In. xiii. 10, 
[11]; οἱ x. τῇ καρδίᾳ (as respects heart [W. § 31, 6 a.]), 
Mt. v. 8 (καθαρὸς χεῖρας, Hat. 1, 35; κατὰ τὸ σῶμα κ. κατὰ 
τὴν ψυχήν, Plat. Crat. p.405 b.); free from every admix- 
ture of what is false, sincere, ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας, 1 Tim. i. 
5; 2 Tim. ii. 22, and R Gin 1 Pet. i. 225 ἐν καθαρᾷ συνει- 
δήσει, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 3; genuine (joined with ἀμί- 
avros) θρησκεία, Jas. i. 27; blameless, innocent, Acts xviii- 
6. Hebraistically with the addition of ἀπό τινος, pure 
from, i.e. unstained with the guilt of, any thing [W. § 30, 
6a.; B.157 (137) sq.]: ἀπὸ τ. αἵματος, Acts xx. 26; Sus. 
46 Alex., cf. Gen. xxiv. 8; Tob. iii. 14; καθαρὰς ἔχειν ras 
χεῖρας ἀπὸ τοῦ φόνου, Joseph. antt. 4, 8,16; in class. Grk. 
with a simple gen., as φόνου, Plat. legg. 9 p. 864 e.; cf. 


καθαρότης 


Passow 8. v. p. 1528" ; [L.andS. 5. ν. 37; Kiihner § 421, 
4 ii. p. 344. ἃ. in a levitical and ethical sense: πάντα 
καθαρὰ ὑμῖν, Lk. xi. 41, on which see éveyu. [SyYN. see 
εἴλικρινής ; οἵ. Westcott on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]* 

καθαρότης, -ητος, 7, (καθαρός), cleanness, purity; in a 
levitical sense, τινός, Heb. ix. 13. (Xen. mem. 2, 1, 22; 
Plato, al.) * 

xa0-é6pa, -as, 7), (κατά and ἔδρα), a chair, seat: Mt. xxi. 
12; Mk. xi. 15, (Sir. xii. 12; Hdian. 2, 3, 17 [7 ed. 
Bekk.]); of the exalted seat occupied by men of eminent 
rank or influence, as teachers and judges: ἐπὶ τῆς Μωῦ- 
σέως καθέδρας ἐκάθισαν, sit on the seat which Moses for- 
merly occupied, i. e. bear themselves as Moses’ succes- 
sors in explaining and defending his law, Mt. xxiii. 2. 
(Sept. for wi and nw. [Xen., Aristot., al.]) * 

καθ-έζομαι ; impf. ἐκαθεζόμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to sit 
down, seat one’s self, sit: Jn. xx. 12; foll. by ἐν with dat. 
of place, Mt. xxvi. 55; Lk. ii. 46; Jn. xi. 20; Acts vi. 15; 
foll. by ἐπί with gen., Acts xx. 9 L T Tr WH; by ἐπί with 
dat., Jn. iv. 6; ἐκεῖ, Jn. vi. 3 Tdf.; [od where, Acts ii. 2 
Lehm. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 336 sq.; B. 56 
(49) ; 60 (52). Comp.: παρα-καθέζομαι. |* 

καθ-εῖς, more correctly καθ᾽ εἷς, see eis, 4 6. p. 187". 

καθ-εξῆς, (κατά and ἑξῆς, q. v.), adv., one after another, 
successively, in order: Lk. i. 3; Acts xi. 4; xviii. 23; of 
καθεξ. those that follow after, Acts iii. 24 [ef. W. 633 
(588) ]; ἐν τῷ καθ. sc. χρόνῳ [R. V. soon aflerwards], Lk. 
viii. 1. (Ael. v. ἢ. 8, 7; Plut. symp. 1, 1, 5; in earlier 
Grk. ἑξῆς and ἐφεξῆς are more usual.) * 

καθ-εύδω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐκάθευδον ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. mostly for 13¥ ; 1. to fall asieep, to drop off 
to sleep: Mt. xxv. 5. 2. to sleep ; a. prop.: Mt. 
viii. 24 ; ix. 24 [on this and its paral. ef. B. D. Am. ed. p. 
1198*]; xiii. 25; xxvi.40,43,45; Mk. iv. 27, 38; v.39; 
xiii. 86; xiv. 37, 40sq.; Lk. viii.52; xxii. 46; 1 Th. v. 
Zs b. euphemistically, to be dead: 1 Th.v.10; (Ps. 
Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 6; Dan. xii. 2). c. metaph. to 
yield to sloth and sin, and be indifferent to one’s salvation: 
Eph. v. 14; 1 ΤῊ. ν. 6.* 

καθηγητής, -ov, 6, (καθηγέομαι to go before,lead); a. 
prop. a guide: Numen. ap. Ath. 7, p. 313 d. b. a 
master, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 8 RG,10. (Dion. H. jud. de 
Thue. 3,4; several times in Plut. [ef. Wetst. on Mt. Le.})* 

καθ-ήκω; [fr. Aeschyl., Soph. down]; 1. to come 
down. 2. to come to, reach to; impers. καθήκει, it is 
becoming, it is fit (cf. Germ. zukommen), Ezek. xxi. 27; 
ov καθῆκεν (Rec. καθῆκον), foll. by the ace. with inf., Acts 
xxii. 22 [W. 282 (265); B. 217 (187)]; τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα, 
things not fitting, i. e. forbidden, shameful, Ro. i. 28; 2 
Mace. vi. 4. Cf. ἀνήκω." 

κάθ-ημαι, 2 pers. sing. κάθῃ a later form for κάθησαι 
(Acts xxiii. 3), impv. κάθου for κάθησο [yet ef. Kiihner 
as below] (cf. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 359; Kriiger $38, 6 sq. 
i. p. 147; Kiihner § 301 i. p. 671; W. 8.14, 4; [B. 49 
(42)]), [subjune. 2 pers. plur. κάθησθε, Lk. xxii. 30 Tr 
mrg.; but WH txt. καθῆσθε ; see Veitch 5. v.; Kriiger 
$38, 6, 1 (cf. καθίζω), inf. καθῆσθαι, ptep. καθήμενος; imp 
ἐκαθήμην; and once the rare [ef. Veitch p. 347] fut. καθή- 


313 


καθίζω 


copa, Lk. xxii. 30 T Tr txt. WH mrg. [so WH in Mt. xix. 
28 also; cf. καθίζω, fin.]; (jar); a verb of which only 
the pres. and impf. are in use in class. Grk. [ef. B. 60 
(52) ]; Sept. for 1; 1. to sit down, seat one’s self: 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place [ef. W. § 52, 4, 9], Mk. iv. 1; 
Lk. xxii. 55 [here T Tr WH pégos]; εἰς, Mk. xiii. 3 [B. 
§ 147,16]; μετά w. gen. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 58; κάθου ἐκ 
δεξιῶν μου, i. 6. be a partner of my power, Mt. xxii. 44; 
Mk. xii. 36 [Tr txt. WH mre. κάθισον]; Lk. xx. 42; Acts 
ii. 34; Heb. i. 13 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 1); κάθου ὧδε ὑπό with 
ace., Jas. ii. 3. παρά ν΄. ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 1; ἐπάνω 
w. gen. of place, Mt. xxviii. 2; with ἐκεῖ, Mt. xv. 29; Jn. 
vi. 3 [Tdf. ἐκαθέζετο] ; the place to be supplied fr. the 
context, Mt. xiii. 2. 2. to sit, be seated, of a place 
occupied : foll. by ἐν with dat. of place [W. as under 1], 
Mt. xi. 16; xxvi.69; ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Col. iii. 1; ἐν 
τοῖς δεξιοῖς, Mk. xvi. 5; ἐπί twos, Mt. xxiv. 3; xxvii. 19; 
[Acts xx.9 RG]; ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου [but also, esp. in the 
crit. edd., with the dat. and the acc. (see below); cf. 
Alford on the foll. pass.], Rev. iv. 2 ete.; τῆς νεφέλης [or 
w. the ace.], Rev. xiv. 15, and in other exx.; ἐπί τινι, 
Acts iii. 10; ἐπί τι [ef. B. 338 (291)], Mt. ix. 9; Mk. ii. 
14; Lk. v. 27; Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2 [R dat. (as 
in foll.)] 4 sq.; xi. 16; xvii. 3; xix.11; παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, 
Mt. xx. 30; Mk.x.46; Lk. xviii. 35; πρὸς τὸ φῶς, Lk. 
xxii. 56; ἐπάνω τινός, Mt. xxiii. 22; Rev. vi. 8, περί τινα, 
Mk. iii. 32,343; ἀπέναντί twos, Mt. xxvii. 613; ἐκ δεξιῶν 
twos, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; Lk. xxii. 69; ἐκεῖ, Mk. 
ii. 6; οὗ, where, Acts ii. 2 [L καθεζόμενοι]; Rev. xvii. 15; 
without specification of place, Mk. v.15; Lk. v.17; viii. 
35; Jn. ii. 14; ix.8; 1Co.xiv.30. κάθημαι as descrip- 
tive of a certain state or condition is used of those who 
sit in discharging their office, as judges, xa6n κρίνων, Acts 
xxiii. 3; of a queen, i. q. to occupy the throne, to reign 
[A. V. I sit a queen], Rev. xviii. 7; of money-changers, 
Jn.ii.14; of mourners and penitents: ἐν σάκκῳ, clothed 
in sackcloth, ἐν σποδῷ, covered with ashes, Lk. x. 13; 
of those who, enveloped in darkness, cannot walk about, 
Mt. iv. 16; Lk.i. 79 (Is. xlii. 7); of a lame man, Acts xiv. 
8. i.q. to have a fixed abode, to dwell: ἐπὶ πρόσωπον τῆς 
γῆς, Lk. xxi. 35; Rev. xiv. 6 (where Rec. κατοικοῦντας) ; 
ἐπὶ θρόνον, Rey. xx. 11 GT [WHmrg.; but see above]; 
ἐν Ἱερουσαλήμ, Neh. xi. 6; [ἐν ὄρει Σαμαρείας, Sir. |. 26. 
Comp. : συγ-κάθημαι]. 

καθημέραν, i. q. καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, see ἡμέρα, 2 p. 278%. 

καθημερινός, -7, -όν, (fr. καθ᾽ ἡμέρανν, daily: Acts vi. 1. 
(Judith xii. 15; Theophr., Athen., Plut., Alciphr. epp. 
i.5; Joseph. antt. 3, 10,1; [11, 7,1]; Polyaen. 4, 2, 
10.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53 [(yet see L. and S.); W. 
25 (25 54.) 

καθ-ίζω ; fut. καθίσω ΓΒ. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. ἐκάθισα (impy. 
2 sing. κάθισον once, Mk. xii. 36 Tr txt. WH mrg.); pf. 
κεκάθικα (Mk. xi. 2 [not WH Trmrg.; Heb. xii. 2 LT 
Tr WH; a late form, see Veitch 5. v.]); 1 aor. mid. 
subjune. 2 pers. plur. καθίσησθε (Lk. xxii. 30 Ree.) ; fut. 
mid. καθίσομαι; fr. Hom. down; [cf. B. 60 (52) ]; 1. 
trans. to make to sit down (xara; q. v- III. 1), to set, ap 
point; Sept. for DWI: τινὰ ἐπὶ θρόνου [L T Tr WH ros 


καθίημι 


θρόνον, to confer the kingdom upon one, Acts ii. 30; τινὰ 
ev δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ, Eph. i. 20; τινά, to appoint one to act as 
judge, 1 Co. vi. 4 (δικαστήν, Plat. legg. 9 p. 873 e.; Polyb. 
40, 5,33 συνέδριον κριτῶν, Joseph. antt. 20, 9, 1). 2. 
intrans.; Sept. for 1; a. tosit down: univ., Mt. v. 1; 
xiii. 48; Mk. ix. 35; Lk. iv. 20; v. 3; xiv. 28, 31; xvi. 6; 
Jn. viii. 2; Acts xiii. 14; xvi. 13; witha telic inf. 1 Co. x. 
7; with specification of the Blas) or seat: ἐν δεξιᾷ τινος, 
Heb. i. 3; viii. 1; x. 12; xii. 2; ἐπί τινι, ΜΚ. xi. 7 [Rec. ji 
els τὸν ναόν, 2 Th. i ii. 4 [B. § 147, 16; W.415 (386) ]; ἐπί 
with ace. [ef. B. 338 (290)], Rev. xx.4; Jn. xii. 14; Mk. 
xi. 2,[7 LT Tr WH]; Lk. xix. 30; {add Acts ii. 3, see 
B. § 129,17; W.516 (481)]; ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος, of a judge, 
Jn. xix. 13; Acts xii. 21; xxv. 6,17; κατέναντί [or ἀπέ- 
ναντί ‘Tr ete. | twos, Mk. xii. 41; with adverbs of place, 
Mk. xiv. 32; Mt. xxvi. 36. b. to sit: [absol. (of a 
dead man restored to life) ἐκάθισεν sat, sat up, Lk. vii. 15 
Lumrg. Wii mrg.]; ἐν τῷ θρόνῳ, Rev. iii. 21; ἐπί w. gen. 
of the seat, Mt. xxiii. 2; xxv. 31; ἐκ δεξιῶν x. ἐξ evov., 
Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. χ. 87,40. 1. q. to have fixed one’s 
abode, i. 6. to sojourn [ef. our settle, settle down], Acts 
xviii. 11; foll. by ἐν with dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 49 [here 
A.V. tarry], (Ex. xvi. 29; Jer. xxx. 11 (xlix. 33); [Neh. 
xi. 357). Mid. [Pass.? ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 
336 sq.] to sit: ἐπὶ θρόνων, Lk. xxii. 80 [RGL: see κά- 
θημαι]; ἐπὶ θρόνους, Mt. xix. 28 [WH καθήσεσθε; see 
Comp.: ἀνα-, émt-, mapa-, περι-, συγ-καθίζω. 

καθ-ίημι : 1 aor. καθῆκα ; [fr. Hom. on]; to send down, 
let down: eis, Lk. v. 19; διά w. gen. of place, ibid. and 
Acts ix. 25; pres. pass. ptep. καθιέμενος let down, ἐπὶ τῆς 
γῆς, Acts x. 11; ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Acts xi. 5.* 

καθ-ίστημι (also καθιστάω, whence the ptep. καθιστῶν- 
res Acts xvii. 15 RG; and καθιστάνω, whence καθιστά- 
νοντες ibid. LT Tr WH; 
1 aor. κατέστησα; Pass., pres. καθίσταμαι; 1 aor. κατεστά- 
θην; 1 fut. κατασταθήσομαι; Sept. for own, DPA, VP27, 
ASIN, WIP, 102} (prop. to set down, put down), to set, 
place, put: a. τινὰ ἐπί Twos, to set one over a thing 
(in charge of it), Mt. xxiv. 45; xxv. 21, 23; Lk. xii. 42; 
Acts vi. 3; also ἐπί τινι, Mt. xxiv. 47; Lk. xii. 44; ἐπί τι, 
Heb. ii. 7 Ree. fr. Ps. viii. 7. b. τινά, to appoint one 
to administer an office (ef. Germ. bestellen): πρεσβυτέ- 
ρους, Tit. 1. δ; τινὰ εἰς τό with inf., to appoint to do 
something, Heb. viii. 3; τὰ πρὸς τ. θεόν to conduct the 
worship of God, Heb. v. 1; foll. by ἵνα, ibid.; τινά with 
a pred. ace. indicating the office to be administered [to 
make one so and so; ef. W. § 32,4b.; B.§ 131, 7], (so 
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), Lk. xii. 14; Acts 
vii. 10, 27, 35; Heb. vii. 28. c. to set down as, con- 
stitute (Lat. sisto), i. q. to declare, show to be: pass. with 
ἁμαρτωλός, δίκαιος, Ro. v. 19 [ef. Prof. 7. Dwight in New 
Englander for 1867, p. 590 sqq.; Dietzsch, Adam u. 
Christus (Bonn, 1871) p. 1881. d. to constitute (Lat. 
sisto) i. 4. to render, make, cause to be: τινὰ οὐκ ἀργόν, 
οὐδὲ ἄκαρπον, i. e. (by litotes) laborious and fruitful, 2 
Pet. i. 8. e. to conduct or bring to a certain place: 
τινά, Acts xvii. 15 (2 Chr. xxviii. 15 for #277; Josh. vi. 
23; 1S. ν. 8; Hom. Od. 13, 274; Xen. an. 4, 8, 8 and in 


κάθημαι. 


see fornpt, init.) ; fut. καταστήσω; 


314 


καθως 


f. Mid. to show or exhibit one’s 
with a pred. nom., Jas. iv. 4; ἡ 
[Comp.: ἀντι-, ἀπο- 


other prof. auth.). 
self; come forward as: 
. ἡ σπιλοῦσα, Jas. iii. 6. 
καθίστημι. ἢ 

καθό (i. ὁ. καθ᾽ δ), adv., [fr. Lys. and Plat. down], ac 
cording to what, i. 6. 1. as: Ro. viii. 26. P+ 
according as; in so far as, so far forth as: 1 Pet. iv. 18 
(Ree.*!” καθώς) ; 2 Co. viii. 12 [W. 807 (288); cf. B.§ 139, 
807." 

καθολικός, -ἦ, -όν, (καθόλου, 4. ν.), general, universal (oc- 
casionally in prof. auth. fr. [Aristot. and] Polyb. down, 
as καθ. καὶ κοινὴ ἱστορία, Polyb. 8, 4, 11; often in eccl. 
writ.; the title ἡ καθολικὴ ἐκκλησία first in Ignat. ad 
Smyrn. c. 8 and often in Polye. martyr. [see ed. (Gebh. 
Harn.) Zahn, p. 133 note]; ef. καθολικὴ ἀνάστασις, [Justin 
6. Tryph. 81 sub fin.]; Theoph. ad Autol. []. i. § 13] 
p- 40 ed. Otto) ; ἐπιστολαὶ καθολικαΐ, or simply καθολικαί, 
in the title of the Epp. of James. Peter, John, and Jude 
(RGL; cf. τῶν ἑπτὰ λεγομένων καθολικῶν 80. ἐπιστολῶν, 
Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 25), most prob. because they seemed to 
be written not to any one church alone, but to all the 
churches. [Cf. Dict. of Chris. Antiq. 5. v. Catholic.]* 

καθόλου (i. 6. καθ᾽ ὅλου [as it is written in auth. before 
Aristot.” (L. and S.)]), adv., wholly, entirely, at all: 
Acts iv. 18. ({Ex. xxii. 11]; Ezek. xiii. 3, 22; Am. iii. 
8,4; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot. and sqq.) * 

καθ-οπλίζω : pf. pass. ptep. καθωπλισμένος ; to arm [fully 
(cf. κατά, III. 1 fin.)], furnish with arms: Lk. xi. 21. 


γλῶσσα... 


(Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 
καθ-οράω, -ῶ: 1. to look down, see from above, 
view from on high, (Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. 


to see thoroughly [ef. κατά, III. 1 fin.], perceive clearly, un- 
derstand (Germ. erschauen): pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. κα- 
Gopara, Ro. i. 20 (8 Mace. iii. 11, and often in class. 
Grk.). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 61." 

καθότι (i. 6. καθ᾽ 6 τι), according to what, i. 6. ale 
so far as, anced g as: Acts ii. 45; iv. 35, (Polyb. 18, 
19 (36), 5; for wd, Ex. i. 12, 17). 2. because 
that, Manin [ef. W. § 53, 8]: Lk. i. 7; xix. 9; Acts ii. 
24, and LT’ Tr WH (for Ree. διότι) ἧς Acts xvii. 31, 
(Tob. i. 12; xiii. 4; Polyb. 18, 21 (38), 6). 3. as, 
just as: Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 1; Judith ii. 13,15; x. 9, and 
often in Thue. et al.* 

καθώς (i. 6. καθ᾽ ὡς), a particle found occasionally in 
prof. auth. fr. Aristot. down for the Attic καθά and καθό, 
but emphatically censured by Phryn. and the Atticists ; 
cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 74 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn. 
Ρ. 425 sq.; [W. 26 (25)]; 1. according as, Just as, 
even as: in the first member of a comparison, Lk. vi. 31; 
1 Jn. ii. 27; foll. by οὕτως in the second member [ef. W. 
§ 53, 5], Lk. xi. 80; xvii. 26; Jn. iii. 14; Qo. 5 xed 
Col. iii. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 6; foll. by καί also, Jn. xv. 9; xvii. 18; 
xx. 21; 1 Jn. ii. 18; iv.17; 1Co.xv.49; itis annexed to 
preceding words after the demonstrative οὕτως, Lk. xxiv. 
24; with οὕτως unexpressed, Mt. xxi. 6; xxviii. 6; Mk. 
xvi. 7; Lk. i. 2, 55, 70; xi.1; Jn. i. 23; v. 28; heer 
47 [here LT Tr WH ὡς]; xv. 8; Ro.i.13; xv. 7}; 1 Co. 
viii. 25 x. 6; 2Co.i. 14; ix. 8; xi. 12; Eph. iv. 17, and 


καθώσπερ 


often; καθὼς διδάσκω, agreeably to my method of teach- 
ing, 1 Co. iv. 17; καθὼς γέγραπται, Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. ix. 
13; Acts vii 42; xv. 15; Ro. i. 17, and often in Paul; 
the apodosis wanting, and to be gathered fr. the con- 
text: καθὼς παρεκάλεσά σε... ἐν πίστει, SC. οὕτω καὶ νῦν 
παρακαλῶ, 1 Tim. i. 3, ef. W.570 (530); [B. 386 (331) ]; 
ἤρξατο αἰτεῖσθαι (sc. οὕτω ποιεῖν αὐτοῖς), καθὼς κτλ. Mk. 
xv. 8 [Β. § 151, 23 b.; cf. W. 584 (543 54.}}; in com- 
parison by contrary we find the negligent use: ἀγαπῶμεν 
ἀλλήλους, οὐ καθὼς Kaiv κτὰ. 1 Jn. iii. 11 sq., cf. De 
Wette ad loc. and W. 623 (579); οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος 

ον οὐ καθὼς etc., not such as they ate ete., Jn. vi. 58. 
with the verb εἰμί, equiv. to Lat. qualis, such as, 1 Jn. 
iii. 2; in a parenthesis, 1 Th. ii. 13 (as it is in truth). 
2. according as i.e. in proportion as, in the degree that: 
Mk. iv. 33; Acts vii. 17 (cf. Meyer ad loc.); xi. 29; 1 
Co. xii. 11,18; 1 Pet. iv. 10. 3. since, seeing that, 
agreeably to the fact that, [ef. W. § 53, 8; 448 (417)]: 
Jn. xvii. 2; Ro. i. 28 [yet here al. regard καθ. as cor- 
responsive rather than causal or explanatory]; 1 Co. 
1.6; v.7; Eph.i.4; Phil. i. 7. 4. it is put for the 
simple ὡς, a. after verbs of speaking, in indir. disc., 
Acts xv. 14; it serves to add an epexegesis, 38 Jn. 3 
(to σου τῇ ἀληθείᾳ). b. of time, when, after that, (cf. 
Lat. ut): 2 Macc.i. 31; [Neh. v.6]; here many bring in 
Acts vii. 17; but see 2 above. 

καθώσ-περ, [Tr καθώς rep], just as, exactly as: Heb. v. 
4 T Tr WH [also 2Co. iii. 18 WH mrg.]. (Himer., Psell., 
Tzetz.) * 

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the par- 
ticles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 
361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the 
difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] 

I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, 
atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words 
or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, 
Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father 
(see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυ- 
μερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before 
single terms, to each of which its own force and weight 
is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ 
νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία 
καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. 
xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; 
Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it 
connects numerals; and so that (contrary to the more 
com. usage) the greater number precedes: δέκα κ- ὀκτώ, 
Lk. xiii. 4, 11, [but in both pass. L and Tr br. WH om. 
καί; Tdf. δεκαοκτώ], 16; τεσσαράκοντα x. ἕξ, Jn. ii. 20; 
add, Jn. v.5 GT; Acts xiii. 20; cf. W. § 37,4; [Bp. 
Lehtft. on Gal.i.18; noteworthy also is its use in 2 Co. 
xiii. 1 (cf. Deut. xix. 15 Sept.) ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων 
καὶ τριῶν (in Mt. xviii. 16 ἢ τρ. cf. W. 440 (410) note) at 
the mouth of two witnesses and (should there be so many) 
of three; a similar use of καί, to lend a certain indefinite- 
ness to the expression, occurs occasionally with other 
than numerical specifications, as Jas. iv. 13 σήμερον καὶ 


(RG; but LT Tr WH ἢ) αὔριον; cf. Kiihner § 521, 2; 


315 


καὶ 


Ebeling, Lex. Hom. 8. v. p. 614*]. c. it joins to par- 
titive words the general notion; so that it is equiv. 
to and in general, and in a word, in short: 6 Πέτρος k. οἱ 
ἀπόστολοι, Acts v. 29; οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς [καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 
Ree. ] καὶ τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον, Mt. xxvi. 59; καὶ δικαιώμασι 
σαρκός, Heb. ix. 10 Rec. Tr br. WH mrg.; καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν 
ἸΙσραὴλ τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. vi. 16, and often in Grk. writ.; cf. 
W. 437sq. (407); 520sq. (485); [B. 363 (311 sq.) ; 400 
(343)]; with τέ preceding, 7 re... αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ 
θειότης, Ro. i. 20 [see τέ, 2 a.]; and, on the other hand, 
it joins to a general idea something particular, which is 
already comprised indeed in that general notion but by 
this form of expression is brought out more emphatically 
(which Strabo 8 (1) p. 340 calls συνκαταλέγειν τὸ μέρος 
τῷ ὅλῳ) ; 80 that it is equiv. to and especially [cf.W. u. s.]: 
Ta πάντα καὶ τὰ τῶν δαιμονιζομένων, Mt. viii. 33; τοῖς pa- 
θηταῖς αὐτοῦ k. τῷ Πέτρῳ, Mk. xvi. 7; αἱ φωναὶ αὐτῶν x. 
τῶν ἀρχιερέων, Lk. xxiii. 23 [RG]; σὺν γυναιξὶ καὶ Μαριάμ, 
Acts i. 14; ἐν Ἰούδᾳ x. Ἱερουσαλήμ, 1 Mace. ii. 6; πᾶς 
᾿Ιούδα x. Ἱερουσαλήμ, 2 Chr. xxxv. 24, cf. xxxii. 33; often 
so in Grk. writ. also. 2. It connects clauses and 
sentences; a. univ., as διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ 
k. συνάξει τὸν σῖτον κτὰ. Mt. iii. 12; εἰσῆλθον . . . καὶ ἐδί- 
δασκον, Acts v. 21; and in innumerable other exx. b. 
In accordance with the simplicity of the ancient popular 
speech, and esp. of the Hebr. tongue, it links statement 
to statement, the logical relations of which the more cul- 
tivated language expresses either by more exact parti- 
cles, or by the use of the participial or the relative con- 
struction (ef. W. § 60,3; B. 288 (248) sqq.; 361 (310) 
sq.): 6. g. that very freq. formula ἐγένετο ... καί (see 
γίνομαι, 2b.) ; καὶ εἶδον καὶ (equiv. to ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο, 
Rey. vi. 12; τέξεται υἱὸν k. καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (equiv. 
to οὗ ὄνομα καλέσεις). Mt. i. 21; καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι, 
καὶ (equiv. to ὅθεν) ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς, Mk. ἴχ. δ᾽ clauses 
are thus connected together in clusters; as, Mt. vii. 25, 
27 (an example of six clauses linked together by καί) ; 
Mt. xiv. 9 sqq-; Mk. i. 12-14; Lk. xviii. 32-34; Jn. ii. 
13-16; x.3; 1 Co. xii. 5-6; Rev. vi. 2, 8, 12-16; ix.1—-4 
(where nine sentences are strung together by καί), ete. 
after a designation of time καί annexes what will be 
or was done at that time: ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα καὶ παραδίδοται 
kth. Mt. xxvi. 455; ἦν δὲ ὥρα τρίτη καὶ ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν, 
Mk. xv. 25; ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ πάσχα... . κ'ι ἀνέβη εἰς Ἵεροσ. ὁ 
ἸΙησοῦς, Jn. ii. 13; ἡμέραι ἔρχονται καὶ συντελέσω, Heb. 
viii. 8; add, Lk. xxiii. 44: ὅπ. iv. 35; ν. 1; xi. 55; Acts 
y. 7; and not infreq. so in Grk. writ., as ἤδη δὲ ἢν ὀψὲ καὶ 
of Κορίνθιοι ἐξαπίνης πρύμναν ἐκρούοντο. Thue. 1, 50; cf. 
Matthiae § 620, 1 a. p.1481; W. 486 (405 sq.); [B. 361 
(310)}. c. it joins affirmative to negative sentences, 
as μὴ συκοφαντήσατε καὶ ἀρκεῖσθε, Lk. iii. 14 ; οὔτε ἄντλημα 
ἔχεις καὶ τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ, Jn. iv. 11; οὔτε... . ἐπιδέχεται 
kal... κωλύει, 3 Jn. 10, (rarely so in Grk. writ.,as Eur. 
Iph. Taur. 578; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 714); much 
oftener it annexes a clause depending on the preceding 
negative: μήποτέ σε mapad@... καὶ ὁ κριτῆς σε παραδῷ 

ον καὶ εἰς φυλακὴν βληθήσῃ, Mt. v. 25; add, Mt. vii. 6; 
x. 38; xiii. 15; xxvii. 64; Lk. xii. 58; xxi. 34; Jn. vi. 


και 


53; xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27; 1 Th. iii. δ; 1 Tim. vi. 1; 
Heb. xii. 15; Rev. xvi.15; [see B. 368 (315) d.; ef. W. 
§ 56. 2a.]. d. it annexes what follows from something 
said before (xai consecutive), so as to be equiv. to and 
so: Mt. v. 15 (καὶ λάμπει) ; Mt. xxiii. 32 (kat πληρώσατε) ; 
2 Co. xi. 9 (καὶ ἐν παντί) ; Heb. ii. 19; 1 Jn. ili. 19 (καὶ 
ἔμπροσθεν); 2 Pet. 1. 19 (καὶ ἔχομεν) ; so in statements 
after imperatives and words having the force of an im- 
perative: δεῦτε ὀπίσω pov, καὶ ποιήσω ὑμᾶς etc. Mt. iv. 
19; εἰπὲ λόγῳ, καὶ ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου, Mt. viii. 8; Lk. 
vii. 7; ἀντίστητε τῷ διαβόλῳ καὶ φεύξεται ad’ ὑμῶν, Jas. 
iv. 7: add, Mt. vii. 7; Mk. vi. 22; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xiv. 16; 
Rey. iv. 1; ef. Fritzsche on Mt. pp. 187 (and 416), [ef. 
Sir. ii. 6; iii. 17). e. with a certain rhetorical em- 
phasis, it annexes something apparently at variance with 
what has been previously said; so that it is equiv. to 
and yet (cf. Stallbaum on Plat. apol. p. 29 b.); so the 
Lat. atque (cf. Beier on Cie. de off. 3, 11, 48): Mt. ili. 14 
(καὶ σὺ ἔρχη πρὸς μέ); Mt. vi. 26; x. 29; Mk. xii. 12; 
Jn. i. 5 (καὶ ἡ σκοτία krd.), 10 (καὶ ὁ κόσμος); Jn. 111. 11, 
32; v.40 (καὶ ov θέλετε) : In. vi. 70; vii. 285 viii. 49,55 
(καὶ οὐκ ἐγνώκατε); Jn. ix. 30; 1 Co. y.2; 2 Co. vi. 9; 
Heb. iii. 9; Rev. iii. 1 (. .. Gps, καὶ νεκρὸς εἶ), ete. when 
a vain attempt is spoken of: Mt. xii. 43 (ζητεῖ καὶ οὐχ εὑ- 
pioxe.) ; xiii. 17; xxvi. 60; Take xiii hota Se. if: 
like the Hebr. 1 (see Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 396"), it begins 
an apodosis, which is thus connected with the protasis, 
ef. the Germ. da [or Eng. then], (in class. Grk. some- 
times δέ; see δέ, 8) [ef. B. 362 (311) d.; W. § 53,3 Ἐ; 
Ellic. on Phil. i. 22]: with ὅτε or a temporal ὡς preced- 
ing in the protasis [as sometimes in Grk. prose (e. g. 
Thue. 2, 93, where see Kriiger)], Lk. ii. 21; Acts xiii. 
18 sq. [here WH txt. om. καί ; see ὡς, I. 7]; as... καὶ 
ἰδού, Lk. vii. 12; Actsi. 10; x.17 [RG Trmrg. br.]; ἐὰν 

. καὶ εἰσελεύσ. Rev. iii. 20 T WH mrg., although here 
καί may be rendered also (I also will come in, ete.), de- 
claring that, if the first thing (expressed in the protasis) 
be done, the second (expressed in the apodosis) will be 
done also. g. as in class. Grk., it begins a question 
thrown out with a certain impassioned abruptness and 
containing an urgent rejoinder to another’s speech (cf. 
W. § 53,3a.; Matthiae §620,1d.; Kiihner § 521, 3 ii. 
p- 791 sq.): καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι; ΜΚ. χ. 36: καὶ τίς 
ἐστί μου πλησίον; Lk. x. 39 ; καὶ τίς ἐστιν «rd. Jn. ix. 36 
[GT Tr WH]; add, Jn. χῖν. 22 [ἃ ΤΊ. Peculiar is 2 Co. 
ii. 2: εἰ yap ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, καὶ τίς... ἐμοῦ (a swarm of 
exx. of this form of speech occur in Clem. homil. 2, 43, 
6. σ. εἰ ὁ θεὸς ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει ;), where the 
writer after the conditional protasis, interrupting him- 
self as it were, utters the substance of the negative 
apodosis in a new question, where we render who then is 
he that ete., for then there is no one who οἷο. h. it 
introduces parentheses [ef. W. § 62, 1]: καὶ ἐκωλύθην 
ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο, Ro. i. 13 (Dem. Lept. p. 488, 9; so the 
Lat. ef, 6. g. praeda — et aliquantum ejus fuit— militi 
concessa, Liv. 27, 1); cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 
35 56. 3. It annexes epexegetically both words 
and sentences (xai epexegetical or ‘explicative’), so 


810 


και 


that it is equiv. to and indeed, namely, [W. § 53, 8 ο.; ef. 
§ 66, 7 fin.]: χάριν καὶ ἀποστολήν, Ro. i. 5, where οἱ. 
Fritzsche ; περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, Acts xxiii. 
6; πολλὰ... κι ἕτερα, Lk. iii. 18; πολλὰ... καὶ ἄλλα 
σημεῖα, Jn. χχ. 80; πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα, Acts χχν. 
7; πολλοὶ x. ἀνυπότακτοι, Tit. 1.10 [R G; on the preceding 
use of καί cf. πολύς, d. a. fin.]; καὶ [L br. x.] ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ, 
and indeed [i. 6. viz. ] when he shall be taken away ete. Lk. 
ν. 35 [others find here an aposiopesis; cf. Meyer ad loc. 
(ed. Weiss) ]; καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος, Jn. i. 16; καὶ περισ- 
σὸν ἔχωσιν, Jn. x. 10, add 33 (where the words καὶ ὅτι 
«td. show what kind of blasphemy is meant); Acts v. 
21 (on which see γερουσία) ; Ro. ii. 15 (where καὶ μεταξὺ 
κτλ. adds an explanation respecting the testimony of 
conscience); 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 38, ete.; ef. Bornemann, 
Scholia, p. 38; Fritzsche, Quaest. Leian. p. 9 sqq.; so the 
Lat. εἰ in Cie. Tuse. 3, 20, 48 laudat, et saepe, virtutem; 
pro Mil. 25 te enim jam appello et ea voce ut me exau- 
dire possis; cf. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. ii. p. 809; [Har- 
pers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. et, 11. A.J; i. q. and indeed, to 
make a climax, for and besides: καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, Acts 
xxii. 255 καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον, 1 Co. ii. 2; καὶ τοῦτο, 
Lat. idque (Cie. off. 1, 1,1 te... audientem Cratippum 
idque Athenis), our and this, and that, and that too, i. 4. 
especially: Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 6, and LT Tr WH in 
8, (4 Mace. xiv. 9); also καὶ ταῦτα (com. in Grk. writ.), 
1 Co. vi. 8 Rec.; Heb. xi. 12; ef. Klotz, Devar. i. p. 108; 
ii. 2 p. 652 sq.; [οἷ W. 162 (153)]. 4. it connects 
whole narratives and expositions, and thus forms a tran- 
sition to new matters: Mt. iv. 23; viii. 14, 23, 28; ix. 1, 
9, 27,35; x.1; Mk.v.1, 21; vi.1,6; Lk. viii. 26; Jn.i. 
19 (cf. 15); 1Jn.i.4, ete.; esp. in the very com. καὶ ἐγέ- 
vero, Mt. vii. 28; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 1, ete. (see γίνομαι, 

2b.). 5. καί... καί, a repetition which indicates 
that of two things one takes place no less than the other: 
both ... and,as well ... as, not only ... but also, [W.§ 53, 
4]: it serves to correlate — not only single terms, as καὶ 
[L br. «.] ψυχὴν καὶ σῶμα, Mt. x. 28; add, Mk. iv. 41; Jn. 
iv. 36 [here Tr WH om. first x.]; Ro. xi. 33; Phil. ii. 13 ; 
iv. 12, ete.; καὶ ἐν ὀλίγῳ καὶ ἐν πολλῷ [LT Tr WH μεγάλῳ] 
both with little effort and with great [but see μέγας, 1 a. 
y- fin.], Acts xxvi. 29; but also clauses and sentences, as 
Mk. ix. 13; Jn. vii. 28; ix.37; xii. 28; 1 Co. i. 22; and 
even things that are contrasted [cf. W. u.s.; B.§ 149, 
8.1: In. xv. 24; Acts xxiii. 3; kai... καὶ ov, Lk. v. 
36; Jn. vi.36; now... now, Mk. ix. 22; καὶ od... καί, 
Jn. xvii. 25. 6. τέ... καί, see τέ, 2. 

II. It marks something added to what has already 
been said, or that of which something already said holds 
ood; accordingly it takes on the nature of an adverb, 
also (Lat. etiam, quoque, Germ. auch [cf. W. and B. as 
ad init. In this use it generally throws an emphasis 
upon the word which immediately follows it; cf. Klotz, 
Devar. ii. 2 p. 638.]) ; 1. used simply, a. also, 
likewise: Mt. v. 39 sq.3 xii. 45; Mk. ii. 28; Lk. iii. 14; 
Jn. viii. 19; Ko. viii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 29; xi. 6, ete.; very 
freq. with pronouns: καὶ ὑμεῖς, Mt. xx. 4, 7; Lk. xxi. 
31: In. vil. 47, ete.: κἀγώ, καὶ ἐγώ, see κἀγώ, 2; καὶ 


καὶ 


αὐτός, see αὐτός, 1.1 ἃ. preceded by an adverb of com- 
parison in the former part of the sentence: καθὼς... 
καί, Lk. vi. 31 [WHtxt.om., L Trmrg. br., καὶ ὑμεῖς]; 
Jn. vi. 57; xiii. 15, 33; 1 Jn. ii. 18; ἵν. 117: 1 Co. xv. 49; 
ὥσπερ -.. οὕτω καί, Ro. xi. 30 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 22; Gal. iv. 
29; καθάπερ ... οὕτω καί, 2 Co. viii. 11; as... καί, Mt. 
vi.10; Lk. xi. 2 RLbr.; Acts vii. 51 [L καθώς ; 2 Co. 
xiii. 2 see ὡς, I. 1 fin.]; Gal.i.9; Phil. i. 20, (Thue. 8, 1; 
ὥσπερ . - - καί, Xen. mem. [ 2, 2, 2 (and Kihner ad loc.) ]; 
3,1, 4; [4, 4, 7; ef. B. 362 (811) c.]); with εἰ preceding, 
Gal. iv. 7. sometimes καί stands in each member of the 
comparison: 1 Th. ii. 14; Ro. i. 13; Col. iii. 13, (2 Mace. 
ii. 10; vi. 14; also in Grk. writ., ef. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 
635; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1, 1, 6 [also in his Gr«. Gram. 
§ 524, 2 vol. ii. 799; cf. Ellic. on Eph. v. 23; W. § 53, 
587). b. i. q. even [A. V. sometimes yea], (Lat. vel, 
adeo; Germ. sogar, selbst): Mt. v. 46 sq.; x. 30; Mk. 
1.27; Lk. x.17; 1 Co. ii. 10; Gal. ii. 17; Eph. v. 12, 
ete. c. before a comparative it augments the gra- 
dation, even, still, (Germ. noch): Mt. xi. 9; [Jn. xiv. 12]; 
Heb. viii. 6 [B. 363 (311) g.; al. regard the καί in this 
pass. as corresponsive (also) rather than ascensive, 
and connect it with ὅσῳ]. d. with a ptep. i. q. al- 
though [ef. Kriiger § 56, 13, 2]: Lk. xviii. 7 RG [see 
μακροθυμέω, 32]. 2. joined with pronouns and par- 
ticles, also; a. with comparative adverbs: ὡς καί, 
Acts xi. 17; 1 Co. vii. 7; ix. 5, ete.; καθὼς καί, Ro. xv. 7; 
1 Co. xiii. 12; 2 Co.i. 14; Eph. iv. 17, 32; v. 2, ete.; οὕτω 
καί, Ro. v.15 [WH br. καί], 18 sq.; vi.11; 1 Co. xi. 12, 
ete.; ὁμοίως καί, Jn. vi. 11; ὡσαύτως καί, Lk. xxii. 20 [R 
GLTramrg., T Trtxt. WH x. oo. (but WH reject the 
pass.) ]; 1 Co. xi. 25; καθάπερ καί (see καθάπερ). b. 
added to words designating the cause, it marks some- 
thing which follows of necessity from what has been 
previously said: διὸ καί, Lk. i. 35; Acts x. 29; Ro. i. 24 
Rec.; Heb. xiii. 12; [1 Pet. ii. 6 RJ; διὰ τοῦτο καί, Lk. xi. 
49; Jn. xii. 18 [here Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. καί]. ο. 
after the interrog. τί, καί (which belongs not to τί, but 
to the following word [to the whole sentence, rather; 
ef. Bdumlein, Partikeln, p. 1527) points the significance 
of the question, and may be rendered besides, moreover, 
(Germ. noch) [ef. W. § 53, 3 a. fin.; esp. Kriiger § 69, 

2,16]: τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; [A. V. why then ete.], 1 Co. 
xv. 29; τί καὶ ἐλπίζει ; (prop. why doth he also or yet 
hope for, and not rest in the sight ?), Ro. viii. 24[RGT]; 
ἵνα τί καί, Lk. xiii. 7. ἃ. ἀλλὰ καί. but also: Lk. 
xxiv. 22; Jn. v.18; Ro. 1.32; v. 3,11; viii. 23; ix. 10; 
2 Co. vii. 7; viii. 10, 19, 21; ix. 12; 1Jn.ii. 2, ete.; 1. 4. 
Lat. at etiam (in an apodosis after εἰ) : Ro. vi. 5 [W. 442 
(412)]. 6. δὲ καί, and δὲ... καί, but also, and also: 
Mt. iii. 10 [R G]; xviii. 17; xxvii. 44; Mk. xiv. 31 [WH 
br. δέ]; Lk. ii. 4; ix. 61; xiv. 12, 26 [L txt. Tr WH én 
τε καί, See ἔτι, 2 fin.]; xviii. 1 [RG], 9[Lbr.xat]; Jn. ii. 
2; it. 28; xviii. 2,5: ρίαν [65 1 Co.i. 16; iv. 1. xiv. 
15; xv. 15; 2Co.iv.3,ete. kal... γάρ, ἐὰν καί, εἰ καί, 
ἢ kai, καίγε, καὶ ... δέ, see γάρ 11. 10, ἐάν I. 3, εἰ III. 6 sq., 
ἤ 4¢., γέ 3e., δέϑ. The examples of crasis with καί in 
the N. T., viz. κἀγώ (κἀμοί, κἀμέ), κἀκεῖ, κἀκεῖθεν, κἀκεῖνος, 


317 


καινός 


κἄν, are noticed each in its place; for references see 
especially κἀγώ, init. 

Καϊάφας [ WH Καιάφας (ef. 1,: fin.) ; Lehm. in Lk. iii. 2 
Kaidas], -a [B. 20 (18) ; W.§ 8, 1], 6, (supposed by many 
to be the same as 8572, a stone, a rock; others more cor 
rectly i. q. 8373, depression, Targ. on Prov. xvi. 26 [ace. 
to Delitzsch (Brief and. Rom. ins Hebr. ete. P- 28) 83D), 
Caiaphas; acc. to Joseph. (τς 18, 2, 2) "Lanier ais 
καὶ Καϊάφας (Ἰώσηπον, τὸν καὶ Καϊάφαν ἐπικαλούμενον, 
antt. 18, 4, 3), high-priest of the Jews. He was ap- 
pointed to that office by Valerius Gratus, governor of 
Judea, after the removal of Simon, son of Camith, a.p. 
18 [ef. Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv.], and was re- 
moved A.D. 36 by Vitellius, governor of Syria, who ap- 
pointed Jonathan, son of the high-priest Ananus [i. e. 
Annas, father-in-law of Caiaphas, Jn. xviii. 13], his suc- 
cessor (Joseph. antt. 18, 4,3): Mt. xxvi. 3,57; Lk. iii. 2; 
Jn. xi. 49; xviii. 13 sq. 24, 28; Actsiv.6. Cf. Hausrath 
in Schenkel iii. 463 sq.* 

katye, see γέ, 3 6. 

Κάϊν [WH Καίν (cf.1,: fin.) ],-d, indecl., (in Joseph.with 
a Grk. ending, Κάϊς, -os ; Hebr. PP i.e. a spear, although 
the author of "Genesis, i iv. 1, decivas itfr. 73) to produce, 
beget, acquire, so that it isi. 4. }?3 2}, Ps. civ. 24 [ef. B.D. 
a ed. 5. v.]), Cain, the Ἐπ ον the first-born son οὗ 
Adam: Heb. xi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 12; Jude 11.* 

Kaivay [so RG L both 1 and 2; Tr Kaivay in 1 and 
Tr txt. in 2, but Tr mrg. Καινάμ in 2, WH Καινάμ 1 and 
2; T Καϊνάμ both 1 and 2), 6, (Hebr. 7p 2 lance-maker 
[8]. ‘ possessor’ or ‘ possession” ]), Cainan ; 1. son 
of Enos (Gen. v. 9 sq.): Lk. iii. 37. 2. son of Ar- 
phaxad, ace. to the Sept. of Gen. x. 24; xi. 12; [1 Chr. 
i. 18 Alex.j, which Luke follows in iii. 36. [See B. Ὁ. 
So Vel] 

καινός, -7, -ov; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept. 
for wan; new, i. e. a. as respects form; recenily 
made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to παλαιός old, 
antiquated) : as ἀσκός, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 (Tom. Tr 
WH br. the cl.]; Lk. v. 88 ; ἱμάτιον, Lk. v. 36; πλήρωμα, 
Mk. ii. 21; μνημεῖον, Mt. xxvii. 60; with ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς 
ἐτέθη added, Jn. xix. 413; καινὰ x. παλαιά, Mt. xiii. 52; 
new, which as recently made is superior to what it suc- 
ceeds: διαθήκη, Mt. xxvi. 28 (Τ᾿ WH om. caw.) ; Mk. xiv. 
24 RL; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25; 
2Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8,13; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviil. (xxxi.) 
31); καινοὶ οὐρανοί, καινὴ γῆ, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1, 
(Is. xv. 17 ; xvi. 22) ; Ἱερουσαλήμ (see Ἱεροσόλυμα, fin.), 
Rey. iii. 12; xxi. 2; ἄνθρωπος (see the word, 1 f.), Eph. 
ii. 15; iv. 24, (καρδία, πνεῦμα, Ezek. xviii. 31; xxxvi. 26) ; 
καινὰ πάντα ποιῶ. I bring all things into a new and better 
condition, Rev. xxi. 5 ; γέννημα τῆς ἀμπέλου, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; 
Mk. xiv. 25. b. as respects substance ; of anew kind ; 
unprecedented, novel, uncommon, unheard of, (€repa καὶ 
καινὰ δαιμόνια, Xen. mem. 1, 1,1): διδαχή, Mk. i. 27; Acts 
xvii. 19; ἐντολή, given now for the first time, Jn. xiii. 34; 
1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; 2 Jn. 5; ὄνομα, with the added explana- 
tion ὃ οὐδεὶς οἶδεν (ἔγνω Rec.), Rev. ii. 17 (Is. bxii. 2; Ixv. 
15); ὠδή, Rev. v. 9; xiv. 3, (Ps. exliii. (exliv.) 9; ὕμνος, 


καινότης 


Is. xlii. 10; dopa, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 3; xxxix. (Χ].) 4, 
ete.) ; λέγειν τι καὶ [ἢ LT Tr WH] ἀκούειν καινότερον, 
Acts xvii. 21 (newer sc. than that which is already ; [cf. 
W. 244 (228 sq.)]); κτίσις, Gal. vi. 15; καινὰ τὰ πάντα, 
all things are new, previously non-existent, begin to be 
far different from what they were before, 2 Co. v. 17 [L 
T Tr WH om. τὰ πάντα] ; μηκέτι οὔσης τῆς ἀνομίας, καινῶν 
δὲ γεγονότων πάντων ὑπὸ κυρίου, Barn. ep.15, 7. γλῶσσαι 
(see γλῶσσα, 2): Mk. xvi. 17 [Tr txt. WH txt. om. Tr 
mrg. br. kaw. |* 

|Syn. καὶν ὁ ς, νέος: v. denotes the new primarily in refer- 
enco to time, the young, recent ; «. denotes the new prima- 
rily in reference to quality, the fresh, unworn; ‘véos ad 
tempus refertur, καινός ad rem;’ see Trench ὃ lx.; Tittmann 
i. p. 59 sq.; Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on Mt. ix. 17 (where the 
words occur together). The same distinction, in the main, 
holds in classic usage; cf. Schmidt ii. ch. 47.] 

καινότης, -ητος, 1), (καινός), Newness: ἐν καινότητι πνεύ- 
ματος, in the new state (of life) in which the Holy Spirit 
places us, Ro. vii. 6; ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς in a new condition 
or state of (moral) life, Ro. vi. 4 (εἰς καινότητα ἀϊδίου ζωῆς, 
so as to produce a new state which is eternal life, 
Ignat. ad Eph. 19; among prof. writ. it is used by Thue. 
3, 38; Isoer., Athen., al.; often by Plut., [applied to the 
‘novelties’ of fashion (French nouveauté) }).* 

καίπερ [Treg. καί περ in Heb.; fr. Hom. Od. 7, 224 
down |, conjunc., [originally even very much, οἵ. Donald- 
son ὃ 621; Biumlein p. 200 sq.; Kriiger 8 ὅθ, 13, 2; B. 
§ 144, 23; W. § 45, 2 fin.], although; it is joined to a ptep. 
(in Grk. writ. sometimes also to an adj., so that ὧν must 
be supplied) : Phil. iii. 4; Heb. v. 8; vii. 5; xii. 17; 2 Pet. 
i. 12; contrary to ordinary usage [yet so occasionally in 
Grk. writ.] with a finite verb, καίπερ ἐστίν, Rev. xvii. 8 
Ree. ; but since Grsb. καὶ wapeora [correctly παρέσται 
(see in πάρειμι)] has been restored after the best codd.* 

καιρός, -οῦ, ὁ, (derived by some fr. κάρα or κάρη. τό, the 
head, summit, [al. al.; cf. Vaniéek p. 118]); Sept. for ny 
and 1p); in Grk. writ. [fr. Hes. down] 1. due 
measure ; nowhere so in the bibl. writ. 2. a measure 
of time; a larger or smaller portion of time; hence ae 
univ. a fixed and definite time: Ro. xiii. 11; 2 Co. vi. 2; 
ὕστεροι καιροί, 1 Tim. iv. 1; ἄχρι καιροῦ, up to a certain 
time, for a season, Lk. iv. 13 [but in ἄχρι, 1 b. referred 
apparently to b. below; ef. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 309 sq.]; 
Acts xiii. 11; πρὸς καιρόν, for a certain time only, for a 
season, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; πρὸς καιρὸν Spas, for the 
season of an hour, i. e. for a short season, 1 Th. ii. 17; 
κατὰ καιρόν, at certain seasons, (from time to time), Jn. v. 
4[RGL}]; at the (divinely) appointed time, Ro. v. 6 [al. 
bring this under b.|; before the time appointed, Mt. viii. 
29; 1Co. iv. 5; ἔσται καιρός, ὅτε ete. 2 Tim. iv. 3; ὀλίγον 
καιρὸν ἔχει, a short time (in which to exercise his power) 
has been granted him, Rev. xii. 12; ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ, 
Mt. xi. 25; xii. 1; xiv.1; Eph. ii. 12; κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τ. x., 
Acts xii. 1; xix. 23; κατὰ τ. x. τοῦτον, Ro. ix. 9; ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ 
x. LK. xiii. 1; ἐν ᾧ x. Acts vii. 20; ἐν τῷ νῦν x., Ro. iii. 26; 
xi. 5; 2 Co. viii. 14 (13); ἐν παντὶ x. always, at every 
season, [ Aristot. top. 3, 2,4 p. 117", 35], Lk. xxi. 36; Eph. 
vi. 18; εἰς τίνα καιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 11. with the gen. of a 


318 


καίιρος 


thing, the time of ete. i. 6. at which it will occur: τῆς 
ἐμῆς ἀναλύσεως, 2 Tim. iv. 6; τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς, 1 Pet. v. 6 
Lehm.; Lk. xix. 44; πειρασμοῦ, Lk. viii. 13; τοῦ ἄρξασθαι 
τὸ κρίμα, for judgment to begin, 1 Pet. ἵν. 17 ; καιροὶ τῶν 
λόγων, of the time when they shall be proved by the event, 
Lk. i. 20; — or when a thing usually comes to pass: τοῦ 
θερισμοῦ, Mt. xiii. 30; τῶν καρπῶν, when the fruits ripen, 
Mt. xxi. 84, 41; σύκων, Mk. xi. 13. with the gen. of a 
pers.: καιροὶ ἐθνῶν, the time granted to the Gentiles, 
until God shall take vengeance on them, Lk. xxi. 24; 
ὁ ἑαυτοῦ (T Tr WH αὐτοῦ) x. the time when antichrist 
shall show himself openly, 2 Th. ii. 6; ὁ καιρός μου, the 
time appointed for my death, Mt. xxvi. 18; τῶν νεκρῶν 
κριθῆναι, the time appointed for the dead to be recalled 
to life and judged, Rey. xi. 18 [Β. 260 (224)]; ὁ ἐμός, ὁ 
ὑμέτερος, the time for appearing in public, appointed 
(by God) for me, for you, Jn. vii. 6,8; καιρῷ ἰδίῳ, the 
time suited to the thing under consideration, at its 
proper time, Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi. 15; Tit. 
i.3. 6 καιρός alone, the time when things are brought to a 
crisis, the decisive epoch waited for: so of the time when 
the Messiah will visibly return from heaven, Mk. xiii. 
33; ὁ καιρὸς ἤγγικεν, Lk. xxi. 8; ἐγγύς ἐστιν, Rev. i. 3; 
xxii. 10. b. opportune or seasonable time: with verbs 
suggestive of the idea of advantage, καιρὸν peradap- 
Bavew, Acts xxiv. 25; ἔχειν, Gal. vi. 10 (Plut. Lue. 16) ; 
ἐξαγοράζεσθαι, Eph. v. 16; Col. iv. 5, see ἐξαγοράζω, 2; 
foll. by an inf., opportunity to do something, Heb. xi. 15; 
mapa καιρὸν ἡλικίας, past the opportunity of life [A. V. 
past age), Heb. xi. 11 (simply παρὰ καιρόν, Pind. Ol. 8, 32; 
several times in Plato, ef. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 126). ο. 
the right time: ἐν καιρῷ (often in class. Grk.), in due sea- 
son, Mt. xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 42; xx. 10 RG L [(ed. ster- 
eotyp. only)]; 1 Pet. v.6; also καιρῷ, Lk. xx.10 LT 
Tr WH; τῷ καιρῷ, Mk. xii. 2. d. a (limited) period 
of time: [1 Co. vii. 29]; plur. the periods prescribed by 
God to the nations, and bounded by their rise and fall, 
Acts xvii. 26; καιροί kaprodopor, the seasons of the year 
in which the fruits grow and ripen, Acts xiv. 17 [οἵ. 
Gen. i. 14 Sept.]; καιρὸν καὶ καιροὺς καὶ ἥμισυ καιροῦ, a 
year and two years and six months [A. V. a time, and 
times, and half a time; οἵ. W. § 27, 41, Rev. xii. 14 (cf. 6; 
fr. Dan. vii. 25; xii. 7); stated seasons of the year sol- 
emnly kept by the Jews, and comprising several days, as 
the passover, pentecost, feast of tabernacles, Gal. iv. 10 
[2 Chr. viii. 13; ef. Bar. i. 14]. in the divine arrange- 
ment of time adjusted to the economy of salvation: 6 
καιρὸς (πεπλήρωται), the preappointed period which ace. 
to the purpose of God must elapse before the divine 
kingdom could be founded by Christ, Mk. i. 15; plur., 
the several parts of this period, Eph. i. 10; ὁ καιρὸς ὁ 
ἐνεστώς, the present period, i. q. ὁ αἰὼν οὗτος (see αἰών, 
3), Heb. ix. 9, opp. to καιρὸς διορθώσεως, the time when 
the whole order of things will be reformed (i. q. αἰὼν μέλ- 
λωνῚ, ib. 10; ὁ καιρὸς οὗτος, i. 4. ὁ αἰὼν οὗτος (see αἰών, 
3), Mk. x. 30; Lk. xviii. 30; ὁ νῦν καιῤῥ. Ro. viii. 18; ἐν 
καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ, the last period of the present age, the time 
just before the return of Christ from heaven (see ἔσχατος, 


Kotcao 


1 sub fin., ete.), 1 Pet. 1. ὅ ; καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώ- 
που τοῦ κυρίου, denotes the time from the return of Christ 
on, the times of the consummated divine kingdom, Acts 
iii. 20 (19). e. as often in Grk. writ., and like the 
Lat. tempus, καιρός is equiv. to what time brings, the state 
of the times, the things and events of time: Lk. xii. 56 ; δου- 
λεύειν τῷ καιρῷ, Lat. tempori servire (see δουλεύω, 2 a.), 
Ro. xii. 11 δον"; τὰ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν, i. q. ἃ οἱ καιροὶ 
σημαίνουσι, Mt. xvi. 3 [here T br. WH reject the pass. ]; 
καιροὶ χαλεποί, 2 Tim. iii. 1; χρόνοι ἢ καιροί (times or 
seasons, Germ. Zeitumsidnde), Acts i. 7; οἱ χρόν. καὶ of 
cap. 1 Th. v.1; and in the opp. order, Dan. ii. 21 Sept.; 
Sap. viii. 8.* 

[Syn. καιρός, χρόνος: xp. time, in general; καιρ. a defi- 
nitely limited portion of time, with the added notion of suit- 
ableness. Yet while, on the one hand, its meaning may be 
so sharply marked as to permit such a combination as χρόνου 
καιρός ‘the nick of time,’ on the other, its distinctive sense 
may so far recede as to allow it to be used as nearly equiv. 
to χρόνος ; cf. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 206, 15 sqq. (after 
Ammonius s. v.); p. 215, 10 sqq. καιρός οὐ μόνον ἐπὶ χρόνου 
ἁπλῶς τίθεται, ἀλλὰ Kal ἐπὶ τοῦ ἁρμοδίου καὶ πρέποντος, KTA. ; 
Schmidt ch. 44; Trench § lvii.; Tittmann i. 41 sqq.; Cope 
on Aristot. rhet. 1, 7, 32. “In modern Grk. καιρός means 
weather, χρόνος year. In both words the kernel of meaning 
has remained unaltered; this in the case of καιρ. is change- 
ableness, of xp. duration.” Curtius, Etym. p. 110 54.] 


Καῖσαρ, -apos [Bttm. 16 (15) ], 6, Cesar (prop. the sur- 
name of JuliusCaesar, which being adopted by Octavia- 
nus Augustus and his successors afterwards became an 
appellative, and was appropriated by the Roman empe- 
rors as a part of their title [ef. Dict. of Biogr. and 
Mythol. s. v. Caesar]): Mt. xxii. 17, 21; Mk. xii. 14, 
16 sq.; Lk. ii. 1; iii. 1; xx. 22; xxiii. 2; Jn. xix.12; Acts 
xi. 28 [Rec.]; xvii. 7, etc.; Phil. iv. 22.* 

Καισάρεια [-ia Tdf. (cf. his note on Acts ix. 30), WH; 
see I, ε7, -as, ἡ, Caesarea; there were two cities of this 
name in Palestine: 1. Caesarea Philippi (Καισά- 
peta ἡ Φιλίππου), situated at the foot of Lebanon near 
the sources of the Jordan in Gaulanitis, and formerly 
called Paneas (jv Πανεάδα Φοίνικες προσαγορεύουσιν, Kus. 
h.e. 7,17); but after being rebuilt by Philip the te- 
trarch, it was called by him Caesarea in honor of Tibe- 
rius Caesar (Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.) ; subsequently it 
was called Neronias by Agrippa II., in honor of Nero 
(Joseph. antt. 20, 9,4); now Banids, a village of about 
150 [(?) “about 50” (Bddeker), “some forty” (Mur- 
ray) | houses: Mt. xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 27. 2. Casa- 
rea (more fully Cesarea of Palestine [mod. Kaisariyeh]), 
built near the Mediterranean by Herod the Great on 
the site of Strato’s Tower, between Joppa and Dora. 
It was provided with a magnificent harbor and had con- 
ferred upon it the name of Casarea, in honor of Augus- 
tus. It was the residence of the Roman procurators, 
and the majority of its inhabitants were Greeks (Joseph. 
antt. 13,11, 2; 15, 9,6; 19, 8, 2; b.j. 2,9, 1): Acts viii. 
40; 1x. 30; x. 1, 24; xi. 11; xii. 19; xviii. 22; xxi. 8, 16; 
xxiii 23,33; xxv. 1,4, 6,13. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB. 
DD s.v. Cesarea; Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 486 sqq.; 


319 


κἀκεῖνος 


Overbeck in Schenkel i. p. 499 sq. ; [Schiirer § 23, i. 9; 
and for other reff. cf. Me. and S. s. v.].* 

καίτοι, (fr. καί and roi), conjunction, with a ptep. [but 
in class. Grk. with a finite verb also (as in Acts below) ; 
Kriiger § ὅθ, 13, 2; cf. reff. s. v. καίπερ], and yet, al- 
though: Heb. iv. 3 (although the work of creation had 
been finished long ago, so that the rest spoken of cannot 
be understood to be that of God himself resting from 
that work [ef. Kurtz in loc.]); [Acts xiv. 17 LT Tr WH 
(but Tr καί ror) ].* 

καίτοιγε, see γέ, 3 f. 

[Katdas, see Καϊάφας. 

καίω [ Vanitek p. 98]; Pass., pres. καίομαι ; pf. ptep. κε- 
kavpévos; 1 fut. καυθήσομαι (1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf., where R 
GLTr give the solecistie fut. subjunc. καυθήσωμαι, on 
which ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 720 sq-; W. § 13,1e.; B. 
35 sq. (31)); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p.40; WH. App. p. 172; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122. WH txt. Lchm. ed. ster. read καυ- 
χήσωμαι (with ® A B ete.) ; on this reading see WH. App. 
ad loc.; A. W. Tyler in Bib. Sacr. for July 1873, p. 502 
sq-; ef. Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 629 sq.; Tregelles, 
Printed Text ete. p. 191 sq.; Tdf. ad loc.]; Sept. for 
73, 4) ete. ; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to set jire to, 
light: λύχνον, Mt. v.15; pass. ptep. καιόμενος, burning, 
Lk. xii. 35; Rev. iv. 5; viii. 10; xix. 20; with πυρί added, 
Heb. xii. 18; Rev. viii. 8; xxi. 8; in fig. dise. λύχνος καιό- 
pevos, a light showing the right way, Jn. v. 35 (a com- 
parison pointed at the Jews, to whom John the Bap- 
tist had been as a torch lighted for a merry-making) ; 
metaph. 4 καρδία ἢν καιομένη was glowing, burning, i. e. 
was greatly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32 [W. § 45, 5; B. § 144, 
281. 2. to burn, consume with fire: pass., Jn. xv. 6; 
1 Co. xiii. 3 [see above]; with πυρί added (ef. igni cre- 
mare, Caes. b. g. 1, 4), Mt. xiii. 40 G Tr for RL TWH 
κατακαίεται. [COMP.: ék-, κατα-καίω.] * 

κἀκεῖ [Grsb. κἀκεῖ ; cf. κἀγώ and reff.], (by crasis fr. καί 
and ἐκεῖ [cf. W. § 5,3; B. p. 10; esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 
96]); 1. and there: Mt. v. 23 [Trmrg. καὶ ἐκεῖ]; 
x. 11; xxviii. 10 [Tdf. καὶ ἐκεῖ]; Mk. i. 35 (Lehm. καὶ 
ἐκεῖ) ; Jn. xi. 54; Acts xiv. 7; xxii. 10; xxv. 20; XXVil. 
6. 2. there also: Mk. i. 38 (G WH καὶ ἐκεῖ); Acts 
Xvil. 13.* 

κἀκεῖθεν [Grsb. κἀκ- ; see κἀγώ and reff.], (by erasis fr. 
καί and ἐκεῖθεν [cf. W. § 5, 3; B. 10; esp. Tdf. Proles. 
96 sq.]) ; Lat. et inde ; a. of place, and from thence, 
and thence: Mk. ix. 30 (RG καὶ ἐκεῖθεν); x. 1 [LT Tr 
WH καὶ ἐκ.; Lk. xi.53 T Trtxt. WH]; Acts vii.4; xiv. 
26; xvi. 12 [ἐκεῖθέν τι RG]; xx.15; xxi.1; xxvii. 4, 12 
[LT Tr WH ἐκεῖθεν]; xxviii. 15. b. of time, and 
thereafter, and afterward [cf. Bornem. Scholia in Lue. p. 
90 sq.]: Acts xiii. 21.* 

κἀκεῖνος [Grsb. κἀκ- ; see κἀγώ and reff.], -είνη, -civo, 
(by erasis fr. καί and ἐκεῖνος [cf. W. § 5, 3; esp. Taf. 
Proleg. p. 97]) 5 1. ἐκεῖνος referring to the more 
remote subject; a. and he (Lat. et ille): Lk. xi. 7; 
xxii. 12; Acts xviii. 19; ταῦτα .. . κἀκεῖνα [A. V. the 
other], Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. b. he also: Acts xv. 
11; Ro. xi. 23 [Rec.* καὶ éx.]; 1 Co. x. 6. 2. ἐκεῖνοι 


κωκία 3 


referring to the nearer subject [cf. ἐκεῖνος, 1 6.7; a. 
and he (Lat. et is, Germ. und selbiger): Mt. xv. 18; Jn. 
vii. 29; xix. 35 [L Tr WH καὶ ek. ]. b. he also (Germ. 
auch selbiger): Mt. xx. 4 [T WH καὶ éx.]; Mk. xii. 4 sq.; 
xvi. 11,13; Lk. xxii. 12; Jn. xiv. 12; xvii. 24. 

κακία, -as, ἡ, (kaxds), [fr. Theognis down], Sept. chiefly 
for }9, and ΠΡ; 1. malignity, malice, ill-will, de- 
sire toinjure: Ro.i. 29; Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Tit. iii. 
$; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. ii. 1. 2. wickedness, depravity: 
1 Co. v. 8 [ef. W. 120 (114)]; xiv. 20; Acts viii. 22 (ef. 
21); wickedness that is not ashamed to break the laws, 
1 Pet. ii. 16. 3. Hellenistically, evil, trouble: Mt. 
vi. 34 (as Amos iii. 6; [1 S. vi. 9]; Eccl. vii. 15 (14); xii. 
1; Sir. xix. 6; 1 Mace. vii. 23, ete.).* 

[Syn. κακία, πονηρία: associated Ro. i. 29; 1 Co. v. 8. 
Ace. to Trench, Syn. ὃ xi., endorsed by Ellic. (on Eph. iv. 31) 
and Bp. Lghtft. (on Col. iii. 8), κακία denotes rather the vi- 
cious disposition, πονηρία the active exercise of the same; cf. 
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 28 εἰ μὲν αὐτὸς (i.e. Σωκράτης) ἐποίει τι φαῦλον, 
εἰκότως ἂν ἐδόκει πονηρὸς εἶναι" εἰ δ᾽ αὐτὸς σωφρονῶν διετέλει, 
πῶς ἂν δικαίως τῆς οὐκ ἐνούσης αὐτῷ κακίας αἰτίαν ἔχοι; But 
Fritzsche, Mever (on Ro. 1. c.; yet οἵ. Weiss in ed. 6), al. dis- 
sent, —seeming nearly to reverse this distinction; cf. Suidas 
8. V. κακία: ἔστιν ἣ τοῦ κακῶσαι τὸν πέλας σπουδή, παρὰ τῷ 
ἀποστόλῳ; see πονηρός, 2 b.] 


κακοήθεια [-θία WH; see I, ], -as, 9, (fr. κακοήθης, and 
this fr. κακός and ἦθος), bad character, depravity of heart 
and life, Xen., Plat., Isocr., al.; 4 Mace. i. 4, where ef. 
Grimm p. 299; spec. used of malignant subtlety, malicious 
craftiness: Ro. i. 29 (3 Mace. iii. 22; Add. to Esth. viii. 
1. 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35, 5; Joseph. antt. 1,1, 4; 16, 
3,1; [e. Ap. 1, 24,4]; Polyb. δ, 50, 5, ete.). On the 
other hand, Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, [3 p. 81] defines it τὸ ἐπὶ 
τὸ χεῖρον ὑπολαμβάνειν πάντα, [taking all things in the evil 
part, Genevan N. T. Cf. Trench § xi.].* 

κακολογέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. κακολογῆσαι; (Kaxoddyos) ; 
i. q. κακῶς λέγω (which the old grammarians prefer, see 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 200) ; 1. to speak ill of, revile, 
abuse, one; to calumniate, traduce: τινά, Mk. ix. 39; τί, 
Acts xix. 9; (2 Mace. iv. 1; Lys., Plut., al.). 2) 
Hellenistically, /o imprecate evil on, curse: twa, Mt. xv. 
4; Mk. vii. 10, (so for op, Prov. xx. 20; Ezek. xxii. 7; 
Ex. xxii. 28).* 

κακοπάθεια [-θία WH; see I, ε7, -as, 7, (κακοπαθής suffer- 
ing evil, afflicted), prop. the suffering of evil, i. e. trouble, 
distress, affliction: Jas. v.10 (Mal.i.13; 2 Mace. ii. 26 
sq-; [Antipho]; Thue. 7, 77; Isoer., Polyb., Diod., al.).* 

κακοπαθέω, -@; 1 aor. impv. 2 sing. κακοπάθησον; (κα- 
xomabns); to suffer (endure) evils (hardship, troubles); to 
be afflicted: 2 Tim. ii. 9; Jas. v.13 [W. § 41 a. 3 fin.; cf. 
§60,4c¢.; B.§ 139, 28], (Sept. Jon. iv. 10; Xen., Plut., 
al.); used freq. of the hardships of military service 
(Thue. 4, 9; Polyb. 8, 72,5; Joseph. antt. 10, 11,1; b. if 
1, 7,4); hence elegantly κακοπάθησον (1, Τ Tr WH ovy- 
ΓΤ WH συν- (q. v. fin.) ] κακοπάθησονῚ) ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης, 
2 Tim. ii. 8; ib. iv.5. [Comp.: συγ-κακοπαθέω.} " 

κακο-ποιέω, -@ ; 1 aor. inf. κακοποιησαι; (κακοποιός); 1. 
to ao harm: ΜΕ. iii. 4; Lk. vi. 9. 2. to do evil, do 


0 κακοω 


wrong: 1 Pet.iii.17; 8 ὅπ.11. ([Aeschyl., Arstph., 
Xen., Polyb., Antonin., Plut.; Sept.) * 

κακοποιός, -dv, (κακόν and ποιέω), doing evil; subst. an 
evil-doer, malefactor: Jn. xviii. 30 [but Lmrg. T Tr WH 
κακὸν ποιῶν}; 1 Pet. ii. 12, 14; iii. 16 [T Tr mrg. WII om. 
the cl.]; iv. 15. (Prov. xii. 4; Pind., Aristot., Polyb., 
Plut.) * 

κακός, -ἤ, τόν, Sept. for 9, [fr. Hom. down], bad, [A.V. 
(almost uniformly) evil]; 1. univ. of a bad nature; 
not such as it ought to be. 2. [morally, i. e.] of a 
mode of thinking, feeling, acting; base, wrong, wicked: 
of persons, Mt. xxi. 41 [cf. W. 637 (592); also B. 143 
(126)]; xxiv. 48; Phil. iii. 2; Rev.ii.2. διαλογισμοί, Mk. 
Vii. 21 ; ὁμιλίαι, 1 Co. xv. 88 ; ἐπιθυμία, Col. iii. 5 (Prov. 
xii. 12); ἔργα [better ἔργον], Ro. xiii. 3. neut. κακόν, τὸ 
κακόν, evil i. 6. what is contrary to law, either divine or 
human, wrong, crime: [Jn. xviii. 23]; Acts xxiii. 9; Ro. 
vii. 21; xiv. 20; xvi. 19; 1 Co. xiii.5; Heb. v. 14; 1 Pet. 
iii. 10 sq.; 3 Jn. 113 plur. [evil things]: Ro.i. 30; 1Co. 
x. 6; 1 Tim. vi. 10 [πάντα τὰ κακά all kinds of evil}; Jas. 
i. 13 [W. § 30, 4; B. § 132, 24]; κακὸν ποιεῖν, to do, com- 
mit evil: Mt. xxvii. 23; Mk. xv. 14; Lk. xxiii. 22; 2 Co. 
xiii. 7; 1 Pet. ili. 12; τὸ κακόν, Ro. xiii. 4 ; τὰ κακά, iii. 8; 
κακόν, τὸ κακὸν πράσσειν, Ro. vii. 19; ix. 11. [Ree.]; xiii. 
4; [2Co.v.10 RG LTrmrg.]; τὸ κακὸν κατεργάζεσθαι, 
Ro. ii. 9. spec. of wrongs inflicted: Ro. xii. 21; κακὸν 
ἐργάζομαί τινι [to work ill to one), Ro. xiii. 10; évdetxvupe, 
2 Tim. iv. 14; ποιῶ, Acts ix.13; ἀποδίδωμι κακὸν ἀντὶ Ka- 
κοῦ Ro..xii. 17; 1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. 3. trouble- 
some, injurious, pernicious, destructive, baneful: neut. 
κακόν, an evil, that which injures, Jas. iii. 8 [W. § 59, 8b.; 
B. 79 (69) ]; with the suggestion of wildness and ferocity, 
θηρία, Tit. i. 12; substantially i. q. bad, i. 6. distressing, 
whether to mind or to body : ἕλκος κακὸν x. πονηρόν [ A.V. 
a noisome and grievous sore], Rev. xvi. 2; κακὸν πράσσω 
ἐμαυτῷ, Lat. vim mihi infero, to do harm to one’s selj, Acts 
xvi. 28; κακόν τι πάσχω, to suffer some harm, Acts xxviii. 
δ; τὰ κακά, evil things, the discomforts which plague one, 
Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to ra ἀγαθά, the good things, from which 
pleasure is derived). [Sywn. cf. κακία.] " 

κακοῦργος, -ov, (contr. from κακόεργος, fr. κακὸν and 
ἘΡΓῺ ; cf. πανοῦργος, and on the accent of both see 
Gottling, Lehre ν. Accent, p. 321; [Chandler ὃ 445]), as 
subst. a malcfactor: 2 Tim. ii. 9; of a robber, Lk. xxiii. 
32 sq. [ef. W. 530 (493); B.§150, 3], 39. (Prov. xxi. 15; 
in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down.) * 

κακουχέω, -@: (fr. obsol. κακοῦχος, fr. κακόν and ἔχω) ; 
to treat ill, oppress, plague: τινά ; pres. pass. ptep. κακου- 
χούμενοι, maltreated, tormented, Heb. xi. 37; xiii. 3. (1 
K. ii. 26; xi. 39 Alex.; Diod. 3, 23; 19,11; Dio C. 35 
(36), 9 (11); Plut. mor. p. 114e.) [Comp.: συγ-κακου- 
χέω.} 

κακόω, -@: fut. κακώσω; 1 aor. ἐκάκωσα; (κακός); 1. 
to oppress, afflict, harm, maltreat: τινά, Acts vii. 6, 19; xii. 
1; xviii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 13, (Ex. v. 22; xxiii.9 Alex.; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. by a usage foreign 
to the classics, to embitter (Vulg. ad iracundiam concuo\; 
render evil affected, (Ps. cv. (cvi.) 32; Joseph. antt. 16, 


κακως 


1, 2; 7,3; 8, 6): τὴν ψυχήν τινος κατά τινος, against one, 
Acts xiv. 2." 

κακῶς, (κακός), adv., [fr. Hom. down], badly, ill,i.e. a. 
[in a physical sense] miserably: ἔχειν, to be ill, sick [see 
ἔχω, 11. a.], Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16; ix. 12; xiv. 35; [xvii. 15 
LTrtxt. WH txt.]; Mk. [i. 32, 34]; ii. 17; [vi. 55]; 
Lk. v. 31; vii. 2, ete.; πάσχειν, Mt. xvii. 15 [RGT Tr 
mre. WH mrg.]; δαιμονίζεσθαι, Mt. xv. 22; κακοὺς κακῶς 
ἀπολέσει, Mt. xxi. 41, on this combination of words with 
verbs of destroying, perishing, ete., which is freq. in Grk. 
writ. also, cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; W. § 68, 1. b. [mor- 
ally] improperly, wrongly: In. xviii. 23 ; κακῶς εἰπεῖν Twa, 
to speak ill of, revile, one, Acts xxiil. 5; with bad in- 
tent, αἰτεῖσθαι. Jas. iv. 3.* 

κάκωσις, -εως, 9, (κακόω), ill-treatment, ill-usage, (Vulg. 
afflictio): Acts vii. 34. (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 19; Ex. iit 7, 
17; Job xxxi. 29 [Symm.]; Thuc., Xen., Plut., al.) * 

καλάμη, -ης, 9, α stalk of grain or of a reed, the stalk 
(left after the ears are cut off), stubble: 1 Co. iii. 12. 
(Ex. v. 12; xv. 7; Is. xvii. 6; Hom. et sqq-)* 

κάλαμος, -ov, 6, fr. Pind. down, Lat. calamusi.e. a.a 
reed: Mt. xi. 7; xii. 20 (fr. Is. xlii. 3) ; Lk. vii. 24. b. 
a staff made of a reed, a reed-staff, (as in 2 K. xviii. 21): 
Mt. xxvii. 29 sq. 48; Mk. xv. 19, 36. c. a measuring 
reed or rod: Rey. xi. 1; xxi. 15 sq., (Ezek. xl. 3-6; xlii. 
16-19). ἃ. a writer’s reed, a pen: 3 Jn. 13; [see 
Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 71 sq. ].* 

καλέω, -@; impf. ἐκάλουν; fut. καλέσω (W. § 13, 3c.); 
1 aor. ἐκάλεσα; pi. κέκληκα; Pass., pres. καλοῦμαι; pf. 
3 pers. sing. κέκληται (1 Co. vii. 18 LT Tr WH; [Rev. 
xix. 13 L T Tr WH)), ptep. κεκλημένος ; 1 aor. ἐκλήθην ; 
1 fut. κληθήσομαι ; [fr. Hom. down]; Hebr. xp; Lat. 
voco; i. e. 1. to call (Germ. rufen τὰ βοάω, 
fin.]) ; a. to call aloud, utter in a loud voice: ἄχρις οὗ 
τὸ σήμερον καλεῖται, as long as the word ‘to-day’ is called 
out or proclaimed, Heb. iii. 13; τινά, to call one to ap- 
proach or stand before one, Mt. xx. 8; xxii. 3 (where 
εἰς τοὺς γάμους seems to belong to τοὺς κεκλημένους) : Mt. 
xxv. 14; [Mk. iii. 31 LT Tr WH]; Lk. xix. 13; τὰ ἴδια 
πρόβατα κατ᾽ ὄνομα, his own sheep each by its name, Jn. 
x. 3 (where LT Tr WH φωνεῖ); used of Christ, calling 
certain persons to be his disciples and constant compan- 
ions, Mt. iv. 21 (note what precedes in 19: δεῦτε ὀπίσω 
pov); Mk. i. 20; to order one to be summoned, Mt. ii. 15 
[see just below]; before the judges, Acts iv. 18; xxiv. 
2; foll. by ἐκ with gen. of place, i. q. fo call out, call forth 
from: Mt. ii. 15, ef. Heb. xi. 8. metaph. to cause to pass 
Jrom one state into another: τινὰ ἐκ σκότους εἰς τὸ φῶς, 
1 Pet. 11. 9. b. like the Lat. voco i. q. to invite; α. 
prop.: eis τοὺς γάμους, Mt. xxii. 3,9; Lk. xiv. 8 sq.; Jn. 
ii. 2; to a feast, Lk. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 27 [cf. W. 593 
(552)]; Rev. xix. 9; ὁ καλέσας. Lk. vii. 39; xiv. 9; ὁ 
κεκληκώς τινα. ibid 10,12; of κεκλημένοι, Mt. xxii. 8; Lk. 
xiv. 7,17, 24; (2 Sam. xiii. 23; Esth. v.12; and often 
so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 4,532; 11,187down). 8. 
metaph.: to invite one, eis τι, to something i. 6. to par- 
ticipate in it, enjoy it; used thus in the Epp. of Paul 
and Peter of God as inviting men by the preaching of 


321 


καλεέεω 


the gospel (διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, 2 Th. ii. 14) to the pless- 
ings of the heavenly kingdom: εἰς τὴν "ασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, 
1 Th. ii. 12; εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, 1 Tim. vi. 12; εἰς δόξαν 
αἰώνιον; 1 Pet. v.10; εἰς τὴν κοινωνίαν τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ. 1 Co. 
1. 9; so καλεῖν τινα used alone: Ro. viii. 30; ix. 24 sq.; 
1 Co. vii. 17 sq. 20-22, 24; τινὰ καλεῖν κλήσει, 2 Tim. i. 9; 
ἐν & ἐκλήθημεν, in whom lies the reason why we were 
called, who is the ground of our having been invited, 
Eph. i. 11 Lehm.; ἄξιος τῆς κλήσεως, ἧς (by attraction 
for ἧ [or perh. ἥν; cf. W. § 24,1; B. 287 (247); Elli- 
cott in loc.]) ἐκλήθητε, Eph. iv. 1; God is styled ὁ καλῶν 
τινα (he that calleth one, the caller, ef. W. § 45, 7), Gal. 
y.8; 1 Th. v. 24; and 6 καλέσας twa, Gal.i.6, Col. i. 12 
Lchm.; 1 Pet. i.15; 2 Pet.i.3. οἱ κεκλημένοι, Heb. ix. 
15; καλεῖν and καλεῖσθαι are used with a specification of 
the mediate end (for the highest or final end of the call- 
ing is eternal salvation): ἐπ᾿ ἐλευθερίᾳ, Gal. ν. 133 οὐκ 
ἐπ᾿ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ, 1 Th. iv. 7; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 1 Co. 
vii. 15; ἐν ἑνὶ ἐλπίδι, that ye might come into one hope, 
Eph. iv. 4 (see ἐν, I. 7 [yet οἵ. W. 417 (389); B. 329 
(283); esp. Ellicott in loc.], and ἐπί, B. 2 ἃ. ¢.); εἰς εἰρή- 
νην τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, that ye may be in one 
body i. e. be members of one and the same body, Col. iii. 
15; εἰς τοῦτο (which refers to what precedes) foll. by 
ἵνα, 1 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 9; (but everywhere in the N. T. 
Epp. only those are spoken of as called by God who have 
listened to his voice addressed to them in the gospel, 
hence those who have enlisted in the service of Christ — 
see Ro. viii. 30 and Riickert’s Com. in loc. p. 464. cf. 1 
Co. i. 24; those who have slighted the invitation are not 
reckoned among the called); Christ also is said καλεῖν 
τινα, sc. to embrace the offer of salvation by the Messiah, 
in Mt. ix.13 and Mk. ii. 17 (in both which pass. Ree. 
adds εἰς μετάνοιαν). God is said to call those who are 
not yet born, viz. by promises of salvation which have 
respect to them, so that καλεῖν is for substance equiv. to 
to appoint one to salvation, Ro. ix. 12 (11); καλοῦντος τὰ 
μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα, Ro. iv. 17, where ef. Fritzsche, [al. al., 
cf. Meyer (esp. ed. Weiss) ad loe.}. to call (1. q. to select) 
to assume some office, τινά, of God appointing or commit- 
ting an office to one, (Germ. berufen): Gal.i.15; Heb. 
y. 4, (Is. xlii. 6; xlix.1; 11. 2). to invite i. q. to rouse, 
summon: to do something, εἰς μετάνοιαν, Lk. v. 32, added 
in Ree. also in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17. 2. to call 
i. e. to name, call by name; a. to give a name to; with 
two acc., one of the object the other of the name as a 
predicate [to call one (by) a name: Mt. x. 25 Rec. ; cf. 
W. § 32, 4b.; B. 151 (132) note]; pass. w. the nom. of 
the name, to receive the name of, receive as a name: Mt. 
ii. 23; xxvii. 8; Lk. i. 32, 60, 62; ii. 4, ete.; καλούμενος. 
called, whose name or surname is, Lk. vii. 11; ἸσΣ- ἘΠ. Se 
89: Acts vii. 58; xxvii. 8,16; 6 καλούμενος [on its posi- 
tion cf. B. § 144, 19]: Lk. vi. 15; viii. 2; [xxii 3 T Tr 
WH); xxiii. 33; Actsi. 23; x. 1; xiii. 1; [xv. 22 LT 
Tr WH); xxvii. 14; Rev. xii. 9; xvi. 16; with ὀνόματι 
added, Lk. xix. 2; καλεῖσθαι ὀνόματί τινι, to be called 
by a name, Lk. i. 61; καλεῖν τινα ἐπὶ TO ὀνόματί τινος. 
Lk. i. 59 (see ἐπί, B. 2 ἃ. n. p. 233”); after the Hebr. δ Ρ 


καλλιέλαιος 


ἡ τ Γι, καλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος, with the name in the ace., 
to give some name to one, call his name: Mt. i. 21, 23, 25; 
Lk. i. 13, 31; pass., Lk. ii. 21; Rev. xix. 13; Gen. xvii. 
19; 1S. i. 20, ete. (similarly sometimes in Grk. writ., ef. 
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 45 [B. 151 (132)]). b. Pass. 
καλοῦμαι with predicate nom. to be called i. 6. to bear a 
name or title (among men) [ef. W. § 65, 8]: Lk. 1. 35; 
xxii. 25; Acts viii. 10 [Rec. om. Kad.]; 1 Co. xv. 9; to be 
said to be (i. q. to be acknowledged, pass as, the nomina- 
tive expressing the judgment passed on one): Mt. v. 9, 
951k. 1. 32,85, 76; 11. 29; xv. 19; Ro.ix. 26; Jas. i. 
23; opp. to εἶναι, 1 Jn. iii. 1 LT Tr WH; Hebraistically 
(Gen. xxi. 12) ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα, through 
[better in, cf. ἐν, I. 6 c. and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad Ro. 1. 
c.] Isaac shall a seed be called for thee, i. 6. Isaac (not 
Ishmael) is the one whose posterity shall obtain the name 
and honor of thy descendants, Ro. ix. 7 and Heb. xi. 
18. ο. καλῶ τινα, with an ace. of the predicate or a 
title of honor, to salute one by a name: Mt. xxiii. 9; 
Pass., ib. 7 sq. 10; Rev. xix. 11 [but Tr mrg. WH br. x. ]; 
to give a name to one and mention him at the same time, 
Mt. xxii. 43, 45; Lk. xx. 44. [Comp.: ἀντι-, év, εἰσ- 
(μαι), émt-, μετα-, παρα-, συν-παρα-, Tpo-, προσ-, συγ-καλέω.] 

καλλι-έλαιος, -ov, ἡ, (fr. κάλλος and ἐλαία), the garden 
olive, [A. V. good olive tree], (opp. to ἀγριέλαιος the wild 
olive): Ro. xi. 24, Aristot. de plant. 1, 6 p. 820°, 40." 

καλλίων, see καλός, fin. 

καλο-διδάσκαλος, -ov, ὁ, ἡ, (διδάσκαλος and καλόν, cf. 
ἱεροδιδάσκαλος, νομοδιδάσκαλος, χοροδιδάσκαλος, teaching 
that which is good, a teacher of goodness: Tit. ii. 3. Νο- 
where else.* 

καλοὶ λιμένες (καλός and λιμήν), Fair Havens (Germ. 
Schinhafen; Luth. Gutfurt), a bay of Crete, near the 
city Laswa; so called because offering good anchorage; 
now Limenes kali [BB.DD.]: Acts xxvii. 8.* 

καλο-ποιέω, -; (i. q. καλῶς ποιῶ, οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
199 sq. [W. 25]); to do well, act uprightly: 2 ΤᾺ. iii. 13. 
(Etym. Magn. 189, 24; [Lev. v. 4 Ald. (as quoted in) 
Philo de somn. 1]. ii. § 44].) * 

καλός, -7, -dv, [ prob. primarily ‘ sound,’ ‘ hale,’ ‘ whole ;’ 
ef. Vaniéek p. 140 sq. ; Curtius § 51], Sept. for 75° beau- 
tiful, but much oftener for 3)0 good; beautiful, applied 
by the Greeks to everything so distinguished in form, ex- 
cellence, goodness, usefulness, as to be pleasing; hence 
(ace. to the context) i. q. beautiful, handsome, excellent, 
eminent, choice, surpassing, precious, useful, suitable, com- 
mendable, admirable ; a. beautiful to look at, shapely, 
magnificent: λίθοις καλοῖς κεκόσμηται [A. V. goodly], Lk. 
xxi. 5. b. good, excellent in its nature and character- 
istics, and therefore well-adapted to its ends: joined to the 
names of material objects, univ. 1 Tim. iv. 4 (i. 4. pure) ; 
esp. of things so constituted as to answer the purpose for 
which that class of things was created; good of its kind: 
τὰ καλά, of fish, opp. to such as are thrown away (τὰ 
σαπρά), Mt. xiii. 48; σπέρμα, Mt. xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq.; 
καρπός, Mt. iii. 10; vii. 17-19; xii. 33; Lk. iii. 9 [L WH 
br. kad.]; vi. 43; δένδρον, opp. to σαπρόν, Mt. xii. 33; 
Lk. vi. 43; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 8, 23; Mk. iv. 8,20; Lk. viii. 15; 


822 


κάλυμμο 


καλὸν τὸ ἅλας (is an excellent thing), Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 
34; so too ὁ νόμος, good in its substance and nature, and 
fitted to beget good, Ro. vii. 16; 1 Tim.i.8; διδασκαλία, 
true and approved teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 6; καρδία καλὴ κ. 
ἀγαθή, Lk. viii. 15; παραθήκη [q. v.] (containing [rather, 
consisting of] καλά), 2 ‘lim. i. 14; μέτρον, ample meas- 
ure (rabbin. 7310 75D; Eng. good measure), Lk. vi. 38; 
βαθμός (firm [but see βαθμός ]), 1 Tim. iii. 13; also θεμέ- 
duos, 1 Tim. vi. 19; i. q. genuine, approved, πάντα δοκιμά- 
ere, τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε, 1 Th. v. 21; 1. 4: precious [A.V. 
goodly}, papyapira, Mt. xiii. 45; i. q. superior to other 
kinds, οἶνος, Jn. ii. 10; joined to names of men desig- 
nated by their oflice, competent, able, such as one ought to 
be: ποιμήν, Jn. x. 11,14; διάκονος, 1 Tim. iv. 6; οἰκονόμος, 
1 Pet. iv. 10; στρατιώτης, 2 Tim. ii. 3; joined to nouns 
denoting an effect estimated by the power it involves, 
or by its constancy, or by the end aimed at by its author, 
i. q. praiseworthy, noble: στρατεία, 1 Tim. i. 18; ἀγών, 1 
Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7; ὁμολογία, 1 Tim. vi. 12 sq.; 
ἔργον, Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Jn. x.33; 1 Tim. iii. 1; 
plur. Jn. x. 32. καλόν ἐστιν, it is expedient, profitable, 
wholesome: foll. by an inf. as subject, 1 Co. vii. 1; w. τινί 
added [so in 1 Co. 1. 6. also], Mt. xviii. 8 sq. [ef. W. 241 
(226); B. § 149, 7]; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, RG [also L Tr 
mrg.in 47]; 1 Co. vii. 26; ix. 15; x. ἐστιν foll. by the ace. 
and inf., Mk. ix. 48, 45, 47, L (but see above) T Tr (but 
not mrg., see above) WH; Heb. xiii. 9; foll. by εἰ [ef. 
B. 217 (187 sq.); W. 282 (265) ], Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. ix. 
42; xiv. 21; foll. by ἐάν [B. and W. τι. s.], 1 Co. vii. 8; 
it is pleasant, delightful, foll. by ace. with inf.: Mt. 
xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix. 33. c. beautiful by rea- 
son of purity of heart and life, and hence praiseworthy ; 
morally good, noble, (Lat. honestus ; [οἵ. Aristot. τὸ καθ᾽ 
αὑτὸ Kadov]): διάκρισις καλοῦ τε καὶ κακοῦ, Heb. v. 14; 
ἔργα, Mt.v.16; 1 Tim. ν. 10,25; νἱ. 18; Tit. ii. 7,14; iii. 
8,14; Heb. x. 24; 1 Pet. ii. 12, and Lehm. in 2 Pet. i. 10; 
ἀναστροφή, Jas. iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 12; καλὴ συνείδησις, con- 
sciousness of good deeds, [ A.V. a good conscience], Heb. 
xiii. 18; καλά, καλὸν ἐνώπιόν τινος, in one’s judgment, Ro. 
xii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 21; 1 Tim. ii. 3 and Ree. in v. 4; ζηλοῦ- 
σθαι ἐν καλῷ, Gal. iv. 18; τὸ καλὸν κατεργάζεσθαι, Ro. vii. 
18 ; ποιεῖν, ib. 21; 2 Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas. ἵν. 17; καλόν 
ἐστιν, it is right, proper, becoming, foll. by an inf.: Mt. xv. 
26 (1, Τ ἔξεστιν) ; [Mk. vii. 27]; Gal. iv. 18 [here Tr mrg. 
impv.]; Ro. xiv. 21. d. honorable, conferring honor: 
μαρτυρία, 1 Tim. iii. 7; ὄνομα, Jas. ii. 7; οὐ καλὸν τὸ καύ- 
χημα ὑμῶν, 1 Co. v. 6. e. affecting the mind agreeably, 
comforting and confirming : θεοῦ ῥῆμα (Sept. for 330 35, 
which is spoken of the divine promises, Josh. xxi. 45; 
Zech. i. 13), the gospel and its promises full of consola- 
tion, Heb. vi. 5. Compar. καλλίων, -ov, better: neut. 
adverbially, σὺ κάλλιον ἐπιγινώσκεις, i. 6. better than by 
thy question thou seemest to know, Acts xxv. 10 [W. 242 
(227)]. The word is not found in the Apocalypse. [Cf. 
Trench § evi. fin.; Zezschwitz, Profangricitit u. s.w. p. 
60 sq. (cf. ἀγαθός, fin.); Westcott on Jn. x. 11.]* 
κάλυμμα, -τος, τὸ, (καλύπτω), α veil, a covering: 2 Co. iii. 
13 (Ex. xxxiv. 33); [κάλυμμα, or its equiv., is suggested 


καλύπτω 


to the reader by the context in 1 Co. xi. 4 κατὰ κεφαλῆς 
ἔχων; see ἔχω, I. 1 b.]; metaph., 2 Co. iii. 14-16, of that 
which prevents a thing from being understood. (Hom., 
Tragg., Arstph., al.; Sept.)* 

καλύπτω ; fut. καλύψω; 1 aor. ἐκάλυψα ; Pass., pres. inf. 
καλύπτεσθαι ; pf. ptep. κεκαλυμμένος ; [allied with κρύπτω ; 
Vanitek p. 1091; Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 242;] Sept. 
for 7D}; often in Hom., Tragg. and other poets, more 
rarely in prose; fo cover, cover up; prop.: τινά, Lk. xxiii. 
30; τί τινι, a thing with anything, Lk. viii. 16; pass. Mt. 
vill. 24; trop. to hide, veil, i. 6. to hinder the knowledge 
of a thing: pf. pass., Mt. x. 26; 2Co.iv. 3; πλῆθος duap- 
τιῶν, not to regard or impute them, i. e. to pardon them, 
1 Pet. iv. 8; to procure pardon of them from God, Jas. 
v. 20; cf. Ps. Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 3 (2); xxxi. (xxxii.) 1 sq. 
[Comp.: ava-, dro-, émt-, κατα-, Tapa-, περι-; συγικαλύπτω. | * 

καλῶς, (καλός), adv., [fr. Hom. down], beautifully, fine- 
ly, excellently, well: (univ. διὰ τὸ καλῶς οἰκοδομῆσθαι 
(Tr -μεῖσθαι, q. v-), Lk. vi. 48 T Tr WH]; spec. a. 
rightly, so that there shall be no room for blame: joined to 
verbs of speaking (ἀποκρίνεσθαι, λαλεῖν, λέγειν, προφη- 
τεύειν, ete.), well, truly, Mt. xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. xx. 39; 
Jn.iv.17; viii. 48; xiii. 13; [xviii. 23]; Acts xxviii. 25; 
jitly, i. e. agreeably to the facts and words of the case, 
Mk. xii. 28; καλῶς right! well! an expression of approy- 
al: Mk. xii. 32; Ro. xi. 20; of deeds: k. ποιεῖν, to do 
well, act uprightly, Jas. ii. 19; 1 Co. vii. 37 sq. (where the 
teaching is, that one can do καλῶς, but another κρεῖσσον) ; 
καλῶς ποιεῖν with ptep. to do well that, ete. [B. § 144, 15 a.; 
W. 345 (323) ], Acts x. 33; Phil.iv.14; 2 Pet.i.19; 3 
Jn. 6, (1 Mace. xii. 18, 22; 2 Mace. ii. 16, ete.); with 
verbs denoting a duty or office which one fulfils weil: 
1 Tim. 111. 4,12 sq.; v. 17; spec. honestly, uprightly: 
Gal. iv. 17; ἀναστρέφεσθαι, Heb. xiii. 18; ποιεῖν, Jas. ii. 
8. b. excellently, nobly, commendably : 1 Co. xiv. 17; 
Gal. v. 7; καλῶς πάντα πεποίηκε, Mk. vii. 37; with bitter 
irony, Mk. vii. 9 (where cf. Fritzsche p. 271 sq.); 2 Co. 
xi. 4. ce. honorably, in honor: Jas. ii. 3 [al. give it 
here an outward reference, i. q. in a good place, comfort- 
ably]. ἃ. καλῶς εἰπεῖν twa, to speak well of one, Lk. 
vi. 26; «. ποιεῖν τινα, to do good to, benefit one, Mt. v. 44 
Rec.; τινί [W.§ 32,1 8.; B. 146 (128)], Lk. vi. 27; καλῶς 
ποιεῖν, simply, to do good: Mt. xii. 12. 6. καλῶς ἔχειν, 
to be well (of those recovering health): Mk. xvi. 18.* 

[κἀμέ, see Kayo. | 

κάμηλος, -ου, 6, 7, Hebr. D3, [fr. Hdt. down], α camel 
[BB.DD. s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 58 sqq.]: 
Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6; in proverbs, Mt. xix. 24; Mk. x. 25; 
Lk. xviii. 25, (meaning, ‘something almost or altogether 
impossible’ [ef. Farrar in The Expositor for 1876 i. p. 
369 sqq.; esp. Wetzstein in the Sitzungsberichte ἃ. Akad. 
d. Wissensch. zu Miinchen, 1873, pp. 581-596]); Mt. 
xxiii. 24 (of one who is careful not to sin in trivial mat- 
ters, but pays no heed to the more important matters).* 

κάμιλος, -ov, 6, a cable; the reading of certain Mss. in 
Mt. xix. 24 and Lk. xviii. 25, [see Tdf.’s notes]. The 
word is found only in Suidas [1967 ο.7 and the Schol. on 
Arstph. vesp. [1030]: “ κάμιλος τὸ παχὺ σχοινίον διὰ τοῦ 


823 


» 
καν 


i.” Cf. Passow [or L. and 5.1 5. v.; [WH. App. p. 
151].* 

κάμινος, -ov, ὁ, 7), [ Hom. ep. 14, 2 ete., Hat. on], a furnace 
(either for smelting, Xen. vectig. 4, 49, or for burning 
earthen ware, or baking bread, Gen. xix. 28; Ex. xix. 
18; Jer. xi.4; Dan. 111. 6): Mt. xiii. 42,50; Rev.i.15: 
ibe Pi! 

καμμύω, a form which passed over from the Epic (cf. 
Hom. batrach. 191) and com. language [Apoll. Dyse. 
synt. 323, 22; 326, 9] into the Alexandrian and decaying 
Greek; condemned by Phryn. [as below]; derived by 
syncope and assimilation from καταμύω (which the earlier 
and more elegant Greeks use), (cf. καμμέν, καμμονή, κάμ- 
μορος, fr. κατὰ μέν, καταμονή, κατάμορος, cf. Bitm. Gram. 
§ 117, 2 Anm. 2; Ausf. Gram. ii. p. 373; Fischer, De 
vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 678 sq.; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. 
Ρ- 173 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 339 sq.; Schdfer ad Lamb. 
Bos p. 368; [ef. B. 62 (55); W.24,46]): 1 aor. ἐκάμ- 
puoa; to shut the eyes, close the eyes: often w. τοὺς ὀφθαλ- 
μούς added ; so Mt. xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Sept. 
Is. vi. 10, for pwn, i.e. to besmear), in both which pass. 
the phrase designates the inflexible pertinacity and ob- 
stinacy of the Jews in their opposition to the gospel. 
(Is. xxix. 10; Lam. iii. 43; καμμύειν τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς ὄμμα, 
Philo de somn. i. § 26.) * 

κάμνω; 2 aor. ἔκαμον ; pf. κέκμηκα; 1. to grow 
weary, be weary, (so fr. Hom. down): Rev. ii. 3 Rec. ; 
Heb. xii. 3. 2. to be sick: Jas. v.15 (Soph., [Hadt.], 
Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Leian. al.).* 

[κἀμοί, see Kiya. | 

κάμπτω; fut. κάμψω; 1 aor. ἔκαμψα: a. to bend, 
bow: τὸ γόνυ (and τὰ γούνατα), the knee (the knees), used 
by Hom. of those taking a seat or sitting down to rest 
(Il. 7,118; 19, 72); in bibl. Grk. with dat. of pers. to 
one i.e. in honor of one, in religious veneration; used 
of worshippers: Ro. xi. 4 and 1 K. xix. 18 (where for 
p12 foll. by ); πρός τινα, towards (unto) one, Eph. iii. 
14. b. reflexively, to bow one’s self: κάμψει πᾶν 
γόνυ ἐμοί, shall bow to me (in honor), i. e. every one shall 
worship me, Ro. xiv. 11 (fr. Is. xlv. 23); ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 
Ἰησοῦ, in devout recognition of the name (of κύριος) 
which Jesus received from God, Phil. ii. 10 [ef. W. 390 
(365); Bp. Lghtft., Meyer, in lov.; also ὄνομα, esp. sub 
fin. Comp.: ava-, συγικάμπτω |.* 

κἄν [Grsb. κἄν ; see κἀγώ, init.], by crasis for καὶ ἐάν 
[ef. W.§5, 3; B.p. 10; Tdf. Proleg. p.97; WH. App. 
p- 145°]; hence joined with the subjunctive; ae 
and if: Mt. x. 23 GL; Mk. xvi. 18; [Lk. xii. 38 (bis) 
T Tr txt. WH; Jn. viii. 55 L T Tr WH; 1 Co. xiii. 2" 
L WH, 2° Tr txt. WH, 3° L Tr WH, 351, WH]; Jas. 
v.15; by aposiopesis with the suppression of the apodo- 
sis, κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπόν, 80. εὖ ἔχει it is well (or some 
such phrase), Lk. xiii. 9; cf. W. 600 (558); [Β. § 151, 
261. 2. also or even if; a. if only, at least, in 
abridged discourse: κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ, sc. ἅψωμαι, 
Mk. v. 28; also ἵνα (se. ἅψωνται αὐτοῦ) κἂν τοῦ κρασπέδου 

εὖ ἅψωνται, Mk. vi. 56; ἵνα ἐρχομένου Πέτρου (se. τὶ 
αὐτοῦ ἐπισκιάσῃ αὐτῶν) κἂν ἡ σκιὰ etc. Acts vy. 15; κἂν ὡς 


Kava 


ἄφρονα se. δέξησθέ pe, 2 Co. xi. 16; (Sap. xiv. 4; xv. 2). 
Cf. Β. § 149, 6; [W. 584 (543): Green, Gram. of the 
N.T. p. 230; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 139 sq.; L. and S. 
s.v.; Soph. Lex. s. v.]. b. even if: Mt. xxi. 21; xxvi. 
85; Jn. viii. 14; x. 38; [xi. 25]; Heb. xii. 20." 

Kava [-va WH; ef. Τὰ Proleg. p. 103; W. § 6,1m.], 
ἡ [B. 21 (19)], Cana, indecl. [W. 61 (60); but dat. -va 
Ree." in Jn. ii. 1,11], prop. name of a village of Galilee 
about three hours distant from Nazareth towards the 
northwest, surviving at present in a place (partly unin- 
habited and partly ruinous) called Kana el-Jelil; cf. 
Robinson, Bibl. Researches, ii. 346 sq.; also his Later 
Bibl. Researches, p. 108; οἵ. Ewald, Gesch. Christus 
u.s. W. p. 147 (64. 1); Miietschi in Herzog vii. 234; [Por- 
ter in Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Several recent writers are in- 
clined to reopen the question of the identification of 
Cana; see 6. g. B.D. Am. ed. 5. v.; Zeller, in Quart. 
Statem. of Palest. Expl. Fund, No. iii. p. 71 sq.; Arnaud, 
Palestine p. 412 sq.; Conder, Tent Work ete. i. 150 sq.]: 
Duis Ll ds ἵν. 46. ΧΧῚ. oe 

Kavavaios LT Tr WH in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18 (for 
RG Kavavirns, q- v-); ace. to the interp. of Bleek (Erklir. 
ἃ. drei ersten Evy. i. p. 417) et al. a native of Cana (see 
Kava); but then it ought to be written Kavaios. The 
reading Kavavaios seems to be a clerical error occasioned 
by the preceding Θαδδαῖος [or Λεββαῖος] ; cf. Fritzsche 
on Mt. x.4. [But -aios is a common ending of the Gre- 
cized form of names of sects (cf. ᾿Ασσιδαῖος, Φαρισαῖος, 
Σαδδουκαῖος, Eaoaios). Hence the word is prob. derived 
fr. the Aramaic {3D (see next word) and corresponds 
to ζηλωτής, 4. ν. (ef. Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13). See Bp. 
Lghtfi. Fresh Revision ete. p. 138 sq.]* 

Kavavirns, -ov, 6, (fr. Chald. j82p, Tebr. 83D), iq. ὁ 
ζηγλωτής (ace. to the interpr. of Luke in vi. 15; Acts i. 
13), q. ν.» the Zealot, a surname of the apostle Simon : 
RG (the latter with small «) in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18.* 

Kaviaxn, -ης. ἡ. Can’dace, a name common to the queens 
of a region of Ethiopia whose capital was Napata; just 
as the proper name Ptolemy was common to the Egyp- 
tian kings, and Henry to the Reuss princes (Strabo 17, 
1, 54 p. 820; Plin. h. n. 6,35; Dio Cass. 54,5): Acts viii. 
27; ef. Laurent, Die Konigin Kandake, in the Zeitschr. 
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1862, p. 632 sqq. [reprinted in his 
N. T. Studien p. 140 sq.; ef. esp. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.].* 


κανών, -dvos, 6, (κάννα, Ilebr. ΤΡ a cane, reed; Arab. 
gS 


Sie 
$Lis a reed, and a spear, and a straight stick or staff 
[ef Vanitek, Fremdworter ete. Ῥ- 21]), prop. a rod or 
straight piece of rounded wood to which any thing is 
fastened to keep it straight; used for various purposes 
(see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.); a measuring rod, rule; 
a carpenter’s line or measuring tape, Schol. on Eur. 
Hippol. 468; hence i. q. τὸ μέτρον τοῦ πηδήματος (Pol- 
lux, Onom. 3, 30, 151), the measure of a leap, as in the 
Olympic games; accordingly in the N. T. lia 
definitely bounded or fixed space within the limits of which 
one’s power or influence is confined ; the province assigned 
one; one’s sphere of activity: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. 2. 


324 


καπηλεύω 


Metaph. any rule or standard, a principle or law of in- 
vestigating, judging, living, acting, (often so in class. 
Grk., as rod καλοῦ, Eur. Hec. 602; ὅροι τῶν ἀγαθῶν x. 
κανόνες, Dem. pro cor. p. 324, 27): Gal. vi. 16; Phil. iii. 
16 Ree. Cf. Credner, Zur Gesch. des Kanons (Hal. 
1847), p. 6 sqq.; [esp. Westcott, The Canon of the N. T., 
App. A; briefly in B.D. 5. v. Canon of Scripture; for 
exx. of later usage see Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

Καπερναούμ. or more correctly (with 1, 1 Tr WH [ef. 
WH. App. p. 160; Serivener, Introd. p. 5617) Kadap- 
vaovp, (193 a village, and Dim) consolation; hence ‘the 
village of consolation,’ [al. ‘village of Nachum’ (a 
prop. name)]; Καπαρναούμ, Ptol. 5, 16,4), ἡ, Capernaum 
or Capharnaum, a flourishing city of Galilee (Mt. xi. 23 ; 
Lk. x. 15), situated on the western shore of the Sea of 
Galilee or Lake of Gennesaret (Jn. vi. 17, 24; hence ἡ 
παραθαλασσία, Mt. iv. 13), near the place where the Jor- 
dan flows into the lake. Being nowhere mentioned in 
the O. T. it seems to have been built after the exile [cf. 
also B. D.s. v. Caphar]. Josephus mentions (b. j. 3, 10, 
8) a fountain in Galilee called by the neighboring 
residents Καφαρναούμ, and (vita 72) "κώμην Κεφαρνώμην᾽, 
and it is quite probable that he meant the town we are 
speaking of. It is mentioned in the N. T. (besides the 
pass. already cited) in Mt. viii. 5; xvii. 24; Mk. i. 21; ii. 
1; ix. $3; Lk. iv. 28,315 vil. 1; Jn. ii. 125 iv. 46 vi. 59. 
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.;  Vaihinger in Herzog vii. 369; 
Furrer in Schenkel iii. 493 sq.; [the last named writ. 
gives at length (see also Zeitschr. ἃ. Deutsch. Palaest.- 
Vereins for 1879, p. 63 sqq.) his reasons for preferring 
(contra Robinson, Sepp, ete.) to identify C. with Tell 
Hum; so (after earlier writ.; cf. Arnaud p. 414), Winer 
τι. s.. Dr. Wilson, Lynch, Ritter, Delitzsch, Tristram 
(Land of Israel, ed. 3, p. 428 sqq.) and more recently 
Capt. Wilson (‘Our Work in Palestine’ p. 186 sq. and 
‘Recovery of Jerusalem’ p. 266 sq. (292 sqq.))- But Con- 
der (Tent Work in Palestine ii. 182 sqq.) argues fr. 
Jewish author. in favor of Khan Minyeh; see B. D. Am. 
ed. s. v.].* 

καπηλεύω ; (κάπηλος, i.e. a. an inn-keeper, esp. a vint- 
ner; b. a petty retailer, a huckster, pedler; ef. Sir. 
XXVI. 29 οὐ δικαιωθήσεται κάπηλος ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας); a. 
to be a retailer, to peddle ; b. with ace. of the thing, 
to make money by selling anything; to get sordid gain by 
dealing in anything, to do a thing for base gain (οἱ τὰ μα- 
θήματα περιάγοντες κατὰ πόλεις καὶ πωλοῦντες K. καπηλεύ- 
οντες, Plat. Prot. p. 318 ἃ. ; μάχην, Aeschyl. Sept. 551 
(545); Lat. cauponari hellum, i. 6. to fight for gain, trade 
in war, Enn. ap. Cie. offic. 1, 12, 38; ἑταίραν τὸ τῆς ὥρας 
ἄνθος καπηλεύουσαν, Philo de caritat. § 14, ef. leg. ad 
Gaium § 30, and many other exx. in other auth.). Hence 
some suppose that καπηλεύειν τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ in 2 Co. ii. 
17 is equiv. to 10 trade in the word of God, i. e. to try to 
get base gain by teaching divine truth. But as ped- 
lers were in the habit of adulterating their commodities 
for the sake of gain (of κάπηλοί σου μίσγουσι τὸν οἶνον 
ὕδατι, Is. i. 22 Sept.; κάπηλοι, οἱ τὸν οἶνον κεραννύντες, 
Pollux, onomast. 7, 193; οἱ φιλόσοφοι ἀποδίδονται τὰ ya 


καπνός 


θήματα, ὥσπερ οἱ κάπηλοι, κερασάμενοΐ γε of πολλοὶ καὶ 
δολώσαντες καὶ κακομετροῦντες, Lucian. Hermot. 59), καπη- 
λεύειν τι Was also used as synonymous with to corrupt, to 
adulterate (Themist. or. 21 p. 247 ed. Hard. says that 
the false philosophers τὸ θειότατον τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων ἀγαθῶν 
κιβδηλεύειν τε καὶ αἰσχύνειν κ- καπηλεύειν) ; and most in- 
terp. rightly decide in favor of this meaning (on account 
of the context) in 2 Co. ii. 17, cf. δολοῦν τὸν λόγον τοῦ 
θεοῦ, ib. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixii.]* 

καπνός, -ov, 6, [fr Hom. down], smoke: Rev. viii. 4; ix. 
2sq.17,18; xiv. 11; xv.8; xviii. 9,18; xix. 3; ἀτμὶς 
καπνοῦ, A. V. vapor of smoke, Acts ii. 19 after Joel ii. 30 
(iii. 3)" 

Καππαδοκία. -as, ἡ, Cappadocia, a region of Asia Minor, 
bounded under the Roman empire on the N. by Pontus, 
on the E. by Armenia Minor, on the S. by Cilicia and 
Commagene, on the W. by Lycaonia and Galatia [BB. 
DD. s. v.]: Acts ii. 9; 1 Pet. i. 1.* 

καρδία, -as, 7, poetic κραδία and καρδίη (in the latter 
form almost always in Hom. [only at the beginning of a 
line in three places; everywhere else by metathesis xpa- 
din; Ebeling, Lex. Hom. 5. v.}), [fr. a root signifying 
to quiver or palpitate; οἵ. Curtius § 39; Vaniéek p. 
1097 (Etym. Magn. 491, 56 mapa τὸ κραδαίνω, τὸ σείω " 
ἀεικίνητος yap ἡ καρδία): allied with Lat. cor; Eng. 
heart]; Sept. for 37 and 239; the heart; 1. prop. 
that organ in the animal body which is the centre of the 
circulation of the blood, and hence was regarded as the 
seat of physical life: 2S. xviii. 14; 2 K. ix. 24; Tob. 
vi. 5 (4), 7 (6) sq.,17(16). Hence 2. univ. καρδία 
denotes the seat and centre of all physical and spiritual 
life; and a. the vigor and sense of physical life (Ps. 
ci. (cii.) 5; στήρισον τὴν καρδίαν σου Ψψωμῷ ἄρτου, Judg. 
xix. 5; to which add Ps. ciii. (civ.) 15): τρέφειν τὰς καρ- 
δίας, Jas. v.55; ἐμπιπλῶν τὰς καρδίας τροφῆς, Acts xiv. 17; 
βαρεῖν τ. καρδίας κραιπάλη καὶ μέθῃ, Lk. xxi. 34; [but see 
b. 6. below] ; b. the centre and seat of spiritual life, 
the soul or mind, as it is the fountain and seat of the 
thoughts, passions, desires, appetites, affections, purposes, 
endeavors [so in Eng. heart, inner man, ete.]; a. 
univ.: Mt. v-8; vi. 21; Mk. vii.19; Lk.i.51; ii. 51; 
viii. 12,15; Acts v.3; Ro. x.9sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 25; 2 Co. 
vi.11; Eph. vi. 5; Col. iii. 22; 1 Pet. iii. 4, ete.; Plur.: 
Mt. ix.4; Mk. ii. 6,8; iv. 15[R L txt. Tr mrg.]; Lk.i. 
17; ii. 35; v. 22; [xxiv.38 RGLmrg.; Acts vii. 51 LT 
Tr WHtxt.]; Ro. ii. 15; xvi. 18; 2 Co. iii. 2; Gal. iv. 6; 
Phil. iv. 7; Eph. v.19 Lehm.; Heb. viii. 10 [TWH mre. 
sing. ]; x. 16, ete. ἡ καρδία is distinguished fr. τὸ στόμα or 
fr. τὰ χείλεα: Mt. xv. 8,18 sq.; Mk. vii. 6; 2 Co. vi. 11; 
Ro. x. 8 sq.; fr. τὸ πρόσωπον : 2 Co. v. 12; 1 Th. ii. 17; 
meptroun καρδίας, Ro. ii. 29; ἀπερίτμητοι τῇ καρδίᾳ, Acts 
vii. 51 {Π| Ὁ Tr WH txt. -δίαις, WH mrg. gen. -δίας, cf. B. 
170 (148)]. of things done from the hearti.e. cordially or 
sincerely, truly (without simulation or pretence) the foll. 
phrases are used : ἐκ καρδίας (Arstph. nub. 86), Ro. vi. 17; 
and L T Tr WH in 1 Pet. i. 22, where RG ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρ- 
δίας, asin 1 Tim.i. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 22° ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν, Mt. 
XVili. 35 (ἀπὸ καρδίας εὐχάριστος τοῖς θεοῖς, Antonin. 2, 


325 


καρδία 


3); ἐν ὅλῃ τ. κι and ἐξ ὅλης τ. κι, Mt. xxii. 37; Mk. xii. 
30,33; Lk. χ. 27, and Ree. in Acts viii. 37, (Deut. vi. 5; 
Xxvi. 16; Ps. exviii. (exix.) 34); μετ᾽ ἀληθινῆς καρδίας, 
Heb. x. 32. ἐρευνᾶν ras καρδίας, Ro. viii. 27; Rev. ii. 23; 
δοκιμάζειν, 1 Th. 11. 4; γινώσκειν, Lk. xvi. 15, (ἐτάζειν, Jer. 
xvii. 10; Ps. vii. 10); διανοίγειν τὴν x. (see διανοίγω, 2), 
Acts xvi. 14; ἦν ἡ καρδία x. ἡ ψυχὴ pia, there was perfect 
unanimity, agreement of heart and soul, Acts iv. 32; 
τιθέναι τι ἐν τῇ x. (273 and 39 Sy ow, 1S. xxi. 12; Mal 
ii. 2; Dan.i.8; τιθέναι ἐν στήθεσσιν, ἐν φρεσίν, ete., in 
Hom.), to lay a thing up in the heart to be considered 
more carefully and pondered, Lk. i. 66; to fix in the heart 
i. e. to purpose, plan, to do something, Acts v. 4 [A. V. 
conceived in thy heart]; also εἰς τ. καρδίαν [L T Tr WH 
ev τ. κι] foll. by the inf., Lk. xxi. 14; βάλλειν els τὴν x. 
τινός, foll. by ἵνα, to put into one’s mind the design of 
doing a thing, Jn. xiii. 2; also διδόναι foll. by an inf, 
Rev. xvii. 17; ἀναβαίνει ἐπὶ τὴν x. τινός, foll. by an inf, 
the purpose to do a thing comes into the mind, Acts vii. 
23; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ joined to verbs of thinking, reflect- 
ing upon, doubting, ete.: ἐνθυμεῖσθαι, διαλογίζεσθαι, 
Mt. ix.4; ΜΚ. 11. 6,8; Lk. 1].1δὅ; v. 22; λέγειν, εἰπεῖν 
(33 78), to think, consider with one’s self, Mt. xxiv. 
48; Lk. xii.45; Ro.x.6; Rev. xviii. 7, (Deut. viii. 17; 
ix. 4); συμβάλλειν, to revolve in mind, Lk. 11. 19; δια- 
κρίνεσθαι, to doubt, Mk. xi. 23; διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσι, 
of persons in doubt, Lk. xxiv. 38 [RG Lmrg. plur.]; 
ἀναβαίνει τι ἐπὶ καρδίαν, the thought of a thing enters the 
mind, 1 Co. ii. 9. B. spec. of the understanding, the 
faculty and seat of intelligence (often so in Hom. also [ef. 
Nédgelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 319 sq.; Zezschwitz, Pro- 
fangricitit u.s.w. pp. 25 sq. 50]; “cor domicilium sapi- 
enciae,” Lact. de opif. dei c. 10, ef. Cic. Tuse. 1, 9; ai} 
1 K. x. 2; Job xii. 3; xvii. 4, ete.; [ef. Meyer on Eph. 
i. 18 and reff.]): Ro. i. 21; 2Co.iv.6; Eph. i. 18 [Ree. 
διανοίας}; 2 Pet. i. 19; συνιέναι τῇ καρδίᾳ, Mt. xiii. 15; 
Acts xxviii. 27; νοεῖν τῇ x. Jn. xii. 40. of the dulness 
of a mind incapable of perceiving and understanding 
divine things the foll. expressions occur: ἐπαχύνθη ἡ x. 
Mt. xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10); πωροῦν τὴν 
καρδίαν, Jn. xii. 40; πεπωρωμένη καρδία, Mk. vi. 52; viii. 
17; ἡ πώρωσις τῆς κι MK. iii. 5; Eph. iv. 18; βραδὺς τῇ x. 
slow of heart, Lk. xxiv. 25; κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν x. κεῖται, 2 
Co. iii. 15. sy. of the will and character: dyvitew καρ- 
δίας, Jas. iv. 8; καθαρίζειν τὰς x. Acts xv. 9 ῥερραντι- 
σμένοι tas x. Heb. x. 22; καρδία εὐθεῖα [ef. W. 32], Acts 
Vili. 31 ; πονηρά, Heb. iii. 12 [ef. B. § 132, 24; W. 194 
(183)]; ἀμετανόητος, Ro. ii. 5; γεγυμνασμένη πλεονεξίας, 
2 Pet. ii. 14; ornpitew ras x. 1 Th. iii. 13; βεβαιοῦν, in 
pass., Heb. xiii. 9; oxAnpivew, Heb. iii. 8; ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς 
x. Acts viii. 22; ai βουλαὶ rove. 1 Co. iv. 5; προαιρεῖσθαι 
τῇ κι 2Co. ix. 7; κρίνειν (to determine) and ἑδραῖος ἐν τῇ 
k.1Co. vii.37. δ. of the soul so far forth as it is affected 
and stirred in abad way or good, or of the soul as the seat 
of the sensibilities, affections, emotions, desires, appetites, 
passions: ἡ καρδία καιομένη ἦν, of the soul as greatly and 
peculiarly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32; ai ἐπιθυμίαι τῶν καρδιῶν, 
Ro. i. 24 : στηρίζειν ras x. of the cultivation of constancy 


καρδιογνώστης 3 
and endurance, Jas. v. 8. in ref. to good-will and love: 
ἔχειν τινὰ ἐν τῇ k. to have one in one’s heart, of constant re- 
membrance and steadfast affection, Phil. i. 7 (‘fe tamen 
in toto pectore semper habet ’ Ovid. trist. 5, 4, 24); εἶναι 
ἐν τῇ k. τινός, to be cherished in one’s heart, to be loved 
by one perpetually and unalterably, 2 Co. vii. 3; εὐδοκία 
τῆς x. Ro. x. 1. in ref. to joy and pleasure: ηὐφράνθη ἡ 
x. Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9); χαρήσεται ἡ x. Jn. Xvi. 
22; ἀνὴρ κατὰ τὴν K. τοῦ θεοῦ, i. ὁ. in whom God delights, 
Acts xiii. of the pleasure given by food, Acts xiv. 17 
([W. 156 (148) note] see 2 a. above). in ref. to grief, 
pain, anguish, ete.: ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκε τὴν κ- Jn. xvi. 6; 


99. 


22; 


ΟῚ 


“= 


6 


κατὰ 


καρπὸν πολὺν φέρειν, to accomplish much (for the propa- 
gation of Christianity and its furtherance in the souls of 
men), Jn. xv. 8, 16; used of men’s deeds as exponents 
of their hearts [ef. W. 372 (348)], Mt. vii. 16, 20; ἀγα- 
θοί, Jas. iil. 17; καρποὶ τῆς Bao. τοῦ θεοῦ, deeds required 
for the attainment of salvation in the kingdom of God, 
Mt. xxi. 43; ποιεῖν καρποὺς ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας, to exhibit 
deeds agreeing with a change of heart, Mt. iii. 8; Lk. iii. 
8, (cf. ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσειν, Acts xxvi. 20). 
b. advantage, profit, utility: Phil. i. 22; ἵν. 17; ἔχειν καρ- 
mov, to get fruit, Ro. 1. 13; vi. 21 sq.; τῆς δικαιοσύνης, 
benefit arising from righteousness [al. make it gen. of 


ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου, Ro. ix. 2; ἡ κ' ταράσσεται, Jn. xiv. 1, 
27; συνοχὴ καρδίας, 2 Co. 11. 4; βαρεῖν τ. καρδίας μεριμναῖς 
βιωτικαῖς, Lk. xxi. 34 [ef. 3 ἃ. above]; διαπρίομαι τῇ κι Acts 
vii. 54; συντετριμμένος τὴν κι Lk. iv. 18 RL br.; κατενύγη- 
σαν τῇ x. Acts ii. 37 [LT Tr WH τὴν x]; συνθρύπτειν τὴν 
x. Acts xxi. 13. €. ofa soul conscious of good or bad deeds 
(our conscience): 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq. (Ecel. vii. 22; so 339, 
Job xxvii. 6; ἡ καρδία πατάσσει τινά, 1 ὃ. xxiv. 6; 2S. 
xxiv. 10). 3. used of the middle or central or inmost 
part of any thing, even though inanimate: τῆς γῆς (which 
some understand of Hades, others of the sepulchre), Mt. 
xii. 40 (τῆς θαλάσσης, Jon. ii. 4 for 39; and for the same 
ἐν μέσῳ θαλάσσης, Ex. xy. 8,19; add Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. ] 
19; τῆς κλεψύδρας, Aristot. probl. 16, 8 [al. cwdia]). ΟΥ̓. 
Beck, Bibl. Seelenlehre, ch. iii. § 20 sqq. p. 64 sqq.; De- 
litzsch, Bibl. Psychologie (Leipz. 1861) iv. § 12 p. 248 sqq. 
[also in Herzog 2, vi. 57 sqq.]; Oehler in Herzog vi. p. 
15 sqq- [also in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) ὃ 71]; Wit 
tichen in Schenkel iii. 71 sq. 

καρδιο-γνώστης, -ov, ὁ, (καρδία, γνώστης), knower of 
hearts: Acts i. 24; xv. 8. (Eccl. writ. [W. 100 (94)].)* 

Κάρπος [cf. W. p. 51], -ov, 6, Carpus, the name of an 
unknown man: 2 Tim. iv. 13.* 

καρπός, -o0, ὁ, [cf. Lat. carpo; A-S. hearf-est (harvest 
i.e. the ingathering of crops); Curtius § 42]; Hebr. 
2; fr. Hom. down; fruit; 1. prop.: the fruit of 
trees, Mt. xii. 33; xxi. 19; Mk. xi.14; Lk. vi. 44; xiii. 
6 sq.; of vines, Mt. xxi. 34; Mk. xii. 2; Lk.xx.10; 1 Co. 
ix. 7; of the fields, Lk. xii. 17; Mk. iv. 29; 2 Tim. ii. 6; 
[Jas. v. 7]; βλαστάνειν, Jas. v. 18; ποιεῖν, to bear fruit 
(after the Hebr. 49 Mwy [see ποιέω, I. 1 e.]), Mt. iii. 
10; vii. 17-19 ; xiii. 26; Lk. iii. 9; vi. 435 viii. 8; xiii. 9; 
Rey. xxii. 2; διδόναι, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7 sq.; φέρειν, 
Mt. vii. 18 T WH; Jn. xii. 24; xv. 2,4 sq.; (trop. xv. 8, 
16); ἀποδιδόναι, to yield fruit, Rev. xxii. 2; to render 
(pay) the fruit, Mt. xxi.41; by a Hebraism, 6 καρπὸς τῆς 
κοιλίας, i. 6. the unborn child, Lk. i. 42 (03 “5, Deut. 
xxviii. 4, where Sept. τὰ ἔκγονα τῆς κοιλίας); τῆς ὀσφύος 
the fruit of one’s loins, i. e. his progeny, his posterity, 
Acts ii. 30 (Gen. xxx. 2; Ps. exxvi. (exxvii.) 3; cxxxi. 
(cxxxil.) 11; Mic. vi. 7); cf. W. 33 (32). 2. Me- 
taph. that which originates or comes from something; an 
effect, result ; a. i. 4- ἔργον, work, act, deed: with gen. 
of the author, τοῦ πνεύματος, Gal. v.22; τοῦ φωτός, Eph. 
v.9 (Ree. τ. πνεύματος) ; τῆς δικαιοσύνης, Phil. i. 11 [ef. 


Ὁ. below]; of Christian charity, i. e. benefit, Ro. xv. 28; 


apposition, W. § 59, 8 a.], Heb. xii. 11; which consists in 
righteousness (gen. of appos.), Jas. iii. 18 [ef. Phil. i. 11 
in a. above, and Meyer ad loc.; Prov. xi. 30; Amos vi. 
12]. c. by a Hebraism of καρποὶ τῶν χειλέων, praises, 
which are presented to God as a thank-offering: Heb. 
xiii. 15 (Hos. xiv. 2; Prov. xii. 14; xxix. 49 (xxxi. 31)). 
Cf. W. 33 (32) note 1. ἃ. συνάγειν καρπὸν εἰς ζωὴν 
αἰώνιον, to gather fruit (i. 6. a reaped harvest) into life 
eternal (as into a granary), is used in fig. discourse of 
those who by their labors have fitted souls to obtain eter- 
nal life, Jn. iv. 36.* 

καρπο-φορέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐκαρποφόρησα ; pres. pass. ptep. 
καρποφορούμενος ; (καρποφόρος, q-v-); tobear fruit; (Vulg. 
fructifico; Colum., Tertull.) ; a. prop. ({Xen., Aris- 
tot. ], Theophr. de hist. plant. 3, 8, 7; Diod. 2,49): χόρ- 
τον, Mk. iv. 28 (φυτά, Sap. x. 7). b. metaph. to bear, 
bring forth, deeds: thus of men who show their knowl- 
edge of religion by their conduct, Mt. xiii. 23; Mk. iv. 
20; Lk. viii. 15; ἐν (for RG LTrmrg. WH mrg. ἕν [ef. 
B. 103 (90), see eis, 4 a.]) τριάκοντα etc. sc. καρποῖς, Mk. 
iv. 20 T Tr txt. WH txt. [see ἐν, 1. ὅ f.]; ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ 
ἀγαθῷ, Col. i. 10; τινί (dat. commodi) to one who reaps 
the fruit, i.e. fruit acceptable to him, τῷ θεῷ, Ro. vii. 4 ; 
τῷ θανάτῳ, i.e. (without the fig.) to produce works re- 
warded with death, Ro. vii. 5; in mid. to bear fruit of 
one’s self, Col. i. 6 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].* 

καρπο-φόρος, -ov, (καρπός and φέρω), fruit-bearing, 
Jruitful, productive: Acts xiv. 17. (Pind., Xen., Theo- 
phr., Diod., Sept.) * 

καρτερέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐκαρτέρησα; (καρτερός [fr. κάρτος 
i. 6. κράτος, ‘strong’]); to be steadfast: Heb. xi. 27 [ A.V. 
endured}. (Job ii. 9; Sir. ii. 2; xii. 15; often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Soph. and Thue. down.) [Comp.: προσ-καρ- 
Tepew. | * 

κάρφος, -eos (τους), τό, (fr. κάρφω to contract, dry up, 
wither), a dry stalk or twig, a straw; chaff, (A.V. mote]: 
Mt. vii. 83-5; Lk. vi. 41sq., where it figuratively denotes 
asmaller fault. (Gen. viii. 11; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hdt. down.) * 

κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tf. 
Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 1405], 
a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction 
from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined 
with the gen. and the acc. 

I. With the Genitive (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. 
§ 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατὰ 


κατά 8 


τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 32; ΜΚ. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν 
κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head 
[οἷς W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to 
omit κατά with LT Tr WH; see καταχέω), Mk. xiv. 3; 
hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) 
ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([Δ. V. having his head covered] cf. κα- 
ταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but 566 ἔχω I. 1b.]). 
Ὁ. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 
381 (357) note!; ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Crete]; trop. 7 
κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down into the depth, i. e. 
deep or extreme poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2 (cf. Strabo 9, 5 
p- 419 ἐστὶ τὸ μαντεῖον ἄντρον κοῖλον κατὰ βάθους). Ὁ: 
used of motion or extension through a space from top to 
bottom; hence through, throughout: in the N. T. [and in 
Luke’s writ.; B. § 147, 20] everywh. with the adj. ὅλος, 
as καθ᾽ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας, τῆς ᾿Ιόππης, Lk. 
iv. 14; xxiii. 5; Actsix. 31; x. 87, (διεσπάρησαν κατὰ τῆς 
νήσου, Polyb. 3,19, 7; ἐσκεδασμένοι κατὰ τῆς χώρας, 1, 17, 
10; 8, 10,10; μὴ παραβαίνειν τὰς ἁρματοτροχίας, ἀλλὰ 
κατ᾽ αὐτῶν ἰέναι, Ael. ν. h. 2, 27). 2. metaph. a. 
after verbs of swearing, adjuring, (the hand being, 
as it were, placed down upon the thing sworn by [ef. 
Buhdy. p. 238; Kiihner ὃ 433 fin.]), by: Mt. xxvi. 63; 
Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Is. xlv. 23; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 13; Judith i. 
12; Dem. 553,17; 554, 23). b. against (prop. down 
upon [W. 382 (358)]; Hebr.5y): opp. to ὑπέρ, Mk. ix. 
40; 2Co. xiii. 8; Ro. viii. 31; opp. to pera, Mt. xii. 30; 
Lk. xi. 23; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal. v.17; εἰπεῖν πονηρὸν 
(ῥῆμα), Mt.v. 11; λαλεῖν, Acts vi. 13; Jude 15; μαρτυρία, 
Mk. xiv. 55; Mt. xxvi. 59; μαρτυρεῖν, 1 Co. xv. 15 [here 
many take k. i. q. with regard to, of; cf. De Wette ad loc. ; 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 272]; ψευδομαρτυρεῖν, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. ; 
γογγύζειν, Mt. xx.11 (Ex. xv. 24 Alex.) ; διδάσκειν, Acts 
xxi. 28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas. iii. 14 (Xen. apol. 13) ; συμβούλιον 
λαβεῖν or ποιεῖν, Mt. xxvii. 1; Mk. iii. 6; αἰτεῖσθαί τι, Acts 
xxv. 3,15; after verbs of accusing, etc. : ἔχειν τι, Mt. 
y. 23; Mk. xi. 25; Rev. ii. 4, 14, 20; κατηγορεῖν, Lk. xxiii. 
14; κατηγορία, Jn. xviii. 29 [Tdf. om. κατά] ; ἐγκαλεῖν, Ro. 
Vili. 33; ἐντυγχάνειν τινί, Ro. xi. 2; add, Acts xxiv. 1; 
xxv. 2; Jas. v.95; τὸ χειρόγραφον, Col. ii. 14; κρίσιν ποιεῖν, 
Jude 15; after verbs of rebelling, fighting, pre- 
vailing: Mt. x. 35; xii. 25; Acts xiv. 2; 1 Co. iv. 6; 
2Co. x. 5; 1 Pet. ii. 11; [Rev. xii. 7 Ree.]; ἰσχύειν, Acts 
xix. 16; ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν, Jn. xix. 11. 

II. With the Accusative; cf. W. § 49d.; Bnhdy. p. 
239 sqq- 1. of Place; a. of the place through 
which anything is done or is extended (prop. down 
through; opp. to ἀνά, up through): καθ᾽ ὅλην τὴν πόλιν 
κηρύσσειν, Lk. viii. 39; ἐκφέρειν κατὰ τὰς πλατείας, Acts 
ν- 15[. 6]: add, Lk. τς. 6; xiii. 22; xv.14; Acts viii. 
1; xi. 1; xv. 28; xxi. 21; xxiv. 5,12; xxvii. 2; τοὺς κατὰ 
τὰ ἔθνη (throughout Gentile lands) πάντας Ιουδαίους, Acts 
xxi. 21, cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. i. 1; κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν, along 
the way i. e. on the journey [W. 400 (374) note 1], Lk. 
x. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; along (Lat. secun- 
dum or praeter [R. V. off ]), πέλαγος τὸ κατὰ τὴν Κιλικίαν, 
Acts xxvii. 5. b. of the place to which one is brought 
(down): γενόμενος [Tr WH om. y.] κατὰ τὸν τόπον [ἐλ- 


7 κατά 


θών ete.], Lk. x. 32 [ef. Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad 
loc.]; ἐλθόντες κατὰ τὴν Μυσίαν, Acts xvi. 7; κατὰ τὴν 
Κνίδον, Acts xxvii. 7; κατ᾽ αὐτόν, (came) to him, i. 6. to 
the place where he was lying, Lk. x. 33. c. of direc- 
tion; towards: Λιβύη ἡ κατὰ Κυρήνην, that Libya which 
lay towards Cyrene, i. e. Libya of Cyrene (i. e. the chief 
city of which was Cyrene), Acts ii. 10; βλέπειν, to look, lie 
towards (see βλέπω, 3), Acts xxvii. 12; πορεύεσθαι κατὰ 
μεσημβρίαν, Acts viii. 26; κατὰ σκοπόν, towards the goal, 
my eye on the goal, Phil. iii. 14. against (Lat. adversus 
w. the ace.) ; over against, opposite: κατὰ πρόσωπον, to 
the face, Gal. ii. 11 (see πρόσωπον, 1a.); i. 4- present, 
Acts xxv. 16 [A. V. face to face]; 2 Co. x.1; w. gen. of 
pers. added, before the face of, in the presence of, one: 
Lk. ii. 31; Acts iii. 13; τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον, the things 
that are open to view, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7; κατ᾽ 
ὀφθαλμούς, before the eyes, Gal. iii. 1; here, too, ace. to 
some [cf. W. 400 (374) note 8] belongs κατὰ θεόν, Ro. 
viii. 27, but it is more correctly referred te 3 6. a. be- 
low. ἃ. of the place where: κατ᾽ οἶκον (upp. to 
ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ), at home, privately [W. 400 (374) note 1], 
Acts ii. 46; v. 42. e. of that which so joins itself 
to one thing as to separate itself from another; our for, 
by: κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, apart, see ἴδιος, 2; καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, alone (by 
himself), Acts xxviii. 16; Jas. ii. 17 [R. V. in itself], (2 
Mace. xiii. 13; of καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς Ἕλληνες, Thue. 1, 138; of 
Βοιωτοὶ καθ᾽ αὑτούς, Diod. 13, 72; other exx. are given 
by Alberti, Observv. ete. p. 293; Loesner, Observv. e 
Philone p. 460 sq.); ἔχειν τε καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, to have a thing 
by and to one’s self, i. e. to keep it hidden in one’s mind, 
Ro. xiv. 22 (Joseph. antt. 2,11, 1; Heliod. 7, 16; [ef. W. 
401 (375) note!]); hence, of that which belongs to 
some pers. or thing: κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν, belonging 
to [A. V. in] the church that was there, Acts xiii. 1; ἡ 
ἐκκλησία κατ᾽ οἶκόν τινος, belonging to one’s household 
(see ἐκκλησία, 4 Ὁ. aa.); hence it forms a periphrasis — 
now for the gen., as τὰ κατὰ ᾿Ιουδαίους ἔθη (i. q- τῶν Ἰου- 
δαίων), Acts xxvi. 3; now for the possessive pron., of 
καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς ποιηταί, your own poets, Acts xvii. 28 [here 
WH mre. καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς, see their Intr. § 404]; νόμου τοῦ 
καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς, [a law of your own], Acts xviii. 15; τὸ κατ᾽ ἐμὲ 
πρύθυμον, my inclination, Ro. i. 15 [see πρόθυμος]; ἡ καθ᾽ 
ὑμᾶς πίστις, Eph. i. 15, (ἡ κατὰ τὸν τύραννον ὠμύτης τε καὶ 
δύναμις, Diod. 14, 12; μέχρι τῶν καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς χρόνων, Dion. 
Hal. antt. 2,1; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 21 p. 88; a 
throng of exx. fr. Polyb. may be seen in Schweighaeuser, 
Lex. Polyb. p. 323 sq.; [ef. W. 154 (146); 400 (374) 
note 2; esp. B. § 132, 2]). 2. of Time [ef. W. 401 
(374)]; during, about; Lat. tempore: κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον or τοῦ- 
tov τὸν καιρόν, Acts xii. 1; xix. 23; Ro. ix.9; Heb. ix. 9 
[RG]; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 
xiv. 1 (see αὐτός, IIL. 1); κατὰ τὸ μεσονύκτιον, Acts xvi. 
25; κατὰ μέσον τῆς νυκτός, Acts xxvii. 27; [possibly also 
κατὰ μεσημβρίαν, al noon, Acts viii. 26 (see μεσημβρία. b.) }; 
κατὰ καιρόν, See καιρός, 3 ἃ. ; Kat ἀρχάς (Hat. 3, 153), in 
the beginning (of things), Heb. i. 10; κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ 
πειρασμοῦ, Heb. iii. 8 [as the Sept. in this pass. have ren- 
dered the prep. 3 in the context by ὡς (ἐν τῷ mapamixpa 


κατὰ 


σμῷ, Ps. χοῖν. (xev.) 8), some would take it and κατά here 
i. q. like asin the day ete.; Vulg. secundum]; κατὰ πᾶν σάβ- 
Barov, Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21; xviii. 4; καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν, 
Heb. iii. 13; κατὰ μῆνα (ἔνα) ἕκαστον, Rev. xxii. 2; κατ᾽ 
ὄναρ, during a dream, see ὄναρ. 3. it denotes re f- 
erence, relation, proportion, of various sorts; a. 
distributively, indicating a succession of things fol- 
lowing one another [W. 401 (874); B.§ 147,20]; a. 
in ref. to place: κατὰ πόλιν, in every city, (city by city, 
from city to city), Lk. viii. 1,4; Acts xv. 21; xx. 23; Tit. 
i. 5, (Thue. 1,122); κατ᾽ ἐκκλησίαν, in every church, Acts 
xiv. 23; w. the plur., κατὰ πόλει», Lk. xiii. 22; κατὰ τὰς 
κώμας, Lk. ix. 6 (Hdt. 1, 96); 
Mk. xiii.8; Lk. xxi. 11; κατὰ tas cuvaywyds, in every 
synagogue, Acts xxii. 19; [οἷ κατὰ τ. οἴκους εἰσπορευόμε- 
vos, Acts viii. 81. β. in ref. totime: κατ᾽ ἔτος, yearly, 
year by year, Lk. ii. 41; also κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτόν (see ἐνιαυτός) ; 
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ete., see ἡμέρα, 2 p. 278°; κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου 
[ἢ ἃ -των], on the first day of every week, 1 Co. xvi. 2; 
κατὰ ἑορτήν, at any and every feast, Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk. 
xv. 6; Lk. xxiii. 17 [Ree.; ef. B. § 133, 26. Others un- 
derstand the phrase in these pass. (contextually) at or 
during (see 2 above) the feast, viz. the Passover; cf. W. 
401 (374)]. sy. univ.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, all one by one, 
successively, 1 Co. xiv. 31, see more fully in εἷς, 4 ¢.; 
κατὰ δύο, by two, 1 Co. xiv. 27; κατὰ ἑκατὸν x. κατὰ πευτή- 
xovra, by hundreds and by fifties, Mk. vi. 40 LT Tr WH; 
κατὰ μέρος, severally, singly, part by part, Heb. ix. 5 
(Hat. 9, 25; Xen. anab. 3,4, 22); κατ᾽ ὄνομα, by name 
i. e. each by its own name (Vulg. nominatim [or per 
nomen]): Jn. x.3; 3Jn.15 (14); ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
858 sq. Ὁ. equiv. to the Lat. ratione habita alicutus 
rei vel personae; as respects; with regard to; in reference 
to; so far as relates to; as concerning; [W. 401 (375) ]: 
κατὰ σάρκα ΟΥ κατὰ τὴν σ.» as to the flesh (see σάρξ [esp. 
2b.]), Ro. i. 3; ix. 3,5; 1.00.1: 26; x.18; 9 ΟΟΙ xi 15: 
οἱ κύριοι κατὰ o. (Luther well, die leiblichen Herren), in 


κατὰ τόπους, Mt. xxiv. 7; 


earthly relations, acc. to the arrangements of society, 
Eph. vi. 5; κατὰ τὸ evayy., κατὰ τὴν ἐκλογήν, Ro. xi. 28 ; 
add Ro. i. 4; vii. 22; Phil. 111. 5 sq-; Heb. ix. 9; τὰ κατά 
τινα, one’s affairs, one’s case, Acts xxiv. 22; xxv. 143 
Eph. vi. 21; Phil. i. 12; Col. iv. 7, (and very often in 
class. Grk.) ; κατὰ πάντα τρόπον, in every way, in every re- 
spect, Ro. iii. 2; the opp. κατὰ μηδένα τρύπον, in no wise, 
2 Th. ii. 3; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, in all things, Acts 
xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20, 22; Heb. ii.17; iv. 15, (Thue. 4, 
81). ¢e. according to, agreeably to; in reference to 
agreement or conformity to a standard, in various ways 
[W. 401 (375) ]; a. according to anything as a stand- 
ard, agreeably to: περιπατεῖν κατά τι, Mk. vii. 5; Ro. viii. 1 
[Ree.], 4; xiv. 15; 2 Th. iii. 6; Eph. ii. 2; ζῆν κατά, Acts 
xxvi. 53 Ro. viii. 12 sq.; πορεύεσθαι. 2 Pet. iii. 3; ἀποδι- 
δόναι τινί, Mt. xvi. 27, ete. (see ἀποδίδωμι, [esp. 4]); 
λαμβάνειν, 1 Co. iii. 8; so with many other verbs a thing 
is said to be done or to occur κατά, as in Lk. ii. 27, 29; 
Jn. vii. 24; Col. ii. 8; iii. 10; 1 Tim.i.18; Heb. vii. 15; 
vill. 5,9; 1 Jn. v. 14, ete.; (on the phrase κατ᾽ ἄνθρωπον, 
see ἄνθρωπος, esp. 1 ¢.; [cf. «. below; W. 402 (376)]); 


328 


KaTa 


κατὰ τὴν γραφήν, τὰς γραφάς, Jas. ii. 8; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq.; 
κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον, 2 Co. iv. 13; κατὰ τὸ εἰρημένον, Ro. 
iv. 18; κατὰ τὸν νόμον, Lk. ii. 39; Jn. xviii. 31; xix. 7; 
Heb. ix. 22; κατὰ τὸ evayy. μου, Ro. ii. 16; xvi. 25; 2 Tim. 
ii. 8, cf. 1 Tim. i. 11; κατὰ τὸ ὡρισμένον, Lk. xxii. 22; 
καθ᾽ ὁμοίωσιν θεοῦ, Jas. iii. 9; κατὰ λόγον rightly, justly, 
[A. V. reason would ete.], Acts xviii. 14; κατά τινα. agree- 
ably to the will of any one, as pleases him, [W. 401 sq. 
(375)]: so κατὰ θεόν, Ro. viii. 27 [ef. 1 6. above]; 2 Co. 
vii. 9, 11; κατὰ Χριστὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, Ro. xv. 5; κατὰ κύριον, 
2 Co. xi. 17; κατὰ τὸν καθαρισμὸν, after the manner of 
purifying, as the rite of purification prescribed, Jn. ii. 
ὃ; οἱ κατὰ σάρκα ὄντες, who bear, reflect, the nature of 
the flesh, i. q. of σαρκικοί, and of κατὰ πνεῦμα ὄντες i. «1. οἱ 
πνευματικοί, Ro. vill. 5; κατὰ τί γνώσομαι ; in accordance 
with what criterion i. e. by what sign shall I know? Lk. 
i. 18. Here belongs the use of the preposition in the 
titles of the records of the life of Christ: evayy. (which 
word codd. Sin. and Vat. omit) κατὰ Ματθαῖον, Μάρκον, 
ete., as Matthew ete. composed or wrote (it). This use 
of the prep. was not primarily a mere periphrasis for 
the gen. (Ματθαίου, etc., see II. 1 6. above), but indicated 
that the same subject had been otherwise handled by 
others, cf. ἡ παλαιὰ διαθήκη κατὰ τοὺς ἑβδομήκοντα 
(in tacit contrast not only to the Hebrew text, but also 
to the Greek translations made by others); οἱ ὑπομνη- 
ματισμοὶ of κατὰ Νεεμίαν, 2 Mace. ii. 13 [see Grimm ad 
loc.]. Subsequently κατά with an ace. of the writer came 
to take the place of the gen., as 7 κατὰ Μωῦσέα πεντάτευ- 
xos in Epiphanius [haer. 8, 4. Cf. W. 402 (375); B. 
3; 157 (137); and see, further, Soph. Lex. s. v. εὐαγγέλιον, 
Jas. Morison, Com. on Mt., Intr. § 4}. B. in proportion 
to, according to the measure of: χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν 
τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα, Ro. xii. 6; κατὰ τὸ μέτρον, 2 
Co. x. 13; Eph. iv. 7; κατὰ τὴν σκληρότητά σου, Ro. ii. 5; 
κατὰ τὸν χρόνον, Mt. ii. 16; ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν, 
ΔΙ. xxv.15; without the art. κατὰ δύναμιν, 2 Co. viii. 3 
(opp. to ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, as Hom. Il. 3, 59 κατ᾽ αἶσαν, οὐδ᾽ 
ὑπὲρ αἶσαν); καθ᾽ ὅσον, by so much as, inasmuch as, Heb. 
iii. 3; vii. 20; ix. 27; κατὰ τοσοῦτο, by so much, Heb. vii. 
22. y. used of the cause; through, on account of, 


Jvom, owing to, (in accordance with i. e. in consequence 


of, by virtue of ) [W. 402 (376)]: κατὰ πᾶσαν αἰτίαν, [ for 
every cause], Mt. xix. 3; κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Co. 
iii. 10; 2 Th. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 9, (κατὰ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ mpo- 
νοιαν, Joseph. antt. 20, 8,6); κατὰ χάριν, Ro. iv. 16; also 
opp. to κατὰ ὀφείλημα [R. V. as of... as of], Ro. iv. 4; 
οἱ κατὰ φύσιν κλάδοι, the natural branches, Ro. xi. 21 [cf. 
B. 162 (141)]; ἡ κατὰ φύσιν ἀγριέλαιος, the natural wild 
olive tree, ib. 24; ἡ κατὰ πίστιν δικαιοσύνη, righteousness 
proceeding from faith, Heb. xi. 7; add, Ro. viii. 28; ix. 
11; xi. 5; xvi. 25 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 8; 2 Co. xiii. 10; Gal. ii. 
2; iii. 29; Eph.i. 5, 7,9, 11,19; iii. 7,11, 16, 20; Col. i. 
11,29; Phil. i. 20; 111. 21; iv. 11,19; 2 Th.i.12; ii. 9; 
2 Tim. i. 8 sq.; Heb. ii. 4; vii. 16; Tit.i.3; 1 Pet.i.3; 2 
Pet. iii. 15. adverbial phrases [W. § 51, 2g.]: κατ᾽ ἐξου- 
σίαν [with authority], Mk. i. 27; κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην. κατὰ ἑκού- 
σιον (q. Vv), [of necessity, of free will], Philem. 14; κατὰ 


κατά 


γνῶσιν, 1 Pet. iii. 7; κατ᾽ ἐπίγνωσιν, Ro. x. 2 [ef. W. 403 
(876)]; κατὰ ἄγνοιαν, [in ignorance], Acts iii. 17. δ. 
of likeness; us, like as: συντελέσω... διαθήκην καινήν, 
ov κατὰ τὴν διαθήκην κτὰ. Heb. viii. 8 sq. (1 K. xi. 10); so 
with the acc. of a pers. [ef. under a. above], Gal. iv. 28; 
1 Pet. 1. 15; κατὰ Geov,safter the image of God, Eph. iv. 
24; κρίνεσθαι κατὰ ἀνθρώπους, ζῆν κατὰ θεόν, to be judged 
as it is fit men should be judged, to live as God lives, 1 
Pet. iv. 6. Hence it is used ε- of the mode in 
which a thing is done; of the quality: ἄνδρες οἱ κατ᾽ 
ἐξοχὴν τῆς πόλεως, the principal men of the city, Acts 
χχν. 23; καθ᾽ ὑπομενὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, i. q. ὑπομένοντες ἐν 
ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ, [by constancy in well-doing], Ro. ii. 7; esp. 
in adverbial phrases: κατὰ ταῦτα in [or after] the same 
[or this] manner, Lk. vi. 23 (Ltxt. T Tr WH κ. τὰ αὐτά, 
L.mrg. «. ταὐτά), [26 (edd. as before) ]; Lk. xvii. 30 (T 
Tr WII x. τὰ αὐτά, GL. ταὐτά) ; καθ᾽ ὑπερβολήν, Ro. vii. 
13; 1 Co. xii. 31, ete., [ef. W. 466 (434); B. 96 (84)]; 
κατὰ πίστιν i. q. πιστεύοντες [A. V. in faith; οἵ. W. 403 
(376) ], Heb. xi. 13; κατὰ συγγνώμην, οὐ κατ᾽ ἐπιταγήν, by 
way of concession, not by way of commandment, 1 Co. 
vii. 6, ef. 2 Co. viii. 8; κατὰ κράτος, Acts xix. 20; καθ᾽ 
ὁμοιότητα, Heb. iv. 15; on the phrase κατὰ ἄνθρωπον see 
ἄνθρωπος, 1 ο. (ef. a. above]. ἃ. of the end aimed 
at; the goal to which anything tends; (Lat. ad 
[W. 402 sq. (376)]): κατ᾽ ἐπαγγελίαν ζωῆς, to proclaim 
life, 2 Tim. i. 1 [but see ἐπαγγελία, 1]; κατ᾽ εὐσέβειαν, 
tending to godliness, [1 Tim. vi. 3; Tit. i. 1] (see εὐσέ- 
Peta; [yet al. refer these exx., and that which follows, to 
the use set forth above, in c.]); κατὰ πίστιν, to awaken, 
produce faith, Tit. i. 1, (exx. of this use of κατά fr. Hom., 
Hdt., Thue., Xen., may be seen in Passow s. vy. II. 3 p. 
1598" ; [L. and 5. 5. v. B. 1Π. 1); ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
632; Kiuhner ii. p. 412); many refer to this head also 
κατ᾽ ἀτιμίαν (to my dishonor [W. 402 sq. (376)]) λέγω, 
2 Co. xi. 21 (κατὰ τὴν τιμὴν τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν, to the 
honor of God, Joseph. antt. 3, 11, 4); but see ἀτιμία. 
1Π. In Composition κατά denotes, 1. from, 
down from, from a higher to a lower place: with special 
ref. to the terminus from which, as καταβαίνω, καταβιβάζω. 
ete. [ef. W. 431 (401 sq.)]; with more prominent ref. to 
the lower terminus (down), as καταβάλλω. καταπατέω, etc. 
[ef. W.u.s.]; also of the situation or local position, 
as κατάκειμαι. καθεύδω. κατατίθημι, καθίζω, ete. from top 
to bottom, metaph. of things done with care, thoroughly, 
as καταμανθάνω, καθοράω, ete. 2. in succession, in 
course: καθεξῆς ; one part after another, καταρτίζω. κατευ- 
θύνω, ete. 3. under, underneath: xatay@ovios; the 
idea of putting under resides in verbs denoting victory, 
rule, ete., over others, as καταδυναστεύω, κατακυριεύω. Ka- 
τεξουσιάζω, KatadovAdw; likewise in verbs naming that 
with which anything is covered, concealed, overwhelmed, 
ete., as κατακαλύπτω. καταλιθάζω. κατασφραγίζω. κατα- 
σκιάζω, καταισχύνω, (where the Germ. uses the prefix tiber 
[Eng. over], as tiberschatten, tiberdecken, or the syllable 
be, as beschatten, besiegeln); also in adjj. denoting an 
abundance of that with which a thing is filled up or as 
it were covered up; see below in κατείδωλος. 4. 


329 


καταβαλλω 


like the Germ. ver-, zer-, it denotes separation; dissolu- 
tion, in verbs of wasting, dissolving, ete., as κατα- 
κόπτω, κατάγνυμι, κατακαίω, κατακλάω, καταλύω, κατακλύζω, 
καταναλίσκω, καταφθείρω, etc. 5. i. q. afier, behind: 
καταδιώκω, καταλείπω. κατακολουθέω, etc. 6. used 
of proportion and distribution, as κατακληροδοτέω, 
katakAnpovopew, etc. 7. of hostility, against ete.: 
καταδικάζω, KaTakpivw, καταλαλέω, καταγινώσκω, ete. Cf. 
Herm. ad Vig. p. 637 sqq. [On the constr. of verbs com- 
pounded w. κατά, see W. u. s.; ef. B. 165 (143 sq.).] 

xata-Batvw; impf. 3 pers. plur. κατέβαινον ; fut. καταβή- 
σομαι; 2 aor. κατέβην, impy. κατάβηθι (Mt. xxvii. 40; Lk. 
xix. 5; Jn.iv.49; Acts x. 20) and κατάβα (Mk. xv. 30 
[RG (where L T Tr WH ptep. xaraBas) ], see ἀναβαίνω); 
pf. καταβέβηκα; [fr. Hom. on]; Sept. for 17°; to go down, 
come down, descend ; 1. of persons; a. prop.: 
absol., the place from which one has come down being 
evident from the context, καταβὰς ἔστη, Lk. vi. 17 (cf. 
12); xvii. 31 [foll. here by inf., so Mt. xxiv. 17]; Lk. xix. 
5 sq.; Jn. v.7; Acts xx.10; Eph. iv. 10; foll. by ἀπό w. 
gen. of the place, Mt. viii. 1; xiv. 29; xvii. 9 Ree. ; xxvii. 
40,42; Mk. ix. 9 [L Trmrg. WH txt. ex]; xv. 30, 32: by 
ἐκ w. gen. of place, Mt. xvii. 9 GL T Tr WH [see ἐκ, I. 
3]; by εἰς w. ace. of place, Mk. xiii. 15 [RG Lbr. Tr; 
al. om. εἰς ete.]; Acts viii. 38; [Ro.x.7]; Eph.iv.9.  b. 
to come down, as fr. the temple at Jerusalem, fr. the city 
of Jerusalem; also of celestial beings coming down to 
earth: absol., Mt. 11.160; Lk. ii.51; x. 31; Jn. iv. 47, 
49,51; Acts [νἱ]. 34]; viii. 15; x. 20; [xxiii 10]; xxiv. 
1,22; foll. by ἀπό w. gen. of the place, Mk. iii. 22; Lk. 
x. 30; Acts xxv. 7; 1 Th. iv. 16; ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Mt. 
Xxvili. 2; Jn. i. 32; iii. 13; vi. 33,38 [RG; al. ἀπό], 41 
sq. 50 sq. 58, [on these pass. cf. B. 297 (255)]; Rev. x. 
1; xviii. 1; xx. 1. foll. by εἰς w. ace. of place, Lk. x. 30; 
xviii. 14; Jn. ii. 12; Acts vii. 15; xiv. 25; xvi. 8; xviii. 
22; xxv.6; by ἐπί w. ace. of place, Jn. vi. 16; w. ace. 
of the pers., Mk. i. 10 [RG Lmrg.]; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. i. 
33, 51 (52); by ἐν w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 4 [R L] (see 
ev, I. 7); by πρός w. ace. of pers., Acts x. 21; xiv. 11; 
contextually i. 4. to be cast down, of the devil, Rey. xii. 
12. 2. of things, fo come (i. 6. be sent) down: Acts 
x. 11 (Ree. adds ἐπ᾽ αὐτόνν ; xi. 5; foll. by ἀπό w. a gen. 
of pers., Jas. i. 17; ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. iii. 
12; xxi. 2,10; to come (i.e. fall) down: fr. the upper 
recions of the air; as βροχή, Mt. vii. 25, 27; λαῖλαψ, Lk. 
viii. 23; πῦρ ἀπὸ [Lchm. ἐκ] τοῦ ovp. Lk. ix. 54; ἐκ τοῦ 
οὐρ. eis τ. γῆν. Rev. xiii. 13; ἐκ τοῦ odp. ἀπὸ τ. θεοῦ, Rev. 
xx.9[RGTr]; χάλαζα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρ. ἐπί τινα, Rey. xvi. 21; 
θρόμβοι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the 
pass.]; of a way leading downwards, Acts viii. 26. 3. 
fizuratively, καταβ. ἕως ddov, to (go i. e.) be cast down 
to the lowest state of wretchedness and shame: Mt. xi. 
23 LTr WH; [Lk. x. 15 WHtxt.Trmrg. Comp.: συγ- 
cataSaive. |* 

κατα-βάλλω: Pass. and Mid. pres. ptep. καταβαλλό- 
pevos; 1 aor. pass. κατεβλήθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. 
for DDN; 1. to cast down: τινά, pass., Rev. xii. 10 
Ree. ; to throw to the ground, prostrate: pass., 2 Co. iv. 9 


καταβαρέω 


(where the metaph. is taken from an athlete or combat- 
ant). 2. to put in a lower place: in the phrase 6e- 
μέλιον καταβάλλομαι, to lay (down) a foundation (Joseph. 
antt. 11, 4, 4; 15,11,3; Dion. H. antt. 3, 69; al.), Heb. 
vi. 1.* 

κατα-βαρέω, -@: 1 aor. κατεβάρησα; prop. to press down 
by an imposed weight; to weigh down; metaph. to bur- 
den: τινά, any one, 2 Co. xii. 16. (Polyb., Diod., App., 
Lcian.) * 

κατα-βαρύνω : i. 4. καταβαρέω (q. ν.} ; pres. pass. ptep. 
καταβαρυνόμενος, Mk. xiv. 40 LT TrWH; see Bape. 
(Sept.; Theophr. et al.) * 

katd-Bacts, -ews, 7, (καταβαίνω), [fr. Hdt. down], de- 
scent; a. the act of descending. b. the place 
of descent: τοῦ ὄρους, i.e. that part of the mountain 
where the descent is made, Lk. xix. 37; so Josh. x. 11 
Sept.; Diod. 4, 21; opp. to ἀνάβασις, the place of ascent, 
way up, 1 Mace. iii. 16, 24; Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 3. So Lat. 
descensus; cf. Herzog on Sall. Cat. 57, 3.* 

κατα βιβάζω : 1 fut. pass. καταβιβασθήσομαι;; fo cause 
to go down (Hat. 1, 87; Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 18; Sept. several 
times for jn; to bring down, Bar. 111. 29); to cast 
down, thrust down: pass., ἕως ddov (see ἅδης, 2), Mt. xi. 
23 RGT; Lk. x. 15 [Trmrg. WH txt. καταβήσῃ (4. ν. 
3)]; εἰς ἅδου, Ezek. xxxi. 10." 

κατα-βολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (καταβάλλω, q. V-); 
ing or laying down: τοῦ σπέρματος (sc. εἰς τὴν μήτραν), 
the injection or depositing of the virile semen in the 
womb, Leian. amor. 19; Galen, aphorism. iv. § 1; of the 
seed of animals and plants, Philo de opif. mund. §§ 22, 
45; σπέρματα τὰ εἰς γῆν ἢ μήτραν καταβαλλόμενα, Anto- 
nin. 4, 36; accordingly many interpret the words Σάρρα 
δύναμιν eis καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβε in Heb. xi. 11, she 
received power to conceive seed. But since it belongs 
to the male καταβάλλειν τὸ σπέρμα, not to the female, 
this interpretation cannot stand [ (ace. to the reading of 
WH mre. αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ, Abr. remains the subj. of AaBev; 
but see 2 below)]; οἵ. Bleek [and, on the other side, 
Kurtz] ad loc. 2. a founding (laying down a foun- 
dation): eis καταβ. σπέρματος, to found a posterity, Heb. 
xi. 11 [but ef. above] (τυραννίδος, Polyb. 13, 6, 2; dua τῇ 
πρώτῃ καταβολῇ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Plat. aquae et ignis comp. 
6. 2). ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, from the foundation of the 
world: Mt. xiii. 35 [L Ὁ Tr WH om. κόσμου]: xxv. 34; 
Lk. xi. 50; Heb. iv. 3; ix. 26; Rev. xiii. 8; xvii. 8; πρὸ 
καταβολῆς κόσμου, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph.i.4; 1 Pet. i. 20.* 

κατα-βραβεύω, impy. 3 pers. sing. καταβραβευέτω ; (prop. 
BpaBevo to be an umpire in a contest, κατά 56. τινός, 
against one); to decide as umpire against one, to declare 
him unworthy of the prize; to defraud of the prize of vic- 
tory: τινά, metaph., to deprive of salvation, Col. ii. 18, 
where cf. Meyer, [Bp. Lghtft., esp. Field, Otium Norv. 
Pars iii.]. (Eustath. ad II. 1, 93, 33 (vss. 402 sq.) κατα- 
BpaBever αὐτόν, Ss φασιν οἱ παλαιοί; but in the earlier 
Grk. writ. that have come down to us, it is found only 
in [pseudo-] Dem. adv. Mid. p. 544 end, where it is used 
of one who by bribing the judges causes another to be 
condemned.) * 


1. a throw- 


330 


καταγωνίζομαι 


καταγγελεύς, -€ws, 6, (καταγγέλλω, 4. ν.}, announcer 
(Vulg. annuntiator), proclaimer: with gen. of the obj., 
Acts xvii. 18. (Eccles. writ.) * 

κατ-αγγέλλω; impf. κατήγγελλον ; 1 aor. κατήγγειλα; 
Pass., pres. καταγγέλλομαι; 2 aor. κατηγγέλην; to an- 
nounce, declare, promulgate, make known; to proclaim 
publicly, publish: τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xiii. 5; xv. 36; 
pass. Acts xvii. 13; ἔθη, Acts xvi. 21; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, 1 Co. 
ix. 14; τὴν ἀνάστασιν τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν, Acts iv. 2; τὰς ἡμέρας 
ταύτας, Acts iii. 24 GLT Tr WH; θεόν [ἃ]. 6], Acts xvii. 
23; Ἰησοῦν, ib. 3; Christ, Phil. i. 16 (17),18; Col. i. 28; 
τινί τι, Acts xiii. 38; xvi. 17; 1 Co. ii. 1; with the in- 
cluded idea of celebrating, commending, openly praising 
(Lat. praedicare) : ri, Ro. i. 8 [A.V. is spoken of }; 1 Co. 
xi. 26. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 5, 38 
where it means /o denounce, report, betray; twice in the 
O. T. viz. 2 Mace. viii. 36; ix. 17. [Cf Westcott on 
1Jn.i.5.]) [Comp.: προ-καταγγέλλω.} " 

κατα-γελάω, -@: impf. 3 pers. plur. κατεγέλων; to de- 
ride, [A. V. laugh to scorn]: τινός, any one [cf. B. § 182, 
15], Mt. ix. 24; Mk. v.40; Lk. viii. 53. (From [Aeschyl. 
and] Hdt. down; Sept.) * 

κατα-γινώσκω; pf. pass. ptep. κατεγνωσμένος ; to find 
fault with, blame: κατεγνωσμένος ἦν, he had incurred the 
censure of the Gentile Christians; Luther rightly, es war 
Klage iiber ihn kommen [i.e. a charge had been laid against 
him; but al. he stood condemned, see Meyer or Ellic. 
in loc.; cf. Bttm. § 134, 4. 8], Gal. ii. 11; to accuse, con- 
demn: twos, any one, 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq., with which ef. Sir. 
xiv. 2 μακάριος, οὗ ov κατέγνω ἡ Ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ. (In these 
and other signif. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hat. 
down; [see Ellicott u. s.].) * 

κατ-άγνυμι : fut. κατεάξω ; 1 aor. κατέαξα (impv. κάταξον, 
Deut. xxxiii. 11); Pass., 2 aor. kareaynv, whence subjune. 
3 pers. plur. κατεαγῶσιν ; 1 aor. κατεάχθην in Sept. Jer. 
xxxi. (xlviii.) 25; (on the syllabic augment of these forms 
οἵ. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 97 sq., ef. i. p. 323 sq.; Matthiae 
i. p- 520 sq.; W. $12, 2; [Curtius, Das Verbum, i. p. 118; 
Veitch 5. v.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T., Praef. p. lxxix.]) ; 
fr. Hom. down; to break: ri, Mt. xii. 20; Jn. xix. 31-33. 
[Syn. see Schmidt ch. 115, 5 and ef. ῥήγνυμι.} " 

κατα-γράφω : impf. 3 pers. sing. karéypapev; to draw 
(forms or figures), to delineate: Jn. viii. 6 cod. D ete. 
which T Tr WH (txt.) would substitute for RG ἔγραφεν. 
(Pausan. 1, 28, 3. Differently in other Grk. writ.) 
[Perh. it may be taken in Jn. 1. c. in a more general sense: 
to mark (cf. Pollux 9, 7, 104, ete.).]* 

κατ-άγω : 2 aor. κατήγαγον ; 1 aor. pass. κατήχθην ; Sept. 
for ΤΙ, to make to descend; to lead down, bring down: 
τινά, Acts xxii. 30; Ro. x.6; τινά foll. by εἰς w. ace. of 
place, Acts ix. 30; xxiii. (15 LT Tr WH], 20, 28; τινά 
foll. by πρός w. ace. of pers., Acts xxii. 15 [RG]; τὸ πλοῖον 
ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν to bring the vessel (down from deep water) to 
the land, Lk. v.11}; κατάγεσθαι; to be brought (down) in 
a ship, to land, touch at: foll. by εἰς w. ace. of place, Acts 
xxi. 3 [LT Tr WH κατήλθομεν]; xxvii. 3; xxviii. 12; 
often so in Grk. writ.* 

κατ-αγωνίζομαι: deponent mid.; 1 aor. κατηγωνισά' 


. 


καταδέω 


μην; 1. to struggle against (Polyb. 2, 42, 3, ete.). 2. 
to overcome (cf. Germ. niederkimpfen): Heb. xi. 33. 
(Polyb., Joseph., Leian., Plut., Aelian.) * 

κατα-δέω, -@: 1 aor. κατέδησα; fr. Hom. down; to bind 
up: τὰ τραύματα, Lk. x. 34. (Sir. xxvii. 21 ace. to the true 
reading τραῦμα.) 

κατά-δηλος, -ov, (δῆλος), thoroughly clear, plain, evident : 
Heb. vii. 15. ({Soph.], Hdt., Xen., Plat.,al.) [Cf δηλος, 
fin. ]* 

κατα-δικάζω ; 1 aor. κατεδίκασα ; 1 aor. pass. κατεδικά- 
σθην; 1 fut. pass. καταδικασθήσομαι; to give judgment 
against (one), to pronounce guilty; to condemn; in class. 
Grk. [where it differs fr. κρίνειν in giving prominence 
to the formal and official as distinguished from the 
inward and logical judging (cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 18, 
6) ] it is foll. by the gen. of the pers., in the N. Τὶ by the 
ace. [B. § 132, 16]: Mt. xii. 7; Lk. vi. 37 [here Tr mrg. 
the simple verb]; Jas. v.6; pass., Mt. xii. 37; [Lk.vi.37° 
(not Trmrg.)]. (Sept. Lam. iii. 35; Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 
3.)* 

κατα-δίκη, -ης, 7); 1. damnatory sentence, condem- 
nation: Acts xxv.15 LT Tr WH; ([Epicharm. in Ath. 
2, 3 p. 86 d.], Polyb., Plut., Iren. 1, 16, 3). 2. pen- 
alty, esp. a fine; (Thue., Dem., Leian.).* 

κατα-διώκω: 1 aor. κατεδίωξα ; Sept. often for \17; to 
follow after, follow up, (esp. of enemies [Thue. et al.]) ; 
in a good sense, of those in search of any one: twa, Mk. 
i. 36. (τὸ ἔλεός σου καταδιώξεταί με, Ps. xxii. (xxill.) 6; 
οὐ κατεδίωξαν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν, 1 S. xxx. 22; ὀπίσω τινός, to fol- 
low after one in order to gain his favor, Sir. xxvii. 17.) * 

κατα-δουλόω, -@; fut. καταδουλώσω; 1 aor. mid. κατε- 
δουλωσάμην ; (κατά under [see xara, II. 3]); [fr. Hat. 
down |; to bring into bondage, enslave: τινά, Gal. ii. 4 LT 
Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 20 [ef. W. 255 sq. (240)]; mid. to en- 
slave to one’s self, bring into bondage to one’s self: Gal. 
ii. 4 RG* 

κατα-δυναστεύω; pres. pass. ptep. καταδυναστευόμενος ; 
Sept. for in, pwy, ete.; with gen. of pers. [W. 206 
(193); B. 169 (147)], to exercise harsh control over one, 
to use one’s power against one: Jas. ii. 6 [not Tdf. (see 
below) ] (Diod. 13, 73); τινά, to oppress one (Xen. cony. 
5, 8; often in Sept.): Jas. ii. 6 Tdf.; pass. Acts x. 38.* 

κατάθεμα, -ros, τό, i. q- κατανάθεμα (q. v.), of which it 
seems to be a vulgar corruption by syncope [ef. Kou- 
manoudes, Συναγωγὴ λέξεων ἀθησαύρ. κτλ. 5. V. kards]; a 
curse; by meton. worthy of execration, an accursed thing: 
Rey. xxii. 3 [Rec. κατανάθεμα ; cf. Just. M. quaest. et resp. 
121 fin. ; ‘Teaching’ 16, 5]. Not found in prof. auth.* 

κατα-θεματίζω; (κατάθεμα. q.Vv-); to call down direst evils 
on, to curse vehemently: Mt. xxvi. 74 (Mec. καταναθεματί- 
¢ew). (ren. adv. haer. 1, 13, 4 and 16, 3.)* 

κατ-αισχύνω; Pass., impf. caryoyuvounv; 1 aor. κατῃ- 
σχύνθην ; fut. καταισχυνθήσομαι ; Sept. chiefly for 37 
and v3; asin Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down; 1. to dis- 
honor, disgrace: τὴν κεφαλήν, 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. (σποδῷ τὴν 
κεφαλήν, Joseph. antt. 20, 4, 2). 2. to put to shame, 
make ashamed : τινά, 1 Co.i.27; xi. 22; pass. to beashamed, 
blush with shame: Lk. xiii. 17; 2 Co. vii. 14; ix. 43 1 Pet. 


991 


κατακλη ροδοτέω 


iii. 16; by a Hebr. usage one is said to be put to shame 
who suffers a repulse, or whom some hope has deceived ; 
hence ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, does not disappoint: Ro. v. 5 
(ef. Ps. xxi. (xxil.) 6; xxiv. (xxv.) 2sq.5 exviii. (cxix.) 
116); pass., Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 6, (Is. xxviii. 
16; Sir. ii. 10).* 

kata-kalw: impf. 3 pers. plur. κατέκαιον ; fut. κατακαύσω; 
1 aor. inf. κατακαῦσαι; Pass., pres. κατακαίομαι; 2 aor. 
κατεκάην; 2 fut. κατακαήσομαι [οἵ. ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 123; 
WH. App.p. 170°]; 1 fut. κατακαυθήσομαι (Kiithner i. 841; 
[Veitch 5. ν. καίω; B. 60 (53); W. 87 (83)]); Sept. 
chiefly for 77; fr. Hom. down; to burn up [see κατά, 
1Π. 4], consume by fire: ri, Mt. xiii. 30; Acts xix. 19; 
pass., 1 Co. iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. iii. 10 [Tr WH 
εὑρεθήσεται, see εὑρίσκω, 1 a. fin.]; Rev. viii. 7; with πυρί 
added, Mt. iii. 12; xiii. 40 R LT WH, but G Tr καίω; Lk. 
iii. 17, (Ex. xxix. 14; xxxii. 20 Alex., etc.; see καίω). 
ἐν πυρί (often so in Sept.), Rey. xvii. 16; xviii. 8. 
and κατακαίω are distinguished in Ex. iii. 2.) * 

κατα-καλύπτω : Sept. for 702; fr. Hom. down; to cover 
up [see κατά, III. 3]; Mid. pres. κατακαλύπτομαι, to veil 
or cover one’s self: 1 Co. xi. 6; τὴν κεφαλήν, one’s head, 
ios: Ce 

κατα-καυχάομαι, -ῶμαι, 2 pers. sing. κατακαυχᾶσαι (contr. 
fr. κατακαυχάεσαι) for the Attic κατακαυχᾷ (Ko. xi. 18; cf. 
W.§13, 2b.; [B. 42 (37); Soph. Lex., Introd. p. 40 sq.; 
Τα Proleg. p. 123 sq.]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 360), impy. 2 
pers. sing. κατακαυχῶ (Ro. xi. 18); (κατά against [ef. κατά, 
II. 177); prop. to glory against, to exult over, to boast one’s 
self to the injury of (a person or a thing): τινός, Ro. xi. 
18; Tdf. in Jas. iii. 14; κατά τινος, ibid. RG LTr WH 
[B. 185 (160); W. § 30, 9 b. (ef. 432 (402))]; devs (ig. 
ὁ ἐλεῶν) κατακαυχᾶται κρίσεως, mercy boasts itself supe- 
rior to judement, i. e. full of glad confidence has no fear 
of judgment, Jas. ii. 13. (Zech. x. 12; Jer. xxvii. (4. 
10, 38; not found in prof. auth.) * 

kard-ketpar; impf. 3 pers. sing. κατέκειτο; (κεῖμαι, to 
lie [see xara, III. 1]); to have lain down i. 6. to lie pros- 
trate; a. of the sick [ef. colloq. ‘down εἰς κ᾽ (Hat. 7, 
229; Leian. Icarom. 31; [Plut. vit. Cie. 43, 3]): Mk. i. 
30; Jn. v.6; Acts xxviii. 8; foll. by ἐπί w. dat. of the 
couch or pallet, Mk. ii. 4 RG Lmrg.; [Acts ix. 33 RG); 
Lk. v.25 RL; ἐπί τινος, Acts ix. 33 [L T Tr WH]; ἐπί 
τι, Lk. ν. 25 T Tr WH [B. § 147, 24 note; W.408 (381) 
note]; ἐν w. dat. of place, Jn. ν. 3. b. of those at 
meals, to recline (Athen. 1, 42 p. 23 ¢.; Xen. an. 6, 1, 4; 
cony. 1, 14; Plat. conv. p. 177 d.; rep. ii. p. 372 d., ete. ; 
Diog. Laért. 7, 1, 19; see ἀνάκειμαι) : absol., Mk. xiv. 3; 
Lk. ν. 29; foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Mk. ii. 15; 1 Co. 
vill. 10; Lk. vii. 37 LT Tr WH* 

κατα-κλάω, -@: 1 aor. κατέκλασα; fr. Tom. down; fo 
break in pieces (cf. Germ. zerbrechen [see κατά, III. 4]): 
τοὺς ἄρτους, Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16.* 

κατα-κλείω: 1 aor. κατέκλεισα; fr. [Hdt.], Thue. and 
Xen. down; to shut up, confine: twa ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ, Lk. 
iii. 20; ἐν (which Rec. om.) φυλακαῖς, Acts xxvi. 10 (Jer. 
XxXxix. (xxxii.) 3).* 

κατα-κληροδοτέω, -@ (see xara, III. 6): 1 aor. xarexAnpo- 


(καίω 


κατακληρονομέω 


δότῃσα; to distribute by lot; to distribute as an inheritance: 
τινί τι, Acts xiii. 19 Rec.; see the foll. word. (Deut. i. 
38; xxi. 16; Josh. xix. 51 Ald.,Compl.; 1 Mace. iii. 36, 
—in all with the var. κατακληρονομεῖν. Not found in 
prof. auth.) * 

κατα-κληρονομέω, -@ [566 κατά, III. 6]: 1 aor. κατεκληρο- 
νόμησα; to distribute by lot, to distribute as an inheritance: 
τινί τι, Acts xiii. 19 G LT Tr WH. (Num. xxxiv. 18; 
Deut. iii. 28; Josh. xiv. 1; Judg. xi. 24 Alex.; 1S. ii. 8; 
1 Esr, viii. 82. Also often intrans. fo receive, obtain, ac- 
quire as an inheritance; as, Deut. i. 8 var., 38; ii. 21. 
Not found in prof. auth.) * 

kata-kAivw: 1 aor. κατέκλινα ; 1 aor. pass. κατεκλίθην ; 
fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. in ref. to eating, to make 
to recline: twa, Lk. ix. 14, [also 15 T Tr WH], (emi τὸ 
δεῖπνον, Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 21); mid., with 1 aor. pass., to 
recline (at table): Lk. vii. 36 LT Tr WH; xxiv. 30; εἰς 
τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν, Lk. xiv. 8, (εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν, Judith xii. 15; 
eis τὸ δεῖπνον, Joseph. antt. 6, 8, 1 [var.]).* 

κατα-κλύζω : 1 aor. pass. ptep. κατακλυσθείς; fr. [Pind., 
Hdt.], Aeschyl. down; to overwhelm with water, to sub- 
merge, deluge, [cf. κατά, III. 4]: 2 Pet. iii. 6. (Sept. sev- 
eral times for WU.) * 

κατα-κλυσμός, -ov, ὁ, (κατακλύζω),, inundation, deluge: of 
Noah's deluge, Mt. xxiv. 38 sq.; Lk. xvii. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 
5. (Sept. for 2331; Plato, Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.) * 

κατ-ακολουθέω, -@; 1 aor. ptep. κατακολουθήσας ; to fol- 
low after [see κατά, IIT. 5]: Lk. xxiii. 555; τινί, Acts xvi. 
17. [Sept., Polyb., Plut., Joseph., al.]* 

κατα-κόπτω:; 1. to cut up, cut to pieces, [see κατά, 
IIL. 4]; to slay: Is. xxvii. 9; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 7, ete.; Hat. 
et sqq- 2. to beat, bruise: ἑαυτὸν λίθοις, Mk. v. 
5; [al. retain here the primary meaning, to cut, gash, 
mangle ].* 

κατα-κρημνίζω : 1 aor. inf. κατακρημνίσαι ; fo cast down 
a precipice; to throw down headlong: Lk. iv. 29. (2 Chr. 
xxv. 12; 2 Macc. xiv. 43; 4 Mace. iv. 25; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 
7; 8, 3,41; Dem. 446,11; Diod. 4, 31; [Philo de agric. 
Νοῦ 8 15]; Joseph. antt. 6, 6, 2; 9, 9, 1.) * 

κατά-κριμα, -ros, τό, (Katakpivw), damnalory sentence, 
condemnation: Ro. ν. 16 (on which see κρίμα, 2), ib. 18; 
Vili. 1. (κατακριμάτων ἀφέσεις, Dion. Hal. 6, 61.) * 

κατα-κρίνω; fut. κατακρινῶ; 1 aor. κατέκρινα ; Vass., pf. 
κατακέκριμαι; 1 aor. κατεκρίθην; 1 fut. κατακριθήσομαι; to 
give Judgment against (one [see κατά, III. 17}, 10. judge 
worthy of punishment, to condemn; a. prop.: Ro. 
vill. 34; τινά, Jn. viii. 10 sq.; Ro. ii. 1, where it is dis- 
ting. fr. κρίνειν, as in 1 Co. xi. 32; 'pass., Mt. xxvii. 3; 
to. xiv. 23; τινὰ θανάτῳ, to adjudge one to death, con- 
demn to death, Mt. xx. 18 [TdE. εἰς θάνατον] ; Mk. x. 33, 
(κεκριμμένοι θανάτῳ, to eternal death, Barn. ep. 10, 5) ; 
τῇ καταστροφῇ. 2 Pet. ii. 6 [WHom. Trmrg. br. κατα- 
στροφῇ], (the Greeks say κατακρ. τινὰ θανάτου or θάνα- 
τον; cf. W. 210 (197 sq.); Β. § 132,16; Grimm on Sap. 
ii. 20); w. the ace. and inf., τινὰ ἔνοχον εἶναι θανάτου. Mk. 
xiv. 64; simply, of God condemning one to eternal mis- 
ery: pass., Mk. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xi. 32; Jas. v. 9 Ree. b. 
improp. i. 6. by one’s good example to render another's 


332 


καταλαμβάνω 


wickedness the more evident and censurable: Mt. xii. 41 
sq.; Lk. xi. 31 sq.; Heb. xi. 7. In a peculiar use of the 
word, occasioned by the employment of the term κατά- 
κριμα (in vs. 1), Paul says, Ro. viii. 3, ὁ θεὸς κατέκρινε τὴν 
ἁμαρτίαν ἐν τῇ σαρκί, 1. 6. through his Son, who partook 
of human nature but was without sin, God deprived sin 
(which is the ground of the κατάκριμα) of its power in 
human nature (looked at in the general), broke its 
deadly sway, (just as the condemnation and punishment 
of wicked men puts an end to their power to injure or 
do harm). [(From Pind. and Hdt. down.)]* 

κατά-κρισις, -ews, 7, (κατακρίνων, condemnation: 2 Co. 
iii. 9 (see διακονία, 2 a.); πρὸς κατάκρισιν, in order to con- 
demn, 2 Co. vii. 8. (Not found in prof. auth.) * 

κατα-κυριεύω ; 1 aor. ptep. κατακυριεύσας ; (κατά [q. ν. 
ILI. 3] under) ; a. to bring under one’s power, lo sub- 
Ject to one’s self, to subdue, master: twos, Acts xix. 16 
(Diod. 14, 64; for wad Gen. i. 28; Sir. xvii. 4). bs 
to hold in subjection, to be master of, exercise lordship over: 
τινός, Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x. 42; 1 Pet. v. 3; (of the benign 
government of God, Jer. iii. 14).* 

κατα-λαλέω, -@; 0 speak against one, to criminate, tra- 
duce: τινός (in class. Grk. mostly w. the ace.; in the 
Sept. chiefly foll. by κατά twos), Jas. iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 12; 
iii. 16 [here T Trmrg. WH ἐν 6 καταλαλεῖσθε, wherein ye 
are spoken against." 

κατα-λαλιά, -ds, ἡ, (κατάλαλος, 4. v.), defamation, evil- 
speaking: 2 Co. xii. 20; 1 Pet. ii. 1, [on the plur. οἵ. W. 
176 (166); B.77(67)]. (Sap.i.11; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
30,1; 35, 5, and 660]. writ.; not found in class. Grk.) * 

κατά-λαλος, -ov, 6, a defamer, evil speaker, [A. V. back- 
biters]: Ro. i. 30. (Found nowhere else [Herm. sim. 6, 
5, 5; also as adj. 8, 7, 2; 9, 26, 7].)* 

κατα-λαμβάνω: 2 aor. κατέλαβον; pf. inf. κατειληφέναι ; 
Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. κατείληπται (Jn. vill. 4 as given 
in LT Tr WI txt.), pf. ptep. κατειλημμένος ; 1 aor. κα- 
τειλήφθην (Jn. vili. 4 R**e*G) [on the augm. ef. W. 
§ 12, 6], and κατεληφθην (Phil. iii. 12 RG), and xare- 
λήμφθην (ibid. LT Tr WH; on the p see 8. v. M, p); 
Mid., pres. καταλαμβάνομαι; 2 aor. κατελαβόμην; cf. 
Kiihner i. p. 856; [Veitch, 5. v. λαμβάνω]; Sept. for 
YW, 339, also for 30, ete.; [fr. Hom. down]; to lay 
hold of; i. 6. 1. to lay hold of so as to make one’s 
own, to obtain, attain to: w. the ace. of the thing; the 
prize of victory, 1 Co. ix. 24; Phil. iii. 12 sq. 5 τὴν δικαιο- 
σύνην, Ro. ix. 30; 1. 4- to make one’s own, to take into 
one’s self, appropriate: ἡ σκοτία αὐτὸ (i. 6. τὸ φῶς) οὐ Ka- 
τέλαβεν, Jn. i. 5. 2. to seize upon, take possession of, 
(Lat. occupare); 8. of evils overtaking one (so in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down): τινά, σκοτία, Jn. xii. 35; [so physi- 
cally, Jn. vi. 17 Tdf.]; of the last day overtaking the 
wicked with destruction, 1 Th. v. 4; of a demon about 
to torment one, Mk. ix. 18. b. in a good sense, of 
Christ by his holy power and influence laying hold of 
the human mind and will, in order to prompt and govern 
it; ΕἸ αἰ 1. 3. to detect, catch: τινὰ ἔν τινι, in 
pass. Jn. viii. 3 [WH ἐπί r.]; with a ptep. indicating 
the crime, ib. 4. 4. to lay hold of with the mind; 


καταλέγω 


to understand, perceive, learn, comprehend, (Plat. Phaedr. 
p- 250d.; Axioch. p. 370a.; Polyb. 8, 4,6; Philo, vita 
contempl. § 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46); Mid. (Dion. 
Hal. antt. 2, 66; [cf. W. 253 (238)]), foll. by ὅτι, Acts 
iv. 13; x. 34; foll. by the acc. w. inf., Acts xxv. 25; foll. 
by indir. dise., Eph. iii. 18." 


κατα-λέγω : pres. pass. impy. καταλεγέσθω; 1. prop. 
to lay down; mid. to lie down (Hom.). 2. to narrate 
at length, recount, set forth, [fr. Hom. on]. 3. to set 


down in a list or register, to enroll,(esp. soldiers; see 
Passow s. v. 5; [L. and 5. 5. v. IIL. 2 (yet the latter connect 
this use with the signif. to choose)]): of those widows 
who held a prominent place in the church and exercised 
a certain superintendence over the rest of the women, 
and had charge of the widows and orphans supported at 
public expense, 1 Tim. v. 9 [ W. 590 (549)]; ef. De Wette 
{or Ellicott] ad loc.* 

κατάτλειμμα, -ros, τό, (καταλείπω), α remnant, remains: 
Ro. ix. 27 RG, where it is equiv. to a few, a small part; 
see ὑπόλειμμα. (Sept., Galen.) * 

κατα-λείπω ; fut. καταλείψω ; 1 aor. κατέλειψα (in later 
auth.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 713 sqq.; [Veitch s. v. λείπω; 
WH. App. p. 169 sq.]); 2 aor. κατέλιπον ; Pass., pres. κα- 
ταλείπομαι; pf. ptep. καταλελειμμένος [ WH -Acppevos, see 
(their App. p. 154°, and) 8. v.I, ¢]; 1 aor. κατελείφθην; (see 
κατά, III. 5); Sept. for win, Vswn, tip; [fr. Hom. 
down ]; to leave behind; with ace. of place or pers. ; a. 
i q. to depart from, leave, a pers. or thing: Mt. iv. 13; 
vi. 4; xxi. 17; Heb. xi. 27 ; metaph. εὐθεῖαν ὁδόν, to for- 
sake true religion, 2 Pet. ii. 15. pass. to be left: In. viii. 
9; i.q. to remain, foll. by ἐν with dat. of place, 1 Th. iii. 
1. b. i. q. to bid (one) to remain: twain a place, Acts 
xviii. 19; Tit. i. 5 [R G; al. ἀπολείπω]. ec. to forsake, 
leave to one’s self a pers. or thing, by ceasing to care for 
it, to abandon, leave in the lurch: τὸν πατέρα k. τὴν μητέρα, 
Mt. xix.5; Mk. x. 7; Eph. v. 31, fr. Gen. ii. 24; pass. to 
be abandoned, forsaken: eis adov [or ἅδην (q. v. 2)], Acts 
ii. 31 Ree. (see ἐγκαταλείπω, 1); w. ace. of the thing, Mk. 
xiv. 52; Lk. [v. 28]; xv. 4; τὸν λόγον, to neglect the 
office of instruction, Acts vi. 2. ἃ. to cause to be left 
over, to reserve, to leave remaining: ἐμαυτῷ, Ro. xi. 4 (1 
K. xix. 18); καταλείπεται, there still remains, ἐπαγγελία, ἃ 
promise (to be made good by the event), Heb. iv. 1 (μάχη, 
Xen. Cyr. 2, 3,11; σωτηρίας ἐλπίς, Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 4, 5, 4); 
τινά with inf. (to leave any business to be done by one 
alone), Lk. x. 40. e. like our leave behind, it is used 
of one who on being called away cannot take another 
with him: Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 14; spec. of the dying (to 
leave behind), Mk. xii.19, [21 Lmrg.T Tr WH]; Lk. 
xx. 31, (Deut. xxviii. 54; Prov. xx. 7; and often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. Il. 24, 726; Od. 21,330n).  f. like our 
leave i. q. leave alone, disregard: of those who sail past a 
place without stopping, Acts xxi. 3. [Comp.: ἐγικατα- 
λείπω.}" 

κατα-λιθάζω: fut. καταλιθάσω; (see κατά, III. 8 [ef. W. 
102 (97)]); to overwhelm with stones, to stone: Lk. xx. 6. 
(Eccles. writ.) * 


κατ-αλλαγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (καταλλάσσω, 4. V-) ; 1. ez- 


888 


κατάλυμα 


change; of the business of money-changers, exchang- 
ing equiv. values [(Aristot., al.)]. Hence 2. ad- 
Justment of a difference, reconciliation, restoration to favor, 
[fr. Aeschyl. on]; in the N. T., of the restoration of the 
favor of God to sinners that repent and put their trust 
in the expiatory death of Christ: 2 Co. ν. 18 sq.;_ w. the 
gen. of the one received into favor, τοῦ κόσμου (opp. to 
ἀποβολή), Ro. xi. 15; καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν, we received 
the blessing of the recovered favor of God, Ro. v.11; w. 
the gen. of him whose favor is recovered, 2 Mace. νυ. 20. 
[Cf. Trench § Ixxvii.]* 

κατ-αλλάσσω; 1 aor. ptep. καταλλάξας; 2 aor. pass. 
κατηλλάγην ; prop. to change, exchange, as coins for others 
of equal value; hence fo reconcile (those who are at vari- 
ance): τινάς, aS τοὺς Θηβαίους καὶ τοὺς Πλαταιέας, Hat. 6, 
108; κατήλλαξάν odeas οἱ Πάριοι, 5, 29; Aristot. oecon. 
2, 15, 9 [p. 1348", 9] κατήλλαξεν αὐτοὺς πρὸς ἀλλήλους ; 
pass. τινί, to return into favor with, be reconciled to, one, 
Eur. Iph. Aul. 1157; Plat. rep. 8 p. 566 e.; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, 
Thue. 4, 59; but the Pass. is used also where only one 
ceases to be angry with another and receives him into 
favor; thus καταλλαγείς, received by Cyrus into favor, 
Xen. an. 1, 6, 1; καταλλάττεται πρὸς αὐτήν, regained her 
favor, Joseph. antt. 5, 2, 8; and, on the other hand, God 
is said καταλλαγῆναί τινι, with whom he ceases to be of- 
fended, to whom he grants his favor anew, whose sins he 
pardons, 2 Mace. i. 5; vii. 33; viii. 29; Joseph. antt. 6, 
7, 4 cf. 7, 8, 4, (so ἐπικαταλλάττεσθαί τινι, Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor. 48, 1). In the N. T. God is said καταλλάσσειν 
ἑαυτῷ twa, to receive one into his favor, [A. V. reconcile 
one to himself |, 2 Co. ν. 18 sq. (where in the added pteps. 
two arguments are adduced which prove that God has 
done this: first, that he does not impute to men their 
trespasses; second, that he has deposited the doctrine 
of reconciliation in the souls of the preachers of the 
gospel) ; καταλλαγῆναι τῷ θεῷ, to be restored to the favor 
of God, to recover God’s favor, Ro. v. 10 [but see ἐχθρός, 
2]; καταλλάγητε τῷ θεῷ, allow yourselves to be recon- 
ciled to God; do not oppose your return into his favor, 
but lay hold of that favor now offered you, 2 Co. y. 20. 
of awoman: καταλλαγήτω τῷ ἀνδρί, let her return into 
harmony with [A. V. be reconciled to} her husband, 1 Co. 
vii. 11. Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [who 
shows (in opp. to Tittmann, N. T. Syn. i. 102, et al.) that 
καταλλάσσω and διαλλάσσω are used promiscuously ; the 
prepp- merely intensify (in slightly different modes) the 
meaning of the simple verb, and there is no evidence 
that one compound is stronger than the other; διαλλ. 
and its derivatives are more common in Attic, καταλλ. 
and its derivatives in later writers. Comp.: ἀπο-καταλ- 
Adoow. | * 

κατάτλοιπος, -op, (λοιπός), left remaining: [oi κατάλοι- 
ποι τ. ἀνθρώπων A. V. the residue of men], Acts xv. 17. 
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sept.) * 

κατά-λυμα, -ros, τό, (fr. καταλύω, α ; 4.ν.), an inn, lodg- 
ing-place : Lk. ii. 7 (for ji, Ex. iv. 24); an eating-room, 
dining-room, [ A.V. quest-chamber]: Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 
11; in the same sense for 73W, 1S. ix. 22. (Polyb. 2 


καταλύω 


86,1 [plur.]; 32,19, 2; Diod. 14, 93,5; [8].; ef. W. 25, 
93 (89)].)* 

κατα-λύω ; fut.cara\vow; 1 aor. κατέλυσα; 1 aor. pass. 
κατελύθην ; 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. καταλυθήσεται ; to dis- 
solve, disunite, [see κατά, IIT. 4]; a. (what has been 
joined together) i. q. to destroy, demolish: λίθους [A. V. 
throw down], Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. xiii. 2; Lk. xxi. 6; τὸν 
ναόν, Mt. xxvi. 61; xxvii. 40; Mk. xiv. 58; xv. 29; Acts 
vi. 14; οἰκίαν, 2 Co. v.13; univ. opp. to οἰκοδομεῖν, Gal. 11. 
18 (2 Esdr. ν. 12; Hom. 1]. 9, 24sq.; 2,117; τεύχη, Eur. 
Tro. 819; γέφυραν, Hdian. 8, 4, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]). b. 
metaph. fo overthrow i. 6. render vain, deprive of success, 
bring to naught: τὴν βουλὴν ἣ τὸ ἔργον, Acts v. 38 (τὰς 
ἀπειλάς, 4 Mace. iv. 16); τινά, to render fruitless one’s 
desires, endeavors, ete. ibid. 39 G 1, Τ Tr WH (Plat. 
lege. 4 p 714 ¢.); to subvert, overthrow: τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ 
(see ἀγαθός, 2), Ro. xiv. 20. As in class. Grk. fr. Hat. 
down, of institutions, forms of government, laws, etc., to 
deprive of force, annul, abrogate, discard: τὸν νόμον, Mt. 
ν. 17 (2 Mace. ii. 22; Xen. mem. 4, 4, 14; Isocr. paneg. 
§55; Philost. ν. Apoll. 4, 40). c. of travellers, fo halt 
on a journey, to put up, lodge, (the fig. expression origi- 
nating in the circumstance that, to put up for the night, 
the straps and packs of the beasts of burden are unbound 
and taken off; or, perh. more correctly, fr. the fact that 
the traveller’s garments, tied up when he is on the jour- 
ney, are unloosed at its end; cf. ἀναλύω, 2): Lk. ix. 12; 
xix. 7; so in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc., Xen., Plat. down; 
Sept. for 1, Gen. xix. 2; xxiv. 23, 25, etc.; Sir. xiv. 25, 
27; xxxvi. 31; [ef. B. 145 (127)].” 

καταμανθάνω: 2 aor. κατέμαθον ; met with fr. Hdt. 
down; esp. freq. in Xen. and Plat.; to learn thoroughly 
[see xara, III. 1], examine carefully; to consider well: τί 
foll. by πῶς, Mt. vi. 28. (Gen. xxiv. 21; Job xxxv. 5, 
οἷο. ; παρθένον, Sir. ix. 5; κάλλος ἀλλότριον, ibid. 8.) * 

κατα-μαρτυρέω, -@; 10 bear witness against: τί τινος, 
testify a thing against one [B..165 (144), ef. 178 (154) ], 
Mt. xxvi. 62; xxvii.13; Mk. xiv. 60, and RG in xv. 4. 
(1 K. xx. (xxi.) 10,13; Job xv.6; among Grk. writ. esp. 
by the Attic orators.) * 

kata-pévw; 10 remain permanently, to abide: Actsi. 13. 
(Num. xxii. 8; Judith xvi. 20; Arstph., Xen., Philo de 
gigant. § 5.)* 

καταμόνας, and (as it is now usually written [so L T 
Tr WI1)) separately, κατὰ μόνας (se. χώρας), apart, alone: 
Mk. iv.10; Lk.ix.18. (Thue. 1, 32.37; Xen. mem. 3, 
7,4; Joseph. antt. 18, 3,4; Sept. for 773 and 1729, Ps. 
iv. 9; Jer. xv. 17, etc.) * 

κατ-ανάτθεμα, -ros, τό, once in Rev. xxii. 3 Rec.; see 
ἀνάθεμα and κατάθεμα. Not found in prof. auth.* 

κατ-ανα-θεματίζω ; (κατανάθεμα, q. V-); i. 4. καταθεμα- 
τίζω (q.v.): Mt. xxvi. 74 Rec. (Just. Μ. dial. c. Tr. c. 
47, and other eccl. writ.) * 

κατ-αν-αλίσκω ; (see ἀνηλίσκω, and κατά, III. 4); to 
consume: of fire, Heb. xii. 29 after Deut. iv. 243; ix. 3. 
(In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down; Sept. several 
times for or.) * 

κατα-ναρκάω, -@: fut. καταναρκήσω: 1 aor. κατενάρκησα; 


8894 


κατανυσσὼω 


(ναρκάω to become numb, torpid; in Sept. trans. to 
affect with numbness, make torpid, Gen. xxxii. 25, 32; 
Job xxxiii. 19; fr. νάρκη torpor); prop. fo cause to grow 
numb or torpid; intrans. lo be torpid, inactive, to the det- 
riment of one; to weigh heavily upon, be burdensome to: 
τινός (gen. of pers.), 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); xii. 13 sq. (Hesych. 
katevapknoa~ κατεβάρησα [ἃ]. ¢Bapuvva]); Jerome, ad Al- 
gas. 10 [ (iv. 204 ed. Benedict.) ], discovers a Cilicism in 
this use of the word [cf. W. 27]. Among prof. auth. 
used by Hippocr. alone, and in a pass. sense, to be quite 
numb or stiff." 

κατα-νεύω: 1 aor. κατένευσα; fr. Hom. down; to nod 
to, make a sign to: τινί, foll. by rod w. aor. inf., to indi- 
cate to another by a nod or sign what one wishes him to 
do [A. V. beckoned to... that they should come, etc.], Lk. 
Wander 

κατα-νοέω, -ὦ ; impf. κατενόουν ; 1 aor. κατενόησα; fr. 
Hdt. down; Sept. here and there for }}/3nn, 0°30, 
m1; 1. to perceive, remark, observe, understand : ti, 
Mt. vii. 3; Lk. vi. 41; xx. 23; Acts xxvii. 39. 2. to 
consider attentively, fix one’s eyes or mind upon: τί, Lk. 
xii. 24, 27; Acts xi.6; Ro. iv. 19; w. the ace. of the thing 
omitted, as being understood fr. the context, Acts vii. 31 
sq-; twa, Heb. iii. 1; x. 24; Jas. i. 23 sq.* 

κατ-αντάω, -@: 1 aor. κατήντησα; pi. κατήντηκα (1 Co. 
x.11LTTr WH); to come to, arrive at; a. prop.: 
foll. by εἰς w. ace. of place, Acts xvi. 1; xviii. 19, 24; 
xxi. 7; xxv.13; xxvil.12; xxviii. 13, (2 Macc. iv. 44); 
ἀντικρύ τινος, to a place over against, opposite another, 
Acts xx. 15; els τινα τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν, 1. 6. 
whose lifetime occurs at the ends of the ages, 1 Co. x. 
11. b. metaph. εἴς τι, like the Lat. ad aliquid per- 
venio, i. 6. to attain to a thing: Acts xxvi. 7; Eph. iv. 13; 
Phil. iii. 11; καταντᾷ τι εἴς twa, to one, that he may be- 
come partaker of it, 1 Co. xiv. 36. (Polyb., Diod.; 
eccl. writ.) * 

κατάνυξις, -ews, 1), (κατανύσσω, q. V-)} 1. a prick- 
ing, piercing, (Vulg. compunctio). 2. severe sorrow, 
extreme grief. 3. insensibility or torpor of mind, 
such as extreme grief easily produces; hence πνεῦμα 
κατανύξεως, a spirit of stupor, which renders their souls 
torpid, i. e. so insensible that they are not affected at 
all by the offer made them of salvation through the Mes- 
siah, Ro. xi. 8 fr. Is. xxix. 10 Sept. (where the Hebr. 
ANIA mM, a spirit of deep sleep, is somewhat loosely so 
rendered; οἶνος κατανύξεως for mya jt, wine which 
produces dizziness, reeling, Germ. Taumelwein, Ps. lix. 
(Ix.) 5). Not found in prof. auth. Cf. Fritzsche’s full 
discussion of the word in his Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 558 
sqq.; [ef. W. 94 (90); Bp. Lghtft. ‘Fresh Revision’ ete. 
p- 139 note].* 

καταινύσσω: 2 aor. pass. κατενύγην [B. 63 (55)]; 40 
prick, pierce; metaph. to pain the mind sharply, agitate τὶ 
vehemently: used esp. of the emotion of sorrow; κατενύγη- 
σαν τῇ καρδίᾳ (τὴν καρδίαν L'T Tr WH), they were smit- 
ten in heart with poignant sorrow [A. V. lit. pricked], 
Acts ii. 37 (κατανενυγμένον τῇ καρδίᾳ, Ps. eviii. (cix.) 16; 
add, Gen. xxxiv. 7; Sir. xii. 12; xiv. 1, ete.;. of lust, Sus. 


καταξιόω 


10; of violent pity, Joann. Malal. chronogr. 1, 18, ed. 
Bonn. p. 460). Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 558 sqq.* 

κατ-αξιόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. pass. κατηξιώθην; to account worthy, 
judye worthy : τινά τινος, one of a thing, 2 Th. i. 5 (Polyb. 
1, 23, 3, ete.; Diod. 2, 60; Joseph. antt. 15, 3, 8); foll. 
by an inf., Lk. xx. 35; xxi. 80 [T Tr txt. WH κατισχύ- 
σητε]; Acts v. 41, (Dem. 1383, 11 [cf. Plat. Tim. 30 ¢.]).* 

κατα-πατέω, -@; fut. καταπατήσω (Mt. vii. 6 LT Tr 
WH); 1 aor. κατεπάτησα; Pass., pres. καταπατοῦμαι; 
1 aor. κατεπατήθην ; to tread down [see κατά, IIL. 1], tram- 
ple under foot: τί and twa, Mt. v.13; vii. 6; Lk. viii. 5; 
xii. 1, (Hadt. et sqq.; Sept.); metaph., like the Lat. con- 
culco, to trample on i. 4. to treat with rudeness and insult, 
2 Mace. viii. 2, etc.; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 61 [where 
its use to denote desecration is illustrated]; to spurn, 
treat with insulting neglect: ov υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb. x. 29; 
ὅρκια, Hom. I. 4,157; τοὺς νόμους, Plat. legg.4, 114 ἃ.; τὰ 
γράμματα, Gorg. p. 484 a.; τοὺς λόγους, Epict. 1, 8, 10; 
τὰ ῥήματά μου, Job vi. 3 Aq.* 

κατά-παυσις, -ews, 1), (καταπαύω, q. V-)} 1. actively, 
a putting to rest: τῶν πνευμάτων, a calming of the winds, 
Theophr. de ventis 18; τυράννων, removal from office, 
Hat. 5, 38. 2. In the Grk. Scriptures (Sept. sev- 
eral times for 91337) intrans. a resting, rest: ἡμέρα τῆς 
καταπ. the day of rest, the sabbath, 2 Mace. xv. 1; τόπος 
τῆς Karam. pov, where I may rest, Acts viil.49. Metaph. 
ἡ Karam. Tov θεοῦ, the heavenly blessedness in which God 
dwells, and of which he has promised to make persever- 
ing believers in Christ partakers after the toils and trials 
of life on earth are ended: Heb. iii. 11, 18; iv. 1, 3, 5, 
10 sq., (after Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11, where the expression 
denotes the fixed and tranquil abode promised to the 
Israelites in the land of Palestine).* 

Kata-ravw: 1 aor. κατέπαυσα; (κατά, like the Germ. 
nieder, down) ; 1. trans. (Sept. for 13D, maw) 
to make quiet, to cause to be at rest, to grant rest; i.e. a. 
to lead to a quiet abode: twa, Heb. iv. 8 (Ex. xxxiii. 14; 
Deut. iii. 20; v.33; xii. 10; Josh.i. 13,15; 2 Chr. xiv. 
7; xxxil. 22; Sir. xxiv. 11). b. to still, restrain, to 
cause (one striving to do something) éo desist: foll. by 
τοῦ μή and an inf., Acts xiv. 18 [ef. B. § 140, 16 B.; 
W. 325 (305) ]. 2. intrans. to rest, take rest (Hebr. 
133, NI): ἀπό τινος, Heb. iv. 4, 10, (Gen. 11. 2). In the 
same and other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.* 

κατα-πέτασμα, -ros, τό, (καταπετάννυμι to spread out 
over, to cover), an Alex. Grk. word for παραπέτασμα, 
which the other Greeks use fr. Hdt. down; a veil spread 
out, a curtain, —the name given in the Grk. Scriptures, 
as well as in the writings of Philo and Josephus, to the 
two curtains in the temple at Jerusalem (τὰ καταπετά- 
σματα, 1 Mace. iv. 51; [yet ef. Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, ii. 6117}: one of them (Hebr. 352) at the 
entrance of the temple separated the Holy place from 
the outer court (Ex. xxvi. 37; xxxviii. 18; Num. iii. 26; 
Joseph. b. 1. 5, 5, 4; it is called also τὸ κάλυμμα by the 
Sept. and Philo, Ex. xxvii. 16; Num. iii. 25; Philo, vit. 
oys. iii. §§ 5 and 9), the other veiled the Holy of holies 
«tom the Holy place (in Hebr. the N35; ἐνδότερον κα- 


89 


) 
.) κατάρα 


ταπέτασμα, Joseph. antt. 8, 8, 3; τὸ ἐσώτατον καταπέτασμα 
Philo de gig. § 12; by the Sept. and Philo this is called 
pre-eminently τὸ καταπέτασμα, Ex. xxvi. 31 sqq.; Ley. 
xxi. 23; xxiv.3; Philo, vit. Moys. u.s.). This latter 
καταπέτασμα is the only one mentioned in the N. T.: τὸ 
καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv.38; Lk. 
xxiii. 45; τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα, Heb. ix. 3; τὸ ἐσώτε- 
pov τοῦ καταπετάσματος (cf. Lev. xvi. 2,12, 15; Ex. xxvi. 
33) the space more inward than the veil, equiv. to ‘the 
space within the veil,’ i. 6. the Holy of holies, figura- 
tively used of heaven, as the true abode of God, Heb. vi. 
19; in a similar figurative way the body of Christ is 
called καταπέτασμα, in (Heb.) x. 20, because, as the veil 
had to be removed in order that the high-priest might 
enter the most holy part of the earthly temple, so the 
body of Christ had to be removed by his death on the 
cross, that an entrance might be opened into the fellow- 
ship of God in heaven.* 

κατα-πίνω ; 2 aor. κατέπιον; 1 aor. pass. κατεπόθην; [fr. 
Hes. and Hdt. down]; prop. to drink down, swallow 
down: Mt. xxiii. 24; Rev. xii. 16; to devour, 1 Pet. v. 8 
[here Tr -riew by mistake; (see πίνω, init.) ]; to swallow 
up, destroy, pass., 1 Co. xv. 54; 2 Co. v.4; Heb. xi. 29; 
trop. λύπῃ καταποθῆναι, to be consumed with grief, 2 Co. 
τ ee 

κατα-πίπτω; 2 aor. κατέπεσον; [fr. Hom. down]; to fall 
down: Acts xxviii. 6; εἰς τὴν γῆν, Acts xxvi. 14; ἐπὶ τὴν 
πέτραν, Lk. viii. 6 T Tr ΜῊ." 

κατα-πλέω : 1 aor. κατέπλευσα ; [fr. Hom. on]; to sail 
down from the deep sea to land; to put in: εἰς τὴν χώραν, 
LK. viii. 26.* 

κατα-πονέω, -@: pres. pass. ptep. καταπονούμενος ; prop. 
to tire down with toil, exhaust with labor; hence to afflict 
or oppress with evils; to make trouble for; to treat roughly: 
τινά, in pass., Acts vii. 24; 2 Pet. ii. 7 [R. V. sore dis- 
tressed]. (3 Mace. ii. 2,13; Hippoer., Theophr., Polyb., 
Diod., Joseph., Aelian., al.) * 

κατα-ποντίζω : Pass., pres. καταποντίζομαι; 1 aor. kare 
ποντίσθην ; to plunge or sink in the sea; Pass. in the in- 
trans. sense, to sink, to go down: Mt. xiv. 30; a grievous 
offender for the purpose of killing him, to drown: pass. 
Mt. xviii. 6. (Lys., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Joseph. 
antt. 10, 7,5; 14,15, 10: ec. Apion. 2, 34, 3], al.; Sept.; 
[ef. W. 24; Lob. Phryn. p. 361 note].) * 

κατ-άρα, -as, 7, (κατά and apa, ef. Germ. Ver fluchung, 
Verwiinschung, [ef. κατά, II. 4]); Sept. chiefly for 
ΠῚ}: an execration, imprecation, curse: opp. to εὐλογία 
(q- v.), Jas. iii. 103 γῆ κατάρας ἐγγύς, near to being cursed 
by God i.e. to being given up to barrenness (the allu- 
sion is to Gen. iii. 17 sq.), Heb. vi. 8; ὑπὸ κατάραν εἶναι, 
to be under a curse i.e. liable to the appointed penalty 
of being cursed, Gal. iii. 10; ἐξαγοράζειν τινὰ ἐκ τῆς K. to 
redeem one exposed to the threatened penalty of a curse, 
ib. 13; τέκνα κατάρας. men worthy of execration, 2 Pet. 
ii. 14; abstract for the concrete, one in whom the curse 
is exhibited, i. 6. undergoing the appointed penalty of 
cursing, Gal. iii. 13; ἐγὼ κατάρα ἐγενήθην, Protev. Jac. 
c. 3. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.) * 


καταραομαι 


κατ-αράομαι, -ὥμαι; (dep. mid. fr. κατάρα) ; 1 aor. 2 pers. 
sing. κατηράσω; [pf. pass. ptep. κατηραμένος (see below) J; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for 79) and 178; (0 curse, 
doom, imprecate evil on: (opp. to εὐλογεῖν) absol. Ro. xii. 
14; w. dat. of the obj. (as in the earlier Grk. writ.), Lk. 
vi. 28 Ree. (Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. 65] 66; [Joseph. c. Ap. 
1, 22, 16]); w. acc. of the obj. (as often in the later Grk. 
writ., as Plut. Cat. min. 32, 1 var. [B. § 133, 9; W. 222 
(208)]), Mt. v. 44 Rec.; Lk. vi. 28 G Ltxt. T Tr WH; 
Jas. iii. 9; ἃ tree, i.e. to wither it by cursing, Mk. xi. 21 
(see Heb. vi. 8 in κατάρα). pf. pass. ptep. κατηραμένος 
in a pass. sense, accursed (Sap. xii. 11; [2 K. ix. 34]; 
Plut. Luc. 18; and κεκατηραμ. Deut. xxi. 23; [Sir iii. 
16]): Mt. xxv. 41 (also occasionally κεκατάρανται, Num. 
xxii. 6; xxiv. 9; [but Tdf. ete. -ryp-; see Veitch s. v. 
apdopuat])." 

kat-apyéw, -@; fut. karapynow; 1 aor. κατήργησα; pf. κα- 
τήργηκα; Pass., pres. καταργοῦμαι; pf. κατήργημαι; 1 aor. 
κατηργήθην:; 1 fut. καταργηθήσομαι; causative of the verb 
ἀργέω, equiv. to ἀργὸν (i. 6. depyov [on the accent cf. 
Chandler καὶ 444]) ποιῶ; freq. with Paul, who uses it 25 
times [elsewhere in N. T. only twice (Lk., Heb.), in Sept. 
4 times (2 Esdr., see below) ]; 1. to render idle, un- 
employed, inactive, inoperative : τὴν γῆν, to deprive of its 
strength, make barren [A. V. cumber], Lk. xiii. 7; to 
cause a pers. or a thing to have no further efficiency ; to 
deprive of force, influence, power, [A. V. bring to nought, 
make of none effect]: ri, Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. i. 28; τινά, 1 Co. 
ii. 6 [but in pass.]; diabolic powers, 1 Co. xv. 24 (Justin, 
apol. 2, 6); Antichrist, 2 Th. ii. 8; τὸν θάνατον, 2 Tim. i. 
10 (Barnab. ep. 5, 6); τὸν διάβολον, Heb. ii. 14; pass. 1 
Co. xv. 26; to make void, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, Gal. 11]. 17; 
pass. Ro. iv. 14. 2. to cause to cease, put an end to, 
do away with, annul, abolish: ri, 1 Co. vi. 13; xiii. 11; 
τὸν νόμον, Ro. iii. 31; Eph. ii. 15; τὸν καιρὸν τοῦ ἀνόμου, 
Sarnab. ep. 15, 5; pass. πόλεμος καταργεῖται ἐπουρανίων 
καὶ ἐπιγείων, Ignat. ad Eph. 13,2; ἵνα καταργηθῆ τὸ σῶμα 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας. that the body of sin might be done away, 
i.e. not the material of the body, but the body so far 
forth as it is an instrument of sin; accordingly, that the 
body may cease to be an instrument of sin, Ro. vi. 6. 
Pass. to cease, pass away, be done away: of things, Gal. 
v.11; 1 Co. xiii. 8, 10; 2 Co. iii. 7, 11, 13 sq.; of persons, 
foll. by ἀπό τινος, [0 be severed from, separated from, dis- 
charged from, loosed from, any one; to terminate all in- 
lercourse with one [a pregn. constr., ef. W. 621 (577); 
B. 322 (277) ]: ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Gal. v. 4 [on the aor. cf. 
W. § 40,5 b.]; ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου, Ro. vii. [2 (R™ om. τ. v.)], 6. 
The word is rarely met with in prof. auth., as Eur. Phoen. 
753 καταργ. χέρα, to make idle, i. 6. to leave the hand 
unemployed; Polyb. ap. Suid. [s. v. κατηργηκέναι] τοὺς 
καιρούς, in the sense of to let slip, leave unused; in Sept. 
four times for Chald. 53, to make to cease, i. e. restrain, 
check, hinder, 2 Esdr. iv. 21, 23; v. 5; vi. 8.* 

κατ-αριθμέω, -ὥ : fo number with: pf. pass. ptep. κατη- 
ριθμημένος ἐν (for Rec. σὺν) ἡμῖν, was numbered among 
us, Actsi.17; ef. 2 Chr. xxxi. 19; [Plat. politicus 266 a. 
ete. ].* 


336 


κατασκευάζωα 


κατ-αρτίζω; fut. καταρτίσω (1 Pet. v. 10 LT Tr WII 
[Β. 37 (32); but Rec. καταρτίσαι, 1 aor. optat. 3 pers. 
sing.]); 1 aor. infxarapricat; Pass., pres. καταρτίζυμαι; 
pf. κατήρτισμαι; 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. κατηρτίσω; prop. 
to render ἄρτιος i. 6. fit, sound, complete, [see κατά, III. 2}; 
hence a. ‘o mend (what has been broken or rent), 
to repair: τὰ δίκτυα, Mt. iv. 21; Mk. i. 19, [al. ref. these 
exx. to next head], i. q. to complete, τὰ ὑστερήματα, 1 Th. 
iii. 10. Ὁ. to fit out, equip, put in order, arrange, ad- 
just: τοὺς αἰῶνας, the worlds, pass. Heb. xi. 3 (so, for 
PM, ἥλιον, Ps. Ixxiii. (Ixxiv.) 16; σελήνην, Ixxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 38); σκεύη κατηρτισμένη els ἀπώλειαν, of men 
whose souls God has so constituted that they cannot es- 
cape destruction [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) in loc.], Ro. 
ix. 22 (πλοῖα, Polyb. 5, 46, 10, and the like); of the 
mind: κατηρτισμένος ὡς ete. so instructed, equipped, as 
ete. (cf. B. 311 (267); but al. take κατηρτ. as a cireum- 
stantial ptep. when perfected shall be as (not ‘above’) 
his master (see Mey. in loc.) ; on this view the passage 
may be referred to the next head], Lk. vi. 40; mid. to 
Jit or frame for one’s self, prepare: αἶνον, Mt. xxi. 16 (fr. 
Ps. viii. 3; Sept. for 10°); σῶμα, Heb. x. 5. c. ethi- 
cally, to strengthen, perfect, complete, make one what he 
ought to be: τινά, [1 Pet. v. 10 (see above) ]; Gal. vi. 1 
(of one who by correction may be brought back into the 
right way); pass., 2 Co. xiii. 11; τινὰ ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ [(T 
WH om.) ] ἀγαθῷ, Heb. xiii. 21; κατηρτισμένοι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ 
νοΐ κτὰ. of those who have been restored to harmony 
(so πάντα εἰς τωὐτό, Hdt. 5, 106; ἵνα καταρτισθῇ ἡ στασιά- 
ζουσα πόλις. Dion. Hal. antt. 3,10), 1 Οὐ. 1.10. [Come.: 
mpo-katapri¢w. |* 

κατ-άρτισις, -ews, 7, (καταρτίζω, q. v.), a strengthening, 
perfecting, of the soul, (Vulg. consummatio): 2 Co. xiii. 
9. (a training, disciplining, instructing, Plut. Them. 2, 
7 [var.]; Alex. 7, 1.) * 

καταρτισμός, -ov, 6, i. q. κατάρτισις, q. ν.: τινὸς εἴς τι, 
Eph. iv. 12. [(Galen, al.)]* 

κατα-σείω: 1 aor. κατέσεισα; 1. to shake down, 
throw down, [ef. κατά, III. 1; (fr. Thue. on)]. 2. 
to shake: τὴν χεῖρα, to make a sign by shaking (i. 6. rap- 
idly waving) the hand (Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 28; ras 
χεῖρας, ib. de Josepho § 36); of one about to speak who 
signals for silence, Acts xix. 33; hence simply κατασείειν 
τινί, to make a sign, to signal with the hand to one, Xen. 
Cyr. 5, 4. 4; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 2; then, with a disre- 
gard of the origin of the phrase, the instrument. dat. 77 
χειρί was added, Polyb. 1, 78, 3; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 48; 
so of one about to make an address: Acts xii. 17; xiii. 
16; xxi. 40; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 2.* 

κατωσκάπτω: 1 aor. κατέσκαψα; pf. pass. ptep. κατε- 
oxappévos; to dig under, dig down, demolish, destroy: τί, 
Ro. xi. 3, fr. 1 K. xix. 10; pass. Acts xv. 16[RGL], fr. 
Amos ix. 11 [(but see xataotpepw)]. (Tragg., Thuc., 


oD"? 


» Xen., sqq.).* 


κατα-σκενάζω: fut. κατασκευάσω;; 1 aor. κατεσκεύασα; 
Pass., pres. κατασκευάζομαι; pf. ptep. κατεσκευασμένος ; 
1 aor. κατεσκευάσθην; to furnish, equip, prepare, make 
ready ; a. of one who makes any thing ready for 


, 
κατασκήηνοω 


pers. or thing: τὴν ὁδόν, Mt. xi. 10; ΜΚ. i. 2; Lk. vii. 
27; pf. pass. ptep. prepared in spirit, Lk. i. 17 (Xen. 
Cyr. 5, 5, 10). Ὁ. of builders, to construc<, erect, 
with the included idea of adorning and equipping with 
all things necessary, (often so in Grk. auth.; ef. Bleek, 
Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 398 sq.): οἶκον, Heb. iii. 3 sq. ; 
κιβωτόν, Heb. xi. 7; 1 Pet. iii. 20; σκηνήν, Heb. ix. 2, 6; 
Sept. for 83, Is. xl. 28; xliii. 7.* 

κατα-σκηνόω, -a, inf. -σκηνοῖν (Mt. xiii. 32 LT Tr WH, 
Mk. iv. 32 WH, see ἀποδεκατόω; [but also -σκηνοῦν, Mt. 
le. RG; Mk.l.c. RGLTTr; cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 123]); 
fut. κατασκηνώσω; 1 aor. κατεσκήνωσα; prop. to pitch 
one’s tent, to fix one’s abode, to dwell: ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 
26 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9; foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Mt. 
xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19; ὑπό w. acc. of place, Mk. iv. 32. 
(Xen., Polyb., Diod., al.; κατεσκήνωσεν 6 θεὸς τῷ ναῷ 
τούτῳ, Joseph. antt. 3, 8,5; add, Sir. xxiv. 4, 8; Sept. 
mostly for }3v.) * 

κατα-σκήνωσις, -ews, 7), (κατασκηνόω. 4. V.), prop. the 
pitching of tents, encamping; place of tarrying, encamp- 
ment, abode: of the haunts of birds, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 
58; (for java, Ezek. xxxvii. 27; οἵ. Sap. ix. 8; Tob. i. 
4; Polyb. 11, 26, 5; Diod. 17, 95).* 

κατα-σκιάζω : fo overshadow, cover with shade, [see κατά, 
Ill. 3]: τί, Heb. ix.5. (Hes., Eur., Plato, al.; κατασκιάω, 
Hom. Od. 12, 436.)* 

κατα-σκοπέω, -@: 1 aor. inf. κατασκοπῆσαι; to inspect, 
view closely, in order to spy out and plot against: τί, Gal. 
ii. 4; (of a reconnoitre or treacherous examination, 2 S. 
x. 3; Josh. ii. 2 sq.; 1 Chr. xix.3; Eur. Hel. 1607 (1623); 
so used, esp. in mid., in the other Grk. writ. fr. Xen. 
down).* 

κατά-σκοπος, -ov, 6, (κατασκέπτομαι [i. q. κατασκοπέω |), 
an inspector, a spy: Heb. xi. 31. (Gen. xlii. 9,11; 1S. 
xxvi.4; 1 Mace. xii. 26; in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

κατα-σοφίζομαι: 1 aor. ptep. κατασοφισάμενος ; (σο- 
gif); dep. mid.,in prof. auth. sometimes also pass.; fo 
circumvent by artifice or fraud, conquer by subtle devices: 
to outwit, overreach ; to deal craftily with: τινά, Acts vii. 
19 fr. Ex.i.10. (Judith v. 11; x. 19; Diod., Philo, 

Joseph., Leian.. al.) * 
" καταστέλλω: 1 aor. ptep. καταστείλας ; pf. pass. ptep. 
κατεσταλμένος ; a. prop. fo send or put down, to 
lower. b. fo put or keep down one who is roused or 
incensed, to repress, restrain, appease, quiet: twa, Acts 
xix. 35 sq.; 3 Mace. vi. 1; Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 7; Ὁ. j. 
4, 4,4; Plut. mor. p. 207 6." 

κατά-στημα, -ros, τό, (καθίστημι), (Lat. status, habitus), 
[demeanor, deportment, bearing]: Tit. ii. 3. (3 Mace. v. 
45; Joseph. b. 1. 1,1, 4 [of a city; cf. ἀτρεμαίῳ τῷ κατα- 
στήματι πρὸς τ. θάνατον ἀπήει. Joseph. antt. 15, 7,5; Plut. 
Marcell. 23,6; cf. Tib. Gracch. 2,2. See Wetst. on 
Tit. 1. c.; ef. Ignat. ad Trall. 3, 2 (and Jacobson or 
Zahn in loc.)].) * 

κατα-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (καταστέλλω, 4. V-) ; 1. prop. 
a lowering, letting down; hence 2. iv bibl. Grk. 
twice, a garment let down, dress, attire: 1 Tim. ii. 9, 
Vulg. habitus, which the translator, acc. to later Lat. 

22 


337 


κατατίθημι 


usage, seems to understand of clothing (cf. the French 
Vhabit); [ef. Joseph. b. j. 2, 8,4]; for ΤΠ}, Is. Ixi. 3, 
with which in mind Hesych. says xatagroAjy- περιβολὴν 
[ef. W. 23, but esp. Ellicott on i Tim. 1. c.].* 

καταστρέφω:: 1 aor. κατέστρεψα; pf. pass. ptep. κατε- 
orpappevos (Acts xv. 16 T[ WH, but Tr -στρεμμένος; cf. 
WH. App. p. 170 sq.]); 1. to turn over, turn un- 
der: the soil with a plow, Xen. oec. 17, 10. 2. to 
overturn, overthrow, throw down: τί, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 
15; [τὰ κατεστρ. ruins], Acts xv. 16 T Tr WH [(cf. xara- 
oxantw)]; so Hag. ii. 22; Job ix. 5; Joseph. antt. 8, 7, 
6; Anthol. 11, 163,6; Diog. L. 5, 82.* 

κατα-στρηνιάω: 1 aor. subjunc. καταστρηνιάσω [ (fut. 1 
Tim. v.11 Lchm. mrg.)]; (see στρηνιάω) ; io feel the im- 
pulses of sexual desire, [A. V. to grow wanton}; (Vulg. 
luxurior) : τινός, to one’s loss [A. V. against], 1 Tim. v. 
11; Ignat. ad Antioch. c. 11.* 

κατα-στροφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (καταστρέφω), (Vulg. subversio, 
[eversio]), overthrow, destruction: of cities, 2 Pet. ii. 6 
[WH om. Trmrg. br. καταστρ.] (Gen. xix. 29); metaph. 
of the extinction of a spirit of consecration to Christ, 
ΓΑ. V. the subverting]: 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Aeschyl. Eum. 
490.) * 

κατα-στρώννυμι: 1 aor. pass. κατεστρώθην:; to strew over 
(the ground) ; to prostrate, slay, [ef. our to lay low]: 1 Co. 
x. 5[A. V. overthrown]. (Num. xiv. 16; Judith vii. 14; 
xiv. 4; 2 Mace. v. 26, ete.; Hdt. 8,53; 9,76; Xen. Cyr. 
3; 3, 64:)* 

κατασύρω; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. prop. to draw 
down, pull down, [see κατά, III. 1]. 2. to draw along, 
drag forcibly, (τινὰ διὰ μέσης ἀγορᾶς, Philo in Flace. § 20; 


tae ; ; Aiea 
leg. ad Gaium § 19): τινὰ πρὸς τὸν κριτήν, LK. xii. 58. 


(Cie. pro Mil. ec. 14, 38 quom in judicium detrahi non 
posset.) * 

κατα-σφαΐζω [ογ -σφάττω]: 1 aor. κατέσφαξα; to kill off 
[ef. κατά, III. 1], to slaughter: Lk. xix. 27. (Sept.; 
Hdt., Trage., Xen., Joseph. antt. 6, 6,4; Ael. v. h. 13, 
2; Hdian. 5, 5, 16 [8 ed. Bekk.].) * 

κατα-σφραγίζω: pf. pass. ptep. κατεσφραγισμένος ; 10 
cover with a seal [see κατά, III. 3], to seal up, close with 
a seal: βιβλίον σφραγῖσιν, Rev. v. 1. (Job ix. 7; Sap. 
ii. 5; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Plut., Leian., al.) * 

κατάσχεσις, -ews, 7}, (κατέχω), Sept. often for AM, 
possession ; 1. a holding back, hindering: anonym. 
in Walz, Rhetor. i. p. 616, 20. 2. a holding fast, 
possession: γῆν δοῦναι eis κατάσχ. to give in possession 
the land, Acts vii. 5, as in Gen. xvii. 8; Deut. xxxii. 49 
Alex.; Ezek. xxxiii. 24; xxxvi. 2 sq. 5; Joseph. antt. 
9,1, 2; [Test. xii. Patr., test. Benj. § 10]; w. gen. of the 
subj. τῶν ἐθνῶν, of the territory possessed by [the pos- 
session of | the nations, Acts vii. 45; (a portion given to 
keep, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 40 [ef. Ps. ii. 8]).* 

κατα-τίθημι : 1 aor. κατέθηκα ; 2 aor. mid. inf. καταθέ- 
σθαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to lay down [see xara, III. 1}, 
deposit, lay up: act. prop. τινὰ ἐν μνημείῳ, Mk. xv. 46 
ΓΙ Tr WH ἔθηκεν]; mid. to lay by or lay up for one’s 
self, for future use: τινί, with any one; χάριν [better -ra; 
see χάρις, init.] and χάριτας κατατ. τινι, to lay up favor 


κατατομή 


ὃν one’s self with any one, to gain favor with (to do some- 
thing for one which may win favor), Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 
9; so Hdt. 6,41; Thue. 1,33; Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 26; Dem. 


193, 22 (20); φιλίαν τινί, 1 Mace. x. 28 ; εὐεργεσίαν rwi, | 


Joseph. antt. 11, 6,5; [ef. Dem. u. s.]. 
κατατίθημι. | * 

κατα-τομή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. κατατέμνω [cf. xara, III. 4] to cut 
up, mutilate), mutilation (Lat. concisio): Phil. iii. 2, 
where Paul sarcastically alludes to the word περιτομή 
which follows in vs. 3; as though he would say, Keep 
your eye on that boasted circumcision, or to call it by its 
true name ‘concision’ or ‘mutilation.’ Cf. the similar 
passage, Gal. v. 12; see ἀποκόπτω." 

κατα-τοξεύω: 1 fut. pass. κατατοξευθήσομαι; to shoot 
down or thrust through with an arrow: twa βολίδι, Heb. 
xii. 20 Ree. fr. Ex. xix. 13. (Num. xxiv. 8; Ps. x. (xi.) 
2; Hdt., Thuc., Xen., al.) * 

Kata-tpéxw: 2 aor. κατέδραμον; to run down, hasten 
down : ἐπί τινας, to quell a tumult, Acts xxi. 32. [Hdt. on.]* 

[kat-avydtw: 1 aor. inf. καταυγάσαι; to beam down 
upon; to shine forth, shine brightly: 2 Co. iv. 4 Lmrg. 
Tr mrg., where al. αὐγάσαι q. v.; cf. φωτισμός, b.; (trans. 
Sap. xvii. 5, ete.; intrans. 1 Mace. vi. 39; Heliod. 5, 31).*] 

καταφάγω, see κατεσθίω. 

κατα-φέρω; | aor. κατήνεγκα; Pass., pres. καταφέρομαι; 
1 aor. κατηνέχθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to bear down, bring 
down, cast down: ψῆφον, prop. to cast a pebble or caleu- 
lus se. into the urn, i. 6. to give one’s vote, /o approve, 
Acts xxvi. 10; αἰτιώματα κατά twos (see κατά, I. 2 b. [but 
the crit. edd. reject κατὰ xrA.]), Acts xxv. 7 LT Tr WH. 
Pass. to be borne down, to sink, (from the window to the 
pavement), ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, from sleep (from the effect of 
his deep sleep [ef. B. 322 (277); W. 371 (348)]), Acts 
xx. 9°; metaph. to be weighed down by, overcome, carried 
away, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, sunk in a deep sleep, 
Acts xx. 9"; of a different sort [contra W. 431 (401) ] is 
the expression in prof. auth. καταφέρομαι cis ὕπνον. to 
sink into sleep, drop asleep, Joseph. antt. 2, 5,5; Hdian. 
2,1, 3 [2]; 9,6 [5]; τοῖσιν ὕπνοισιν, Hipp. p. 1137 ο. 
[(Kiihn iii. p. 539)], and in the same sense simply κατα- 
φέρομαι; ef. [L and 5. 5. ν. 1.2 ἃ.1; Steph. Thes. iv. col. 
1286 [where the pass. fr. Acts is fully discussed ].* 

κατα-φεύγω: 2 aor. κατέφυγον; [fr. Hdt. down]; to 
flee away, flee for refuge: foll. by eis w. ace. of place, 
Acts xiv. 6; of καταφυγόντες, we who [ef. B. § 144, 9 c.] 
have fled from se. the irreligious mass of mankind, foll. 
by an infin. of purpose, Heb. vi. 18; cf. Delitzsch ad loc.* 

κατα-φθείρω: pf. pass. ptep. κατεφθαρμένος ; 2 fut. pass. 
καταφθαρήσομαι ; [see κατά, III. 4]; 1. to corrupt, 
deprave; κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν, corrupted in mind, 2 
Tim. iii. 8. 2. to destroy; pass. to be destroyed, to 
perish: foll. by ἐν w. dat. indicating the state, 2 Pet. ii. 
12 RG. [From Aeschyl. down.]* 

κατα-φιλέω, -@; impf. κατεφίλουν; 1 aor. κατεφίλησα; to 
kiss much, kiss again and again, kiss tenderly, (Lat. d e- 
osculor, etc.) : τινά, Mt. xxvi. 49; Mk. xiv. 45; Lk. vii. 
38,45; xv. 20; Actsxx.37. (Tob. vii.6; 3 Macc. v.49; 
Xen. Cyr. 6,4,10; 7,5, 32; Polyb. 15,1,7; Joseph. antt. 


[Comp.: ovy- 


338 


κατέναντι 


7,11,7; Ael. ν. ἃ. 13,4; Plut. Brut. 16; Lceian. dial. 
deor. 4,5; 5,3; φιλεῖν ἃπα καταφιλεῖν are distinguished 
in Xen. mem. 2, 6,33; Plut. Alex.c. 67. Sept. for pw, 
prop. to join mouth to mouth.) ΟἿ. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 
780; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 18, note 24." 

κατα-φρονέω, -@; fut.xarahpornow; 1 aor. κατεφρόνησα; 
[fr. Hdt. down]; to contemn, despise, disdain, think litile 
or nothing of: w. gen. of the obj. [B. § 132, 15], Mt. vi. 
24; xviii. 10; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ii. 4; 1 Co. xi. 22; 1 Tim. 
iv. 12; vi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 10; Heb. xii. 2.* 

καταφρονητής, -ov, ὁ, (καταφρονέω), adespiser: Acts. xiii. 
41. (Hab.i.5; 11. δ; Zeph. iii.4; Philo, leg. ad Gaium 
§ 41; Joseph. antt. 6, 14, 4; b. j. 2, 8,3; Plut. Brut. 12, 
and in 600]. writ.) * 

kata-xéw: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. κατέχεεν (see ἐκχέων ; 10 
pour down upon; pour over, pour upon: ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν 
(LT Tr WH ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς), Mt. xxvi. 7; κατὰ τῆς κεφα- 
λῆς (Plat. rep. 3 p. 398 a.; Epict. diss. 2, 20, 29), Mk. 
xiv. 3 (where LT Tr WH om. κατά [οἵ. W. 381 (357) sq.; 
Hat. 4, 62; Plat. legg. 7 p.814b.; Joseph. ὁ. Ap. 2, 36, 
2. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 66 sq.]).* 

κατα-χθόνιος, -ov, (kara [see κατά, III. 3], χθών [the 
earth]), subterranean, Vulg. infernus: plur., of those who 
dwell in the world below, i. e. departed souls [ef. W. § 34, 
2; but al. make the adj. a neut. used indefinitely; see 
Bp. Lehtft. in loc.], Phil. ii. 10. (Hom., Dion. H., An- 
thol., ete., Inserr.) * 

κατα-χράομαι, -ῶμαι ; 1 aor. mid. inf. καταχρήσασθαι; 
in class. Grk. 1. to use much or excessively or ill. 2. 
to use up, consume by use, (Germ. v erbrauchen). 3. 
to use fully, the κατά intensifying the force of the simple 
verb (Germ. g ebrauchen), (Plato, Dem., Diod., Joseph., 
al.): 1 Co. vii. 31 [ef. B. § 133,18; W. 209 sq. (197) ]; 
τινί, ib. ix. 18.* 

κατα-ψύχω: 1 aor. κατέψυξα ; to cool off, (make) cool: 
Lk. xvi. 24. (Gen. xviii. 4; Hippoer., Aristot., Theophr., 
Plut., al.) * 

κατείδωλος, -ov, (κατά and εἴδωλον ; after the analogy of 
κατάμπελος, κατάγομος, κατάχρυσος, κατάδενδρος, etc., [see 
κατά, III. 8, and cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 638]), full of idols: 
Acts xvii. 16. (Not found in prof. auth. [ef. W. § 34. 
3]].) * 

κατ-έναντι, adv.; not found in prof. auth. [W. 102 
(97)]; in Sept. mostly for 333, 3229, 25), (see ἔναντι and 
ἀπέναντι) ; prop. over against, opposite, before : foll. by the 
gen. [B. 319 (273); ef. W. § 54, 6], Mk. xi. 2; xii. 41 
(Tr txt. WH mrg. ἀπέναντι]; xiii. 8, and LT Tr WH in 
Mt. xxi. 2; L Tr WH txt. also in xxvii. 24; ἡ κατέναντι 
κώμη, the village opposite, Lk. xix. 30. Metaph., w. gen. 
of pers., before one i. e. he being judge (see ἐνώπιον [esp. 
2e.and 1 ¢.]): τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. iv. 17 (which, by a kind of 
attraction somewhat rare, is to be resolved κατέναντι θεοῦ, 
ᾧ ἐπίστευσε, who is the father of us all ace. to the judg- 
ment and appointment of God, whom he believed, — 
the words καθὼς ... τέθεικα forming a parenthesis; cf. 
Fritzsche ad loc.; [B. 287 (247); but al. resolve it, 
κατέναντι τ. θεοῦ κατέν. οὗ ἐπίστ.. cf. Meyer (per contra 
ed. Weiss) ad loc.; W.164 (155)]); or, he being witness 


κατενώπιον 


[in the sight 97: τοῦ θεοῦ, L T Tr WH in 2 Co. ii. 17 and 
xii. 19.* 

κατ-ενώπιον. adv., not met with in prof. auth. ((W. 102 
(97) ] see ἐνώπιον), over against, opposite, before the face of, 
before the presence of, in the sight of, before: foll. by the gen. 
[B. 319 (273 sq.); ef. W. § 54, 6]; a. prop. of place, 
Jude 24 (Lev. iv. 17; Josh. i. 5; iii. 7; xxiii. 9). b. 
metaph. having one as it were before the eyes, before one 
as witness: τοῦ θεοῦ, Rec. in 2 Co. ii. 17; xii. 19, (see 
κατέναντι) ; before God as judge, Eph. i. 4; Col. i. 22 [ef. 
Bp. Lghtft. in loc.; also B. 173, 180, 188].* 

κατ-εξουσιάζω ; not found in prof. auth.; to exercise au- 
thority, wield power, [see xara, III. 3]: τινός, over one, 
Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x 42.* 

κατ-εργαΐζομαι ; pf. inf. κατειργάσθαι (1 Pet. iv. 3 LT 
Tr WH); 1 aor. mid. κατειργασάμην, and κατηργασάμην 
(Ro. vii. 8 T Tr.; [2 Co. vii. 11 ΤΊ); 1 aor. pass. κατειρ- 
γάσθην, and κατηργάσθην (2 Co. xii. 12 Tdf.); see ἐργά- 
ζομαι, init.; adepon. mid. verb; [ace. to Fritzsche, Rom. 
i. p. 107 the κατά is either intensive (Lat. p er ficere) or 
descensive (Lat. per petrare) |; a. to perform, ac- 
complish, achieve, [R. V. often work]: Ro. vii. 15, 17 sq. 
20; ri διά twos (gen. of pers.), Ro. xv. 18; ἅπαντα κα- 
τεργασάμενοι having gone through every struggle of the 
ficht, Eph. vi. 13 [ef. Meyer in loc.]; σημεῖα, pass. 2 Co. 
xii. 12; of disgraceful actions, i. q. fo perpetrate, Ro. i. 
OS wis GR al δεν. 5: 1 Βοῖς ἵν. 5: b. to work out 
(Lat. efficere), i. 6. to do that from which something results ; 
of man: τὴν σωτηρίαν, make every effort to obtain salva- 
tion, Phil. ii. 12; of things: bring about, result in, Ro. iv. 
15; v. 8; vii. 8; 2 Co. vii. 10 (where LT Tr WH 
epya¢.) ; Jas. i. 3, and RG in 20; τί τινι, Ro. vii. 13; 2 
δοῦν. 1.7; wit. 11s) 1χ. 11. Cc. κατεργ- τινα εἴς τι, 10 
fashion, i. 6. render one fit for a thing: 2 Οο. ν. ὅ. (Often 
in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Hdt. down; several times in 
Sept.)* 

kat-€pxopat; 2 aor. κατῆλθον, 1 pers. plur. κατήλθαμεν 
(Acts xxvii.5 T Tr WH; on which form see ἀπέρχομαι, 
init.) ; (fr. Hom. down]; to come down, go down; prop. of 
one who goes from a higher to a lower locality: foll. by 
eis w. ace. of place, Lk. iv. 31; Acts viii. 5; xiii. 4; [xix. 
1 TTrmrg.]; and LT Tr WH in xv. 30; foll. by ἀπό 
w. gen. of place, Lk. ix. 37; Acts xv. 1; xvili. 5; xxi. 
10; foll. by ἀπό and eis, Acts xi. 27; xii. 19; of those 
who come to a place by ship [Eustath. (ad Hom.) 1408, 
29 (Od. 1, 183) κατελθεῖν, οὐ μόνον τὸ ἁπλῶς κάτω που 
ἐλθεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ ἐς λιμένα ἐλθεῖν, ὥσπερ καὶ καταβῆναι κ. 
καταπλεῦσαι k. καταχθῆναι kK. κατᾶραι. τὸ ἐλλιμενίσαι λέγεται; 
also 1956, 35 (Od. 24, 115) κατῆλθον ἣ ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐνελιμενί- 
σθην; ὡς πολλαχοῦ ἐρρέθη, ἢ ἀντὶ τοῦ ἁπλῶς ἦλθον ; cf. 
Ebeling, Lex. Homer. 8. v.]: foll. by εἰς, Acts xviii. 22; 
xxi. 3 LT Tr WH; xxvii. 5; πρός τινα, Acts ix. 32. 
Metaph. of things sent down from heaven by God: Jas. 
iii. 15.* 

κατ-εσθίω, ptep. plur. κατέσθοντες (Mk. xii. 40 Tr WH; 
see ἐσθίω and ἔσθω ; cf. Fritzsche, Hdbch. z. ἃ. Apokry- 
phen, i. p. 150 [who says, ‘ The shorter form occurs freq. 
in the Sept., Lev. xix. 26; Sir. xx. 15, (16), elsewh. almost 


889 


κατέχω 


exclusively poetic; see Bttm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. p. 185’ 
(cf. Veitch s. v. ἐσθίω) |); fut. καταφάγομαι (Jn. ii. 17 GL 
TTr WH; see ἐσθίω); 2 aor. κατέφαγον; Sept. for 
θὲ; 1. prop. to consume by eating, to eat up, de- 
vour: τί, of birds, Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv.4; Lk. viii. 5; of 
a dragon, Rey. xii. 4; of a man, eating up the little book, 
i.e. eagerly taking its entire contents into his inmost soul, 
and, as we say, digesting it (borrowed fr. the fig. in Ezek. 
ii. 10; iii. 1-3, ef. Jer. xv. 16): Rev. x. 9 sq. 2. 
Metaph. in various uses; a. to devour i. e. squander, 
waste, substance: Lk. xv. 30 (often so in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. Od. 3, 315; 15, 12 down; devorare patrimonium, 
Catull. 29, 23). b. to devour i. e. forcibly appro- 
priate: τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν, widows’ property, Mt. xxiii. 
14 (13) Ree.; Mk. xii. 40 [ef. B. 79 (69); W. § 29, 
2]; Lk. xx. 47. c. with an ace. of the pers. a. 
to strip one of his goods: 2 Co. xi. 20. B. to ruin (by 
the infliction of injuries): Gal. v. 15. d. of fire, to 
devour i. 6. utterly consume, destroy: twa, Rev. xi. 5; xx. 
9: 6. of the consumption of the strength of body 
and mind by strong emotions: τινά, Jn. ii. 17 (Ps. Lxviii. 
(Ixix.) 10; Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 1).* 

κατ-ευθύνω: 1 aor. inf. κατευθῦναι; 3 pers. sing. opt. 
κατευθύναι; (see κατά, III. 2); Sept. mostly for yw and 
1213, PIM; to make straight, guide, direct: τοὺς πόδας εἰς 
ὁδὸν eip. Lk. i. 79; τὴν ὁδὸν πρός twa, of the removal of 
the hindrances to coming to one, 1 Th. iii. 11; τὰς καρ- 
δίας (1 Chr. xxix. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 3) εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ 
θεοῦ, 2 Th. iii. 5. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.) * 

κατ-ευλογέω : impf. 3 pers. sing. κατευλόγει (T WH) 
and κατηυλόγει (Tr), [cf. εὐδοκέω, init.]; to call down 
blessings on: twa, Mk.x.16TTrWH. (Tob. [x. 13]; 
xi. 16; Plut. amator. 4.) * 

κατ-εφ-ίστημι : fo set up against; [2 aor. act. 3 pers. 
plur.] κατεπέστησαν τῷ Παύλῳ, they rose up against Paul, 
i. e. with hostile intent, Acts xviii. 12. Found nowhere 
else.* 

κατέχω; impf. κατεῖχον; 2 aor. subjunc. κατάσχω; 
impf. pass. κατειχόμην ; 1. to hold back, detain, re- 
tain; a. τινά, from going away, foll. by τοῦ μή w. inf., 
Lk. iv. 42 [B. § 140, 16 8.; οἵ. W. 604 (561)]; τινὰ πρὸς 
ἐμαυτόν, Philem. 13. Pass. (as often in Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down; ef. Passow 8. v. p. 1677*; [L. and 5. 5. ν. 
II. 67), of some troublesome condition or circumstance 
by which one is held as it were bound: νοσήματι, Jn. v. 
4[GT Tr WHom. the passage]; ἔν τινι, Ro. vii. 6. b. 
to restrain, hinder (the course or progress of): τ. ἀλή- 
θειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ, Ro. i. 18; absol. τὸ κατέχον, that which 
hinders, se. Antichrist from making his appearance (see 
avrixpiotos); the power of the Roman empire is meant; 
6 κατέχων he that hinders, checks, sc. the advent of Anti- 
christ, denotes the one in whom that power is lodged, the 
Roman emperor: 2 Th. ii. 6 sq. (cf., besides De Wette 
and Liinemann ad loe., [Bp. Lghtft. in B.D. s. v. Thess. 
Second Ep. to the], esp. Schneckenburger in the Jahr- 
biicher f. deutsche Theol. for 1859 p. 421 sq.). κατέχω 
(se. τὴν ναῦν) εἰς τὴν αἰγιαλόν, to check the ship’s head: 
way [better (cf. the preceding context) to hold or head 


κατηγορέω 


the ship, cf. Hdt. 7,59. 188 ete.; Bos, Ellips. (ed. Schaefer) 
p- 318; see, too, Od. 11, 455 sq. (ef. Eustath. 1629, 18; 
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 310, 7 sqq.); but Passow (as 
below) et al. take the verb as intrans. in such a connec- 
tion, viz. to make for; cf. Kypke, Observy. ii. 144] in 
order to land, Acts xxvii. 40 (Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 29 xara- 
σχὼν ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Αβερνίδα; many other exx. are given in 
Passow 8. v. II. 3; [L. and S. s. v. B. 27). c. to hold 
fast, keep secure, keep firm possession of: with ace. of the 
thing, τὸν λόγον, Lk. viii. 15; foll. by the orat. obliq., 1 Co. 
xv. 2 [Β. 88 139, 58; 150,20; W. 561 (522)]; τὰς mapa- 
δόσεις, 1 Co. xi. 2; τὸ καλόν, 1 Th. v. 21 ; τὴν παρρησίαν 
[τ᾿ ἀρχήν ete.] μέχρι τέλους BeBaiav κατασχεῖν, Heb. iii. 6, 
14; τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος ἀκλινῆ, Ieb. x. 23. 2. 
equiv. to Lat. obtinere, i. 6. a. lo get possession of, 
take: Mt. xxi. 38 RG; Lk. xiv. 9. b. to possess: 1 
Co. vii. 30; 2 Co. vi. 10.* 

κατηγορέω, -@; impf. κατηγόρουν ; fut. κατηγορήσω; 1 
aor. κατηγόρησα ; pres. pass. κατηγοροῦμαι ; (κατά and ἀγο- 
ρεύω, prop. to speak against [cf. κατά, III. 7] in court, in 
the assembly of the people), to accuse ; a. before a 
judge: absol. [to make accusation], Acts xxiv. 2, 19; 
τινός, to accuse one, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 2; Lk. vi. 7 T 
Trtxt. WI; xi.54 RL Trbr.; xxiii. 2,10; Jn. viii. 6; 
Acts xxv. 5; xxviii. 19; with the addition of a gen. of 
the thing of which 9ne is accused (as Dem. 515 fin.): 
Acts xxiv. 8; xxv. 11, (unless it be thought preferable 
to regard the relative in these instances as in the gen. 
by attraction [so B. § 132, 16 fin.], since the com. constr. 
in Grk. authors is κατήγ. ti τινος, cf. Matthiae § 370 
Anm. 2 p. 849 sq., and § 378 p. 859; ef. W. § 80, 9 a.); 
τινὸς περί τινος, Acts xxiv. 13 (Thue. 8, 85; Xen. Hell. 1, 
7, 2); w. gen. of pers. and ace. of the thing, Mk. xv. 3 
(unless πολλά should be taken adverbially: much, vehe- 
mently); πόσα, ib. 4 LT TrWH (Eur. Or. 28); foll. 
by xara w. gen. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 14 (Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 
9 (ef. W. § 23,1; p. 431 (402); B. § 132, 16]); pass. 
to be accused (as 2 Mace. x. 13; Xen. Hell. 3,5, 25; ef. 
B. § 134, 4): ὑπό τινος, Mt. xxvii. 12; Acts xxii. 30 LT 
Tr WH for Ree. παρά (τὸ τί κτλ. why [A. V. wherefore] 
he was accused; unless it is to be explained, what accu- 
sation was brought forward ete.) ; 6 κατηγορούμενος, Acts 
xxv. 16. b. of an extra-judicial accusation (Xen. 
mem. 1, 3,4): absol. Ro. 11. 15; τινός, Jn. v. 45 [ef. B. 
295 (254)]; Rev. xii. 10 RG Tr; solecistically τινά, Rev. 
xii. 10 L T WH [ef. Β. § 132, 16].* 

[ϑυν. αἰτιᾶσθαι, διαβάλλειν, ἐγκαλεῖν, ἐπικαλεῖν, 
κατηγορεῖν. αἰτιᾶσθαι to accuse with primary reference to 
the ground of accusation (αἰτία), the crime; κατηγορεῖν to 
accuse formally and before a tribunal, bring a charge against 
(κατά suggestive of animosity) publicly; ἐγκαλεῖν to accuse 
with publicity (καλεῖν), but not necessarily formally or before 
a tribunal; ἐπικαλεῖν ‘to cry out upon’, suggestive of public- 
ity and hostility; διαβάλλειν prop. to make a verbal assault 
which reaches its goal (διά) ; in distinction from the words 
which allude to authorship (αἰτιάομαι), to judicial procedure 
(κατηγορέω), or to open averment (ἐγκαλέω, ἐπικαλέω). δια- 
βάλλω expresses the giving currency to a damaging insinua- 
tion. διάβολος a secret and calumnions, in distinction from 
κατήγορος an open and formal, accuser. Schmidt ch. 5.] 


340 


κατισ χυω 


κατηγορία, -ας, 7, (κατήγορος), [fr. Hdt. down], aceusa- 
tion, charge: w. gen. of the pers. accused, Lk. vi. 7 RG 
LTrmrg.; [Jn. xviii. 29 T WH]; κατά τινος, Jn. xviii. 
29[RGL Tr]; 1 Tim. v.19; w. gen. of the crime, Tit. 
rh (pe 

κατήγορος, -ov, 6, (κατηγορέω [q. v. ad fin.]), an ac 
cuser: Jn. viii. 10; Acts xxiii. 30, 35; xxiv. 8 [R]; xxv. 
16,18; Rey. xii. 10R Tr. [(Fr. Soph. and Hdt. down.)]* 

κατήγωρ, 6, an accuser: Rev. xii. 10 GLTWH. It 
is a form unknown to Grk. writ., a literal transcription 
of the Hebr. 120), a name given to the devil by the 
Rabbins; ef. Buxtorf, Lex. Chald. talm. et rabb. p. 2009 
(Ρ. 997 ed. Fischer); [Schétigen, Horae Hebr. i. p. 1121 
80: ΟἿ: ΒΕ 20 {22} 

κατήφεια, -as, 7, (fr. κατηφής, of ἃ downcast look; and 
this fr. κατά, and τὰ φάη the eyes; Etym. Maen. [496, 53] 
κατήφεια: ἀπὸ τοῦ κάτω τὰ φάη βάλλειν τοὺς ὀνειδιζομένους 
ἢ λυπουμένους ; because, as Plut. de dysopia [al. de vitioso 
pudore (528 e.)] 6. 1 says, it is λύπη κάτω βλέπειν ποι- 
ovaa), prop. a downcast look expressive of sorrow; hence 
shame, dejection, gloom, [A. V. heaviness]: Jas. iv. 9. 
(Hom. 1]. 3, 51; 16, 498 ete.; Thue. 7, 75; Joseph. 
antt. 13,16, 1; Plut. Cor. 20; [Pelop. 33, 3, and often; 
Dion. Hal., Char., etc.]; often in Philo.) * 

κατ-ηχέω, -@: 1 aor. κατήχησα; Pass., pres. κατηχοῦμαι; 
ΡΥ. κατήχημαι ; 1 aor. κατηχήθην ; nowhere met with in the 
O. T.; very rare in prof. auth. ; 1. prop. to sound 
towards, sound down upon, resound: ἁρμονία κατηχεῖ τῆς 
θαλάττης, Philostr. p. 791 [icon. 1,19]; to charm with re- 
sounding sound, to fascinate, τινὰ μύθοις, Leian. Jup. 
trag. 39. 2. to teach orally, to instruct: Leian. asin. 
δ 48; Philopatr.17. In the N. T. only used by Luke 
and Paul: τινά, 1 Co. xiv. 19; pass. ἐκ τοῦ νόμου, by 
hearing the law, wont to be publicly read in the syna- 
gogues, Ro. ii. 18; w. acc. of the thing, αὐτός σε πολλὰ Ka- 
τηχήσω τῶν ἀγνοουμένων, Joseph. de vita sua § 65 fin.; w.- 
ace. of a thing and of a pers., rod ἀληθοῦς λόγου βραχέα 
κατηχήσας με, Clem. hom. 1, 13; pass. w. ace. of the 
thing: τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ κυρίου, Acts xviii. 25; τὸν λόγον, Gal. 
vi. 6; hence some [(see Meyer in loc.)] resolve Lk. i. 4 
thus: περὶ τῶν Adyar, ods κατηχήθης (see below). 3. 
to inform by word of mouth; pass. to be orally informed : 
foll. by ὅτι, Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 30; περί τινος (gen. 
of pers.), foll. by ὅτι, Acts xxi. 21; w. acc. of the thing, ὧν 
κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ i. 6. τούτων, ἃ κτλ. ibid. 24 (κατηχηθεὶς 
περὶ τῶν συμβεβηκότων, [pseudo-] Plut. de fluviis [7, 2]; 
8,1; 7,1). To this construction the majority refer Lk. 
i. 4, construing it thus: τὴν ἀσφάλ. τῶν λόγων, περὶ ὧν 
κατηχήθης [W. 165 (156); B.§ 148,7; (see ἀθον6}1}. ΟἿ. 
Gilbert, Dissertatio de christianae catecheseos historia 
(Lips. 1836) Pt. i. p. 1 sqq.; Zezschwitz, System der christl. 
Katechetik (Leipz. 1863) i. p. 17 sqq.; [and for 600]. 
usage, Suicer, Thes. ii. 69 sqq.; Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, see ἴδιος, 2. 

κατ-ιόω, τῶ: pf. pass. κατίωμαι; (see ἰός, 2); to rust over 
[ef. κατά, IIT. 3], cover with rust: Jas. ν. 3. (Epictet. 
diss. 4, 6, 14; [Sir. xii. 11].) * 

κατοισχύω: impf. κατίσχυον ; fut. κατισχύσω; 1 aor 


κατοικέω 


subjune. 2 pers. plur. κατισχύσητε (Lk. xxi. 36 T Tr txt. 
WH); Sept. mostly for pin; among Grk. writ. esp. by 
Polyb., Diod., Dion. H.; prop. to he strong to another’s 
detriment, to prevail against; to be superior in strength; 
to overpower: foll. by an inf., Lk. xxi. 36 T Tr txt. WH 
[ prevail (i. e. have full strength) to escape ete.]; to over- 
come, τινός (Jer. xv. 18), Mt. xvi. 18 (meaning, ‘not even 
the gates of Hades —than which nothing was supposed 
to be stronger— shall surpass the church in strength’) ; 
absol. to prevail (i. 6. succeed, accomplish one’s desire) : 
Lk. xxiii. 23.* 

κατ-οικέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. κατῴκησα; [fr. Soph. and Hat. 
down]; Sept. times uncounted for 307), more rarely for 
137; 1. intrans. todwell, settle; 8. prop.: foll. by 
ev w. dat. of place, Lk. xiii. 4 [Tr WHom. ἐν]; Acts i. 20; 
5 [T WHurrg. εἰς (see below)]; vii. 2,4, 48; ix. 22; xi. 
29; xiii. 27; xvii. 24; Heb. xi. 9; Rev. xiii. 12; foll. by 
εἰς (a pregnant construction; see εἰς, C. 2 p.186*), Mt. ii. 
23; iv.13; Acts vii. 4; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Rev. ili. 10; vi. 10; 
viii. 13; xi. 10; xiii. 8, 14; xiv. 6 Rec.; xvii. 8, (Num. 
xiii. 33; xiv. 14; xxxv. 32, 34); ἐπὶ πᾶν τὸ πρόσωπον 
[παντὸς προσώπου LT Tr WH (cf. ἐπί, C. 1. 1a.)] τῆς γῆς; 
Acts xvii. 26; ὅπου, Rev. ii. 13; so that ἐκεῖ must be added 
mentally, Acts xxii. 12; demons taking possession of the 
bodies of men are said κατοικεῖν ἐκεῖ, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 
26. b. metaph., divine powers, influences, etc., are 
said κατοικεῖν ἔν τινι (dat. of pers.), or ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τινός, 
to dwell in his soul, to pervade, prompt, govern it: 6 
θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν, Barn. ep. 16,8; ὁ Χριστός, Eph. iii. 17; the 
Iloly Spirit, Jas. iv.5 RG (Herm. past., mand. 5, 2; [sim. 
5, 5ete.; ef. Harnack’s reff. on mand. 3,1]); τὸ πλήρωμα 
τῆς θεότητος in Christ, Col. ii. 9, ef. i. 19; ἡ σοφία ἐν σώ- 
part, Sap. i. 4; δικαιοσύνη is said to dwell where right- 
eousness prevails, is practised, 2 Pet. iii. 13. 2. 
trans. fo dwell in, inhabit: with ace. of place, Acts i. 19; 
ii. 9,14; iv. 16; ix. 32,35; xix.10,17; Rev. xii. 12 Rec.; 
xvii. 2; God is said to dwell in the temple, i. e. to be always 
present for worshippers: Mt. xxiii. 21. [Comp.: ey- 
xaTotkew. | * 

[SyN. κατοικεῖν, in the Sept. the ordinary rendering of 1” 
to settle, dwell, differs from mapotk εἶν, the common represen- 
tative of 1) to sojourn, as the permanent differs from the 
transitory; e.g. Gen. xxxvii. 1 κατῴκει δὲ Ἰακὼβ ἐν τῇ γῇ 
οὗ παρῴκησεν ὃ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ, ἐν γῇ Χαναάν ; Philodesacrif. Ab. 
et Cain. § 10 ὁ γὰρ τοῖς ἐγκυκλίοις μόνοις ἐπανέχων παροικεῖ 
σοφία, οὐ κατοικεῖ. Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col.i. 19 and on Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 1.] 

κατ-οίκησις, -ews, ἡ, (κατοικέω), dwelling, abode: Mk. v. 
3. (Gen. x. 30; Num. xv. 2, ete.; Thuc., Plat., Plut.) * 

κατ-οικητήριον, -ov, τό, (κατοικέω). an abode, a habita- 
tion: Eph. ii. 22; Rev. xviii. 2. (Sept.; Barn. ep. [6, 
15]; 16, 7. 8, and other ecel. writ.) * ; 

κατ-οικία, -as, 7, (κατοικέω), dwelling, habitation: Acts 
xvii. 26. (Sept.; Polyb. 2, 32,4; Strab., Plut., al.)* 

κατ-οικίζω ; 1 aor. κατῴκισα; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 
awin; to cause to dwell, to send or bring into an abode ; 
to give a dwelling to: metaph. τὸ πνεῦμα, ὃ κατῴκισεν ἐν 
ἡμῖν, i. 6. the Spirit which he placed within us, to pervade 
and prompt us (see κατοικέω, 1 b.), Jas. iv. 5 LT Tr WH.” 


341 


καῦσις 


κατοπτρίζω: (κατοπτρον a mirror), to show in a mirror, 
to make to reflect, to mirror: κατοπτρίζων ὁ ἥλιος τὴν ἶριν. 
Plut. mor. p. 894 f. [i. 6. de plac. philos. 3,5,11]. Mid. 
pres. κατοπτρίζομαι; to look at one’s self in a mirror (Ar- 
tem. oneir. 2,7; Athen. 15 p.687¢.; Diog. Laért. 2, 33; 
[7, 17]); to behold for one’s self as in a mirror [W. 254 
(238); B. 193 sq. (167)]: τὴν δόξαν τοῦ κυρίου, the glory 
of Christ (which we behold in the gospel as in a mirror 
from which it is reflected), 2 Co. iii. 18. Plainly so in 
Philo, alleg. leg. iii. § 33 μηδὲ κατοπτρισαίμην ἐν ἄλλῳ τινὶ 
τὴν σὴν ἰδέαν ἢ ἐν σοὶ τῷ θεῷ." 

κατόρθωμα, -τος, τό, (κατορθόω to make upright, erect), 
a right action, a successful achievement: plur. of whole- 
some public measures or institutions, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) 
[RG; see διόρθωμα] ; (3 Mace. iii. 23; Polyb., Diod., 
Strab., Joseph., Plut., Leian.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
251; [ Win. 25)].* 

κάτω (fr. κατά), adv., [fr. Hom. down], compar. κατω- 
τέρω; [cf. W. 472 (440)]; 1. down, downwards: 
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9; Jn. viii. 6,8; Acts xx. 9. 2. 
below, beneath, [ οἴ. W. u. 5.7; a. of place: Mk. xiv. 
66; Actsii.19; ἕως κάτω [A. V. to the bottom], Mt. xxvii. 
51; Mk. xv. 38, (Ezek. i. 27; viii. 2); τὰ κάτω, the parts 
or regions that lie beneath (opp. to τὰ ἄνω, heaven), i. 6. 
the earth, Jn. viii. 23. b. of temporal succession: ἀπὸ 
διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω, from a child of two years and those 
that were of a lower age [cf. W. 370 (347) ], Mt. ii. 16; 
ἀπὸ εἰκοσαετοῦς καὶ κάτω. 1 Chr. xxvii. 23.* 

κατώτερος, -έρα, -epuv, (compar. of κάτω, see ἀνώτερος), 
[Hippoer., Theophr., Athen., al.], lower: (6 Χριστὸς) κα- 
τέβη εἰς τὰ κατώτερα μέρη τῆς γῆς, Eph. iv. 9, which many 
understand of Christ’s descent into Hades (τὸν τόπον τὸν 
κάτω καλούμενον, Plat. Phaedop.112c.), taking τῆς γῆς as a 
partit. gen. (see aéys, 2). But the mention of this fact 
is at variance with the connection. Paul is endeavoring 
to show that the passage he has just before quoted, Ps. 
Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19, must be understood of Christ, not of 
God, because ‘ an ascent into heaven’ necessarily presup- 
poses a descent to earth (which was made by Christ in 
the incarnation), whereas God does not leave his abode 
in heaven. Accordingly ra κατώτ. τῆς γῆς denotes the 
lower parts of the universe, which the earth constitutes, — 
τῆς γῆς being a gen. of apposition; ef. W. § 59, 8a.; 
Grimm, Institutio theol. dogmat. ed. 2, p. 355 sqq.* 

κατωτέρω. see κάτω, esp. 2 b. 

KaiSa, see Κλαύδη. 

καῦμα, -ros, τό, (καίω), heat: of painful and burning 
heat, Rev. vii. 16; xvi.9. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

καυματίζω: 1 aor. inf. καυματίσαι ; 1 aor. pass. ἐκαυμα- 
tidOnv; (καῦμα) : to burn with heat, to scorch: twa, with 
ἐν πυρί added, Rev. xvi. 8; pass., Mt. xiii. 6; Mk. iv. 6; 
w. addition of καῦμα μέγα (see ἀγαπάω sub fin. for exx. 
and reff.), to be tortured with intense heat, Rev. xvi. 9. 
(Antonin. 7, 64; Epict. diss. 1, 6, 26; 3, 22, 52; of the 
heat of fever, Plut. mor. p. 100 d. [de virt. et vit. 1], 
691 e. [quaest. conviv. vi. 2, 6].)* 

καῦσις, -ews, 7, (καίω), burning, burning up: ἧς τὸ τέλος 


Kav00@ 


els καῦσιν, the fate of which land (appointed it by God) 
is, to be burned up (by fire and brimstone from heaven ; 
ef. Deut. xxix. 23), Heb. vi. 8; cf. Bleek ad loc. (Hadt., 
Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

καυσόω, -@: (kavoos); to burn up, set fire to; pres. ptep. 
pass. καυσούμενος, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12, [A. V. with fervent 
heat]. (Elsewhere only [chiefly ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.] in 
Diose. and Galen: to suffer from feverish burning, be 
parched with fever.) * 

καυστηριάζω : pf. pass. ptep. κεκαυστηριασμένος: to burn 
in with a branding iron (ras ἵππους λύκον, a figure of a wolf, 
Strab. 5,1, 9 p. 215): 1 Tim. iv. 2 Led. ster. T Tr WH, 
on which pass. see καυτηριάζω. (Not found elsewhere.) * 

καύσων, -wvos, 0; 1. burning heat of the sun: Mt. 
xx.12; Lk. xii.55; Jas.i. 11, [4]. refer all these pass. to 
the next head]; (Is. xlix. 10; [Gen. xxxi. 40 Alex.; ef. 
Judith viii. 3]; Sir.xviii.16; Athen. 3 p. 73 b.). 2. 
Eurus, a very dry, hot, east wind, scorching and drying 
up everything; for Ὁ; Job xxvii. 21; Hos. xii. 1; 
ἄνεμος καύσων, Jer. xviii. 17; Ezek. xvii. 10; Hos. xiii. 
15; πνεῦμα καύσων, Jon. iv. 8, [ef. Hos. xii. 1]; (on this 
wind οἵ. Schleusner, Thes. ad Sept. iii. p. 297; Win. 
RWB. [also BB. DD.] s. v. Wind). Many suppose it 
to be referred to in Jas. i. 11; yet the evils there men- 
tioned are ascribed not to the καύσων, but to the ἥλιος." 

καυτηριάζω : (καυτήριον [(cf. kaiw) |] a branding-iron) ; 
to mark by branding, to brand: (pf. pass. ptep.] κεκαυτη- 
ριασμένοι τὴν ἰδίαν συνείδησιν, i. 6. κεκαυτηριασμένην ἔχοντες 
τὴν ἰδ. συν. (ef. W. 230 (210}] (cf. καταφθείρω), [branded 
in their own conscience i. 6.1 whose souls are branded with 
the marks of sin, i. e. who carry about with them the per- 
petual consciousness of sin, 1 Tim. iv. 2 R G L ed. maj., 
see καυστηριάζω ; [some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would give it 
here the sense of seared, cf. Eph. iv. 19]. (In Hippocr. 
in a medical sense, to cauterize, remove by cautery.) * 

καυχάομαι, -ὥμαι, 2 pers. sing. καυχᾶσαι (Ro. τ 1.28}; 
1 Co. iv. 7; see κατακαυχάομαιλ: ; fut. καυχήσομαι; 1 aor. 
ἐκαυχησάμην; pf. κεκαύχημαι; (καύχη a boast); [fr. Pind. 
and Hat. down]; Sept. mostly for 99007; in the N. τὰ 
often used by Paul [some 35 times; by Jas. twice]; 
glory (whether with reason or without): absol., 1 Goi i. 
31*; iv. 7; xiii. 3 L [ed. ster. WH (see xaiw)];, 2 Co. 
x. [13], 17°; xi. 16,18; xii. 1, 6,11 Rec.; Eph. ii. 9; 
Jas. iv. 16; ri (ace. of the thing [cf. W. 222 (209)]), to 
glory (on account) of a thing: 2 Co. ix. 2 (ἣν καυχῶμαι 
ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν Maxedéow, which I boast of on your behalf 
unto the Macedonians [B. § 133, 1]; cf. vii. 14, [and see 
below 7); 2 Co. xi. 30, (Prov. xxvii.1; Leian. ocyp. 120); 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the obj. [W. § 33 d.; B. § 133, 23], 
to glory ina thing, (by a usage foreign to class. Grk.; but 
the Lat. says glorior in aliquo): Ro. ii. 23; v. 3; 1 Co. 
ili. 21; 2 Co. v.12; x.15; xi. 12 [ef. Β. 105 (92)]; xii. 
5,9; Gal. vi. 13 sq.; 2 Th.i. 4 RG; Jas. i. 9, (Jer. ix. 
23 sq-; 1 Chr. xvi. 35); ἐν θεῷ, ἐν τῷ θεῷ, in God, i. 6. 
the knowledge of God, intimacy with him, his favors, ete. 
Ro. ii. 17; v.11, (ἐν τοῖς θεοῖς, Theoph. ad Autol. 1,1, 1); 
ἐν κυρίῳ, 1 Co. i. 31°; 2 Co. x. 17°; ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, 


Phil. iii. 3; foll. by ἐπί w. dat. of the obj. [cf. W. § 33 d.; 


342 


Κεδρὼν 


B. § 133, 28], Ro. v. 2 (Prov. xxv. 14; Sir. xxx. 2: 
Diod. xvi. 70); περί twos, 2 Co. x. 8; εἴς τι, in regard 
of, in reference to, 2 Co. x. 16 (Aristot. pol. 5,10 p. 1311, 
4). ὑπέρ w. gen. of pers., to one’s advantage, to the praise 
of one, [on one’s behalf]: 2 Co. vii. 14; xii. 5. ἐνώπιον 
τοῦ θεοῦ, as though standing in his presence, 1 Co. i. 29 
[εἰ B. 173 (1b0)., Comp.: ἐν-, κατα-καυχάομαι. * 
καύχημα, -Tos, τό, (καυχάομαι), very rare in prof. auth.; 

Sept. for mbmN praise, and ΠΝ ΘΓ ornament, beanies 
several times in Sir. 1. that of which one Bree or 
can glory, matter or ground of glorying: Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. 
ix. 15 sq.; 2 Co. i. 14; Phil. ii. 16; τὸ καύχημα ἔχειν εἰς 
his glorying confined to himself [R. V. in 
regard of himself alone], Gal. vi. 4; τὸ x. τῆς ἐλπίδος, the 
matter for glorying which hope gives, i. e. the hope, of 
which we glory, Heb. iii. 6. 2. As γέννημα, δίωγμα, 
θέλημα, ἴαμα, κήρυγμα (2 Tim. iv. 17), κλαῦμα, πλήρωμα, 
φρόνημα, ete., are used for γέννησις, δίωξις, θέλησις, κτλ. 
[ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 6], so also (which H. A. W. Meyer 
persists in denying [as respects the New Testament 
(see his note on Ro. iv. 2); so Ellicott and Bp. Lghtft. 
on Gal. vi. 4; Liinem. on Heb. u. s.]) is καύχημα used 
for καύχησις (Pind. Isthm. 5, 65 [ef. Meyer on Phil. i. 26 
note; on the apparent use of nouns in μα in an active 
sense see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. Ἐ᾿ 257 54.7), α glorying, 
boasting: 1 Co. v.6; Phil. i. 26; ὑπέρ τινος (see καυχάομαι, 
sub fin.), 2 Co. v. 12; ix. 3.* 

καύχησις, -ews, 7, (καυχάομαι), the act of glorying: Ro. 
iii. 27; 2 Co. ix. 4 Rec.; 2Co. xi. 10,17; Jas. iv. 16; 
στέφανος καυχήσεως, crown of which we can boast, 1 Th. 
ii. 19; Ezek. xvi. 12; Prov. xvi. 31; ὑπέρ τινος, (on be- 
half) of one [ef. καυχάομαι, sub fin.], 2 Co. vii. 4; vill. 24; 
ἐπί twos, before one, 2 Co. vii. 14; ἔχω [τὴν crit. edd.] 
καύχησιν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, the glorying which I have I 
ascribe to Christ, or I owe it to Christ that I am per- 
mitted to glory (see ἐν, I. 6 Ὁ. p. 211), Ro. xv. 17; 1 Co. 
xy. 31; that of which one glories, cause of glorying, 2 Co. 
i.12. (Sept. several times for ἈΠ ΘΠ: [Diog. Laeért. 10, 
7 fin.]; Philod. in Vol. Hercul. Oxfort. i. p. 16.) * 

Kadhapvaotp, see Καπερναούμ. 

Keyxpeat [T WH Kevyp. (cf. WH. App. p. 150)], τῶν, 
ai, Cenchree or Kenchrew, a port of Corinth, about 60 
[70; Strabo (as below)] stadia from the city, on the 
eastern side of the isthmus, the emporium of its trade 
with Asia (Strabo 8 p. 380): Acts xviii. 18; Ro. xvi. 1. 
[It still retains the ancient name; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.; 
Lewin, St. Paul, i. 299 sq.]* 

κέδρος, -ov, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], a cedar, a well-known 
tree, the wood of which is fragrant: χείμαρρος τῶν κέ- 
δρων, Jn. xviii. 1 R Tr txt. WH (so also 2S. xv. 23; 1K. 
xv. 13, [ef. ii. 37]); τοῦ (sic!) κέδρου, ibid. Tdf.; but see 
the foll. word.* 

Κεδρών, ὁ [B. 21 (19)], indecl. (in Joseph. Kedpav, 
-avos [see below]), Cedron [or Kidron], (Hebr. 711 
i. 6. dark, turbid), the name of a [winter-] torrent, rising 
near Jerusalem and flowing down through a valley of 
the same name (having the Mt. of Olives on the E.) into 
the Dead Sea: χείμαρρος τοῦ Κεδρών, Jn. xviii. 1 GL Tr 


ἑαυτὸν μόνον, 


κεῖμαι 
mrg., acc. to the more correct reading [but see WH. 
App. ad loc.]; (χείμαρρος Κεδρῶνος, Joseph. antt. 8, 1, 
5; φάραγξ Κεδρῶνος, ib. 9, 7,3; Ὁ. 1. 5, 6,1; φάραγγι 
βαθείᾳ... 7 Kedpov ὠνόμασται, ib. 5, 2,3). [B. 10. 8. ν. 
Kidron, ef. Cedron, 2; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the 
Holy Land, p. 96 sq.] * 

κεῖμαι; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἔκειτο; fo lie; 1. prop.: 
of an infant, foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Lk. ii. 12 [Tdf. 
om. κείμ.], 16; of one buried: ὅπου or οὗ, Mt. xxviii. 6; 
Lk. xxiii. 53; Jn. xi. 41 Rec.; xx. 12; of things that 
quietly cover some spot, Lk. xxiv. 12 [RGLbr.]; Jn. 
xx. 5-7; xxi. 9; with ἐπί re added, 2 Co. iii. 15; ἐπάνω 
τινός (of a city situated on a hill), Mt. v. 14; also of 
things put or set in any place, in ref. to which we often 
use to stand: thus of vessels, Jn. ii. 6; xix. 29, (χύτρας 
κειμένας, Xen. oec. 8,19); of a throne, Rev. iv. 2 (Jer. 
xxiv. 1; Hom. Il. 2,777; Od. 17, 331); κεῖσθαι πρός τι, 
to be brought near to a thing [see πρός, I. 2 a.], Mt. iii. 
10; Lk. iii. 9; absol., of the site of a city, τετράγωνος 
κεῖται, Rey. xxi. 16; of grain and other things laid up, 
gathered together, Lk. xii. 19; of a foundation, 1 Co. 
iii. 11. 2. metaph. a. to be (by God’s intent) 
set, 1. 6. destined, appointed: foll. by eis w. ace. indicating 
the purpose, Lk. ii. 34; Phil. 1. 11 (16); 1 Th. 1.8. b. 
as very often in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1694"; 
[L. and S. s. v. IV. 2]), of laws, to be made, laid down: 
τινί, 1 Tim.i. 9. C. ὁ κόσμυς ὅλος ἐν TO πονηρῷ κεῖται, 
lies in the power of the evil one, i. 6. is held in subjec- 
tion by the devil, 1 Jn. v. 19. 
ἀντί-, ἀπό-, ἐπί-, κατά-, Tapd-, Tepi-, πρό-κειμαι.} * 

κειρία, -as, 7, α band, either for a bed-girth (Schol. ad 
Arstph. ἂν. 817 κειρία- εἶδος ζώνης ἐκ σχοινίων. παρεοι- 
kos ἱμάντι, 7 δεσμοῦσι τὰς κλίνας, cf. Proy. vii. 16; [Plut. 
Alcib. 16, 1]), or for tying up a corpse after it has been 
swathed in linen: in the latter sense in Jn. xi. 44; [al. 
take it here of the swathings themselves ].* 

kelpw; [1 aor. ἔκειρα (Acts viii. 32 TWH mrg.)]; 1 aor. 
mid. ἐκειράμην ; fr. Hom. down; to shear: a sheep, Acts 
viii. 32 ([cf. above] fr. Is. liii. 7). Mid. to get or let be shorn 
[W. § 38, 2b.; B. § 135, 4]: τὴν κεφαλήν, Acts xviii. 18; 
absol. of shearing or cutting short the hair of the head, 
1 Co. xi. 6 [ef. W. § 43, 1].* 

Kels, see Κίς. 

κέλευσμα, -ros, τό, (κελεύω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down, an order, command, spec. a stimulating cry, either 
that by which animals are roused and urged on by man, 
as horses by charioteers, hounds by hunters, ete., or that 
by which a signal is given to men, e. g. to rowers by the 
master of a ship (Lcian. tyr. or catapl. c. 19), to sol- 
diers by a commander (Thue. 2, 92; Prov. xxiv. 62 
(xxx. 27)): ἐν κελεύσματι, with a loud summons, a trum- 
pet-call, 1 Th. iv. 16.* 

κελεύω ; impf. ἐκέλευον ; 1 aor. ἐκέλευσα ; to command, 
order: τινά, foll. by an aor. inf., Mt. xiv. 19, 28; Acts iv. 
15; by the ace. with aor. inf., Mt. xviii. 25; xxvii. 58 
[R GL], 64; Lk. xviii. 40; Acts v. 34; viii. 38; xxii. 30; 
xxiii. 10; xxv. 6,17; the acc. is wanting because evident 
fr. the context, Mt. viii. 18; xiv. 9; [xxvii. 58 TWH 


[Comp.: ἀνά-, cvr-ava-, 


845 


κενοφωνία 


(Trin br.)]; Acts xii. 19; xxi. 33; foll. by acc. with 
pres. inf., Acts xxi. 34; xxii. 24; xxiii. 3,35; xxiv. 8 
RG; xxv. 21; xxvii. 43; the acc. is wanting because 
easily discernible fr. the context, Acts xvi. 22 [cf. B. 201 
(174); W.§ 40, 3d.]; by a use not infreq. in Hom., but 
somewhat rare in prose writ., with the dat. of a pers. 
(Plat. rep. 3 p. 396 a.; Thue. 1, 44; Diod. 19,17; Jo- 
seph. antt. 20, 6,2; Tob. viii. 18; οἵ. Poppo on Xen. 
Cyr. 1, 3, 9 var.), foll. by an inf., Mt. xv. 35 RG; cf. B. 
275 (236). κελεύσαντός τινος, at one’s command, Acts — 
xxv. 23. [On the constr. of κελ., esp. with the pass. inf. 
and ace., see B. § 141, 5 ef. p. 237 (204) note; also W. 
336 (315), 332 (311).]* 

[Syn.: κελεύειν, παραγγέλλειν, ἐντέλλεσθαι, τάσ- 
σειν (and its comp.): κελ. to command, designates verbal 
orders, emanating (usually) from a superior; παραγγέλλω 
to charge, etc., is used esp. of the order of a military com- 
mander which is passed along the line by his subordinates, 
(Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 2); ἐντέλλεσθαι to enjoin, is employed 
esp. of those whose office or position invests them with 
claims, and points rather to the contents of the command, 
ef. our “instructions”; τάσσω lit. assign a post to, with a 
suggestion of duties as connected therewith ; often used of a 
military appointment (cf. τάξις) ; its compounds ἐπιτάσσειν 
and προστάσσειν differ from évr- in denoting fixed and abid- 
ing obligations rather than specific or occasional instruc- 
tions, duties arising from the office rather than emanating 
from the personal will of a superior. Schmidt ch. 8.] 

κενοδοξία, -as, 7, (κενόδοξος, q. V-), vain-glory, groundless 
self-esteem, empty pride: Phil. 11. 3. (4 Mace. ii. 155 viii. 
18; Polyb., Plut., Leian.; [Philo de mut. nom. ὃ 15; leg. 
ad Gaium § 16; ete.]; eccl. writ.; univ. a vain opinion, 
error, Sap. xiv. 14.) * 

κενόδοξος, -ov, (κενός. δόξα). glorying without reason, con- 
ceited, vain-glorious, eager for empty glory: Gal. ν. 26. 
(Polyb., Diod.; Antonin. 5,1; [ef. Philo de trib. virt. 
§ 2 fin.]; 600]. writ.) * 

κενός, -7, -όν, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for DP, Ps PD 
ete., empty ; 1. prop. of places, vessels, ete., which 
contain nothing (Judg. vii. 16; Gen. xxxvii. 24); met- 
aph. empty, vain; devoid of truth: λόγοι, Eph. v. 6 (Ex. v. 
9); ἀπάτη. Col. ii. 8; κήρυγμα, πίστις, 1 Co. xy. 14. 57 
of men, empty-handed; without a gift: ἀποστέλλειν and 
ἐξαποστέλλειν τινὰ κενόν (Gen. xxxi. 42; Deut. xv. 13; 
xvi. 16), Mk. xii.3; Lk.i.53; xx.10sq.; metaph. des¢i- 
tute of spiritual wealth, of one who boasts of his faith as 
a transcendent possession, yet is without the fruits of 
faith, Jas. ii. 20. 3. metaph. of endeavors, labors, 
acts, which result in nothing, vain, fruitless, without effect: 
ἡ χάρις. 1 Co. xv. 10; κόπος, ib. 58; ἡ εἴσοδος, 1 Th. ii. 1; 
neut. plur. κενά, things that will not succeed, Acts iv. 25 
(fr. Ps. ii. 1); εἰς κενόν, in vain, to no purpose, [ef. W. 
592 (551)]: 2 Co. vi.1; Gal. ii. 2; Phil. ii. 16; 1 Th. 
iii. 5, (Is. lxv. 23; Jer. vi. 29, ete.; Diod. 19,9; Heliod. 
10, 30). [Cf£. Trench, Syn. § xlix.]* 

κενοφωνία, -as, 7, (κενόφωνος uttering emptiness), (va- 
niloquium, Vulg. [ed. Clem. (in 2 Tim. ii. 16)]), empty 
discussion, discussion of vain and useless matters, [A. V. 
babbling]: 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. 11. 16. (([Dioscor. 1 
prooem. p. 3, 1]; eccles. writ.) * 


KEvOW 


κενόω, -@: [fut. κενώσω, 1 Co. ix. 15 Ltxt. T Tr WH]; 
1 aor. é€xévwoa; Pass., pf. κεκένωμαι; 1 aor. ἐκενώθην ; 
(κενός) ; 1. to emply, make empty: ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσε, 
80. τοῦ εἶναι ἴσα θεῷ or τῆς μορφῆς τοῦ θεοῦ, i. e. he laid 
aside equality with or the form of God (said of Christ), 
Phil. ii. 7 (see a fuller exposition of this passage in 
μορφή). 2. to make void i. 6. deprive of force, ren- 
der vain, useless, of no effect: pass., Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. i. 
17. 3. to make void i. e. cause a thing to be seen to 
be empty, hollow, false: τὸ καύχημα, 1 Co. ix. 15; pass. 
2-Co. ix. 8. (Twice in Sept. viz. Jer. xiv. 2; xv. 9; 
often in Attic writ.) * 

κέντρον, -ov, τό, (κεντέω to prick) ; 1. a sting, as 
that of bees (4 Mace. xiv. 19), scorpions, locusts, Rev. ix. 
10. Since animals wound by their sting and even cause 
death, Paul in 1 Co. xv. 55 (after Hos. xiii. 14 Sept.) 
attributes to death, personified, a κέντρον, i. 6. a deadly 
weapon, and that κέντρον is said to be ἡ ἁμαρτία [56], be- 
cause sin is death’s cause and punishment [?] (Ro. v. 
12). 2. as in the Grk. writ. an iron goad, for urg- 
ing on oxen, horses and other beasts of burden; hence 
the proverb πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν, to kick against the 
goad, i. e. to offer vain and perilous or ruinous resist- 
ance: Acts ix.5 Rec.; xxvi. 14; ef. Pind. Pyth. 2, 173; 
Aeschyl. [Ag. 1624, ef.] Prom. 323; Eurip. Bacch. 795; 
Terent. Phorm. 1, 2, 28; Ammian. 18, 5.* 

κεντυρίων, -wvos, 6, a Lat. word, a centurion: Mk. xv. 
39, 44 sq. [Polyb. 6, 24, 5.]* 

[Κενχρεαί, see Keyxpeat. ] 

κενῶς, adv., vainly, in vain, [W. 463 (431); <Aristot. 
on]: Jas. iv. 5.* 

κεραία [WII κερέα (see their App. p. 151)], -as, 7, 
(κέρας), @ little horn; extremity, apex, point; used by the 
Grk. grammarians of the accents and diacritical points. 
In Mt. v. 18 [(where see Wetstein; cf. also Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 537 sq.)]; Lk. xvi. 17 of the little 
lines, or projections, by which the Hebr. letters in other 
respects similar differ from each other, as Hand 7, Tand4, 
Δ and 3,[A.V. title]; the meaning is, ‘not even the mi- 
nutest part of the law shall perish.’ [(Aeschyl.,Thuce.,al.)|* 

κεραμεύς, -€ws, ὁ, (κεράννυμι), a potter: Mt. xxvii. 7,10; 
Ro. ix. 31. (Hom., Hes., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.; Sept. 
several times for 77°.) * 

κεραμικός, -7), -όν, (κέραμος) : 1. in class. Grk. of 
or be longing to a potter: hence x. γῆ: such as ἃ potter 
uses, Hippoer.; τέχνη, Plat. polit. p. 288 a. 2. in 
the Bible made of clay, earthen: Rev. ii. 27 (Dan. ii. 41), 
for which the Greeks use κεραμεοῦς, -@, -odv, and κεράμιος 
[al. -μειος], cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 147; [W. 99 (94) ].* 

κεράμιον, -ου, τό, (neut. of the adj. κεράμιος, see the 
preceding word [al. make it a dimin. fr. κέραμος), an 
earthen vessel, a pot, jar; a jug or pitcher: with ὕδατος 
added, a water-pitcher, Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxii. 10. (The- 
ophr. caus. plant. 3, 4, 3; οἴνου, Jer. ΧΙ]. (xxxv.) 5; 
Xen. anab. 6, 1,15; Dem. p. 934, 26; Polyb. 4, 56, 3; 
ἐλαίου, Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 2.) * 

κέραμος, -ov, 6, (κεράννυμι) ; 
2. anything made of clay, earthen ware. 


1. clay, potter's earth. 
3. spec. a 


344 


κεράτιον 


(roofing) tile (Thuc., Athen., Hdian., al.) ; the roof itself 
(Arstph. fr. 129 d.): so διὰ τῶν κεράμων, through the roof, 
i. e. through the door in the roof to which a ladder or 
stairway led up from the street (accordingly the Rabbins 
distinguish two ways of entering a house, ‘the way 
through the door’ and ‘the way through the roof’ [Lght/1. 
Horae Hebr. p. 601]; οἵ. Win. RWB. s.v. Dach; Keim 
ii. p. 176 sq. [Eng. trans. iii. 215; Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, i. 501 sq.; Jewish Social Life, p. 93 sqq.]), Lk. 
y. 19. Mark (ii. 4) describes the occurrence differently 
(see ἀποστεγάζω), evidently led into error by misappre- 
hending the words of Luke. [But, to say nothing of the 
improbability of assuming Mark’s narrative to be de- 
pendent on Luke’s, the alleged discrepance disappears 
if Luke’s language is taken literally, “through the 
tiles” (see διά, A. I. 1); he says nothing of “the door 
in the roof.” On the various views that have been taken 
of the details of the occurrence, see B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) 
s. v. House; Dr. Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. 1. ¢.]* 

κεράννυμι (κεραννύω) : 1 aor. exépaca; pf. pass. κεκέρα- 
σμαι (for the more com. κέκραμαι, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
582; Bitm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 214; Kriiger § 40 8. v. 
i. p. 175; [Veitch s. v.]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to 
mix, mingle. 2. to mix wine and water. 3. to 
pour out for drinking: τινί τι, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. mingle]; 
pass., Rey. xiv. 10; (so Bel and the Dragon 11; Anthol. 
11, 137,12). [Comr.: συγ-κεράννυμι.]" 

[SYN. κεράννυμι, μίγνυμι : in strict usage κερ. Cenotes such a 
mixing as combines the ingredients into a new compound, 
chemical mixture; ply. such a mixing as merely blends 
or intermingles them promiscuously, mechanical mixture.] 

κέρας, -aros, plur. κέρατα, gen. -άτων (W. 65 (63); B. 
15 (13)), τό, [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. 10» @ horn; a. 
prop.: of animals, Rev. v. 6; xii. 3; xiii. 1,11; xvii. 3,7, 
12, 16. b. Since animals (esp. bulls) defend them- 
selves with their horns, the horn with the Hebrews (and 
other nations) is a symbol of strength and courage, and 
is used as such ina variety of phrases (Ps. ]xxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 18; exxxi. (exxxii.) 17; exlviii. 14; 1 S. 11. 
10; Sir. xlvii. 5, 7,11; 1 Mace. ii. 48, ete.; ef. Gesenius, 
Thes. iii. p. 1238; [B. Ὁ. s. v. Horn]); hence κέρας 
σωτηρίας (of God, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 3; 2S. xxii. 3), i. q. 
a mighty and valiant helper, the author of deliverance, of 
the Messiah, Lk. i. 69. c. trop. a projecting extremity 
in shape like a horn, a point, apex: as, of an altar, Rev. 
ix. 13; (Ex. xxix. 12; Lev. iv. 7, 18; xvi. 18; Am. iii. 
14; Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 27)." 

κεράτιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of κέρας); 1. a litile 
horn. 2. the name of the fruit of the κερατέα or 
κερατεία [or -rla], the Ceratonia siliqua (Linn.) or carob- 
tree (called also St. John’s Bread, [from the notion that 
its pods, which resemble those of the ‘locust’, constituted 
the food of the Baptist]). This fruit is shaped like a 
horn and has a sweet taste; it was [and is] used not 
only in fattening swine, but as an article of food by the 
lower classes: Lk. xv.16 [A. V. husks]; ef. Win. RWB. 
s. y. Johannisbrodbaum; [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. 
Husks].* 


, 
κερδαίνω 


κερδαίνω: [fut. κερδήσω, Jas. iv. 18 Rec?*** LT ΤΥ 
WH; see also below]; 1 aor. ἐκέρδησα (an Ionic form fr. 
κερδάω, which later writ. use for the earlier éxépdava, see 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 740; Bitm. Ausf. Sprehl. ii. p. 215; 
W. 87 (83); [Veitch s. v.]), once 1 aor. subj. κερδάνω (1 
Co. ix. 21 L T Tr [but WH (cf. also Grsb. note) read the 
fut. κερδανῶ, cf. B. 60 (53); § 139, 38]); 1 fut. pass. 
κερδηθήσομαι (the subjunc. κερδηθήσωνται, 1 Pet. iii. 1 
Rt G is aclerical error (cf. reff. s. v. καίω, init.], for which 
LT Tr WI have restored κερδηθήσονται [ef. B. § 139, 
38]); [fr. Hes. down]; (fr. κέρδος) ; [ὁ gain, acquire; 
(Vulg. passim lucrifacio [also /ucro, ete. ]) ; a. prop.: 
τὸν κόσμον, Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 36; Lk. ix. 25; money, 
Mt. xxv. 16 [LT WI], 17, 20, 22; absol. to get gain, 
Jas. iv. 13. b. metaph. a. with nouns signify- 
ing loss, damage, injury, it is used of the gain arising 
from shunning or escaping from the evil (where 
we say lo spare one’s self, be spared): τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην 
κ' ζημίαν, Acts xxvii. 215 τό ye μιανθῆναι τὰς χεῖρας κερδαί- 
νειν, to avoid the crime of fratricide, Joseph. antt. 2, 3, 
2; ζημίαν, to escape a loss, Eur. Cycl. 312; other exx. in 
Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 139 sq. B. τινά, ἰο gain any one 
i. e. to win him over to the kingdom of God, which none 
but the placable enter, Mt. xviii. 15; to gain one to faith 
in Christ, 1 Pet. iii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 19-22; Χριστόν, to gain 
Christ’s favor and fellowship, Phil. iii. 8. Not found in 
the O. T-* 

κέρδος, -eos (-ous), τό, gain, advantage: Phil. i. 21 (with 
which cf. Ael. v. h. 4, 7 τοῖς κακοῖς οὐδὲ τὸ ἀποθανεῖν κέρ- 
Sos); Tit. 1. 11 : plur. Phil. iii. 7. [From Hom. down.]* 

[κερέα, see Kepaia. | 

κέρμα, -τος, τό, (κείρω to cut into bits), small pieces of 
money, small coin. change; generally and collectively, τὸ 
κέρμα mnoney: Jn. ii. 15, where Lmrg. Tr WH τὰ κέρματα; 
(Arstph., Dem., Joseph., al.). Cf. the full exhibition of 
the use of the word given by Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum 
N. T. ete. p. 264 sqq.* 

κερματιστής, -οὔ, 6, (κερματίζω [to cut into small pieces, 
to make small change ]), a money-changer, money-broker : 
Jn. ii. 14. In the court of the Gentiles [(see ἱερόν, and 
Eversheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 244 sq.)] in the temple 
at Jerusalem were the seats of those who sold such ani- 
mals for sacrifice as had been selected, examined, and 
approved, together with incense, oil, and other things 
needed in making offerings and in worship; and the 
magnitude of this traffic had introduced the banker’s or 
broker’s business; [ef. BB.DD. s. v. Money-changers ; 
esp. Edersheim τι. s. p. 367 sqq.]. (Nicet. annal. 7, 2 p. 
266 ed. Bekk.; Max. Tyr. diss. 2 p. 15 ed. Markland.) * 

κεφάλαιον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. κεφάλαιος, belong- 
ing to the head) ; 1. the chief or main point, the 
principal thing, (Vulg. capitulum): Heb. viii. 1 [ef. B. 
154 (134)]; (freq. so in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Thue. and 
Plat. down). 2. the pecuniary sum total of a reck- 
oning, amount, (Plut. Fab. 4); the principal, capital, as 
distinguished fr. the interest (Plat. lege. 5, 742c.); univ. 
a sum of money, sum, (Vulg. summa): Acts xxii. 28; so 
Lev. vi. 5; Num. v. 7; xxxi. 26; Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 3; 


345 


κῆνσος 


Artem. oneir. 1, 17; see other exx. in Kypke, Observv. 
ii. p. 116; [L. and S. s. v. 5 b.].* 

κεφαλαιόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐκεφαλαίωσα [T WH ἐκεφαλίωσα 
(see below) ]; (κεφάλαιον) ; 1. to bring under heads, 
to sum up, to summarize, (Thue., Aristot., al.). 2. in 
an unusual sense, to smile or wound in the head: Mk. xii. 
4. It is of no use to appeal to the analogy of the verb 
γναθόω, which means εἰς γνάθους τύπτω to smite on the 
cheek, since κεφάλαιον is nowhere used of the head of the 
body. Tdf. [WH] (after codd. % BL) have adopted 
ἐκεφαλίωσαν (fr. κεφάλιον, i. 4. κεφαλίς, 4. ν.). But nei- 
ther κεφαλιόω nor κεφαλίζω has yet been noted in any 
Greek author. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95. [Comp.: 
ἀνα-κεφαλαιόω. * 

κεφαλή, -ῆς, ἡ, Sept. for wN 1; the head, both of men: 
Mt. v. 36; Mk. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 38, 44 [Rec.], 46; Jn. xiii. 
9; Acts xviii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 4; Rev. i. 14; iv. 4, and often; 
and of animals: Rev. ix. 7, 17, 19, etc.; on the phrases 
κλίνειν THY κ-» ἐπαίρειν THY K., See κλίνω, 1 and ἐπαίρω; on 
the saying in Ro. xii. 20, see under ἄνθραξ. Since the 
loss of the head destroys the life, κεφαλή is used in 
phrases relating to capital and extreme punishments: 
80 in τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν k. ὑμῶν (see αἷμα, 2 a. p. 15°), 
Acts xviii. 6, and similar phrases in class. Grk.; see 
Passow 8. v. p. 1717*; Pape s. v.3; [L. and S.s. ν. 1. 
3 and 4]. Metaph. anything supreme, chief, prominent; 
of persons, master, lord: τινός, of a husband in relation 
to his wife, 1 Co. xi. 3; Eph. v. 23; of Christ, the lord 
of the husband, 1 Co. xi. 3 [ef. B. 124. 54. (109)]; of the 
church, Eph. iv. 15; v. 23; Col. ii. 19 [ef. B. § 143, 4 c.]; 
τοῦ σώματος τῆς ἐκκλ. Col. i. 18; πάσης ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐξουσίας, 
Col. ii. 10; so Judg. xi. 11; 2S. xxii. 44, and in Byzant. 
of things: κεφ. γωνίας, the corner-stone, see γω- 
via, a. [(From Hom. down.) ]* 

κεφαλιόω: Mk. xii. 4 T WH (approved also by Weiss, 
Volkmar, al.), for κεφαλαιόω, q. ν. 

κεφαλίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (dimin. of κεφαλή, formed after the 
analogy of ἁμαξίς, πινακίς, etc.; ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 
p- 443; Kiihner § 330 Anm. 5, i. p. 708); 1. alittle 
head (Lat. capitellum, capitulum). 2. the highest part, 
extremity or end of anything ; as the capital of a column, 
1 K. vii. 9, 31 ete.; Geop. 14. 6, 6; hence the tips or 
knobs (the umbilici of the Romans [or rather the cornua; 
see Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 52 sq.; Rich, Dict. 
s. v. umbilicus]) of the wooden rod around which parch- 
ments were rolled seem to have been called κεφαλίδες, be- 
cause they resembled little heads; so that 3. the 
Alexand. writ. transferred the name κεφαλίς to the roll 
or volume itself: ἐν κεφαλίδι βιβλίου, Heb. x. 7 (fr. Sept. 
of Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 8 for 799-nb3n3, as in Ezek. ii. 9, 
and without βιβλίου, iii. 1-3; 2 Esdr. vi. 2 [ef. Birt, An- 
tikes Buchwesen, (Berl. 1882), p. 116]), Itala: in volu- 
mine libri, in the roll of the book [οἵ. W. 23 (22)]. The 
different opinions are noticed by Bleek ad loc.* 

κημόω, -@: fut. κημώσω ; (κημός a muzzle); 10 stop the 
mouth by a muzzle, to muzzle: βοῦν, 1 Co. ix. 9 T Tr 
WHnrg. (Xen. τ. eq. 5, 3); see φιμόω." 

κῆνσος, -ov, ὁ, the Lat. word census (among the Ro- 


writ. 


κῆπος 


mans, denoting a register and valuation of property in 
accordance with which taxes were paid), in the N. T. (as 
in Cod. Just. 4, 47) the tax or tribute levied on individuals 
and to be paid yearly (Hesych. κῆνσος - εἶδος νομίσματος, 
ἐπικεφάλαιον, our capitation or poll tax): Mt. xvii. 25; 
xxii. 17; Mk. xii. 14; τὸ νόμισμα τοῦ κήνσου, the coin 
with which the tax is paid, tribute money, Mt. xxii. 19." 

κῆπος, -ov, 6, [thought to be allied with σκάπτω, Lat. 
campus, ete.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 7122, 1132, 12; α 
garden: Lk. xiii. 19; Jn. xviii. 1, 26; χῖχ. 41. [BB. DD. 
s. v. Garden. | * 

κηπ-ουρός, -ov, 6, (κῆπος and οὖρος), a keeper of a gar- 
den, a gardener: Jn. xx. 15 [BB.DD. s. v. Garden]. 
(Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Epictet., al.) * 

κηρίον, -ov, τό, (κηρός wax), fr. Hes. and Hdt. down, 
honeycomb : κηρίον μελίσσιον, a honeycomb (still contain- 
ing the honey), Lk. xxiv. 42 RG Trbr. (1 S. xiv. 27; 
Prov. xvi. 24; xxiv. 13).* 

κήρυγμα, -τος. τύ, (knpvoow), in Grk. writ. esp. Attic, ‘iat 
which is promulgated by a herald or public crier, a procla- 
mation by herald; in the N. T. the message or proclama- 
tion by the heralds of God or Christ: thus the proc- 
lamation of the necessity of repentance and reformation 
made by the prophet Jonah [A.V. preaching], τὸ κηρυγμα 
Ἰωνᾶ, Mt. xii.41; Lk. xi. 32, (Jon. iii. 4); the announce- 
ment of salvation procured by Christ and to be had 
through him: absol., 1 Co. i. 21; Tit. i. 3; w. gen. of 
the subj., made by one, 1 Co. ii. 4; xv. 14; w. gen. of the 
obj. Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, concerning Jesus Christ, Ro. xvi. 25, 
ef. Philippi ad loc.; [τῆς αἰωνίου σωτηρίας, Mk. xvi. WI 
in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion]; the act of publish- 
ing, absol. 2 Tim. iv. 17 [but R. V. that the message might 
be fully proclaimed ; see πληροφορέω, a. ].* 

κήρυξ, less correctly [yet so L WH] κῆρυξ (on the ac- 
cent see W. § 6,1 ο.; [B. 18 (12)]; Lipsius, Gramm. 
Untersuch. p. 36 ; [Chandler § 622; Gottling p. 254 sq.; 
Lob. Paralip. p. 411; W. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. s. v.; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 1017), -vkos, 6, (akin to γῆρυς a voice, a 
sound, γηρύω to utter a sound, tospeak; [yet cf. Vanitek 
p- 140]); com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; a herald, a 
messenger vested with public authority, who conveyed the 
official messages of kings, magistrates, princes, military 
commanders, or who gave a public summons or demand, 
and performed various other duties. In the O. T., Gen. 
xli.43; Dan. iii.4; Sir. xx.15. Inthe N. T. God’s am- 
bassador, and the herald or proclaimer of the divine word : 
δικαιοσύνης, one who summoned to righteousness, of Noah, 
2 Pet. ii.5; used of the apostles, as the divine messen- 
gers of the salvation procured by Christ and to be em- 
braced through him, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11.* 

κηρύσσω; impf. ἐκήρυσσον: fut. κηρύξω: 1 aor. ἐκή- 
ρυξα. [inf. κηρύξαι RG Tr WH, κηρῦξαι LT; ef. Lipsius, 
Gramm. Untersuch. p. 32 sqq.; ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 101; W. 
§ 6, 1 f. (see reff. s. v. ejpvé)]; Pass., pres. κηρύσσομαι:; 
1 aor. éxnpvxOnv; 1 fut. κηρυχθήσομαι; (κήρυξ, q. v-); fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for NYP i to be a herald ; to officiate as 
herald ; to proclaim after the manner of a herald; always 
with a suggestion of formality, gravity, and an authority 


346 


κιβωτὸς 


which must be listened to and obeyed; a. univ. 
to publish, proclaim openly: something which has been 
done, Mk. vii. 36; τὸν λόγον, Mk. i. 45 (here joined with 
διαφημίζειν) ; foll. by indir. dise., Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39; 
something which ought to be done, foll. by the inf. (cf. 
W. 322 (302); [B. § 141, 2]), Ro. ii. 21; Μωῦσῆν, the 
authority and precepts of Moses, Acts xv. 21; περιτομήν, 
the necessity of circumcision, Gal. v. 11. b. spec. 
used of the public proclamation of the gospel and mat- 
ters pertaining to it, made by John the Baptist, by Jesus, 
by the apostles and other Christian teachers: absol., Mt. 
xi. 1; Mk. i. 38; iii. 14; xvi. 20; Ro. x. 15; w. dat. of 
the pers. to whom the proclamation is made, 1 Co. ix. 27; 
1 Pet. iii. 19; εἰς [R ἐν w. dat.] τὰς συναγωγάς (see εἰς, 
A.I.5b.; cf. W. 213 (200)), Mk. i. 39; [Lk. iv. 44 T Tr 
txt. WH]; (6) κηρύσσων, Ro. x. 14; κηρύσσειν w. ace. of 
the thing, Mt. x. 27; Lk. [iv. 19]; xii. 3; τινί τι, Lk. iv. 
18 (19); τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλ., Mt. iv. 23; ix.35; Mk. 
i. 14 (where GLbr. T Tr WH τὸ εὐ. τοῦ θεοῦ) ; τὸ εὐαγγ. 
simply, Mk. xvi. 15; Gal. ii. 2; τὸ evayy. τοῦ θεοῦ εἴς 
τινας (see above), 1 Th. ii. 9; pass., Mt. xxiv. 14; xxvi. 
13; Col. i. 23; with εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη or εἰς ὅλον τ. κόσμον 
added, Mk. xiii. 10; xiv. 9; τὸν λόγον, 2 Tim. iv. 2; τὸ 
ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως, Ro. x. 8; τὴν βασιλ. τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. viii. 
1; ix. 3; Acts xx. 25 [here GL Τ Tr WHom. τοῦ θεοῦ]; 
xxviii. 31; βάπτισμα, the necessity of baptism, Mk. i. 4; 
Lk. ili. 3; Acts x. 37; μετάνοιαν καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν, by 
public proclamation to exhort to repentance and promise 
the pardon of sins, Lk. xxiv. 47; ἵνα μετανοῶσιν [RG 
μετανοήσωσι] (see ἵνα, II. 2b.; [B. 237 (204) ]), Mk. vi. 12. 
τινά τισι, to proclaim to persons one whom they are to 
become acquainted with in order to learn what they ought 
to do: Χριστόν, or τὸν Ἰησοῦν, Acts viii. 5; xix. 13; Phil. 
i. 15; 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. iv. 5 (where it is opp. to ἑαυτὸν 
«np. to proclaim one’s own excellence and authority); 2 
Co. xi. 4; pass., ὁ κηρυχθείς, 1 Tim. iii. 16; with διά and 
gen. of pers. added, 2 Co. i.19; with the epexegetic addi- 
tion, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ vids τ. θεοῦ, Acts ix. 20; ὅτι ἐκ νεκρῶν 
ἐγήγερται, 1 Co. χν. 12; τινί foll. by ὅτι, Acts χ. 42; κηρ. 
foll. by λέγων with direct dise., Mt. [iii.1 L TWH]; χ. τ; 
Mk. i. τ; κηρύσσειν x. λέγειν foll. by direct disc., Mt. iii. 
1[RGTrbr.]; iv. 17; κηρ. ἐν (omitted in Rec.) φωνῇ 
μεγάλῃ, foll. by direct disc. (of an angel as God’s herald), 
Rey. v. 2; «np. with οὕτως added, 1 Co. xv. 11. On this 
word see Zezschwitz, Petri apost. de Christi ad inferos 
descensu sententia. (Lips. 1857) p. 31 sqq.; [ Campbell, 
Dissert. on the Gospels, diss. vi. pt. v. Comp.: mpo- 
κηρύσσω. * 

κῆτος, -εος (τους), τό, α sea-monster, whale, huge fish, 
(Hom., Aristot., al.): Mt. xii. 40, fr. Jon. ii. 1 where Sept. 
κήτει μεγάλῳ for 5)73 21." 

Knoas, -ἃ [Β. 20 (18) ], 6, (Chald. x5°3 a rock), Cephas 
(i. q. Πέτρος [ef. B.D. (Am. ed.) p. 2459]), the surname 
of Simon the apostle: Jn. 1. 42 (43); 1 Co. i. 12; iii. 225 
ix. 5; xv. 5; Gal. ii. 9; and LT Tr WH also in Gal. i. 
18; ii. 11, 14.* 

κιβωτός, -ov, ἡ, (κίβος fef. Suidas 2094 c.]), a wooden 
chest, box, ([Hecatae. 368 (Miiller’s Frag. i. p. 30), Si- 


κιθάρα 


mon.], Arstph., Lysias, Athen., Ael., al.) : in the N. T., 
the ark of the covenant, in the temple at Jerusalem, 
Heb. ix. 4 (Philo, Joseph.; Sept. very often for js); in 
the heavenly temple, Rev. xi. 19; of Noah’s vessel, built 
in the form of an ark, Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. xvii. 27; Heb. xi. 
7; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (4 Mace. xv. 31; Sept. for 72/).* 

κιθάρα, -as, 7, a harp (cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch. 
iv.; B.D.s. v. Harp]: 1 Co. xiv. 7; Rev. v. 8; xiv. 2; 
τοῦ θεοῦ, to which the praises of God are sung in heaven, 
Rev. xv. 2; cf. W. § 36,3 b. [From Hom. h. Mere., 
Hdt. on.]* 

κιθαρίζω : pres. pass. ptep. κιθαριζόμενος ; to play upon 
the harp [(see the preceding word) ]: with ἐν ταῖς κιθάραις 
added, [A.V. harping with their harps], Rev. xiv. 2; τὸ 
κιθαριζόμενον, what is harped, 1 Co. xiv. 7. (Is. xxiii. 16; 
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 18, 570 down.) * 

κιθαρ-ῳδός, -οῦ, ὁ, (κιθάρα [q- v.], and δός, contr. fr. 
ἀοιδός, a singer), a harper, one who plays on the harp and 
accompanies it with his voice: Rev. xiv. 2; xviii. 22. 
({Hat., Plat., al.], Diphil. in Athen. 6 p. 247d.; Plut. 
mor. 166 a.; Ael. ν. ἢ. 4,2; superl. (extended form) 
κιθαραοιδότατος, Arstph. vesp. 1278. Varro der. τ. 2, 1, 
3 “non omnes, qui habent citharam, sunt citharoedi.”’) * 

Κιλικία, -as, 7, Cilicia, a province of Asia Minor, bound- 
ed on the N. by Cappadocia, Lycaonia and Isauria, on 
the S. by the Mediterranean, on the E. by Syria, and on 
the W. by Pamphylia. Its capital, Tarsus, was the birth- 
place of Paul: Acts vi.9; xv. 23, 41; xxi. 39; xxii. 3; 
xxiii. 34; xxvii.5; Gal.i. 21. [Cf. Conybeare and How- 
son, St. Paul, i. 19 sqq.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq.]* 

κινάμωμον, more correctly [so L T Tr WH] κιννάμωμον, 
του, τό, Hebr. 1733. [(see L. and 5. 5. v.)], cinnamon: 
Rey. xviii. 13. (Hdt., Theophr., Strab., Diod., Joseph., 
al.; Sept.) Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Zimmt; [B.D. 5. v. Cin- 
namon; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Kinnamon].* 

κινδυνεύω ; impf. ἐκινδύνευον ; (κίνδυνος) ; to be in jeop- 
ardy, to be in danger, to be put in peril: Lk. viii. 23; 1 
Co. xv. 30; τοῦτο τὸ μέρος κινδυνεύει εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν, 
this trade is in danger of coming into disrepute, Acts xix. 
27; κινδ. ἐγκαλεῖσθαι, we are in danger of being accused, 
ib. 40. (From [Pind.] and Hdt. down; Sept.) * 

κίνδυνος, -ov, 6, danger, peril: Ro. viii. 35; ἔκ τινος, 
prepared by one, [ from one], 2 Co. xi. 26; ibid. with a 
gen. of the source from which the peril comes, [o/, cf. 
W. § 30, 3 α.7; so τῆς θαλάσσης, Plat. Euthyd. p. 279 e.; 
de rep. i. p. 332 e.; θαλασσῶν, Heliod. 2, 4, 65.* 

κινέω, -ῶ ; fut. κινήσω; 1 aor. inf. κινῆσαι ; Pass., pres. 
κινοῦμαι; 1 aor. ἐκινήθην; (fr. κίω, poetic for IQ, εἶμι, 
Curtius § 57; hence) 1. prop. to cause to go, i. e. 
to move, set in motion, [fr. Hom. down]; a. prop. in 
pass. [ef. W. 252 (237) ] to be moved, move: of that motion 
whichis evidence of life, Acts xvii. 28 (Gen. vii. 21) ; κινεῖν 
δακτύλῳ φορτία, to move burdens with a finger, Mt. xxiii. 
4; τὴν κεφαλήν, to move to and fro[ A.V. wag], (expres- 
sive of derision), Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xv. 29, (Sept. for 
WN ym, Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 8; Job xvi. 4; Sir. xii. 18, 
ete.) ; b. to move from a place, to remove: τὶ ἐκ τοῦ 
τόπου, Rey. ii.5; ἐκ τῶν τόπων, pass., Rey. vi. 14. a 


347 


Κχαύδη 


Metaph. to move i. 6. excite: στάσιν, a riot, disturbance, 
Acts xxiv. 5 ([see στάσις, 2]; ταραχήν, Joseph.b. j. 2, 9, 
4); τὴν πόλιν, to throw into commotion, pass., Acts xxi. 30. 
[Comp.: pera-, ovy-xwéw.]* 

κίνησις, -ews, 7, (κινέω), [fr. Plato on], α moving, agita- 
tion: τοῦ ὕδατος, Jn. v. 8 [ἢ 1,1." 

Κίς (LT Tr WH Kets [ef. WH. App. p. 155; Ταῦ. 
Proleg. p. 84; B.6 note, and see εἰ; ¢}), 6, indecl., (wp 
[perh. ‘a bow’ (Gesen.) fr. wip to lay snares), Kish, the 
father of Saul, the first king of Israel: Acts xiii. 21.* 

κίχρημι: 1 aor. act. impy. χρῆσον; to lend: τινί τι, Lk. 
xi. 5. (From Hdt. down.) [Syn. see δανείζω, fin.] * 

κλάδος, -ov, 6, (kAdw) 5 a. prop. a young, tender 
shoot, broken off for grafting. b. univ. a branch: 
Mt. xiii. 32; xxi.8; xxiv.32; Mk. iv. 32; xiii. 28; Lk. 
xiii. 19; as the Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root, 
so their posterity are likened to branches, Ro. xi. 16-19, 
21; cf. Sir. xxiii. 25; xl.15; Menand. frag. ed. Meineke 
p- 247 [frag. 182, vol. iv. 274 (Ber. 1841)]. (Tragg., 
Arstph., Theophr., Geop., al.) * 

κλαίω ; impf.éeAaov; fut. κλαύσω (LK. vi. 25; Jn. xvi. 
20; and Tr WHtst. in Rev. xviii. 9, for κλαύσομαι; more 
com. in Grk. writ., esp. the earlier, and found in Lev. x. 
6; Joel ii. 17, and ace. to most edd. in Rev. xviii. 9; cf. 
Kriiger 8 40 5. v., i. p. 175 sq.; Kiihner ὃ 343 s. v.,i. p. 
847; [Veitch s. v.]; B. 60 (53); [W. 87(83)]); 1 aor. 
ἔκλαυσα; Sept. freq. for 133; [from Hom. down]; to 
mourn, weep, lament a. intrans.: Mk. xiv. 72; xvi. 
10; Lk. vii. 13, 38; Jn. xi. 31, 33; xx.-11, 13,15; Acts 
ix. 39; xxi.13; Rey. [v. 5]; xviii. 15,19; πολλά, for 
which 1, T Tr WH πολύ, Rev. v. 4; πικρῶς, Mt. xxvi. 75; 
Lk. xxii. 62; weeping as the sign of pain and grief for 
the thing signified (i. e. for pain and grief), Lk. vi. 21, 
25, (opp. to γελᾶν); Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. xii. 15, (opp. to 
χαίρειν) ; Phil. iii. 18; 1 Co. vii. 30; Jas.iv.9; v.1; of 
those who mourn the dead: Mk. v. 38 sq.; Lk. vii. 32: 
viii. 52; ἐπί τινι, over any one, Lk. xix. 41 RG (Sir. xxii. 
11); also joined with πενθεῖν, Rey. xviii. 11 RGL; κλ. 
ἐπί τινα, Lk. xix.41 LT Tr WH; xxiii. 28; joined with 
κόπτεσθαι foll. by ἐπί τινα, Rev. xviii. 9 T Tr WH. b. 
trans. τινά, to weep for, mourn for, bewail, one [ef. B. § 131, 
4; W. 32, ly.]: Mt. ii. 18, and Ree. in Rey. xviii. 9.* 

[Syv. δακρύω, κλαίω, ὀδύρομαι, θρηνέω, ἀλαλάζω 
(ὀλολύζω), στενάζω: strictly, δ. denotes to shed tears, 
weep silently ; «A. to weep audibly, to cry as a child; 5. to give 
verbal expression to grief, to lament; @p. to give formal 
expression to grief, fo sing a dirge; ἀλ. to wail in oriental 
style, to how/ in a consecrated, semi-liturgical fashion; orev. 
to express grief by inarticulate or semi-articulate sounds, to 
groan. Cf. Schmidt chh. 26, 126.] 

KAdots, -ews, 7, (κλάω, 4- V.), @ breaking: τοῦ ἄρτου, Lk. 
xxiv. 35; Acts ii. 42. (Plat., Theophr., al.) * 

κλάσμα, -ros, τό, (kAdw), a fragment, broken piece: 
plur., of remnants of food, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi. 
43; viii. 8,19 sq.; Lk.ix.17; Jn.vi.12sq. (Xen. cyn. 
10,5; Diod. 17,13; Plut. ΤΊ. Gr.19; Anthol.; Sept.) * 

Κλαύδη (L Tr WH Καῦδα [see WH. App. p. 160], 
T Κλαῦδα), -ης, ἡ, Clauda or Cauda the name of a small 
island lying near Crete on the south, called by Ptolem. 


Κλαυδία 


3, 17, 11 Κλαῦδος, by Pomp. Mela 2, 7 and Plin. h. π. 4, 
20 (12), 61 Gaudos, [(now Gaudo-nesi or Clauda-nesa)]: 
Acts xxvii. 16.” 

Κλανδία, -as, ἡ, Claudia, a Christian woman: 2 Tim. 
iv.21. [Cf B. Ὁ. (esp. Am. ed.) 8. v., also reff. 8. v. 
Πούδης.} * 

Κλαύδιος, -ov, ὁ, Claudius. 1. Tiberius Claudius 
Drusus Nero Germanicus, the Roman emperor, who 
came into power A.D. 41, and was poisoned by his wife 
Agrippina in the year 54: Acts xi. 28; xviii. 2. 2. 
Claudius Lysias, a Roman military tribune: Acts xxiii. 
26 [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lysias]." 

κλαυθμός, -ov, 6, (κλαίω) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 323: 
weeping, lamentation: Mt. ii. 18; [viii. 12]; xiii. 42, 50; 
xxii. 13; xxiv. 51; xxv. 80; Lk. xiii. 28; Acts xx. 37.* 

κλάω; 1 aor. ἔκλασα; Pass.,[ pres. ptep. κλώμενος, 1 Co. 
xi. 24 RG (see below)]; 1 aor. ἐκλάσθην (Ro. xi. 20 L 
Tr); [fr. Hom. down]; Το break: used in the N. T. of the 
breaking of bread (see doros, 1), Mt. xiv. 19; xv. 36; 
xxvi. 26; Mk. viii. 6; xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; [xxiv. 30]; 
Acts ii. 46; xx. 7,11; xxvii. 35; 1 Co. x. 16; xi. 24; 
with εἴς twas added, a pregnant constr., equiv. to ‘to 
break and distribute among’ ete. (see eis, C. 1), Mk. viii. 
19; metaph. τὸ σῶμα, shattered, as it were, by a violent 
death, 1 Co. xi. 24 RG. [Comp.: ék-, kata-KAdo. | * 

κλείς, -δός, ace. κλεῖδα and κλεῖν (LK. xi. 52; Rev. iii. 
7), ace. plur. κλεῖδας and κλεῖς (Mt. xvi. 19; Rey. i. 
18; ef. Kiihner § 130, i. p. 357; W. 65 (63), ef. B. 24 
(22); [WH. App. p. 157]), ἡ, fr. Hom. down]; a@ key. 
Since the keeper of the keys has the power to open and 
to shut, the word κλείς is fig. used in the N. T. to denote 
power and authority of various kinds [cf. B. D.s. v. Key], 
viz. τοῦ φρέατος, to open or unlock the pit, Rev. ix. 1, 
cf. 2; τῆς ἀβύσσου, to shut, Rey. xx. 1, ef. 3; τοῦ θανά- 
του καὶ Tov ἅδου, the power to bring back into life from 
Hades and to leave there, Rev. i. 18; τῆς γνώσεως. the 
ability and opportunity to obtain knowledge, Lk. xi. 52; 
τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν (see βασιλεία, 3 6. p. 97° sub 
fin.), Mt. xvi. 19; τοῦ Δαυΐδ, the power of David (who 
is a type of the Messiah, the second David), i. e. of re- 
ceiving into the Messiah’s kingdom and of excluding 
from it, Rev. ili. 7 (apparently after Is. xxii. 22, where 
ἡ KX. οἴκου Δαυΐδ is given to the steward of the royal 
palace).* 

κλείω ; fut. κλείσω, Rev. ili. 7 LT Tr WH; 1 aor. 
ἔκλεισα ; Pass., pf. κέκλεισμαι, ptep. κεκλεισμένος ; 1 aor. 
ἐκλείσθην; Hebr. 120; [fr. Hom. down]; to shut, shut 
up; prop.: τὴν θύραν, Mt. vi. 6; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. 
xi. 7; plur., Jn. xx. 19, 26; Acts xxi. 30; a prison, pass. 
Acts ν. 23; πυλῶνας, pass. Rev. xxi. 25; τὴν ἄβυσσον, 
Rev. xx.3GLTTrWH. metaph.: τὸν οὐρανόν, i.e. to 
cause the heavens to withhold rain, Lk. iv. 25; Rev. xi. 
ὃ; τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ ἀπό τινος, to shut up compassion 
so that it is like a thing inaccessible to one, to be devoid 
of pity towards one [W. § 66, 2 d., cf. B. 322 (277)], 1 Jn. 
iii. 17; τὴν βασιλ. τῶν οὐρανῶν, to obstruct the entrance 
into the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14); so used 
that τὴν Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ must be understood, Rev. iii. 7; τ᾿ 


348 


κληρονομέω 


θύραν, sc. τῆς Bac. τ. θεοῦ, ibid. 8; cf. Bleek ad loc. 
[Comp.: dro-, ἐκ-, κατα-, συγ κλείω. " 

κλέμμα, -τος, τό, (κλέπτω) ; a. thing stolen [ Aris- 
tot. ]. Ὁ. i. q. κλοπή the/i, i. 6. the act committed [ Eur., 
Arstph., al.]: plur. Rev. ix. 21.* 

Κλεόπας [on the decl. cf. B. 20 (18) ], (apparently contr. 
fr. Κλεόπατρος, see ᾿Αντίπας [cf. Letronne in the Revue 
Archéologique, 1844-45, i. p. 485 sqq.]), 6, Cleopas, one 
of Christ’s disciples: Lk. xxiv. 18. [Cf Bp. Lyhtfl. 
Com. on Gal. p. 267; B. D.s. v.]* 

κλέος, -ous, τό. (κλέω Equiv. tO καλέω) ; 1. rumor, 
report. 2. glory, praise: 1 Vet. ii. 20. (In both 
senses com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; for pnw, Job 
XXVili. 22.))* 

κλέπτης, -ov, 6, (κλέπτω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 333, 
a thief: Mt. vi.19 sq.; xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 33, 39; Jn. x. 
1,10; 1 Co. vi.10; 1 Pet.iv.15; an embezzler, pilferer, 
Jn. xii. 6; ἔρχεσθαι or ἥκειν ws KA. ἐν νυκτί, i. q. to come 
unexpectedly, 1 Th. v. 2,4; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. iii. 3; 
xvi. 15; the name is transferred to false teachers, wlio do 
not care to instruct men, but abuse their confidence for 
their own gain, Jn. x. 8. [SyN. see λῃστής, fin.]* 

κλέπτω; fut. κλέψω (Sept. also in Ex.xx.14; Lev. xix. 
11; Deut. v. 19, for κλέψομαι more com. [(?) ef. Veitch 
s. νι: Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. 848] in prof. auth.) ; 1 aor. 
ἔκλεψα; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 333; a. lo 
steal; absol. to commit a theft: Mt. vi. 19 sq.3 xix. 18 ; 
Mk. x. 19; Lk. xviii. 20; Jn. x. 10; Ro. ii. 215 xiii. 9; 
Eph. iv. 28. b. trans. fo sleal i. 6. take away by 
stealth: twa, the dead body of one, Mt. xxvii. 64; xxviii. 
13.* 

κλῆμα, -aros, τό, (fr. KAdw, q- V.), i. q. κλάδος, a tender 
and flexible branch; spec. the shoot or branch of a vine, a 
vine-sprout: Jn. xv. 2-6 (so Arstph. eccles. 1031; Aes- 
chin. in Ctes. p. 77, 27; Theophr. h. pl. 4, 13, 5; ἀμπέλου 
κλῆμα, Plat. rep. i. p. 353 a.; Sept., Ezek. xv. 25 xvii. 
6 sq-; Joel i. 7).* 

Κλήμης [cf. B. 16 sq. (15)], -evros, 6, Clement, a com- 
panion of Paul and apparently a member of the church 
at Philippi: Phil. iv. 3. Ace. to the rather improbable 
tradition of the catholic church, he is identical with that 
Clement who was bishop of Rome towards the close of the 
first century; [but see Bp. Lgftft. Com. on Phil. 1. ὦ 
‘Detached Note’; Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biogr. i. 
555 sq. J." 

κληρονομέω, -@; fut. κληρονομήσω; 1 aor. ἐκληρονόμησα; 
pf. κεκληρονόμηκα; (κληρονόμος, q. V-; Cf. οἰκονόμος) ; Sept. 
for on3 and much oftener for w7; 1. to receive a 
lot, receive by lot; esp. to receive a part of an inheritance, 
receive as an inheritance, obtain by right of inheritance; 80, 
particularly in the Attic orators, w. a gen. of the thing; 
in later writ. not infreq. w. an ace. of the thing (cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 129; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 140; W 
200 (188); [B. § 132,8]); absol. to be an heir, to inherit 
Gal. iv. 30 fr. Gen. xxi. 10. 2. univ, to receive the 
portion assigned to one, receive an allotted portion, receive 
as one’s own or as a possession; to become partaker of, to 
obtain [cf. Eng. “inherit”], (as φήμην, Polyb. 18, 38 


κληρονομία 


(55), 8; τὴν ἐπ᾽ εὐσεβείᾳ δόξαν, 15, 22, 3); in bibl. Grk. 
everywh. w. the acc. of the thing; so very freq. in the 
O. T. in the phrase κληρ. γῆν and τὴν γῆν, of the occupa- 
tion of the land of Canaan by the Israelites, as Lev. xx. 
24; Deut. iv. 22, 26; vi. 1, etc. But as the Israelites 
after taking possession of the land were harassed almost 
perpetually by their hostile neighbors, and even driven 
out of the country for a considerable period, it came to 
pass that the phrase was transferred to denote the tran- 
quil and stable possession of the holy land crowned with 
all divine blessings, an experience which pious Israel- 
ites were to expect under the Messiah: Ps. xxiv. 
(xxv.) 13; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 9, 11, 22, 29, 34 Alex.; Is. 
Ix. 21; Tob. iv. 12; ἐκ δευτέρας κληρονομήσουσι τὴν γῆν, 
Is. lxi. 7; hence it became a formula denoting to partake 
of eternal salvation in the Messiah’s kingdom: Mt. v. 5 
(4) (fr. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 11), where see Bleek. ζωὴν 
αἰώνιον, Mt. xix. 29; Mk. x.17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; τὴν 
βασιλείαν, Mt. xxv. 34; βασιλείαν θεοῦ, 1 Co. vi. 9 sq.; xv. 
50; Gal. v.21; σωτηρίαν, Heb. i. 14; τὰς ἐπαγγελίας, 
Heb. vi. 12; ἀφθαρσίαν, 1 Co. xv. 50; ταῦτα [ Rec. πάντα], 
Rev. xxi. 7; ὄνομα, Heb. i. 4; τὴν εὐλογίαν, Heb. xii. 17; 
1 Pet. iii. 9. [Comp.: κατα-κληρονομέω.] " 

κληρονομία, -as, 7, (κληρονόμος), Sept. time and again 
for 12M), several times for NW, NWI, ete. ; 1. 
an inheritance, property received (or to be received) by 
inheritance, (Isocr., Dem., Aristot.): Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. 
xii. 7; Lk. xii. 13; xx. 14. 2. what is given to 
one as a possession ([ οἵ. Eng. “inheritance” ]; see κλη- 
ρονομέω. 2): διδόναι τί τινι κληρονομίαν, Acts vii. 5; Aap- 
Bavew τι eis κληρ. Heb. xi. 8 [(cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 14 
p- 1153”, 33)]. Agreeably to the O. T. usage, which em- 
ploys 75m now of the portion of the holy land allotted 
to each of the several tribes (Josh. xiii. 23, 28, ete.), now 
of the whole territory given to Israel for a possession 
(Deut. iv. 38; xv.4, ete. —and nothing appeared to the 
Israelites more desirable than the quiet, prosperous, per- 
manent possession of this land, see κληρονομέω, 2), the 
noun κληρονομία, lifted to a loftier sense in the N. T., is 
used to denote a. the eternal blessedness in the con- 
summated kingdom of God which is to be expected after the 
visible return of Christ: Gal. iii. 18; Col. iii. 24 (τῆς κληρ. 
gen. of appos. [W. § 59, 8 a.]); Heb. ix. 15; 1 Pet. i. 4; 
ἡμῶν, destined for us, Eph. i. 14; τοῦ θεοῦ, given by God, 
18. b. the share which an individual will have in that 
eternal blessedness: Acts xx. 32; Eph. v. δ." 

κληρο-νόμος, -ου, 6, (κλῆρος. and νέμομαι to possess), prop. 
one who receives by lot; hence 1. an heir (in Grk. 
writ. fr. Plat. down) ; a. prop.: Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. 
xii. 7; Lk. xx. 14; Gal. iv. 1. b. in Messianic usage, 
one who receives his allotted possession by right of sonship : 
so of Christ, as κληρονόμος πάντων, all things being sub- 
jected to his sway, Heb. i. 2; of Christians, as exalted 
by faith to the dignity of sons of Abraham and so of 
sons of God, and hence to receive the blessings of God’s 
kingdom promised to Abraham: absol., Ro. viii.17; Gal. 
iii. 29; with τοῦ θεοῦ added, i. 6. of God's possessions, 
equiv. to τῆς δόξης (see δόξα, III. 4 b.), Ro. viii. 17; θεοῦ 


849 


κλῆσις 


διὰ Χριστοῦ, by the favor of Christ (inasmuch as through 
him we have obtained ἡ viobeaia), Gal. iv. 7 Rec., for which 
LT Tr WH read διὰ θεοῦ [see διά, A. IIT. 1] (cf. C. F. A. 
Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 148 [who advocates 
the Rec. as that reading in which the others prob. origi- 
nated (but cf. Meyer in loc.; WH in loc.)]); τοῦ κό- 
σμου, of government over the world, Ro. iv. 13 sq.; ζωῆς 
αἰωνίου, Tit. iii. 7; τῆς βασιλείας, Jas. ii. 5. 2. the 
idea of inheritance having disappeared, one who has ac- 
quired or obtained the portion allotted him: w. gen. of the 
thing, Heb. vi. 17; xi. 7; τοῦ σκότους, used of the devil, 
Ey. Nicod.c. 20 [or Descens. Chr. ad Inferos 4,1]. (Sept. 
four times for wry: Judg. xviii. 7; 2S. xiv. 7; Jer. viii. 
10; Mice. i. 15.) * 

κλῆρος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for ova 
and 17); α lot; i.e. 1. an object used in casting 
or drawing lots, which was either a pebble, or a potsherd, 
or a bit of wood, (hence κλῆρος is to be derived fr. κλάω 
τοῦ. Ellicott on Col. i. 12]): Acts i. 26 (see below); Bad- 
New κλῆρ., Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24; Lk. xxiii. 34; Jn. 
xix. 24, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19; Jon. i. 7, ete.) ; the lots of the 
several persons concerned, inscribed with their names, 
were thrown together into a vase, which was then shaken, 
and he whose lot first fell out upon the ground was the 
one chosen (Hom. 1]. 3, 316, 325; 7, 175, ete.; Liv. 23, 
3 [but cf. B. Ὁ. Am.ed. 5. v. Lot ]); hence ὁ κλῆρος πίπτει 
ἐπί τινα, Acts i. 26 (Ezek. xxiv. 6; Jon. i. 7). 20 
what is obtained by lot, allotted portion: λαγχάνειν and 
λαμβάνειν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας, a portion in the min- 
istry common to the apostles, Acts i. 17, 25 RG; ἔστε 
μοι κλῆρος ἔν τινι, dat. of the thing, Acts viii. 21; like 
κληρονομία (q- v.) it is used of the part which one will 
have in eternal salvation, λαβεῖν τὸν κλ. ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις, 
among the sanctified, Acts xxvi. 18 (Sap. ν. 5); of eter- 
nal salvation itself, κλῆρος τῶν ἁγίων, i. 6. the eternal sal- 
vation which God has assigned to the saints, Col. i. 12 
[where οἵ. Bp. Lghtft.]. of persons, οἱ κλῆροι, those 
whose care and oversight has been assigned to one [al- 
lotted charge], used of Christian churches, the adminis- 
tration of which falls to the lot of the presbyters: 1 Pet. 
v. 3, cf. Acts xvii. 4; [for patristic usage see Soph. Lex. 
s. v., ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 246 sq.].* 

κληρόω, -@: 1 aor. pass. ἐκληρώθην ; (κλῆρος) ; in class. 
Grk. 1. to cast lots, determine by lot. 2. to 
choose by lot: τινά [Hdt. 1, 94; al.]. 3. to allot, as- 
sign by lot: τινά τινι, one to another as a possession, Pind. 
Ol. 8, 19. 4. once in the N. T., to make a κλῆρος i. 
e. a heritage, privale possession: τινά, pass. ἐν @ ἐκληρώ- 
θημεν [but Lchm. ἐκλήθημεν in whom lies the reason why 
we were made the κλῆρος τοῦ θεοῦ (a designation trans- 
ferred from the Jews in the O. T. to Christians, ef. Add. 
to Esth. iii. 10 [iv. line 12 sq. (Tdf.)] and Fritzsche in 
loc.; [ef. Deut. iv. 20; ix. 29]), the heritage of God 
Eph. i. 11 [see Ellicott in loe.]. (In eccles. writ. it sig- 
nifies to become a clergyman [see reff. 8. v. κλῆρος, fin.].) 
[Comp. : mpoo-xAnpoe. }* 

κλῆσις, -εως. 7, (καλέω) ; 
{(Xen., Plat., al.)]. 


1. a calling, calling to, 
2. a call, invitation: to a feast 


KANTOS 


(3 Mace. v. 14; Xen. symp. 1, 7); in the N. T. every- 
where in a technical sense, the divine invitation to embrace 
salvation in the kingdom of God, which is made esp. through 
the preaching of the gospel: with gen. of the author, rod 
θεοῦ, Eph. i. 18; ἀμεταμέλ. .. . ἡ KA. τοῦ θεοῦ, God does 
not repent of the invitation to salvation, which he de- 
cided of old to give to the people of Israel, and which 
he promised their fathers (i. e. the patriarchs), Ro. xi. 
29; ἡ ἄνω [q. v. (a.)] κλῆσις τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ, which 
was made in heaven by God on the ground of Christ, 
Phil. iii. 14; also ἡ ἐπουράνιος κλῆσις, Heb. iii. 1; καλεῖν 
τινα κλήσει, 2 Tim. i. 9; pass. Eph. iv. 1; ἀξιοῦν τινα 
κλήσεως is used of one whom God declares worthy of the 
calling which he has commanded to be given him, and 
therefore fit to obtain the blessings promised in the call, 
2 Th. i. 11; w. gen. of the obj., ὑμῶν, which ye have 
shared in, Eph. iv. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10; what its character- 
istics have been in your case, as having no regard to 
learning, riches, station, ete. 1 Co. i. 26; used somewhat 
peculiarly, of the condition in which the calling finds 
one, whether circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or 
freeman, 1 Co. vii. 20.* 

κλητός, -ή, -dv, (καλέω), [fr. Hom. down], called, invited, 
(to a banquet, [1 K. i. 41,49]; 3 Mace. v.14; Aeschin. 
50,1); in the N. T. a. invited (by God in the proc- 
lamation of the gospel) to obtain eternal salvation in the 
kingdom of God through Christ (see καλέω, 1 b. B. [ef. 
W. 35 (34)]): Ro. viii. 28; 1 Co. i. 24; Jude 1; κλητοὶ 
k. ἐκλεκτοὶ κι πιστοί, Rey. xvii. 14; κλητοί and ἐκλεκτοί 
are distinguished (see ἐκλεκτός, 1 a.) in Mt. xx. 16 [T 
W Hom. Tr br. the el.]; xxii. 14, a distinction which does 
not agree with Paul’s view (see καλέω, τι. s.; [ Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. ὃ 88; Bp. Lght/t. Com. on Col. iii. 12]) ; κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, gen. of possessor [W. 195 (183); B. § 132, 23], 
devoted to Christ and united to him, Ro.i. 6; κλητοὶ ἅγιοι, 
holy (or ‘ saints’) by the calling of God, Ro. i. 7; 1 Co. 
ie b. called to (the discharge of) some office: 
κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, i. 6. divinely selected and appointed 
(see καλέω, τι. s.), Ro. 1. 1; 1 Co. i. 1 [L br. «A.J; ef. 
Gal. i. 15.* 

κλίβανος, -ov, 6, (for κρίβανος, more com. in earlier [yet 
κλίβ. in Hdt. 2, 92 (cf. Athen. 3 p. 110 ¢.)] and Attic 
Grk.; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 179; Passow 8. v. κρίβανος ; 
ν 25}}} 1. a clibanus, an earthen vessel for 
baking bread (Hebr. 193A, Ex. viii. 3 (vii. 29 Hebr.) ; 
Lev. ii.4; xxvi. 26; Hos. vii. 4). It was broader at the 
bottom than above at the orifice, and when sufficiently 
heated bya fire kindled within, the dough was baked by 
being spread upon the outside [but ace. to others, the 
dough was placed inside and the fire or coals outside, the 
vessel being often perforated with small holes that the 
heat might the better penetrate; ef. Rich, Dict. of Grk. 
and Rom. Antiq. 5. v. clibanus; see Schol. on Arstph. 
Acharn. 86 (iv. 2 p. 339, 20 sq. Dind.)]. 2. i. q. 
imvos, a furnace, an oven: so Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28.* 

κλίμα or κλῖμα (on the accent cf. reff. s. v. κρίμα), -ros, 
τό, (κλίνων ; 1. an inclination, slope, declivity: τῶν 
ὁρῶν, Polyb. 2,16, 3; [al.]. spec. 2. the [supposed] 


850 


κλυδωνίζομαι 


sloping of the earth fr. the equator towards the poles, a 
zone: Aristot., Dion. H., Plut., al.; Joseph. Ὁ. j. 5, 12, 
2. 3. a tract of land, a region: Ro. xv. 23; 2 Co. 
xi. 10; Gal. i. 21; (Polyb. 5, 44,6; 7,6, 1; Hdian. 2, 
11, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.]; al.).* 

κλινάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of κλίνη ; see γυναικάριον), a 
small bed, a couch: Acts v.15 L'T Tr WH. (Arstph. 
frag. 33d.; Epict. diss. 3, 5,13; Artem. oneir. 2, 57; 
[ef. κλινίδιον, and Pollux as there referred to].)* 

κλίνη, -ης, ἡ, (κλίνω) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for nu, 
also for wip; a bed: univ., Mk. vii. 30; Lk. xvii. 34; 
a couch to recline on at meals, Mk. iv. 21; vii. 4 pie 
Wilom.]; Lk. viii. 16; a couch on which a sick man 
is carried, Mt. ix. 2, 6; Lk. v. 18 ; plur. Acts v.15 RG; 
βάλλειν εἰς κλίνην, to cast into a bed, i. 6. to afflict with 
disease, Rev. ii. 22.* 

κλινίδιον, του, τό, (κλίνη), a small bed,a couch: Lk. v. 
19, 24. (Dion. H. antt. 7, 68; Artem. oneir. 1, 2; An- 
tonin. 10, 28; several times in Plut.; [ef. Pollux 10, 7].) * 

κλίνω; 1 aor. ἔκλινα; pf. κέκλικα; 1. trans. a. 
to incline, bow: τὴν κεφαλήν, of one dying, Jn. xix. 30; 
τὸ πρόσωπον cis τ. γῆν, of the terrified, Lk. xxiv. 5. b. 
iq. to cause to fall back: παρεμβολάς, Lat. inclinare acies, 
i.e. to turn to flight, Heb. xi. 34 (μάχην, Hom. 1]. 14, 
510; Τρῶας, 5, 37; ᾿Αχαιούς, Od. 9, 59). c. to recline: 
τὴν κεφαλήν, in a place for repose [A. V. lay one’s head], 
Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. 2. intrans. fo incline one’s 
self [ef. B. 145 (127); W. § 38, 1]: of the declining day 
ΓΑ. V. wear away, be far spent], Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29; 
Jer. vi. 4; ἅμα τῷ κλῖναι τὸ τρίτον μέρος τῆς νυκτός, Polyb. 
8, 98, 7; ἐγκλίναντος τοῦ ἡλίου ἐς ἑσπέραν, Arr. anab. 3, 
4,2. [Comp.: ava-, ἐκ-, κατα-, προσ-κλίνω. * 

κλισία, -as, 7, (κλίνω) ; fr. Hom. down; prop. a place 
for lying down or reclining; hence 1. a hut, erect- 
ed to pass the night in. 2. a tent. 3. any 
thing to recline on; a chair in which to lean back the 
head, reclining-chair. 4. a company reclining; a 
row or party of persons reclining at meal: so in plur., Lk. 
ix. 14, on which cf. W. 229 (214) ; likewise in Joseph. 
antt. 12, 2,12; Plut. Sert. 26.* 

κλοπή, -ῆς, ἡ, (κλέπτω), theft: plur. [ef. B. 77 (67); 
W. 176 (166)], Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21 (22). [From Aes- 
chyl. down. | * 

κλύδων, -wvos, 6, (κλύζω, to wash against); fr. Hom. 
down; a dashing or surging wave, a surge, a violent agi- 
tation of the sea: τοῦ ὕδατος, Lk. viii. 24; τῆς θαλάσσης, 
Jas. i. 6 (Jon. i. 4, 12; Sap. xiv. 5).* 

[Syx. κλύδων, κῦμα: κῦμα a wave, suggesting uninter- 
rupted succession; κλύδων a billow, surge, suggesting size 
andextension. So too in the fig. application of the words. 
Schmidt ch. 56.] 

κλυδωνίζομαι, ptcp. κλυδωνιζόμενος ; (κλύδων); to be tossed 
by the waves; metaph. to be agitated (like the waves) 
mentally (A. V. tossed to and fro]: with dat. of instrum. 
παντὶ ἀνέμῳ τῆς διδασκαλίας, Eph. iv. 14 (cf. Jas. i. 65 οἱ 
ἄδικοι κλυδωνισθήσονται καὶ ἀναπαύσασθαι οὐ δυνήσονται, 
Is. lvii. 20; ὁ δῆμος ταρασσόμενος καὶ κλυδωνιζόμενος 
οἰχήσεται φεύγων, Joseph. antt. 9, 11, 3; κλυδωνιζόμενος 


_ Κλωπᾶς 


ἐκ τοῦ πόθου, Aristaenet. epp. 1, 26, p. 121 ed. Boisson- 
ade |ep. 27, 14 ed. Abresch]).* 

Κλωπάς, -@ [B 20 (18); W.§ 8,1], 6, (839M; appar. 
identical with Alpheus, see ᾿Αλφαῖος, 2 [ef. Heinichen’s 
note on Euseb. ἢ. e. 3, 11, 2]), Clopas (Vulg. [ Cleopas 
and] Cleophas), the father of the apostle James the less, 
and husband of Mary the sister of the mother of Jesus: 
Jn. xix. 25 (ἡ τοῦ Κλωπᾶ se. γυνή [ef. W. 131 (125) note])* 

κνήθω: pres. pass. κνήθομαι; (fr. κνάω, inf. κνᾶν and 
Attic κνῆν) ; to scratch, tickle, make to itch; pass. to itch : 
κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν (on the acc. ef. W. § 32,5), i. 6. de- 
sirous of hearing something pleasant (Hesych. κνήθ. τ. 
ἀκοήν - ζητοῦντές τι ἀκοῦσαι καθ᾽ ἡδονήν), 2 Tim. iv. 3. 
(Mid. τὸν ὄνον κνήθεσθαι εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας τὰ ἕλκη, its sores, 
Aristot. h. ἃ. 9, 1 p. 609", 32; κνῆν ᾿Αττικοὶ, κνήθειν Ἕλλη- 
ves, Moeris p. 234; [ef. Veitch 5. v. xvdw].)* 

Κνίδος, -ov, 7, Cnidus or Gnidus, a peninsula [now Cape 
Crio]and a city of the same name, on the coast of Caria: 
Acts xxvii. 7 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [Β. Ὁ. 5. v. Cnidus; 
Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 190.] * 

κοδράντης, -ov [B. 17 (16)], 6; a Lat. word, guadrans 
(i. e. the fourth part of an as); in the N. T.a coin equal 
to one half the Attic chaleus or to two λεπτά (see λεπτόν): 
Mk. xii. 42; Mt. v.26. The word is fully discussed by 
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 447 sqq. [A. V. far- 
thing; see BB. DD. s. v.] * 

κοιλία, -as, 7, (κοῖλος hollow); Sept. for 03 the belly, 
Dyn the bowels, 27p the interior, the midst of a thing, 
Dn the womb; the belly: and 1. the whole belly, 
the entire cavity; hence ἡ ἄνω and ἡ κάτω κοιλία, the upper 
[i. e. the stomach] and the lower belly are distinguished ; 
very often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. 2. the 
lower belly, the alvine region, the receptacle of the ex- 
erement (Plut. symp. 7, 1, 3 sub fin. εἴπερ εἰς κοιλίαν 
ἐχώρει διὰ στομάχου πᾶν τὸ πινόμενον) : Mt. xv. 17; Mk. 
vii. 19. 3. the ψωμί ει (Lat. stomachus): Mt. xii. 40; 
Lk. xv. 16 [WH Trmmrg. χορτασθῆναι ἐκ etc.]; 1 Co. vi. 
13; Rev. x. 9 sq.; δουλεύειν τῇ κοιλίᾳ, to be given up to 
the pleasures of the palate, to gluttony, (see δουλεύω, 2 
b.), Ro. xvi. 18; also ὧν ὁ θεὸς ἡ κοιλία, Phil. iii. 19; 
κοιλίας ὄρεξις, Sir. xxiii. 6. 4. the womb, the place 
where the fetus is conceived and nourished till birth: 
Lk. i. 41 sq. 44; ii. 21; xi. 27; xxiii. 29; Jn. 11. 4, 
(very often so in Sept.; very rarely in prof. auth. ; 
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74; of the uterus of animals, ibid. 2, 
16,43); ἐκ (beginning from [see ἐκ, IV. 17) κοιλίας μητρός, 
Mt. xix. 12; Lk. i. 15; Acts iii. 2; xiv. 8; Gal. i. 15, 
(for DX 13:2, Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 11; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 6; Job i. 
21; 15. xlix. 1; Judg. xvi. 17 [ Vat. ἀπὸ x. p.; ef. W. 33 
(52)]). 5. in imitation of the Hebr. 13, tropi- 
cally, the innermost part of a man, the soul, heart, as the 
seat of thought, feeling, choice, (Job xv. 35; xxxii. 18 
[Sept. γαστήρ]; Prov. xviii. 8 ‘Sept. ψυχή]; xx. 27, 30; 
xxvi. 22 [Sept. σπλάγχνα]; Hab. iii. 16; Sir. xix. 12; li. 
21): In. vii. 38.* 

κοιμάω, -@: Pass., pres. κοιμάομαι, κοιμῶμαι; pt. Ke- 
κοίμημαι [cf. W. 274 (257)]; 1 aor. ἐκοιμήθην; 1 fut. 
κοιμπθησομαι; (akin to κεῖμαι; Curtius § 45); to cause 


301 


KOW@re om 


to sleep, put to sleep, (Hom. et al.) ; metaph. to still, calm, 
quiet, (Hom., Aeschyl., Plat.) ; Pass. to sleep, fall asleep . 
prop., Mt. xxviii. 13; Lk. xxii. 45; Jn. xi. 12; Acts 
xii. 6; Sept. for 33¥. metaph. and euphemistically i. q. 
to die (cf. Eng. to fall asleep]: Jn. xi. 11; Acts vii. 60; 
xiii. 36; 1 Co. vii. 39; xi. 30; xv. 6, 51 [ef. W. 555 
(517); B. 121 (106) note]; 2 Pet. 11]. 4; οἱ κοιμώμενοι, 
κεκοιμημένοι, κοιμηθέντες, i. q. the dead: Mt. xxvii. 52; 1 
Co. xv. 20; 1 Th. iv. 13-15; with ἐν Χριστῷ added (see 
ἐν, I. 6 Ὁ. p. 211°), 1 Co. xv. 18; in the same sense Is. 
xiv. 8; xliii. 17; 1 K. xi. 43; 2 Mace. xii. 45; Hom. Π. 
11, 241; Soph. Electr. 509.* 

κοίμησις, -ews, 7, α reposing, taking rest: Jn. xi. 13 [οἷς 
W. 8 59, 8a.]; of death, Sir. xlvi. 19; xlviii. 13; a 
lying, reclining, Plat. conv. p. 183 a.* 

κοινός, -7, -dv, (fr. ξύν, σύν, with; hence esp. in Epic 
ξυνός for κοινός, whence the Lat. cena [(?); see Vanitek 
p- 1065]); 1. asin Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod. (opp. 721) 
down (opp. to ἴδιος) common (i. e. belonging to several, 
Lat. communis): Acts ii. 44; iv. 32; κοινὴ πίστις, Tit. 1. 
4; σωτηρία, Jude 3. 2. by a usage foreign to class. 
Grk., common i. e. ordinary, belonging to the generality 
(Lat. vulgaris); by the Jews opp. to ἅγιος, ἡγιασμένος, 
καθαρός; hence unhallowed, Lat. profanus, levitically 
unclean, (in class. Grk. βέβηλος, q. v. 2): Mk. vii. 2, 5 
(where RLmre. ἀνίπτοις); Ro. xiv. 14; Heb. x. 29; 
Rev. xxi. 27 [Rec. κοινοῦν], (1 Mace. i. 47; φαγεῖν κοινά, 
ib. 62; κοινοὶ ἄνθρωποι, common people, profanum vulgus, 
Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 14; of τὸν κοινὸν βίον προηρημένοι, 1. 
e. a life repugnant to the holy law, ibid. 13, 1,1; ov yap 
ὡς κοινὸν ἄρτον οὐδὲ ὡς κοινὸν πόμα ταῦτα (i. 6. the bread 
and wine of the sacred supper) λαμβάνομεν, Justin Mart. 
apol. 1, 66; (of Χριστιανοὶ) τράπεζαν κοινὴν παρατίθενται, 
GAN οὐ κοινήν, a table communis but not profanus, Ep. ad 
Diogn. 5, on which ef. Otto’s note); κοινὸν καὶ [RG ἢ] 
ἀκάθαρτον, Acts x. 14; now. ἢ ἀκάθ., ib. x. 28; xi. 8, (κοινὰ 
ἢ ἀκάθαρτα οὐκ ἐσθίομεν, Justin Mart. dial. 6. Tr. 6. 20). 
[Cf. Trench § ci.]* 

κοινόω, τῶ; 1 aor. inf. κοινῶσαι [οἵ. W. 91 (86)]; pf. 
κεκοίνωκα; pf. pass. ptep. cexowwpevos; (κοινός); 1. 
in class. Grk. to make common. 2. in bibl. use (see 
κοινός, 2), a. to make (levitically) unclean, render un- 
hallowed, defile, profane (which the Grks. express by βεβη- 
how, cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 24 note 33 
[where he calls attention to Luke’s accuracy in putting 
κοινοῦν into the mouth of Jews speaking to Jews (Acts 
xxi. 28) and βεβηλοῦν when they address Felix (xxiv. 
6)]): Rev. xxi. 27 Rec.; Mt. xv. 11,18, 20; Mk. vii. 15, 
18, 20, 23; pass. Heb. ix. 13; ri, Acts xxi. 28; γαστέρα 
puapodayia, 4 Mace. vii. 6. b. to declare or count un- 
clean: Acts x. 15 (cf. 28); xi. 9; see δικαιόω, 8." 

κοινωνέω, -@ ; 1 aor. ἐκοινώνησα; pf.xexowarnKa; (κοινω- 
vos) 3 a. to come into communion or fellowship, to 
become a sharer, be made a partner: as in Grk. writ. w. 
gen. of the thing, Heb. ii. 14 [(so Prov. i. 11; 2 Mace. 
xiv. 25)]; w. dat. of the thing (rarely so in Grk. writ.). 
Ro. xv. 27; [1 Pet. iv. 13]. b. to enter into fellow- 
ship, join one’s self as an associate, make one’s self.a sharer 


«οινωνία 


or partner: as in Grk. writ., w. dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. 
ν. 22; 2Jn.11; ταῖς χρείαις τινός, so to make another’s 
necessities one’s own as to relieve them [A. V. communi- 
cating to the necessities ete.}, Ro. xii. 13; w. dat. of pers. 
foll. by eis τι (as in Plat. rep. 5 p. 453a.), Phil. iv. 15; 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the thing which one shares with 
another, Gal. vi. 6 (κοινωνήσεις ἐν πᾶσι τῷ πλησίον σου 
καὶ οὐκ ἐρεῖς ἴδια εἶναι, Barnab. ep. 19, 8); ef. W. § 30, 
8a.; [B. § 132, 8; Bp. Lghtft. or Ellicott on Gal. 1. ο. 
Comp. : συγ-κοινωνέω.] ἢ 

κοινωνία, -as, 7, (κοινωνός), fellowship, association, com- 
munity, communion, joint participation, intercourse; in 
the N. T. as in class. Grk. 1. the share which one 
has in anything, participation; w. gen. of the thing in 
which he shares: πνεύματος, Phil. ii. 1; τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύμα- 
ros, 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14) ; τῶν παθημάτων τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Phil. 
iii. 10; τῆς πίστεως, Philem. 6 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.]; τοῦ 
αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ, i. 6. in the benefits of Christ’s death, 
1 Co. x. 16 [ef. Meyer ad loc.]; τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Xp. in the 
(mystical) body of Christ or the church, ibid.; τῆς δια- 
κονίας, 2 Co. viii. 4; τοῦ μυστηρίου, Eph. iii. 9 Rec. εἰς 
κοινωνίαν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ, to obtain fellowship in the 
dignity and blessings of the Son of God, 1 Co. i. 9, where 
ef. Meyer. 2. intercourse, fellowship, intimacy: 
δεξιὰ κοινωνίας, the right hand as the sign and pledge 
of fellowship (in fulfilling the apostolic office), Gal. ii. 9 
{where see Bp. Lghtft.]; τίς cow. φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος; what 
in common has light with darkness? 2 Co. vi. 14 (ris οὖν 
κοινωνία πρὸς ᾿Απόλλωνα τῷ μηδὲν οἰκεῖον ἐπιτετηδευκότι, 
Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 14 fin.; εἰ δέ τις ἔστι κοινωνία πρὸς 
θεοὺς ἡμῖν, Stob. serm. 28 [i. p. 87 ed. Gaisf.]); used of 
the intimate bond of fellowship which unites Christians : 
absol. Acts ii. 42; with εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον added, Phil. i. 
53 κοινωνίαν ἔχειν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν, per ἀλλήλων, 1 In. i. 3, 7; 
of the fellowship of Christians with God and Christ, pera 
τοῦ πατρὸς K. μετὰ TOU υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6, (which fel- 
lowship, acc. to John’s teaching, consists in the fact that 
Christians are partakers in common of the same mind as 
God and Christ, and of the blessings arising therefrom). 
By a use unknown to prof. auth. κοινωνία in the N. T. 
denotes 3. a benefaction jointly contributed, a col- 
lection, a contribution, as exhibiting an embodiment and 
proof of fellowship (ef. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Wisd. 
viii. 18, p. 176): 2 Co. viii. 4; εἴς twa, for the benefit of 
one, 2 Co. ix. 13; ποιεῖσθαι cow. (to make a contribu- 
tion) εἴς τινα, Ro. xv. 26; joined with εὐποιΐα, Heb. xiii. 
16. [Cf B. § 182, 8.7" 

κοινωνικός, -7), -όν, (κοινωνία) ; 1. social, sociable, 
ready and apt to form and maintain communion and fel- 
lowship: Plat. deff. p.411 e.; Aristot. pol. 3, 13 [p. 1283, 
38; eth. Eudem. 8, 10 p. 1242*, 26 κοινωνικὸν ἄνθρωπος 
ζῷον); Polyb. 2,44,1; Antonin. 7,52. 55; often in Plut.; 
πράξεις xow. actions having reference to human society, 
Antonin. 4, 33; 5, 1. 2. inclined to make others 
sharers in one’s possessions, inclined to impart. free in. qu- 
ing, liberai, (Aristot. rhet. 2, 24, 2 [where, however, see 
Cope}; Leian. Tim. 56): 1 Tim. vi. 18.* 

κοινωνός, -7, dv, (κοινός), [as adj. Eur. Iph. Taur. 1173; 


852 


κολάζω 


commonly as subst. |; a. a partner, associate, com 
rade, companion: 2 Co. viii. 23; ἔχειν τινὰ κοινωνόν, 
Philem. 17; εἰμὶ κοινωνός τινι, to be one’s partner, Lk. v. 
10; twos (gen. of pers.), to be the partner of one doing 
something, Ieb. x. 33; τινὸς ἐν τῷ αἵματι, to be one’s 
partner in shedding the blood etc. Mt. xxiii. 30. b. 
a partaker, sharer, in any thing; w. gen. of the thing: 
τῶν παθημάτων, 2 Co. i. 7; τῆς δόξης, 1 Pet. v.15; ϑείας 
φύσεως, 2 Pet. i. 45; τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου, of the altar (at 
Jerusalem) on which sacrifices are offered, i. e. sharing 
in the worship of the Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; τῶν δαιμονίων, 
partakers of (or with) demons, i. e. brought into fellow: 
ship with them, because they are the authors of the 
heathen worship, ibid. 20; (ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ κοινωνοὶ... 
ἐν τοῖς φθαρτοῖς, joint partakers in that which is imper- 
ishable ...in the blessings which perish, Barnab. ep. 
19, 8; see κοινωνέω, fin.).* 

κοίτη. -ης, ἡ, (KEQ, KEIQ, κεῖμαι, akin to κοιμάω) ; fr. 
Hom. Od. 19, 341 down; Sept. chiefly for 33v1, also 
for 723¥ ete. ; a. a place for lying down, resting, 
sleeping in; a bed, couch: εἰς τὴν κοίτην (see εἰμί, V. 2a.) 
εἰσίν, Lk. xi. 7. b. spec. the marriage-bed, as in the 
Trage.: τ. κοίτην μιαίνειν, of adultery (Joseph. antt. 2, 
4,5; Plut. de fluv. 8, 3), Heb. xiii. 4. ο. cohabita- 
tion, whether lawful or unlawful (Lev. xv. 4 sq. 21-25, 
ete. ; Sap. iii. 13, 16; Eur. Med. 152; Ale. 249): plur. 
sexual intercourse (see περιπατέω, b. a.), Ro. xiii. 18 [A.V. 
chambering]; by meton. of the cause for the effect we 
have the peculiar expression κοίτην ἔχειν ἔκ τινος, to have 
conceived by a man, Ro. ix. 10; κοίτη σπέρματος, Lev. xv. 
16; xxii. 4; xviii. 20, 23 [here x. εἰς σπερματισμόν] ; on 
these phrases ef. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 291 sq.* 

κοιτών, -Gvos, ὁ, (fr. κοίτη ; cf. νυμφών etc.), a sleeping- 
room, bed-chamber: 6 ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτ. the officer who is over 
the bed-chamber, the chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (2 S. iv. 7; 
Ex. viii. 3; 1 Esdr. iii.3; the Atticists censure the word, 
for which Attie writ. generally used δωμάτιον; ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 252 sq.).* 

κόκκινος, -7, -ov, (fr. κόκκος a kernel, the grain or berry 
of the ilex coccifera; these berries are the clusters of 
eges of a female insect, the kermes [(cf. Eng. carmine, 
crimson) |, and when collected and pulverized produce a 
red which was used in dyeing, Plin. h. n. 9, 41, 45; 16, 
8, 12; 24, 4), crimson, scarlet-colored: Mt. xxvii. 28; 
Heb. ix. 19; Rev. xvii. 3. neut. as a subst. i. q. scarlet 
cloth or clothing: Rev. xvii.4; xviii. 12,16, (Gen. xxxviii. 
28; Ex. xxv.4; Lev. xiv. 4, 6; Josh. ii. 18; 2S. i. 24; 
2 Chr. ii. 7,14; Plut. Fab. 15; φορεῖν κόκκινα, scarlet 
robes, Epict. diss. 4, 11,345 ἐν κοκκίνοις περιπατεῖν, 3, 22, 
10). Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.Carmesin; Roskoffin Schenkel 
i. p. 501 sq.; Kamphausen in Riehm p. 220; [Β. Ὁ. 8. v. 
Colors, II. 3].* 

κόκκος, -ov, ὁ, [οἵ. Vanitek, Fremdworter etc. p. 26], 
a grain: Mt. xiii. 31; xvii. 20; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii. 
19; xvii. 6; Jn. xii. 24; 1 Co. xv. 87. [Hom. h. Cer. 
Hat., down.]* 

κολάζω : pres. pass. ptep. κολαζόμενος ; 1 aor. mid. sub- 
june. 3 pers. plur. κολάσωνται ; (κόλος lopped); in Grk 


κυλακεία 3 


writ. 1. prop. to lop, prune, as trees, wings. 2. 
to check, curb, restrain. 3. to chastise, correct, pun- 
ish: so in the N. T.; pass. 2 Pet. ii. 9, and Lehm. in 4; 
mid. to cause to be punished (3 Mace. vii. 3): Acts iy. 21.* 

κολακεία (T WH -xia [see I, 47), -as, 9, (κολακεύω), 
flattery : λόγος κολακείας, flattering discourse, 1 Th. ii. 5. 
(Plat., Dem., Theophr., Joseph., Hdian., al.) * 

κόλασις, -ews, 7, (κολάζω), correction, punishment, pen- 
alty: Mt. xxv. 46; κόλασιν ἔχει, brings with it or has con- 
nected with it the thought of punishment, 1 Jn. iv. 18. 
(Ezek. xiv. 3 sq., ete.; 2 Mace. iv. 38; 4 Mace. viii. 8; 
Sap. xi. 14; xvi. 24, ete.; Plat., Aristot., Diod. 1, 77, 
(9); 4, 44, (3); Ael. v. h. 7, 15; al.) * 

[ϑυν. κόλασις, τιμωρία: the noted definition of Aristotle 
which distinguishes κόλασις from τιμωρία as that which (is 
disciplinary and) has reference to him who suffers, while the 
latter (is penal and) has reference to the satisfaction of him 
who inflicts, may be found in his rhet. 1, 10,17; ef. Cope, 
Intr. to Arist. Rhet. p. 232. To much the same effect, Plato, 
Protag. 324 a. sq., also deff. 416. But, as in other cases, 
usage (esp. the later) does not always recognize the distinc- 
tion; see 6. g. Philo de legat. ad Gaium § 1 fin.; frag. ex 
Euseb. prep. evang. 8,13 (Mang. ii. 641); de vita Moys. i. 16 
fin.; Plut. de sera num. vind. §§ 9,11, ete. Plutarch (ibid. 
§ 25 sub fin.) uses κολάζομαι of those undergoing the penalties 
of the other world (cf. Just. Mart. 1 apol. 8; Clem. Rom. 
2 Cor. 6,7; Just. Mart. 1 apol. 43; 2 apol. 8; Test. xii. Patr., 
test. Reub. 5; test. Levi 4, etc.; Mart. Polye. 2,3; 11, 2; 
Ign. ad Rom. 5,3; Mart. Ign. vat.5 etc.). See Zrench, Syn. 
§ vii.; McClellan, New Test. vol. i. marg. reff. on Mt. u. s.; 
Bartlett, Life and Death Eternal. Note G.; C.F’. Hudson, 
Debt and Grace, p. 188sqq.; Schmidt ch. 167, 2 sq.] 

Κολασσαεύς, see Κολοσσαεύς. 

Κολασσαί, see Κολοσσαί. 

κολαφίζω ; 1 aor. ἐκολάφισα: pres. pass. κολαφίζομαι ; 
(κολαφος a fist, and this fr. κολάπτω to peck, strike); to 
strike with the fist, give one a blow with the fist (Terence, 
colaphum infringo, Quintil. col. duco), [A. V. to buffet]: 
τινά, Mt. xxvi. 67; Mk. xiv. 65; as a specific term for 
a general, i. q. to maltreat, treat with violence and con- 
tumely, 2 Co. xii. 7; pres. pass., 1 Co. iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 
20. (Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) The word is fully 
discussed by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. ete. p. 67 
sqq-; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 175 sq.* 

κολλάω, -@: Pass., pres. κολλῶμαι; 1 aor. ἐκολλήθην ; 
1 fut. κολληθήσομαι (Mt. xix. 5 LT TrWH); (κόλλα 
gluten, glue); prop. to glue, glue to, glue together, cement, 
fasten together; hence univ. to join or fasten firmly to- 
gether; in the N. T. only the pass. is found, with reflex- 
ive force, to join one’s self to, cleave to; Sept. for pat: 
ὁ κονιορτὸς ὁ κολληθεὶς ἡμῖν, Lk. x. 11; ἐκολλήθησαν αὐτῆς 
αἱ ἁμαρτίαι ἄχρι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, her sins were sucha heap as 
to reach even unto heaven (that is, came to the knowl- 
edge of heaven), Rev. xviii. 5 GLT Tr WH (ἐκολλ. ἡ 
Ψυχή pou ὀπίσω cov, Ps. lxii. (Ixiii.) 9, αἱ ἄγνοιαι ἡμῶν 
ὑπερήνεγκαν ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, 1 Esdr. viii. 72 (74); ὕβρις 
te Bin τε οὐρανὸν ἵκει, Hom. Od. 15, 329; 17, 565). of 
persons, w. dat. of the thing, κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι join 
thyself to ete. Acts viii. 29; w. dat. of pers., to form an 
intimate connection with, enter into the closest relations 

23 


3 κόλποξ 


with, unite one’s self to, (so Barn. ep. c. 10, 8 54. 5. 8; 
also with μετά and gen. of pers., ibid. 10, 11; 19, 2. 6; 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15,1; 30,3; 46, 2 [cf. Bp. Lehtft.’s 
note], 4): τῇ γυναικί, Mt. xix. 5 LT Tr WH; τῇ πόρνῃ, 
1 Co. vi. 16 (Sir. Χῖχ. 2); τῷ κυρίῳ, 1 Co. vi. 17 (2 K. 
xviii. 6; Sir. ii. 3); to join one’s self to one as an asso- 
ciate, keep company with, Acts v.13; ix. 26; x. 28; to 
follow one, be on his side, Acts xvii. 34 (2S. xx. 2; 1 
Mace. iii. 2; vi. 21); to join or attach one’s self to a 
master or patron, Lk. xv. 15; w. dat. of the thing, to 
give one’s self steadfastly to, labor for, [A.V. cleave to]: 
τῷ ἀγαθῷ, Ro. xii. 9, ἀγαθῷ, κρίσει δικαίᾳ, Barn. ep. 20, 2; 
τῇ εὐλογίᾳ,5ο cleave to as to share, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
31, 1. (Aeschyl. Ag. 1566; Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) 
[Comp.: προσ-κολλάω.] * 

κολλούριον (T Tr κολλύριον, the more common form 
in prof. auth. [ef. Lob. Pathol. proleg. p.461; WH. App. 
p- 1527), του, τό, (dimin. of κολλύρα, coarse bread of a 
cylindrical shape, like that known in Westphalia as 
Pumpernickel), Lat. collyrium (A.V. eye-salve], a prepa- 
ration shaped like a κολλύρα, composed of various mate- 
rials and used as a remedy for tender eyelids (Hor. 
sat. 1,5, 30; Epict. diss. 2,21, 20; 3, 21, 21; Cels. 6, 6, 
7): Rev. iii. 18." 

κολλυβιστής, -οῦ, ὁ, (fr. κόλλυβος i. gq. 8. a small coin, 
cf. κολοβός clipped; b. rate of exchange, premium), a 
money-changer, banker: Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 
15. Menand., Lys. in Poll. 7, 33, 170; ὁ μὲν κόλλυβος 
δόκιμον, τὸ δὲ κολλυϑιστὴς ἀδόκιμον, Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 
440. Cf. what was said under xeppatiotns.” 

κολλύριον, see κολλούριον. 

κολοβόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἐκολόβωσα; Pass., 1 aor. ἐκολο- 
βώθην; 1 fut. κολοβωθήσομαι ; (fr. κολοβός lopped, mu- 
tilated); to cut off (ras χεῖρας, 2S. iv. 12; τοὺς πόδας, 
Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 [p. 487, 24]; τὴν ῥῖνα, Diod. 1, 78); 
to mutilate (Polyb. 1, 80,13); hence in the N. T. of time, 
(Vulg. brevio) to shorten, abridge, curtail: Mt. xxiv. 22: 
Mk. xiii. 20.* 

Κολοσσαεύς, and (so L Tr WH) Κολασσαεύς (see the 
foll. word; in Strabo and in Inserr. Κολοσσηνός), -έως, ὁ, 
Vulg. Colossensis, Pliny Colossinus; Colossian, a Colos- 
sian; in the heading [and the subscription (R Tr)] of 
the Ep. to the Col.* 

Κολοσσαί (ἢ T WH, the classical form), and KoAacoai 
(R* L Tr, apparently the later popular form; [see WH. 
Intr. §423, and esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. p.16 sq.]; ef. 
W. p.44; and on the plur. W. § 27, 3), -ῶν, ai, Colosse, 
anciently alarge and flourishing city, but in Strabo’s time 
a πόλισμα [i. 6. “small town” (Bp. Lghtft.)] of Phrygia 
Major situated on the Lycus, not far from its junction 
with the Mzander, and in the neighborhood of Laodicea 
and Hierapolis (Hat. 7, 30; Xen. an. 1, 2,6; Strab. 12, 
8,13 p.576; Plin. h. n. 5,41), together with which cities 
it was destroyed by an earthquake [about] a. p. 66 
({Euseb. chron. Ol. 210]; Oros. 7, 7 [see esp. Bp. Lghtft. 
τ. s. p. 38]): Col. i. 2. [See the full description, with 
copious reff., by Bp. Lghtft. u. s. pp. 1-72.]* 

κόλπος, -ov, 6, (apparently akin to κοῖλος hollow, [yet 


κολυμβάω 


ef. Vanitek p. 179; L. and 5. 8. v.]), Hebr. ΡΠ; the 
bosom (Lat. sinus), i.e. as in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down 1. the front of the body between the arms: 
hence ἀνακεῖσθαι ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ τινός, of the one who so re- 
clines at table that his head covers the bosom as it were, 
the chest, of the one next him [cf. B. 1). 5. v. Meals], Jn. 
xiii. 23. Hence the figurative expressions, ἐν τοῖς κόλποις 
(on the plur., which occurs as early as Hom. Il. 9, 570, 
ef. W.§ 27, 3; [B. 24 (21)]) rod ᾿Αβραὰμ εἶναι, to obtain 
the seat next to Abraham, i. e. to be partaker of the same 
blessedness as Abraham in paradise, Lk. xvi. 23 ; ἀποφέ- 
ρεσθαι εἰς τὸν x.’ABp. to be borne away to the enjoyment 
of the same felicity with Abraham, ibid. 22 (οὕτω yap 
παθόντας --- acc. to another reading θανόντας ---᾿Αβραὰμ 
kai ᾿Ισαὰκ καὶ ᾿Ιακὼβ ὑποδέξονται εἰς τοὺς κόλπους αὐτῶν, 4 
Mace. xiii. 16; [see B. D. 85. v. Abraham’s bosom, and] 
on the rabbin. phrase o7728 Ow yp na, in Abraham's 
bosom, to designate bliss in paradise, ef. Lightfoot, Hor. 
Hebr. et Talmud. p. 851 sqq.); ὁ ὧν εἰς τὸν k. τοῦ πατρός, 
lying (turned) unto the bosom of his father (God), i. e. 
in the closest and most intimate relation to the Father, 
Jn. i. 18 [W. 415 (387)]; cf. Cic. ad div. 14, 4 iste vero 
sit in sinu semper et complexu meo. 2. the bosom 
of a garment, i. e. the hollow formed by the upper fore- 
part of a rather loose garment bound by a girdle, used 
for keeping and carrying things [the fold or pocket; cf. 
B. Ὁ. 8. v. Dress], (Ex. iv. 6 sq.; Prov. vi. 27); so, figu- 
ratively, μέτρον καλὸν διδόναι eis τ. x. τινός, to repay one 
liberally, Lk. vi. 38 (ἀποδιδόναι εἰς τ. x. Is. xv. 6; Jer. 
xxxix. (xxxii.) 18). 3. a bay of the sea (cf. Ital. 
golfo [Eng. gulf, — which may be only the mod. repre- 
sentatives of the Grk. word]): Acts xxvii. 39.* 

κολυμβάω, -d; to dive, to swim: Acts xxvii. 43. (Plat. 
Prot. p. 350 a.; Lach. p. 193 ¢., and in later writ.) 
(Comp. : ἐκ-κολυμβάω. " 

κολυμβήθρα, -as, 7, (κολυμβάω), a place for diving, a swim- 
ming-pool [A. V. simply pool]: Jn. ix. 7, and Ree. in 11; 
a reservoir or pool used for bathing, Jn. v. 2, 4 [(ace. to 
txt.of RL), 7]. (Plat. rep. 5 p. 453 d.; Diod., Joseph., 
al.; Sept., 2 K. xviii. 17; Neh. ii. 14; Nah. ii. 8.) * 

κολώνια (RG Tr), κολωνία (LT WH KC [ef. Chandler 
αὶ 951), [Tdf. edd. 2, 7 -νεια ; see his note on Acts as be- 
low, and cf. εἰ, 1], -as, ἡ, (a Lat. word), a colony: in Acts 
xvi. 12 the city of Philippi is so called, where Octavianus 
had planted a Roman colony (cf. Dio Cass. 51,4; Digest. 
50, tit. 15, 8). The exegetical difficulties of this pass. 
are best removed, as Meyer shows, by connecting κολωνία 
closely with πρώτη πόλις, the chief city, a [Roman] colony 
(a colonial city); [but cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip. 
p- 50 sq. ].* 

κομάω, -ῶ ; (κόμη) ; to let the hair grow, have long hair, 
[ef. κόμη fin.]: 1 Co. xi.14 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

κόμη, -ns, 9, [fr. Hom. down], hair, head of hair: 1 Co. 
x1. 15. [Ace. to Schmidt (21, 2) it differs fr. θρίξ (the 
anatomical or physical term) by designating the hair as 
an ornament (the notion of length being only see- 
ondary and suggested). Cf. B.D. 5. v. Hair.]* 


354 


κονιάω 


κομίζω: 1 aor. ptep. fem. κομίσασα; Mid., pres. ptep. 
κομιζόμενος; 1 fut. κομίσομαι (Eph. vi. 8 LT Tr WH; 
Col. iii. 25 Ltxt. WH) and Attic κομιοῦμαι (Col. iii. 25 R 
GLumrg.T Tr; [Eph.vi.8 RG]; 1 Pet. ν. 4; cf. [ WH. 
App. p. 163 sq.]; B. 37 (38); [W. § 18,1 ο.; Veitch 
8. V.]), ptep. κομιούμενος (2 Pet. ii. 13 [here WH Trmrg. 
ἀδικούμενοι ; see ἀδικέω, 2 b.]); 1 aor. ἐκομισάμην [B. 
§ 135, 1]; rare in Sept., but in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down 
freq. in various senses ; 1. to care for, take care of, 
provide for. 2. to take up or carry away in order 
to care for and preserve. 3. univ. to carry away, 
bear off. 4. to carry, bear, bring to: once so in the 
N. T., viz. ἀλάβαστρον, Lk. vii. 87. Mid. (as often in 
prof. auth.) to carry away for one’s self; to carry off what 
is one’s own, to bring back; i. e. a. to receive, obtain: 
τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, the promised blessing, Heb. x. 36; xi. 39 
[ras ἐπαγγ- L; soT Tr WH in xi.13]; σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν, 
1 Pet.i.9; τῆς δόξης στέφανον, 1 Pet. ν. 4 ; μισθὸν ἀδικίας, 
2 Pet. ii. 13 [see above], (τὸν ἄξιον τῆς δυσσεβείας μισθόν, 
2 Mace. viii. 33; δόξαν éaOdnp [al. καρπίζεται], Eur. Hipp. 
432; τὴν ἀξίαν παρὰ θεῶν, Plat. legg. 4 p. 718 a., and other 
exx. elsewh.). b. to receive what was previously one’s 
own, to get back, receive back, recover: τὸ ἐμὸν σὺν τόκῳ, 
Mt. xxv. 27; his son (of Abraham after he had con- 
sented to sacrifice Isaac), Heb. xi. 19 (2 Mace. vii. 29; 
τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἀνύβριστον, Philo de Josepho ὃ 35; οἱ δὲ παρ᾽ 
ἐλπίδας ἑαυτοὺς κεκομισμένοι, having received each other 
back, been restored to each other, contrary to their expecta- 
tions, of Abraham and Isaac after the sacrifice of the 
latter had been prevented by God, Joseph. antt. 1, 13, 
4; τὴν ἀδελφήν, Eur. Iph. T. 1362; used of the recovery 
of hostages, captives, ete., Thue. 1, 113; Polyb. 1, 83, 8; 
8, 51, 12; 3,40, 10; the city and temple, 2 Mace. x. 1; 
a citadel, a city, often in Polyb.; τὴν βασιλείαν, Arstph. 
av. 549; τὴν πατρῴαν ἀρχήν, Joseph. antt. 13, 4, 1). 
Since in the rewards and punishments of deeds, the 
deeds themselves are as it were requited and so given 
back to their authors, the meaning is obvious when one 
is said κομίζεσθαι that which he has done, i. 6. either the 
reward or the punishment of the deed [W. 620 sq. 
(576)]: 2Co, v.10; Col. iii. 25; with παρὰ κυρίου added, 
Eph. vi. 8; ([duapriav, Lev. xx. 17]; ἕκαστος, καθὼς 
ἐποίησε, κομιεῖται, Barn. ep. 4, 12). [Comp.: ék-, συγ- 
κομίζω." 

κομψότερον, neut. compar. of the adj. κομψός (fr. κομέω 
to take care of, tend) neat, elegant, nice, fine; used ad- 
verbially, more finely, better: κομψότ. ἔχω to be better, of 
a convalescent, Jn. iv. 52 (ὅταν ὁ ἰατρὸς εἴπῃ" κόμψως 
ἔχεις, Epict. diss. 3, 10,13; so in Latin belle habere, Cic. 
epp. ad div. 16, 15; [cf. Eng. ‘he’s doing nicely,’ ‘he’s 
getting on finely’; and] Germ. er befindet sich htibsch; 
es geht htibsch mit ihm). The gloss. of Hesych. refers 
to this pass.: κομψότερον " βελτιώτερον, ἐλαφρότερον." 

κονιάω, -@: pf. pass. ptep. κεκονιαμένος ; (fr. κονία, 
which signifies not only ‘dust’ but also ‘lime”); to cover 
with lime, plaster over, whitewash: τάφοι κεκονιαμένοι (the 
Jews were accustomed to whitewash the entrances to 
their sepulchres, as a warning against defilement by 


κονιορτός 


touching them [Β. D. 5.ν. Burial, 1 fin.; οἵ. Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sqq.]), Mt. xxiii. 27; τοῖχος 
κεκον. is applied to a hypocrite who conceals his malice 
under an outward assumption of piety, Acts xxiii. 3. 
(Dem., Aristot., Plut., al.; for τ, Deut. xxvii. 2, 4.) * 

κονιορτός, -οὔ, ὁ, (fr. κονία, and ὄρνυμι to stir up) ; ils 
prop. raised dust, flying dust, (Hdt., Plat., Polyb., 
al.). 2. univ. dust: Mt. x. 14; Lk. ix. 5; x. 11; 
Acts xiii. 51; xxii.23. (For ps; Ex. ix. 9; Nah.i. 3; 
for 1D), Deut. ix. 21.)* 

κοπάζω: 1 aor. ἐκύπασα; (κόπος) ; prop. to grow weary 
or tired; hence to cease from violence, cease raging: 6 
ἄνεμος (Hdt. 7, 191), Mt. xiv. 832; Mk. iv. 89; vi. 51. 
(Gen. viii. 1; Jon.i. 11 sq.; [ef. esp. Philo, somn. ii. 35].)* 

κοπετός, -ov, 6, (fr. κόπτομαι, see κύπτω), Sept. for 
120; Lat. planctus, i. e. lamentation with beating of the 
breast as a sign of grief: κοπετὸν ποιεῖσθαι ἐπί τινι, Acts 
viii. 2; ἐπί τινα, Zech. xii. 10. (Eupolis in Bekker’s an- 
nott. ad Etym. Magn. p. 776; Dion. H. antt. 11, 31; 
Plut. Fab. 17.) * 

κοπή. -ῆς, 7), (κόπτω) 5 1. prop. several times in 
Grk. writ. the act of cutting, a cut. 2. in bibl. Grk. 
a cutting in pieces, slaughter: Heb. vii. 1; Gen. xiv. 17; 
Deut. xxviii. 25; Josh. x. 20; Judith xv. 7." 

κοπιάω, -@, [3 pers. plur. κοπιοῦσιν (for -ὥσιν), Mt. vi. 
28 Tr; cf. ἐρωτάω, init.]; 1 aor. ἐκοπίασα; pf. κεκοπίακα 
(2 pers. sing. κεκοπίακες, Rev. ii. 3 LT Tr WH, ef. [W. 
§ 13, 2¢.]; B. 43 (38) [and his trans. of Apollon. Dysk. p. 
54n.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. 
p- 397); (κόπος, 4- V-) 3 1. as in Arstph., Joseph., 
Plut., al., ta grow weary, tired, exhausted, (with toil or 
burdens or grief): Mt. xi. 28; Rev. ii. 3; κεκοπιακὼς ἐκ 
τῆς ὁδοιπορίας, Jn. iv. 6 (ὑπὸ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας, Joseph. antt. 
2,15, 3; δραμοῦνται καὶ οὐ κοπιάσουσι, Is. xl. 31). 2 
in bibl. Grk. alone, to labor with wearisome effort, to toil 
(Sept. for 33°); of bodily labor: absol., Mt. vi. 28; 
Lk. ν. 5; xii. 27 [not Tdf.]; Jn. iv. 38; Acts xx. 35; 
1 Co. iv.12; Eph. iv. 28; 2 Tim. ii. 6 [ef. W.556 (517) ; 
B. 390 (334)]; τί, upon a thing, Jn. iv. 38. of the toil- 
some efforts of teachers in proclaiming and promot- 
ing the kingdom of God and Christ: 1 Co. xv. 10; xvi. 
16, (ef. Jn. iv. 38); foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the thing in 
which one labors, ἐν λόγῳ x. διδασκαλίᾳ, 1 Tim. v.17; ἐν 
ὑμῖν, among you, 1 Th. v.12; ἐν κυρίῳ (see ἐν, I. 6 Β. p. 
211» mid. [I br. the el.]), Ro. xvi. 12; εἴς τινα, for one, 
for his benefit, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11 [ef. B. 242 (209); 
W. 503 (469)]; εἰς τοῦτο, looking to this (viz. that piety 
has the promise of life), 1 Tim. iv. 10; εἰς 6, to which end, 
Col. i. 29; εἰς κενόν, in vain, Phil. ii. 16 (κενῶς ἐκοπίασα, 
of the frustrated labor of the prophets, Is. xlix. 4).* 

κόπος, -ου, 6, (κόπτω) ; 1. i. 4: τὸ κόπτειν, a beat- 
ing. 2. i. 4. κοπετός, a beating of the breast in grief, 
sorrow, (Jer. li. 33 (xlv. 3)). 3. labor (so Sept. often 
for })» ἘΜῸΝ a. trouble (Aeschyl., Soph.) : κόπους 
παρέχειν τινί, to cause one trouble, make work for him, 
Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; Gal. vi. 17; κόπον 
παρέχ. τινί, Lk. xviii. 5. ὍὌ. intense labor united with 
trouble, toil, (Eur., Arstph., al.) : univ., plur., 2 Co. vi. 5; 


305 


κορβᾶν 


xi. 23; of manual labor, joined with μόχθος [(see below) ], 
1 Th. ii. 9; ἐν κόπῳ Kk. μόχθῳ, [toil and travail], 2 Co. xi. 
27 (where L T Tr WH om. ev); 2 Th. iii. 8; of the la- 
borious euurts of Christian virtue, 1 Co. xv. 58; Rev. ii. 
2; plur. Rev. xiv. 13; 6 κόπος τῆς ἀγάπης, the labor to 
which love prompts, and which voluntarily assumes and 
endures trouble and pains for the salvation of others, 1 
Th. i. 3; Heb. vi. 10 Rec.; of toil in teaching, Jn. iv. 
38 (on which see εἰς, B. 1. 8); 1 Th. iii. 5; of that which 
such toil in teaching accomplishes, 1 Co. iii. 8; plur. 2 
Co. x. 15 (cf. Sir. xiv. 15).* 

[S¥n. κόπος, μόχθος, πόνος: primarily and in general 
classic usage, πόνος gives prominence to the effort (work as 
requiring force), κόπος ἴο the fatigue, μόχθος (chiefly poetic) 
to the hardship. But in the N. T. πόνος has passed over 
(in three instances out of four) to the meaning pain (hence 
it has no place in the ‘new Jerusalem’, Rey. xxi. 4); ef. the 
deterioration in the case of the allied πονηρός, révns. Schmidt, 
ch. 85; οἵ. Trench § cii. (who would trans. =. ‘toil’, «. ‘wea- 
riness’, μ. ‘labor’).] 

κοπρία {Chandler § 96], -as, ἡ, i. q. ἡ κόπρος, dung: Lk. 
xiii. 8 Ree.*; xiv. 35 (34). (Jobii.8; 1 5.1.8; Neh. 
ii. 13; 1 Mace. ii. 62; [Strab., Poll., al.].) * 

κόπριον, -ου; τό, i. q. ἡ κόπρος, dung, manure: plur. Lk. 
xiii. 8 [Rec.* κοπρίαν]. (Heraclit. in Plut. mor. p. 669 
[quaest. conviy. lib. iv. quaest. iv. § 3,6]; Strab. 16, 
§ 26 p. 784; Epict. diss. 2,4,5; Plut. Pomp. ο. 48; [Is. 
ν. 25; Jer. xxxii. 19 (xxv. 33); Sir. xxii. 2], and other 
later writ.) * 

κόπτω : impf. 3 pers. plur. ἔκοπτον ; 1 aor. ptep. κόψας 
(Mk. xi. 8 T Tr txt. WH); Mid., impf. ἐκοπτόμην ; fut. 
κόψομαι; 1 aor. ἐκοψάμην; [fr. Hom. down]; to cut, 
strike, smite, (Sept. for 737, ΓΞ, etc.) : τὲ ἀπό or ἔκ 
τινος, to cut from, cut off, Mt. xxi. 8; Mk. xi. 8. Mid. 
to beat one’s breast for grief, Lat. plango [R. V. mourn]: 
Mt. xi. 17; xxiv. 30, (Aeschyl. Pers. 683; Plat., al.; 
Sept. often so for 73D) ; τινά, to mourn or bewail one 
[ef. W. § 32,1 y.]: Lk. viii. 52; xxiii. 27, (Gen. xxiii. 2; 
1 5. xxv. 1,ete.; Arstph. Lys. 396; Anthol. 11, 135, 1); 
ἐπί twa, Rev.i. 7; [xviii.9 T Tr WH], (3 5. xi. 26); ἐπί 
τινι, Rev. xviii. 9 [R GL], ef. Zech. xii. 10. [Compr.: ava-, 
ἀπο-, ἐκ-, ἐν-, kaTa-, Tpo-, προσκόπτω. SYN. cf. θρηνέω.} " 

κόραξ, -ακος; 6, a raven: Lk. xii. 24. [Fr. Hom. down. ] * 
κοράσιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of κόρη). prop. a collog. word 
used disparagingly (like the Germ. Mddel), a little girl 
(in the epigr. attributed to Plato in Diog. Laert. 3, 33; 
Lcian. as. 6); used by later writ. without disparagement 
[W. 24 (23)], α girl, damsel, maiden : Mt. ix. 24 sq.; xiv. 
1; Mk. ν. 41 54.; vi. 22, 28; (oceasionally, as in Epic- 
tet. diss. 2, 1, 28; 3, 2,8; 4, 10, 33; Sept. for ΠᾺΡ; 
twice also for 711%, Joel iii. 3 (iv. 3); Zech. viii. 5; [Tob. 
vi. 12: Judith xvi. 12; Esth.ii.2]). The form and use 
of the word are fully discussed in Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 
73 sq., ef. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 42 sq.* 
κορβᾶν [-βάν WH; but see Τὰ, Proleg. p. 102], in- 
decl., and xopBavas, acc. -av [B. 20 (18)], 6, (Hebr. 130 
i.e. an offering, Sept. everywh. δῶρον, a term which com- 
prehends all kinds of sacrifices, the bloody as well as the 
bloodless) ; 1. κορβᾶν, a gift offered (or to be of- 


Κορε 


fered) to God: Mk. vii. 11 (Joseph. antt. 4, 4, 4, of the 
Nazirites, of κορβᾶν αὑτοὺς ὀνομάσαντες τῷ θεῷ, δῶρον δὲ 
τοῦτο σημαίνει κατὰ “Ἑλλήνων γλῶτταν ; cf. contr. Apion. 
1, 22,4; [BB.DD. 5. v. Corban; Ginsburg in the Bible 
Edueator, i. 1557). 2. xopBavas, -a [see B. u. s.], 
the sacred treasury: Mt. xxvii. 6 [L mrg. Tr mrg. κορβᾶν] 
(τὸν ἱερὸν θησαυρόν, καλεῖται δὲ κορβανᾶς, Joseph. Ὁ. j. 2, 
9, 4)." 

Κορέ (in Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 2 sqq. with the Grk. ter- 
minations -€ov, j-, τῆν), 5, (Hebr. Mp i. e. ice, hail), Ko- 
rah(Vulg. Core), ἃ man who, with others, rebelled against 
Moses (Num. xvi.) : Jude 11.* 

κορέννυμι ; (κύρος satiety); to satiate, sale, satisfy: 1 
aor. pass. ptep. κορεσθέντες, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down, w. gen. of the thing with which one is filled [B. 
§ 132, 19], τροφῆς, Acts xxvii. 88; trop. (pf.) κεκορεσμέ- 
vot ἐστέ, every wish is satisfied in the enjoyment of the 
consummate Messianic blessedness, 1 Co. iv. 8.* 

Kopivatos, -ov, ὁ, α Corinthian, an inhabitant of Corinth: 
Acts xviii. 8; 2 Co. vi. 11. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)]* 

Κόρινθος, -ov, ἡ, Corinth, the metropolis of Achaia 
proper, situated on the isthmus of the Peloponnesus be- 
tween the Aigean and Ionian Seas (hence called bimaris, 
Ilor. car. 1, 7, 2; Ovid. metam. 5, 407), and having two 
harbors, one of which called Cenchre (see Keyypeai) 
was the roadstead for ships from Asia, the other, called 
Lechzon or Lechzum, for ships from Italy. It was utterly 
destroyed by L. Mummius, the Roman consul, in the 
Achzan war, B. c. 146; but after the lapse of a century 
it was rebuilt by Julius Caesar [B. c. 44]. It was emi- 
nent in commerce and wealth, in literature and the arts, 
especially the study of rhetoric and philosophy; but it 
was notorious also for luxury and moral corruption, 
particularly the foul worship of Venus. Paul came to 
the city in his second missionary journey, [6.7 A. Ρ. 53 
or 54, and founded there a Christian church: Acts xviii. 
1; xix.1; 1 Co. i. 2; 2Co.i. 1,23; 2 Tim.iv.20. [BB. 
DD. s. v.; Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 269 
- sqq-]° 

Κορνήλιος, -ov, 6, a Lat. name, Cornelius, a Roman 
centurion living at Caesarea, converted to Christianity 
by Peter: Acts x. 1 sqq.* 

κόρος, -ov, 6, (Ilebr. 15), a corus or cor [ef. Ezek. xlv. 
14], the largest Ilebrew dry measure (i. 6. for wheat, 
meal, etc.); acc. to Josephus (antt. 15, 9, 2) equal to 
ten Attic medimni, [but cf. B.D. 5. v. Weights and Meas- 
ures sub fin.; #. &. Conder in the Bible Educator, iii. 
10 sq.]: Lk. xvi. 7[A.V. measure]. (Sept. [Lev. xxvii. 
16; Num. xi. 32]; 1 K. iv. 22; v.11; 2 Chr. ii. 10; 
[xxvii. 5].) * 

κοσμέω, -ῶ; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἐκόσμουν; 1 aor. ἐκό- 
σμησα; pf. pass. κεκόσμημαι; (κόσμος) ; 1. to put 
in order, arrange, make ready, prepare: τὰς λαμπάδας, put 
in order [A. V. trim], Mt. xxv. 7 (δόρπον, Hom. Od. 7, 
13; τράπεζαν, Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,6; 6,11; Sept. Ezek. xxiii. 
41 for 31, Sir. xxix. 26; προσφοράν, Sir. 1. 14, and 
other exx. elsewhere). 2. to ornament, adorn, (so 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down; Sept. several times for 


356 


KOT LOS 


7773!) ; prop.: οἶκον, in pass., Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 25; τὰ 
μνημεῖα, to decorate [A.V. garnish], Mt. xxiii. 29 (τάφους, 
Xen. mem. 2, 2,13); τὸ ἱερὸν λίθοις καὶ ἀναθέμασι, in 
pass. Lk. xxi. 5; τοὺς θεμελίους τοὺ τείχους λίθῳ τιμίῳ, 
Rev. xxi. 19; τινά (with garments), νύμφην, pass. Rev. 
xxi. 2; ἑαυτὰς ἔν τινι, 1 Tim. ii. 9 (on this pass. see κατα- 
στολή, 2). metaph. i. 4. to embellish with honor, gain honor, 
(Pind. nem. 6, 78; Thue. 2, 42; κεκοσμ. τῇ ἀρετῇ, Xen. 
Cyr. 8, 1, 21): ἑαυτάς, foll. by a ptep. designating the act 
by which the honor is gained, 1 Pet. iii. 5; τὴν διδα- 
σκαλίαν ἐν πᾶσιν, in all things, Tit. ii. 10.” 

κοσμικός, -7, -ov, (κόσμος), of or belonging to the world 
(Vulg. saecularis) ; i.e. 1. relating to the universe: 
τοὐρανοῦ τοῦδε kal τῶν κοσμικῶν πάντων, Aristot. phys. 2, 
4.190", 25; opp. to ἀνθρώπινος, Leian. paras. 11; κοσμικὴ 
διάταξις, Plut. consol. ad Apoll. ο. 34 p. 119 6. Zi 
earthly: τὸ ἅγιον κοσμικόν, [its] earthly sanctuary [R.V. 
of this world], Heb. ix. 1. 3. worldly, i. e. having 
the character of this (present) corrupt age: αἱ κοσμικαὶ 
ἐπιθυμίαι, Tit. ii. 12; (so also in eccles. writ.).* 

κόσμιος, -ov, of three term. in class. Grk., ef. WH. 
App. Ρ. 157; W.§ 11, 1; [B. 25 (22 sq.)], (κόσμος), 
well-arranged, seemly, modest: 1 Vim. ii. 9[ WH mrg. 
-μίως]; of a man living with decorum, a well-ordered 
life, 1 Tim. iii. 2. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Lys., 
al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii.]* 

[κοσμίως, adv. (decently), fr. κόσμιος, 4. v-: 1 Tim. 11, 
9 Wilmrg. (Arstph., Isocr., al.)*] 

κοσμοκράτωρ, -opos, ὁ, (κόσμος and kparew), lord of the 
world, prince of this age: the devil and demons are called 
in plur. of κοσμοκράτορες τοῦ σκότους τοῦ αἰῶνος [but crit. 
edd. om. τ. αἰῶν.) τούτου [R. V. the world-rulers of this 
darkness |, Eph. vi. 12; cf. 11; Jn. xii. 31; 2 Co. iv. 4; 
see ἄρχων. (The word occurs in Orph. 8,11; 11, 11; 
in 6660]. writ. of Satan; in rabbin. writ. WWIpPINp is used 
both of human rulers ard of the angel of death; οἵ. Buz- 
torf, Lex. talm. et rabb. p. 2006 [p. 996 ed. Fischer].)* 

κόσμος, -ου, ὃ; 1. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, 
an apt and harmonious arrangement or constitution, or- 
der. 2. asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, ornament, 
decoration, adornment: évdicews ἱματίων, 1 Pet. iii. 3 
(Sir. vi. 30; xxi. 21; 2 Mace. ii. 2: Sept. for nay of 
the arrangement of the stars, ‘the heavenly hosts,’ as 
the ornament of the heavens, Gen. ii. 1; Deut. iv. 19; 
xvii. 3; Is. xxiv. 21; xl. 26; besides occasionally for 
“y; twice for NINDA, Prov. xx. 29; Is. iii. 19). 3. 
the world, i. e. the universe (quem κόσμον Graeci nom- 
ine ornamenti appellarunt, eum nos a perfecta absolu- 
taque elegantia mundum, Plin. h. n. 2, 3; in which 
sense Pythagoras is said to have been the first to use the 
word, Plut. de place. philos. 2, 1, 1 p. 886 ¢.; but ace. to 
other accounts he used it of the heavens, Diog. L. 8, 48, 
of which it is used several times also by other Grk. writ. 
[see Menag. on Diog. Laért.l. c.; Bentley, Epp. of Phalar. 
vol. i. 391 (Lond. 1836); M. Anton. 4, 27 and Gataker’s 
notes; ef. L. and S.s.v.1V.]): Acts xvii. 24; Ro. iv. 13 
(where cf. Meyer, Tholuck, Philippi); 1 Co. iii. 22; viii. 
4; Phil. ii. 15; with a predominant notion of space, in 


κόσμος 


hyperbole, Jn. xxi. 25 (Sap. vii. 17; ix. 3; 2 Mace. viii. 
18; κτίζειν τ. κόσμον, Sap. xi. 18; ὁ τοῦ κόσμου κτίστης, 
2 Mace. vii. 23; 4 Mace. v. 25 (24) ;—asense in which 
it does not occur in the other O. T. books, although there 
is something akin to it in Prov. xvii. 6, on which see 8 
below); in the phrases πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι, Jn. xvii. 
5; ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου [ Mt. xiii. 35 RG; xxv. 34; Lk. 
xi. 50; Heb. iv. 3; ix. 26; Rev. xiii. 8; xvii. 8] and πρὸ 
κατ. κόσμου [Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. 1. 4; 1 Pet. i. 20], (on 
which see καταβολή, 2); ἀπὸ κτίσεως κόσμου, Ro. i. 20; 
ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς x. Mt. xxiv. 21; (on the om. of the art. cf. W. 
p- 123 (117); B. § 124, 8 b.; [ef Ellicott on Gal. vi. 
14). 4. the circle of the earth, the earth, (very rarely 
so in Grk. writ. until after the age of the Ptolemies; so 
in Boeckh, Corp. inserr. i. pp. 413 and 643, nos. 334 and 
1306): Mk. xvi.15; [Jn. xii. 25]; 1 Tim. vi. 7; βασιλεία 
τοῦ κόσμου, Rey. xi. 15; βασιλεῖαι (plur.) τ. κόσμου, Mt. iv. 
8 (for which Lk. iv. 5 τῆς οἰκουμένης) ; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου 
τούτου, of the sun, Jn. xi. 9: ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κι, properly, Mt. 
xxvi. 13; hyperbolically, i. q. far and wide, in widely sep- 
arated places, Ro. i. 8; [so ἐν παντὶ τῷ κόσμῳ, Col. i. 6]; 
ὁ τότε κύσμος, 2 Pet. iii. 6; the earth with its inhabitants: 
Ov ἐν xiepw, opp. to the dead, Col. ii. 20 (λῃστὴς ἦν καὶ 
κλέπτης ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, i. 6. among those living on earth, 
Ey. Nicod. 26). By a usage foreign to prof. auth. 5. 
the inhabitants of the world: θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν TO κόσμῳ 
καὶ ἀγγέλοις k. ἀνθρώποις, 1 Co. iv. 9 [W. 127 (121)]; par- 
ticularly the inhabitants of the earth, men, the human race 
(first so in Sap. [e.g.x.1]): Mt. xiii. 38; xviii. 7; Mk. 
xiv. 9; Jn. i. 10, 29, [36 Lin br.]; iii. 16 sq.; vi. 33,51; 
Vili. 263; xii. 47; ΧΗ 1; xiv. 31; xvi. 28; xvii. 6, 21, 23; 
Ro. iii. 6, 19; 1 Co. i. 27 sq. [ef. W. 189 (178) ]; iv. 13; v. 
10; xiv. 10; 2 Co.v. 19; Jas. ii. 5 [ef. W.u.s.]; 1 Jn. ii. 2 
[ef. W. 577 (536) ]; ἀρχαῖος κόσμος, of the antediluvians, 
2 Pet. ii. 5; γεννᾶσθαι εἰς τ. x. Jn. xvi. 21; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν 
κόσμον (Jn. ix. 39) and εἰς τ. x. τοῦτον, to make its appear- 
ance or come into existence among men, spoken of the 
light which in Christ shone upon men, Jn. i. 9; ili. 19, ef. 
xii. 46 ; of the Messiah, Jn. vi. 14; xi. 27; of Jesus as the 
Messiah, Jn. ix. 39; xvi. 283; xviii. 37; 1 Tim. i. 15; also 
εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τ. x. Heb. x. 5; of false teachers, 2 Jn. 
7 (yet here L T Tr WH ἐξέρχ. εἰς τ. x.; [so all texts in 
1 Jn. iv. 1]); to invade, of evils coming into existence 
among men and beginning to exert their power: of sin 
and death, Ro. v. 12 (of death, Sap. ii. 24; Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 3,4; of idolatry, Sap. xiv. 14). ἀποστέλλειν τινὰ 
eis τ. κι, Jn. iii. 175 x. 36; xvii. 18; 1Jn.iv.9; φῶς τ. κ-» 
Mt. v. 14; Jn. viii. 12; ix. 5; σωτὴρ τ. x, Jn. iv. 42; 1 
Jn. iv. 14, (σωτηρία τοῦ x. Sap. vi. 26 (25); ἐλπὶς τ. κ' 
Sap. xiv. 6; πρωτόπλαστος πατὴρ τοῦ x., of Adam, Sap. 
X. 1); στοιχεῖα τοῦ K. (see στοιχεῖον, 3 and 4); ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, 
among men, Jn. xvi. 33; xvii. 18: Eph. 11. 12; ἐν κόσμῳ 
(see W. 123 (117)), 1 Tim. iii. 16; εἶναι ἐν τῷ x., to dwell 
among men, Jn. i. 10; ix. 5; xvii. 11,12 RG; 1 Jn. 
iv. 3; εἶναι ἐν κόσμῳ, to be present, Ro. v. 13; ἐξελθεῖν 
ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, to withdraw from human society and seek 
an abode outside of it, 1 Co. v. 10; ἀναστρέφεσθαι ἐν τῷ 
x., to behave one’s self, 2 Co. i. 12; likewise εἶναι ἐν τῷ 


357 


κόσμος 


k. Toure, 1 Jn. iv. 17. used spec. of the Gentiles collec- 
tively, Ro. xi. 12 (where it alternates with ra ἔθνη), 15; 
[the two in combination: τὰ ἔθνη τοῦ κόσμου, Lk. xii. 
30]. hyperbolically or loosely i. q. the majority of men 
in a place, the multitude or mass (as we say the public): 
Jn. vii. 4; xii. 19 [here Trmrg. adds ὅλος in br.]; xiv. 
19, 22; xviii. 20. 1. 4. the entire number, ἀσεβῶν, 2 Pet. 
11. 5. 6. the ungodly multitude; the whole mass of 
men alienated from God, and therefore hostile to the cause 
of Christ [ef. W. 26]: Jn. vii. 7; xiv. [17], 27; xv. 18 
sq-; xvi. 8, 20, 33; xvii. 9,14 sq. 25; 1 Co.i. 21; vi. 2; 
xi. 32; 2 Co. vii. 10; Jas.i.27; 1 Pet.v. 9; 2 Pet. i. 4; 
ii. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 1,13; iv. 5; v.19; of the aggregate of 
ungodly and wicked men in O. T. times, Heb. xi. 38; in 
Noah’s time, ibid. 7; with οὗτος added, Eph. ii. 2 (on 
which see αἰών, 3); εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ x. and ἐκ τοῦ K. τούτου 
(see εἰμί, V. 3d.), Jn. viii. 23; xv. 19: xvii. 14, 16; 
1 Jn. ἵν. ὃ; λαλεῖν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, to speak in accordance 
with the world’s character and mode of thinking, 1 Jn. 
iv. 5; ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ x. τούτου. i. 6. the devil, Jn. xii. 31; 
xiv. 30; xvi. 11; ὁ ἐν τῷ x. he that is operative in the 
world (also of the devil), 1 Jn. iv. 4 ; τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ x. 
1 Co. ii. 12; ἡ σοφία τοῦ x. τούτου, ibid. i. 20 [here 
GLTTr WH om. rotr.]; iii-19. [τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κό- 
opov, Gal. iv. 3; Col. ii. 8, 20, (see 5 above, and στοι- 
χεῖον, 3 and 4).] 7. worldly affairs; the aggregate 
of things earthly; the whole circle of earthly goods, endow- 
ments, riches, advantages, pleasures, ete., which, although 
hollow and frail and fleeting, stir desire, seduce from God 
and are obstacles to the cause of Christ: Gal. vi. 14; 1 
Jn. ii. 16 sq.; iii. 17; εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ κι» to be of earthly 
origin and nature, Jn. xviii. 36; somewhat differently 
in 1 Jn. ii. 16 (on which see εἰμί, Υ΄. 8 ἃ.) ; κερδαίνειν τὸν 
κ' ὅλον, Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 36; Lk. ix. 25; of χρώμενοι 
τῷ k. τούτῳ [crit. txt. τὸν κόσμον ; see xpdopat, 2], 1 Co. 
Vii. 31°; μεριμνᾶν τὰ τοῦ K. 33 sq.; φίλος and φιλία τοῦ x. 
Jas. iv. 4; ἀγαπᾶν τὸν x. 1 Jn. ii. 15; νικᾶν τὸν κι, the in- 
centives to sin proceeding from the world, 1 Jn. v. 4 sq.; 
the obstacles to God’s cause, Jn. xvi. 33; [ef. ἐλθέτω χάρις 
k. παρελθέτω ὁ κόσμος οὗτος, Teaching of the Twelve 
Apostles, ο. 10]. 8. any aggregate or general col- 
lection of particulars of any sort [cf. Eng. “a world of 
curses ” (Shakspere), ete.]: ὁ κόσμος τῆς ἀδικίας, the sum 
of all iniquities, Jas. iii. 6 ; rod πιστοῦ ὅλυς ὁ κόσμος τῶν 
χρημάτων, τοῦ δὲ ἀπίστου οὐδὲ ὀβολός (a statement due 
to the Alex. translator), Prov. xvii. θ. Among the N. T. 
writers no one uses κόσμος oftener than John; it occurs 
in Mark three times, in Luke’s writings four times. and 
in the Apocalypse three times. Cf. Kreiss, Sur le sens 
du mot κόσμος dans le N. T. (Strasb. 1837); Diisterdieck 
on 1 Jn. ii. 15, pp. 247-259; Zezschwitz, Profangriicitiit 
τ. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 21 sqq.; Diestel in Herzog xvii. 
p- 676 sqq.; [ Trench, Syn. § lix.]; on John’s use of the 
word cf. Reuss, Histoire de la théologie chrétienne au 
siécle apostolique, ii. p. 463 sqq. [i.e. livre vii. ch. viii.]; 
cf. his Johanneische Theologie, in the Beitrige zu den 
theol. Wissenschaften, Fase. i. p. 29 sqq.; [Westcott on 
Jn. i. 10, ‘ Additional Note’].* 


Κούαρτος 


ἸΚούαρτος, -ου, 6, (a Lat. name), Quartus, an unknown 
Christian: Ro. xvi. 23.* 

κοῦμι, Tr txt. κοῦμ, T WH κούμ, (the Hebr. 33) [impv. 
fem.; the other (masc.) form must be regarded as hav- 
ing become an interjection }), arise: Mk. v. 41." 

κουστωδία, -ας [B. 17 (16) ], ἡ, (a Lat. word), guard: 
used of the Roman soldiers guarding the sepulchre of 
Christ, Mt. xxvii. 65 sq.; xxviii. 11. (Ev. Nic. ¢. 13.) * 

κουφίζω : impf.3 pers. plur. ἐκούφιζον ; (κοῦφος light) ; 
1. intrans. fo be light (Hes., Eur., Dio C.). 2: ἯΣ 
Hippocr. down generally trans. to lighten: a ship, by 
throwing the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii. 38. (Sept. 
Jonah i. 5, and often in Polyb.)* 

κόφινος, -ov, 6, α basket, wicker basket, [cf. B. D. s. v. 
Basket]: Mt. xiv. 20; [xvi. 9]; Mk. vi. 43; [vili. 19]; 
Lk. ix.17; Jn. vi. 18. (Judg. vi. 19; Ps. Ixxx. (Ixxxi.) 
7; Arstph. av. 1310; Xen. mem. 3, 8, 6; al.) * 

κράββατος (LT Tr WH xpaSarros; cod. Sin. κράβακτος 
[exe. in Acts v. 15; ef. KC. Noy. Test. ad Πα. cod. Vat. 
praef. p. lxxxi.sq.; Tdf Proleg. p. 807), -ov, 6, (Lat. 
grabatus), a pallet, camp bed, (a rather mean bed, hold- 
ing only one person, called by the Greeks σκίμπους, 
σκιμπόδιον) : Mk. ii. 4, 9, 11 sq.; vi. 55; Jn. v. 8-12 [in 
12 T WH om. Tr br. the el.]; Acts v.15; ix. 33. Cf. 
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 175 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 62; Volkmar, Marcus τι. d. Synopse u.s.w. p. 131; 
[McClellan, New Testament ete. p. 106; W. 25].* 

κράζω (with a long; hence ptep. κρᾶζον, Gal. iv. 6 L T 
Tr WH [(where RG κράζον); cf. Β. 61 (53)]); impf. éxpa- 
(ov; fut. κεκράξομαι (Lk. xix. 40 RGLTr mrg.), and 
κράξω (ibid. T WH Trtxt.), the former being more com. 
in Grk. writ. and used by the Sept. (ef. Mie. iii. 4; Job 
xxxv. 12, ete. [but ἀνα-κράξομαι;, Joel iii. 16 Alex.; ef. W. 
279 (262); esp. B. as below]); 1 aor. ἔκραξα (once viz. 
Acts xxiv. 21 TTr WH ἐκέκραξα, a reduplicated form 
freq. in Sept. [e. g. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6; Judg. iii. 15, 1 
Mace. xi. 49, ete.; see Veitch s. v.]; more com. in native 
Grk. writ. is 2 aor. €kpayov[“ the sim ple ἔκραγον seems 
not to occur in good Attic” (Veitch s. v.)]); pf. kexpaya, 
with pres. force [W. 274 (258)] (Jn. i. 15); cf. Bitm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 223; B.61 (53); Kiihner i. p. 851; [esp. 
Veitch 5. v.]; Sept. for pst, PLY, NIP, paw; [fr. Aes- 
chyl. down]; 1. prop. [onomatopoetic] fo croak 
(Germ. kréichzen), of the ery of the raven (Theophr.) ; 
hence univ. fo ery out, ery aloud, vociferate : particularly 
of inarticulate cries, Mk. v. 5; ix. 26; xv. 39 [here T 
WH om. Tr br. xp.]; Lk. ix. 39; Rev. xii. 2; ἀπὸ τοῦ 
φόβου, Mt. xiv. 26; with φωνῇ μεγάλῃ added, Mt. xxvii. 
50; Mk. i. 26 {here T Tr WH povncay | ; Acts vii. 57; 
Rev. x. 3; ὄπισθέν τινος, to cry after one, follow him up 
with outcries, Mt. xv. 23; like Dyt and pyy (Gen. iv. 
10; xviii. 20), i. q. to cry or pray for vengeance, Jas. v. 
4. 2. ἰο cry 1. 6. call out aloud, speak with a loud voice, 
[Germ. laut rufen]: ri, Acts xix. 32; xxiv. 21; foll. by 
direct discourse, Mk. x. 48; xv.14; Lk. xviii. 39; Jn. 
xii. 13 RG; Acts xix. 34; xxi. 28, 36; xxiii. 6; with 
the addition φωνῇ μεγάλῃ foll. by direct dise., Mk. v. 7; 
Acts vii. 60; ἐν φωνῆ pey. Rey. xiv. 15; κράζω λέγων, to 


358 


κραταιόω 


ery out saying, ete., Mt. viii. 29; χῖν. 80; [xv. 22 (where 
RG éxpavyacev) ]; xx. 30 sq.; xxi. 9; xxvii. 23; Mk. iii. 
11; xi. 9 [Ὁ Tr WHom. Ubr. Aéy.]; Jn. xix. 12 [here 
LT Tr WH expavy.]; Acts xvi. 17; xix. 28; Rev. xviii. 
18; κράζω φωνῆ μεγάλῃ λέγων, Rev. vi. 10; vii. 10; xix. 
17 [here TT WH br. add ἐν]; κράξας ἔλεγε, Mk. ix. 24; 
κράζειν x. λέγειν, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x.47; Lk. iv. 
41 RGTrtxt. WH; Acts xiv. 14; of those who utter or 
teach a thing publicly and soiemnly, Ro. ix. 27; κέκραγε 
and ἔκραξε λέγων, foll. by direct dise., Jn. 1. 15; vii. 375 
ἔκραξε διδάσκων k. λέγων, In. vii. 28; ἔκραξε x. εἶπεν, In. 
xii. 44; of those who offer earnest, importunate, prayers 
to God, foll. by direct disc., Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6, (often 
so in O. T., as Job xxxv. 12; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 7; 
commonly with πρὸς κύριον, πρὸς τὸν θεόν added, Judg. 
x. 12 [Alex.]; Ps. iii. 5; evi. (evii.) 18, ete.). τινί, to 
ery or call to: Rev. vii. 2; xiv. 15, (ef. Ps. exviii. (exix.) 
145; ἕτερος πρὸς ἕτερον, Is. vi. 3). [Comp.: ἀνα-κράζω. 
Syn. see Boda, fin.]* 

κραιπάλη [ WH κρεπάλη, see their App. p. 151], -ns, ἣν 
(fr. KPA® the head, and πάλλω to toss about; so ex- 
plained by Galen and Clem. Alex. Paedag. 2, 2, 26 and 
Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. p. 45, 13 [ef. Vanicek p. 148]), 
Lat. crapula (i. e. the giddiness and headache caused by 
drinking wine to excess): Lk. xxi. 34 [A. V. surfeiting ; 
ef. Trench § lxi.J. (Arstph. Acharn. 277; Alciphr. 3, 
24; Plut. mor. p. 127 f. [de sanitate 11]; Leian., Hdian. 
9, 5,1.)" , 

κρανίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of the noun κρᾶνον [i. 6. κάρα; 
Curtius § 387), @ skull (Vulg. calvaria): Mt. xxvii. 33; 
Mk. xv. 22; Lk. xxiii. 83; Jn. xix. 17; see Γολγοθά. 
(Judg. ix. 53; 2 K. ix. 35; Hom. Il. 8, 84; Pind., Eur., 
Plat., Leian., Hdian.) * 

κράσπεδον, -ov, τύ, in class. Grk. the extremity or promi- 
nent part of a thing, edge, skirt, margin; the fringe of a 
garment; in the N. T. for Hebr. ΠΥ, i. 6. α little ap- 
pendage hanging down from the edge of the mantle or 
cloak, made of twisted wool; α tassel, tuft: Mt. ix. 20; 
xiv. 86; xxiii. 5; Mk. vi. 56; Lk. viii. 44. The Jews 
had such appendages attached to their mantles to remind 
them of the law, ace. to Num. xv. 37 sq. Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Saum; [B.D.s. v. Hem of Garment; Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 624; esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto 
s. v. Fringes ].* 

κραταιός, -d, -όν, (κράτος), Sept. mostly for pin, mighty: 
ἡ κρ. χεὶρ τοῦ θεοῦ, i. 6. the power of God, 1 Pet. v. 6; 
τοῦ κυρίου, Bar. ii. 11; 1 Esdr. viii. 46 (47), 60 (61), and 
often in Sept. (In earlier Grk. only poetic [Hom., al.] 
for the more com. κρατερός ; but later, used in prose also 
[Plut., al.].)* 

κραταιόω, -@: Pass., pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. κραταιοῦσθε 
impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐκραταιοῦτο; 1 aor. inf. κραταιωθῆναι ; 
(κράτος) ; only bibl. and eccles., for the classic κρατύνω ; 
Sept. mostly for pin; in pass. several times for yD8; to 
strengthen, make strong, (Vulg. conforto [and in Eph. 
iii. 16 conroboro]); Pass. to be made strong, to increase 
in strength, to grow strong: pass. with dat. of respect, 
πνεύματι, Lk. i. 80; ii. 40 [here GLT Tr WH om. mre 


κρατέω 


part]; δυνάμει, Eph. iii. 16, (cf. ἰσχύειν τοῖς σώμασι, Xen. 
mem. 2, 7, 7); ἀνδρίζεσθε, κραταιοῦσθε, i. 6. show your- 
selves brave [A. V. be strong], 1 Co. xvi. 13 (ἀνδρίζεσθε 
«. κραταιούσθω ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν, Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 25; κρα- 
ταιοῦσθε κ. γίνεσθε εἰς ἄνδρας, 1 S. iv. 9; ἀνδρίζου k. κρα- 
ταιωθῶμεν, 2 S. x. 12).* 

kparéw; impf. 2 pers. plur. éxpareire, Mk. xiv. 49 Tr 
mrg. WH mrg.; fut. κρατήσω; 1 aor. ἐκράτησα; pf. inf. 
κεκρατηκέναι; Pass., pres. «parodpar; impf. ἐκρατούμην:; 
pf. 3 pers. plur. κεκράτηνται; (κράτος [q- v-]); Sept. 
chiefly for pin, also for {πὲ (to seize), etc.; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. to have power, be powerful; to be chief, 
be master of, to rule: absol. for 172, Esth. i. 1; 1 Esdr. 
iv. 38; ὁ κρατῶν, Sap. xiv. 19; οἱ κρατοῦντες, 2 Mace. iv. 
50; τινός, to be ruler of one, Prov. xvi. 32; xvil. 2, (for 
own); Sap. iii. 8; never sé in the N. T. 2. to get 
possession of; 1. e. a. to become master of, to obtain: 
τῆς προθέσεως, Acts xxvii. 13 [(Diod. Sic. 16, 20; al.) cf. 
B. 161 (140); on the tense, W. 334 (313) ]. b. to take 
hold of: τῆς χειρός twos [cf. W. § 30, 8d.; B.u.s.], Mt. 
ix. 25; Mk. i. 31; v.41; ix. 27 LT Tr WH; Lk. viii. 
54; τινὰ τῆς χειρός, to take one by the hand, Mk. ix. 27 
RG, cf. Matthiae § 331; τινά, to hold one fast in order 
not to be sent away, Acts iii. 11, cf. Meyer ad loc.; τοὺς 
πόδας τινός, to embrace one’s knees, Mt. xxviii. 9; trop. 
τὸν λόγον, to lay hold of mentally [ef. our ‘catch at’; but 
al. refer this ex. to 3 b. below], Mk. ix. 10 (join πρὸς 
ἑαυτούς with συζητοῦντες). ec. to lay hold of, take, 
seize: τινά, to lay hands on one in order to get him into 
one’s power, Mt. xiv. 3; xviii. 28; xxi. 46; xxii. 6; xxvi. 
4, 48, 50, 55, 57; Mk. iii. 21; vi.17; xii. 12; xiv. 1, 44, 
46, 49, 51; Acts xxiv. 6; Rev. xx. 2, (2S. vi. 6; Ps. 
CXXXxvi. (exxxvii.) 9); τί, Mt. xii. 11. 3. to hold; 
1:16: a. to hold in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ, Rev. ii. 1 
(τῇ ἀριστερᾷ τὸν ἄρτον, Plut. mor. p. 99 d.). b. to 
hold fast, i. e. trop. not to discard or let go; to keep care- 
fully and faithfully: ὃ ἔχετε, ἔχεις, Rev. ii. 25; iii. 11; τὸ 
ὄνομά pov, Rey. ii. 13; one’s authority, τὴν κεφαλήν, i. e. 
ἐκεῖνον ὅς ἐστιν ἡ κεφαλή, Christ, Col. ii. 19; τὴν παρά- 
δοσιν, Mk. vii. 3 54. 8; τὰς παραδόσεις, 2 Th. ii. 15: τὴν 
διδαχήν, Rev. ii. 14 sq.; also with a gen. of the thing, of 
blessings in which different individuals are participants: 
τῆς ὁμολογίας, Heb. iv. 14; τῆς ἐλπίδος, Heb. vi. 18 [al. 
refer this ex. to 2 above], (cf. 2S. iii. 6). c. to con- 
tinue to hold, to retain: of death continuing to hold one, 
pass. Acts ii. 24; τὰς ἁμαρτίας (opp. to ἀφίημι), to re- 
tain sins, i. e. not to remit, Jn. xx. 23; to hold in check, 
restrain: foll. by iva μή, Rev. vii. 1; by τοῦ μή [W. 325 
(305); B. § 140, 16 8.], Lk. xxiv. 16. On the constr. 
of this verb with gen. and ace. cf. Matthiae § 359 sq.; 
W. 8 30, 8 d.; B. 161 (140).* 

κράτιστος, -7, -ov, superl. of the adj. κρατύς, (xpdros), 
[fr. (Hom.) Pind. down], mightiest, strongest, noblest, most 
illustrious, best, most excellent: voc. κράτιστε used in ad- 
dressing men of conspicuous rank or office, Acts xxiii. 
26; xxiv. 3; xxvi. 25, (Otto, De ep. ad Diognetum ete. 
Jena 1845, p. 79 sqq., and in his Epist. ad Diognet. 
Leips. ed. p. 53 sq., has brought together exx. fr. later 


859 


κρεμάννυμι 


writ.). Perhaps also it served simply to express friend- 
ship in Lk. i. 3 (as in Theophr. char. 5; Dion. Hal. de 
oratt. 1; Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 8), because in Acts i. 1 it is 
omitted in addressing the same person. Cf. Grimm in 
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p.50 sq.* 

κράτος, -eos (τους), [fr. a root meaning ‘to perfect, 
complete’ (Curtius § 72); fr. Hom. down], τό, Hebr. 
WD 1. force, strength. 2. power, might: τὸ 
κράτος τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ, the might of his strength, Eph. 
1.19; vi. 10; τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ, Col. 1.11; κατὰ κράτος, 
mightily, with great power, ηὔξανε, Acts xix. 20; meton.; 
a mighty deed, a work of power: ποιεῖν xp. (cf. ποιεῖν δυνά- 
pets), Lk. i. 51. 3. dominion: in the doxologies, 
1 Tim. vi. 16; 1 Pet.iv.11; v.11; Jude 25; Rev.i.6; 
v.13; τινός (gen. of obj.), Heb. ii. 14 (τὸ Περσέων κράτος 
ἔχοντα, Hdt. 3, 69). [Sy¥N. see δύναμις, fin.] * 

kpavyd{w; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐκραύγαζον ; fut. κραυ- 
yao; 1 aor. ἐκραύγασα; (κραυγή); to cry out, cry aloud, 
(i. ᾳ. κράζω [see Bodw, fin., and below]): Mt. xii. 19; 
Acts xxii. 23; to shout, foll. by direct dise., Jn. xix. 15 
and L T Tr WH in xii. 13; with λέγων added, to cry out 
in these words, foll. by direct dise.: Jn. xviii. 40; xix. 6 
(where Tom. λέγοντες), and LT Tr WH also in 12; 
κραυγάζειν x. λέγειν, Lk. iv. 41 LT Trmrg.; κραυγάζ. 
φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, foll. by direct disc., Jn. xi. 43. τινί, to cry 
out to, call to, one (see κράζω, 2 and fin.), foll. by direct dise. 
Mt. xv. 22 RG. The word is rare in Grk. writ.: Dem. 
p- 1258, 26; of the shouts in the theatres, Epict. diss. 3, 
4,4; of araven, ib. 3, 1,37; Galen, al.; first in a poetic 
fraom. in Plat. rep. 10 p. 607 b.; once in the O. T. viz. 
2 Esdr. iii. 138. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 337.* 

κραυγή, -ῆς, ἡ, [cf. κράζω ; on its class. use see Schmidt, 
Syn. i. ch. 3 § 4; fr. Eur. down]. Sept. for MPMI, MPLS, 
TW, NPA, ete.; a crying, outcry, clamor: Mt. xxv. 
6; Lk.i.42 TWH Trtxt.; Acts xxiii. 9; Eph. iv. 31, 
and RG in Rev. xiv. 18; of the wailing of those in dis- 
tress, Heb. v. 7; Rey. xxi. 4.* 

κρέας, τό, [cf. Lat. caro, cruor; Curtius § 74], plur. κρέα 
(cf. W. 65 (68); [B. 15 (13)]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. 
very often for W3; (the) flesh (of a sacrificed animal) : 
Ro. xiv. 21; 1 Co. viii. 13.* 

κρείττων and (1 Co. vii. 38; Phil. i. 23; in other places 
the reading varies between the two forms, esp. in 1 Co. 
vii. 9 [here T Tr WH Ltxt. -+rr-]; xi. 17; Heb. vi. 9 
[here and in the preced. pass. LT Tr WH -σσ-; see 
WH. App. p. 148 sq.; ef. 5, 0, s]) κρείσσων, -ovos, neut. 
τον, (compar. of κρατύς, see κράτιστος, cf. Kiihner i. p. 436; 
[B. 27 (24)]), [fr. Hom. down], better; 1. e. a. more 
useful, more serviceable: 1 Co. xi. 17; xii. 31 RG; Heb. 
xi. 40; xii. 24; with πολλῷ μᾶλλον added, Phil. i. 23 [cf. 
μᾶλλον, 1 b.]; κρεῖσσον (adv.) ποιεῖν, 1 Co. vii. 38; κρεῖτ- 
τόν ἐστιν, it is more advantageous, foll. by an inf., 1 Co. vii. 
9; 2 Pet. ii. 21, [cf. B. 217 (188); W. § 41 ἃ. 2a]. b. 
more excellent: Heb. i. 4; vi. 9; vii. 7, 19, 223; viii. 6; 
ix. 23; x. 34; xi. 16,35; xp. ἐστι, foll. by an inf., 1 Pet. 
iii. 17.* 

κρέμαμαι, see the foll. word. 

κρεμάννυμι, also κρεμαννύω [ “scarcely classic” (Veitch 


κρεπάλη 


8. ν.}7, κρεμάω -ὦ [still later” (ibid.)], and (Sept. Job 
xxvi. 7 and Byzant. writ.) κρεμάζω, (in the N. T. the 
pres. does not occur): 1 aor. ἐκρέμασα; 1 aor. pass. ἐκρε- 
μάσθην; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 19m; to hang up, 
suspend: τὶ ἐπί τι (Ree.), περί τι (LT Tr WH), [εἴς τι, 
Taf. edd. 2, 7), Mt. xviii. 6; τινὰ ἐπὶ ξύλου, Acts v. 30; 
x. 39, (Gen. x1. 19, 22; Deut. xxi. 22; Esth. vi. 4, ete.) ; 
simply κρεμασθείς, of one crucified, Lk. xxiii. 39. Mid. 
κρέμαμαι (for κρεμάννυμαι, cf. Biim. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 224); 
intrans. to be suspended, to hang: foll. by ἐκ with gen. of 
the thing, Acts xxviii. 4 (see ἐκ, I. 3); ἐπὶ ξύλον, of one 
hanging on a cross, Gal. iii. 13; trop. ἔν τινι, Mt. xxii. 
40, where the meaning is, all tue Law and the Prophets 
(i. e. the teaching of the O. T. on morality) is summed 
up in these two precepts. [CoMmp.: ἐκ-κρέμαμαι.} " 

[κρεπάλη, see κραιπάλη.] 

κρημνός, -ov, 6, (fr. κρεμάννυμι), a steep (place), a preci- 
pice: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v.13; Lk. viii. 88. (2 Chr. xxv. 
12; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

Kpjs, 5, plur. Κρῆτες, a Cretan, an inhabitant of the 
island of Crete: Acts ii. 11; Tit. i. 12 [cf. Farrar, St. 
Paul, ii. 6841." 

Κρήσκης [ef. B. 17 (15)], 6, Lat. Crescens, an un- 
known man: 2 Tim. iv. 10.* 

ἸΚρήτη, -ης, ἡ, Crete, the largest and most fertile island 
of the Mediterranean archipelago or ASgean Sea, now 
called Candia: Acts xxvii. 7,12 sq. 21; Tit.i.5. [Dict. 
of Geog. or McC. and S. s. v.]* 

κριθή, -ῆς, ἡ, (in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] only in 
plur. ai κριθαί), Sept. for NAY, barley: Rev. vi. 6 κριθῆς 
RG, κριθῶν LT Tr WH.* 

κρίθινος, -n, -ov, (κριθή). of barley, made of barley: ἄρτοι 
(2K. iv. 42, ef. Judg. vii. 13), Jn. vi. 9,13. [(Hippon., al.)]* 

κρίμα [ἃ TWH] or κρῖμα [L Tr (more commonly) ] 
(on the accent οἵ. W. p. 50; Lipsius, Grammat. Unter- 
such. p. 40 sq. [who gives the preference to κρίμα, as do 
Bttm. 73 (64); Cobet (N. T. ad fid. ete. p. 49 sq.); 
Fritzsche (Rom. vol. i. 96,107); al.; “videtur ζ antiquitati 
Graecae, i Alexandrinae aetati placuisse,” ΤᾺ Proleg. 
to Sept.ed. 4 p. xxx.; on the accent in extant codd. see 
Tif. Proleg. p.101; ef. esp. Lobeck, Paralip. p. 418]),-ros, 
τό, (fr. κρίνω, 4. ν.; a8 κλίμα fr. κλίνω), [ Aeschyl. down], 
Sept. very often for yaw; 1. adecree: plur., rod 
θεοῦ, Ro. xi. 33 [4]. here (with A. V.) judgments; cf. 
Weiss in Meyer ad loc.] (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 75). 2. 
judgment; i. 6. condemnation of wrong, the decision 
(whether severe or mild) which one passes on the faults 
of others: κρίματί τινι κρίνειν, Mt. vii. 2. In a forensic 
sense, the sentence of a judge: with a gen. of the pun- 
ishment to which one is sentenced, θανάτου, Lk. xxiv. 
20; esp. the sentence of God as judge: τὸ kpiua... εἰς 
κατάκριμα, the judgement (in which God declared sin to 
be punishable with death) issued in condemnation, i. e. 
was condemnation to all who sinned and therefore paid 
the penalty of death Ro. v. 16; esp. where the justice 
of God in punishing is to be shown, κρίμα denotes 
condemnatory sentence, penal judgment, sentence, 2 Pet. 
ii. 8: Jude 4; with gen. of the one who pronounces 


360 


κρίνα 


judgment, τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. ii. Σ sq.; λαμβάνεσθαι κρίμα, Mt. 
xxiii. 13 (14) Ree.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; Ro. xiii. 
2; Jas. iii. 1; the one on whom God passes judgment is 
said ἔχειν κρίμα, 1 Tim. v.12; βαστάζειν τὸ κρίμα, to bear 
the force of the condemnatory judgment in suffering 
punishment (see βαστάζω, 2), Gal. v. 10; κρίμα ἐσθίειν 
ἑαυτῷ, so to eat as to incur the judgment or punishment 
of God, 1 Co. xi. 29; εἰς κρίμα συνέρχεσθαι, to incur the 
condemnation of God, 343 εἶναι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι, to lie 
under the same condemnation, pay the same penalty, 
Lk. xxiii. 40; with gen. of the one on whom condemna- 
tion is passed, Ro. iii. 8; 1 Tim. iii. 6; Rev. xvii. 1. the 
Judgment which is formed or passed: by God, through 
what Christ accomplished on earth, εἰς κρίμα ἐγὼ els τ΄ 
κόσμον τοῦτον ἦλθον, where by way of explanation is added 
ἵνα κτλ. to this end, that ete. Jn. ix. 39; τὸ κρίμα ἄρχεται, 
the execution of judgment as displayed in the infliction 
of punishment, 1 Pet. iv. 17; the last or final judgment 
is called τὸ xp. τὸ μέλλον, Acts xxiv. 25; xp. αἰώνιον, eter- 
nally in force, Heb. vi. 2; the vindication of one’s right, 
κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα τινὸς ἔκ Twos, to vindicate one’s right by 
taking vengeance or inflicting punishment on another, 
Rey. xviii. 20 ([R. V. God hath judged your judgment on 
her], see ἔκ, I. 7); i. q. the power and business of judging: 
kp. διδόναι τινί, Rev. xx. 4. 3. a matter to be judi- 
cially decided, a lawsuit, @ case in court: κρίματα ἔχειν 
μετά τινος, 1 Co. vi. 7." 

κρίνον, -ov, τό, α lily: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27. 
Hat. down. ]* 

κρίνω; fut. κρινῶ; 1 aor. ἔκρινα; pf. κέκρικα; 3 pers. 
sing. plupf., without augm. (W. § 12, 9; [B. 33 (29)]), κε- 
κρίκει (Acts xx. 16 G@LTTrWH); Pass., pres. κρίνομαι; 
impf. ἐκρινόμην ; pf. κέκριμαι; 1 aor. ἐκρίθην [ef. B. 52 
(45)]; 1 fut. κριθήσομαι; Sept. for vDw, and also for 
pt and 3°; Lat. cerno, i. 6. 1. to separate, put 
asunder; to pick out, select, choose, (Hom., Hat., AeschyL, 
Soph., Xen., Plat., al.; μετὰ νεανίσκων ἀρίστων κεκριμένων 
[chosen, picked], 2 Mace. xiii. 15; κεκριμένοι ἄρχοντες, 
Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 10); hence 2. to approve, es- 
teem: ἡμέραν map’ ἡμέραν, one day above another, i. e. 
to prefer [see παρά, III. 2 b.], Ro. xiv. 5 (so rt πρό τινος, 
Plat. Phil. p. 57 e.; τὸν ᾿Απόλλω πρὸ Μαρσύου, rep. 3 p. 
399 e.); πᾶσαν jp. to esteem every day, i. e. hold it 
sacred, ibid. 3. to be of opinion, deem, think: ὀρθῶς 
ἔκρινας, thou hast decided (judged) correctly, Lk. vii. 43 ; 
foll. by an inf. Acts xv. 19; foll. by a direct quest. 1 
Co. xi. 13; τοῦτο, ὅτι ete. to be of opinion ete. 2 Co. v. 
14; foll. by the ace. with inf. Acts xvi. 15; τινά or τί 
foll. by a predicate ace., κρίνειν τινὰ ἄξιόν twos, to judge 
one (to be) worthy of a thing, Acts xiii. 465; ἄπιστον 
κρίνεται, Acts xxvi. 8. 4. to determine, resolve, de- 
cree: τί, 1 Co. vii. 87 (kpivai τι καὶ προθέσθαι, Polyb. 8, 
6, 7; τὸ κριθέν, which one has determined on, one’s re- 
solve, 5, 52, 63 9, 13, 73; τοῖς κριθεῖσι ἐμμένειν δεῖ, Epict. 
diss. 2, 15, 7 5646.) ; δόγματα, pass. [the decrees that had 
been ordained (cf. A. V.)], Acts xvi. 4; τοῦτο κρίνατε, 
foll. by an inf. preceded by the art. τό, Ro. xiv. 13; also 
with ἐμαυτῷ added, for myself i. 6. for my own benefit 


[From 


κρίνω 


361 


κρίσις 


(lest I should prepare grief for myself by being com- | of pers.], Rom. iii. 7; ἐκ τοῦ στόματός σου κρινῶ ce, out 


pelled to grieve you), 2 Co. ii. 1; foll. by an inf., Acts xx. 
16; xxv. 25; 1 Co. ii. 2 GL TTr WH [(see below) ]; 
v. 3; Tit. iii. 12, (1 Mace. xi. 33; 3 Mace. i. 6; vi. 30; 
Judith xi. 13; Sap. viii. 9; Diod. 17, 95; Joseph. antt. 
7, 1,5; 12,10, 4; 13, 6,1); with rod prefixed, 1 Co. ii. 
2 Rec. [(see above) ]; foll. by the ace. with inf. Acts xxi. 
25 (2 Mace. xi. 36); with τοῦ prefixed, Acts xxvii. 1 [ef. 
B. § 140, 16 8.]; (kpiverat τινι, it is one’s pleasure, it seems 
good to one, 1 Esdr. vi. 20 (21) sq.; viii. 90 (92)). 5" 
to judge; a. to pronounce an opinion concerning right 
and wrong; a. in a forensic sense [(differing from 
δικάζειν, the official term, in giving prominence to the 
intellectual process, the sifting and weighing of evi- 
dence) ], of a human judge: τινά, to give a decision re- 
specting one, Jn. vii. 51; κατὰ τὸν νόμον, Jn. xviii. 31; 
Acts xxiii. 3; xxiv. 6 Rec.; the substance of the de- 
cision is added in an inf., Acts iii. 13; pass. to be judged, 
i. e. summoned to trial that one’s case may be examined 
and judgment passed upon it, Acts xxv. 10; xxvi. 6; 
Ro. iii. 4 (fr. Ps. 1. (li.) 6 (4)); περί w. gen. of the thing, 
Acts xxiii. 6; xxiv. 21; [xxv. 20]; with addition of ἐπί 
and the gen. of the judge, before one, Actsxxv.9. Where 
the context requires, used of a condemnatory judgment, 
i. q- to condemn: simply, Acts xiii. 27. β. of the judg- 
mentof God or of Jesus the Messiah, deciding between the 
righteousness and the unrighteousness of men: absol., Jn. 
v. 30; viii. 50; δικαίως, 1 Pet. ii. 23; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, Rev. 
xix. 11; τινά, 1 Co. v.13; pass. Jas. ii. 12; ζῶντας x. νεκρούς, 
2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv.5; νεκρούς, pass., Rev. xi. 18 [B. 
260 (224)]; τὴν οἰκουμένην, the inhabitants of the world, 
Acts xvii. 31 [ef. W. 389 (364) ]; τὸν κόσμον, Ro. iii. 6; 
τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Ro. ii. 16 ; κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα τινὸς 
ἔκ twos (see κρίμα, 2 sub fin.), Rev. xviii. 20, ef. vi. 10; 
κρίνειν κατὰ τὸ ἑκάστου ἔργον, 1 Pet. i. 17; τοὺς νεκροὺς 


> = , > Α , . ow vale 
ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμενων ἐν τοις βιβλίοις κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν, 


pass., Rey. xx. 12 sq.; with ace. of the substance of the 
judgment, thou didst pronounce this judgment, ταῦτα 


éxpwas, Rev. xvi. 5; contextually, used specifically of 


the act of condemning and decreeing (or inflicting) pen- 
alty on one: τινά, Jn. iii. 18; ν. 22; xii. 47 sq.; Acts 
vii. 7; Ro. ii. 12; 1 Co. xi. 31 sq.; 2 Th. ii. 12; Heb. 
x. 30; xiii. 4; 1 Pet. iv. 6 [cf. W. 630 (585)]; Jas. v. 
9 (where Ree. xataxp.) ; Rev. xviii. 8; xix. 2, (Sap. xii. 
10, 22); τὸν κόσμον, opp. to σώζειν, Jn. iii. 17; xii. 47; 
of the devil it is said 6 ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται, 
because the victorious cause of Christ has rendered the 
supreme wickedness of Satan evident to all, and put 
an end to his power to dominate and destroy, Jn. xvi. 
11. y- of Christians as hereafter to sit with Christ 
at the judgment: τὸν κόσμον, 1 Co. vi. 2; ἀγγέλους, ib. 
3 [cf. ἄγγελος, 2 sub fin.; yet see Meyer ed. Heinrici ad 
IL. ee.]. b. to pronounce judgment ; to subject to cen- 
sure; of those who act the part of judges or arbiters in 
the matters of common life, or pass judgment on the 
deeds and words of others: univ. and without case, Jn. 
viii. 16, 26; κατά τι, Jn. viii. 15; κατ᾽ ὄψιν, Jn. vii. 24; 
ἐν κρίματί τινι κρίνειν, Mt. vii. 2; τινά, pass. [with nom. 


of thine own mouth (i. e. from what thou hast just said) 
will I take the judgment that must be passed on thee, 
Lk. xix. 22; τί, 1 Co. x. 15; pass. ib. 29; τὸ δίκαιον, Lk. 
xii. 57; foll. by ei, whether, Acts iv. 19; with acc. of the 
substance of the judgment: τί i. 6. κρίσιν τινά, 1 Co. iv. 
5; κρίσιν κρίνειν (Plat. rep. 2 p. 360 ἃ.) δικαίαν [ef. B. 
§ 131, 5], Jn. vii. 24 (ἀληθινὴν x. δικαίαν, Tob. iii. 2; 
κρίσεις ἀδίκους, Sus. 53); of the disciplinary judgment 
to which Christians subject the conduct of their fellows, 
passing censure upon them as the facts require, 1 Co. v. 
12; of those who judge severely (unfairly), finding fault 
with this or that in others, Mt. vii. 1; Lk. vi. 37; Ro. 
ii. 1; τινά, Ro. ii. 1, 3; xiv. 3 sq. 10,13; foll. by ἐν with 
dat. of the thing, Col. ii. 16; Ro. xiv. 22; hence i. q. to 
condemn: Ro. ii. 27; Jas. iv. 11 sq. 6. Hebraisti- 
cally i. q. to rule, govern; to preside over with the power of 
giving judicial decisions, because it was the prerogative 
of kings and rulers to pass judgment: Mt. xix. 28; Lk. 
xxii. 30, (τὸν λαόν, 2 K. xv. ὃ; 1 Mace. ix. 73; Joseph. 
antt. 5, 8, 8; οἱ κρίνοντες τ. γην, Ps. ii. 10; Sap. 1. 1; 
cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1463 sq.). 7. Pass. and 
mid. to contend together, of warriors and combatants 
(Hom., Diod., al.); to dispute (Hdt. 3,120; Arstph. nub. 
66); in a forensic sense, to go to law, have a suit at law: 
with dat. of the pers. with whom [W. § 31, 1 g.], Mt. v. 
40 (Job ix. 3; xiii. 19; Eur. Med. 609); foll. by pera 
with gen. of the pers. with whom one goes to law, and 
ἐπί with gen. of the judge, 1 Co. vi. (1), 6. [Comp.: 
dva-, ἀπο-, avt-atro- (-μαι), δια-, ev, ἐπι-, κατα-, cur, ὑπο- 
(μαι), συν- ὑπο-(-μαι). * 

κρίσις, -ews, 7, Sept. for 11, 32) (a suit), but chiefly 
for τ: in Grk. writ. [(fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down) ] 1. a separating, sundering, separation; a 
trial, contest. 2. selection. 3. judgment; i. e. 
opinion or decision given concerning anything, esp. con- 
cerning justice and injustice, right and wrong; a. 
univ.: Jn. viii. 16; 1 Tim. v. 24 (on which see ἐπακολου- 
θέων; Jude 9; 2 Pet. ii. 11; κρίσιν κρίνειν (see κρίνω, 5 b.), 
Jn. vii. 24. b. in a forensic sense, of the judgment 
of God or of Jesus the Messiah: univ., Jas. ii. 13; 
2 Th.i.5; Heb. x. 27; plur., Rev. xvi.7; xix.2; of 
the last judgment: Heb. ix. 27; ἡ ἡμέρα κρίσεως [ Mt. x. 
15; xi. 22,24; xii.36; Mk. vi.11 RL in br.; 2 Pet. ii. 
9; iii. 7] or τῆς κρίσεως [1 Jn. iv. 17], the day appointed 
for the judgment, see ἡμέρα, 3; εἰς κρίσιν μεγάλης ἡμέρας, 
Jude 6; ἡ ὥρα τῆς κρίσεως αὐτοῦ, i.e. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rey. xiv. 
7; ἐν τῇ κρίσει, at the time of the judgment, when the 
judgment shall take place, Mt. xii. 41 sq.; Lk. x. 14; 
xi. 31 sq.; κρίσιν ποιεῖν κατὰ πάντων, to execute judgment 
against (i. 6. to the destruction of) all, Jude 15. spec. 
sentence of condemnation, damnatory judgment, condem- 
nation and punishment: Heb. x. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 4; with 
gen. of the pers. condemned and punished, Rev. xviii. 
10; ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη, the punishment appointed him 
was taken away, i. e. was ended, Acts viii. 33 fr. Is. liii. 
8 Sept.; πίπτειν εἰς κρίσιν [R" eis ὑπόκρισιν], to become 
liable to condemaation, Jas. v. 12; αἰώνιος κρίσις, eternal 


Κρίσπος 


damnation, Mk. iii. 29 [Rec.]; ἡ κρίσις τῆς γεέννης, the 
judgment condemning one to Gehenna, the penalty of 
Gehenna, i. e. to be suffered in hell, Mt. xxiii. 88. In 
John’s usage κρίσις denotes a. that judgment 
which Christ occasioned, in that wicked men rejected 
the salvation he offered, and so of their own accord 
brought upon themselves misery and punishment: αὕτη 
ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι etc. judgment takes place by the en- 
trance of the light into the world and the hatred which 
men have for this light, iii. 19; κρίσιν ποιεῖν, to execute 
judgment, v. 27; ἔρχεσθαι eis kp. to come into the state 
of one condemned, ib. 24; xp. τοῦ κόσμου τούτου, the 
condemnatory sentence passed upon this world, in that 
it is convicted of wickedness and its power broken, xii. 
31; περὶ κρίσεως, of judgment passed (see κρίνω, 5 a. β. 
fin.), xvi. 8, 11. B. the last judgment, the damna- 
tion of the wicked: ἀνάστασις κρίσεως, followed by con- 
demnation, v. 29 [ef. W. § 30, 28.]. γ- both the 
preceding notions are combined in v. 30; ἡ κρίσις πᾶσα, 
the whole business of judging [οἵ. W. 548 (510) ], ib. 22. 
Cf. Groos, Der Begriff der κρίσις bei Johannes (in the 
Stud. u. Krit. for 1868, pp. 244-273). 4. Like the 
Chald. x33 (Dan. vii. 10, 26; ef. Germ. Gericht) i. q. 
the college of judges (a tribunal of seven men in the sev- 
eral cities of Palestine; as distinguished from the San- 
hedrin, which had its seat at Jerusalem [cf. Schiirer, 
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23, ii.; Hdersheim, Jesus the Mes- 
siah, ii. 287]): Mt. v. 21 sq. (cf. Deut. xvi. 18; 2 Chr. 
xix. 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,14; Ὁ. 1. 2, 20, 5). 5S: 
Like the Hebr. pawn (cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1464” 
[also Sept. in Gen. xviii. 19, 25; Is. v. 7; ἵν]. 1; lix. 8; 
Jer. xvii. 11; 1 Mace. vii. 18; and other pass. referred 
to in Gesenius ]. ¢.]), right, justice: Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 
42; what shall have the force of right, ἀπαγγέλλειν τινί, 
Mt. xii. 18; α just cause, Mt. xii. 20 (on which see ἐκ- 
βάλλω, 1 g.).* 

Κρίσπος, -ov, 6, Crispus, the ruler of a synagogue at 
Corinth, Acts xviii. 8; baptized by Paul, 1 Co. i. 14.* 

κριτήριον, -ov, τό, (fr. κριτήρ, i- 4. κριτής); Ἵ. 
prop. the instrument or means of trying or judging 
anything; the rule by which one judges, (Plat., Plut., 
al.). 2. the place where judgment is given; the tri- 
bunal of a judge; a bench of judges: plur., 1 Co. vi. 2; 
Jas. ii. 6, (Sept.; Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.). 3. in 
an exceptional usage, the matter judged, thing to be de- 
cided, suit, case: plur. 1 Co. vi. 4 [this sense is denied by 
many; cf. 6. g. Meyer on vs. 2].* 

κριτής, -0v, ὁ, (κρίνω), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], 
Sept. chiefly for wav; a judge; 1. univ. one who 
passes, or arrogates to himself, judgment on anything: 
w. gen. of the object, Jas. iv. 11; w. gen. of quality (see 
διαλογισμός, 1), Jas. ii. 4; in a forensic sense, of the one 
who tries and decides a case [cf. δικαστής, fin.]: Mt. v. 
25; Lk. xii. 14 LT Tr WH, 58; [xviii. 2]; w. gen. of 
quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W. § 34, 3b.], τῆς ἀδικίας, Lk. 
xviii. 6; w. gen. of the object (a thing), an arbiter, Acts 
xviii. 15; of a Roman procurator administering justice, 
Acts xxiv. 10; of God passing judgment on the charac- 


802 


κρύπτω 


ter and deeds of men, and rewarding accordingly, Heb. 
xii. 23; Jas. iv. 12; also of Christ returning to sit in judg- 
ment, Acts x. 42; 2 Tim. iv. 8; Jas. v. 9; in a peculiar 
sense, of a person whose conduct is made the standard 
for judging another and convicting him of wrong: w. 
gen. of the object (a pers.), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi. 19. 2. 
like the Hebr. 05, of the leaders or rulers of the Israel- 
ites: Acts xiii. 20 (Judg. 11. 16,18 sq.; Ruth i. 1; Sir. 
x. 1 sq. 24, etc.).* 

κριτικός, -7, -ov, (κρίνω), relating to judging, fil for judg- 
ing, skilled in judging, (Plat., Plut., Leian., al.): with 
gen. of the obj., ἐνθυμήσεων x. ἐννοιῶν καρδίας, tracing 
out and passing judgment on the thoughts of the mind, 
Heb. iv. 12.* 

Kpovw; 1 aor. ptep. κρούσας ; to knock: τὴν θύραν, to 
knock at the door, Lk. xiii. 25; Acts xii. 13, (Arstph. 
eccles. 317,990; Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Prot. p. 310 a.; 
314 d.; symp. 212¢.; but κόπτειν τὴν θύραν is better, 
ace. to Phryn. with whom Lobeck agrees, p. 177 [ef. 
Schmidt (ch. 113, 9), who makes κόπτειν to knock with 
a heavy blow, κρούειν to knock with the knuckles]) ; 
without τὴν θύραν [ef. W. 593 (552)], Mt. vii. 7 sq.; 
Lk. xi. 9, 10; xii. 36; Acts xii. 16; Rev. iii. 20 (on which 
see θύρα, 6. €.).* 

κρυπτή [so R°?G LT Tr KC], (but some prefer to write 
it κρύπτη [so WH, Meyer, Bleek, ete., Chandler ὃ 183; cf. 
Tdf. on Lk. as below)]), -ῆς, 7, α crypt, covered way, vault, 
cellar: εἰς κρυπτήν, Lk. xi. 33 (Athen. 5 (4), 205 a. equiv. 
to κρυπτὸς περίπατος p. 206; [Joseph. b. j. 5, 7, 4 fin. ; 
Strab. 17, 1, 37]; Sueton. Calig. 58; Juvenal 5, 106; 
Vitruv. 6, 8 (5); al.). Cf. Meyer δα]. ο.; W. 238 (223).* 

κρυπτός, -ή, -όν, (κρύπτω), [fr. Hom. down], hidden, con- 
cealed, secret: Mt. x. 26; Mk. iv. 22; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2 
[ef. W. 441 (410)]; ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος, the 
inner part of man, the soul, 1 Pet. iii. 4; neut., ἐν τῷ 
κρυπτῷ, in secret, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 Ree. ; ἐν κρυπτῷ, pri- 
vately, in secret, Jn. vii. 4, 10; xviii. 20; 6 ἐν κρυπτῷ 
Ἰουδαῖος, he who is ἃ Jew inwardly, in soul and not in 
circumcision alone, Ro. ii. 29; τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους, 
[the hidden things of darkness i. 6.1 things covered by 
darkness, 1 Co. iv. 5; τὰ Kp. τῶν avOp. the things which 
men conceal, Ro. ii. 16; τὰ xp. τῆς καρδίας, his secret 
thoughts, feelings, desires, 1 Co. xiv. 25; τὰ kp. τῆς 
αἰσχύνης (see αἰσχύνη, 1), 2 Co. iv. 25 εἰς κρυπτόν into 
a secret place, Lk. xi. 33 in some edd. of Rec., but see 
κρυπτή." 

κρύπτω: 1 aor. ἔκρυψα ; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. κέκρυπται, 
ptep. κεκρυμμένος ; 2 aor. ἐκρύβην (so also in Sept., for the 
earlier ἐκρύφην, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 377 ; Fritzsche 
on Mt. p. 212; [Veitch s. v.]); [ef. καλύπτω ; fr. Hom. 
down]; Sept. for #37, VAT, 151, 72, 13, D3; 
to hide, conceal; a. prop.: ri, Mt. xiii. 44 and LT Tr 
WH in xxv.18; pass., Heb. xi. 23; Rev. ii. 17; κρυβῆναι 
i. 4. to be hid, escape notice, Mt. v. 14; 1 Tim. v. 25; 
ἐκρύβη (quietly withdrew [cf. W. § 38, 2a.]) x. ἐξῆλθεν, 
i. 6. departed secretly, Jn. viii. 59 [ef. W. 469 (437) ]; 
κρύπτω τι ev with dat. of place, Mt. xxv. 25; pass. xiii. 
44; κεκρ. ἐν τῷ θεῷ, is kept laid up with God in heaven, 


κρυσταλλίζω 


Col. iii. 3; τὲ εἴς τι, Lk. xiii. 21 [R G 1, ἐνέκρυψεν]; ἑαυτὸν 
εἰς with ace. of place, Rey. vi. 15; τινὰ ἀπὸ προσώπου 
τινός to cover (and remove [ef. W. § 30, 6 b.; 66, 2 d.]) 
from the view of any one, i. 6. to take away, rescue, from 
the sight, Rev. vi. 10 ; ἐκρύβη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, withdrew from 
them, Jn. xii. 36 (in Grk. auth. generally xp. twa τι; cf. 

ἀποκρύπτω, b.). b. metaph. to conceal (that it may 
' not become known): κεκρυμμένος, clandestine, Jn. xix. 
38; τὶ ἀπό τινος (gen. of pers.), Mt. xi. 25 LT Tr WH; 
(Lk. xviii. 34]; κεκρυμμένα things hidden i. 6. unknown, 
used of God’s saving counsels, Mt. xiii. 35; ἀπ᾿ ὀφθαλμῶν 
τινος, Lk. xix. 42 [ef. B. § 146, 1 fin. Comp.: ἀπο-, er, 
περι-κρύπτω.} * 

κρυσταλλίζω ; (κρύσταλλος, q- v-); to be of crystalline 
brightness and transparency; to shine like crystal: Rev. 
xxi. 11. (Not found elsewhere.) * 

κρύσταλλος, -ου, ὁ, (fr. κρύος ice; hence prop. anything 
congealed (cf. Lat. crus‘a) and transparent), [fr. Hom. 
down], crystal: a kind of precious stone, Rev. iv. 6; xxii. 1; 
(ef. B. D.s.v. Crystal. On its gend.cf. L. and S.s. v. II.]* 

Kpudatos, -aia, -aiov, (κρύφα), hidden, secret: twice in 
Mt. vi.18 LTTr WH. (Jer. xxiii. 24; Sap. xvii. 3; in 
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) * 

κρυφῆ [L ΝῊ -φῇ; cf. εἰκῆ, init. ], adv., (κρύπτω), secret- 
ly, in secret: Eph. v.12. (Pind., Soph., Xen.; Sept.).* 

κτάομαι, -ῶμαι ; fut. κτήσομαι (Lk. xxi. 19 L Tr WH); 
1 aor. ἐκτησάμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 73); to 
acquire, get or procure a thing for one’s self [ef. W. 260 
(244)]; (pf. κέκτημαι, to possess [ef. W. 274 (257) note] ; 
not found in the N.T.): ri, Mt.x. 9; Acts viii. 20; ὅσα 
xr@pat, all my income, Lk. xviii. 12; with gen. of price 
added [W. 206 (194)], πολλοῦ, Acts xxii. 28; with ἐκ 
and gen. of price (see ἐκ, II. 4), Acts i. 18; τὸ ἑαυτοῦ 
σκεῦος ἐν ἁγιασμῷ x. τιμῇ; to procure for himself his own 
vessel (i. e. for the satisfaction or the sexual passion; 
see σκεῦος, 1) in sanctification and honor, i. e. to marry a 
wife (opp. to the use of a harlot; the words ἐν dy. x. τιμῇ 
are added to express completely the idea of marrying 
in contrast with the baseness of procuring a harlot as 
his ‘vessel’; cf. κτᾶσθαι γυναῖκα, of marrying a wife, 
Ruth iv. 10; Sir. xxxvi. 29 (xxxili. 26); Xen. symp. 2, 
10),1 Th.iv.4; ras ψυχὰς ὑμῶν, the true life of your souls, 
your true lives, i. e. eternal life (ef. the opp. ζημιοῦσθαι 
τὴν Ψ. αὐτοῦ under ζημιόω), Lk. xxi. 19; cf. Meyer ad 
toc. and W. p. 274 (257).* 

κτῆμα, -ros, τό, (fr. κτάομαι, as χρῆμα fr. χράομαι), a 
possession: as in Grk. writers, of property, lands, estates, 
ete.. Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; Acts ii. 45; v. 1.* 

κτῆνος, -ous, τό, (fr. κτάομαι; hence prop. a possession, 
property, esp. in cattle); @ beast, esp. a beast of burden: 
Lk. x. 34; plur., Acts xxiii. 24; Rev. xviii. 13; it seems 
to be used for quadrupeds as opp. to fishes and birds in 
1 Co. xv. 39; so for M73, Gen. i. 25 sq.; 11. 20. [CE 
Hom. hymn. 30, 10; of swine in Polyb. 12, 4, 14.]* 

κτήτωρ, -opos, 6, (κτάομαι), a possessor: Acts iv. 34. 
(Diod. exept. p. 599, 17; Clem. Alex.; Byzant. writ.) * 

κτίζω: 1 aor. ἔκτισα; pf. pass. ἔκτισμαι; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐκτίσθην ; Sept. chiefly for 813; prop. to make habitable, 


809 


κτίσμα 


to people, a place, region, island, (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., 
Diod., al.); hence to found, a city, colony, state, ete. 
(Pind. et sqq.; 1 Esdr. iv. 53). In the Bible, to create: 
of God creating the world, man, etc., Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co, 
xi. 9; Col. i. 16 [cf. W. 272 (255) ]; iii. 10; Eph. iii. 9; 
1 Tim. iv. 3; Rev. iv. 11; x. 6, (Deut. iv. 32; Eccl. xii. 
1; often in O. T. Apocr., as Judith xiii. 18; Sap. ii. 23; 
xi. 18 (17); 3 Mace. ii. 9; [ Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 1; Philo 
de decal. § 207); absol. 6 κτίσας, the creator, Ro. i. 25; 
(Mt. xix. 4 Tr WH]; 1. q. fo form, shape, i. 6. (for sub- 
stance) completely to change, to transform (of the moral 
or new creation of the soul, as it is called), κτισθέντες 
ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐπὶ ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς, in intimate fellow- 
ship with Christ constituted to do good works [see ἐπί, 
B. 2 ἃ. ¢.], Eph. ii. 10; τοὺς δύο εἰς ἕνα καινὸν ἄνθρωπον, 
ibid. 15; τὸν κτισθέντα κατὰ θεόν, formed after God’s like- 
ness [see κατά, II. 3 c. 6.], Eph. iv. 24, (καρδίαν καθαρὰν 
κτίσον ἐν ἐμοί, Ps. 1. (li) 12).* 

κτίσις, -ews, ἧ, (κτίζω), in Grk. writ. the act of founding, 
establishing, building, etc.; in the N. T. (Vulg. everywhere 
creatura [yet Heb. ix. 11 creatio]) 1. the act of cre- 
ating, creation: τοῦ κόσμου, Ro. i. 20. 2. i. q. κτίσμα, 
creation i. 6. thing created, [ οἴ. W.32]; used a. of in- 
dividual things and beings, a creature, a creation: Ro. i. 
25; Heb. iv.13; any created thing, Ro. viii. 39; after a 
rabbin. usage (by which a man converted from idolatry 
to Judaism was called NWIN 793 [ef. Schdttgen, Horae 
Hebr. i. 328, 704 sq.]), καινὴ κτίσις is used of a man regen- 
erated through Christ, Gal. vi. 15; 2 Co. v.17. b. col- 
lectively, the sum or aggregate of created things: Rev. iii. 
14 (on which see ἀρχή, 3; [ἡ κτίσις τ. ἀνθρώπων, Teach- 
ing of the Twelve etc. c. 167); ὅλη ἡ κτίσις, Sap. xix. 6; 
πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις, Judith xvi. 14; and without the art. (cf. 
Grimm on 3 Mace. [ii. 2] p. 235; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as 
below]), πᾶσα κτίσις, Col. i. 15; 3 Mace. ii. 2; Judith ix. 
12; σωτὴρ πάσης κτίσεως, Acta Thomae p. 19 ed. Thilo 
[§ 10 p. 198 ed. Tdf.], (see πᾶς, I. 1 6.); ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, 
Mk. x. 6; xiii. 19; 2 Pet. iii. 4; οὐ ταύτης τῆς κτίσεως, not 
of this order of created things, Heb. ix. 11; ace. to the 
demands of the context, of some particular kind or class 
of created things or beings: thus of the human race, πάσῃ 
τῇ xt. Mk. xvi. 15; ἐν πάσῃ (Ree. adds τῇ) κτίσει τῇ ὑπὸ 
τὸν oup., among men of every race, Col. i. 23; the aggre- 
gate of irrational creatures, both animate and inanimate, 
(what we call nature), Ro. viii. 19-21 (Sap. v. 17 (18) ; 
xvi. 24); πᾶσα 7 xt. ibid. 22; where cf. Reiche, Philippi, 
Meyer, Riickert, al., [Arnold in Bapt. Quart. for Apr. 
1867, pp. 143-153]. 3. an institution, ordinance: 
1 Pet. ii. 13; ef. Huther ad loc. [(Pind., al.)]* 

κτίσμα, -ros, τό, (kti€w); thing founded; created thing; 
(Vulg. creatura) [A. V. creature]: 1 Tim. iv. 4; Rey. 
v.13; viii. 9, (Sap. ix. 2; xiii. 5); contextually and met- 
aph. xr. θεοῦ, transformed by divine power to a moral 
newness of soul, spoken of true Christians as created 
anew by regeneration [al. take it here unrestrictedly], 
Jas. i. 18 (see ἀπαρχή, metaph. a.; also κτίζω sub fin., 
κτίσις, 2 a.) ; τὰ ἐν ἀρχῇ κτίσματα θεοῦ, of the Israelites, 
Sir. xxxvi. 20 (15). [(Strab., Dion. H.)]* 


κτίστης 


κτίστης (on the accent cf. W.§ 6, 1h. [ef. 94 (89); esp. 
Chandler §§ 35, 861), -ου, 6, (κτίζω), α founder; a creator 
[Aristot., Plut., al.]: of God, 1 Pet. iv. 19 [ef. W. 122 
(116) ]; (Judith ix. 12; Sir. xxiv. 8; 2 Mace. i. 24, ete.).” 

κυβεία [-Sia TWH; see I, ¢],-as, 7, (fr. κυβεύω, and this 
fr. κύβος a cube, adie), dice-playing (Xen., Plat., Aristot., 
al.,; trop. ἡ κι τῶν avOp. the deception [ A. V. sleight] of 
men, Eph. iv. 14, because dice-players sometimes cheated 
and defrauded their fellow-players.* 

κυβέρνησις, -ews, 7, (κυβερνάω [ Lat. gubernare, to gov- 
ern]), @ governing, government: 1 Co. xii. 28 [al. would 
take it tropically here, and render it wise counsels (I. 
V. mrg.); so Hesych.: κυβερνήσεις - προνοητικαὶ ἐπιστῆ- 
μαι καὶ φρονήσεις ; cf. Schleusner, Thesaur. in Sept. s. v., 
and to the reff. below add Prov. xi. 14; Job xxxvii. 12 
Symm.]; (Prov. i. 5; xxiv. 6; Pind., Plat., Plut., al.).” 

κυβερνήτης, -ov, 6, (κυβερνάω [‘to steer’; see the pre- 
ceding word]); fr. Ilom. down; steersman, helmsman, 
sailing-master; [A. V. master, ship-master]: Acts xxvii. 
11; Rev. xviii. 17. (Ezek. xxvii. 8, 27 sq.) * 

κυκλεύω: 1 aor. ἐκύκλευσα; to go round (Strabo and 
other later writ.) ; 0 encircle, encompass, surround : τὴν 
παρεμβολὴν, Rev. xx. 9 (where RG Tr ἐκύκλωσαν); [τινά, 
Jn. x. 24 Trmrg. WH mrg.; (see WH. App. p. 171)].* 

κυκλόθεν, (κύκλος [see κύκλῳ ]), adv. round about, from 
all sides all round: Rey. iv. 8; κυκλ. τινός, Rev. iv. 3 56.» 
and Ree. in v. 11. (Lys. p. 110, 40 [olea saer. 28]; 
Qu. Smyrn. 5,16; Nonn. Dion. 36, 325; Sept. often for 
3339, 23D 3°35, and simply 2.30; many exx. fr. the 
Apoer. are given in Wakil, Clavis Apocryphorum ete. 
Boave))— 

κυκλόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐκύκλωσα; Pass., pres. ptep. κυκλού- 
μενος; 1 aor. ptcep. κυκλωθείς ; (κύκλος); Sept. chiefly 
for 335; 1. to go round, lead round, (Pind., Eur., 
Polyb., al.). 2. to surround, encircle, encompass: of 
persons standing round, τινά, Jn. x. 24 [Trmrg.WH mre. 
ἐκύκλευσαν (q.v-)]; Acts xiv. 20; of besiegers (often so 
in prof. auth. and in Sept.), Lk. xxi. 20; Heb. xi. 30, 
and RG Trin Rev. xx. 9. [Comp.: περι-κυκλόω. * 

κύκλῳ (dat. of the subst. κύκλος, a ring, circle [ef. Eng. 
eycle]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. times without number 
for 3°39, also for 2.357) and 2.39 3°39; inacircle,around, 
round about, on all sides: Mk. 111. 34; vi. 6; οἱ κύκλῳ ἀγροί, 
the cireumjacent country [see ἀγρός, c.], Mk. vi. 36 [here 
WH (rejected) mrg. gives ἔγγιστα]; Lk. ix. 12; ἀπὸ 
Ἵερουσ. καὶ κύκλῳ, and in the region around, Ro. xv. 19; 
τινός, around anything (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,5; Polyb. 4, 21, 
9, al.; Gen. xxxv. 5; Ex. vii. 24, etc.): Rev. iv. 6; v. 
11 [here Rukdd6ev]; vii. 11." 

κύλισμα, -ros, τό, (xuAiw, q. v.), thing rolled: with 
epexeget. gen. βορβόρου, rolled (wallowed) mud or mire, 
2 Pet. ii. 22 [RGLTrmrg.]. The great majority take 
the word to mean ‘wallowing-place’, as if it were the 
same as κυλίστρα, (Vulg. in volutabro luti). But just as 
τὸ ἐξέραμα signifies the vomit, thing vomited, and not the 
place of vomiting; so τὸ κύλισμα denotes nothing else 
than the thing rolled or wallowed. But see [the foll. 
word, and] βόρβορος." 


804 


Κυρήνη 


κυλισμός, -οὔ, ὁ, i. 4. κύλισις, α rolling, wallowing, (Hip- 
piatr. p. 204, 4; [cf. Prov. ii. 18 Theod.]): εἰς κυλισμ. 
βορβόρου, to a rolling of itself in mud, [to wallowing in 
the mire}, 2 Pet. ii. 22 T Trtxt. WH. See the preceding 
word.* 

κυλίω : (for κυλίνδω more com. in earlier writ.), to roll; 
Pass. impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐκυλίετο; to be rolled, to wallow: 
Mk. ix. 20. ({Aristot. h. a. 5,19, 18, ete.; Dion. Hal. ; 
Sept.]; Polyb. 26, 10,16; Ael. n. a. 7, 33; Epict. diss. 
4,11, 29.) [Comp.: ἀνα-, ἀπο-, προσκυλίω.]}" 

κυλλός, -7, -όν, [akin to κύκλος, κυλίω, Lat. circus, cur- 
vus, ete.; Curtius § 81]; 1. crooked ; of the mem- 
bers of the body (Hippocr., Arstph. ay. 1379): as dis- 
tinguished fr. χωλός, it seems to be injured or disabled 
in the hands {but doubted by many], Mt. xv. 30, 31 
[but here Tr mrg. br. κυλ. and WH read it in mrg. 
only]. 2. maimed, mutilated, (ots, Hippocr. p. 805 
[iii. p. 186 ed. Kiihn]): Mt. xviii. 8; Mk.‘ix. 48." 

κῦμα, -ros, τό. [fr. κυέω toswell; Curtius § 79; fr. Hom. 
down |, a wave [cf. Eng. swell], esp. of the sea or of a lake: 
Mt. viii. 24; xiv. 24; Mk. iv. 37; Acts xxvii. 41 [RG 
Trtxt.br.]; κύματα ἄγρια, prop., Sap. xiv. 1; with @addo~ 
ons added, of impulsive and restless men, tossed to and 
fro by their raging passions, Jude 13. [Syn. cf. κλύδων." 

κύμβαλον, -ov, τό, (fr κύμβος, 6, a hollow [ef. cup, cupola, 
ete.; Vaniéek p. 1647), a cymbal, i. e. a hollow basin of 
brass, producing (when two are struck together) a musi- 
cal sound [see B. D. 5. v. Cymbal; Stainer, Music of the 
Bible, ch. ix.]: 1 Co. xiii. 1. (1 Chr. xiii. 8; xv. 16, 19, 
28; Ps. cl. 5. Pind., Xen., Diod., Joseph., al.) * 

κύμινον, -ov, τό, cumin (or cummin), Germ. Kiimmel, 
(for }13, Is. xxviii. 25, 27): Mt. xxiii. 23. (Theophr., 
Diose., Plut., al.) [Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 443.]* 

κυνάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of κύων, i. q. κυνίδιον, which 
Phryn. prefers; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180; ef. γυναικά- 
prov), a little dog: Mt. xv. 26sq.; Mk. vii. 27sq. (Xen, 
Plat., Theophr., Plut., al.) * 

Κύπριος, -ov, ὁ, a Cyprian or Cypriote, i.e. a native or 
an inhabitant of Cyprus: Acts iv. 36; xi. 20; xxi. 16, 
(2 Mace. iv. 29). [(Hadt., al.)]* 

Κύπρος, -ov, 7, Cyprus, a very fertile and delightful 
island of the Mediterranean, lying between Cilicia and 
Syria: Acts xi. 19; xiii. 4; xv. 39; xxi. 3; xxvii. 4, 
(1 Mace. xv. 23; 2 Mace. x.13). [BB.DD.s.v.; Lewin, 
St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.]* 

κύπτω: 1 aor. ptep. κύψας; (fr. κύβη the head [cf. 
Vanitek p. 164; esp. Curtius, index s. v.]); fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. chiefly for Tp; to bow the head, bend for- 
ward, stoop down: Mk. i. 7; with κάτω added (Arstph. 
vesp. 279), Jn. viii. 6, 8. [Comp.: ava-, mapa-, ovy- 
Kuta. | * 

Κυρηναῖος, -ov, 6, (Κυρήνη, 4. v-), @ Cyrenean [A. V. 
(R. V. Acts vi. 9) Cyrenian], a native of Cyrene: Mt. 
xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26; Acts vi. 9; xi. 20; 
xi. 1.) [i@Hdt-yal)ie 

Κυρήνη, -ns, 7, Cyrene, a large and very flourishing city 
of Libya Cyrenaica or Pentapolitana, about 11 Roman 
miles from the sea. Among its inhabitants were great 


Κυρήνιος 


aumbers of Jews, whom Ptolemy I. had brought thither, 
and invested with the rights of citizens: Acts ii. 10. 
(BB. DD. 5. v.]* 

Κυρήνιος (Lchm. Kupivos [-peivos Tr mrg. WH mrg. 
(see et, «)]), του, 6, Quirin[-i-Jus (in full, Publius Sulpicius 
Quirinus [correctly Quirinius ; see Woolsey in Bib. Sacr. 
for 1878, pp. 499-513]), a Roman consul A. vu. c. 742; 
afterwards (not before the year 759) governor of Syria 
(where perhaps he may previously have been in com- 
mand, 751-752). While filling that office after Arche- 
laus had been banished and Judea had been reduced to 
a province of Syria, he made the enrolment mentioned 
in Acts v. 37 (cf. Joseph. antt. 18, 1,1). Therefore Luke 
in his Gospel ii. 2 has made a mistake [yet see added 
reff. below] in defining the time of this enrolment. For 
in the last years of Herod the Great, not Quirinius but 
Sentius Saturninus was governor of Syria. His suc- 
cessor. A. U. C. 750, was Quintilius Varus; and Quiri- 
nius (who died in the year 774) sueceeded Varus. Cf. 
Win. RWB. s. vv. Quirinius and Schatzung; Strauss, 
Die Halben u. die Ganzen (Berl. 1865) p. 70 sqq.; Hil- 
genfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie for 1865, 
Ὁ. 480 sqq-; Keim i. 399 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 115]; Schiirer, 
Neutest. Zeitgeschichte, p. 161 sq.; Weizsicker in Schen- 
kel v. p. 23 sqq.; [Aei/l, Com. iib. Mark. u. Luk. p. 213 
sqq-; McClellan, New Testament ete., i. p. 392 sqq.; and 
Woolsey in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Cyrenius, and at length 
in Bib. Saer. for Apr. 1870, p. 291 sqq.].* 

Kvpla, -as, ἡ, Cyria, a Christian woman to whom the 
second Ep. of John is addressed: 2 Jn. 1,5, [G L TKC 
(and WH mrg. in vs. 1)]. This prop. name is not un- 
common in other writers also; οἵ. Liicke, Comm. iib. die 
Brr. des Joh. 3d ed. p. 444. [But R ΤῊ ἃ]. κυρία, regard- 
ing the word as an appellative, lady; (ai γυναῖκες εὐθὺς 
ἀπὸ τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα ἐτῶν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνδρῶν κυρίαι καλοῦν- 
rat, Epictet. enchir. 40). Cf. Westcott on 2 Jn. u. 5.7" 

κυριακός, -7, -dv, a bibl. and eccles. word [ef. W. § 34, 
3 and Soph. Lex. s. v.], of or belonging to the Lord; 1. 
i.q. the gen. of the author rod κυρίου, thus κυριακὸν δεῖπνον, 
the supper instituted by the Lord, 1 Co. xi. 20; λόγια 
κυριακά, the Lord’s sayings, Papias ap. Eus. h. 6. 3, 39, 
ile 2. relating to the Lord, ἡ κυριακὴ ἡμέρα, the day 
devoted to the Lord, sacred to the memory of Christ’s 
resurrection, Rev. i. 10 [ef. ‘ κυριακὴ xupiov’, Teaching 
14, 1 (where see Harnack) ; ef. B. D.s.v. Lord’s Day; 
Bp. Lohtft. Ten. ad Magn. p. 129; Miiller on Barn. ep. 15, 
9]; γραφαὶ κυρ. the writings concerning the Lord, i.e. 
the Gospels, Clem. Alex., al. [Cf. Soph. Lex. 8. v.]* 

κυριεύω ; fut. κυριεύσω; 1 aor. subjune. 3 pers. sing. 
κυριεύσῃ; (κύριος); to be lord of, to rule over, have do- 
minion over: with gen. of the obj. [ef. B. 169 (147) ], Lk. 
xxii. 25; Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. i. 24; absol. of κυριεύοντες, 
supreme rulers, kings, 1 Tim. vi. 15; of things and forces 
i. q. to exercise influence upon, to have power over: with 
gen. of the obj., ὁ θάνατος, Ro. vi. 9: ἡ ἁμαρτία, 14; 6 νόμος, 
Ro. vii. 1. (Xen., Aristot., Polyb., sqq.; Sept. for own 
[ete.].) [Comp.: κατα-κυριεύω.} * 

κύριος, -ov, 6, (prop. an 2dj. κύριος, -a, - 1, also of two 


365 


κύριος 


term.; prop. i. q. ὁ ἔχων κῦρος, having power or author 
ity), [fr. Pind. down], he to whom a person or thing be- 
longs, about which he has the power of deciding; master, 
lord; used a. univ. of the possessor and disposer of 
a thing, the owner, (Sept. for }}18, 5y3): with gen. of 
the thing, as τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος, Mt. xx. 8; xxi. 40; Mk. xii. 
9; Lk. xx. 15; rod θερισμοῦ, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; τῆς 
οἰκίας, the master, Mk. xiii. 35 (Judg. xix. 12); τοῦ πώλου, 
Lk. xix. 33; τοῦ σαββάτου, possessed of the power to 
determine what is suitable to the sabbath, and of releas- 
ing himself and others from its obligations, Mt. xii. 8; 
Mk. ii. 28; Lk. vi. 5. with gen. of a pers., one who has 
control of the person, the master [A. V. lord]; in the 
household: δούλου, παιδίσκης, οἰκονόμου, Mt. x. 24; Lk. 
xii. 46 sq.; xiv. 21; xvi. 3, 5; Acts xvi. 16, 19, etc.; ab- 
sol., opp. to οἱ δοῦλοι, Eph. vi. 5,9; Col. iv. 1, ete.; in 
the state, the sovereign, prince, chief: the Roman em- 
peror [(on this use of κύριος see at length Woolsey in 
Bib. Sacr. for July 1861, pp. 595-608)], Acts xxv. 26; 
once angels are called κύριοι, as those to whom, in the 
administration of the universe, departments are in- 
trusted by God (see ἄγγελος, 2): 1 Co. viii. 5. b. 
κύριος is a title of honor, expressive of respect and rev- 
erence, with which servants salute their master, Mt. xiii. 
27; xxv. 20, 22; Lk. xiii. 8; xiv. 22, ete.; the disciples 
salute Jesus their teacher and master, Mt. viii. 25; xvi. 
ΩΣ» ΠΕΣ 54: xa 25/40) ΧΙ 1: ΧΧῚ 33, 98, ἐἴχι. ΧΙ 12» 
xiii. 6, 9, 13; xxi. 15-17, 20 sq., ete., cf. xx. 18; Lk. xxiv. 
34; his followers salute Jesus as the Messiah, whose 
authority they acknowledge (by its repetition showing 
their earnestness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.]), κύριε, κύριε, Mt. vii. 
21; and RG in Lk. xiii. 25; employed, too, by a son in 
addressing his father, Mt. xxi. 30; by citizens towards 
magistrates, Mt. xxvii. 63; by any one who wishes to 
honor a man of distinction, Mt. viii. 2, 6,8; xv. 27; Mk. 
vii. 28; Lk. v.12; xiii. 25; Jn.iv.11, 15,19; ν. 7; xiL 
21; xx.15; Actsix.5; xvi. 30; xxii. 8. c. this 
title is given a. to Gop, the ruler of the universe 
(so the Sept. for +378, aN, DWN, mim and πὸ; [the 
term κύριος is used of the gods from Pind. and Soph. 
down, but “the address κύριε, used in prayer to God, 
though freq. in Epict. does not occur (so far as I am 
aware) in any heathen writing before the apostolic 
times; sometimes we find κύριε ὁ θεός, and once (2, 7, 12) 
he writes κύριε ἐλέησον" (Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 314 
note 8) }),—both with the art., 6 κύριος : Mt. i. 29 [Β 67; 
v. 33; Mk.v.19; Lk.i. 6,9, 28,46; Acts vil. 33; viii. 
24; xi. 21; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18, [but see ἔλεος, 3]; Heb. viii. 
2; Jas.iv.15; v.15; Jude5[RG], ete.; and without 
the art. (cf. W. 124 (118); B. 88 (77) sq.): Mt. xxi. 9: 
xxvii. 10; Mk. xiii. 20; Lk. i. 17, 38,58, 66; ii. 9, 23, 26, 
39; Acts vii.49; Heb. vii. 21; xii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 25; 2 Pet. 
ii. 9; Jude [5 T Trtxt. WH txt.], 9; κύριος τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 
x. τῆς γῆς, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; Acts xvii. 24; κύριος 
τῶν κυριευόντων, 1 Tim. vi. 15; κύριος ὁ θεός, see θεός, 3 
p- 288" [and below]; κύριος ὁ θεὸς ὁ παντοκράτωρ, Rev. 
iv. 8; κύριος σαβαώθ, Ro. ix. 29; ἄγγελος and ὁ ἄγγελος 
κυρίου, Mt. i. 20; ii. 13,19; xxviii. 2; Lk.i.11; ii. 9; 


κύριος 


Acts v. 19; viii. 26; xii. 7; πνεῦμα κυρίου, Lk. iv. 18; 
Acts viii. 39; with prepositions: ὑπὸ (RG add the art.) 
κυρίου, Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; mapa κυρίου, Mt. xxi. 42 and 
Mk. xii. 11, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 23 ; παρὰ κυρίῳ, 2 Pet. 
iii. 8. B. to the Messran; and that aa. to 
the Messiah regarded univ.: Lk. i. 43; ii. 11; Mt. xxi. 
8; xxii. 45; Mk. xi. 8; xii. 86; Lk. xix.34; xx.44. BB. 
to Jesus as the Messiah, since by his death he acquired 
a special ownership in mankind, and after his resurree- 
tion was exalted to a partnership in the divine adminis- 
tration (this force of the word when applied to Jesus 
appears esp. in Acts x. 36; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. vii. 22; viii. 
6; Phil. ii. 9-11): Eph. iv. 5; with the art. ὁ κύρ., Mk. 
xvi. 19 sq.; Acts ix.1; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. iv. 5; vi. 18 sq.; 
Vii. 10, 12, 84 sq.; ix. 5,14; x. 22; xi. 26; [xvi. 226 1, 
TTr WII]; Phil. iv.5; [2 Tim. iv. 22 TTrWH]; Heb. 
ii. 3 (cf. 7 sqq.); Jas.v.7, ete. after his resurrection 
Jesus is addressed by the title 6 κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου, 
Jn. xx. 28. ἀπὸ τοῦ kup., 1 Co. xi. 23; 2 Co. v. 6; πρὸς 
τὸν x. 2 Co. v. 8; ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς, Acts i. 21; iv. 33; xvi. 
31; xx. 35; 1 Co. xi. 23; [xvi.23 T:TrWH]; 2(Co.i. 
14; [2 Tim. iv. 22 Lchm.]; Rev. xxii. 20; ὁ κύρ. "Inc. 
Χριστός, 1 Co. xvi. 22[R; 23 RGL]; 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14) 
(WH br. Xp.]; Eph. i. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 22 [RG], ete.; ὁ 
κύριος ἡμῶν, 1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 8; Heb. vii. 14; 2 Pet. 
iii. 15; Rev. xi. 15, ete.; with Ἰησοῦς added, [LT Tr 
WH in 1 Th. iii. 11 and 13]; Heb. xiii. 20; Rev. xxii. 21 
[LT Tr (yet without ἡμ.}}; so with Χριστός, Ro. xvi. 18 
[GLT Tr WI]; and Ἰησοῦς Χριστός, 1 Th.i. 3 [ef. B. 
155 (136)]; iii. 11 [RG], 18 [Ree.]; v. 28; 2 Th. ii. 1, 
14, 16; iii. 6 [(ἡμῶν)]; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co.i. 3; Gal. vi. 18 
[WH br. ἡμῶν]; Eph. i. 3; vi. 24; Ro. xvi. 24 [RG]; 
1 Tim. vi. 3,14; Philem. 25 [Τ᾿ WHom. ἡμῶν] ; Phil. iv. 
23 [GLT Tr WHom. nz], ete.; Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ὁ κύριος 
ἡμῶν, Ro.i.4; and Xp. Ἴησ. ὁ kup. (ἡμῶν), Col. ii. 6; Eph. 
iii. 11; 1 Tim.i. 2; 2 Tim.i. 2; ὁ κύρ. καὶ ὁ σωτήρ, 2 Pet. 
iii. 2 [ef. B. 155 (136)]; with Ἰησοῦς Χριστός added, 2 Pet. 
iii. 18; without the art., simply κύριος : 1 Co. vii. 22, 25; 
x. 21; xvi. 10; 2 Co. iii. 17; xii. 1; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jas. v. 
11; 2 Pet. ili. 10; κύριος κυρίων i, e. Supreme Lord (cf. W. 
§ 36, 2; [B. § 123, 12]): Rev. xix. 16 (ef. in a. above; 
of God, Deut. x.17); with prepositions: ἀπὸ κυρίου, Col. 
iii. 24; κατὰ κύριον, 2 Co. xi. 17; πρὸς κύριον, 2 Co. iii. 16 ; 
σὺν κυρ. 1 Th. iv. 17; ὑπὸ κυρ. 2 Th. ii. 13; on the phrase 
ἐν κυρίῳ, freq. in Paul, and except in his writings found 
only in Rey. xiv. 13, see ἐν, I. 6 b. p. 211°. The appel- 
lation ὁ κύριος, applied to Christ, passed over in Luke 
and John even into historic narrative, where the words 
and works of Jesus prior to his resurrection are related : 
Lk. vii. 18; x.1; χὶ. 89; xii.42; xiii.15; xvii. 5 Sq: 3 
xxii. 31 [RGLTrbr.]; Jn. iv. 1 [here T Trmrg. Ἰη- 
gous]; vi. 23; xi.2. There is nothing strange in the 
appearance of the term in the narrative of occurrences 
after his resurrection: Lk. xxiv. 34; Jn. xx. 2, 18, 20, 
50" ἈΧΙ 7. 12. ἃ. There are some who hold that 
Paul (except in his quotations from the O. T. viz. Ro. 
iv. 8; ix. 28 sq.; xi. 34; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 16; iii. 20; x. 26; 
2 Co. vi. 17 sq.; x. 17; 2 Tim. ii. 19) uses the title κύριος 


366 


κωλύω 


everywhere not of God, but of Christ. But, to omit 
instances where the interpretation is doubtful, as 1 Co. 
vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 21; 1 Th. iv. 6; 2 Th. iii. 16 (ὁ κύριος 
τῆς εἰρήνης, cf. ὁ θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης, 1 Th. v. 23; but most 
of the blessings of Christianity are derived alike from 
God and from Christ), it is better at least in the words 
ἑκάστῳ ws ὁ κύριος ἔδωκεν, 1 Co. iii. 5, to understand God 
as referred to on account of what follows, esp. on ac- 
count of the words κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν 
μοι ἴῃ vs. 10. On the other hand, κρινόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Kup: 
in 1 Co. xi. 32 must certainly, I think, be taken of 
Christ, on account of x. 22, οἵ. 21. Cf. Gabler, Klei 
nere theol. Schriften, Bd. i. p. 186 sqq.; Winer, De sensu 
vocum κύριος et ὁ κύριος in actis et epistolis apostolorum. 
Erlang. 1828; Wesselus Scheffer, diss. theol. exhibens 
disquisitionem de vocis κύριος absolute positae in N. Τὶ 
usu. Lugd. 1846 (a monograph I have not seen) ; [Stuart 
in the Bib. Repos. for Oct. 1831 pp. 733-776; cf. Weiss, 
Bibl. Theol. ἃ. N. T. § 76; Cremer, Bibl.-theol. Lex. s. v.; 
Abbot in the Journ. Soe. Bib. Lit. and Exeg. for June 
and Dee. 1881 p. 126 sqq., June and Dee. 1883 p. 101 sq: 
On the use of a capital initial, see WH. Intr. § 4141. 
The word does not occur in the [Ep. to Tit. (crit. edd.), 
the] 1 Ep. of John, [nor in the Second or the Third; for 
in 2 Jn. 3 κυρίου is dropped by the critical editors. Syn. 
see δεσπότης, fin. ]. 

κυριότης, τητος, 7, (ὁ κύριος), dominion, power, lordship ; 
in the N. T. one who possesses dominion (see ἐξουσία, 4 ο. 
B.; cf. Germ. Herrschaft, [or Milton’s “ dominations”]; 
in Tac. ann. 13, 1 dominationes is equiv. to dominantes), 
so used of angels (κύριοι, 1 Co. viii. 5; see κύριος, a. fin.) : 
Eph. i. 21; 2 Pet. ii. 10; Jude 8; plur. Col.i.16. (Eccles. 
[e. g. ‘Teaching’ ec. 4] and Byzant. writ.) * 

κυρόω, -@: 1 aor. inf. κυρῶσαι; pf. pass. ptcp. κεκυρω- 
μένος ; (κῦρος the head, that which is supreme, power, 
influence, authority); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to 
make valid; to confirm publicly or solemnly, to ratify: 
διαθήκην, pass. Gal. iii. 15; ἀγάπην εἴς twa, to make a 
public decision that love be shown to a transgressor by 
granting him pardon, 2 Co. ii. 8. [Comp. : προ-κυρόω.} " 

κύων, κυνός ; in prof. auth. of the com. gend., in the 
N. T. mase.; Hebr. 253; a dog; prop.: Lk. xvi. 21; 
2 Pet. ii. 22; metaph. (in various [but always reproach- 
ful] senses; often so even in Hom.) a man of impure 
mind, an impudent man, [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. 5.1: 
Mt. vii. 6; Phil. iii. 2: Rev. xxii. 15, in which last pass. 
others less probably understand sodomites (like 0392 in 
Deut. xxiii. 18 (19)) [ef. B. D. s. v. Dog].* 

κῶλον, -ov, τό; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; a mem- 
ber of the body, particularly the more external and promi- 
nent members, esp. the feet; in Sept. (Lev. xxvi. 30; 
Num. xiv. 29, 32 sq.; 1S. xvii. 46; Is. Ixvi. 24) for 739 
and 0°39, a dead body, carcase, inasmuch as the mem- 
bers of a corpse are loose and fall apart: so the plur. in 
Heb. iii. 17 fr. Num. xiv. 29, 32, [A. V. carcases].* 

κωλύω; impf. 1 pers. plur. ἐκωλύομεν (Mk. ix. 38 T Tr 
txt. WH); 1 aor. ἐκώλυσα; Pass., pres. κωλύομαι; 1 aor. 
ἐκωλύθην ; (fr. κόλος, lopped, clipped; prop. to cut off, cut 


κώμη 


short, hence) to hinaer, prevent, forbid ; [fr. Pind. down]; 
Sept. for 873, twice (viz. 1 5. χχν. 26; 2 S. xiii. 13) for 
yy: τινά foll. by an inf. [W. § 65,2 β. ; cf. B. § 148, 13], 
Mt. xix. 14; Lk. xxiii.2; Acts xvi. 6; xxiv. 23; 1 Th. 
ii. 16; Heb. vii. 23; τί κωλύει pe βαπτισθῆναι ; what doth 
hinder me from being (to be) baptized? Acts viii. 36; 
the inf. is omitted, as being evident from what has gone 
before, Mk. ix. 38 sq.; x. 14; Lk. ix. 49; xi. 52; xviii. 
16; Acts xi. 17; Ro. i. 13; 3 Jn. 10; αὐτόν is wanting, 
because it has preceded, Lk. ix. 50; the ace. is wanting, 
because easily supplied from the context, 1 Tim. iv. 3; 
as often in Grk. writ., constr. w. τινά twos, to keep one 
from a thing, Acts xxvii. 43; with acc. of the thing, τὴν 
παραφρονίαν, to restrain, check, 2 Pet. ii, 16; τὸ λαλεῖν 
γλώσσαις, 1 Co. xiv. 39; τί, foil. by τοῦ μή, can any one 
hinder the water (which offers itself), that these should 
not be baptized? Acts x.47; in imitation of the Hebr. 
852 foll. by }D of the pers. and the ace. of the thing, to 
withhold a thing from any one, i. e. to deny or refuse one 
a thing: Lk. vi. 29 [B. § 132, 5] (τὸ μνημεῖον ἀπὸ σοῦ, 
Gen. xxiii. 6). [Comp.: διακωλύω.] " 

κώμη, -ης, 7, (akin to κεῖμαι, κοιμάω, prop. the common 
sleeping-place to which laborers in the fields return; 
Curtius § 45 [related is Eng. home]), [fr. Hes., Hdt. 
down], a village: Mt. ix. 35; x. 11; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. v. 
17; ix. 52 [here Tdf. πόλιν], and often in the Synopt. 
Gospels; Jn. xi. 1, 30; with the name of the city near 
which the villages lie and to whose municipality they 
belong: Καισαρείας, Mk. viii. 27 (often so in Sept. for 
ΓῺΞ with the name of a city; ef. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 
220" [B. D. 5. v. Daughter, 7]; also for ‘Is and nn 
with the name of a city); by meton. the inhabitants of 
villages, Acts viii. 25; used also of a small town, as Beth- 
saida, Mk. viii. 23, 26, cf. 22; Jn. i. 45; of Bethlehem, 
Jn. vii. 42; for Vy, Josh. x.39; xv. 9 [Compl.]; Is. xlii. 
11. [B. Ὁ. 5. v. Villages.] 

κωμό-πολις, -ews, ἡ, a village approximating in size and 
number of inhabitants to a city, a village-city, a town 
(Germ. Marktflecken): Mk. i. 38. (Strabo; [Josh. 
xviii. 28 Aq., Theod. (Field)]; often in the Byzant. writ. 
of the middle ages.) * 


36 


T λάθρα 


κῶμος, -ου, ὁ, (fr. κεῖμαι ; accordingly i. 4. Germ. Ge- 
lag; cf. Curtius § 45); fr. [Hom. h. Merc., Theogn.] 
Hdt. down; a revel, carousal, i. 6. in the Grk. writ. prop. 
a nocturnal and riotous procession of half-drunken and 
frolicsome fellows who after supper parade through the 
streets with torches and music in honor of Bacchus or 
some other deity, and sing and play before the houses 
of their male and female friends; hence used generally, 
of feasts and drinking-parties that are protracted till late 
at night and indulge in revelry; plur. [revellings]: Ro. 
xiii.13; Gal. v.21; 1 Pet.iv.3. (Sap. xiv. 23; 2 Mace. 
vi. 4.) [Trench § lxi.]* 

κώνωψ, -wros, 6, a gnat ([Aeschyl.], Hdt., Hippoer., 
al.) ; of the wine-gnat or midge that is bred in (ferment- 
ing and) evaporating wine (Aristot. h. an. 5, 19 [p. 552, 
5; cf. Bochart, Hierozoicon, iii. 444; Buztorf, Lex. talm. 
ἘΠῚ 927 (414" ed. Fischer)]): Mt. xxiii. 24.* 

Kas, gen. Ka, ἡ, Cos [A. V. Coos] (now Stanco or 
Stanchio [which has arisen from a slurred pronuncia- 
tion of és τὰν Κῶ (mod. Grk.) like Stambul fr. és τὰν 
πόλιν. (Hackett)]), a small island of the gean Sea, 
over against the cities of Cnidus and Halicarnassus, 
celebrated for its fertility and esp. for its abundance of 
wine and corn: Acts xxi. 1, where for the Rec. Κῶν 
Grsb. [foll. by subsequent editors] has restored Κῶ, as 
in 1 Mace. xv. 23; see Matthiae § 70 note 3; W. § 8, 
2a.; [B. 21 {19}; WH. App. p. 157]. Cf. Kuester, 
De Co insula, Hal. 1833; [‘but the best description is 
in Ross, Reisen nach Kos u.s.w. (Halle 1852)” (How- 
son); ef. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 96 ].* 

Κωσάμ, ὁ, (fr. DOP to divine, [but ef. B. D.]), Cosam, 
one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 28.* 

κωφός, -7, -dv, (κόπτω to beat, pound), blunted, dull; 
prop. βέλος, Hom. Il. 11, 390; hence a. blunted 
(or lamed) in tongue; dumb: Mt. ix. 32 sq.; xii. 22; 
xv. 30sq.; Lk. i. 22; xi. 14, (Hat. et sqq.; Sept. for obs 
Hab. ii. 18). b. blunted, dull,in hearing; deaf: 
Mt. xi. 5; Mk. vii. 32, 37; ix. 25; Lk. vii. 22, (Hom. 
h. Mere. 92; Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for 
wn, Ex. iv. 11; Is. xliii. 8; Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 14, 
etc.).* 


A 


λαγχάνω : 2 aor. ἔλαχον: 1. to obtain by lot (fr. 
Hom. down): with gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 9 [ef. B. 269 
(231); W. 319 (299)]; to receive by divine allotment, 
obtain: ri, Acts i. 17; 2 Pet. i. 1; on the constr. of this 
verb w. gen. and ace. of the thing, see Matthiae ὃ 328; 
W. 200 (188); [cef. B. § 132, 81. 2. to cast lots, 
determine by lot, (Isocr. p. 144 b.; Diod. 4, 63, [ef. ps.- 
Dem. in Mid. p. 510, 26]): περί τινος, Jn. xix. 24.* 


Λάζαρος, -ov, 6, (rabb. 79, apparently the same as 
“158, whom God helps [ef. Philo, quis haeres § 12]: 
acc. to others, i. 4. My x5 without help), Zazarus; Ὶ. 
an inhabitant of Bethany, beloved by Christ and raised 
from the dead by him: Jn. xi. 1 sqq. 43; xii. 1 sq. 9 sq 
17. 2. an imaginary person, extremely poor and 
wretched: Lk. xvi. 20, 23-25.* 

λάθρα [so RGTTr] (in Hom. λάθρῃ, fr. λανθάνω. 


λαῖλαψ 


λαθεῖν), and L [WH ΚῸ (see the latter’s Praef. p. xii. and 
s. v. εἰκῆ)} λάθρᾳ (fr. AdOpos, -a, -ov, cf. Passow [esp. L. 
and S.}s.v.; W. 47; B. 69 (61)), adv. secretly: Mt. 
i 19; ii. 7; Jn. xi. 28; Acts xvi. 37. (From Hom. 
down; Sept.) * 

λαῖλαψ ([1, T Tr WH] not λαίλαψ [Grsb.], ef. W. § 6, 
Le.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37 sq.; [Chandler 
$620; Tuf. Proleg. p. 101]), ταπος, ἡ [masc. in x* Mk. iv. 
37; ef. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 226, 4], a whirlwind, 
tempestuous wind: 2 Pet.ii.17; λαῖλαψ ἀνέμου (cf. Germ. 
Sturmwind ; ἄνεμος σὺν λαίλαπι πολλῇ, Hom. Il. 17, 57), 
a violent attack of wind [A. V. a storm of wind], a squall 
[(see below)], Mk. iv. 37; Lk. viii. 23. (Sept. Job xxi. 
18; xxxviii. 1; Sap. v. 15, 24; Sir. xlviii. 9.) [Ace. to 
Schmidt (ch. 55 § 13), A. is never a single gust, nor a 
steadily blowing wind, however violent; but a storm 
breaking forth from black thunder-clouds in furious gusts, 
with floods of rain, and throwing everything topsy-turvy ; 
ace. to Aristot. de mund. 4 p. 395", 7 it is ‘a whirlwind 
revolving from below upwards.’ ] * 

AAKQ and Aakew, see λάσκω. 

Aaxritw, (fr. adv. λάξ, with the heel); [fr. Hom. down]; 
to kick, strike with the heel: Acts xxvi. 14, and Ree. in 
ix. 5; see κέντρον, 2." 

λαλέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐλάλει, plur. ἐλάλουν; 
fut. AaAjow; 1 aor. ἐλάλησα; pf. λελάληκα; Pass., pres. 
λαλοῦμαι; pf. λελάλημαι; 1 aor. ἐλαλήθην; 1 fut. λαληθή- 
copa; [ἴτ. Soph. down]; found in bibl. Grk. much more 
freq. than in prof. auth., in Sept. times without number for 
739 or 135, more rarely for V8; prop. to uller a sound 
(ef. [onomatop. /a-/a, ete.] Germ. lallen), to emit a voice, 
make one’s self heard ; hence to utter or form words with 
the mouth, to speak, haying reference to the sound 
and pronunciation of the words and in general the 
form of what is uttered, while λέγω refers to the 
meaning and substance of what is spoken; hence 
λαλεῖν is employed not only of men, esp. when chatting 
and prattling, but also of animals (of birds, Mosch. 3, 47 ; 
of locusts, Theoer. 5, 34; λαλοῦσι μέν, οὐ φράζουσι δέ, of 
dogs and apes, Plut. mor. ii. p. 909 a.), and so of inani- 
mate things (as trees, Theocr. 27, 56 (57); of an echo, 
Dio C. 74, 21, 14). Accordingly, everything λεγόμενον 
is also λαλούμενον, but not everything λαλούμενον is also 
λεγόμενον (Eupolis in Plut. Ale. 13 λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνα- 
τώτατος λέγειν) ; [the difference between the words is 
evident where they occur in proximity, e. g. Ro. iii. 19 
ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει, τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ λαλεῖ, and the very com. 
ἐλάλησεν ..- λέγων, Mt. xiii. 3, etc.]. Moreover, the 
primary meaning of λαλεῖν, to utter one’s self, enables us 
easily to understand its very frequent use in the sacred 
writers to denote the utterances by which God indicates 
or gives proof of his mind and will, whether immediately 
or through the instrumentality of his messengers and 
heralds. [Perhaps this use may account in part for the 
fact that, though in classic Grk. dad. is the term for 
light and familiar speech, and so assumes readily a dis- 
paraging notion, in bibl. Grk. it is nearly if not quite free 
from any such suggestion.] Cf. Dav. Schulz die Geis- 


368 


λαλέω 


tesgaben der ersten Christen, p. 94 sqq.; Tittmann de 
Synonymis N. T. p. 79 sq.; Trench, Syn. § Ixxvi.; [and 
on class. usage Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1]. But let us look 
at the N. T. usage in detail: 

1. to uller a voice, emit a sound: of things inanimate, 
as βρονταί, Rev. x.4; with ras ἑαυτῶν φωνάς added, each 
thunder uttered its particular voice (the force and mean- 
ing of which the prophet understood, ef. Jn. xii. 28 sq.), 
ib. 3; σάλπιγγος λαλούσης per’ ἐμοῦ, λέγων (Ree. λέγουσα) 
foll. by direct disc. Rey. iv.1; of the expiatory blood of 
Christ, metaph. fo crave the pardon of sins, Heb. xii. 245 
of the murdered Abel, long since dead, i. q. to call for 
vengeance (see Gen. iv. 10, and cf. κράζω, 1 fin.), Heb. 
xi. 4 ace. to the true reading λαλεῖ [GLTTrWH; the 
Ree. λαλεῖται must be taken as pass., in the exceptional 
sense to be talked of, lauded; see below, 5 fin. (πρᾶγμα 
κατ᾽ ἀγορὰν λαλούμενον, Arstph. Thesm. 578, cf. πάντες 
αὐτὴν λαλοῦσιν, Alciphro frag. 5, ii. p. 222, 10 ed. Wag- 
ner) |. 2. to speak, i. 6. to use the tongue or the faculty 
of speech; to utter articulate sounds: absol. 1 Co. xiv. 11; 
of the dumb, receiving the power of speech, Mt. ix. 33; 
xii. 22; xv. 31; Lk. xi. 14; Rev. xiii. 15; (τοὺς [T Tr WH 
om.]) ἀλάλους λαλεῖν, Mk. vii. 37; ἐλάλει ὀρθῶς, ib. 35; of a 
dumb man, μὴ δυνάμενος λαλήσαι, Lk. i. 20 (of idols, στόμα 
ἔχουσι κ- ov λαλήσουσι, Ps. cxili. 13 (exv. 5); cxxxiv. 16; 
cf. 3 Mace. iv. 16); to speak, i. e. not to be silent, opp. to 
holding one’s peace, λάλει k. μὴ σιωπήσῃς, Acts xviii. 
9; opp. to hearing, Jas. i. 19; opp. to the soul’s inner 
experiences, 2 Co. iv. 13 fr. Ps. exv. 1 (exvi. 10); opp. to 
ποιεῖν (as λόγος to ἔργον q. v. 3), Jas. ii. 12. 3. to 
talk; of the sound and outward form of speech: τῇ ἰδίσ 
διαλέκτῳ, Acts ii. 6; ἑτέραις καιναῖς γλώσσαις, ib. 4; Mk. 
xvi. 17 [here Tr txt. WH txt. om. xaw.], from which the 
simple γλώσσαις λαλεῖν, and the like, are to be distin- 
guished, see γλῶσσα, 2. 4. to utter, tell: with acc. 
of the thing, 2 Co. xii. 4. 5. to use words in order 
to declare one’s mind and disclose one’s thoughts; to speak: 
absol., ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, Mt. xii. 46; xvil.5; xxvi. 47; 
Mk. v. 35; xiv. 43; Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47, 60; with the 
advs. κακῶς, καλῶς, JN. XVili. 23; ὡς νήπιος ἐλάλουν, 1 Co. 
xiii. 11; ὡς δράκων, Rev. xiii. 11; στόμα πρὸς στόμα, face 
to face (Germ. miindlich), 2 Jn. 12 (after the Hebr. of 
Num. xii. 8); εἰς ἀέρα λαλεῖν, 1 Co. xiv. 9; ἐκ τοῦ περισ- 
σεύματος τῆς καρδίας TO στόμα λαλεῖ, Out of the abundance 
of the heart the mouth speaketh, sc. so that it expresses 
the soul’s thoughts, Mt. xii. 34; Lk. vi. 45; ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων 
λαλεῖν, to utter words in accordance with one’s inner 
character, Jn. viii. 44. with ace. of thething: τί λαλήσω, 
λαλήσητε, etc., what I shall utter in speech, ete., Jn. xii. 
50; Mt. x. 19; Mk. ix. 6 [here T Tr WH ἀποκριθῇ | ; 
xiii. 11; τί, anything, Mk. xi. 23 LT Trtxt. WH; Ro. 
xv. 18; 1 Th. i. 8; οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί λαλεῖ, what he says, 
i. 6. what the words uttered by him mean [WH br. ri 
λαλ.7, Jn. xvi. 18; ταῦτα, these words, Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn. 
viii. 30; xvii. 1, 13; 1 Co. ix. 8; τὸ λαλούμενον, 1 Co. 
xiv. 9; plur. Acts xvi. 14 (of the words of a teacher) ; 
τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον, Mk. v. 36 [see B. 302 (259) note]; 
λόγους, 1 Co. xiv. 19; ῥήματα, Jn. viii. 20; Acts x. 44; 


haréw 5 


παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 33; βλασφημίας, Mk. ii. 7 [LT Tr 
WH βλασφημεῖ]); Lk. v. 21; ῥήματα βλάσφημα εἴς τινα, 
Acts vi. 11; ῥήματα (Rec. adds βλάσφημα) κατά τινος, 
Acts vi. 13; σκληρὰ κατά τινος, Jude 15; ὑπέρογκα, ib. 16 
(Dan. [Theodot.] xi. 36) ; τὰ μὴ δέοντα, 1 Tim. v. 13 (ἃ 
μὴ θέμις, 2 Mace. xii. 14; εἴς twa τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα, 3 
Mace. iv. 16; [ef. W. 480 (448) ]); διεστραμμένα, Acts 
xx. 30; τὸ ψεῦδος, Jn. viii. 44; δόλον, 1 Pet. iii. 10 fr. 
Ps, xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; ἀγαθά, Mt. xii. 34; σοφίαν, 1 Co. 
ii. 6 sq.; μυστήρια, ib. xiv. 2; foll. by dre (equiv. to περὶ 
τούτου, ὅτι ete. to speak of this, viz. that they knew him 
[see ὅτι, I. 2 sub fin.]), Mk. i. 834; Lk. iv. 41; contrary 
to classic usage, foll. by direct disc., Mk. xiv. 31 L txt. 
TTr WH; Heb.v.5; xi. 18, (but in these last two pass. 
of the utterances of God); more correctly elsewhere 
ἐλάλησε λέγων (in imitation of Hebr. 7982 3 [ef. 
above (init.)]), foll. by direct disc.: Mt. xiv. 27; xxiii. 
1; xxviii. 18; Jn. viii. 12; Acts viii. 26; xxvi. 31; 
xxviii. 25; Rev. xvii. 1; xxi. 9; λαλοῦσα x. λέγουσα, 
Rey. x. 8. λαλῶ with dat. of pers. to speak to one, ad- 
dress him (esp. of teachers): Mt. xii. 46; xxiii. 1; Lk. 
xxiv. 6; Jn. ix. 29; xv. 22; Acts vii. 38, 44; ix. 27; 
ΧΙ loi ΧΧΙΡ 9.) ΧΧΠΙ 9. EL. vile 1s 1 (Ὁ. 111 1... ave 
21,28; 1 ΤῊ. 11. 16; Heb. i. 2 (1); of one commanding, 
Mt. xxviii. 18; Mk. xvi. 19; fo speak to, i. e. converse 
with, one [ef. B. § 133, 1]: Mt. xii. 46, [47 but WH mre. 
only]; Lk. i. 22; xxiv. 32; Jn. iv. 26; xii. 29; ἑαυτοῖς 
(dat. of pers.) ψαλμοῖς x. ὕμνοις (dat. of instrument), 
Eph. v. 19; οὐ λαλεῖν τινι is used of one who does not 
answer, Jn. xix. 10; to accost one, Mt. xiv. 27; λαλῶ τί 
τινι, to speak anything to any one, to speak to one about 
a thing (of teaching): Mt. ix. 18; Jn. viii. 25 (on which 
see ἀρχή, 1 b.); x.6; xiv. 25; xv. 11; xviii. 20 sq.; 2 
Co. vii. 14; ῥήματα, Jn. vi. 63; xiv. 10; Acts xiii. 42; 
οἰκοδομὴν x. παράκλησιν, things which tend to edify and 
comfort the soul, 1 Co. xiv. 3; of one promulgating a 
thing to one, τὸν νόμον, pass. Heb. ix. 19; λαλῶ πρός τινα, 
to speak unto one: Lk. i. 19; [ii. 15 Lmre. TWH]; 
Acts iv. 1; viii. 26; ix. 29; xxi. 39; xxvi. 14 [RG], 
26, 31; Heb. v. 5, (78 137, Gen. xxvii. 6; Ex. xxx. 11, 
17, 22); Adyous πρός τινα, Lk. xxiv. 44; ἐλάλησαν πρὸς 
αὐτοὺς εὐαγγελιζόμενοι ... Ἰησοῦν, Acts xi. 20; ὅσα ἂν 
λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Acts ili. 22; σοφίαν ἔν τισιν, wisdom 
among ete. 1 Co. ἰϊ. 6 ; Aad. μετά τινος, fo speak, converse, 
with one (cf. B. § 133, 3]: Mk. vi. 50; Jn. iv. 27; ix.37; 
xiv. 30; Rev. i. 12; x. 8; xvii. 1; xxi. 9,15; λαλεῖν 
ἀλήθειαν μετὰ etc. to show one’s self a lover of truth in 
conversation with others, Eph. iv. 25 [ef. Ellicott]; 
λαλεῖν περί τινος, concerning a person or thing: Lk. ii. 33; 
ix. 11; Jn. vii. 13; viii. 26; xii. 41; Acts ii. 313; Heb. 
ii. 5; iv. 8; with τινί, dat. of pers., added, Lk. ii. 38; 
Acts xxii. 10; τὶ περί τινος, Acts xxviii. 21; Lk. ii. 17; 
eis τινα περί τινος (gen. of the thing), to speak something 
as respects a person concerning a thing, Heb. vii. 14 
RG; εἴς τινα περί w. gen. of pers., ibid. L T Tr WH. 
Many of the exx. already cited show that λαλεῖν is freq. 
used in the N. T. of teachers, —of Jesus, the apostles, 
and others. To those pass. may be added, Lk. v. 4; Jn. 


9 λαλιά 


i. 37; vii. 46; viii. 80, 38; xii. 50; Acts vi. 10; xi. 15; 
xiv. 1,9; xvi. 14; 1 Co. xiv. 34 sq.; 2Co. ii. 17; Col. 
iv. 3; 1 Th. ii. 4; 1 Pet. iv. 11; with παρρησίᾳ added, 
Jn. vii. 26; xvi. 29; ἐπὶ ὀνόματι ᾿Ιησοῦ, Acts v. 40, cf. 
iv. 17, see ἐπί, B. 2 a. B.; τῷ ὀνόματι κυρίου [where L T 
Tr WH prefix ἐν], of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 (see ὄνομα, 
2f.); τινὶ (to one) ἐν παραβολαῖς, Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 34; 
ἐν παροιμίαις, Jn. xvi. 25; ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ, to speak from my- 
self (i. 6. utter what I myself have thought out), Jn. xii. 
49; ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ (see ἀπό, II. 2 ἃ. aa. p. 59»), In. vii. 17 
sq-; xiv.10; xvi.13; ἐκ τῆς γῆς (see ἐκ, II. 2 sub fin.), 
Jn. iii. 31; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, 1 In. iv. 5 (see κόσμος, 6); ἐκ 
θεοῦ, prompted by divine influence, 2 Co. ii. 17; λαλεῖν 
τὸν λόγον, to announce or preach the word of God or the 
doctrine of salvation: Mk. viii. 32; Acts xiv. 25 [here 
in T WH mrg. foll. by εἰς τὴν Πέργην ; see eis, A. 1. 5 b.j; 
xvi. 6; Phil. i. 14, etce.; τὸν Ady. τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts iv. 29, 
313; τινὶ τ. λόγον, Mk. ii. 2; Acts xi.19; with παραβολαῖς 
added, Mk. iv. 33; τινὶ τὸν Ady. τοῦ κυρίου [WH txt. 
θεοῦ), Acts xvi. 32 (Barn. ep. 19, 9); τινὶ τ. Noy. τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Acts xiii. 46; Heb. xiii. 7; τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. 
iii. 34; τὰ pnp. τῆς ζωῆς, Acts v. 20; πρός τινα τὸ evayy. 
τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Th. ii. 2; λαλεῖν x. διδάσκειν τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 
[RG κυρίου], Acts xviii. 25; τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
Col. ἵν. 8... λαλεῖν is used of the O. T. prophets utter- 
ing their predictions: Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts iii. 24; 
xxvi. 22 [cf. B. § 144, 20, and p. 301 (258)]; 2 Pet.i. 
21; Jas. v.10; of the declarations and prophetic an- 
nouncements of God: Lk.i.45,55; Jn. ix. 29; Acts vii. 
6; esp.in the Ep. to the Heb.: i. 1, 2 (1); iii. 5; iv. 8; 
xi. 18; xii. 25; God, the Holy Spirit, Christ, are 
said λαλεῖν ἔν τινι : Heb. i. 1, 2 (1); Mt. x. 20; 2 Co. 
xiii. 3; διὰ στόματός twos, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21; διὰ 
Hoaiov, Acts xxviii. 25; of the sayings of angels: Lk. 
ii. 17, 20; Jn. xii. 293 Acts x.7; xxiii. 9; xxvii. 25; 
the Holy Spirit is said λαλήσειν what it will teach the 
apostles, Jn. xvi. 13; ὁ νόμος as amanifestation of 
God is said λαλεῖν τινε what it commands, Ro. iii. 19; 
finally, even voices are said λαλεῖν, Acts xxvi. 14 
[RG]; Rev. i. 12; x. 8. i. 4. to make known by speak- 
ing, to speak of, relate, with the implied idea of extolling: 
Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. xxiv. 36; Acts iv. 20; 
[cf. Heb. xi. 4 Ree. (see 1 fin. above) ]. 6. Since 
λαλεῖν strictly denotes the act of one who utters words 
with the living voice, when writers speak of them- 
selves or are spoken of by others as λαλοῦντες, they are 
conceived of as present and addressing their readers 
with the living voice, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 8; 2 Co. xi. 
17,23; xii. 19; Heb. ii. 5; vi.9; 2 Pet. iii. 16, or λαλεῖν 
is used in the sense of commanding, Heb. vii. 14. The 
verb λαλεῖν is not found in the Epp. to Gal. and 2 Thess. 
{[Comp.: δια-, éx-, xara-, mpoo-, συλ-λαλέω; cf. the cat- 
alocue of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 60.] 

λαλιά, -Gs, ἡ, (Addos, ef. Bittm. Ausf. Sprchl. § 119 
Anm. 21), in prof. auth. [fr. Arstph. down] loquacity, 
talkativeness, talk (Germ. Gerede) [see λαλέω, init.]; in 
a good sense conversation; in the N. T. 1. speech, 
i.q.story: Jn. iv. 42. 2. dialect, mode of speech, pro- 


λαμά 3 


nunciation, [W. 23]: Mk. xiv. 70 Rec.; Mt. xxvi. 73; 
speach which discloses the speaker’s native country: hence 
of the speech by which Christ may be recognized as hay- 
ing come from heaven, Jn. viii. 43 [where cf. Meyer].* 

λαμά [RG (on the accent see Tdf Proleg. 102)] in 
Mt. xxvii. 46 and Aaupa [RG] Mk. xv. 34, (the Hebr. 
word 719 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii) 1), why; in the former 
pass. Lehm. reads λημά, in the latter λεμά, Tdf. λεμά in 
both, Tr WH λεμά in Mt. but λαμά in Mk.; the form in 
nor ε reproduces the Chald. 829 or 79; on the re- 
markable diversity of spelling in the codd. ef. Taf. on 
each pass., [WH on Mt. |. c.], and Fritzsche on Mk. p. 
693." 

λαμβάνω; impf. ἐλάμβανον; fut. λήψομαι, (LT Tr WH 
λήμψομαι, an Alexandrian form; 568 8. v. M, μ); 2 aor. 
ἔλαβον (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after B*] ἐλάβατε, 
1 Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. ἀπέρχομαι, init.), impv. λάβε 
(Rey. x. 8 54.), not λαβέ (W. § 6,1 a.; B. 62 (54)); 
pf. εἴληφα, 2 pers. εἴληφας [and εἴληφες (Rev. xi. 17 
WHI; see xomidw); on the use of the pf. interchangeably 
with an aor. (Rey. v. 7; viii. 5, ete.) οἵ. B. 197 (170) ; 
W. 272 (255); Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Mod. 
Grk. 2d ed. App. §§ 67, 68], ptep. εἰληφώς ; [Pass., pres. 
ptep. λαμβανόμενος ; pf. 3 pers. sing. εἴληπται, Jn. viii. 4 
ὙΠ το. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times 
for n>), very often for 8wW3, also for 729 and several 
times for 108; [fr. Hom. down]; 

I. to take,i.e. 1. to take with the hand, lay hold 
of, any pers. or thing in order to use it: absol., where 
the context shows what is taken, Mt. xxvi. 26; Mk. xiv. 
22; (τὸν) ἄρτον, Mt. xxvi. 26; Acts xxvii. 35; τὸ βιβλίον, 
Rey. νυ. 7-9, [see B. and W. u. s.]; μάχαιραν (grasp, 
lay hand to), Mt. xxvi. 52, and in many other exx. 
After a circumstantial style of description (see a» 
ίστημι, 11. 1 6.) in use from Hom. down (ef. Passow 8. v. 
C.; [L. and 5. 5. v. I. 11]; Matthiae § 558, Anm. 2; [W. 
8 65, 4 c.]), the ptep. λαβών with ace. of the object is 
placed before an act. verb where it does not always seem 
to us necessary to mention the act of taking (as λαβὼν 
κύσε χεῖρα [cf. our ‘he took and kissed’], Hom. Od. 24, 
398): Mt. xiii. 31, 33; xvii. 27; Mk. ix. 36; Lk. xiii. 19, 
21; Jn. xii. 3; Acts ii. 23 Rec.; ix. 25; xvi. 3; λαβὼν τὸ 
αἷμα... τὸν λαὸν ἐρράντισε (equiv. to τῷ αἵματι . . . τὸν 
λ. ἐρρ.), Heb. ix.19; or the verb λαβεῖν in a finite form 
foll. by καί precedes, as ἔλαβε τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐμαστίγωσεν, 
Jn. xix.1; add, 10. 40; xxi.13; Rev. viii.5; αἷβξο λαβεῖν 
τὸν ἄρτον... καὶ βαλεῖν etc., Mt. xv. 26; Mk. vii. 27; 
ἔλαβον... metaph., ἀφορμήν 
(see the word, 2), Ro. vii. 8, 11 ; ὑπόδειγμά τινός (gen. 
of the thing) τινα, to take one as an example of a thing, 
for imitation, Jas. v. 10; to take in order to wear, τὰ 
ἱμάτια, i. 6. to put on: Jn. xiii. 12 (ἐσθῆτα, ὑποδήματα, 
Hadt. 2, 37; 4, 78); μορφὴν δούλου, Phil. ii. 7. to take 
in the mouth: something to eat, Jn. xiii. 30; Acts ix. 19; 
1 Tim. iv. 4, (cf. Lat. cibum capio, to take food); to take 
anything to drink, i. 6. drink, swallow, ὕδωρ, Rev. xxii. 
17; to drink, τὸ ὄξος, Jn. xix. 30; οὐκ ἔλαβε, he did not 
take it, i. 6. refused to drink it, Mk. xv. 23. to take 


καὶ ἐποίησαν, Jn. xix. 23. 


0 λαμβάνω 


up a thing to be carried; to take upon one’s self: τὸν 
σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, Mt. x. 38 [Lmrg. ἄρῃ]; to take with one for 
Suture use: ἄρτους, Mt. xvi. 5,7; λαμπάδας, Mt. xxv. 1; 
ἔλαιον μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ibid. 3. 2. to take in order to carry 
away: without the notion of violence, τὰς ἀσθενείας, i. 6. 
to remove, take away, Mt. viii. 17; with the notion of 
violence, to seize, take away forcibly: Mt. v.40; Rev. iii. 
11; τὴν εἰρήνην ἐκ [Rec. ἀπὸ, (WH br. ἐκ)] τῆς γῆς. Rev. 
vi. 4. 3. to take what is one’s own, to take to one’s 
self, to make one’s own; a. to c.aim, procure, for one’s 
self: ri, Jn. iii. 27 (opp. to what is given); ἑαυτῷ Bavi- 
λείαν, Lk. xix. 12; with ace. of the pers. fo associate with 
one’s self as companion, attendant, ete.: λαβὼν τ. σπεῖραν 
ἔρχεται. taking with him the band of soldiers (whose aid 
he might use) he comes, Jn. xviii. 3 (στρατὸν λαβὼν 
ἔρχεται, Soph. Trach. 259); λαμβ. γυναῖκα, to take i. e. 
marry a wife, Mk. xii. 19-22; Lk. xx. 28-31, (Gen. iv. 
19, οἷς. ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 16; Eur. Ale. 324; with ἑαυτῷ 
added, Gen. iv. 19; vi. 2, and often). b. of that 
which when taken is not let go, like the Lat. capio, i. q. 
to seize, lay hold of, apprehend: twa, Mt. xxi. 35, 39; 
Mk. xii. 3, 8, and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; trop τί, 1. 6. fo get possession of, obtain, a thing, 
Phil. iii. 12 [ef. W. 276 (259)]; metaph., of affections 
or evils seizing on a man (Lat. capio, occupo): τινὰ ἔλα- 
Bev ἔκστασις, Lk. v. 26; φόβος, Lk. vii. 16 (very often so 
even in Hom., as τρόμος ἔλλαβε γυῖα, 1]. 3, 34; μὲ ἵμερος 
αἱρεῖ, 3, 446; χόλος, 4, 23; Sept. Ex. xv. 15; Sap. xi. 
13 (12)); πνεῦμα (i. 6. a demon), Lk. ix. 39; πειρασμός, 
1 (Co: x. 15: ec. to take by craft (our catch, used of 
hunters, fishermen, etc.) : οὐδέν, Lk. v. 5; trop. τινά, to 
circumvent one by fraud, 2 Co. xi. 20; with δόλῳ added, 
ib. xii. 16. d. to take to one’s self, lay hold upon, take 
possession of, i. 6. to appropriate to one’s self: ἑαυτῷ τὴν 
τιμήν, Heb. v. 4. e. Lat. capto, catch at, reach after, 
strive to obtain: ti παρά τινος (gen. of pers.), Jn. v. 34, 
41; alternating with ζητεῖν, ib. 44. f. to take a thing 
due acc. toagreement or law, to collect, gather (tribute) : 
τὰ δίδραχμα, Mt. xvii. 24; τέλη ἀπό τινος, ib. 25; δεκάτας, 
Heb. vii. 8 54.; καρπούς, Mt. xxi. 34; παρὰ τῶν γεωργῶν 
ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ, Mk. xii. 2. 4. to take i.e. to admit, 
receive: twa ῥαπίσμασιν, Mk. xiv. 65 LT Tr WH (ef. 
Lat. verberibus aliquem accipere], but see βάλλω, 1; τινὰ 
εἰς τὰ ἴδια, unto his own home [see ἴδιος, 1 b.], Jn. xix. 27; 
els οἰκίαν, 2 on. 10; εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, Jn. vi. 21. to receive 
what is offered; not to refuse or reject: τινά, one, in 
order to obey him, Jn. i. 12; v. 43; xiii. 20; ri, prop., 
to receive, Mt. xxvii. 6; trop. : τὸν λόγον, to admit or re- 
ceive into the mind, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16, (for which 
in Lk. viii. 13 δέχονται) ; τὴν μαρτυρίαν, to believe the testi- 
mony, Jn. iii. 11,32 sq.; τὰ ῥήματά τινος, Jn. xii. 48; xvii. 8. 
In imitation of the Hebr. 0°33 Nw) (on the various senses 
of which in the O. T. cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 915 sq.), 
πρόσωπον λαμβάνω, to receive a person, give him access 
to one’s self, i.e. to regard any one’s power, rank, external 
circumstances, and on that account to do some injustice 
or neglect something: used of partiality ΓΑ. V. to ac- 
cept the person], Lk. xx. 21; with ἀνθρώπου added, Gal 


καμβάνω 


ii. 6, (Lev. xix. 15; Mal. ii. 9, ete.; θαυμάζειν τὸ πρόσωπ.; 
Deut. x. 17; Job xxxii. 22); [cef. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. 
Cail: 5. to take, i. q. to choose, select: τινὰ ἔκ τινων, 
pass. Heb. v. 1. 6. To the signification to take may 
be referred that use, freq. in Grk. auth. also (cf. Passow 
s. v. B. d. fin.; [L. and S. 11. 837), by which λαμβάνειν 
joined to a subst. forms a periphrasis of the verb whose 
idea is expressed by the subst. : λαμβ. ἀρχήν to take be- 
ginning, i. 4. ἄρχομαι to begin, Heb. ii. 3 (Polyb. 1, 12, 9, 
and often; Ael. ν. h. 2, 28; 12, 53, and in other auth.) ; 
λήθην τινός, to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9 (Joseph. antt. 2, 6, 10; 
9,1; 4, 8,44; Ael. v. h. 3,18 sub fin.; h. anim. 4, 35) ; 
imspynolv twos, to be reminded of a thing, 2 Tim. i. 5; 
πεῖράν τινος, to prove anything, i. 6. either to make trial of: 
ἧς sc. θαλάσσης, which they attempted to pass through, 
Heb. xi. 29; or to have trial of, to experience: also with 
gen. of the thing, ib. 36, (in both senses often also in 
class. Grk.; see πεῖρα, and Bleek, Br. a. d. Heb. ii. 2 p. 
811); συμβούλιον λαμβ. to take counsel, i. q. συμβουλεύ- 
εσθαι, (o deliberate (a combination in imitation apparently 
of the Lat. phrase consilium capere, although that sig- 
nifies to form a plan, to resolve): Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; 
XxVii. 1, 7; xxviii. 12; θάρσος, to take, receive, courage, 
Acts xxviii. 15; τὸ χάραγμά τινος, i. q. χαράσσομαί τι, to 
receive the mark of, i. 6. let one’s self be marked or 
stamped with: Rev. xiv. 9,11; xix. 20; xx. 4. 

II. to receive (what is given) ; fo gain, get, obtain: 
absol., opp. to αἰτεῖν, Mt. vii. 8; Lk. xi. 10; Jn. xvi. 24; 
opp. to διδόναι, Acts xx. 35; Mt. x. 8; with ace. of the 
thing, Mt. xx. 9sq.; Mk. x. 30; [Lk. xviii. 30 L txt. 
WHtxt. Trmrg.]; Jn. vii. 39; Acts ii. 38; x. 43; Ro. 
15 ν 11: 1.000:1] 12; 1χ- 21 sqr; 2 (Ὁ: ΣΙ tcuGale 
iii. 14; Heb. ix. 15; [xi. 13 RG, see ἐπαγγελία, 2 b.; 
cf. W. 237 (222)]; Jas. i.12; v.7; 1 Pet. iv. 10; Rev. 
iv. 11; v. 12, and many other exx.; μισθόν, Mt. x. 41; 
Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. iii. 8,14; ἐλεημοσύνην, Acts iii. 3; ἔλεος, 
Heb. iv. 16; τόπον ἀπολογίας, Acts xxv. 16; τὴν ἐπισκο- 
my, Acts i. 20; διάδοχον, Acts xxiv. 27 (successorem ac- 
cipio, Plin. ep. 9, 13); τὸ ἱκανὸν παρά τινος (gen. of pers.), 
Acts xvii. 9 (see ἱκανός, a. fin.) ; of punishments: κρίμα, 
Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 [ef. W. 183 (172)]; 
Lk. xx. 47; Jas. iii. 1; with dat. incommodi added, ἑαυτῷ, 
Ro. xiii. 2 (δίκην, Hdt. 1,115; Eur. Baech. 1312; ποινάς, 
Eur. Tro. 360). 
δομοῦμαι, 1 Co. xiv. 5; περιτομήν, i. q. περιτέμνομαι, Jn. vii. 
23; ri & τινος [2], Jn. i. 16; ἐξ ἀναστάσεως τοὺς νεκρούς, 
substantially i. q. to receive, get back, Heb. xi. 35 [see ἐκ, 
Il. 6]; ἐκ, ἃ part of a thing [see ἐκ, II. 9], Rev. xviii. 4; 
τὶ παρά τινος (gen. of pers.), [Lk. vi. 34 T Tr txt. WH]; 
Jn. x. 18; Acts ii. 33; iii. 5; xx. 24; xxvi. 10; Jas. i. 
7; 1Jn.iii. 22 RG; 2 Jn.4; Rev. ii. 28 (27); ἀπό τινος 
(gen. of pers.), 1 Jn. ii. 27: [iii. 22 LT Tr WH]; on 
the difference betw. παρά and ἀπό twos λαμβ. cf. W. 
370 (347) note; [B. § 147, 5; yet see Bp. Lehtft. on 
Gal. i. 12]; ὑπό τινος, 2 Co. xi. 24; πῶς εἴληφας, how thou 
hast received by instruction in the gospel, i.e. hast learned, 
Rey. iii. 8. The verb λαμβάνω does not occur in the 
Epp. to the Thess., Philem., Titus, nor in the Ep. of Jude. 


οἰκοδομήν, to receive edifying, i. q. οἶκο- 


371 


“αοδικεία 


[Comp.: ἀνα- ἄντι-, συν-αντι- (-μαι), ἀπο-; ἐπι-, κατα-, μετα", 
παρα-, συν-παρα-, προ-, προσ-, συν-» συν-περι-» ὑπο-λαμβάνω. 
Syn. see δέχομαι, fin. ] 

Λάμεχ, ὁ, (Hebr. 39), Lamech, the father of Noah 
(Gen. v. 25 sqq.): Lk. iii. 36.* 

appa, see λαμά. 

λαμπάς, -ddos, ἡ, (λάμπω, cf. our lamp), [fr. Aeschyl. 
and Thue. down], Sept. for 739; 1. atorch: Rev. 
iv. 5 [where A. V. lamps]; viii. 10. 2. a lamp, the 
flame of which is fed with oil: Mt. xxv. 1, 3 sq. 7sq.; Jn. 
xviii. 3; Actsxx.8. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlvi.; Eders- 
heim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 455 sqq.; Becker, Charicles, 
Se. ix. (Eng. trans. p. 153).]* 

λαμπρός, -d, -dv, (λάμπω) ; a. shining; brilliant: 
ἀστήρ, Rev. xxii. 16 (Hom. Il. 4, 77, ete.) ; clear, transpar- 
ent, Rev. xxii. 1. b. splendid, magnificent, [A. V. 
gorgeous, bright (see below) ]: ἐσθής, Lk. xxiii. 11; Acts 
x. 30; Jas. ii. 2 sq.; λίνον [L Tr WH λίθον], Rev. xv. 
6; Biaowos, xix. 8; neut. plur. splendid [(R. V. sumpt- 
uous) | things, i. e. elegancies or luxuries in dress and 
style, Rev. xviii. 14. The word is sometimes used of 
brilliant and glistening whiteness (hence λαμπρὰ τήβεννα, 
toga candida, Polyb. 10, 4,8; 10,5, 1); accordingly the 
Vuls. in Acts x. 30; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. xv. 6 renders it by 
candidus; and some interpreters, following the Vulg. 
(“indutum veste alba”), understand ‘white apparel’ to 
be spoken of in Lk. xxiii. 11 [A. V. gorgeous; (see 
above) ]; cf. Keim iii. p. 380 note [Eng. trans. vi. 104].* 

λαμπρότης, -ητος, 7, brightness, brilliancy: tov ἡλίου, 
Acts xxvi. 13. [From Hdt. (metaph.) down.]* 

λαμπρῶς, adv., splendidly, magnificently: of sumptuous 
living, Lk. xvi. 19. [From Aeschyl. down.]* 

λάμπω; fut. λάμψω (2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt.T Tr WH); 1 
aor. ἔλαμψα; [fr. Hom. down]; to shine: Mt. v. 15 sq.; 
xvii. 2; Lk. xvii. 24; Acts xii. 7; 2 Co.iv.6. [Comp.: 
€k-, περι-λάμπω. * 

λανθάνω (lengthened form of λήθω) ; 2 aor. ἔλαθον, 
(whence Lat. latere); Sept. several times for D4 3, ete.; 
[fr. Hom. down]; to be hidden: Mk. vii. 24; Lk. viii. 47; 
τινά, to be hidden from one, Acts xxvi. 26; 2 Pet. iii. 5 
(on which see θέλω, 1 sub fin.), 8; ace. to the well- 
known classic usage, joined in a finite form to a ptep. 
i. q. secretly, unawares, without knowing, (cf. Matthiae 
§ 552 B.; Passow 8. v. ii. p. 18°; [L. and 5. 5. v. A. 2]; 
W. § 54,4; [B. § 144, 14]): ἔλαθον ξενίσαντες, have un- 
awares entertained, Heb. xiii. 2. [Comp.: ék-, ἐπι- 
(-par).J* 

λαξευτός, -7, -dv, (fr. λαξεύω, and this fr. λᾶς a stone, 
and ξέω to polish, hew), cut out of stone: μνῆμα, Lk. xxiii. 
53, and thence in Evang. Nicod. e. 11 fin.; (once in 
Sept., Deut. iv. 49; Aquila in Num. xxi. 20; xxiii. 14; 
Deut. xxxiv. 1; [ Josh. xiii. 20]; nowhere in Grk. auth.).* 

Λαοδικεία [-κία TWH (see I, «); RGLTr accent 
-δίκεια, cf. Chandler ὃ 104], -as. ἡ, Laodicea, a city of 
Phrygia, situated on the river Lycus not far from Co- 
loss. After having been successively called Diospolis 
and Rhoas, it was named Laodicea in honor of Laodice, 
the wife of Antiochus II. [Β. c. 261-246]. It was de 


“Ιαοδικεύς 


stroyed by an earthquake, a. p. 66 [or earlier, see Bp. 
Lghtft. Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 38 sq.], together 
with Colossi and Hierapolis (see Κολοσσαί) ; and after- 
wards rebuilt by Mareus Aurelius. It was the seat of a 
Christian church: Col. ii. 1; iv. 18, 15 sq. [(on the ‘ Ep. 
to (or ‘from’) the Laodiceans’ see Bp. Lghift. Com. 
τι. 5. pp. 274-300)]; Rev. i. 11; iii. 14, and in the [Rec.] 
subscription of the 1 Ep. to Tim. [See Bp. Lghtft. Com. 
on Col. and Philem. Intr. § 1; Forbiger, Hndbch. d. 
alten Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 347 sq.]* 
“Λαοδικεύς, -€ws, ὁ, a Laodicean, inhabitant of Laodicea: 
Col. iv. 16, and Ree. in Rev. iii. 14.* 
λαός, -ov, ὁ, [(cf. Curtius § 535)]; Sept. more than 
fifteen hundred times for Dy; rarely for ‘42 and px); 
[fr. Hom. down]; people; 1. a people, tribe, nation, 
all those who are of the same stock and language: univ. 
of any people; joined with γλῶσσα, φυλή, ἔθνος, Rev. v. 
9; vii. 9; x.11; xi. 9; xiii. 7 [Ree. om.]; xiv. 6; xvii. 15, 
(see γλῶσσα, 2); πάντες of λαοί, Lk. ii. 31; Ro. xv. 11; 
esp. of the people of Israel: Mt. iv. 23; xiii. 15; Mk. vii. 
6; Lk. ii. 10; Jn. xi. 50 (where it alternates with ἔθνος) ; 
xviii. 14; Acts iii. 23; Heb. ii. 17; vii. 11, ete.; with 
Ἰσραήλ added, Acts iv. 10; distinguished fr. τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, 
Acts xxvi. 17, 23; Ro. xv. 10; the plur. λαοὶ Ἰσραήλ 
[R. V. the peoples of Is.] seems to be used of the tribes 
of the people (like oD), Gen. xlix. 10; Deut. xxxii. 8; 
Is. iii. 13, ete.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was ap- 
parently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its reference to Christ, 
ef. 25); of πρεσβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ, Mt. xxi. 23; xxvi. 3, 
47; xxvii. 1; of γραμματεῖς τοῦ λαοῦ, Mt. ii. 4; of πρῶτοι 
τοῦ λαοῦ, Lk. xix. 47; τὸ πρεσβυτέριον τοῦ λαοῦ, Lk. xxii. 
with a gen. of the 
possessor, τοῦ θεοῦ, αὐτυῦ, pov (i. 6. Tod θεοῦ, Hebr. 
ΤΠ oy, Ὁ ΝΤΙ Dy), the people whom God has chosen 
for himself, selected as peculiarly his own: Heb. xi. 25; 
Mt. ii. 6; Lk.i.68; vii.16; without the art. Jude 5 (Sir. 
xlvi. 7; Sap. xviii. 13); ef. W.§ 19,1; the name is trans- 
ferred to the community of Christians, as that which 
“by the blessing of Christ has come to take the place of 
the theocratic people of Israel, Heb. iv. 9; Rev. xviii. 4; 
particularly to a church of Christians gathered from 
among the Gentiles, Acts xv. 14; Ro. ix. 25 sq.; 1 Pet. 
ii. 10; with eis περιποίησιν added, 1 Pet. ii. 9; περιού- 
σιος, Tit. ii. 14, ef. Acts xviii. 10; Lk.i.17. ὁ λαός the 
people (of Israel) is distinguished from its princes and 
rulers [(1 ἔβαν. i. 10; v.45; Judith viii. 9,11; ete.)], 
Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xi. 32 [here WH Tr mrg. read ὄχλος] ; 
xiv. 2; Lk. xx. 19; xxii. 2; xxili.5; Acts v. 26, etc.; from 
the priests, Heb. v. 3; vii. 5, 27. 2. indefinitely, 
of a great part of the population gathered together any- 
where: Mt. xxvii. 25; Lk. i. 21; iii. 15; vii. 1,293 viii. 
47; ix.13; xviii. 43, ete.; τὸ πλῆθος τοῦ λαοῦ, Lk. i. 10. 
[The Gospels of Mk. and Jn. use the word but three 
times each. Syn. see δῆμος, fin. ] 
λάρυγξ, -γγος, 6, the throat (Etym. Magn. [557, 16]: 
λάρυγξ μὲν SC οὗ λαλοῦμεν . .. φάρυγξ δὲ δι’ οὗ ἐσθίομεν 
x. πίνομεν) : of the instrument or organ of speech (as 
Ps. v.10; Prov. viii. 7; Sir. vi. 5 (4)), Ro. iii. 13, where 


66; ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ, Acts iv. 8. 


872 


λατρεύω 


the meaning is, their speech threatens and ἱπιρσθοϑῖθ: 
destruction to others. (Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Galen. 
al.; Sept. several times for 172; oftener for 7m, the 
palate.) * 

Λασαία, -as, ἡ, (Lchm. ἴλλασσα, Tr WH Λασέα (see 
WH. App. p. 160], Vulg. Thalassa), Las@a, Acts xxvii. 
8, a city of Crete not mentioned by any ancient geograph- 
ical or other writer. But this need not excite surprise, 
since probably it was one of the smaller and less impor- 
tant among the ninety or a hundred cities of the island; 
ef. Kuinoel ad loc. [Its site was discovered in 1856, 
some five miles to the E. of Fair Havens and close to 
Cape Leonda; see Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul, 
(3d ed. p. 259 sq.) 4th ed. p. 262 sq.; Alford, Grk. Test. 
vol. ii. Proleg. p. 27 sq.]* 

λάσκω: 1 aor. ἐλάκησα; (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Sprehl. ii. p. 
233; Kriiger ii. 1, p. 134; Kiihner § 848, i. p. 858; 
[Veitch s. v.]; W. 88 (84)); 1. to crack, crackle, 
crash: Hom., Hes., Tragg., Arstph. 2. to burst 

asunder with a crack, crack open: Acts i. 18; ὃ δράκων 
φυσηθεὶς (after having sucked up the poison) ἐλάκησε 
καὶ ἀπέθανε καὶ ἐξεχύθη ὁ ids αὐτοῦ καὶ ἡ χολή, Act. 
Thomae § 33, p. 219 ed. Tdf.* 

λατομέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐλατόμησα; pf. pass. ptep. λελατο- 
μημένος ; (fr. λατόμος a stone-cutter, and this fr. Ads a 
stone, and τέμνω) ; to cul stones, to hew out stones: Mt. 
xxvii. 60; Mk. xv. 46. (Sept. several times for 2¥n; 
once for 73, Ex. xxi. 33 sqq.; Diod., [Dion. H., Strab., 
al. (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Justin Mart.) * 

λατρεία, -as, ἡ, (λατρεύω, ἡ. V-) ; 1. in Grk. auth. 
service rendered for hire; then any service or ministra- 
tion (Tragg., Plut., Leian.); the service of God: τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Plat. apol. 23 b.; καταφυγεῖν πρὸς θεῶν εὐχάς τε καὶ 
λατρείας, ibid. Phaedr. p. 344 6. ; servitus religionis, quam 
λατρείαν Graeci vocant, August. civ. dei 5, 15. 2. 
in the Grk. Bible, the service or worship of God acc. to 
the requirements of the levitical law (Hebr. ΠΣ», Ex. xii. 
25 sq., etc.): Ro. ix. 4; Heb. ix. 1, (1 Mace. ii. 19, 22); 
λατρείαν προσφέρειν τῷ θεῷ [to offer service to God] i. q. 
θυσίαν προσφέρειν eis λατρείαν [to offer a sacrifice in 
service], Jn. xvi. 2; ἐπιτελεῖν τὰς λατρείας, to perform the 
sacred services (see ἐπιτελέω, 1), spoken of the priests, 
Heb. ix. 6; univ. of any worship of God, ἡ λογικὴ A. Ro. 
xii. 1 [ef. W. § 59, 9 a.]; (of the worship of idols, 1 Mace. 
i. 43).* 

λατρεύω ; fut. λατρεύσω ; 1 aor. eAdrpevoa; (λάτρις ἃ 
hireling, Lat. /atro in Enn. and Plaut.; λάτρον hire) ; 
in Grk. writ. a. to serve for hire; b. univ. fo 
serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of 
slaves and of freemen; in the N. T. to render religious 
service or homage, to worship, (Hebr. 123, Deut. vi. 13; 
x. 12; Josh. xxiv. 15); in a broad sense, λατρ. θεῷ: Mt. 
iv. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7; 
xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix.14; Rev. vii.15; xxii. 3; 
of the worship of idols, Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx. 
5; xxiii. 24; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the 
manner of worshipping are these: θεῷ [so R ΑἸ λατρεύειν 

| πνεύματι (dat. of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3, 


λάχανον 


but LT Tr WH have correctly restored πνεύματι θεοῦ, 
i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that 
the dat. of the pers. (τῷ θεῷ) is suppressed ; ἐν τῷ πνεύ- 
pati μου ἐν τῷ evayy., in my spirit in delivering the glad 
tidings, Ro. i. 9; τῷ θεῷ ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει, 2 Tim. i. 3; 
μετὰ αἰδοῦς καὶ εὐλαβείας or [so L T Tr WH] per’ εὐλαβ. 
x. δέους, Heb. xii. 28; ἐν ὁσιότητι x. δικαιοσύνῃ, Lk. i. 74; 
(without the dat. θεῷ) νηστείαις x. δεήσεσι, Lk. ii. 37; 
λατρεύειν, absol., to worship God [ef. W. 593 (552))}, Acts 
xxvi. 7. in the strict sense; to perform sacred services, 
to offer gifts, to worship God in the observance of the rites 
instituted for his worship: absol., Heb. ix. 9; x. 2; spec. 
of the priests, to officiate, to discharge the sacred office: 
with a dat. of the sacred thing to which the service is 
rendered, Heb. viii. 5; xiii. 10. [(Eur., al.)]* 

λάχανον, -ου, τό, (fr. λαχαίνω to dig; hence herbs grown 
on land cultivated by digging; garden-herbs, as opp. to 
wild plants); any potherb, vegetables: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. 
iv. 32; Lk. xi.42; Ro. xiv.2. (1 K. xx. (xxi.) 2; Gen. 
ix. 3; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 2,etc.; Arstph., Plat., Plut., 
ale 

AcBBatos, see Θαδδαῖος. 

λεγεών and (so T, Tr [but not in Mt. xxvi. 53], WH 
{see fin.], also Lchm. in Mk. v. 9, 15) λεγιών (cf. Tdf. ed. 
7 Proleg. p. 1.; [esp. ed. 8 p. 83; B. 16 (15)]; so, too, 
in inserr. in Boeckh; [Diod., Plut., al.]), -@vos, 7, (a Lat. 
word), a legion (a body of soldiers whose number differed 
at different times, and in the time of Augustus seems to 
have consisted of 6826 men [i. e. 6100 foot, and 726 
horse]): Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. v. 9, 15; Lk. viii. 30 [here 
WHI (ex errore) λεγίων (cf. Chandler § 593)].* 

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and 
pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 
56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in 
Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miil- 
ler in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius 
§ 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, 
gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enu- 
merate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. 
ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join 
words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see 
under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 
[yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. 
s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. 
use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 
728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 
1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to speak: 
Acts xiii. 15; xxiv. 10; to say, foll. by direct disc., Mt. ix. 
34; xii. 44; xvi. 2 [here T br. WH reject the pass.]; Mk. 
iii. 30; Lk. v. 39 [WH br. the cl.]; Jn. i. 29, 38; [1 Co. 
xii. 3 LT Tr WH]; Jas. iv. 13, and very often; the di- 
rect discourse is preceded by ὅτι recitative, Mt. ix. 18 [T 
om. ὅτι]; Mk. i. 15 [Tom. WH br. déy.]; ii. 12 [L and 
WH br. Aéy.]; iii. 21 sq.; v. 28 ; vi. 14 sq. 35; vii. 20; Lk. 
i. 24; iv. 41; xvii. 10; Jn. vi. 14; vii. 12; viii. 33; ix. 9, 
41; xvi. 17; Acts ii. 13; xi. 3; Heb. x. 8; Rev. iii. 17, 
ete.; foll. by ace. with inf., Lk. xi. 18; xxiv. 23; Jn. xii. 
29; Acts iv. 32; xxviii. 6, etc.; foll. by ὅτι, Lk. xxii. 70; 


373 


λέγω 


Jn. viii. 48; xviii. 37; 1 Tim. iv. 1, (for other exx. see 
2 a. below); foll. by an indir. question, Mt. xxi. 27; 
MS αι 1335 Τὰς xc, 8: b. The N. T. writers, par- 
ticularly the historical, are accustomed to add the verb 
λέγειν foll. by direct disc. to another verb which already 
contains the idea of speaking, or which states an opin- 
ion concerning some person or thing; as ro pndév... 
προφήτου λέγοντος, Mt. ii. 175; viii. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 35; 
κηρύσσων x. [L Τ WIlom. Trbr. καὶ] λέγων, Mt. iii. 2; 
κράζειν καὶ λέγειν, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x. 47; Lk. 
iv. 41 [here L T Tr mrg. κραυγάζειν]; Acts xiv. 15; προσ- 
φωνεῖν x. λέγειν, Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 325; ἀπεκρίθη καὶ 
λέγει, Mk. vii. 28; αἰνεῖν τ. θεὸν x. λέγειν, Lk. ii. 13; 
γογγύζειν x. λέγειν, Jn. vi. 42. to verbs of speaking, 
judging, etc., and those which denote in general the 
nature or the substance of the discourse reported, 
the ptcp. λέγων is added (often so in Sept. for 7x? 
[W. 535 sq. (499), ef. 602 (560)]) foll. by direct disc. : 
ἀπεκρίθη λέγων, Mt. xxv. 9, 44 sq.; Mk. ix. 38 [T WH 
om. λέγων] ; Acts xv. 13; Rey. vii. 13, ete. (see ἀποκρί- 
vopat, 1 c.); εἶπε X., Mk. [viii. 28 TWH Tr mre.]; xii. 
26; Lk. xx. 2, (in Grk. writ. ἔφη λέγων); ἐλάλησε λέγων 
(see λαλῶ, 5); ἐμαρτύρησε, In. i. 32; κέκραγε X. ib. 15; 
ἐδίδασκε A. Mt. v. 2; [ἐβόησε or] ἀνεβόησε X., Mt. xxvii. 
46; Lk. ix. 38; ἀνέκραξε X., Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34 [T 
WH om. Tr br. Aéy.]; also after ddew, Rev. v. 9; xv. 3; 
αἴρειν [or ἐπαίρ.] φωνήν, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts xiv. 11; θαυ- 
patew, Mt. viii. 27; ix. 33; xxi. 20; after προφητεύειν, 
Mt. xv. 7; γογγύζειν, Mt. xx. 12; εἶπεν ἐν παραβολαῖς, 
Mt. xxii. 1; παρέθηκε παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 24; διεμαρτύ- 
pato, Heb. ii. 6; ἐπήγγελται, Heb. xii. 26, and a great 
many other exx. It is likewise added to verbs of every 
kind which denote an act conjoined with speech; as 
ἐφάνη, φαίνεται λέγων, Mt. i. 20; i113; προσεκύνει λέγων, 
Mt. viii. 2; 1χ. 18; xiv. 88; xv. 25; add, Mt. viii. 3; ix. 
29; xiv. 15; Mk.v. 35; Lk.i.66; v. 8; viii. 38; x.17; 
xv. 9; xviii. 3; xix. 18; Acts viii. 10, 18 sq.; xii. 7; 
xxvii. 23 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 35, οἴο. On the other hand, the 
verb λέγω in its finite forms is added to the participles 
of other verbs: Mt. xxvii. 41; Mk. viii. 12; xiv. 45, 63, 
67; xv. 35; Lk. vi. 20; Jn. i. 36; ix. 8; Acts ii. 13; 
Heb. viii. 8; ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει, Mk. viii. 29; ix. 5, 19; x 
24,513 xi. 22, 33[L Tr mrg. br. T Tr WH om. dz.]; Lk. 
iii. 11; xi.45; xiii. 8, (nowhere so in Acts. nor in Mt. 
nor in Jn.); κράξας λέγει, Mk. v. 7 [Rec. εἶπε] ; ix. 24. 
ἔγραψε λέγων (VIN? JAD, 2 K. x. 6; 2 5. xi. 15, ete.), 
he wrote in these words, or he wrote these words [A. V. 
retains the idiom, he wrote saying (cf. e. below)]: Lk. 
i. 63; 1 Mace. viii. 31; xi. 57; Joseph. antt. 11, 2, 
2; 13,4,1; exx. fr. the Syriac are given by Gesenius in 
Rosenmiiller’s Repertor. i. p. 135. ἔπεμψε or ἀπέστειλε 
λέγων, i. 6. he ordered it to be said by a messenger: Mt. 
xxii. 16; xxvii. 19; Lk. vii. 19sq.; xix. 14; Jn. xi. 3; 
Acts xiii. 15; xvi. 35, (see in εἶπον, 3 b.); otherwise in 
Mt. xxi. 37; Mk. xii. 6. c. ἡ φωνὴ λέγουσα: Mt. iii. 
17; xvii. 5; Lk. iii. 22 [GL T Tr WHom. déy.]; Rev. 
vi. 6; x. 4,8; xii. 10; xiv. 13, ete. λέγειν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, 
Rev. v. 12; viii. 13; ἐν φωνῇ p., ib. xiv. 7, 9, ἃ. In 


λέγω 


accordance with the Hebr. conception which regards 
thought as internal speech (see εἶπον, 5), we find λέγειν 
ἐν ἑαυτῷ, to say within one’s self, i. e. to think with one’s 
self: Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21; Lk. iii. 8; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, 
Rev. xviii. 7. e. One is said fo speak, λέγειν, not only 
when he uses language orally, but also when he ex- 
presses himself in writing [(cf. b. sub fin.)]: 2 Co. vii. 
3; vili. 8; ix. 3,4; xi. 16, 21; Phil. iv.11, and often in 
Paul; so of the writers of the O. T.: Ro. x. 16, 20; xi. 9; 
xv. 12; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Ro. iv. 3; x.11; xi. 2; Jas. ii. 23, 
ete.; and simply λέγει, sc. λέγουσα, i. 6. ἡ γραφή (our i is 
said): Ro. χν. 10, [11 L Trmrg.]; Gal. iii. 16; Eph. iv. 
8; v. 14; cf. W. 522 (486 sq.) and 588 (547); B. § 129, 
16; λέγει, sc. ὁ θεός, 2 Co. vi. 2; λέγει Δαυὶδ ἐν ψαλμῷ, 
Acts xiii. 35; λέγει ὁ θεός, Heb. ν. 6; ἐν τῷ ‘Qané, Ro. 
ix. 25; ἐν Ἡλίᾳ, Ro. xi. 2; ἐν Δαυΐδ, Heb. iv. 7; λέγει 
τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, Heb. iii. 7; ὁ νόμος λέγει, 1 Co. xiv. 
$4; ri, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii. 19: f. λέγειν is used of 
every variety of speaking: as of inquiry, Mt. ix. 
14; xv.1; xvii. 25; xviii. 1; Mk. ii. 18; v. 30 sq.; Lk. 
iv. 22: vii. 20; Jn. vil. 11; ix. 10; xix. 10; Ro. x. 18 
sq-; xi. 1, 11, ete.; foll. by εἰ interrog. [see εἰ, II. 2], Acts 
xxi. 37; λέγει τις, i 4. one bids the question be asked, 
Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 11; of reply, Mt. xvii. 25; xx. 
7; Mk. viii. 24 [Lmrg. εἶπεν] ; Jn. i. 21; xviii. 17; of 
acclaim, Reyv.iv. 8, 10; of exclamation, Rev. xviii. 
10,16, of entreaty, Mt. xxv. 11; Lk. xiii. 25; i. q. 
to set forth in language, make plain, Heb. v. 11. g. 
λέγω w. ace. of the thing. 10 say a thing: 6, Lk. ix. 33 (i. 
6. not knowing whether what he said was appropriate 
or not); Lk. xxii. 60; to express in words, Philem. 21 ; 
τοῦτο, Jn. vill. 6; xii. 33; τοιαῦτα, Heb. xi. 14; ταῦτα, 
Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27, 45; xiii. 17; Jn. v. 84; Acts xiv. 
18; 1 Co. ix. 8; τάδε (.eferring to what follows), Acts 
xxi. 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12, 18, ili. 1, 7,14; ri, what? Ro. 
x. 8; xi. 4; Gal. iv. 30; 1 Co. xiv. 16; πολλά, Jn. xvi. 
12; τὰ λεγόμενα, Lk. xviii.34; Acts xxviii. 24: Heb. viii. 
1; ὑπό twos, Acts viii. 6; xiii. 45 [LT Tr WH λαλου- 
μένοις): Xxvii. 11; λέγω ἀλήθειαν, Jn. viii. 45 sq.; Ro. 
ix. 1; 1 Tim. ii. 7; ἀληθῆ, In. xix. 35; ἀνθρώπινον, Ro. 
vi. 19; σὺ λέγεις, sc. αὐτό, prop. thou sayest, i. 6. thou 
grantest what thou askest, equiv. to it is justas thou sayest ; 
to be sure, certainly, [see εἶπον, 1 c.]: Mt. xxvii. 11; Mk. 
xv. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3, cf. xxii. 70; Jn. xviii. 37, [(all these 
pass. WH mrg. punctuate interrogatively)]; παραβολήν, 
to put forth, Lk. xiv. 7; τὸ αὐτό, to profess one and the 
same thing, 1 Co. i. 10 ef. 12. h. with dat. of the 
pers. to whom anything is said: foll. by direct discourse, 
Mt. viii. 20; xiv. 4; xviii. 82; xix.10; Mk. ii. 17, 27; 
vii. 9; viii. 1; Jn. i. 43 (44), ii. 10, and scores of other 
exx. ; λέγειν τινί" κύριε, κύριε, to salute any one as lord, 
Mt. vii. 21; impv. λέγε μοι, Acts xxii. 27 (generally 
εἰπέ μοι, ἡμῖν) ; plur. Lk. x.9; ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, I solemnly 
declare to you, (in the Gospels of Mt. Mk. and 1,Κ.}:; for 
which the Greek said ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας λέγω ὑμῖν. Lk. iv. 25, 
and λέγω ὑμῖν ἀληθῶς, ib. ix. 27; in Jn. everywhere 
[twenty-five times, and always uttered by Christ] ἀμὴν 
ἀμὴν λέγω σοι (ὑμῖν), I most solemnly declare to thee 


914 


λέγω 


(you), i. 51 (52); iii. 11, ete.; with the force of δὴ 
asseveration λέγω τινί, without ἀμήν: Mt. xi. 225 
xii. 86; xxiii. 39; Lk. vii. 9,28; x. 12; xii.8; xvii. 84; 
XViii. 8,145 ναὶ λέγω ὑμῖν, Mt. xi.9; Lk. vii. 265 xi. 51; 
xii. 5; λέγω oot, Lk. xii. 59. with a dat. of the thing, 
in the sense of commanding (see 2 6. below), Mt. 
xxi. 19; Lk. xvii. 6; inthe sense of asking, implor- 
ing, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rev. vi-16. λέγω τινί τι, to tell a thing 
toone: Mt. x. 27; 2 Th. it. 5; τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Jn. xvi. 7; 
μυστήριον, 1 Co. xv. 51; παραβολήν, Lk. xviii. 1; of a 
promise, Rey. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6; i. q. lo unfold, ex- 
plain, Mk. x. 32; foll. by indirect dise., Mt. xxi. 27; Mk. 
xi. 33; Lk. xx. 8; τινί τινα, to speak to one about one, 
Jn. viii. 27; Phil. iii. 18. i. λέγω foll. by preposi- 
tions: πρός twa, which denotes — either to one (equiv. to 
the dat.): foll. by direct disc., Mk. iv. 41; x. 26; Lk. 
Vill. 20+) 1χ. 255 KVL 1; oN. ie 8.) Lily 4: ἵν. Το νἱ- ὃ» 
viii. 31; Acts ii. 7 [Β ΟἹ, 13: xxviii. 4, 17; foll. by ὅτι 
recitative, Lk. iv. 21; πρός τινά τι, Lk. xi. ὅ8 RG L Tr 
mrg.; xxiv 10;—oras respects one, in reference to one [ οἵ. 
Β. § 133, 3; W.§ 31,5; 405 (378); Kriiger § 48, 7, 135 
Bleek on Heb. i. 7: Meyer on Ro. x. 21]: Lk. xii. 41; 
Heb. i. 7, [4]. add 8, 13; vii. 21]; μετά twos, to speak 
with one, Jn. xi. 56, περί τινος, of, concerning, one [efi 
W. § 47, 4], Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. i. 47 (48); ii. 21; xi. 13; 
xiii. 18, 22; Heb. ix. 5; περί τινος, ὅτι, Lk. xxi. δ; τὶ 
περί τινος, Jn. i. 22; ix. 17; Acts viii. 34; Tit. 11. 8 ; τινὶ 
περί τινος, Mt. xi. 7, Mk. i. 80; viii. 30 [Lehm. εἴπωσιν] ; 
πρός twa περί twos, Lk. vii. 24; ὑπέρ τινος, to speak for, 
on behalf of, one, to defend one, Acts xxvi. 1 [L T Tr 
WH mrg. περί]: ἐπί twa, to speak in reference to, of 
[see ἐπί, C. 1. 2 g. yy.; B. § 147, 23], one, Heb. vii. 13; 
eis τινα (τὶ βλασφημῶν), against one, Lk. xxii. 65; in 
speaking to have reference to one, speak with respect to 
one, Acts ii. 25 [ef. W. 397 (371)]; in speaking to refer 
(athing) to one, with regard to, Eph. v. 32; εἰς τὸν κόσμον, 
to the world (see εἰς, A. I. 5 b.), Jn. viii. 26 [1 T Tr WH 
λαλῶ]. k. with adverbs, or with phrases having ad- 
verbial force: καλῶς, rightly, In. vili.48; xili.13; ὡσαύ- 
τως, Mk. xiv. 31; τὶ κατὰ συγγνώμην, ἐπιταγήν, by way of 
advice [concession (see συγγνώμη)], by way of command, 
1 Co. vii. 6; 2 Co. viii. 8; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον [see ἄνθρωπος, 
1c.], Ro. iii.5; Gal. iii. 15; 1 Co.ix.8; Λυκαονιστί, Acts 
xiv. 11. In conformity with the several contexts where 
it is used, λέγω, like the Lat. dico, is 2. specifi- 
cally a. i. 4. to asseverate, affirm, aver, maintain: 
foll. by an ace. with inf., Mt. xxii. 23; Mk. xii.18; Lk. 
xx. 413 xxiii. 2; xxiv. 23; Acts v. 36; viii. 9; xvii. 7; 
xxviii. 6; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 18; Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9; 
with the included idea of insisting on, περιτέμνεσθαι (that 
you must be [ef. W. § 44,3 b.; B.§ 141, 2]), Acts xv. 
24 Rec.; with the simple inf. without a subject-ace., Lk. 
xxiv. 23; Jas. ii. 14; 1 Jn.ii. 6,9; foll. by ὅτε (where 
the ace. with inf. might have been used), Mt. xvii. 10; 
Mk. ix. 11; xii, 35; Lk. ix. 7; Jn. iv. 20; xii. 84; 1 Co. 
xy. 12; λέγω τινὶ ὅτι ete. to declare to one that ete. [ef. B. 
§ 141,1]: Mt.iii.9; v. 20,22; xii. 36; xiii.17; xvii. 12; 
xxi. 43 [WH mrg. om. ὅτε]: xxvi. 21; Mk. ix.13; xiv. 18 


λεῖμμα 


25,80; Lk. iii. 8; x.12; xiii. 35 [Tr WH om. Lbr. ὅτι]; 
xiv. 24; xviii. 8; xix. 26, 40 [WH txt. om. Tr br. ὅτε] ; 
xxi. 3; xxii. 16, 37, ete.; Jn. iii. 11; v. 34 54. ; viii. 34; 
x. 7 [Tr WHom. L br. ὅτι]; xvi. 20; Gal. v. 2; λέγω 
τινά, ὅτι, by familiar attraction [cf. W. § 66, 5a.; B. 
§ 151, 1] for λέγω, ὅτι τις : Jn. viii. 54; ix.19; x. 36 
(where for ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι οὗτος, ὃν . . . ἀπέστειλε, Ba- 
σφημεῖ; the indirect discourse passes into the direct, and 
βλασφημεῖς is put for βλασφημεῖ [Β. § 141, 1)). b. 
1. q. to teach: with dat. of pers. foll. by direct dise., 1 Co. 
vii. 8,12; ri τινι, Jn. xvi. 12; Acts i. 3; τοῦτο foll. by 
ὅτι, 1 Th. iv. 15. c. to exhort, advise; to command, 
direct: with an acc. of the thing, Lk. vi. 46; λέγουσι (se. 
αὐτά) x. ov ποιοῦσιν, Mt. xxiii. 3; τί τινι, Mk. xiii. 37; 
Jn. ii. 5; τινί foll. by an imperative, Mt. v. 44; Mk. ii. 
11; Lk. vii. 14; xi. 9; xii.4; xvi.9; Jn.11.8; xiii. 29; 
1 Co. vii. 12; λέγω with an inf. of the thing to be done 
or to be avoided [cf. W. § 44,3 b.; B. § 141, 2]: Mt. 
v. 34, 39; Acts xxi. 4, 21; Ro. ii. 22; xii. 3; foll. by 
ἵνα, Acts xix. 4; περί twos (gen. of the thing) foll. by 
iva, 1 Jn. v. 16, (see ἵνα, 11. 2 b.); foll. by μή with subjune. 
2 Co. xi. 16. in the sense of asking, seeking, entreating : 
with dat. of pers. foll. by an impv., 1 Co. x. 15; 2 Co. 
vi. 13; foll. by an inf. [W. 316 (296 sq.); B.u.s.], Rev. 
x. 9 [Rec. impv.]. χαίρειν τινὶ λέγω, to give one a greet- 
ing, bid him welcome, salute him, 2 Jn. 10 sq. (see χαίρω, 
fin.). ἃ. to point out with words, intend, mean, mean 
to say, (often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 308; 
[L. and 5. 5. v. C. 107) : τινά, Mk. xiv. 71; Jn. vi. 71; 
ti, 1 Co. x. 29; τοῦτο foll. by direct disc., Gal. iii. 17; 
τοῦτο foll. by ὅτι, 1 Co. i. 12. e. to call by a name, to 
call, name; i. ἃ. καλῶ twa with ace. of pred.: ri pe λέγεις 
ἀγαθόν; Mk. x.18; Lk. xviii. 19; add, Mk. xii. 37; Jn.v. 
18; xv.15; Acts x. 28; [1 Co. xii. 3 RG]; Rev. ii. 20; 
pass. with predicate nom.: Mt. xiii. 55; 1 Co. viii. 5; 
Eph. ii. 11; 2 Th. ii. 4; Heb. xi. 24; ὁ λεγόμενος, with 
pred. nom. he that is surnamed, Mt. i. 16 (so xxvii. 17) ; 
x. 2; Jn. xx. 24; Col. iv. 11; he that is named: Mt. ix. 
9; xxvi. 3, 14; xxvii. 16; Mk.xv.7; Lk. xxii. 47; Jn. 
ix. 11; cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 31 sq.; of things, places, 
Cities, etc.: τὸ ὄνομα λέγεται, Rev. viii. 11; ptep. called, 
Mt. ii. 23; xxvi. 36; xxvii. 33; Jn. iv. 5; xi. 54; xix. 
13; Acts iii. 2; vi. 9; Heb. ix.3; with €8paiori added, 
Jn. xix. 13,17; [cf.v. 2 Tdf.]; applied to foreign words 
translated into Greek, in the sense that is: Mt. xxvii. 
33; Jn.iv. 25; xi. 16; xxi. 2; also λέγεται, Jn. xx. 16; 
ὃ λέγεται ἑρμηνευόμενον [L TrWH μεθερμ. 1. Jn. i. 38 (39); 
διερμην. λέγεται, Acts ix. 36. f. to speak out, speak 
of, mention: τί, Eph. v.12 (with which cf ὀκνῶ καὶ λέγειν, 
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 c.); [Mk. vii. 36 T Trtxt. WH. On 
the apparent ellipsis of λέγω in 2 Co. ix. 6, ef. W. 596 
sq. (555) ; B. 394 (338). Comp. : ἀντι-, δια- (-par), ἐκ-, 
ἐπι-, kata-, παρα- (-pat), mpo-, συλ-λέγω; cf. the catalogue 
of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1, 60.] 

λεῖμμα [WH λίμμα, see their App. p. 154 and cf. I, ¢], 
-τος, τό, (λείπω), a remnant: Ro. xi. 5. (Hat. 1, 119; 
Plut. de profect. in virtut. c.5; for NNw, 2 K. xix. 4.) * 

λεῖος, -e/a, -eiov, [(cf. Lat. levis)], smooth, level: opp. 


375 


λειτουργία 


to τραχύς, of ways, Lk. iii. 5. (Is. χ]. 4 Alex.; Prov. ii. 
20; 1S. xvii. 40; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * 

λείπω; [2 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. Airy, Tit. iii. 13 TWH 
mrg.; pres. pass. λείπομαι; fr. Hom. down]; 1. 
trans. to leave, leave behind, forsake; pass. to be left be- 
hind (prop. by one’s rival in a race, hence), a. to 
lag, be inferior: ἐν μηδενί, Jas. i. 4 (Hdt. 7, 8, 1); [al. 
associate this ex. with the two under b.]. b. to be 
destitute of, to lack: with gen. of the thing, Jas. i. 5; ii. 
15, (Soph., Plat., al.). 2. intrans. to be wanting ΟἹ 
absent, to fail: λείπει τί τινι, LK. xviii. 22; Tit. iii. 13, 
(Polyb. 10, 18, 8; al.); τὰ λείποντα, the things that re- 
main [so Justin Mart. apol. 1, 52, ef. 32; but al. are 
wanting], Tit. i. 5. [Comp.: ἀπο-, δια-, éx-, ἐπι-, κατα-, 
ἐν-κατα-, Tept-, ὑπο-λείπω.] * 

λειτουργέω, ptep. λειτουργῶν; 1 aor. inf. λειτουργῆσαι; 
(fr. λειτουργός, q- V-) ; 1. in Attic, esp. the orators, 
to serve the state at one’s own cost; to assume an office 
which must be administered at one’s own expense; to dis 
charge a public office at one’s own cost; to render public 
service to the state, (cf. Melanchthon in Apol. Confes. 
August. p. 270 sq. [Corpus Reformat. ed. Bindseil (post 
Bretschn.) vol. xxvii. p. 623, and F. Francke, Conf. Luth., 
Pt. i. p. 271 note (Lips. 1846)]; Wolf, Dem. Lept. p. 
Ixxxv. sqq.; Béckh, Athen. Staatshaush. i. p. 480 sqq. ; 
Liibker, Reallex. des class. Alterth. [or Smith, Dict. of 
Grk. and Rom. Antiq.] 5. v. λειτουργία). 2. univ. 
to do a service, perform a work; Vulg. ministro, [A. V. 
to minister | ; a. of the priests and Levites who were 
busied with the sacred rites in the tabernacle or the 
temple (so Sept. often for NW; as Num. xviii. 2; Ex. 
XXviil. 31, 39; xxix. 30; Joeli. 9, ete.; several times for 
32y, Num. iv. 37,39; xvi.9; xviii. 6 sq.; add, Sir. iv.14 
[xlv. 15; 1. 14; Judith iv. 14]; 1 Mace. x. 42; [Philo, 
vit. Moys. iii. 18; ef. ὑμῖν λειτουργοῦσι x. αὐτοὶ τὴν λει- 
τουργίαν τῶν προφητῶν x. διδασκάλων (of bishops and 
deacons), Teaching of the Twelve A post. c. 15 (ef. Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2 ete.) ]): Heb. x. 11. 
of Christians serving Christ, whether by prayer, or by 
instructing others concerning the way of salvation, or in 
some other way: Acts xiii. 2; ef. De Wetteadloc. ο. 
of those who aid others with their resources, and re- 
lieve their poverty: τινὶ ἔν τινι, Ro. xv. 27, cf. Sir. x. 25.* 

λειτουργία, -as, 7), (fr. λειτουργέω, q. V-) 1. prop. 
a public office which a citizen undertakes to administer at 
his own expense: Plat. legg.12 p. 949 c.; Lys. p. 163, 22; 
Isoer. p. 391 d.; Theophr. Char. 20 (23), 5; 23 (29), 4, 
and others. 2. univ. any service: of military ser- 
vice, Polyb.; Diod. 1, 63.73; of the service of work- 
men, c. 21; of that done to nature in the cohabitation 
of man and wife, Aristot. oec. 1, 3 p. 1343", 20. 3. in 
biblical Greek a. the service or ministry of the priests 
relative to the prayers and sacrifices offered to God: Lk. i. 
23; Heb. viii. 6; ix. 21, (for WWay, Num. viii. 22; xvi. 9; 
xviii. 4; 2 Chr. xxxi. 2; Diod. 1,21; Joseph.; [Philo de 
caritat. § 1 sub fin.; al.; see Soph. Lex. 8. v.]); hence 
the phrase in Phil. ii. 17, explained 8. v. θυσία, b. fin. 
[(ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44)]. Ὁ. a 


b. A. τῷ κυρίῳ, 


λειτουργικός 


gift or benefaction, for the relief of the needy (see λει- 
roupyéw, 2 c.): 2 Co. ix. 12; Phil. ii. 80." 


3876 


λευκός 


τό, a scale, husk, bark); 1. in Grk. writ. scaly, 
rough. 2. specifically, leprous, affected with leprosy, 


λειτουργικός, -7, -dv, (λειτουργία), relating to the perform- | (Sept. several times for y ¥n and pix; [Theophr. 


ance of service, employed in ministering: σκεύη, Num. iv. 
[12], 26, ete.; στολαί, Ex. xxxi. 10, ete.; πνεύματα, of 
angels executing God’s behests, Heb. i. 14; also ai λειτ. 
τοῦ θεοῦ δυνάμεις, Ignat. ad Philad. 9 (longer recension) ; 
τὸ πᾶν πλῆθος τῶν ἀγγέλων αὐτοῦ, πῶς τῷ θελήματι αὐτοῦ 
λειτουργοῦσι παρεστῶτες, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 5, cf. 
Dan. (Theodot.) vii. 10. (Not found in prof. auth.) * 

λειτουργός, -ov, 6, (fr. ΕΡΓῺ i. 6. ἐργάζομαι, and unused 
λεῖτος i. 4. λήϊτος equiv. to δημόσιος public, belonging to 
the state (Hesych.), and this trom λεώς Attic for λαός), 
Sept. for nw (Piel ptep. of Nw); 1. a public 
minister; a servant of the state: τῆς πόλεως, Inserr.; of 
the lictors, Plut. Rom. 26; (it has not yet been found in 
its primary and proper sense, of one who at Athens as- 
sumes a public office to be administered at his own ex- 
pense [cf. L. and S.s. v. 1.1; see Aetroupyew). 2. 
uniy. @ minister, servant: so of military laborers, often 
in Polyb.; of the servants of aking, 1 K. x.5; Sir. x. 2; 
[of Joshua, Josh. i. 1 Alex.; univ. 2S. xiii. 18 (ef. 17)]; 
of the servants of the priests, joined with ὑπηρέται, Dion. 
Hal. antt. 2, 73; τῶν ἁγίων, of the temple, i. 6. one busied 
with holy things, of a priest, Heb. viii. 2, οἵ. [Philo, alleg. 
leg. iii. § 46]; Neh. x. 39; Sir. vii. 80; τῶν θεῶν, of 
heathen priests, Dion. H. 2, 22 cf. 73; Plut. mor. p.417 a.; 
Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, of Paul likening himself to a priest, Ro. 
xv. 16; plur. τοῦ θεοῦ, those by whom God administers 
his affairs and executes his decrees: so of magistrates, 
Ro. xiii. 6; of angels, Heb. i. 7 fr. Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4 [cf. 
Philo de caritat. § 3]; τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, those whose 
ministry the grace of God made use of for proclaiming 
to men the necessity of repentance, as Noah, Jonah: 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 1 cf. ο. 7; τὸν ἀπόστολον καὶ λει- 
τουργὸν ὑμῶν τῆς χρείας μου, by whom ye have sent to 
me those things which may minister to my needs, Phil. 
ii. 25." 

[λεμά, see Aaya. } 

λέντιον, -ov, τό, (a Lat. word, linteum), a linen cloth, 
towel (Arr. peripl. mar. rubr. 4): of the towel or apron, 
which servants put on when about to work (Suet. Calig. 
26), Jn. xiii. 4 sq.; with which it was supposed the 
nakedness of persons undergoing crucifixion was cov- 
ered, Ev. Nicod. ο. 10; οἵ. Thilo, Cod. Apoer. p..582 sq.* 

λεπίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (λέπω to strip off the rind or husk, to 
peel, to scale), a scale: Actsix.18. (Sept.; Aristot. al. 
[ef. Hdt. 7, 61].)* 

λέπρα, -as, ἡ, (fr. the adj. λεπρός, 4. v-), Hebr. Apy, 
leprosy (lit. morbid scaliness], a most offensive, annoy- 
ing, dangerous, cutaneous disease, the virus of which 
generally pervades the whole body; common in Egypt 
and the East (Lev. xiii. sq.): Mt. viii. 3; Mk.i.42; Lk. 
v. 12 sq. (Hdt., Theophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) [Cf. Orelli 
in Herzog 2 8. v. Aussatz; Greenhill in Bible Educator 
iv. 76 sq. 174 sq.; Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto s. v.; Eders- 
heim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 492 sqq.; McCl. and S. 5. v.]* 

λεπρός, -οὔ, 6, (as if for Aemepds, fr. λεπίς, λέπος -εος, 


c. Ρ. 2, 6, 4] see λέπρα) : Mt. viii. 2; x. 8; xi. δ; Mk. i 
40; Lk. iv. 27; vii. 22; xvii. 12; of one [(Simon)] who 
had formerly been a leper, Mt. xxvi. 6; Mk. xiv. 3.* 

λεπτός, -7, -dv, (λέπω to strip off the bark, to peel), 
thin; small; τὸ λεπτόν, a very small brass coin, equiv. to 
the eighth part of an as, [A. V. a mite; cf. Alex.’s Kitto 
and B.D.s. v.; ef. #. R. Conder in the Bible Educator, 
iii. 179]: Mk. xii. 42; Lk. xii. 59; xxi. 2; (Alciphr. epp. 
1, 9 adds κέρμα; Pollux, onom. 9, 6, sect. 92, supplies 
vopicpa).” 

Act and Aevis (T Tr (yet see below) WH Aeveis [but 
Lehm. -is; see et, ¢]), gen. Λευΐ (T Tr WH Aevei), ace. 
Aeviv (T WH Aecveiv, so Tr exc. in Mk. ii. 14), [B. 21 
(19); W. § 10, 1], 6, (Hebr. 9 a joining, fr. my, cf. 
Gen. xxix. 34), Levi; 1. the third son of the patri- 
arch Jacob by his wife Leah, the founder of the tribe of 
Israelites which bears his name: Heb. vii. 5,9; [Rev. vii. 
7]. 2. the son of Melchi, one of Christ’s ancestors : 
LK. iii. 24. 3. the son of Simeon, also an ancestor 
of Christ: Lk. iii. 29. 4. the son of Alpheus, a col- 
lector of customs [(A. V. publican)]: Mk. ii. 14 [here 
WH (rejected) mrg. Ἰάκωβον (see their note ad loc., ef. 
Weiss in Mey. on Mt. 7te Aufl. p. 2)]; Lk. v. 27, 29; 
acc. to com. opinion he is the same as Matthew the 
apostle (Mt. ix. 9); but cf. Grimm in the Theol. Stud. 
u. Krit. for 1870 p. 727 sqq.; [their identity is denied 
also by Nicholson on Matt. ix.9; yet see Patritius, De 
Evangeliis, 1. i.e. i. quaest. 1; Venables in Alex.’s Kitto, 
s. v. Matthew; Meyer, Com. on Matt., Intr. § 1].* 

“Λευΐτης (T WH Λευείτης [so Tr exe. in Acts iv. 36; see 
€t,t]),-ov, 6, a Levite ; a. one of Levi’s posterity. _b. 
in a narrower sense those were called Levites (Hebr. 
+14 +13, 019) who, not being of the race of Aaron, for 
whom alone the priesthood was reserved, served as as- 
sistants of the priests. It was their duty to keep the 
sacred utensils and the temple clean, to provide the 
sacred loaves, to open and shut the gates of the temple, 
to sing sacred hymns in the temple, and do many other 
things; so Lk. x. 32; Jn.i.19; Actsiv. 36; [(Plut. quaest. 
conv. I. iv. quaest. 6,5; Philo de vit. Moys. i. § 58). See 
BB.DD. s. ν. Levites; Edersheim, The Temple, 2d ed. 
p- 63 sqq-]* 

Λευϊτικός [T WH Aeverr.; see et, ε7, τή, τόν, Levitical, 
pertaining to the Levites: Heb. vii. 11. [Philo de vit. 
Moys. iii. § 20.]* 

λευκαίνω: 1 aor. ἐλεύκανα [cf. W. § 18, 1 d.; B. 41 
(35)]; (λευκός) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for p37; to 
whiten, make white: ri, Mk. ix. 3; Rev. vii. 14.* 

[λευκοβύσσινον : Rey. xix. 14 WHurg., al. βύσσινον 
λευκ. see in βύσσινος.} 

λευκός, τή, -όν, (λεύσσω to see, behold, look at; akin ta 
Lat. luceo, Germ. leuchten; cf. Curtius p. 113 and § 87; 
[Vanizek p. 8177), Sept. for 139; 1. light, bright, 
brilliant: τὰ ἱμάτια . . . λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς, Mt. xvii. 2; esp. 
bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white: 


λέων 


spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted 
to the splendor of the heavenly state, Mk. xvi.5; Lk. 
ix. 29; Actsi.10; Rev. iii.5; iv.4; vi. 11; vii. 9,13; 
xix. 14, (shining or white garments were worn on festive 
and state occasions, Eccles. ix. 8; οἵ. Heindorf on Hor. 
sat. 2, 2,61); with ὡσεὶ or ὡς ὁ χιών added: Mk. ix. 3 
RL; Mt. xxviii. 3, (ἵπποι λευκότεροι χιόνος, Hom. Il. 10, 
437); ἐν λευκοῖς sc. ἱματίοις (added in Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4), 
Jn. xx.12; Rev. iii. 4; ef. W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)]; 
used of white garmentsas the sign of innocence and purity 
of soul, Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne, Rev. xx. 
11. 2. (dead) white: Mt. ν. 36 (opp. to μέλας) ; 
Rev. i. 14; 11. 17; iv.4; vi.2; xiv. 14; xix.11; spoken 
of the whitening color of ripening grain, Jn. iv. 35.* 

λέων, -ovros, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 8, 778, 
53 (a young lion), ete.; alion; a. prop.: Heb. xi. 
$3; 1 Pet. v.8; Rev. iv. 7; ix. 8,17; χ. 8; xiii. 2. b. 
metaph. ἐρρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος, I was rescued out 
of the most imminent peril of death, 2 Tim. iv. 17 (the 
fiz. does not lie in the word lion alone, but in the whole 
phrase) ; equiv. to a brave and mighty hero: Rev. v. 5, 
where there is allusion to Gen. xlix. 9; cf. Nah. ii. 13.* 

λήθη, -ης, ἡ, (AnOw to escape notice, λήθομαι to forget), 
[fr. Hom. down], forgetfulness: λήθην twos λαβεῖν (see 
λαμβάνω, I. 6), 2 Pet. i. 9.* 

[λημά, see Aaya. | 

Anvés, -ov, 7, (also 6, Gen. xxx. 38, 41 [ef. below]), 
[Theoer., Diod., al.]; 1. a tub- or trough-shaped 
receptacle, vat, in which grapes are trodden ΕΣ V. wine- 
press] (Hebr. 3): Rev. xiv. 20; xix. 15; τὴν Aqvev... 
τὸν μέγαν (for R Tr mrg. τὴν μεγάλην), Rev. xiv. 19—a 
variation in gender which (though not rare in Hebrew, 
see (Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 717) can hardly be matched in 
Grk. writ.; ef. W. 526 (490) and his Exeget. Studd. i. p. 
153 sq.; B. 81 (71). 2. i. q. ὑπολήνιον (Is. xvi. 10; 
Mk. xii. 1) or προλήνιον (Is. v. 2), Hebr. 3p», the lower 
vat, dug in the ground, into which the must or new wine 
flowed “from the press: Mt. xxi. 33. Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Kelter; Roskojf in Schenkel iii. 513; [BB.DD. 5. v. 
Wine-press ].* 

λῆρος, -ov, 6, idle talk, nonsense: Lk. xxiv.11. (4 Mace. 
v. 10; Xen. an. 7,7,41; Arstph., al.; plur. joined with 
παιδιαί, Plat. Protag. p. 347 ἃ. ; with φλυαρίαι, ib. Hipp. 
maj. p. 304 b.) * 

λῃστής, -οῦ, 6, (for ληϊστής fr. ληΐζομαι, to plunder, and 
this fr. Ion. and Epic Ayis, for which the Attics use λεία, 
booty), [fr. Soph. and Hdt. down], a robber; a plun- 
derer, freebooter, brigand: Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48; 
Lk. xxii. 52; Jn. x. 1; xviii. 40; plur., Mt. xxi. 13; xxvii. 
38,44; Mk. xi.17; xv. 27; Lk. x. 30,36; xix. 46; Jn. 
x.8; 2Co.xi. 26. [Not to be confounded with κλέπτης 
thief, one who takes property by stealth, (although the 
distinction is obscured in A. V.); cf. Trench § xliv.]* 

λῆψις (LT Tr WH λῆμψις, see M, 1), -ews, ἡ, (λαμβάνω, 
λήψομαι), [fr. Soph. and Thue. down], a receiving: Phil. 
iv. 15, on which pass. see δόσις, 1." 

λίαν (in Hom. and Ion. λίην), [for λιλαν, Adw to desire ; 
ef. Cur‘ius § 532], adv., greatly, exceedingly: Mt. ii. 16; 


511 


λιθάζω 


ἦν. 8; viii. 28; xxvii.14; Mk.i. 35; ix.3, xvi.2; Lk. 
xxiii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 15; 2Jn.4; 3Jn.3; (2 Mace. xi.1; 
4 Mace. viii. 16; Tob. ix. 4, ete.; for 18, Gen. i. 31; iv. 
5; 18. xi. 15); λίαν ἐκ περισσοῦ, exceedingly beyond 
measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WH om. Tr br. éxzepic.]. See ὑπερ- 
λίαν." 

λίβανος, -ου, 6, (more rarely ἡ [cf. Lob. u. 1.1); aL 
the frankincense-tree (Pind., Hdt., Soph., Eur., Theophr., 
al.). 2. frankincense (Hebr. 7937; Lev. ii. 1 sq.; 
16; Is. lx. 6, ete.): Mt. ii. 11; Rev. xviii. 13; (Soph., 
ΤΠ πος al.). Cf. Lob. ad ey p- 187; iVancek, 
Fremdworter, 5. v. On frankincense see esp. Birdwood 
in the Bible Educator, i. 328 sqq. 374 sqq.] * 

λιβανωτός, -οῦ, ὁ, (λίβανος) ; 1. in prof. auth. 
frankincense, the gum exuding ἐκ τοῦ λιβάνου, (1 Chr. ix. 
29; Hadt., Menand., Eur., Plat., Diod., Hdian.,al.). 2. 
a censer (which in prof. auth. is ἡ λιβανωτίς [or rather 
-τρίς, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 255]): Rev. viii. 3, δ." 

λιβερτῖνος, -ov, 6, a Lat. word, libertinus, i.e. either one 
who has been liberated from slavery, a freedman, or the son 
of a freedman (as distinguished fr. ingenuus, i. e. the son 
of a free man): 4 συναγωγὴ ἡ λεγομένη (or τῶν λεγομένων 
Tdf.) λιβερτίνων, Acts vi. 9. Some suppose these liber- 
tini [A.V. Libertines] to have been manumitted Roman 
slaves, who having embraced Judaism had their syna- 
gogue at Jerusalem ; and they gather as much from Tac. 
Ann. 2, 85, where it is related that four thousand libertini, 
infected with the Jewish superstition, were sent into Sar- 
dinia. Others, owing to the names Κυρηναίων καὶ ᾿Αλε- 
ξανδρέων that follow, think that a geographical mean- 
ing is demanded for λιβερτ., and suppose that Jews are 
spoken of, the dwellers in Libertum, a city or region 
of proconsular Africa. But the existence of a city or 
region called Libertum is a conjecture which has 
nothing to rest on but the mention of a bishop with the 
prefix “libertinensis” at the synod of Carthage a. p. 
411. Others with far greater probability appeal to Philo, 
leg. ad Gaium § 23, and understand the word as denot- 
ing Jews who had been made captives by the Romans 
under Pompey but were afterwards set free; and who, 
although they had fixed their abode at Rome, had built 
at their own expense a synagogue at Jerusalem which 
they frequented when in that city. The name Libertines 
adhered to them to distinguish them from the free-born 
Jews who had subsequently taken up their residence at 
Rome. Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Libertiner; Hausrath in 
Schenkel iv. 38 sq.; [B. Ὁ. 5. v. Libertines. Evidence 
seems to have been discovered of the existence of a 
“ synagogue of the libertines” at Pompeii; ef. De Rossi, 
Bullet. di Arch. Christ. for 1864, pp. 70, 92 sq.] * 

Λιβύη, -ης, ἡ. Libya, a large region of northern Africa, 
bordering on Egypt. In that portion of it which had 
Cyrene for its capital and was thence called Libya Cy- 
renaica (ἡ πρὸς Κυρήνην Λιβύη, Joseph. antt. 16, 6, 1; 4 
A. ἡ κατὰ Κυρήνην [4- v-], Acts ii. 10) dwelt many Jews 
(Joseph. antt. 14, 7,2; 16, 6,1; b.j. 7,11; 6. Apion. 
2, 4 [where cf. Miiller’s notes]): Acts ii. 10.* 

λιθάζω ; 1 aor. ἐλίθασα;; 1 aor. pass. ἐλιθάσθην;: (λίθος); 


λίθινος 


to stone; i. 6. a. to overwhelm or bury with stones, 
(lapidibus cooperio, Cie.) : τινά, of stoning, which was a 
Jewish mode of punishment, (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Steini- 
gung; [B. D.s. v. Punishment, III. a. 1]): Jn. x. 31- 
33 (where λιθάζετε and λιθάζομεν are used of the act of 
beginning ; [cf. W.§ 40,2a.; B. 205 (178) ]); Jn. xi. 8; 
Heb. xi. 37. b. to pelt one with stones, in order either 
to wound or to kill him: Acts xiv. 19; pass., Acts v. 26 
[ef. W.505 (471); B.242(208)]; 2Co.xi.25. (Aristot., 
Polyb., Strab.; λιθάζειν ἐν λίθοις, 2 ὃ. xvi. 6.) [Comp. : 
κατα-λιθάζω. * 

λίθινος, 7, -ov, (λίθος) ; fr. Pind. down; of stone: Jn. 
li. 6; 2 Co. iii. 8; Rev. ix. 20.* 

λιθο-βολέω, -ὦ ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐλιθοβόλουν; 1 aor. 
ἐλιθοβόλησα ; Pass., pres. λιθοβολοῦμαι ; 1 fut. λιθοβολη- 
θήσομαι ; (λιθοβόλος, and this fr. λίθος and βάλλω [cf. W. 
102 (96); 25, 26]); Sept. for 279 and 039; i. g. λιθάζω 
(q- v-), to stone; i. 6. a. to kill by stoning, to stone 
(of a species of punishment, see λιθάζω) : τινά, Mt. xxi. 
355; xxill. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; Acts vii. 58 sq.; pass., Jn. 
viii. 5; ΗΘ. xii. 20. b. to pelt with stones: τινά, 
Mk. xii. 4 [Rec.]; Acts xiv.5. ([Diod. 17, 41, 8]; Plut. 
mor. p. 1011 e.)* 

λίθος, -ov, 6, Sept. for 738, [fr. Hom. down]; a stone: 
of small stones, Mt. iv. 6; vii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; iv. [3], 11; 
ΧΙ. 11; xxii. 41; Jn. viii. 7; plur., Mt. iii. 9; iv.3; Mk. 
v.55 Lk. iii. 8; xix. 40; Jn. viii. 59; x. 31; of a large 
stone, Mt. xxvii. 60, 66; xxviii. 2; Mk.xv.46; xvi. 3 sq.; 
Lk. xxiv. 2; Jn. xi. 38 sq. 41; xx.1; of building stones, 
Mt. xxi. 42,44 [T om. L WH Trmrg. br. the vs.]; xxiv. 
2; Mk. xii.10; xiii. 1 sq.; Lk. xix. 44; xx. 17sq.3 xxi. 
5 sq.; Acts iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 7; metaph. of Christ: λίθος 
ἀκρογωνιαῖος (q. ν.), ἐκλεκτός (ef. 2 Esdr. v. 8), ἔντιμος, 1 
Pet. ii. 6 (Is. xxviii. 16); ζῶν (see (aw, II.b.), 1 Pet. ii. 4; 
λίθος προσκόμματος, one whose words, acts, end, men (so 
stumble at) take such offence at, that they reject him 
and thus bring upon themselves ruin, ibid. 8 (7); Ro. 
ix. 33; of Christians: λίθοι ζῶντες, living stones (see 
(aw, τι. s.), of which the temple of God is built, 1 Pet. ii. 
5; of the truths with which, as with building materials, 
a teacher builds Christians up in wisdom, λίθοι τίμιοι, 
costly stones, 1 Co. iii. 12. λίθος μυλικός, Mk. ix. 42 RG; 
Lk. xvii. 2 LT Tr WH, cf. Rev. xviii. 21. of precious 
stones, gems: AiO. τίμιος, Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. 12,16; xxi. 
11, 19, (2S. xii. 30; 1 K. x. 2,11); ἴασπις, Rev. iv. 3; 
ἐνδεδυμένοι λίθον (for RG Τ' λίνον) καθαρόν, Rey. xv. 6 
LTrtxt. WH (Ezek. xxviii. 13 πάντα [or πᾶν] λίθον 
χρηστὸν ἐνδέδεσαι; [see WH. Intr. ad 1. c.]); but (against 
the reading λίθον) [ οἵ. Scrivener, Plain Introduction ete. 
Ρ. 605]. spec. stones cut in a certain form: stone tab- 
lets (engraved with letters), 2 Co. iii. 7; statues of idols, 
Acts xvii. 29 (Deut. iv. 28; Ezek. xx. 32).* 

\186-crpwros, -ov, (fr. λίθος and the verbal adj. στρωτός 
fr. στρώννυμι), spread (paved) with stones (vupdeiov, Soph. 
Antig. 1204-5); τὸ λιθ., substantively, a mosaic or tes- 
sellated pavement: so of a place near the praetorium or 
palace at Jerusalem, Jn. xix. 13 (see PaBBaa); of places 
in the outer courts of the temple, 2 Chr. vii. 3; Joseph 


818 


rip 


b. j. 6, 1, 8 and 3, 2; of an apartment whose pavement 
consists of tessellated work, Epict. diss. 4, 7, 37, cf. Esth. 
i. 6; Suet. Jul. Caes. 46; Plin. h. n. 36, 60 ef. 64.* 

λικμάω, -: fut. λικμήσω ; (λικμός a winnowing-van) ; 
1. 10 winnow, cleanse away the chaff from grain by win- 
nowing, (Hom., Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.). 2. in a 
sense unknown to prof. auth., /o scatter (opp. to συνάγω, 
Jer. xxxi. (or xxxviii.) 10; add, Is. xvii. 13; Am. ix. 
9). 3. to crush to pieces, grind to powder: τινά, Mt. 
xxi. 44 [RG L br. WH br.]; Lk. xx. 18; ef. Dan. ii. 44 
[Theodot.]; Sap. xi.19 (18). [But in Dan. ]. 6. it repre- 
sents the Aphel of 10 finem facere, and on Sap. 1. c. see 
Grimm. Many decline to follow the rendering of the 
Vulg. (conterere, comminuere), but refer the exx. under 
this head to the preceding.]* 

Aud, so Tdf. ed. 7, for Aaya, q. v. 

λιμήν, -ένος, ὁ, [allied with λίμνη, q. v.; fr. Hom. down], 
a harbor, haven: Acts xxvii. 8, 12; see καλοὶ λιμένες, p. 
322%.* 

λίμνη, -ns, ἡ, (fr. λείβω to pour, pour out [cf. Curtius 
§ 541]), [fr. Hom. down], a lake: Δ. Τεννησαρέτ [q, v-], 
Lk. v. 1; absol., of the same, Lk. v. 2; viii. 22 sq. 33; 
τοῦ πυρός, Rey. xix. 20; xx. 10, 14 sq.; καιομένη πυρί, 
Rey. xxi. 8.* 

λιμός, -od, 6, (and ἡ in Dorie and later writ.; so L T 
Tr WH in Lk. xv. 14; Acts xi. 28; so, too, in Is. viii. 
21; 1 K. xviii. 2; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 188; [L. and 8. 
s. v. init.; WH. App. p. 157°}; B.12 (11); W. 63 (62) 
[ef. 36], and 526 (490)); Sept. very often for 37; hun- 
ger: Lk. xv. 17; Ro. vili. 35; ἐν λιμῷ x. δίψει, 2 Co. xi. 
27; Xen. mem. 1, 4,13; i. q. scarcity of harvest, famine: 
Lk. iv. 25; xv.14; Acts vii. 11; xi. 28 [ef. B. 81 (71)]; 
Rey. vi. 8; xviii. 8; Aol, famines in divers lands, Mk, 
xiii. 8; λιμοὶ «. λοιμοί, Mt. xxiv. 7 [LT Tr txt. WH om. 
κι λοιμ.1; Lk. xxi. 11; Theoph. ad Autol. 2,9; the two 
are joined in the sing. in Hes. opp. 226; Hadt. 7, 171; 
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19; Plut. de Is. et Osir. 47." 

λίνον (Treg. λῖνον [so R Gin Mt. as below], incorrect- 
ly, for « is short; [cf. Lipsews, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 
427), του, τό, Sept. several times for NWI, in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down, flax: Ex. ix. 31; linen, as clothing, Rev. 
xv.6 RG T Trmrg.; the wick of alamp, Mt. xii. 20, after 
Is. xlii. 3.* 

Λίνος (not Aivos [with RG Tr]; see Passow [or L. 
and S.]s.v.; ef. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 42), του, 
6, Linus, one of Paul’s Christian associates ; ace. to eccl. 
tradition bishop of the church at Rome (ef. Hase, Po- 
lemik, ed. 3 p. 131 ; Lipsius, Chronologie ἃ. rom. Bischofe, 
p- 146; (Dict. of Chris. Biog. s. v.]): 2 Tim. iv. 21.* 

λιπαρός, -d, -όν, (λίπα [or rather, λίπος grease, akin to 
ἀλείφω]); fr. Hom. down; fat: τὰ λιπαρά (joined with 
τὰ λαμπρά, 4. V-) things which pertain to a sumptuous 
and delicate style of living [A. V. dainty], Rev. xviii. 
14." 

λίτρα, -ας, 7, α pound, a weight of twelve ounces: Jn. 
xii. 3; xix. 39. [Polyb. 22, 26,19; Diod. 14, 116, 7; Plut. 
Tib. et G. Grac. 2, 3; Joseph. antt. 14, 7,1; al.J* 

Ap, λιβός, 6, (fr. λείβω [to pour forth], because it 


λογία 3 
brings moisture) ; the SW. wind: Hat. 2, 25; 
Polyb. 10, 10, 3; al. 2. the quarter of the heavens 
whence the SW. wind blows: Acts xxvii. 12 [on which 
see βλέπω, 3 and xara, II. 1 ¢.] (Gen. xiii. 14; xx. 1; 
Num. ii. 10; Deut. xxxiii. 23).* 

λογία, -as, ἡ, (fr. λέγω to collect), (Vulg. collecta), a col- 
lection: of money gathered for the relief of the poor, 1 
Co. xvi. 1 sq. (Not found in prof. auth. [ef. W. 25].)* 

λογίζομαι; impf. ἐλογιζόμην ; 1 aor. ἐλογισάμην ; adepon. 
verb with 1 aor. pass. ἐλογίσθην and 1 fut. pass. λογισθή- 
σομαι; in bibl. Grk. also the pres. is used passively (in 
prof. auth. the pres. ptcp. is once used so, in Hdt. 3, 95; 
[ef. Veitch 5. v.; W. 259 (243); Β. 52 (46)]); (λόγος); 
Sept. for 1wn; [a favorite word with the apostle Paul, 
being used (exclusive of quotations) some 27 times in his 
Epp., and only four times in the rest of the N. T.]; x 
(rationes conferre) to reckon, count, compute, calculate, 
count over ; hence a. to take into account, to make ac- 
count of: τί τινι, Ro. iv. 3, [4]; metaph. to pass to one’s 
account, to impute, [A. V. reckon]: τί, 1 Co. xiii. 5; τινί 
τι, 2 Tim. iv. 16 [A. V. lay to one’s charge]; τινὶ δικαιο- 
σύνην, ἁμαρτίαν, Ro. iv. 6, [8 (yet here Lmrg. T Tr WH 
txt. read od) |; τὰ παραπτώματα. 2 Co. v.19; in imitation 
of the Hebr. 9 WTI, λογίζεταί τι (or τις) εἴς τι (equiv. 
to εἰς τὸ or ὥστε εἶναί τι), a thing is reckoned as or to be 
something, i. e. as availing for or equivalent to something, 
as having the like force and weight, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. 
vol. i. p. 137; [cf. W. § 29, 3 Note a.; 228 (214); B. 
§ 131, 7 Rem.]): Ro. ii. 26; ix. 8; εἰς οὐδέν, Acts xix. 
27; Is.xl.17; Dan. [(Theodot. s)] iv. 32; Sap. iii. 17; 
ix. 6; ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην, Ro. iv. 3, 5, 9-11, 22 sq. 
24; Gal. iii. 6; Jas. ii. 23; Gen. xv.6; Ps. ev. (evi.) 31; 
1 Macc. ii. 52. b. i. q. to number among, reckon with: 
τινὰ μετά τινων, Mk. xv. 28 [yet GT WH om. Tr br. the 
vs.| and Lk. xxii. 37, after Is. liii. 12, where Sept. ἐν 
τοῖς ἀνόμοις. c. tareckon or account, and treat accord- 
ingly : τινὰ ὥς τι, Ro. viii. 36 fr. Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23 ; cf. 
B. 151 (132); [W. 602 (560)]; [Ro. vi. 11 foll. by 
ace. w. inf., but GLom. Trbr. the inf.; ef. W. 321 
(302) ]. 2. (in animo rationes conferre) to reckon 
inwardly, count up or weigh the reasons, to deliberate, [ A. 
V. reason]: πρὸς ἑαυτούς, one addressing himself to an- 
other, Mk. xi. 31 αὶ G (πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, with myself, in my 
mind, Plat. apol. p. 21 d.). 3. by reckoning up all the 
reasons to gather or infer; i.e. a. to consider, take ac- 
count, weigh, meditate on: τί, a thing, with a view to obtain- 
ing it, Phil. iv. 8; foll. by ὅτι, Heb. xi. 19; [Jn. xi. 50 
(Ree. S:adoy-)]; τοῦτο foll. by ὅτι, 2 Co. x. 11. b. to 
suppose, deem, judge: absol. 1 Co. xiii. 11; ὡς λογίζομαι, 
1 Pet. v.12; τί, anything relative to the promotion of the 
gospel, 2 Co. iii. 5; ri εἴς τινα (as respects one) ὑπὲρ 
(τοῦτο) 6 ete. to think better of one than agrees with 
what ete. [‘ account of one above that which’ ete.], 2 Co. 
xii. 6; foll. by ὅτι, Ro. viii. 18; τοῦτο foll. by ὅτι, Ro. ii. 
3; 2 Co. x. 7; foll. by an inf. belonging to the subject, 
2 Co. xi. 5; fofl. by an ace. with inf., Ro. iii. 28; xiv. 
14; Phil. iii. 13 [ef. W. 321 (302)]; τινὰ ὥς τινα, to hold 
[A. V. ‘count’] one as, 2 Co. x. 2 [ef. W. 602 (560)]; 


1. 


- 


9 λόγιος 
with a preparatory οὕτως preceding, 1 Co. iv. 1. ο. 
to determine, purpose, decide, [ οἵ. American ‘ calculate ’], 
foll. by an inf. (Eur. Or. 555): 2 Co. x. ῶ. [Comp.: 
ava-, δια-, mapa-, avd-AoyiCopat. | * 

λογικός, -7, τόν, (fr. λόγος reason), [Tim. Locr., Dem., 
al.], rational (Vulg. rationabilis); agreeable to reason, 
Sollowing reason, reasonable: λατρεία λογική, the worship 
which is rendered by the reason or soul, [‘ spiritual’ ], 
Ro. xii. 1 (λογικὴ καὶ ἀναίμακτος προσφορά, of the offer- 
ing which angels present to God, Test. xii. Patr. [test. 
Levi § 3] p. 547 ed. Fabric.; [cf. Athenag. suppl. pro 
Christ. § 13 fin.]); τὸ λυγικὸν γάλα, the milk which nour- 
ishes the soul (see γάλα), 1 Pet. ii. 2 (λογικὴ τροφή, Eus. 
h. 6. 4, 23 fin.).* 

λόγιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of λόγος [so Bleek (on Heb. v. 
12) et al.; al. neut. of λόγιος (Mey. on Ro. iii. 2)]), prop. 
a little word (so Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 969 (973)), a brief 
utterance, in prof. auth. a divine oracle (doubtless because 
oracles were generally brief); Hdt., Thue., Arstph., 
Eur.; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; 8,80,6; Diod. 2,14; Ael. ν. ἢ. 
2,41; of the Sibylline oracles, Diod. p. 602 [fr. 1. 34]; 
Plut. Fab. 4; in Sept. for }wn the breast-plate of the high 
priest, which he wore when he consulted Jehovah, Ex. 
Xxvili. 15; xxix. 5, ete.; [once for Dk, of the words of 
a man, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 15]; but chiefly for M728 of 
any utterance of God, whether precept or promise; [cf. 
Philo de congr. erud. grat. § 24; de profug. § 11 sub 
fin.]; of the prophecies of God in the O. T., Joseph. 
Ὁ. 7. 6, 5, 45 νόμους καὶ λόγια θεσπισθέντα διὰ προφητῶν 
καὶ ὕμνους, Philo vit. contempl. § 3; τὸ λόγιον τοῦ προ- 
φήτου (Moses), vit. Moys. iii. 35, ef. [23, and] de praem. 
et poen. ὃ 1 init.; τὰ δέκα λόγια, the ten commandments 
of God or the decalogue, in Philo, who wrote a special 
treatise concerning them (Opp. ed. Mang. ii. p. 180 
564. [ed. Richter iv. p. 246 sqq.]); [Constit. Apost. 2, 
36 (p. 63, 7 ed. Lagarde)]; Euseb. h. 6. 2,18. In the 
N. T. spoken of the words or utterances of God: of the 
contents of the Mosaic law, Acts vii. 38; with τοῦ θεοῦ 
or θεοῦ added, of his commands in the Mosaic law and 
his Messianic promises, Ro. iii. 2, ef. Philippi and Um- 
breit ad loc.; of the substance of the Christian religion, 
Heb. ν. 12; of the utterances of God through Christian 
teachers, 1 Pet. iv. 11. (In ecel. writ. λόγια τοῦ κυρίου 
is used ot Christ’s precepts, by Polye. ad Philipp. 7, 1; 
κυριακὰ λόγια οἵ the sayings and discourses of Christ 
which are recorded in the Gospels, by Papias in Euseb. 
h. 6. 3, 39; Phot. 6. 228 p. 248 [18 ed. Bekk.]; [τὰ λόγια 
τ. θεοῦ] of the words and admonitions of God in the 
sacred Scriptures, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 1 [where par- 
allel with ai ἱεραὶ γραφαί], cf. 62, 3; [and ra Ady. simply, 
like ai γραφαί, of the New T. in the interpol. ep. of Ign. 
ad Smyrn. 3]. Cf. Schwegler [(also Heinichen) ], Index 
iv. ad Euseb. h. 6. s. v. λόγιον ; [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. and 
Lghtft. in the Contemp. Rey. for Aug. 1875, p. 399 566. 
On the general use of the word cf. Bleek, Br. a. ἃ. Hebr. 
iii. pp. 114-117].) * 

λόγιος, -ov, (λόγος), in class. Grk. 1. learned, aman 
of letters, skilled in literature and the arts; esp. versed 


κογίσμος 


in history and antiquities. 2. skilled in speech, elo- 
quent: so Acts xviii. 24 [which, however, al. refer to 1 
(finding its explanation in the foll. δυνατὸς xr\.)]. The 
use of the word is fully exhibited by Lobeck ad Phryn. 
p- 198. [(Hdt., Eur., al.)]* 

λογισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (λογίζομαι); 1. α γεσζογῖη, com- 
putation. 2. a reasoning: such as is hostile to the 
Christian faith, 2 Co. x. 4 (5) [A. V. imaginations }. 3. 
a judgment, decision: such as conscience passes, Ro. ii. 
15 [A. V. thoughts]. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. ; 
Sept. for awn, as Prov. vi. 18; Jer. xi. 19; Ps. xxxii. 
(xxxiii.) 10.)* 

λογομαχέω, -@; (fr. Aoyoudyos, and this fr. λόγος and 
μάχομαι); to contend about words; contextually, to wrangle 
about empty and trifling matters: 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Not 
found in prof. auth.) * 

λογομαχία, -as, ἡ, (Aoyopayew), dispute about words, war 
of words, or about trivial and empty things: plur. 1 Tim. 
vi. 4. (Not found in prof. auth.) * 

λόγος, -ov, 6, (λέγω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for 
425, also for 798 and 799; prop. ὦ collecting, collection, 
(see Aéyw), —and that, as well of those things which 
are put together in thought, as of those which, having 
been thought i. e. gathered together in the mind, are 
expressed in words. Accordingly, a twofold use of 
the term is to be distinguished: one which relates to 
speaking, and one which relates to thinking. 

I. As respects SPEECH: 1. a word, yet not in 
the grammatical sense (i. q. vocabulum, the mere name 
of an object), but language, voz, i. e. a word which, ut- 
tered by the living voice, embodies a conception or 
idea; (hence it differs from ῥῆμα and ἔπος [q. v.; cf. 
also λαλέω, ad init.]): Heb. xii. 19; ἀποκριθῆναι λόγον, 
Mt. xxii. 46; εἰπεῖν λόγῳ, Mt. viii. 8 [Rec. λόγον (cf. 
εἶπον, 3 a. fin.)]; Lk. vii. 7; λαλῆσαι πέντε, μυρίους, λό- 
yous, 1 Co. xiv. 19; διδόναι λόγον εὔσημον, to utter a dis- 
tinct word, intelligible speech, 1 Co. xiv. 9; εἰπεῖν λόγον 
κατά τινος, to speak a word against, to the injury of, one, 
Mt. xii. 32; also ets τινα, Lk. xii. 10; to drive out de- 
mons λόγῳ, Mt. viii. 16; ἐπερωτᾶν τινα ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς. 
Lk. xxiii. 9; of the words of a conversation, ἀντιβάλλειν 
λόγους, Lk. xxiv. 17. 2. what some one has said; 
a saying ; a. univ.: Mt. xix. 22 [Tom.]; Mk. v. 36 
[ef. B. 302 (259) note]; vii. 29; Lk.i. 29; xx. 20; xxii. 
61 [Trmrg. WH ῥήματος]; Jn. ii. 22; iv. 39, 50; vi. 60; 
vil. 36; xv. 20; xviii. 9; xix. 8; Acts vii. 29; ὁ λόγος 
οὗτος, this (twofold) saying (of the people), Lk. vii. 17, 
ef. 16; τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών, Mt. xxvi. 44; [Mk. xiv. 
39]; mayidevew τινὰ ἐν λόγῳ, in a word or saying which 
they might elicit from him and turn into an accusation, 
Mt. xxii. 15; dypevew τινὰ λόγῳ, i. 6. by propounding a 
question, Mk. xii. 13; plur., Lk. i. 20; Acts v. 5, 24; 
with gen. of the contents: 6 λ. ἐπαγγελίας, Ro. ix. 9; 
ὁ λ. τῆς ὁρκομωσίας, Heb. vii. 28; A. παρακλήσεως, Acts 
xiii. 15; ὁ λ. τῆς μαρτυρίας, Rev. xii. 11; of A. τῆς mpo- 
gnreias, Rev. i. 3 [Tdf. τὸν .]; xxii. 6 sq. 10, 18; ὁ mpo- 
φητικὸς λόγος, the prophetic promise, collectively of the 
sum of the O. T. prophecies, particularly the Messianic, 


380 


λόγος 


2 Pet. i. 19; of the sayings and statements of teachers: 
of λόγοι οὗτοι, the sayings previously related, Mt. vii. 24 
[here L Tr WH br. τούτ.], 26; Lk. ix. 28; of λόγοι τινός, 
the words, commands, counsels, promises, etc., of any 
teacher, Mt. x. 14; xxiv. 35; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 44; 
Jn, xiv. 24; Acts xx. 35; λόγοι ἀληθινοί, Rev. xix. 9; xxi. 
5; πιστοί, Rev. xxii. 6; κενοί, Eph. v. 6: πλαστοί, 2 Pet. 
ii. 3 [οἵ W. 217 (204)]; b. of the sayings of 
God; a. i. 4. decree, mandate, order: Ro. ix. 28; 
with rod θεοῦ added, 2 Pet. iii. 5, 7 [R* G Tr txt.]; ὁ λ. 
τοῦ θεοῦ ἐγένετο πρός τινα (a phrase freq. in the O. T.), 
Jn. x. 35. B. of the moral precepts given by God in 
the O. T.: Mk. vii. 13; [Mt. xv. 6 L Tr WH txt.]; Ro. 
xiii. 9; Gal. v. 14, (cf. of δέκα λόγοι, [Ex. xxxiv. 28; Deut. 
x. 4 (cf. ῥήματα, iv. 13); Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 35; 
de decalog. § 9]; Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 5 [ο΄ 5, 57). y 
i. q- promise: 6 X. τῆς axons (equiv. to 6 axovaeis), Heb. 
iv. 2; 6 A. τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. ix. 6; plur. Ro. iii. 4; univ. a 
divine declaration recorded in the O. T., Jn. xii. 38; xv. 
25; 1 Co. xv. 54. 8. διὰ λόγου θεοῦ etc. through 
prayer in which the language of the O. T. is employed: 
1 Tim. iv. 5; cf. De Wette and Huther ad loc. ε- 
ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ, as 71) 135 often in the O. T. prophets, 
an oracle or utterance by which God discloses, to the proph- 
ets or through the prophets, future events: used collec- 
tively of the sum of such utterances, Rev. i. 2, 9; cf. 
Diisterdieck and Bleek ad 1]. ce. c. what is de- 
clared, a thought, declaration, aphorism, (Lat. sententia) : 
τὸν λόγον τοῦτον (reference is made to what follows, so 
that γάρ in vs. 12 is explicative), Mt. xix. 11; α dictum, 
maxim or weighty saying: 1 Tim. i.15; 111. 1; 2 Tim. ii. 
11; Tit. 111. 8; i. q. proverb, Jn. iv. 37 (as sometimes in 
class. Grk., e. g. [Aeschyl. Sept. adv. Theb. 218]; ὁ πα- 
λαιὸς λόγος, Plat. Phaedr. p. 240¢.; conviv. p. 195 b.; 
legg. 6 p. 757 a.; Gorg. p. 499 ο.; verum est verbum 
quod memoratur, ubi amici, ibi opes, Plaut. True. 4, 4, 32; 
add, Ter. Andr. 2, 5, 15; al.). 3. discourse (Lat. ora- 
tio); a. the act of speaking, speech: Acts xiv.12; 2 
Co. x. 10; Jas. iii. 2; διὰ λόγου, by word of mouth, Acts 
xv. 27; opp. to δι’ ἐπιστολῶν, 2 Th. ii. 15; διὰ λόγου ποὰ- 
Nov, Acts xv. 32; λόγῳ πολλῷ, Acts xx. 2; περὶ οὗ πολὺς 
ἡμῖν ὁ λύγος, of whom we have many things to say, Heb. 
v.11; 6 λόγος ὑμῶν, Mt. v.37; Col. iv. 6; A. κολακείας, 1 
Th. ii. 5. λόγος is distinguished from σοφία in 1 Co. ii. 
1; fr. ἀναστροφή, 1 Tim. iv. 12; fr. δύναμις, 1 Co. iv. 19 
sq-; 1 Th. i. 5; fr. ἔργον, Ro. xv. 18; 2 Conx. 11... 01 
iii. 17; fr. ἔργον x. ἀλήθεια, 1 Jn. ili. 18 (see ἔργον, 3 
Ρ. 248° bot.) ; οὐδενὸς λόγου τίμιον, not worth mentioning 
(λόγου ἄξιον, Hat. 4, 28; ef. Germ. der Rede werth), i. 6. 
a thing of no value, Acts xx. 24 T Tr WH (see II. 2 
below). Ὁ. i. q. the faculty of speech: Eph. vi. 19; 
skill and practice in speaking: ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ ἀλλ᾽ οὐ 
τῇ γνώσει, 2 Co. xi. 6; δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ k. λόγῳ, Lk. xxiv. 
19 (ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς, Diod. 13, 101); λόγος σοφίας 
or γνώσεως, the art of speaking to the purpose about 
things pertaining to wisdom or knowledge, 1 Co. xii. 
8. c. a kind (or style) of speaking: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ, 
1 Co. i. 5 [A. V. utterance]. ἃ. continuous speak- 


λόγος 


ing, discourse, such as in the N. T. is characteristic of 
teachers: Lk. iv. 32,36; Jn. iv. 41; Acts iv. 4 (cf. 
iii, 12-26); xx. 7; 1 Co. i. 17; ii.1; plur., Mt. vii. 28; xix. 
1; xxvi. 1; Lk. ix. 26; Acts ii. 40; δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις x. 
ἔργοις αὐτοῦ, Acts vii. 22. Hence, the thought of the 
subject being uppermost, e. insiruclion: Col. iv. 
3; Tit. ii. 8; 1 Pet. iii. 1; joined with διδασκαλία, 1 Tim. 
v.17; with a gen. of the teacher, Jn. v. 24; viii. 52; xv. 
20; xvii. 20; Actsii.41; 1 Co. ii.4; 2Co.i. 18 (ef. 19); 
ὁ λύγος 6 ἐμός, In. viii. 31, 37, 43,51; xiv. 23; τίνι λόγῳ, 
with what instruction, 1 Co. xv. 2 (where construe, εἰ 
κατέχετε, τίνι λόγῳ ete.; cf. B. §§ 139, 58; 151, 20); 
i. 4. κήρυγμα, preaching, with gen. of the obj.: λ. ἀλη- 
θείας. 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i. 18; ὁ A. τῆς ἀληθείας, Col. i. 5; 
Eph. i. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; τῆς καταλλαγῆς, 2 Co. v.19; ὁ 
λ. τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης, concerning this salvation (i. e. the 
saivation obtained through Christ) [ef. W. 237 (223); B. 
162 (141) ], Acts xiii. 26; ὁ λόγος τῆς βασιλείας (τοῦ θεοῦ), 
Mt. xiii. 19; τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ὁ τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ λόγος, the first instruction concerning Christ (cf. 
B. 155 (136); W.188 (177) ], Heb. vi.1. Hence 4. 
in an objective sense, what is communicated by instruc- 
tion, doctrine: univ. Acts xviii. 15; 6 Ady. αὐτῶν, 2 Tim. 
ii. 17; plur. ἡμέτεροι λόγοι, 2 Tim. iv. 15; ὑγιαίνοντες 
λύγοι, 2 Tim. i. 13; with a gen. of obj. added, τοῦ κυρίου, 
1 Tim. vi. 3; τῆς πίστεως, the doctrines of faith [see 
πίστις, 1c.B.],1 Tim. iv. 6. specifically, the doctrine con- 
cerning the attainment through Christ of salvation in the 
kingdom of God: simply, Mt. xiii. 20-23; Mk. iv. 14-20; 
Vili. 325 xvi. 20; Lk.i. 2: viii. 12; Acts viii.4; x. 44; 
xi. 19; xiv. 25; xvii.11; Gal. vi.6; Phil. i.14; 1 Th.i. 
6; 2 Tim. iv. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 8; τὸν λόγον, ὃν ἀπέστειλε τοῖς 
ete. the doctrine which he commanded to be delivered 
to ete. Acts x. 36 [but L WH txt. om. Tr br. ὅν ; οἵ. W. 
§ 62, 3fin.; B. 8 131,13]; τὸν λόγον ἀκούειν, Lk. viii. 15; 
Jn. xiv. 24; Actsiv.4; 1 Jn. ii. 7; λαλεῖν, Jn. xv. 3 (see 
other exx. 8. v. λαλέω, 5 sub fin.) ; ἀπειθεῖν τῷ X., 1 Pet. 
ii. 8; ili. 1; διδαχὴ πιστοῦ λόγου, Tit. i. 9; with gen. of 
the teacher: 6 λ. αὐτῶν, Acts ii. 41; with gen. of the 
author: τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. v.13 viii. 11, 21; xi. 28; Jn. xvii. 
6,14; 1 Co. xiv. 36; 2 Co.iv. 2; Col. i. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 9; 
Tit.i.33 11.5; Heb. xiii. 7; 1Jn.i.10; ii.5,14; Rev. 
vi. 9; xx. 4; very often in the Acts: iv. 29, 31; vi. 2, 7; 
Vili. 145 xi. 1,195 xii. 24; xiii. 5, 7, 44,46; xvii. 13; xviii. 
11; opp. to A. ἀνθρώπων [B. ὃ 151, 14], 1 Th. ii. 13; λόγος 
ζῶν θεοῦ, 1 Pet. i, 23; 6 λ. τοῦ κυρίου, Acts viii. 25; xiii. 
48 [ΟΝ txt. Tr mrg. deod) ] sq.3 xv. 35 sq.; xix. 10, 20; 
1 ΤῊ. 1. 8; 2 Th. iii. 1; rod Χριστοῦ, Col. iii. 16; Rev. iii. 
8; with gen. of apposition, τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, Acts xv. 7; 
with gen. of the obj., τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xiv. 3; 
xx. 32; δικαιοσύνης (see δικαιοσύνη, 1 a.), Heb. v. 13; 
with gen. of quality, τῆς ζωῆς, containing in itself the 
true life and imparting it to men, Phil. ii. 16. 5. 
anything reported in speech; a narration, narrative: of 
a written narrative, a continuous account of things 
done, Acts i. 1 (often soin Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down [ef. 
L. and 5. 5. v. A. IV.]); @ fictitious narrative, a story, 


Mt. xxviii. 15, ef. 13. report (in a good sense): 6 λόγ. 


581 


λογος 


the news concerning the success of the Christian cause, 
Acts xi. 22; περί twos, Lk. v.15; rumor, i. e. current 
story, Jn. xxi. 28 ; λόγον ἔχειν τινός, to have the (unmer- 
ited) reputation of any excellence, Col. ii. 23 (so λόγον 
ἔχει τις foll. by an inf., Hdt. 5,66; Plat. epin. p. 987b.; 
[see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ο. (cf. L. and S. s. v. A. 
II. 3)]). 6. matter under discussion, thing spoken 
of, affair: Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. xi. 29; Lk. xx. 3; Acts viii. 
21; xv. 6, and often in Grk. writ. [L. and 5. 8. v. A. 
VIIL.]; α matter in dispute, case, suit at law, (as 137 in 
Exod. xviii. 16; xxii. 8): ἔχειν Adyov πρός τινα, to have 
a ground of action against any one, Acts xix. 38, cf. 
Kypke ad loc.; παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας ((cf. II. 6 below] 
TAI IDF [τ }} 173 or] 329, Delitzsch), Mt. v. 32; [xix. 
9LWHnmrg.]. 7. thing spoken of or talked about; 
event; deed, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down): δια- 
φημίζειν τὸν λόγον, to blaze abroad the occurrence, Mk. 
i. 45; plur. Lk.i.4 (as often in the O. T.; pera τοὺς 
λόγους τούτους, 1 Mace. vii. 33). 

II. Its use as respects the MIND alone, Lat. ratio; L 
6. 1. reason, the mental faculty of thinking, medi- 
tating, reasoning, calculating, ete. : once so in the phrase 
ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ, of the divine mind, pervading and not- 
ing all things by its proper force, Heb. iv. 12. 2. 
account, i. 6. regard, consideration: λόγον ποιεῖσθαί τινος, 
to have regard for, make account of a thing, care for 
a thing, Acts xx. 24 RG (Job xxii. 4; Hdt. 1, 4. 18 
etc.; Aeschyl. Prom. 231; Theocr. 3, 33; Dem., Joseph., 
Dion. H., Plut., al. [ef. L. and S. s. v. B. II. 17); also λό- 
γον ἔχειν τινός, Acts ]. c. Lehm. (Tob. vi. 16 (15)) {ef. L 3 
a. above]. 3. account, i.e. reckoning, score: δόσεως 
κι λήψεως (see δόσις, 1), Phil. iv. 15 [where ef. Bp. Lghtft.]; 
εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν, to your account, i. e. trop. to your advan- 
tage, ib. 17; συναίρειν λόγον (an expression not found in 
Grk. auth.), to make a reckoning, settle accounts, Mt. 
XVill. 23; xxv. 19. 4. account, i. e. answer or ex- 
planation in reference to judgment: λόγον διδόναι (as 
often in Grk. auth.), to give or render an account, Ro. 
xiv.12 RGT WHL nrg. Tr mrg.; also ἀποδιδόναι, Heb. 
xiii. 17; 1 Pet. ἵν. δ᾽; with gen. of the thing, Lk. xvi. 2; 
Acts xix. 40 [RG]; περί twos, Mt. xii. 36; [Acts xix. 40 
LT Tr WH]; τινὶ περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, Ro. xiv. 12 Ltxt. br. Tr 
txt.; αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί Twos, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (Plat. polit. 
Ρ- 285 e.). 5. relation: πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος, with 
whom as judge we stand in relation [A. V. have to do], 
Heb. iv. 13; κατὰ λόγον, as is right, justly, Acts xviii. 
14 ΓΑ. V. reason would (cf. Polyb. 1, 62, 4.5; 5, 110, 
10)], (παρὰ λόγον, unjustly, 2 Mace. iv. 36; 3 Mace. vii. 
8). 6. reason, cause, ground: τίνι λόγῳ, for what 
reason? why? Acts x. 29 (ἐκ τίνος λόγου; Aeschyl. 
Choeph. 515; ἐξ οὐδενὸς λόγου, Soph. Phil. 730; rin 
δικαίῳ λόγῳ κτλ. ; Plat. Gorg. p. 512 ¢.); παρεκτὸς λόγου 
πορνείας (Vulg. excepta fornicationis causa) is generally 
referred to this head, Mt. v. 32; [xix. 9 L WH mrg.]; 
but since where λόγος is used in this sense the gen. is not 
added, it has seemed best to include this passage among 
those mentioned in I. 6 above. 

III. Inseveral passages in the writings of John 6 λόγος 


λόγχη 


denotes the essential Worp of God, i. 6. the personal 
(hypostatic) wisdom and power in union with God, his 
minister in the creation and government of the universe, 
the cause of all the world’s life both physical and ethical, 
which for the procurement of man’s salvation put on bu- 
man nature in the person of Jesus the Messiah and shone 
forth conspicuously from his words and deeds: Jn. i. 1, 
14; (1 Jn. v. 7 Ree.) ; with τῆς ζωῆς added (see ζωή, 2 
a.), 1 Jn. i. 1; τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xix. 13 (although the in- 
terpretation which refers this passage to the hypostatic 
λόγος is disputed by some, as by Baur, Neutest. Theolo- 
cie p. 216 sq.). Respecting the combined Hebrew and 
Greek elements out of which this conception originated 
among the Alexandrian Jews, see esp. Liicke, Com. tb. 
ἃ. Evang. des Johan. ed. 3, i. pp. 249-294; [ef. esp. B. D. 
Am. ed. 5. v. Word (and for works which have appeared 
subsequently, see Weiss in Meyer on Jn. ed. 6; Schiirer, 
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 34 II.) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 15 p. 
143 sq. ; and for reff. to the use of the term in heathen, 
Jewish, and Christian writ., see Soph. Lex. s. v. 10]. 
λόγχη: -78; 775 1. the iron point or head of a 
spear: Hat. 1, 52; Xen. an. 4, 7, 16, ete. 2. alance, 
spear, (shaft armed with iron): Jn. xix. 34. (Sept.; 
Pind., Tragg., 566.) * 
λοιδορέω, -d; 1 aor. ἐλοιδόρησα ; pres. pass. ptep. Aowdo- 
potpevos; (λοίδορος) ; to reproach, rail at, revile, heap 
abuse upon: τινά, Jn. ix. 28; Acts xxiii. 4; pass., 1 Co. 
iv. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 23. (From Pind. and Aeschyl. down ; 
Sept. several times for 3...) [Comp.: ἀντι-λοιδορέω.] * 
λοιδορία, -as, ἡ, (λοιδορέω), railing, reviling: 1 Tim. v. 
14; 1 Pet. iii. 9. (Sept.; Arstph., Thuc., Xen., sqq-) ἢ 
λοίδορος, -ov, ὁ, a railer, reviler: 1 Co. ν. 11; vi. 10. 
(Proy. xxv. 24; Sir. xxiii. 8; Eur. [as adj.], Plut., al.) * 
λοιμός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], pestilence; plur. a 
pestilence in divers regions (see λιμός), Mt. xxiv. 7 [RG 
Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. xxi. 11; metaph., like the Lat. pestis 
(Ter. Adelph. 2, 1, 35; Cie. Cat. 2, 1), a pestilent fellow, 
pest, plague: Acts xxiv. 5 (so Dem. p. 794, 5; Ael. v. h. 
14, 11; Proy. xxi. 24; plur., Ps. i. 1; 1 Mace. xv. 21; 
ἄνδρες λοιμοί, 1 Mace. x. 61, cf. 1S. x.27; xxv. 17, ete.).* 
λοιπός, -7, -dv, (λείπω, λέλοιπα), [fr. Pind. and Hdt. 
down], Sept. for 7}, VI, Ww, left; plur. the remain- 
ing, the rest: with substantives, as οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπόστολοι, 
Acts ii. 37; 1 Co.ix.5; add, Mt. xxv.11; Ro.i.13; 2 
Co. xii. 13; Gal. ii. 13; Phil. iv. 3; 2 Pet. iii. 16; Rev. 
viii. 13; absol. ‘he rest of any number or class under con- 
sideration: simply, Mt. xxii. 6; xxvii. 49; Mk. xvi. 13; 
Lk. xxiv. 10; Acts xvii. 9; xxvii. 44; with a descrip- 
tion added: of λοιποὶ of ete., Acts xxviii. 9; 1 Th. iv. 
hs; Rev. ii. 24; of λοιποὶ πάντες, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Phil. i. 
13; πᾶσι τοῖς A. Lk. xxiv. 9; with a gen.: of λοιποὶ τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων, Rev. ix. 20; τοῦ σπέρματος, ib. xii. 17; τῶν 
νεκρῶν, ib. xx. 5; with a certain distinction and contrast, 
the rest, who are not of the specified class or number: Lk. 
vill. 10; xviii. 9; Acts v.13; Ro. xi. 7; 1 Co. vii. 12; 
1 Th. v.6; 1 Tim. v. 20; Rev. xi. 13; xix.21; τὰ λοιπά, 
the rest, the things that remain: Mk. iv. 19; Lk. xii. 26 ; 
1 Co. xi. 34; Rev. iii. 2. Neut. sing. adverbially, τὸ 


38 


2 λούω 


λοιπόν what remains (Lat. quod superest), i. 6. a. 
hereafter, for the future, henceforth, (often so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Pind. down): Mk. xiv. 41 ἢ T WH (but τό in br.); 
Mt. xxvi. 45 [WH om. Tr br. τό]; 1 Co. vii. 29; Heb. x. 
13; and without the article, Mk. xiv. 41 GL Tr [WH 
(but see above)]; 2 Tim. iv. 8; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
706. τοῦ λοιποῦ, henceforth, in the future, Eph. vi. 10 
LT Tr WH; Gal. vi. 17; Hdt. 2, 109; Arstph. pax 
1084; Xen. Cyr. 4,4, 10; oec. 10, 9; al; ef. Herm. ad 
Vig. p. 706; often also in full rod A. χρόνου. [Strictly, τὸ 
x. is ‘for the fut.’ rod A. ‘in (the) fut.’; τὸ A. may be used 
for τοῦ A., but not τοῦ A. for τὸ A.; ef. Meyer and Ellicott 
on Gal. u. s.; B. §§ 128, 2; 132, 26; W. 463 (432).] Ὄ. 
at last; already: Acts xxvii. 20 (so in later usage, see 
Passow or L. and. s. v.). c. τὸ λοιπόν, dropping the 
notion of time, signifies for the rest, besides, moreover, 
ΓΔ. V. often finally], forming a transition to other things, 
to which the attention of the hearer or reader is directed: 
Eph. vi. 10 RG; Phil. iii. 1; iv. 8; 1 Th. iv. 1 Ree.; 
2 Th. iii. 1; ὃ δὲ λοιπόν has the same force in 1 Co. iv. 2 
RG; λοιπόν in 1 Co. i. 16; iv. 2LTTr WH; 1 Th. iv. 
1GLTTrWH. 

“Λουκᾶς, -a, ὁ, (contr. fr. Λουκανός ; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on 
Col. iv. 14], W. 108 (97) [cf. B. 20 (18); on the diverse 
origin of contr. or abbrey. prop. names in as ef. Lobeck,, 
Patholog. Proleg. p. 506; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15]), 
Luke, a Christian of Gentile origin, the companion of the 
apostle Paul in preaching the gospel and on many of his 
journeys (Acts xvi. 10-17; xx. 5-15; xxi. 1-18; xxviii. 
10-16); he was a physician, and ace. to the tradition of 
the church from Ireneus [3, 14, 1 sq.] down, which has 
been recently assailed with little success, the author of the 
third canonical Gospel and of the Acts of the Apostles: 
Col. iv. 14; 2 Tim. iv. 11; Philem. 24.* 

Λούκιος, -ov, 6, (a Lat. name), Lucius, of Cyrene, a 
prophet and teacher of the church at Antioch: Acts 
xiii. 1; perhaps the same Lucius that is mentioned in 
Ro. xvi. 21.* 

λουτρόν, -οῦ, τό, (Aovw), fr. Hom. down (who uses 
λοετρόν fr. the uncontr. form λοέω), a bathing, bath, i. 6. 
as well the act of bathing [a sense disputed by some 
(cf. Ellicott on Eph. v. 26)], as the place; used in the 
N. T. and in eccles. writ. of baptism [for exx. see Soph. 
Lex. s.v.]: with τοῦ ὕδατος added, Eph. ν. 26: τῆς παλιγ- 
yeveoias, Tit. iii. 5.* 

λούω: 1 aor. ἔλουσα ; pf. pass. ptep. λελουμένος and (in 
Heb. x. 23 T WH) λελουσμένος, a later Greek form (cf. 
Lobeck on Soph. Aj. p. 824; Steph. Thesaur. v. 397 c.; 
ef. Kiihner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v., who cites Cant. v. 
12 Vat.]); 1 aor. mid. ptep. λουσάμενος ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for ym; to bathe, wash: prop. τινά, adead person, 
Acts ix. 37; τινὰ ἀπὸ τῶν πληγῶν, by washing to cleanse 
from the blood of the wounds, Acts xvi. 33 [W.372 (348), 
cf. § 30, 6a.; B. 322 (277)]; ὁ λελουμένος, absol., he that 
has bathed, Jn. xiii. 10 (on the meaning of the passage 
see καθαρός, a. [and cf. Syn. below]); AeA. τὸ σῶμα, 
with dat. of the instr., ὕδατι, Heb. x. 22 (23); mid. to 
wash ong’s self [cf. W. § 38, 2 a.]: 2 Pet. ii. 22; trop. 


Auvdda 


Uhrist is described as ὁ λούσας ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν 
ἡμῶν, i. 6. who by suffering the bloody death of a vicari- 
ous sacrifice cleansed us from the guilt of our sins, Rev. 
i. 5 RG [al. λύσας (q. v. 2 fin.). Comp.: ἀπολούω.} * 

[Syx. λούω, νίπτω, πλύνω: mA. is used of things, 
esp. garments; A. and ν. of persons,—v. of a part of the 
body (hands, feet, face, eyes), A. of the whole. All three 
words occur in Ley. xv. 11. Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlv.] 

Λύδδα, -ns [Acts ix. 38 RG L, but -ας Τ Tr WH; see 
WH. App. p-156], ἡ, and Λύδδα, -ων, ra ({1| TrWH 
in] Acts ix. 32,35; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.116; B.18 (16) sq. 
[ef. W. 61 (60)]); Hebr. 45 (1 Chr. viii. 12; Ezra ii. 33; 
Neh. xi. 35); Lydda,a large Benjamite [ef. 1 Chr.].¢.] 
town (Λύδδα κώμη, πόλεως τοῦ μεγέθους οὐκ ἀποδέουσα, 
Joseph. antt. 20, 6, 2), called also Diospolis under the 
Roman empire, about nine [‘ eleven’ (Ordnance Survey p. 
21)] miles distant from the Mediterranean; now Ludd: 
Acts ix. 32, 35, 38. Cf. Robinson, Palestine ii. pp. 
244-248; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 627 sq.; [BB. DD. 
Sanyal ox 

Λυδία, -as, 7, Lydia, a woman of Thyatira, a seller of 
purple, converted by Paul to the Christian faith: Acts 
xvi. 14,40. The name was borne by other women also, 
Horat. carm. 1, 8; 3, 9.* 

Avkaovia, -as, 7, Lycaonia, a region of Asia Minor, 
situated between Pisidia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, Galatia 
and Phrygia, whose chief cities were Lystra, Derbe and 
Tconium (ef. reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1]. Its in- 
habitants spoke a peculiar and strange tongue the char- 
acter of which cannot be determined: Acts xiv.6. Cf. 
Win. RWB.s.v.; Lassen, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. 
Gesellsch. x. (56) p. 378; [ Wright, Hittites (84) p. 56].* 

“Λυκαονιστί, (λυκαονίζω, to use the language of Lyca- 
onia), ady., in the speech of Lycaonia: Acts xiv. 11 (see 
Avxaovia).* 

Λυκία, -as, 7, Lycia, a mountainous region of Asia 
Minor, bounded by Pamphylia, Phrygia, Caria and the 
Mediterranean: Acts xxvii. 5 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. Ὁ. 
s. v.; Dict. of Geogr. 8. v.; reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 
ps tei) 

λύκος, -ov, 6, Hebr. 381, a wolf: Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3; 
Jn. x. 12; applied figuratively to cruel, greedy, rapa- 
cious, destructive men: Mt. vii. 15; Acts xx. 29; (used 
trop. even in Hom. I]. 4,471; 16, 156; in the O. T., 
Ezek. xxii. 27; Zeph. iii. 3; Jer. v. 6).* 

λυμαίνομαι : impf. ἐλυμαινόμην ; dep.mid.; (λύμη injury, 
ruin, contumely); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a 
to affix a stigma to, to dishonor, spot, defile, (Ezek. xvi. 25; 
Prov. xxiii. 8; 4 Mace. xviii. 8). 2. to treat shame- 
fully or with injury, to ravage, devastate, ruin: ἐλυμαίνετο 
τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, said of Saul as the cruel and violent per- 
secutor, [A. V. made havock of |, Acts viii. 3.* 

λυπέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐλύπησα: pf. λελύπηκα ; Pass., pres. 
λυποῦμαι; 1 aor. ἐλυπήθην; fut. λυπηθήσομαι; (λύπην); 
[fr. Hes. down]; to make sorrowful; to affect with sad- 
nese, cause grief; to throw into sorrow: τινά, 2 Co. ii. 2, 
6; vii. 8; pass., Mt. xiv. 9; xvii. 23; xviii. 31; xix. 22; 

Xvi 22; Mk. x. 22; xiv.19; Jn. xvi. 20; xxi.17; 2Co. 


383 


©" Aveavias 


ii. 4; 1 Th. iv. 13; 1 Pet.i.6; joined with ἀδημονεῖν, 
Mt. xxvi. 37; opp. to χαίρειν, 2 Co. vi. 10; κατὰ θεόν, in 
a manner acceptable to God [cf. W. 402 (375) ], 2 Co. 
vii. 9,11; in a wider sense, to grieve, offend: τὸ πνεῦμα 
τὸ ἅγιον, Eph. iv. 30 (see πνεῦμα, 4 a. fin.) ; to make one 
uneasy, cause him a scruple, Ro. xiv.15. [Come.: συλ- 
λυπέω. Syn. see θρηνέω, fin.]* 

λύπη, -ης, 7), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], sorrow, pain, 
grief: of persons mourning, Jn. xvi. 6; 2Co. ii.7; opp. 
to χαρά, Jn. xvi. 20; Heb. xii. 11; λύπην ἔχω (see ἔχω, 
I. 2g. p. 267°), Jn. xvi. 21 sq.; Phil. ii. 27; with addition 
of ἀπό and gen. of pers., 2 Co. ii. 3; A. μοί ἐστι, Ro. ix. 
2; ἐν λύπῃ ἔρχεσθαι, of one who on coming both saddens 
and is made sad, 2 Co. ii. 1 (cf. λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, vs. 2; and 
λύπην ἔχω, VS. 3); ἀπὸ τῆς λύπης, for sorrow, Lk. xxii. 
45; ἐκ λύπης, with a sour, reluctant mind [ A. V. grudg- 
ingly], (opp. to idapds), 2 Co. ix. 7; ἡ κατὰ θεὸν λύπη, 
sorrow acceptable to God, 2 Co. vii. 10 (see λυπέω), and 
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη; the usual sorrow of men at the loss of 
their earthly possessions, ibid.; objectively, annoyance, 
affliction, (Hdt. 7,152): λύπας ὑποφέρειν [R. V. griefs 1, 
δι τι 19. 

“Λυσανίας, -ov, 6, Lysanias ; 1. the son of Ptolemy, 
who from B.c. 40 on was governor of Chalcis at the foot 
of Mount Lebanon, and was put to death B.c. 34 at the 
instance of Cleopatra: Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 4 and 13, 3; 
155/45 1; bay. 155.1) chs 1. 95 2. 2. a tetrarch 
of Abilene (see ᾿Αβιληνή), in the days of John the Bap- 
tist and Jesus: Lk. iii. 1. Among the regions assigned 
by the emperors Caligula and Claudius to Herod Agrippa 
I. and Herod Agrippa II., Josephus mentions ἡ Λυσανίου 
tetpapxia (antt. 18, 6, 10, ef. 20, 7,1), βασιλεία ἡ τοῦ 
Λυσανίου καλουμένη (Ὁ. 1. 2, 11, 5), ᾿Αβίλα ἡ Λυσανίου 
(antt. 19, ὅ, 1); accordingly, some have supposed that 
in these passages Lysanias the son of Ptolemy must be 
meant, and that the region which he governed continued 
to bear his name even after his death. Others (as Cred- 
ner, Strauss, Gfrorer, Weisse), denying that there ever 
was a second Lysanias, contend that Luke was led into 
error by that designation of Abilene (derived from Ly- 
sanias and retained for a long time afterwards), so that 
he imagined that Lysanias was tetrarch in the time of 
Christ. This opinion, however, is directly opposed by 
the fact that Josephus, in antt. 20, 7, 1 and b. j. 2, 12, 8, 
expressly distinguishes Chalcis from the tetrarchy of 
Lysanias; nor is it probable that the region which Ly- 
sanias the son of Ptolemy governed for only six years 
took its name from him ever after. Therefore it is more 
correct to conclude that in the passages of Josephus where 
the tetrarchy of Lysanias is mentioned a second Ly- 
sanias, perhaps the grandson of the former, must be 
meant; and that he is identical with the one spoken of 
by Luke. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. Abilene; Wieseler in 
Herzog i. p. 64 sqq., [esp. in Beitriige zur richtig. Wiirdi- 
gung ἃ. Evang. u.s.w. pp. 196-204]; Bleek, Synopt. Ex 
klir. u.s. w.i. p. 154 sq.; Aneucker in Schenkeli. p. 26 sy.; 
Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19 Anh. 1 p. 313 [also in 
Riehm 5. v.; Robinson in Bib. Sacra for 1848, pp. 79 καᾳ.; 


Avoiar 


Renan, La Dynastie des Lysanias d’Abiléne (in the Mé- 
moires de Acad. des inscrip. et belles-lettres for 1870, 
Tom. xxvi. P. 2, pp. 49-84); BB.DD. s. v.].* 

“Λυσίας, -ov, ὁ, (Claudius) Lysias, a Roman chiliarch 
[A. V. ‘chief captain’]: Acts xxiii. 26; xxiv. 7 [Rec.], 
22. ([B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]* 

λύσις, -ews, ἡ, (λύω), [fr. Hom. down], a loosing of any 
bond, as that of marriage; hence once in the N. T. of 
divorce, 1 Co. vii. 27.” 

λυσιτελέω, -ὥ ; (fr. λυσιτελής, and this fr. λύω to pay, 
and τὰ τέλη [ef. τέλος, 2]); [fr. Hdt. down]; prop. to 
pay the taxes; to return expenses, hence to be useful, ad- 
vantageous ; impers. λυσιτελεῖ, it profits; foll. by ἤ (see 
ἢ, 3 £.), it is better: τινί foll. by εἰ, Lk. xvii. 2.* 

Avorpa, -as, 7, and [in Acts xiv. 8; xvi.2; 2 Tim. iii. 
11] -wy, ra, (see Λύδδα), Lystra, a city of Lycaonia: Acts 
xiv. 6, 8, 21; xvi. 1 sq.; 2 Tim. 111: 11. (Cf. reff. in 
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1.1" 

λύτρον, -ov, τό, (λύω), Sept. passim for 795, mde, ry, 
ete.; the price for redeeming, ransom (paid for slaves, 
Ley. xix. 20; for captives, Is. xlv. 13; for the ransom 
of a life, Ex. xxi. 30; Num. xxxv. 31 sq.): ἀντὶ πολλῶν, 
to liberate many from the misery and penalty of their 
sins, Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45. (Pind., Aeschyl., Xen., 
Plat., al.) * 

λυτρόω, -@: Pass., 1 aor. ἐλυτρώθην; Mid., pres. inf. 
λυτροῦσθαι ; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. λυτρώσηται; (λύτρον, 
4. v-); Sept. often for ox and 779; 1. to release 
on receipt of ransom: Plat. Theaet. p. 165 e.; Diod. 19, 
73; Sept., Num. xviii. 15, 17. 2. to redeem, liberate 
by payment of ransom, [(Dem., al.) ], generally expressed 
by the mid.; univ. το liberate: τινὰ ἀργυρίῳ, and likewise 
ex with the gen. of the thing; pass. ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ἀνα- 
στροφῆς, 1 Pet.i.18; Mid. to cause to be released to one’s 
self [ef. W. 254 (238)] by payment of the ransom, i. 6. to 
redeem; univ. to deliver: in the Jewish theocratic sense, 
τὸν Ἰσραήλ, viz. from evils of every kind, external and 
internal, Lk. xxiv. 21; ἀπὸ πάσης ἀνομίας, Tit. ii. 14 [ef. 
W. § 30, 6 8.7; τινὰ ἐκ, spoken of God, Deut. xiii. 5; 
2S. vii. 23; Hos. xiii. 14.* 

λύτρωσις, -ews, 7, (Autpéw), a ransoming, redemption : 
prop. αἰχμαλώτων, Plut. Arat. 11; for 5x3, Lev. xxv. 
[29], 48; univ. deliverance, redemption, in the theocratic 
sense (see λυτρόω, 2 [ef. Graec. Ven. Lev. xxv. 10, ete. ; 
Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9]): Lk. i. 68; ii. 38; specifically, re- 
demption from the penalty of sin: Heb. ix. 12. [(Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 12, 7; ‘Teaching’ 4, 6; etc.) ]* 

λυτρωτής, -οὔ, 6, (Autpdw), redeemer; deliverer, liber- 
ator: Acts vii. 35; [Sept. Lev. xxv. 31, 32; Philo de 
sacrif. Ab. et Cain. § 37 sub fin.]; for 5x3, of God, Ps. 
xviii. (xix.) 15; Lxxvii. (Ixxviii.) 35. Not found in prof. 
auth.* 

λυχνία, -as, ἡ, ἃ later Grk. word for the earlier λυχνίον, 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313 sq.; [Wetst.on Mt.v.15; W. 
24]; Sept. for 17/319; α (candlestick) lampstand, cande- 
labrum: Mt. v.15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33]; Heb. 
ix. 2; the two eminent prophets who will precede Christ’s 
return from heaven in glory are likened to ‘ candlesticks,’ 


384 Ave 


Rev. xi. 4 [Β. 81 (70); W. 536 (499)]; to the seven 
‘candlesticks’ (Ex. xxv. 37 [A. V. lamps; cf. B. D. (esp. 
Am. ed.) s. ν. Candlestick]) also the seven more com 
spicuous churches of Asia are compared in Rev. i. 12 sq. 
205 ii. 1; κινεῖν τὴν λυχνίαν τινὸς (ἐκκλησίας) ἐκ τοῦ τόπου 
αὐτῆς, to move achurch out of the place which it has 
hitherto held among the churches; to take it out of the 
number of churches, remove it altogether, Rev. ii. δ." 

λύχνος, του, 6, Sept. for Ἢ), [fr. Hom. down]; a lamp, 
candle [?], that is placed on a stand or candlestick (Lat. 
candelabrum), [ οἴ. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlvi.; Becker, 
Charicles, Se. ix. (Eng. trans. p- 156 n.5)]: Mt. v. 15; 
Mk. iv. 21; [Lk. xi. 36]; xii. 35; Rev. xxii. 5; φῶς 
λύχνου, Rev. xviii. 23; opp. to φῶς ἡλίου, xxii. 5 LT Tr 
WH; ἅπτειν λύχνον ((Lk. viii. 16; xi. 33; xv. 8], see 
ἅπτω, 1). Toa“lamp” are likened — the eye, 6 λύχνος 
τοῦ σώματος, i. 6. which shows the body which way to 
move and turn, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34; the prophecies of 
the O. T., inasmuch as they afforded at least some knowl- 
edge relative to the glorious return of Jesus from heaven 
down even to the time when by the Holy Spirit that same 
light, like the day and the day-star, shone upon the hearts 
of men, the light by which the prophets themselves had 
been enlightened and which was necessary to the full per- 
ception of the true meaning of their prophecies, 2 Pet. 
i. 19; to the brightness of a lamp that cheers the be- 
holders a teacher is compared, whom even those rejoiced 
in who were unwilling to comply with his demands, Jn. 
y. 35; Christ, who will hereafter illumine his follow- 
ers, the citizens of the heavenly kingdom, with his own 
glory, Rev. xxi. 23.* 

iw; impf. €Avov; 1 aor. ἔλυσα; Pass., pres. λύομαι; 
impf. ἐλυόμην ; pf. 2 pers. sing. λέλυσαι, ptep. λελυμένος; 1 
aor. ἐλύθην ; 1 fut. λυθήσομαι ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. sey- 
eral times for ND to open, WAN and Chald. yyw (Dan. 
iii. 25; v.12); to loose; i.e. 1. to loose any person 
(or thing) tied or fastened: prop. the bandages of the 
feet, the shoes, Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27; Acts 
[xiii. 25]; vii. 33, (so for ow to take off, Ex. iii.5; Josh. 
v.15); πῶλον (δεδεμένον), Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2, [81 
mrg.], 4 sq-; Lk. xix. 30 sq. 33; bad angels, Rev. ix. 
14 sq.; τὸν βοῦν ἀπὸ τῆς φάτνης, Lk. xiii. 15; trop. of 
husband and wife joined together by the bond of matri- 
mony, AéAvoat ἀπὸ γυναικός (opp. to δέδεσαι γυναικί), 
spoken of a single man, whether he has already had a 
wife or has not yet married, 1 Co. vii. 27. 2. to loose 
one bound, i. e. to unbind, release from bonds, set free: 
one bound up (swathed in bandages), Jn. xi. 44; bound 
with chains (a prisoner), Acts xxii. 30 (where Rec. adds 
ἀπὸ τῶν δεσμῶν) ; hence i. 4. to discharge from prison, 
let go, Acts xxiv. 26 Ree. (so as far back as Hom.); in 
Apocalyptic vision of the devil (κεκλεισμένον), Rev. xx. 
8; ἐκ τῆς φυλακῆς αὐτοῦ, 7; metaph. to free (ἀπὸ δεσμοῦ) 
from the bondage of disease (one held by Satan) by 
restoration to health, Lk. xiii. 16 ; to release one bound 
by the chains of sin, ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, Rev. i. 5 L T Tr 
WH (see λούω fin. [οἵ. W. § 30, 6 a.]). 3. to loosen, 
undo, dissolve, anything bound, tied, or compacted to- 


λύω 


gether: the seal of a book, Rev. v. 2, [5 Rec.]; trop., 
τὸν δεσμὸν τῆς γλώσσης τινός, to remove an impediment 
of speech, restore speech to a dumb man, Mk. vii. 35 
(Justin, hist. 13, 7, 1 cui nomen Battos propter linguae 
obligationem fuit; 6 linguae nodis solulis loqui primum 
coepit); an assembly, i. 6. to dismiss, break up: τὴν 
συναγωγήν, pass., Acts xiii. 43 (ἀγορήν, Hom. Il. 1, 305; 
Gd. 2, 257, ete.; Apoll. Rh. 1, 708; τὴν στρατιάν, Xen. 
Cyr. 6,1, 2); of the bonds of death, λύειν τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ 
θανάτου, Acts ii. 24 (see div). Laws, as having bind- 
ing force, are likened to bonds; hence λύειν is i. q. 10 
annul, subvert; to do away with; to deprive of authority, 
whether by precept or by act: ἐντολήν, Mt. v. 19; τὸν 
νόμον, Jn. Vii. 23; τὸ σάββατον, the commandment con- 
cerning the sabbath, Jn. v. 18; τὴν γραφήν, Jn. x. 35; cf. 
Kuinoel on Mt. v. 17; [on the singular reading λύει τὸν 
Ἰησοῦν, 1 Jn. iv. 8 WH mrg. see Westcott, Com. ad loc.] ; 
by a Chald. and Talmud. usage (equiv. to TAX, 81 [cf. 


985 


μάγος 


W. 827), opp. to δέω (4. ν. 2 ¢.), to declare lawful: Mt. 
xvi. 19; xviii. 18, [but ef. Weiss in Meyer 7te Aufl. ad 
Il. ce.]. to loose what is compacted or built together, 
to break up, demolish, destroy: prop. in pass. éAveto 9 
πρύμνα, was breaking to pieces, Acts xxvii. 41; τὸν ναόν, 
Jn. ii. 19; τὸ μεσότοιχον τοῦ φραγμοῦ, Eph. ii. 14 (τὰ τείχη, 
1 Esdr. i. 52: γέφυραν, Xen. an. 2, 4, 17 sq.) ; to dissolve 
something coherent into parts, fo destroy: pass., [τούτων 
πάντων λυομένων, 2 Pet. iii. 11]; τὰ στοιχεῖα (καυσούμενα), 
2 Pet. iii. 10; οὐρανοί (πυρούμενοι), ib. 12; metaph. to 
overthrow, do away with: τὰ ἔργα τοῦ διαβόλου, 1 Jn. iii. 
8. [Comp.: dva-, ἀπο-, δια-, éx-, émt-, kata-, Tapa-Ava. | * 

Aats [WH Λωίς], -ἴδος, ἡ, Lois, a Christian matron, the 
grandmother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.* 

«Λώτ, 6, (1) a covering, veil), [indecl.; ef. B.D.], Lot, 
the son of Haran the brother of Abraham (Gen. xi. 27, 
315 xii. 4 sqq.; xiii. 1 sqq.; xiv. 12 sqq.; xix. 1 sqq.): 
Lk. xvii. 28 sq. 32; 2 Pet. ii. 7.° 


M 


[M, μ: on its (Alexandrian, cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et 
Alex. p. 130 sq.) retention in such forms as λήμψομαι, ave- 
λήμφθη, προσωπολήμπτης, ἀνάλημψις, and the like, see (the 
several words in their places, and) W. 48; B. 62 (54), esp. 
Ταῦ, Proleg. p. 72; Kuenen and Cobet, Praef. p. 1xx.; Seriv- 
ener, Collation ete. p. lv. sq., and Introd. p. 14; Fritzsche, Rom. 
vol. i. p. 110; on-y- or -μμ- ἴῃ pf. pass. pteps. (e. g. διεστραμ- 
μένος, περιρεραμμένος, etc., see each word in its place, and) 
ef. WH. App. p- 170sq.; on the dropping of uw in ἐμπίπλημι, 
ἐμπιπράω, see the words. | 

Μαάθ, 6, (WD to be small), Maath, one of Christ’s 
ancestors: Lk. iii. 26.* 

Μαγαδάν, see the foll. word. 

Μαγδαλά, a place on the western shore of the Lake of 
Galilee, about three miles distant from Tiberias towards 
the north; according to the not improbable conjecture 
of Gesenius (Thesaur. i. p. 267) identical with Sx-baa 
(i. e. tower of God), a fortified city of the tribe of 
Naphtali (Josh. xix. 38); in the Jerus. Talmud 5730 
(Magdal or Migdal); now Medschel or Medjdel, a 
wretched Mohammedan village with the ruins of an an- 
cient tower (see Win. RWB. s. v.; Robinson, Palest. ii. 
p- 396 sq.; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 661; Kneucker in 
Schenkel iv. p. 84; [Hackett in B.D. s. v.3| Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 571 sq.]): Mt. xv. 39 RG, with 
the var. reading (adopted by LT Tr WH [cf. WH. App. 


p- 1607) Mayadav, Vulg. Magedan, (Syr. PS τς NR ate 
either of these forms was the one used by the Evangelist 


it could very easily have been changed by the copyists 
into the more familiar name Μαγδαλά." 


MaySadnvh, -ῆς, ἡ, (Maydadd, q. ν.), Magdalene, a 
woman of Magdala: Mt. xxvii. 56, 61; xxviii. 1; Mk. 
xv. 40,47; xvi.1,9; Lk. viii. 2; xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25; 
5.0.6 Ip Θὲ" 

[Μαγεδών (Rev. xvi. 16 WH), see ‘Appayedav.] 

μαγεία (T WH payia, see I, ¢), -as, ἡ, (μάγος, q- V-), 
magic; plur. magic arts, sorceries: Acts viii.11. (The- 
ophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

μαγεύω; (μάγος); tobe a magician; to practise magical 
arts: Acts viii. 9. (Eur. Iph. 1338; Plut. Artax. 3, 6, 
and in other auth.) * 

payla, see μαγεία. 

μάγος, -ov, 6, (Ilebr. 39, plur. 0°33; a word of Indo- 
Germanic origin; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 766; J. G. 
Miller in Herzog viii. p. 678; [ Vaniéek, Fremdworter, 
8s. v.; but the word is now regarded by many as of Baby- 
lonian origin; see Schrader, Keilinschriften u.s.w. 2te 
Aufl. p. 417 sqq.]); fr. Soph. and Hdt. down; Sept. 
Dan. ii. 2 and several times in Theodot. ad Dan. for 
AWN; a magus; the name given by the Babylonians 
(Chaldzans), Medes, Persians, and others, to the wise 
men, teachers, priests, physicians, astrologers, seers, in- 
terpreters of dreams, augurs, soothsayers, sorcerers ete. ; 
cf. Win. RWB. 5. v.; J. G. Miiller in Herzog I. 6. pp. 
675-685; Holtzmann in Schenkel iv. p. 84 sq.; [BB.DD. 
s. v. Magi]. In the N. T. the name is given 1. 
to the oriental wise men (astrologers) who, having dis- 
covered by the rising of a remarkable star [see ἀστήρ, 
and cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 209 sqq.] that 
the Messiah had just been born, came to Jerusalem to 


Maywy 


worship him: Mt. ii. 1, 7, 16. 2. to false prophets 
and sorcerers: Acts xiii. 6, 8, ef. viii. 9, 11.* 

Μαγώγ, 6, see Tay. 

Μαδιάμ, ἡ, (Hebr. [) 129 [i. e. ‘strife’]), Midian [in 
A. V. (ed. 1611) N. T. Madian], prop. name of the ter- 
ritory of the Midianites in Arabia; it took its name 
from Midian, son of Abraham and Keturah (Gen. xxv. 
1 sq.): Acts vii. 29.* 

patés, -ov, 6, the breast: of a man, Rev. i. 13 Lehm. 
[(see μαστός). From Hom. down.]* 

μαθητεύω: 1 aor. ἐμαθήτευσα; 1 aor. pass. ἐμαθητεύθην; 
(μαθητής); 1. intrans. τινί, to be the disciple of 
one; to follow his precepts and instruction: Mt. xxvii. 57 
RG WH oreg., ef. Jn. xix. 33 (so Plut. mor. pp. 832 Ὁ. 
(vit. Antiph. 1), 837 ο. (vit. Isocr. 10); Jamblichus, vit. 
Pythag. ec. 23). 2. trans. (cf. W. p. 23 and § 38, 
1; [B. § 131, 4]) to make a disciple; to teach, instruct: 
τινά, Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21; pass. with a dat. of 
the pers. whose disciple one is made, Mt. xxvii. 57 LT 
Tr WH txt.; μαθητευθεὶς εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρ. (see 
γραμματεύς, 3), Mt. xiii. 52 Rec., where long since the 
more correct reading τῇ βασ. τῶν ovp. was adopted, but 
without changing the sense; [yet Lchm. inserts év].* 

μαθητής, -οῦ, 6, (μανθάνω), a learner, pupil, disciple: 
univ., opp. to διδάσκαλος, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi. 40; τινός. 
one who follows one’s teaching: ᾿Ιωάννου, Mt. ix. 14; 
Lk. vii. 18 (19); Jn. iii. 25; τῶν Φαρισ., Mt. xxii. 16; 
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v.33; Moicéas, Jn. ix. 28; of Jesus,— 
in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the Jews 
who favored him, joined his party, became his adher- 
ents: Jn. vi. 663; νἱῖ. 8; xix. 38; ὄχλος μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, 
Lk. vi. 17; of p. αὐτοῦ ἱκανοί, Lk. vii. 11; ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος 
τῶν pad. Lk. xix. 37; but especially the twelve apostles : 
Mt. x. 1; xi. 1; xii. 1; Mk. viii. 27; Lk. viii. 9; Jn. ii. 
2; iii. 22, and very often; also simply of μαθηταί, Mt. 
xiii. 10; xiv. 19; Mk. x. 24; Lk. ix. 16; Jn. vi. 11 [Rec.], 
etc.; in the Acts of μαθηταί are all those who confess 
Jesus as the Messiah, Christians: Acts vi. 1 sq. 7; ix. 19; 
xi. 26, and often; with τοῦ κυρίου added, Actsix.1. The 
word is not found in the O. T., nor in the Epp. of the 
N. T., nor in the Apocalypse; in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt.], 
Arstph., Xen., Plato, down. 

μαθήτρια, -as, 7, (a fem. form of μαθητής ; cf. ψάλτης, 
ψάλτρια, ete.,in Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 425), a female dis- 
ciple; i. gq. a Christian woman: Acts ix. 36. (Diod. 2, 
52; Diog. Laért. 4, 2; 8, 42.)* 

[Ma0@a8las, see Ματταθίας. 

Ma(@aios, Μαθθάν, see Ματθαῖος, Ματθάν. 

Μαθθάτ, see Ματθάτ. 

Μαθουσάλα, T WH Μαθουσαλά [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 
103], 6, (nwa man of a dart, fr. 391, construct conn 
of the unused ΠΣ a man, and now a dart {ef. B. D. s. 
y.]), Methuselah, the son of Enoch and grandfather of 
Noah (Gen. v. 21): Lk. iii. 37.* 

Maivav (TTr WH Μεννά), indecl., (Lchm. Μέννας, 
gen. Mewa), 6, Menna or Menan, [ A. V. (1611) Menam], 
the name of one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 31 [Lchm. 
br. τοῦ M.].* 


386 


μακράν 


μαίνομαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to be mad, to rave: said of 
one who so speaks that he seems not to be in his right 
mind, Acts xii. 15; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 23; opp. to 
σωφροσύνης ῥήματα ἀποφθέγγεσθαι, Acts xxvi. 25; joined 
with δαιμόνιον ἔχειν, Jn. x. 20. [Comp.: éu-paivopa. |* 

μακαρίζω; Attic fut. μακαριῶ [cf. B. 37 (32)]; (μακά- 
ptos); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Ws; to pronounce 
blessed : τινά, Lk. i. 48; Jas. v. 11 (here Vulg. beatifico).* 

μακάριος, -a, -ov, (poetic μάκαρ). [ fr. Pind., Plat. down], 
blessed, happy: joined to names of God, 1 Tim. i. 11; 
vi. 15 (cf. μάκαρες θεοί in Hom. and Hes.); ἐλπίς, Tit. 
ii. 13; as a predicate, Acts xx. 35; 1 Pet. iii. 14; iv. 
14; ἡγοῦμαί τινα pax. Acts xxvi. 2; μακάρ. ἔν τινι, Jas. i. 
25. In congratulations, the reason why one is to be 
pronounced blessed is expressed by a noun or by a ptep. 
taking the place of the subject, μακάριος ὁ ete. (Hebr. 
“3 > WR, Ps. i.1; Deut. xxxiii. 29, ete.) blessed the man, 
who ete. [W. 551 (512 sq.)]: Mt. v. 3-11; Lk. vi. 20- 
22; Jn. xx. 29; Rev. i. 3; xvi.15; xix.9; xx.6; xxii. 
14; by the addition to the noun of a ptep. which takes 
the place of a predicate, Lk. i. 45; x. 23; xi. 27 sq.; 
Rev. xiv. 13; foll. by és with a finite verb, Mt. xi. 6; 
LK. vii. 23; xiv. 15; Ro. iv. 7 sq.; the subject noun in- 
tervening, Lk. xii. 37,43; xxiii. 29; Jas.i.12; pax.... 
ὅτι, Mt. xiii. 16; xvi. 17; Lk. xiv. 14; foll. by ἐάν, Jn. 
xiii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 40. [See Schmidt ch. 187, 7.] 

μακαρισμός, -ov, 6, (μακαρίζω), declaration of blessed- 
ness: Ro. iv. 9; Gal. iv. 15; λέγειν τὸν pak. twos, to uller 
a declaration of blessedness upon one, a fuller way of say- 
ing μακαρίζειν τινά, to pronounce one blessed, Ro. iv. 6. 
(Plat. rep. 9 p. 591 d.; [Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 34]; Plut. 
mor. p. 471 c.; eccles. writ.) * 

Μακεδονία, -as, ἡ [on use of art. with cf. W. § 18, 5 a. 
c.], Macedonia, a country bounded on the S. by Thessaly 
and Epirus, on the E. by Thrace and the Agean Sea, 
on the W. by Illyria, and on the N. by Dardania and 
Moesia [cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)]: Acts xvi. 9 sq. 12; 
XVili. 5; xix. 21 sq.; xx. 1,3; Ro. xv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 5; 
9. (οἱ 1. 16: 11: 185 νι: δ᾽ νῷ 1; χὶ 9. DT αν. τ 5 
Whoa. 7 Βα: αν» 105) 1 ΠΤ 8.5 

Μακεδών, -dvos, 6, a Macedonian: Acts xvi. 9 [cf. B. 
§ 123, 8 Rem.]; xix. 29; xxvii. 2; 2 Co. ix. 2, 4.* 

μάκελλον, -ov, τό, a Lat. word, macellum [prob. akin to 
pax-n; Vaniéek p. 687 (cf. Plut. as below) ], a place where 
meatand other articles of food are sold, meat-market, pro- 
vision-market, [A. V. shambles]: 1Co. x. 25. (Dio Cass. 
61, 18 τὴν ἀγορὰν τῶν ὄψων, τὸ μάκελλον; [Plut. ii. p. 277 ἃ. 
(quaest. Rom. 54) ].) * 

μακράν (prop. fem. acc. of the adj. μακρός, sc. ὁδόν, a 
long way [W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12]), adv., Sept. 
for pin, [fr. Aeschyl. down]; far, a great way: absol., 
ἀπέχειν, Lk. xv. 20; of the terminus to which, far hence, 
ἐξαποστελῶ σε, Acts xxii. 21; with ἀπό twos added, Mt. 
viii. 30; Lk. vii. 6 [T om. ἀπό]; Jn. xxi. 8; τὸν Oedv... 
od μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα, i. 6. who is 
near every one of us by his power and influence (so that 
we have no need to seek the knowledge of him from with- 
out), Acts xvii. 27; of εἰς μακράν [cf. W. 415 (387)] 


μακρόθεν 


those that are afar off, the inhabitants of remote regions, 
i. e. the Gentiles, Acts ii. 39, ef. Is. ii. 2 sqa.; Zech. vi. 
15. metaph. οὐ μακρὰν ef ἀπὸ τῆς Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ, but little 
is wanting for thy reception into the kingdom of God, 
or thou art almost fit to be a citizen in the divine king- 
dom, Mk. xii. 34; of ποτὲ ὄντες μακμάν (opp. to οἱ ἐγγύς), 
of heathen (on the sense, see ἐγγύς, 1 b.), Eph. ii. 13; 
also of μακράν, ib. 17.* 

μακρόθεν, (μακρός), adv., esp. of later Grk. [Polyb., 
al.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 93]; Sept. for pint, Pin, 
ete.; from afar, afar: Mk. viii. 3; xi. 13; Lk. xviii. 13; 
xxii. 54; xxiii. 49; oo the prep. ἀπό prefixed (cf. W. 
422 (393); § 65,2; B. 70 (62)): Mt. xxvi. 58 [here 
Tom. WH br. ἀπό]; xxvii. 55; Mk. v. 6; xiv. 54; xv. 
40; Lk. xvi. 23; Rev. xviii. 10, 15,17; also LT Tr WH 
in Mk. xi. 13; LT Trmrg. WH in Lk. xxiii. 49; T Tr 
WH in Mk. viii. 3, (Ps. exxxvii. (exxxviii.) 6; 2 K. xix. 
25 cod. Alex. ; 2 Esdr. iii. 13).* 

μακροθυμέω, -@; 1 aor., impv. μακροθύμησον, ptep. μακρο- 
θυμήσας ; (fr. μακρόθυμος, and this fr. μακρός and θυμός) ; 
to be of a long spirit, not to lose heart; hence 1. to 
persevere patiently and bravely (i. q. καρτερῶ, so Plut. de 
gen. Socr. c. 24 p. 593 f.; Artem. oneir. 4, 11) in endur- 
ing misfortunes and troubles: absol., Heb. vi. 15; Jas. 
v. 8; with the addition of ἕως and a gen. of the desired 
event, ib. 7; with ἐπί and a dat. of the thing hoped for, 
ibid.; add, Sir. ii. 4. 2. to be patient in bearing the 
offences and injuries of others; to be mild and slow in 
avenging; to be long-suffering, slow to anger, slow to pun- 
ish, (for Ss JN, to defer anger, Prov. xix. 11): absol. 
1 Co. xiii. 4; πρός twa, 1 Th. v.14; ἐπί with dat. of pers. 
(see ἐπί, B. 2 a. 6.), Mt. xviii. 26, 29 [here L Tr with the 
acc., so Tr in 26; see ἐπί, C. I. 2g. β.1; Sir. xviii. 11; 
xxix. 8; hence spoken of God deferring the punishment 
of sin: εἴς τινα, towards one, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [here LT Tr 
mrg. διά (4ᾳ. ν. B. 11. 2b. sub fin.)]; ἐπί with dat. of 
pers., Lk. xviii. 7; in this difficult passage we shall nei- 
ther preserve the constant usage of μακροθυμεῖν (see just 
before) nor get a reasonable sense, unless we regard the 
words ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς as negligently (see αὐτός, II. 6) referring 
to the enemies of the ἐκλεκτῶν, and translate καὶ μακροθυ- 
μῶν ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς even though he is long-suffering, indulgent, 
to them; —this negligence being occasioned by the cir- 
cumstance that Luke seems to represent Jesus as speak- 
ing with Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22 (18) in mind, where ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτοῖς must be referred to ἀνελεημόνων. The reading [of 
LT Tr WH] καὶ μακροθυμεῖ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς ; by which τὸ μακρο- 
θυμεῖν is denied to God [ef. W. § 55, 7] cannot be ac- 
cepted, because the preceding parable certainly demands 
the notion of slowness on God’s part in avenging the right; 
cf. De Wette ad loc.; [but to this it is replied, that the 
denial of actual delay is not inconsistent with the as- 
sumption of apparent delay; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) 
ad loc. ].* 

μακροθυμία, -as, 7, (μακρόθυμος [ cf. waxpobupéw]), (Vulg. 
longanimitas, ete.), i. 6. 1. patience, endurance, con- 
stancy, steadfastness, perseverance; esp. as shown in bear- 
ing troubles and ills, (Plut. Luc. 32 sq.; ἄνθρωπος ὧν 


38 


- 


( μᾶλλον 


μηδέποτε τὴν ἀλυπίαν αἰτοῦ παρὰ θεῶν, ἀλλὰ μακροθυμίαν, 
Menand. frag. 19, p. 203 ed. Meineke [vol. iy. p. 238 
Frag. comic. Graec. (Berl. 1841)]): Col. i. 11; 2 Tim. 
iii. 10; Heb. vi. 12; Jas. v.10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; 
Barn. ep. 2, 2; [Is. lvii. 15; Joseph. Ὁ. j. 6, 1, 5; ef. 1 
Mace. viii. 4]. 2. patience, forbearance, long-suffer- 
ing, slowness in avenging wrongs, (for D'DN 718, Jer. xv. 
15): Ro. ii. 4; ix. 22; 2Co. vi.6; Gal. v. 22; Eph. iv. 
2; Col. 111. 12; 1 Tim. i. 16 [cf. B. 120 (105)]; 2 Tim. 
iv. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 15; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
13, 1; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1).* 

[ϑυν. μακροθυμία, ὕπομον ἡ (occur together or in the 
same context in Col. i. 11; 2 Cor. vi. 4,6; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Jas. v. 
10,11; cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1): Bp. 
Lghtft. remarks (on Col. 1. c.), “The difference of meaning 
is best seen in their opposites. While ὕπο. is the temper 
which does not easily succumb under suffering, μακ. is the 
self-restraint which does not hastily retaliatea wrong. The 
one is opposed to cowardice or despondency, the other to 
wrath or revenge (Prov. xv. 18; xvi. 32)... This distine- 
tion, though it applies generally, is not true without excep- 
tion”. ..; cf. also his note on Col. iii. 12, and see (more at 
length) Trench, N. T Syn. § liii.] 

μακροθύμως, adv., with longanimity (Vulg. longanimiter, 
Heb. vi. 15), i. e. patiently: Acts xxvi. 3.* 

μακρός, -d, -dv, [fr. Hom. down], long; of place, remote, 
distant, far off: χώρα, Lk. xv.13; xix.12. of time, long, 
lasting long: μακρὰ προσεύχομαι, to pray long, make long 
prayers, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 
47.* 

μακρο-χρόνιος, -ov, (μακρός and χρόνος), lit. ‘long-timed’ 
(Lat. longaevus), long-lived: Eph. vi. 8. (Ex. xx. 12; 
Deut. v. 16; very rare in prof. auth.) * 

μαλακία, -as, 7, (μαλακός) : 1. prop. softness [fr. 
Hat. down]. 2. in the N. T. (like ἀσθένεια, ἀρρω- 
aria) infirmity, debility, bodily weakness, sickness, (Sept. 
for on, disease, Deut. vii. 15; xxvii. 61; Is. xxxviii. 9, 
etc.) ; joined with νόσος, Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1.* 

μαλακός, -7, -dv, soft: soft to the touch: ἱμάτια, Mt. xi. 
8 RGLbr.; Lk. vii. 25, (ἱματίων πολυτελῶν κ- μαλακῶν, 
Artem. oneir. 1,78; ἐσθής, Hom. Od. 23, 290; Artem. 
oneir. 2,3; χιτών, Hom. 1]. 2,42); and simply τὰ μαλακά, 
soft raiment (see λευκός, 1): Mt. xi. 8 TTrWH. Like 
the Lat. mollis, metaph. and in a bad sense: effeminate, of 
a catamite, a male who submits his body to unnatural 
lewdness, 1 Co. vi. 9 (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 2 sub fin.; 
[Diog. Laért. 7, 173 fin.]).* 

Μαλελεήλ (Μελελεήλ, Tdf.), ὃ, Oxia praising God, 
fr. S$ and 5x), Mahalaleel [A. V. Maleleel], son of 
Cainan: Lk. iii. 37.* 

μάλιστα (superlative of the adv. μάλα), [fr. Hom. down], 
adv., especially, chiefly, most of all, above all: Acts xx. 
88; xxv. 26; Gal. vi. 10; Phil. iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 10; 
v. 8,17; 2 Tim. iv. 13; Tit. i.10; Philem. 16; 2 Pet. 
li. 10; μάλιστα γνώστης, especially expert, thoroughly 
well-informed, Acts xxvi. 3.* 

μᾶλλον (compar. of μάλα, very, very much), [fr. Hom. 
down], adv., more, to a greater degree; rather; ab 
added to verbs and adjectives, it denotes increase, a 


μᾶλλον 


greater quantity, a larger measure, a higher degree, 
more, more fully, (Germ. in héherem Grade, Maasse); ἃ. 
words defining the measure or size are joined to it in the 
ablative (dat.): πολλῷ much, by far, Mk. x. 48; Lk. 
xviii. 39; Ro. v. 15, 17, (in both these verses the under- 
lying thought is, the measure of salvation for which we 
are indebted to Christ is far greater than that of the 
ruin which came from Adam; for the difference between 
the consequences traceable to Adam and to Christ is not 
only one of quality, but of quantity also; cf. Riickert, Com. 
on Rom. vol. i. 281 sq. [4]. (fr. Chrys. to Meyer and Godet) 
content themselves here with a logical increase, far 
more certainly]); 2 Co. 111. 9,11; Phil. ii. 12; πόσῳ how 
much, Lk. xii. 24; Ro. xi. 12; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14; 
τοσούτῳ by so much, ὅσῳ by as much, (se. μᾶλλον), Heb. 
x. 25. b. in comparison it often so stands that than 
before must be mentally added, [ A. V. the more, so much 
the more], as Mt. xxvii. 24 (μᾶλλον θόρυβος γίνεται [but al. 
refer this to 2 b. a. below]); Lk. v. 15 (διήρχετο μᾶλλον); 
Jn. v. 18 (μᾶλλον ἐζήτουν) 3 xix. 8; Acts v. 14; ix. 22; 
Xx. 2: 2 Co: vil 7) 1 ἘΠ, ἵν. 1 10: 2 ῬΕΙ͂ ΣΙ 10: ἔτι 
μᾶλλον καὶ μᾶλλον, Phil. 1. 9; or the person or thing with 
which the comparison is made is evident from what pre- 
cedes, as Phil. iii. 4; it is added to comparatives, Mk. 
vii. 36; 2 Co. vii. 13; πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρεῖσσον, Phil. i. 23 ; 
see [Wetstein on Phil. l. 6.7; W. § 35, 1 ef. 603 (561); 
[B. § 123, 11]; to verbs that have a comparative force, 
μᾶλλον διαφέρειν τινός, to be of much more value than one, 
Mt. vi. 26. μᾶλλον ἢ, more than, Mt. xviii. 13; μᾶλλον 
with gen., πάντων ὑμῶν, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (Xen. mem. 3, 12, 
1). joined to positive terms it forms a periphrasis for a 
comparative [cf. W. § 35,2 a.], foll. by ἢ, as μακάριον p. 
for μακαριώτερον, Acts xx. 35; add, 1 Co. ix.15; Gal. iv. 
273 πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἀναγκαία. 1 Co. xii. 22; sometimes μᾶλ- 
λον seems to be omitted before 7; see under ἢ, 3 f. ο. 
μᾶλλον δέ, what moreover is of greater moment, [A. V. yea 
rather]: Ro. viii. 34 (2 Mace. vi. 23). 2. it marks 
the preference of one thing above another, and is to be 
rendered rather, sooner, (Germ. eher, vielmehr, lieber); a. 
it denotes that which occurs more easily than something 
else, and may be rendered sooner, (Germ. eher): thus 
πολλῷ μᾶλλον in arguing from the less to the greater, Mt. 
vi. 30; Ro.v. 9sq.; Heb. xii. 9 [here LT Tr WH πολὺ μ.1; 
also πολὺ [RG πολλῷ] μᾶλλον sc. οὐκ ἐκφευξόμεθα, i 6. 
auch more shall we not escape (ef. W. p. 633 (588) note 
‘B. § 148, 3b.]), or even ἔνδικον μισθαποδοσίαν ληψόμεθα 
(Heb. ii. 2), or something similar (cf. Matthiae § 634, 3), 
Heb. xii. 25. πόσῳ μᾶλλον, Mt. vii. 11; x. 25; Lk. xii. 
28; Ro. xi. 12,24; Philem.16. ina question, οὐ μᾶλλον; 
(Lat. nonne potius?) [do not. . . more},1 Co. ix. 12. b. 
it is opposed to something else and does away with 
it; accordingly it may be rendered the rather (Germ. 
vielmehr); a. after a preceding negative or prohibi- 
tive sentence: Mt. x. 6,28; xxv.9; Mk. ν. 26; Ro. xiv. 
13; 1 Tim. vi. 2; Heb. xii. 13; μᾶλλον δέ, Eph. iv. 28; v. 
11. οὐχὶ μᾶλλον; (nonne potius ?) not rather ete.? 1 Co. 
v.2; vi. 7. B. so that μᾶλλον belongs to the thing 
which is preferred, consequently to a noun, not toa 


388 


μανθανω 


verb: In. iii. 19 (ἠγάπησαν μᾶλλον τὸ σκότος ἣ τὸ φῶς, 
i. 6. when they ought to have loved the light they (hated 
it, and) loved the darkness, vs. 20); xii. 43; Acts iv. 
19; v.29; 2 Tim. iii.4. that which it opposes and sets 
aside must be learned from the context [cf. W. § 35, 4]: 
Mk. xy. 11 (se. τὸν Ἰησοῦν) ; Phil. i. 12 (where the mean- 
ing is, ‘so far is the gospel from suffering any loss or dis- 
advantage from my imprisonment, that the number of 
disciples is increased in consequence of it’). γ. by 
way of correction, μᾶλλον δέ, nay rather; to speak more 
correctly: Gal. iv. 9 (Joseph. antt. 15, 11, 8; Ael. v. h. 
2, 13 and often in prof. auth.; ef. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. 
on Sap. p. 176 sq.). c. it does not do away with that 
with which it is in opposition, but marks what has the 
preference: more willingly, more readily, sooner 
(Germ. Lieber), θέλω μᾶλλον and εὐδοκῶ μᾶλλον, to prefer, 
1 Co. xiv. 5; 2 Co. v. 8, (βούλομαι μᾶλλον, Xen. Cyr. 1, 
1, 1); ζηλοῦν, 1 Co. xiv. 1 (μᾶλλον se. ζηλοῦτε) ; χρῶμαι, 
1 Co. vii. 21. 

Μάλχος (72 Grecized; οἵ. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. 
f. Luth. Theol., 1876, p. 605), -ov, 6, Malchus, a servant 
of the high-priest : Jn. xviii. 10. [Cf Hackett in B. Ὁ. 
3 VAll 

μάμμη, -ns, ἡ, 1. in the earlier Grk. writ. mother 
(the name infants use in addressing their mother). 2. 
in the later writ. ([Philo], Joseph., Plut., App., Hdian., 
Artem.) i. q. τήθη, grandmother (see Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 
133-135 [cf. W. 25]): 2 Tim. i. 5; 4 Mace. xvi. 9." 

μαμωνᾶς (G LT Tr WH), incorrectly pappovas (Rec. 
fin Mt.]),-a [B. 20 (18); W. § 8, 1], 6, mammon (Chald. 
ΔΕ), to be derived, apparently, fr. 13; hence what is 
trusted in [cf. Buztorf, Lex. chald. talmud. et rabbin. col. 
1217 sq. (esp. ed. Fischer p. 613 sq.); ace. to Gesenius 
(Thesaur. i. 552) contr. fr. 7120 treasure (Gen. xliii. 23); 
ef. B.D. 5. νος Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 269]), 
riches: Mt. vi. 24 and Lk. xvi. 13, (where it is personi- 
fied and opposed to God; cf. Phil. iii. 19); Lk. xvi. 9, 
11. (“lucrum punice mammon dicitur,” Augustine [de 
serm. Dom. in monte, ]. ii. 6. xiv. (§ 47)]; the Sept. 
trans. the Hebr. 93328 in Is. xxxiii. 6 θησαυροί, and in 
Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 3 πλοῦτος.) * 

Mavajy, 6, (0737) consoler), Manaen, a certain prophet 
in the church at Antioch: Acts xiii. 1. [See Hackett 
in B. D. s. v.]* 

Μανασσῆς [Trez. Mavy. in Rev.], gen. and acc. 4 
[B. 19 (17); W.§ 10,1; but see WH. App. p. 159°), 
6, (NWI) causing to forget, fr. N72 to forget), Manas. 
seh; 1. the firstborn son of Joseph (Gen. xli. 51): 
Rey. vii. 6. 2. the son of Hezekiah, king of Jadah 
(2 K. xxi. 1-18): Mt. i. 10." 

μανθάνω; 2 aor. ἔμαθον; pf. ptep. μεμαθηκώς ; Sept. 
for ἼΞΩΣ [fr. Hom. down]; 10 learn, be apprised; a 
univ.: absol. to increase one’s knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 11; 
2 Tim. iii. 7; to be increased in knowledge, 1 Co. xiv. 
31; ri, Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. xiv. 35; Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim. 
iii. 14; Rev. xiv. 3; in Jn. vii. 15 supply αὐτά; foll. by 
an indir. quest., Mt. ix. 13; Χριστόν, to be imbued with 
the knowledge of Christ, Eph. iv. 20; τί foll. by ἀπό w. 


μανία 


gen. of the thing furnishing the instruction, Mt. xxiv. 32; 
Mk. xiii. 28; ἀπό w. gen. of the pers. teaching, Mt. xi. 
29; Col. i. 7; as in class. Grk. (cf. Kriiger § 68, 34, 1; 
B. § 147, 5 [ef. 167 (146) and ἀπό, II. 1 d.]); foll. by 
παρά w. gen. of pers. teaching, 2 Tim. iii. 14 cf. Jn. vi. 45; 
foll. by ἐν w. dat. of pers., in one i. 6. by his example [see 
ἐν, I. 3 b.], 1 Co. iv. 6 [ef. W. 590 (548 sq.); B. 394 sq. 
(338) ]. Ὁ. i. q. to hear, be informed: foll. by ὅτε, Acts 
xxili. 27; τὶ ἀπό twos (gen. of pers.), Gal. iii. 2 [see ἀπό, 
u. s. ΤΡ c. to learn by use and practice; [in the Pret. ] 
to be in the habit of, accustomed to: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. 
v. 4; Tit. iii. 14; Phil. iv. 11, (Aeschy]. Prom. 1068; Xen. 
an. 8, 2, 25); ἔμαθεν ad’ ὧν ἔπαθε τὴν ὑπακοήν, Heb. v. 8 
[ef W. § 68, 1 and ἀπό, u. 5.1. In the difficult passage 
1 Tim. v. 13, neither ἀργαί depends upon the verb pav6a- 
vovot (which would mean “they learn to be idle”, or 
“learn idleness”; so Bretschneider [Lex. s. v. 2 b.], and 
W. 347 (325 sq.); [ef. Stallbaum’s note and reff. on 
Plato’s Euthydemus p. 276 b.]), nor περιερχόμενοι (“ they 
learn to go about from house to house,” —so the majority 
of interpreters; for, ace. to uniform Grk. usage, a ptep. 
joined to the verb μανθάνειν and belonging to the subject 
denotes what sort of a person one learns or perceives him- 
self to be, as ἔμαθεν ἔγκυος οὖσα, “she perceived herself 
to be with child,” Hdt. 1, 5); but μανθάνειν must be taken 
absolutely (see a. above) and emphatically, of what they 
learn by going about from house to house and what it is 
unseemly for them to know; cf. Bengel ad loc., and B. 
§ 144, 17; [so Wordsworth in loc.]. [Comp.: κατα- 
μανθάνω.) * 

μανία, -as, 7, (μαίνομαι), madness, frenzy: Acts xxvi. 
24. [From Theognis, Hdt., down.] * 

μάννα, rd, indecl.; [also] ἡ μάννα in Joseph. (antt. 3, 
13,1 [ete.; ἡ μάννη, Orac. Sibyll. 7, 149]); Sept. τὸ μάν [also 
τὸ μάννα, Num. xi. 7] for Hebr. [2 (fr. the unused 439, 


G - 

Arab. uw to be kind, beneficent, to bestow liberally ; 
whence the subst. uy Prop. a ΟἿ [8]. prefer the deriv. 
given Ex. xvi. 15,31; Joseph. antt. 3,1, 6. The word 
mannu is said to be found also in the old Egyptian; Ebers, 
Durch Gosen u.s.w. p. 226; cf. “Speaker’s Commentary” 
Iixod. xvi. note]); manna (Vulg. in N. T. manna indecl. ; 
in O. T. man; yet manna, gen. -ac,is used by Pliny [12, 
14, 32, etc.] and Vegetius [ Vet. 2, 39] of the grains of 
certain plants); according to the accounts of travellers 
a very sweet dew-like juice, which in Arabia and other 
oriental countries exudes from the leaves [ace. to others 
only from the twigs and branches; ef. Robinson, Pal. 
i. 115] of certain trees and shrubs, particularly in the 
summer of rainy years. It hardens into little white 
pellucid grains, and is collected before sunrise by the in- 
habitants of those countries and used as an article of food, 
very sweet like honey. The Israelites in their journey 
through the wilderness met with a great quantity of food 
of this kind; and tradition, which the biblical writers 
follow, regarded it as bread sent down in profusion from 
heaven, and in various ways gave the occurrence the dig- 


389 


Μαριάμ 


nity of an illustrious miracle (Ex. xvi. 12 sqq.; Ps. 
Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 24; civ. (ev.) 40; Sap. xvi. 20); cf. 
Win. RWB. 5. v. Manna; Knobel on Exod. p. 171 sqq.; 
Furrer in Schenkel iv. 109 sq.; [Jobinson as above, 
and p.590; Tischendorf, Aus dem heil. Lande, p. 54 sqq.- 
(where on p. vi. an analysis of diff. species of natural 
manna is given after Berthelot (Comptes rendus heb- 
dom. ἃ. séances de l’acad. des sciences. Paris 1861, 2de 
sémestre (30 Sept.) p. 583 sqq.); esp. Ritter, Erdkunde 
Pt. xiv. pp. 665-695 (Gage’s trans. vel. i. pp. 271-292, 
where a full list of reff. is given); esp. E. Renaud and 
E. Lacour, De la manne du désert ete. (1881). Against 
the identification of the natural manna with the miracu- 
lous, see BB.DD. 8. v.; esp. Riehm in his HWB.; Car- 
ruthers in the Bible Educator ii. 174 sqq.]. In the N. T. 
mention is made of a. that manna with which the 
Israelites of old were nourished: Jn. vi. 31, 49, and R 
L in 58; b. that which was kept in the ark of the 
covenant: Heb. ix. 4 (Ex. xvi. 33) ; c. that which 
in the symbolic language of Rev. ii. 17 is spoken of as 
kept in the heavenly temple for the food of angels and 
the blessed; [see δίδωμε, B. I’. p. 146*].* 

μαντεύομαι ; (μάντις [a seer; allied to μανία, μαίνομαι ; 
ef. Curtius § 429]); fr. Hom. down; to act as seer; de- 
liver an oracle, prophesy, divine: Acts xvi. 16 μαντευομένη, 
of a false prophetess [A. V. by soothsaying]. Sept. for 
DOP, to practise divination; said of false prophets. [On 
the heathen character of the suggestions and associa- 
tions of the word, as distinguished fr. προφητεύω, see 

Trench, N. T. Syn. § vi.] * 

papatvw: 1 fut. pass. μαρανθήσομαι; fr. Hom. II. 9, 
212; 23, 228 on; fo extinguish (a flame, fire, light, ete.) ; 
to render arid, make to waste away, cause to wither; pass. 
to wither, wilt, dry up (Sap. ii. 8 of roses; Job xv. 30). 
Trop. to waste away, consume away, perish, (νόσῳ, Eur. 
Ale. 203; τῷ λιμῷ, Joseph. Ὁ. j. 6, 5,1); 1. q. to have a 
miserable end: Jas. i. 11, where the writer uses a fig. 
suggested by what he had just said (10) ; [B. 52 (46)].* 

μαραναθά [so Lchm., but papav dda RG T Tr WH], the 
Chald. words TDN NIID, i. 6. our Lord cometh or will 
come: 1 Co. xvi. 22. [BB.DD.; ef. Klostermann, Pro- 
bleme ete. (1883) p. 220 sqq.; Kautzsch, Gr. pp. 12, 174; 
Nestle in Theol. Stud. aus Wiirtem. 1884 p. 186 sqq.]* 

μαργαρίτης, -ov, 6, a pearl: Mt. xiii. 45 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 
9; Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. [12], 16; xxi. 21 [hereL TWH 
accent -pira, RG Tr -pira (cf. ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 101)]; 
τοὺς μαργαρίτας βάλλειν ἔμπρυσθεν χοίρων, a proverb, i. 6. 
to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the 
gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (in- 
competent as they are, through their hostility to the 
gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them, Mt. 
vii. 6 (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq.; Job xxviii. 18 sq.).* 

Μάρθα, -as (Jn. xi. 1 [ef. B. 17(15); WH. App. p. 1567), 
ἡ, (Chald. 879 mistress, Lat. domina), Martha, the sis- 
ter of Lazarus of Bethany: Lk. x. 38, 40 sq.; Jn. xi. 1, 
5, 19-39; xii. 2, [On the accent ef. Kautzsch p. 8.]* 

Μαριάμ indecl., and Μαρία, -as, ἡ, (Ὁ 35 ‘obstinacy,’ 
‘rebelliousness’; the well-known prop. name of the sister 


Μάρκος 


990 


μαρτυρεώ 


of Moses; in the Targums 0°97; οἵ, Delitzsch, Zeitschr. | disciple and companion of Paul mentioned in the Acts 


f. luth. Theol. for 1877 p. 2 [Maria is a good Latin name 
also]), Mary. The women of this name mentioned in 
the N. T. are the foll. 1. the mother of Jesus Christ, 
the wife of Joseph; her name is written Mapia [in an 
oblique case] in Mt. 1. 16,18; ii, 11; Mk. vi.3; Lk. i. 
41; Actsi.14[RGL]; Μαριάμ in Mt. xiii. 55; Lk. i. 27, 
30-56 [(in 88 Lmrg. Mapia) ]; ii. 5, 16,34; [Acts i. 14 
TTr WH); the reading varies between the two forms 
in Mt. i. 20 [WH txt. -piav]; Lk. ii. 19 [L T Tr WH txt. 
τρία): so where the other women of this name are men- 
tioned, [see ΤῊ Proleg. p. 116, where it appears that 
in his text the gen. is always (seven times) -pias; the 
nom. in Mk. always (seven times) -pia; that in Jn. -ριάμ 
occurs eleven times, -pia (or -av) only three times, ete. ; 
for the facts respecting the Mss., see (Tdf. u. s. and) 
WH. App. p. 156]; ef. B. 17 (15). 2. Mary Mag- 
dalene (a native of Magdala): Mt. xxvii. 56,61; xxviii. 
1; Mk. xv. 40, 47; xvi. 1,93; Lk. viii. 2; xxiv. 10; Jn. 
πα OOK Lol 18. 18. 3. the mother of James 
the less and Joses, the wife of Clopas (or Alpheus) and 
sister of the mother of Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 56, 613 xxviii. 
1; Mk. xv. 40,47; xvi. 1; Lk. xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25 
(see Ἰάκωβος, 2). There are some, indeed, who, think- 
ing it improbable that there were two living sisters of 
the name of Mary (the common opinion), suppose that 
not three but four women are enumerated in Jn. xix. 25, 
and that these are distributed into two pairs so that ἡ 
ἀδελφὴ τῆς μητρὸς Ιησοῦ designates Salome, the wife of 
Zebedee; so esp. Wieseler inthe Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 
1840, p. 648 sqq., [ef. Bp. Lghtft. com. on Gal., Dissert. 
ii. esp. pp. 255 sq. 264] with whom Liicke, Meyer, Ewald 
and others agree; in opp. to them cf. Grimm in Ersch 
and Gruber’s Encykl. sect. 2 vol. xxii. p.1 sq. In fact, 
instances are not wanting among the Jews of two living 
brothers of the same name, e. g. Onias, in Joseph. antt. 
12, 5,1; Herod, sons of Herod the Great, one by Mari- 
amne, the other by Cleopatra of Jerusalem, Joseph. antt. 
17,1,3; b.j. 1, 28, 4; [ef. B. Ὁ. 5. v. Mary of Cleophas; 
Bp. Lghtft. u. s. p. 264]. 4. the sister of Lazarus 
and Martha: Lk. x. 39,42; Jn. xi. 1-45; xii. 3. Sp 
the mother of John Mark: Acts xii. 12. 6. a cer- 
tain Christian woman mentioned in Ro. xvi. 6.” 
Μάρκος. -ου. 6, Mark; ace. to the tradition of the church 
the author of the second canonical Gospel and identical 
with the John Mark mentioned in the Acts (see Ἰωάννης, 
5). He was the son of a certain Mary who dwelt at Je- 
rusalem, was perhaps converted to Christianity by Peter 
(Acts xii. 11 sq-), and for this reason called (1 Pet. v. 13) 
Peter’s son. He was the cousin of Barnabas and the 
companion of Paul in some of his apostolic travels; and 
lastly was the associate of Peter also: Acts xii. 12, 25; 
xv. 37, 39; Col.iv.10; 2Tim.iv.11; Philem. 24 (23); 
1 Pet v. 13, cf. Euseb. h. 6. 2, 15 sq.; 3,39. Some, as 
Grotius, [ Tillemont, Hist. Eccl. ii. 89 sq. 503 sq.; Patri- 
tius, De Evangeliis l. 1, c. 2, quaest. 1 (ef. Cotelerius, Patr. 
Apost. i. 262 sq.) ], Kienlen (in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, 


p- 423), contend that there were two Marks, one {π΄ 


and Pauline Epp., the other the associate of Peter and 
mentioned in 1 Pet. v. 13; [ef. Jas. Morison, Com. on 
Mk. Introd. § 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 107." 

μάρμαρος. -ου, 6, ἡ, (μαρμαίρω to sparkle, glisten); 1. 
a stone, rock, (Hom., Eur.). 2. marble (ef. Ep. Jer. 
71], Theophr., Strabo, al.): Rev. xviii. 12.* 

μάρτυρ, τυρος, 6, see μάρτυς. 

μαρτυρέω, -ὦ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐμαρτύρουν ; fut. μαρ- 
τυρήσω; 1 aor. ἐμαρτύρησα; pf. μεμαρτύρηκα; Pass., pres. 
μαρτυροῦμαι; impf. ἐμαρτυροῦμην ; pf. μεμαρτύρημαι; 1 aor. 
ἐμαρτυρήθην ; ἔτ. [Simon., Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; 
to be a witness, to bear witness, testify, i. 6. to affirm that 
one has seen or heard or experienced something, or that 
(so in the N. T.) he knows it because taught by divine 
revelation or inspiration, (sometimes in the N. T. the 
apostles are said μαρτυρεῖν, as those who had been eye- 
and ear- witnesses of the extraordinary sayings, deeds 
and sufferings of Jesus, which proved his Messiahship ; 
so too Paul, as one to whom the risen Christ had visibly 
appeared; cf. Jn. xv. 27; xix. 35; xxi. 24; Acts xxiii. 
11; 1 Co.xv. 15; 1Jn.i. 2, cf. Acts i. 22sq.; ii. 325 111. 
15; iv. 33; v. 32; x. 39,41; χῆϊ 31; xxvi. 16; [cf. 
Westcott, (“Speaker's”) Com. on Jn., Introd. p. xlv. 
sq-])3 a. in general; absol. fo give (not to keep 
back) testimony: Jn. xv. 27; Acts xxvi. 5; foll. by ὅτε 
recitative and the orat. direct., Jn. iv. 39; also preceded 
by λέγων, In. i. 32; μαρτυρεῖν eis with an ace. of the place 
into (unto) which the testimony (concerning Christ) is 
borne, Acts xxiii. 11 [see εἰς, A. I. 5 b.]; μαρτυρῶ, in- 
serted parenthetically (W. § 62, 2), 2 Co. viii. 3; i. 4- 
to prove or confirm by testimony, 1 Jn. y. 6 sq.; used of 
Jesus, predicting what actually befell him, Jn. xiii. 21; 
of God, who himself testifies in the Scriptures that a 
thing is so (viz. as the author declares), foll. by the reci- 
tative ὅτι, Heb. vii. 17 R. apr. foll. by περί w. gen. of 
a pers., to bear witness concerning one: Jn. i. 7 sq.; περὶ 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, concerning man, i. 6. to tell what one has 
himself learned about the nature, character, conduct, of 
men, Jn. ii. 25 [see ἄνθρωπος, 1 a.]; περί τινος, foll. by 
direct disc., Jn. i. 15; the Scriptures are said to testify 
περὶ Ἰησοῦ, i. e. to declare things which make it evi- 
dent that he was truly sent by God, Jn. v. 39; God is said 
to do the same, — through the Scriptures, ib. 37 cf. viii. 
18; through the expiation wrought by the baptism and 
death of Christ, and the Holy Spirit giving souls assur- 
ance of this expiation, 1 Jn. v. 6-9; so John the Baptist, 
as being a ‘ prophet’, Jn. v. 32; so the works which he 
himself did, ib. 36 (there foll. by ὅτι); x. 25; so the 


| Holy Spirit, Jn. xv. 26; the apostles, 27; so Christ him- 


self περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, Jn. v. 31; viii. 13 sq. 18. περί w. gen. 
of the thing, Jn. xxi. 24; περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ, to bring for- 
ward evidence to prove τὸ κακόν, Jn. xviii. 23. with the 
ace. of a cognate noun, μαρτυρίαν μαρτυρεῖν περί W. a gen. 
of the pers., Jn. v. 32; 1 Jn. v. 9 Rec.; 10, (τὴν αὐτὴν 
μαρτυρίαν μαρτυρεῖν, Plat. Eryx. p. 399 b.; τὴν μαρτυρίαν 
αὐτοῦ ἣν τῇ ἀρετῇ μαρτυρεῖ, Epict. diss. 4, 8, 32 [cf. W. 
225 (211); B. 148 (129)]); w. an ace. of the thing, # 


μαρτυρέω 


testify a thing, bear witness to (of) anything: In. iii. 11, 
82; supply αὐτό in Jn. xix. 35; τινί τι, 1 Jn. i. 2; ὃς 
ἐμαρτύρησε... Χριστοῦ, who has borne witness of (viz. 
in this book, i. e. the Apocalypse) what God has spoken 
and Jesus Christ testified (sc. concerning future events; 
see λόγος, I. 2b. €.), Rev. i. 2; ὁ μαρτυρῶν ταῦτα he that 
testifieth these things i. e. has caused them to be testified 
by the prophet, his messenger, Rev. xxii. 20; ματυρῆσαι 
ὑμῖν ταῦτα ἐπὶ [L Trmrg. WH rg. ἐν] ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις, to 
cause these things to be testified to you in the churches 
or for, on account of, the churches, Rev. xxii. 16, — 
unless ἐπί be dropped from the text and the passage 
translated, fo you, viz. the (seven) churches (of Asia 
Minor), the prophet reverting again to i. 4; οἵ. De 
Wette, Bleek, Diisterdieck, ad loc.; [al., retaining ἐπί, 
render it over, concerning, cf. x. 11; W. 393 (368) c.; see 
ἐπί, B. 2 £. 8. fin.]. οὗ testimony borne not in word but 
by deed, in the phrase used of Christ μαρτυρεῖν τὴν καλὴν 
ὁμολογίαν, to witness the good confession, to attest the 
truth of the (Christian) profession by his sufferings and 
death, 1 Tim. vi. 13, where cf. Hofmann. Pass.: Ro. 
iii. 21 (a righteousness such as the Scriptures testify 
that God ascribes to believers, ef. iv. 3). apr. foll. by 
ὅτι that, Jn. i. 34 [ef. W. 273 (256)]; [iv. 44]; xii. 17 
[here R* Tr txt. WH dre]; 1 Jn. iv. 14; περί w. gen. of 
a pers. foll. by ort, Jn. v. 36; vii. 7; κατά τινος, against 
[so W. 382 (357), Mey., al.; yet see xara, I. 2 b.] one, 
foll. by ὅτι, 1 Co. xv. 15. w. a dat. of the thing i.e. 
for the benefit of, in the interests of, a thing [cf. B. 
§ 133, 11]: τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, In. v. 33; xviii. 37; σοῦ τῇ ἀλη- 
θείᾳ (see ἀλήθεια, II.), to bear witness unto thy truth, 
how great it is, 3 Jn. 3, 6; used of the testimony which 
is given in deeds to promote some object: τῷ λόγῳ, 
Acts xiv. 3 [T prefixes eri]; with a dat. (of a thing) 
incommodi: μαρτυρεῖτε (T Tr WH μάρτυρές ἐστε) τοῖς 
ἔργοις τῶν πατέρων, by what ye are doing ye add to the 
deeds of your fathers a testimony which proves that 
those things were done by them, Lk. xi. 48. w. a dat. 
of the person: to declare to one by testimony (by sug- 
gestion, instruction), Heb. x. 15; foll. by direct dis- 
course, Rey. xxii. 18 GLT Tr WH; ¢0 testify to one 
what he wishes one to testify concerning him: Acts xxii. 53 
foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. iii. 28; Ro. x.2; Gal. iv. 
15; Col. iv. 13; foll. by an ace. w. inf. Acts χ. 48; to 
give testimony in one’s favor, to commend [W. § 31, 4b.; 
B. as above]: Jn. iii. 26; Acts xiii. 22; xv. 83 pass. 
μαρτυροῦμαι witness is borne to me, it is witnessed of me 
(W. § 39, 1; B. § 134, 4): foll. by ὅτι, Heb. vii. 8; foll. 
by ὅτι recitative and direct disc., Heb. vii. 17 LT Tr 
WH;; foll. by an inf. belonging to the subject, Heb. xi. 
4 sq. b. emphatically; to utter honorable testimony, 
give a good report: w.a dat. of the pers., Lk. iv. 22; ἐπί 
τινι; on account of, for a thing, Heb. xi. 4 [here L Tr read 
Hap. ἐπὶ κτὰ. τῷ θεῷ (but see the Comm.)]; μεμαρτύρηταί 
τινι ὑπό τινος, 3 Jn. 12; pass. μαρτυροῦμαι to be borne 
(good) witness to, to be well reported of, to have (good) 
testimony borne to one, accredited, attested, of good report, 
approved: Acts vi. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 1 sq.; 18, 


391 


μαρτυριον 


1; 19,1; 47,4); foll. by ἐν w. a dat. of the thing in 
which the commended excellence appears, 1 Tim. ν. 10; 
Heb. xi. 2, (ἐπί τινι, for a thing, Athen. 1 p. 25 £.; [yet 
cf. W. 387 (362) note]); διά τινος, to have (honorable) 
testimony borne to one through (by) a thing, Heb. xi. 
39; ὑπό w. gen. of the pers. giving honorable testimony, 
Acts x. 22; xvi. 2; xxii. 12, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 38, 2; 
44, 3; Ignat. ad Philad. c. 5, 2 ef. 11, 1 and ad Eph. 12, 
2; Antonin. 7, 62); w. dat. of the pers. testifying (i. q. 
ὑπό twos), Acts xxvi. 22 RG. c. Mid., ace. to a 
false reading, to conjure, implore: 1 Th. ii. 12 (11), where 
T Tr WH have rightly restored μαρτυρόμενοι. [Compe.: 
ἐπι-, συν-επι-, κατα-, συμ-μαρτυρέω. * 

μαρτυρία, -as, 7, (μαρτυρέω, q. ν.), (fr. Hom.down]; 1. 
a testifying: the office committed to the prophets of tes- 
tifying concerning future events, Rev. xi. 7. 2. 
what one testifies, testimony: univ. Jn. v. 34; in a legal 
sense, of testimony before a judge: Lk. xxii. 71; Mk. 
xiv. 56; w. gen. of the subj., Mk. xiv. 59; Jn. viii. 17; 
1 Jn. v. 9; κατά twos, against one, Mk. xiv. 55; in an 
historical sense, of the testimony of an historian: Jn. 
xix. 35; xxi. 24; in an ethical sense, of testimony con- 
cerning one’s character: 3 Jn. 12; 1 Tim. iii. 7; Tit. i 
13; in a predominantly dogmatic sense respecting mat- 
ters relating to the truth of Christianity: of the testi- 
mony establishing the Messiahship and the divinity of 
Jesus (see paprupéw, a.), given by —John the Bap. 
tist: Jn. i. 7; v. 325 ἡ μαρτ. τοῦ Ἰωάννου, i. 19; Jesus 
himself, w. a gen. of the subj., Jn. v. 31; viii. 13 sq. ; 
God, in the prophecies of Scripture concerning Jesus 
the Messiah, in the endowments conferred upon him, 
in the works done by him, Jn. v. 36; through the Holy 
Spirit, in the Christian’s blessed consciousness of eternal 
life and of reconciliation with God, obtained by baptism 
[(cf. reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3)] and the expiatory death 
of Christ, w. a subject. gen. τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Jn. v. 9-11, ef. 6-8; 
the apostles, cod τὴν μαρτ. περὶ ἐμοῦ, Acts xxii. 18 
[W. 137 (130)]; the other followers of Christ: Rev. 
vi. 9; w.a gen. of the subj. αὐτῶν, Rev. xii. 11; w.a 
gen. of the obj. Ἰησοῦ, ib. 17; xix. 10; xx. 4 (ἔχειν this 
μαρτ. is to hold the testimony, to persevere steadfastly in 
bearing it, Rev. vi. 9; xii. 17; xix. 10, [see ἔχω, I. 1 d.]; 
others, however, explain it to have the duty of testifying 
laid upon one’s self); elsewhere the “testimony” of 
Christ is that which he gives concerning divine things, 
of which he alone has thorough knowledge, Jn. iii. 11, 
32 sq-; 7 μαρτ. Ἰησοῦ, that testimony which he gave 
concerning future events relating to the consummation 
of the kingdom of God, Rev. i. 2 (cf. xxii. 16, 20); διὰ 
τὴν μ- Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, to receive this testimony, ib. 9.* 

μαρτύριον, -ov, τό, (udprup [cf μάρτυς). [fr. Pind., 
Hat. down], Sept. for ty, 11)", oftener for n37y (an or- 
dinance, precept); most freq. for 73:1 (an assembly), 
as though that came fr. 73)’ to testify, whereas it is fr. 
yy to appoint; testimony ; a. w. a gen. of the 
subj.: τῆς συνειδήσεως, 2 Co. i. 12; w. gen. of obj.: ἀπο- 
διδόναι τὸ μ τῆς ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ, Acts iv. 33. b. 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, concerning Christ the Saviour [cf. W. § 30, 


μαρτύρομαι 


1.4.7: the proclamation of salvation by the apostles 
is so called (for reasons given under paprupéw, init.), 
1 Co. i. 6; also τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν, 2 Tim. i. 8; τοῦ θεοῦ, 
concerning God [W. u. 5.7, i. 6. concerning what God 
has done through Christ for the salvation of men, 1 Co. 
ii. 1 [here WH txt. μυστήριον}; w. the subject. gen. ἡμῶν, 
given by us, 2 Th. i. 10. 
to give testimony concerning those things which were 
to be spoken (in the Messiah’s time) i. e. concerning the 
Christian revelation, Heb. iii. 5; ef. Delitzsch ad loc. 
[al. refer it to the Mosaic law (Num. xii. 7, esp. 8) ; 
ef. Riehm, Lehrbegriff ἃ. Heb. 1. 312]. ο. εἰς pup- 
τύριον αὐτοῖς for a testimony unto them, that they may 
have testimony, i. e. evidence, in proof of this or that: 
e. g. that a leper has been cured, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; 
Lk. v.14; that persons may get knowledge of something 
the knowledge of which will be for their benefit, Mt. x. 
18; xxiv. 14; Mk. xiii. 9; that they may have evidence 
of their impurity, Mk. vi. 11; in the same case we find 
els μαρτ. ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, for a testimony agains! them [ef. ἐπί, 
C. 1. 2¢.y. BB.], Lk. ix. 5; ἀποβήσεται ὑμῖν εἰς papr. it 
will turn out to you as an opportunity of bearing testi- 
mony concerning me and my cause, Lk. xxi. 13; eis p. 
ὑμῖν ἔσται, it will serve as a proof of your wickedness, 
Jas. v. 3; by apposition to the whole preceding clause 
ΟΥ̓. § 59, 9 a.), τὸ μαρτ. καιροῖς ἰδίοις, that which (to wit, 
that Christ gave himself as a ransom) would be (the sub- 
stance of) the testimony i. q. was to be testified (by the 
apostles and the preachers of the gospel) in the times 
fitted for it, 1 Tim. ii. 6 [where Lchm. om. τὸ papr.]; cf. 
the full exposition of this pass. in Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. 
iii. p. 12 5464. ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου, Acts vii. 44; Rev. 
xv. 5; in Sept. very often for 3y)0-ms (see above), 
and occasionally for npn OAR, as Ex. xxxviii. 26; 
Lev. xxiv. 3, etc.* 

μαρτύρομαι (fr. μάρτυρ [cf. μάρτυς); 1. tocitea 
witness, bring forward a witness, call to witness, (Tragg., 
Thuce., Plato, sqq.); to affirm by appeal to God, to declare 
solemnly, protest: ταῦτα, Plat. Phil. p. 47 ¢.; ὅτι, Acts xx. 
26; Gal. v. 3. 2. to conjure, beseech as in God's 
name, exhort solemnly: τινί, Acts xxvi. 22 L T Tr WH; 
foll. by the ace. ν΄. inf., Eph. iv. 17; εἰς τό foll. by ace. 
w. inf. [ef. B. § 140, 10, 3], 1 Th. ii. 12 (11) T Tr WH. 
[Compe.: δια-, προ-μαρτύρομαι.] * 

μάρτυς (Acolic μάρτυρ, a form not found in the N. T.; 
[etymologically one who is mindful, heeds; prob. allied 
with Lat. memor, ef. Vanitek p. 1201; Curtius § 466]), 
τυρος, acc. -upa, 6; plur. μάρτυρες, dat. plur. μάρτυσι; Sept. 
for 137; [Hes., Simon., Theogn., al.]; @ witness (one who 
avers, or can aver, what he himself has seen or heard or 
knows by any other means) ; a. ina legal sense: 
Mt. xviii. 16; xxvi. 65; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts vi. 13; vii. 
58; 2 Co. xiii. 1; 1 Tim. v. 19; Heb. x. 28. b. in 
an historical sense: Acts x. 41; 1 Tim. vi. 12; [2 Tim. 
ii. 2]; one who is a spectator of anything, 6. g. of a con- 
test, Heb. xii. 1; w. a gen. of the obj., Lk. xxiv. 48; 
Acts i. 22; ii. 325 ili. 15; v.32 G@LT Tr WH; x. 39; 


εἰς μαρτ. τῶν λαληθησομένων, 


392 


μώταιος 


who testifies for one’, Actsi.8 LT Tr WH; xiii. 31; w 
a gen. of the possessor and of the obj., Acts v. 32 Ree. ; 
μάρτυρα εἶναί τινι, to be a witness for one, serve him by 
testimony, Acts i. 8 RG; xxii. 15; [Lk. xi. 48 T Tr 
WII]. He is said to be a witness, to whose attestation 
appeal is made; hence the formulas μάρτυς μού ἐστιν ὁ 
θεός, Ro. i. 9; Phil. i. 8; θεὸς μαρτύς, 1 Th. ii. 5; μάρτυρα 
τὸν θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι, 2 Co. i. 23; ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες k. 6 Beds, 
1 Th. ii. 10; the faithful interpreters of God’s counsels 
are called God’s witnesses: Rev. xi. 3; Christ is reck- 
oned among them, Rev. i. 5; iii. 14. c. in an ethi- 
cal sense those are called μάρτυρες ᾿Ιησοῦ, who after his 
example have proved the strength and genuineness of 
their faith in Christ by undergoing a violent death [cf 
B. Ὁ. Am. ed. and Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. ν. Martyr]: 
Acts xxii. 20; Rev. ii. 13; xvii. 6.* 

μασθός, Doric for μαστός (q.v-): Rev. i. 13 Tdf. [* this 
form seems to be Western” (Hort, App. p. 149) ]. 

μασσάομαι (RG) more correctly μασάομαι (LT Tr 
WH): impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐμασῶντο; (MAQ, μάσσω, to 
knead) ; to chew, consume, eat, devour, (κρέας, Arstph. 
Plut. 321; ra δέρματα τῶν θυρεῶν, Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 6, 3, 3; 
ῥίζας ξύλων, Sept. Job xxx. 4, and other exx. in other 
auth.) : ἐμασῶντο τὰς γλώσσας αὐτῶν, they gnawed their 
tongues (for pain), Rev. xvi. 10.* 

μαστιγόω, -@, 3 pers. sing. μαστιγοῖ ; fut. μαστιγώσω ; 
1 aor. ἐμαστίγωσα; (μάστιξ); fr. Hdt.down; Sept. chiefly 
for 7373; fo scourge; prop.: τινά, Mt.x.17; xx.19; xxiii. 
34; Mk. x. 34; Lk. xviii. 33; Jn. xix.1; [ef. B. Ὁ. s. v. 
Scourging; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. excurs. xi.]. metaph. 
of God as a father chastising and training men as chil- 
dren by afflictions: Heb. xii. 6; cf. Jer. v. 3; Prov. iii. 
12; Judith viii. 27." 

μαστίζω; i. 4. μαστιγόω, q. ν.; τινά, Acts xxii. 25. 
(Num. xxii. 25; Sap. v. 11, and often in Hom.) * 

μάστιξ, -vyos, 7, @ whip, scourge, (for Οὐ, 1 K. xii. 11, 
14; Proy.xxvi. 3): Acts xxii. 24; Heb. xi.36; metaph. 
a scourge, plague, i.e. a calamity, misfortune, esp. as sent 
by God to discipline or punish (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 
33; with Διός added, Hom. 1]. 12, 37; 13, 812; θεοῦ, 
Aeschyl. sept. 607): of distressing bodily diseases, Mk. 
iii. 10; v. 29, 34; Lk. vii. 21; 2 Mace. ix. 11.* 

μαστός, -ov, 6, (μάσσω to knead [more prob. akin to 
paddw, Lat. madidus, ete.; ef. Vaniéek p. 693; Curtius 
§ 456]), fr. Soph., Hdt. down; the breast (for Ww, Job iii. 
12; Cant. i. 13, etc.); plur., the breasts (nipples) of a man, 
Rev. i. 13 RG Tr WH [here Tdf. μασθοῖς (cf. WH. App. 
p- 149"), Lehm. pagfois]; breasts of a woman, Lk. xi. 27; 
SORT Zoe 

[Ματαθίας, see Marrafias. | 

paratodoyla, -as, 7, (ματαιολόγος), vain talking, empty 
talk, (Vulg. vaniloquium): 1 Tim.i.6. (Plut. mor. p. 6 f.; 
Porphyr. de abstin. 4, 16.) * 

ματαιολόγος, -ov, 6, (μάταιος and λέγω), an idle talker, 
one who utters empty, senseless things: Tit. i. 10." 

μάταιος, -αία (1 Co. xv. 17; [1 Pet. i. 187), -atov, also 
τος, -ov, (Jas. i. 26; Tit. iii. 9), [ef. WH. App. p.157; W. 


xxvi. 16; 1 Pet. v. 1; ν΄. ἃ gen. of the possessor ‘one | § 11, 1], (fr. μάτην), Sept. for ΔΙΊ, RW, 31D (a lie), ete. ; 


ματαιότης 


as in prof. auth. (Lat. vanus) devoid of force, truth, suc- 
cess, result, [A.V. uniformly vain]: univ.: ἡ θρησκεία, Jas. 
i. 26; useless, lo no purpose, ἡ πίστις. 1 Co. xv. 17; fool- 
ish, διαλογισμοί, 1 Co. iii. 20; ζητήσεις, Tit. iii. 9; given 
to vain things and leading away from salvation, ava- 
στροφή, 1 Pet. i. 18. τὰ μάταια, vain things, vanities, of 
heathen deities and their worship (727), Jer. ii. 5; x. 3; 
5307 πο 72, πορεύεσθαι ὀπίσω τῶν par. 2 K. xvii. 
BE 0933, parata, Jer. viii. 19; εἴδωλα, Deut. xxxil. 21; 
Jer. xiv. 22): Acts xiv. 15. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix.]* 

ματαιότης, -7Tos, 7, (μάταιος, q. V-), a purely bibl. and 
eceles. word [(Pollux l. 6 ¢. 32 § 134)]; Sept. for ὙΠ 
(often in Eccles.), also for SW, ete.; vanity; a. what 
is devoid of truth and appropriateness: ὑπέρογκα ματαιό- 
τητος (gen. of quality), 2 Pet. ii. 18. Ὁ. perverse- 
ness, depravation: τοῦ νοός, Eph. iv. 17. c. frailly, 
want of vigor: Ro. viii. 20." 

ματαιόω: (μάταιος); 1 aor. pass. ἐματαιώθην; to make 
emply, vain, foolish: ἐματαιώθησαν ev τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς 
αὐτῶν, were brought to folly in their thoughts, i. e. fell 
into error, Ro. i. 21. (2 K. xvii. 15; Jer. ii. 5; 1 Chr. 
xxi. 8; [etc.]; nowhere in Grk. auth.) * 

μάτην (accus. [cf. W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12] of μάτη, 
i. q. paria, a futile attempt, folly, fault), adv., fr. Pind., 
Aeschyl. down, in vain, fruillessly: Mt. xv. 9 and Mk. 
vii. 7, after Isa. xxix. 13 Sept.* 

Ματθαῖος (1, Τ Tr WII Μαθθαῖος, cf. B. 8 (7); [WH. 
App. 159°; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5 p. 5627), -ov 
[B. 18 (16)], 6, (commonly regarded as Hebr. mn gift 
of God, fr. ;A and; but Ai is in Greek Ματθίας, 
and the analogy of the names 13m (fr. 1M a festival) in 
Greek ’Ayyaios, 133 Ζακχαῖος, and others, as well as the 


δ 
Syriac form of the name before us w2So, [and its form 


in the Talmud, viz. *n7) or “NNN; Sanhedrin 43°; Meu- 
schen, N. T. ex Talm. illustr. p. 8] certainly lead us to 
adopt the Aramaic form ‘73, and to derive that from 
the unused sing. 1, a man, plur. on; hence i. q. 
manly, cf. Grimm in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1870, p. 723 
sqq-), Matthew, at first a collector of imposts, afterwards 
an apostle of Jesus: Mt. ix. 9 sqq. (cf. Mk. ii. 14; Lk. v. 
27 sqq.; see Aevi,4); Mt.x.3; Mk.iii.18; Lk. vi.15; Acts 
i.13. Ace. to Papias (in Euseb. ἢ. 6. 3, 39) he wrote down 
ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ τὰ (κυριακὰ) λόγια, i. 6. the sayings of our 
Lord; this collection of discourses, perhaps already re- 
touched by some one else and translated into Greek, the 
author of our first canonical Gospel combined with ac- 
counts of the acts and sufferings of Christ, and so it came 
to pass that this Gospel was ascribed by the church to 
Matthew asits author. [But this theory seems to be ren- 
dered unnecessary by the fact that λόγια had already 
come to denote “sacred oracles” i. q. ἱερὰ γράμματα, 
Joseph. Ὁ. j. 6, 5, 4, or ἱεραὶ γραφαί, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
53,1; see the added reff. 5. v. λόγιον. Cf. Fisher, Super- 
nat. Origin of Christianity, pp. 160-167; and reff. in 
Schaff, Hist. of the Christ. Church, i. 622 sq.; Bleek, 
Einl. ins N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 115 sq.]* 

Mardy (1, T Tr WH Μαθθάν [see reff. s. v. Ματθαῖος |), 


393 


μάχαιρα 


6, (HD a gift), Matthan, one of Christ’s ancestors: Mt. 
i. 15.* 

Ματθάτ (Ταῦ. Μαθθάθ, [see reff. s. v. Maraios|), 6, 
(AAD, fr. 12)» Matihal; 1. one of Christ’s ances- 
tors, the son of Levi: Lk. iii. 24. 2. one of the 
ancestors of the man just spoken of: Lk. iii. 29 [here 
Tr WII Μαθθάτ (see as above) }.* 

Ματθίας (T Tr WH Μαθθίας [see reff. s. v. Ματθαῖος ]), 
τα [yet cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, (see Ματθαῖος), Matthias, the 
apostle who took the place of Judas Iscariot: Acts i 
23, 26.* 

Ματταθά, ὁ, (see the preceding names), Mattatha, the 
son of Nathan and grandson of David: LK. iii. 31.* 

Ματταθίας, -ου [ B. 18 (16) ], 6, Mattathias; 1. one of 
Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 25 [here Treg. Μαθθαθίου (cf. 
reff. s. v. Ματθαῖος. init.) ]- 2. one of the ancestors 
of the man just mentioned : Lk. iii. 26 [Trmrg. Mara@iou].* 

μάχαιρα, cen. -as [so (with RG) Lehm. in Lk. xxi. 24] 
and -ns, dat. -a [so (with R G) Lehm. in Lk. xxii. 49; Acts 
xii. 2] and -y (betw. which forms the codd. vary, ef. [Seriv- 
ener, Collation, ete. p. lvi.; ΤῸ Proleg. p. 117; WH. 
App. p- 1561; W. 62 (61); B.11; Delitzsch on Heb. xb 
34 p. 584 note), ἡ, (akin to μάχη and Lat. mactare); 1. 
a large knife, used for killing animals and cutting up flesh: 
Hom., Pind., Hdt., al.; hence Gen. xxii. 6,10; Judg. xix. 
29 Alex.,for NN. 2. asmall sword, distinguished 
fr. the large sword, the ῥομφαία (Joseph. antt. 6, 9, 5 ἀπο- 
τέμνει THY κεφαλὴν τῇ ῥομφαίᾳ τῇ ἐκείνου (Goliath’s), μά- 
χαιραν οὐκ ἔχων αὐτός), and curved, for a cutting stroke; 
distinct also fr. ξίφος, a straight sword, for thrusting, Xen. 
r. eq. 12, 11, cf. Hell. 3, 3, 7; but the words are freq. 
used interchangeably. Inthe N. T. univ. α sword (Sept. 
often for 29m) : as a weapon for making or repelling an 
attack, Mt. xxvi. 47, 51,52, [55]; Mk. xiv. 43, 47 sq.; 
Lk. xxii. 36, 38, 49, 52; Jn. xviii. 10sq.; Acts xvi. 27; 
Heb. xi. 37; Rev. vi. 4; xiii. 10, [14]; by a Hebraism, 
στόμα μαχαίρας, the edge of the sword (1}1) 3, Gen. xxxiv. 
26; Josh. viii. 24; 1S. xiii. 22; Judg. iii. 16, ete. [but in 
the Sept. the rendering or. ξίφους or στ. ῥομφαίας is more 
com.]): Lk. xxi. 24; Heb. xi. 34; μάχαιρα δίστομος (see 
δίστομος), Heb. iv. 12. of the sword as the instrument 
of a magistrate or judge: death by the sword, Ro. viii. 
35; ἀναιρεῖν twa μαχαίρᾳ, Acts xii. 2; τὴν μ. φορεῖν, to 
bear the sword, is used of him to whom the sword has been 
committed, viz. to use when a malefactor is to be pun- 
ished; hence i. q. to have the power of life and death, Ro. 
xiii. 4 (so ξίφος, ξίφη ἔχειν, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 7, 16; 
vit. sophist. 1, 25, 2 (3), ef. Dion Cass. 42, 27; and in 
the Talmud the king who bears the sword, of the Hebrew 
king). Metaph. pdy., a weapon of war, is used for war. 
or for quarrels and dissensions that destroy peace ; so in 
the phrase βαλεῖν μάχαιραν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, to send war on 
earth, Mt. x. 34 (for which LK. xii. 51 says διαμερισμόνν 5 
ἡ wax. τοῦ πνεύματος, the sword with which the Spirit 
subdues the impulses to sin and proves its own power and 
efficacy (which sword is said to be ῥῆμα θεοῦ [cf. B. 128 
(112)]), Eph. vi. 17 [on the gen. in this pass. cf. Ellicott 
or Meyer].* 


μαχῇ 


μάχη, -ης, 9, [μάχομαι; fr. Hom. down], Sept. several 


times for 3°, 101, ete.; α fight, combat; 1. of 
those in arms, @ battle. 2. of persons at variance, 
disputants, ete., strife, contention; a quarrel: 2 Co. vii. 


5; 2 Tim. ii. 23; Jas. iv. 1; 
about the law, Tit. iii. 9.* 

μάχομαι ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐμάχοντο ; [allied with μά- 
xaipa; Curtius §459; Vanicek p. 687; fr. Hom. down]; 
to fight: prop. of armed combatants, or those who engage 
in a hand-to-hand struggle, Acts vii. 26; trop. of those 
who engage in a war of words, fo quarrel, wrangle, dis- 
2 Tim. ii. 24; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, Jn. vi. 52 [ef. W. 
§ 31,5; B.§ 133, 8]; of those who contend at law 
for property and privileges, Jas. iv. 2. [Comp.: δια- 
μάχομαι. SYN. see πόλεμος, b.]| * 

μεγαλ-αυχέω, -@ ; (μεγάλαυχος, and this fr. μεγάλα and 
avxéw); to be grandiloquent; to boast great things, to bear 
one’s self loftily in speech or action: ἡ γλῶσσα peyadavyxet 
(LT Tr WH μεγάλα αὐχεῖ), Jas. 111. 5, where it seems 
to denote any kind of haughty language which wounds 
and provokes others, and stirs up strife. (Aeschyl. Ag. 
1528; Polyb. 12, 13, 10; 8, 23,11; Diod. 15, 16, al.; 
mid. γυναῖκα πρὸς θεοὺς ἐρίζουσαν καὶ peyadavxouperny, 
Plat. rep. 3 p. 395 d.; for 723, to exalt one’s self, carry 
one’s self haughtily, Ezek. xvi. 50; Zeph. iii. 11; add, 2 
Mace. xv. 32; Sir. xlviii. 18.) * 

μεγαλεῖος, -εία, -eiov, (μέγας), magnificent, excellent, splen- 
did, wonderful, (Xen., Joseph., Artem., al.); absol. pe- 
γαλεῖα (ποιεῖν τινι) to do great things for one (show him 
conspicuous favors), Lk. 1. 49 RG; τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ θεοῦ 
(Vulg. magnalia dei [A. V. the mighty works of God}), 
i. e. the glorious perfections of God and his marvellous 
doings (ΠΥ 712, Ps. Ixx. (Ixxi.) 19; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 
10; xlii. 21), Acts ii. 11.* 

μεγαλειότης, -ητος, 7, (fr. the preceding word), great- 
ness, magnificence, (Athen. 4, 6 p. 130 fin.; for ΠΝ ΘΙ, 
Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 9); the majesty of God, Lk. ix. 43; τῆς 
᾿Αρτέμιδος, Acts xix. 27; of the visible splendor af the 
divine majesty as it appeared in the transfiguration of 
Christ, 2 Pet. i. 16.” 

μεγαλοπρεπής, -és, gen. -ovs, (μέγας, and mpémecit is be- 
coming [see πρέπω ]), befitting a great man, magnificent, 
splenv'id ; full of majesty, majestic: 2 Pet.i.17. (2 Mace. 
viii. 15; xv. 13; 3 Mace. ii. 9; Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.) * 

μεγαλύνω : impf. ἐμεγάλυνον ; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing. 
ἐμεγαλύνετο] ; 


μάχαι νομικαί, contentions 


pute: 


1 aor. inf. μεγαλυνθῆναι ; 1 fut. μεγαλυνθή- 
copa; (μέγας) ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Thue. down; Sept. 
mostly for 9°13; 1. tomake great, magnify, (Vulg. 
magnifico): τινά or τί, prop. of dimension, Mt. xxiii. 5 
[here A.V. enlarge]; pass. to increase: of bodily stature, 
ἐμεγαλύνθη τὸ παιδάριον, 1 S. ii. 21; so in a figure, 2 Co. 
x. 15, of Paul, that his apostolie efficiency among the 
Corinthians may increase more and more and have more 
abundant results [al. refer this to 2; see Meyer (ed. 
Heinrici) in loc.]._ metaph. to make conspicuous: Lk. i. 
58 (on which see ἔλεος, 2 a.). 2. to deem or declare 
great, i. 6. to esteem highly, to extol, laud, celebrate: Lk. i. 
46; Acts v. 13; x.46; xix. 17, (often so in class. Grk. 


994 


μέγας 


also); pass. i. 4. to get glory and praise: ἔν τινι, in ἃ 
thing, Phil. i. 20.* 
μεγάλως, adv., greatly: Phil. iv. 10. [Fr. Hom. down.]* 
μεγαλωσύνη, -ης, 9, only in bibl. and eccl. writ. [ef 
W. 26,95 (90); B. 73, and see ayabwovrn |, (μέγας), Sept. 
for on and 77311; majesty: of the majesty of God, Heb. 
i. 3; viii. 1; Jude 25, (so 2 S. vii. 23; Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 
3,6; Sap. xviii. 24; Sir. ii. 18, and often).* 
μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [(τοϊαϊοα to Lat. magnus, ADEE 
Goth. maist (cf. τὸ πλεῖστον), etc.; Vaniéek p. 682; Cur 
tius ὃ 462)], ace. μέγαν. μεγάλην, μέγα; plur. pokes ται, 
-a; comp. μείζων, -ον, (acc. πιᾶξο. and fem. μείζονα, once 
contr. μείζω, Jn. v. 36 [RG T WH, but L Tr μείζων (cf. 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 119)]; neut. plur. μείζονα, once contr. 
μείζω, Jn. i. 50 (51)) and pectorepos, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the com- 
par. μείζων), a poet. compar., on which see the remark 
quoted under ἐλαχιστότερος, cf. Matthiae § 136; superl. 
μέγιστος (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4); [fr. Hom. down]; 
Sept. for ὮΥΤΔ; also for 31; great; 1. predi- 
cated a. of the external form or sensible appearance 
of things (or of persons); in particular, of space and its 
dimensions, — as respects a. mass and weight: 
λίθος, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; ὄρος, 
Rey. viii. 8; ἀστήρ, ibid. 10; δράκων Rev. xii. 3,9; ἀετός, 
ibid. 14; δένδρον, Lk. xiii. 19 [T WH om. L Tr br. peéy.]; 
κλάδοι, Mk. iv. 32; ἐχθύες, Jn. xxi. 11; β. compass 
and extent; large, spacious: σκηνή (μείζων), Heb. ix. 
11; ἀνάγαιον [R ἀνώγεον, q. v-], Mk. xiv. 15; ἀποθήκη, Lk. 
xii. 18; κάμινος, Rev. ix. 2; πόλις, Rev. xi. 8; xvi. 19; 
xvii. 18; xviii. 2, 16,18, 19; ποταμός, Rev. ix. 14; xvi. 12; 
θύρα, 1 Co. xvi. 9; ληνός, Rev. xiv. 19; ὀθόνη, Acts x. 11; 
xi. 5; χάσμα, Lk. xvi. 26 (2 5. xviii. 17). Ὑ- meas- 
ure and height: οἰκοδομαί, Mk. xiii. 2; θρόνος, Rey. xx. 
11; long, μάχαιρα, Rey. vi.4; as respects stature and age, 
μικροὶ καὶ μεγάλοι, smal] and great, young and old, Acts 
viii. 10; xxvi. 22; Heb. viii. 11; Rev. xi. 18; xiii. 16; xix. 
5,18; xx. 12, (Gen. xix. 11; 2K. xxiii. 2; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 
30). [neut. sing. used adverbially: ἐν μεγάλῳ, Acts xxvi. 
29 LT Tr WH (for R ἃ ἐν πολλῷ, q. v. in πολύς, d.) in 
great sc.degree. The apostle plays upon Agrippa’s words 
ἐν ὀλίγῳ (q. ν.) ina little (time) thou wouldst fain ete. .. . I 
would to God that both in little and in great i.e. in all re- 
spects δέοι; ef. the use of ὀλίγον k. μέγα Or σμικρόν k. μέγα 
(yet in negative sentences) to express totality; e. g. 
Plat. Phileb. 21 e.; Apol. 19 ¢.; 21b.; 26 b.; but see ἃ. 
below. ] b. of number and quantity, i. q. nw 
merous, large: ἀγέλη, Mk. vy. 11; abundant, πορισμός, 1 
Tim. vi. 6; μισθαποδοσία, Heb. x. 35 ce. of age: ὁ 
μείζων, the elder, Ro. ix. 12 after Gen. xxv. 23, (Σκιπίων 6 
μέγας, Polyb. 18, 18 (35), 9; 32, 12,1). d. used of in- 
tensity and its degrees: δύναμις, Acts iv. 33 ; viii. 10; 
neut. ἐν μεγάλῳ, with great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 LT Tr 
WH [but see y. above]; of the affections and emotions of 
the mind: χαρά, Mt. ii. 10; xxviii. 8; Lk. ii. 10; xxiv. 52; 
Acts xv. 3; φόβος, Mk. iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9; viii. 37; Acts v. 
5,11; Rev. xi. 11; θυμός, Rev. xii. 12; λύπη, Ro. ix. 2; 
ἔκστασις, Mk. v. 42 (Gen. xxvii. 33); πίστις, Mt. xv. 28; 
χάρις, Acts iv. 33; ἀγάπη, Jn. xv. 13. of natural events 


μέγας 


powerfully affecting the senses, i.q. violent, mighty, strong : 
ἄνεμος, Jn. vi. 18; Rey. vi 13; βροντή, Rev. xiv. 2; χάλαζα, 
Rev. xi. 19; xvi. 21; σεισμός, Mt. viii. 24; xxviii. 2; Lk. 
xxi.11; Acts xvi. 26; Rev. vi.12; xi.13; xvi.18; λαίλαψ, 
Mk. iv.37; πτῶσις, Mt. vii.27. of other external things, 
such as are perceived by hearing: κραυγή, Acts xxiil. 9; 
Rev. xiv. 18 [RG]; μεῖζον κράζειν, to cry out the louder, 
Mt. xx. 31; φωνή, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. ¢., WH only in 
mrg.|; xxvii. 46,50; Lk. xxiii. 23; Jn. xi. 43; Acts viii. 
7; Rev. i. 10; v. 2,12; vi. 10; vii. 2,10; vill. 13; x. 3; 
xi. 12,15; [xiv.18 LT Tr WH; xviii. 2 Rec.], and else- 
where; γαλήνη, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 39. οἵ objects of 
sight which excite admiration and wonder: φῶς, Mt. 
iv. 16; σημεῖον, Mt. xxiv. 24; Lk. xxi. 11; Acts vi. 8; 
viii. 13; Rev. xiii. 13; ἔργα, Rev. xv. 3; μείζω, μείζονα 
τούτων, greater things than these, i.e. more extraordinary, 
more wonderful, Jn. i.50 (51); v.20; xiv.12. of things 
that are felt: καῦμα, Rev. xvi. 9; πυρετός, Lk. iv. 38; 
of other things that distress: ἀνάγκη, Lk. xxi. 23; θλίψις, 
Mt. xxiv. 21; Acts vii.11; Rev.ii. 22; vii. 14; διωγμός, 
Acts viii. 1; λιμός, Lk. iv. 25; Acts xi. 28; πληγή, Rev. 
Xvi. 21. 2. predicated of rank, as belonging to 8. 
persons, eminent for ability, virtue. authority, power ; 
as God, and sacred personages: θεός, Tit. ii. 13 [(on which 
see Prof. Abbot, Note C. in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. ete. 
i. p. 19, and ef. ἐπιφάνεια)) ; “Aprepis, Acts xix. 27 sq. 
34 sq.; ἀρχιερεύς, Heb. iv. 14; ποιμήν, Heb. xiii. 20; 
προφήτης, Lk. vii. 16 ; absol. of μεγάλοι, great men, lead- 
ers, rulers, Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x. 42; univ. eminent, dis- 
tinguished : Mt. v. 19; xx. 26; Lk. i. 15, 32; Acts viii. 
9. μείζων is used of those who surpass others — either 
in nature and power, as God: Jn. x. 29 [here T Tr 
WH txt. give the neut. (see below)]; xiv. 28; Heb. vi. 
13; 1 Jn. iv. 4; add, Jn. iv. 12; viii. 53; or in excel- 
lence, worth, authority, ete.: Mt. xi. 11; xviii. 1; 
xxiii. 11; Mk. ix. 34; Lk. vii. 28; ix. 46; xxii. 26 sq.; 
Jn. xiii. 16; xv. 20; 1 Co. xiv.5; δυνάμει μείζονες, 2 Pet. 
ii. 11; neut. μεῖζον, something higher, more exalted, more 
majestic than the temple, to wit the august person of 
Jesus the Messiah and his preéminent influence, Mt. xii. 
6 LT Tr WH; [cef. Jn. x. 29 above]; contextually i. q. 
» strict in condemning, of God, 1 Jn. iii. 20. b. things 
to be esteemed highly for their importance, i. q. Lat. 
gravis; of great moment, of great weight, important: ἐπαγ- 
γέλματα, 2 Pet. i. 4; ἐντολή, Mt. xxii. 36, 38 ; μυστήριον, 
Eph. v. 32; 1 Tim. iii. 16; ἁμαρτία, Jn. xix. 11; μείζων 
μαρτυρία, of greater proving power, Jn. v. 36 [see above 
ad init.]; 1 Jn. v- 9, (μαρτυρίαν μείζω x. σαφεστέραν, Isocr. 
Archid. § 32). μέγας i. q. solemn, sacred, of festival days 
[ef. Is. i. 13 Sept.]: ἡμέρα, Jn. vii. 37; xix. 31; notable, 
august, ἡμέρα, of the day of the final judgment, Acts ii. 
20; Jude 6; Rev. vi. 17; xvi. 14. neut. μέγα, a great 
matter, thing of great moment: 1 Co. ix. 11 (Gen. xlv. 
28; Is. xlix. 6); οὐ μέγα, 2 Co. xi. 15. ο. athing 
to be highly esteemed for its excellence, i. q. excel- 
lent. 1 Co. xiii. 13 [cf. W. § 35,1; B. § 123, 13]; ra 
χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα (RG κρείττονα), 1 Co. xii. 31 L T 
Tr WH. 3. splendid, prepared on a grand scale, 


395 


μεθοδεία 


stately: δοχή, Lk. v. 29 (Gen. xxi. 8); δεῖπνον, Lk. xiv. 16; 
Rev. xix. 17 [6 L T Tr WH], (Dan. v. 1 [Theodot.]) ; 
οἰκία, 2 Tim. ii. 20 (Jer. lii. 13; [οἶκος], 2 Chr. ii. 5, 
9). 4. neut. plur. μεγάλα, great things: of God’s 
preéminent blessings, Lk. i. 49 LT Tr WH (see peya- 
λεῖος); of things which overstep the province of a 
created being, proud (presumptuous) things, full of 
arrogance, derogatory to the majesty of God: λαλεῖν pey. 
joined with βλασφημίας, Rev. xiii. 5; Dan. vii. 8,11, 20; 
like μέγα εἰπεῖν, Hom. Od. 3, 227; 16, 243; 22, 288. 

μέγεθος, -ous, τό, (μέγας), [fr. Hom. down], greatness: 
Eph. i. 19.* 

μεγιστάν, -avos, 6, (fr. μέγιστος, as veav fr. νέος, ξυνάν 
fr. vos), a later Grk. word (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 196), 
once in sing. Sir. iv. 7; commonly in plur. οἱ μεγιστᾶνες, 
the grandees, magnates, nobles, chief men of a city or a 
people, the associates or courtiers of a king, (Vulg. 
principes) : Rev. vi. 15; τῆς γῆς, xviii. 23; τοῦ Ἡρώδου, 
Mk. vi. 21. (Sept. for oN, Jer. xiv. 3; Nah. ii. 6; 
Zech. xi. 2; 0°9§73, Jon. iii. 7; Nah. iii.10; y»2737, Dan. 
Theodot. iv. 33, ete. ; oq, Is. xxxiv. 12; Jer. xxiv. 8, 
etc.; 1 Mace. ix. 37; often in Sir. Manetho 4, 41; Jo- 
seph., Artem. In Lat. megistanes, Tac. ann. 15, 27; Suet. 
Calig. 5.) * 

μέγιστος, see μέγας, init. 

μεθ-ερμηνεύω : Pass., 3 pers. sing. μεθερμηνεύεται, ptcp. 
μεθερμηνευόμενον ; to translate into the language of one with 
whom I wish to communicate, to interpret: Mt.i. 23; Mk. 
v. 41; xv. 22, 34; Jn. i. 38 (89) LTr WH, 41 (42); 
Acts iv. 36; xiii. 8. (Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Sir. prol. 1. 
19; 8].1.)}" 

μέθη. -ης, 7, (akin to μέθυ, wine; perh. any intoxicating 
drink, Lat. temetum; cf. Germ. Meth [mead]), intoxication; 
drunkenness: Lk. xxi. 34; plur., Ro. xiii. 13; Gal. v. 21. 
(Hebr. 13, intoxicating drink, Prov. xx. 1; Is. xxviii. 
7; and })1dv, intoxication, Ezek. xxiii. 32; xxxix. 19; 
[Antipho], Xen., Plat., al.) [Cf. Trench § lxi.]* 

μεθ-ίστημι and (in 1 Co. xiii. 2 RG WH [ef. ἵστημι]) 
μεθιστάνω; 1 aor. μετέστησα; 1 aor. pass. subj. pera- 
σταθῶ; fr. Hom. down; prop. to transpose, transfer, 
remove from one place to another: prop. of change of 
situation or place, ὄρη, 1 Co. xiii. 2 (Isa. liv. 10); τινὰ 
ets τι, Col. i. 13; τινὰ [T Tr WH add ἐκ, so L in br.] τῆς 
οἰκονομίας, to remove from the office of steward, pass. Lk. 
xvi. 4 (τῆς χρείας, 1 Mace. xi. 63) ; τινὰ ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν, to re- 
move from life, Diod. 2, 57, 5; 4, 55, 1; with ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν 
omitted, Acts xiii. 22 (in Grk. writ. also in the mid. and 
in the intrans. tenses of the act. to depart from life, to 
die, Eur. Ale. 21; Polyb. 32, 21,3; Heliod. 4,14). met- 
aph. τινά, without adjunct (cf. Germ. verriicken, [Eng. 
pervert]), 1. 6. to lead aside [ A. V.turn away] to other ten- 
ets: Acts xix. 26 (τὴν καρδίαν τοῦ λαοῦ, Josh. xiv. 8).* 

μεθ-οδεία (T WH μεθοδία, see 1, t,), -as, ἡ, (fr. μεθοδεύω, 
i.e. 1. to follow up or investigate by method and set- 
tled plan; 2. to follow craftily, frame devices, deceive : 
Diod. 7,16; 2S. xix. 27; [Ex. xxi. 13 Aq.; (mid.) Charit. 
7, 6 p. 166, 21 ed. Reiske (1783) ; Polyb. 38, 4, 107), a 
noun occurring neither in the O. T. nor in prof. auth. 


μεθόριον 


cunning arts, deceit, craft, trickery: ἡ pe9. τῆς πλάνης, 
which ἡ πλάνη uses, Eph. iv. 14; rod διαβόλου, plur. ib. vi. 
11[A.). wiles. Cf. Bp. Lght/t. Polye. ad Phil. 7 p. 918.]* 

μεθ-όριον, -ov, τό. (neut. of adj. μεθόριος, -a, -ov; fr. 
μετά with, and ὅρος a boundary), a border, frontier: τὰ 
μεθόριά τινος. the confines (of any land or city), i. e. the 
places adjacent to any region, the vicinity, Mk. vii. 24 
RG. (Thue., Xen., Plat., al.) * 

μεθύσκω: Pass., pres. μεθύσκομαι ; 1 aor. ἐμεθύσθην ; 
(fi. μέθυ, see μέθη) : fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 739, 7170, 
(Kal 719), and 73v, to intoxicate, make drunk; pass. 
[ef. W. 252 (237)] to get drunk, become intoxicated: Lk. 
xii. 45; Jn. ii. 10; 1 Th. v. 7 [B. 62 (54)]; οἴνῳ [W. 
217 (203)], Eph. v. 18; ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου, Rev. xvii. 2 (see ἐκ, 
11. 5); τοῦ νέκταρος, Plat. symp. p. 203 b.; Leian. dial. 
deor. 6, 3; ἀπό τινος, Sir. i. 16; xxxv. 13.* 

μέθυσος, -ύση. -voov, in later Grk. also of two termi- 
nations, (μέθυ. see μέθη), drunken, intoxicated: 1 Co. 
v.11; vi. 10. (Phryn.: μέθυσος ἀνήρ. οὐκ ἐρεῖς. ἀλλὰ pe- 
θυστικός - γυναῖκα δὲ ἐρεῖς μέθυσον καὶ μεθύσην [ Arstph.]; 
but Menand., Plut., Leian., Sext. Empir., al., [Sept. Prov. 
xxiii. 21, ete.; Sir. xix. 1, ete.] use it also of men; cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151.) * 

μεθύω (fr. μέθυ, see μέθη) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
ΤῊ and 3); to be drunken: Mt. xxiv. 49; Actsii. 15; 
1 Co. xi. 21; 1 Th. v. 7 [ef. B. 62 (54)]; ἐκ τοῦ αἵματος 
[see ἐκ, II. 5; Trmrg. τῷ αἵματι], of one who has shed 
blood profusely, Rev. xvii. 6 (Plin. h. n. 14, 28 (22) 
ebrius jam sanguine civium et tanto magis eum sitiens).* 

μειζότερος, -a, -ov, see μέγας, init. 

μείζων, see μέγας, init. 

μέλαν, -avos, τό, see the foll. word. 

μέλας, -atva, -av, gen. -avos, -aivns, -avos, [fr. Hom. down], 
Sept. several times for 1nw, black: Rev. vi. 5, 12; opp. 
to λευκός. Mt. v.36. Neut. τὸ μέλαν, subst. black ink (Plat. 
Phaedr. p. 276 c.; Dem. p. 313,11; Plut. mor. p. 841 e.; 
al.): 2 Co. iii. 3; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13; [ef. Gardthausen, 
Palaeographie, Buch i. Kap. 4; Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, ii. 270 sq.; B. Ὁ. s. v. Writing, sub fin.]* 

Μελεᾶς, gen. -a [B. 20 (17) sq.], (T Tr WH Medea, 
indecl., [on the accent in codd. ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 1037), 
6, (A822 abundance), Melea, one of king David’s descend- 
ants: Lk. iii. 51." 

μέλει, 3 pers. sing. pres. of μέλω used impers.; impf. 
ἔμελεν; itis acare: τινί, to one; as in Grk. writ. with 
nom. of the thing, οὐδὲν τούτων, Acts xviii. 17; with gen. 
of the thing (as often in Attic), μὴ τῶν βοῶν μέλει τῷ 
θεῷ; 1 Co. ix. 9 [B. § 132, 15; ef. W. 595 (554)]; the 
thing which is a care to one, or about which he is solicit- 
ous, is evident from the context, 1 Co. vii. 21; περί τινος, 
gen. of obj., fo care about, have regard for, a pers. or a 
thing: Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. χ. 18; xii. 6; 1 
Pet. v. 7,(Hdt. 6, 101; Xen. mem. 3, 6, 10; Cyr. 4, 5, 
17; Hier. 9,10; 1 Macc. χῖν. 48 ; Sap. xii. 13; Barnab. 
ep. 1,5; cf. W.§ 30,104d.); foll. by ὅτι, Mk. iv. 38; 
Lk. x. 40.* 

ΓΜελελεήλ : LK. iii. 37 Tdf., see Mad.] 


μελετάω, -@: 1 aor. ἐμελέτησα ; (fr. μελέτη Care, prac- 


396 


μέλλω 


tice) ; esp. freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Thue. down ; 
Sept. chiefly tor 739; to care for, attend to carefully, 
practise: ri, 1 Tim. iv. 15 [R. V. be diligent in]; to medi- 
tate i. q. to devise, contrive: Acts iv. 25 fr. Ps.ii.1; used 
by the Greeks of the meditative pondering and the prac- 
tice of orators and rhetoricians, as μ. τὴν ἀπολογίαν ὑπὲρ 
ξαυτῶν, Dem. p. 1129, 9 (ef. Passow 8. v. ἃ. [L. and S. 
s. vy. II. 2 and III. 4 b.]), which usage seems to have 
been in the writer’s mind in Mk. xiii.11[RLbr. Comp.: 
προ-μελετάω |.” 

μέλι, -ros, τό, Sept. for wa3, [fr. Hom. down], honey: 
Rev. x. 9 sq.; ἄγριον (q. v-), Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6." 

μελίσσιος., -a, -ov, (fr. μέλισσα a bee, as θαλάσσιος fr. 
θάλασσα; μέλισσα is fr. μέλι), of bees, made by bees: Lk. 
xxiv. 42 [RG Trin br.]. (Not found elsewh. [cf. W. 
24]; μελισσαῖιος, -a, -ov is found in Nic. th. 611, in Eust. 
μελίσσειος.) * 

Μελίτη. -ης, ἡ, Melita, the name of an island in the 
Mediterraiieau, lying between Africa and Sicily, now 
called Malta; (this Sicuia Melita must not be confounded 
with Aelita [lyrica in the Adriatic, now called Meleda 
[see B. Ὁ. 5. v. Melita; Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of 
St. Paul, Diss. ii.]): Acts xxviii. 1 [where WH Μελετήνη; 
see their App. p. 160].* 

[Μελιτήνη, see the preceding word.] 

μέλλω ; fut. μελλήσω (Mt. xxiv. 6; and LTTrWH 
in 2 Pet. i. 12); impf. ἔμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. ix. 31 
(exc. T WH); Jn. vi. 6, 71 (exc. RG) ; vii. 39 (exe. T); 
xi. 51 (exc. L Tr); Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 (where R 
pres.); x. 4 (exe. L Tr)] and ἤμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. 
vil. 2; x. 1 (exe. RG); xix. 4; Jn. iv. 47; xii. 33; xviii. 
32; Acts xii. 6 (exc. RGL); xvi. 27 (exe. RG); xxvii 
33 (exe. RGT); Heb. xi. 8 (exe. L); ef. reff. s. v. 
βούλομαι, init. and Rutherford’s note on Babrius 7, 15], 
to be about to do anything; so 1. the ptep., ὁ μέλ- 
λων, absol.: τὰ μέλλοντα and τὰ ἐνεστῶτα are contrasted, 
Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; εἰς τὸ μέλλον, for the future, 
hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but see eis, A. II. 2 (where Grimm 
supplies éros)]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; τὰ μέλλοντα, things future, 
things to come, i. e., ace. to the context, the more perfect 
state of things which will exist in the αἰὼν μέλλων, Col. 
ii. 17; with nouns, 6 αἰὼν ὁ μέλλων, Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i. 
213 ἡ μέλλ. Con, 1 Tim. iv. 8; ἡ οἰκουμένη ἡ μέλλ. Heb. 
ii. δ: ἡ μ' ὀργή, Mt. iii. 7; τὸ κρίμα τὸ μέλλον, Acts xxiv. 
25; πόλις, Heb. xiii. 14; τὰ μέλλοντα ἀγαθά, Heb. ix. 11 
[but 1, Trmrg. WH txt. γενομένων] ; Χ. 1; τοῦ μέλλοντος 
sc. Addy, i.e. the Messiah, Ro. v. 14. 2. joined to an 
infin. [ef. W. 333 sq. (313): B.§ 140, 2], a. to be onthe 
point of doing or suffering something: w. inf. present, 
ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν, Acts xvi. 27; τελευτᾶν, Lk. vii. 2; 
ἀποθνήσκειν, Jn.iv.47; add, Lk.xxi.7; Actsiii.3; xviii. 
14; xx. 8; xxii. 26; xxiii. 27; w. inf. passive, Acts xxi. 
27; xxvii. 33, ete. b. to intend, have in mind, think 
to: w.inf. present, Mt. ii. 13; Lk.x.1; xix.4; Jn. vi. 6, 
15; vii. 35; xii. 4; xiv. 22; Acts v. 85; xvii. 31; xx. 
7,13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 30; Heb. viii.5; [2 Pet. 
i.12L T Tr WH]; Rev. x.4; w.inf. aorist (a constr. cer 
sured by Phryn. p. 336, but authenticated more recently 


μέλος 


by many exx. fr. the best writ. fr. Hom. down; cf. W. 
333 (313) sq-; Lol. ad Phryn. p. 745 sqq.; [but see 
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 420 sqq.]): Acts xii. 6 LT 
WH; Rev. ii. 10 (βαλεῖν RG); iii. 16; xii. 4; π΄. fut. 
inf. ἔσεσθαι, Acts xxiii. 30 RG. ec. as in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down, of those things which will come to pass 
(or which one will do or suffer) by fixed necessity or 
divine appointment (Germ. sollen [are to be, des- 
tined to be, ete.]); w. pres. inf. active: Mt. xvi. 27; xvii. 
12; xx. 22; Lk.ix.31; Jn.vi.71; vii. 39; χὶ. 51; xii. 33; 
xviii. 32; Acts xx. 88; xxvi. 22, 23; Heb.i. 14; xi. 8; 
Rev. ii. 10°; iii. 10; viii. 13, etc. ; Ἠλίας ὁ μέλλων ἔρχε- 
σθαι, Mt. xi. 14; 6 μέλλων λυτροῦ σθαι, Lk. xxiv. 21; κρί- 
νειν, 2 Tim. iv. 1 [WH mre. κρῖναι] ; w. pres. inf. passive: 
Mt. xvii. 22; Mk. xiii. 4; Lk. ix. 44; xix. 11; xxi. 36; 
Acts xxvi. 22; Ro. iv. 24; 1 Th. iii.4; Jas. ii. 12; Rev. 
i. 19 [Tdf. γενέσθαι]; vi. 11; τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτε- 
σθαι δόξης, 1 Pet.v. 1; w.aor. inf.: τὴν μέλλουσαν δόξαν 
ἀποκαλυφθῆναι. Ro. viii. 18; τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀπο- 
καλυφθῆναι, Gal. iii. 23; used also of those things which 
we infer from certain preceding events will of necessity 
follow: w. inf. pres., Acts xxviii. 6; Ro. viii. 13; w. inf. 
fut., Acts xxvii. 10. ἃ. in general, of what is sure to 
happen: w. inf. pres., Mt. xxiv. 6; Jn. vi. 71; 1 Tim.i. 
16; Rev. xii.5; xvii. 8; w. inf. fut. ἔσεσθαι, Acts xi. 28 ; 
xxiv. 15. 6. to be always on the point of doing with- 
out ever doing, i. 6. to delay: τί μέλλεις; Acts xxii. 16 
(Aeschyl. Prom. 36; τί μέλλετε; Eur. Ilec. 1094; Leian. 
dial. mort. 10, 13, and often in prof. auth.; 4 Mace. vi. 
23; ix. 1). 

μέλος, -ous, τό, [fr. Hom. down], a member, limb: prop. 
a member of the human body, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12, 
14, 18-20, 25 sq.; Jas. iii. 5; τὰ μ. τοῦ σώματος, 1 Co. 
xii. 12, 22; μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Ro. vi. 
13, 19; vii. 5, 23; Col. 111. 5; Jas. iii. 6; iv. 1; πόρνης 
μέλη is said of bodies given up to criminal intercourse, 
because they are as it were members belonging to the 
harlot’s body, 1 Co. vi. 15. Since Christians are closely 
united by the bond of one and the same spirit both among 
themselves and with Christ as the head, their fellowship 
is likened to the body, and individual Christians are 
metaph. styled pé€Ay—now one of another, ἀλλήλων: 
Ro. xii. 5; Eph. iv. 25; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 7, (ef. 
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. iii. p. 45), — now of the mys- 
tical body, i.e. the church: 1 Co. xii. 27; Eph. v. 30, [cf. 
iv. 16 WH mrg.}]; τὰ σώματα of Christians are called 
μέλη of Christ, because the body is the abode of the spirit 
of Christ and is consecrated to Christ’s service, 1 Co. 
vi. 15.* 

Μελχί (T Tr WH Μελχεί ; see et, 0), 6, C29 my king), 
Meilchi; 1. oneof Christ’s ancestors: Lk.iii. 24. 2. 
another of the same: ib. iii. 28.* 

Μελχισεδέκ (in Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 2 Μελχισεδέκης, 
-ov), 6, (ps7399 king of righteousness), Melchizedek, 
king of Salem (see under Σαλήμ) and priest of the most 
high God, who lived in the days of Abraham: Heb. v. 6, 
10; vi. 20; vii. 1, 10 sq. 15,17, 21 [RGL]; cf. Gen. 
xiv. 18 sqq.; Ps. εἶχ. (ex.) 4. [Cf. B. Ὁ. 8. v.]* 


397 


μεν 


μεμβράνα [ Soph. Lex. -ava; cf. Chandler § 136], -ας 
[B. 17 (15) ], ἡ, Lat. membrana, i. e. parchment, first made 
of dressed skins at Pergamum, whence its name: 2 ‘lim. 
iv. 13 [Act. Barn. 6 fin. Cf. Birt, Antikes Buchwesen, 
ch. ii.; Gardthausen, Palaeographie, p. 39 sq.].* 

μέμφομαι; 1 aor. ἐμεμψάμην; in class. Grk. fr. Hesiod 
(opp. 184) down; to blame, find fault: absol. Ro. ix. 19; 
the thing found fault with being evident from what pre- 
cedes, Mk. vii. 2 Rec.; αὐτούς, Heb. viii. 8 L T Tr mrg. 
WHtxt., where RG Tr txt. WH mrg. αὐτοῖς, which many 
join with μεμφόμενος (for the person or thing blamed is 
added by Grk. writ. now in the dat., now in the acc.; 
see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v., ef. Kriiger § 46, 7, 3); 
but it is more correct to supply αὐτήν, i. 6. διαθήκην, 
which the writer wishes to prove was not “ faultless” 
(cf. 7), and to join αὐτοῖς with λέγει; [B. § 133, 9].* 

μεμψίμοιρος, -ov, (μέμφομαι, and μοῖρα fate, lot), com- 
plaining of one’s lot, querulous, discontented : Jude 16. 
(Isoer. p. 234 ¢. [p. 387 ed. Lange]; Aristot. h. a. 9, 1 
[p- 608", 10]; Theophr. char. 17,1; Leian. dial. deor. 
20, 4; Plut. de ira cohib. ec. 13.) * 

μέν, a weakened form of μήν, and hence properly a 
particle of affirmation: truly, certainly, surely, in- 
deed, —its affirmative force being weakened, yet re- 
tained most in Ionic, Epic, and Herodotus, and not 
wholly lost in Attic and Hellenistic writers (μέν ‘con- 
firmative’; ef. 4 Mace. xviii. 18). Owing to this its 
original meaning it adds a certain force to the terms 
and phrases with which it is connected, and thus con- 
trasts them with or distinguishes ther. from others. 
Accordingly it takes on the character of a concessive 
and very often of a merely distinctive particle, which 
stands related to a following δέ or other adversative con- 
junction, either expressed or understood, and in a sen- 
tence composed of several members is so placed as to 
point out the first member, to which a second, marked by 
an adversative particle, is added or opposed. It corre- 
sponds to the Lat. quidem, indeed, Germ. zwar (i.e. prop. 
zu Wahre, i.e. in Wahrheit [in truth]) ; but often its force 
cannot be reproduced. Its use in classic Greek is exhib- 
ited by Devarius i. p. 122 sqq., and Klotz on the same ii. 
2 p. 656 sqq.; Viger i. p. 531 sqq., and Hermann on the 
same p. 824 sq.; al.; Matthiae ὃ 622; Kiihner ii. p. 806 
sqq- 88 527 sqq-; p- 691 sqq.; ὃ 503; [Jelf § 729, 1, 2; 
§§ 764 sqq.]; Passow, and Pape, [and L. and S.]s. v. 

I. Examples in which the particle μέν is followed in 
another member by an adversative particle expressed. 
Of these examples there are two kinds: 1. those 
in which μέν has a concessive force, and δέ (or ἀλλά) in- 
troduces a restriction, correction, or amplification of 
what has been said in the former member, indeed... 
but, yet, on the other hand. Persons or things, or predi- 
cations about either, are thus correlated: Mt. iii. 11, cf. 
Mk. i. 8 (where T Tr WHom. Lbr. μέν); Lk. iii. 16 
(where the meaning is, ‘I indeed baptize as well as he 
who is to come after me, but his baptism is of greater 
efficacy’; ef. Acts i. 5); Mt. ix. 37 and Lk. x. 2 (al 
though the harvest is great, yet the laborers are few); 


μεν 


Mt. xvii. 11 sq. (rightly indeed is it said that Elijah will 
come and work the ἀποκατάστασις, but he has already 
come to bring about this very thing); Mt. xx. 23; xxii. 
8; xxiii. 28; Jn. xvi. 22; xix.32sq.; Acts xxi. 39 (al- 
though I am a Jew, and not that Egyptian, yet etc.) ; 
Acts xxii. 8 [R]; Ro.1i. 25; vi. 11; 1 Co.i. 18; ix. 24; 
xi. 14 sq.; xii. 20 RG Lbr. Trbr. WH mrg.]; xv.51[R 
GLbr.]; 2Co.x.10; Heb. iii. 5 sq.; 1 Pet. i. 20, and 
often. μέν and δέ are added to articles and pronouns: 
of pev...oit δέ, the one indeed ... but the other (al- 
though the latter, yet the former), Phil. i. 16 sq. [ace. to 
crit. txt.]; ὃς pev... ὃς δέ, the one indeed, but (yet) 
the other etc. Jude 22 sq.; τινὲς pev... τινες δε καί, Phil. 
i. 15; with conjunctions: εἰ μὲν οὖν, if indeed then, if 
therefore... εἰ δέ, but if, Acts xviii. 14 sq. RG; xix. 
38 sq.; xxv- 111 Τ Tr WH [el μὲν οὖν .. . νυνὶ δέ, Heb. 
viii. 4 sq. (here RG εἰ μὲν ydp)]; εἰ pev... νῦν δέ, if 
indeed (conceding or supposing this or that to be the 
case) ... but now, Heb. xi. 15; κἄν μὲν. .. ef δὲ μήγε, 
Lk. xiii. 9; μὲν yap... δέ, 1 Co. xi. 7; Ro. ii. 25; μὲν 
ov... δέ, Lk. iii. 185 εἰς pev... εἰς δέ, Heb. 1x. 6 sq.; 
μὲν . «.« ἀλλά, indeed ... bul, although... yet, Ro. xiv. 
20; 1Co. xiv.17; pév... πλήν, Lk. xxii. 22. [Cf W. 
443 (413); B. § 149, 12a.] 2. those in which μέν 
loses its concessive force and serves only to distin- 
cuish, but δέ retains its adversative power: Lk. xi. 48; 
Acts xiii. 36 sq.; xxiii. 8 [here WH txt. om. Tr br. μέν]; 
1 Co. i. 12, 23, Phil. iii. 1; Heb. vii. 8; ἀπὸ pev... ἐπὶ 
δέ, 2 Tim. iv. 4; ὁ μὲν οὖν (Germ. er nun [he, then,])... 
ai δέ, Acts xxviii. 5 sq.; ὃς pév... ὃς δέ, and one... and 
another, 1 Co. xi. 21; οἱ pev...6 δέ (he, on the con- 
trary), Heb. vii. 20 sq. 23 sq.; ἐκεῖνοι μὲν οὖν... ἡμεῖς 
δέ, 1 Co. ix. 25; ef μὲν otv... εἰ δέ, Acts xviii. 14 sq. 
[RG]; xix. 38; xxv.11 [LT Tr WH]; and this hap- 
pens chiefly when what has already been included in the 
words immediately preceding is separated into parts, so 
that the adversative particle contrasts that which the 
writer especially desires to contrast: ἑκάστῳ... τοῖς μὲν 
Gyrotow... τοῖς δὲ ἐξ ἐριθείας etc. Ro. ii. 6-8; mas... 
ἐκεῖνοι pev..- ἡμεῖς δέ etc. 1 Co. ix. 25; add, Mt. xxv. 
14 sq. 33; Ro. v. 16; xi. 22. 3. pev... δέ serve only 
to distribute a sentence into clauses: both...and; not 
only .«. but also; as well. ..as: Jn. xvi. 9-11; Ro. viii. 
17; Jude 8; πρῶτον pev... ἔπειτα δέ, Heb. vii. 2; ὃ μὲν 

..6 d€...8 δέ, some... some... some, Mt. xiii. 8; 
[ἕκαστος - - - ὁ pev...6 δέ, each... one ... another, 
1 Co. vii. 7 LT Tr WH]; ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ, one... an- 
other, Mt. xxi. 35; Acts xvii. 32; 1 Co. vii. 7[ RG]; of 
μὲν « «- ἄλλοι [L of] bé... ἕτεροι δέ, Mt. xvi. 14; ᾧ μὲν 
yap... ἄλλῳ de... ἑτέρῳ δέ [here T Tr WH om. Lbr. δέ], 
1 Co. xii. 8-10; ἃ peév... foll. by ἄλλα δέ three times, 
Mt. xiii. 4 sq. 7sq.; ἄλλος μέν, ἄλλος δέ, 1 Co. xv. 39; 
τοῦτο μὲν ... τοῦτο δέ, on the one hand ... on the other; 
partly ... partly, Heb. x. 33, also found in prof. auth. 
cf. W. 142 (135). μέν is followed by another particle: 
ἔπειτα, Jn. xi. 6; 1 Co. xii. 28; Jas. 111. 17; καὶ νῦν, Acts 
xxvi. 4, 6; τὰ νῦν, Acts xvii. 30; πολὺ [RG πολλῷ] 
μᾶλλον, Heb. xii. 9. 


398 


μεν 


II. Examples in which μέν is followed neither by δέ 
nor by any other adversative particle (μέν “ solitarium’) ; 
ef. W. 575 (534) sq.; B. 365 (313) sq. These exx. are 
of various kinds; either 1. the antithesis is evi- 
dent from the context; as, Col. ii. 23 (‘have indeed a 
show of wisdom’, but are folly [cf. Bp. Lehtft. in loc.]) ; 
ἡ μὲν « . . σωτηρίαν, sc. but they themselves prevent their 
own salvation, Ro. χ. 1 ; τὰ pév... δυνάμεσιν, sc. but ye 
do not hold to my apostolic authority, 2 Co. xii. 12; 
ἄνθρωποι μὲν [LT Tr Wilom. μὲν] . . . ὀμνύουσιν, se. ὁ δὲ 
θεὸς καθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ ὀμνύει, Heb. vi. 16. Or 2. the 
antithetie idea is brought out by a different turn of the 
sentence: Acts xix. 4 [ Rec.], where the expected second 
member, Ἰησοῦς δέ ἐστιν ὁ ἐρχόμενος, is wrapped up in 
τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν eis τὸν Ἰησοῦν; Ro. xi. 13 ἐφ᾽ ὅσον μὲν κτλ.» 
where the antithesis παραζηλῶ δὲ «rd. is contained in 
εἴπως παραζηλώσω; Ro. vii. 12 ὁ μὲν νόμος xrd., where 
the thought of the second member, ‘ but sin misuses the 
law,’ is expressed in another form in 13 sqq. by an 
anacoluthon, consisting of a change from the disjunctive 
to a conjunctive construction (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 839), 
we find péev... τέ, Acts xxvii. 21; μὲν. - - καί, 1 Th. ii. 
18; in distributions or partitions, Mk. iv. 4-8 [here RG 
μὲν - «« δὲ. καὶ. «« καί] ; Lk. viii. 5-8; or, finally, that 
member in which δέ would regularly follow immediately 
precedes (Herm. ad Vig. p. 839), Acts xxviii. 22 [yet 
see Meyer ad loc.; cf. B.§ 149,12 4.1. Or 3. the 
writer, in using μέν, perhaps had in mind a second mem- 
ber to be introduced by δέ, but was drawn away from 
his intention by explanatory additions relating to the 
first member: thus Acts iii. 13 (ὃν ὑμεῖς μέν ---- Ree. om. 
this pev —ete., where ὁ θεὸς δὲ ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν, cf. 15, 
should have followed); esp. (as occasionally in class. 
Grk. also) after πρῶτον μὲν: Ro. i. 8; iii. 2; 1 Co. xi. 
18; τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον «rd. where the antithesis τὸν 
δὲ δεύτερον λόγον κτλ. ought to have followed, Acts i. 
ls 4. μὲν οὖν [in Lk. xi. 28 T Tr WH μενοῦν], Lat. 
quidem igitur, [Eng. so then, now therefore, verily, etc], 
(where μέν is confirmatory of the matter in hand, and 
οὖν marks an inference or transition, cf. Klotz ad Devar. 
ii. 2 p. 662 sq.; [Herm. Vig. pp. 540 sq. 842; B. § 149, 
16]): Actsi.18; ν. 41; xiii. 45 xvii. 30; xxiii. 22; xxvi. 
9; 1 Co. vi. 4, 7 [here Tom. Trbr. οὖν] ; ἀλλὰ μὲν οὖν, 
Phil. iii. 8 GL Tr; εἰ μὲν οὖν, Heb. vii. 11. 5. pev 
solitarium has a concessive and restrictive force, indeed, 
verily, (Germ. freilich), [ef. Klotz, Devar. ii. 2 p. 522; Har- 
tung, Partikeln, ii. 404]: εἰ μέν, 2 Co. xi. 4; μὲν οὖν now 
then, (Germ. nun freilich), Heb. ix. 1 [ef. B. u.s. On the 
use of μὲν οὖν in the classics ef. Cope’s note on Aristot. 
rhet. 2, 9, 11.] 6. μενοῦνγε; 4. V- in its place. 

III. As respects the Position of the particle: it 
never stands at the beginning of a sentence, but yet as 
near the beginning as possible; generally in the second 
or third place, by preference between the article and 
noun, [exx. in which it occupies the fourth place are 
Acts iii. 21; 2 Co.x.13 Col. ii. 23; Acts xiv. 12 Rec.; 
the fifth place, Eph. iv. 11; Ro. xvi. 19 RWH br.; 1 Co. 
ti.15 RG; (Jn. xvi. 22, see below)]; moreover, in the 


Mevva 


midst of a clause also it attaches itself to a word the 
force of which is to be strengthened, as καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν λύπην 
μὲν νῦν ἔχετε [but LT Tr WH... οὖν viv μὲν λύπ.], Jn. 
xvi. 22; cf. W. § 61, 6. The word is not found in the 
Rey. or in the Epp. of John. 

Mewa or Μέννας, see Maivav. 

μεν-οῦν i. q. μὲν οὖν, see μέν, IT. 4 sq. 

μεν-οῦν-γε [μενοῦν ye L Tr], (μέν, οὖν, ye), nay surely, 
nay rather; three times in answers by which what was 
previously said is corrected (and standing at the begin- 
ning of the clause, contrary to Attic usage where μὲν 
οὖν is never so placed; cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. et Alex. 
p- 203 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342; [B. 370 sq. (318); W. 
§ 61, 6]): Lk. xi. 28 [where T Tr WH pevotv]; Ro. ix. 
20; x.18; also Phil. iii. 8 [where LG Tr μὲν οὖν, WH 
μὲν οὖν γε], and Nicet. ann. 21, 11. 415 [p. 851 ed. 
Bekk.].* 

μέν-τοι, (μέν, τοί), [Tr μέν τοι in 2 Tim. ii. 19], a par- 
ticle of affirmation, and hence also often of opposition 
(on its various use in class. Grk. ef. Devar. p. 124 sq. and 
Klotz’s comments, vol. ii. 2 pp. 60 and 663 sqq.; Herm. 
ad Vig. p. 840 sq-), but yet, nevertheless, howbeit: Jn. iv. 
27; vii. 13; xx. 5; xxi. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Jude 8 (the 
connection of which vs. with what precedes is as follows: 
‘although these examples were set forth as warnings, 
nevertheless’ ete.) ; ὅμως μέντοι, yet nevertheless, Jn. xii. 
42; μέντοι, i. q. rather, Jas. ii. 8 (if ye do not have re- 
spect ot persons, but rather observe the law of love, 
with which προσωποληψιία is incompatible; [if however, 
howbeit if |).* 

μένω; impf. ἔμενον; fut. μενῶ; 1 aor. ἔμεινα ; plupf. 
μεμενήκειν without augm. (1 Jn. ii. 19; ef. ἐκβάλλω, [and 
see 7'df. Proleg. p. 120 sq.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. 
chiefly for my and Dip, also for 731, 30)", ete.; to re- 
main, abide ; I. intransitively ; in reference τ. 
to PLACE; a. prop. i. q. Lat. commoror, to sojourn, 
tarry: ἐν w. dat. of place, Lk. viii. 27; x. 7; Jn. vii. 9; 
xi. 6; Acts xx.15; xxvii. 31; xxviii. 30 [RGL]; 2 
Tim. iv. 20; with adverbs of place: ἐκεῖ, Mt. x.11; Jn. 
ii. 12; x. 40; [xi. 54 WHTrtxt.]; ὧδε, Mt. xxvi. 38; 
Mk. xiv. 34; παρά τινι, with one, Jn. i. 39 (40); xiv. 25; 
Acts xviii. 20 [RG]; xxi. 7; σύν τινι, Lk. i. 56; καθ᾽ 
ἑαυτόν, dwell at his own house, Acts xxviii. 16, cf. 30. 
iq. larry as a guest, lodge: ποῦ, Jn. i. 38 (39); ἐν w. dat. 
of place, Lk. xix.5; Acts ix.43; παρά τινι, in one’s house, 
Acts ix. 43; xviii. 3; xxi. 8; of tarrying for a night, 
μετά τινος, σύν τινι, Lk. xxiv. 29. i. q. to be kept, to remain: 
dead bodies ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ, Jn. xix. 31; τὸ κλῆμα ἐν τῇ 
ἀμπέλῳ, Jn. xv. 4. b. tropically ; a. i. q. not to 
depart, not to leave, to continue to be present: μετά τινος 
(gen. of pers.), to maintain unbroken fellowship with 
one, adhere to his party, 1 Jn. ii. 19; to be constantly 
present to help one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. xiv.16 RG; 
also παρά w. dat. of pers., Jn. xiv. 17; ἐπί τινα, to put 
forth constant influence upon one, of the Holy Spirit, 
Jn. i. 32 sq.; also of the wrath of God, ib. iii. 36; τὸ 
κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει, of that which continually pre- 
vents the right understanding of what is read, 2 Co. iii. 


399 


μερίζω 


14. Inthe mystic phraseology of John, God is said μένειν 
in Christ, i. e. to dwell as it were within him, to be con- 
tinually operative in him by his divine influence and en- 
ergy. Jn. xiv. 10; Christians are said μένειν ἐν τῷ θεῷ, to 
be rooted as it were in him, knit to him by the spirit they 
have received from him, 1 Jn. ii. 6, 24, 27; iii.6; hence 
one is said μένειν in Christ or in God, and conversely 
Christ or God is said μένειν in one: Jn. vi. 56; xv. 4 sq. ; 
1 Jn. ili. 24; iv. 138, 16; ὁ θεὸς μένει ἐν αὐτῷ x. αὐτὸς ἐν 
τῷ θεῷ. 1 Jn. iv. 15; cf. Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 268 sq. 
μένει τι ev ἐμοί, something has established itself perma- 
nently within my soul, and always exerts its power in 
me: τὰ ῥήματά pov, Jn. xv. 7; ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Jn. ii. 
14; ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμή (not joy in me i. 6. of which I am the 
object, but the joy with which I am filled), Jn. xv. 11 
Rec. ; ὃ ἠκούσατε, 1 Jn. ii. 24; the Holy Spirit, Jn. ii. 17; 
iii. 9; ἡ ἀλήθεια, 2 Jn. 2; love towards God, 1 Jn. iii. 17; 
in the same sense one is said ἔχειν τι μένον ἐν ἑαυτῷ, as 
τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ, Jn. v. 38; ζωὴν αἰώνιον, 1 Jn. iii, 15. 
i. 4- to persevere; ἔν τινι, of him who cleaves, holds fast, 
toathing: ἐν τῷ λόγῳ, Jn. viii. 31; ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ, 1 Jn. iv. 
16; ἐν πίστει, 1 Tim. ii. 15; ἐν ois (ἐν τούτοις, ἃ) ἔμαθες, 
2 Tim. iii. 14; ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ; 2 In. 9, (ἐν τῷ ᾿Ιουδαϊσμῷ, 2 
Mace. viii. 1); differently ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τινός, i. 6. to keep 
one’s self always worthy of his love, Jn. xv. 9 sq. B. 
to be held, or kept, continually: ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ, in the state 
of death, 1 Jn. iii. 14; ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ, Jn. xii. 46; ἐν τῷ 
φωτί, 1 Jn. ii. 10. 2. to TIME; to continue to be, i.e. 
not to perish, to last, to endure: of persons, to survive, live, 
(exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kypke, Observv. i. p. 415 
sq-): Phil. i. 25 [so ἐμμένειν, Sir. xxxix. 11]; with eis τὸν 
αἰῶνα added, Jn. xii. 34; Heb. vii. 24; also of him who 
becomes partaker of the true and everlasting life, opp. 
to παράγεσθαι. 1 Jn. ii. 17; ἔως ἄρτι, opp. to of κοιμηθέντες, 
1 Co. xv. 6; ὀλίγον, Rev. xvii. 10; ἕως ἔρχομαι, Jn. xxi. 
22 sq.; of things, not to perish, to last, stand: of cities, 
Mt. xi. 23; Heb. xiii. 14; of works, opp. to κατακαίεσθαι, 
1 Co. iii. 14; of purposes, moral excellences, Ro. ix. 11 ; 
1 Co. xiii. 13; Heb. xiii. 1; λόγος θεοῦ, 1 Pet. i. 23; 
(where Rec. adds εἰς τ. αἰῶνα) ; of institutions, Heb. xii. 
27. ὁ καρπός, Jn. xv. 16; ὕπαρξις, Heb. x. 34; ἁμαρτία, 
Jn. ix.41; βρῶσις, opp. to 7 ἀπολλυμένη, Jn. vi. 27; one’s 
δικαιοσύνη with eis τὸν αἰῶνα added, 2 Co. ix. 9; τὸ ῥῆμα 
κυρίου, 1 Pet.i.25. things which one does not part with 
are said μένειν to him, i. 6. to remain to him, be still in 
(his) possession: Acts v. 4 (1 Mace. xv. 7). 3. to 
STATE or CONDITION; to remain as one is, not to become 
another or different: with a predicate nom. povos, Jn. 
xii. 94 ἀσάλευτος, Acts xxvii. 41; ἄγαμος. 1 Co. vii. 11; 
πιστός, 2 Tim. ii. 13; ἱερεύς, Heb. vii. 3; with adverbs, 
οὕτως, 1 Co. vii. 40; ὡς κἀγώ, ibid. 8; ἐν w. dat. of the 
state, ibid. 20, 24. II. transitively ; τινά, to wait 
for, await one [cf. B. § 131, 4]: Acts xx. 23; with ἐν and 
dat. of place added, ibid. 5. 
κατα-. Tapa-, συν-παρα-, περι-, προσ-, ὑπο-μένω.] 

μερίζω: 1 aor. ἐμέρισα; pf. μεμέρικα (1 Co. vii. 17 T 
Tr txt. WH txt.); Pass., pf. μεμέρισμαι ; 1 aor. euept 
σθην; Mid., 1 aor. inf. μερίσασθαι; (fr. μέρος, as μελίζω 


[Comp.: dva-, 81a-, év-, emt, 


μέριμνα 


fr. μέλος) ; fr. Xen. down; Sept. for pn: to divide; 
ie. a. to separate into parts, cut into pieces: pass. 
μεμέρισται 6 Χριστός ; i. e. has Christ himself, whom ye 
claim as yours, been like yourselves divided into parts, 
so that one has one part and another another part? 1 
Co. i. 13 [L WH txt. punctuate so as to take it as an ex- 
clamatory declaration; see Meyer in loc.}; trop. pepe- 
ptorat ἣ γυνὴ καὶ ἡ παρθένος, differ in their aims, follow 
different interests, [A. V. ‘here is a difference between; 
but L Tr WH connect pep. with what precedes], 1 Co. 
vii. 833 (34); to divide into parties, i. e. be split into fac- 
tions (Polyb. 8, 23,9): καθ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ to be at variance with 
one’s self, to rebel [A. V. divided] against one’s self, Mt. 
xii. 25; also ἐπ᾿ ἐμαυτόν, ib. 26; Mk. iii. 24-26. b. 
to distribute : τί τισι, a thing among persons, Mk. vi. 41; 
to bestow, impart: τινί, 1 Co. vii. 17; τί τινι, Ro. xii. 8; 2 
Co. x. 13; Heb. vii. 2, (Sir. xlv. 20; Polyb. 11, 28, 9) ; 
mid. μερίζομαί τι μετά τινος, to divide (for one’s self) a 
thing with one, Lk. xii. 13 (Dem. p. 913, 1). [Come.: 
δια-, συμ-μερίζω.) * 

μέριμνα, -as, ἡ, (fr. μερίζω, μερίζομαι, to be drawn in 
different directions, cf. [Eng. ‘ distraction’ and ‘ curae 
quae meum animum divorse trahunt’] Ter. Andr. 1, 5, 25; 
Verg. Aen. 4, 285 sq.; [but ace. to al. derived fr. a root 
meaning to be thoughtful, and akin to μάρτυς, memor, 
ete.; cf. Vaniéek p. 1201; Curtius § 466; Fick iv. 283; 
see μάρτυς), care, anxiety: 1 Pet. v. 7 (fr. Ps. liv. (lv.) 
23); Lk. viii. 14; xxi. 34; w. gen. of the obj., care to 
be taken of, care for a thing, 2 Co. xi. 28; τοῦ αἰῶνος 
(rovrov), anxiety about things pertaining to this earthly 
life, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19. [(Hom. h. Mere.), Hes., 
Pind., al.] * 

μεριμνάω, -@; fut. μεριμνήσω; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. 
μεριμνήσητε; (μέριμνα) ; a. to be anxious; to be 
troubled with cares: absol., Mt. vi. 27, 31; Lk. xii. 25; 
μηδὲν pep. be anxious about nothing, Phil. iv. 6; with 
dat. of the thing for the interests of which one is solicit- 
ous [οἷ W. § 31, 1 b.]: τῇ ψυχῇ» about sustaining life, 
τῷ σώματι, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; 
thing, Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 26; εἰς τὴν αὔριον, for the 
morrow, i.e. about what may be on the morrow, Mt. vi. 
34; foll. by an indir. quest. πῶς ἢ τί, Mt. x.19; Lk. xii. 
11 [here Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. WH br. ἢ τί] ; joined with 
τυρβάζεσθαι (θορυβάζ.) foll. by περὶ πολλά, Lk. x. 41 [WH 
mrg. om. | b. tocare for, look out for, (athing) ; to 
seek to promote one’s interests: τὰ ἑαυτῆς, Mt. vi. 34 Ree. ; 


περί τινος, about a 


τὰ τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Co. vii. 32-34; τὰ τοῦ κόσμου, 1 Co. vii. 34; 
ἑαυτῆς, Mt. vi. 34 LT Tr WH (a usage unknown to Grk. 
writ.. although they put a gen. after other verbs of caring 
or providing for, as ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, φροντίζειν, προνοεῖν, cf. 
Kriiger § 47, 11; W. 205 (193); B. § 133, 25); τὰ περί 
twos, Phil. ii. 20; ἵνα τὸ αὐτὸ ὑπὲρ ἀλλήλων μεριμνῶσι τὰ 
μέλη, that the members may have the same care one for 
another, 1 Co. xii. 25. (Sept. for 384, to be anxious, Ps, 
XXXVii. (xxxviii.) 19; 129 to be disturbed, annoyed in 
spirit, 2 S. vii. 10; 1 Chr. xvii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. 
and Soph. down.) [Comp.: προ-μεριμνάω.] * 

μερίς, -ίδος, 9, (see μέρος), Sept. chiefly for ΡΠ, ΠΡ, 


400 


μεέρυς 


732; [fr. Antipho and Thue. down]; a part, i. 4. 1. 
a part as distinct from the whole: (τῆς) Μακεδονίας, Acts 
xvi. 12 [on which see Hort in WH. App. ad loc. ]. 2. 
an assigned part, a portion, share: Lk. x. 42 (see ἀγαθός, 
2) ; ἔστι μοι μερὶς μετά τινος, Ihavea portion, i. e. fellow- 
ship, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. οὐκ ἔστι μοι μερὶς ἣ κλῆρος 
ἔν τινι, I have neither part nor lot, take no share, in a 
thing, Acts viii. 21; ἱκανοῦν τινα els τὴν μερίδα τινός, to 
make one fit to obtain a share in a thing [i. e. partit. gen.; 
al. gen. of apposition], Col. i. 12.* 

μερισμός, -ov, ὁ, (μερίζω), a division, partition, (Plat., 
Polyb., Strab., [al.]) ; 1. a distribution; plur. dis 
tributions of various kinds: πνεύματος ἁγίου, gen. of the 
obj., Heb. ii. 4. 2. α separation: ἄχρι μερισμοῦ 
ψυχῆς x. πνεύματος, which many take actively: ‘up to the 
dividing’ i. e. so far as to cleave asunder or separate; 
but it is not easy to understand what the dividing of the 
‘soul’ is. Hence it is more correct, I think, and more 
in accordance with the context, to take the word pas 
sively (just as other verbal subst. ending in pds are used, 
6. g. ἁγιασμός, πειρασμός), and translate even to the divi- 
sion, ete., i. 6. to that most hidden spot, the dividing line 
between soul and spirit, where the one passes into the 
other, Heb. iv. 12; [ef. Siegfried, Philo von Alex. ἃ. 8. w. 
p- 325 sq. ].* 

μεριστής, -ov, ὁ, (μερίζω), a divider: of an inheritance, 
Lk. xii. 14. (Pollux [4, 176].) * 

μέρος, -ous, τό, (μείρομαι to share, receive one’s due por- 
tion), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down], a part; i.e. at 
a part due or assigned to one, (Germ. Antheil): ἀφαιρεῖν 
τὸ μέρος τινὸς (gen. of pers.) ἀπό or ἔκ twos (gen. of the 
thing), Rev. xxii.19; ἔχειν μέρος ἐν with dat. of the thing, 
Rev. xx. 6; μέρος ἔχειν μετά twos, (participation in the 
same thing, i. e.) to have part (fellowship) with one, Jn. 
xiii. 8; hence, as sometimes in class. Grk. (Eur. Ale. 477 
[474]), lot, destiny, assigned to one, Rev. xxi. 8; τιθέναι 
τὸ μέρος τινὸς μετά τινων, to appoint one his lot with cer- 
tain persons, Mt. xxiv. 51; Lk. xii. 46. 2. one of 
the constituent parts of a whole; a. univ.: ina con- 
text where the whole and its parts are distinguished, Lk. 
xi. 36; Jn. xix. 23; Rev. xvi. 19; w.agen. of the whole, 
Lk. xv. 12; xxiv. 42; where it is evident from the con- 
text of what whole it is a part, Acts v. 2; Eph. iv. 16: 
τὸ ἕν μέρος, SC. τοῦ συνεδρίου, Acts xxiii. 6; τοῦ μέρους 
τῶν Φαρισαίων, of that part of the Sanhedrin which con- 
sisted of Pharisees, Acts xxiii. 9 [not Lehm.]; τὰ μέρη, 
w. gen. of a province or country, the divisions or regions 
which make up the land or province, Mt. ii. 22; Acts ii. 
10; w. gen. of a city, the region belonging to a city, 
country around it, Mt. xv. 21; xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 10; 
τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, the upper districts (in tacit contrast 
with τὰ κατώτερα, and with them forming one whole), 
Acts xix. 1; τὰ μέρη ἐκεῖνα, those regions (which are - 
parts of the country just mentioned, i. e. Macedonia), Acts 
XX. 2; τὰ κατώτερα μέρη w. gen. of apposition, τῆς yrs, 
Eph. iv. 9 (on which see κατώτερος); εἰς ra δεξιὰ μέρη τοῦ 
πλοίου, i. 6. into the parts (i. 6. spots sc. of the lake) on 
the right side of the ship, Jn. xxi. 6. Adverbial phrases’ 


μεσημβρία 


ἀνὰ μέρος (see ἀνά, 1), 1 Co. xiv. 27; κατὰ μέρος. sever- 
aly, part by part, in detail, Heb. ix. 5 [see κατά, II. 3 
a. γ.1; μέρος τι (ace. absol.) in part, partly, 1 Co. xi. 18 
(Thue. 2, 64; 4, 30; Isoer. p. 426 d.); ἀπὸ μέρους, in 
part, i. 6. somewhat, 2 Co. i. 145 in a measure, to some de- 
gree, ib. ii. 5; [Ro. xv. 24]; as respects a part, Ro. xi. 25 ; 
here and there, Ro. xv. 15; ἐκ μέρους as respects indi- 
vidual persons and things, severally, individually, 1 Co. 
xii. 27; in part, partially, i. e. imperfectly, 1 Co. xiii. 9, 
12; τὸ ἐκ μέρους (opp. to τὸ τέλειον) [A. V. that which 
is in part] imperfect (Luth. well, das Stiickwerk), ibid. 10. 
[Green (Crit. Note on 2 Co. i. 14) says “ ἀπὸ p. differs in 
Paul’s usage from ἐκ μ- in that the latter is a contrasted 
term in express opposition to the idea of a complete whole, 
the other being used simply without such aim”; cf. 
Bnhdy. Syntax, p. 230; Meyer on 1 Co. xii. 27.] b. 
any particular, Germ. Sliick, (where the writer means to 
intimate that there are other matters, to be separated 
from that which he has specified): ἐν τῷ μέρει τούτῳ, 
in this particular i.e. in regard to this, in this respect, 
1 Pet. iv. 16 R; 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 3; w. a gen. of the thing, 
Col. ii. 16 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]; τοῦτο τὸ μέρος, se. 
τῆς ἐργασίας ἡμῶν (branch of business), Acts xix. 27, 
cf. 25.* 

μεσημβρία, -as, 7, (μέσος and ἡμέρα), fr. Hdt. down, mid- 
day [on the omission of the art. cf. W. 121 (115)]; a. 
(as respects time) noon: Acts xxii. 6. b. (as re- 
spects locality) the south: Acts viii 26 [al. refer this also 
to a.; see xara, 11. 2].* 

μεσιτεύω: 1 aor. ἐμεσίτευσα; (μεσίτης [cf. W. p. 25 
e.]); 1. to act as mediator, between litigating or 
covenanting parties; trans. to accomplish something by 
interposing between two parties, to mediate, (with ace. of 
the result): τὴν διάλυσιν, Polyb. 11, 34, 3; τὰς συνθήκας, 
Diod. 19,71; Dion. Hal. 9, 59; [ef. Philo de plant. Noé, 
ii. 2 fin.]. 2. as a μεσίτης is a sponsor or surety (Jo- 
seph. antt. 4, 6, 7 ταῦτα ὀμνύντες €Xeyor καὶ τὸν θεὸν μεσί- 
την ὧν ὑπισχνοῦντο ποιούμενοι [cf. Philo de spec. lege. iii. 
7 ἀοράτῳ δὲ πράγματι πάντως ἀόρατος μεσιτεύει θεός etc. }), 
50 μεσιτεύω comes to signify to pledge one’s self, give 
surely: ὅρκῳ, Heb. vi. 17." 

μεσίτης, -ov, ὁ, (μέσος), one who intervenes between 
two, either in order to make or restore peace and friend- 
ship, or to form a compact, or for ratifying a covenant; 
a medium of communication, arbitrator, (Vulg. [and A. V.] 
mediator): 6 μεσίτης [generic art. cf. W. § 18, 1 sub fin.], 
i.e. every mediator, whoever acts as mediator, ἑνὸς οὐκ 
ἔστι, does not belong to one party but to two or more, 
Gal. iii. 206. Used of Moses, as one who brought the 
commands of God to the people of Israel and acted as 
mediator with God on behalf of the people, ib. 19 (cf. 
Deut. ν. 5; hence he is called μεσίτης καὶ διαλλακτής by 
Philo also, vit. Moys. iii. § 19). Christ is called peo. 
θεοῦ x. ἀνθρώπων, since he interposed by his death and 
restored the harmony between God and man which 
human sin had broken, 1 Tim. ii. 5; also μεσ. διαθήκης, 
Heb. viii. 6; ix.15; xii. 24. (Polyb. 28, 15,8; Diod. 4, 
54; Philo de somn. i. § 22; Joseph. antt. 16, 2,2; Plut. 


401 


μέσος 


de Is. et Os. 46; once in Sept., Job ix. 88.) Cf. Fischer, 
De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 351 sqq.” 

μεσο-νύκτιον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. μεσονύκτιος in 
Pind. et al., fr. μέσος and νύξ, νυκτός), midnight: μεσο- 
vuxtiov, at midnight [W. § 30,11; Β. § 132, 26], Mk. 
xili. 35 [here T Tr WH ace.; ef. W. 230 (215 sq.); B. 
§ 131, 11]; Lk. xi. 5; κατὰ τὸ p. about midnight, Acts 
xvi. 25; μέχρι μ-. until midnight, Acts xx. 7. (Sept.; 
Hippocr., Aristot., Diod., Strabo, Leian., Plut.; ef. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 53, [W. p. 28 c.].) * 

Μεσοποταμία, -as, 7, (fem. of μεσοποτάμιος, -a, -ον, 80. 
χώρα; fr. μέσος and ποταμός), Mesopotamia, the name, 
not so much political as geographical (scarcely in use 
before the time of Alexander the Great), of a region in 
Asia, lying between the rivers Euphrates and Tigris 
(whence it took its name; cf. Arrian. anab. Alex. 7, 7; 
Tae. ann. 6, 37; 0:93 DIN, Aram of the two rivers, Gen. 
xxiv. 10), bounded on the N. by the range of Taurus 
and on the S. by the Persian Gulf; many Jews had 
settled in it (Joseph. antt. 12,3, 4): Acts ii. 9; vii. 2. 
(Cf. Socin in Encycl. Brit. ed. 9 s. v.; Rawlinson, He- 
rodotus, vol. i. Essay ix.]* 

μέσος, -n, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], middle, (Lat. medius, 
“a, -umM) ; 1. as an adjective: μέσης νυκτός, at mid- 
night, Mt. xxv. 6; μέσης ἡμέρας, Acts xxvi. 13 (ace. to 
Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 53, 54, 465, the better writ. said pé- 
Gov ἡμέρας, μεσοῦσα ἡμέρα, μεσημβρία); w. gen.: [exd- 
θητο ὁ Πέτρος μέσος αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii. 55 (RG Lév μέσῳ)]; 
μέσος ὑμῶν ἔστηκε [8]. στήκει], stands in the midst of 
you, Jn. i. 26, (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 380 b.;_ polit. p. 303 4.); 
ἐσχίσθη μέσον, (the veil) was rent in the midst, Lk. xxiii. 
45 [W. 131 (124) note]; ἐλάκησε μέσος, Acts i. 18; 
(ἐσταύρωσαν) μέσον τὸν Ἰησοῦν, Jn. xix. 18. 2. the 
neut. τὸ μέσον or (without the art. in adverb. phrases, 
as διὰ μέσου, ἐν μέσῳ, cf. W. 123 (117); [ef. B. § 125, 67) 
μέσον is used as a substantive; Sept. for 7) (constr. 
state 71M), and 37); the midst: ἀνὰ μέσον (see ἀνά, 1 
{and added note below]); διὰ μέσου (τινός), through the 
midst (Am. v.17; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 4): αὐτῶν, through 
the midst of them, Lk. iv. 30; Jn. viii. 59 [Rec.]; Sapa- 
petas, Lk. xvii. 11 [RG, but LT Tr WH διὰ μέσον (see 
διά, B. I.); others take the phrase here in the sense of 
between (Xen. an. 1, 4,4; Aristot. de anim. 2, 11 vol. 
i. p. 423,12; see L. and 5. 5. v. IIL. 1d.); ef. Meyer 
ed. Weiss in loc. and added note below]; eis τὸ μέσον, 
into the midst, i. e., ace. to the context, either the mid- 
dle of a room or the midst of those assembled in it: 
Mk. iii. 3; xiv. 60 Rec.; Lk. iv. 35; v.19; vi. 8; Jn. 
xx. 19, 26; els μέσον (cf. Germ. mittenhin), Mk. xiv. 60 
GLT Tr WH; ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, in the middle of the apart- 
ment or before the guests, Mt. xiv. 6; ἐν μέσῳ, in the 
midst of the place spoken of, Jn. viii. 3,9; in the middle 
of the room, before all, Acts iv. 7; w. gen. of place, 
Rev. ii. 7 Ree.; Lk. xxi. 21; (i. q. Germ. mittenauf) τῆς 
πλατείας, Rev. xxii. 2 [but see below]; add, Lk. xxii. ὅδ᾽; 
Acts xvii. 22; τῆς θαλάσσης, in the midst (of the surface 
of) the sea, Mk. vi. 47; w. gen. plur. in the midst of, 
amongst: w. gen. of things, Mt. x. 16; Lk. viii. 7; x. 8; 


joeo OTOLYOV 


Rev. i. 13; ii. 1; w. gen. of pers., Mt. xviii. 2; Mk. ix. 
36; Lk. ii. 46; xxii. 55> [here T Tr WH μέσος; see 1 
above]; xxiv. 36; Acts i. 15; ii. 22; xxvii. 21; Rev. v. 
6 [" (see below); vi. 6]; trop. ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶμι, I am 
present with them by my divine power, Mt. xviii. 20; 
w. gen. of a collective noun, Phil. ii. 15 R [see 3 below]; 
Heb. ii. 12; where association or intercourse is the topic, 
equiv. to among, in intercourse with: Lk. xxii. 27; 1 Th. 
ii. 7. in the midst of, i.e. in the space within, τοῦ θρόνου 
(which must be conceived of as having a semicircular 
shape): Rev. iv. 6; v. 6 [*?] where cf. De Wette and 
Bleek; [but De Wette’s note on v. 6 runs “ And I saw 
between the throne and the four living creatures and the 
elders (i. 6. in the vacant space between the throne and 
the living creatures [on one side] and elders [on the 
other side], accordingly nearest the throne” etc.) ; ἀνὰ 
μέσον in vii. 17 also he interprets in the same way; fur- 
ther see xxii. 2; cf. Kliefoth, Com. vol. ii. p.40. For ἐν 
μέσῳ in this sense see Xen. an. 2, 2,3; 2, 4, 17. 21; 
5, 2, 27, ete.; Hab. fii. 2; ἀνὰ μέσον Polyb. 5, 55, 7; often 
in Aristot. (see Bonitz’s index 8. v. μέσος) ; Num. xvi. 
48; Deut. v. 5; Josh. xxii. 25; Judg. xv. 4; 1 K. v.12; 
Ezek. xlvii. 18; xlviii. 22; cf. Gen. i. 4; see Meyer on 
1 Co. vi. 5; cf. dvd, 1]. κατὰ μέσον τῆς νυκτός, about 
midnight, Acts xxvii. 27 [see xara, II. 2]. ἐκ τοῦ μέσου, 
like the Lat. e medio, i.e. out of the way, out of sight: 
αἴρω τι, to take out of the way, to abolish, Col. ii. 14 
[Plut. de curiositate 9; Is. lvii. 2]; γίνομαι ἐκ μέσου, to 
be taken out of the way, to disappear, 2 Th. ii. 7; w. 
gen. of pers., ἐκ μέσου τινῶν, from the society or company 
of, out from among: Mt. xiii. 49; Acts xvil. 33; xxiii. 10; 
1 Co. v. 2; 2 Co. vi. 17, (Ex. xxxi. 14; Num. xiv. 44 
Alex.). 3. the neut. μέσον is used adverbially with 
a gen., in the midst of anything: ἦν μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης, 
Mt. xiv. 24 [otherwise Tr txt. WH txt.; yet cf. W. § 54, 
6] ({so Exod. xiv. 27]; Τέων yap μέσον εἶναι τῆς ᾿Ιωνίης, 
Hadt. 7,170); γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς, Phil. ii. 15 LT Tr WH (τῆς 
ἡμέρας, the middle of the day, Sus. 7 Theodot.); cf. B. 
123 (107 sq.), [ef. 319 (274); W. as above]. * 

μεσότοιχον, -ov, τό, (μέσος, and τοῖχος the wall of a 
house), a partition-wall: τὸ p. τοῦ φραγμοῦ (i. 6. τὸν φραγ- 
μὸν τὸν μεσότοιχον ὄντα [ A. V. the middle wall of parti- 
tion; W. § 59, 8a.]), Eph. ii. 14. (Only once besides, 
and that too in the masc.: τὸν τῆς ἡδονῆς K. ἀρετῆς μεσό- 
τοιχον, Eratosth. ap. Athen. 7 p. 281 d.) * 

μεσουράνημα, -ros, τό, (fr. μεσουρανέω ; the sun is said 
μεσουρανεῖν lo be in mid-heaven, when it has reached the 
meridian), mid-heaven, the highest point in the heavens, 
which the sun occupies at noon, where what is done can be 
seen and heard by all: Rev. viii. 13 (ef. Diisterdieck ad 
loc.) ; xiv. 6; xix.17. (Manetho, Plut., Sext. Emp.) * 

μεσόω; (μέσος); [0 be in the middle, be midway: τῆς 
ἑορτῆς μεσούσης [where a few codd. μεσαζούσης (νυκτὸς 
peoag. Sap. xviii. 14)], when it was the midst of the 
feast, the feast half-spent, Jn. vii. 14 (μεσούσης τῆς 
νυκτός, Ex. xii. 29; Judith xii. 5; τῆς ἡμέρας, Neh. viii. 8 
[Ald., Compl.]; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; θέρους μεσοῦντος, Thue. 6, 30).* 


402 


μετα 


Μεσσίας. -ov [ef. Β. 18 (16)], 6, Messiah; Chald. 
mown, Hebr. mw, i. q. Grk. χριστός, q. v.: ὅπ. i. 41 
(42); iv. 25. Cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. 
Theol., 1876, p. 603; [Lagarde, Psalt. vers. Memphit., 
1875, p. vii. On the general subject see esp. Abbot’s 
supplement to art. Messiah in B. D. Am. ed. and reff. 
added by Orelli (cf. Schaff-Herzog) in Herzog 2 s. v. to 
Oehler’s art.]* 

μεστός, τἡ, -ov, fr. Hom. [i. 6. Epigr.] down, Sept. for 
NOD, full; w. gen. of the thing: prop., Jn. xix. 29; xxi. 
11; Jas. iii. 8; trop. in reference to persons, whose 
minds are as it were filled with thoughts and emotions, 
either good or bad, Mt. xxiii. 28; Ro. i. 29; xv. 14; 
2 Pet. ii. 14; Jas. iii. 17, (Prov. vi. 34).* 

μεστόω, -ῶ; (μεστός); fo fill, fill full: γλεύκους μεμεστω- 
μένος, Acts ii. 13. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., al.; 3 Mace. 
v. 1, 10.) * 

μετά, [on its neylect of elision before proper names be- 
ginning with a vowel, and before sundry other words (at 
least in Tdf.’s text) see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. WH. Intr. 
p- 146°; W.§ 5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition, akin to 
μέσος (as Germ. mit to Mitte, mitten) and hence prop. in 
the midst of, amid, denoting association, union, accom- 
paniment; [but some recent etymologists doubt its kinship 
to μέσος ; some connect it rather with ἅμα, Germ. sammt, 
ef. Curtius § 212; Vaniéek p. 972]. It takes the gen. and 
ace. (in the Grk. poets also the dat.). [On the distine- 
tion between μετά and σύν, see σύν, init. ] 

I. with the Genitive (Sept. for ΠΝ, DY, WM, ete.); 
among, with, [ef. W. 376 (352) sq.]; 1. amid, 
among ; a. prop.: μετὰ τῶν νεκρῶν, among the dead, 
Lk. xxiv. 5 (μετὰ νεκρῶν κείσομαι, Eur. Hee. 209; θάψετέ 
με μετὰ τῶν πατέρων μου, Gen. xlix. 29 Sept.; μετὰ ζώντων 
εἶναι, to be among the living, Soph. Phil. 1312); doyi- 
ζεσθαι μετὰ ἀνόμων, to be reckoned, numbered, among 
transgressors, Mk. xv. 28 [GT WH om. Tr br. the vs.] 
and Lk. xxii. 37, fr. Is. lili. 12 (where Sept. ἐν ἀνόμοις) ; 
μετὰ τῶν θηρίων εἶναι, Mk. i. 13; γογγύζειν μετ᾽ ἀλλήλων, 
Jn. νἱ. 48; σκηνὴ τοῦ θεοῦ μετὰ τ. ἀνθρώπων, Rev. xxi. 3; 
add, Mt. χχῖν. 51; xxvi.58; ΜΚ. xiv.54; Lk. xii.46; Jn. 
xviii. 5, 18; Acts i. 26, ete. b. trop.: μετὰ διωγμῶν, 
amid persecutions, Mk. x. 30 (μετὰ κινδύνων, amid perils, 
Thue. 1, 18); ἡ ἀγάπη μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν, love among us, mutual 
love, 1 Jn. iv. 17 [al. understand μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν here of the 
sphere or abode, and connect it with the verb; cf. De 
Wette, or Huther, or Westcott,inloc.]. Henceused 2. 
of association and companionship, with (Lat. 
cum; Germ. mit, often also δεῖ) ; a. after verbs of 
going, coming, departing, remaining, etc., w. 
the gen. of the associate or companion: Mt. xx. 20; 
xxvi. 36; Mk. i. 29; 111. 7; xi. 11; xiv.17; Lk. vi. 17: 
xiv. 81; Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54; Gal. 11. 1; Jesus the Mes 
siah it is said will come hereafter pera τῶν ἀγγέλων, Mt. 
xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38; 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Th. i. 7; on the 
other hand, w. the gen. of the pers. to whom one joins 
himself as a companion: Mt. v. 41; Mk. νυ. 24; Lk. ii. 
51; Rev. xxii. 12; ἄγγελοι per’ αὐτοῦ, Mt. xxv. 31; pera 
τινος, contextually i. 4. with one as /eader, Mt. xxv. 10; 


μετά 


xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43; Acts vii. 45. περιπατεῖν μετά 
τινος, to associate with one as his follower and adherent, 
Jn. vi. 66; γίνομαι μ. Twos, to come into fellowship and 
intercourse with, become associated with, one: Mk. xvi. 
10; Acts vii. 38; ix. 19; xx. 18. παραλαμβάνειν τινὰ 
μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, to take with or to one’s self as an attend- 
ant or companion: Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. 33; 
ἄγειν, 2 Tim. iv. 11; ἔχειν μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, to have with one’s 
self: τινά, Mt. xv. 30; xxvi. 11; Mk. ii. 19; xiv. 7; 
dn. xii. 8; τί, Mk. viii. 145 λαμβάνειν, Mt. xxv. 33 ἀκο- 
λουθεῖν μετά τινος, see ἀκολουθέω, 1 and 2, [ef. W. 233 
sq. (219)]. Ὁ. εἶναι μετά twos is used in various 
senses, a. prop. of those who associate with one and 
accompany him wherever he goes: in which sense the 
disciples of Jesus are said to be (or to have been) with 
him, Mk. iii. 14; Mt. xxvi.69, 71; Lk. xxii. 59, cf. Mk. 
v.18; with ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς added, Jn. xv. 27; of those who at 
a particular time associate with one or accompany him 
anywhere, Mt. v. 25; Jn. iii. 26; ix.40; xii. 17; xx. 
24,26; 2 Tim.iv.11; sometimes the ptep. ὦν, ὄντα, etc., 
must be added mentally: Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. ix. 8; Jn. 
Xviil. 265 οἱ (ὄντες) pera τινος, his attendants or com- 
panions, Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 25; Lk. vi. 3; Acts xx. 34; 
sc. ὄντες, Tit. iii. 15. Jesus says that he is or has been 
with his disciples, Jn. xiii. 33; xiv. 9; and that, to ad- 
vise and help them, Jn. xvi. 4; Mt. xvii. 17, (Mk. ix. 
19 and Lk. ix. 41 πρὸς ὑμᾶς), even as one whom they could 
be said to have with them, Mt. ix. 15; Lk. v. 34; just 
as he in turn desires that his disciples may hereafter be 
with himself, Jn. xvii. 24. ships also are said 10 be with 
one who is travelling by vessel, i. e. to attend him, Mk. 
iv. 36. β. trop. the phrase [0 be with, see b.] is used 
of God, if heis present to guide and help one: Jn. iii. 2; 
viii. 29; xvi.32; Acts vii.9; χ. 38: 2Co.xiii.11; Phil. 
iv. 9; with εἶναι omitted, Mt. i. 23; Lk. i. 28; Ro. xv. 
33; here belongs ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς per αὐτῶν sc. dv, by 
being present with them by his divine assistance [cf. W. 
376 (353); Green p. 218], Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4, [ef. h. 
below]; and conversely, πληρώσεις pe εὐφροσύνης μετὰ 
τοῦ προσώπου σου 80. ὄντα, i. 6. being in thy presence [yet 
οἵ. W. 376 (352) note], Acts ii. 28 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11; 
ἡ χεὶρ κυρίου is used as a substitute for God himself (by 
a Hebraism [see χείρ, sub fin.]) in Lk. i. 66; Acts xi. 21; 
of Christ, who is to be present with his followers by his 
divine power and aid: Mt. xxviii. 20; Acts xviii. 10, (μέ- 
νειν pera is used of the Holy Spirit as a perpetual helper, 
Jn. xiv.16 RG); at the close of the Epistles, the writers 
pray that there may be with the readers (i. e. always 
present to help them) —6 θεός, 2 Co. xiii. 11; —6 κύριος, 
2 Th. iii. 16; 2 Tim. iv. 22;— ἡ χάρις τοῦ x. Ἰησοῦ Xp. 
(where ἔστω must be supplied [cf. W. § 64, 2b.; B.§ 129, 
22]), Ro. xvi. 20, 24 [RG]; 1Co. xvi. 23; 2 Co. xiii. 18 
(14); Gal. vi. 18; Phil.iv. 23; 1 Th. v. 28; 2 Th. iii. 18; 
Philem. 25; Rev. xxii. 21; —# χάρις simply, Eph. vi. 24; 
Col. iv.18; 1 Tim. vi. 21 (22); Tit. iii.15; Heb. xiii. 25; 
2 ὅπ. 3; —9 ἀγάπη pov, 1 Co. xvi. 24; the same phrase 
is used also of truth, compared to a guide, 2 Jn. 2. y- 
opp. to εἶναι κατά τινος, to be with one i.e. on one’s side: 


403 


μετὰ 


Mt. xii. 80; Lk. xi. 23, (and often in class. Grk.); simi- 
larly μένειν μετά τινος, to side with one steadfastly, 1 Jn. 
ii. 19. c. with the gen. of the person who is another’s 
associate either in acting or in his experiences; so after 
verbs of eating, drinking, supping, ete.: Mt. viii. 11; ix. 
11; xxiv. 49; xxvi. 18, 23, 29; Mk. xiv. 18, 20; Lk. v. 
30; vii. 36; xxii. 11, 15; xxiv.30; Jn. xiii. 18; Gal. ii. 
12; Rev. iii. 20, ete. ; γρηγορεῖν, Mt. xxvi. 38,40; χαίρειν, 
κλαίειν, Ro. xii. 15; εὐφραίνεσθαι, Ro. xv. 10; παροικεῖν, 
Heb. xi. 9; δουλεύειν, Gal. iv. 25; βασιλεύειν, Rev. xx. 4, 
6; ζῆν, Lk. ii. 36; ἀποθνήσκειν, In. xi. 16; βάλλεσθαι εἰς 
τὴν γῆν, Rev. xii. 9; κληρονομεῖν, Gal. iv. 30; συνάγειν, Mt. 
xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23,and otherexx. ἃ. with a gen. of the 
pers. with whom one (of two) does anything mutually 
or by turns: so after συναίρειν λόγον, to make a reckon- 
ing, settle accounts, Mt. xviii. 23; xxv. 19; συνάγεσθαι, 
Mt. xxviii. 12; Jn. xviii. 2; συμβούλιον ποιεῖν, Mk. iii. 6; 
λαλεῖν (see λαλέω, 5); συλλαλεῖν, Mt. xvii. 3; Acts xxv. 
12; μοιχεύειν, Rev. ii. 22; μολύνεσθαι, Rev. xiv. 4; πορ- 
νεύειν, Rev. xvii. 2; xviii. 3,9; μερίζομαι, Lk. xii. 13; 
after verbs of disputing, waging war, contend- 
ing at law: πολεμεῖν, Rev. ii. 16; xii. 7 (where Rec. 
κατά); xiii. 4; xvii. 14, (so for” Dy 0m), 1S. xvii. 33; 
1 K. xii. 24, a usage foreign to the native Greeks, who 
say πολεμεῖν τινι, also πρός τινα, ἐπί τινα, to wage war 
against one; but πολεμεῖν μετά τινος, to wage war with one 
as an ally, in conjunction with, Thue. 1,18; Xen. Hell. 
7,1, 27; [ef. B. § 133, 8; W. § 28,1; 214 (201); 406 
(379) note]); πόλεμον ποιεῖν, Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 
7; xix. 19, (soin Lat. bellare cum ete. Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33; 
bellum gerere, Cic. de divinat. 1,46); ζήτησις ἐγένετο, Jn. 
ili. 25; ζητεῖν, Jn. xvi. 19; κρίνεσθαι, κρίματα ἔχειν, 1 Co. 
vi. 6 sq.; after verbs and phrases which indicate mutual 
inclinations and pursuits, the entering into agreement 
or relations with, ete.; as εἰρηνεύειν, εἰρήνην διώκειν, Ro. 
xii. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 22; Heb. xii. 14; φίλος, Lk. xxxiii. 
12; συμφωνεῖν, Mt. xx. 2; μερὶς μετά τινος, 2 Co. vi. 15; 
ἔχειν μέρος, Jn. xiii. 8; συγκατάθεσις, 2 Co. νἱ. 16; κοινω- 
νίαν ἔχειν, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6 sq.; αἰτία (see the word, 3), Mt. 
xix. 10. e. of divers other associations of persons 
or things;— where the action or condition expressed 
by the verb refers to persons or things besides those 
specified by the dat. or ace. (somewhat rare in Grk. auth., 
as ἰσχύν τε καὶ κάλλος μετὰ ὑγιείας λαμβάνειν, Plat. rep. 9, 
p- 591 b. [ef. W. § 47, h.]): εἶδον (Rec. εὗρον) τὸ παιδίον 
μετὰ Μαρίας, Mt. ii. 11; ἀνταπυδοῦναι .... ipiv... ped 
ἡμῶν, 2 Th.i.6 sq.; after ἐκδέχεσθαι, 1 Co. xvi. 11; after 
verbs of sending, Mt. xxii. 16; 2 Co. viii. 18. ἀγάπη μετὰ 
πίστεως, Eph. vi. 23; ἐν πίστει. .. μετὰ σωφροσύνης, 1 
Tim. ii. 15; ἡ εὐσέβεια μετὰ αὐταρκείας, 1 Tim. vi. 6; in 
this way the term which follows is associated as sec- 
ondary with its predecessor as primary; but when καί 
stands between them they are co-ordinated. Col. i. 
11; 1 Tim.i. 14. of mingling one thing with another, 
μίγνυμί τι μετά τινος (in class. auth. ri τινι [ef. B. § 133, 
8]): Lk. xiii. 1; pass. Mt. xxvii. 34. f. with the gen. 
of mental feelings desires and emotions, of bodily move- 
ments, and of other acts which are so to speak the at- 


μετά 


404 


μεταδίδωμε 


tendants of what is done or occurs; so that in this way | τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβ. Mt. i. 12; μ' τὴν θλίψιν, Mt. xxiv. 


the characteristic of the action or occurrence is de- 
scribed, — which in most cases can be expressed by a 
cognate adverb or participle [cf. W. ἃ. 5.1: μετὰ αἰδοῦς, 
1 Tim. ii. 9; Heb. xii. 28 [Rec.]; αἰσχύνης, Lk. xiv. 9; 
ἡσυχίας, 2 Th. iii. 12; χαρᾶς, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16; 
τ νὴ 53. Χ Ἐ2: XXEV. Os) ἘΠΙΙ τ 29!) 1 ΠΗ ἃ. 6: 
Heb. x. 34; προθυμίας, Acts xvii. 11; φόβου x. τρόμου, 2 
Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi.5; Phil. ii. 12; φόβου x. χαρᾶς, Mt. 
XXvili. 8; πραὔτητος x. φόβου, 1 Pet. iii. 16 (15); παρρησίας, 
Acts ii. 29; iv. 29, 31; xxviii. 31; Heb. iv. 16; εὐχαρι- 
στίας, Acts xxiv. 3; Phil. ἵν. ὁ; 1 Tim. iv. 3 sq.; ἀλη- 
θινῆς καρδίας, Heb. x. 22; ταπεινοφροσύνης κτλ., Eph. iv. 
2; Acts xx. 19; ὀργῆς, Mk. iii. 5; εὐνοίας, Eph. vi. 7; 
Bias, Acts v.26; xxiv. 7 Rec.; μετὰ δακρύων, with tears, 
Mk. ix. 24 [Β G WH (rejected) mrg.]; Heb.v. 7; xii. 17, 
(Plat. apol. p. 34 c.); εἰρήνης, Acts xv. 33; Heb. xi. 51; 
ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν, 1 Tim. iv. 14 [W.u.s.]; φωνῆς peyd- 
Ans, Lk. xvii. 15; νηστειῶν, Acts xiv. 23; ὅρκου or ὁρκωμο- 
σίας, Mt. xiv. 7; xxvi. 72; Heb. vii. 21; θορύβου, Acts 
xxiv. 18; παρακλήσεως, 2 Co. viii. 4; παρατηρήσεως, Lk. 
xvii. 20; σπουδῆς, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 39; ὕβρεως x. ζημίας, 
Acts xxvii. 10; φαντασίας, xxv. 23; ἀφροῦ, Lk. ix. 39; to 
this head may be referred μετὰ κουστωδίας, posting the 
guard, Mt. xxvii. 66 [so W. (1. 6.) et al. (cf. Meyer ad loc.); 
others ‘in company with the guard’; cf. Jas. Morison ad 
loc.; Green p. 218]. g. after verbs of coming, depart- 
ing, sending, with gen. of the thing with which one is fur- 
nished or equipped: μετὰ δόξης x. δυνάμεως, Mt. xxiv. 30; 
Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27; ἐξουσίας x. ἐπιτροπῆς, Acts 
XXVi. 12; μαχαιρῶν x. ξύλων, Mt. xxvi. 47,55; Mk. xiv. 
43, 48; Lk. xxii. 52; φανῶν x. ὅπλων, Jn. xviii. 3; μετὰ 
σάλπιγγος, Mt. xxiv. 31 [ef. B. § 132,10]. where an in- 
strumental dat. might have been used [cf. W. § 31, 8 d.], 
μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ ἐξάγειν τινά, Acts xiii. 17. ες 
in imitation of the Hebr.: ἔλεος ποιεῖν μετά τινος, to show 
mercy toward one, and μεγαλύνειν ἔλ. μ. τ. to magnify, 
show great, mercy toward one; see τὸ ἔλεος, 1. To this 
head many refer ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς μετ᾽ αὐτῶν, Acts xiv. 
27; xv. 4, but see above, 2 b. β. 

11. with the Accusative [W. § 49, f.]; 1. prop. 
into the middle of, into the midst of, among, after verbs of 
coming, bringing, moving; so esp. in Hom. 2. it 
denotes (following accompaniment), sequence, i. e. the 
order in which one thing follows another ; a. in order 
of Place; after, behind, (so fr. Hom. down); once in 
the N. T. [W. u. 5.7: Heb. ix. 3 (Judith ii. 4). b. in 
order of Time; after (Sept. for Inxs, “INN, 7/2, ete.): 
μεθ᾽ ἡμέρας ἕξ, after six days (had passed), Mt. xvii. 1; 
Mk. ix. 2; add, Mt. xxvi. 2; Mk. xiv. 1 Ibe se OF LE τὸ 
46, etc., ef. Fritzsche, Com. on Mt. p- 22 sq.3 per’ οὐ ποὰ- 
as ἡμέρας, Lk. χν. 18; μετά τινας ἡμ., Acts xv. 36; xxiv. 
24; οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας, not long after these 
days [A. V. not many days hence], Acts i. 5, cf. De Wette 
ad loc. and W. 161 (152); [B. § 127, 4]; p. τρεῖς μῆνας, 
Acts xxviii. 11; . ἔτη τρία, Gal. i. 18, ete.; p. χρόνον 
πολύν, Mt. xxv. 19; μ. τοσοῦτον yp. Heb. iv. 7. added to 
the names of events or achievements, and of festivals: μ. 


29; Mk. xiii. 24; add, Mt. xxvii. 53; Acts x. 37; xx. 290 
2 Pet. 1. 15} μ. τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν, Acts xiii. 15; μ. μίαν x. 
δευτέραν νουθεσίαν, Tit. iii. 10; μ. τὸ πάσχα, Acts xii. 4 
οἵ. xx. 6; with the names of persons or things having the 
notion of time associated with them: μετὰ τοῦτον, αὐτόν, 
ete., Acts v. 37; vii. δ; xiii. 25; xix. 4; μ. τὸν νόμον, 
Heb. vii. 28; μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον, after the morsel was taken, 
Jn. xiii. 27 [ef. B. § 147, 26]; foll. by the neut. demonstr. 
pron. [ef. W. 540 (503) ]: μετὰ τοῦτο, Jn. ii. 12; xi. 7, 11; 
xix. 28; Heb. ix. 27; [Rev. vii. 1 LT Tr WH]; pera 
ταῦτα [οἷ. W.162 (153) ], Mk. xvi. 12; Lk.v.27; x.1; xii. 
4 [W. u.s.J; xvii. 8; xviii.4; Acts vii. 7; xiii. 20; xv. 
16; xviii. 1; Jn. iii. 22; v.1, 143 vi. 1; vii. 1; xiii. 7; 
xix. 38; xxi. 1; Heb.iv.8; 1 Pet. 1.11; Rev.i.19; iv. 
1; vii. 1 [Rec.], 95 ix. 12; xv. 5; xviii. 1; xix. 1; xx. 
3, and very often in Grk. writ. it stands before the neut. 
of adjectives of quantity, measure, and time: per’ οὐ πολύ, 
not long after [R. V. after no long time], Acts xxvii. 14; 
μετὰ μικρόν, shortly after [A. V. after a little while}, Mt. 
xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 70; μετὰ βραχύ, Lk. xxii. 58; also be- 
fore infinitives with the neut. art. (Lat. postquam with a 
finite verb, [ef. B. § 140,11; W. § 44, 6]);—the aorist 
inf.: Mt. xxvi. 32; Mk.i.14; xiv. 28; xvi.19; Lk. xii. 
5; xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; Acts i.3; vii.4; x. 
41 xv. 15... exe 1; Conxi 2 be ΕΓΟΡῚ x26. 

III. In composition, μετά denotes 1. associa- 
tion, fellowship, participation, with: as in μεταδιδόναι, 
μεταλαμβάνειν, μετέχειν, μετοχή. 2. exchange, trans- 
fer, transmutation; (Lat. trans,Germ. um): μεταλλάσσω, 
μεταμέλομαι [ Prof. Grimm prob. means here peravoéw; see 
3 and in μεταμέλομαι], μετοικίζω, μεταμορφόω, etc. 3. 
after: μεταμέλομαι. Cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 639. 

μετα-βαίνω ; fut. μεταβήσομαι; 2 aor. μετέβην, impy. 
μετάβηθι and (in Mt. xvii. 20 LT Tr WI) μετάβα (see 
ἀναβαίνω, init.); pf. μεταβέβηκα; fr. Hom. down; fo pass 
over from one place to another, to remove, depart: foll. by 
ἀπό w. agen. of the place, Mt. viii. 34; ἐξ οἰκίας eis οἰκίαν 
[ef. W.§ 52, 4. 10], Lk. x. 7; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου πρὸς τὸν πα- 
τέρα, Jn. xiii. 1; ἐντεῦθεν, In. vii. 3; ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xi. 1; 
xii. 9; xv. 29; Acts xvili. 7; ἐντεῦθεν], T Tr WH ἔνθεν 
ἐκεῖ (for ἐκεῖσε [cf. W. § 54, 7; B. 71 (62)]), of a thing, 
i. q. to be removed, Mt. xvii. 20; metaph. ἐκ τοῦ θανατου 
eis τὴν ζωήν, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14." 

μετα-βάλλω : prop. to turn round; to turn about; pass. 
and mid. to turn one’s self about, change or transform one’s 
self; trop. to change one’s opinion; [Mid., pres. ptep.] 
μεταβαλλόμενοι [ (2 aor. ptep. βαλόμενοι Tr WH)] ἔλεγον, 
they changed their minds and said, Acts xxviii. 6 (μετα- 
βαλόμενος λέγεις, having changed your mind you say, Plat. 
Gorg. 481 e.; in the same sense, Thuc., Xen., Dem.).* 

pet-Gyw; pres. pass. μετάγομαι; to transfer, lead over, 
(Polyb., Diod., al.) ; hence univ. to direct [A. V. to turn 
about]: Jas. iii. 3 sq.* 

μετα-δίδωμι ; 2 aor. subj. μεταδῶ, impv. 3 pers. sing. 
peraddra, inf. μεταδοῦναι : [fr. Theogn., Hdt. down]; to 
share a thing with any one | see μετά, III. 1], to impart: 
absol. ὁ μεταδιδούς, he that imparteth of his substance, Ro. 


μετάθεσις 


xii. 8, οὗ, Fritzsche ad loc.; τινί, Eph. iv. 28; τινί τι (a 
constr. somewhat rare in Grk. auth. [Hdt. 9, 34 ete.], 
with whom μεταδ. τινί τινος is more common; cf. Mat- 
thiae ii. p. 798; [W. § 30,7 b.; B. § 132, 8]), Ro.i. 11; 
1 Th. ii. 8; the ace. evident from the preceding context, 
LK. iii. 11.* 

μετάθεσις, -ews, ἡ, (μετατίθημι) ; 1. a transfer: from 
one place to another (Diod. 1, 23); τινός (gen. of obj.), 
the translation of a person to heaven, Heb. xi. 5. 2. 
change (of things instituted or established, as ἱερωσύνης, 
νόμου) : Lleb. vii. 12; τῶν σαλευομένων, Heb. xii. 27. 
(Thue. 5, 29; Aristot., Plut.) * 

pet-aipw: 1 aor. μετῆρα ; 1. trans. fo lift up and 
remove from one place to another, to transfer, (Eur., 
Theophr., al.). 2. inthe N. T. intrans. (cf. W. § 38, 
1; [B.§ 130, 4]) to go away, depart, (Germ. aufbrechen) : 
ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xiii. 53 (Gen. xii. 9 Aq.) ; foll. by ἀπό w. gen. 
of place, Mt. xix. 1.* 

μετα-καλέω, -@: Mid., 1 aor. μετεκαλεσάμην; 1 fut. μετα- 
καλέσομαι; to call from one place to another, to summon, 
(Hos. xi. 1 sq.; Plat. Ax. fin.) ; mid. to call to one’s self, 
tosend for: τινά, Acts vii. 14; x. 32; xx.17; xxiv. 25.* 

peta-Kivew, -@: fo move from a place, to move away: 
Deut. xxxii. 30; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Pass. pres. 
ptep. μετακινούμενος ; trop. ἀπὸ τῆς ἐλπίδος, from the hope 
which one holds, on which one rests, Col. i. 23.* 

μετα-λαμβάνω ; impf. μετελάμβανον ; 2 aor. inf. pera- 
λαβεῖν, ptep. μεταλαβών ; [see pera, III. 1; fr. Pind. and 
Hadt. down]; to be or to be made a partaker: gen. of the 
thing, 2 Tim. ii. 6; Heb. vi. 7; xii. 10; τροφῆς, to par- 
take of, take [some] food, Acts ii. 46; xxvii. 33 sq. [in 
34 Ree. προσλαβεῖν] ; w. acc. of the thing, fo get, find (a 
whole): καιρόν, Acts xxiv. 25; on the constr. w. gen. and 
ace. see Kriiger § 47, 15; οἵ. W. § 30, 8.* 

μετά-ληψις (LT Tr WH -λημψις [see M, p]), -ews, 7, 
(μεταλαμβάνω), a taking, participation, (Plat., Plut., al.) : 
of the use of food, eis μετάλ. to be taken or received, 1 
Tim. iv. 3.* 

μετ-αλλάσσω: 1 aor. μετήλλαξα; fr. Hdt. down; [not 
in Sept., yet nine times in 2 Macc.; also 1 Esdr. i. 31]; 
to exchange, change, [ef. pera, III. 2]: τὶ ἔν τινι, one thing 
with (for) another (on this constr. see ἀλλάσσω), Ro. i. 
25; τὶ eis τι, one thing into another, Ro. i. 26.” 

μετα-μέλομαι ; impf. μετεμελόμην; Pass., 1 aor. μετεμε- 
λήθην; 1 fut. μεταμεληθήσομαι ; (fr. μέλομαι, mid. of μέλω); 
tr. Thue. down: Sept. for 0M); a depon. pass.; prop. it 
is a care to one afterwards [see μετά, III. 2], i. 6. it repents 
one; to repent one’s self [in R. V. uniformly with this 
reflexive rendering (exc. 2 Co. vii. 8, where regret) ]: 
Mt. xxi. 29, 32; xxvii. 3; 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. vii. 21 fr. 
Ps. cix. (cex.) 4.* 

|Syn. μεταμέλομαι, μετανοέω: The distinctions so 
often laid down between these words, to the effect that the 
former expresses a n.erely emotional change the latter a 
change of choice, the former has reference to particu- 
lars the latter to the entire life, the former signifies 
nothing but regret even though amounting to remorse, 
the latter that reversal of moral purpose known as re pent- 
ance—seem hardly to be sustained by usage. But that 


405 


μετανοια 


μετανοέω is the fuller and nobler term, expressive of moral 
action and issues, is indicated not only by its derivation, but 
by the greater frequency of its use, by the fact that it is often 
employed in the impv. (μεταμέλομαι never), and by its con- 
struction with ἀπό, ἐκ, (cf. 7 εἰς θεὸν μετάνοια, Acts xx. 21). 
Cf. Trench, N.T. Syn. ὃ Ixix.; esp. Gataker, Adv. Post. xxix ] 

μετα-μορφόω, -ῶ : Pass., pres. μεταμυρφοῦμαι; 1 aor. 
μετεμορφώθη ; to change into another form [cf. pera, III. 
2], to transfigure, transform: μετεμορφώθη, of Christ, his 
appearance was changed (A. V. he was transfigured], i. 2. 
was resplendent with a divine brightness, Mt. xvii. 2; Mk. 
ix. 2 (for which Lk. ix. 29 gives ἐγένετο τὸ εἶδος τοῦ προσ- 
ὦπου αὐτοῦ ἕτερον); of Christians: τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μετα- 
μορφούμεθα, we are transformed into the same image (of 
consummate excellence that shines in Christ), reproduce 
the same image, 2 Co. iii. 18; on the simple ace. after 
verbs of motion, change, division, ef. Bos, Ellips. (ed. 
Schaefer), p. 679 sqq.; Matthiae § 409; [Jelf § 636 obs. 
2; ef. B. 190 (164); 396 (339); W. § 32,5]; used of 
the change of moral character for the better, Ro. xii. 2; 
with which compare Sen. epp. 6 init., intelligo non emen- 
dari me tantum, sed transfigurari. ([Diod.4, 81; Plut. 
de adulat. et amic. 7; al.]; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 10 sub 
fin. ; leg. ad Gaium § 13; Athen. 8 p. 334¢.; Ael. v. h. 
1,1; Leian. as. 11.) [Syn. ef. μετασχηματίζω.] 

μετα-νοέω, -@; fut. μετανοήσω ; 1 aor. μετενόησα; fr. 
[Antipho], Xen. down; Sept. several times for 003; to 
change one’s mind, i. e. to repent (to feel sorry that one 
has done this or that, Jon. iii. 9), of having offended 
some one, Lk. xvii. 3 sq.; with ἐπί τινε added (dat. of 
the wrong, Hebr. Sy, Am. vii. 3; Joel ii. 13; Jon. iii. 
10; iv. 2), of (on account of) something (so Lat. me 
paenitet alicuius rei), 2 Co. xii. 21; used esp. of those 
who, conscious οὗ their sins and with manifest tokens 
of sorrow, are intent on obtaining God’s pardon; to 
repent (Lat. paenitentiam agere): petavo® ἐν σάκκῳ 
καὶ σποδῷ, clothed in sackcloth and besprinkled with 
ashes, Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 13. to change one’s mind for 
the better, heartily to amend with abhorrence of one’s past 
sins: Mt. iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15, (ef. Mt. iii. 6 ἐξομο- 
λογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν : ib. 8 and Lk. iii. 8 καρποὺς 
ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας, i. 6. conduct worthy of a heart 
changed and abhorring sin); [Mt. xi. 20; Mk. vi. 12]; 
Lk. xiii. 8,5; xv. 7,10; xvi. 30; Acts ii. 38; iii. 19; 
xvii. 30; Rev. ii. 5, 16; iii. 3,19; on the phrase μετανοεῖν 
εἰς τὸ κήρυγμά τινος, Mt. xii. 41 and Lk. xi. 32, see εἰς, B. 
II. 2 d.; [W. 397 (371)]. Since τὸ μετανοεῖν expresses 
mental direction, the termini from which and to which 
may be specified: ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας, to withdraw or turn 
one’s soul from, ete. [οἵ W. 622 (577); esp. B. 322 
(277)], Acts viii. 22; ἔκ τινος, Rev. ii. 21 sq.; ix. 20 sq.; 
xvi. 11 (see ἐκ, I. 6; [ef. B. 327 (281), and W. u. s.]); 
μετανοεῖν x. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν, Acts xxvi. 20; foll. 
by an inf. indicating purpose [W. 318 (298)], Rev. xvi. 
9. [Syn. see μεταμέλομαι.] * 

μετάνοια, -olas, 9, (ueravoew), a change of mind: as it 
appears in one who repents of a purpose he has formed 
or of something he has done, Heb. xii. 17 on which see 
εὑρίσκω, 3 ([ Thue. 3, 36, 3]; Polyb. 4,66, 7; Plut. Peric. 


μεταξυ 


ce. 10; mor. p. 26a.; τῆς ἀδελφοκτονίας μετάνοια, Joseph. 
antt. 13, 11, 3); esp. the change of mind of those who 
have begun to abhor their errors and misdeeds, and 
have determined to enter upon a better course of life, 
so that it embraces both a recognition of sin and sorrow 
for it and hearty amendment, the tokens and effects of 
which are good deeds (Lact. 6, 24, 6 would have it ren- 
dered in Lat. by resipiscentia), [A. V. repentance]: Mt. 
iii. 8, 11; Lk. iii. 8, [16 Lchm.]; xv. 7; xxiv. 47; Acts 
xxvi. 20; βάπτισμα μετανοίας, a baptism binding its sub- 
jects to repentance [W. § 30, 28.], ΜΚ. 1. 43; Lk. iii. 
3; Acts xiii. 24; xix.4; [ἡ εἰς (τὸν) θεὸν per. Acts xx. 
21, see μετανοέω, fin.]; διδόναι τινὶ μετάνοιαν, to give one 
the ability to repent, or to cause him to repent, Acts v. 
31; xi.18; 2 Tim. ii. 25; τινὰ εἰς μετάνοιαν καλεῖν, Lk. v. 
32, and Ree. in Mt. ix. 13; Mk. ii. 17; ἄγειν, Ro. ii. 4 
(Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 10 fin.); dvaxawifew, Heb. vi. 6; χω- 
ρῆσαι εἰς perav. to come to the point of repenting, or be 
brought to repentance, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [but see χωρέω, 1 fin.]; 
per. ἀπὸ νεκρῶν. ἔργων, that change of mind by which we 
turn from, desist from, ete. Heb. vi. 1 [B. 322 (277)]; 
used merely of the im proved spiritual state re- 
sulting from deep sorrow for sin, 2 Co. vii. 9 sq. (Sir. 
xliv. 16; Sap. xi. 24 (23); xii. 10,19; Or. Man. 7 sq. [(ef. 
Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. p. lxii. sq.)]; Philo, quod det. pot. 
insid. § 26 init.; Antonin. 8,10; [Cebes, tab. 10 fin.].) * 

μεταξύ, (fr. μετά and ξύν, i. q. σύν), adv. ; 1. be- 
tween (in the midst, Hom. Il. 1,156; Sap. xviii. 23), 8. 
adverbially of time, ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, in the mean 
time, cf. ἐν τῷ καθεξῆς (see καθεξῆς) : Jn. iv. 31 (Xen. 
symp. 1,14; with χρόνῳ added, Plat. rep. 5 p. 450 ¢.; 
Joseph. antt. 2, 7,1; 6 μεταξὺ χρόνος, Hdian. 3, 8, 20 
[10 ed. Bekk.; ef. W.592 sq. (551) ]). b. like a prep. 
w. a gen. [cf. W. 54, 6]: of place [fr. Hdt. 1, 6 down], 
Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; xvi. 26; Acts xii. 6; of par- 
ties, Mt. xviii. 15; Actsxv.9; Ro. ii. 15. 2. acc. 
to a somewhat rare usage of later Grk. (Joseph. e. Ap. 
1, 21, 2 [(yet see Miiller ad loc.)]; b. j. 5, 4, 2; Plut. 
inst. Lae. 42; de diser. amici et δά]. c. 22; Theoph. 
ad Autol. 1,8 and Otto in loc.; [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2. 
3; Barn. ep. 13, 5]), after, afterwards: τὸ μεταξὺ σάββ. 
the next (following) sabbath, Acts xiii. 42 [(where see 
Meyer) ].* 

μετα-πέμπω: 1 aor. pass. ptep. μεταπεμφθείς; Mid., 
pres. ptep. μεταπεμπόμενος; 1 aor. μετεπεμψάμην; ils 
to send one after another [see pera, III. 3; cf. Herm. 
ad Vig. p. 639]. 2. like our to send after i. q. to 
send for: μεταπεμφθείς, sent for, Acts x. 29%. Mid. to 
send after for one’s self, cause to be sent for: Acts x. 5, 
29°; xi. 13; [xx.1 T Tr WH]; xxiv. 24, 26; foll. by eis, 
w. an ace. of place, Acts x. 22; xxv. 3. (Gen. xxvii. 45; 
Num. xxiii. 7; 2 Mace. xv. 31; 4 Mace. xii. 8, 6; in prof. 
auth. fr. Hdt. down.) * 

μεταστρέφω: 1 aor. inf. μεταστρέψαι; Pass., 2 aor. 
impv. 3 pers. sing. μεταστραφήτω; 2 fut. μεταστραφήσο- 
μαι; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 357; to turn about, turn 
arourd, [ef. μετά, III. 2]: ri εἴς τι [to turn one thing 
into another], pass., Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31); Jas. 


406 


μετεχω 


iv. 9 [cf. B. 52 (46); (WH txt. μετατρέπω, 4. ν.}}; 1. 4» 
to pervert, corrupt, ri (Sir. xi. 31; Aristot. rhet. 1, 15, 
24 [οἵ. 30 and 3, 11, 6]): Gal. i. 1." 

μετα-σχηματίζω : fut. μετασχηματίσω [cf. B. 37 (32)]; 
1 aor. μετεσχημάτισα; Mid. pres. μετασχηματίζομαι; to 
change the figure of, to transform, [see μετά, 111. 2]: ri, 
Phil. iii. 21 [see below]; mid. foll. by εἴς τινα, to trans- 
form one’s self into some one, to assume one’s appearance, 
2 Co. xi. 13 sq.; foll. by ὥς τις, so as to have the appear- 
ance of some one, 2 Co. xi. 15; μετασχηματίζω τι εἴς τινα, 
to shape one’s discourse so as to transfer to one’s self 
what holds true of the whole class to which one belongs, 
i. e. so as to illustrate by what one says of himself what 
holds true of all: 1 Co. iv. 6, where the meaning is, ‘by 
what I have said of myself and Apollos, I have shown 
what holds true of all Christian teachers.’ (4 Mace. 
ix. 22; Plat. legg. 10 p. 903 e.; [Aristot. de caelo 3, 1 
p- 298°, 31, etc.]; Joseph. antt. 7, 10, 5; 8,11,1; Plut. 
Ages. 14; def. orac. c. 30; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 11]; 
Sext. Empir. 10, p. 688 ed. Fabric. [p. 542, 23 ed. 
Bekk.].)* 

[Syn. μεταμορφόω, μετασχηματίζω: (cf. Phil. iii. 21) 
““μετασχημ. would here refer to the transient condition from 
which, μεταμορῴ. to the permanent state to which, the change 
takes place. Abp. Trench [N. T. Syn. § lxx.], however, sup- 
poses that μετασχήμ. is here preferred to petapopp. as ex- 
pressing ‘transition but no absolute solution of continuity’, 
the spiritual body being developed from the natural, as the 
butterfly from the caterpillar” (Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ‘ De- 
tached Note’ p. 131). See μορφή, fin.] 

μετα-τίθημι ; 1 aor. μετέθηκα; pres. mid. μετατίθεμαι ; 1 
aor. pass. μετετέθην ; to transpose (two things, one of which 
is put in place of the other, [see μετά, III. 27}; 1.6. 1. 
to transfer: τινά foll. by εἰς w. ace. of place, pass., Acts 
vii. 16; without mention of the place, it being well 
known to the readers, Heb. xi. 5 (Gen. v. 24; Sir. 
xliv. 16, ef. Sap. iv. 10). 2. ta change (Hat. 5, 68); 
pass. of an office the mode of conferring which is 
changed, Heb. vii. 12; τὶ εἴς τι, to turn one thing into 
another (τινὰ εἰς πτηνὴν φύσιν, Anth. 11, 367, 2); figura- 
tively, τὴν . - . χάριν eis ἀσέλγειαν, to pervert the grace 
of God to license, i. e. to seek from the grace of God 
an argument in defence of licentiousness, Jude 4 [cf. 
Huther in loc. ]. 3. pass. or [more commonly ] mid., 
to transfer one’s self or suffer one’s self to be transferred, 
i. 6. 10. go or puss over: ἀπό twos ets τι, to fall away or 
desert from one person or thing to another, Gal. i. 6 (cf. 
2 Mace. vii. 24; Polyb. 5, 111, 8; 26, 2,6; Diod. 11, 
4; [6 μεταθέμενος, turncoat, Diog. Laért. 7, 166 cf. 37; 
Athen. 7, 281 d.]).* 

[μετα-τρέπω: 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. μετατρα- 
πήτω; to turn about, fig. to transmute: Jas. iv. 9 WH txt. 
From Hom. down; but “seems not to have been used 
in Attic” (L. and S.).*] 

μετ-έπειτα, adv., fr. Hom. down, afterwards, after that: 
Heb. xii. 17. (Judith ix. 5; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) * 

μετ-έχω; 2 aor. μετέσχον; pf. μετέσχηκα; to be or 
become partaker; to partake: τῆς ἐλπίδος αὐτοῦ, of the 


thing hoped for, 1 Co. ix. 10 Ree., but GL.T Tr WH 


μετεωρίζω 


have rightly restored ἐπ᾿ ἐλπίδι τοῦ μετέχειν, in hope of 
partaking (of the harvest); with a gen. of the thing 
added, 1 Co. ix. 12; x. 21; Heb. ii. 14; φυλῆς ἑτέρας, to 
belong to another tribe, be of another tribe, Heb. vii. 
13; se. τῆς τροφῆς, to partake of, eat, 1 Co. x. 30; yd- 
λακτος, to partake of, feed on, milk, Heb. v. 13; ἐκ τοῦ 
ἑνὸς ἄρτου se. τί or τινός (see ἐκ, I. 2b.), 1 Co. x. 17; ef. 
B. § 132, 8; [W. §§ 28, 1; 30, 8a.].* 

μετ-εωρίζω: [pres. impv. pass. 2 pers. plur. perewpi- 
ζεσθε; (see below)]; (fr. μετέωρος in mid-air, high; 
raised on high; metaph. a. elated with hope, Diod. 13, 
46; lofty, proud, Polyb. 3, 82, 2; 16, 21, 2; Sept. Is. v. 
15. Ὁ. wavering in mind, unsteady, doubtful, in sus- 
pense: Polyb. 24, 10,11; Joseph. antt. 8, 8, 2; Ὁ. j. 4, 2, 
5; Cic. ad Att. 5, 11, 5; 15, 14; hence perewpifw) ; al 
prop. to raise on high (as ναῦν eis τὸ πέλαγος, to put a 
ship [out to sea] up upon the deep, Lat. propellere in 
altwn, Philostr. v. Ap. 6, 12, 3 [ef. Thue. 8, 16, 2]; τὸ 
ἔρυμα, to raise fortifications, Thuc. 4, 90): ἑαυτόν, of 
birds, Ael. ἢ. a. 11, 33; pass. μετεωρίζεσθαι ἢ καπνὸν ἢ 
κονιορτόν, Xen. Cyr. 6, 3,5; of the wind, ἄνεμος ξηρὸς 
μετεωρισθείς, Arstph. nub. 404; and many other exx. 
also in prof. auth.; in Sept. ef. Mic. iv. 1; Ezek. x. 16; 
Obad. 4. 2. metaph. a. to lift up one’s soul, 
raise his spirits; to buoy up with hope; to inflate with 
pride: Polyb. 26, 5,4; 24, 3,6 ete.; joined with φυσᾶν, 
Dem. p. 169, 23; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 35; [quis rer. div. 
her. §§ 14,54; cong. erud. grat. § 23]; pass. to be elated; 
to take on airs, be puffed up with pride: Arstph. av. 1447; 
often in Polyb.; Diod. 11, 32,41; 16,18 ete.; Ps. exxx. 
(cxxxi.) 1; 2 Mace. vii. 34; with the addition of τὴν 
διάνοιαν, v.17. Hence μὴ μετεωρίζεσθε, Lk. xii. 29, some 
(following the Vulg. nolite in sublime tolli) think should 
be interpreted, do not exalt yourselves, do not seek great 
things, (Luth. fahret nicht hoch her) ; but this explanation 
does not suit the preceding context. b. by a meta- 
phor taken from ships that are tossed about on the deep 
by winds and waves, to cause one to waver or fluctuate 
in mind, Polyb. 5, 70, 10; to agitate or harass with cares; 
to render anxious: Philo de monarch. § 6; Schol. ad 
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 914; ad Eur. Or. 1537; hence Lk. xii. 
29 agreeably to its connection is best explained, neither 
be ye anxious, or and waver not between hope and fear 
ΓΑ. V. neither be ye of doubtful mind (with mrg. Or, live 
not in careful suspense) ]. Kuinoel on Lk. 1. ὁ. discusses 
the word at length; and numerous exx. from Philo are 
given in Loesner, Observv. p. 115 sqq.* 

μετοικεσία, -as, 4, (for the better form μετοίκησις, fr. 
μετοικέω [cf. W. 24 (23)]), a removal from one abode to 
another, esp. a foreed removal: with the addition Ba- 
βυλῶνος (on this gen. cf. W. § 30, 2 a.) said of the Baby- 
lonian exile, Mt. i. 11 sq.17. (Sept. for τ) i. 6. mi- 
gration, esp. into captivity; of the Babylonian exile, 2 
K. xxiv. 16; 1 Chr. v. 22; Ezek. xii.11; for na, Obad. 
20; Nah. iii. 10. Elsewh. only in Anthol. 7, 731, 6.) * 

μετ-οικίζω : fut. (Attic) μετοικιῶ [ef. B. 37 (32); W. 
§ 13,1¢.]; 1 aor. μετῴκισα ; to transfer settlers; to cause 
to remove into another land [see μετά, III. 2]: τινά foll. by 


407 


μετρίως 


εἰς w. ace. of place, Acts vii. 4; ἐπέκεινα w. gen. of place 
(Amos v. 27), Acts vii.43. (Thue. 1,12; Arstph., Aris- 
tot., Philo, [Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 19, 3], Plut., Ael.; Sept. 
several times for 7937.) * 

μετοχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (μετέχω), (Vulg. participatio) ; a sharing, 
communwn, fellowship: 2 Co. vi. 14. (Ps. exxi. (exxii.) 
3; Hdt., Anthol., Plut., al.) * 

μέτοχος, -ov, (μετέχω) ; 1. sharing in, partaking 
of, w. gen. of the thing [W. § 30, 8 a.]: Heb. iii. 1; vi. 4; 
xii. 8; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, of his mind, and of the salvation pro- 
cured by him, Heb. iii. 14; cf. Bleek ad loc. 2. a 
partner (in a work, office, dignity): Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. 
xliv. (xlv.) 8); Lk.v. 7. (Hdt., Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) * 

μετρέω, -@; 1 ΔοΥ. ἐμέτρησα; 1 fut. pass. μετρηθήσομαι; 
(μέτρον) ; fr. Hom. Od. 3,179 down; Sept. several times 
for 1319; to measure; i. e. 1. to measure out or 
otf; a. prop. any space or distance with a measurer’s 
reed orrule: τὸν ναόν, τὴν αὐλήν, ete., Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 15, 
17; with τῷ καλάμῳ added, Rey. xxi. 16; ἐν αὐτῷ, i. 6. 
τῷ καλάμῳ, Rev. xi. 1. b. metaph. to judge according 
to any rule or standard, to estimate: ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, 
by what standard ye measure (others) [but the instru- 
mental ἐν seems to point to a measure of capacity; cf. 
W. 388 (363); B. § 133, 19. On the proverb see fur- 
ther below], Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24; pass. to be judged, 
estimated, ibid.; μετρεῖν ἑαυτὸν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, to measure one’s 
self by one’s self, to derive from one’s self the standard 
by which one estimates one’s self, 2 Co. x. 12 [cf. W. § 31, 
8 fin.]. 2. to measure to, mete out to, i. 6. to give 
by measure: in the proverb τῷ αὐτῷ μέτρῳ ᾧ μετρεῖτε 
for (so LT Tr WH) 6 μέτρῳ perp.], i. e., dropping the 
fi., ‘in proportion to your own beneficence,’ Lk. vi. 38. 
[Compe.: dvti-perpéa. | * 

μετρητής [on the accent see Chandler ὃ 51 sq.], -ov, 6, 
(μετρέω), prop. a measurer, the name of a utensil known 
as an amphora, which is a species of measure used for 
liquids and containing 72 sextarii or ξέστοι [i. 6. some- 
what less than nine Eng. gallons; see B. D.s. v. Weights 
and Measures, sub fin. (p. 83507 Am. ed.)] (Hebr. n3, 2 
Chr. iv. 5): Jn. ii. 6. (Polyb. 2, 15,1; Dem. p. 1045, 
7; Aristot. h. a. 8, 9.)* 

μετριοπαθέω, -ῶ; ([οἷ. W. 101 (95)]; fr. μετριοπαθῆς, 
adhering to the true measure in one’s passions or emo- 
tions; ἔφη (viz. Aristotle) τὸν σοφὸν μὴ εἶναι μὲν ἀπαθῆ, 
μετριοπαθὴ δέ, Diog. Laért. 5, 31; μετριοπάθεια, modera- 
tion in passions or emotions, esp. anger and grief, is opp. 
to the ἀπάθεια of the Stoics; fr. μέτριος and πάθος) ; i. 4. 
μετρίως or κατὰ τὸ μέτρον πάσχω, to be affected moderately 
or in due measure ; to preserve moderation in the passions, 
esp. in anger or grief, (Philo de Abrah. § 44; de Josepho 
§ 5; [Joseph. antt. 12, 3, 2; al.]); hence of one who is 
not unduly disturbed by the errors, faults, sins, of others, 
but bears with them gently; like other verbs of emotion 
(cf. Kriiger § 48, 8), with a dat. of the pers. toward whom 
the feeling is exercised: Heb. v. 2; ef. the full discus- 
sion by Bleek ad loc.* 

μετρίως, (μέτριος), adv., [fr. Hdt. down]; a. in 
due measure. b. moderately: οὐ μετρίως, [A. V. 


μέτρον 


sol ἃ little], exceedingly, (Plut. Flam. 9, et al.), Acts 
ΧῈ Pt! 

μέτρον, -ου, τό; Sept. chiefly for 79, [ef. μήτηρ], meas- 
ure; 1. aninstrument for measuring; a. a vessel for 
receiving and determining the quantity of things, whether 
dry or liquid: in proverb. disc., μετρεῖν μέτρῳ, of the 
measure of the benefits which one confers on others, Lk. vi. 
38; μέτρον πεπιεσμένον καὶ σεσαλευμένον, fig. equiv. to most 
abundant requital, ibid. ; πληροῦν τὸ μέτρον τῶν πατέρων, 
to add what is wanting in order to fill up their ancestors’ 
prescribed number of crimes, Mt. xxiii. 32 [see πληρόω, 
2. ἃ.}; ἐκ μέτρου [A. V. by measure; see ἐκ, V. 3] 1. 6. 
sparingly, In. iii. 34 (also ἐν μέτρῳ, Ezek. iv. 11). b. 
a graduated staff for measuring, measuring-rod: Rev. xxi. 
15; with ἀνθρώπου added [man’s measure], such as men 
use, Rev. xxi. 17; hence in proverb. 4156. the rule or stand- 
ard of judgment: Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24. 2. deler- 
mined extent, portion measured off, measure or limit: with 
a gen. of the thing received, Ro. xii. 3; 2 Co. x. 13; 
[Eph. iv. 7]; ἐν μέτρῳ, in proportion to the measure [ef. 
W. § 48, a. 3 Ὁ. and see ἐνέργεια ; al. in due measure], 
Eph. iv. 16; the required measure, the due, fit, measure : 
τῆς ἡλικίας, the proper i. 6. ripe, full age [see ἡλικία, 1 ¢.] 
(of a man), Eph. iv. 13 (ἥβης, Hom. Il. 11, 225; Od. 11, 
317; Solon 5, 52 [ Poet. Min. Gr. (ed. Gaisford) iii. 135 ]).* 

μέτωπον, -ov, τό, (μετά, oy ‘eye’), fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for myn, [lit. the space between the eyes] the fore- 
head: Rev. vii. 3; ix.43 xiii.163 xiv.1,9; xvii.5; xx. 
4; xxii. 4.* 

μέχρι and μέχρις (the latter never stands in the N. T. 
before a consonant, but μέχρι stands also before a vowel 
in Lk. xvi. 16 T Tr WII; see ἄχρι, init.; and on the dis- 
tinction betw. ἄχρι and μέχρι see ἄχρι, fin.), a particle 
indicating the terminus ad quem: as far as, unto, 
until; 1. it has the force of a preposition with 
the gen. [(soevenin Hom.) W.§ 54,6],andis used 8. 
of time: Mt. xiii. 30 RG TWH mrg.; Lk. xvi. 16 T Tr 
WH; Acts xx. 7; 1 Tim. vi. 14; Heb. ix. 10; μ. θανά- 
tov, Phil. ii. 30; μέχρι τῆς σήμερον sc. ἡμέρας, Mt. xi. 23; 
xxviii. 155 μέχρι τέλους, Heb. iii. 6 [here WH ΤΥ τσ. 
br. the clause], 145; dad... μέχρι, Acts x. 30; Ro. v. 14; 
μέχρις οὗ (see ἄχρι, 1 d.; [B. 230 (198) sq.; W. 296 
(278 sq.) ]) foll. by an aor. subjune. having the force of a 
fut. pf. in Lat.: Mk. xiii.30; Gal.iv.19TTrWH. Ὁ. 
of place: ἀπὸ... μέχρι, Ro. xv. 19. c. of measure 
and degree: μέχρι θανάτου, so that he did not shrink even 
from death, Phil. ii. 8 (2 Mace. xiii. 14; Plat. de rep. p. 
361 c. fin.; μ. φόνου, Clem. hom. 1, 11); κακοπαθεῖν p. 
δεσμῶν, 2 Tim. ii. 9; μέχρις αἵματος ἀντικατέστητε, Heb. 
xii. 4. 2. with the force of aconjunction: til, 
foll. by the subj., Eph. iv. 13.* 

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which 
differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov 
denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies 
simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). 
but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing 
according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, pref- 
erence, of some one (hence, as we say technically, in- 


408 


μη 


directly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction 
holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, 
ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. 
non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. 
ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. 
(generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether 
nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 
p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. 
Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. 
§§ 512 sq. p. 739 sqq.; [Jelf §§ 738 sqq.]; Rost § 135; 
Win. §§ 55,56; 2. Franke, De particulis negantibus. 
(two Comm.) Rintel. 1832 sq.; G. F. Gayler, Particu- 
larum Graeci sermonis negativarum accurata disputatio, 
ete. Tub. 1836; E. Priifer, De μή et οὐ particulis epi- 
tome. Vratisl. 1836; [ Gildersleeve in Am. Jour. of Philol. 
vol. i. no. i. p. 45 sqq.; Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s 
Hdbk. to Mod. Grk. ed. 2, App. §§ 82 sqq.]- 

I. As a negative ADVERB; 1. univ.: ᾧ μὴ πά- 
ρεστι ταῦτα, where μή is used because reference is made 
merely to the thought that there are those who lack these 
things, 2 Pet. i. 9; & μὴ ἑώρακεν, which (in my opinion) 
he hath not seen (because they are not visible), Col. ii. 18 
[but here GT Tr WH om.Lbr. μή; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad 
loc.; W.480sq. (448) ]; ἤδη κέκριται, ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν, be- 
cause he hath not believed, represented by the writer as the 
thought τοῦ κρίναντος, Jn. iii. 18 (differently in 1 Jn. v. 10, 
where the faith denied is considered as something positive 
and actual); ἃ μὴ δεῖ, in the judgment of the writer, Tit. 
re 1ΠῈ 2. in deliberative questions with the 
subjunctive: δῶμεν ἢ μὴ δῶμεν, Mk. xii. 14 (πότερον 
βίαν φῶμεν ἢ μὴ φῶμεν εἶναι, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 45); μὴ 
ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακά (for so it would have run had there 
been no anacoluthon; but Paul by the statement which 
he interposes is drawn away from the construction with 
which he began, and proceeds ὅτι ποιήσωμεν κτλ., 80 that 
these words depend on λέγειν in the intervening statement 
[W. 628 (583); B.§ 141, 3]), Ro. iii. 8. 3. in con- 
ditional and final sentences (ef. W. § 55, 2; [B. 344 
(296) sqq-]): ἐὰν μή, unless, if not, see exx. in ἐάν, I. 3c. 
ἐὰν etc. καὶ μή, Mk. xii. 19; ἐὰν ete. δὲ μή, Jas. ii. 14; ἐάν 
τις ἴδῃ - «- μὴ πρὸς θάνατον, 1 Jn. v. 16; εἰ μή, εἰ δὲ μή, 
εἰ δὲ μήγε, οἴο., see εἰ, III. p. 171 sq. To this head be- 
long the formulae that have ἄν or ἐάν as a modifier (W. 
§ 55, 8 6.; [B. § 148, 4]), ὅς, ὅστις, ὅσοι ἄν or ἐὰν μή : Mt 
χ. 14; xi.6; ΜΙ. νὶ. 11; x.15; Lk. vii. 28 ; ix.5; xviii. 
17; Rev. xiii. 15; ὃς ἂν οἴο. καὶ μή, Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk. x. 10; 
és dv... μὴ ἐπὶ πορνείᾳ, Mt. xix. 9 GT Tr WH txt.; of 
the same sort is πᾶν πνεῦμα, ὃ μὴ ὁμολογεῖ, 1 Jn. iv.3. twa 
μή, Mt. vii.1; xvii. 27; Mk. iii. 9; Ro. xi. 25; Gal. v.17; 
vi. 12, ete.; tva... καὶ μή, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Mk. ἵν. 12; Jn. 
vi. 50; xi. 50; 2Co. iv. 7, ete.; iva... μή, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 
ἵνα ὁ - -. μή, In. xii. 46; ἵνα (weakened ; see ἵνα, IT. 2) 
un: after διαστέλλομαι [here L WH txt. émitisdw), Mt 
xvi. 20; τὸ θέλημά ἐστιν, va py, In. vi. 39; οὕτως etc. ἵνα 
6... μή, Jn. ili. 16; παρακαλῶ, iva... καὶ py, | Co. i. 10; 
ὅπως μή. Mt. vi. 18; Actsxx.16; 1Co.i.29; érwsoi... 
pn, Lk. xvi. 26. 4. joined with the Infinitive (W. 
§55,4f.; [B.§§ 140,16; 148,6; cf. Prof. Gildersleeve 


μή 


τι. 8. Ρ. 48 54.}; 58. after verbsof saying, declaring, 
denying, commanding, ete.: ἀποκριθῆναι, Lk. xx. 7; 
ἦν αὐτῷ κεχρηματισμένον μὴ ἰδεῖν, that he should not see, Lk. 
il. 26; χρηματισθέντες μὴ ἀνακάμψαι, Mt. ii. 12; ὦμοσε (av- 
τοῖς) μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι, Heb. iii. 18; after λέγω, Mt. v. 34, 
39; xxii. 23; Mk xii.18; Acts xxi.4; xxiii. 8; Ro. ii. 22; 
xii. 35 κηρύσσω, Ro. ii. 21; γράφω, 1 Co. ν. 9,11; mapay- 
γέλλω, Actsi.4; iv.18; v. 28,40; 1 Co. vii. 10sq.; 1 Tim. 
1.35 vi. 17; παρακαλῶ, Actsix. 38 RG; xix.31; 2Co. vi. 
1; αἰτοῦμαι, Eph. iii. 13; διαμαρτύρομαι, 2 Tim. ii. 14; εὔχο- 
pat, 2 Co. xiii. 7; παραιτοῦμαι, Heb. xii. 19[here WH txt. 
om. py; cf. W.and B.as below]; ἀξιῶ, Acts xv. 38; ἐπι- 
Boo[L T Tr WH βοῶ], Acts xxv. 24; ἀντιλέγω (cf. W. 865, 
2 β.; [Β. 8 148, 13]), Lk. xx. 27 [Tr WH Limrg. λέγω]; 
ἀπαρνοῦμαι (η. ν.), Lk. xxii. 34; also after verbs of decid- 
ing: Lk. xxi. 14; κρίνω, Acts xv. 19; κρίνω τοῦτο, τὸ μή, 
Ro. xiv. 13; 2 Co. ii. 1; θέλω, Ro. xiii. 3; after verbs of 
hindering, avoiding, etc.: ἐγκόπτω (Ree. ἀνακόπτω) 
τινὰ μή, Gal. v. 7 (ef. W. [and B. u.s.; also § 140, 16]) ; 
τοῦ μή, thal... nol, (Lat. ne), after κατέχω, Lk. iv. 42; 
κρατοῦμαι, Lk. xxiv. 16; κωλύω, Acts x. 47; καταπαύω, 
Acts xiv.18; παύω, 1 Pet. iii. 10; ὑποστέλλομαι, Acts xx. 
20, 27; προσέχω μή, Mt. vi. 1; but τοῦ μή is added also 
to other expressions in the sense of Lat. ut ne, that... not: 
Ro. vii. 3; ὀφθαλμοὶ τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, 
Ro. xi. 8, 10. After clauses denoting necessity, ad- 
vantage, power, fitness, μή is used with an inf. 
specifying the thing [B. § 148, 6], καλόν ἐστι μή, 1 Co. vii. 
1; Gal.iv.18; foll. by τὸ μή, Ro. xiv. 21; ἄλογον μή. Acts 
XXV. 275 κρεῖττον ἦν, 2 Pet. ii. 21; ἐξουσία τοῦ [LT Tr 
WH om. τοῦ] μὴ ἐργάζεσθαι, a right to forbear working, 
1 Co. ix. 6; δεῖ, Acts xxvii. 21; οὐ δύναμαι μή, 1 cannot 
but, Acts iv. 20; ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστι τοῦ μή, Lk. xvii. 1 [ef. 
avevdextos |. b. μή with an inf. which has the article 
follows a preposition, to indicate the purpose or end: as, 
πρὸς τὸ py, that... not, 2 Co. iii. 13; 1 Th.ii.9; 2 Th. iii. 
8; εἰς τὸ μή (Lat. in id . . ne), to the end (or intent) that 
...not, Acts vii. 19; 1 Co. x.6; 2 Co. iv. 4; foll. by an 
ace. and inf., 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 7; διὰ τὸ μή, because 

.. not, Mt. xiii. 5 sq.; Mk. iv. 5 sq.; Lk. viii. 6; Jas. 
iv. 2 [οὔ W. 482 (449)], (2 Mace. iv. 19). c. in other 
expressions where an infin. with the art. is used substan- 
tively: τῷ μή (dat. of the cause or reason [cf. W. § 44, 
5; B. 264 (227)]), 2 Co. ii. 13 (12); in the accus., τὸ μή: 
Ro. xiv. 13; 1 Co.iv.6[RG]; 2Co.ii.1; x.2; 1 Th.iv. 
6, cf. 3. d. in sentences expressing consequence 
or result: ὥστε py, so that... nol, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. iii. 
ον» 1 Conn ee Comey 1 ΠῚ 8: 5. μή is 
joined with a Participle ΟΥ̓. 8 δῦ, ὅ σ.; [B. 8.148,7; 
see C. J. Vaughan’s Com. on Ro. ii. 147), a. in sen- 
tences expressing a command, exhortation, purpose, ete. : 
LK. iii. 11; Jn. ix. 39; Acts xv. 38; xx. 29; Ro. viii. 4; xiv. 
3; 2Co. xii.21; Eph. v.27; Phil. i. 28; ii. 4 [here Rec. 
impv.]; 1 Th.iv.5; 2Th.i. 8; 1 Pet. ii.16; Heb. vi. 1; 
xiii. 17, ete. b. in general sentences, in which no defi- 
nite person is meant but it is merely assumed that there 
is some one of the character denoted by the participle: as 
ὁ μὴ dv per ἐμοῦ, he that is not on my side, whoever he is, 


409 


μη 


or if there is any such person, Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23; 
ὁ δὲ μὴ πιστεύων, whoever believeth not, Jn. iii. 18; of μὴ 
ὁμολογοῦντες ᾿Ιησοῦν Xp. if any do not confess, or belong 
to the class that do not confess, 2 Jn. 7; add, Mt. x. 28; 
Lk. vi. 49; xii. 21, 47sq.; xxii. 36; Jn. v.23; x.1; xii. 
48; xiv.24; Ro.iv.5; v.14; x.20; 1Co. vii.38; xi. 22; 
2 Th. i. 8; Jas. ii.13; 1 Jn. ii. 4, ete.; πᾶς ὁ μή. Mt. vii. 
26; (πᾶν δένδρον μή, Mt. iii. 10; vii.19); 1 Jn. iii. 10; 2 
Jn. 9; 2 Th. ii. 12 [here Lmrg. T Tr WH mre. ἅπαντες 
οἱ μή ete.]; μακάριος ὁ pn, Jn. xx. 29; Ro. xiv. 22. Ὁ: 
where, indeed, a definite person or thing is referred to, but 
in such a way that his (its) quality or action (indicated by 
the participle) isdenied in the thought or judgment either 
of the writer or of some other person [ef. esp. W. 484 
(451) ]: τὰ μὴ ὄντα, that are deemed as nothing, 1 Co. i. 28; 
ὡς μὴ λαβών, as if thou hadst not received, 1 Co. iv. 7; ὡς 
μὴ ἐρχομένου μου, as though I were not coming, 1 Co. iv. 
18; ὡς μὴ ἐφικνούμενοι εἰς ὑμᾶς, 2 Co. x. 14; add, 1 Co. 
vii. 29. ἤδει... 
opinion of ὁ εἰδώς), Jn. vi. 64; the same holds true of 
Acts xx. 29; τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα (in the opinion of οἱ μὴ 
σκοποῦντες), 2 Co. iv. 18 (on the other hand, in Heb. xi. 
1, ov βλεπόμ. actually invisible) ; τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 


. τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες (ace. to the 


ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν (μὴ γνόντα is said agreeably 
to the judgment of ὁ ποιήσας), 2 Co. ν. 21 (τὸν οὐ γνόντα 
would be equiv. to ἀγνοοῦντα). in predictions, where it 
expresses the opinion of those who predict: ἔσῃ σιωπῶν 
καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι, Lk. i. 20; ἔσῃ τυφλὸς μὴ βλέπων, 
Acts xiii. 11. where the writer or speaker does ποῦ re- 
gard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing, 
which he wishes to remove from the mind of the reader 
or hearer (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered 
without ete. (Germ. ohne zu with inf.) [ef. B. § 148, 7 b.]: 
ἐξῆλθε μὴ ἐπιστάμενος, ποῦ ἔρχεται, Heb. xi. 8; add, Mt. 
xxii. 12; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but ef. B. § 148, 7¢.)]; Acts v. 
7; xx. 22; Heb.ix.9. where the participles have a con- 
ditional, causal, or concessive force, and may be 
resolved into clauses introduced by if, on condition that, 
etc. : θερίσομεν μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι, Gal. vi. 9; μὴ ὄντος νόμου, 
Ro. v. 13; although: νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες, Ro. ii. 14: μὴ ὧν 
αὐτὸς ὑπὸ νόμον, 1 Co. ix. 20 [Ree.om.]; we have both 
the negative particles in ὃν οὐκ εἰδύτες [or (with LT Tr 
WH) ἰδόντες] . . . μὴ ὁρῶντες, whom being ignorant of 
(in person) [or (ace. to crit. txt.) not having seen]... 
although now not seeing, 1 Pet. i. 8; also with the article: 
τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα (Germ. die doch nicht haben, they that 
have not, etc.), Ro. ii. 14; ὁ δὲ μὴ yeveadoyoupevos, but he, 
although not ete. Heb. vii. 6 ;— or since, because, inasmuch 
as: μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει ov [but GLT Tr WH om. ov; 
ef. B. § 148, 14] κατενόησε τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα νενεκρωμ. (οὐκ 
ἀσθενήσας would be equiv. to δυνατός, strong), Ro. iv. 19; 
πῶς οὗτος γράμματα οἶδε μὴ μεμαθηκώς ; since he has not 
learned [W. 488 (450)], Jn. vii. 15; add, Mt. xviii. 25; 
xxii. 25, 29; Lk. ii. 45; vii. 30; xi. 24; xii. 47; xxiv. 
93; Actsix.26; xvii.6; xxi. 34; xxvii. 7; 2 Co. iii. 14; 
v.19; also with the article: ὁ μὴ γινώσκων τὸν νόμον, since 
it knoweth not the law, Jn. vii. 49; add, Jude 5. d. 
where (with the ptep.) it can be resolved by (being) such 


μή 


(a person) as not, ofsucha sort as not: μὴ ζητῶν τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ 
σύμφορον, 1 Co. x. 33; add, Actsix.9; Gal.iv.8. neut. 
plur. as subst.: τὰ μὴ ὄντα, Ro. iv. 17; τὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα, 
Heb. xii. 27; τὰ μὴ δέοντα, 1 Tim. v.13; τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα, 
Ro. i. 28; 2 Mace. vi. 4, (on the other hand, in ra οὐκ 
ἀνήκοντα, Eph. v. 4 [where L T Tr WH 4 οὐκ ἀνῆκεν], the 
οὐκ coalesces with ἀνήκοντα and forms a single idea, un- 
seemly, unlawful). 6. in independent sentences of 
forbidding, dehorting, admonishing, desiring, etc., μή is 
Prohibitive (cf. W.§ 56,1), Lat. ne, not; a. with 
the 1 pers. plur. of the subjunc. present: μὴ γινώμεθα 
κενόδοξοι, Gal. ν. 26; add, Gal. vi. 9; 1 Th. v.6; 1 Jn. 
111. 18; aorist: Jn. xix. 24; before the word depending 
on the exhortation, 1 Co. v. 8. b. with a present im- 
perative, generally where one is bidden to cease from 
something already begun, or repeated, or continued: Mt. 
vi. 16,19; vii.1; xix.6; Mk. ix. 39; xili.11; Lk. vi. 30; 
Vii. 6,13; viii. 49, 52; χ. 4, 7, 20; Jn. ii. 16; v. 28, 45; 
vi.43; vil. 24; xiv.1,27; xix.21; Actsx.15; xi.9; xx. 
10; Ro. vi. 12; xi. 18, 20; xii. 2 [here L Trmrg. WH 
mrg. give the inf.],14; 1 Co. vi.9; vii.5; 2Co. vi. 14,17; 
Gal. v.1; vi. 7; Eph. iv. 30; Col. iii. 9,19, 21; 1 Th. v. 
19; 2 Th. iii. 15; 1 Tim.iv.14; v. 16,19; Heb. xii. 5; 
xili.2; Jas.i.7,16; 1 Pet.iv. 12,15 sq.; 1Jn.ii. 15; iii. 
13; Rey. v. 5, and very often. ο. with the third per- 
son (nowhere in the N. T. with the second) of the aorist 
impv. where the prohibition relates to something not to 
be begun, and where things about to be done are forbid- 
den : μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω, Mt. xxiv. 18; Lk. xvii. 31; μὴ κα- 
ταβάτω, Mk. xiii. 15, and L T Tr WH in Mt. xxiv. 17 
(where RG badly καταβαινέτω); μὴ γνώτω, Mt. vi. 3; 
γενέσθω [but T Tr WH γινέσθω], Lk. xxii. 42; ef. Xen. 
Cyr. 7,5, 73; Aeschyl. Sept. ce. Theb. 1036. d. asin 
the more elegant Grk. writ. where future things are for- 
bidden (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 807), with the 2 pers. of the 
aorist subjunctive: μὴ δόξητε, Mt. 111. 9; v.17; μὴ φο- 
βηθῆς, Mt.i. 20; x. 26,31 [here L T Tr WH pres. impv. 
φοβεῖσθε), (alternating with the impv. pres. φοβεῖσθε in 
Mt. x. 28 [GL TTr]); μὴ ayy, Col. ii. 21; μὴ ἀποστρα- 
ois, Mt. v. 42; μὴ κτήσησθε, Mt. x. 9; add, Mt. vi. 2, 7, 
18,31; Mk.v.7; x.19; Lk. vi. 29; viii. 28; xiv.8; Jn. 
iii. 7; Acts vii.60; Ro. x.6; 1Co.xvi.11; 2 Co. xi. 16; 
2 Th. ii. 3, [in the last three exx. with the third pers., 
contrary to W. 502 (467)]; 1 Tim.v.1; 2 Tim.i. 8; Rev. 
vi. 6; x. (μὴ γράψης. for ἔμελλον γράφειν precedes ; but 
in Jn. xix. 21 μὴ γράφε is used, because Pilate had already 
written); Rev. xi. 2; xxii. 10,and very often. We have 
the impv. pres. and the aor. subj. together in Lk. x.4; Acts 
xviii. 9. 6. with the 2 pers. of the present subjunc. : 
μὴ σκληρύνητε, Heb. iii. 8, 15, (a rare constr. though not 
wholly unknown to Grk. writ. [“ more than doubtful” (L. 
and S. s. y. A. I.2)]; see Delitzsch on the latter passage, 
and Schaefer ad Greg. Corinth. p. 1005 sq.; [Soph. Lex. 
s.v-py. Others regard the above exx.as subjune. aorist; 
ef. 2 K. ii. 10; Is. lsiii.17; Jer. xvii. 23; xix.15,ete.]). ἢ. 
with the optative, in wishes: in that freq. formula μὴ 
γένοιτο, far be it! see γίνομαι, 3 ἃ.; μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη, 2 
Tim. iv. 16 (Job xxvii. 5). 


410 


μη 


11. As a Consunction, Lat. ne with the subjune- 
tive ; 1. our that, that not or lest, (cf. W. § 56, 2; 
[B. § 139, 48 sq.; Goodwin § 46]); after verbs of fe ar- 
ing, caution, ete. a. with the subjunc. present, 
where one fears lest something now exists and at the 
same time indicates that he is ignorant whether it is so 
or not (Hermann on Soph. Aj. 272): ἐπισκοποῦντες, μὴ 
.  . ἐνοχλῇ, Heb. xii. 15. b. with the subjune. aorist, 
of things which may occur immediately or very soon: pre- 
ceded by an aor., εὐλαβηθεὶς (LT Tr WH φοβηθεὶς) μὴ δια- 
σπασθῆ. Acts xxiii. 10; by a pres.: φοβοῦμαι, Acts xxvii. 
17; βλέπω, Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii. δ; Lk. xxi. 8; Acts 
xiii. 40; 1 Co. x. 12; Gal. v. 15; Heb. xii. 25; σκοπέω 
ἐμαυτόν, Gal. vi. 1 [B. 243 (209) would refer this to 2 Ὁ. 
below; cf. Goodwin p. 66]; ὁράω, Mt. xviii. 10; 1 Th. v. 
15; elliptically, ὅρα μή (sc. τοῦτο ποιήσῃς [οἵ. W. § 64, 7 a.; 
B. 395 (338)]): Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. ο. with the 
indicative fut. (as being akin to the subjune. [ef. gram. 
reff. at the beginning]): φοβοῦμαι. μὴ ταπεινώσει pe ὁ θεός 
pov, 2 Co. xii. 20 sq. [L txt. T Tr]; add, Col. ii. 8. 2h 
in order that not (Lat. eo consilio ne) ; a. with the op- 
tative: τῶν στρατιωτῶν βουλὴ ἐγένετο, ἵνα τοὺς δεσμώτας 
ἀποκτείνωσι, μή τις . -- διαφύγοι, Acts xxvii. 42 Rec. (the 
more elegant Greek to express the thought and purpose 
of the soldiers; but the best codd. read διαφύγῃ, which 
GLT Tr WH have adopted). b. with the subjunc- 
tive aor.: preceded by the pres., Mk. xiii. 36; 2 Co. viii. 
20 [ef. Goodwin § 43 Rem.]; xii. 6; Col. ii. 4 (where 
LT Tr WH iva μηδείς for R G μή τις [—an oversight ; 
in R Gas well as in the recent crit. edd. the purpose is 
expressed by an inserted iva]). 

III. As an INTERROGATIVE particle it is used when 
a negative answer is expected, Lat. num; (W.§ 57, 3b.; 
[B. 248 (213)]); 1. ina direct question: Mt. vii. 
9sq.; ix.15; Mk.ii.19; Lk. xvii. 9; Jn. iii. 4; iv. 12, 
33; vi. 67; vii. 35, 51 sq.; Acts vii. 28; Ro. iii. 3; ix. 
20; 1Co.i.13; ix. 8 sq.3 x. 22; Jas. 11. [1 WH], 14; iii. 12, 
ete. ; μὴ γάρ (see yap, I.), Jn. vii. 41; μὴ οὐκ (where οὐκ be- 
longs to the verb, and μή is interrogative), Ro. x. 18 sq.; 
1 Co. ix. 4 sq.; μὴ yap . - - ov, 1 Co. xi. 22. 2. inan 
indirect question with the indicative (Germ. ob etwa, 
ob wohl, whether possibly, whether perchance), where in ad- 
monishing another we intimate that possibly the case is 
as we fear [cf. B. ὃ 139,57; W.§ 41 b.4a.]: Lk. xi. 
35, ef. B. 243 (209); Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 334 sq.; [Rid- 
dell, Plato’s Apol. Digest of Idioms §§ 137, 138]. 

IV. The particles οὐ μή in combination augment the 
force of the negation, and signify not at all, in no wise, 
by no means; (this formula arose from the fuller ex- 
pressions οὐ δεινόν or δέος or φόβος, μή, which are still 
found sometimes in Grk. auth., cf. Kiihner ii. § 516, 9 
p- 773 sq.; but so far was this origin of the phrase lost 
sight of that od μή is used even of things not at all to be 
feared, but rather to be desired; so in the N. T. in Mt. 
y. 18, 26; xviii. 3; Lk. xviii. 17; xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 48; xx. 
25; 1Th.v.3); οἵ. Matthiae § 517; Kiihner ii. p. 775; 
Bnhdy. p. 402 sqq.; [Gildersleeve in the Amer. Jour. of 
Philol. for 1882, p. 202 sq.; Goodwin § 89]; W. § 56, 3; 


μήγε 
Β. 211 (183) sq.]. 1. with the fut. indicative: οὐ 
μὴ ἔσται σοι τοῦτο, this shall never be unto thee, Mt. xvi. 
22; add, Mt. xxvi.35; Lk. xxii. 34 RGL; x. 19 (where 
R*G WH ore. ἀδικήσῃ) ; In. vi. 35 [here L Trmrg. πει- 
νάσει, and LT Tr WH διψήσει]; xiii. 38 RG; Mk. xiii. 
31 T Tr WH; Heb. x. 17 LTTr WH; in many pas- 
sages enumerated by W. 506 (472); [cf. B. 212 (183)], 
the manuscripts vary between the indic. fut. and the 
subjune. aor. Ina question, οὐ μὴ ποιήσει τὴν ἐκδίκησιν ; 
Lk. xviii. 7 RG. 2. with the aor. subjunctive (the 
use of which in the N. T. scarcely differs from that of 
the fut.; ef. W. § 56, 3; [B. § 139, 7]), in confident as- 
sertions : —subjunc. of the 1 aor., Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. 
xiii. 2; Lk. vi. 37; Jn. xiii. 8; Heb. viii. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 6; 
Rev. ii. 11; vii. 16; xviii. 21, 22, 23; xxi. 27,etc.; 1 aor. 
mid. subj., Jn. viii. 52 (where Rec. γεύσεται) ; thus these 
N. T. exx. prove that Dawes made a great mistake in 
denying (in his Miscellanea Critica, p. 221 sqq. [ed. (Th. 
Kidd) 2, p. 408 sq.]) that the first aor. subjunc. is used 
after οὐ μή; [cf. Goodwin in Transactions of Am. Philol. 
Assoc. for 1869-70, pp. 46-55; L. and S. 5. v. οὐ μή, 1. 
1b.; B. § 139, 8]; —subjune. of 2 aor., Mt. v. 18, 20, 
26; Mk. x. 15; LE. 1.15; xii. 59; Jn. x. 28; xi. 26; 1 Co: 
viii. 13; Heb. xiii. 5; Rev. iii. 3[RGLTrmrg. WH txt.], 
and often. in questions: with 1 aor., Lk. xviii. 7 LT 
Tr WH; Rey. xv. 4 (in LT Tr WH with the subj. aor. 
and the fut.); with 2 aor., Jn. xviii.11. in declarations 
introduced by ὅτε: with 1 aor., 1 Th. iv. 15; with 2 aor., 
Mt. xxiv. 34 [here RG Tom. ὅτι); xxvi. 29 [LT TrWH 
om. ὅτι); Lk. xiii. 35 [T WHom.Lbr. ὅτι]; xxii. 16; 
Jn. xi. 56; in relative clauses: with 1 aor., Mt. xvi. 28; 
Mk. ix.1; Acts xiii.41; Ro.iv.8; with 2 aor., Lk. xviii. 
30. 3. with the present subjunc. (as sometimes in 
Grk. auth., ef. W. 507 (473)): οὐδὲ od μή σε ἐγκαταλείπω. 
Heb. xiii. 5 Tdf. (for ἐγκαταλίπω Rec. et al.), [ef. B. 213 
(184)]. 

μήγε, εἰ δὲ μήγε, see γέ, 3 d. 

μηδαμῶς, (adv. ἔτ. μηδαμός, and this fr. μηδέ, and ἀμός 
some one [perh. allied w. ἅμα, q. v.]), [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt. 
down], by no means, not at all: sc. τοῦτο γένοιτο, in re- 
plies after an impy. [A. V. Not so], Acts x. 14; xi. 8. 
(Sept. for τ) 11.) ει 

μηδέ, (μή, 4. v., and δέ), [fr. Hom. down], a negative 
disjunctive conjunction; [cf. W. § 55, 6; B. § 149, 
13]; 1. used in continuing a negation or prohibi- 
tion, but not, and not, neither; preceded by yn, — either 
so that the two negatives have one verb in common: 
preceded by μή with a participle, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii. 
24; by μή w. a pres. subjune., 1 Co. v. 8 [here Lmre. 
pres. indic.]; 1 Jn. iii. 18; by μή ν΄. impv., Mt. vi. 25; 
Lk. x. 4; xii. 22; xiv.12; 1Jn.ii.15; by py w. an aor. 
subj. 2 pers. plur., Mt. x. 9 sq.; by εἰς τὸ μή, 2 Th. ii. 2 
LT Tr WH; —or so that μηδέ has its own verb: pre- 
ceded by ὃς ἐὰν (ἄν) μή, Mt. x. 14; Mk. vi. 11; by ἵνα 
μή, ὅπ. ἵν. 15; by ὅπως μή, Lk. xvi. 26; w. a ptep. after 
μή w.a ptep., Lk. xii.47; 2 Co. iv. 2; w. an impv. after 
μή w. impv., Jn. xiv. 27; Ro. vi. 12 sq.; Heb. xii. 5; 
μηδενὶ ἐπιτίθει, foll. by μηδέ w. impy. 1 Tim. v. 22; τ΄. 


411 


μηδεὶς 


2 pers. of the aor. subj. after μή w. 2 pers. of the aor. 
subj., Mt. vii. 6; xxiii. 9sq.; Lk. xvii. 23; Col. ii. 21; 
1 Pet. iii. 14; after μηδέ w. an aor. subj. Mk. viii. 26 [T 
reads μή for the first μηδέ, T WH Tr mrg. om. the sec- 
ond clause]; after μηδένα w. an aor. subj. Lk. iii. 14 
[Tdf. repeats μηδένα]; μηδὲ... μηδέ w.1 pers. plur. pres. 
subj. 1 Co. x. 8 sq. [see below]; παραγγέλλω foll. by μή 
w. inf... . μηδέ w. inf., Actsiv.18; 1 Tim.i.4; vi. 17; 
καλὸν τὸ μὴ - . . μηδέ with inf. Ro. xiv. 21; w. gen. absol. 
after μήπω w. gen. 4050]. Ro. ix. 11; w. impv. after eis 
τὸ μή, 1 Co. χ. 7; μηδέ is repeated several times in a neg- 
ative exhortation after εἰς τὸ μή in 1 Co. x. 7-10. 2. 
not even (Lat. ne... quidem): w. an inf. after ἔγραψα, 
1 Co. v. 11; after ὥστε, Mk. ii. 2; iii. 20 (where RG T 
badly μήτε [ef. W. 489 sq. (456); B. pp. 367, 3697); w. 
a pres. impv., Eph. v. 3; 2 Th. iii. 10. 

μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν (and μηθέν, Acts xxvii. 33 LT 
Tr WH, —a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as 
early as B.C. 378, ef. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 
73]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181sq.; W. § 5, 1d. 11; [B. 28 
(25)]; Kiihner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. μηδέ and εἷς), 
[fr. Hom. down]; it is used either in connection with a 
noun, no, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man, 
neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as μή; ac- 
cordingly a. with an imperative: μηδείς being 
the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii. 
18, 21; x. 24; Gal. vi.17; Eph. v. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim. 
iv.12; Tit. ii.15; Jas.i.13; 1Jn.iii.7; neut. μηδέν, 
50. ἔστω [A. V. have thou nothing to do with etc.], Mt. 
xxvii. 19; μηδείς in the dat. or the acc. depending on 
the impv., Ro. xiii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; μηδέν (accusative), 
Lk. iii. 13; ix.3; μ. φοβοῦ, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH 
txt. μή]. b. μηδείς with the optative: once in 
the N. T., Mk. xi. 14 (where Rec. οὐδείς) [cf. W. 476 
(443)]. c. with the 2 pers. of the aor. subjunc., 
the μηδείς depending on the verb; as, μηδενὶ εἴπῃς, Mt. 
viii.4; xvii. 9; aceus., Lk. iii. 14; x. 4; μηδέν (ace.), Acts 
Xvi. 28; κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον, 2 Th. ii. 3. d. with the 
particles ἵνα and ὅπως (see μή, I. 3): with ἕνα, Mt. xvi. 
20; Mk. v. 43; vi. 8; vii. 36; ix.9; Tit. iii. 13; Rev. iii. 
11; with ὅπως, Acts viii. 24. e. with an infini- 
tive; a. with one that depends on another verb: — 
as on παραγγέλλω, Lk. viii. 56; ix. 21; Acts xxiii. 22; 
δείκνυμι. Acts x. 28; διατάσσομαι, Acts xxiv. 23; dva- 
θεματίζω ἐμαυτόν, Acts xxiii. 14; κρίνω (ace. w. inf.), 
Acts xxi. 25 Rec.; εὔχομαι, 2 Co. xiii. 7; βούλομαι (ace. 
w. inf.), 1 Tim. v.14; ὑπομιμνήσκω τινά, Tit. iii. 2, ete.; 
παρακαλῶ τινα foll. by τὸ μή w. ace. and inf., 1 Th. iii. 
3 L (ed. ster.) T Tr WH. B. with an inf. depend- 
ing on διὰ τό: Acts xxviii. 18; Heb. x. 2. f. with 
a participle (see μή, I. 5); in dat., Acts xi. 19; Ro. xii. 
17; accus. μηδένα, Jn. viii. 10; Acts ix. 7; μηδέν, Acts iv. 
21; xxvii. 33; 1 Co. x. 25,27; 2Co. vi. 10; 2 Th. iii. 11; 
1 Tim. vi. 4; Tit. ii. 8; Jas.i.6; 8 ὅπ. 7; μηδεμίαν προ- 
σκοπήν, 2 Co. vi. 3; μηδεμίαν πτόησιν, 1 Pet. 111. 6; μηδε- 
μίαν αἰτίαν, Acts xxviii. 18; ἀναβολὴν μηδ. xxv. 17. g- 
noteworthy are — μηδείς with a gen., Acts iv. 17; xxiv. 
23; μηδέν se. τούτων, Rev. ii. 10 [RG TWH amrg.]; ἐν 


μηδέποτε 


μηδενί, in nothing, 1 Co. i. 7 [but χαρίσματι is expressed 
here]; 2 Co. [vi. 3 (see h. below)]; vii. 9; Phil. i. 28; 
Jas. i. 4. μηδὲν εἶναι, to be nothing i. 6. of no account, 
opp. to εἶναί τι, Gal. vi. 3 (Soph. Aj. 754; other exx. fr. 
Grk. auth. see in Passow ii. p. 231°; [L. and S.s. v. IL; 
ef. B. § 129, 57); μηδέν (ace.), nothing i.e. not at all, in 
no ~espect: Acts x. 20; xi. 12, (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 4; 
Tim. 43); as accus. of the obj. after verbs of harm, loss, 
damage, advantage, care, [ef. W. 227 (213); B. § 131, 
10]: as, βλάπτειν, Lk. iv. 35 [ef. W. 483 (450)], ὠφε- 
λεῖσθαι, Mk. v. 26; ὑστερεῖν, 2 Co. xi. 5; μεριμνᾶν, Phil. 
iv. 6. h. examples of adouble negation, by which 
the denial is strengthened, where in Lat. quisquam fol- 
lows a negation (cf. W. ὃ 55, 9 b.): μηκέτι μηδείς, ΜΚ. 
xi. 14; Acts iv. 17; μηδενὶ μηδέν, Mk. i. 44 [Lom. Tr 
br. μηδέν]; Ro. xiii. 8; μηδεμίαν ἐν μηδενί, 2 Co. vi. 3; 
μὴ - .. ἐν μηδενί, Phil. i. 28; py... μηδέν, 2 Co. xiii. 7; 
μὴ - - - μηδεμίαν, 1 Pet. iii. 6; μή tes . . - κατὰ μηδένα τρό- 
πον, 2 Th. ii. 8. 

μηδέποτε, (μηδέ and ποτέ), adv., never: 2 Tim. iii. 7.” 

μηδέπω, (μηδέ and πώ), adv., not yet: Heb. xi. 7.” 

Μῆδος, -ov, ὁ, a Mede, a native or an inhabitant of 
Media, a well-known region of Asia whose chief city was 
Ecbatana [see B. Ὁ. s.v.]: Acts ii. 9. [Cf. B. Ὁ. and 
Schaff-Herzog 5. v. Media. ]* 

μηθέν, see μηδείς. 

μηκέτι, (fr. μή and ἔτι), adv., employed in the same 
constructions as μή; no longer; no more; not here- 
afier: a. with 3 pers. sing. 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 
RGTrtxt. with 2 pers. sing. Mk. ix. 25. b. with 
1 pers. plur. pres. subj. Ro. xiv. 13. c. with a pres. 
imperative: [Lk. viii. 49 LT Trtxt. WH]: Jn. v. 14; 
ν 111. 11; Eph. iv. 28; 1 Tim. v. 23. d. with the opta- 
tive: Mk. xi. 14. 6. ἵνα μηκέτι: 2 Co. v.15; Eph. iv. 
14. f. with an infin. depending —on another verb: 
on βοῶ (em 80a), Acts xxv. 24; on ἀπειλῶ, Acts iv. 17; 
on λέγω κ. μαρτύρομαι, Eph. iv. 17; on εἰς τό, 1 Pet. iv. 
2; on ὥστε, Mk. i. 45; ii. 2; τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν, Ro. vi. 
6. g. witha ptep.: Acts xiii. 34 [ef. W. § 65, 10]; 
Ro. xv. 23; 1 Th. iii. 1. h. οὐ μηκέτι (see μή, LV. 
2): with 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 L T Trmrg. WH.* 

μῆκος, -eos (-ous), τό, fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often 
for JIS; /ength: Rev. xxi. 16; τὸ πλάτος καὶ μῆκος καὶ 
βάθος καὶ ὕψος, language used in shadowing forth the 
greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received 
from Christ, Eph. iii. 18." 

μηκύνω: (μῆκος) : fr. Hdt. and Pind. down; to make 
long, to lengthen; in the Bible twice of plants, i. 4. to cause 
to grow, increase: ὃ ἐφύτευσε κύριος καὶ ὑετὸς ἐμήκυνεν 
(973°), Is. xliv. 14; hence Pass. [4]. Mid.] pres. μηκύνο- 
par; to grow up: Mk. iv. 27 [μηκύνηται (Tr mrg. -erac) J.” 

μηλωτή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. μῆλον a sheep, also a goat; as καμη- 
λωτή [‘camlet’] fr. κάμηλος [ef. Lob. Paralip. p. 332]), 
a sheepskin: Heb. xi. 37, and thence in Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 17,1. For 4778 an outer robe, mantle, Sept. in 
1 Κ. xix. 13, 19; 2 K. ii. 8, 13 sq., doubtless because 
these mantles were made of skins; hence more closely 
Ww NVAX, a mantle of hair, Zech. xiii. 4 (where Sept. 


412 


μήποτε 


δέρρις τριχίνη). In the Byzant. writ. | Apoll. Dysk. 191, 
9] μηλωτή denotes a monk’s garment.* 

μήν, [(fr. Hom. down)], a particle of affirmation, 
verily, certainly, truly, (Sap. vi. 25); 4 μήν, see under 
7 fin. 

μήν, gen. μηνός, 6, (w. Alex. ace. μῆναν, Rev. xxii. 2 
Lehm.; on which form see reff. under ἄρσην, fin.); [fr. 
Hom. down]; 1. a month: Lk. i. 24, 26, 36,56; iv. 25; 
Acts vii. 20; xviii. 11; xix. 8; xx.3; xxviii. 11; Jas. v. 
17: Rev.ix. 5,10, 153)-xi- 25) xin. δ᾽ ΧΙ 9. 2. the 
time of new moon, new moon, (barbarous Lat. novilunium; 
after the use of the Hebr. wan, which denotes both a 
‘month’ and a ‘new moon,’ as in Num. xxviii. 11; xxix 
1): Gal. iv. 10 [Bp. Lghtft. compares Is. Ixvi. 23] (the 
first day of each month, when the new moon appeared 
was a festival among the Hebrews; ef. Lev. xxiii. 24 
Num. xxviii. 11; Ps. Ixxx. (ixxxi.) 4); [al. refer the 
passage to 1 (see Mey. ad loc.) ]." 

μηνύω [cf. Curtius § 429]: 1 aor. ἐμήνυσα: 1 aor. pass. 
ptep. fem. μηνυθεῖσα: as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. and Pind. 
down ; 1. to disclose or make known something 
secrel; in a forensic sense, to inform, report: foll. by ποῦ 
ἐστίν, Jn. xi. 57; τινί τι, pass., Acts xxiii. 30. 2. 
univ. /o declare, tell, make known: 1 Co. x. 28. 3. 
to indicate, intimate: of a teacher; foll. by ὅτε, Lk. xx. 
37. [A. V. uniformly show.]* 

μὴ οὐκ, see μή. IIT. 1. 

μήποτε, (fr. μή and ποτέ), [μή ποτε (separately) L WH 
(exc. Mt. xxv. 9, see below) Tr (exe. 2 Tim. ii. 25)], dif- 
fering from οὔποτε as μή does from ov; [fr. Hom. down]. 
Accordingly it is 1. a particle of Negation; not 
ever, never: ἐπεὶ μήποτε ἰσχύει, since it is never of force, 
because the writer thinks that the very idea of its hav- 
ing force is to be denied, Heb. ix. 17 [where WH txt. μὴ 
τότε], on which see W. 480 (447), ef. B. 353 (304); but 
others refer this passage to 3 a. below. 2. a pro- 
hibitory Conjunction; Jest ever, lest at any time, lest 
haply, (also written separately μή ποτε [ (see init.), esp. 
when the component parts retain each its distinctive 
force; ef. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 129 sq.; Ellendt, 
Lex. Soph. ii.107. Inthe N. T. use of this particle the no- 
tion of time usual to ποτέ seems to recede before that of 
contingency, /est perchance]), so that it refers to the pre- 
ceding verb and indicates the purpose of the designated 
action [W. § 56, 2]: w. a subj. pres. Lk. xii. 58; ν΄. ἃ 
subj. aor., Mt. iv. 6 and Lk. iv. 11, fr. Ps. xe. (xei.) 12 
(where Sept. for 13): Mt. v. 25 [(ef. below)]; vii. 6 [R 
G]; xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27 (both from Is. vi. 10, 
where Sept. for 13); Mt. xiii. 29 (οὐ se. θέλω); xv. 32; 
xxvii.64; Mk.iv.12; Lk. xiv.12; withiva prefixed, ibid. 
29; w.a fut. indic. [see B. § 139, 7, ef. also p. 368 (315) 
4.7: [Mt. vii. 6 L T Tr WH; (cf. v. 25)]; Mk. xiv. 2; 
[Lk. xii. 58 LT Tr WH]. after verbs of fearing, 
taking care, [W.u.s.; B.§ 139, 48]: w. subj. aor. — 
so after προσέχω, to take heed, lest etc., Lk. xxi. 34; Heb. 
ii. 1, (Sir. xi. 33); so that an antecedent φοβούμενοι or 
προσέχοντες must be mentally supplied, Acts v.39; μήποτε 
οὐκ ἀρκέσῃ, lest perchance there be not enough (so that ovr 


μηπου 


ἀρκέσῃ forms one idea, and φοβούμεθα must be supplied 
before μήποτε), Mt. xxv. 9 RT WH mrg.; but L Tr WH 
txt., together with Meyer et al., have correctly restored 
μήποτε (36. τοῦτο γενέσθω [ W. § 64, 7 a.])- οὐ μὴ ἀρκέσῃ, 
i.e. not so! there will in no wise be enough (see μή, ΕΥ̓͂. 2); 
ef. Bornemann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 143 sq. ; 
[but all the editors above named remove the punctua- 
tion mark after μήποτε; in which case it may be connect- 
ed directly with the words which follow it and translated 
(with R. V.) ‘peradventure there will not be enough’; 
ct. B. § 148, 10, esp. p. 354 (304) note. For additional 
exx. of μήποτε in this sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 10, 
10 p. 1119", 24; with indic., ibid. pp. 1172", 33; 1173* 
22, ete.), see Soph. Lex. 5. v.; Bitm. in his trans. of Apoll. 
Dysk., index s. v.; (cf. L. and 8. 5. v. μή, B.9)]. after 
φοβοῦμαι, w. pres. subjunc. Heb. iv. 1; so that φοβού- 
μενος must be supplied before it, Lk. xiv.8. after βλέπειν 
w. a fut. indic. [cf. W. § 56, 2b. a.; B. 243 (209) ], Heb. 
lii. 12. 3. a particle of Interrogation accom- 
panied with doubt (see μή, III.), whether ever, whether at 
any time; whether perchance, whether haply, (Germ. doch 
nicht etwa; ob nicht etwa); a. in a direct question in- 
troduced by ἐπεί, for, else, (see ἐπεί, 2 sub fin.) : so ace. to 
the not improbable interpretation of some [e. g. L WH 
mrz., Delitzsch] in Heb. ix. 17, see in labove. In the re- 
maining N. T. passages so used that the inquirer, though 
he doubts and expects a negative answer, yet is inclined 
to believe what he doubtfully asks about; thus, ina direct 
question, in Jn. vii. 26. Ὁ. inindirect questions; a. 
w. the optative (where the words are regarded as the 
thought of some one [W. § 41 Ὁ. 4 ο.; B. § 139, 60]): Lk. 
iii. 15. [See B.] β. w. the subjunctive: 2 Tim. ii. 25 
[RGL (cf. B. 46 (40)); but TTr WH txt. give the 
optative], where μήποτε xrA. depend on the suppressed 
idea διαλογιζόμενος [cf. B. § 139, 62 fin.; W. u. s.].* 

μήπου [T Tr] or μή που [WH], that nowhere, lest any- 
where, [lest haply]: Acts xxvii. 29 Τ Tr WH. (Hom. et 
al.) * 

μήπω [or μή πω, L Tr in Ro. ix. 11], (μή and πώ). [fr. 
Hom. down], adv. ; 1. not yet: in construction 
with the ace. and inf., Heb. ix. 8; w. ἃ ptep., μήπω yap 
γεννηθέντων, though they were not yet born, Ro. ix. 11, 
where ef. Fritzsche. 2. lest in any way [?]: Acts 
xxvii. 29 Lehm.* 

μήπως [ἃ T, or μή πως L Tr WH], (μή and ras), [fr. 
Hom. down}; 1. a conjunction, lest in any way, lest 
perchance ; a. in final sentences, w. an aor. subj., pre- 
ceded by a pres. 1 Co. ix. 27; preceded by an aor., 2 
Co. ii. 7; ix. 4. b. after verbs of fearing, taking 
heed: w.an aor. subj.,—after βλέπειν, 1 Co. viii. 9; 
after φοβεῖσθαι, Acts xxvii. 29 R; 2 Co. xi. 3; xii. 20; 
w. a perf. indic., to indicate that what is feared has actu- 
ally taken place [W. § 56, 2b. a.; B. 242 (209)], Gal. 
iv. 11; w. an aor. subj., the idea of fearing being sup- 
pressed, Ro. xi. 21 Rec. [B. § 148, 10; ef. W. 474 
(442)]. 2. an interrogative particle, whether in 
any way, whether by any means: in an indirect question, 
with an indic. present (of a thing still continuing) and 


413 


μητι 


aorist (of a thing already done), Gal. ii. 2 (I laid before 
them the gospel etc., sc. inquiring, whether haply ete.; Paul 
expects a negative answer, by which he wished his teach- 
ing concerning Christ to be approved by the apostles at 
Jerusalem, yet by no means because he himself had any 
doubt about its soundness, but that his adversaries might 
not misuse the authority of those apostles in assailing this 
teaching, and thereby frustrate his past and present en- 
deavors ; cf. Hofmann ad loc. [B. 353 (303). Others. 
however, take τρέχω as a subjunctive, and render lest 
kaply I should be running etc. ; see W.504 sq. (470), ef. 
Ellicott ad loc.]). w. the indicative (of a thing perhaps 
already done, but which the writer wishes had not been 
done) and the aor. subjunctive (of a thing future and 
uncertain, which he desires God to avert) in one and the 
same sentence, 1 Th. iii. 5 (where μήπως depends on γνῶναι; 
ef. Schott, Liinemann, [Ellicott],ad loc.; [B. 353 (304); 
W. 505 (470)]).* 

μηρός, -οὔ, 6, the thigh: Rev. xix. 16. (From Hom. down; 
Sept. for }7".)* 

μήτε, (μή and the enclitic τέ), [fr. Hom. down], a cop- 
ulative conjunction of negation, neither, nor, (differing 
fr. οὔτε as μή does fr. ov. It differs fr. μηδέ in that μηδέ 
separates different things, but μήτε those which are of the 
same kind or which are parts of one whole; cf. W. § 55, 
6; [Β. 8 149,13 b.]): pyre... μήτε, neither... nor, Lk. 
vii. 33 [T py... μηδέ]; ix. 3 (five times); Acts xxiii 
12, 21; xxvii. 20; Heb. vii. 3 ; (but in Eph. iv. 27 for 
μὴ .-- μήτε we must with L T Tr WH substitute py... 
μηδέ). py... pyre... μήτε, Mt. v. 34-36 (four times); 
1 Tim.i. 7; Jas. v.12; Rev. vii.3; ἵνα py... pyre... 
μήτε, Rev. vii. 1; pydé..- pyre... μήτε, 2 ΤῊ. ἢ. 2 LT 
Tr WH; μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μηδὲ ἄγγελον (for that is 
something other than ἀνάστασις). μήτε πνεῦμα (because 
angels belong to the genus πνεύματα), Acts xxiii. 8 RG; 
ef. W. 493 (459) ; [B. 367 (314) sq.].* 

μήτηρ, gen. μητρός, dat. μητρί, ace. μητέρα, ἧ, [fr. Hom. 
down; fr. Skr. ma ‘to measure’; but whether denoting 
the ‘ moulder,’ or the ‘ manager’ is debated; ef. Vaniéek 
p- 657; Curtius § 472; (cf. μέτρον)], Hebr. O8, a mother; 
prop.: Mt. i. 18; ii. 11, and often; trop. of that which 
is like a mother: Mt. xii. 49 sq.; Mk. iii. 35; Jn. xix. 
27; Ro. xvi. 13, cf. 1 Tim. v. 2; a city is called 9 μήτηρ 
τῶν πορνῶν, that produces and harbors the harlots. Rev. 
xvii. 5; of a city where races of men [i. e. Christians] 
originated, Gal. iv. 26 [here G T Tr WH om. L br. πάντων 
(on the origin of which ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.)1. 

μήτι [so GT WH R (commonly), but μή τε L (exe. 1 
Co. vi. 3) Tr (exc. Mt. xxvi. 22, 25; Mk. iv. 21)j, (up 
and τί), whether at all, whether perchance, an interroga- 
tive expecting a negative answer; in a direct question 
(Germ. doch nicht etwa? [in Eng. generally untranslated: 
cf. W. § 57,3b.; B. 248 (213)]): Mt. vii. 16; xxvi. 22. 
25; Mk. iv. 21; xiv. 19; Lk. vi. 39; Jn. vii. 81 [Β 6]: 
Vili. 22; xviii. 35; xxi. 5 [here all texts μή re (properly)]; 
Acts x. 47; 2 Co. xii. 18; Jas. iii. 11 ; μήτι dpa, 2 Co. i. 
17; used by one asking doubtfully yet inclining to believe 
what he asks about (see μήποτε, 3 a.): Mt. xii. 23: Jn 


pnteye 


iv. 29. εἶ μήτι, see εἰ, III. 10. μήτιγε (or μήτι ye) see in 
its place.* 

μήτιγε [so G TWH; but μήτι ye RL, μή τι ye Tr], 
(fr. μή, τί, γέ), to say nothing of, not to mention, which 
ace. to the context is either a. much less; or b. 
much more, much rather; so once in the N. T., 1 Co. vi. 
3. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 801 sq.* 

μήτις [so R G Jn. iv. 33], more correctly μή τις ; 1. 
prohibitive, let no one [ef. B. 31 (28)]: [w. 1 aor. subj. 
1 Co. xvi. 11]; w. 2 aor. subj. 2 Th. ii. 3. 2. inter- 
rogative, (Lat. num quis 2) hath anyone ete.: Jn. vii. 48 ; 
£2 Co. xii. 17, ef. B. § 151,7; W.574 (534)]; where one 
would gladly believe what he asks about doubtfully (see 
μήτι, sub fin.) : Jn. iv. 33." 

μήτρα, -as, ἡ, (μήτηρ); the womb: Lk. ii. 23 (on which 
see διανοίγω, 1); Ro. iv.19. (Hdt., Plat., al.; Sept. for 
ὉΠ)" 

᾿μητραλῴας (also μητραλοίας), LT Tr WH [see WH. 
App. Ρ. 152] pyrpod@as, -ov, 6, (μήτηρ, and ἀλοιάω to 
thresh, smite), a matricide: 1 Tim.i. 9. (Aeschyl., Plat., 
Leian., al.)* 

μητρό-πολις, -ews, 9, (μήτηρ and πόλις), a metropolis, 
chief city; in the spurious subscription 1 Tim. vi. (22) 
fin.; [in this sense fr. Xen. down ].* 

pla, see under εἷς. 

piatvw; Pass., 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. pravddow; pf. 3 
pers. sing. μεμίανται (unless it be better to take this form 
asa plur.; ef. Kriiger 8 38, 3 Anm.9; Bttm. Gram. § 101 
Anm. 7; Ausf. Spr. § 101 Anm. 13; B. 41 (36); [W. 
§ 58,6 b. B.]), ptep. μεμιασμένος (Tit. i. 15 RG) and 
μεμιαμμένος (ibid. LT Tr WH; also Sap. vii. 25; Tob. 
ii. 9; Joseph. Ὁ. j. 4, 5, 2 ed. Bekk.; ef. Matthiae i. p. 
415; Kriiger § 40 5. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 35; Otto on 
Theophil. ad Autol. 1,1 p.2sq.; [Veitchs.v.]); fr. Hom. 
down ; 1. to dye with another color, to stain: ἐλέ- 
φαντα φοίνικι, Hom. 1]. 4, 141. 2. to defile, pollute, 
sully, contaminate, soil, (Sept. often for 820): in a physi- 
cal and a moral sense, σάρκα (of licentiousness), Jude 8; 
in a moral sense, τὴν συνείδησιν, τὸν νοῦν, pass. Tit. i. 15; 
absol. to defile with sin, pass. ibid. and in Heb. xii. 15; for 
wunn, Deut. xxiv. 6 (4); in aritual sense, of men, pass. 
Jn. xviii. 28 (Lev. xxii. 5,8; Num. xix. 13, 20; Tob. 
hi) se 

|Syn. μιαίνω, μολύνω: acc. to Trench (N. T. Syn. 
ὃ xxxi.) μιαίνω to stain differs from μολύνω to smear not only 
in its primary and outward sense, but in the circumstance 
that (like Eng. stain) it may be used in good part, while μολ. 
admits of no worthy reference. ] 


μίασμα, -ros, τό, (μιαίνω), that which defiles [cf. καύ- 
χημα, 2]; defilement (Vulg. coinquinatio): trop. μιάσματα 
τοῦ κόσμου, Vices the foulness of which contaminates one 
in his intercourse with the ungodly mass of mankind, 
2 Pet. ii. 20. (Tragg., Antiph., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 
Plut.; Sept., Lev. vii. 8 (18); Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 34; 
Judith ix. 2; 1 Mace. xiii. 50.) " 

μιασμός, -ov, 6, (jtaiyw), the act of defiling, defilement, 
pollution: ἐπιθυμία μιασμοῦ, defiling lust [W. § 34, 3 b.], 
2 Pet. ii. 10. (Sap. xiv. 26; 1 Mace. iv 43; Plut. mor. 


414 


μιμεομαι 


Ρ. 398 ο.; Test. xii. Patr. [test. Lev. 17; test. Benj. 8; 
Graec. Ven. (passim); Herm. Past. sim. 5, 7, 2].) * 

μίγμα or (so LT) μῖγμα, (on the accent ef. Lipsius, 
Gramm. Untersuch. pp. 32 and 34, [ef. W. § 6, 1 e.; 
κρίμα, init.]), -ros, ro, (μίγνυμι), that which has been pro- 
duced by mixing, a mixture: Jn. xix. 39 [WH txt. ἔλιγμα, 
q-v-J]. (Sir. xxxviii. 8; Aristot., Plut., al.) * 

μίγνυμι and μίσγω: 1 aor. ἔμιξα ; pf. pass. ptep. μεμιγ- 
μένος fr. Llom. down; to mix, mingle: τί τινι, one thing 
with another, Rev. viii. 7 Ree.; xv. 2; also τὶ ἔν τινι (cf. 
B. § 133, 8], Rev. viii. 7 GLT Tr WH; μετά τινος, with 
a thing, Mt. xxvii. 34; Lk. xiii. 1 (on which see αἷμα, 
2a.). [SYN. see κεράννυμι, fin. CoMP.: cuv-ava-piyvupt. |* 

μικρός, -d, -ov, compar. μικρότερος, -epa, -epov, [fr. 
Hom. down], Sept. for JOP, 150, Ὁ}, small, little; 
used a. of size: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 81; hence 
of stature, τῇ ἡλικίᾳ, Lk. xix. 3; of length, Jas. iii.5. Ὁ. 
of space: neut. προελθὼν ἱπροσελθ. T Tr WH mrg. in 
Mt., Tr WI mrg. in Mk. (see προσέρχομαι, a.) | μικρόν, 
having gone forward a little, Mt. xxvi. 39; Mk. xiv. 35, 
(cf. W. § 32,6; B. § 131, 11 sq.]. c. of age: less 
by birth, younger, Mk. xv. 40 [al. take this of stat- 
ure]; οἱ μικροί, the little ones, young children, Mt. xviii. 
6,10,14; Mk. ix. 425 ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου [ A. V. from 
the least to the greatest], Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11, (Jer. 
vi. 13; Xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34); μικρός τε καὶ μέγας, [both 
small and great] i. e. all, Acts xxvi. 22; plur., Rev. xi. 
18... xin. 16s) Kix. δ. 18». xx. Les d. of time, short, 
brief: neuter —nom., ἔτε [or ἔτι om.] μικρὸν (se. ἔσται) 
καί, (yet) a little while and ete. i. e. shortly (this shall come 
to pass), Jn. xiv. 19; xvi. 16 sq. 19, [(cf. Ex. xvii. 4)], 
ἔτι μικρὸν ὅσον ὅσον (see ὅσος, a.); without καί, Heb. x. 
37 (Is. xxvi. 20); τὸ μικρόν [Tr ὙΥῊ οπι. τό], Jn. xvi. 18; 
— μικρόν ace. (of duration), Jn. xiii. 33 (Job xxxvi. 2); 
μικρὸν χρόνον, In. vii. 33; xii. 35; Rev. vi. 11; xx. 3; 
μετὰ μικρόν. after a little while, Mt. xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 
70, (πρὸ μικροῦ, Sap. xv. 8). e. of quantity, i. 6. 
number or amount: μικρὰ ζύμη, 1 Co. v. 6; Gal. v. 9; 
of number, μικρὸν ποίμνιον, Lk. xii. 32; of quantity, 
μικρὰ δύναμις, Rev. iii. 8; neut. μικρόν (τι), α little, 2 Co. 
ΧΙ 1 1: f. of rank or influence: Mt. x. 42: Lk. 
ix. 48; xvii. 23 ὁ μικρότερος ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ 
that is inferior to the other citizens of the 
heaven in knowledge of the gospel [R. V. 
ete.; cf. W. 244 (229); B. § 123, 13], Mt. 
vil. 28.* 

Μίλητος, -ov, ἡ, Mile/us, a maritime city [now nearly 
ten miles fr. the coast (cf. Acts xx. 38)] of Caria or 
Ionia, near the mouths of the Meander and not far [e. 
35 m.S.] from Ephesus. It was the mother of many 
[some eighty] colonies, and the birth-place of Thales, 
Anaximander, and other celebrated men: Acts xx. 15, 
17; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [Zewin, St. Paul, ii. 90 sq.]* 

μίλιον, -ov, τό, (a word of Lat. origin [cf. B. 18 (16)]), 
a mile, among the Romans the distance of a thousand 
paces or eight stadia, [somewhat less than our mile]: 
Mt. ν. 41. (Polyb., Strab., Plut.) * 

μιμέομαι, -οὔμαι ; (μῖμος [an actor, mimic]); to imitate: 


τῶν ovp. he 
kingdom of 
but little in 
xi le dak: 


μιμητής 


τινά, any one, 2 ΤῊ. iii. 7,9; ri, Heb. xiii. 7; 8 Jn. 11. 
[Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., al.]* 

μιμητής, -οὔ, 6, an imitator: γίνομαί τινος (gen. of pers.), 
1Co. iv. 16; xi.1; Eph.v.1; 1 Th.i. 6; ii. 14; Heb. vi. 
12; w. gen. of the thing, 1 Pet. iii. 13 Rec. (where L T 
Tr WH @orai). [Plat., Isoer., al.]* 

μιμνήσκω: (MNAQ [allied w. μένω. μανθάνω; cf. Lat. 
maneo, moneo, mentio, ete.; cf. Curtius § 429]); to remind: 
Hom., Pind., Theogn., Eur., al.; Pass. and Mid., pres. 
μιμνήσκομαι (Heb. ii. 6; xiii. 3; rare in Attic); 1 aor. 
ἐμνήσθην; pf. μέμνημαι; 1 fut. pass. in a mid. sense, 
μνησθήσομαι (Heb. x.17 LT Tr WH); Sept. for 31; 
to be recalled or to return to one’s mind, to remind one’s 
self of, to remember; ἐμνήσθην, with a pass. signif. [cf. 
B. 52 (46) ], to be recalled to mind, to be remembered, had 
in remembrance: ἐνώπιόν τινος, before i. 6. in the mind of 
one (see ἐνώπιον, 1 c.), Acts x. 31; Rev. xvi. 19, (pas- 
sively also in Ezek. xviii. 22; [Sir. xvi. 17 Ree.]; and 
ἀναμνησθῆναι, Num. x. 9; Ps. eviii. (cix.) 16) ;— with a 
mid. signif., foll. by a gen. of the thing [W. § 30, 10 ¢.], 
to remember a thing: Mt. xxvi. 75; Lk. xxiv. 8; Acts 
xi. 16; 2 Pet. iii. 2; Jude 17; μνησθῆναι ἐλέους, to call 
to remembrance former love, Lk. i. 54 (οἴ. Ps. xxiv. 
(xxv.) 6); τῆς διαθήκης, Lk. i. 72 (Gen. ix. 15; Ex. ii. 24; 
1 Mace. iv. 10; 2 Mace. i. 2); μὴ μνησθῆναι τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν 
twos, [A. V. to remember no more] i. e. to forgive, Heb. 
viii. 12; x. 17, (after the Hebr.; see Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 7; 
Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 8; Is. xliii. 25; and on the other hand, 
to remember the sins of any one is said of one about to 
punish them, Jer. xiv. 10; 1 Mace. ν. 4; vi. 12); w. gen. 
of a pers., to remember for good, remember and care 
for: Lk. xxiii. 42; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. v. 23; xxvii. 63; Lk. 
xvi. 25; Jn. ii. 17, 22; xii. 16; by ὡς, Lk. xxiv. 6. pf. 
μέμνημαι, in the sense of a present [ef. W. 274 (257)], 
to be mindful of: w. gen. of the thing, 2 Tim. i. 4; πάντα 
μου μέμνησθε, in all things ye are mindful of me, 1 Co. 
xi. 2; pres. μιμνήσκομαι, w. gen. of the pers., to remem- 
ber one in order to care for him, Heb. ii. 2 (fr. Ps. viii. 
5); xiii. 3. [Comp.: ἀνα-, ἐπ-ανα-, ὑπο-μιμνήσκω.] ἢ 

μισέω, -ῶ; impf. ἐμίσουν; fut. pronow; 1 aor. ἐμίσησα; 
pf. pepionxa; Pass., pres. ptcp. μισούμενος ; pf. ptep. 
μεμισημένος (Rev. xviii. 2); Sept. for s3v; [fr. Hom. 
down]; to hate, pursue with hatred, detest; pass. to be 
hated, detested: τινά, Mt. v. 43 and Ree. in 44; xxiv. 10; 
Lk. i. 71; vi. 22,27; xix.14; Jn. vii. 7; xv. 18 sq. 28-- 
25; xvii. 14; Tit. iii. 3; 1 Jn. ii. 9, [11]; iii. 13,15; iv. 
20; Rev. xvii. 16; pass., Mt. x. 22; xxiv.9; [Mk. xiii. 
13]; Lk. xxi. 17; ri: Jn. iii. 20; Ro. vii. 15; Eph. v. 29; 
Heb. i. 9; Jude 23; Rev. ii. 6 and Rec. in 15; pass. ib. 
vviii. 2. Not a few interpreters have attributed to 
μισεῖν in Gen. xxix. 31 (cf. 30); Deut. xxi. 15 sq.; Mt. 
vi. 24; Lk. xiv. 26; xvi. 13; [Jn. xii. 25]; Ro. ix. 13, 
the signification to love less, to postpone in love or esteem, 
to slight, through oversight of the circumstance that ‘the 
Orientals, in accordance with their greater excitability, 
are wont both to feel and to profess love and hate where 
we Occidentals, with our cooler temperament, feel and 
express nothing more than interest in, or disregard and 


415 


Μιχαήλ 


indifference to a thing’; Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 
304; cf. Riickert, Magazin f. Exegese ἃ. Theologie des 
INS ΠΟ Ρ. 21 ἘΠη." 

μισθαποδοσία, -ας, 7, (μισθός and ἀποδίδωμι; οἴ. the 
μισθοδοσία of the Grk. writ. [W. 247), payment of wages 
due, recompense: of reward, Heb. x. 35; xi. 26; of pun 
ishment, Heb. ii. 2. (Several times in eccles. writ.) * 

μισθ-απο-δότης, -ov, 6, (μισθός and ἀποδίδωμι; cf. the 
μισθοδότης of the Grk. writ.), (Vulg. remunerator); one 
who pays wages, a rewarder: Heb. xi.6. (Several times 
in eccles. writ.) * 

μίσθιος, -a, -ov, also of two terminations [cf. W. § 11. 
1], (μισθός), employed for hire, hired: as subst. [A. V. 
hired servant], Lk. xv. 17, 19, [21 WH in br.], (Sept. 
for Ὑ3, Lev. xxv. 50; Job vii.1. Tob. v.12; Sir. 
vii. 20; xxxi. 27; xxxvii.11. Anth. 6, 283, 3; Plut.).* 

μισθός, -οὔ, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 13¥, also for 
naw, ete. ; 1. dues paid for work; wages, hire: 
Ro. iv. 4 (κατὰ ὀφείλημα) ; ina proy., Lk. x. 7 and 1 Tim. 
vy. 18; Mt. xx. 8; Jas. v. 4; Jude 11 (on which see 
ἐκχέω, fin.) ; μισθὸς ἀδικίας, wages obtained by iniquity, 
Acts i. 18; 2 Pet. ii. 15, [ef. W. § 30, 1 8.1. 2. re 
ward: used — of the fruit naturally resulting from toils 
and endeavors, Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. ix. 18;—of divine 
recompense : a. in both senses, rewards and pun- 
ishments: Rey. xxii. 12. b. of the rewards which 
God bestows, or will bestow, upon good deeds and en- 
deavors (on the correct theory about which cf. Weiss, 
Die Lehre Christi vom Lohn, in the Deutsche Zeitschr. 
fiir christl. Wissenschaft, 1853, p. 319 sqq.; Mehlhorn, 
ἃ. Lohnbegr. Jesu, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol., 
1876, p. 721 sqq.; [ef. Beyer in Herzog xx. pp. 4-14]): 
Mt. v. 12; vi. 2,5,16; x.41sq.; Mk. ix. 41; Lk. vi. 23, 
35; 1 Co. iii. 8,14; 2Jn.8; Rev. xi. 18; ἔχειν μισθόν, to 
have a reward, is used of those for whom a reward is 
reserved by God, whom a divine reward awaits, Mt. v. 
46; 1 Co. ix. 17; with παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τ. οὐρ. 
added, Mt. vi. 1. ce. of punishments: μισθὸς ἀδικίας, 
2 Pet. ii. 13; τῆς δυσσεβείας, 2 Mace. viii. 33.* 

μισθόω: (μισθός) ; 1 aor. mid. ἐμισθωσάμην ; to let out 
for hire; to hire (cf. W. § 88, 3]: τινά, Mt. xx. 1, 7. 
(Hat., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. for 72¥, Deut. 
xxiii. 4; 2 Chr. xxiv. 12.) * 

μίσθωμα, -ros, τό,(μισθόω) ; 1. the price for which any 
thing is either let or hired (Hat., Isocr., Dem., Ael., al.; 
of a harlot’s hire, Hos. ii. 12; Deut. xxiii. 18; Mic. i. 7; 
Prov. xix. 13; Ezek. xvi. 31-34, and in class. Grk. [οἷ 
Philo in Flac. § 16 fin.]). 2. that which is either let 
or hired for a price, as a house, dwelling, lodging [(cf. 
Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip. p. 9 note 8)]: Acts xxviii. 
30.* 

μισθωτός, -od, 6, (μισθόω), one hired, a hireling: ΜῈ. 1, 
20; Jn. x.12sq. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.; Sept. for 
v2e.)* 

MirvAjyn, -ης, 9, Mitylene, the chief maritime town 
of the island of Lesbos in the Mgean: Acts xx. 14. 
(Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 84 sq.]* 

Μιχαήλ, ὁ, (OND, i. 6. “who like God?’), Michael 


μνᾶ 


the name of an archangel, who was supposed to be the 
guardian angel of the Israelites (Dan. xii. 1; x. 13, 21): 
Jude 9; Rey. xii. 7. [BB.DD. 5. v.]* 


μνᾶ, -ᾶς, ἡ, a word of Eastern origin [ef. Schrader, Keil- 
° ν 


Ladd, 


Hebr. τη} (fr. 739 to appoint, mark out, count, etc.), 
Lat. mina; 1. in the O. T. a weight, and an imaginary 
coin or money of account, equal to one hundred shekels: 
1K. x. 17, cf. 2 Chr. ix. 16; 2 Esdr. ii. 69, (otherwise in 
Ezek. xlv. 12 [ef. Bible Educator, index s. v. Maneh; 
Schrader in Riehm s. v. Mine p. 1000 sq.]). 2. In 
Attic a weight and a sum of money equal to one hun- 
dred drachmae (see δραχμὴ [and B. 1). 5. v. Pound; esp. 
Schrader in Riehm u. 5.1}: Lk. xix. 13, 16, 18, 20, 24 sq.* 
μνάομαι, see μιμνήσκω. 

Μνάσων, -wvos, ὁ, (MNAQ), Mnason, a Christian of 
Cyprus: Acts xxi. 16. (The name was com. also among 
the Grks.; [cf. Benseler’s Pape’s Eigennamen, s. v.].) * 

μνεία, -as, ἡ, (μιμνήσκω), remembrance, memory, mention : 
ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν, as often as I remember you [lit. 
‘on all my remembrance’ ete. cf. W. § 18, 4], Phil. i. 3; 
ποιεῖσθαι μνείαν τινός, to make mention of one, Ro. i. 9; 
Eph.i.16; 1Th.i. 2; Philem.4, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 254a.; 
Diog. Laért. 8. 2, 66; Sept. Ps. ex. (exi.) 4); py. ἔχειν 
τινός, to be mindful of one, 1 Th. iii. 6 (Soph., Arstph., 
Kur., al.) ; ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχειν τὴν περί τινος μνείαν, 2 Tim. 
3s 

μνῆμα, -ros, τύ, (uvaopat, pf. pass. μέμνημαι) ; 1. 
α monument or memorval to perpetuate the memory of any 
person or thing (Ilom., Pind., Soph., al.). 2. 
pulchral monument (Hom., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.). 3. 
a sepulchre or tomb (receptacle where a dead body is de- 
posited [ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sq.]): 
Mk.v.8GLT Tr WH; v.45; [xv.46 T WH]; Lk. viii. 
27; xxiii. 53; xxiv. 1; Acts 11.29; vii. 16; Rev. xi. 9, 
(Joseph. antt. 7, 1, 3; Sept. for 13))." 

μνημεῖον, -ov, τό; 1. any visible object for preserv- 
ing or recalling the memory of any person or thing ; a me- 
morial, monument, (Aeschyl., Pind., Soph., sqq.) ; in bibl. 
Grk. so in Sap. x. 7; specifically, a sepulchral monument : 
οἰκοδομεῖν μνημεῖα, Lk. xi. 47; Joseph. antt. 13, 6,5. 2. 
in the Scriptures a sepulchre, tomb: Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvii. 
52,60; xxviii. 8; ΜΚ. v.2; vi.29; Lk. xi.44; Jn. Vv. 28; 
xi. 17, 31, and often in the Gospels; Acts xiii. 29; Sept. 
for 3p, Gen. xxiii. 6, 9, 1.5; Is. xxii. 16, ete. 

μνήμη, -ης, ἡ,» (μνάομαι); a. memory,remembrance; Ὁ. 
mention: μνήμην ποιεῖσθαί τινος, to remember a thing, call 
it to remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 15; the same expression oc- 
curs in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, but in the sense of Lat. 
mentionem facere, to make mention of a thing.* 

μνημονεύω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐμνημόνευον ; 1 aor. ἐμνη- 
μόνευσα ; (μνήμων mindful); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 
431; 1. to be mindful of, to remember, to call to 
snind: absol. Mk. viii. 18; τινός, Lk. xvii. 32; Jn. xv. 20; 
xvi. 4,21; Actsxx. 35; 1 ΤῊ. 1. 8; [Heb. xiii. 7]; con- 
textually i. q. to think of and feel for a person or thing: 
w. gen. of the thing, Col. iv. 18; τῶν πτωχῶν, Gal ii. 10 


inschriften ἃ. s. w. p. 143], Arab. ee Syr. 


a seé- 


416 


μοιχαλὶς 


(see μιμνήσκω, ἢ.) ; w. an ace. of the obj. to hold in mem- 
ory, keep in mind: τινά, 2 Tim. ii. 8; ri, Mt. xvi. 9; 1 
Th. ii. 9; τὰ ἀδικήματα, of God as punishing them, Rev. 
xviii. 5 (see μιμνήσκω). Cf. Matthiae § 347 Anm. 2; W. 
p- 205 (198); [B. § 132, 14]. foll. by ὅτι, Acts xx. 31; 
Eph. ii. 11; 2 Th.ii. 5; foll. by an indir. question, Rev. 
TOs ui 3: 2. to make mention of: τινός, Heb. xi. 
15 [but al. refer this to 1 above] (Plut. Them. 32; τί, 
Plat. de rep. 4 p. 441 d.; lege. 4 p. 723 ¢.); περί τινος 
(as μνᾶσθαι in classic Grk., see Matthiae § 347 Anm. 1), 
Heb. xi. 22; so in Lat. memini de aliquo; cf. Ramshorn, 
Lat. Gr. $111 note 1; [Harpers’ Lat. Dict. 8. v. memini, 
I. 3; ef. Eng. remember about, etc.]. * 

μνημόσυνον, -ου; τό, (μνήμων), a memorial (that by which 
the memory of any person or thing is preserved), a remem- 
brance: εἰς μνημύσυνόν twos, to perpetuate one’s memory, 
Mt. xxvi.13; Mk. xiv.9; ai προσευχαί σου . . . ἀνέβησαν 
eis pnp. ἐνώπιον τ. θεοῦ, (without the fig.) have become 
known to God, so that he heeds and is about to help thee, 
Acts x. 4. (Hdt., Arstph., Thuc., Plut., al.; Sept. for 
431, 1731; also for ΤΠ 315, i. 6. that part of a sacrifice 
which was burned on the altar together with the frank- 
incense, that its fragrance might ascend to heaven and 
commend the offerer to God’s remembrance, Lev. ii. 9, 
16; v.12; Num. v. 26; hence εὐωδία εἰς μνημόσυνον, Sir. 
xlv. 16; and often in Siracid., 1 Mace., ete.) * 

μνηστεύω: Pass., pf. ptep. μεμνηστευμένος (RG) and 
ἐμνηστευμένος (1, Τ' Tr WH) [ef. W. § 12, 10; Veitch 8. 
v.; Τα. Proleg. p. 121]; 1 aor. ptep. μνηστευθείς ; (μνη- 
στός betrothed, espoused); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
WN; τινά (γυναῖκα), lo woo her and ask her in marriage; 
pass. to be promised in marriage, be betrothed: τινί, Mt. i. 
18; ΠΕΣ PIE, τ. 5" 

μογγι-λάλος, (fr. μόγγος [4]. μογγός, cf. Chandler § 366] 
one who has ἃ hoarse, hollow voice, and λάλος), speaking 
with a harsh or thick voice: Mk. vii. 32 Tdf. ed. 2, Tr txt.; 
but the common reading μογιλάλος deserves the prefer- 
ence; ef. Fritzsche ad loc. p. 302 sq. (Etym. Magn. [s. 
v. Barrapi¢eww].) * 

poyt-AdAos [on its accent ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -ον, 
(μόγις and λάλος), speaking with difficulty, [A. V. having 
an impediment in his speech]: Mk. vii. 32 [not Tr txt. ]. 
(Aét. 8, 38; Schol. ad Leian. ον. trag. ο. 27; Bekker, 
Anecd. p. 100, 22; Sept. for ab, dumb, Is. xxxv. 6.)* 

μόγις, (μόγος toil), fr. Hom. down, hardly, with diff- 
culty: Lk. ix. 39 [yet WH Trmrg. μόλις, q. ν.]. (3 Mace. 
vii. 6.) * 

μόδιος, -ov, ὁ, the Lat. modius, a dry measure holding 
16 sextarii (or one sixth of the Attic medimnus; Corn. 
Nep. Att. 2 [i.e. about a peck, A. V. bushel; οἵ. BB. DD. 
s.v. Weights and Measures]): Mt. v.15; Mk.iv.21; Lk. 
xi. 88." 

μοιχαλίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (μοιχός), a word unknown to the 
earlier writ. but found in Plut., Heliod., al.; see Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 452; [W. 24]; Sept. for nd8i (Ezek. xvi. 38; 
xxiii. 45) and ngNj0 (Hos. iii. 1; Prov. xxiv. 55 (xxx 
20)); an adulteress ; a. prop.: Ro. vii. 3; ὀφθαλμοὶ 
μεστοὶ μοιχαλίδος, eyes always on the watch for an adul- 


μοιχάω Ξ 


17 


μ᾿» 


μονογενής 


teress, or from which adulterous desire beams forth, 2 [ arms. It was heated red-hot by fire from within, and the 


Pet. ii. 14. b. As the intimate alliance of God with 
the people of Israel was likened to a marriage, those who 
relapse into idolatry are said to commit adultery or play 
the harlot (Ezek. xvi. 15 sqq.; xxiii. 43 sqq., etc.) ; hence 
μοιχαλίς is fig. equiv. to faithless to God, unclean, apostate : 
Jas. iv.4 [where cf. Alford]; as an adj. (cf. Matthiae 
§ 429, 4), γενεὰ μοιχ. : Mt. xii. 39; χνὶ. 4; Mk. viii. 38. 
(Cf. Clem. Alex. strom. vi. c. 16 § 146 p. 292, 5 ed. Sylb.]* 

μοιχάω, -@: to have unlawful intercourse with another's 
wife, lo commit adultery with: twa. in bibl. Grk. mid. 
μοιχῶμαι, to commit adultery: of the man, Mt. ν. 32” [yet 
WU br.]; xix. 9° [yet not WH mrg.], 9» [RGLTr 
br. WH mre.]; ἐπ᾽ αὐτήν, commits the sin of adultery 
against her (i. 6. that has been put away), Mk. x. 11; of 
the woman, Mt. v. 32° (where LT Tr WH μοιχευθῆναι 
for μοιχᾶσθαι); Mk.x.12. (Sept. for 983, Jer. iii. 8; v. 
7; ix. 2, ete.; in Grk. writ. fig. in the active, with τὴν 
θάλασσαν, to usurp unlawful control over the sea, Xen. 
Hell. 1, 6, 15; τὸ λεχθέν, to falsify, corrupt, Ael. ἢ. a. 
7, 39.)* 

μοιχεία, -as, 7, (μοιχεύω), adultery: Jn. viii. 3; Gal. v. 
19 Rec.; plur. [W. § 27,3; B. 8 123, 2]: Mt. xv. 19; 
Mk. vii. 21. (Jer. xiii. 27; Hos. ii. 2; iv. 2; [Andoe., 
Lys.], Plat., Aeschin., Lcian., al.) * 

μοιχεύω ; fut. μοιχεύσω ; 1 aor. ἐμοίχευσα; Pass., pres. 
ptep. μοιχευομένη ; 1 aor. inf. μοιχευθῆναι ; (μοιχός) ; fr. 
Arstph. and Xen. down; Sept. for 5835 10 commit adul- 
tery; a. absol. (to be an adulterer): Mt. v. 27; xix. 
18; Mk. x. 19; Lk. xvi. 18; xviii. 20; Ro. ii. 22; xiii. 
9: ease 11: b. τινά (γυναῖκα), to commit adultery 
with, have unlawful intercourse with another’s wife: Mt. 
y. 28 (Deut. v. 18; Lev. xx. 10; Arstph. av.558; Plat. 
rep. 2 p. 800 b.; Leian. dial. deor. 6,3; Aristaenet. epp. 
1, 20; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 2, 14); pass. of the wife, to 
suffer adultery, be debauched: Mt. v. 32* LT Tr WH; 
[xix. 9 WH mrg.]; Jn. viii. 4. By a Hebraism (see 
μοιχαλίς, b.) trop. μετά τινος (γυναικός) μοιχεύειν is used 
of those who at ἃ woman’s solicitation are drawn away 
to idolatry, i. 6. to the eating of things sacrificed to idols, 
Rev. ii. 22; ef. Jer. iii. 9, ete.* 

μοιχός, -ov, 6, an adulierer: Lk. xviii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 9; 
Heb. xiii. 4. Hebraistically (see μοιχαλίς, b.) and fig. 
faithless toward God, ungodly: Jas. ἵν. 4 RG. (Soph., 
Arstph., Xen., Plut., sqq.; Sept.) * 

μόλις, (μόλος toil); an adv. used by post-Hom. writ. in- 
discriminately with μόγις ; a. with difficulty, hardly, 
(ef. Sap. ix. 16, where μετὰ πόνου corresponds to it in the 
parallel member) : [Lk. ix. 39 Tr mrg. WH (al. μόγις, q- 
v.)]; Acts xiv. 18; xxvii. 7 sq. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. 
not easily, i. e. scarcely, very rarelu: Ro. v. 7.* 

Μολόχ, ὁ, (Hebr. 70, 0570, also D392; cf. Gesenius, 
Thes. ii. p. 794 sq-), indecl., Moloch, name of the idol- 
god of the Ammonites, to which human victims, particu- 
larly young children, were offered in sacrifice. Ac- 
cording to the description in the Jalkut ({Rashi (vulg. 
Jarchi)] on Jer. vii. [31]), its image was a hollow brazen 
figure, with the head of an ox, and outstretched human 


little ones placed in its arms to be slowly burned, while 
to prevent their parents from hearing their dying cries 
the sacrificing-priests beat drums (see γέεννα) : Acts vii- 
43 fr. Am. ν. 26 Sept., where Hebr. 03399, which ought 
to have been translated βασιλέως ὑμῶν, i. 6. of your idol. 
Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Moloch; J. G. Miiller in Herzog 
ix. 714 sq.; Merz in Schenkel v. 194 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v. 
Molech, Moloch; W. Robertson Smith in Encye. Brit. ed. 
9, s. v.; Baudissin, Jahve et Moloch ete. and esp. in 
Herzog 2 vol. x. 168-178].* 

μολύνω : 1 aor. act. ἐμύλυνα ; Pass. pres. μολύνομαι; 1 
aor. ἐμολύνθην; fr. Arstph. down; to pollute, stain, con- 
taminate, defile; in the N. T. used only in symbolic and 
fig. discourse : οὐκ ἐμόλυναν τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, of those who 
have kept themselves pure from the defilement of sin, 
Rev. iii. 4 (ef. Zech. iii. 3 sq.) ; μετὰ γυναικῶν οὐκ ἐμο- 
λύνθησαν, who have not soiled themselves by fornication 
and adultery, Rev. xiv. 4; ἡ συνείδησις μολύνεται, of a 
conscience reproached (defiled) by sin, 1 Co. viii. 7 (in- 
explebili quodam laedendi proposito conscientiam pol- 
luebat, Amm. Marcell. 15, 2; opp. to καθαρὰ συνείδησις, 
1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. 1. 3; μολύνειν τὴν ψυχήν, Sir. xxi. 
28; but see μιαίνω, 2). [SYN. see μιαίνω, fin.]* 

μολυσμός, -οῦ, 6, (μολύνω), defilement (Vulg. inguina- 
mentum); an action by which anything is defiled: with 
gen. of the thing defiled, σαρκὸς καὶ πνεύματος, 2 Co. vii. 
1. (Jer. xxiii. 15; 1 Esdr. viii. 80; 2 Mace. ν. 27; Plut. 
mor. p. 779 c.; [Joseph.c. Ap. 1,32, 2; 2, 24,5; ete.]; 
often in ecel. writ.) * 

μομφή, -js, ἡ, (μέμφομαι), blame: ἔχειν μομφὴν πρός 
τινα, to have matter of complaint against any one, Col. 
iii. 13. (Pind., Tragg., al.) * 

μονή, -ῆς, ἡ, (μένω), [fr. Hdt. down], a staying, abiding, 
dwelling, abode: Jn. xiv. 2; μονὴν ποιεῖν (1, Τ Tr WH 
ποιεῖσθαι, as in Thue. 1, 131; Joseph. antt. 8,13, 7; 13, 
2,1), tomake an (one’s) abode, παρά τινι metaph. of God 
and Christ by their power and spirit exerting a most 
blessed influence on the souls of believers, Jn. xiv. 23; 
see ποιῶ, 1 ¢.* 

μονογενής, -ἐς, (μόνος and γένος), (Cie. unigena; Vulg. 
[in Lk. unicus, elsewh.] and in ecel. writ. unigenitus), 
single of its kind, only, (A.V. only-begotten] ; used of only 
sons or daughters (viewed in relation to their parents), 
Hes. theog. 426, 448 ; Hdt. 7,221; Plat. Critias 118 d.; 
Joseph. antt. 1, 13,1; 2, 7, 4; Hovoyeves τέκνον πατρί, 
Aeschyl. Ag. 898. Soin the Seriptures: Heb. xi. 17; 
μονογενῆ εἶναί τινι (to be one’s only son or daughter), Judg. 
xi. 34; Tob. iii. 15; Lk. vii. 12; viii. 42;. ix. 38; [ef. 
Westcott on Epp. of Jn. p. 162 sqq.]. Hence the ex- 
pression ὁ povoy. vids τοῦ θεοῦ and vids τοῦ θεοῦ ὁ povoy., 
Jn. iii. 16, 18; i. 18 [see below]; 1 Jn. iv. 9; μονογενὴς 
παρὰ πατρός, Jn. i. 14 [some take this generally, owing to 
the omission of the art. (cf. Green p. 48 sq.)], used of 
Christ, denotes the only son of God or one who in the sense 
in which he himself is the son of God has no brethren. 
He is so spoken of by John not because 6 λόγος which 
was ἐνσαρκωθείς in him was eternally generated by God 


μόνος 


the Father (the orthodox interpretation), or came forth 
from the being of God just before the beginning of the 
world (Subordinationism), but because by the incarna- 
tion (ἐνσάρκωσις) of the λόγος in him he is of nature 
or essentially Son of God, and so in a very different 
sense from that in which men are made by him τέκνα τοῦ 
θεοῦ (Jn. i. 13). For since in the writings of John the 
title ὁ vids rod θεοῦ is given only to the historie Christ 
so called, neither the Logos alone, nor Jesus alone, 
but ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐνσαρκωθ εἰς or Jesus through the λόγος 
united with God, is 6 povoy. υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ. ‘The reading 
μονογενὴς θεός (without the article before povoy.) in Jn. 
i. 18, — which is supported by no inconsiderable weight 
of ancient testimony, received into the text by Tregelles, 
and Westcott and Hort, defended with much learning 
by Dr. Hort (“On μονογενὴς θεός in Scripture and Tra- 
dition” in his “Two Dissertations’? Camb. and Lond. 
1876), and seems not improbable to Harnack (in the 
Theol. Lit.-Zeit. for 1876, p. 541 sqq.) [and Weiss (in 
Meyer 6te Aufl. ad loc.) ], but is foreign to John’s mode 
of thought and speech (iii. 16, 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9), dissonant 
and harsh, — appears to owe its origin to a dogmatic zeal 
which broke out soon after the early days of the church ; 
[see articles on the reading by Prof. Abbot in the Bib. 
Sacer. for Oct. 1861 and in the Unitarian Rev. for June 
1875, (in the latter copious reff. to other discussions of 
the same passage are given); see also Prof. Drummond 
in the Theol. Rev. for Oct. 1871]. Further, see Grimm, 
Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap. p. 152 sq.; [Westcott u. s.].* 
μόνος, -η,-ον, Sept. chiefly for 739, [fr. Hom.down]; 1. 
an adjective, alone (without a companion) ; a. with 
verbs: εἶναι, εὑρίσκεσθαι, καταλείπεσθαι, etc., Mt. xiv. 23; 
Mk. vi. 47; Lk. ix. 36; Jn. viii. 9; 1 Th. iii. 1; added to 
the pronouns ἐγώ, αὐτός, ov, etc.: Mt. xviii. 15; Mk. ix. 
2; Lk. xxiv. 18; Ro. xi. 3; xvi. 4, ete. b. it is joined 
with its noun to other verbs also, so that what is predi- 
cated may be declared to apply to some one person alone 
[ef. W. 131 (124) note]: Mt. iv. 10; Lk. iv. 8; xxiv. 
12 [Τ᾿ om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Jn. vi. 22; Heb. 
ix. 7; 2 Tim. iv. 11; with a neg. foll. by ἀλλά, Mt. iv. 4. 
ὁ μόνος θεός, he who alone is God: Jn. v.44; xvii. 3; Ro. 
Xvi. 27; ὁ μόνος δεσπότης, Jude 4. οὐκ... εἰ μὴ μόνος: 
Mt. xii. 4; xvii. 8; xxiv. 36; Lk. vi.4; οὐδεὶς - -. εἰ μὴ 
μόνος, Phil. iv. 15. i. q. forsaken, destitute of help, Lk. 
x. 40; Jn. viii. 16; xvi. 32, (Sap. x. 1). 2. Neut. 
μόνον as adv., alone, only, merely: added to the obj., Mt. 
v.47; x.42; Acts xviii. 25; Gal. iii. 2; to the gen. Ro. 
iii. 29 [here WH mrg. μόνων] ; referring to an action ex- 
pressed by a verb, Mt. ix. 21; xiv. 36; Mk. v. 36; Lk. 
viii. 50; Acts viii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 19; Gal. i. 23; ii. 10. 
μόνον μή, Gal. v.13; οὐ (μὴ) μόνον, Gal, iv. 18; Jas. i. 22; 
ii. 24; foll. by ἀλλά, Acts xix. 26 [L ἀλλὰ eat; cf. W. 498 
(464); B. 370 (317)]; by ἀλλὰ πολλῷ μᾶλλον, Phil. 11. 
12; by ἀλλὰ καί, Mt. xxi. 21; Jn. v. 18; xi. 52; xii. 9; 
xiii. 9; xvii. 20; Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. (see as above, esp. 
B.)]; xxi. 13; xxvi. 29; xxvii.10; Ro. i. 32; iv. 12,16, 
23; 2Co. vii. 7, ete.; οὐ μόνον δέ, ἀλλὰ καί: Acts xix. 27; 


418 


poppow 


23; ix.10; 2 Co. vii. 7; viii. 19; Phil. ii. 27 [here οὐ δὲ 
μόνον ete.]; 1 Tim. v.13; [2 Tim. iv. 8. κατὰ μόνας (se. 
χώρας), See καταμόνας]. 

μον-όφθαλμος, -ov, (μόνος, ὀφθαλμός), (Vulg. duscus, Mk. 
ix. 47), deprived of one eye, having one eye: Mt. xviii. 9; 
Mk. ix. 47. (Hdt., Apollod., Strab., Diog. Laért., al. ; 
[Lob. ad Phryn. p. 136; Bekk. Anecd. i. 280; Ruther- 
ford, New Phryn. p. 209; W. 24].)* 

povew, -@: (μόνος) ; fr. Hom. down; to make single or 
solitary; to leave alone, forsake: pf. pass. ptep. χήρα 
μεμονωμένη, i. 6. without children, 1 Tim. v. 5, ef. 4." 

μορφή, -ῆς, 7, [fr. root signifying ‘to lay hold of’, ‘ seize” 
(cf. Germ. Fassung); Fick, Pt.i.p.174; Vanicek p. 719], 
fr. Hom. down, the form by which a person or thing strikes 
the vision ; the external appearance: children are said to 
reflect ψυχῆς τε καὶ μορφῆς ὁμοιότητα (of their parents), 
4 Mace. xv. 3 (4); ἐφανερώθη ἐν ἑτέρᾳ μορφῇ. Mk. xvi. 12; 
ἐν μορφῇ θεοῦ ὑπάρχων, Phil. ii. 6; μορφὴν δούλου λαβών, 
ibid. 7;— this whole passage (as I have shown more 
fully in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 33 
sqq-, with which compare the different view given by 
Holsten in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 449 
sqq-) is to be explained as follows: who, although (for- 
merly when he was λόγος ἄσαρκος) he bore the form (in 
which he appeared to the inhabitants of heaven) of God 
(the sovereign, opp. to pop. SovAov), yet did not think 
that this equality with God was to be eagerly clung to or re- 
tained (see ἁρπαγμός, 2), but emptied himself of it (see 
κενόω, 1) so as to assume the form of a servant, in that he 
became like unto men (for angels also are δοῦλοι τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 8 sq.) and was found in fashion 
asa man. (God μένει ἀεὶ ἁπλῶς ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ μορφῇ, Plat. 
de rep. 2 p. 381 ¢., and it is denied that God φαντάζεσθαι 
ἄλλοτε ἐν ἄλλαις ἰδέαις .. . καὶ ἀλλάττοντα τὸ αὐτοῦ εἶδος 
εἰς πολλὰς μορφὰς .. . καὶ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ ἰδέας ἐκβαίνειν, p. 
880 d.; ἥκιστ᾽ ἂν πολλὰς μορφὰς ἴσχοι ὁ θεός, p. 351 Ῥ.; 
ἑνὸς σώματος οὐσίαν μετασχηματίζειν καὶ μεταχαράττειν εἰς 
πολυτρόπους μορφάς, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 11; οὐ γὰρ 
ὥσπερ τὸ νόμισμα παράκομμα καὶ θεοῦ μορφὴ γίνεται, ibid. 
§ 14 fin.; God ἔργοις μὲν καὶ χάρισιν ἐναργὴς καὶ παντὸς 
οὑτινοσοῦν φανερώτερος, μορφὴν δὲ καὶ μέγεθος ἡμῖν apave 
στατος; Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 22, 2.)* 

[Syn. μορφή, σχῆμα: acc. to Bp. Lghtft. (see the 
thorough discussion in his ‘Detached Note’ on Phil. ii.) and 
Trench (N. T. Syn. § 1xx.), μορφή form differs from σχῆμα 
figure, shape, fashion, as that which is intrinsic and essential, 
from that which is outward and accidental. So inthe main 
Bengel, Philippi, al., on Ro. xii. 2; but the distinction is re- 
jected by many; see Meyer and esp. Fritzsche in loc. Yet 
the last-named commentator makes μορφὴ δούλου in Phil. 1. c. 
relate to the complete form, or nature, of a servant; and 
σχῆμα to the external form, or human body.] 

μορφόω, τῶ: 1 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. μορφωθῇ ; 
[ef. μορφή, init.]; to form: in fig. discourse ἄχρις [T Tr 
WH μέχρις, q. V. 1 a.] οὗ μορφωθῇ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, i. 6. 
literally, until a mind and life in complete harmony with 
the mind and life of Christ shall have been formed in 
you, Gal.iv.19. (Arat. phaen. 375; Anth. 1, 33,1; Sept 


and often by Paul [οἵ. W. 583 (543)], Ro. v. 8,11; viii. i Is. xliv. 13.) [Comp.: pera-, cvp-poppéda. |* 


μόρφωσις 


μόρφωσις, -cws, ἧ, (μορφόω); 
img: τῶν δένδρων, Theophr. e. pl. 3, 7, 4. 
i.e. a. the mere form, semblance: εὐσεβείας, 2 Tim. 
iii. 5. b. the form befitting the thing or truly express- 
ing the fact, the very form: τῆς γνώσεως x. τῆς ἀληθείας, 
Ro. ii. 20.* 

μοσχο-ποιέω, τῶ: 1 aor. ἐμοσχοποίησα; (μόσχος and 
ποιέω, [cf. W. 267) ; to make (an image of) α οσαἰ: Acts 
vii. 41, for which Ex. xxxii. 4 ἐποίησε μόσχον. (Eccles. 
writ.) * 

μόσχος, -ov, 6, [cf. Schmidt ch. 76, 12; Curtius p. 
593]; 1. a tender, juicy, shoot; a sprout, of a plant 
or tree. 2. ὃ, ἡ, μ' Offspring; a. of men [(ef. fig. 
Eng. scion) ], a boy, a girl, esp. if fresh and delicate. Ὄ. 
of animals, a young one. 3. acalf, a bullock, a heifer; 
so everywhere in the Bible, and always mase.: Lk. xv. 
23, 27, 30; Heb. ix. 12,19; Rev. iv. 7; (Sept. chiefly 
for 15 a bull, esp. a young bull; then for 1p3 cattle; for 
iv an ox or a cow; also for 53y ἃ calf). [(Eur. on.)]* 

μουσικός, -ή, -όν, (μοῦσα [music, eloquence, ete.]); freq. 
in Grk. writ.; prop. devoted to and skilled in the arts 
sacred to the muses; accomplished in the liberal arts; 
specifically, skilled in music; playing on musical instru- 
ments; so Rey. xviii. 22 [R. V. minstrels].* 

μόχθος, -ov, 6, hard and difficult labor, toil, travail; 
hardship, distress: 2 Co. xi. 27; 1 Th. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8; 
see κόπος, 3b. (Hes. seut. 306; Pind., Tragg., Xen., al.; 
Sept. chiefly for 92.) [Sy¥N. see κόπος, fin.] * 

μυελός, -ov, 6, (enclosed within, fr. μύω to close, shut), 
marrow: Heb. iv. 12. (From Hom. down; Sept. Job 
SIE) i 

μυέω, -G: pf. pass. μεμύημαι; (fr. μύω to close, shut 
[(cf. Lat. mutus); Curtius § 4781); a. to initiate 
into the mysteries (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.; 3 Mace. 
li. 30). b. univ. to teach fully, instruct; to accustom 
one to a thing; to give one an intimate acquaintance with 
a thing: ἐν παντὶ x. ἐν πᾶσι μεμύημαι, to every condition 
and to all the several circumstances of life have I be- 
come wonted; I have been so disciplined by experience 
that whatsoever be my lot I can endure, Phil. iv. 12; 
[but others, instead of connecting ἐν παντί etc. here (as 
object) with peu. (a constr. apparently without prece- 
dent; yet cf. Liinemann in W. § 28, 1) and taking the 
infinitives that follow as explanatory of the ἐν παντί 
ete., regard the latter phrase as stating the sphere 
(see πᾶς, II. 2 a.) and the infinitives as epexegetic (W. 
§ 44, 1): in everything and in all things have I learned 
the secret both to be filled ete. ].* 

μῦθος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down; 1. a speech, word, 
saying. 2. a narrative, story; a. α true narra- 
live. b. a fiction, a fable; univ. an invention, false- 
hood: 2 Pet. i. 16; the fictions of the Jewish theoso- 
phists and Gnostics, esp. concerning the emanations and 
orders of the zons, are cailed μῦθοι [A.'V. fables] in 
1 Tim. i. 4; iv. 7; 2 Tim.iv.4; Tit.i.14. (Cf. Trench 
ὃ xc., and reff. s. v. yeveadoyia. | * 

μυκάομαι, -ὥμαι; (fr. μύ or pd, the sound which a cow 

{Lat. mugio]), to low, bellow, prop. of horned 


1. a forming, shap- 
2. form; 


419 


μυρον 


cattle (Hom., Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.); to roar, of a 
lion, Rev. x. 3.* 

μυκτηρίζω: (μυκτήρ the nose); pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. 
μυκτηρίζεται; prop. to turn up the nose or sneer at; to 
mock, deride: τινά, pass. ov μυκτηρίζεται, does not suffer 
himself to be mocked, Gal. vi. 7. (For 1p, Job xxii. 
19; Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 7; Jer. xx. 7; p83, Prov.i.30; 713, 
Prov. xv. 20; [ef. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 39, 1 (and Harnack’s 
note)]. 1 Mace. vii. 34; [1 Esdr. i. 49]; Sext. Emp. 
adv. math. i. 217 [p. 648, 11 ed. Bekk.].) [Comp.: ἐκ- 
μυκτηρίζω.}" 

μυλικός, -ἤ, τόν, (μύλη a mill), belonging to a mill: Mk. 
ix. 42 RG; Lk. xvii. 2 LT Tr WH.* 

μύλινος, -7, -ον; 1. made of mill-stones: Boeckh, 
Inserr. ii. p. 784, no. 3371, 4. 2. i. q. μυλικός (see 
the preceding word): Rev. xviii. 21 L WH.* 

μύλος, -ov, 6, [(Lat. mola; Eng. mill, meal)]; 1. 
a mill-stone [(Anthol. ete.)]: Rev. xviii. 21 [L WH μύ- 
Awos, 4- V-]; μύλος ὀνικός, Mt. xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 LT 
Tr WH; Lk. xvii. 2 Ree.; a large mill consisted of two 
stones, an upper and an under one; the “nether” stone 
was stationary, but the upper one was turned by an ass, 
whence the name μ. dvixds. 2. equiv. to μύλη, a mill 
[(Diod., Strab., Plut.)]: Mt. xxiv.41 LT Tr WH: φωνὴ 
μύλου, the noise made by a mill, Rev. xviii. 22.* 

μυλών [not paroxytone; see Chandler § 596 cf. 8 584], 
-6vos, ὁ, place where a mill runs; mill-house: Mt. xxiv. 
41 RG. (Eur., Thuc., Dem., Aristot., al.) * 

Mipa (LT Tr WH Muppa (Tr -pp- see P, p) [cf. Tdf. 
on Acts as below and WH. App. p. 1607), -ov, ra, Myra, 
a city on the coast [or rather, some two miles and a half 
(20 stadia) distant from it] of Lycia, a maritime region 
of Asia Minor between Caria and Pamphylia [B. Ὁ. 5. v. 
Myra; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 186 sq.]: Acts xxvii. 5.° 

μυριάς, -ados, ἡ, (μυρίος), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept. for 
7237 and 435; a. ten thousand: Acts xix. 19 (on 
which pass. see ἀργύριον, 3 fin.). b. plur. with gen. 
i. gq. an innumerable multitude, an unlimited number, ((like 
our myriads], the Lat. sercenti, Germ. Tausend): Lk. 
xii. 1; Acts xxi. 20; Rev. v.11 [not Rec% 7; ix. 16 [here 
LT δισμυριάδες, q. v.]; used simply, of innumerable hosts 
of angels: Heb. xii. 22 [here G LTr put a comma after 
μυριάσιν]; Jude 14; Deut. xxxiii. 2; Dan, vii. 10.* 

μυρίζω: 1 aor. inf. pupicat; (μύρον); fr. dt. down; 
to anoint: Mk. xiv. 8.* 

μυρίος, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down]; 1. innumer- 
able, countless, [A. V. ten thousand]: 1 Co. iv. 15; xiv. 
19. 2. with the accent drawn back (cf. Brim. Ausf. 
Sprchl. § 70 Anm. 15, vol. i. 278; Passow s. v. fin.; [L. 
and 5. 5. v. III.]), μύριοι, -tat, -ta, ten thousand: Mt. xviii. 
24.* 

μύρον, -ov, τό, (the grammarians derive it fr. μύρω to 
flow, accordingly a flowing juice, trickling sap; but prob. 
more correct to regard it as an oriental word akin to 
μύρρα, Hebr. 19, 19; [Fick (i. 836) connects it with τ. 
smar ‘to smear’, with which Vaniéek 1198 sq. associates 
σμύρνα, μύρτος, ete.; οἵ. Curtius p. 7147}, ointment: Mt. 
xxvi. 7, 9 Rec., 12; Mk. xiv. 3-5; Lk. vii. 37 sq.; xxiii. 


Mucia 


56; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3,5; Rev. xviii. 13; distinguished fr. 
ἔλαιον [q. v. and see Trench, Syn. § xxxviii.], Lk. vii. 46. 
({From Aeschyl., Hdt. down]; Sept. for ;2u fat, oil, 
Prov. xxvii. 9; for 210 059), Ps. CXXxii. (Cxxxiii.) 2.) * 

Μυσία, -as, ἡ, Wysia, a province of Asia Minor on the 
shore of the gean Sea, between Lydia and the Pro- 
pontis; it had among its cities Pergamum, Troas, and 
Assos: Acts xvi. 7 sq.” 

μυστήριον, -ov, τό, (μύστης [one initiated; fr. μυέω, 
4: ν.7), in class. Grk. a hidden thing, secret, mystery: 
μυστήριόν σου μὴ κατείπῃς τῷ φίλῳ, Menand.; plur. gen- 
erally mysteries, religious secrets, confided only to the 
initiated and not to be communicated by them to ordi- 
nary mortals; [ef. K. 1 Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter- 
thiimer der Griechen, § 32]. In the Scriptures 1. 
a hidden or secret thing, not obvious to the understanding: 
1 Co. xiii. 2; xiv. 2; (of the secret rites of the Gentiles, 
Sap. xiv. 15, 23). 2. a hidden purpose or counsel; 
secret will: of men, τοῦ βασιλέως, Tob. xii. 7,11; τῆς 
βουλῆς αὐτοῦ, Judith ii. 2; of God: μυστήρια θεοῦ, the 
secret counsels which govern God in dealing with the 
righteous, which are hidden from ungodly and wicked 
men but plain to the godly, Sap. ii. 22. In the N. T., 
God's plan of providing salvation for men through 
Christ, which was once hidden but now is revealed: 
Ro. xvi. 25; 1 Co. ii. 7 (on this see ἐν, I. 5 f.); Eph. iii. 
9; Col. i. 26 sq.; with rod θελήματος αὐτοῦ added, Eph. 
i. 9; τοῦ θεοῦ, which God formed, Col. ii. 2; [1 Co. ii. 1 
WH txt.]; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, respecting Christ, Col. iv. 3; rod 
εὐαγγελίου, which is contained and announced in the 
gospel, Eph. vi. 19; ἐτελέσθη τὸ μυστ. τοῦ θεοῦ, said of 
the consummation of this purpose, to be looked for when 
Christ returns, Rev. x. 7; τὰ p. τῆς βασιλείας τῶν ovp. or 
τοῦ θεοῦ, the secret purposes relative to the kingdom of 
God, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv. 11; Lk. viii. 10; used of cer- 
tain single events decreed by God having reference to 
his kingdom or the salvation of men, Ro. xi. 25; 1 Co. 
xy. 51; of God’s purpose to bless the Gentiles also with 
salvation through Christ [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 26], 
Eph. iii. 8 ef. 5; with rod Χριστοῦ added, ibid. vs. 4; οἶκο- 
νόμοι μυστηρίων θεοῦ, the stewards of God’s mysteries, 
i.e. those intrusted with the announcement of God’s 
secret purposes to men, 1 Co. iv. 1; used generally, of 
Christian truth as hidden from ungodly men: with the 
addition of τῆς πίστεως, τῆς εὐσεβείας, which faith and 
godliness embrace and keep, 1 Tim. iii. 9, 16; τὸ μυστ. 


τῆς ἀνομίας the mystery of lawlessness, the secret pur- | 


pose formed by lawlessness, seems to be a tacit antithesis 
to God’s saving purpose, 2 Th. ii. 7. 3. Like 81 
and 7jD in rabbinic writers, it denotes the mystic or 
hidden sense: of an O. T. saying, Eph. v. 32; of a 
name, Rey. xvii. 5; of an image or form seen in a vision, 
Rev. i. 20; xvii. 5; of a dream, Dan. (Theodot.) ii. 18 56. 
27-30, where the Sept. so render τ. (The Vulg. trans- 
lates the word sacramentum in Dan. ii. 18; iv. 6; Tob. 
xii. 7; Sap. ii. 22; Eph. i. 9; iii. 3,9; v.32; 1 Tim. iii. 
16; Rev.i. 20.) [On the distinctive N. T. use of the 
word cf. Campbell, Dissertations on the Gospels. diss. ix. 


420 


Μωσῆς 


pt. i.; Kendrick in B. D. Am. ed. 8. v. Mystery; Bp 
Lghtft. on Col. i. 26.]* 

μυ-ωπάζω ; (μύωψ, and this fr. pvew τοὺς das to shut 
the eyes); to see dimly, see only what is near: 2 Pet. i. 9 
[some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would make it mean here closing 
the eyes; οἷ. our Eng. blink]. (Aristot. problem. 31, 
16, 25.) * 

μώλωψ, -wros, 6, (Hesych. τραῦμα καὶ ὁ ἐκ πληγῆς 
αἱματώδης τόπος ἣ καὶ τὰ ἐξερχόμενα τῶν πληγῶν ὕδατα), 
a bruise, wale, wound that trickles with blood: 1 Pet. ii 
24 fr. Is. lili. 5 [where A. V. stripes]. (Gen. iv. 23; Ex. 
xxi. 25; Is.i.6. Aristot., Plut., Anthol., al.) * 

μωμάομαι, -ῶμαι : 1 aor. mid. éuwpnoduny; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐμωμήθην ; (μῶμος, q-v-); fr. Hom. down; ‘o blame, find 
fault with, mock at: 2 Co. vi. 3; viii. 20. (Prov. ix. 7; 
Sap. x. 14.) * 

μῶμος, -ov, 6, [perh. akin to μύω, Curtius § 478; cf. 
Vanitek p. 732], blemish, blot, disgrace; 1. cen 
sure. 2. insult: of men who are a disgrace to a 
society, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [A. V. blemishes]. (From Hom. 
down; Sept. for 03, of bodily defects and blemishes, 
Lev. xxi. 16 sqq-; Deut. xv. 21; Cant. iv. 7; Dan. i. 4; 
of a mental defect, fault, Sir. xx. 24 (23).) * 

μωραίνω: 1 aor. ἐμώρανα; 1 aor. pass. ἐμωράνθην; 
(μωρός); 1. in class. Grk. to be foolish, to act fool- 
ishly. 2. in bibl. Grk. a. to make foolish: pass. 
Ro. i. 22 (Is. xix. 11; Jer. x.14; 2S. xxiv. 10); i. 4. to 
prove a person or thing to be foolish: τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ 
κόσμου, 1 Co. i. 20 (τὴν βουλὴν αὐτῶν, Is. xliv. 25). b. 
to make flat and tasteless: pass. of salt that has lost its 
strength and flavor, Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34.* 

μωρία, -as, 9, (μωρός), first in Hdt. 1, 146 [Soph., al.], 
foolishness: 1 Co. i. 18, 21, 23; ii. 14; iii. 19, (Sir. xx. 
31). 

μωρολογία, -as, 7, (uwpodsyos), (stultiloquium, Plaut., 
Vulg.), foolish talking: Eph.v.4. (Aristot. h. a. 1, 11; 
Plut. mor. p.504b.) [Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. ὃ xxxiv.]* 

μωρός, -d, -dv, [on the accent cf. W. 52 (51); Chandler 
88 404, 405], foolish: with τυφλός, Mt. xxiii. 17, 19 [here 
T Tr WH txt. om. L br. μωρ.]; τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, an act 
or appointment of God deemed foolish by men, 1 Co. i. 
25; i. q. without learning or erudition, 1 Co. i. 27; iiL 
18; iv. 10; imprudent, without forethought or wisdom, 
Mt. vii. 26; xxiii. 17,19 [see above]; xxv. 2 sq. 8; 1. 4: 
empty, useless, ζητήσεις, 2 Tim. ii. 23; Tit. iii. 9; in 
imitation of the Hebr. 533 (cf. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 1; Job 
ii. 10) i. q. impious, godless, (because such a man neglects 
and despises what relates to salvation), Mt. v. 22; [some 
take the word here as a Hebr. term ()D rebel) ex- 
pressive of condemnation ; cf. Num. xx. 10; Ps. Ixviii. 
8; but see the Syriac; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad 
loc.; Levy, Neuhebriisch. u. Chald. Worterbuch s. v. 
pn]. (Sept. for 523, Deut. xxxii. 6; Is. xxxii. 5 sq.; 
for 5°03, Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 8. [Aeschyl., Soph., al.])* 

Μωσῆς (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo 
(16, 2, 35 ed. Meineke); Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in 
Philo [cf. his “ Buch ν. ἃ. Weltschopf.” ed. Miiller p. 117 
(but Richter in his ed. has adopted Μωῦσῆς)], after the 


Μωσῆς 


Hebr. form Aw, which in Ex. ii. 10 is derived fr. Aw to 
draw out), and Mwic4s (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.’s 
4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Josephus [“in Josephus the 
readings vary; in the Antiquities he still adheres to the 
classic form (Μωσῆς), which moreover is the common 
form in his writings,” Miiller’s note on Joseph. ὁ. Ap. 1, 
31,4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt 
Moiojs uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. ef. Otto’s 
note on Justin Mart. apol. i. § 32 init.], and in the N. T. 
ed. Tdf.;— a word which signifies in Egyptian water- 
saved, i. 6. ‘saved from water’; οἵ. Fritzsche, Rom. vol. 
ii. p. 818; and esp. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p.824; Knobel 
on Ex. ii. 10; [but its etymol. is still in dispute; many 
recent Egyptologists connect it with mesu i. 6. ‘child’; 
on the various interpretations of the name ef. Miiller on 
Joseph. c. Ap.1.c.; Stanley in B.D. s. v. Moses; Schenkel 
in his BL. iv. 240 sq.]. From the remarks of Fritzsche, 
Gesenius, etc., it is evident also that the word is a trisyl- 
lable, and hence should not be written Μωυσῆς as it is 
by L Tr WH, for ov is a diphthong, as is plain from 
ἑωυτοῦ, τωὐτό, Ionic for ἑαυτοῦ, ταὐτό; [cf. Lipsius, 


[N, v: ν (ἐφελκυστικόνῚ, cf. W. §5,1b.; Β.9 (8); Tdf 
Proleg. p. 97 sq.; WH. App. p. 146 sq.; Thiersch, De Pentat. 
vers. Alex. p. 84 84. ; Scrivener, Plain Introd. etc. ch. viii. 
§ 4; Collation of Cod. Sin. p. liv.; see s. vv. δύο, εἴκοσι, πᾶς. 
Its omission by the recent editors in the case of verbs (esp. 
in 3 pers. sing.) is rare. In WH, for instance, (where “the 
omissions are all deliberate and founded on evidence ”) it is 
wanting in the case of ἐστι five times only (Mt. vi. 25; Jn. 
vi. 55 bis; Acts xviii. 10; Gal. iv. 2,— apparently without 
principle) ; in Tdf. never; see esp. Tdf. u.s. In the dat. plur. 
of the 3d decl. the Mss. vary; see esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 98 and 
WH. App. p-146sq. On ν appended to accus. sing. in a or ἢ 
(4) see ἄρσην. On the neglect of assimilation, particularly in 
compounds with σύν and ἐν, see those prepp. and Tdf. Pro- 
leg. p. 73 sq.; WH. App. p. 149; ef. Β. 8; W.48. On the 
interchange of ν and vy in such words as ἀποκτέννω (ἀπο- 
κτένω), ἐκχύννω (ἐκχύνω), ἔνατος (ἔννατος), ἐνενήκοντα (ἐννε- 
νήκοντα), ἐνεός (evveds), ᾿Ιωάννης (Iwdyns), and the like, see 
the several words. ] 

Ναασσών, (112 [i. e. ‘diviner’, ‘enchanter’]), 6, in- 
decl., Naasson [or Naashon, or (best) Nahshon]}, a man 
mentioned in (Ex. vi 23; Num. i. 7; Ruth iv. 20) Mt. 
i. 4 and Lk. iii. 32.* 

Nayyal, (fr. 13) to shine), ὁ, indecl., (Vulg. [Naggae, 
and (so A. V.)] Nagge), Naggai, one of Christ’s ances- 
tors: Lk. iii. 25." 

Ναζαρέτ [(so Ree." everywhere; Lehm. also in Mk. 
1.9; Lk.ii. 39,51; iv.16; Jn.i.45 (46) sq.; Tdf. in Mk. 


421 


Ναζαρέτ 


Gramm. Untersuch. p. 140]; add, W. p. 44; [B. 19 
(17)]; Ewald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel ed. 3 p. 119 
note), -€ws, 6, Moses, (Itala and Vulg. Moyses), the 
famous leader and legislator of the Israelites in their 
migration from Egypt to Palestine. As respects its de- 
clension, everywhere in the N. T. the gen. ends in -έως 
(as if from the nominative Μωῦσεύς), in Sept. -7, as Num. 
iv. 41, 45, 49, ete. dat. -7 (as in Sept., οἵ. Ex. v. 20; 
xii. 28; xxiv. 1; Lev. viii. 21, etc.) and -et (for the 
Mss. and accordingly the editors vary between the 
two [but TWH - only in Acts vii. 44 (influenced by 
the Sept. ?), Trin Acts l. ο. and Mk. ix. 4, 5,; L in Acts 
l. c. and Ro. ix. 15 txt.; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 119; WH. 
App. p. 1587), Mt. xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 4; Jn. v. 46; ix. 
29; Acts vii. 44; Ro. ix. 15; 2 Tim. iii. 8. ace. τῆν (as 
in Sept.), Acts vi. 11; vii. 35; 1 Co. x. 2; Heb. iii. 3; 
once -έα, Lk. xvi. 29; ef. [Tdf. and WH. u.s.]; W.§ 10, 
1; B.u.s.; [Etym. Magn. 597, 8]. By meton. i. q. the 
books of Moses: Lk. xvi. 29; xxiv. 27; Acts xv. 21; 
2 Co. iii. 15. 


N 


1. 9; Jn.i. 45 (46) sq.; Tr txt.in Lk. i. 26; ii. 4; iv. 16; 
Jn. i. 45 (46) 54ᾳ.; Trmrg.in Mk. i. 9; Lk. ii. 39, 51; 
and WH everywhere except in four pass. soon to be 
mentioned), Ν αἵ αρέθ (so Ree.*" ten times, Rec. six 
times, T and Tr except in the pass. already given or about 
to be given; Lin Mt. ii. 23; xxi.11(so WH here); Lk.i. 
26; Acts x. 38 (so WH here)), Nafapaé (L in Mt. iv. 
13 and Lk. ii. 4, after cod. A but with “little other at- 
testation” (Hort)), Nafapé (Mt.iv.13 T Tr WH; Lk. 
iv. 16 T WH)], 9, indecl., (and ra Nagapa, Orig. and Jul. 
African. in Euseb. ἢ. e. 1, 7,14; ef. Keim, Jesu von Naz. 
i. p. 319 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. p. 16] and ii. p. 421 sq. [Eng. 
trans. iv. p. 108], who thinks Nazara preferable to the 
other forms [but see WH. App. p. 1605; Tdf. Proleg. p. 
120; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5; Alford, Greek Test. 
vol. i. Proleg. p. 977), Nazareth, a town of lower Galilee, 
mentioned neither in the O. T., nor by Josephus, nor in 
the Talmud (unlessit is to be recognized in the appellation 
4¥) 13, given there to Jesus Christ). It was built upon 
a hill, in a very lovely region (cf. Renan, Vie de Jésus, 
14™ 64. p. 27 sq. [Wilbour’s trans. (N. Y. 1865) p. 69 
sq-; see also Robinson, Researches, ete. ii. 336 sq-]), and 
was distant from Jerusalem a three days’ journey, from 
Tiberias eight hours [or less]; it was the home of Jesus 
(Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 1); its present name is en Nazi- 
rah,a town of from five to six thousand inhabitants (cf- 


Nafapnvos 


Baedeker, Palestine and Syria, p. 859): Mt. ii. 23; iv. 
13; xxi. 11; Mk. i. 9; Lk. i. 26; ii. 4, 39, 51; iv. 16; 
Jn. i. 45 (46) sq.; Acts x. 39. As respects the He- 
brew form of the name, it is disputed whether it was 
ἼΧΣ ‘a sprout’, ‘shoot ’, (so, besides others, Hengstenberg, 
Christol. des A. T. ii. 124 sq.[Eng. trans. ii. 106 sq.]; but 
ef. Gueseler in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1831, p. 588 sq.), or 
ΤῊΝ) ‘ protectress’, ‘guard’, (cf. 2 Κα. xvii. 9; so Keim 
ἃ. s.) or N7¥) ‘sentinel’ (so Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. 
Luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 401), or ΠΧ) ‘watch-tower’ 
(so Ewald in the Gotting. gelehrt. Anzeigen for 1867, 
p. 1602 sq.). Fora further account of the town ef. Rob- 
inson, as above, pp- 333-343; Vobler, Nazareth in Paliis- 
tina. Berl. 1868; [Hackett in B. 1). 5. v. Nazareth ].* 

Ναΐζαρηνός, -ov, 6, a Nazarene, of Nazareth, sprung from 
Nazareth, a patrial name applied by the Jews to Jesus, 
because he had lived at Nazareth with his parents from 
his birth until he made his public appearance: Mk. i. 24; 
xiv. 67; xvi. 6; Lk. iv. 34; [xxiv. 19 L mrg. T Tr txt. 
WH]; and L T Tr WH in Mk. x. 47.* 

Ναζωραῖος, -ov, 6, i. q. Ναζαρηνός, 4. v-; Jesus is so 
called in Mt. ii. 23 [ef. B. 1). s. v. Nazarene; Bleek, 
Synopt. Evang. ad loc.]; xxvi. 71; Mk. x. 47 RG; Lk. 
xviii. 37; xxiv.19 RG Ltxt. Trmrg. ; Jn. xviii. 5, 7; xix. 
19; Actsii. 22; iii. 6; iv. 10; vi. 14; [ix.5.L br.]; xxii. 
8; xxvi. 9. οἱ Ναζωραῖοι [ A. V. the Nazarenes], followers 
of Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, was a name given to the Christians 
by the Jews, Acts xxiv. 5.* 

Nady or (so L mrg. T WH) Ναθάμ, 6, (11 [‘ given’ se. 
of God]), Nathan: a son of David the king (2 S. v. 14), 
LK. iii. 31.* 

Ναθαναήλ, 6, (0) gift of God), Nathanael, an inti- 
mate disciple of Jesus: Jn. i. 45-49 (46-50) ; xxi. 2. 
He is commonly thought to be identical with Bartholo- 
mew, because as in Jn. i. 45 (46) he is associated with 
Philip, soin Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14 Bartholo- 
mew is; Nathanael, on this supposition, was his personal 
name, and Bartholomew a title derived from his father 
(see Βαρθολομαῖος). But in Actsi. 13 Thomas is placed 
between Philip and Bartholomew; [see B D. 5. v. Na- 
thaniel]. Spath in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie, 
1868, pp. 168 sqq. 309 sqq. [again 1880, p. 78 sqq.] 
acutely but vainly tries to prove that the name was formed 
by the Fourth Evangelist symbolically to designate ‘ the 
disciple whom Jesus loved (see Ἰωάννης, 2).* 

ναί, a particle of assertion or confirmation [akin to 
vn; ef. Donaldson, Cratylus § 189], fr. Hom. down, yea, 
verily, truly, assuredly, even so: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21; 
Philem. 20; Rev. i. 7; xvi. 7; xxii. 203 vai. λέγω ὑμῖν 
κτὰλ., Mt. xi. 9; Lk. vii. 26; xi. 51; xii. δ; vai, λέγει τὸ 
πνεῦμα, Rev. xiv. 13; it is responsive and confirmatory 
of the substance of some question or statement: Mt. ix. 
28; ΧΙ, 51; xv. 27; xvii. 25; xxi. 16; Mk. vii. 28; Jn. 
xi. 27; xxi. 15 sq.; Acts v. 8 (9); xxii. 27; Ro. iii. 29; 
a repeated vai, most assuredly, [ A.V. yea, yea], expresses 
emphatic assertion, Mt. v. 37; ἤτω ὑμῶν τὸ ναὶ vai, let your 
vai be vai, i. 6. let your allegation be true, Jas. v.12 [B. 
163 (142); W. 59 (58)]; εἶναι or γίνεσθαι ναὶ καὶ οὔ, to 


422 


Naocdp 


be or show one’s self double-tongued, i. e. faithless, waver 
ing, false, 2 Co. i. 18 sq.; ἵνα παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ ναὶ καὶ τὸ od 
ov, that with me should be found both a solemn affirma- 
tion and a most emphatic denial, i. e. that I so form my re- 
solves as, at the dictate of pleasure or profit, not to carry 
them out, ibid. 17[ef. W.460 (429)]; vat ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν, 
in him what was promised has come to pass, ibid. 19; 
ἐπαγγελίαι ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί Sc. γεγόνασιν, have been fulfilled, , 
have been confirmed by the event, ibid. 20 [ef. Meyer 
ad loe.]. It is a particle of appeal or entreaty, like the 
[Eng. yea] (Germ. ja): with an imperative, vai... συὰ- 
λαμβάνου αὐταῖς, Phil. iv. 3 (where Rec. has καί for vai); 
ναὶ ἔρχου, Rev. xxii. 20 Ree.; so vai vai, Judith ix. 12. 
[A classification of the uses of vai in the N. T. is given 
by Ellicott on Phil. iv. 3; ef. Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on Mt. 
i. 26.]* 

Ναιμάν, see Νεεμάν. 

Natv [ WH Ναίν, (οἔ.1,.}], (8) a pasture; ef. Simonis, 
Onomast. N. T. p. 115), ἡ, Nain, a town of Galilee, situ- 
ated at the northern base of Little Hermon; modern 
Nein, a petty village inhabited by a very few families, 
and not to be confounded with a village of the same name 
beyond the Jordan (Joseph. Ὁ. j. 4, 9,4): Lk. vii. 11. 
[Cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 552 sq.]* 

ναός, -ov, ὁ, (ναίω to dwell), Sept. for Danity used of the 
temple at Jerusalem, but only of the sacred edifice 
(or sanctuary) itself, consisting of the Holy place and 
the Holy of holies (in class. Grk. used of the sanctuary or 
cell of a temple, where the image of the go | was placed, 
called also δόμος, σηκός, which is to be distinguished from 
τὸ ἱερόν, the whole temple, the entire consecrated en- 
closure; this distinction is observed also in the Bible; 
see ἱερόν, p. 299°): Mt. xxiii. 16 sq. 35; xxvii. 40; Mk. 
xiv. 58; xv. 29; Jn.ii. 19sq.; Rev. xi. 2; nor need Mt. 
xxvii. 5 be regarded as an exception, provided we sup- 
pose that Judas in his desperation entered the Holy place, 
which no one but the priests was allowed to enter [ (note 
the εἰς (al. ἐν) of TTrWH)]. with θεοῦ, rod θεοῦ, 
added: Mt. xxvi. 61; 1 Co. iii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 16; 2 Th. 
ii. 4; Rey. xi. 1; used specifically of the Holy place, 
where the priests officiated: Lk.i. 9, 21 sq.; of the Holy 
of holies (see καταπέτασμα), Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; 
Lk. xxiii. 45. in the visions of the Revelation used of 
the temple of the ‘ New Jerusalem’: Rev. iii. 12; vii. 15; 
xi. 19; xiv. 15,17; xv. 5 sq. 8; xvi.1,17; of any temple 
whatever prepared for the true God, Acts vii. 48 Ree. ; 
xvii. 24. οὗ miniature silver temples modelled after the 
temple of Diana [i. 6. Artemis (q. v.)] of Ephesus, Acts 
xix. 24. ὁ θεὸς ναὸς αὐτῆς ἐστιν, takes the place of a tem- 
ple in it, Rey. xxi. 22. metaph. of a company of Chris- 
tians, a Christian church, 2s dwelt in by the Spirit of 
God: 1 Co. iii. 16; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21; for the same 
reason, of the bodies of Christians, 1 Co. vi.19. of the 
body of Christ, ὁ ναὸς τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ (epexeget. gen. 
[W. 531 (494)]), Jn. ii. 21, and ace. to the Evangelist’s 
interpretation in 19 also. [(From Hom. on.)]* 

Ναούμ, (Dim) consolation), 6, Nahum, a certain Is 
raelite, one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 25.* 


vapoos 


νάρϑος, -ov, 7, (a Sanskrit word [cf. Fick as in Léw 
below]; Hebr. 373, Cant. i. 12; iv. 13 sq.); a. 
nard, the head or spike of a fragrant East Indian plant 
belonging to the genus Valeriana, which yields a juice 
of delicious odor which the ancients used (either pure 
or mixed) in the preparation of a most precious oint- 
ment; hence b. nard oil or ointment; so Mk. xiv. 
3; Jn. xii. 3. Cf. Winer, RWB. 5. v. Narde; Riietschi 
in Herzog x. p. 203; Furrer in Schenkel p. 286 sq. ; 
[Léw, Aramiische Pflanzennamen (Leip. 1881), § 316 
Ρ. 368 sq.; Royle in Alex.’s Kitto 8. v. Nerd; Birdwood 
in the ‘ Bible Educator’ ii. 152].* 

Νάρκισσος, -ου, ὁ, Narcissus [i. e. ‘ daffodil], a Roman 
mentioned in Ro. xvi. 11, whom many interpreters with- 
out good reason suppose to be the noted freedman of the 
emperor Claudius (Suet. Claud. 28; Tac. ann. 11,29 sq. ; 
12, 57 ete.) (cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 175]; in op- 
position to this opinion cf. Win. RWB. 8. v.; Riietschi 
in Herzog x. 202 sq.; [B. D. s. v.].* 

vavayéw, τῶ: 1 aor. evavaynoa; (fr. vavayds ship- 
wrecked ; and this fr. vais, and dyvu to break); freq. 
in Grk. writ. from Aeschyl. and Hat. down, to suffer ship- 
wreck: prop. 2 Co. xi. 25; metaph. περὶ τὴν πίστιν (as 
respects [A. V. concerning, see περί, II. b.] the faith), 
Vd bring 1s TG) 

ναύ-κληρος, -ov, 6, (ναῦς and κλῆρος), fr. Hdt. [and Soph.] 
down, a ship-owner, ship-master, i. e. one who hires out his 
vessel, or a portion of it, for purposes of transportation: 
Acts xxvii. 11.* 

vais, ace. ναῦν, ἡ, (fr. vdw or véw, to flow, float, swim), 
@ ship, vessel of considerable size: Acts xxvii.41. (From 
Hom. down; Sept. several times for 138 and 71738.) * 

ναύτης, -ov, 6, α sailor, seaman, mariner: Acts xxvii. 
27, 30; Rev. xviii. 17. (From Hom. down.) ἢ 

Ναχώ, 6, (1) fr. 17M to burn; [Philo de cong. erud. 
grat. § 9 N. ἑρμηνεύεται φωτὸς ἀνάπαυσις; al.al.; see B.D. 
Am. ed. 5. v.]), the indecl. prop. name, Nachor [or (more 
com. but less accurately) Nahor] (Gen. xi. 22), of one of 
the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 34.* 

νεανίας, -ov, 6, (fr. vedv, and this fr. véos; cf. μεγιστάν 
[q- v-], ξυνάν), fr. Hom. down; Hebr. 3y1) and 73n3; a 
young man: Acts xx. 9; xxiii. 17, and RG in 18 [so here 
WH tzxt.], 22; it is used asin Grk. writ., like the Lat. adu- 
lescens and the Hebr. Ἢ} (Gen. xli. 12), of men between 
twenty-four and forty years of age [οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
213; Diog. Laért. 8,10; other reff. in Steph. Thesaur. 
8. VV. νεᾶνις, νεανίσκος]: Acts vii. 58.* 

νεανίσκος, -ov, 6, (fr. vedv, see veavias; on the ending 
-ioxos, -ioxn, which has dimin. force, as ἀνθρωπίσκος, 
βασιλίσκος, παιδίσκη, etc., cf. Βείπι. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 443), 
fr. Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for 33 and 13; a young 
man, youth: Mt. xix. 20, 22; Mk. xiv. 51°; xvi. 5; Lk. 
vii. 14; Acts ii. 17; [and LT Tr WH in xxiii. 18 (here 
WH mrg. only), 22]; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; like yy) (2 5. ii. 
14; Gen. xiv. 24, ete.; ef. Germ. Bursche, Knappe i. q. 
Knabe, (ef. our colloquial “boys”, “lads 7) used of a 
young attendant or servant: so the plur. in Mk. xiv. 51 
Rec.; Acts v. 10.* 


423 


νεκρός 


Νεάπολις, -ews, 7, Neapolis, a maritime city of Mace. 
donia, on the gulf of Strymon, having a port [cf. Lewin, 
St. Paul, i. 203 n.]and colonized by Chalcidians [see B. D. 
s.v. Neapolis; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip., Introd. § iii.]: 
Acts xvi. 11 [here Tdf. Neav πόλιν, WH Νέαν Πόλιν, Tr 
Νεὰν πόλιν ; cf. Β. 74; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 604 sq.]. (Strab. 
7 p. 330; Plin. 4, (11) 18.)* 

Νεεμάν and (so L T Tr WH after the Sept. [see WH. 
App. p. 159 sq.]) Ναιμάν, ὁ (jy) pleasantness), Naaman 
(so Vulg. [also Neman]), a commander ot the Syrian 
armies (2 K. v. 1): Lk. iv. 21. 

νεκρός, -d, -dv, (akin to the Lat. neco, nex [fr. ἃ r. sig- 
nifying ‘to disappear’ ete.; cf. Curtius § 93; Fick i. p. , 
123; Vanitek p. 422 sq.]), Sept. chiefly for n>; dead, » 
i.e. 1. prop. a. one that has breathed his last, 
lifeless: Mt. xxviii. 4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. vii. 15; Acts v. 
10; xx. 9; xxviii. 6; Heb. xi. 35; Rev.i. 17; ἐπὶ νεκροῖς, 
if men are dead (where death has occurred [see ἐπί, B. 
2 ἃ. €. p. 233° fin.]), Heb. ix. 17 ; ἐγείρειν νεκρούς, Mt. x. 8; 
xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22; hyperbolically and proleptically i. q. as 
if already dead, sure to die, destined inevitably to die: τὸ 
σῶμα, Ro. viii. 10 (τὸ σῶμα and τὸ σωμάτιον φύσει νεκρόν, 
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 15 and 3, 22, 41; in which sense Luther 
called the human body, although alive, einen alten Maden- 
sack [cf. Shakspere’s thou worms-meat 1); said of the 
body of a dead man (so in Hom. often; for 793), a corpse, 
Deut. xxviii. 26; Is. xxvi. 19; Jer vii. 33; ix. 22; xix. 
7): μετὰ τῶν νεκρῶν, among the dead, i. e. the buried, Lk. 
xxiv. 5; θάψαι τοὺς νεκρούς, Mt. viii. 22; Lk. ix. 60; 
ὀστέα νεκρῶν, Mt. xxiii. 27 ; of the corpse of a murdered 
man, αἷμα ὡς νεκροῦ, Rev. xvi. 3 (for 33970, Ezek. xxxvii. 
9; for 55n, thrust through, slain, Ezek. ix. 7;xi.6). Ὁ. 
deceased, departed, one whose soul is in Hades: Rev.i. 18; 
ii. 8; νεκρὸς ἦν, was like one dead, as good as dead, Lk. 
xv. 24,32; plur., 1 Co. xv. 29; Rev. xiv. 13; ἐν Χριστῷ, 
dead Christians (see ἐν, I. 6 Ὁ. p. 211), 1 Th. iv. 16; very 
often of νεκροί and νεκροί (without the art. ; see W. p. 123 
(117) and cf. B. 89 (78) note) are used of the assembly 
of the dead (see ἀνάστασις, 2 and éyeipw, 2): 1 Pet. iv. 6; 
Rev. xx. 5, 12 sq.; τὶς ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, one (returning) 
from the dead, the world of spirits, Lk. xvi. 30; ἐκ νεκρῶν, 
from the dead, occurs times too many to count (see ἀνά- 
στασις. ἀνίστημι. éyeipw) : ἀνάγειν τινὰ ἐκ v., Ro. x. 7; Heb. 
xiii. 20; ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν, life springing forth from death, - 
i. e. the return of the dead to life [see ἐκ, I. 5], Ro. xi. 
15; πρωτότοκος ἐκ τῶν vexp. who was the first that returned 
to life from among the dead, Col. i. 18; also πρωτότ. τῶν 
vexp. Rev. i. 5; ζωοποιεῖν τοὺς v. Ro. iv 17; ἐγείρειν τινὰ 
ἀπὸ τῶν ν. to rouse one to quit (the assembly of) the dead, 
Mt. xiv. 2; xxvii. 64; xxviii. 7; κρίνειν ζῶντας x. νεκρούς, 
2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5; κριτὴς ζώντων x. νεκρῶν, Acts 
x. 425 νεκρῶν x. ζώντων κυριεύειν, Ro. xiv. 9. c. desti= 
tute of life, without life, inanimate (i. q. ἄψυχος) : τὸ σῶμα 
χωρὶς πνεύματος νεκρόν ἐστιν, Jas. ii. 26; οὐκ ἔστιν (6) θεὸς 
νεκρῶν ἀλλὰ ζώντων, God is the guardian God not of the 
dead but of the living, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx. 
38. 2. trop. _ a. [spiritually dead i. e.] destitute of 
a life that recognizes and is devoted to God, because given 


veKpow 


up to trespasses and sins; inactive as respects doing right: 
Jn. ν. 25; Ro. vi. 13; Eph. v. 14; Rev. iii. 1; with τοῖς 
παραπτώμασιν (dat. of cause [cf. W. 412 (384 sq.)]) added, 
Eph. ii. 1, 5; ἐν [but T Tr WH om. ἐν] τοῖς παραπτ. Col. 
ii. 13; in the pointed saying ἄφες τοὺς νεκροὺς θάψαι τοὺς 
ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς, leave those who are indifferent to the sal- 
vation offered them in the gospel, to bury the bodies of 
their own dead, Mt. viii. 22; Lk. ix. 60. b. univ. desti- 
tute of force or power, inactive, inoperative: τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, 
unaffected by the desire to sin [ef. W. 210 (199); B. 
§ 133, 12], Ro. vi. 11; of things: ἁμαρτία, Ro. vii. 8; 
πίστις, Jas. 11. 17,20 [ἢ ΟἽ, 26; ἔργα, powerless and fruit- 
less (see ἔργον, 3 p. 248" bot.), Heb. νἱ. 1; ix.14. (Cf. 
θνητός, fin. } 

νεκρόω, τῶ: 1 aor. impv. vexpwoate; pf. pass. ptep. 
vevexpwpevos; to make dead (Vulgate and Lat. Fathers 
mortifico), to put to death, slay: twa, prop., Anthol. app. 
313, 5; pass. νενεκρωμένος, hyperbolically, worn out, of an 
impotent old man, Heb. xi. 12; also σῶμα vevexp. Ro. iv. 
19; equiv. to to deprive of power, destroy the strength of: 
τὰ μέλη, i. 6. the evil desire lurking in the members (of 
the body), Col. iii. 5. (τὰ δόγματα, Antonin. 7, 2; τὴν 
ἕξιν, Plut. de primo frig. 21; [ἄνθρωπος, of obduracy, 
Epictet. diss. 1, 5, 7].) * 

νέκρωσις, -ews, 7, (veKpow) ; 1. prop. a putting to 
death (Vulg. mortificatio in 2 Co. iv. 10), killing. 2. 
i. 4: τὸ νεκροῦσθαι, [the being put to death], with τοῦ 
Ἰησοῦ added, i. 6. the (protracted) death [A. V. the 
dying] which Jesus underwent in God’s service [on the 
gen. cf. W. 189 (178) noie], Paul so styles the marks of 
perpetual trials, misfortunes, hardships attended with 
peril of death, evident in his body [ef. Meyer], 2 Co. 
iv. 10. 3. i. q. τὸ νενεκρωμένον εἶναι, the dead state 
[A. V. deadness], utter sluggishness, (of bodily members 
and organs, Galen): Ro. iv. 19." 

νεο-μηνία, see νουμηνία. 

νέος, -α, -ον, [allied with Lat. novus, Germ. neu, Eng. new; 
Curtius § 433], as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down, aE 
recently born, young, youthful: Tit. ii. 4 (for 1, Gen. 
xxxvii. 2; Ex. xxxiii. 11); οἶνος νέος, recently made, Mt. 
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37-39 [but 39 WH in br.], 
(Sir. ix. 10). 2. new: 1Co.v.7; Heb. xii. 24; 
i. q. born again, ἄνθρωπος (q. v. 1 f.), Col. iii. 10. [Syn. 
see καινός, fin.]” 

νεοσσός and (so T WH, see νοσσιά) νοσσός, -οὔ, 6, 
(νέος), a young (creature), young bird: Lk. ii. 24. The 
form νοσσός appears in the Vat. txt. of the Sept.; but 
in cod. Alex. everywhere veooods; cf. Sturz, De dial. 
Maced. p. 185 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 206 sq.; [cf. W. 
24]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. often for 13, 
of the young of animals, as Lev. xii. 6, 8; Job xxxviii. 
41.)* 

νεότης, “τος, 4, (νέος), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly 
for Ὁ" 3}; youth, youthful age: 1 Tim. iv.12; ἐκ νεότη- 
rés μου; from my boyhood, from my youth, Mt. xix. 20 
[RG]; Mk. x. 20; Lk. xviii. 21; Acts xxvi. 4; Gen. viii. 
21; Job xxxi. 18, etc.” 


νεό-φυτος, -ον, (νέος and φύω), newly-planted (Job xiv. | prop. one who sweeps and cleans a temple. 


424 


νεωκόρος 


9; Is. ν. 7, ete.); trop. a new convert, neophyte, [A. V. 
novice, i. 6.1 (one who has recently become a Christian): 
1 Tim. iii.6. (Eccles. writ.) * 

Νέρων [by etymol. ‘brave’, ‘bold’], -wvos, 6, Nero, the 
well-known Roman emperor: 2 Tim. iv. 23 Ree. [i. 6. in 
the subscription }.* 

vedw; 1 aor. ptep. νεύσας; to give a nod; to signify bya 
nod, [A. V. to beckon]: τινί, foll. by an inf. of what one 
wishes to be done, Jn. xiii. 24; Acts xxiv. 10. (From 
Hom. down; Sept. Prov. iv. 25.) [Comp.: δια-, éx-, ἐντν 
ἐπι-, κατα-νεύω.] " 

νεφέλη, -ns, ἡ, (νέφος), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for 
12}}» but also for ay and pnw; α cloud: [». φωτεινή, Mt. 
xvii. 5]; Mt.xxiv.30; xxvi.64; Mk.ix.7; xiii. 26; xiv. 
62; LK. ix. 34sq.; xii. 54; xxi. 27; Actsi.9; 1 Th. iv. 
17; 2 Pet. ii. 17 [Rec.]; Jude 12; Rev. i. 7; x. 1; xi 
12; xiv. 14 sqq.; of that cloud in which Jehovah is said 
(Ex. xiii. 21 sq., ete.) to have gone before the Israelites 
on their march through the wilderness, and which Paul 
represents as spread over them (ὑπὸ τὴν νεφέλην ἦσαν, 
ef. Ps. civ. (6ν.) 39; Sap. x. 17): 1 Co. x. 1 sq. [Sy¥N. 
see véedos.]* 

Νεφθαλείμ [and (so T edd. 2, 7, WH in Rev. vii. 6) 
Νεφθαλίμ;: see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. 1, ε7, 6, (9793, 
i.e. ‘my wrestling’ [cf. Gen. xxx. 8], or ace. to what 
seems to be a more correct interpretation ‘my crafti- 
ness’ [cf. Joseph. antt. 1, 19, 8; Test. xii. Patr. test. 
Neph. 8 1], fr. 5n3 unused in Kal; ef. Riietschi in Herzog 
x. p. 200 sq.), Naphtali, the sixth son of the patriarch 
Jacob, by Bilhah, Rachel’s maid: Rev. vii. 6; by meton. 
his posterity, the tribe of Naphtali, Mt. iv. 13, 15.* 

νέφος, -ους, [allied with Lat. nubes, nebula, ete.], τό, 
Sept. for 3 and }3y, a cloud; in the N. T. once trop. 
a large, dense multitude, a throng: μαρτύρων, Heb. xii. 1, 
often so in prof. auth., as νέφ. Ἡρώων, πεζῶν, ψαρῶν, Ko- 
λοιῶν, Hom. Π. 4, 274; 16,66; 17, 755; 23,133; avOpa- 
πων, Hdt. 8,109; στρουθῶν, Arstph. av. 578; ἀκρίδων, 
Diod. 3, 29; peditum equitumque nubes, Liv. 35, 49." 

[Syn. νέφος, νεφέλη: νέφος is general, νεφέλη specific; 
the former denotes the great, shapeless collection of vapor 
obscuring the heavens; the latter designates particular and 
definite masses of the same, suggesting form and limit. Cf. 
Schmidt vol. i. ch. 36.| 

vedpés, -οὔ, 6, a kidney (Plat., Arstph.); plur. the kid- 
neys, the loins, as Sept. for nv 53 used of the inmost 
thoughts, feelings, purposes, of the soul: with the addi- 
tion of καρδίας, Rev. ii. 23, with which ef. Ps. vii. 10; 
Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; Sap. i. 6.* 

vew-k6pos, -ov, 6, ἥ, (νεώς or ναός, and κορέω to sweep; 
[questioned by some; a hint of this deriv. is found in 
Philo de sacerd. honor. § 6 (cf. vewxopia, de somniis 2, 

42), and Hesych. s. v. defines the word 6 τὸν ναὸν κοσμῶν" 
κορεῖν yap τὸ σαίρειν ἔλεγον (cf. 5. ν. σηκοκόρος ; SO Etym. 
Magn. 407, 27, cf. s. v. νεωκόρος) ; yet Suidas 8. v. κόρη 
Ρ. 2157 6. says ν. οὐχ ὁ σαρῶν τ. ν. ἀλλ᾽ ὃ ἐπιμελούμενος 
αὐτοῦ (cf. 5. vv. νεωκόρος, σηκοκόρος) ; hence some connect 
the last half with root κορ, xoA, cf. 1,8. cura, colo]); 1» 
2. ons 


νεωτερικός 


who has charge of a temple, to keep and adorn it, a sac- 
ristan: Xen. an. 5, 3, 6; Plat. legg. 6 p. 759 a. 3. 
the worshipper of a deity (ovs i. 6. the Israelites 6 θεὸς 
ἑαυτῷ νεωκόρους ἦγεν through the wilderness, Joseph. b. j. 
5, 9,4); as appears from coins still extant, it was an 
honorary title [temple-keeper or temple-warden (cf. 2 
above) ] of certain cities, esp. of Asia Minor, in which 
the special worship of some deity or even of some deified 
human ruler had been established (cf. Stephanus, Thes. v. 
Ρ. 1472 sq.; [ef. B. D. s. v. worshipper]); so v. τῆς ᾿Αρτέ- 
μιδος, of Ephesus, Acts xix. 35; [see Bp. Lghtft. in Con- 
temp. Rey. for 1878, p. 294 sq.; Wood, Discoveries at 
Ephesus (Lond. 1877), App. passim]).* 

νεωτερικός, -7, -όν, (νεώτερος, q. V.), peculiar to the age 
of youth, youthful: ἐπιθυμίαι, 2 Tim. ii. 22. (3 Mace. iv. 
8; Polyb. 10, 24, 7; Joseph. antt. 16, 11, 8.) * 

γεώτερος, -a, -ov, (compar. of νέος, q. v.), [fr. Hom. 
down], younger; i. e. a. younger (than now), Jn. 
xxi. 18. b. young, youthful, [A. V. younger (rela- 
tively)]: 1 Tim. v. 11, 14; Tit. ii. 6; opp. to πρεσβύτε- 
pot, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq.; 1 Pet.v. 5. c. [strictly] younger 
by birth: Lk. xv. 12 sq. (4 Mace. xii. 1). d. an 
attendant, servant, (see νεανίσκος, fin.): Acts v. 6; infe- 
rior in rank, opp. to ὁ μείζων, Lk. xxii. 26.* 

vf, a particle employed in affirmations and oaths, 
(common in Attic), and joined to an ace. of the pers. 
(for the most part, a divinity) or of the thing affirmed 
or sworn by [B. § 149, 17]; by (Lat. per, Germ. bei): 
1 Co. xv. 31 (Gen. xlii. 15 sq.).* 

νήθω; to spin: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27. (Plat. polit. 
p- 289 ¢.; Anthol.; for 710, Ex. xxxv. 25 sq.) * 

νηπιάζω [cf. W. 92 (87) ]; (νήπιος, q. v.); to be a babe 
(infant): 1 Co. xiv. 206. (Hippocer.; ecctes. writ.) * 

νήπιος, -a, -ov, (fr. νη, an insep. neg. prefix [Lat. ne- 
fas, ne-quam, ni-si, ete. ef. Curtius § 437], and ἔπος) ; as 
in Grk. writers fr. Hom. down, a. an infant, little 
child: Mt. xxi. 16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3); 1 Co. xiii. 11; Sept. 
esp. for 9>iy and Ὁ». b. aminor, not of age: Gal. 
iv. 1 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loe.]. c. metaph. childish, 
untaught, unskilled, (Sept. for 9, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8; 
exviii. (exix.) 130; Prov. i. 32): Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; 
Ro. ii. 20; Gal. iv. 3; Eph. iv. 14; opp. to τέλειοι, the 
more advanced in understanding and knowledge, Heb. 
vy. 13 sq. (Philo de agric. § 2); νήπ. ἐν Χριστῷ, in things 
pertaining to Christ, 1 Co. iii. 1. In 1 Th. ii. 7 LL WH 
[ef. the latter’s note ad loc.] have hastily received νήπιοι 
for the common reading ἤπιοι." 

Νηρεύς [(cf. Vaniéek p. 1158)], τέως, 6, Nereus, a 
Christian who lived at Rome: Ro. xvi. 15 [where Lmrg. 
Νηρέαν |.” 

Νηρί and (so T Tr WH) Νηρεί [see et, ¢], 6, (fr. Ἢ) ἃ 
lamp), Neri, the grandfather of Zerubbabel: Lk. iii. 27.* 

γησίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of νῆσος), a small island: Acts 
xxvii. 16 [(Strabo) ].* 

γῆσος, -ov, 7, (νέω to swim, prop. ‘floating land’), an 
island: Acts xiii. 6; xxvii. 26; xxviii. 1, 7, 9,11; Rev. 
1.9; vi.14; xvi. 20. (Sept. for 8; [fr. Hom. down].)* 

γηστεία, -as, 7, (νηστεύω, q. v.), a fasting, fast, i. 6. ab- 


425 


νικώω 


stinence from food, and a. voluntary, as a religious 
exercise: of private fasting, Mt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr 
br. the vs.]; Mk. ix. 29 [T WHom. Trimrg. br.]; Lk. ii 
37; Acts xiv. 23; 1 Co. vii. 5 Rec. of the public fast 
prescribed by the Mosaic Law (Lev. xvi. 29 sqq.; xxiii 
27 sqq- [BB.DD. 5. v. Fasts, and for reff. to Strab., Philo, 
Joseph., Plut., see Soph. Lex. s. ν. 17) and kept yearly 
on the great day of atonement, the tenth of the month 
Tisri: Acts xxvii. 9 (the month Tisri comprises a part 
of our September and October [cf. B.D. s. v. month (at 
end) ]; the fast, accordingly, occurred in the autumn, ἥ 
χειμέριος Spa, when navigation was usually dangerous 
on account of storms, as was the case with the voyage 
referred to). b. a fasting to which one is driven by 
want: 2 Co. vi. 5; xi. 27; (Hippocr., Aristot., Philo, 
Joseph., Plut., Ael., Athen., al.; Sept. for pjx).* 

νηστεύω ; fut. νηστεύσω ; 1 aor. [inf. νηστεῦσαι (LK. v. 
34 T WH Trtxt.)], ptep. νηστεύσας ; (fr. νῆστις, 4- V-) 5 
to fast (Vulg. and eccles. writ. jejuno), i. 6. to abstain as 
a religious exercise from food and drink: either entirely, 
if the fast lasted but a single day, Mt. vi. 16-18; ix. 
14sq.; Mk. ii. 18-20; Lk. v. 33, [34, 35]; xviii. 12; Acts 
x.30 RG; xiii. 2,[3]; or from customary and choice 
nourishment, if it continued several days, Mt. iv. 2, ef. 
xi. 18; νηστεύει συνεχῶς καὶ ἄρτον ἐσθίει μόνον μετὰ ἅλα- 
Tos καὶ τὸ ποτὸν αὐτοῦ ὕδωρ, Acta Thom. § 20. (Arstph., 
Plut. mor. p. 626 sq.; Ael. v. h. 5, 20; [Joseph. ec. Ap. 
1, 34, 5 (where see Miiller)]; Sept. for sy.) * 

νῆστις, acc. plur. νήστεις and (so Tdf. [cf. Proleg. p. 
1187) νήστις (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326; Fritzsche, Com. 
on Mk. p. 796 sq.; ef. [ WH. App. p. 157°]; B. 26 (23)), 
6, ἡ, (ἔτ. νη and ἐσθίω, see νήπιος), fasting, not having 
eaten: Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3. (Hom., Aeschyl., Hip- 
pocr., Arstph., al.) * 

νηφάλεος (so Rec. in 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11, [where Ree.t= 
τλαιος], after a later form) and νηφάλιος [alone well 
attested” (Hort)], -ov, (in Grk. auth. generally of three 
term.; fr. νήφω), sober, temperate; abstaining from wine, 
either entirely (Joseph. antt. 3, 12, 2) or at least from its 
immoderate use: 1 Tim. iii. 2,11; Tit.ii. 2. (In prof. 
auth., esp. Aeschyl. and Plut., of things free from all 
infusion or addition of wine, as vessels, offerings, etc.) * 

vide; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. νήψατε; fr. Theogn., 
Soph., Xen. down; to be sober; in the N. T. everywh. 
trop. to be calm and collected in spirit; to be temperate, 
dispassionate, circumspect: 1 Th. v. 6,8; 2 Tim. iv. 5; 
1 Pet. i. 13; v. 8; εἰς τὰς προσευχάς. unto (the offering 
of) prayer, 1 Pet.iv. 7. [Sy¥N. see aypumvéw; and on the 
word see Ellic. on Tim.].c. Comp.: dva-, ἐκ-νήφω.} " 

Νίγερ, 6, (a Lat. name [‘ black ’]), Niger, surname of 
the prophet Symeon: Acts xiii. 1.* 

Νικάνωρ, [ (i. 6. conqueror’) ],-opos, 6, Nicanor, of An- 
tioch [?], one of the seven deacons of the church at Je- 
rusalem: Acts vi. δ." 

vikdw,-@; pres. ptep. dat. νικοῦ ντι, Rev. ii. 7 Lchm. 17 
LTTr, [yet all νικῶντας in xv. 2] (cf. ἐρωτάω, init.); 
fut. νικήσω; 1 aor. ἐνίκησα; pf. νενίκηκα; (νίκη); [fr. Hom. 
down]; to conquer [A. V. overcome] ; a. absol. ta 


νίκη 


carry off the victory, come off victorious: of Christ, vic- 
torious over all his foes, Rev. iii. 21; vi. 2; ἐνίκησεν. .. 
ἀνοῖξαι κτὰ. hath so conquered that he now has the right 
and power to open ete. Rey. v.5; of Christians, that hold 
fast their faith even unto death against the power of their 
foes, and their temptations and persecutions, Rey. ii. 7, 
11, 17, 26; 111. 5, 12, 21; xxi. 7; w. ἐκ τοῦ θηρίου added, 
to conquer and thereby free themselves from the power 
of the beast [R. V. to come victorious from; οἵ. W. 367 
(344 sq.); B. 147 (128)], Rev. xv. 2. when one is ar- 
raigned or goes to law, to win the case, maintain one’s 
cause, (so in the Attic orators; also νικᾶν δίκην, Eur. El. 
955): Ro. iii. 4 (from Sept. of Ps. 1. (li.) 6). b. with 
ace. of the obj.: τινά, by force, Lk. xi. 22; Rev. xi. 7; 
xiii. 7 [Lom. WH Trmrg. br. the el.]; of Christ the 
conqueror of his foes, Rev. xvii.14; τὸν κόσμον, to deprive 
it of power to harm, to subvert its influence, Jn. xvi. 33; 
νικᾶν τινα or τι is used of one who by Christian constancy 
and courage keeps himself unharmed and spotless from 
his adversary’s devices, solicitations, assaults: the devil, 
1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; Rev. xii. 11; false teachers, 1 Jn. iv. 4; τὸν 
κόσμον, ibid. ν. 4 sq. νικᾶν τὸ πονηρὸν ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ, by the 
force which resides in goodness, i. 6. in kindness, to cause 
an enemy to repent of the wrong he has done one, Ro. 
xii. 21; νικᾶσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, to be disturbed by an in- 
jury and driven to avengeit, ibid. [Comp.: dmep-ikaw.]* 

νίκη, -ns, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], victory: 1 Jn. v. 4 [ef. 
νῖκος |.* 

Νικόδημος, (νίκη and δῆμος [i. e. ‘conqueror of the 
peuple’ ]), -ov, 6, Nicodemus, (rabbin. 172. 2}, a member 
of the Sanhedrin who took the part of Jesus: Jn. iii. 1, 
4,9; vit. 505; xix. 39.* 

Νικολαΐτης, -ov, ὁ, a follower of Nicolaus, a Nicola/itan: 
plur., Rev. ii. 6, 15, — a name which, it can scarcely be 
doubted, refers symbolically to the same persons who in 
vs. 14 are charged with holding τὴν διδαχὴν Βαλαάμ, i. e. 
after the example of Balaam, casting a stumbling-block 
before the church of God (Num. xxiv. 1-3) by upholding 
the liberty of eating things sacrificed unto idols as well 
as of committing fornication; for the Grk. name Νικό- 
Aaos coincides with the Hebr. oy ace. to the interpre- 
tation of the latter which regards it as signifying destruc- 
tion of the people. See in Βαλαάμ; [ef. BB. DD. 5. vv. 
Nicolaitans, Nicolas; also Comm. on Rev. ll. ce.].* 

Νικόλαος, -ov, 6, (νίκη and λαός), Nicolaus [A. V. Nico- 
las}, a proselyte of Antioch and one of the seven deacons 
of the church at Jerusalem: Acts vi. 5.* 

Νικόπολις, -ews, 7, (city of victory), Nicopolis: Tit. iii. 
12. There were many cities of this name —in Armenia, 
Pontus, Cilicia, Epirus, Thrace — which were generally 
built, or had their name changed, by some conqueror to 
commemorate a victory. The one mentioned above seems 
to be that which Augustus founded on the promontory 
of Epirus, in grateful commemoration of the victory 
he won at Actium over Antony. The author of the 
spurious subscription of the Epistle seems to have had 
in mind the Thracian Nicopolis, founded by Trajan [(?) 
ef. Pape, Eigennamen, 8. v.] on the river Nestus (or 


426 


νοέω 


Nessus), since he calls it a city ‘of Macedonia.’ 
Sells 

νῖκος, -ous, τό, a later form i. q. νίκη (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 647; [B. 23 (20); W. 247), victory: 1 Co. xv. 55, 57, 
(2 Mace. x. 38; [1 Esdr. iii. 97}; εἰς νῖκος, until he have 
gained the victory, Mt. xii. 20; κατεπόθη ὁ θάνατος εἰς 
νῖκος, [A. V. death is swallowed up in victory] i. e. utterly 
vanquished, 1 Co. xv. 54. (The Sept. sometimes trans- 
late the Hebr. ΠΥ) i. e. to everlasting, forever, by εἰς 
νῖκος, 28. ii. 26; Jobxxxvi. 7; Lam. v.20; Am.i.11; viii. 
7, because ΓΚ) denotes also splendor, 1 Chr. xxix. 11, and 
in Syriae victory.) ἢ 

Nwevt, ἡ, Hebr. 1Π}}}} (supposed to be compounded of 
12 and 77)3, the abode of Ninus; [ef. Fried. Delitzsch as 
below; Schrader as below, pp. 102, 572]), in the Grk. 
and Rom. writ. ἡ Nivos [on the accent οἵ. Pape, Eigen- 
namen, s. v.], Nineveh (Vulg. Ninive [so A. V. in Lk. as 
below 7), a great city, the capital of Assyria, built appar- 
ently about B. c. 2000, on the eastern bank of the Tigris 
opposite the modern city of Mosul. It was destroyed 
[about] B.c. 606, and its ruins, containing invaluable 
monuments of art and archaeology, began to be exca- 
vated in recent times (from 1840 on), especially by the 
labors of the Frenchman Botta and the Englishman Lay- 
ard; ef. Layard, Nineveh and its Remains, Lond. 1849, 
2 vols.; and his Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh 
and Babylon, Lond. 1853; [also his art. in Smith’s Dict. 
of the Bible]; H. J. C. Weissenborn, Ninive u. s. Gebiet 
ete. 2 Pts. Erf. 1851-56; Tuch, De Nino urbe, Lips. 
1844; Spiegel in Herzog x. pp. 361-381; [esp. Fried. 
Delitzsch in Herzog 2 (ef. Schaff-Herzog) x. pp. 587-603 ; 
Schrader, Keilinschriften u. 5. w. index s. v.; and in Riehm 
s. v.; W. Robertson Smith in Encye. Brit. 5. v.]; Hitzig 
in Schenkel iv. 334 sqq.; [Rawlinson, Five Great Mon- 
archies etc.; Geo. Smith, Assyrian Discoveries, (Lond. 
1875)]. Inthe N. T. once, viz. Lk. xi. 32 R G.* 

[Nwevirms RG (so Tr in Lk. xi. 32), or] Nwevirns [Τ᾿ 
(so Tr in LK. xi. 30)] or Νίνευ είτης T WH (so Tr in Mt. 
xii. 41) [see εἰς « and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86; WH. App. p. 
154°], -ov, 6, (Νινευΐ, q. V.), 1. q. Ninos in Hdt. and Strabo; 
a Ninevite, an inhabitant of Nineveh: Mt. xii. 41; Lk. 
xi. 30, and L T Tr WH in 82." 

νιπτήρ, -ῆρος, ὁ, (νίπτω), a vessel for washing the hands 
and feet, a basin: Jn. xiii. 5. (Eccles. writ.) * 

virtw; (a later form for νίζω ; οἴ. Lob.ad Phryn. p. 241 
[Veitch s. v. νίζω ; B.63 (55); W.88(84)]); 1 aor. ἔνιψα; 
Mid., pres. νίπτομαι; 1 aor. ἐνιψάμην ; Sept. for ~M1; to 
wash: twa, Jn. xiii. 8; τοὺς πόδας τινός, ibid. 5 sq. 8, 12, 
14; 1 Tim. v. 10; mid. to wash one’s self [cf. B. § 135, 
5; W. § 38, 2b.]: Jn. ix. 7, 11, 15; τὰς χεῖρας, to wash 
one’s (own) hands, Mk. vii. 3; τοὺς πόδας, Jn. xiii. 10 
[T om. WH br. τοὺς π.7; νίψαι τὸ πρόσωπόν σου, Mt. vi. 
[Compe.: ἀπο- 


[B.D. 


17; vinrovra τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν, Mt. xv. 2. 
vintw. SYN. see λούω, fin. |* 

νοέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ἐνόησα ; [pres. pass. ptep. (neut. plur.) 
νοούμενα] ; (νοῦς) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for p29 and 
yann, and for Sawn; 1. to perceive with the mind, 
to understand: absol., with the addition τῇ καρδίᾳ, Jn. xii. 


νοημα 


40 (Is. xliv. 18); w.an acc. of the thing, Eph. iii. 4, 20; 
1 Tim. i. 7; pass.: Ro. i. 20; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xv. 17; 
xvi. 11; Mk. vii. 18; foll. by ace. w. inf., Heb. xi. 3; 
absol. i. q. to have understanding: Mt. xvi. 9; Mk. viii. 
17. 2. to think upon, heed, ponder, consider: νοείτω, 
se. let him attend to the events that occur, which will show 
the time to flee, Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; [similarly 
νόει ὃ (RG @) λέγω, 2 Tim. ii. 7]. [Comp.: ev-, xara-, 
μετα-, προ-, Uro-voEew. | * 

νόημα, -ros, τό, fr. Hom. down ; 1. a mental per- 
ception, thought. 2. spec. (an evil) purpose: aixpa- 
λωτίζειν πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ, to cause 
whoever is devising evil against Christ to desist from his 
purpose and submit himself to Christ (as Paul sets him 
forth), 2Co.x.53; plur.: 2 Co.ii. 11 (τοῦ διαβόλου, Ignat. 
ad Eph. [interpol.] 14; τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν πονηρᾶς, Bar. 
ii. 8). 3. that which thinks, the mind: plur. (where 
the minds of many are referred to), 2 Co. iii. 14; iv. 4, 
and perh. [xi. 3]; Phil. iv. 7, for here the word may mean 
thoughts and purposes; [others would so take it also in 
all the exx. cited under this head (cf. καύχημα, 2) ].* 

νόθος, -η. -ov, illegitimate, bastard, i. e. born, not in law- 
ful wedlock, but of a concubine or female slave: Heb. 
xii. 8; cf. Bleek adloc. (Sap. iv. 3; from Hom. down.) * 

νομή, -ῆς, , (νέμω to pasture), fr. Hom. [i. 6. batrach.] 
down; 1. pasturage, fodder, food: in fig. discourse 
εὑρήσει νομήν, i. 6. he shall not want the needful sup- 
plies for the true life, Jn. x. 9; (Sept. for ΠΡ, My, 
773). 2. trop. growth, increase, (Germ. Umsichfressen, 
Umsichgreifen) : of evils spreading like a gangrene, 2 
Tim. ii. 17 (of ulcers, νομὴν ποιεῖται ἕλκος, Polyb. 1, 81, 6; 
of a conflagration, τὸ πῦρ λαμβάνει νομήν, 11, 4 (5), 4 ef. 
1, 48, 5; Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 9).* 

νομίζω; impf. ἐνόμιζον; 1 aor. ἐνόμισα ; impf. pass. évo- 
μιζόμην ; (vopos); asin Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down ; 1. to hold by custom or usage, own as a cus- 
iom or usage; to follow custom or usage ; pass. νομίζεται 
it is the custom, it is the received usage: οὗ ἐνομίζετο προσ- 
εὐχὴ εἶναι, where acc. to custom was a place of prayer, 
Acts xvi. 13 [but LT Tr WH read οὗ ἐνομίζομεν προσευ- 
χὴν εἶν. where we supposed there was, etc.; cf. 2 below], 
(2 Mace. xiv. 4). 2. to deem, think, suppose: foll. 
by an inf., Acts viii. 20; 1 Co. vii. 36; foll. by an ace. w. 
inf., Lk. ii. 44; Acts vii. 25; xiv. 19; xvi. [13 (see 1 
above) ], 27; xvii. 29; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Tim. vi. 5; foll. 
by ὅτι, Mt. v.17; χ. 84 [W. § 56,1b.]; xx.10; Acts xxi. 
29; ὡς ἐνομίζετο, as was wont to be supposed, Lk. iii. 23. 
(Syn. see ἡγέομαι, fin. ] * 

νομικός, -7, τόν, (νόμος), pertaining to (the) law (Plat., 
Aristot , al.) : μάχαι, Tit. iii. 9; ὁ νομικός, one learned in 
the law, in the N. T. an interpreter and teacher of the 
Mosaic law [A. V. α lawyer; cf. γραμματεύς, 2]: Mt. 
xxii. 85; Lk. x. 25; Tit. iii. 13; plur., Lk. vii. 30; xi. 
45 sq. 525 xiv. 3.* 

νομίμως, adv., (νόμιμος), lawfully, agreeably to the law, 
properly: 1 Tim.i.8; 2 Tim.ii. 5. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., 
als) 


νόμισμα, -ros, τό, (νομίζω, 4. ν.); 1. anything received 


427 


νόμος 


and sanctioned by usage or law (Tragg., Arstph.). 2. 
money, (current) coin, [cf. our lawful money]: Mt. xxii. 
19 (and in Grk. writ. fr. Eur. and Arstph. down).* 

νομο-διδάσκαλος, -ov, 6, (νόμος and διδάσκαλος, οἴ. érepo- 
διδάσκαλος, ἱεροδιδάσκαλος, χοροδιδάσκαλος), a teacher and 
interpreter of the law: among the Jews [cf. γραμματεύς, 
2], Lk. v. 17; Acts v. 34; of those who among Chris- 
tians also went about as champions and interpreters of 
the Mosaic law, 1 Tim.i. 7. (Not found elsewh. [exc. 
in eccl. writ. ]) * 

νομοθεσία, -as, 7, (νόμος, τίθημι), law-giving, legislation : 
Ro. ix. 4. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Philo, al.) * 

νομοθετέω, τῶ: Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. νενομοθέτηται ; 
plupf. 3 pers. sing. νενομοθέτητο (on the om. of the augm. 
see W.72 (70); B.33(29)); (νομοθέτης); fr. [Lys.], Xen. 
and Plat. down; Sept. several times for 7717; as 
to enact laws; pass. laws are enacted or prescribed for one, 
to be legislated for, furnished with laws (often so in Plato; 
ef. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 391 [for exx.]); ὁ λαὸς ἐπ᾽ αὐτῆς 
(R ἃ ἐπ᾽ αὐτῇ) νενομοθέτηται (ἢ, ἃ νενομοθέτητο) the people 
received the Mosaic law established upon the foundation 
of the priesthood, Heb. vii. 11 [W. § 39,1 b.; ef. B. 337 
(290); many refer this ex. (with the gen.) to time (A. V. 
under it); see ἐπί, A. IL, cf. B. 2a. y.]. 2. to sanc- 
tion by law, enact: ri, pass. Heb. viii. 6 [ef. W. and B. 
Us Sal] 

νομο-θέτης, -ου, ὁ, (νόμος and τίθημι), a lawgiver: Jas. iv. 
12. ([Antipho, Thue.], Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., al.; 
Sept. Ps. ix. 21.) * 

νόμος, -ov, 6, (νέμω to divide, distribute, apportion), in 
prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything 
received by usage, a custom, usage, law; in Sept. very often 
for ΓΙ ΓΙ, also for 7p, ΠῚ, ete. In the N. T. a command, 
law; and 1. of any law whatsoever: διὰ ποίου 
νόμου; Ro. iii. 27; νόμος δικαιοσύνης, a law or rule pro- 
ducing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance 
of which we are approved of God, Ro. ix. 31, ef. Meyer 
[see ed. Weiss], Fritzsche, Philippi ad loe.; α precept or 
injunction: κατὰ νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκ. Heb. vii. 16; plur. of 
the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x. 
16; νόμος τοῦ νοός, the rule of action prescribed by reason, 
Ro. vii. 23; the mention of the divine law causes those 
things even which in opposition to this law impel to 
action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law, 
to be designated by the term νόμος, as ἕτερος νόμος ἐν τοῖς 
μέλεσί μου, a different law from that which God has given, 
i. 6. the impulse to sin inherent in human nature, or 6 
νόμος τῆς ἁμαρτίας (gen. of author), Ro. vii. 23, 25; viii. 2, 
also ὁ v. τοῦ θανάτου, emanating from the pewer of death, 
Ro. viii. 2; with which is contrasted 6 νόμος τοῦ πνεύματος, 
the impulse to (right) action emanating from the Spirit, 
ibid. 2. of the Mosaic law, and referring, ace. to 
the context, either to the volume of the law or to its 
contents: w.thearticle, Mt.v.18; xii.5; xxii.36; Lk. 
ii. 27; x. 26; xvi.17; Jn.i.17,45 (46); vii. 51; viii. 17; 
x. 84; xv.25; Acts vi. 18; vii. 53; xviii. 13, 15; xxi. 
20; xxiii. 3; Ro. ii. 13 [(bis) here L T Tr WH om. art. 
(also G in 13°) ], 15, 18, 20, 23%, 26; iv. 15"; vii. 1°, 5, 14, 


νόμος 


21 (on the right interpretation of this difficult passage 
ef. Knapp, Scripta varii Argumenti, ii. p. 385 sqq. and 
Fritzsche, Com. ad Rom. ii. p. 57; [others take vou. here 
generally, i. q. controlling principle; see 1 above sub 
fin. and ef. W. 557 (578); B.§ 151, 15]); Ro. viii. 3 sq. ; 
1 Co. ix. 8; xv. 56; Gal. iii. 18, 24; Eph. ii. 15 (on 
which pass. see δόγμα, 2); 1 Tim. i. 8; Heb. vii. 19, 
28; x. 1, ete.; with the addition of Μωσέως, Lk. ii. 22; 
Jn. vii. 23; vili.5; Acts xiii. 38 (39) [here L T Tr WII 
om. art.]; xv.5; xxviii. 23; 1Co.ix.9; of κυρίου, Lk. 11. 
39; of τοῦ θεοῦ, [ Mt. xv.6T WII mrg.]; Ro. vii. 22; viii. 
7. κατὰ Tov νόμον, ace. to the (standard or requirement 
of the) law, Acts xxii. 12; Heb. vii. 5; ix. 22. νόμος 
without the art. (in the Epp. of Paul and James and 
the Ep. to the Heb.; ef. W. p. 123 (117); B. 89 (78); 
[some interpreters contend that νόμος without the art. 
denotes not the law of Moses but law viewed as ‘a prin- 
ciple’, ‘abstract and universal’; ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 
ii. 19; also “ l’resh Revision,” ete. p. 99; Vaughan on 
Ro. ii. 23; esp. Van Hengel on Ro. ii. 12; Gifford in 
the Speaker’s Com. on Rom. p. 41 sqq. (cf. Cremer s. v.). 
This distinction is contrary to usage (as exhibited e. g. 
in Sap. xviii. 4; Sir. xix. 17; xxi. 11; xxxi. 8; xxxii. 1; 
XXXV. (Xxxii.) 15, 24; xxxvi. (xxxiil.) 2, 3; 1 Mace. ii. 
21; 4 Mace. vii. 7, and many other exx. in the Apoer.; 
see Wahl, Clavis Apocrr. s. v. p. 8343), and to the con- 
text in such Pauline pass. as the foll.: Ro. ii. 17, 25, 27; 
vii. 1 (7); xiii. 8, 10; Gal. iii. 17, 18, 23, 24, (cf. Ro. ii. 
12 and iii. 19; v. 13 and 14); etc. It should be added, 
perhaps, that neither the list of pass. with the art. nor 
of those without it, as given by Prof. Grimm, claims to be 
complete]): Ro. ii. 28", 25; iii. 31; iv. 15°, v. 133 vii. 1", 
2°; x.4; xiil. 10; Gal. iii. 21°; v. 28; 1 Tim.1.9; Heb. 
vii. 12, ete.; with the addition of κυρίου, Lk. ii. 23 [here 
Lhas the art.], 24 [LT Tr WH add the art. ]; of θεοῦ, Ro. 
vii. 25; of Μωῦσέως, Heb. x. 28; esp. after prepositions, 
as διὰ νόμου, Ro. ii. 12; iii. 20; Gal. 11. 21; χωρὶς νόμου, 
without the co-operation of the law, Ro. iii. 21; destitute 
or ignorant of the law, Ro. vii. 9; where no law has been 
promulged, Ro. vii. 8; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, those who rule their 
life by the law, Jews, Ro. iv. 14, 16 [here all edd. have 
the art.]; of ἐν νόμῳ, who are in the power of the law, i. e. 
bound to it, Ro. iii. 19 [but all texts here ἐν τῷ v.]; ὑπὸ 
νόμον, under dominion of the law, Ro. vi. 14 sq.; Gal. iii. 
235 Iv. 4, 21; v. 18; οἱ ὑπὸ νόμον, 1 Co. ix. 20; δικαιοῦ- 
σθαι ἐν νόμῳ, Gal. v. 4; ἔργα νόμου (see ἔργον, sub fin.) ; 
ἐν νόμῳ ἁμαρτάνειν, under law i. e. with knowledge of the 
law, Ro. ii. 12 (equiv. to ἔχοντες νόμον, ef. vs. 14); they 
to whom the Mosaic law has not been made known are 
said νόμον μὴ ἔχειν, ibid. 14; ἑαυτοῖς εἰσι νόμος, their natu- 
ral knowledge of right takes the place of the Mosaic law, 
ibid. ; νόμος ἔργων. the law demanding works, Ro. iii. 27; 
διὰ νόμου νόμῳ ἀπέθανον, by the law itself (when I became 
convinced that by keeping it I could not attain to salva- 
tion, cf. Ro. vii. 9-24) I became utterly estranged from 
the law, Gal. ii. 19 [ef. W. 210 (197); B.§ 133,12]. κατὰ 
νόμον. as respects the interpretation and observance of 
the law, Phil. ui. 5. The observance of the law is 


428 


vous 


designated by the foll. phrases: πληροῦν νόμον, Ro. xiii. 
8; τὸν ν. Gal. v. 14; πληροῦν τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου, Ro. 
Vili. 4; φυλάσσειν (τὸν) v., Acts xxi. 24; Gal. vi. 18; τὰ 
δικαιώμ. τοῦ v. Ro. ii. 26; πράσσειν νόμον, Ro. ii. 25; ποιεῖν 
τὸν v., Jn. vii. 19; Gal. ν. 8; τηρεῖν, Acts xv. 5, 24 [Rec.]; 
Jas. ii. 10; τελεῖν, Ro: ii. 27 (ef. Jas. ii. 8); [on the other 
hand, ἀκυροῦν τὸν νόμ. Mt.xv. 6 T Wii mrg.]. ὁ νόμος is 
used of some particular ordinance of the Mosaic law in 
Jn. xix. 7; Jas. ii. 8; with a gen. of the obj. added, τοῦ 
ἀνδρός, the law enacted respecting the husband, i. e. bind- 
ing the wife to her husband, Ro. vii. 2 where Rec.*!* om. 
τοῦ νόμ. (SO 6 νόμος τοῦ πάσχα, Num. ix. 12; τοῦ λεπροῦ, 
Lev. xiv. 2; other exx. are given in I’ritzsche, Ep.ad Rom. 
ii. p. 9; ef. W. § 30,2 β.). Although the Jews did not 
make a distinction as we do between the moral, the 
ceremonial, the civil, precepts of the law, but thought 
that all should be honored and kept with the same con- 
scientious and pious regard, yet in the N. T. not infre- 
quently the law is so referred to as to show that the 
speaker or writer has his eye on the ethical part of it 
alone, as of primary importance and among Christians 
also of perpetual validity, but does not care for the cere- 
monial and civil portions, as being written for Jews 
alone: thus in Gal. v. 14; Ro. xiii. 8,10; ii. 26 sq.; vil 
21, 25; Mt. v. 18, and often; τὰ τοῦ νόμου, the precepts, 
moral requirements, of the law, Ro. ii.14. In the Ep. of 
James νόμος (without the article) designates only the 
ethical portion of the Mosaic law, confirmed by the au- 
thority of the Christian religion: ii. 9-11; iv. 11; in the 
Ep. to the Heb., on the other hand, the ceremonial 
part of the law is the prominent idea. 3. of the 
Christian religion: νόμος πίστεως, the law demanding 
faith, Ro. iii. 27; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, the moral instruction given 
by Christ, esp. the precept concerning love, Gal. vi. 2; τῆς 
ἐλευθερίας (see ἐλευθερία, a.), Jas. i. 25; 11. 12; ef. ὁ καινὸς 
vopos τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης 
ὦν, Barn. ep. 2, 6 [see Harnack’s note in loc.]. 4. 
by metonymy ὁ νόμος, the name of the more important 
part (i.e. the Pentateuch), is put for the entire collection of 
the sacred books of the O. T.: Jn. vii. 49; x. 34 (Ps. Ixxxi. 
(Ixxxii.) 6); Jn. xii. 34 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 4; Dan. (Theodot.) 
ii. 44; vii.14); Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Ixviii. 
(Ixix.) 15); Ro.iii.19; 1 Co. xiv. 21 (Is. xxviii. 11 sq.; so 
2 Mace. ii. 18, where cf. Grimm); ὁ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται; 
Mt. xi. 13; Jn.i.46; Acts xili.15; xxiv. 145 xxviii. 23; 
Ro. iii. 21, (2 Mace. xv. 9); i. q. the system of morals 
taught in the O. T., Mt. v.17; vii. 12; xxii. 40; ὁ vop. (of) 
προφ. καὶ ψαλμοί, the religious dispensation contained 
in the O. T., Lk. xxiv. 44 (6 νόμος, of mpod. x. τὰ ἄλλα 
πάτρια βιβλία, prol. to Sir.). Paul’s doctrine concerning 
6 νόμος is exhibited by (besides others) Weiss, Bibl. Theol. 
§§ 71, 72; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 69 sq. [Eng. trans. i- 
p- 68 sq.; A. Zahn, Das Gesetz Gottes nach ἃ. Lehre u. 
Erfahrung ἃ. Apostel Paulus, Halle 1876; R. Tiling, Die 
Paulinische Lehre vom νόμος nach d. vier Hauptbriefen, 
u.s.w. Dorpat, 1878]. νόμος does not occur in the foll. N. 
T. bks.: Mk.,2 Co,, Col., Thess., 2 Tim., Pet,,Jude,Jn., Rev 


νόος, see vous. 


voodew 


νοσέω, -ῶ ; (νόσος) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; to be 
sick; metaph. of any ailment of the mind (ἀνηκέστῳ 
πονηρίᾳ νοσεῖν ᾿Αθηναίους, Xen. mem. 3, 5, 18 and many 
other exx. in Grk. auth.): περί τι, to be taken with such 
an interest in a thing as amounts to a disease, to have 
a morbid fondness for, 1 Tim. vi. 4 (περὶ δόξαν, Plat. mor. 
p. 546 d.).* 

νόσημα, -ros, τό, disease, sickness: Jn. ν. 4 Rec. Lchm. 
(Tragg., Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plat., sqq.)* 

νόσος, -ov, 9, disease, sickness: Mt. iv. 23 sq.; viii. 17; 
ix. 35; x.1; Mk. i. 34; iii, 15 [RGL]; Lk. iv. 40; vi. 
18 (17); vii. 21; ix.1; Acts xix.12. (Deut. vii. 15; 
xxviii. 59; Ex. xv. 26, ete. [Hom., Hadt., al.])* 

νοσσιά, -as, ἡ, (for veooord, the earlier and more com- 
mon form [cf. WH. App. p. 145], fr. νεοσσός, q. v.), Sept. 
for 1); 1. a nest of birds. 2. a brood of birds: 
Lk. xiii. 34 [but L txt. νοσσία, see the foll. word]. (Deut. 
xxxii. 11 [Gen. vi. 14; Num. xxiv. 22; Prov. xvi. 16, 
etc. ].) * 

νοσσίον, -ov, τό, (see νοσσιά), a brood of hirds: Mt. 
xxiii. 37 and Lchm. txt. in Lk. xiii. 34 [where al. νοσσιά, 
see the preced. word]. (Arstph., Aristot., Ael.; for D798 
Ps. Ixxxiii. (Ixxxiv.) 4.) * j 

νοσσός, see νεοσσός. 

νοσφίζω: Mid., pres. ptep. νοσφιζόμενος ; 1 aor. ἐνο- 
σφισάμην; (νόσφι afar, apart); 0 set apart, separate, 
divide; mid. to set apart or separate yor one’s self, i. e. to 
purloin, embezzle, withdraw covertiy and appropriate to 
one’s own use: χρήματα, Xen. Uyr. 4, 2 42; Plut. Lucull. 
37; Aristid. 4; μηδὲν τῶν ex τῆς διαρπαγῆς, Polyb. 10, 
16, 6; χρυσώματα, 2 Mace. iv. 32; ἀλλότρια, Joseph. 
antt. 4, 8, 29; absol. Tit. ii. 10; (τὶ) ἀπό τινος, Acts v. 
2, 3 [here A. V. keep back]; Sept. Josh. vii. 1; ἔκ τινος, 
Athen. 6 p. 234 ἃ." 

νότος, -ov, 6, the south wind; a. prop.: Lk. xii. 
55; Acts xxvii. 13; xxviii. 13. b. the South (cf. 
βορρᾶς): Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13. 
(From Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 333, the southern 
quarter, the South; and for DIN, the ‘southern (both) 
wind and quarter; }2°n, the same; Dp, the eastern 
(both) quarter and wind.) * 

νουθεσία, -as, ἡ, (νουθετέω, 4. V-); admonition, exhorta- 
tion: Sap. xvi. 6; 1 Co. x. 11; Tit. iii. 10; κυρίου, such 
as belongs to the Lord (Christ) or proceeds from him, 
Eph. vi. 4 [cf. W. 189 (178)]. (Arstph. ran. 1009; 
Diod. 15, 7; besides in Philo, Joseph. and other recent 
writ. for νουθέτησις and νουθετία, forms more com. in the 
earlier writ. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 512; [W. 24].) [6 ΄ 
Trench § xxxii.]* 

γουθετέω, -@; (νουθέτης, and this fr. νοῦς and τίθημι; 
hence prop. i. q. ἐν τῷ νῷ τίθημι, lit. ‘put in mind’, Germ. 
‘an das Herz legen’); to admonish, warn, exhort: τινά, 
Acts xx. 81; Ro. xv. 14; 1 Co. iv. 14; Col. i. 28; iii. 16; 
1 ΤῊ. ν. 12,14; 2 ΤῊ. 1. 16. (1 8. iii. 13]; Jobiv.3; 
Sap. χὶ. 11; xii. 2; Trage., Arstph., Xen., Plat., 41.)}" 

νουμηνία, and ace. to a rarer uncontr. form (cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 148 [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; WH. 
App. p. 145]) veounvia (so Ltxt. Tr WH), -as, 9, (νέος, 


429 


νυμφίος 


μήν a month), new-moon (Vulg. neomenia; barbarous 
Lat. novilunium): of the Jewish festival of the new 
moon [BB.DD. 5. v. New Moon], Col. ii. 16. (Sept. 
chiefly for wn; also for wn ns, Ex. xl. 2; and wy 
win, Num. x. 10; xxviii. 11 ; see μήν, 2. Pind., Arstph.. 
Thue., Xen., al.) * 

νουνεχῶς, (νοῦς and ἔχω [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 599), 
adv. wisely, prudently, discreetly: Mk. xii. 84. ({ Aristot. 
rhet. Alex. 30 p. 1436”, 33 νουνεχῶς x. δικαίως] ; Polyb. 
1, 83, 3 νουνεχῶς κι φρονίμως; [2, 13,1]; 5, 88, 2 νουνεχῶς 
k. πραγματικῶς ; [al.].) * 

νοῦς (contr. fr. νόος)» 6, gen. νοός, dat. voi, (so in later 
Grk. for the earlier forms νοῦ, νῷ, contr. fr. νόου, νόῳ ; cf. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 453; W. § 8, 2 b.; [B. 12 sq. (12)]), 
ace. νοῦν (contr. fr. νόον), Sept. for 39 and 339, [fr. 
Hom. down]; mind (Germ. Sinn), i.e. 1. the mind, 
comprising alike the faculties of perceiving and under- 
standing and those of feeling, judging, determining; 
hence spec. a. the intellective faculty, the under- 
standing: Lk. xxiv. 45 (on which see διανοίγω, 2); Phil 
iv. 7; Rey. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; opp. to τὸ πνεῦμα, the spirit 
intensely roused and completely absorbed with divine 
things, but destitute of clear ideas of them, 1 Co. xiv. 
14 sq. 19; ἔχειν τὸν νοῦν κυρίου [L txt., al. Χριστοῦ), to be 
furnished with the understanding of Christ, 1 Co. ii. 
16°. b. reason (Germ. die Vernunft) in the nar- 
rower sense, as the capacity for spiritual truth, the 
higher powers of the soul, the faculty of perceiving divine 
things, of recognizing goodness and of hating evil: Ro. i. 
28; vii. 23; Eph. iv.17; 1 Tim. vi.5; 2 Tim. 111. 8 [cf. 
W. 229 (215); Β. 8 134, 7]; Tit. i. 15; opp. to ἡ σάρξ, 
Ro. vii. 25; ἀνανεοῦσθαι τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ νοός, to be so 
changed that the spirit which governs the mind is re- 
newed, Eph. iv. 23; [ef. ἡ dvaxaivwors τοῦ νοός, Ro. xii. 
21. c. the power of considering and judging soberly, 
calmly and impartially: 2 Th. ii. 2. 2. a particular 
mode of thinking and judging: Ro. xiv.5; 1 Co.i. 10; 
i. q. thoughts, feelings, purposes: τοῦ κυρίου (fr. Is. xl. 
13), Ro. xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 16"; i. q. desires, τῆς σαρκός, 
Col. ii. 18 [ef. Meyer ad loc.].* 

Νυμφᾶς, -ἃ, 6, [perh. contr. fr. Νυμφόδωρος ; ef. W. 
102 sq. (97); on accent οἷ. Chandler § 32], Nymphas, a 
Christian inhabitant of Laodicea: Col. iv.15 [L WH Tr 
mrg. read Νύμφαν i. 6. Nympha, the name of a woman; 
see esp. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc., and p. 256].* 

νύμφη, -ns, ἡ, (appar. allied w. Lat. nubo; Vanicek p. 
429 sq.), Sept. for 793; 1. a betrothed woman, a 
bride: Jn. iii. 29; Rev. xviii. 23; xxi. 2,9; xxii. 17. 2. 
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a recently married 
woman, young wife; a young woman; hence in bibl. and 
eccl. Grk., like the Hebr. 743 (which signifies both a 
bride and a daughter-in-law [ef. W. 32]), a daughter-in- 
law: Mt.x.35; Lk. xii.53. (Mie. vii.6; Gen. xi. 31; 
[xxxviii. 11]; Ruth i. 6, [ete.]; also Joseph. antt. 95, 
9, 1.)* 

νυμφίος, -ov, 5, (νύμφη), a bridegroom: Mt. ix. 15; xxv. 
1,5 sq. 10; Mk. ii.19sq.; Lk. v. 34 sq.; In. 11. 9; iii. 29; 
Rev. xviii. 23. (From Hom. down; Sept for [Γ1.} " 


τυμφών 


νυμφών, -dvos, ὁ, (νύμφη), the chamber containing the 
bridal bed, the bride-chamber: οἱ viol τοῦ νυμφῶνος (see 
vids, 2), of the friends of the bridegroom whose duty it 
was to provide and care for whatever pertained to the 
pridal chamber, i. e. whatever was needed for the due 
celebration of the nuptials: Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk. 
v. 34, ([W. 33 (32)]; Tob. vi. 13 (14), 16 (17); eccles. 
writ.; Heliod. 7,8); the room in which the marriage cere- 
monies are held: Mt. xxii. 10 T WH Trmrg.* 

viv, and νυνί (which see in its place), adv. now, Lat. 
nunc, (Sept. for ΠΡ ; [fr. Hom. down)) ; 1. adv. of 
Time, now, i.e. at the present time ; a. so used that 
by the thing which is now said to be or to be done the 
present time is opposed to past time: Jn.iv.18 ; ix. 21; 
Acts xvi. 837; xxiii. 21; Ro. xiii.11; 2 Th. ii. 6; 2 Co. 
Vii. 9; xili. 2; Phil. 1.30; ii.12; iii.18; Col.i. 24, etc.; 
freq. it denotes a somewhat extended portion of present 
time as opp. to a former state of things: Lk. xvi. 25; 
Acts vii. 4; Gal. i. 23; iii. 3; spec. the time since certain 
persons received the Christian religion, Ro. v. 9, 11; vi. 
UO 21s) va Gal ur 90. τν- 29:1 bet. ἢ ΤΟ 26: Or 
the time since man has had the blessing of the gospel, 
as opp. to past times, i.q. in our times, our age: Acts vii. 
52; Ro. xvi. 26; 2 Co. vi. 2; Eph. iii. 5,10; 2 Tim. i. 
10; 1 Pet.i.12; iii. 21, [ef. ep. ad Diogn. 1]. b. opp. 
to future time: Jn. xii. 27; xiii. 36 (opp. to ὕστερον) ; 
xvi. 22; Ro. xi. 81; 1 Co. xvi. 12; νῦν x. εἰς πάντας τοὺς 
αἰῶνας, Jude 25; used to distinguish this present age, 
preceding Christ’s return, from the age which follows 
that return: Lk. vi. 21,25; Eph.ii.2; Heb.ii.8; 2 Pet. 
iii. 18; 1Jn. ii. 28; with ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ added, Mk. 
x. 30. c. Sometimes νῦν with the present is used of 
what will oceur forthwith or soon, Lk. ii. 29; Jn. xii. 31; 
xvi. 5; xvii. 13; Acts xxvi. 17. with a preterite, of 
what has just been done, Mt. xxvi. 65; Jn. xxi. 10; or 
very lately (but now, just now, hyperbolically i. q. α short 
time ago), νῦν ἐζήτουν σε λιθάσαι οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, Jn. xi. 8; cf. 
Kypke ad loc.; Vig. ed. Herm. p. 425 sq. with a future, 
of those future things which are thought of as already 
begun to be done, Jn. xii. 31; or of those which will be 
done instantly, Acts xiii. 11 [here al. supply ἐστί; W.§ 64, 
2a.|; or soon, Acts xx. 22 [here zp. merely has inherent 
fut.force; ef. B. §137, 10a.]. d. with the imperative 
it often marks the proper or fit time for doing a thing: 
Mt. xxvii. 42 sq.; Mk. xv. 32; Jn.ii.8. Hence it serves 
to point an exhortation in ἄγε viv, come now: Jas. iv. 13; 
v. 1, (where it is more correctly written ἄγε νυν, ef. Pas- 
sow li. p. 372). e. with other particles, by which the 
contrast in time is marked more precisely : καὶ viv, even 
now (now also), Jn. xi. 22; Phil. i. 20; and now, Jn. xvii. 
5; Acts vii. 34 [cf. 2 below]; x. 5 [W. § 48, 8 a.]; xx. 
25; xxii. 16; ἀλλὰ νῦν, Lk. xxii. 36; ἀλλὰ καὶ νῦν, but 
even now, Jn. xi. 22 [T Tr txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. 
ἀλλά]; ἔτι νῦν, 1 Co. iii. 2 (3) [L WH br. ἔτι7; νῦν δέ 
(see νυνί below) but now, Jn. xvi. 5; xvii. 13; Heb. ii. 8; 
rote... νῦν δέ, Gal. iv. 9; Ro. vi. 21 sq: [here νυνὶ δέ] ; 
Heb. xii. 26; ποτὲ .. . νῦν δέ, Ro. xi. 30 [WH mre. νυνί] 
Eph. v.8; 1 Pet. ii. 10; viv ἤδη, now already, 1 Jn. iv. 3. 


430 


νυνι 


νῦν οὖν, now therefore, Acts x. 33; xv. 10; xvi. 36; xxiii. 
15, (Gen. xxvii. 8, 43; xxxi. 13,30; xlv.8; 1 Mace. x. 71). 
τὸ νῦν ἔχον, see ἔχω, II. Ὁ. f. with the article; a. 
w. neut. ace. absol. of the article, ra viv, as respects the 
present; αἱ present, now (in which sense it is written also 
τανῦν [so Grsb. always, Rec. twice; classic edd. often 
τανύν; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 111; Chandler, Accent, § 8267): 
Acts iv. 29; xvii. 30; xx.32; xxvii. 22,(2 Mace. xv. 8; 
often in class. Grk.; also τὸ viv, 1 Mace. vii. 35; ix. 9; 
ef. Kriiger § 50, 5, 13; Bnhdy. p. 328; Bim. Gram. 
§ 125, 8 Anm. 8 (5)); the things that now are, the present 
things, Judith ix. 5; ace. absol. as respects the things now 
taking place, equiv. to as respects the case in hand, Acts v. 
38. B. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν, the present, joined to substantives : 
as 6 viv αἰών, 1 Tim. vi. 17; 2 Tim. iv. 10; Tit. ii. 12; 
καιρός, Ro. iii. 26; viii. 18; xi.5; [2 Co. viii. 14 (13)]; ἡ 
νῦν Ἱερουσαλήμ, Gal.iv. 25; οἱ viv οὐρανοί, 2 Pet. iii. 7; μοῦ 
τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς viv (or νυνί) ἀπολογίας, Acts xxii. 1. y: 
τὸ νῦν with prepositions: ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν (Sept. for TAYD), 
from this time onward, [ A. V. from henceforth], Lk. i. 48: 
v.10; xii. 52; xxii. 69; Acts xviii.6; 2Co.v.16; ἄχρε 
τοῦ νῦν, Ro. viii. 22; Phil. i.5; ἕως τοῦ viv (Sept. for 
MAY. yy), Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. xiii. 19. 2. Like our 
now and the Lat. nunc, it stands in a conclusion or 
sequence; as things now are, as the matter now stands ; 
under these circumstances ; in the present state of affairs 5 
since these things are so; asitis: Lk. xi. 39 (vovi.e. since 
ye are intent on observing the requirements of tradition ; 
{but al. take νῦν here of time —a covert allusion to a 
former and better state of things]); Col. i. 24 [al. of 
time; cf. Mey., Bp. Lghtft., Ellic. ad loc.]; καὶ νῦν, 1 Jn. 
ii. 28; 2 Jn. 5; καὶ viv δεῦρο, Acts vii. 34. νῦν δέ (and 
νυνὶ δέ see νυνί), but now; now however; but as itis; (often 
in class. Grk.; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 426; Matthiae ii. p. 
1434 sq.; Kiihner ὃ 498, 2 [or Jelf § 719, 2]): 1 Co. 
vii. 14; Jas.iv. 16, and RG in Heb. ix. 26; esp. after a 
conditional statement with εἰ and the indic. preterite, 
Lk. xix. 42; Jn. viii. 40; ix. 41; xv. 22, 24; xviii. 36; 
1 Co. xii. 20; [ef. B. § 151, 26]. In Rev. νῦν does not 
oceur. [Syn. see dpre.] 

νυνί (νῦν with iota demonstr. [Kriiger § 25, 6, 4 sq.; 
Kiihner § 180, 6. (Jelf § 160, e.); Bitm. Gram. § 80, 2]), 
in Attic now, at this very moment (precisely now, neither 
before nor after; Lat. nune ipsum), and only of Time, 
almost always with the pres., very rarely with the fut. 
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 19). Not found in the N. T. 
exc. in the writ. of Paul and in a few places in Acts and 
the Ep. to the Heb.; and it differs here in no respect 
from the simple viv; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 182; [W. 
23]; 1. of Time: witha pres. (Job xxx. 9), Acts 
xxiv.13 LT Tr WH; Ro. xv. 23, 25; 1 Co. xiii. 13 (ἄρτι 
... τότε δὲ . -- νυνὶ δέ) ; 2 Co. viii. 11, 22; Philem. 9, 11 
(se. ὄντα) ; with a perf. indicating continuance, Ro. iii. 
21 [al. refer this to 2]; with a preterite (Ps. xvi. (xvii.) 
11), Ro. vi. 22 (opp. to rére); vii. 6; Eph. ii. 13 (opp. 
to ἐν τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ) ; Col. i. 22 (21) [andiii. 8; also Ro. 
xi. 30 WH mrg.], (opp. to πότε); Col. i. 26[RGLmrg.; 
ef. W. § 63 1.2b.; B. 382 (328)] (opp. to ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων) ; 


νύξ 


with a fut., Job vii. 21; Bar. νἱ. 4 (Ep. Jer. 3); 2 Mace. 
x. 10; τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ ἀπολογίας, Acts xxii. 1. a 
contrary to Grk. usage, in stating a conclusion (see 
νῦν, 2), but since the case stands thus, [as it is]: 1 Co. [v.11 
RGTLmrg.]; xiv. 6 RG (i. e. since ὁ γλώσσῃ λαλῶν 
without an interpretation cannot edify the church) ; but 
now (Germ. so aber), Heb. ix. 26 LT Tr WH; after a 
conditional statement with ei (see νῦν, fin.), Ro. vii. 17; 
1 Co. xii. 18 [RGT WHmrg.]; xv. 20; Heb. viii. 6 
{here L Tr mrg. WH txt. νῦν], cf. 4; xi. 16 Rec., ef. 15; 
[B. § 151, 26].* 

νύξ, zen. νυκτός, ἡ, [fr. a root meaning ‘to disappear’; 
ef. Lat. nox, Germ. nacht, Eng. night; Curtius § 94], (Sept. 
for 9° and 77:9), [fr. Hom. down], night: Mk. vi. 48; 
Acts xvi. 33; xxiii. 23; Jn. xiii. 30; Rev. xxi. 25; xxii. 
5; ἵνα ἡ νὺξ μὴ φαίνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, i. 6. that the night 
should want a third part of the light which the moon and 
the stars give it, Rev. viii. 12 [al. understand this of the 
want of the light etc. for a third part of the night’s du- 
ration]; gen. νυκτός, by night [W. § 30,11; B. § 132, 
26], Mt. ii. 14; xxviii. 13; Lk. ii. 8 [but note here the 
article; some make τῆς νυκτός depend on φυλακάς]; 
Jn. iii. 2; Acts ix. 25; 1 ΤῊ. ν. 7; νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, Mk. 
v.53; 1 Th. 11. 9; iii. 10; 1 Tim. v. 5, [where see Ellicott 
on the order]; ἡμέρας x. νυκτός, Lk. xviii. 7; Acts ix. 
24; Rey.iv.8; vii. 15; xii. 10, ete.; μέσης νυκτός, at mid- 
night, Mt. xxv. 6; in answer to the question when: 
ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτί, this night, Lk. xii. 20; xvii.34; Acts xxvii. 
233 τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνη, Acts xii. 6; τῇ ἐπιούσῃ v. Acts xxiil. 
11; in answer to the question how long: νύκτα καὶ 
ἡμέραν, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xx. 31; xxvi. 7; differently in 
Mk. iv. 27 (night and day, se. applying himself to what 
he is here said to bedoing) ; τὰς νύκτας, during the nights, 
every night, Lk. xxi. 37; νύκτας τεσσαράκ. Mt. iv. 2; 
τρεῖς, ib. xii. 40 ; διὰ τῆς νυκτός, see διά, A. IT. 1b.; δ ὅλης 
(τῆς) νυκτός, the whole night through, all night, Lk. v. 5; 
ἐν νυκτί, when he was asleep, Acts xviii. 9; (κλέπτης) ev 
νυκτί, 1 Th. v. 2, and Ree. in 2 Pet. iii. 10; ἐν τῇ νυκτί, 
in (the course of) the night, Jn. xi. 10; ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ταύτῃ, 
Mt. xxvi. 31,34; Mk. xiv. 30; ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ 7 κτλ. 1 Co. xi. 
23; κατὰ μέσον τῆς νυκτός, about midnight, Acts xxvii. 27. 
Metaph. the time when work ceases, i.e. the time of death, 
Jn. ix. 4; the time for deeds of sin and shame, the time 
of moral stupidity and darkness, Ro. xiii. 12; the time 


431 


ξενίζα 


when the weary and also the drunken give themselves up 
to slumber, put for torpor and sluggishness, 1 Th. v. 5. 

vioow (-ττω) : 1 aor. ἔνυξα: to strike [7], pierce; to 
pierce through, transfix; often in Hom. of severe or evea 
deadly wounds given one; as, τὸν μὲν ἔγχεϊ WE . . . στυ- 
γερὸς δ᾽ dpa μιν σκότος εἷλε, Il. 5, 45.47; φθάσας αὐτὸν 
ἐκεῖνος νύττει κάτωθεν ὑπὸ τὸν βουβῶνα δόρατι καὶ παραχρῆμα 
διεργάζεται, Joseph. b. 1. 3, 7, 35; so τὴν πλευρὰν λόγχῃ, 
Jn. xix. 34, cf. xx. 25, 27. On the further use of the word 
ef. Fritzsche, Rom. ii. p. 559. [Comp.: κατα-νύσσω.] " 

νυστάζω : 1 aor. ἐνύσταξα ; (NYQ, cf. νεύω, νευστάζω); 
Sept. for 033; 1. prop. to nod in sleep, to sleep, 
(Hippocr., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al:); to be overcome or 
oppressed with sleep; to fall asleep, drop off to sleep, [ (cf. 
Wiclif) to nap it]: Mt. xxv. 5; Sept. for 07373, Ps. Ixxv. 
(Ixxvi.) 7. 2. like the Lat. dormito [ef. our to be 
napping |, trop. i.q. to be negligent, careless, (Plat., Plut., 
al.): of a thing i. q. fo linger, delay, 2 Pet. ii. 3.* 

νυχθήμερον, -ov, τό, (νύξ and ἡμέρα), a night and a day, 
the space of twenty-four hours: 2 Co. xi. 25. (Alex. 
Aphr.; Geopon.) Cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. ete. p. 186; 
[Soph. Lex. s. v.; cf. W. 25].* 

Νῶε (Νώεος, -ov, in Joseph. [antt. 1, 8,1 sqq.]), 6, (M3 
rest), Noah, the second father of the human race: Mt. 
xxiv. 37sq.; Lk. iii. 36; xvii. 26 sq.; Heb. xi.7; 1 Pet. 
iii. 20; 2 Pet. ii. δ." 

νωθρός, -d, -dv, (i. 4. νωδής, fr. νη [ef. νήπιος] and ὠθέω 
[to push; al. ὄθομαι to care about (cf. Vanicek p. 879) ], 
cf. νώδυνος, νώνυμος, fr. νη and ὀδύνη, ὄνομα), slow, slug- 
gish, indolent, dull, languid: Heb. vi. 12; with a dat. of 
reference [W. ὃ 31, 6 a.; B. § 133, 21], ταῖς ἀκοαῖς, of one 
who apprehends with difficulty, Heb. v.11; νωθρὸς καὶ 
παρειμένος ἐν τοῖς ἔργοις, Sir. iv. 29; νωθρὸς x. παρειμένος 
ἐργάτης. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34,1. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., 
Dion. Hal., Anthol., al.) [SyN. see ἀργός, fin.]* 

νῶτος, -ου, ὁ, [fr. root ‘to bend,’ ‘curve,’ akin to Lat. 
natis; Ficki. 128; Vaniéek p. 420], the back: Ro. xi. 10 
fr. Ps. lxviii. (Ixix.) 24. (In Hom. ὁ νῶτος [“ the gend. 
of the sing. is undetermined in Hom. and Hes.” (L. and 
S.)], plur. τὰ νῶτα; in Attie generally τὸ νῶτον, very 
rarely ὁ νῶτος ; plur. always τὰ vara; Sept. 6 νῶτος, plur. 
of vara; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 290; [Rutherford, New 
Phryn. p. 351]; Passow [L. and 8.1 8. v.)* 


bat 


[g, on its occasional substitution for o see 5, a, s.] 

tevla, -as, 9, (ξένιος, -a, -ov, and this fr. ξένος), fr. Hom. 
down, hospitality, hospitable reception; 1. 4. alodging-place, 
lodgings: Acts xxviii. 23 (i. 4. τὸ μίσθωμα in vs. 30 [but 
this is doubtful; the more prob. opinion receives the 
preference 5. v. ἴδιος, 1a.]); Philem. 22. [See esp. Bp. 
Vghtft. on Phil. p. 9, and on Philem. 1. 6.7 


tevitw; 1 aor. ἐξένισα ; Pass., pres. ξενίζομαι; 1 aor. 
efevicOnv; fr. Hom. down; 1. to receive as a guest, 
te entertain hospitably: twa, Acts x. 23; xxviii. 7; Heb. 
xiii. 2; pass. to be received hospitably; to stay as a guest, 
to lodge (be lodged): ἐνθάδε, Acts x. 18; ἐν οἰκίᾳ τινός, 
Acts x. 32; mapa tim, Acts x. 6; xxi. 16 [ef. B. 284 (244); 
W. 214 (201)], and sundry codd. in 1 Co. xvi. 19; (Diod. 


ξενοδοχέω 


14, 39). 2. to surprise or astonish by the strangeness 
and novelty of a thing (cf. Germ. befremden): Eevigovra 
τινα. Acts xvii. 20 (ξενίζυουσα πρόσοψις καὶ καταπληκτική, 
Polyb. 3, 114, 4; τὸν θεὸν ἐξένιζε τὸ πραττόμενον, Joseph. 
antt. 1,1, 4 ; ξενίζουσαι συμφοραί, 2 Mace. ix. 6); pass. 
to be surprised, astonished at the novelty or strangeness of 
a thing; to think strange, be shocked: w. dat. of the thing 
[W. § 31, 1 f.], 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Polyb. 1, 23, 5; 8, 68, 9); 
ἐν w. dat. of the thing [ef. B. § 133, 23], 1 Pet. iv. 4.* 

ξενοδοχέω (for the earlier form ξενοδοκέω in use fr. Πα. 
down; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307),-6: 1 aor. ἐξενοδόχησα; 
(ξενοδόχος, i. 6. ξένους δεχόμενος) ; to receive and entertain 
hospitably, to be hospitable: 1 Tim.v.10. (Dio Cass. 78, 
3; [Graec. Ven. Gen. xxvi. 17; eccl. writ.].) ® 

ξένος, -n, -ov, fr. Hom. down, mase. a guest-friend (Lat. 
hospes, [of parties bound by ties of hospitality]),i-e. 1. 
a foreigner, stranger, (opp. to ἐπιχώριος, Plat. Phaedoc. 2 
p- 59 b.; Joseph. b. 1. 5, 1, 3); a. prop.: Mt. xxv. 
35, 38,43 sq.; xxvii. 7; 3Jn.5; ξένοι κ- παρεπίδημοι ἐπὶ 
τῆς γῆς, Heb. xi. 135 of ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι, Acts xvii. 21 ; 
opp. to συμπολίτης, Eph. ii. 19; (Sept. for MS a travel- 
ler, 2 S. xii. 4 cod. Alex.; for Ἢ), Job xxxi. 32; sev- 
eral times for "Ἴ22). [as adj. with] δαιμόνια, Acts xvii. 
18. b. trop. a. alien (from a person or thing) ; 
without knowledge of, without a share in: with a gen. of 
the thing, τῶν διαθηκῶν τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, Eph. 11. 12 [οἵ W. 
§ 30, 4, 0] (τοῦ λόγου, Soph. Ο. T. 219). B. new, un- 
heard of: διδαχαί, Heb. xiii. 9; ξένον τι, a strange, won- 
derful thing, 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Aeschyl. Prom. 688 ; Diod. 
3, 15 and 52; al.). 2. 
tains another hospitably; with whom he stays or lodges, a 


one who receives and enter- 


host: ὁ ξένος pov, Ro. xvi. 23, where καὶ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 
ὅλης is added, i. 6. either ‘who receives hospitably all 
the members of the church who cross his threshold,’ or 
‘who kindly permits the church to worship in his house’ 
(Fritzsche).* 

ξέστης, -ov, 6,(a corruption of the Lat. sextarius) ; 1. 
a sextarius, i. e. a vessel for measuring liquids, holding 
about a pint (Joseph. antt. 8, 2, 9—see βάτος; Epict. 
diss. 1, 9, 33; 2, 16, 22; [Dioscor.], Galen and med. 
writ.). 2. a wooden pitcher or ewer (Vulg. urceus 
[ A. V. pot]) from which water or wine is poured, whether 
holding a sextarius or not: Mk. vii. 4, 8 [here TWH 
om. Tr br. the cl.].* 

ξηραίνω: 1 aor. ἐξήρανα (Jas. i. 11); Pass., pres. Enpat- 
νομαι; pi. 3 pers. sing. ἐξήρανται (Mk. xi. 21), ptep. ἐξη- 
pappevos; 1 aor. ἐξηράνθην ; cf. B. 41 (36); (fr. ξηρός, q. 
v.); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for wa. and wajn; to 
make dry, dry up, wither: act., τὸν χόρτον, Jas. i. 11; pass. 
to become dry, to be dry, be withered [cf. B. 52 (45)] (Sept. 
for 073.) : of plants, Mt. xiii. 6; xxi. 19 sq.; Mk. iv. 6; 
xi. 20 sq.; Lk. viii. 6; Jn. xv. 6; [1 Pet. i. 24]; of the 
ripening of crops, Rev. xiv. 15; of fluids: ἡ πηγή, Mk. 
v. 29; τὸ ὕδωρ, Rev. xvi. 12, (Gen. viii. 7; Is. xix. 5); of 


43 


2 Evpaw 
members of the body, to waste away, pine away: Mk. ix. 
18; ἐξηραμμένη χείρ, a withered hand, Mk. iii. 1, and RG 
in 8." 

ξηρός, -d, -ov, fr. Hdt. down, dry: τὸ ξύλον, Lk. xxiii 
31 (in a proverb. saying, ‘if a good man is treated τὸ, 
what will be done to the wicked ?’ ef. Ps.i. 3; Ezek. xx. 
47. Is. ἵν]. 3; Ezek. xvii. 24) ; of members of the body 
deprived of their natural juices, shrunk, wasted, withered : 
as χείρ, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 3 L T Tr WH; Lk. vi. 6,8; 
men are spoken of as ξηροί, withered, Jn. v. 3. of the 
land in distinction from water, ἡ ξηρά sc. γῆ (Sept. for 
nwa, Gen. i. 9 sq.; Jon.i. 9; ii. 11, and often [W. 18: 
592 (550)]): Mt. xxiii. 15; Heb. xi. 29 where L T Tr 
WH add γῆς." 

ξύλινος, -ivn, -wov, (ξύλον), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down, 
wooden, made of wood: σκεύη, 2 Tim. ii. 20; neut. plur. 
εἴδωλα, Rev. ix. 20 (θεοί, Bar. vi. 30 [Ep. Jer. 29]).* 

ξύλον, -ου, τό, (fr. ξύω to scrape, plane), fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 315 1. wood: univ. 1 Co. iii. 12; &. Avivo, 
Rey. xviii. 12; that which is made of wood, as a beam from 
which any one is suspended, a gibbet, a cross, [A. V. tree, 
4- v- in B.D. Am. ed.], Acts v. 30; x. 89; xiii. 29; Gal. 
iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii 24, (yy, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 23; 
Josh. x. 26; Esth. v. 14), —a use not found in the classics 
[ef. L. and S. s. v. II. 4]. A log or timber with holes in 
which the feet, hands, neck, of prisoners were inserted 
and fastened with thongs (Gr. κᾶλον, ξυλοπέδη, ποδοκάκη, 
ποδοστράβη, Lat. nervus, by which the Lat. renders the 
Ilebr. 10, a fetter, or shackle for the feet, Job [xiii. 27] ; 
xxxiii. 11; ef. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 458 sqq.; 
[B. D. s. v. Stocks]): Acts xvi. 24 (Hdt. 6, 75; 9, 37; 
Arstph. eq. 367, 394, 705); a cudgel, stick, staff: plur., 
Mt. xxvi. 47, 55; Mk. xiv. 43, 48; Lk. xxii. 52, (Hdt. 
2,633; 4,180; Dem. p. 645,15; Polyb. 6, 37,3; Joseph. 
b. j. 2, 9,4; Hdian. 7, 7, 4). 2. a tree: Lk. xxiil. 
31 (Gen. i. 29; 11. 9; iii 15 Is. xiv. 8,ete.); & τῆς ζωῆς, 
see ζωή, 2 b. p. 214". 

[ξύν, older form of σύν, retained occasionally in com- 
pounds, as ξυμβαίνω, 1 Pet. iv. 12 ed. Bezae ; see Meister- 
hans § 49, 11; L. and S. 8. v. σύν, init.; and ef. 3, a, s.] 

ξυράω (a later form, fr. Diod. [1, 84] down, for ξυρέω, 
which the earlier writ. used fr. Hdt. down; [W. 24; Β. 
63 (55); esp. Bltm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 53]),-6: pf. pass. 
ptep. ἐξυρημένος ; Mid., pres. inf. ξυρᾶσθαι [for which 
some would read (1 Co. xi. 6) ξύρασθαι (1 aor. mid. inf. 
fr. ξύρω) ; see WH. App. p. 166]; 1 aor. subjune. 3 pers. 
plur. ξυρήσωνται [but T Tr WH read the fut. -σονται] ; 
(fr. ξυρόν a razor, and this fr. vw); Sept. for mba; ta 
shear, shave: pass. 1 Co. xi. 5; mid. to get one’s self shaved, 
ibid. vs. 6; 1 Co. xi. 6; with an acc. specifying the obj. 
more precisely [cf. B. § 134, 7; W. § 32,5]: τὴν κεφαλήν, 
Acts xxi. 24 (Sept. Num. vi. 9, 19; Lev. xxi. 5; ras 
ὀφρύας, Hat. 2, 66; τὸ σῶμα, 2, 37).* 


O 


6, ἡ, τό, originally rés, τή, τό, (as is evident from the 
forms τοί, rai for oi, ai in Hom. and the Ionic writ.), cor- 
responds to our definite article the (Germ. der, die, das), 
which is properly a demonstrative pronoun, which we 
see in its full force in Homer, and of which we find cer- 
tain indubitable traces also in all kinds of Greek prose, 
and hence also in the N. T. 

I. As a DemonsTRATIVE Pronoun; Lat. hic, haec, 
hoc; Germ. der, die, das, emphatic; cf. W. § 17,1; B. 
101 (89) sq. ; 1. in the words of the poet Aratus, rod 
yap καὶ γένος ἐσμέν, quoted by Paul in Acts xvii. 28. 2. 
in prose, where it makes a partition or distributes into 
parts: ὁ pev... ὁ δέ, that... this, the one... the other: 
Mt. xiii. 23 R G Tr [here the division is threefold] ; Gal. 
iv. 23 [here L WH Trmrg. br. μέν] ; οἱ μὲν . . . of δέ, Acts 
xxviii. 24; Phil. i. 16 sq.; of μὲν... ὁ δέ, Heb. vii. 5 sq. 
20 (21), 23 sq.; τοὺς μὲν... τοὺς δέ, Mk. xii. 5 RG; 
Eph. iv. 11; of pev... ἄλλοι δὲ (Lchm. of δὲ) . . - ἕτεροι 
δέ, Mt. xvi. 14 ef. Jn. vil. 12; τινές foll. by οἱ δέ, Acts 
xvii. 18; ὃς (see ὅς I.) μέν foll. by ὁ δέ, Ro. xiv. 2; οἱ δέ 
stands as though οἱ μέν had preceded, Mt. xxvi. 67; xxviii. 
17. 3. in narration, when either two persons or 
two parties are alternately placed in opposition to each 
other and the discourse turns from one to the other; 6 
δέ, but he, and he, (Germ. er aber): Mt. ii. 14; ἵν. 4; xxi. 
29 sq.; Mk. i. 45; xii. 15; Lk. viii. 21, 30,48; xxii. 10, 
34; Jn. ix. 38, and very often; plur., Mt. ii. 5,9; iv. 20; 
Mk. xii. 14 [RGLmrg.], 16 [Lbr. of δέ]; Lk. vii. 4; 
xx. 5,12; xxii. 9,38, 71; Acts iv. 21; xii. 15, and often; 
of μὲν οὖν, in the Acts alone: i. 6; v.41; xv. 3, 30; 6 
μὲν οὖν, XXili. 18; xxviii. 5. 

11. As the DEFINITE or PREPOSITIVE ARTICLE (to 
be distinguished from the post positive article, —as 
it is called when it has the force of a relative pro- 
noun, like the Germ. der, die, das, exx. of which use are 
not found in the N. T.), whose use in the N. T. is ex- 
plained at length by W. ξξ 18-20; B. 85 (74) sqq.; 
[Green p. 5 sqq.]. As in all languages the article serves 
to distinguish things, persons, notions, more exactly, it 
is prefixed 1. to substantives that have no mod- 
ifier; and a. those that designate a person or a 
thing that is the only one of its kind; the art. thus dis- 
tinguishes the same from all other persons or things, as 
ὁ ἥλιος, ὁ οὐρανός, ἡ γῆ, ἣ θάλασσα, ὁ θεός, ὃ λόγος (Jn. 1. 
1 sq.), ὁ διάβολος, τὸ φῶς, ἡ σκοτία, ἡ ζωή, ὁ θάνατος, 
ete. b. appellative names of persons and things defi- 
nite enough in themselves, or made so by the context, 
or sufficiently well-known from history; thus, to the 
names of virtues and vices, as ἡ δικαιοσύνη, ἡ σοφία, ἡ 
δύναμις, ἡ ἀλήθεια, etc. ὁ ἐρχόμενος, the well-known per- 


ε 
ο 


sonage who is to come, i. 6. the Messiah, Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii. 
19; ὁ προφήτης, the (promised and expected) prophet, 
Jn. i. 21; vii. 40; ἡ σωτηρία, the salvation which all 
good men hope for, i. 6. the Messianic salvation; ἡ 
γραφή, etc.; ἡ νεφέλη, the cloud (well known from the 
O. T.), 1 Co. x. 1 sq.; τοὺς ἀγγέλους, Jas. ii. 25; τῷ 
to designations of eminent per- 
sonages: 6 vids τοῦ θεοῦ, ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, (see vids) ; 
ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ ᾿Ισμαήλ, Jn. iii. 10; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. 
p- 613. The article is applied to the repeated name of 
a person or thing already mentioned or indicated, and 
to which the reader is referred, as τοὺς μάγους, Mt. ii. 7 
cf. 1; of doxot, Mt. ix. 17; of δαίμονες, Mt. viii. 31 cf. 28; 
τὴν ὄνον Kat τὸν πῶλον, Mt. xxi. 7 ef. 2, and countless 
other exx. The article is used with names of things 
not yet spoken of, in order to show that definite things 
are referred to, to be distinguished from others of the 
same kind and easily to be known from the context; as 
τὰ βρέφη, the babes belonging to the people of that 
place, Lk. xviii. 15; ἀπὸ τῶν δένδρων, sc. which were 
there, Mt. xxi. 8; τῷ ἱερεῖ, to the priest whose duty it 
will be to examine thee, when thou comest, Mt. viii. 4; 
Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; τὸ πλοῖον, the ship which stood 
ready to carry them over, Mt. viii. 23 [RG TT, ef. 18]; 
ix. 1 [RG]; xiii. 2[RG]; τὸ ὄρος, the mountain near 
the place in question (der an Ort u. Stelle befindliche 
Berg) [but some commentators still regard τὸ ὄρος as 
used here generically or Hebraistically like ἡ ὀρεινή, the 
mountain region or the highlands, in contrast with the 
low country, (cf. Sept. Josh. xvii. 16; xx. 7; Gen. 
xix. 17, 19, ete.); cf. Bp. Lghtft. «Fresh Revision’ ete. 
p- 111 sq.; Weiss, Matthiusevangelium, p. 129 note; and 
in Meyer’s Mt. 7te Aufl.], Mt. ν. 1; Mk. iii. 13; Lk. 
ix. 28; Jn. vi. 3, 15, (1 Mace. ix. 38, 40); ἡ οἰκία, the 
house in which (Jesus) was wont to lodge, Mt. ix. 10, 
28; xiii. 36; xvii. 25; ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον, se. that is in the 
house, Mt. v. 15; also ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν, ibid.; ἐν τῇ φάτνῃ, 
in the manger of the stable of the house where they 
were lodging, Lk. ii. 7 RG; 6 ἔπαινος, the praise of 
which he is worthy, 1 Co. iv. 5; so everywhere in the 
doxologies: ἡ δόξα, τὸ κράτος, 1 Pet. iv. 11; Rev. v. 13, 
ete. ec. The article prefixed to the Plural often 
either includes all and every one of those who by the 
given name are distinguished from other things having 
a different name,— as oi ἀστέρες, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii 
25; ai ἀλώπεκες, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58, ete.; —or de- 
fines the class alone, and thus indicates that the whole 
class is represented by the individuals mentioned, how- 
ever many and whosoever they may be; as in of Φαρι- 
of ἄνθρωποι. people, the 


ἐκτρώματι, 1 Co. xv. 8. 


σαῖοι, οἱ γραμματεῖς, of τελῶναι, 


o 434 4 6 


multitude, (Germ. die Leute); oi ἀετοί, Mt. xxiv. 28; 
τοῖς κυσίν, Mt. vii. 6. d. The article prefixed to the 
Singular sometimes so defines only the class, that all and 
every one of those who bear the name are brought to 
mind; thus, ὁ ἄνθρωπος, Mt. xv. 11; ὁ ἐθνικὸς x. τελώνης, 
Mt. xviii. 17; ὁ ἐργάτης, Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. v.18; ὁ μεσίτης, 
Gal. iii. 20; ὁ κληρονόμος, Gal. iv. 1; ὁ δίκαιος, Ro. i. 17; 
Heb. x. 38; τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου, the signs required 
of any one who claims to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12, 
and other exx. e. The article is prefixed to the 
nominative often put for the vocative in addresses [cf. 
W. § 29, 2; B. § 129 ἃ. 5]: χαῖρε ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδ. 
(prop. σὺ 6 Bac-, thou who art the king), Jn. xix. 3; ναί, ὁ 
πατήρ, Mt. xi. 26; ἄγε νῦν οἱ πλούσιοι, κλαύσατε, Jas. ν. 1; 
οὐρανὲ καὶ οἱ ἅγιοι, Rev. xviii. 20; add, ΜΚ. ν. 41; x. 47; 
LK. xii. 32; xviii. 11, 13; Jn. viii. 10; xx. 28; Acts xiii. 
41; Ro. viii. 15; Eph. v. 14, 22, 25; vi.1,4sq.; Rev. xii. 
12. f. The Greeks employ the article, where we 
abstain from its use, before nouns denoting things that 
pertain to him who is the subject of discourse: εἶπε or 
φησὶ μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ, Acts xiv. 10 [RG]; xxvi. 24, (Prov. 
XXVi. 25); γυνὴ προσευχομένη ... 
φαλῇ, 1 Co. xi. 5; esp. in the expression ἔχειν τι, when 
the object and its adjective, or what is equivalent to an 
adjective, denotes a part of the body or something else 
which naturally belongs to any one (as in French, i a 
les épaules larges); so, ἔχειν τὴν χεῖρα ξηράν, Mt. xii. 10 
RG; Mk. iii. 1; τὸ πρόσωπον ws ἀνθρώπου [ (Ree. ἄνθρω- 
mos) ], Rev. iv. 7; τὰ αἰσθητήρια γεγυμνασμένα, Heb. v. 


ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κε- 


14; ἀπαράβατον τὴν ἱερωσύνην, Heb. vii. 24; τὴν κατοίκησιν 
κτὰ. Mk. ν. 3; τὴν εἰς ἑαυτοὺς ἀγάπην ἐκτενῆ, 1 Pet. iv. 8. 
Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 25. the gen. of a pers. pron. 
αὐτοῦ, ὑμῶν, is added to the substantive: Mt. iii.4; Mk. 
viii. 17; Rev. ii. 18; 1 Pet. ii. 12, cf. Eph. i. 18; cf. W. 
§ 18, 2; [B. § 125, 5]. g. Proper Names some- 
times have the article and sometimes are anarthrous; cf. 
W. § 18, 5 and 6; B. § 124, 3 and 4; [Green p. 28 
sq-]3 a. as respects names of Persons, the person 
without the article is simply named, but with the article 
is marked as either well known or as already mentioned ; 
thus we find Ἰησοῦς and ὁ "Ins., Παῦλος and ὁ Παῦλ., ete. 
Πιλᾶτος has the article everywhere in John’s Gospel and 
also in Mark’s, if xv. 43 (in RGL) be excepted (but T 
Tr WH insert the article there also); Τίτος is every- 
where anarthrous. Indeclinable names of persons 
in the oblique cases almost always have the article, 
unless the case is made evident by a preposition: τῷ 
Ἰωσήφ, Mk. xv. 45; τὸν Ἰακὼβ καὶ τὸν Ἠσαῦ, Heb. xi. 20, 
and many other exx., esp. in the genealogies, Mt. i. 1 
sqq-; Lk. iii. 23; but where perspicuity does not require 
the article, it is omitted also in the oblique cases, as τῶν 
υἱῶν Ἰωσήφ, Heb. xi. 21; τῶν υἱῶν ᾿Εμμώρ, Acts vii. 16; 
ὁ θεὸς ᾿Ισαάκ, Mt. xxii. 32; Acts vii. 32; ὅταν ὄψηυθε 
᾿Αβραὰμ. x. ᾿Ισαὰκ. . . καὶ πάντας τοὺς προφήτας, Lk. xiii. 
28. The article is commonly omitted with personal 
proper names to which is added an apposition indicating 
the race, country, office, rank, surname, or something 
else, (cf. Matthiae § 274); let the foll. suffice as exx.: 


᾿Αβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν, Jn. vill. 56; Ro. iv. 1; ᾿Ιάκωβον 
τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, Mt. iv. 
21; Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνή, Mt. xxvii. 56, ete.; Ἰωάννης ὁ 
βαπτιστῆς, Mt. iii. 1; Ἡρώδης ὃ τετράρχης, Lk. ix. 7; 
"Ingots ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός, Mt. i. 16; Σαῦλος δὲ ὁ καὶ 
Παῦλος sc. καλούμενος, Acts xiii. 9; Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, 
Mk. xiv. 3; Βαρτίμαιος ὁ τυφλός, Mk. χ. 40 [RG]; Ζαχα- 
ρίου τοῦ ἀπολομένου, Lk. xi.51. But there are excep. 
tions also to this usage: ὁ δὲ Ηρώδης ὁ τετράρχης, Lk. 111, 
19; τὸν Σαούλ, υἱὸν Kis, Acts xiii. 21; in the opening 
of the Epistles: Παῦλος ἀπόστολος, Ro. i. 1; 1 Co. i. 
1, ete. B. Proper names of countries and re- 
gions have the article far more frequently than those 
of cities and towns, for the reason that most names of 
countries, being derived from adjectives, get the force of 
substantives only by the addition of the article, as ἡ 
᾿Αχαΐα (but ef. 2 Co. ix. 2), ἡ Γαλατία, ἡ Γαλιλαία, ἡ “Ira- 
Xia, ἡ ᾿Ιουδαία. ἡ Μακεδονία (but οἴ. Ro. xv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 
5), ete. Only Αἴγυπτος, if Acts vii. 11 LT Tr WH be 
excepted, is everywhere anarthrous. The names of 
cities, esp. when joined to prepositions, particularly ev, 
eis and ἐκ, are without the article; but we find ἀπὸ (RG 
ἐκ) τῆς Ῥώμης in Acts xviii. 2. y- Names of rivers 
and streams have the article in Mt. iii. 13; Mk. i. 5; 
Lk. iv.1; xiii. 4; Jn. i. 28; τοῦ Κεδρών, Jn. xviii. 1 GL 
Tr mrg. 2. The article is prefixed to substan- 
tives expanded and more precisely defined by modi- 
fiers; a. to nouns accompanied by a gen. of the 
Pronouns μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτοῦ, ἑαυτῶν, αὐτῶν: Mt. 
i. 21,25; v.45; vi. 10-12; xii.49; Mk.ix.17; Lk. vi. 
27; x.73 xvi.6; Acts xix. 25 [LT Tr WH ἡμῖν]; Ro. 
iv. 19; vi. 6, and in numberless other places; it is rarely 
omitted, as in Mt. xix. 28; Lk. i. 72; ii. 32; 2 Co. viii. 
23; Jas. v. 20, etc.; cf. B. § 127, 27. b. The pos- 
sessive pronouns ἐμός, σός, ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος, joined to 
substantives (if Jn. iv. 34 be excepted) always take the 
article, and John generally puts them after the substan- 
tive (ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμή, In. ν. 30; ὁ λόγος ὁ σός, xvii. 17; ἡ 
κοινωνία ἡ ἡμετέρα, 1 In. i. 3; ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος, Jn. vii. 
6), very rarely between the article and the substantive 
(τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν, Jn. v.47; ἡ ἐμὴ διδαχή, vii. 16; τὴν 
σὴν λαλιάν, iv. 42), yet this is always done by the other 
N. T. writ., Mt. xviii. 20; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; Acts 
xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. iii. 7, ete. ο. When 
adjectives are added to substantives, either the ad- 
jective is placed between the article and the substantive, 
—as τὸ ἴδιον φορτίον, Gal. vi. 5; ὁ ἀγαθὺς ἄνθρωπος, Mt. 
xii. 35; τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν, In. vii. 24; ἡ ἀγαθὴ μέρις, Lk. 
χ. 42: τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα, Lk. xii. 10; Acts i. 8; ἡ αἰώνιος 
ζωή, Jn. xvii. 3, and many other exx.;—or the adjective 
preceded by an article is placed after the substantive 
with its article, as τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, Mk. iii. 29; Jn. 
xiv. 26; Actsi.16; Heb. iii. 7; ix.8; x.15; ἡ ζωὴ 7 
αἰώνιος, 1 «1π. 1. 2; ii. 25; ὁ ποιμὴν ὃ καλός, Jn. x. 11; τὴν 
πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν, Acts xii. 10, and other exx.;— very 
rarely the adjective stands before a substantive which 
has the article, as in Acts [xiv. 10 RG]; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. 
xi. 5, [ef. B. § 125, 5; W. § 30,1 ς.1. As to the adjeo 


ὁ 435 ὁ 


tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own 
place. d. What has been said concerning adjec- 
tives holds true also of all other limitations added to 
substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ 
παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. 
i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, 
ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς 
εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each 
usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. 
The noun has the article before it when a demonstra- 
tive pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either pre- 
cedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ 
ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); 
Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου 
οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless 
other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ λαύς, 
Mk. vii. 6 [6 λ. ofr. L WH mrg.]; οὗτος ὁ vids pov, Lk. 
xv. 24; οὗτος ὁ τελώνης, Lk. xviii. 11 [ὁ red. οὗτ. L mrg.]; 
οὗτος ὁ λόγος, Jn. vii. 36 [ὁ oy. οὗτ. LT Tr WH], and 
many other exx. on ἐκεῖνος, see ἐκεῖνος, 2; On αὐτὸς ὁ 
etc., see αὐτός (I. 1 b. ete.); on 6 αὐτός etc., see αὐτός, 
Ill. 3. The neuter article prefixed to adjec- 
tives changes them into substantives [cf. W. § 34, 2; B. 
§ 123, 1]; as, τὸ ἀγαθόν, τὸ καλόν (which see each in its 
place); τὸ ἔλαττον, Heb. vii. 7; with a gen. added, τὸ 
γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, Ro. i. 19; τὸ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, Ro. 
Vill. 3; τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Co. i. 25; αὐτῆς, Heb. vii. 
18; τὰ ἀόρατα τ. θεοῦ, Ro. i. 20; τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης, 
2 Co. iv. 2, ete. 4. The article with cardinal nu- 
merals: eis one; 6 eis the one (of two), see εἷς, 4 a.; 
but differently 6 eis in Ro. v. 15, 17, the (that) one. So 
also of δύο (our the twain), Mt. xix. 5; οἱ δέκα the (those) 
ten, and οἱ ἐννέα, Lk. xvii. 17; ἐκεῖνοι of δέκα (καὶ) ὀκτώ, 
Lk. xiii. 4. ᾿ 5. The article prefixed to partici- 
ples a. gives them the force of substantives [W. 
§§ 18,3; 45,7; B.§§129,1b.; 144.9]; as, ὁ πειράζων, 
Mt. iv. 3; 1 Th. iii. 5; ὁ βαπτίζων, Mk. vi. 14 (for which 
Mt. xiv. 2 6 βαπτιστής); 6 σπείρων, Mt. xiii. 3; Lk. viii. 
5; 6 ὀλοθρεύων, Heb. xi. 28; οἱ βαστάζοντες, Lk. vii. 14; 
ot βόσκοντες, Mt. viii. 33; Mk. v. 14; οἱ ἐσθίοντες, the 
eaters (convivae), Mt. xiv. 21; τὸ ὀφειλόμενον, Mt. xviii. 
30, 34; τὰ ὑπάρχοντα (see ὑπάρχω, 2). b. the ptep. 
with the article must be resolved into he who [and a fin. 
verb; cf. B.§ 144, 9]: Mt. χ. 40; Lk. vi. 29; xi. 23; Jn. 
xv. 23; 2 Co. i. 21; Phil. ii. 13, and very often. πᾶς ὁ 
foll. by a ptep. [W. 111 (106) ], Mt. v. 22; vii. 26; Lk. vi. 
30 [Ὁ WHom.L Trmrg. br. art.]; xi. 10; Ro. ii. 1; 1 Co. 
xvi. 16; Gal. iii. 13, ete.; μακάριος ὁ w. a ptep., Mt. v. 4 
(5), 6, 10, ete.; οὐαὶ ὑμῖν vi w. a ptep., Lk. vi. 25; the 
neut. τό with a ptcp. must be resolved into that which 
[with a fin. verb], τὸ γεννώμενον, Lk. i. 35; τὸ γεγεννημέ- 
νον, Jn. iii. 6. c. the article with ptep. is placed in 
apposition: Mk. iii. 22; Acts xvii. 24; Eph. iii. 20; iv. 
22,24; 2 Tim. i. 14; 1 Pet. i. 21, ete. 6. The neut. 
τό before infinitives 8. gives them the force of 
substantives (cf. B. 261 (225) sqq. [ef. W. § 44, 2a.; 3c.]); 
as, τὸ καθίσαι, Mt. xx. 22; Mk.x.40; τὸ θέλειν, Ro. vii. 
18; 2 Co. viii. 10; τὸ ποιῆσαι, τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι, 2 Co. viii. 11, 


and other exx.; τοῦτο κρίνατε" τὸ μὴ τιθέναι κτὰ. Ro. xiv. 
13. On the infin. w. the art. depending on a preposi- 
tion (ἀντὶ τοῦ, ἐν τῷ, εἰς τό, etc.), see under each prep. in 
its place. b. Much more frequent in the N. T. than 
in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ., esp. in the 
writings of Luke and Paul (nowhere in John’s Gospel 
and Epistles), is the use of the gen. rod w. an inf. (and 
in the Sept. far more freq. than in the N. T.), which is 
treated of at length by Fritzsche in an excursus at the 
end of his Com. on Mt. p. 843 sqq.; W. § 44,4; B. 266 
(228) sqq. The examples fall under the foll. classes: 
τοῦ with an inf. is put a. after words which natu- 
rally require a genitive (of a noun also) after them; 
thus after ἄξιον, 1 Co. xvi. 4; ἔλαχε, Lk. i. 9 (1 5. xiv. 47); 
ἐξαποροῦμαι, 2 Co. i. 8. B. for the simple expletive 
[i. e. ‘complementary  ΟΥ (as it is commonly called) 
epexegetical infin., which serves to fill out an incom- 
plete idea expressed by a noun or a verb or a phrase, 
(where in Germ. zu is commonly used) ; thus after προ- 
θυμία, 2 Co. viii. 11; βραδεῖς, Lk. xxiv. 25; ἐλπίς, Acts 
xxvii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 10 [mot Rec.]; ἐζήτει εὐκαιρίαν, Lk. 
xxii. 6 [not Lmrg.]; ὁ καιρὸς (se. ἐστί) τοῦ ἄρξασθαι, to 
begin, 1 Pet. iv. 17 (καιρὸν ἔχειν w. the simple inf. Heb. 
xi. 15); διδόναι τὴν ἐξουσίαν, Lk. x. 19 (ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν 
with simple inf., Jn. xix. 10; 1 Co. ix. 4); ὀφειλέται 
ἐσμέν (equiv. to ὀφείλομεν), Ro. viii. 12 (with inf. alone, 
Gal. v. 3); ἕτοιμον εἶναι, Acts xxiii. 15 (1 Mace. iii. 58; 
v. 39; xiii. 37; with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 33); χρείαν 
ἔχειν, Heb. v. 12; ἔδωκεν ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν καὶ 
ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, that they should not see . . . that they 
should not hear [ef. B. 267 (230) ), Ro. xi. 8 (ἔχειν ὦτα 
elsewh. always with a simple inf.; see οὖς, 2); ἐπλί σῦη 
ὁ χρόνος τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν, at which she should be deliv- 
ered [ef. B. 1. ς.1, Lk.i.57; ἐπλήσθ. ἡμέραι . . . τοῦ περι- 
τεμεῖν αὐτόν, that they should circumcise him [ef. B. 1. e.], 
Lk. ii. 21; after avévdexrov ἐστιν, Lk. xvii. 1 [so B. § 140, 
15; (W. 328 (308) otherwise) ]; quite unusually after 
ἐγένετο [cf. B. § 140, 16 8.; W.1.c¢.], Acts x. 25 [Ree. 
om. art. ]. y- after verbs of deciding, entreat- 
ing, exhorting, commanding, οἷο. : after κρίνειν 
(see κρίνω, 4); ἐγένετο γνώμη [-uns T Tr WH (see γίνομαι, 
5 e.a.)], Acts xx. 3; τὸ πρόσωπον ἐστήριξεν, Lk. ix. 51; 
συντίθεσθαι, Acts xxiii. 20 (with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 5); 
προσεύχεσθαι, Jas. v.17; παρακαλεῖν, Acts xxi. 12; ἐν- 
τέλλεσθαι, Lk. iv. 10; ἐπιστέλλειν, Acts xv. 20 (with inf. 
alone, xxi. 25[R GT, but L Tr txt. WH here ἀποστέλ. ; B. 
270 (232)]); κατανεύειν, Lk. v. 7. δ. after verbs of 
hindering, restraining, removing, (which natu- 
rally require the genitive), and according to the well- 
known pleonasm with μή before the inf. [see μή, 1. 4 a.; 
B. § 148,13; W. 325 (305)]; thus, after κατέχω τινά, Lk. 
iv. 42; κρατοῦμαι, Lk. xxiv. 16; κωλύω, Acts x. 47; ὑπο- 
στέλλομαι, Acts xx. 20, 27; παύω, 1 Pet. iii. 10; κατα- 
παύω, Acts xiv. 18; without μή before the inf. after 
ἐγκόπτομαι, Ro. xv. 22. €. τοῦ with an inf. is added 
as a somewhat loose epexegesis: Lk. xxi. 22; Acts ix. 
15; xiii. 47; Phil. iii. 21; εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι 
τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν. to the uncleanness of their bodies’ be- 


0 436 ὁ 


ing dishonored, Ro. i. 34 [ef. B. § 140, 14]; W. 325 
(305) sq. Ὁ it takes the place of an entire final 
clause, in order that [W. § 44,4 Ὁ. ; B.§ 140,17]; esp. 
after verbs implying motion: Mt. ii. 13; iii. 13; xiii. 3; 
xxiv. 45; Mk. iv. 3 (where ἢ Τ WHom. Tr br. τοῦ) ; Lk. 
i. 77, 79; ii. 24,27; v. 1 [RGLtxt. Trmrg.]; viii. 5; 
xii. 42 (here Lom. Tr br. τοῦ); xxii. 31; xxiv. 29; Acts 
iii. 2; xx. 30; xxvi. 18; Ro. vi. 6; xi. 10; Gal. iii. 10; 
Phil. iii. 10; Heb. x. 7,95 xi. 5. yn. used of result, 
so that: Acts vii. 19; Ro. vii. 3; after ποιῶ. to cause that, 
make to, Acts iii. 12; [ef. W. 326 (306); B. § 140, 
16 6.]. 7. The article with adverbs [B. § 125, 
10 sq.; W. § 18, 3], a. gives them the force of sub- 
stantives; as, τὸ πέραν, the region beyond; τὰ ἄνω, τὰ 
κάτω, TO νῦν, Ta ἔμπροσθεν, τὰ ὀπίσω, etc.; see these 
words in their proper places. b. is used when they 
stand adjectively, as ἡ ἄνω Ἱερουσαλήμ, 6 τότε κόσμος, ὁ 
ἔσω ἄνθρωπος, ὁ νῦν αἰών, etc., on which see these several 
words. c. the neut. τό is used in the ace. absol., esp. 
in specifications of time: both with adverbs of time, τὸ 
πάλιν, 2 Co. xiii. 2; τὰ νῦν or τανῦν, and with neuter ad- 
jectives used adverbially, as τὸ λοιπόν, τὸ πρότερον (Jn. 
vi. 62; Gal. iv. 13); τὸ πρῶτον (Jn. x. 40; xii. 165 xix. 
39); τὸ πλεῖστον (1 Co. xiv. 27); see these words them- 
selves. 8. The article before pre positions with 
their cases is very often so used that ὦν, ὄντες, ὄντα, 
must be supplied in thought [ef. B. § 125, 9; W.§ 18, 3]; 
thus, of ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης, Acts xvii. 13; 
Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66, 6]; ὁ ἔν τινι, Mt. vi. 9; Ro. 
viii. 1; neut. τὰ πρός, Mk. ii. 2; of ἔκ τινος, Ro. ii. 8; iv. 
14, 16; Phil. iv. 22 etc.; of παρά τινος, Mk. iii. 21 (see 
παρά, 1. e.). τὰ περί twos, Lk. xxiv. 19; Acts xxiv. 10; 
Phil. i. 27; [add, ra (T Tr WH τὸ) περὶ ἐμοῦ, Lk. xxii. 
37], ete. (see περί, I. b. 8.) ; τὰ περί τινα, Phil. ii. 23 [see 
περί, II. b.]; of μετά twos, those with one, his compan- 
ions, Mt. xii. 3; of περί τινα, and many other exx. which 
are given under the several prepositions. the neut. τό 
in the ace. absol. in adverbial expressions [ef. W. 230 
(216); B. §$ 125,12; 131, 9]: τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, day 
by day, Lk. xi. 3; xix. 47; Acts xvii. 11 [RG WH br.]; 
τὸ καθόλου, at all, Acts iv. 18 [LT WH om. τό]; besides, 
in τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as respects human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [on 
the force of the art. here see Abbot in Journ. Soe. Bibl. 
Lit. etc. for 1883, p. 108]; τὰ κατ᾽ ἐμέ, as respects what 
relates to me, my state, my affairs, Col. iv. 7; Eph. vi. 
21; τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, as far as depends on you, Ro. xii. 18; 
τὸ ἐφ᾽ ὑμῖν, as far as respects you, if I regard you, Ro. 
xvi. 19 RG; τὰ πρὸς (τὸν) θεόν, acc. absol., as respects 
the things pertaining to God, i. e. in things pertaining 
to God, Ro. xv. 17; Heb. ii. 17; v. 1, (ἱερεῖ ra πρὸς τοὺς 
θεούς, στρατηγῷ δὲ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, Xen. resp. 
Laced. 18,11; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. δὰ Rom. iii. p. 262 sq.) ; 
τὸ ἐκ μέρους sc. ὄν, that which has been granted us in 
part, that which is imperfect, 1 Co. xiii. 10. 9. 
The article, in all genders, when placed before the geni- 
tive of substantives indicates kinship, affinity, or some 
kind of connection, association or fellowship, or in gen- 
eral that which in some way pertains to a person or thing 


[οἷ W. § 30, 3; B. § 125, 7]; a. the masc. and the 
fem. article: ᾿Ιάκωβος ὁ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου, ὁ τοῦ ᾿Αλφαίου, 
the son, Mt. x. 2 (3), 3; Μαρία ἡ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβου, the 
mother, Mk. xvi. 1 [Tom. Tr br. rod]; Lk. xxiv. 10 [L 
TTr WI); Ἑμμὸρ τοῦ Συχέμ, of Hamor, the father of 
Shechem, Acts vii. 16 RG; ἡ τοῦ Οὐρίου, the wife, Mt. 
i. 6; of XAdns, either the kinsfolk, or friends, or domes- 
tics, or work-people, or slaves, of Chloe, 1 Co. i. 11; also 
οἱ ᾿Αριστοβούλου, of Ναρκίσσου, Ro. xvi. 10 sq.3 of τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, the followers of Christ [A. V. they that are 
Christ’s], 1 Co. xv. 23 GL T Tr WH; Gal. v. 24; of τῶν 
Φαρισαίων, the disciples of the Pharisees, Mk. ii. 18" Rec., 
18" RGL; Καισαρεία ἡ Φιλίππου, the city of Philip, Mk. 
Vili. 27. b. τό and τά τινος : as τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the cause 
or interests, the purposes, of God, opp. to τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώ- 
πων, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; in the same sense τὰ τοῦ 
κυρίου, Opp. to τὰ Tov κόσμον, 1 Co. vii. 32-34; τὰ τῆς 
σαρκός, Ta τοῦ πνεύματος, Ro. viii. 5; τὰ ὑμῶν, your pos- 
sessions, 2 Co. xii. 14; ζητεῖν τό or τά τινος, 1 Co. x. 24; 
xiii. 5; Phil. ii. 21; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, τῆς οἰκοδομῆς, which 
make for, Ro. xiv. 19; τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας μου, which per- 
tain to my weakness, 2 Co. xi. 30; τὰ Καίσαρος, τὰ 
τοῦ θεοῦ, due to Cesar, due to God, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk. 
xii. 17; Lk. xx. 25; τὰ rod νηπίου, the things wont 
to be thought, said, done, by a child, 1 Co. xiii. 11; ra 
twos, the house of one (τὰ Λύκωνος, Theoer. 2, 76; [eis 
τὰ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ, Lysias c. Eratosth. § 12 p. 195]; ef. ἐν 
τοῖς πατρικοῖς, in her father’s house, Sir. xlii. 10; [Chry- 
sost. hom. lii. (on Gen. xxvi. 16), vol. iv. pt. ii. col. 
458 ed. Migne; Gen. xli. 51; Esth. vii. 9, (Hebr. 3); 
Job xviii. 19 (Hebr. 133) ]); with the name of a deity, 
the temple (τὰ τοῦ Διός, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 18, 2; also τὸ 
τοῦ Διός, Lycurg. ady. Leocr. p. 231 [(orat. Att. p. 167, 
15)]), Lk. ii. 49 (see other exx. in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 100). 
τὰ τοῦ νόμου, the precepts of the (Mosaic) law, Ro. ii. 
14; τὸ τῆς παροιμίας, the (saying) of (that which is said 
in) the proverb, 2 Pet. ii. 22; τὰ τῶν δαιμονιζομένων, 
what the possessed had done and experienced, Mt. viii. 
33; τὸ τῆς συκῆς, What has been done to the fig-tree, Mt. 
xxi. 21. 10. The neuter τό is put a. before 
entire sentences, and sums them up into one conception 
[B. § 125, 13; W. 109 (103 sq.)]: εἶπεν αὐτῷ τό Εἰ δύνα- 
σαι πιστεῦσαι, said to him this: ‘If thou canst believe’, 
Mk. ix. 23 [but L T Tr WH τό Εἰ δύνῃ ‘If thou canst!’]; 
ef. Bleek ad loc.; [Riddell, The Apology ete. Digest of 
Idioms $19 y.]. before the sayings and precepts of the 
O. T. quoted in the New: τό Οὐ φονεύσεις, the precept, 
‘Thou shalt not kill’, Mt. xix. 18; add, Lk. xxii. 37 
(where Lehm. ὅτε for τό); Ro. xiii. 9; [1 Co. iv. 6 LT 
Tr WH]; Gal. v.14. before indir. questions: τὸ τίς ete., 
τὸ τί ete., τὸ πῶς ete., Lk. i. 62; ix. 46; xix. 48; xxii. 2, 
4, 23 sq.; Acts iv. 21; xxii. 30; Ro. viii. 26; 1 Th. iv. 1; 
cf. Matthiae § 280; Kriiger § 50, 6, 10; Passow ii. 
Ρ. 395°; [L. and 5. 5. v. B. 1. 3 sq.]- b. before single 
words which are explained as parts of some discourse 
or statement [reff. as above]: τὸ Ἄγαρ, the name ”Ayap, 
Gal. iv. 25 [T Ltxt. WH mrg. om. Tr br. “Ayap]; τὸ 
‘ dvé8n’, this word ἀνέβη, Eph. iv. 9, [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on 


ὀγδοήκοντα 


Gal. L 5.7; τὸ “ἔτι ἅπαξ᾽, Heb. xii. 27; οἵ. Matthiae ii. 
p- 731 sq. 11. We find the unusual expression 7 
οὐαί (apparently because the interjection was to the 
writer a substitute for the term ἡ πληγή or ἡ θλίψις [W. 
179 (169)]), misery, calamity, [A. V. the Woe], in Rev. 
ix. 125 xi. 14. 

111. Since it is the business, not of the lexicographer, 
but of the grammarian, to exhibit the instances in which 
the article is omitted in the N. T. where according to the 
laws of our language it would have been expected, we 
refer those interested in this matter to the Grammars of 
Winer (§ 19) and Alex. Buttmann (§ 124, 8) [ef. also 
Green ch. ii. § iii. ; Middleton, The Doctrine of the Greek 
Article (ed. Rose) pp. 41 sqq., 94 54. ; and, particularly 
with reference to Granville Sharp’s doctrine (Remarks 
on the uses of the Def. Art. in the Grk. Text of the N. T., 
8d ed. 1803), a tract by C. Winstanley (A Vindication 
ete.) republished at Cambr. 1819], and only add the foll. 
remarks: 1. More or less frequently the art. is 
wanting before appellatives of persons or things of which 
only one of the kind exists, so that the art. is not needed 
to distinguish the individual from others of the same 
kind, as ἥλιος, γῆ; θεός, Χριστός, πνεῦμα ἅγιον, ζωὴ αἰώνιος, 
θάνατος, νεκροί (of the whole assembly of the dead [see 
νεκρός, 1 b. p. 423"]); and also of those persons and 
things which the connection of discourse clearly shows 
to be well-defined, as νόμος (the Mosaic law [see νόμος, 
2 p. 42857), κύριος, πατήρ, vids, ἀνήρ (husband), γυνή 
(wife), ete. 2. Prepositions which with their cases 
designate a state and condition, or a place, or a mode 
of acting, usually have an anarthrous noun after them; 
as, εἰς φυλακήν, ἐν φυλακῇ, εἰς ἀέρα, ἐκ πίστεως, κατὰ 
σάρκα, ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι, παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα, ἀπ᾽ ἀγορᾶς, ἀπ᾽ ἀγροῦ, ἐν 
ἀγρῷ, εἰς ὁδόν, ἐν ἡμέραις Ἡρώδου, εἰς ἡμέραν ἀπολυτρώ- 
σεως, and numberless other examples. 

ὀγδοήκοντα, eighty: Lk. ii. 37; xvi. 7. [(Thuc., al.) ] * 

ὄγϑοος, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], the eighth: Lk. i. 59; 
Acts vii. 8; Rev. xvii. 11; xxi. 20; one who has seven 
other companions, who with others is the eighth, 2 Pet. ii. 
δ: so δέκατος, with nine others, 2 Mace. v. 27; ef. Matthiae 
§ 469,9; Viger. ed. Herm. p. 72 sq. and 720sq.; W. § 37, 
2; [B. 30 (26)].* 

ὄγκος, -ov, 6, (apparently fr. ETKQ, ἐνεγκεῖν, i. q. φόρτος, 
see Butimann, Lexil. i. 288 sqq. [Fishlake’s trans. p. 
151 sq.], whatever is prominent, protuberance, buik, mass, 
hence), α burden, weight, encumbrance: Heb. xii.1. (In 
many other uses in Grk. writ. of all ages.) * 

|Syn. Sykos,Bdpos, φορτίον: B. refers to weight, o. to 
bulk, and either may be oppressive (contra Tittmann); 8. a 
load in so far as it is heavy, φορτίον a burden in so far as it 
is borne; hence the opr. may be either ‘ heavy’ (Mt. xxiii. 
4; Sir. xxi. 16), or ‘light’ (Mt. xi. 30).] 

ὅδε. ἥδε, τόδε, (fr. the old demonstr. pron. 6, 7, τό, and 
the enclit. δέ), [fr. Hom. down], this one here, Lat. hicce, 
haecce, hocce ; a. it refers to what precedes: Lk. x. 
89 and Rec. in xvi. 25; τάδε πάντα, 2 Co. xii. 19 Grsb.; 
to what follows: neut. plur. rade, these (viz. the following) 
things, as follows, thus, introducing words spoken, Acts 


437 


ὁδός 


xv. 23 RG; τάδε λέγει etc., Acts xxi. 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12, 
18; iii.1,7,14. Ὀ. εἰς τήνδε τὴν πόλιν, [where we say 
into this or that city] (the writer not knowing what par- 
ticular city the speakers he introduces would name), Jas. 
iv. 13 (cf. W. 162 (153), who adduces as similar τήνδε 
τὴν ἡμέραν, Plut. symp. 1,6, 1; [but see Liinemann’s ad- 
dition to Win. and esp. B. § 127, 2]).* 

ὁδεύω; (ὁδός) ; to travel, journey: Lk. x. 33. (Hom. 
Il. 11, 569; Xen. an. 7, 8,8; Joseph. antt. 19, 4, 2; Ὁ. 1. 
3, 6,3; Hdian. 7, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]; Plut., al.; Tob. vi. 
6.) [Comp.: δι-, συν-οδεύω.) 

ὁδηγέω, -a; fut. ὁδηγήσω; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. 
ὁδηγήσῃ ; (ὁδηγός, q-v.); Sept. chiefly for 773, also for 
77, yon, ete: ; a. prop. to be a guide, lead on 
one’s way, to guide: τινά, Mt. xv. 14; Lk. vi. 39; τινὰ ἐπί 
τι, Rev. vii. 17; (Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Aleiphr., Babr., 
al.). Ὁ. trop. to be a quide or teacher; to give guid- 
ance to: twa, Acts viii. 31 (Plut. mor. 954 b.); εἰς τὴν 
ἀλήθειαν, Jn. xvi. 13 [RG L Tr WH txt. (see below) ] 
(ὁδήγησόν pe ἐπὶ τὴν ἀλήθειάν σου καὶ δίδαξόν pe, Ps. xxiv. 
(xxv.) 5 [foll. by εἰς and πρός in “Teaching of the 
Apostles” ch. 87); foll. by ἐν w. dat. of the thing in which 
one gives guidance, instruction or assistance to another, 
ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, Jn. xvi. 13 T WH mrg. [see above] (ὅδήη- 
γησόν pe ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ σου k. πορεύσομαι ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ σου, Ps. 
Ιχχχν. (Ixxxvi.) 11; ef. Ps. exviii. (exix.) 85; Sap. 1χ.11; 
x. 17). 

ὁδηγός, -0v, ὁ, (ὁδός and jyéopar; cf. χορηγός}, a leader 
of the way, a guide; a. prop.: Acts i. 16 (Polyb. 5, 
5,15; Plut. Alex. 27; 1 Mace. iv. 2; 2 Mace.v.15). Ὄ. 
in fig. and sententious discourse 65. τυφλῶν, i. 6. like one 
who is literally so called, namely a teacher of the ignorant 
and inexperienced, Ro. ii. 19; plur. 68. τυφλοὶ τυφλῶν, i. 6. 
like blind guides in the literal sense, in that, while them- 
selves destitute of a knowledge of the truth, they offer 
themselves to others as teachers, Mt. xv. 14; xxiii. 16, 24.” 

ὁδοιπορέω, -@; (ὁδοιπόρος a wayfarer, traveller); to 
travel, journey: Acts x. 9. (Hdt., Soph., Xen., Ael. v. 
h. 10, 4; Hdian. 7, 9, 1, al.) * 

ὁδοιπορία, -as, ἡ, (ὁδοιπόρος), a journey, journeying: Jn. 
iv.6; 2Co. xi. 26. (Sap. xiii. 18; xviii. 3; 1 Macc. vi. 41; 
Hadt., Xen., Diod. 5, 29; Hdian. al.) * 

ὁδο-ποιέω, -ὥ; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down, to make a 
road ; to level, make passable, smooth, open, a way; and 
so also in the Sept.: ὡδοποίησε τρίβον τῇ ὀργῇ αὐτοῦ, for ἡ 
Dba, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50; for 99, to construct a level 
way by casting up an embankment, Job xxx. 12; Ps. Ixvii. 
(Ixviii.) 5; for 732, Ps. lxxix. (Ixxx.) 10; for 377 733, 
Is. xii. 10;—and so, at least apparently, in Mk. ii. 23 
LTrmrg. WH mrg. [see ποιέω, I. 1 a. and 6.1 (with ὁδόν 
added, Xen. anab. 4, 8, 8).* 

ὁδός, -οὔ, ἡ, [appar. fr. τ. EA to go (Lat. adire, accedere), 
allied w. Lat. solum; Curtius § 281]; Sept. numberless 
times for )7, less frequently for N18; [fr. Hom. down]; 
a way; 1. prop. a. ἃ travelled way, road: 
Mt. ii. 12; vii. 18 sq.; xiii. 4,19; Mk. iv. 4, 15; x. 46; 
Lk. viii. 5, 12; x. 513 xviii. 35; xix. 86; Acts viii. 26; 
ix. 17; Jas. ii. 25, ete.; κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν (as ye pass along 


060s 


the way [see xara, II. 1 a.]) by the way, on the way, Lk. 
x. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; σαββάτου odds, 
[A. V. a sabbath-day’s journey] the distance that one is 
allowed to travel on the sabbath, Acts i. 12 (see σάββατον, 
1 ἃ.). ἡ ὁδός with a gen. of the object, the way leading 
to a place (the Hebr. 7 also is construed with a gen., 
cf. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 676 [Gr. §112, 2; ef. W.§ 30, 
27}: ἐθνῶν, Mt. x. 5; τῶν ἁγίων into the holy place, Heb. 
ix. 8, cf. x. 20, where the grace of God is symbolized by 
a way, cf. ζάω, II. b., (τοῦ ξύλου, Gen. iii. 24; Αἰγύπτου 
. ᾿Ασσυρίων, Jer. ii. 18; γῆς Φιλιστιείμ, Ex. xiii. 17; 
τοῦ Σινᾶ, Judith v.14; Lat. via mortis, Tibull. 1, 10, 4; cf. 
Kiihner ii. p. 286, 4). in imitation of the Hebr. 773, the 
ace. of which takes on almost the nature of a preposition, 
in the way to, towards, (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 352"), we 
find ὁδὸν θαλάσσης in Mt. iv. 15 fr. Is. viii. 23 (ix. 1), (so 
ὁδὸν [τῆς θαλάσσης, 1 K. xviii. 43]; γῆς αὐτῶν, 1 K. viii. 
48; 2Chr. vi. 38; ὁδὸν δυσμῶν ἡλίου, Deut. xi. 30; more- 
over, once with the acc., ὁδὸν θάλασσαν ἐρυθράν, Num. 
xiv. 25; [Deut. ii. 1]; ef. Thiersch, De Alex. Pentateuchi 
versione, p. 145 sq.; [B. § 131, 12]). with a gen. of the 
subject, the way in which one walks: ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν, 
Xo. iii. 16; ἑτοιμάζειν τὴν ὁδὸν τῶν βασιλέων, Rev. xvi. 
12; in metaph. phrases, κατευθύνειν τὴν ὁδόν τινος, to re- 
move the hindrances to the journey, 1 Th. iii. 11; éro- 
μάζειν (and εὐθύνειν, Jn. i. 23; κατασκευάζειν, Mt. xi. 10; 
Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27) τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ κυρίου, see ἑτοιμάζω. 
Ὁ. atraveller’s way, journey, travelling : ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, on the 
journey, on the road, Mt. v. 25; xv.32; xx. 17; Mk. viii. 
27; ix. 33; x. 32,52; Lk. xii. 58; xxiv. 32, 35; Acts ix. 
27; ἐξ ὁδοῦ, from a journey, Lk. xi. 6; αἴρειν or κτᾶσθαί 
τι εἰς ὁδόν, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8, and εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, Lk. ix. 
3; πορεύομαι τὴν ὁδόν, to make a journey (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 
22), w. αὐτοῦ added [A. V. fo go on one’s way], to con- 
tinue the journey undertaken, Acts viii. 39; ὁδὸς ἡμέρας, 
a journey requiring a (single) day for its completion, 
used also, like our a day’s journey, as a measure of dis- 
tance, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxx. 36; xxxi. 23; Ex. iii. 18; 
Judith ii. 21; 1 Mace. v. 24; vii. 45; ἀπέχειν παμπόλλων 
ἡμερῶν dddv, Xen. Cyr. 1, 1, 3, cf. Hdt. 4, 101 [W. 188 
(177)]); on the phrase ὁδὸν ποιεῖν, Mk. ii. 23 see ποιέω, 
I. 1a. ande. 2. Metaph. a. according to the 
familiar fig. of speech, esp. freq. in Hebr. [οἵ W. 32] and 
not unknown to the Greeks, by which an action is 
τ spoken of as a proceeding (ef. the Germ. Wandel), ὁδός 
denotes a course of conduct, a way (i. 6. manner) of think- 
ing, feeling, deciding: a person is said ὁδὸν δεικνύναι τινί, 
who shows him how to obtain a thing, what helps he 
must use, 1 Co. xii. 31; with a gen. of the obj., i. e. of 
the thing to be obtained, εἰρήνης, Ro. iii. 17; ζωῆς. Acts 
ii. 28; σωτηρίας, Acts xvi. 17; with a gen. of the subj., τῆς 
δικαιοσύνης. the way which ἡ δικαιοσ. points out and which 
is wont to characterize ἡ d:x., so in Mt. xxi. 32 (on which 
see δικαιοσύνη, 1 Ὁ. p. 149" bot.); used of the Christian 
religion, 2 Pet. ii. 21; likewise τῆς ἀληθείας, ibid. 2; with 
gen. of the person deciding and acting, Jas. v. 20; τοῦ 
Κάϊν, Jude 11; τοῦ Βαλαάμ, 2 Pet. ii. 15; ἐν πάσαις ταῖς 
ὁδοῖς αὐτοῦ, in all his purposes and actions, Jas. i.8; τὰς 


438 


ὄξω 


ὁδούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ, the methods which I as Christ’s min- 
ister and apostle follow in the discharge of my office, 1 Co. 
iv. 17; those are said πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν [10 walk 
in their own ways | who take the course which pleases them, 
even though it be a perverse one, Acts xiv. 16 [on the dat. 
see mopeva, sub fin. 1; ai ὁδοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ or κυρίου, the purposes 
and ordinances of God, his ways of dealing with men, 
Acts xiii. 10; Ro. xi. 33; Rev. xv. 3, (Hos. xiv. 9; Ps. 
xciv. (xev.) 10; exliv. (exlv.) 17; Sir. xxxix. 24; Tob. 
iii. 2, ete.). ἡ ὁδὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, the course of thought, feel- 
ing, action, prescribed and approved by God: Mt. xxii. 
16; Mk. xii. 14; Lk. xx. 21; used of the Christian re- 
ligion, Acts xviii. 26; also ἡ 6. τοῦ κυρίου, ibid. 25; ὁδός 
used generally of a method of knowing and worshipping 
God, Acts xxii. 4; xxiv. 14; ἡ ὁδός simply, of the Chris- 
tian religion [cf. B. 163 (142)], Acts ix. 2; xix. 9, 23; 
xxiv. 22. Ὄ. in the saying of Christ, ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ὁδός 1 
am the way by which one passes, i. e. with whom all who 
seek approach to God must enter into closest fellowship, 
Jn. xiv. 6. [On the omission of ὁδός in certain formulas 
and phrases (Lk. v. 19; xix. 4), see W. 590 (549) sq.; B. 
§ 123, 8; Bos, Ellipses etc. (ed. Schaefer) p. 331 sq.] 

ὁδούς, [ace. to Etym. Magn. 615, 21 (Pollux 6, 38) fr. 
ἔδω, Lat. edere, etc., cf. Curtius § 289; al. fr. root da to 
divide, cf. daiw, δάκνω; (Lat. dens); Fick i. p. 100], 
-dvros, ὁ, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 1; @ tooth: Mt. v. 
38; Mk. ix. 18; Acts vii. 54; plur. Rev. ix. 8° 6 βρυγμὸς 
τῶν ὀδόντων, see βρυγμός." 

ὀδυνάω, -ὦ : pres. indic. pass. ὀδυνῶμαι ; pres. ind. mid. 
2 pers. sing. ὀδυνᾶσαι (see κατακαυχάομαι), ptcp. ὀδυνώμε- 
vos; (ὀδύνη) ; lo cause intense pain; pass. to be in anguish, 
be tormented: Lk. xvi. 24 sq.; mid. fo torment or distress 
one’s self, ΓΔ. V. to sorrow], Lk. ii. 48; ἐπί τινι, Acts xx. 
38. (Arstph., Soph., Eur., Plat., al.; Sept.) * 

ὀδύνη, [perh. allied w. ἔδω ; consuming grief; cf. Lat. 
curae edaces },-ns, ἡ, pain, sorrow: Ro. ix. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 10. 
(From Hom. down; Sept.) * 

ὀδυρμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (ὀδύρομαι to wail, lament, [see κλαίω, 
fin.]), α wailing, lamentation, mourning: Mt. ii. 18 (fr. 
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15 for DNA); 2 Co. vii. 7. (2 
Mace. xi. 6; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Ael. 
v.h. 14, 22.) * 

*Otfas (1, T Tr WH ᾿Οζείας [οἵ. Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; 
WH. App. p. 155, and see εἰ; ¢]), του [but cf. B. 18 (16) ], 
ὁ, (Ary and wy strength of Jehovah, or my strength 
is Jehovah), Ozias or Uzziah, son of Amaziah, king of 
Judah, [6.1 B. c. 811-759 (2 K. xv. 30 sqq.): Mt. i. 8 56.» 
where the Evangelist ought to have preserved this order: 
Ἰωράμ. Ἢ χοξίας, Ἰωάς, ᾿Αμαζίας, Ἢ ζίας. He seems 
therefore to have confounded ᾿Οχοζίας and Ὀζίας; see 
another example of [apparent] confusion under Ἰεχονίας. 
[But Matthew has simply omitted three links; such 
omissions were not uncommon, cf. e.g. 1 Chr. vi. 3 sqq. 
and Ezra vii. 1 sqq. See the commentators. ]* 

étw; [fr. root 68, cf. Lat. and Eng. odor ete.; Curtius 
§ 288]; fr. Hom. down; to give out an odor (either good 
or bad), fo smell, emit a smell: of a decaying corpse, JL 
xi. 39; cf. Ex. viii. 14." 


ὅθεν 


ὅθεν, (fr. the rel. pron. 6 and the enclitic θεν which de- 
notes motion from a place), [fr. Hom. down], adv., from 
which; whence ; it is used a. of the place from which: 
Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 24; Acts xiv. 26; xxviii. 13; by at- 
traction for ἐκεῖθεν ὅπου etc., Mt. xxv. 24, 26; cf. B. § 143, 
12; [W. 159 (150)]. b. of the source from which a 
thing is known, from which, whereby: 1 Jn. ii. 18. C: 
of the cause from which, for which reason, wherefore, on 
which account, [A.V. whereupon (in the first two in- 
stances)]: Mt. xiv. 7; Acts xxvi. 19; Heb. ii. 17; iii. 
1; vii. 25; viii. 3; ix. 18; xi. 19; often in the last three 
books of Macc.* 

ὀθόνη, -ης, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down]; a. linen [i. e. fine 
white linen for women’s clothing; ef. Vanitek, Fremd- 
worter, s. v. ]- b. linen cloth (sheet or sail); so Acts 
Kenta iexa:) 5:5 


ὀθόνιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ὀθόνη, 4. v-), a piece of linen, 
small linen cloth: plur. strips of linen cloth for swathing 
the dead, Lk. xxiv. 12 [Tom.L Trbr. WH reject the 
vs.]; Jn. xix. 40; xx. 5-7. (In Grk. writ. of ships’ sails 
made of linen, bandages for wounds, and other articles; 
Sept. for p10, Judg. xiv. 13; for TAWD or Π3, Hos. ii. 
5 (7), 9 (11).)* 

οἶδα, see εἴδω, II. p. 174. 

οἰκειακός, -7, -dv, 566 οἰκιακός. 

οἰκεῖος, -a, τον, (οἶκος), fr. Hes. down, belonging to a 
house or family, domestic, intimate: belonging to one’s 
household, related by blood, kindred, 1 Tim. v. 8; οἰκεῖοι 
tov θεοῦ, belonging to God’s household, i. 6. to the theoc- 
racy, Eph. ii. 19; in a wider sense, with a gen. of the 
thing, belonging to, devoted to, adherents of a thing, οἱ οἰκεῖοι 
τῆς πίστεως, professors of the (Christian) faith, Gal. vi. 
10 [but al. associate this pass. with that fr. Eph. as above; 
see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; so otk. φιλοσοφίας, Strab. 1 p. 
13 Ὁ. [1, 17 ed. Sieben.]; γεωγραφίας, p. 25 a. [1, 34 ed. 
Sieben.]; ὀλιγαρχίας, Diod. 13, 91; τυραννίδος, 19, 70. 
(Sept. for Ww related by blood ; 37, 1S. x. 14 sqq.; 
TN, consanguinity, Lev. xviii. 17; οἶκ. τοῦ σπέρματος 
for wa, Is. lviii. 7.) * 

οἰκέτεια [al. -εία, cf. Chandler § 99 sqq.], -as, 4, (οἰκέτης, 
q: V-), household i. e. body of servants (Macrob., Appul. 
famulitium, Germ. Dienerschaft): Mt. xxiv. 45 L T Tr 
WH. (Strab., Leian., Inserr.; plur. Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 
3.)* 

οἰκέτης, -ov, 0, (οἰκέω), fr. [ Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down, 
Lat. domesticus, i. e. one who lives in the same house with 
another, spoken of all who are under the authority of 
one and the same householder, Sir. iv. 30; vi. 11, esp. 
a servant, domestic; so in Lk. xvi. 13; Acts x. 7; Ro. xiv. 
4; 1 Pet. ii. 18; Sept. for tay. See more fully on the 
word, Meyer on Rom. I. 6. [where he remarks that oik. 
is a more restricted term than δοῦλος, designating a 
house-servant, one holding closer relations to the family 
than other slaves ; ef. διάκονος fin., Schmidt ch. 162.]* 

olkéw, -; (οἶκος) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 3", a few 
times for 13 ; Lat. habito, [trans.] to dwell in: ri (Hat. 
and often in Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 16; [intrans. to dwell], 
μετα τινος, with one (of the husband and wife), 1 Co. vii. 


439 


: : 
οἰκοδομέω 


12 sq.; trop. ἔν τινι, to be fixed and operative in one’s 
soul: of sin, Ro. vii. 17 sq. 20; of the Holy Spirit, Ro. 
viii. [9], 11; 1 Co. iii. 16. [Comp.: ἐν-, κατ-, ἐν-κατ-, 
παρ-, Tept-, συν-οικέω.] * 

οἴκημα, -ros, τό, fr. [ Pind. and] Hdt. down, a dwelling- 
place, habitation; euphemistically a prison, [R. V. cell], 
Acts xii. 7, as in Thue. 4, 47 sq.; Dem., Leian. Tox. 29; 
Plut. Agis 19; Ael. v. h. 6, 1.* 

οἰκητήριον, -ov, τό, (οἰκητήρ), a dwelling-place, habita- 
tion: Jude 6; of the body as the dwelling-place of the 
spirit, 2 Co. ν. 2 (2 Mace. xi. 2; 3 Mace. ii. 15; [Joseph. 
6. Ap. 1, 20, 7]; Eur., Plut., Ceb. tab. 17).* 

οἰκία, -as, ἡ, (οἶκος), Sept. for m3, [fr. Hdt. down], a 
house; a. prop. an inhabited edifice, a dwelling: Mt. 
ii. 11; vii. 24-27; Mk.i. 29; Lk. xv. 8; Jn. xii. 3; Acts 
iv. 34; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 20, and often; οἱ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 
se. ὄντες, Mt. v. 15; οἱ ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας with gen. of pers., 
Phil. iv. 22; ἡ οἰκία τοῦ (πατρός pov) θεοῦ, i. e. heaven, 
Jn. xiv. 2; of the body as the habitation of the soul, 2 
Co. v. 1. b. the inmates of a house, the family : Mt. xii. 
25; ἡ οἰκία τινός, the household, the family of any one, 
Jn. iv. 53; 1 Co. xvi. 15 [ef. W. § 58, 4; Β. § 129, 8a.]; 
univ. for persons dwelling in the house, Mt. x. 13. Ὁ: 
property, wealth, goods, [ οἷ. Ταῦ. res familiaris]: τινός, Mt. 
xxiii. 14 (13) Ree. [ef. Wetst. ad loc.]; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. 
xx. 47; so οἶκος in Hom. (as Od. 2, 237 κατέδουσι βιαίως 
οἶκον ᾿Οδυσσῆος, cf. 4, 318), in Hdt. 8, 53 and in Attic; 
Hebr. 973, Gen. xlv.18 (Sept. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα) ; Esth. viii. 
1 (Sept. ὅσα ὑπῆρχεν). Not found in Rey. [Syn. see 
οἶκος, fin. ] 

οἰκιακός (in prof. auth. and in some N. T. codd. also 
οἰκειακός [cf. εἰ, ¢] fr. οἶκος), -00, ὁ, (οἰκία), one belonging to 
the house (Lat. domesticus), one under the control of the 
master of a house, whether a son, or a servant: Mt. x. 
36; opp. to ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης, ib. 25. (Plut. Cie. 20.) * 

οἰκο-δεσποτέω, -@; (οἰκοδεσπότης) ; to be master (or head) 
of a house; to rule a household, manage family affairs: 1 
Tim. v.14. (A later Grk. word; see Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 373.) ἢ 

οἰκο-δεσπότης, -ov, 6, (οἶκος, δεσπότης, master of a house, 
householder: Mt. x. 25; xiii. 27; xx. 11; xxiv.43; Mk. 
xiv. 14; Lk. xii. 39; xiii. 25; xiv. 21; ἄνθρωπος οἰκοδ. (see 
ἄνθρωπος, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 52; χχ. 1; xxi. 33; οἰκοδεσπ. τῆς 
οἰκίας, Lk. xxii. 11, 0n this pleonasm ef. Bornemann, Schol. 
ad loce.; W. § 65, 2. (Alexis, a comic poet of the IV. cent. 
B. C. ap. Poll. 10, 4, 21; Joseph. 6. Ap. 2,11, 3; Plut. 
quaest. Rom. 30; Ignat. ad Eph. 6. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
373 shows that the earlier Greeks said οἴκου or οἰκίας 
δεσπότης.) * 

οἰκοδομέω, τῶ: impf. ὠκοδόμουν ; fut. οἰκοδομήσω ; 1 aor. 
φκοδόμησα [οἷκ. Tr WH in Acts vii. 47; see Tdf. ad loc. ; 
Proleg. p. 120; WH. App. p. 161; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153; 
W. § 12, 4; B. 34 (30)]; Pass., [pres. οἰκοδομοῦμαι (inf. 
-μεῖσθαι, Lk. vi. 48 Treg.); pf. inf. οἰκοδομῆσθαι (Lk. vi. 
48 T WH)]; plupf. 3 pers. sing. ὠκοδόμητο ; 1 aor. dxodo- 
μήθην [οἰκ. T WH in Jn. ii. 20]; 1 fut. οἰκοδομηθήσομαι ; 
(οἰκοδόμος, q- ν.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 733; to build 
a house, erect a building; a. prop. a. to build (up 


οἰκοδομὴ 


from the foundation): absol., Lk. xi.48 GT WH Trtxt.; 
xiv. 30; xvii. 28; of οἰκοδομοῦντες, subst., the builders [οἵ. 
W. § 45,7; Β. § 144, 11]. Mt. xxi.42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. 
xx. 17; Acts iv. 11 Rec.; 1 Pet. ii. 7, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii-) 
22; ἐπ᾿ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον, to build upon a foundation 
laid by others, i. 6. (without a fig.) to carry on instruction 
begun by others, Ro: xv. 20; οἰκοδομεῖν τι, Gal. ii. 18; 
πύργον, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xiv. 28; ἀποθήκας, 
Lk. xii. 18; ναόν, Mk. xiv. 58; pass. Jn. ii. 20 [on the aor. 
ef. 2 Esdr. v. 16]; οἶκον, pass., 1 Pet. ii. 5 ({here T ézork.], 
ef. W. 603 (561), and add οἰκουργεῖν τὰ κατὰ τὸν οἶκον, 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3); [οἰκίαν, Lk. vi. 48 (ef. W.1.¢.)]; 
συναγωγήν or οἶκόν τινι, for the use of or in honor of one, 
Lk. vii. 5; Acts vii. 47, 49, (Gen. viii. 20; Ezek. xvi. 24) ; 
οἰκίαν ἐπί τι, Mt. vii. 24, 26; Lk. vi. 49; πόλιν ἐπ᾽ ὄρους, 
Lk. iv. 29. β. contextually i. q. to restore by building, to 
rebuild, repair: τί, Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvi. 61; xxvii. 40; Mk. 


xv. 29; Lk. xi. 47 and R [Lbr. Trmrg.] in 48. b. 
metaph. α. i. q-to found: ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδυμήσω 


μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, i. 6. by reason of the strength of thy 
faith thou shalt be my principal support in the establish- 
ment of my church, Mt. xvi. 18, B. Since both a Chris- 
tian church and individual Christians are likened 
to a building or temple in which God or the Holy Spirit 
dwells (1 Co. iii. 9, 16 544. ; 2 Οο. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21), the 
erection of which temple will not be completely finished till 
the return of Christ from heaven, those who, by action, 
instruction, exhortation, comfort, promote the Christian 
wisdom of others and help them to live a correspondent 
life are regarded as taking part in the erection of that 
building, and hence are said οἰκοδομεῖν, i. 6. (dropping the 
fiz.) to promote growth in Christian wisdom, affection, grace, 
virtue, holiness, blessedness: absol., Acts xx. 32 LTTr 
WH; 1 Co. viii. 1; χ. 28: τινά, xiv.4; 1 Th. v. 11; pass. 
to grow in wisdom, piety, ete., Acts ix. 81; 1 Co. xiv. 17; 
univ. fo give one strength and courage, dispose to: eis τὴν 
πίστιν, Polye. ad. Philip. 3, 2 2 [yet here fo be built up into 
(in) ete.]; even to do what is wrong [A. V. embolden], 
eis τὸ τὰ εἰδωλύόθυτα ἐσθίειν, 1 Co. viii. 10 [ef. W. § 39, 3 
N. 3]. This metaphorical use of the verb Paul, in the 
opinion of Fritzsche (Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 205 sq.), did not 
derive from the fig. of building a temple, but from the 
O. T., where “7733 and 077 with an ace. of the pers. (10 
build one up and to pull one down) ae to bless and to 
ruin, to prosper and to injure, any one”; cf. Ps. xxvii. 
(xxviii.) 5; Jer. xxiv. 6; xl. (xxxiii.) 7. [Compe.: 
ἐπ-, συν-οικοδομέω.}" 

οἰκο-δομή, -ῆς, ἡ, (οἶκος, and δέμω to build), a later Grk. 
word, condemned by Phryn., yet used by Aristot., 
Theophr., [(but both these thought to be doubtful)], 
Diod. (1, 46), Philo (vit. Moys. i. § 40; de monarch. 
ii. § 2), Joseph., Plut., Sept., and many others, for οἶκο- 
δόμημα and οἰκοδόμησις ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 487 sqq. 
ef. p. 421; [W. 24]; 1. (the act of) building, build- 
ing up, i. q. τὸ οἰκοδομεῖν ; as, τῶν τειχέων, 1 Mace. xvi. 
23; τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Chr. xxvi. 27; in the N. T. 
metaph., edifying, edification, i.e. the act of one who 
promotes another’s growth in Christian wisdom, piety, 


> 
ar, 


440 


οἰκονόμος 


holiness, happiness, (see οἰκοδομέω, b. β. [οὐ W. 85 (8477): 
Ro. xiv. 19; xv. 2; [1 Co. xiv. 26]; 2 Co. x. 8 [see be- 
low]; xiii. 10; Eph. iv. 29; with a gen. of the person 
whose growth is furthered, ὑμῶν, 2Co. xii. 19, [ef x. 8]; 
ἑαυτοῦ [ Tdf. αὐτοῦ]. Eph. ἵν. 16: τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ. 
ibid. 12; τῆς ἐκκλησίας, 1 Co. xiv. 12; i. q. τὸ οἰκοδομοῦν, 
what contributes to edification, or augments wisdom, ete. 
λαλεῖν, λαβεῖν, οἰκοδομήν, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 5. CE 1: ἢ» 
οἰκοδόμημα, « building (i.e. thing built, edifice): Mk. xiii. 
1 sq-; τοῦ ἱεροῦ, Mt. xxiv. 1; used of the heavenly body, 
the abode of the soul after death, 2 Co. v. 1; trop. of 
a body of Christians, a Christian church, (see οἰκοδομέω, 
b. 8.), Eph. ii. 21 [ef. πᾶς, I. 1¢.]; with a gen. of the 
owner or occupant, θεοῦ, 1 Co. iii. 9." 

olkoSopla, -as, ἡ, (οἰκοδομέω), (the act of) building, 
erection, (Thue., Plat., Polyb., Plut., Leian., ete.; but 
never in the Sept.); metaph. οἰκοδομίαν θεοῦ τὴν ἐν 
πίστει, the increase which God desires in faith (see 
οἰκοδομή), 1 Tim. i. 4 Ree. δε: “*; but see οἰκονομία. Not 
infreq. οἶκον. and οἰκοδ. are confounded in the Mss.; see 
Grimm on 4 Mace. p. 365, ef. Hilgenfeld, Barn. epist. 
Ρ. 28; [D’Orville, Chariton 8, 1 p. 5997." 

οἰκο-δόμος, -ov, ὁ, (οἶκος, Séuw to build; cf. οἰκονόμος), 
a builder, an architect: Acts iv. 11 LT TrWH. (Hdt., 
Xen., Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

οἰκονομέω, -@; (οἰκονόμος) ; 10 be a steward; to manage 
the affairs of a household: absol. Lk. xvi. 2. (Univ. to 
manage, dispense, order, regulate: Soph., Xen., Plat., 
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. iii. 14.) * 

οἰκονομία, -as, 7, (οἰκονομέω), fr. Xen. and Plat. down, 
the management of a household or of household affairs; 
specifically, the management, oversight, administration, of 
others’ properly; the office of a manager or overseer, stew- 
ardship: Lk. xvi. 2-4; hence the word is transferred 
by Paul in a theocratic sense to the office (duty) in- 
trusted to him by God (the lord and master) of proclaim- 
ing to men the blessings of the gospel, 1 Co. ix. 17; ἡ 
οἰκονομία τοῦ θεοῦ, the office of administrator (stewardship) 
intrusted hy God, Col. i. 25. univ. administration, dis- 
pensation, which in a theocratic sense is ascribed to 
God himself as providing for man’s salvation: αἵτινες 

. ἢ οἰκονομίαν θεοῦ τὴν ἐν πίστει, which furnish matter 
for disputes rather than the (knowledge of the) dispen- 
sation of the things by which God has provided for and 
prepared salvation, which salvation must be embraced 
by faith, 1 Tim.i.4 LT Tr WH; ἣν προέθετο... . καιρῶν, 
which good-will he purposed to show with a view to 
(that) dispensation (of his) by which the times (sc. of 
infancy and immaturity cf. Gal. iv. 1-4) were to be ful- 
filled, Eph. i. 9 sq. : ἡ otk. τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ τῆς δοθεί- 
σης μοι, that dispensation (or arrangement) by which 
the grace of God was granted me, Eph. iii. 2; ἡ oi. τοῦ 
μυστηρίου, the dispensation by which he carried out his 
secret purpose, Eph. ii. 9G LT Tr WH 

οἰκονόμος, του, ὁ, (οἶκος, νέμω [‘to dispense, manage]; 
Hesych. ὁ τὸν οἶκον νεμόμενος), the manager of a house- 
hold or of household affairs; esp. a steward, manager, 
superintendent, (whether free-born, or, as was usually 


7 
οἰκὸς 


the case, ἃ freed-man or slave) to whom the head of 
the house or proprietor has intrusted the management 
of his affairs, the care of receipts and expenditures, and 
the duty of dealing out the proper portion to every ser- 
vant and even to the children not yet of age: LK. xii. 
42; 1 Co. iv. 2; Gal. iv. 2; the manager of a farm or 
landed estate, an overseer, [A. V. steward]: Lk. xvi. 1, 
3,8; 6 olk. τῆς πόλεως, the superintendent of the city’s 
finances, the treasurer of the city (Vulg. arcarius civitatis) : 
Ro. xvi. 23 (of the treasurers or quaestors of kings, 
Esth. viii. 9; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 7; 11, 
6,12, 8,6, 4). Metaph. the apostles and other Chris- 
tian teachers (see οἰκονομία) are called oik. μυστηρίων τοῦ 
θεοῖ, as those to whom the counsels of God have been 
committed to be made known to men: 1 Co. iv. 1; a 
bishop (or overseer) is called οἰκονόμος θεοῦ, of God as 
the head and master of the Christian theocracy [see 
οἶκος, 2], Tit. i. 7; and any and every Christian who 
rightly uses the gifts intrusted to him by God for the 
good of his brethren, belongs to the class called καλοὶ 
οἰκονόμοι ποικίλης χάριτος θεοῦ, 1 Pet. iv. 10. (Aeschyl., 
Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.; for m3-y Sept. 1 K. iv. 6; xvi. 
9. etc.) * 

οἶκος, -ου, ὁ, [ef. Lat. views, Eng. ending -wich; Cur- 
tius § 95], fr. Hom. down; Sept. in numberless places 
for 13, also for ‘on a palace, mk a tent, ete.; 1. 
a house; a. strictly, an inhabited house [differing thus 
fr. δόμος the building]: Acts ii. 2; xix. 16; τινός, Mt. ix. 
6 sq.; Mk. ii. 11; v. 38; Lk. i. 23, 40, 56; viii. 39, 41, 
εἴς. ; ἔρχεσθαι eis οἶκον, to come into a house (domum 
venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19); εἰς τὸν οἶκον, into the (i. 6. his 
or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10; xv. 6; ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ, in 
the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20; ἐν οἴκῳ, at home, 1 Co. xi. 
34; xiv. 35; of εἰς τὸν οἶκον (see eis, C. 2), Lk. ix. 61; 
κατ᾽ οἶκον, opp. to ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, in a household assembly, 
in private, [R. V. at home; see κατά, II. 1 d.], Acts ii. 46; 
ν. 42; κατ᾽ οἴκους, opp. to δημοσίᾳ, in private houses, 
[A. V. from house to house; see κατά, II. 3 a.], Acts xx. 
20; κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος, entering house after 
house, Acts viii. 3; ἡ κατ᾽ οἶκόν τινος ἐκκλησία, see ἐκκλη- 
σία, 4 Ὁ. aa. b. any building whatever: ἐμπορίου, In. 
ii. 16; προσευχῆς, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46; 
τοῦ βασιλέως, τοῦ ἀρχιερέως, the palace of etc., Mt. xi. 8; 
Lk. xxii. 54 [here T Tr WH οἰκία] ; τοῦ θεοῦ, the house 
where God was regarded as present, —of the tabernacle, 
Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4; of the temple at Jerusa- 
lem, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46; Jn. ii. 16 sq., 
(is. ἵν]. 5, 7); ef. Lk. xi. 51; Acts vii. 47, 49; of the heay- 
enly sanctuary, Heb. x. 21 (οἶκος ἅγιος θεοῦ, of heaven, 
Deut. xxvi. 15; Bar. ii. 16); a body of Christians (a 
church), as pervaded by the Spirit and power of God, is 
called οἶκος πνευματικός, 1 Pet. ii. 5. c. any dwelling- 
place: of the human body as the abode of demons that 
possess it, Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 24; (used in Grk. auth. also 
of tents and huts, and later, of the nests, stalls, lairs, of 
animals). univ. the place where one has fixed his resi- 
dence, one’s settled abode, domicile: οἶκος ὑμῶν, of the city 
of Jerusalem, Mt. xxiii. 38; Lk. xiii. 35. 2. by me- 


441 


οἰκουμένη 


ton. the inmates of a house, all the persons forming one 
family, a household: Lk. x.5; xi. 17 [al. refer this to 1, 
and take ἐπί either locally (see ἐπί, C. I. 1), or of succes- 
sion (see emi, C. 1. 2¢.)]; xix.9; Acts vii. 10; x. 2; xi. 
14; xvi. 31; xviii. 8; 1 Co.i.16; 1 Tim. iii. 4 sq.; v. 4; 
2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19; Heb. xi. 7; plur., 1 Tim. iii. 12; 
Tit. i. 11, (so also Gen. vii. 1; xlvii. 12, and often in 
Grk. auth.); metaph. and in a theocratic sense ὁ οἶκος 
tov θεοῦ, the family of God, of the Christian church, 
1 Tim. iii. 15; 1 Pet.iv.17; of the church of the Old and 
New Testament, Heb. iii. 2, 5 sq. (Num. xii. 7). 3. 
stock, race, descendants of one, [A. V. house]: ὁ οἶκος 
Δαυΐδ, Lk. i. 27, 69; ii. 4, (1 K. xii. 16); otk. Ἰσραήλ, 
Mt. x.6; xv. 24; Lk.i. 33; Acts ii. 36; vii.42; [(6 otk. 
᾿Ιακώβ), 46 LT Trmrg.]; Heb. viii. 8, 10, (Jer. xxxviii. 
(xxxi.) 31; Ex. vi. 14; xii. 3; xix.3; 1S. ii. 30; [οἷ 6 
σεβαστὸς οἶκος, Philo in Flac. § 4]). The word is not 
found in the Apocalypse. 

[Syn. οἶκος, οἰκία: in Attic (and esp. legal) usage, 
οἶκος denotes one’s household establishment, one’s entire prop- 
erty, οἰκία, the dwelling itself; and in prose οἶκος is not used 
in the sense of οἰκία. In the sense of family οἶκος and οἰκία 
are alike employed; Schmidt vol. ii. ch. 80. In relation to 
distinctions (real or supposed) betw. οἶκος and οἰκία the foll. 
pass. are of interest (cf. Valckenaer on Hat. 7, 224): Xen. 
oecon. 1,5 οἶκος δὲ δὴ τί δοκεῖ ἡμῖν εἶναι; ἄρα ὕπερ οἰκία, 
ἢ καὶ ὅσα τις ἔξω τῆς οἰκίας κέκτηται, πάντα τοῦ οἴκου 
ταῦτά ἐστιν... πάντα τοῦ οἴκον εἶναι ὅσα τις κέκτηται. 
Aristot. polit. 1, 2 p. 1252, 9 sqq. ἐκ μὲν οὖν τούτων τῶν δύο 
κοινωνιῶν (viz. of a man with wife and servant) οὐκ ia πρώτη, 
kat ὀρθῶς Ἡσίοδος εἶπε ποιήσας “οἶκον μὲν πρώτιστα γυναῖκά 
τε βοῦν τ᾽ ἀροτῆρα """... ἣ μὲν οὖν εἰς πᾶσαν ἡμέραν συνεστη- 
κυῖα κοινωνία κατὰ φύσιν οἷ κό 5 ἐστιν. ibid. 3 p. 1958", 5 sqq. 
πᾶσα πόλις ἐξ οἰκιῶν σύγκειται" οἰκίας δὲ μέρη, ἐξ ὧν αὖθις οἰκία 
συνίσταται" οἰκία δὲ τέλειος ἐκ δούλων κ. ἐλευθέρων... . πρῶτα 
δὲ καὶ ἐλάχιστα μέρη οἰκίας δεσπότης kK. δοῦλος kK. πόσις κ. 
ἄλοχος κ. πατὴρ κ. τέκνα ete. Plut. de audiend. poetis ὃ 6 καὶ 
γὰρ Olkdy ποτε μὲν τὴν οἰκίαν καλοῦσιν, “ οἶκον ἐς ὑψόροφον" - 
ποτὲ δὲ τὴν οὐσίαν, “ἐσθίεταί μοι οἶκος" (see οἰκία, ο.) 
Hesych. Lex. 8. ν. οἰκία: οἶκοι 8.0. οἶκος" ὀλίγη οἰκία 
... καὶ μέρος τι τῆς οἰκίας... καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ. In the 
N. T., although the words appear at times to be used with 
some discrimination (e. g. Lk. x. 5,6,7; Acts xvi. 31, 32, 34; 
οἵ. Jn. xiv. 2), yet other pass. seem to show that no distine- 
tion can be insisted upon: e. g. Mt. ix.23; Mk.v.38; Lk. vii. 
36, 87; Acts'x. 17, (22,82); xvii. δ. xix: 16; xxi 8; χὶ 11; 
12,13; xvi. 15; (1 Co. i. 16; xvi. 15).] 

οἰκουμένη, -ης, 7, (fem. of the pres. pass. ptep. fr. οἰκέω, 
[se. yn; cf. W. § 64,5; B. § 123, 87); 1. the inhab- 
ited earth; a. in Grk. writ. often the portion of the 
earth inhabited by the Greeks, in distinction trom the lands 
of the barbarians, cf. Passow ii. p. 415"; [L. and S.s. v. 
1: b. in the Grk. auth. who wrote about Roman 
affairs, (like the Lat. orbis terrarum) i. q. the Roman em- 
pire: so πᾶσα ἡ oix. contextually i. q. all the subjects of 
this empire, Lk. ii. 1. Ο. the whole inhabited earth, 
the world, (so in [Hyperid. Eux. 42 (“probably ” L. and 
S.)] Sept. for San and YS): UK. iv. 5; xxi. 26; Acts 
xxiv. 5; Ro. χ. 18; Rev. xvi. 14; Heb.i. 6, (πᾶσα ἡ oi. 
Joseph. b. 1. 7, 3, 3); ὅλη ἡ οἰκ., Mt. xxiv.14; Acts xi. 
28, (in the same sense Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 4 πᾶσα 7 ol«.; 


οἰκουργός 


ef. Bleek, Erkliar. ἃ. drei ersten Evv. i. p. 68); by meton. 
the inhabitants of the earth, men: Acts xvii. 6, 31 (Ps. ix. 
9); xix. 27; ἡ οἰκ. ὅλη, all mankind, Rev. iii. 10; xii. 
9. 2. the universe, the world: 88}. 1. 7 (alternating 
there with τὰ πάντα) ; ἡ oik. ἡ μέλλουσα, that consum- 
mate state of all things which will exist after Christ’s 
return from heaven, Heb. ii. 5 (where the word alter- 
nates with πάντα and τὰ πάντα, vs. 8, which there is taken 
in an absolute sense).* 

olkoupyds, -dv, (οἶκος, ΕΡΓΩ [cf. ἔργον, cf. ἀμπελουργός, 
γεωργός, ete.), caring for the house, working at home: ‘Tit. 
ii. 5 1, Τ Tr WH; see the foll. word. Not found else- 
whiere.* 

οἰκ-ουρός, -οὔ, ὁ, ἡ, (οἶκος, and οὖρος a keeper; see 
θυρωρός and κηπουρός) ; a. prop. the (watch or) 
keeper of a house (Soph., Eur., Arstph., Paus., Plut., 
al.). b. trop. keeping at home and taking care of 
household affairs, domestic: Tit. ii. 5 R G; cf. Fritzsche, 
De conformatione N. T. critica ete. p. 29; [W. 100 sq. 
(95)]; (Aesehyl. Ag. 1626; Eur. Hec. 1277; σώφρονας, 
oikoupods καὶ φιλάνδρους, Philo de exsecr. § 4).* 

οἰκτείρω ; fut. (as if fr. οἰκτειρέω, a form which does 
not exist) as in the Sept. οἰκτειρήσω, for the earlier 
οἰκτειρῶ, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 741; [Veitch s. v.; W. 
88 (84); B. 64 (56)]; (fr. οἶκτος pity, and this fr. the 
interjection oi, oh !); to pity, have compassion on: twa, 
Ro. ix. 15 (fr. Ex. xxxiii. 19. Hom., Tragg., Arstph., 
Xen., Plat., Dem., Leian., Plut., Ael.; Sept. for jan and 
Dm). [Syn. see ἐλεέω, fin.]* 

οἰκτιρμός, -οῦὔ, 6, (οἰκτείρω), Sept. for om (the vis- 
cera, which were thought to be the seat of compassion 
[see σπλάγχνον, b.]), compassion, pity, mercy: σπλάγχνα 
οἰκτιρμοῦ (Ree. οἰκτιρμῶν), bowels in which compassion 
resides, a heart of compassion, Col. iii. 12; in the Seript- 
ures mostly plural (conformably to the Hebr. 0°31), 
emotions, longings, manifestations of pity, [ Eng. compas- 
sions] (ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 5 sqq.; [W. 176 
(166); B. 77 (67)]), rod θεοῦ, Ro. xii. 1; Heb. x. 28; 
ὁ πατὴρ τῶν οἶκτ. (gen. of quality [ef. B. § 132,10; W. 
237 (222)]), the father of mercies i. e. most merciful, 
2 Co. i. 3; joined with σπλάγχνα, Phil. ii. 1. (Pind. 
Pyth. 1, 164.) [Syn. see ἐλεέω, fin.]* 

οἰκτίρμων, -ov, gen. -ovos, (οἰκτείρω), merciful: Lk. vi. 
36; Jas. v.11. (Theoer. 15, 75; Anth. 7, 359, 1 [Epigr. 
Anth. Pal. Append. 223, 5]; Sept. for om.) [In 
classic Grk. only a poetic term for the more common 
ἐλεήμων." Schmidt iii. p. 580.]* 

οἶμαι, see οἴομαι. 

οἰνο-πότης, -ov, 6, (οἶνος, and πότης a drinker), a wine- 
bibher, given to wine: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 84. (Prov. 
xxiii. 20; Polyb. 20, 8,2; Anacr. frag. 98; Anthol. 7, 
28, 2.) * 

οἶνος, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 7), also for 
WITT (must, new wine), ὍΤΙ, ete.; wine; a. prop.: 
Mt. ix. 17; [xxvii. 34 Ltxt.T Tr WH]; Mk. xv. 23; 
11.1.15; Jn. 11. 8; Ro. xiv. 21; Eph.v.18; 1 Tim. v. 
23; Rey. xvii. 2, ete.; οἴνῳ προσέχειν, 1 Tim. iii. 8; δου- 
λεύειν, Tit. ii. 3. b. metaph.: οἶνος τοῦ θυμοῦ (see 


9 ? , 
“ OK TANMEPOS 


44 


θυμός, 2), fiery wine, which God in his wrath is repre- 
sented as mixing and giving to those whom he is about 
to punish by their own folly and madness, Rev. xiv. 10; 
xvi. 19; xix.15; with τῆς πορνείας added [ef. W. § 30, 
3 N.1; B. 155 (136) ], a love-potion as it were, wine excit- 
ing to fornication, which he is said to give who entices 
others to idolatry, Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3 [here Lom. Tr 
WII br. oiv.], and he is said to be drunk with who suffers 
himself to be enticed, Rev. xvii. 2. c. by meton. 
i. q. a vine: Rev. vi. 6. 

olvopdvyla, -as, ἡ. (οἰνοφλυγέω, and this fr. οἰνόφλυξ, 
which is compounded of οἶνος and Ave, to bubble up, 
overflow), drunkenness, [A. V. wine-bibbing]: 1 Pet. iv. 
3. (Xen. oec. 1, 22; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 5,15; Polyb. 
2,19,4; Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 22 [for other exx. see 
Siegfried, Philo etc. p. 102]; Ael. v.h. 8, 14.) (CE. 
Trench § lxi.]* 

οἴομαι, contr. οἶμαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to suppose, 
think: foll. by an ace. w. inf. Jn. xxi. 25 [Tom. vs.]; 
by the inf. alone, where the subj. and the obj. are the 
same, Phil. i. 16 (17); by ὅτι, Jas. i. 7. [Sy¥N. see 
ἡγέομαι, fin. |* 

olos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], relat. pron. (correlative 
to the demonstr. τοῖος and τοιοῦτος), what sort of, what 
manner of, such as (Lat. qualis): οἷος . . . τοιοῦτος, 1 Co. 
xv. 48; 2Co.x.11; τὸν αὐτὸν... οἷον, Phil. i. 830; with 
the pron. τοιοῦτος suppressed, Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. ix. 3; 
xiii. 19 [here however the antecedent demonstr. is merely 
attracted into the relat. clause or perhaps repeated for 
rhetorical emphasis, cf. B. § 143, 8; W. 148 (140); see 
τοιοῦτος, b.]; 2 Co. xii. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Rev. xvi. 18; 
οἱῳδηποτοῦν νοσήματι, of what kind of disease soever, Jn. 
v. 4 Lehm. [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373 sq.]; in indir. 
quest., Lk. ix. 55 [Ree.]; 1 Th. i. 5. οὐχ οἷον δὲ ὅτι ἐκ- 
πέπτωκεν, concisely for οὐ τοῖόν ἐστιν οἷον ὅτι ἐκπ. but the 
thing (state of the case) is not such as this, that the word 
of God hath fallen to the ground, i. e. the word of God 
hath by no means come to nought [A. V. but not as though 
the word of God hath ete.], Ro. ix. 6; ef. W. § 641 6; 
B. § 150, 1 Rem.* 

οἱοσδηποτοῦν, Jn. ν. 4 Lehm., see οἷος. 

οἴσω, see φέρω. 

ὀκνέω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ὥκνησα; (ὄκνος [perh. allied w. the 
frequent. cunc-tari (cf. Curtius p. 708)] delay); fr. Hom. 
down; to feel loath, to be slow; to delay, hesitate: foll. by 
an inf. Actsix.38. (Num. xxii. 16; Judg. xviii. 9, ete.) * 

ὀκνηρός, -ά, -όν, (dxvew), sluggish, slothful, backward : 
Mt. xxv. 26; with a dat. of respect [cf. W. § 31, 6 a.; 
B. § 133, 21], Ro. xii. 11; οὐκ ὀκνηρόν pot ἐστι, foll. by 
an inf., is not irksome to me, I am not reluctant, Phil. iii. 1 
[ef. Bp. Lehtft. ad loe.]. (Pind., Soph., Thuc., Dem., 
Theocr., ete.; Sept. for Oxy.) * 

ὀκταήμερος, -ov, (ὀκτώ, ἡμέρα), eight days old; passing 
the eighth day: περιτομῇ [οἴ. W. § 31,6 a.; B. § 133, 21; 
but Ree. -μή] ὀκταήμερος. circumcised on the eighth day, 
Phil. iii. 5; see τεταρταῖος : [‘the word denotes prop. 
not interval but duration’ (see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil 
l.c.). Graec. Ven. Gen. xvii. 12; eccl. writ.].* 


ὀκτώ 


ὀκτώ, eight: Lk. ii. 21; ὅπ. xx. 26; Acts ix. 33, ete. 
[(From Hom. on.)] 

ὀλεθρεύω (Lchm. in Heb. xi. 28), see ὀλοθρεύω. 

ὀλέθριος, -ov, (in prof. auth. also of three term., as in 
Sap. xviii. 15), (ὄλεθρος), fr. [Hom.], Hdt. down, de- 
structive, deadly: δίκην, 2 Th. i. 9 Lehm. txt.* 

ὄλεθρος, -ov, (ὄλλυμι to destroy [perh. (ὄλνυμι) allied 
to Lat. vulnus]), fr. Hom. down, ruin, destruction, death: 
1 Th. v. 3; 1 Tim. vi. 9; εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός, for the 
destruction of the flesh, said of the external ills and 
troubles by which the lusts of the flesh are subdued and 
destroyed, 1 Co. v. 5 [see παραδίδωμι, 2]; i. q. the loss 
of a life of blessedness after death, future misery, αἰώνιος 
(as 4 Mace. x. 15): 2 Th. i. 9 [where Ltxt. ὀλέθριον, 
q- v.], ef. Sap. i. 12.* 

ὀλιγοπιστία, -as, 9, littleness of faith, little faith: Mt. 
xvii. 20 LT Tr WH, for RG ἀπιστία. (Several times 
in eccles. and Byzant. writ.) * 

ὀλιγό-πιστος, -ου, 6. 7), (ὀλίγος and πίστις), of little faith, 
trusting too little: Mt. vi. 30; viii. 26; xiv. 31; xvi. 8; 
Lk. xii. 28. (Not found in prof. auth.) * 

ὀλίγος, τη, τον, [on its occasional aspiration (od.) see 
WH. App. p. 143; Tdf. Proleg. pp. 91,106; Scrivener, 
Introd. p. 565, and reff. 5. v. ov init.], Sept. for on, [fr. 
Hom. down], little, small, few, of number, multitude, 
quantity, or size: joined to nouns [ef. W. § 20, 1 b. note; 
B. § 125, 6], Mt. ix. 37; xv. 34; Mk. vi.5; viii. 7; Lk. 
X. 2; xii. 48 (ὀλίγας se. πληγάς [cf. B. § 134, 6; W. § 32, 
5, esp. § 64,4], opp. to πολλαί, 47); Acts xix. 24; 1 Tim. 
vy. 23; Heb. xii.10; Jas. 111.5 RG; 1 Pet. iii. 20 RG; 
Rey. iii. 4; of time, short: χρόνος, Acts xiv. 28; καιρός, 
Rev. xii. 12; of degree or intensity, light, slight: τάραχος, 
Acts xii. 18; xix. 23; στάσις, xv. 2; χειμών, xxvii. 20. 
plur. w. a partitive gen.: γυναικῶν, Acts xvii. 4; ἀνδρῶν, 
ib. 12. ὀλίγοι, absol.: Mt. vii. 14; xx. 16; ΓΤ WH om. 
Tr br. the cl.]; xxii. 14; Lk. xiii. 23; 1 Pet. iii. 20 LT 
Tr WH; neut. sing.: Lk. vii. 47; τὸ ὀλίγον, 2 Co. viii. 
15; πρὸς ὀλίγον ὠφέλιμος, profitable for little (Lat. parum 
utilis); [ef. W. 213 (200); some, for a little (sc. time) ; 
see below], 1 Tim. iv. 8; ἐν ὀλίγῳ, in few words [ οἵ. 
Shakspere’s in a few], i. 6. in brief, briefly (γράφειν), 
Eph. iii. 3; easily, without much effort, Acts xxvi. 28 sq. 
on other but incorrect interpretations of this phrase cf. 
Meyer ad loc. [see μέγας, 1 a. y.]; πρὸς ὀλίγον, for a little 
time, Jas. iv. 14; simply ὀλίγον, adverbially: of time, a 
short time, a (little) while, Mk. vi. 81; 1 Pet. i. 6; v. 10; 
Rey. xvii. 10; of space, a little (further), ΜΚ. 1. 19; Lk. 
y. 8. plur. ὀλίγα, a few things: [Lk. x.41 WH]; Rev. 
ii. 14, 20 [Rece.]; én’ ὀλίγα ([see init. and] ἐπί, C. I. 2 e.), 
Mt. xxv. 21, 23; δύ ὀλίγων, briefly, in few words, ypa- 
dew, 1 Pet. ν. 12 [see διά, A. 1Π. 3] (ῥηθῆναι, Plat. Phil. 
Ρ- 31 d.; legg. 6 p. 778 c.).* 

ὀλιγόψυχος, -ov, (ὀλίγος. ψυχή). faint-hearted: 1 Th. v. 
14. (Prov. xiv. 29; xviii. 14; Is. lvii. 15, ete.; Artem. 
oneir. 3, 5.) * 

ὀλιγωρέω, -@; (ὀλίγωρος, and this fr. ὀλίγος and dpa 
care); to care little for, regard lightly, make small account 


of: τινος (see Matthiae § 348; [W. § 30, 10d.]), Heb. 


443 


ὅλος 


xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., Aris- 
tot., Philo, Joseph., al.) * 

ὀλίγως, (ὐλίγος). adv., a little, scarcely, [R. V. just (es 
caping)]: 2 Pet. ii. 18 GLT Tr WH [for Ree. ὄντως]. 
(Anthol. 12, 205, 1; [Is. x. 7 Aq.].) * 

ὀλοθρευτής [Rec. ὁλ.], -od, 6, (ὀλοθρεύω, q. ν.), a de- 
stroyer ; found only in 1 Co. x. 10.* 

ὀλοθρεύω and, acc. to a preferable form, ὀλεθρεύω 
(Lehm.; see Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 2 p. 809; ef. Delitzsch, 
Com. on Heb. as below; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81; WH. App. 
p- 152]); (ὄλεθρος); an Alex. word [W. 92 (88)]; to 
destroy: τινά, Heb. xi. 28. (Ex. xii. 23,; Josh. iii. 10; 
vii. 25; Jer. ii. 30; Hag. ii. 22, ete.; [Philo, alleg. ii. 
9].) [Comp.: ἐξεοολοθρεύω.] * 

ὁλοκαύτωμα, -ros, τό, (ὁλοκαυτόω to burn whole, Xen. 
Cyr. 8, 3, 24; Joseph. antt. 1, 13,1; and this fr. ὅλος 
and καυτός, for καυστός, verbal adj. fr. καίω, ef. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 524; [W. 33]), a whole burnt offering (Lat. 
holocaustum), i. e. a victim the whole (and not like other 
vietims only a part) of which is burned: Mk. xii. 33; 
Heb. x. 6, 8. (Sept. esp. for my; also for NWN, Ex. 
xxx. 20; Lev. v. 12; xxiii. 8, 25, 27; 1 Mace. i. 45; 
2 Mace. ii. 10; not found in prof. auth. [exe. Philo de 
sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 33]; Joseph. antt. 3, 9,1 and 9, 7, 
4 says ὁλοκαύτωσις.) * 

ὁλοκληρία, -as, 7, (ὁλόκληρος, q. V-), Lat. integritas ; 
used of an unimpaired condition of body, in which all 
its members are healthy and fit for use; Vulg. integra 
sanitas [A. V. perfect soundness]: Acts iii. 16 (joined 
with ὑγίεια, Plut. mor. p. 1063 f.; with τοῦ σώματος 
added, ibid. p. 1047 e.; ef. Diog. Laért. 7, 107; corporis 
integritas, i. q. health, in Cie. de fin. 5, 14,40; Sept. for 
pin, Is. i. 6).* 

ὁλό-κληρος, -ov, (ὅλος and κλῆρος, prop. all that has 
fallen by lot), complete in all its parts, in no part wanting 
or unsound, complete, entire, whole: λίθοι, untouched by 
a tool, Deut. xxvii. 6; Josh. ix. 4 (viii. 31); 1 Mace. iv. 
47; of a body without blemish or defect, whether of 
a priest or of a victim, Philo de vict. § 12; Joseph. antt. 
3, 12, 2 [(cf. Havercamp’s Joseph. ii. p. 321)].  Ethi- 
cally, free from sin, faultless, [R. V. entire]: 1 Th. v. 23; 
plur., connected with τέλειοι and with the addition of 
ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι, Jas. i. 4: complete in all respects, con- 
summate, δικαιοσύνη, Sap. xv. 3; εὐσέβεια, 4 Mace. xv. 
17. (Plat., Polyb., Leian., Epict., al.; Sept. for now, 
Deut. xxvii. 6; oA, Lev. xxiii. 15; Ezek. xv. 5.)* 

[Syn. ὁλόκληρος, τέλειος (cf. Trench § xxii.): ‘in 
the ὁλόκληρος no grace which ought to be in a Christian 
man is deficient; in the τέλειος no grace is merely in its 
weak imperfect beginnings, but all have reached a certain 
ripeness and maturity.’] 

ὀλολύζω ; an onomatopoetie verb (cf. the similar οἰμώ- 
ew, αἰάζειν, ἀλαλάζειν, πιπίζειν, κοκκύζειν, τίζειν. Com- 
pare the Germ. term. -zen, as in grunzen, kréchzen, ach- 
zen), to howl, wail, lament: Jas. v.1. (In Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down of a loud ery, whether of joy or of grief; 
Sept. tor 25:7.)  [Syn. ef. κλαίω, fin] * 

ὅλος, -7, -ov, Sept. for 3, [fr. Pind. (Hom.) down], 


ὁλοτελής 


whole, (all): with an anarthrous subst. five [six] times 
in the N. Τ᾽, viz. ὅλον ἄνθρωπον, Jn. vii. 23; ἐνιαυτὸν 
ὅλον, Acts Xi. 26; ὅλη ἱΙερουσαλήμ, Xxi. 31; διετίαν ὅλην, 
XXViii. 30; ὅλους οἴκους, Tit. i. 11; [to which add, δὲ 
ὅλης νυκτός, Lk. ν. ὅ LT Tr WH]. usually placed before 
a substantive which has the article: ὅλη ἡ Γαλιλαία, Mt. 
iv. 23; ὅλη ἡ Συρία, 24; καθ᾽ ὅλην τὴν πόλιν, Lk. viii. 
39; ὅλον τὸ σῶμα, Mt. ν. 29 sq.; vi. 22. sq.; Lk. xi. 34; 
1 Co. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 2, ete.; [ὅλη ἡ ἐκκλησία, Ro. xvi. 
23 LT Tr WH); ὅλην τ. ἡμέραν, Mt. xx. 6; Ro. viii. 36; 
ὅλος ὁ νόμος, Mt. xxii. 40; Gal. v. 3; Jas. ii. 10; ἐν ὅλῃ 
τῇ καρδίᾳ cov, Mt. xxii. 37; ἐξ ὅλης τ. καρδίας σου, Mk. 
xii 80, and many other exx. it is placed after a sub- 
stantive which has the article [W. 131 (124) note; B. 
§ 125, 6]: ἡ πόλις ὅλη, Mk. i. 33; Acts xix. 29 [Ree.]; 
xxi. 30 —(the distinction which Kriiger § 50, 11, 7 makes, 
viz. that ἡ ὅλη πόλις denotes the whole city as opp. to 
its parts, but that ὅλη ἡ πόλις and ἡ πόλις ἡ ὅλη denotes 
the whole city in opp. to other ideas, as the country, the 
fields, ete., does not hold good at least for the N. T., 
where even in 7 πόλις ὅλη the city is opposed only to its 
parts); add the foll. exx.: Mt. xvi. 26; xxvi. 59; Lk. 
ix. 25; xi. 36%; Jn. iv. 53; Ro. xvi. 23 [RG]; 1 Jn. v. 
19; Rev. iii.10; vi.12 GLTTr WH; xii. 9; xvi. 14. 
It is subjoined to an adjective or a verb to show that 
the idea expressed by the adj. or verb belongs to the 
whole person or thing under consideration: Mt. xiii. 33; 
Lk. xi. 36”; xiii. 21; Jn. ix. 84; xiii. 10, (Xen. mem. 2, 
6, 28). Neut. τοῦτο δὲ ὅλον, Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4 (where 
GLTTr Wom. ὅλον) ; xxvi. 56; δὲ ὅλου, through- 
out, Jn. xix. 23. 

ὁλοτελής, -€s, (Gos, τέλος). perfect, complete in all re- 
spects: 1 Th. v. 23. (Plut. plae. philos. 5, 21; [Field, 
Hexapla, Lev. vi. 23; Ps. 1. 21]; eccles. writ.) * 

᾿Ολυμπᾶς [perh. contr. fr. ᾿Ολυμπιόδωρος, W- 103 (97) ; 
ef. Fick, Gr. Personennamen, pp. 63 sq. 201], -ἃ, [Β. 20 
(18) ], 6, Olympas, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 15.* 

ὄλυνθος, -ov, 6, an unripe fig (Lat. grossus), which grows 
during the winter, yet does not come to maturity but falls 
off in the spring [cf. B. D. s.v. Fig]: Rev. vi.13. (Hes. 
fr. 14; Hdt. 1, 193; Dioscorid. 1, 185; Theophr. caus. 
plant. 5,9, 12; Sept. cant. ii. 13.) * 

ὅλως, (ὅλος). adv., wholly, altogether, (Lat. omnino), 
[with a neg. at all]: Mt. v.34 (with which compare Xen. 
mem. 1, 2, 85); 1 Co. v. 1 [R. V. actually}; vi. 7; xv. 
29. [(Plat., Isocr., al.)]* 

ὄμβρος, -ov, 6, (Lat. imber) a shower, i. e. a violent rain, 
accompanied by high wind with thunder and lightning: 
Lk. xii. 54. (Deut. xxxii. 2; Sap. xvi. 16; in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down.) * 

ὁμείρομαι [or du., see below] i. q. ἱμείρομαι; to desire, 
long for, yearn after, [A. V. to be affectionately desirous |: 
τινός, 1 Th.ii. 8 61, Ὁ Tr WH [but the last read op., cf. 
their App. p. 144 and Lob. Pathol. Element. i. 72], on 
the authority of all the uncial and many cursive Mss., for 
Ree. ἱμειρόμενοι. The word is unknown to the Grk. writ., 
but the commentators ad loc. recognize it, as do Hesychius, 
Phavorinus, and Photius, and interpret it by ἐπιθυμεῖν. It 


444 


> 4 
ὀμνύω 


is found in Ps. lxii. 2 Symm., and acc. to some Μ88. in Job 
iii. 21. Ace. to the conjecture of Fritzsche, Com. on Mk. 
p- 792, it is composed of ὁμοῦ and etpew, just as Photius 
[p- 331, 8ed. Porson] explains it ὁμοῦ ἡρμόσθαι [so Theo- 
phylact (cf. Tdf.’s note) ]. But there is this objection, 
that all the verbs compounded with ὁμοῦ govern the da- 
tive, not the genitive. Since Nicander, ther. vs. 402, 
uses μείρομαι for ἱμείρομαι, some suppose that the original 
form is μείρομαι, to which, after the analogy of κέλλω and 
ὀκέλλω, either é or ὁ is for euphony prefixed in ἱμείρ. and 
ὁμείρ. But as ἱμείρομαι is derived from ἵμερος, we must 
suppose that Nicander dropped the syllable ito suit the 
metre. Accordingly ὁμείρεσθαι seems not to differ at all 
from ἱμείρεσθαι, and its form must be attributed to a vul- 
gar pronunciation. Cf. [WH. App. p. 152]; W. 101 
(95); [B. 64 (56); Ellic. on 1 Th. 1. ¢.; (Kuenen and 
Cobet, N. T. Vat. p. ciii.)].* 

ὁμιλέω, -@; impf. ὡμίλουν ; 1 aor. ptep. ὁμιλήσας ; (ὅμι- 
os, 4. ν.); freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to be in 
company with; to asssociale with; to stay with ; hence to 
converse with, talk with: τινί, with one (Dan.i. 19), Acts 
xxiv. 26; 86. αὐτοῖς, Acts xx. 11 [so A. V. talked], unless 
one prefer to render it when he had stayed in their com- 
pany; πρός twa, Lk. xxiv. 14 (Xen. mem. 4, 3,2; Joseph. 
antt. 11,6, 11; [ef. W. 212 sq. (200); B.§ 133, 8]); ἐν τῷ 
ὁμιλεῖν αὐτούς sc. ἀλλήλοις, ibid. 15. [Comp.: συν-ομιλέω.]" 

ὁμιλία, -as, ἡ» (ὅμιλος), companionship, intercourse, com- 
munion: 1 Co. xv. 83, on which see ἦθος. (Trage., Ar- 
stph., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) * 

ὅμιλος, -ov, ὁ, (ὁμός, ὁμοῦ, and ἴλη a crowd, band, [Cur- 
tius § 660; Vaniéek p. 897; but Fick iii. 723 fr. root mil 
“to be associated,’ ‘ to love’]), fr. Hom. down, a multitude 
of men gathered together, a crowd, throng: Rev. xviii. 17 
Rec.* 

ὁμίχλη, -ns, ἡ, (in Hom. ὀμίχλη, fr. ὀμιχέω to make 
water), a mist, fog: 2 Pet. ii. 17G LT Tr WH. (Am. 
iv. 13; Joel ii. 2; Sir. xxiv. 3; Sap. ii. 4.)* 

ὄμμα, -ros, τό, (fr. ὄπτομαι [see ὁράω], pf. ὥμμαι), fr. Hom. 
down, an eye: plur., Mt. xx. 34 LT Tr WH; Mk. viii 
23. (Sept. for }'p, Prov. vi. 4; vii. 2; x. 26.) * 

ὀμνύω (Mt. xxiii. 30 54. ; xxvi. 74; Heb. vi. 16; Jas. v. 
12; [W. 347) and ὄμνυμι (ὀμνύναι, Mk. xiv. 71 GLT Tr 
WH [ef. B. 45 (39)]) form their tenses fr. OM0Q; hence 
1 aor. ὥμοσα; Sept. for paw}; to swear; to affirm, prom- 
ise, threaten, with an oath: absol., foll. by direct discourse, 
Mt. xxvi. 74; Mk. xiv. 71; Heb. vii. 21; foll. by εἰ, Heb. 
iii. 11; iv.3; 5686 εἰν 1.5. ὀμν. ὅρκον (often so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down [W. 226 (212) ]) πρός τινα, to one (Hom. 
Od. 14, 331; 19, 288), Lk. 1. 73; ὀμνύειν with dat. of the 
person to whom one promises or threatens something 
with an oath: foll. by direct disc. Mk. vi. 23; by an inf. 
[W. 331 (311) ], Heb. iii. 18; with ὅρκῳ added, Acts ii. 30 
[W. 603 (561)]; τινί τι, Acts vii. 17 [Ree. i.e. gen. by at- 
traction; ef. B.§ 143, 8; W.§ 24,1]. that by which one 
swears is indicated by an acc., τινά or τί (so in class. Grk. 
fr. Hom. down [ef. W. § 32, 1b. γι; B. 147 (128)]), in 
swearing to call a person or thing as witness, to invoke, 
swear by, (Is. xv. 16; Joseph. antt. 5, 1,2; 7, 14, 5); τὸν 


ὁμοθυμαδόν 


οὐρανόν, τὴν γῆν, Jas. ν. 12; with prepositions [cf. Β. ἃ. 5.7: 
κατά τινος (see κατά, I. 2 a.), Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Gen. xxii. 
16; xxxi. 54; 1S. xxviii. 10[Comp.]; Is. xlv. 23; Lxii. 8; 
Am. iv. 2; Dem. p. 553,17; 553, 26 [al. ἀπομ-.], etc.; 
κατὰ πάντων ὥμνυε θεῶν, Long. past. 4, 16); in imitation 
of the Hebr. yaw) foll. by 3, & tux is used [W. 389 
(364); B.l.c.; see ἐν, I. 8 0.1: Mt. v. 34, 36; xxiii. 16, 18, 
20-22; Rey. x. 6; εἴς τι, with the mind directed unto 
[W. 397 (371); B. as above; see εἰς, B. II. 2.a.], Mt. v. 85." 

ὁμοθυμαδόν (fr. ὁμόθυμος, and this fr. 6uds and θυμός ; 
on advs. in -δόν [chiefly derived fr. nouns, and designating 
form or structure] as γνωμηδόν, ῥοιζηδόν, etc., cf. Bitm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 452), with one mind, of one accord, (Vulg. 
unanimiter [etc.]): Ro. xv. 6; Acts i. 14; ii. 46; iv. 24; 
Vii. 57; viii. 6; xii. 20; xv. 25; xviii. 12; xix. 29, and RG 
in ii. 1, (Arstph., Xen., Dem., Philo, Joseph., Hdian., 
Sept. Lam. ii.8; Job xvii. 16; Num. xxiv. 24, etc.) ; with 
ἅπαντες [LT WH πάντες] (Arstph. pax 484, and often in 
elass. Grk.), Acts v. 12 [ef. ii. 1 above].* 

ὁμοιάζω; (ὅμοιος, [cf. W. 257); to be like: Mt. xxiii. 
27 LTr txt. WH mrg.; Mk. xiv. 70 Rec. where see Fritz- 
sche p. 658 sq. ; [on the dat. cf. W.§31,1h.J]. Not found 
elsewhere. [Comp.: map-opotdgw. ]* 

ὁμοιοπαθής, -ές, (ὅμοιος, πάσχω), suffering the like with 
another, of like feelings or affections: τινί, Acts xiv. 15; 
Jas. v.17. (Plat. rep. 3, 409 b., Tim. 45 c.; Theophr. 
h. pl. 5, 8 (7, 2); Philo, conf. ling. §3; 4 Mace. xii. 13; 
γῆ: i.e. trodden alike by all, Sap. vii. 3; see exx. fr. eccles. 
writ. [viz. Ignat. (interpol.) ad Trall. 10; Euseb. ἢ. 6. 1, 
2,1, (both of the incarnate Logos) ] in Grimm on 4 Mace. 
p- 344.) * 

ὅμοιος (on the accent cf. [Chandler 88 384, 385]; W. 
52 (51); Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 11 Anm. 9), -ofa, -ovov, also 
of two term. (once in the N. T., Rev. iv.3 R*GLT Tr 
WH; ef. W.§ 11,1; [B. 26 (23)]), (fr. duds [akin to ἅμα 
(q. v.), Lat. similis, Eng. same, ete.]), [fr. Hom. down], 
like, similar, resembling: a. like i.e. resembling: τινί, 
in form or look, Jn. ix. 9; Rev. i. 13, 15; ii. 18; iv. 
6 sq.; ix. 7, 10 [but here Tr txt. WH mrg. ὁμοίοις], 19; 
xi. 1; xiii. 2,11; xiv. 14 [but here T WH w. the accus. 
(for dat.)]; xvi. 13 Rec.; ὁράσει, in appearance, Rey. 
iv. 3; in nature, Acts xvii. 29; Gal. v.21; Rev. xxi.11, 18; 
in nature and condition, 1 Jn. iii. 2; in mode of thinking, 
feeling, acting, Mt. xi. 16; xiii. 52; Lk. vi. 47-49; vii. 
31sq.; xii. 36, and L WH Tr txt. (see below) in Jn. viii. 
55; i.q.may be compared to a thing, so in parables: Mt. 
xiii. 31, 33, 4454. 47; xx. 1; Lk. xiii. 18 sq. 21. b. 
like i.e. corresponding or equiv. to, the same as: ὅμοιον 
τούτοις τρόπον, Jude 7; equal in strength. Rev. xiii. 4; in 
power and attractions, Rev. xviii. 18; in authority, Mt. 
xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 31 [here T WH om. Tr mrg. br. 6p. ]; 
in mind and character, τινός (cf. W. 195 (183), [ef. § 28, 
2]; B. § 132, 24), Jn. viii.55 R ἃ T Trmrg. (see above).* 

ὁμοιότης, τητος, 7, (ὅμοιος), likeness: καθ᾽ ὁμοιότητα, in 
like manner, Heb. iv. 15 [cf. W. 143 (136)]; κατὰ τὴν 
ὁμοιότητα (Μελχισεδέκ), after the likeness, Heb. vii. 15. 
(Gen. i. 11; 4 Mace. xv. 4 (3); Plat., Aristot., Isocr., 
Polyb., Philo, Plut.) * 


445 


ὁμοίωσις 


ὁμοιόω, -ῶ: fut. ὁμοιώσω; Pass., 1 aor. ὡμοιώθην, and 
without augm. ὁμοιώθην (once Ro. ix. 29 Lmrg. T edd. 
2, 7, [but see WH. App. p. 161]; ef. B. 34 (30); Sturz, 
De dial. Maced. ete. p. 124; [ef.] Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153); 
1 fut. ὁμοιωθήσομαι; (ὅμοιος); fr. [Hom. and] Hdt. down; 
Sept. esp. for 77; a. to make like: τινά τινι; pass. to 
be or to become like to one: Mt. vi. 8; Acts xiv. 11; Heb. 
ii. 17; ὡμοιώθη ἡ βασιλ. τῶν ovp., was made like, took the 
likeness of, (aor. of the time when the Messiah appeared), 
Mt. xiii. 24; xviii. 23; xxii.2; ὁμοιωθήσεται (fut. of the 
time of the last judgment), Mt. xxv. 1; ὥς τι, to be made 
like and thus to become as a thing [i. 6. a blending of 
two thoughts; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 31; B. § 133, 10; 
W. § 65, 1 a.], Ro. ix. 29 (3 9073 Ezek. xxxii. 2). b. 
to liken, compare: τινά τινι, or τί τινι, Mt. vii. 24 [RG 
(see below)]; xi. 16; Mk. iv. 30 RLtxt.Trmrg.; Lk. 
Vii. 31; xiii. 18, 20; pass. Mt. vii. [24 L T WH Tr tzxt.], 
26 ; to illustrate by comparison, ras ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Bac. 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Mk. iv. 30 TWH Tr txt. Lmrg. [Comp.: ἀφ- 
Opotdw.]* 

ὁμοίωμα, -ros, τό, (ὁμοιόω), Sept. for 773A, N24, Dos, 
32; prop. that which has been made after the likeness 
of something, hence a. a figure, image, likeness, 
representation: Ps. ον. (cvi.) 20; 1 Mace. iii. 48; of the 
image or shape of things seen in a vision, Rev. ix. 7 [ef. 
W. 604 (562) ] (Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28,ete. Plato, in Parmen. 
Ρ- 132 d., calls finite things ὁμοιώματα, likenesses as it 
were, in which τὰ παραδείγματα, i.e. ai ἰδέαι or τὰ εἴδη, 
are expressed). b. likeness i. e. resemblance (inas- 
much as that appears in an image or figure), freq. such 
as amounts well-nigh to equality or identity: τινός, Ro. vi. 
5; viii. 3 (on which see σάρξ, 3 fin. [ef. Weiss, BibL 
Theol. etc. 88 69 ¢. note, 78 c. note}); Phil. ii. 7 (see 
μορφή); εἰκόνος, a likeness expressed by an image, i. 6. 
an image like, Ro. i. 23; ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως 
᾿Αδάμ, in the same manner in which Adam transgressed 
a command of God {see ἐπί, B. 2 a. η.], Ro. v. 14. Cf. 
the different views of this word set forth by Holsten, 
Zum Evangel. des Paulus u. Petrus, p. 437 sqq. and [esp. 
for exx.] in the Jahrbiich. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 
451 sqq., and by Zeller, Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 
1870, p. 301 sqq. [S¥YN. cf. εἰκών. fin.; Schmidt ch. 191.]* 

ὁμοίως, (ὅμοιος), advy., [fr. Pind., Hdt. down], likewise, 
equally, in the same way: Mk.iv. 16 (Trmrg. br. op.) ; Lk. 
111. 11; x. 37; xiii 3 LT ΤΥ ΜΗ; 5RGLTrorg.; 
xvi. 25; xvii. 31: Jn.v.19; xxi.13; 1 Pet. iii. 1, 7; v.5; 
Heb. ix. 21; Rey. ii. 15 (for Rec. ὃ μισῶν); viii. 123 
ὁμοίως καί, Mt. xxii. 26; xxvi. 35; Mk. xv. 31 [here Ree. 
ὁμ. δὲ καί ]; Lk. v. 33; xvii. 23RGL; xxii. 36; Jn. vi. 
11; 1 Co. vii. 22 R G3 ὁμοίως μέντοι καί, Jude 8; ὁμοίως 
δὲ καί, Mt. xxvii. 41 RG (where T om. L br. δὲ καί, Tr 
br. δέ, WH om. δέ and br. καί); Lk. v.10; x. 32; 1 Co. 
vii. 3 (where Lbr. δέ), 4; Jas. ii. 25; and correctly 
restored by L Tr mrg. in Ro. i. 27, for R T Tr txt. WH 
ὁμοίως τε xai; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 77; [W. 571 (531); 
B. § 149, 8]; ὁμοίως preceded by καθώς, Lk. vi. 81." 

ὁμοίωσις, -ews, 7, (ομοιόω ) ; 1. a making like: 
opp. to ἀλλοίωσις, Plat. rep. 5, 454 c. 2. likeness, 


ὁμολογέω 


(Plat., Aristot., Theophr.) : καθ᾽ ὁμοίωσιν θεοῦ, after the 
likeness of God, Jas. iii. 9 fr. Gen. i. 26. (Cf. Trench 
στ" 

ὁμολογέω, -@; impf. ὡμολόγουν ; fut. ὁμολογήσω ; 1 aor. 
ὡμολόγησα; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. ὁμολογεῖται; (fr. ὁμο- 
λύγος, and this fr. ὁμόν and λέγω) ; fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. 
down; 1. prop. to say the same thing as another, 
i.e. to agree with, assent, both absol. and w. a dat. of the 
pers. ; often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; hence 2 
univ. fo concede; i.e. a. not to refuse, i. 6. to promise: 
τινὶ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, Acts vii. 17 L T Tr WH [here Εν: 
vouchsa/e]; foll. by an object. inf., Mt. xiv. 7 (Plat., Dem., 
Plut., al.). b. not to deny, i. e. to confess; declare: 
joined w. οὐκ ἀρνεῖσθαι, foll. by direct disc. with recitative 
ὅτι, Jn. i. 26; foll. by ὅτι, Heb. xi. 13; τινί τι, ὅτι, Acts 
xxiv. 143 to confess, i. 6. to admit or declare one’s self 
guilty of what one is accused of: τὰς ἁμαρτίας, 1 Jn. i. 9 
(Sir. iv. 26). 3. to profess (the diff. betw. the Lat. 
profiteor [‘ to declare openly and voluntarily’] and 
conjiteor "το declare fully,’ implying the yielding or 
change of one’s conviction; cf. professio fidei, con fes- 
sio peccatorum] is exhibited in Cic. pro Sest. 51, 109), 
i. e. to declare openly, speak out freely, [A. V. generally 
confess; on its constr. see B. § 133, 7]: [foll. by an 
inf., εἰδέναι θεόν, Tit. i. 16]; τινί [οἵ. B. u.s.; W. § 31, 1£.] 
foll. by direct disc. with ὅτε recitative, Mt. vii. 23; one 
is said ὁμολογεῖν that of which he is convinced and which 
he holds to be true (hence 6x. is disting. fr. πιστεύειν in 
Jn. xii. 42; Ro. x. 9 sq.): pass. absol., with στόματι (dat. 
of instrum.) added, Ro. x. 10; ri, Acts xxiii. 8; τινά with 
a predicate acc. [B. ἃ. s.], αὐτὸν Χριστόν, Jn. ix. 22; κύ- 
ριον (pred. ace.) ᾿Ιησοῦν, Ro. x. 9 [here WH τὸ ῥῆμα... 
ὅτι κύριος ete., L mrg. Tr mrg. simply ὅτι ete. ; again with 
ὅτι in 1 Jn. iv. 15]; Ἰησοῦν Xp. ἐν σαρκὶ ἐληλυθότα [Tr 
mrg. WH mrg. ἐληλυθέναι], 1 Jn. iv. 2 and Ree. also in 
3 [see below]; ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί, 2 Jn. 7, [ef. B. u. s.; 
W. 346 (324) ]; τινά, to profess one’s self the worshipper 
of one, 1 Jn. iv. 3 [here WH mrg. λύει, cf. Westcott, Epp. 
of Jn. p. 156 sqq.] and G LT Tr WH in ii. 23; ἐν with 
a dat. of the pers. (see ἐν, I. 8 6.), Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8; 
with cognate ace. giving the substance of the profession 
(ef. B.§ 131, 5; W.§ 32, 2], ὁμολογίαν, 1 Tim. vi. 12 (also 
foll. by περί τινος, Philo de mut. nom. § 8) ; τὸ ὄνομά τινος, 
to declare the name (written in the book of life) to be 
the name of a follower of me, Rev. iii. 5G LT Tr 
WH. 4. Acc. toa usage unknown to Grk. writ. 10 
praise, celebrate, (see ἐξομολογέω, 2; [B. § 133, 7]): τινί, 
Heb. xiii. 15. [Comp.: ἀνθ-(-μαι), ἐξ-ομολογέω. * 

ὁμολογία, -as, 7, (ὁμολογέω, q. ν. [ef. W. 35 (34)]), in 
the N. T. profession [R. V. uniformly confession]; ἃ. 
subjectively: ἀρχιερέα τῆς ὁμολ. ἡμῶν. i. e. Whom we pro- 
fess (to be ours), Heb. iii. 1 [but al. refer this to b.]. b. 
objectively, profession [confession ] i.e. what one professes 
[confesses]: Heb. iv. 14; 1 Tim. vi. 12 (see ὁμολογέω, 3) ; 
13 (see paprupew, a. p. 391"); τῆς ἐλπίδος, the substance 
of our profession, which we embrace with hope, Heb. x. 
23; εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, relative to the gospel, 
2 Co. ix. 13 (translate, for the obedience ye render to what 


446 


ὀνειδισμός 


ye profess concerning the gospel; cf. ἡ εἰς τὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 
Χριστὸν ὁμολογία, Justin M. dial. ο. Tryph. c.47,— ἃ con- 
str. occasioned perhaps by ἡ eis τὸν Χριστὸν πίστες, Col. ii. 
5; [ef. W. 381 (357)]). [(Hdt., Plat., al.)]* 

ὁμολογουμένως, (ὁμολογέω), adv., by consent of all, con- 
Jessedly, without controversy: 1 Tim. iii. 16. (4 Mace. 
vi. 31; vii. 16; xvi. 1; in prof. auth. fr. Thuc., Xen., Plat. 
down; with ὑπὸ πάντων added, Isocr. paneg. § 33, where 
see Baiter’s note.)* 

ὁμότεχνος, -ov, (duds and τέχνη), practising the same 
trade or craft, of the same trade: Acts xviii. 8, (Hat. 2, 
89; Plat., Dem., Joseph., Leian., al.) * 

ὁμοῦ, (duds), [fr. Hom. down], adv., together: Jn. iv. 
36; xx. 4; εἶναι ὁμοῦ, of persons assembled together, 
Acts ii. 1 L T Tr WH; xx. 18 Lehm.; Jn. xxi. 2. [Syn. 
see ἅμα, fin.]* 

ὀμόω, see ὀμνύω. 

ὁμόφρων, -ον, (duds, φρήν), of one mind, [A.V. like 
minded}, concordant: 1 Pet. iii. 8. (Hom., Hes., Pind., 
Arstph., Anthol., Plut., al.) * 

ὅμως, (duds), fr. Hom. down, yet; it oceurs twice in 
the N. T. out of its usual position [ef. W. § 61, 5f.; B. 
§ 144, 23], viz. in 1 Co. xiv. 7, where resolve thus: τὰ 
ἄψυχα. καίπερ φωνὴν διδόντα, ὅμως, ἐὰν διαστολὴν .. . πῶς 
«vA. instruments without life, although giving forth a 
sound, yet, unless they give a distinction in the sounds, 
how shall it be known ete., Frizsche, Conject. spec. i. 
Ρ. 52; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [W. 344 (323)]; again, ὅμως 
avOpamov ... οὐδεὶς ἀθετεῖ for ἀνθρώπου κεκυρ. διαθήκην, 
καίπερ ἀνθρώπου οὖσαν, ὅμως οὐδεὶς κτλ. a man’s estab- 
lished cévenant, though it be but a man’s, yet no one 
etc. Gal. iii. 15; ὅμως μέντοι, but yet, nevertheless, [cf. 
W. 444 (413) ], Jn. xii. 42." 

ὄναρ, τό, (an indecl. noun, used only in the nom. and 
acc. sing.; the other cases are taken from dvepés), [fr. 
Hom. down], a dream: κατ᾽ ὄναρ, in a dream, Mt. i. 20; 
ii. 12 sq. 19, 22; xxvii. 19, a later Greek phrase, for 
which Attic writ. used ὄναρ without κατά [q. v. 11. 2]; 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 422 sqq.; [Photius, Lex. p. 149, 
25 sq. ].* 

ὀνάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ὄνος ; ef. [W. 24 and] y- 
vatxaptov), a little ass: Jn. xii. 14. (Machon ap. Athen. 
13 p. 582¢.; [Epictet. diss. 2, 24, 18].) * 

ὀνειδίζω ; impf. ὠνείδιζον ; 1 aor. ὠνείδισα ; pres. pass. 
ὀνειδίζυμαι : (ὄνειδος, q. V-); fr. Hom. down; Sept. esp. 
for 2M; fo reproach, upbraid, revile; {on its constr. cf. 
W. § 32,1b.8.; B.§ 133,9]: of deserved reproach, τινά, 
foll. by ὅτι. Mt. xi. 20; τί (the fault) τινος, foll. by ὅτι, 
Mk. xvi. 14. of unjust reproach, to revile: τινά, Mt. v. 11; 
Mk. xv. 32; Lk. vi. 22; Ro. xv. 3 fr. Ps. xviii. (Ixix.) 10; 
pass. 1 Pet. iv. 14; foll. by ὅτι, 1 Tim.iv. 10R G Tr mrg. 
WH mrg.; τὸ αὐτὸ ὠνείδιζον αὐτόν (Rec. αὐτῷ), Mt. xxvii 
44 (see αὐτός, III.1). to upbraid, cast (favors received) 
in one’s teeth: absol. Jas. i. 5; μετὰ τὸ δοῦναι μὴ ὀνείδιζε, 
Sir. xli. 22, cf. xx. 14; τινὶ σωτηρίαν, deliverance obtained 
by us for one, Polyb. 9, 31, 4.* 

ὀνειδισμός, -ov, ὁ, (ὀνειδίζω), [ef. W. 24], a reproach . 
Ro. xv. 3: 1 Tim. iii. 7; Heb. x. 33; ὁ ὀνειδισμὸς τοῦ Xpe 


ὄνειδος 


στοῦ i.e. such as Christ suffered (for the cause of God, 
from its enemies), Heb. xi. 26; xiii. 13; cf. W. 189 (178). 
(Plut. Artax. 22; [Dion. Hal.]; Sept. chiefly for 7371.) * 

ὄνειδος, -ous, τό, (fr. ὄνομαι to blame, to revile), fr. Hom. 
down, reproach ; 1. q. shame: Lk. i. 25. (Sept. chiefly for 
737; three times for 972 disgrace, Is. xxx. 3; Mich. 
ii. 6; Prov. xviii. 13.) * 

*Ovicipos, -ov, 6, (i. 6. profitable, helpful; fr. ὄνησις 
profit), Onesimus, a Christian, the slave of Philemon: 
Philem. 10; Col. iv. 9. [Cf Bp. Lghtft. Com. Intr. § 4; 
Hackett in B. D.]* 

"Ove lhopos, -ov, ὁ, [i. 6. ‘ profit-bringer”], Onesiphorus, 
the name of a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19.* 

ὀνικός, -ἡ, -όν, (ὄνος), of or for an ass: μύλος ὀνικός i. 6. 
turned by an ass (see μύλος, 1), Mk. ix. 42 LT Tr WH; 
Lk. xvii. 2 Rec.; Mt. xviii. 6. Not found elsewhere.* 

ὀνίνημι : fr. Hom. down; to be useful, to profit, help, 
(Lat. juvo); Mid., pres. ὀνίναμαι; 2 aor. ὠνήμην (and later 
ὠνάμην, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12 sq.; Kiihner § 343 s. v., 
i. p. 880; [Veitch 5. v.]), optat. ὀναίμην ; to receive profit 
or advantage, be helped [or have joy, (Lat. juvor )]: τινός, 
of one, Philem. 20 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Elsewh. 
in the Scriptures only in Sir. xxx. 2.) * 

ὄνομα, -ros, τό, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p. 
1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but 
see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for pw, [fr. Hom. down], the 
name by which a person or a thing is called, and dis- 
tinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names, 
Mk. iii. 16; vi. 14; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ 
ὀνόματα, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14; ἄνθρωπος or ἀνὴρ @ ὄνομα, 
πόλις ἢ Ov. , Sc. ἦν, named, foll. by the name in the nom. 
[ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26sq.; 11. 25; viii. 41; xxiv. 
13,18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1); οὗ [L ᾧ] τὸ 
ὄνομα, Mk. xiv. 32; καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, ete., Lk. i. 5, 27; 
ὄνομα αὐτῷ se. ἦν or ἐστίν [B. u.s.], Jn. i.6; ili. 1; xviii. 10; 
Rey. vi. 8; ὀνόματι, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 
3; W. 182 (171) ], Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. v. 22; Lk.i. 5; x. 
38; xvi. 20; xxiii.50; Actsv. 1,34; vili. 9; ix. 10-12, 33, 
86; χ- 1; χὶ; 28,5 Χ- 19., χυ!. ἔν 14. χυὴ. 94: ΧΙ. 2. 1, 
24; xix. 24; xx.9; xxi. 10; xxvii.1; xxviii. 4: Rev. ix. 
11, (Xen. anab. 1, 4, 11); τοὔνομα (i. 6. τὸ ὄνομα), acc. 
absol. [B. § 131, 12; ef. W. 230 (216)], 1.6. by name, Mt. 
xxvii. 575 ὄνομά μοι sc. ἐστίν, my name is, Mk. v. 9; Lk. 
Viii. 30, (Odres ἐμοίγ᾽ ὄνομα, Hom. Od. 9, 366); ἔχειν ὄνομα, 
foll. by the name in the nom., Rev. ix. 11; καλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά 
twos, foll. by the ace. of the name, see καλέω, 2 ἃ. ; καλεῖν 
τινα ὀνόματί τινι, Lk. i. 61; ὀνόματι καλούμενος, Lk. xix. 2; 
καλεῖν τινα ἐπὶ τῷ ov. Lk. i. 59 (see ἐπί, B. 2 a. η. p. 233°) ; 
κατ᾽ ὄνομα (see κατά, II. 3 ἃ. γ. p. 328"); τὰ ὀνόματα ὑμῶν 
ἐγράφη [ἐνγέγραπται T WH Tr] ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, your 
names have been enrolled by God in the register of the 
citizens of the kingdom of heaven, Lk. x. 20; τὸ ἔνομά 
τινος (ἐγράφη) ἐν βίβλῳ (τῷ βιβλίῳ) ζωῆς, Phil. iv. 3; 
Rey. xiii. 8; ἐπὶ τὸ βιβλίον τῆς ζ. Rev. xvii. 8; ἐκβάλλειν 
(4: ν. 1h.) τὸ ὄνομά τινος ὡς πονηρόν, since the wicked- 
ness of the man is called to mind by his name, Lk. vi. 
22; ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου, see ἐπικαλέω, 5; ἐπι- 
κέκληται τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐπί τινα. See ἐπικ. 2; ὀνόματα (ὄνομα) 


447 


ὄνομα 


βλασφημίας 1. 4. βλάσφημα (-pov) [ef. W. § 84, 8 b.; B. 
§ 132, 10], names by which God is blasphemed, his maj- 
esty assailed, Rev. xiii.1; xvii. 3 [RG Tr, see γέμω]. so 
used that the name is opp. to the reality: ὄνομα ἔχεις, 
ὅτι Gis, καὶ νεκρὸς εἶ, thou art said [A. V. hast a name] to 
live, Rev. iii. 1 (ὄνομα εἶχεν, ὡς ἐπ᾿ ᾿Αθήνας ἐλαύνει, Hdt. 
7,138). 1.4. title: περὶ ὀνομάτων, about titles (as of the 
Messiah), Acts xviii. 15; κληρονομεῖν ὄνομα, Heb. i. 4; 
χαρίζεσθαί τινι ὄνομά τι, Phil. ii. 9 (here the title ὁ κύριος 
is meant [but crit. txts. read τὸ ὄνομα ete., which many 
take either strictly or absolutely; cf. Meyer and Bp. 
Lehtft. ad loc. (see below just before 3)]); spec. a title 
of honor and authority, Eph. i. 21 [but see Meyer]; ἐν 
τῷ ὀνόματι ᾿Ιησοῦ, in devout recognition of the title con- 
ferred on him by God (i.e. the title ὁ κύριος), Phil. ii. 10 
[but the interp. of ὄνομα here follows that of ὄνομα in 
vs. 9 above; see Meyer and Bp. Lghtft., and cf. W. 390 
(365) ]. 2. By a usage chiefly Hebraistic the name 
is used for everything which the name covers, everything 
the thought or feeling of which is roused in the mind by 
mentioning, hearing, remembering, the name, i. e. for 
one’s rank, authority, interests, pleasure, command, excel= 
lences, deeds, etc. ; thus, εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου, out of regard 
for [see eis, B. II. 2 d.] the name of prophet which he 
bears, i. q. because he is a prophet, Mt. x. 41; βαπτίζειν 
τινὰ εἰς ὄνομά τινος, by baptism to bind any one to recog- 
nize and publicly acknowledge the dignity and authority 
of one [ef. βαπτίζω, 11. Ὁ. (aa.)], Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts viii. 
16; xix.5; 1Co.i. 13,15. to doa thing ἐν ὀνόματί twos, 
i. e. by one’s command and authority, acting on his behalf, 
promoting his cause, [cf. W. 390 (365); B. § 147, 10]; as, 
ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου (fr. Ps. exvil. (exvili.) 26), 
of the Messiah, Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiii. 
35; xix. 38; Jn. xii. 13; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ πατρός pov, Jn. 
ν. 43; x. 25; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ, of his own free-will 
and authority, Jn. v.43; todoa thing ἐν τῷ ov. of Jesus, 
Acts x. 48; 1Co. v. 4; 2 Th. iii. 6; and LT Tr WHin 
Jas. v. 10 [but surely x. here denotes (rod ; ef. 2 f. below]. 
Ace. to a very freq. usage in the O. T. (cf. nim? ov), the 
name of God in the N. T. is used for all those qualities 
which to his worshippers are summed up in that name, 
and by which God makes himself known to men; it is 
therefore equiv. to his divinity, Lat. numen, (not his na- 
ture or essence as it is in itself), the divine majesty and 
perfections, so far forth as these are apprehended, named, 
magnified, (cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 993; Oeh- 
ler in Herzog x. p. 196 sqq.; Wittichen in Schenkel iv. 
Ρ- 282 sqq.); so in the phrases ἅγιον τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 56. 
ἐστίν, Lk. i.49; ἁγιάζειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. vi. 9; Lk. xi. 
2; ὁμολογεῖν τῷ dv. αὐτοῦ, Heb. xiii. 15; ψάλλειν, Ro. xv. 
9; δοξάζειν, Jn. xii. 28; [Rev. xv. 4]; φανεροῦν, yrwpi- 
few, Jn. xvii. 6, 26; φοβεῖσθαι τὸ dv. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xi. 18; 
xv.4[GLT Tr WH]; διαγγέλλειν, Ro. ix. 17 ; ἀπαγγέλ- 
λειν, Heb. ii. 12; βλασφημεῖν, Ro. ii. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 1; Rev. 
xiil. 6 ; xvi. 9; ἀγάπην ἐνδείκνυσθαι εἰς τὸ ὄν. τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb. 
vi. 10; τήρησον αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου, ᾧ (by attraction 
for 6 [cf. B. § 143, 8 p. 286; W. § 24, 1; Rec. incorrectly 
ovs]) δέδωκάς μοι, keep them consecrated and united te 


ὄνομα 


thy name (character), which thou didst commit to me to 
declare and manifest (cf. vs. 6), Jn. xvii. 11; [ef. ὑπὲρ τοῦ 
ἁγίου ὀνόματός σου, οὗ κατεσκήνωσας ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, 
‘Teaching’ etc. ch. 10,23]. After the analogy of the pre- 
ceding expression, the name of Christ (Ἰησοῦ, ᾿Ιησοῦ Χρισ- 
τοῦ, τοῦ κυρίου Ἴησ.» τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν, etc.) is used in the 
N.T. of all those things which, in hearing or recalling that 
name, we are bidden to recognize in Jesus and to profess, 
accordingly, of his Messianic dignity, divine authority, 
memorable sufferings, in a word the peculiar services and 
blessings conferred by him on men, so far forth as these 
are believed, confessed, commemorated, [cf. Westcott on 
the Epp. of Jn. p. 232]: hence the phrases εὐαγγελίζε- 
σθαι τὰ περὶ τοῦ dv."1. Xp. Acts viii. 12; μεγαλύνειν τὸ dv. 
Acts xix. 17; τῷ ὀνόμ [Ree. ἐν τ. dv.] αὐτοῦ ἐλπίζειν, Mt. 
xii. 21 [B. 176 (153) ]; πιστεύειν, 1 Jn. iii. 23; mor. εἰς 
τὸ ἄν., Jn. i. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; 1 Jn. v. 18" [Rec., 13°]; 
πίστις τοῦ ov. Acts iii. 16; ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου, who- 
ever nameth the name of the Lord se. as his Lord (see 
ὀνομάζω. a.), 2 Tim. ii. 19; κρατεῖν, to hold fast i. 6. per- 
severe in professing, Rey. ii. 13; οὐκ ἀρνεῖσθαι, Rev. iii. 
8; τὸ ὄν. ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐνδοξάζεται ἐν ὑμῖν, 2 Th. i. 12; βαστάζειν 
τὸ ὄν. ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν (see βαστάζω, 3), Acts ix. 1ὅ; to do 
or to suffer anything ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Xp. see ἐπί, B. 2 a. β. 


p- 232%, The phrase ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Xp. is used in various 
senses : a. by the command and authority of Christ: 


see exx. just above. b. in the use of the name of Christ 
i.e. the power of his name being invoked for assistance, 
Mk. ix. 38 Re LT Tr WH (see f. below); Lk. x. 17; 
Acts iii. 6; iv. 10; xvi. 18; Jas. v. 14; univ. ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόμα- 
τι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο; Acts iv. 7. ce. through the power 
of Christ's name, pervading and governing their souls, 
Mk. xvi. 17. ἃ. in acknowledging, embracing, prafess- 
ing, the name of Christ: σωθῆναι, Acts iv. 12; δικαιωθῆναε, 
1 Co. vi. 11; ζωὴν ἔχειν, In. xx. 31; in professing and pro- 
claiming the name of Christ, παρρησιάζεσθαι, Acts ix. 27, 
28 (29). e. relying or resting on the name of Christ, 
rooted (so to speak) in his name, i. e. mindful of Christ: 
ποιεῖν τι, Col. iii. 17; εὐχαριστεῖν, Eph. v. 20; αἰτεῖν τι, i.e. 
(for substance) to ask a thing, as prompted by the mind of 
Christ and in reliance on the bond which unites us to him, 
Jn. xiv. 13 sq.; xv. 16; xvi. 24, [26], and R GLin 23; 
ef. Ebrard, Gebet im Namen Jesu, in Herzog iv. 692 sqq. 
God is said to do a thing ἐν dv. Xp. regardful of the name 
of Christ, i. e. moved by the name of Christ, for Christ’s 
sake, διδόναι the thing asked, Jn. xvi. 23T Tr WH; πέμ- 
mew τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ay. Jn. xiv. 26. f. ἐν ὀνόματι Χριστοῦ, 
[A. V. for the name of Christ] (Germ. auf Grund Namens 
Christi), i. e. because one calls himself or is called by the 
name of Christ: ὀνειδίζεσθαι, 1 Pet. iv. 14 (equiv. to ὡς 
Χριστιανός, 16). The simple dat. τῷ dv. Xp. signifies by 
the power of Christ’s name, pervading and prompting 
souls, Mt. vii. 22; so also τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου (i. 6. of 
God) λαλεῖν, of the prophets, Jas. v.10 RG; τῷ dv. σου, 
by uttering thy name as a spell, Mk. ix. 38 Rstbez G (see 
b. above). εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Χριστοῦ συνάγεσθαι is used of 
those who come together to deliberate concerning any 
matter relating to Christ’s cause, (Germ. auf den Na- 


448 


4 
OVT@S 


men), with the mind directed unto, having regard unto, 
his name, Mt. xviii. 20. ἕνεκεν τοῦ dv. [A. V. for my 
name’s sake], i. 6. on account of professing my name, Mt. 
xix. 29; also διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου, αὐτοῦ, etc.: Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 
9; Mk. xiii. 13; Lk. xxi. 17; Jn. xv. 21; 1Jn. ii. 12; Rev. 
ii. 3. διὰ τοῦ dv. τοῦ κυρ. παρακαλεῖν τινα, to beseech one 
by employing Christ’s name as a motive or incentive [cf. 
W. 381 (357)], 1 Co. i. 10; by embracing and avowing 
his name, ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν, Acts x.43. ὑπὲρ τοῦ dv. 
αὐτοῦ, i.q. for defending, spreading, strengthening, the au- 
thority of Christ, Acts v. 41 (see below) ; ix. 16; xv. 26; 
xxi. 13; Ro.i.5; 3 Jn. 7; — [but ace. to the better txts. 
in Acts v. 41; 3 Jn. 7, τὸ ὄνομα is used absolutely, the 
Name, sc. κυρίου, of the Lord Jesus; so cod. Vat. Jas. v. 
14; cf. Lev. xxiv. 11, 16; Bp. Lghtft. on Ignat. ad 
Eph. 3,1; B. 163 (142) note; W. 594 (553). So Bp. 
Lghtft. in Phil. ii. 9; (see 1 above)]. πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα ᾿Ιησοῦ 
tov Nat. ἐναντία πρᾶξαι, Acts xxvi. 9. 3. In imita- 
tion of the Hebr. naw (Num. i. 2, 18, 20; iii. 40, 43; 
xxvi. 53), the plur. ὀνόματα is used i.q. persons reckoned 
up by name: Actsi. 15; Rev. iii. 4; xi. 13. 4. Like 
the Lat. nomen, i.q. the cause or reason named : ἐν τῷ ὀνό- 
ματι τούτῳ, in this cause, i.e. on this account, se. because 
he suffers as a Christian, 1 Pet. iv. 101, Ὁ Tr WH [aL 


more simply take ov. here as referring to Χριστιανός pre= 
v 


ρ 

ceding]; ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι (as in Syriac 9 Leas) Χριστοῦ 
ἐστε, in this name, i. 6. for this reason, because ye are 
Christ’s (disciples), Mk. ix. 41. 

ὀνομάζω; 1 aor. dvduaca; Pass., pres. ὀνομάζομαι; 1 
aor. ὠνομάσθην ; (ὄνομα); fr. Hom. down; to name (cf. 
W. 615 (572)]; a. τὸ ὄνομα, to name i. 6. to utter: 
pass. Eph. i. 21; τοῦ κυρίου [Rec. Χριστοῦ], the name of 
the Lord (Christ) sc. as his Lord, 2 Tim. ii. 19 (Sept. 
for MM DY VIN, to make mention of the nume of Jcho~ 
vah in praise, said of his worshippers, Is. xxvi. 13; Am. 
Vi. 10); τὸ ὄνομα ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐπί τινα, Acts xix. 13, see ἐπί, 
C. I. 1c. p. 234° mid. b. τινά, with a proper or an 
appellative name as pred. acc., fo name, i. 6. give name 
to, one: Lk. vi. 13 sq.; pass. to be named, i. e. bear the 
name of, 1 Co. v. 11; ἐκ w- gen. of the one from whom 
the received name is derived, Eph. iii. 15 (Hom. II. 10, 
68; Xen. mem. 4, 5, 12). ce. τινά or τί, to utter the 
name of a person or thing: ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός, of 
the lands into which the knowledge of Christ has been 
carried, Ro. xv. 20 (1 Mace. iii. 9); ὀνομάζεσθαι of things 
which are called by their own name because they are 
present or exist (as opp. to those which are unheard 
of), 1 Co. ν. 1 Ree.; Eph. v.3. [Comp.: ἐπ-ονομάζω.] * 

ὄνος, -ov, ὁ, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for rn and 
yA, an ass: Lk. xiv. 5 Rec.; Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15; — 
6, Lk. xiii. 15; ἡ, Mt. xxi. 2, 7.* 

ὄντως (fr. dv; on advs. formed fr. ptcps. ef. Bttm. Ausf. 
Spr. § 115 a. Anm. 3; Kiihner § 335 Anm. 2), adv., 
truly, in reality, in point of fact, as opp. to what is pre 
tended, fictitious, false, conjectural: Mk. xi. 32 [see 
ἔχω, 1.1 £.]; Lk. xxiii. 47; xxiv. 34; In. viii. 36; 1 Co. 
xiv. 25: Gal. iii. 21 and Rec. in 2 Pet. ii. 18; ὁ, 9, τὸ 


ὄξος 


ὄντως foll. by a noun, that which <s truly ete., that which 
is indeed, (τὰ ὄντως ἀγαθὰ ἢ καλά, Plat. Phaedr. p. 
260 a.; τὴν ὄντως καὶ ἀληθῶς φιλίαν, Plat. Clit. p. 409 e.; 
οἱ ὄντως βασιλεῖς, Joseph. antt. 15, 3,5): as ἡ ὄντως (Rec. 
αἰώνιος) ζωή, 1 Tim. vi. 19; ἡ ὄντως χήρα, a widow that 
is a widow indeed, not improperly called a widow (as 
παρθένος ἣ λεγομένη χήρα, i. 6. a virgin that has taken 
a vow of celibacy, in ἴσῃ. ad Smyrn. 13 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. in 
loc.]; οἵ. Baur, Die sogen. Pastoralbriefe, p. 46 sqq.), 
1 Tim. v. 3, 5,16. (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq-; 
Sept. for D398, Num. xxii. 37; for 2s, Jer. iii. 23; for 
ys, Jer. x. 19.) * 

ὄξος, -εος (-ovs), τό, (ὀξύς), vinegar (Aeschyl., Hip- 
poer., Arstph., Xen., sqq.; for yn, Ruth ii. 14; Num. 
vi. 3, ete.); used in the N. T. for Lat. posca, i. 6. the 
mixture of sour wine or vinegar and water which the 
Roman soldiers were accustomed to drink: Mt. xxvii. 
34 RLmrg., 48; Mk. xv. 36; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix. 
29 sq.* 

ὀξύς, -eia, -v, [allied w. Lat. acer, acus, etc.; ef. Curtius 
§ 2]; 1. sharp (fr. Hom. down) : ῥομφαία, δμέπα- 
voy, Rev. 1: 16; ii. 12; xiv. 14, 17 sq.; xix. 15, (Is. v. 
28; Ps. lvi. (Ivii.) 5). 2. swift, quick, (so fr. Hdt. 
5, 9 down; cf. ὠκύς fleet): Ro. iii. 15 (Am. ii. 15; Prov. 
xxii. 29).* 

ὀπή, -ῆς, ἡ, (perh. fr. ὄψ᾽ [root dm (see ὁράω) ; ef. Cur- 
tius § 627]), prop. through which one can see (Pollux | 2, 
53 p. 179] ὀπή, δ ἧς ἔστιν ἰδεῖν, cf. Germ. Luke, Loch 
[2]}, an opening, aperture, (used of a window, Cant. v. 
4): of fissures in the earth, Jas. iii. 11 (Ex. xxxiii. 22); 
of caves in rocks or mountains, Heb. xi. 38 [here R. V. 
holes}; Obad. 3. (Of various other kinds of holes and 
openings, in Arstph., Aristot., al.) * 

ὄπισθεν, (see ὀπίσω), adv. of place, from behind, on the 
back, behind, after: Mt. ix. 20; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44; 
Rey. iv. 6; v. 1 (on which see γράφω. 3). As a prepo- 
sition it is joined with the gen. (like ἔμπροσθεν, ἔξωθεν, 
ete. [W. § 54, 6; B. § 146,1]): Mt. xv. 23; Lk. xxiii. 
26; [Rev.i.10 WHmrg.]. (From Hom. down; Sept. 
for *1)8, sometimes for 7jmx.) * 

ὀπίσω, ([perh.] fr. ἡ ὄπις ; and this fr. ἔπω, ἕπομαι, to 
follow [but ef. Vaniéek p. 530]), adv. of place and time, 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 7s, ins and esp. for "ὙΠ - 
(at the) back, behind, after; 1. adverbially of 
place: €orava, Lk. vii. 38; ἐπιστρέψαι ὀπίσω, back, 
Mt. xxiv. 18 (ὑποστρέφειν ὀπίσω, Joseph. antt. 6, 1, 3); 
τὰ ὀπίσω, the things that are behind, Phil. iii. 13 (14); 
εἰς Ta ὀπίσω ἀπέρχεσθαι, to go backward, Vulg. abire re- 
trorsum, Jn. xviii. 6 ; to return home, of those who grow 
recreant to Christ’s teaching and cease to follow him, 
Jn. vi. 66; στρέφεσθαι, to turn one’s self back, Jn. xx. 
14; ἐπιστρέφειν, to return back to places left, Mk. xiii. 
16; Lk. xvil. 31; ὑποστρέψαι εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, trop., of those 
who return to the manner of thinking and living already 
abandoned, 2 Pet. ii. 21 Lchm.; βλέπειν (Vulg. [aspicere 
or] respicere retro [ A. V. to look back]), Lk. ix. 62. 2. 
By a usage unknown to Grk. auth., as a prep. with the 
gen. [W. § 54,6; Β. 8 146, 1]; a. of place: Rev. 


449 


΄-» 
ΟἸΤΟΌ 


i. 10 [WH mrg. ὄπισθεν; xii. 15, (Num. xxv. 8; Cant. 
ii. 9); in phrases resembling the Hebr. [cf. W. 30; B. 
u. 8. and 172 (150)]: ὀπίσω τινὸς ἔρχεσθαι to follow any 
one as a guide, to be his disciple or follower, Mt. xvi. 
24; Lk. ix. 23; Mk. viii. 34 RL Trmrg. WH; [ef. Lk. 
xiv. 27]; also ἀκολουθεῖν, Mk. viii. 34 GT Trtxt.; Mt. 
X. 38, (see ἀκολουθέω, 2 fin.) ; πορεύεσθαι, to join one’s 
self to one as an attendant and follower, Lk. xxi. 8 (Sir. 
xlvi. 10); to seek something one lusts after, 2 Pet. ii. 
10 [ef. W. 594 (553); B. 184 (160)]; ἀπέρχομαι ὀπίσω 
τινός, to go off in order to follow one, to join one’s party, 
Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; to run after a thing which one 
lusts for [ef. B. u. s.], ἑτέρας σαρκός, Jude 7; δεῦτε ὀπίσω 
μου (see δεῦτε, 1), Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17; ἀποστέλλειν 
τινὰ ὀπίσω τινός, Lk. xix. 14; ἀφιστάναι, ἀποσπᾶν τινα 
ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ, to draw one away to (join) his party, Acts 
v.37; xx. 30; ἐκτρέπεσθαι, to turn out of the right path, 
turn aside from rectitude, 1 Tim. v. 15; by a pregnant 
construction, after θαυμάζειν, to wonder after i. 6. to be 
drawn away by admiration to follow one [B. 185 (160 
sq-)], Rev. xiii. 3 (πᾶς ὁ λαὸς ἐξέστη ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ, 1 8. 
Xl. 7); ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, [ A. V. get thee behind me], out 
of my sight: Lk. iv. 8 RLbr.; Mt. iv. 10 [6 Lbr.]; 
xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. Ὁ. of time, after: ἔρχεσθαι 
ὀπίσω τινός, to make his public appearance after (sub- 
sequently to) one, Mt.-iii. 11; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 
30, (ὀπίσω τοῦ σαββάτου, Neh. xiii. 19).* 

ὁπλίζω: [1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. ὁπλίσασθε]; 
(ὅπλον); fr. Hom. down; to arm, furnish with arms; 
univ. fo provide; mid. τί, to furnish one’s self with a thing 
(as with arms); metaph. τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε, 
[A. V. arm yourselves with i. e.] take on the same mind, 
1 Pet. iv. 1 (θράσος, Soph. Electr. 995). [Comp.: καθ- 
omditw.]* 

ὅπλον [allied to ἕπω, Lat. sequor, socius, ete.; Curtius 
§ 621], -ov, τό, as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, any tool 
or implement for preparing a thing, (like the Lat. arma) ; 
hence 1. plur. arms used in warfare, weapons: 
Jn. xviii. 3; 2 Co. x.4; metaph. τῆς δικαιοσύνης, which 
ἡ Sux. furnishes, 2 Co. vi. 7; τοῦ φωτός, adapted to the 
light, such as light demands, Ro. xiii. 12 [here L mrg. 
ἔργα]. 2. an instrument: ὅπλα ἀδικίας, for commit- 
ting unrighteousness, opp. to ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης, for prac- 
tising righteousness, Ro. vi. 13.* 

ὁποῖος, -οία, -οἵον, (ποῖος w. the rel. 6), [fr. Hom. down], 
of what sort or quality, what manner of: 1 Co. iii. 13; 
Gal. ii. 6; 1 Th. i. 9; Jas. i. 24; preceded by τοιοῦτος, 
[such as], Acts xxvi. 29.* 

ὁπότε, (πότε w. the rel. 6), [fr. Hom. down], when [ef. 
B. § 139, 34; W. § 41 b. 3]: Lk. vi. 3 RGT (where L 
Tr WH Gre).* 

ὅπου, (from ποῦ and the rel. 6), [from Hom. down], 
where; 1. adv. of place, a. in which place, 
where ; a. in relative sentences with the Indica- 
tive it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place; 
as, ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ὅπου etc. Mt. vi. 19; add, ib. 20; xiii. 5; 
xxvill. 6; Mk. vi. 55; ix. 44, 46, [which verses T WII 
om. Tr br.], 48; Lk. xii. 38; Jn. i. 28; iv. 20,46: vi. 23; 


οπτάνω 


vil. 42: x.40; xi.30; xii.1l; xviii. 1,20; xix. 18, 20, 41; 
xx. 12; Acts xvii.1; Rev. xi.8; xx.10. it refers to 
ἐκεῖ or ἐκεῖσε to be mentally supplied in what precedes 
or follows: Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Mk. ii. 4; iv. 15; v. 40; 
xi. 14; Jn. iii. 8; vi. 62; vil.34; xi.82; xiv.3; xvi. 
24; xx.19; Ro. xv. 20; Heb. ix. 16; x. 18; Rev. ii. 13. 
it refers to ἐκεῖ expressed in what follows: Mt. vi. 21; 
Lk. xii. 834; xvii. 37; Jn. xii. 26; Jas. iii.16. in imita- 
tion of the Hebr. ow- ws (Gen. xiii. 3; Eccl. ix. 10, 
etc.) : ὅπου ἐκεῖ, Rev. xii. 6 [ἃ T Tr WH], 14, (see ἐκεῖ, 
a.); ὅπου... em αὐτῶν, Rey. xvii. 9. ὅπου also refers 
to men, so that it is equiv. to with (among) whom, in 
whose house: Mt. xxvi. 57; [add, Rev. ii. 13; ef. W. § 54, 
7 fin.]; in which state (viz. of the renewed man), Col. iii. 
11. it is loosely connected with the thought to which 
it refers, so that it is equiv. to wherein [A. V. whereas], 
2 Pet. ii. 11 (in the same sense in indir. quest., Xen. 
mem. 3, 5,1). ὅπου ἄν, wherever,—with impf. indie. 
(see ἄν, 11. 1), Mk. vi. 56 [Tdf. ἐάν]; with aor. sub- 
june. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mk. ix. 18 (where L T Tr WH ὅπου 
ἐάν); Mk. xiv. 9 [here too T WH ὅπ. ἐάν]; also ὅπου ἐάν 
(see ἐάν, II), Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. vi. 10; xiv. 14", (in 
both which last pass. L Tr ὅπου dv); with subj. pres. 
Mt. xxiv. 28. β. in indir. questions [yet ef. W. § 57, 
2 fin.], with subjunc. aor.: Mk. xiv. 14°; Lk. xxii. 
11. b. joined to verbs signifying motion into a 
place instead of ὅποι, into which place, whither, (see 
ἐκεῖ, b.): foll. by the indic., Jn. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 33, 36; 
xiv. 4; xxi. 18; [Jas. iii. 4 T Tr WH (see below) ]; ὅπου 
av, where(whither)soever, w. indie. pres., Rey. xiv. 4 L 
Tr WH (cf. below], cf. B. § 139, 30; with subjune. pres., 
Lk. ix.57 RG TWH [al. ὅπ. ἐάν, see below]; Jas. iii. 4 
[RGL]; Rev. xiv. 4 RGT (see above); ὅπου ἐάν, w. 
subjune. pres., Mt. viii. 19, and L Tr in Lk. ix. 57. 2. 
It gets the force of a conditional particle if (in case 
that, inso far as, [A. V. whereas (cf. 2 Pet. ii. 11 above) ]): 
1 Co. iii. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 43, 1, and often in Grk. 
writ.; ef. Grimm on 4 Mace. ii. 14; Meyer on 1 Co. iii. 
3; [Miller on Barn. ep. 16, 6]).” 

ὀπτάνω (OIITQ): to look at, behold; mid. pres. ptep. 
ὀπτανόμενος; to allow one’s self to be seen, to appear: tui, 
Acts i. 3. (1 K. viii. 8; Tob. xii. 19; [Graec. Ven. Ex. 
χχχῖν. 24].)~ 

ὀπτασία. -as, ἡ, (ὀπτάζω) ; 1. the act of exhibiting 
one’s self to view: ὀπτασίαι κυρίου, 2 Co. xii. 1 [A. V. 
visions; cf. Meyer ad loc.] (ἐν ἡμέραις ὀπτασίας pov, Add. 
to Esth. iv. 1.44 (13); [οἷς Mal. iii. 2]; ἥλιος ἐν ὀπτασίᾳ, 
coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a sight, a vision, 
an appearance presented to one whether asleep or 
awake: οὐράνιος ont. Acts xxvi. 19; ἑωρακέναι ὀπτασίαν, 
Lk. i. 22; w. gen. of appos. ἀγγέλων, Lk. xxiv. 23. A 
later form for ὄψις [ef. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6; for 
7879, Dan. [Theodot.] ix. 23; x. 1, 7 sq.” 

ὀπτός, -ἤ, -όν, (ὀπτάω [to roast, cook]), cooked, broiled: 
Lk. xxiv. 42. (Ex. xii. 8,9; in class. Grk. fr. Hom. 
down.) * 

ὄπτω, 566 ὁράω. 

ὀπώρα, -ας, 7, (derived by some fr. dms [cf. ὀπίσω], 


450 


ὅπως 


ἕπομαι, and ὥρα; hence, the time that follows the dpa 
(Curtius § 522]; by others fr. ὁπός [ef. our sap] juice, 
and ὥρα, i. e. the time of juicy fruits, the time when 
fruits become ripe), fr. Hom. down; 1. the season 
which succeeds θέρος, from the rising of Sirius to that of 
Arcturus, i. e. late summer, early autumn, our dog-days 
(the year being divided into seven seasons as follows: 
ἔαρ, θέρος, ὀπώρα, φθινόπωρον, σπορητός, χειμών, φυτα- 
λιά). 2. ripe fruits (of trees): σοῦ τῆς ἐπιθυμίας 
τῆς Ψυχῆς for ὧν ἡ ψυχή σου ἐπιθυμεῖ, Rev. xviii. 14. 
(Jer. xlvii. (xl.) 10, and often in Grk. writ.) * 

ὅπως, (fr. πῶς and the relat. ὁ), with the indicative, a 
relat. adverb but, like the Lat. ut, assuminz also the 
nature of a conjunction [οἵ. W. 449 (418 sq.) ]. aE 
As an Adverb; as, in what manner, how; once so in 
the N. T. in an indir. question, with the indie.: οὐκ 
ἔγνως, ὅπως κτλ. Lk. xxiv. 20, where cf. Bornemann, 
Scholia ete. Ir. A Conjunction, Lat. ut, an- 
swering to the Germ. dass, that; in class. Grk. with the 
optat., and subjunc., and fut. indic.; ef. esp. Klotz ad 
Devar. ii. 2 p. 681 sqq. But the distinction observed 
between these constructions by the more elegant Grk. 
writ. is quite neglected in the N. T., and if we except 
Mt. xxvi. 59 L TTr (ὅπως θανατώσουσιν), [1 Co. i. 29 
Ree.*!7], only the subjunctive follows this particle (for 
in Mk. v. 23, for ὅπως . . . ζήσεται, L txt. T Tr WH have 
correctly restored iva... ζήσῃ); cf. W. 289 (271); B. 
233 (201) sq.; [214 (185) ]. 1. It denotes the pur- 
pose or end, in order that; with the design or to the 
end that; that; a. without av,—after the present, 
Mt. vi. 2,16; Philem. 6; Heb. ix. 15; after ἐστέ to be 
supplied, 1 Pet. ii. 9; after the perfect, Acts ix. 17; 
Heb. ii. 9; ὅπως μή, Lk. xvi. 26; after the imper- 
fect, Mt. xxvi. 59 [RG (see above)]; Acts ix. 24; 
after the aorist, Acts ix. 2, 12; xxv. 26; Ro. ix. 17; 
Gal. i. 4; ὅπως μή, Acts xx. 16; 1 Co. i. 29; after the 
pluperfect, Jn. xi. 57; after the future, Mt. xxiii. 
35; and Rec. in Acts xxiv. 26; after an aor. sub- 
june. by which something is asked for, Mk. ν. 23 Ree. ; 
after imperatives, Mt. ii. 8; v. 16,45; vi. 4; Acts 
Xxili. 15, 23; 2 Co. viii. 11; ὅπως μή, Mt. vi. 18; after 
clauses with ἵνα and the aor. subjunc., Lk. xvi. 28; 2 Co. 
viii. 14; 2 ΤῊ. 1.12. Noteworthy is the phrase ὅπως 
πληρωθῇ, i. 6. that ace. to God’s purpose it might be 
brought to pass or might be proved by the event, of O. T. 
prophecies and types (see ἵνα, II. 3 fin.): Mt. 11. 23; 
viii. 17; xii. 17 (where L T Tr WH iva); xiii. 35. b. 
ὅπως ἄν, that, if it be possible, Mt. vi.5 RG; that, if what 
I have just said shall come to pass, Lk. ii. 35; Acts iii. 
20 (19) [R. V. that so]; xv. 17; Ro. iii. 4 [B. 234 (201)]; 
exx. fr. the Sept. are given in W. § 42, 6. 2. As 
in the Grk. writ. also (ef. W. 338 (317); [B. § 139, 41]), 
ὅπως with the subjunctive is used after verbs of pray- 
ing, entreating, asking, exhorting, to denote 
what one wishes to be done: Mt. viii. 34 [here L wa]; 
ix. 38; Lk. vii. 3; x. 2; xi. 37; Acts viii. 15, 24; ix. 2; 
xxiii. 20; xxv. 3; Jas. v.16; after a verb of deliber 
ating: Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; Mk. iii. 6, (fr. which exx: 


ὅραμα 


it is easy to see how tne use noted in II. arises from 
the original adverbial force of the particle; for συμβούλ. 
ἔλαβον, dros ἀπολέσωσιν αὐτόν, they took counsel to de- 
stroy him is equiv. to how they might destroy him, and 
also to to this end that they might destroy him; cf. Kiihner 
§ 552 Anm. 3, ii. p. 892).* 
ὅραμα, -ros, τό, (ὁράω), that which is seen, a sight, spec- 
tacle: Acts vii. 31; Mt. xvii. 9; @ sight divinely granted 
in an ecstasy or in sleep, a vision, Acts x. 17,19; 8¢ ὁρά- 
ματος, Acts xviii. 9; ἐν ὁράματι, Acts ix. 10, 12 [RG]; 
x. 3; ὅραμα βλέπειν, Acts xii. 9; ἰδεῖν, Acts xi. 5; xvi. 
10. (Xen., Aristot., Plut., Ael. v. h. 2, 3 [al. εἰκών] ; 
Sept. several times for 1870, jii7}, Chald. xy ete.; see 
ὀπτασία.) " 
ὅρασις, -ews, 7, (opdw) ; 1. the act of seeing: ὁμ- 
μάτων χρῆσις εἰς ὅρασιν, Sap. xv. 15; the sense of sight, 
Aristot. de anima 3, 2; Diod. 1, 59; Plut. mor. p. 440 sq.; 
plur. the eyes, ἐκκόπτειν tas ὁράσεις, Diod. 2, 6. 2: 
appearance, visible form: Rev. iv. 3 (Num. xxiv. 4; Ezek. 
i. 5, 26, 28; Sir. xli. 20, ete.). 3. a vision, i. e. an 
appearance divinely granted in an ecstasy: Rev. ix. 17; 
ὁράσεις ὄψονται, Acts ii. 17 fr. Joel ii. 28. (Sept. chiefly 
for 7872 and jiin.) * 
ὁρατός, -7, -dv, (dpdw), visible, open to view: neut. plur. 
substantively, Col. i. 16. (Xen., Plat., Theocr., Philo; 
Sept.) * 
ὁράω, -ὦ ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἑώρων (Jn. vi. 2, where 
LTr WH ἐθεώρουν) ; pf. ἑώρακα and (T WH in Col. ii. 1, 
18; [1 Co. ix.1]; Tdf. ed. 7 also in Jn. ix. 37; xv. 24; xx. 
25; 1 Jn. ili. 6; iv. 20; 3Jn. 11) ἑόρακα (on which form 
ef. [WH. App. p. 161; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Steph. The- 
saur. s. v. 2139 4.1; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 325; [B. 64 
(56); Veitch s.v.]), [2 pers. sing. -ces (Jn. viii. 57 Tr 
mrg.) see κοπιάω, init.], 3 pers. plur. ἑωράκασιν (and -καν 
in Col. ii. 1 L Tr WH; Lk. ix. 36 T Tr WH; see yivo- 
μαι, init.) ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. ἑωράκει (Acts vii. 44) ; fut. 
ὄψομαι (fr. ONTO), 2 pers. sing. ὄψει (cf. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. i. p. 347sq.; Kiihner § 211, 3, i. p.536), Mt. xxvii. 
4; Jn.i. 50 (51); xi.40; but L T Tr WH [G also in Jn. 
i. 50 (51)] have restored ὄψῃ (cf. W. § 13, 2; B. 42 sq. 
(37)), 2 pers. plur. ὄψεσθε, Jn. i. 39 (40) T Tr WH, ete.; 
Pass., 1 aor. ὥφθην ; fut. ὀφθήσομαι ; 1 aor. mid. subjunc. 
2 pers. plur. ὄψησθε (LK. xiii. 28 [R G L WH txt. Tr 
mrg.]) fr. a Byzant. form ὠψάμην (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
734, ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 258 sq. ; [Veitch s. v.]) ; Sept. 
for 78) and min; [fr. Hom. down]; ΤΟ SEE, i.e. 1. 
to see with the eyes: τινὰ ὁρᾶν, ἑωρακέναι, Lk. xvi. 23; Jn. 
vill. 573 xiv. 7, 9; xx. 18, 25,29; 1 Co. ix. 1, ete.; fut. 
ὄψομαι, Mt. xxviii. 7,10; Mk. xvi.7; Rev.i. 7, ete.; τὸν 
θεόν, 1 Jn. iv. 20; ἀόρατον ὡς ὁρῶν, Heb. xi. 27; with a 
ptep. added as a predicate [B. 301 (258); W. § 45, 4], 
Mt. xxiv. 30; Mk. xiii. 26; xiv.62; Lk. xxi. 27; Jn. i. 
51 (52) ; ἑωρακέναι or ὄψεσθαι τὸ πρόσωπόν twos, Col. ii. 
1; Acts xx. 25; 6 (which divine majesty, i. e. rod θείου 
λόγου) ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν (on this addition cf. 
W. 607 (564) ; [B. 398 (341)]), 1 Jn. i. 1; ὄψεσθαί τινα 
3. e. come to see, visit, one, Heb. xiii. 23; ἑωρακέναι Christ, 
Le. to have seen him exhibiting proofs of his divinity 


451 


opaw 


and Messiahship, Jn. vi. 36; ix. 37; xv. 24; ὁρᾶν and 
ὄψεσθαι with an ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiii. 49; Jn.i. 50 
(51); iv. 45; vi. 2[L Tr WH ἐθεώρουν] ; xix. 35; Acts 
ii. 17; vii. 44; Rev. xviii. 18 [Rec.], ete.; [epy. x. ὄψεσθε 
(se. ποῦ μένω); Jn. i. 40 (39) T TrWH;; cf. B. 290 (250) ]; 
ὄψη τὴν δόξαν τοῦ θεοῦ, the glory of God displayed in a 
miracle, Jn. xi.40. metaph. ὄψεσθαι τὸν θεόν, τὸν κύριον, 
to be admitted into intimate and blessed fellowship with 
God in his future kingdom, Mt. v. 8; Heb. xii. 14; also 
τὸ πρόσωπον τοῦ θεοῦ, Key. xxii. 4—(a fig. borrowed 
from those privileged to see and associate with kings; 
see βλέπω, 1 b. 8.) ; οὐκ εἶδος θεοῦ ἑωράκατε, trop. i. q. his 
divine majesty as he discloses it in the Scriptures ye 
have not recognized, Jn. v. 37; cf. Meyer ad loc. 2 
to see with the mind, to perceive, know : absol. Ro. xv. 21; 
τινά foll. by a ptep. in the ace. [B. ὃ 144,15b.; W.§ 45, 4], 
Acts viii. 28 ; ri, Col. ii. 18; with a ptep. added, Heb. ii. 
8; foll. by ὅτι, Jas. ii. 24; to look at or upon, observe, give 
attention to: ets twa, Jn. xix. 37 (Soph. El. 925; Xen. Cyr. 
4, 1, 20; εἴς τι, Solon in Diog. Laért. 1, 52); ἑωρακέναι 
παρὰ τῷ πατρί, to have learned from [see παρά, II. b.] the 
father (a metaphorical expression borrowed fr. sons, who 
learn what they see their fathers doing), Jn. viii. 38 
(twice in Rec. ; once in LT Tr WH); Christ is said to 
deliver to men ἃ ἑώρακεν, the things which he has seen, 
i. 6. which he learned in his heavenly state with God be- 
fore the incarnation, i. e. things divine, the counsels of 
God, Jn. iii. 11, 32; ἑωρακέναι θεόν, to know God’s will, 
3 Jn. 11; from the intercourse and influence of Christ 
to have come to see (know) God's majesty, saving pur- 
poses, and will [ef. W. 273 (257)], Jn. xiv. 7,9; in an 
emphatic sense, of Christ, who has an immediate and 
perfect knowledge of God without being taught by an- 
other, Jn. 1. 18; vi. 46; ὄψεσθαι θεὸν καθώς ἐστιν, of the 
knowledge of God that may be looked for in his future 
kingdom, 1 Jn. iii. 2; ὄψεσθαι Christ, is used in refer- 
ence to the apostles, about to perceive his invisible pres- 
ence among them by his influence upon their souls 
through the Holy Spirit, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; Christ is 
said ὄψεσθαι the apostles, i. e. will have knowledge of 
them, ibid. 22. 3. to see i. e. to become acquainted 
with by experience, to experience: ζωήν, i. q. to become a 
partaker of, Jn. iii. 36; ἡμέραν, (cf. Germ. erleben; see 
εἴδω, 1. 5), Lk. xvii. 22 (Soph. O. R. 831). 4. to see 
lo, look to; i. 6. a. i. q. to take heed, beware, [see esp. 
B. § 139, 49; cf. W. 503 (469)]: ὅρα μή, with aor. sub- 
junc., see that .. . not, take heed lest, Mt. viii. 4 ; xviii. 10; 
Mk. i.44; 1 Th. v.15; supply τοῦτο ποιήσῃς in Rev. xix. 
10; xxii. 9, [W. 601 (558) ; B. 395 (338) ], (Xen. Cyr. 3, 
1, 27, where see Poppo; Soph. Philoct. 30, 519; EL 
1003) ; foll. by an impv., Mt. ix. 30; xxiv. 6; ὁρᾶτε καὶ 
προσέχετε ἀπό, Mt. xvi. 6; ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε ἀπό, Mk. viii. 
15; ὁρᾶτε, καὶ φυλάσσεσθε ἀπό, Lk. xii. 15; ὅρα, τί μέλ- 
λεις ποιεῖν. i. gq. weigh well, Acts xxii. 26 Rec. (ὅρα τί ποιεῖς, 
Soph. Philoct. 589). b. i.q. to care for, pay heed to: 
σὺ ὄψη [RG ὄψει (see above)], see thou to it, that will 
be thy concern, [cf. W. § 40, 6], Mt. xxvii. 4; plur., 24; 
Acts xviii. 15, (Epict. diss. 2, 5, 30; 4, 6,11sq.; [An 


δογὴ 


tonin. 5, 25 (and Gataker ad loc.)]). 5. Pass. 1 
aor. ὥφθην, I was seen, showed myself, appeared [cf. B. 52 
(45)]: Lk. ix. 31; with dat. of pers. (ef. B. u. s., [also 
§ 134, 2; ef. W. § 31, 10]): of angels, Lk. 1. 11; xxii. 43 
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 30, 35, (Ex. iii. 
2); of God, Acts vii. 2 (Gen. xii. 7; xvii. 1); of the 
dead, Mt. xvii. 3; Mk. ix. 4, ef. Lk. ix. 31; of Jesus after 
his resurrection, Lk. xxiv. 34; Acts ix. 17; xiii. 31; xxvi. 
16; 1 Co. xv. 5-8; 1 Tim. iii. 16; of Jesus hereafter to 
return, Heb. ix. 28; of visions during sleep or eestasy, 
Acts xvi. 9; Rev. xi. 19; xii. 1, 3; in the sense of com- 
ing upon unexpectedly, Acts ii. 3; vii. 26. fut. pass. ὧν 
ὀφθήσομαί σοι, on account of which I will appear unto 
thee, Acts xxvi. 16; on this pass. see W. § 39, 3 N.1; 
ef. B. 287 (247). [Come.: daq-, καθ-, mpo-opda. | 

[Syn. δρᾶν, βλέπειν, both denote the physical act: dp. 
in general, BA. the single look; 6p. gives prominence to the 
discerning mind, AA. to the particular mood or point. When 
the physical side recedes, ὄρ. denotes perception in general 
(as resulting principally from vision), the prominence in the 
word of the mental element being indicated by the constr. of 
the acc. w. inf. (in contrast with that of the ptcp. required 
ν΄. βλέπειν), and by the absol. dpas; βλέπ. on the other hand, 
when its physical side recedes, gets a purely outward sense, 
look (i. e. open, incline) towards, Lat. spectare, vergere. 
Schmidt ch. xi. Cf. θεωρέω, σκοπέω, εἴδω, I. fin.] 


ὀργή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. ὀργάω to teem, denoting an internal 
motion, esp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice 
[Curtius § 152]; ef. Lat. turgere alicui for irasci alicui 
in Plaut. Cas. 2, 5,17; Most. 8, 2,10; οἵ. Germ. arg, 
Aerger), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down the natural dis- 
position, temper, character; movement or agitation of soul, 
impulse, desire, any violent emotion, but esp. (and chiefly 
in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indigna- 
tion, (on the distinction between it and θυμός, see θυμός, 
1): Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Jas.i.19sq.; μετ᾽ ὀργῆς, in- 
dignant, [A. V. with anger], Mk. iii. 5; χωρὶς ὀργῆς, 1 
Tim. ii. 8; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for 
the punishment itself (Dem. or. in Mid. § 43): of the 
punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii.4; διὰ τὴν 
ὀργήν, i. 6. because disobedience is visited with punish- 
ment, ib. 5. The ὀργή attributed to God in the N. T. is 
that in God which stands opposed to man’s disobedience, 
obduracy (esp. in resisting the gospel) and sin, dnd man- 
ifests itself in punishing the same: Jn. 111. 36; Ro. i. 18; 
iv. 15; ix. 22°; Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3; Rev. xiv. 10; xvi. 19; 
xix. 15; absol. ἡ ὀργή, Ro. xii. 19 [ef. W. 594 (553)]; 
σκεύη ὀργῆς, vessels into which wrath will be poured (at 
the last day), explained by the’addition κατηρτισμένα εἰς 
ἀπώλειαν, Ro. ix. 22; ἡ μέλλουσα opyn, which at the 
last day will be exhibited in penalties, Mt. iii. 7; Lk. 
iii. 7, [al. understand in these two pass. the (national) 
judgments immediately impending to be referred 
to—at least primarily]; also ἡ ὀργὴ ἡ ἐρχομένη, 1 Th. 
i. 10; ἡμέρα ὀργῆς, the day on which the wrath of God 
will be made manifest in the punishment of the wicked 
[οἴ W. § 30, 2 α.1, Ro. ii. 5; and ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τῆς 
ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ (Rev. vi. 17; see ἡμέρα, 8 ad ἔπ.) ; ἔρχεται 
ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ θεοῦ ἐπί τινα, the wrath of God cometh upon 


452 


ὀρθοποδέω 


one in the infliction of penalty [ef. W. § 40, 2 a.], Eph. 
v. 6; Col. iii. 6 [Ὁ Tr WH om. L br. ἐπί etc.]; ἔφθασε 
[τκεν L txt. WH mrg.] ἐπ᾿ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργή, 1 Th. ii. 16; 
80 ἡ ὀργή passes over into the notion of retribution and 
punishment, Lk. xxi. 23; Ro. [ii. 8]; iii. 5; v. 9; Rev. 
xi. 18; τέκνα ὀργῆς, men exposed to divine punishment, 
Eph. ii. 3; εἰς ὀργήν, unto wrath, i.e. to undergo pun- 
ishment in misery, 1 Th. v. 9. ὀργή is attributed te 
Christ also when he comes as Messianic judge, Rev. vi- 
16. (Sept. for 1] 3)», wrath, outburst of anger, ὈΡῚ, 72M, 
TIT), TSP, ete. 5 but chiefly for 48.) Cf. Ferd. Weber, 
Vom Zorne Gottes. Erlang. 1862; Ritschl, Die christl. 
Lehre v. d. Rechtfertigung u. Versohnung, ii. p. 118 sqq.* 

ὀργίζω : Pass., pres. ὀργίζομαι ; 1 aor. ὠργίσθην; (ὀργή); 
fr. Soph., Eur., and ‘Thue. down; to provoke, arouse to 
anger; pass. to be provoked to anger, be angry, be wroth, 
(Sept. for ΠΤ, 4sp, also for 48 ΓΙ ete.): absol., Mt. 
xviii. 34; xxii. 7; Pr. xiv. 21; xv. 28; Eph. iv. 26 [B. 
290 (250); cf. W. §§ 43, 2; 55,7]; Rev. xi. 18; τινί, 
Mt. v. 22; ἐπί τινι. Rev. xii. 17 [Lom. ἐπί] as in 1 K. xi. 
9; [Andoe. 5, 10]; Isoer. p. 280 ο.; [cf. W. 232 (218)]. 
(Comp. : παρ-οργίζω.} " 

ὀργίλος, -η, -ov, (ὀργή), prone to anger, irascible, [A. V. 
soon angry]: Tit. i. 7. (Prov. xxii. 24; xxix. 22; Xen. 
de re equ. 9,7; Plat. [e.g.derep.411b.]; Aristot. [e.g. 
eth. Nic. 2, 7, 10]; al.) * 

ὀργυιά, -as, ἡ, (ὀρέγω to stretch out), the distance 
across the breast from the tip of one middle finger to 
the tip of the other when the arms are outstretched; 
five or six feet, a fathom: Acts xxvii. 28. (Hom., Hdt., 
Xen., al.) * 

ὀρέγω: (cf. Lat. rego, Germ. recken, strecken, reichen, 
[Eng. reach; Curtius § 1587); fr. Hom. down; to stretch 
forth, as χεῖρα, Hom. Il. 15, 371, ete.; pres. mid. [cf. W. 
p- 252 (237) note], to stretch one’s self out in order to 
touch or to grasp something, to reach after or desire some- 
thing: with a gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. iii. 1; Heb. xi. 
16; φιλαργυρίας, to give one’s self up to the love of 
money (not quite accurately since φιλαργ. is itself the 
ὄρεξις; [cf. Ellicott ad loc.]), 1 Tim. vi. 10.* 

ὀρεινός, -7, -όν, (pos), mountainous, hilly; ἡ ὀρεινή [WH 
dpwn, see I, 47] sc. χώρα [ef. W. 591 (550)] (which is 
added in Hdt. 1, 110; Xen. Cyr. 1, 8, 3), the mountain- 
district, hill-country: Lk. i. 39, 65, (Aristot. ἢ. a. 5, 28, 
4; Sept. for ὙΠ, Gen. xiv. 10; Deut. xi. 11; Josh. ii. 
16, etc.).* 

ὄρεξις, -ews, 9, (ὀρέγομαι, q. v-), desire, longing, craving, 
for; eager desire, lust, appetite: of lust, Ro. i. 27. It is 
used both in a good and a bad sense, as well of natural 
and lawful and even of proper cravings (of the appetite 
for food, Sap. xvi. 2 sq.; Plut. mor. p. 635 ¢.; al.; ἔπι- 
στήμης, Plat. de fin. p. 414b.), as also of corrupt and 
unlawful desires, Sir. xviii. 30; xxiii. 6; ἄλογοι and λο- 
γιστικαὶ ὀρέξεις are contrasted in Aristot. rhet. 1, 10, 7. 
[Cf. Trench § lxxxvii.]* 

ὀρθο-ποδέω, -ῶ; (ὀρθόπους with straight feet, going 
straight; and this fr. ὀρθός and πούς); to walk in a 
straight course; metaph. to act uprightly, Gal. ii. 14 [ef. 


ὀρθός 


πρός, I. 8 1.1. 
(96) ].* 

ὀρθός, -7, -dv, (OPQ, ὄρνυμι [to stir up, set in motion; 
ace. to al. fr. τ. to lift up; ef. Fick iii. p. 775; Vanitek 
p- 928; Curtius p. 348]), straight, erect; i. e. a. 
upright: ἀνάστηθι, Acts xiv. 10; so with στῆναι in 1 Esdr. 
ix. 46, and in Grk. writ., esp. Hom. b. opp. to 
σκολιός, straight i. 6. not crooked: τροχιαί, Heb. xii. 13 
(for Ww, Prov. xii. 15 ete.; [Pind., Theogn., al.]).* 

ὀρθοτομέω, -; (ὀρθοτόμος cutting straight, and this fr. 
ὀρθός and τέμνωλ) ; 1. to cut straight: tas ὁδούς, to 
cut straight ways, i.e. to proceed by straight paths, 
hold a straight course, equiv. to to do right (for Ww»), 
Prov. iii. 6; xi. 5, (viam secare, Verg. Aen. 6, 899). 2. 
dropping the idea of cutting, to make straight and smooth; 
Vulg. recte tracto, to handle aright: τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀλη- 
θείας, i. 6. to teach the truth correctly and directly, 
2 Tim. ii. 15; τὸν ἀληθῆ λόγον, Eustath. opusce. p. 115, 
41. (Not found elsewhere [exce. in eccles. writ. (W. 26) ; 
e. g. constt. apost. 7, 31 ἐν τ. τοῦ κυρίου δόγμασιν ; cf. 
Suicer ii. 508 sq.]. Cf. καινοτομέω, to cul new veins in 
mining; dropping the notion of cutting, to make some- 
thing new, introduce new things, make innovations or 
changes, ete.) ἢ 

ὀρθρίζω: 3 pers. sing. impf. ὥρθριζεν; (ὄρθρος); not 
found in prof. auth. (Lef. W. 26; 33; 91 (87)]; Moeris 
[p- 272 ed. Pierson] dpOpever ἀττικῶς, ὀρθρίζει ἑλληνικῶς); 
Sept. often for nDvm; (ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 52 
and on Sap. vi. 14); to rise early in the morning: πρός 
τινα, to rise early in the morning in order to betake one’s 
self to one, to resort to one early in the morning, (Vulg. 
manico ad aliquem), Lk. xxi. 38, where see Meyer.* 

ὀρθρινός, -7, -όν, (fr. ὄρθρος ; cf. ἡμερινός, ἑσπερινός, 
ὀπωρινός, mpwivds), a poetic [Anth.] and later form for 
ὄρθριος (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51; Siurz, De dial. 
Maced. et Alex. p. 186; [W. 25]), early: Rev. xxii. 16 
Ree.; Lk. xxiv. 22 LTTrWH. (Hos. vi. 4; Sap. xi. 
23 (22).)* 

ὄρθριος, -a, -ον, (fr. ὄρθρος, q. v.; ef. ὄψιος, rpwios), early; 
rising at the first dawn or very early in the morning: Lk. 
xxiv. 22 RG (Job xxix. 7; 3 Mace. v. 10, 23). Cf. the 
preced. word. [Hom. (h. Mere. 143), Theogn., al.] * 

ὄρθρος, -ov, 6, (fr. OPQ, ὄρνυμε to stir up, rouse; ef. 
Lat. orior, ortus), fr. Hes. down; Sept. for >nw dawn, 
and several times for 193; daybreak, dawn: ὄρθρου Ba- 
θέος or βαθέως (see βαθέως and βαθύς [on the gen. οἵ. W. 
§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26]), at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1; 
ὄρθρου, at daybreak, at dawn, early in the morning, Jn. 
viii. 2 (Hes. opp.575; Sept. Jer. xxv. 45 xxxiii. (xxvi.) 
5, etc.) ; ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον, Acts v. 21 (Dio Cass. 76, 17).* 

ὀρθῶς, (ὀρθός), adv., rightly: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii. 43; 
x. 28; xx. 21. [Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.]* 

ὁρίζω; 1 aor. ὥρισα; Pass., pf. ptep. ὡρισμένος ; 1 aor. 
ptep. ὁρισθείς ; (fr. ὅρος a boundary, limit) ; fr. [Aeschyl. 
and] Hdt. down; to define: i 6. 1. to mark out the 
boundaries or limits (of any place or thing): Hadt., Xen., 
Thuce., al.; Num. xxxiv. 6; Josh. xiii. 27. . 2. to de- 
termine, appoint: with an ace. of the thing, ἡμέραν, Heb. 


Not found elsewhere; [ef. W. 26; 102 


453 


ὅρμημα 


iv. 7; καιρούς, Acts xvii. 26, (numerous exx. fr. Grk. 
auth. are given in Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 1 p. 538 sq.); 
pass. ὡρισμένος, ‘ determinate,’ settled, Acts ii. 23; τὸ 
ὡρισμ. that which hath been determined, ace. to appointment, 
decree, Lk. xxii. 22; with an ace. of pers. Acts xvii. 31 
(ᾧ by attraction for ὅν [W. § 24,1; B. ὃ 143, 8]); pass. 
with a pred. nom. Ro. i. 4 (for although Christ was the 
Son of God before his resurrection, yet he was openly 
appointed [A.V. declared] such among men by this tran- 
scendent and crowning event) ; ὁρίζω, to ordain, determine, 
appoint, Acts x. 42; foll. by an inf. Acts xi. 29 (Soph. fr. 
19d. [i. e. Aegeus (539), viii. p. 8 ed. Brunck]). [Comp.: 
ἀφ-, ἀποτδι-, mpo-opi¢a. ]* 

[ὀρινός, see ὀρεινός.] 

ὅριον, -ου, τό, (fr. ὅρος [boundary 7), [fr. Soph. down], 
a bound, limit, in the N. T. always in plur. (like Lat. 
fines) boundaries, [R. V. borders], i. q. region, district, land, 
territory: Mt. ii. 16; iv. 13; vill. 34; xv. 22,39; xix. 1; 
Mk. v. 17; vii. 24 L T Tr WH, 31; x.1; Acts xiii. 50. 
(Sept. very often for 5333; several times for 9122.) = 

ὁρκίζω ; (ὅρκος); 1. to force to take an oath, to 
administer an oath to: Xen. conviv. 4, 10; Dem., Polyb.; 
cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 361. 2. to adjure, (solemnly 
implore), with two ace. of pers., viz. of the one who is 
adjured and of the one by whom he is adjured (cf. Mat- 
thiae § 413, 10; [B. 147 (128)]): 1 Th. v. 27 RG (see 
ἐνορκίζω) ; Mk. v. 7; Acts xix. 13. (Sept. for jr3wi, 
τινά foll. by κατά w. gen., 1 K. ii. (iii.) 42; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 
13; ἐν, Neh. xiii. 25.) [Comp.: ἐν-» ἐξορκίζω. " 

ὅρκος, -ov, 6, (fr. ἔργω, eipyw; i. q. ἕρκος an enclosure, 
confinement; hence Lat. orcus), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 
for y33W, an oath: Mt. xiv. 7,9; xxvi. 72; Mk. vi. 26; 
Lk. i. 73 [W. 628 (583); B. § 144,13]; Acts ii. 30 [W. 
226 (212); 603 (561)]; Heb. vi. 16sq.; Jas. v. 12; by 
meton. that which has been pledged or promised with an 
oath; plur. vows, Mt. v. 33 [(cf. Wiinsche ad loe.)].* 

Spkwpocla, -as, 7, (ὁρκωμοτέω [ὅρκος and ὄμνυμι]; cf. 
ἀπωμοσία, ἀντωμοσία), affirmation made on oath, the take 
ing of an oath, an oath: Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21, 28. (Ezek. 


xvii. 18; 1 Esdr. viii. 90 (92); Joseph. antt. 16,6,2. Cf. 
Delitzsch, Com. on Heb. 1. ec.) * 
ὁρμάω, -@: 1 aor. ὥρμησα; (fr. ὁρμή); 1. trans. 


to set in rapid motion, stir up, incite, urge on; so fr. Hom. 
down. 2. intrans. to start forward impetuously, to 
rush, (so fr. Hom. down) : εἴς τι, Mt. vili. 32; Mk. v. 13; 
Lk. viii. 33; Acts xix. 29; ἐπί τινα, Acts vil. 57.* 

ὁρμή, -ῆς, ἡ, [fr. τ. sar to go, flow; Fick i. p. 227; Cur- 
tius § 502], fr. Hom. down, a violent motion, impulse: Jas. 
iii. 4; a hostile movement, onset, assault, Acts xiv. 5 [cf. 
Trench § Ixxxvii.].* 

ὅρμημα, -ros, τό, (Sppdw), a rush, impulse: Rev. xviii. 
21 [here A. V. violence]. (For 7133) outburst of wrath, 
Am. i. 11; Hab. iii. 8, ef. Schleusner, Thesaur. iv. p. 123; 
an enterprise, venture, Hom. Il. 2, 356, 590, although in- 
terpreters differ about its meaning there [ef. Ebeling, 
Lex. Hom. or L. and S. s. v.]; that to which one is impelled 
or hurried away by impulse, [rather, incitement, stimulus], 
Plut. mor. [de virt. mor. § 12] p. 452c.)* 


ὄρνεον 


454 


ὅς 


ὄρνεον, -ου, τό, abird: Rev. xviii. 2; xix.17,21. (Sept.; | Mt. xiii. 8; ᾧ (masc.) μὲν... ἄλλῳ (δὲ)... ἑτέρῳ δέ [but 


Hom., Thue., Xen., Plat., Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 5.)* 

ὄρνιξ [so codd. 8 D], i.g. ὄρνις (4. v.): Lk. xiii. 34 Taf. 
The nom. is not found in prof. writ., but the trisyllabie 
forms ὄρνιχος, ὄρνιχι for ὄρνιθος, etc., are used in Doric ; 
[Photius (ed. Porson, p. 348, 22) Ἴωνες ὄρνιξ .. . καὶ 
Δωριεῖς ὄρνιξ. Cf. Curtius p. 495." 

ὄρνις, -ιθος, 6, ἡ. (OPQ, ὄρνυμι [see ὄρθρος); 1. a 
bird ; so fr. Hom. down. 2. spec. a cock, a hen: Mt. 
xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 [Tdf. ὄρνιξ, q. ν.]; (so Aeschyl. 
Eum. 866; Xen. an. 4, 5, 25; Theoer., Polyb. 12, 26,1; 
[al3)-* 

ὁροθεσία, -as, 7, (fr. ὁροθέτης ; and this fr. ὅρος [a boun- 
dary ; see ὅριον], and τίθημι); a. prop. a setting of 
boundaries, laying down limits. b. a definite limit; 
plur. bounds, Acts xvii. 26. (Eccl. writ.; [W. 25].) * 

ὄρος, -ovs, τό, (OPQ, ὄρνυμι [i. 6. a rising; see ὄρθρος ]), 
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 19, @ mountain: Mt. v. 14; 
Lk. iii. 5; Rev. vi. 14, and often; τὸ ὄρος, the moun- 
tain nearest the place spoken of, the mountain near by 
[but see 6, II. 1 b.], Mt. v.1; Mk. iii. 13 ; Lk. ix. 28; Jn. 
vi. 3,15; plur. ὄρη, Mt. xviii. 12; xxiv. 16; Mk. v.5; Rev. 
vi. 16, ete.; gen. plur. ὀρέων (on this uncontracted form, 
used also in Attic, ef. Bim. Gram. § 49 note 3; W. § 9, 
2c.; [B. 14 (13); Dindorf in Fleckeisen’s Jahrb. for 
1869 p.83]), Rev. vi. 15; ὄρη μεθιστάνειν a proverb. phrase, 
used also by rabbin. writ., to remove mountains, 1. 6. to 
accomplish most difficult, stupendous, meredible things: 1 
Co. xiii. 2, ef. Mt. xvii. 20; xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23. 

ὀρύσσω: 1 aor. dpvéa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 15m, 
75, ete.; to dig: to make τί by digging, Mk. xii. 1; ri 
ἔν τινι, Mt. xxi. 33; i.q.to make a pit, ἐν τῇ γῇ, Mt. xxv. 
18 [here T Tr WII ὀρ. γῆν]. [Comp.: 8+, e&optace. |* 

ὀρφανός, -1, -dv, (OPPOS, Lat. orbus; [Curtius § 404]), 
fr. Hom. Od. 20, 68 down, Sept. for ayn; berefi (of a 
father, of parents), Jas. i. 27 [A. V. fatherless]; of those 
bereft of a teacher, guide, guardian, Jn. xiv. 18 (Lam. 
Vs 3)." 

ὀρχέομαι, -οὔμαι: 1 aor. ὠρχησάμην ; (fr. χορός, by trans- 
position ὀρχύς ; cf. ἅρπω, ἁρπάζω, and Lat. rapio, μορφὴ 
and Lat. forma; [but these supposed transpositions are 
extremely doubtful, ef. Curtius $189; Fick iv. 207, 167. 
Some connect ὀρχέομαι with r. argh ‘to put in rapid mo- 
tion’; οἵ. Vanitek p. 597); to dance: Mt. xi. 17; xiv. 6; 
Mk. vi. 22; Lk. vii. 32. (From Hom. down; Sept. for 
ἼΡ 1 Chr. xv. 29; Ecclus. iii. 4; 2 5. vi. 21.)* 

ὅς, 7], 6, the postpositive article, which has the force of 

I. a demonstrative pronoun, this, that, (Lat. hic, 
haec, hoc; Germ. emphat. der, die, das) ; in the N. T. only 
in the foll. instances: ὃς δέ, but he (Germ. er aber), Jn. v. 
11 L Tr WH; [Mk. xv. 23 T Trtxt. WH; cf. B. § 126, 2]; 
in distributions and distinctions: ὃς pév.. . ds δέ, this 
Prantl One. <= .. the other, Mt. xxi. 35; 
xxii. 5 L T Tr WH; xxv. 15; Lk. xxiii.335; Acts xxvii. 
44; Ro. xiv. 5; 1 Co. vii.7 RG; xi. 21; 2Co. ii. 16; Jude 
. . the other, Ro. ix. 21; [ὃ μὲν 
some, Mt. xiii. 23 L 
. ὃ δέ, Some... some... 


another, the one. 


22; ὃ pev... ὃ δέ, the one. 
-66€..- 


TWH]; ὁ δὲ... 


ὃ δέ, some...some... 


ὃ δὲ.. some, 


LT Tr WHom. this δέ] κτλ. 1 Co. xii. 8-10; ὃ μὲν... ἄλλο 
δέ [Ltxt. T Tr WH καὶ ἄλλο], Mk. iv. 4; with a variation 
of the construction also in the foll. pass. : ὃ pév... καὶ 
ἕτερον, Lk. viii. 5; ods μέν with the omission of ods δέ by 
anacoluthon, 1 Co. xii. 28; ὃς μὲν... ὁ δὲ ἀσθενῶν etc. 
- but he that is weak ete. Ro. xiv. 2. On this 
use of the pronoun, chiefly by later writers from De- 
mosth. down, cf. Matthiae § 289 Anm. 7; Kiihner § 518, 
4b. ii. p. 780; [Jelf § 816, 3 b.]; Bitm. Gram. § 126, 3; 
B. 101 (89); W. 105 (100); Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507. 
II. arelative pronoun who, which, what; ibs 
in the common constr., ace. to which the relative 
agrees as respects its gender with the noun or pron. 
which is its antecedent, but as respects case is governed 
by its own verb, or by a substantive, or by a preposition : 
ὁ ἀστὴρ ὃν εἶδον, Mt. ii. 9; 6. . ᾿Ιουδαῖος, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος κτλ. 


one man .. 


Ro. ii. 29; οὗτος περὶ οὗ ἐγὼ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα, Lk. ix. 9 ; ἀπὸ 
τῆς ἡμέρας, ἀφ᾽ ἧς, Acts xx. 18; θεὸς δι᾽ οὗ, ἐξ οὗ, 1 Co. viii. 
6, and numberless other exx. it refers to a more remote 
noun in 1 Co. i. 8, where the antecedent of ὅς is not the 
nearest noun ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, but τῷ θεῷ in 4; yet cf. W. 
157 (149); as in this passage, so very often elsewhere 
the relative is the subject of its own clause: ἀνὴρ ὅς etc. 
Jas. i. 12; πᾶς ὅς, Lk. xiv. 33; οὐδεὶς ὅς, Mk. x. 29; Lk. 
xviii. 29, and many other exx. 2. in constructions 
peculiar in some respect ; a. the gender of the rel- 
ative is sometimes made to conform to that of the follow- 
ing noun: τῆς αὐλῆς, 6 ἐστι πραιτώριον, Mk. xv. 16; Aap- 
mades, ἅ εἰσι (1, ἐστιν) τὰ πνεύματα, Rey. iv. 5 [LT WH]; 
σπέρματι, ὅς ἐστι Χριστός, Gal. iii. 16; add, Eph.i. 14 [L 
WH txt. Tr mrg. 6]; vi. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 15; Rev. v. 8 [T 
WH mre. 4]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 708; Matthiae § 440 
p- 989 sq.; W. § 24, 3; B. § 143, 3. b. in construc- 
tions ad sensum [ef. B. $143, 4]; α. the plural of 
the relative is used after collective nouns in the sing. [cf 
W. § 21, 3; B.u.s.]: πλῆθος πολύ, ot ἦλθον, Lk. vi. 17; 
πᾶν τὸ πρεσβυτέριον, παρ᾽ ὧν, Acts xxii. 53 γενεᾶς, ἐν ois, 
Phil. ii. 15. 
ταύτην δευτέραν ὑμῖν γράφω ἐπιστολήν, ἐν ais (because the 
preceding context conveys the idea of two Epistles), 
2Pet.iii.1. 5... the gender of the relative is conformed 
not to the grammatical but to the natural gender of 
its antecedent [ef. W. § 21,2; B.u.s.]: παιδάριον ὅς, Jn. 
vi. 9 LT Tr WH; θηρίον ὅς, of Nero, as antichrist, Rev. 
xiii. 14 L T Tr WH; κεφαλὴ ὅς, of Christ, Col. ii. 19; [add 
μυστήριον ὅς ete. 1 Tim. iii. 16 GL T Tr WH; ef. B.u.s.; 
W. 588 sq. (547)]; σκεύη (of men) οὖς, Ro. ix. 24; ἔθνη 
οἵ, Acts χν. 17; xxvi. 17; τέκνα, rexvia οἵ, Jn. i. 13; Gal. iv. 
19; 2Jn.1, (Eur. suppl. 12); τέκνον ὅς, Philem.10. ο. 
In attractions [B. § 143, 8; W.§§ 24,1; 66, 4 sqq.]; 
a. the accusative of the rel. pron. depending on a trans. 
verb is changed by attraction into the oblique case of its 
antecedent: κτίσεως ἧς ἔκτισεν ὁ θεός, Mk. xiii. 19 [RG]; 
τοῦ ῥήματος οὗ εἶπεν, Mk. xiv. 72 [Rec.]; add, Jn. iv. 14; 
vii. 31, 39 [but Tr mrg. WH mrg. 6]; xv. 20; xxi. 10; 
Acts iii. 21, 25; vil. 17,45; ix. 36; x. 39; xxii. 10; Ro. 
xv. 18; 1Co.vi. 19; 2Co.i. 6; x.8,13; Eph. i. 8; Tit. 


- ἪΡ 
β. κατὰ πᾶσαν πόλιν, ἐν ais, Acts xv. 36; 


ὅς 455 ὅς 


iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 
24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώ- 
oxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; 
add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; 
Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. 
xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attrac- 
tion oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see 
below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre 
θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς 
ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), 
Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε 
πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς 
τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα 
οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; 
Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐ- 
δεμίαν λήψει χάριν, for παρὰ τούτων, οἷς κτὰ. Aeschin. f. 
lex. p. 48 (117); ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 237; 
[B. § 143, 11; W. 163 (154) sq.; but others refuse to 
recognize this rare species of attraction in the N. T.; cf. 
Meyer on Eph. i. 8]). The foll. expressions, however, 
can hardly be brought under this construction: τῆς χάρι- 
τος ἧς ἐχαρίτωσεν (as if for 7), Eph. i. 6 LT Tr WH; τῆς 
κλήσεως, ἧς ἐκλήθητε, Eph. iv. 1; διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς 
παρακαλούμεθα, 2 Co. i. 4, but must be explained agree- 
ably to such phrases as χάριν χαριτοῦν, κλῆσιν καλεῖν, etc., 
[(. e. aceus. of kindred abstract subst.; ef. W. § 32, 2; B. 
§ 131, 5)]; ef. W.[and B.u.s.]. β. The noun to which 
the relative refers is so conformed to the case of the rela- 
tive clause that either aa. it is itself incorporated 
into the relative construction, but without the article [B. 
§143,7; W. § 24, 2b.]: ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα ᾿Ιωάννην, οὗτος 
ἠγέρθη, for ᾿Ιωάννης, ὃν κτλ. Mk. vi. 16; add, Lk. xxiv. 1; 
Philem. 10; Ro. vi. 17; εἰς ἣν οἰκίαν, ἐκεῖ, i. 4. ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ, εἰς 
ἥν, Lk. ix. 4: or BB. it is placed before the rela- 
tive clause, either with or without the article [W. § 24, 
2a.; B.§ 144, 13]: τὸν ἄρτον ὃν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ 
σώματος, 1 Co. x. 16; λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦν- 
τες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη (for ὁ λίθος, ὃς κτλ.), Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. 
xii. 10; Lk-xx. 17; 1 Pet. i. 7. y- Attraction in the 
phrases ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας for ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας, 7 [W. § 24, 1 
fin.]: Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2; ἀφ᾽ 
ἧς ἡμέρας for ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμέρας, 7, Col. i. 6, 9; ὃν τρόπον, as, 
just as, for τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ὅν or ᾧ, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 
34; Acts vii. 28 ; [preceded or] foll. by οὕτως, Acts i. 11; 
2 Tim. iii. 8. δ. A noun common to both the principal 
clause and the relative is placed in the relative clause 
after the relative pron. [W. 165 (156)]: ἐν ᾧ κρίματι 
κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε, for κριθ. ἐν τῷ κρίματι, ἐν ᾧ κρίνετε, 
Mt. vii. 2; xxiv. 44; Mk. iv. 24; Lk. xii. 40, ete. 3. 
The Neutero a. refers to nouns of the masculine 
and the feminine gender, and to plurals, when that which 
is denoted by these nouns is regarded as a thing [οἵ. 
Β. § 129, 6]: λεπτὰ δύο, 6 ἐστι κοδράντης, Mk. xii. 42; 
ἀγάπην, 6 ἐστι σύνδεσμος, Col. iii. 14 L T Tr WH; ἄρτους, 
6 ete. Mt. xii. 4 L txt. T Tr WH. b. is used in the 
phrases [B. u.s.]— 6 ἐστιν, which (term) signifies: Boa- 
vepyés 6 ἐστιν υἱοὶ Bp. Mk. iii. 17; add, v. 41; vii-11, 34; 


i. 23; Mk. xv. 34; Jn. i. 38 (39), 41 (42) sq.; ix. 7; xx. 
16. c. refers to a whole sentence [B. u.s.]: τοῦτον 
ἀνέστησεν ὁ θεός, οὗ .. . ἐσμὲν μάρτυρες, Acts ii. 32; iii. 
15; περὶ ov . .. ὁ λόγος, Heb. v. 11; ὃ καὶ ἐποίησαν (and 
the like), Acts xi. 30; Gal. ii. 10; Col. i. 29; 6 (which 
thing viz. that I write a new commandment [cf. B. § 143, 
87) ἐστιν ἀληθές, 1 Jn. 11. 8; 6 (sc. to have one’s lot as- 
signed in the lake of fire) ἐστιν ὁ θάνατος ὁ δεύτερος, Rev. 
xxi. 8. 4. By an idiom to be met with from Hom. 
down, in the second of two codrdinate clauses a pro- 
noun of the third person takes the place of the relative 
(cf. Passow ii. p. 552°; [L. and S.s. v. B. 1V.1]; B.§ 143, 
6; [W. 149 (141)]): ὃς ἔσται ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος καὶ τὰ σκεύη 
αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ μὴ καταβάτω, Lk. xvii. 31; ἐξ οὗ τὰ πάντα 
καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν, 1 Co. viii. 6. 5. Sometimes, by a 
usage esp. Hebraistic, an oblique case of the pronoun 
αὐτός is introduced into the relative clause redundantly ; 
as, ἧς τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς, Mk. vii. 25; see αὐτός, II. 5. 6. 
The relative pron. very often so includes the demonstra- 
tive οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος that for the sake of perspicuity a 
demons. pron. must be in thought supplied, either in 
the clause preceding the relative clause or in that which 
follows it [W. § 23, 2; B. 8137, 5]. The foll. examples 
may suffice: a. a demons. pron. must be added in 
thought in the preceding clause: οἷς ἡτοίμασται, for 
τούτοις δοθήσεται, ois Wr. Mt. xx. 23; δεῖξαι (sc. ταῦτα), 
ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι, Rev. 1.1; xxii. 6; 6 for ἐκεῖνος ᾧ, Lk. vii. 
43,47; ov for τούτῳ ov, Ro. x. 14; with the attraction of 
ὧν for τούτων ἅ, Lk. ix. 36; Ro. χν. 18 ; ὧν for ταῦτα ὧν, 
Mt. vi. 8; with a prep. intervening, ἔμαθεν ἀφ᾽ ὧν (for 
ἀπὸ τούτων ἃ) ἔπαθεν, Heb. v. 8. Ὄ. a demons. pron. 
must be supplied in the subsequent clause: Mt. x. 38; 
Mk. ix. 40; Lk. iv.6; ix. 50; Jn. xix. 22; Ro. ii. 1,and 
often. 7. Sometimes the pur pose and end is ex- 
pressed in the form of a relative clause (cf. the Lat. qui 
for ut is): ἀποστέλλω ἄγγελον, ὃς (for which Lehm. in Mt. 
has καί) κατασκευάσει. who shall ete. i. q. that he may ete., 
Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; [1 Co. ii. 16]; so also in 
Grk. auth., cf. Passow 8. v. VIII. vol. ii. p. 553; [L. and 
S.s.v. B. IV.4]; Matthiae § 481, d.; [Kithner ὃ 563, 3 b.; 
Jelf § 836, 4; B. § 139, 32];—or the cause: ὃν παρα- 
δέχεται, because he acknowledges him as his own, Heb. 
xii. 6 ;— or the relative stands where ὥστε might be used 
(cf. Matthiae § 479 a.; Kriiger § 51, 13, 10; [Kiihner 
§ 563, 8 6.7; Passow s. v. VIII. 2, ii. p. 553°; [L. and 5. 
u.s.]): Lk. v. 21; vii. 49. 8. For the interrog. ris, 
τί, in indirect questions (ef. Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. 372; 
[ef. B. § 139, 587) : οὐκ ἔχω ὃ παραθήσω, Lk. xi. 6; by a 
later Grk. usage, in a direct quest. (cf. W. § 24, 4; B. 
§ 139, 59): ἐφ᾽ ὃ (or Ree. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ) πάρει, Mt. xxvi. 50 (on 
which [and the more than doubtful use of és in direct 
quest.] see ἐπί, B. 2 a. ¢. p. 233” and C. I. 2 g. y. aa. p. 
235°). 9. Joined to a preposition it forms a 
periphrasis for a conjunction [B. 105 (92)]: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, for 
ἀντὶ τούτων ort, — because, Lk. i. 20; xix. 44; Acts xii. 23; 
2 Th. ii. 10; for which reason, wherefore, Lk. xii. 3 (see 
dvri,2d.); ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for that, since (see ἐπί, B. 2a. 8. p. 233°); 


Heb. vii. 2; 6 ἐστι μεθερμηνευόμενον, and the like: Mt. | ἀφ᾽ οὗ, (from the *ime that), when, since, Lk. xiii. 25 


ὑσώκις 


xxiv. 21, [see ἀπό, I. 4 b. p. 5857; ἄχρις οὗ, see ἄχρι, 1 ἃ.; 
ἐξ οὗ, whence, Phil. iii. 20 cf. W. 821,8; [Β.8.148,4.Δ.7; 
ἕως ov, until (see ἕως, 11. 1 Ὁ. a. p. 268”); also μέχρις οὗ, 
Mk. xiii. 30; ἐν 6, while, Mk. ii. 19; Lk. v.34; Jn. v. 7; 
ἐν οἷς, meanwhile, Lk. xii. 1; [οἷς ἐν, I. 8 e.]. 10. 
With particles: ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, whosoever, if any one 
ever, see ἄν, II. 2 and ἐάν, II. p. 163°; οὗ ἐάν, whereso- 
ever (whithersoever) with subjunc., 1 Co. xvi. 6 [ef. B. 105 
(92)]. ὅς ye, see γέ, 3. ὃς καί, who also, he who, (cf. 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 636): Mk. iii. 19; Lk. vi. 13 sq. ; 
x. 39 [here WH br. 7]; Jn. xxi. 20; Acts i.11; vii. 45; 
x. 39 [Rec. om. καί]; xii. 4; xiii. 225 xxiv. 6; Ro. v. 2; 1 
Co. xi. 23 ; 2 Co. iii. 6; Gal. ii. 10; Heb. i. 2, ete.; ὃς καὶ 
αὐτός, who also himself, who as well as others: Mt. xxvii. 
57. ὃς δήποτε, whosoever, Jn. v. 4 Rec.; ὅσπερ [or ὅς περ 
L Tr txt.], who especially, the very one who (cf. Kloiz ad 
Devar. ii. 2 p. 724): Mk. xv. 6 [but here T WH Tr mrg. 
now read ὃν παρῃτοῦντο, q. V. |. 11. The genitive οὗ, 
used absolutely [ef. W. 590 (549) note; Jelf § 522, Obs. 1], 
becomes an adverb (first so in Attic writ., cf. Passow II. 
p. 546"; [Meisterhans § 50, 17); a. where (Lat. 
ubi): Mt. ii. 9; xviii.20; Lk. iv. 16 sq.; xxiii. 53; Acts 
i. 135 xii. 125; xvi. 13; xx.6[T Trmrg. ὅπου]; xxv. 10; 
xxviii. 14; Ro. iv. 15; ix. 26; 2 Co. iii. 17; Col. iii. 1; 
Heb. iii. 9; Rev. xvii. 15; after verbs denoting motion 
(see ἐκεῖ, b.; ὅπου, 1 b.) it ean be rendered whither [cf. 
W. 8.54, 7; B. 71 (62)], Mt. xxviii. 16; Lk. χ. 1; xxiv. 
28; 1 Co. xvi. 6. Ὁ. when (like Lat. ubi i.qg. 60 
tempore quo, quom): Ro. v. 20 (Eur. Iph. Taur. 320), 
[but al. take οὗ in Ro. ]. 6. locally]. 
ὁσάκις, (ὅσος), relative adv., as often as; with the ad- 
dition of ἄν, as often soever as, 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. [RG; cf. 
W. 8 42, 5a.; B. § 139, 34]; also of ἐάν, [LT Tr WH 
in 1 Co. l.e.]; Rev. xi. 6. [(Lys., Plat., al.)]* 
ὅσγε, for ds ye, see γέ, 2. 
ὅσιος, -a, -ov, and once (1 Tim. ii. 8) of two termina- 
tions (as in Plato, legg. 8 p. 831 d.; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 
71 fin.; cf. W. 5. 11, 1; B. 26 (23); the fem. occurs in 
the N. T. only in the passage cited); fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hat. down; Sept. chiefly for ὙΠ (cf. Grimm, Exst. 
Hdbch. on Sap. p. 81 [and reff. s. v. ἅγιος, fin.]) ; un- 
defiled by sin, free from wickedness, religiously observing 
every moral obligation, pure, holy, pious, (Plato, Gorg. 
p- 507 b. περὶ μὲν ἀνθρώπους τὰ προσήκοντα πράττων 
δίκαι᾽ ἂν πράττοι. περὶ δὲ θεοὺς ὅσια. The distinction 
between δίκαιος and ὅσιος is given in the same way by 
Polyb. 23, 10, 8; Schol. ad Eurip. Hee. 788; Charit. 1, 
10; [for other exx. see Trench § Ixxxviii.; Wetstein on 
Eph. iv. 24; but on its applicability to N. T. usage see 
Trench u. s.; indeed Plato elsewh. (Euthyphro p. 19 6.) 
makes δίκαιος the generic and ὅσιος the specific 
term]); of men: Tit. i. 8; Heb. vii. 26; of ὅσιοι τοῦ θεοῦ, 
-the pious towards God, God’s pious worshippers, (Sap. 
iv. 15 and often in the Psalms); so in a peculiar and 
pre-eminent sense of the Messiah [A. V. thy Holy One]: 
Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35, after Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10; χεῖρες (Aes- 
chyl. cho. 378; Soph. O. C. 470), 1 Tim. ii. 8. of God, 
holy: Rev. xv. 4; xvi. 5, (also in prof. auth. occasion- 


456 


ὕσος 


ally of the gods; Orph. Arg. 27; hymn. 77, 2; of God 
in Deut. xxxii. 4 for Ww; Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 17 for Ton, 
cf. Sap. v. 19); τὰ ὅσια Δαυΐδ, the holy things (of God) 
promised to David, i. e. the Messianic blessings, Acts 
xiii. 34 fr. Is. lv. 3.* 

ὁσιότης, -nTos, ἡ, (ὅσιος), piely towards God, fidelity in 
observing the obligations of piety, holiness: joined with 
δικαιοσύνη (see ὅσιος [and δικαιοσύνη, 1b.]): Lk. i. 75; 
Eph. iv. 24; Sap. ix. 3; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,4. (Xen., 
Plat., Isoer., al.; Sept. for w>, Deut. ix. 5; for pA, 1 K. ix. 
4.) [Meinke in St. u. Krit. "84 p. 743; Schmidt ch. 181.]* 

ὁσίως, (ὅσιος), [fr. Eur. down], adv., piously, holily: 
joined with δικαίως, 1 Th. ii. 10 (ἁγνῶς καὶ ὁσίως x. δι- 
καίως, Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7).* 

ὀσμή, -7s, ἡ, (ὄζω [q. v.]), a smell, odor: In. xii. 3; 
2 Co. ii. 14; θανάτου (1, Τὶ Tr WH ἐκ θαν.), such an odor 
as is emitted by death (i. 6. by a deadly, pestiferous 
thing, a dead body), and itself causes death, 2 Co. ii. 
16; ζωῆς (or ἐκ ζωῆς) such as is diffused (or emitted) by 
life, and itself imparts life, ibid. [A. V. both times 
savor]; ὀσμὴ εὐωδίας, Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18; see εὐω- 
dia, Ὁ. (Tragg., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.; in Hom. ὀδμή; 
Sept. for m7.) * 

ὅσος, -η, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], a relative adj. corre- 
sponding to the demon. τοσοῦτος either expressed or un- 
derstood, Lat. quantus, -a,-um; used a. of space 
[as great as]: τὸ μῆκος αὐτῆς (Rec. adds τοσοῦτόν ἐστιν) 
ὅσον καὶ [ἃ Τ' Tr WH om. καί] τὸ πλάτος, Rev. xxi. 16; 
of time [as long as]: ἐφ᾽ ὅσον χρόνον, for so long time 
as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 39; Gal. iv. 1; also 
without a prep., ὅσον χρόνον, Mk. ii. 19; neut. ἐφ᾽ ὅσον, 
as long as, Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet. i. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 8, 25); 
ἔτι μικρὸν ὅσον ὅσον, yet a Little how very, how very, (Vulg. 
modicum [ali |quantulum), i. e. yet a very little while, Heb. 
x. 37 (Is. xxvi. 20; of a very little thing, Arstph. vesp. 
213; οἵ. Herm. ad Vig. p. 726 no. 93; W. 247 (231) 
note; B. § 150, 2). b. of abundance and mul- 
titude; how many, as many as; how much, as much as: 
neut. ὅσον, Jn. vi. 11; plur. ὅσοι, as many (men) as, all 
who, Mt. xiv. 36; Mk. iii. 10; Acts iv. 6, 34; xiii. 48; 
Ro. ii. 12; vi. 3; Gal. 111: 10,27; Phil. iii. 15; 1 Tim. vi. 
1; Rev. ii. 24; ὅσαι ἐπαγγελίαι, 2 Co. i. 20; ὅσα ἱμάτια, 
Acts ix. 39; neut. plur., absol. [A. V. often whatsocver], 
Mt. xvii. 12; Mk. x. 21; Lk. xi. 8; xii. 3; Ro. iii. 19; xv. 
4; Jude10; Rev.i.2. πάντες ὅσοι, [all as many as], 
Mt. xxii. 10 [here T WH π. ovs]; Lk. iv. 40; Jn. x. 8; 
Acts ν. 36 sq.; neut. πάντα ὅσα [all things whatsoever, all 
that], Mt. xiii. 46 ; xviii. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44; Lk. 
xviil. 22; Jn. iv. 29[T WH Tr mrg. π. 4], 39 [T WH Tr 
txt. π. ἅ7; πολλὰ ὅσα, Jn. xxi. 25 RG, (Hom. Il. 22, 380; 
Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 8). ὅσοι... οὗτοι, Ro. viii. 14; ὅσα 

ον ταῦτα, Phil. iv. 8; dca... ἐν τούτοις, Jude 10; ὅσοι 

. αὐτοί, Jn. i. 12; Gal. vi. 16. ὅσοι ἄν or ἐάν, how many 
soever, as many soever as [ef. W. § 42, 3]; foll. by an 
indic. pret. (see ἄν, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56; by an indie. pres. 
Rey. iii. 19; by a subjune. aor., Mt. xxii. 9; Mk. iii. 28; 
vi.11; Lk. ix. 5 [Ree.]; Acts ii. 39 [here Lehm. ods ἄν]; 
Rev. xiii. 154 ὅσα ἄν, Mt. xviii. 18; Jn. xi. 22; xvi. 13 


“ 
οσπερ 


[RG]; πάντα ὅσα ἄν, all things whatsoever: foll. by sub- 
junc. pres. Mt. vii. 12; by subjune. aor., Mt. xxi. 22; 
xxiii. 3; Acts iii. 22. ὅσα in indirect dise.; how many 
things: Lk.ix. 10; Acts ix. 16; xv. 12; 2 Tim.i.18. c. 
of importance: ὅσα, how great things, i. 6. how ex- 
traordinary, in indir. dise., Mk. iii. 8 [Lmrg. 4]; v. 
19 sq.; Lk. viii. 39; Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4, [al. take it of 
num ber in these last two exx. how many; cf. b. above]; 
how great (i. 6. bitter), κακά, Acts ix. 13. d. of 
measure and degree, in comparative sentences, acc. 
neut. ὅσον - - - μᾶλλον περισσότερον, the more... so much 
the more a great deal (A. V.), Mk. vii. 36; καθ᾽ ὅσον 
with a compar., by so much as with the compar. Heb. iii. 
3; καθ᾽ ὅσον ... κατὰ τοσοῦτον [τοσοῦτο 1, T Tr WH], 
Heb. vii. 20, 22; καθ᾽ ὅσον (inasmuch) as foll. by οὕτως, 
Heb. ix. 27; τοσούτῳ with a compar. foll. by ὅσῳ with 
a compar., by so much... as, Heb. i. 4 (Xen. mem. 1, 
4,40; Cyr. 7, 5,5 sq.); without τοσούτῳ, Heb. viii. 6 
ΓΑ. V. by how much]; τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον, ὅσῳ (without 
μᾶλλον), Heb. x. 25; daa... τοσοῦτον, how much... so 
much, Rey. xviii. 7; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον, for as much as, in so far 
as, without ἐπὶ τοσοῦτο, Mt. xxv. 40,45; Ro. xi. 13. 

ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ, See ὅς, 7, 6, 10. 

ὀστέον, contr. ὀστοῦν, gen. -ov, τό, [akin to Lat. os, 
ossis; Curtius § 213, cf. p. 41], a bone: Jn. xix. 36; plur. 
ὀστέα, Lk. xxiv. 39; gen. ὀστέων, (on these uncontr. 
forms cf. [WH. App. p. 157]; W.§ 8, 2d.; [B. p. 13 
(12)]), Mt. xxiii. 27; Eph. v. 30 [RG Tr mrg. br.]; Heb. 
xi. 22. (From Hom. down; Sept. very often for oxy.) ἢ 

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ,τι (separated by a hypodiastole [comma], 
to distinguish it from ὅτε; but L T Tr write 6 τι, without 
a hypodiastole [ef. Td. Proleg. p. 111], leaving a little 
space between 6 and τι; [WH ὅτι]; cf. W. 46 (45 sq.); 
[Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 118 sq.; WH. Intr. 
§ 4117), gen. οὕτινος (but of the oblique cases only the 
acc. neut. ὅ,τι and the gen. ὅτου, in the phrase ἕως ὅτου, 
are found in the N. T.), [fr. Hom. down], comp. of és 
and tis, hence prop. any one who; i.e. 1. whoever, 
every one who: ὅστις simply, in the sing. chiefly at the 
beginning of a sentence in general propositions, esp. in 
Matt. ; w. an indic. pres., Mt. xiii. 12 (twice); Mk. viii. 
34 (where L Tr WH εἴ τις); Lk. xiv. 27; neut. Mt. xviii. 
28 Rec.; w. a fut., Mt. v. 39 [RG Trmrg.], 41; xxiii. 
12, ete.; Jas. ii. 10 RG; plur. οἵτινες, whosoever (all those 
who): w. indic. pres., Mk. iv. 20; Lk. viii. 15; Gal. v. 4; 
w. indic. aor., Rev. i. 7; ii. 24; xx.43 πᾶς ὅστις, w. indic. 
pres. Mt. vii. 24; w. fut. Mt. x. 32; doris w. subjunc. 
(where ἄν is wanting very rarely [οἵ. W. § 42, 3 (esp. 
fin.); B. § 139, 317) aor. (having the force of the fut. 
pf. in Lat.), Mt. xviii. 4 Rec.; Jas. ii. 10 LT Tr WH. 
ὅστις ἄν w. subjunc. aor. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mt. x. 33 [RG 
ΤΊ; xii. 50; w. subjune. pres. Gal. v. 10 [ἐάν T Tr WH]; 
neut. w. subjunc. aor., Lk. x. 35; Jn. xiv. 13 [Trmrg. 
WH mrg. pres. subjunc.]; xv. 16 [Trmrg. WH mrg. 
pres. subjune.]; with subjune. pres., Jn. ii. 5; 1 Co. xvi. 
2[ΤΥ WH ἐάν; WH mrg. aor. subjunc.]; ὃ ἐάν τι for ὅ,τι 
ἄν w. subjune. aor. Eph. vi.8 [RG]; πᾶν ὅ,τι ἄν or ἐάν 
w. subjune. pres., Col. iii. 17, 23 [Rec.; ef. B. § 139, 19; 


457 


ὀσφύ: 


W. § 42,81. 2. it refers to a single person or thing, 
but so that regard is had to a general notion or 
class to which this individual person or thing belongs, 
and thus it indicates quality: one who, such a one as, 
of such a nature that, (cf. Kiihner § 554 Anm. 1, ii. p. 
905; [Jelf § 816, 5]; Liicke on 1 Jn. i. 2, p. 210 sq.): 
ἡγούμενος, ὅστις ποιμανεῖ, Mt. ii. 6; add, Mt. vii. 26; xiii. 
52 xvi. 285 xx. 15 xxv. 05 ΜΕ: xv. 75 ki. 105) vir. 
37; viii. 3; Jn. viii. 25; xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. the vs.]; Acts 
LIMOS ΧΥΪ 19,» ΧΧΙν 1; On 4, 1 (ὅδ! ν' 1: νιν 19 
[Ταῖΐ εἴ rus]; Gal. iv. 24, 26; ν. 19; Phil. ii. 20; Col. ii. 
23; 2 Tim.i.5; Heb. ii. 3; viii. 5; x. 11; xii. 5; Jas. iv. 
14; 1Jn.i. 2; Rev. i. 12; ix. 4; xvii. 12; ὁ ναὸς τοῦ θεοῦ 
ἅγιός ἐστιν, οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς (where oirwes makes refer- 
ence to ἅγιος) and such are ye, 1 Co. iii. 17 [some refer it 
to ναός]. 3. Akin to the last usage is that whereby 
it serves to give a reason, such as equiv. to seeing 
that he, inasmuch as he: Ro. xvi. 12 [here Lchm. br. the 
cl.]; Eph. iii. 13; [Ὁ]. iii. 5]; Heb. viii. 6; plur., Mt. vii. 
ΤῸ: Actsx. 47: ΧΥΙ Ws Rost. 25, 9.2.5 Melos) Ψ]. 2.9 1X 
4; xvi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 10; [Phil. iv. 3 (where see Bp. 
Lghtft.)]; 1 Tim. 1. 4; Tit. 1.11; 1 Pet. ii.11. 4. 
Ace. to a later Greek usage it is put for the interroga- 
tive ris in direct questions (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 57; 
Lachmann, larger ed., vol. i. p. xliii; B. 253 (218); cf. 
W. 167 (158)); thus in the N. T. the neut. 6, τε stands 
for ri i. q. διὰ τί in Mk. ii. 16 T Tr WH [cf. 7 WH mrg.]; 
ix. 11, 28, (Jer. ii. 836; 1 Chr. xvii. 6 —for which in the 
parallel, 2S. vii. 7, ἵνα τί appears; Barnab. ep. 7, 9 
[(where see Miiller); cf. ΤῊ Proleg. p. 125; Evang. 
Nicod. pars i. A. xiv. 3 p. 245 and note; ef. also Soph. 
Lex. s. v. 4]); many interpreters bring in Jn. viii. 25 
here; but respecting it see ἀρχή, 1 b. 5. It differs 
scarcely at all from the simple relative és (cf. Matthiae 
p- 1073; B. § 127,18; [Kriiger § 51,8; Ellicott on Gal. 
iv. 24; ef. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Hdbk. to 
Modern Greek, App. § 24]; but οἵ. C. F. A. Fritzsche 
in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 182 54.» who stoutly denies 
it): Lk. ii. 4; ix. 30; Acts xvii. 10; xxiii. 14; XXVIii. 
18; Eph. i. 23. 6. ws ὅτου, on which see ἕως, II. 
1 b. β. p. 268° mid. 

ὀστράκινος, -7, -ov, (ὄστρακον baked clay), made of 
clay, earthen: σκεύη ὀστράκινα, 2 Tim. il. 20; with the 
added suggestion of frailty, 2 Co. iv. 7. (Jer. xix. 1, 11; 
xxxix. (xxxii.) 14; Is. xxx. 14, ete.; Hippocer., Anthol., 
[al.].) * 

ὄσφρησις, -ews, ἡ, (ὀσφραίνομαι [to smell]), the sense of 
smell, smelling: 1 Co. xii. 17. (Plat. Phaedo p. 111 Ὁ. 
[(yet cf. Stallbaum ad loc.)]; Aristot., Theophr.) * 

ὀσφύς [or -φῦς, so R Tr in Eph. vi. 14; Gin Mt. iii. 4; 
cf. Chandler 88 658, 659; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -vos, ἡ, fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. the hip (loin), as that 
part of the body where the ζώνη was worn (Sept. for 
pm): Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6; hence περιζώννυσθαι τὰς 
ὀσφύας, to gird, gird about, the loins, Lk. xii. 395; Eph. 
vi. 14; and ἀναζώνν. ras ὀσφ. [to gird up the loins], 1 Pet. 
i. 13; on the meaning of these metaph. phrases see dva- 
ζώννυμι. 2. a loin, Sept. several times for oon, 


° 
ταν 


the (two) loins, where the Hebrews thought the genera- 
tive power (semen) resided [?]; hence καρπὸς τῆς ὀσφύος, 
fruit of the loins, offspring, Acts ii. 30 (see καρπός, 
1 fin.); ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος τινός, to come forth out 
of one’s loins i. e. derive one’s origin or descent from 
one, Heb. vii. 5 (see ἐξέρχομαι, 2 b.); ἔτι ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ 
τινός, to be yet in the loins of some one (an ancestor), 
Heb. vii. 10.* 

ὅταν, a particle of time, comp. of ὅτε and ἄν, at the time 
that, whenever, (Germ. dann wann; wann irgend); used 
of things which one assumes will really occur, but 
the time of whose occurrence he does not definitely fix 
(in prof. auth. often also of things which one assumes 
ean occur, but whether they really will or not he does 
not know; hence like our in case that, as in Plato, Prot. 
p- 360 b.; Phaedr. p. 256 e.; Phaedo p. 68 d.); [ef. W. 
§ 42,5; B. ὃ 139, 33]; a. with the subjunctive 
present: Mt. vi. 2,5; x. 23; Mk. xiii. 11 [here Ree. 
aor.]; xiv. 7; Lk. xi. 36; xii. 11; xiv. 12sq.; xxi. 7; 
dn. vil. 27; xvi. 21; Acts xxiii. 35; 1 Co. 1.4; 2 Co. 
xiii. 9; 1 Jn. v. 2; Rev. x. 7; xviii. 9; preceded by a 
specification of time: ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅταν etc., 
Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; foll. by τότε, 1 Th. ν. 3; 1 Co. 
xv. 28; i. q. as often as, of customary action, Mt. xv. 2; 
Jn. viii. 44; Ro. ii. 14; αἱ the time when i. q. as long as, 
Lk. xi. 345 Jn: ix. 5; b. with the subjunctive 
aorist: i. 4. the Lat. quando acciderit, ut w. subjunc. 
pres., Mt. v. 11; xii. 43; xiii. 32; xxiii. 15; xxiv. 32; 
Mk. iv. 15 sq. 29 [R G], 31 sq.; xiii. 28; Lk. vi. 22, 26; 
Vili. 13; xi. 24; xii. 54 sq.; xxi. 30; Jn. ii. 10; x. 4; xvi. 
21; 1 Tim. v. 11 [here Lmmrg. fut.]; Rev. ix. 5. i. q 
quando w. fut. pf., Mt. xix. 28; xxi. 40; Mk. viii. 38; 
ix. 9; xii. 23 [ Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.], 25; Lk. ix. 
26; xvi.4,9; xvil. 10; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 31; xiii. 19; xiv. 
29; xv. 26; xvi. 4, 13, 21; xxi.18; Acts xxiii. 35; xxiv. 
22; Ro. xi. 27; 1 Co. xv. 24 [here LT Tr WH pres. ], 27 
(where the meaning is, ‘when he shall have said that 
the ὑπόταξις predicted in the Psalm is now accom- 
plished’; cf. Meyer ad loc.); xvi. 2 sq. 5, 12; 2Co.x. 
6; Col. iv. 16; 1Jn.ii. 283[LTTr WH ἐάν; 2 Th.i. 10; 
Heb. i. 6 (on which see εἰσάγω, 1); Rev. xi. 7; xii. 4; 
xvii. 10; xx. 7. foll. by τότε, Mt. ix. 15; xxiv. 15; xxv. 
81; Mk. ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v.35; xxi. 20; Jn. viii. 28; 
1 Co. xiii. 10 [G LT Tr WH om. τότε]; xv. 28, 54; Col. 
iii. 4. c. Acc. to the usage of later authors, a 
usage, however, not altogether unknown to the more 
elegant writers (W. 309 (289 sq.); B. 222 (192) sq.; 
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124 sq.; WH. App. p.171; for exx. 
additional to these given by W. and B. τι. s. see Soph. 
Lex. s. v.; ef. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Hdbk. to 
Mod. Grk., App. § 78]), with the indicative; a. 
future: when,{Mt. v.11 Tdf.]; Lk. xiii. 28 T Tr txt. WH 
mrg.; [1 Tim. v. 11 L mrg.]; as often as, Rev. iv. 9 (cf. 
Bleek ad loc.). B. present: Mk. xi. 25 LT Tr 
WH; xiii. 7 Trtxt.; [Lk. xi. 2 Trmrg.]. y- very 
rarely indeed, with the imperfect: as often as, [when- 
soever], ὅταν ἐθεώρουν, Mk. iii. 11 (Gen. xxxviii. 9; Ex. 
xvii. 11; 1S. xvii. 34; see ay, II. 1). δ. As in Byz- 


458 


“ 
οτι 


antine auth. i. q. ὅτε, when, with the indic. aorist: ὅταν 
ἤνοιξεν, Rev. viii. 1 LT Tr WH; [add ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο, 
Mk. xi. 19 T Tr txt. WH, cf. B. 223 (193); but al. take 
this of customary action, whenever evening came (i. 6. 
every evening, KX. V.)]. ὅταν does not occur in the Epp. 
of Peter and Jude. 

ὅτε, a particle of time, [fr. Hom. down], when; ale 
with the Indicative [W. 296 (278) sq.]; indie. pres- 
ent (of something certain and customary, see Herm. ad 
Vig. p. 913 sq.), while: Jn. ix. 4; Heb. ix.17; w. an his- 
torical pres. Mk. xi. 1. w. the imperfect (of a thing 
done on occasion or customary): Mk. xiv. 12; xv. 41; 
Mk. vi. 21 RG; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xii. 6; xxii. 20; Ro. vi. 
20; vii. 5; 1 Co. xiii.11; Gal. iv. 3; Col. iii. 7; 1 Th. iii. 
4; 2 Th. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 20. w. an indice. aorist, Lat. 
quom w. plupf. (W. § 40, 5; [B. § 137, 6]): Mt. ix. 25; 
xiii. 26,48; xvii. 25 [RG]; xxi. 34; Mk. i. 32; iv. 10; 
Vili. 19; xv. 20; Lk. ii. 21 sq. 42; iv. 25; vi. [3 LT WH], 
13; xxii. 14; xxiii. 33; Jn. i. 19; ii. 22; iv. 45 [where 
Tdf. ὡς], ete.; Acts i. 13; viii. 12,39; xi. 2; xxi. 5, 35; 
Xxvil. 39; xxviii. 16; Ro. xiii. 11 (“than when we gave 
in our allegiance to Christ;” Lat. quom Christo nomen 
dedissemus, [R. V. than when we first believed]); Gal. i. 
15; ii. 11, 12,14; iv.4; Phil. iv.15; Heb. vii. 10; Rev. 
i 17; vi. 3, 5, 75:9; 12; vill. 1, δύσι; ‘so.also ΔΉ ἘΠῚ 2» 
Mk. ii. 25; (Jn. xii. 41 R Tr mre. dre εἶδεν, when it had 
presented itself to his sight [but best texts dru: because 
he saw ete.]). ἐγένετο, ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν, a common phrase 
in Mt., viz. vil. 28; xi. 1; xiii. 53; xix.1; xxvi.1. 6re 
... τότε, Mt. xxi.1; Jn. xii. 16. w. the indice. perfect, 
since [R. V. now that I am become], 1 Co. xiii. 11; w. 
the indic. future: Lk. xvii. 22; Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25; 
xvi. 25; Ro. ii. 16 [RG T Tr txt. WH mrg.] (where 
Lehm. 9 [al. al.]); 2 Tim. iv. 3. 2. with the aor. 
Subjunetive: ἕως ἂν ἥξη, dre εἴπητε (where ὅταν 
might have been expected), until the time have come, 
when ye have said, Lk. xiii. 835 [RG (cf. Tr br.) ]; ef. 
Matthiae ii. p. 1196 sq.; Bornemann, Scholia in Lucae 
evang. p. 92; W.298 (279); [Bnhdy. p. 400; ef. B. 231 
sq. (199)]- 

6, τε, ἥ, τε, TO, Te, See τέ 2 ἃ. 

ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. 
down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 
87), marking 

I. the substance or contents (of a statement), 
that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring 
(where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, 
Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; 
xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. 
iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 
9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προ- 
εἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 sup- 
ply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες 
[ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 
12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; 
ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 
Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. 
xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co. xv.27; Gal. iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi 


ὅτι 


7 (where LT Tr WHom. δῆλον [and then ὅτι simply 
introduces the reason, because (B. 358 (308) to the con- 
trary) ]); φανεροῦμαι (for φανερὸν γίνεται περὶ ἐμοῦ), 2 Co. 
iii. 3; 1Jn.ii.19. It is added—to verbs of swearing, 
and to forms of oath and affirmation: ὄμνυμι, Rev. 
x.63 ζῶ ἐγώ (see (aw, I. 1 p. 270*), Ro. xiv. 11; μάρτυρα 
τὸν θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι, 2 Co. i. 23; πιστὸς ὁ θεός, 2 Co. i. 18; 
ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοί, 2 Co. xi. 10; ἰδοὺ ἐνώπιον 
τοῦ θεοῦ, Gal. i. 20; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. δα Rom. ii. p. 242 
sq.; [W. § 53, 9; B. 394 (338) ];—to verbs of perceiv- 
ing, knowing, remembering, etc.: ἀκούειν, Jn. xiv. 
28; βλέπειν, 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. 111. 19; Jas. ii. 22; θεᾶσθαι, 
In. vi.5; γινώσκειν, Mt. xxi. 45; Lk.x.11; Jn.iv.53; 2 
Co. xiii. 6; 1 Jn. ii. 5, ete.; after τοῦτο, Ro. vi. 6; εἰδέναι, 
Mt. vi. 32; xxii. 16; Mk. ii. 10; Lk. ii. 49; Jn. iv. 42; ix. 
20, 24 sq.; Ro. ii. 2; vi. 9; Phil. iv. 15 54.» and very often ; 
γνωστόν ἐστιν, Acts xxviil. 28; ἐπιγινώσκειν, Mk. ii. 8; 
Lk. i. 22; Actsiv. 13; ἐπίστασθαι, Acts xv. 7; νοεῖν, Mt. 
xv. 17; ὁρᾶν, Jas. ii. 24; καταλαμβάνειν, Acts iv. 13; x. 
343; συνιέναι, Mt. xvi. 12; ἀγνοεῖν, Ro. i.13; ii. 4; vi. 3, 
ete.; ἀναγινώσκειν, Mt. xii. 5; xix. 45 μνημονεύειν, Jn. xvi. 
4; μνησθῆναι, Mt. v. 23; Jn. ii. 22; ὑπομιμνήσκειν, Jude 
5;—to verbs of thinking, believing, judging, 
hoping: λογίζεσθαι, Jn. xi.50L TTr WH; after τοῦτο, 
Ro. ii. 3; 2 Co. x. 113 νομίζειν, Mt. v. 17; οἶμαι, Jas. i. 7; 
πέπεισμαι, Ro. viii. 88; xiv. 14; xv. 14; 2'Tim. 1. ὅ, 12; 
πεποιθέναι, Lk. xviii. 9; 2 Co. ii. 3; Phil. ii. 24; Gal. v.10; 
2 Th. iii. 4; Heb. xiii. 18; πιστεύειν, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi. 
23; Ro.x.93 ὑπολαμβάνειν, Lk. vii. 43; δοκεῖν, Mt. vi. 7; 
xxvi. 53; Jn. xx. 15; ἐλπίζειν, Lk. xxiv. 21; 2 Co. xiii.6; 
κρίνειν τοῦτο ὅτι, 2 Co. ν. 14 (15) ;—to verbs of emotion 
(where in Lat. now the ace. and inf. is used, now quod): 
θαυμάζειν, Lk. xi. 38; χαίρειν, Jn. xiv. 28; 2 Co. vii. 9, 16 ; 
Phil. iv. 10; 2Jn.4; ἐν τούτῳ, ὅτι, Lk. x. 20; συγχαίρειν, 
Lk. xv. 6,9; μέλει μοι (σοι, αὐτῷ), Mk. iv. 38; Lk. x. 40; 
—to verbs of praising, thanking, blaming, (where 
the Lat. uses quod): ἐπαινεῖν, Lk. xvi. 8; 1 Co. xi. 2,17; 
ἐξομολογεῖσθαι, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 213 εὐχαριστεῖν, Lk. 
xviii. 11; χάρις τῷ θεῷ, Ro. vi. 17; χάριν ἔχω τινί, 1 Tim. 
i. 12; ἔχω κατά Twos, ὅτι etc. Rev. ii. 4; ἔχω τοῦτο ὅτι, I 
shave this (which is praiseworthy) that, Rev. ii. 6; add, 
Jn. vii. 23 [but here ὅτι is causal; ef. W. § 53, 8b.]; 
1 Co. vi. 7;— to the verb εἶναι, when that precedes with 
a demons. pron., in order to define more exactly what a 
thing is or wherein it may be seen: αὕτη ἐστὶν ὅτι (Lat. 
quod), In. iii. 19; ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, 1 Jn. iii. 16; iv. 9 sq. 13, 
ete. ; περὶ τούτου ὅτι, Jn. xvi. 19; οὐχ οἷον δὲ ὅτι (see οἷος), 
Ro. ix. 6;—to the verbs γίνεσθαι and εἶναι with an in- 
terrog. pron., as τί γέγονεν ὅτι ete., what has come to pass 
that? our how comes it that? Jn. xiv. 22; τί [Lmrg. ris] 
ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι, Heb. ii. 6 fr. Ps. viii. 5. 
οὗτος (sc. ἐστίν), ὅτι, Lk. iv. 36; ποταπός ἐστιν οὗτος, ὅτι, 
Mt. viii. 27; τίς ἡ διδαχὴ αὕτη. ὅτι, Mk. i. 27 Ree.; add 
Mk. iv. 41. 2. in elliptical formulas (B. 358 
(307); [W.585 (544) note]): τί ὅτι ete., 1. 4. τί ἐστιν ὅτι, 
ΓΑ. V. how is it that], wherefore? Mk. ii. 16 RG L [4]. om. 
τί; ef. 5 below, and see ὅστις, 4]; Lk. ii. 49; Acts v. 4, 
9. οὐχ ὅτι for οὐ λέγω ὅτι, Our not that, not as though, cf. 


tis ὁ λύγος 


459 


[4 
οτι 


Β. 8150, 1; [W.597 (555)]; thus, Jn. νἱ. 46 ; vii. 22; 2 
Co. i. 24; iii. 5; Phil. iii. 12; iv. 11. ὅτε is used for εἰς 
ἐκεῖνο ὅτι (in reference to the fact that [Eng. seeing that, in 
that]) : thus in Jn. ii. 18; [Meyer (see his note on 1 Co. 
i. 26) would add many other exx., among them Jn. ix. 17 
(see below) ]; for ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, Ro. v. 8; for περὶ τούτου 
ὅτι, concerning this, that: so after λαλεῖν, Mk. i. 84; Lk. iv. 
41 [al. take ὅτε in these exx. and those after διαλογ- which 
follow in a causal sense; ef. W. as below (Ellicott on 
2 Thess. iii. 7)]; after λέγειν, Jn. ix. 17 [see above] ; after 
διαλογίζεσθαι, Mt. xvi. 8; Mk. viii. 17, (after ἀποστέλλειν 
ἐπιστολάς, 1 Mace. xii. 7). See exx. fr. classic authors in 
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 248 sq.; [Meyer, u.s.; οἵ. W. § 53, 
8.1. 3. Noteworthy is the attraction, not un- 
common, by which the noun that would naturally be the 
subject of the subjoined clause, is attracted by the verb 
of the principal clause and becomes its object [cf. W. 
§ 66,5; Β 8 151,1 8.7; as, οἴδατε τὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ, ὅτι 
ἐστὶν ἀπαρχή. for οἴδατε. ὅτι ἡ οἰκία Στ. κτὰ., 1 Co. xvi. 15; 
also after εἰδέναι and ἰδεῖν, Mk. xii. 34; 1 Th. ii. 1; so 
after other verbs of knowing, declaring, ete.: Mt. 
xxv. 24; Jn. ix. 8; Acts iii. 10; ix. 20; 1 Co. iii. 20; 2 Th. 
ii. 4; Rev. xvii. 8, ete.; ὃν ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι θεὸς ὑμῶν 
ἐστι, for περὶ οὗ (cf. Lk. xxi. 5) ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι, Jn. viii. 
54. 4. As respects construction, ὅτε is joined 
in the N. T. a. to the indicative even where the 
opinion of another is introduced, and therefore accord- 
ing to class. usage the optative should have been used; 
as, διεστείλατο . . . ἵνα μηδενὶ εἴπωσιν, ὅτι αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ 
Χριστός, Mt. xvi. 20; add, 21; iv. 12; xx. 30, ete. b. 
to that subjunctive after οὐ μή which differs scarcely 
at all from the future (see μή, IV. 2 p. 411°; [ef. W. 508 
(473)]): Mt. v. 20; xxvi. 29 [RG; al. om. ὅτε); Mk. xiv. 
25; Lk. xxi. 32; Jn. xi. 56 (where before ὅτε supply δο- 
κεῖτε, borrowed from the preceding δοκεῖ); but in Ro. iii. 
8 ὅτι before ποιήσωμεν (hortatory subjune. [ef. W. § 41 a. 
4a.; B. 245 (211)]) is recitative [see 5 below], depend- 
ing on λέγουσι [W. 628 (583); B. § 141, 3]. c. to 
the infinitive, by a mingling of two constructions, 
common even in classic Grk., according to which the 
writer beginning the construction with ὅτε falls into the 
construction of the ace. with inf.: Acts xxvii. 10; cf. 
W. 339 (318) N.2; [§ 63, 2¢c.; B. 383 (328)]. On the 
anacoluthon found in 1 Co. xii. 2, ace. to the reading ὅτι 
ὅτε (which appears in cod. Sin. also [and is adopted by 
Lbr. T Tr WH (yet cf. their note)]), ef. B. 383 (328) 
sq- 5. ὅτι is placed before direct discourse (‘re- 
citative’ ὅτι) [B.§ 139,51; W.§ 65, 8 6.; § 60,9 (and 
Moulton’s note) ]: Mt. ii, 23 [?]; vii. 23; xvi. 7; xxi. 16; 
xxvi. 72, 74; xxvii. 48; Mk. [ii. 16 T Tr WH (see 2 
above); but see ὅστις, 4]; vi. 23; xii. 19 [cf. B. 237 
(204)]; Lk. i. 61; ii. 23; ἵν. 48; xv. 27; Jn. i. 20; iv. 
17; xv. 25; xvi. 17; Acts xv. 1; Heb. xi. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 
20; Rev. iii. 17, ete.; most frequently after λέγω, q. V- 
II. 1 a., p. 318" bot. [Noteworthy is 2 Thess. iii. 10, cf. 
B. § 139, 53.] 

II. the reason why anything is said to be or to be 
done, because, since, for that, for, (a causal conjune.; Lat. 


> 
ou 


quod, quia, quom, nam) ; [on the diff. betw. it and yap 
ef. Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 70]; a. it is added to 
a speaker’s words to show what ground he gives for his 
opinion; as, μακάριος ete. ὅτι, Mt. ν. 4-12; xiii. 16; 
Lk. vi. 20 sq.; xiv. 14; after οὐαί, Mt. xi. 21; xxiii. 18-- 
15, 28, 25, 27, 29; Lk. vi. 24sq.; x. 13; xi. 42-44, 46, 
52; Jude 11; ef. further, Mt. vii. 13; xvii. 15; xxv. 8; 
Mk. v.9; ix. 38 [ἃ Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the el.]; Lk. 
vil. 47; xxili.40; Jn.i. 30; v.27; ἴχ. 16; xvi. 9-11, 14, 
16 [Τ Tr WH om. L br. cl.]; Actsi. 5, and often ;—or is 
added by the narrator, to give the reason for his own 
opinion: Mt. ii. 18; ix. 36; Mk. iii. 30; vi. 34; Jn. il. 
25; Acts i. 17;—or, in general, by a teacher, and often 
in such a way that it relates to his entire statement or 
views: Mt. v.45; 1Jn.iv.18; 2Jn.7; Rev. iii. 10. Ὅ. 
ὅτι makes reference to some word or words that precede 
or immediately follow it [cf. W. § 23, 5; § 53, 8 b.; B. 
§ 127, 6]; as, διὰ τοῦτο, In. viii. 47; x.17; xii. 39; 1 Jn. 
iii. 1,ete. διὰ τί; Ro. ix. 32; 2Co. xi. 11. χάριν τίνος ; 
1 Jn. iii. 12. οὕτως, Rev. iii. 16. ἐν τούτῳ, 1 Jn. iii. 20. 
ὅτι in the protasis, Jn. i. 50 (51); xx. 29. It is followed 
by διὰ τοῦτο, Jn. xv. 19. οὐχ ὅτι... - ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, not be- 
... but because, Jn. vi. 26; xii. 6. 

III. On the combination ὡς ὅτε see ὡς, I. 3. 

[ὅτι interrog., i. 6. 6, τε or ὅ τι, see ὅστις, 4 (and ad 
init.).] 

ὅτου, see ὅστις ad init. 

ov, see ὅς, 9, 6, II. 11. 

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a 
smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; 
but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before 
a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have 
adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 
14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; 
οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before 
an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 
2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, 
Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. 
iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 
14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, 
pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, 
p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. 
pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. 
no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii. no. 5); 
Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. ete. p. Ixxxvii. sq.; Τὰ Proleg. 
p- £0sq.; WH. Intr. §§ 405 sqq., and App. p. 143 sq.]; 
Sept. for 85, ΤᾺΝ, ΤΣ; a particle of negation, not (how 
it differs fr. μή has been explained in μή, ad init.) ; it is 
used 1. absol. and accented, οὔ, nay, no, [ W. 476 
(444)]: in answers, ὁ δέ φησιν: ov, Mt. xiii. 29; ἀπε- 
κρίθη - ov, Jn. i. 21; [xxi. 5], ef. vii. 12; repeated, od οὔ, 
it strengthens the negation, nay, nay, by no means, Mt. 
ν. 37; ἤτω ὑμῶν τὸ οὗ οὔ, let your denial be truthful, Jas. 
ν. 12; on 2 Co. i. 17-19, see vai. 2. It is joined to 
other words, —to a finite verb, simply to deny that 
what is declared in the verb applies to the subject of 
the sentence: Mt. i. 25 (οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτήν); Mk. iii. 
25; Lk. vi. 43; Jn. x. 28; Acts vii. 5; Ro. i. 16, and 


cause 


460 


» 
ou 


times without number. It has the same force when 
conjoined to participles: ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων, 1 Co, ix. 
26; οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ τέκνου, at the time when he had no 
child, Acts vii. 5 (μὴ ὄντος would be, although he had no 
child); add, Ro. viii. 20; 1Co.iv.14; 2 Co. iv. 8; Gal. 
iv. 8,27; Col. ii. 19; Phil. iii. 3; 1160. xi. 85; 1 Pet. i. 8; 
6... οὐκ dv ποιμήν, Jn. x. 12 (where ace. to class. usage 
μή must have been employed, because such a person is 
imagined as is not a shepherd; [ef. B. 351 (301) and 
μή; 1. ὃ Ὁ.1). in relative sentences: εἰσὶν... τινὲς of οὐ 
πιστεύουσιν, Jn. vi. 01; add, Mt. χ. 88; xii. 2; Lk. vi. 2; 
Ro. xv. 21; Gal. ili. 10, ete.; οὐκ ἔστιν ὅς and οὐδέν ἐστιν 
6 foll. by a fut.: Mt. x. 26; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2; ris ἐστιν, 
ὃς ov foll. by a pres. indic.: Acts xix. 35; Ieb. xii. 7; ef. 
W. 481 (448); B. 355 (305); in statements introduced 
by ὅτι after verbs of understanding, perceiving, saying, 
etc.: Jn. v.425 viii. 55, ete.; ὅτι οὐκ (where οὐκ is pleo- 
nastic) after ἀρνεῖσθαι, 1 Jn. ii. 22; ef. B.§ 148,13; [W. 
§ 65, 2 8.];—to an infin., where μή might have been ex- 
pected: τίς ἔτι χρεία κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισ. ἕτερον ἀν- 
ίστασθαι ἱερέα καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν ᾿Ααρὼν λέγεσθαι, Heb. 
vii. 11 (where the difficulty is hardly removed by saying 
[e. g. with W. 482 (449) ] that od belongs only to κατὰ τὴν 
τάξιν Aap., not to the infin.). it serves to deny other 
parts of statements: οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ λόγου, 1 Co. i. 17; οὐ 
μέλανι, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶ λιθίναις, 2 Co. iii. 3, and many other 
exx.;—to deny the object, ἔλεος (RG ἔλεον) θέλω, οὐ 
θυσίαν, Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, Mk. ix. 37. It 
blends with the term to which it is prefixed into a single 
and that an aflirmative idea [W. 476 (444); cf. B. 347 
(298) ]; as, οὐκ ἐάω, to prevent, hinder, Acts xvi. 7; xix. 
30, (cf., on this phrase, Herm. ad Vig. p. 887 sq.) 3 οὐκ 
ἔχω, to be poor, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv. 25, (see ἔχω, I. 2a. 
p- 266"); τὰ οὐκ ἀνήκοντα [or ἃ οὐκ ἀνῆκεν, LT Tr WH], 
unseemly, dishonorable, Eph. v. 4 (see μή, I. 5 ἃ. fin. p. 
410°; [ef. B. § 148, 7a.; W. 486 (452)]); often so as to 
form a litotes; as, οὐκ ἀγνοέω, to know well, 2 Co. ii. 11 
(Sap. xii. 10) ; οὐκ ὀλίγοι, not a few, i. e. very many, Acts 
xvii. 4, 12; xix. 23 sq.; xv. 2; xiv. 28; xxvii. 20; οὗ 
πολλαὶ ἡμέραι, a few days, Lk. xv. 13; Jn. ii. 12; Actsi 
5; ov πολύ, Acts xxvii. 14; οὐ μετρίως, Acts xx. 12; οὐκ 
ἄσημος, not undistinguished [A. V. no mean ete.], Acts 
Xxi. 395 οὐκ ἐκ μέτρου, In. iii. 84. it serves to limit the 
term to which it is joined: οὐ πάντως, not altogether, not 
entirely (see πάντως, ο. 3); οὐ mas, not any and every one, 
Mt. vii. 21; plur. οὐ πάντες, not all, Mt. xix. 11; Ro. ix. 
6; x.16; οὐ πᾶσα σάρξ, not every kind of flesh, 1 Co. xv. 
39; ov παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, not to all the people, Acts x. 41; 
on the other hand, when οὐ is joined to the verb, πᾶς 

ον οὐ must be rendered πὸ one, no, (as in Hebrew, now 
53 SND uNOWANT Nee 3: οἵ. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et 
Chald. p. 513 sq.): Lk. 1.87; Eph. v. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 21; 
Rev. xxii. 3; πᾶσα odp&...ov w. a verb, no flesh, no 
mortal, Mt. xxiv. 22; Mk. xiii. 20; Ro. iii. 20; Gal. ii 
16; cf. W.§ 26,1; [B.121(106)]. Joined to a noun 
it denies and annuls the idea of the noun; as, τὸν οὗ 
λαόν, a people that is not a people (Germ. ein Nichtvolk, 
a no-people), Ro. ix. 25, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 10; ἐπ᾽ οὐκ ἔθνει, 


ou 461 


[R. V. with that which is no nation], Ro. x. 19 (so Dy x; 
by x5, a no-god, Deut. xxxii. 21; py x5, α not-wood, Is. 
x. 15; οὐκ ἀρχιερεύς, 2 Mace. iv. 13; ἡ ov διάλυσις, Thue. 
1, 137, 4; ἡ οὐ περιτείχισις 3, 95, 2; ἡ οὐκ ἐξουσία 5, 50, 
3; 80 ἀπειροσύναν ... κοὐκ ἀπόδειξιν, Eur. Hippol. 196, 
and other exx. in Grk. writ.; non sutor, Hor. sat. 2, 3, 
106; non corpus, Cie. acad. 1, 39 fin.); cf. W. 476 (444); 
[B. § 148, 9]; ἡ οὐκ ἠγαπημένη, Ro. ix. 25; οἱ οὐκ ἤλεη- 
μένοι, 1 Pet. ii. 10. 3. followed by another nega- 
tive, a. it strengthens the negation: οὐ κρίνω οὐδένα, 
Jn. viii. 15; add, Mk. v. 37; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); οὗ οὐκ ἦν 
οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς κείμενος, Lk. xxiii. 53 [see οὐδέπω] ; οὐκ - - - 
οὐδέν, nothing at all, Lk. iv. 2; Jn. vi. 63; χὶ. 49; xii. 19; 
xv. 55 οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός, Mt. xxii. 16 ; ok... οὐκέτι, 
Acts viii. 39 ; cf. Matthiae § 609, 3; Kiihner ii. § 516; W. 
§ 55, 9b.; [B. § 148, 11]. b. as in Latin, it changes 
a negation into an affirmation (cf. Matthiae § 609, 2; 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 695 sq.; W.§55,9a.; B.§ 148, 
12); οὐ mapa τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ σώματος, not on this 
account is it not of the body, i. 6. it belongs to the body, 
does not cease to be of the body, 1 Co. xii. 15; οὐ duva- 
μεθα ἃ εἴδομεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν μὴ λαλεῖν, we are unable not 
to speak [A.V. we cannot but speak], Acts iv. 20. 4. 
Τὸ is used in disjunctive statements where one 
thing is denied that another may be established [W. 
§ 55, 8; cf. B. 356 (306)]: ove... ἀλλά, Lk. viii. 52; 
xxiv. 6 [WH reject the cl.]; Jn. i. 33; vii. 10, 12, 16; 
viii. 49; Acts x. 41; Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. iii. 
3; viii. 5; Heb. ii. 16, ete.; see ἀλλά, 11. 1; οὐχ iva... 
ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα, Jn. iii. 17; οὐχ va... ἀλλά, Jn. vi. 38; ov μόνον 

. . ἀλλὰ καί, see ἀλλά, II. 1 and μόνος, 2; οὐκ... εἰ μή, 
see εἰ, III. 8c. p. 171°; οὐ μή w. subjune. aor. foll. by 
εἰ py, Rev. xxi. 27 [see εἰ as above, β.1. 5: Τὸ 15 
joined to other particles: οὐ μή, not at all, by no means, 
surely not, in no wise, see μή, 1V.; οὐ μηκέτι w. aor. sub- 
june. Mt. xxi. 19 LT Trmrg. WH. μὴ οὐ, where μή is 
interrog. (Lat. num) and οὐ negative (ef. B. 248 (214), 
354 (304); W.511 (476)]: Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq.; 
xi. 22. εἰ od, see εἰ, III. 11 p. 172". οὐ γάρ (see yap, I. 
p- 109°), Acts xvi. 37. 6. Asin Hebr. x5 w. impé., 
so in bibl. Grk. οὐ w. 2 pers. fut. is used in emphatic 
prohibition (in prof. auth. it is milder; οἵ. W. § 43, 
5.3; also 501 sq. (467); [B. § 139, 64]; Fritzsche on Mt. 
Ρ- 259 sq. [ef. p. 252 sq.] thinks otherwise, but not cor- 
rectly): Mt. vi. 5; and besides in the moral precepts 
of the O. T., Mt. iv. 7; xix.18; Lk.iv.12; Acts xxiii. 
5; Ro. vii. 7; xiii. 9. 7. ov is used interroga- 
tively — when an affirmative answer is expected (Lat. 
nonne; [W. § 57, 3a.; B. 247 (213)]): Mt. vi. 26, 30; 
xvii. 24; Mk. iv. 21; xii. 24; Lk. xi. 40; Jn. iv. 35; vii. 
25; Acts ix. 21; Ro. ix. 21; 1 Co. ix. 1,6 sq.12; Jas. ii. 
4, and often; οὐκ οἴδατε xrA.; and the like, see εἴδω, IT. 
1 p. 174"; ἀλλ᾽ ov, Heb. iii. 16 (see ἀλλά, [. 10 p. 28"); 
οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν; answerest thou nothing at all? Mk. 
xiv. 60; xv. 4; where an exclamation of reproach or 
wonder, which denies directly, may take the place of a 
negative question: Mk. iv. 13, 38; Lk. xvii. 18; Acts 
xiii. 10 [οἵ. B. § 139, 65]; xxi. 88 (on which see ἄρα, 1); 


οὐδέ 


ef. W. u.s.; οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό; shall I not drink it? Jn. 
xviii. 11; ef. W. p. 512 (477); [ef. B. § 139, 2]. 

ova, Tdf. ova [see Proleg. p. 101; cf. Chandler § 892], 
ah! ha! an interjection of wonder and amazement: 
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 34; 3, 23,24; Dio Cass. 63, 20; called . 
out by the overthrow of a boastful adversary, Mk. xv. 29.* 

ovat, an interjection of grief or of denunciation ; Sept. 
chiefly for j7 and >is; alas! woe! with a dat of pers. 
added, Mt. xi. 21; xvili. 7; xxiii. 18-16, 23, 25, 27, 29; 
xxiv. 19; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiii. 17; xiv. 21; Lk. vi. 24-26 ; 
x. 13; xi. 42-44, 46 sq. 52; xxi. 23; xxii. 22; Jude 11; 
Rev. xii. 12 R G Led. min. [see below], (Num. xxi. 29; 
Is. iii. 9, and often in Sept.) ; thrice repeated, and foll. 
by a dat., Rev. viii. 13 RG LWHmrg. [see below]; the 
dat. is omitted in Lk. xvii. 1; twice repeated and foll. 
by a nom. in place of a voc., Rev. xviii. 10, 16, 19, (Is. i. 
24; v. 8-22; Hab. ii. 6, 12, etc.) ; exceptionally, with an 
ace. of the pers., in Rev. viii. 13 T Tr WH txt., and xii. 
12 LT Tr WH; this accus., I think, must be regarded 
either as an acc. of exclamation (cf. Matthiae § 410), or 
as an imitation of the constr. of the acc. after verbs of 
injuring, (B. § 131, 14 judges otherwise); with the ad- 
dition of ἀπό and a gen. of the evil the infliction of which 
is deplored [cf. B. 822 (277); W. 371 (348)], Mt. xviii. 7; 
also of ἐκ. Rev. viii.13. Asa substantive, ἡ οὐαί (the 
writer seems to have been led to use the fem. by the 
similarity of ἡ θλίψις or ἡ ταλαιπωρία; cf. W.179 (169)) 
woe, calamity: Rey. ix. 12; xi. 14; δύο οὐαί, Rev. ix. 12, 
(οὐαὶ ἐπὶ οὐαὶ ἔσται, Ezek. vii. 26; ovat ἡμᾶς λήψεται, 
Evang. Nicod. c. 21 [Pars ii. v. 1 (ed. Tdf.)]); so also 
in the phrase οὐαί μοί ἐστιν woe is unto me, i. 6. divine 
penalty threatens me, 1 Co. ix. 16, ef. Hos. ix. 12; [Jer. vi. 
4]; Epict. diss. 3, 19, 1, (frequent in eccles. writ.).* 

οὐδαμῶς (fr. οὐδαμός. not even one; and this fr. οὐδέ and 
ἀμός [allied perh. w. dua; ef. Vanicek p. 972; Curtius 
§ 600]), adv., fr. Hdt. [and Aeschyl.] down, by no means, 
in no wise: Mt. ii. 6.* 

οὐδέ, [fr. Hom. down], a neg. disjunctive conjunction, 
compounded of ov and δέ, and therefore prop. i. q. but 
not; generally, however, its oppositive force being lost, 
it serves to continue a negation. [On the elision of ε 
when the next word begins with a vowel (observed by 
Tdf. in eight instances, neglected in fifty-eight), see TW. 
Proleg. p. 96; cf. WH. App. p. 146; W.§5, 1 a.; B. p. 
10 sq.] It signifies 1. and not, continuing a nega- 
tion, yet differently from οὔτε; for the latter connects 
parts or members of the same thing, since τέ is adjunc- 
tive like the Lat. que; but οὐδέ places side by side things 
that are equal and mutually exclude each other [(?). 
There appears to be some mistake here in what is said 
about ‘mutual exclusion’ (cf. W. § 55, 6): οὐδέ, like δέ, 
always makes reference to something preceding; οὔτε 
to what follows also; the connection of clauses nega- 
tived by οὔτε is close and internal, so that they are mu- 
tually complementary and combine into a unity, whereas 
clauses negatived by οὐδέ follow one another much more 
loosely, often almost by accident as it were; see W. il. c, 
and esp. the quotations there given from Benfey and 


ee” 


οὐδείς 


Klotz.] It differs from μηδέ as οὐ does from μή ἴα. v-ad 
init.]; after οὐ, where each has its own verb: Mt. v. 15; 
vi. 28; Mk. iv. 22; Lk. vi.44; Actsii. 27; ix. 9; xvii. 24 
sq.; Gal. i. 17; iv. 14; οὐκ οἶδα οὐδὲ ἐπίσταμαι, Mk. xiv. 68 
RG Lurg. [al. οὔτε . . . οὔτε] (Οἷς. pro Rose. Am. 43 
“non novi neque scio”); ef. W. 490 (456) ¢.; [B. 367 
(315) note]; od... ode... οὐδέ, nol... nor... nor, Mt. 
vi. 26; ovdcis... ovde... ovde.. . οὐδέ, Rev. v. ὃ [RG; 
ct. B. 367 (315); W. 491 (457)]; od... οὐδέ foll. by a 
fut... . οὐδὲ μή foll. by subjunc. aor. . . . οὐδέ, Rev. vii. 
16. od... οὐδέ, the same verb being common to both: 
Mt. x. 24; xxv. 13; Lk. vi. 43; viii. 17 [ef. W.300 (281); 
B. 355 (305) ef. § 139, 7]; Jn. vi. 245 xiii. 16; Acts viii. 
21; xvi. 21; xxiv. 18; Ro. ii. 28; ix. 16; Gal. i. 1; iii. 28; 
1 Th. νυ. 5; 1 Tim. ii. 12; Rev. xxi. 28. preceded by 
οὔπω, Mk. viii. 17; — by οὐδείς, Mt. ix. 17; — by ἵνα μή, 
which is foll. by ov8é . . . οὐδέ, where μηδὲ . . - μηδέ might 
have been expected (ef. B. § 148, 8; [W. 474 (442) ]): 
Rey. ix. 4. οὐδὲ γάρ, for neither, Jn. viii. 42; Ro. viii. 
a 2. also not [A. V. generally neither]: Mt. vi. 15; 
xxi. 27; xxv. 45; Mk. xi. 26 [RL]; Lk. xvi. 31; Jn. xv. 
4; Ro. iv. 15; xi. 21; 1 Co. xv. 13,16; Gal. i. 12 (οὐδὲ 
yap ἐγώ [ef. B. 367 (315) note; 492 (458) ]); Heb. viii. 4, 
ete.; ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, Lk. xxiii. 15; ἢ οὐδέ, in a question, or 
doth not even ete.? 1 Co. xi. 14 Rec.; the simple οὐδέ, 
num ne quidem (have ye not even ete.) in a question 
where a negative answer is assumed (see ov, 7): Mk. xii. 
10; Lk. vi.3; xxiii. 40; and GL T Tr WH in 1 Co. xi. 
14. 3. not even [B. 369 (316)]: Mt. vi. 295 viii. 
10; Mk. vi. 31; Lk. vii. 9; xii. 27; Jn. xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. 
the vs.]; 1Co. ν. 1; xiv. 21; οὐδὲ εἷς [W. 173 (163) ; B. 
§ 127, 32], Acts iv. 32; Ro. iii. 10; 1 Co. vi.5 [L T Tr 
WH οὐδείς]; οὐδὲ ἕν, In. i. 3; GAN οὐδέ, Acts xix. 2; 1 
Co. iii. 2 (Ree. ἀλλ᾽ οὔτε) ; iv. 3; Gal. ii. 3. ina double 
negative for the sake of emphasis, οὐκ. . . οὐδέ [B. 369 
(316); W. 500 (465) ]: Mt. xxvii. 14; Lk. xviii. 13; Acts 
vii. 5. 
οὐδείς, οὐ Sepia (the fem. only in these pass. : Mk. vi. 
5; Lk. iv. 26; Jn. xvi. 29; xviii. 38; xix.4; Acts xxv. 
18; xxvii. 22; Phil. iv.15; 1 Jn.i.5,and Ree. in Jas. iii. 
12), οὐ δέν (and, ace. to a pronunciation not infreq. fr. 
Aristot. and Theophr. down, οὐθείς, οὐθέν : 1 Co. xiii. 2 
' LL T Tr WH; Acts xix. 27LT Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 8 
(9)LT Tr WH; Lk. xxii. 35 T Tr WH; xxiii. 14 T Tr 
WH; Acts xv. 9 TTrWHtxt.; Acts xxvi. 26 TWH 
Tr br.; 1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf.; see μηδείς init. and Gottling 
on Aristot. pol. p. 278; [Meisterhans, Grammatik ἃ. At- 
tisch. Inschriften, § 20,5; see L. and S. s. v. οὐθείς; ef. 
Lob. Pathol. Elem. ii. 344]; Béttm. Ausf. Spr. 8 70 Anm. 
7), (fr. οὐδέ and eis), [fr. Hom. down], and not one, no 
one, none, no; it differs from μηδείς as οὐ does from μή 
[4- ν. ad init. ]; 1. with nouns: masc., Lk. iv. 24; 
xvi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 4; οὐδεὶς ἄλλος, In. xv. 24; οὐδεμία 
in the passages given above; neut., Lk. xxiii. 4; Jn. x. 
41; Acts xvii. 21; xxiii. 9; xxviii. 5; Ro. viii. 1; xiv. 14; 
Gal. v. 10, ete. 2. absolutely: οὐδείς, Mt. vi. 24; 
ix. 16; Mk. iii. 27; v. 4; vii. 24; Lk.i.61; v.39 [WH 
in br.]; vii. 28; Jn. i. 18; iv. 27; Acts xviii. 10; xxv. 11; 


462 


> 4 
OUKETE 


Ro. xiv. 7, and very often. with a partitive gen.: Lk, 
iv. 26; xiv. 24; Jn. xiii. 28; Actsv.13; 1 Co.i. 14; ii. 
8; 1Tim.vi.16. οὐδεὶς εἰ μή, Mt. xix. 17 Ree.; xvii. 8; 
Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii. 19; Jn. iii. 13; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev. 
xix. 12, ete.; ἐὰν μή, Jn. 111. 2; vi. 44,65. οὐκ... οὐδείς 
(see οὐ, 3 a.), Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. v.37; vi. 5; xii. 14; Lk. 
viii. 43; Jn. viii. 15; xviii. 9, 31; Acts iv. 12; 2 Co. xi. 
9 (8); οὐκέτι... οὐδείς, Mk. ix. 8; οὐδέπω... οὐδείς, Lk. 
xxiii. δ8 [Tdf. odels. . . οὐδέπω; 1, ΤῊ WH οὐδεὶς οὔπω] ; 
Jn. xix. 41; Acts viii. 16 [L T Tr WH]; οὐδεὶς... οὐκέτι, 
Mk. xii. 834; Rev. xviii. 11. neut. οὐδέν, nothing, Mt. x. 
26 [cf. W. 800 (281); B. 355 (305) ]; xvii. 20; xxvi. 62; 
xxvii. 12, and very often; with a partitive gen., Lk. ix. 
36; xviii. 34; Acts xviii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 15; xiv. 10 [RG]; 
οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mt. v.13; xxi. 19; Mk. ix. 29; xi. 13; μή 
τινος; with the answer οὐδενός, Lk. xxii. 35; οὐδὲν ἐκτός 
w. gen., Acts xxvi. 22; οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει, Gal. 11. 6; it 
follows another negative, thereby strengthening the ne- 
gation (see ov, 3 a.): Mk. xv. 4 sq.; xvi. 8; Lk. iv. 2; ix. 
36; xx. 40; Jn. ili. 27; v. 19, 30; ix. 33; xi. 49; xiv. 
30; Acts xxvi. 26 [Lchm. om.]; 1 Co. viii. 2[R G]; ix. 
15 (GL T Tr WH]; οὐδὲν οὐ μή w. aor. subjune. Lk. x. 
19 [R*G WH mrg.; see μή, 1V. 2]. οὐδέν, absol., noth- 
ing whatever, not at all, in no wise, [cf. B. §131, 10]: ἀδι- 
ke (see ἀδικέω, 2 b.), Acts xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12; οὐδὲν 
διαφέρειν τινός, Gal. iv. 1; ὑστερεῖν, 2 Co. xii. 11; ὠφελεῖν, 
Jn. vi. 63; 1 Co. xiii. 3. οὐδέν ἐστιν, it is nothing, of no 
importance, ete. [ef. B. § 129, 5]: Mt. xxiii. 16,18; Jn. 
viii. 54; 1 Co. vii. 19; with a gen., none of these things 
is true, Acts xxi. 24; xxv. 11; οὐδέν εἶμι, I am nothing, 
of noaccount: 1 Co. xiii. 2; 2 Co. xii. 11, (see exx. fr. Grk. 
auth. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and §.s.v. II. 2; Meyer on 1 
Co. 1. 6.7); εἰς οὐδὲν λογισθῆναι (see λογίζομαι, 1 a.), Acts 
xix. 27; εἰς οὐδὲν γίνεσθαι, to come to nought, Acts ν. 36 
[W. § 29, 8 ἃ. ; ἐν οὐδενί, in no respect, in nothing, Phil. 
x. 20 (cf. μηδείς, g-) |. 

οὐδέποτε, adv., denying absolutely and objectively, (fr. 
οὐδέ and ποτέ, prop. not ever), [fr. Hom. down], never 
Mt. vii. 23; ix. 33; xxvi. 33; Mk. ii. 12; [Lk. xv. 29 
(bis)}; Jn. vii. 46; Acts x. 14; xi. 8; xiv. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 
8; Heb. x. 1,11. interrogatively, did ye never, ete.: 
Mt. xxi. 16, 42; Mk. ii. 25.* 

οὐδέπω, ady., simply negative, (fr. οὐδέ and the enclitic 
ma), [fr. Aeschyl. down], not yet, not as yet: Jn. vii. 39 
(where L Tr WH οὔπω); xx. 9. οὐδέπω οὐδείς, never 
any one [A. V.never man yet], Jn. xix. 41; [ovdero. . - 
ἐπ᾽ οὐδενί, as yet... upon none, Acts viii. 16 LT Tr 
WH); οὐκ... οὐδέπω οὐδείς (see ov, 8 a.), Lk. xxiii. 53 [L 
Tr WH οὐκ... οὐδεὶς οὔπω; Tdf. οὐκ. . . οὐδεὶς οὐδέπω]; 
οὐδέπω οὐδέν (LT Tr WH simply οὔπω) not yet (any- 
thing), 1 Co. viii. 2.* 

οὐθείς, οὐθέν, see οὐδείς, init. 

οὐκέτι [also written separately by Rect (generally), 
Tr (nine times in Jn.), Tdf. (in Philem. 16)], (οὐκ, ἔτι), 
an ady. which denies simply, and thus differs from pyxere 
(q.v-), no longer, no more, no further: Mt. xix. 6; Mk. 
x. 8: Lk.xv.19, 21; Jn. iv. 42; vi.66; Acts xx. 25, 38; 
Ro. vi. 9; xiv. 15; 2Co. v. 16; Gal. iii. 25; iv. 7; Eph. 


οὐκοῦν 


ii. 19; Philem. 16; Heb. x. 18, 26, etc.; οὐκέτι ἦλθον, I 
came not again [R.V.J forebore to come], 2 Co. i. 23. 
with another neg. particle in order to strengthen the ne- 
gation: οὐδὲ .. . οὐκέτι, Mt. xxii. 46 ; οὐκ... οὐκέτι, Acts 
viii. 39; οὐδεὶς . . . οὐκέτι, Mk. xii. 84; Rev. xviii. 11; 
οὐκέτι . . . οὐδέν, Mk. vii. 12; xv. 5; Lk. xx. 40; οὐκέτι 
... οὐδένα, Mk. ix. 8; οὐκέτι ov μή, Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii. 
16 [WH om. L Tr br. οὐκέτι]; Rev. xviii. 14 [Tr om.]; 
οὐδὲ... οὐκέτι οὐδείς, Mk. v. 3 L TWH Tr txt. 
is used logically [cf. W. §65, 10]; as, οὐκέτι ἐγώ for it 
cannot now be said ὅτι ἐγώ etc., Ro. vii. 17, 20; Gal. ii. 
20; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii. 18. [(Hom., Hes., Hdt., al.)] 

οὐκοῦν, (fr. οὐκ and οὖν); adv., not therefore; and since 
a speaker often introduces in this way his own opinion 
[see Kriiger as below], the particle is used affirmatively, 
therefore, then, the force of the negative disappearing. 
Hence the saying of Pilate οὐκοῦν βασιλεὺς εἶ σύ must 
be taken affirmatively: then (since thou speakest of thy 
βασιλείαν) thou arta king! (Germ. also bist du doch ein 
KGnig !), Jn. xviii. 37 [cf. B. 249 (214)]; but it is better 
to write οὔκουν, so that Pilate, arguing from the words 
of Christ, asks, not without irony, art thou not a king 
then ? or in any case, thou art a king, art thou not? cf. W. 
512 (477). The difference between οὐκοῦν and οὔκουν is 
differently stated by different writers; cf. Herm. ad Vig. 
p- 792sqq.; Kriiger § 69, 51, 1 and 2; Kiihner ὃ 508, 5 
ii. p. 715 sqq., also the 3d excurs. appended to his ed. of 
Xen. memor.; [Bdumlein, Partikeln, pp. 191-198].* 

οὐ μή, see μή, LV. 

οὖν ἃ conj. indicating that something follows from an- 
other necessarily; [al. regard the primary force of the 
particle as confirmatory or continuative, rather than 
illative; cf. Passow, or L.andS.s. v.; Kiihner § 508, 1 ii. 
p- 707 sqq.; Biiumlein p. 173 sqq.; Kriiger § 69, 52; Don- 
aldson p. 571; Rost in a program “ Ueber Ableitung ” 
u.s.w. p.2; Klotz p. 717; Hartung ii. 4]. Hence it is 
used in drawing a conclusion and in connecting sen- 
tences together logically, then, therefore, accordingly, 
consequently, these things being so, [ (Klotz, Rost, al., have 
wished to derive the word fr. the neut. ptep. ὄν (cf. 
ὄντως) ; but see Baumlein or Kiihner u.s.); ef. W. § 53, 
8]: Mt. iii. 10; x. 32 (since persecutions are not to be 
dreaded, and consequently furnish no excuse for denying 
me [οἵ. W. 455 (424)]); Mt. xviii. 4; Lk. iii.9; xvi. 27; 
In. viii. 38 (καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν, and ye accordingly, i. e. ‘since, 
as is plain from my case, sons follow the example of their 
fathers’; Jesus says this in sorrowful irony [W. 455 
(424)]); Acts i. 21 (since the office of the traitor Judas 
must be conferred on another); Ro. v. 9; vi. 4; xiii. 10; 
1 Co. iv. 16 (since I hold a father’s place among you) ; 2 
Co. v. 20; Jas. iv. 17, and many other exx. As respects 
details, notice that it stands a. inexhortations 
(to show what ought now to be done by reason of what 
has been said), i. q. wherefore, [our transitional there- 
fore]: Mt. iii. 8; v. 48; ix. 38; Lk. xi. 35; xxi. 14, 36 
[Β α Lmrg. Trmrg.]; Acts iii. 19; xiii.40; Ro. vi. 12; 
xiv. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 11 ; 2 Co. viii. 24; Eph. v. 1; vi. 14; 
Phil. ii. 29; Col. ii. 16; 2 Tim. i. 8; Heb. iv. 1, 11; x. 


ΓΑΕ. 
OUKETL 


463 


οὖν 


35; Jas. iv. 7; v. 7; 1 Pet.iv.7; v.6; Rev. i.19 [GL 
T Tr WH]; iii. 3, 19, and often ; viv οὖν, now therefore, 
Acts xvi. 36. b. in questions, then, therefore, 
(Lat. igitur) ; a. when the question is, what follows 
or seems to follow from what has been said: Mt. xxii. 
28; xxvii. 22 [W. 455 (424)]; Mk. xv. 12; Lk. iii. 10; 
xx. 15, 33; Jn. vill. 5; τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν ; Ro. vi. 1; vii. 7; 
ix. 14; τί οὖν φημί; 1 Co. x. 19; τί οὖν; what then? 1. 6. 
how then does the matter stand? [οἷ. W. § 64, 2a.], Jn. 
i. 21 [here WH mrg. punct. τί οὖν σύ ;] Ro. iii. 9; vi. 15; 
xi. 7; also τί οὖν ἐστίν; [what is it then?] Acts xxi. 22; 
1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. B. when it is asked, whether 
this or that follows from what has just been said: Mt. 
xiii. 28; Lk. xxii. 70; Jn. xviii. 39; Ro. iii. 31; Gal. iii. 
21. y- when it is asked, how something which is true 
or regarded as true, or what some one does, can be rec- 
onciled with what has been previously said or done: Mt. 
xii. 26; ΧΙ. 27; xvii. 10 (where the thought is, ‘ thou 
commandest us to tell no one about this vision we have 
had of Elijah; what relation then to this vision has the 
doctrine of the scribes concerning the coming of Elijah? 
Is not this doctrine confirmed by the vision ?’) ; Mt. xix. 
7; xxvi. 54; Lk. xx. 17; Jn. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. οὖν] ; Acts 
xv. 10 (viv οὖν, now therefore, i.e. at this time, therefore, 
when God makes known his will so plainly); Acts xix. 
3; Ro. iv. 1 (where the meaning is, ‘ If everything de- 
pends on faith, what shall we say that Abraham gained 
by outward things, i.e. by works?’ [but note the crit. 
texts]); 1 Co. vi. 15; Gal. iii. 5. δ. in general, it 
serves simply to subjoin questions suggested by what 
has just been said: Ro. iii. 27; iv. 9sq.; vi. 21; xi. 11; 
1 Co. iii. 5, ete. c. in epanalepsis, i. 6. it serves 
to resume a thought or narrative interrupted by inter- 
vening matter (Matthiae ii. p. 1497; [W. 444 (414)]), 
like Lat. igitur, inquam, our as was said, say I, to pro- 
ceed, ete.: Mk. iii. 31 [Β G] (ef. 21); Lk. iii. 7 (cf. 3) ; 
Jn. iv. 45 (cf. 43); vi. 24 (ef. 22); 1 Co. viii. 4; xi. 20 
(cf. 18); add, Mk. xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. οὖν]; Acts viii. 
25; xii. 5; xiii. 4; xv. 3, 30; xxiii. 31; xxv. 1; xxviii. 5. 
Τὸ is used also when one passes at length to a subject 
about which he had previously intimated an intention to 
speak: Acts xxvi. 4, 9. d. it serves to gather up 
summarily what has already been said, or even what 
cannot be narrated at length: Mt. i.17; vii. 24 (where 
no reference is made to what has just before been said 
[?], but all the moral precepts of the Serm. on the Mount 
are summed up in a single rule common to all); Lk. iii. 
18; Jn. xx. 30; Acts xxvi. 22. e. it serves to adapt 
examples and comparisons to the case in hand: Jn. iii. 
29; xvi. 22;—or to add examples to illustrate the sub- 
ject under consideration: Ro. xii. 20 Ree. fin 
historical discourse it serves to make the transition 
from one thing to another, and to connect the several 
parts and portions of the narrative, since the new uccur- 
rences spring from or are occasioned by what precedes 
[ef. W. § 60, 3]: Lk. vi. 9 RG; numberless times so in 
John, as i. 22 [Lehm. om.]; ii. 18; iv. 9 [Tdf. om.]; vi. 60, 
67; vii. 6 [ἃ T om. ], 25, 28, 33, 35, 40; viii. 13,19, 22, 25, 


» 
oUuTT@ 


31,57; ix. 784. 10,16; xi. 12, 16, 21, 32,36; xii. 1-4; xiii. 
12; xvi. 17, 22; xviii. 7,11sq. 16, 27-29; xix. 20-24, 32, 38, 
40; xxi. 5-7, ete. g. with other conjunctions: dpa 
οὖν, so then, Lat. hinc igitur,in Paul; see dpa, 5. εἰ οὖν, if 
then (where what has just been said and proved is carried 
over to prove something else), see εἰ, III. 12; [εἰ μὲν οὖν, 
see μέν, 11. 4 p. 398”). εἴτε οὖν... εἴτε, whether then... 
or: 1 Co. x. 31; xv. 11. ἐπεὶ οὖν, since then: Heb. ii. 
14; iv. 6; for which also a participle is put with οὖν, as 
Acts ii. 30; xv. 2[T Tr WH δέ]; xvii. 29; xix. 36; xxv. 
17; xxvi. 22; Ro. v. 1; xv. 28; 2 Co. iii. 12; v. 11; vii. 1; 
Heb. iv. 14; x.19; 1 Pet. iv.1; 2 Pet. iii.11 [WH Tr 
mrg. οὕτως]. ἐὰν οὖν, if then ever, in case then, or rather, 
therefore if, therefore in case, (for in this formula, οὖν, al- 
though placed in the protasis, yet belongs more to the 
apodosis, since it shows what will necessarily follow from 
what precedes if the condition introduced by ἐάν shall 
ever take place): Mt. v. 23 [ef. W. 455 (424)]; vi. 22 
{here Tdf. om. οὖν] ; xxiv. 26; Lk. iv. 7; Jn. vi. 62; viii. 
36; Ro. ii. 26; 1 Co. xiv. 11, 23; 2 Tim. ii. 21; ἐὰν οὖν 
un, Rey. iii. 3; so also ὅταν οὖν, when therefore: Mt. vi. 2; 
xxi. 40; xxiv. 15, and R Gin Lk. xi. 34. ὅτε οὖν, when 
(or after) therefore, so when: Jn. xiii. 12, 31 [(80) 
Rec.be* L T Tr WH]; xix. 80; xxi. 15; 1. q. hence it 
came to pass that, when ete., Jn. ii. 22; xix.6,8. ὡς οὖν, 
when (or after) therefore: Jn. iv. 1, 40; xi. 63 xviii. 6; 
XX. 115; xxi. 9; ds οὖν, as therefore, Col. ii. 6. ὥσπερ οὖν, 
Mt. xiii. 40. μὲν οὖν, foll. by δέ [ef. B. § 149, 16], Mk. 
xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. οὖν] ; Jn. xix. 25; Actsi. 6; viii. 4, 
253 1 Co. ix. 25, ete.; without an adversative conjunc. 
following, see μέν, I. 4. νῦν οὖν, see above under a., and 
b. y- h. As to position, it is never the first word 
in the sentence, but generally the second, sometimes the 
third, [sometimes even the fourth, W. § 61, 6]; as, 
[περὶ τῆς βρώσεως οὖν etc. 1 Co. viii. 4]; οἱ μὲν οὖν, Acts 
ii. 41, and often; πολλὰ μὲν οὖν, Jn. xx. 30. i. John 
uses this particle in his Gospel far more frequently 
[(more than two hundred times in all)] than the other 
N. T. writers; in his Epistles only in the foll. passages: 
1 Jn. ii. 24 (where GL T Tr WH have expunged it) ; iv. 
19 Lehm.; 3 Jn. 8. [(From Hom. down.)] 

οὔπω, (fr. οὐ and the enclitie πώ), adv., [fr. Hom. 
down], (differing fr. μήπω, as οὐ does fr. μή [4- v. ad 
init.]), not yel; a. in a negation: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. 
xiii. 7; Jn. ii. 4; iii. 24; vi. 17 Ltxt. T Tr WH; vii. 6, 85 
RL WH txt., 8°, 30,39; viii. 20, 57; xi. 30; xx. 17; 1 
Co. iii. 2; Heb. ii. 8; xii. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 2; Rev. xvii. 10, 
12 (where Lehm. οὐκ) ; οὐδεὶς οὔπω, no one ever yet (see 
οὐδείς, 2, and cf. οὐ, 3.a.), Mk. xi. 2 L T Tr WH; Lk. 
xxiii. 53 L Tr WH; Acts viii. 16 Rec. b. in ques- 
tions, nondumne? do ye not yet ete.: Mt. xv.17 RG; 
xvi. 9; Mk. iv. 40 L Tr WH; viii. 17, [21 L txt. T Tr 
WH)" 

οὐρά, -as, 7, α tail: Rev. ix. 10,19; xii. 4. 
down; Sept. several times for 331.) * 

οὐράνιος, -ov, in class. Grk. generally of three term. 
[W. § 11, 1; B. 25 (23)], (οὐρανός), heavenly, i. 6. a. 
dwelling in heaven: ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ovp., Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32; xv. 


(From Hom. 


464 


ld 
οὐρανός 


13; besides LT Tr WH in v. 48; xviii. 35; xxiii. 9; 
στρατιὰ ovp. Lk. ii. 13 (where Tr txt. WH mrg. οὐρα- 


vod). _  b. coming from heaven: ὀπτασία ovp. Acts 
xxvi. 19. (Hom. in Cer. 55; Pind., Trage., Arstph., 
al.) * 


οὐρανόθεν, (οὐρανός), adv., from heaven: Acts xiv. 17; 
xxvi. 13. (Hom., Hes., Orph., 4 Mace. iv.10.) Cf. Lod. 
ad Phryn. p. 93 sq.* 

οὐρανός, -ov, ὁ, [fr.a root meaning ‘ to cover,’ ‘ encom- 
pass’; οἵ. Vanicek p. 895; Curtius § 509], heaven; and, 
in imitation of the Hebr. Οὐ (i.e. prop. the heights 
above, the upper regions), οὐρανοί, τῶν, οἱ, the heavens [W. 
§ 27, 3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the 
art. ef. W. 121 (115)), i. 6. 1. the vaulted expanse 
of the sky with all the things visible in it; a. gener- 
ally: as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10, 
12; 6 ovp. x. ἡ γῆ, [heaven and earth] i. q. the universe, the 
world, (ace. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking, 
inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the 
name of the universe, Gen. i. 1; xiv. 19; Tob. vii. 17 (18); 
1 Mace. ii. 37, ete.) : Mt. v.18; xi. 25; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 
81; Lk. x. 21; xvi. 17; xxi. 33; Actsiv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 
24; Rev. x.6; xiv. 7; xx.11. The ancients conceived of 
the expanded sky as an arch or yault the outmost edge of 
which touched the extreme limits of the earth [see B. D. 
s. v. Firmament, ef. Heaven]; hence such expressions as 
an’ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν, Mt. xxiv. 31; ἀπ᾽ 
ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ, Mk. xiii. 27; ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 
(Daw NNN, Eccl. i. 13; ii. 3, ete.), under heaven, i. e. 
on earth, Acts ii. 5; iv.12; Col. i. 23; ἐκ τῆς (se. χώρας, 
cf. W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (71 sq.) ]) ὑπ’ [here L T Tr WH 
ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ.] οὐρανὸν εἰς τὴν ὑπ᾽ οὐρανόν, vut of the one part 
under the heaven unto the other part under heaven i.e. from 
one quarter of the earth to the other, Lk. xvii. 24; as by 
this form of expression the greatest longitudinal distance 
is described, so to one looking up from the earth heaven 
stands as the extreme measure of altitude; hence, κολ- 
λᾶσθαι ἄχρι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Rey. xviii. 5 [L T Tr WH] (on 
which see κολλάω) ; ὑψωθῆναι ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, metaph. of 
a city that has reached the acme, zenith, of glory and 
prosperity, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15, (κλέος οὐρανὸν ἵκει, Hom. 
Il. 8, 192; Od. 19, 108; πρὸς οὐρανὸν βιβάζειν τινά, Soph. 
O. C. 382 (381); exx. of similar expressions fr. other 
writ. are given in Kypke, Observy. i. p. 62); καινοὶ οὐρανοί 
(καὶ γῆ καινή). better heavens which will take the place of 
the present after the renovation of all things, 2 Pet. iii. 
13; Rey. xxi. 1; of viv οὐρανοί, the heavens which now 
are, and which will one day be burnt up, 2 Pet. iii. 7; also 
ὁ πρῶτος οὐρανός, Rev. xxi. 1, cf. Heb. xii. 26. But the 
heavens are also likened in poetic speech to an expanded 
curtain or canopy (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2; Is. xl. 22), and to 
an unrolled scroll ; hence, ἑλίσσειν [Τ᾿ Tr mrg. ἀλλάσσειν] 
τοὺς ovp. ὡς περιβόλαιον, Heb. i. 12 (fr. Sept. of Ps. ci. 
(cii.) 26 cod. Alex.) ; καὶ 6 ovp. ἀπεχωρίσθη ὡς βιβλίον 
ἑλισσόμενον [or εἵἷλισσ.], Rev. vi. 14. b. the aerial 
heavens or sky, the region where the clouds and tempests 
gather, and where thunder and lightning are produced: 
ὁ ovp. πυρράζει, Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the pass.]4 


οὐρανός 


στυγνάζων, ib. 3 [see last ref.]; ὑετὸν ἔδωκε, Jas. v. 18; 
add Lk. ix. 54; xvii. 29; Actsix. 3 xxii. 6; Rev. xiii. 13; 
xvi. 21; xx. 9; σημεῖον ἐκ Or ἀπὸ τοῦ ovp., Mt. xvi. 1; Mk. 
yiil. 11; Lk. xi. 16; xxi. 11; τέρατα ἐν τῷ ovp. Acts ii. 
19; κλείειν τὸν οὐρανόν, to keep the rain in the sky, hin- 
der it from falling on the earth, Lk. iv. 25; Rev. xi. 6, 
(συνέχειν τὸν ovp. for DW Ay, Deut. xi. 17; 2 Chr. 
vi. 26; vii. 13; ἀνέχειν τὸν ovp. Sir. xlviii. 3); αἱ νεφέλαι 
τοῦ ovp., Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; τὸ πρόσω- 
mov τοῦ ovp., Mt. xvi. 3['T br. WH reject the pass.]; Lk. 
xii. 56; τὰ πετεινὰ τ. ovp. (gen. of place), that fly in the 
air (Gen. i. 26; Ps. viii. 9; Bar. iii. 17; Judith xi. 7), 
Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 32; Lk. viii. 5; ix. 
58; xiii. 19; Acts x.12. These heavens are opened by 
being cleft asunder, and from the upper heavens, or 
abode of heavenly beings, come down upon earth — now 
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Mk.i.10; Lk. iii. 21 sq.; Jn. 
i. 32; now angels, Jn. i. 51 (52); and now in vision ap- 
pear to human sight some of the things within the high- 
est heaven, Acts vii. 55; x. 11, 16; through the aerial 
heavens sound voices, which are uttered in the heavenly 
abode: Mt. iii. 17; Mk. i. 11; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. xii. 28; 2 
Pet. i. 18. ce. the sidereal or starry heavens: 
τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ ovp. Heb. xi. 12 (Deut. i. 10; x. 22; Eur. 
Phoen. 1); of ἀστέρες τ. ovp., Mk. xiii. 25; Rev. vi. 13; 
xii. 4, (Is. xiii. 10; xiv. 13); ai δυνάμεις τῶν ovp. the 
heavenly forces (hosts), i. e. the stars [al. take δυν. in this 
phrase in a general sense (see δύναμις, f.) of the powers 
which uphold and regulate the heavens]: Mt. xxiv. 29; 
Lk. xxi. 26; ai ἐν τοῖς ovp. Mk. xiii. 25, (Hebr. say 
D:DWH, Deut. xvii. 3; Jer. xxxiii. 22; Zeph. i. 5); so ἡ 
στρατιὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Acts vil. 42. 2. the region above 
the sidereal heavens, the seat of an order of things eternal 
and consummately perfect, where God dwells and the other 
heavenly beings: this heaven Paul, in 2 Co. xii. 2, seems 
to designate by the name of ὁ τρίτος ovp., but certainly 
not the third of the seven distinct heavens described by 
the author of the Test. xii. Patr., Levi § 3, and by the 
Rabbins [(ef. Wetstein ad loc. ; Hahn, Theol. ἃ. N. T. i. 
247 sq.; Drummond, Jewish Messiah, ch. xv.)]; ef. De 
Wette ad loc. Several distinct heavens are spoken of 
also in Eph. iv. 10 (ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν op.) ; cf. Heb. 
vii. 26, if it be not preferable here to understand the nu- 
merous regions or parts of the one and the same heaven 
where God dwells as referred to. The highest heaven 
is the dwelling-place of God: Mt. v. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts 
vii. 49; Rev. iv. 1 sqq., (Ps. x. (xi.) 4; exiii. 24 (exv. 16 
sq-)); hence θεὸς τοῦ οὐρ., Rey. xi. 13; xvi. 11, (Gen. 
xxiv. 8); ὁ ἐν (τοῖς) οὐρ., Mt. v.16, 45; vi. 1,9; vii. 21; 
x.33; xii. 50; xvi. 17; xviii. 10 [here L WH mrg. ἐν τῷ 
οὐρανῷ in br.], 14,19; Mk. xi. 25 sq., ete. From this 
heaven the πνεῦμα dy. is sent down, 1 Pet. i. 12 and the 
pass. already cited [ef. 1 b. sub fin.]; and Christ is said 
to have come, Jn. iii. 13, 31; vi. 38,41 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 47; 
it is the abode of the angels, Mt. xxiv. 36; xxii. 30; xviii. 
10; xxviii. 2; Mk. xii. 25; xiii. 32; Lk. ii. 155 xxii. 43 
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; Gal. 1. 8 ; 1 Co. viii. 5; Eph. 
iil. 15; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. x.1; xii. 7; xviii. 1; xix. 14, 


465 


ς 
ous 


(Gen. xxi. 17; xxii. 11); τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς καὶ τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς 
γῆς, the things and beings in the heavens (i. e. angels) 
and on the earth, Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 16, 20; γίνεται τὸ 
θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν οὐρανῷ, i.e. by the inhabitants of 
heaven, Mt. vi. 10; χαρὰ ἔσται ἐν τῷ ovp., God and the 
angels will rejoice, Lk. xv. 7. this heaven is the abode 
to which Christ ascended after his resurrection, Mk. 
xvi. 19; Lk. xxiv. 51 [T om. WH reject the cl.]; Acts i. 
10sq.; 11. 34; iii. 21; Ro. x. 6: [Eph. i. 20 Lehm. txt.]; 1 
Pet. iii. 22; Heb. i. 4 (ἐν ὑψηλοῖς) ; viii. 1; ix. 24; Rev. 
iv. 2, and from which he will hereafter return, 1 Th. i. 
10; iv. 16; 2 Th. i. 7; into heaven have already been 
received the souls (πνεύματα) both of the O. T. saints 
and of departed Christians, Heb. xii. 23 (see ἀπογράφω, 
b. fin.), and heaven is appointed as the future abode of 
those who, raised from the dead and clothed with supe- 
rior bodies, shall become partakers of the heavenly king- 
dom, 2 Co. v. 1, and enjoy the reward of proved virtue, 
Mt. v.12; Lk. vi. 23; hence eternal blessings are called 
θησαυρὸς ἐν οὐρανῷ. Mt. vi. 20; Lk. xii. 33, and those on 
whom God has conferred eternal salvation are said ἔχειν 
θησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ (-vois), Mt. xix. 21; Mk. x. 21; Lk. 
xviii. 22, cf. Heb. x. 34 [RG]; or the salvation awaiting 
them is said to be laid up for them in heaven, Col. i. 5; 
1 Pet. i.4; or their names are said to have been written 
in heaven, Lk. x. 20; moreover, Christ, appointed by 
God the leader and lord of the citizens of the divine 
kingdom, is said to have all power in heaven and on 
earth, Mt. xxviii. 18; finally, the seer of the Apocalypse 
expects a new Jerusalem to come down out of heaven as 
the metropolis of the perfectly established Messianic 
kingdom, Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2,10. By meton. 6 οὐρανός is 
put for the inhabitants of heaven : εὐφραίνου οὐρανέ, Rev. 
xviii. 20, ef. xii. 12, (Ps. xev. (xevi.) 11; Is. xliv. 23; Job 
xv. 15); in particular for God (Dan. iv. 23, and often by 
the Rabbins, influenced by an over-serupulous reverence 
for the names of God himself; ef. Schiirer in the Jahrbb. 
f. protest. Theol., 1876, p. 178 sq.; [Keil, as below]): 
ἁμαρτάνειν eis τὸν ovp., Lk. xv. 18, 21 ; ἐκ τοῦ οὐρ., i. 4. by 
God, Jn. iii. 27; ἐξ ovp., of divine authority, Mt. xxi. 25; 
Mk. xi. 30; Lk. xx. 4; ἐναντίον τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, 1 Mace. iii. 
18 (where the τοῦ θεοῦ before τοῦ οὐρ. seems question- 
able) ; ἐκ τοῦ ovp. ἡ ἰσχύς, ib. 19; ἡ ἐξ οὐρ. βοήθεια, xii. 
15; xvi. 8, ef. iii. 50-53, 59; iv. 10, 24, 30, 40,55; v. 31; 
vii. 37, 41; ix. 46; οἵ. Keil, Comm. iib. ἃ. Biich. ἃ. Mace. 
p- 20. On the phrase ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρ. and its meaning, 
see βασιλεία, 3; [Cremer s. v. Bac.; Edersheim i. 265]. 

Οὐρβανός, -od, 6, [a Lat. name; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on 
Philip. p. 174], Urbanus, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 9.* 

Οὐρίας, -ov [B. 17 sq. (16) no. 8], 6, (AMMAN light of Je- 
hovah [or, my light is Jehovah]), Uriah, the husband of 
Bathsheba the mother of Solomon by David: Mt. i. 6.* 

οὖς, gen. ὠτός, plur. dra, dat. ὠσίν, τό, [ef. Lat. auris, 
ausculto, audio, ete.; akin to ἀΐω, αἰσθάνομαι ; ef. Curtius 
§ 619; Vaniéek p. 67]; fr. Hom. down; Hebr. {πὸ} the 
ear; 1. prop.: Mt. xiii. 16; Mk. vii. 33; Lk. xxii. 
50; 1Co.ii. 9; xii. 16; ὦτά τινος εἰς δέησιν, to hear sup- 
plication, 1 Pet. iii. 12; ἡ γραφὴ πληροῦται ἐν τοῖς ὦσι 


οὐσια 


τινος, while present and hearing, Lk. iv. 21 (Bar. i. 8 
sq-); those unwilling to hear a thing are said συνέχειν 
[q. ¥. 2a.] τὰ dra, to stop their ears, Acts vii. 57 ; ἠκούσθη 
τι εἰς Ta ὦτά τινος, something was heard by, came to the 
knowledge of [A. V. came to the ears of | one, Acts xi. 22; 
likewise εἰσέρχεσθαι, Jas. v. 4; γίνεσθαι, to come unto the 
ears of one, Lk. i. 44; ἀκούειν εἰς τὸ οὖς, to hear [A. V. 
in the ear i. 6.7 in familiar converse, privately, Mt. x. 27 
(eis οὖς often so in class. Grk.; cf. Passow [L. and S.] 
s. v. 1); also πρὸς τὸ οὖς λαλεῖν, Lk. xii. 3. 2. met- 
aph. i. q. the faculty of perceiving with the mind, the fac- 
ulty of understanding and knowing : Mt. xiii. 16; ὁ ἔχων 
(or εἴ τις ἔχει) Sra (or οὖς, in Rev.) [sometimes (esp. in 
Mk. and Lk.) with ἀκούειν added ; cf. B. § 140, 3] ἀκουέτω, 
whoever has the faculty of attending and understanding, 
let him use it, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9,43; Mk. iv. 9, 23; vii. 
16 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; Lk. viii. 8; xiv. 35 (34); 
Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 18, 22; xiii. 9; rots ὠσὶ Ba- 
péws ἀκούειν, to be slow to understand or obey [A. V. 
their ears are dull of hearing], Mt. xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 
27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) ; ὦτα ἔχοντες οὐκ ἀκούετε, Mk. viii. 18; 
ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, [ears that they should not hear; cf. B. 
267 (230)], Ro. xi. 8; θέσθε τ. λόγους τούτους εἰς τὰ ὦτα, 
[A. V. let these words sink into your ears 1. 6.1 take them 
into your memory and hold them there, Lk. ix. 44; ἀπε- 
ρίτμητος τοῖς ὠσίν (see ἀπερίτμητος), Acts vii. 51.* 

οὐσία, -as, ἡ, (fr. dv, οὖσα. ὄν, the ptep. of εἰμί), what 
one has, i.e. property, possessions, estate, [ A.V. substance]: 
Lk. xv. 12sq. (Tob. xiv. 13; Hdt. 1, 92; Xen., Plat., 
Attic oratt., al.) * 

οὔτε, (ov and τέ), an adjunctive negative conj., [fr. 
Hom. down], (differing fr. μήτε as οὐ does fr. μή [q. v. ad 
init.], and fr. οὐδέ as μήτε does fr. μηδέ; see pyre and 
οὐδέ), neither; and not. 1. Examples in which οὔτε 
stands singly : a. οὐ... οὔτε, Rev. xii. 8 Rec. (where 
GL T Tr WH οὐδέ); xx. 4 RG (where L T Tr WH 
οὐδέν ; οὐδεὶς ἄξιος εὑρέθη ἀνοῖξαι τὸ βιβλίον οὔτε βλέπειν 
αὐτό, Rev. ν. 4; cf. W.491 (457); Β. 367 (315); οὐ... 
οὐδὲ... οὔτε, 1 Th. ii. 8 RG (where L T Tr WH more 
correctly οὐδέ) [W.493 (459); B. 368 (315)]; οὐδὲ... 
οὔτε (so that οὔτε answers only to the ov in οὐδέ), Gal. i. 
12 Β GT WH txt. [W. 492 (458) ; B. 366 (814). Ὁ. 
οὔτε. .. καί, like Lat. neque ... et, neither. . .and: Jn. iv. 
11; 3 Jn. 10, (Eur. Iph. T. 591; but the more common 
Grk. usage was ov... τέ, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 
714; Passow 5. ν. Β. 2; [L. and 5. 8. νυ. II. 4]; W. § 55, 
7; [Β. ὃ 149, 13 c.]). c. By a solecism οὔτε is put 
for οὐδέ, not... even: 1 Co. iii. 2 Rec. (where G LT Tr 
WH οὐδέ) [W. 493 (459); B. 367 (315); § 149, 13 £.]; 
Mk. v.3 RG (where L T Tr WH have restored οὐδέ 
[W. 490 (456); B. u.s.]); Lk. xii. 26 RG (where L T 
Tr WH οὐδέ [W. u. s. and 478 (445); B. 347 (298)]); 
οὔτε μετενόησαν, Rev. ix. 20 RL Tr (where G WH txt. 
ov, T οὐδέ not . . . even; WH mre. οὔτε or οὐδέ [cf. B. 367 
(315) ]); after the question μὴ δύναται .. . σῦκα ; follows 
οὔτε ἁλυκὸν γλυκὺ ποιῆσαι ὕδωρ, Jas. iii. 12 GL T Tr WH 
(as though οὔτε δύναται... σῦκα had previously been in 
the writer’s mind [οἵ. W. 493 (459); B.u.s.]). 2. 


466 


- 
OUTNS 


used twice or more, neither... nor, (Lat. nec... nec; 
neque... neque) : Mt. vi. 20; xxii. 30; Mk. xii. 25; [xiv. 
68 L txt. T Tr WH]; Lk. xiv. 35 (34); Jn. iv. 21; v. 
37; viii. 19; ix.3; Acts xv. 10; xix. 37; xxv. 8; xxviii. 
21; Ro. viii. 38 sq. (where οὔτε occurs ten times); 1 Co. 
ili. 7; vi. 9sq. (οὔτε eight times [yet T WH Tr mrg. the 
eighth time ov]); xi. 11; Gal. v. 6; vi. 15; 1 Th. ii. 6; 
Rev. iii. 15 sq.; ix. 20; xxi. 4; οὔτε. .. οὔτε . . . οὐδέ 
(Germ. auch nicht, also not), L Tr WH in Lk. xx. 35 sq., 
and L T Tr mrg. WH in Acts xxiv. 12 sq.; cf. W. 491 
(457 sq.) ; B. 368 (315) note. 

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demonstrative pron. [ef. Curtius p. 
543], Hebr. 71, ΠΝ, this; used 

I. absolutely. 1. a. this one, visibly present 
here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq.; ix. 
35; 2 Pet.i.17. Mt.ix.3; xxi. 38; Mk. xiv. 69; Lk. 
11. 34; xxiii. 2; Jn. i. 15, 30; vii. 25; ix. 8 54. 19; xviii. 
21,50; xxi. 21; Actsii. 15; iv. 10; ix. 21; according to 
the nature and character of the person or thing men- 
tioned, it is used with a suggestion —either of con- 
tempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 2 sq.: Lk. v. 21; vii. 
39,49; Jn. vi. 42,52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt. 
xxi. 11; Actsix.21; οἵ, Wahl, Clavis apocryphor. V. T. 
p- 370% b. it refers to a subject immediately pre- 
ceding, the one just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 37 [RGL]; 
Jn. i. 2; vi. 71; 2 Tim. iii. 6,8, ete.; at the beginning of 
a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3; Lk. 
xvi. 1; Jn. i. 41 (42); ili. 2; xii. 21; xxi. 21; Acts vii. 
19; xxi. 24. this one just mentioned and no other: Jn. 
ix. 9; Acts iv. 10 (ἐν τούτῳ) ; ix. 20; 1 Jn. v.63; such as 
1 have just described, 2 Tim. iii. 5; 2 Pet. 11. 17. καὶ 
οὗτος, this one just mentioned also, i. e. as well as the 
rest, Lk. xx.30 R GL; Heb. viii. 8. καὶ τοῦτον, and 
him too, and him indeed, 1 Co. ii. 2. c. it refers to 
the leading subject of a sentence although in position 
more remote (W. § 23,1; [Β. 8 127, 3]): Acts iv. 11; 
vii. 19; viii. 26 (on which see Γάζα sub fin.); 1 Jn. v. 20 
(where οὗτος is referred by [many] orthodox interpre- 
ters incorrectly [(see Alford ad loc.; W. and B. Il. ec.)] 
to the immediately preceding subject, Christ); 2 Jn. 
Te ἃ. it refers to what follows; οὗτος, αὕτη ἐστί, in 
this appears ... that etc.; on this depends ... that ete.: 
foll. by ὅτι, as αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐπαγγελία, ὅτι, 1 Jn. i. 5; add, 
vy. 11, 14; —by iva, Jn. xv. 12; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23; ν. 8; 2 Jn. 
6; τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ ἔργον, τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ, ἵνα, In. vi. 29, 
39 sq. e. it serves to repeat the subject with em- 
phasis: οὐ πάντες of ἐξ Ἰσραήλ, οὗτοι Ἰσραήλ, Ro. ix. 6 ; 
add, ib. 8; ii. 14 [Lmrg. of τοιοῦτοι] ; vii. 10; Gal. iii. 7; 
it refers, not without special force, to a description given 
by a participle or by the relative ὅς, ὅστις ; which de- 
scription either follows, as Mk. iv. 16, 18; Lk. viii. 15, 
21; ix.9; Jn. xi. 37; foll. by a relative sentence, Jn. i. 
15; 1 Pet. ν. 12;—or precedes: in the form of a parti- 
ciple, Mt. x. 22; xiii. 20, 22 sq.; xxiv. 13; xxvi. 23; Mk. 
xii. 40; Lk. ix. 48 (6... ὑπάρχων, οὗτος) ; In. vi. 46; 
vii. 18; xv.5; 2Jn.9; Acts xvii.7; (and RG in Rev. 
iii. 5); or of the relative ὅς, Mt. v.19; Mk. iii. 35; Lk. 
ix. 24,26; Jn. i. 33 [here Lmrg. αὐτός}; iii. 26; v. 38 


οὗτος 


Ro. viii. 30; 1 Co. vii. 20; Heb. xiii. 11; 1 Jn. ii. δ; 2 Pet. 
ii. 19; in the neut., Jn. viii. 26; Ro. vii. 16 1 Co. vii. 24; 
Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim. ii. 2; or of a preceding ὅστις, Mt. 
xviii. 4; in the neut. Phil. iii. 7. ὅσοι - . . οὗτοι, Ro. viii. 
14; Gal. vi. 12; also preceded by εἴ τις, 1 Co. iii. 17 
[here Lehm. αὐτός]; viii. 3; Jas. i. 23; ili. 2; by ἐάν tes, 
Jn. ix. 31; cf. W-. § 23, 4. f. with αὐτός annexed, 
this man himself, Acts xxv. 25; plur. these themselves, 
Acts xxiv. 15,20; on the neut. see below, 2a.b.etce. β.: 
As the relat. and interrog. pron. so also the demonstra- 
tive, when it is the subject, conforms in gender and 
number to the noun in the predicate : οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ viol 
τῆς Bac. Mt. xiii. 38; add, Mk. iv. 15 sq. 18; αὕτη ἐστὶν 
ἡ μεγάλη ἐντολή, Mt. xxii. 38; οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος (Germ. 
diese sind), 2 Jn. 7. 2. The neuter τοῦτο a. 
refers to what precedes: Lk. v. 6; Jn. vi. 61; Acts xix. 
17; τοῦτο εἰπών and the like, Lk. xxiv. 40 [T om. Trbr. 
WH reject the vs.]; Jn. iv. 18; viii. 6; xii. 33; xviii. 
38; διὰ τοῦτο, see διά, B. II. 23 ἃ.; εἰς τοῦτο, see εἰς, B. I. 
8 6. β.: αὐτὸ τοῦτο, for this very cause, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. 
αὐτοί]; cf. Matthiae § 470,7; Passow s. v. C. 1 a. fin. ; 
[L. and 5. 5. v. C. IX. 1 fin.; W. § 21, 3note 2; Kiihner 
§ 410 Anm. 6]; pera τοῦτο, see μετά, II. 2b. ἐκ τούτου, 
for this reason [see ἐκ, II. 8], Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; from 
this, i. 6. hereby, by this note, 1 Jn. iv. 6 [ef. Westcott ad 
loc.]. ἐν τούτῳ, for this cause, Jn. xvi. 30; Acts xxiv. 
16; hereby, by this token, 1 Jn. iii. 19. ἐπὶ τούτῳ, in the 
meanwhile, while this was going on [but see ἐπί, B. 2 e. 
fin. p. 234], Jn. iv. 27. τούτου χάριν, Eph. iii. 14. plur. 
ταῦτα, Jn. vii. 4 (these so great, so wonderful, things); 
μετὰ ταῦτα, see μετά, Il. 2b. κατὰ ταῦτα, in this same 
manner, Ree. in Lk. vi. 23, and xvii. 30, [al. τὰ αὐτά or 
ταὐτά]. it refers to the substance of the preceding dis- 
course: Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27; xxiv. 26; Jn. v.34; xv. 11; xxi. 
24, and very often. καθὼς .... ταῦτα. Jn. viii. 28. b. 
it prepares the reader or hearer and renders him atten- 
tive to what follows, which thus gets special weight (W. 
§ 23,5): 1Jn. iv. 2; αὐτὸ τοῦτο ὅτι, Phil. i. 6 ; τοῦτο λέγω 
foll. by direct discourse, Gal. iii. 17 [see λέγω, II. 2 d.]. 
it is prefixed to sentences introduced by the particles 
ὅτι, ἵνα, etc.: τοῦτο λέγω or φημί foll. by ὅτι, 1 Co. i. 12 
[(see λέγω u.s.); 1 Co. vii. 29]; xv. 50; γινώσκεις τοῦτο 
foll. by ὅτι, Ro. vi. 6; 2 Tim. iii. 1; 2 Pet. i. 20; iii. 3; 
λογίζεσθαι τοῦτο ὅτι, Ro. ii. 3; after ὁμολογεῖν, Acts xxiv. 
14; after εἰδώς, 1 Tim. 1. 9; ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, 1 Jn. iii. 16, 24; 
iv. 9 sq.; τοῦτο, ἵνα, Lk. i. 43; eis τοῦτο, ἵνα, Acts ix. 21; 
Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. 111. 9; ἵν. δ; 1Jn. 111. 8; διὰ 
τοῦτο, wa, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15; τούτων 
(on this neut. plur. referring to a single object see W. 
162 (153); [ef. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 41]), ἵνα, 3 
Jn. 4; ἐν τούτῳ, ἐάν, 1 Jn. ii. 3; ὅταν, 1 Jn. v. 2; τοῦτο 
αὐτὸ, iva, on this very account, that (see a. above [but oth- 
ers take it here as acc. of obj.; see Meyer ad loc. (for 
instances of αὐτὸ τοῦτο see B. § 127, 12)]}), 2 Co. ii. 3; 
eis αὐτὸ τοῦτο, wa, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; ὅπως, Ro. ix. 
17. In the same manner τοῦτο is put before an infin. 
with τό for the sake of emphasis [W. § 28, 5; B. § 140, 
7, 9, ete.]: 2 Co. ii. 1; before a simple infin. 1 Co. vii. 37 


467 


2 
OUTOS$ 


[here RG prefix τοῦ to the inf.]; before an ace. and inf. 
Eph. iv. 17; before nouns, as τοῦτο εὔχομαι, τὴν ὑμῶν 
κατάρτισιν, 2 Co. xiii. 9, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 24; v. 4. ο. καὶ 
τοῦτο. and this, and that too, and indeed, especially: Ro. 
xiii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 6, L T Tr WH also in 8; Eph. ii. 8; 
καὶ ταῦτα, and that too, 1 Co. vi. 8 Ree.; Heb. xi. 12; (so 
καὶ ταῦτα also in class. Grk. ; ef. Devar. ed. Klotz i. p. 108 ; 
Viger. ed. Herm. p. 176 sq.; Matthiae § 470, 6). d. 
ταῦτα, of this sort, such, spoken contemptuously of men, 
1 Co. vi. 11 (cf. Soph. O. R. 1329; Thue. 6, 77; Liv. 30, 
30; cf. Bnhdy. p. 281; [W. 162 (153)]). 6. τοῦτο 
μὲν - -- τοῦτο δέ, partly... partly, Heb. x. 33 (for exx. 
fr. Grk. auth. see W. 142 (135); Matthiae ii. § 288 
Anm. 2; [Kiihner ὃ 527 Anm. 2)). 
see εἰμί, 11. 3 p. 176°. 

II. Joined to nouns itis used like an adjective ; a. 
so that the article stands between the demonstrative and 
the noun, οὗτος ὁ, αὕτη ἧ, τοῦτο τό, [cf. W. § 23 fin.; B. 
§ 127, 29]: Mt. xii. 32; xvi. 18; xvii. 21[T WH om. Tr 
br. the vs.]; xx. 12; xxvi. 29; Mk. ix. 29; Lk. vii. 44; x. 
36; xiv. 30; xv. 24; Jn. iv. 15; vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr 
br. the cl.]; viii. 20; x.6; xi.47; xii.5; Actsi. 11; Ro. 
xi. 24; 1 Tim.i.18; Heb. vii. 1; viii. 10; [1 Jn. iv. 21]; 
Rey. xix. 9; xx. 14; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, ete.; τοῦτο τὸ παιδίον, 
such a little child as ye see here, Lk. ix. 48; cf. Borne- 
mann ad loc. [who takes τοῦτο thus as representing the 
class, ‘this and the like;’ but cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad 
loc. ]. b. so that the noun stands between the arti- 
cle and the demonstrative [ef. W. 548 (510) ]; as, of λίθοι 
οὗτοι, the stones which ye see lying near, Mt. iii. 9; iv. 
8; add, Mt.v.19; vii. 24 [L Tr WH br. τούτους], 26, 28 ; 
ix. 26 [Trmrg. WH mrg. αὐτῆς] ; x. 23, ete.; Mk. xii. 16; 
xiii. 30; Lk. xi. 31; xxiii. 47; Jn. iv. 13, 21; vii. 49; xi. 9; 
xviii. 29; Acts vi. 13; xix. 26; Ro. xv. 28; 1Co.i. 20; 
ii. 6; xi. 26; 2Co.iv.1,7; viii.6; xi.10; xii. 13; Eph. 
iii. 8; v. 32; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Rev. ii. 24, and very often — 
(which constr. is far more freq. with Paul than the other 
[see W. u.s.]); it is added to a noun which has another 
adjective, ἡ χήρα ἡ πτωχὴ αὕτη, Lk. xxi. 3; πάντα τὰ 
ῥήματα ταῦτα, Lk. ii. 19, 561 [(Τ WH Limrg. om. Ltxt. Tr 
mre. br. ταῦτα) ; ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς THs σκολιᾶς ταύτης, Acts 
ii. 401. ec. Passages in which the reading varies 
between οὗτος 6 and 6... οὗτος : viz. οὗτος ὁ, Mk. xiv. 
30 Ltxt. T Tr WH; Jn.iv.20R Lmrg.; Jn. vi.60R G; 
Jn. vii. 36 RG; Jn. ix. 24 L WH Tr mrg.; Jn. xxi. 23 
LT Tr WH. 6... οὗτος, Mk. xiv. 30R GLmrg.; Jn. 
iv. 20G Ltxt. T Tr WH; Jn. vi.60 L T Tr WH; Jn. vii. 
36LT Tr WH; Jn. ix. 24 GT Tr txt.; Jn. xxi. 23 RG; 
ete. ἃ. with anarthrous nouns, esp. numerical 
specifications [W. § 37, 5 N. 1]: τρίτον τοῦτο, this third 
time, 2 Co. xiii. 1; τοῦτο τρίτον, Jn. xxi. 14, (Judg. xvi. 
15; δεύτερον τοῦτο, Gen. xxvil. 36; τοῦτο δέκατον, Num. 
xiv. 22 ; τέταρτον τοῦτο, Hdt. 5,76). [The passages which 
follow, although introduced here by Prof. Grimm, are 
(with the exception of Acts i. 5) clearly instances of the 
predicative use of οὗτος ; cf. W. 110 (105) note; B. 
§ 127, 31; Rost ὃ 98, 3 A.c. a. sq.]: τοῦτο πάλιν δεύτερον 
σημεῖον ἐποίησεν, Jn. iv. 54; τρίτην ταύτην ἡμέραν ἄγει; 


roth Ξ 
f. τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, 


“ 
ουτῶω 


this is the third day that Israel is passing [but see ἄγω, 
3], Lk. xxiv. 21 (κεῖμαι τριακοστὴν ταύτην ἡμέραν, this is 
now the thirtieth day that I lie (unburied), Leian. dial. 
mort. 13, 3); οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας (see μετά, 1. 
2 Ὁ. [W. 161 (152); B. § 127, 4]), Acts i. 5; οὗτος μὴν 
ἕκτος ἐστὶν αὐτῇ, this is the sixth month with her ete. Lk. 
i. 36; αὕτη ἀπογραφὴ πρώτη ἐγένετο, Lk. ii. 2.1, (T) Tr 
WIL; ταύτην ἐποίησεν ἀρχὴν τῶν σημείων, Jn. ii. 11 L T 
Tr WH. 

οὕτω and οὕτως (formerly in printed editions οὕτω 
appeared before a consonant, οὕτως before a vowel; but 
[recent critical editors, following the best Mss. (“cod. 
Sin. has -ro but fourteen times in the N. T.” Scrivener, 
Collation ete. p. liv.; οἵ. his Introduction ete. p. 561), 
have restored οὕτως; viz. Treg. uniformly, 205 times; 
Taf. 203 times, 4 times + ; Lchm. 196 times, 7 times +w 
(all before a consonant); WH 196 times, 10 times -ro 
(all before a consonant); cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 97; WH. 
App. p- 146 54.7; ef. W. § 5, 1b.; B. 9; [Lob. Pathol. 
Elementa ii. 213 sqq.]; ef. Kriiger § 11, 12, 1; Kiihner 
§72, 3 a.), adv., (fr. οὗτος), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 
13, in this manner, thus, 80; 1. by virtue of its na- 
tive demonstrative force it refers to what precedes; in 
the manner spoken of; in the way described; in the way 
it was done; in this manner; in such a manner; thus, so: 
Mt. vi. 30; xi. 26; xvii.12; xix. 8; Mk. xiv.59; Lk. i. 
25; 11. 48; xii. 28; Ro. xi.5; 1 Co. viii. 12; xv. 11; Heb. 
vi. 9; [2 Pet. iii. 11 WH Tr mrg.]; οὐχ οὕτως ἔσται [L 
Tr WH ἐστὶν (so also T in Mk.) ] ἐν ὑμῖν, it will not be 
so among you (I hope), Mt. xx. 26; Mk. x. 43; ὑμεῖς οὐχ 
οὕτως sc. ἔσεσθε, Lk. xxii. 26; ἐὰν ἀφῶμεν αὐτὸν οὕτως sc. 
ποιοῦντα, thus as he has done hitherto [see ἀφίημι, 2 b.], 
Jn. xi. 48; it refers to similitudes and comparisons, and 
serves to adapt them to the case in hand, Mt. v. 16 (even 
so, i. e. as the lamp on the lamp-stand) ; Mt. xii. 45; xiii. 
49; xviii. 14; xx. 16; Lk. xii. 21 [WH br. the vs.]; xv. 
7,10; Jn. iii. 8; 1 Co. ix. 24; likewise οὕτως καί, Mt. xvii. 
12; xviii. 35; xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. xvii. 10. οὕτως 
ἔχειν, to be so (Lat. sic or ita se habere): Acts vii. 1; xii, 
15; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9. it serves to resume participles 
(Joseph. antt. 8, 11,1; b.j. 2, 8,5; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. 
in Passow s.v.1h.; [L.and 5. 5. ν.1. 77}: Acts xx. 11; 
xxvii. 17; but Jn. iv. 6 must not [with W. § 65, 9 fin.; B. 
§ 144, 21] be referred to this head, see Meyer [and 5 d. 
below]; on Rey. iii. 5, see ὅ 6. below. it takes the place 
of an explanatory participial clause, i. q. matters being 
thus arranged, under these circumstances, in such a con- 
dition of things, [B. § 149,1; ef. W. § 60, 5]: Ro. v. 12 
(this connection between sin and death being established 
[but this explanation of the οὕτως appears to be too gen- 
eral (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]); Heb. vi. 15 (i.e. since God 
had pledged the promise by an oath) ; i. q. things having 
been thus settled, this having been done, then: Mt. xi. 26; 
Acts vii. 8; xxviii. 14 ; 1 Co. xiv. 25; 1 Th.iv.17; 2 Pet. 
i. 11; ef. Fritzsche,Com. ad Rom. i. p. 298. Closely 
related to this use is that of οὕτως (like Lat. ita for itaque, 
igitur) in the sense of consequently [cf. Eng. so at the 
beginning of a sentence]: Mt. vii.17; Ro. i. 15; vi. 11; 


468 


“ 
OUT@ 


Rey. iii. 16, ({ef. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 220]; Passow 5. v. 
2; [L. and S.s. v. {||} 2. it prepares the way 
for what follows : Mt. vi. 9; Lk. xix. 31; Jn. xxi. 1; οὕτως 
ἦν, was arranged thus, was on this wise, [W. 465 (434); 
B. § 129, 11], Mt. i. 18; οὕτως ἐστὶ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ foll. 
by an infin., so is the will of God, that, 1 Pet. ii.15. be- 
fore language quoted from the O. T.: Mt. ii. 5; Acts vii. 
6; xiii. 834, 47; 1 Co. xv. 45; Heb. iv. 4. 3. with 
adjectives, so [Lat. ‘am, marking degree of intensity | : 
Heb. xii. 21; Rev. xvi. 18; postpositive, ri δειλοί ἐστε 
οὕτως; Mk. iv. 40 [L Tr WH om.]; in the same sense 
with adverbs, Gal. i. 6; or with verbs, so greatly, 1 Jn. 
iv. 11; οὕτως .. . ὥστε, Jn. iii. 16. οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως, 
it was never seen in such fashion, i. 6. such an extraor- 
dinary sight, Mt. ix. 33 (ἐφάνη must be taken imperson- 
ally; ef. Bleek, Synopt. Erkliir. i. p. 406 [or Meyer ad 
loc.]) ; οὐδέποτε οὕτως εἴδομεν, we never saw it so, i. 6. 
with such astonishment, Mk. ii. 12. 4. οὕτως or 
οὕτως καί in comparison stands antithetic to an adverb 
or a relative pron. [W. § 53,5; ef. B. 362 (311) ¢.]: κα- 
θάπερ . . . οὕτως, Ro. xii. 4 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 
11; καθὼς... οὕτως, Lk. xi. 80; xvii. 26; Jn. 11]. 14; 
ΧΙϊ 50. RLV. 51. ἂν, 4. 2 OO os exis ἘΠ eee be 
v. 3; οὕτως ... καθώς, Lk. xxiv. 24; Ro. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 
17; os... οὕτως, Acts Vili. 32; xxiii. 11; Ro.v. 15, 18; 
1 Co. vii. 17; 2Co. vii. 14; 1 Th. ii. 8; v. 2; ovras... as, 
Mk. iv. 26; Jn. vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr br. the el.]; 1 Co. 
iii. 15; iv. 1; ix. 26; Eph. v. 28; Jas. ii. 12; οὕτως ὡς .. - 
μὴ ὡς, 2 Co. ix.5 [GL TTr WH]; ὥσπερ... .- οὕτως, Mt. 
xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27, 37, 39; Lk. xvii. 24; Jn. v. 
21, 26; Ro. v. 12, 19, 21; vi. 4; xi. 31; 1 Co. xi.12; xv. 
22; xvi. 1; 2Co.i. 7 RG; Gal. iv. 29; Eph.v. 24 RG; 
after καθ᾽ ὅσον, Heb. ix. 27 sq.; οὕτως... ὃν τρόπον, Acts 
. οὕτως, 2 Tim. iii. 8 (Is. lii. 
14); κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν ἣν λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν οὕτω κτλ. after the 
Way (i. 6. as it requires [ef. ὁδός, 2 a. fin.]) so ete. Acts 
xxiv. 14. 5. Further, the foll. special uses deserve 
notice : a. (ἔχει) ὃς [better 6] μὲν οὕτως ὃς [better 
6] δὲ οὕτως, one after this manner, another after that, i.e. 
different men in different ways, 1 Co. vii. 7 (ποτὲ μὲν 
οὕτως καὶ ποτὲ οὕτως φάγεται ἡ μάχαιρα, 2S. xi.25). db. 
οὕτως, in the manner known to αἰ, 1. 6. ace. to the context, 
so shamefully, 1 Co. v. 8. c. in that state in which 
one finds one’s self, such as one is, [ef. W. 465 (434) ]: τί 
με ἐποίησας οὕτως, Ro. ix. 20; οὕτως εἶναι, μένειν, of those 
who remain unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 26, 40; ὁ νικῶν οὕτως 
περιβαλεῖται Viz. as (i. 6. because he is) victor [al. in the 
manner described in vs. 4], Rev. iii. 5 L T Tr WH. d. 
thus forthwith, i. e. without hesitation [ef. Eng. off-hand, 
without ceremony, and the colloquial right, just]: Jn. iv. 
6; ef. Passow 8. ν. 4 ; [L.and S. s. v. IV.; see 1 above; 
add Jn. xiii. 25 TWH Tr br. (cf. Green, Crit. Notes 
ad loc.) ] 6. in questions (Lat. sicine?) [Eng. ex- 
clamatory so then, what]: Mk. vii. 18 (Germ. sonach) [8]. 
take οὕτως here as expressive of degree. In Mt. xxvi. 
40, however, many give it the sense spoken of; οἵ. too 1 
Co. vi. 5]; οὕτως ἀποκρίνῃ ; 1. 6. so impudently, Jn. xviii. 
22; with an adjective, so (very), Gal. iii. 3. [But these 


1.11 ; xxvii. 25; ὃν τρόπον . . 


ao 469 


exx., although classed together by Fritzsche also (Com. 
on Mark p. 150 sq.), seem to be capable of discrimination. 
The passage from Gal., for instance, does not seem to 
differ essentially from examples under 3 above. ] f 
In class. Grk. οὕτως often, after a conditional, concessive, 
or temporal protasis, introduces the apodosis (cf. Passow 
s.v.1h.; [L.and S.s.v. 1. 7]). 1 Th. iv. 14 and Rev. 
xi. 5 have been referred to thishead; B. 357 (307); [cf. 
W. § 60, 5 (esp. a.)]. But questionably; for in the first 
passage οὕτως may also be taken as equiv. to under these 
circumstances, i. e. if we believe what I have said [better 
ef. W.u. 8.1; in the second passage οὕτως denotes in the 
manner spoken of, i. e. by fire proceeding out of their 
mouth. 

οὐχ, 566 οὐ. 

οὐχί, i. 4- οὐ, ποί, but stronger [ef. νυνί ad init. ] ; a. 
in simple negative sentences, by no means, not at all, 
[A. V. not]: Jn. xiii. 10 μα a πὶν 22,51 Conve) 9. νὴ 1: 
foll. by ἀλλά, 1 Co. x. 29; 2 Co. x. 18 (LT Tr WH οὐκ); 
in denials or contradictions [A. V. nay; not so], Lk. i. 
60; xii. 51; xiii. 3,5; xvi. 30; Ro. iii. 27. b. ina 
question, Lat. nonne ? (asking what no one denies to be 
true): Mt. v. 46 sq.; x. 29; xiii. 27; xx. 13; Lk. vi. 39; 
xvii. 17[L Tr WH οὐχ]; xxiv. 26; Jn. xi. 9; Acts ii. 7 
Tr WH txt.; Ro. ii. 26 (LT Tr WH οὐχ); 1 Co. i. 20; 
Heb. i. 14, ete.; (Sept. for xn, Gen. xl. 8; Judg. iv. 
6); ἀλλ᾽ οὐχί, will he not rather, Lk. xvii. 8. 

ὀφειλέτης, -ov, 6, (ὀφείλω), one who owes another, a 
deblor: prop. of one who owes another money (Plat. 
lege. 5, 736d.; Plut.; al.); with a gen. of the sum due, 
Mt. xviii. 24. Metaph. a. one held by some obliga- 
tion, bound to some duty: ὀφειλέτης εἰμί, i. q. ὀφείλω, foll. 
by an inf., Gal. v. 3 (Soph. Aj. 590); ὀφειλ. εἰμί τινος, 
to be one’s debtor i.e. under obligations of gratitude to 
him for favors received, Ro. xv. 27; τινί (dat. commodi), 
to be under obligation to do something for some one, 
Ro. i. 14; viii. 12. b. one who has not yet made 
amends to one whom he has injured: Mt. vi. 12; in imi- 
tation of the Chald. 3°n, one who owes God penalty or 
of whom God can demand punishment as something due, 
i. e. a sinner, Lk. xiii. 4.* 

ὀφειλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ὀφείλω), that which is owed; prop. a 
debt: Mt. xviii. 32; metaph. plur. dues: Ro. xiii. 7; 
spec. of conjugal duty [R. V. her due], 1 Co. vii. 3 GL 
TTrWH. Found neither in the Grk. O. T. nor in 
prof. auth.; οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90.* 

ὀφείλημα, -ros, τό, (ὀφείλω), that which is ae. a. 
prop. that which is justly or legally due, a debt; so for 
mNwr, Deut. xxiv. 12 (10); ἀφιέναι, 1 Mace. xv. 8; ἀπο- 
τίνειν, Plat. lego. 4 p. 717b.; ἀποδιδόναι, Aristot. eth. 
Nic. 9, 2, 5 [p.1165%, 3]. κατὰ ὀφείλημα, as of debt, Ro. 
iv. 4. b. in imitation of the Chald. 3)n or x2in 
(which denotes both debi and sin), metaph. offence, sin, 
(see ὀφειλέτης, b.); hence, ἀφιέναι τινὶ ra ὀφειλ. αὐτοῦ, te 
remit the penalty of one’s sins, to forgive them, (Chald. 
Pan paw), Mt. vi 12. [Cf W. 30, 32, 33.]* 

ὀφείλω; impf. ὥφειλον ; pres. pass. ptep. ὀφειλόμενος ; 
fr. Hom. down ; to owe; a. prop. to owe money, be 


ὀφθαλμοδουλεία 


in debt for: τινί τι, Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. xvi. 5; without a 
dat., Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 7; Philem. 18; τὸ 
ὀφειλόμενον, that which is due, the debt, Mt. xviii. 30; 
αὐτῷ (which L Tr WHom.), that due to him, ib. 34. b. 
metaph.: ri, pass. τὴν εὔνοιαν ὀφειλομένην, the good-will 
due [A. (not R.) V. due benevolence], 1 Co. vii. 3 Ree. ; 
μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε (here ὀφείλετε, on account of what 
precedes and what follows, must be taken in its broadest 
sense, both literal and tropical), εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους aya- 
πᾶν, owe no one anything except to love one another, be- 
cause we must never cease loving and the debt of love 
can never be paid, Ro. xiii. 8. absol. o be a debtor, be 
bound: Mt. xxiii. 16,18; foll. by an inf. to be under obli- 
gation, bound by duty or necessity, to do something; it be- 
hoves one; one ought; used thus of a necessity imposed 
either by law and duty, or by reason, or by the times, or 
by the nature of the matter under consideration [ace. to 
Westcott (Epp. of Jn. p. 5), Cremer, al., denoting obli- 
gation in its special and personal aspects]: Lk. xvii. 10; 
Jn. xiii. 14; xix. 7 (ὀφείλει ἀποθανεῖν, he ought to die) ; 
Acts xvii. 29; Ro. xv. 1, 27; 1 Co.v. 10; [vii. 36 (A. V. 
need so requireth)]; ix. 10; xi. 7,10; 2 Co. xii. 14; Eph. 
v. 28; 2 Th.i. 3; ii. 13; Heb. ii. 17; v. 3,12; 1Jn. ii. 6; 
iii. 16; iv. 11; 3Jn. 8; ὥφειλον συνίστασθαι, I ought to 
have been commended, i. e. I can demand commenda- 
tion, 2 Co. xii. 11. c. after the Chaldee (see ὀφειλέ- 
της, b., ὀφείλημα, b.), ὀφείλω τινί, to have wronged one 
and not yet made amends to him [A. V. indebted], Lk. 
xi.4. [Comp.: προσ-οφείλω.}" 

ὄφελον (for ὥφελον, without the augm., 2 aor. of ὀφείλω; 
in earlier Grk. with an inf., as ὥφελον θανεῖν, I ought to 
have died, expressive of a wish, i. q. would that I were 
dead; in later Grk. it assumes the nature of an inter- 
jection, to be rendered) would that, where one wishes 
that a thing had happened which has not happened, or 
that a thing be done which probably will not be done 
[ef. W. 301 sq. (283); B. 8. 150, 5]: with an optative 
pres. Rev. iii. 15 Ree.; with an indicative impf., Rev. 
ibid. GLT Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 1, (Epict. diss. 2, 18, 15; 
Ignat. ad Smyrn. ο. 12); with an indie. aorist, 1 Co. iv. 
8 (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 5; ὄφελον ἀπεθάνομεν, Ex. xvi. 3; 
Num. xiv. 2; xx. 3); with the future, Gal. ν. 12 (Leian. 
soloee. [or Pseudosoph.] 1, where this construction is 
classed as a solecism). Cf. Passow ii. p. 603°; [L. and 
S. 5. v. ὀφείλω, IT. 81." 

ὄφελος, -ovs, τό, (ὀφέλλω to increase), advantage, profit: 
1 Co. xv. 32; Jas. ii. 14,16. (From Hom. down; Sept. 
Job xv. 3.) * 

ὀφθαλμο-δουλεία [T WH -Aia; see I, ¢], -as, 7, (ὀφθαλ- 
μόδουλος, Constit. apost. [4, 12, Coteler. Patr. Apost.] i. 
p- 399"; and this fr. ὀφθαλμός and δοῦλος), [A. V. eye- 
service i. e.] service performed [only] under the master’s 
eye (μὴ κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοδὃ.. τουτέστι μὴ μόνον παρόντων τῶν 
δεσποτῶν καὶ ὁρώντων, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀπόντων, Theophyl. on 
Eph. vi 6; “for the master’s eye usually stimulates to 
greater diligence; his absence, on the other hand, ren- 
ders sluggish.” H. Stephanus): Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22. 
Not found elsewhere; [cf. W. 106 (9.7 " 


ὀφθαλμός 


ὀφθαλμός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. τ. dm to see; allied to ὄψις, ὄψο- 
μαι, etc.; Curtius § 627], Sept. for py, [fr. Hom. down], 
the eye: Mt. v. 38; Mk. ix.47; Lk. xi. 34; Jn. 
ix. 6; 1 Co. xii. 16; Rev. vii.17; xxi. 4, and often; pum) 
ὀφθαλμοῦ, 1 Co. xv. 52; of ὀφθαλμοί pov εἶδον (see the 
remark in γλῶσσα, 1), Lk. ii. 30; ef. iv. 20; x. 23; Mt. 
xiii. 16; 10Co.ii.9; Rev.i.7; [ἀνέβλεψαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί 
Mt. xx. 34 RG]; ἰδεῖν τοῖς ὀφθ., Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40; 
Acts xxviii. 27; ὁρᾶν τοῖς ὀφθ. (see dpaw, 1), 1 Jn. i. 1; 
ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν ὀφθ. desire excited by seeing, 1 Jn. ii. 16. 
Since the eye is the index of the mind, the foll. phrases 
have arisen: ὀφθ. σου πονηρός ἐστιν, i. 6. thou art envious, 
Mt. xx. 15; ὀφθ. πονηρός, envy, Mk. vii. 22 (yy yr, an 
envious man, Prov. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 22; cf. Sir. xxxiv. 
13; JNA JPY Apr, thine eye is evil toward thy 
brother, i. e. thou enviest [grudgest] thy brother, Deut. 
xv. 9; ὀφθ. πονηρὸς φθονερὸς ἐπ᾽ ἄρτῳ, Sir. xiv. 10; μὴ 
φθονεσάτω σου ὁ ὀφθ. Tob. iv. 7; the opposite, ἀγαθὸς 
ὀφθαλμός, is used of a willing mind, Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 
10, 12); on the other hand, ὀφθαλμὸς πονηρός in Mt. vi. 
23 is a diseased, disordered eye, just as we say a bad eye, 
a had finger [see πονηρός, 2 a. (where Lk. xi. 34)]. κρα- 
τεῖν τοὺς 6p. τοῦ μή κτλ. [A. V. to hold the eyes i. 6.1 
to prevent one from recognizing another, Lk. xxiv. 16; 
ὑπολαμβάνω τινὰ ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθ. τινος, by receiving one to 
withdraw him from another's sight [A. V. received him 
out of their sight], Acts i. 9. Metaph. of the eyes of the 
mind, the faculty of knowing: ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθ. σου, 
hid from thine eyes, i.e. concealed from thee [ef. B. 320 
(274) ], Lk. xix.42; διδόναι τινὶ ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, 
to cause one to be slow to understand, Ro. xi. 8 [ef. B. 
267 (230)]; τυφλοῦν τοὺς ὀφθ. τινος, Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn. 
ii. 11; σκοτίζονται of ὀφθ. Ro. xi. 10; πεφωτισμένοι opOar- 
μοὶ τῆς διανοίας [cf. B. § 145, 6], Eph. i. 18 Rec.; τῆς 
καρδίας (as in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2), ibid. GLT Tr 
WIL; ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος (73 .}}3 [ef. B. § 146, 1 fin.]}), 
in the judgment [ef. our view] of one, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. 
xii. 11; οὐκ ἔστι τι ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθ. Twos, to neglect a 
thing (cf. our leave, put, out of sight), Ro. 111. 18; γυμνόν 
ἐστί τι τοῖς ὀφθ. τινος (see γυμνός, 2a.), Heb. iv. 13; of 
ὀφθ. τοῦ κυρίου ἐπὶ δικαίους (sc. ἐπι- [or ἀπο-] βλέπουσιν, 
which is added in Ps. x. (xi.) 4), are (fixed) upon the 
righteous, i. 6. the Lord looks after, provides for them, 
1 Pet. iii. 12. Other phrases in which ὀφθαλμός occurs 
may be found under ἀνοίγω p. 48°, ἁπλοῦς, διανοίγω 1, 
ἐξορύσσω 1, ἐπαίρω p. 228", καμμύω, μοιχαλίς a., προγρά- 
φω 2. 

ὄφις, -ews, 6, [perh. named fr. its sight; ef. δράκων, 
init., and see Curtius as s. v. ὀφθαλμός] ; fr. Hom. Il. 12, 
208 down; Sept. mostly for wm; a snake, serpent: Mt. 
vii. 10; Mk. xvi. 18; Lk. x. 19; xi. 11; Jn. iii. 14; 1 Co. 
x. 9; Rey. ix. 19; with the ancients the serpent was an 
emblem of cunning and wisdom, 2 Co. xi. 3, ef. Gen. iii. 
1; hence, φρόνιμοι ὡς οἱ ὄφεις, Mt. x. 16 [here WH mrg. 
ὁ ὄφις}; hence, crafty hypocrites are called ὄφεις, Mt. 
xxiii. 33. The serpent narrated to have deceived Eve 
(see Gen. u. s.) was regarded by the later Jews as the 
devil (Sap. ii. 23 sq. ef. 4 Mace. xviii. 8); hence he is 


Vi. 22; 


“2; 


470 


ὄχλος 


called ὁ ὄφις ὁ ἀρχαῖος, ὁ ὄφις: Rev. xii. 9, 14 5α.; xx. 
2; 566 [Grimm on Sap. u.s.; Fr. Lenormant, Beginnings 
of History ete. ch. ii. p. 109 sq., and] δράκων." 

ὀφρύς, -vos, 1), 1. the eyebrow, so fr. Hom. down. 
2. any prominence or projection; as [Eng. the brow] of 
a mountain (so the Lat. supercilium, Verg. georg. 1, 
108; Hirt. bell. afr. 58; Liv. 27,18; 34, 29): Lk. iv. 29 
(Hom. Il. 20, 151; often in Polyb., Plut., al.).* 

[ὀχετός, -ov, ὁ, 1. a water-pipe, duct. 2. the 
intestinal canal: Mk. vii. 19 WH (rejected) mrg. (al. 
ἀφεδρών)."} 

ὀχλέω, -ὦ : pres. pass. ptcp. ὀχλούμενος : (ὄχλος) ; prop. 
to excite a mob against one; [in Hom. (Il. 21, 261) to dis- 
turb, roll away]; univ. to trouble, molest, (τινά, Hdt. 5, 41; 
Aeschyl., al.); absol. to be in confusion, in an uproar, (3 
Mace. v. 41); pass. to be vexed, molested, troubled: by 
demons, Lk. vi. 18 R G L (where T Tr WH eévoyd., —the 
like variation of text in Hdian. 6, 3,4); Acts v. 16; 
Tob. vi. 8 (7); Acta Thomae §12. [Comp.: ev, map- 
εν-οχλέω. |* 

ὀχλο-ποιέω, -ὦ : 1 aor. ptep. ὀχλοποιήσας ; (ὄχλος, ποιέω); 
to collect a crowd, gather the people together : Acts xvii. 5. 
Not found elsewkere.* 

ὄχλος, -ov, 6, in the N. T. only in the historical bks. 
and five times in the Rev.; asin Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and 
Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collec- 
tion of people; a multitude of men who have flocked to- 
gether in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25; xv. 10, ete. ; 
Mk. ii. 4; iii. 9, and often; Lk. v. 1,19; vii. 9,ete.; Jn. 
v. 13; vi. 22, 24; vii. 20, 32,49, etc.; Actsxiv. 14; xvii. 
8; xxi. 34; τὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, Lk. xi. 27; xii. 13; or ἀπὸ 
τοῦ ὄχλου, xix. 39; ix. 38; ἀπὸ (for 1. 6. on account of 
[ef. ἀπό, 11. 2b.]) τ. ὄχλου, Lk. xix. 3; ἡ βία τ. ὄχλου, 
Acts xxi. 35; πολὺς ὄχλος and much oftener ὄχλος πολύς, 
Mt. xiv. 14; xx. 29; xxvi.47; Mk. v. 21, 24; vi. 34; ix. 14; 
xiv. 43 [here T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. oh. ]; Lk. vii. 
11; viii. 4; ix.37; Jn. vi. 2,5; xii. 12 [but here Tr mrg. 
br. WH prefix 6; cf. B. 91 (80)]; Rev. xix. 1,6; with 
the art. ὁ πολὺς ὄχλ.» the great multitude present, Mk. xii. 
37; [ὁ ὄχλος πολύς (the noun forming with the adj. a sin- 
gle composite term, like our) the common people, Jn. xii. 9 
T WH Trmrg.; ef. B. u.s.; some would give the phrase 
the same sense in Mk. l.c.]; πάμπολυς, Mk. viii. 1 [Rec.]; 
ἱκανός, Mk. x. 46; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26; xix. 26; ὁ 
πλεῖστος ὄχλ. [the most part of the multitude], Mt. xxi. 8; 
πᾶς ὁ ὄχλ., Mt. xiii. 2; Mk. ii. 13; iv. 1; vii. 14 [Rec.]; ix. 
15; xi. 18; Lk. xiii. 17; Acts xxi. 27; ὄχλ. τοσοῦτος, Mt. 
xv. 33; αἱ μυριάδες τοῦ ὄχλ. Lk. xii. 1; οὐ μετὰ ὄχλου, ποῦ 
having a crowd with me, Acts xxiv. 18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, in the 
absence of the multitude [(see arep) ], Lk. xxii.6. plur. 
οἱ ὄχλοι, very often in Mt. and Lk., as Mt. v. 1; vii. 28; 
ix. 8, 33,36; xi. 7; xii. 46; xiii. 34, 36, ete. ; Lk. iii. 7, 
10; iv. 42; v. 3; viii. 42, 45; ix. 11; xi. 14, ete.; Acts 
viii. 6; xiii. 45; xiv. 11,13, 18sq.; xvii. 13; once in Jn. 
vii. 12 [where Tdf. the sing.]; in Mk. only vi. 33 Rec. ; 
and without the art. Mk. x. 1; ὄχλοι πολλοί, Mt. iv. 25; 
viii. 1; xii.15 [RG]; xiii. 2; xv. 30; xix. 2; Lk. v. 15; 


xiv. 25; πάντες of ὄχλοι, Mt. xii. 23. 2. the multi- 


ὀχύρωμα 


tude i. e. the common people, opp. to the rulers and lead- 
ing men: Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26; Mk. xii.12; [Jn. vii. 12° 
(provided the plur. is retained in the first part of the 
vs.)]; with contempt, the ignorant multitude, the populace, 
In. vii. 49; ἐπισύστασις ὄχλου, a riot, amob, Acts xxiv. 
12[L T Tr WH ἐπίστασις (4: ν.) ὄχ-]. 3. univ. a 
multitude : with a gen. of the class, as τελωνῶν, Lk. v. 29; 
μαθητῶν, Lk. vi. 17; ὀνομάτων (see ὄνομα, 3), Acts i. 15; 
τῶν ἱερέων, Acts vi. 7; the plur. ὄχλοι, joined with λαοί 
and ἔθνη, in Rey. xvii. 15 seems to designate troops of 
men assembled together without order. (Sept. chiefly 
for 1127.) 

ὀχύρωμα, -ros, τό, (ὀχυρόω [to make strong, to fortify ]) ; 
1. prop. a castle, stronghold, fortress, fastness, Sept. for 
7¥3D, ete.; very often in 1 and 2 Mace.; Xen. Hellen. 
3; 2, oe 2. trop. anything on which one relies: κα- 
θεῖλε τὸ ὀχύρωμα, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἐπεποίθεισαν, Prov. xxi. 22; ὀχύ- 
ρωμα ὁσίου φόβος κυρίου, Prov. x. 29; in 2 Co. x. 4 of 
the arguments and reasonings by which a disputant en- 
deavors to fortify his opinion and defend it against his 
opponent.* 

ὀψάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. ὄψον [cf. Curtius § 630] 
i. e. whatever is eaten with bread, esp. food boiled or 
roasted; hence specifically), fish: Jn. vi. 9,11; xxi. 9 sq. 
13. (Comic. ap. Athen. 9, c. 35 p. 385 6. : Leian.,Geop. 
[οἵ Wetstein on Jn. vi. 9]; see γυναικάριον, fin. [W. 23 
(22)})* 

ὀψέ, (apparently fr. ὄπις ; see ὀπίσω, init.), adv. of time, 
after a long time, long after, late ; a. esp. late in the 
day (sc. τῆς ἡμέρας, which is often added, as Thue. 4, 93 ; 
Xen. Hellen. 2, 1, 23), i.e. at evening (Hom., Thuc., 
Plat., al.; for 3} ny, Gen. xxiv. 11): Mk. xi. [11 T 
Tr mrg. WH tat. (ef. Plut. Alex. 16,1)], 19; xiii.35. Ὁ. 
with a gen. [W. § 54, 6], ὀψὲ σαββάτων, the sabbath having 
just passed, after the sabbath, i.e. at the early dawn of the 
first day of the week— (an interpretation absolutely 
demanded by the added specification τῇ ἐπιῴφωσκ. κτλ.), 
Mt. xxviii. 1 ef. Mk. xvi. 1 (ὀψὲ τῶν βασιλέως χρόνων, 
long after the times of the king, Plut. Num. 1; ὀψὲ 
μυστηρίων, the mysteries being over, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 
4, 18); [but an examination of the instances just cited 
(and others) will show that they fail to sustain the ren- 
dering after (although it is recognized by Passow, Pape, 
Schenk], and other lexicographers) ; ὀψέ foll. by a gen. 
seems always to be partitive,denoting late in the peri- 
od specified by the gen. (and consequently still belong- 
ing to it), cf. B. § 132, 7 Rem.; Kiihner $414, ὃ ο. β. 
Hence in Mt. 1. ο. ‘/ate on the sabbath’]. Keim iii. 
p- 552 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. 303 sq.] endeavors to relieve 
the passage differently [by adopting the Vulg. vespere 


471 


ὀψώνιον 


sabbati, on the evening of the sabbath], but without suc- 
cess. [(Cf. Keil, Com. tiber Matth. ad loc.)]* 

ὄψιμος, -ov, (ὀψέ), late, latter, (Hom. Il. 2, 325; ὀψιμώ 
τατος σπόρος, Xen. oec. 17, 4 sq.; ἐν τοῖς ὀψίμοις τῶν ὑδά 
των, of the time of subsidence of the waters of the Nile, 
Diod. 1, 10; [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 sq.]): dy. ὑετός, the 
latter or vernal rain, which falls chiefly in the months of 
March and April just before the harvest (opp. to the 
autumnal or mpwipos [cf. B. D.s. v. Rain]), Jas. v. 7 [but 
LT Tr WH om. ὑετόν, cod. Sin. and a few other authori- 
ties substitute καρπόν); Sept. for vIP?2, Deut. xi. 14; 
Jer. v. 24; Hos. vi. 3; Joel ii. 23; Zech. x. 1.* 

ὄψιος, -a, -ον, (ὀψέ), late; 1. as an adjective 
({Pind.,] Thue., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.; [Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 51 sq-.]): ἡ ὥρα, Mk. xi.11 [but T Tr mrg. WH 
txt. ὀψέ, q. v-] (ὐψίᾳ ἐν νυκτί, Pind. Isthm. 4, 59). 2. 
contrary to the usage of prof. auth. ἡ ὀψία as a subst. 
(se. Spa [cf. W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), evening: 
i. 6. either from our three to six o’clock p. m., Mt. viii. 
16; xiv. 15; xxvii.57; Mk. iv. 35; or from our six o’clock 
p. M. to the beginning of night, Mt. xiv. 23; xvi. 2 
There T br. WH reject the pass.]; xx. 8; xxvi. 20; Mk. 
1. 82; vi.47; xiv.17; xv.42; Jn. vi. 16; xx. 19, (hence 
D377 73, between the two evenings, Ex. xii. 6; xvi 
12; xxix. 39 [ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 1064 sq. (and 
addit. et emend. p. 106); B. D.s.v. Day]). Besides 
only in Judith xiii. 1.* 

ὄψις, -ews, ἡ, (ONTO, ὄψομαι [cf. ὀφθαλμός), fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. chiefly for AN ; 1. seeing, sight. 2. 
face, countenance: Jn. xi. 44; Rev. i. 16. 3. the 
outward appearance, look, [many lexicographers give 
this neuter and objective sense precedence]: κρίνειν κατ᾽ 
ὄψιν, Jn. vii. 24." 

ὀψώνιον, -ov, τό, (fr. ὄψον ---- on which see ὀψάριον, init. 
—and ὠνέομαι to buy), a later Grk. word (cf. Sturz, De 
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187; Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 418), 
prop. whatever is bought to be eaten with bread, as fish, 
flesh, and the like (see ὀψάριον). And as corn, meat, 
fruits, salt, were given to soldiers instead of pay (Caes. 
b. g. 1, 23, 1; Polyb. 1, 66 sq.; 3, 13, 8), ὀψώνιον began 
to signify 1. univ. a soldier’s pay, allowance, 
(Polyb. 6, 39,12; Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 36), more com- 
monly in the plur. [W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)] ὀψώνια, 
prop. that part of a soldier’s support given in place of 
pay [i e. rations] and the money in which he is paid 
(Polyb. 1, 67, 1; 6, 39, 15; 1 Mace. iii. 28; xiv. 82; 1 
Esdr. iv. 56; Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 3): Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co. 
ix. 7 [οἷ W. § 31, 7 d.]. 2. metaph. rages: sing. 
2 Co. xi. 8; τῆς ἁμαρτίας, the hire that sin pays, Ro. vi 
23.° 


472 


IT 


παγιδεύω 


παγιδεύω: 1 aor. subj. 3d pers. plur. παγιδεύσωσιν; 
(παγίς, 4- Vv.) ; a word unknown to the Greeks; to en- 
snare, entrap: birds, Eccl. ix. 12; metaph., τινὰ ἐν λόγῳ, 
of the attempt to elicit from one some remark which can 
be turned into an accusation against him, Mt. xxii. 15. 
([τοῖς λόγοις, Prov. vi. 2 Graec. Venet.; ef. also Deut. 
vii. 25; xii. 30 in the same]; 1S. xxviii. 9.) * 

παγίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (fr. πήγνυμε to make fast, 2 aor. érayov; 
prop. that which holds fast [ef. Anth. Pal. 6, 5]), Sept. 
for nd, Nw), wpin, ete.; @ snare, trap, noose; a. 
prop. of snares in which birds are entangled and 
caught, Prov. vi. 5; vii. 23; Ps. xe. (xci.) 33 exxiii. 
(exxiv.) 7; παγίδας ἱστάναι, Arstph. av. 527; hence ὡς 
παγίς, a3 a snare, i.e. unexpectedly, suddenly, because 
birds and beasts are caught unawares, Lk. xxi. 35. b. 
trop. a snare, i. 6. whatever brings peril, loss, destruction: 
of a sudden and unexpected deadly peril, Ro. xi. 9 fr. 
Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23; of the allurements and seductions 
of sin, ἐμπίπτειν εἰς πειρασμὸν κ. παγίδα, 1 Tim. vi. 9 (ἐμπί- 
πτει εἰς παγίδα ἁμαρτωλός, Prov. xii. 13, ef. xxix. 6; joined 
with σκάνδαλον. Sap. xiv. 11); τοῦ διαβόλου, the allure- 
ments to sin by which the devil holds one bound, 2 Tim. 
ii. 26; 1 Tim. iii. 7, (In Grk. writ. also of the snares 


of love.) * 
πάθημα, -ros, τό, (fr. παθεῖν, πάσχω, as μάθημα fr. pa- 
θεῖν), fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down; 1. that which one 


suffers or has suffered; a. externally, a suffering, 
misfortune, calamity, evil, affliction: plur., Ro. viii. 18; 
2 Co. i. 6 sq.; Col. i. 24; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Heb. 11. 10; x. 
32; 1 Pet. v.95; τὰ εἰς Χριστόν, that should subsequently 
come unto Christ [W. 193 (182)], 1 Pet. i. 11; τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, which Christ endured, 1 Pet. v. 1; also the 
afflictions which Christians must undergo in behalf of 
the same cause for which Christ patiently endured, are 
called παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ [W. 189 (178) note], 2 Co. 
i. 5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 13. b. of an inward 
state, an affection, passion: Gal. v. 24; τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, 
that lead to sins, Ro. vii. 5. 2. i. g. τὸ πάσχειν (see 
καύχημα, 2), an enduring, undergoing, suffering, (so the 
plur. in Arstph. thesm. 199) : θανάτου, gen. of the obj., 
Heb. ii. 9. [Syn. ef. πάθος, init.]* 

παθητός, -7, -dv, (πάσχω, παθεῖν); 1. passible (Lat. 
palibilis, Οἷα. de nat. deor. 3, 12, 29), endued with the 
capacity of suffering, capable of feeling; often in Plut., as 
παθητὸν σῶμα. 2. subject to the necessity of suffer- 
ing, destined to suffer, (Vulg. passibilis): Acts xxvi. 23 
(with the thought here respecting Christ as παθητός 
compare the similar language of Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. 
ec. 36, 39, 52, 68, 76, 89); cf. W. 97 (92); [B. 42 (37)]; 
(so in eccl. writ. also, cf. Otto’s Justin, Grk. index s. v.; 


παιδάριον 


Christ is said to be παθητός and ἀπαθής in Ignat. ad Eph. 
7, 2; ad Polye. 3, 2).* 

πάθος, -ους, τό, (παθεῖν, πάσχω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down ; i.q. πάθημα (q. v.; [the latter differs fr. πάθος (if 
at all) only in being the more individualizing and con- 
erete term; cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 24 § 117); 1. 
whatever befalls one, whether it be sad or joyous; spec. 
a calamity, mishap, evil, affliction. 2. a feeling which 
the mind suffers, an affection of the mind, emotion, pas- 
sion; passionate desire; used by the Greeks in either a 
good or a bad sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 4 [ef. Cope, 
Introd. to Aristotle’s Rhet. p. 133 sqq.; and his note on 
rhet. 2, 22,107). In the N. T. in a bad sense, depraved 
passion: Col. iii. 5; πάθη ἀτιμίας, vile passions, Ro. i. 26 
(see ἀτιμία) ; ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας, [in the passion of lust], 
gen. of apposit. [W. § 59, 8 a.], 1 Th. iv. δ." 


[Syn. πάθος, ἐπιθυμία: π. presents the passive, ἐπ. the 
active side of a vice; ἐπ. is more comprehensive in meaning 
than π΄; ἐπ. is (evil) desire, π᾿ ungovernable desire. Cf. 
Trench ὃ lxxxvii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 5.] 


παιδαγωγός, -οῦ, ὁ, (fr. mais, and ἀγωγός a leader, es- 
cort), fr. Hdt. 8, 75 down; a tutor (Lat. paedagogus) 
i. e. a guide and guardian of boys. Among the Greeks 
and Romans the name was applied to trustworthy slaves 
who were charged with the duty of supervising the life 
and morals of boys belonging to the better class. The 
boys were not allowed so much as to step out of the 
house without them before arriving at the age of man- 
hood; ef. Fischer 5. v. in index i. to Aeschin. dial. Socr.; 
Hermann, Griech. Privatalterthiimer, ὃ 34, 15 sqq.; 
[Smith, Dict. of Grk. and Rom. Antiq. s. v.; Becker, 
Charicles (Eng. trans. 4th ed.), p. 226 sq.]. They are 
distinguished from of διδάσκαλοι : Xen. de rep. Lae. 8, 2; 
Plat. Lys. p. 208 ο.; Diog. Laért. 3,92. The name car- 
ries with it an idea of severity (as of a stern censor 
and enforcer of morals) in 1 Co. iv. 15, where the 
father is distinguished from the tutor as one whose 
discipline is usually milder, and in Gal. iii. 24 sq. where 
the Mosaic law is likened to a tutor because it arouses 
the consciousness of sin, and is called παιδαγωγὸς εἰς 
Χριστόν, i. e. preparing the soul for Christ, because those 
wlio have learned by experience with the law that they 
are not and cannot be commended to God by their 
works, welcome the more eagerly the hope of salvation 
offered them through the death and resurrection of 
Christ, the Son of God.* 

παιδάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of παῖς, see γυναικάριον), a 
little boy, a lad: Mt. xi. 16 Rec.; Jn. vi. 9. (Arstph., 
Xen., Plat., sqq.: Sept. very often for Ἢ"), also for 3: 


παιδεία 


[παιδάριον of an adult youth, Tob. vi. 2, ete. (ef. 11 54.}}.) 
[Sywn. see παῖς, fin. ]* 

παιδεία (Tdf. -ia; [see I, ¢]), -as, ἧ, (παιδεύω), Sept. 
for 403; 1. the whole training and education of 
children (which relates to the cultivation of mind and 
morals, and employs for this purpose now commands 
and admonitions, now reproof and punishment): Eph. 
vi. 4 [ef W. 388 (363) note]; (in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. 
on, it includes also the care and training of the body.) 
[See esp. Trench, Syn. § xxxii.; cf. Jowett’s Plato, in- 
dex s. v. Education ]. 2. whatever in adults also 
cultivates the soul, esp. by correcting mistakes and curbing 
the passions ; hence a. instruction which aims at the 
increase of virtue: 2 Tim. iii. 16. b. ace. to bibl. 
usage chastisement, chastening, (of the evils with which 
God visits men for their amendment): Heb. xii. 5 (Prov. 
iii. 11), 7 sq. [see ὑπομένω, 2 b.], 11; (Prov. xv. 5, and 
often in the O. T.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap. 
p- 51; [ef. (Plat.) defin. παιδεία - δύναμις θεραπευτικὴ 
Woxis])-* 

παιδευτής, -οὔ, ὁ, (παιδεύω) ; 1. an instructor, pre- 
ceptor, teacher: Ro. ii. 20 (Sir. xxxvii. 19; 4 Mace. v. 34; 
Plat. lege. 7 p. 811 d., ete.; Plut. Lycurg. ο. 12, ete. ; Diog. 
Laért. 7, 7). 2. a chastiser: Heb. xii. 9 (Hos. v. 2; 
Psalt. Sal. 8, 35).* 

παιδεύω ; impf. éraidevoy; 1 aor. ptep. παιδεύσας ; Pass., 
pres. παιδεύομαι; 1 aor. ἐπαιδεύθην; pf. ptep. memadev- 
μένος ; (mais); Sept for 7D"; 1. as in class. Grk. 
prop. to train children: τινά with a dat. of the thing in 
which one is instructed, in pass., copia [ W. 227 (213) n.], 
Acts vii. 22 RGL WH [cef. B. § 134, 6] (γράμμασιν, 
Joseph. 6. Ap. 1, 4 fin.) ; ἐν σοφίᾳ, ibid. T Tr; τινὰ κατὰ 
ἀκρίβειαν, in pass., Acts xxii. 3. Pass. to be instructed or 
taught, to learn: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. i. 20; to cause 
one to learn: foll. by ἵνα, Tit. ii. 12. 2. to chas- 
tise; a. to chastise or castigate with words, to cor- 
rect: of those who are moulding the character of others 
by reproof and admonition, 2 Tim. ii. 25 (τινὰ παιδεύειν 
καὶ ῥυθμίζειν λόγῳ, ΔΕ]. v. h. 1, 34). b. in bibl. and 
eccl. use employed of God, to chasten by the infliction of 
evils and calamities (ef. W. § 2,1 b.J: 1 Co. xi. 32; 2 Co. 
vi. 9; Heb. xii. 6; Rev. iii. 19, (Prov. xix. 18; xxix. 17; 
Sap. 111. 5; xi. 10 (9); 2 Mace. vi. 16; x. 4). c. to 
chastise with blows, to scourge: of a father punishing a 
son, Heb. xii. 7, [10]; of a judge ordering one to be 
scourged, Lk. xxiii. 16, 22, [(Deut. xxii. 18)].* 

παιδιόθεν, (παιδίον), adv., from childhood, from a child, 
(a later word, for which the earlier writ. used ἐκ παιδύς, 
Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 2; or ἐκ παιδίου, mem. 2, 2, 8; or ἐκ παι- 
δίων, oec. 3, 10; [ef. W. 26 (25); 463 (431)]): Mk. ix. 
21, where LT Tr WH ἐκ παιδιόθεν [cf. Win. § 65,2]. 
(Synes. de provid. p. 91b.; Joann. Zonar. 4, 184 a.).* 

παιδίον, ov, τό, (dimin. of παῖς), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept. 
for 0, WA, 13, ete.; a young child, a little boy, a Little 
girl; plur. ra παιδία, infants; children; little ones. In 
sing.: univ., of an infant just born, Jn. xvi. 21; of a 
(male) child recently born, Mt. ii. 8 sq. 11, 13, 14, 20 sq.; 
Lk. i. 59, 66, 76, 80; ii. 17, 21 [Rec.], 27, 40; Heb. xi. 23; 


473 


παῖς 


of ἃ more advanced child, Mt. xviii. 2, 4 54ᾳ.; Mk. ix. 36 
sq-; [x. 15]; Lk. ix. 47 sq. ; (Lk. xviii. 17]; of a mature 
child, Mk. ix. 24; τινός, the son of some one, Jn. iv. 49; of 
a girl, Mk. v. 39-41; [vii.30 Ltxt.T Tr WH]. In plur. 
of (partly grown) children: Mt. xi. 16 GLT Tr WH; 
xiv. 21; xv. 38; xviii. 3; xix. 13sq.; Mk. vii. 28: x. 13 
sqq-; Lk. vii. 32; xviii. 16; [Heb. ii. 14]; τινός, of some 
one, Lk. xi. 7, ef. Heb. ii. 13. Metaph. παιδία ταῖς φρεσί, 
children (i. e. like children) where the use of the mind is 
required, 1 Co. xiv. 20; in affectionate address, i. q. Lat. 
carissimi [A. V. children], Jn. xxi.5; 1Jn.ii. 14 (13), 18; 
[iii 7 WH mrg. Syn. see παῖς, fin.]* 

παιδίσκη, -ns, 7, (fem. of παιδίσκος, a young boy or 
slave ; a dimin. of παῖς, see νεανίσκος) ; 1. a young 
girl, damsel, (Xen., Menand., Polyb., Plut., Leian. ; Sept. 
Ruth iv. 12). 2. a maid-servant, a young female 
slave; cf. Germ. Madchen [our maid] for a young fe- 
male-servant (Hdt. 1, 93; Lys., Dem., al.) : Lk. xii. 45; 
Acts xvi. 16; opp. to ἡ ἐλευθέρα, Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 
sq-; spec. of the maid-servant who had charge of the 
door: Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 66, 69; Lk. xxii. 56; Acts 
xii. 13; ἡ π. ἡ θυρωρός, Jn. xviii. 17; (also in the Sept. 
of a female slave, often for HAS, ANDW). Cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 239. [Syn. see παῖς, fin.]* 

παίζω ; fr. Hom. down; prop. to play like a child; 
then univ. to play, sport, jest; to give way to hilarity, esp. 
by joking, singing, dancing; so in 1 Co. x. 7, after Ex. 
xxxii. 6 where it stands for Dmy, as in Gen. xxi. 9; xxvi. 
8; Judg. xvi. 25; also in the Sept. for pnv. [Comp. : 
ἐμ-παίζω. ἢ 

παῖς, gen. παιδός, ὁ, ἡ, fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. only 
in the Gospels and Acts; 1. a child, boy or girl; 
Sept. for Ἢ») and 77y3 (Gen. xxiv. 28; Deut. xxii. 15, 
ete.) : ὁ παῖς, Mt. xvii. 18; Lk. ii. 43; ix. 42; Acts xx. 
12; ἡ mais, Lk. viii. 51, 54; plur. infants, children, Mt. ii. 
16 ; xxi. 15; ὁ παῖς τινος, the son of one, Jn. iv. 51. 2 
(Like the Lat. puer, i. q.) servant, slave, (Aeschy)]. cho- 
éph. 652; Arstph. nub. 18, 132; Xen. mem. 3, 13, 6; 
symp. 1, 11; 2, 23; Plat. Charm. p. 155 a.; Protag. p. 
310c. and often; Diod. 17, 76; al.; so Sept. times with- 
out number for 723) [ef. W. p. 30, no. 3]; ef. the similar 
use of Germ. Bursch, [French gargon, Eng. boy]): Mt. 
viii. 6, 8,13; Lk. vii. 7 cf. 10; xii.45; xv. 26. an attend- 
ant, servant, spec. a king’s attendant, minister: Mt. xiv. 
2 (Diod. xvii. 36; hardly so in the earlier Grk. writ. ; 
Gen. xli. 37 sq.; 1 5. xvi. 15-17; xviii. 22, 26; Dan. ii. 
7; 1 Mace. i. 6, 8; 1 Esdr. ii. 16; v. 33, 35); hence, in 
imitation of the Hebr. 7/7 13)’, παῖς τοῦ θεοῦ is used of 
a devout worshipper of God, one who fulfils God’s will, 
(Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 18; exii. (exiii.) 1; Sap. ii. 13, ete.) 5 
thus, the people of Israel, Lk. i. 54 (Is. xli. 8; xlii. 19; 
xliv. 1 sq. 21, ete.) ; David, Lk. i. 69; Acts iv. 25, (Ps. 
xvii. (xvili.) 1; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 1 [Ald., Compl.], ete.) ; 
likewise any upright and godly man whose agency God 
employs in executing his purposes; thusin the N.T. Jesus 
the Messiah: Mt. xii. 18 (fr. Is. xlii. 1) ; Acts iii. 13, 265 
iv. 27, 30, [cf. Harnack on Barn. ep. 6,1 and Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2]; inthe O. T. also Moses, Neh. i. 7 sq-j 


παίω 


the prophets, 1 Esdr. viii. 79 (81); Bar. ii. 20, 24; and 
others.* 

[Syn. παῖς, παιδάριον, παιδίον, παιδίσκη, τέκνον: 
The grammarian Aristophanes is quoted by Ammonius (8. v. 
γέρων) as defining thus: παιδίον, τὸ τρεφόμενον ὑπὸ τιθη- 
νοῦ" παιδάριον δέ, τὸ ἤδη περιπατοῦν καὶ τῆς λέξεως ἀντε- 
χόμενον: παιδίσκος δ᾽, ὁ ἐν τῇ ἐχομένῃ ἡλικίᾳ" παῖς δ᾽ ὁ 
διὰ τῶν ἐγκυκλίων μαθημάτων δυνάμενος ἰέναι. Philo (de mund. 
opif. § 86) quotes the physician Hippocrates as follows: ἐν 
ἀνθρώπου φύσει ἑπτά εἰσιν ὧραι κιτ.λ.- παιδίον μέν ἐστιν ἄχρις 
ἑπτὰ ἐτῶν, ὀδόντων ἐκβολῆς" παῖς δὲ ἄχρι γονῆς ἐκφύσεως, εἰς 
τὰ δὶς ἑπτά" μειράκιον δὲ ἄχρι γενείου λαχνώσεως, ἐς τὰ τρὶς 
éxra.ete. According to Schmidt, παιδίον denotes exclusive- 
ly a little child; παιδάριον a child up to its first school years ; 
παῖς achild of any age; (παιδίσκος and) παιδίσκη, in which 
reference to descent quite disappears, cover the years of late 
childhood and early youth. But usage is untrammelled: 
froma child isexpressed either by ἐκ παιδός (most frequently), 
or ἐκ παιδίου, or ἐκ (ἀπὸ) παιδαρίου. παῖς and τέκνον denote a 
child alike as respects descent and age, reference to the latter 
being more prominent in the former word, to descent in 
τέκνον ; but the period παῖς covers is not sharply defined ; 
and, in classic usage as in modern, youthful designations 
cleave to the female sex longer than to the male. See 
Schmidt ch. 69; Héhne in Luthardt’s Zeitschrift τι. 8. w. for 
1882, p. 57 sqq.] 

mato: 1 aor. ἔπαισα; from Aeschyl. and Hat. down; 
Sept. mostly for 737; to strike, smite: with the fists, 
Mt. xxvi. 68 [οἵ. ῥαπίζω, 2]; Lk. xxii. 64; with a sword, 
Mk. xiv. 47: Jn. xviii. 10; to sting (to strike or wound 
with a sting), Rev. ix. 5.* 

Πακατιανή, -ῆς, ἡ, Pacatiana (Phrygia). In the fourth 
century after Christ, Phrygia was divided into Phrygia 
Salutaris and Phrygia Pacatiana [later, Capatiana]; Lao- 
dicea was the metropolis of the latter: 1 Tim. vi. 22 (in 
the spurious subscription). [Cf. Forbiger, Hndbch. ἃ. 
alt. Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 338, 847 sq.; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Col., Introd. (esp. pp. 19, 69 sq.).]* 

πάλαι, ady. of time, fr. Hom. down; 1. of old: 
Heb. i. 1; (as adj.) former, 2 Pet.i.9. [πάλαι properly 
designates the past not like πρίν and πρότερον rela- 
tively, i. 6. with a reference, more or less explicit, to 
some other time (whether past, pres., or fut.), but sim- 
ply and absolutely.] 2. long ago: Mt. xi. 21; 
Lk. x. 13; Jude 4; so also of time just past, Mk. xv. 44 
[ A. V. any while] (where L Tr txt. WH txt. ἤδη); 2 Co. 
xii. 19 LT Tr WH ΓΗ. V. all this time], (so in Hom. Od. 
20, 293; Joseph. antt. 14, 15, 4).* 

παλαιός, -d, -dv, (πάλαι, 4. v-), fr. Hom. down ; a i 
old, ancient, (Sept. several times for jw and pny): 
οἶνος παλαιός (opp. to νέος), Lk. ν. 39 [but WH in br.] 
(Hom. Od. 2, 340; Sir. ix. 10); διαθήκη. 2 Co. iii. 14; 
ἐντολή (opp. to καινή), given long since, 1 Jn. ii. 7; ζύμη 
(opp. to νέον φύρ.), 1 Co. v. 7sq.; neut. plur. παλαιά (opp. 
to καινά), old things, Mt. xiii. 52 (which seems to allude to 
such articles of food as are fit for use only after having 
been kept some time [al. consider clothing, jewels, etc., 
as referred to; cf. θησαυρός, 1 c.]; dropping the fig., old 
and new commandments; cf. Sir. xxiv. 23; Heb. v. 12 
8qq-); 6 παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος (opp. to ὁ νέος). our old 


474 


παλιγγενεσία 


man, i. 6. we, as we were before our mode of thought, 
feeling, action, had been changed, Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. iv. 22; 
[Col. iii. 91. 2. no longer new, worn by use, the 
worse for wear, old, (for 793, Josh. ix. 10 (4) sq.): 
ἱμάτιον, doxds, Mt. ix. 16 sq. ; ΜΚ. ii. 21 sq-; Lk. v. 39 
sq. [SyYN. see ἀρχαῖος, fin.]* 

παλαιότης, τητος, 7), (παλαιός), oldness: γράμματος, the 
old state of life controlled by ‘the letter’ of the law, Ro. 
vii. 6; see καινότης, and ypdyya,2c. ({Eur.], Plat., Aes- 
chin., Dio Cass. 72, 8.) * 

παλαιόω, -@: pf. πεπαλαίωκα ; Pass., pres. ptep. madat- 
ovpevos ; fut. παλαιωθήσομαι ; (παλαιός) ; a. to make 
ancient or old, Sept. for m3; pass. fo become old, to be 
worn out, Sept. for 773, pny: of things worn out by 
time and use, as βαλάντιον, Lk. xii. 33 ; ἱμάτιον, Heb. i. 11 
(Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Deut. xxix. 5; Josh. ix. 19 (13); Neh. 
ix. 21; Is. 1. 9; li. 6; Sir. xiv. 17). pass. τὸ παλαιούμε- 
νον, that which is becoming old, Heb. viii. 13 (Plat. symp. 
p- 208 b.; Tim. p. 59c.). b. to declare a thing to be 
old and so about to be abrogated: Heb. viii. 13 [see yr 
paca, fin. ].* 

πάλη, -ης, 9, (fr. πάλλω to vibrate, shake), fr. Hom. 
down, wrestling (a contest between two in which each 
endeavors to throw the other, and which is decided when 
the victor is able θλίβειν καὶ κατέχειν his prostrate antag- 
onist, i. e. hold him down with his hand upon his neck ; 
ef. Plat. lege. 7 p. 796; Aristot. rhet. 1, 5, 14 p. 1361", 
24; Heliod. aethiop. 10, 31; [ef. Krause, Gymn. τι. Agon. 
d. Griech. i. 1 p. 400 sqq.; Guhl and Koner p. 219 sq.; 
Dict. of Antiq. s. v. /ucta]); the term is transferred to 
the struggle of Christians with the powers of evil : Eph. 
Vie 152. 

παλιγγενεσία (T WH παλινγεν. [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 77 
bot.]), -as, 7, (πάλιν and γένεσις), prop. new birth, repro- 
duction, renewal, re-creation, (see Halm on Cie. pro Sest. 
§ 140), Vulg. and Augustine regeneratio; hence, moral 
renovation, regeneration, the production of a new life con- 
secrated to God, a radical change of mind for the better, 
(effected in baptism [ef. reff. 5. ν. βάπτισμα, 3]): Tit. 
iii. 5 [ef. the Comm. ad loc. (esp. Holtzmann, where see 
p- 172 sq. for reff.); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. esp. 88 84, 108; 
cf. Suicer, Thes. s. v.]. Commonly, however, the word 
denotes the restoration of a thing to its pristine state, its 
renovation, as the renewal or restoration of life after 
death, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 41; de cherub. ὃ 32; [de 
poster. Cain. § 36]; Long. past.3, 4 (2) (παλιγγ. ἐκ θανά- 
του); Leian. encom. muscae 7; Schol. ad Soph. Elec. 62 
(Πυθαγόρας περὶ παλιγγενεσίας ereparevero); Plut. mor. 
p- 998 6. [i. 6. de esu earn. ii. 4,4] (ὅτι χρῶνται κοινοῖς ai 
ψυχαὶ σώμασιν ἐν ταῖς παλιγγενεσίαις [οἵ. ibid. i. 7, 5; 
also de Is. et Osir. 72; de Ei ap. Delph. 9; ete.]); the 
renovation of the earth after the deluge, Philo de vita 
Moys. ii. § 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 4; the renewal of 
the world to take place after its destruction by fire, as 
the Stoics taught, Philo [de incorrupt. mundi §§ 3, 14, 
17]; de mund. §15; Antonin. 11, 1 [(cf. Gataker ad 
loc.) ; Zeller, Philos. d. Griech. iii. p. 188]; that signal 
and glorious change of all things (in heaven and earth) 


πάλιν 


for the better, that restoration of the primal and perfect 
condition of things which existed before the fall of our 
first parents, which the Jews looked for in connection 
with the advent of the Messiah, and which the primi- 
tive Christians expected in connection with the visible 
return of Jesus from heaven: Mt. xix. 28 (where the 


ΡΟ κα ο ρ 
Syriac correctly |Zgua odds, in the new age or 


world) ; cf. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeorum, p. 214 sq. ; 
Gfrorer, Jahrhundert des Heils, ii. p. 272 sqq.; [Schiirer, 
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29, 9; Weber, Altsynagog. Palist. 
Theol. § 89]. (Further, the word is used of Cicero’s 
restoration to rank and fortune on his recall from exile, 
Cic. ad Att. 6,6; of the restoration of the Jewish nation 
after the exile, aX. πατρίδος, Joseph. antt. 11, 3,9; of the 
recovery of knowledge by recollection, παλιγγ- τῆς γνώ- 
σεώς ἐστιν ἡ ἀνάμνησις, Olympiodor. quoted by Cousin in 
the Journal des Savans for 1834, p.488.) [Cf. Trench 
§ xviii.; Cremer 3te Aufl. 5. v.]* 

πάλιν, adv.,fr. Hom. down; 1. anew, again, [but 
the primary meaning seems to be back; cf. (among oth- 
ers) Ellendt, Lex. Soph. 8. v. ii. p. 485]; a. joined 
to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition 
of the action: Mt. ἵν. 8; xx.5; xxi. 36; xxii.1,4; Mk. 
ii. 13; iii. 20; Lk. xxiii. 20; Jn. i. 35; iv. 13 ; viii. 2, 8, 12, 
21; ix. 15,17; x.19; Acts xvii. 32; xxvii. 28; Ro. xi. 23; 
1 Co. vii. 5; 2Co. xi.16; Gal.i.9; 11.18; iv. 19; 2 Pet. 
ii. 20; Phil. ii. 28; iv.4; Heb.i. 6 (where πάλιν is tacitly 
opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into 
the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus’ former life on earth) ; 
Heb. v.12; vi.1,6; Jas. v.18; Rev. x. 8, 11; πάλιν μικρόν 
se. ἔσται, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; εἰς τὸ πάλιν, again (cf. Germ. 
zum wiederholten Male; [see eis, A. II. 2 fin.]), 2 Co. xiii. 
2; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning, 
where again combines with the notion of back ; thus with 
ἄγωμεν, Jn. xi. 7; ἀναχωρεῖν, Jn. vi. 15 [where Tdf. φεύγει 
and Grsb. om. πάλιν], (cf. ib. 3) ; ἀπέρχεσθαι, Jn. iv. 3; x. 
40; xx. 10; εἰσέρχεσθαι, Mk. ii. 1; 1.1; Jn. xviii. 33; 
xix. 9; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Mk. vii. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Jn. iv. 46; xiv. 
3; 2Co.i. 16; xii. 21 [ef. W. 554 (515) n.; B.§ 145, 2a.]; 
ὑπάγειν, Jn. xi. 8; ἀνακάμπτειν, Acts xviii. 21; διαπερᾶν, 
Mk. ν. 31 ; ὑποστρέφειν, Gal. i. 17; ἡ ἐμὴ παρουσία πάλιν 
πρὸς ὑμᾶς, my presence with you again, i.e. my return to 
you, Phil. i. 26 [ef. B. §125, 2]; also with verbs of tak- 
ing, Jn. x. 17sq.; Acts x. 16 Rec.; xi. 10. b. with 
other parts of the sentence: πάλιν εἰς φόβον, Ro. viii. 15; 
πάλιν ἐν λύπῃ, 2 Co. 11. 1. c. πάλιν is explained by 
the addition of more precise specifications of time [ef. 
W. 604 (562)]: πάλιν ἐκ τρίτου, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Trmrg. 
br. ἐκ tp.]; ἐκ δευτέρου, Mt. xxvi. 42; Acts x. 15; πάλιν 
δεύτερον, Jn. iv. 54; xxi. 16; πάλιν ἄνωθεν, again, anew, 
[R. V. back again (yet ef. Mey. ad loc.)], Gal. iv. 9 (Sap. 
xix. 6; πάλιν ἐξ ἀρχῆς, Arstph. Plut. 866; Plat. Eut. p. 
11 b.and 15c.; Isoe. areiop. 6 p. 338 [p. 220 ed. Lange]; 
ef. W. u.s.). 2. again, i.e. further, moreover, (where 
the subject remains the same anda repetition of the action 
or condition is indicated): Mt. ν. 33 (πάλιν ἠκούσατε) ; 
xiii. 44 (where T Tr WH om. L br. πάλιν), 45, 47; xix. 


475 


TAVOLKL 


24; Lk. xiii. 20; Jn. x. 7 [not Tdf.]; esp. where to O. T. 
passages already quoted others are added: Mt. iv. 7; 
Jn. xii. 39; xix. 37; Ro. xv. 10-12; 1 Co. iii. 20; Heb. 
i. 5; ii. 13; iv. 5; x. 30; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 3 sq. and 
often in Philo; ef. Bleek, Br. ἃ. ἃ. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 108. 3. 
in turn, on the other hand: Lk. vi. 43 T WH L br. Tr br.; 
1 Co. xii. 21; 2 Co. x.7; 1 Jn. ii. 8, (Sap. xiii. 8 ; xvi. 23; 
2 Mace. xv. 39; see exx. fr. prof. auth. in Papes. v. 2; 
Passow s.v. 3; [Ellendt u. s. (ad init.); L. and S. s. v. 
III. ; but many (e.g. Fritzsche and Meyer on Mt. iv. 7) 
refuse to recognize this sense in the N. 1.1). John uses 
πάλιν in his Gospel far more freq. than the other N. T. 
writ., in his Epp. but once; Luke two or three times; 
the author of the Rev. twice. 

παλινγενεσία, see παλιγγενεσία. 

παμπληθεί (T WH πανπλ. [cf. WH. App. p. 1507), 
adv., (fr. the adj. παμπληθής, which is fr. πᾶς and πλῆθος), 
with the whole multitude, all together, one and all: Lk. 
xxiii. 18 (Dio Cass. 75, 9,1). [Cf. W. § 16, 4 B. 4.7" 

πάμπολυς, παμπόλλη, πάμπολυ, (πᾶς and πολύς), very 
great: Mk. viii. 1 Rec. [where L T Tr WH πάλιν πολλοῦ]. 
(Arstph., Plat., Plut., [al.].) * 

Παμφυλία, -as, ἡ, Pamphylia, a province of Asia Minor, 
bounded on the E. by Cilicia, on the W. by Lycia and 
Phrygia Minor, on the N. by Galatia and Cappadocia, 
and on the S. by the Mediterranean Sea (there called 
the Sea [or Gulf] of Pamphylia [now of Adalia]): Acts 
li. 10; xiii. 13; xiv. 24; xv. 38; xxvii. 5. [Conybeare 
and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii.; Lewin, St. Paul, index 
s. v.; Dict. of Geogr. 8. v.]* 

πανδοκεύς, see πανδοχεύς. 

παν-δοκίον, see πανδοχεῖον. 

παν-δοχεῖον (-δοκίον, Tdf. [ef. his note on Lk. x. 34, and 
Hesych. s. v.]), -ov, τό, (fr. πανδοχεύς, 4- ν.), an inn, a 
public house for the reception of strangers (modern 
caravansary, khan, manzil): Lk. x. 84. (Polyb. 2, 15, 
5; Plut. de sanit. tuenda c. 14; Epict. enchirid. ec. 11 ; 
but the Attic form πανδοκεῖον is used by Arstph. ran. 
550; Theophr. char. 11 (20), 2; Plut. Crass. 22; Pa- 
laeph. fab. 46; Ael.v.h. 14,14; Polyaen. 4, 2, 3; Epict. 
diss. 2, 23, 36 sqq.; 4, 5,15; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307.) * 

παν-δοχεύς, -έως, ὁ, (πᾶς and δέχομαι [hence lit. ‘one who 
receives all comers ’]), for the earlier and more elegant 
πανδοκεύς (so Tdf.; [ef. W. 25 note]), an inn-keeper, host : 
Lk. x. 35. (Polyb. 2, 15,6; Plut. de sanit. tuenda 
c. 14.) * 

πανήγυρις, -ews, 4, (fr. mas and ἄγυρις fr. ἀγείρω), fr. 
Hat. and Pind. down; a. a festal gathering of the 
whole people to celebrate public games or other solemni- 
ties. Ὁ. univ. a public festal assembly; so in Heb. 
xii. 22 (23) where the word is to be connected with 
ἀγγέλων [so GL Tr (Tdf.); yet see the Comm.]. (Sept. 
for 75, Ezek. xlvi. 11; Hos. ii. 11 (13); ix.5; Moy, 
Am. v. 21.) [Cf. Trench § i.]* 

πανοικί [so RGL Tr] and πανοικεί (Τ [WH; see WH. 
App. p. 154 and cf. et, ¢]), on this difference in writing ef. 
W. 43 sq.; B. 73 (64), (πᾶς and οἶκος ; a form rejected 
by the Atticists for πανοικίᾳ, πανοικεσίᾳ, πανοικησίᾳ, [cf. W. 


πανοπλία 


26 (25); Lob. ad Phryn. p. 514 sq.]), with all (his) house, 
with (his) whole family: Acts xvi. 34. (Plat. Eryx. p. 
392¢.; Aeschin. dial. 2,1; Philo de Joseph. § 42; de 
vita Moys. i. 2; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 42; 5,1, 2; 3 Mace. 
iii. 27 where Fritzsche -xia.) * 

πανοπλία, -as, ἡ, (fr. πάνοπλος wholly armed, in full 
armor; and this fr. πᾶς and ὅπλον), full armor, complete 
armor, (i. e. a shield, sword, lance, helmet, greaves, and 
breastplate, [ef. Polyb. 6, 23, 2sqq.]): Lk. xi. 22; θεοῦ, 
which God supplies [W. 189 (178)], Eph. vi. 11, 13, 
where the spiritual helps needed for overcoming the 
temptations of the devil are so called. (Hadt., Plat., 
Isocr., Polyb., Joseph., Sept. ; trop. of the various appli- 
ances at God’s command for punishing, Sap. v. 18.) * 

πανουργία, -as, 1, (πανοῦργος, q. V-), crafliness, cunning : 
Lk. xx. 23; 2Co. iv. 2; xi. 3; Eph. iv. 14; contextually 
i.q. @ specious or false wisdom, 1 Co. iii. 19. (Aeschyl., 
Soph., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Leian., Ael., al.; πᾶσά τε ἐπι- 
στήμη χωριζομένη δικαιοσύνης καὶ τῆς ἄλλης ἀρετῆς πανουρ- 
γία οὐ σοφία φαίνεται, Plat. Menex. p. 247 ἃ. for Dy 
in a good sense, prudence, skill, in undertaking and carry- 
ing on affairs, Prov. i. 4; viii. 5; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv. 11) 
10.)* 

πανοῦργος, -ov, (πᾶς and ἘΡΓῺ i. q. ἐργάζομαι ; on the 
accent, see κακοῦργος), Sept. for Din; skilful, clever, 
ἘΠ Ὸ: 1. in a good sense, fit to undertake and accom- 
plish anything, dexterous ; wise, sagacious, skilful, (Aris- 
tot., Polyb., Plut., al.; Sept. Prov. xiii. 1; xxviii. 2). 
But far more freq. 2. in a bad sense, crafty, cun- 
ning, knavish, treacherous, deceitful, (Tragg., Arstph., 
Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 32 (31) [but here in a good 
2 Co. xii. 16.* 

πανπληθεί, see παμπληθεί. 

πανταχῆ or πανταχῇ (1, Tr WH; see εἰκῇ). adv., every- 
where: Acts xxi. 28 L T Tr WH, for πανταχοῦ, --- a varia- 
tion often met with also in the Mss. of prof. auth. [From 
Hat. down; ef. Meisterhans, Gr. ἃ. Att. Inschr. p. 64.]* 

πανταχόθεν, adv., from all sides, from every quarter: 
Mk. i. 45 Ree. [Hdt., Thue., Plat., al.]* 

πανταχοῦ. adv., everywhere: Mk. i. 28 T WH Tr br. ; 
xvi. 20; Lk. ix. 6; Acts xvii. 30; xxi. 28 Rec.; xxiv. 
3; xxviii. 22; 1 Co.iv.17. [Soph., Thuce., Plat., al.]* 

παντελής, -€s, (πᾶς and τέλος), all-complete, perfect, 
(Aeschyl., Soph., Plat., Diod., Plut., al. ; 3 Mace. vii. 16) ; 
εἰς TO παντελές (prop. unto completeness [W. § 51, 1 6.7) 
completely, perfectly, utterly: Lk. xiii. 11; Heb. vii. 25, 
(Philo leg. ad Gaium 21; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 5; 3, 11, 
Bran. 12.1.6: 2. 8. ἢ 15,5: Ἀ.6| wellness 1.7. 
27).* 

πάντη (RG LTr WH πάντῃ, see reff. 5. v. εἰκῆ), (πᾶς), 
adv., fr. Hom. down, everywhere; wholly, in all respects, 
in every way: Acts xxiv. 3.* 

πάντοθεν, (πᾶς). adv., fr. Hom. down, from all sides, 
from every quarter: Mk. i. 45 L T WH Tr [but the last 
named here παντύθεν: cf. Chandler § 842]; Lk. xix. 
43; Jn. xviii. 20 Rec.>#©!z; Heb. ix. 4.* 

παντοκράτωρ, -opos, 6, (πᾶς and xparéw), he who holds 
sway over all things; the ruler of all; almighty: of God, 


sense]; xxi. 12, ete.): 


i 


476 . παρά 


2Co. vi. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 35); Rev.i. 8; iv. 
8; xi. 17; xv. 3; xvi. 7, 14; xix. 6,15; xxi. 22. (Sept. 
for ni82¥ in the phrase Nixa¥ ΤῊ or Nay “ON Je- 
hovah or God of hosts; also for "1; Sap. vii. 25; Sir. 
xlii. 17; 1. 14; often in Judith and 2 and 3 Macc. ; An- 
thol. Gr. iv. p. 151 ed. Jacobs; Inserr.; eccles. writ. 
[e. g. Teaching ete. 10,3; ef. Harnack’s notes on Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. init. and the Symb. Rom. (Patr. apost. opp. 
i. 2 p. 134)]-)* 

πάντοτε, (πᾶς), adv., (for which the Atticists tell us 
that the better Grk. writ. used ἑκάστοτε; ef. Sturz, De 
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 sq.; [W. 26 (25)]), at all 
times, always, ever: Mt. xxvi. 11; Mk. xiv. 7; Lk. xv. 
31; xviii. 1; Jn. vi. 345 vii. 6; viii. 29; xi. 42; xii. 8; 
xviii. 20* [20> Rec.**]; Ro. i. 10 (9); 1Co. 1. 4; xv. 58; 
2 Co. ii. 14; iv. 10; v. 6; [vii. 14 Lmrg.]; ix. 8; Gal. 
iv. 18; Eph. v. 20; Phil. i. 4, 20; [iv.4]; Col. i. 3; iv. 
6, [12]; 1 Th.i.2; ii. 16; [iii.6]; iv.17; [v.15,16]; 2 
Th. i. 3, 11; ii. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 7; Philem. 4; Heb. vii. 
25. (Sap. xi. 22(21); xix.17 (18); Joseph., Dion. Hal., 
Plut., Hdian. 3, 9, 13 [(7 ed. Bekk.)]; Artem. oneir. 4, 
20; Athen., Diog. Laért.)* 

πάντως, (from πᾶς), adv., altogether (Latin omnino), 
i.e. a. in any and every way, by all means: 1 Co. 
ix. 22 (so fr. Hdt. down). b. doubtless, surely, cer- 
tainly: Lk. iv. 23; Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; xxi. 22; xxviii. 
4; 1 Co. ix. 10, (Tob. xiv. 8; Ael.v. h. 1, 32; by Plato 
in answers [ef. our colloquial by all means]). ο. 
with the negative οὐ, a. where ov is postpositive, in 
no wise, not at all: 1 Co. xvi. 12 (often so as far back as 
Hom.). 8. when the negative precedes, the force of 
the adverb is restricted : οὐ πάντως, not entirely, not al- 
together, 1 Co. v. 10; not in all things, not in all respects, 
Ro. iii. 9; (rarely i. q. πάντως οὐ, as in Ep. ad Diogn. 9 
“God οὐ πάντως ἐφηδόμενος τοῖς ἁμαρτήμασιν ἡμῶν. Like- 
wise οὐδὲν πάντως in Hdt. 5,84. Butin Theogn. 305 ed. 
Bekk. of κακοὶ οὐ πάντως κακοὶ ex γαστρὸς γεγόνασι κτλ. i8 
best translated not wholly, not entirely. Cf. W. 554 
(515) sq.; B. 389 (334) sq. [on whose interpretation of 
Ro. 1. c., although it is that now generally adopted, see 
Weiss in Meyer 6te Aufl.]).* 

παρά, [it neglects elision before prop. names begin- 
ning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.’s text) before 
some other words; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95, cf. W. § 5, 1 a.; 
B. 10], a preposition indicating close proximity, 
with various modifications corresponding to the various 
cases with which it is joined; ef. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 
643 sqq.; Matthiae § 588; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq.; Ktihner 
§ 440; Kriiger § 68, 34-36. It is joined 

I. with the GenitIvE; and as in Grk. prose writ. 
always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a 
thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or 
from one’s sphere of power, or from one’s wealth or 
store, Lat. a, ab; Germ.von ... her, von neben; French 
de chez; [Eng. from beside, from]; Sept. for *339D, 7°, 
Syxn (1S. xvii. 30); cf. W. 364 (342) sq- a. prop- 
erly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence, 
after verbs of coming, departing, setting out, 


παρά 


ete. (cf. French venir, partir de chez quelqu’un) : Mk. xiv. 
3; Lk. viii. 49 [here Lchm. ἀπό] ; Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 27; 
xvii. 8 ; [παρ᾽ ἧς ἐκβεβλήκει ἑπτὰ δαιμόνια, Mk. xvi. 91, Tr 
txt. WH]; εἶναι παρὰ θεοῦ, of Christ, to be sent from God, 
Jn. ix. 16, 33; to be sprung from God (by the nature of 
the Adyos), vi. 46 ; vii. 29 (where for the sake of the con- 
text κἀκεῖνός με ἀπέστειλεν [Τα . ἀπέσταλκεν) is added) ; 
μονογενοὺς παρὰ πατρός SC. ὄντος, Jn. i. 14; ἐστί τι παρά 
τινος, is given by one, Jn. xvii. 7 [ef. d. below]. b. 
joined to passive verbs, παρά makes one the author, the 
giver, ete. [W. 365 (343); B. § 134, 1]; so after dzo- 
στέλλεσθαι, Jn. i. 6 (the expression originates in the 
fact that one who is sent is conceived of as having been 
at the time with the sender, so that he could be selected 
or commissioned from among a number and then sent 
off) ; γίνεσθαι, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 11 (παρὰ κυρίου, 
from the Lord, by divine agency or by the power at 
God’s command) ; akin to which 1s οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ 
τοῦ θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα, Lk. i. 37 L mrg. T Tr WH [see ἀδυνα- 
τέω, b.]; λαλεῖσθαι, Lk. i. 45 (not ὑπό, because God had 
not spoken in person, but by an angel) ; κατηγορεῖσθαι, 
Acts xxii. 30 Rec. (not ὑπό [yet so L T Tr WH] because 
Paul had not yet been formally accused by the Jews, but 
the tribune inferred from the tumult that the Jews ac- 
cused him of some crime). c. after verbs of seek- 
ing, asking, taking, receiving, buying, [cf. W. 
370 (347) n.; Β. § 147,5; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 
12]; as, αἰτῶ, αἰτοῦμαι, Mt. xx. 20 (where L Tr txt. WH 
txt. dw αὐτοῦ) ; Jn. iv. 9; Acts ili. 2; ix. 2; Jas.i.5; 1Jn. 
y. 15 (where L T Tr WH am αὐτοῦ) ; ζητῶ, Mk. viii. 11; 
Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48; λαμβάνω, Mk. xii. 2; Jn. v. 34, 41, 
44; x.18; Acts 11.33; iii.5; xvii. 9; xx. 24; xxvi. 10; 
Jas. i. 7; 2 Pet.i.17; 1 Jn. iii. 22 (LT Tr WH ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ); 
2Jn.4; Rev. ii. 28 (27); παραλαμβάνω, Gal. i.12; 1 Th. 
ii. 13; iv. 1; ἀπολαμβάνω, Lk. vi. 34 RGL Trmrg.; 
κομίζομαι, Eph. vi. 8; γίνεταί poi τι, Mt. xviii. 19; δέχο- 
μαι, Acts xxii. 5; Phil. iv. 18; ἔχω, Actsix. 14; ὠνέομαι, 
Acts vii. 16; ἀγοράζομαι, Rev. iii. 18; also after ἄρτον 
φαγεῖν (sc. δοθέντα), 2 Th. iii. 8; εὑρεῖν ἔλεος, 2 Tim. i. 
18; ἔσται χάρις, 2 Jn. 3. after verbs of hearing, as- 
certaining, learning, making inquiry; as, ἀκούω 
τι; Jn. i. 40 (41); vi. 45 sq.; vii. 513 viii. 26,40; xv. 15; 
Acts x. 22; xxviii. 22; 2 Tim. i. 13; ii. 2; πυνθάνομαι, 
Mt. ii. 4; Jn. iv. 52; ἀκριβῶ, Mt. 11. 165 ἐπιγινώσκω, Acts 
xxiv. 8; μανθάνω, 2 Tim. iii. 14. d. in phrases in 
which things are said εἶναι or ἐξέρχεσθαι from one: 
Lk. ii. 1; vi. 19; Jn. xvii. 7 [see a. above]. e. 6, 
ἡ, τὸ παρά τινος [see ὁ, II. 8; ef. B. 8 125, 9; W. § 18, 
3]; a. absol.: of παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, those of one’s family, 
i. 6. his kinsmen, relations, Mk. iii. 21 (Sus. 33; one’s de- 
scendants [yet here Vulg. qui cum eo erant], 1 Mace. xiii. 
52; (Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 5]); ef. Fritzsche ad loc. p. 
101; [ Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.]; τὰ παρά twos, 
what one has beside him, and so at his service, i. e. one’s 
means, resources, Mk. v. 263; τὰ παρά τινων, sc. ὄντα, i. 6. 
δοθέντα, Lk. x. 7; Phil. iv. 18; [ef. W. 366 (343); Joseph. 
antt. 8, 6,6; b.j. 2, 8.4; ete.]. B. where it refers 
toa preceding noun: ἡ ἐξουσία ἡ παρά τινος, sc. received, 


477 


παρα 


Acts xxvi. 12 [RG]; ἐπικουρίας τῆς παρὰ (1, Τ Tr WH 
ἀπὸ) τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xxvi. 22 (ἡ mapa τινος εὔνοια, Xen. 
mem. 2, 2,12); ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, of which I am the 
author, Ro. xi. 27 [ef. W. 193 (182)]. 

II. with the Dative, παρά indicates that something is 
or is done either in the immediate vicinity of some one, 
or (metaph.) in his mind, near by, beside, in the power of, 
in the presence of, with, Sept. for OxN (1 K. xx. (xxi.) 1; 
Prov. viii. 30), 13 (Gen. xliv. 16 sq.; Num. xxxi. 49), 
‘YY (see b. below) ; cf. W. § 48, ἃ. p. 394 sq. (369) ; [B. 
339 (291 sq. -)]. a. near, by: εἱστήκεισαν παρὰ τῷ 
σταυρῷ, Jn. xix. 25 (this is the only pass. in the N. T. 
where παρά is joined with a dat. of the thing, in all 
others with a dat. of the person). aftera verb of mo- 
tion, to indicate the rest which follows the motion [cf. B. 
339 (292)], ἔστησεν αὐτὸ παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Lk. ix. 47. b. 
with, i. e. in one’s house; in one’s town; in one’s society: 
ξενίζεσθαι [q. v.], Acts x. 6; xxi. 16; μένειν, of guests 
or lodgers, Jn. i. 39 (40); iv. 40; xiv. 17, 25; Acts ix. 
43; xvili.3,20 [RG]; xxi. 7sq.; ἐπιμένειν, Acts xxviii. 
14 LT Tr WH; καταλύειν, Lk. xix. 7 (Dem. de corona 
§ 82 [cf. B. 339 (292)]); ἀριστᾶν, Lk. xi. 37; ἀπολείπειν 
τι, 2 Tim. iv. 13; mapa τῷ θεῷ, dwelling with God, Jn. 
Vili. 38; i.q.in heaven, Jn. xvii. 5; μισθὸν ἔχειν, to have 
a reward laid up with God in heaven, Mt. vi. 1; εὑρεῖν 
χάριν (there where God is, i. 6. God's favor [ef. W. 365 
(343)]), Lk.i. 30; a pers. is also said to have χάρις παρά 
one with whom he is acceptable, Lk. ii. 52; τοῦτο χάρις 
παρὰ θεῷ, this is acceptable with God, pleasing to him, 
1 Pet. ii. 20 (for .)»,3, Ex. xxxiii. 12,16; Num. x1. 15); 
παρὰ θεῷ, in fellowship with God (of those who have 
embraced the Christian religion and turned to God from 
whom they had before been estranged), 1 Co. vii. 24; 
mapa κυρίῳ (in heaven). before the Lord as judge, 2 Pet. 
ii. 11 [( Lom. and Tr WH br. the phrase]; παρ᾽ ὑμῖν, 
in your city, in your church, Col. iv. 16; w. a dat. plur. 
i. 4: among, Mt. xxii. 25; xxviii. 15; Rev. ii. 13; παρ᾽ 
1 Co. xvi. 2. c. παρ᾽ (L Tr WH 
txt. ἐν) ἑαυτῷ, with one’s self i. 6. in one’s own mind, δια- 
λογίζεσθαι, Mt. xxi. 25. d. a thing is said to be or 
not to be παρά τινι, with one, a. which belongs to his 
nature and character, or is in accordance with his prac- 
tice or the reverse; as, μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ θεῷ ; Ro. ix. 14; 
add, Ro. ii. 11; 2Co.i.17; Eph. vi. 9; Jas. i. 17. B. 
Maly is or is not within one’s power: Mt. xix. 26; Mk. 

. 27; Lk. xviii. 27, ef. 1. 81 RG L txt. 8. παρά τινι, 
with one i. 6. in his rancor he being judge, (so in Hat. 
and the Attic writ.; cf. Passow s. v. IT. 2, vol. ii. p. 667; 
[L. and S.s. ν. B. II. 87): παρὰ τῷ θεῷ, Ro. ii. 13 ; 1 Co. 
ii. 19; Gal. iii. 11; 2 Th. 1.6; Jas. i. 27; 1 Pet. it. 4; 2 
Pet. iii. 8 [π. κυρίῳ]; φρόνιμον εἶναι παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, [A. V. in 
one’s own conceit], Ro. xi. 25 (where Tr txt. WH txt. ev); 
xil. 16. 

III. with an Accusative; Sept. for ὍΝ, Ὑ 5p, 
723 (Josh. vii. 7; xxii. 7); cf. W. § 49g. p. 403 (377) 
sq-; [B. 339 (292)]; 1. prop. of place, at, by, near, 
by the side of, beside, along; so with verbs of motion: 
περιπατεῖν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν (Plat. Gorg. p. 511 e.), Mt. 


ἑαυτῷ, at his home, 


Tapa 


iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 [here LT Tr WH παράγω]; πίπτειν, 
Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv. 4; Lk. viii. 5,41; xvii.16; Acts v. 
10 (where L T Tr WH πρός); σπαρῆναι, Mt. xiii. 19; 
ῥίπτειν, Mt. xv. 80; τιθέναι, Acts iv. 35, 37 {here Tdf. 
πρός: ν. 23 ἀποτιθέναι, Acts vii. 58; ἔρχεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, 
Mt. xv. 29; Mk. ii. 13 [here Tdf. εἰς]; Acts xvi. 13; οἱ 
παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, sc. πεσόντες, Mk. iv. 15, ef. 4; Lk. viii. 12, 
ef. 5. with verbs of rest: καθῆσθαι, Mt. xiii. 1; xx. 30; 
Lk. viii. 35; with εἶναι, Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. with verbs 
denoting the business in which one is engaged, as παιδεύ- 
ew in pass., Acts xxii. 3 [so G LT Tr WH punctuate]; 
διδάσκειν, Mk. iv. 1. without a verb, in specifications of 
place, Acts x. 32; Heb. xi. 12. 2. beside, beyond, 
i. e. metaph. a. i.q. contrary to: mapa τὴν διδαχήν, Ro. 
xvi. 17; παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα, lit. beyond hope,i e where the laws 
and course of nature left no room for hope, hence i. q. 
withoul [A. V. against] hope, Ro. iv. 18 (in prof. auth., 
of things which happen against hope, beyond one’s ex- 
pectation, cf. Passow s. v. III. 3, vol. ii. p. 669"; Dion. 
Hal. antt. 6, 25); παρὰ τὸν νόμον, contrary to the law, 
Acts xviii. 13 (παρὰ τοὺς νόμους, opp. to κατὰ τοὺς νόμους, 
Xen. mem. 1, 1,18); παρ᾽ 6, contrary to that which, i. 6. 
at variance with that which, Gal. i. 8sq.; παρὰ φύσιν͵ 
Ro. i. 26; xi. 24, (Thue. 6,17; Plat. rep. 5 p. 466 d.); 
after ἄλλος, other than, different from, 1 Co. iii. 11 (see 
exx. fr. prof. auth. in Passow s. v. III. 3 fin. vol. ii. p. 
670°); παρὰ τὸν κτίσαντα, omitting or passing by the 
Creator, Ro. i. 25, where others explain it before (above) 
the Creator, rather than the Creator, agreeably indeed to 
the use of the prep. in Grk. writ. (ef. Ast, Lex. Plat. iii. 
p- 28 [cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, §165 8.; L. and S. 
s. vy. C. I. ὅ 4.7), but not to the thought of the passage. 
except, save, i. q. if you subtract from a given sum, less: 
τεσσαράκοντα παρὰ μίαν, one (stripe) excepted, 2 Co. xi. 
24 (τεσσαράκοντα ἐτῶν παρὰ τριάκοντα ἡμέρας, Joseph. 
antt. 4, 8, 1; παρὰ πέντε ναῦς, five ships being deducted, 
Thue. 8, 29; [παρ᾽ ὀλίγας ψήφους, Joseph. ὁ. Ap. 2, 37, 
3]; see other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bnhdy. p. 258; [W. 
τι. s.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]). b. above, beyond: 
mapa καιρὸν ἡλικίας, Heb. xi. 11; παρ᾽ ὃ det (Plut. mor. 
p- 88 f. [de profect. in virt. 8.187), Ro. xii. 3; i. q. more 
than: ἁμαρτωλοὶ παρὰ πάντας, Lk. xiii. 2; ἔχρισέ σε ἔλαιον 
παρὰ τοὺς μετ. more copiously than [A. V. above] thy 
fellows, Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8; ὑψοῦν τινα mapa 
twa, Sir. xv. 5); κρίνειν ἡμέραν παρ᾽ ἡμέραν, to preter one 
day to another (see κρίνω, 2), Ro. xiv. 5. Hence it is 
joined to comparatives: πλέον παρά τ. Lk. iii. 135 δια- 
φορώτερον παρ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὄνομα, Heb.i. 4; add, iii. 3; ix. 23; 
xi. 4; xii. 24; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in W. § 35, 2 b. [and 
as above]. ἐλαττοῦν τινα παρά τ.» to make one inferior 
to another, Heb. ii. 7, 9. 3. on account of (cf. Lat. 
propter i. q. 0b): παρὰ τοῦτο, for this reason, therefore, 
1 Co. xii. 15 sq.; cf. W. § 49 ¢. c. 

IV. In ComposiTI0N παρά denotes 1. situation 
or motion either from the side of, or to the side of ; near, 
beside, by, to: παραθαλάσσιος. παράλιος, παροικέω, παρακο- 
λουθέω, παραλαμβάνω, παραλέγομαι, παραπλέω, παράγω; 
of what is done secretly or by stealth, as παρεισέρχομαι, 


478 


παραβάασις 


παρεισάγω, παρεισδύω : cf. [the several words and] Fritz. 
sche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 846. by the side of i. 6. 
ready, present, at hand, (mapa τινι}: πάρειμι, παρουσία, 
παρέχω, etc. 2. violation, neglect, aberration, [cf. 
our beyond or aside i. q. amiss]: mapaBaivw, παραβάτης, 
παρανομέω, παρακούω, παρίημι, πάρεσις, παραλογίζομαι, 
παράδοξος, παραφρονία, ete. 3. like the Germ. an 
(in anreizen, antreiben, etc.): παραζηλόω, παραπικραίνω, 
παροξύνω, mapopyifw. [Cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 650 sq. | 

παρα-βαίνω ; 2 aor. παρέβην ; prop. to go by the side of 
(in Hom. twice παρβεβαώς of one who stands by anoth- 
er’s side in a war-chariot, I]. 11, 522; 18, 708 [but here 
of men on foot); ἐὺ go past or to pass over without touch- 
ing a thing; trop. to overstep, neglect, violate, transgress, 
w. an acc. of the thing (often so in prof. auth. fr. Aes- 
chyl. down [ef. παρά, [V. 1 and 37}: τὴν παράδοσιν, Mt. 
xv. 2; τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ θεοῦ. ibid. 3; ὁ παραβαίνων, he that 
transgresseth, oversteppeth, i. e. who does not hold to 
the true doctrine, opp. to μένειν ev τῇ διδαχῇ, 2 Jn. 9 RG 
[where L T Tr WH ὁ προάγων (q. v-) | (So οἱ παραβαίνον- 
res, transgressors of the law, Sir. xl. 14 [ef. Joseph. e. 
Ap. 2, 18, 2; 29,4; 80,17}; (τὴν διαθήκην, Josh. vii. 11, 
15; Ezek. xvi. 59, and often; τὸ ῥῆμα κυρίου, Num. xiv. 
41; 18. xv. 24, ete.; ras συνθήκας, Polyb. 7,5, 1; Joseph. 
antt. 4, 6,5; Ael. v. h. 10, 2; besides, παραβ. δίκην, τὸν 
νόμον, τοὺς ὅρκους, πίστιν, etc., in Grk. writ.). in imita- 
tion of the Hebr. 530 foll. by 712, we find mapa. ἔκ τινος 
and ἀπό τινος, so to go past as to turn aside from, i.e. fo 
depart, leave, be turned from: ἐκ τῆς ὁδοῦ, Ex. xxxii. 8; 
Deut. ix. 12; ἀπὸ τῶν ἐντολῶν, Deut. xvii. 20; ἀπὸ τῶν 
λόγων, Deut. xxviii. 14 cod. Alex.; once soin the N. T.: 
ἐκ (LT Tr WH ἀπὸ) τῆς ἀποστολῆς, of one who abandons 
his trust, [R. V. fell away], Acts i. 25. (In the Sept. 
also for 12), VDT to break, NYY to deviate, turn aside.) 
[SYN.: παραβαίνειν to overstep, παραπορεύεσθαι to proceed 
by the side of, παρέρχεσθαι to go past. |* 

παρα-βάλλω: 2 aor. παρέβαλον ; 1. to throw be- 
fore, cast to, [ef. παρά, ΤΥ͂. 11, (Hom., Plat., Polyb., Dio 
Cass., al. ; as fodder to horses, Hom. II. 8, 504). 2 
to put one thing by the side of another for the sake of 
comparison, to compare, liken, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Polyb., 
Joseph., Hdian.): τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν παραβολῇ, 
to portray the kingdom of God (in), by the use of, a 
similitude, Mk. iv. 30 RG Lmrg. Tr mrg. [ef. B. § 133, 
22). 3. reflexively, to put one’s self, betake one’s 
self, into a place or to a person (Plat., Polyb., Plut., 
Diog. Laért.); of seamen (Hat. 7,179; Dem. p. 163, 4; 
εἰς ΠΠοτιόλους, Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 4), εἰς Σάμον, Acts xx. 
15 [put in at (R. V. touched at)}. For another use of 
this verb in Grk. writ. see παραβολεύομαι." 

παρά-βασις, -ews. 9, (παραβαίνω, q. V.), prop. @ going 
over; metaph. a disregarding, violating ; Vulg. praevarica- 
tio, and once (Gal. iii. 19) transgressio ; [A. V. transgres- 
sion]: w.a gen. of the object, τῶν ὅρκων, 2 Mace. xv. 10; 
τῶν δικαίων, Plut.compar. Ages. and Pomp.1; τοῦ νόμου, 
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 23 (Joseph. antt. 18, 8,2); ab- 
solutely, the breach of a definite, promulgated, ratified 
law: Ro. v. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 14, (but ἁμαρτία is wrong-do- 


παραβάτης 


ing which even a man ignorant of the law may be guilty 
of [ef. Trench, N. T. Syn. § lxvi.]) ; τῶν παραβ. χάριν. to 
create transgressions, i.e. that sins might take on the 
character of transgressions, and thereby the conscious- 
ness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption 
be aroused, Gal. iii. 19 ; used of the transgression of the 
Mosaic law, Ro. iv. 15; Heb. ii. 2; ix. 15; Ps. e. (ci.) 
3; w. agen. of the subj., τῶν ἀδίκων, Sap. xiv. 31.* 
παρα-βάτης, -ov, 6, (παραβαίνω [cf. W. 267), a trans- 
gressor (Vulg. praevaricator, transgressor) : νόμου, α law- 
breaker (Plaut. legirupa), Ro. ii. 25, 27; Jas. ii. 11; 
absol., Gal. ii. 18; Jas. ii. 9. [Aeschyl. (παρβάτης) ; 
Graec. Ven. Deut. xxi. 18, 20.]* 
παρα-βιάζομαι: 1 aor. παρεβιασάμην; depon. verb, to 
employ force contrary to nature and right (ef. παρά, IV. 2], 
to compel by employing force (Polyb. 26, 1, 3): τινά, to 
constrain one by entreaties, Lk. xxiv. 29; Acts xvi. 15; 
so Sept. in Gen. xix. 9; 1S. xxviii. 23, etc.* 
παραβολεύομαι: 1 aor. mid. ptep. παραβολευσάμενος ; 
to be παράβολος 1. 6. one who rashly exposes himself to dan- 
gers, to be venturesome, reckless, (cf. W. 93 (88); Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 67); recklessly to expose one’s self to dan- 
ger: with a dat. of respect, τῇ Ψυχῇ, as respects life; 
hence, to expose one’s life boldly, jeopard life, hazard life, 
Phil. ii. 80 6 1, T Tr WH for the παραβουλευσάμ. of Ree. ; 
on the difference between these readings cf. Gabler, 
Kleinere theol. Schriften, i. p. 176sqq. This verb is 
not found in the Grk. writ., who say παραβάλλεσθαι, now 
absol. to expose one’s self to danger (see Passow s. v. 
παραβάλλω, 2; L.and §. ib. II.), now with an ace. of the 
thing [to risk, stake], as ψυχήν, Hom. 1]. 9, 322; σῶμα 
καὶ ψυχήν, 2 Mace. xiv. 38 (see other exx. in Passow 
{and L. and 8.11. c.); now w. a dat. of reference, ταῖς 
ψυχαῖς, Diod. 3, 35; τῇ ἐμαυτοῦ κεφαλῇ, ἀργυρίῳ, Phryn. 
ed. Lob. p. 238; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. 1. ¢.].* 
παραβολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (παραβάλλω, q. v.), Sept. for own ; 
1. a placing of one thing by the side of another, juxta- 
position, as of ships in battle, Polyb. 15, 2, 13; Diod. 14, 
60. 2. metaph. a comparing, comparison of one 
thing with another, likeness, similitude, (Plat., Isocr., 
Polyb., Plut.): univ., Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; an 
example by which a doctrine or precept is illustrated, 
Mk. iii. 23; Lk. xiv. 7; a thing serving as a figure of 
something else, Heb. ix. 9; this meaning also very many 
interpreters give the word in Heb. xi. 19, but see 5 be- 
low; spec. a narrative, fictitious but agreeable to the 
laws and usages of human life, by which either the duties 
of men or the things of God, particularly the nature and 
history of God’s kingdom, are figuratively portrayed (cf. 
B. Ὁ. s. vv. Fable, Parable, (and reff. there ; add Aristot. 
rhet. 2, 20, 2 sqq. and Cope’s notes) ]: Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 
24, 31, 33-35, 53; xxi. 33, 45; [xxii.1]; Mk. iv. 2, 10, 
[11], 13, 30, 33 sq.; [vii. 17]; xii. 1, [12]; Lk. viii. 4, 
9-115; xii. 16,41; xili.6; xiv.7; xv. 3; xvill. 1, 9; xix. 
11; xx. 9,19; xxi.29; witha gen. of the pers. or thing 
to which the contents of the parable refer [W. § 30, 
1 ἃ.7: τοῦ ometpovros, Mt. xiii. 18; τῶν ζιζανίων, ib. 36; 
τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν παραβολῇ τιθέναι (lit. to set forth 


419 


παραγίνομαι 


the kingdom of God in a parable), to illustrate (the na- 
ture and history of) the kingdom of God by the use of a 
parable, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. T Trtxt. WH. 3. a pithy 
and instructive saying, involving some likeness or compar- 
ison and having preceptive or admonitory force; an 
aphorism, a maxim: Lk. v.36; vi. 39; Mt. xv. 15, (Prov. 
1.6; Eccl. i. 17; Sir. iii. 29 (27); xiii. 26 (25), ete.). 
Since sayings of this kind often pass into proverbs, 
παραβολή 15 4. a proverb: Lk. iv. 28 (1 5. x. 12; 
Ezek. xii. 22 sq.; xviii. 2 sq.). 5. an act by which 
one exposes himself or his possessions to danger, a ven- 
ture, risk, (in which sense the plur. seems to be used by 
Plut. Arat. 22: διὰ πολλῶν ἑλιγμῶν καὶ παραβολῶν περαί- 
νοντες πρὸς τὸ τεῖχος [οἷ. Diod. Sic. frag. lib. xxx. 9, 2; 
also var. in Thue. 1, 131, 2 (and Poppo ad loc.)]); ἐν 
παραβολῇ, in risking him, i.e. at the very moment when 
he exposed his son to mortal peril (see παραβολεύομαι), 
Heb. xi. 19 (Hesych. ἐκ παραβολῆς - ἐκ παρακινδυνεύμα- 
τος); others with less probability explain it, in a figure, 
i.e. as a figure, either of the future general resurrection 
of all men, or of Christ offered up to God and raised 
again from the dead; others otherwise.* 

mapa-Bovdctopar: 1 aor. ptep. παραβουλευσάμενος ; to 
consult amiss [see παρά, IV. 2]: w. a dat. of the thing, 
Phil. ii. 30 Rec. Not found in prof. auth. See παρα- 
βολεύομαι." 

παρ-αγγελία, -ας, 7, (παραγγέλλω);, prop. announcement, 
a proclaiming or giving a message to; hence a charge, 
command: Acts xvi. 24; a prohibition, Acts v. 28; used 
of the Christian doctrine relative to right living, 1 Tim. 
i. 5; of particular directions relative to the same, 18; 
plur.in1 Th.iv.2. (Ofamilitary order in Xen., Polyb.; 
of instruction, Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 2 p. 11049, 7; Diod. 
exc. p. 512, 19 [i. 6. frag. lib. xxvi. 1, 1].)* 

παρ-αγγέλλω ; impf. παρήγγελλον ; 1 aor. παρήγγειλα; 
(παρά and ἀγγέλλω) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; ik 
prop. to transmit a message along from one to another 
[(cf. παρά, IV. 1)], to declare, announce. 2. to com- 
mand, order, charge: w. dat. of the pers. 1 Th. iv. 11 [ef. 
Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion ᾽] ; foll. by 
λέγων and direct dise. Mt. x. 5; foll. by an inf. aor., 
Mt. xv.35 LT Tr WH; Mk. viii. 6; Lk. viii. 29; Acts 
x.42; xvi. 18; with μή inserted, Lk. v. 14; viii. 56; Acts 
xxiii. 22; 1 Co. vii. 10 [here Lehm. inf. pres.] ; foll. by an 
inf. pres., Acts xvi. 23; xvii.30 [here T Tr mrg. WH have 
ἀπαγγ.}; 2 Th. iii. 6; with μή inserted, Lk. ix. 21 [GL 
T Tr WH]; Acts i. 4; iv. 18; v.28 (παραγγελίᾳ παραγ- 
γέλλειν, to charge strictly, W. §54, 3; B.184 (199 sq.)), 
40; 1 Tim. i. 3; vi. 17; τινί τι, 2 Th. iii. 4 [but T Tr WH 
om. L br. the dat.]; τοῦτο foll. by ὅτι, 2 Th. iii. 10; rut 
foll. by ace. and inf., [Acts xxiii. 30 L T Tr mrg.]; 2 
Th. iii. 6; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [here Tdf. om. dat.]; foll. by an 
inf. alone, Acts xv. 5; by ἵνα (see iva, IT. 2 b.), Mk. vi. 
8; 2 Th.iii.12; with an acc. of the thing alone, 1 Co. xi. 
17; 1 Tim. iv. 11; v. 7. [SyN. see κελεύω, fin.] * 

παρα γίνομαι ; impf. 3 pers. plur. παρεγίνοντο (Jn. iil. 
23); 2 aor. παρεγενόμην; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 8)3; 
(prop. to become near, to place one’s self by the side of, 


Tapayo 


hence) to be present, to come near, approach: absol., Mt. 
iii. 1 [but in ed. 1 Prof. Grimm (more appropriately) asso- 
ciates this with Heb. ix. 11; Lk. xii. 51 below]: Lk. [xiv. 
21]; xix.16; Jn. iii. 23; Acts v. 21 sq. 25; ix. 89; x. 32 
ΓΒ G Tr mrg. br.], 33; xi. 23; xiv. 27; xvii. 10; xviii. 27; 
xxi. 18; xxiii. 16, 353; xxiv. 17, 24; xxv. 7; xxviii. 21; 1 
Co. xvi.3;  foll. by ἀπό νυ. gen. of place and eis w. ace. of 
place, Mt. ii. 1; Acts xiii. 14; by ἀπό with gen. of place 
and ἐπί w. ace. of place and πρός w. ace. of pers. Mt. iii. 
13; by παρά w. gen. of pers. (i. e. sent by one [ef. W. 365 
(342)]), Mk. xiv. 43; by πρός τινα, Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19; 
Acts xx. 18; πρός τινα ἐκ w. gen. of place, Lk. xi. 6; by 
eis w. acc. of place, Jn. viii. 2; Acts ix. 26 (here Lehm. 
ἐν); xv.4; by ἐπί τινα (against, see ἐπί, C. I. 2 g. y. BB.), 
Lk. xxii. 52 [Tdf. πρός]. i. q. to come forth, make one’s 
public appearance, of teachers: of the Messiah, absol. 
Heb. ix. 11; foll. by an inf. denoting the purpose, Lk. xii. 
51; [of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 1 (see above)]. 1. q. 
to be present with help [R. V. to take one’s part], w. a 
dat. of the pers. 2 Tim. iv. 16 LTTrWH. [Comp.: 
συμ-παραγίνομαι. * 

παρ-άγω ; impf. παρῆγον (Jn. viii. 59 Rec.) ; pres. pass. 
3 pers. sing. παράγεται; fr. [Archil., Theogn.], Pind. and 
Hdt. down; Sept. several times for 72» in Kal and 
Hiphil ; 1. trans. [(cf. mapa, IV-)]; a. to lead 
past, lead by. b. to lead aside, mislead; to lead 
away. c. to lead to; to lead forth, bring forward. 
2. intrans. (see ἄγω, 4) ; a. to pass by, go past: Mt. 
xx. 30; Mk. ii. 14; xv. 21; [Lk. xviii. 39 L mrg.]; foll. 
by παρά w. an ace. of place, Mk. i. 16 L T Tr WH (by 
κατά w. acc. of place, 3 Mace. vi. 16; θεωροῦντες παρά- 
γουσαν τὴν δύναμιν, Polyb. 5, 18, 4). b. to depart, 
go away: Jn. viii. 59 Rec.; ix. 1; ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. ix. 9, 27. 
ΓΑΙ. adhere to the meaning pass by in all these pass. ] 
Metaph. to pass away, disappear: 1 Co. vii. 31 (Ps. exliii. 
(exliv.) 5); in the passive in the same sense, 1 Jn. ii. 
Sele 

mapa-Seyparitw; 1 aor. inf. παραδειγματίσαι ; (παρά- 
δειγμα [(fr. δείκνυμι) } an example; also an example in 
the sense of a warning [ef. Schmidt ch. 128]); [0 set 
forth as an example, make an example of; in abad sense, 
to hold up to infamy; to expose to public disgrace: τινά, 
Mt.i.19 RG; Heb. vi. 6 [A. V. put to open shame]. 
(Num. xxv. 4; Jer. xiii. 22; Ezek. xxviii. 17; [Dan. ii. 5 
Sept.]; Add. to Esth. iv. 8 [36]; Evang. Jac. c. 20; often 
in Polyb.; Plut. de curios. 10; Euseb. quaest. ad Steph. 
1, 3 (iv. 884 ἃ. ed. Migne).) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 128.]* 

παράδεισος, -ov, 6, (thought by most to be of Persian 
origin, by others of Armenian, cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. 
Ρ- 1124; [B. D.s.v.; esp. Fried. Delitzsch, Wo lag das 
Paradies? Leipzig 1881, pp. 95-97; cf. Max Miiller, 
Selected Essays, i. 129 sq.]), 1. among the Persians 
a grand enclosure or preserve, hunting-ground, park, 
shady and well-watered, in which wild animals were 
kept for the hunt; it was enclosed by walls and furnished 
with towers for the hunters: Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14; [1, 4, 
5]; 8, 1, 838; oec. 4, 13 and 14; anab. 1, 2, 7.9; Theo- 
phr. h. pl. 5, 8,1; Diod. 16, 41; 14, 80; Plut. Artax. 


480 


παραδίδωμι 


25, cf. Curt. 8, 1, 11. 2. univ. a garden, pleasure- 
ground; grove, park: Leian. v.h. 2, 23; Ael. v.h. 1, 335 
Joseph. antt. 7, 14,43 8,7,3; 9,10, 4; 10, 3,2 and 11, 
1; Ὁ. j. 6, 1, 1; [e. Apion. 1, 19, 9 (where ef. Miiller)]; 
Sus. 4, 7, 15, etc.; Sir. xxiv. 30; and so it passed inte 
the Hebr. language, 0399, Neh. ii.8; Eccl. ii. 5; Cant. 
iv. 13; besides in Sept. mostly for 2; thus for that de- 
lightful region, ‘the garden of Eden,’ in which our first 
parents dwelt before the fall: Gen. ii. 8 sqq.}; iii. 1 
8566. 3. that part of Hades which was thought by 
the later Jews do be the abode of the souls of the pious 
until the resurrection: Lk. xxiii. 43, ef. xvi. 23 sqq. But 
some [e. g. Dillmann (as below p. 379)] understand that 
passage of the heavenly paradise. 4. an upper 
region in the heavens: 2 Co. xii. 4 (where some maintain, 
others deny, that the term is equiv. to ὁ τρίτος οὐρανός 
in vs. 2); with the addition of τοῦ θεοῦ, gen. of possessor, 
the abode of God and heavenly beings, to which true 
Christians will be taken after death, Rev. ii. 7 (cf. Gen. 
xiii. 10; Ezek. xxviii. 13; xxxi. 8). According to the 
opinion of many of the church Fathers, the paradise in 
which our first parents dwelt before the fall still exists, 
neither on earth nor in the heavens, but above and be- 
yond the world; ef. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test., on 
Evang. Nicod. ec. xxv. p. 748 sqq.; and Bleek thinks that 
the word ought to be taken in this sense in Rev. ii. 7. 
Cf. Dillmann s. v. Paradies in Schenkel iv. 377 sqq.; 
also Hilgenfeld, Die Clement. Recogn. und Hom. p. 87 
sq.; Klépper on 2 Co. xii. 2-4, p. 507 sqq. [(Gottingen, 
1869). See also B.D.s.v.; McC. and S.s. v.; Hamburg- 
er, Real-Encyclopiidie, Abtheil. ii. s. v.]* 

παρα-δέχομαι; fut. 3 pers. plur. παραδέξονται ; depon. 
mid., but in bibl. and eecles. Grk. w. 1 aor. pass. mape- 
δέχθην (Acts xv. 4 LT Tr WH; 2 Mace. iv. 22; [ef. B. 
51 (44)]); 1. in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, prop. 
to receive, take up, take upon one’s self. Hence 2. 
to admit i. 6. not to reject, to accept, receive: τὸν λόγον, 
Mk. iv. 20; ἔθη, Acts xvi. 21 ; τὴν μαρτυρίαν, Acts xxii. 
18; κατηγορίαν, 1 Tim. v. 19, (τὰς δοκίμους δράχμας, Epict. 
diss. 1, 7, 6); τινά, of a son, to acknowledge as one’s own 
ΓΑ. V. receiveth], Heb. xii. 6 (after Prov. iii. 12, where 
for τῆν 1); of a delegate or messenger, to give due re- 
ception to, Acts xv.4 LT Tr WH. [CE. δέχομαι, fin.]* 

παρα-δια-τριβή, -ῆς; 7, useless occupation, empty business, 
misemployment (see παρά, IV. 2): 1 Tim. vi. 5 Ree. [ef. 
W. 102 (96)], see διαπαρατριβηῆ. Not found elsewhere ; 
[ef. παραδιατυπόω in Justinian (in Koumanoudes, Λέξεις 
ἀθησαύρ. s. Vv.) |." 

παρα-δίδωμι, subjunc. 3 pers. sing. παραδιδῷ (1 Co. xv. 
24 [Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH, cod. Sin., ete.]) and παραδιδοῖ 
(ibid. L txt. T Trtxt.; cf. Β. 46 (40) [and δίδωμε, init. ]}) ; 
impf. 3 pers. sing. παρεδίδου (Acts viii. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 23), 
plur. παρεδίδουν (Acts xvi. 4 RG; xxvii. 1) and παρε- 
δίδοσαν (Acts xvi. 41, T Tr WH; οἵ. W. § 14, 1 ο.; B. 45 
(39)); fut. παραδώσω ; 1 aor. παρέδωκα ; 2 aor. παρέδων, 
subjune. 3 pers. sing. παραδῷ and several times maoadoi 
(so LT Tr WH in Mk. iv. 29; xiv. 10, 11; Jn. xiii. 2; 
see δίδωμε, init.); pf. ptep. παραδεδωκώς (Acts xv. 26): 


παραδίδωμι 


plupf. 3 pers. plur. without augm. παραδεδώκεισαν (Mk. | 
xv. 10; W. 812, 9; [B. 33 (29); Tf. Proleg. p. 120 | 
sq-]); Pass., pres. παραδίδομαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing. παρε- | 
8idero (1 Co. xi. 23 L Τ ΤΥ WH for RK ἃ παρεδίδοτο, see 
ἀποδίδωμι); pf. 3 pers. sing. mapadedora (Lk. iv. 6), 
ptep. παραδεδομένος, Acts xiv. 26; 1 aor. παρεδύθην; 
1 fut. παραδοθήσομαι; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; Sept. 
mostly for {0}; lo give over; 1. prop. to give 
inlo the hands (of another). 2. to give over into 
(one’s) power or use: τινί τι, to deliver to one something 
to keep, use, take care of, manage, Mt. xi. 27; Lk. iv. 6 
[οἷ W. 271 (254)]; x. 22; τὰ ὑπάρχοντα, τάλαντα, Mt. 
xxv. 14, 20, 22; τὴν βασιλείαν, 1 Co. xv. 24; τὸ πνεῦμα 
sc. TO θεῷ, In. Xix. 30; τὸ σῶμα, ἵνα ete., to be burned, 
1Co. xiii. 3; teva, to deliver one up to custody, to be judged, 
condemned, punished, scourged, tormented, put to death, 
(often thus in prof. auth.): τινά, absol., so that to be put 
in prison must be supplied, Mt. iv.12; Mk. i. 14; τηρου- 
μένους, who are kept, 2 Pet. ii. 4[GTTr WH; but R 
τετηρημένους, L κολαζομένους τηρεῖν); to be put to death 
(cf. Germ. dahingeben), Ro. iv. 25; with the addition of 
ὑπέρ τινος, for one’s salvation, Ro. viii. 32; τινά τινι, Mt. 
y. 25; xviii. 34; xx. 18; xxvil. 2; Mk. xv.1; Lk. xii. 58; 
xx. 20; Jn. xviii. 30, 35 sq.; xix. 11 ete.; Acts xxvii. 1; 
xxvili. 16 Rec.; τῷ θελήματι αὐτῶν, to do their pleasure 
with, Lk. xxiii. 253 τινά τινι, foll. by ἵνα, Jn. xix. 16; 
with an inf. of purpose, φυλάσσειν αὐτόν, to guard him, 
Acts xii. 4; without the dat., Mt. x. 19; xxiv. 10; xxvii. 
18; Mk. xiii. 11; xv. 10; Acts iii. 13; foll. by wa, Mt. 
xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15; τινὰ εἰς τὸ σταυρωθῆναι, Mt. xxvi. 2 
(σταυροῦ θανάτῳ, Ev. Nicod. c. 26) ; εἰς χεῖράς τινος, i.e. 
into one’s power, Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi. 49; Mk. ix. 31; 
xiv. 41; Lk. ix. 44; xxiv. 7; Acts xxi. 11; xxviii. 17, 
(Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 24; xxxix. (xxxii.) 4); εἰς συνέδρια, 
to councils [see συνέδριον, 2 b.] (παραδιδόναι involving 
also the idea of conducting), Mt. x.17; Mk. xiii. 9; εἰς 
συναγωγάς, Lk. xxi. 125 εἰς θλίψιν, Mt. xxiv. 9; εἰς φυλα- 
κήν, Acts viii. 3; εἰς φυλακάς, Acts xxii. 4; εἰς θάνατον, 
Mt. x. 21; Mk. xiii. 12; 2 Co. iv. 11; εἰς κρίμα θανάτου, 
Lk. xxiv. 20; τὴν σάρκα eis καταφθοράν, of Christ under- 
going death, Barn. ep. 5, 1; παραδιδόναι ἑαυτὸν ὑπέρ τινος, 
to give one’s self up for, give one’s self to death for, to 
undergo death for (the salvation of) one, Gal. ii. 20; 
Eph. v. 25; with the addition of τῷ θεῷ anda pred. ace., 
Eph. v. 2; τὴν ψυχὴν ἑαυτοῦ ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος ᾿Ιησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, to jeopard life to magnify and make known the 
name of Jesus Christ, Acts xv. 26. Metaph. expres- 
sions: τινὰ τῷ arava, to deliver one into the power of 
Satan to be harassed and tormented with evils, 1 Tim. 
i. 20; with the addition of εἰς ὄλεθρον σαρκός (see ὄλε- 
Opos), 1 Co. v. 5 (the phrase seems to have originated 
from the Jewish formulas of excommunication [yet see 
Meyer (ed. Heinrici) ad loc. (cf. B. D. s. vv. Hymenzus 
II., Excommunication II.) ], because a person banished 
from the theocratic assembly was regarded as deprived 
of the protection of God and delivered up to the power 
of the devil). τινὰ εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν, to cause one to be- 
come unclean, Ro. i. 24; cf. Fritzsche, Riickert, and 


481 


, 
παράδοσις 


others ad loc. [in this ex. and several that follow A. V. 
renders fo give up]; eis πάθη ἀτιμίας, to make one a slave 
of vile passions, ib. 26; εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν, to cause one to 


| follow his own corrupt mind. —foll. by an inf. of purpose 


[or epexegetic inf. (Meyer) ], ib. 25; ἑαυτὸν τῇ ἀσελγείᾳ, 
to make one’s self the slave of lasciviousness, Eph. iv. 
19; τινὰ λατρεύειν, to cause one to worship, Acts vii. 42. 
to deliver up treacherously, i.e. by betrayal to cause 
one to be taken: τινά τινι, of Judas betraying Jesus, Mt. 
xxvi. 15; Mk. xiv. 10; Lk. xxii. 4,6; without the dat., 
Mt. xxvi. 16, 21, 23, 25; Mk. xiv. 11, 18; Lk. xxii. 21, 
48; Jn. vi. 64,71; xii. 4; in the pass., Mk. xiv. 21; Lk. 
xxii. 22; 1 Co. xi. 23; pres. ptep. ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτόν, of 
him as plotting the betrayal (cf. B. § 144, 11, 3): Mt. 
xxvi. 25, 46, 48; Mk. xiv. 42, 44; Jn. xiii. 11; xviii. 2, 
5. to deliver one to be taught, moulded, ete.: εἴς τι, in 
pass., Ro. vi. 17 (to be resolved thus, ὑπηκ. τῷ τύπῳ ete- 
eis ὃν παρεδόθητε [W. ὃ 24, 2 b.]). 3. i,q. to com- 
mit, to commend : twa τῇ χάριτι τ. θεοῦ, in pass., Acts xiv. 
26; xv. 40; παρεδίδου τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως, sc. τὰ ἑαυτοῦ, 
his cause (Β. 145 (127) note® [ef. W. 590 (549)]), 1 Pet. 
ii. 23. 4. to deliver verbally: commands, rites, Mk. 
vii. 18; Acts vi. 14; 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 21 (here in 
pass.); πίστιν, the tenets [see πίστις, 1 ο. B.], in pass. 
Jude 3; φυλάσσειν τὰ δόγματα, the decrees to keep, Acts 
xvi. 4; to deliver by narrating, to report, i. e. to perpetu- 
ate the knowledge of events by narrating them, Lk. i. 2; 
1 Co. xi. 23; xv. 8, (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow 
{or L. and 8.1 s. v. 4). 5. to permit, allow: absol. 
ὅταν παραδῷ or παραδοῖ ὁ καρπός, when the fruit will allow, 
i. e. when its ripeness permits, Mk. iv. 29 (so τῆς ὥρας 
παραδιδούσης, Polyb. 22, 24, 9; for other exx. see Passow 
s. v.3[L. and S. s. v. ΤΠ. ; others take the word in Mk. ]. 6. 
intransitively, in a quasi-reflexive sense, gives itself up, 
presents itself, cf. W. 251 (236); B. 145 (127)]). 

παράδοξος, -ov, (παρά contrary to [see παρά, IV. 2], and 
δόξα opinion ; hence i. q. 6 παρὰ τὴν δύξαν ὧν), unex- 
pected, uncommon, incredible, wonderful : neut. plur. Lk. 
v. 26[A. V. strange things, οἵ. Trench § xci. fin.].  (Ju- 
dith xiii. 13; Sap. v. 2, ete. ; Sir. xliii. 25; 2 Mace. ix. 24; 
4 Mace. ii. 14; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Ael. v. ἢ. 4, 25; Leian. 
dial. deor. 20,7; 9,2; Joseph.c. Ap. 1,10, 2; Hdian. 1, 
1, 5 [(4 Bekk.)].) * 

παρά-δοσις, -ews, ἡ, (παραδίδωμι), α giving over, giving 
up; i. 6. 1. the act of giving up, the surrender: of 
cities, Polyb. 9, 25,5; Joseph. b. j. 1, 8, 6; χρημάτων, Ar- 
istot. pol. 5, 7, 11 p. 1809", 10. 2. a giving over 
which is done by word of mouth or in writing, i. e. tradi- 
tion by instruction, narrative, precept, ete. (see mapa- 
δίδωμι, 4); hence i. q. instruction, Epict. diss. 2, 23, 40; 
joined with διδασκαλία, Plat. legg. 7 p. 803 a. objec- 
tively, what is delivered, the substance of the teaching: so 
of Paul’s teaching, 2 Th. iii. 6 ; in plur. of the particular 
injunctions of Paul’s instruction, 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Th. ii. 
15. used in the sing. of a written narrative, Joseph. 
6. Ap. 1,9, 2; 10,2; again, of the body of precepts, esp. 
ritual, which in the opinion of the later Jews were orally 
delivered by Moses and orally transmitted in unbroken 


παραζηλόω 


succession to subsequent generations, which precepts, 
both illustrating and expanding the written law, as they 
did, were to be obeyed with equal reverence (Joseph. 
antt. 13, 10, 6 distinguishes between τὰ ἐκ παραδόσεως 
τῶν πατέρων and τὰ γεγραμμένα, i. 6. τὰ ἐν τοῖς Μωῦσέως 
νόμοις γεγραμμένα νόμιμα) : Mt. xv. 2 sq. 6; Mk. vii. 3, 
5,9, 13; with τῶν ἀνθρώπων added, as opp. to the 
divine teachings, Mk. vii. 8; Col. ii. 8 [where see Bp. 
Lghtft.]; πατρικαὶ παραδόσεις, precepts received from 
the fathers, whether handed down in the O. T. books 
or orally, Gal. i. 14 [(al. restrict the word here to the 
extra-biblical traditions; cf. Meyer or Bp. Lghtft. ad 
loc.). Cf. B. D. Am. ed. 5. v. Tradition. ] * 

mapa-{ndrdw, -ῶ; fut. παραζηλώσω ; 1 aor. παρεζήλωσα ; 
to provoke to ζῆλος [see παρά, IV. 3]; a. 10 pro- 
voke to jealousy or rivalry: τινά, Ro. xi. 11, 14, (1 K. xiv. 


19 (Deut. xxxii. 21). b. to provoke to anger: 1 Co. 
x. 22 [on this see Prof. Hort in WH. App. p. 167] (Ps. 
XXXVi. (XXXVii.) 1, 7 sq.).* 

παρα-θαλάσσιος, -a, -ov, (mapa and θάλασσα), beside 
the sea, by the sea: Mt.iv. 13. (Sept.; Hdt. Xen., 
Thuc., Polyb., Diod., al.) * 

mapa-Qewpéw, -@: impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. παρεθεω- 
ροῦντο; 1. (mapa i. q. by the side of [see παρά, IV. 
11) to examine things placed beside each other, to com- 
pare, (Xen., Plut., Leian.). 2. (mapai. q. over, be- 
yond, [Lat. praeter ; see παρά, LV. 27} to overlook, neglect : 
Acts vi. 1 (Dem. p. 1414, 22; Diod., Dion. Hal., al.).* 

παρα-θήκη, -ης, ἡ, (παρατίθημι, q. ν.), a deposit, a trust 
or thing consigned to one’s faithful keeping, (Vulg. de- 
positum) : used of the correct knowledge and pure doc- 
trine of the gospel, to be held firmly and faithfully, and 
to be conscientiously delivered unto others: 2 Tim. i. 12 
(μοῦ possess. gen. [the trust committed unto me; Rec.° 18% 
reads here παρακαταθήκη, 4.0.7); GL T Tr WH in1 Tim. 
vi. 20 and 2 Tim. i. 14, (Lev. vi. 2,4; 2 Mace. iii. 10,15; 
Hat. 9, 45; [al.]). In the Grk. writ. παρακαταθήκη (q- V-) 
is more common; οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 312; W. 102 
(96).* 

παρ-αινέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. mapyver; to exhort, 
admonish: with the addition of λέγων foll. by direct dis- 
course, Acts xxvii. 9; τινά (in class. Grk. more com- 
monly τινί [W. 223 (209) ; B. §133, 9]), foll. by an inf. 
Acts xxvii. 22 [B. §$ 140, 1; 141,2]. (From Hdt. and 
Pind. down; 2 Mace. vii. 25 sq.; 3 Mace. v. 17.) * 

παρ-αιτέομαι, -οὔμαι, impy. pres. παραιτοῦ ; [impf. 3 
pers. plur. παρῃτοῦντο, Mk. xv. 6 T WH Tr mrg., where 
al. ὅνπερ ἡτοῦντο (q. v.)]; 1 aor. παρῃτησάμην ; pf. pass. 
ptep. παρητημένος with a pass. signif.; fr. Aeschyl. and 
Pind. down; 1. prop.to ask alongside (wapa[IV.1]), 
beg to have near one; to obtain by entreaty ; to beg from, to 
ask for, supplicate: [Mk. xv. 6 (see above) ]. 2. to 
avert (mapa aside [see mapa, IV. 1]) by entreaty or seek 
to avert, to deprecate ; a. prop. foll. by μή and ace. 
w. inf. [to intreat that... not], Heb. xii. 19 (Thue. 5, 
63) ; cf. W. 604 (561); [Β. § 148, 13]. b. i.q. to re- 
fuse, decline: τὸ ἀποθανεῖν, Acts xxv. 11 (θανεῖν οὐ παραι- 


482 


παρακαλέω 


τοῦμαι, Joseph. de vita sua 29). c. ἷ. 4. to shun, 
avoid: ri, 1 Tim. iv. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 25; tua, 1 Tim. v. 11; 
Tit. iii. 10; i. q. to refuse, reject, Heb. xii. 25. d. to 
avert displeasure by entreaty, i.e. to beg pardon, crave in- 
dulgence, to excuse: ἔχε pe παρῃτημένον (see ἔχω, I. 1 f.), 
Lk. xiv. 18 sq. (of one excusing himself for not accept- 
ing an invitation to a feast, Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 2)." 

παρα-καθέζομαι : 10 sit down beside [παρά, IV. 1], seat 
one’s self, (Xen., Plat., al.) ; 1 aor. pass. ptep. παρακαθε- 
σθείς (Joseph. antt. 6, 11,9); πρός τι, Lk. x. 39 T Tr WH 
[ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 269].* 

παρα-καθίζω: 1 aor. ptep. fem. παρακαθίσασα, to make 
lo sit down beside [(mapa, IV. 1)]; to set beside, place 
near ; intrans. to sit down beside: παρά τι, Lk. χ. 89 RG 
L [but L mrg. πρός] (Sept. Job ii. 13; Plut. Marius 17; 
Cleom. 37; in this sense the mid. is more com. in the 
Grk. writ.).* 

παρα-καλέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. παρεκάλει, 1 and 3 
pers. plur. παρεκάλουν ; 1 aor. παρεκάλεσα ; Pass., pres. 
παρακαλοῦμαι; pf. παρακέκλημαι; 1 aor. παρεκλήθην ; 1 fut. 
παρακληθήσομαι; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; i 
as in Grk. writ. to call to one’s side, call for, summon: twa, 
w. an inf. indicating the purpose, Acts xxviii. 20 [al. 
(less naturally) refer this to II. 2, making the ace. the 
subj. of the inf. ]. II. to address, speak to, (call to, 
call on), which may be done in the way of exhortation, 
entreaty, comfort, instruction, ete. ; hence result a varie- 
ty of senses, on which see Knapp, Scripta varii arg. ed. 2 
Ρ. 117 sqq.; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 82 sq. ie 
asin Grk. auth., to admonish, exhort: absol., Lk. iii. 18; 
[Acts xx. 1 (RGom.)]; Ro. xii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 2; Heb. 
x. 25; 1 Pet. v. 12; foll. by direct dise. 2 Co. v. 20; foll. 
by λέγων w. direct disc. Acts ii. 40; foll. by an inf. where 
in Lat. ut, 1 Tim. ii. 1; τινά, Acts xv. 32; xvi. 40; 2 Co. 
K- 1: 1 Dh. ii. 12951) s vo 11: 1 Lim: y- 1... eb. ait), 
τινὰ λόγῳ πολλῷ, Acts Xx. 2; τινά foll. by direct dise., 1 
Co. iv. 16; 1 Th.v. 14; Heb. xiii. 22 [here L WH mrg. 
inf.]; 1 Pet. v.1sq.; twa foll. by an inf. where in Lat. 
ut [ef. B. $§ 140, 1; 141,2; W. 332 (311) ; 335 (315) n.J: 
inf. pres., Acts xi. 23; xiv. 22; Phil. iv 2; 1 Th. iv. 
10; Tit. ii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 11 (here Lehm. adds ὑμᾶς to the 
inf., and WH mre. with codd. A C Lete. read ἀπέχεσθε); 
Jude 8; inf. aor., Acts xxvii. 33 sq.; Ro. xii. 1; xv. 
30; 2Co.ii.8; vi.1; Eph. iv. 1; 1 Tim. i. 3; Heb. xiii. 
19; τινά foll. by ἵνα w. subjune. [ef. B. § 139, 42; W. 335 
u.s.], 1 Co. i. 10; xvi. 15 sq.; 2 Co. viii. 6; 1 Th. iv. 1; 
2 Th. iii. 12; to enjoin a thing by exhortation [cf. B. 
§ 141, 2], 1 Tim. vi. 2; Tit. ii. 15. 2. to beg, entreat, 
beseech, (Joseph. antt. 6, 7,4; [11, 8,5]; often in Epict. 
ef. Schweighduser, Index graecit. Epict. p. 411; Plut. 
apophth. regum, Mor. ii. p. 30 ed. Tauchn. [vi. 695 ed. 
Reiske ; exx. fr. Polyb., Diod., Philo, al., in Soph. Lex. 
s. y.]; not thus in the earlier Grk. auth. exe. where the 
gods are called on for aid, in the expressions, παρακαλεῖν 
θεούς, so θεόν in Joseph. antt. 6, 2,2 and 7,4; [οἵ. W. 
22]): [absol., Philem. 9 (yet see the Comm. ad loc.)]; 
τινά, Mt. viii. δ; xviii. 32; xxvi. 53; Mk.i.40; Acts xvi. 
9; 2Co. xii. 18; πολλά, much, Mk. v. 23; τινὰ περί τινος, 


; 
παρακαλύπτω 


Philem. 10; foll. by direct disc. Acts ix. 38 LT Tr WH; 
with λέγων added and direct disc., Mt. xviii. 29; Mk. v. 
12; [Lk. vii. 4 (Td. ἠρώτων): without the ace. Acts xvi. 
15; τινά foll. by an inf. [W. and B.u.s.], Mk. v. 17; Lk. 
viii. 41; Acts viii. 31; xix. 31; xxviii. 14, (1 Mace. ix. 
35); τινά foll. by ὅπως, Mt. viii. 34 [here Lchm. ἵνα (see 
above) ]; Acts xxv. 2, (4 Mace. iv. 11; Plut. Demetr. c. 
38); τινά foll. by va [W.$ 44, 8a.; B.§ 139,42], Mt. xiv. 
36; Mk. v. 18; vi. 56; vii. 32; viii. 22; Lk. viii. 31 sq.; 
[2 Co. ix. 5]; τινὰ ὑπέρ τινος, ἵνα, 2 Co. xii. 8; πολλά 
(much) τινα, ἵνα, Mk. v.10; 1 Co. xvi. 12; foll. by τοῦ μή 
w. inf. [B. § 140, 166.; W. 325 (305)], Acts xxi. 12; by 
an inf. Acts ix. 38 RG; by an ace. w. inf., Acts xiii. 42; 
xxiv. 4; [Ro. xvi. 17]. 10 strive to appease by entreaty: 
absol. 1 Co. iv. 13; τινά, Lk. xv. 28; Acts xvi. 39, (2 
Mace. xiii. 23). 3. to console, to encourage and 
strengthen by consolation, to comfort, (Sept. for 043; very 
rarely so in Grk. auth., as Plut. Oth. 16): absol. 2 Co. ii. 
7; τινά, 2 Co. 1. 6; vii. 6 sq. ; ἐν w. a dat. of the thing with 
which one comforts another, 1 Th. iv. 18; τινὰ διὰ παρα- 
κλήσεως, 2 Co. i. 4; w. an acc. of the contents, διὰ τῆς 
παρακλ. ἧς (for qv, see ὅς, 7, 6, IL. 2 ¢. a.) παρακαλούμεθα, 
ibid.; in pass. to receive consolation, be comforted, Mt. ii. 
18; 2 Co. xiii. 113 ἐπί τινε over (in) a thing [see ἐπί, B. 
2 a.6.], 2Co.i.4; of the consolation (comfort) given not 
in words but by the experience of a happier lot or by a 
happy issue, i. 4. to refresh, cheer: pass., Mt. v. 4 (5); 
Lk. xvi. 25; Acts xx.12; 2Co. vii. 13 (where a full stop 
must be put after wapaxekAjp.) ; ἔν τινι, by the help of a 
thing, 2 Co. vii. 6 sq. ; ἐπί τινι, 1 Th. iii. 7; with (ἐν) παρα- 
κλήσει added, 2 Co. vii. 7. 4. toencourage, strength- 
en, [i. e.in the language of A. V. comfort (see Wright, 
Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v.)], (in faith, piety, hope) : 
ras καρδίας, your hearts, Eph. vi. 22; Col. ii. 2; iv. 
8; 2 Th. ii. 17, (also χεῖρας ἀσθενεῖς, Job iv. 3 for pin; 
γόνατα παραλελυμένα, Is. xxxv. 3 sq. [see the Hebr.] for 
y28)- 5. it combines the ideas of exhorting and 
comforting and encouraging in Ro. xii. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 31; 1 
Th. iii. 2. 6. to instruct, teach: ἐν τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ, 
Tit. i. 9. [Comp.: συμ-παρακαλέω.} * 
παρα-καλύπτω : to cover over, cover up, hide, conceal: 
trop. ἦν παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν ([it was concealed 
from them], a Hebraism, on which see in ἀποκρύπτω, b.), 
Lk. ix. 45 (Ezek. xxii. 26; Plat., Plut., al.).* 
παρα-κατα-θήκη, -ἡς, 7, (παρακατατίθημι), a deposit, a 
trust: so Rec. in 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14; [Rec.*!7 1683 in 
2 Tim.i.12also]. (Hdt., Thue., Xen., Aristot. eth. Nic. 
5, 8, 5 p. 1135," 4; Polyb., Diod. 15, 76; Joseph. antt. 
4, 8, 38; Ael. v. h. 4, 1); see παραθήκη above.* 
παρά-κειμαι ; (παρά and κεῖμαι); to lie beside [παρά, IV. 
1], to be near (fr. Hom. down); to be present, at hand: 
Ro. vii. 18 (where see Meyer), 21.* 
παρά-κλησις, -ews, 7), (παρακαλέω, α. V-) ; 1. prop. 
a calling near, summons, (esp. for help, Thue. 4, 61; 
Dem. p. 275, 20). 2. imploration, supplication, en- 
treaty: 2 Co. viii. 4 (Strab. 13 p. 581; Joseph. antt. 3, 
1,5; [e. Ap. 2, 23, 3 a. πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἔστω] ; λόγοι παρα- 
κλήσεως, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Mace. 


483 


Tapakoyn 


x. 24). 3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement: 
Acts xv. 31 [al. refer this to 4]; 1 Co. xiv. 3; 2 Co. 
viii. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 1 Tim. iv. 13; Heb. xii. 5; λόγος 
τῆς παρακλήσεως, Heb. xiii. 22, (2 Mace. vii. 24; xv. 9 
(11); Plat. def. 415 e.; Thue. 8, 92; Aeschin., Polyb., 
al.). 4. consolation, comfort, solace: 2 Co. i. 4-7; 
Heb. vi. 18; [add, Acts ix. 31; 2 Thess. ii. 16], (Jer. 
xvi. 7; Hos. xiii. 14; [Job xxi. 2; Nah. iii. 7]; Phalar. 
ep. 97 init.) ; τῶν γραφῶν, afforded by the contents of the 
Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [W. 189 (178)]; θεὸς τῆς παρακλ., 
God the author and bestower of comfort, Ro. xv. 5; 2 
Co. i. 3; solace or cheer which comes from a happy lot 
or a prosperous state of things, Lk. vi. 24; 2 Co. vii. 4, 
7, 13 [ef. W. 393 (368)]; Philem. 7; by meton. that 
which affords comfort or refreshment; thus of the Messi- 
anic salvation, Lk. ii. 25 (so the Rabbins call the Mes- 
siah the consoler, the comforter, κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν, 0121 [ οἴ. 
Wiinsche, Neue Beitrage ἃ. s. w. ad loc.; Schéttgen, 
Horae Hebr. ete. ii. 187). 5. univ. persuasive dis- 
course, stirring address, — instructive, admonitory, consol- 
atory; powerful hortatory discourse: Ro. xii. 8; Adyos 
παρακλήσεως [A. V. word of exhortation], Acts xiii. 15; 
vids map. [a son of exhortation], aman gifted in teaching, 
admonishing, consoling, Acts iv. 36; used of the apostles’ 
instruction or preaching, 1 Th. ii. 3.* 

παρά-κλητος, -ου, 6, (παρακαλέω), prop. summoned, called 
to one’s side, esp. called to one’s aid; hence 1. one 
who pleads another’s cause before a judge, a pleader, 
counsel for defence, legal assistant; an advocate: Dem. p. 
341, 11; Diog. Laért. 4, 50, cf. Dio Cass. 46, 20. 2: 
univ. one who pleads another’s cause with one, an inter- 
cessor: Philo, de mund. opif. §59; de Josepho $40; in 
Flaccum 888 and 4; so of Christ, in his exaltation at God’s 
right hand, pleading with God the Father for the pardon 
of our sins, 1 Jn. ii. 1 (in the same sense, of the divine 
Logos in Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 14). 3. in the widest 
sense, a helper, succorer, aider, assistant; so of the Holy 
Spirit destined to take the place of Christ with the apos- 
tles (after his ascension to the Father), to lead them to 
a deeper knowledge of gospel truth, and to give them the 
divine strength needed to enable them to undergo trials 
and persecutions on behalf of the divine kingdom: Jn. 
xiv. 16, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7, cf. Mt. x. 19sq.; ΜΚ. xiii. 
11; Lk. xii. 11 sq. (Philo de mund. opif. § 6 init. says 
that God in creating the world had no need of a παρά- 
κλητος, an adviser, counsellor, helper. The Targums and 
Talmud borrow the Greek words oropra and RDOUPIB 
and use them of any intercessor, defender, or advocate; 
cf. Buztorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1843 [(ed. Fischer p. 916) ]; 
so Targ. on Job xxxiii. 23 for 772 ἼΝ 72, i. 6. an angel 
that pleads man’s cause with God; [ef. πλουσίων παρά- 
κλητοι in ‘Teaching’ ete. 5 sub fin.; Barn. ep. 20, 2; 
Constitt. apost. 7,18]). Cf. Knapp, Scripta varii Argu- 
menti, p. 124 sqq.; Diisterdieck on 1 Jn. ii. 1, p. 147 sq. ; 
[ Watkins, Excursus G, in Ellicott’s N. T. Com. for Eng. 
Readers; Westcott in the “Speaker’s Com.” Additional 
Note on Jn. xiv. 16; Schaff in Lange ibid. ].* 

παρ-ακοή, -7s, ἡ, (mapa Lat. praeter [see παρά, IV. 


παρακολουθέω 
27); 1. prop. a hearing amiss (Plat. epp. 7 p. 341 
b.). 2. [unwillingness to hear i. 6.1 disobedience : 
Ro. v. 19; 2Co.x.6; Heb. ii. 2. [Cf. Trench ὃ lxvi.]* 

παρ-ακολουθέω, -@ : fut. παρακολουθήσω ; 1 aor. παρηκο- 
λούθησα (1 Tim. iv. 6 L mrg. WH mrg.; 2 Tim. iii. 10 L 
T Tr WH txt.); pf. παρηκολούθηκα ; 1. to follow 
after; so to follow one as to be always at his side [see 
παρά, IV. 1]; to follow close, accompany, (so fr. Arstph. 
and Xen. down). 2. metaph. a. to be always 
present, to attend one wherever he goes: τινί, Mk. xvi. 
17 [where Tr WH txt. dxodov6., q. ν.]. Ὁ. to follow 
up a thing in mind so as to attain to the knowledge of it, i.e. 
to understand, [cf. our follow a matter up, trace its course, 
etc. ] ; to examine thoroughly, investigate : πᾶσιν (i. 6. mpay- 
pacw), all things that have taken place, Lk. i. 3 (very 
often so in Grk. auth., as Dem. pro cor. ο. 53 [p. 285, 
237). ce. to follow faithfully se. a standard or rule, to 
conform one’s self to: with a dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. iv. 
6; 2 Tim. iii. 10, (2 Mace. ix. 27). Cf. the full discus- 
sion of this word by Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche 
Theol. for 1871, p. 46 sq.* 

παρ-ακούω: 1 aor. παρήκουσα; 1. to hear aside 
i. e. casually or carelessly or amiss [see mapa, IV. 2] 
(often so in class. Grk.; on the freq. use of this verb by 
Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w. (1875) p. 
106). 2. to be unwilling to hear, i. e. on hearing to 
neglect, to pay no heed to, (w. a gen. of the pers., Polyb. 
2, 8,3; 3, 15, 2); contrary to Grk. usage [but οἵ. Plut. 
Philop. § 16, 1 καὶ παριδεῖν τι x. παρακοῦσαι τῶν ἁἅμαρτα- 
νομένων, de curios. ὃ 14 πειρῶ καὶ τῶν ἰδίων ἔνια παρακοῦσαί 
ποτε x. παριδεῖν), W. an accus., τὸν λόγον, Mk. ν. 86 T WH 
Tr txt. [al. ‘overhearing the word as it was being 
spoken’; ef. B. 302 (259)]; to refuse to hear, pay no re- 
gard to, disobey: τινός, what one says, Mt. xviii. 17 (Tob. 
ill. 4; τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως λεγόμενα, Esth. iii. 3).* 

παρα-κύπτω: 1 Δ0Υ. παρέκυψα; to stoop to (ef. παρά, IV. 
1] @ thing in order to look at it; to look at with head 
bowed forwards ; to look into with the body bent; to stoop 
and look into: Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject 
the vs.]; Jn. xx. 53 εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, Jn. xx. 11; metaph. 
to look carefully into, inspect curiously, ets τι, of one who 
would become acquainted with something, Jas. i. 25; 1 
Pet. i. 12. (Arstph., Theocr., Philo, Dio Cass., Plut., 
al. ; Sept.) * 

παρα-λαμβάνω ; fut.rapadnyoua, in LT Tr WH -λήμψο- 
μαι (Jn. xiv. 3; see M,); 2 aor. παρέλαβον, 3 pers. plur. 
παρελάβοσαν (2 Th. iii.6 G T L mrg. Tr mre. WH mrg.; 
cf. δολεόω [yet see WH. App. p. 165]); Pass., pres. παρα- 
λαμβάνομαι; 1 fut. παραληφθήσομαι, in LT Tr WH -Anp- 
φθήσομαι (see M,n; Lk. xvii.34-36) fr. Hdt.down; Sept. 
for np?; 1. to take to [cf. mapa, IV. 1], to take with 
one’s self, to join to one’s self: τινά, an associate, a com- 
panion, Mt. xvii. 1; xxvi.37; Mk. iv. 36; v.40; ix. 2; 
x. 32; Lk. ix. 10,28; xi. 26; xviii. 31; Acts xv. 39; in 
pass., Mt. xxiv. 40, 41; Lk. xvii. 34-36; one to be led 
off as a prisoner, Jn. xix. 16; Acts xxiii. 18; to take 
with one in order to carry away, Mt. ii. 13 sq. 20 sq.; 
τινὰ μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ. Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. 33; 


484 


παραλύω 


παραλαμβάνειν γυναῖκα, to take one’s betrothed to his 
home, Mt. i. 20, 24; τινά foll. by εἰς w. an ace. of place, 
to take [and bring, cf. W. § 66, 2d.] one with one into 
a place, Mt. iv. 5, 8; xxvii. 27; τινὰ κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, Mt. xx. 
17; mid. with πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, to my companionship, 
where I myself dwell, Jn. xiv. 3. The ptep. is prefixed 
to other act. verbs to describe the action more in detail, 
Acts xvi. 33; xxi. 24, 26, 32 [here L WH mrg. λαβών]. 
Metaph. i. q. to accept or acknowledge one to be such 
as he professes to be; not to reject, not to withhold obedi- 
ence: twa, Jn. i. 11. 2. to receive something trans- 
mitted ; a. prop.: mapaX. διακονίαν, an office to be dis- 
charged, Col. iv. 17; βασιλείαν, Heb. xii. 28, (so for the 
Chald. ap in Dan. v. 31; vii. 18, Theodot.; Hat. 2, 
120; [Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 20, 5 (where see Miiller)]; τὴν 
ἀρχήν, Plat., Polyb., Plut.). b. to receive with the 
mind; by oral transmission: τί foll. by ἀπό w. a gen. 
of the author from whom the tradition proceeds, 1 Co. 
xi. 23 (on which cf. Paret in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche 
Theol. for 1858, Bd. iii. p. 48 sqq.; [see reff. in ἀπό, IT. 2 
d. aa.]); by the narration of others, by the instruction 
of teachers (used of disciples) : [τὸν Xp. “I. τὸν κύριον, 
Col. ii. 6]; τί, 1 Co. xv. 1, 3; Gal.i.9; Phil.iv. 9; [τί 
foll. by an infin., Mk. vii. 4]; τὶ παρά twos [see reff. s. v. 
παρά, I. c.], Gal. i. 12; 1 Th. ii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 6; mapa 
τινος, καθὼς ... τὸ πῶς δεῖ ete. 1 Th. iv. 1, (σοφίαν παρά 
τινος, Plat. Lach. p.197d.; Euthyd. p. 3804 6.). [Comp.: 
συμ-παραλαμβάνω.} * 

mapa-Aeyonat; [παρελεγόμην]; (mapa beside, and λέγω 
to lay); Vulg.in Acts xxvii. 8 lego, i.e. to sail past, coast 
along: τὴν Κρήτην, Acts xxvii. 8 [here some, referring 
αὐτήν to Σαλμώνην, render work past, weather], 13, (τὴν 
᾿Ιταλίαν, Diod. 13, 3; γῆν, 14, 55; [Strabo]; Lat. legere 
oram).* 

παρ-άλιος, -ov, also of three term. [cf. W. § 11, 1], 
(παρά and ἅλς), by the sea, maritime: ἣ παράλιως, sc. 
χώρα, the sea-coast, Lk. vi. 17 (Polyb. 3, 39, 3; Diod. 3, 
15, 41; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 12; Sept. Deut. xxxiii. 19; 
and the fem. form ἡ παραλία in Deut. i. 7; Josh. ix. 1; 
Judith i. 7; iii. 6; v. 2, 23; vii. 8; 1 Mace. xi. 8; xv. 38; 
Hat. 7, 185; often in Polyb.; Joseph. antt. 12, 7, 1).* 

παρ-αλλαγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (παραλλάσσω), variation, change: 
Jas. 1. 17. (Aeschyl., Plat., Polyb., al.)* 

mapa-Aoyltopar; (see παρά, IV. 2); a. to reckon 
wrong, miscount: Dem. p. 822, 25; 1037, 15. b. to 
cheat by false reckoning (Aeschin., Aristot.) ; to deceive 
by false reasoning (joined to ἐξαπατᾶν, Epict. diss. 2, 20, 
7); hence c. univ. to deceive, delude, circumvent: 
τινά, Col. ii. 4; Jas. i. 22, (Sept. several times for 799).* 

παρα-λυτικός, -7, -dv, (fr. παραλύω, 4: V-), paralytic, i. e. 
suffering from the relaxing of the nerves of one side; 
univ. disabled, weak of limb, [A. V. palsied, sick of the 
palsy]: Mt. iv. 24; viii. 6; ix. 2,6; Mk. ii. 3-5, 9; and 
L WH mrg. in Lk. v. 34. [Cf. Riehm, HWB. 8. v. 
Krankheiten, 5; B. ἢ. Am. ed. p. 1866>.] * 

mapa-Aiw: [pf. pass. ptep. παραλελυμένος] ; prop. to 
loose on one side or from the side [cf. mapa, 1V. 1]; to 
loose or part things placed side by side ; to loosen, dissolve, 


Tapapevo 


hence, to weaken, enfeeble : παραλελυμένος, suffering from 
the relaxing of the nerves, unstrung, weak of limb, [ palsied ], 
Lk. v. 18, 24 ({not L WH mrg.] see παραλυτικός) ; Acts 
Vili. 7; ix. 33; παραλελ. γόνατα, i.e. tottering, weakened, 
feeble knees, Heb. xii. 12; Is. xxxv. 3; Sir. xxv. 29; 
χεῖρες παραλελ. Ezek. vii. 27 ; Jer. vi. 24; [xxvii (I) 15, 
48; παρελύοντο ai δεξιαί, of combatants, Joseph. Ὁ. j. 3, 
8, 6; παρελύθη x. οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἔτι λαλῆσαι λύγον, 1 Mace. 
ix. 55, where cf. Grimm; σωματικῇ δυνάμει παραλελ. 
Polyb. 32, 23, 1; rots σώμασι καὶ ταῖς ψυχαῖς, id. 20, 10, 
9.* 

παρα-μένω ; fut. παραμενῶ ; 1 aor. ptep. παραμείνας ; fr. 
Hom. down; to remain beside, continue always near, (cf. 
παρά, LV. 1]: Heb. vii. 23; opp. to ἀπεληλυθέναι, Jas. i. 
25 (and continues to do so, not departing till all stains 
are washed away, cf. vs. 24) ; with one, πρός twa, 1 Co. 
Xvi. 6; τινί (as often in Grk. auth.), to survive, remain 
alive (Hdt. 1, 30), Phil. i. 25 L T Tr WH [where Bp. 
Lghtft. : “ παραμενῶ is relative, while μενῶ is absolute.” 
Comp. : cvp-rapapeva. | * 

παρα-μυθέομαι, -odpar; 1 aor. παρεμυθησάμην ; fr. Hom. 
down; to speak to, address one, whether by way of ad- 
monition and incentive, or to calm and console; hence i. 4. 
to encourage, console: τινά, Jn. xi. 31; 1 Th. ii. 12 (11); 
v. 14; τινὰ περί τινος, Jn. xi. 19.* 

παραμυθία, -as, 7, (παραμυθέομαι), in class. Grk. any 
address, whether made for the purpose of persuading, 
or of arousing and stimulating, or of calming and consol- 
ing; once in the N. T., like the Lat. allocutio (Sen. ad 
Mare. 1; ad Helv. 1), i. q. consolation, comfort: 1 Co. xiv. 
3. (So Plat. Ax. p. 365 a.; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3; 
Joseph. b. 1. 3, 7,15; Lceian. dial. mort. 15, 3; Ael. v. h. 
12, 1 fin.) * 

παραμύθιον, -ov, τό, (παραμυθέομαι), persuasive address : 
Phil. ii. 1. (consolation, Sap. iii. 18 and often in Grk. 
writ. [fr. Soph., Thuc., Plat. on].)* 

παρανομέω, -@ ; to be a παράνομος, to act contrary to law, 
to break the law: Acts xxiii. 3. (Sept.; Thuc., Xen., 
Plat., sqq-) * 

παρανομία, -as, 7, (παράνομος [fr. παρά (q- ν. [V. 2) and 
νόμος ]), breach of law, transgression, wickedness: 2 Pet. 
ii. 16. (Thuc., Plat., Dem., al.; Sept.) * 

παρα-πικραίνω : 1 aor. παρεπίκρανα; (see παρά, IV. 3); 
Sept. chiefly for 17, 1727, to be rebellious, contuma- 
cious, refractory; also for 19D, D°y377, etce.; to provoke, 
exasperale; to rouse to indignation: absol. (yet so that 
God is thought of as the one provoked), Heb. iii. 16, 
as in Ps. ev. (evi.) 7; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 7; Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 7; 
Ezek. ii. 5-8 ; with τὸν θεόν added, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 29; 
li. (xliv.) 8,8; Ps. v.11; Ezek. xx. 21, and often; in pass., 
Lam. i. 20; joined with ὀργίζεσθαι, Philo de alles. legs. 
iii. § 38; w. πληροῦσθαι ὀργῆς δικαίας, vita Moys. i. § 55 
[al. πάνυ mp.]; παραπικραίνειν x. παροργίζειν, de somn. 
ii. § 26.* 

παρα-πικρασμός, -ov, 6, (mapamikpaivw), provocation: ἐν 
τῷ παραπικρασμῷ, when they provoked (angered) me by 
rebelliousness, Heb. iii. 8, 15, fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8 (where 
Sept. for 7270); cf. Num. xvi.* 


485 


παραρρέω 


παρα-πίπτω : 2 aor. ptep. παραπεσών ; prop. to fall be- 
side a pers. or thing; to slip aside ; hence to deviate from 
the right path, turn aside, wander: τῆς ὁδοῦ, Polyb. 3, 54, 
5; metaph. τῆς ἀληθείας, Polyb. 12, 12 (7), 2 [(here ed. 
Didot ἀντέχηται) ; τοῦ καθήκοντος, 8, 13, 8]; i. q. lo err, 
Polyb. 18, 19, 6; ἔν τινι, Xen. Hell.1,6,4. In the Scrip- 
tures, to fall away (from the true faith) : from the wor- 
ship of Jehovah, Ezek. xiv. 13; xv. 8 (for 9p); from 
Christianity, Heb. vi. 6.* 

παρα-πλέω: 1 aor. inf. παραπλεῦσαι; to sail by, sail past, 
[παρά, I1V.1]: w. an ace. of place, Acts xx.16. (Thue. 
2, 25; Xen. anab.6, 2,1; Hell. 1, 8, 8; Plat. Phaedr. p. 
259 a.) * 

παρα-πλήσιον, (neut. of the adj. παραπλήσιος), adv., 
near to, almost to: ἠσθένησε παραπλ. θανάτῳ [cf. W. § 54, 
6], Phil. ii. 27. (Thue. 7, 19; in like manner, Polyb.) * 

παρα-πλησίως, adv., (παραπλήσιος, see παραπλήσιον), 
similarly, in like manner, in the same way: Heb. ii. 14 
(where it is equiv. to κατὰ πάντα vs. 17, and hence is used 
of a similarity which amounts to equality, as in the 
phrase ἀγωνίζεσθαι παραπλ. to fight with equal advan- 
tage, aequo Marte, Hat. 1, 77; so too the adj., σὺ δὲ ἄνθρω- 
πος ὧν παραπλήσιος τοῖς ἄλλοις, πλήν γε δὴ ὅτε πολυπράγμων 
καὶ ἀτάσθαλος κτλ. the words in which an oriental sage 
endeavors to tame the pride of Alexander the Great, 
Arr. exp. Alex. 7, 1, 9 (6)).* 

παρα-πορεύομαι ; impf. παρεπορευόμην ; fr. Aristot. and 
Polyb. down; Sept. for 123’; to proceed at the side, go 
past, pass by: Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xi. 20; xv. 29; διὰ τῶν 
σπορίμων, to go along through the grain-fields so that he 
had the grain on either side of him as he walked [see 
ποιέω, I. 1 a. and c.j, Mk. ii. 23 RGTWHare.; διὰ 
τῆς Γαλιλαίας, Vulg. praetergredi Galilaeam, i.e.“ obiter 
proficisci per Galilaeam,” i. 6. ‘they passed right along 
through, intent on finishing the journey, and not stopping 
to receive hospitality or to instruct the people’ (Fritz- 
sche), Mk. ix. 30 [but Ltxt. Trtxt. WH txt. ἐπορεύοντο] ; 
[Syn. ef. παραβαίνω, fin.]* 

παρά-πτωμα, -τος, τό, (παραπίπτω, q-V-); 1. prop. 
a fall beside or near something ; but nowhere found in 
this sense. 2. trop. a lapse or deviation from truth 
and uprightness; a sin, misdeed, [R. V. trespass, ‘ differ- 
ing from ἁμάρτημα (q. v.) in figure not in force’ 
(Fritzsche) ; cf. Trench § Ixvi.]: Mt. vi. 14,[15*G T om. 
WH br.], 15°; xviii. 35 Rec.; Mk. xi. 25,26 RGL; Ro. 
iv. 25; v. 15-18, 20; xi. 11sq.; 2Co. v.19; Gal. vi. 1; 
Eph. i. 7; ii. 1,5; Col. ii. 13; Jas. v. 16 (where LT Tr 
WH ἁμαρτίας). (Polyb. 9, 10,6; Sap. iii. 13; x. 1; 
Sept. several times for Syn, oy, pws, ete.; of liter- 
ary faults, Longin. 36, 2.) * 

παρα-ρρέω ; (παρά and pew); fr. Soph., Xen., and Plat. 
down ; to flow past (παραρρέον ὕδωρ, Is. xliv. 4), to glide 
by: μήποτε παραρρυῶμεν (2 aor. pass. subjunc.; cf. Biim. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 287; [Veitch s. v. ῥέω; WH. App. p. 170]; 
but LT Tr WH παραρυῶμεν ; see P, p), lest we be carried 
past, pass by, [R. V. drift away from them] (missing the 
thing), 1. 6. lest the salvation which the things heard 
show us how to obtain slip away from us, Heb. ii.1. In 


διὰ τῶν ὁρίων, Deut. ii. 4. 


παράασημος 


Grk. auth. παρραρεῖ poi τι, α thing escapes me, Soph. 
Philoct. 653; trop. slips from my mind, Plat. legg. 6 p. 
781 a.; in the sense of neglect, μὴ παρραρυῇς, τήρησον δὲ 
ἐμὴν βουλήν, Prov. iii. 21." 

παράσημος, -ov, (παρά {q. v-1V. 2], and σῆμα [a ΠΡ : 
1. marked falsely, spurious, counte rfeil; as coin. 
marked beside or on the margin; so of noteworthy ane 
which the reader of a book marks on the margin; 
hence 3. univ. noted, marked, conspicuous, remark- 
able, (of persons, in a bad sense, notorious); marked with 
a sign: ἐν πλοίῳ παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροις, in a ship marked 
with the image or figure of the Dioseuri, Acts xxviii. 11 
[ef. B. D. s. v. Castor and Pollux].* 

παρα-σκευάζω ; pf. pass. παρεσκεύασμαι ; fut. mid. παρα- 
oxevacoua ; fr. Πα. down; to make ready, prepare: 80. 
τὸ δεῖπνον (added in Hdt. 9, 82; Athen. 4, 15 p. 138), 
Acts x. 10 (συμπόσιον, Hdt. 9,15; 2 Mace. ii. 27). Mid. 
to make one’s self ready, to prepare one’s self, [ef. W. § 38, 
2a.]: εἰς πόλεμον, 1 Co. xiv. 8 (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 42; εἰς 
μάχην, εἰς ναυμαχίαν, ete., in Xen.). Pf. pass. in mid. 
sense, fo have prepared one’s self, to be prepared or ready, 
2 Co. ix. 2sq. (see Matthiae §493).* 

παρα-σκενή, -ῆἧς, 7, fr. Hdt. down; 
ready, preparation, equipping. 
pared, equipment. 


1. a making 
2. that which is pre- 
3. inthe N. T. ina Jewish sense, 
the day of preparation, i.e. the day on which the Jews 
made the necessary preparation to celebrate a sabbath 
or a feast: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk. xv. 42; Lk. xxiii. 54; Jn. 
xix. 31, (Joseph. antt. 16,6, 2); with a gen. of the obj., 
τοῦ πάσχα [acc. to W.189 (177 sq.) a possess. gen.], Jn. 
xix. 14 (ef. Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 31 sq.); w. a gen. 
of the subj., τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ibid. 42. Cf. Bleek, Beitriige 
zur Evangelienkritik, p. 114 sqq.; [on later usage οἵ. 
‘Teaching’ 8, 1 (and Harnack’s note); Mart. Polye. 7, 
1 (and Zahn’s note); Soph. Lex. 5. v. 3].* 

παρατείνω: 1 aor. παρέτεινα ; fr. Hdt. down; to extend 
beside, to stretch out lengthwise, to extend ; to prolong: τὸν 
λόγον, his discourse, Acts xx. 7 (λόγους, Aristot. poet. 17, 
5 p. 1455", 2; μῦθον, 9, 4 p. 1451", 38).* 

παρα-τηρέω, -@: impf. 3 pers. plur. παρετήρουν; 1 aor. 
παρετήρησα; Mid., pres. παρατηροῦμαι ; impf. 3 pers. plur. 
παρετηροῦντο ; prop. to stand beside and watch [ο. mapa, 
IV. 1]; to watch assiduously, observe carefully ; a. 
to watch, attend to, with the eyes: τὰ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ γι- 
γνόμενα, of auguries, Dio Cass. 38, 13; τινά, one, to see 
what he is going to do (Xen. mem. 3, 14, 4); contextu- 
ally in a bad sense, to watch insidiously, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr 
mrg. ἀποχωρήσαντες ] (joined with ἐνεδρεύειν, Polyb. 17, 
3, 2); τινά (Polyb. 11, 9, 9; Sept. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 12; 
Sus. 16) foll. by the interrog. εἰ, Mk. iii. 2R GT WH Tr 
txt.; Lk. vi. 7 Ree.; mid. to watch for one’s self: Mk. iii. 
2LTr mrg.; Lk. vi. 7 LT Tr WH, [(in both pass. foll. 
by interrog. e’)]; Lk. xiv.1; active w. an ace. of place 
(Polyb. 1, 29, 4): τὰς πύλας [foll. by ὅπως, cf. B. 237 
(205)], Acts ix. 24 RG, where L T Tr WH give mid. 
παρετηροῦντο. b. to observe i. α. 10 keep scrupulously ; 
to neglect nothing requisite to the religious observance of: 
ἑβδομάδας, Joseph. antt. 3, 5,5; [τὴν τῶν σαββ. ἡμέραν, 


480 


παραφρονία 


id. 14, 10, 25]; mid. (for one’s self, i. e. for one’s salva- 
tion), ἡμέρας, μῆνας, καιρούς, Gal. iv. 10 (ὅσα προστάττου- 
σιν οἱ νόμοι, Dio Cass. 53, 10; [τὰ εἰς βρῶσιν οὐ νενομι- 
σμένα, Joseph. ὁ. Ap. 2, 39, 2]).* 
Pear eee -ews, 1), (mapatnpew), observation ([Polyb. 
22, 8], Diod., Joseph., Antonin., Plut., al.) : μετὰ παρα- 
i in such a manner that it can be watched with 
the eyes, i. e. in a visible manner, Lk. xvii. 20.* 
παρα-τίθημι; fut. παραθήσω ; 1 aor. mapéOnxa; 2 aor. 
subjune. 3 pers. plur. παραθῶσιν, infin. παραθεῖναι (Mk. 
viii. 7 XG); Pass., pres. ptep. παρατιθέμενος ; 1 aor. infin. 
παρατεθῆναι (Mk. viii. 7 Lehm.) ; Mid., pres. παρατίθεμαι; 
fut. παραθήσομαι; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. παρέθεντο, impvy. 
παράθου (2 Tim. ii. 2); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 
DW; 1. to place beside, place near (cf. mapa, IV. 1] 
or set before: τινί τι, as a. food: Mk. vi. 41; viii. 
6 sq.; Lk. ix. 16; xi. 6; τράπεζαν a table, i.e. food placed 
on a table, Acts xvi. 34 (Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 7); τὰ mapa- 
τιθέμενα ὑμῖν, [A. V. such things as are set before you], of 
food, Lk. x. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1,30); sing.1Co.x.27. ὍὌ. 
to set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,14; Sept. 
Ex. xix. 7): τινὶ παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 24, 31. Mid. to set 
forth (from one’s self), to explain: foll. by ὅτι, Acts xvii. 
3. 2. Mid. to place down (from one’s self or for 
one’s self) with any one, to deposit; to intrust, commit to 
one’s charge, (Xen. respub. Athen. 2,16; Polyb. 33, 12, 
3; Plut. Num. 9; Tob. iv. 1): τί τινι, a thing to one to 
be cared for, Lk. xii. 48; a thing to be religiously kept 
and taught to others, 1 Tim. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 2; τινά 
τινι, to commend one to another for protection, safety, 
ete., Acts xiv. 23; xx. 32, (Diod. 17, 23); ras ψυχάς to 
Boe 1 Fer iv. 19; τὸ πνεῦμά μου εἰς χεῖρας θεοῦ, 1.Κ. 


Ἐπ ἐπι οἹ ἔν. Font: αι. 11, 74) down; to chance 
to be by (cf. παρά, IV. 1], to happen to be present, to meet 
by chance: Acts xvii. 17.* 

map-aurika [cf. B. $146, 4], adv., for the moment: 2 
Co. iv. 17. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.) * 

παραφέρω: [1 aor. inf. παρενέγκαι (Lk. xxii. 42 Tdf., 
ef. Veitch p. 669)]; 2 aor. inf. παρενεγκεῖν (Lk. xxii. 42 
RG), impy. παρένεγκε [(ibid. 1, Tr WH); pres. pass. 
παραφέρομαι ; see reff. s. v. φέρω]; 1. to bear to 
[ef. παρά, IV. 1], bring to, put before: of food (Hdt., 
Xen., al.). 2. to lead aside [ef. mapa, IV. 2] from 
the right course or path, to carry away: Jude 12 [R. V. 
carried along] (where Rec. περι φέρ.) ; from the truth, 
Heb. xiii. 9 where Rec. περιφέρ., (Plat. Phaedr. p. 
265 b.; Plut. Timol. 6; Antonin. 4, 43; Hdian. 8, 4, 7 
[4 ed. Bekk.]}). 3. to carry past, lead past, i. e. to 
cause to pass by, to remove: ti ἀπό twos, Mk. xiv. 36; 
Lk. xxii. 42.* 

παρα-φρονέω, -ῶ ; (παράφρων [fr. rapa (q. ν. IV. 2) and 
φρήν, ‘beside one’s wits’]) ; to be beside one’s self, out of 
one’s senses, void of understanding, insane: 2 Co. xi. 23. 
(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; once in Sept., Zech. 
Vii. 11.) * 

παρα-φρονία, -as, 7, (παράφρων [see the preceding 
word]), madness, insanity: 2 Pet. ii. 16. The Grk. writ. 


παραχειμάζω 


use not this word but παραφροσύνη [cf. W. 24; 95 
(90)].* 

παραχειμάζω: fut. παραχειμάσω; 1 aor. inf. mapayet- 
paca; pf. ptep. παρακεχειμακώς ; to winter, pass the win- 
ter, with one or ata place: Acts xxvii. 12; 1 Co. xvi. 6; 
ἐν τῇ νήσῳ, Acts xxviii. 11; ἐκεῖ, Tit. iii. 12. (Dem. p. 
909, 15; Polyb. 2, 64,1; Diod. 19, 34; Plut. Sertor. 3; 
Dio Cass. 40, 4.) * 

παραχειμασία, -as, 7, (παραχειμάζω), a passing the 
winter, wintering: Acts xxvii. 12. (Polyb. 3, 34, 6; [8, 
35, 1]; Diod. 19, 68.) * 

παρα-χρῆμα, (prop. i. q. παρὰ τὸ χρῆμα; ef. our on the 
spot), fr. Hdt. down; immediately, forthwith, instantly: 
Mt. xxi. 19sq.; Lk. i. 64; iv. 39; v. 25; viii. 44,47, 55; 
xili. 13; xviii. 43; xix. 11; xxii.60; Actsiii.7; v.10; 
ix. 18 Rec.; xii. 23; xiii. 11; xvi. 26 [WH br. παραχρ.Ἶ, 
33. (Sap. xviii. 17; 2 Mace. iv. 34, 38, ete.; Sept. for 
oNDD, Num. vi. 9; xii. 4; Is. xxix. 5; xxx. 13.) * 

πάρδαλις, -ews, ἡ, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 703; α 
pard, panther, leopard; avery fierce Asiatic and African 
animal, having a tawny skin marked with large black 
spots [ef. Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 111 sqq.; BB. DD. 
s.v.]: Rev. xiii. 2.* 

παρ-εδρεύω ; (fr. map-edpos, sitting beside [cf. παρά, 
IV. 1]); tosit beside, attend constantly, (Lat. assidere), 
(Eur., Polyb., Diod., al.) : τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ, to perform 
the duties pertaining to the offering of sacrifices and in- 
cense, [to wait upon], 1 Co. ix. 181, Τ Tr WH (for Rec. 
™pogedp.).* 

πάρ-ειμι ; impf. 3 pers. pl. παρῆσαν ; fut. 3 pers. sing. 
παρέσται (Rev. xvii. 8 L T[not (as G Tr WH Alf., al.) 
πάρεσται ; see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. $108, Anm. 20; Chandler 
§803]); (mapa near, by, [see παρά, IV. 1 fin.] and εἰμί) ; 
Sept. chiefly for ΝΞ; as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down 
a. to be by, be athand, to have arrived, to be present: of 
persons, Lk. xiii. 1; Jn. xi. 28; Acts x. 21; Rev. xvii. 8; 
παρών, present (opp. to ἀπών), 1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co. x. 2, 11; 
xiii. 2,10; ἐπί twos, before one (a judge), Acts xxiv. 19; 
ἐπί τινι, for (to do) something, Mt. xxvi. 50 Rec.; ἐπί τι, 
ibid. GL T Tr WH (on which see ἐπί, B. 2 a. ¢.); ἐνώ- 
mov θεοῦ, in the sight of God, Acts x. 33 [not Trmrg.]; 
ἐνθάδε, ib. xvii. 6 ; πρός τινα, with one, Acts xii. 20; 2 Co. 
xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20. of time: 6 καιρὸς πάρεστιν, 
Jn. vii. 6; τὸ παρόν, the present, Heb. xii. 11 (3 Mace. v. 
17; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. 2b.; [L. and 
S.s.v. II; Soph. Lex.s.v.b.]). of other things: τοῦ evay- 
γελίου τοῦ παρόντος eis ὑμᾶς, which is come unto (and so 
is present among) you, Col. i. 6 (foll. by εἰς w. an 866. of 
place, 1 Mace. xi. 63, and often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 
down ; see εἰς, C. 2). b. to be ready, in store, at com- 
mand: ἡ παροῦσα ἀλήθεια, the truth which ye now hold, 
so that there is no need of words to call it to your re- 
membrance, 2 Pet. i. 12; (μὴ) πάρεστίν τινί τι, ibid. 9 
[A. V. lacketh], and Lchm. in 8 also [where al. ὑπάρ- 
xovra], (Sap. xi. 22 (21), and often in class. Grk. fr. Hom. 
down; cf. Passow τι. s.; [L. and S. u. 5.7); τὰ παρόντα, 
possessions, property, [A. V. such things as ye have (cf. 
our ‘ what one has by him’)], Heb. xiii. 5 (ois τὰ παρόντα 


487 


παρεμβολή 


ἀρκεῖ, ἥκιστα τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ὀρέγονται, Ken. symp. 4, 42). 
[οΜ».: συμ-πάρειμι. " 

παρ-εισ-άγω : fut. παρεισάξω ; (see παρά, ΤΥ͂. 1); to in- 
troduce or bring in secretly or craflily: αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας, 
2 Pet.ii.1. In the same sense of heretics: ἕκαστος ἰδίως 
καὶ ἑτέρως ἰδίαν δόξαν παρεισηγάγοσαν, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb. 
h.e. 4, 22,5; δοκοῦσι παρεισάγειν τὰ ἄρρητα αὐτῶν... 
μυστήρια, Orig. philos. [i. q. Hippol. refut. omn. haeres.] 
5, 17 fin. ; of Marcion, νομίζων καινόν τι παρεισάγειν, ibid. 
7, 29 init. ;—— passages noted by Hilgenfeld, Zeitschr. f. 
wissensch. Theol. 1860, p. 125 sq. (οἱ προδόται τοὺς orpa- 
τιώτας παρεισαγαγόντες ἐντὸς τῶν τειχῶν κυρίους τῆς πόλεως 
ἐποίησαν, Diod. 12, 41 [ef. Polyb. 1, 18, 3; 2, 7, 8]. In 
other senses in other prof. auth.) * 

παρ-είσ-ακτος, -ον, (παρεισάγω), secretly or surreptitiously 
brought in; [A. V. privily brought in]; one who has stolen 
in (Vulg. subintroductus): Gal. 11. 4; ef. C. Ε΄. A. Fritz- 
sche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 181 sq.* 

παρ-εισ-δύω or παρεισδύνω : 1 aor. παρεισέδυσα [acc. te 
class. usage trans., cf. duyw; (see below) ]; to enter se- 
cretly, slip in stealthily; to steal in; [A. V. creep in un- 
awares|: Jude 4 [here WH παρεισεδύησαν, 3 pers. plur. 
2 aor. pass. (with mid. or intrans. force) ; see their App. 
p- 170, and cf. B. 56 (49); Veitch s. v. δύω, fin.]; ef. the 
expressions παρείσδυσιν πλάνης ποιεῖν, Barn. ep. 2, 10; 
ἔχειν, ibid. 4,9. (Hippocr., Hdian. 1, 6,2; 7,9, 18 [8 ed. 
Bekk.; Philo de spee. legg. §15]; Plut., Galen, al.) * 

παρ-εισ-έρχομαι : 2 aor. παρεισῆλθον ; 1. to come 
in secretly or by stealth [cf. mapa, IV. 1], to creep or steal 
in, (Vulg. subintroeo): Gal. ii. 4 (Polyb. 1, 7,3; 1, 8, 4; 
[esp.] 2,55, 3; Philo de opif. mund. § 52; de Abrah. 
§ 19, ete.; Plut. Poplic. 17; Clem. homil. 2, 23). 2. 
to enter in addition, come in besides, (Vulg. subintro): Ro. 
v. 20, cf. 12.* 

παρ-εισ-φέρω : 1 aor. παρεισήνεγκα ; a. to bring in 
besides (Dem., al.). b. to contribute besides to some- 
thing: σπουδήν, 2 Pet. i. 5 [R. V. adding on your part].* 

arap-extos (for which the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down use 
παρέκ, tape) ; 1. prep. w. gen. [ef. W. § 54, 6], ex- 
cept; with the exception of (a thing, expressed by the 
gen.): Mt. v. 32; xix.9 LWH mrg.; Acts xxvi. 29, 
(Deut. i. 36 Aq.; Test. xii. Patr. p. 631; [*Teaching’ 6, 
§1]; Geop. 13, 15, 7). 2. adv. besides : τὰ mapextos 
86. γινόμενα, the things that occur besides or in addition, 
2Co. xi. 28 [ef. our ‘extra matters’; al. the things that 
1 omit; but see Meyer].* 

παρ-εμ-βάλλω : fut. παρεμβαλῶ ; fr. Arstph. and Dem. 
down; 1. to cast in by the side of or besides [cf. rapa, 
IV. 1], to insert, interpose; to bring back into line. 2: 
from Polyb. on, in military usage, fo assign to soldiers a 
place, whether in camp or in line of battle, to draw up in 
line, to encamp (often in 1 Macc., and in Sept. where for 
71M) : τινὶ χάρακα, to cast up a bank about a city, Lk. xix. 
43 Lmrg. T WH txt.* 

παρ-εμ-βολή, -ῆς, 77, (fr. παρεμβάλλω, q. V-); a 
terpolation, insertion (into a discourse of matters foreign 
to the subject in hand, Aeschin.). 2. In the Maced. 
dialect (cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 30; Lod. 


ins 


παρενοχλέω 


ad Phryn. p. 877; [W. 22]) an encampment (Polyb., 
Diod., Joseph., Plut.) ; a. the camp of the Israel- 
ites in the desert (an enclosure within which their tents 
were pitched), Ex. xxix. 14; xix. 17; xxxii. 17; hence 
in Heb. xiii. 11 used for the city of Jerusalem, inasmuch 
as that was to the Israelites what formerly the encamp- 
ment had been in the desert ; of the sacred congregation 
or assembly of Israel, as that had been gathered formerly 
in camps in the wilderness, ib. 13. b. the bar- 
racks of the Roman soldiers, which at Jerusalem were in 
the castle Antonia: Acts xxi. 34,37; xxii. 24; xxiii. 10, 
16, 32. 3. an army in line of batile: Heb. xi. 34; 
Rev. xx. 9 [here A. V. camp], (Ex. xiv. 19, 20; Judg. iv. 
16; viii. 11; 1S. xiv.16; very often in Polyb.; Ael. v.h. 
14,46). Often in Sept. for 72M, which signifies both 
camp and army; freq. in both senses in 1 Mace.; cf. 
Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 8." 

map-ev-oxéw, -@; (see ἐνοχλέω) ; to cause trouble in a 
matter (παρά equiv. to mapa τινι πράγματι). to trouble, 
annoy: τινί, Acts xv. 19. (Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
Epict., Leian., al.) * 

παρ-επί-δημος, -ov, (see ἐπιδημέω), prop. one who comes 
from a foreign country into a city or land to reside there 
by the side of the natives; hence stranger ; sojourning ina 
strange place, a foreigner, (Polyb. 32, 22,4; Athen. 5 
p-196a.); inthe Ν. Τ᾿ metaph. in ref. to heaven as the 
native country, one who sojourns on earth: so of Chris- 
tians, 1 Pet. i.1; joined with πάροικοι, 1 Pet. 11. 11, ef. 
i. 17, (Christians πατρίδας οἰκοῦσιν ἰδίας, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς πάροικοι" 
μετέχουσι πάντων ὡς πολῖται, καὶ πάνθ᾽ ὑπομένουσιν ὡς 
ξένοι: πᾶσα ξένη πατρίς ἐστιν αὐτῶν, καὶ πᾶσα πατρὶς ξένη, 
Ep. δὰ Diogn.c.5); of the patriarchs, ξένοι κι παρεπίδημοι 
ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Heb. xi. 13 (Gen. xxiii. 4; Ps. xxxviil. (xxxix.) 
13; παρεπιδημία tis ἐστιν ὁ Bios, Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3, 
where see Fischer).* 

παρ-έρχομαι ; fut. παρελεύσομαι ; pf. παρελήλυθα ; 2 aor. 
παρῆλθον, 3 pers. impv. παρελθάτω (Mt. xxvi. 39 L T Tr 
WH; see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly 
for 73); 1. (παρά past [ef. rapa, IV. 1]) to go past, 
pass by ; a. prop. a. of persons moving forward: 
to pass by, absol. Lk. xviii. 37; τινά, to go past one, Mk. 
vi.48; w.an ace. of place, Acts xvi. 8 (Hom. Il. 8, 239; 
Xen. an. 4, 2,12; Plat. Ale. 1 p. 123 b.); διὰ τῆς ὁδοῦ 
ἐκείνης, Mt. viii. 28. B. of time: Mt. xiv. 15; 6 mape- 
ληλυθὼς χρόνος [ A. V. the time past], 1 Pet. iv. 3, (Soph., 
Isoer., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.); of an act continuing for 
a time [viz. the Fast], Acts xxvii. 9. (τὰ παρελθόντα 
and τὰ ἐπιόντα are distinguished in Ael. v. h. 14, 6.) b. 
metaph. a. fo pass away, perish: ὡς ἄνθος, Jas. i. 10 ; 
ὁ οὐρανός, Mt. v. 18; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xvi. 17; 
xxi. 33; 2 Pet. iii, 10; Rev. xxi. 1 Rec.; ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη, 
Mt. xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30 sq.; Lk. xxi. 32; of λόγοι pou, 
Mt. xxiv. 85; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xxi. 33; τὰ ἀρχαῖα πα- 
ρῆλθεν, 2 Co. v. 17, (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 36; Dan. vii. 14 
Theodot.; Sap. ii. 4; v.9; Dem. p. 291,12; Theocr. 27, 
8). Here belongs also Mt. v. 18 (‘not even the small- 
est part shall pass away from the law,’ i.e. soas no longer 
to belong to it). B. to pass by ( pass over), i. 6. to neg- 


488 


παρηγορία 


lect, omit, (transgress): w. an acc. of the thing, Lk. xi. 
42; xv. 29, (Deut. xvii. 2; Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 18; Judith 
xi. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 22; Διὸς νόον, Hes. theog. 613; νόμον, 
Lys. p. 107, 52; Dem. p. 977, 14). γ. to be led by, to 
be carried past, be averted: ἀπό τινος, from one i. e. so 
as not to hit, not to appear to, (2 Chr. ix. 2); maped are 
ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ τὸ ποτήριον, Mt. xxvi. 39; παρελθεῖν, 42 [here G 
T Tr WH om. L br. ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ]; ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ ἡ Spa, Mk. xiv. 
88. 2. (παρά to [οἷ. παρά, IV. 17) to come near, 
come forward, arrive: Lk. xii. 37; xvii. 7; Acts xxiv. 
7 Ree. (and in Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down). 
[SyYN. see παραβαίνω, fin. Come. ἀντι-παρέρχομαι.] * 
πάρεσις, -ews, 7), (παρίημι, q. V.), pretermission, passing 
over, letting pass, neglecting, disregarding : διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν 
εν ἀνοχῇ Tov θεοῦ, because God had patiently let pass 
the sins committed previously (to the expiatory death of 
Christ), i.e. had tolerated, had not punished (and so 
man’s conception of his holiness was in danger of be- 
coming dim, if not extinct), Ro. iii. 25, where ef. Fritz- 
sche ; [Trench ἃ xxxiii. (Hippocr., Dion. Hal., al.)].” 
παρέχω ; impf. παρεῖχον, 3 pers. plur. παρεῖχαν (Acts 
xxviii. 91, T Tr WH; see ἔχω, init., and ἀπέρχομαι, init.) 5 
fut. 3 pers. sing. παρέξει (Lk. vii. 4 RG; see below); 2 
aor. 3 pers. plur. παρέσχον, ptep. παρασχών ; Mid., [ pres. 
παρέχομαι] ; impf. παρειχόμην ; fut. 2 pers. sing. παρέξῃ 
(Lk. vii. 4 LT Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; Plautus’s prae- 
hibeo i. e. praebeo (Lat. prae fr. the Grk. παραί [but see 
Curtius §§ 346, 380 (cf. παρά, IV. 1 fin.)]); 1. 6. a. 
to reach forth, offer: τί τινι, Lk. vi. 29. b. to show, 
afford, supply: τινὶ ἡσυχίαν, Acts xxii. 2; φιλανθρωπίαν, 
Acts xxviii. 2; πάντα, 1 Tim. vi. 17. c. to be the 
author of, or to cause one to have; to give, bring, cause, 
one something — either unfavorable: κόπους, Mt. xxvi. 
10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; xviii. 5; Gal. vi. 17 (aap. 
πόνον, Sir. Xxix.4; ἀγῶνα, Is. vii. 13; πράγματα, very often 
fr. Hdt. down; also ὄχλον, see Passow s. v. ὄχλος, 3; [L. 
and S. s. v. II.]) ;— or favorable : ἐργασίαν, Acts xvi. 16, 
and Lehm. in xix. 24; πίστιν, [A. V. to give assurance], 
Acts xvii. 31, on which phrase cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexic. 
N. T. pp- 37-39 ; i. q. to occasion (ζητήσεις, see οἰκονομία), 
1‘Tim.i. 4. Mid. 1. to offer, show, or present one’s 
self: with ἑαυτόν added (W. § 38, 6; [B. § 135, 67), w. 
an ace. of the predicate, τύπον, a pattern, Tit. ii. 7; mapa- 
Sevypa ... τοιόνδε ἑαυτὸν παρείχετο, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 39; 
(Joseph. c. Ap. 2,15, 4]; in the act., Plut. puer. edue. c. 
20 init. 2. to exhibit or offer on one’s own part: τὸ 
δίκαιον τοῖς δούλοις, Col. iv. 1; to render or afford from 
one’s own resources or by one’s own power: τινί τι, Lk. 
vii. 4 (where if we read, with Rec., παρέξει, it must be 
taken as the 3d pers. sing. of the fut. act. [in opp. to W. 
§ 13, 2 4.7, the elders being introduced as talking among 
themselves; but undoubtedly the reading παρέξη should 
be restored [see above ad init.], and the elders are ad- 
dressing Jesus; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [and on the construc- 
tion, ef. B. § 139, 327). On the mid. of this verb, cf. 
Kriiger $52, 8,2; W.§38, 5 end; [Ellic. and Lghtft. on 
Col. u. s.].* 
παρηγορία, -as, ἡ, (mapyyopew [to address]), prop. an 


παρθενία 


addressing, address; i. 6. a. exhortation (4 Mace. 
v.11; vi.1; Apoll. Rh. 2, 1281). b. comfort, solace, 
relief, alleviation, consolation: Col. iv.11 [where see Bp. 
Lehtft.]. (Aeschyl. Ag. 95; Philo, q. deus immort. § 14; 
de somn. i. ὃ 18; Joseph. antt. 4,8, 3; often in Plut. ; 
Hierocl.) * 

παρθενία, -as, 7, (παρθένος), virginity: Lk. ii. 36. (Jer. 
iii. 4; Pind., Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Plut., Hdian., al. [ef. 
Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc. ].) * 

παρθένος, -ov, ἡ» 1. a virgin: Mt. i. 23 (fr. Is. 
vii. 14); xxv. 1, 7,11; Lk.i.27; Acts xxi.9; 1 Co. vii. 
25, 28, 33(34), (fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 773n3, 
several times for 773; twice for 77p i.e. either a 
marriageable maiden, or a young (married) woman, Gen. 
xxiv. 43; Is. vii. 14, on which (last) word cf., besides 
Gesenius, Thes. p. 1037, Credner, Beitriige u.s.w. ii. p. 
197 sqq.; παρθένος of a young bride, newly married wo- 
man, Hom. Il. 2, 514); ἡ παρθ. τινός, one’s marriageable 
daughter, 1 Co. vii. 36 sqq.; παρθ. ἁγνή, a pure virgin, 
2 Co. xi. 2. 2. a man who has abstained from all 
uncleanness and whoredom attendant on idolatry, and so 
has kept his chastity: Rev. xiv. 4, where see De Wette. 
In ecel. writ. one who has never had commerce with women ; 
so of Joseph, in Fabricius, Cod. pseudepigr. Vet. Test. ii. 
pp. 92, 98; of Abel and Melchizedek, in Suidas [10 a. 
and 2450 b.]; esp. of the apostle John, as in Nonnus, 
metaph. ev. Joann. 19, 140 (Jn. xix. 26), nvide παρθένον 
via.* 

Πάρθος, -ov, ὁ, a Parthian, an inhabitant of Parthia, a 
district of Asia, bounded on the N. by Hyrcania, on the 
Ε΄ by Ariana, on the S. by Carmania Deserta, on the W. 
by Media; plur. in Acts ii. 9 of the Jewish residents of 
Parthia. [B.D.s. v. Parthians; Geo. Rawlinson, Sixth 
Great Oriental Monarchy, ete. (Lond. 1873).]* 

παρ-ίημι: 2 aor. inf. παρεῖναι (Lk. xi. 42 LT Tr WH); 
pf. pass. ptep. παρειμένος ; fr. Hom. down; 1. to let 
pass; to pass by, neglect, (very often in Grk. writ. fr. 
Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down), to disregard, omit: τί, Lk. 
xi. 42 [ἢ G ἀφιέναι] (ἁμαρτήματα, to pass over, let go un- 
punished, Sir. xxiii. 2; [τιμωρίαν, Lycurg.148,41]). 2. 
to relax, loosen, let go, [see παρά, IV. 2], (6. g. a bow); 
pf. pass. ptep. παρειμένος, relaxed, unstrung, weakened, 
exhausted, (Kur., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) : χεῖρες, Heb. xii. 
12; Sir. ii. 13; xxv. 23, cf. Zeph. iii. 16; Jer. iv. 31; 
ἀργοὶ καὶ παρειμένοι ἐπὶ ἔργον ἀγαθόν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
34, 4 cf. 1. 

παρ-ιστάνω, see παρίστημι. 

παρ-ίστημι and (in later writ., and in the N. T. in Ro. 
vi. 13, 16) παριστάνω; fut. παραστήσω; 1 aor. παρέστησα; 
2 aor. παρέστην; pf. παρέστηκα, ptcp. παρεστηκώς and 
παρεστώς ; plupf. 3 pers. plur. παρειστήκεισαν (Acts i. 10 
[WH zapior.; see ἵστημι, init.]); 1 fut. mid. παραστή- 
copa; fr. Hom. down. 1. The pres., impf., fut. 
and 1 aor. act. have a transitive sense (Sept. chiefly for 
ThyN), a. to place beside or near [παρά, IV. 1]; 
to set at hand; to present; to proffer; to provide: κτήνη, 
Acts xxiii. 24 (σκάφη, 2 Mace. xii. 3); τινά or τί τινι, 
to place a person or thing at one’s disposal, Mt. xxvi. 


Cf. παραλύω." 


489 


παροικέω 


53; to present a person for another to see and question, 
Acts xxiii. 33; to present or show, τινά or τί with an ace. 
of the quality which the person or thing exhibits: οἷς 
παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, Acts i. 3; add, Ro. yi. 13, 16, 
19; 2 Co.xi.2; Eph. v.27; 2 Tim. ii. 15, (“te vegetum 
nobis in Graecia siste,” Cic. ad Att. 10, 16, 6) ; τινά with 
a pred. ace. foll. by κατενώπιόν τινος, Col. i. 22; ἑαυτὸν ὥς 
[ὡσεί] τινά τινι, Ro. vi. 13; to bring, lead to, in the sense 
of presenting, without a dat.: Acts ix. 41; Col. i. 28. 
of sacrifices or of things consecrated to God: τὰ σώματα 
ὑμῶν θυσίαν... . τῷ θεῷ, Ro. xii. 1 (so also in prof. auth. : 
Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Joseph. antt. 4, 6,4; Leian. deor. concil. 
13; Lat. admoveo, Verg. Aen. 12,171; sisto, Stat. Theb. 
4, 445) ; τινὰ (a first-born) τῷ κυρίῳ, Lk. ii. 22; to bring 
to, bring near, metaphorically, 1. 6. to bring into one’s fel- 
lowship or intimacy: twa τῷ θεῷ, 1 Co. Vili. 8; 56. τῷ θεῷ, 
2 Co. iv. 14. b. to present (show) by argument, to 
prove: τί, Acts xxiv. 13 (Epict. diss. 2, 23, 47; foll. by 
πῶς, id. 2, 26,4; τινί τι, Xen. oec. 13,1; revi, ὅτι, Jo- 
seph. antt. 4, 3, 2; de vita sua § 6). 2. Mid. and 
pf., plupf., 2 aor. act., in an intransitive sense (Sept. 
chiefly for 11y, also for 2¥3), to stand beside, stand by 
or near, to be at hand, be present ; a. univ. to stand 
by: τινί, to stand beside one, Actsi. 10; ix. 39; xxiii. 2; 
XXVil. 23; ὁ παρεστηκώς, a by-stander, Mk. xiv. 47, 69 
[here TTr WH παρεστῶσιν); xv. 35 [here Tdf. παρε- 
στώτων, WH mrg. ἑστηκότων], 39; Jn. xviii. 22 [L mrg. 
Tr mrg. παρεστώτων] ; ὁ παρεστώς, Mk. xiv. 70; Jn. xix. 
26 [here anarthrous]. Ὁ. to appear: w. a pred. 
nom. foll. by ἐνώπιόν τινος, Acts iv. 10 [A. V. stand here]; 
before a judge, Καίσαρι, Acts xxvii. 24; mid. τῷ Bnyare 
tov θεοῦ [RG Χριστοῦ), Ro. xiv. 10. c. to be at 
hand, stand ready : of assailants, absol. Acts iv. 26 [A. V. 
stood up] (fr. Ps. ii. 2); to be at hand for service, of ser- 
vants in attendance on their master (Lat. appareo), τινΐ, 
Esth. iv. 5; ἐνώπιόν twos, 1 K. x. 8; ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, of 
a presence-angel [A.V. that stand in the presence of 
God], Lk. i. 19, cf. Rev. viii. 2; absol. of παρεστῶτες, 
them that stood by, Lk. xix. 24; with αὐτῷ added (viz. 
the high-priest), Acts xxiii. 2, 4. d. to stand by to 
help, to succor, (Germ. beistehen) : τινί, Ro. xvi. 2; 2 Tim. 
iv. 17, (Hom. Il. 10, 290; Hes. th. 439; Arstph. vesp. 
1388; Xen.; Dem. p. 366, 20; 1120, 26, and in other au- 
thors). e. to be present; to have come: of time, Mk. 
ν- 29: 

Tlappevas [ prob. contr. fr. Παρμενίδης ‘steadfast’; cf. W. 
103 (97)], acc. -ἂν [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Parmenas, one of 
the seven “deacons” of the primitive church at Jerusa- 
lem: Acts vi. 5.* 

πάροδος, -ov, 7, (παρά, near by; ὁδός), a passing by or 
passage: ἐν παρόδῳ, in passing, [A. V. by the way], 1 Co. 
xvi. 7. (Thue. 1, 126; v. 4; Polyb. 5, 68, 8; Cic. ad 
Att. 5, 20, 2; Lcian. dial. deor. 24, 2.) * 

παρ-οικέω, -@; 1 aor. παρῴκησα ; 1. prop. to dwell 
beside (one) or in one’s neighborhood [παρά, IV. 1]; to live 
near; (Xen., Thuce., Isocr., al.). 2. in the Scrip- 
tures to be or dwell in a place as a stranger, to sojourn, 
(Sept. for 733, several times also for 3¥ and 1309} : foll. 


παροικία 


by ἐν w. ἃ dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 18 R L (Gen. xx. 1; 
xxi. 34; xxvi. 8; Ex. xii. 40 cod. Alex.; Lev. xviii. 
3 [Ald.], ete.); w. an ace. of place, ibid. GT Tr WH 
(Gen. xvii. 8; Ex. vi. 4); εἰς w. ace. of place (in pregn. 
constr.; see εἰς, C. 2), Heb. xi. 9. (Metaph. and absol. 
to dwell on the earth, Philo de cherub. § 34 [cf. Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 and Lehtft. and Harnack ad loc. ; Holtz- 
mann, Einl. ins N. T. p. 484sq. Syn. see xaroixéw.]-) * 

παρ-οικία, -as, 7), (παροικέω, 4. v-), a bibl. and 600]. word, 
a dwelling near or with one; hence a sojourning, dwelling 
in a strange land: prop. Acts xiii. 17 (2 Esdr. viii. 35; 
Ps. exix. (exx.)5; Sap. xix. 10; Prol. of Sir. 21; ef. Fritz- 
sche on Judith y. 9). Metaph. the life of man here on 
earth, likened to a sojourning: 1 Pet. i. 17 (Gen. xlvii. 
9); see παρεπίδημος [and reff. under παροικέω |.* 

πάρ-οικος, -ov, (παρά and οἶκος) ; 1. in class. Grk. 
dwelling near, neighboring. 2. in the Scriptures a 
stranger, foreigner, one who lives in a place without the 
right of citizenship ; [R. V. sojourner]; Sept. for 93 and 
AW) (see παροικέω 2, and παροικία, [and cf. Schmidt, Syn. 
43,5; L.and S.s.v.]): foll. by ἐν w. dat. of place, Acts 
vii. 6, 29; metaph. without citizenship in God’s kingdom : 
joined with ξένος and opp. to συμπολίτης, Eph. ii. 19 
(μόνος κύριος ὁ θεὸς πολίτης ἐστί, πάροικον δὲ καὶ ἐπήλυτον 
τὸ γενητὸν ἅπαν, Philo de cherub. § 34 [οἷς Mangey i. 161 
note]); one who lives on earth as a stranger, a sojourner 
on the earth: joined with παρεπίδημος (q. ν.), of Chris- 
tians, whose fatherland is heaven, 1 Pet.ii.11. [Cf. Ep. 
ad Diognet. § 5, 5.]* 

παροιμία, -as, 7, (παρά by, aside from [cf. παρά, IV. 2], 
and οἶμος way), prop. a saying out of the usual course or 
deviating from the usual manner of speaking [cf. Suidas 
654, 15; but Hesych. s. v. et al. ‘a saying heard by the 
wayside’ (παρά, IV.1), i. 6. a current or trite saying, prov- 
erb; ef. Curtius §611; Steph. Thes. 5. v.], hence als 
a clever and sententious saying, a proverb, (Aeschyl. Ag. 
264; Soph., Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.; exx. fr. Philo are 
given by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien, p. 292 sq. [as de 
ebriet. § 20; de Abr. § 40; de vit. Moys. i. § 28; ii. § 5; 
de exsecrat. § 6]; for own in Prov. i. 1; xxv. 1 cod. 
Alex.; Sir. vi. 35, ete.) : τὸ τῆς παροιμίας, what is in the 
proverb (Leian. dial. mort. 6, 2; 8,1), 2 Pet.ii. 22. 2 
any dark saying which shadows forth some didactic truth, 
esp. a symbolic or figurative saying: παροιμίαν λέγειν, Jn. 
Xvi. 29; ἐν παροιμίαις λαλεῖν, ibid. 25; speech or discourse 
in which a thing is illustrated by the use of similes and 
comparisons; an allegory, i.e. extended and elaborate 

* metaphor: Jn. x. 6.* 

πάροινος, -ov, a later Grk. word for the earlier παρ- 
oinos, (παρά [q.v- IV.1] and οἶνος, one who sits long at 
his wine), given to wine, drunken: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. i. 
7; [al. give it the secondary sense, ‘quarrelsome over 
wine’; hence, brawling, abusive].* 

παροίχομαι : pf. ptep. παρῳχημένος ; to go by, pass by: 
as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 10, 252 down, of time, Acts 
xiv. 16.* 

map-opordtw; (fr. παρόμοιος, and this fr. παρά [q. ν. IV. 
1 (?)] and ὅμοιος); to be like; to be not unlike: Mt. xxiii. 


490 


παρουσία 


27 RGT Trmrg. WH txt. (Several times also in eccl. 
writ.) * 

παρόμοιος, -ov, (also of three term. [see ὅμοιος, init.]), 
like: Mk. vii. 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the cl.], 13. (Hdt., 
Thue., Xen., Dem., Polyb., Diod., al.) * 

map-ofivw: prop. to make sharp, to sharpen, [mapa, IV. 
3]: τὴν μάχαιραν, Deut. xxxii. 41. Metaph. (so always 
in prof. auth. fr. Eur., Thue., Xen., down), a. lo 
stimulate, spur on, urge, (πρός τι, ἐπί τι). b. to irri- 
tate, provoke, rouse to anger; Pass., pres. παροξύνομαι; 
impf. παρωξυνόμην : Acts xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiii. δ. Sept. 
chiefly for 782) to scorn, despise; besides for DyIn to 
provoke, make angry, Deut. ix. 18; Ps. ev. (evi.) 29; Is. 
Ixv. 3; for ΠΥ ΡΠ to exasperate, Deut. ix. 7, 22, ete.; pass. 
for ΓΤ to burn with anger, Hos. viii. 5; Zech. x. 3, and 
for other verbs.* 

παροξυσμός, -οῦ, 6, (παροξύνω, q. V.) ; 1. an incit- 
ing, incitement: εἰς map. ἀγάπης [A. V. to provoke unto 
love], Heb. x. 24. 2. irritation, [R. V. contention]: 
Acts xv. 39; Sept. twice for WP, violent anger, passion, 
Deut. xxix. 28; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 37; Dem. p. 1105, 
24.* 

παρ-οργίζω ; Attic fut.[ef. B.37 (32); WH. App. 163] 
παροργιῶ ; to rouse to wrath, to provoke, exasperate, anger, 
[ef. παρά, IV. 3]: Ro. x. 19; Eph. vi. 4; and Lehm. in 
Col. iii. 21. (Dem. p. 805, 19; Philo de somn. ii. § 26; 
Sept. chiefly for 0°y377.) * 

Tap-opyir pds, -ov, 6, (παροργίζω), indignation, exasper- 
ation, wrath: Eph. iv. 26. (1 K. xv. 30; 2K. xxiii. 26; 
Neh. ix. 18; [Jer. xxi. 5 Alex.]; not found in prof. auth.) 
[Syn. ef. Trench § xxxvii.]* 

παροτρύνω: 1 aor. παρώτρυνα; [ὀτρύνω to stir up (cf. 
mapa, LV. 3) ]; to incite, stir up : τινά, Acts xiii. 50. (Pind. 
Ol. 3, 68; Joseph. antt. 7,6, 1; Leian. deor. concil. 4.) * 

παρ-ουσία, -as, ἡ, (παρών, -οὔῦσα, -dv, fr. πάρειμι q- V-), 
in Grk. auth. fr. the Tragg., Thuce., Plat., down; not 
found in Sept. ; 1. presence: 1 Co. xvi. 17; 2 Co. 
x. 10; opp. to ἀπουσία, Phil. ii. 12 (2 Mace. xv. 21; [Ar- 
istot. phys. 2, 3 p. 195", 14; metaphys. 4, 2 p. 1018", 14; 
meteor. 4, 5 p. 882", 33 etc.]). 2. the presence of 
one coming, hence the coming, arrival, advent, ([Polyb. 
3, 41,1. 8]; Judith x. 18; 2 Mace. viii. 12; [Herm. sim. 
5, 5,3]): 2Co. vii. 6 sq.; 2 Th. ii. 9 (cf. 8 ἀποκαλυφθήσε- 
tat); ἡ - - - πάλιν πρός τινα, of a return, Phil. i. 26. In 
the N. T. esp. of the advent, i. 6. the future, visible, return 
from heaven of Jesus, the Messiah, to raise the dead, | 
hold the last judgment, and set up formally and glorious- 
ly the kingdom of God: Mt. xxiv. 3; ἡ παρ. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
ἀνθρώπου, [27], 37, 39; τοῦ κυρίου, 1 Th. iii. 13; iv. 15; v. 
23; 2 Th.ii.1; Jas. v.7sq.; 2 Pet. 11]. 4; Χριστοῦ, 2 Pet. 
i. 16; αὐτοῦ, 1 Co. xv. 23; [1 Th. ii. 19]; 2 Th. ii. 8; 2 
Pet. iii. 4; [1 Jn. ii. 28]; τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμέρας, 2 Pet. iii. 12. 
It is called in eccles. writ. ἡ δευτέρα παρουσία, Ev. Nicod. 
c. 22 fin.; Justin. apol. 1, 52 [where see Otto’s note]; 
dial. ο. Tr. ec. 40, 110, 121; and is opp. to ἡ πρώτη map. 
which took place in the incarnation, birth, and earthly 
career of Christ, Justin. dial. 6. Tr. ec. 52, 121, cf. 14, 32, 
49, ete.; [ef.Ignat.ad Phil. 9 (and Lghtft.)]; see ἔλευσις " 


mapowis 


παροψίς, -idos, ἡ, (mapa [q. v. IV. 1], and ὄψον, on 
which see ὀψάριον) ; 1. a side-dish, a dish of dain- 
ties or choice food suited not so much to satisfy as to gratify 
the appetite; a side-accompaniment of the more solid food ; 
hence i. q. παρόψημα; so in Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4 and many 
Attic writ. in Athen. 9 p. 367 d. sq. 2. the dish itself 
in which the delicacies are served up: Mt. xxiii. 25, 26 [here 
T om. WH br. παροψ.7; Artem. oneir. 1, 74; Alciphr. 3, 
20; Plut. de vitand. aere alien. §2. This latter use of 
the word is condemned by the Atticists; cf. Sturz, Lex. 
Xen. iii. 463 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 176; [Rutherford, 
New [hryn. p. 265 sq.]; Poppo on Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4.* 

παρρησία, -as, 7, (πᾶν and pros; cf. ἀρρησία silence, 
κατάρρησις accusation, πρόρρησις prediction) ; 1. 
freedom in speaking, unreservedness in speech, (Kur., 
Plat., Dem., al.): ἡ π. τινός, Acts iv. 13; χρῆσθαι παρ- 
ρησίᾳ, 2 Co. iii. 12; παρρησίᾳ adverbially,— freely: λαλεῖν, 
Jn. vii. 13, 26; xviii. 20 ;— openly, frankly, i. e. without 
concealment: Mk. viii. 32; Jn. xi. 14; — without ambi- 
guity or cireumlocution: εἰπὲ ἡμῖν παρρησίᾳ (Philem. ed. 
Meineke p. 405), Jn. x. 24;— without the use of figures 
and comparisons, opp. to ἐν παροιμίαις : Jn. xvi. 25, and 
RG in 29 (where L TTr WH ἐν παρρησίᾳ); ἐν παρρησίᾳ, 
Sreely, Eph. vi. 19; pera παρρησίας, Acts xxviil. 31 ; εἰπεῖν, 
Acts ii. 29; λαλεῖν, Acts iv. 29, 31. 2. free and 
fearless confidence, cheerful courage, boldness, assurance, 
(1.Mace. iv. 18; Sap. ν. 1 ; Joseph. antt. 9, 10,4; 15, 2, 
7; [οἷν W. 23]): Phil. i. 20 (opp. to αἰσχύνεσθαι, cf. Wie- 
singer ad loc.) ; ἐν πίστει, resting on, 1 Tim. iii. 13, cf. 
Huther ad loc.; ἔχειν παρρησίαν εἴς τι, Heb. x. 19; πολλή 
μοι (ἐστί) παρρ. πρὸς ὑμᾶς, 2 Co. vii. 4; of the confidence 
impelling one to do something, ἔχειν παρρ- with an infin. 
of the thing to be done, Philem. 8 ['Test. xii. Patr., test. 
Rub. 4]; of the undoubting confidence of Christians rela- 
tive to their fellowship with God, Eph. iii. 12; Heb. iii. 
6; x. 353 pera παρρησίας, Heb. iv. 16; ἔχειν παρρησίαν, 
opp: to αἰσχύνεσθαι to be covered with shame, 1 Jn. ii. 
28; before the judge, 1 Jn. iv. 17; with πρὸς τὸν θεόν 
added, 1 Jn. 111. 215 v. 14. 3. the deportment by 
which one becomes conspicuous or secures publicity (Philo 
de victim. offer. § 12) : ἐν παρρησίᾳ, before the public, in 
view of all, Jn. vii. 4 (opp. to ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ) ; xi. 54 [with- 
out ἐν]; Col. 11. 15 [where cf. Bp. Lehtft.].* 

παρρησιάζομαι ; impf. ἐπαρρησιαζόμην ; 1 aor. ἐπαρρη- 
σιασάμην ; (παρρησία, α. ν.) ; ἃ depon. verb; Vulg. chiefly 
fiducialiter ago; to bear one’s self boldly or confident- 
ly; 1. to use freedom in speaking, be free-spoken; to 
speak freely ([A. V. boldly]): Acts xviii. 26; xix. 8; ἐν 
τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, relying on the name of Jesus, Acts 
ix. 27, 28 (29) ; also ἐπὶ τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts xiv. 3. 2. to 
grow confident, have boldness, show assurance, assume a 
bold bearing: εἰπεῖν, Acts xiii. 46 [R. V. spake out boldly]; 
λαλεῖν, Acts xxvi. 26; παρρησ. ἔν τινι, in reliance on one 
to take courage, foll. by an inf. of the thing to be done: 
λαλῆσαι, Eph. vi. 20; 1 ΤῊ. 11. 2. (Xen., Dem., Aeschin., 
Polyb., Philo, Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 11.) * 

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, en. παντός, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur. 
Lchm. πᾶσι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times; Tdf. -σι 


491 


πᾶς 


five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times; 
Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -ox fourteen times, -ow 
sixty-eight times; see N, v (ἐφελκυστικόν)], Hebr. 75, [fr. 
Hom. down], all, every; it is used 

I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous 
nouns; a. any, every one (86. of the class denoted 
by the noun annexed to mas); with the Singular: as 
πᾶν δένδρον, Mt. iii. 10; πᾶσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH 
Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v.11; xv. 13; 
Lk. iv. 37; Jn.ii. 10; xv.2; Acts ii.43; v.42; Ro. xiv. 
11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πᾶσα 
ψυχὴ ἀνθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πᾶσα ἀνθρ. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr. 
p- 249e.); πᾶσα συνείδησις ἀνθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2; mas 
λεγόμενος θεός, 2 Th. ii. 4; πᾶς ἅγιος ἐν Χριστῷ, Phil. iv. 
21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are of the class 
indicated by the noun: as πάντες ἄνθρωποι, Acts xxii. 15; 
Ro. v. 12, 18; xii. 17 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 7; xv. 19; πάντες 
ἅγιοι, Ro. xvi. 15; πάντες ἄγγελοι θεοῦ, Heb. i. 6; πάντα 
[LT Tr WH ra] ἔθνη, Rev. xiv.8; on the phrase πᾶσα 
σάρξ, see σάρξ, 3. b. any and every, of every kind, 
[A. V. often all manner of |: πᾶσα νόσος καὶ μαλακία, Mt. 
iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1; εὐλογία, blessings of every kind, Eph. 
i.3; so esp. with nouns designating virtues or vices, emo- 
tions, character, condition, to indicate every mode in 
which such virtue, vice or emotion manifests itself, or 
any object whatever to which the idea expressed by the 
noun belongs :—thus, πᾶσα ἐλπίς, Acts xxvii. 20; σοφία, 
Acts vii. 22; 6]. 1. 28 ; γνῶσις, Ro. xv. 14 ; ἀδικία, ἀσέβεια, 
etc., Ro. i. 18, 29; 2 Οο.χ. θ; Eph. iv. 19, 31; ν. 8; σπουδή, 
2 Co. viii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 5; ἐπιθυμία, Ro. vii. 8; χαρά, Ro. 
xv. 13; αὐτάρκεια, 2 Co. ix. 8; ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ κ. γνώσει, 
1 Co. i. 5; σοφίᾳ x. φρονήσει ete. Eph. i. 8; ἐν π. ἀγαθω- 
σύνῃ κ. δικαιοσύνῃ, κι ἀληθείᾳ, Eph. v. 9; αἰσθήσει, Phil. i. 
9; ὑπομονή, θλίψις, οἴο., 2 Co. i. 4; xii. 12; add, Col. i. 
9511 5 τ|1: 16: 2. ΠῚ 1: {ΠῚ eu) ald tnigredlae bie Ὁ 15 
2 Tim. iv. 2; Tit. ii. 15 (on which see ἐπιταγή); iii. 2; 
Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. ii. 1; v.10; πᾶσα δικαιοσύνη, i.e. ὃ ἂν ἦ 
δίκαιον, Mt. iii. 15; πᾶν θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ, everything God 
wills, Col. iv. 12; πᾶσα ὑποταγή, obedience in all things, 
1 Tim. ii. 11; πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ, consciousness of 
rectitude in all things, Acts xxiii. 1;—or it signifies the 
highest degree, the maximum, of the thing which the noun 
denotes [cf. W. 110 (105 sq.); Ellicott on Eph. i. 8; 
Meyer on Phil. i. 20; Kriiger § 50, 11, 9 and 10]: as 
μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας, Acts iv. 29; xxviii. 31; pera rac. 
ταπεινοφροσύνης, Acts xx. 19; προθυμίας, Acts xvii. 11; 
χαρᾶς, Phil. ii. 29, cf. Jas. i. 2; ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, Acts 
v.23; ἐν παντὶ φόβῳ, 1 Pet. ii. 18; πᾶσα ἐξουσία, Mt. 
xxviii. 18, (πᾶν κράτος, Soph. Phil. 142). c. the 
whole (all, Lat. totus): so before proper names of coun- 
tries, cities, nations; as, πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mt. ii. 3; πᾶς 
Ἰσραήλ, Ro. xi. 26; before collective terms, as πᾶς οἶκος 
Ἰσραήλ, Acts ii. 36; πᾶσα κτίσις (see κτίσις, 2 b.); πᾶσα 
γραφή (nearly equiv. to the ὅσα προεγράφη in Ro. xv. 4), 
2 Tim. iii. 16 (ef. Rothe, Zur Dogmatik, p. 181); πᾶσα 
γερουσία υἱῶν ᾿Ισραήλ, Ex. xii. 21; mas ἵππος Φαραώ, Ex. 
xiv. 23; πᾶν δίκαιον ἔθνος, Add. to Esth. i. 9; by a some- 
what rare usage before other substantives also, as [πᾶν 


πᾶς 


πρόσωπον τῆς γῆς, Acts xvii. 261, Τ Τα WH]; πᾶσα 
οἰκοδομή, Eph. ii. 21 GL Ὁ Tr WH, ef. Harless ad loc. 
p- 262 [al. find no necessity here for resorting to this ex- 
ceptional use, but render (with R. V.) each several build- 
ing (cf. Meyer)]; πᾶν τέμενος, 3 Mace. i. 13 (where see 
Grimm) ; Παύλου ... ὃς ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ μνημονεύει ὑμῶν, 
Ignat. ad Eph. 12 [(yet οἵ. Bp. Lghtft.)]; cf. Passow 
s.v. πᾶς, 2; [L.and 5. 8. v. A. 11]; W.§ 18,4; [B.§ 127, 
29]; Kriiger § 50, 11,8 to 11; Kiihner ii. 545 sq. 2 
with nouns which have the article, all the, the whole, (see 
c. just above) :—with the Singular; as, πᾶσα ἡ ἀγέλη, 
the whole herd, Mt. viii. 32; πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος, Mt. xiii. 2; πᾶς 
ὁ κόσμος, Ro. iii. 19; Col. i. 6; πᾶσα ἡ πόλις (i.e. all its 
inhabitants), Mt. viii. 34; xxi. 10, ete.; πᾶσα ἡ ᾿Ιουδαία, 
Mt. iii. 5; add, Mt. xxvii. 25; Mk. v.33; Lk.i. 10; Acts 
vii. 14; x. 2; xx. 28; xxii. 5; Ro. iv. 16; ix.17; 1Co. 
xiii. 2 (πίστιν καὶ γνῶσιν in their whole compass and ex- 
tent); Eph. iv. 16; Col.i.19; ii. 9,19; Phil. 1. 8; Heb. 
ii.15; Rey.v.6, etc.; the difference between πᾶσα ἡ θλίψις 
[all] and πᾶσα θλίψις [any] appears in 2 Co.i. 4. πᾶς 
6 ads οὗτος, Lk. ix.13; πᾶσαν τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἐκείνην, Mt. 
xviii. 32; πᾶς placed after the noun has the force of a 
predicate: τὴν κρίσιν πᾶσαν δέδωκε, the Judgment he hath 
given wholly [cf. W. 548 (510)], Jn. v. 22; τὴν ἐξουσίαν 
... πᾶσαν ποιεῖ, Rev. xiii. 12; it is placed between the 
article and noun [B. 8. 127,29; W. 549 (510)], as τὸν 
πάντα χρόνον, i.e. always, Acts xx. 18; add, Gal. v. 14; 
1 Tim. i.16 [here L T Tr WH ἅπας]; — with a Plural, 
all (the totality of the persons or things designated by the 
noun): πάντας τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς, Mt. ii. 4; add, Mt. iv. 8; 
xi. 13; Mk. iv. 13; vi. 88; Lk.i. 6,48; Acts x. 12, 43; 
Ro. i. 5; xv.11; 1 Co. xii. 26; xv. 25; 2 Co. viii. 18, and 
very often; with a demonstr. pron. added, Mt. xxv. 7; 
Lk. ii. 19, 51 [here T WH om. L Tr mrg. br. the pron. ] ; 
πάντες is placed after the noun: τὰς πόλεις πάσας, the cities 
all (of them) [ef. W. u. s.], Mt. ix. 35; Acts viii. 40; add, 
Mt. x. 30; Lk. vii. 35 [here L Tr WH txt. πάντων τῶν 
ete.]; xii. 7; Acts viii. 40; xvi. 26; Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. vii. 
17; x. 1; xiii.2; xv. 7; xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 2, 12 (13); 
Phil. i. 13; 1Th.v. 26; 2 Tim. iv. 21 [WH br. x.]; Rev. 
Vill. 3; of πάντες foll. by a noun, Acts xix. 7; xxvii. 37; 
τοὺς κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντας ᾿Ιουδαίους, Acts xxi. 21 [here L 
om. Tr br. z.]- 

II. without a substantive; 1. mase. and fem. 
* every one, any one: in the singular, without any addition, 
Mk. ix. 49; Lk. xvi. 16; Heb. ii. 9; foll. by a rel. pron., 
πᾶς ὅστις, Mt. vii. 24; x. 32; πᾶς os, Mt. xix. 29 [L T Tr 
WH Gorts]; Gal. iii. 10; πᾶς ὃς ἄν (ἐάν Tr WH), whoso- 
ever, Acts ii. 21; mas ἐξ ὑμῶν ὅς, Lk. xiv. 33; witha 
ptep. which has not the article [W. 111 (106)]: παντὸς 
ἀκούοντος (if any one heareth, whoever he is), Mt. xiii. 19; 
παντὶ ὀφείΐλοντι ἡμῖν, every one owing (if he owe) us any- 
thing, unless ὀφείλοντι is to be taken substantively, every 
debtor of ours, Lk. xi. 4; with a ptep. which has the ar- 
ticle and takes the place of a relative clause [W. u.s.]: 
πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος, every one that is angry, Mt. v. 22; add, 
Mt. vii.8; Lk. vi.47; Jn. iii. 8, 20; vi.45; Acts x. 43 sq.; 
xiii. 39; Ro. i. 16; ii. 10; xii. $3; 1 Co. ix. 25: xvi. 16; 


492 


πᾶς 


Gal. iii. 18; 1 ὅπ. ii. 28; iif. 8. 5α. 6, ete. Plural πάντες, 
without any addition, all men: Mt. x. 22; Mk. xiii. 13; 
Lk. xx. 38; xxi. 17; Jn.i. 7; iii. 31* [in 31°G T WH mrg. 
om. the cl.]; v.23; νἱ. 45 ; xii. 32; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. x. 
12; 1 Co. ix. 19; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); Eph. iii. 9 [here T 
WH txt.om. L br.z.]; of a certain definite whole: all 
(the people), Mt. xxi. 26; all (we who hold more liberal 
views), 1 Co. viii. 1; all (the members of the church), 
ibid. 7; by hyperbole i.q. the great majority, the mul- 
titude, Jn. iii. 26; all (just before mentioned), Mt. xiv. 
20; xxii. 27 sq.; xxvii. 22; Mk. i. 27 [here TTrWH 
ἅπαντες, 37; vi. 39,42; [xi.32 Lehm.]; Lk. i. 63; iv. 15; 
Jn. ii. 15, 24, and very often; [all (about to be men- 
tioned), διὰ πάντων se. τῶν ἁγίων (as is shown by the foll. 
καὶ κτλ.), Acts ix. 32]. οἱ πάντες, all taken together, all 
collectively, [cf. W. 116 (110)]: of all men, Ro. xi. 32; 
of a certain definite whole, Phil. ii. 21; with the 1 pers. 
plur. of the verb, 1 Co. x.17; Eph. iv. 13; with a definite 
number, in all [οἴ B. § 127, 29]: ἦσαν δὲ of πάντες ἄνδρες 
ὡσεὶ δεκαδύο (or δώδεκα), Acts xix. 7; ἤμεθα ai πᾶσαι 
ψυχαὶ διακόσιαι ἑβδυμήκοντα ἕξ, Acts xxvii. 37, (ἐπ᾽ ἄνδρας 
τοὺς πάντας δύο, Judith ἵν. 7 ; ἐγένοντο οἱ πάντες ὡς τετρα- 
κόσιοι, Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 3; τοὺς πάντας εἰς δισχιλίους, 
id. 4, 7, 1; ὡς εἶναι τὰς πάσας δέκα, Δ6]. ν. h. 12, 85; see 
other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow 8. v. πᾶς, ὅ b.; [L. and 
S.s.v. C.]; “relinquitur ergo, ut omnia tria genera sint 
causarum,” Cic. de invent. 1, 9); of πάντες, all those I 
have spoken of, 1 Co. ix. 22; 2 Co. v. 14 (15). πάντες 
ὅσοι, all as many as, Mt. xxii. 10; Lk. iv. 40 [here Tr mrg. 
WH txt. ἅπ.7; Jn. x.8; Acts v.36 sq.; πάντες of w. ἃ ptep., 
all (they) that: Mt. iv. 24; ΜΚ. 1. 82; Lk. ii. 18, 38; Acts 
ii. 44; iv.16; Ro.i. 7; x.12; 1Co.i.2; 2Co.i.1; Eph. 
vi. 24; 1 Th.i. 7; 2 Th.i. 10; Heb. iii. 16; 2Jn.1; Rev. 
xiii. 8; xviii. 19, 24, and often. πάντες οἱ sc. ὄντες : Mt. 
v.15; Lk.v.9; Jn.v. 28; Actsii. 39; v.17; xvi. 32; Ro. 
ix. 6; 2 Tim. i. 15; 1 Pet. v. 14, ete. πάντες with per- 
sonal and demonst. pronouns [compare W. 548 (510) ]: 
ἡμεῖς πάντες, Jn. i. 16; Ro. viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 18; Eph. 11. 
3; πάντες ἡμεῖς, Acts ii. 32; x. 33; xxvi. 14; xxviii. 2; Ro. 
iv. 163; of πάντες ἡμεῖς, 2 Co. v. 10; ὑμεῖς πάντες, Acts xx. 
25; πάντες ὑμεῖς, Mt. xxiii. 8; xxvi. 31; Lk. ix. 48; Acts 
xxii. 3; Ro. xv. 33; 2 Co. vii. 15; [Gal. iii. 283 RG L 
WH]; Phil. i. 4, 7sq.; 1 Th.i.2; 2 Th. iii. 16,18; Tit. 
iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 25, ete.; αὐτοὶ πάντες, 1 Co. xv. 10; πάντες 
αὐτοί, Acts iv. 33; xix.173; xx. 36; οὗτοι πάντες, Acts i. 
14; xvii.7; Heb. xi. 18, 39; πάντες [LT ἅπ.] οὗτοι, Acts 
ii. 7; of δὲ πάντες, and they all, Mk. xiv. 64. 2. 
Neuter πᾶν, everything, (anything) whatsoever ; a. 
in the Sing.: πᾶν τό. foll. by a ptep. [on the neut. in a con- 
crete and collective sense cf. B. § 128, 1], 1 Co. x. 25, 27; 
Eph. v. 13; 1Jn. ν. 4; πᾶν τό se. ὄν, 1 Jn. ii. 16; πᾶν ὅ, 
Ro. xiv. 23; Jn. vi. 37, 39, [R. V. all that]; Jn. xvii. 2: 
πᾶν 6, τι ἄν or ἐάν, whatsoever, Col. iii. 17, and Ree. in 23. 
Joined to prepositions it forms adverbial phrases: διὰ 
παντός or διαπαντός, always, perpetually, see διά, A. I. 1 
a.; ἐν παντί, either in every condition, or in every matter, 
Phil. iv. 6; 1 Th. v. 18; in everything, in every way, on 
every side, in every particular or relation, 2 Co. iv. 8; vii 


πᾶς 


5, 11, 16; xi. 6,9; Eph. v. 24; πλουτίζεσθαι, 1 (δ: 1: 5; 
[περισσεύειν], 2 Co. viii. 7; ἐν παντὶ καὶ ἐν πᾶσιν (see 
μυέω. b.), Phil. iv. 12. Ὁ. Plural πάντα (without the 
article [cf.W. 116 (110); Matthiae ὃ 488 ]) allthings; a. 
of acertain definite totality or sum of things, the con- 
text shewing what things are meant: Mk. iv. 34; vi. 30; 
Lk. i. 3; [v.28 LT Tr WH]; Jn. iv. 25 [here T Tr WH 
Gr.]; Ro. viii. 23; 2 Co. vi. 10; Gal. iv. 1; Phil. ii. 14; 
1 Th. v. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Tit.i.15; 1Jn.ii. 27; πάντα 
ὑμῶν, all ye do with one another, 1 Co. xvi. 14; πάντα 
γίνεσθαι πᾶσιν, [A. V. to become all things to all men], i.e. 
to adapt one’s self in all ways to the needs of all, 1 Co. 
ix. 22 L T Tr WH (Ree. τὰ πάντα i. e. in all the ways pos- 
sible or necessary); οἵ. Kypke, Obs. ii. p. 215 sq. B. 
accusative πάντα [adverbially], wholly, altogether, in all 
ways, in all things, in all respects: Acts xx. 35; 1 Co. ix. 
25; x. 33; xi. 2; cf. Matthiae § 425, 5; Passow ii. p. 764°; 
[L. and S. 8. v. D. II. 4]. Ὑ. πάντα, in an absolute 
sense, all things that exist, all created things: Jn. i. 3; 
1 Co. ii. 10; xv. 27; Heb. ii. 8 (and L T Tr WH in iii. 
4); Eph. i. 22; Col.i.17; 1 Pet.iv.7; Rev. xxi. 5; (in 
Ro. ix. 5 πάντων is more fitly taken as gen. mase. [but 
see the Comm. ad loc.]). 
(gen. neut.; Rec. πασῶν), what commandment is first of 
all (things), Mk. xii. 28 (ἔφασκε λέγων κορυδὸν πάντων 
πρώτην ὄρνιθα γενέσθαι, προτέραν τῆς γῆς, Arstph. av. 472; 


ae \ , , 
ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων 


τὰς πόλεις . -. ἐλευθεροῦν καὶ πάν των μαλιστα ΓΑντανδρον, 
Thue. 4,52; cf. W.§ 27,6; [Β. 8150, 6; Green p. 109]; 
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 538). δ. with the article [cf. reff. 
in Ὁ. above], τὰ πάντα; aa. in an absolute sense, all 
things collectively, the totality of created things, the uni- 
verse of things: Ro. xi. 36; 1 Co. viii.6; Eph. iii.9; iv. 
10; Phil. iii. 21; Col. i. 16 sq.; Heb. i. 3; ii-10; Rev. iv. 
11; τὰ πάντα ev πᾶσι πληροῦσθαι, to fill the universe of 
things in all places, Eph. i. 23 [Rec. om. ra; but al. take 
ev 7. here modally (see @. below), al. instrumen- 
tally (see Meyer ad loc.)]. BB. in a relative sense: 
Mk. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. ra] (the whole substance of saving 
teaching); Acts xvii. 25 [not Rec.*] (all the necessities 
of life) ; Ro. viii. 32 (all the things that he can give for 
our benefit) ; all intelligent beings [al. include things ma- 
terial also}, Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 20; it serves by its univer- 
sality to designate every class of men, all mankind, [ef. W. 
§ 27,5; B.§ 128, 1], Gal. iii. 22 (ef. Ro. xi. 32); 1 Tim. 
vi. 13; εἶναι τὰ [T WH om. τὰ] πάντα, to avail for, be a 
substitute for, to possess supreme authority, καὶ ἐν πᾶσιν 
(i. 6. either with all men or in the minds of all [al. take 
πᾶσιν as neut., ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loe.]), Col. iii. 11; ἵνα 
7 ὁ θεὸς τὰ [LL Tr WH om. τὰ] πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν [neut. ace. 
to Grimm (as below) ], i. e. that God may rule supreme by 
his spiritual power working within all, ‘may be the im- 
manent and controlling principle of life,’ 1 Co. xv. 28, 
(so in prof. auth. πάντα or ἅπαντα without the article: 
πάντα ἦν ἐν τοῖσι Βαβυλωνίοισι Ζώπυρος, Hdt. 3, 157; ef. 
Herm. ad Vig. p. 727 ; other exx. fr. prof. auth. are given 
in Kypke, Observy. ii. p. 230 sq.; Palairet, Observy. p. 
407; cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 
1873, p. 394 sqq-); acens. [adverbially, cf. 8. above] ra 


493 


πάσχα 


πάντα, in all the parts [in which we grow (Meyer)], in δὴ 
respects, Eph. iv. 15. The Article in τὰ πάντα refers — 
in 1 Co. xi. 12 to the things before mentioned (husband 
and wife, and their mutual dependence) ; in 2 Co. iv. 15 
to ‘all the things that befall me’; in 1 Co. xv. 27sq.; 
Phil. iii. 8, to the preceding πάντα; in Col. iii. 8 τὰ πάντα 
serves to sum up what follows [W. 107 (102)]. ε- 
πάντα τά foll. by ἃ ptep. (see πᾶς, πάντες, II. 1 above) : 
Mt. xviii. 31; Lk. xii. 44; xvii. 10; xviii. 31; xxi. 22; 
xxiv. 44; Jn. xviii. 4; Acts x. 33; xxiv. 14; Gal. iii. 10; 
τὰ πάντα w. ptep., Lk. ix. 7; Eph. v. 13; πάντα ra se. ὄντα 
(see πᾶς, [πᾶν], πάντες, II. 1 and 2 above), Mt. xxiii. 20; 
Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 24; πάντα τὰ ὧδε, sc. ὄντα, Col. 
iv. 9; τὰ κατ᾽ ἐμέ, ibid. 7 [see xara, II. 3 b.]. {. πάντα 
and τὰ πάντα with pronouns: τὰ ἐμὰ πάντα, Jn. xvii. 10; 
πάντα τὰ ἐμά, Lk. xv. 31; ταῦτα πάντα, these things all taken 
together [W.548 (510); Fritzsche on Mt. xxiv. 33,34; cf. 
Bornemann on Lk. xxi. 36; Lobeck, Paralip. p. 65]: Mt. 
iv. 9; vi.33; xiii. 34,51; Lk. xii. 30; xvi. 14; xxi. 36 [. τ. 
Lurg.]; xxiv. 9 [Tdf. π. r.]; Acts vii. 50; Ro. viii. 37; 
2 Pet. iii. 11; πάντα ταῦτα, all these things [reff. as above]: 
Mt. vi. 32; xxiv. 8,33 [T Tr txt. r.7.], 34 [Trmrg. τ. π.7; 
Lk. vii. 18; Acts xxiv. 8; 1 Co. xii. 11; Col. iii. 14; 1 Th. 
iv.6; the reading varies also between π. τ. and τ. 7. in Mt. 
xix. 20; xxiii. 36; xxiv. 2; πάντα τὰ συμβεβηκότα ταῦτα, 
Lk. xxiv. 14; πάντα a, Jn.iv. [29 T WH Trimrg. (see next 
head) ]; iv. 45 [here L Tr WH ὅσα (see next head)]; v. 
20; Acts x. 39; xiii. 39. η- πάντα Goa: Mt. vii. 12; 
xili. 46; xviii. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44; Jn. iv. 29 [see ¢. 
above],45 LTrWH; x.41; xvi.15; xvii. 7; Acts iii. 22; 
π- ὅσα ἄν (or ἐάν), Mt. xxi. 22; xxiii. 3; Mk. xi. 24[GL 
T Tr WHom. ἄν]; Acts iii. 22. 8. πάντα with prepo- 
sitions forms adverbial phrases: πρὸ πάντων, before or 
above all things [see πρό, 6.1, Jas. v.12; 1 Pet.iv.8. (But 
περὶ πάντων, 3 Jn. 2, must not be referred to this head, 
as though it signified above all things; it is rather as 
respects all things, and depends on εὔχομαι [apparently a 
mistake for εὐοδοῦσθαι; yet see περί, I. ο. a.], cf. Liicke 
ad loc., 2d ed. p. 370 [8d ed. p. 462 sq.; Westcott ad 
loc.]; W. 373 (350)). [on διὰ πάντων. Acts ix. 32, see 
1 above.] ἐν πᾶσιν, in all things, in all ways, altogether : 
1 Tim. iii. 11; iv. 15 [Rec.]; 2 Tim. 11. 7; iv. 5; Tit. ii. 
9; Heb. xiii. 4,18; 1 Pet. iv. 11, [see also 2 a. fin. above]; 
ἐπὶ πᾶσιν, see ἐπί, B. 2 ἃ. p. 233°. κατὰ πάντα, in all re- 
spects: Acts xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20,22; Heb. ii. 17; iv. 15. 

III. with negatives; 1. οὐ πᾶς, not every 
one. 2. πᾶς οὐ (where ov belongs to the verb), no 
one, none, see ov, 2 p. 460°; πᾶς μή (so that μή must be 
joined to the verb), no one, none, in final sentences, Jn. 
iii. 15 sq.; vi. 39; xii. 46; 1Co.i. 29; w.animpv. Eph. 
iv. 29 (1 Mace. v. 42); πᾶς . . - ov μή w. the aor. subjune. 
(see pn, IV. 2), Rev. xviii. 22. 

πάσχα, τό, (Chald. 8nD3, Heb. n03, fr. ND3 to pass 
over, to pass over by sparing; the Sept. also constant- 
ly use the Chald. form πάσχα, except in 2 Chron. [and 
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 8] where it is φασέκ ; Josephus has 
φάσκα, antt. 5,1,4; 14, 2,1; 17,9, 3; b.j. 2, 1,3), aninde- 
clinable noun [W. § 10, 2]; prop. a passing over ; 1. 


πάσχω 


the paschal sacrifice (which was accustomed to be offered 
for the people’s deliverance of old from Egypt), or 2. 
the paschal lamb, i.e. the lamb which the Israelites were 
accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the 
month Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory 
of that day on which their fathers, preparing to depart 
from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb, 
and to sprinkle their door-posts with its blood, that the 
destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their 
dwellings (Ex. xii. sq.; Num.ix.; Deut. xvi.) : θύειν τὸ 7. 
(n230 ὅπ), Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7, (Ex. xii. 21); 
Christ crucified is likened to the slain paschal lamb, 1 Co. 
v.73; φαγεῖν τὸ π., Mt. xxvi. 17; Mk. xiv. 12, 14; Lk. 
xxii. 11, 15; Jn. xviii. 28; ΠΟΞΙῚ ODN, 2 Chr. xxx. 17 
86. 3. the paschal supper: ἑτοιμάζειν τὸ π., Mt. 
xxvi. 19; Mk. xiv. 16; Lk. xxii. 8,13; ποιεῖν τὸ π. to cel- 
ebrate the paschal meal, Mt. xxvi. 18. 4. the pas- 
chal festival, the feast of Passover, extending from the 
fourteenth to the twentieth day of the month Nisan: Mt. 
xxvi. 2; Mk. xiv. 1; Lk. ii. 41; xxii. 1; Jn. ii. 13, 23; 
vi. 4; xi.55; xii. 1: ΧΙ, 1; xviii. 39; xix.14; Acts xii. 
4; πεποίηκε τὸ π. he instituted the Passover (of Moses), Heb. 
xi. 28 [ef. W. 272 (256); B. 197 (170)]; γίνεται τὸ mr. 
the Passover is celebrated [R. V. cometh], Mt. xxvi. 2. 
[See BB.DD. s. v. Passover; Dillmann in Schenkel iv. 
Ρ. 392sqq.; andon the question of the relation of the 
“Last Supper” to the Jewish Passover, see (in addition 
to reff. in BB.DD. u.s.) Kirchner, die Jiidische Passah- 
feier u. Jesu letztes Mahl. Gotha, 1870; Keil, Com. iiber 
Matth. pp. 513-528; J. B. McClellan, The N. T. ete. i. 
pp. 473-494 ; but esp. Schiirer, Ueber φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα, 
akademische Festschrift (Giessen, 1883). ]* 

πάσχω; 2 aor. ἔπαθον : pf. πέπονθα (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb. 
ii. 18); fr. Hom. down; to be affected or have been af- 
fected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo; it 
is a vox media— used in either a good or a bad sense; 
as, ὅσα πεπόνθασι καὶ ὅσα αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, of perils and de- 
liverance from them, Esth. ix. 26 (for AN); hence 
κακῶς πάσχειν, to suffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick 
person, Mt. xvii. 15 where L Tr txt. WH txt. x. ἔχειν (on 
the other hand, εὖ πάσχειν, to be well off, in good case, 
often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 1. in a bad 
sense, of misfortunes, to suffer, to undergo evils, to be 
afflicted, (so everywhere in Hom. and Hes.; also in the 
other Grk. writ. where it is used absol.): absol., Lk. 
xxii. 15; xxiv. 46; Acts i. 8; iii. 18; xvii. 3; 1 Co. xii. 
26; Heb. ii. 18; ix. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 23; iii. 17; iv. 
15,19; Heb. xiii. 12; ὀλίγον, a little while, 1 Pet. v. 10; 
πάσχειν τι, Mt. xxvii. 19; Mk. ix. 12; Lk. xiii. 2; [xxiv. 
26]; Acts xxviii. 5; 2 Tim.i.12; [Heb. v. 8 cf. W. 166 
(156) a.; B. §143, 10]; Rev. ii. 10; παθήματα πάσχειν, 
2 Co. i. 6; ri ἀπό w. gen. of pers., Mt. xvi. 21; Lk. ix. 22; 
xvii. 253 macy. ὑπό w. gen. of pers. Mt. xvii. 12; τὶ 
ὑπό twos, Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14; πάσχ. ὑπέρ τινος, in 
behalf of a pers. or thing, Actsix. 16; Phil.i. 29; 2 Th. 
i. 5; with the addition of a dat. of reference or respect 
[ef. W. § 31, 6], σαρκί, 1 Pet. iv. 1": ἐν σαρκί, ibid.” [yet 
GLTTr WH om. ἐν; ef. W. 412 (384)]; macy. περί w- 


494 


πατὴρ 


gen. of the thing and ὑπέρ w. gen. of pers. 1 Pet. iii. 18 
[RG WHurg.; οἵ. W.373 (349) ; 383 (358) note] ; macy. 
διὰ δικαιοσύνην, 1 Pet. iii. 14. 2. in a good sense, of 
pleasant experiences; but nowhere so unless either the 
ady. ed or an ace. of the thing be added (ὑπομνῆσαι, ὅσα 
παθόντες ἐξ αὐτοῦ (i. 6. θεοῦ) καὶ πηλίκων εὐεργεσιῶν μετα- 
λαβόντες ἀχάριστοι πρὸς αὐτὸν γένοιντο, Joseph. antt. 3, 15, 
1; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow 8. v. II. 5; 
[L. and S.s.v. If. 2]): Gal. iii. 4, on which see γέ, 3 ὁ. 
(Comp. : mpo-, συμ-πάσχω.} " 

Πάταρα, -apwv, ra, [cf. W.176 (166) ], Patara, a mars 
time city of Lycia, celebrated for an oracle of Apollo: 
Acts xxi. 1. [Β. D.s. v. Patara; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 99 sq.]* 

πατάσσω: fut. πατάξω; 1 aor. ἐπάταξα; Sept. times 
without number for 737 (Hiphil of 433, unused in Kal), 
also for ἢ), ete.; (in Hom. intrans. to beat, of the heart; 
fr. Arstph., Soph., Plat., al. on used transitively) ; ale 
to strike gently: τί (as a part or a member of the body), 
Acts xii. 7. 2. to strike, smite: absol., ἐν μαχαίρᾳ, 
with the sword, Lk. xxii. 49; τινά, Mt. xxvi. 51; Lk. xxii. 
50. by a use solely biblical, to afflict; to visit with evils, 
ete.: as with a deadly disease, τινά, Acts xii. 28 ; τινὰ ἐν 
w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xi. 6 GL Τ ΤΥ ΝΗ; xix. 15, 
(Gen. viii. 21; Num. xiv. 12; Ex. xii. 23, ete.). 3. 
by a use solely biblical, to smite down, cut down, to kill, 
slay: τινά, Mt. xxvi. 31 and Mk. xiv. 27, (after Zech. xiii. 
7); Acts vii. 24.* 

πατέω, -@; fut. πατήσω ; Pass., pres. ptep. marovpevos; 
1 aor. éxarnOnv; fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Plat. down; 
Sept. for 14, ete. ; to tread, i. e. a. to trample, crush 
with the feet: τὴν ληνόν, Rev. xiv. 20; xix. 15, (Judg. ix. 
27; Neh. xiii.15; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 33; Lam.i.15).  b. 
to advance by setting foot upon, tread upon: ἐπάνω ὄφεων 
καὶ σκορπίων καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ ἐχθροῦ, to en- 
counter successfully the greatest perils from the machina- 
tions and persecutions with which Satan would fain thwart 
the preaching of the gospel, Lk. x. 19 (cf. Ps. xe. (xci.) 
13). ce. to tread under foot, trample on, i. 6. treat with 
insult and contempt: to desecrate the holy city by devas- 
tation and outrage, Lk. xxi. 24; Rev. xi. 2, (fr. Dan. 
viii. 13); see καταπατέω. [COMP.: κατα-, περι-, ἐμ-περι- 
maréw. |* 

πατήρ [fr. τ. pa; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder ; 
(Curtius § 348)], πατρός, -rpl, -τέρα, voc. πάτερ [for which 
the nom. 6 πατήρ is five times used, and (anarthrous) 
πατήρ in Jn. xvii. 21 T Tr WH, 24 and 25 LT Tr WH; 
ef. B. § 129,5; W.§ 29,2; WH. App. p. 158], plur. 
πατέρες, πατέρων, πατράσι (Heb. i.1), πατέρας, 6,[fr. Hom. 
down], Sept. for 38, a father; 1. prop., i. q. gener- 
ator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest 
ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21 sq.; viii. 21; Lk.i.17; Jn. 
iv.53; Acts vii. 143 1 Co. v. 1, etc.; of πατέρες τῆς σαρκός, 
fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. to 
ὁ πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων), Heb. xii. 9; plur. of both par- 
ents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof. auth., ef. Delitzsch 
ad loc.); or Ὄ. a more remote ancestor, the founder 
of α race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather: 80 


Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. i. 73; xvi. 24; Jn. viii. 


πατὴρ 


39, 55; Acts τ. 2; Βο. iv. 1 Rec., 17 sq.,ete.; Isaac, Ro. 
ix. 10; Jacob, Jn. iv. 12; David, Mk. xi. 10; Lk. i. 32; 
plur. fathers i.e. ancestors, forefathers, Mt. xxiii. 30, 32; 
Lk. vi. 23, 26; xi. 47 sq.; Jn. iv. 20; vi. 31; Acts iii. 13, 
25; 1 Co. x. 1, etc., and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down; so too Nya8, 1 K. viii. 21; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 5 ete.; in 
the stricter sense of the founders of a race, Jn. vii. 22; 
Ro. ix. 5; xi. 28. c. i. q. one advanced in years, a 
senior: 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. 2. metaph.; 8. _the origi- 
nator and transmitter of anything: πατὴρ περιτομῆς, Ro. 
iv. 12; the author of a family or society of persons ani- 
mated by the same spirit as himself: so 7. πάντων τῶν 
πιστευόντων, Ro. iv. 11, ef. 12, 16, (1 Mace. ii. 54); one 
who has infused his own spirit into others, who actuates 
and governs their minds, Jn. viii. 38,41 sq. 44; the phrase 
ἐκ πατρός τινος εἶναι is used of one who shows himself as 
like another in spirit and purpose as though he had in- 
herited his nature from him, ibid. 44. b. one who 
stands in a father’s place, and looks after another in a 
paternal way: 1 Co. iv. 15. c. a title of honor [cf. 
Sophocles, Lex. 5. v.], applied to a. teachers, as those 
to whom pupils trace back the knowledge and training 
they have received: Mt. xxiii. 9 (of prophets, 2 K. 
τ: 1.0 ay 21): B. the members of the Sanhedrin, 
whose prerogative it was, by virtue of the wisdom and 
experience in which they excelled, to take charge of the 
interests of others: Acts vii. 2; xxii. 1; ef. Gesenius, 
Thesaur. i. p. 7*. 3. God is called the Father, a. 
τῶν φώτων, [A. V. of lights i. 6.1 of the stars, the heaven- 
ly luminaries, because he is their creator, upholder, ruler, 
Jas. i. 17. b. of all rational and intelligent beings, 
whether angels or men, because he is their creator, pre- 
server, guardian and protector: Eph. iii. 14 sq. GL T 
Tr WH; τῶν πνευμάτων, of spiritual beings, Heb. xii. 9; 
and, for the same reason, of all men (πατὴρ τοῦ παντὸς 
ἀνθρώπων γένους, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 24): so in the Syn- 
optic Gospels, esp. Matthew, Mt. vi. 4, 8, 15; xxiv. 36; 
Lk. vi. 86; xi. 2; xii. 30,32; Jn. iv. 21, 23; Jas. iii. 9; 
ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐν (τοῖς) οὐρανοῖς, the Father in heaven, Mt. v. 
16, 45, 48, vi.1,9; vii. 11,21; xviii. 14; Mk. xi. 25, 26 
RGL; Lk. xi. 13 [ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ; οἴ. B. § 151, 2a.; W. § 66, 
6]; ὁ mar. 6 οὐράνιος, the heavenly Father, Mt. vi. 14, 26, 
32; xv. 13. ο. of Christians, as those who through 
Christ have been exalted to a specially close and inti- 
mate relationship with God, and who no longer dread 
him as the stern judge of sinners, but revere him as their 
reconciled and loving Father. This conception, com- 
mon in the N. T. Epistles, shines forth with especial 
brightness in Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6; in John’s use of the 
term it seems to include the additional idea of one who 
by the power of his Spirit, operative in the gospel, has be- 
gotten them anew to a life of holiness (see γεννάω, 2 d.): 
absol., 2 Co. vi. 18; Eph. ii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 1,14 (13), 16; 
iii. 1; θεὸς x. πατὴρ πάντων, of all Christians, Eph. iv. 6; 
with the addition of a gen. of quality [W. § 34, 3b.; B. 
§ 132, 10], 6 mar. τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν, 2 Co. i. 3; τῆς δόξης, Eph. 
ἡ 17; on the phrases ὁ θεὸς x. πατὴρ ἡμῶν, θεὸς πατήρ, 
etc., see θεός, 3 p. 288", d. the Father of Jesus Christ, 


49 


5 TATpia 


as one whom God has united to himself in the closest 
bond of love and intimacy, made acquainted with his 
purposes, appointed to explain and carry out among men 
the plan of salvation, and (as appears from the teaching 
of John) made to share also in his own divine nature ; 
he is so called, a. by Jesus himself: simply ὁ πατήρ 
(opp. to ὁ vids), Mt. xi. 25-27; Lk. x. 21sq.; Jn. v. 20- 
23, 26, 36 sq.; x. 15, 30, ete.; 6 πατήρ pov, Mt. xi. 27; 
xxv. 34; xxvi. 53; Lk. x. 22; Jn.v.17; viii. 19,49; x. 
18, 32, and often in John’s Gospel; Rev. ii. 28 (27); iii. 
5, 21; with ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς added, Mt. vii. 11, 21; x. 
32sq.; xii. 50; xvi.17; xviii. 10,19; ὁ οὐράνιος, Mt. xv. 
18; ὁ ἐπουράνιος, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. β. by the apostles: 
Ro. xv. 6; 2Co.i.3; xi. 31; Eph. i. 3; iii. 14 Rec.; Col. 
i. 3; Heb. i.5; 1 Pet. 1. 8; Rev. i. 6. See [Tholuck 
(Bergrede Christi) on Mt. vi. 9; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. 
N. T., Index s. v. Vater; C. Wittichen, Die Idee Gottes 
als d. Vaters, (G6ttingen, 1865); Westcott, Epp. of St. 
John, pp. 27-34, and] below in vids and τέκνον. 

Πάτμος, -ov, ἡ, Patmos, asmall and rocky island in the 
7Egean Sea, reckoned as one of the Sporades (Thue. 3, 
33; Strab. 10 p.488; Plin. h.n. 4, 23); now called Patmo 
or [chiefly “in the middle ages” (Howson) ] Palmosa and 
having from four to five thousand Christian inhabitants 
(ef. Schubert, Reise in das Morgenland, Th. iii. pp. 425— 
443; Bleek, Vorless. ib. die A pokalypse, p. 157; Kneucker 
in Schenkel iv. p. 403 sq. ; [BB. DD.s.v.]). In it John, 
the author of the Apocalypse, says the revelations were 
made to him of the approaching consummation of God’s 
kingdom: Rey. i. 9. It has been held by the church, 
ever since the time of [Just. Mart. (dial. e. Tryph. § 81 
p- 308 a. ef. Euseb. h. e. 4, 18, 8; see Charteris, Canon- 
icity, ch. xxxiv. and note) and] Iren. adv. haer. 5, 30, that 
this John is the Apostle; see Ἰωάννης, 2 and 6.* 

πατραλῴας (Attic πατραλοίας, Arstph., Plat., Dem. p. 
732, 14; Aristot., Leian.), LT Tr WH πατρολῴας (see 
μητραλῴας). -ov, 6, α parricide: 1 Tim. i. 9." 

πατριά, -as, ἡ, (fr. πατήρ) ; 1. lineage running back 
to some progenitor, ancestry: Hat. 2,143; 3, 75. 2. 
a race or tribe, i.e. a group of families, all those who in a 
given people lay claim to a common origin: εἰσὶ αὐτέων 
(Βαβυλωνίων) πατριαὶ τρεῖς, Hdt. 1, 200. The Israelites 
were distributed into (twelve) nivn, φυλαί, tribes, de- 
scended from the twelve sons of Jacob; these were 
divided into ninawn, πατριαί, deriving their descent 
from the several sons of Jacob’s sons; and these in turn 
were divided into NjINT M3, οἶκοι, houses (or families) ; 
cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 193; iii. p. 1463; Win. RWB. 
s. v. Stiimme; [Kei/, Archaeol. § 140]; hence ἐξ οἴκου 
καὶ πατριᾶς Δαυΐδ, i. 6. belonging not only to the same 
‘house’ (πατριά) as David, but to the very ‘family ’ of 
David, descended from David himself, Lk. ii. 4 (αὗται ai 
πατριαὶ τῶν υἱῶν Συμεών, Ex. vi. 15 ; 6 ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς Μανασσῆς 
τῆς φυλῆς αὐτῆς καὶ τῆς πατριᾶς αὐτῆς, Judith viii. 2; τῶν 
φυλῶν κατὰ πατριὰς αὐτῶν, Num. i. 16; οἶκοι πατριῶν, Ex. 
xii. 3; Num. i. 2, and often; add, Joseph. antt. 6, 4, 1; 
1 ΤΡ Ύ 8Σ 1G): 3. family in a wider sense, 
i. q. nation, people: Acts iii. 25 (1 Chr. xvi. 28: Ps. xxi 


πτατρεάρχης 


(xxii.) 28) ; πᾶσα πατριὰ ἐν οὐρανοῖς (i. e. every order of 
angels) καὶ ἐτὶ γῆς, Eph. iii. 15.* 

πατριάρχης, -ov, 6, (πατριά and ἄρχω : see ἑκατοντάρχης), 
a Hellenistic word [W. 26], a patriarch, founder of a 
tribe, progenitor: used of David, Acts ii. 29; of the 
twelve sons of Jacob, founders of the several tribes of 
Israel, Acts vii. 8sq.; of Abraham, Heb. vii. 4; of the 
same and Isaac and Jacob, 4 Mace. vii. 19; xvi. 25; 
used for nian ws, 1 Chr. xxiv. 31 [but the text here 
is uncertain]; for Ὁ: WW, 1 Chr. xxvii. 22; for 
myNoT Ww, 2 Chr. xxiii. 20." 

πατρικός, -1), -όν, (πατήρ), paternal, ancestral, i.q. handed 
down by or received from one’s fathers: Gal. i. 14. 
(Thue., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept.) [SyN. see πατρῷος, 
fin. ]* 

πατρίς, -idos, ἡ, (πατήρ), one’s native country; a. 
as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, one’s father-land, one’s 
(own) country: Jn. iv. 44 [οἵ. yap, IL. 1]; i. q. a fixed 
abode (home [R. V. a country of their own], opp. to the 
land where one παρεπιδημεῖ), Heb. xi. 14. b. one’s 
native (own) place i.e. city: Mt. xiii. 54,57; Mk. vi. 1, 
4; Lk. iv. 23, [24]; so Philo, leg. ad energy § 36 (ἔστι δέ 
μοι Ἱεροσόλυμα πατρίς): ; Joseph, antt. 10, 7, 8; 6,4,6; ᾧ 
πατρὶς ἡ ᾿Ακυληΐα ἦν, Hdian. 8, 3, 2 (1 ed. “Bek. yas 

TlarpéBas [al. -βᾶς, as contr. fr. πατρόβιος; cf. B.D. 
s.v.; Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. p. 176 sq.; Chandler ὃ 32], 
ace. -av [ef. B. 19 (17) sq.; W. § 8, 1], Patrobas, a cer- 
tain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.* 

πατρολῴας, See πατραλῴας. 

πατρο-παράδοτος, -ον, (πατήρ and παραδίδωμι), handed 
down from one’s fathers or ancestors: 1 Pet.i. 18 [Β. 91 
(79)]. (Diod. 4, 8; 15, 74; 17,4; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 
48; Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 34; Euseb. ἢ. 6. 4, 23, 10; 
10, 4, 16.)* 

πατρῷος (poetic and Ionic πατρώϊος), -a, -ov, (πατήρ), 
fr. Hom. down, descending from father to son or from 
ancestors to their posterity as it were by right of inherit- 
ance; received from the fathers: νόμος, Acts xxii. 3 (2 
Mace. vi. 1; Ael. v.h. 6,10); θεός, Acts xxiv. 14 (4 Mace. 
xii. 19; and often in Grk. writ. θεοὶ πατρ., Zeds warp. 
ete.); τὰ ἔθη τὰ π. Acts xxviii. 17 (Justin dial. c. Tr. 
ὁ. 68; marp. ἔθος, Ael. v.h. 7,19 var.).* 

[ϑυν. πατρῷος, πατρικός: on the distinction of the 
grammarians (see Photius, Suidas, Ammonius, etc. s. vv.) 
ace. to which πατρῷος is used of property descending from 
father to son, πατρικός of persons in friendship or feud, 
etc., see Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. p. 530 sq.; L. and 5. 8. Υ. 
πατρῷος ; Schmidt ch. 154.] 

ΠΠαῦλος, -ov, 6, (a Lat. prop. name, Paulus), Paul. 
Two persons of this name are mentioned in the N. T., 
viz. 1. Sergius Paulus, a Roman propraetor [pro- 
consul; cf. Σέργιος, and B. D.s. v. Sergius Paulus], con- 
verted to Christ by the agency of the apostle Paul: 
Acts xiii. 7. 2. the apostle Paul, whose Hebrew 
name was Saul (see Σαούλ, Σαῦλος). He was born at 
Tarsus in Cilicia (Acts ix. 11; xxi. 39; xxii. 3) of Jew- 
ish parents (Phil. iii. 5). His father was a Pharisee 
(Acts xxiii. 6) and a Roman citizen; hence he himself 


496 


, 
Tav@ 


was a Roman citizen by birth (Acts xxii. 28; xvi. 37) 
He was endowed with remarkable gifts, both moral and 
intellectual. 116 learned the trade of a σκηνοποιός (q. v-). 
Brought to Jerusalem in early youth, he was thoroughly 
indoctrinated in the Jewish theology by the Pharisee 
Gamaliel (Acts xxii. 3; v. 34). At first he attacked 
and persecuted the Christians most fiercely; at length, 
on his way to Damascus, he was suddenly converted to 
Christ by a miracle, and became an indefatigable and 
undaunted preacher of Christ and the founder of many 
Christian churches. And not only by his unwearied la- 
bors did he establish a claim to the undying esteem of 
the friends of Christianity, but also by the fact, which 
appears from his immortal Epistles, that he caught per- 
fectly the mind of his heavenly Master and taught most 
unequivocally that salvation was designed by God for all 
men who repose a living faith in Jesus Christ, and 
that bondage to the Mosaic law is wholly incompatible 
with the spiritual liberty of which Christ is the author. 
By his zeal and doctrine he drew upon himself the 
deadly hatred of the Jews, who at Jerusalem in the year 
57 [or 58 ace. to the more common opinion ; yet see the 
chronological table in Meyer (or Lange) on Acts; Farrar, 
St. Paul, ii. excurs. x.] brought about his imprisonment; 
and as a captive he was carried first to Cesarea in Pal- 
estine, and two years later to Rome, where he suffered 
martyrdom (in the year 64). For the number of thos? 
daily grows smaller who venture to defend the ecclesi 
astical tradition for which Eusebius is responsible (h. e. 
2, 22, 2) [but of which traces seem to be found in Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 7; can. Murator. (cf. Westcott, Canon, 
5th ed. p. 521 sq.)], according to which Paul, released 
from this imprisonment, is said to have preached in 
Spain and Asia Minor; and subsequently, imprisoned a 
second time, to have been at length put to death at Rome 
in the year 67 or 68, while Nero was still emperor. [On 
this point ef. Meyer on Ro., Introd. §1; Harnack on 
Clem. Rom. |. e.; Lghtft. ibid. p.49sq.; Holizmann, Die 
Pastoralbriefe, Ein]. ch. iv. p. 37 sqq.; reff. in Heini- 
chen’s note on Euseb. h. e. as above; v. Hofmann, Die 
heilige Schrift Neuen Testaments. 5ter Theil p. 4 sqq.; 
Farrar, St. Paul, vol. ii. excurs. viii.; Schaff, Hist. of 
Apostolic Christ. (1882) p. 331sq.] Paul is mentioned 
in the N. T. not only in the Acts and in the Epp. from his 
pen, but also in 2 Pet. iii. 15. [For bibliog. reff. respect- 
ing his life and its debatable points see the art. Paulus by 
Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 vol. xi. pp. 356- 
389.] 

παύω: 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. παυσάτω (1 Pet. iii. 
10); Mid., pres. παύομαι; impf. ἐπαυόμην; fut. παύσομαι 
(see dvaravw and éravarav [and on the forms παῆναι ete. 
ef. further Hilgenfeld, Hermae Pastor, ed. alt. proleg. p. 
xviii. note, also his ed. of the ‘Teaching’ 4, 2 note (p. 97)]); 
pf. πέπαυμαι; 1 aor. ἐπαυσάμην ; fr. Hom. down; to make 
to cease or desist: τὶ or τινὰ ἀπό τινος, to restrain [A. V. 
refrain] a thing or a person from something, 1 Pet. iii. 10, 
fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; cf. W. § 30, 6; [(cf. 326 
(305)); B. § 132, 5]. Mid. Sept. for 51m, nba, naw, 


Πάφος 


ste. to cease, leave off, [cf. W. 258 (238)]: Lk. viii. 24; 
Acts xx. 1; 1 Co. xiii. 8; the action or state desisted 
from is indicated by the addition of a pres. ptep. (cf. 
Matthiae § 551 d.; Passows. v. Il. 3; [L. and S. I. 4]; 
W. § 45,4; [B.§ 144, 15]): ἐπαύσατο λαλῶν, Lk. v. 4 (Gen. 
xviii. 33; Num. xvi. 31; Deut. xx.9); add, Acts v. 42; 
vi. 13; xiii. 10; xx. 31; xxi. 32; Eph. i. 16; Col. i. 9; 
Heb. x. 2; the ptcp. is wanting, as being evident fr. the 
context, Lk. xi.1. Pass. [ef. W. § 39, 3 and N. 3] πέπαυ- 
ται ἁμαρτίας, hath got release [A. V. hath ceased] from sin, 
i. e. is no longer stirred by its incitements and seduc- 
tions, 1 Pet. iv. 1; ef. Kypke, Observy. ad loc., and W. 
u.s.; [B. 8 132,5; but WH txt. ἁμαρτίαις, dat., unto sins. 
Comp. : ἀνα-, ἐπ-ανα-, συν-ανα- (-μαι), κατα- rave |.” 

Πάφος [perh. fr. r. meaning ‘to cozen’; cf. Pape, Ei- 
gennamen, 8. v.], του, ἡ, Paphos [now Baffa], a maritime 
city on the island of Cyprus, witha harbor. It was the 
residence of the Roman proconsul. “Old Paphos” [now 
Kuklia], formerly noted for the worship and shrine of 
Venus [Aphrodite], lay some 7 miles or more S. E. of it 
(Mela 2, 7; Plin. h. n. 5, 31.35; Tac. hist. 2, 2): Acts 
xiii. 6,13. [Lewin, St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.]* 

παχύνω: 1 aor. pass. ἐπαχύνθην;; (fr. παχύς [thick, 
stout]; cf. βραδύνω ; ταχύνω) ; ἰο make thick; to make fat, 
fatten: τὰ σώματα, Plat. Gorg. p. 518 ¢.; βοῦν, de rep. p. 
343 b.; ἵππον, Xen. oec. 12, 20. Metaph. to make stupid 
(to render the soul dull or callous): ras ψυχάς, Plut. mor. p. 
995 ἃ. [i. 6. de esu carn. 1, 6,3]; νοῦν, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 
1,8; παχεῖς τὰς διανοίας, Hdian. 2, 9, 15 [11 ed. Bekk.]; 
τὴν διάνοιαν, Ael.v. h. 13, 15 (Lat. pingue ingenium) [ef. 
W. 18]; ἐπαχύνθη ἡ καρδία (Vulg. incrassatum est cor 
[A. V. their heart is waxed gross]): Mt. xiii. 15; Acts 
Xxviii. 27, after Is. vi. 10 (for 39 jw). * 

πέδη, -ης, ἡ, (fr. πέζα the foot, instep), a fetter, shackle 
for the feet: Mk. v.4; Lk. viii.29. (From Hom. down; 
Sept.) * 

πεδινός, -7, -dv, (πεδίον [a plain], πέδον [the ground]), 
level, plain: Lk. vi. 11. (Xen., Polyb., Plut., Dio Cass., 
al.; Sept.) * 

πεϊζεύω ; (πεζύς, q. v-); to travel on foot (not on horse- 
back or in a carriage), or (if opp. to going by sea) by 
land: Acts xx. 13. (Xen., Isoer., Polyb., Strab., al.) * 

πεζῇ (dat. fem. fr. πεζός, 4. v-; cf. Matthiae § 400), on 
foot or (if opp. to going by sea) by land: Mt. xiv. 13 
RG Tr Ltxt. WH txt.; Mk. vi. 33. (Hdt., Thue., Xen., 
Dem., al.) * 

melds, -ἡ -dv, [πέζα; see πέδη], fr. Hom. down; 1. 
on foot (as opp. to riding). 2. by land (as opp. to 
going by sea): ἠκολούθησαν πεζοί, Mt. xiv. 13 T Lmrg. 
WH mrg. (so cod. Sin. also) for R G πεζῇ, [ef. W. § 54, 
2; Β. 8 123, 9]. (Sept. for 929 and 5393.)* 

πειθαρχέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ptep. πειθαρχήσας ; (πείθαρχος; 
and this fr. πείθομαι and ἀρχή) ; to obey (a ruler or a 
superior): θεῷ, Acts v. 29, 32; magistrates, Tit. iii. 1 
[al. take it here absol. to be obedient]; τῷ λόγῳ τῆς 
δικαιοσύνης, Polye. ad Philipp. 9,1; [A. V- to hearken to] 
one advising something, Acts xxvii. 21. (Soph., Xen., 
Polyb., Diod.. Joseph., Plut., al.; on the very freq. use 


497 


πείθω 


of the verb by Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. 8. 
w. p. 43 [esp. p. 108].)* 

πειθός [WH més; see I, ε7, τή; -dv, (fr. πείθω, like 
φειδός fr. φείδομαι [cf.W. 96 (91) ]), persuasive : ἐν πειθοῖς 
λόγοις, 1 Co. ii. 4 [ef. B. 73]. Not found elsewhere [W. 
24). The Grks. say πιθανός ; as πιθανοὶ λόγοι, Joseph. 
antt. 8, 9, and often in Grk. auth. See Passow s. v. 
πιθανός, 1e.; [L. and S. ibid. I. 2; WH. App. p. 1531." 

Πειθώ, -ovs, 7), 1. Peitho, prop. name of a goddess, 
lit. Persuasion; Lat. Suada or Suadela. 2. per- 
suasive power, persuasion: 1 Co. ii. 4 ἐν πειθοῖ -τ-- ἀοο. to 
certain inferior authorities. [On the word, see Miiller’s 
note on Joseph. 6. Ap. 2, 21, 3. (Hes., Hdt., al.)]* 

πείθω [ (fr. r. meaning ‘to bind’; allied w. πίστις, fides, 
foedus, ete.; Curtius § 327; Vanitek p. 592)]; impf. ἔπει- 
Gov; fut. πείσω; 1 aor. ἔπεισα ; 2 pf. πέποιθα; plupf. ἐπε- 
moibew (Lk. xi. 22); Pass. [or Mid., pres. πείθομαι; impf. 
ἐπειθόμην]; pf. πέπεισμαι; 1 aor. ἐπείσθην ; 1 fut. πεισθή- 
copa (Lk. xvi. 31); fr. Hom. down; 1. Active; 8. 
to persuade, i. e. to induce one by words to believe: 
absol. πείσας μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον, Acts xix. 26; τί, to 
cause belief in a thing (which one sets forth), Acts xix. 
8 RGT [ef. B. 150 (131) n.] (Soph. O. C. 1442); περί 
w. gen. of the thing, ibid. L Tr WH; τινά, one, Acts 
xviii. 4; τινά τι, one of a thing, Acts xxviii. 23 Ree. 
(Hadt. 1, 163; Plat. apol. p. 37a., and elsewhere; [cf. B. 
u.s.]); τινὰ περί twos, concerning a thing, ibid. GLT 
Tr WH. b. as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, w. an 
ace. of a pers., to make friends of, win one’s favor, gain 
one’s good-will, Acts xii. 20; or to seek to win one, strive 
to please one, 2 Co. v.11; Gal. i. 10; to conciliate by per- 
suasion, Mt. xxviii. 14 [here TWH om. Tr br. αὐτόν]; 
Acts xiv. 19; i.q. to tranquillize [A. V. assure], τὰς xap- 
δίας ἡμῶν, 1 Jn. iii. 19. ce. to persuade unto i. 6. move 
or induce one by persuasion to do something : τινά foll. by 
an inf. [B. § 139, 46], Acts xiii. 43; xxvi. 28, (Xen. an. 
1,3, 19; Polyb. 4, 64,2; Diod. 11, 15; 12, 39; Joseph. 
antt. 8, 10, 3); τινά foll. by ἵνα [ef. W. 338 (317); B. 
§ 139, 46], Mt. xxvii. 20 [Plut. apoph. Alex. 21]. 2: 
Passive and Middle [ef. W. 253 (238)]; a. to be 
persuaded, to suffer one’s self to be persuaded; to be in- 
duced to believe: absol., Lk. xvi. 31; Acts xvii. 4; to 
have faith, Heb. xi. 13 Rec.; τινί, in a thing, Acts xxviii. 
24; to believe, sc. ὅτι, Heb. xiii. 18 LT Tr WH. πέπει- 
σμαί τι [on the neut. acc. cf. B. § 131, 10] περί τινος 
(gen. of pers.), to be persuaded (of) a thing concerning a 
person, Heb. vi. 9 [A. V. we are persuaded better things 
of you, ete.]; πεπεισμένος εἰμί, to have persuaded one’s 
self, and πείθομαι, to believe, [cf. Eng. to be persuaded], 
foll. by ace. νυ. inf., Lk. xx. 6; Acts xxvi. 26; πέπεισμαι 
ὅτι, Ro. viii. 38; 2 Tim. i. 5, 12; with ἐν κυρίῳ added (see 
ἐν, I.6 b.), Ro. xiv. 14; περί τινος ὅτι, Ro. xv. 14. b. 
to listen to, obey, yield to, comply with: τινί, one, Acts v. 
36 sq. 39 (40) ; xxiii. 21; xxvii. 11; Ro. ii. 8; Gal. iii. 1 
Rec.; v. 7; Heb. xiii. 17; Jas. iii. 3. 3. 2 pf. πέ- 
ποιθα (Sept. mostly for nwa, also for Dn, 1}}}}} Niphal 
of the unused j}¥), intrans. to trust, have confidence, be 
confident : foll. by acc. w. inf., Ro. ii. 19; by ὅτι, Heb. 


Πειλᾶτος 


xiii. 18 Ree.; by ὅτι with a preparatory αὐτὸ τοῦτο [W. 
§ 23, 5], Phil. i. 6; τοῦτο πεποιθὼς οἶδα ὅτι, ibid. 25; πέ- 
ποιθα w. a dat. of the pers. or the thing in which the confi- 
dence reposes (so in class. Grk. [on its constr. in the N. T. 
see B. § 133, 5; W. 214 (201); § 33, d.]): Phil. 1. 14; 
Philem. 21, (2 K. xviii. 20; Prov. xiv. 16; xxviii. 26; Is. 
xxviii. 17; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 24; Sap. xiv. 29); ἑαυτῷ 
foll. by an inf. 2 Co. x. 7; ἔν τινι, to trust in, put confi- 
dence in a pers. or thing [cf. B. u.s.], Phil. iii. 8, 4; ἐν 
κυρίῳ foll. by ὅτι, Phil. ii. 24; ἐπί τινι, Mt. xxvii. 43 L 
txt. WH mrg.; Mk. x. 24 [where T WH om. Tr mrg. br. 
the cl.]; Lk. xi. 22; xviii. 9; 2 Co. 1. 9; Heb. ii. 13, (and 
very often in Sept., as Deut. xxviii. 52; 2 Chr. xiv. 11; 
Ps. ii. 13; Prov. iii. 5; Is. viii. 17; xxxi. 1); ἐπί τινα, Mt. 
xxvii. 43 where L txt. WH mrg. ἐπί w. dat. (Is. xxxvi. 
5; Hab. ii. 18; 2 Chr. xvi. 7sq., ete.); ἐπί twa foll. by 
ὅτι, 2 Co. ii. 3; 2 Th. iii. 4; εἴς τινα foll. by ὅτι, Gal. v. 
10. [Comp.: ἀνα-πείθω.}" 

Πειλᾶτος, see Πιλάτος [and cf. et, ¢]. 

πεινάω, -@, inf. πεινᾶν (Phil. iv. 12); fut. πεινάσω (Lk. 
vi. 25; Rev. vii. 16); 1 aor. ἐπείνασα, ---- for the earlier 
forms πεινῆν, πεινήσω, éreivnoa; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 61 
and 204; W.§13, 3b.; [B. 37 (32); 44 (38)]; see also 
διψάω ; (fr. πεῖνα hunger; [see πένης }) ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 31; to hunger, be hungry; a. prop. : 
Mt. iv. 2; xii. 1,3; xxi. 18; xxv. 85, 37,42, 44; Mk. ii. 
25; xi. 12; Lk. iv. 2; vi. 3, 25; i.q. to suffer want, Ro. 
xii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 21, 34; to be needy, Lk. i. 53; vi. 21; 
Phil. iv. 12; in this same sense it is joined with διψᾶν, 
1 Co. iv. 11; in figurative disc. οὐ πεινᾶν x. οὐ διψᾶν is 
used to describe the condition of one who is in need of 
nothing requisite for his real (spiritual) life and salva- 
tion, Jn. vi. 35; Rev. vii. 16. b. metaph. to crave 
ardently, to seek with eager desire: w. ace. of the thing, 
τὴν δικαιοσύνην, Mt. v. 6 (in the better Grk. auth. w. a 
gen., as χρημάτων, Xea. Cyr. 8, 3, 39; συμμάχων, 7, 5, 50; 
ἐπαίνου, oec. 13, 9; cf. W. § 30, 10, b. fin.; [B. §131, 4]; 
Kuinoel on Mt. v. 6, and see διψάω, 2).* 

πεῖρα, -as, 7, (πειράω), fr. Aeschyl. down, a trial, experi- 
ment, attempt: πεῖγαν λαμβάνειν τινός, i. q. to altempt a 
thing, to make trial of a thing or a person, (a phrase com- 
mon in prof. auth. ; cf. Xen. mem. 1,4, 18; Cyr. 3, 3,38; 
see other exx. in Sturz, Lex. Xenoph. iii. p. 488 ; Plat. 
Protag. p. 342a.; Gorg. p. 448 a.; Joseph. antt. 8, 6,5; 
Ael. vy. ἢ. 12, 22; often in Polyb., ef. Schweighduser, Lex. 
Polyb. p. 460; Sept. Deut. xxviii. 56; [other exx. in 
Bleek on Heb. 1. ο.; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 1467), 
θαλάσσης, to try whether the sea can be crossed dry-shod 
like the land, Heb. xi. 29; to have trial of a thing, i. 6. 
to experience, learn to know by experience, μαστίγων, Heb. 
xi. 36 (often in Polyb.; τῆς προνοίας, Joseph. antt. 2, 
5, 1)." 

πειράζω (a form found several times in Hom. and Apoll. 
Rhod. and later prose, for πειράω [which see in Veitch | 
more com. in the other Grk. writ.) ; impf. ἐπείραζον ; 1 
aor. ἐπείρασα; Pass., pres. reypagopar; 1 aor. ἐπειράσθην; 
pf. ptep. πεπειρασμένος (Heb. iv. 15; see metpaw, 1); 1 
qor. mid. 2 pers. sing. ἐπειράσω (Rev. ii. 2 Rec.); Sept. 


498 


πειρασμος 


for 7D); ἰ0 try, i. 6. 1. to try whether a thing can 
be done; to attempt, endeavor: with an inf., Acts ix. 26 
LT TrWH; xvi. 7; xxiv. 6. 2. to try, make trial 
of, test: τινά, for the purpose of ascertaining his quality, 
or what he thinks, or how he will behave himself ; a. 
in a good sense: Mt. xxii. 35 [al. refer this to b.]; Jn. 
vi. 6; [2Co. xiii. 5]; Rev. ii. 2. b. ina bad sense: 
to test one maliciously, craftily to put to the proof his 
feelings or judgment, Mt. xvi. 1; xix. 3; xxii. 18,35; Mk. 
Vii. 11; x. 2; xii. 15; Lk. xi. 16; xx. 28 (where GT WH 
Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the words ri pe πειράζετε) ; Jn. 
viii. 6. c. to try or test one’s faith, virtue, charac- 
ter, by enticement to sin; hence ace. to the context i. 4. 
to solicit to sin, to tempt: Jas. i. 13 sq.; Gal. vi. 1; Rev. 
ii. 10; of the temptations of the devil, Mt.iv. 1,3; Mk. 
1.13; Lk.iv.2; 1 Co. vii.5; 1 Th. 111. δ; hence, 6 πειρά- 
(wv, subst., Vulg. tentator, ete., the tempter: Mt.iv.3; 1 ΤῊ. 
iii. 5. ἃ. After the O. T. usage a. of God; 
to inflict evils upon one in order to prove his character 
and the steadfastness of his faith: 1 Co. x. 13; Heb. ii. 18; 
iv. 15 [see πειράω]; xi. 17, 37 [where see WH. App.]; 
Rey. iii. 10, (Gen. xxii. 1; Ex. xx. 20; Deut. viii. 2; Sap. 
iii. 5; xi. 10 (9); Judith viii. 25 sq.). B. Men are 
said πειράζειν τὸν θεόν, --- by exhibitions of distrust, as 
though they wished to try whether he is not justly dis- 
trusted ; by impious or wicked conduct to test God’s 
justice and patience, and to challenge him, as it were, 
to give proof of his perfections: Acts xv. 10; Heb. iii. 9 
RG, (Ex. xvii. 2,7; Num. xiv. 22; Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii-) 
41, 56; ev. (evi.) 14, ete.; ef. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb. on Sap. 
p- 49); se. τὸν Χριστόν [1,1 Tr txt. WH τ. κύριον], 1 Co. 
x. 9 [but Lmrg. TWH mrg. ἐξεπείρασαν) ; τὸ πνεῦμα 
κυρίου, Acts v. 9; absol. πειράζειν ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ (see δοκιμα- 
cia), Heb. iii. 91, T Tr WH. [On πειράζω (as compared 
with δοκιμάζω), see Trench § lxxiv.; ef. Cremer s. v. 
Comp.: ἐκ-πειράζω.} * 

πειρασμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (πειράζω, q. v.), Sept. for MON, an ex- 
periment, attempt, trial, proving; (Vulg. tentatio) ; a. 
univ. trial, proving: Sir. xxvii. 5, 7; τὸν πειρασμὸν ὑμῶν 
ἐν τῇ σαρκί pov, the trial made of you by my bodily con- 
dition, since this condition served to test the love of the 
Galatians towards Paul, Gal. iv. 14 LT Tr WH [ef. Ὁ. 
below, and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ]. b. spec. the trial 
of man’s fidelity, integrity, virtue, constancy, etc.: 1 Pet. 
iv. 12; also an enticement to sin, temptation, whether aris- 
ing from the desires or from outward circumstances, 
Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. x. 18; ὑπομένειν πειρασμόν, Jas. i. 12; 
an internal temptation to sin, 1 Tim. vi. 9; of the temp- 
tation by which the devil sought to divert Jesus the 
Messiah from his divine errand, Lk.iv.13; οὗ a condi- 
tion of things, or a mental state, by which we are enticed 
to sin, or to a lapse from faith and holiness: in the 
phrases εἰσφέρειν τινὰ εἰς metp-, Mt. vi. 13; Lk. xi. 4; εἰσ- 
έρχεσθαι εἰς π.» Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38 [here TWH 
épx.]; Lk. xxii. 40,46; adversity, affliction, trouble, [ef. 
our trial], sent by God and serving to test or prove one’s 
faith, holiness, character: plur., Lk. xxii. 28; Acts xx. 
19; Jas.i.2; 1 Pet. i. 6; τὸν πειρ. μου τὸν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, 


πειράω 


my temptation arising from my bodily infirmity, Gal. iv. 
14 Ree. [but see a. above]; dpa τοῦ πειρασμοῦ, Rev. iii. 
10; ἐκ π. ῥύεσθαι, 2 Pet. ii. 9, (Deut. vii. 19; xxix. 3; 
Sir. ii. 1; vi. 7; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 1; 1 Macc. 11. 52). Cc. 
‘temptation’ (i. e. trial) of God by men, i. 6. rebellion 
against God, by which his power and justice are, as it 
were, put to the proof and challenged to show them- 
selves: Heb. iii. 8 (Deut. vi.16; ix. 22; Ps. xciv. (xev.) 
8). Cf. F-ied. B. Koester, Vie bibl. Lehre von der Ver- 
suchung. Gotha, 1859. (The word has not yet been 
found in prof. auth. exe. Diosc. praef.1: τοὺς ἐπὶ παθῶν 
m. experiments made on diseases.) * 

πειράω : impf. mid. 3 pers. (sing. and plur), ἐπειρᾶτο, 
ἐπειρῶντο ; pf. pass. ptep. πεπειραμένος (see below) ; com. 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; (oiry; i.e. 1. to make 
a trial, to attempt, [A. V. to assay], foll. by an infin. ; 
often so fr. Hom. down; also so in the mid. in Acts ix. 26 
RG; xxvi. 21, (Xen. symp. 4, 7; Cyr. 1, 4, 5, ete.; often 
in Polyb.; Ael. v. ἢ. 1,34; 2 Mace. ii. 23; 3 Macc.i. 25; 
4 Mace. xii. 2, ete.); hence πεπειραμένος taught by trial, ex- 
perienced, Heb. iv. 15 in certain codd. and edd. ([Ree.*], 
Tdf. formerly) [see below, and cf. πειράζω, ἃ. a.]. 2: 
In post- Hom. usage with the ace. of a pers. 10 tes!, make 
trial of one, put him to the proof: his mind, sentiments, 
temper, Plut. Brut. 10; in particular, to attempt to in- 
duce one to commit some (esp. a carnal) crime; cf. 
Passow 8. v. 3a.; [L. and S. s.v. A. IV. 2]. Hence 
πεπειραμένος in Heb. iv. 15 (see 1 above) is explained 
by some [οἵ. W. § 15 Note ad fin.], tempted to sin; but 
the Pass. in this sense is not found in Grk. writ.; see 
Delitzsch ad loc.* 

πεισμονή, -ῆς, ἡ, (πείθω, α. ν.; like πλησμονή), persua- 
sion: in an active sense [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as 
below] and contextually, treacherous or deceptive persua- 
sion, Gal. ν. 8 [ef. W. § 68, 1 fin.]. (Found besides in 
Ioenat. ad Rom. 3, 8 longer recens.; Justin apol. 1, 53 
init.; [Ireneus 4, 33, 7]; Epiph. 30, 21; Chrysost. on 
1 Th.i. 3; Apollon. Dys. syntax p. 195, 10 [299, 17]; 
Eustath. on Hom. II. α΄. p. 21, 46 vs. 22; 99, 45 vs. 442; 
«. p- 637, 5 vs. 131; and Od. x’. p. 785, 22 vs. 285.) * 

πέλαγος, -ous, τό, [by some (e.g. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. 
p- 805) connected with πλάξ, i. 6. the ‘flat’ expanse (cf. 
Lat. aequor); but by Curtius § 367 et al. (cf. Vaniéek 
p: 515) with πλήσσω, i. 6. the ‘beating’ waves (cf. our 
*plash’)], fr. Hom. down ; a. prop. the sea i.e. the 
high sea, the deep, (where ships sail; accordingly but a 
part of the sea, θάλασσα, Aristot. Probl. sect. 23 quaest. 
8 [p. 931°, 14 sq.] ἐν τῷ λιμένι ὀλίγη ἐστὶν ἡ θάλασσα, ἐν 
δὲ τῷ πελάγει βαθεῖα. Hence) τὸ πέλαγος τῆς θαλάσσης, 
aequor maris, [A. V.the depth of the sea; cf. Trench 
§ xiii.], Mt. xviii. 6 (so too Apollon. Rhod. 2, 608; πέ- 
λαγος alyaias ἁλός, Eur. Tro. 88; Hesych. πέλαγος" - .- - 
βυθός, πλάτος θαλάσσης. Cf. W. 611 (568); [Trench 
u. 5.7). b. univ. the sea: τὸ πέλ. τὸ κατὰ τὴν Κιλικίαν, 
Acts xxvii. 5 (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. πέ- 
Aayos, 1; [L. and 5. s. v. I.]).* 

πελεκίζω : pf. pass. ptep. πεπελεκισμένος ; (πέλεκυς, an 
axe or two-edged hatchet); to οι of with an axe, to 


499 


πένης 


behead: τινά, Rev. xx.4. (Polyb., Diod., Strab., Joseph. 
antt. 20,5,4; Plut. Ant. 36; [cf. W. 26 (25)].)* 

πέμπτος, -n, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], /ifih: Rev. vi. 9; ix. 
1; xvi. 10; xxi. 20.* 

πέμπω ; fut. πέμψω; 1 aor. ἔπεμψα [on its epistolary 
use (for the pres. or the pf.) see W. 278 (261); B. 198 
(172): Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. ii. (25), 28; Philem. 11]; 
Pass., pres. πέμπομαι; 1 aor. ἐπέμφθην (Lk. vii. 10) ; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for nw; to send: twa, absol., one 
to do something, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. vii. 19; xvi. 24; Jn.i. 
22; vii. 18; xiii. 16,20; xx. 21 [Treg. mrg. amooréAX.]; 
2 Co. ix. 3; Phil. ii. 23, 28, ete.; τινά or τινάς is omitted 
where the ptep. is joined to another finite verb, as πέμψας 
ἀπεκεφάλισε τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην, he sent (a deputy) and be- 
headed John, Mt. xiv. 10; add, Acts xix. 31; xxiii. 30, 
(for other exx. see ἀποστέλλω, 1 d.); in imitation of the 
Hebr. 79 V3 Now (1S. xvi. 20; 2S. xi. 14; xii. 25; 1K. 
ii. 25) we find πέμψας διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, he sent by 
his disciples (unless with Fritzsche, and Bornemann, 
Schol. in Lue. p. lxv., one prefer to take πέμψας absol. 
and to connect διὰ τ. pad. with the foll. εἶπεν [so Mey., 
but see (7te Aufl. ed. Weiss), Keil, De Wette, al.]), Mt. 
xi. 2 LT Tr WH, (so ἀποστείλας διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου, Rev. 
i. 1). Teachers who come forward by God’s command 
and with his authority are said to be (or to have been) 
sent by God: as, John the Baptist, Jn. i. 33; Jesus, Jn. 
iv. 34; v. 23 sq. 80, 37; vi. 38-40, 44; vii. 16, 28, etc.; 
Ro. viii. 3; the Holy Spirit, rhetorically personified, Jn. 
xiv. 26; xv. 26; xvi.7. τινά, νυ. dat. of the pers. to whom 
one is sent: 1 Co. iv. 17; Phil.ii.19; τινά τινι παρά τινος 
(prop. to send one to one from one’s abode [see παρά, I. 
8.7), Jn. xv. 26; πρός twa, Lk. iv. 26; Jn. xvi. 7; Acts x. 
33; xv. 25; xxiii. 30; [xxv. 21 RG]; Eph. vi. 22; Phil. 
ii. 25 ; Col. iv. 8; Tit. iii. 12; with the ptep. λέγων added 
(Hebr. 7x now, Gen. xxxviii. 25; 2 5. xiv. 32, etc.), 
said by messenger (Germ. liess sagen), Lk. vii. 6, 19; 
τινὰ εἰς w. an ace. of place, Mt. ii. 8; Lk. xv. 15; xvi. 27; 
Acts x. 5; the end, for which one is sent is indicated — 
by the prep. εἰς, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; 1 Pet. ii. 14; 
by an infin., Jn. i. 33; 1 Co. xvi. 3; Rev. xxii. 16. Of 
things, τί τινι; a. to bid a thing to be carried to 
one: Rey. xi. 10; with εἰς and an ace. of place added, 
Rev. i. 11; εἰς w. an ace. indicating the purpose, Acts xi. 
29; Phil.iv.16 [here Lchm. br. eis; cf. B.329(283)]. Ὅ. 
to send (thrust or insert) a thing into another: Rev. xiv. 
15, 18, (Ael. hist. an. 12, 5) ; τινί τι εἰς τό w. an inf., 2 Th. 
ii. 11. [Comp.: dva-, éx-, pera-, mpo-, συμ- πέμπω. 

|[Syn.: πέμπω, ἀποστέλλω: πέμπω is the general term 
(differing from Tue in directing attention not to the exit 
but to the advent); it may even imply accompaniment 
(as when the sender is God). ἀποστέλλω includes a refer 
ence to equipment, and suggests official or authoritative send- 
ing. Cf. Schmidt ch. 104; Westcott on Jn. xx. 21, ‘ Addi- 
tional Note’; also ‘ Additional Note’ on 1 Jn. iii. 5.) 

πένης, τητος, 6, (πένομαι to work for one’s living; the 
Lat. penuria and Grk. πεινάω are akin to it [cf. Vanicek 
p- 1164]; hence πένης i. q. ἐκ πόνον καὶ ἐνεργείας τὸ ζῆν 
ἔχων, Etym. Magn.), poor: 2 Co. ix.9. (From Soph. and 
Hat. down; Sept. for jax, 3, 95, wy, etc.) * 


πενθερά 


|Syn. πένης, πτωχός: “πένης occurs but once inthe N.T., 
and then in a quotation fr. the Old, while πτωχός occurs 
between thirty and forty times. . . . The πένης may be so poor 
that he earns his bread by daily labor; the πτωχός that he 
only obtains his living by begging.” Trench § xxxvi.; cf. 
Schmidt ch. 85, 4; ch. 186.] 


πενθερά, -as, ἡ, (fem. of πενθερός, q. ν.), α mother-in-law, 
a wife’s mother: Mt. viii. 14; x. 35; Mk. i. 30; Lk. iv. 
38; xii.53. (Dem., Plut., Leian., al. ; Sept. for nin.) * 

πενθερός, -οὔ, ὁ, α father-in-law, a wife’s father: Jn. xviii. 
13. (Hom., Soph., Eurip., Plut., al.; Sept. [for on, 
jan]-)* 

πενθέω, -@ ; fut. revnow; 1 aor. ἐπένθησα; (πένθος) ; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 738; to mourn; a. 
intrans.: Mt. v. 4 (5); ix. 15; 1 Co. v.23 πενθεῖν x. κλαίειν, 
Mk. xvi. 10; Lk. vi. 25; Jas. iv.9; Rev. xviii. 15,19; ἐπί 
τινι, over one, Rey. xviii. 11 R GL (Is. Ixvi. 10), ἐπί 
τινα, ibid. T Tr WH (2 5. xiii. 37; 2 Chr. xxxv. 24, 
etc.). b. trans. 0 mourn for, lament, one: 2 Co. xii. 
21 [ef. W. 635 sq. (590); B. §131,4. Syn. see θρηνέω, 
fin.|* 

πένθος, -ovs, τό, (πένθω [(?); akin, rather, to πάθος, πένο- 
pat (cf. πένης) ; see Curtius p. 53; Vaniéek p. 1165)), fr. 
Hom. down, Sept. for 92x, mourning: Jas. iv. 9; Rev. 
ΧΨ11: 7860.; πὶ: 45 j 

πενιχρός, -ά, -dv, (fr. πένομαι, see πένης), needy, poor: 
Lk. xxi. 2. (Occasionally in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. Od. 3, 
348 down; for >) in Ex. xxii. 25; for 51 in Prov. xxix. 
tie) ) 

eins Pie adv., five times: 2 Co. xi. 24. 
Aeschyl., down.]* 

πεντακισ-χίλιοι, -at, -a, five times a thousand, five thou- 
sand: Mt. xiv. 21; xvi. 9; Mk. vi. 44 ; viii. 19; Lk. ix. 
14; Jn. vi. 10. [Hdt., Plat., al.]* 

πεντακόσιοι, -αι, -a, five hundred: Lk. vii. 41; 1 Co. xv. 
6. [From Hom. (-rx-) down.]* 

πέντε, οἱ, ai, τά, five: Mt. xiv. 17, and often. 
Hom. down.] 

πεντε-και-δέκατος, -7, -ov, the fifteenth: Lk. iii.1. [Diod., 
Plut., al.]* 

πεντήκοντα, οἱ. ai, τά, fifty: Lk. vii. 41; xvi.6; Jn. viii. 
57; xxi. 11 [RG πεντηκοντατριῶν (as one word)]; Acts 
xili. 20; ava πεντήκ. by fifties [see ἀνά, 2], Mk. vi. 40 
{here L T Tr WH κατὰ π.; see κατά, IT. 3 a. y.]; Lk. ix. 
14. [From Hom. down.]* 

πεντηκοστή, -ῆς, 7, (SC. ἡμέρα ; fem. of πεντηκοστός fifti- 
eth), [fr. Plat. down.], Pentecost (prop. the fiftieth day 
after the Passover, Tob. ii.1; 2 Mace. xii. 32; [Philo de 
septen. § 21; de decal. § 30; ef. W. 267), the second of 
the three great Jewish festivals; celebrated at Jerusa- 
lem yearly, the seventh week after the Passover, in 
grateful recognition of the completed harvest (Ex. 
xxiii. 16; Lev. xxiii. 15 sq.; Deut. xvi. 9): Acts ii. 1; 
xx. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 8, (Joseph. antt. 3, 10,6; [14, 13, 
4; ete.]). [BB. DD. (esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto) 
5. v. Pentecost; Hamburger, Real-Encycl. i.s. v. Wochen- 
fest ; Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiii.] * 

πεποίθησις, -ews, 7, (πείθω, 2 pf. πέποιθαγ. trust, confi- 


{From Pind., 


{From 


500 


Πέργαμος 


dence [R. V.], reliance: 2Co. i. 15; iii. 4; x. 2; Eph. iii 
12; εἴς τινα, 2 Co. viii. 22; ἔν τινι, Phil. iii. 4. (Philode 
nobilit. § 7; Joseph. antt.1, 3,1; 3, 2,2; 10,1,4; [11], 
7,1; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 3]; Zosim., Sext. Emp., al.; 
Sept. once for 1/3, 2 Κα. xviii. 19.) The word is con- 
demned by the Atticists; οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 295." 

πέρ, an enclitie particle, akin to the prep. περί [ Herm. 
de part. ἄν, p.6; Curtius § 359; ef. Lob. Pathol. Elemen- 
ta, i. 290; al. (connect it directly with πέραν, ete., and) 
give ‘throughly’ as its fundamental meaning; cf. 
Bdumlein, Partikeln, p. 198], showing that the idea of 
the word to which it is annexed must be taken in its 
fullest extent ; it corresponds to the Lat. circiter, cunque, 
Germ. noch so sehr, immerhin, wenigstens, ja; [Eng. how- 
ever much, very much, altogether, indeed]; cf. Hermann 
ad Vig. p. 791; Klotzad Devar. ii. 2 p. 722 sqq.; [Donald- 
son, New Crat. 8 118 fin.]. In the N. T. it is affixed to 
the pron. és and to sundry particles, see διόπερ, ἐάνπερ, 
εἴπερ, ἐπείπερ, ἐπειδήπερ, ἤπερ, καθάπερ, καίπερ, ὅσπερ, 
ὥσπερ. [(From Hom. down.)] 

περαιτέρω, (fr. mepairepos, compar. of πέρα), adv., fr. 
Aeschyl. down, further, beyond, besides: Acts xix. 39 L 
Tr WH, for RG περὶ ἑτέρων. With this compare οὐδὲν 
ζητήσετε περαιτέρω, Plat. Phaedo e. 56 fin. p. 107 b.* 

πέραν, Ionic and Epic πέρην, adv., fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 123%; beyond, on the other side ; a. τὸ 
πέραν, the region beyond, the opposite shore: Mt. viii. 
18, 28; xiv. 22; xvi.5; Mk. iv. 35; v.21; vi. 45; viii. 
13. b. joined (like a prep.) with a gen. [W. § 54, 
6]: πέραν τῆς bad. Jn. vi. 22, 25; πέραν τοῦ Ιορδάνου, Mt. 
iv. 15; xix.1; [Mk. x.1L T Tr WH]; Jn.i. 28; iii. 26; 
with verbs of going it marks direction towards a place 
[over, beyond], Jn. vi.1,17; x.40; xviii.1; of the place 
whence, [Mt. iv. 25]; Mk. 111. 8. τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης, 
Mk. ν. 1; [τοῦ Ιορδάνου, Mk. x. 1 RG]; τῆς λίμνης, Lk. 
viii. 22, (rod ποταμοῦ, Xen. an. 3, 5,2). [See Sophocles, 
Lex. s.v.]* 

πέρας, -aros, τό, (πέρα beyond), fr. Aeschyl. down, ez- 
tremity, bound, end, [see τέλος, 1 a. init.]; a. ofa 
portion of space (boundary, frontier): πέρατα τῆς γῆς, 
[the ends of the earth], i. q. the remotest lands, Mt. xii. 
42; Lk. xi. 31, (Hom. Il. 8, 478 [wetpap]; Thue. 1, 69; 
Xen. Ages. 9,4; Sept. for γ ὍΘΕ [W. 30]); also τῆς 
οἰκουμένης, Ro. x. 18 (Ps. Lxxi. (Ixxii.) 8). b. of a 
thing extending through a period of time (termination) : 
ἀντιλογίας, Heb. vi. 16 (τῶν κακῶν, Aeschyl. Pers. 632; 
Joseph. b. j. 7, 5, 6, and other exx. in other writ.).* 

Πέργαμος [perh. -μον, τό, (the gend. in the N. T. is in- 
determinate; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 421 sq.; Pape, Eigen- 
namen, 8. vv. )], του, ἡ, Pergamus [or Pergamum, (cf. 
Curtius §413)], a city of Mysia Major in Asia Minor, 
the seat of the dynasties of Attalus and Eumenes, cele- 
brated for the temple of Aesculapius, and the invention 
[(?) ef. Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 39 sq.; Birt, 
Antikes Buchwesen, ch. ii.] and manufacture of parch- 
ment. The river Selinus flowed through it and the 
Cetius ran past it (Strab. 13 p. 623; Plin. 5, 30 (33); 13, 
11 (21); Tac. ann. 3,63). It was the birthplace of the 


Περγη 


physician Galen, and had a great royal library. Mod- 
ern Berghama. There was a Christian church there: 
Rev. i. 11; ii. 12.* 

Tlépyn, -ns, 7, [ οἷ. the preceding word], Perge or Perga, 
a town of Pamphylia, on the river Cestrus about seven 
miles (sixty stadia) from the sea. Ona hill near the 
town was the temple of Diana [i. 6. Artemis] (Strab. 14 
Ρ. 667; Mel. 1, 14; Liv. 38, 37): Acts xiii. 13 sq.; xiv. 
25. [BB. DD.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 134 sq.] * 

περί, (akin to πέρα. πέραν ; [Curtius § 359]), prep., 
joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class. 
Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person 
or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated 
is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. cir- 
cum, circa; around, about. 

I. with the GeniTIve it denotes that around which 
an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching, 
ete., (Lat. de, quod attinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter) 
[ef. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat. 
de; in later Lat. also circa): after verbs of speaking, 
teaching, writing, ete., see under ἀναγγέλλω, ἀπαγ- 
γέλλω, ἀπολογοῦμαι, γογγύζω, γράφω, Sydow, διαβεβαιοῦ- 
μαι, διαγνωρίζω, διαλέγομαι, διδάσκω. διηγοῦμαι (Heb. xi. 
32), διήγησις, εἶπον and προεῖπον, ἐπερωτάω and ἐρωτάω, 
κατηχέω, λαλέω, λέγω, λόγον αἰτέω. λόγον ἀποδίδωμι, λόγον 
δίδωμι, μαρτυρέω, μνεία, μνημονεύω, προκαταγγέλλω, προ- 
φητεύω, ὑπομιμνήσκω, χρηματίζομαι, ἦχος, φήμη, ete. ; 
after verbs of hearing, knowing, ascertaining, 
inquiring, see under ἀκούω, γινώσκω, ἐπίσταμαι, εἶδον, 
ἐξετάζω, ζητέω, ἐκζητέω, ἐπιζητέω, ζήτημα, πυνθάνομαι, etc. ; 
after verbs of thinking, deciding, supposing, 
doubting, ete.; see under διαλογίζομαι, ἐνθυμέομαι, πέ- 
πεισμαι, πιστεύω, διαπορέω, ἔλέγχω, etc. b. as re- 
spects [A. V. often (as) touching]; a. with verbs, 
to indicate that what is expressed by the verb (or verbal 
noun) holds so far forth as some person or thing is con- 
cerned ; with regard to, in reference to: Acts xxviil. 21; 
Heb. xi. 20; ἡ περὶ σοῦ μνεία, 2 Tim. i. 3; ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν, 
1 Co. vii. 37; ἐπιταγὴν ἔχειν, ibid. 25; see ἐντέλλομαι, 
ἐντολή, παρακαλέω, παραμυθέομαι, πρόφασις, ἔκδικος, Aay- 
χάνω to cast lots. B. with the neut. plur. [and sing.] 
of the article, ra περί twos the things concerning a person 
or thing, i. 6. what relates to, can be said about, ete.: τὰ 
περὶ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts i. 3; viii. 12 [Rec.]; 
xix. 8 [here LTr WH om. ra]; τὰ περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ. Acts 
xxiv. 22; with the gen. of a pers. one’s affairs, his con- 
dition or state: Acts xxviii. 15; Eph. vi. 22; Phil. i. 27; 
ii. 19 sq.; Col. iv. 8; in a forensic sense, one’s cause or 
case, Acts xxiv. 10; τὰ περὶ Ἰησοῦ (or τοῦ κυρίου), [the 
(rumors) about Jesus (as a worker of miracles), Mk. v. 
27T Trmrg. br. WH]; the things (necessary to be known 
and believed) concerning Jesus, Acts xviii. 25; xxiii. 11; 
xxviii. 23 Rec., 31; the things that befell Jesus, his death, 
Lk. xxiv. 19; the things in the O. T. relative to him, the 
prophecies concerning him, ibid. 27; the career, death, 
appointed him by God, Lk. xxii. 37 [here T Tr WH τὸ 
ete. J. Ὑ- περί τινος, absol., at the beginning of sen- 
tences, concerning, as to: 1 Co. vii. 1; viii.1; xvi. 1, 12; 


501 


περι 


but in other places it is more properly taken with the 
foll. verb, Mt. xxii. 31; xxiv. 36; Mk. xii. 26; 1 Co. 
vil. 25; viii. 1,45 xii. 1; 1 Th. iv. 9; v.1; cf. W. 373 
(350). c. on account of ; a. of the subject- 
matter, which at the same time occasions the action 
expressed by the verb: so after verbs of accusing, see 
ἐγκαλέω, κατηγορέω, κρίνω τινὰ περί τινος, etc. ; after verbs 
expressing emotion, see θαυμάζω, ἀγανακτέω. καυχάομαι, 
σπλαγχνίζομαι, εὐχαριστέω, εὐχαριστία, αἰνέω. μέλει μοι, 
μεριμνάω; also after εὔχομαι, 3 In. 2, see πᾶς, IL 3 b. 
6. β. of the cause for (on account of) which a 
thing is done, or of that which gave occasion for the 
action or occurrence: Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; Jn. x. 33, 
(περὶ τῆς βλασφημίας λάβετε αὐτόν, Ev. Nic. c. 4, p. 546 
ed. Thilo [p. 221 ed. Tdf.]); Acts xv. 2; xix. 23; xxv. 
15, 18, 24; Col. ii. 1 [RG]. y- on account of, i. 6. 
for, for the benefit or advantage of: Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. 
xiv. 24 RG; Lk. iv. 38; Jn. xvi. 263; xvii. 9, 20; Heb. 
ν. 3; xi. 40; περί and ὑπέρ alternate in Eph. vi. 18 sq. [cf. 
W. 383 (358) n. also § 50,3; B.§ 147, 21.22; Wieseler, 
Meyer, Bp. Lehtft., Ellic. on Gal. i. 41. 8. περί is 
used of the design or purpose for removing something 
or takiny it away: περὶ ἁμαρτίας, to destroy sin, Ro. viii. 
3; διδόναι ἑαυτὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, to expiate, atone 
for, sins, Gal. i. 4 (where R WH txt. ὑπέρ [see as in y. 
above, and οἴ. ὑπέρ, I. 6]); also to offer sacrifices, and 
simply sacrifices, περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν, Heb. v.3 [RG ὑπέρ; see 
τ. 5.1; X. 18,26; περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν ἔπαθε [ἀπέθανεν], 1 Pet. iii. 
18; περὶ ἁμαρτίας sc. θυσίαι, sacrifices for sin, expia- 
tory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl) 7; ef. Num. 
viii. 8; see ἁμαρτία, 3; τὰ περὶ τῆς ἅμ. Lev. vi. 25; τὸ 
περὶ τ. &. Lev. xiv. 19); ἱλασμὸς περὶ τ. ἁμαρτιῶν, 1 ὅπ. 
ἀν ἂν» 10> 

II. with the AccusATIVE (W. 406 (379)) ; a. 
of Place; about, around: as, about parts of the body, 
Mt. iii. 4; [xviii. 6 LT Tr WH]; Mk.i.6; ix. 42; Lk. 
xvii. 2; Rev. xv.6. about places: Lk. xiii. 8; Acts xxii. 
6; Jude 7; τὰ περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον, the neighborhood of 
that place, Acts xxviii. 7; of περί w. an ace. of place, 
those dwelling about a place or in its vicinity, Mk. iii. 
8 [Τ Tr WHom. Lbr. of]. οἱ περί twa, those about one 
i. 6. with him, his companions, associates, friends, ete., 
Mk. iv. 10; Lk. xxii. 49 ; [add, Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) 
“ Shorter Conclusion ”]; acc. to Grk. idiom οἱ περὶ τὸν 
Παῦλον, Paul and his companions (Germ. die Paulusge- 
sellschaft) [ef. W. 406 (379); B.§125, 8], Acts xiii. 13; 
ace. to a later Grk. usage ai περὶ Μάρθαν denotes Martha 
herself, Jn. xi. 19 (although others [e. g. Meyer, Weiss, 
Keil, Godet, al.] understand by it Martha and her at- 
tendants or domestics; but L Tr WH read πρὸς τὴν (for 
τὰς περὶ) MapGav) ; cf. Matthiae § 583, 2; Bnhdy. p. 263; 
Kiihner ii. p. 230 sq.; [W. and B.u.s.]. in phrases the 
underlying notion of which is that of revolving 
about something: of persons engaged in any occupa- 
tion, of περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάται [A. V. the workmen of like 
occupation], Acts xix. 25; περισπᾶσθαι, τυρβάζεσθαι περί 
rt, Lk. x. 40,41 [but here L T Tr WH txt. θορυβάζη q- v- 
(and WH mrg. om. περὶ rod) ], (περὶ τὴν γεωργίαν γίνε 


περιώγω 


σθαι, 2 Mace. xii. 1). b. as lo, in reference to, con- 
cerning: so after ἀδόκιμος, 2 Tim. iii. 8; ἀστοχεῖν, 1 Tim. 
vi. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 18; vavayeiv, 1 Tim. i. 19; νοσεῖν, 1 Tim. 
Vi. 4; περὶ πάντα ἑαυτὸν παρέχεσθαι τύπον, Tit. ii. 7; τὰ 
περὶ ἐμέ, the state of my affairs, Phil. ii. 23; αἱ περὶ τὰ 
λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mk. iv. 19 (αἱ περὶ τὸ σῶμα ἐπιθυμίαι, Ar- 
istot. rhet. 2, 12, 8; τὰ περὶ ψυχὴν x. σῶμα ἀγαθά, eth. 
Nic. 1,8); ef. W. § 30,3 N.5; [B.§ 125, 9]. c. of 
Time; in a somewhat indefinite specification of time, 
about, near: περὶ τρίτην ὥραν, Mt. xx. 8; add, 5sq. 9; 
xxvii.46; Mk. vi.48; Acts χ. [8 1. Tr WH], 9; xxii. 6. 

III. in ΟΟΜΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝ περί in the N. T. signifies 1. 
in a circuit, round about, all around, as περιάγω, περι- 
βάλλω, περιαστράπτω, περίκειμαι, περιοικέω, tc., etc. 24, 
beyond (because that which surrounds a thing does not 
belong to the thing itself but is beyond it): περίεργος, 
περιεργάζομαι, περιλείπω, περιμένω, περιούσιος, περισσός, 
περισσεύω. 3. through [(2?) —intensive, rather 
(cf. περιάπτω, 2)]: περιπείρω. 

περι-άγω ; impf. περιῆγον ; fr. Hdt. down; a 
trans. a. to lead around [cf. περί, 111. 1]. b. 
iq. to lead about with one’s self: twa (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 
28; τρεῖς παῖδας ἀκολούθους, Dem. p. 958, 16), 1 Co. ix. 
5. 2. intrans. to go about, walk about, (Ceb. tab. ec. 
6): absol. Acts xiii. 11; with an ace. of place (depend- 
ing on the prep. in compos., cf. Matthiae § 426; [B. 144, 
(126); W. § 52, 2c.; 432 (402)]), Mt. iv. 23 [R G; (al. 
read the dat. with or without év)]; ix. 35; xxiii. 15; 
Mk. vi. 6.* 

περι-αιρέω, -ῶ : 2 aor. inf. περιελεῖν, [ptep. plur. περι- 
e\dvres; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. περιαιρεῖται] ; impf. 3 
pers. sing. περιῃρεῖτο; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 
VO; a. to take away that which surrounds or en= 
velops a thing (cf. περί, III. 1]: τὸ κάλυμμα, pass., 2 Co. 
ili. 16 (πορφύραν, 2 Mace. iv. 38; τὸν δακτύλιον, Gen. xli. 
42; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 3); ἀγκύρας, the anchors from 
both sides of the ship, [R. V. casting off], Acts xxvii. 
40 ; [2 aor. ptep., absol., in a nautical sense, to cast loose, 
Acts xxviii. 13 WII (al. περιελθόντες]. b. metaph. 
to take away altogether or entirely: τὰς ἁμαρτίας (with 
which one is, as it were, enveloped), the guilt of sin, i. e. 
to expiate perfectly, Heb. x. 11; τὴν ἐλπίδα, pass., Acts 
xxvii. 20.* 

mep-drrw: 1 aor. ptep. περιάψας; [fr. Pind. down]; 
1. to bind or tie around, to put around, [mepi, 111. 1]; 
to hang upon, attach to. 2. to kindle a fire around 
[or thoroughly ; see περικρύπτω, περικαλύπτω, περικρατής, 
περίλυπος, ete. ] (Phalar. ep. 5, p. 28): Lk. xxii. 55 T WH 
Tr txt.* 

περι-αστράπτω: 1 aor. περιήστραψα [Re L περιέστρ. 
(see B. 34 sq. (30) and Tdf.’s note)], to flash around, 
shine about, (epi, III. 1]: τινά, Acts ix. 3; περί τινα, Acts 
xxii. 6. ({4 Mace. iv. 10]; 666]. and Byzant. writ.) * 

περι-βάλλω : fut. περιβαλῶ ; 2 aor. περιέβαλον ; pf. pass. 
ptep. περιβεβλημένος ; 2 aor. mid. περιεβαλόμην ; 2 fut. 
mid. περιβαλοῦμαι ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 
D3 to cover, cover up; also for way to clothe, and πιὸ» 
to veil; to throw around, to put round; a. UNG 


502 


περιέχω 


χάρακα, to surround a city with a bank (palisade), Lk. 
xix. 43 ((RGTr L txt. WHmrg.]; see παρεμβάλλω, 
2). Ὁ. of garments, τινά, to clothe one: Mt. xxv. 36, 
38,43; τινά τι, to put a thing on one, to clothe one with a 
thing [B. 149 (130); W. § 32,4 a.]: Lk. xxiii. 11 [here 
T WU om. L Tr br. ace. of pers.]; Jn. xix. 2; pass., Mk. 
xiv. 51; xvi. 5; Rev. vii. 9,13; x. 1; xi. 3; xii. 1; xvii. 
4 (where Ree. has dat. of the thing; [so iv.4 L WH 
txt., but al. ἐν w. dat. of thing]); xviii. 16; xix. 13; 
Mid. to put on or clothe one’s self: absol. Rey. iii. 18; w. 
ace. of the thing [cf. B. § 135, 2], Mt. vi. 31; Acts xii. 
8; passively, —in 2 aor., Mt. vi. 29; Lk. xii. 27; in 2 
aor. w. ace. of the thing, Rev. iii. 18; xix. 8; in 2 fut. 
with ἔν τινι [B. u.s.; see ἐν, I. 5b. p. 210°], Rev. iii. δ." 

περι-βλέπω : impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. περιεβλέπετο; 1 
aor. ptep. περιβλεψάμενος ; to lookaround. In the N.7T. 
only in the mid. (to look round about one’s self): absol., 
Mk. ix. 8; x. 23; foll. by an inf. of purpose, Mk. v. 32; 
twa, to look round on one (i.e. to look for one’s self at 
one near by), Mk. iii. 5, 34; Lk. vi. 10; εἴς τινας, Ev. 
Nic. c. 43 πάντα, Mk. xi.11. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; 
Sept.) * 

περι-βόλαιον, -ov, τό, (περιβάλλω), prop. a covering 
thrown around, a wrapper; in the N. T. 1. α man- 
tle: ΜΡ. i. 12 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Ezek. xvi. 13; xxvii. 7; 
15. lix. 17; περιβ. βασιλικόν and περιβ. ἐκ πορφύρας, Pa- 
laeph. 52, 4). 2. aveil [A.V.a covering]: 1 Co. xi. 
15. [(From Eur. down.)]* 

περι-δέω : plupf. pass. 3 pers. sing. περιεδέδετο; (fr. Hat. 
down]; to bind around, tie over, [ef. περί, IIL. 1]: τινά 
τινι, Jn. xi. 44. (Sept. Job xii. 18; Plut. mor. p. 825 6. 
[i. 6. praecepta ger. reipub. 32, 21; Aristot. h. a. 9, 39 
p- 623%, 14].)° 

περι-δρέμω, See περιτρέχω. 

περι-εργάζομαι ; (see περί, III. 2); to bustle about use- 
lessly, to busy one’s self about trifling, needless, useless mat- 
ters, (Sir. iii. 23; Hdt. 3, 46; Plat. apol. p. 19 b.; al.): 
used apparently of a person officiously inquisitive about 
others’ affairs [A. V. to be a busybody], 2 Th. iii. 11, as in 
Dem. p. 150, 24 [ef. p. 80, 4 etc. ].* 

περίεργος, -ov, (περί and ἔργον; see περί, IIT. 2), busy 
about trifles and neglectful of important matters, esp. busy 
about other folks’ affairs, a busybody: 1 Tim. v.13 (often 
so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. mem. 1, 3, 1; περ. καὶ πολυπράγ- 
μων, Epict. diss. 3, 1,21); of things: τὰ περίεργα, imper- 
tinent and superfluous, of magic [A. V. curious] arts, 
Acts xix. 19 (so περίεργος practising magic, Aristaen. 
epp. 2, 18, 2 [ef. Plut. Alex. 2,5]); ef. Kypke, Observv. 
and Kuinoel, Com. ad loc.* 

περι-έρχομαι ; 2 aor. περιῆλθον; fr. Hdt. down; to go 
about: of strollers, Acts xix. 13; of wanderers, Heb. xi. 
37; of navigators (making a circuit), Acts XXxviii. 13 
[here WH περιελόντες, see περιαιρέω, a.]; Tas οἰκίας, to 
go about from house to house, 1 Tim. v. 13.* 

περι-έχω; 2 aor. περιέσχον; fr. Hom. down; in the 
N. T. to surround, encompass ; i. e. a. to contain. 
of the subject-matter, contents, of a writing (ἡ βίβλος 
περιέχει τὰς πράξεις, Diod. 2,1; [Joseph. ο. Ap. (1, 15 


4 
περιζωννύω 


1, 8,2; 2,4,1; 2,38,17), ἐπιστολὴν περιέχουσαν τὸν τύπον 
τοῦτον, a letter of which this is a sample, or a letter 
written after this form [cf. τύπος, 3], Acts xxiii. 25 [LT Tr 
WH ἔχουσαν (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. as below) ] (τὸν τρό- 
πον τοῦτον, 1 Mace. xv. 2; 2 Mace. xi.16); intrans. [B. 
§129,17n.; 144 (126) n.]: περιέχει ἐν (τῇ) γραφῇ; it is 
contained in (holy) scripture, 1 Pet. ii. 6 RGT Tr WH; 
absol., περιέχει ἡ γραφή (our runs), foll. by direct disc., 
ibid. Lehm. ; likewise ὁ νόμος ὑμῶν περιέχει, Ev. Nicod. 
6. 4; with adverbs: περιέχειν οὕτως, 2 Mace. ix. 18; xi. 
22; καθὼς περιέχει βίβλος "Evwx, Test. xii. Patr., test. 
Levi 10; ὡς ἡ παράδοσις περιέχει, Euseb. h.e. 3, 1; see 
Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 29. b. i. q. to take possession 
of, to seize: twa, Lk. v. 9 (2 Mace. iv. 16; Joseph. b. j. 4, 
10, 1).* 

περιυ-ζωννύω, or -ζώννυμι : Mid., 1 fut. περιζώσομαι; 1 
aor. impv. περίζωσαι, ptcp. περιζωσάμενος ; pf. pass. ptep. 
περιεζωσμένος ; to gird around [mepi, III. 1]; to fasten 
garments with a girdle: τὴν ὀσφύν, to fasten one’s cloth- 
ing about the loins with a girdle (Jer. i. 17), pass., Lk. 
xii. 35. Mid. to gird one’s self: absol., Lk. xii. 37; xvii. 
8; Acts xii. 8 Rec. ; τὴν ὀσφὺν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ, with truth as 
a girdle, figuratively i. q. to equip one’s self with knowl- 
edge of the truth, Eph. vi. 14; with an ace. of the thing 
with which one girds himself (often so in Sept., as σάκ- 
κον, Jer. iv. 8; vi. 26; Lam. ii. 10; στολὴν δόξης, Sir. xlv. 
7; and in trop. expressions, δύναμιν, εὐφροσύνην, 1 S. 
ii. 4; Ps. xvii. (xviii-) 33; [B. § 135, 2]): πρὸς τοῖς pa- 
στοῖς ζώνην, Rev. i. 13; ζώνας περὶ τὰ στήθη, Rev. xv. 6. 
(Arstph., Polyb., Paus., Plut., al.; Sept. for an and 
Us.) CE. ἀναζώννυμι." 

περίτθεσις, -ews, ἡ, (περιτίθημι), the act of putting around 
[περί, II. 1], (Vulg. cireumdatio, [A.V. wearing]) : περιθέ- 
σεως χρυσίων κόσμος, the adornment consisting of the gold- 
en ornaments wont to be placed around the head or the 
body, 1 Pet.iii.3. ({Arr.7, 22], Galen, Sext. Empir., al.) * 

mepitorpt: 2 aor. περιέστην; pf. ptep. περιεστώς ; pres. 
mid. impy. 2 pers. sing. περιΐστασο (on which form see 
W.§ 14,1e.; [Β. 47 (40), who both callit passive (but 
see Veitch p. 340) ]) ; 1. in the pres., impf., fut., 
1 aor., active, (o place around (one). 2. in the perf., 
plupf., 2 aor. act., and the tenses of the mid., to stand 
around: Jn. xi. 42; Acts xxv. 7 [in LT Tr WH w. an 
ace.; ef. W.§ 52, 4,12]. Mid. to turn one’s self about se. 
for the purpose of avoiding something, hence to avoid, shun, 
(Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 12; 10,10, 4; b.j. 2,8, 6; Antonin. 
3,4; Artem. oneir. 4, 59; Athen. 15 p. 675 e.; Diog. 
Laért. 9, 14; Jambl. vit. Pyth. 31 [p. 392 ed. Kiessl.]; 
Sext. Empir.; joined with φεύγειν, Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 4; 
with ἐκτρέπεσθαι, Leian. Hermot. § 86; Hesych. περι- 
ἵστασο " ἀπόφευγε, ἀνάτρεπε; [cf. further, D’Orville’s 
Chariton, ed. Reiske, p. 282]; this use of the verb is 
censured by Leian. soloec. 5): in the N. T. so with an 
acc. of the thing [ef. W. 1. ο.7, 2 Tim. ii. 16; Tit. iii. 9.* 

περι-κάθαρμα, -ros, τό, (meptxabaipw, to cleanse on all 
sides [mepi, III. 17}, off-scouring, refuse: plur. τὰ περικ. 
τοῦ κόσμου [ A. V. the filth of the world], metaph. the most 
abject and despicable men, 1 Co. iv. 13. (Epict. diss. 8, 


503 


περιμένω 


22, 78; purgamenta urbis, Curt. 8, 5,8; 10, 2, 7; [see 
Wetstein on 1 Co. |. 6.1; Sept. once for 753, the price 
of expiation or redemption, Prov. xxi. 18, because the 
Grks. used to apply the term καθάρματα to victims sacri- 
ficed to make expiation for the people, and even to crim- 
inals who were maintained at the public expense, that 
on the outbreak of a pestilence or other calamity they 
might be offered as sacrifices to make expiation for the 
state.) * 

περι-καθ-ίζω : 1 aor. ptep. περικαθίσας ; 1. in class. 
Grk. trans. to bid or make to sit around, to invest, besiege, 
a city, a fortress. 2. intrans. to sit around, be seated 
around; so in Lk. xxii. 55 Lchm. txt.* 

περι-καλύπτω ; 1 aor. ptcep. περικαλύψας ; pf. pass. ptep. 
περικεκαλυμμένος ; fr. Hom. down; to cover all around 
[περί, III. 1], to cover up, cover over: τὸ πρόσωπον, Mk. 
xiv. 65; Lk. xxii. 64 [A. V. blindfold]; τὶ χρυσίῳ, Heb. 
ix. 4 (Ex. xxviii. 20).* 

περί-κειμαι ; (περί and κεῖμαι) ; fr. Hom. down; τις 
to lie around [οἷ. περί, III. 1]: περί [ef. W. 8 52, 4, 12] 
τι, [A. V. were hanged, Mk. ix. 42]; Lk. xvii. 2; ἔχοντες 
περικείμενον ἡμῖν νέφος, [A.V. are compassed about with 
a cloud ete.], Heb. xii. 1. 2. passively [cf. B. 50 
(44)], to be compassed with, have round one, [with ace. ; 
ef. W. § 32, 5; B. §134, 7]: ἅλυσιν, Acts xxviii. 20 (de- 
σμά, 4 Mace. xil. 3); ἀσθένειαν, infirmity cleaves to me, 
Heb. v. 2 (ὕβριν, Theoer. 23,14; ἀμαύρωσιν, νέφος, Clem. 
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6).* 

περι-κεφαλαία, -as, 7), (περί and κεφαλή), a helmet: 1 Th. 
v. 8; τοῦ σωτηρίου (fr. Is. lix. 17), i.e. dropping the fig., 
the protection of soul which consists in (the hope of) 
salvation, Eph. vi. 17. (Polyb.; Sept. for jj.) * 

περι-κρατής, -€s, (κράτος), τινός, having full power over a 
thing : [περικ. γενέσθαι τῆς σκάφης, to secure}, Acts xxvii. 
16. (Sus. 39 cod. Alex.; eccl. writ.) * 

περι-κρύπτω : 2 aor. περιέκρυβον (on this form ef. Bttm. 
Ausf. Spr. i. p. 400 sq. ; ii. p. 226; [WH. App. p. 170; 
al. make it (in Lk. as below) a late imperfect; cf. B. 
40 (35); Soph. Lex. s. v. κρύβω; Veitch 8. v. κρύπτω]) ; 
to conceal on all sides or entirely, to hide: ἑαυτόν, to keep 
one’s self at home, Lk. i. 24. (Leian., Diog. Laért., 
al.) * 

περι-κυκλόω, -@: fut. περικυκλώσω; to encircle, compass 
about: of a city (besieged), Lk. xix. 43. (Arstph. av. 
346; Xen. an. 6,1(3), 11; Aristot. h. a. 4, 8 [p. 533%, 11]; 
Leian., al. ; Sept. for 330.) * 

περι-λάμπω: 1 aor. περιέλαμψα; to shine around: τινά, 
Lk. ii. 9; Acts xxvi. 13. (Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

περι-λείπω : pres. pass. ptcp. περιλειπόμενος (cf. περί, 
III. 2); to leave over; pass. to remain over, to survive: 
1 Th. iv. 15, 17. (Arstph., Plat., Eur., Polyb., Hdian. ; 
2 Mace. i. 31.) * 

περίλυπος, -ov, (περί and λύπη, and so prop. ‘encom- 
passed with grief’ [cf. περί, III. 3]), very sad, exceedingly 
sorrowful: Mt. xxvi. 38: Mk. vi. 26; xiv. 84; Lk. xviii. 
23, 24 [where T WH om. Tr br. the cl.]. (Ps. xli. (xlii.) 
6, 12; 1 Esdr. viii. 69; Isocr., Aristot., al.) * 

περι-μένω ; (περί further [ef. περί, III. 27}; to wait for: 


πέριξ 


ri, Actsi.4. (Gen. xlix. 18; Sap. viii, 12; Arstph., Thue., 
Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

πέριξ [on the formative or strengthening & cf. Lob. 
Paralip. p. 131], adv., fr. Aeschyl. down, round about: 
αἱ πέριξ πόλεις, the cities round about, the circumjacent 
cities, Acts v. 16.* 

περι-οικέω, -@; to dwell round about: τινά [ οἵ. W. § 52, 
4, 12], to be one’s neighbor, Lk. i. 65. (IIdt., Arstph., 
Xen., Lys., Plut.) * 

περί-οικος, -ov, (περί and οἶκος), dwelling around, a 
neighbor; Lk.i.58. (Gen. xix. 29; Deut. i. 7; Jer. xxx. 
(xlix.) 5; Hdt., Thue., Xen., Isoer., al.) * 

περιούσιος, -ov, (fr. περιών, περιοῦσα, ptcp. of the verb 
περίειμι, to be over and above —see ἐπιούσιος ; hence 
περιουσία, abundance, plenty ; riches, wealth, property), 
that which is one’s own, belongs to one’s possessions: λαὸς 
περιούσιος, a people selected by God from the other nations 
for his own possession, Tit. ii. 14; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; 
in Sept. for 420 Ὁ}» (Ex. xix. 5); Deut. vii. 6; xiv. 2; 
xxvi. 18. [Cf. Bp. λυ. ‘Fresh Revision’ ete. App. 
1.7" 

περιοχή, -ῆς, 1], (περιέχω, 4: V-) 5 1. an encompass- 
ing, compass, circuit, (Theophr., Diod., Plut., al.). ὩΣ 
that which is contained ; spec. the contents of any writing, 
Acts viii. 32 (Cie. ad Attic. 13, 25; Stob. eclog. ethic. p. 
164 [ii. p. 541 ed. Gaisford]) [but A. V. place 1. 6. pas- 
sage; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].* 

περι-πατέω, -@; impf. 2 pers. sing. περιεπάτεις, 3 pers. 
περιεπάτει, plur. περιεπάτουν; fut. περιπατήσω ; 1 aor. περι- 
ἐπάτησα; plupf. 3 pers. sing. περιεπεπατήκει (Acts xiv. 8 
Rec.*"), and without the augm. (cf. W. § 12,9; [B. 33 
(29) ]) περιπεπατήκει (ibid. Rec." Grsb.) ; Sept. for 727; 
to walk; [walk about A. V. 1 Pet. ν. 8]; a. prop. 
(as in Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Joseph., Ael., al.) : ab- 
sol., Mt. ix. 5; xi. 5; xv. 31; Mk. ii. 9 [Tdf. ὕπαγε]; v.42; 
viii. 24; xvi. 12; Lk. v. 23; vii. 22; xxiv. 17; Jn.i. 36; v. 
8 sq. 11 sq.; xi. 9sq.; Acts iii. 6, 8sq.12; xiv. 8,10; 1 
Pet. v. 8; Rev. ix. 20; i.q. to make one’s way, make prog- 
ress, in fig. dise. equiv. to to make a due use of opportu- 
nities, Jn. xii. 35°. with additions: περιπ. γυμνός, Rev. 
xvi. 15; ἐπάνω (τινός), Lk. xi. 44; διά w. gen. of the thing, 
Rey. xxi. 24 [G LT Tr WH]; ἐν w. dat. of place, i.q. 
to frequent, stay in, a place, Mk. xi. 27; Jn. vii. 1; x. 23; 
Rey. ii. 1; ἔν τισι, among persons, Jn. xi. 54; [π. ὅπου 
ἤθελες, of personal liberty, Jn. xxi. 18]; metaph. ἐν τῇ 
σκοτίᾳ, to be subject to error and sin, Jn. viii. 12; xii. 
35>; 1Jn. i. 6 sq.; 1.11; ἐν with dat. of the garment 
one is clothed in, Mk. xii. 38; Lk. xx. 46; Rev. iii. 4, (ἐν 
κοκκίνοις, Epict. diss. 3, 22,10); ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, [ Mt. 
xiv. 25 RG; 26 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 48, 49], see ἐπί, 
A. I. 1a.and 2a.; ἐπὶ τὴν θάλ.. ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα, [ Mt. xiv. 25 
LT Tr WH, 26 RG, 29], see ἐπί, C. I. 1 a.; [παρὰ τὴν 
θάλασσαν, Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 Ree., see παρά, III. 1]; 
μετά τινος, to associate with one, to be one’s companion, 
used of one’s followers and votaries, Jn. vi. 66; Rev. iii. 
4. b. Hebraistically, to live [ef. W.32; com. in Paul 
and John, but not found in James or in Peter (cf. ἀνα- 
στρέφω 3 b., avaorpodn) ], i. 6. a. to regulate one’s 


504 


περιποΐησις 


life, to conduct one’s self (οἴ. ὁδὸς, 2 a., πορεύω, Ὁ. y.) : 
ἀξίως τινός, Eph. iv.1; Col. 1.10; 1 Tie ii. 12; εὐσχημόνως, 
Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th. iv. 12; ἀκριβῶς, Eph. v. 15; ἀτάκτως, 
2 Th. iii. 6, 115 ὥς or καθώς τις, Eph. iv. 17; v. 8,15; οὕτω 
π. καθώς, Phil. iii. 17; [καθὼς π. οὕτω π. 1 Jn. ii. 6 (L Tr 
txt. WH om. οὕτω); πῶς, καθώς, 1 Th. iv. 1; οὕτως, ὡς, 
1 Co. vii. 17; so that a nom. of quality must be sought 
from what follows, ἐχθροὶ rod σταυροῦ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Phil. 
iii. 18. witha dat. of the thing to which the life is given 
or consecrated: κώμοις, μέθαις, etc., Ro. xiii. 13, cf. Fritz- 
sche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 140 sq.; w.a dat. of the standard 
ace. to which one governs his life [ef. Fritzsche u. s. p. 
142; also B. ὃ 133, 22 b.; W. 219 (205)]: Acts xxi. 21; 
Gal. v. 16; 2 Co. xii. 18; foll. by ἐν w. a dat. denoting 
either the state in which one is living, or the virtue or 
vice to which he is given [οἵ. ἐν, I. ὃ e. p. 210 bot.]: Ro. 
vi. 4; 2 Co.iv. 2; Eph. ii. 2,10; iv.17; v. 2; Col. iii. 7; 
iv. 5; 2Jn. 4,6; 3 Jn. 3sq.; ἐν βρώμασι, of those who 
have fellowship in the sacrificial feasts, Heb. xiii. 9; ἐν 
Χριστῷ [see ἐν, I.6 b.], to live a life conformed to the 
union entered into with Christ, Col. ii. 6; κατά w. an acc. 
of the pers. or thing furnishing the standard of living, 
[MK. vii. 5]; 2Jn.65; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, 1 Co. 111. 3; κατὰ 
σάρκα, Ro. viii. 1 Rec., 4; xiv. 15; 2 Co. x. 2. B. 
i. q. to pass (one’s) life: ἐν σαρκί, in the body, 2 Co. x. 
3; διὰ πίστεως (see διά, A. 1. 2), 2 Co. v. 7. [Comp.: ἐμ- 
περιπατέω.} * 

περι-πείρω: 1 aor. περιέπειρα ; to pierce through [see 
περί, IIL. 3): τινὰ ξίφεσι, δόρατι, ete., Diod., Joseph., 
Plut., Leian., al.; metaph. ἑαυτὸν . . . ὀδύναις, to torture 
one’s soul with sorrows, 1 Tim. vi. 10 (ἀνηκέστοις κακοῖς, 
Philo in Flace. § 1).* 

περι-πίπτω : 2 aor. περιέπεσον ; fr. Hdt. down; so to 
fall into as to be encompassed by [ef. περί, UT. 1]: λῃ- 
σταῖς, among robbers, Lk. x. 30; τοῖς πειρασμοῖς, Jas. i. 2, 
(αἰκίαις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 2; θανάτῳ, Dan. ii. 9; 
Diod. 1, 77; νόσῳ, Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 7; συμφορᾷ, ibid. 
1,1, 43 τοῖς δεινοῖς, Aesop 79 (110 ed. Halm); ψευδέσι 
k. ἀσεβέσι δόγμασιν, Orig. in Joann. t. ii. § 2; numerous 
other exx. in Passow s. v. 1. ο. [L. and S. s. ν. IT. 3]; to 
which add, 2 Mace. vi.13; x.4; Polyb. 1, 37,1 and 9); 
els τόπον τινά, upon a certain place, Acts xxvii. 41.* 

περι-ποιέω, -@: Mid., pres. περιποιοῦμαι; 1 aor. περι- 
ἐποιησάμην ; (see περί, III. 2); fr. Hdt. down; to make 
to remain over; to reserve, to leave or keep safe, lay by; 
mid. to make to remain for one’s self, i.e. 1. to 
preserve for one’s self (Sept. for WJ) : τὴν ψυχήν, life, 
Lk. xvii. 33 T Tr WH (τὰς ψυχάς, Xen. Cyr. 4, 4, 10). 
2. to get for one’s self, purchase: ri, Acts xx. 28 (Is. 
xliii. 21; δύναμιν, Thue. 1, 9; Xen. mem. 2, 7, 3); τὶ 
ἐμαυτῷ, gain for myself (W. § 38, 6), 1 Tim. iii. 13 (1 
Mace. vi. 44; Xen. an. 5, 6, 17).* 

περι-ποίησις, -ews, 1), (περιποιέω):; 1. a preserving, 
preservation: εἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς, to the preserving of 
the soul, se. that it may be made partaker of eternal sal- 
vation [A. V. unto the saving of the soul], Heb. x. 39 
(Plat. deff. p. 415 e.). 2. possession, one’s own prop- 
erly: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Is. xliii. 20 sq.); Eph. i. 14 (on this 


περιρραίνω 


pass. see ἀπολύτρωσις, 3). 3. an obtaining: with a 
gen. of the thing to be obtained, 1 Th. v. 9; 2 Th. ii. 14.* 

περι-ρραίνω (Tdf. repip., with one p; see P, p) : pf. pass. 
ptep. meptpepappevos (cf. M, μ) ; (περί and paive to sprin- 
kle) ; to sprinkle around, besprinkles ἱμάτιον, pass., Rev. 
xix. 13 Tdf. [al. βεβαμμένον (exc. WH ῥεραντισμένον, see 
ῥαντίζω, and their App. ad loc.)]. (Arstph., Menand., 
Philo, Plut., al.; Sept.)* 

περι-ρρήγνυμι (1, Τ Tr WH περιρ., with one p; see the 
preceding word) : 1 aor. ptep. plur. περιρρήξαντες ; (περί 
and ῥήγνυμι) ; to break off on all sides, break off all 
round, [ef. περί, III. 1]: τὸ ἱμάτιον, to rend or tear off all 
around, Acts xvi. 22. So of garments also in 2 Mace. 
iv. 38 and often in prof. auth.; Aeschyl. sept. 329; Dem. 
p- 403, 3; Polyb. 15, 33, 4; Diod. 17, 35.* 

περι-σπάω, -&: impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. mepteonaro; fr. 
Xen. down; to draw around [περί, III. 1], to draw away, 
distract; pass. metaph., to be driven about mentally, to be 
distracted: περί τι, i.e. to be over-occupied, too busy, 
about a thing, Lk. x. 40 [A. V. cumbered]; in the same 
sense with τῇ διανοίᾳ added, Polyb. 3, 105, 1; 4, 10, 
3; Diod. 1, 74; περισπᾶν τὸν ἀργὸν δῆμον περὶ τὰς ἔξω 
στρατείας, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 43; pass. to be distracted 
with cares, to be troubled, distressed, [ef. W. 23], for nly, 
Eccl. i. 13; iii. 10.* 

περισσεία, -as, 4, (περισσεύω, 4. V-) ; 1. abun- 
dance: τῆς χάριτος, Ro. v.17; τῆς χαρᾶς, 2 Co. viii. 2; εἰς 
περισσείαν, adverbially, superabundantly, superfluously, 
[A. V. out of measure], 2 Co. x. 15, (Boeckh, Corp. in- 
serr. i. p. 668, no. 1378, 6; Byzant. writ). 2. su- 
periorily ; preference, pre-eminence : \', Eccl. vi. 8; for 
yy, Heel. ii. 13; x. 10. 3. gain, profit: for 
jm, Heel. 1. 3; 11. 11; iii. 9, ete. 4. residue, re- 
mains : κακίας, the wickedness remaining over in the 
Christian from his state prior to conversion, Jas. i. 21, 
see περίσσευμα, 2; [al. adhere in this pass. to the mean- 
ing which the word bears elsewhere in the N. T. viz. 
‘excess’, ‘superabundance,’ (A. V. superfluity) ].* 

περίσσευμα, -τος, τό, (περισσεύω) ; 1. abundance, 
in which one delights; opp. to ὑστέρημα, 2 Co. viii. 14 
(13),14; trop. of that which fills the heart, Mt. xii. 34 ; 
Lk. vi. 45, (Eratosth., Plut.). 2. what is left over, 
residue, remains: plur. Mk. viii. 8.* 

περισσεύω ; impf. ἐπερίσσευον (Acts xvi. 5); fut. inf. 
περισσεύσειν (Phil. iv. 12 Rec.'*); 1 aor. ἐπερίσσευσα; 
Pass., pres. περισσεύομαι (Lk. xv. 17, see below); 1 fut. 
3 pers. sing. περισσευθήσεται; (περισσός, q- V-) 5 1. 
intrans. and prop. to exceed a fixed number or measure ; 
to be over and above a certain number or measure: μύριοί 
εἰσιν ἀριθμὸν ... εἷς δὲ περισσεύει, Hes. fr. 14, 4 [elxix. 
(187), ed. Gottling]; hence a. ἰο be over, to remain: 
Jn. vi. 12; τὸ περισσεῦον τῶν κλασμάτων, 1. q. τὰ περισ- 
σεύοντα κλάσματα, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; περισσεύει μοί τι, 
Jn. vi.13 (Tob. iv. 16) ; τὸ περισσεῦσάν τινι, what remained 
over to one, Lk. ix. 17. b. to exist or be at hand 
in abundance: τινί, Lk. xii. 15; τὸ περισσεῦόν τινι, one’s 
abundance, wealth, [(R. V. superfluity) ; opp. to ὑστέ- 
onots], Mk. xii. 44; opp. to ὑστέρημα, Lk. xxi. 4; to be 


50 


Ξ 


Ὁ περισσός 


great (abundant), 2 Co. ἰ. δὴ ; ix.12; Phil.i. 26; περισ- 
σεύει τι εἴς τινα, a thing comes in abundance, or overflows, 
unto one; something falls to the lot of one in large meas- 
ure: Ro. v.15; 2 Co.i. 5°; περισσεύω εἴς τι, to redound 
unto, turn out abundantly for, a thing, 2 Co. viii. 2; ἡ 
ἀλήθεια τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν 
δόξαν αὐτοῦ, i. 6. by my lie it came to pass that God’s 
veracity became the more conspicuous, and becoming 
thus more thoroughly known increased his glory, Ro. 
111. 7; to be increased, τῷ ἀριθμῷ, Acts xvi. 5. c. to 
abound, overflow, i.e. a. to be abundantly furnished 
with, to have in abundance, abound in (a thing): absol. 
[A. V. to abound], to be in affluence, Phil. iv. 18; opp. 
to ὑστερεῖσθαι, ib. 12; in spiritual gifts, 1 Co. xiv. 12; 
with a gen. of the thing in which one abounds (W. § 30, 
8b.; [ef. B. § 132, 12]): ἄρτων, Lk. xv. 17 RGL T Tr 
mrg. B. to be pre-eminent, to excel, [cf. B. § 132, 22]: 
absol. 1 Co. viii. 8; foll. by ἐν w. a dat. of the virtues or 
the actions in which one excels [B. § 132, 12], Ro. 
xv. 13; 1 Co. xv. 58; 2 Co. iii. 9 [here L TTr WH om. 
ἐν]; viii. 7; Col. ii. 7; περισσ. μᾶλλον, to excel still more, 
to increase in excellence, 1 Th.iv. 1, 10; μᾶλλον x. μᾶλλον 
περισσ. Phil. i. 9; περισσ. πλεῖον, to excel more than [A. V. 
exceed; cf. B. § 132, 20 and 22], Mt. v. 20, (περισσ. ὑπέρ 
τινα, 1 Mace. iii. 30; τί ἐπερίσσευσεν ὁ ἄνθρωπος παρὰ τὸ 
κτῆνος; Eccl. iii. 19). 2. by later Greek usage 
transitively [cf. W. p. 23; § 38,1], to make to abound, 
ie. a. to furnish one richly so that he has abun- 
dance: pass., Mt. xiii. 12; xxv. 29; w. gen. of the thing 
with which one is furnished, pass. Lk. xv. 17 WH Trtxt.; 
τὶ eis τινα, to make a thing to abound unto one, to confer a 
thing abundantly upon one, 2 Co. ix. 8 ; Eph. i. 8. b. 
to make abundant or excellent: τί, 2 Co. iv. 153; to cause 
one to excel: τινά, w.a dat. of the thing, 1 Th. iii.12. (ras 
ὥρας, to extend the hours beyond the prescribed time, 
Athen. 2 p. 42 b.) [Comp.: ὑπερ-περισσεύω. * 
περισσός, -7, -dv, (fr. περί, q. v- II. 2), fr. Hes. down, 
Sept. for 1n1, VN}, ete.; exceeding some number or meas- 
ure or rank or need; 1. over and above, more than 
is necessary, superadded: τὸ 7. τούτων, what is added to 
ΓΑ. V. more than; cf. B. § 132, 21 Rem.] these, Mt. v. 37; 
ἐκ περισσοῦ, exceedingly, beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51 
[WH om. Tr br. ἐκ π. 1; xiv. 31 Ree.; ὑπὲρ ἐκ περισσοῦ 
(written as one word ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ [q. v.]), exceediny 
abundantly, supremely, Eph. iii. 20 [ef. B. u.s.]; 1 Th. 
iii. 10; ν. 18 [RG WH txt.]; περισσόν pot ἐστιν, it is 
superfluous for me, 2 Co. ix. 1; περισσὸν ἔγειν, to have 
abundance, Jn. x. 10 (of péev... περισσὰ ἔχουσιν, οἱ δὲ 
οὐδὲ τὰ ἀναγκαῖα δύνανται πορίζεσθαι, Xen. oec. 20, 1); 
neut. compar. περισσότερόν te, something further, more, 
Lk. xii. 4 (L Trmrg. περισσόν) ; περισσότ. the more, ibid. 
48; [περισσύτερον πάντων ete. much more than ail ete. 
Mk. xii. 33 T Tr txt. WH]; adverbially, somewhat more 
[R. V. somewhat abundanily], 2 Co. x. 8; (Vulg. abun- 
dantius [A.V. more abundantly]) i. 6. more plainly, Heb. 
vi. 17; μᾶλλον περισσότερον, much more, Mk. vii. 36; 
περισσότερον πάντων, more [abundantly] than all, 1 Co. 
xv. 10; with an adj. it forms a periphrasis for the com- 


περισσοτέρως 


par. περισσότερον κατάδηλον, more [abundantly] evident, 
Heb. vii. 15 [cf. W. § 35, 1]. 2. superior, extraor- 
dinary, surpassing, uncommon: Mt. v. 47 [A. V. more 
than others]; τὸ περισσόν, as subst., pre-eminence, supe- 
riority, advantage, Ro. iii. 1; compar. περισσότερος, more 
eminent, more remarkable, (οὐκ ἔσῃ περισσότερος, Gen. 
xlix. 3 Symm.; περιττότερος φρονήσει, Plut. mor. p. 57 f. 
de adulatore etc. 14): Mt. xi. 9; Lk. vii. 26, although 
in each pass. περισσύτερον can also be taken as neut. 
(something) more excellent (Vulg. plus [R. V. much more 
thanete.]); with substantives: περισσότερον κρίμα, i.e. 
a severer, heavier judgment, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Ree.; 


ΜΚ. xii. 40; Lk. xx.47; τιμή, greater honor, more [abun- 


dant] honor, 1 Co. xii. 28", [24 ; εὐσχημοσύνη, ibid. 23°]; 
λύπη. 2 Co. ii. 7." 

περισσοτέρως, adv., (fr. περισσῶς, q. v-), [ef. W. § 11, 
2c.; B.69 (61)]; 1. prop. more abundantly (so in 
Diod. 13, 108; Athen. 5 p. 192f.); in the N. T. more, 
in a greater degree; more earnestly, more exceedingly, [ οἵ. 
W. 243 (228)]: Mk. xv. 14 Rec. ; 2 Co. vii. 15; xi. 23; 
Gal. i. 14; Phil. i. 14; 1 Th. ii. 17; Heb. ii. 1; xiii. 19; 
opp: to ἧττον, 2 Co. xii. 15; περισσοτέρως μᾶλλον, much 
more, [R.V. the more exceedingly], 2 Co. vii. 13. 2. 
especially, above others, [A. V. more abundantly]: 2 Co. 
1 Pye abe ΑΝ 

περισσῶς, (περισσός, q. ν.), adv., beyond measure, ex- 
traordinarily (Eur. ; 1. 4. magnificently, Polyb., Athen.) ; 
i. q. greatly, exceedingly: ἐκπλήσσεσθαι, Mk. x. 26; κράζειν, 
Mt. xxvii. 23 and GLT Tr WH in Mk. xv. 14; ἐμμαίνε- 
σθαι, Acts xxvi. 11.* 

περιστερά, -ᾶς, ἡ, Hebr. 731, a dove: Mt. iii. 16; x. 16; 
xxi. 12; Mk.i. 10; xi. 15; Lk. ii. 24; iii. 22; Jn. 1.32; 
ii. 14,16. [From Hat. down. }* 

περι-τέμνω (lon. περιτάμνω) ; 2 
pres. περιτέμνομαι; pf. ptep. περιτετμημένος ; 1 aor. περι- 
εἐτμήθην; [fr. Hes. down]; Sept. chiefly for 539; to cut 
around (cf. περί, III. 1]: τινά, to circumcise, cut off one’s 
prepuce (used of that well-known rite by which not only 
the male children of the Israelites, on the eighth day 
after birth, but subsequently also ‘proselytes of right- 
eousness’ were consecrated to Jehovah and introduced 
into the number of his people; [ef. BB. DD. s. v. Cir- 
cumcision; Oehler’s O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) 88 87, 88; 
Miller, Barnabasbrief, p. 227 sq.]), Lk. i. 59; ii. 21; Jn. 
vii. 22; Acts vii. 8; xv.53 xvi. 3; xxi. 21; of the same 
rite, Diod. 1,28; pass. and mid. to get one’s self circum- 
cised, present one’s self to be circumcised, receive circum- 
cision [ef. W. § 38, 3]: Acts xv. 1, 24 Rec.; 1 Co. vii. 18; 
Gal. ii. 3; v.2sq.; vi. 12sq.; with ra αἰδοῖα added, Hat. 
2, 36 and 104; Joseph. antt. 1, 10,5; ce. Ap. 1,22. Since 
by the rite of circumcision a man was separated from 
the unclean world and dedicated to God, the verb is 
transferred to denote the extinguishing of lusts and the 
removal of sins, Col. ii. 11, οἵ. Jer. iv. 4; Deut. x. 16, and 
eccl. writ. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 3].* 

περι-τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. περιτιθέασιν (Mk. xv. 17; see 
reff. in ἐπιτίθημι) ; 1 aor. περιέθηκα; 2 aor. ptep. περιθείς, 
περιθέντες; fr. Hom. down ; a. prop. to place 


aor. περιέτεμον ; Pass., 


506 


περιφέρω 


around, set about, [cf. περί, 111. 1]: τινί τι, as φραγμὸν τῷ 
ἀμπελῶνι, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; to put a garment on 
one, Mt. xxvii. 28; στέφανον, put on (encircle one’s head 
with) a crown, Mk. xv. 17 (Sir. vi. 31; Plat. Alcib. 2 
p- 151 a.) ; τί τινι, to put or bind one thing around anoth- 
er, Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Jn. xix. 29. b. trop. 
τινί τι, to present, bestow, confer, a thing upon one (so in 
class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down, as ἐλευθερίαν, Hdt. 3, 142; 
δόξαν, Dem. p. 1417, 3 ; see Passow ii. p. 881 sq.; [L. and 
S. s. v. IL.]; τὸ ὄνομα, Sap. xiv. 21; Thue. 4, 87) : τιμήν, 
1 Co. xii. 23; Esth. i. 20.* 

περι-τομή, -ῆς, ἡ, (περιτέμνω), circumcision (on which 
see περιτέμνωλ ; a. prop. a. the act or rite of 
circumcision : Jn. vii. 22 sq.; Acts vii. 8; Ro. iv. 11; Gal. 
v.11; Phil. iii. 5; of ἐκ τῆς reper. (see ἐκ, 11. 7), the cir- 
cumcised, they of the circumcision, used of Jews, Ro. 
iv. 12; of Christians gathered from among the Jews, 
Acts xi. 2; Gal. ii. 12; Tit. i. 10; of ὄντες ἐκ περιτ. Col. 
iv. 11. B. the state of circumcision, the being cir- 
cumcised: Ro. ii. 25-28; iii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 19; Gal. v. 6; 
vi. 15; Col. iii. 11; ἐν περιτομῇ dv, circumcised, Ro. iv. 
10. y. by meton. ‘the circumcision’ for of περιτμη- 
θέντες the circumcised, i.e. Jews: Ro. iii. 80; iv. 9, 12; 
xv. 8; Gal. ii. 7-9; Eph. ii. 11 ; of ἐκ περιτομῆς πιστοί, 
Christian converts from among the Jews, Jewish Chris- 
tians, Acts x. 45. b. metaph. a. of Chris- 
tians: (ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν) 7 περιτομή, separated from the un- 
clean multitude and truly consecrated to God, Phil. iii. 
3 [(where see Bp. Lghtft.) ]. B. ἡ περιτομὴ ἀχειρο- 
ποίητος, the extinction of the passions and the removal 
of spiritual impurity (see περιτέμνω, fin.), Col. 11. 11°; ἡ 
περιτομὴ καρδίας in Ro. ii. 29 denotes the same thing ; 
περιτ. Χριστοῦ, of which Christ is the author, Col. ii. 11°. 
(The noun περιτομή occurs three times in the O. T., viz. 
Gen. xvii. 13; Jer. xi. 16; for man, Ex. iv. 26 ; besides 
in Philo, whose tract περὶ περιτομῆς is found in Mangey’s 
ed. ii. pp. 210-212 [Richter’s ed. iv. pp. 282-284]; Jo 
seph. antt. 1, 10,5; [18,11 fin.; 6. Ap. 2, 13, 1. 6]; plur., 
antte Ls) 12. 20) 

περι-τρέπω ; to turn about [mepi, III. 1], to turn; to 
transfer or change by turning : τὶ or τινὰ εἴς τι, ἃ pers. ΟΥ̓ 
thing info some state; once so in the N. T. viz. σὲ els 
μανίαν περιτρέπει, is turning thee mad, Acts xxvi. 24; 
τοὺς παρόντας εἰς χαρὰν περιέστρεψε, Joseph. antt. 9, 4, 4; 
τὸ θεῖον εἰς ὀργὴν περιτραπέν, 2, 14,1. In various other 
uses in Grk. auth. [fr. Lys. and Plat. on].* 

περι-τρέχω : 2 aor. [περιέδραμον T Tr WH], ptep. περι- 
δραμόντες [RGL]; fr. [Hom.], Theogn., Xen., Plat. 
down; to run around, run round about: with an ace. of 
place, Mk. vi. 55. (Sept. twice for wiv, Jer. ν. 1; Am. 
viii. 12.) * 

περι-φέρω ; pres. pass. περιφέρομαι; fr. Hdt. down; to 
carry round: to bear about everywhere with one, ri, 
2 Co. iv. 10; to carry hither and thither, τοὺς κακῶς 
ἔχοντας, Mk. vi. 55 (where the Evangelist wishes us to 
conceive of the sick as brought to Jesus while he is 
travelling about and visiting different places); pass. to 
be driven [A. V. carried] about: παντὶ ἀνέμῳ τῆς διδασκα- 


περιφρονέω 


λίας, i.e. in doubt and hesitation to be led away now to 
this opinion, now to that, Eph. iv. 14. In Heb. xiii. 9 
and Jude 12 for περιφέρ. editors from Griesbach on have 
restored παραφέρ." 

περι-φρονέω, -@ ; 1. to consider or examine on all 
sides [mepi, III. 1], i. e. carefully, thoroughly, (Arstph. 
nub. 741). 2. (fr. περί, beyond, III. 2), to set one’s 
self in thought beyond (exalt one’s self in thought above) a 
pers. or thing; to contemn, despise: τινός (cf. Kiihner 
§ 419, 1b. vol. ii. p. 325), Tit. ii. 15 (4 Mace. vi. 9; vii. 
16; xiv. 1; Plut., al. ; τοῦ ζῆν, Plat. Ax. p.372; Aeschin. 
dial. Socr. 3, 22).* 

arepl-xwpos, -ov, (περί and χῶρος), lying round about, 
neighboring, (Plut., Aelian., Dio Cass.); in the Scrip- 
tures ἡ περίχωρος, 86. γῆ, the region round about [q. v. in 
B. 1).1: Mt. xiv. 35; Mk.i. 28; vi.55[RG@Ltxt.]; Lk. 
iii. 3; iv. 14,37; vii.17; viii.37; Acts xiv. 6, (Gen. xix. 
17; Deut. iii. 13, ete.; τῆς γῆς τῆς περιχώρου, Gen. xix. 
28 cod. Alex.) ; ἡ mepix. rod ᾿Ιορδάνου, Lk. iii. 3 (Gen. xiii. 
10sq.; for }172 133, the region of the Jordan [ef. B. D. 
u. s.]); by meton. for its inhabitants: Mt. iii.5. (τὸ 
περίχωρον and τὰ περίχωρα, Deut. iii. 4; 1 Chr. v. 16; 2 
Chr. iv. 17, etc.) * 

περίψημα, -ros, τό; (fr. περιψάω ‘to wipe off all round’; 
and this fr. περί [q. v. III. 1], and Wa ‘to wipe,’ ‘rub’), 
prop. what is wiped off; dirt rubbed off; offscouring, 
scrapings: 1 Co. iv. 13, used in the same sense as περι- 
κάθαρμα, q.v. Suidas and other Greek lexicographers 
s.v. relate that the Athenians, in order to avert public 
calamities, yearly threw a criminal into the sea as an 
offering to Poseidon; hence ἀργύριον . . . περίψημα τοῦ 
παιδίου ἡμῶν γένοιτο, (as if tosay) let it become an expi- 
atory offering, a ransom, for our child, i. 6. in comparison 
with the saving of our son’s life let it be to us a despi- 
cable and worthless thing, Tob. v. 18 (where see Fritz- 
sche; [ef. also Miiller on Barn. ep. 4,9]). It is used 
of a man who in behalf of religion undergoes dire 
trials for the salvation of others, Ignat. ad Eph. 8, 1; 
18,1; [see Bp. Lghtft.’s note on the former passage ].* 

περπερεύομαι ; (to be πέρπερος, i. e. vain-glorious, brag- 
gart, Polyb. 32, 6,5; 40, 6, 2; Epict. diss. 3, 2, 14); to 
boast one’s self [A. V. vaunt one’s self]: 1 Co. xiii. 4 (An- 
tonin. 5, 5; the compound ἐμπερπερεύεσθαι is used of 
self-display, employing rhetorical embellishments in ex- 
tolling one’s self excessively, in Cic. ad Attic. 1, 14. 
Hesych. περπερεύεται" κατεπαίρεται) ; cf. Osiander [or 
Wetstein] on 1 Co. 1. c. [Gataker on Marc. Antonin. 5, 
5 p. 1451." 

Tlepols [lit. ‘a Persian woman’, 4, ace.-ida, Persis, a 
Christian woman: Ro. xvi. 12.* 

πέρυσι, (fr. πέρας), adv., last year; the year just past: 
ἀπὸ πέρυσι, for a year past, a year ago, [W. 422 (393)], 
2 Co. viii. 19; ix. 2. ([Simon.], Arstph., Plat., Plut., 
Leian.) * 

πετάομαι, -ὥμαι; ἃ doubtful later Grk. form for the 
earlier πέτομαι (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 581; Béitm. Ausf. 
Spr. ii. p. 271 sq.; ef. W. 88 (84); [B. 65 (58); Veitch 
8. v.]): to fly: in the N.T. found only in pres. ptcp. πε- 


507 


Πέτρος 


τώμενος, Rec. in Rev. iv. 7; viii. 13; xiv. 6; xix. 17, 
where since Griesbach πετόμενος has been restored.* 
πετεινός, -7, -όν, (Attic for πετηνός, fr. πέτομαι), flying, 
winged ; in the N. T. found only in neut. plur. πετεινά 
and τὰ πετεινά, as subst., flying or winged animals, birds: 
Mt. xiii. 4; Mk.iv.4 [GL T Tr WH]; Lk. xii. 24; Ro.i. 
23; Jas. ill. 7; τὰ mer. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Sept. for Ὁ ΣΟ ΤΙ >i}; 
see οὐρανός, 1 b.), the birds of heaven, i.e. flying in the 
heavens (air), Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 4 
[Rec.], 32; Lk. viii. 5; ix. 585; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12 [here 
LT Tr WH om. τά]; xi. 6. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)]* 
πέτομαι ; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 43; to fly: Rev. 
iv. 7; viii. 13; xii. 14; xiv. 6; xix. 17; see merdopat.* 
πέτρα, -as, ἡ, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for yd and Ἔχ; 
a rock, ledge, cliff’; a. prop.: Mt. vii. 24 sq. ; XXvii. 
51,60; Mk. xv. 46; Lk. vi.48; 1 Co. x.4 (on which see 
πνευματικός, 3 a.) ; a projecting rock, crag, Rev. vi. 15sq.; 
rocky ground, Lk. viii. 6, 13. b. arock, large stone: 
Ro. ix. 33; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). c. metaph. a man like 
a rock, by reason of his firmness and strength of soul: 
Mt. xvi. 18 [some interpp. regard the distinction (gen- 
erally observed in classic Greek ; see the Comm. and cf. 
Schmidt, Syn. ch. 51, §§ 4-6) between πέτρα, the massive 
living rock, and πέτρος, a detached but large fragment, 
as important for the correct understanding of this pas- 
sage; others explain the different genders here as due 
first to the personal then to the material reference. 
Cf. Meyer, Keil, al.; Green, Crit. Note on Jn. i. 43].* 
Πέτρος, -ov, ὁ, (an appellative prop. name, signifying 
‘a stone,’ ‘arock,’ ‘a ledge’ or ‘cliff’; used metaph. of a 
soul hard and unyielding, and so resembling a rock, 
Soph. O. R. 334; Eur. Med. 28; Here. fur. 1397; answer- 
ing to the Chald. Κηφᾶς, q. v., Jn. i. 42 (43)), Peter, the 
surname of the apostle Simon. He was a native of 
Bethsaida, a town of Galilee, the son of a fisherman (see 
*Iwavyns, 3, and "Iwvas, 2), and dwelt with his wife at 
Capernaum, Mt. viii. 14; ΜΚ. 1. 30; Lk. iv. 38, ef. 1 Co. 
ix. 5. He had a brother Andrew, with whom he fol- 
lowed the occupation of a fisherman, Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 
16; Lk. vy. 3. Both were received by Jesus as his com- 
panions, Mt. iv. 19; Mk. 1. 17; Lk. v. 10; Jn. i. 40-42 
(41-43); and Simon, whose pre-eminent courage and 
firmness he discerned and especially relied on for the fu- 
ture establishment of the kingdom of God, he honored 
with the name of Peter, Jn. i. 42 (43); Mt. xvi. 18; Mk. 
iii. 16. Excelling in vigor of mind, eagerness to learn, 
and love for Jesus, he enjoyed, together with James and 
John the sons of Zebedee, the special favor and intima- 
cy of his divine Master. After having for some time 
presided, in connection with John and James the brother 
of our Lord [see ᾿Ιάκωβος, 3], over the affairs of the 
Christians at Jerusalem, he seems to have gone abroad 
to preach the gospel especially to Jews (Gal. ii. 9; 1 Co. 
ix. 5; 1 Pet. v.13; Papias in Euseb. 3, 39, 15; for Papias 
states that Peter employed Mark as ‘interpreter’ (ἑρμη- 
veutns), an aid of which he had no need except beyond 
the borders of Palestine, especially among those who 
spoke Latin [but on the disputed meaning of the word 


πετρώδης 


‘interpreter’ here, see Morison, Com. on Mk., ed. 2, In- 
trod. p. xxix. sqq.]). But just as, on the night of the 
betrayal, Peter proved so far faithless to himself as thrice 
to deny that he was a follower of Jesus, so also some 
time afterwards at Antioch he made greater conces- 
sions to the rigorous Jewish Christians than Christian 
liberty permitted; accordingly he was rebuked by Paul 
for his weakness and ‘dissimulation’ (ὑπόκρισις), Gal. 
ii. 11 sqq. Nevertheless, in the patristic age Jewish 
Christians did not hesitate to claim the authority of 
Peter and of James the brother of the Lord in defence 
of their narrow views and practices. This is not the 
place to relate and refute the ecclesiastical traditions 
concerning Peter’s being the founder of the church at 
Rome and bishop of it for twenty-five years and more; 
the discussion of them may be found in Hase, Protes- 
tant. Polemik gegen die rom.-kathol. Kirche, ed. 4, p. 
123 sqq-; [ef. Schaff, Church History, 1882, vol. i. §§ 25, 
26; Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2, vol. xi. p. 524 sqq., and (for 
reff.) p. 537 sq.]. This one thing seems to be evident 
from Jn. xxi. 18 sqq., that Peter suffered death by eru- 
cifixion [ef. Keil ad loc.; others doubt whether Christ’s 
words contain anything more than a general prediction 
of martyrdom]. If he was crucified at Rome, it must 
have been several years after the death of Paul. [Cf. 
BB. DD. and reff. u.s.] Ηδ is called in the N. T., at 
one time, simply Σίμων (once Συμεών, Acts xv. 14), and 
(and that, too, most frequently [see B. D. 5. v. Peter, sub 
fin. (p. 2459 Am. ed.)]), Πέτρος and Κηφᾶς (4: v.), then 
again Σίμων Πέτρος, Mt. xvi. 16; Lk. ν. 8 ; Jn. [i. 42 (43) ]; 
vi. [8], 68; xiii. 6, 9,24, [36]; xviii. 10, 15, 25; xx. 2, 6; 
xxi. 2 sq. 7,11, 15; once Συμεὼν Πέτρος (2 Pet. i. 1 where 
L WH txt. Σίμων) ; Σίμων ὁ λεγόμενος Πέτρος, Mt. iv. 18; 
X. 2; Σίμων 6 ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος, Acts x. 18; xi. 13; 
Σίμων ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος, Acts x. 5, 32. 

πετρώδης, -es, (fr. πέτρα and εἶδος ; hence prop. ‘ rock- 
like,’ ‘having the appearance of rock’), rocky, stony: τὸ 
πετρῶδες and ra πετρώδη, of ground full of rocks, Mt. xiii. 
5,20; Mk. iv. 5,16. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., Diod. 3, 45 
(44), Plut., al.) * 

πήγανον, -ov, τό, [thought to be fr. πήγνυμε to make 
solid, on account of its thick, fleshy leaves; οἵ. Vanicek 
p- 457], rue: Lk. xi. 42. (Theophr. hist. plant. 1, 3, 4; 
Dioscorid. 3, 45 (52); Plut., al.) [B. D.s.v.; Tristram, 
Nat. Hist. etc. p.478; Carruthers in the “ Bible Educa- 
tor,” iii. 216 sq.]* 

πηγή, -ῆς, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for Py, PW, 
Wp2; @ fountain, spring: Jas. iii. 11, and Ree. in 12; 
2 Pet. ii. 17; ὕδατος ἁλλομένου, Jn. iv. 14; τῶν ὑδάτων, 
Rey. viii. 10; xiv. 7; xvi. 4; of a well fed by a spring, 
Jn. iv. 6. ζωῆς πηγαὶ ὑδάτων, Rev. vii. 17; ἡ π. τ. ὕδατος 
τῆς ζωῆς, Rev. xxi. 6, (on both pass. see in ξωή, p. 274); 
ἡ π. TOU ἥρω a flow of blood, Mk. v. 29." 

ahyvupt: 1 aor. ἔπηξα; fr. Hom. down; to make fast, 
lo fit; to ee together, to build by fastening together : 
σκηνήν, Heb. viii. 2 [A. V. pitched. Comp.: προσ-πή- 
γνυμι.}" 

πηδάλιον, -ου, τό, (fr. πηδόν the blade of an oar, an 


508 


TiKpaives 


oar), fr. Hom. down, aship’s rudder: Acts xxvii. 40 [on 
the plur. see Smith, Voy. and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 4th 
ed., p. 183 sqq.; B.D.s.v. Ship (2); ef. Graser, Das 
Seewesen des Alterthums, in the Philologus for 1865, 
Ρ. 266 sq.]; Jas. iii. 4.* 

πηλίκος, -n, -ov, (fr. ἧλιξ [?]), interrog., how great, how 
large: in a material reference (denoting geometrical 
magnitude as disting. fr. arithmetical, πόσος) (Plat. Meno 
p- 82d.; p.83e.; Ptol. 1, 3,3; Zech. ii. 2, [6]), Gal. vi. 
11, where cf. Winer, Riickert, Hilgenfeld, [Hackett in 
B. Ὁ. Am. ed. s. v. Epistle; but see Bp. Lghtft. or Meyer]. 
in an ethical reference, i. q. how distinguished, Heb. vii. 
4." 

πηλός, -ov, ὁ, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a. 
clay, which the potter uses (Is. xxix. 16; xli. 25; Nah. 
iii. 14): Ro. ix. 21. Ὁ. i. q. mud [wet ‘clay’]: Jn. 
ix. 6, 11, 14 sq.” 

πήρα, -as, 7, α wallet (a leathern sack, in which travel- 
lers and shepherds carried their provisions) [A. V. scrip 
(q- v- in B.D.)]: Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix.3; x. 4; 
xxii. 35 sq. (Hom., Arstph., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., 
Leian., al.; with τῶν βρωμάτων added, Judith xiii. 10.) * 

πῆχυς. Zen. πήχεως (not found in the N. T.), gen. plar. 
πηχῶν contr. fr. Ionic πηχέων (Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17; 
1 K. vii. 3 (15), 39 (2) ;_Esth. vii. 9; zeke xl. 5) ace. to 
later usage, for the earlier and Attic πήχεων, which is 
common in the Sept. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 245 sq.; [ WH. 
App. p- 157]; W.§9, 2e.), 6, the fore-arm i.e. that part 
of the arm between the hand and the elbow-joint (Hom. 
Od.17,38; Il. 21,166,etc.); hence a cubit, (ell, Lat. ulna), 
a measure of length equal to the distance from the joint 
of the elbow to the tip of the middle finger [i.e. about 
one foot and a half, but its precise length varied and is 
disputed; see B. Ὁ. s.v. Weights and Measures, IT. 1]: 
Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [on these pass. ef. ἡλικία, 1 a.]; 
Jn. xxi.8; Rev. xxi. 17. (Sept. very often for 758.) * 

πιάζω (Doric for πιέζω, cf. B. 66 (58)): 1 aor. ἐπίασα; 
1 aor. pass. ἐπιάσθην ; 1. to lay hold of: twa τῆς 
χειρός, Acts iii. 7 [Theoer. 4, 35]. 2. to take, cap- 
ture: fishes, Jn. xxi. 3, 10; θηρίον, pass., Rev. xix. 20, 
(Cant. ii. 15). to take i.e. apprehend: a aay! Ee order 
to imprison him, Jn. vii. 30, 32, 44; viii. 20; x. 39; xi. 
57; Acts xii. 4; 2 Co. xi. 32. [Come.: inorruite * 

métw: pf. pass. ptep. πεπιεσμένος ; fr. Hom. down; to 
press, press together: Lk. vi. 38. Sept. once for 17, Mic. 
vi. 15.* 

πιθανολογία, -as, 9, (fr. πιθανολόγος ; and this fr. πιθανός, 
on which see πειθός, and λόγος), speech adapted to per- 
suade, discourse in which probable arguments are ad- 
duced ; once so in class. Grk., viz. Plat. Theaet. p. 162 e.; 
in a bad sense, persuasiveness of speech, specious dis- 
course leading others into error: Col. ii. 4, and several 
times in eccl. writers.* 

[πιθός, see πειθός and cf. I, «. 

πικραίνω: fut. πικρανῶ ; Pass., pres. πικραίνομαι ; 1 aor. 
émixpavOnv; (πικρός, q- V-) 5 1. prop. to make bitter: 
τὰ ὕδατα, pass., Rev. viii. 11; τὴν κοιλίαν, to produce 
a bitter taste in the stomach (Vulg. amarico), Rev. x 


πικρία 


9 sq. 2. trop. to embitter, exasperate, i.e. render 
angry, indignant ; pass. to be embittered, irritated, (Plat., 
Dem.,al.) : πρός teva, Col. iii. 19 (Athen. 6 p. 242 ο.; ἐπί 
τινα, Ex. xvi. 20; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 15; 1 Esdr. iv. 31; 
[ἔν τινι, Ruth i. 20]); contextually i. q. to visit with bitter- 
ness, to grieve, (deal bitterly with), Job xxvii. 2; 1 Mace. 
iii. 1. [Come.: παρα-πικραίνω.] * 

πικρία, -as, 7, (πικρός), bitterness: χολὴ πικρίας, 1. q. 
χολὴ πικρά [W. 34, 8 b.; B. § 132, 10], bitter gall, i. 4. 
extreme wickedness, Acts viii. 23; ῥίζα πικρίας [reff. as 
above], a bitter root, and so producing bitter fruit, Heb. 
xii. 15 (fr. Deut. xxix. 18 cod. Alex.), cf. Bleek ad loc. ; 
metaph. bitterness, i.e. bitter hatred, Eph. iv. 31; of 
speech, Ro. iii. 14 after Ps. ix. 28 (x.7). (In various 
uses in Sept., [Dem., Aristot.], Theophr., Polyb., Plut., 
al.) * 

πικρός, -d, -dv, [ ἔτ. τ. meaning ‘to cut,” ‘prick’; Vaniéek 
534; Curtius §100; Fick i. 145], fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
for 13; bitter: prop. Jas. iii. 11 (opp. to τὸ γλυκύ); 
metaph. harsh, virulent, Jas. iii. 14.* 

πικρῶς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], bitterly: metaph. 
ἔκλαυσε, i.e. with poignant grief, Mt. xxvi. 75; Lk. xxii. 
62 [here WH br. the cl.]; cf. πικρὸν δάκρυον, Hom. Od. 
4, 153.* 

Πιλάτος, [L] Tr better Πιλᾶτος ([on the accent in 
codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; cf. Chandler § 326; B. 
p- 6n.J]; W. § 6,1 m.), T WH incorrectly Πειλᾶτος [but 
see Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 sq.; WH. App. p. 155; and cf. εἰ» 
4], (a Lat. name, i.q. ‘armed with a pilum or javelin,’ like 
Torquatus i. q. ‘adorned with the collar or neck-chain’; 
[so generally; but some would contract it from pileatus 
i. 6. ‘ wearing the felt cap’ (pileus), the badge of a manu- 
mitted slave; οἵ. Leyrer in Herzog as below; Plumptre 
in B. D. s. v. Pilate (note) ]), -ov, ὁ [on the use of the art. 
with the name οἵ. W. 113 (107) n.], Pontius Pilate, the 
fifth procurator of the Roman emperor in Judea and 
Samaria (having had as predecessors Coponius, Marcus 
Ambivius, Annius Rufus, and Valerius Gratus). [Some 
writ. (e.g. BB. DD. s.v.) call Pilate the sixth procura- 
tor, reckoning Sabinus as the first, he having had 
charge for a time, during the absence of Archelaus at 
Rome, shortly after the death of Herod; ef. Joseph. 
antt. 17, 9, 3.] He was sent into Judea in the year 
26 A.D., and remained in office ten years; (cf. Keim, 
Jesus von Naz. iii. p. 485 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. 226 sq.]). 
Although he saw that Jesus was innocent, yet, fearing 
that the Jews would bring an accusation against him be- 
fore Caesar for the wrongs he had done them, and dread- 
ing the emperor’s displeasure, he delivered up Jesus to 
their blood-thirsty demands and ordered him to be eru- 
cified. At length, in consequence of his having ordered 
the slaughter of the Samaritans assembled at Mt. Geri- 
zim, Vitellius, the governor of Syria and father of the Vi- 
tellius who was afterwards emperor, removed him from 
office and ordered him to go to Rome and answer their 
accusations; but before his arrival Tiberius died. Cf. 
Joseph. antt. 18, 2-4 and ch. 6,5; b.j. 2, 9,2 and 4; Philo, 
leg. ad Gaium § 38; Tac. ann. 15,44. Eusebius (h.e. 2, 


509 


πίναξ 


7, and Chron. ad ann. I. (1811) reports that he died by his 
own hand. Various stories about his death are related 
in the Evangelia apocr. ed. Tischendorf p. 426 sqq. 
[Eng. trans. p. 231 sqq.]. He is mentioned in the N.T. 
in Mt. xxvii. 2 sqq.; Mk. xv. 1 sqq.; Lk. iii. 1; xiii. 1; 
xxiii. 1 sqq.; Jn. xviii. 29 sqqy.; xix.1sqq.; Acts iii. 13; 
iv. 27; xiii. 28; 1 Tim. vi. 13. A full account of him is 
given in Win. RWB. 5. v. Pilatus; [BB. DD. ibid.]; 
Ewald, Geschichte Christus’ u. seiner Zeit, ed. 3 p. 82 
sqq.; Leyrer in Herzog xi. p. 663 sqq. [ed. 2 p. 685 5α4.7; 
Renan, Vie de Jésus, 14me 64. p. 413 sqq. [ Eng. trans. 
(N. Y. 1865) p. 533 sqq.]; Alépper in Schenkel iv. p. 
581 sq.; Schirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. §17¢. p. 252 sqq.; 
[ Warneck, Pont. Pilatus u.s.w. (pp. 210. Gotha, 1867) }.* 

πίμπλημι (a lengthened form of the theme ΠΛΈΩ, 
whence πλέος, πλήρης [cf. Curtius § 3007): 1 aor. ἔπλησα; 
Pass., 1 fut. πλησθήσομαι; 1 aor. émAnoOnv; fr. Hom. on; 
Sept. for x20; also for jrawn (to satiate) and pass. yaw 
(to be full); to fill: ri, Lk. ν. 1; τί τινος [W. § 30, 8 b.], 
a thing with something, Mt. xxvii. 48; [Jn. xix. 29 
RG]; in pass., Mt. xxii. 10; Acts xix. 29; [ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς, 
Jn. xii. 3 Tr mrg.; cf. W. ἃ. 5. note; B.§ 132,12]. what 
wholly takes possession of the mind is said lo fill it: 
pass. φόβου, Lk. v. 26; θάμβους, Acts iii. 10; ἀνοίας, Lk. 
vi. 11; ¢ydov, Acts v.17; xiii. 45; θυμοῦ, Lk. iv. 28; Acts 
iii. 10; πνεύματος ἁγίου, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67; Acts ii. 4; iv. 
8,31; ix.17; xiii. 9. prophecies are said πλησθῆναι, 
i. e. to come to pass, to be confirmed by the event, Lk. xxi. 
22GLT Tr WH (for Ree. πληρωθῆναι). time is said 
πλησθῆναι, to be fulfilled or completed, i. e. finished, 
elapsed, Lk. i. 23, 57 [W. 324 (304); B. 267 (230)]; ii. 
6, 21 sq.; so 8902, Job xv. 32; and xn to (ful-) fill the 
time, i. 6. to complete, fill up, Gen. xxix. 27; Job xxxix. 2. 
[Compe. : ἐμ-πίπλημι.} " 

πιμπράω (for the more common πίμπρημι [ef. Curtius 
§ 378, Vaniéek p. 510 sq.]): [pres. inf. pass. πιμπρᾶσθαι; 
but RGL Tr WH πίμπρασθαι fr. the form πίμπρημι (Td. 
ἐμπιπρᾶσθαι, q.V-)]; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [ (yet only the 
aor. fr. πρήθω)] down; to blow, to burn, [onthe connection 
betw. these meanings cf. Zbeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. πρήθω] ; 
in the Scriptures four times to cause to swell, to render 
tumid, [ef. Soph. Lex. s.v.]: γαστέρα, Num. ν. 22; pass. fo 
swell, become swollen, of parts of the body, Num. v. 21, 27: 
Acts xxviii. 6 (see above and in ἐμπιπράω). [Comp. ἐμ- 
πι-πράω." 

πινακίδιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of πινακίς, -ἰδος), [Aristot., 
alas a. a small tablet. b. spec. α writing-tab- 
let: Lk. i. 63 [Tr mrg. mwaxida; see the foll. word]; 
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74." 

[mvaxls, -i80s, ἡ, iq. πινακίδιον (q.v.): Lk.i.63 Trmrg. 
(Epict., Plut., Artem., al.)*] 

πίναξ, -axos, 6, (com. thought to be fr. ΠΙΝΟΣ a pine, 
and so prop. ‘a pine-board’; ace. to the conjecture of 
Buttmann, Ausf. Spr. i. 74 n., fr. mvaé for πλάξ [i. 6. 
anything broad and flat (cf. Eng. plank)] with ¢ in- 
serted, as in πινυτός for πνυτός [ace. to Fick i. 146 fr. 
Skr. pinaka, a stick, staff]), fr. Hom. down; l.a 
board, a tablet. 2. a dish, plate, platter: Mt. xiv. 8, 


πινὼω 


11; Mk. vi. 25, [27 Lehm. br.], 28; Lk. xi. 39; Hom. Od. 
1, 141; 16, 49; al.* 

πίνω; impf. ἔπινον ; fut. πίομαι [cf. W. 90 sq. (86)], 2 
pers. sing. πίεσαι (Lk. xvii. 8 [(see reff. in κατακαυχάο- 
pa)}); pé. 3 pers. sing. (Rev. xviii. 3) πέπωκε RG, but 
LT WH org. plur. -καν, for which L ed. ster. Tr txt. 
WH txt. read πέπτωκαν (see γίνομαι) ; 2 aor. ἔπιον, impy. 
mie (Lk. xii. 19), inf. πιεῖν ([Mt. xx. 22; xxvii. 34 (not 
Tdf.); Mk. x. 38]; Acts xxiii. 12 [not WH], 21; Ro. 
xiv. 21 [not WH], ete.), and in colloquial form πῖν (Lehm. 
in Jn. iv. 9; Rev. xvi. 6), and πεῖν (T Tr WH in Jn. iv. 
7,9 sq.; T WH in 1 Co. ix. 4; x. 7; Rev. xvi. 6; Tin Mt. 
xxvii. 34 (bis); WH in Acts xxiii. 12, 21; Ro. xiv. 21, 
and often among the var. of the codd.) —on these forms 
see [esp. WH. App. p. 170]; Fritzsche, De conformatione 
N. T. critica ete. p. 27 sq.; B. 66 (58) sq.; [Curtius, Das 
Verbum, ii. 103]; Sept. for 7nw; [fr. Hom. down]; to 
drink: absol., Lk. xii. 19; Jn. iv. 7, 10; 1 Co. xi. 25; 
figuratively, to receive into the soul what serves to re- 
fresh, strengthen, nourish it unto life eternal, Jn. vii. 37; 
on the various uses of the phrase ἐσθίειν x. πίνειν see in 
ἐσθίω, a.; τρώγειν κ. πίνειν, of those living in fancied 
security, Mt. xxiv. 38; πίνω with an ace. of the thing, to 
drink a thing [ef. W. 198 (187) n.], Mt. vi. 25 [ἃ Tom. 
WH br. the cl. ], 31; xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; xvi. 18; Rev. 
xvi. 6; to use a thing for drink, Lk. i. 15; xii. 29; Ro. 
xiv. 21; 1Co. x. 4 [ef. W. § 40, 3b.]; τὸ αἷμα of Christ, 
see αἷμα, fin.; τὸ ποτήριον i. 6. what is in the cup, 1 Co. x. 
21; xi. 27, etc. (see ποτήριον, a.). ἡ γῆ is said πίνειν τὸν 
ὑετόν, to suck in, absorb, imbibe, Heb. vi. 7 (Deut. xi. 11; 
Hat. 3,117; 4, 198; Verg. ecl. 8, 111 sat prata bibe- 
runt). πίνω ἐκ w. a gen. of the vessel out of which 
one drinks, ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23; 
1 Co. x. 4 [ef. above]; xi. 28, (Arstph. eqq. 1289); ἐκ νυ. 
a gen. denoting the drink of which as a supply one 
drinks, Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος, Jn. iv. 
13 sq.; ἐκ Tod οἴνου (or θυμοῦ), Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3 [L 
om. Tr WH br. τοῦ οἴνου] ; ἀπό w. a gen. of the drink, 
Lk. xxii. 18. [Cf B. §132, 7; W. 199 (187). Comp.: 
κατα-, συμ-πίνω.] 

πιότης, -ητος, 1), (πίων fat), falness: Ro. xi. 17. 
tot., Theophr., al.; Sept. for 7071.) * 

πιπράσκω : impf. ἐπίπρασκον ; pf. mémpaxa; Pass., pres. 
ptcp. πιπρασκόμενος ; pf. ptep. πεπραμένος ; 1 aor. ἐπρά- 
θην (fr. περάω to cross, to transport to a distant land) ; 
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for 137; to sell: τί, 
Mt. xiii. 46 [on the use of the pf., ef. Soph. Glossary ete. 
Introd. § 82,4]; Acts ii. 45; iv. 34; v.4; w. gen. of price, 
Mt. xxvi. 9; Mk. xiv. 5; Jn. xii. 5, (Deut. xxi. 14); τινά, 
one into slavery, Mt. xviii. 25; hence metaph. πεπραμέ- 
vos ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν, [A. V. sold under sin] i. e. entirely 
under the control of the love of sinning, Ro. vii. 14 
(ἐπράθησαν τοῦ ποιῆσαι τὸ πονηρόν, 2 K. xvii. 17; 1 Mace. 
i. 15, cf. 1 K. xx. (xxi.) 25; w.a dat. of the master to 


(Aris- 


whom one is sold as a slave, Ley. xxv. 39; Deut. xv. 12; - 


xxviii. 68; Bar. iv. 6; Soph. Trach. 252; ἑαυτόν τινι, of 
one bribed to give himself up wholly to another’s will, 
τῷ Φιλίππῳ, Dem. p. 148, 8).* 


510 


πίπτω 


πίπτω ; [impf. ἔπιπτον (Mk. xiv. 35 Τ' Trmrg. WH)]; 
fut. πεσοῦμαι; 2 aor. ἔπεσον and ace. to the Alex. form 
(received everywhere by Lchm. [exe. Lk. xxiii. 30], 
Tdf. [exe. Rev. vi. 16], Tr [exe. ibid.], WH; and also 
used by R Gin Rev. i. 17; v.14; vi. 18; xi. 165; xvii. 10) 
ἔπεσα (cf. [ WH. App. p.164; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123]; Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 724sq.; Béitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 277 sq., and 
see ἀπέρχομαι init.) ; pf. πέπτωκα, 2 pers. sing. -xes (Rev. 
ii. 5 T WH); see κοπιάω), 3 pers. plur. τκαν (Rev. xviii. 
3, Led. ster. Tr txt. WH txt.; see γίνομαι) ; (fr. ΠΕΤΩ, 
as τίκτω fr. TEKQ [ef. Curtius, Etymol. § 214; Ver- 
bum, ii. p. 398]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 55); 
to fall; used 1. of descent from a higher place 
to a lower; a. prop. to fall (either from or upon, 
i.q. Lat. incido, decido): ἐπί w. ace. of place, Mt. x. 29; 
xiii. 5, [7], 8; xxi. 44 [T om. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.]; 
Mk. iv. 5; Lk. viii. 6 [here T Tr WH καταπ.], 8 Rec.; 
Rey. viii. 10; εἴς τι (of the thing that is entered; into), 
Mt. xv.14; xvii. 15; Mk. iv. 7 [L mrg. ἐπί] 54. ; Lk. vi. 
39 RG Lure. (but L txt. T Tr WH euminr.); viii. 8 GL 
T Tr WH, [14; xiv. 5LT TrWH]; Jn. xii. 24; εἰς 
(upon) τὴν γῆν, Rev. vi. 13; ix.1; ἐν μέσῳ, w. gen. of the 
thing, Lk. viii. 7; παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv. 4; 
Lk. viii. 5; to fall from or down: foll. by azo w. gen. of 
place, Mt. xv. 27; xxiv. 29 [here Tdf. ἐκ Lk. xvi. 21]; 
Acts xx. 9; foll. by ἐκ w. gen. of place, [Mk. xiii. 25 L T 
Tr WH]; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 1; i. q. to be thrust down, Lk. 
x. 18. b. metaph.: οὐ πίπτει ἐπί τινα ὁ ἥλιος, i. 6. 
the heat of the sun does not strike upon them or in- 
commode them, Rey. vii. 16; [ἀχλὺς x. σκότος, Acts xiii. 
11 LT Tr WH]; ὁ κλῆρος πίπτει ἐπί τινα, the lot falls 
upon one, Acts i. 26; φόβος πίπτει ἐπί τινα, falls upon or 
seizes one, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr]; Rev. xi. 11 Rec.; [τὸ 
πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, Acts x. 44 Lehm.]; πίπτω ὑπὸ κρίσιν, to 
fall under judgment, come under condemnation, James v. 
12 [where Rec." εἰς ὑπόκρισιν]. 2. of descent from 
an erect to a prostrate position (Lat. /abor, ruo; prolabor, 
procido ; collabor, ete.) ; a. properly; a. to full 
down: ἐπὶ λίθον, Lk. xx. 18; λίθος πίπτει ἐπί twa, Mt. 
xxi. 44 [Tom. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18; 
τὸ ὄρος ἐπί twa, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rey. vi. 16. B. to be 
prostrated, fall prostrate; of those overcome by terror 
or astonishment or grief: χαμαί, Jn. xviii. 6; εἰς τὸ ἔδαφος, 
Acts xxii. 7; ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Acts ix. 4; [ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, 
Mt. xvii. 6]; or under the attack of an evil spirit: ἐπὶ 
τῆς γῆς, Mk. ix. 20; or falling dead suddenly: πρὸς rods 
πόδας τινὸς ὡς νεκρός, Rev. i. 17; πεσὼν ἐξέψυξε, Acts v. 
5; πίπτ. παρὰ (LT Tr WH πρὸς) τοὺς πόδας τινός, ibid. 10; 
absol. 1 Co. x.8; στόματι μαχαίρας, Lk. xxi. 24; absol. of 
the dismemberment of corpses by decay, Heb. iii.17 (Num. 
xiv. 29, 32). y. to prostrate one’s self; used now of 
suppliants, now of persons rendering homage or worship 
to one: ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς» Mk. xiv. 35; ptep. with προσκυνεῖν, as 
finite verb, Mt. ii. 113 iv. 9; xviii. 26; πίπτειν k. προσ- 
κυνεῖν, Rev. v. 14; xix. 4; ἔπεσα προσκυνῆσαι, Rev. xxii. 8; 
mint. εἰς τοὺς πόδας (αὐτοῦ), Mt. xviii. 29 Rec.; εἰς [T Tr 
WH πρὸς τ. πόδας τινός, In. xi. 32; πρὸς τ. πόδας τινός, 
Mk. v. 22; [παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τινός, Lk. viii. 411; ἔμπροσθεν 


Πισιδια 


τῶν ποδῶν τινος, Rev. xix. 10; ἐνώπιόν τινος, Rev. iv. 10; 
v. 8; ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, Mt. xxvi. 39; Lk. v.12; ἐπὶ mpdo- 
ὡπον παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τινός, Lk. xvii. 16; πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς 
πόδας προσεκύνησε, Acts x. 25 ; πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον προσ- 
κυνήσει, 1 Co. xiv. 25; ἐπὶ τὰ πρόσωπα καὶ προσκυνεῖν, 
Rey. vii. 11 [ἐπὶ πρόσωπον Rec.]; xi. 16. 8. to fall 
out, fall from: θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς πεσεῖται, i. q. shall 
perish, be lost, Acts xxvii. 34 Rec. e. to fall down, 
full in ruin: of buildings, walls, ete., Mt. vii. 25, [27]; 
Lk. vi. 49 (where T Tr WH συνέπεσε) ; Heb. xi. 30; 
οἶκος ἐπ᾽ οἶκον πίπτει, Lk. xi. 17 [see ἐπί, C. I. 2¢.]; πύρ- 
γος ἐπί twa, Lk. xiii.43 σκηνὴ ἡ πεπτωκυῖα, the tabernacle 
that has fallen down, a fig. description of the family of 
David and the theocracy as reduced to extreme decay 
[ef. σκηνή, fin.], Acts xv. 16. of a city: ἔπεσε, i. e. has 
been overthrown, destroyed, Rev. xi. 13; xiv. 8; xvi. 19; 
xviii. 2, (Jer. xxviii. (11.) 8). b. metaph. a. 
to be cast down from a state of prosperity : πόθεν πέπτωκας, 
from what a height of Christian knowledge and attain- 
ment thou hast declined, Rev. ii. 5 GL T Tr WH (see 
above ad init.). B. to fall from a state of upright- 
ness, i.e. fo sin: opp. to ἑστάναι, 1 Co. x. 12; opp. to 
στήκειν, w. a dat. of the pers. whose interests suffer by 
the sinning [cf. W. § 31, 1 k.], Ro. xiv. 4; to fall into a 
state of wickedness, Rev. xviii. 3 L ed. ster. Tr WH txt. 
[see πίνω]. y- to perish, i.e. to come to an end, dis- 
appear, cease: of virtues, 1 Co. xiii. 8 L T Tr WH[R. V. 
fail]; to lose authority, no longer have force, of sayings, 
precepts, βίο. Lk. xvi. 17 (Gore od χαμαὶ πεσεῖται 6 τι ἂν 
εἴπῃς, Plat. Euthyphr. § 17; irrita cadunt promissa, Liv. 
2, 31). i.q.to be removed from power by death, Rev. xvii. 
10; to fail of participating in, miss a share in, the Mes- 
sianic salvation, Ro. xi. 11, [22]; Heb. iv. 11 [(yet see 
ev, I. 5 f.). 
mapa-, Tept-, προσ-, συμ- πίπτω.) " 

Πισιδία, -ας, ἡ, Pisidia, a region of Asia Minor, bounded 
by Pamphylia and the Pamphylian Sea, Phrygia, and 
Lycaonia: Acts xiii. 14 RG; xiv. 24. [B. Ὁ. s.v. Pisi- 
dia.]* 

ΠΙισίδιος, -a, -ov, i. 4. Πισιδικύός, belonging to Pisidia: 
᾿Αντιόχεια ἡ Πισιδία, i.e. taking its name from Pisidia 
(see ᾿Αντιόχεια, 2): Acts xiii. 14 LT Tr WH? 

πιστεύω ; impf. ἐπίστευον; fut. πιστεύσω; 1 aor. ἐπί- 
στευσα: pf. πεπίστευκα; plupf. (without augm., cf. W. 
§ 12, 9; [B. 33 (29)]) πεπιστεύκειν (Acts xiv. 23); 
Pass., pf. πεπίστευμαι; 1 aor. ἐπιστεύθην; (πιστός); Sept. 
for 87; in class. Grk. fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Eur., Thue. 
down; to believe, i.e. 1. intrans. to think to be 
true; to be persuaded of; to credit, place confidence 
in; a. uniy.: the thing believed being evident 
from the preceding context, Mt. xxiv. 23, [26]; Mk. xiii. 
21; 1 Co. xi. 18; ν΄. an ace. of the thing, Acts xiii. 41 
(LT Tr WH ὅ for Ree. 8); to credit, have confidence, 
foll. by ὅτι, Acts ix. 26; τινί, to believe one’s words, Mk. 
xvi. 13sq.; 1 Jn.iv. 1; τινὶ ore, Jn. iv. 21; τῷ ψεύδει, 2 Th. 
fi. 115 περί τινος, ὅτι, Jn. ix. 18. b. spec., in a moral 
and religious reference, πιστεύειν is used in the N. T. of 
tha conviction and trust to which a man is impelled by a 


Comp.: ἀνα-, ἀντι-, ἀπο-, €k-, ἐν-, ἐπι-») κατα-» 


611 


πιστεύω 


certain inner and higher prerogative and law of his soul; 
thus it stands a. 8050]. to trust in Jesus or in God 
as able to aid either in obtaining or in doing something: 
Mt. viii. 13; xxi. 22; Mk. v. 36; ix. 23sq.; Lk. viii. 50; 
Jn. xi. 40; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi. 23; [Heb. xi. 
6]; τῷ λόγῳ, ᾧ (ὃν) εἶπεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, In. iv. 50. β. 
of the credence given to God’s messengers and their words, 
w. a dat. of the person or thing: Maicei, Jn. vy. 46. to 
the prophets, Jn. xii. 38; Acts xxiv. 14; xxvi. 27; Ro. 
x. 16; ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ois ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται, to place reli- 
ance on etc. Lk. xxiv. 25. to an angel, Lk.i. 20; foll. 
by ὅτι, ibid. 45. to John the Baptist, Mt. xxi. 25 
(26), 32; Mk. xi. 31; Lk. xx.5. to Christ’s words, 
Jn. iii. 12; v. 38, 46 sq.; vi. 30; viii. 45 sq.; x. [37], 88"; 
τοῖς ἔργοις of Christ, ibid. 38°. to the teachings of evan- 
gelists and apostles, Acts viii. 12; τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, 2 Th. 
ii. 12; ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον, the testimony was believed, 
2Th.i. 10 [ef. W. § 39,1 a.; B. 175 (152) ]; τῇ γραφῇ; Jn- 
ii. 22. ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, to put faith in the gospel, Mx. 
i. 15 [B. 174 (151 sq.) ; ef. W. 213 (200 sq.)] (Ignat. ad 
Philad. 8, 2 [(but see Zahn’s note) ; cf. Jn. iii. 15 in y. be- 
low]). y- used especially of the faith by which a 
man embraces Jesus, i.e. a conviction, full of joyful 
trust, that Jesus is the Messiah—the divinely appointed 
author of eternal salvation in the kingdom of God, con- 
joined with obedience to Christ: mor. τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 
εἶναι Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, Acts viii. 37 Rec.; ἐπιστεύθη (was 
believed on [cf. W. § 39, 1a.; B. 175 (152) ]) ἐν κόσμῳ, 
1 Tim. iii. 16. the phrase πιστεύειν εἰς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, εἰς τ. 
υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ, etc., is very common; prop. to have a faith 
directed unto, believing or in faith to give one’s self up to, 
Jesus, ete. (ef. W. 213 (200 sq.) ; [B. 174 (151)]): Mt. 
xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 [RGL Tr txt.]; Jn. 11. 11; iii. 15 
RG, 16, 18, 36; vi. 29, 35, 40, 47 [RGL]; vii. δ, [38], 
39, 48; viii. 80; ix. 35 sq.; x. 42; xi. 25 sq. 45,48; xii. 
11, 37, 42, 44, [46]; xiv. 1,12; xvi.9; xvii. 20; Acts x. 
43; xix.4; Ro. x. 14; Gal. ii.16; Phil. i. 29; 1 Jn. v. 10; 
1 Pet. i. 8; εἰς τὸ φῶς, In. xii. 36; εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, Jn. 
1. 12; ii. 23; iii, 18; 1Jn. v.13}; τῷ ὀνόμ. αὐτοῦ, to com- 
mit one’s self trustfully to the name (see ὄνομα, 2 p. 448"), 
1 Jn. iii. 23; ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν. ἐπὶ τὸν κύριον, to have a faith di- 
rected towards, etc. (see ἐπί, C. I. 2g. a. p. 235° [ef. W. 
and Β. u.s., also B. § 147, 25]): Mt. xxvii. 42 T Tr txt. 
WH; Jn. iii. 15 L txt.; Acts ix. 425 xi.17; xvi. 31; xxii. 
19, [(cf. Sap. xii. 2)]; ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, to build one’s faith on, 
to place one’s faith upon, [see ἐπί, B. 2 a. y. p. 233°; B. 
u.s.]: Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Tim. i. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 6; ἐν 
αὐτῷ, to put faith in him, Jn. iii. 15 [L mrg.; ef. T Tr 
WH also (who prob. connect ἐν αὐτῷ with the foll. ἔχῃ ; 
ef. Westcott, Com. ad loc., Meyer, al.)] (cf. Jer. xii. 6; 
Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 22, where mor. ἔν τινι means to put 
confidence in one, to trust one; [οἴ. Mk. i. 15 above, 
B. fin.]); ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν, on this rests our faith 
[A. V. by this we believe], Jn. xvi. 30; with the simple 
dative, τῷ κυρίῳ, to (yield faith to) believe [cf. B. 173 
(151)]: Mt. xxvii.42 RG L Trmrg.; Acts v. 14; xviii. 
8; supply τούτῳ before οὗ in Ro. x. 14; fo trust in Christ 
[God], 2 Tim. i. 12; διά τινος, through one’s agency to 


πιστευὼω Vv 


be brought to faith, Jn. i. 7; 1 Co. iii. 5; διὰ Ιησοῦ εἰς 
θεόν, 1 Pet.i.21RGTrmrg.; διὰ τῆς χάριτος, Acts xviii. 
27; διὰ τοῦ λόγου αὐτῶν εἰς ἐμέ, Jn. xvii. 20; διά τι, Jn. 
iv. 39, [41], 42; xiv.11. πιστεύω foll. by ὅτι with a sen- 
tence in which either the nature and dignity of Christ 
or his blessings are set forth: Jn. vi. 69; viii. 24; x. 38° 
RG; xi. 27, [42]; xiii. 19; [xiv. 10]; xvi. 27, 30; xvii. 
8, 21; 1 Jn.v.1, 5; Ro. vi. 8; 1 Th. iv. 14; pot ὅτι, Jn. 
xiv. 113; ri, Jn. xi. 263; πιστεύω σωθῆναι, Acts xv. 11; 
the simple πιστεύειν is used emphatically, of those who 
acknowledge Jesus as the saviour and devote themselves 
to him: Mk. xv. 32 [here L adds αὐτῷ]; Lk. viii. 12 sq.; 
xxii. 67; Jn. i.50 (51); iii. 18; iv. 42, 48,53; v. 44; vi. 
36, 64; ix. 38; x. 25sq.; xii. 39, 47 Rec.; xvi. 30; xx. 
31; Acts v. 14; [xiii. 39]; xv. 5; xvili.8; [xxi. 25]; Ro. 
i. 16; iii. 22; iv.11; x.4; xv. 18; 2Co.iv.13; Eph.i. 
13, [19]; 2 Th.i. 10; Heb. iv. 3; with ἐξ ὅλης καρδίας 
added, Acts viii. 37 Ree.; νυ. ἃ dat. of instr. καρδίᾳ, Ro. 
x. 10; ptep. pres. of πιστεύοντες, as subst.: Acts ii. 44; 
Ro. iii. 22; 1 Co. i. 21; Gal. iii. 22; [Eph. 1.19]; 1 Th. 
i. 7; ii. 10,13; 2 Th. i. 10 Ree.; 1 Pet. ii. 7; i.g. who 
are on the point of believing, 1 Co. xiv. 22, cf. 24sq.; aor. 
ἐπίστευσα (marking entrance into a state; see βασιλεύω, 
fin.), 1 became a believer, a Christian, [A. V. believed]: 
Acts iv. 4: viii. 13; xiii. 12,48; xiv.1; xv. 7; xvii. 12, 
34; Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 2,11; with the addi- 
tion of ἐπὶ τὸν κύριον (see above), Acts ix.42; ptep. m- 
orevoas, Acts xi. 21; xix. 2; 6 πιστεύσας, Mk. xvi. 16; 
plur.,ibid. 17; Actsiv.32; of πεπιστευκότες, they that have 
believed (have become believers): Acts xix. 18; xxi. 20; 
[on (John’s use of) the tenses of πιστεύω see Westcott on 
1 Jn. iii. 23]. It must be borne in mind, that in Paul’s 
conception of τὸ πιστεύειν εἰς Χριστόν, the prominent ele- 
ment is the grace of God towards sinners as manifested 
and pledged (and to be laid hold of by faith) in Jesus, 
particularly in his death and resurrection, as ap- 
pears esp. in Ro. iii. 25; iv. 24; x. 9; 1 ΤῊ. iv. 14; but 
in John’s conception, it is the metaphysical relationship 
of Christ with God and close ethical intimacy with him, 
as well as the true ‘life’ to be derived from Christ as 
its source; cf. Riickert, Das Abendmahl, p. 251. More- 
over, πιστεύειν is used by John of various degrees of 
faith, from its first beginnings, its incipient stirring with- 
in the soul, up to the fullest assurance, Jn. ii. 23 (ef. 24) ; 
viii. 31; of a faith which does not yet recognize Jesus 
as the Messiah, but as a prophet very like the Messiah, 
Jn. vii. 31; and to signify that one’s faith is preserved, 
strengthened, increased, raised to the level which it 
ought to reach, xi. 15; xiii. 19; xiv. 29; xix. 35; xx. 31; 
1 Jn. v. 13° Ree.; [ef. reff. s.v. πίστις, fin.]. πιστεύειν 
is applied also to the faith by which one is persuaded 
that Jesus was raised from the dead, inasmuch as by 
that fact God declared him to be his Son and the Mes- 
siah: Jn. xx. 8, 25,29; ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ mor. ὅτι ὁ θεὸς αὐτὸν 
ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν, Ro. χ. 9 [ef. B. § 133,19]. Since ace. 
to the conception of Christian faith Christ alone is the 
author of salvation, ὁ πιστεύων repudiates all the various 
things which aside from Christ are commended as means 


a TU 1S 


of salvation (such e. g. as abstinence from flesh and 
wine), and understands that all things are lawful to him 
which do not lead him away from Christ; hence πιστεύεις 
(rts) φαγεῖν πάντα, hath faith to eat all things or so that 
he eats all things, Ro. xiv. 2; ef. Riickert ad loc.; [W. 
§ 44, 3b.; per contra B. 273 sq. (235) J. δ. πιστεύειν 
used in ref. to God has various senses : aa. it de- 
notes the mere acknowledgment of his existence: ὅτε ὁ 
θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν, Jas. ii. 19; acknowledgment joined to ap- 
propriate trust, absol. Jude 5; εἰς θεόν, In. xii. 44; xiv. 1; 
i.q. to believe and embrace what God has made known 
either through Christ or concerning Christ τῷ 
θεῷ, Jn. v. 24; Acts xvi. 34; Tit. iii. 8; 1Jn.v. 10; ἐπὶ 
tov θεόν, Ro. iv. 5; τὴν ἀγάπην, ἣν ἔχει ὁ θεός, 1 Jn. iv. 16; 
εἰς τὴν μαρτυρίαν, ἣν KTA., 1 Jn. ν. 10. BB. to trust: 
τῷ θεῷ, God promising a thing, Ro. iv. 3, 17 (on which 
see κατέναντι) ; Gal. iii. 6; [Jas. ii. 23]; absol. Ro. iv. 
18; foll. by ὅτε, Acts xxvii. 25. €. mor. is used in 
an ethical sense, of confidence in the goodness of men: 
ἡ ἀγάπη πιστεύει πάντα, 1 Co. xiii. 7. τὸ πιστεύειν is 
opp. to ἐδεῖν. Jn. xx. 29; to ὁρᾶν, ibid. and 1 Pet. i. 8, 
(Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7 fin.), ef. 2 Co.v. 7; to Scaxpive- 
σθαι, Ro. iv. 19 sq.; xiv. 1, 23, cf. Jas.i.6; to ὁμολογεῖν, 
Ro. x. 9. 2. transitively, τινί τι, to intrust a thing 
to one, i.e. to his fidelity: Lk. xvi. 11; ἑαυτόν τινι, Jn. ii. 
24; pass. πιστεύομαί τι, to be intrusted with a thing: Ro. 
11: 5.9 1 Opp bales 081: 1 ecient te all 
Tit. i. 8, (Ignat. ad Philad. 9; exx. fr. prof. auth. are 
given in W.§39,1a.). | On the grammat. constr. of the 
word ef. B. § 133, 4 [and the summaries in Ellicott on 
1 Tim. i.16; Vaughan on Ro. iv. 5; Cremer 8. v.]. It 
does not occur in the Rev., nor in Philem., 2 Pet., 2 and 
3 Jn. [ΟἿ the reff. s. v. πίστις, fin.]* 

πιστικός, -1), -ov, (πιστός), pertaining to belief; a. 
having the power of persuading, skilful in producing be- 
lief: Plat. Gorg. p. 455 a. b. trusty, faithful, that 
can be relied on: γυνὴ mor. καὶ οἰκουρὸς καὶ πειθομένη τῷ 
ἀνδρί, Artem. oneir. 2, 32; often so in Cedrenus [also (of 
persons) in Epiph., Jn. Mosch., Sophron.; ef. Soph. Lex. 
s. v.]; of commodities i. q. δόκιμος, genuine, pure, un- 
adulterated: so vapdos πιστική [but A.V. spike- (i. 6. 
spiked) nard, after the nardi spicati of the Vulg. (in 
Mk.)], Mk. xiv. 3; Jn. xii. 3, (for nard was often adul- 
terated; see Plin. h. n. 12,26; Diose. de mater. med. 1, 6 
and 7); hence metaph. τὸ πιστικὸν τῆς καινῆς διαθήκης 
κρᾶμα, Euseb. demonstr. evang. 9,8 [p.439d.]. Cf. the 
full discussion of this word in Fritzsche on Mk. p. 596 
sqq-; Liicke on Jn. xii. 3 p. 494 sqq.; W. 97 (92) sq.; 
[esp. Dr. Jas. Morison on Mk. 1. c.].* 

πίστις, -ews, 9, (πείθω [q-v-]), fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind. ], 
Aeschyl., Hdt. down; Sept. for 93308, several times for 
Ax and IDR; faith; i.e. 1. conviction of the 
truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut.; 
θαυμάσια καὶ μείζω πίστεως, Diod. 1, 86); in the N. T. of 
a conviction or belief respecting man’s relationship to God 
and divine things, generally with the included idea of 
trust and holy fervor born of faith and conjoined with τὸς: 
Heb. xi. 1 (where πίστις is called ἐλπιζομένων trdcraces, 


πίστις 


πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος οὐ βλεπομένων) ; Opp. to εἶδος, 2 Co. 
vy. 7; joined with ἀγάπη and ἐλπίς, 1 Co. xiii. 13. a. 
when it relates to God, πίστις is the conviction that God 
exists and is the creator and ruler of all things, the pro- 
vider and bestower of eternal salvation through Christ: 
Heb. xi. 6; xii. 2; xiii. 7; πίστις ἐπὶ θεόν, Heb. vi. 1; ἡ 
πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, by which ye turned to God, 
1 ΤῊ. i. 8; τὴν π. ὑμῶν x. ἐλπίδα eis θεόν, directed unto 
God, 1 Pet. i. 21; with a gen. of the object [faith in] 
(τῶν θεῶν, Eur. Med. 414; τοῦ θεοῦ, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 16, 
5; ef. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch.on Sap. vi. 17 sq. Ρ. 132; [ef. 
Meyer on Ro. iii. 22; also Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 
as below; W. 186 (175)]): ἡ π. τῆς ἐνεργείας τοῦ θεοῦ 
τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν (Christ) éx~ra@v νεκρῶν, Col. ii. 12; 
διὰ πίστεως, by the help of faith, Heb. xi. 33, 39; κατὰ 
πίστιν, i.q. πιστεύοντες, Heb. xi. 13; πίστει, dat. of means 
or of mode by faith or by believing, prompied, actuated, by 
faith, Heb. xi. 3 sq. 7-9, 17, 20-24, 27-29, 31; dat. of 
cause, because of faith, Heb. xi. 5, 11, 30. b. in 
reference to Christ, it denotes @ strong and welcome 
conviction or belief that Jesus is the Messiah, through whom 
we obtain eternal salvation in the kingdom of Gad (on this 
see more at length in πιστεύω, 1 Ὁ. y.): a. univ.: 
w. gen. of the object (see above, in a.), Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 
Ro. iii. 22; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 22; Eph. iii. 12; Ἰησοῦ, Rev. 
xiv. 12; Χριστοῦ, Phil. iii. 9; τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ, Cal. ii. 
20; τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Jas. ii. 1; μοῦ (i. 6. 
in Christ), Rev. ii. 13, (certainly we must reject the in- 
terpretation, faith in God of which Jesus Christ is the 
author, advocated by Van Hengel, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 314 
sqq., and H. P. Berlage, Disquisitio de formulae Paulinae 
πίστις ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ significatione. Lugd. Bat. 1856) ; 
τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, Phil. i. 27; ἀληθείας, 2 Th. ii. 13. with 
Prepositions: εἰς (toward [οἵ. εἰς, B. I]. 2 a.]) τὸν κύριον 
ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦν, Acts xx. 21; εἰς Χριστόν, Acts xxiv. 24; 
XXxVi. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις ὑμῶν, Col. ii. 5; [πίστιν 
ἔχειν εἰς ἐμέ, Mk. ix. 42 ΤῊ mrg.]; πρὸς τὸν κύρ. Philem. 
5 [L Tr WH εἰς] ([see πρός, I. 1¢.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad 
loc.]; unless here we prefer to render πίστεν fidelity [see 
2, below]; cf. Meyer ad loc. and W. § 50, 2); π. ἡ ἐν Xp. 
Ἰησοῦ, reposed in Christ Jesus, 1 Tim. iii. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 
15; ἡ π. ὑμῶν ἐν Xp. Ino. Col. i. 4; ἡ κατά τινα (see κατά, 
II. 1 6.) πίστις ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ, Eph.i. 15; ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ, 
Ro. iii. 25 [yet cf. Meyer]. πίστις [cf. W. 120 (114)] 
and ἡ πίστις simply: Lk. xviii. 8; Acts xiii. 8; xiv. 22, 
27; xv. 9; xvii. 31; Ro. [iii. 27 (on which see νόμος, 
3)], 31; iv. 14; v.2 [L Tr WH br. τῇ πίστει]: ix. 32; x. 
8,17; xii. 3,6; 1 Co. [xii. 9 (here of a charism)]; 
xvi. 13; 2 Co. iv. 13; [viii. 7]; x. 15; Gal. iii. 14, 23, 25 
sq-; ν΄ 5; vi.10; Eph. ii. 8; iii.17; iv.5; vi.16; 2 Th. 
i. 4; 1 Tim. i. 2,4 (on the latter pass. see οἰκονομία), 
19; ii. 7 (on which see ἀλήθεια. I. 2 c.); iii. 93 iv. 1, 6; 
v. 85 vi. 10,12,21; 2 Tim.i. 5; ἢ. 18; iii. 8,103 iv. 7; 
Tit. i. 1, 4, 13; ii. 25 ili. 15; Jas. ii. 5; 1 Pet.i.5; 2 Pet. 
i. 1,5. with a gen. of the subject: Lk. xxii. 32; Ro. i. 
8, 12; 1 Co. ii. 5; xv. 14,17; 2 Co. i. 24; Phil. i. 25; ii. 
17; 1 Th. iii. 2, 5-7, 10; 2 Th. i. 3; iii. 2; Philem. 6; 
Jas. i. 3; 1 Pet.i.7, 9 [here WH om. gen.]; 1 Jn. v. 4; 
33 


513 


| 


πίστις 


Rev. xiii. 10; πλήρης πίστεως x. πνεύματος, Acts vi. 5: 
πνεύματος K. πίστεως. Acts xi. 24; πίστεως x. δυνάμεως, 
Acts vi. 8 Rec.; τῇ πίστει ἑστηκέναι, Ro. xi. 20; 2 Co. i. 
24; ἐν τῇ πίστει στήκειν, 1 Co. xvi. 133; εἶναι, 2 Co. xiii. 5; 
μένειν, 1 Tim. ii. 15; ἐμμένειν τῇ π. Acts xiv. 22; ἐπιμέ- 
νειν, Col. i. 23; στερεὸς τῇ π. 1 Pet. ν. 9; στερεοῦμαι τῇ π. 
Acts xvi. 5; βεβαιοῦμαι ἐν [LT Tr WH om. ἐν] τῇ π. Col. 
ii. 7. Since faith is a power that seizes upon the soul, 
one who yields himself to it is said ὑπακούειν τῇ πίστει, 
Acts vi. 7; hence ὑπακοὴ τῆς πίστεως, obedience ren- 
dered to faith [W. 186 (175)], Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; ὁ ἐκ 
πίστεως sc. ὦν, depending on faith, i.q.6 πιστεύων [see 
ἐκ, 11. 7], Ro. iii. 26; plur., Gal. iii. 7,9; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως 
᾿Αβραάμ, he who has the same faith as Abraham, Ro. iv. 
16; ἐκ πίστεως εἶναι, to be related, akin to, faith [cf. ἐκ, 
τι. 5.1, Gal. iii. 12. δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως, Ro. i. 17; Gal. 
iii. 11; δικαιοσύνη ἡ ἐκ πίστ. Ro. ix. 30; ἡ ἐκ πίστ. Sex. 
Ro. x. 6; δικαιοσ. ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν, Springing from 
faith (and availing) to (arouse) faith (in those who as 
yet have it not), Ro. i. 17; δικαιοσύνη ἡ διὰ πίστεως 
Χριστοῦ; . - - ἡ ἐκ θεοῦ dix. ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει, Phil. iii. 9; pass. 
δικαιοῦσθαι πίστει, Ro. iii. 28; δικαιοῦν τινα διὰ πίστεως 
Χριστοῦ, Gal. ii. 16; διὰ τ. πίστεως, Ro. iii. 30; dix. τινα 
ἐκ πίστεως, ibid.; Gal. iii. 8; pass., Ro. v.1; Gal. iii. 24; 
εὐαγγελίζομαι τὴν πίστιν, to proclaim the glad tidings 
of faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23; ἀκοὴ πίστεως, instruction 
concerning the necessity of faith [see ἀκοή, 3 a.], Gal. iii. 
2,5; ἡ πίστις is joined with ἡ ἀγάπη: 1 Th. iii. 6; v. 
8; 1 Tim. 14... 10: iv. 12; vi.11; 2 Tim. ii. 22; with 
a subj. gen. Rev. ii. 19; πίστις δι ἀγάπης ἐνεργουμένη, 
Gal. v. 6; ἀγάπη μετὰ πίστεως, Eph. vi. 23; ἀγάπη ἐκ πί- 
στεως ἀνυποκρίτου, 1 Tim. i. 5; πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἡ ev Χρι- 
στῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, 2 Tim. 1. 18 : φιλεῖν τινα ἐν πίστει, Tit. iii. 15 
(where see De Wette); ἔργον πίστεως (cf. ἔργον, 3 p. 
248> near bot.), 1 Th. i. 8; 2 Th.i. 11. B. in an 
ethical sense, persuasion or conviction (which springs 
from faith in Christ as the sole author of salvation; οἵ. 
πιστεύω, 1 b. y. fin.) concerning things lawful for a Chris- 
tian: Ro. xiv. 1,23; πίστιν ἔχειν, ibid. 22. ο. univ. 
the religious belief of Christians ; a. subjectively : 
Eph. iv. 13, where ef. Meyer; in the sense of a mere 
acknowledgment of divine things and of the claims of 
Christianity, Jas. ii. 14. 17 sq. 20, 22, 24, 26. B. ob- 
jectively, the substance of Christian faith or what is be- 
lieved by Christians : ἡ παραδοθεῖσα π. Jude 3 ; ἡ ἁγιωτάτη 
ὑμῶν πίστις, ib. 20. There are some who think this 
meaning of the word is to be recognized also in 1 Tim. 
i.4,19; ii.7; iii. 9; iv. 1,65; v.8; vi- 10, 21, (cf. Pflei- 
derer, Paulinismus p. 468 [Eng. trans. ii. p. 200]); but 
Weiss (Bibl. Theol. ἃ. N. T. § 107 a. note) correctly ob- 
jects, “" πίστις is rather the form in which the truth (as 
the substance of right doctrine) is subjectively appro- 
priated”; [ef. Meyer on Ro. i. 5 (and Prof. Dwight’s 
additional note); Ellicott on Gal. i. 23; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Gal. p. 157]. d. with the predominant idea of 
trust (or confidence) whether in God orin Christ, spring- 
ing from faith in the same: Mt. viii. 10; xv. 28; Lk. vii. 
9, 50; xvii. 5; Heb. ix. 28 Lchm. ed. ster.; x. 22; Jas. 


TiFTOS 


i. 6; with a gen. of the subject: Mt. ix. 2, 22, 29; xv. 
28; Mk. ii. 5; v.34; x.52; [Lk. v. 20]; viii. 25,48; xvii. 
19; xviii 42; w. agen. of the object in which trust is 
placed: rod ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, Acts iii. 16; πίστιν ἔχειν, 
(Mt. xvii. 20]; xxi. 21; Mk. iv. 40; Lk. xvii. 6; πᾶσαν 
τὴν πίστιν, (‘all the faith’ that can be thought of), 1 Co. 
xiii. 2; ἔχειν πίστιν θεοῦ, to trust in God, Mk. xi. 22; ἔχειν 
πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι, to be healed (see Fritzsche on Mt. p. 
843 sq.; [ef. W.§ 44, 4a.; B. 268 (230) ]), Acts xiv. 9; 
ἡ δὲ αὐτοῦ π.. awakened through him, Acts iii. 16; εὐχὴ 
τῆς πίστεως, that proceeds from faith, Jas. v.15; of trust 
in the promises of God, Ro. iv. 9, 16, 19 sq.; Heb. iv. 2; 
vi. 12; x. 38sq.; w. agen. of the subject, Ro. iv. 5, 12; 
πίστις ἐπὶ θεόν, faith which relies on God who grants the 
forgiveness of sins to the penitent [see ἐπί, C. 1. 2 g. a.], 
Heb. vi. 1; δικαιοσύνη τῆς πίστεως [οἵ. W. 186 (175) ], 
Ro. iv. 11, 13; ἡ κατὰ πίστιν δικαιοσύνη, Heb. xi. 7. 2 
fidelity, faithfulness, i. e. the character of one who can be 
relied on: Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal. v. 22; Philem. 5 (Ὁ see above 
in b. a.); Tit. ii. 10. οἵ one whokeeps his promises: ἡ 
πίστις τοῦ θεοῦ, subj. gen., Ro. 111. 3. objectively, plighted 
faith (often so in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl. down): ἀθετεῖν 
(see ἀθετέω, a.) τὴν πίστιν, 1 Tim. v. 12. Cf. especially 
Koolhaas, Diss. philol. I. et II. de vario usu et construc- 
tione vocum πίστις, πιστός et πιστεύειν in N. T. (Traj. ad 
Rhen. 1733, 4to.); Dav. Schulz, Was heisst Glauben, 
etc. (Leipz. 1830), p. 62 sqq.; Riickert, Com. iib. ἃ. Rom., 
2d ed., i. p. 51 sqq.; Lutz, Bibl. Dogmatik, p. 312 sqq. ; 
Huther, Ueber ζωή τι. πιστεύειν im N. T., in the Jahrbb. 
f. deutsch. Theol. for 1872, pp. 1-33; [Bp. Lghtft. Com. 
on Gal. p. 154 sqq.]. On Paul’s conception of πίστις, 
ef. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 94 sqq. ; 
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. ἃ. N. T., 8.82 ο. ἃ. (cf. the index s. v. 
Glaube) ; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 162 sqq. [ Enc. trans. 
i. p- 161 sqq.; Schnedermann, De fidei notione ethica Pau- 
lina. (Lips. 1880)]. On the idea of faith in the Ep. to 
the Hebrews see Riehm, Lehrbegr. des Hebr.-Br. p. 
700 sqq-; Weiss, as above §125b.c. On John’s con- 
ception, see Reuss, die Johann. Theol. § 10 in the Bei- 
trage zu d. theol. Wissensch. i. p. 56 sqq. [ef. his Histoire 
de la Théol. Chrétienne, ete., 3me éd., ii. p. 508 544. (Eng. 
trans. i. 455 sqq.)]; Weiss, as above 8 149, and the 
same author’s Johann. Lehrbecriff, p. 18 sqq.* 

πιστός, -7, -όν, (πείθω [q. v-]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 
mostly for 1232}; 1. trusty, faithful; of persons 
who show themselves faithful in the transaction of busi- 
ness, the execution of commands, or the discharge of 
official duties: δοῦλος, Mt. xxiv. 45; xxv. 21, 23; οἰκονό- 
pos, Lk. xii. 42; 1 Co. iv. 2; διάκονος, Eph. vi. 21; Col. 
i. 7; iv. 7; ἀρχιερεύς, Heb. ii. 17; iii. 2; of God, abid- 
ing by his promises, 1 Co.i.9; x.13; 2Co.i. 18; 1 Th. 
v. 24; 2 Th. ii. 8; Heb. x. 23: xi. 11; 2 Tim. 1. 13; 
Avdneds 9: 1 Pet. 1v. 19% add, 1 Co.ave 17; Colsava 9s 
1 Tim. i. 12; Heb. iii. 5; 1 Pet. v. 12; πιστὸς ἔν τινι, 
in a thing, Lk. xvi. 10-12; xix. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 11; ἐπί 
τι, Mt. xxv. 23; ἄχρι θανάτου, Rev. ii. 10. one who kept 
his plighted faith, Rev. ii. 13; worthy of trust; that can 
be relied on: 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 2; Christ is called 


514 


πλάνῃ 


μάρτυς ὁ πιστός, Rev. i. 5; with καὶ ἀληθινός added, 
Rev. iii. 14; [ef. χῖχ. 11]. of things, that can be relied 
on: ὁ λύγος, 1 Tim. iii. 1; 2 Tim. 11. 11; Tit. i. 95 [iii 
8; οὗτοι of λόγοι, Rev. xxi.5; xxii.6]; with πάσης ἀπο- 
δοχῆς ἄξιος added, 1 Tim. i. 15; iv. 9; τὰ ὅσια Aavid 
τὰ πιστά (see ὅσιος, fin.), Acts xiii. 34. 2. easily 
persuaded ; believing, confiding, trusting, (Theogn., Ae- 
schyl., Soph., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T. one who trusts in 
God’s promises, Gal. iii. 9; is convineed that Jesus has 
been raised from the dead, opp. to ἄπιστος, Jn. xx. 27; 
one who has become convinced that Jesus is the Messiah 
and the author of salvation (opp. to ἄπιστος, see πιστεύω, 
1b. y. and πίστις, 1 b.), [a believer]: Acts xvi.1; 2 Co. 
vi. 15; 1 Tim. v. 16; with the addition of τῷ κυρίῳ, dat. 
of the pers. in whom faith or trust is reposed, Acts xvi. 
15; plur. in Col. i. 2 [where ef. Bp. Lghtft.]; 1 Tim. iv. 
10; vi. 2; Tit. i.6; Rev. xvii. 14; of πιστοί, substantively 
[see Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. p. 157], Acts x. 45; 1 Tim. iv. 
3,12; with ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ added [ef. B. 174 (152)], 
Eph. i. 13 εἰς θεὸν κτλ. 1 Pet. i. 21 LT Tr txt. WH; me 
στὸν ποιεῖν τι, to do something harmonizing with (Chris- 
tian) faith, [R. V. a faithful work), 3 Jn. 5.* 

πιστόω, -@: 1 aor. pass. ἐπιστώθην;; (πιστός); 1, 
to make faithful, render trustworthy: τὸ ῥῆμα, 1 K. i. 36; 
τινὰ ὅρκοις, Thue. 4, 88; univ. to make firm, establish, 1 
Chr. xvii. 14. 2. Pass. (Sept. in various senses for 
JPN) and mid. to be firmly persuaded of; to be assured 
of: τί (Opp. eyn. 8, 855.417; Lcian. philops. 5), 2'Tim. 
iii. 14; Hesych. ἐπιστώθη - ἐπείσθη, ἐπληροφορήθη. (In 
various other senses in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) * 

πλανάω, -@; fut. πλανήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπλάνησα; Pass., pres. 
πλανῶμαι; pf. πεπλάνημαι; 1 aor. ἐπλανήθην ; (πλάνη); fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for APN; to cause to 
stray, to lead astray, lead aside from the right way ; a. 
prop.; in pass., Sept. chiefly for NA, fo go astray, wan- 
der, roam about, (first so in Hom. 1]. 23, 321): Mt. xviii. 
12sq-; 1 Pet. ii. 25 (fr. Is. liii. 6, cf. Ex. xxiii. 4 ; Ps. 
exviii. (exix.) 176); Heb. xi. 38. b. metaph. to lead 
away from the truth, to lead into error, to deceive: twa, 
Mt. xxiv. 4, 5, 11, 24; Mk. xiii. 5,6; Jn. vii. 12; 1Jn. 
ii. 26; iii. 7; 2 Tim. iii. 13"; Rev. ii. 20GLT TrWH; 
xii. 93 xiii. 14; xix. 20; xx. 8, 8, 10; ἑαυτόν, 1 Jn. 1. 8; 
pass. to be led into error, [R.V. be led astray]: Lk. xxi. 8; 
Jn. vii. 47; Rev. ii. 20 Rec.; to err, Mt. xxii. 29; ΜΚ. xii. 
24, 27; μὴ πλανᾶσθε, 1 Co. vi. 9; xv. 33; Gal. vi. 7; Jas. 
1. 16; esp. through ignorance to be led aside from the . 
path of virtue, to go astray, sin: Tit. iii. 3; Heb. v. 2; τῇ 
καρδίᾳ, Heb. iii. 10; ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας. Jas. v.19; to wan- 
der or fall away from the true faith, of heretics, 2 Tim. iii. 
13°; 2 Pet. ii. 15; to be led away into error and sin, Rey. 
xviii. 23. [Comp.: ἀπο-πλανάω.] * 

πλάνη, -ns, 7, α wandering, a straying about, whereby 
one, led astray from the right way, roams hither and 
thither (Aeschyl., [Hdt.], Eur., Plat., Dem.,al.). In the 
N. T. metaph. mental straying, i.e. error, wrong opinion 
relative to morals or religion: Eph. iv. 14; 1 Th. ii. 3; 
2 Th. ii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 17; 1 Jn. iv. 6; Jude 11 
(on which [cf. W. 189 (177) and] see ἐκχέω, b. fin.) ; er 


πλάνης 


ror which shows itself in action, a wrong mode of acting: 
Ro. i. 27; πλάνη ὁδοῦ τινος, [R. V. error of one’s way 
i. 6.7 the wrong manner of life which one follows, Jas. v. 
20 (πλάνη ζωῆς, Sap. i. 12); as sometimes the Lat. error, 
iq. that which leads into error, deceit, fraud: Mt. XXVii. 
64.* 

[πλάνης, -nTos, 6, see πλανήτης. | 

πλανήτης, -ov, ὁ, (πλανάω), a wanderer: ἀστέρες πῖλος 
ται, wandering stars (Aristot., Plut., al.), Jude 13 [where 
WH mrg. dor. πλάνητες (Xen. mem. 4, 7, 5)]; see ἀστήρ, 
fin.* 

πλάνος, -ov, wandering, roving; trans. and trop. mis- 
leading, leading into error: πνεύματα πλάνα, 1 Tim. iv. 1 
(πλάνοι ἄνθρωποι, Joseph. b. 1. 2, 13, 4). ὁ πλάνος 
substantively (Cie. al. planus), as we say, a vagabond, 
‘tramp,’ impostor, (Diod., Athen., al.); hence univ. a 
corrupter, deceiver, (Vulg. seductor) : Mt. xxvii. 63 ; 2 Co. 
vi. 8; 2Jn.7. [Cf. ὁ κοσμοπλάνος, ‘Teaching’ ete. 16, 
41" 

πλάξ, -ακός, ἡ, [(akin to πλάτος, εἴα. ; Fick iv. 161)], a 
flat thing, broad tablet, plane, level surface (as of the sea), 
(ef. our plate), (Pind., Trage., al.; Sept. for m3): αἱ 
πλάκες τῆς διαθήκης (see διαθήκη, 2 p. 136°), Heb. ix. 4; 
οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶ λιθίναις (tables of stone, such as those on 
which the law of Moses was written), ἀλλ᾽ ἐν πλαξὶ καρ- 
δίας σαρκίναις, 2 Co. 111. 3.* 

πλάσμα, ros, τό, (πλάσσω), what has been moulded or 
formed, as from wax (Plat. Theaet. p. 197d. and p. 200b.) ; 
the thing formed by a potter, earthen vessel, (Vulg. figmen- 
tum): Ro. ix. 20 (with πηλοῦ added, Arstph. av. 686).* 

πλάσσω: 1 aor. ptep. πλάσας ; 1 aor. pass. ἐπλάσθην ; 
[(perh. akin to πλατύς; Curtius § 367 b)]; fr. Hes. down; 
Sept. chiefly for ὝΧ᾽ ; to form, mould, (prop. something 
from clay, wax, etc.): used of a potter, Ro. ix. 20; of 
God as Creator (Gen. ii. 7 sq. 19 etc.), pass. 1 Tim. ii. 13.* 

πλαστός, -ἤ, -όν, (πλάσσωλ) ; 1. prop. moulded, 
formed, as from clay, wax, stone, (Hes., Plat., Aristot., 
Plut., al.). 2. trop. feigned: 2 Pet. ii. 3 ([Hadt. 1, 
68], Eur., Xen., Leian., al.).* 

πλατεῖα, -as, 7, (fem. of the adj. πλατύς, sc. ὁδός [cf. 
W. 590 (549)]), α broad way, a street: Mt. vi. 5; xii. 
19; Lk. x. 10; xiii. 26; xiv. 21; Acts v. 15; Rev. xi. 
8; xxi. 21; xxii.2. (Hur., Plut., al.; in Sept. chiefly for 
an.) * 

πλάτος, -ous, τό, [ (cf. πλάξ), fr. Hdt. down], breadth : 
Eph. iii. 18 (on which see μῆκος) ; Rev. xxi. 16; carry- 
ing with it the suggestion of great extent, τῆς γῆς, Opp. 
to the ends or corners of the earth, Rev. xx. 9; (for 
any, Hab. i. 6).* 

mative; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. πεπλάτυνται (see μι- 
aivw); 1 aor. ἐπλατύνθην; (πλατύςν) ; to make broad, to 
enlarge: τί, Mt. xxiii. 5; ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται, our 
heart expands itself sc. to receive you into it, i.e. to 
welcome and embrace you in love, 2 Co. vi. 11 (πλατύνειν 
τὴν καρδίαν for 34 2177, to open the heart 56. to in- 
struction, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 32 [ef. W.30]); πλατύνθητε 
καὶ ὑμεῖς, be ye also enlarged in heart, viz. to receive me 
therein, ibid. 13. (Xen., Plut., Anthol., al.) * 


515 


πλείων 


πλατύς, -εἴα, -ὐ, [cf. Lat. planus, latus ; Curtius § 867 b; 
Vaniéek p. 552], fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for 
am), broad : Mt. vii. 13.* 

πλέγμα, -τος, τό, (πλέκω), What is woven, plaited, or twisted 
together; a web, plait, braid: used thus of a net, Xen. 
Cyr. 1, 6, 28; of a basket, Eur., Plat.; πλέγμα βύβλινον, 
in which the Gufant Moses was laid, eee antt. 2, 9,4; 
by other writ. in other senses. braided hair (Vulg. crines 
torli, ringlets, curls): 1 Tim. ii. 9 (ef. 1 Pet. iii. 3).* 

πλεῖστος, -η; -ov, (superl. of πολύς), most: plur. Mt. xi. 
20; [ὄχλος πλεῖστος, a very great multitude, Mk. iv. 1 T 
Tr WH]; ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος, the most part of the multi- 
tude, Mt. xxi. 8 (Thue. 7, 78; Plat. rep. 3 p. 397 d.; 
λαός, Hom. 1]. 16, 377); τὸ πλεῖστον, adverbially, at the 
most, 1 Co. xiv. 27.* 

πλείων, -ovos, 6, 7, neut. πλεῖον [eighteen times] and (in 
Lk. iii.13; [Jn. xxi.15 LT Tr WH]; Acts xv. 28) πλέον 
(cf. [WH. App. p. 151]; Matthiaei. p. 333 ; Kriiger § 23, 

4; Kiihner § 156, 3; Passow s.v. πολύς, B.1; [L. and 
S. s.v. B.]), plur. πλείονες and contr. πλείους, acc. πλεί- 
ovas and contr. πλείους (which forms are used indiscrim- 
inately in the N. T.), neut. πλείονα and (1, T Tr WH in 
Mt. xxvi. 53; LT in Lk. xxi. 3) contr. πλείω; (compar. 
of πολύς) ; more, i.e. 1. greater in quantity: the 
object with which the comparison is made being added 
in the genitive, as πλείονας τῶν πρώτων, more in number 
than the first, Mt. xxi. 36; πλεῖον (or πλείω) πάντων, 
more than all, Mk. xii.43; Lk. xxi. 3; πλείονα . . . τούτων, 
more than these, Jn. vii. 31 [here L T Tr WH om. the 
gen. (see below)]; πλείονα τῶν πρώτων, more than the 
first, Rev. ii. 19 ; πλεῖον τούτων, more than these, Jn. xxi. 
15; [πλείονα τιμὴν ἔχειν τοῦ οἴκου, Heb. iii. 3° (cf. W. 190 
(178), 240 (225))]; περισσεύειν πλεῖον, more than, foll. by 
agen. [A. V. exceed], Mt. v. 20. πλείονες (πλείους) ἤ, 
Mt. xxvi. 53 R G[L πλείω (br. 7) ]; Jn.iv.1 [Trmrg. om. 
WH br. ἢ] πλεῖον #, more than, Lk. ix. 18; πλέον πλήν 
w. agen. Acts xv. 28; πλέον mapa {τι or τίνα (see παρά, 
Ill. 2 b.)], Lk. iii. 13; [Heb. iii. 3°]; ἢ is omitted before 
numerals without change of construction : ἐτῶν ἦν πλειό- 
νων τεσσαράκοντα 6 ἄνθρωπος, Acts iv. 22; οὐ πλείους εἰσίν 
μοι ἡμέραι δεκαδύο, Acts xxiv. 11 (here Ree. inserts ἢ) ; 
ἡμέρας ov πλείους ὀκτὼ ἢ δέκα (Rec. πλείους ἢ δέκα), Acts 
xxv. 6; add, Acts xxiii. 13, 21; as in Grk. writ. after 
aneuter: πλείω [ Lchm. # in br.] δώδεκα λεγεῶνας, Mt. xxvi. 
53[T Tr WH (but T λεγιώνων) |, (πλεῖν --- Attic for πλεῖον 
—é£axoatovs, Arstph. av. 1251; ἔτη γεγονὼς πλείω ἑβδομή- 
κοντα, Plat. apol. Socr. p. 17 d.; see ἤ, 3a.; on the omis- 
sion of quam in Latin after plus and amplius, ef. Rams- 
horn, Lat. Gram. p. 491; [Roby, Lat. Gram. § 1273]). 
the objects with which the comparison is made are not 
added because easily supplied from the context: Jn. 
iv. 41; [vii. 31 (see above)]; xv. 2; Heb. vii. 23; τὸ 
πλεῖον, the more (viz. the greater debt mentioned), Lk. 
vii. 43; πλεῖον, adverbially, more, i. e. more earnestly, 
Lk. vii. 42; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, more widely, further, διανέμεσθαι, 
Acts iv. 17; [cf. xx. 9 WH mrg. (see below) ]; προκόπτειν, 
2 Tim. iii. 9; ἐπὶ πλεῖον ἀσεβείας, 2 Tim. ii. 16; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, 
longer (than proper), Acts xx. 9 [not WH mrg. (see 


πλέκω 


above)]; xxiv. 4; plural πλείονα, more, i.e. a larger re- 
ward, Mt. xx. 10 [but L Tr WH πλεῖον]; without com- 
parison, used of an indefinite number, with a subst.: Acts 
ii. 40; xiii. 31; xvili. 20; xxi. 10; xxiv. 17; xxv. 14; 
XXVii. 20; xxviii. 23; neut. περί πλειόνων [ A. V. of many 
things], Lk. xi.53; with the article οἱ πλείονες (πλείους), 
the more part, very many: Acts xix. 32; xxvii. 12; 1Co. 
ix. 19; x. 5; xv. 63 2 Co. ii. 6; iv. 15; ix. 2; Phil. i. 
14. 2. greater in quality, superior, more excellent: 
foll. by the gen. of comparison, Mt. vi. 25; xii. 41, 42; 
Mk. xii. 33 [here T WH Tr txt. περισσότερον]; Lk. xi. 
31, 32; xii. 23; [πλείονα θυσίαν . . . παρὰ Κάϊν, Heb. xi. 
4 (see παρά, u.s.). From Hom. down.]* 

πλέκω: 1 aor. ptep. πλέξαντες ; [(cf. Curtius § 103; 
Vaniéek p.519)]; fr. Hom. down; to plait, braid, weave 
together: πλέξαντες στέφανον, Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17; 
Jn. xix.2. [Comp.: ἐμ-πλέκω.] " 

πλέον, See πλείων. 

πλεονάζω; 1 aor. ἐπλεόνασα; (πλέον) ; Sept. for Ἢ» 
and ΤΊ; 1. intrans.: used of one possessing, to 
superabound [ A. V. to have over], 2 Co. viii. 15. of things, 
to exist in abundance [R. V.be multiplied], 2 Co. iv. 15; 
to increase, be augmented, Ro. v. 20; vi. 1; 2 Th. i. 3; 
Phil. iv. 17; 2 Pet.i. 8. 2. trans. to make to increase: 
τινά τινι, one in a thing, 1 Th. iii. 12; for 7397, Num. 
xxvi. 54; Ps. Ixx. (Ixxi.) 21; add 1 Mace. iv. 35. By 
prof. writ. [(fr. Hippoer. on)] in various other senses. 
[Comp.: ὑπερ πλεονάζω.] * 

πλεονεκτέω, -ὦ ; 1 aor. ἐπλεονέκτησα ; 1 aor. pass. subj. 
1 pers. plur. πλεονεκτηθῶμεν; (πλεονέκτης) ; 1. in- 
trans. to have more, or a greater part or share: Thuce., 
Xen., Plut., al.; fo be superior, excel, surpass, have an 
advantage over, τινός (gen. of pers.) tee (dat. of thing) : 
Xen., Plat., Isocr., Dem., al. 2. trans. to gain or 
take advantage of another, to overreach: [Hadt. 8, 112], 
Plat., Diod., Dion. Hal., Dio Cass., al.; and soin the N. T. 
in 2 Co. vii. 2; xii. 17, 18; 1 Th.iv.6 (see πρᾶγμα, b.) ; 
pass. [ef. B. $132, 22] ὑπό τινος, 2 Co. ii. 11 (10).* 

πλεονέκτης, -ov, 6, (πλέον and χω); 1. one eager 
to have more, esp. what belongs to others ({[Thue. 1, 40, 
1 (cf. Hdt. 7, 158)]; Xen. mem. 1, 5, 3) ; 2. greedy 
of gain, covetous: 1 Co. v. 10,11; vi. 10; Eph. v. 5; Sir. 
xiv. 9.* 

πλεονεξία, -as, 9, (πλεονέκτης, 4. V-), greedy desire to have 
more, covetousness, avarice: Lk. xii. 15; Ro.i. 29; Eph. 
iv. 19; v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. ii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 3, [on the 
om. of the art. in the last two pass. cf. W. 120 (114) ], 14; 
ὡς (Rec. ὥσπερ] πλεονεξίαν, [as a matter of covetousness], 
i.e. a gift which betrays the giver’s covetousness, 2 Co. 
ix. 5 [here R.V. txt. extortion]; plur. various modes in 
which covetousness shows itself, covetings [cf. W. § 27, 
3; B. 77 (67)], Mk. vii. 29. (In the same and various 
other senses by pref. writ. fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down.) 
[ Trench, N. T. Syn. § xxiv., and (in partial correction) 
Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. iii. 5.]* 

πλευρά, -as, ἡ, fr. Hom. (who always uses the plur.) 
down; ‘he side of the body: Jn. xix. 84; xx. 20, 25, 27; 
Acts xii. 7.* 


516 


πλήκτης 


ΠΛΈΩ, see πίμπλημι. 

πλέω; impf. 1 pers. plur. ἐπλέομεν : [allied w. πλύνω, 
Lat. pluo, fluo, our float, flow, ete.; Curtius § 369]; fr. 
Hom. down; 0 sail, navigate, travel by ship: Lk. viii. 23; 
Acts xxvii. 24; foll. by εἰς with an acc. of place, Acts 
xxi. 33 xxvil.6; ἐπὶ τόπον, Rev. xviii. 17G LT Tr WH; 
by a use common only to the poets (cf. Matthiae § 409, 
4a.; Kiihner ii. §409, 6; [Jelf § 559; W. 224 (210) ]), with 
a simple ace. indicating the direction: Acts xxvii. 2 (Eur. 
Med. vs. 7), where L T Tr WH add εἰς. [Comp.: ἀπο-» 
δια-, ἐκ-» kaTa-, Tapa-, ὑπο-πλέω. * 

πληγή, -ῆς, ἧ, (πλήσσω), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 
137, also for 7539 ; 1. a blow, stripe: plur., Lk. x. 
30; xii. 48; Acts xvi. 23,33; 2 Co. vi.5; xi. 23; a wound: 
ἡ πληγὴ τοῦ θανάτου, deadly wound [R. V. death-stroke], 
Rey. xiii. 3, 12; τῆς μαχαίρας, wound made by a sword 
[sword-stroke], Rey. xiii. 14. [On its idiomatic omis- 
sion (Lk. xii. 47, ete.) ef. Β. 82 (13); W. § 64, 4.] ὩΣ 
a public calamity, heavy affliction, [ οἵ. Eng. plague], (now 
tormenting now destroying the bodies of men, and sent 
by God as a punishment) : Rev. ix. 18 [Ree. om.], 20; xi. 
6; xv. 1, 6, 8; xvi. 9,[21]; xviii. 4,85 xxi.9; xxii. 18. 
[Cf. md. Διός, Soph. Aj. 137 (cf. 279); al.]* 

πλῆθος. -ovs, τό, (ΠΛΕΩ), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly 
for 29, often for jin]; @ multitude, i.e. a. a great 
number, se. of men or things: Acts xxi. 22 [not Tr WH]; 
Heb. xi. 12 [cf. W.120 (114) n.]; with πολύ added, Mk. 
iii. 7,8; πλῆθος witha gen., Lk. 11. 18 ; Jn. xxi. 6; Acts 
v.14; xxviii. 3 [A. V. bundle (1, Τ Tr WH add ri) ]; Jas. 
v. 20; 1 Pet.iv.8; πολὺ πλῆθος and πλῆθος πολύ [cf. W. 
§ 59, 2] with a gen., Lk. v. 6; vi. 17; xxiii. 27; Jn.v. 3 
[here L br. G T Tr WH om. πολύ]; Acts xiv. 1; xvii. 
4. b. with the article, the whole number, the whole 
multitude ; the assemblage: Acts xv. 30; xxiii. 7; τοῦ λαοῦ, 
Acts xxi. 86; πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος, Acts xv. 12; with a gen. 
Lk. i. 10; [viil. 37 (τῆς περιχώρου) ; xix. 37]; xxiii. 1; 
Acts [iv. 32]; v. 16; [vi. 2,5]; xxv. 24; the multitude 
of people, Acts ii. 6; xix. 9; with τῆς πόλεως added, 
Acts xiv. 4.* 

πληθύνω ; fut. πληθυνῶ; 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. πληθύ- 
ναι (2 Co. ix. 10 Rec.); Pass., impf. ἐπληθυνόμην; 1 aor. 
ἐπληθύνθην; (fr. πληθύς fulness); Aeschyl., Aristot., 
Hdian., Geop.; Sept. very often for 739, 735, 7277, 
sometimes for 237; 1. trans. to increase, to multi- 
ply: 2 Co. ix. 10; Heb. vi. 14 (fr. Gen. xxii. 17); pass. 
to be increased, (be multiplied) multiply: Mt. xxiv. 12; 
Acts vi. 7; vii. 17; ix. 31; xii. 24; τινί, [A. V.be multi- 
plied to one i. 6. be richly allotted to, 1 Pet. i. 2; 2 Pet. 
i. 2; Jude 2, (Dan. iii. 31 (98); Dan. vi. 25 Theodot. ; 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1 inser. [also Mart. Polye. inser. 
Constt. Apost. inser.]). 2. intrans. to be increased, 
to multiply: Acts vi. 1.* 

πλήθω, see πίμπλημι. 

πλήκτης, -ου, ὅ, (πλήσσω), (Vulgate percussor), [A. V. 
striker], bruiser, ready with a blow; a pugnacious, con 
tentious, quarrelsome person: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. i 7. 
(Plut. Marcell. 1; Pyrrh. 30; Crass. 9; Fab. 19; Diog. 
Laért. 6, 38; al.) * 


πλημμύρα 


πλημμύρα [so all edd.] (or πλημύρα [cf. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. § 7 Anm. 17 note; Lob. Rhemat. p. 264]) [better ac- 
cented as proparoxytone; Chandler 8100], -as and (so 
GT Tr WH) -ns (see μάχαιρα), ἡ, (fr. πλήμμη or πλήμη 
i.e. πλήσμη [fr. πλήθω. πίμπλημι, q. V.]), α flood, whether 
of the sea or of a river: Lk. vi.48. (Job xl. 18; [Dion. 
Hal. antt.1, 71]; Joseph. antt. 2, 10,2; Plut., Sext. Emp. ; 
with ποταμῶν added, Philo de opif. mund. § 19; [cef. de 
vita Moys. i. § 36 ; iii. § 24; de Abrah. § 19; de leg. alleg. 
i. §13].)* 

πλήν, adv., (fr. πλέον ‘more’ [Curtius §375; Lob. Path. 
Element. i. 143; ii. 93 (cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 16)]; 
hence prop. beyond, besides, further); it stands 1. 
adverbially, at the beginning of a sentence, serving 
either to restrict, or to unfold and expand what has pre- 
ceded: moreover, besides, so that, according to the re- 
quirements of the context, it may also be rendered but, 
nevertheless ; [howbeit; ef. B. § 146, 2]: Mt. xi. 22, 24; xviii. 
7; xxvi. 39, 64; LK. vi. 24,35; x. 11, 14, 20; xi. 41; xii. 
31; xiii. 33; xvii. 1 L Tr txt. WH; xviii. 8; xix. 27; xxii. 
21,22,42; xxiii. 28; 1 Co. xi. 11; Eph. v. 33; Phil.i. 18 
[R G (see Ellicott) ]; iii. 16 ; iv. 14; Rev. ii. 25; πλὴν ὅτι, 
except that, save that, (exx. fr. class. Grk. are given by 
Passow 8. v. 11.1 6. ; [L. and S.s. v. B. II. 4]): Acts xx. 
23 [(W. 508 (473); Phil.i.18 LT Tr WH (R. V. only 
that) |. 2. as a preposition, with the gen. (first so 
by Hom. Od. 8, 207; [ef. W. § 54, 6]), besides, except, but: 
Mk. xii. 32; Jn. viii. 10; Acts viii.1; xv. 285; xxvii. 22. 
Cf. Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 724 sq.* 

πλήρης, -es, (IIAEQ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. 
chiefly for 879; a. full, i. e. filled up (as opp. to 
empty): of hollow vessels, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi. 
43 [R GL]; with a gen. of the thing, Mk. viii. 19; οἵ 
a surface, covered in every part: λέπρας, Lk. v.12; of 
the soul, thoroughly permeated with: πνεύματος ἁγίου, Lk. 
iv. 1; Acts vi. 3; vii. 55; xi. 24; πίστεως, Acts νἱ. ὅ ; χάρι- 
tos, Acts vi. 8 [Ree. πίστεως]; χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας, Jn. 
1. 14; δόλου, Acts xiii. 10 (Jer. v. 27); θυμοῦ, Acts xix. 
28; abounding in, ἔργων ἀγαθῶν, Acts ix. 36. b. 
full i. e. complete ; lacking nothing, perfect, (so the Sept. 
sometimes for BIW; σελήνη πλήρης, Sir. 1. 6, οἵ. Hat. 6, 
106): μισθός, 2 Jn. 8 (Ruth ii. 12); σῖτος, a full grain of 
corn (one completely filling the follicle or hull contain- 
ing it), Mk. iv. 28.* 

πληρο-φορέω, -ῶ: [1 aor. impv. πληροφόρησον, inf. πληρο- 
φορῆσαι (Ro. χν. 18 Lmrg.); Pass., pres. impv. tAnpodo- 
ρείσθω ; pf. ptep. πεπληροφορημένος ; 1 aor. ptep. πληρο- 
φορηθείς; (fr. the unused adj. πληροφόρος, and this fr. 
πλήρης and φέρω); to bear or bring full, tomake full; a. 
to cause a thing to be shown to the full: τὴν διακονίαν, i.e. to 
fulfil the ministry in every respect, 2 Tim. iv. 5 (cf. πλη- 
ροῦν τὴν διακονίαν, Acts xii. 25); also τὸ κήρυγμα, ibid. 
17. Ὁ. to carry through to the end, accomplish: mpay- 
para πεπληροφορημένα, things that have been accomplished, 
(Itala and Vulg. completae), Lk.i.1 (cf. ὡς ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, 
Acts xix. 21) [ef. Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc.]. 
to fill one with any thought, conviction, or inclination: [Ro. 
xv. 13 L mrg. (foll. by ἐν w. dat. of thing); al. πληρόω, 


c. τινά, 


517 


πληρόω 


q-v.1]; hence to make one certain, to persuade, convince, 
one (πολλοῖς οὖν λόγοις Kai ὅρκοις πληροφορήσαντες Meya- 
βυζον, extr. fr. Ctes. in Phot. p. 41, 29 [(ed. Bekk.) ; but 
on this pass. see Bp. Lghtft. as below]) ; pass. to be per- 
suaded, Ro. xiv. 5; πληροφορηθείς, persuaded, fully con- 
vinced or assured, Ro. iv. 21; also πεπληροφορημένοι, Col. 
iv. 12 LT Tr WH; οἱ ἀπόστολοι... . πληροφορηθέντες διὰ 
τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ κυρίου ‘I. Xp. καὶ πιστωθέντες ἐν τῷ 
λόγῳ τοῦ θεοῦ, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 42,3; freq. so in 666]. 
writ.; 10 render inclined or bent on, ἐπληροφορήθη καρδία 
+++ τοῦ ποιῆσαι TO πονηρόν, Eccl. viii. 11, [ef. Test. xii. 
Patr., test. Gad 2]. The word is treated of fully by 
Bleek, Brief an d. Heb. ii. 2 p. 233 sqq.; Grimm in the 
Jahrbb. f. Deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 38 sqq.; [Bp. 
Loghtft. Com. on Col. iv. 12. Cf. also Soph. Lex. s. v.]* 

πληροφορία, -as, ἡ, (πληροφορέω, q. v.), fulness, abun- 
dance: πίστεως, Heb. x. 22; τῆς ἐλπίδος, Heb. vi. 11; τῆς 
συνέσεως, Col. ii. 2; full assurance, most certain confi- 
dence, (see πληροφορέω, ο. [al. give it the same meaning 
in one or other of the preceding pass. also; ef. Bp. Lghtft. 
on Col.1.¢.]),1 Th.i.5. (Not found elsewh. exe. in ecel. 
writ. [ef. W. 25].) * 

πληρόω -a, (inf. -ροῦν Lk. ix. 31, see WH. App. p. 166); 
impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπλήρου; fut. πληρώσω; 1 aor. ἐπλή- 
ρωσα; pf. πεπλήρωκα ; Pass., pres. πληροῦμαι; impf. 
ἐπληρούμην ; pf. πεπλήρωμαι; 1 aor. ἐπληρώθην; 1 fut. πλη- 
ρωθήσομαι; fut. mid. πληρώσομαι (once, Rey. vi. 11 Ree.) ; 
(fr. TAHPOS equiv. to πλήρης); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; Sept. for 87D; 1. tomake full, to fill, to fill 
up: τὴν σαγήνην. pass. Mt. xiii. 48; i. q. to fill to the full, 
πᾶσαν χρείαν, Phil. iv. 19; to cause to abound, to furnish 
or supply liberally: πεπλήρωμαι, I abound, I am liberally 
supplied, sc. with what is necessary for subsistence, Phil. 
iv.18; Hebraistically, with the accus. of the thing in 
which one abounds [ef. B. § 134, 7; W. § 32,5]: of spir- 
itual possessions, Phil. i. 11 (where Ree. has καρπῶν); 
Col. i. 9, (ἐνέπλησα αὐτὸν πνεῦμα σοφίας. Ex. xxxi. 3; 
xxxv. 31); iq. to flood, ἡ οἰκία ἐπληρὠθη [Tr mrg. 
ἐπλήσθη) ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς, In. xii. 3 (see ἐκ, IL. 5); ἦχος 
ἐπλήρωσε τὸν οἶκον, Acts ii. 2; with a gen. of the thing, 
τὴν Ἱερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς, Acts v. 28 (Liban. epp. 721 
πάσας — i. 6. πόλεις ---ἐνέπλησας τῶν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν λόγων; 
Justin. hist. 11, 7 Phrygiam religionibus implevit) ; 
i. q. to fill, diffuse throughout one’s soul: with a gen. of the 
thing, Lk. ii.40 RG L txt. T Tr mrg. (see below); Acts 
ii. 28; pass., Acts xiii. 52; Ro. xv. 13 [where L mrg. πλη- 
popopéw, α. V-ine.], 14; 2 Tim.i.4; w. adat. of the thing 
(cf. W. § 31, 7), pass., [Lk. ii. 40 L mrg. Tr txt. WH]; 
Ro. i. 29; 2Co. vii.4;  foll. by ἐν w. a dat. of the instru- 
ment: ev πνεύματι, Eph. v. 18; ἐν παντὶ θελήματι θεοῦ, 
with everything which God wills (used of those who 
will nothing but what God wills), Col. iv. 12 RG [but 
see πληροφορέω, c.]; πληροῦν τὴν καρδίαν τινός, to per- 
vade, take possession of, one’s heart, Jn. xvi. 6; Acts v. 
8; Christians are said πληροῦσθαι, simply, as those who 
are pervaded (i. e. richly furnished) with the power and 
gifts of the Holy Spirit: ἐν αὐτῷ, rooted as it were in 
Christ, i. e. by virtue of the intimate relationship en- 


τινά, 


πληροω 


tered into with him, Col. ii. 10 [ef. ἐν, I. 6. b.]; εἰς πᾶν τὸ 
πλήρωμα τοῦ θεοῦ (see πλήρωμα, 1), Eph. iii. 19 [mot WH 
mrg.]; Christ, exalted to share in the divine adminis- 
tration, is said πληροῦν τὰ πάντα, to fill (pervade) the 
universe with his presence, power, activity, Eph. iv. 10; 
also πληροῦσθαι (mid. for himself, i. 6. to execute his 
counsels [cf. W. 258 (242); B. § 134, 7]) τὰ πάντα ev πᾶ- 
σιν, all things in all places, Eph. i. 23 (μὴ οὐχὶ τὸν οὐρα- 
νὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν ἐγὼ πληρῶ, λέγει κύριος, Jer. xxiii. 24 
Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. i. 7 p. 55, cites exx. fits 
Philo and others; [(but ἐν πᾶσιν here is variously under- 
stood ; see πᾶς, II. 2 Ὁ. δ. aa. and the Comm.) ]). 2. 
to render full, i. e. to complete ; a. prop. to jill up 
to the top: πᾶσαν φάραγγα, Lk. 111. 5; so that nothing 
shall be wanting to full measure, fill to the brim, τὸ 
μέτρον (4. v-1a.), Mt. xxiii. 32. b. to perfect, con- 
summale ; a. a number: ἕως πληρωθῶσι καὶ of σύν- 
δουλοι, until the number of their comrades also shall have 
been made complete, Rey. vi. 11 L WH txt., cf. Diister- 
dieck ad loc. [see y. below]. by a Hebraism (see πίμ- 
πλημι, fin.) time is said πληροῦσθαι, πεπληρωμένος, either 
when a period of time that was to elapse has passed, or 
when a definite time is at hand: Mk.i.15; Lk. xxi. 24; 
Jn. vii. 8; Acts vii. 23, 30; ix. 23; xxiv. 27, (Gen. xxv. 
24; xxix. 21; Lev. viii. 33; xii.4; xxv. 30; Num. vi. 5; 
Joseph. antt. 4,4, 65 6, 4,1; πληροῦν τὸν τέλεον ἐνιαυτόν, 
Plat. Tim. p. 89 d.; τοὺς χρόνους, lege. 9 p. 866 a.). β. 
to make complete in every particular; to render perfect: 
πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ctr. 2 Th. i. 11; τὴν χαράν, Phil. ii. 2; pass., 
Jn. iii. 29; xv. 11; xvi. 24; xvii. 13; 1Jn.i.4; 2Jn. 12; 
τὰ ἔργα, pass. Rev. iii. 2; τὴν ὑπακοήν, to cause all to obey, 
pass. 2 Co. x. 6; τὸ πάσχα, Lk. xxii. 16 (Jesus speaks 
here allegorically: until perfect deliverance and blessed- 
ness be celebrated in the heavenly state). γ. lo 
carry through to the end, to accomplish, carry out, (some 
undertaking): πάντα τὰ ῥήματα, Lk. vii. 1; τὴν διακονίαν, 
Acts xii. 25; Col. iv. 17; τὸ ἔργον, Acts xiv. 20; τὸν 
δρόμον, Acts xiii. 25; sc. τὸν δρόμον, Rev. vi. 11 ace. to 
the reading πληρώσωσι (GT Tr WH mrg.) or πληρώ- 
σονται (Rec.) [see a. above]; ὡς ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, when 
these things were ended, Acts xix. 21. Here belongs 
also πληροῦν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, to cause to be everywhere 
known, acknowledged, embraced, [A. V. I have fully 
preached}, Ro. xv. 19; in the same sense τὸν λόγον τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Col. i. 25. c. to carry into effect, bring to reali- 
zation, realize ; a. of matters of duty, to perform, 
execule: τὸν νόμον, Ro. xiii. 8; Gal. v. 14; τὸ δικαίωμα 
Tov νόμου, pass., ἐν ἡμῖν, among us, Ro. viii. 4; πᾶσαν 
δικαιοσύνην, Mt. iii. 15 (εὐσέβειαν, 4 Mace. xii. 15); τὴν 
ἔξοδον (as something appointed and prescribed by God), 
kK ix. 91: B. of sayings, promises, prophecies, to 
bring to pass, γα! ἢ], accomplish at 99 in the phrases ἵνα or 
ὅπως πληρωθῇ ἡ γραφή. τὸ ῥηθέν. etc. (ef. Knapp, Seripta 
var. Ars. p. 533 sq.): Mt. i. 22; ii. 15, 17, 23; iv. 14: 
viii. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 35; xxi. 4; xxvi. 54, 56; xxvii. 9, 35 
Rec.; Mk. xiv. 49; xv. 28 (which vs.G T WH om. Trbr.); 
Lk. i. 20; iv. 213; xxi. 22 Rec.; xxiv. 44; Jn. xii. 38; xiii. 
18; xv. 25; xvii. 12; xvili. 9,32; xix. 24,36; Actsi. 16; 


518 


πλησίον 


iii. 18; xiii. 27; Jas. ii. 23, (1 K. ii. 27; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 
22). y. universally and absolutely, to fulfil, i.e. to 
cause God’s will (as made known in the law) to be obeyed 
as it should be, and God’s promises (given through the 
prophets) to receive fulfilment: Mt. v. 17; οἵ. Weiss, 
Das Matthiiusevang. u.s.w. p. 146 sq. [Comp.: dva-, 
ἀντ-ανα-, προσ-ανα-, ἐκ-, συμ-πληρόω.] * 

πλήρωμα, -τος, τό, (πληρόω), Sept. for πο; 1. 
etymologically it has a passive sense, that which is (or 
has been) filled; very rarely so in class. Grk.: a ship, in- 
asmuch as it is filled (i. e. manned) with sailors, rowers, 
and soldiers ; ἀπὸ δύο πληρωμάτων ἐμάχοντο, Lcian. ver. 
hist. 2, 37; πέντε εἶχον πληρώματα, ibid. 38. Inthe N. T. 
the body of believers, as that which is filled with the 
presence, power, agency, riches of God and of Christ: 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Eph. iv. 13 (see ἡλικία, 1 ο. [ef. W. § 30, 8 
N.1; B. 155 (136) ]); i. 23; εἰς πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ θεοῦ, 
that ye may become a body wholly filled and flooded by 
God, Eph. iii. 19 [but WH mrg. reads πληρωθῇ πᾶν τὸ 
mA. |. 2. that which fills or with which a thing is 
jilled: so very frequently in class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down; 
esp. of those things with which ships are filled, freight 
and merchandise, sailors, oarsmen, soldiers, [ef. our 
‘complement’ (yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below p. 258 sq.) ], 
(of the animals filling Noah’s ark, Philo de vit. Moys. ii. 
812); πλήρωμα πόλεως, the inhabitants or population fill- 
ing a city, Plat. de rep. 2 p. 371 e.; Aristot. polit. 3, 13 
p- 1284", 5; 4,4 p.1291*,17; al. So inthe N. T. ἡ γῆ καὶ 
τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς, whatever fills the earth or is contained 
in it, 1 Co. x. 26, 28 Ree. (Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 1; xlix. (I.) 
12; Jer. viii. 16; Ezek. xii. 19, ete.; τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς θαλάσ- 
σης, Ps. xev. (xevi.) 11; 1 Chr. xvi. 32); κοφίνων πληρώ- 
para, those things with which the baskets were filled, 
(basketfuls], Mk. vi. 43 T Tr WH [on this pass. ef. Bp. 
Lehtft. as below p. 260]; also σπυρίδων πληρώματα, Mk. 
viii. 20; the filling (Lat. complementum) by which a gap 
is filled up, Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; that by which a loss is 
repaired, spoken of the reception of all the Jews into 
the kingdom of God (see ἥττημα, 1), Ro. xi. 12. Of 
time (see πληρόω, 2 b. a.), that portion of time by which 
a longer antecedent period is completed; hence complete- 
ness, fulness, of time: τοῦ χρόνου, Gal. iv. 4; τῶν καιρῶν, 
Eph. i. 10 (on which see οἰκονομία). 3. fulness, 
abundance: Jn. i. 163 Col. i. 193 11. 9; full number, Ro. 
Xi. 25. 4. i. gq. πλήρωσις (see καύχημα, 2), i. 6. a 
fulfilling, keeping : τοῦ νόμου (see πληρόω, 2 6. a.), Ro. xiii. 
10. For a full discussion of this word see Fritzsche, Ep. 
ad Rom. ii. p. 469 sqq-; [esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. 
p- 257 sqq. ].* 

πλησίον, (neut. of the adj. πλησίος, -a, -ov), adv., fr. 
Hom. down, near: with a gen. of place [ef. W. § 54, 6], 
Jn. iv. 5; with the article, ὁ πλησίον se. dv [ef. B. § 125, 
10; W. 24] (Sept. very often for 1,; sometimes for 
nny), prop. Lat. proximus (so Vulg. in the N.T.), a 
neighbor ; i. 6. a. friend: Mt. v. 43. b. any 
other person, and where two are concerned the other (thy 
fellow-man, thy neighbor) i. e., acc. to the O. T. and 
Jewish conception, a member of the Hebrew race and 


πλησμονή 


commonwealth: Acts vii. 27; and Ree. in Heb. viii. 11; 
ace. to the teaching of Christ, any other man irrespec- 
tive of race or religion with whom we live or whom we 
chance to meet (which idea is clearly brought out in the 
parable Lk. x. 25-37): Mt. xix. 19; xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 
31, 33; Lk. x. 27; Ro. xiii. 9, 10; [xv. 2]; Gal. v. 14; 
Eph. iv. 25; Jas. ii. 8 and L T Tr WH in iv. 12 ; πλησίον 
εἶναί τινος, to be near one [one’s neighbor], i.e. in a pass. 
sense, worthy to be regarded as a friend and companion, 
Lk. x. 29; actively, to perform the offices of a friend 
and companion, ibid. 36; [on the om. of the art. in the 
last two exx. see B. § 129, 11; W.§19 fin.].* 

πλησμονή, -ῆς, ἡ, (πίμπλημι [ef. W. 94 (89)]), reple- 
tion, satiety, (Vulg. saluritas): πρὸς πλησμονὴν σαρκός, for 
the satisfying of the flesh, to satiate the desires of the 
flesh (see σάρξ, 4), Col. ii. 23, cf. Meyer ad loc.; [others 
(including R. V.) render the phrase against (i. e. for the 
remedy of) the indulgence of the flesh; see Bp. Lghtft. 
ad loc., and πρός, I. 1 6.1. (Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plato, 
Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

πλήσσω [οἷ. πληγή, (πέλαγος), Lat. plango, plaga; Cur- 
tius § 367]: 2 aor. pass. ἐπλήγην ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
for 737 (see πατάσσω, init-); to strike, to smite: pass. 
(of the heavenly bodies smitten by God that they may 
be deprived of light and shrouded in darkness), Rey. 
viii. 12. [Comp.: ék-, emt mAnooa. | * 

πλοιάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of πλοῖον ; see γυναικάριον, 
fin.), a small vessel, a boat: Mk. iii. 9; iv. 36 Ηθο.; Lk. 
vy. 2Lmrg. Τ Trmrg. WH mrg.; Jn. vi. [225], 22" Rec., 
23 [where L Tr mre. WH πλοῖα], 241, T Tr WH; xxi. 8. 
[Cf£. B. D.s. v. Ship (13).] (Arstph., Xen., Diod., al.) * 

πλοῖον, -ov, τό, (πλέω), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. chiefly for 
TAIN, α ship: Mt. iv. 21, 22; Mk.i.19; Lk. v.2;>RGL 
txt. Tr txt. WH txt.]; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xx. 13, and often 
in the historical bks. of the N. T.; Jas. iii. 4; Rev. viii. 
9; xviii. 19. [BB.DD. s.v. Ship.] 

πλόος -ovs, gen. -dov -ov, and in later writ. mods (Acts 
xxvii. 9; Arr. peripl. erythr. p. 176 § 61; see νοῦς [and 
cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 173 sq.]), (πλέω), fr. Hom. Od. 3, 
169 down; voyage: Acts xxi. 7; xxvii. 9, 10, (Sap. xiv. 
1)." 

πλούσιος, -a, -ov, (πλοῦτος), fr. Hes. opp. 22 down, Sept. 
for Vwy, rich; a. prop. wealthy, abounding in ma- 
terial resources: Mt. xxvii. 57; Lk. xii. 16; xiv. 12; xvi. 
1, 19; xviii. 23; xix. 2; ὁ πλούσιος, substantively, Lk. 
xvi. 21, 22; Jas.i.10,113 οἱ πλούσιοι, Lk. vi. 24; xxi. 1; 
1 Tim. vi. 17; Jas. ii. 6; ν. 1; Rev. vi. 15; xiii.16; πλού- 
σιος, without the art., a rich man, Mt. xix. 23, 24; Mk. x. 
DING sabe CHILO Ie ΧΥΝΙ 90- b. metaph. and univ. 
abounding, abundantly supplied : foll. by ἐν w. a dat. of 
the thing in which one abounds (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note), 
ev ἐλέει, Eph. 11. 4; ἐν πίστει, Jas. ii.5; absol. abounding 
(rich) in Christian virtues and eternal possessions, Rev. 
ii. 9; iii. 17, on which see Diisterdieck. ἐπτώχευσε πλού- 
σιος ὦν, of Christ, ‘although as the ἄσαρκος λόγος he for- 
merly abounded in the riches of a heavenly condition, by 
assuming human nature he entered into a state of (earth- 
ly) poverty,’ 2 Co. viii. 9.* 


519 


πλύνω 


πλουσίως, adv., [fr. Hdt. down], abundantly, richly: 
Col. iii. 16; 1 Tim. vi. 17; Tit. iii. 6; 2 Pet. i. 11* 

πλουτέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐπλούτησα; pf. πεπλούτηκα; (πλοῦ- 
tos); fr. Hes. down; Sept. sometimes for wy; a. 
to be rich, to have abundance: prop. of outward possessions, 
absol., Lk. i. 53; 1 Tim. vi.9; 1 aor. 7 have been made 
rich, have become rich, have gotten riches (on this use of 
the aorist see βασιλεύω, fin.), ἀπό twos, Rev. xviii. 15 
(Sir. xi. 18; [ef. ἀπό, II. 2.a.]) ; also ἔκ τινος (see ἐκ, II. 5), 
Rev. xviii. 3,19; ἔν τινι (cf. W. § 80, 8 b. note; the Greeks 
say πλουτεῖν τινος, Or τινι, OF TL), 1 Tim. vi. 18. b. 
metaph. to be richly supplied : πλουτεῖν εἰς πάντας, is afflu- 
ent in resources so that he can give the blessings of sal- 
vation unto all, Ro. x. 12; πλουτεῖν eis θεόν (see εἰς, B. 
Il. 2 b.a.), Lk. xii. 21; aor. ἐπλούτησα, absolutely, I 
became rich, i. e. obtained the eternal spiritual posses- 
sions: 1 Co. iv. 8; 2 Co. viii. 9; Rev. iii. 18; πεπλού- 
ma, I have gotten riches, Rev. iii. 17.* 

πλουτίζω ; Pass., pres. ptep. πλουτιζόμενος ; 1 aor. ἐπλου- 
τίσθην; (πλοῦτος) ; to make rich, to enrich: τινά, pass. 
2 Co. ix. 11; used of spiritual riches: τινά, 2 Co. vi. 10; 
ἐν with a dat. of the thing (see πλουτέω, 8.), pass., to be 
richly furnished, 1 Co.i.5. (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plut.; 
Sept. for ὙΠ.) * 

πλοῦτος, -ov, 6, and (ace. to L T Tr WH in 2 Co. viii. 2; 
Eph. i. 7; ii. 7; 111. 8, 16; Phil. iv. 19; Col. i. 27; ii. 2, 
but only in the nom. and ace.; οἵ. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 118; 
WH. App. p. 158]; W. 65 (64); B. 22 sq. (20)) τὸ πλοῦτος, 
(apparently i. q. πλέοτος, fr. πλέος full [ef. πίμπλημι]), 
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Wy, and also for }j>7 a mul- 
titude, 5°n, jin; riches, wealth ; a. prop. and absol. 
abundance of external possessions : Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 
19; Lk. viii. 14; 1 Tim. vi.17; Jas. v. 2; Rev. xviii. 17 
(16). b. univ. fulness, abundance, plenitude: with 
a gen. of the excellence in which one abounds, as τῆς 
χρηστότητος, Ro. ii.4; ix. 23; 2 Co. vill. 2; Eph. i. 7, 18; 
ii. 7; iii. 16; Col. i. 27; ii. 2. the πλοῦτος of God is 
extolled, i. 6. the fulness of his perfections, — of which 
two are mentioned, viz. σοφία and γνῶσις, Ro. xi. 33 (for 
σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως here depend on βάθος, not on πλούτου 
[ef. B. 155 (135); W. § 30,3 N.1]); the fulness of all 
things in store for God’s uses, Phil. ἵν. 19; in the same 
sense πλοῦτος is attributed to Christ, exalted at the 
right hand of God, Rev. v. 12; in amore restricted sense, 
πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ is used of the fulness of the things 
pertaining to salvation with which Christ is able to en- 
rich others, Eph. iii. 8. ce. univ. i. q. α good [(to 
point an antithesis)]: Heb. xi. 26; i. q. that with which 
one is enriched, with a gen. of the person enriched, used 
of Christian salvation, Ro. xi. 12.* 

πλύνω; impf. ἔπλυνον ; 1 aor. ἔπλυνα ; [(ef. πλέω)]; fr. 
Hom. down ; Sept. for 033 and ὙἹΤῪ ; to wash: τὰ δίκτυα, 
Lk. v. 2 LT Tr WH[(T WH mrg.-av; see dromAvva) }; 
used fr. Hom. down esp. in ref. to clothing (Gen. xlix. 
11; Ex. xix.10,14; Lev. xiii. 6, 34, ete.) ; hence figura- 
tively πλύνειν τὰς στολὰς αὐτῶν ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ apviov is 
used of those who by faith so appropriate the results of 
Christ’s expiation as to be regarded by God as pure and 


πνεῦμα δ 


sinless, Rev. vii. 14, and 1, Τ Tr WH in xxii. 14; cf. 
Ps. 1. (li.) 4, 9. [Comp.: ἀπο-πλύνω. SYN. see ova, 
fin. ]* 

πνεῦμα, -τος, τό, (πνέω), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; Hebr. may, Lat. spiritus; i. 6. 

1. a movement of air, (gentle) blast; a. of the 
wind: ἀνέμων πνεύματα, Hat. 7,16, 1; Paus. 5, 25; hence 
the wind itself, Jn. iii. 8; plur. Heb. i. 7, (1 K. xviii. 45; 
xix. 11; Job i. 19; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4, etc.; often in Grk. 
writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down: πνεῦμα τοῦ στόματος, 2 Th. 
ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 6, ef. Is. xi. 4); mv. ζωῆς, the 
breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. πνοὴ ζωῆς, il. 
7). [πνεῦμα and πνοή seem to have been in the main 
coincident terms; but avon became the more poetical. 
Both retain a suggestion of their evident etymology. 
Even in class. Grk. πνεῦμα became as freq. and as wide 
in its application as ἄνεμος. (Schmidt ch. 55, 7; Trench 
§ lxxiii.) ] 

2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by which the body 18 
animated [(Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.; see below)]: Lk. 
Vill. 55; xxiii. 46; Jn. xix. 30; Acts vii.59; Rev. xiii. 15 
[here R.V. breath]; ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα, to breathe out the 
spirit, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 ef. Sir. xxxviii. 23; Sap. 
xvi. 14 (Grk. writ. said ἀφιέναι τὴν ψὺυ χήν, as Gen. xxxv. 
18, see ἀφίημι, 1 b. and Kypke, Observv. i. p. 140; but we 
also find ἀφιέναι πνεῦμα θανασίμῳ σφαγῇ, Eur. Hee. 571); 
σῶμα χωρὶς πνεύματος νεκρόν ἐστιν, Jas. ii. 20 ; τὸ πνεῦμά 
ἐστι τὸ ζωοποιοῦν, ἡ σὰρξ οὐκ ὠφελεῖ οὐδέν, the spirit is 
that which animates and gives life, the body is of no 
profit (for the spirit imparts life to it, not the body in 
turn to the spirit; ef. Chr. Frid. Fritzsche, Nova opusce. 
p- 239), Jn. vi. 68. the rational spirit, the power by 
which a human being feels, thinks, wills, decides; the soul: 
τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ, 1 Co. ii. 11; opp. to 
σάρξ (q. ν. [esp. 2 a.]), Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; 1 Co. 
ν. ὃ; 2 Co. vii. 1; Col. 11. ὃ; opp. to τὸ σῶμα, Ro. viii. 10; 
1 Co. vi. 17, 20 Ree.; vii. 34; 1 Pet.iv.6. Although for 
the most part the words πνεῦμα and Ψυχή are used indis- 
criminately and so σῶμα and ψυχή put in contrast (but 
never by Paul; see ψυχή, esp. 2), there is also recognized 
a threefold distinction, τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ Ψυχὴ Kal τὸ σῶμα, 
1 Th. v. 23, ace. to which τὸ πνεῦμα is the rational part 
of man, the power of perceiving and grasping divine 
and eternal things, and upon which the Spirit of God 
exerts its influence; (πνεῦμα, says Luther, “is the high- 
est and noblest part of man, which qualifies him to 
lay hold of incomprehensible, invisible, eternal things; 
in short, it is the house where Faith and God’s word are 
at home” [see reff. at end]): ἄχρι μερισμοῦ ψυχῆς καὶ 
πνεύματος (see μερισμός, 2), Heb. iv. 12; ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, 
μιᾷ ψυχῇ. Phil. i. 27 (where instead of μιᾷ ψυχῇ Paul 
ace. to his mode of speaking elsewhere would have said 
more appropriately μιᾷ καρδίᾳ). τὸ πνεῦμά τινος, Mk. ii. 
8; viii. 12; Lk. i. 41: Acts xvii. 16; Ro. i. 9; viii. 16; 
1Co.v.4; xvi.18; 2Co.ii. 13; vii. 13; Gal. vi. 18; [Phil. 
iv. 23 LT Tr WH]; Philem. 25; 2 Tim. iv. 22; ὁ θεὸς 
τῶν πνευμάτων (for which Rec. has ἁγίων) τῶν προφητῶν, 


0 πνεῦμα 


who incites and directs the souls of the prophets, Rev. 
xxii. 6, where οἵ. Diisterdieck. the dative τῷ πνεύματι 
is used to denote the seat (locality) where one does or 
suffers something, like our in spirit: ἐπιγινώσκειν, Mk. ii. 
8; ἀναστενάζειν, Mk. viii. 12; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, Jn. xi. 33; 
ταράσσεσθαι, Jn. xiii. 21; ζέειν, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii. 
11; ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι, Lk. x. 21 (but L T Tr WH here add 
ἁγίῳ); dat. of respect: 1 Co. v.3; Col. ii. 5; 1 Pet. iv. 
6; κραταιοῦσθαι, Lk. i. 80; ii. 40 Ree. ; ἅγιον εἶναι, 1 Co. 
Vii. 34; ζωοποιηθείς, 1 Pet. iii. 18; ζῆν, 1 Pet. iv. 6; πτω- 
χοί, Mt.v.3; dat. of instrument. δεδεμένος, Acts xx. 22; 
συνέχεσθαι, xviii. 5 Rec.; θεῷ λατρεύειν, Phil. iii. 3 RG; 
dat. of advantage: ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου, 2 Co. ii. 13 
(12); ἐν τῷ πνεύματι, is used of the instrument, 1 Co. vi. 
20 Ree. [it is surely better to take ἐν τ. x. here locally, 
of the ‘sphere’ (W. 386 (362), ef. vs.19)]; also ἐν πνεύμα- 
τι, nearly i. q. πνευματικῶς [but see W. § 51, 1 6. note], Jn. 
iv. 23; of the seat of an action, ἐν τῷ πνεύματί pov, Ro. i. 
9; τιθέναι ἐν τῷ πν.» to propose to one’s self, purpose in 
spirit, foll. by the infin. Acts xix. 21. πνεύματα προφη- 
τῶν, acc. to the context the souls (spirits) of the prophets 
moved by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. xiv. 32; in a pecu- 
liar sense πνεῦμα is used of a soul thoroughly roused by 
the Holy Spirit and wholly intent on divine things, yet 
destitute of distinct self-consciousness and clear under- 
standing; thus in the phrases τὸ πνεῦμά μου προσεύχεται, 
opp. to ὁ νοῦς μου, 1 Co. xiv. 14; πνεύματι λαλεῖν μυστή- 
pia, ibid. 2; προσεύχεσθαι, ψάλλειν, εὐλογεῖν, TO πν..» aS 
opp. to τῷ voi, ibid. 15, 16. 

3. a spirit, i. e. a simple essence, devoid of all or at least 
all grosser matter, and possessed of the power of knowing, 
desiring, deciding, and acting; a. generically: Lk. 
xxiv. 37; Acts xxiii. 8 (on which see μήτε, fin.) ; ibid. 9; 
πνεῦμα σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα οὐκ ἔχει, Lk. xxiv. 39; πνεῦμα 
ζωοποιοῦν, [a life-giving spirit], spoken of Christ as raised 
from the dead, 1 Co. xv. 45; πνεῦμα ὁ θεός (God is spirit 
essentially), Jn. iv. 24; πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων, of God, 
Heb. xii. 9, where the term comprises both the spirits of 
men and of angels. b. a human soul that has left the 
body [(Babr. 122, 8)]: plur. (Lat. manes), Heb. xii. 23 ; 
1 Pet. iii. 19. c. a spirit higher than man but lower 
than God, i.e. an angel: plur. Heb. i. 14; used of demons, 
or evil spirits, who were conceived of as inhabiting the 
bodies of men: [Mk. ix. 20]; Lk. ix. 39; Acts xvi. 18; 
plur., Mt. viii. 16; xii. 45; Lk. x. 20; xi. 26; πνεῦμα 
πύθωνος or πύθωνα, Acts xvi. 16; πνεύματα δαιμονίων, 
Rey. xvi. 14; πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου, Lk. iv. 33 (see 
δαιμόνιον, 2) ; πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας, causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. 
11; πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον, Mt. x. 1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26, 
27; iii. 11, 30; v. 2,8, 13; vi. 7; vii. 25; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36; 
vi. 18; viii. 29; ix. 42; xi. 24, 26; Acts v.16; viii. 7; Rev. 
xvi. 13; xviii. 2; ἄλαλον, κωφόν (for the Jews held that 
the same evils with which the men were afflicted affected 
the demons also that had taken possession of them [ef. 
Wetstein, N. T. i. 279 sqq.; Edersheim, Jesus the Mes- 
siah, App. xvi.; see δαιμονίζομαι etc. and reff.]), Mk. ix. 
17, 25; πονηρόν, Lk. vii. 21; viii.2; Acts xix. 12, 13, 15, 
16, [(cf. Judg. ix. 23; 1S. xvi.14; xix. 9, ete.)]. d. 


πνεῦμα 


the spiritual nature of Christ, higher than the highest an- 
gels, close to God and most intimately united to him (in 
doctrinal phraseology the divine nature of Christ): 1 Tim. 
iii. 16; with the addition of ἁγιωσύνης (on which see 
ἁγιωσύνη, 1 [yet cf. 4 a. below]), Ro. i. 4 [but see Meyer 
ad loc., Ellicott on 1 Tim. 1. 6.71; it is called πνεῦμα αἰώ- 
mov, in tacit contrast with the perishable ψυχαί of sacri- 
ficial animals, in Heb. ix. 14, where ef. Delitzsch [and 
esp. Kurtz]. 

4. The Scriptures also ascribe a πνεῦμα to Gop, i. e. 
God’s power and agency, — distinguishable in thought (or 
modalistice, as they say in technical speech) from God’s 
essence in itself considered, — manifest in the course of 
affairs, and by its influence upon souls productive in the 
theocratic body (the church) of all the higher spiritual gifts 
and blessings; [ef. the resemblances and differences in 
Philo’s use of τὸ θεῖον πνεῦμα, 6. g. de gigant. $12 (ef. §5 
sq-); quis rer. div. 8 58 ; de mund. opif. § 46, etc. ].- a. 
This πνεῦμα is called in the O. T. OFX 4, TIT 1; 
in the N. T. πνεῦμα ἅγιον, τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα, τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ 
ἅγιον (first so in Sap. i. ὃ; ix.17; for wap m9, in Ps. 1. 
(li.) 13, Is. lxiii. 10, 11, the Sept. renders by πνεῦμα ἁγιω- 
auvvns),i.e. the Holy Spirit (august, full of majesty, adora- 
ble, utterly opposed to all impurity): Mt. i. 18, 20; iii. 
11; xii. 32; xxviii. 19; Mk. i. 8; iii. 29; xii. 36; xiii. 11; 
ΠῚ ΤΠ 95; 11. 20, 20; ΗΠ. 16, 22; iv. 1s) xi 13's) xii. 10) 
12; Jn.i. 33; vii. 39 [LT WH om. Tr br. dy.]; xiv. 26; 
xx. 223 Actsi. 2,5, 8,16; ii. 33, 38; iv. 25 LT Tr WH; 
ν. 3, 32; viii. 18 [LT WH om. Tr br. τὸ dy. ], 19; ix. 31; x. 
38, 44, 45,473 xi. 15, 16, 24; xiii. 2,4, 9,52; xv. 8, 28; 
Xvi. 6; xix.6; xx. 28; Ro. ix. 1; xiv. 17; xv. 18, 16,19 
{L Tr WH in br.]; 1 Co. vi. 19; xii. 3; 2 Co. vi. 6; xiii. 
13 (14); Eph.i.13; 1 Th.i.5,6; 2 Tim.i.14; Tit. iii. 
δ: Heb. ii. 4; vi.4; ix.8;1Jn.v. 7 Rec.; Jude 20; oth- 
er exx. will be given below in the phrases; (on the use 
and the omission of the art., see Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. 
ii. p. 105 [in opposition to Harless (on Eph. ii. 22) et al.; 
ef. also Meyer on Gal. v. 16; Ellicott on Gal. v.5; W. 
122 (116); B. 89 (78)]); τὸ mv. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ, Eph. 
iv. 30; 1 Th. iv.8; πνεῦμα θεοῦ, Ro. viii. 9, 14; τὸ τοῦ 
θεοῦ πνεῦμα, 1 Pet. iv. 14; (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τοῦ) θεοῦ, Mt. iii. 
16; xii. 18, 28; 1 Co. ii. 14; iii. 16; Eph. iii. 16; 1 Jn. 
iv. 2; τὸ mv. τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμῶν, 1 Co. vi. 11; τὸ rv. τοῦ πατρός, 
Mt. x. 20; av. θεοῦ ζῶντος, 2 Co. iii. 8; τὸ mv. τοῦ ἐγείραν- 
tos Ἰησοῦν, Ro. viii. 11; τὸ mv. τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ (emanating 
from God and imparted unto men), 1 Co. ii. 12; πνεῦμα 
and τὸ πν. τοῦ κυρίου, i.e. of God, Lk. iv. 18; Acts v. 9 
(cf. vs. 4); viii. 39; κυρίου, i.e. of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17, 
18 [ef. B. 343 (295)]; τὸ πνεῦμα ᾿Ιησοῦ, since the same 
Spirit in a peculiar manner dwelt in Jesus, Acts xvi. 
7 (where Rec. οι. Ἰησοῦ); Χριστοῦ, Ro. viii. 9; Ἰησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, Phil. i. 19; τὸ ἔν τινι (in one’s soul [not WH 
mrg.]) πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ, 1 Pet. i. 11; τὸ mv. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
θεοῦ, Gal. iv. 6; simply τὸ πνεῦμα or πνεῦμα: Mt. iv. 1; 
xii. 31, 32; xxii. 43; Mk.i. 10,12; Lk. iv. 1, 14; Jn.i. 
$2, 335 ili. 6, 8, 34; vil.39; Acts ii. 4; viii. 29; x. 19; 
xi. 12, 28; xxi. 4; Ro. viii. 6, 16, 23, 26, 27; xv.30; 1 Co. 
ii. 4, 10, 13 (where Rec. adds ἁγίου) ; xii. 4, 7, 8; 2Co. 


πνεῦμα 


i. 22; iii.6,8; v.5; Gal. iii. 3,5, 14; 1ν- 29..0 v.5, 17, 22, 
25; Eph. iv. 3; v. 9 Rec.; vi. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 2 Th. ii. 
13; 1 Tim. iv. 1; Jas. iv. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22 Rec.; 1 Jn. iii. 
24; v.6,8; Rev. xxii. 17. Among the beneficent and 
very varied operations and effects ascribed to this 
Spirit in the N. T., the foll. are prominent: by it the 
man Jesus was begotten in the womb of the virgin Mary 
(Mt. i. 18, 20; Lk. i. 35), and at his baptism by John it 
is said to have descended upon Jesus (Mt. iii. 16; Mk. 1. 
10; Lk. iii. 22), so that he was perpetually (μένον ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτόν) filled with it (Jn. i. 32, 33, ef. iii. 34; Mt. xii. 25; 
Acts x. 38); hence to its prompting and aid the acts and 
words of Christ are traced, Mt. iv. 1; xii. 28; Mk.i.12; 
Lk. iv. 1, 14. After Christ’s resurrection it was im- 
parted also to the apostles, Jn. xx. 22; Acts ii. Sub- 
sequently other followers of Christ are related to have 
received it through faith (Gal. iii. 2), or by the instra- 
mentality of baptism (Acts ii. 38; 1 Co. xii. 13) and the 
laying on of hands (Acts xix. 5, 6), although its recep- 
tion was in no wise connected with baptism by any mag- 
ical bond, Acts viii. 12, 15; x. 44 sqq. To its agency 
are referred all the blessings of the Christian religion, 
such as regeneration wrought in baptism (Jn. iii. 5, 6, 8; 
Tit. iii. 5, [but see the commentators on the passages, and 
reff. s.v. βάπτισμα. 87); all sanctification (1 Co. vi. 11; 
hence ἁγιασμὸς πνεύματος, 2 Th. ii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 2); the 
power of suppressing evil desires and practising holi- 
ness (Ro. viii. 2sqq.; Gal. v. 16 sqq. 22; 1 Pet. i. 22[Ree.], 
ete.); fortitude to undergo with patience all persecu- 
tions, losses, trials, for Christ’s sake (Mt. x. 20; Lk. xii. 
11,12; Ro. viii. 26) ; the knowledge of evangelical truth 
(In. xiv. 17, 26 ; xv. 26; xvi. 12, 13; 1 Co. ii.6-16; Eph. 
iii. 5), — hence it is called πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας (Jn. Il. ec. ; 
1 Jn. iv. 6), πνεῦμα σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως (Eph. i. 11); 
the sure and joyful hope of a future resurrection, and 
of eternal blessedness (Ro. v. 5; viii. 11; 2 Co. i. 22; v. 
5; Eph. i. 13 sq.); for the Holy Spirit is the seal and 
pledge of citizenship in the kingdom of God, 2 Co. i. 22; 
Eph.i.13. He is present toteach, guide, prompt, restrain, 
those Christians whose agency Godemploys in carrying 
out his counsels: Acts viii. 29, 39; x. 19; xi. 12; xiii. 2, 
4; xv. 28; xvi. 6,7; xx. 28. He is the author of char- 
isms or special “gifts” (1 Co. xii. 7 sqq.; see χάρισμα), 
prominent among which is the power of prophesy- 
ing: τὰ ἐρχόμενα ἀναγγελεῖ, Jn. xvi. 13; hence τὸ πνεῦμα 
τῆς προφητείας (Rev. xix. 10); and his efficiency in the 
prophets is called τὸ πνεῦμα simply (1 Th. v. 19), and 
their utterances are introduced with these formulas: 
τάδε λέγει TO πνεῦμα TO ἅγιον, Acts xxi. 11; τὸ πνεῦμα 
λέγει. 1 Tim. iv. 1; Rev. xiv. 13; with ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις 
added, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii.6,18, 22. Since the Holy 
Spirit by his inspiration was the author also of the O.T. 
Scriptures (2 Pet. i. 21; 2 Tim. iii. 16), his utterances 
are cited in the foll. terms: λέγει or μαρτυρεῖ τὸ πνεῦμα 
τὸ ἅγιον, Heb. iii. 7; x. 15; τὸ mv. τὸ dy. ἐλάλησε διὰ 
Ἡσαΐου, Acts xxviii. 25, ef. i. 16. From among the 
great number of other phrases referring to the Holy 
Spirit the following seem to be noteworthy here: God 


πνεῦμα 


is said διδόναι τινὶ τὸ mv. τὸ ἅγ., Lk. xi. 13; Acts xv. 8; 
pass. Ro. v. 5; more precisely, ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος αὐτοῦ, i.e. 
a portion from his Spirit’s fulness [B. § 132, 7; W. 366 
(343) ], 1 Jn. iv. 13; or ἐκχεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ πνεύματος αὐτοῦ, 
Acts ii. 17, 18, (for its entire fulness Christ alone re- 
ceives, Jn. iii. 34); men are said, λαμβάνειν mv. dy., Jn. 
xx. 22; Acts viii. 15, 17, 19; xix. 2; or τὸ mv. τὸ dy. Acts 
x. 47; or τὸ wv. τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ, 1 Co. ii. 12; or τὸ πνεῦμα, Gal. 
iii. 2, cf. Ro. viii. 15; av. θεοῦ ἔχειν, 1 Co. vii. 40; πνεῦμα 
μὴ ἔχειν, Jude 19; πληροῦσθαι πνεύματος ἁγίου, Acts xiii. 
52; ἐν πνεύματι, Eph. ν. 15; πλησθῆναι, πλησθήσεσθαι, 
πνεύματος ἁγίου, Lk.i.15,41,67; Actsii.4; iv. 8, 31; ix. 
17; xiii. 9; πνεύματος ἁγίου πλήρης, Acts vi. 5; vil. 55; 
x1. 243 πλήρεις πνεύματος (Ree. adds ἁγίου) καὶ σοφίας, 
Acts vi. 3; πνεύματι and πνεύματι θεοῦ ἄγεσθαι, to be led 
by the Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v.18; φέρεσθαι ὑπὸ 
mv. dy. 2 Pet. i. 21; the Spirit is said to dwell in the 
minds of Christians, Ro. viii. 9, 11; 1 Co. iii. 16; vi. 19; 
2 Tim. i. 14; Jas. iv. 5, (other expressions may be found 
under βαπτίζω, II. b. bb.; γεννάω, 1 fin. and 2 d.; éxxéwb.; 
χρίω, a.); γίνεσθαι ἐν πνεύματι, to come to be in the Spirit, 
under the power of the Spirit, i. e. in a state of inspira- 
tion or ecstasy, Rev. 1. 10; iv. 2. Dative πνεύματι, by the 
power and aid of the Spirit, the Spirit prompting, Ro. 
viii. 13; Gal. v. 5; τῷ mv. τῷ ἁγίῳ, Lk. x. 211, Tr WH; 
πνεύματι ἁγίῳ, 1 Pet. i. 12 (where RG Thave ἐν mv. dy.) ; 
πνεύματι θεοῦ, Phil. iii. 3 L T Tr WH; also ἐν πνεύματι, 
Eph. ii. 22; iii. 5 (where ἐν πνεύματι must be joined to 
ἀπεκαλύφθη); ἐν πνεύματι, in the power of the Spirit, 
possessed and moved by the Spirit, Mt. xxii. 43; Rev. 
xvii. 3; xxi. 10; also ἐν τῷ πνεύματι, Lk. ii. 27; iv. 1; 
ἐν τῷ mv. τῷ dy. Lk. x. 21 Tdf.; ἐν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ mv. Lk. iv. 
14; ἐν τῷ πνεύματι τῷ dy. εἰπεῖν, Mk. xii. 365 ἐν πνεύματι 
(ay.) προσεύχεσθαι, Eph. vi. 18; Jude 20; ἐν πν. θεοῦ 
λαλεῖν, 1 Co. xii. 3; ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι, love which the 
Spirit begets, Col. i. 8; περιτομὴ ἐν mv., effected by the 
Holy Spirit, opp. to γράμματι, the prescription of the 
written law, Ro. ii. 29; τύπος γίνου τῶν πιστῶν ἐν πν.» in 
the way in which you are governed by the Spirit, 1 Tim. 
iv. 12 Rec.; [ev évt πνεύματι, Eph. ii. 18]; ἡ ἑνότης τοῦ 
πνεύματος, effected by the Spirit, Eph. iv. 3; καινότης τοῦ 
mv. Ro. vii. 6. τὸ πνεῦμα is opp. to ἡ σάρξ i. 6. human 
nature left to itself and without the controlling influence 
of God’s Spirit, subject to error and sin, Gal. v. 17, 19, 
22; [vi. 8]; Ro. viii. 6; so in the phrases περιπατεῖν κατὰ 
πνεῦμα (opp. to κατὰ odpka), Ro. viii. 1 Rec., 4 ; of κατὰ 
πνεῦμα SC. ὄντες (Opp. to of κατὰ σάρκα ὄντες), those who 
bear the nature of the Spirit (i. 6. of πνευματικοί), ib. 
δ: ἐν πνεύματι εἶναι (opp. to ἐν σαρκί), to be under the 
power of the Spirit, to be guided by the Spirit, ib. 9; 
πνεύματι (dat. of ‘norm’; [ef. B. § 183, 22 b.; W. 219 
(205) ]) περιπατεῖν (opp. to ἐπιθυμίαν σαρκὸς τελεῖν), Gal. 
v.16. The Holy Spirit isa δύναμες, and is expressly 
so called in Lk. xxiv. 49, and δύναμις ὑψίστου, Lk. i. 35; 
but we find also πνεῦμα (or mv. dy.) καὶ δύναμις, Acts x. 
38; 1 Co. ii. 4; and ἡ δύναμις τοῦ πνεύματος, Lk. iv. 14, 
where πνεῦμα is regarded as the essence, and δύναμις its 
efficacy; but in 1 Th. i. 5 ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ is epexegetical 


522 


πνεῦμα 


οἵ ἐν δυνάμει. In some pass. the Holy Spirit is rhetori- 
cally represented as a Person [(ef. reff. below)]: Mt. 
xxvill.19; Jn. xiv. 16 sq. 26; xv. 26; xvi. 13-15 (in which 
pass. fr. Jn. the personification was suggested by the fact 
that the Holy Spirit was about to assume with the apos- 
tles the place of a person, namely of Christ) ; τὸ mv., καθὼς 
βούλεται, 1 Co. xii. 11; what any one through the help 
of the Holy Spirit has come to understand or decide upon 
is said to have been s poken to him by the Holy Spirit: 
εἶπε τὸ πνεῦμά τινι, Acts Vili. 29; x.19; xi. 125 xiii. 4; τὸ 
mv. τὸ Gy. διαμαρτύρεταί μοι, Acts xx. 23. τὸ mv. τὸ dy. 
ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, i. 6. not only rendered them fit to dis- 
charge the office of bishop, but also exercised such an in- 
fluence in their election (xiy. 23) that none except fit per- 
sons were chosen to the office, Acts xx. 28 ; τὸ πνεῦμα 
ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις in Ro. viii. 26 means, 
as the whole context shows, nothing other than this: ‘al- 
though we have no very definite conception of what we 
desire (τί προσευξώμεθα), and cannot state it in fit lan- 
guage (καθὸ δεῖ) in our prayer but only disclose it by in- 
articulate groanings, yet God receives these groanings 
as acceptable prayers inasmuch as they come from a soul 
full of the Holy Spirit.’ Those who strive against the 
sanctifying impulses of the Holy Spirit are said ἀντιπί- 
mrew τῷ TY. τῷ Gy. Acts vii. 51; ἐνυβρίζειν τὸ mv. τῆς χάρι- 
tos, Heb. x. 29. πειράζειν τὸ mv. τοῦ κυρίου is applied to 
those who by falsehood would discover whether men full 
of the Holy Spirit can be deceived, Acts v. 9; by anthro- 
popathism those who disregard decency in their speech 
are said λυπεῖν τὸ mv. τὸ dy., since by that they are taught 
how they ought to talk, Eph. iv. 80 (παροξύνειν τὸ mv. Is. 
Ixiii. 10; παραπικραίνειν, Ps. ον. (evi.) 33). Cf. Grimm, 
Institutio theologiae dogmaticae, § 131; [ Weiss, Bibl. 
Theol. § 155 (and Index s. v. ‘Geist Gottes,’ ‘Spirit of 
God’); Kahnis, Lehre vom Heil. Geiste; Fritzsche, Nova 
opusce. acad. p. 278 sqq.; B. D.s. v. Spirit the Holy; 
Swete in Dict. of Christ. Biog. s.v. Holy Ghost]. b. 
τὰ ἑπτὰ πνεύματα τοῦ θεοῦ, Rey. [iii. 1 (where Rec." om. 
ἑπτά); iv. 5; v.6 [here Lom. WH br. ἑπτά], which are 
said to be ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ (i. 4) are not seven 
angels, but one and the same divine Spirit manifesting 
itself in seven energies or operations (which are rhetori- 
cally personified, Zech. iii. 9; iv. 6,10); ef. Diisterdieck 
on Rey. i. 4; [T'rench, Epp. to the Seven Churches, ed. 3 
Ρ. 7sq.]- c. by meton. πνεῦμα is used of a. one 
in whom a spirit (πνεῦμα) is manifest or embodied ; hence 
i. q. actuated by a spirit, whether divine or demoniacal ; one 
who either is truly moved by God’s Spirit or falsely boasts 
that he is: 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Jn. iv. 2,3; hence διακρίσεις 
πνευμάτων, 1 Co. xii. 10; μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε, 1 Jn. 
iv. 1; δοκιμάζετε τὰ πνεύματα, εἰ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ ἐστίν, ibid. ; 
πνεύματα πλάνα joined with διδασκαλίαι δαιμονίων, 1 Tim. 
iv. 1. But in the truest and highest sense it is said 6 
κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν, he in whom the entire fulness of 
the Spirit dwells, and from whom that fulness is diffused 
through the body of Christian believers, 2 Co. iii. 17. B. 
the plur. πνεύματα denotes the various modes and gifts 
by which the Holy Spirit shows itself operative in those 


πνεῦμα 


in whom it awells (such as τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς προφητείας, τῆς 
σοφίας, etc.), 1 Co. xiv. 12. 

5. univ. the disposition or influence which fills and gov- 
erns the soul of any one; the efficient source of any power, 
affection, emotion, desire, etc.: τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπα- 
τήσαμεν, 2 Co. xii. 18; ἐν πνεύματι ᾿Ηλίου, in the same 
spirit with which Elijah was filled of old, Lk. i. 17; 
τὰ ῥήματα... . πνεῦμά ἐστιν, exhale a spirit (and fill be- 
lievers with it), Jn. vi. 63; οἵου πνεύματός ἐστε ὑμεῖς, 
[what manner of spirit ye are of] viz. a divine spirit, 
that I have imparted unto you, Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.; (cf. 
Β. § 132,11 I.; W. § 30, 5)]; τῷ πνεύματι, 6 ἐλάλει, 
Acts vi. 10, where see Meyer; πραῦ καὶ ἡσύχιον πνεῦμα, 
1 Pet. iii. 4; πνεῦμα πραότητος, such as belongs to the 
meek, 1 Co. iv. 21; Gal. vi.1; τὸ av. τῆς προφητείας, such 
as characterizes prophecy and by which the prophets 
are governed, Rev. xix. 10; τῆς ἀληθείας, σοφίας καὶ ἀπο- 
καλύψεως, see above p. 521° mid. (Is. xi. 2; Deut. xxxiv. 9; 
Sap. vii. 7); τῆς πίστεως, 2 Co. iv.13; τῆς υἱοθεσίας, such 
as belongs to sons, Ro. viii. 15; τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ, of 
the life which one gets in fellowship with Christ, ibid. 2; 
δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ, 2 Tim.i. 7; ἕν πνεῦμα 
εἶναι with Christ, i.q. to be filled with the same spirit as 
Christ and by the bond of that spirit to be intimately 
united to Christ, 1 Co. vi. 17; ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, by the re- 
ception of one Spirit’s efficiency, 1 Co. xii. 13; eis & 
πνεῦμα, so as to be united into one body filled with one 
Spirit, ibid. RG; ἕν πνεῦμα ποτίζεσθαι, [made to drink 
of i.e.] imbued with one Spirit, ibid. L T Tr WH [see 
ποτίζω]; ἕν σῶμα καὶ ἕν πνεῦμα, one (social) body filled 
and animated by one spirit, Eph. iv. 4;—in all these 
pass. although the language is general, yet it is clear 
from the context that the writer means a spirit begotten 
of the Holy Spirit or even identical with that Spirit [(cf. 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 6; Herm. sim. 9, 13. 18; Ignat. ad 
Magn. 7)]. In opposition to the divine Spirit stand, 
τὸ πνεῦμα TO ἐνεργοῦν ἐν τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας (a spirit 
that comes from the devil), Eph. ii. 2; also τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ 
κύσμου, the spirit that actuates the unholy multitude, 
1 Co. ii. 12; δουλείας, such as characterizes and governs 
slaves, Ro. viii. 15; κατανύξεως, Ro. xi. 8; δειλίας, 2 Tim. 
i. 7; τῆς πλάνης, 1 Jn. iv. 6 (πλανήσεως, Is. xix. 14; πορ- 
veias, Hos. iv. 12; ν. 4); τὸ τοῦ ἀντιχρίστου sc. πνεῦμα, 
1 Jn. iv. 3; ἕτερον πνεῦμα λαμβάνειν, i. 6. different from 
the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. xi.4; τὸ av. rod voos, the govern- 
ing spirit of the mind, Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Ackermann, 
Beitriige zur theol. Wiirdigung u. Abwiagung der Begriffe 
πνεῦμα, νοῦς, u. Geist, in the Theol. Stud. τι. Krit. for 
1839, p. 873 sqq.; Biichsenschiitz, La doctrine de l’Esprit 
de Dieu selon Vancien et nouveau testament. Strasb. 
1840; Chr. Fr. Fritzsche, De Spiritu Sancto,commenta- 
tio exegetica et dogmatica, 4 Pts. Hal. 1840 sq., included 
in his Nova opuscula academica (Turici, 1846) p. 233 sqq.; 
Kahnis, Die Lehre v. heil. Geist. Pt. i. (Halle, 1847); an 
anonymous publication [by Prince Ludwig Solms Lich, 
entitled] Die biblische Bedeutung des Wortes Geist. 
(Giessen, 1862); H. H. Wendt, Die Begriffe Fleisch u. 
Geist im bibl. Sprachgebrauch. (Gotha, 1878); [Cremer 


523 


πνευματικῶς 


in Herzog ed. 2, 8. ν. Geist des Menschen; G. L. Hahn, 
Theol. d. N. Test. i. § 149 sqq.; J. Laidlaw, The Bible 
Doctrine of Man. (Cunningham Lects., 7th Series, 1880); 
Dickson, St. Paul’s use of the terms Flesh and Spirit. 
(Glasgow, 1883); and reff. in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) and 
Dict. of Christ. Biog., as above, 4 a. fin.]* 

πνευματικός, -7, -όν, (πνεῦμα), spiritual (Vulg. spiritalis); 
in the N. T. 1. relating to the human spirit, or 
rational soul, as the part of man which is akin to God 
and serves as his instrument or organ, opp. to ἡ ψυχή 
(see πνεῦμα, 2): hence τὸ πνευματικόν, that which pos- 
sesses the nature of the rational soul, opp. to τὸ ψυχικόν, 
1 Co. xv. 46 [οἵ. W. 592 (551)]; σῶμα πνευματικόν, the 
body which is animated and controlled only by the ra- 
tional soul and by means of which the rational life, or 
life of the πνεῦμα, is lived; opp. to σῶμα ψυχικόν, verse 
44. 2. belonging toa spirit, or’a being higher 
than man but inferior to God (see πνεῦμα, 8 6.) : τὰ πνευ- 
ματικά (i. 6. spiritual beings or powers, [R. V. spiritual 
hosts], cf. W. 239 (224)) τῆς πονηρίας (gen. of quality), 
i.e. wicked spirits, Eph. vi. 12. 3. belonging to the 
Divine Spirit; a. in reference to things; 
emanating from the Divine Spirit, or exhibiting its effects 
and so its character: χάρισμα, Ro. 1.11; εὐλογία, Eph. i. 
3; σοφία καὶ σύνεσις πνευματική (opp. to σοφία σαρκική, 2 
Co. i. 12; ψυχική, Jas. iii. 15), Col. i. 9; d8ai, divinely 
inspired, and so redolent of the Holy Spirit, Col. iii. 16; 
[Eph. v.19 Lehm. br.]; 6 νόμος (opp. to a σάρκινος man), 
Ro. vii. 14; θυσίαι, tropically, the acts of a life dedicated 
to God and approved by him, due to the influence of the 
Holy Spirit (tacitly opp. to the sacrifices of an external 
worship), 1 Pet. ii. 5; i. q. produced by the sole power of 
God himself without natural instrumentality, supernatural, 
βρῶμα. πόμα, πέτρα, 1 Co. x. 3, 4, [(cf. ‘Teaching’ ete. 10, 
3)]; πνευματικά, thoughts, opinions, precepts, maxims, 
ascribable to the Holy Spirit working in the soul, 1 Co. 
ii. 13 (on which see συγκρίνω, 1) ; τὰ πνευματικά, spiritual 
gifts, —of the endowments called χαρίσματα (see χάρι- 
cpa), 1 Co. xii. 1; xiv. 1; univ. the spiritual or heavenly 
blessings of the gospel, opp. to τὰ σαρκικά, Ro. xy. 27; [1 
Co. ix. 11]. b. in reference to persons; one who 
is filled with and governed by the Spirit of God: 1 Co. ii. 
15 (cf. 10-13, 16); [iii. 1]; xiv. 37; Gal. vi. 1; οἶκος 
πνευματικός, of a body of Christians (see οἶκος, 1 b. fin.), 
1 Pet. ii. 5. (The word is not found in the O. T. [ef. 
W. § 34, 3]. In prof. writ. fr. Aristot. down it means 
pertaining to the wind or breath; windy, exposed to the 
wind; blowing; [but Soph. Lex. s. v. cites rv. οὐσία, Cleo- 
med. 1,8 p. 46; τὸ πν. τὸ πάντων τούτων αἴτιον, Strab. 1, 
3,5 p. 78, 10ed. Kramer; and we find it opp. to σωματικόν 
in Plut. mor. p. 129 ο. (de sanitate praecepta 14) ; cf. An- 
thol. Pal. 8, 76. 175].)* 

πνευματικῶς, adv., spiritually, (Vulg. spiritaliter) : i. 6. 
by the aid of the Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. [13 WH mrg.], 14; 
in a sense apprehended only by the aid of the Divine 
Spirit, i.e. in a hidden or mystical sense, Rev. xi. 8. Its 
opposite σαρκικῶς in the sense of literally is used by Jus- 
tin Mart. dial. c. Tryph. ο. 14 p. 231 ἃ." 


Wvew 


πνέω; 1 aor ἔπνευσα; fr. Hom. down; fo breathe, to | 
blow: of the wind, Mt. vii. 25, 27; Lk. xii. 55; Jn. ii. 
8; vi. 18; Rev. vii. 1; τῇ mveovoy sc. αὔρᾳ (ef. W. 591 
(550); [B. 82 (72)]), Acts xxvii.40. [Comp.: éx-, ἐν-» 
ὑπο- πνέω.] * 

πνίγω: : impf. ἔπνιγον ; 1 aor. ἔπνιξα ; impf. pass. 3 pers. 
plur. ἐπνίγοντο ; a. tochoke, strangle: used of thorns 
crowd.ny down the seed sown in a field and hindering 
its crowth, Mt. xiii. 7 T WH mrg.; in the pass. of per- 
ishing by drowning (Xen. anab. 5, 7, 25; cf. Joseph. antt. 
10, 7,5), Mk. v. 13. b. to wring one’s neck, throtile, 
ΓΑ. V. to take one by the throat]: Mt. xviii. 28. [Comp.: 


> > ᾿ ΕΣ 
dro-, ἐπι-, συμ- πνίγω.] 


52 


πνικτός, -1), -ύν, (πνίγω), suffocated, strangled: τὸ πνι- 
κτόν, [what is strangled, i. 6.1 an animal deprived of life 
without shedding its blood, Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25. 
[(Several times in Athen. and other later writ., chiefly 
of cookery; ef. our “smothered” as a culinary term.) |* 

πνοή, -ῆς, ἡ, (πνέω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Ww); 
1. breath, the breath of life: Acts xvii. 25 (Gen. ii. 7; 
Prov. xxiv. 12; Sir. xxx. 29 (21); 2 Mace. iii. 313 vii. 
9). 2. wind: Acts ii. 2 (Job xxxvii. 9). [(Cf. 
πνεῦμα, 1 b.]* 

ποδήρης, -ες, acc. -pnv, Lehm. ed. ster. Tdf. ed. 7 in Rev. 
ἰ. 18; see ἄρσην, (πούς, and ἄρω ‘to join together,” ‘fas- 
ten’), reaching to the feet (Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plut., 
al.): ὁ ποδήρης (se. χιτών, Ex. xxv. 63 xxvili. 4: xxxv. 
8; Ezek. ix.3) or ἡ ποδήρης (se. ἐσθής), a garment reaching 
to the ankles, coming down to the feet, Rev.i. 13 (Sir. xxvii. 
8; xlv. 8; χιτὼν ποδήρης, Xen. Cyr. 6,4, 2; Paus. 5, 19, 
6; ὑποδύτης mod. Ex. xxviii. 27; ἔνδυμα mod. Sap. xviii. 
24; [Joseph. b.j. 5,5, 7]). [Cf Trench § 1. sub fin.] * 

πόθεν, adv., [fr. Hom. down], whence ; a. of 
place, from what place: Mt. xv. 33; LK. xiii. 25, 27; Jn. 
iii. 8; vi. 55 viii. 14; ix. 29, 30; xix. 9; Rev. vii. 13; 
from what condition, Rev. ii. 5. b. of origin or 
source, i.q. from what author or giver: Mt. xiii. [27], 54, 
56; xxi. 25; Mk. vi. 2; Lk. xx. 7; Jn. ii. 9; Jas. iv. 1; 
from what parentage, Jn. vii. 27 sq. (ef. vi. 42), see Meyer 
ad loc. c. of cause, how is it that? how can it be that? 
Mk. viii. 4; xii. 37; Lk. i. 43; Jn. i. 48 (49); iv. 11." 

ποία, -as, 7, (cf. Curtius 8. 3877, herbage, grass: ace. to 
some interpreters found in Jas. iv. 14; but ποία there is 
more correctly taken as the fem. of the adj. ποῖος (q. v.), 
of what sort. (Jer. ii. 22; Mal. iii. 2; in Grk. writ. fr. 
Ifom. down. ΝῊ ἝΝ 
5 impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐποίει, plur. 2 2 pers. ἐποι- 
εἴτε, 3 pers. ἐποίουν ; fut. ποιήσω; 1 aor. ἐποίησα, 3 pers. 
plur. optat. ποιήσειαν (Lk. vi. 11 RG; ef. W. § 13, 2d.; 
[ B. 42 (37)]) and ποιήσαιεν (ibid. LT Tr WH [see WH. 
App. Ρ. 167]); pf. πεποίηκα; plpf. πεποιήκειν without 
augm. (Mk. xv. 7; see W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); Mid., 
pres. ποιοῦμαι ; impf. ἐποιούμην ; fut. ποιήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐποι- 
ησάμην; pf. pass. ptep. πεποιημένος (Heb. xii. 27); fr. 
Hom. down; Hebr. nwy; Lat. facio, i.e. 

I. to make (Lat. efficio), 1. τί; a. with the 
aames of the things made, to produce, construct, form, 
fashon, ete.: ἀνθρακιάν, Jn. xviii. 18; εἰκόνα, Rev. xiii. 


ποιέω, -@ 


4 ποιεω 
14; ἱμάτια, Acts ix. 39; ναούς, Acts xix. 24; σκηνάς, Mt 
xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix.33; τύπους, Acts vii. 43; πηλόν, 
Jn. ix. 11, 14; πλάσμα, Ro. ix. 20; ace. to some inter- 
preters (also W. 256 n.! (240 n.2)) ὁδὸν ποιεῖν, to make a 
path, Mk. ii. 23 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. (so that the mean- 
ing is, that the disciples of Christ made a path for them- 
selves through the standing grain by plucking the heads; 
see ὁδοποιέω, fin. If we adopt this interpretation, we 
must take the ground that Mark does not give us the 
true account of the matter, but has sadly corrupted the 
narrative received from others; [those who do accept 
it, however, not only lay stress on the almost unvarying 
lexical usage, but call attention to the fact that the other 
interpretation (see below) finds the leading idea ex. 
pressed in the par ticiple—an idiom apparently foreign 
to the N. T. (see W. 353 (381)), and to the additional 
circumstance that Mk. introduces the phrase after hav- 
ing already expressed the idea of ‘going’, and ex- 
pressed it by substantially the same word (mapamopeve- 
σθαι) which Matthew (xii. 1) and Luke (vi. 1) employ 
and regard as of itself sufficient. On the interpretation 
of the pass., the alleged ‘sad corruption,’ ete., see Jas. 
Morison, Com. on Mk. 2d ed. p. 57 sq.; on the other side, 
Weiss, Marcusevangelium, p. 100]. But see just below, 
under ¢.). 10 cereale, to produce: of God, as the author 
of all things, τί or τινά, Mt. xix.4; Mk. x. 6; Lk. xi. 40; 
Heb. i. 2; Acts iv. 24; vii.50; xvii. 24; Rev. xiv. 7; pass. 
Heb. xii. 27, (Sap. i. 13; ix. 9; 2 Mace. vii. 28, and often 
in the O.T. Apocrypha; for Ny in Gen. 1. 7, 16, 25, ete. ; 
for 812 in Gen. i. 21, 27; v. it ete. ; ; also in Grk. writ.: 
γένος ἀνθρώπων, Hes. op. 109, ete.; absol. ὁ ποιῶν, the crea- 
tor, Plat. Tim. p. 76 c.); here belongs also Heb. iii. 2, on 
which see Bleek and Liinemann [(ef. below, 2 e. B.)]. 
In imitation of the Hebr. Awy (ef. Winer [’s Simonis (4th 
ed. 1828)], Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 754; Gesenius, Thes. 
ii. p. 1074 sq.) absol. of men, to labor, to do work, Mt. xx. 
12 (Ruth ii. 19); i. q. to be operative, exercise activity, 
Rey. xiii. 5 R»etels LT Tr WH (ef. Dan. xi. 28; but al. 
render ποιεῖν in both these exx. spend, continue, in ref. 
to time; see II. d. below]. b. joined to nouns de- 
noting a state or condition, it signifies to be the au- 
thor of, to cause: σκάνδαλα, Ro. xvi. 17; εἰρήνην (to be the 
author of harmony), Eph. ii. 15; Jas. iii. 18; ἐπισύστασιν 
PRANAB AE ἐπίστασιν], Acts xxiv. 12; συστροφήν, Acts 
xxiii. 12; ποιῶ τινί τι, to bring, afford, a thing to one, Lk. 
i. 68; Acts xv. 3, (so also Grk. writ., as Xen. mem. 3, 
10, 8 [ef. L. and S. s.v. A. IT. 1a.]). ce. joined to 
nouns involving the idea of action (or of something 
which is accomplished by action), so as to form a peri- 
phrasis for the verb cognate to the substantive, and thus 
to express the idea of the verb more forcibly, —in which 
species of periphrasis the Grks. more commonly use the 
middle (see 3 below, and W. 256 (240); [B. § 135, 5]): 
μονὴν ποιῶ παρά τινι, Jn. xiv. 23 (where LT Tr WH ποιη- 
σόμεθα; cf. Thue. 1,131); ὁδόν, to make one’s way, g0, 
Mk. ii. 23 (where render as follows : they began, as they 
ts to pluck the ears; ef. ποιῆσαι ὁδὸν αὐτοῦ, Judg. xvii. 
8; the Greeks say ὁδὸν ποιεῖσθαι, Hdt. 7, 42; see ‘above, 


ποιέω 


under a.) ; πόλεμον, Rev. xiii. 5 Rec.“*; with the addi- 
tion of μετά τινος (i. 4. πολεμεῖν), Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 
7 [here Lcm. WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; xix. 19, (see pera, 
1. 2 ἃ. p. 403°); ἐκδίκησιν, Lk. xviii. 7, 8; τινί, Acts vii. 
24, (Mic. v. 15) ; ἐνέδραν, i. q. ἐνεδρεύω, to make an am- 
bush, lay wait, Acts xxv. 3; συμβούλιον, i. 4. συμβουλεύο- 
μαι, to hold a consultation, deliberate, Mk. iii. 6 [RG 
TTrmrg. WH mrg.]; xv. 1 [here TWH mrg. cup. 
ἑτοιμάσαντες; συνωμοσίαν, i. q. συνόμνυμι, Acts xxiii. 13 
(where L T Tr WH ποιησάμενοι for Rec. πεποιηκότες ; see 
in 3 below) ; κρίσιν, to execute judgment, Jn. v. 27; Jude 
15. To this head may be referred nouns by which the 
mode or kind of action is more precisely defined; as 
δυνάμεις, δύναμιν, ποιεῖν, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58; Mk. vi. 5; 
Acts xix. 11; τὴν ἐξουσίαν τινός, Rev. xiii. 12; ἔργον (a 
notable work), ἔργα, of Jesus, Jn. v. 36, vii. 3, 21; x. 25; 
xiv. 10, 12; xv. 24; κράτος, Lk.i. 51; σημεῖα, τέρατα καὶ 
σημεῖα, [Mk. xiii. 22 Tdf.]; Jn. ii. 23; iii. 2; iv. 54; vi. 
2, 14, 30; vii. 31; ix. 16; x.41; xi. 47; xii.18,37; xx. 
30; Acts ii. 22; vi. 8; vii. 36; viii.6; xv.12; Rev. xiii. 
13, 14; xvi. 14; xix. 20; θαυμάσια, Mt. xxi. 15; ὅσα ἐποίει, 
ἐποίησαν, etc., Mk. iii. 8; vi. 30; Lk. ix. 10; in other 
phrases it is used of marvellous works, Mt. ix. 28; Lk. 
iv. 23; Jn. iv. 45; νἱῖ. 4; xi. 45,46; xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; 
Acts x. 39; xiv. 11; xxi. 19; ete. ἃ. i.q. to make 
ready, to prepare: ἄριστον, Lk. xiv. 12; δεῖπνον, Mk. vi. 
21; Lk. xiv. 16; Jn. xii. 2, (δεῖπνον ποιεῖσθαι, Xen. Cyr. 
3, 3, 25) ; δοχήν, Lk. v. 29; xiv. 13, (Gen. xxi. 8) ; γάμους, 
Mt. xxii. 2 (γάμον, Tob. viii. 19). e. of things ef- 
fected by generative force, to produce, bear, shoot forth: 
of trees, vines, grass, etc., κλάδους, Mk. iv. 32; καρπούς, 
Mt. iii. 8, etc., see καρπός, 1 and 2 a. (Gen. i. 11, 12; Aris- 
tot. de plant. [1,4 p.819°, 31]; 2, 10[829*, 41]; Theophr. 
de caus. plant. 4, 11 [(?)]); ἐλαίας, Jas. iii. 12 (τὸν οἶνον, 
of the vine, Joseph. antt. 11, 3,5); of a fountain yield- 
ing water, ibid. f. ποιῶ ἐμαυτῷ τι, to acquire, to 
provide a thing for one’s self (i. 6. for one’s use) : βαλάντια, 
Lk. xii. 33; φίλους, Lk. xvi. 9; without a dative, to gain: 
of tradesmen (like our collog. to make something), Mt. 
xxv. 16[L Tr WH ἐκέρδησεν] ; Lk. xix. 18, (Polyb. 2, 62, 
12; pecuniam maximam facere, Cie. Verr. 2, 2, 6). 2. 
With additions to the accusative which define or limit 
the idea of making: a. τὶ ἔκ τινος (gen. of mate- 
rial), to make a thing out of something, Jn. ii. 15; ix. 
6; Ro. ix. 21; κατά τι, according to the pattern of a 
thing [see κατά, II. 3 c.a.], Acts vii. 44. with the addi- 
tion, to the ace. of the thing, of an adjective with which 
the verb so blends that, taken with the adj., it may be 
changed into the verb cognate to the adj.: εὐθείας ror 
civ (τὰς τρίβους), i. q. εὐθύνειν, Mt. iii. 3; Mk. i. 3; Lk. 
lil. 4; τρίχα λευκὴν ἢ μέλαιναν, i. 4. λευκαίνειν, μελαίνειν, 
Mt. v. 86: add, Acts vii. 19; Heb. xii. 13; Rev. xxi. 
δὲ b. τὸ ἱκανόν tut: see ἱκανός, ἃ. Cc. ποιεῖν 
twa with an accus. of the predicate, a. to (make i.e.) 
render one anything: twa ἴσον τινί, Mt. xx. 12; τινὰ 
δῆλον, Mt. xxvi. 73; add, Mt. xii. 16; xxviii. 14; Mk. iii. 
12; Jn.v.11, 15; vii. 23; xvi. 2; Ro. ix. 28[RG, Tr mre. 
in br.]; Heb. i. 7; Rev. xii. 15; τινὰς ἁλιεῖς, to make 


525 


ποιέω 


them fit (qualify them) for fishing, Mt. iv. 19; [ποιῶν 
ταῦτα γνωστὰ ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Acts xv. 17sq. GT Tr WH (see 
γνωστός, and cf. II. a. below) ]; τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν, to make 
the two different things one, Eph. ii. 14; to change one 
thing into another, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46; 
Jn. ii. 16; iv. 46; 1 Co. vi. 15. B. to (make i.e.) consti- 
tute or appoint one anything: twa κύριον, Acts ii. 36; Rev. 
v. 10; to this sense some interpreters would refer Heb. iii. 
2 also, where after τῷ ποιήσαντι αὐτόν they supply from the 
preceding context τὸν ἀπόστολον καὶ ἀρχιερέα κτλ.; but it 
is more correct to take ποιεῖν here in the sense of create 
(see 1 a. above) ; τινά, ἵνα with the subjune. to appoint or 
ordain one that etc. Mk. iii. 14. Ὑ. to (make i. e.) 
declare one anything: Jn. v. 18; viii. 53; x. 33; xix. 7, 
12; 1 ὅπ. 1. 10; v. 10; τί with an ace. of the pred. Mt. 
xii. 33 (on which see Meyer). d. with adverbs: 
καλῶς ποιῶ τι, Mk. vii. 37 [A. V.do]; τινὰ ἔξω, to put one 
Forth, to lead him out (Germ. hinausthun), Acts v. 34 (Xen. 
Cyr. 4, 1, 3). 6. ποιῶ τινα with an infin. to make one 
do a thing, Mk. viii. 25[R GL Tr mrg.]; Lk. v.34; Jn. 
vi. 10; Acts xvii. 26; or become something, Mk. i. 17; 
twa foll. by τοῦ with an infin. to cause one to ete. Acts 
iii. 12 [W. 326 (306); B. § 140, 16 8.]; also foll. by ἕνα 
ΓΒ. § 139, 43; W.§ 44, 8b. fin.], Jn. xi. 37; Col. iv. 16; 
Rev. xiii. 15 (here T om. WH br. ἵνα) ; iii. 9; xiii. 12, 16; 
[other exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 8]. 3. As the active 
ποιεῖν (see 1 c. above), so also the middle ποιεῖσθαι, joined 
to accusatives of abstract nouns forms a periphrasis for 
the verb cognate to the substantive; and then, while 
ποιεῖν signifies to be the author of a thing (to cause, bring 
about, as ποιεῖν πόλεμον, εἰρήνην), ποιεῖσθαι denotes an 
action which pertains in some way to the actor (for 
one’s self, among themselves, ete., as σπονδάς, εἰρήνην ποι- 
εἶσθαι). or which is done by one with his own resources 
({the ‘dynamic’ or ‘subjective’ mid.], as πόλεμον ποιεῖ- 
σθαι [to make, carry on, war]; cf. Passow s. v. I. 2 a. ii. 
Ρ. 974 sq.; [L. and S.s. v. A. 11. 4]; Kriiger § 52, 8, 1; 
Blume ad Lycurg. p. 55; [W. 8 88, ὅ π.; Β. § 135, 5]; 
although this distinction is not always observed even by 
the Greeks) : ποιεῖσθαι μονήν, [make our abode], Jn. xiv. 
23 LT Tr WH, (see 1 ec. above) ; συνωμοσίαν (Hdian. 7, 
4, 1 [8 ed. Bekk.]; Polyb. 1, 70,6; 6, 13, 4; in the second 
instance Polyb. might more fitly have said ποιεῖν), Acts 
xxiii. 13 L T Tr WH, see 1 ec. above ; λόγον, to compose 
a narrative, Acts i. 1; to make account of, regard, (see 
λόγος, II. 2 [and ef. I. 3 a.]), Acts xx. 24 [T Tr WH, 
λόγου]: ἀναβολήν (see ἀναβολή), Acts xxv. 17; ἐκβολήν 
(see ἐκβολή, b.), Acts xxvii. 18; κοπετόν (i. 4. κόπτομαι), Acts 
viii. 2 [here L T Tr WH give the active, cf. B. §135, 
5n.]; πορείαν (i. q. πορεύομαι), Lk. xiii. 22 (Xen. Cyr. 5, 
2, 31; anab. 5, 6, 11; Joseph. vit. §§ 11 and 52; Plut. 
de solert. anim. p. 971 e.; 2 Mace. iii. 8; xii. 10); κοινω- 
νίαν, to make a contribution among themselves and from 
their own means, Ro. xv. 26; σπουδήν, Jude 3 (Hdt. 1, 
4; 9,8; Plat. legg.1 p.628e.; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 and often; 
Diod. 1, 75; Plut. puer. educ. 7,13; al.); αὔξησιν (i. 4. 
avédvopuat), to make increase, Eph. iv. 16 ; δέησιν, δεήσεις, 
i. q. δέομαι, to make supplication, Lk. v. 33; Phil. i. 4; 


ποίξω 


526 


TTOLEW 


1 Tim. ii. 1; μνείαν (4. v-) ; μνήμην (q-v. inb.), 2 Pet.i.15; | (purpose) in acting, ibid. RG T Tr WH; τὸν λόγον τοῦ 


πρόνοιαν (i. 4. mpovoodpat), to have regard for, care for, 
make provision for, τινός, Ro. xiii. 14 (Isoer. paneg. δὲ 2 
and 136 [pp. 52 and 93 ed. Lange]; Dem. p. 1163, 19; 
1429, 8; Polyb. 4, 6,11; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46; Joseph. 
b. j.4, 5, 25 antt. 5, 7,9; ¢. Ap. 1, 2,3; Ael. v. h. 12, 56; 
al.; ef. Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 187) ; καθαρισμόν, Heb. i. 3 
(Job vii. 21); βέβαιον ποιεῖσθαί τι, 1. 4. βεβαιοῦν, 2 Pet. 
i. 10. 

II. to do (Lat. ago), i. 6. to follow some method in 
expressing by deeds the feelings and thoughts of the 
mind; a. univ., with adverbs describing the mode 
of action: καλῶς, to act rightly, do well, Mt. xii. 12; 1 Co. 
vii. 37, 38; Jas. ii. 19; καλῶς ποιεῖν foll. by a participle 
[ef. B. § 144, 15 a.; W.§ 45, 4 a.], Acts x. 33 ; Phil. iv. 
14; 2 Pet. i. 19; 3 Jn. 6, (exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given 
by Passow s. v. II. 1 Ὁ. vol. ii. p. 977"; [L. and S.s. v. B. 
1. 3]) ; κρεῖσσον, 1 Co. vil. 38; φρονίμως, Lk. xvi. 8; οὕτω 
(οὕτως), Mt. ν. 47 [RG]; xxiv.46; Lk. ἴχ. 15; xii. 48 
Jn. xiv. 31; Acts xii. 8; 1 Co. xvi. 1; Jas. ii. 12; ὡς, 
καθώς, Mt. i. 24; xxi. 6; xxvi.19; xxviii. 15; Lk. ix. 54 
[Τ Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; 1 Th. v. 11; 
ὥσπερ, Mt. vi. 2; ὁμοίως, Lk. iii. 11; x. 37; ὡσαύτως. Mt. 
xx.5. xara rt, Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. ii. 27; πρός τι, to do ac- 
cording to a thing [see πρός: I. 3f.], Lk. xii. 47. with 
a ptep. indicating the mode of acting, ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, I 
acted [A. V. did it] ignorantly, 1 Tim. i. 13. with the 
accus. of a thing, and that the accus. of a pronoun: 
with τί indef. 1 Co. x. 31; with τί interrog., Mt. xii. 3; 
Mk. ii. 25; xi. 3 [not Lchm. mrg.]; Lk. iii. 12, 14; vi. 2; 
x. 25; xvi. 3,4; xviii. 18; Jn. vii. 51; xi.47, ete.; with 
a ptep. added, τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες ; i. q. διὰ τί λύετε; Mk. 
xi. 5; τί ποιεῖτε κλαίοντες; Acts xxi. 13; but differently 
τί ποιήσουσι κτὰ.; i.e. what must be thought of the con- 
duct of those who receive baptism? Will they not seem 
to act foolishly? 1 Co. xv. 29. 
with the relative 6, Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. vi. 3; 
Jn. xiii. 7; 2 Co. xi. 12, ete.; τοῦτο, i.e. what has just 
been said, Mt. xiii. 28; Mk. v. 32; Lk. ν. 6; xxii. 19 
[(WH reject the pass.) ]; Ro. vii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim. 
iv. 16; Heb. vi. 3; vii. 27, etc.; τοῦτο to be supplied, Lk. 
vi. 10; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, Gal. ii. 10; ταῦτα, Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal. 
v.17; 2 Pet. i. 10; [ταῦτα foll. by a pred. adj. Acts xv. 
17sq. GT Tr WH (ace. to one construction ; cf. R. V. 
mre., see I. 2 c.a. above, and ef. yywards) |; αὐτά, Ro. ii. 3; 
Gal. iii. 10. With nouns which denote a command, 
or some rule of action, ποιῶ signifies to carry out, to 
execute; as, τὸν νόμον, in class. Grk. to make a law, Lat. 
legem ferre, of legislators; but in bibl. Grk. to do the 
law, meet its demands, legi satisfacere, Jn. vii. 19; Gal. 
y. 3, (Josh. xxii. 5; 1 Chron. xxii. 12; NAT Twy, 2 
Chron. xiv. 3 (4)); τὰ τοῦ νόμου, the things which the law 
commands, Ro. ii. 14; ras ἐντολάς, Mt. v.19; 1 Jn. ν. 21, 
T Tr WH; Rev. xxii. 14 RG; τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. vii. 
21; xii. 50; Mk. iii. 35; In. iv. 34; vi. 38; vil. 17; ix. 31; 
Eph. vi. 6; Heb. xiii. 21; τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκός, Eph. 11. 
3; τὰς ἐπιθυμίας τινός, In. viii. 44; τὴν γνώμην τινός, Rev. 
xvii. 17; μίαν γνώμην, to follow one and the same mind 


τί περισσόν, Mt. v. 47; 


θεοῦ, Lk. viii. 21; τοὺς λόγους τινός, Mt. vii. 24, 26; Lk. vi. 
47,49; dor 6 or 6, τι etc. λέγει τις, Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. vi. 
46; Jn. ii.5; Acts xxi. 23; ἃ παραγγέλλει τις, 2 Th. iii. 45 
τὴν πρόθεσιν, Eph. iii. 11; τὰ “διαταχθέντα, Lk. xvii. 10 (τὸ 
προσταχθέν, Soph. Phil. 1010) ; ὃ αἰτεῖ τις, Jn. xiv. 13 sq.; 
Eph. iii. 20; ὃ ἐντέλλεταί τις, Jn. xv. 143; τὰ ἔθη, Acts 
xvi. 21. With nouns describing a plan or course of 
action, to perform, accomplish: ἔργα, Tit. iii. 5; ποιεῖν 
τὰ ἔργα τινός, to do the same works as another, Jn. viii. 
39,41; τὰ πρῶτα ἔργα, Rev. ii. 5; τὰ ἔργα τοῦ θεοῦ, de- 
livered by God to be performed, Jn. x. 87 sq.; τὸ ἔργον; 
work committed to me by God, Jn. xvii. 4; τὸ ἔργον 
εὐαγγελιστοῦ, to perform what the relations and duties 
of an evangelist demand, 2 Tim. iv. 5; ἔργον τι, to com- 
mit an evil deed, 1 Co. v. 2[T WH Trmrg. πράξας]; 
plur. 3 Jn. 10; ἀγαθόν, to do good, Mt. xix. 16; [Mk. iii. 
4 Tdf.]; 1 Pet. iii. 11; τὸ ἀγαθόν, Ro. xiii. 3; ὃ ἐάν τι 
ἀγαθόν, Eph. νἱ. 8; τὰ ἀγαθά, Jn. v. 29; τὸ καλόν, Ro. vii. 
21; 2Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas. iv. 17; ra ἀρεστὰ τῷ θεῷ, 
Jn. viii. 29; τὸ ἀρεστὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb. xiii. 21; 
1 Jn. iii. 22; τὶ πιστόν, to perform something worthy of 
a Christian [see πιστός, fin.], 3 Jn. 5; τὴν δικαιοσύνην, 
Mt. vi. 1 (for Rec. ἐλεημοσύνην); 1 dn. ii. 29; iii. 7, 10 
[not Lehm.; Rey. xxii. 11 GLT Tr WH]; τὴν ἀλήθειαν 
(to act uprightly ; see ἀλήθεια, I. 2 ¢.), Jn. iii. 21; 1 Jn. 
i. 6; χρηστότητα, Ro. 111. 12; ἔλεος, to show one’s self 
merciful, Jas. ii. 13; with pera twos added (see ἔλεος, 
τους, 1 and 2 b.), Lk. i. 72; x. 37; ἐλεημοσύνην, Mt. vi. 2 
56. ; plur., Actsix. 36; x. 2 (see ἐλεημοσύνη, 1 and 2). to 
commit: τὴν ἁμαρτίαν, Jn. viii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 4, 8 ; ἅμαρ- 
riav, 2Co. xi.7; Jas. v.15; 1 Pet. ii. 22; 1 Jn. iii. 9; τὴν 
ἀνομίαν, Mt. xiii. 41; ἁμάρτημα, 1 Co. vi. 18 ; τὰ μὴ καθή- 
κοντα, Ro. i. 28 ; ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν, Mt. xii. 2; Mk. ii. 24; ἄξια 
πληγῶν, Lk. xii. 48 ; βδέλυγμα, Rev. xxi. 27; φόνον, Mk. 
xv. 7; ψεῦδος, Rev. xxi. 27; xxii. 15 5 κακόν, Mt. xxvii. 
23; Mk. xv. 14; Lk. xxiii. 22; 2 Co. xiii. 7; τὸ κακόν, Ro. 
xiii. 4; plur. κακά, 1 Pet. iii. 12 ; τὰ κακά, Ro. iii. 8. b. 
ποιεῖν τι With the case of a person added ; a. w. an 
aceus. of the person: τί ποιήσω Ἰησοῦν; what shall I 
do unto Jesus? Mt. xxvii. 22; Mk. xv. 12; οἵ. W. 222 
(208); [B.§131,6; Kithner §411, 5]; Matthiae § 415, 
1 ἃ. β.; also with an adverb, εὖ ποιῶ twa, to do well i. e. 
show one’s self good (kind) to one [see εὖ, sub fin.], Mk. 
xiv. 7RG; also καλῶς ποιῶ, Mt. v. 44 Ree. β. w. 
a dative of the person, to do (a thing) unto one (to his 
advantage or disadvantage), rarely so in Grk. writ. [cf. 
W. and B u.s.; Kiihneru.s. Anm. 6]: Mt. vii. 12; xviii. 
353; xx. 82; xxi. 40; xxv. 40,45; Mk. v.19, 20; x. 51; 
Lk. i. 49; vi. 11; viii. 39; xviii.41; xx.15; Jn.ix. 26; 
xii. 16; xiii. 12; Acts iv. 16; also with an adverb: 
καθώς, Mk. xv. 8; Lk. vi. 31; Jn. xiii. 15; ὁμοίως, Lk. vi. 
31; οὕτως, Lk. i. 253 ii. 48; ὡσαύτως, Mt. xxi. 36; καλῶς 
ποιεῖν τινι, Lk. vi. 27; εὖ, Mk. xiv. 71, ΤΥ WH; κακά τινι, 
to do evil to one, Acts ix. 13; τί, what (sc. κακόν), Heb. xiii. 
6 [ace. to punctuation of GLT Tr WH); ταῦτα πάντα, all 
these evils, Jn. xv. 21 RG Lmrg.; ποιεῖν τινι κατὰ τὰ αὖ- 


τά [LT Tr WH (Ree. radra)], in the same manner, Lk. 


ποίημα 


vi. 23, 26. γ. ποιεῖν τι with the more remote object 
added by means of a preposition: ἔν τινι (Germ. an 
einem), to do to one, Mt. xvii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31 [here A. V. 
‘in the green tree,’ ete.]; also εἴς τινα, unto one, Jn. xv. 
21 Ltxt. T Tr WH. ce. God is said ποιῆσαί τι μετά 
twos, when present with and aiding [see pera, I. 2 Ὁ. B.], 
Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4. d. with designations of time 
[B. § 131, 1], to pass, spend: χρόνον, Acts xv. 33; xviii. 
23; μῆνας τρεῖς, Acts xx. 3; νυχθήμερον, 2 Co. xi. 255; ἐνιαυ- 
τόν or ἐνιαυτὸν éva, Jas. iv. 13, (Tob. x. 7; Joseph. antt. 6, 
1,4 fin.; Stallbaum on Plato, Phileb. p. 50 ¢., gives exx. 
fr. Grk. writ. [and reff. ; ef. also Soph. Lex. s. v. 9]; in the 
same sense 7} in Eccl. vi. 12 (vii. 1); and the Lat. 
facere: Cic. ad Att. 5, 20 Apameae quinque dies morati, 
-.-Iconii decem fecimus; Seneca, epp. 66 [l. 7, ep. 4, ed. 
Haase], quamvis autem paucissimos una fecerimus dies) ; 
some interpreters bring in here also Mt. xx. 12 and Rey. 
xiii. 5 Ree.ste' LT Tr WH; but on these pass. see 
I. 1 a. above. e. like the Lat. agoi. q. to celebrate, 
keep, with the accus. of a noun designating a feast: τὸ 
πάσχα, Mt. xxvi. 18 (Josh. v.10; but in Heb. xi. 28 the 
language denotes to make ready, and so at the same time 
io institute, the celebration of the passover; Germ. ver- 
anstalten) ; τὴν ἑορτήν, Acts xviii. 21 Ree. ἘΠῚ ἢ: 
(Lat. perficio) to perform: as opposed to λέγειν, Mt. xxiii. 
3; to θέλειν, 2 Co. viii. 10 sq.; to a promise, 1 Th. v. 24. 
[Comp. : mept-, προσ- ποιέω.] 

[ϑυν. ποιεῖν, πράσσειν: roughly speaking, 7. may be 
said to answer to the Lat. facere or the English do, zp. to 
agere or Eng. practise ; π. to designate performance, zp. in- 
tended, earnest, habitual, performance; 7. to denote merely 
productive action, mp. definitely directed action; 7. to point 
to an actual result, mp. to the scope and character of the result. 
“In Attic in certain connections the difference between them 
is great, in others hardly perceptible” (Schmidt) ; see his 
Syn. ch. 23, esp. § 11; οἵ. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xevi.; Green, 
‘Crit. Note’ on Jn. ν. 29; (cf. πράσσω, init. and 2). The 
words are associated in Jn. iii. 20, 21; v. 29; Acts xxvi. 9, 
10; Ro. i. 32; ii. 3; vii. 15 sqq.; xiii. 4, etc.] 

ποίημα, -τος, τό, (movew), that which has been made; 
awork: of the works of God as creator, Ro. i. 20; those 
κτισθέντες by God ἐπὶ ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς are spoken of as 
ποίημα τοῦ θεοῦ [ A.V. his workmanship], Eph. ii. 10. 
(Hat., Plat., al.; Sept. chiefly for nwyp.)* 

ποίησις, -ews, 1, (ποιέω); 1. a making (Hat. 3, 
22; Thue. 3,2; Plat., Dem., al.; Sept. several times for 
MPD). 2. a doing or performing: ἐν τῇ ποιήσει 
αὐτοῦ [in his doing, i. 6.1 in the obedience he renders to 
the law, Jas. i. 25; add Sir. xix. 20 (18).* 

ποιητής, -οὔ, ὁ, (ποιέω) ; 1. amaker, producer, au- 
thor, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a doer, performer, (Vulz. 
factor): τοῦ νόμου, one who obeys or fulfils the law, 
Ro. ii. 13; Jas. iv. 11; 1 Mace. ii. 67, (see ποιέω, II. a.) 5; 
ἔργου, Jas. i. 25; λόγου, Jas. i. 22, 23. 3. a poet: 
Acts xvii. 28 ([{Hadt. 2, 53, ete.], Aristoph., Xen., Plat., 
Plut., al.).* 

ποικίλος, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, various i. 6. 8: 
of divers colors, variegated: Sept. Ὁ. i. q. of divers 
sorts: Mt. iv. 24; Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 40; 2 Tim. iii. 6; Tit. 


527 


πολεμέω 


iii. 3; Heb. ii. 4; xiii. 9; Jas.i. 2; 1 Pet.i. 6; iv. 10, 
[(A. V. in the last two exx. manifold) ].* 

ποιμαίνω ; fut. ποιμανῶ; 1 aor. impy. 2 pers. plur. ποι- 
pavare (1 Pet. ν. 2); (ποιμήν, 4. ν.); fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
for ny; to feed, to tend a flock, keep sheep ; a. prop.: 
Lk. xvii. 7; ποίμνην, 1 Co. ix. 7. b. trop. a. 
to rule, govern: of rulers, τινά, Mt. ii. 6; Rev. ii. 27; xii. 
5; xix. 1ὅ, (2 5. ν. 2; Mic. v.6 (δ); vii. 14, ete.; [cef. W. 
171), (see ποιμήν, b. fin.); of the overseers (pastors) of 
the church, Jn. xxi. 16; Acts xx. 28; 1 Pet. v. 2. B. 
to furnish pasturage or food ; to nourish: ἑαυτόν, to cher- 
ish one’s body, to serve the body, Jude 12; to supply 
the requisites for the soul’s needs [R. V. shall be their 
shepherd], Rev. vii. 17. [Sy¥N. see βόσκω, fin.]* 

ποιμήν, -ένος, 6, (akin to the noun ποία, q. v.; [or fr. r. 
meaning ‘to protect’; cf. Curtius §372; Fick i. 1827), 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Ay4, a herdsman, esp. a shep- 
herd; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 36; xxv. 32; xxvi. 31; 
Mk. vi: 34; xiv. 27; Lk. ii. 8,15, 18, 20; Jn. x. 2,12; in 
the parable, he to whose care and control others have 
committed themselves, and whose precepts they follow, 
Jn. x. 11, 14. b. metaph. the presiding officer, mana- 
ger, director, of any assembly: so of Christ the Head of 
the church, Jn. x. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 25; Heb. xiii. 20, (of the 
Jewish Messiah, Ezek. xxxiv. 23); of the overseers of 
the Christian assemblies [A. V. pastors], Eph.iv.11; ef. 
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 350 
sq-; [Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, p.123 sq.]. (Of 
kings and princes we find ποιμένες λαῶν in Hom. and 
Hes.) * 

ποίμνη, -ns, 9, (contr. fr. ποιμένη ; see ποιμήν), [fr. Hom. 
(Od. 9, 122) on], a flock (esp.) of sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31; 
Lk. ii. 8; 1 Co. ix. 7; trop. [of Christ’s flock i.e.] the body 
of those who follow Jesus as their guide and keeper, Jn. 
> UBS 

ποίμνιον, -ov, τό, (contr. fr. ποιμένιον, i. q. ποίμνη, see 
ποιμήν ; [on the accent cf. W. 52; Chandler ὃ 343 b.]), 
a flock (esp.) of sheep: so of a group of Christ’s disci- 
ples, Lk. xii. 32; of bodies of Christians (churches) pre- 
sided over by elders [ef. reff. s. v. ποιμήν, b.], Acts xx. 
28,29; 1 Pet. v. 3; with a possessive gen. added, τοῦ 
θεοῦ, 1 Pet. v. 2, as in Jer. xiii. 17; rod Χριστοῦ, Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 16, 1; 44,3; 54, 2; 57,2. (Hdt., Soph., 
Eur., Plat., Leian., al.; Sept. chiefly for 7], and }xx.)* 

ποῖος, -a, -ov, (interrog. pron., corresponding to the rel. 
οἷος and the demonstr. τοῖος), [fr. Hom. down], of what 
sort or nature (Lat. qualis): absol. neutr. plur. in a di- 
rect question, Lk. xxiv.19; with substantives, in direct ἡ 
questions: Mt. xix. 18; xxi. 23; xxii. 36; Mk. xi. 28; 
Lk. vi. 32-34; Jn. x. 32; Actsiv. 7; vii. 49; Ro. iii. 27; 
1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. iv. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 20; in indirect dis- 
course: Mt. xxi. 24, 27; xxiv. 43; Mk. xi. 29,33; Lk. xii. 
39; Jn. xii. 33; xviii. 32; xxi.19; Acts xxiii. 34; Rev. 
iil. 3; εἰς τίνα ἢ ποῖον καιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 11; ποίας (Rec. διὰ 
ποίας) sc. ὁδοῦ, Lk. v.19; cf. W. § 30, 11; [(also ὃ 64, 5); 
B. §§ 123, 8; 132, 26; cf. Tob. x. 7]. 

πολεμέω, -@; fut. πολεμήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπολέμησα ; (πόλε- 
pos); [fr. Soph. and Hdt. down]; Sept. chiefly for om); 


πόλεμος 


to war, carry on war; to fight: Rev. xix. 11; μετά τινος 
(on which constr. see μετά, I. 2 d. p. 403°), Rev. ii. 16; 
xii. 7 (where Ree. xara; [ef. on this vs. B. § 140, 14 and 
8. V. pera as above]); xiii. 4; xvii. 14; 1. 4. fo wrangle, 
quarrel, Jas. iv. 2." 

πόλεμος, -ov, 6, (fr. ΠΕΛΩ, πολέω, to turn, to range 
about, whence Lat. pello, bellum; [but cf. Fick i. 671; 
Vaniéek 513]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.for 7290; 1. 
prop. a. war: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 7; Lk. xiv. 
31; xxi.9; Heb. xi. 34; in imitation of the Hebr. nwy 
72n29 foll. by n& or DY (Gen. xiv. 2; Deut. xx. 12, 20), 
πόλ. ποιεῖν μετάτινος, Rey. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 7 [here Lom. 
WH Trmrg. br. the cl.]; xix. 19, [ef. μετά, 1. 2d.]. b. 
a fight, a battle, [more precisely μάχη ; “in Hom. (where 
Il. 7, 174 it is used even of single combat) and Hes. the 
sense of battle prevails; in Attic that of war” (L. and 5. 
s. v.): ef. Trench $]xxxvi. and (in partial modification) 
Schmidt ch. 138, 5 and 6]: 1Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xi. 34; Rev. 
be 7. δ χῖν ΤΣ ΧῪΣ 14. παι 8: 2. a dispute, strife, 
quarrel: πόλεμοι καὶ μάχαι, Jas. iv. 1 (Soph. El. 219; 
Plat. Phaedo p. 66 c.).* 

πόλις, -ews, 7, (πέλομαι, to dwell [or rather denoting 
originally ‘fulness,’ ‘ throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs, 
ete.; ef. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanitek p. 499; (oth- 
erwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for 
~y, besides for 7 Pp, WH (8 ate), ete., a city; a. 
univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk. iv. 29; Jn. xi.54; Acts 
vy. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; 
κατὰ τὴν πόλιν, through the city [A. V. in; see xara, IT. 
1 a.], Acts xxiv. 12; κατὰ πόλιν, κατὰ πόλεις, see κατά, IT. 
3 a. a. p. 328"; opp. to κῶμαι, Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Lk. viii. 
1; xiii. 22; to κῶμαι καὶ aypot, Mk. vi. 56; ἡ ἰδία πόλις, 
see ἴδιος, 1 Ὁ. p. 297"; πόλις with the gen. of a pers. 
one’s native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn.i.44 (45); or the city in 
which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. iv. 29; x. 11; Acts xvi. 
20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of 
the temple erected there, πόλις τοῦ μεγάλου βασιλέως, 
i. 6. in which the great King of Israel, Jehovah, has his 
abode, Mt. v. 35; Ps. xlvii. (xlviii.) 2, ef. Tob. xiii. 15; 
also ἁγία πόλις (see ἅγιος, 1 a. p. 7°) and ἡ ἠγαπημένη, the 
beloved of God, Rey. xx.9. with the gen. of a gentile 
Δαμασκηνῶν, 2 Co. xi. 32; ’Edeciav, Acts xix. 
35; τῶν Ἰουδαίων, Lk. xxiii. 51; τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. x. 23; 
Σαμαρειτῶν, Mt. x. 5; with the gen. of a region: τῆς 
Γαλιλαίας, Lk. i. 26; iv. 31; Ἰούδα, of the tribe of Judah, 
Lk. i. 39; Λυκαονίας, Acts xiv. 6; Κιλικίας, Acts xxi. 39; 
τῆς Sapapetas, Jn. iv. 5; Acts viii. 5. As in class. Grk. 
the proper name of the city is added, —either in the 
nom. case, as πόλις ᾿Ιόππη, Acts xi. 5; or in the gen., as 
πόλις Σοδόμων, Touoppas, 2 Pet. ii. 6; Θυατείρων, Acts 
xvi. 14. b. used of the heavenly Jerusalem (see 
Ἱεροσόλυμα, 2), i. 6. a. the abode of the blessed, in 
heaven: Heb. xi. 10,16; with θεοῦ ζῶντος added, Heb. 
xii. 22; ἡ μέλλουσα πόλις, Heb. xiii. 14. B. in the 
visions of the Apocalypse it is used of the visible capital 
of the heavenly kingdom, to come down to earth after 
the renovation of the world: Rey. iii. 12; xxi. 14 sqq.; 
xxii. 14; 9 πόλις ἡ ἁγία, Rev. xxii. 19; with Ἱερουσαλὴμ 


noun: 


528 


πολιτὴς 


καινή added, Rev. xxi. 2. c. πόλις by meton. for 
the inhabitants: Mt. viii. 34; Acts xiv. 21; πᾶσα ἡ πόλις, 
Mt. xxi. 10; Acts xiii.44; ἡ πόλις ὅλη, ΜΚ. i. 33; Acta 
xxi. 30; πόλις μερισθεῖσα καθ᾽ ἑαυτῆς, Mt. xii. 25. 

πολιτάρχης, -ου, ὁ, (i.e. 6 ἄρχων τῶν πολιτῶν ; see ἕκα- 
τοντάρχης), a ruler of a city or citizens: Acts xvii. 6, 8. 
(Boeckh, Corp. inserr. Graec. ii. p. 52 sq. no. 1967 (cf. 
Boeckh’s note, and ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 86 note]; in Grk. 
writ. πολίαρχος was more common.) * 

πολιτεία, -as, 7, (πολιτεύω) ; 1. the administration 
of civil affairs (Xen. mem. 3, 9,15; Arstph., Aeschin., 
Dem., [al.]). 2. astate, commonwealth, (2 Mace. iv. 
11; viii. 17; xiii. 14; Xen., Plat., Thuc., [al.]): with 
a gen. of the possessor, τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, spoken of the theo- 
cratic or divine commonwealth, Eph. ii. 12. 3. 
citizenship, the rights of a citizen, [some make this sense 
the primary one]: Acts xxii. 28 (3 Mace. iii. 21,23; Hdt. 
9,34; Xen. Hell. 1,1, 26; 1, 2,10; [4, 4,6, etc.]; Dem., 
Polyb., Diod., Joseph., al.).* 

πολίτευμα, -τος, τό, (πολιτεύω), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. 
down; 1. the administration of civil affairs or of a 
commonwealth [R.V. txt. (Phil. as below) citizenship]. 
2. the constitution of a commonwealth, form of govern- 
ment and the laws by which it is administered. 3.4 
state, commonwealth [so R. V. mrg.]: ἡμῶν, the common- 
wealth whose citizens we are (see πόλις, b.), Phil. iii. 20, 
ef. Meyer and Wiesinger ad loc. ; of Christians it is said 
ἐπὶ γῆς διατρίβουσιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν οὐρανῷ πολιτεύονται, Epist. 
ad Diogn. c. 5; (τῶν σοφῶν Ψυχαὶ) πατρίδα μὲν τὸν οὐρά- 
νιον χῶρον, ἐν ᾧ πολιτεύονται, ξένον δὲ τὸν περίγειον ἐν ᾧ 
παρῴκησαν νομίζουσαι, Philo de confus. ling. § 17; [γυναῖκες 

. τῷ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐγγεγραμμέναι πολιτεύματι, de agricult. 


§17fin. Cf. esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. ο.1." 

πολιτεύω : Mid. [ef. W. 260 (244) ], pres. impv. 2 pers. 
plur. πολιτεύεσθε; pf. πεπολίτευμαι ; (πολίτης) 5 als 
to be a citizen (Thuc., Xen., Lys., Polyb., al.). 2. 


to administer civil affairs, manage the state, (Thuc., 
Xen.). 3. to make or create a citizen (Diod. 11. 72) ; 
Middle a. tobe a citizen; so in the passages fr. 
Philo and the Ep. ad Diogn. cited in πολίτευμα, 3. b. 
to behave as a citizen; to avail une’s self of or recognize 
the laws; so fr. Thue. down; in Hellenist. writ. to con- 
duct one’s self as pledged to some law of life: ἀξίως τοῦ 
εὐαγγελίου, Phil. i. 27 [R. V. txt. let your manner of tife 
be worthy of ete.]; ἀξ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Polyc. ad Philip. 5, 2; 
ἀξ. τοῦ θεοῦ, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 1; ὁσίως, ibid. 6, 1; 
κατὰ τὸ καθῆκον τῷ Χριστῷ, ibid. 3,4; μετὰ φόβου k. ayd- 
ms, ibid. 51, 3: ἐννόμως, Justin. dial. ο. Tr. ο. 67; ἠρξάμην 
πολιτεύεσθαι τῇ Φαρισαίων αἱρέσει κατακολουθῶν, Joseph. 
vit. 2; other phrases are cited by Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 
1; τῷ θεῷ, to live in accordance with the laws of God, 
Acts xxiii. 1 [A. V. I have lived ete.].* 

πολίτης, -ov, ὁ, (πόλις), fr. Hom. down, α citizen; 
i. 6. a. the inhabitant of any city or country: πόλεως, 
Acts xxi. 393; τῆς χώρας ἐκείνης, Lk. xv. 15. b. the 
associate of another in citizenship, i 6. a fellow-citizen, 
fellow-countryman, (Plat. apol. p. 37 ¢.; al.): with the 
gen. of a person, Lk. xix. 14; Heb. viii. 11 (where Rec. 


πολλακις δ 


has τὸν πλησίον) fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34, where it is 
used for 9, as in Prov. xi. 9, 12; xxiv. 43 (28).* 

πολλάκις, (fr. πολύς, πολλά), adv., [fr. Hom. down], 
often, frequently : Mt. xvii. 15; Mk. v. 4; ix. 22; Jn. xviii. 
2; Acts xxvi. 11; Ro.i.13; xv. 221, Trmrg.; 2 Co. viii. 
22; xi. 23,26 sq.; Phil. iii, 18; 2 Tim. 1.16; Heb. vi. 7; 
ix. 25 sq.; x. 11.* 

πολλαπλασίων, -ov, Zen. -ovos, (πολύς), manifold, much 
more: Mt. xix. 29 LT Tr WH; Lk. xviii. 30. (Polyb., 
Plut., al.; [ef. B. 30 (27)].)* 

πολυ-εύσπλαγχνος, -ov, (πολύ and εὔσπλαγχνος), very 
tender-hearted, extremely full of pity: so a few minuse. 
Mss. in Jas. v. 11, where al. πολύσπλαγχνος, q. v- (Eccles. 
and Byzant. writ.) * 

πολυλογία, -as, 9, (roAvAdyos), much speaking, (Plaut., 
Vulg., multiloquium): Mt. vi. 7. (Prov. x.19; Xen. Cyr. 
1, 4,3; Plat. lege. 1 p. 641 e.; Aristot. polit. 4, 10 [p. 
1295", 2]; Plut. educ. puer. 8, 10.)* 

πολυμερῶς, (πολυμερής), by many portions : joined with 
πολυτρόπως, at many times (Vulg. multifariam [or -rie]), 
and in many ways, Heb. 1. 1. (Joseph. antt. 8, 3, 9 [var. ; 
Plut. mor. p. 537 d., i. e. de invid. et od. 5]; οὐδὲν det τῆς 
πολυμεροῦς ταύτης Kal πολυτρόπου μούσης τε καὶ ἁρμονίας, 
Max. Tyr. diss. 37 p. 363; [οἵ. W. 463 (431) ].) * 

πολυ-ποίκιλος, -ov, (πολύς and ποικίλος) ; 1. much- 
variegated ; marked with a great variety of colors: of cloth 
ora painting; φάρεα, Eur. Iph. T. 1149; στέφανον modv- 
ποίκιλον ἀνθέων, Eubul. ap Athen. 15 p. 679 d. 2. 
much varied, manifold: σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ, manifesting itself 
in a great variety of forms, Eph. iii. 10; Theophil. ad 
Autol. 1, 6; ὀργή, Orac. Sibyll. 8, 120; λόγος, Orph. hymn. 
61, 4, and by other writ. with other nouns.* 

πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., 
Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 
39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., 
many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts 
xviii. 10; ὄχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; 
Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; 
πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; 1. q. 
abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 
24; xv. 5,8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. 
ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. 
vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 
10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; 
σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 
22; xiii. 58, ete.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but 
here L TWH om. Trbr. ὄχ.7; Lk. v. 15, ete.; δαιμόνια, 
Mk.i. 34; and in many otherexx.; with participles used 
substantively, Mt. viii. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 9, ete.; with the 
article prefixed: ai ἁμαρτίαι αὐτῆς αἱ πολλαί, her sins 
which are many, LK. vii. 47; τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα, the great 
learning with which I see that you are furnished, Acts 
xxvi. 24; ὁ πολὺς ὄχλος, the great multitude of common 
people present, Mk. xii. 37 [ef. ὁ ὄχλ. πολύς, Jn. xii. 9 T 
Tr mrg. WH; see ὄχλος, 11. Plur. mase. πολλοί, absol. 
and without the art., many, a large part of mankind: 
πολλοί simply, Mt. vii. 13, 22; xx. 28; xxvi. 28; Mk. ii. 2; 
iii. 10; x. 45; xiv. 24; Lk.i.1,14; Heb. ix. 28, and very 

84 


9 πολύς 


often; opp. to ὀλίγοι, Mt. χχ. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the 
cl.]; ἕτεροι πολλοί, Acts xv. 35; ἄλλαι πολλαί, Mk. xv. 41; 
ἕτεραι πολλαί, Lk. viii. 3; πολλοί foll. by a partit. gen., 
as τῶν Φαρισαίων, Mt. iii. 7; add, LK. i. 16; Jn. xii. 11; 
Acts iv. 4; xiii. 43; 2 Co. xii. 21; Rev. viii. 11, ete.; foll. 
by ἐκ with a gen. of class, as πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, 
Jn. vi. 60; add, vii. 31,40; x. 20; χὶ. 19, 45; Acts xvii. 
12; πολλοὶ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, Jn. iv. 39. with the article 
prefixed, οἱ πολλοί, the many [ef. W. 110 (105)]: those 
contrasted with 6 εἷς (i. 6. both with Adam and with 
Christ), ace. to the context equiv. to the rest of man- 
kind, Ro. v. 15,19, ef. 12, 18; we the (i.e. who are) many, 
Ro. xii. 5; 1 Co. x.17; the many whom ye know, 2 Co. 
ii. 17; the many i. 6. the most part, the majority, Mt. xxiv. 
12; 1Co. x. 33. b. with nouns denoting an action, an 
emotion, a state, which can be said to have as it were 
measure, weight, force, intensity, size, continuance, or 
repetition, much i. q. great, strong, intense, large: ἀγάπη, 
Eph. ii.4; ὀδύνη, 1 Tim. vi. 10; θρῆνος, κλαυθμός, dduppos, 
Mt. ii. 18; χαράΐ Ree." χάρις], Philem. 7; ἐπιθυμία, 1 Th. ii. 
17 ; μακροθυμία, Ro. ix. 22; ἔλεος, 1 Pet. i. 3; γογγυσμός, 
Jn. vii. 12; τρόμος, 1 Co. ii. 3; πόνος [Rec. ζῆλος], Col. iv. 
13; ἀγών, 1 Th. ii. 2; ἄθλησις, Heb. x. 32; θλίψις, 2 Co. ii. 
4:1 ΤῊ. 1. 6; καύχησις, 2 Co. vii. 4; πεποίθησις, 2 Co. vill. 
22; mAnpopopia, 1 Th. i. 5; παρρησία, 2 Co. iii. 12; vil. 
4; 1 Tim. iii. 13; Philem. 8; παράκλησις, 2 Co. viii. 4; 
συζήτησις [T WH Tr txt. ζήτησις], Acts xv. 7; xxviii. 29 
[Ree.]; στάσις, Acts xxiii. 10; dotria, Acts xxvii. 21; 
Bia, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; διακονία, Lk. x. 40; σιγή, deep 
silence, Acts xxi. 40 (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 25); φαντασία, Acts 
xxv. 23; δύναμις καὶ δόξα, Mt. xxiv. 30; Lk. xxi. 275 μι- 
σθός, Mt. v.12; Lk. vi. 23, 35; εἰρήνη, Acts xxiv. 2 (3); 
περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος, about which [but see λόγος, 1. 3 
a.] we have much (in readiness) to say, Heb. ν. 11 (πολὺν 
λόγον ποιεῖσθαι περί τινος, Plat. Phaedo p.115d.; cf. Ast, 
Lex. Plat. iii. p. 148). c. of time, much, long: πολὺν 
χρόνον, Jn. ν. 6; μετὰ χρόνον πολύν, Mt. xxv. 19; ὥρα 
πολλή, much time (i. 6. ἃ large part of the day) is spent 
[see ὥρα, 2], Mk. vi. 35; ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης [Tdf. 
γινομ.Ἴ, of a late hour of the day, ibid. (so πολλῆς ὥρας, 
Polyb. 5, 8,33; ἐπὶ πολλὴν ὥραν, Joseph. antt. 8,4, 45 ἐμά- 
xovro... ἄχρι πολλῆς ὥρας, Dion. Hal. 2, 54); πολλοῖς 
χρόνοις, for a long time, Lk. viii. 29 (οὐ πολλῷ χρόνῳ, 
Hdian. 1, 6, 24 [8 ed. Bekk.]; χρόνοις πολλοῖς ὕστερον, 
Plut. Thes. 6; [see χρόνος, sub fin.]) ; εἰς ἔτη πολλά, Lk. 
xii. 19; (ἐκ or) ἀπὸ πολλῶν ἐτῶν, Acts xxiv. 10; Ro. xv. 
23 [here WH Tr txt. ἀπὸ ἱκανῶν ér.]; ἐπὶ πολύ, (for) a 
long time, Acts xxviii. 6; μετ᾽ ov πολύ, not long after 
[see μετά, 11. 2 b.], Acts xxvii. 14. ἃ. Neut. sing. 
πολύ, much, substantively, i. 4. many things: Lk. xii. 48; 
much, adverbially, of the mode and degree of an action: 
ἠγάπησε, Lk. vii. 47; πλανᾶσθε, Mk. xii. 27; sc. ὠφελεῖ, 
Ro. iii. 2. πολλοῦ as a gen. of price (fr. Hom. down ; cf. 
Passow s. v. IV. Ὁ. vol. ii. p. 1013"; [cf. W. 206 (194)]): 
πραθῆναι, for much, Mt. xxvi. 9. ἐν πολλῷ, in (adminis- 
tering) much (i. e. many things), Lk. xvi. 10; with great 
labor, great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 (where LT TrWH ἐν 
μεγάλῳ [see μέγας, 1 8. γ.}. with a compar. (cf. W. 


πολύσπλαγχνος 


8 35, 1]: πολὺ σπουδαιότερον, 2 Co. viii. 22 (in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down); πολλῷ πλείους, many more, Jn. iv. 41; 
πολλῷ [or πολὺ] μᾶλλον, see μᾶλλον, 1 ἃ. 58. with the 
article, τὸ πολύ, Germ. das Viele (opp. to τὸ ὀλίγον), 2 
Co. viii. 15 [cf. B. 395 (338); W. 589 (548)]. Plural 
πολλά a. many things; as, διδάσκειν, λαλεῖν, Mt. 
xiii. 3; Mk. iv. 2; vi. 34; Jn. viii. 26; xiv. 30; παθεῖν, Mt. 
xvi. 21; Mk. v. 26; ix.12; Lk. ix. 22, etc., and often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Ol. 13, 90 down; ποιεῖν, Mk. vi. 20 
[T Tr mrg. WH ἀπορεῖν] ; πρᾶξαι, Acts xxvi. 9; add as 
other exx., Mt. xxv. 21, 23; Mk. xii. 41; xv. 3; Jn. xvi. 
12; 2Co. viii. 22; 2Jn. 12; 3Jn.13; πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα, Jn. 
xx. 30. [On the Grk. (and Lat.) usage which treats the 
notion of multitude not as something external to a thing 
and consisting merely in a comparison of it with other 
things, but as an attribute inhering in the thing itself, 
and hence capable of being co-ordinated with another 
attributive word by means of καί (q. v. I. 3), see Kiihner 
§ 523, 1 (or on Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24) ; Baumlein, Partikeln, 
p- 146; Kriiger §69, 32,3; Lob. Paral. p.60; Herm. ad 
Vig. p. 835; W.§59, 3 fin.; B. 362 sq. (311). Cf. Passow 
s.v.I.3a.; L. and S.s. v. II. 2.] B. adverbially 
[ef. W. 463 (432); B.§ 128, 2], much: MK. [vi. 20 T Tr 
mrg. (?) WH (see dmopéw) |; ix. 26; Ro. xvi. 6, 12 [L br. 
the cl.J; in many ways, Jas. iii. 2; with many words, 
[R. V. much], with verbs of saying; as, κηρύσσειν, παρα- 
καλεῖν, etc., Mk. i. 45; 111. 12; v. 10, 23, 43; 1 Co. xvi. 
12; many times, often, repeatedly: Mt. ix. 14 [RG Tr 
WH mrg.] (and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; cf. 
Passow 8. v. V. 1 a. vol. ii. p. 1013”; [L. and S. III. a.]; 
Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 61 ¢c.); with the art. τὰ 
πολλά, for the most part, [R. V. these many times] (Vulg. 
plurimum), Ro. xy. 22[L Tr mrg. πολλάκις] (exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. are given by Passow l. c., [L. and S. 1. 6.7, and by 
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 281). 

πολύσπλαγχνος, -ov, (πολύς, and σπλάγχνον q.v.), full of 
pity, very kind: Jas. v.11; Hebr. 32m 37, in the Sept. 
πολυέλεος. (Theod. Stud. p. 615.)* — 

πολυτελής, -€s, (πολύς, and τέλος cost), [from Hat. 
down], precious ; a. requiring great outlay, very 
costly: Mk. xiv. 3; 1 Tim.ii. 9. (Thue. et sqq.; Sept.) 
b. excellent, of surpassing value, [A. V. of great price]: 
1 Pet. iii. 4. [(Plat., al.)]* 

πολύτιμος, -ov, (πολύς, τιμή), very valuable, of great price : 
Mt. xiii. 46; xxvi. 7 LT Trmrg.; Jn. xii. 3; compar. 
πολυτιμότερον, 1 Pet. i. 7, where Rec. πολὺ τιμιώτερον. 
(Plut. Pomp. 5; Hdian. 1, 17,5[3 ed. Bekk.]; Anthol., 
al.) * 

πολυτρόπως, (fr. πολύτροπος. in use in various senses fr. 
Hom. down), adv., in many manners: Heb. i. 1 [(Philo 
de incor. mund. § 24)]; see πολυμερῶς." 

πόμα (Attic πῶμα; [cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 425]), res, τό, 
(πίνω, rémopa), drink: 1 Co. x. 4; Heb. ix. 10.* 

πονηρία, -as, 7, (πονηρός), [fr. Soph. down], Sept. for 
ys and Ay, depravity, iniquity, wickedness [(so A. V. 
almost uniformly) ], malice: Mt. xxii. 18; Lk. xi. 39; Ro. 
i. 29; 1 Co. v. 8; Eph. vi. 12; plur. ai πονηρίαι [cf. W. 
§ 27,3; Β. § 123, 2; R. V. wickednesses], evil purposes 


536 


Tovnpos 


and desires, Mk. vii. 22; wicked ways [A. V. iniquities], 
Acts iii. 26. [SyN. see κακία, fin.]* 

πονηρός (on the accent ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 389; 
Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 304 sq.; [Chandler §§ 404, 
405]; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 26), -d, τόν ; com- 
par. πονηρότερος (Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26); (πονέω, πόνος) ; 
fr. Hes., [Hom. (ep. 15, 20), Theog.] down; Sept. often 
for 1; 1. full of labors, annoyances, hardships ; 
a. pressed and harassed by labors ; thus Hercules is called 
πονηρότατος καὶ ἄριστος, Hes. frag. 43, 5. b. bring- 
ing toils, annoyances, perils: (καιρός, Sir. li. 12); ἡμέρα 
πονηρά, of a time full of peril to Christian faith and stead- 
fastness, Eph. v. 16; vi. 13, (so in the plur. ἡμέραι πον. 
Barn. ep. 2, 1); causing pain and trouble [A. V. griev- 
ous], ἕλκος, Rev. xvi. 2. 2. bad, of a bad nature or 
condition ; a. in a physical sense: ὀφθαλμός, dis- 
eased or blind, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 34, (πονηρία ὀφθαλμῶν, 
Plat. Hipp. min. p. 3874 ἃ. ; the Greeks use πονηρῶς ἔχειν 
or διακεῖσθαι of the sick; ἐκ γενετῆς πονηροὺς ὑγιεῖς πε- 
ποιηκέναι, Justin apol. 1, 22 [ (cf. Otto's note) ; al. take πον. 
in Mt. and Lk.u.s. ethically; cf. b.and Meyer on Mt. ]); 
καρπός, Mt. vii. 17 sq. b. in an ethical sense, evil, 
wicked, bad, ete. [‘this use of the word is due to its as- 
sociation with the working (largely the servile) class; 
not that contempt for labor is thereby expressed, for 
such words as ἐργάτης, δραστήρ, and the like, do not take 
on this evil sense, which connected itself only with a 
word expressive of unintermitted toil and carrying no 
suggestion of results” (ef. Schmidt ch. 85, §1); see 
κακία, fin.]; of persons: Mt. vii. 11; xii. 34 sq.; xvili. 32; 
xxv. 26; Lk. vi. 45; xi. 13; xix. 22; Acts xvii. 5; 2 Th. iii. 
2; 2 Tim. iii. 13; γενεὰ πον.» Mt. xii. 39, 45; xvi. 4; Lk. xi. 
29; πνεῦμα πονηρόν, an evil spirit (see πνεῦμα, 3 c.), Mt. 
xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 
sq-; substantively of πονηροί, the wicked, bad men, 
opp. to οἱ δίκαιοι, Mt. xiii. 49; πονηροὶ καὶ ἀγαθοί, Mt. v. 
45; xxii. 10; ἀχάριστοι x. πονηροί, Lk. vi. 35 ; τὸν πονηρόν, 
the wicked man, i. e. the evil-doer spoken of, 1 Co. v. 13; 
τῷ πονηρῷ, the evil man, who injures you, Mt. v. 39. 6 
πονηρός is used pre-eminently of the devil, the evil one: 
Mt. v. 37; vi. 13; xiii. 19, 38; Lk. xi. 4 RL; Jn. xvii. 
15; 1Jn. ii. 13 sq.3 iii. 12; v. 18 sq. (on which see κεῖμαι, 
2c.); Eph. vi. 16. of things: αἰών, Gal.i.'4; ὄνομα (q. v. 
1 p. 447° bot.), Lk. vi. 22; ῥᾳδιούργημα, Acts xviii. 14; 
the heart as a storehouse out of which a man brings forth 
πονηρά words is called θησαυρὸς πονηρός, Mt. xii. 35; Lk. 
vi. 45; συνείδησις πονηρά, a soul conscious of wickedness, 
[conscious wickedness; see συνείδησις, b. sub fin.], Heb. x. 
22; καρδία πονηρὰ ἀπιστίας, an evil heart such as is re- 
vealed in distrusting [ef. B. § 132, 24; W. § 30, 4], Heb. 
iii. 12; ὀφθαλμός (q. v-), Mt. xx. 15; Mk. vii. 22; δια- 
λογισμοί, Mt. xv. 19; Jas. ii. 4; ὑπόνοιαι, 1 Tim. vi. 4 ;" 
καύχησις, Jas. iv. 16; ῥῆμα, ἃ reproach, Mt. v. 11 [RG; 
al. om. p.]; λόγοι; 3 In. 10; ἔργα, In. ii. 19; vii. 7; 1 Jn. 
iii. 12; 2 Jn. 11; Col. i. 21; ἔργον, (ace. to the context) 
wrong committed against me, 2 Tim. iv. 18; airia, charge 
of crime, Actsxxv-18 LT Trmrg.WHmrg. ‘The neuter 
πονηρόν, and τὸ πονηρόν, substantively, evil, that which is 


πόνος 


wicked: εἶδος πονηροῦ (see εἶδος, 2; [4]. take πον. here as 
an adj., and bring the ex. under εἶδος, 1 (R. V. mrg. ap- 
pearance of evil)|), 1 Th. ν. 22; 2 Th. iii. 3 (where rod 
πονηροῦ is held by many to be the gen. of the mase. ὁ πο- 
νηρός, but ef. Liinemann ad loc.) ; [τὶ πονηρόν, Acts xxviii. 
21]; opp. to τὸ ἀγαθόν, Lk. vi. 45; Ro. xii. 9; plur. [W. 
§ 34, 2], Mt. ix. 4; Lk. iii. 19; wicked deeds, Acts xxv. 
18 Tr txt. WH txt.; ταῦτα τὰ πονηρά, these evil things 1. e. 
the vices just enumerated, Mk. vii. 23.* 

πόνος, -ov, 6, (πένομαι [see πένης |), fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
for Soy, pr, ete., labor, toil; 1. i.q. great trouble, 
intense desire: ὑπέρ τινος (gen. of pers.), Col. iv. 13 
(where Ree. has ζῆλον [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]). 2. 
pain: Rev. xvi. 10 sq.; xxi.4. [SyYN. see κόπος, fin.]* 

Tlovriés, -7, -όν, (Πόντος, q. v-), belonging to Pontus, 
born in Pontus: Acts xviii. 2. [(Hdt., al.)] * 

Πόντιος, -ov, ὁ, Pontius (a Roman name), the prae- 
nomen of Pilate, procurator of Judaa (see Πιλάτος) : 
Mt. xxvii. 2[RGL]; Lk. iii.1; Acts iv. 27; 1 Tim. vi. 
13.* 

Πόντος, -ov, ὁ, Pontus, a region of eastern Asia Minor, 
bounded by the Euxine Sea [fr. which circumstance it 
took its name], Armenia, Cappadocia, Galatia, Paphla- 
gonia, [BB. DD.s.v.; Ed. Meyer, Gesch. ἃ. Konigreiches 
Pontos (Leip. 1879)]: Acts ii. 9; 1 Pet. i. 1.* 

Πόπλιος, -ov, ὁ, Publius (a Roman name), the name of 
a chief magistrate [(Grk. ὁ πρῶτος) but see Dr. Woolsey’s 
addition to the art. ‘Publius’ in B. D. (Am. ed.) ] of the 
island of Melita; nothing more is known of him: Acts 
XXvilli. 7, 8.* 

πορεία, -as, 4, (πορεύω), fr. Aeschyl. down; Sept. for 
7790; a journey: Lk. xiii. 22 (see ποιέω, I. 3); Hebra- 
istically (see ὁδός, 2 a.), a going 1. 6. purpose, pursuit, un- 
dertaking : Jas. i. 11.* 

πορεύω : to lead over, carry over, transfer, (Pind., Soph., 
Thue., Plat., al.); Mid. (fr. Hdt. down), pres. πορεύομαι; 
impf. ἐπορευόμην ; fut. πορεύσομαι; pf. ptep. πεπορευμένος ; 
1 aor. subjune. 1 pers. plur. πορευσώμεθα (Jas. iv. 13 
Rec. Grsb.); 1 aor. pass. ἐπορεύθην ; (πόρος a ford, [cf. 
Eng. pore i. 6. passage through ; Curtius § 356; Vanitek 
p- 479]) ; Sept. often for 727, JAN, 12; prop. to lead 
one’s self across ; i. e. to take one’s way, betake one’s self, 
set out, depart ; a. prop.: τὴν ὁδόν μου, to pursue 
the journey on which one has entered, continue one’s 
journey, [A. V. go on one’s way], Acts viii. 39; πορ. foll. 
by ἀπό w. agen. of place, to depart from, Mt. xxiv. 1 
[R G]; ἀπό w. a gen. of the pers., Mt. xxv. 41; Lk. iv. 
42; ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xix. 15; ἐντεῦθεν, Lk. xiii. 31;  foll. by 
εἰς w. an ace. of place, to go, depart, to some place: Mt. 
ii. 20; xvii. 27; Mk. xvi.12; Lk.i. 39; ii. 41; xxii. 39; 
xxiv. 13; Jn. vii. 35; viii. 1; Actsi. 11,25; xx.1; Ro. 
xv. 24 sq.; Jas. iv. 13, ete.; w. an ace. denoting the 
state: eis εἰρήνην, Lk. vii. 50; viii. 48, (also ἐν εἰρήνῃ, 
Acts xvi. 36; see εἰρήνη, 3); εἰς θάνατον, Lk. xxii. 33 ; 
foll. by ἐπί w. an ace. of place, Mt. xxii. 9; Acts viii. 26; 
ix. 11; ἐπί w. the acc. of a pers. Acts xxv.12; ἕως with 
a gen. of place, Acts xxiii. 23; ποῦ [q.v.] for ποῖ, Jn. 
vii. 35 ; οὗ [see ds, IT. 11 a.] for ὅποι, Lk. xxiv. 28; 1 Co. 


531 


πορνεία 


xvi.6; πρός w. the ace. of ἃ pers., Mt. xxv. 9; xxvi. 14; 
Lk. xi. 5; xv. 18; xvi. 30; Jn. xiv. 12, 28; xvi. 28; xx. 
17; Acts xxvii. 3; xxviii. 26; κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν, Acts viii. 
36; διά ν΄. ἃ gen. of place, Mt. xii. 1; [Mk. ix. 30 L txt 
Tr txt. WH txt.]; the purpose of the journey is indi- 
cated by an infinitive: Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) Rec.; Lk. ii. 3; 
xiv. 19,31; Jn. xiv. 2; by the prep. ἐπί with an ace. [ef. 
ἐπί, C. 1.1 f.], Lk. xv. 4; foll. by ἵνα, Jn. xi. 11; by σύν 
w. a dat. of the attendance, Lk. vii. 6; Acts x. 20; xxvi. 
13; 1Co. xvi. 4; ἔμπροσθέν twos, to go before one, Jn. 
x. 4. absol. i. q. to depart, go one’s way: Mt. ii. 9; viii. 
9; xi. 7; xxviii. 11; Lk. vii. 8; xvii. 19; Jn.iv. 50; viii. 
11; xiv. 3; Acts v. 20; viii. 27; xxi. 53 xxii. 21, etc.; 
i.q. to be on one’s way, to journey: (Lk. viii. 42 L Trmrg. ]; 
ix. 57; x. 88; xili.33; Actsix.3; xxii.6. to enter upon 
a journey; to go to do something: 1 Co. x. 27; Lk. x. 37. 
In accordance with the oriental fashion of describing 
an action circumstantially, the ptep. πορευόμενος or πο- 
peveis is placed before a finite verb which designates 
some other action (cf. ἀνίστημι, IL 1 c. and ἔρχομαι, 
I. 1 a.a. p. 250 bot.): Mt. ii. 8; ix. 13 (on which ef. the 
rabbin. phrase 793 δὲν (ef. Schoettgen or Wetstein ad 
loc.]) ; xi. 4; xxvii. 66; xxviii. 7; Lk. vii. 22; ix. 13, 52; 
Kill. 32/3) xiv. 10: xy. 10, xvil 14... χὶ 8... tibet. τ. 
19. b. By a Hebraism, metaphorically, a. to 
depart from life: Lk. xxii. 22; so 307, Gen. xv. 2; Ps. 
XxXxix. 14. B. ὀπίσω τινός, to follow one, i.e. become 
his adherent [cf. B. 184 (160)]: Lk. xxi. 8 (Judg. ii. 12; 
1 K. xi. 10; Sir. xlvi. 10) ; to seek [ef. Eng. run after] 
any thing, 2 Pet. ii. 10. y- to lead or order one’s life 
(see περιπατέω, b. a. and ὁδός, 2 a.); foll. by ἐν with a dat. 
of the thing to which one’s life is given up : ἐν ἀσελγείαις, 
1 Pet. iv. 3; ἐν rats ἐντολαῖς τοῦ κυρίου, Lk. i. 6 ; κατὰ τὰς 
ἐπιθυμίας, 2 Pet. iii. 3; Jude 16, 18 ; ταῖς ὁδοῖς μου, dat. of 
place, [to walk in one’s own ways], to follow one’s moral 
preferences, Acts xiv. 16; τῇ ὁδῷ τινος, to imitate one, 
to follow his ways, Jude 11; τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ κυρίου, Acts 
ix. 31; see W. § 31,9; B. § 133, 22b.; ὑπὸ μεριμνῶν, to 
lead a life subject to cares, Lk. viii. 14, cf. Bornemann 
ad loc. ; [Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc.; yet see ὑπό, I. 2a.; W. 
369 (346) note; B. § 147, 29; R. V.as they go on their way 
they are choked with cares, ete. Comp.: δια-, εἰσ- (-par), 
ἐκ- (μαι), ἐν- (μαι), ἐπι- (-μαι), mapa- (-μαι), mpo-, προσ- 
(μαι), συν- (μαι). SYN. see ἔρχομαι, fin.] 

πορθέω : impf. ἐπόρθουν ; 1 aor. ptep. πορθήσας ; (πέρθω, 
πέπορθα, to lay waste); fr. Hom. down; to destroy, 
to overthrow, [R.V. uniformly to make havock]: twa, 
Acts ix. 21; τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, Gal. i. 13; τὴν πίστιν, ibid. 
23.* 

Tropic pds, -ov, 6, (πορίζω to cause a thing to get on well, 
to carry forward, to convey, to acquire; mid. to bring 
about or procure for one’s self, to gain; fr. πόρος [cf. 
πορεύω]); a. acquisition, gain, (Sap. xiii. 19; xiv. 
2; Polyb., Joseph., Plut.). b. a source of gain: 1 
Tim. vi. 5 sq. (Plut. Cat. Maj. 25; [Test. xii. Patr., test. 
15. §4]).* 

Πόρκιος, see Φῆστος. 

πορνεία, -as, 7, (πορνεύω), Sept. for NIA, N33, 0332, 


πορνεύω 


fornication (Vulg. fornicatio [and (Rev. xix. 2) prostitu- 
tio]); used a. prop. of illicit sexual intercourse in 
general (Dem. 403, 27; 433, 25): Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 
25, (that this meaning must be adopted in these passages 
will surprise no one who has learned from 1 Co. vi. 12 
sqq- how leniently converts from among the heathen re- 
garded this vice and how lightly they indulged in it; ac- 
cordingly, all other interpretations of the term, such as 
of marriages within the prohibited degrees and the like, 
are to be rejected) ; Ro. i. 29 Rec.; 1 Co. v. 1; vi. 13, 18; 
vii. 2; 2 Co. xii. 21; Eph. v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. iv. 3; 
Rey. ix. 21; it is distinguished from μοιχεία in Mt. xv. 
19; Mk. vii. 21; and Gal. v. 19 Rec.; used of adultery 
[(cf. Hos. ii. 2 (4), ete.)], Mt. v.32; xix. 9. b. In 
accordance with a form of speech common in the O. T. 
and among the Jews which represents the close rela- 
tionship existing between Jehovah and his people under 
the figure of a marriage (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 422* 
8q-), πορνεία is used metaphorically of the worship of 
idols: Rev. xiv. 8; xvii. 2,4; xviii. 3; xix. 2; ἡμεῖς ἐκ 
πορνείας ov γεγεννήμεθα (we are not of a people given to 
idolatry), ἕνα πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν θεόν, Jn. viii. 41 (ἄθεος μὲν 
ὁ ἄγονος, πολύθεος δὲ ὁ ἐκ πόρνης, τυφλώττων περὶ τὸν 
ἀληθῆ πατέρα καὶ διὰ τοῦτο πολλὰ οὺ ς ἀνθ᾽ ἑνὸς γονεῖς αἰνιτ- 
τόμενος, Philo de mig. Abr. § 12; τέκνα πορνείας, of idol- 
aters, Hos. i. 2; [but in Jn.]. 6. others understand phy- 
sical descent to be spoken of (cf. Meyer) ]); of the de- 
filement of idolatry, as incurred by eating the sacrifices 
- offered to idols, Rev. ii. 21.* 
πορνεύω ; 1 aor. ἐπόρνευσα; (πόρνος, πόρνη q- V-) ; Sept. 
for 731; in Grk. writ. ([Hdt.], Dem., Aeschin., Dio Cass., 
Leian., al.) 1. to prostitute one’s body to the lust of 
another. In the Scriptures 2. to give one’s self to 
unlawful sexual intercourse; to commit fornication (Vulz. 
fornicor): 1 Co. vi. 18; x. 8; Rev. ii. 14, 20; [Mk. x. 19 
WH (rejected) mrg. ]. 3. bya Hebraism (see πορνεία, 
b.) metaph. to be given to idolatry, to worship idols: 1 Chr. 
v.25; Ps. lxxii. (Ixxiii.) 27; Jer. iii. 6; Ezek. xxiii. 19; 
Hos. ix. 1, ete.; μετά τινος, to permit one’s self to be 
drawn away by another into idolatry, Rev. xvii. 2; xviii. 
3,9. [Comp.: ἐκ-πορνεύω.] " 
πόρνη, -ης, ἡ, (fr. repaw, πέρνημι, to sell; Curtius § 358), 
properly α woman who sells her body for sexual uses (cf. 
Xen. mem. 1, 6, 13], Sept. for ΤῊΣ; 1. prop. a pros- 
titute, a harlot, one who yields herself to defilement for 
the sake of gain, (Arstph., Dem., al.); in the N. T. 
univ. any woman indulging in unlawful sexual intercourse, 
whether for gain or for lust: Mt. xxi. 31 sq.; Lk. xv. 30; 
1 Co. vi. 15 sq.; Heb. xi. 31; Jas. ii. 25. 2. Heb- 
raistically (see πορνεία, b. and πορνεύω, 3), metaph. an 
idolatress; so of ‘Babylon’ i. 6. Rome, the chief seat 
of idolatry: Rev. xvii. 1, 5, 15 sq.; xix. 2.* 
πόρνος, του, 6, (for the etym. see πόρνη), a man who 
prostitutes his body to another’s lust for hire, a male pros- 
titute, ([ Arstph.], Xen., Dem., Aeschin., Leian.); univ. 
aman who indulges in unlawful sexual intercourse, a for- 
nicator, (Vulg. fornicator, fornicarius, [Rev. xxii. 15 im- 
pudicus}): 1 Co. v. 9-11; vi.9; Eph.v.5; 1 Tim.i.10; 


532 


ποταπὸς 


Heb. xii. 16; χα, 4; Rev. xxi.8; xxii. 15. 
16 sq.) " 

πόρρω, [ (allied w. πρό. Curtius § 380)], adv., [fr. Plat., 
Xen. down], far, at a distance, a great way off: Mt. xv. 
8; Mk. vii.6; Lk. xiv. 32 [cef. W. § 54, 2a.; B. §129, 11]; 
compar. πορρωτέρω, in L Tr WH πορρώτερον [(Polyb., 
al.) ], further: Lk. xxiv. 28." 

πόρρωθεν, (πόρρω), adv., [fr. Plat. on], from afar, afar 
off: Lk. xvii. 12; Heb. xi. 13; Sept. chiefly for ΡΠ 9." 

πορφύρα, -as, ἥ, Sept. for }378; 1. the purple- 
Jish, a species of shell-fish or mussel: [Aeschyl., Soph.], 
Isocr., Aristot., al.; add 1 Mace. iv. 23, on which see 
Grimm ; [cf. B. D. s. v. Colors 1}. 2. a fabric col- 
ored with the purple dye, a garment made from purple 
cloth, (so fr. Aeschyl. down): Mk. xv. 17, 20; Lk. xvi. 
19; Rev. xvii. 4 Rec.; xviii. 12.* 

πορφύρεος, -a, -ov, in Attic and in the N. T. contr. -ovs, 
-a, -ovv, (πορφύρα, fr. Hom. down, purple, dyed in pur- 
ple, made of a purple fabric: Jn. xix. 2,5; πορφυροῦν se. 
ἔνδυμα ([Β. 82 (72)]; οἵ. W. p. 591 (550)), Rev. xvii. 4 
[GLT Tr WH]; xviii. 16:5 

πορφυρόποωλις, -cdos, ἡ, (πορφύρα and πωλέω), a female 
seller of purple or of fabrics dyed in purple (Vulg. pur- 
puraria): Acts xvi. 14. (Phot., Suid., al.) * 

ποσάκις, (πόσος). adv., how often: Mt. xviii. 213 xxiii. 
87; Lk. xiii. 34. [(Plat. ep., Aristot., al.)]* 

πόσις, -ews, 1, (πίνω), fr. Hom. down, a drinking, drink: 
Jn. vi. 55; Ro. xiv. 17; Col. ii. 16, (see βρῶσις)." 

πόσος, -n, -ov, [(cf. Curtius § 631), fr. Aeschyl. down, 
Lat. quantus], how great: Mt. vi. 23; 2 Co. vii. 11; πόσος 
χρόνος, how great (a space) i. e. how long time, Mk. ix. 
21; neut. how much, Lk. xvi. 5, 7; πόσῳ, (by) how much, 
Mt. xii. 12; πόσῳ μᾶλλον, Mt. vii.11; x. 25; Lk. xi. 13; 
xii. 24, 28; Ro. xi. 12, 24; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14; πόσῳ 
χείρονος τιμωρίας, Heb. x. 29; plur. how many: with 
nouns, Mt. xv. 34; xvi. 9sq.; Mk. vi. 38; viii. 4, 19 sq. ; 
Lk. xv. 17; Acts xxi. 20; πόσα, how grave, Mt. xxvii. 13; 
Mk. xv. 4." 

ποταμός, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 13 and 1%, 
a stream, a river: Mt. iii.6 LT Tr WH; Mk. i. 5; Acts 
xvi. 13; 2 Co. xi. 26 [W. § 30, 2a.]; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 14; 
xii. 15; xvi.4, 12; xxii. 1 sq.; 1. 4. @ torrent, Mt. vii. 25, 
27; Lk. vi. 48 sq.; Rev. xii. 15sq.;  plur. figuratively 
i. 4. the greatest abundance [ef. colloq. Eng. “streams,” 
“floods ”’], Jn. vii. 88." 

ποταμο-φόρητος, -ov, ὁ, (ποταμός and φορέω; like ave- 
μοφόρητος [cf. W. 100 (94)]), carried away by a stream 
(i. e. whelmed, drowned in the waters): Rev. xii. 15. 
Besides only in Hesych. 8. v. ἀπόερσε." 

ποταπός ({in Dion. Hal., Joseph., Philo, al.] for the 
older ποδαπός [ef. Lob. Phryn. p. 56 sq.; Rutherford, 
New Phryn. p. 129; W. 24; Curtius p. 537, 5th ed.]; 
ace. to the Grk. grammarians i. 4. ἐκ ποίου δαπέδου, from 
what region; acc. to the conjecture of others i. 4. ποῦ ἀπό 
[(Buttmann, Lexil. i. 126, compares the Germ. wovon)], 
the 8 being inserted for the sake of euphony, as in the 
Lat. prodire, prodesse; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 554 
sq. [still others regard -δαπός merely as an ending; cf 


(Sir. xxiii. 


- 


πότε 5 


Apollon. Dysk., ed. Butimarin, index 5. v.]),-4,-dv; 1. 
from what country, race, or tribe? so fr. Aeschyl. down. 
2. from Demosth. down also i. q. ποῖος, of what sort or 
quality ? [what manner of 5]: absol. of persons, Mt. viii. 
27; 2 Pet. iii. 11; with a pers. noun, Lk. vii. 39; w. names 
of things, Mk. xiii. 1; Lk. i. 29; 1 Jn. iii. 1.* 

πότε, [Curtius § 631], direct interrog. adv., fr. Hom. 
dowr, when? at what time ? Mt. xxv. 37-39, 44; Lk. xxi. 
7; Jn. vi. 25; loosely used (as sometimes even by Attic 
writ.) for the relative ὁπότε in indirect questions (W. 
510 (475)): Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk. xiii. 4, 33,35; Lk. xii. 36; 
Xvii. 20. ἕως πότε, how long ? in direct questions [cf. W. 
§ 54, 6 fin.; B.$ 146, 4]: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 
41; Jn. x. 24; Rev. vi. 10.* 

ποτέ, an enclitic particle, fr. Hom. down; 1. 
once, i. e. at some time or other, formerly, aforetime ; a. 
of the Past: Jn. ix. 13; Ro. vii. 9; xi. 30; Gal. i. 13, 23 
[ef. W. § 45, 7]; Eph. ii. 2 sq. 11,13; v. 8; Col. i. 21; iii. 
7; 1 Th. ii. 5; Tit. iii. 3; Philem. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 10; iii. 
5, 20; ἤδη ποτέ, now at length, Phil. iv. 10. b. of the 
Future: Lk. xxii. 32; ἤδη ποτέ, now at length, Ro. i. 
10. 2. ever: after a negative, οὐδείς ποτε, Eph. v. 
29 [B. 202 (175)]; ov... ποτέ, 2 Pet. i. 21; μή more 
(see μήποτε); after ov μή with the aor. subjunc. 2 Pet. 
i. 10; ina question, τίς ποτε, 1 Co. ix. 7; Heb.i. 5, 13; 
ὁποῖοί ποτε, whatsoever, Gal. ii. 6 [but some would render 
ποτέ here formerly, once; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ].* 

πότερος, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], which of two; πότε- 
ρον - « « ἢ, utrum...an, whether... or, [W. § 57,1 b.; 
B. 250 (215)]: Jn. vii. 17.* 

ποτήριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ποτήρ), a cup, a drinking 
vessel; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 25 sq.; xxvi. 27; Mk. 
vi. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; xiv. 23; Lk. xi. 39; 
xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; πίνειν ἐκ τοῦ 
ποτηρίου, 1 Co. xi. 28; τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας (see εὐ- 
λογία, 4), 1 Co. x. 16; with agen. of the thing with 
which the cup is filled: ψυχροῦ, Mt. x. 42; ὕδατος, Mk. 
ix. 41; by meton. of the container for the contained, 
the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk, 
Lk. xxii. 20° [(WH reject the pass.) ef. Win. 635 (589) 
sq-]; 1 Co. xi. 25 sq.; τὸ ποτήριόν τινος, gen. of the pers. 
giving the entertainment (cf. Rickert, Abendmahl, p. 
217 sq.) : πίνειν. 1 Co. x. 21 [ef. W. 189 (178)]; xi. 27 
[ef. W. 441 (410)]. b. By a figure common to 
Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, and not unknown to Latin 
writers, one’s lot or experience, whether joyous or 
adverse, divine appointments, whether favorable 
or unfavorable, are likened to a cup which God presents 
one to drink [ef. W. 32]: so of prosperity, Ps. xv. (xvi.) 
5; xxii. (xxiii.) 5; exv. (exvi.) 13; of adversity, Ps. x. 
(xi.) 6; xxiv. (Ixxv.) 9; Is. li. 17,22. In the N. T. of 
the bitter lot (the sufferings) of Christ: Mt. xxvi. 39, 
42 Rec.; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. xxii. 42; Jn. xviii. 11; πίνειν 
τὸ ποτ. μου Or ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, to undergo the same calamities 
which I undergo, Mt. xx. 22, 23; Mk. x. 38, 39, (Plaut. 
Cas. 5, 2, 53 (50) ut senex hoc eodem poculo quod ego 
bibi biberet, i. e. that he might be treated as harshly as 
I was) ; used of the divine penalties: Rev. xiv. 10; xvi. 


33 


Πούδης 


19; xviii.6. ([Alcaeus, Sappho], Idt., Ctes., Arstph., 
Leian., al. ; Sept. for 013.) * 

ποτίζω ; impf. ἐπότιζον; 1 aor. ἐπότισα; pf. πεπότικα 
(Rev. xiv. 8); 1 aor. pass. ἐποτίσθην ; (πότος) ; fr. [Hip- 
pocr.], Xen., Plat. down; Sept. for MpwN ; to give to 
drink, to furnish drink, (Vulg. in 1 Co. xii. 18 and Rev. 
xiv. 8 poto [but in Rev. 1. c. Tdf. gives potiono; A. V. to 
make to drink): τινά, Mt. xxv. 35, 37, 42; xxvii. 48; Mk. 
xv. 36; Lk. xiii. 15; Ro. xii. 20; τινά τι, to offer one 
anything to drink (W. § 32,4 a.; [B.§ 131, 6]): Mt. x. 
42; Mk. ix. 41, and often in the Sept.; in fig. discourse 
1. τινὰ γάλα, to give one teaching easy to be apprehended, 
1 Co. iii. 2 (where by zeugma οὐ βρῶμα is added; [cf. 
W. § 66, 2e.; B. § 151,30; A. V. 7 have fed you with 
milk, ete.]); τινὰ ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου, Rev. xiv. 8 (see οἶνος, b. 
and θυμός, 2); i.q.to water, irrigate, (plants, fields, ete.) : 
1 Co. iii. 6-8 (Xen. symp. 2, 25; Leian., Athen., Geop., 
[Strab., Philo]; Sept. [Gen. xiii. 10]; Ezek. xvii. 7); 
metaph. to imbue, saturate, τινά, one’s mind, w. the addi- 
tion of an accus. of the thing, ἕν πνεῦμα, in pass., 1 Co. 
xii. 13 L T Tr WH [W. § 82,5; Β. § 134, 5]; eis ἐν πνεῦμα, 
that we might be united into one body which is imbued 
with one spirit, ibid. RG, (τινὰ πνεύματι κατανύξεως, Is. 
xxix. 10 [ef. Sir. xv. 3]).* 

Ποτίολοι, -ων, of, Puteoli, a city of Campania in Italy, 
situated on the Bay of Naples, now called Pozzuoli: 
Acts xxviii. 13. [Cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 218sqq.; Smith, 
Dict. of Geog. s.v.]* 

πότος, -ov, 6, (ΠΟΩ [cf. mivw]), a drinking, carousing : 
1 Pet. iv. 3. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., Ael., al.; 
Sept. for AAW.) * 

ποῦ, [cf. Curtius § 631], an interrog. adv., fr. Hom. 
down, Sept. for 778, 718, °8, where? in what place? a. 
in direct questions: Mt. ii. 2; xxvi.17; Mk. xiv. 12, 14; 
Lk. xvii. 17, 37; xxii. 9, 11; Jn. i. 38 (39) ; vii. 11; viii. 
10, 19; ix.12; xi.34; ποῦ ἐστιν [(ἐστ. sometimes unex- 
pressed) ], in questions indicating that a person or thing 
is gone, or cannot be found, is equiv. to it is nowhere, 
does not exist: Lk. viii. 25; Ro. iii. 27; 1 Co. i. 20; xii. 
17,19; xv. 55; Gal. iv. 15 L T Tr WH; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; ποῦ 
φανεῖται, [ A. V. where shall . . . appear] i. q. there will be 
no place for him, 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. in indirect ques- 
tions, for the relative ὅπου [cf. W. §57, 2 fin.]: foll. by 
the indic., Mt. ii. 4; Mk. xv. 47; Jn. i. 89 (40); xi. 57; 
xx, 2,13, 15; Rev. ii. 13 [ef. W. 612 (569)] ; foll. by the 
subjune., Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58; xii. 17. c. joined 
to verbs of going or coming, for ποξ in direct quest. [cf. 
our collog. where for whither; see W. § 54, 7; B. 71 
(62)]: In. vii. 35 [ef. W. 300 (281); Β. 358 (307)]; xiii. 
36 ; xvi. 5; in indir. question, foll. by the indic.: Jn. iii. 
8; viii. 14; xii. 35; xiv.5; Heb. xi. 8; 1. Jn. ii. 11.* 

πού, an enclitic particle, fr. Hom. down; 1. 
somewhere: Heb. ii. 6; iv. 4. 2. it has a limiting 
force, nearly; with numerals somewhere about, about, 
(Hadt. 1,119; 7,22; Paus.8,11, 2; Hdian. 7, 5, 3 [2 ed. 
Bekk.]; Ael. ν. h. 13, 4; al.): Ro. iv. 19." 

Πούδης, [B. 17 (15) ], Pudens, proper name of a Chris- 
tian mentioned in 2 Tim. iv. 21. Cf. Lipsius, Chronolo- 


TOUS 


gie ἃ. romisch. Bischofe (1869) p. 146; [B. D.s. v., also 
(Am. ed.) s. v. Claudia; Bib. Sacer. for 1875, p. 174 sqq.; 
Plumptre in the ‘ Bible Educator’ iii. 245 and in Elli- 
cott’s ‘New Test. Com.’ ii. p. 186 sq. ].* 

πούς (not ποῦς, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 765; Gétiling, 
Accentl. p. 244; [Chandler, Grk. Accentuation, § 566]; 
W. § 6, 1d.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.48), ποδός, 6, 
[allied νυ. πέδον, πέζα, Lat. pes, etc.; Curtius § 291; Van- 
ivek p. 473], dat. plur. ποσίν, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 939; 
a foot, both of men and of beasts: Mt. iv. 6; vii. 6; xxii. 
13; Mk. ix.45; Lk.i. 79; Jn. xi.44; Acts vii.5; 1 Co. 
xii. 15; Rev. x. 2, and often. From the oriental prac- 
tice of placing the foot upon the vanquished (Josh. x. 
24), come the foll. expressions: ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας συντρίβειν 
(q: ν.) τινά, Ro. xvi. 20; ὑποτάσσειν τινά, 1 Co. xv. 27; 
Eph. i. 22; Heb. ii. 8; τιθέναι, 1 Co. xv. 25; τιθέναι τινὰ 
ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν, Mt. xxii. 441, T Tr WH; ὑποπόδιον 
τῶν ποδῶν, Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36 [here WH ὑπο- 
κάτω τ. 7]; Lk. xx. 43; Actsii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x.13; dis- 
ciples listening to their teacher’s instruction are said παρὰ 
(or πρὸς) τοὺς πόδας τινὸς καθῆσθαι or παρακαθίσαι, Lk. x. 
39; Acts xxii. 3, ef. Lk. viii. 35; to lay a thing παρὰ (or 
πρὸς) τοὺς πόδας τινός is used of those who consign it to his 
power and care, Mt. xv. 30; Acts iv. 35, 37; v. 2; vii. 58. 
In saluting, paying homage, supplicating, etc., persons 
are said πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τινὸς πίπτειν or προσπίπτειν : Mk. 
v. 22: vii. 25; Lk. vili. 41; xvii.16 παρά]; Rev. i. 17; 
εἰς τοὺς π. τινός, Mt. xviii. 29 [ Rec. ]; Jn. xi. 32 {here Ἵν 
Tr WH πρός]; πίπτειν ἔμπροσθεν τ. ποδῶν τινος, Rev. xix. 
10; προσκυνεῖν ἔμπροσθεν (or ἐνώπιον) τῶν ποδῶν τινος, 
Rey. iii. 9; xxii. 8; πίπτ. ἐπὶ τοὺς π. Acts x. 25. By ἃ 
poetic usage that member of the body which is the chief 
organ or instrument in any given action is put for the 
man himself (see γλῶσσα, 1) ; thus οἱ πόδες τινός is used 
for the man in motion: Lk. i. 79 (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 101) ; 
Acts v. 9; Ro. ii. 15; x. 15; Heb. xi. 18. 

πρᾶγμα, -ros, τό, (πράσσω), fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hat. 
down, Sept. chiefly for 125; a. that which has been 
done, a deed, an accomplished fact: Lk.i.1; Acts v. 4; 
2 Co. vii. 11; Heb. vi. 18. b. what is doing or being 
accomplished: Jas. iii. 16; spec. business (commercial 
transaction), 1 Th. iv. 6 [so W.115 (109); al. refer this 
example to 6. and render in the matter (spoken of, or con- 
ventionally understood; cf. Green, Gram. p. 26 sq.)]- ο. 
a matter (in question), affair: Mt. xviii. 19; Ro. xvi. 2; 
spec. in a forensic sense, a matter at law, case, suit, (Xen. 
mem. 2, 9,1; Dem. 1120, 26; Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 17): 
πρᾶγμα ἔχειν πρός twa, [A. V. having a matter against, 
ete.], 1 Co. vi. 1. ἃ. that which is or ezists, a 
thing: Heb. x. 1; πράγματα οὐ βλεπόμενα, Heb. xi. 1 [see 
ἐλπίζω ].", 

πραγματεία [T WH -ria; see I, ε7, -ας, 9, (πραγματεύο- 
μαι), prosecution of any affair; business, occupation: 
plur. with the addition of τοῦ βίου, pursuits and occupa- 
tions pertaining to civil life, opp. to warfave [A. V. the 
affairs of this life], 2 Tim. ii.4. (In the same and other 
senses in Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.], Xen., Plato down.)* 

πραγματεύομαι: 1 aor. mid. impy. 2 pers. plur. mpay- 


534 


πρᾷος 


ματεύσασθε; (πρᾶγμα); in Grk. prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; 
to be occupied in anything; to carry on a business; spec. 
to carry on the business of a banker or trader (Plut. Sull. 
17; Cat. min. 59): Lk. xix. 13 [here WH txt. reads the 
infinitive (see their Intr. § 404); R. V. trade. Comp.: 
δια- mpayparevopat. |* 

πραιτώριον, -ov, τό, a Lat. word, praelorium (neut. of 
the adj. praetorius used substantively); the word de- 
notes 1. ‘head-quarters’ in a Roman camp, the 
tent of the commander-in-chief. 2. the palace in 
which the governor or procurator of a province resided, 
to which use the Romans were accustomed to appropri- 
ate the palaces already existing, and formerly dwelt in 
by the kings or princes (at Syracuse “illa domus prae- 
toria, quae regis Hieronis fuit,” Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 12, 30); 
at Jerusalem it was that magnificent palace which Her- 
od the Great had built for himself, and which the Ro- 
man procurators seem to have occupied whenever they 
came from Cwesarea to Jerusalem to transact public 
business: Mt. xxvii. 27; Mk. xv. 16; Jn. xviii. 28, 33; 
xix. 9; cf. Philo, leg. ad Gaium, § 38; Joseph. Ὁ. j. 2, 14, 
8; also the one at Cesarea, Acts xxiii. 35. Cf. Keim 
iii. p. 359 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. p. 79; B.D. 8. v. Praeto- 
rium]. 3. the camp of praetorian soldiers estab- 
lished by Tiberius (Suet. 37): Phil. i.13. Cf. Win. 
RWB. s. v. Richthaus; [Bp. Lghtft. (Com. on Philip. 
Ῥ. 99 544.) rejects, as destitute of evidence, the various 
attempts to give a local sense to the word in Phil.1.¢., 
and vindicates the meaning praetorian guard (so R.V.)].* 

πράκτωρ, -opos, ὁ, (πράσσω); 1. one who does 
anything, a doer, (Soph.). 2. one who does the work 
of inflicting punishment or taking vengeance; esp. the 
avenger of a murder (Aeschyl., Soph.) ; the exactor of a 
pecuniary fine ([Antipho], Dem., al.) ; an officer of jus- 
tice of the lower order whose business it is to inflict punish- 
ment: Lk. xii. 58.* 

πράξις, -ews, ἡ, (πράσσω), fr. Hom. down; a.a 
doing, a mode of acting; a deed, act, transaction: univ. 
πράξεις τῶν ἀποστόλων (Grsb.; Ree. inserts ἁγίων, L Tr 
WH om. τῶν, Tdf. has simply πράξεις), the doings of (i.e. 
things done by) the apostles, in the inscription of the Acts; 
sing. in an ethical sense: both good and bad, Mt. xvi. 
27; in a bad sense, i. 4. wicked deed, crime, Lk. xxiii. 
51; plur. wicked doings (cf. our practices i. e. trickery; 
often so by Polyb.): Acts xix. 18; Ro. viii. 13; Col. iii. 
9; (with κακή added, as Ev. Nicod. 1 ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐθεράπευσε 
δαιμονιζομένους ἀπὸ πράξεων κακῶν). b. a thing to 
be done, business, [A. V. office], (Xen. mem. 2,1, 6): Ro. 
xii. 4.* 

πρᾷος (so R G in Mt. xi. 29 ; on the iota subser. cf. Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 403 sq.; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. § 64, 2 i. p. 255; 
[Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 7 sq.; ef. W. § 5, 4d. and 
p- 45 (44)]) or πρᾶος, -a, -ov, and πραῦς (LT Tr WH, so 
RG in Mt. xxi. 5 (4); [ef. Τὰ Proleg. p. 827), -eta, -v, gen. 
πραέως T Tr WH for the common form πραέος (so Lehm. ; 
πρᾳέος RG), see βαθέως [cf. B. 26 (23)], plur. πραεῖς L 
T Tr WH, πρᾳεῖς R G; fr. Hom. down; gentle, mild, meek: 
Mt. v. 5 (4); xi. 29; xxi. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 4; Sept. several 


πρᾳότης 


times for 1} and 5)». [Cf. Schmidt ch. 98, 2; Trench 
§ xlii.; Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 6, 36.]* 

πρᾳότης (Rec. and Grsb. [exc. in Jas. i. 21; iii. 133; 1 
Pet. iii. 15]; see the preceding word), πραότης (so Lchm.), 
and ace. to a later form πραὕτης (so αὶ and G, but with ¢ 
subser. under the a, in Jas. i. 21; iii. 13; 1 Pet. iii. 15; 
Lchm. everywhere exc. in Gal. vi.1; Eph.iv.2; Treg. 
everywhere [exe. in 2 Co. x. 1; Gal. ν. 23 (22); vi.1; Eph. 
iv. 2], T WH everywhere; cf. B. 26 (23) sq.), τητος, ἡ, gen- 
tleness, mildness, meekness : 1 Co. iv. 21: 2 Co. x. 1; Gal. 
v. 23 (22); vi.1; Col. iii. 12; Eph. iv. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 118; 
2 Tim. ii. 25; Tit. iii. 2; Jas.i. 21; iii.13; 1 Pet. iii. 16 
(15). (Xen., Plato, Isoer., Aristot., Diod., Joseph., al. ; 
for 733’, Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 4.) [S¥N. see ἐπιείκεια, fin. ; 
Trench (as there referred to, but esp.) § xlii.; Bp. Lghtft. 
on Col. iii. 13.]* 

πρασιά, -as, ἡ, a plot of ground, a garden-bed, Hom. Od. 
7,127; 24, 247; Theophr. hist. plant. 4,4, 3; Nicand., 
Diose., al.; Sir. xxiv. 31; ἀνέπεσον πρασιαὶ πρασιαί (a 
Hebraism), i.e. they reclined in ranks or divisions, so 
that the several ranks formed, as it were, separate 
plots, Mk. vi. 40; ef. Gesenvus, Lehrgeb. p. 669; [Hebr. 
Gram. § 106, 4; B. 30(27); W. 464 (432) also] § 37, 3; 
(where add fr. the O. T. συνήγαγον αὐτοὺς θημωνίας θημω- 
vias, Ex. viii. 14).* 

πράσσω and (once viz. Acts xvii. 7 RG) πράττω ; fut. 
πράξω; 1 aor. ἔπραξα; pf. πέπραχα; pf. pass. ptep. πεπραγ- 
μένος ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. several times for Nwy and 
533 to do, practise, effect, Lat. agere, (but ποιεῖν to make, 
Lat. facere ; [see ποιέω, fin.]); 1.6. 1. to exercise, 
practise, be busy with, carry on: τὰ περίεργα, Acts xix. 19; 
τὰ ἴδια, to mind one’s own affairs, 1 Th. iv. 11 (τὰ ἑαυτοῦ, 
[Soph. Electr. 678]; Xen. mem. 2,9,1; Plat. Phaedr. p. 
247a.; Dem. p. 150, 21; al.); used of performing the 
duties of an office, 1 Co. ix.17. to undertake to do, μηδὲν 
mporreres, Acts xix. 36. 2. to accomplish, to perform: 
πεπραγμένον ἐστίν, has been accomplished, has taken 
place, Acts xxvi. 26; εἴτε ἀγαθόν, εἴτε κακόν. 2 Co. v. 10; 
ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον (κακόν), Ro. ix. 11 (δίκαια ἢ ἄδικα, Plat. 
apol. p. 28b.); ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα, Acts xxvi. 20; 
add, Ro. vii. 15,19; Phil. iv. 9; νόμον, to doi. 6. keep the 
law, Ro. ii. 25; of unworthy acts, to commit, perpetrate, 
(less freq. so in Grk. writ., as πολλὰ καὶ ἀνόσια, Xen. 
symp. 8,22; with them ποιεῖν [ (see Schmidt, Syn. ch. 23, 
11, 3; L. and S.s. v. B.)] is more com. in reference to 
bad conduct; hence τοὺς ἐπισταμένους μὲν ἃ δεῖ πράττειν, 
ποιοῦντας δὲ τἀναντία, Xen. mem. 8, 9, 4), Acts xxvi. 9; 
2 Co. xii. 21; τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο, this (criminal) deed, 1 Co. 
v.2 TWH Trmre.; add, Lk. xxii. 23; Acts iii. 17; v. 
35; Ro. vii. 19; τὰ τοιαῦτα, such nameless iniquities, Ro. 
i. 32 (where ποιεῖν and πράσσειν are used indiscriminately 
[but cf. Meyer]); ii. 1-3; Gal. v. 21; φαῦλα, Jn. 111. 20; 
ν. 29; τὶ ἄξιον θανάτου, Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts xxv. 11, 25; 
Xxvi. 315 τὸ κακόν, Ro. vii. 19; xiii. 4 ; ἄτοπον, Lk. xxiii. 41; 
τί τινι κακόν, to bring evil upon one, Acts xvi. 28. 3. 
to manage public affairs, transact public business, (Xen., 
Dem., Plut.); fr. this use has come a sense met with fr. 
Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down, viz. to exact tribute, revenue, 


535 


πρεσβύτερος 


debts: Lk. iii. 13 [here R. V. extort]; τὸ ἀργύριον, Lk. 
xix. 23, (so agere in Lat., cf. the commentators on Suet. 
Vesp. 1; [cf. W. § 42, 1a.]). 4. intrans. fo act (see 
εὖ p. 256") : ἀπέναντί twos, contrary toa thing, Acts xvii. 
Os 5. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down reflexively, me 
habere: ti πράσσω, how I do, the state of my affairs, 
Eph. vi. 21; εὖ πράξετε (see ed), Acts xv. 29 [cf. B. 300 
(258). 

πραὐπάθεια (-θία TWH; see I, ει), -as, 4, (πραὐπαθής 
[(macxw)]), mildness of disposition, gentleness of spirit, 
meekness, (i. 4. mpavtns): 1 Tim. vi.11 LT Tr WH. (Philo 
de Abrah. §37; Ignat. ad Trall. 8, 1.) * 

πραῦς, See πρᾷος. 

πραύτης, See πρᾳύτης. 

πρέπω ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἔπρεπε; 1. to stand out, 
to be conspicuous, to be eminent; so fr. Hom. Il. 12, 104 
down. 2. to be becoming, seemly, fit, (fr. Pind., 
Aeschyl., Hdt. down): πρέπει τινί with a subject nom. 
Heb. vii. 26 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 1); ὃ or ἃ πρέπει, which 
becometh, befitteth, 1 Tim. ii. 10; Tit. ii. 1; impers. κα- 
θὼς πρέπει τινί, Eph. v. 3; πρέπον ἐστίν foll. by the inf., 
Mt. iii. 15; Heb. ii. 10; foll. by an acc. with the inf. 1 Co. 
xi. 13. On its constr. ef. Bttm. § 142, 2.* 

πρεσβεία, -as, ἡ, (mpecBeva) ; 1. age, dignity, right 
of the first born: Aeschyl. Pers. 4; Plat. de rep. 6 p. 509 
b.; Paus. 3,1, 4; 3,.3;.8. 2. the business wont to 
be intrusted to elders, spec. the office of an ambassador, 
an embassy, (Arstph., Xen., Plat.) ; abstr. for the con- 
crete, an ambassage i. e. ambassadors, Lk. xiv. 32; xix. 
14.* 

πρεσβεύω ; (πρέσβυς an old man, an elder, [Curtius p. 
479; Vaniéek p. 186]); 1. to be older, prior by 
birth or in age, ({Soph.], Hdt. and sqq.). 2. to be 
an ambassador, act as an ambassador: 2 Co. ν. 20; Eph. 
vi. 20, ({ Hat. 5, 93 init.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.).* 

πρεσβυτέριον, -ov, τό, (πρεσβύτερος, q- V-), body of elders, 
presbylery, senate, council: of the Jewish elders (see σὺυν- 
έδριον, 2), Lk. xxii. 66; Acts xxii. 5; [ef. Dan. Theod. 
init. 50]; of the elders of any body (church) of Chris- 
tians, 1 Tim. iv. 14 (eccl. writ. [cf. reff. s. v. πρεσβύτερος, 
2ibeil)) == 

πρεσβύτερος, -a, -ov, (compar. of πρέσβυς), [fr. Hom. 
down ], elder ; used 1. of age; a. where two 
persons are spoken of, the elder: ὁ vids ὁ mpeoB. (Ael. 
v. ἢ. 9,42), Lk. xv. 25. b. univ. advanced in life, 
an elder, a senior: opp. to νεανίσκοι, Acts 11. 17; opp. to 
νεώτερος, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq., (Gen. xviii. 11 sq.; Sap. vill. 10; 
Sir. vi. 34 (33); vii. 14; 2 Mace. viii. 30). οἱ πρεσβύ- 
repo, [A.V. the elders], forefathers, Heb. xi. 2; παράδοσις 
(q-V-) τῶν mpeoB., received from the fathers, Mt. xv. 2; 
Mk. vii. 3, 5. 2. a term of rank or office; as such 
borne by, a. among the Jews, a. members of 
the great council or Sanhedrin (because in early times 
the rulers of the people, judges, ete., were selected from 
the elderly men): Mt. xvi. 21; xxvi. 47, 57, 59 Rec.; 
XXVii. 3, 12, 20,41; xxviii.12; Mk. viii. 31; xi. 27; xiv. 
43,53; xv. 1; Lk. ix. 22; xx. 1; xxii. 52; Jn. viii. 9; Acts 
iv. 5,23; vi. 12; xxiii. 14; xxiv. 1; with the addition of 


πρεσβύτης 


τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Acts iv. 8 RG; of τῶν Ἰουδαίων, Acts xxv. 
15; of τοῦ λαοῦ, Mt. xxi. 23; xxvi. 3; xxvii. 1. B. 
those who in the separate cities managed public affairs 
and administered justice: Lk. vii.3. [Cf. BB. DD.s. v. 
Elder. ] b. among Christians, those who presided 
over the assemblies (or churches): Acts xi. 30; xiv. 23; xv. 
2, 4, 6, 22 sq. ; xvi. 4; xxi. 18; 1 Tim. v.17, 19; Tit. i. 5; 
2.15.1; 3Jn.1; 1 Pet. ν. 1,5; with τῆς ἐκκλησίας added, 
Acts xx. 17; Jas. ν. 14. That they did not differ at all 
from the (ἐπίσκοποι) bishops or overseers (as is 
acknowledged also by Jerome on Tit. i. 5 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. 
Com. on Phil. pp. 98 84. 229 sq.]) is evident from the 
fact that the two words are used indiscriminately, Acts 
xx. 17, 28; Tit. i. 5, 7, and that the duty of presbyters 
is described by the terms ἐπισκοπεῖν, 1 Pet. v. 1 sq., and 
ἐπισκοπή, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44,1; accordingly only 
two ecclesiastical officers, of ἐπίσκοποι and οἱ διάκονοι, 
are distinguished in Phil. i.1; 1 Tim. iii. 1,8. The title 
ἐπίσκοπος denotes the function, πρεσβύτερος the dig- 
nity; the former was borrowed from Greek institutions, 
the latter from the Jewish; οἵ. [Bp. Lghtft., as above, 
pp- 95 sqq. 191 sqq.]; Ritschl, Die Entstehung der altka- 
thol. Kirche, ed. 2 p. 350 sqq.; Hase, Protest. Polemik, 
ed. 4 p. 98 sqq.; [ Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, Lect. 
iii. and Harnack’s Analecten appended to the Germ. 
trans. of the same (p. 229 sqq.); also Harnack’s note on 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3 (cf. reff. at 44 init.), and Hatch in 
Dict. of Christ. Antiq. 85. v. Priest. Cf. ἐπίσκοπος. ]. Ὁ: 
the twenty-four members of the heavenly Sanhedrin or 
court, seated on thrones around the throne of God: Rey. 
iv. 4,10; v. 5, 6,8, 11, 14; vil. 11,13; xi. 16; xiv. 3; xix. 4.* 

πρεσβύτης, -ov, ὁ, (πρέσβυς [see πρεσβεύω ]), an old man, 
an aged man: Lk.i. 18; Tit. ii. 2; Philem. 9 [here many 
(cf. R. V. mrg.) regard the word as a substitute for 
πρεσβευτής, ambassador; see Bp. Lghtft. Com. ad loc. ; 
WH. App. ad loe.; and add to the exx. of the inter- 
change mpeoBevrepas in Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus, 
App., Inser. fr. the Great Theatre p. 24 (col. 5, 1. 72)]. 
(Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. for 101.) * 

πρεσβῦτις, -ἰδος, 7, (fem. of πρεσβύτης), an aged woman : 
Tit. ii. 3. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., Hdian. 5, 
3, 6 (3 ed. Bekk.).) * 

πρηνής, -és, [allied w. πρό; Vanicek p. 484], Lat. pro- 
nus, headlong: Acts i. 18. (Sap. iv. 19; 3 Mace. v.43; 
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, but in Attic more com. 
mpavns, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 431; [W. 22].) * 

πρίζω (or πρίω, q-v.): 1 aor. pass. ἐπρίσθην ; to saw, to 
cut in two with asaw: Heb. xi. 37. Tobe ‘sawn asunder’ 
was a kind of punishment among the Hebrews (2 S. xii. 
31; 1 Chr. xx. 3), which according to ancient tradition 
was inflicted on the prophet Isaiah; οἵ. Win. RWB.s. v. 
Sige; Roskoff in Schenkel ν. 135; [B. Ὁ. 8. v. Saw]. 
(Am. i. 3; Sus. 59; Plat. Theag. p. 124 b. and freq. in 
later writ.) * 

πρίν, [(ace. to Curtius §380 compar. mpo- cov, προ -tv, 
wp) ], as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down 1. an adv. 
previously, formerly, [cf. πάλαι, 1]: 3 Macc. ν. 28; vi.4, 31; 
but never so in the N. T. 2. with the force of a 


536 


προ 


conjunction, before, before that: with an acc. and aor. 
infin. of things past [cf. W. § 44, 6 fin.; B.§142,3]; πρὶν 
᾿Αβραὰμ γενέσθαι, before Abraham existed, came into be- 
ing, Jn. viii. 58; also πρὶν ἢ (cf. Meyer on Mt. i. 18), Mt. 
i. 18; [Acts vii. 2]; with an aor. inf. having the force of 
the Lat. fut. perf., of things future [cf. W. 332 (311)]: 
πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι, before the cock shall have crowed, 
Mt. xxvi. 34, 75; Mk. xiv. 72; Lk. xxii.61; add, Jn. iv. 
49; xiv. 29; also πρὶν ἤ, Mk. xiv. 30; Acts ii. 20 (where 
LT Tr WII txt. om. ἢ); πρὶν ἤ, preceded by a negative 
sentence [B. § 139, 35], with the aor. subjunc. having 
the force of a fut. pf. in Lat. [B. 231 (199)], Lk. ii. 26 
[Δα 1. Ὁ Tr mrg., but WH br. ἢ], and R Gin Lk. xxii. 
34; πρὶν 7, foll. by the optat. of a thing as entertained 
in thought, Acts xxv. 16 [W. 297 (279) ; B. 230 (198)]. 
Cf. Matthiae § 522, 2 p.1201sq.; Bitm. Gram. § 139, 41; 
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p.726 sqq.; W. [and B.] as above.* 

Πρίσκα, ἡ, [ace. -av], Prisca (a Lat. name [lit. ‘an- 
cient’]), a Christian woman, wife of Aquila (concern- 
ing whom see ’AxvAas): Ro. xvi. 8 GLTTr WH; 1 Co. 
xvi. 19 L ed. ster. TTrWH; 2 Tim. iv. 19. She is also 
called by the dimin. name Πρισκίλλα [better (with all 
edd.) Πρίσκιλλα, see Chandler § 122; Etymol. Magn. 
19, 50 sq.] (ef. Livia, Livilla; Drusa, Drusilla; Quinta, 
Quintilla; Secunda, Secundilla): Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; 
besides, Ro. xvi. 3 Rec.; 1 Co. xvi. 19 RGL.* 

Πρίσκιλλα, see the preceding word. 

πρίω, see πρίζω. [COomP.: δια- πρίω.] 

πρό, a prep. foll. by the Genitive, (Lat. pro), [fr. Hom. 
down], Sept. chiefly for +339, before; used a. of 
Place: πρὸ τῶν θυρῶν, τῆς θύρας, ete., Acts y. 23 RG; 
xii. 6, 14; xiv. 13; Jas.v.9; by a Hebraism, πρὸ προσώ- 
mov with the gen. of a pers. before (the face of) one (who 
is following) [B. 319 (274)]: Mt. xi. 10; Mk.i. 2; Lk.i. 
76; vil. 27; ix.52; x.1, (Mal. iii. 1; Zech. xiv. 20; Deut. 
iii. 18). Ὁ. of Time: πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, Acts 
ν. 86; xxi. 38; [πρὸ τοῦ πάσχα, Jn. xi.55]; ace.toalater 
Greek idiom, πρὸ ἐξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ πάσχα, prop. before six 
days reckoning from the Passover, which is equiv. to ἕξ 
ἡμέρας πρὸ τοῦ πάσχα, on the sixth day before the Pas- 
sover, Jn. xii. 1 (πρὸ δύο ἐτῶν τοῦ σεισμοῦ, Am.i.1; πρὸ 
μιᾶς ἡμέρας τῆς Μαρδοχαϊκῆς ἡμέρας, 2 Mace. xv. 36; exx. 
fr. prof. writ. are cited by W. 557 (518) ; [οῇ. B. 8181, 
11]; fr. eccles. writ. by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien ete. 
pp: 298, 302; also his Paschastreit der alten Kirche, p. 221 
sq-; [ef. Soph. Lex. 8. ν. mpd, 1 and 27) ; [πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς, 
Jn. xiii. 1]; πρὸ καιροῦ, Mt. viii. 29; 1 Co. iv. 5; τῶν αἰώ- 
νων, 1 Co. ii. 7; παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος, Jude 25 L T Tr WH; 
ἐτῶν δεκατεσσ. [ fourteen years ago], 2 Co. xii. 2; add, 2 
Tim. i. 9; iv. 21; Tit. i. 2; τοῦ ἀρίστου, Lk. xi. 38; κατα- 
κλυσμοῦ, Mt. xxiv. 88; πρὸ τῆς μεταθέσεως, Heb. xi. 5; 
πρὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i. 4; 1 Pet. 1. 
20; πρὸ πάντων, prior to all created things, Col. i. 17; 
[πρὸ τούτων πάντων (Rec. ἅπάντ.), Lk. xxi. 12]; bya 
Hebraism, πρὸ προσώπου with the gen. of a thing is used 
of time for the simple πρό (W. § 65, 4b.; [B.319 (274)]), 
Acts xiii. 24 [(lit. before the face of his entering in)]. 
πρό with the gen. of a pers.: Jn. v. 7; x. 8 [not Tdf.]; 


προώγω 


Ro. xvi. 7; οἱ πρό τινος, those that existed before one, 
Mt. v.12; with a pred. nom. added, Gal.i.17. πρό with 
the gen. of an infin. that has the art., Lat. ante quam 
(before, before that) foll. by a fin. verb [B. §140,11; W. 
329 (309)]: Mt. vi.8; Lk. ii. 21; xxii.15; Jn.i.48 (49); 


xiii. 19; xvii. 5; Acts xxiii. 15; Gal. ii. 12; iii. 23. Cc: 
of superiority or pre-eminence [W. 372 (349)]: 
πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas. v.12; 1 Pet. iv. 8. d. 


In Composition, πρό marks a. place: mpoav- 
λιον ; motion forward (Lat. porro), προβαίνω, προβάλλω, 
ete.; before another who follows, in advance, προάγω, πρό- 
Spouos, προπέμπω, προτρέχω, etc.; in public view, openly, 
πρόδηλος, πρόκειμαι. β. time: before this, previously, 
mpoapapravw; in reference to the time of an occurrence, 
beforehand, in advance, προβλέπω, προγινώσκω, προθέ- 
σμιος, προορίζω, etc. Ὑ- superiority or preference: 
προαιρέομαι. [Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 658.]* 

προ-άγω; impf. προῆγον ; fut. προάξω ; 2 aor. προήγαγον: 
fr. Hdt. down; 1. trans. to lead forward, lead 
forth: τινά, one from a place in which he has lain hidden 
from view,—as from prison, ἔξω, Acts xvi. 30; [from 
Jason’s house, Acts xvii.5 L T Tr WH]; _ in a forensic 
sense, to bring one forth to trial, Acts xii. 6 [WH txt. 
προσαγαγεῖν] ; with addition of ἐπί and the gen. of the 
pers. about to examine into the case, before whom the 
hearing is to be had, Acts xxv. 26 (els τὴν δίκην, Joseph. 
b. ἡ. 1, 27, 2; εἰς ἐκκλησίαν τοὺς ἐν αἰτίᾳ γενομένους, antt. 


16, 11, 7). 2. intrans. (see ἄγω, 4 [and cf. πρό, ἃ. 
a.]), a. to go before: Lk. xviii. 39 [L mrg. παράγ.] : 


opp. to ἀκολουθέω, Mt. xxi. 9 RG; Mk. xi. 9; foll. by εἰς 
with an ace. of place, Mt. xiv. 22; Mk. vi. 45; εἰς κρίσιν, 
1 Tim. ν. 24 (on which pass. see ἐπακολουθέω) ; ptep. 
προάγων, preceding i. 6. prior in point of time, previous, 
1 Tim. i. 18 [see προφητεία fin., and 5. v. ἐπί, C. I. 2 g. y. 
yy: (but R. V. mrg. led the way to, ete.)]; Heb. vii. 18. 
τινά, to precede one, Mt. ii. 9; Mk. x. 32; and LT Tr 
WH in Mt. xxi. 9, [οἵ. Joseph. b. j.6, 1,6; B.§ 130, 4]; 
foll. by εἰς with an ace. of place, Mt. xxvi.32; xxviii. 7; 
Mk. xiv. 28; xvi. 7; τινὰ εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ, to 
take precedence of one in entering into the kingdom of 
God, Mt. xxi. 31 [οἵ. B. 204 (177)]. b. to proceed, 
go forward: in a bad sense, to go further than is right or 
proper, i.g. μὴ μένειν ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, to transgress the limits 
of true doctrine [cf. our colloq. ‘ advanced’ (views, etc.) 
in a disparaging sense], 2Jn. 9 L T Tr WH [but R. V. 
mrg. taketh the lead].* 

προ-αιρέω, -ὦ : by prose writ. fr. Hdt. [rather, fr. Thue. 
8, 90 fin. (in poetry, fr. Arstph. Thesm. 419)] down, to 
bring forward, bring forth from one’s stores; Mid. to bring 
forth for one’s self, to choose for one’s self before another 
i. e. to prefer; to purpose : καθὼς προαιρεῖται (LT Tr WH 
the pf. προήρηται) τῇ καρδίᾳ, 2 Co. ix. 7." 

προ-αιτιάομαι, -Gpat: 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. προῃτιασάμεθα:; 
to bring a charge against previously (i. e.in what has pre- 
viously been said): τινά foll. by an infin. indicating the 
charge, Ro. iii. 9; where the prefix mpo- makes refer- 
ence to i. 18-31; ii. 1-5, 17-29. Not found elsewhere.* 

προακούω: 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. προηκούσατε; fo hear 


537 


πρόβατον 


before: τὴν ἐλπίδα, the hoped for salvation, before its 
realization, Col. i. 5 [where ef. Bp. Lghtft.]. (Hdt., Xen., 
Plat., Dem., al.) * 

προ-αμαρτάνω: pf. ptep. προημαρτηκώς ; to sin before: 
οἱ προημαρτηκότες, of those who before receiving baptism 
had been guilty of the vices especially common among 
the Gentiles, 2 Co. xii. 21; xiii. 2; in this same sense also 
in Justin Martyr, apol. i. c. 61; Clem. Al. strom. 4, 12; 
ef. Liicke, Conjectanea Exeget. I. (Gotting. 1837) p. 14 
544. [but on the ref. of the προ- see Meyer on 2 Co. ll. ce. 
(R. V. heretofore)]. (Hdian. 3, 14, 18 [14 ed. Bekk.]; 
eccl. writ.) * 

mpo-avAtoy, -ov, τό, (πρό and αὐλή), fore-court, porch: 
Mk. xiv. 68 [(ef. Pollux 1, 8, 77 and see αὐλή, 2) ].* 

προ-βαίνω : pf. ptcep. προβεβηκώς ; 2 aor. ptep. mpoBas ; 
fr. Hom. down; to go forwards, go on, (cf. πρό, d. α.}: 
prop. on foot, Mt. iv. 21; Mk.i.19; trop. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις 
προβεβηκώς, advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36, (see 
ἡμέρα, fin. ; τὴν ἡλικίαν, 2 Mace. iv. 40; vi. 18; Hdian. 2, 
7, 7 [5 ed. Bekk.]; τῇ ἡλικίᾳ, Lys. p. 169, 37; [Diod. 12, 
18]; ταῖς ἡλικίαις, Diod. 13, 89; [οἵ. L.andS.s. v. ΤΠ 

προ-βάλλω ; 2 aor. προέβαλον ; fr. Hom. down; to throw 
forward [cf. πρό, d. a.]; of trees, to shoot forth, put out, 
se. leaves; to germinate, [cf. B. § 130, 4; W. 593 (552)] 
(with καρπόν added, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 19; Epict. 1, 15, 
7): Lk. xxi. 30; to push forward, thrust forward, put 
forward: twa, Acts xix. 33.* 

προβατικός, -7, -dv, (mpdBarov), pertaining to sheep: ἣ 
προβατική, Sc. πύλη (which is added in Neh. iii. 1,32; xii. 
39, for [83D yw), the sheep-gate, Jn. v. 2 [(W. 592 
(551) ; B. §123, 8); but some (as Meyer, Weiss, Milligan 
and Moulton, ef. Treg. mrg. and see Tdf.’s note ad loc.) 
would connect προβ. with the immediately following 
κολυμβήθρα (pointed as a dat.) ; see Tdf.u. s.; WH. App. 
ad loc. On the supposed locality see B. D.s. v. Sheep 
Gate (Sheep-Market) ].* 

προβάτιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of the foll. word), a little 
sheep: Jn. xxi. [16 T Tr mrg. WH txt.], 17 T Tr WH 
txt. (Hippocr., Arstph., Plat.) * 

arp6-Barov, -ου, τό, (fr. προβαίνω, prop. ‘that which walks 
forward’), fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for Τὴν, then for 
nv, sometimes for w33 and wd (a lamb), prop. any 
four-footed, tame animal accustomed to graze, small cattle 
(opp. to large cattle, horses, etc.), most com. a sheep or 
a goat; but esp. a sheep, and so always in the N. T.: Mt. 
vii. 15; x. 163 xii. 11 sq.; Mk. vi. 34; Lk. xv. 4, 6; Jn. ik 
14 sq.; x. 1-4, 11 sq.; Acts viii. 32 (fr. Is. lili. 7); 1 Pet. 
ii. 25; Rev. xviii. 13; πρόβατα σφαγῆς, sheep destined 
for the slaughter, Ro. viii. 36. metaph. πρόβατα, sheep, 
is used of the followers of any master: Mt. xxvi. 31 and 
Mk. xiv. 27, (fr. Zech. xiii. 7); of mankind, who as need- 
ing salvation obey the injunctions of him who provides 
it and leads them to it; so of the followers of Christ: 
Jn. x. 7sq. 15 sq. 26 sq.; xxi. 16[RGLTrtxt. WHnaorz.], 
17 [RGL WHmrg.]; Heb. xiii. 20; τὰ πρόβατα ἀπο- 
λωλότα (see ἀπόλλυμι, fin.), Mt. x. 6; xv. 24; τὰ πρόβ. 
in distinction from ra ἐρίφια, are good men as distin: 
guished fr. bad, Mt. xxv. 33. 


5 


προβιβάζξω 

προ-βιβάζω: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. προεβίβασαν ; 1 aor. 
pass. ptep. fem. προβιβασθεῖσα ; 1. prop. to cause to 
go forward, to lead forward, to bring forward, drag for- 
ward: Acts xix. 33 RG[(fr. Soph. down) ]. 2. 
metaph. i. 4. προτρέπω, to incite, instigate, urge forward, 
set on; to induce by persuasion: Mt. xiv. 8 (εἴς τι, Xen. 
mem. 1,5,1; Plat. Prot. p. 328 b.; [in Deut. vi. 7 Sept. 
with an aceus. of the thing (and of the pers.) i. q. to 
teach]).* 

προ-βλέπω : to foresee (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 13; Dion. 
118]. antt. 11, 20); 1 aor. mid. ptep. eee es ae to 
provide : τὶ περί τινος; Heb. xi. 40 [W. ὃ 985.0Ὁ. eos: 
(167)].* 

προ-γίνομαι: pf. ptep. mpoyeyovas ; to become or arise 
before, happen before, (so fr. Hdt. down [in Hom. (Il. 18, 
525) to come forward into view]): προγεγονότα ἁμαρτή- 
para, sins previously committed, Ro. iii. 25.* 

προ-γινώσκω; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. προέγνω ; pf. pass. 
ptep. προεγνωσμένος ; to have knowledge of beforehand ; 
0 foreknow : se. ταῦτα, 2 Pet. iii. 17, cf. 14, 16; τινά, Acts 
xXxvi. 55 ots προέγνω, whom he (God) foreknew, sc. that 
they would love him, or (with reference to what follows) 
whom he foreknew to be fit to be conformed to the like- 
ness of his Son, Ro. viii. 29 (τῶν εἰς αὐτὸν [Χριστὸν] 
πιστεύειν προεγνωσμένων, Justin M. dial. c. Tr. c. 42; 
προγινώσκει [ὁ θεός] τινας ἐκ μετανοίας σωθήσεσθαι μέλ- 
λοντας, id. apol. i. 28); ὃν προέγνω, whose character he 
clearly saw beforehand, Ro. xi. [1 Lehm. in br.], 2, 
(against those who in the preceding passages fr. Ro. 
explain προγινώσκειν as meaning to predestinate, cf. 
Meyer, Philippi, Van Hengel); προεγνωσμένου, sc. ὑπὸ 
tov θεοῦ (foreknown by God, although not yet ‘made 
manifest’ to men), 1 Pet. i. 20. (Sap. vi. 14; viii. 8; 
xviii. 6; Eur., Xen., Plat., Hdian., Philostr., al.) * 

πρό-γνωσις, -ews, 71, (Tpoywacka) ; 1. foreknowl- 
edge: Judith ix. 6; xi. 19, (Plut., Leian., Hdian.). 2. 
forethought, pre-arrangement, (see mpoBdérw) : 1 Pet. i. 2; 
Acts ii. 23, [but ef. προγινώσκω, and see Mey.on Acts l.c.].* 

πρό-γονος, -ov, ὁ, (προγίνομαι), born before, older: Hom. 
Od. 9, 221; plur. ancestors, Lat. majores, (often so by 
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down) : ἀπὸ προγόνων, in the spirit 
and after the manner received from (my) forefathers 
(ef. ἀπό, 11. 2 ἃ. aa. p. 59" bot.], 2 Tim. i.3; used of a 
mother, grandparents, and (if such survive) great-crand- 
parents, 1 Tim. ν. 4 [A. V. parents] (of surviving ances- 
tors also in Plato, lere. 11 p. 932 init.).* 

προ-γράφω: 1 aor. προέγραψα; 2 aor. pass. mpoeypadny ; 
pf. pass. ptep. προγεγραμμένος ; 1. to write before 
(of time): Ro. xv. 4" R G Ltxt. T Tr WH, 4° Ree. ; Eph. 
iii. 35 of πάλαι προγεγραμμ. εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα, of old set 
forth or designated beforehand (in the Scriptures of the 
O. T. and the prophecies of Enoch) unto this condemna- 
tion, Jude 4. 2. to depict or portray openly [cf. πρό, 
ἃ. α.1: οἷς κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοὺς ᾿Ιησοῦς Χριστὸς προεγράφη ἐν 
ὑμῖν [but ἐν ὑμ. is dropped by ΟἿ, T Tr WH] ἐσταυρωμέ- 
vos, before whose eyes was portrayed the picture of Jesus 
Christ crucified (the attentive contemplation of which 
picture ought to have been a preventive against that 


38 Tpoevapyopar 
bewitchment), i.e. who were taught most definitely and 
plainly concerning the meritorious eflicacy of the death 
of Christ, Gal. iii. 1. Since the simple γράφειν is often 
used of painters, and προγράφειν certainly signifies 
also to write before the eyes of all who can read (Plut. 
Demetr. 46 fin. προγράφει τις αὐτοῦ mpd τῆς σκηνῆς τὴν 
τοῦ Οἰδίποδος ἀρχήν), 1 see no reason why προγράφειν 
may not mean to depict (paint, portray) before the eyes; 
[R. V. openly set forth]. Cf. Hofmann ad loc. [ Farrar, 
St. Paul, ch. xxiv., vol. i. 470 note; al. adhere to the 
meaning to placard, write up publicly, see Bp. Lghtft. ad 
loc. ; al. al.; see Meyer]." 

πρό-δηλος, -ov, (πρό [d. a. and] δῆλος), openly evident, 
known to all, manifest: 1 Tim. v. 24 sq.; neut. foll. by ὅτι, 
Heb. vii. 14. [(From Soph. and Hat. down.)]* 

προ-δίδωμι : 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. προέδωκεν; 1. to 
give before, give first: Ro. xi. 35 (Xen., Polyb., Aris- 
tot.) 2. to betray: Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Plat., al. ; 
τὴν πατρίδα, 4 Mace. iv. 1.* 

προ-δότης, -ov, ὁ, (προδίδωμι, 2), ¢ a betrayer, traitor: Lk. 
vi. 16; Acts vii. 52; 2 Tim.iii.4. (From[Aeschyl.], Hdt. 
down; 2 Mace. ν. 15; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) * 

πρό-δρομος, -ου, 6, 7), (προτρέχω. mpodpapeiv), a forerun- 
ner (esp. one who is sent before to take observations or 
act as spy, a scout, a light-armed soldier; Aeschyl., Hadt., 
Thuc., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.; ef. Sap. xii. 8); one who 
comes in advance to a place whither the rest are to follow: 
Heb. vi. 20." 

προ-εῖδον, [fr. Hom. down], 2 aor. of the verb προοράω, 
to foresee: Acts ii. 31 [(here WH προιδών without diaer- 
esis; cf. I, ε fin.)]; Gal. iii. 8.* 

mpo-etrov [2 aor. act. fr. an unused pres. (see εἶπον, 
init.) ], 1 pers. plur. προείπομεν (1 Th. iv. 6 Grsb.), mpo- 
εἰπαμεν (ibid. RLT Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 1647); 
pf. προείρηκα; pf. pass. προείρημαι (see εἶπον, p. 181* top) ; 
fr. Hom. [(by tmesis) ; Hdt. and Plat.] down; to say be- 
fore; i.e. a. to say in what precedes, to say above: 
foll. by ὅτι, 2 Co. vii. 3; foll. by direct dise., [Heb. iv. 7 
LT Tr WH txt.]; x. 15 [Rec.]. b. to say before 
i.e. heretofore, formerly: foll. by ὅτι, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal. 
y. 21; foll. by direct dise., Gal. i. 9; [Heb. iv. 7 WH 
mrg.]; καθὼς προείπαμεν ὑμῖν, 1 Th. iv.6; [in the pas- 
sages under this head (exe. Gal. i. 9) some would give 
mpo- the sense of openly, plainly, (cf. R. V. mrg.)]. Ὁ: 
to say beforehand i.e. before the event; so used in ref. to 
prophecies: τί, Acts i. 16; τὰ ῥήματα τὰ προειρημένα ὑπό 
twos, Jude 17; 2 Pet. iii. 2; προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα, 
xiii. 23; sc. αὐτό, Mt. xxiv. 25; foll. by direct discourse, 
Ro. ix. 29.* 

προ-είρηκα, 566 προεῖπον. 

προ-ελπίζω : pf. ptep. ace. plur. προηλπικότας ; to hope 
before: ἔν τινι, to repose hope in a person or thing before 
the event confirms it, Eph.i.12. (Posidipp. ap. Athen. 
9 p. 377 ο.. Dexipp., Greg. Nyss.) * 

προ-εν-άρχομαι : 1 aor. προενηρξάμην; to make a begin- 
ning before: 2 Co. viii. 6; ri, ib. 10 [here al. render ‘to 
make a beginning before others? ‘to be the first to make a 
beginning,’ (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere." 


προεπαγγέλλω 


προ-επ-αγγέλλω : 1 aor. mid. προεπηγγειλάμην ; pf. ptep. 
προεπηγγελμένος ; to announce before (Dio Cass.); mid. 
to promise before: ri, Ro. i. 2,and LT Tr WH in 2 Co. ix. 
5, (Arr. 6, 27, 1]; Dio Cass. 42, 32; 46, 40).* 

προτέρχομαι : impf. προηρχόμην ; fut. προελεύσομαι ; 2 
aor. προῆλθον; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to go forward, go 
on: μικρόν, a little, Mt. xxvi. 39 [here T Tr WH mrg. 
προσελθών (q- ν. ina.) ]; Mk. xiv. 35 [Tr WH mrg. προσ- 
ελθ.}; w.an ace. of the way, Acts xii. 10 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 
18; Plato, rep. 1 p. 328 e.; 10 p. 616 b.). 2. to go 
before; i.e. a. to go before, precede, (locally; Germ. 
vorangehen): ἐνώπιόν twos, Lk. i. 17 [(ἔμπροσθέν τινος, 
Gen. xxxiii. 3), WH mrg. mpocepy. q. ν- in a.]; τινός, to 
precede one, Lk. xxii. 47 Ree. [(Judith ii. 19)]; τινά, 
ibid. G L T Tr WH (not soconstrued in prof. writ.; ef. B. 
144 (126); Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 70; [W. § 52, 
4, 13]; but in Lat. we find antecedere, anteire, praeire, 
aliquem, and in Grk. writ. προθεῖν twa; see προηγέομαι) ; 
to oulgo, outstrip, (Lat. praecurrere, antevertere aliquem ; 
for which the Greeks say φθάνειν twa), Mk. vi. 33. Ὁ. 
to go before, i.e. (set out) in advance of another (Germ. 
vorausgehen): Acts xx. 5 [Tr WH txt. προσελθ.] ; εἰς 
[L Tr πρὸς] ὑμᾶς, unto (as far as to) you, 2 Co. ix. 5; ἐπὶ 
τὸ πλοῖον, to the ship, Acts xx. 13 [Tr WH mrg. mpoo- 
ελθόντες ].* 

προ-ετοιμάζω: 1 aor. προητοίμασα ; to prepare before, to 
make ready beforehand : ἃ προητοίμασεν eis δόξαν, i.e. for 
whom he appointed glory beforehand (i.e. from eter- 
nity), and accordingly rendered them fit to receive it, 
Ro. ix. 23; to prepare beforehand in mind and purpose, 
i. e. to decree, Eph. ii. 10, where ois stands by attraction 
for ἅ [cf. W. 149 (141); B. § 143, 8]. (Is. xxviii. 24; 
Sap. ix. 8; Hdt., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Geop., al.) * 

προ-ευαγγελίζομαι : 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. προευηγγελίσατο; 
to announce or promise glad tidings beforehand (viz. be- 
fore the event by which the promise is made good) : Gal. 
iii. 8. (Philo de opif. mund. §9; mutat. nom. § 29; By- 
zant. writ.) * 

προέχω [(fr. Hom. down)]: pres. mid. 1 pers. plur. προ- 
ἐχόμεθα; to have before or in advance of another, to have 
pre-eminence over another, to excel, to surpass; often so 
in prof. auth. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down; mid. to excel to 
one’s advantage (cf. Kiihner § 375, 1); to surpass in ex- 
cellences which can be passed to one’s credit: Ro. iii. 9; 
it does not make against this force of the middle in the 
present passage that the use is nowhere else met with, 
nor is there any objection to an interpretation which has 
commended itself to a great many and which the con- 
text plainly demands. [But on this difficult word see 
esp. Jas. Morison, Crit. Expos. of the Third Chap. of 
Rom. p. 93 sqq-; Gifford in the ‘Speaker’s Com.’ p. 96; 
W.§38, 6; § 39 fin., cf. p. 554 (516).]* 

προ-ηγέομαι, -odpar; to go hefore and show the way, to 
go before and lead, to go before as leader, (Hat. 2, 48; 
often in Xen.; besides in Arstph., Polyb., Plut., Sept., 
al.): τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι, one going before 
another as an example of deference [ A. V. in honor pre- 
ferring one another (on the dat. cf. W. § 31, 6 a.)], Ro. 


539 


προΐστημι 


xii. 10. The Grk. writ. connect this verb now with the 
dat. (Arstph. Plut. 1195; Polyb. 6, 53, 8; ete.), now with 
the gen. (Diod. 1, 87); see προέρχομαι. 2 ἃ." 

πρότθεσις, -ews, 7), (προτίθημι) ; 1. the setting forth 
of a thing, placing of it in view, (Plat., Dem., Plut.) ; of 
ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως (Vulg. panes propositionis), the show- 
bread, Sept. for 01397 ON? (Ex. xxxv. 13; xxxix. 18 
(xxxviii. 36); 1 K. vii. 48 (34)), and noaypn on? (1 
Chr. ix. 32; xxiii. 29); twelve loaves of wheaten bread, 
corresponding to the number of the tribes of Israel, 
which loaves were offered to God every Sabbath, and, 
separated into two rows, lay for seven days upon a 
table placed in the sanctuary or anterior portion of 
the tabernacle, and afterwards of the temple (οἴ. Winer, 
RWB. s. v. Schaubrode; Roskoff in Schenkel v. p. 213 
sq-; [Edersheim, The Temple, ch. ix. p. 152 sqq.; BB. 
DD.]): Mt. xii.4; Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4, (οἱ ἄρτοι τοῦ προσ- 
ὦπου, sc. θεοῦ, Neh. x. 33; ἄρτοι ἐνώπιοι, Ex. xxv. 29); 
ἡ πρόθεσις τῶν ἄρτων, (the rite of) the setting forth of 
the loaves, Heb. ix. 2. 2. a purpose (2 Macc. iii. 8; 
[Aristot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut.): Acts xxvii. 13; Ro. viii. 
28; ix. 11; Eph.i. 11; iii. 11; 2 Tim. i. 9; iii. 10; τῇ 
προθέσει τῆς καρδίας, with purpose of heart, Acts xi. 
23* 

προ-θέσμιος, -a, -ov, (mpo[q.v.in ἃ. B.] and θεσμός fixed, 
appointed), set beforehand, appointed or determined be- 


forehand, pre-arranged, (Leian. Nigr. 27); ἡ προθεσμία, 


sc. ἡμέρα, the day previously appointed; univ. the pre-ap- 
pointed time: Gal. iv. 2. (Lys., Plat., Dem., Aeschin., 
Diod., Philo—ef. Siegfried, Philo p. 113, Joseph., Plut., 
al.; eccles. writ.; ef. Kypke and Hilgenfeld on Gal. 
ese 

προθυμία, -as, ἡ, (πρόθυμος), fr. Hom. down; 1. 
zeal, spirit, eagerness ; 2. inclination; readiness of 
mind: so Acts xvii. 11; 2 Co. viii. 11 sq. 19; ix. 2.* 

πρόθυμος, -ov, (πρό and θυμός), fr. [Soph. and] Hat. 
down, ready, willing: Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 88; neut. τὸ 
πρόθυμον, i. q. ἡ προθυμία : Ro. i. 15, as in Thue. 3, 82; 
Plat. lege. 9 p. 859b.; Eur. Med. vs. 178; Joseph. antt. 
4, 8,13; Hdian. 8, 3, 15 [6 ed. Bekk.] (on which cf. 
Irmisch) ; 3 Mace. ν. 26." 

προθύμως, ady., fr. Hdt. and Aeschyl. down, willingly, 
with alacrity: 1 Pet. v. 2.* 

πρόϊμος, See mpwipos. 

apo-tornpt: 2 aor. inf. προστῆναι; pf. ptep. προεστώς; 
pres. mid. προΐσταμαι; fr. Hom. Il. 4,156 down; ale 
in the trans. tenses to set or place before; to set over. ὩΣ 
in the pf. plpf. and 2 aor. act. and in the pres. and impf. 
mid. a. to be over, to superintend, preside over, [A.V. 
rule], (so fr. Hdt. down): 1 Tim. v. 17; with a gen. of 
the pers. or thing over which one presides, 1 Th. v. 12; 
1 Tim. iii. 4 sq. 12. b. to be a protector or guar- 
dian; to give aid, (Eur., Dem., Aeschin., Polyb.) : Ro. 
xii. 8 [(al. with A.V. to rule; cf. Fritzsche ad loc.; Stuart, 
Com. excurs. xii.) ]. c. to care for, give attention to. 
w. a gen. of the thing, καλῶν ἔργων, Tit. iii. 8, 14; for 
exx. fr. prof. writ. see Kypke and Losner; [some (ef. R.V. 
mrg.) would render these two exx. profess honest occu 


προκαλέω 


pations (see ἔργον, 1); but ef. ἔργον, 3 p. 2485 mid. and 
Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad 1. ¢.].* 

προ-καλέω, -@: pres. mid. ptep. προκαλούμενος ; to call 
forth [cf. πρό, ἃ. a.]; Mid. to call forth to one’s self, esp. 
to challenge to a combat or contest with one; often so fr. 
Hom. down; hence to provoke, to irritate: Gal. v. 26 [ («és 
ὠμότητα x. ὀργήν, Hdian. 7, 1, 11, 4 ed. Bekk.)].* 

προ-κατ-αγγέλλω : 1 aor. προκατήγγειλα; pf. pass. ptep. 
προκατηγγελμένος ; to announce befirehand (that a thing 
will be): of prophecies, — foll. by an ace. with inf. Acts 
iii. 18; τί, Acts iii. 24 Rec.; περί τινος, Acts vii. 52. To 
pre-announce in the sense of 10 promise: ri, pass. 2 Co. ix. 
5 Ree. (Joseph. antt. 1, 12, 3; 2, 9,4; eccles. writ.) * 

προ-κατ-αρτίζω : 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. plur. mpoxarap- 
τίσωσι; to prepare [A. V. make up] beforehand: τί, 2 Co. 
ix. 5. (Hippoer.; eccles. writ.) * 

πρό-κειμαι ; (πρό [q. v.d.a.] and κεῖμαι) ; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. prop. to lie or be placed before (a person 
or thing), or in front (often so in Grk. writ.). 2. 
to be set before, i. 6. a. to be placed before the eyes, 
to lie in sight; to stand forth: with a pred. nom., δεῖγμα, 
as an example, Jude 7 (καλὸν ὑπόδειγμά σοι πρόκειται, Jo- 
seph. b. j. 6, 2, 1). Ὁ. i. q. to be appointed, destined: 
προκειμένη ἐλπίς, the hope open to us, offered, given, Heb. 
vi. 18; used of those things which by any appointment 
are destined to be done, borne, or attained by any one; 
SO προκείμενος ἀγών, Heb. xii. 1; προκειμ. χαρά, the des- 
tined joy (see ἀντί, 2 b.), ibid. 2 (the phrase τὰ ἄθλα προ- 
κεῖσθαι occurs often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. down; cf. 
Bleek, Br. an die Heb. ii. 2 p. 268 sqq.). c. to be 
there, be present, be at hand, (so that it can become actual 
or available) : 2 Co. viii. 12." 

προ-κηρύσσω: 1 aor. ptep. προκηρύξας ; pf. pass. ptep. 
προκεκηρυγμένος ; 1. to announce or proclaim by 
herald beforehand (Xen. resp. Lac. 11, 2; Isae. p. 60, 2; 
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.). 2. univ. fo announce 
beforehand (of the herald himself, Soph. El. 684): Ἰη- 
σοῦν Χριστόν, i. 6. his advent, works, and sufferings, pass. 
Acts iii. 20 Ree.; ri, Acts xiii. 24 (Ἱερεμίας τὰ μέλλοντα 
τῇ πόλει δεινὰ προεκήρυξεν, Joseph. antt. 10, 5, 1).* 

προ-κοπή, -ῆἧς, ἡ, (προκόπτω, q. V-), progress, advance- 
ment: Phil. i. 12, 25; 1 Tim.iv.15. (Polyb., Diod., Jo- 
seph., Philo, al.; rejected by the Atticists, ef. Phrynich. 
ed. Lob. p. 85; [Sir. li. 17; 2 Mace. viii. 8].) * 

προ-κόπτω : impf. mpoexorrov; fut. προκόψω; 1 aor. 
προέκοψα; to beat forward ; 1. to lengthen out by 
hammering (as a smith forges metals) ; metaph. to promote, 
forward, further: Hdt., Eur., Thue., Xen., al. 2. 
fr. Polyb. on intransitively [cf. B. 145 (127); W. 251 
(236) ], to go forward, advance, proceed; of time: ἡ νὺξ 
mpoexower, the night is advanced [ A. V. is far spent], (day 
is at hand), Ro. xiii. 12 (Joseph. b. j. 4, 4, 6; [προκο- 
mrovons τῆς ὥρας] Charit. 2, 3,3 [p. 38,1 ed. Reiske; τὰ 
τῆς νυκτός, ib. 2,3, 4]; ἡ ἡμέρα προκόπτει. Just. Mart. 
dial. c. Tryph. p. 277 d.; Lat. procedere is used in the 
same way, Livy 28,15; Sallust. Jug. 21, 52,109). met- 
aph. to increase, make progress: with a dat. of the thing 
in which one grows, Lk. ii. 52 [not Tdf.] (Diod. 11, 87) ; 


540 


προοράω 


ev with a dat. of the thing, ibid. Tdf.; Gal. i. 14, (Diod. 
[excerpt. de virt. et vitiis] p. 554, 69; Antonin. 1, 17); 
ἐπὶ πλεῖον, further, 2 Tim. iii. 9 (Diod. 14, 98) ; ἐπὶ πλεῖον 
ἀσεβείας, 2 Tim. ii. 16; ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον, will grow worse, 
i. e. will make progress in wickedness, 2 Tim. iii. 13 
(τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων πάθη προύκοπτε καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἐπὶ τὸ 
χεῖρον, Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 1).” 

πρό-κριμα, -ros, τό, (πρό and κρίμα), an opinion formed 
before the facts are known, a pre-judgment, a prejudice, 
(Vulg. praejudicium): 1 Tim. v. 21 (anonym. in Suidas 
s.v.; [Athan. apol. c. Arian. 25 (i. 288 a. ed. Migne); 
Justinian cod. 10, 11, 8, § €]).* 

προ-κυρόω, -@: pf. pass. ptep. προκεκυρωμένος ; to sanc- 
tion, ratify, or establish beforehand: Gal. iii. 17. ([Euseb. 
praep. evang. 10, 4 (ii. p. 70, 3 ed. Heinichen)]; Byzant. 
writ.) * 

προ-λαμβάνω; 2 aor. προέλαβον; 1 aor. pass. subjunc. 
3 pers. sing. προληφθῇ [-λημφθῃ LT Tr WH; sees. v. 
M, »]; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to take before: ri, 1 Co. 
xi. 21. 2. to anticipate, to forestall: προέλαβε pupi- 
σαι, she has anticipated the anointing, [hath anointed 
beforehand], Mk. xiv. 8; ef. Meyer ad loc.; W. § 54, 
4. 3. to take one by forestalling (him i.e. before he 
can flee or conceal his crime), i. e. surprise, detect, (Sap. 
xvii. 16) : τινὰ ἐν παραπτώματι, pass. Gal. vi. 1; cf. Winer, 
Ep. ad Gal. 1. ¢.* 

προ-λέγω ; impf. προέλεγον ; to say beforehand, to pre- 
dict, (so fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down) : 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal. 
ν. 21; 1 Th. iii. 4; [some (see R. V. mrg.) would give 
mpo- the sense of plainly in all these exx.; cf. L. and S. 
s. v. II. 2, and see πρό, ἃ. a. fin.].* 

προ-μαρτύρομαι ; 1. antetestor (in the old lexi- 
cons). 2. to testify beforehand, i.e. to make known 
by prediction: 1 Pet. i. 11; so also [Basil. Seleue. 32 a. 
(Migne vol. lxxxv.) and] by Theodorus Metochita (ce. 75, 
mise. p. 504) —a writ. of the fourteenth century.” 

προ-μελετάω, -@; to meditate beforehand: Lk. xxi. 14 
(Arstph., Xen., Plato).* 

προ-μεριμνάω ; fo be anxious beforehand: Mk. xiii. 11 
(Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 9, 72; [Hippol. ref. haer. 6, 52, 
Ρ. 330, 69; 8, 15 p. 432, 3]).* 

προ-νοέω, -@; pres. mid. προνοοῦμαι; fr. Hom. down; 
1. to perceive before, foresee. 2. to provide, think 
of beforehand: τινός (see Matthiae ὃ 348, vol. ii. p. 821 
[but cf. $379 p. 862]; Kiihner § 419, 1 b. ii. p. 325; [Jelf 
§ 496]; W. § 30, 10 6.), to provide for one, 1 Tim. v. 8 
(where T Tr txt. WH mrg. προνοεῖται) ; περί twos, Sap. 
vi. 8. Mid. with an ace. of the thing, i. q. to take thought 


for, care for a thing: Ro. xii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 21 (where 


LT Tr WH have adopted mpovootpev).* 

πρόνοια, -as, 9, (mpdvoos), fr. [Aeschyl., Soph.], Hat. 
down, forethought, provident care: Acts xxiv. 2(3) [A.V. 
providence] ; ποιοῦμαι πρόνοιάν τινος, to make provision for 
a thing (see ποιέω, I. 3 p. 526" top), Ro. xiii. 14." 

προ-οράω, -@; pf. ptep. προεωρακώς ; impf. mid. (Acts 
ii. 25) προωρώμην, and without augm. (see ὁμοιόω, init.) 
προορώμην LT Tr WH; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to see~ 
before (whether as respects place or time): τινά, Acts 


προορίζω 


xxi. 29. 2. Mid. (rare use) to keep before one’s eyes: 
metaph. rid, with ἐνώπιόν pov added, to be mindful of 
one always, Acts ii. 25 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8.* 

προτορίζω: 1 aor. προώρισα; 1 aor. pass. ptep. mpoopt- 
whévres; to predetermine, decide beforehand, Vulg. [exe. 
in Acts] praedestino, [R. V. to foreordain]: in the N. Jt 
of God decreeing from eternity, foll. by an ace. with the 
inf. Acts iv. 28; ri, with the addition of πρὸ τῶν αἰώνων, 
1 Co. ii. 7; τινά, with a pred. 866.» to foreordain, appoint 
beforehand, Ro. viii. 29 sq. ; τινὰ εἴς τι, one to obtain a 
thing. Eph. i. 5; προορισθέντες sc. κληρωθῆναι, Eph. i. 11. 
(Heliod. and eccl. writ. [Ignat. ad Eph. tit.]) * 

προ-πάσχω 2 aor. ptep. προπαθόντες ; to suffer before : 
1 Th. ii. 2. (Hdt., Soph., Thuce., Plat., 1 

προ-πάτωρ, -opos, 6, (πατήρ), α forefather, founder of a 
family or nation: Ro. iv.1 LT Tr WH. (Pind., Hadt., 
Soph., Eur., Plat., Dio Cass. 44, 37; Leian., al.; Plut. 
consol. ad Apoll.c.10; Joseph. antt.4, 2,4; b.j.5, 9,4, 
Ey. Nicod. 21. 24. 25 sq.; eccl. writ.) * 

προ-πέμπω ; impf. προέπεμπον; 1 aor. act. προέπεμψα; 
1 aor. pass. προεπέμφθην; fr. Hom. down; 1. tosend 
before. 2. to send forward, bring on the way, ac- 
company or escort: τινά, 1 Co. xvi. 6, 11, [al. associate 
these exx. with the group at the close]; with ἐκεῖ (for 
ἐκεῖσε) added, Ro. xv. 24; eis with an acc. of place, Acts 
xx. 38; 2Co.i. 16 [here R. V. set forward (see below) ]; 
ἕως ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, Acts xxi. 5. to set one forward, fit 
him out with the requisites for his journey: Acts xv. 3 
[8]. associate this ex. with the preceding]; Tit. iii. 13; 
3 Jn. 6; 1 Mace. xii. 4, ef. 1 Esdr. iv. 47." 

προπετής, -ἐς, (πρό and πέτω 1. 6. πίπτω) ; 1. fall- 
ing forwards, headlong, sloping, precipitous: Pind. Nem. 
6,107; Xen. τ. eq. 1, 8; al. 2. precipitate, rash, 
reckless: Acts xix. 36; 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Prov. x. 14; xiii. 
3; Sir. ix. 18; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1,1; and often in Grk. 
writ.).” 

προ-πορεύω: 1 fut. mid. πρροπορεύσομαι: to send before, 
to make to precede, (Ael. nat. an. 10, 22 [var.]); mid. to 
go before, to precede, [see πρό, d.a.]: τινός (on which gen. 
see W. § 52, 3 6.), to go before one, of a leader, Acts vii. 
40; πρὸ προσώπου τινός (after the Hebr., Ex. xxxii. 34; 
Deut. iii. 18; ix. 3), of a messenger or a herald, Lk. i. 76; 
(of the van of an army, 1 Mace. ix. 11; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 
23; Polyb.). [Cf. ἔρχομαι, fin.]* 

πρός, a preposition, i.q. Epic mpori, from πρό and the 
adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German vor . . . hin [Curtius 
§ 381]); it is joined 

I. with the AccusaTIvE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denot- 
ing direction towards athing, or position and state 
looking towards a thing (W. § 49h. p. 404 (378)): it is 
used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a 
movement is directed: πρός twa or τι, a. prop. 
after verbs of going, departing, running, com- 
ing, ete.: ἄγω, Jn. xi. 15; ἀναβαίνω, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. xx. 
17; Acts xv. 2; ἀνακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xvili. 21; 
ἀνέρχομαι, Gal. i. 17 [1]. Tr mrg. arépy.]; ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. 
» xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc.; πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to his house, 
Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the ys.; Tr reads 


541 


πρός 


mp. αὐτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζων (see 2 Ὁ. 
below) ]; Jn. xx. 10 [Ὁ Tr αὐτούς, WH air. (cf. s. v. αὑτοῦ 
sub fin.)]; γίνεσθαι πρός τινα, to come to one, 1 Co. ii. 3; 
xvi. 10; διαπεράω, Lk. xvi. 26; ἐγγίζω, Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xix. 
29; εἰσέρχομαι, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 28; Acts χ. 8; [πρὸς τ. 
Λυδίαν, into the house of L. Acts xvi. 40 (Ree. eis)]; 
οἷς. ; Rev. 111. 20; εἰσπορεύομαι, Acts xxviii. 30; ἐκπορεύ- 
ona, Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5; ἐξέρχομαι, Jn. xviii. 29, 38; 2 Co. 
viii. 17; Heb. xiii. 13; ἐπιστρέφω, to turn (one’s self), 
Acts ix. 40; 2 Co. iii. 16; 1 Th.i. 9; ἐπισυνάγεσθαι, Mk. 
i. 33; ἔρχομαι, Mt. iii. 14; vii. 15, and often; ἥκω, Jn. vi. 
37; Acts xxviii. 23 [Rec.]; καταβαίνω, Acts x. 21; xiv. 
11; Rev. xii. 12; μεταβαίνω, Jn. xiii. 1; ὀρθρίζω, Lk. xxi. 
38; παραγίνομαι, Mt. iii. 13; Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19; xi. 
6; [xxii. 52 Tdf.]; πορεύομαι, Mt. x. 6; Lk. xi. 5; Jn. xiv. 
12, ete.; συνάγεσθαι, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1; vi. 
30; vii. 1; συντρέχειν, Acts iii. 11; ὑπάγω, Mt. xxvi. 18; 
Mk. v.19; Jn. vii. 33; xiii. 3; xvi. 5, 10,16 [T Tr WH 
om. L br. the el.], 17; κατευθύνειν τὴν ὁδόν, 1 Th. iii. 11; 
also after [kindred] nouns: εἴσοδος, 1 Th. i. 9; ii. 1; mpoo- 
aywyn, Eph. ii. 18. after verbs of moving, lead- 
ing, sending, drawing, bringing, directing: 
ἄγω, Mk. xi. 7[ RL]; Lk. xviii.40; Jn.i.42 (43); (xviii. 
13LT Tr WH]; Acts ix. 27, ete.; ἀπάγω, Mt. xxvi. 57 
ΓΕ. V. to the house of C. (cf. Acts xvi. 40 above) ]; Mk. 
xiv. 53; Jn. xviii. 13 [RG]; Acts xxiii. 17; 1 Co. xi. 
2; [ἐξάγω ἕως πρός (see ἕως, II. 2c.), Lk. xxiv. 50 L txt. 
T Tr WH); κατασύρω, Lk. xii. 58; ἅἁρπάζω, Rev. xii. 5; 
ἑλκύω, Jn. xii. 32; παραλαμβάνω, Jn. xiv.3; φέρω, Mk. i. 
32; ix. 17,19, 20; [xi.7TTrWH]; πέμπω, Lk. vii. 6 
[not T WH], 19; Acts xxv. 21[L T Tr WH ἀναπ.], ete. 
(see πέμπω) : ἀναπέμπω, Lk. xxiii. 7,15; ἀποστέλλω, Mt. 
xxiii. 34, etc. (see ἀποστέλλω, 1 Ὁ. and d.); στρέφομαι, 
LK. vii. 44; xxiii. 28. after verbs of falling: πίπτειν 
πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τινός, Mk. v. 22; vii. 25; [Acts v.10 LT 
Tr WH]: Rev. i.17. after other verbs and substan- 
tives with which the idea of direction is connected: as 
ἐπιστολὴ πρός τινα. Acts ix. 2; xxii. 5; 2Co. iii. 1; ἐντολη, 
Acts xvii. 15; ἀνάδειξις, Lk. i. 80; κάμπτω τὰ γόνατα, Eph. 
111. 14; ἐκπετάννυμι τὰς χεῖρας, Ro. x. 21 (fr. Is. Ixy. 2); 
πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον, face (turned) to face, i. 6. in 
immediate presence, 1 Co. xiii. 12 (after the Hebr., Gen. 
xxxii. 30; Judges vi. 22); στόμα πρὸς στόμα, mouth 
(turned) to mouth, i. e. in each other’s presence, 2 Jn. 
12; 3 Jn. 14, (see στόμα, 1) ; λαλεῖν πρὸς τὸ οὖς, the mouth 
being put to the ear, Lk. xii. 3. after verbs of adding, 
joining to: προστιθέναι τινὰ πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας, to lay 
one unto, i.e. bury him by the side of, his fathers, Acts 
xiii. 36 (after the Hebr., 2 K. xxii. 20; Judg. ii. 10); 
θάπτειν τινὰ πρός τινα, Acts v.10. after verbs of saying 
(because speech is directed towards some one), in vo k- 
ing, swearing, testifying, making known: w. 
an ace. of the pers., dvotyw τὸ στόμα, 2 Co. vi. 11; εἶπον, 
Lk.i. 13, and very often by Luke; Jn. ἵν. 48; νἱῖ. 3, ete. ; 
Heb. i. 13; λαλέω, Lk. i. 19, 55; ii. 18, ete.; 1 Th. 1i. 2; 
Heb. v. 5; xi. 18; λέγω, Lk. v. 36, ete.; Jn. ii. 3; iv. 15, 
etc.; Heb. vii. 21; φημί, Lk. xxii. 70; Acts ii. 38 [RG]; 
x. 28, etc.; διαλέγομαι, Acts xxiv. 12; ἀποκρίνομαι, Lk 


πρός 


iv. 4: Acts iii, 12; δέομαι, Acts viii. 24; βοάω, Lk. xviii. 
7({RGL]; αἴρειν φωνήν, Acts iv. 24; εὔχομαι, 2 Co. xiii. 
7; ὄμνυμι, Lk. i. 73; μαρτύς εἰμι, Acts xiii. 31; xxii. 15; 
Snunyopew, Acts xii. 21; κατηγορέω, to accuse to, bring, as 
it were, to the judge by accusation, Jn. v. 45; ἐμφανίζω, 
Acts xxiii. 22; γνωρίζεται, be made known unto, Phil. iv. 
6. also after [kindred] substantives [and phrases]: 
ἀπολογία, addressed unto one, Acts xxii. 1; λόγος, 2 Co. 
i. 18; λόγος παρακλήσεως, Acts ΧΙ. 15; ὁ λόγος γίνεται 
πρός τινα, Jn. x. 35 (Gen. xv. 1,4; Jer. i. 2, 115 xiii. 8; 
Ezek. vi. 1; Hos. i. 1); γίνεται φωνή, Acts vii. 31 Ree.; x. 
13, 15; γίνεται ἐπαγγελία, Acts xiii. 32 and Ree. in xxvi. 
6 [where 1, Τ Tr WH eis]; προσευχή, Ro. xv. 30; δέησις, 
Ro. x. 1; προσφέρειν δεήσεις, Heb. v. 7. πρὸς ἀλλήλους 
after ἀντιβάλλειν λόγους, Lk. xxiv. 17; διαλαλεῖν, Lk. vi. 
11; διαλέγεσθαι, Mk. ix. 34; διαλογίζεσθαι, Mk. viii. 16; 
εἰπεῖν, Lk. ii. 15 [((L mrg. T WH λαλεῖν) ]; xxiv. 32; Jn. 
xvi. 17; xix. 24; λέγειν, Mk. iv. 41; Lk. viii. 25; Jn. iv. 
33; Acts xxviii. 4; ὁμιλεῖν, Lk. xxiv. 14; συλλαλεῖν, Lk. 
iv. 36. πρὸς ἑαυτούς i. q. πρὸς ἀλλήλους : after συζητεῖν, 
Mk. i. 27 [Τ WH txt. read simply αὐτούς (as subj.)]; ix. 
16; Lk. xxii. 23; εἰπεῖν, Mk. xii. 7; Jn. xii. 19; λέγειν, Mk. 
xvi. 3; ἀγανακτεῖν, [R. V. had indignation among them- 
selves, saying], Mk. xiv. 4 T WH (ef. Tr) ; see 2 b. be- 
low. b. of a time drawing towards a given time 
[οἷ δ below]: πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν, towards evening, Lk. 
xxiv. 29 (Gen. viii. 11; Zech. xiv. 7; Plato de rep. 1 p. 
328a.; Joseph. antt. 5, 4, 3; πρὸς ἡμέραν, Xen. anab. 4, 
5, 21; Plato, conviv. p. 223 ec.) ; [πρὸς σάββατον, Mk. xv. 
42 L Tr txt.]. c. metaph. of mental direction, with 
words denoting desires and emotions of the mind, fo, 
towards: ἐνδεικνύειν πραὔτητα, Tit. iii. 2; μακροθυμεῖν, 1 
Th. v. 14; ἤπιος, 2 Tim. ii. 24; ἔχθρα, Lk. xxiii. 12; πεποί- 
Onow ἔχειν, 2 Co. iii. 4; [ἐλπίδα ἔχ. Acts xxiv. 15 Tdf.]; 
πίστις, 1 Th.i. 8; παρρησία, 2 Co. vii. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 21; v. 
14; with verbs signifying the mode of bearing one’s self 
towards a pers., ἐργάζεσθαι τὸ ἀγαθόν, Gal. vi. 10; ποιεῖν 
τὰ αὐτά, Eph. vi. 9 (Xen. mem. 1,1,6). of a hostile 
direction, against; so after ἀνταγωνίζεσθαι, Heb. xii. 4; 
στῆναι, Eph. vi. 11; λακτίζειν, Acts ix. 5 Rec.; xxvi. 14, 
(see κέντρον, 3); πάλη, Eph. vi. 12; μάχεσθαι, Jn. vi. 52; 
διακρίνομαι, Acts xi. 2; yoyyvopds, Acts vi. 1; βλασφημία, 
Rev. xiii. 6; πικραίνεσθαι, Col. iii. 19; ἔχειν τι, Acts xxiv. 
19; ἔχειν ζήτημα, χχν. 19; μομφήν, Col. iii. 13; πρᾶγμα, 
1 Co. vi. 1; λόγον (see λόγος, I. 6), Acts xix. 38; ἔχειν 
πρός twa, fo have something to bring against one [R. V. 
wherewith to answer), 2 Co. v.12; τὰ [which Tr txt. WH 
om.] πρός τινα, the things to be said against one, Acts 
xxiii. 30 [RG Tr WH; here may be added πρὸς πλη- 
σμονὴν σαρκός, against (i.e. to check) the indulgence of the 
flesh, Col. ii. 23 (see πλησμονήν]. ἃ. of the issue 
or end to which anything tends or leads: ἡ ἀσθένεια οὐκ 
ἔστι πρὸς θάνατον. Jn. xi. 4; ἁμαρτάνειν, ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνα- 
τον, 1 Jn. ν. 10 sq.; ἃ στρεβλοῦσι πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν 
ἀπώλειαν, 2 Pet. iii. 16; τὰ πρὸς τὴν εἰρήνην sc. ὄντα, -- 
now. the things which tend to the restoration of peace 
[4.V. conditions of peace], Lk. xiv. 32; now, which tend 
to the attainment of safety [A.V. which belong unto 


542 


πρός 


peace], Lk. xix. 42; τὰ πρὸς ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν, [A. V. 
that pertain unto], 2 Pet. i. 3; πρὸς δόξαν τῷ θεῷ, 2 Co. i. 
20; τοῦ κυρίου, 2 Co. viii. 19. e. of an intended 
end or purpose: πρὸς νουθεσίαν τινός, 1 Co. x. 11; 
as other exx. add, Mt. xxvi.12; Ro. iii. 26; xv. 2; 1Co. 
vi. 5; vil. 35; xii. 7; xiv. 12, 26; xv. 384; 2 Co. iv. 6; vii. 
8... χὶ: 85 phe ave 19.5. 1 Mama wlG-pekleb.wa. 11: sie 
18; πρὸς τί, to what end, for what intent, Jn. xiii. 28; 
πρὸς τὴν ἐλεημοσύνην, for the purpose of asking alms, 
Acts iii. 10; πρὸς τό with an inf. in order to, etc.: Mt. 
v. 28; vi. 1; xiii.30; xxiii.5; xxvi. 12; Mk. xiii. 22; 
2 Co. iii. 18; Eph. vi. 11; 1 Th. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8, also 
RG in Jas. iii. 3. f. of the time for whicha 
thing has been, as it were, appointed, i.e. during 
which it will last; where we use our for (Germ. /iir or 
auf) [ef. b. above}: πρὸς καιρόν (Lat. ad tempus, Cic. de 
off. 1,8, 27; de amicitia 15,53; Liv. 21, 25, 14), i.e. for 
a season, for a while, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; πρὸς 
καιρὸν ὥρας, [R. V. for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17; πρὸς 
ὥραν, for a short time, for an hour, Jn. v. 35; 2 Co. vii. 8; 
Gal. ii. 5; Philem. 15; πρὸς ὀλίγας ἡμέρας, Heb. xii. 10; 
πρὸς τὸ παρόν, for the present, ibid. 11 (Thue. 2, 22; 
Plato lege. 5 p. 736 a.; Joseph. antt. 6, 5,1; Hdian. 1, 
3, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; Dio Cass. 41, 15); πρὸς ὀλίγον, for 
alittle time, Jas.iv 14 (Leian. dial. deor.18,1; Aelian 
vy. ἢ. 12, 63). 2. it is used of close proximity 
—the idea of direction, though not entirely lost, being 
more or less weakened ; a. answering to our al or by 
(Germ. an); after verbs of fastening, adhering, 
moving (to): δεδέσθαι πρὸς τὴν θύραν. Mk. xi. 4; προσ- 
κολλᾶσθαι, Mk. x. 7 RG Tr (inmrg. br.); Eph.v. 31 RG 
WH txt. ; προσκόπτειν, Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11; κεῖσθαι, i. q. 
to be brought near to, Mt. iii. 10; Lk. iii. 9, [(ef. 2 Mace. 
iv. 33)]; τιθέναι, Acts iii. 2; [iv. 37 Tdf. (al. rapa) ]; add, 
βεβλῆσθαι, Lk. xvi. 20; τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν, the fore-court 
[see θύρα, a.], Mk. ii. 2; εἶναι πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν (prop. 
towards the sea [A. V. by the sea]), Mk. iv. 1; Oeppai- 
νεσθαι πρὸς τὸ φῶς, turned to the light [R. V. zm the light], 
Mk. xiv. 543 καθῆσθαι πρὸς τὸ φῶς, Lk. xxii. 56 ; εἱστήκει 
πρὸς τὸ μνημεῖον, Jn. xx. 11 Rec.; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. 
p- 201 sq. b. i. q. (Lat. apud) with, with the ace. of a 
person, after verbs of remaining, dwelling, tarry- 
ing, ete. (which require one to be conceived of as always 
turned towards one), ef. Fritzsche u.s.: after εἶναι, Mt. 
xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3; ix. 19; xiv.49; Lk. 1χ. 41 ; Jn.i. 1 sq.; 
1Jn.i. 2; 1 Th. iii. 4; 2 Th. ii.5; iii. 10; 
xii. 20; 2Co. xi. 9 (8); Gal.iv.18, 20; παρουσία, Phil. 

1.26; Scapeverv, Gal. ii. 5; παραμένειν, 1 Co. xvi.6; ἐπε- 

μένειν, ibid. 7; Gal.i.18; καθέζεσθαι, Mt. xxvi. 55 [RG 

LTr br.]; ἐνδημεῖν, 2 Co. ν. ὃ; κατέχειν τινὰ πρὸς ἑαυτόν, 

Philem. 13. πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, etc., (apud animum meum), 

with myself, ete., (2 Mace. xi. 13; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are 

given in Passow 8. v. I. 2 p. 1157"; [L. and S. s. v. C. 1. 5)), 

συλλογίζομαι, Lk. xx. 5; προσεύχομαι. Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf. 

om. πρὸς é., Grsb. connects it with orabeis]; ἀγανακτεῖν, 

Mk. xiv. 4 [(ef. 1a. fin.) ; θαυμάζειν, Lk. xxiv. 12 (ace. to 

some; see above, 1 a. ad init.) }. Further, ποιεῖν τι πρός ὦ 
τινα, Mt. xxvi. 18; ἔχω χάριν πρός τινα, Acts ii. 47; καύ- 


παρεῖναι, Acts 


προς 


χημα ἔχ. mp. t. to have whereof to glory with one (prop. 
turned ‘toward’ one), Ro. iv. 2; παράκλητον πρός τινα, 1 
Jn. ii. 1. 3. of relation or reference to any 
person or thing ; thus a. of fitness: joined to 
adjectives, ἀγαθός, Eph.iv.29; ἕτοιμος, Tit. iii. 1; 1 Pet. 
iii. 153 ixavds,2Co.ii.16; δυνατός, 23 Οο. χ. 4; ἐξηρτι- 
σμένος, 2 Tim. iii. 17; ὠφέλιμος, 1 Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim. 
iii. 16; ἀδόκιμος, Tit. i. 16; ἀνεύθετος, Acts xxvii. 12; 
λευκός, white and so ready for, Jn. iv. 35; τὰ πρὸς τὴν 
χρείαν sc. ἀνάγκαια, [R. V. such things as we needed], Acts 
xxviii. 10. b. of the relation or close connec- 
tion entered (or to be entered) into by one person 
with another: περιπατεῖν πρός (Germ. im Verkehr mit, 
[in intercourse with (A. V. toward)]; cf. Bnhdy. p. 265; 
Passow 8. v. I. 2 p. 1157"; [L. and 5. 5. ν. C. I.5]) τινα, 
Col. iv. 5; 1 Th. iv. 12; ἀναστρέφεσθαι, 2 Co. i. 12; of 
ethical relationship (where we use with), ἀσύμφωνος πρὸς 
ἀλλήλους, Acts xxviii. 25 ; κοινωνία, συμφώνησις πρός twa 
or τι, 2 Co. vi. 15 sq.; εἰρήνην ἔχειν [see εἰρήνη, 5], Ro. v. 
1; συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν θεόν, Acts xxiv. 16 ; διαθήκην 
ἐντέλλομαι πρός τινα, Heb. ix. 20 [see ἐντέλλω, fin.]; δια- 
θήκην διατίθημι, Acts iii. 25, (in Grk. writ. συνθήκας, σπον- 
das, συμμαχίαν ποιεῖσθαι πρός twa, and similar expres- 
sions ; cf. Passow [or L. and S.] u.s.); μὴ ταπεινώσῃ - -- 
πρὸς ὑμᾶς, in my relation to you [R. V. before], 2 Co. xii. 
21; πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν 6 λόγος (see λόγος, II. 5), Heb. iv. 13. 
Here belongs also 2 Co. iv. 2 [A. V. to every man’s con- 
science]. c. with regard to (any person or thing), 
with respect to, as to; after verbs of saying: πρός τινα, 
Mk. xii. 12; Lk. xii.41; xviii. 9; xix. 9; xx.19; Ro. x. 21; 
Heb. i. 7 sq.; πρὸς τὸ δεῖν προσεύχεσθαι, Lk. xviii. 1; ἐπι- 
τρέπειν, γράφειν τι πρός τι, Mt. xix.8; Mk. x. 5; ἀποκρι- 
θῆναί τι πρός τι, Mt. xxvii. 14 ; ἀνταποκριθῆναι, Lk. xiv. 6; 
τι ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα, Ro. viii. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 12; 
anab, 2, 1, 20). ἃ. pertaining to: τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 
(see θεός, 3y-), Ro. χν. 17; Heb. ii. 17; ν.1 ; τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς; 
sc. ἐστίν! what is that to us? i. 6. it is none of our busi- 
ness to care for that, Mt. xxvii. 4; also τί πρὸς σέ; Jn. 
xxi. 22, 23 [here Tdf. om.]. 6. in comparison (like 
Lat. ad) i. q. in comparison with: so after ἄξιος (q. Vv. 
in a.), Ro. viii. 18 (οὐ λογισθήσεται ἕτερος πρὸς αὐτόν, 
Bar. iii. 36 (35) ; ef. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666; [B. § 147, 
28]). f. agreeably to, according ta: πρὸς ἃ (i. 6. πρὸς 
ταῦτα ἃ) ἔπραξε, 2 Co. v. 10; ποιεῖν πρὸς τὸ θέλημά τινος, 
Lk. xii. 47; ὀρθοποδεῖν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Gal. ii. 14. 
Here belong Eph. iii. 4; iv. 14. g. akin to this is 
the use of πρός joined to nouns denoting desires, emo- 
tions, virtues, etc., to form a periphrasis of the adverbs 
[ef. W. § 51, 2h.]: πρὸς φθόνον, enviously, Jas. iv. 5 (fon 
this pass. see φθόνος] ; πρὸς ὀργήν i. q. ὀργίλως, Soph. El. 
369; πρὸς βίαν i.q. βιαίως, Aeschyl. [ Prom. 208, 353, ete. ] 
Eum. 5; al.; πρὸς ἡδονὴν καὶ πρὸς χάριν, pleasantly and 
graciously, Joseph. antt. 12, 10, 3; [other exx.in L. and 
S. s. v. C. III. 7). 

I. with the Dative, at, near, hard by, denoting close 
local proximity (W. 395 (369 sq.)); so six times in the 
N.T. (much more freq. in the Sept. and in the U.'T. 
Apoer.): Mk. v.11GLTTr WH [R. V. on the moun- 


643 


Tpocayw 


tain side]; Lk. xix. 37; Jn. xviii. 16 ; xx. 11 (where Rec. 
has πρὸς τὸ μν.), 12; Rev. i. 13. 

111. with the GeniTIve, a. prop. used of that 
from which something proceeds; b. (Lat. α parte 
i.e.) on the side of; hence tropically πρός τινος εἶναι or 
ὑπάρχειν, to pertain to one, lie in one’s interests, be to one’s 
advantage: so once in the N. T. τοῦτο πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας 
σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει, conduces to [ A. V. is for] your safety, 
Acts xxvii. 34. (Κροῖσος ἐλπίσας πρὸς ἑωυτοῦ τὸν χρη- 
σμὸν εἶναι, Hdt. 1,75; οὐ πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας δόξης, it will 
ποῦ redound to your credit, Thue. 8, 59; add, Plat. Gorg. 
p-459c¢.; Leian. dial. deor. 20, 3; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 30; 
Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 19, 6; ef. Viger. ed. Herm. p- 659 sq.; 
Matthiae p. 1385 sq.; [L. and S. 5. v. A. IV.]; W. 374 
(350).) 

IV. in ComposiTION τρός signifies 1. direction 
or motion to a goal: προσάγω, προσεγγίζω, προσέρχομαι, 
προστρέχω. 2. addition, accession, besides: προσ- 
avartOnut, προσαπειλέω, προσοφείλω. 3. vicinity: 
προσεδρεύω. προσμένω. 4. our on, at, as in’ προσ- 
κόπτω ; and then of things which adhere to or are fas 
tened fo others, as προσηλόω, προσπήγνυμι. 5. to or 
for, of a thing adjusted to some standard: πρόσκαιρος. 
Cf. Zeune ad Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666. 

προ-σάββατον, -ου, τό, the day befure the sabbath: Mk. 
xv.42R GT WH([LTr txt. πρὸς σάβ. (cf. πρός, I. 1 b.)]. 
(Judith viii. 6 ; [Ps. xcii. (xciii.) heading; Nonn. paraph. 
Toan. 19, 66; Euseb. de mart. Pal. 6, 1].)* 

προσ-αγορεύω: 1 aor. pass. ptep. προσαγορευθείς ; to 
speak to, to address, accost, salute, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Aris- 
tph., Xen., Plat., al.); esp. to address or accost by some 
name, call by name: τινά with a pred. acc., and in the pass. 
with a pred. nom. (1 Mace. xiv. 40; 2 Mace. xiv. 37), Heb. 
v.10. (to give a name to publicly, to style, τινά or τί with 
a pred. ace., Xen. mem. 3, 2, 1 ; Γάϊος Ἰούλιος Καῖσαρ ὁ διὰ 
tas πράξεις προσαγορευθεὶς θεός, Diod. 1, 4; add [Sap. 
xiv. 22]; 2 Mace. iv.7; x.9; xiv.37; @povpiov.. . Και- 
σάρειαν ὑπ᾿ αὐτοῦ προσαγορευθέν, Joseph. antt. 15, 8, 5.) 
Cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 97 sq.* 

Tpoc-dyw; 2 aor. προσήγαγον; 1 aor. pass. προσήχθην 
(Mt. xviii. 24 L Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
37P7, wn, sometimes for $727; 1. transitively, 
to lead to, bring, [see πρός, ΤΥ. 1]: twa ὧδε, Lk. ix. 41; 
τινά τινι, one to one [ef. W. § 52, 4, 14], Mt. xviii. 24 
LTr WH; Acts xvi. 20; to open a way of access, τινὰ 
τῷ θεῷ. for [A. V. to bring] one to God, i. e. to render 
one acceptable to God and assured of his grace (a fig. 
borrowed from those who secure for one the privilege of 
an interview with the sovereign), 1 Pet. iii. 18 [note- 
worthy is the use, without specification of the goal, in a 
forensic sense, to summon (to trial or punishment), Acts 
xii. 6 WH txt. (where al. προάγω, q. v. 1)]- 2. in- 
transitively (see ἄγω, 4), to draw near to, approach, (Josh. 
iii. 9; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 3, ete.) : τινί, Acts xxvii. 27 [(not 
WH mrg.)], where Luke speaks in nautical style phe- 
nomenally, the land which the sailor is approaching 
seeming to approach him; ef. Kuinoel [or Wetstein] ad 
loc.; [see προσανέχω 2, and mpocayéw].* 


προσαγωγή 


προσ-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ ; 1. the act of bringing to, a 
moving to, (Thue., Aristot., Polyb., al.). 2. access, 
approach, (Hat. 2,58; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 45) [al., as Meyer 
on Ro. as below (yet see Weiss in the 6th ed.), Ellic. on 
Eph., insist on the transitive sense, introduction]: eis 
τὴν χάριν, Ro. v. 2; to God, i.e. (dropping the figure) that 
friendly relation with God whereby we are acceptable to 
him and have assurance that he is favorably disposed 
towards us, Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12.* 

προσ-αιτέω,-ῶ ; 1. to ask for in addition [ (see πρός, 
IV. 2); Pind., Aeschyl., al.]. 2. to approach one 
with supplications, (Germ. anbetteln [to importune; cf. 
πρός, LV. 4]), to ask alms, ((Hdt.], Xen., Arstph., Eur., 
Plut., al.): Mk. x. 46 RGL; Lk. xviii. 35 (where LT 
Tr WH have ἐπαιτῶν) ; In. ix. 8.* 

προσαίτης, -ov, 6, a beggar: Mk. x. 46 T Tr WH; Jn. 
ix. 8 (where for the Rec. τυφλός). (Plut., Leian., Diog. 
Laért. 6, 56.) * 

προσ-ανα-βαίνω : 2 aor. impvy. 2 pers. sing. προσανάβηθι; 
to go up farther: with ἀνώτερον added, Lk. xiv. 10 [A. V. 
go up higher; al.regard the mpoo- as adding the sugges- 
tion of ‘motion to’ the place where the host stands: 
“come up higher’ (cf. Prov. xxv. 7). Xen., Aristot., al.]* 

προσ-αναλίσκω : 1 aor. ptep. fem. προσαναλώσασα; 
to expend besides [mpds, LV. 2]: ἰατροῖς (i. 6. upon physi- 
cians, B. § 133, 1; Rec. εἰς ἰατρούς [ef. W. 213 (200) ]) 
τὸν βίον, Lk. viii. 43 [WH om. Trmrg. br. the 6].1. (Xen., 
Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) * 

προσ-ανα-πληρόω, -@; 1 aor. προσανεπλήρωσα; to fill up 
by adding to (ef. πρός, LV. 2]; to supply: ri, 2 Co. ix. 12; 
xi.9. (Sap. xix. 4; Aristot., Diod., Philo, al.) * 

προσ-ανα-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. προσανεθέμην; ie 
to lay upon in addition [ef. πρός, IV. 31. 2. Mid- 
dle, a. to lay upon one’s self in addition: φόρτον, 
Poll. 1, 9, 99; to undertake besides: ri, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 
8. b. with a dat. of the pers. to put one’s self upon 
another by going to him (πρός), i. 6. to commit or betake 
one’s self to another se. for the purpose of consulting him, 
hence to consult, to take one into counsel, [A. V. confer 
with], (Diod. 17, 116 rots μάντεσι προσαναθέμενος περὶ τοῦ 
σημείου ; Leian. Jup. trag. 8.1 ἐμοὶ προσανάθου, λάβε pe 
σύμβουλον πόνων), Gal.i. 16. ο. to add from one’s store 
(this is the force of the middle), to communicate, impart: 
τί τινι, Gal. ii. 6.* 

προσ-αν-έχω ; 1. to hold up besides. 2. in- 
trans. fo rise up so as to approach, rise up towards: Acts 
xxvii. 27 Lchm. ed. ster. (see προσάγω 2, and προσαχέω), 
—a sense found nowhere else.* 

προσ-απειλέω, -@: 1 aor. mid. ptep. προσαπειλησάμενος ; 
to add threats, threaten further, (cf. πρός, IV. 2]: Acts 
iv. 21. (Dem. p. 544, 26.) * 

[προσ-αχέω, -, Doric for προσηχέω, to resound: Acts 
xxvii. 27 WH mrg. (see their App. p. 151; al. προσ- 
ἄγειν, ἡ. V-), of the roar of the surf as indicating nearness 
to land to sailors at night.*] 

προσ-δαπανάω, -@: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. sing. mpoo- 
δαπανητῃς, [0 spend besides [cf. πρός, LV. 2], Vulg. super- 
erogo: τι, Lk. x. 35. (Lceian., Themist.) * 


044 


προσεργάζομαι 


προσ-δέομαι ; depon. pass. fo want besides, need in addi- 
tion, (cf. πρός, LV. 2]: προσδεόμενός τινος, “quom nullius 
boni desideret accessionem” (Erasmus), [ A. V. as though 
he needed anything), Acts xvii. 25. (Xen., Plat., sqq.; 
Sept.; [in the sense to ask of, several times in Hat. ].)* 

προσ-δέχομαι ; depon. mid. ; impf. προσεδεχόμην ; 1 aor. 
προσεδεξάμην 5 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down, to receive to one’s self, to admit, to give access 
to one’s self: τινά, to admit one, receive into intercourse 
and companionship, τοὺς ἁμαρτωλούς, Lk. xv. 2; to re- 
ceive one (coming from some place), Ro. xvi. 2; Phil. ii. 
29, (1 Chr. xii. 18); τί, to accept (not to reject) a thing 
offered: οὐ προσδ. to reject, Heb. xi. 35; προσδέχονται 
ἐλπίδα, to admit (accept) hope, i. e. not to repudiate but 
to entertain, embrace, its substance, Acts xxiv. 15 [al. 
refer this to the next head (R. V. txt. look for)]; not to 
shun, to bear, an impending evil [A. V. took the spoiling 
etc.], Heb. x. 34. 2. as fr. Hom. down, to expect 
ΓΑ. V. look for, wait for]: τινά, Lk. xii. 36; τί, Mk. xv. 
43; Lk. ii. 25, 38; xxiii. 51; [Acts xxiii. 21]; Tit. ii. 13; 
Jude 21; τὰς ἐπαγγελίας, the fulfilment of the promises, 
Heb. xi. 13 Lehm. [Cf. δέχομαι, fin. ] * 

προσδοκάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. προσεδόκων (Acts 
xxviii. 6); (the simple verb is found only in the form 
δοκεύω; πρός [q. ν. LV. 1] denotes mental direction); fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to expect (whether in thought, 
in hope, or in fear); to look for, wait for: when the 
preceding context shews who or what is expected, Mt. 
xxiv. 50; Lk. iii. 15; xii. 46; Acts xxvii. 33; xxviii. 6; 
τινά, one’s coming or return, Mt. xi. 3; Lk. i. 21; vii. 19 
sq.; viii. 40; Acts x. 24; τί, 2 Pet. iii. 12-14; _ foll. by 
an ace. with infin. Acts xxviii. 6; [0]]. by an infin. be- 
longing to the subject, Acts ili. 5.* 

προσδοκία, -as, 7, (προσδοκάω). fr. Thue. and Xen. 
down, expectation (whether of good or of evil): joined 
to φόβος (Plut. Ant. 75; Demetr. 15) with a gen. of the 
object added [W. § 50, 7 b.], Lk. xxi. 26; τοῦ λαοῦ (gen. 
of subject), the expectation of the people respecting 
Peter’s execution, Acts xii. 11.* 

προσδρέμω, See προστρέχω. 

προσ-εάω, -ῶ ; to permit one to approach or arrive: Acts 
xxvii. 7 [R. V. txt. to suffer further; (cf. πρός, IV. 2; 
Smith, Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 3d ed., p. 78; 
Hackett ad loe.)]. Not found elsewhere.* 

προσ-εγγίζω : 1 aor. inf. προσεγγίσαι; to approach unto 
[πρός, IV. 1]: with the dat. of a pers. [ef. W. § 52, 4, 14], 
Mk. ii. 4 [where T Tr mrg. WH προσενέγκαι}. (Sept. ; 
Polyb., Diod., Leian.) * 

προσεδρεύω; (πρύσεδρος sitting near, [ef. πρός, IV. 
817); 1. prop. fo sit near [(Eur., al.)]. 2. to 
attend assiduously : τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ (see παρεδρεύω),1 Co. 
ix. 13 Rec.; Protev. Jac. 23, 1 (where we also find the var. 
παρεδρεύω) ; τῇ θεραπείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 7,15 
ταῖς φιλοπονίαις, Aristot. pol. 8,4, 4 p. 1338", 25; τοῖς mpay- 
μασι, Dem. p. 14, 15 [i. 6. Olynth. 1, 18]; with dat. of 
pers. to be in attendance upon, not to quit one’s side, Jo- 
seph. c. Ap. 1, 9, 1; [cf. Dem. 914, 28].* 

προσ-εργάζομαι: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. προσ ειρνάσατο 


προσέρχομαι 


(RG Tr), προσηργάσ. (LT WH; see ἐργάζομαι, init.) ; 
1. to work besides (Eur., Plut.). 2. by working or 
rading to make or gain besides: Lk. xix. 16 (Xen. Hell. 
3, 1, 28).* 

mpoo-€pxonat; impf. 3 pers. plur. προσήρχοντο (Acts 
xxviii. 9) ; [fut. 3 pers. sing. προσελεύσεται, Lk. i. 17 WH 
mrg.]; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. πρυσῆλθον and [so L Tr WH 
in Mt. ix. 28; xiii. 36; xiv. 15; T Tr WH in Mt. v. 1; 
Lk. xiii. 31 ; WH in Mt. xix. 3; xxi. 23; Jn. xii. 21] in 
the Alex. form προσῆλθαν (see ἀπέρχομαι, and ἔρχομαι) ; 
pf. προσελήλυθα (Heb. xii. 18, 22); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; Sept. for 19) and 0.2}; to come to, to approach, 
[πρός, IV. 1]; a. prop. absol., Mt. iv. 11; Lk. 
[1.17 WH mre.]; ix.42; xxiii. 36; Acts viii. 29; xxviii. 
9; προσῆλθον λέγοντες, Lk. xiii. 31; with rhetorical ful- 
ness of description (see dviornut, II. 1 6. [also ἔρχομαι, p. 
250° bot.]) the ptep. προσελθών is joined to a finite verb 
which denotes a different action: Mt. viii. 51, T Tr WH, 
19, 25; ix. 20; xiii. 10, 27; xiv. 12; xv. 12, 23; xvi. 1; 
xvii. 7 [RG]; xix. 16; xxv. 20, 22, 24; xxvi. 39 Tr 
WH mre. (ace. to a reading no doubt corrupt [ef. Scri- 
vener, Introd. p. 167), 50, 60, 73; xxviii. 2, 9,18; Mk. i. 
31; x. 2; xii. 28; [xiv. 35 Tr WH mrg.]; Lk. vii. 14; viii. 
24, 44; ix. 12,42; x. 34; xx. 27; xxiii. 36; Acts xxii. 26 
sq-; προσέρχομαι foll. by an infin. indicating the reason 
why one has drawn near, Mt. xxiv. 1; Acts vii. 31; xii. 
13 [here WH mre. προῆλθε]; with a dat. of the place 
(exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passows. v. 1 a. p. 1190"; 
[L. and S.s.v. I. 17}, Heb. xii. 18,22; with the dat. of 
a pers. (see Lexx. u.s.), Mt. v. 1; viii. 5; ix. 14, 28; xiii. 
36; xiv. 15; xv. 1,30; xvii. 14,24; xviii. 1; xix. 3; xx. 
20; xxi. 14,23; xxii. 23; xxiv. 3; xxvi. 7, 17, 69; Jn. 
xii. 21; Acts x. 28; xviii. 2; xxiv. 23 Rec.; [with ἐπί and 
the ace. Acts xx.13 Tr WH mrg.]. The ptep. mpoo- 
ἐλθὼν αὐτῷ with a finite verb (see above) occurs in Mt. 
iv. 8; xviii. 21; xxi. 28,30; xxvi.49; xxvii.58; Ak. vi. 
85; xiv. 45; Lk. xx. 27; xxiii. 52; Acts ix. 1: xxiii. 
14. b. trop. a. προσέρχ. τῷ θεῷ, to draw near to 
God in order to seek his grace and favor, Heb. vii. 25 ; 
xi. 6; τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος, Heb. iv. 16; without τῷ 
θεῷ, Heb. x. 1, 22, (in the O. T. mpocépy., simply, is used 
of the priests about to offer sacrifices, Lev. xxi. 17, 21; 
Deut. xxi. 5; with the addition of πρὸς θεόν, of one about 
to ask counsel of God, 1 S. xiv. 36; with τοῖς θεοῖς, of 
suppliants about to implore the gods, Dio Cass. 56, 9); 
πρὸς Χριστόν, to attach one’s self to Christ, to come to a 
participation in the benefits procured by him, 1 Pet. ii. 
4 [ef. W. § 52, 3]. B. i. q. to assent to (ef. Germ. 
beitreten [Lat. accedere; Eng. come (over) to, used fig.]) : 
ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις, 1 Tim. vi. 8 [Tdf. προσέχεται, α:- Vv. 3]. 

προσ-ευχή, -ῆς, 9, (προσεύχομαι), Sept. for ΤΙ 311, i. 4. 
εὐχὴ πρὸς τὸν θεόν [cf. πρός, IV. 1]; 1. prayer ad- 
dressed to God: Mt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; 
xxi. 22; Mk. ix. 29; Lk. xxii. 45; Acts iii.1; vi. 4; x. 
31; Ro. xii. 12; 1 Co. vii. 5; Col. iv. 2; plur., Acts ii. 
42; x.4; Ro.i. 10 (9); Eph.i.16; Col. iv.12; 1 Th. i. 
2; Philem. 4, 22; 1 Pet. iii. 7; iv. 7; Rev.v. 83 viii. 3,4 
(where rais mpocevyais is a dat. commodi, for, in aid of, 

35 


545 


προσεύχομαι 


the prayers [W. § 31, 6c.; cf. Green p. 101 sq.}); οἶκος 
προσευχῆς, a house devoted to the offering of prayer to 
God, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46, (Is. lvi.7; 1 
Mace. vii. 37); προσευχὴ καὶ δέησις, Acts 1. 14 Ree.; 
Eph. vi. 18; Phil. iv. 6, (1 K. viii. 38; 2 Chr. vi. 29; 1 
Mace. vii. 37; on the distinction between the two words 
see δέησις) ; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 1; v. 5; ἡ πρ. τοῦ θεοῦ, 
prayer to God, Lk. vi. 12 (εὐχαριστία θεοῦ, Sap. xvi. 28; 
ef. reff. in πίστις, 1 a.); πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ὑπέρ [L T Tr WH 
περί] τινος, Acts xii. 5; plur. Ro. xv. 30; προσευχῇ προσ- 
εύχεσθαι, a Hebraistic expression (cf. W. § 54, 3; [B. 
§ 133, 22 a.]), to pray fervently, Jas. v. 17. 2.a 
place set apart or suited for the offering of prayer; i.e. a. 
a synagogue (see συναγωγή, 2b.) : 3 Mace. vii. 20 [ace. to 
the reading προσευχήν ; see Grimm, Com. in loc.]; Philo 
in Flaccum § 6 [also$ 14]; leg. ad Gaium §§ 20, 43, 46 ; Ju- 
venal, sat. 1,3, 296; συνάγονται πάντες εἰς τὴν προσευχήν, 
μέγιστον οἴκημα πολὺν ὄχλον ἐπιδέξασθαι δυνάμενον, Jo- 
seph. vita § 54. b. a place in the open air where the 
Jews were wont to pray, outside of those cities where they 
had no synagogue; such places were situated upon the 
bank of a stream or the shore of the sea, where there 
was a supply of water for washing the hands before 
prayer: Acts xvi. 13, 16; Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 23, ef. 
Epiph. haer. 80, 1. Tertullian in his ad nationes 1, 13 
makes mention of the “orationes litorales” of the Jews, 
and in his de jejuniis c. 16 says “Judaicum certe jeju- 
nium nbique celebratur, cum omissis templis per omne 
litus quocunque in aperto aliquando jam preces ad caelum 
mittunt.” [Josephus (6. Apion. 2, 2, 2) quotes Apion as 
representing Moses as offering αἴθριοι προσευχαί.] Cf. 
De Wette, Archiologie, § 242; [Schiirer, Zeitgesch. § 27 
vol. ii. p. 869 sqq.]- Not used by prof. auth. except in 
the passages cited above from Philo, Josephus, and Ju- 
venal [to which add Cleomedes 71, 16; ef. Boeckh, Corp. 
inserr. ii. 1004 no. 2114 Ὁ. and 1005 no. 2114 bb. (a. D. 
81), see Index 8. v.]." 

προσ-εύχομαι; depon. mid.; impf. προσηυχόμην ; fut. 
προσεύξομαι; 1 aor. mpoonv&duny; [on the augm. see WH. 
App. p. 162; ef. Τὰ Proleg. p. 121]; fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hat. down ; Sept. for Sbann; to offer prayers, to pray, 
(everywhere of prayers to the gods, or to God [cf. δέησις, 
fin.]): absol., Mt. vi. 5-7, 9; xiv. 23; xxvi. 36,39, 44; Mk. 
i. 35; vi.46; xi. 24 sq.; xiii. 33 [ΠΤ WH om. Tr br. the 
el.]; xiv. [32], 39; Lk. i. 10; iii. 21; v.16; vi. 12; ix. 18, 
28 sq-; xi. 1.54. : xviii. 1, 10; xxii. 44 [Τὸ br. WH reject 
the pass.]; Acts i. 24; vi. 6; ix 11. 40. χ 9.530. Kio ois 
xii. 12; xiii. 3; xiv. 23; xvi. 25; xx. 86; χχὶ. 5; xxii. 17; 
xxviii. 8; 1 Co. xi. 4 sq.3 xiv.14; 1 Th.v.17; 1 Tim. ii. 
8; Jas. v. 13,18; foll. by λέγων and direct disc. con- 
taining the words of the prayer, Mt. xxvi. 39, 42; Lk. 
xxii.41; προσεύχ- with a dat. indicating the manner or 
instrument, 1 Co. xi.5 [W. $31, 7d.]; xiv. 14 sq. [ef. W. 
279 (262) sq.]; μακρά, to make long prayers, Mt. xxiii. 
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk.xx.47; ἐν πνεύματι (see 
πνεῦμα, 4 a. p. 522* mid.), Eph. vi. 18; ἐν mv. ἁγίῳ. Jude 
20; προσευχῇ (see προσευχή, 1 fin.), Jas. v. 17; προσεύχ. 
with the ace. of a thing, Lk. xviii. 11; Ro. viii. 26 [cf. W. 


προσέχω 


§41b.4b.; Β. 8.139, 61 6.7; ἐπί τινα, over one, i.e. with 
hands extended over him, Jas. v. 14 [ef. W. 408 (381) 
n.]; se. ἐπί τινα, Mt. xix.13. as commonly in Grk. writ. 
with the dat. of the pers. to whom the prayers are offered 
[ef. W. § 52, 4, 14]: Mt. vi. 6; 1 Co. xi. 13, (Is. xliv. 
17); περί with the gen. of a pers., Col. i. 3[ RG TWH 
txt.]; 1 Th. v. 25; Heb. xiii. 18; ὑπέρ with the gen. of 
a pers., Mt. v. 44; Lk. vi. 28 [where T WH Tr mrg. περί 
(see περί, I.c. y., also ὑπέρ, I. 6); Col. i. 3 L Tr WH mrg. 
(see reff. as above), 9]; προσεύχ. foll. by ἵνα, with the 
jdesign of, 1 Co. xiv. 13, cf. Meyer in loc. [W. 460 (428) ]; 
i . . . . . σ΄ 
ithe thing prayed for is indicated by a following ἵνα (see 
\iva, II. 2b.) : Mt. xxiv. 20; xxvi. 41; Mk. xiii. 18; xiv. 
35, 38; Lk. xxii. 46, [but in Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; 
(Lk. xxii. 46 ?), ἵνα is more com. regarded as giving the 
aim of the twofold command preceding]; τοῦτο ἵνα, Phil. 
i. 9; περί τινος wa, Col. iv. 3; 2 Th. i. 11; iii, 1; ὑπέρ 
twos iva, Col. i. 9; ὑπέρ τινος ὅπως, Jas. v. 16 L WH txt. 
Tr mrg.; περί τινος ὅπως, Acts viii. 15, (ὅπως [q. v. IL. 2] 
seems to indicate not so much the contents of the pray- 
er as its end and aim); [0]]. by aninf. belonging to the 
subject, Lk. xxii. 40; foll. by τοῦ with the inf., Jas. v. 17.* 
προσ-έχω ; impf. προσεῖχον; pf. προσέσχηκα; [ pres. mid. 
3 pers. sing. προσέχεται (1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf.)]; to turn to 
[ef. πρός, IV. 1], i. 6. 1. to bring to, bring near; thus 
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down with ναῦν (quite 
as often omitting the ναῦν) and a dat. of place, or foll. by 
πρός with an ace. of place, to bring a ship to land, and 
simply to touch at, put in. 2. a. τὸν νοῦν, to turn 
the mind to, attend to, be attentive: τινί, to a person or 
thing, Arstph. 644. 503; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 
Leian., Plut., al.; once so in the Bible, viz. Job vii. 17. 
The simple προσέχειν τινί (Sept. for rypn, also for }*1877), 
with τὸν νοῦν omitted, is often used in the same sense 
from Xen. down; so in the N. T. [cf. W.593 (552); B. 
144 (126)]: Acts viii. 6 ; xvi. 14; Heb. ii. 1; 2 Pet. i. 19, 
(i Mace. vii. 11; 4 Mace. 1.1 ; Sap. viii.12); in the sense 
of caring for, providing for, Acts xx. 28. b. mpoo- 
έχω ἐμαυτῷ, (0 attend to one’s self, i. 6. te give heed to one’s 
self (Sept. for 11W3, to guard one’s self, i.e. to beware, 
Gen. xxiv. 6; Ex. x. 28; Deut. iv. 9; vi. 12, ete.): Lk. 
xvii. 3; Acts v. 35 [ef. B. 337 (290); W.557 (518); yet 
see ἐπί, Β. 2 f.a.]; with the addition of ἀπό twos, to be 
on one’s guard against, beware of, a thing [ef. B. § 147, 
3 (ἀπό, 1. 8 b.)]: Lk. xii. 1 (Tob. iv. 12; [ Test. xii. Patr., 
test. Dan 67); also without the dat. προσέχ. ἀπό τινος : 
Mt. vii. 15; x.17; xvi. 6,11 sq.; Lk. xx. 46, (Sir. vi. 13; 
xi. 33; xvii. 14; xviii. 27; [‘ Teaching’ ete. 6,3; 12,57); 
foll. by μή with an inf., to take heed lest one doa thing, 
Mt. vi. 15 ἐμαυτῷ, μήποτε with the subjunc. Lk. xxi. 34; 
absol. to give attention, take heed: Sir. xiii. 13; Barn. 
ep.4, 9; 7,4.6.[9]; foll. by πῶς, Barn. ep. 7, 7; by the 
interrog. τί, ib. 15, 4; iva, ib. 16,8; ἵνα μήποτε, Barn. ep. 
4,13 [var.; ἵνα μή, 2 Chr. xxv. 16]; [μήποτε, Barn. ep. 4, 
14]. 3. 56. ἐμαυτόν, to apply one’s self to, attach one’s 
self to, hold or cleave to a person or a thing, [R.V. mostly 
give heed]: with the dat. of a pers. to one, Acts viii. 10 sq.; 
1 Tim. iv. 1; τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ mp. καὶ τῷ πρεσβυτερίῳ Kai δια- 


O46 


᾿ 
προσκαλέω 


κόνοις, Ignat. ad Philad. 7,1; ad Polye. 6, 1; with the dat. 
of a thing, μύθοις, 1 Tim. i.4; Tit. 1. 14; [mid. ὑγιαίνουσι 
λόγοις, 1 ‘Tim. vi. ὃ Tdf. (al. προσέρχεται, q. v. b. B.)]; to 
be given or addicted to: οἴνῳ, 1 'Tim. iii. 8 (τρυφῇ, Julian. 
Caes. 22 [p. 326 ed. Spanh.]; τρυφῇ καὶ μέθῃ, Polyaen. 
strateg. 8, 56); to devote thought and effort to: τῇ avayva- 
σει κτλ. 1 Tim. iv. 13; τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ, [A.V. give atlend- 
ance], Heb. vii. 18, (ναυτικοῖς, Thue. 1,15; for other 
exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow 8. v. 3 6.; [L. and Κ.. 8. v. 
4b.]).* 

προσ-ηλόω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. mpoonrwaas; to fasten with 
nails to, nail to, [ef. πρός, 1V. 4]: τὶ τῷ σταυρῷ, Col. ii. 
14. (3 Mace. iv. 9; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Philo, 
Joseph., Plut., Leian., al.) * 

προσήλυτος, -ov, ὁ, (fr. προσέρχομαι, pf. προσελήλυθα, 
cf. B. 74 (64); [W. 24. 26. 97 (92)]); 1. a new- 
comer (Lat. advena; cf. πρός, LV. 1]; α stranger, alien, 
(Schol. ad Apoll. Rhod. 1, 834; Sept. often for Ἢ [cf. 
Philo de monarch. 1, 7 ad init. ]}). 2. a proselyte, 
i.e. one who has come over from a Gentile religion to 
Judaism (Luther, Judengenosse): Mt. xxiii. 15; Acts 
ii. 11 (10); vi.5; xii. 43. The Rabbins distinguish two 
classes of proselytes, viz. psa proselytes of right- 
eousness, who received circumcision and bound them- 
selves to keep the whole Mosaic law and to comply with 
all the requirements of Judaism, and \pwo 3 prose- 
lytes of the gate (a name derived apparently from Ex. 
xx. 10; Deut. v.14; [xiv. 21]; xxiv. 16 (14), 21 (19)), 
who dwelt among the Jews, and although uncircumcised 
observed certain specified laws, esp. the seven precepts 
of Noah (as the Rabbins called them), i. 6. against the 
seven chief sins, idolatry, blasphemy against God, homi- 
cide, unchastity, theft or plundering, rebellion against 
rulers, and the use of “flesh with the blood thereof.” 
{Many hold that this distinction of proselytes into classes 
is purely theoretical, and was of no practical moment in 
Christ’s day; οἵ. Lardner, Works, xi. 306-324; ef. vi. 
522-533; Schiirer in Riehm as below.] Cf. Leyrer in 
Herzog xii. p. 237 sqq. [rewritten in ed. 2 by Delitzsch 
(xii. 293 sqq.)], Steiner in Schenkel iv. 629 sq.; [BB. 
DD.]; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 644 [(whose views 
are somewhat modified, esp. as respects classes of pros- 
elytes, in his 2te Aufl. § 31 V. p. 567, and his art. ‘ Pros- 
elyten’ in Riehm p. 1240 sq.)] and the bks. he refers to.* 

πρόσ-καιρος, -ov, (i. 4. ὁ πρὸς καιρὸν wv), for a season 
[ef. πρός, LV. 5], enduring only for a while, temporary: 
Mt. xiii. 21; Mk.iv.17; 2 Co. iv. 18; Heb. xi. 25. (4 
Mace. xv. 2; Joseph. antt. 2, 4,4; Dio Cass., Dion. Hal., 
[Strabo 7, 3, 11], Plut., Hdian.; ὁ παρὼν καὶ πρόσκαιρος 
κόσμος, Clem. homil. 20, 2.) * 

προσ-καλέω, -@: Mid., pres. προσκαλοῦμαι; 1 aor. προσ- 
exadeodunv; pf. προσκέκλημαι ; from [Antipho, Arstph., 
Thue.], Xen., Plat. down; ἰο call to; in the N.T. found 
only in the mid. [ef. B. § 135, 4], to call to one’s self; to 
bid to come to one’s self: τινά, a. prop.: Mt. x.1; 
xv. 10,32; xviii. 2,32; xx. 25; Mk. iii. 13, 23; vi. 7; vii. 
14; viii. 1,34; x. 42; xii. 43; xv.44; Lk. vii. 18 (19); xv. 
26; xvi. 5; xviii. 16; Acts v.40; vi. 2; xiii. 7; xx.1 [RG 


προσκαρτερέω 


L]; xxiii. 17, 18, 23; Jas. v. 14. b. metaph. God 
is said προσκαλεῖσθαι the Gentiles, aliens as they are from 
him, by inviting and drawing them, through the preach- 
ing of the gospel, unto fellowship with himself in the 
Messiah’s kingdom, Acts ii. 39; the Holy Spirit and 
Christ are said to call unto themselves [οἵ. W. § 39, 3] 
those preachers of the gospel to whom they have decided 
to intrust a service having reference to the extension of 
the gospel: foll. by an inf. indicating the purpose, Acts 
xvi. 10; foll. by ets τι, Acts xiii. 2 (where 4 is for εἰς 6, 
acc. to that familiar Grk. usage by which a prep. pre- 
fixed to the antecedent is not repeated before the rela- 
tive; cf. W. 421 sq. (393); [B. 342 (294)]).* 

προσ-καρτερέω, -ὦὥ ; fut. προσκαρτερήσω ; (καρτερέω, fr. 
καρτερός [‘strong,’ ‘steadfast ᾽], of which the root is (τὸ) 
κάρτος for κράτος [‘strength’; ef. Curtius § 72]) ; to per- 
severe [‘ continue steadfastly’ in any thing [cf. πρός, IV. 
4]: of persons, with the dat. of a thing, to give constant 
attention to a thing, Acts ii. 42 [here Lchm. adds ἐν (once) 
inbr.]; τῇ προσευχῇ, Acts i. 14; vi. 4; Ro. xii. 12; Col. 
iv. 2, (ταῖς θήραις, Diod. 3, 17; τῇ πολιορκίᾳ, Polyb. 1, 
55, 4; Diod. 14, 87; τῇ καθέδρᾳ, persist in the siege, 
Joseph. antt. 5, 2,6); with the dat. of a person, to ad- 
here to one, be his adherent; to be devoted or constant to 
one: Acts viii. 13; x. 7, (Dem. p. 1386, 6; Polyb. 24, 5, 
3; Diog. Laért. 8, 1,14); εἴς τι, to be steadfastly atten- 
tive unto, to give unremitting care to a thing, Ro. xiii. 6 [ef. 
Meyer ad loc.]; ἐν with a dat. of place, to continue all 
the time in a place, Acts ii. 46 (Sus. 6); absol. fo per- 
severe, not to faint (in a thing), Xen. Hell. 7, 5,14; to 
show one’s self courageous, for pinnn, Num. xiii. 21 (20). 
of a thing, with the dat. of a pers.,to be in constant read- 
iness for one, wait on continually: Mk. iii. 9.* 

προσ-καρτέρησις, -ews, 7, (προσκαρτερέω). perseverance : 
Eph. vi. 18. Nowhere else; [Koumanoudes, Λέξ. ἀθησ. 
Suivello 

προσ-κεφάλαιον, -ov, τό, (fr. πρός [q. ν. IV. 3] and the 
adj. κεφάλαιος [cf. κεφάλαιον), a pillow, a cushion: Mk. 
iv. 38. (Ezek. xiii. 18, 20; Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.) * 

προσ-κληρόω, -@: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. προσεκληρώ- 
θησαν; to add or assign to by lot, to allot: προσεκληρώ- 
θησαν τῷ Παύλῳ, were allotted by God to Paul, viz. as 
disciples, followers, Acts xvii. 4 [W. § 39, 2 fin.; al. give 
it a middle force, joined their lot to, attached them- 
selves to, (A. V. consorted with); cf. leg. ad Gaium § 10 
and other exx. fr. Philo as below]. (Plut. mor. p. 738 d.; 
Leian. am. 3; freq. in Philo, ef. Loesner, Observy. p. 209 
sqq-) * 

πρόσ-κλησις, -εως, 7), 1. a judicial summons: 
Arstph., Plat., Dem. 2. an invitation: μηδὲν ποιῶν 
κατὰ πρόσκλησιν, 1 Tim. v. 21 1, Trmrg.; this reading, 
unless (as can hardly be doubted) it be due to itacism, 
must be translated by invitation, i. e. the invitation or 
summons of those who seek to draw you over to their 
side [see quotations in Tdf. ad loc. Cf. πρόσκλισις.] * 

προσ-κλίνω : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. προσεκλίθη ; a 
trans. (to cause) to lean against [ οἴ. πρός, IV, 4] (Hom., 
Pind.). 2. intrans. τινί, to incline towards one, lean 


547 


προσκοόπτω 


to his side or party: Polyb. 4, 51, 5, ete.; 1 aor. pass. 
προσεκλίθην with a mid. signif. to join one’s self to one: 
Acts v. 36 LT Tr WH [(cf. W. § 52, 4; 14)]; 2 Mace. 
xiv. 24; τοῖς δικαίοις προσεκλίθη, Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 
1027; προσεκλίθητε τοῖς ἀποστόλοις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
47, 4 and in other later writ.* 

πρόσ-κλισις, -ews, 7, an inclination or proclivity of mind, 
a joining the party of one, (Polyb., [Diod.]); partiality: 
κατὰ πρόσκλισιν, led by partiality (Vulg. in [aliam or] 
alteram partem declinando), 1 Tim. v. 21 [RGTWHTr 
txt.]; κατὰ προσκλίσεις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 7; δίχα 
προσκλίσεως ἀνθρωπίνης, ib. 50, 2,cf.47,3sq. (Cf. πρόσ- 
kAnots.) ἢ 

προσ-κολλάω, -@: 1 aor. pass. προσεκολλήθην; 1 fut. 
pass. προσκολληθήσομαι; Sept. for p27s ἰο glue upon, 
glue to, (cf. πρός, IV. 4]; prop. Joseph. antt. 7, 12, 4; 
trop. in the pass. with a reflexive force, to join one’s sely 
to closely, cleave to, stick to, (Plato) : w. dat. of a pers. 
(Sir. vi. 34; xiii. 16), Acts v. 36 Rec. (see προσκλίνω, 
2); τῇ γυναικί, Mt. xix. 5 Ree. [al. κολληθήσεται, q. ν.}; 
Mk. x. 7 Lehm.; Eph. v. 31 LT Tr WH mrg.; πρὸς τὴν 
γυν. (fr. Gen. ii. 24), Mk. x. 7 RG Tr txt.; Eph. v. 31 
RGWHtxt. [Cf. W. § 52, 4, 14.]* 

πρόσ-κομμα, -ατος, τό, (προσκόπτω), a stumbling-block, 
i.e. an obstacle in the way which if one strike his foot 
against he necessarily stumbles or falls; trop. that over 
which the soul stumbles, i. e. by which it is impelled to 
sin: 1 Co. viii. 9 (Sir. xvii. 25 (20); xxxi. (xxxiv.) 19 
(16) ; xxxix. 24) ; τιθέναι πρόσκ. τινι, to put a stumbling- 
block in one’s way, i. e. trop. to furnish one an occasion 
for sinning, Ro. xiv. 13 [WH mrg. om.]; 6 διὰ προσκόμ- 
ματος ἐσθίων, [A.V.] who eateth with offence (see διά, A. 1. 
2), by making no discrimination as to what he eats oc- 
casions another to act against his conscience, ibid. 20; 
λίθος προσκόμματος (fr. Is. viii. 14 for 42) 28), prop. a 
stone against which the foot strikes [A. V. stone a 
stumbling], used figuratively of Christ Jesus, with regard 
to whom it especially annoyed and offended the Jews 
that his words, deeds, career, and particularly his igno- 
minious death on the cross, quite failed to correspond to 
their preconceptions respecting the Messiah ; hence they 
despised and rejected him, and by that crime brought 
upon themselves woe and punishment: Ro. ix. 32, 33; 
1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). (In the Sept. for wpin, Ex. xxiii. 33 ; 
xxxiv. 12; [οἵ, Judith viii. 22]. ἃ sore or bruise caused 
by striking the foot against any object, Athen. 3 p. 97f.; 
a hindrance [?], Plut. mor. p. 1048 e. [i. 6. de Stoic. re- 
pugn. 30, 8 fin.].) * 

προσ-κοπή, -ῆς, 9, (προσκόπτω), an occasion of stum- 
bling [so R.V. (but A.V. offence) ]: διδόναι προσκοπήν (sc. 
ἄλλοις), to do something which causes others to stumble, 
i. e. leads them into error or sin, 2 Co. vi. 3 [ef. W. 484 
(451)]. (Polyb.; [for wa fall, Prov. xvi. 18 Graecus 
Ven. ].)* 

προσ-κόπτω; 1 aor. προσέκοψα; to strike against [cf. 
πρός, ΤΥ͂. 4]: absol. of those who strike against a stone 
or other obstacle in the path, to stumble, Jn. xi. 9, 10; 
πρὸς λίθον τὸν πόδα, to strike the foot against a stone, i. 6. 


προσκυλίω 


(dropping the fig.) to meet with some harm, Mt. iv.6; Lk. 
iv. 11, (fr. Ps. xe. (xei.) 12); fo rush upon, beat against, ot 
ἄνεμοι τῇ οἰκίᾳ, Mt. vii. 27 [L mrg. προσέρρηξαν, see mpoo- 
ρήγνυμι]. ἔν τινι, to be made to stumble by a thing, i. e. 
metaph. to be induced to sin, Ro. xiv. 21 [ef. W. 583 
(542); Β. 8 151, 23 d.]. Since we are angry with an 
obstacle in our path which we have struck and hurt our 
foot against, one is trop. said προσκόπτειν, to stumble at, 
a person or thing which highly displeases him; thus the 
Jews are said προσκόψαι τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προσκ. i. 6. to have 
recoiled from Jesus as one who failed to meet their ideas 
of the Messiah (see πρόσκομμα), Ro. ix. 32; the enemies 
of Christianity are said mp. τῷ λόγῳ, 1 Pet. ii. 8 [some (cf. 
R. V. mrg.) take zp. here absolutely, and make τῷ λ. 
depend on ἀπειθέω, q. ν- in a.]. (Exx. of this and other 
fiz. uses of the word by Polyb., Diod., M. Antonin. are 
cited by Passow [L. and §.] s. v. and Fritzsche, Ep. ad 
Rom. ii. p. 362 sq.) * 

mpoo-kvAlw: 1 aor. προσεκύλισα; to roll to: ri τινι, Mt. 
xxvii. 60 [where Lehm. inserts ἐπί] ; τὶ ἐπί τι, Mk. xv. 
46. (Arstph. vesp. 202.) * 

προσ-κυνέω, -@; impf. προσεκύνουν ; fut. προσκυνήσω ; 
1 aor. προσεκύνησα; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. 
very often for AINAWT (to prostrate one’s self) ; prop. 
to kiss the hand to (towards) one, in token of reverence : 
Hdt. 1, 134; [ef. K. 1. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter- 
thiimer d. Griech. § 21; esp. Hoelemann, Die bibl. Ge- 
stalt. ἃ. Anbetung in his ‘ Bibelstudien’ i. 106 sqq.]; hence 
among the Orientals, esp. the Persians, fo fall upon the 
knees and touch the ground with the forehead as an expres- 
sion of profound reverence, [fo make a ‘salam’; Lat. 
veneror (Nep. Conon. 3, 3), adoro (Plin. h. n. 28, δ, 25; 
Suet. Vitell. 2); hence in the N. T. by kneeling or pros- 
tration to do homage (to one) or make obeisance, whether 
in order to express respect or to make supplication. It 
is used a. of homage shown to men of superior 
rank: absol., Mt. xx. 20 (the Jewish high-priests are 
spoken of in Joseph. Ὁ. 7. 4,5, 2 as προσκυνούμενοι) ; πεσὼν 
ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας προσεκύνησεν, Acts x. 25; τινί (ace. to 
the usage of later writ.; οἵ. W. 36, 210 (197) ; [B. §131, 
4]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 463), Mt. 11. 2,8; viii. 25 ix. 18; 
xiv. 33; xv. 25; [xviii. 26]; xxviii. 9,17 [RG]; Mk. v. 6 
[here WH Tr mre. have the ace.]; xv. 19; Jn. ix. 38; 
with πεσών preceding, Mt. 11. 11; ἵν. 9; ἐνώπιον τῶν 
ποδῶν twos, Rey. ili. 9; [it may perh. be mentioned that 


ἄκρον τῆς ῥάβδου αὐτοῦ, explaining it by the (Egyptian) 
custom of bowing upon the magistrate’s staff of office in 
taking an oath; ef. Chabas, Mélanges Egypt. II. i. p. 80 
cf. p. 91 sq.; but see below]. b. of homage rendered 
to God and the ascended Christ, to heavenly beings, and 
to demons: absol. (our to worship) [cf. W. 593 (552)], 
Jn. iv. 20; xii. 20; Acts viii. 27; xxiv. 11; Heb. xi. 21 
[ef. above]; Rev. xi. 1; πίπτειν καὶ προσκυνεῖν, Rev. v. 
14; τινί, Jn. iv. 21,23; Acts vii.43; Heb.i.6; Rev. iv. 
10; vii. 11; xi. 16; xiv. 7; xvi. 2; xix. 4, 20; xxii. 8sq.; 
Rev. xiii. 4 G L T Tr WH (twice [the 2d time WH txt. 
only]); xiii. 15 GT Tr WHtxt.; xx. 4 Rec.; πεσὼν ἐπὶ 


548 


προσορμίξζω 


πρόσωπον προσκυνήσει τῷ θεῷ, 1 Co. xiv. 25; πίπτειν ἐπὶ 
τὰ πρόσωπα καὶ προσκυνεῖν τῷ θεῷ, Rev. xi. 16; preceded 
by πίπτειν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ποδῶν τινος, Rev. xix.10. in 
accordance with the usage of the older and better writ. 
with τινά or τί (cf. Matthiae § 412): Mt.iv. 10; Lk. iv. 
8; Rev. ix. 20; xiii. 12; xiv. 9,11; also xiii. 4 (Rec. 
twice; [WH mrg. once]), 8 [where Ree. dat.], 15 RL 
WH mrg.; xx. 4" (where Ree. dat.), 4° (where R™ dat.) ; 
Lk. xxiv. 52 RGLTr br. WH reject; (the Sept. also 
connects the word far more freq. with the dat. than with 
the ace. [ef. Hoelemann u. s. p. 116 sqq.]); ἐνώπεόν τινος, 
Lk. iv. 7; Rev. xv. 4.* 

προσ-κυνητής, -ov, ὁ, (προσκυνέω), a worshipper: Jn. iv. 
23. (Inserr.; [600]. and] Byzant. writ.) * 

προσ-λαλέω, -@; 1 aor. inf. προσλαλῆσαι; Ww. τινί, to 
speak to: Acts xiii. 43; sc. ὑμῖν [some say pot (see mapa- 
καλέω, I.)], Acts xxviii. 20. (Sap. xiii. 17; Theophr., 
Plut., Leian.) * 

προσ-λαμβάνω : 2 aor. inf. προσλαβεῖν (Acts xxvii. 34 
Rec. see below); Mid., pres. προσλαμβάνομαι; 2 aor. 
προσελαβόμην ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to take to, 
take in addition, [ οἴ. πρός, IV. 2]; in the N. T. found 
only in the Middle, to take to one’s self (cf. B. § 135, 
4]: τινά [cf. B. 160sq. (140)]; a. to take as one’s 
companion [ A. V. take one unto one]: Acts xvii. 5; xviii. 
26. b. to take by the hand in order to lead aside 
ΓΑ. V. (simply) take]: Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 32. ο. 
to take or [so A. V.] receive into one’s home, with the 
collateral idea of kindness: Philem. 12 RG, 17; into 
shelter, Acts xxviii. 2. d. to receive, i.e. grant one 
access to one’s heart; to take into friendship and inter- 
course: Ro. xiv. 1; xv. 7; God and Christ are said 
προσλαβέσθαι (to have received) those whom, formerly es- 
tranged from them, they have reunited to themselves by 
the blessings of the gospel, Ro. xiv. 3; xv. 7; Clem. Rom. 
1 Cor. 49, 6, (cf. Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 10; Lxiv. (Ixv.) 5; 
Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 24). e. to take to one’s self, to take: 
μηδέν, [A.V. having taken nothing] i.e. no food, Acts 
XXVii. 33; τροφῆς, (a portion of [ A.V. (not R.V.) ‘some’ ]) 
food, ef. B. 160 sq. (140), ibid. 36 (in vs. 34 GLT Tr 
WH have restored μεταλαβεῖν [so R. V. (‘to take some 
food’) ] for mpocAaBeww).* 
' πρόσ-ληψις [LT Tr WH -λημψις, see M, μ];, -εως, 7, 
(προσλαμβάνων), Vulg. assumptio, a receiving: τινός, into 


| the kingdom of God, Ro. xi. 15. [(Plat., al.)]* 
some would bring in here Heb. xi. 21 προσεκύνησεν ἐπὶ 70 | 


προσ-μένω; 1 aor. ptep. προσμείνας, inf. προσμεῖναι; fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; a. lo remain with [see 
πρός, IV. 3]: with a dat. of the pers. to continue with 
one, Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2 [here L WH mrg. om. Tr br. 
the dat.]; τῷ κυρίῳ, to be steadfastly devoted to [A. V. 
cleave unto] the Lord, Acts xi. 23 (Sap. iii. 9; Joseph. 
antt. 14,2, 1); τῇ χάριτι τοῦ θεοῦ, to hold fast to [A. V. 
continue in] the grace of God received in the gospel, 
Acts xiii. 43 G LT Tr WH; δεήσεσι x. προσευχαῖς, [A.V- 
to continue in supplications and prayers],1 Tim.v.5. Ὅ. 
to remain still [cf. πρός, IV. 2], stay, tarry: Acts xviii. 18; 
foll. by év with a dat. of place, 1 Tim. i. 3.* 

προσ-ορμίζω : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. προσωρμίσθησαν! 


προσοφείλω 


(ὅρμος ἃ roadstead, anchorage) ; to bring a ship to moor- 
ings (Lcian. am. 11); esp. so in the mid., prop. to take 
one’s stalion ‘near the shore; to moor, come to anchor, 
(Hdt., Dem., Plut., al.) ; the 1 aor. pass. is used in the 
same sense (Arr. exp. Alex. 6,4 and 20; Ael. v. h. 8,5; 
Dio Cass. 41, 48; 64, 1), Mk. vi. 53.* 

προσ-οφείλω ; tv owe besides [see πρός, ΤΥ. 2]: σεαυτόν, 
i.e. besides what I have just asked of thee thou owest to 
me even thine own self, since it was by my agency that 
thou wast brought to faith in Christ, Philem.19. (Thuc., 
Xen., Dem., Polyb., Plut.) * 

προσ-οχθίζω: 1 aor. προσώχθισα; to be wroth or dis- 
pleased with : τινί, Heb. iii. 10, 17, (fr. Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10) ; 
not found besides exe. in the Sept. for op to loathe ; 
Rp, to spue out; 7}, to be disgusted with, ete.; add, Sir. 
vi. 25; xxv. 2; xxxviii. 4; []. 25; Test. xii Patr., test. Jud. 
§ 18; Orac. Sibyll.3, 272]. Profane writ. use ὀχθέω, more 
rarely ὀχθίζωβ. πρός denotes direction towards that with 
which we are displeased [πρός, IV. 1]. Cf. Bleek, Br. 
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 441 sq.* 

προσ-παίω (for the more com. προσπταίω) : 1 aor. προσ- 
ἐπαισα; to beat against, strike upon: intrans. προσέπαισαν 
τῇ οἰκίᾳ, Mt. vii. 25 Lchm.; but cf. B. 40 (34) n. (Schol. 
ad Aeschyl. Prom. 885 ; [Soph. frag. 310 var.]; Byzant. 
writ.) * 

πρόσπεινος, -ov, (πεῖνα hunger [cf. πεινάω ]), very (lit. 
besides, in accession, [cf. πρός, IV. 2; al. (cf. R. V-) do 
not recognize any intensive force in πρός here]) hun- 
gry: Acts x. 10. Not found elsewhere.* 

προσ-πήγνυμι: 1 aor. ptep. mpoomnéas; ἰο fasten to [see 
πρός, IV. 4]: Acts ii. 23 [here absol., of crucifixion]. 
(Dio Cass., al.) * 

προσ-πίπτω : impf. προσέπιπτον ; 2 aor., 3 pers. sing. 
προσέπεσε, 3 pers. plur. (Mt. vii. 25) προσέπεσον RG, 
-σαν T Tr WH [see πίπτω, init.], ptep. fem. προσπεσοῦ- 
σα; fr. Hom. down; prop. to fall towards, fall upon, 
[πρός, IV. 11 1.6. 1. to fall forward, to fall down, 
prostrate one’s self before, in homage or supplication : 
with the dat. of a pers., at one’s feet, Mk. iii. 11; v. 33; 
LK. viii. 28,47; Acts xvi. 29, (Ps. xciv. (xev.) 6; Polyb., 
Plut., al.) ; τοῖς γόνασί τινος, Lk. ν. 8 (Eur. Or. 1332; 
Plut.) ; πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τινός, Mk. vii. 25. 5. ΠῚ 
rush upon, beat against : τῇ οἰκίᾳ (of winds beating against 
a house), Mt. vii. 25 [not Lehm.; ef. προσπαίω ].* 

προσ-ποιέω: Mid., pres. ptep. προσποιούμενος (see be- 
low); impf. 3 pers. sing. προσεποιεῖτο (Lk. xxiv. 28, for 
which L txt. T Tr WH give the 1 aor. προσεποιήσατο); 
in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; to add to [ef. Germ. hinzu- 
machen]; mid. 1. to take or claim (a thing) to 
one’s self. 2. to conform one’s self to a thing, or rather 
lo affect to one’s self; therefore to pretend, foll. by an inf. 
[A. V. made as though he would ete.], Lk. xxiv. 28; xa- 
τέγραφεν εἰς τὴν γῆν μὴ προσποιούμενος, Jn. vill. 6 acc. to 
codd. E G H K ete. [ef. Matthaei (ed. 1803) ad loe.}. (So 
in Thue., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.; Diod. 15, 46; Philo in 
Flace. § 6; [in § 12 foll. by ptep.; Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 1]; 
Ael.v. h. 8,5; Plut. Timol. 5; [Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. 
531)" 


549 


προστίθημι 


προσ-πορεύομαι ; fo draw near, approach: with a dat. of 
the person approached, Mk. x. 35. (Sept.; Aristot., 
Polyb.) * 

προσ-ρήγνυμι, and in later writ. [W. 22] προσρήσσω; 
1 aor. προσέρρηξα RG L, προσέρηξα T Tr WH (see P, p); 
to break against, break by dashing against: παιδία ἀπολεῖς 
προσρηγνὺς πέτραις, Joseph. antt. 9, 4, 6; λέοντα προσ- 
ρήξας τῇ γῇ: 6,9,3; intrans. (ef. W. § 38, 1; [B. § 130, 
47): ὁ ποταμὸς τῇ οἰκίᾳ, Lk. vi. 48, [49; Mt. vii.27 Lmrg.]; 
in pass. τῇ ἄκρᾳ 7 τὰ κύματα προσρήσσεται, Antonin. 4, 49." 

προσ-τάσσω: 1 aor. προσέταξα; pf. pass. ptep. προστε- 
taypevos ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down ; 1. to as- 
sign or ascribe to, join to. 2. to enjoin, order, pre- 
scribe, command : Sept. for ΤῊΝ ; absol. καθὼς προσέταξε, 
Lk. v. 14; with the dat. of a pers., Mt.i. 24; xxi.6 RG 
Τ ri, Mt. viii. 4; Mk.i. 44; τινί τι, pass. Acts x. 33; foll. 
by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 48; το appoint, to define, pass. 
mpooreraypevot καιροί, Acts xvii. 26 G L (ed. ster. [larger 
ed. πρὸς teray.}) T Tr WH, for the Ree. προτεταγμένοι. 
[Syn.: see κελεύω, fin.]* 

προστάτις, -ἰδος, 7, (fem. of the noun προστάτης, fr. 
προϊστημι) ῃ a. prop. @ woman set over others. b. 
a female guardian, protectress, patroness, caring for the 
affairs of others and aiding them with her resources 
[A. V. succourer]: Ro. xvi. 2; cf. Passow on the word 
and under προστάτης fin.; [Schiirer, Die Gemeindever- 
fassung der Juden in Rom, u.s.w. (Leip. 1879) p. 31; Hein- 
rici, Die Christengemeinde Korinths, in Hilgenfeld’s 
Zeitschr. for 1876, p. 517 sq.].* 

προσ-τίθημι: impf. 3 pers. sing. προσετίθει (Acts ii. 47) ; 
1 aor. προσέθηκα ; 2 aor. προσέθην, impy. πρόσθες (Lk. 
xvii. 5), inf. προσθεῖναι, ptcp. προσθείς ; Pass., impf.3 pers. 
plur. προσετίθεντο; 1 aor. προσετέθην ; 1 fut. προστεθή- 
copa; 2 aor. mid. προσεθέμην; fr. Hom. Od. 9, 305 down; 
Sept. very often for 45°, also for Ox, ete. ; 1. 
prop. to put to. 2. to add, i.e. join to, gather with 
any company, the number of one’s followers or compan- 
ions: τινὰ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, Acts ii. 47 [RG]; τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts 
v. 14; xi. 24; sc. τῷ κυρίῳ, Or τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, Acts ii. 
41; Hebraistically, προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 
(Judg. ii. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 69), he was gathered to his fa- 
thers assembled in Sheol (which is n-529 33/10 ma, the 
house of assembly for all the living, Job xxx. 23), Acts 
xiii. 36 (others explain it, he was added to the bodies of 
his ancestors, buried with them in a common tomb; but cf. 
Knobel on Gen. xxv. 8; [ Béttcher, De inferis, p. 54 sqq.]); 
i. q. to add viz. to what one already possesses: τί, Lk. xvii. 
5 (A.V. here increase]; pass., Mt. vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31; Mk. 
iv. 24; Heb. xii. 19 [(μὴ προστεθῆναι αὐτοῖς λόγον, R. V. 
that no word more should be spoken to them) |;— to what 
already exists: (6 νόμος) προσετέθη, was added to (su- 
pervened upon) se. the ἐπαγγελία, Gal. iii. 19 RLTTr 
WH; τὶ ἐπί tum, some thing to (upon) a thing (which 
has preceded [οἵ. ἐπί, B. 2 d.]), Lk. iii. 20; ri ἐπί re, to 
a thing that it may thereby be increased, Mt. vi. 27; Lk. 
xii. 25. In imitation of the Hebr. (D:) the mid. (in 
the Sept. the active also) foll. b3 an inf. signifies (to add 
i.e.) fo goon to do a thing, for to do further, do again, (as 


TPOTTPEXW 


Gen. iv. 2; ὙΠ]. 12; xviii. 29): προσέθετο πέμψαι (0 
now), : 4e continued to send (as he had already sent), 
Lk. xx. 11, 12, (iq. πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν, Mk. xii. 4) ; προσ- 
έθετο συλλαβεῖν καὶ Πέτρον, he besides apprehended Peter 
also [A.¥. he procecded etc.], Acts xii. 3; in the same 
way also the ptep. is used with a finite verb: προσθεὶς 
εἶπεν, i.e. he further spake [A. V. he udded and spake], 
Lk. xix. 11 (προσθεῖσα ἔτεκεν, Gen. xxxvill.5; προσθέμενος 
ἔλαβε yevaixa, Gen. xxv.1); cf. W. § 54,5; B. § 144, 14.* 

προσ-τρέχω ; 2 aor. act. ptep. προσδραμών; to run to: 
Mk. ix. 15; x. 173; Acts viii. 30. (From Arstph. and 
Xen. down; for 719 in Gen. xviii. 2, ete.) * 

προσφάγιον, -ov, τό, (προσφαγεῖν [ cf. πρός, IV. 27), i.q. 
ὄψον (on which see ὀψάριον), any thing eaten with bread 
(Moeris [ed. Piers. p. 274,1]: ὄψον ἀττικῶς, προσφάγιον 
ἑλληνικῶς) : spoken of fish boiled or broiled, Jn. xxi. 5 
(Schol., Lexx., [Moschion 55 p. 26; Roehl, Inserr. graec. 
395 ἃ. 127). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 697 sq.; 
Sturz, Dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 191.* 

πρόσφατος, -ον, (fr. πρό and σφάω or σφάζω; cf. De- 
litzsch, Com. on Hebr. [as below] p. 478 ; [ef. Lob. Tech- 
nol. p. 106]) ; 1. prop. lately slaughtered, freshly 
killed: Wom. Il. 24, 757. 2. univ. recently or very 
lately made, new: ὁδός, Heb. x. 20 (so fr. Aeschyl. down ; 
φίλος πρόσφατος, Sir. ix. 10; οὐκ ἔστι πᾶν πρόσφατον ὑπὸ 
τὸν ἥλιον, Eccl. i. 9). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 374 sq.* 

προσφάτως, adv., (see the preceding word), lately: Acts 
xvill. 2. (Deut. xxiv. 7 (5): Ezek. xi. 3; Judith iv. 3 
5; 2 Mace. xiv. 36; Polyb., Alciphr., al.) * 

προσ-φέρω; impf. προσέφερον; 1 aor. προσήνεγκα ; 2 aor. 
προσήνεγκον; pt. προσενήνοχα (Heb. xi. 17); Pass., pres. 
προσφέρομαι; 1 aor. προσηνέχθην ; [see reff. s. v. φέρω]; 
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 
277, also for #37, 0.21, ete., sometimes also for TIT 
where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 Κα. xviii. 36 
Compl.; 2 Chr. xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring 
lo, lead to: twa τινι, one to a person who can heal him 
or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24; 
viii. 16; ix. 2,32; xiv. 35; xvii. 16; Mk. ii. 4 (se. τινά) 
x WH Tr mrg.; x. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; pass. in Mt. xii. 

22 [where L WH txt. act.]; xviii. 24 R GT; xix. 13; — 
one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14; 
τινὰ ἐπὶ Tas συναγωγὰς καὶ Tas ἀρχάς, Lk. xii. 11 [W. § 52, 
3] (where T Tr txt. WH εἰσφέρωσιν). προσφέρω τι, to 
bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20; τί τινι, to reach or 
hand a thing to one, Mt. xxii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 36 [here A.V. 
offering); τὶ τῷ στόματί twos, to put to, Jn. xix. 29; a 
thing to one that he may accept it, to offer: χρήματα, 
Acts vili. 18; δῶρα, Mt. ii. 11; used, as often in the 
Sept., of persons offering sacrifices, gifts, prayers to God 
(cf. Kurtz, Brief a. ἃ. Hebr. p. 154 sqq-): τῷ θεῷ σφάγια 
καὶ θυσίας, Acts vii. 42; θυσίαν. Heb. xi. 4; Renner Jn. 
xvi. 2; προσφέρειν δῶρον or δῶρα se. τῷ θεῷ, Mt. v. 28, 
24: vili.4; Heb. viii. 3,4; ἴχ. 9: θυσίαν, Heb. x.12; plur., 
Heb. x. 1,11; [pass. ibid. 2; θυσίας (RG -av) καὶ προσ- 
φορὰς (RG -pav) καὶ ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας, ibid. 
8]; δῶρό τε καὶ θυσίας ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν, to expiate [see 


ὑπέρ, I. 4] sins, Heb. ν. 1; αἷμα ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τῶν τοῦ 


550 


προσωπολήπτης 


λαοῦ ἀγνοημάτων, Heb. ix. 7; τὴν προσφορὰν ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς 
ἑκάστου, pass. Acts xxi. 26; προσφέρειν used absol. [ef. 
W. 593 (552)]: περί τινος, on account of [see περί, I. ο. 
β., Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; περὶ rod λαοῦ περὶ [RG ὑπὲρ 
(see περί, I. c.8.)] ἁμαρτιῶν, to offer expiatory sacrifices 
for the people, Heb. v. 3; τινά, se. τῷ θεῷ, lo offer up, i.e. 
immolate, one, Heb. xi. 17; ἑαυτόν, of Christ, Heb. vii. 27 
T Trmrg. WH mrg.; ix.[14], 25; προσενεχθείς (the pas- 
sive pointing to the fact that what he suffered was due to 
God’s will) ibid. 28, (it is hardly to be found in native 
Grk. writ. used of offering sacrifices ; but in Joseph. antt. 
3, 9, 3, we have ἄρνα καὶ ἔριφον); πρός twa (God) δεήσεις 
τε καὶ ἱκετηρίας, Heb. v. 7 (προσφέρειν δέησιν, Achill. Tat. 
7,1; τῷ θεῷ εὐχήν, Joseph. b. j. 3,8, 3). 2. The 
pass. with the dat. signifies to be borne towards one, to 
attack, assail; then figuratively, to behave one’s self to- 
wards one, deal with one: ὡς υἱοῖς ὑμῖν προσφέρεται ὃ 
θεός, Heb. xii. 7 (very often so in Attic writ. fr. Thue. 
and Xen. down; Philo de Josepho § 10; de ebrietate 
§ 16; Joseph. b. j. 7, 8,1; 4.6]. v.h.12,27; Hdian. 1, 13, 
14 [7 ed. Bekk.]).* 

προσφιλής, -és, (πρός and φιλέω), acceptable, pleasing, 
ΓΑ. V. lovely]: Phil. iv.8. (From [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 
down; Sir. iv. 7; xx. 13.) * 

προσ-φορά, -as, ἡ, (προσφέρω), offering; 1. 6. ale 
the act of offeri ing, a bringing to, (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.). 
2. that which is offered, a gift, a present, (Soph. O.C. 
1270; Theophr. char. 30 sub fin.). In the N. T. a sae- 
rifice [A.V. offering], whether bloody or not: Acts xxi. 
26; xxiv. 17; Eph. v. 2; Heb. x. 5, 8, 14, (Sir. xiv. 11; 
xxxi. (xxxiv.) 21 (19); xxxii. (xxxv.) 1, 6 (8); once for 
mm30, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7); περὶ ἁμαρτίας, offering for sin, 
expiatory sacrifice, Heb. x. 18; with the gen. of the ob- 
ject, τοῦ σώματος ᾿ησοῦ Xp. Heb. x. 10; τῶν ἐθνῶν, the 
sacrifice which I offer in turning the Gentiles to God, 
Ro. xv. 16.* 

προσ-φωνέω, -ὦ ; impf. 3 pers. sing. προσεφώνει ; 1 aor. 
προσεφώνησα; 1. το call to; to address by calling: 
absol., Lk. xiii. 12; xxiii. 20 (where L WH add αὐτοῖς); 
Acts xxi. 40, (Hom. Od. 5, 159 ete.) ; with the dat. of 
a pers. [ef. W.36], Mt. xi. 16; Lk. vii. 32; Acts xxii. 2, 
(Diog. Laért. 7, 7). 2. to call to one’s self, summon: 
τινά (so the better Grk. writ.; see Matthiae § 402 b.; [W. 
§ 52, 4, 147), Lk. vi. 18." 

πρόσ-χυσις, -ews, 9, (προσχέω to pour on), a pouring 
or sprinkling upon, affusion: τοῦ αἵματος, Heb. xi. 28, 
(Eccles. writ. [e. g. Just. M. apol. 2, 12 p. 50 d.].)* 

mpoo-Watw, to touch: τινί [ef. W. § 52,4, 14], a thing, 
Lk. xi. 46. (Pind., Soph., Byzant. writ.)* 

προσωποληπτέω (LT Tr WH -λημπτέω [see M, μ]), τῶ; 
a Hellenistic verb (derived fr. the foll. word [ef. Win. 33, 
101 (96)]), to respect the person (i. 6. the external condi- 
tion of a man), to have respect of persons: Jas. ii. 9.* 

προσωπο-λήπτης (LT Tr WH -λήμπτης [see M, μ])» -0v, 
6, (a Hellenistic formation fr. πρόσωπον and λαμβάνω; 
see λαμβάνω, I. 4 p. 370° bot.), an accepter [A. V. re- 
specter] of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptor): Acts X« 
34. Not found elsewhere [exc. in Chrysost. ].* 


TportwTodnryyia 


προσωποληψία (LT Tr WH -λημψία [see M, μ7), -as, 
ἡ, (a Hellenistic formation; [see προσωπολήπτης }), re- 
spect of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptio), partiality, 
the fault of one who when called on to requite or to give 
judgment has respect to the outward circumstances of 
men and not to their intrinsic merits, and so prefers, as 
the more worthy, one who is rich, high-born, or power- 
ful, to another who is destitute of such gifts: Ro. ii. 11; 
Eph. vi. 9; Col. iii. 25; plur. (which relates to the vari- 
ous occasions and instances in which this fault shows 
itself [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 8 128, 2, 27), 748. 11. 1. (Ee- 
cles. writ.)* 

πρόσωπον, -ov, τό, (fr. πρός and ὦψ, cf. μέτωπον), fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. hundreds of times for 0°33, also for 
DDN, ete. ; 1. a. the face, i. 6. the anterior part 
of the human head: Mt. vi. 16, 17; xvii. 2; xxvi. 67; 
Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. [ix. 29]; xxii. 64 [Τ Tr WH om. Lehm. 
br. the cl.]; Acts vi. 15; 2 Co. iii. 7,13, 18; [xi. 20]; Rev. 
iv. 7; ix. 7; x.1; τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως, the face with 
which one is born [A. V. his natural face], Jas. i. 23; 
πίπτειν emt πρόσ. [cf. W. § 27, 1n.; 122 (116)]and ἐπὶ τὸ 
mpoo., Mt. xvii. 6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; xvii. 16; 1 Co. 
xiv. 25; [Rev. vii. 11 Rec.; πίπτ. ἐπὶ τὰ πρόσ., Rev. xi. 
16; vii. 11GLT Tr WH]; ἀγνοούμενός τινι τῷ προσώπῳ, 
unknown to one by face, i.e. personally unknown, Gal. i. 
22; bereaved of one προσώπῳ, οὐ καρδίᾳ [ A. V. in pres- 
ence, not in heart], 1 Th. ii. 17; κατὰ πρόσωπον, in or 
towards (i. e. so as to look into) the face, i.e. before, in 
the presence of, [see κατά, II.1 6.7 : opp. to ἀπών, 2 Co. x. 
1; with τινός added, before (the face of) one, Lk. ii. 31; 
Acts iii. 13; ἔχω τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον, i. 6. to have one 
present in person [A. V. face to face], Acts xxv. 16; 
ἀντέστην κατὰ πρόσωπον, I resisted him to the face (with 
a suggestion of fearlessness), Gal. ii. 11, (κατὰ πρόσωπον 
λέγειν τοὺς λόγους, Polyb. 25, 5, 2; add Job xvi. 8; but 
in Deut. vii. 24; ix. 2; Judg. ii. 14; 2 Chr. xiii. 7, ἀντι- 
στῆναι κατὰ πρόσ. twos simply denotes to stand against, 
resist, withstand); ta κατὰ πρόσ. the things before the 
face, i. 6. open, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7. Expressions 
modelled after the Hebrew: ὁρᾶν τὸ πρόσωπόν τινος, to 
see one’s face, see him personally, Acts xx. 25; Col. ii. 1; 
ἰδεῖν, 1 Th. 11. 17; iii. 10; θεωρεῖν, Acts xx. 38 [ef. θεωρέω, 
2a.]; particularly, βλέπειν τὸ πρόσ. τοῦ θεοῦ (see βλέπω, 
1 b. B.), Mt. xviii. 10; ὁρᾶν τ. πρ. τ. θεοῦ (see ὁράω, 1), 
Rey. xxii. 4; ἐμφανισθῆναι τῷ προσ. τοῦ θεοῦ, to appear 
before the face of God, spoken of Christ, the eternal 
priest, who has entered into the heavenly sanctuary, 
Heb. ix. 24; in imitation of the Hebr. 09-bx Ὁ))9 
we have the phrase πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον, face (turned 
[see πρός, I. 1 a. p. 541]) to face (εἶδόν τινα, Gen. xxxii. 
30; Judg. vi. 22): trop. βλέπω se. τὸν θεόν, see God face 
to face, i.e. discern perfectly his nature, will, purposes, 
1 Co. xiii. 12; ἃ person is said to be sent or to go πρὸ 
προσώπου τινός (7D >395) [ef. W. § 65, 4 b. fin.; B. 319 
(274)], i.e. before one, to announce his coming and re- 
move the obstacles from his way, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; 
LK. i. 76; vii. 27, (Mal. iii. 1); ix. 52; x. 13 πρὸ προσ. 
τινός, (of time) before a thing, Acts xiii. 24 (so 1999 in 


501 


προσωπον 


Am. i. 1; Zech. viii. 10; where the Sept. simply πρό [cf. 
πρό, b. p. 536" bot.]). πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δό- 
ξης τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν προσώπῳ ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, that we may 
bring forth into the light the knowledge of the glory of 
God as it shines in the face of Jesus Christ, 2 Co. iv. 6 
(Paul really means, the majesty of God manifest in the 
person of Christ; but the signification of πρόσωπον 
is ‘face,’ and Paul is led to use the word by what he had 
said in iii. 13 of the brightness visible in the face of 
Moses). b. countenance, look (Lat. vultus), i. e. the 
face so far forth as it is the organ of sight, and (by its 
various movements and changes) the index of the inward 
thoughts and feelings: κλίνειν τὸ πρόσ. εἰς τὴν γῆν, to bow 
the face to the earth (a characteristic of fear and anx- 
iety), Lk. xxiv.5; Hebraistie phrases relating to the 
direction of the countenance, the look: τὸ πρόσωπον τοῦ 
κυρίου ἐπί τινα, sc. ἐστίν, the face of the Lord is (turned) 
upon one, i.e. he looks upon and watches him, 1 Pet. iii. 12 
(fr. Ps. xxiii. (xxxiv.) 17); ornpitew τὸ πρόσ. (Hebr. ni 
or Ὁ)3 73; οἵ. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 1109 on the same 
form of expression in Syriac, Arabic, Persian, Turkish) 
τοῦ πορεύεσθαι eis with an ace. of the place [ A.V. stead- 
fastly to set one’s face to go ete. (see στηρίζω, a.)], Lk. ix. 
51; moreover, even τὸ πρόσ. τινός ἐστι πορευόμενον eis 
with ace. of place, ib. 53 (τὸ πρόσωπόν σου πορευόμενον 
ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν, 2S. xvii. 11); ἀπὸ προσώπου τινὸς φεύ- 
yew, to fice in terror from the face (Germ. Anblick) of 
one enraged, Rev. xx. 11; κρύπτειν τινά ete. (see κρύπτω, 
a.), Rev. vi. 16; ἀνάψυξις ἀπὸ προσώπου θεοῦ, the re- 
freshing which comes from the bright and smiling coun- 
tenance of God to one seeking comfort, Acts iii. 20 (19); 
on 2 Th. i. 9 see ἀπό, p.59* mid.; μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου cov, 
se. ὄντα, in the presence of thy joyous countenance [see 
μετά, I. 2b. B.], Acts ii. 28 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11); εἰς 
πρόσωπον τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν, turned unto [i. 6. in (R.V.) ] the 
face of the churches as the witnesses of your zeal, 2 Co. 
vili. 24; ἵνα ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων... . διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαρι- 
στηθῇ, that from many faces (turned toward God and ex- 
pressing the devout and grateful feelings of the soul) 
thanks may be rendered by many (accordingly, both ἐκ 
πολλ. προσ. and διὰ πολλῶν belong to εὐχαριστηθῇ [cf. 
Meyer ad loc.; see below]), 2 Co. 1. 11. ἀπὸ προσώπου 
τινός (7D 5232}. from the sight or presence of one, Acts v. 
41; vii. 45 [here A.V. before the face; Rev. xii. 14]; ἐν 
προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ, in the presence of Christ, i. e. Christ 
looking on (and approving), 2 Co. ii. 10 (Proy. viii. 30) ; 
[some would render πρόσωπον here and in i. 11 above 
person (cf. R.V.):— here nearly i. q. on the part of (Vulg. 
in persona Christi); there i. q. ‘an individual’ (Plut. de 
garrul. 13 p. 509 b.; Epict. diss. 1, 2,7; Polyb. 8, 13,5; 
12, 27,10; 27,6,4; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1,1; 47,6; Phryn. 
p- 379, and Lobeck’s note p. 380)]. c. Hebrais- 
tically, the appearance one presents by his wealth or poy- 
erty, his rank or low condition; outward circumstances, 
external condition; so used in expressions which denote 
to regard the person in one’s judgment and treatment of 
men: βλέπειν eis πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων, Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. 
xii. 14; θαυμάζειν πρόσωπα, Jude 16 ; λαμβάνειν πρόσωποι 


προτάσσω 


(τινός), Lk. xx. 21; Gal. ii. 6, (on which see βλέπω, 2 6.» 
θαυμάζω, λαμβάνω, 1. 4). καυχᾶσθαι ἐν προσώπῳ καὶ οὐ 
καρδίᾳ, to glory in those things which they simulate 
in look, viz. piety, love, righteousness, although their 
heart is devoid of these virtues, 2 Co. ν. 12, ef. 1 S. xvi. 
7. 2. the outward appearance of inanimate things 
ΓΑ. V. face (exe. in Jas. as below) ]: τοῦ ἄνθους, Jas. i. 
11; τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τῆς γῆς, Mt. xvi. ὃ [here T br. WH reject 
the pass.]; Lk. xii. 56 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 30); (so in Lat., 
naturae vullus, Ovid. metam. 1, 6; maris facies, Verg. 
Aen. 5, 768; on this use of the noun /ucies see Gell. noc- 
tes atticae 13, 29); surface: τῆς γῆς, Lk. xxi. 35; Acts 
xvii. 26 [on the omitted art. here cf. was, I. 1 ¢.], (Gen. 
ii. 6; xi. 8).* 

προ-τάσσω : pf. pass. ptep. mporeraypevos ; 1. to 
place before. 2. to appoint before, define beforehand : 
χρόνον, Soph. Trach. 164; καιρούς, pass. Acts xvii. 26 
Ree. (see προστάσσω. 2); νόμους, pass. 2 Mace. viii. 36." 

προ-τείνω : 1 aor. προέτεινα ; [fr. Hdt.down]; to stretch 
Sorth, stretch out: ὡς προέτειναν [ Rec. -νεν] αὐτὸν τοῖς ἱμᾶ- 
ow, when they had stretched him out for the thongs i.e. 
to receive the blows of the thongs, (by tying him up to 
a beam or a pillar; for it appears from vs. 29 that Paul 
had already been bound), Acts xxii. 25 [W. § 31 init. ; 
al. (cf. R. V. txt.) ‘with the thongs’ (cf. iuas) ].* 

πρότερος, -a, -ov, (compar. of πρό); [fr. Hom. down], be- 
Jore, prior; of time, former: ἡ προτέρα ἀναστροφή, Eph. 
iv. 22. Neut. adverbially, before (something else is or 
was done): Jn. vii. 51 RG; 2 Co. i. 15; opp. to ἔπειτα, 
Ileb. vii. 27; before i.e. aforetime, in time past: Jn. vii. 
50[L Tr WIL]; Heb. iv. 6; and RGin 1 Tim. i. 13; also 
τὸ πρότερον (contrasting the past with the present [cf. 
πάλαι, 1 fin.]), Jn. vi. 62; ix. 8, and LT Tr WH in 1 Tim. 
i. 13, (1 Mace. iii. 46; v. 1; xi. 34, 39; Deut. ii.12; Josh. 
xi. 10; Hdt. 7, 75; Xen., Plat.) ; i.q. our the first time, 
Gal. iv. 13 (on which cf. Meyer); it is placed between 
the art. and the noun, as αἱ πρότερον ἡμέραι, the former 
days, Heb. x. 32; αἱ πρότ. ἐπιθυμίαι, the lusts which you 
formerly indulged, 1 Pet. i. 14.* 

προ-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. προεθέμην; [fr. Hom. down]; 
1. to place before, to set forth, (cf. mpd, ἃ. a.]; spec. to 
set forth to be looked at, expose to view: Ex. xl.4; 4 Mace. 
viii. 11; Ael. ν. ἢ. 14, 8; and often in the mid. in this 
sense: ποτήρια ἀργύρεά τε καὶ χρύσεα, his own cups, Hdt. 
3, 148; fo expose to public view, in which sense it is the 
technical term with profane authors in speaking of the 
bodies of the dead, [70 let lie in state], (cf. Passow s. v. I. 2; 
[L. and 8.s. v. II. 1]; Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 115 e.; 
[Kriiger on Thue. 2, 34, 1]); the mid. points to the own- 
er of the thing exposed: so with τινά and a pred. ace. 
Ro. ili. 25 (the mid. seems to denote that it was his 
own Son whom he thus “set forth”; ef. viii. 32). 2: 
Mid. to set before one’s self, propose to one’s self; to 
purpose, determine, (Plato, Polyb., al.) : foll. by the inf. 
Ro. i. 13; with an ace. of the thing and ἐν αὐτῷ [(sic) ; 
see αὑτοῦ] added, in himself (W. § 38, 6; [cf. p. 152 
(144)]), Eph. i. 9; [al. (reading ἐν αὐτῷ with L T Tr 
WIT) render ‘in him,’ i. e. (probably) Christ].* 


552 


προφητεύω 


προ-τρέπω: 1 aor. mid. ptcp. προτρεψάμενος ; to urge 
forwards, exhort, encourage, (often so by Attic writ. 
both in the act. and the mid.): Acts xviii. 27. (Sap. 
xiv. 18; 2 Mace. xi. 7. [From Hom. down.]) * 

προ-τρέχω : 2 aor. προέδραμον; to run before, to outrun: 
Jn. xx. 4; with ἔμπροσθεν added, i. 6. ahead, in advance, 
[R. V.‘to run on before’], cf. W. 603 (561); [B. § 151, 
27], Lk. xix. 4; ἔμπρ.- with the gen. of a pers. Tob. xi. 2. 
(1 S. viii. 11; Xen., Isoer., Theophr., al.) * 

προ-ὑπ-άρχω: impf. mpoimnpxov; fr. Thue. and Plato 
down; to be before, exist previously: with a ptep. Acts 
viii. 9; προῦπῆρχον ὄντες, Lk. xxiii. 12; ef. Bornemann, 
Schol. ad h. ].; W. 350 (328); [B. § 144, 14].* 

πρό-φασις, -ews, ἡ, (mpodaive, i.e. prop. ‘to cause to 
shine before’ [or ‘forth’; but many derive πρόφασις di- 
rectly fr. πρό-φημι]), fr. Hom. down; a. a pretext 
(alleged reason, pretended cause) : τῆς πλεονεξίας, such as 
covetousness is wont to use, 1 Th. ii. 5 ([A. V. cloak of 
covelousness] the meaning being, that he had never mis- 
used his apostolic office in order to disguise or to hide ava- 
ricious designs) ; πρόφασιν ἔχειν (a phrase freq. in Grk. 
auth., cf. Passow s. v. mp. 1 Ὁ. vol. ii. p. 1251"; [L. and S. 
s. Vv. 1.3 e.]) περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, Jn. xv. 22 [A. V.mrg. R.V. 
excuse |. Ὁ. show: προφάσει ὡς κτλ. [A. V.] under 
color as though they would etc. Acts xxvii. 30; προφάσει, 
[A. V. for a pretence], in pretence, ostensibly: Mt. xxiii. 
14 (18) Ree.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; Phil. i. 18." 

προ-φέρω ; [fr. Hom. down]; to bring forth : τὶ ἔκ τίνος, 
Lk. vi. 45." 

προφητεία, -as, 7, (προφητεύω. q. v-), Hebr. 7812), 
prophecy, i. e. discourse emanating from divine inspira- 
tion and declaring the purposes of God, whether by re- 
proving and admonishing the wicked, or comforting the 
afflicted, or revealing things hidden; esp. by foretell- 
ing future events. Used in the N. T.—of the utter- 
ances of the O. T. propkets: Mt. xiii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 20, 21 
(on this pass. see γίνομαι, 5 e.a.) ; —of the prediction of 
events relating to Christ’s kingdom and its speedy tri- 
umph, together with the consolations and admonitions 
pertaining thereto: Rev. xi. 6; xxii.19; τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς 
προφητείας, the spirit of prophecy, the divine mind, to 
which the prophetic faculty is due, Rev. xix. 10; οἱ λόγοι 
τῆς προφητείας, Rey. 1.8; xxii. 7, 10,18; -- οὗ the endow- 
ment and speech of the Christian teachers called mpo- 
para (see προφήτης, 11. 1£.): Ro. xii. 6; 1 Co. xii. 10; 
xiii. 2; xiv. 6,22; plur. the gifts and utterances of 
these prophets, 1 Co. xiii.8; 1 Th. v. 20;—spee. of the 
prognostication of those achievements which one set 
apart to teach the gospel will accomplish for the king- 
dom of Christ, 1 Tim. iv. 14; plur. i. 18 [see προάγω, 2 a. 
and ef. the Comm.]. ({Sept., Joseph.]; among native 
Grk. writ. used only by Leian. Alex. 40, 60; [to which 
add inserr. (see L. and §. s. v. I.)].)* 

προφητεύω ; fut. προφητεύσω ; impf. mpoepnrevov (Acts 
xix. 6 RG) and ἐπροφήτευον (ibid. LT Tr WH; [1 K. 
xxii. 12]; Jer. [ii. 8]; xxiii. 21; xxv. 13); 1 aor. προεφή- 
τευσα (RG in Mt. vii. 22; xi.13; xv.7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. 1. 
67; [Jn. xi. 51; Jude 147) and ἐπροφήτευσα (which form 


προφήτης 


cod. Sin. gives everywh., and T Tr WH have everywh. 
restored, and Lchm. also with the single exception of 
Jude 14; add, Sir. xlviii. 13; 1 Esdr. vi. 1; Jer. xxxiii. 
(xxvi.) 9, 11, 20; xxxv. (xxviil.) 8; xxxvi. (xxix.) 31; 
the Alexandrian translators more com. use the forms 
προεφήτευον, προεφήτευσα, pf. ptcp. προπεφητευκώς, Eus. 
h. 6. 5, 17; pf. pass. int. προπεφητεῦσθαι, Clem. Alex. 
strom. p. 603; on the forms used by Justin M. see Otto’s 
prolegg. to his works, I. i. p. xxv. ed. 3; ef. [WH. App. 
Ῥ- 162; Veitch 8. v.]; W. § 12,5; [B. 35 (30sq.)]; ef. 
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 268; [Soph. Lex. s. v.]); (προφήτης, 
4: v-); Sept. for 83) and $3307; Vulg. propheio [three 
times prophelizo]; to prophesy, i.e. to be a prophet, 
speak forth by divine inspiration; to predict (Hat., Pind., 
Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; a. univ.: Mt. vii. 22. b. 
with the idea of foretelling future events pertaining esp. to 
the kingdom of God: Mt. xi. 13; Acts ii. 17, 18; xxi. 9; 
περί twos, Mt. xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 10; ἐπί τινι, over 
i. e. concerning one (see ἐπί, B. 2 f. B. p. 234"), Rev. x. 11; 
εἴς τινα (i. 6. Christ), Barn. ep. 5,6; προφ. foll. by λέγων 
with the words uttered by the prophet, Jude 14; foll. by 
ὅτι, Jn. xi. 51. c. to utter forth, declare, a thing 
which can only be known by divine revelation : Mt. xxvi. 68; 
Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xxii. 64, cf. vii. 39; Jn. iv. 19. d. 
to break forth under sudden impulse in lofty discourse or 
in praise of the divine counsels: Lk. i. 67; Acts xix. 6, (1 
S. x. 10,11; xix. 20, 21, ete.) ; — or, under the like prompt- 
ing, fo teach, refute, reprove, admonish, comfort others (see 
προφήτης, II. 1 £.), 1 Co. xi. 4, 5; xiii. 9; xiv. 1, 3, 4, 5, 
24, 31, 39. e. to act as a prophet, discharge the 
prophetic office: Rev. xi. 3. [On the word see Trench, 
N. T. Syn. § vi.]* 

προφήτης, -ov, 6, (πρόφημι, to speak forth, speak out; 
hence prop. ‘one who speaks forth’; see πρό, ἃ. a.), Sept. 


- = . 
for w2) (which comes fr. the same root as (Gs: ‘to di- 


vulge,’ ‘make known,’ ‘announce’ [ef. Fleischer in De- 
litzsch, Com. τι. d. Gen., 4te Aufl. p. 551 sq.], therefore 
prop. i. q. interpreter, Ex. vii. 1, ef. iv. 16; hence an in- 
lerpreter or spokesman for God; one through whom God 
speaks; cf. esp. Bleek, Einl. in ἃ. A. T. 4te Aufl. p. 309 
[Β. Ὁ. s. v. Prophet and reff. there; esp. also Day’s 
note on Oehler’s O. T. Theol. § 161, and W. Robertson 
Smith, Prophets of Israel, p. 389 (note on Lect. ii.)]), 
one who speaks forth by divine inspiration; I. In 
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., and Pind. down 1. an 
interpreter of oracles (whether uttered by the gods or 
the μάντεις), or of other hidden things. 2. a fore- 
teller, soothsayer, seer. II. In the N. T. 1. 
one who, moved by the Spirit of God and hence his organ 
or spokesman, solemnly declares to men what he has re- 
ceived by inspiration, esp. future events, and in particular 
such as relate to the cause and kingdom of God and to hu- 
man salvation. The title is applied to a. the O.T. 
prophets, —and with allusion to their age, life, death, 
deeds: Mt. v.12; xii. 39; xiii.17; xxiii. 29-31; Mk. vi. 
15; Lk. iv. 27; x. 24; xi.47; xiii. 28; Jn. viii. 52, 53; 
Acts iii. 25; vii. 52; xiii. 20; Ro. xi.3; 1 Th. ii. 15; Heb. 


503 


προφήτης 


ΧΙ. 82; «68. ν- 10; appeal is made to their utteranves as 
having foretold the sa deeds, death, of Jesus the 
Messiah: Mt. i. 22; 11. 5, 15,17, 23; iii.3; iv. 14; viii. 
17 ΧΊΣ 90: χαῖν lige KITT: ce xxi. 4; xxiv. 15; xxvi. 56; 
xxvii. 9; Mk. xiii. 14 Ree. ; Lk. i. 70; iii. 45 iv. 17; xviii. 
31; xxiv. 25; Jn. i. 23,45 (46); xii. 38; Acts ii. 16; iii. 
18, 21, 24; vii. 37,48; x.43; xili. 27; xv. 15; xxvi. 22 βα.; 
Ro. i. 2; Heb. i.1; 1 Pet. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 2; Rev. x. 7; 
in the number of prophets David also is reckoned, as one 
who predicted the resurrection of Christ, Acts ii. 30 sq.; 
so too is Balaam, 2 Pet. ii. 16 (see Βαλαάμ). by meton. 
προφῆται is put for the books of the prophets: Lk. xxiv. 
27, 44; Acts viii. 28; xiii. 15; xxiv. 14; xxviii. 23; ἐν 
τοῖς προφήταις, i. q. ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφ. (Acts vii. 42), in 
the volume of the prophets (which in Hebr. has the title 
Ὁ 3232), Jn. vi. 45; Acts xiii. 40;—or for the teaching 
set forth in their books: Mt. v.17; vii. 12; xxii. 40; 
Lk. xvi. 29, 31; Acts xxvi. 27. See νόμος, 4. b. 
John the Baptist, the herald of Jesus the Messiah: 

Mt. xxi. 26; Mk. vi. 15; xi. 32; Lk. i. 76; xx. 6, whom 
Jesus declares to be greater Tee the O. T. yen be- 
cause in him the hope of the Jews respecting Elijah as 
the forerunner of the Messiah was fulfilled: Mt. xi. 9- 
11, 14, (cf. xvii. 11,12; Mk. ix. 12 sq.) ; Lk. vii. 28[R α 
T Tr br.]. c. That illustrious prophet whom the 
Jews (apparently on the ground of Deut. xviii. 15) ex- 
pected to arise just before the Messiah’s advent: Jn. i. 
21, 25; vii. 40. those two illustrious prophets, the one 
Elijah, the other Enoch or Moses [but ef. the Comm. ; 
e. g. Stuart, Com. vol. ii. p. 219 sq.], who according to 
the writer of the Apocalypse will publicly appear shortly 
before the visible return of Christ from heaven: Rey. xi. 
10 (cf. 3). ἃ. the Messiah: Acts iii. 22, 23; vii. 37, 
after Deut. xviii. 15; Jesus the Messiah, inasmuch as he 
is about to fulfil the expectation respecting this Messiah, 
Mt. xxi. 11; Jn. vi. 14. e. univ. a man filled with 
the Spirit of God, who by God’s authority and command in 
words of weight pleads the cause of God and urges the sai- 
vation of men: Mt. xxi. 46; Lk. xiii. 833; xxiv. 19; Jn. 
vii. 52; in the proverb that a prophet is without honor in 
his own country, Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi.4; Lk. iv. 24; Jn. 
iv. 44. he may be known —now by his supernatural 
knowledge of hidden things (even though past), Lk. vii. 
39; Jn. iv. 19, (προφήτης ἀληθείας ἐστὶν 6 πάντοτε πάντα 
εἰδώς, τὰ μὲν γεγονότα ws ἐγένετο, Ta δὲ γινόμενα ws γίνεται, 
τὰ δὲ ἐσόμενα ὡς ἔσται, Clem. hom. 2, 6),— now by his 
power of working miracles, Lk. vii. 16; xxiv.19; Jn. ix. 
17; such a prophet Jesus is shown to have been by the 
passages cited, nor is it denied except by his enemies, Lk. 
vii. 39; Jn. vii. 52. f. The prophets that appeared 
in the apostolic age among the Christians: Mt. x. 41; 
xxiii. 34; Acts xv. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 29,37; Rev. xxii. 6,9; 
they are associated with apostles in LE. xi. 49; 1 Co. 
xii. 28, 29; Eph. ii. 20; iii.5; iv. 11; Rev. xviii. 20; they 
discerned and did what was best for the Christian cause, 
Acts xiii. 1sq.; foretold certain future events, Acts xi. 
27 sq.; xxi. 10sqq.; and in the religious assemblies of 
the Christians, being suddenly seized by the Spirit (whose 


σπροφητικός 


promptings, however, do not impair their self-govern- 
ment, 1 Co. xiv. 32), give utterance in glowing and ex- 
alted but intelligible language to those things which the 
Holy Spirit teaches them, and which have power to in- 
struct, comfort, encourage, rebuke, convict, stimulate, 
their hearers, 1 Co. xiv. 3,24. [Cf. Harnack, Lehre der 
Zwolf Apostel, Proleg. § 5 i. 2 p. 93 sqq. 119 sqq.; Bon- 
wetsch in (Luthardt’s) Zeitschr. f. kirehl. Wissen. τι. s. w. 
1884, pp. 408 sqq. 460 sqq.] g. Prophets both of the 
Old Test. and of the New are grouped together under 
the name προφῆται in Rev. xi. 18; xvi. 6; xviii. 24. 2 
a poet (because poets were believed to sing under divine 
inspiration) : so of Epimenides, Tit. i. 12. 

προφητικός, -7, -ov, (προφήτης), proceeding from a 
prophet; prophetic: Ro. xvi. 26; 2 Pet.i.19. [Philo de 
migr. Abr. § 15, etc.; Leian. Alex. 60; eccles. writ. ]* 

προφῆτις, -.dos, 7, (προφήτης), Sept. for 782), a proph- 
etess (Vulg., Tertull. prophetissa, prophetis), a woman to 
whom future events or things hidden from others are at 
times revealed, either by inspiration or by dreams and 
visions: Lk. ii. 36; Rev. ii. 20. In Grk. usage, a female 
who declares or interprets oracles (Eur., Plat., Plut.) : ἡ 
προφῆτις τῆς ἀληθείας ἱστορία, Diod. 1, 2.” 

προ-φθάνω: 1 aor. προέφθασα; to come before, to antici- 
pate: αὐτὸν προέφθασε λέγων, he spoke before him [R.V. 
spake first to him], or anticipated his remark, Mt. xvii. 
25. (Aeschyl., Eur., Arstph., Plut.; Sept.) * Ξ 

προ-χειρίζω (πρόχειρυς at hand [ef. πρό, d. a.] or ready): 
1 aor. mid. προεχειρισάμην; pf. pass. ptep. προκεχειρισμέ- 
vos; to put into the hand, to deliver into the hands: far 
more freq. in the mid. to take into one’s hands; trop. to 
set before one’s self, to propose, to determine; with an acc. 
of the pers. to choose, to appoint, (Isoer., Polyb., Dion. 
Hal., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. iii. 7; viii. 9; Ex. iv. 13): foll. 
by an inf. of purpose, Acts xxii. 14; τινά with a pred. 
ace. Acts xxvi. 16; twa with a dat. of the pers. for one’s 
use, Josh. 111. 12; for one’s salvation, pass. Acts iii. 20 for 
Ree. προκεκηρυγμένον (cf. προκηρύσσω, 2).* 

προ-χειρο-τονέω, -@: pf. pass. ptep. προκεχειροτονημένος ; 
(see χειροτονέω) ; to choose or designate beforehand: Acts 
x. 41. (Plat. lege. 6 p. 765 b.e., [Aeschin., Dem.], Dio 
Cass. 50, 4.) * 

Πρόχορος, [-ov, 6, (lit. ‘leader of the dance’)], Proch’- 
orus, one of the seven ‘deacons’ of the church at Jeru- 
salem: Acts vi. 5.* 

πρύμνα, -ης, ἡ, (fem. of the adj. πρυμνός, -, -ov, last, 
hindmost; used substantively with recessive accent; [cf. 
W. 227}. fr. Hom. down, the stern or hinder part of a 
ship: Mk. iv. 38; Acts xxvii. 29; opp. to mpapa, ib. 41." 

πρωΐ [WH πρωί (cf. I, ε, fin.)] (Attic πρῴ [ef. W. § 5, 
4d.]), adv., (fr. πρό), fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for ἼΡΞ, 
in the morning, early, (opp. to ὀψέ) : Jn. xviii. 28 GL Τ' 
Tr WH; Mt. xvi. 3 (opp. here to ὀψίας γενομένης [but 
T br. WH reject the pass.]); [xxi. 18 T Tr txt. WH]; 
Mk. i. 35; xi. 20; xvi. 9; [πρωΐ, σκοτίας ἔτι οὔσης, Jn. xx. 
1]; λίαν πρωΐ, foll. [in RG] by a gen. of the day (ef. 
Ktihner § 414, 5c. β. ii. p. 292), Mk. xvi. 2; ἅμα πρωΐ, 
Mt. xx. 1; ἐπὶ τὸ ποωΐ, Mk. xv. 1 [RG]; ἀπὸ πρωϊ ἕως 


504 


πρῶτος 


ἑσπέρας, Acts xxviii. 28, Used spec. of the fourth watch 
of the night, i.e. the time fr. 3 o’clock in the morning 
till 6, ace. to our reckoning [(ef. B. D. s. v. Watches of 
the Night)], Mk. xiii. 35.* 

πρωΐα, see mpwios. 

πρώϊμος (for the more com. πρώϊος ; οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 52), T Tr WH πρόϊμος (so also cod. Sin.; [see WH. 
App. p- 1527), τη, τον, (πρωΐ), early: ὑετός, the early rain 
(Hebr. AAV, Deut. xi. 14; Jer. v. 24), which fell fr. 
October on [(cf. B.D. 5. v. Rain)], Jas. v. 7 [LT Tr WH 
om. der.; ef. W. 592 (550); B. 82 (72)]. (Xen. oec. 
17, 4; Geop., al.) * 

πρωϊνός [WH πρωινός (see their App. p. 152), Tdf. 
ed. 7 προϊνός (cf. I, c) }, (for the older πρώϊος, see ὀρθρινός ; 
the same term. in the Lat. serotinus, diutinus), τή, -dv, 
(πρωΐ), pertaining to the morning: ὁ ἀστὴρ 6 mp. Rev. 
ii. 28 (on which see ἀστήρ); xxii. 16 (where Ree. dp- 
θρινός). [Sept.; Babr., Plut., Ath., al.]* 

πρώϊος [WII mparos], -a, -ov, (πρωΐ), early, pertaining 
to the morning, (fr. Hom. down); asa subst. ἡ πρωΐα 
(in full ἡ ὥρα ἡ πρωΐα, 3 Mace. v. 24; [Diod., Joseph., 
al.]; see ὄψιος, 2), Sept. several times for 1)5, morning : 
Mt. xxvii. 1; Jn. xviii. 28 Ree.; xxi. 4 [πρωΐας ἤδη γινο- 
μένης (T WH Tr txt.), when day was now breaking (R.V.)]; 
πρωΐας, in the morning, Mt. xxi. 18 [ἢ ΟἹ, Trmrg.].* 

πρώρα [so RG, πρῶρα Tr], more correctly πρῷρα (see 
Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 142sq.; [Chandler § 164; 
Etym. Magn. p. 692, 34 sq.; ef. 318, 57 sq.; ef.I, c]), 
-as (1, Τ WH -ης, ef. μάχαιρα, init.), ἡ, [contr. fr. πρόειρα 
fr. πρό; Lob. Pathol. Element. ii. 136, ef. Paralip. p. 215], 
fr. Hom. down; the prow or forward part of a ship [R.V. 
foreship]: Acts xxvii. 30; in vs. 41 distinguished fr. ἡ 
πρύμνα." 

πρωτεύω; (πρῶτος); to be first, hold the first place, 
[A. V. have the pre-eminence]: Col. i. 18. (From Xen. 
and Plat. down.) * 

πρωτοκαθεδρία, -as, 7, (πρῶτος and καθέδρα q. v.), a ε11- 
ting in the first seat, the first or chief seat: Mt. xxiii. 6; 
Mk. xii. 839; Lk. xi. 43; xx. 46. (Eccles. writ.) * 

πρωτο-κλισία, -as, 7, (πρῶτος and κλισία), the first re- 
clining-place, the chief place, at table [ef. Rich, Dict. of 
Rom. and Grk. Antiq. s. v. lectus tricliniaris; the rela- 
tive rank of the several places at table varied among 
Persians, Greeks, and Romans; and what arrangement 
was currently followed by the Jews in Christ’s day can 
hardly, perhaps, be determined; (yet see Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, ii. pp. 207 sq. 494)]: Mt. xxiii. 6; 
Mk. xii. 39; Lk. xi. 43 Lehm. in br.; xiv. 7, 8; xx. 46. 
(Eccles. writ.).* 

πρῶτος, -7, -ov, (super. of πρό, contr. fr. πρόατος, whence 
the Doric πρᾶτος ; the compar. πρότερος see in its place), 
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for }}W8 and often for ἽΝ and 
wer, first; 1. either in time or place, in any 
succession of things or of persons; a. absolutely 
(i. e. without a noun) and substantively ; a. with the 
article: ὁ πρῶτος καὶ 6 ἔσχατος, i. 6. the eternal One, Rev. 
i. 17; ii. 8; xxii. 13; ὁ πρῶτος, sc. τῶν κεκλημένων, Lk. 
xiv. 18; the first of two (cf. W. § 35, 4 Ν. 1: [B. 32 


πρῶτος 


(28}7), Jn. xix. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 30; plur. opp. to οἱ ἔσχα- 
tot, Mt. xx. 16, on which see ἔσχατος. 3 ἃ. Neut. τὸ 
πρῶτον, opp. to τὸ δεύτερον, Heb. x. 9; τὰ πρῶτα, opp. to 
τὰ ἔσχατα, one’s first state, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. 
ii. 20; the first order of things, Rey. xxi. 4. B. 
without the article: Mt. x. 2 (πρῶτος, sc. of the apostles 
to be mentioned); plur., Mt. xix. 80; Mk. x. 31; Lk. 
xiii. 30, (on the meaning of which three pass. see ἔσχα- 
Tos, 2a.); neut. ev πρώτοις, [A. V. first of all], among 
the first things delivered to you by me, 1 Co. xv. 3. b. 
where it agrees with some substantive; a. anar- 
throus, and in place of an adjective: πρώτῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ) 
σαββάτου, on the first day of the week, Mk. xvi. 9; 
φυλακή, opp. to δευτέρα, Acts xii. 10; as a pred. Lk. 1i. 2 
(on which cf. W. § 35, 4 N. 1; [B. §127, 31]). where 
it is added to the subject or the object of the verb (and 
we often use an adv.; W. § 54, 2; [B. §123, 9]): εὑρίσκει 
οὗτος πρῶτος, Jn. i. 41 (42) (where L Tr WH πρῶτον) ; 
add, Jn. viii. 7; xx. 4, 8; Acts xxvii. 43; Ro. x. 19; 1 
Tim. i. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 19; opp. to εἶτα, 1 Tim. ii. 13; ὁ 
πρῶτος ἐμβάς, Jn. v. 4 (the art. belongs to ἐμβάς [G T Tr 
WH om. the pass.]); but Acts xxvi. 23 πρῶτος ἐξ ava- 
στάσεως νεκρῶν is to be translated as the first. By a 
later Grk. usage it is put where πρότερος might have 
been expected with the gen. (ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 717; 
Passow 8. v. πρότερος, B. I. 2 c. ii. p. 1243"; [L. and S. 
ibid. B. 1. 4e.]; Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. 420 sq.; W. 
8 35, 4 N.1; B. § 123, 14): πρῶτός pov ἦν, In. i. 15, 30. 
(οἱ πρῶτοί μου ταῦτα ἀνιχνεύσαντες, Ael. nat. anim. 8, 
12). B. with the article: 6 (7, τό,) πρῶτος (-n, -ov,), 
in a series which is so complete, either in fact or in 
thought, that other members are conceived of as fol- 
lowing the first in regular order; as, τὸν πρῶτον λόγον, 
Acts i. 1; add, Mk. xiv. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 16; Rev. iv. 1, 
7; xiii. 12, ete.; (opp. to ὁ ἔσχατος), ἡ mp. πλάνη, Mt. 
xxvii. 64; add, Mt. xx. 8, 10,16; 1 Co. xv. 45, ete.; also 
‘the first” of two, where Lat. usage requires and the 
Vulg. ordinarily employs prior (cf. W. [and B.] u. s.): 
Mt. xxi. 28, 31 [L Tr WH ὕστερος ; ἄλλους δούλους πλείο- 
vas τῶν πρώτων, Mt. xxi. 36; ἡ πρώτη διαθήκη, Heb. viii. 
7,13; ix. 15, 18; ἡ πρώτη, se. διαθήκη, Heb. ix. 1 GLT 
Tr WH; σκηνή, Heb. ix. 1 Rec., 2, 6,8; ἡ mp. γῆ; ὁ mp. 
οὐρανός, Rey. xxi. 1; ἀνάστασις, Rev. xx.5,6; ἄνθρωπος, 
1 Co. χν. 47; foll. by ὁ δεύτερος, τρίτος, etc.: Mt. xxii. 
25; Mk. xii. 20; Lk. xix. 16; xx. 29; Rev. viii. 7; xvi. 
2; xxi. 19; foll. by ἕτερος, Lk. xvi. 5; ὁ πρῶτος, i. q. the 
former, previous, pristine: τὴν πρώτην πίστιν, the faith 
which they formerly plighted, 1 Tim. v. 12; ἡ πρώτη 
ἀγάπη, Rey. ii. 4; ra mp. ἔργα, ibid. 5. 2. first in 
rank, influence, honor; chief; principal: without the art., 
and absol., πρῶτος chief, (opp. to δοῦλος), Mt. xx. 27; 
Mk. x. 44; opp. to ἔσχατος and διάκονος, Mk. ix. 35; 
added to a noun, principal, ἐντολή, Mt. xxii. 838; Mk. 
xii. 30 [T WH om. Trmrg. br. the cl.]; Eph. vi. 2; with 
a partitive gen., Mk. xii. 28, 29, [see πᾶς, II. 2 Ὁ. y.]; 
1 Tim. i. 15; with the art., Lk. xv. 22; Acts xvii. 4; of 
πρῶτοι τῆς Ταλιλαίας, the chief men of Galilee, Mk. vi. 
21; του λαοῦ, Lk. xix. 47; τῆς πόλεως, Acts xiii. 50; 


500 


TT Pp@TOTOKOS 


τῶν "Iovdaiwy, Acts xxv. 2; xxviii. 17; τῆς νήσου, Acts 
xxvili. 7 [ef. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. p. 208 sq., but see Πό- 
πλιος. 3. neut. πρῶτον as adv., first, αἱ the first; a. 
in order of time: Lk. x. 5; Jn. xviii. 13; Acts xi. 26 
[here T Tr WH πρώτως, q. v-];  foll. by εἶτα, ἔπειτα, or 
δεύτερον, Mk. iv. 28; 1 Co. xv. 46; 1 Th.iv.16; 1 Tim. 
iii. 10; foll. by pera ταῦτα, Mk. xvi. 9 cf. 12; the first 
lime, Opp. to ev τῷ δευτέρῳ (the second time), Acts vii. 
12,13; τὲ πρῶτον καί, first and also (or afterwards), 
i.e. as well as, Ro. i. 16 [but here L Tr mrg. WH br. 
mp-]; ii. 9,10; without τέ, 2 Co. viii. 5; 2 Tim. i. 5. 


Jirst i. e. before anything else is done; first of all: Mt. 


vi. 33; Lk. xii. 1; Jn. vil. 51 LT TrWH; Ro.i. 8; 1 
Tim. ν. 4; 2 Pet. i. 20; iii. 3; πρῶτον πάντων, 1 Tim. ii. 
1. firsti.e. before something else: Mt. viii. 21; Mk. 
vii. 27; ix. 11,12; Lk. xi. 38; xiv. 28; Ro. xv. 24; 2 Th. 
ii. 3; 1 Pet. iv. 17, ete.; before other nations, Acts iii. 
26; xiii. 46; before others [R.V. the first to partake 
ete.],2 Tim. 11. 6; foll. by τότε or καὶ τότε, Mt. v. 24; 
vii. 5; xii. 29; Mk. ili. 27; Lk. vi.42; Jn. ii. 10 [T WH 
om. 1, Trbr. τότε]; ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν [Tdf. om. ip.] me 
before it hated you, Jn. xv. 18 (see 1 b.a.). τὸ πρῶτον, 
αἱ the first i.e. at the time when one did a thing for the 
first time: Jn. x. 40; xii. 16; xix. 39. b. in enumer- 
ating several particulars; first. then, ete.: Ro. iii. 25 1 
Co. xi. 18; xii. 28; Heb. vii. 2; Jas. iii. 17. 

πρωτοστάτης, -ov, 6, (πρῶτος and ἵστημι), prop. one 
who stands in the front rank, a front-rank man, (Thue., 
Xen., Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.; ὥσπερ στρατηγὸς 
πρωτοστάτης, Job xv. 24); hence, a leader, chief, cham- 
pion: trop. [A. V. a ringleader] τῆς αἱρέσεως, Acts xxiv. 
5* 

πρωτοτόκια, -wv, τά, (πρωτότοκος), in the Sept. also 
πρωτοτοκεία [ al. -κεῖα (cf. Chandler § 99), -κία, cod. Venet., 
Aq. ], for 19133, primogeniture, the right of the first-born, 
(in class. Grk. ἡ πρεσβεία, and τὸ πρεσβεῖον) : Heb. xii. 
16. (Philo repeats the word after the Sept. in his alleg. 
lege. 8, 69; sacrif. Abel. §5. Occasionally also in By- 
zant. writ.) * 

πρωτότοκος, -ov, (πρῶτος, τίκτω), Sept. for 433, jfirst- 
born; a. prop.: τὸν υἱὸν αὐτῆς τὸν πρωτ. Mt. i. 25 
(where τὸν πρωτότ. is omitted by L T Tr WH but found 
in cod. Sin. [see Tdf., WH., ad loc.]); Lk. ii. 7; τὰ 
πρωτότοκα αὐτῶν (gen. of the possessor [(?); αὐτῶν is 
more naturally taken w. θίγῃ (W. § 30, 8 6.), as by Prof. 
Grimm himself s. v. @ryyavw]), the first-born whether of 
man or of beast, Heb. xi. 28 (πᾶν πρωτότοκον . . 
ἀνθρώπου ἕως κτήνους. Ex. xii. 29; Ps. civ. (ev.) 36; [Philo 
de cherub. § 16; Poll. 4, 208]). b. trop. Christ is 
called rpwrdroxos πάσης κτίσεως (partit. gen. [see below], 
as in τὰ πρωτότοκα τῶν προβάτων, Gen. iv. 4; τῶν βοῶν, 
Deut. xii. 17; τῶν υἱῶν σου, Ex. xxii. 29), who came into 
being through God prior to the entire universe of created 
things [R. V. the firstborn of all creation] (see κτίσις, 2 
b.), Col. i. 15; —this passage does not with certainty 
prove that Paul reckoned the Adyos in the number of 
created beings (as, among others, (/steri, Paulin. Lehr- 
begriff, p. 315, and Baur, Das Christenthum der drei 


ea! 
- avo 


πρώτως 


ersten Jahrhh. Ist ed. p. 295, hold); since even Origen, 
who is acknowledged to have maintained the eternal 
generation of the Son by the Father, did not hesitate 
to eall him (ef. Gieseler, Kirch.- Gesch. i. p. 261 sq. ed. 
3; [i. 216 Eng. trans. of ed. 4, edited by Smith]) τὸν ἀγένη- 
Tov καὶ πάσης γενετῆς φύσεως πρωτότοκον (ὁ. Cels. 6, 17), 
and even κτίσμα (a term which Clement of Alexandria 
also uses of the λόγος) ; ef. Joan. Damascen. orthod. fid. 
4, 8 καὶ αὐτὸς ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ ἡ κτίσις ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ ; [ἃ]. would 
make the gen. in Col. 1. ο. depend upon the compar. force 
in (the first half of) πρωτότ. (cf. πρωτύτοκος ἐγὼ ἢ σύ, 3 5. 
χῖχ. 43): but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. (esp. for the patris- 
tic interpretation) ]. In the same sense, apparently, he 
is called simply ὁ πρωτότοκος, Heb. 1. 6 ; mp. ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν, 
the first of the dead who was raised to life, Col. i. 18; 
also τῶν νεκρῶν (partit. gen.), Rev. i. 5 [Ree. inserts ἐκ]; 
πρωτύτοκος ἐν πολλοῖς ἀδελφοῖς, who was the Son of God 
lone before those who by his agency and merits are ex- 
alted to the nature and dignity of sons of God, with the 
added suggestion of the supreme rank by which he ex- 
cels these other sons (ef. Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28; Ex. 
iv. 22; Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 9), Ro. viii. 29; ἐκκλησία 
πρωτοτύκων, the congregation of the pious Christian dead 
already exalted to the enjoyment of the blessedness of 
heaven (tacitly opp. to those subsequently to follow them 
thither), Heb. xii. 23; cf. De Wette ad loc. (Anthol. 8, 
34; 9, 213.)* 

πρώτως, adv., first: Actsxi.26TTrWH. Cf. Passow 
s. V. πρότερος fin.; [L.and S. ib. B. [V.; Phryn. ed. Lob. 
p. 311sy.; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 366].* 

πταίω; fut. πταίσω; 1 aor. ἔπταισα; (akin to ΠΕΤΩ 
and πίπτω (ef. Vaniéek p. 466]); fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., 
and Hdt. down; 1. trans. τινά, to cause one to stum- 
ble or fall. 2. intrans. to stumble: δὶς πρὸς τὸν αὐτὸν 
λίθον, Polyb. 31, 19,5. trop. [ef. Eng. trip, stumble] a. 
to err, to make a mistake, (Plat. Theaet. c. 15 p. 160 d.) ; 
to sin: absol. Ro. xi. 11 (ἴδιον ἀνθρώπου φιλεῖν καὶ τοὺς 
mraiovras, Antonin. 7,22); πολλά, in many ways, Jas. iii. 
2; ἐν ἑνὶ (sc. νόμῳ), to stumble in, i.e. sin against, one law, 
Jas. ii. 10 [but see εἷς, 2 a. fin.]; ἐν λόγῳ (for the [more 
com.] simple dat.), to sin in word or speech, Jas. iii. 
2. b. to fall into misery, become wretched, (often 
so in Grk. writ.) : of the loss of salvation, 2 Pet. i. 10. 
[ CE. mpoo-saiw. | * 

πτέρνα, -ης, 7, the heel (of the foot) : ἐπαίρειν τὴν πτέρναν 
ἐπί twa, fo lift up the heel against one, i.e. dropping the 
fir. (which is borrowed either from kicking, or from a 
wrestler tripping up his antagonist), to injure one by 
trickery, Jn. xiii. 18 after Ps. xl. (xli.) 10. (Often in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 1p.) * 

πτερύγιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of πτέρυξ, q. v.), Sept. for 
13; 1. a wing, little wing. 2. any pointed 
extremity (of the fins of fishes, 1.930, Lev. xi. 9-12; 
Deut. xiv. 9, 10; Aristot., Theophr. ; of a part of the 
dress hanging down in the form of a wing, Ruth iii. 9; 
1S. xxiv. 5; [Num. xv. 38]; Poll. 7, 14, 62): τὸ πτερύ- 
ytov τοῦ ναοῦ and τοῦ ἱεροῦ, the top of the temple at Jeru- 
salem, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb. h.e. 2, 23, 11; rod ἱεροῦ. Mt. 


556 


πτύω 


ἵν. δ: Lk. iv. 9: some understand this of the top or 
apex of the sanctuary (rod ναοῦ), others of the top of 
Solomon’s porch, and others of the top of the Royal 
Portico; this last Josephus (antt. 15, 11, 5) says was of 
such great height ὡς εἴ τις am ἄκρου τοῦ ταύτης τέγους 
ἄμφω συντιθεὶς τὰ βάθη διοπτεύοι σκοτοδινιᾶν, οὐκ ἐξικνου- 
μένης τῆς ὄψεως εἰς ἀμέτρητον τὸν βυθόν; (cf. “ Recovery 
of Jerusalem,” esp. ch. ν.]." 

πτέρυξ, -vyos, ἡ, (πτερόν a wing), fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
often for 433; a wing: of birds, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 
34; Rev. xii. 14; of imaginary creatures, Rev. iv. 8; ix. 
9.° 

πτηνός, -1, -όν, (πέτομαι. πτῆναι), furnished with wings ; 
winged, flying: τὰ πτηνά, birds (often so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Co. xv. 39.* 

πτοέω, -@: 1 aor. pass. ἐπτοήθην; (roa terror); from 
Hom. down; 10 terrify; pass. to be terrified (Sept. chiefly 
for NOM): Lk. xxi. 9; xxiv. 37 [Trmrg. WH mrg. θροη- 
Syn. see φοβέω, fin. ]* 

πτόησις, -ews, 1), (πτοέω), lerror: φοβεῖσθαι πτόησιν, i. 4. 
φόβον φοβεῖσθαι, to be afraid with terror [ἃ]. take πτ. 
objectively: R. V. txt. /o be put in fear by any terror], 
1 Pet. iii. 6 (Prov. iii. 25); see φοβέω, 2; [W. § 32, 2; 
Β. §131, 5. (1 Mace. iii. 25; Philo, quis rer. div. her. 
§ 51)]" 

TIrodepats, -iSos, ἡ, Piolemais, a maritime city of Phoe- 
nicia, which got its name, apparently, from Ptolemy 
Lathyrus (who captured it B. c. 103, and rebuilt it more 
beautifully [ef. Joseph. antt. 13, 12, 2 sq.]); it is called 
in Judg. i. 31 and in the Talmud 433’, in the Sept. 
᾿Ακχώ, by the Greeks ἔλκη [on the varying accent cf. 
Pape, Eigennam. s. v. Πτολεμαΐς], and Romans Ace, and 
by modern Europeans [Acre or] St. Jean d’Acre (froma 
church erected there in the middle ages to St. John) ; it 
is now under Turkish rule and contains about 8000 in- 
habitants (ef. Baedeker, Pal. and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 356) : 
Acts xxi. 7. (Often mentioned in the books of the Mac- 
cabees and by Josephus under the name of Πτολεμαΐς, 
cf. esp. b. 7. 2, 10, 2sq.; [see Reland, Palaest. p. 534 sqq.; 
Ritter, Palestine, Eng. trans. iv. p. 361 sqq.].) * 

πτύον, -ov, τό, freq. in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, Attic 
πτέον W. 24, [(perh. fr. r. pu ‘to cleanse’; οἵ. Curtius p. 
498 sq.) ], α winnowing-shovel [A.V. fan; ef. B. D. s.v. 
Agriculture, sub fin.; Rich, Diet. of Antiq. s. vv. ventila- 
brum, pala 2, vannus]: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17.* 

πτύρω: [(ef. Curtius p. 706)]; to frighten, affright: 
pres. pass. ptep. mrupopevos, Phil. i. 28. (Hippoer., 
Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) * 

πτύσμα, -τος, τό, (πτύω, q- V-), spittle: Jn. ix. 6 ((Hip- 
pocr.], Polyb. 8, 14, 5; Or. Sibyll. 1, 365).* 

πτύσσω: 1 aor. ptep. πτύξας; in class. Grk. fr. Hom. 
down; to fold together, roll up: τὸ βιβλίον, Lk. iv. 20 
[A. V. closed]; see ἀναπτύσσω, [and ef. Schlottmann in 
Riehm 5. v. Schrift; Strack in Herzog ed. 2 s. vy. Schreib- 
kunst, etc. Comp.: avaaricca. |* 

πτύω: [(Lat. spuo, our spue; Curtius § 382)]; 1 aor. 
ἔπτυσα; fr. Hom. down; to spit: Mk. vii. 88; viii. 23; 
Jn. ix. 6. [Comp.: ἐκ-, éu-rrie.]* 


θέντες. 


πτῶμα 


πτῶμα, -τος, τό, (πίπτω, pt. πέπτωκα); 1. in Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, a fall, downfall; metaph. a fail- 
ure, defeat, calamity; an error, lapse, sin. 2. that 
which is fallen; hence with the gen. of a pers. or with 
νεκροῦ added, the (fallen) body of one dead or slain, a 
corpse, carcase; later also with vexpod omitted (Polyb., 
Sept., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Hdian.), cf. Thom. Mag. p. 
765 [ed. Ritschl p. 290, 14]; Phryn. ed. Lod. p. 375; 
[W. 23], and so in the N. T.: Mt. xiv. 12 LT Tr WH; 
Mk. xv.45 LT Tr WH; Mt. xxiv. 28; τινός, Mk. vi. 
29; Rev. xi. 8, 9. 

πτῶσιν, -ews, 9, (πίπτω, pf. πέπτωκα), a falling, down- 
fall: prop. τῆς οἰκίας, Mt. vii. 27 (πτώσεις οἴκων, Maneth. 
4, 617); trop. εἰς πτῶσιν πολλῶν (opp. to εἰς ἀνάστασιν), 
that many may fall and bring upon tuemselves ruin, i. e. 
the loss of salvation, utter misery, Lk. ii. 34, cf. Ro. xi. 
11. (Sept. chiefly for 73m, plague, defeat.) * 

πτωχεία, -as, ἡ, (πτωχεύω) ; 1. beggary (Hat. 8, 
14; Arstph. Plut. 549; Plat. lege. 11 p. 936 b.; Lysias 
p- 898, 9; Aristot. poet. c. 23 p. 1459", 6). 2. in the 
N. T. poverty, the condition of one destitute of riches 
and abundance: opp. to πλουτεῖν, 2 Co. viii. 9; opp. to 
πλούσιος, Rev. ii. 9; ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία (opp. to πλοῦ- 
tos), deep i. 6. extceme poverly [see κατά, I. 1 b.], 2 Co. 
viii. 2. (Sept. chiefly for »3}, affliction, misery.) * 

πτωχεύω: 1 aor. ἐπτώχευσα; (πτωχός, q. V.); prop. to 
be a beggar, to beg; so in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down; 
in the N. T. once, to be poor: 2 Co. viii. 9, on which see 
πλούσιος, b. fin. (Tob. iv. 21; Sept. for 927 to be weak, 
afflicted, Judg. vi. 6; Ps. lxxviii. (Ixxix.) 8; for 1) to 
be reduced to want, Prov. xxiii. 21; wi to be needy, 
Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 11.)* ; 

πτωχός, -ή, -ov, (πτώσσω, to be thoroughly frizhtened, 
to cower down or hide one’s self for fear; hence πτωχός 
prop. one who slinks and crouches), often involving the 
idea of roving about in wretchedness [see πένης, fin.; 
“but it always had a bad sense till it was ennobled 
in the Gospels; see Mt. v. 3; Lk. vi. 20, ef. 2 Co. viii. 
9” (L. and 5. 5. v. I.)]; hence 1. in class. Grk. 
from Hom. down, reduced to beggary, begging, mendi- 
cant, asking alms: Lk. xiv. 13, 21; xvi. 20, 22. me 
poor, needy, (opp. to πλούσιος) : Mt. xix. 21; xxvi. 9,11; 
Mk. x. 21; xii. 42, 43; xiv. 5,7; Lk. xviii. 22; xix. 8; 
xxi. 3; Jn. xii. 5, 6,8; xiii. 29; Ro. xv. 26; 2 Co. vi. 10; 
Gal. ii. 10; Jas. ii. 2, 3,6; Rev. xiti.16; in a broader 
sense, destitute of wealth, influence, position, honors; lowly, 
afflicted: Mt. xi. 5; Lk. iv. 18, (fr. Is. xi. 1); vi. 205 vii. 
223 οἱ πτωχοὶ τοῦ κόσμου (partit. gen.), the poor of the 
human race, Jas. ii. 5; but the more correct reading is 
that of LT Tr WH viz. τῷ κόσμῳ [unto the world], i. e. 
the ungodly world being judge, cf. W. § 31, 4a.; B. 
§ 133, 14; [R. V. as to the world (see next head, and ef. 
κύσμος, 7)]. trop. destitute of the Christian virtues and 
the eternal riches, Rev. iii. 17; like the Lat. inops, i. q: 
helpless, powerless to accomplish an end: στοιχεῖα, Gal. iv. 
9 [* bringing no rich endowment of spiritual treasure’ 
(Bp. Lghtft.)]. 3. univ. lacking in anything, with 
a dat. of the respect: τῷ πνεύματι, as respects their 


557 πύλη 


spirit, i.e. destitute of the wealth of learning and intel- 
lectual culture which the schools afford (men of this 
class most readily gave theinselves up to Christ’s teach- 
ing and proved themselves fitted to lay hold of the heav- 
enly treasure, Mt. xi. 25; Jn. ix. 39; 1 Co. i. 26, 27; {aL 
make the idea more inward and ethical: ‘conscious 
of their spiritual need’]), Mt. v. 3; compare with this 
the Ep. of Barn. 19,2: ἔσῃ ἁπλοῦς τῇ καοδίᾳ καὶ πλούσιος 
τῷ πνεύματι, abounding in Christian graces and the riches 
of the divine kingdom. (Sept. for »yy, 99, wr, (TX, 
etc.) * 

πυγμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (πύξ, fr. TIYKQ, Lat. pungo, pupugi, 
[pugnus; O. H. G. ‘fist’, Eng. ‘fist’; cf. Curtius § 384]), 
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 9in3% (Ex. xxi. 18; Is. lviii. 4), 
the fist: πυγμῇ νίπτεσθαι τὰς χεῖρας, to wash the hands 
with the fist, i. e. so that one hand is rubbed with the 
clenched fist of the other [R. V. mrg. (after Theoph., 
al.) up to the elbow; but ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Mes 
siah, ii. 11], Mk. vii. 3 (where Tdf. πυκνά, see πυκνός). 
(Cf. Jas. Morison, Com. ad loc.]* 

“Πύθων, -wros, ὁ, Python; 1. in Grk. mythology 
the name of the Pythian serpent or dragon that dwelt in 
the region of Pytho at the foot of Parnassus in Phocis, 
and was said to have guarded the oracle of Delphi and 
been slain by Apollo. 2. i. ᾳ. δαιμόνιον μαντικόν 
(Hesych. s. v.), @ spirit of divination: πνεῦμα πύθωνος or 
more correctly (with LT Tr WH) πνεῦμα πύθωνα (on 
the union of two substantives one of which has the force 
of an adj. see Matthiae p. 962, 4; [Kiihner § 405, 1; 
Lob. Paralip. 344 sq.]), Acts xvi. 16; some interpreters 
think that the young woman here mentioned was a ven- 
triloguist, appealing to Plutarch, who tells us (mor. p. 
4141 6. de def. orac. 9) that in his time ἐγγαστρίμυθοι were 
called πύθωνες ; [cf. Meyer].* 

πυκνός, -7, τόν, (ΠΥΚΩ, see πυγμή), fr. Hom. down, 
thick, dense, compact; in ref. to time, frequent, often re 
curring, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Tim. v. 
23; neut. plur. πυκνά, as adv. [W. 463 (432); B. § 128, 
2], vigorously, diligently, (?[ef. Morison as in πυγμή ]), 
Mk. vii. 3 Tdf.; often, Lk. v. 33; πυκνότερον, more fre- 
quently, the oflener, Acts xxiv. 26.* 

πυκτεύω ; (πύκτης a pugilist [see πυγμή, init.]); to be a 
boxer, to box, [A. V. fight]: 1 Co. ix. 26. (Eur., Xen., 
Plat., Plut., al.) * 

πύλη, -ns, 7, [perh. fem. of πόλος (cf. Eng. pole i. 6. 
axis) fr. r. wéA-@ to turn (Curtius p. 715)], fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. very often for yw, occasionally for 7, 
sometimes for M3; a gate (of the larger sort, in the 
wall either of a city ora palace; Thom. Mag. [p. 292, 4] 
πύλαι ἐπὶ τείχους - θύραι ἐπὶ οἰκίας) : of a town, Lk. vii. 
12; Acts ix. 24; xvi. 13 LT Tr WH; Heb. xiii. 12; of 
the temple, Acts iii. 10; in the wall of a prison, Acte 
xil. 10; πύλαι Gdov, the gates of Hades (likened to a 
vast prison; hence the ‘ keys’ of Hades, Rev. i. 18), Mt. 
xvi. 18 (on which see κατισχύω) ; Sap. xvi. 18; 8 Mace. 
v. 51, and often by prof. writ.; see Grimm on 3 Mace. 
v.51. ἰπ fig. disc. i. q. access or entrance into any 
state: Mt. vii. 13°, 13° RG Tbr. Tr WH mrg,, 14 RG 


πυλών 


Lbr. Tbr. Tr WH; Lk. xiii. 24 RLmrg. 
omission see προβατικός.] * 

πυλών, -Ovos, 6, (πύλη), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept. 
often for Nd, sometimes for pw; 1. alarge gate: 
of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20; of a house, Acts x. 17; plur. 
(of the gates of a city), Acts xiv. 13; Rev. xxi. 12, 13, 
15, 21, 25; xxii. 14. 2. the anterior part of a house, 
into which one enters through the gate, porch: Mt. xxvi. 
71 (cf. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence ἡ θύρα τοῦ πυ- 
λῶνος, ib. 13." 

πυνθάνομαι; impf. ἐπυνθανόμην; 2 aor. ἐπυθόμην ; [cf. 
Curtius § 328]; a depon. verb; as in class. Grk. fr. 
Hom. down 1. to inquire, ask: foll. by an indir. 
quest. —w. the indic. Acts x. 18; with the opt., Jn. xiii. 
24 RG; Lk. xv. 26; xviii. 36; Acts xxi. 32; foll. by 
a dir. quest., Acts iv. 7; x. 29; xxiii. 19; παρά τινός τι 
[B. 167 (146)], Jn.iv.52; παρά twos foll. by an indir. 
quest. w. the indic. Mt. ii. 4; τὶ περί τινος, Acts xxiii. 
20. 2. to ascertain by inquiry: foll. by ὅτι, Acts 
xxiii. 84 [A. V. understood ].* 

πῦρ, gen. πυρός, τό, [prob. fr. Skr. pu ‘to purify’ (cf. 
Germ. feuer); Vaniéek p. 541; Curtius § 385], fr. Hom. 
down; Hebr. wx; fire: Mt. iii. 10, 12; vii.19; xvii. 15; 
Mk. ix. 22; Lk. iii. 9,17; ix. 54; Jn. xv.6; Actsii. 19; 
xxviii. 5; 1 Co. iii. 13; Heb. xi. 34; Jas. 111. 5; v. 3; Rev. 
Cob OAS ths 17. 18. sau Bie ἈΠ|:15.; Sahig 8» Soe PIF Sap 
8; xx. 9; ἅπτειν πῦρ, to kindle a fire, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr 
txt. WH περιάπτ.]; ἔβρεξε πῦρ καὶ θεῖον, Lk. xvii. 29; 
κατακαίειν τι ev ['T om. WH br. ἐν] πυρί, Rev. xvii. 16; 
xvili. 8; καίομαι πυρί, Mt. xiii. 40 [R LT WH κατακ.]; 
Heb. xii. 18 [W. § 31, 7 d.]; Rev. viii. 8; xxi. 8; φλὸξ 
πυρός, a fiery flame or flame of fire, Acts vii. 30; 2 Th. 
i. 8 Ltxt. Trtxt.; Heb. i. 7; Rev. i.14; ii.18; xix. 12, 
(Ex. iii. 2 cod. Alex.; Is. xxix.6); mip φλογός, a flam- 
ing fire or fire of flame, 2 Th. i.8 RGLmrg. T Trmre. 
WH (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Vat.; Sir. xlv. 19); λαμπάδες πυρός, 
lamps of fire, Rev. iv. 5; στῦλοι πυρός, Rev. x. 1; ἄνθρα- 
kes π᾿ coals of fire, Ro. xii. 20 (see ἄνθραξ) ; γλῶσσαι 
ὡσεὶ πυρός, which had the shape of little flames, Acts ii. 
3; δοκιμάζειν διὰ πυρός, 1 Pet. i. 7; πυροῦσθαι (see πυ- 
pow, b.) ἐκ m. Rev. iii. 18; ὡς διὰ πυρός, as one who in 
a conflagration has escaped through the fire not unin- 
jured, i. 6. dropping the fig. not without damage, 1 Co. 
111. 15; wD 28D, Zech. iii. 2, cf. Am. iv. 11. of the 
fire of hell we find the foll. expressions, — which are 
to be taken either tropically (of the extreme penal tor- 
ments which the wicked are to undergo after their life 
on earth; so in the discourses of Jesus), or literally (so 
apparently in the Apocalypse): τὸ πῦρ, Mk. ix. 44, 46, 
[fT WH om. Tr br. both verses], 48; τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον, 
Mt. xviii. 8; xxv. 41, ef. 4 Mace. xii. 12; ἄσβεστον, Mk. ix. 
43,45 (GT Tr WHom. Lbr. the cl.]; πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην 
ὑπέχειν, Jude 7; γέεννα τοῦ πυρός, Mt. v. 22; xviii. 9; 
Mk. ix. 47 [RG Trbr.]; κάμινος τ. πυρός, Mt. xiii. 42, 
50, (Dan. iii. 6); ἡ λίμνη τοῦ πυρός, Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10, 
14,15; πυρί τηρεῖσθαι, 2 Pet. iii. 7; βασανισθῆναι ἐν πυρί, 
Rey. xiv. 10 (cf. Lk. xvi. 24); βαπτίζειν τινὰ πυρί (see Ba- 
πτίζω, I. b. bb.), Mt. iii. 11; Lk.iii.16. The tongue 


[On its 


558 


πυρράζω 


is called πῦρ, as though both itself on fire and setting 
other things on fire, partly by reason of the fiery spirit 
which governs it, partly by reason of the destructive 
power it exercises, Jas. iii. 6; since fire disorganizes 
and sunders things joined together and compact, it is 
used to symbolize dissension, Lk. xii. 49. Metaphorical 
expressions: ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζειν, to snatch from danger 
of destruction, Jude 23; πυρὶ ἁλίζεσθαι (see ἁλίζω), Mk. 
ix. 49; ζῆλος πυρός, fiery, burning anger [see ζῆλος, 1], 
Heb. x. 27 (πῦρ ζήλου, Zeph.i. 18; iii. 8); God is ealled 
πῦρ καταναλίσκον, as one who when angry visits the ob- 
durate with penal destruction, Heb. xii. 29." 

πυρά, -Gs, ἡ, (πῦρ), fr. Hom. down, a /ire, a pile of 
burning fuel: Acts xxviii. 2 sq.* 

πύργος, -ov, ὁ, (akin to Germ. Burg, anciently Purg; 
[yet ef. Curtius § 413]), as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a 
tower; a fortified structure rising to a considerable height, 
to repel a hostile attack or to enable a watchman to see 
in every direction. The πύργος ἐν τῷ Swap [(4: v-)] 
seems to designate a tower in the walls of Jerusalem 
near the fountain of Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4; the tower occu- 
pied by the keepers of a vineyard is spoken of in Mt. 
xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1, (after Is. v. 2); a tower-shaped 
building as a safe and convenient dwelling, Lk. xiv. 28.* 

πυρέσσω; (rip); (Vulg., Cels., Senec., al. febricito) ; 
to be sick with a fever: Mt. viii.14; Mk.i. 30. (Eur., 
Arstph., Plut., Leian., Galen, al.) * 

πυρετός, -ov, ὁ, (πῦρ); 1. fiery heat (Hom. Il. 22, 
31 [but interpreters now give it the sense of ‘fever’ in 
this pass.; ef. Hbeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.; Schmidt, Syn. 
ch. 60 ὃ 147). 2. fever: Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31; 
Lk. iv. 39; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xxviii. 8, (Hippoer., Arstph., 
Plat., sqq.; Deut. xxviii. 22); mup. μέγας, Lk. iv. 38 (as 
Galen de different. feb. 1, 1 says σύνηθες τοῖς ἰατροῖς ὀνο- 
μάζειν . - - τὸν μέγαν τε καὶ μικρὸν πυρετόν ; [cf. Wetstein 
on Lk. 1. ¢.]).* 

πύρινος, -ἡ, -ov, (πῦρ), fiery: θώρακες πύρ. 1. 6. shining 
like fire, Rey. ἴἰχ. 17. (Ezek. xxviii. 14, 16; Aristot., 
Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

πυρόω: Pass., pres. mupoduar; pf. ptep. πεπυρωμένος ; 
(rip); fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; to burn with fire, 
to set on fire, to kindle; in the N. T. it is used only in 
the pass. a. to be on fire, to burn: prop. 2 Pet. iii. 
12; trop. of the heat of the passions: of grief, 2 Co. xi. 
29 [Eng. Versions burn (often understood of indig- 
nation, but cf. Meyer); W. 153 (145)]; of anger, 
with τοῖς θυμοῖς added, i. 4. to be incensed, indignant, 
2 Mace. iv. 38; x. 35; xiv. 45; to be inflamed with se x- 
ual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. b. pf. ptep. πεπυρωμέ- 
vos, made to glow [R. V. refined]: Rev. i. 15 [(ef. B. 80 
(69) n.)]; full of fire; fiery, ignited: τὰ βέλη τὰ πεπ. 
darts filled with inflammable substances and set on fire, 
Eph. vi. 16 (Apollod. bibl. 2, 5, 2 § 3); melted by fire 
and purged of dross: χρυσίον πεπυρ. ἐκ πυρός, [refined 
by fire], Rev. iii. 18 (so πυρόω in the Sept. for \1¥; as 
τὸ ἀργύριον, Job xxii. 25; Zech. xiii. 9; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7; 
Ixy. (Ixvi.) 10).* 

πυρράζω ; i. q. πυρρὸς γίνομαι, to become glowing, grow 


πυρρὸς 


red, be red: Mt. xvi. 2 sq. [but br. WH reject the pass. ] 
(Byzant. writ.; πυρρίζω in Sept. and Philo.) * 

πυρρός, -d, -όν, (fr. πῦρ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
having the color of fire, red: Rey. vi. 4; xii. 3. Sept. 
several times for D8.* 

Πύρρος [(‘fiery-red’; Fick, Griech. Personennamen, 
p. 75)], του, 6, Pyrrhus, the proper name of a man: 
Acts xx. 4 GLT Tr WH.* 

πύρωσις, -ews, 7, (πυρόω), α burning: Rev. xviii. 9, 18; 
the burning by which metals are roasted or reduced ; 
by a fig. drawn fr. the refiner’s fire (on which cf. Prov. 
xxvii. 21), calamities or trials that test character: 1 Pet. 
iv. 12 (Tertullian ady. Gnost. 12 ne expavescatis ustio- 
nem, quae agitur in vobis in tentationem), ef. i. 7 [(ἡ 
πύρωσις τῆς δοκιμασίας, ‘Teaching’ ete. 16,5)]. (In the 
same and other senses by Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) * 

[πώ, an enclitic particle, see μήπω ete. | 

πωλέω, -&; imp. ἐπώλουν; 1 aor. ἐπώλησα ; pres. pass. 
πωλοῦμαι; (πέλω, πέλομαι, to turn, turn about, [Curtius 
§ 633 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun πωλή; Lod. 
in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 bot.] πωλοῦμαι, Lat. versor, 
foll. by εἰς with acc. of place, to frequent a place; ef. 
the Lat. venio and veneo); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 
720; prop. to barter, i. 6. to sell: absol. (opp. to ἀγορά- 
ζει), Lk. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; of πωλοῦντες (opp. to 
of dyopd¢ovres, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 12; xxv.9; Mk. 
xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with acc. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44; 
xix. 21; xxi. 12; Mk. x. 21; xi. 15; Lk. [xii. 33]; xviii. 
22; xxii. 36; Jn. ii. 14,16; Acts v.1; supply αὐτόν, 
Acts iv. 37; αὐτά, ib. 34; pass. 1 Co. x. 25; with a gen. 
of price added, Mt. x. 29; Lk. xii. 6.* 

πῶλος, του, ὁ (in class. Grk. ἡ also), [Lat. pullus, 
O. H. G. folo, Eng. foal; perh. allied with παῖς ; cf. Cur- 
tius § 387]; 1. a colt, the young of the horse: so 
very often fr. Hom. down. 2. univ. α young crea- 
ture: Ael. v. ἢ. 4, 9; spec. of the young of various ani- 
mals; in the N. T. of a young ass, an ass’s colt: Mt. xxi. 
2,5,7; Mk. xi. 2, [3 Limrg.], 4,5, 7; Lk. xix. 30, 33, 35; 
Jn. xii. 15, (also in Geopon.); Sept. several times for 
‘vy; for τῇ δ a female ibex, Prov. ν. 19." 

πώ-ποτε, adv., ever, at any time: Lk. xix. 30; Jn.i. 18; 
v.37; vi. 35; viii. 33; 1Jn.iv.12. [(From Hom. down.)]* 

πωρόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐπώρωσα (Jn. xii. 40 T Tr WH); 
pf. πεπώρωκα; pf. pass. ptep. πεπωρωμένος ; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐπωρώθην ; (πῶρος, hard skin, a hardening, induration) ; 
io cover with a thick skin, to harden by covering with a 
callus, [R. V. everywhere simply to harden]: metaph., 
καρδίαν, to make the heart dull, Jn. xii. 40; Pass. to 
grow hard or callous, become dull, lose the power of under- 
standing: Ro. xi. 7; τὰ νοήματα, 2 Co. iii. 14; ἡ καρδία, 
Mk. vi. 52; viii.17. Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Mk. p. 78 sq.; 
on Rom. ii. p. 451 sq. [(Hippocr., Aristot., al.)]* 

πώρωσις, -ews, 7, (πωρόω, q- V-), prop. the covering with 
a callus; trop. obtuseness of mental discernment, dulled 
perception: γέγονέ τινι, the mind of one has been blunted 
[R. V. a hardening hath befallen}, Ro. xi. 25; τῆς καρδίας 
jhardening of heart], of stubbornness, obduracy, Mk. iii. 
5; Eph. iv 18. ‘(Hippocr.)]* 


559 


TOS 


πῶς, (fr. obsol. OS, whence ποῦ, ποῖ, etc. [ef. Curtius 
§ 631]), adv., [fr. Hom. down] ; I. in interroga 
tion; how? in what way ?— in a direct question, foll. 
by a. the indicative, it is the expression a. of 
one seeking information and desiring to be taught: Lk. 
1.84; x. 26; Jn.iii.9; ix. 26; 1 Co. xv. 35 [cf. W. 266 
(250)]; πῶς οὖν, Jn. ix. 10 Tdf. (but L WH br. οὖν), 19; 
Ro. iv. 10. B. of one about to controvert another, 
and emphatically deny that the thing inquired about has 
happened or been done: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 23; Lk 
xi.18; Jn. iii. 4,12; v.44,47; vi.52; ix.16; 1 Jn. iii. 
17; iv. 20; Ro. iii. 6; vi. 2; 1 Co. xiv. 7, 9,16; 1 Tim. iii. 
5; Heb. ii. 3; καὶ πῶς, Mk. iv. 13; Jn. xiv. 5 [here L txt. 
Tr WHom. καί]; πῶς οὖν, Mt. xii. 26; Ro. x. 14 RG; 
mas δέ, Ro. x. 14° RGLmrg., 14” RGT, 15 RG, (on 
this see in b. below). where something is asserted and 
an affirmative answer is expected, πῶς οὐχί is used: Ro. 
viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 8. γ- of surprise, intimating that 
what has been done or is said could not have been done 
or said, or not rightly done or said, — being equiv. to how 
is it, or how has it come to pass, that ete.: Gal. ii. 14 GLT 
Tr WH; Mt. xxii. 12; Jn. iv. 9; vi. 52; vii. 15; πῶς 
λέγεις, λέγουσι; krA., MK. xii. 35; Lk. xx. 41; Jn. viii. 33; 
καὶ πῶς, Lk. xx. 44; Acts ii. 8; καὶ πῶς σὺ λέγεις, Jn. xii. 
34; xiv. 9 [here LT WHom. Tr br. καί}; πῶς οὖν, Jn. vi. 
42 [here T WH Tr txt. πῶς viv]; Mt. xxii.43; πῶς ov, 
how is it that... not, why not? Mt. xvi.11; Mk. viii. 21 
RGLmrg.; iv. 40 [RGT]; Lk. xii. 56. b. the 
delib. subjunctive (where the question is, how that 
can be done which ought to be done): πῶς πληρωθῶσιν 
ai γραφαί, how are the Scriptures (which ought to be ful- 
filled) to be fulfilled? Mt. xxvi.54; πῶς φύγητε, how shall 
ye (who wish to escape) escape etc. Mt. xxiii. 33; add, 
πῶς οὖν, Ro. x. 14 LT Tr WH; πῶς δέ, x. 145 Ltxt. T 
Tr WH; 14°L Tr WH; 15 LT Tr WH, (Sir. xlix. 11); 
ef. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 405 sq. c. foll. by ἄν 
with the optative: πῶς yap ἂν δυναίμην; Acts viii. 31 
(on which see ἄν, IIT. p. 34”). II. By a somewhat 
negligent use, occasionally met with even in Attic writ. 
but more freq. in later authors, πῶς is found in indi- 
rect discourse, where regularly ὅπως ought to have 
stood; cf. W. § 57, 2 fin.; [L. and 5. 5. v. IV.]. Ἐπ 
with the indicative—pres.: Mt. vi. 28; Mk. xii. 41; 
Lk. xii. 27; Acts xv. 36; 1 Co. iii. 10; Eph. v.15; Col. 
iv.6; 1 Tim. iii. 15; τὸ πῶς (on the art. see 6, II. 10 a.); 
with the impf. Lk. xiv. 7; with the perf. Rev. iii. 3; 
with the aor., Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26 [here Tr WH br. 
mas]; Lk. viii. 36; Acts ix. 27, ete.; after ἀναγινώσκειν, 
Mk. xii. 26 T Tr WH; how it came to pass that, ete. Jn. 
ix.15; with the fut.: μεριμνᾷ, πῶς ἀρέσει (because the 
direct quest. would be πῶς dpéow;), 1 Co. vii. 32-34 [but 
L Τ Tr WH -on]; ἐζήτουν πῶς αὐτὸν ἀπολέσουσιν, how 
they shall destroy him (so that they were in no uncer- 
tainty respecting his destruction, but were only deliber- 
ating about the way in which they will accomplish it), 
Mk. xi. 18 RG (but the more correct reading here, ace. 
to the best Mss., including cod. Sin., is ἀπολέσωσιν ‘how 
they should destroy him’ [οἷ W. § 41b. 4b.; Β. § 139, 


P; p 


61; see next head]). b. with the subjunctive, 
of the aor. and in deliberation: Mk. xi. 18 LT Tr WH; 
xiv. 1,11 [RG]; Mt. x. 19; Lk. xii. 11; τὸ πῶς, Lk. 
xxii. 2, 4; Acts iv. 21. III. in exclamation, how: 
πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστιν, Mk. x. 24; πῶς παραχρῆμα, Mt. xxi. 


[P, p: the practice of doubling p (after a prep. or an augm.) 
is sometimes disregarded by the Mss., and accordingly by the 
critical editors ; so, too, in the middle of a word; see ἀναντίρη- 
tos, ἀπορίπτω, ἀραβών, ἄραφος, διαρήγνυμι, ἐπιράπτω, ἐπιρί- 
πτω, παραρέω, ῥαβδίζω, ῥαντίζω, ῥαπίζω, ῥίπτω, ῥύομαι, etc. ; 
ef. W. 8 13, 1 b.; B. 32 (28 sq.); WH. App. p. 163; 71 αῇ 
Proleg. p. 80. Recent editors, L T (cf. the Proleg. to his 7th 
ed. p. eclxxvi.), Kuenen and Cobet (cf. their Praef. p. xevi.), 
WH (but not Treg.), also follow the older Mss. in omitting 
the breathings from pp in the middle of a word; cf. Lipsius, 
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 18 sq.; Greg. Corinth. ed. Bast p. 
732 sq.; in opposition see Donaldson, Greek Gram. p. 16; 
W. 48 (47). On the smooth breathing over the initial p 
when p begins two successive syllables, see Lipsius u. s. ; 
WIL. ἃ. s. pp. 163, 170; Kiihner §67 Anm. 4; Goettling, Ac- 
cent, p. 205 note; and on the general subject of the breath- 
ings cf. the Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8 p. 105 sq. and reff. there. 
On the usage of modern edd. of the classics cf. Veitch s. vv. 
ῥάπτω, ῥέζω, etc.| 

Ῥαάβ (and ‘Paya8, Mt. i. 5; Ῥαχάβη. -ης, in Joseph. 
{antt. 5, 1, 2 ete.]}, ἡ, (2N7 ‘broad’, ‘ample’), /tahab, 
a harlot of Jericho: Heb. xi. 31; Jas. ii. 25. [Cf. B.D. 
s. νυ; Bp. Lghtfi. Clement of Rome, App. (Lond. 1877) 
p. 413.]° 

ῥαββί, TWH ῥαββεί [cf. B. p.6; WH. App. p. 155; 
see et,¢], (Hebr. "3", fr. 31 much, great), prop. my 
great one, my honorable sir; (others incorrectly regard 
the ‘= as the yodh paragogic); Rabbi, a title with which 
the Jews were wont to address their teachers (and also 
to honor them when not addressing them; ef. the French 
monsieur, monseigneur): Mt. xxiii. 7; translated into 
Greek by διδάσκαλος, Mt. xxiii. 8 GLT Tr WH; John 
the Baptist is addressed by this title, Jn. iii. 26; Jesus: 
both by his disciples, Mt. xxvi. 25, 49; Mk. ix. 5; xi. 
21; Jn. i. 38 (39), 49 (50); iv. 31; ix.2; xi.8; and by 
others, Jn. iii. 2; vi. 25; repeated to indicate earnest- 
ness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.] ῥαββί. ῥαββί, RG in Mt. xxiii. 7 
and Mk. xiv. 45; (so "2 "2 for "33 aN in the Targ. on 
2K. ii. 12). Cf. Lghifl. Horae Hebr. et Talmud. on Mt. 
xxiii. 7; Pressel in Herzog ed. 1 xii. p. 471 sq.; [Gins- 
burg in Alex.’s Kitto, 5. v. Rabbi; Hamburger, Real-En- 
cyclopiidie, s. v. Rabban, vol. ii. p. 948 sq.]." 

ῥαββονί (so Rec. in Mk. x. 51) and ῥαββουνί [WH 
vei, see reff. under ῥαββι, init.], (Chald. j)35 lord, 13 


560 


‘Payav 


20; πῶς δυσκόλως, Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24; with a verb, 
how (greatly): πῶς συνέχομαι, Lk. xii. 50; πῶς ἐφίλει 
αὐτόν, Jn. xi. 36. 

πώς, an enclitic particle, on which see under εἴπως [i.e 
ei, LI. 14] and μήπως. 


P 


master, chief, prince; cf. Levy, Chald. WB. ib. d. Tar. 
gumim, ii. p. 401), Rabboni, Rabbuni (apparently [yet 
cf. reff. below] the Galilean pronunciation of »3)37), a 
title of honor and reverence by which Jesus is ad- 
dressed; as interpreted by John, equiv. to διδάσκαλος: 
Jn. xx. 16; Mk. x. 51, (see ῥαββί). Cf. Keim iii. p. 560 
[Eng. trans. vi. p. 311 sq.]; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. 
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, pp. 409 and 606; also for 
1878, p.7; [Ginsburg and Hamburger, as in she preced- 
ing word; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10].* 

ῥαβδίζω; 1 aor. pass. ἐρραβδίσθην and (so LT Tr WH) 
ἐμαβδίσθην (see P, p); (ῥάβδος); to beat with rods: Acts 
xvi. 22; 2 Co. xi. 25. (Judg. vi. 11; Ruth ii. 17; Arstph., 
Diod., al.) * 

ῥάβδος, -ov, ἡ, [prob. akin to pamis, Lat. verber; cf. 
Curtius § 513], in various senses fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
for 79D, DAW, 2p Nyywn, ete., a staff, walcing-stick: 
i. 4. @ twig, rod, branch, Heb. ix. 4 (Num. xvii. 2 sqq- 
Hebr. text xvii. 16 sqq.); Rev. xi. 1; α rod, with which 
one is beaten, 1 Co. iv. 21 (Plato, legg. 3 p. 700 ¢.; Plut., 
al.; πατάσσειν τινὰ ἐν ῥάβδῳ. Ex. xxi. 20; Is. x. 24); a 
staff: as used on a journey, Mt. x.10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix. 
3; or to lean upon, Heb. xi. 21 (after the Sept. of Gen. 
xlvii. 31, where the translators read 74>, for NU a bed; 
[ef. προσκυνέω, a.}); or by shepherds, Rev. ii. 27; xii. 
5; xix. 15, in which passages as ἐν ῥάβδῳ ποιμαίνειν is 
fig. applied to a king, so ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ; with a rod of iron, 
indicates the severest, most rigorous, rule, hence ῥάβδος 
is equiv. to a royal sceptre (like Dav, Ps. ii. 9; xlv. 8; 
for 3 γ), Esth. iv. 11; v. 2): Heb. i. 8 (fr. Ps. xlv. 
8).* 

ῥαβδοῦχος, -ov, 6, (ῥάβδος and ἔχω; cf. εὐνοῦχος), one 
who carries the rods i. e. the fasces, a lictor (a public offi- 
cer who bore the fasces or staff and other insignia of 
office before the magistrates), [A. V. serjeants]: Acts 
xvi. 35, 38. (Polyb.; Diod. 5, 40; Dion. Hal.; Hdian. 
7,8, 10 [5 ed. Bekk.]; διὰ τί λικτώρεις τοὺς ῥαβδούχους 
ὀνομάζουσι; Plut. quaest. Rom. c. 67.) * 

‘Paya [so WH] or ‘Payad [RGLT Tr], ΟΡ [i. 6. 
‘friend’], Gen. xi. 18), 6, Ragau [A. V. Reu; (onca 
Rehu)], one of the ancestors of Abraham: Lk, iii. 35. 
[Β. D. Am. ed. 5. v. Reu.]* 


ῥᾳδιούργημα 


ῥᾳδιούργημα, -τος, τό, (fr. ῥᾳδιουργέω, and this fr. ῥᾳδι- 
svoyds, compounded of ῥάδιος and EPTQ. A ῥᾳδιουργός 
is one who does a thing with little effort and adroitly ; 
then, in a bad sense, a man who is facile and forward 
in the perpetration of crime, a knave, a rogue), a piece 
of knavery, rascality, villany: πονηρόν, Acts xviii. 14. 
(Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian.; eccles. writ.) * 

ῥᾳδιουργία, -as, ἡ, (see ῥᾳδιούργημα, cf. πανουργία); 1. 
prop. ease in doing, facility. 2. levity or easiness 
in thinking and acting; love of a lazy and effeminate 


life (Xen.). 3. unscrupulousness, cunning, mischief, 
[A. V. villany]: Acts xiii. 10. (Polyb. 12, 10, 5; often 
in Plut.) * 


[patvw; see ῥαντίζω. 

ῥακά (Tdf. paya; [the better accentuation seems to 
be -a; cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 8]), a 
Chald. word xp> [but ace. to Kautzsch (u.s. p. 10) not 
the stat. emph. of pv, but shortened fr. >>] (Hebr. 
py), empty, i. 6. a senseless, empty-headed man, a term of 
reproach used by the Jews in the time of Christ [B. D. 
s.v. Raca; Wiinsche, Erlauterung u.s. w. p. 47]: Mt. v. 22.* 

ῥάκος, -ous, τό, (ῥήγνυμι), a piece torn off; spec. a bit 
of cloth; cloth: Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21 [here L Tr mrg. 
paxxos]. (Hom., Hdt., Arstph., Soph., Eur., Joseph., 
Sept., al.) * 

‘Papa [T WH ‘Paya; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Ramah, 1 
init.], (797 i.e. a high place, height), ἡ, [indecl. Win. 
61 (60)], Ramah, a town of the tribe of Benjamin, sit- 
uated six Roman miles north of Jerusalem on the road 
leading to Bethel; now the village of er Ram: Mt. ii. 
18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15). Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v.; 
Graf in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 851 sqq. ; 
Pressel in Herzog xii. p. 515 sq.; Furrer in Schenkel 
BL. v. p. 37; [BB. DD.].* 

ῥαντίζω ; (fr. ῥαντός besprinkled, and this fr. paivw); 
1 aor. ἐρράντισα and (so L T Tr WH) ἐράντισα (see P, p) ; 
[1 aor. mid. subjune. ῥαντίσωνται (sprinkle themselves), 
Mk. vii. 4 WH txt. (so Volkmar, Weiss, al.) after codd. 
®B]; pf. pass. ptep. ἐρραντισμένος (Tdf. pepavr., L Tr 
WH ῥεραντ. with smooth breathing; seeP, p); for paiva, 
more com. in class. Grk.; to sprinkle: prop. τινά, Heb. 
ix. 13 (on the rite here referred to cf. Num. xix. 2-10; 
Win. RWB. s. v. Sprengwasser; [B. Ὁ. s. v. Purifica- 
tion]); 1b. 19; τὶ αἵματι, ib. 21; [Rev. xix. 13 WH (see 
meptppaivw)]. to cleanse by sprinkling, hence trop. to 
purify, cleanse: ἐρραντισμένοι τὰς καρδίας (on this ace. see 
B. § 134, 7) ἀπό κτλ. Heb. x. 22. (Athen. 12 p. 521 a.; 
for Hebr. num, Ps. 1. (li.) 9; for 713, Lev. vi. 27; 2 K. 
ix. 33.)* 

ῥαντισμός, -od, ὁ, (ῥαντίζω, 4. v.), used only by bibl. and 
eccl. writ., a sprinkling (purification): αἷμα ῥαντισμοῦ, 
blood of sprinkling, i. e. appointed for sprinkling (serving 
to purify), Heb. xii. 24 (ὕδωρ ῥαντισμοῦ for 1727 52, 
Num. xix. 9, 13, 20 sq.) ; εἰς ῥαντισμὸν αἵματος ᾿Ιησοῦ Xp. 
Le.cis τὸ ῥαντίζεσθαι (or ἵνα ῥαντίζωνται) αἵματι "Inc. 
Xp., that they may be purified (or cleansed from the 
guilt of their sins) by the blood of Christ, 1 Pet. i. 2 [W. 
§ 30, 3 α.]" 


561 ῥέω 


ῥαπίζω; fut. ῥαπίσω [cf. B. 37 (32sq.)]; 1 aor. ἐρράπισα 
and (so L T Tr WH) ἐράπισα (see Ρ, p); (fr. ῥαπίς a 
rod) ; 1. to smite with a rod or staff (Xenophanes 
in Diog. Laért. 8, 36 ; Hdt., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al) ΟΣ 
to smite in the face with the palm of the hand, to bor the 
ear: twa, Mt. xxvi. 67 (where it is distinguished fr. 
κολαφίζω [ΑΟΝ. buffet]; for Suidas says ῥαπίσαι: πατάσσειν 
τὴν γνάθον ἁπλῇ τῇ χειρί not with the fist; hence the 
Vulg. renders it palmas in faciem ei dederunt; [A. V. 
mrg. (R. V. mrg.) adopt sense 1 above]) ; τινὰ ἐπὶ [LT 
Tr txt. WII eis] τὴν σιαγόνα, Mt. ν. 39 (Hos. xi. 4). Cf. 
Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. ete. p. 61 sqq-; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 175; [Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113,10; Field, Otium Norv. 
pars iii. p. 71].* 

ῥάπισμα, -τος, τό, (ῥαπίζω, η. V.); 1. a blow with 
a rod or a staff or a scourge, (Antiph. in Athen. 14 p. 
623 b.; Anthol., Leian.). 2. a blow with the flat of 
the hand, a slap in the face, box on the ear: βάλλειν τινὰ 
ῥαπίσμασιν (see βάλλω, 1), Mk. xiv. 65; διδόναι τινὶ pane 
ona, Jn. xviii. 22; ῥαπίσματα, Jn. xix. 3, [but in all three 
exx. R. V.mrg. recognizes sense 1 (see reff. 8. v. ῥα- 
nita)].* 

ῥαφίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (ῥάπτω to sew), a needle: Mt. xix. 24; 
Mk. x. 25; Lk. xviii. 25 Ree., [(cf. xdundos)]. Class. 
Grk. more com. uses βελόνη (q. v-); see Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 90; [W. 25].* 

[ῥαχά, see paxa. | 

ἹῬαχάβ, see ‘Paa8. 

Ῥαχήλ, (ὉΠ a ewe or sheep), 4, Rachel [ef. B. D. 
s.v.], the wife of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. ii. 18 (fr. 
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15).* 

“PeBéxka (73, fr. p37 unused in Hebrew but in 
Arabic ‘to bind,’ ‘fasten’; hence the subst. i. q. ‘en- 
snarer,’ fascinating the men by her beauty), ἡ, Rebecca, 
the wife of Isaac: Ro. ix. 10.* 

ῥέδη fal. peda; on the first vowel cf. Tdf.’s note on 
Rev. as below; WH. App. p. 151°], (ace. to Quintil. 1, 
5, 57 [ef. 68] a Gallic word [cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter, 
s. v. reda]), -ns, ἡ, @ chariot, “a species of vehicle having 
four wheels” (Isidor. Hispal. orig. 20, 12 (§ 511), [ef. 
Rich, Dict. of Antiq. 5. v. Rheda]): Rev. xviii. 13.* 

Ῥεμφάν (RG), or Ῥεφάν (L Tr), or ‘Poudav (T), [or 
“Ῥομφά WH, see their App. on Acts as below], Remphan 
[so A.V.], or Rephan [so R.V.], Romphan, [or Rompha}, 
a Coptic pr. name of Saturn: Acts vii. 43, fr. Amos 
ν. 26 where the Sept. render by ‘Pasay [or “Pedav] the 
Hebr. }3°3, thought by many to be equiv. to the Syriac 


- μὰ - 5 “Ὁ - . 
ob, and the Arabic ἢ, ζ΄ designations of Saturn; 


but by others regarded as an appellative, signifying 
‘stand,’ ‘ pedestal’ (Germ. Geritst; so Hitzig), or ‘statue’ 
(so Gesenmius), formed from 35 after the analogy of 
such forms as p33M, 913, ete. Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. 
Saturn; Gesenius, Thes. p. 669°; J. G. Miiller in Her- 
zog xii. 736; Merz in Schenkel i. p. 516 sq.; Schrader 
in Riehm p. 234; [Baudissin in Herzog ed. 2 8. v. Sat- 
urn, and reff. there given; B. D. 5. v. Remphan].* 

ῥέω: fut. ῥεύσω (in Grk. writ. more com. ῥεύσομα:, see 


péw 


W. 89 (85); [Β. 67 (59)]; cf. Zob. ad Phryn. p. 739); 
((Skr. sru; ef. Lat. fluo; Eng. stream; Curtius § 517) ]; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 331; to flow: Jn. vii. 38. 
[Comp.: mapappéw.]* 

‘PEQ, see εἶπον. 

“Ῥήγιον, -ov, τό, Rhegium (now Reggio), a town and 
promontory at the extremity of the Bruttian peninsula, 
opposite Messana [Messina] in Sicily; (it seems to have 
got its name from the Greek verb ῥήγνυμι, because at that 
point Sicily was believed to have been ‘rent away’ from 
Italy; so Pliny observes, hist. nat. 8, 8, (14); [Diod. Sic. 
4,85; Strabo 6, 258; Philo de incorrupt. mund. § 26; al. 
See Pape, Eigennamen, 8. v.]): Acts xxviii. 13.* 

ῥῆγμα, -τος, τό, (ῥήγνυμι), what has been broken or rent 
asunder ; a. a fracture, breach, cleft: Hippocr., Dem., 
[Aristot.], Polyb., al.; for j»p3, Am. vi. 11 Alex. b. 
plur. for Dy, rent clothes: 1 K. xi. 80 sq.; 2 K. ii. 
12. ce. fall, ruin: Lk. vi. 49.* 

ῥήγνυμι (Mt. ix. 17) and ῥήσσω (Hom. Il. 18, 571; 
1K. xi. 31; Mk. ii. 22 RG@Lmrg.; ix. 18; [Lk. v. 37 
Limrg.; (see below)]); fut. ῥήξω ; 1 aor. ἔρρηξα ; pres. 
pass. 3 pers. plur. ῥήγνυνται; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
ypa and DIP; to rend, burst or break asunder, break up, 
break through; a. univ.: τοὺς ἀσκούς, Mk. ii. 22; 
Lk. v. 37; pass. Mt. ix. 17; i. q. to tear in pieces [A.V. 
rend |: τινά, Mt. vii. 6. b. sc. εὐφροσύνην (previously 
chained up, as it were), to break forth into joy: Gal. iv. 
27, after Is. liv. 1 (the full phrase is found in Is. xlix. 
13; lii. 9; [ef. B. § 130, 5]; in class. Grk. ῥηγνύναι κλαυθ- 
μόν, οἰμωγήν, δάκρυα, esp. φωνήν is used of infants or dumb 
persons beginning to speak; cf. Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 
1832"; [L. and 5. 8. v. I. 4 and 57). c. i. q. σπα- 
ράσσω, to distort, convulse: of a demon causing convul- 
sions in a man possessed, Mk. ix. 18; Lk. ix. 42; in both 
pass. many [so R. V. txt.] explain it to dash down, hurl to 
the ground, (a common occurrence in cases of epilepsy) ; 
in this sense in Artem. oneir. 1, 60 a wrestler is said 
ῥῆξαι τὸν ἀντίπαλον. Hesych. gives ῥῆξαι" καταβαλεῖν. 
Also ῥῆξε: κατέβαλε. Cf. Kuinoel or Fritzsche on Mk. 
ix. 18. [Many hold that ῥήσσω in this sense is quite a 
different word from ῥήγνυμι (and its collat. or poet. 
pico), and akin rather to (the onomatopoetic) ἀράσσω, 
ῥάσσω, to throw or dash down; οἵ, Lobeck in Bttm. 
Ausf. Spr. § 114, s. v. ῥήγνυμι; Curtius, Das Verbum, 
pp- 162, 315; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 118, 7. See as exx. 
Sap. iv. 19; Herm. mand. 11,3; Const. apost. 6, 9 p. 
165,14. Cf. προσρήγνυμι.) (Comp.: δια-, mept-, mpoo- 
ῥήγνυμι.)" 

[Syn.: ῥήγνυμι, κατάγνυμι, θραύω: ᾧῥ. to rend, rend 
asunder, makes pointed reference to the separation of the 
parts; κ' to break, denotes the destruction of a thing’s unity 
or completeness; 6. to shatter, is suggestive of many fragments 
and minute dispersion. Cf. Schmidt ch. 115.] 


ῥῆμα, -τος, τό, (fr. ‘PEQ, pf. pass. εἴρημαι), fr. Theogn., 
Hadt., Pind. down; Sept. chiefly for 121; also for Dk, 
199, 713, MINK, ete.; 1. prop. that which is or has 
been uttered by the living voice, thing spoken, word, [cf. 
ἔπος, also λόγος, ἵ. 1]; 1. 6. 


562 


ῥῆμα 
by the voice and having a definite meaning: Mt. xxvii. 
14; p. γλώσσης, Sir. iv. 24; φωνὴ ῥημάτων, a sound of 
words, Heb. xii. 19; ῥήματα ἄρρητα, [unspeakable words], 
2 Co. xii. 4. Ὁ. Plur. ra ῥήματα, speech, discourse, 
(because it consists of words either few or many [cf. 
Philo, leg. alleg. 3, 61 τὸ δὲ ῥῆμα μέρος λόγου) : Lk. vii. 
1; Acts ii. 14; words, sayings, Jn. viii. 20; x. 21; Acts 
[x. 44]; xvi. 38; τὰ ῥ. τινος, what one has said, Lk. 
xxiv. 8, 11, or ‘aught, Ro. x. 18; τὰ p. pov, my teaching, 
Jn. v. 47; xii. 47sq.; xv. 7; τὰ p. ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ, In. vi. 
63; xiv. 10; [ἀληθείας x. σωφροσύνης p. ἀποφθέγγομαι, 
Acts xxvi. 25]; ῥήματα ζωῆς αἰωνίου ἔχεις, thy teaching 
begets eternal life, Jn. vi. 68; τὰ p. τοῦ θεοῦ, utterances 
in which God through some one declares his mind, Jn. 
Vili. 47; λαλεῖ τις τὰ p. Tod 8. speaks what God bids him, 
Jn. iii. 34; λαλεῖν πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης, to de- 
liver the whole doctrine concerning this life, i.e. the 
life eternal, Acts v. 20; τὰ p. ἃ δέδωκάς μοι, what thou 
hast bidden me to speak, Jn. xvii. 8; ῥήματα λαλεῖν πρός 
τινα, ἐν ois etc. to teach one the things by which ete. 
Acts xi. 14; τὰ ῥήματα τὰ προειρημένα ὑπό τινος, what one 
has foretold, 2 Pet. iii. 2; Jude 17; λαλεῖν ῥήματα βλά- 
σφημα εἴς τινα, to speak abusively in reference to one 
[see εἰς, B. IL. 2 c. B.], Acts vi. 11; κατά τινος, against 
a thing, ib. 13 [GL T Tr WH om. βλάσφ.]. c. a 
series of words joined together into a sentence (a declara- 
tion of one’s mind made in words) ; a. univ. an ulter- 
ance, declaration, (Germ. eine Aeusserung): Mt. xxvi. 
75; Mk. ix. 82; xiv. 72; Lk. ii. 50; ix. 45; xvi. 34; 
xx. 26; Acts xi. 16; xxviii. 25; with adjectives, ῥῆμα 
ἀργόν, Mt. xii. 36 ; εἰπεῖν πονηρὸν ῥῆμα κατά τινος, to assail 
one with abuse, Mt. ν. 11 [RG; al. om. ῥ.]. B. a 
saying of any sort, as a message, a narrative: concerning 
some occurrence, λαλεῖν τὸ ῥ. περί τινος, Lk. ii. 17; ῥῆμα 
τῆς πίστεως, the word of faith, i. e. concerning the neces- 
sity of putting faith in Christ, Ro. x. 8; a promise, Lk. 
i. 38; ii. 29; καλὸν θεοῦ ῥῆμα, God’s gracious, comforting 
promise (of salvation), Heb. vi. 5 (see καλός, e.); καθα- 
picas ... ἐν ῥήματι, acc. to promise (prop. on the ground 
of his word of promise, viz. the promise of the pardon 
of sins; cf. Mk. xvi. 16), Eph. v. 26 [al. take ῥ. here as 
i. q. ‘the gospel,’ cf. vi. 17, Ro. x. 8; (see Meyer ad 
loc.)]; the word by which some thing is commanded, di- 
rected, enjoined: Mt. iv. 4 [cf. W. 389 (364) n.]; Lk. iv. 
4 RGLTr in br.; Heb. xi. 3; a@ command, Lk. v. 5; 
ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐπί τινα, Lk. iii. 2 (Jer. 1. 1; πρός τινα, 
Gen. xv. 1; 1 K. xviii. 1); plur. ῥήματα παρὰ cod, words 
from thee, i. 6. to be spoken by thee, Acts x. 22; ῥῆμα 
τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ, his omnipotent command, Heb. i. 
3. doctrine, instruction, [ef. W. 123 (117)]: (τὸ) ῥῆμα 
(rod) θεοῦ, divine instruction by the preachers of the 
gospel, Ro. x. 17 [RG; but LT TrWH 6. Χριστοῦ ; 
others give f. here the sense of command, commission ; 
(cf. Meyer)]; saving truth which has God for its au- 
thor, Eph. vi. 17; also rod κυρίου, 1 Pet. i. 25; words 
of prophecy, prophetic announcement, τὰ p. τοῦ θεοῦ, 
Rev. xvii. 17 Ree. [al. of λόγοι τ. 6.]. 2. In imi- 


a. any sound produced | tction of the Hebr. 35, the subject-matter of speech, thing 


Ρησά 


spoken of, thing; and that a. so far forth as it is 
a matter of narration: Lk. ii. 15; Acts x. 37; plur., 
Lk. i. 65; ii. 19,51; Acts v. 32; xiii. 42. b. in so 
far as it is matter of command: Lk.i. 37 [see ἀδυνατέω, 
b.] (Gen. xviii. 14; Deut. xvii. 8). c. a matter of 
dispute, case at law: Mt. xviii. 16; 2Co. xiii. 1 (A.V. 
retains ‘word’ here and in the preceding pass.], (Deut. 
xix. 15).* 

“Ῥησά [Lchm. -σᾶ (so Pape, Eigennamen, 8. v-)], 6, 
Rhesa, the son of Zerubbabel : Lk. iii. 27.* 

ῥήσσω, see ῥήγνυμι. 

ῥήτωρ, -opos, 6, (ῬΕΩ), a speaker, an orator, (Soph., 
Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.) : of a forensic orator or 
advocate, Acts xxiv. 1. [Cf. Thom. Mag. s.v. (p. 324, 
15 ed. Ritschl); B. Ὁ. 5. v. Orator, 2.] * 

ῥητῶς, (ῥητός), adv., expressly, in express words: ῥητῶς 
λέγει, 1 Tim. iv. 1. (Polyb. 3, 23, 5; Strabo 9 p. 426; 
Plut. Brut. 29; [de Stoic. repugn. 15, 10]; Diog. Laért. 8, 
71; [al.; cf. Wetstein on 1 Tim. 1. c.; W. 463 (431) ].)* 

ῥίζα, -ης, ἡ, (akin to Germ. Reis [ef. Lat. radix; Eng. 
root; see Curtius §515; Fick, Pt. iii. 7157), fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. for ww ; 1. a root: prop., Mt. iii. 
10; Lk. iii. 9; ἐκ ῥιζῶν, from the roots [cf. W. § 51, 1 
4.1, Mk. xi. 20; ῥίζαν ἔχειν, to strike deep root, Mt. xiii. 
6; Mk. iv. 6; trop. οὐ ῥίζαν ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, spoken of one 
who has but a superficial experience of divine truth, 
has not permitted it to make its way into the inmost 
recesses of his soul, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv. 17; Lk. viii. 
13; in fig. dise. ῥίζα πικρίας (see πικρία) of a person dis- 
posed to apostatize and induce others to commit the 
same offence, Heb. xii. 15; the progenitors of a race 
are called ῥίζα, their descendants κλάδοι (see κλάδος, b.), 
Ro. xi. 16-18. Metaph. cause, origin, source: πάντων 
τῶν κακῶν, 1 Tim. vi. 10; τῆς σοφίας, Sir. i. 6 (5), 20 (18); 
τῆς ἀθανασίας, Sap. Xv. 3; τῆς ἁμαρτίας, of the devil, Ev. 
Nicod. 23; ἀρχὴ καὶ ῥίζα παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ, Epicur. ap. Athen. 
12, 67 p. 546 sq.; πηγὴ καὶ ῥίζα καλοκαγαθίας τὸ νομίμου 
τυχεῖν παιδείας, Plut. de puer. educ. ο. 7b. 2. after 
the use of the Hebr. ww, that which like a root springs 
from a root, α sprout, shoot ; metaph. offspring, progeny: 
Ro. xv. 12; Rev. v. 5; xxii. 16, (Is. xi. 10).* 

ῥιζόω, -@: pf. pass. ptep. ἐρριζωμένος [see P, p]; (pita); 
fr. Hom. down; to cause to strike root, to strengthen with 
roots; as often in class. writ. (see Passow s. v. 3; [L. and 
S. s.v. 1.7), trop. to render firm, to fix, establish, cause a 
person or a thing to be thoroughly grounded: pass. ἐρριζω- 
μένος (Vulg. radicatus) ἐν ἀγάπῃ, Eph. iii. 17 (18) [not 
WH]; ἐν Χριστῷ, in communion with Christ, Col. ii. 7. 
[Comp. ἐκ-ῥιζόω. * 

ῥιπή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ῥίπτω), used by the Grk. poets fr. Hom. 
down; a throw, stroke, beat: ὀφθαλμοῦ (Vulg. ictus oculi 
ΓΑ. V. the twinkling of an eye]), a moment of time, 1 Co. 
xv. 52 [Lumrg. ῥοπή, q. v.].* 

ῥιπίζω : pres. pass. ptep. ῥιπιζόμενος ; (fr. ῥιπίς a bel- 
lows or fan) ; hence 1. prop. to raise a breeze, put 
air in motion, whether for the sake of kindling a fire or 
of cooling one’s self; hence a. to blow up a fire: 
φλόγα, πῦρ, Anthol. 5,122, 6; Plut. Flam. 21. b. to 


563 


ῥοιζηδὸν 


fan i.e. cool with a fan (Tertull. flabello): Plut. Anton. 
26. 2. to toss to and fro, to agitate: of the wind, 
πρὸς ἀνέμων ῥιπίζεται τὸ ὕδωρ, Philo de incorrupt. mundi 
§ 24; ῥιπιζομένη ἄχνη, Dio Cass. 70,4; δῆμος ἄστατον, 
κακὸν καὶ θαλάσσῃ πάνθ᾽ ὅμοιον, ὑπ’ ἀνέμου ῥιπίζεται, Dio 
Chr. 32 p. 368 b.; hence joined w. ἀνεμίζεσθαι it is used 
of a person whose mind wavers in uncertainty between 
hope and fear, between doing and not doing a thing, 
das. i. 6.* 

ῥιπτέω, see pinta. 

ῥίπτω and ῥιπτέω (ῥιπτούντων, Acts xxii. 23; on the 
diff. views with regard to the difference in meaning 
betw. these two forms see Passow s. V. ῥίπτω, fin. ; [ Veitch 
s. ἡ. pinta, fin. Hermann held that ῥιπτεῖν differed fr. 
ῥίπτειν as Lat. jactare fr. jacere, hence the former had a 
frequent. force (ef. Lob. Soph. Aj. p. 177; Cope, Aristot. 
rhet. vol. i. p. 91 sq.); some of the old grammarians 
associate with ῥιπτεῖν a suggestion of earnestness or 
effort, others of contempt]); 1 aor. ἔῤῥιψα (ἃ ἽΥ, Epp. 
RL, ἔριψα TWH, [ptep. (Lk. iv. 35) ῥίψαν RG Tr 
WH, better (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Veitch p. 512) 
ῥῖψαν LT]; pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. ἔῤῥιπται [ἃ Tr; al. 
épp-] (Lk. xvii. 2), ptep. ἐρριμμένος G, ἐριμμένος T Tr WH, 
pep- (with smooth breathing) Lehm. (Mt. ix. 36); on the 
doubling of p and the use of the breathing see P, p; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for Pw; to cast, throw; 
i. q. to throw down: τί, Acts xxvii. 19; τὶ ἔκ τινος, ibid. 
29; τινὰ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, Lk. xvii. 2. i. q. to throw 
off: τὰ ἱμάτια (Plat. rep. 5 p. 474 a.), Acts xxii. 23 (they 
cast off their garments that they might be the better 
prepared to throw stones [but cf. Wendt in Mey. 5te 
Aufl.]); τὰ ὅπλα, 1 Mace. v.43; vii. 44; xi. 51; Xen. 
Cyr. 4, 2, 33, and often in other Grk. writ. i. q. to 
cast forward or before: τινὰ [or τὶ] εἴς τι, [Mt. xxvii. 5 
(but here RGL ἐν τῷ vag) ]; Lk. iv. 35; τινὰς παρὰ τοὺς 
πόδας Ἰησοῦ, to set down (with the suggestion of haste 
and want of care), of those who laid their sick at the feet 
of Jesus, leaving them at his disposal without a doubt 
but that he could heal them, Mt. xv. 30. 1. q. to throw 
to the ground, prostrate : ἐρριμμένοι, prostrated by fatigue, 
hunger, ete., [R. V. scattered], Mt. ix. 36 (καταλαβὼν 
ἐρριμμένους καὶ μεθύοντας, the enemy prostrate on the 
ground, Polyb. 5,48, 2; of the slain, Jer. xiv. 16; ἐρριμ- 
μένα σώματα, 1 Mace. xi. 4; for other exx. see Wail, 
Clavis Apocr. V.T. 8.v.; τῶν νεκρῶν ἐρριμμένων ἐπὶ τῆς 
ἀγορᾶς, Plut. Galb. 28, 1). [Comp.: ἀπο-, ἐπι- ρίπτω. ἥ 

Ῥοβοάμ, (Ὁ }» 511 i. 6. ‘enlarging the people’, equiv. to 
Εὐρύδημος in Grk., fr. 397 and oy), 6, Roboam, Reho- 
boam, the son and successor of king Solomon: Mt. i. 7.* 

“Ῥόδη, -ns, ἡ, Rhoda [i. 6. ‘rose”], the name of a certain 
maidservant: Acts xii. 13.” 

Ῥόδος, -ov, ἡ, Rhodes, [(cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v-) ], 
a well-known island of the Cyclades opposite Caria and 
Lycia, with a capital of the same name: Acts xxi. 1. 
({From Hom. down]; 1 Mace. xv. 23.) * 

ῥοιζηδόν, (ῥοιζέω to make a confused noise), adv., ‘with 
a loud noise’: 2 Pet. iii.10. (Nicand. ther. 556; Geop., 
al.)* 


‘Pouda 
[Ῥομφά, ‘Poudar, see Ῥεμφάν. 


ῥομφαία, -as, 7, a large sword; prop. a long Thracian 
javelin [ef. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. 5. v. Rhompxa]; also a 
kind of long sword wont to be worn on the right shoul- 
der, (Hesych. ῥομφαία - Θράκιον ἀμυντήριον, μάχαιρα, ξίφος 
ἢ ἀκόντιον μακρόν ; [Suidas 3223 ὁ. (cf. ῥέμβω to revolve, 
vibrate) ]; ct. Plut. Aemil. 18); [A. V. sword]: Rev. i. 
16; ii. 12,16; vi. 8; xix. 15, 21; σοῦ δὲ αὐτῆς τὴν ψυχὴν 
διελεύσεται ῥομφαία, a fig. for ‘extreme anguish shall fill 
(pierce, as it were) thy soul’, Lk. ii. 35, where cf. Kuinoel. 
(Joseph. antt. 6, 12,4; 7, 12,1; in Ev. Nicod. 26 the 
archangel Michael, keeper of Paradise, is called ἡ pdo- 
yim ῥομφαία. Very often in Sept. for 33; often also 
in the O. T. Apoer.) * - 

[ῥοπή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ῥέπω), fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down, inclina- 
tion downwards, as of the turning of the scale: ἐν ῥοπῇ 
ὀφθαλμοῦ, 1 Co. xv. 52 L mrg. (ef. Tdf.’s note ad loc.) ; 
see pun.” | 

Ῥουβήν (in Joseph. antt. 1, 19, 8 “Pov8ndos), 6, (2387, 
i.e. behold ye a son! Gen. xxix. 32 [ef. Β. Ὁ. s. v.]), 
Reuben, Jacob’s firstborn son by Leah: Rev. vii. 5.* 

“Pov6 (in Joseph. antt. 5, 9, 2 ἹΡούθη, -ns), ἡ, (ΠΥ for 
nay, a female friend), Ruth, a Moabitish woman, one of 
the ancestors of king David, whose history is related in 
the canonical book bearing her name: Mt. i. 5. [B. Ὁ. 
s. v. Ruth.]* 

“Ῥοῦφος, -ov, 6, Rufus [i. 6. ‘red’, ‘reddish’], a Lat. 
proper name of a certain Christian: Mk. xv. 21; Ro. 
xvi. 13. [B.D.s. v. Rufus.]* 

ῥύμη, της, ἡ, (fr. PYQ i. q. ἐρύω ‘to draw ’ [but Curtius 
§ 517; Vanicek p. 1210, al., connect it with ῥέω ‘to 
flow 7); 1. in earlier Grk. the swing, rush, force, 
trail, of a body in motion. 2. in later Grk. a tract 
of way in a town shut in by buildings on both sides; a 
street, lane: Mt. vi. 2; Lk. xiv. 21; Acts ix. 11; xii. 10; 
ef. Is. xv. 3; Sir. ix. 7; Tob. xiii. 18. Cf. Zob. ad Phryn. 
p- 404; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 488; Wetstein on 
Mt. u. 8.5 W. 22, 23].* 

piopar; fut. ῥύσομαι; 1 aor. ἐῤῥυσάμην ἃ (ἐρρυσ. R, 
so Tin 2 Co. i. 10; 2 Pet. ii. 7; L everywh. exe. in 2 
Tim. iii. 11 txt.) and ἐρυσάμην (so Tr WH everywh., T 
in Col. 1. 18; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Ltxt. in 2 Tim. iii. 11); 
a depon. mid. verb, in later Grk. w. the 1 aor. pass. 
ἐῤῥύσθην G (-pp- R), and (so L T Tr WH in 2 Tim. iv. 17) 
ἐρύσθην; (on the doubling of p, and the breathing, see in 
P, p); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for S-x7; also for 
5x3, 099 (to cause to escape, to deliver), yon (to draw 
out), Ὁ}, ywin, ete.; fr. ΡΥῺ to draw, hence prop. to 
draw to one’s self, to rescue, to deliver: τινά, Mt. xxvii. 
43; 2 Pet.ii.7; τινὰ ἀπό τινος [cf. W. § 30, 6 a.], Mt. vi. 
13; Lk. xi.4 RL; 1 Th.i. 10 [here TTr WH ἐκ; 2 Tim. 
iv. 18]; 1 aor. pass., Ro. xv.31; 2 Th. iii. 2; τινὰ ἔκ τινος 
[W. u.s.]: Ro. vii. 24 [ef. W. § 41 ἃ. 67; 2 Co.i. 10; Col. 
1.18; 2 Tim. 111. 11; 2 Pet.ii.9; 1 aor. pass., Lk. i. 74; 
2Tim.iv.17; ὁ ῥυόμενος, the deliverer, Ro. xi. 26 (after 
Is. lix. 20).* 

ῥυπαίνω: (ῥύπος, ἢ. v-); to make filthy, befoul; to defile, 
dishonor, (Xen., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.); 1 aor. 


564 


“Ῥώμη 


pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. ῥυπανθήτω, let him be made filthy, 
i.e. trop. let him continue to defile himself with sins, Rev. 
xxii. 11 LT Tr WH txt.® 

ῥυπαρεύομαι : 1 aor. (pass.) impv. 3 pers. sing. ῥυπα- 
pevéntw; (ῥυπαρός, ἢ. ν.); to be dirty, grow filthy; 
metaph. to be defiled with iniquity: Rev. xxii. 11 GL ed. 
ster. WHmrg. Found nowhere else; see pumaivw and 
ῥυπόω." 

ῥυπαρία, -as, 7, (ῥυπαρός), filthiness (Plut. praecept. 
conjug. c. 28); metaph. of wickedness as moral defile- 
ment: Jas. i. 21. [Of sordidness, in Critias ap. Poll. 3, 
116; Plut. de adulat. et amic. § 19; al.]* 

ῥυπαρός, -d, -dv, (ῥύπος, q. v.), filthy, dirty: prop. of 
clothing [A. V. vile], Jas. ii. 2 (Sept. Zech. iii. 3 sq.; 
Joseph. antt. 7, 11,3; Plut. Phoc. 18; Dio Cass. 65, 20; 
ῥυπαρὰ καὶ ἄπλυτα, Artem. oneir. 2, 3 fin.; χλαμύς, Ael. 
v. h. 14, 10); metaph. defiled with iniquity, base, [A. V. 
filthy]: Rey. xxii. 11 GLTTr ΜῊ. [(In the sense 
of sordid, mean, Dion. Hal., al.) ]* 

ῥύπος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, filth: 1 Pet. iii. 21 [B. 
§ 151, 14; W. § 80, 8 Ν. 3]. 

purée, τῶ; 1 aor. impy. 3 pers. sing. ῥυπωσάτω; 1. 
to make filthy, defile, soil: Hom. Od. 6. 59. 2. in- 
trans. for ῥυπάω, to be filthy: morally, Rev. xxii. 11 Rec.* 

ῥύσις, -ews, ἡ, (fr. an unused pres. ῥύω, from which 
several of the tenses of ῥέω are borrowed), a flowing, 
issue: τοῦ aipatos, Mk. v. 25; Lk. viii. 43, [on the two 
preced. pass. cf. B. § 147, 11; W. § 29, 3b.], 44, (Hip- 
pocr., Aristot.).* 

gurls, -idos, ἡ, (PYQ, to draw together, contract), a 
wrinkle: Eph. v.27. (Arstph., Plat., Diod. 4,51; Plut., 
Leian., Anthol., al.) * 

Ῥωμαϊκός, -7, -dv, Roman, Latin: Lk. xxiii. 38 RGL 
br. Trmrg. br. [(Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.)]* 

Ῥωμαῖος, -ov, 6, a Roman: Jn. xi.48; Actsii.10[R. V. 
here from Rome]; xvi. 21, 37 sq.; xxii. 25-27, 29; xxiii. 
27; xxv.16; xxviii. 17. ([Polyb., Joseph., al.]; often 
in 1 and 2 Macc.) * 

‘Pwpaicrt, adv., in the Roman fashion or language, 
in Latin: Jn. xix. 20. [Epictet. diss. 1,17, 16; Plut., 
App., al.]* 

“Ῥώμη, -ns, ἡ [on the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 b.; 
(on its derivation ef. Curtius §517; Vaniéek p. 1212; 
Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], Rome, the renowned capital 
of Italy and ancient head of the world: Acts xviii. 2; 
xix. 21; xxiii. 11; xxviii. 14,16; Ro. i. 7,15; 2 Tim. i. 
17. (1 Mace. i. 10; vii. 1; [Aristot., Polyb., al.].) [On 
Rome in St. Paul’s time ef. BB.DD. s. v.; Conybeare and 
Howson, Life and Epp. ete. ch. xxiv.; Farrar, Life and 
Work ete. chh. xxxvii., xliv., xlv.; Lewin, St. Paul, vol. 
ii. ch. vi.; Hausrath, Neutest. Zeitgesch. iii. 65 sqq.; on 
the Jews and Christians there, see particularly Schiirer, 
Die Gemeindeverfassung der Juden in Rom in d. 
Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargest. (Leipz. 1879) ; 
Seyerlen, Enstehung u.s.w. der Christengemeinde in 
Rom (Tiibingen, 1874); Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, 
2d ed., N. Y. 1877; Schaff, Hist. of the Chris. Church 
(1882) vol. i. 8.36.1} 


ῥώννυμι 


565 


σάββατον 


ῥώννυμι : to make strong, to strengthen; pf. pass. ἔρρω- | letter, ἔρρωσο, farewell: Acts xxiii. 80 [RG]; ἔρρωσθε, 


μαι [see P, p], to be strong, to thrive, prosper; hence the 


Acts xv. 29 (2 Mace. xi. 21; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,33; Artem. 


2 pers. (sing.) impv. is the usual formula in closing a | oneir. 3, 44, al.; ἔρρωσο καὶ iyiawe, Dio Cass. 61, 13).° 


[Σ, σ, s: the practice (adopted by Griesbach, Knapp, al., 
after H. Stephanus et al.) of employing the character s in 
the mid. of a comp. word has been abandoned by the recent 
erit. editors; cf. W. §5,1 οἱ; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 
122; Matthiae§1 Anm.5; Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. §2 Anm. 3; 
Kiihner §1 Anm.1. Tdf. ed. 8 writes o also even at the end 
of a word, after the older Mss. On movable final s see 
&xpi(s), wéxpt(s), οὕτω(5). The (Ionic) combinations po for 
pp, and oo for rr (cf. Fischer, Animadyers. ad Veller. etc. 
i. pp. 193 sq. 203; Kiihner ὃ 31 pp. 124, 127), have become 
predominant (cf. ἄρσην, θαρσέω, θάρσος, ἀπαλλάσσω etc., 
γλῶσσα, ἥσσων (q.V.), θάλασσα, κηρύσσω, περισσός, πράσσω 
(q. ν.), τάσσω, τέσσαρες, φυλάσσω, etc.), except in a few 
words, as κρείττων (4. v.), the derivatives of ἐλάττων (of which 
word both forms are used indiscriminately), ἥττημα, ἡττάω 
(yet see 2 Co. xii. 13), etc.; cf. B. 7. Some prop. names are 
spelled indifferently with one o or with two; as, EAto(c)aios. 
(is occasionally substituted foro, esp. before μ, see σβέννυμι, 
Σμύρνα (σμύρνα, cf. Soph. Gloss. ὃ 58, 3, and Lex.s. v.; Tdf. 
Proleg. p. 80; WH. App. p. 148; B.5; BSttm. Ausf. Sprchl. 
§3 Anm. 6; Bezae cod., ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.; L. and S. 
s.v. Z, 1.3, and 3, II. 14 6.) ; 50 4180 ἔ, as ξυμβαίνω 1 Pet. iv. 
12 Reez; cf. Kiihner ὃ 325, 5; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. u.s. ; see ξύν.] 


σαβαχθανί, -vei T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and 
s.v. εἰ, ¢], τκθανί Lchm. [in Mt. only], CiApaw, fr. the 
Chald. paw), thou hast forsaken me: Mt. xxvii. 46; Mk. 
xy. 34 (fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2, for the Hebr. .)7131}», which 
is so rendered also by the Chaldee paraphrast). [See 
Kautzsch, Gram. ἃ. Bibl.-Aram. (Leipzig 1884) p.11.]* 

σαβαώθ (Hebr. nis2y, plur. of δὲν an army): κύριος 
σαβαώθ (δ ν TNT), [A. V. Lord of Sabaoth], i.e. lord 
of the armies sc. of Israel, as those who under the lead- 
ership and protection of Jehovah maintain his cause in 
war (cf. Schrader, Ueber d. urspriingl. Sinn des Got- 
tesnamens Jahve Zebaoth, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. 
Theol. for 1875, p. 316 544.» and in Schenkel v. 702sq.; 
ef. Herm. Schultz, Alttest. Theol. ii. p. 96 sqq.; [B.D. 
8. ν. Sabaoth, the Lord of. But for the other view, acc. 
to which the heavenly “hosts” are referred to, see 
Hackett in B. D., Am. ed., s.v. Tsebaoth Lord of, and 
Delitzsch in the Luth. Zeitschr. for 1874, p. 217 sqq-3 so 
Riehm (HWB 5. v. Zebaoth) as respects the use of the 
phrase by the prophets]. On the diverse interpreta- 
tions of the word ef. Oehler in Herzog xviii. p. 400 sqq. 
[and in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) 88 195 sq.; cf. T. K. 
Cheyne, Isa., ed. 3, vol. i. 11 sq.]): Ro. ix. 29; Jas. ν. 4." 


σαββατισμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (σαββατίζω to keep the sabbath) ; 
1. a keeping sabbath. 2. the blessed rest from toils 
and troubles looked for in the age to come by the true 
worshippers of God and true Christians [R. V. sabbath 
rest]: Heb. iv. 9. (Plut. de superstit. ce. 3; eccl. writ.) ὃ 

σάββατον, -ov, τό, (Hebr. naw), found in the N.T. 
only in the historical bks. exe. twice in Paul’s Epp. ; 
sabbath; i. 6. 1. the seventh day of each week, 
which was a sacred festival on which the Israelites were 
required to abstain from all work (Ex. xx. 10; xxxi. 13 
544. ; Deut. v.14); a. sing. σάββατὸν and τὸ σάβ- 
Barov: Mk. vi. 2; [xv. 421, ΤΥ]; xvi. 1; Jn. v. 9 sq., ete. ; 
i. q.the institution of the sabbath, the law for keeping holy 
every seventh day of the week: Mt. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 27 sq.; 
Lk. vi. 5; λύειν, Jn. v. 18; τηρεῖν, Jn. ix. 16; ἡ ἡμέρα 
Tod σαββάτου (ΓΞ ΤΙ OF, Ex. xx. 8 and often), the day 
of the sabbath, sabbath-day, Lk. xiii. 16; xiv. 5; ὁδὸς 
σαββάτου, a sabbath-day’s journey, the distance it is law- 
ful to travel on the sabbath-day, i.e. ace. to the Talmud 
two thousand cubits or paces, ace. to Epiphanius (haer. 
66, 82) six stadia: Acts i. 12, οἵ. Mt. xxiv. 20, (the 
regulation was derived fr. Ex. xvi. 29); οἵ. Win. RWB. 
s.v. Sabbathsweg; Oehler in Herzog xiii. 203 sq. [ef. 
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 2 vol. ix. 379]; Mangold in Schen- 
kel v. 127 sq.; [Ginsburg in Alexander’s Kitto s. v. Sab- 
bath Day’s Journey; Lumby on Acts i. 12 (in Cambr. 
Bible for Schools) ]. as dat. of time [W. § 31, 9 b.; 
B. § 133, 26]: σαββάτῳ, Mt. xxiv. 20[G LT Tr WH]; 
Lk. xiv. 1; τῷ σαββάτῳ, Lk. vi. 9 L txt. T Tr WH; 
xiii. 14 sq.; xiv. 3; Acts xiii. 44; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mt. xii. 
2; Jn. v.16; vii. 22 [here L WH br. ἐν], 23; ἐν τῷ σαβ- 
βάτῳ, Lk. vi. 7; Jn. xix. 31. accus. τὸ σάββ. during 
(on) the sabbath [ef. B. § 131, 11; W. § 32,6]: Lk. xxiii. 
56; κατὰ πᾶν o. every sabbath, Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21; 
xviii. 4. plur. τὰ σάββατα, of several sabbaths, Acts 
xvii. 2 [some refer this to 2]. Ὁ. plur. τὰ σάββ. 
(for the singular) of a single sabbath, sabbath-day, (the 
use of the plur. being occasioned either by the plur. 
names of festivals, as τὰ ἐγκαίνια, ἄζυμα, γενέσια, or by 
the Chaldaic form xnaw [W. 177 (167); B. 23 (21)]): 
Mt. xxviii. 1; Col. ii. 16, (Ex. xx. 10; Lev. xxiii. 32 ete. ; 
τὴν ἑβδόμην σάββατα καλοῦμεν, Joseph. antt. 3, 6,6; add, 
1,1,1; [14, 10, 25; Philo de Abrah. §5; de cherub. 
§ 26; Plut. de superstitione 8]; τὴν τῶν σαββάτων ἑορτήν, 


σαγήνη 


Plut. symp. 4, 6, 2; hodie tricesima sabbata, Hor. sat. 
1. 9,69; nowhere so used by John exe. in the phrase 
pia τῶν σαββάτων, on which see 2 below); ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν 
o., Lk. iv. 16; Acts xiii. 14; xvi. 13 (Ex. xx. 8; xxxv. 
3; Deut. v.12; Jer. xvii. 21 sq.); τοῖς σάββασιν and ἐν 
τοῖς σάββασιν (so constantly [exc. Lchm. in Mt. xii. 1, 
12] by metaplasm for σαββάτοις, cf. W. 63 (62); [B. 23 
(21)]) on the sabbath-day: Mt. xii. 1 [see above], 5, 
10-12 [see above]; Mk. i. 21; ii. 23; iii. 2,4; Lk. iv. 31; 
vi. 9 [RG Lmrg.], (1 Mace. ii. 38; the Sept. uses the 
form σαββάτοις, and Josephus both forms). On the 
precepts of the Jews with regard to the observance of 
the sabbath, which were for the most part extremely 
punctilious and minute, cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Sabbath; 
Oehler in Herzog xiii. 192 544. [revised by Orelli in ed. 
2 vol. xiii. 156 sqq.]; Schiirer, Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 28 
Il.; Mangold in Schenkel v. p. 123 sq.; [BB.DD. s.v.3 
Geikie, Life and Words of Christ, ch. xxxviii. vol. ii 
p- 95 sqq.; Farrar, Life of Christ, ch. xxxi. vol. i. p. 
432 sq.; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, vol. ii. p. 56 sqq. 
and App. xvii. ]. 2. seven days, a week: πρώτῃ σαβ- 
βάτου, Mk. xvi. 9; dis τοῦ σαβ. twice in the week, Lk. xviii. 
12. The plur. is used in the same sense in the phrase 
ἡ μία τῶν σαββάτων, the first day of the week (see εἷς, 5) 
[ Prof. Sophocles regards the gen. (dependent on ἡμέρα) 
in such exx. as those that follow (cf. Mk. xvi. 9 above) 
as equiv. to μετά w. an acc., the first day after the sabbath; 
see his Lex. p. 43 par. 6]: Mt. xxviii. 1; Mk. xvi. 2; 
Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xx. 1,19; Acts xx. 7; κατὰ μίαν σαββάτων 
(LT Tr WH -tov), on the first day of every week, 1 Co. 
xvi. 2 

σαγήνη, -ης, ἡ, (σάσσω to load, fill), a large fishing-net, 
a drag-net (Vulg. sagena [cf. Eng. seine]), used in catch- 
ing fish that swim in shoals [cf. Β. D.s. v. Net ; Trench, 
Syn. §$lxiv.]: Mt. xiii.47. (Sept.; Plut. solert. anim. p. 
977 £.; Leian. pise. 51; Tim. 22; Artem. oneir. 2, 14; 
Ael. h. a. 11, 12; [βάλλειν cay. Babr. fab. 4, 1; 9, 6].) * 

Σαδδουκαῖος, -ov, 6, a Sadducee, a member of the party 
of the Sadducees, who, distinguished for birth, wealth, 
and official position, and not averse to the favor of the 
Herod family and of the Romans, hated the common 
people, were the opponents of the Pharisees, and reject- 
ing tradition (see παράδοσις, 2) acknowledged the au- 
thority of the O. T. alone in matters pertaining to faith 
and morals (Joseph. antt. 13, 10, 6); they denied not 
only the resurrection of the body (Mt. xxii. 23; Mk. 
xii. 18; Lk. xx. 27; Acts xxiii. 8), but also the immor- 
tality of the soul and future retribution (ψυχῆς τε τὴν 
διαμονὴν καὶ τὰς καθ᾽ adov τιμωρίας καὶ τιμὰς ἀναιροῦσι, 
Joseph. b. j. 2, 8, 14, ef. antt. 18, 1,4), as well as the 
existence of angels and spirits (Acts xxiii. 8). They 
maintained man’s freedom in opposition to the doc- 
trine of divine predestination (acc. to Joseph. b. j. 2, 
8, 14). They are mentioned in the N. T. (in addition 
to the pass. already referred to) in Mt. iii. 7; xvi. 1, 6, 11 
sq, (in which passages they are associated apparently 
with the Pharisees contrary to the truth of history [(?) 
ef. the Comm. ad Il. cc.]); Mt. xxii. 34; Actsiv.1; v.17; 


566 


Σαλαθιήλ 


xxiii. 6sq. | The Sadducees derived their name appar- 
ently not from the Hebr. p's, as though they boasted 
of being pre-eminently ‘righteous’ or ‘upright’ (since it 
cannot be shown that the vowel 7 ever passed over into 
u), but, ace. to a more probable conjecture now ap- 
proved by many, from the Zadok (γῦπες, Sept. Σαδδούκ), 
who was high-priest in the time of David and exhibited 
special fidelity to the king and his house (2 S. xv. 24 sqq.; 
1K.i.32sqq.); hence the posterity of this priest (pi 733, 
Ezek. x]. 46; xliii. 19; xliv. 15; xlviii.11) and all their 
adherents seem to have been called Σαδδουκαῖοι (Ὁ ὈΥ15). 
Cf., besides others, Win. RWB. s. v. Sadduciier ; Reuss 
in Herzog xiii. p. 289 sqq.; [Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 xiii. 
pp- 210-244]; Geiger, Saddue. τ. Pharisier (Brsl. 1863) ; 
Keim i. p. 273 sqq. [Eng. trans. i. (2d ed.) p. 353 sq.]; 
Hausrath in Schenkel iv. p. 518 sqq.; Schiirer, Ntl. Zeit- 
gesch. 2te Aufl. § 26; Wellhausen, Pharis. u. Sadduciier 
(Greifsw. 1874); Oort, De oorsprong van den naam Sad- 
ducéen, in the Theolog. Tijdschrift for 1876, p. 605 sqq.; 
[ Ginsburg, in Alexander’s Kitto s. y.; Edersheim, Jesus 
the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. ii.; Geikie, Life of Christ, ch. xlv. 
(cf. ch. v.); and Β. D. Am. ed. s. ν. for additional refer- 


ences ].* 

Σαδώκ, (pits, a pr. name occurring often in the O. T.). 
6, Sadoc: Mt. i. 14.* 

σαίνω : pres. inf. pass. σαίνεσθαι; (SAQ, σείων ; us 


prop. to wag the tail: of dogs, Hom. Od. 16,6; Ael. ν. h. 
13,41; Aesop. fab. 229 ed. Halm [354 ed. Coray]; with 
οὐρῇ added, Od. 17, 302; Hes. theog. 771; οὐράν, Aesop 
l.c.; al.; see Passow [or L. and S.]s. v. I. 2. metaph. 
a. to flatter, fawn upon, (Aeschyl., Pind.,Soph.,al.). _b. 
to move (the mind of one), a. agreeably: pass. tr 
ἐλπίδος, Aeschyl., Oppian; ἀληθῆ σαίνει τὴν ψυχήν, Aris- 
tot. metaph. 13, 3 p.1090*, 37. B. to agitate, disturb, 
trouble : pass. 1 Th. iii. 3 [here A.V. move (B. 263 (226))] 
(here Lehm. ἀσαίνω, q.v-); of δὲ σαινόμενοι τοῖς λεγο- 
μένοις ἐδάκρυον, Diog. Laért. 8, 41." 

σάκκος (Attic σάκος), του. 6, Hebr. pw [ef. Vanitek, 
Fremdworter, s.v.], a sack (Lat. saccus) i. e. 8. ἃ 
receptacle made for holding or carrying various things, 
as money, food, ete. (Gen. xlii. 25, 35 ; Lev. xi. 32). _b. 
a coarse cloth (Lat. cilicium), a dark coarse stuff made 
especially of the hair of animals [A.V. sackcloth]: Rev. 
vi. 12; a garment of the like material, and clinging to 
the person like a sack, which was wont to be worn (or 
drawn on over the tunic instead of the cloak or mantle) 
by mourners, penitents, suppliants, Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 
13, and also by those who, like the Hebrew prophets, 
led an austere life, Rey. xi. 3 (cf. what is said of the 
dress of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 4; of Elijah, 2 K. i. 
8). More fully in Win. RWB. 5. ν. Sack; Roskoff in 
Schenkel v. 134; [s.v. Sackcloth in B. D.; also in Me- 
Clintock and Strong. (From Hat. down.) ]* 

Dard, (Ndv a missile), 6, Sala [so A. V. (but in Gen. 
Salah); properly Shelah (so R. V.)], prop. name of a 
man mentioned in Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24); [T Tr mrg. 
WH read Sada also in Lk. iii. 32, for Σαλμών, 4. v.].* 

Σαλαθιήλ, (ONIN whom I asked of God), 6, Sala 


Σαλαμίς 


thiel [Grk. for Shealtiel (so R.V.)], the father of Zerub- 
babel: Mt. i. 12; [LK. iii. 27].* 

Σαλαμίς, [on its deriv. see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.], 
-ivos, ἡ, Salamis, the principal city of the island Cyprus: 
Acts xiii. 5. [BB.DD.; Dict. of Geog. 8. v.; Lewin, 
St. Paul, i. 120 sq. ]* 

Σαλείμ, τό, Salim, a town which ace. to Eusebius and 
Jerome [Onomast. (ed. Larsow and Parthey) pp. 28, 11; 
29, 14] was eight miles S. of Seythopolis: Jn. iii. 23; cf. 
Pressel in Herzog xiii. 326; [cf. Aivov]. See Sadyp.* 

σαλεύω ; 1 aor. ἐσάλευσα; Pass., pres. ptep. σαλευόμε- 
vos; pf. ptep. σεσαλευμένος ; 1 aor. ἐσαλεύθην ; 1 fut. 
σαλευθήσομαι ; (σάλος, α- v-); fr. Aeschyl. and Arstph. 
down; in Sept. pass. σαλεύομαι for Oi) and 333; a. 
prop. of the motion produced by winds, storms, waves, 
etc.; to agitate or shake: κάλαμον, pass., Mt. xi. 7; Lk. 
vii. 243 to cause to totter, ras δυνάμεις τῶν ovp., pass., Mt. 
xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; Lk. xxi. 26; τὴν γῆν, Heb. xii. 
26 (Is. xxiv. 20; Am. ix.5); an edifice, Lk. vi. 48; Acts 
iv. 31; xvi. 26; τὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα, the things which are 
not shaken, i. 6. the perfect state of things which will 
exist after the return of Christ from heaven and will 
undergo no change, opp. to τὰ σαλευόμενα, the present 
order of things subject to vicissitude and decay, Heb. 
xii. 27. to shake thoroughly, of a measure filled by shak- 
ing its contents together, Lk. vi. 38. b. to shake 
down, overthrow, i. e. trop. to cast down from one’s (secure 
and happy) state, Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); by a 
trop. use foreign to prof. auth. to move or agitate the 
mind, to disturb one: twa ἀπὸ τοῦ νοός, so as to throw 
him out of his sober and natural mental state [B. 322 
(277)], 2 Th. ii. 2; τοὺς ὄχλους, to stir up, Acts xvii. 
13.* 

Σαλήμ, ἡ, (Heb. pow), Salem: Heb. vii. 1 sq.; ef. Gen. 
xiv. 18, which some (as Gesenius, Winer, Hitzig, Knobel, 
Delitzsch) think is the ancient name of the city of Jer- 
usalem, appealing to the words of Ps. Ixxvi. 3 ΠῚ 
jDD D2wWaA, and Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 2 τὴν μέντοι Σόλυμα 
ὕστερον ἐκάλεσαν Ἱεροσόλυμα; cf. Ὁ. j. 6,10. But more 
correctly [yet ef. B. D. s. v. Salem, and s. v. Melchizedek 
sub fin.] others (as Rosenmiiller, Bleek, Tuch, Roediger 
in Gesen. Thesaur. 85. v. p. 1422, Dillmann), relying on 
the testimony of Jerome ([Ep. ad Evangelum ὃ 7 i. e.] 
Ep. 73 in Vallarsi’s ed. of his Opp. i. p. 446), hold that 
it is the same as Σαλείμ (q.v.). For the ancient name 
of Jerusalem was 033} (Judg. xix. 10; 1 Chr. xi. 4; [ef. 
B.D. Am. ed. 5. v. Jebus]}), and the form of the name in 
Ps. Ixxvi. 3 [where Sept. εἰρήνη] is to be regarded as 
poetical, signifying ‘safe.’ * 

Σαλμών, (ον, Ruth iv. 21), 6, indecl., Salmon, the 
name of a man: Mt. i. 4 sq.; Lk. iii. 32 [here TWH 
Tr mrg. Σαλά]." 

Σαλμώνη, -ns, 7, Salmone, Salmonium, [also Sammo- 
nium], an eastern and partly northern promontory of 
Crete opposite Cnidus and Rhodes [the identification of 
which is somewhat uncertain; see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Salmone, and Dict. of Geogr. s. v. Samonium]: Acts 
xxvii. 7.5 


567 


Σαμάρεια 


σάλος, -ου, 6, the tossing or swell of the sea [R. V. bil- 
lows]: Lk. xxi. 25. (Soph., Eur., al.)* 

σάλπιγξ, -vyyos, 7, a trumpet: Mt. xxiv. 31 [ef. B. 161 
(141) ; 343 (295)]; 1 Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xii. 19; Rev. i. 
10; iv. 1; viii. 2,6, 13; ix. 14; ἐν σάλπιγγι θεοῦ, a trum- 
pet which sounds at God’s command (W. ὃ 36, 3 b.), 1 
Th. iv. 16; ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι, the trumpet which 
will sound at the last day, 1 Co. xv. 52, [4 (2) Esdr. vi. 
23; see Comm. on 1 Th.u.s.]. (From Hom. down; Sept. 
for 12)v and 77¥3N.) * 

cadmitw; fut. σαλπίσω (for the earlier σαλπίγξω, see 
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 191; Sept. also σαλπιῶ, as Num. x. [3], 
5, 8,10); 1 aor. ἐσάλπισα (also in Sept.; Ael. ν. h. 1, 
26 and other later writ. [cf. Veitch 5. v.], for the earlier 
ἐσάλπιγξα, Xen. anab. 1, 2,17) [ef. W. 89 (85); B. 37 
(32); WH. App. p. 170]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly 
for ypA, also for 781; 10 sound a trumpet, [A.V. (most- 
ly) sound]: Rev. viii. 6-10, 12 sq.; ἴχ.1, 18; x. 7; xi. 15; 
σαλπίσει (strictly sc. ὁ σαλπιστής or ἡ σάλπιγξ), like our 
the trumpet will sound (cf. W. § 58, 9b. B.; [B. § 129, 
16]), 1 Co. xv. 52; σαλπίζειν ἔμπροσθεν ἑαυτοῦ, i.e. to 
take care that what we do comes to everybody’s ears, 
make a great noise about it, [cf. our do a thing ‘ with a 
flourish of trumpets’], Mt. vi. 2 (Cie. ad div. 16, 21 
quod polliceris, te buccinatorem fore nostrae existima- 
tionis; Achill. Tat. 8, 10 αὕτη οὐχ ὑπὸ σάλπιγγι μόνον, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ κήρυκι potxyeverar).* 

σαλπιστής (a later form, used by Theophr. char. 25; 
Polyb. 1, 45, 13; Dion. Hal. 4, 18, [al.], for the earlier 
and better σαλπιγκτής, Thuc. 6, 69; Xen. an. 4, 3, 29; 
Joseph. b. 1. 3, 6, 2; and σαλπικτής, Dem. p. 284, 26; App. 
hisp. 6, 93; and in the best codd. of Xen., Diod., Plut., 
al.; [ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 279]; fr. σαλπίζω 
[q- V-]), -00, 6, α trumpeter: Rey. xviii. 22.* 

Σαλώμη, [Hebr. ‘peaceful ᾽Ἴ, -ns, ἡ, Salome, the wife of 
Zebedee, and the mother of the apostles James the 
elder and John: Mk. xv. 40; xvi. 1.* 

Σαλωμών, see Σολομών. 

Σαμάρεια [on the accent cf. Chandler 8104; Β. 17 (15); 
-ia T WH (see Tf. Proleg. p. 87; ef. 1,4}; on the forms 
see Abbot in B.D. Am. ed. s. v.], -as [ef. B. u. 5.1, ἡ [cf. 
W. § 18, ὅ 8.1, (Hebr. 1) γον, Chald. }.pw pron. Scha-! 
me-ra-in, Assyr. Samirina), [on the deriv. see B. 1). s. v.}, 
Samaria ; 1. the name of a city built by Omri 
king of Israel (1 K. xvi. 24), on a mountain of the same 
name (5 70, Am. vi. 1), situated in the tribe of 
Ephraim; it was the capital of the whole region and 
the residence of the kings of Israel. After having been 
besieged three years by Shalmaneser [IV.], king of As- 
syria, it was taken and doubtless devastated by Sargon, 
his son and successor, B.C. 722, who deported the ten 
tribes of Israel and supplied their place with other 
settlers; 2 K. xvii. 5 sq. 24 sq.; xviii. 9 sqq. After its 
restoration, it was utterly destroyed by John Hyrcanus 
the Jewish prince and high-priest (see next word). Long 
afterwards rebuilt once more, it was given by Augus- 
tus to Herod [the Great], by whom it was named in 
honor of Augustus Sebaste, i.e. Augusta, (Strab. lib. 16, 


Σαμαρείτης 


Ρ. 760; Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 8; 8,5). It is now an ob- 
scure village bearing the name of Sebustieh or Sebastiyeh 
(cf. Badeker, Paliistina, p. 354 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 340 
sqq-; Murray, Undbk. Pt. ii. p. 329 sqq.]). It is men- 
tioned, Acts viii. 5 L T WH, εἰς τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 
(gen. of apposition, cf. W. § 59, 8 a.; [B. § 123, 4]), but 
ace. to the better reading εἰς πόλιν τῆς Zap. the gen. is 
partitive, and does not denote the city but the Samar- 
itan territory; cf. vs. 9. 2. the Samaritan terri- 
tory, the region of Samaria, of which the city Samaria 
was the capital: Lk. xvii. 11; Jn. iv. 4 Acts i. 8; 
viii. 1, 5 (see above), 9; ix. 31; xv. 3; by meton. for the 
inhabitants of the region, Acts viii. 14. Cf. Win. RWB. 
s. v. Samaria; Robinson, Palestine ii. 288 sqq.; Peter- 
mann in Herzog xiii. 359 sqq.; [esp. eae in (Riehm 
s. v. Samaritaner, and) Herzog ed. 2, xiii. 340 sqq., and 
reff. there and in Β. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Samaria].* 
Σαμαρείτης (-ίτης Tdf.; [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 87; WH. 
App. p. 154; ef. I, ¢]), (Σαμάρεια), του, ὁ, a Samariian 
(Samarites, Curt. 4,8, 9; Tac. ann. 12,54; Samaritanus, 
Vulg. [(2 Κα. xvii. 29 ‘Samaritae”)] and eccl. writ.), 1. 6. 
an inhabitant either of the city or of the province of Sa- 
maria. The origin of the Samaritans was as follows: 
After Shalmaneser [al. say Esarhaddon, ef. Ezr. iv. 2, 10; 
but see Kautzsch in Herzog ed. 2, as referred to under the 
preceding word ], king of Assyria, had sent colonists from 
Babylon, Cuthah, Ava, Hamath, and Sepharvaim into 
the land of Samaria which he had devastated and de- 
populated [see Σαμάρεια, 1], those Israelites who had 
remained in their desolated country [ef. 2 Ch. xxx. 6, 
10; xxxiv. 9] associated and intermarried with these 
heathen colonists and thus produced a mixed race. 
When the Jews on their return from exile were pre- 
paring to rebuild the temple of Jerusalem, the Samari- 
tans asked to be allowed to bear their part in the com- 
mon work. On being refused by the Jews, who were 
unwilling to recognize them as brethren, they not only 
sent letters to the king of Persia and caused the Jews 
to be compelled to desist from their undertaking down 
to the second year of Darius [Hystaspis] (B.c. 520), 
but also built a temple for themselves on Mount Gerizim, 
a place held sacred even from the days of Moses [ef. 
Deut. xxvii. 12, ete.], and worshipped Jehovah there 
according to the law of Moses, recognizing only the 
Pentateuch as sacred. This temple was destroyed B. c. 
129 by John Hyreanus. Deprived of their temple, the 
Samaritans have nevertheless continued to worship on 
their sacred. mountain quite down to the present time, 
although their numbers are reduced to some forty or 
fifty families. Hence it came to pass that the Samari- 
tans and the Jews entertained inveterate and unap- 
peasable enmity towards each other. Samaritans are 
mentioned in the foll. N. T. pass.: Mt. x.5; Lk. ix. 52; 
x. 33; xvii. 16; Jn. iv. 9 [here Tom. WH br. the el.], 39 
sq-; vili.48; Acts viii. 25. In Hebr. the Samaritans are 
called Ὁ) 7 οἷ, 2 K. xvii. 29. Cf. Juynboll, Commentarii 
in historiam gentis Samaritanae (Lugd. Bat. 1846); Win. 
RWB. 5. v. Samaritaner; Petermann in Herzog xiii. p. 


sq. 7; 


568 


σαπρός 


363 sqq.; Schrader in Schenkel ν. p. 150 βα4.; [esp. 
Kautzsch in Herzog and Riehm αι. 5.7." 

Σαμαρεῖτις (-ires Tae. ; [see the preced. word]), -t3os, 
ἡ, (fem. of Σαμαρείτης), a Samaritan woman: Jn. iv. 9. 
(The Samaritan territory, Joseph. Ὁ. 1. [1, 21, 2, ete.]; 
3, 7, 32; Σαμαρεῖτις χώρα, ib. 3, 3, 4.) * 

Σαμοθρᾷκη [-θρά- K*=¢* G (as here and there in prof. 
auth.; see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.); ace. to some ‘height 
of Thrace’, acc. to others ‘Thracian Samos’ (ef. Σάμος); 
other opinions see in Pape ]. 6.1, της, ἡ, Samothrace, an 
island of the /gean Sea, about 38 τη. distant from the 
coast of Thrace where the river Hebrus empties into 
the sea (Plin. h. n. 4, 12, (23)), [now Samothraki]: Acts 
xvi. ΤῸ 

Σάμος, [(prob. ‘height’; ef. Pape, Eigennamen)], -ov, 
ἡ, Samos, an island in that part of the gean which is 
called the Icarian Sea, opposite Tonia and not far from 
Ephesus; it was the birthplace of Pythagoras; [now 
Grk. Samo, Turkish Susam Adassi]: Acts xx. 15.* 

Σαμουήλ, (πον, for Onan i i.e. ‘heard of God’, fr. 
pow and 5x; ef. 1S. i. 20, 27 [see B. Ὁ. s. v. Samuel), 
6, [indecl. ; Joseph. (antt. 5, 10, 3) Σαμούηλος, -ov], 
Samuel, the son of Elkanah by his wife Anna [or Han- 
nah], the last of the DMS’ or judges, a distinguished 
prophet, and the founder of the prophetic order. He 
gave the Jews their first kings, Saul and David: Acts 
iii. 24; xiii. 20; Heb. xi. 32. (1 5. i—xxv., ef. xxviii. ; 
Sir. xlvi. 13 544.) * 

Σαμψών, (wow fr. wow, ‘sun-like’, cf. Hebr. pies 
fr. ws), [B. 15 (14)], 6, Samson (Vulg. Samson), one 
of the Israelite judges (Ὁ DW), famous for his strength 
and courage, the Hebrew Hercules [cf. BB.DD.; McC. 
and S. s. v. 2,4; esp. Orelli in Herzog ed. 2 8. v. Sim- 
son] (Judg. xiii. sqq.): Heb. xi. 32.* 

σανδάλιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of σάνδαλον [which is prob. 
a Persian word; cf. Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v.]), @ 
sandal, a sole made of wood or leather, covering the bottom 
of the foot and bound on with thongs: Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii. 
8. (Hadt., Joseph., Diod., Ael., Hdian., al.; for 5y3 in 
Is.xx.2; Judith x.4; xvi. 9. [Inthe Sept. and Joseph. 
σανδ. and ὑπόδημα are used indiscriminately ; cf. Is. xx. 
2; Josh. ν. 15; Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 6,1,8.]) Cf. Win. RWB. 
s.v. Schuhe; oskoff in Schenkel v. 255; [Kamphausen 
in Riehm p. 1435 sqq.; B.D. s.v. Sandal; Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 6217." 

cavls, -ίδος, ἡ, a board, a plank: Acts xxvii. 44. 
Hom. down; Sept., Cant. viii. 9; Ezek. xxvii. 5.) * 

Σαούλ, (7NW ‘asked for’), 6, indecl. (in Joseph. Σάου- 
dos), Saul; 1. the name of the first king of Israel: 
Acts xiii. 21. 2. the Jewish name of the apostle 
Paul, but occurring only in address [ef. B. 6]: Acts ix. 
4,17; xxii. 7,13; xxvi. 14; in the other pass. of the 
Acts the form Σαῦλος (4. v-) with the Grk. term. is used.* 

σαπρός, -ὦ, τόν, (σήπω, 2 aor. pass. σαπῆναι) 5 1. 
rotten, putrid, (| Hipponax], Hipper., Arstph., al.). 2. 
corrupted by age and no longer fit for use, worn out, 
(Arstph., Dio Chr., al.);_ hence in general, of poor qual- 
ity, bad, unfit for use, worthless, [A. V. corrupt], (πᾶν, ὃ 


(Fr. 


Σαπφείρη 


μὴ τὴν ἰδίαν χρείαν πληροῖ, σαπρὸν λέγομεν, Chrys. hom. 
4 on 1 Ep. to Tim.) : δένδρον, καρπύς, opp. to καλός, Mt. 
vii. 17 sq.; xii. 33; Lk. vi. 43; fishes, Mt. xiii. 48 [here 
A.V. bad]; trop. λόγος, Eph. iv. 29 (cf. Harless ad loc.); 
δόγμα, Epict. 3, 22, 61. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 377 sq.* 
Σαπφείρη, dat. -η (RGTWH),-a (L Tr; ef. (WH. 
App. p- 156]; B. 11; [W. 62 (61)]), 9, (either Aram. 


° VA 
NV5D 1. 6. ‘beautiful’; Peshitto Ἰμ:.; or fr. σάπφει- 


pos, ἢ. v-), Sapphira, the name of a woman: Acts v. 1." 

σάπφειρος, -ov, ἡ, Hebr. 30, sapphire, a precious 
stone [perh. our lapis lazuli, cf. B.D. s. v. Sapphire; 
Richm, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 14]: Rev. xxi.19. (The- 
ophr., Diose., al.; Sept.) * 

σαργάνη [(prop. ‘ braided-work ’, fr. τ. tark; Fick, Pt. 
iii. p. 598; Vanitek p. 297)], -ys, ἡ; 1. a braided 
rope, a band, (Aeschyl. suppl. 788). 2. a basket, a 
basket made of ropes, a hamper (cf. B.D.s. v. Basket]: 
2 Co. xi. 33; (Timocl. in Athen. 8 p. 339 6.; 9 p. 407 e.; 
[al.]).* 

Σάρδεις, dat. -eow, ai, [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., down], Sar- 
dis [or Sardes], the capital of Lydia, a luxurious city ; 
now an obscure village, Sart, with extensive ruins: Rev. 
i. 11; iii. 1,4. [Cf. McC. and S. s. v.]* 

σάρδινος, -ov, 6, Rev. iv. 3 Rec., i. 4. σάρδιον, 4. Vv.” 

σάρδιον, -ov, τό, [neut. of σάρδιος, see below], sard, sar- 
dius, a precious stone, of which there are two kinds, 
concerning which Theophr. de lapid. 16, 5, § 30 ed. 
Schneid. says, τοῦ yap σαρδίου τὸ μὲν διαφανὲς ἐρυθρότερον 
δὲ καλεῖται θῆλυ, τὸ δὲ διαφανὲς μὲν μελάντερον δὲ καὶ 
ἄρσεν, the former of which is called carnelian (because 
flesh-colored; Hebr. 078, Sept. σάρδιον, Ex. xxviii. 17; 
XXXVi. 17 (xxxix. 10); Ezek. xxviii. 13; αἱματόεντα σάρδια, 
Orph. de lapid. 16, 5), the latter sard: Rev. iv. 3 (Ree. 
σαρδίνῳ); xxl. 20GLTTr WH. Hence the adj. σάρ- 
διος, -a, -ov, [fr. Σάρδεις, cf. Plin. ἢ. π. 37, 7] sardine se. 
λίθος (the full phrase occurs Ex. xxxv. 8 [var.]): Rev. 
xxi. 20 Ree. [Β. Ὁ. 58. vv. Sardine, Sardius.] * 

σαρδιόνυξ, i. q. σαρδόνυξ (q. v.): Rev. xxi. 20 Lehm.* 

σαρδόνυξ | Lehm. capdidvvé}, -vxos, 6, (σάρδιον and ὄνυξ), 
sardonyx, a precious stone marked by the red colors of 
the carnelian (sard) and the white of the onyx [B. D. 
s.v.; Riehm, HWB. s.v. Edelsteine 12]: Rev. xxi. 20. 
(Joseph., Plut., Ptol., ἃ]. ; [Gen. ii. 12 Aq. (Montf.)].)* 

Σάρεπτα [Tr mrg. ᾿Σάρεφθα; Tdf. in O. T. Σαρεπτά], 
(na Ww fr. τὰν to smelt; hence perh. ‘smelting-house’), 
τῶν [yet cf. B. 15 (14); but declined in Obad.], τά; Sarep- 
ta [so A. V.; better with Ὁ. T. Zarephath] a Phenician 
town belwech Tyre and Sidon, but nearer Sidon, [now 
Surafend; cf. B.D.s. v. Zarephath], (1 Κα. xvii. 9; Obad. 
20; in Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 2 Sapepha): τῆς Σιδωνίας, in 
the land of Sidon, Lk. iv. 26. Cf. Robinson, Palestine 
li. 474 sqq.; [B. D. u.s.].* 

σαρκικός, -7, -dv, (aap), fleshly, carnal (Vulg. carnalis) ; 
1. having the nature of flesh, i. e. under the control of the 
animal appetites (see σάρξ, 3), Ro. vii. 14 Ree. (see odp- 
κινος, 3); governed by mere human nature (see σάρξ, 4) 
not by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. iii. 1, 3, also 4 RG; havy- 


569 


σάρξ 


ing its seat in the animal nature or roused by the animal 
nature, ai σαρκικαὶ ἐπιθυμίαι, 1 Pet. 11. 11; i. q. human: 
with the included idea of weakness, ὅπλα, 2 Co. x. 4; with 
the included idea of depravity, σαρκ. codia (i. 6. mavoup- 
yia, 2 Co. iv. 2), 2 Co. i. 12. [(Anthol. Pal. 1, 107; cf. 
ἀπέχου TOV σαρκικῶν κ. σωματικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν, ‘Teaching’ 
οἴο. 1,4). Cf. Trench, Syn. § lxxi.] 2. pertaining 
to the flesh, i.e. to the body (see σάρξ, 2): relating to 
birth, lineage, ete., ἐντολή, Heb. vii. 16 Rec.; τὰ σαρκικά, 
things needed for the sustenance of the body, Ro. xv. 
27; 1 Co.ix. 11, (Aristot. ἢ. anim. 10, 2 p. 635%, 11; Plut. 
de placit. philos. 5, 8, 7; once in Sept., 2 Chr. xxxii. 8 
Compl. )br 

σάρκινος, -n, -ov, (σάρξ), [Arstph., Plat., Aristot., al.], 
fleshy, Lat. carneus, i.e. 1. consisting of flesh, com- 
posed of flesh, (for proparoxytones ending in τίνος gen- 
erally denote the material of which a thing is made, 
ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 46 sq.; [ Donaldson, New 
Crat. § 258]); Vulg. carnalis: opp. to λίθινος, 2 Co. iii. 
3 (σάρκ. ἰχθύς, opp. to a fish of gold which has been 
dreamed of, Theocr. id. 21, 66; the word is also found 
in Plato, Aristot., Theophr., Plut.; Sept., al.). 2 
pertaining to the body (as earthly and perishable material, 
opp. to ζωὴ ἀκατάλυτος) : Heb. vii. 16 G LT Tr WH (see 
σαρκικός, 2). 3. it is used where σαρκικός might 
have been expected: viz. by G LT Tr WH in Ro. vii. 14 
and 1 Co. iii. 1; in these pass., unless we decide that Paul 
used σαρκικός and σάρκινος indiscriminately, we must 
suppose that σάρκινος expresses the idea of σαρκικός with 
an emphasis: wholly given up to the flesh, rooted in the 
flesh as it were. Cf? W.§16,3 γι; Fritzsche u. s.; Reiche, 
Comment. crit. in Ν. T. i. p. 138 sqq.; Holsten, Zum 
Evang. des Paulus u. Petrus p. 397 5644. (Rostock, 1867) ; 
[ Trench, Syn. § |xxii.].* 

σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ, (Aeol. σύρξ ; hence it seems to be de- 
rived fr. σύρω, akin to σαίρω, ‘to draw,’ ‘to draw off,’ 
and to signify what can be stripped off fr. the bones [ Etym. 
Magn. 708, 34; “sed quis ae ” (Lob. Paralip. 
p: 111)]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. Ww 

1. prop. flesh (the soft substance 5 the living body, 
which covers the bones and is permeated with blood) of 
both men and beasts: 1 Co. xv. 39; plur.—of the flesh 
of many beings, Rev. xix. 18, 21; of the parts of the 
flesh of one, Lk. xxiv. 39 Tdf.; Rev. xvii. 16; accord- 
ingly it is distinguished both from blood, σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 
(on which expression see below, 2 a.; 3 bis; 4 fin. τς 
W. 191), and from bones, πνεῦμα σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα οὐκ ἔχει, 
Lk. xxiv. 39 (οὐ γὰρ ἔτι σάρκας τε καὶ ὀστέα ἶνες ἔχουσιν, 
Hom. Od. 11, 219). φαγεῖν Tas σάρκας τινός: prop., 
Rey. xvii. 16; xix. 18, (Lev. xxvi. 29; κατεσθίειν, 2 K. 
ix. 36, and often in Sept.; in class. Grk. freq. βιβρώσκειν 
σάρκας ; σαρκῶν ἐδωδή, Plut. septem sap. conviv. 6. 16) 5 
trop. to torture one with eternal penal torments, Jas. ν. 3, 
cf. Mic. iii. 3; Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 2; φαγεῖν and τρώγειν 
τὴν σάρκα τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, in fig. disc. to appropri- 
ate to one’s self the saving results of the violent death en- 
dured by Christ, Jn. vi.52-56; ἀπέρχεσθαι or πορεύεσθαι 
ὀπίσω σαρκός, to follow after the flesh, is used of those 


σάρξ 


who are on the search for persons with whom they can 
gratify their lust [see ὀπίσω, 2 a.], Jude 7; 2 Pet. ii. 
10; τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκός, the body compacted of flesh 
[ef. W. 188 (177)], Col. i. 22. Since the flesh is the vis- 
ible part of the body, σάρξ is 

2. i. q. the body, not designating it, however, as a 
skilful combination of related parts (‘an organism,’ 
which is denoted by the word σῶμα), but signifying the 
material or substance of the living body [cf. Ae- 
schyl. Sept. 622 γέροντα τὸν νοῦν σάρκα δ᾽ ἡβῶσαν φέρει]: 
a. univ.: Jn. vi. 63 (see πνεῦμα, 2 p. 5320" mid.); Acts 
ii. 26, 30 Rec.; 2 Co. xii. 7; Gal. iv. 14; Eph. v. 29; Heb. 
ix. 10,13; [1 Pet.iii. 21]; Jude 8; μία σάρξ. one body, 
of husband and wife, Mk. x. 8; so εἰς σάρκα μίαν (fr. Gen. 
ii. 24), Mt. xix. δ; Mk. x. 8; 1 Co. vi. 16; Eph. v. 31; 
opp. to ψυχή, Acts ii. 31 (ἔδωκεν .. . Ino. Xp... .7v σάρκα 
ὑπὲρ τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν Kal THY ψυχὴν ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν, 
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 49, 6 [ef. Iren. ὅ, 1,1; but ΑἸ, Τ' Tr 
W Hdrop ἡ ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ in Actsl.c.]); opp. to πνεῦμα (the 
human), 1 Co. ν. 5; 2Co. vii.1; Col. 11. δ; 1 Pet. iii. 18; 
iv. 6; σὰρξ x. αἷμα, i. q. ψυχικὸν σῶμα, 1 Co. xv. 50, ef. 
44; ἡ περιτομὴ ἐν σαρκί, Ro. ii. 28; Eph. ii. 11; τὸ πρό- 
σωπόν μου ev capki,[ A. V. my face in the flesh], my bodily 
countenance, Col. ii. 1; ἀσθένεια σαρκός, of disease, Gal. 
iv. 13; ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν, 2 Co. iv. 11 (cf. ἐν τῷ 
σώματι ἡμῶν, VS. 10); ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ αὐτοῦ, by giving up his 
body to death, Eph. ii. 14 (15) ; also διὰ τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ, 
Heb. x. 20, ef. Jn. vi. 51, (προσφέρειν τὴν σάρκα μου, to 
offer in sacrifice my flesh — Christ is speaking, Barn. ep. 
7,53 τὴν σάρκα παραδοῦναι εἰς καταφθοράν, ibid. 5,1). life 
on earth, which is passed in the body (flesh), is desig- 
nated by the foll. phrases: ἐν σαρκὶ εἶναι, Ro. vii. 5 (where 
Paul uses this expression with designed ambiguity in or- 
der to involve also the ethical sense, ‘to be in the power 
of the flesh,’ to be prompted and governed by the flesh; 
see 4 below) ; ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, Gal. ii. 20; Phil. i. 22; ἐπι- 
μένειν ev σαρκί, Phil. i. 24; ὁ ἐν σαρκὶ χρόνος, 1 Pet. iv. 2; 
ai ἡμέραι τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ, of Christ’s life on earth, Heb. 
v.7. ἐν σαρκί or ἐν τῇ σαρκί, in things pertaining to the 
flesh (body), such as circumcision, descent, ete.: Gal. vi. 
12 36. ; πεποιθέναι, Phil. iii. 3 sq.; ἔχειν πεποίθησιν, Phil. 
iii. 4. b. used of natural or physical origin, 
generation, relationship: οἱ συγγενεῖς κατὰ σάρκα, 
Xo. ix. 3 [ef. W. 8.20, 2 4.7; τέκνα τῆς σαρκός, children 
by birth, natural posterity, ibid. 8; ἀδελφὸν ἐν σαρκὶ καὶ 
ἐν κυρίῳ, a natural brother (as it were) and a Christian 
brother, Philem. 16 ; of τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν πατέρες, our nat- 
ural fathers (opp. to God ὁ πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων, see 
πατήρ, 1 a. and 3 b.), Heb. xii. 9; τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί, Gen- 
tiles by birth, Eph. ii. 11; Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα, 1 Co. x. 
18 (the opposite term Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ θεοῦ, of Christians, is 
found in Gal. vi. 16); τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as respects the flesh 
i.e. human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [(Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 32, 2; 
Tren. haer. 4, 4, 1 and frag. 17 ed. Stieren p. 836)]; yevd- 
μενος ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ κατὰ σ. Ro. i. 3; ὁ κατὰ σάρκα 
γεννηθείς, born by natural generation (opp. to 6 κατὰ 
πνεῦμα yew. i. 6. by the supernatural power of God, oper- 
ating in the promise), Gal. iv. 29, 23; τὸ γεγεννημένον ex 


570 


σάρξ 


τῆς σαρκὸς σάρξ ἐστιν, that which has been born of the 
natural man is a natural man (opp. to one who has been 
born again by the power of the Holy Spirit), Jn. iii. 6; 
ἡ σάρξ μου, those with whom I share my natural origin, 
my fellow-countrymen, Ro. xi. 14 (ἰδοὺ ὀστᾶ σου καὶ 
σάρκες σου, 2S. v.1; add, xix. 13; Gen. xxxvii. 27; Judg. 
ix. 2); εἶναι ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς κ. ἐκ τῶν ὀστέων τινός, Which 
in its proper use signifies to be ‘ formed out of one’s flesh 
and bones’ (Gen. ii. 23; to be related to one by birth, 
Gen. xxix. 14), is transferred metaph. to the church, 
which spiritually derives its origin from Christ ‘and 
is united to him, just as Eve drew her origin from her 
husband Adam, Eph. v. 30 [RG Tr mrg. br.]. ο. 
the sensuous nature of man, ‘the animal nature’: 
without any suggestion of depravity, τὸ θέλημα τῆς σαρ- 
κός, of sexual desire, Jn. i. 133; the animal nature with 
cravings which incite to sin: Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; 
Ro. vii. 18 (for which τὰ μέλη is used in 22 sq.); xiii. 
14; Jude 23; opp. to ὁ νοῦς, Ro. vii. 25; ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῆς 
σαρκός, 1 Jn. ii. 16 (with its manifestation, ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν 
ὀφθαλμῶν ; [al. regard this last as a new specification ; 
οἵ. Westcott ad loc.]); plur. 2 Pet. ii. 18, (ra τῆς σαρκὸς 
πάθη, 4 Mace. vii. 18; τὸ μὴ δεδουλῶσθαι σαρ κὶ καὶ τοῖς 
πάθεσι ταύτης διάγειν, ὑφ᾽ ὧν κατασπώμενος ὁ νοῦς τῆς θνη- 
τῆς ἀναπίμπλαται φλυαρίας. εὔδαιμόν τι καὶ μακάριον, Plut. 
consol. ad Apoll. c. 13; τῆς σαρκὸς ἡδονή, opp. to ψυχή, 
Plut. de virt. et vit.c.3; add, Philo de gigant. 8 7; Diog. 
Laért. 10, 145; animo cum hae carne grave certamen est, 
Sen. consol. ad Mare. 24 ; animus liber habitat; nunquam 
me caro ista compellet ad metum, Sen. epp. 65 [7, 3, 22]; 
non est summa felicitatis nostrae in carne ponenda, ibid. 
74 [9, 3, 16]). the physical nature of man as subject to 
suffering: παθεῖν σαρκί, 1 Pet. iv. 1; ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, 
in that my flesh suffers afflictions, Col. i. 24 (where cf. 
Meyer and De Wette [and Bp. Lghtft.]); θλίψιν ἔχειν 
τῇ σαρκί, 1 Co. vii. 28. 

3. a living creature (because possessed of a body of 
flesh), whether man or beast: πᾶσα σάρξ (in imitation 
of the Hebr. .w3-53 [W. 33]), every living creature, 1 
Pet. i. 24; with od preceding (qualifying the verb [W. 
§ 26,1; B. 121 (106)]), no living creature, Mt. xxiv. 22; 
Mk. xiii. 20; spec. a man (ἄνθρωπος for 1w3, Gen. vi. 
13), generally with a suggestion of weakness, frailty, 
mortality: Sir. xxviii. 5; ἐν τῷ θεῷ ἤλπισα, οὐ φοβηθή- 
σομαι τί ποιήσει μοι σάρξ, Ps. lv. (1ν1.} 5; ef. Jer. xvii. 5; 
ἐμνήσθη. ὅτι σάρξ εἰσιν, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 39; σὰρξ x. 
αἷμα, Eph. vi. 12; γενεὰ σαρκὸς x. αἵματος, ἣ μὲν τελευτᾷ, 
ἑτέρα δὲ γεννᾶται, Sir. xiv. 18; 6 λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο, en- 
tered into participation in human nature, Jn. i. 14 (the 
apostle used σάρξ, not ἄνθρωπος, apparently in order to 
indicate that he who possessed supreme majesty did not 
shrink from union with extreme weakness); εὑρίσκειν τι 
κατὰ σάρκα, to attain to anything after the manner of a 
(weak) man, i. e. by the use of merely human powers, 
Ro. iv. 1 (for substance equiv. to ἐξ ἔργων in vs. 2); 
Hebraistically (see above), πᾶσα σάρξ, all men, Lk. iii. 
6; Jn. xvii. 2 [W. § 80,1 4.1; Acts ii. 17; Sir. xlv. 4; 
with od or μή preceding (qualifying the verb [W. and 


σάρξ 


B. as referred to above]), no man, no mortal, Ro. iii. 20; 
1 Co. i. 29; Gal. ii. 16. man as he appears, such as he 
presents himself to view, man’s external appearance and 
condition: κατὰ σάρκα κρίνειν, Jn. viii. 15 [ef. W. 583 
: (542)] (( q. κρίνειν κατ᾽ ὄψιν, Vil. 24); γινώσκειν or εἰδέ- 
ναι τινὰ κατὰ σάρκα, 2 Co. v.16; οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κύριοι (see 
κατά, 11. 3b.), Eph. vi. 5; Col. iii. 22. univ. human 
nature, the soul included: ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, in 
a visible form, like human nature which is subject to sin, 
Ro. viii. 3 [ef. ὁμοίωμα, b.]; ἐν σαρκὶ ἔρχεσθαι, to appear 
clothed in human nature, 1 Jn. iv. 2and Rec. in 3; 2Jn. 
7, (Barn. ep. 5, 10); φανεροῦσθαι, 1 Tim. iii. 16 (Barn. 
ep. 5, 6; 6, 7; 12,10); κεκοινωνηκέναι αἵματος k. σαρκός, 
Heb. ii. 14. 
4. σάρξ, when either expressly or tacitly opp. to τὸ 
πνεῦμα (τοῦ θεοῦ), has an ethical sense and denotes 
mere human nature, the earthly nature of man apart 
from divine influence, and therefore prone to sin and op- 
posed to God; accordingly it includes whatever in the 
soul is weak, low, debased, tending to ungodliness and 
vice (“ Thou must not understand ‘flesh’, therefore, as 
though that only were ‘flesh’ which is connected with un- 
chastity, but St. Paul uses ‘flesh’ of the whole man, body 
and soul, reason and all his faculties included, because all 
that is in him longs and strives after the flesh” (Luther, 
Pref. to the Ep. to the Rom.); “note that ‘flesh’ signifies 
the entire nature of man, sense and reason, without the 
Holy Spirit” (Melanchthon, Loci, ed. of 1535, in Corpus 
Reform. xxi. p. 277). This definition is strikingly sup- 
ported by these two utterances of Paul: οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν 
ἄνεσιν ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν, 2 Co. vii. 5; οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ 
πνεύματί μου, 2 Co. 11.135}: Ro. viii. 8; Gal. ν. 18,19; 
opp- to τὸ πνεῦμα (τοῦ θεοῦ), Ro. viii. 6 sq. 12 sq.; Gal. 
v. 16 sq.; vi. 8; Col. ii. 13 (on which see ἀκροβυστία, ¢.) ; 
23 (see πλησμονή); ἐπιθυμία σαρκός, Gal. v.16; αἱ ἐπιθυ- 
μίαι and τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκός, Eph. ii. 3; ὁ νοῦς τῆς 
σαρκός, Col. ii. 18; σῶμα τῆς σαρκός, a body given up to 
the control of the flesh, i. e. a body whose members our 
nature, estranged from God, used as its instruments (cf. 
Ro. vi. 19), Col. ii. 11 GL T Tr WH; τὰ τῆς σαρκός (opp. 
to τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος), the things which please the flesh, 
which the flesh craves, Ro. viii. 5; σαρκὶ ἐπιτελοῦμαι, to 
make for one’s self an end [see ἐπιτελέω, 1 fin.] by de- 
voting one’s self to the flesh, i. e. by gradually losing the 
Holy Spirit and giving one’s self up to the control of 
the flesh, Gal. iii. 3; σταυροῦν τὴν σάρκα αὐτοῦ (see σταυ- 
ρόω, 3b.), Gal. v. 24; ἐν σαρκὶ εἶναι (opp. to ἐν πνεύματι, 
80. τοῦ θεοῦ), to be in the power of the flesh, under the 
control of the flesh, Ro. viii. 8 sq., ef. vii. 5 (see 2 a. 
above) ; οἱ κατὰ σάρκα ὄντες, who exhibit the nature of 
the flesh, i. α. of capxtxoi (opp. to of κατὰ πνεῦμα ὄντες), 
Ro. viii. 5; κατὰ σάρκα περιπατεῖν, to live ace. to the 
standard of the flesh, to comply in conduct with the im- 
pulse of the flesh, Ro. viii. 1 Rec.; 2 Co. x. 2; opp. to 
κατὰ πνεῦμα, Ro. viii. 4; βουλεύεσθαι, 2 Co. i. 17; Kav- 
χᾶσθαι, 2 Co. xi. 18 where cf. Meyer; (opp. to κατὰ 
πνεῦμα) ζῆν, Ro. viii. 12 sq. (ἐν σαρκὶ τυγχάνουσιν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ 
κατὰ σάρκα ζῶσιν, of Christians, Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 8); ἐν 


571 


caTap 


σαρκὶ περιπατοῦντες οὐ κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα, although 
the nature in which we live is earthly and therefore 
weak, yet we do not carry on our warfare according to 
its law, 2 Co. x. 3, (οὐ κατὰ σάρκα γράφειν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ 
γνώμην θεοῦ, Ignat. ad Rom. 8,3); with the suggestion 
of weakness as respects knowledge: σὰρξ x. 
αἷμα, a man liable to err, fallible man: Mt. xvi.17; Gal. 
i. 16; ἡ ἀσθένεια τῆς σαρκός, Ro. vi. 19; σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα, 
1 Co. i. 26. Cf. Tholuck, Ueber σάρξ als Quelle der 
Siinde, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1855, p. 477 sqq. ; 
C. Holsten, Die Bedeut. des Wortes σάρξ im Lehrbe- 
griffe des Paulus, 4to, Rostock 1855 [reprinted in his 
Zum Evang. des Paul. u. Petr. p. 365 sqq. (Rostock, 
1867); see also (with esp. ref. to Holsten) Liidemann, 
Die Anthropologie des Apost. Paul. (Kiel, 1872)]; 
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 66 
sqq-; Baur in the Theol. Jahrbb. for 1857, p. 96 sqq., 
and in his Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 142 sqq., ete.; 
Wieseler, Br. an die Galater, pp. 443 sqq. 448 sqq.- [cf. 
Riddle in Schaft’s Lange’s Com. on Rom. p. 235 sq-]; 
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. (ed. 3) ὃ 68 p. 243 sqq., 
§ 100 p. 414 sq.; Rich. Schmidt, Paulin. Christologie, p. 
8 sqq-; Eklund, σάρξ vocabulum quid ap. Paulum apost. 
significet (Lund, 1872); P/leiderer, Paulinismus, p. 47 
sqq- [Eng. trans. vol. i. p. 47 sqq.]; Wendt, Die Begriffe 
Fleisch u. Geist im bibl. Sprachgebr. (Gotha, 1878) ; 
[Cremer in Herzog ed. 2 8. v. Fleisch, but esp. in his 
Bibl.-theol. Worterbuch, 3te (or 4te) Aufl. s. v.; Laid- 
law, The Bible Doctr. of Man (Edinb. 1879), pp. 74 sqq. 
373 sq.; Philippi, Glaubensl. ed. 2, vol. iii. pp. 231-250; 
esp. Dickson, St. Paul’s use of the terms Flesh and 
Spirit (Glasgow, 1883)]; and the reff. in Meyer on Ro. 
iv. 1 (6te Aufl.).* 

Σαρούχ (Rec.), more correctly (ἃ L T Tr WH) Σερούχ, 
ane i. g- δ, ‘vine-shoot’), 6, Serug [so R. V.; but 
A. V. in the N. T. Saruch], the name of a man (Gen. 
xi. 20 sq. ete.): Lk. iii. 35.* 

capé (for the earlier caipa, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 83 
[W. 24, 91 (87)]}),-d; pf. pass. ptep. σεσαρωμένος ; (σάρον 
a broom); to sweep, clean by sweeping: τί, Lk. xv. 8; 
pass. Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 25. (Artem. oneir. 2, 33; 
[Apoll. Dysk. p. 253, 7]; Geop.) * 

Σάρρα, -as, 7, (WW ‘princess’, Gen. xvii. 15), Sarah, 
wife of Abraham: Ro. iv. 19; ix. 9; Heb. xi. 11; 1 Pet. 
iii. 6.* 

Σάρων, -wvos [so Tdf.; but L WH ace. -dva, Tr -wva; 
ef. B. 16 (14)], 6, (Hebr. ;inw for }iw fr. Ww? ‘to be 
straight’; [in Hebr. always with the art. ΤΥ ΤΊ ‘the 
level’]), Sharon [so R. V.; but A. V. Saron], a level re- 
gion extending from Cwsarea of Palestine (Strato’s 
Tower) as far as Joppa [about 30 miles]; it abounded 
in pasturage and was famous for its fertility (Is. xxxiii. 
9; Ixv. 10; 1 Chr. xxvii. 29): Acts ix. 35. [Cf. B.D. 
s. v. Sharon; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. ete. p. 126.]* 

carey indecl. (2 Co. xii. 7 RG [Tdf. in 1 K. xi. 14 
accents -rav (Lagarde leaves it unaccented)]), 6, and 
ὁ σατανᾶς [i. 6. with the art. (exc. in Mk. iii. 23; Lk. 
xxii. 3)], -a [cf. B. 20 (18); W. § 8, 1], ([Aram. 8300, 


σάτον 


stat. emph. of 190] Hebr. 1199), adversary (one who op- 
poses another in purpose or act); the appellation is 
given to 1. the prince of evil spirits, the inveter- 
ate adversary of God and of Christ (see διάβολος, and 
in πονηρός, 2b.): Mk. iii. [23], 26; iv. 15; uk. xs 18: 
xi. 18; 1 Co. v. 5; 2 Co. xi. 14; 1 Th. ii. 18; 1 Tim. i. 
20; Rev. ii. 9, 13, 24; iii. 9; he incites to apostasy from 
God and to sin, Mt. iv. 10; Mk.i. 13; Lk. iv. 8 RL 
in br.; xxii. 31; Acts v. 3; 1 Co. vii. 5; 2 Co. ii. 11 (10); 
1 Tim. ν. 15; circumventing men by stratagems, 2 Co. 
xi. 14; 2 Th. ii. 9; the worshippers of idols are said to 
be under his control, Acts xxvi. 18; Rev. xii. 9; he is 
said both himself εἰσέρχεσθαι ets τινα, in order to act 
through him, Lk. xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27; and by his de- 
mons to take possession of the bodies of men and to 
afflict them with diseases, Lk. xiii. 16, cf. Mt. xii. 26; 
2 Co. xii. 7; by God’s assistance he is overcome, Ro. 
xvi. 20; on Christ’s return from heaven he will be 
bound with chains for a thousand years, but when the 
thousand years are finished he will walk the earth in 
yet greater power, Rev. xx. 2, 7, but shortly after will 
be given over to eternal punishment, ibid. 10. 2 
a Satan-like man: Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. De- 
litzsch in Riehm 5. v.; Schenkel in his BL. s. νι; Ham- 
burger, Real-Encycl. i. 897 sq.; Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, App. xiii. § ii-; and BB.DD. 8. v.]* 


Ora Sa 
σάτον, (Hebr. A893, Chald. 8982, Syr- 2x), -ov, τό, 


a kind of dry measure, a modius and a half [equiv. to 
about a peck and a half (cf. podsos)], (Joseph. antt. 9, 4, 
δ ἰσχύει δὲ τὸ σάτον μύδιον καὶ ἥμισυ tradtxdv; cf. Gen. 
xviii. 6 [see Aq. and Symm.]; Judg. vi. 19): Mt. xiii. 33; 
Lk. xiii. 21, [in both exx. A.V. ‘three measures of meal’ 
i. e. the common quantity for ‘a baking’ (οἴ. Gen. xviii. 
6; Judg. vi. 19; 1S. i. 24)].* 

Σαῦλος, -ov, 6, (see Σαούλ, 2), Saul, the Jewish name 
of the apostle Paul [ef. Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 
2 xi. p. 357 sq.; Conybeare and Howson, St. Paul, i. 150 
8564. (Am. ed.); Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xix. fin.; B.D. Am. 
ed. s.v. Names]: Acts vii. 58; viii. 1, 3; ix. 1, 8,11, 19 
Rec.. 22, 24, 26 Rec.; xi. 25,30; xii. 25; xiii. 1 sq. 7, 9.* 

σβέννυμι (ζβέννυμι, 1 Th. v. 19 Tdf. [ef. 3, σ, s]) and 
[in classics] σβεννύω ; fut. σβέσω ; 1 aor. éo8eca; Pass., 
pres. σβέννυμαι: fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 7323 and 
37, to extinguish, quench ; a. prop.: τί, fire or 
things on fire, Mt. xii. 20; Eph. vi. 16; Heb. xi. 34; 
pass. (Sept. for 713) to be quenched, to go out: Mt. 
xxv. 8; Mk. ix. 44, 46, [both which vss. T WH om. Tr 
br.], 48. b. metaph. to quench i.e. to suppress, 
stifle: τὸ πνεῦμα, divine influence, 1 Th. v. 19 (ἀγάπην, 
Cant. viii. 7; τὰ πάθη, 4 Mace. xvi. 4; χύλον, Hom. 
Il. 9, 678; ὕβριν, Plat. lege. 8, 835 d.; τὸν θυμόν, ibid. 
10, 888 a.).* 

σεαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -ov, reflex. pron. of the 2d pers., used only 
in the gen., dat., and acc.; in the N. T. only in the 
mase.; gen. (of) thyself, (of) thee: Jn. viii. 13; xviii. 
34 LTr WH; Acts xxvi.1; 2 Tim.ivy.11; dat. σεαυτῷ, 
(to) thyself, (to) thee: Jn. xvii. 5; Acts xvi. 28; Ro. ii. 


572 


σεισμός 


5; 1 Tim. ἵν. 16; ace. σεαυτόν, thyself, thee: Mt. iv. 6; 
Mk. xii. 31; Lk. iv. 23; Jn. viii. 53; Ro. xiv. 22; Gal 
vi-1; 1 Tim. iv. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 15; Jas. ii. 8; ete. [CE 
B. § 127, 13.] 

σεβάζομαι : (σέβας reverence, awe) ; 1. to fear, 
be afraid: Hom. Il. 6, 167. 417. 2. in later auth. 
i. q. σέβομαι [W. § 2, 1b.], to honor religiously, to wor- 
ship: with 1 aor. pass. ἐσεβάσθην in an act. sense, Ro. i. 
25 (Orph. Argon. 554; eccl. writ.).* 

σέβασμα, -ros, τό, (σεβάζομαι), whatever is religiously 
honored, an object of worship: 2 Th. ii. 4 (Sap. xiv. 20); 
used of temples, altars, statues, ete., Acts xvii. 23; of 
idolatrous images, Bel and the Dragon 27; Sap. xv. 17, 
(Dion. Hal. antt. 1, 30).* 

σεβαστός, -7, -dv, (σεβάζομαιν; 1. reverend, vener- 
able. 2. ὁ σεβαστός, Lat. augustus, the title of the 
Roman emperors: Acts xxv. 21, 25, (Strabo, Leian., 
Hdian., Dio Cass., al.) ; adj. -ds, -7, τόν, Augustan i. e. 
taking its name fr. the emperor; a title of honor which 
used to be given to certain legions, or cohorts, or battal- 
ions, “for valor” (ala augusta ob virtutem appellata, 
Corpus inserr. Lat. vii. n. 340, 341, 344) : σπείρα σεβ. 
the Augustan cohort, Acts xxvii. 1 (λεγεὼν σεβαστή, Ptol. 
2,3,30; 2,9,18; 4,3,30). The subject is fully treated 
by Schiirer in the Zeitschr. fiir wissensch. Theol. for 1875, 
Ρ. 413 sqq.* 

σέβω, and (so everywh. in the Scriptures) σέβομαι ; fr. 
Hom. down; (0 revere, to worship: τινά (adeity), Mt. xv. 
9; Mk. vii. 7; Acts xviii. 13; xix. 27, (Sap. xv. 18 ete.; 
for $V, Josh. iv. 24; xxii. 25; Jon.i. 9). In the Acts, 
“proselytes of the gate” (see προσήλυτος, 2) are called 
σεβόμενοι τὸν θεόν, [men that worship God’], Acts xvi. 
14; xviii. 7, (Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 2); and simply οἱ 
σεβόμενοι, [A. V. the devout persons], Acts xvii. 17; oe 
βόμενοι προσήλυτοι, [R. V. devout proselyltes], Acts xiii. 
433 σεβόμεναι γυναῖκες, ib. 50; of σεβ. Ἕλληνες, [A. V. 
the devout Greeks], Acts xvii. 4; in the Latin church, 
metuentes, verecundi, religiosi, timorati; Vulg. [exe. Acts 
xiii. 50] colentes ; cf. Thilo in his Cod. apocr. Nov. Test. 
p- 521.* | 

σειρά, -ds, 7, (etpw, to fasten, bind together, [akin to 
Lat. sero, series, servus, ete.]; cf. Curtius § 518), fr. 
Hom. down; a. a line, a rope. b. a chain: 
σειραῖς ζόφου, [A.V. to chains of darkness, i. 6.1 to dark- 
ness as if to ‘chains, 2 Pet. ii. 4 RG [but Tr WH have 
σειροῖς, Τ, T σιροῖς, which see in their place}; μιᾷ ἁλύσει 
σκότους πάντες ἐδέθησαν, Sap. xvii. 17 (18).* 

σειρός, -οὔ, ὁ, iq. σειρά, 4. V- : 2 Pet. ii. 4 TrWH. But 
σειρός, Lat. sirus, in prof. writ. is a pit, an underground 
granary, [e. g. Dem. p. 100 fin. (where the Schol. τ. θη- 
σαυροὺς x. τ. ὀρύγματα ἐν οἷς κατετίθεντο τὰ σπέρματα 
σιροὺς ἐκάλουν οἱ Θρᾷκες x. οἱ Λίβυες) : Diod. Sic. 19, 44; 
ef. Suidas 5. ν. σειροί; Valesius on Harpocr. Lex. 8. v. 
Μελίνη. See Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad loc. Ac- 
cordingly R. V.txt. follows the crit. edd. (cf. σιρός) and 
renders “ pits of darkness”’].” 

σεισμός, -ov, ὁ, (σείω), a shaking, a commotion: ἐν τῇ 
θαλάσσῃ, a tempest, Mt. viii. 24; as often in Grk. writ. 


σείω 


fr. [Hdt. 4, 28], Soph., Arstph. down, pre-eminently an 
earthquake: Mt. xxiv. 7; xxvii. 54; xxviii. 2; Mk. xiii. 
8; Lk.xxi.11; Acts xvi. 26; Rev. vi. 12; viii.5; xi. 13, 
19; xvi. 18; Sept. for wy7.* 

σείω ; fut. σείσω (Heb. xii. 261, Τ Tr WH); Pass., 
pres. ptep. σειόμενος ; 1 aor. ἐσείσθην; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. chiefly for wy1; to shake, agitate, cause to tremble: 
Rev. vi. 13; τὴν γῆν, Heb. xii. 26 after Hag. ii. 6; ἐσείσθη 
ἡ γῆ, Mt. xxvii. 51 (Judg. v. 4; 2S. xxii. 8); σεισθῆναι 
ἀπὸ φόβυυ, of men, to be thrown into a tremor, fo quake 
for fear, Mt. xxviii. 4; metaph. fo agitate the mind: 
ἐσείσθη ἡ πόλις, [R. V. was slirred] i. 6. its inhabitants, 
Mt. xxi. 10. [Comp.: ἀνα-, δια-, kara- σείω.} " 

Σεκοῦνδος, T WI Σέκουνδος [Chandler $§ 233, 235], -ov, 
ὁ, (a Lat. word), Secundus, a certain man of Thessalo- 
nica: Acts xx. 4.* 

Σελεύκεια [T WH -xia (see I, ¢)], -as, ἡ, Seleucia, a city 
of Syria on the Mediterranean, about 5 m. (40 stadia, 
Strabo 16 p. 750) N. of the mouth of the river Orontes, 
about 15 m. (120 stadia) distant fr. Antioch, and oppo- 
site Cyprus: Acts xiii. 4 (1 Mace. xi. 8). [Lewin, St. 
Paul, i. 116 sqq.; Conyb. and Howson, ditto, i. 136 sq.]* 

σελήνη, -ης, 7, (fr. σέλας brightness), fr. Hom. down, 
Hebr. m0, the moon: Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk. 
xxi. 25; Acts ii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. vi. 12; viii. 12; 
xii. 1; xxi. 23.* 

σεληνιάζομαι ; (σελήνη) ; [lit to be moon-struck (cf. 
lunatic); see Wetstein on Mt. iv. 24; Suicer, Thesaur. 
ii. 945 sq.; BB. DD. 8. v. Lunatic]; to be epileptic (epi- 
lepsy being supposed to return and increase with the 
increase of the moon): Mt. iv. 24; xvii.15. (Manetho 
carm. 4, 81 and 217; [Lcian., al.]; eccles. writ.) * 

Senet, L mrg. Σεμεΐν, T Tr WH Sepeciv[see WH. App. 
p- 155; ef. e,¢], (yaw i.e. famous), Semein [so R. V. 
but A. V. Semei], the name of a man: Lk. iii. 26.* 

σεμίδαλις, acc. -cv, ἡ, the finest wheaten flour: Rev. xviii. 
13. (Hippocr., Arstph., Joseph., al.; Sept. often for 
nj.) * : 

'σεμνός, τή. -όν, (σέβω), fr. [Hom. h. Cer., al.], Aeschyl., 
Pind. down, august, venerable, reverend; to be venerated 
for character, honorable: of persons [A.V. grave], 1 Tim. 
iii. 8, 11; Tit. ii. 2; of deeds, Phil. iv. 8. [Cf Trench 
§ xcii.; Schmidt ch. 173, 5.] * 

σεμνότης, τητος, 7, (σεμνός), that characteristic of a 
pers. or a thing which entitles to reverence or respect, 
dignity, gravity, majesty, sanctity: ἡ τοῦ ἱεροῦ σεμνότης, 
2 Maee. iii. 12; in an ethical sense, gravity [so R. V. uni- 
formly (ef. Trench p. 347) ], honor, probity, purity: 1 Tim. 
ii. 2; iii. 4; Tit. ii. 7. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) * 

Σέργιος, -ov, 6, Sergius, surnamed Paulus, proconsul of 
Cyprus, converted to Christianity by the apostle Paul; 
otherwise unknown [cf. Zhift. in Contemp. Rev. for 
1878, p. 290; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. Excurs. xvi.; Re 
aan, Saint Paul, p. 14 sq.]: Acts xiii. 7." 

Σερούχ, see Σαρούχ. 

Σηθ, ὁ, (NW ‘put’ [A. V. ‘appointed ἢ, fr. niv to put 
fi. 6. in place of the murdered Abel; cf. B. D. 5. v. Seth], 
Gen. iv. 25), Seth, the third son of Adam: LK. iii. 38.* 


573 


σημεῖον 


Σήμ (in Joseph. Squas), 6, (OW [‘name,’ ‘sign,’ ‘celeb- 
rity’; but variously explained]), Shem, the eldest son 
of Noah: Lk. iii. 36.* 

σημαίνω ; impf. ἐσήμαινον (Acts xi. 28 L WHtxt.); 1 
aor. ἐσήμανα, for ἐσήμηνα which is the more com. form in 
the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. (see Matthiae 
§ 185; Kiihner ὃ 343s. v.; [Veitch 5. v.]; Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 24sq.; W.§15s.v.; Β. 41 (35)); (fr. σῆμα a sign); 
fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; 10 give a sign, to sig- 
nify, indicate: ri, Acts xxv. 27; foll. by indir. dise., Jn. 
xii. 33; xviii. 32; xxi. 19; 1. 4. to make known: absol. 
Rev. i. 1; foll. by acc. w. inf. Acts xi. 28.* 

σημεῖον, -ov, τό, (σημαίνω [or σῆμα), ir. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down, Hebr. nix, @ sign, mark, token; aM 
uniy. that by which a pers. or a thing is distinguished 
from others and known: Mt. xxvi. 48; Lk. ii.12; 2 Th. 
iii. 17; σημεῖον περιτομῆς (explanatory gen. [ef. B. § 123, 
4]), equiv. to σημεῖον, 6 ἐστι περιτομή, circumcision which 
should be a sign of the covenant formed with God, Ro. 
iv. 11; τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου, the tokens by which one 
is proved to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12; a sign by which 
anything future is pre-announced, Mk. xiii. 4; Lk. xxi. 
73 TO σημ. τῆς σῆς παρουσίας, gen. of the obj., Mt. xxiv. 
35 Tov υἱοῦ Tov ἀνθρώπου, the sign which indicates that 
the Messiah will shortly, or forthwith, come from heaven 
in visible manifestation, ibid. 30; with a gen. of the 
subj. τὰ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν, i.e. the indications of future 
events which of καιροί furnish, what of καιροί portend, 
Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. WH reject the pass.]; a sign by which 
one is warned, an admonition, 1 Co. xiv. 22. used of 
noteworthy personages, by whom God forcibly 
admonishes men and indicates to them what he would 
have them do: thus σημεῖον ἀντιλεγόμενον is said of Jesus 
Christ, Lk. ii. 34; Ἰωνᾶς ἐγένετο σημεῖον τοῖς Νινευΐταις 
(Jon. iii. 4), Lk. xi. 30; hence, τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ, ib. 29, 
is i.q. τὸ σημεῖον like to that ὃς ἦν Iwvas, i.e. to the sign 
which was given by the mission and preaching of Jonah, 
to prompt men to seek salvation [W. 189 (177)]; in the 
same sense, 6 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου says that he will be a 
σημεῖον to the men of his generation, ib. 30; but in Mt. 
xii. 39; xvi. 4 τὸ σημεῖον ᾿Ιωνᾶ is the miraculous experi- 
ence which befell Jonah himself, cf. xii. 40; that Luke 
reproduces Christ’s words more correctly than Matthew 
is shown by De Wette and Bleek on Mt. xii. 40, by 
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 265 sq. ed. 1 [Eng. trans. (3d 
ed. N.Y. 1851) ὃ 165 p. 245 sq.], and others; [but that 
Luke’s report is less full than Matthew’s, rather than 
at variance with it, is shown by Meyer, Weiss, Keil, and 
others (on Mt. 1. e.)]. 2. a sign, prodigy, portent, 
i.e. an unusual occurrence, transcending the common 
course of nature ; a. of signs portending remark- 
able events soon to happen: Lk. xxi. 11, 25; Acts ii. 
19; Rev. xii. 1, 3; xv. 1. b. of miracles and wonders 
by which God authenticates the men sent by him, or 
by which men prove that the cause they are plea‘ling is 
God’s: Mt. xii. 88 54ᾳ.; xvi. 1,4; Mk. viii. 11 sq; xvi. 
17, 20; Lk. xi. 16, 29; xxiii. 8; Jn. ii. 11, 18, 23; iii. 2; 
iv. 54: vi. 2,14, 26,30; vii. 31; ix. 16; x.41; xi 47; xii 


onNMELOW 


18, 37; xx. 30; Acts ii. 22,43; viii.6; 1Co.i.22; but 
the power διδόναι σημεῖα, by which men are deceived, is 
ascribed also to false teachers, false prophets, and to 
demons: Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Rev. xiii. 13 sq.; xvi. 
WAS ΟΣ ῖΣ 0» 5 {ΠῊ; πἰ 9. σημεῖα kK. τέρατα (MINS 
Dan) or (yet less freq.) τέρατα x. σημεῖα (terms which 
differ not in substantial meaning but only in origin; cf. 
Fritzsche, Rom. vol. iii. p. 270sq.; [Trench ὃ xci.]) are 
found conjoined: Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Jn. iv. 48; 
Acts.ii. 19, 43; iv.30; v.12; vi.8; vil. 36; xiv. 3; xv. 
12; Ro. xv. 19; 2 Th. ii. 9, (Deut. xxviii. 46; xxxiv. 11; 
Neh. ix. 10; Is. viii. 18; xx.3; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 20; 
Sap. viii. 8; x. 16; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; Philo, vit. Moys. i. 
16; Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6; b. j. prooem. 11; Plut. Alex. 
75; Ael.v.h.12,57); with «. δυνάμεις added, 2 Co. xii. 
12; Heb. ii. 4; σημεῖα x. δυνάμεις, Acts vill. 13; δυνάμεις x. 
τέρατα κ. σημεῖα, Acts ii. 22; διδόναι σημεῖα (see δίδωμι, 
Β. [1.1 a.): Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22 (here Tdf. ποιεῖν 
onu-, see rovéw, I. 1¢.); σημεῖα are said γίνεσθαι διά twos 
in Acts ii. 43; iv. [16], 30; v.12; xiv. 3; xv. 12 [here 
ποιεῖν σημ-.» see above]; τὸ σημεῖον τῆς ἰάσεως, the mira- 
cle, which was the healing, Acts iv. 22.* 

σημειόω, -@: (σημεῖον), to mark, note, distinguish by 
marking; Mid. pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. σημειοῦσθε; to 
mark or note for one’s self [W. § 38, 2b.; B. 8 185, 4]: 
τινά, 2 Th. iii. 14 [οἵ B. 92 (80); W.119(113)]. (The- 
ophr., Polyb., Philo, Dion. Hal., al.; [Ps. iv. 7 Sept.].)* 

σήμερον | Attic τήμερον, 1. 6. ἡμέρα with pronom. prefix 
(Skr. sa); ef. Vaniéek p. 971], adv., fr. Hom. down, 
Sept. for ΟΥ̓́Τ, to-day, this day: Mt. vi. 11; xvi. 3 [T br. 
WH reject the pass.]; Lk. iv. 21; xix. 5; Actsiv. 9; xiii. 
33, etc.; also where the speaker refers to the night just 
passed, Mt. xxvii.19; equiv. to this night (now current), 
Lk. ii. 11; σήμερον ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτί, Mk. xiv. 30; ἕως σήμε- 
pov, 2 Co. iii. 15; opp. to αὔριον, Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; 
xiii. 32 sq.; Jas. iv. 13; χθὲς καὶ σήμερον καὶ εἰς τοὺς 
αἰῶνας, a rhet. periphrasis for dei, Heb. xiii. 8; ἡ σήμερον 
ἡμέρα, this (very) day, Acts xx. 26; ἕως τῆς σ. ἡμέρας, 
Ro. xi. 8; μέχρι τῆς σήμερον sc. ἡμέρας, Mt. xi. 23 ; xxviii. 
15; ἕως τῆς σ. Mt. xxvii. 8; ἄχρι τῆς o- (where L T Tr 
WH add ἡμέρας), 2 Co. iii. 14; ἡ σήμερον, i. ἡ. what has 
happened to-day [8]. render concerning this day’s riot; 
B.§ 133, 9; but see Meyer ad loc.; W. § 30, 9a.], Acts 
xix. 40; τὸ σήμερον, the word to-day, Heb. iii. 13; asa 
subst.: ὁρίζει ἡμέραν, σήμερον, “a to-day ” (meaning, ‘a 
time for embracing the salvation graciously offered’ [ef. 
R. V.mrg.]), Heb. iv. 75. 

σήπω: fr. Hom. down; to make corrupt; in the Bible 
also to destroy, Job xl. 7 (12); pass. to become corrupt 
or rotten; 2 pf. act. σέσηπα, to (have become i. e. to) be 
corrupted (cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 82): ὁ πλοῦτος σέ- 
σηπεν, has perished, Jas. v. 2.” 

σηρικός (Lchm. ed. maj. T WII σιρικός [ef. WH. App. 
p: 1517), -n, τόν, (Sip, Σῆρες, the Seres, a people of India 
[prob. mod. China; yet on the name οἵ. Pape, Eigen- 
namen, s.v.; Dict. of Geog. 5. v. Serica]) ; 1. prop. 
pertaining to the Seres. 2. silken: τὸ σηρικόν, silk, 
i. 6. the fabric, silken garments, Rev. xviii. 12. ({Strabo, 


574 


σικάριος 


Plut., Arr., Leian.]; ἐσθήσεσι σηρικαῖς, Joseph. b. j. 7, 5, 
4.)* 

σής, onrds, 6, (Hebr. 0d, Is. li. 8; wy, Job iv. 19; xiii. 
28), a moth, the clothes-moth, [B. D.s.v. Moth; Alex.’s 
Kitto s. v. Ash]: Mt. vi. 19 sq.; Lk. xii. 33. (Pind., Ar- 
stph., Aristot., Theophr., al.) * 

σητό-βρωτος, -ov, (fr. ons a moth, and βρωτός fr. βι- 
βρώσκω), moth-eaten: ἱμάτιον, Jas. v. 2 (ἱμάτια, Job xiii. 
28; of idol-images, Sibyll. orac. in Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 
36).* 

σθενόω, -ὥ : (σθένος [allied w. στῆναι. hence prop. stead- 
fastness ; Curtius p. 503 sq.] strength), to make strong, 
to strengthen: twa, one’s soul, 1 Pet. v. 10, where for 1 
aor. opt. act. 3 pers. sing. σθενώσαι, we must read the 
fut. σθενώσει, with GLT TrWH. (Pass. in Rhet. Gr. 
ed. Walz, vol. i. ὁ. 15.) * 

σιαγών, -dvos, 7, the jaw, the jaw-bone, [A. V. cheek]: 
Mt. v. 39; Lk. vi. 29. (Soph., Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.; 
Sept. for 4.) ἢ 

σιγάω, -@; 1 aor. ἐσίγησα ; pf. pass. ptep. σεσιγημένος ; 
(σιγήν) ; fr. Hom. down; to keep silence, hold one’s peace: 
Lk. ix. 36; xviii. 39 LT Tr WH; [xx. 26]; Acts xii. 
17; xv. 12sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 28, 30, 34; pass. to be kept in 
silence, be concealed, Ro. xvi. 25. [Syn. see ἡσυχάζω.} * 

σιγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. σίζω [onomatopoetic, Etym. Magn. 712, 
29] i.e. to command silence by making the sound δὲ or 
sch; [yet σιγή prob. has no connection with σίζω, but is 
of European origin (ef. Germ. schweigen); ef. Fick, Pt. 
iii. 843 ; Curtius 8. 5712), fr. Hom. down, silence: Acts 
xxi. 40; Rev. viii. 1.* 

σιδήρεος, -έα, -eov, contr. -οὖῦς, -a, -οῦν, (σίδηρος), fr. 
Hom. down, made of iron: Acts xii. 10; Rev. ii. 27; ix. 
OL ΡΟ ΩΣ σὸδιον Da 

σίδηρος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, iron: Rev. xviii. 12.* 

Σιδών, -ῶνος [B. 16 (14)], ἡ, (VE and ps, fr. ὭΣ ‘to 
hunt’, in Aram. also ‘to fish’; hence prop. taking its 
name from its abundance of fish; cf. Justin 18, 3), Sidon, 
a very ancient Phenician city, formerly distinguished 
for wealth and traffic, situated near the Mediterranean 
on the borders of Juda; it had been assigned to the 
tribe of Asher (Josh. xix. 28), but the Jews vainly en- 
deavored to capture it [Judg. i. 31; iii. 3; x. 12]; now 
Saida, containing about 10,000 [or 9,000, ace. to Porter 
in Murray’s Handbook p. 376] inhabitants [ Baedeker, 
Palestine p. 433]: Mt. xi. 21 sq.; xv. 21; Mk. iii. 8; vii. 
24 (where Tom. WH Tr mrg. br. the words καὶ Σιδῶνος), 
31; Lk. iv. 26 (where LT Tr WH Sidavias); vi. 17; x. 13 
sq.; Acts xxvii. 3. [Cf. BB. DD. s.v.; Schultz in Ilerzog 
ed. 2 vol. xiv. 192sqq.; Schlottmann in Riehm s. v.] * 

Σιδώνιος, -a, -ov, (Σιδών), belonging to Sidon, of Sidon: 
τῆς Σιδωνίας sc. χώρας. [R.V. in the land of Sidon], Lk. 
iv. 26 LT Tr WH (Hom. Od. 13, 285 [but -8or]) 5 Se 
δώνιοι, the inhabitants of Sidon, Acts xii. 20.* 

σικάριος, -ov, ὁ, (a Latin word), an assassin, i. e. one 
who carries a dagger or short sword [Lat. sica (cf. Jo- 
seph. as below)] under his clothing, that he may kill 
secretly and treacherously any one he wishes to (a cut- 
throat): Acts xxi. 38. (Joseph. b. j. 2, 17, 6 σικαρίονς 


σίκερα 


ἐκάλουν τοὺς ληστὰς ἔχοντας ὑπὸ τοῖς κόλποις τὰ ξίφη [οἵ. 
2,18,817; also antt. 20, 8, 10 σικάριοι λῃσταί εἰσι χρώμενοι 
ξιφιδίοις παραπλησίοις μὲν τὸ μέγεθος τοῖς τῶν Περσῶν ἀκι- 
νάκαις, ἐπικαμπέσι δὲ καὶ ὁμοίοις ταῖς ὑπὸ Ρωμαίων σίκαις 
καλουμέναις, ἀφ᾽ ὧν καὶ τὴν προσηγορίαν οἱ λῃστεύοντες ἔλα- 
Bov πολλοὺς ἀναιροῦντες.) [SYN. see φονεύς.} " 

σίκερα, τό, (Hebr. 13¥ (rather, ace. to Kautzsch (Gram. 
p- 11) for 813¥ (prop. cixpa) the stat. emphat. of φῦ 
(lit. ‘intoxicating’ drink)]), indecl. [W. 68 (66); B. 
24 (21)], (yet Euseb. praep. evang. 6, 10, 8 has a gen. 
σίκερος [and Soph. in his Lex. quotes fr. Cyrill. Alex. 1, 
1041 ἃ. (ed. Migne) a gen. σικέρατος }), strong drink, an 
intoxicating beverage, different from wine [exe. in Num. 
xxviii. 7 (cf. Is. xxviii. 7)]; it was a factitious product, 
made of a mixture of sweet ingredients, whether derived 
from grain and vegetables, or from the juice of fruits 
(dates), or a decoction of honey: Lk. i. 15 (Lev. x. 9; 
Num. vi. 3; Deut. xiv. 25 (26); xxix. 6, οἵα. ; the same 
Hebr. word is rendered also by μέθυσμα, Judg. xiii. 4, 7, 
14; Mic. ii. 11). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Wein, kunst- 
licher; [B. Ὁ. s.v. Drink, Strong].* 

Σίλας, [gen. not found (exc. Joseph. vita 17 -a)], dat. 
-a, ace. -av, [B. 20 (18)], 6, Silas (contr. fr. Σιλουανός, 
4 γος W. 103 (97)), a Roman citizen (Acts xvi. 37 sq.), 
the companion of the apostle Paul in several of his jour- 
neys, and his associate in preaching the gospel: Acts 
xv- 22, 27, 32, 34 Rec., 40; xvi. 19, 25, 29; xvii. 4, 10, 
14 sq.; xviii. 5. [B. Ὁ. 5. v. Silas.]* 

Σιλονανός, -ov, ὁ, Silvanus, the same man who in Acts 
is called Σίλας (α- ν.) : 2Co.i.19; 1 Th.i.1; 2Th.i.1; 
1 Pet. v.12. [Not infreq. written in the Mss. Σιλβανός, 
Silbanus; ef. Tdf. on Il. ce.) * 

Σιλωάμ, (Hebr. 15, Is. viii. 6, which in Jn. ix. 7 is 
translated ἀπεσταλμένος, but more correctly [see below] 
‘a sending out,’ ‘gushing forth’ (of water) ; it is formed 
after the analogy of 3{*8 ‘had in hatred’, ‘ persecuted’, 
fr. 28; 3? ‘born’, fr. 19: ‘to bring forth’ ; [the pure- 
ly passive explanation, ἀπεσταλμένος, Jn. ix. 7, is not so 
incorrect.” Ewald, Ausfiihrl. Lehrbuch d. Hebr. Spr. 
§ 150, 2 a.; ef. Meyer on Jn. 1.c¢.]), 6 (in Joseph. ἡ 5., se. 
πηγή; Ὁ. j. 5, 12, 2; 6, 8,5; but also μέχρι rod Σ. b. j. 2, 
16,2; 6, 7, 2; [B. 21 (19)]), [indecl. ; but in Joseph. Ὁ. j. 
5, 6, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς Σιλωᾶς], Siloam, a fountain of sweet and 
abundant water (Joseph. Ὁ. 1. 5, 4, 1), flowing into a basin 
or pool of the same name (Neh. iii. 15), both of which 
seem to have been situated in the southern part of Jer- 
usalem, although opinions vary on this point: Lk. xiii. 
4; Jn. ix. 11, (Is. viii.6). Cf. [Β. Ὁ. 5. v. Siloam]; Win. 
RWB. s. v. Siloah ; Rédiger in Gesen. Thesaur. p. 1416; 
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 1, xiv. p. 371 sqq.; Robinson, Pal- 
estine, i. 333 sqq.; Tobler, Die Siloaquelle u. der Oelberg 
-(St. Gallen, 1852); Kneucker, Siloah, Quelle Teich u. 
Thal in Jerus. (Heidelb. 1873); Furrer in Schenkel v. 
295 sq.; [Ritter, Palestine, etc., Eng. trans. i. 148 sq.; 
Wilson, Ordnance Survey, etc., 1865; esp. Guthe in the 
Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Pal.-Vereins for 1882, pp. 205 sqq. 
229 sqq.; Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Morgenl.-Gesellsch. for 
1882 Ρ. 725 sqq.].* 


575 


σίναπι 


σιμικίνθιον (or σημικίνθιονῚ, -ου, τό, (Lat. semicinctium 
[ef. Rich, Dict. of Απεῖᾳ. 5. v.], fr. semi and cingo), a 
narrow apron, or linen covering, which workmen and 
servants were accustomed to wear: Acts xix. 12 [A. V. 
aprons }.* 

Σίμων, -wvos [B. 16 (14)], 6, (jipnw, ‘a hearing’, fr. 
ynw ‘to hear’; [there was also a Grk. name Σίμων (allied 
w. σιμός, i.e. ‘flat-nosed’; Fick, Gr. Personennamen, p. 
210), but cf. B. D.s. v. Simon init.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 
p- 266 sq.]), Simon; 1. Peter, the apostle: Mt. 
xvii. 25; Mk. i. 29sq. 36; Lk. iv. 38; v. 4sq. 10, ete.; 
see Πέτρος. 2. the brother of Judas Lebbzus [cf. 
s.V. Ἰούδας, 8], an apostle, who is called Kavavirns [so RG, 
but 1, T Tr WH -vaios, q.v.], Mt. x. 4; Mk. iii. 18, and 
ζηλωτής, Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. 3. a brother of 
Jesus [cf. s. v. ἀδελφός, 1]: Mt. xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3. 4. 
a certain Cyrenian, who carried the cross of Jesus: 
Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26. 5. the 
father of Judas Iscariot [and himself surnamed Ἰσκαρι- 
ὦτης (see Ἰούδας, 6) ]: Jn. vi. 71; xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26. 6. 
a certain Pharisee, Lk. vii. 40, 48 54.. who appears to 
[some, e. g. Grotius, Schleiermacher, Holtzmann, Schen- 
kel, Ewald, Keim, Hug, Bleek (see his Synopt. Erklir. on 
Lk. 1. 6.) to] be the same as Simon the leper, Mt. xxvi. 6 ; 
Mk. xiv. 3; [but the occurrence recorded by Lk. 1. c. is 
now commonly thought to be distinct fr. that narrated 
by Mt. and Mk. Il. ec.; ef. Godet or Keil on Lk.]. 7. 
a certain tanner, living at Joppa: Acts ix. 43; x. 6, 17, 
32. 8. Simon (‘ Magus’), the Samaritan sorcerer : 
Acts viii. 9, 13, 18, 24. The various eccles. stories about 
him, as well as the opinions and conjectures of modern 
theologians, are reviewed at length by Lipsius in Schen- 
kel v. pp. 301-321; [ef. W. Méller in Herzog ed. 2, vol. 
xiv. p. 246 sqq.; Schagf, Hist. of the Chris. Church, vol. 
ii. (1883) 8 121]. 

Σινᾶ [-νά WH; cf. Chandler §§ 135, 138], τό (sc. ὄρος, 
ef. B. 21 sq. (19)), indecl., Joseph. τὸ Swaiov, antt. 3, 9, 
1, and τὸ Swaiov ὄρος, antt. 2, 12,1; Hebr. 2) Ὁ [perh. 
‘jagged’; al. make it an adj. ‘belonging to (the desert 
of) Sin’], (Sina or) Sinai, a mountain or, rather, a moun- 
tainous region in the peninsula of Arabia Petra, made 
famous by the giving of the Mosaic law. There are three 
summits: one towards the west, which is called 2 ΠῚ, ἃ 
second towards the east, Sinai prop. so called, the third 
towards the south, now Mt. St. Catharine. But the dis- 
tinction between Horeb and Sinai is given differently 
by different writers; and some think that they were two 
different names of one and the same mountain (cf. Sir. 
xlviii. 7); ef. (McC. and S. Cycl.s.v. Sinai]; Win. RWB. 
5. v. Sinai; Arnold in Herzog ed. 1 vol. xiv. p. 420 sq.; 
[Schultz in ed. 2 vol. xiv. p. 282 sqq.]; Furrer in Schen- 
kel ν. p. 326 sqq-; [Eng. Ordnance Survey, 1869; Palmer, 
Desert of the Exodus, 1872; also his Sinai from the 
Monuments, 1878; Furrer commends Holland’s “ Sketch 
Map” etc. in the Journ. of the Royal Geog. Soc. vol. 
xxxix. (Lond. 1869)]. The name occurs in Acts vii. 30, 
38; Gal. iv. 24 sq.* 

σίναπι (also σίνηπι [but not in the N. T.], both later 


σινδών 


for the Attic νάπυ [so accented in late auth., better νᾶπυ], 
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 288), [thought to be of Egypt. ori- 
gin; ef. Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v. vary], -ews [B. 14 
(13)), τό, mustard, the name of a plant which in oriental 
countries grows from a very small seed and attains to 
the height of ‘a tree’—ten feet and more; hence a very 
small quantity of a thing is likened to a κόκκος σινάπεως 
[A. V. @ grain of mustard seed], Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. xvii. 
6; and also a thing which grows to a remarkable size, 
Mt. xiii. 81 sq.; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii. 19. (Cf. B. D. s. v. 
Mustard; Zéw, Aram. Pflanzennamen, ὃ 134; Carru- 
thers in the‘ Bible Educator’ vol. i. p.119sq.; Tristram, 
Nat. Ilist. of the Bible, p. 472 sq.; Z'homson, The Land 
and the Book, ii. 100 sq.]* 

σινδών, -dvos. ἡ, (of uncertain origin; Skr. sindhu 
[Egypt. ‘schenti’ or ‘sent’; ef. Vanicek, Fremdworter, 


s.v.]; Sept. for 10, Jude. xiv. 12 sq.; Prov. xxix. 42 
(xxxi. 24)), fine cloth (Lat. sindon), i.e. 1. linen 


cloth, esp. that which was fine and costly, in which the 
bodies of the dead were wrapped: Mt. xxvii. 59; Mk. 
xv. 46; Lk. xxiii. 53, (cf. Hdt. 2, 86 who says of the 
Egyptians, κατειλίσσουσι πᾶν τὸ σῶμα σινδόνος βυσσίνης 
[see Wilkinson’s note in Rawlinson’s Herod. 3d ed. 
lc.]). 2. thing made of fine cloth: so of alight and 
loose garment worn at night over the naked body, Mk. 
xiv. 51 sq. [others suppose a sheet rather than a shirt to 
be referred to; A. V. linen cloth; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Sheets}. (Besides Hdt., the writers Sopns Thuce., Stra- 
bo, Leian., al., use the word.) * 

σινιάζω: 1 aor. infin. σινιάσαι; (σινίον ‘a sieve,’ ‘win- 
nowing-van’; an eccles. and Byzant. word [ef. Macar. 
homil. 5 p. 73 sq. (496 a. ed. Migne)]) ; fo sift, shake in 
α sieve: twa ὡς τὸν σῖτον, i.e., dropping the fig., by in- 
ward agitation to try one’s faith to the verge of over- 
throw, Lk. xxii. 31. (Eccles. writ. [ef. W. 92 (87), 26 
(25), and see above].) * 

σιρικός, See σηρικός. 

σιρός, -οὔ, 6, iq. σειρός, 4. ν-: 2 Pet. ii. 41, Το" 

σιτευτός, τή, -όν, (σιτεύω, to feed with wheat, to fatten), 
fattened, fatted: Lk. xv. 23, 27, 30. (Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 
21; 1K. iv. 23, [ete.]; Xen., Polyb., Athen., [al.].) * 

σιτίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of σῖτος) ; 1. corn, grain: 
Acts vii. 12 LT Tr WH. In prof. writ. also 2. 
food made from grain (Hat. 2, 36). 3. eatables, 
victuals, provisions, ({Hdt.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., Dem., 
als) 

σιτιστός, -ή, -όν, (σιτίζω, to feed with grain, to fatten), 
fattened, [plur. τὰ our. as subst., A. V. fatlings], Mt. xxii. 
4. (Joseph. antt. 8, 2,4; Athen. 14 p. 656 e.) * 

σιτομέτριον, -ov, τό, (Attic writ. said τὸν σῖτον μετρεῖν ; 
out of which later writ. formed the compound σίτομε- 
rpeiv, Gen. xlvii. 12, [14]; Polyb. 4, 63, 10; Diod. 19, 
50; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 14,7; otroperpia, Diod. 2, 41; (ef. 
Lob. ad Phryn. p.383; W.25]), @ measured ‘portion of” 
grain or ‘ food’: Lk. xii. 42. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.) * 

σῖτος, -ov, 6, [of uncertain origin; cf. Vanicek, Fremd- 
worter, s. v.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for 127 wheat, 
corn: Mt. iii. 12; xiii. 25, 29 sq.; Mk. iv. 28; Lk. iii. 17: 


576 


oKaviaricos 


(xii. 18 WH Trtxt.]; xvi. 7; xxii. 31; Jn. xii. 24; Acuw 
xxvii. 88; 1 Co. xv. 37; Rev. vi.6; xviii. 13; plur. ra 
σῖτα (cf. W. 63 (62)), Acts vii. 12 Rec., and often in Sept.* 

Σιχάρ, see Suyap. 

Σιών, indecl., (its grammat. gend. in the N. T. does 
not appear from the pass. in which it is mentioned; ef. 
B. 21 sq. (19); in the Sept. when it denotes the city of 
Jerusalem ἡ Σιών occurs, as Ps. ci. (cii.) 14, 17; exxxi. 
(exxxii.) 13; exxxvi. (exxxvii.) 1), Hebr. ΤΟΥ [i. ©. 
ace. to some, ‘ protected’ or ‘ protecting’; ace. to others, 
‘sunny’; al. al.]; Sion [so A. V., but properly (with 
R. V.)] Zion; 1. the hill on which the higher and 
more ancient part of Jerusalem was built (WI Wy city 
of David, because David captured it); it was the south- 
westernmost and highest of the hills on which the city 
stood; [many now would identify it with the eastern 
hill, some with the northern; cf. Furrer in Schenkel 
iii. 216 sqq.; Aiihlau in Riehm s. v.; per contra Wolcott 
in B. D. Am. ed.s. v.; Schultz in Herzog ed. 2 vi. p. 543 
sq: ]- 2. used very often for the entire city of Jeru- 
salem itself: Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 6, (after Is. xxviii 
16); Ro. xi. 26 (fr. Is. lix. 20); ἡ θυγάτηρ Σιών (see θυγάτηρ, 
b. B.), Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15. 3. Since Jerusalem, 
because the temple stood there, was called the dwelling- 
place of God (cf. Mt. v. 35; κύριος τὴν Σιὼν ἠἡρετίσατο εἰς 
κατοικίαν ἑαυτῷ, Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 13), the expression 
τὸ Σιὼν ὄρος is transferred to heaven, as the true dwell 
ing-place of God and heavenly beings, the antitype of 
the earthly Zion: Heb. xii. 22; Rev. xiv. 1.* 

σιωπάω, -@; impf., 3 pers. sing. ἐσιώπα, 3 pers. plur. 
ἐσιώπων; fut. σιωπήσω (Lk. xix.40 LT Tr WH); 1 aor. 
ἐσιώπησα: (σιωπή silence); fr. Hom. down; to be silent, 
hold one’s peace: prop., Mt. xx. 31; xxvi. 63; Mk. iii. 4; 
ix. 834; x.48; xiv.61; Lk. xviii. 39 RG; xix.40; Acts 
xviii. 9; used of one silent because dumb, Lk. i. 20; 
4 Mace. x. 18; like sileoin the Lat. poets, used metaph. 
of a calm, quiet sea [(in rhetorical command)]: Mk. 
iv. 39. [Syn. see novxato.]* 

σκανδαλίζω; 1 aor. ἐσκανδάλισα; Pass., pres. σκανδαλίζο- 
μαι; impf. ἐσκανδαλιζόμην: 1 aor. ἐσκανδαλίσθην [ cf. B. 52 
(45)]; 1 fut. σκανδαλισθήσομαι; (σκάνδαλον); Vulg. scan- 


dalizo; Peshitto Nae ; prop. to put a stumbling-block 


or impediment in the way, upon which another may trip 
and fall; to be a stumbling-block; in the N. T. always 
metaph. [R. V. to cause or make to stumble; A.V. to 
offend (cause to offend) ]; a. to entice to sin (Luth. 
drgern, i. e. arg, νὸς machen): τινά, Mt. v. 29, [30]; xviii. 
6,8 sq.; Mk. ix. 42sq. 45,47; Lk. xvii. 2; 1 Co. viii. 13; 
pass. Lat. offendor, [A. V. to be offended], Vulg. scanda- 


a 
lizor, Peshitto ἅμ : Ro. xiv. 21 [RGLTrtxt.]; 2 Co. 


xi. 29 [R. V. is made to stumble; cf. W. 153 (145)]. b. 
to cause a person to begin to distrust and desert one whom 
he ought to trust and obey; to cause to fall away, and 
in pass. to fall away [R. V. to stumble (cf. ‘Teaching’ 
ete. 16,5; Herm. vis. 4, 1, 3; mand. 8, 10)]: τινά, Jn. 
vi. 61: pass.. Mt. xiii. 21: xxiv.10: xxvi.33; Mk. iv. 


“κάώνδαλον 


17; xiv. 29; [Jn. xvi. 1]; ἔν τινε [A. V.] to be offended 
in one,.{ find occasion of stumbling in], i. 6. to see in 
another what I disapprove of and what hinders me from 
acknowledging his authority: Mt. xi. 6; xiii. 57; xxvi. 
81; Mk. vi. 3; xiv. 27; Lk. vii. 23; to cause one to Judge 
wrfacorably or unjustly of another, Mt. xvii. 27. Since 
the man who stumbles or whose foot gets entangled 
feels annoyed, σκανδαλίζω means c. lo cause one 
to feel displeasure at a thing; to make indignant: τινά, 
pass. to be displeased, indignant, [A. V. offended], Mt. 
xv.12. The verb σκανδαλίζω is found neither in prof. 
auth. nor in the Sept., but only in the relics of Aquila’s 
version of the O. T., Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.) 9; Is. viii. 15; [xl. 
80]; Prov. iv. 12 for 7¥/3; besides in Sir. ix. 5; xxiii. 
8; xxxv. (xxxii.) 15; [Psalt. Sal. 16,7. Cf. W.33.]* 

σκάνδαλον, -ov, τό, a purely bibl. [(occurring some 
twenty-five times in the Grk. O.T., and fifteen, quotations 
included, in the New) ] and eccles. word for σκανδάληθρον, 
which occurs occasionally in native Grk. writ.; Sept. for 
Wp) (a noose, a snare) and 719; a. prop. the 
movable stick or tricker (‘trigger’) of a trap, trap-stick ; 
ἃ trap, snare; any impediment piaced in the way and caus- 
ing one to stumble or fall, [a stumbling-block, occasion of 
stumbling]: Ley. xix. 14; πέτρα σκανδάλου [ A. V. a rock 
of offence], i. e. a rock which is a cause of stumbling 
(Lat. offendiculum),— fig. applied to Jesus Christ, whose 
person and career were so contrary to the expectations 
of the Jews concerning the Messiah, that they rejected 
him and by their obstinacy made shipwreck of salvation 
(see πρόσκομμα), Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7), (fr. Is. viii. 
14). b. metaph. any person or thing by which one is 
(‘entrapped’) drawn into error or sin [ef. W. 32]; a. 
of persons [(Josh. xxiii. 13; 1S. xviii. 21)]: Mt. xiii. 
41; xvi. 23 (where σκάνδαλον “non ex effectu, sed ex 
natura et condicione propria dicitur,” Calov.); 
80 Χριστὸς ἐσταυρωμένος is called (because his iznomin- 
ious death on the cross roused the opposition of the 
Jews), 1 Co. i. 23. β. of things: τιθέναι τινὶ σκάν- 
δαλον (literally, in Judith v. 1), to put a stumbling-block 
in one’s way, i. e. to do that by which another is led to 
sin, Ro. xiv. 13; the same idea is expressed by βάλλειν 
σκάνδαλον ἐνώπιόν τινος [to cast a stumbling-block before 
one], Rev. ii. 145 οὐκ ἔστι σκάνδαλον ἔν τινι (see εἰμί, V. 
4e.), 1 Jn. ii. 10; plur. σκάνδαλα, words or deeds which 
entice to sin (Sap. xiv. 11), Mt. xviii. 7 [ef. B. 322 (277)n.; 
W. 371 (348)]; Lk.xvii.1; σκάνδαλα ποιεῖν παρὰ τὴν 
διδαχήν, to cause persons to be drawn away from the 
true doctrine into error and sin [cef. παρά, IIT. 2 a.], Ro. 
xvi. 17; τὸ σκάνδ. rod σταυροῦ, the offence which the 
cross, i. 6. Christ’s death on the cross, gives (ef. a. fin. 
above), [R. V. the stumbling-block of the cross], Gal. v. 
11; i.q. a cause of destruction, Ro. xi. 9, fr. Ps. xviii. 
(Ixix.) 23.* 

σκάπτω; 1 aor. ἔσκαψα; [allied w. it are Eng. ‘ship’, 
‘skiff’, etc.; Curtius § 109; Fick iv. 267; vii. 336]; to 
dig: Lk. vi. 48 (on which see βαθύνω) ; xiii. 8 [B. § 130, 
5]; xvi. 3. ((Hom. h. Mere.]; Arstph., Eurip., Xen., 
Plat. Aristot., Theophr., al.) [Comp.: κατα-σκάπτω.} " 


577 


σκηνή 


σκάφη, -ης, ἡ, (σκάπτω (a. v.]), ἔτ. [Aeschyl. and] Hat. 
down, anything dug out, hollow vessel, trough, tray, tub; 
spec. a boat: Acts xxvil. 16, 30, 32.* 

σκέλος, -ous, τό, fr. Hom. down, the leg i. 6. from the 
hip to the toes inclusive: Jn. xix. 31 sq. 33.* 

σκέπασμα, -ros, τό, (σκεπάζω to cover), a covering, 
spec. clothing (Aristot. pol. 7,17 p. 1886", 17; Joseph. 
b. j. 2, 8, 5): 1 Tim. vi. 8.* 

Σκευᾶς, -a [W. § 8, 1; B. 20 (18)], 6, Sceva, a certain 
chief priest [cf. ἀρχιερεύς, 2 fin.]: Acts xix. 14.* 

σκευή, -ῆς, ἡ, [οἵ. σκεῦος], fr. [Pind., Soph.], Hdt. down, 
any apparalus, equipment, or furniture; used of the uten- 
sils [outfit, i.e. furniture (?— so R. V. mrg.), or tackling 
(?—so A. V., R. V. txt.) ] of a ship (Diod. 14, 79): Acts 
xxvii. 19 (Sept. Jon. i. 5).* 

σκεῦος, -ous, τό, [prob. fr. τ. sku ‘to cover’; οἵ. Lat. 
scutum, cutis, obscurus; Curtius § 113; Vaniéek p.1115], 
fr. [Arstph.], Thue. down; Sept. for ὌΞ; 1. aves- 
sel: Mk. xi. 16; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. xix. 29; Acts x. 11,16; 
xi. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev. ii. 27; xviii. 12; τὰ ox. τῆς λει- 
τουργίας, to be used in performing religious rites, Heb. 
ix. 21; σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, unto honor, i. e. for honorable 
use, Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 21, (καθαρῶν ἔργων δοῦλα σκεύη. 
Sap. xv. 7); εἰς ἀτιμίαν, unto dishonor, i. e. for a low use 
(as, a urinal), Ro. ix. 21; σκεύη ὀργῆς, into which wrath 
is emptied, i. e. men appointed by God unto woe, hence 
the addition κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν, Ro. ix. 22; σκεύη 
ἐλέους, fitted to receive mercy, —explained by the words 
ἃ προητοίμασεν eis δόξαν, ib. 23; τὸ σκεῦος is used of a 
woman, as the vessel of her husband, 1 Th. iv. 4 (see 
κτάομαι ; [al. take it here (as in 2 Co. iv. 7 below) of the 
body]); the female sex, as being weaker than the male, 
is likened to a σκεῦος ἀσθενέστερον, in order to com- 
mend to husbands the obligations of kindness towards 
their wives (for the weaker the vessels, the greater must 
be the care lest they be broken), 1 Pet. iii. 7; ὀστράκινα 
σκεύη is applied to human bodies, as frail, 2 Co. iv. 
τῷ 2. an implement; plur. household utensils, do- 
mestic gear: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xvii. 31, [in 
these pass. R.V. goods]; as the plur. often in Grk. 
writ. denotes the tackle and armament of vessels (Xen. 
oec. 8, 12; Plat. Critias p. 117 d.; Lach. p. 183 e.; Polyb. 
22, 26,13), so the sing. τὸ σκεῦος seems to be used spec. 
and collectively of the sails and ropes (R. V. gear) in 
Acts xxvii. 17. metaph. of a man: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς (gen. 
of quality), a chosen instrument [or (so A. V.) ‘vessel ‘J, 
Acts ix. 15; in a base sense, an assistant in accomplishing 
evil deeds [cf. Eng. ‘tool’], σκεῦος ὑπηρετικόν, Polyb. 13, 
ὧν ἢ; Los) 205) kee 

σκηνή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. τ. ska ‘to cover’ ete.; cf. σκιά, σκό- 
Tos, etc.; Lat. casa, cassis, castrum; Eng. shade, ete.; 
Curtius §112; Wanitek p. 1054 sq.], fr. [Aeschy].], Soph. 
and Thue. down; Sept. chiefly for ni, often also for 
jaw, also for 71203 α lent, tabernacle, (made of green 
boughs, or skins, or other materials): Mt. xvii.4; Mk. 
ix.5; Lk. ix. 33; Heb. xi. 9; ai αἰώνιοι σκηναί (see αἰώ»- 
mos, 3), Lk. xvi. 9 (et dabo iis tabernacula aeterna quae 
praeparaveram illis, 4 (5) Esdr. ii. 11); of that well 


σκηνοπηγία 


known movable temple of God after the pattern οἵ 
which the temple at Jerusalem was subsequently built 
[ef. B.D. 5. v. Temple]: Heb. viii. 5; ix. 1 Rec.", 21; 
with τοῦ μαρτυρίου added (see μαρτύριον, ο. fin.), Acts vil. 
44; the temple is called σκηνή in Heb. xiii. 10; σκηνὴ ἡ 
πρώτη, the front part of the tabernacle (and afterwards 
of the temple), the Holy place, Heb. ix. 2, 6, 8; of the 
Holy of holies, Heb. ix. 3; the name is transferred to 
heaven, as the true dwelling-place of God and the pro- 
totype of the earthly ‘tabernacle’ or sanctuary, Heb. ix. 
11; Rev. xiii. 6; hence ἡ σκηνὴ ἡ ἀληθινή, heaven, Heb. 
viii. 2; with a reference to this use of the word, it is 
declared that when the kingdom of God is perfectly es- 
tablished ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ θεοῦ will be pera τῶν ἀνθρώπων 
(after the analogy of σκηνοῦν μετά τινος), Rev. xxi. 3; 6 
ναὺς τῆς σκηνῆς τοῦ μαρτυρίου (see μαρτύριον, ὁ. fin.), the 
heavenly temple, in which was the tabernacle of the 
covenant, i. e. the inmost sanctuary or adytum, Rev. xv. 
5. ἡ σκ. τοῦ Μολόχ, the tabernacle i.e. portable shrine 
of Moloch, Acts vii. 43 (for the Orientals on their jour- 
neys and military expeditions used to carry with them 
their deities, together with shrines for them ; hence ἡ ἱερὰ 
σκηνή of the Carthaginians in Diod. 20, 65, where see 
Wesseling [but ef. 0330 in Miihlau and Volck’s Gesen- 
ius, or the recent Comm. on Am. v. 26]). ἡ σκηνὴ Aavid 
(fr. Am. ix. 11 for 730), the hut (tabernacle) of David, 
seems to be employed, in contempt, of his house, i. 6. 
family reduced to decay and obscurity, Acts xv. 16 (other- 
wise Ἢ Orkin Is. xvi. 5).* 

σκηνοπηγία, -as, ἡ, (σκηνή and πήγνυμι, cf. Heb. viii. 
2); 1. the construction of a tabernacle or taberna- 
cles: ἡ τῆς χελιδόνος σκηνοπηγία, the skill of the swallow 
in building its nest, Aristot. h. a. 9, 7 [p. 612°, 22]. ὩΣ 
the feast of tabernacles: Jn. vii. 2. This festival was 
observed by the Jews yearly for seven days, beginning 
with the 15th of the month Tisri [i. e. approximately, 
Oct.; cf. BB.DD.s. v. Month], partly to perpetuate the 
memory of the time when their ancestors after leaving 
Egypt dwelt in tents on their way through the Arabian 
desert (Lev. xxiii. 43), partly as a season of festivity and 
joy on the completion of the harvest and the vintage 
(Deut. xvi. 13) [‘the feast of ingathe.‘ng’ (see below) ]. 
In celebrating the festival the Jews were accustomed to 
construct booths of the leafy branches of trees, — either 
on the roofs or in the courts of their dwellings, or in the 
streets and squares (Neh. viii. 15, 16), and to adorn them 
with flowers and fruits of all kinds (Lev. xxiii. 40), — 
under which, throughout the period of the festival, they 
feasted and gave themselves up to rejoicing. This feast 
is called N}D0 AN (ἡ) ἑορτὴ (τῆς) σκηνοπηγίας, Deut. xvi. 
16; xxxi. 10; Zech. xiv. 16, 18 sq.; 1 Esdr. v. 50 (51); 
1 Mace. x. 21; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,12; (ἡ) ἑορτὴ (τῶν) 
σκηνῶν, Ley. xxiii. 34; Deut. xvi. 13; [2 Chr. viii. 13; 
Ezra iii. 4]; 2 Mace. x. 6; σκηναί, Philo de septenar. § 24; 
ἡ σκηνοπηγία, 2 Mace. i. 9,18; once [twice] (Ex. xxiii. 
16; [xxxiv. 22]) ONT IM, 1.6. ‘the feast of ingathering’ 
se. of fruits. [Cf. BB.DD. (esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s 
Kitto) ; Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiv.]* 


578 


σκιρτάω 


σκηνοποιός, -οὗ, 6, (σκηνή and ποιέω), a tent-maker, i. 4. 
σκηνορράφος (Ael. v. h. 2,1); one that made small port- 
able tents, of leather or cloth of goats’ hair (Lat. cili- 
cium) or linen, for the use of travellers: Acts xviii. 3 
[ef. Meyer ad loe.; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 
vol. xi. p. 359 sq. ].* 

σκῆνος, -ous, τό, [Hippocr., Plat., al.], a tabernacle, a 
tent, everywhere [exc. Boeckh, Corp. inserr. vol. ii. no. 
3071] used metaph. of the human body, in which the soul 
dwells as in a tent, and which is taken down at death: 
2 Co. v. 4; ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους, i. 6. 6 ἐστι 
τὸ σκῆνος [W. § ὅ9, 7d., 8 ἃ.}, which is the well-known 
tent, ibid. 1 [R. V. the earthly house of our tabernacle]. 
Cf. Sap. ix. 15 and Grimm ad loc.; in the same sense 
in (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 100 sqq. and often in other 
philosophic writ.; cf. Fischer, Index to Aeschin. dial. 
Socr.; Passow s. v.; [ Field, Otium Norv. pars ili. p. 113 
(on 2 Co. v. 1)].* 

σκηνόω, -@; fut. σκηνώσω; 1 aor. ἐσκήνωσα; to fix one’s 
tabernacle, have one’s tabernacle, abide (or live) in a tab- 
ernacle (or tent), tabernacle, (often in Xen. ; Dem. p. 1257, 
6); God σκηνώσει ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, will spread his tabernacle 
over them, so that they may dwell in safety and security 
under its cover and protection, Rev. vii. 15; univ. i. q- 
to dwell (Judg. v. 17): foll. by ἐν with a dat. of place, 
Rey. xii. 12; xiii. 6, (ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις, Xen. an. 5, 5,11); ἐν 
ἡμῖν, among us, Jn.i. 14; μετά τινος, with one, Rev. xxi. 
3; σύν τινι, to be one’s tent-mate, Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 49. 
[Comp. : émt-, κατα- oxnvdw.|* 

σκήνωμα, -τος, τό, (σκηνόω), a tent, tabernacle: of the 
temple as God’s habitation, Acts vii. 46 (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 
1; xxv. (xxvi.) 8; xlii. (xliii.) 3; xlv. (xlvi.) 5; Pausan. 
3, 17, 6; of the tabernacle of the covenant, 1 K. ii. 28); 
metaph. of the human body as the dwelling of the soul 
(see σκῆνος) : ἐν τῷ σκηνώματι εἶναι, of life on earth, 
2 Pet. 1. 18; ἀπόθεσις (the author blending the concep- 
tions of a tent and of a covering or garment, as Paul 
does in 2 Co. v. 2), ibid. 14. (Eur., Xen., Plut., al.; 
Sept. for ὍΤΙ and j2wn.) * 

σκιά, -as, ἡ, [(see σκηνή, init.)], fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
for 5x ; a. prop. shadow, i. 6. shade caused by the 
interception of the light: Mk. iv. 32 (cf. Ezek. xvii. 23) ; 
Acts v.15; σκιὰ θανάτου, shadow of death (like umbra 
mortis, Ovid. metam. 5, 191, and umbra Erebi, Verg. Aen. 
4, 26; 6, 404), ‘the densest darkness’ (because from of 
old Hades had been regarded as enveloped in thick 
darkness), trop. the thick darkness of error [i. e. spirit- 
ual death; see θάνατος, 17: Mt. iv. 16; Lk. i. 79, (fr. Is. 
ix. 1, where minx). b. a shadow, i. e. an image 
cast by an object and representing the form of that ob- 
ject : opp. to σῶμα, the thing itself, Col. ii. 17 ; hence i. q. 
a sketch, outline, adumbration, Heb. viii. 5; opp. to εἰκών, 
the ‘express’ likeness, the very image, Heb. x. 1 (as in 
Cic. de off. 3,17, 69 nos veri juris solidam et expresssam 
effigiem nullam tenemus, wmbra et imaginibus utimur).* 

σκιρτάω, -@: 1 aor. ἐσκίρτησα; to leap: Lk. i. 41, 44: 
vi. 23. (Gen. xxv. 22; Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 4,6; Grk. writ 
fr. Hom. down.) * 


σκληροκαρδία 


σκληρο-καρδία, -as, ἡ, (σκληρύς and καρδία), a bibl. word, 
the characteristic of one who is σκληρὸς τὴν καρδίαν (Prov. 
xxviii. 14), or σκληροκάρδιος (Proy. xvii. 20; Ezek. iii. 
7); hardness of heart: Mt. xix. 8; Mk. x. 5; xvi. 14; 
for 329 ny, Deut. x. 16; Jer.iv.4; Sir. xvi. 10; καρ- 
δία σκληρά, Sir. iii. 26,27. [Cf W. 26, 99 (94).]* 

σκληρός, -d, -όν, (σκέλλω, σκλῆναι, [to dry up, be dry]), 
fr. [Hes., Theogn.], Pind., Aeschyl. down; Sept. for TWP, 
hard, harsh, rough, stiff, (ra σκληρὰ x. τὰ μαλακά, Xen. 
mem. 3,10, 1); of men, metaph., harsh, stern, hard: 
Mt. xxv. 24 (1S. xxv. 3; Is. xix. 4; xlviii. 4; many exx. 
fr. prof. auth. are given by Passow s. v.2b.; [L. and S. 
8. ν. Il. 2; esp. Trench §xiv.]); of things: ἄνεμος, vio- 
lent, rough, Jas. iii. 4; ὁ λόγος, offensive and intolerable, 
Jn. vi. 60, equiv. to ds σκανδαλίζει, 61; σκληρὰ λαλεῖν κατά 
τινος, to speak hard and bitter things against one, Jude 
15 (σκληρὰ λαλεῖν τινι is also used of one who speaks 
roughly, Gen. xlii. 7, 30; ἀποκρίνεσθαι σκληρά, to reply 
with threats, 1 K. xii. 13); σκληρόν ἐστι foll. by an inf., 
it is dangerous, turns out badly, [A. V. it is hard], Acts 
ix. 5 Rec.; xxvi. 14.* 

σκληρότης, -7Tos, 7, (σκληρός), hardness; trop. obsti- 
nacy, stubbornness: Ro. ii. 5. (Deut. ix. 27; [Antipho], 
Plat., Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) * 

σκληρο-τράχηλος, -ov, (σκληρός and τράχηλος), prop. 
stiff-necked; trop. stubborn, headstrong, obstinate: Acts vii. 
51; Sept. for Δ» nw), Ex. xxxiii. 3,5; xxxiv. 9; [ete.]; 
Bar. ii. 30; Sir. xvi. 11; [ef. σκληροτραχηλία, Test. xii. 
Patr., test. Sym. § 6]. Not found in prof. auth.; [ef. W. 
26, 99 (94)].* 

σκληρύνω [cf. W. 92 (88)]; 1 aor. subjune. 2 pers. plur. 
σκληρύνητε ; Pass., impf. ἐσκληρυνόμην ; 1 aor. ἐσκληρύν- 
θην ; (σκληρός, 4. v-); Sept. for ΠΤ and pin, to make 
hard, to harden; prop. in Hippoer. and Galen; metaph. 
to render obstinate, stubborn, [A.V. to harden]: τινά, Ro. 
ix. 18 (in opp. to those who interpret it to treat harshly, 
ef. Fritzsche vol. ii. p. 323 sq.; [ef., too, Meyer ad 
loc.]); τὴν καρδίαν τινος, Heb. iii. 8, 15 and iv. 7, (fr. Ps. 
xciv. (xev.) 8; cf. Ex. vii. 3,22; viii. 19; 1χ. 12); pass. 
(Sept. for ΤῊ} and pir) to be hardened, i. e. become obsti- 
nate or stubborn: Acts xix. 9; Heb. iii. 13.* 

σκολιός, -d, -όν, (opp. to ὀρθός, ὄρθιος, εὐθύς [cf. σκώληξ), 
fr. Hom. down, crooked, curved: prop. of a way (Prov. 
XXvili. 18), τὰ σκολιά, Lk. iii. 5 (opp. to ἡ εὐθεῖα sc. ὁδός, 
fr. Is. x].4); metaph. perverse, wicked : ἡ γενεὰ ἡ σκολιά, 
Acts ii. 40; with διεστραμμένη added, Phil. ii. 15 (clearly 
so Deut. xxxii. 5); unfair, surly, froward, (opp. to aya- 
ds κ. ἐπιεικής), 1 Pet. ii. 18.* 

σκόλοψ, -oros, 6, fr. Hom. down, a pointed piece of 
wood, a pale, a stake: ἐδόθη μοι σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί, a sharp 
stake [al. say splinter, A.V. thorn; οἵ. Num. xxxiii. 55 ; 
Ezek. xxviii. 24; Hos. ii. 6 (8); Babr. fab. 122, 1. 10; 
al. (Sir. xliii. 19)] to pierce my flesh, appears to indicate 
some constant bodily ailment or infirmity, which, even 
when Paul had been caught up in a trance to the third 
heaven, sternly admonished him that he still dwelt in a 
frail and mortal body, 2 Co. xii. 7 (ef. 1-4); [ef. W. §31, 
10 N.3; B. § 133, 27. On Paul’s “thorn in the flesh” 


579 


σκοτεινός 


see Farrar, St. Paul, i. 652 sqq. (Excursus x.); Bp. 
Lghtft. Com. on Gal. p. 186 sqq.; Schaff in his * Popuiar 
Commentary’ on Gal. p. 331 sq.] * 

σκοπέω, -ῶ; (σκοπός, α- ν.) ; fr. Hom. down; to look at, 
observe, contemplate. to mark: absol., foll. by μή with 
the indic. (see μή, III. 2), Lk. xi. 35; τινά, to fix one’s 
eyes upon, direct one’s attention to, any one: Ro. xvi. 
17; Phil. iii. 17; σεαυτόν, foll. by μή with the subjunc. 
to look to, take heed to thyself, lest etc. Gal. vi. 1 [see μή, 
Il. 1b.]; τί, to look at, i.e. care for, have regard to, a 
thing: 2 Co. iv. 18; Phil. ii. 4, (2 Mace. iv.5). [Comp.: 
ἐπι-, κατα-σκοπέω. | * 

[Syy.: σκοπεῖν is more pointed than βλέπειν ; often i. q. to 
scrutinize, observe. When the physical sense recedes, i. 4. to fix 
one’s (mind’s) eye on, direct one’s attention to,a thing in order to 
get it, or owing to interest in it, ora duty towards it. Hence 
often equiv. to aim at, care for, etc. Schmidt, Syn. ch. xi. 
Οἱ. θεωρέω, ὁράω.] 

σκοπός, -οὔ, ὁ, [(fr. ἃ τ. denoting ‘to spy,’ ‘peer,’ ‘look 
into the distance’; cf. also Lat. specio, speculum, species, 
ete.; Fick i. 251 sq.; iv. 279; Curtius §111)]; fr. Hom. 
down ; 1. an observer, a watchman. 2. the 
distant mark looked at, the goal or end one has in view: 
κατὰ σκοπόν (on this phrase see κατά, II. 1 ¢.), Phil. 
iii. 14.* 

σκορπίζω; 1 aor. ἐσκόρπισα; 1 aor. pass. ἐσκορπίσθην ; 
[(prob. fr. r. skarp ‘to cut asunder,’ ‘cut to pieces’; 
akin is σκορπίος; cf. Lat. sealpere, scrobs, etc.; Fick 
i. 240; iii. 811, ete.)]; to scatter: 6 λύκος σκορπίζει τὰ 
πρόβατα, Jn. X.12; 6 μὴ συνάγων per’ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει, Mt. 
xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (this proverb is taken from a flock, 
—to which the body of Christ’s followers is likened [al. 
regard the proverb as borrowed fr. agriculture]; συνάγει 
τοὺς ἐσκορπισμένους τὸ ὄργανον [i. 6. a trumpet], Artem. 
oneir. 1, 56 init.); τινά, in pass., of those who, routed 
or terror-stricken or driven by some other impulse, 
fly in every direction: foll. by εἰς w. acc. of place, Jn. 
xvi. 32 [cf. W. 516 (481)], (1 Mace. vi. 54; φοβηθέντες 
ἐσκορπίσθησαν, Plut. Timol. 4; add, Joseph. antt. 6, 6, 
3). i. 4. to scatter abroad (what others may collect for 
themselves), of one dispensing blessings liberally : 2 Co. 
ix. 9 fr. Ps. exi. (exii.) 9, [ef. W. 469 (437)]. (Ace. to 
Phrynichus the word was used by Hecataeus; it was 


-also used —in addition to the writ. already cited — by 


Strabo 4 p. 198; Leian. asin. 32; Ael. v. h. 13, 45 [here 
διεσκ. (ed. Hercher); λόγους (cf. Lat. spargere rumores), 
Joseph. antt. 16, 1, 2]; οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W. 
22; 92 (87)]; Sept. for pron, 2 S. xxii. 15; Ps. xvii. 
(xviii.) 15. Attic writers say σκεδάννυμι.) [CompP. : δια- 
σκορπίζομαι.} * 

σκορπίος, -ov, 6, [(for deriv. see the preceding word) ; 
from Aeschyl. down; on its accent, ef. Chandler § 246], 
a scorpion, Sept. for 1p)’, the name of a little animal, 
somewhat resembling a lobster, which in warm regions 
lurks esp. in stone walls; it has a poisoneus sting in its 
tail [McC. and S. and BB. DD. 5. v.}: Lk. x.19; xi. 12; 
Rev. ix. 3, 5, 10.* 

σκοτεινός [WH σκοτινός ; see 1, ε], τή, τόν, (σκότος), full 


σκοτία 


of darkness, covered with darkness, [fr. Aeschyl. down]: 
opp. to φωτεινός, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (ra σκοτεινὰ 
x. τὰ φωτεινά, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1; [ef. 4, 3, 4]).* 

σκοτία, -as, 7, [on its deriv. ef. σκηνή], (Thom. Mag. 
σκύτος κ. τὸ σκύτος" TO δὲ σκοτία οὐκ ἐν χρήσει sc. in Attic 
{cf. Moeris 8. v.; L. and S.s. v. σκύτος, fin.]), darkness: 
prop. the darkness due to want of daylight, Jn. vi. 
17; xx. 13 ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ (λαλεῖν τι), unseen, in secret, 
(i. q. ἐν κρυπτῷ. Jn. xviii. 20), privily, in private, opp. to 
ἐν τῷ φωτί, Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 3; metaph. used of igno- 
rance of divine things, and its associated wickedness, and 
the resultant misery: Mt. iv. 16 LTrWH; Jn. i. 5; 
viii. 12; xii. 35, 46; 1 Jn. i. δ: ii, 8 sq. 11. (Ap. Rh 
4, 1698; Anth. 8, 187. 190; for πε τα Mic. iii. 6; for 
de& Job xxviii. 3.)* 

'σκοτίζω : Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσκοτισμένος (Eph. iv. 18 RG); 
1 aor. ἐσκοτίσθην;; 1 fut. σκοτισθήσομαι; (σκότος); to cov- 
er with darkness, to darken; pass. to be covered with dark- 
ness, be darkened: prop. of the heavenly bodies, as de- 
prived of light [(Eccl. xii. 2)], Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24; 
Lk. xxiii. 45{Τ WH ἐκλείπω (η.ν. 2)], Rev. viii. 12; ix. 2[L 
T Wl σκοτόω. q-v-]; metaph. of the eyes, viz. of the un- 
derstanding, Ro. xi. 10; ἡ καρδία, the mind [see καρδία, 2 
b. B.], Ro. i. 21; men τῇ διανοίᾳ, Eph. iv. 18 RG. (Plut. 
[adv. Col. 24, 4; Cleomed. 81, 28]; Tzetz. hist. 8, 929; 
Sept. several times for ὙΠ ; [Polyb. 12, 15,10; 3 Mace. 
iv.10; Test. xii. Patr., test. Rub. § 3; test. Levi $14].)* 

σκότος, -ov, ὁ, (cf. σκοτία, init.), fr. Hom. down, dark- 
ness: Heb. xii. 18 Ree. [ef. WH. App. p. 158; W. 66 
(64); B. 22 (20)]-* 

σκότος. -ous, τό, fr. Pind. down, (see the preceding 
word, and σκοτία, init.), Sept. chiefly for ywn, dark- 
NESS 5 a. prop.: Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk. 
xxiii. 44; Acts ii. 20; 2 Co. iv. 6; αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐξουσία 
τοῦ σκότους, this is the power of (night’s) darkness, i. 6. 
it has the power of rendering men bold to commit crimes, 
Lk. xxii. 53; τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους (see κρυπτός), 1 Co. 
iv.5; of darkened eyesight or blindness: σκότος ἐπι- 
πίπτει ἐπί Twai. 6. on one deprived of sight, Acts xiii. 11; 
in fig. disc. εἰ οὖν . . ., τὸ σκότος πόσον ; if the light that is 
in thee is darkness, darkened (i. 6. if the soul has lost its 
perceptive power), how great is the darkness (how much 
more deplorable than bodily blindness), Mt. vi. 23, cf. 
Lk. xi. 35. 
12; xxii. 13; xxv. 30, (see ἐξώτερος) ; ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 
(see (dos), 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. b. metaph. of 
ignorance respecting divine things and human duties, 
and the accompanying ungodliness and immorality, to- 
gether with their consequent misery (see σκοτία) : Jn. 
iii. 19; Acts xxvi. 18; 2 Co. vi. 14; Eph. vi. 12; Col. i. 
13; 1 Pet.ii.9; (abstract for the concrete) persons in 
whom darkness becomes visible and holds sway, Eph. v. 
8; τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους, deeds done in darkness, harmo- 
nizirg with it, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v. 11; σκότους εἶναι, to 
be given up to the power of darkness [cf. W. § 30, 5 a.], 
1 Th. v. 5; ἐν σκότει εἶναι, ib. 43 οἱ ἐν σκότει, Lk. i. 79; 
Ro. ii. 19; ὁ λαὸς ὁ καθήμενος ἐν σκότει, Mt. iv.16 RGT; 
ἐν σκότει περιπατεῖν. 1 Jn. i. 6." 


ο 


by meton. put for a dark place: Mt. viii.- 


580 


| 
| 


σκωληξ 


σκοτόω, -ὦ: Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσκοτωμένος ; 1 aor. ἐσκα- 
twOnv; [ef. WIT. App. p. 171]; (σκότος); [ὁ darken, 
cover with darkness: Rev. ix. 2 LT WH; xvi. 10; met 
aph. lo darken or blind the mind: ἐσκοτωμένοι τῇ διανοίᾳ, 
Eph. iv.18 LTTrWH. ([Soph.], Plat., Polyb., Plut., 
al.; Sept.) * 

σκύβαλον, -ου, τό, (κυσίβαλον τι ὄν. τὸ τοῖς κυσὶ βαλλύμε- 
νον, Suid. [p. 3347¢.; to the same effect Etym. Magn. 
p- 719, 53 ef. 125,44; al. connect it with σκώρ (cf. scoria, 
Lat. stercus), al. with a r. meaning ‘to shiver’, ‘shred’; 
Fick, Pt. i. p. 244]), any refuse, as the excrement of 
animals, offscouring, rubbish, dregs, ete.: [A. V. dung] 
i. e. worthless and detestable, Phil. iii. 8. (Sir. xxvii. 
4, Philo; Joseph. b. j. 5,13, 7; Plut.; Strabo; often in 
the Anthol.) [See on the word, Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 
l.e.; Gataker, Advers. Miscell. Posth., e. xliii. p. 868 
sqq-]* 

Σκύθης, -ov, ὁ, a Scythian, an inhabitant of Scythia i. e- 
modern Russia: Col. iii. 11. By the more eivilized na- 
tions of antiquity the Scythians were regarded as the 
wildest of all barbarians; ef. Cic. in Verr. 2,5, 58 § 150; 
in Pison. 8, 18; Joseph. ec. Apion. 2, 37, 6; [ Philo, leg. 
ad Gaium § 2}; Leian. Tox. 5sq.; 2 Mace. iv. 47; 3 
Mace. vii. 5. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Col. l.e.; Hackett in 
B.D.s.v. Seythians; Rawlinson’s Ilerod., App. to bk. iv., 
Essays ii. and iii.; Vanicek, Fremdworter, s. v.]* 

σκυθρωπός, -ὁν, also of three term.; cf. Lo). ad Phryn. 
p- 105 [W. § 11, 1], (σκυθρός and dy), of a sad and 
gloomy countenance (opp. to φαιδρός, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 
4): Lk. xxiv. 17; of one who feigns or affects a sad 
countenance, Mt. vi. 16. (Gen. xl. 7; Sir. xxv. 23; Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * 

σκύλλω ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐσκυλμένος ; pres. mid. impv. 
2 pers. sing. σκύλλου ; (σκῦλον, q-V-) 5 a. to skin, 
flay, (Anthol.). b. to rend, mangle, (Aeschyl. Pers. 
577); lo vex, trouble, annoy, (Iidian. 7, 3, 9 [4]): τινά, 
Mk. v.35; Lk. viii. 49; pass. ἐσκυλμένοι, (Vulg. verati) 
ΓΒ. V. distressed], Mt. ix. 36 GLT Tr WH; mid. to give 
one’s self trouble, trouble one’s self: μὴ σκύλλου, Lk. vii. 
6.* 

σκῦλον [Ree GL T WH] also σκύλον ([so R*** Tr] ef. 
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 44), του, τό, (fr. the obsol. 
σκύω, ‘to pull off’, allied to ξύω, ξύλον [but cf. Curtius 
§ 113; Vanitek p. 1115]); a. a (beast’s) skin 
stripped off, a pelt. b. the arms stripped off from an 
enemy, spoils: plur. Lk. xi. 23. (Soph., Thue., sqq- ; 
Sept.) * 

σκωληκό-βρωτος, -ov, (σκώληξ and βιβρώσκω), eaten of 
worms: Acts xii. 23, ef. 2 Mace. ix. 9. (of a tree, Theo- 
phr. c. pl. 5, 9, 1.) * 

σκώληξ, -nxos, 6, [perh. akin to σκολιός], a worm (Hom. 
Il. 13, 654); spec. that kind which preys upon dead 
bodies (Sir. x. 11; xix. 3; 2 Mace. ix. 9; Anthol. 7, 480, 
3; 10, 78, 3): ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ, by a fig. bor- 
rowed fr. Is. Ixvi. 24 (cf. Sir. vii. 17; Judith xvi. 17), 
‘their punishment after death will never cease” [ox. 
symbolizing perh. the loathsomeness of the penalty} 
Mk. ix. 44, 46, [T WH om. Tr br. these two verses], 48.° 


σμαράγδινος 


σμαράγδινος, -η, -ον, (σμάραγδος, cf. ἀμεθύστινος, ὑακίν- 
ϑινος, etc.), of emerald, made of emerald, [see the foll. 
word]: sc. λίθος, Rev. iv. 3. [(Leian.)]* 

σμάραγδος, -ov, ὁ [but apparently fem. in the earlier 
writ., cf. Theophrast. lap. 4, 23; in Hdt. its gend. cannot 
be determined; cf. Steph. Thesaur. 8. v.], Lat. smarag- 
dus, [A. V. emerald], a transparent precious stone noted 
esp. for its light green color: Rev. xxi.19. [From Hdt. 
down; Sept. On the deriv. of the word see Vanicek, 
Fremdworter, 5. v. On its relation to our ‘emerald’ 
(disputed by King, Antique Gems, p. 27 sqq.), see Riehm 
HWB. 5. v. ‘ Edelsteine’, 17; Deane in the ‘ Bible Edu- 
eator’, vol. ii. p. 350 sq.] * 

σμύρνα, -ης, ἡ, Hebr. 19, 19, myrrh, a bitter gum and 
eostly perfume which exudes from a certain tree or 
shrub in Arabia and Ethiopia, or is obtained by incis- 
ions made in the bark: Mt. ii. 11; as an antiseptic it 
was used in embalming, Jn. xix. 39. Cf. Hat. 2, 40, 86; 
3, 107; Theophr. hist. pl. 9, 3 sq.; Diod. 5,41; Plin. h. 
n. 12, 33 sq.; [BB.DD.; Birdwood in the ‘ Bible Edu- 
eator’, vol. ii. p. 151; Low, Aram. Pflanzennam. § 185 ].* 

Σμύρνα, -ης, 7, Smyrna, an Ionian city, on the Hgean 
Sea, about 40 miles N. of Ephesus; it had a harbor, and 
flourished in trade, commerce, and the arts; now Jsmir 
(BB.DD.]: Rev.i.11; ii.8. Taf. after cod. 8 [(cf. cod. 
Bezae, ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.)] has adopted the form 
Zuvpv., found also occasionally on coins and in inserr. ; 
ef. Kuhner i. p. 200 e.; [Tdf.’s note on Rey. i. 11; and see 
Σ, σ, s, sub fin.; Bp. Lyhtfi. Ignat. ii. 331 note].* 

Σμυρναῖος, -ov, 6, 7, of or belunging to Smyrna, an in- 
habitant of Smyrna: Rev. ii. 8 Ree. [(Pind., Hdt.)]* 

σμυρνίζω : (σμύρνα, 4. V-); 1. intrans. to be like 
myrrh (Diose. 1, 79). 2. to miz and so flavor with 
myrrh: οἶνος ἐσμυρνισμένος (pf. pass. ptep.) wine [A. V. 
mingled] with myrrh (Vulg. murratum vinum), i. 6. flavored 
or (Plin. ἢ. n. 14, 15) made fragrant with myrrh: Mk. xv. 
23. But since the ancients used to infuse myrrh into 
wine in order to give it a more agreeable fragrance and 
flavor, we must in this matter accept Matthew’s account 
(xxvii. 34, viz. ‘mingled with gall’) as by far the more 
probable; [but see χολή, 2].* 

Σόδομα, -ων, τά, (010), Sodom, a city respecting tne 
location and the destruction of which see Γόμορρα [and 
(in addition to reff. there given) McC. and S. s. v. Sodom; 
Schaff-Herzog ib.]: Mt. x. 15; xi. 23 sq.; Mk. vi. 11 (R 
Lin br.); Lk. χ. 12; xvii. 29; Ro. ix.29; 2 Pet. ii.6; 
Jude 7; Rev. xi. 8.* 

Σολομῶν (so [Rstbezelz G Lin Lk. xii. 27; RL ΤΥ ΤῊ 
in Acts vii. 47 (ef. Tdf. on Mt. vi. 29)]) and Σολομών [so 
RGLTTr WH in Mt. i. 7; vi. 29; Re*T Tr WH in 
Lk. xii.27; Gin Acts vii.47; (Σαλωμών Tdf. in Acts vii. 
47)], -dvros (so Ree. uniformly; [LT WH in Acts iii. 11; 
y.12; Lin Mt.i. 6 also]), and -ὥνος (so [6 LT Tr WH 
in Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; Jn. x. 23; GT Tr WH in Mt. 
i.6; G Trin Acis iii. 11; v.12]; the forms ὧν, -ὥνος, 
are undoubtedly to be preferred, ef. [Tdf. Proleg. pp. 
104,110; WH. App. p. 158]; W. 67 (65); B. 16 (14 
8q-)), ὁ, (πῶ, i. e. ‘pacific’, Jrenaeus, Germ. Fried- 


581 


σοφία 


rich, Eng. Frederick), Solomon, the son of David by 
Bathsheba the wife of Uriah; he succeeded his father, 
becoming the third king of Israel (B. c. 1015-975 [ace. 
to the commonly accepted chronology; but cf. the art. 
‘Zeitrechnung’ in Riehm’s HWB. (esp. p. 1823 sq-)]), 
built the temple at Jerusalem, and was distinguished for 
his magnificence, splendor, and wisdom: Mt. i. 6 sq.; vi. 
29; xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; xii. 27; Jn. x. 23; Actsiii. 11; 
ν 25 ὙΠ 4o 

σορός, -οὔ, ἡ, an urn or receptacle for keeping the bones 
of the dead (Hom. II. 23,91); @ coffin (Gen. 1. 26; Hdt. 
1, 68; 2,78; Arstph., Aeschin., Plut., al.) ; the funeral- 
couch or bier on which the Jews carried their dead forth to 
burial [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Coffin; Edersheim, Jesus 
the Messiah, i. 555 sq.]: Lk. vii. 14." 

σός, -7, -dv, possess. pron. of the 2d pers.; fr. Hom. 
down; thy, thine: Mt. vii. 3,22; xiii. 27; xxiv. 3; Mk. 
ii. 18; Lk. xv. 31; xxii. 42; Jn.iv.42 [here Trmrg. WH 
mrg. read the personal σου]; xvii. 6,9, 10,17; xviii. 35; 
Acts ν. 4; xxiv. 3 (3), 4: 1 Co. viii. 11; xiv. 16; Philem. 
14; οἱ σοί sc. μαθηταί, Lk. v.33; absol. οἱ σοί, thy kins- 
folk, thy friends, Mk. v.19; τὸ σόν, what is thine, Mt. 
xx. 14; xxv. 25; plur. ra σά [A. V. thy goods; οἵ. W. 
592 (551)], Lk. vi. 30. [Cf W. § 22, 7 sqq.; B. 115 
(101) sqq.]* 

σουδάριον, -ov, τό, (a Lat. word, sudarium, fr. sudor, 
sweat; cf. B. 18 (16)), a handkerchief, i.e. a cloth for 
wiping the perspiration from the face and for cleaning 
the nose: Lk. xix. 20; Acts xix. 12; also used in swath: 
ing the head of a corpse [A. V. napkin], Jn. xi. 44; xx. 
7. [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Handkerchief.]* 

Σουσάννα, -ης [cf. B. 17 (15)], ἡ, (πε a lily), Su- 
sanna, one of the women that attended Jesus on his 
journeys: Lk. viii. 3.* 

σοφία. -as, 7, (σοφός), Hebr. 73M, wisdom, broad and 
full intelligence, (fr. Hom. down]; used of the knowl- 
edge of very diverse matters, so that the shade of mean- 
ing in which the word is taken must be discovered from 
the context in every particular case. a. the wis- 
dom which belongs tomen: uniy., Lk. ii. 40,52; spee. 
the varied knowledge of things human and divine, ac- 
quired by acuteness and experience, and summed up in 
maxims and proverbs, as was ἡ σοφία τοῦ Σολομῶνος, Mt. 
xii. 42; Lk. xi.31; the science and learning τῶν Αἰγυ- 
πτίων, Acts vii. 22 [ef. W. 227 (213) n.; B. § 134,6]; the 
art of interpreting dreams and always giving the sagest 
advice, Acts vii. 10; the intelligence evinced in discov- 
ering the meaning of some mysterious number or vision, 
Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; skill in the management of af- 
fairs, Acts vi. 3; a devout and proper prudence in in- 
tercourse with men not disciples of Christ, Col. iv. 5; 
skill and discretion in imparting Christian truth, Col. i. 
28; iii. 16; [2 Pet. iii. 15]; the knowledge and prac- 
tice of the requisites for godly and upright living, Jas. 
i. 5; iii. 13, 17; with which σοφία ἄνωθεν κατερχομένη is 
put in contrast the σοφία ἐπίγειος, ψυχική. δαιμονιώδης, 
such as is the craftiness of envious and quarrelsome 
men, Jas. iii. 15, or σαρκικὴ σοφία (see σαρκικός. 1), 


copia 


craftiness, 2 Co. i. 12 (for the context shows that it does 
not differ essentially from the πανουργία of iv. 2; in 
Grk. writ. also σοφία is not infreg. used of shrewdness 
and cunning; cf. Passow [or L. and 3.7 5. v. 2); the 
knowledge and skill in affairs requisite for the successful 
defence of the Christian cause against hostile accusa- 
tions, Lk. xxi. 15; an acquaintance with divine things 
and human duties, joined to a power of discoursing con- 
cerning them and of interpreting and applying sacred 
Scripture, Mt. xiii.54; Mk. vi. 2; Acts vi. 10; the wis- 
dom or instruction with which John the Baptist and 
Jesus taught men the way to obtain salvation, Mt. xi. 
19; Lk. vii. 35, (on these pass. see δικαιόω, 2). In Paul’s 
Epp.: a knowledge of the divine plan, previously hidden, 
of providing salvation for men by the expiatory death 
of Christ, 1 Co. 1. 30; ii. 6; Eph. i. 8 [W. 111 (105 sq.)]; 
hence all the treasures of wisdom are said to be hidden 
in Christ, Col. ii. 3; w. the addition of θεοῦ (gen. of the 
author), 1 Co. i. 24; ii. 7; πνευματική, Col. i. 9; πνεῦμα 
σοφίας x. ἀποκαλύψεως, Eph. i. 17; λόγος σοφίας, the 
ability to discourse eloquently of this wisdom, 1 Co. xii. 
8; opposed to this wisdom is—the empty conceit of 
wisdom which men make a parade of, a knowledge more 
specious than real of lofty and hidden subjects: such as 
the theosophy of certain Jewish Christians, Col. ii. 23; 
the philosophy of the Greeks, 1 Co. i. 21 sq-; li. 1; with 
τοῦ κόσμου added, 1 Co. i. 20; iii. 19; τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, 
. Co. ii. 6 ; τῶν σοφῶν, 1 Co. i. 19; ἀνθρώπων, 1 Co. ii. 5, 
in each of these last pass. the word includes also the 
rhetorical art, such as is taught in the schools), ef. 
Fritzsche, Rom. vol. i. p. 67 sq-; σοφία τοῦ λόγου, the 
wisdom which shows itself in speaking [R. V. wisdom of 
words}, the art of the rhetorician, 1 Co. i. 17; λόγοι 
(ἀνθρωπίνης [so R in vs. 4 (all txts. in 18}7) σοφίας, dis- 
course conformed to philosophy and the art of rhetoric, 
1 Co. ii. 4, 13. b. supreme intelligence, such as be- 
longs to God: Rev. vii. 12, also to Christ, exalted to 
God’s right hand, Rev. v. 12; the wisdom of God as 
evinced in forming and executing his counsels, Ro. xi. 
33; with the addition of rod θεοῦ, as manifested in the 
formation and government of the world, and to the Jews, 
moreover, in the Scriptures, 1 Co. i. 21; it is called 
πολυποίκιλος from the great variety of ways and methods 
by which he devised and achieved salvation through 
Christ, Eph. iii. 10. In the noteworthy pass. Lk. xi. 49 
(where Christ ascribes to ‘the wisdom of God’ what in 
the parallel, Mt. xxiii. 34, he utters himself), the words 
ἡ σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ εἶπεν seem to denote the wisdom of God 
which is operative and embodied as it were in Jesus, so 
that the primitive Christians, when to comfort them- 
selves under persecution they recalled the saying of 
Christ, employed that formula of quotation [ef. 1 Co. i. 
24, 30, ete.]; but Luke, in ignorance of this fact, took 
the phrase for a part of Christ’s saying. So Eusebius 
(h. e. 3, 32,8), perhaps in the words of Hegesippus, calls 
those who had personally heard Christ of αὐταῖς ἀκοαῖς 
τῆς ἐνθέου σοφίας ἐπακοῦσαι κατηξιωμένοι; cf. Grimm 
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1853, p. 882 βηᾳ. [For other 


582 


oTrapyavow 


explanations of the phenomenon see the Comm. on Lk, 
le. Cf. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. § 33, V.1 and reff.]* 

[Syn.: on the relation of σοφία to γνῶσις see γνῶσις, fin. 
“While σοφ. is ‘mental excellence in its highest and fullest 
sense’ (Aristot. eth. Nic. 6,7), σύνεσις and φρόνησις are both 
derivative and special, — applications of σοφία to details: σύν. 
critical, apprehending the bearing of things, φρόν. prac- 
tical, suggesting lines of action” (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 9); 
but ef. Meyer on Col. 1. c.; Schmidt, ch. 18 § 10; ch. 147 8 8. 
See σοφός, fin.] 

copttw: 1 aor. inf. σοφίσαι; (σοφός) ; 1. to make 
wise, teach: τινά, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8; ἐσόφι- 
ods με THY ἐντολήν σου, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 983 οὔτε Tt vav- 
τιλίης σεσοφισμένος, οὔτε τι νηῶν, Hes. opp. 647). 2. 
Mid. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, mostly as depon. to 
become wise, to have understanding, (ἐσοφίσατο ὑπὲρ πάν- 
tas ἀνθρώπους, 1 K. iv. 27 (31); add, Eccl. ii. 15, ete.; 
freq. in Sir.) ; to invent, play the sophist; to devise cleverly 
or cunningly: pf. pass. ptep. σεσοφισμένοι μῦθοι, 2 Pet. 
1. 16. [Comp.: κατα-σοφίζομαι. | * 

σοφός, -7, -dv, (akin to σαφής and to the Lat. sapio, 
sapiens, sapor, ‘to have a taste’, etc.; Curtius § 628; 
[Vanitek p. 9917), Sept. for ὉΞΠ; [fr. Theogn., Pind., 
Aeschyl. down]; wise, i. e. a. skilled, expert: εἴς τι, 
Ro. xvi. 19; of artificers (cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. on 
Sap. [vii. 21] p. 151): ἀρχιτέκτων, 1 Co. iii. 10; Is. iii. 
3, (δημιουργός. of God, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 7). b. wise, 
i.e. skilled in letters, cultivated, learned: Ro. i. 14, 22; 
of the Greek philosophers (and orators, see σοφία, a.), 
1 Co. i. 19 sq. 26 54.; iii. 18 sq. [20]; of the Jewish 
theologians, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; of Christian teach- 
ers, Mt. xxiii. 34. c. wise in a practical sense, i. 6. 
one who in action is governed by piety and integrity: Eph. 
y. 15; Jas. iii.13; and accordingly is a suitable per 
son to settle private quarrels,1Co.vi.5. d. 
wise in a philosophic sense, forming the best plans and us- 
ing the best means for their execution: so of God, Ro. xvi. 
27, and Ree. in 1 Tim. i. 17; Jude 25; σοφώτερον, con- 
tains more wisdom, is more sagaciously thought out, 
1 Co. i. 25.* 

[Syn.: σοφός, συνετός, φρόνιμος: σοφός wise, see 
above; συνετός intelligent, denotes one who can ‘ put things 
together’ (συνιέναι), who has insight and comprehension , 
φρόνιμος prudent (A. Μ΄ uniformly, wise), denotes primarily- 
one who has quick and correct perceptions, hence ‘discreet,’ 
‘circumspect,’ ete. ; cf. Schmidt ch. 147. See σοφία, fin.] 


Σπανία, -as, ἡ, Spain, in the apostolic age the whole 
peninsula S. of the Pyrenees: Ro. xv. 24, 28. ([W. 25]; 
the more com. Grk. form is Ἱσπανία, 1 Mace. viii. 3, [ap- 
parently the Phoenician or Lat. name for ᾿Ιβηρία; cf. 
Pape, Eigennamen, s. vv.].) * 

σπαράσσω; 1 aor. ἐσπάραξα; to convulse [al. tear]: 
τινά, Mk. i. 26; ix. 20RG'[rtxt., 26; Lk. ix. 39; see 
ῥήγνυμι, c. (ras γνάθους, Arstph. ran. 424; ras τρίχας, 
Diod. 19, 34; in various other senses in Grk. writ.) 
[Comp.: συν- σπαράσσω.] * 

σπαργανόω, τῶ: 1 aor. ἐσπαργάνωσα; pf. pass. ptep. 
ἐσπαργανωμένος ; (σπάργανον a swathing band) ; to wrap 


σπαταλάω 


in swaadling-clothes: an infant just born, Lk. ii. 7, 12. 
(Ezek. xvi. 4; [Eur., Aristot.], Hippocr., Plut., al.) * 

σπαταλάω, -@; 1 aor. ἐσπατάλησα; (σπατάλη, riotous 
living, luxury); to live luxuriously, lead a voluptuous life, 
[give one’s self to pleasure]: 1' Tim. v.6; Jas.v.5. (Prov. 
xxix. 21; Am. vi. 4 [in both these pass. κατασπ.; Ezek. 
xvi. 49]; Sir. xxi. 15; Barnab. ep. 10,3; Polyb. excrpt. 
Vat. p. 451 [i.e. 37, 4, 6 (ed. Didot)], and occasionally 
in later and inferior writ.)* 

σπάω, -: 1 aor. mid. ἐσπασάμην ; [cogn. w. ἀσπάζομαι 
(to draw to one’s self, embrace, ete.), Eng. spasm, ete.]; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for AW; to draw: mid. 
with μάχαιραν [cf. B. 8 135, 4], to draw one’s sword, Mk. 
xiv. 47; Acts xvi. 27, (Num. xxii. 31; τὴν ῥομφαίαν, 23 ; 
Judg. ix. 54, ete.). [Comp.: ava-, dmo-, dia-, ἐπι-» περι- 
onda. |* 

σπεῖρα (on the accent cf. B. 11; Chandler § 161; Ταῦ 
Proleg. p.102], ἡ, gen. -ys (Acts x. 1; xxi. 31; xxvii. 1; 
see [Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156; and] pa- 
χαιρα, init.), [ecogn. w. σπυρίς (4. v-) J; a. Lat. spira; 
anything rolled into a circle or ball; anything wound, 
rolled up, folded together. b. α military cohort 
(Polyb. 11, 23, 1 τρεῖς σπείρας" τοῦτο δὲ καλεῖται τὸ σύν- 
Taypa τῶν πεζῶν παρὰ Ῥωμαίοις Kodptis), i. 6. the tenth 
part of a legion [i. 6. about 600 men (i. e. legionaries), or 
if auxiliaries either 500 or 1000; cf. Marquardt, Romisch. 
Alterth. IIL ii. p. 371. But surely τοῦτο τὸ σύνταγμα in 
the quotation comprehends the τρεῖς ow.; hence Polyb. 
here makes a oz. equal to a maniple, cf. 2, 3,2; 6, 24,5; 
ef. Zonaras, Lex. p. 1664, o7.+ σύνταγμα διακοσίων ἀνδρῶν. 
On the other hand, “the later Grk. writ. almost uniform- 
ly employ oz. as the representative of cohors” (Smith, 
Dict. of Antiq., ed. 2, 5. v. exercitus, p. 500); and the 
use of χιλίαρχος (which was the equiv. of tribunus, the 
commander of a cohort) in connection with it (Jn. xviii. 
12; Acts xxi. 31), together with the uniform rendering 
of the word by cofors in the Lat. versions, warrants the 
marg. “cohort ” uniformly added in ΝΟΥ͂. to the render- 
ing band]: Mt. xxvii. 27; Mk. xv. 16; Acts x.1; xxi. 
31; xxvii. 1, and often in Josephus; α maniple, or the 
thirtieth part of a legion, often so in Polyb. [(see above) ]; 
any band, company, or detachment, of soldiers (2 Macc. 
viii. 23; Jud. xiv. 11): Jn. xviii. 3, 12.* 

σπείρω ; [impf. 2 pers. sing. ἔσπειρες, Mt. xiii. 27 Tr]; 
1 aor. ἔσπειρα; Pass., pres. σπείρομαι; pf. pass. ptep. 
éorappévos; 2 aor. ἐσπάρην ; [derived fr. the quick, jerky, 
motion of the hand; cf. our spurn (of the foot); Cur- 
tius § 389]; fr. Hesiod down; Sept. for p11; to sow, 
scatter seed; a. prop.: absol., Mt. vi. 26; xiii. 3 sq. 
18sq.; Mk. iv. 3sq. 14; Lk. viii. 5; xii. 24; [Jn. v. 
36 sq. (see in b.)]; 2Co.ix.10; with an ace. of the thing, 
as σπέρμα, ζιζάνια, κόκκον, [ef. B. §131, 5]: Mt. xiii. 24 
sq. [but in 25 L T Tr WH have ἐπισπ.], 27, 37,39; Mk. 
iv. 32; Lk. viii.5; 1 Co.xv. 36sq.; with specifications 
of place: εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 18; ἐν τῷ 
ἀγρῷ, Mt. xiii. 24, [31]; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, MK. iv. 31; ἐπί ν΄. 
an ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 20, 23; Mk. iv. 16, 20; mapa 
τὴν ὁδόν, Mt. xiii. 19. 


583 


σπέρμα 


absol., Mt. xxv. 24,26; Lk. xix. 21 sq.; Jn. ἵν. 31; 2Co. 
ix. 6; τί, Gal. vi. 7, (on these sayings see θερίζω, b.). in 
comparisons: σπείρειν εἰς τὴν σάρκα, εἰς τὸ πνεῦμα, (σάρξ 
and πνεῦμα are likened to fields to be sown), to do those 
things which satisfy the nature and promptings of the 
σάρξ or of the πνεῦμα, Gal. vi. 8; τὸν λόγον, to scatter the 
seeds of instruction, i. e. to impart instruction, Mk. iv. 
14 sq.; ὁ λόγος 6 ἐσπαρμένος ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν, the 
ideas and precepts that have been implanted like seed 
in their hearts, i. e. received in their hearts, ibid. 15 
(where Tr txt. WH eis αὐτούς into their hearts, T Lmrg. 
ἐν αὐτοῖς) ; οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς, this one 
experiences the fate of the seed sown by the wayside, 
Mt. xiii. 19; add, 20-23; Mk. iv.16, 18,20. τὸ σῶμα, 
the body, which after death is committed like seed to the 
earth, 1 Co. xv. 42-44; καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης, i. 6. that seed 
which produces καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης [see καρπός, 2 b.], Jas. 
iii. 18; σπείρειν τινί τι, to give, manifest, something to 
one, from whom we may subsequently receive something 
else akin to a harvest (θερίζομεν), 1 Co. ix.11. [Comp.: 
δια-, ἐπι- σπείρω. * 

σπεκουλάτωρ, -ορος (RG -ωρος [cf. Tdf. on Mk. as be- 
low]), 6, (the Lat. word speculator), a looker-out, spy, 
scout; under the emperors an attendant and member of 
the body-guard, employed as messengers, watchers, and 
executioners (Sen. de ira 1, 16 centurio supplicio prae- 
positus condere gladium speculatorem jubet; also de 
benef. 3,25); the name is transferred to an attendant of 
Herod Antipas that acted as executioner: Mk. vi. 27. 
Cf. Keim ii. 512 [Eng. trans. iv. 219; J. W. Golling in 
Thes. Nov. ete. ii. p. 405 sq.]* 

σπένδω: pres. pass. σπένδομαι; (cf. Germ. spenden 
[perh. of the ‘ tossing away ’ of a liquid, Curtius § 296; 
but cf. Vaniéek p. 1245 sq.]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
22; ἰο pour out as a drink-offering, make a libation; in 
the N. T. σπένδεσθαι, to be offered as a libation, is figura- 
tively used of one whose blood is poured out in a violent 
death for the cause of God: Phil. ii. 17 (see θυσία, Ὁ. 
fin.) ; 2 Tim. iv. 6.* 

σπέρμα, -τος, τό, (σπείρω, q. ν.), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 
yu, the seed (fr. which anything springs) ; a. 
from which a plant germinates; a. prop. the seed 
i.e. the grain or kernel which contains within itself the 
germ of the future plant: plur., Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 
31; 1 Co. xv. 38, (Ex. xvi. 31; 1S. viii. 15); the sing. 
is used collectively of the grains or kernels sown: Mt. 
xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq.; 2 Co. ix. 10 [here L Tr σπόρος]. β. 
metaph. a seed i.e. a residue, or a few survivors reserved 
as the germ of a new race (just as seed is kept from the 
harvest for the sowing), Ro. ix. 29 after Is. i. 9, where 
Sept. for ὙΠ, (so also Sap. xiv. 6; 1 Esdr. viii. 85 (87) ; 
Joseph. antt. 11, 5,3; 12, 7,3; Plat. Tim. p. 23 c.). b. 
the semen virile; a. prop.: Lev. xv. 16-18; xviii. 
20 sq., ete.; [prob. also Heb. xi. 11, cf. καταβολή 1, and 
see below]; often in prof. writ. By meton. the pro- 
duct of this semen, seed, children, offspring, progeny; 
family, race, posterity, (so in Grk. chiefly in the tragic 


b. in proverbial sayings: | poets, cf. Passow s. v. 2 b. ii..p. 1498 [L. and 8. s. v. IL 


“περμολόγος 


3]; and yy very often in the O.T. [cf. W. 17, 801}; 80 
in the sing., either of one, or collectively of many: Ro. 
ix. 7 sq-; εἰς κατα :ολὴν σπέρματος (see [above, and] κατα- 
βολή, 2), Ueb. xi. 11; ἀνιστάναι and ἐξανιστάναι σπέρμα 
τινί, Mt. xxii. 24; Mk. xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28, (Gen. xxxviil. 
8); ἔχειν σπέρμα, Mt. xxii. 25; ἀφιέναι oréppativi, Mk. 
xii. 20-22; τὸ om. τινός, Lk. i. 55; Jn. vii. 425 vill. 33, 
87; Acts iii. 25; vii. 5 sq.; xiii. 23; Ro. i. 3; [iv. 13]; 
ix. 7; xi. 1; 2 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. ii. 16; xi. 
18; in plur.: παῖς ἐκ βασιλικῶν σπερμάτων, of royal de- 
scent, Joseph. antt. 8, 7,6; τῶν ᾿Αβραμιαίων σπερμάτων 
ἀπόγονοι, 4 Mace. xviii. 1; 1. 4. tribes, races, ἄνθρωποί τε 
καὶ ἀνθρώπων σπέρμασι νομοθετοῦμεν τὰ viv, Plat. legs. 9 
Ρ. 886. By ἃ rabbinical method of interpreting, op- 
posed to the usage of the Hebr. yt, which signifies the 
offspring whether consisting of one person or many, 
Paul lays such stress on the singular number in Gen. xiii. 
15; xvii. 8 as to make it denote but one of Abraham’s 
posterity, and that the Messiah: Gal. iii. 16, also 19; 
and yet, that the way in which Paul presses the singu- 
lar here is not utterly at variance with the genius of the 
Jewish-Greek language is evident from ᾿Α βραμιαίων σπερ- 
μάτων ἀπύγονοι, 4 Mace. xviii. 1, where the plural is used 
of many descendants [(ef. Delitzsch, Br. a. ἃ. Rom. p. 16 
note 2; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.)]. τὸ om. ( Αβραὰμ) τὸ 
ἐκ τοῦ νόμου, the seed which is such according to the de- 
cision of the law, physical offspring [see νόμος, 2 
p- 428°], τὸ ἐκ πίστεως ᾽Αβρ. those who are called Abra- 
ham’s posterity on account of the faith by which they 
are akin to him [see πίστις, 1 Ὁ. a. p.513° and ἐκ, ΠΕ ΤΕ 
Ro. iv. 16; add, 18; ix. 8; Gal. iii. 29; similarly Chris- 
tians are called, in Rev. xii. 17, the σπέρμα of the church 
(which is likened to a mother, Gal. iv. 26). B. whatever 
possesses vital force or life-giving power: τὸ σπέρμα τοῦ 
θεοῦ [(but anarthrous) ], the Holy Spirit, the divine en- 
ergy operating within the soul by which we are regener- 
ated or made the τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Jn. iii. 9.* 

σπερμολόγος, -ov, (σπέρμα, and λέγω to collect) ; 1. 
picking up seeds: used of birds, Plut. Demet. 28; Athen. 
9 p. 387 f.; esp. of the crow or daw that picks up grain in 
the fields (Germ. Saatkrahe), Arstph. av. 232, 579; Aris- 
tot. h. a. 8, 3 p. 592°, 28, and other writ. 2. of men: 
lounging about the market-place and picking up a subsis- 
tence by whatever may chance to fall from the loads of mer- 
chandise (Eustath. on Hom. Od. 5, 490 σπερμολόγοι" οἱ 
περὶ τὰ ἐμπόρια x. ἀγορὰς διατρίβοντες διὰ τὸ ἀναλέγεσθαι 
τὰ ἐκ τῶν φορτίων ἀπορρέοντα καὶ διὰ ζῆν ἐκ τούτων) ; hence, 
beggarly, abject, vile, (a parasite); getting a living by 
flattery and buffoonery, Athen. 3 p. 85 f.; Plut. mor. p. 
456 d.; subst. ὁ on. an empty talker, babbler, (Dem. p. 269, 
19; Athen. 8 p. 8544 6.): Acts xvii. 18.* 

σπεύδω ; impf. ἔσπευδον; 1 aor. ἔσπευσα; (Cogn. w. 
Germ. sich spuien [cf. Eng. speed, Lat. studeo; Vaniéek 
p- 1163; Fick iv. 279]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 
379, also for bata, ete.; 1. intrans. [ef. W. § 38, 
1; B. 130, 4], to hasten: as often in the Grk. writ., foll. 
by an inf. Acts xx. 16; ἦλθον σπεύσαντες, they came with 
haste, Lk. ii. 16; σπεύσας κατάβηθι [A. V. make haste 


584 


σπλαγχνον 


and come down), κατέβη, Lk. χῖχ. δ, 6; σπεῦσον x. ἔξελθε, 
[A. V. make haste and get thee quickly out], Acts xxii 
18. 2. to desire earnestly: ri, 2 Pet. iii. 12; (Is. 
xvi. 5; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Passow s. v. 2 
vol. ii. p. 1501; [L. and S. s. v. II.]).* 

σπήλαιον, -ου, τό. (σπέος [cavern; cf. Curtius §111]), 
a cave, [den]: Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi.17; Lk. xix. 46; Jn. 
xi. 38; Heb. xi. 38; Rev. vi. 15. (Plat., Plut., Leian., 
Ael., al.; Sept. for 77.) * 

σπιλάς, -ados, ἡ, α rock in the sea, ledge or reef, (Hom. 
Od. 3, 298; 5, 401, and in other poets; Polyb., Diod., 
Joseph. Ὁ. j. 3, 9, 3); plur. trop. of men who by their 
conduct damage others morally, wreck them as it were, 
i. q- oxavdada, [R. V. txt. hidden rocks], Jude 12 [here 
LT Tr WHread οἱ (se. ὄντες) σπ. Some (so R.V. mrg.) 
make the word equiv. to the following; see Rutherford 
as there referred to.]* 

σπῖλος [  σπίλος (so Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 87; 
L. and 8. s. v.); but see TUf. Proleg. p. 102; Lipsius, 
Gram. Untersuch. p. 42], -ov, 6, (Phryn. rejects this word 
in favor of the Attic κηλίς ; but σπῖλος is used by Joseph. 
Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian., Liban., Artemidor.; see Lob. 
ad Phryn. p. 28 [ef. W. 257), α spot: trop. a fault, moral 
blemish, Eph. v. 27; plur. of base and gluttonous men, 
2 Pet. ii. 13.* 

σπιλόω, -@; pf. pass. ptep. ἐσπιλωμένος ; (σπῖλος) ; to 
defile, spot: ri, Jas. iii.6; Jude 23. (Dion. Hal., Leian., 
Heliod.; Sept.) * . 

σπλαγχνίζομαι;; 1 aor. ἐσπλαγχνίσθην [ef. B. 52 (45)]; 
(σπλάγχνον, q-V-); prop. fo be moved as to one’s bowels, 
hence to be moved with compassion, have compassion, (for 
the bowels were thought to be the seat of love and pity): 
absol., Lk. x. 33; xv. 20; σπλαγχνισθείς with a finite 
verb, Mt. xx. 34; Mk. i. 41; τινός, to pity one (cf. W. 
§ 30, 10a.; [B. § 132,15; but al. regard σπλ. in the foll. 
example as used absol. and the gen. as depending on 
κύριος), Mt. xviii. 27; ἐπί with dat. of the pers., Mt. 
xiv. 14GLTTr WH; Mk. vi. 34 [RG]; Lk. vii. 13 
(where Tdf. ἐπί w. acc.) ; ἐπί τινα, Mt. xiv. 14 Rec.; xv. 
32; Mk. [vi. 34 L T Tr WH]; viii. 2; ix. 22; cf. W. 8 33, 
c.; [B. u.s.]; περί τινος ὅτι, Mt. ix. 36. Besides, several 
times in Test. xii. Patr. [e. g. test. Zab. §§ 4, 6, 7, ete.]; 
and in the N. T. Apocr.; in Deut. xiii. 8 Symm.; [Ex. 
ii. 6 cod. Venet.]; and in 1 S. xxiii. 21 incert.; [Clem. 
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 7; Herm. mand. 4, 3, 5]; ἐπισπλαγχνί- 
Cova, Prov. xvii. 5; the act. σπλαγχνίζω is once used for 
the Attic σπλαγχνεύω, 2 Mace. vi.8. Cf. Bleek, Einl. ins 
N. T. ed. 1, p. 75 [Eng. trans. ibid. ; ed. 3 (by Mangold) 
p. 90; W. 30, 33, 92 (87)]." 

σπλάγχνον, -ov, τό, and (only so in the N.T.) plur. 
σπλάγχνα, -wv, τά, Hebr. 0°07, bowels, intestines (the 
heart, lungs, liver, ete.) ; a. prop.: Acts i. 18 (2 
Mace. ix. 5 sq.; 4 Mace. v. 29, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. 
down). b. in the Grk. poets fr. Aeschyl. down the 
bowels were regarded as the seat of the more violent pas- 
sions, such as anger and love; but by the Hebrews as the 
seat of the tenderer affections, esp. kindness, benevo- 
lence, compassion, [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 8; W. 18]; 


σπόγγος 


hence i. 4. our heart, [tender mercies, affections, etc. (cf. 
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Bowels)]: 1 Jn. iii. 17 (on which see 
κλείων; 2 Co. vi. 12; Phil. ii. 1 [here GLT Tr WH εἴτις 
σπλάγχνα; B. 81 (71), cf. Green 109; Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. }; 
σπλάγχνα ἐλέους (gen. of quality [ef. W. 611 (568); so 
Test. xii. Patr., test. Zab. §§ 7, 8]), a heart in which 
mercy resides, [heart of mercy}, Lk. i. 78; also σπλ. οἰκ- 
τιρμοῦ [ Rec. -μῶν], Col. iii. 12; τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ περισ- 
σοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐστίν, his heart is the more abundantly 
devoted to you, 2 Co. vii. 15; ἐπιποθῶ ὑμᾶς ἐν σπλάγχνοις 
Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, in the heart [R. V. tender mercies} of 
Christ, i.e. prompted by the same love as Christ Jesus, 
Phil. i. 8; ἀναπαύειν τὰ σπλ. τινός, to refresh one’s soul or 
heart, Philem. 7, 20; τὰ σπλάγχνα ἡμῶν, my very heart, 
i.e. whom I dearly love, Philem. 12 (so Darius calls his 
mother and children kis own bowels in Curt. 4, 14, 22. 
meum corculum, Plaut. Cas. 4, 4,14; meum cor, id. Poen. 
1, 2,154; [ef. Bp. Lghtft.on Philem. ]. 6.1). The Hebr. 
ὉΠ is translated by the Sept. now οἰκτιρμοί, Ps. xxiv. 
(xxv.) 6; xxxix. (xl) 12, now ἔλεος, Is. xlvii. 6; once 
σπλάγχνα, Prov. xii. 10." 

σπόγγος, -ov, 6, [perh. akin is fungus ; Curtius § 575], 
fr. Hom. down, sponge: Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Jn. 
xix.) 29.5 

σποδός, -ov, 7, fr. Hom. down, ashes: Heb. ix. 13; ἐν 
σάκκῳ x. σποδῷ κάθημαι, to sit clothed in sackcloth and 
covered with ashes (exhibiting the tokens of grief, cf. 
Jon. iii. 6; Is. Iviii. 5; Ixi. 3; Jer. vi. 26; Esth.iv. 1,3; 
1 Mace. iii. 47; cf. σάκκος, b.): Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 13.* 

σπορά, -as, ἡ, (σπείρω, 2 pf. €amupa), seed: 1 Pet. i. 23 
[( q. a sowing, fig. origin, etc., fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down) }.* 

σπόριμος, -ov, (σπείρω, 2 pf. ἔσπορα), fit for sowing, 
sown, (Xen., Diod., al.) ; ra σπόμιμα, sown fields, growing 
crops, [A.V. (exe. in Mt.) corn-fields}, (Geop. 1, 12, 37): 
Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii. 23; Lk. vi. 1.* 

σπόρος, -ov, 6, (σπείρω, 2 pf. ἔσπορα) ; 1. a sow- 
ing (Hdt., Xen., Theophr., al.). 2. seed (used in 
sowing): Mk. iv. 26sq.; Lk. viii. 5,11; 2 Οο. ἴχ. 19) [L 
Tr, 10°], (Deut. xi. 10; Theocr., Plut., al.).* 

σπουδαζω ; fut. σπουδάσω (a later form for the early 
-άσομαι, cf. Kriiger ὃ 40 5. v., vol. i. p. 190; B. 53 (46); 
[W. 89 (85); Veitchs.v.]); 1 aor. ἐσπούδασα; (σπουδή, 
q-v-); fr. Soph. and Arstph. down; a. to hasten, 
make haste: foll. by an inf. (cf. σπεύδω, 1), 2 Tim. iv. 9, 
21; Tit. iii. 12, [4]. refer these exx. to b.; but cf. Holtz- 
mann, Com. on 2 Tim. ii. 15]. b. to exert one’s self, 
endeavor, give diligence: foll. by an inf., Gal. ii. 10; Eph. 
iv. 5.1 hw 815 2) Tim! a 10; Hebs iv. 11. 9 ΒΘ 
10; iii. 14; foll. by acc. with inf. 2 Pet. 1. 15." 

σπουδαῖος, -a, -ov, (σπουδή), fr. Hdt. down, active, dili- 
gent, zealous, earnest: ἔν τινι, 2 Co. viii. 22; compar. 
σπουδαιότερος, ibid. 17 [W. 242 sq. (227) ], 22 [W. § 35, 
17; neut. as adv. (Lat. sfudiosius), very diligently (cf. B. 
§ 123, 10], 2 Tim.i. 17 RG.* 

σπουδαίως, adv. of the preceding; a. hastily, with 
haste: compar. σπουδαιοτέρως [cf. B. 69 (61); W. § 11, 
2c.], Phil. ii. 28 [W. 243 (228)]. b. diligently: 2 
Tim. i.17 LT Tr WH;; Tit. iii. 13 ; earnestly, Lk. vii. 4.* 


585 


στάσις 


σπουδή, -ῆς, 7), (σπεύδω, [q. v-]), fr. Hom. down; 1. 
haste: μετὰ σπουδῆς, with haste, Mk. νἱ. 25; Lk. 1. 39, (Sap. 
xix. 2; Joseph. antt. 7, 9,7; Hdian. 3, 4,1; 6, 4,3). 2. 
earnestness, diligence: univ. earnestness in accomplish 
ing, promoting, or striving after anything, Ro. xii. 11; 
2 Co. vii. 11, 12; viii. 7sq.; ἐν σπουδῇ, with diligence, 
Ro. xii. 8; σπουδὴν ἐνδείκνυσθαι, Heb. vi. 11; πᾶσαν σπου- 
δὴν ποιεῖσθαι (see ποιέω, 1. 3 p. 525° bot.), to give all dili- 
gence, interest one’s self most earnestly, Jude 3; σπουδὴν 
παρεισφέρειν, 2 Pet. i. 5; ἡ on. ὑπέρ τινος, earnest care 
for one, 2 Co. viii. 16 {περί τινος, [ Dem. 90, 10]; Diod. 
1, 15)." 

σπυρίς [L WI σφυρίς, q. v.],-i8os, ἡ, (allied to σπεῖρα, 
q-v.; hence, something wound, twisted, or folded togeth- 
er), a reed basket, [i.e. a plaited basket, a lunch basket, 
hamper; οἵ. B.D. 5. ν. Basket]: Mt. xv. 37; xvi.10; Mk. 
viii. 8, 20; Acts ix. 25. (Hdt., Theophr., Apollod., Al- 
ciphr. 3, ep. 56; al.). See oupis.* 

στάδιον, -ov, plur. ra στάδια [ Jn. vi. 19 Tdf.], and of 
στάδιοι (so [ Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; Lk. xxiv. 13; 
Jn. vi. 19 [not Tdf.]; Rev. xxi. 16 [Εἰς GLWHmrg.]; 
2 Mace. xi.5; xii. 10, 29; in the other pass. the gend. is 
not apparent [see 7df. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 
157]; Kriiger 8 19, 2, 1), (STAQ, ἵστημι; hence prop., 
‘established,’ that which stands fast, a‘ stated’ distance, 
a ‘fixed standard’ of length), a s/adium, i. 6. 1. ἃ 
measure of length comprising 600 Grk. feet, or 625 Ro- 
man feet, or 125 Roman paces (Plin. h. n. 2, 23 (21), 85), 
hence one eighth of a Roman mile [i. 6. 6063 Eng. feet 
(about 15 m. less than one fifth of a kilom.)]; the space 
or distance of that length [A.V.a furlong]: [Mt. xiv. 
24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; Lk. xxiv. 13; Jn. vi. 19; xi. 18; 
Rey. xiv. 20; xxi. 16. 2. a race-course, i.e. place 
in which contests in running were held; the one who 
outstripped the rest, and reached the goal first, receiv- 
ing the prize: 1 Co. ix. 24 [here A. V. race]. Courses 
of this description were to be found in most of the larger 
Grk. cities, and were, like that at Olympia, 600 Greek 
feet in length. Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Stadium; Grundt 
in Schenkel s. v., vol. v. 375sq.; [BB. DD.s.v. Games].* 

στάμνος. -ου(ὺ), ἡ, (fr. ἵστημι (cf. Curtius § 216]), among 
the Greeks an earthen jar, into which wine was drawn off 
for keeping (a process called κατασταμνίζειν), but also 
used for other purposes. The Sept. employ it in Ex. 
xvi. 33 as the rendering of the Hebr. 3¥3¥, that little 
jar [or “pot”] in which the manna was kept, laid up in 
the ark of the covenant; hence in Heb. ix. 4, and Philo 
de congr. erud. grat. §18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 400; 
[W. 287. 

στασιαστής, -οὔ, 6, (στασιάζωγ. the author of or a 
participant in an insurrection: Mk. xv. 7 LT ΤΥ ΜῊ 
({Diod. fr. 10, 11, 1 p.171, 6 Dind.; Dion. Hal. ii. 1199]; 
Joseph. antt. 14, 1, 3; Ptolem.). The earlier Greeks 
used στασιώτης [ Moeris 5. v.].* 

στάσις, -ews, ἡ, (torn) 5 1. a standing, station, 
state: ἔχειν στάσιν, to stand, exist, have stability, Lat. locum 
habere, [R. V. is yet standing], Heb. ix. 8 (Polyb. 5, 5, 
3). 2 fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, an insurrection 


στατήρ 


(cf. Germ. Aufstand): Mk. xv. 7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts 
xix. 40 [see σήμερον, sub fin.]; κινεῖν στάσιν [LT Tr 
WH στάσεις τινί, [a mover of insurrections among i. e.] 
against [cf. W. 208 (196)] one, Acts xxiv. 5. 3. 
strife, dissension, (Aeschyl. Pers. 738; Diog. Laért. 3, 
51): Acts xv. 2; xxiii. 7, 10.* 

στατήρ, -ῆρος, 6, (fr. ἴστημι, to place in the seales, weigh 
out [i. e. ‘the weigher’ (Vanicek p. 1126)]), α stater, a 
coin; in the N. T. a silver stater equiv. to four Attic 
or two Alexandrian drachmas, a Jewish shekel (see 
δίδραχμον) : Mt. xvii. 27.* 

σταυρός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. ἵστημι (root sta); cf. Lat. stauro, 
Eng. staff (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.); Curtius § 216; 
Vaniéek p. 1126]; 1. an upright stake, esp. a pointed 
one, (Hom., Hdt., Thue., Xen.). 2. a cross; a. 
the well-known instrument of most cruel and ignomin- 
ious punishment, borrowed by the Greeks and Romans 
from the Pheenicians; to it were affixed among the 
Romans, down to the time of Constantine the Great, the 
guiltiest criminals, particularly the basest slaves, rob- 
bers, the authors and abetters of insurrections, and oc- 
casionally in the provinces, at the arbitrary pleasure of 
the governors, upright and peaceable men also, and even 
Roman citizens themselves; cf. Win. RWB.s. v. Kreuzi- 
gung; Merz in Herzog ed. 1 [(cf. Schaff-Herzog) also 
Schultze in Herzog ed. 2], 5. v. Kreuz; Keim iii. p. 409 
864. [Eng. trans. vi. 138; BB.DD. 8. vv. Cross, Cru- 
cifixion; O. Zéckler, Das Kreuz Christi (Giitersloh, 
1875); Eng. trans. Lond. 1878; Fulda, Das Kreuz τι. ἃ. 
Kreuzigung (Bresl. 1878); Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, 
ii. 582 sqq.]. This horrible punishment the innocent 
Jesus also suffered: Mt. xxvii. 32, 40,42; Mk. xv. 21, 30, 
32; Lk. xxiii. 26; Jn. xix. 17, 19, 25, 31; Col. ii. 14; Heb. 

_ xii. 2; θάνατος σταυροῦ, Phil. ii. 8; τὸ αἷμα τοῦ σταυροῦ, 

blood shed on the cross, Col. i. 20. b. i. q. the cruci- 
fixzion which Christ underwent: Gal. ν. 11 (on which see 
σκάνδαλον, sub fin.) ; Eph. ii. 16 ; with the addition of τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, 1 Co. i. 17; the saving power of his crucifixion, 
Phil. iii. 18 (on which see ἐχθρός, fin.) ; Gal. vi. 14; τῷ 
σταυρῷ τοῦ Χριστοῦ διώκεσθαι, to encounter persecution 
on account of one’s avowed belief in the saving efficacy 
of Christ’s crucifixion, Gal. vi. 12; ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ, 
the doctrine concerning the saving power of the death 
on the cross endured by Christ, 1 Co. i. 18. The judi- 
cial usage which compelled those condemned to eruci- 
fixion themselves to carry the cross to the place of 
punishment (Plut. de sera numinis vindict. 6. 9; Artem. 
oneir. 2, 56, ef. Jn. xix. 17), gave rise to the proverbial 
expression αἴρειν or λαμβάνειν or βαστάζειν τὸν σταυρὸν 
αὐτοῦ, which was wont to be used of those who on behalf 
of God’s cause do not hesitate cheerfully and manfully 
to bear persecutions, troubles, distresses, — thus recall- 
ing the fate‘of Christ and the spirit in which he encoun- 
tered it (cf. Bleek, Synop. Erkl. der drei ersten Evange. 
i. p. 439 sq.): Mt. x. 38; xvi. 24; Mk. viii. 34; x. 21 
ΤΕ Lin br.]; xv. 21; Lk. ix. 23; xiv. 27." 

σταυρόω, -ῶ; fut. σταυρώσω; 1 aor. ἐσταύρωσα; Pass., 
pres. σταύρομαι; perfect ἐσταύρωμαι; 1 aor. ἐσταυρώ- 


586 


στέλλω 


θην; (σταυρός, α. ν.); 1. to stake, drive down stakes: 
Thue. 7, 25, 6 [here οὗ Συρακοσιοι ἐσταύρωσαν, which the 
Scholiast renders σταυροὺς κατέπηξαν]. 2. to for- 
tify with driven stakes, to palisade: a place, Thue. 6, 
100; Diod. 3. to crucify (Vulg. crucifigo): twa, a. 
prop.: Mt. χχ. 19; xxiii. 34; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 22, [23], 26, 
31, 35,38; xxvili.5; Mk. xv. 13-15, 20, 24 sq. 27; xvi. 
6; Lk. xxiii. 21, 23,33; xxiv. 7,20; Jn. xix. 6,10, 15 sq. 
18, 20, 23,41; Acts ii. 36; iv.10; 1 Co. i. 13, 23; ii. 2, 
[8]; 2Co. xiii.4; Gal. iii.1; Rev. xi. 8, (Add. to Esth. 
viii. 13 [34]; for MN, to hang, Esth. vii.9. Polyb. 1, 86, 
4; Joseph. antt. 2, 5,4; 17, 10,10; Artem. oneir. 2, 53 
and 56; in native Grk. writ. ἀνασταυροῦν is more com- 
mon). b. metaph.: τὴν σάρκα, to crucify the flesh, 
destroy its power utterly (the nature of the fig. implying 
that the destruction is attended with intense pain [but 
note the aor.]), Gal. v. 24; ἐσταύρωμαί τινι, and ἐσταύ- 
ρωταί poi τι, | have been crucified to something and it has 
been crucified to me, so that we are dead to each other, 
all fellowship and intercourse between us has ceased, 
Gal. vi. 14. [Come.: dva-, συ(ν)- σταυρόω.] ἢ 

σταφυλή, -ῆς, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 23), grapes, 
a bunch of grapes: Mt. vii. 16; Lk. vi. 44; Rev. xiv. 18 
[ef. Sept. as referred to 8. v. βότρυς." 

στάχυς, -vos [cf. B. 14], 6, [connected w. the r. sta, 
tore; Curtius p. 721], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for naw, 
an ear of corn (or growing grain): Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii. 
23; iv. 28; Lk. vi. 1.* 

Στάχυς, -vos, ὁ, [ef. the preceding word], Siachys, the 
name of a man [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 174]: Ro. 
Xvi. 9.* 

στέγη, -ns, ἧ, (στέγω to cover), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down, a roof: of a house, Mk. ii. 4; εἰσέρχεσθαι ὑπὸ τὴν. 
στέγην τινός [see εἰσέρχομαι, 1 p. 187” bot.], Mt. viii. 8 ;, 
LK. vii. 6.* 

στέγω; [allied w. Lat. tego, toga, Eng. deck, thatch, 
ete.; Curtius § 155; Fick Pt. iii. 590]; to cover; 1. 
to protect or keep by covering, to preserve: Soph., Plat., 
Plut., al. 2. to cover over with silence; to keep se- 
cret; to hide, conceal: rapa ἔπη, Eur. Electr. 273; τὸν 
λόγον, Polyb. 8, 14, 5; for other exx. see Passow s. v. 1 Ὁ. 
B.; [L. and S. s. v. IL. 2]; μωρὸς οὐ δυνήσεται λόγον στέ- 
&a, Sir. viii. 17; hence ἡ ἀγάπη πάντα στέγει, 1 Co. xiii. 
7, is explained by some, love covereth [so R. V. mrg.], i. e. 
hides and excuses, the errors and faults of others; but it 
is more appropriately rendered (with other interpreters) 
beareth. For oréyo means 3. by covering to keep 
off something which threatens, to bear up against, hold 
out against, and so to endure, bear, forbear, (ras ἐνδείας, 
Philo in Flace. § 9; many exx. fr. Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. 
down are given by Vassow 8. ν. 2; [L. and S.s.v. A. 
esp. 87): 1 Co. ix. 12; xiii. 7; 1 Th. iii. 1, δ." 

στεῖρος, -a, -ov, (i- 4. στέρρος, στερεός q. V-; whence 
Germ. starr, Lat. sterilis), hard, stiff; of men and ani- 
mals, barren: of a woman who does not conceive, Lk. 
i. 7,36; xxiii. 29; Gal.iv.27. (Hom., Theocr., Orph., 
Anthol.; Sept. for 1pj) 7773.) * 

στέλλω : (Germ. stellen; [ οἵ. Grk. στήλη, orads, etc; 


στέμμα 


Lat. stlocus (locus); Eng. stall, οἴο.; Curtius § 218; Fick 
Pt. i. 246; Pt. iv. 274]); fr. Hom. down; 1. to set, 
place, set in order, arrange; to fit out, to prepare, equip ; 
Mid. pres. στέλλομαι, to prepare one’s self, to fit out for 
one’s self; to fit out for one’s own use: στελλόμενοι τοῦτο 
μή τις ete. arranging, providing for, this ete. i. 6. taking 
_ care [A. V. avoiding], that no one ete. 2 Co. viii. 20 [ef. 
W. § 45, 6a.; B. 292 (252)]. 2. to bring together, 
τ contract, shorten: τὰ ἱστία, Hom. Od. 3,11; 16, 353; also 
in mid. Il. 1,433; to diminish, check, cause to cease; pass. 
to cease to exist: βουλομένη τὴν λύπην τοῦ ἀνδρὸς σταλῆναι, 
Joseph. antt.5, 8, ὃ; ὁ χειμὼν ἐστάλη, ibid. 9,10, 2; mid. 
to remove one’s self, withdraw one’s self, to depart, foll. by 
ἀπό with gen. of the pers., to abstain from familiar inter- 
course with one, 2 Th. iii. 6. [Comp.: ἀπο-, ἐξ-απο-γ συν- 
aro-, δια-, émt-, κατα-, συ(ν)-, ὑπο-στέλλω.} ἢ 

στέμμα, -τος, τό, (στέφω, pf. pass. ἔστεμμαι, to crown, 
to bind round), a fillet, a garland, put upon victims: 
Acts xiv. 13 [cf. W. 630 (585); B. Ὁ. Am. ed. 5. v. Gar- 
lands]. (From Hom. down.) * 

στεναγμός, -οῦ, ὁ, (στενάζω), a groaning, a sigh: Acts 
vii. 34; Ro. viii. 26; see ἀλάλητος. ([Pind.], Tragg., 
Plat., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept. for 738, TPIS, TPS).)* 

στενάζω; 1 aor. ἐστέναξα; (στένω, akin is Germ. stihnen 
[ef. sten-torian; Vaniéek p. 1141; Fick Pt. i. 249]); to 
sigh, to groan: 2 Co. v. 2, 4, [ef. W. 353 (331)]; Heb. xiii. 
17; ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, within ourselves, i. 6. in our souls, in- 
wardly, Ro. viii. 23; to pray sighing, Mk. vii. 34; κατά 
twos, Jas. v. 9 [here R. V. murmur]. (Sept.; Trage., 
Dem., Plut., al.) [Comp.: dva-, cv(v)- στενάζω. Syn. 
cf. κλαίω, fin.]* 

στενός, -7, -dv, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for 
WS, narrow, strait: πύλη, Mt. vii. 13, [14 (here L Tr br. 
πύλη)]; Lk. xiii. 24.* 

στενο-χωρέω, -@: (στενόχωρος ; and this fr. στενός, and 
χῶρος a space) ; 1. intrans. to be in a strait place 
(Machon in Athen. 13 p. 582 b.); to be narrow (Is. xlix. 
19). 2. trans. to straiten, compress, cramp, reduce 
to straits, (Vulg. angustio), (Diod., Leian., Hdian., al. ; 
[Sept. Josh. xvii. 15; Judg. xvi. 16; Is. xxviii. 20; 4 
Mace. xi. 11]): pass. trop. of one sorely ‘straitened’ in 
spirit, 2 Co. iv. 8; οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, ye are not 
straitened in us, ample space is granted you in our souls, 
i. e. we enfold you with large affection, 2 Co. vi. 12; ore- 
νοχωρεῖσθε ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν, ye are straitened in 
your own affections, so that there is no room there for 
us, i. e. you do not grant a place in your heart for love 
toward me, ibid.* 

στενοχωρία, -as, 7, (στενόχωρος), narrowness of place, 
a narrow space, (Is. viii. 22 [al. take this as metaph.]; 
Thuce., Plat., al.); metaph. dire calamity, extreme afjlic- 
tion, [A. V. distress, anguish]: Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35; 2 Co. 
vi. 4; xii.10. (Deut. xxviii. 53, 55, 57; Sir. x. 26; [Sap. 
v. 3]; 1 Mace. ii. 53; xiii. 3; Polyb. 1,67,1; [Artemid. 
oneir. 3, 14]; Ael. v. h. 2, 41; [al.].) [Cf Trench 8 lv.]* 

στερεός, -d, -όν, [Vanivek p. 1131; Curtius § 222], fr. 
Hom. down, jirm, solid, compact, hard, rigid: λίθος, Hom. 
Od. 19, 494; strong, firm, immovable, θεμέλιος, 2 Tim. ii. 


587 


στεφανόω 


19; τροφή, solid food, Heb. ν. 12, 14; στερεωτέρα τροφή, 
Diod. 2,4; Epictet. diss. 2, 16, 39; trop., in a bad 
sense, cruel, stiff, stubborn, hard; often so in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down: κραδίη στερεωτέρη λίθοιο, Od. 23,103; in 
a good sense, firm, steadfast: τῇ πίστει, as respects faith, 
firm of faith [οἵ. W. § 31, 6 a.], 1 Pet. v. 9 (see στερεόω, 
fin.).* 

στερεόω, -O: 1 aor. ἐστερέωσα; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐστε- 
peouvro; 1 aor. pass. ἐστερεώθην; (στερεός) ; to make 
solid, make firm, strengthen, make strong: τινά, the body 
of any one, Acts iii. 16; τὰς βάσεις, pass. Acts iii. 7; 
pass. τῇ πίστει, as respects faith (see στερεός, fin.), Acts 
xvi. 5. (Sept.; Xen., Diod.) * 

στερέωμα, -τος, τό, (στερεόω), that which has been made 
Jjirm; a. (Vulg. jfirmamentum) the firmament; so 
Sept. for np, the arch of the sky, which in early times 
was thought to be solid, Gen. i. 6-8; Ezek. i. 22-26; 
Sir. xliii. 1, [ef. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) 8. v. Firmament]; 
a fortified place, 1 Esdr. viii. 78 (80). b. that which 
Surnishes a foundation; on which a thing rests firmly, supe 
port: Aristot. partt. an. 2, 9,12 p. 655%, 22; κύριος στερέ- 
ὠμά pov, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 3. ce. firmness, steadfast. 
ness: τῆς πίστεως, Col. ii. 5 [some take it here metaph. 
in a military sense, solid front; ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. 
(per contra Meyer) ].* 

Στεφανάς, -a [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Stephanas, a Christian 
of Corinth: 1 Co. i. 16 ; xvi. 15, 17.* 

στέφανος, -ov, 6, (στέφω [to put round; ef. Curtius 
§ 224]), Sept. for Mwy, [fr. Hom. down], a crown (with 
which the head is encircled) ; a. prop. as a mark 
of royal or (in general) exalted rank [such pass. in the 
Sept. as 2S. xii. 30; 1 Chr. xx. 2; Ps. xx. (xxi.) 4; Ezek. 
xxi. 26; Zech. vi. 11, 14, (yet ef. 2 S.i. 10 Compl, Lag.), 
perhaps justify the doubt whether the distinction betw. 
στέφανος and διάδημα (q.v-) was strictly observed in 
Hellenistic Grk.]: Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix. 2, 
5; Rev. iv.4, 10; vi. 2; ix. 7; xiv. 14; with a gen. of the 
material, ἀστέρων δώδεκα, Rev. xii.1; the wreath or gar- 
land which was given as a prize to victors in the public 
games [cf. BB. DD. 5. v. Games]: 1 Co. ix. 25, ef. 2 Tim. 
ii. 5. b. metaph. a. the eternal blessedness which 
will be given asa prize to the genuine servants of God and 
Christ: 6 τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος, the crown (wreath) 
which is the reward of righteousness, 2 Tim. iv. 8; with 
an epexeget. gen. in the phrases λαμβάνεσθαι, διδύναι τὸν 
στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς, equiv. to τὴν ζωὴν ὡς τὸν στέφανον, 
Jas. i. 12; Rev. ii. 10; κομίζεσθαι τὸν τῆς δόξης στέφανον, 
1 Pet. v. 4; λαβεῖν τ. στέφανόν τινος, to cause one to fail 
of the promised and hoped for prize, Rev. iii. 11. B. 
that which is an ornament and honor to one: so of per- 
sons, Phil. iv. 1; στέφ. καυχήσεως (see καύχησις), 1 Th. 
ii. 19, (Prov. xii. 4; xvi. 31; xvii. 6, ete.).* 

Στέφανος, -ov, ὁ, Stephen, one of the seven ‘ deacons’ 
of the church at Jerusalem who was stoned to death by 
the Jews: Acts vi. 5, 8sq.; vii. 59; viii. 2; xi.19; xxii. 
20.* 

στεφανόω, -@: 1 aor. ἐστεφάνωσα; pf. pass. ptep. ἐστε- 
φανωμένος ; (στέφανος) ; fr. Hom. down ; a. to en- 


στῆθος 


circle with a crown, to crown: the victor in a contest, 2 
Tim. ii. 5. Ὁ. univ. to adorn, to honor: τινὰ δόξῃ κ. 
τιμῇ, Leb. ii. 7, 9, fr. Ps. viii. 6.* 

στῆθος, -ovs, τό, (fr. tornut; that which stands out, 
is prominent [Etym. Magn. 727, 19 διότι ἕστηκεν ἀσάλευ- 
τον), tr. Ilom. down, the breast: Jn. xiii. 25; xxi. 20, 
(cf. κόλπος, 1) ; Rev. xv. 6. 
τὸ στῆθος, of mourners (see κύπτω), Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 
48." 

στήκω; (an inferior Grk. word, derived fr. ἕστηκα, pf. 
of ἵστημε; see B. 48 (41); [W. 24, 26 (25); WH. App. 
p- 169; Veitch s.v. ἑστήκω; Mullach 8. ν. στέκω (p. 
299)]); to stand: Mk. [iii. 31 T Tr WH]; xi. 25 [(ef. 
ὅταν c. B.)]; Jn. i. 26 Linrg. T Trtxt. WH; [Rev. xii. 
4 WH (but see below)]; with an emphasis, to stand 
Jjirm; trop. to persist, persevere, [A.V. sland fast]: absol. 
to persevere in godliness and rectitude, 2 Th. ii. 15; ἐν 
κυρίῳ, in one’s fellowship with the Lord, Phil. iv. 1; 1 
Th. iii. 8 [(cf. ἐάν, 1. 2 b.)]; ἐν τῇ πίστει, 1 Co. xvi. 18 ; 
ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, Phil. i. 27; to keep one’s standing (opp. 
to ζυγῷ ἐνέχομαι), τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, maintain your allegiance 
to freedom (cf. W. § 31, 1 k.; B. $133, 12; but L T Tr 
WHI take or. here absol.; οἵ. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.], Gal. 
v. 1; lo stand erect, trop. not to sin (opp. to πίπτειν i. ἢ. 
to sin), τῷ κυρίῳ, dat. commodi [W. τι. 5.7, Ro. xiv. 4. 
[In Jn. viii. 44 (ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ οὐκ(χ) extnxev) WIT read 
the impf. ἔστηκεν (where others adopt ἕστηκεν fr. ἵστημι), 
owing to the preceding οὐκ (T WH after codd. 8 B* Ὁ 
L etc.) ; see Westcott, Com. on Jn. l.c. * Additional Note’; 
WH. Introd. § 407. But such an impf. is nowhere else 
found (yet ef. Rev. xii. 4 WH), and respecting confu- 
sion in the ancient use of the breathings, and the inter- 
change of οὐκ and οὐχ, see οὐ ad init. and reff. there, esp. 
Tif. Proleg. p. 90; moreover, the familiar pf. (pres.) of 
torn thoroughly suits the context; see torn, II. 2 d.] 
([Sept., Ex. xiv. 13 Alex., Compl. ; 1 K. viii. 11]; Alex. 
Aphr. probl. 1, 49 var.; eccles. writ.) * 

στηριγμός, -ov, ὁ, (στηρίζω), firm condition, stead fast- 
ness: of mind, 2 Pet. iii. 17. (of a standing still, Diod. 
1, 81; Plut. mor. p. 76 ἃ.) ἢ 

στηρίζω ; fut. στηρίξω (as in the best Grk. writ.), and 
στηρίσω (in 2 Th. iii. 3 cod. Vat., as in Jer. xvii. 5; στηριῶ, 
Jer. iii. 12; xxiv. 6; Ezek. xiv. 8; Sir. vi. 37 [see reff. 
below]); 1 aor. ἐστήριξα, and ἐστήρισα (στήρισον, Lk. 
xxii. 32 LT Tr WH; Rev. iii. 2G LT Tr WH, as in Judge. 
xix. 5, 8; Ezek. vi. 2; Prov. xv. 25, etc.; ef. [ WH. App. 
p- 170]; Bim. Ausf. Sprehl.i. p.872; B. 36 (32); Kiihner 
§ 343, i. p. 910; [Veitch s.v.]); Pass., pf ἐστήριγμαι; 1 
πον. ἐστηρίχθην ; (στῆριγξ a support ; akin to στερεός, (|. ν.» 
στερρός, and Germ. stdrken; cf. Curtius § 222); fr. Hom. 
a. fo make stable, place firmly, set fast, fix: 
ἐστήρικται (χάσμα), is fixed, Lk. xvi. 26; στηρίζω τὸ πρό- 
σωπον, to set one’s face steadfastly, keep the face turned 
(Ezek. vi. 2; xiii. 17; xv. 7; ete.) rod πορεύεσθαι εἰς with 
an ace. of place, a Hebr. expression (sge πρόσωπον, 1 Ὁ. 
[and cf. B. § 140, 16 8.; W. 33]), Lk. ix. 51. b. to 
strengthen, make firm; trop. (not so in prof. auth.) to 
render constant, confirm, one’s mind [A. V. establish]: 


τύπτειν εἰς τὸ στῆθος OF TUTT. 


down; 


588 


στοιχεῖον 


τινά, Lk. xxii. 32; [Acts xviii. 23 where RG émcornp. |: 
Roi 11s xvi. 95:1 ΠΗ 111 292) Bhs. 3's) 1 ΒΡ ιν Ὁ 
{here Ree. has 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. στηρίξαι); Rev. 
iii. 2; τὴν καρδίαν τινός, 1 Th. iii. 13; Jas. v. 8; τινὰ ἔν 
τινι, 2'Th. ii. 17; 2 Pet. i. 12. [Comr.: ἐπι-στηρίζω. " 

στιβάς, -ados, ἡ, (fr. στείβω ‘to tread on,’ 2 aor. ἔστι: 
Bov) ; a. a spread or layer of leaves, reeds, rushes, 
sofi leafy twigs, straw, ete., serving for a bed (Hesych. 
στιβάς - ἀπὸ ῥάβδων ἢ χλωρῶν χόρτων στρῶσις K. φύλλων) ; 
so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. b. that which is 
used in making a bed of this sort. a branch full of leaves, 
soft foliage: so Mk. xi. 8 LT Tr WH for στοιβάδας, an 
orthographical error [see Tdf.’s note ad loc.].* 

στίγμα, -ros, τό, (fr. στίζω to prick; [ef. Lat. stimulus, 
ete.; Germ. s/echen, Eng. stick, sting, ete.; Curtius §226]), 
a mark pricked in or branded upon the body. Ace. to 
ancient oriental usage, slaves and soldiers bore the name 
or stamp of their master or commander branded or 
pricked (cut) into their bodies to indicate what master 
or general they belonged to, and there were even some 
devotees who stamped themselves in this way with the 
token of their gods (ef. Deyling, Observv. iii. p. 423 sqq.); 
hence τὰ στίγματα τοῦ (κυρίου so Rec.) ᾿Ιησοῦ, the marks 
of (the Lord) Jesus, which Paul in Gal. vi. 17 says he 
bears branded on his body, are the traces left there by 
the perils, hardships, imprisonments, scourgings, endured 
by him for the cause of Christ, and which mark him 
as Christ’s faithful and approved votary, servant, soldier, 
[see Bp. Lahtft. Com. on Gal. 1. 9.1. (Hdt. 7, 238; Ar 
istot., Ael., Plut., Leian., al.) * 

στιγμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (στίζω ; see στίγμα, init.),a point: στιγμὴ 
χρόνου, a point (i. 6. « momen/) of time (Cie. pro Flacco 
c. 25; pro Sest. 24; Caes. Ὁ. c. 2,14; al.), Lk. iv. δ. 
(Antonin. 2,17; Plut. puer. educ. 17; Is. xxix. 5; 2 
Mace. ix. 11.) * 

στίλβω ; to shine, glisten: of garments (as in Hom. IL 
3, 392; 18, 596; cf. Plat. Phaedo 59 p. 110 d.), Mk. ix. 
3.* 

στοά, -Gs, ἡ, ἃ portico, a covered colonnade where peo- 
ple can stand or walk protected from the weather and 
the heat of the sun: Jn. v. 2; στοὰ Σολομῶνος, a “ porch” 
or portico built by Solomon in the eastern part of the 
temple (which in the temple’s destruction by the Baby- 
lonians was left uninjured, and remained down to the 
times of king Agrippa, to whom the care of the temple 
was intrusted by the emperor Claudius, and who on 
account of its antiquity did not dare to demolish and 
build it anew; so Josephus relates, antt. 20, 9, 7; [but 
on ‘Solomon’s Porch’ cf. B.D. s. v. Temple (Solomon’s 
Temple, fin.)]): Jn. x. 23; Acts iii. 11; v. 12.* 

στοιβάς. -άδος, 7, see στιβάς, Ὁ. 

[Zroikds, so Lehm. Tdf. for Στωϊκός, 4. v-] 

στοιχεῖον, -ov, τό, (fr. στοῖχος a row, rank, series; 
hence prop. that which belongs to any orotyos, that of 
which a orotyos is composed; hence), any first thing, 
from which the others belonging to some series or composite 
whole take their rise; an element, first principle. The 
word denotes spec. 1. the letters of the alphabet as 


στοιχέω 


the elements of speech, not however the written 
characters (which are called γράμματα), but the 
spoken sounds: στοιχεῖον φωνῆς φωνὴ ἀσύνθετος, Plat. 
defin. p. 414e.; τὸ ῥῶ τὸ στοιχεῖον, id. Crat. p. 420 d.; 
στοιχεῖόν ἐστι φωνὴ ἀδιαίρετος, ov πᾶσα δέ, GAN ἐξ ἧς πέ- 
φυκε συνετὴ γίγνεσθαι φωνή, Aristot. poet. 20, p. 1496, 
22. 2. the elements from which all things have come, 
the material causes of the universe (ἔστι δὲ στοιχεῖον, ἐξ 
οὗ πρώτου γίνεται τὰ γινόμενα καὶ εἰς ὃ ἔσχατον ἀναλύεται 
νος τὸ πῦρ. τὸ ὕδωρ, ὁ ἀήρ, ἡ γῆ, Diog. Laért. Zeno 69, 
137); so very often fr. Plat. down, as in Tim. p. 48 b.; 
in the Scriptures: Sap. vii. 17; xix. 17; 2 Pet. ili. 10, 
12. 3. the heavenly bodies, either as parts of the 
heavens, or (as others think) because in them the ele- 
ments of man’s life and destiny were supposed to reside; 
so in the earlier eccles. writ.: Ep. ad Diogn. 7, 2; Justin. 
M. dial. c. Tryph. 23; τὰ οὐράνια στοιχεῖα, id. apol. 2, 5; 
στοιχεῖα θεοῦ, created by God, Theoph. Ant. ad Autol. 
1,4; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, pp. 66-77. Hence 
some interpreters infelicitously understand Paul’s phrase 
τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου, Gal. iv. 8, 9; Col. ii. 8, 20, of the 
heavenly bodies, because times and seasons, and so sa- 
cred seasons, were regulated by the course of the sun 
and moon; yet in unfolding the meaning of the passage 
on the basis of this sense they differ widely. 4. 
the elements, rudiments, primary and fundamental princi- 
ples (cf. our ‘alphabet’ or ‘a b 6} of any art, science, or 
discipline; 6. g. of mathematics, as in the title of Enclid’s 
well-known work; στοιχεῖα πρῶτα καὶ μέγιστα χρηστῆς 
πολιτείας, Isocr. p. 18 ἃ.: τῆς ἀρετῆς, Plut.de puer. educ. 
16, 2; many exx. are given in Passow 8. Υ. 4, ii. p. 1550"; 
[ef. L. and S. 5. v. Il. 3 and 4]. In the N. T. we have 
τὰ στ. τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν λογίων τοῦ θεοῦ (see ἀρχή, 1 b. p. 76” 
bot.), Heb. ν. 12, such as are taught to νήπιοι, ib. 18; τὰ 
στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου, the rudiments with which mankind 
like νήπιοι were indoctrinated before the time of Christ, 
i.e. the elements of religious training, or the ceremonial 
precepts common alike to the worship of Jews and of 
Gentiles, Gal. iv. 3, 9, (and since these requirements on 
account of the difficulty of observing them are to be 
regarded as a yoke —cf. Acts xv. 10; Gal. y. 1 —those 
who rely upon them are said to be δεδουλωμένοι ὑπὸ τὰ 
or.); spec. the ceremonial requirements esp. of Jewish 
tradition, minutely set forth by theosophists and false 
teachers, and fortified by specious arguments, Col. ii. 8, 
20. 
cussed by Schneckenburger in the Theolog. Jahrbiicher 
for 1848, Pt. iv. p. 445 sqq.; Meander in the Deutsche 
Zeitschrift ἢ. Christl. Wissenschaft for 1850, p. 205 
sqq-; Kienlen in Reuss u. Cunitz’s Beitrage zu d. theolog. 
Wissenschaften, vol. ii. p. 133 sqq.; 2. Schaubach, Com- 
ment. qua exponitur quid στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου in N. T. 
sibi velint. (Meining. 1862).* 

στοιχέω, -@; fut. στοιχήσω; (στοῖχος ἃ row, series); 8. 
to proceed in a row, go in order: Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 34; 
metaph. to go on prosperously, to turn oul well: of things, 
Eccl. xi. 6 for "73. b. to walk: with a local dat. 
(W. § 31, 1a. cf. p. 219 (205); yet ef. B. § 133, 22 b.], 


The phrase τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου is fully dis- 


589 


στομα 


τοῖς ἴχνεσί τινος, in the steps or one, i. 6. follow his ex- 
ample, Ro. iv. 12; to direct one’s life, to live, with a dat. 
of the rule [B. u.s.], εἰ πνεύματι . . . στοιχῶμεν, if the 
Holy Spirit animates us [see ζάω, I. 3 sub fin.], let us 
exhibit that control of the Spirit in our life, Gal. v. 25; 
τῷ κανόνι, acc. to the rule, Gal. vi. 16; τῷ αὐτῷ (where 
Ree. adds κανόνι), Phil. iii. 16 [W. § 43, 5 d.; cf. B. § 140, 
18 fin.], (τῷ παραδείγματί τινος, Clem. hom. 10,15); with 
a ptep. denoting the manner of acting, στοιχεῖς τ. νόμον 
φυλάσσων, so walkest as to keep the law [A. V. walkest 
orderly, keeping ete.], Acts xxi. 24. [On the word and 
its constr. see Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p.142. Comp.: 
συ(ν)- στοιχέω.] * 
στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (στέλλω [q- V-] to prepare, equip, 2 pf. 
€aToAa) 1. an equipment (Aeschyl.). 2. an 
equipment in clothes, clothing; spec. a loose outer garment 
for men which extended to the feet (cf. Eng. stole (Dict. of 
Chris. Antiq. s. v.)], worn by kings (Jon. iii. 6), priests, 
and persons of rank: Mk. xii. 38; xvi.5; Lk. xv. 22; 
xx. 46; Rev. vi. 11; vii. 9,13, [14*, 14° Rec.; xxii. 14 
LT Tr WH]. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. chiefly 
for 23.) [Cf. Trench § 1.1" 
στόμα, -ros, τό, (apparently i. 4. τόμα, with o prefixed, 
fr. τέμνω, τέτομα, therefore prop. ‘cutting’ [or ‘cut’; so 
Etym. Magn. 728, 18; al. ‘calling’, ete.; but doubtful, 
ef. Curtius § 226 b.; Vanitek p. 1141 and reff.]); fr. 
Hom. down; Hebr. 73; the mouth; 1. prop. the 
mouth as a part of the body: of man, Jn. xix. 29; Acts 
xi. 8; Rev. i. 16; iii. 16, and often; of animals, —as of 
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27; of a horse, Jas. iii. 3; Rev. ix. 17; 
of aserpent, Rev. xii. 15 sq.; xiii.5; the jaws of a lion, 
2 Tim. iv. 17; Heb. xi. 33; Rev. xiii. 2. Since the 
thoughts of man’s soul find verbal utterance by his 
mouth, καρδία (‘the heart’ or soul) and στόμα ‘the 
mouth’ are distinguished: Mt. xii. 34; xv. 8 Ree. fr. Is. 
xxix. 13; Ro.x.8,10; in phrases chiefly of a Hebra- 
istic character, the mouth (as the organ of speech) is 
mentioned in connection with words and speech, Mt. xxi. 
16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3), and words are said to proceed ἐκ τοῦ 
στόματος, Mt. iv. 4 (fr. Deut. viii. 3); Lk. iv. 22; Eph. iv. 
29; Col. iii. 8; Jas. iii. 10; τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ τι, Jude 16; 
on the Hebr. phrase ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα, see ἀνοίγω, p. 485 
bot. ἡ ἄνοιξις τοῦ στ. Eph. vi. 19; στόμα πρὸς στόμα 
λαλῆσαι (τ|3- γὲ 719 Ἴ31, Num. xii. 8) lit. mouth (turned) 
to mouth, [A. V. face to face], 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 14, (τὸ 
στόμα πρὸς τὸ στόμα, of a kiss, Xen. mem. 2, 6, 32); 
God or the Holy Spirit is said to speak διὰ τοῦ στόματός 
τινος [cf. B. 183 (159)], Lk. i. 70; Actsi. 16; iii. 18,°21; 
iv. 25; or a person is said to heara thing διὰ στόματός τ. 
Acts xv. 7; or ἀπὸ τοῦ στ. τ. from his own mouth i. e. what 
he has just said, Lk. xxii. 715 or ἐκ τ. στ. Acts xxii. 143 
θηρεῦσαί τι ἐκ τ. στ. τ. Lk. xi. 54; τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ στ- [the 
breath of his mouth, see πνεῦμα, 1 Ὁ.1, 2 ΤῊ. ii. 8 (Ps. χχχίϊ. 
(xxxiii.) 6, ef. Is. xi 4); ἡ ῥομφαία τοῦ στ. a fig. por- 
traying the destructive power of the words of Christ 
the judge, Rev. ii. 16; δόλος or ψεῦδος ἐν τῷ στ.» 1 Pet. 
ii. 22 and Rev. xiv. 5, (fr. Is. lili. 9); στόμα is put for 
‘statements’, declarations, in Mt. xviii. 16 and 2 Co. xiii, 


στόμαχος 


1, (Deut. xix. 15); Lk. xix. 22 (Eccl. viii. 2). διδόναι 
τινὶ στόμα, apt forms of speech (as distinguished from 
the substance of speech, ἡ σοφία), Lk. xxi. 15; στόμα 
for one who has begun (or is about) to speak, Ro. iii. 19 
(Ps. evi. (cvii-) 42; ef. πᾶν γόνυ and πᾶσα γλῶσσα, Phil. 
ii. 10 sq. fr. Is. xlv. 23); metaph. the earth is said to 
open its mouth and καταπίνειν τι, Rev. xii. 16. 2 
Like Lat. acies, στόμα μαχαίρας, the edge of the sword 
(a.n-5, Gen. xxxiv. 26; [Josh. xix. 48; Jer. xxi. 7, 
ete.]; Judg. xviii. 27, ete.; 2S. xv. 14 [but in the last 
two pass. the Sept. render the Hebr. phrase by στ. 
ῥομφαίας, which (together with or. ξίφους) is the more 
common translation; cf. W. 18, 30; B. 320 (274) n.J): 
Lk. xxi. 24; Heb. xi. 34, (hence δίστομος, 4. v-; 928 of 
a sword, 2 S. ii. 26; xi. 25). 

στόμαχος, -ov, 6, (στόμα, q- V-); 1. the throat: 
Hom., al. 2. an opening, orifice, esp. of the stomach, 
Aristot. 3. in later writ. (as Plut., al.) the stomach: 
1 Tim. v. 23.* 

στρατεία, -as, ἡ, (στρατεύω), an expedition, campaign ; 
military service, warfare: Paul likens his contest with the 
difficulties that oppose him in the discharge of his apo- 
stolic duties to a warfare, 2 Co. x. 4 (where Tdf. στρατιᾶς, 
see his note); 1 Tim. i. 18. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)] * 

στράτευμα, -τος, τό, (στρατεύω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt. 
down; a. an army: Mt. xxii. 7; Rev. ix. 16; xix. 
14 [ef. W. § 59, 4a.], 19. Ὁ. a band of soldiers [R.V. 
soldiers]: Acts xxiii. 10, 27. c. body-guard, guards- 
men: plur. Lk. xxiii. 11 [R. V. soldiers].* 

στρατεύω: Mid., pres. στρατεύομαι; 1 aor. subjunc. 2 
pers. sing. στρατεύσῃ (1 Tim. i. 18 T Tr txt. WH mrg.); 
(στρατός [related to στρωννύω, q. v-], an encampment, an 
army); fr. Hdt. down; to make a military expedition, to 
lead soldiers to war or to battle, (spoken of a commander); 
to do military duty, be on active service, be a soldier; in 
the N. T. only in the mid. (Grk. writ. use the act. and 
the depon. mid. indiscriminately; ef. Passow s. y. 1 fin. ; 
[L. and 5. 5. ν. I. 2]): prop. of soldiers, Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co. 
ix. 7; 2Tim.ii.4; to fight, [Α΄ V. war]: trop. of the 
conflicts of the apostolic office, 2 Co. x. 3; with a kin- 
dred ace. [W. § 32, 2; B.§ 131, 5], τὴν καλὴν στρατείαν, 
1 Tim. i. 18 (ἱερὰν x. εὐγενῆ στρατείαν στρατεύσασθαι 
περὶ τῆς εὐσεβείας, 4 Mace. ix. 23); of passions that dis- 
quiet the soul, Jas. iv. 1; 1 Pet. ii.11. [Come.: ἀντι- 
otparevouat. | * 

στρατηγός, -ov, 6, (στρατός and ἄγω), fr. Hdt. down, 
Sept. chiefly for 12 [only plur. 0°310]; 1. the 
commander of an army. 2. in the N. T. a civic 
commander, a governor, (the name of the duumviri or 
highest magistrates in the municipia and colonies; they 
had the power of administering justice in the less im- 
portant cases; of τῆς πόλεως στρατηγοί, Artem. oneir. 4, 
49; of civil magistrates as early as Hdt.5, 38; [see reff. 
in Meyer on Acts xvi. 20; L. and S. s. v. II. 2 86.; cf. 
Farrar, St. Paul, i. excurs. xvi.]): plur. [R. V. magis- 
trates (after A.V.), with mrg. Gr. pretors], Acts xvi. 20, 
22, 35 sq. [38]. 3. στρατ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ‘captain of the 
temple’ [A.V.], i. e. the commander of the Levites who 


590 


στρέφω 


kept guard in and around the temple (Joseph. antt. 20, 
6, 2; [Β. Ὁ. 8. ν. Captain, 3; Edersheim, The Temple ete. 
ch. vii., 2ed. p. 119sq.]) : Acts iv. 1; v. 24; plur. Lk. xxii. 
52; simply [A. V. captain], Acts y. 26; Lk. xxii. 4.* 

στρατιά, -Gs, ἡ, (στρατός [οἷ. otparevw]), fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hat. down, Sept. for RIS; 1. an army, band 
of soldiers. 2. sometimes in the poets i. q. στρατεία, 
as Arstph. eqq. 587 (ἐν στρατιαῖς τε καὶ μάχαις), 2 Co. x. 
4 Tdf. after the best codd. ({see his note; cf. L. and 8. 
s. v. II.]; Passow 8. v. στρατεία, fin.). 3. in the 
N. T. ἡ οὐράνιος στρατιά, or ἡ στρατ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Hebr. 
Ὁ ΤΊ Ns), the host of heaven (see δύναμις, f.), i. 6. a. 
troops of angels (1 K. xxii. 19; Neh. ix. 6): Lk.ii.13. — b. 
the heavenly bodies, stars of heaven, (so called on account 
of their number and their order): Acts vii. 42 (2 Chr. 
xxxill. 3,5; Jer. viii. 2, etc.).* 

στρατιώτης, -ov, 6, (fr. στρατιός [(cf. στρατεύω)], like 
ἡλιώτης, κλοιώτης, ἠπειρώτης), fr. Hdt. down, a (common) 
soldier: Mt. viii. 9; Mk. xv. 16; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix. 
2; Acts x. 7; xii. 4, ete.; with the addition of Ἰησοῦ 
Χριστοῦ, metaph., a champion of the cause of Christ, 
2 Tim. ii. 3. 

στρατολογέω, τῶ: to be a orparodoyos (and this fr. 
στρατός and λέγω), to gather (collect) an army, to enlist 
soldiers: ὁ στρατολογήσας, [he that enrolled (him) as a 
soldier}, of the commander, 2 Tim. ii. 4. (Diod., Dion. 
Hal., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

στρατοπεδάρχης, -ov, ὁ, (στρατόπεδον and ἄρχω), [cf. 
B. 73 (64)7; a. the commander of a camp and army, 
a military tribune: Dion. Hal. 10, 36 ; Leian. hist. conser. 
22; [Joseph. b. j. 2, 19, 4]. b. Praetorian prefect, 
commander of the praetorian cohorts, i. 6. captain of the 
Roman emperor’s body-guard: Acts xxviii. 16 [LT 
Tr WH om. the cl., see Abbot in B.D., Am. ed., s. v. 
Captain of the Guard]. There were two praetorian pre- 
fects, to whose custody prisoners sent bound to the em- 
peror were consigned: Joseph. antt. 18, 6,6; Plin. epp. 
10, 65 (57). [See B. D. Am. ed. u.s.; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Phil. p. 7 sq.]* 

[στρατοπέδ-αρχος, -ov, 6; see the preceding word. The 
dat. -y@ is the reading of some codd. (cf. WH rejected 
mrg.) in Acts xxviii. 16; cf. ἑκατοντάρχης, init.* ] 

στρατό-πεδον, -ov, τό, (στρατός, and πέδον a plain), fr. 
Hdt. down ; a. a military camp. b. soldiers 
in camp, an army: Lk. xxi. 20.* 

στρεβλόω, -ὥ ; (στρεβλός [fr. στρέφω] twisted, Lat. tor- 
tuosus; hence στρέβλη, fem., an instrument of torture) ; 
to twist, turn awry, (Hdt.); to torture, put to the rack, 
(Arstph., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 3 Mace. iv. 14); 
metaph. to pervert, of one who wrests or tortures lan- 
guage to a false sense, 2 Pet. iii. 16.* 

στρέφω: 1 aor. ἔστρεψα; Pass., pres. στρέφομαι 2 
aor. ἐστράφην; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 337, also for 
31D, ete. ; to turn, turn round : τί τινι, to turn a thing to 
one, Mt. v. 39,and T Tr WH in xxvii. 3 [for ἀποστρέφω, 
to bring back ; see ἀποστρέφω, 2]; reflexively (W. § 38, 
1; Β. § 130, 4), to turn one’s self (i.e. to turn the back 
to one: used of one who no longer cares for another), 


στρηνιάω 


Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 469 (437)]; τὲ εἴς τι; iq. μεταστρέφω, 
to turn one thing into another, Rev. xi. 6. 
ively, to turn one’s self: στραφείς foll. by a finite verb, 
having turned etc., Mt. vii.6; [ix. 221, TTrWH]; xvi. 
23> Lk. vil. 5; ix. 55; xiv. 25; xxii. 61; Jn. 1.383 xx. 
16 ; στραφεὶς πρός twa, foll. by a fin. verb, [turning unto 
etc., or urned unto and ete. ], Lk. vii. 44; x. 21 (22) [R* L 
ΤΊ, 23; xxiii. 28; στρέφεσθαι εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, to turn one’s 
self back, Jn. xx. 14; εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, Acts xiii. 46; ἐστράφη- 
σαν (ἐν LT TrWH) ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον, 
[R.V. they turned back in their hearts unto Egypt] i.e. to 
their condition there, Acts vii. 39; absol. and trop. to 
turn one’s self sc. from one’s course of conduct, i.e. to 
change one’s mind [cf. W.u.s.]: Mt. xviii. 3 and LT 
Tr WH in Jn. xii. 40. [Comp.: dva-, ἀπο-, δια-, éx-, ἐπι-» 
kata-, μετα-, συ(ν)-, ὗπο- στρέφω. * 

στρηνιάω, -@: 1 aor ἐστρηνίασα ; (fr. στρῆνος, 4. ν.); ἃ 
word used in middle and later Comedy for τρυφᾶν 
(ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 381; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 
475 sq.; W.25]); to be wanton, to live lururiously: Rev. 
xviii. 7,9. [Come.: xara-orpnuda.|* 

στρῆνος, -ous, τό, [allied w. στερεός, 4. v-], excessive 
strength which longs to break forth, over-strength ; luxury, 
[R. V. wantonness (mrg. lurury)]: Rev. xviii. 3 (see 
δύναμις, d.); for jINW, arrogance, 2 K. xix. 28 ; eager de- 
sire, Lycophr. 438.* 

στρουθίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of στρουθός, a little hird, esp. 
of the sparrow sort, a sparrow: Mt. x. 29, 31; Lk. xii. 
6 sq. (Aristot. h. a. 5, 2 p. 539>, 33; 9, 7 p. 6135, 33; 
Sept. for Wax.) [Cf Tristram in B.D. 5. v. Sparrow; 
Survey of West. Palest., ‘Fauna and Flora’, p. 67sq.]* 

στρωννύω, or στρώννυμι : impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐστρώννυον 
[ef. B. 45 (39)]; laor. ἔστρωσα; pf. pass. ptep. ἐστρω- 
pevos; (by metathesis fr. στόρνυμι, στορέννυμι, and this 
fr. ΣΤΟΡΕΩ; [cf. Lat. sterno, struo, ete.; Eng. strew, 
straw, ete.]; see Curtius § 227) ; lo spread: ἱμάτια ἐν τῇ 
ὁδῷ, Mt. xxi. 8; εἰς τ. ὁδόν, MK. xi. 8, (πέδον πεδάσμασι, 
Aeschyl. Ag. 909; εἴμασι πόρον, ib. 921). sc. τὴν κλίνην 
(which Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down often add, and also 
λέχος, λέκτρον, ete. [ef. W. 594 (552); Β. § 130, 5]) revi, 
Acts ix. 34 [A.V. make thy hed]; to spread with couches 
or divans τὸ ἀνάγαιον, pass. [A. V. furnished], Mk. xiv. 
15; Lk. xxii. 12. [Comp.: xara-, ὗπο- στρώννυμι. * 

στυγητός, -dv, (orvyew to hate), hated, Aeschyl. Prom. 
592; detestable [A. V. hateful]: Tit. iii. 3; στυγητὸν κ. 
θεομισητὸν πρᾶγμα, of adultery, Philo de decal. § 24 fin.; 
ἔρως, Lleliod. 5, 29.* 

orvyvatw; 1 aor. ptep. στυγνάσας ; (στυγνός sombre, 
gloomy); to be sad, to he sorrowful: prop. ἐπί τινι [R.V. 
his countenance fell at etc.], Mk. x. 22; metaph. of the 
sky covered with clouds [A. V. to be ‘owering], Mt. xvi. 
8 [Τ br. WH reject the pass.]. (Schol. on Aeschyl. 
Pers. 470; Sept. thrice for Ὁ, to be amazed, aston- 
ished, ἐπί twa, Ezek. xxvii. 35; xxxii. 10; στυγνότης, of 
the gloominess of the sky, Polyb. 4, 21, 1.) * 

στύλος [RG WH (Trin 1 Tim. iii. 15; Rev. x. 1)], 
more correctly στῦλος [so L T (Tr in Gal. ii. 9; Rev. iii. 
12)]; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. fin. [ef. Chandler 


591 


| 
Pass. reflex- 


Gt 


| §§ 274, 275; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 43], -ov, 6, [fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], Sept. often for 13D, a piliar, 
column: στῦλοι πυρός, pillars of fire, i.e. flames rising 
like columns, Rev. x. 1; ποιήσω αὐτὸν στῦλον ἐν τῷ ναῷ 
τοῦ θεοῦ pov, i. 6. (dropping the fig.) I will assign him a 
firm and abiding place in the everlasting kingdom of 
God, Rev. iii. 12; used of persons to whose eminence 
and strength the stability and authority of any institu- 
tion or organization are due, Gal. ii. 9 [where cf. Bp. 
Lghtft.]; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 2 and the note in Geb- 
hardt and Harnack, (στῦλοι οἴκων εἰσὶ παῖδες ἄρσενες, 
Eur. Iph. T. 57; exx. fr. [Jewish writ. are given by 
Schoettgen (on Gal. |. c.) and fr.] eccles. writ. by Suicer, 
Thes. ii. p. 1045 sq.; columen reipublicae, Cic. pro Sest. 
8, 19, and often elsewh. in Lat. auth.); @ prop or sup- 
port: τῆς ἀληθείας, 1 Tim. iii. 15.* 

Στωϊκός [( WH Στωικός), L T Στοῖκός, see Tdf.’s note 
on Acts as below; WH. App. p. 152], τή, -dv, Stoic, per- 
taining to the Stoie philosophy, the author of which, 
Zeno of Citium, taught at Athens in the portico called 
ἡ ποικίλη στοά: οἱ Στωϊκοὶ φιλόσοφοι, Acts xvii. 18. 
[(Diog. Laért. 7, 5; al.)]* 

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. 
Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are 
enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is 
written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. 
(exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts 
xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; 
xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; 
Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 
30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 
39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. 
[W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., 
vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς 
are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ 
Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), 
Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, 
etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39; — or when the pron. 
has a noun ora ptep. added to it in apposition in order to 
define it more sharply, as σὺ ᾿Ιουδαῖος ὧν (thou, being a 
Jew), Jn. iv. 9, cf. Gal. ii. 14; ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὄντες, Mt. vii. 
11;—or when several are addressed who are at the 
same time particularized, ov... σύ, Jas. ii. 3; also in 
antithesis, Mt. iii. 14; vi. 17; xi. 3; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. 
xvi. 7; Jn. ii. 10; 111. 2; Acts x. 15; 1 Co. iii. 23; Jas. 
ii. 18, and very often; sometimes the antithetic term is 
suppressed, but is easily understood from the context: 
εἰ σὺ εἶ, if it be thou, and not an apparition, Mt. xiv. 28 ; 
add, Lk. xv. 31; xvii. 8, ete.; —or when a particle is 
added, as σὺ οὖν (at the close of an argument, when the 
discourse reverts to the person to be directly addressed), 
Lk. iv. 7; Jn. viii. 5; Acts xxiii. 21; 2 Tim.ii.1,3; od 
δέ (in contrasts), Lk. ix. 60; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Tit. ii. 1; 
Heb. i. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mt. xxi. 13; Jas. ii. 6; καὶ σύ, 
and thou, thou also, thou too, Mt. xi. 23; xxvi. 69, 73; 
Lk. x.15; xix. 19, 42; xxii. 58; plur., Mt. xv. 3,16; Lk. 
xvii. 10; before the 2d pers. of the verb where the per- 
son is to be emphasized (like the Germ. du, thr eben, du 


συγγένεια 


da, ‘it is thou,’ ‘thou art the very man,’ etc.), σὺ εἶ, Mt. 
xxvil. 11; Mk. xv. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3; Jn.i. 19; iii. 10; iv. 
12; viii. 53; Acts xxiii. 3, ete.; plur. Lk. ix. 55 Ree. ; 
σὺ λέγεις, εἶπας, Mt. xxvi. 25; xxvii. 11; Mk. xv. 2; it 
is used also without special emphasis ([ef. B. § 129, 12, 
and] see ἐγώ, 1), Mk. xiv.68; Jn. viii. 13; Acts vii. 28, ete. 
The genitives σοῦ and ὑμῶν, joined to substantives, 
have the force of a possessive, and are placed —some- 
times after the noun, as τὸν πόδα σου, Mt. iv. 6; τοὺς 
ἀδελφοὺς ὑμῶν, Mt. v. 47, and very often; —sometimes 
before the noun (see ἐγώ, 3 b.), as σοῦ αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, Lk. vii. 
48; σοῦ τῆς vedrntos, 1 Tim. iv. 12; ὑμῶν δὲ καὶ τρίχες» 
Mt. x. 30; add, Mk. x. 43 [here Ree. after]; Lk. xii. 
30; Jn. xvi. 6; Ro. xiv. 16; 2 Co. i. 24 [here now be- 
fore, now after] ;—sometimes between the article and 
noun, as τὴν ὑμῶν ἐπιπόθησιν, 2 Co. vii. 7; add, 2 Co. viii. 
14 (13), 14; xiii. 9; Phil. i. 19, 25; ii. 30; Col. 1. 8. ἔσται 
gov πάντα (raoa), Lk. iv. 7 [ef. B. § 132, 11, 1. 8.1. It 
is added to the pronoun αὐτός : σοῦ αὐτῆς, Lk. ii. 35. 
On the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί. see ἐγώ,4. [(Ετ. Hom.on.)] 

συγγένεια, -ας, ἧ, (συγγενής), fr. Eur.and Thue. down; 
[Sept.] ; a. kinship, relationship. b. kindred, 
relations collectively, family: Lk.i.61; Acts vii. 3, 14.* 

συγγενής, -és, [ace. sing. συγγενῆ, and in Rom. xvi. 11 
Treg. συγγενῆν ; see ἄρσην], dat. plur. συγγενέσιν and 
(in Mk. vi. 4 T Tr [WH, also in Lk. ii. 44 WII] ace. to 
a barbarous declens., ef. [1 Mace. x. 89] B. 25 (22)) 
συγγενεῦσιν, (σύν and γένος), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl. down; 
Sept.], of the same kin, akin to, related by blood, (Plin. 
congener): Mk. vi. 4; Lk. ii. 44; xxi. 16; τινός, Lk. [i. 
58]; xiv. 12; Jn. xviii. 26; Acts x. 24; Ro. xvi. 7, 11, 21, 
[see below]; ἡ συγγ- Lk. i. 36 αὶ G Tr (Lev. xviii. 14) ; 
in a wider sense, of the same race, a fellow-countryman: 
Ro. ix. 3 [(so some take the word in xvi. 7, 11, 21, above; 
ef. Bp, Lghtft. on Philippians p. 175) ].* 

συγγενίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (see the preceding word), a later Grk. 
word ([Plut. quaest. Rom. 6]; like edyevis, cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 451 sq.; cf. W. 69 (67) ; Kithner i. p. 419 Anm. 
8), a kinswoman: τινός, Lk. i. 861, Τ ΝΗ." 

συγ-γνόμη [T WH ovry., cf. σύν, IT. fin.], -ης, ἡ, (ovy- 
γιγνώσκω, to agree with, to pardon; see γνώμη), fr. [Soph. 
and] 1141. down, pardon, indulgence: κατὰ συγγνώμην. οὐ 
κατ᾽ ἐπιταγήν, by way of concession or permission, not by 
way of command, 1 Co. vii. 6.* 

συγ-κάθημαι [ WH ovr (cf. σύν, Π. fin.)]; fr. Hdt. 
down; [Sept.]; to sit together, to sit with another: pera 
twos, Mk. xiv. 54; revi, with one, Acts xxvi. 30.” 

συγ-καθίζω [TWH συν- (ef. σύν, II. fin.)]: 1 aor. συν- 
exabiaa; (see καθίζων ; a. trans. to cause to sit down 
together, place together: τινά, foll. by ἐν with a dat. of the 
place, Eph. ii. 6. Ὁ. intrans. to sit down together: 
Lk. xxii. 55 [where Lehm. txt. περικαθ.]. (Xen., Aris- 
tot., Plut., al.; Sept.) * 

συγ-κακοπαθέω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)],-d: 1 aor. 
impv. συγκακοπάθησον ; (see κακοπαθέω)ν ; to suffer hard- 
ships together with one: 2 Tim. ii. 3 LT Tr WH; witha 
dat. com. added, τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, for the benefit of the gos- 
pel, to further it, 2 Tim. i. 8. (Eccles. writ.) * 


592 


συγκεράννυμε 


συγ-κακουχέω [TWH συν- (οἴ. σύν, II. ἢπ.}], -ῶ : pres. 
pass. inf. -χεῖσθαι; to treat ill with another; pass. to be 
ill-treated in company with, share persecutions or come 
into a fellowship of ills: τινί, with one, Heb. xi. 25. Not 
found elsewhere.* 

συγ-καλέω [T WIT συν- (ef. σύν, 11. fin.)], -ῶ ; 1 aor. cum 
ἐκάλεσα; Mid., pres. συγκαλοῦμαι ; 1 aor. συνεκαλεσάμην; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. ἴον 81); to call together, assemble: 
twas, Lk. xv. 6 [here Tr mrg. has pres. mid.]; τὴν σπεῖ- 
ραν, Mk. xv. 16; τὸ συνέδριον, Acts v. 21; mid. fo call to- 
gether to one’s self [ef. B. § 135, 5): twas, Lk. ix.1; xv. 
[6 Trmrg.], 9 [RGL Tr txt.]; xxiii. 13; Acts x. 24; 
XXviii. 17.” 

συγ-καλύπτω [ (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]: pf. pass. ptep. συγκεκα- 
λυμμένος ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 753; to cover on all 
sides, to conceal entirely, to cover up completely: ri, pass., 
Lk. xii. 2.° 

συγ-κάμπτω [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)]: 1 aor. impv. 
σύγκαμψον ; lo bend together, to bend completely: τὸν νῶτόν 
τινος, [A. V. to bow down one’s back] i.e. metaph. to sub- 
Ject one to error and hardness of heart, a fig. taken from 
the bowing of the back by captives compelled to pass 
under the yoke, Ro. xi. 10, fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24. 
(Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) * 

συγ-κατα-βαίνω [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]: 2 aor. 
ptep. plur. συγκαταβάντες ; [0 go down with: of those who 
descend together from a higher place to a lower, as from 
Jerusalem to Cxsarea, Acts xxv. 5. (Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 
18; Sap.x. 14; Aeschyl., Eur., Thue., Polyb., Plut., al. ; 
ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 398; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 
485].)* 

συγ-κατάτθθεσις [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)], -ews, ἡ, 
(συγκατατίθημι, q.v-), prop. a putting together or joint 
deposit (of votes) ; hence approval, assent, agreement, [Cic. 
acad. 2, 12, 37 adsensio atque adprobatio]: 2 Co. vi. 16. 
(Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) * 

συγ-κατα-τίθημι [T WH ovr (ef. σύν, II. fin.)]: Mid., 
pres. ptep. συγκατατιθέμενος or pf. ptep. συγκατατεθειμένος 
(see below) ; to deposit together with another ; Mid. prop. 
to deposit one’s vote in the urn with another (ψῆφον τιθέναι), 
hence to consent to, agree with, vote for: τῇ βουλῇ x. τῇ 
πράξει τινός, Lk. xxiii. 51 [here L mrg.T Trmrg. WIL 
mrg. pres. ptep., al. pf. ptep.]. (Ex. xxiii. 1, 32; Plat. 
Gorg. p. 501 c., Isae., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

συγ-κατα-ψηφίζω [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, IL. fin.)]: 1 aor. 
pass. συγκατεψηφίσθην ; 1. by depositing (xara) 
a ballot in the urn (i.e. by voting for) to assign one 
a place among (σύν), to vole one a place among: τινὰ 
2. mid. to vote against with 
Not 


μετά τινων, Acts i. 26. 
others, i.e. to condemn with others: Plut. Them. 21. 
found elsewhere.* 

συγ-κεράννυμι [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.)j: 1 aor. 
συνεκέρασα; pf. pass. ptep. συγκεκραμένος and in LT Tr 
WH ovyrexepacpévos [see κεράννυμι, init.]; fr. [Aeschyl., 
Soph.], Hdt. down; to mix together, commingle; to unite: 
συνεκ. τὸ σῶμα, caused the several parts to combine into 
an organic structure, which is the body, [A.V. tempered 
the body together], 1 Co. xii. 24; τί τινι, to unite ons 


ουγκινέω 


thing to another: οὐκ ὠφέλησεν ... μὴ συγκεκραμένος 
[so ΒΑ T ΜῊ mrg., but LTr WH tat. -vous] - - - ἀκού- 
σασιν, ‘the word heard did not profit them, because it 
had not united itself by faith to [ef. W. $31, 10; B. 
§ 133, 13] them that heard,’ i. e. because the hearers had 
not by their faith let it find its way into their minds 
and made it their own; [or, acc. to the text of L Tr WH 
(Ri. V.), ‘because they had not been united by faith with 
them that heard ’], Heb. iv. 2." 

συγ-κινέω, -@: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. συνεκίνησαν ; to move 
together with others [Aristot.]; lo throw inlo commotion, 
excite, stir up: tov λαόν, Acts vi. 12. (Polyb., Plut., 
Longin., al.) * 

συγ-κλείω [TWH ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]: 1 aor. συν- 
ἔκλεισα; Pass., pres. ptep. συγ-(συν-)κλειόμενος, Gal. iii. 23 
LT Tr WU; but RGibid. pf. ptep. -κεκλεισμένος ; fr. IIdt. 
down; Sept. chiefly for 73) and 1137, fo shut up, (Lat. 
concludo), i. e. a. to shut up logether, enclose, [so 
s. v. σύν, II. 2; but others (6. g. Fritzsche as below; 
Meyer on Gal. iii. 22) would make the ov» always 
intensive, asin b.]: a shoal of fishes in a net, Lk. v. 
6. b. to shut up on all sides, shut up completely; 
τινὰ εἴς τινα or τι, so to deliver one up to the power 
of a person or thing that he is completely shut in, as it 
were, without means of escape: τινὰ εἰς ἀπείθειαν, Ro. 
xi. 32 (εἰς ἀγῶνα, Polyb. 3, 63, 3; εἰς τοιαύτην ἀμηχανίαν 
συγκλεισθεὶς ᾿Αντίγονος μετεμέλετο, Diod. 19,19; οὐ συνέ- 
κλεισάς με εἰς χεῖρας ἐχθροῦ, Ps. xxx. (ΧΧΧΙ.) 9; τὰ κτήνη 
εἰς θάνατον, Ps. ᾿ἰχχνῖ!. (Ixxviii.) 50; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. 
ad Rom. ii. p. 545 sq.); also τινὰ ὑπό τι, under the power 
of anything, i. e. so that he is held completely subject 
to it: ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν, Gal. iii. 22 (the Scripture has shut 
up or subjected, i.e. declared them to be subject) ; sc. 
ὑπὸ νόμον, with the addition of εἰς τὴν μέλλουσαν πίστιν 
ἀποκαλυφθῆναι, ib. 23 (see above ad init.) ; on these 
words see εἰς, B. II. 3 ο. y. p. 185° bot.* 

συγ-κληρο-νόμος | T WH συν- (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ], -ov, 6, ἡ, 
a fellow-heir, a joint-heir, (ἀνεψιὸς καὶ συγκληρονόμος, Philo, 
leg. ad Gaium 810), (see κληρονύμος 1 b.) : Ro. viii. 17; 
Eph. iii. 6; one who obtains something assigned to him- 
self with others, a joint participant (see κληρονόμος, 2) : 
with the gen. of the thing, Heb. xi.9; 1 Pet. iii. 7. Not 
found elsewhere.* 

συγ-κοινωνέω [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, 1. fin.)],-4; 1 aor. 
subj. 2 pers. plur. συγκοινωνήσητε, ptcp. nom. plur. masc. 
συγκοινωνήσαντες ; to become a partaker together with oth- 
ers, or lohave fellowship with a thing: with a dat. of the 
thing, Eph. v.11; Phil. iv. 14; Rev. xviii. 4. (witha 
gen. of the thing, Dem. p. 1299, 20; τινί τινος, Dio Cass. 
37, 41; ΤΊ, 16.)* 

συγ-κοινωνός [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ], -όν, partici- 
pant with others in (anything), joint partner: with a gen. 
of the thing [cf. W. § 30, 8 a.], Ro. xi. 17; 1 Co. ix. 23; 
with the addition of the gen. of the pers. with whom one 
is partaker of a thing, Phil.i.7; foll. by ἐν with a dat. 
of tne thing, Rev. i. 9." 

ovy-konifw: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. συνεκόμισαν; 1. 
# carry or bring together, to collect [see σύν, I. 2]; to 

38 


593 


συγχέω 


house crops, gather into granaries: Hdt., Xen., Diod., 
Plut., al.; Job v. 26. 2. to carry with others, help nm 
carrying out, the dead to be burned or buried (Soph. 
Aj. 1048; Plut. Sull. 38); to bury: Acts viii. 2.* 
συγ-κρίνω [TWH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ]; 1 aor. inf. συγ- 
κρῖναι; 1. to join together filly, compound, combine, 
(Epicharm. in Plut. mor. p.110a.; Plat., Aristot., al.): 
πνευματικοῖς πνευματικά, 1 Co. ii. 13 (for Paul, in deliver- 
ing the things disclosed to him by the Ioly Spirit in 
speech derived not from rhetorical instruction but re- 
ceived from the same divine Spirit, ‘combines spiritual 
things with spiritual’, adapts the discourse to the 
subject; other interpretations are refuted by Meyer 
ad loc.; πνευματικοῖς is neut.; [but others would take it 
as masc. and give ovyx. the meaning to interpret (R. V. 
marg. interpreting spuritual things to spiritual men); cf. 
Sept. Gen. xl. 8, 16, 22; xli. 12,15; Judg. vii.15; Dan. 
v. 12, ete.; see Heinrici in Meyer 6te Aufl.]}). 2. ace. 
to a use foreign to the earlier Greeks (who used παρα- 
βάλλω), but freq. fr. the time of Aristotle on (cf. Passow 


| s.v.2; [L. and 5. 5. ν. 11.1; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 278 sq.; 


[W. 23 (22)]), to compare: ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς, 2 Co. x. 12 
(Sap. vii. 29; xv. 18).* 

συγικύπτω [TWH ovr (ef. σύν, II. fin.)]; [fr. Hdt. 
down]; to bend completely forwards, to be bowed together, 
[ef. σύν, 11. 3]: by disease, Lk. xiii. 11. ([Job ix. 27]; 
Sir. xii. 11; xix. 26.) * 

συγκυρία, -as, 7), (συγκυρεῖν, to happen, turn out), acci- 
dent, chance: κατὰ συγκυρίαν, by chance, accidentally, 
Lk. x. 81. (Hippocer.; eccles. and Byzant. writ.; Grk. 
writ. fr. Polyb. down more com. use συγκύρησις and ovy- 
κύρημα [W. 24].) * 

συγ-χαίρω [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.) ]; impf. συνέχαι- 
pov; 2 aor. συνεχάρην [ pass. as act., so Veitch (s. v. χαίρω) 
ete.; al. act., after the analogy of verbs in -μι]; to rejoice 
with, take part in another’s joy, (Aeschyl., Arstph., Xen., 
al.): with a dat. of the pers. with whom one rejoices, 
Lk. i. 58 (cf. 14); xv. 6,9; with a dat. of the thing, 1 Co. 
xiii. 6; lo rejoice together, of many, 1 Co. xii. 26; to con- 
gratulate (Aeschin., Polyb., [Plut.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on 
Phil. as below; 3 Macc. i. 8; Barn. ep. 1, 3 (and Miller 
ad loc.)]): with the dat. of the pers. Phil. ii. 17 sq.* 

συγ-χέω, συγ-χύνω, and συγ-χύννω, [T WH our (cf. 
σύν, II. fin.)] (see ἐκχέω, init.): impf., 3 pers. sing. cuve- 
xuve (Acts ix. 22 RG Τῷ ΤΥ, τχυννεν T WH), 3 pers. plur. 
συνέχεον (Acts xxi. 27 RGT Tr WH [but some would 
make this a 2 aor., see reff. 5. v. éxxew, init.]); 1 aor. 
3 pers. plur. συνέχεαν (Acts xxi. 27 L [see ἐκχέω, init.]); 
Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. cvy(T WH συν-)χύννεται (Acts 
xxi. 31 LT Tr WH); pf. 3 pers. sing. συγκέχυται (Acts 
xxi. 31 RG), ptep. fem. cvy(T WH συν-)κεχυμένη (Acts 
xix. 32 RGLTTr WH); 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. συνεχύθη 
(Acts ii. 6 RGLTTr WH); fr. Hom. down; to pour 
together, commingle: ἦν ἡ ἐκκλησία συγκεχυμένη, Was irreg- 
ularly assembled [4]. ‘in confusion’], Acts xix. 32; to 
disturb, τινά, the mind of one, to stir up to tumult or out- 
break, Acts xxi. 27, 31; to confound or bewilder, Acts ii 
6; ix. 22.° 


συγχράομαι 


ovy-xpdopar [T WH συν-], -ὥῶμαι ; to use with any one, 
use jointly, (Polyb., Diod., [Philo]); with the dat. of a 
pers., fo associate with, to have dealings with: Jn. iv. 9 
[Tdf. om. WH br. the el. οὐ yap . . . Sapap.].* 

συγ-χύνω and συγχύννω, see συγχέω. 

σύγιχυσις, -εως, ἡ, (συγχέω), [fr. Eur., Thue., Plat. 
down], confusion, disturbance: of riotous persons, Acts 
ΕΣ. 29. (1 9. γ᾿ 11). 

συϊζάω [LT Tr WH συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)]; fut. συ- 
ζήσω; to live together with one [ef. σύν, I. 1]: of physical 
life on earth, opp. to συναποθανεῖν, 2 Co. vii. ὃ ; τῷ Χριστῷ, 
to live a new life in union with the risen Christ, i. e. a 
life dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 8, ef. De Wette [or Meyer 
ad loe.]; to live a blessed life with him after death, 
2 Tim. ii. 11. (Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) * 

συ-ζεύγνυμι: 1 aor. cuvetevéa; fr. Eur. and Xen. down; 
prop. to fasten to one yoke, yoke together: ἵππους, Xen. 
Cyr. 2, 2, 26; trop. to join together, unite : ri or τινά, of the 
marriage tie, Mt. xix.6; Mk. x. 9, (νόμος συζευγνὺς ἄνδρα 
καὶ γυναῖκα, Xen. oec. 7, 30, and often so in Grk. writ.).* 

ov-{ytéw [LT Tr WH ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ],-@; impf. 
3 pers. sing. συνεζήτει; a. to seek or examine together 
(Plat.). b. in the N. T. to discuss, dispute, [ques- 
tion (A. V. often) ]: absol., [Mk. xii. 28]; Lk. xxiv. 15; 
τινί, with one, Mk. viii. 11; ix. 14 [RGL]; Acts vi. 9; 
in the same sense πρός twa, Mk. ix. [14 T Tr WH], 16 
(where read πρὸς αὐτούς, not with Rec." G πρὸς at- 
τούς [see αὑτοῦ, p. 87]); Actsix. 29; πρὸς ἑαυτούς [L Tr 
WH ure. or zp. αὑτούς Ree οἷς G] equiv. to πρὸς ἀλλή- 
λους, Mk. i. 27 [where T WH txt. simply αὐτούς as subj. ]; 
πρὸς ἑαυτούς with the addition of an indirect quest. τὸ ris 
ete. with the optat. [ef. B. § 139, 60; W. § 41 Ὁ. 4 ο.1, 
Lk. xxii. 23; τί, with the indic., Mk. ix. 10.* 

συ-ζήτησις [συν- L Trmrg. (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -ews, 7, 
(cutnréw), mutual questioning, disputation, discussion : 
Acts xv. 2 Rec., 7 RG LTrmrg.; xxviii. 29 yet GLT 
Tr WH om. the vs. (Cic. ad fam. 16, 21,4; Philo, opif. 
mund. § 17 fin. [(var. lect.) ; quod det. pot. § 1]; legg. 
alleg. 3, 45.) * 

συ ητητής [LT Tr WH ovr (cf. σύν, 11. fin.) ], -οῦ, ὁ, 
(συζητέω), a disputer, i.e. a learned disputant, sophist : 
1 Co. i. 20. (Ignat. ad Eph. 18 [quotation ].) * 

ot-tuyos [L T Tr WH συν- (cf. σύν, IL. fin.) ], -ov, (συζεύ- 
γνυμι), yoked together; used by Grk. writ. [fr. Aeschyl. 
down] of those united by the bond of marriage, rela- 
tionship, office, labor, study, business, or the like; hence, 
a yoke-fellow, consort, comrade, colleague, partner. Ac- 
cordingly, in Phil. iv. 3 most interpreters hold that by 
the words γνήσιε σύζυγε Paul addresses some particular 
associate in labor for the gospel. But as the word is 
found in the midst of (three) proper names, other 
expositors more correctly take it also as a proper name 
(ΝῊ mrg. Σύνζυγε]; see Laurent, Ueber Synzygos in 
the Zeitschr. f.d. Luther. Theol. u. Kirche for 1865, p. 
1 sqq. [reprinted in his Neutest. Studien, p. 134 sq.]); 
and Paul, alluding (as in Philem. 11) to the meaning of 
the word as an appellative, speaks of him as ‘a genuine 
Synzygus’, i. e. a colleague in fact as well as in name. 


594 


συλαγωγέω 


Cf. Meyer and Wiesinger ad loc.; [Hackett in B. D. Am. 
ed. s. v. Yoke-fellow 1." 

συϊζωο-ποιέω, -@: 1 aor. συνεζωοποίησα ; to make one 
alive together with another (Vulg. convivifico): Chris- 
tians,7@ Χριστῷ [ L br. adds ἐν, so WH mrg. J, with Christ, 
Eph. ii. 5; σὺν τῷ Xp. Col. ii. 13; in both these pass. 
new moral life is referred to.” - 

συκάμινος, -ov, ἡ, Hebr. pw (of which only the plur. 
DPW is found in the Ο. T., 1 K. x. 27; Is. ix.10; Am. 
vii. 14; once NiNpPw), a sycamine, a tree having the form 
and foliage of the mulberry, but fruit resembling the fig 
(i. ᾳ. συκομορέα, q.v. [but Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the 
Bible, 2d ed. p. 396 sq.; BB.DD., etc., regard the syca- 
mine as the black-mulberry tree, and the sycomore as 
the fig-mulberry]): Lk. xvii. 6. (Often in Theophr.; 
Strab. 17, p. 823; Diod. 1,34; Dioscorid. 1, 22.) [Cf. 
Vaniéek, Fremdworter, p. 54; esp. Léw, Aram. Pflan- 
zennamen, § 332, οἵ. § 338; BB.DD. u.s.; ‘Bible Edu- 
cator’ iv. 343; Pickering, Chron. Hist. of Plants, pp. 
106, 258.]* 

συκῆ, -ῆς, ἡ, (contr. fr. συκέα), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 
MIND, α fig-tree: Mt. xxi. 19-21; xxiv. 32; Mk. xi. 13, 
20 sq.; xiii. 28; Lk. xiii. 6 sq.; xxi. 29; Jn. i. 48 (49), 
50 (51); das. iii. 12; Rev. vi.13. [Cf. Léw, Aram. Pflan- 
zennamen, ὃ 335. ]* 

συκο-μορέα (Lehm. συκομωρέα, [Ree. *** -μωραία, cf. 
Tdf.’s note on Lk. as below; WH. App. pp. 152 and 
151]), -as, ἡ, (fr. σῦκον and popea the mulberry tree), 
i. 4. συκάμινος [but see the word, and reff.], a sycomore- 
tree: Lk. xix. 4. (Geop. 10, 3, 7.) * 

σῦκον, -ov, τό, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. Nf, a fig, the 
ripe fruit of ἡ συκῆ [4- v-]: Mt. vii. 16; Mk. xi. 13; Lk. 
vi. 44; Jas. iii. 12.* 

συκοφαντέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐσυκοφάντησα; (fr. συκοφάντης, 
and this fr. σῦκον ‘fig’, and φαίνω ‘to show’. At Athens 
those were called συκοφάνται whose business it was to 
inform against any one whom they might detect export- 
ing figs out of Attica; and as sometimes they seem to 
have extorted money from those loath to be exposed, the 
name συκοφάντης from the time of Aristophanes down 
was a general term of opprobrium to designate a malig- 
nant informer, a calumniator; a malignant and base ac- 
cuser from love of gain, [but ef. L. and S.s. v.]; hence 
the verb συκοφαντῶ signifies) 1. to accuse wrong- 
fully, to calumniate, to attack by malicious devices, (Ar- 
stph., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. to exact money wrong- 
fully; to extort from, defraud: Lk. iii. 14 [here R. V. 
marg. accuse wrongfully]; with a gen. of the pers. and 
ace. of the thing, Lk. xix. 8 (τριάκοντα μνᾶς mapa τινος, 
Lys. p. 177, 32. Sept. for pws, to oppress, defraud, Job 
xxxv. 9; Eccl. iv. 1; Ps. exviii. (exix.) 122; πένητα, 
Prov. xiv. 31; xxii. 16; πτωχούς, Prov. xxviii. 3).* 

συλαγωγέω, -@; (σύλη booty, spoil, [ef. συλάω, init.], 
and ἄγω) ; to carry off booty: τινά. to carry one off as a 
captive (and slave), θυγατέρα, Heliod. 10, 35; παρθένον, 
Nicet. hist. 5 p. 96; to lead away from the truth and 
subject to one’s sway [R. V. make spoil of], Col. ii. 8 
(Tatian. or. ad Gr. ec. 22, p. 98 ed. Otto).* 


συλάω 


συλάω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἐσύλησα; ([akin to] σύλη ‘spoil’ 
{allied with σκῦλον (q. v., yet ef.) Curtius p. 696]); fr. 
Hom. down; to rob, despoil: τινά, 2 Co. xi. 8.* 

συλ-λαλέω, [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, 11. fin.; Τα Proleg. 
p- 76)],-@; impf. 3 pers. plur. συνελάλουν ; 1 aor. συνε- 
λάλησα; to talk with: τινί, with one, Mk. ix. 4; Lk. ix. 
30; xxii. 4, (Ex. xxxiv. 35; Is. vii.6; Polyb. 4, 22, 8); 
pera twos, Mt. xvii. 3; Acts xxv. 12; πρὸς ἀλλήλους [R.V. 
spake together one with another], Lk. iv. 36. [Cf. W. § 52, 
4, 15.]* 

συλ-λαμβάνω [sometimes συν- (see below) ]: fut. 2 pers. 
sing. συλλήψη (1, Τ Tr WH συλλήμψῃ [see M, μ]), Lk. 1. 
31; pf. [3d pers. sing. συνείληφεν, Lk. i. 36 Tr txt. WH], 
ptep. fem. συνειληφυῖα [ib. RG LT]; 2 aor. συνέλαβον ; 
1 aor. pass. συνελήφθην (1, Τ Tr WH συνελήμφθην; see 
M, μ); Mid., pres. impv. 2 pers. sing. συλλαμβάνου (T 
Tr WH συν-, cf. σύν, I. fin.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 76) Phil. 
iv. 3; 2 aor. συνελαβόμην ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 
Sept. for wom and 329; 1. Active, a. to seize, 
take: τινά, one as a prisoner, Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48; 
Lk. xxii. 54; Jn. xviii. 12 [ef. W. 275 (259)]; Actsi. 16; 
xii. 3; xxiii. 27; ἄγραν ἰχθύων, Lk. v. 9. b. to con- 
ceive, of a woman (often so in Sept. for 777): absol. 
Lk. i. 24 (Aristot. h. a. 7,1 p. 582", 19; gen. an. 1, 19 p. 
727°, 8 sq.; [Plut. de vitand. aere alien. 4, 4; cf. W.593 
(552); B. §130, 5]); with ἐν γαστρί added, Lk. i. 31; 
twa, a son, [ Lk. i. 36]; with ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ added, Lk. ii. 21; 
metaph. of ‘lust,’ whose impulses a man indulges, Jas. i. 
15. 2. Mid. a. lo seize for one’s self; in a 
hostile sense, to make (one a permanent) prisoner: τινά, 
Acts xxvi. 21. b. with the dat. of a pers. to take 
hold together with one, to assist, help: Lk.v. 7; to succor, 
Phil. iv. 3, (Soph. Phil. 282; Plat. Theag. p. 129e.; 
Diod. 11, 40; in this sense in Grk. writ. more commonly 
in the active).* 

συλ-λέγω [cf. σύν, II. fin.; Tdf Proleg. p. 76]; fut. 
συλλέξω; 1 aor. συνέλεξα ; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. συλ- 
λέγεται ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for Op? s to gath- 
er up [ef. σύν, 11. 2]: τὰ ζιζάνια (for removal fr. the 
field), Mt. xiii. 28 sq. 30; pass. ib. 40; τὶ ἀπό with a gen. 
of the thing, Mt. vii. 16 [ef. W. $58, 9 b.a.]; τὶ ἐκ with 
a gen. of the place, to collect in order to carry off, Mt. 
xiii. 41; in order to keep, Lk. vi. 44; ri εἴς τι, into a 
vessel, Mt. xiii. 48.* 

συλ-λογίζομαι : (impf. συνελογιζόμην Lehm.) 1 aor. συν- 
ἐλογισάμην; a. to bring together accounts, reckon 
up, compute, (Hat. et sqq.)- b. to reckon with one’s 
self, to reason, (Plat., Dem., Polyb., al.) : Lk. xx. 5.* 

συλιλυπέω: 1. to affect with grief together: Aris- 
tot. eth. Nic. 9, 11, 4 p. 1171, 7. 2. Pass., pres. 
ptep. συλλυπούμενος [T WH ovr cf. σύν, II. fin. (Τὰ 
Proleg. p. 76)]; to grieve with one’s self [see σύν, II. 4 
(so Fritz., De Wette, al.; but al. regard the σύν as ‘sym- 
pathetic’; cf. Meyer, Weiss, Morison, on Mk. as be- 
low)], be inwardly grieved, (Hat., Plat., Polyb., Diod.): 
of the pain of indignation, ἐπί τινι, Mk. iii. 5.* 

συμ-βαίνω [ξυμ- Rec.be2 in 1 Pet. iv. 12; see 3,0, s fin. ]; 
impf. συνέβαινον ; 2 aor. συνέβην, ptep. συμβάς ; pf. συμ- 


595 


συμβιβάζω 


βέβηκα ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. to walk with 
the feet near together. 2. to come together, meet with 
one; hence 3. of things which fall out at the same 
time, to happen, turn out, come to pass, (so occasionally 
in the Sept. for mp and δ); as very often in Grk. 
writ. (Sept. Gen. xlii. 4; xliv. 29), συμβαίνει τί τινι, 
something befalls, happens to, one: Mk. x. 32; Acts xx., 
19; 1 Co. x. 11; [1 Pet. iv. 12]; 2 Pet. ii. 22; τὸ cup- 
βεβηκός τινι, Acts iii. 10 (Sus. 26); absol. ra συμβεβη- 
κότα, the things that had happened, Lk. xxiy. 14 (1 
Mace. iv. 26; [Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 22, 177) ; συνέβη foll. 
by an ace. with inf. it happened [A.V. so it was] that, 
ete.: Acts xxi. 35 [ef. W. 323 (303) ], exx. fr. prof. auth. 
are given by Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 2.* 

συμ-βάλλω [συν- WH (so Tdf. exc. Lk. xiv. 31); ef. σύν, 
II. fin.]; impf. συνέβαλλον; 2 aor. συνέβαλον; 2 aor. mid. 
συνεβαλόμην ; fr. Hom. down; to throw together, to bring 
together ; a. Adyous (Lat. sermones conferre), to con- 
verse, Eur. Iphig. Aul. 830; with λόγους omitted [ef. 
Eng. confer], Plut. mor. p. 222 ο. (W. 593 (552); [B. 
145 (127)]): τινί, to dispute with one, Acts xvii. 18 
[where A. V. encountered (cf. c. below) ]; πρὸς ἀλλήλους, 
to confer with one another, deliberate among them- 
selves, Acts iv. 15. b. to bring together in one’s 
mind, confer with one’s self [ef. σύν, 11. 4], to consider, 
ponder: ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, to revolve in the mind, Lk. ii. 19 
(συμβαλὼν τῷ λογισμῷ τὸ ὄναρ, Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 8). ο. 
intrans. (ΥΥ. §38, 1; [B. §130, 4]), to come together, meet : 
τινί, to meet one (on a journey), Acts xx. 14 (Hom. Od. 
21, 15; Joseph. antt. 2,7, 5); to encounter in a hostile 
sense: τινί, to fight with one (1 Mace. iv. 34; 2 Mace. 
viii. 23; xiv. 17; Polyb. 1, 9, 7; 3,111, 1, and often), 
with eis πόλεμον added, Lk. xiv. 31 (εἰς μάχην, Polyb. 3, 
56, 6; Joseph. antt. 12, 8,4; πρὸς μάχην, Polyb. 10, 37, 
4). Mid. to bring together of one’s property, to contribute, 
aid, help: πολύ τινι, one, Acts xviii. 27; often so in Grk. 
auth. also, esp. Polyb.; οἵ. Schweighduser, Lex. Polyb. 
p-576; Passow 8. v.1b.a.; [Land S.s.v.I.2]; Grimm, 
Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. v. 8.* 

συμ-βασιλεύω [Τ᾿ συν- so now WH (in exx. as below); ef. 
σύν, II. fin.) : fut. cupBaowevow; 1 aor. συνεβασίλευσα ; 
to reign together: τινί, with one; prop., Polyb. 30, 2, 4; 
Leian. dial. deor. 16, 2; often in Plut. [also in Dion. Hal., 
Strabo]; metaph. to possess supreme honor, liberty, 
blessedness, with one in the kingdom of God: 1 Co. iv. 8 
[ef. W.41b.5 N. 2; Β. 8189, 10]; 2 Tim. ii. 12; see 
βασιλεύω." 

συμ-βιβάζω [WH συν- (so Tdf.in Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii. 
19); ef. σύν, I. fin.]; 1 aor. συνεβίβασα (Acts xix. 33 
L T Tr WH, but see below) ; Pass., pres. ptep. συμβιβα- 
ζόμενος; 1 aor. ptep. συμβιβασθείς ; (βιβάζω to mount the 
female, copulate with her; to leap, cover, of animals; 
allow to be covered, admit to cover) ; 1. to cause to 
coalesce, to join together, put together: τὸ σῶμα, pass., of 
the parts of the body ‘knit together’ into one whole, 
compacted together, Eph iv. 16; Col. ii. 19; ἐο unite or 
knit together in affection, pass., Col. ii. 2 [ef. W. § 63, 2 
a.; B. § 144,13 a.] (to reconcile one to another, Hat. 1, 


συμβουλεύω 


74; Thue. 2, 29). 2. to put together in one’s mind, 
to compare; by comparison to gather, conclude, consider : 
foll. by ὅτι, Acts xvi. 10 (Plat. Hipp. min. p. 369 d.; de 
rep. 6 p. 504a.). 3. to cause a person to unite with 
one in a conclusion or come to the same opinion, fo prove, 
demonstrate: foll. by ὅτι, Acts ix. 22 ([Aristot. top. 7, 5 
p- 151%, 86]; foll. by ὡς, [Aristot. rhet. Alex. 4 p. 1426, 
37; ete.]; Jambl. vit. Pyth. c. 13 § 60; foll. by the 
ace. with inf., Ocell. Lucan. 3,3); by a usage purely 
Biblical, w. the ace. of a pers., to teach, instruct, one: 
1 Co. ii. 165 for pai, Is. xl. 14; for pn, Ex. xviii. 
16; Deut. iv. 9; Is. xl. 13 Alex., Ald., ete.; for mn, 
Ex. iv. 12, 15; Lev. x. 11; 73 ava, Theodot. Dan. 
ix. 22. (The reading συνεβίβασαν in Acts xix. 33, given 
by codd. δὲ A Bete. [and adopted by L T Tr WH] yields 
no sense; [but it may be translated (with R. V. mrg.) 
‘some of the multitude instructed Alexander’, ete. ; 
R. V. txt. translates it they brought Alexander out of the 
multitude, etc.].) * 

συμ-βουλεύω; 1 aor. συνεβούλευσα; 1 aor. mid. συν- 
εβουλευσάμην; fr. [Theogn., Soph.], Hdt. down; Sept. 
for yy. and γ»}}} 1. to give counsel: τινί, In. 
xviii. 14; foll. by an inf. Rev. iii. 18. 2. Mid. to 
take counsel with others, take counsel together, to consult, 
deliberate: foll. by ἵνα (see ἵνα, Il. 2 a.), Mt. xxvi. 4; 
Jn. xi. 53 [RG Tr mrg.]; foll. by a telic inf., Acts ix. 
23.* 

συμβούλιον, -ου, τό, (σύμβουλος); 1. counsel, which 
is given, taken, entered upon, (Plut. Romul. 14): Aap- 
βάνω (on this phrase see λαμβάνω, I. 6), Mt. xii. 14 ; xxii. 
15; xxvii. 1, 7; xxviii. 12; ποιῶ, to consult, deliberate, 
Mk. iii. 6 [Tr txt. WH txt. ἐδίδουν o-]; xv. 1 [TWH 
mrg. ἑτοιμάσαντες σ.; cf. Weiss ad loc.]. 2. a 
council, i. e. an assembly of counsellors or persons in con- 
sultation (Plut. Lue. 26): Acts xxv. 12 (the governors 
and procurators of provinces had a board of assessors 
or advisers with whom they took counsel before render- 
ing judgment; see Cic. ad fam. 8, 8; Verr. 2,13; Sueton. 
vit. Tiber. 33; Lamprid. vit. Alex. Sever. c. 46; cf. Jo- 
seph. b.j. 2, 16, 1).* 

σύμβουλος, -ov, ὁ, (σύν and βουλή), an adviser, coun- 
sellor: Ro. xi. 34 fr. Is. xl. 13. (Tragg., [Hdt.], Arstph., 
Xen., Plat., al.) * 

Συμεών, ὁ, [indecl., B. 16 (14)], (for deriv. see Σίμων), 
Simeon [so A. V. uniformly (on 2 Pet. i. 1 see 5 below) ]; 
1. the second son of Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxix. 33): 
Rev. vii. 7. 2. [R. V. Symeon], one of Abraham’s 
descendants: Lk. iii. 30. 3. that devout Simeon 
who took the infant Jesus in his arms in the temple: 
Lk. ii. 25 [here Rec.be Sipedv], 34. 4. Symeon [so 
R. V.] surnamed Niger, one of the teachers of the 
ehurch at Antioch: Acts xiii. 1. 5. Peter the apos- 
tle: Acts xv. 14 [R. V. Symeon]; 2 Pet. i. 1 [here L WH 
txt. Σίμων, and A. V.(R. V.) Simon]; respecting him 
see Σίμων, 1 and Πέτρος, fin.* 

συμ-μαθητής [T WII ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ], -0d, ὁ, a fel- 
low-disciple: Jn. xi. 16 (Plat. Euthyd. p.272¢.; Aesop. 
fab. 48). (Phrynichus says that σύν is not prefixed to 


596 


συμπαραγίνομαι 


πολίτης, δημότης, φυλέτης, and the like, but only to those 
nouns which denote an association which is πρόσκαιρος 
i.e. temporary, as συνέφηβος, συνθιασώτης, oupmorns. 
The Latin also observes the same distinction and says 
commilito meus, but not concivis, but civis meus; see 
Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 4713; [ef. p. 172; Win. 25].)* 

συμ-μαρτυρέω, -ὦ [Τ᾿ WII συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ]; to bear 
witness with, bear joint witness (with one): συμμαρτυ- 
povons τῆς συνειδήσεως, their conscience also bearing 
witness, Ro. ii. 15 (i.e. together with the deeds of the 
Gentiles, which accord with the law of God and so bear 
witness [ef. W. 580 (539)]); foll. by ὅτε, Ro. ix. 1 (be- 
sides the fact that the close fellowship I have with Christ 
compels me to tell the truth); τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν, with 
our spirit already giving its testimony, Ro. viii. 16. 
Mid. pres. 1 pers. sing. συμμαρτυροῦμαι, 1 testify on my 
own behalf besides (i.e. besides those things which I 
have already testified in this book), Rev. xxii. 18 Ree. ; 
but the true reading here, μαρτυρῶ, was restored by 
Grsb. (Soph., Eur., Thue., Plat., al.) * 

συμ-μερίζω [WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]: to divide at 
the same time, divide together; to assign a portion; Mid. 
pres. 3 pers. plur. συμμερίζονται : τινί, to divide together 
with one (so that a part comes to me, a part to him), [R.V. 
have their portion with], 1 Co. ix.13. [Diod., Dion. Hal., 
Diog. Laért.]* 

συμ-μέτοχος [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -ov, par 
taking together with one, a joint-partaker : τινός, of some- 
thing, Eph. iii. 6; v. 7. (Joseph. Ὁ. j. 1, 24, 6; Just. 
Mart. apol. 2, 13.) * 

συμ-μιμητής [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)], -οὔ, 6, an 
imitalor with others: twos, of one, Phil. iii. 17. Not 
found elsewhere.* 

συμ-μορφίζω [Tdf. συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]: pres. pass. 
ptep. συμμυρφιζόμενος ; (σύμμορφος) ; to bring to the same 


form with some other pers. or thing, ὁ render like, 


(Vulg. configure): τινί [R.V. becoming conformed unto], 
Phil. iii. 10 LT Tr WH. Not found elsewhere.* 

σύμε:μορφος, -ov, (σύν and μορφή), having the same form 
as another [ef. σύν, II. 1], (Vulg. conformis, configuratus) ; 
similar, conformed to, [Leian. amor. 39]: τινός (οἴ. 
Matthiae § 379 p. 864; [W. 195 (184); B. § 132, 23]), 
Ro. viii. 29 (see εἰκών, a.) ; τινί (Nicand. th. 321), Phil. 
iii. 21 [(here Tdf. σύνμ.) ; cf. W. 624 (580) ].* 

συμ-μορφόω, -@: pres. pass. ptep. συμμορφούμενος ; i. q. 
συμμορφίζω, η. ν-: Phil. iii. 10 Rec. Nowhere else.* 

συμ-παθέω [TWH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -@: 1 aor. 
συνεπάθησα; (συμπαθής); a. lo be affected with the 
same feeling as another, to sympathize with, (Aristot., 
Plut.). b. in reference to the wretched, to feel for, 
have compassion on, (Vulg. compatior) : τινί, Heb. iv. 15 
[A. V. to be touched with the feeling of]; x. 34, (Isocr. p. 
64 b.; Dion. Hal., Plut.).* 

συμπαθής, -ἐς, (σύν and πάσχω), suffering or feeling the 
like with another, sympathetic: 1 Pet. iii. 8, ef. Ro. xii. 
15. (Aristot., Theophr., al.) * 

συμ-παρα-γίνομαι [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.)] : 2 aor. 


a. to come together: ἐπί Ty 


mid. συμπαρεγενόμην ; 


συμπαρακαλέω 


Lk. xxiii. 48 (Ps. lxxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 9; Hdt., Thuc., Dem., 
Diod.). b. to come to one’s help: τινί, 2 Tim. iv. 16 
RG [al. mapayiv., q. ν. fin.]* 

συμ-παρα-καλέω [TWH ovr (cf. σύν, 11. fin.) ], τῶ: 1 
aor. pass. inf. συμπαρακληθῆναι ; 1. to call upon or 
invite or exhort at the same time or together (Xen., Plat., 
Plut., al.). 2. to strengthen [A.V. comfort] with 
others (souls; see παρακαλέω, 11. 4): συμπαρακληθῆναι ev 
ὑμῖν, that I with you may be comforted among you, i. 6. in 
your assembly, with you, Ro. i. 12.* 

συμ-παρα-λαμβάνω [T WII συν- (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)]; 2 
aor. συμπαρέλαβον; to take along together with (Plat., 
Aristot., Plut., al.); in the N. T. to take with one asa 
companion: τινά, Acts xii. 25; xv. 37sq.; Gal. ii 1.* 

συμ-παρα-μένω : fut. συμπαμαμενῶ ; lo abide together with 
(Hippoer., Thue., Dion. Hal., al.) ; to continue to live to- 
gether: τινί, with one, Phil. i. 25 [Ree. ; al. παραμένω, q. v- ] 
(Bs. Ixxi. (Ixxii.) 5).* 

συμ-πάρειμι [T WH ovr (ef. σύν, II. fin.) ]; to be pres- 
ent together: τινί, with one, Acts xxv. 24. ((Hippoer., 
Xen., Dem., al.) ]* 

συμ-πάσχω [T WH συν- (οἴ. σύν, II. fin.)]; to suffer or 
feel pain together (in a medical sense, as in Hippoer. and 
Galen): 1 Co. xii. 26; to suffer evils (troubles, persecu- 
tions) in like manner with another : Ro. viii. 17.* 

συμ-πέμπω: 1 aor. cuverep a; fr. Hdt. down; 10 send 
together with : τινὰ μετά τινος, 2 Co. viii. 18 ; τινί, ibid. 22. 
(Cf. W. § 52, 4, 15.]* 

συμ-περι-λαμβάνω [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, IT. fin.) ]: 2 aor. 
ptep. συμπεριλαβών ; fr. Plat. and Dem. down; 1: 
to comprehend at once. 2. to embrace completely : 
twa, Acts xx. 10.* 

συμ-πίνω: 2 aor. συνέπιον ; fr. [Hdt., Arstph.], Xen. 
and Plat. down; to drink with: τινί, one, Acts x. 41.* 

συμ-πίπτω: 2 aor. συνέπεσον ; fr. Hom. down; to fall 
together, collapse, fall in: of a house, Lk. vi. 49 T Tr 
Wil 

συμ-πληρόω [in Acts TWH συν- (ef. σύν, IT. fin.) ], τῶ: 
Pass., pres. inf. συμπληροῦσθαι ; impf. cvverAnpovuny; fr. 
Hat. down; 1. to fill completely: συνεπληροῦντο 
(R. V. they were filling with water], of the navigators, 
(as sometimes in Grk. writ. what holds of the ship is ap- 
plied to those on board; ef. Kypke, Observwv. i. p. 248), 
Lk. viii. 23. 2. to complete entirely, be fulfilled: of 
time (see πληρόω, 2 Ὁ. a.), pass., Lk. ix. 51 [R. V. well 
nigh come]; Acts ii. 1.* 

συμ-πνίγω [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)]; impf. συν- 
ἐπνιγον ; 1 aor. συνέπνιξα ; pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. συμ- 
πνίγονται ; to choke utterly: the seed of the divine word 
sown in the mind, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7, 19, (δένδρα 
συμπνιγόμενα, Theophr. c. plant. 6,11,6); συμπνίγονται, 
they are choked, i.e. the seed of the divine word in their 
minds is choked, Lk. viii. 14; τινά, to press round or 
throng one so as almost to suffocate him, Lk. viii. 42 
ΓΑ. V. thronged].* 

συμ-πολίτης [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)], -ov, 6, (see 
συμμαθητής and reff.), possessing the same citizenship 
with others, a fellow-citizen: συμπολῖται τῶν ἁγίων, spoken 


597 


σύμφυτος 


of Gentiles as received into the communion of the saints 
i.e. of the people consecrated to God, opp. to ξένοι κ. 
πάροικοι, Eph. ii. 19. (Eur. Heracl. 826; Joseph. antt. 
19, 2,2; Ael. v. h. 3, 44.) * 

συμ-πορεύομαι [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]; impf. 
συνεπορευύμην 5 1. to go or journey together (Eur., 
Xen., Diod.): τινί, with one, Lk. vii. 11; xiv. 255 xxiv. 
15, (Tob. v. 3, 9; ἡμῶν ἡ ψυχὴ συμπορευθεῖσα θεῷ, Plat. 


Phaedr. p. 249 ¢.; μετά twos, very often in Sept.). 2. 
to come together, to assemble: πρός twa, Mk. x. 1 (Polyb., 
Plut.).* 


συμπόσιον, -ov, τό, (συμπίνω), a drinking-party, enter- 
tainment, (Lat. convivium); by meton. the party uself, 
the guests, (Plut. mor. p. 157 a.; 704d.); plur. rows of 
guests: συμπόσια συμπύσια, Hebraistically for κατὰ συμ- 
πόσια, in parties, by companies, ([Β. 30 (27); 8.129 ἃ. 35 
W. 229 (214); 464 (432)]; see πρασιά), ΜΚ. vi. 39.* 

συμ-πρεσβύτερος [T WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ], του, 6, 
a fellow-elder, Vulg. consenior, (see πρεσβύτερος, 2 b.): 1 
Pet. v. 1. (Eccles. writ.) * 

συμ-φάγω, see συνεσθίω. 

συμ-φέρω ; 1 aor. ptcp. συνενέγκαντες (Acts xix. 19) ; 
fr. [Hom. (in mid.)], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; to bear or 
bring together (Lat. confero), i. 68. 1. with a refer- 
ence to the object, to bring together: τί, Acts xix. 
19. 2. with a reference to the subject, to bear to- 
gether or at the same time; to carry with others; to collect 
or contribute in order to help, hence to help, be profitable, 
be expedient; συμφέρει, it is expedient, profitable, and 
in the same sense with a neut. plur.: with the subject 
πάντα, 1 Co. vi. 12; x. 233 τί τινι, 2 Co. viii. 10; with 
an inf. of the object (as in Grk. writ.), Mt. xix. 10; 2Co. 
xii. 1 (where LT Tr WH have συμφέρον); with the 
ace. and inf. Jn. xviii. 14; συμφέρει τινί foll. by ἵνα (see 
ἕνα, II. 2c. [B. $139, 45; W. 337 (316)]), Mt. v. 29sq.; 
xviii. 6; Jn. xi. 50; xvi. 7. τὸ συμφέρον, that which is 
profitable (Soph., Eur., Xen., Dem., al.) : 1 Co. xii. 7; 
plur. (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 341 e.), Acts xx. 20; advan- 
tage, profit, Heb. xii. 10; τὸ συμφ. τινός (often in Grk. 
writ.) the advantage of one, one’s profit, 1 Co. vii. 35; 
x. 33, (in both which pass. LT Tr WH read σύμφυρον, 
4: v-).* 

σύμ-φημι [Τ WH σύν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]; to consent, 
confess: τινί foll. by ὅτι, Ro. vii. 16. (Tragg., Xen., 
Plat.) * 

σύμ-φορος, -ον; (συμφέρω, q- V-), fit, suitable, useful; fr. 
({Hes., Theogn.], Hdt. down; 4 Mace. v. 10; subst. τὸ 
σύμφορον, advantage, profit: with a gen. of the pers. 
profited, LT Tr WH in 1 Co. vii. 35; x. 33, [ef. B. § 127, 
19 n.], (plur. τὰ σύμφορα, often in prof. auth. [fr. Soph. 
down }).* 

συμ-φυλέτης, -ov, 6, (σύν and φυλή; see συμμαθητής), 
one who is of the same people, a _fellow-countryman, 
(Vulg. contribulis): 1 Th. ii. 14. (Eccles. writ.) * 

cip-puros, -ov, (συμφύω), planted together (Vulg. com- 
plantatus) ; born together with, of joint origin, i. 6. ἘΣ 
connate, congenital, innate, implanted by birth or nature, 
(3 Mace. iii. 22; Pind., Plat., Aeschyl., Aeschin., Aristot, 


συμφύω 


Philo de Abrah. ὃ 31 init.; Joseph. [as, 6. Ap. 1, 8, 
57). 2. grown together, united with, (Theophr. de 
caus. plant. 5, 5, 2); kindred (Plat. Phaedr. p. 246 a.): 
εἰ σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ (sc. τῷ ὁμοιώματι [ἃ]. supply Χριστῷ, and take 
the ὁμοιώματι as ἃ dat. of respect; for yet another constr. 
of the second clause οἵ. B. § 132, 23]) τῆς ἀναστάσεως 
ἐσόμεθα, if we have become united with the likeness of his 
death (which likeness consists in the fact that in the 
death of Christ our former corruption and wickedness 
has been slain and been buried in Christ’s tomb), i. e. 
if it is part and parcel of the very nature of a genuine 
Christian to be utterly dead to sin, we shall be united also 
with the likeness of his resurrection i. e. our intimate fel- 
lowship with his return to life will show itself in a new 
life consecrated to God, Ro. vi. 5.* 

[συμ-φύω (T WH ov cf. σύν, 11. fin.): 2 aor. pass. 
ptep. nom. plur. fem. συμφυεῖσαι ; 1. trans. to cause 
to yrow together (Plat., Aristot.). 2. pass. intrans. 
to grow together, grow with: Lk. viii. 7.* ] 

συμ-φωνέω, -d; fut. συμφωνήσω ([Mt. xviii. 19 T Tr; 
Lk. v.36 LT Tr txt. WH]); 1 aor. συνεφώνησα; 1 aor. 
pass. συνεφωνήθην; fr. Plat. and Aristot. down; prop. to 
sound together, be in accord; of sounds and of musical 
instruments. In the N. T. trop. to be in accord, to har- 
monize, 1. 6. a. to agree together: περί (as respects) 
twos, Mt. xviii. 19 (Dion. Hal. 2, 47); τινί, with a thing, 
Acts xy. 15 (often in Grk. auth.) ; to agree i. 6. corre- 
spond, of things congruous in nature, Lk. v. 36; pass. 
συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν, foll. by an inf., it was agreed between you 
to ete. Acts v. 9. b. to agree with one in making a 
bargain, to make an agreement, to bargain, (Polyb., Diod.) : 
μετά τινος ἐκ Snvapiov (see ἐκ, II. 4), Mt. xx. 2; ν΄. ἃ dat. 
of the pers. and gen. of the price, ibid. 13, (συνεφώνησεν 
per αὐτοῦ τριῶν λιτρῶν ἀσήμου ἀργυρίου, Act. Thom. 
8.2). 

συμ-φώνησις, -ews, 7, (συμφωνέω), concord, agreement : 
πρός τινα, With one, 2 Co. vi. 15. (Eccl. writ.) * 

συμφωνία, -as, 7, (σύμφωνος), [fr. Plat. down], music: 
Lk. xv. 25. (Polyb. 26, 10,5; [plur. of ‘the music of 
the spheres,’ Aristot. de caelo 2, 9 p. 290°, 22; al.]) * 

σύμφωνος, -ov, (σύν and φωνή), fr. [Hom. ἢ. Mere. 51; 
Soph. ], Plat., Aristot. down, harmonious, accordant, agree- 
ing; τὸ σύμφωνον, thing agreed upon, compact, [ Epict. 
diss. 1,19, 27]: ἐκ συμφώνου, by mutual consent, by 
agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5 [cf. W. 303 (285); B. § 139, 20]* 

συμ-ψηφίζω: 1 aor. συνεψήφισα ; to compute, count up: 
τὰς τιμάς, Acts xix. 19. (Mid. τινί, to vote with one, Ar- 
stph. Lys. 142.) * 

σύμ-ψυχος [T WH σύν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -ον, (σύν and 
Ψυχή), of one mind (Vulg. unanimis): of one accord, 
Phil. ii. 2. (Eccl. writ.) * 

σύν [the older form ξύν is still found in some edd. in 
composition (as ξυμ-βαίνω, 1 Pet. iv. 12 Rec***; see L. 
and S. 5. v. init.; cf. 3, o,s)], a preposition; it is never 
used in the Apocalypse, rarely by Matthew [some four 
times (texts vary) ], Mark [some five times, or John (three 
times) ], (who prefer μετά), more frequently by Luke 


598 


΄, 
συν 


[(Gospel and Acts) about 79 times] and Paul [about 39 
times ; on the comparative frequency of these prepp. in 
the classics, see L. and S.s. v. ad init.]. It takes the Da- 
tive after it, and denotes accompaniment and fellowship, 
whether of action, or of belief, or of condition and ex- 
perience; (acc. to the grammarians [ef. Donaldson, New 
Crat.§181; Kriiger §68, 13,1; Kihner ii. p.438]; W. 
391 (366), a fellowship far closer and more intimate 
than that expressed by perd, although in the N. T. 
this distinction is much oftener neglected than observed). 
Latin cum, Eng. with. 

I. 1. Passages in which the subject of an active 
verb is said to be or to do something σύν τινι; a. 
phrases in which σύν is used of accompaniment: εἰμὲ 
σύν τινι i. €. —Lo be with one, to accompany one, Lk. vii. 12; 
viii. 38 (Mk. v.18 μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ) ; xxii. 56 (Mt. xxvi. 69 and 
Mk. xiv. 67 pera); Acts xxvii. 2; to associate with one, 
Lk. xxiv. 44; Acts iv. 13; xiii.7; Phil. i. 23; Col. ii. 5; 
2 Pet. 1. 18 ; of σύν τινι ὄντες, the attendants of one on a 
journey, Mk. ii. 26 (Mt. xii. 4 and Lk. vi. 4 τοῖς per’ αὐτοῦ); 
Acts xxii. 9; of σύν τινι sc. ὄντες, --- either the compan- 
ions of one, Lk. v. 9; ix. 32; xxiv. 24, 33; with the noun 
added, οἱ σὺν ἐμοὶ πάντες ἀδελφοί, Gal. i. 2; Ro. xvi. 14; 
or one’s colleagues, Acts ν. 17, 21; of σὺν αὐτῷ τε- 
xvira, his fellow-craftsmen, Acts xix. 38; εἰμὶ σύν τινι, to 
be on one’s side, Acts xiv. 4 (Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 77); to assist 
one, ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ (ἡ) σὺν ἐμοί, 1 Co. xv. 10. b. 
σύν τινι joined to verbs of standing, sitting, going, 
ete.: σταθῆναι, Acts ii. 14; στῆναι, Acts iv.14; ἐπιστῆναι, 
Lk. xx. 1; Acts xxiii. 27; καθίσαι, Acts vill. 31; μένειν, 
Lk. i.56; xxiv. 29; Acts xxviii. 16; ἀναπίπτειν, Lk. xxii. 
14; γίνεσθαι, to be associated with, Lk. ii. 13; παραγίνε- 
σθαι, to arrive, Acts xxiv. 24; ἔρχεσθαι, Jn. xxi. 3; Acts 
xi. 12; 2 Co. ix. 4; ἀπέρχεσθαι, Acts v. 26; εἰσέρχεσθαι, 
Acts iii. 8; xxv. 23; εἰσιέναι, Acts xxi. 18; συνέρχεσθαι, 
Acts xxi. 16; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Jn. xviii. 1; Acts x. 23; xiv. 
20; xvi.3; πορεύεσθαι, Lk. vii. 6; Acts x. 20; xxiii. 32 
[LT Tr WH ἀπέρχεσθαι]; xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; διο- 
Sevew, Lk. viii. 1 sq.; ἐκπλεῖν, Acts xviii. 18. with verbs 
of living, dying, believing: ζῆν, 1 Th. v. 10; ἀπο- 
θνήσκειν, Mt. xxvi.35; Ro. νἱ. 8 ; πιστεύειν, Acts xviii. 8. 
with other verbs: Acts v. 1; xiv. 13; xx. 36; xxi.5; 
Phil. ii. 22; Jas. i. 11. 2. Passages in which one is 
said to be the recipient of some action σύν τινι, or to be 
associated with one to whom some action has reference: 
—dative, τινὶ σύν τινι : as ἔδοξε τοῖς ἀποστόλοις σὺν ὅλῃ 
τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, Acts xv. 22, where if Luke had said καὶ ὅλῃ 
τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ he would have claimed for the church the 
same rank as for the apostles; but he wishes to give to 
the apostles the more influential position; the same ap- 
plies also to Acts xxiii. 15; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co.i. 1; Phil. 
i. 1. Accusative, σύν τινί (which precedes) twa or te 
(the pers. or thing added): Ro. viii. 32 (σὺν αὐτῷ, i. 6. 
since he has given him to us); Mk. xv. 27; 1 Co. x. 13; 
τινὰ or τὶ σύν τινι (the pers. or thing associated or 
added): Mt. xxv. 27; Mk. viii. 34; 2 Co.i.21; Col. ii 
13; iv.9; τὶ σύν τινι, a thing with its power or result, 
Gal. ν. 24; Col. iii. 9; ris or ri σύν τινε after passives, as 


σύν 


Mt. xxvii. 38; Mk. ix. 4; Lk. xxiii. 32; 1 Co. xi. 32; 
Gal. iii. 9; Col. iii. 3sq.; 1 Th. iv. 17. 3. It stands 
where καί might have been used (cf. B. 331 (285)): 
ἐγένετο ὁρμὴ - - - Ἰουδαίων σὺν τοῖς ἄρχουσιν αὐτῶν (equiv. 
to καὶ τῶν apy. αὐτ.), Acts xiv. 5; add, Lk. xxiii. 11; 
Acts iii.4; x.2; xxiii. 15; Eph. iii. 18. 4. Of that 
which one has or carries with him, or with which he is 
furnished or equipped (σὺν ἅρμασιν, 3 Mace. il. 7; σὺν 
ὅπλοις, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3,54; many other exx. fr. Grk. writ. 
are given by Passow s. v. B. I. 2 a.; [L. and 5. I. 4]): 
σὺν τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ, carrying with him this gift or bounty, 
2 Co. viii. 19 RG T cod. Sin. (L Tr WH ἐν τῇ xap. τ. in 
procuring [R. V. in the matter of] this benefit) ; σὺν τῇ 
δυνάμει τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν "I. Xp. equipped with the power 
of our Lord Jesus Christ, 1 Co. ν. 4 (so ace. to many in- 
terpreters [cf. W. 391 (366) ]; but since the N.T. writ- 
ers are wont to designate the powers and virtues with 
which one is equipped by the preposition ἐν, it is more 
correct to connect σὺν τῇ δυν. with συναχθέντων, so that 
ἡ δύναμις τ. κυρίου is personified and represented as the 
third subject in the gathering; cf. Mt. xviii. 20 [see 
δύναμις, a. sub fin.]). 5. σὺν Χριστῷ ζῆν, to live 
with Christ, i.e. united (in spiritual bonds) to him, and 
to lead a strong life by virtue of this union, 2 Co. xiii. 4; 
σὺν (Rec.) χειρὶ ἀγγέλου (see χείρ), Acts vii. 35 LT Tr 
WH. 6. Of the union which arises from the ad- 
dition or accession of one thing to another: σὺν πᾶσι 
τούτοις, our ‘beside all this’ [W. 391 (366) ], Lk. xxiv. 21 
(Neh. v. 18 ; 3 Mace. i. 22; Joseph. antt. 17, 6, 5). ae 
On the combination ἅμα σύν, Th. iv. 17; v. 10, see 
ἅμα, fin. 

II. In composition σύν denotes 1. associa- 
tion, community, fellowship, participation: συνοικέω, 
σύνειμι, συγγενής, σύμμορφος, συζῆν, συμπάσχειν, συγ- 
χρᾶσθαι, etc. 2. together, i. e. several persons or 
things united or all in one; as, συγκεράννυμι, συγκλείω, 
συγκαλέω, συλλέγω, συγκομίζω, ete. 3. completely: 
συγκύπτω, συγκαλύπτω, etc. 4. with one’s self, i. 6. 
in one’s mind: συλλυπέομαι [but see the word], σύνοιδα, 
συνείδησις, συντηρέω; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 642 sq. 
Once or twice in the N.T. after verbs compounded with 
σύν the preposition is repeated before the object [W. 
§ 52,4, 15]: Mt. xxvii. 44 L T Tr WH;; Col. ii. 13. 

As to its Form, σύν in composition before 8, p,m, d, 
Ψ, passes into cup-, before ἃ into συλ-, before y, x, x into 
avy-; before ¢ [and σ foll. by a consonant] it is elided, 
hence συζῆν, συζητέω, συσταυρόω, συστέλλω. But in the 
older manuscripts assimilation and elision are often ne- 
elected (cf. ἐν, III. fin.). Following their authority, LT 
Tr WH write συνζάω, συνζητέω, συνζητητής, σύνζυγος, 
συνσταυρόω. συνστρατιώτης, σύνσωμος; T WH συνβασι- 
λεύω, συνγνώμη, συνκάθημαι, συνκαθίζω. συνκακοπαθέω, συν- 
κακουχέω, συνκαλέω, συνκάμπτω. συνκαταβαίνω. συνκατάθε- 
σις, συνκατατίθημι, συνκαταψηφίζω, συνκεράννυμι. συνκλείω, 
συνκληρονόμος, συνκοινωνέω, συνκοινωνός, συνκρίνω, ( Ασύν- 
κριτος). συνκύπτω, συνλαλέω. συνλυπέω. συνμαθητής. συνμαρ- 
τυρέω. συνμέτοχος, συνμιμητής, συνπαθέω. συνπαραγίνομαι. 
συνπαρακαλέω, συνπαραλαμβάνω, συνπάρειμι. συνπάσχω. 


899 


συνάγω 


συνπεριλαμβάνω. συνπνίγω. συνπολίτης, συνπορεύομαι. συν- 
πρεσβύτερος, συνστενάζω. συνστοιχέω, σύνφημι, συνφύω, 
LTr mrg. 


Tr συνστατικός ; 


συνχαίρω, συνχράομαι, συνχέω. σύνψυχος ; 
συνζήτησις;  συνμορφίζω. σύνσημον ; 
WH συνβάλλω, συνβιβάζω, συνμερίζω, συνσχηματίζω. 
But L T Tr WH retain συγγένεια, συγγενής. συγκαλύπτω, 
συγκυρία, σύγχυσις, συλλέγω, συμβαίνω. συμβουλεύω, συμ- 
βούλιον, σύμβουλος, συμπαθής, συμπόσιον, συμφέρω, σύμ- 
opos, συμφυλέτης, σύμφυτος, συμφωνέω, συμφώνησις 
συμφωνία, σύμφωνος (ἀσύμφωνος), συστρέφω, συστροφή ; 
LT Tr cuppepitw; LT WH συγγενίς, συστατικός; L 
Tr WH συμμορφίζω, σύμμορφος, σύσσημον; L Tr συγ- 
γνώμη, συγκάθημαι, συγκαθίζω, συγκακοπαθέω, συγκακουχέω, 
συγκαλέω, συγκάμπτω, συγκαταβαίνω, συγκατάθεσις, συγκα- 
τατίθημι, συγκαταψηφίζω. συγκεράννυμι, συγκλείω, συγκλη- 
ρονόμος, συγκοινωνέω, συγκοινωνός. συγκρίνω, συγκύπτω, 
συγχαίρω, συγχέω. συγχράομαι. συλλαλέω, συλλυπέω. συμ- 
βάλλω, συμβασιλεύω, συμβιβάζω, συμμαθητής, συμμαρτυ- 
ρέω, συμμέτοχος, συμμιμητής. συμπαθέω, συμπαραγίνομαι, 
συμπαρακαλέω, συμπαραλαμβάνω. συμπάρειμι, συμπάσχω, 
συμπεριλαμβάνω, συμπληρόω, συμπνίγω. συμπολίτης, συμ- 
πορεύομαι, συμπρεσβύτερος, σύμφημι. συμφύω, σύμψυχος, 
συστενάζω, συστοιχέω; Ϊ, συλλαμβάνω. συσχηματίζω. 
Tdf. is not uniform in συλλαμβάνω. συμβάλλω, συμβιβάζω, 
σύμμορφος, cupmAnpdw, συσχηματίζω; nor Tr in συλλαμ- 
βάνω, συσχηματίζω; nor WH in συλλαμβάνω, συμπληρόω. 
These examples show that assimilation takes place 
chiefly in those words in which the preposition has lost, 
more or less, its original force and blends with the 
word to which it is prefixed into a single new idea; as 
συμβούλιον, συμφέρει, σύμφορος. Cf. fAlex. Buttmann 
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p. 180]; Philip Buttmann 
(the son) ibid. p. 811 54. [But see Dr. Gregory’s expo- 
sition of the facts in the Proleg. to Tdf. p. 73 sq.; Dr. 
Hort in WH. App. p. 149; Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att. 
Inschr. § 24.] 

συν-άγω ; fut. συνάξω ; 2 aor. συνήγαγον ; Pass., pres. 
συνάγομαι; pf. ptep. συνηγμένος ; 1 aor. συνήχθην; 1 fut. 
συναχθήσομαι; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for Ox, ΥΞΡ 
and 73: a. to gather together, to gather: with an 
ace. of the thing, Lk. xv. 13; Jn. vi. 12sq.; xv. 6; har-. 
vests, ὅθεν, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; with εἴς τι added, Mt. iii. 12; 
vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; ποῦ, Lk. xii. 17; ἐκεῖ, Lk. 
xii. 18; συνάγειν καρπὸν eis ζωὴν αἰώνιον (see καρπός, 2 
d.), Jn. iv. 36; συνάγω pera twos, Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23; 
to draw together, collect: fishes, —of a net in which they 
are caught, Mt. xiii. 47. b. to bring together, assem- 
ble, collect: αἰχμαλωσίαν (1. 6. αἰχμαλώτους), Rev. xiii. 10 
RG; eis αἰχμαλωσίαν, i. 6. τινάς, ot ὦσιν αἰχμάλωτοι, Rev. 
xiii. 10 Led. min.; to join together, join in one (those 
previously separated): τὰ τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ τὰ διεσκορπι- 
σμένα εἰς ἕν, Jn. xi. 52, (συ"ἀξειν εἰς ἐν τὰ ἔθνη καὶ ποιήσειν 
φιλίαν, Dion. Hal. 2, 45; ὅπως εἰς φιλίαν συνάξουσι τὰ 
ἔθνη, ibid.) ; to gather together by convoking: τινάς, Mt. 
ii. 4; xxii. 10; συνέδριον, Jn. xi. 47; τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, Acts 
xiv. 27; τὸ πλῆθος, Acts xv. 30; τινὰς εἰς with an ace. 
of place, Rev. xvi. 16; εἰς τὸν πόλεμον, in order to en- 
gage in war, Rey. xvi. 14: xx. 8: ἐπί τινα. unto one, Mt. 


συναγωγή 


xxvii. 27. Pass. to be gathered i.e. come together, gather, 
meet, [ef. B. 52 (45)]: absol., Mt. xxii. 41; xxvii. 17; Mk. 
ii. 2; Lk. xxii. 66; Acts xiii. 44; xv.6; xx. 7; 1Co.v. 
4; Rev. xix. 19; with the addition of εἰς and an ace. of 
place, Mt. xxvi. 3; Acts iv. 5; εἰς δεῖπνον, Rey. xix. 17; 
ἔμπροσθέν τινος, Mt. xxv. 32; ἐπί twa, unto one, Mk. v. 
21; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό [see αὐτός, III. 1], Mt. xxii. 34; Acts iv. 
26; ἐπί twa, against one, Acts iv. 27; πρός τινα, unto 
one, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1; vi. 30; vil. 1; ἐν 
with dat. of the place, Acts iv. 31; ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, Acts 
xi. 26 ; μετά τινος, Mt. xxviii.12; with adverbs of place: 
ov, Mt. xviii. 20; Acts χχ. 8; ὅπου, Mt. xxvi. 57; Jn. 
xx. 19 RG; ἐκεῖ, Jn. xviii. 2; Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii. 
387RGL. c. to lead with one’s self sc. unto one’s 
home, i. e.to receive hospitably, to entertain, [A.V. to take 
in]: ξένον, Mt. xxv. 35, 38, 43, (with the addition of εἰς 
τὴν οἰκίαν, eis τὸν οἶκον, Deut. xxii. 2; Josh. ii. 18; Judg. 
xix. 18, ete.). [Comp.: ἐπι-συνάγω.} " 

συν-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (συνάγω), Sept. for oP and very 
often for ΤΠ}. In Grk. writ. α bringing together, gather- 
ing (as of fruits), a contracting; an assembling together of 
men. In the N. T. 1. an assembly of men: τοῦ 
Σατανᾶ, whom Satan governs, Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9. 2. 
α synagogue, i. e. a. an assembly of Jews formally 
gathered together to offer prayer and listen to the reading 
and exposition of the Holy Scriptures; assemblies of the 
sort were held every sabbath and feast-day, afterwards 
also on the second and fifth days of every week [see 
reff. below]: Lk. xii. 11; Acts ix. 2; xiil.43; xxvi. 11; 
the name is transferred to an assembly of Christians 
formally gathered for religious purposes, Jas. ii. 2 (Epiph. 
haer. 30, 18 says of the Jewish Christians συναγωγὴν 
οὗτοι καλοῦσι THY ἑαυτῶν ἐκκλησίαν καὶ οὐχὶ ἐκκλησίαν [ cf. 
Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. p. 192]); [ef. Trench, Syn. § 1, 
and esp. Harnack’s elaborate note on Herm. mand. 11, 
9 (less fully and accurately in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. f. 
wiss. Theol. for 1876, p. 102 sqq-) respecting the use of 
the word by the church Fathers of the 2d, 3d, and 4th 
centuries; ef. Hilgenfeld’s comments on the same in his 
‘Hermae Pastor’, ed. alt. p. 183 sq. ]. b. the build- 
ing where those solemn Jewish assemblies are held (Hebr. 
D130 M3, i. e. ‘the house of assembly’). Synagogues 
seem to date their origin from the Labylonian exile. In 
the time of Jesus and the apostles every town, not only 
in Palestine but also among the Gentiles if it contained 
a considerable number of Jewish inhabitants, had at least 
one synagogue, the larger towns several or even many. 
That the Jews held trials and even inflicted punishments 
in them, is evident from such pass. as Mt. x. 17; xxiii. 34; 
Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xii. 11: xxi. 12; Acts ix. 2; ΧΧΙ 19,» 
xxvi. 11. They are further mentioned in Mt. iv. 23; vi. 
2,5; ix. 35; xii. 9; xiii. 54; xxiii. 6; Mk. 1. 21, 23, 29, 39; 
iii. 1; vi. 2; xii. 39; Lk. iv. 15 sq. 20, 28, 33, 38, 44; vi. 6; 
vii. 5; viii. 41; [xi.43]; xiii. 10; xx. 46; Jn. vi. 59; xviii. 
20 [here the anarthrous (so G L T Tr WH) sing. has an 
indef. or generic force (R. V. txt. in synagogues) ]; Acts 
vi. 9; ix. 20; xiii. 5, 14, 42 Rec.; xiv. 15 xv. 21; xvii. 
1, 10,17; xviii. 4, 7,19, 26; xix.8; xxiv.12; xxvi. 11; 


600 


συναλλάσσω 


(Joseph. antt. 19, 6,3; Ὁ. 1. 2, 14,4. [5; 7, 3, 8; Philo, 
quod omn. prob. lib. 8. 12]). Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Syn- 
agogen; Leyrer in Herzog ed. 1, xv. p. 299 sqq.; Schiirer, 
N. T. Zeitgesch. § 27 (esp. ii.) ; Aneucker in Schenkel 
ν. p. 443 sq.; [Hamburger, Real-Eneycl. ii. p. 1142 sqq.; 
Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto, s. v. Synagogue; Edersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. x.].* 

συν-αγωνίζομαι : 1 aor. mid. inf. συναγωνίσασθαι; fr. 
Thue. and Xen. down; 10 strive together with one, to help 
one in striving: τινὶ ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς, in prayers, i. 6. to 
offer intense prayers with one, Ro. xv. 30; in what sense 
intense prayer may be likened to a struggle, see Philippi 
ad loc. [(cf. ἀγωνίζ. in Col. iv. 12 and Bp. Leghtft.’s note) ].* 

συν-αθλέω, -ὦ ; 1 aor. συνήθλησα; fo strive at the same 
time with another: with a dat. commodi[ef. W. § 31, 4], 
for something, Phil. i. 27; τινὶ ἔν τινι, together with one in 
something, Phil. iv.3. (univ. ἐο heip, assist, Diod. 8, 4.) * 

συν-αθροίζω : 1 aor. ptep. συναθροίσας ; pf. pass. ptep. 
συνηθροισμένος; fr.[Eur., Arstph., al.}, Isocr. down; Sept. 
chiefly for Υ3Ρ and 323 4 gather together with others; 
to assemble: τινάς, Acts xix. 25; pass. to be gathered to- 
gether i. 6. come together, Lk. xxiv. 33 RG; Acts xii. 12." 

συν-αίρω; 1 aor. inf. συνᾶραι; 1. to take up to- 
gether with another or others. 2. to bring together 
with others: λόγον, lo cast up or settle accounts, to make a 
reckoning with, (an expression not found in Grk. auth.), 
Mt. xviii. 23 54. : μετά τινος, Mt. xxv. 19." 

συν-αιχμάλωτος, -ov, 6, a fellow-prisoner (Vulg. concap- 
tivus): Ro. xvi. 7; Col. iv. 10; Philem. 23, (Leian. asin. 
27). [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.; Fritzsche, Com. on 
Rom. vol. 1. p. xxi. note. ]* 

συν-ακολουθέω, -@; 1mpf. συνηκολούθουν; 1 aor. συνηκο- 
λούθησα; fr. Arstph., Thue., Isocr. down; to follow to- 
gether with others, to accompany: τινί, one, Mk. ν. 37 
[where Lehm. ἀκολουθ.}; xiv. 51 LT Tr WH; Lk. xxiii. 
49.* 

συν-αλίζω: (σύν, and ἁλίζω fr. ἁλής, crowded, in a mass; 
{ef. ὄλυσις, init.]); fo gather together, assemble; pass. 
pres. ptep. συναλιζόμενος ; to be assembled, meet with: τινί, 
with one Acts i. 4, where αὐτοῖς is to be supplied. (IIdt., 
Xen., [ Plut. de placit. phil. 902], Joseph., Leian., Jambl.) 
[But Meyer defends the rendering given by some of the 
ancient versions (cf. Tdf.’s note ad loc.) eating with (de- 
riving the word from σύναλος), so A. V. and R. V. mrg.; 
such passages as Manetho 5, 339; Clem. hom. 13, 4 (al- 
though Dressel after cod. Ottob. reads here cuvavA.— yet 
the recogn. 7, 29 renders cibum sumimus) ; Chrysost. iii. 
88 c. (ed. Migne iii. i. 104 mid.); 89 a. (ibid. bottom) ; 
91 ἃ. (ibid. 107 mid.), seem to give warrant for this in- 
terpretation; cf. Valckenaer, Opusce. ii. p. 277 sq. But 
see at length Woolsey in the Bib. Sacr. for Oct. 1882, 
pp: 605-618.] * 

συν-αλλάσσω: (see καταλλάσσω) ; to reconcile (Thuce., 
Xen., Plat., Dio Cass.; in diff. senses by diff. prof. auth.) : 
συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην, (Vulg. reconcilabal. i. 6. 
sought to reconcile), conative impf. [οἵ. B. 205 (178); 
R.V. would have set them at one again], Acts vii. 26 LT 
Tr WH [see cuvedavve |.” 


UL 
συναναβαίνω 


συν-ανα-βαίνω : 2 aor. συνανέβην ; to ascend αἱ the same 
time, come up together with to a higher place: τινί, with 
one, foll. by εἰς with the ace. of the place, Mk. xv. 41; 
Acts xiii. 31. (Hdt., Xen., Dion. Hal., Strabo, al.; Sept. 
several times for my.) Ἂ 

συν-ανά-κειμαι ; 3 pers. plur. impf. συνανέκειντο; to re- 
cline together, feast together, [ Δ. V. ‘sit down with’, ‘sit at 
meat with’, (cf. ἀνάκειμαι)} : τινί, with one, Mt. ix. 10; 
Mk. ii. 15; Lk. xiv. 10; Jn. xii. 2 Rec.; οἱ συνανακείμενοι, 
[‘they that sat at meat with’], the guests, Mt. xiv. 9; 
Mk. vi. 22, 26[RGL]; Lk. vii. 49; xiv.15. ([8 Mace. 
y. 39]; eccles. and Byzant. writ.)* 

συν-ανα-μίγνυμι: fo mix up together; Pass., pres. impv. 
2 pers. plur. -μίγνυσθε; inf. -μίγνυσθαι ; reflex. and met- 
aph. τινί, to keep company with, be intimate with, one: 
1 Co. v. 9, 11; 2 Th. iii. 14 [here R T -o6e, L Tr WH 
-σθαι]. (Plut. Philop. 21; [Sept. Hos. vii. 8 Alex.].) * 

συν-ανα-παύομαι: 1 aor. subj. συναιαπαύσωμαι ; to lake 
rest together with: τινί, with one, Is. xi. 6; (0 sleep together, 
to lie with, of husband and wife (Dion. Hal., Plut.); met- 
aph. τινί, 10 rest or refresh one’s spirit with one (i. 6. to give 
and get refreshment by mutual intercourse), Ro. xv. 32 
{Lelim. om.].* 

συν-αντάω, -d: fut. συναντήσω; 1 aor. συνήντησα; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for 739, 925, ΠΡ, DFP, ete.; fo meet 
with: τινί, Lk. ix. [18 WII mrg.], 37; xxii. 10; Acts x. 
25; Heb. vii. 1 [ef. B. 293 (252)], 10; trop. of events, 
to happen, to befall: Acts xx. 22 (Plut. Sulla 2; mid. τὰ 
συναντώμενα, Polyb. 22, 7,14; the Hebr. 77) also is used 
of events, Eccles. ii. 14; ix. 11; ete.).* 

συν-άντησις, -ews, 7, a meeting with (Eurip. Ion 535; 
Dion. Hal. antt. 4, 66): εἰς συνάντησίν tim, to meet one 
[B. § 146, 3], Mt. viii. 34 R G (for DRIP? Gen. xiv. 17; 
xxx. 16; Ex. iv. 27; xviii. 7).* 

συν-αντι-λαμβάνομαι; 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. 
συναντιλάβηται; to lay hold along with, to strive to obtain 
with others, help ix obtaining, (τῆς ἐλευθερίας, Diod. 14, 8); 
to take hold with another (who is laboring), hence univ. 
to help: τινί. one, Lk. x. 40; Ro. viii. 26, (Ps. Ixxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 22; Ex. xviii. 22; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 4).* 

συν-απ-άγω: Pass., pres. ptep. συναπαγόμενος ; 1 aor. 
συναπήχθην; to lead away with or together: ἵππον, Xen. 
Cyr. 8,3, 23; τριήρεις, Hell. 5,1, 23; τὸν λαὸν μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, 
Sept. Ex. xiv. 6; pass. metaph. to be carried away with: 
with dat. of the thing, i. e. by a thing, so as to experi- 
ence with others the force of that which carries away 
(Zosim. hist. 5, 6, 9 αὐτὴ ἡ Σπάρτη συναπήγετο τῇ κοινῇ τῆς 
Ἑλλάδος ἁλώσει), to follow the impulse of a thing to 
what harmonizes with it, Gal. ii. 13; 2 Pet. iii. 17; to 
suffer one’s self to be carried away together with (some- 
thing that carries away), τοῖς ταπεινοῖς (opp. to τὰ ὑψηλὰ 
φρονεῖν), i. 6. to yield or submit one’s self to lowly things, 
conditions, employments, — not to evade their power, 
Ro. xii. 16.* 

συν-αποθνήσκω: 2 aor. συναπέθανον; to die together; 
with dat. of the pers. to die with one (Sir. xix. 10, and 
often in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down): Mk. xiv. 31; se. 
ὑμᾶς ἐμοί, that ye may die together with me, i.e. that my 


601 


συνδέω 


love to you may not leave me even were I appointed to 
die, 2 Co. vii. 3; sc. τῷ Χριστῷ (cf. W. 143 (136) ], to meet 
death as Christ did for the cause of God, 2 Tim. ii. 11.* 

συν-απ-ὀλλυμι: 2 aor. mid. συναπωλόμην ; fr. Hdt. down; 
to destroy together (Ps. xxv. (xxvi.) 9); mid. fo perish 
together (to be slain along with): τινί, with one, Heb. xi. 
81." 

συν-απο-στέλλω : 1 aor. συναπέστειλα ; to send with: 
τινά, 2 Co. xii. 18. (Sept.; Thuc., Xen., Dem., Plut., 
ale 

συν-αρμολογέω, -@: pres. pass. ptep. συναρμολογούμενος; 
(ἁρμολόγος binding, joining; fr. ἁρμός a joint, and λέγω); 
to join closely together; to frame together : οἰκοδομή, the 
parts of a building, Eph. ii. 21; σῶμα, the members of 
the body, Epb. iv. 16. (Eccles. writ. ; classic writ. use 
ovvappdocew and συναρμόζειν.) * 

συν-αρπάζω: 1 aor. συνήρπασα; plupf. συνηρπάκειν ; 1 
aor. pass. συνηρπάσθην; to seize by force: τινά, Acts vi. 
12; xix. 29; to catch or lay hold of (one, so that he is 
no longer his own master), Lk. viii. 29; to seize by force 
and carry away, Acts xxvii. 15. (Tragg., Arstph., Xen., 
al.) * 

συν-αυξάνω : fo cause to grow together; pres. inf. pass. 
συναυξάνεσθαι, to grow together: Mt xiii. 30. (Xen., 
Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

συνβ-, see συμβ- and σύν, II. fin. 

-, see συγγ- and σύν, IT. fin. 

σύν-δεσμος, -ov, ὁ, (συνδέω) ; 1. that which binds to- 
gether, a band, bond: of the ligaments by which the mem- 
bers of the human body are united together (Eur. Hipp. 
199; Tim. Loer. p. 100 Ὁ. [i. 6. 3, 3, p. 386 ed. Bekk.] ; 
Aristot. ἢ. a. 10, 7, 3 p. 638°, 9; Galen), Col. ii. 19 
[where see Bp. Lghtft.]; trop.: τῷ συνδέσμῳ τῆς εἰρήνης, 
i. 6. τῇ εἰρήνῃ ὡς συνδέσμῳ, Eph. iv. 3 (σύνδεσμος εὐνοίας 
x. φιλίας, Plut. Num. 6); ἥτις ἐστὶ σύνδ. τῆς τελειότητον, 
that in which all the virtues are so bound together that 
perfection is the result, and not one of them is wanting 
to that perfection, Col. iii. 14 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ]. 
εἰς σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας ὁρῶ σε ὄντα, I see that you have 
fallen into (cf. εἰμί, V. 2 a. p. 119", and see below) the 
bond of iniquity, i.e. forged by iniquity to fetter souls, 
Acts viii. 23 (the phrase σύνδ. ἀδικίας occurs in another 
sense in Is. lviii. 6). 2. that which is bound to- 
gether, a bundle: prop. σύνδ. ἐπιστολῶν, Idian. 4, 12, 
11 [6 ed. Bekk.]; hence some interpreters think that 
by σύνδ. ἀδικίας, in Acts viii. 23 above, Simon is described 
as “a bundle of iniquity”, compacted as it were of iniq- 
uity, (just as Cic. in Pison. 9, 21 calls a certain man “ani- 
mal ex omnium scelerum importunitate . .. concretum”’); 
but besides the circumstance that this interpretation is 
extremely bold, no examples can be adduced of this 
tropical use of the noun.” 

συν-δέω: in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down; 1. to tie 
together, to bind together. 2. to bind or fasten on all 
sides. 3. to bind just as (i. 6. jointly with) another: 
pf. pass. ptep. ὡς συνδεδεμένοι, as fellow-prisoners [A.V. 
as bound with them], Heb. xiii. 3 (συνδεδεμένος τῷ oF 
νοχόῳ, Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 3)." 


συνδοξάξω 


συν-δοξάζω: 1 aor. pass. συνεδοξάσθην; 1. to ap- 
prove together, join in approving: νόμοι συνδεδοξασμένοι 
ὑπὸ πάντων, Aristot. pol. 5, 7 (9), 20 p. 1310", 15. 2: 
to glorify together (Vulg. conglorifico) : se. σὺν Χριστῷ, to 
be exalted to the same glory to which Christ has been 
raised, Ro. viii. 17." 

σύν-δουλος, -ov, ὁ, (σύν and δοῦλος), a fellow-servant ; 
one who serves the same master with another; thus used 
of a. the associate of a servant (or slave) in the 
proper sense: Mt. xxiv. 49. b. one who with others 
serves (ministers to) a king: Mt. xviii. 28, 29, 31,33. 0. 
the colleague of one who is Christ’s servant in publishing 
the gospel: Col. i. 7; iv. 7 [(where cf. Bp. Lghtft.)]. d. 
one who with others acknowledges the same Lord, Jesus, 
‘and obeys his commands: Rev. vi. 11. e. one who 
with others is subject to the same divine authority in the 
Messianic economy: so of angels as the fellow-servants 
of Christians, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. (Moeris says, p. 
273, ὁμόδουλος ἀττικῶς, σύνδουλος ἑλληνικῶς. But the 
word is used by Arstph., Eur., Lysias.) * 

συνδρομή, -ῆς, ἡ, (συντρέχω), a running together, con- 
course, esp. hostile or riotous: Acts xxi. 30. (Aristot. 
rhetor. 3, 10 p. 14118, 29; Polyb., Diod., al.; 3 Mace. 
iii. 8.) * 

συν-εγείρω: 1 aor. συνήγειρα; 1 aor. pass. συνηγέρθην; 
to raise together, to cause torise together; Vulg.conresuscito 
[also conresurgo, resurgo]; (τὰ πεπτωκότα, 4 Mace. ii. 14; 
pass. to rise together from their seats, Is. xiv. 9; trop. 
λύπας καὶ θρήνους, Plut. mor. p. 117c¢.); in the N. T. 
trop. to raise up together from moral death (see @ava- 
tos, 2) to a new and blessed life devoted to God: ἡμᾶς 
τῷ Χριστῷ (risen from the dead, because the ground of 
the new Christian life lies in Christ’s resurrection), Eph. 
ii. 6; Col. iii. 1; ἐν Χριστῷ, Col. ii. 12.* 

συνέδριον, -ov, τό, (σύν and ἔδρα ; hence prop. ‘a sitting 
together’), in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down, any assembly 
(esp. of magistrates, judges, ambassadors), whether con- 
vened to deliberate or to pass judgment; Vulg. concilium ; 
in the Scriptures 1. any session or assembly of per- 
sons deliberating or adjudicating (Prov. xxii. 10; Ps. xxv. 
(xxvi.) 4; Jer. xv. 17; 2 Mace. xiv. 5; 4 Mace. xvii. 
17): συνήγαγον συνέδριον, [A. V. gathered a council], Jn. 
xi. 47. 2. spec. a. the Sanhedrin, the great council 
at Jerusalem (Talm. }°17793D), consisting of seventy-one 
members, viz. scribes (see γραμματεύς, 2), elders, prom- 
inent members of the high-priestly families (hence called 
ἀρχιερεῖς ; See ἀρχιερεύς, 2), and the high-priest, the pres- 
ident of the body. The fullest periphrasis for Sanhe- 
drin is found in Mt. xxvi. 3 RG; Mk. xiv. 43, 53, (viz. 
οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ of γραμματεῖς καὶ of πρεσβύτεροι). The 
more important causes were brought before this tribunal, 
inasmuch as the Roman rulers of Judza had left to it 
the power of trying such cases, and also of pronouncing 
sentence of death, with the limitation that a capital 
sentence pronounced by the Sanhedrin was not valid 
unless it were confirmed by the Roman procurator 
(cf. Jn. xviii. 31; Joseph. antt. 20, 9,1). The Jews 
trace the origin of the Sanhedrin to Num. xi. 16 sq. The 


60 


2 συνείδησις 
Sanhedrin [A.V. council] is mentioned in Mt. v. 22; 


xxvi. 59; Mk. xiv.55; xv.1; Lk. xxii.66; Acts iv. 15; 
v. 21, 27, 34,41; vi. 12, 15; xxii. 30; xxiii. 1, 6,15, 20, 
28; xxiv. 20; used [(as in class. Grk.)] of the place 
of meeting in Acts iv. 15. b. the smaller tribunal 
or council (so A. V.) which every Jewish town had for 
the decision of the less important cases (see κρίσις, 4) : 
Mt. x. 17; Mk. xiii. 9. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Syne- 
drium; Leyrer in Herzog ed.1s. v. Synedrium [Strack 
in ed. 2]; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 23, II., 
III. [and in Riehm p. 1595 sqq.]; Holtzmann in Schenkel 
ν. p. 446sqq.; [BB. DD.s. v. Sanhedrim (esp. Ginsburg 
in Alex.’s Kitto) ; Hamburger, Real-Encycl. ii. pp. 1147 
-1155; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 553 sqq.; Far- 
rar, Life of Christ, Excurs. xiii. ].* 

συν-είδησις, -ews, 7, (συνεῖδον), Lat. conscientia, [lit. 
‘joint-knowledge’; see σύν, II. 4], 1. 6. a. the con- 
sciousness of anything: with a gen of the obj., τῶν ἅμαρ- 
τιῶν, a soul conscious of sins, Heb. x. 2 (rod μύσους, Diod. 
4, 65; συνείδησις εὐγενής, consciousness of nobility; a 
soul mindful of its noble origin, Hdian. 7, 1, 8 [3 ed. 
Bekk.]). b. the soul as distinguishing between what 
is morally good and bad, prompting to do the former and 
shun the latler, commending the one, condemning the other ; 
conscience: with a gen. of the subj., ἡ o. τινος, Ro. ii. 
15 (where the idea of ἡ συνείδησις is further explained 
by καὶ μεταξὺ... ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων [ef. W. 580 (539); 
see ἀπολογέομαι, 2, and συμμαρτυρέω]); Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co. 
viii. 7 [0 W. § 30, 1 a.], 10,12; x. 29; 2Co.i. 12; iv. 2; 
v. 11; Heb. ix. 14 (ἡ τοῦ φαύλου συνείδησις, Philo, fragm., 
vol. ii. p. 659 ed. Mangey [vi. p. 217 sq. ed. Richter]) ; 
ἡ ἰδία συνείδησις, 1 Tim. iv. 2; ἄλλη συνείδ. i. 4. ἄλλου 
τινὸς συν. 1 Co. x. 39; διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν, for conscience’ 
sake, because conscience requires it (viz. the conduct 
in question), Ro. xiii. 5; in order not to occasion 
scruples of conscience (in another), 1 Co. x. 28; μηδὲν 
ἀνακρίνειν διὰ τὴν συνείδ (anxiously) questioning nothing, 
as though such questioning were demanded by con- 
science, 1 Co. x. 25, 27; διὰ συνείδησιν θεοῦ, because con- 
science is impressed and governed by the idea of God 
(and so understands that griefs are to be borne accord- 
ing to God’s will), 1 Pet. ii. 19; ἡ συνείδ. rod εἰδώλου, a 
conscience impressed and controlled by an idea of the 
idol (i.e. by a notion of the idol’s existence and power), 
1 Co. viii. 7 Rec.; τελειῶσαί τινα κατὰ τὴν συνείδησιν (sc. 
αὐτοῦ), so to perfect one that his own conscience is sat- 
isfied, i.e. that he can regard himself as free from guilt, 
Heb. ix. 9; ἐλέγχεσθαι ὑπὸ τῆς συν. In. viii. 9 (ὑπὸ τοῦ 
συνειδότος, Philo de Josepho ὃ 9 fin.; συνέχεσθαι τῇ ovr 
ειδ. Sap. xvii. 10); ἡ συνείδησις is said μαρτυρεῖν, Ro. ix. 
1; συμμαρτυρεῖν, Ro. ii. 15; τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συν. 2 Co. 
i. 12. With epithets: ἀσθενής, not strong enough to 
distinguish clearly between things lawful for a Christian 
and things unlawful, 1 Co. viii. 7, οἵ. 10; συνείδ. ἀγαθή, 
a conscience reconciled to God, 1 Pet. iii. 21; free from 
guilt, consciousness of rectitude, of right conduct, Acts 
xxiii. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5, (Hdian. 6, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]) ; ἔχειν 
συνείδ. ἀγαθήν, 1 Tim. i. 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16, (ἐν ἀγαθῇ συν 


7 


συνεῖδον 


603 


συνεργος 


ed. ὑπάρχειν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.41,1); ἔχειν συν. καλήν, | xix. 29; 2 Co. viii. 19. ({Diod. fr. lib. 37, 5,1 and 4 ed. 


Heb. xiii. 18 ; συν. καθαρά, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2Tim.i. 3, (Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 7, cf. ἁγνὴ συν. ibid. 1, 3; καθαρὸς τῇ συν- 
εἰδήσει, Ignat. ad Trall. 7,2); ἀπρόσκοπος, Acts xxiv. 
16; πονηρά, a mind conscious of wrong-doing, Heb. x. 
22 ([ἐν συνειδήσει πὸ ηρᾷ, ‘Teaching’ ete. 4, 14]; ἀπρε- 
ms, Leian. amor. 49). ἡ συνείδησις καθαρίζεται ἀπὸ κτλ. 
Heb. ix. 14; μολύνεται, 1 Co. vill. 7; μιαίνεται, πὶ. τ 158 
(μηδὲν ἑκουσίως ψεύδεσθαι μηδὲ μιαίνειν τὴν αὑτοῦ συνείδη- 
σιν, Dion. Hal. jud. Thue. 8. ἅπασιν ἡμῖν ἡ συνείδησις 
θεός, Menand. 597 p. 108 ed. Didot; βροτοῖς ἅπασιν ἡ συν- 
εἰδησις θεός, ibid. 654 p. 101 ed. Didot ; Epictet. fragm. 
91 represents ἡ συνείδησις as filling the same office in 
adults which a tutor [παιδαγωγύς, q-v-] holds towards 
boys; with Philo, Plutarch, and others, τὸ συνειδός is 
more common. In Sept. once for 77, Eccl. x. 20; [i-q. 
conscience, Sap. xvii. 11; ef. Delitzsch, Brief an d. Rom. 
p-11]). Cf. esp. Jahnel, Diss. de conscientiae notione, 
qualis fuerit apud veteres et apud Christianos usque ad 
aevi medii exitum. Berol. 1862 [also the same, Ueber den 
Begr. Gewissen in d. Griech. Philos. (Berlin, 1872) ]; 
Kahler, Das Gewissen. I. die Entwickelung seiner Na- 
men u. seines Begriffes. i. Alterth. u. N. T. (Halle, 1878); 
[also in Herzog ed. 2, 5. v. Gewissen; Zezschwitz, Pro- 
fangricitat u.s.w. pp. 52-57; Schenkel, 8. v. Gewissen 
both in Herzog ed. 1, and in his BL.; P. Ewald, De 
vocis συν. ap. script. Novi Test. vi ac potestate (pp. 91; 
1883); other reff. in Schaff-Herzog, s. v. Conscience ].* 

ovv-eidov, ptep. συνιδών ; pf. σύνοιδα, ptep. fem. gen. 
συνειδυίας (Acts ν. 2 R G,-ysL T Tr WH; ef. B. 12 (11); 
[ Tdf. Proleg. p.117; WH. App. p.156]); (see εἴδω) ; fr. 
Hdt. down; 1. to see (have seen) together with oth- 
ers. 2. to see (have seen) in one’s mind, with one’s 
self (cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 120; on Mark 
pp- 36 and 78; [see σύν, II.1 and 47), i. e. to understand, 
perceive, comprehend: συνιδών, when he had understood 
it, Acts xii. 12[A.V. considered]; xiv. 6 [became aware}, 
(2 Mace. iv. 41; xiv. 26,30; 3 Mace. v.50; Polyb. 1, 4, 
6; 3, 6,9; ete.; Joseph. antt. 7, 15,1; b.j. 4, 5,4; Plut. 
Them. 7). Perfect σύνοιδα [cf. σύν, u.s.] 1. to 
know with another, be privyto[so A.V.]: Actsv.2. 2. 
to know in one’s mind or with one’s self; to be conscious of: 
τὶ ἐμαυτῷ, 1 Co. iv. 4 [R. V. know nothing against myself 
(cf. Wright, Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., 5. v. ‘ By’)] (τὴν 
ἀδικίαν, Joseph. antt. 1, 1,4; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given 
by Passow s. v. σύνοιδα, a.; [L. and S. s. v. σύνοιδα, 2]; 
foll. by ὅτι, [Dion. Hal. ii. 995, 9]; Barn. ep. 1, (4) 3).* 

σύν-ειμι, ptep. gen. plur. masc. συνόντων : impf. 3 pers. 
plur. συνῆσαν; (σύν, and εἰμί to be) ; fr. Hom. Od. 7, 270 
down; to be with: τινί, one, Lk. ix. 18 [WH mrg. συνήντη- 
cay]; Acts xxii. 11.* 

σύν-ειμι, ptep. συνιών; (σύν, and εἶμι to go); fr. Hom. 
down ; to come together: Lk. viii. 4.* 

συν-εισ-έρχομαι : 2 aor. συνεισῆλθον ; to enter together: 
τινί, with one, —foll. by an acc. of the place, Jn. vi. 22; 
xviii. 15. (Eur., Thue., Xen., al.; Sept.) * 

συν-έκδημος, -ov, 6, 7, (σύν, and ἔκδημος away from one’s 
people), a fellow-traveller, companion in travel: Acts 


Dind.]}; Joseph. vit.14; Plut. Oth. 5; Palaeph. fab. 46, 4.)* 

συν-εκ-λεκτός, -7), -dv, (see ἐκλεκτός), elected or chosen 
(by God to eternal life) together with: 1 Pet. ν. 18." 

συν-ἐλαύνω: 1 aor. συνήλασα ; fr. Hom. down; to drive 
together, to compel; trop. to constrain by exhortation, 
urge: τινὰ eis εἰρήνην, to be at peace again, Acts vii. 26 
RG (εἰς τὸν τῆς σοφίας ἔρωτα, Ael. y. h. 4, 15).* 

συν-επι-μαρτυρέω, -@, ptcp. gen. sing. masc. συνεπιμαρ- 
tupovrtos ; to attest together with; to join in bearing wit- 
ness, to unite in adding testimony: Heb. ii. 4. (Aristot., 
Polyb., [Plut.], Athen.,Sext. Emp.; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
23,5; 43, 1.)* 

συν-επι-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. συνεπεθέμην ; to place upon 
(or near) together with, help in putting on; mid. to attack 
jointly, to assail together, set upon with, (see ἐπιτίθημι, 
2b.): Acts xxiv.9GLTTrWH([RV. joined in the 
charge) (so in Thue. 6, 10; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2,3; Plat. 
Phileb. p. 16 a.; Polyb. 5, 78, 4; Diod. 1, 21).* 

συν-έπομαι : impf. συνειπόμην ; fr. Hom. down; to fol- 
low with, to accompany: τινί, one, Acts xx. 4.* 

συνεργέω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. συνήργει; (συνεργός, 
q- v-); fr. Eur., Xen., Dem. down; Vulg. codperor [(in 
2 Co. vi. 1 adjuvo)]; to work together, help in work, be a 
partner in labor: 1 Co. xvi. 16; 2 Co. vi. 1; to put forth 
power together with and thereby to assist, Mk. xvi. 20; 
τινί, with one ἡ πίστις συνήργει τοῖς ἔργοις, faith (was 
not inactive, but by coworking) caused Abraham to pro- 
duce works, Jas. ii. 22 [here Trtxt. συνέργει (hardly 
collat. form of cuveipy to unite, but) a misprint for 
-γεῖ]; τινὶ εἴς τι (in prof. writ. also πρός τι, see Passow 
[or L. and S.] s. v.), to assist, help, (be serviceable to) 
one for a thing, Ro. viii. 28 [A. V. ell things work together 
for good); τί τινι εἴς τι, a breviloquence equiv. to cuvep- 
γῶν πορίζω τί τινι, so that acc. to the reading πάντα cur 
epyet 6 θεός the meaning is, ‘for them that love God, 
God coworking provides all things for good or so that 
it is well with them’ (Fritzsche), [R. V. mrg. God work- 
eth all things with them for good], Ro. viii. 28 Lchm. [WH 
in br.; ef. B. 193 (167)], (ἑαυτοῖς τὰ συμφέροντα, Xen. 
mem. 3, 5,16). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. vol. ii. p. 
193 sq.* 

συνεργός, -όν, (σύν and EPYQ), [fr. Pind.], Eurip., 
Thue. down, a companion in work, fellow-worker, (Vulg. 
adjutor [Phil. ii. 25; 3 Jn. 8 codperator]): in the N. T. 
with a gen. of the pers., one who labors with another in 
furthering the cause of Christ, Ro. xvi. 8, 9, 21; Phil. ii. 
25; iv. 3; [1 Th. iii. 2 Ree.]; Philem. 1, 24; θεοῦ, one 
whom God employs as an assistant, as it were (a fellow- 
worker with God), 1 Th. iii. 2 (G Ltxt. WH mrg. but 
with rod θεοῦ in br.; Ree. et al. διάκονον, 4. ν. 1). plur.: 
1 Co. iii. 9; with gen. of the thing (a joint-promoter [ A.V. 
helper), συν. ἐσμεν τῆς χαρᾶς. we labor with you to the 
end that we may rejoice in your Christian state, 2 Co. i. 
24. εἰς ὑμᾶς, (my) fellow-worker to you-ward, in refer- 
ence to you, 2 Co. viii. 23; εἰς τὴν Bac. τ. θεοῦ, for the 
advancement of the kingdom of God, Col. iv. 11; τῇ ἀλη- 
θείᾳ, for (the benefit of) the truth, [al. render (so R. V.) 


συνέρχομαι 


‘with the truth’; see Westcott δὰ loc.], 3 Jn. 8. 
Mace. viii. 7; xiv. 5.)* 

συν-έρχομαι ; impf. συνηρχόμην ; 2 aor. συνῆλθον, once 
(Acts x.45 T Tr WH) 3 pers. plur. συνῆλθαν (see ἀπέρ- 
xouat, init.); pf. ptep. συνεληλυθώς; plupf. 3 pers. plur. 
συνεληλύθεισαν ; fr. Hom. down (Il. 10, 224 in tmesis) ; 
1. to come together, i.e. a. to assemble: absol., Mk. 
iii. 20; Acts i.6; ii.6; x.27, xvi. 135 xix.32; xxi. 22; 
[xxii. 30 GLT Tr WH]; xxviii. 17; [1 Co. xiv. 20; 
foll. by ἐκ with gen. of place, Lk. v.17 Lehm. txt.]; [0]]. 
by εἰς with an acc. of the place, Acts v. 16; πρός twa, 
Mk. vi. 33 Ree.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό [see ἐπί, C. 1.1 4.1,1 Co. xi. 
20; xiv. 23 [here Ltxt. ἔλθῃ}; with a dat. of the pers. 
with one, which so far as the sense is concerned is equiv. 
to unto one (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 2; [L. 
and 5. s.v. II. 1 and 3; ef. W. 215 (202)]), Mk. xiv. 53 
[here T WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the dat.]; Jn. xi. 33; 
with adverbs of place: ἐνθάδε, Acts xxv. 173; ὅπου, Jn. 
xviii. 20; [foll. by aninfin. of purpose, Lk. ν. 15]; foll. 
by es, — indicating either the end, as εἰς τὸ φαγεῖν, 1 Co. 
xi. 33; or the result, 1 Co. xi. 17, 34; ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ, in 
sacred assembly [R. V. mrg. in congregation], 1 Co. xi. 
18 ΟΥ̓. § 50, 4a.). b. Like the Lat. convenio i. q. 
coco: of conjugal cohabitation, Mt. i. 18 [but οἵ. Weiss 
ad loc. (and the opinions in Meyer)] (Xen. mem. 2, 2, 
4; Diod. 8, 58; Philo de caritat. § 14; de fortitud. § 7; 
de speciall. lege. §4; Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 1 and 7, 9, 5; 
Apollod. bibl. 1, 3, 3); with ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό added, 1 Co. vii. 
5 Ree. 2. to go (depart) or come with one, to ac- 
company one (see ἔρχομαι, II. p. 252"): τινί, with one, Lk. 
xxiii. 55 [Tr txt. br. the dat.]; Acts i. 21 [here A. V. 
company with}; ix. 39; x. 23,453; xi. 12; with εἰς τὸ 
ἔργον added, Acts xv. 38; σύν τινι, Acts xxi. 16.” 

συν-εσθίω ; impf. συνήσθιον ; 2 aor. συνέφαγον ; to eat 
with, take food together with [cf. σύν, II. 1]: τινί, with 
one, Lk. xv. 2; Acts x. 41; xi. 3; 1Co. v.11, (2S. xii. 
17); pera τινος, Gal. ii. 12; Gen. xliii. 31; Ex. xviii. 12, 
[ef. W. § 52, 4,15]. (Plat., Plut., Leian.)* 

σύνεσις, -ews, 1, (συνίημι, q- V-) 5 1. a running 
together, a flowing together: of two rivers, Hom. Od. 10, 
515. 2. a. fr. Pind. down, understanding: Lk. 
ii. 47; 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Is. xxix. 14); Eph. iii. 4; Col. ii. 
2; 2 Tim. ii. 7; πνευματική, Col. i. 9. b. the under- 
standing, i. e. the mind so far forth as it understands: Mk. 
xii. 33; Sap.iv.11. (Sept. for 2°3, TIN, AYA, pv, 
Day, ete.; also for S30, apoem.) [Syn. see σοφία, fin. ; 
ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 9; Schmidt ch. 147, 8.]* 

συνετός, -7, -dv, (συνίημι), fr. Pind. down, Sept. for D3, 
1133, ete., intelligent, having understanding, wise, learned: 
Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; Acts xiii. 7; 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Is. 
xxix. 14). [Sywn. see σοφός, fin.]* 

συν-ευδοκέω, -@; (see εὐδοκέω, init.) ; a. to be 
pleased together with, to approve together (with others) : 
absol. (yet so that the thing giving pleasure is evident 
from the context), Acts xxii. 20 GLT Tr WH; witha 
dat. of the thing, Lk. xi. 48; Acts viii. 1; xxii. 20 Rec. 
({Polyb. 24, 4,13]; 1 Macc. i. 57; 2 Mace. xi. 24). b. 
to be pleased at the same time with, consent, agree to, 


(2 


604 


συνήθεια 


([Polyb. 32, 22, 9]; 2 Mace. xi. 35); foll. by an inf. 1 Co. 
vii. 12 sq. [R.V. here be content]; w. a dat. of a pers. to 
applaud [R. V. consent with], Ro.i.32. (Diod.; eccles. 
writ.) * 

συν-ενωχέω, -ῶ : pres. pass. ptep. συνευωχούμενος : (εὐω- 
χέω, to feed abundantly, to entertain; fr. εὖ and ἔχω); 
to entertain together; pass. to feast sumpluously with: 
Jude 12; τινί, with one, 2 Pet. ii. 13. ([Aristot. eth. 
Eud. 7, 12, 14 p. 1248», 51, Joseph., Leian., al.) * 

συν-εφ-ίστημι: to place over or appoint together; 2 aor. 
συνεπέστην; to rise up together: κατά τινος, against one, 
Acts xvi. 32, [(From Thue. down.) ]* 

ovv-exw; fut. συνέξω; 2 aor. συνέσχον; Pass., pres. 
συνέχομαι; impf. συνειχύμην ; fr. Tom. down; ab 
to hold together; any whole, lest it fall to pieces or some- 
thing fall away from it: τὸ συνέχον τὰ πάντα, the deity 
as holding all things together, Sap. i. 7 (see Grimm ad 
loc.). 2. to hold together with constraint, to com- 
press, i. 6. a. to press together with the hand: ra 
dra, to stop the ears, Acts vii. 57 (τὸ στόμα, Is. lii. 15; 
τὸν οὐρανόν, to shut, that it may not rain, Deut. xi. 17; 1 
K. viii. 35). Ὁ. to press on every side: τινά, Lk. viii. 
45; with πάντοθεν added, of a besieged city, Lk. xix. 
43. 3. 10 hold completely, i. 6. a. το hold fast: 
prop. a prisoner, Lk. xxii. 63 (τὰ αἰχμάλωτα, Leian. Tox. 
39); metaph. in pass. to be held by, closely occupied with, 
any business (Sap. xvii. 19 (20); Hdian. 1, 17, 22, (9 
ed. Bekk.); Ael. v. h. 14, 22): τῷ λόγῳ, in teaching the 
word, Acts xviii. 5 GLUT Tr WH [here R.V. constrained 
by). B. fo constrain, oppress, of ills laying hold of 
one and distressing him; pass. to be holden with i.q. 
afflicted with, suffering from: νόσοις, Mt. iv. 24; πυρετῷ, 
Lk. iv. 38; δυσεντερίῳ, Acts xxviii. 8 (many exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down are given in Passow 
s. v. συνέχω, 1. ἃ.; [L. and S.s.v. I. 4]); of affections 
of the mind: φόβῳ, Lk. viii. 37 (ὀδυρμῷ, Ael. v. h. 14, 
22; ἀλγηδόνι, Plut. de fluv. 2, 1; ἀθυμίᾳ, ib. 7,5; 19, 15 
λύπῃ, 17, 3; for other exx. see Grimm on Sap. xvii. 
10). γ- 10 urge, impel: trop. the soul, ἡ ayazn.. - 
συνέχει ἡμᾶς, 2 Co. v. 14[ A.V. constraineth]; πῶς (how 
greatly, how sorely) συνέχομαι, Lk. xii. 50 [A. V. strait 
ened]; τῷ πνεύματι, Acts xviii. 5 Ree. συνέχομαι ἐκ 
τῶν δύο, I am hard pressed on both sides, my mind is 
impelled or disturbed from each side [R. V. J am in a 
strait betwixt the two], Phil. i. 23.* 

συνΐ-, see gu¢-, and σύν, II. sub fin. 

συν-ήδομαι ; 1. in Grk. writ. chiefly fr. Soph., 
Eur., Xen. down, to rejoice together with (another or 
others [ef. σύν, II. 17). 2. in the N. T. once to re- 
joice or delight with one’s self or inwardly (see σύν, IL. 
4): τινί, in a thing, Ro. vii. 22, where ef. Fritzsche; [al. 
refer this also to 1; cf. Meyer].* 

συνήθεια, -as, ἡ, (συνηθής, and this fr. σύν and 960s), fr. 
Isocr., Xen., Plat. down, Lat. consuetudo, i. 6. 1. in 
ltercourse (with one), intimacy: 4 Mace. xiii. 21. 2. 
custom: Jn. xviii. 39 [ef. B. $139, 45]; 1 Co. xi. 16. 3. 
a being used to: with a gen. of the object to which one 
is accustomed, 1 Co. viii. 7 L T Tr ΜῊ." 


συνηλικιώτης 


συν-ηλικιώτης, -ου, ὁ, (fr. σύν, and ἡλικία α. v.), one of 
the same age, an equal in age: Gal. i. 14. (Diod. 1, 53 
fin.; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 49 init.; but in both pass. the 
best codd. have ἡλικιώτης ; [Corp. inserr. iii. p. 434 no. 
4929]; Alciphr. 1,12). Cf. συμμαθητής." 

συνθάπτω: 2 aor. pass. συνετάφην ; fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down; to bury together with: τῷ Χριστῷ, together 
with Christ, pass., διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον se. 
αὐτοῦ, Ro. vi. 4: ἐν τῷ βαπτίσματι, Col. ii. 12. For all 
who in the rite of baptism are plunged under the water, 
thereby declare that they put faith in the expiatory 
death of Christ for the pardon of their past sins; there- 
fore Paul likens baptism to a burial by which the former 
sinfulness is buried, i. e. utterly taken away.* 

συν θλάω, -G: 1 fut. pass. συνθλασθήσομαι; to break to 
pieces, shatter, (Wulg. confringo, conquasso): Mt. xxi. 
44 [but Tom. L Trmrg. WH br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18. 
(Sept.; [Manetho, Alex. ap. Athen., Eratosth., Aristot. 
(v. 1.)], Diod., Plut., al.) * : 

συν-θλίβω ; impf. συνέθλεβον ; to press together, press on 
all sides: twa, of a thronging multitude, Mk. v. 24, 31. 
(Plat., Aristot., Strab., Joseph., Plut.) * 

συν-θρύπτω, ptcp. nom. plur. masc. συνθρύπτοντες ; to 
break in pieces, to crush: metaph. τὴν καρδίαν, to break 
one’s heart, i.e. to deprive of strength and courage, 
dispirit, incapacitate for enduring trials, Acts xxi. 13. 
(In eccles. and Byzant. writ.) * 

συν-ιέω, See συνίημι. 

συν-ίημι, 2 pers. plur. συνίετε, 3 pers. plur. συνιοῦσιν 
(Mt. xiii. 13 RGT; 2 Co. x. 12 Προ. fr. the unused 
form cuméw), and συνιᾶσιν (2 Co. x.12L T Tr WH), and 
συνίουσιν (Mt. xiii. 13 L Tr WH fr. the unused συνίω), 
subjune. 3 pers. plur. cumaoe (RG LT Tr in Mk. iv. 12 
and Lk. viii. 10, fr. the unused συνιέω or fr. συνίημι) and 
συνίωσι (WH in Mk. and Lk. ll. ce., fr. the unused συνίω), 
impvy. 2 pers. plur. συνίετε, inf. συνιέναι, ptep. συνιῶν (Ro. 
iii. 11 RG T fr. συνιέω), and συνίων (ibid. L Tr WH, and 
often in Sept., fr. συνίω), and cumeis (Mt. xiii. 23 Beer 
WH; Eph. v.17 RG; but quite erroneously συνιών, Grsb. 
in Mt. lc. [AIf. in Ro. iii. 11; ef. WH. App. p.167; Taf. 
Proleg. p. 122]; W.81(77 sq.); Β. 48 (42); Fritzsche on 
Rom. vol. i. p. 174. sq.); fut. συνήσω (Ro. xv. 21); 1 aor. 
συνῆκα; 2 aor. subjunc. συνῆτε, συνῶσι, impv. 2 pers. 
plur. σύνετε (Mk. vii. 14 LT Tr WH); (σύν, and typ to 
send) ; 1. prop. to set or bring together, in a hostile 
sense, of combatants, Hom. Il. 1, 8; 7, 210. 2. to 
put (as it were) the perception with the thing per- 
ceived; to set or join together in the mind, i.e. to under- 
stand, (so fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 1.3 and Sawn) 5 
with an acc. of the thing, Mt. xiii. 23, 51; Lk. ii. 50; 
xviii. 34; xxiv. 45; foll. by ὅτι, Mt. xvi. 12 ; xvii. 13; 
foll. by an indirect quest., Eph. v. 17; ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις, ‘on 
the loaves’ as the basis of their reasoning [see ἐπί, B. 2 
a. a.], Mk. vi. 52; where what is understood is evident 
from the preceding context, Mt. xiii. 19; xv. 10; Mk. 
vii. 14; absol., Mt. xiii. 18-15; xv.10; Mk. iv. 12; viii. 
17, 21; Lk. viii. 10; Acts vii. 25°; xxviii. 26 sq.; Ro. xv. 
21: 2 Co. x. 12; ὁ συνιῶν or συνίων as subst. [B. 295 


605 


συνοικέων 


(258 sq.); W. 109 (104)], the man of understanding, 
Hebraistically i. q. a good and upright man (as having 
knowledge of those things which pertain to salvation ; 
see μωρός): Ro. iii. 11 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2). [Syn. see 
γινώσκω, fin.]* 

συνιστάνω and συνιστάω, see the foll. word. 

συν-ίστημι (Ro. iii. 5; v. 8; xvi. 1; 2 Co. x. 18; Gal. 
ii. 18 Rec.; ptep. συνιστάντες, 2 Co. iv. 21, Τ Tr; vi. 41, 
T Tr), or συνιστάνω (2 Co. ν. 12; Gal. ii. 18 GLTTr 
WH; inf. συνιστάνειν, 2 Co. iii. 1 R GT WH; ptep. συν- 
ἱστάνων, 2 Co. iv. 2 WH; vi. 4 WH; x. 12,.18 LT Tr 
WH), or συνιστάω (inf. συνιστᾶν, 2 Co. iii. 1L Tr; ptep 
συνιστῶν, 2 Co. iv. 2 RG; vi.4 RG; x. 18 Rec.; see 
ἵστημι) ; 1 aor. συνέστησα; pf. συνέστηκα; 2 pf. ptep. συν- 
eoras[nom. plur. neut. -τῶτα, 2 Pet. iii. 5 WHaurg.]; pres. 
pass. inf. συνίστασθαι; fr. Hom. Il. 14, 96 down; 2. 
to place together, to set in the same place, to bring or band 
together; in the 2 aor., pf. and plupf. intransitively, to 
stand with (or near): συνεστώς τινι, Lk. ix. 32. 2. 
to set one with another i.e. by way of presenting or 
introducing him, i. e. to commend (Xen., Plat., Dem., 
Polyb., Joseph., Plut.) : τινά, 2 Co. iii. 1; Wie Ais) χα, 1. 
18; τινά τινι, Ro. xvi. 1; 2 Co. v. 12 [ef. B. 393 (836)]; 
τινὰ πρὸς συνείδησίν twos, 2 Co. iv. 2; pass. ὑπό τινος, 2 
Co. xii. 11, (1 Mace. xii. 43; 2 Mace. iv. 24). 3. 
to put together by way of composition or combination, 
to teach by combining and comparing, hence to show, 
prove, establish, exhibit, [W. 23 (22)]: τί, Ro. iii. 53 v. 8, 
(εὔνοιαν, Polyb. 4, 5, 6); ἑαυτοὺς ὥς τινες, 2 Co. vi. 4; 
with two acc. one of the object, the other of the predi- 
cate, Gal. ii. 18 (Diod. 13,91; συνίστησιν αὐτὸν προφήτην, 
Philo rer. div. haer. § 52); foll. by an ace. with inf. [ef. 
B. 274 (236)], 2 Co. vii. 11 (Diod. 14, 45). 4. to 
put together (i. e. unite parts into one whole), pf., plupf. 
and 2 aor. to be composed of, consist: ἐξ ὕδατος x. δι ὕδα- 
τος, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [ef. W. § 45,6 a.; (see above, init.) ]; to 
cohere, hold together : τὰ πάντα συνέστηκεν ἐν αὐτῷ, Col. i. 
17 (Plat. de rep. 7 p. 530 a.; Tim. p. 61 a.; [Bonitz’s 
index to Aristotle (Berlin Acad. ed.) s. ν. συνιστάναι], and 
often in eccles. writ.; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c-]).* 

[συν-κατα-νεύω : 1 aor. ptep. συνκατανεύσας ; to consent 
to, agree with: Acts xviii. 27 WH (rejected) mrg. (Polyb. 
5. ΠΡ. 65 31} ἢ} 

συνκ-, See συγκ- 

συνλ-, see συλὰ- 

συνμ-. see συμμ- 

συν᾿οδεύω; fo journey with, travel in company with : with 
a dat. of the pers., Acts ix. 7. (Hdian. 4, 7, 11 [6 ed. 
Bekk.], Leian., Plut., al.; Sap. vi. 25.) * 

συνοδία, -as, 7, (σύνοδος), a journey in company; by 
meton. a company of travellers, associates on a journey, α 
caravan, [A. V. company]: Lk. ii. 44. (Strab., Plut., 
[Epict., Joseph.; ξυνοδεία, Gen. xxxvii. 25 cod. Venet. 
i. q- family, Neh. vii. 5, 64, Sept.], al.) * 

συν-οικέω, -ῶ; to dwell together (Vulg. cohabito) : of the 
domestic association and intercourse of husband and 
wife, 1 Pet. iii. 7; for many exx. of this use, see Passow 
s.v.1; [L. and 5. s.v. I. 2]. 


cf. σύν, II. fin. 


συνοικοδομέω 


συν-οικοδομέω, -ὥ: pres. pass. συνοικοδομοῦμαι; (Vulg. 
coaedifico) ; to build together i.e. a. to build together 
or with others [1 Esdr. v. 65 (66) ]. b. το put logeth- 
er or construct by building, out of several things to build 
up one whole, (οἰκία εὖ συνῳκοδομημένη καὶ συνηρμοσμένη, 
of the human body, Philo de praem. et poen. § 20): Eph. 
ii. 22. (Besides, in Thue., Diod., Dio Cass., Plut.) * 

συν-ομιλέω, -ὦ ; fo talk with: τινί, one, Acts x. 27. (to 
howl intercourse with, [Ceb. tab. 13 ; Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 
1], Epiphan., Tzetz.) * 

συν-ομορέω, -@; (συνόμορος, having joint boundaries, 
bordering on, fr. σύν and ὅμορος, and this fr. duds joint, 
and ὅρος a boundary); to border on, be contiguous to, 
[A. V. join hard]: τινί, to a thing, Acts xviii. 7. (By- 
zant. writ.) " 

συν-οχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (συνέχω, q. ν.), α holding together, nar- 
rowing; narrows, the contracting part of a way, Hom. II. 
23, 330. Metaph. straits, distress, anguish: Lk. xxi. 25; 
with καρδίας added, 2 Co. ii. 4, (contractio animi, Cic. Tuse. 
1, 37, 90; opp. to effusio, 4, 31, 66; συνοχὴν κ- ταλαιπω- 
ρίαν, Job xxx. 3; [ef. Judg. ii. 3; plur. Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 
1 Δα} 

συνπ-, see συμπ- 

[συνσ-, see συσ- and συσσ-ἢ 

συνστ-, 566 συστ- 

συν-ττάσσω: 1 aor. συνέταξα; ἔν. Hdt. down; a. 
to put in order with or together, to arrange; b. to 
(put together), constitute, i. e. to prescribe, appoint, (Aes- 
chin., Dem.; physicians are said συντάσσειν φάρμακον, 
Ael. v. h. 9, 13; [Plut. an sen. sit gerend. resp. 4, 8]) : 
τινί, Mt. xxi. 6 L.Tr WH; xxvi. 19; xxvii. 10; Sept. 
often for Τὴν." 

συντέλεια, -as, 7, (συντελής), completion, consummation, 
end, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. on; Sept. chiefly for 
93; for YP. in Dan. xii. 4, 13; in other senses fr. Aes- 
chyl. down): αἰῶνος or τοῦ αἰῶνος, Mt. xiii. 39,40 L T Tr 
WH, 49; xxiv. 3; xxviii. 20; τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, Mt. xiii. 
40 RG; τῶν αἰώνων, Heb. ix. 26 (see αἰών, 3 p. 19” bot. 
(ef. Herm.sim. 9, 12, 3 and Hilgenfeld ad loc.]); καιροῦ 
and καιρῶν, Dan. ix. 27; xii. 4; τῶν ἡμερῶν, ibid. 13; 
ἀνθρώπου, of his death, Sir. xi. 27 (25); cf. xxi. 9." 

συν-τελέω, -ὦ ; fut. συντελέσω ; 1 aor. συνετέλεσα ; Pass., 
pres. inf. συντελεῖσθαι; 1 aor. συνετελέσθην (Jn. ii. 8 Τ' 
WH ‘rejected’ mrg.), ptep. συντελεσϑείς ; fr. Thuc. and 
Xen. down; Sept. often for 93; also sometimes for 
DIA, WY, ete. ; 1. to end together or at the same 
2. to end completely; bring to an end, finish, 
complete: τοὺς λόγους, Mt. vii. 28 RG; τὸν πειρασμόν, 
Lk. iv. 13; ἡμέρας, pass., Lk. iv. 2; Acts xxi. 27, (Jobi. 
δ; Dab: x. 7). 3. to accomplish, bring to fulfilment; 
pass. fo come to pass, Mk. xiii. 4; λόγον, a word, i. 6. a 
prophecy, Ro. ix. 28 (ῥῆμα, Lam. ii. 17). 4. to 
effect, make, [cf. our conclude}: διαθήκην, Heb. viii. 8 
(Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 8, 15). 5. to finish, i.e. in a use 
foreign to Grk. writ., to make an end of: συνετελέσθη ὃ 
οἶνος τοῦ γάμου, [was at an end with], Jn. ii. 3 Tdf. after 
eod. Sin. (Ezek. vii. 15 for DR; to bring to an end, de- 
slroy, for m3, Jer. xiv. 12; xvi. 4).* 


cf. σύν, II. fin. 


time. 


606 


συντρίβω 


συν-τέμνω; pf. pass. ptep. συντετμημένος ; fr. Aeschyl. 
and Hdt. down; 1. to cut to pieces, [cf. σύν, IT 
81. 2. to cut short; metaph. to despatch briefly, ex 
ecute or finish quickly ; to hasten, (συντέμνειν sc. τὴν ὁδόν, 
to take a short cut, go the shortest way, Ildt. 7, 123; se. 
τὸν λύγον, to speak briefly, Eur. Tro. 441; τὰς ἀποκρίσεις, 
to abridge, sum up, Plat. Prot. p.334d.; ἐν βραχεῖ πολλοὺς 
λόγους, Arstph. Thesm. 178): λόγον [q. v. 1. 2 Ὁ. a.], to 
bring a prophecy or decree speedily to accomplishment, 
Ro. ix. 28; λόγος συντετμημένος, a short word, i. 6. an ex- 
pedited prophecy or decree, ibid. [RG Tr mrg. in br.] 
(both instances fr. Sept. of Is. x. 23); ef. Fritzsche ad 
loe. vol. ii. p. 350.* 

συν-τηρέω, -@: impf. 3 pers. sing. wuvernper; pres. pass. 
3 pers. plur. συντηροῦνται; [fr. Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 
816%, 8 down] ; a. lo preserve (athing from perish- 
ing or being lost) : τί, pass. (opp. ἰο ἀπόλλυσθαι), Mt. ix. 
17; Lk. v. 38 [fT WH om. Tr br. the el.]; τινά, to guard 
one, keep him safe, fr. a plot, Mk. vi. 20 (ἑαυτὸν ἀναμάρ- 
τητον, 2 Mace. xii. 42 [ef. Tob. i. 11; Sir. xiii. 12]). b. 
to keep within one’s self, keep in mind (a thing, lest it be 
forgotten [ef. σύν, II. 47) : πάντα τὰ ῥήματα, Lk. ii. 19 (τὸ 
ῥῆμα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ μου, Dan. vii. 28 Theod.; τὴν γνώμην 
παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Polyb. 31, 6, 5; [absol. Sir. xxxix. 2]).* 

συν-τίθημι: Mid., 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. συνέθεντο; plpf. 
3 pers. plur. συνετέθειντο; fr. Hom. down; to put with or 
together, to place together; to join together; Mid. a. 
to place in one’s mind, i. 6. to resolve, determine; ἰο 
make an agreement, to engage, (often so in prof. writ. fr. 
Hat. down; cf. Passow 8. ν. 2 b.; [L. and S.s. v. B. II.]): 
συνετέθειντο, they had agreed together [W. § 38, 3], foll. 
by iva, Jn. ix. 22 [W. § 44, 8b.]; συνέθεντο, they agreed 
together, foll. by rod with an inf. [B. 270 (232)], Acts 
xxiii. 20; they covenanted, foll. by an inf. [B. u.s.], Lk. 
xxii. 5. b. fo assent to, to agree to: Acts xxiv. 9 
Ree, [see συνεπιτίθημι] (revi, Lys. in Harpocr. [s. vy. Kap- 
kivos] p. 106, 9 Bekk.).* 

συν-τόμως, (συντέμνω), [fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Plat. down], 
ady., concisely i. e. briefly, in few words: ἀκοῦσαί τινος, 


‘Acts xxiv 4 (γράψαι, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 15 διδάσκειν. ibid. 


1, 6,25 [εἰπεῖν, ibid. 2, 14,1; ἐξαγγέλλειν, Mk. xvi. WH 
(rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]); for exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. fin.* 

συν-τρέχω; 2 aor. συνέδραμον; fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl., 
Hdt. down; 1. 10 run together: of the gathering 
of a multitude of people, ἐκεῖ, Mk. vi. 33; πρός τινα, Acts 
iii. 11. 2. to run along with others; metaph. to rush 
with i. 6. cast one’s self, plunge, 1 Pet. iv. 4. [Comp. : 
ἐπι-συντρέχω.] * 

συν-τρίβω, ptep. neut. -rpiBov Lk. ix. 39 RG Tr, -rpi- 
Bov |, T WH (cf. Veitch 8. v. τρίβω, fin.) ; fut. συντρίψω; 
1 aor. συνέτριψα ; Pass., pres. συντρίβομαι ; pf. inf. σὺυν- 
τετρίφθαι [RG Tr WH; but -τρῖφθαι LT (cf. Veitch 
τι. s.)], ptep. συντετριμμένος ; 2 fut. συντριβήσομαι; fr. 
Hat. [(?), Eurip.] down; Sept. very often for 12t; to 
break, to break in meces, shiver, [ef. σύν, 11. 3]: κάλαμον, 
Mt. xii. 20; ras πέδας, pass. Mk. v. 4; τὸ ἀλάβαστρον (the 
sealed orifice of the vase [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Alabaster]), 


σύντριμμα 


Mk. xiv. 3; ὀστοῦν, pass. Jn. xix 86 (Ex. xii. 46; Ps. 
XXXxiii. (kxxiv.) 21); τὰ σκεύη, Rev. ii. 27; to tread 
down: tov Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας (by a pregn. constr. 
[W. § 66, 2 d.]), to put Satan under foot and (as a con- 
queror) trample on him, Ro. xvi. 20; to break down, 
crush : τινά, to tear one’s body and shatter one’s strength, 
Lk. ix. 39. Pass. to suffer extreme sorrow and be, as it 
were, crushed: of συντετριμμένοι τὴν καρδίαν [cf. W. 229 
(215)], i. q. of ἔχοντες τὴν καρδίαν συντετριμμένην, [A. V 
the broken-hearted], Lk. iv. 18 Ree. fr. Is. lxi. 1 ([ef. Ps. 
Xxxiil. (xxxiv.) 19; exlvi. (exlvii.) 3, ete.]; συντριβῆναι 
τῇ διανοίᾳ, Polyb. 21, 10, 2; 31, 8, 11; τοῖς φρονήμασι, 
Diod. 11, 18 ; [ταῖς ἐλπίσιν, 4.600 ; ταῖς ψυχαῖς, 16, 51]).* 
σύν-τριμμα, -τος, τό, (συντρίβω), Sept. chiefly for 7aw ; 
1. that which is broken or shattered, a fracture : Aristot. 
de audibil. p. 802", 34; of a broken limb, Sept. Lev. xxi. 
19. 2. trop. calamity, ruin, destruction: Ro. 111. 16, 
fr. Is. lix. 7, where it stands for 7¥, a devastation, laying 
waste, as in xxii. 4; Sap. 111. 3; 1 Mace. ii. 7; [ete.].* 
σύν-τροφος, -ov, 6, (συντρέφω), [fr. Hdt. down], nour- 
ished with one (Vulg. collactaneus [Eng. foster-brother ]) ; 
brought up with one; univ. companion of one’s child- 
hood and youth: τινός (of some prince or king), Acts 
xiii. 1. (1 Mace. i. 6; 2 Mace. ix. 29; Polyb. 5, 9, 4; 
Diod. 1, 53; Joseph. b. j. 1,10, 9; Ael. v. h. 12, 26.)* 
Συντύχη and (so Tdf. edd. 7, 8; cf. Lipsius, Gramm. 
Untersuch. p. 31; [Tdf. Proleg. p.103; Kithner § 84 fin. ; 
on the other hand, Chandler § 1997) Συντυχή, 7, [ace. 
-nv], Syntyche, a woman belonging to the church at 
Philippi: Phil. iv. 2. (The name occurs several times 
in Grk. inserr. [see Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. 1. e.].)* 
συν-τυγχάνω: 2 aor. inf. συντυχεῖν; fr. [Soph.], Hdt. 
down; to meet with, come to [A. V. come at] one: with a 
dat. of the pers., Lk. viii. 19.* 
συν-υπο-κρίνομαι : 1 aor. pass. συνυπεκρίθην, with the 
force of the mid. [ef. B. 52 (45)]; to dissemble with: 
τινί, one, Gal. ii. 13. (Polyb. 3, 92, 5 and often; see 
Schweighaeuser, Lex. Polyb. p. 604; Plut. Marius, 14, 
17.)* 
συν-υπουργέω, -@; (ὑπουργέω to serve, fr. ὑπουργός, and 
this fr. ὑπό and EPTQ); to help together: τινί, by any 
thing, 2. Co. i. 11. (Leian. bis accusat. 6. 17 συναγωνι- 
ζομένης τῆς ἡδονῆς, ἥπερ αὐτῇ τὰ πολλὰ Evvutroupyei.) * 
συνφ-, see συμφ- 
συνχ-, 566 συγχ- 
συνψ-, see συμψ- 
συν-ωδίνω ; a. prop. to feel the pains of trovail 
with, be in travail together: οἷδε ἐπὶ τῶν ζώων τὰς ὠδῖνας ὁ 


οἵ. σύν, I. fin. 


σύνοικος καὶ συνωδίνει γε τὰ πολλὰ ὥσπερ καὶ ἀλεκτρυόνες, 
Porphyr. de abstin. 3,10; [ef. Aristot. eth. Eud. 7, 6 
p- 1240%, 36]. Ὁ. metaph. to undergo agony (like a 
woman in childbirth) along with: Ro. viii. 22 (where 
σύν refers to the several parts of which ἡ κτίσις consists, 
ef. Meyer ad loc.) ; κακοῖς, Eur. Hel. 727.* 

συνωμοσία, -as, 7, (συνόμνυμι), fr. Arstph. and Thue. 
down, a swearing together; a conspiracy: συνωμοσίαν 
ποιεῖν (see ποιέω, I. 1 c. p. 525" top), Acts xxiii. 13 Ree. ; 
ποιεῖσθαι (see ποιέω, I. 3), ibid. LT Tr WH* 


607 


σύρω 


Συράκουσαι [so accented commonly (Chandler §§ 172, 
175); but acc. to Pape, Eigennamen, 8. v., τκοῦσαι in 
Ptol. 3, 4, 9; 8,9, 4], τῶν, ai, Syracuse, a large maritime 
city of Sicily, having an excellent harbor and surrounded 
by a wall 180 stadia in length [so Strabo 6 p. 270; “but 
this statement exceeds the truth, the actual circuit being 
about 14 Eng. miles or 122 stadia” (Leake p. 279); see 
Dict. of Geogr. s. v. p. 1067]; now Siragosa: Acts 
XXVili. 12.* 

Συρία, -as, 7, Syria; in the N. T. a region of Asia, 
bounded on the N. by the Taurus and Amanus ranges, 
on the E. by the Euphrates and Arabia, on the S. by 
Palestine, and on the W. by Phenicia and the Mediter- 
ranean, [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Syria; Ryssel in Herzog ed. 2, 
s. v. Syrien; ef. also’Avtidyera, 1 and Aapaokés |: Mt. iv. 
24) kei. 2) Acts xv. 20, 41; ΧυΠ| 18; ocx. 9; Xx. O's 
Gal. i. 21. [On the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 a.]* 

Σύρος, -ov, 6, a Syrian, i. e. a native or an inhabitant 
of Syria: Lk. iv. 27; fem. S¥pa, a Syrian woman, Mk. 
vii. 26 Tr WH mrg. [(Hdt., al.)]* 

Συροφοίνισσα (so Rec.; a form quite harmonizing 
with the analogies of the language, for as Kicé forms 
the fem. Κίλισσα, Θρᾷξ the fem. Θρᾷσσα, ἄναξ the fem. 
ἄνασσα, so the fem. of Φοίνιξ is always, by the Greeks, 
called Φοίνισσα), Συροφοινίκισσα (so LT WH; hardly a 
pure form, and one which must be derived fr. Φοινίκη ; 
ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 296 sq.; W. 95 (91)), Supagor- 
νίκισσα (Grsb.; a form which conflicts with the law of 
composition), -ys, 7, (Ir WH mrg. Σύρα Φοινίκισσα), a 
Syrophenician woman, i. e. of Syrophoenice by race, 
that is, from the Phoenice forming a part of Syria (Svpo 
being prefixed for distinction’s sake, for there were also 
Λιβυφοίνικες, i. 6. the Carthaginians. The Greeks in- 
cluded both Phenicia and Palestine under the name 
ἡ Συρία; hence Συρία ἡ Παλαιστίνη in Hat. 3, 91; 4, 39; 
Just. Mart. apol. i. 1; and ἡ Φοινίκη Συρία, Diod. 19, 93; 
Συροφοινίκη, Just. Mart. dial. ο. Tryph. ὁ. 78, p. 305 a.) : 
Mk. vii. 26 [cf. B. D. s. v. Syro-Phenician]. (The mase. 
Συροφοίνιξ is found in Lcian. concil. deor. ο. 4; [Syro- 
phoenix in Juv. sat. 8, 159 (cf. 160) ].) * 

Dipris[Lehm. σῦρτις ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Chand- 
ler § 650], -ews, acc. -wv, 7, (σύρω, 4. ν. [al. fr. Arab. sert 
i.e. ‘desert’; al. al., see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ]), Syrtis, 
the name of two places in the African or Libyan Sea 
between Carthage and Cyrenaica, full of shallows and 
sandbanks, and therefore destructive to ships; the west- 
ern Syrtis, between the islands Cercina and Meninx [or 
the promontories of Zeitha and Brachodes], was called 
Syrtis minor, the eastern [extending from the promon- 
tory of Cephalae on the W. to that of Boreum on the E.] 
was called Syrtis major (sinus Psyllicus); this latter 
must be the one referred to in Acts xxvii. 17, for upon 
this the ship in which Paul was sailing might easily be 
cast after leaving Crete. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Quicksands. ] * 

σύρω; impf. ἔσυρον ; fr. [Aeschyl. and Hat. (in comp.), 
Aristot.], Theocr. down; [Sept. 2S. xvii. 13]; to draw, 
drag: τί, Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xii. 4; τινά, one (before the 
judge, to prison, to punishment; ἐπὶ ra βασανιστήρια, εἰς 


συσπαράσσω 


τὸ δεσμωτήριον, Epict. diss. 1, 29, 22; al.), Acts viii. 3; 
ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, Acts xiv. 19; ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας, Acts 
xvii. 6. [Comp.: κατασύρω.] " 

συσπαράσσω: 1 aor. συνεσπάραξα; to convulse com- 
pletely (see ῥήγνυμι, c.): twa, Mk. ix. 20 LT Trmrg. 
WH; Lk. ix. 42. (Max. Tyr. diss. 13, 5.) * 

σύσ-σημον [Tdf. συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.) ], του, τό, (σύν 
and σῆμα), a common sign or concerted signal, a sign given 
acc. to agreement: Mk. xiv.44. (Diod., Strab., Plut., al.; 
for Ὁ), a standard, Is. v. 26; xlix. 22; Ixii. 10.) The 
word is condemned by Phrynichus, ed. Lob. p. 418, who 
remarks that: Menander was the first to use it; cf. Sturz, 
De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 190." 

σύσ-σωμος [LT Tr WH ov» (cf. σύν, 11. fin.)], -ον, 
(σύν and σῶμα), belonging to the same body (i. e. metaph. 
to the same church) [R. V. fellow-members of the body): 
Eph. iii. 6. (Eccles. writ.) * 

συ-στασιαστής, -0v, 6, (See στασιαστής), @ companion 
in insurrection, fellow-rioter: Mk. xv. 7 RG (Joseph. 
antt. 14, 2, 1)." 

overarikds [Tr συν- (cf. σύν, I. fin.) ], -ἡ, τόν, (συν- 
ίστημι, q- ν.), commendatory, introductory: ἐπιστολαὶ συστ. 
ΓΑ. V. epistles of commendation], 2 Co. iii. 1", 1» RG, 
and often in eccles. writ., many exx. of which have been 
collected by Lydius, Agonistica sacra (Zutph. 1700), p. 
123, 15; [Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. ii. 1194 sq.].  (ypap- 
para παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ λαβεῖν συστατικά, Epict. diss. 2, 3,1; [ef. 
Diog. Laért. 8, 87]; τὸ κάλλος παντὸς ἐπιστολίου συστα- 
τικώτερον, Aristot. in Diog. Laért. 5, 18, and in Stob. flor. 
65, 11, ii. 435 ed. Gaisf.) * 

συσταυρόω [LT Tr WI συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -ῶ: 
Pass., pf. συνεσταύρωμαι; 1 aor. συνεσταυρώθην ; to cru- 
cify along with; twa τινι, one with another; prop. : 
Mt. xxvii. 44 (σὺν αὐτῷ L.T Tr WH); Mk. xv. 32 (σὺν 
αὐτῷ LT WH); Jn. xix. 32; metaph.: 6 παλαιὸς ἡμῶν 
ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη sc. τῷ Χριστῷ, i. 6. (dropping the 
fizure) the death of Christ upon the cross has wrought 
the extinction of our former corruption, Ro. vi. 6; Χριστῷ 
συνεσταύρωμαι, by the death of Christ upon the cross I 
have become utterly estranged from (dead to) my for- 
mer habit of feeling and action, Gal. ii. 19 (20).* 

συστέλλω: 1 aor. συνέστειλα; pf. pass. ptep. συνεσταὰ- 
μένος ; prop. to place together ; a. to draw together, 
contract, (ra ἱστία, Arstph. ran. 999; τὴν χεῖρα, Sir. iv. 
31; εἰς ὀλίγον συστέλλω, Theophr. de caus. plant. 1, 15, 
1); to diminish (τὴν δίαιταν, Isocr. p. 280 d.; Dio Cass. 
39, 37); to shorten, abridge, pass. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος 
ἐστίν, the time has been drawn together into a brief 
compass, is shortened, 1 Co. vii. 29. b. to roll to- 
gether, wrap up, wrap round with bandages, etc., to en- 
shroud (τινὰ πέπλοις, Eur. Troad. 378): τινά, i.e. his 
corpse (for burial), Acts v. 6.” 

συστενάζο [T WH ovr (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]; to groan 
together: Ro. viii. 22, where σύν has the same force as 
in συνωδίνω, b. (τινί, with one, Eur. Ion 935; Test. xii. 
Patr. (test. Isach. § 7) p. 629).* 

συστοιχέω [TWH ovr (cf. σύν, IT. fin.)], -; (see στοι- 
xéw) ; tostand or march in the same row (file) with: so once 


608 


Συχάᾳ 


prop. of soldiers, Polyb. 10, 21, 7; hence to stand οὐδν 
against, be parallel with ; trop. to answer to, resemble : τινὶ; 
so once of a type in the O. T. which answers to the anti- 
type in the New, Gal. iv. 25 [ef. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.].* 

συ-στρατιώτης [Τ᾿ Tr WH συν- (so Lehm. in Philem.; 
cf. σύν, 11. fin.) ], -ov, ὁ, a fellow-soldier, Xen., Plat., al.; 
trop. an associate in labors and conjlicts for the cause of 
Christ: Phil. ii. 25; Philem. 2.* 

συστρέφω: 1 aor. ptep. συστρέψας ; pres. pass. ptep. 
συστρεφόμενος ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; -- 
to twist together, roll together (into a bundle): φρυγάνων 
πλῆθος, Acts xxviii. 3. 2. to collect, combine, uniie: 
τινάς, pass. [reflexively (?)] of men, to [gather themselves 
together,| assemble: Mt. xvii. 22 LT Trtxt. WH, see 
ἀναστρέφω, 3 ἃ." 

συ-στροφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (συστρέφω) ; a. a twisting up 
together, a binding together. b. a secret combination, 
a coalition, conspiracy: Acts xxiii. 12 (Ps. χη]. (Ixiv.) 
3; [2K.xv. 15; Am. vii. 107); @ concourse of disorderly 
persons, a riot (Polyb. 4, 34, 6), Acts xix. 40.* 

συ-σχηματίζω [WH συν- (50 Tin Ro., Tr in 1 Pet.; cf: 
σύν, 11. fin.) ]: pres. pass. συσχηματίζομαι ;"(σχηματίζω, to 
form) ; a later Grk. word; fo conform [(Aristot. top. 6, 
14 p. 151°, 8; Plut. de profect. in virt. 12 p. 83 b.)]; 
pass. reflexively, revi, 0 conform one’s self (i.e. one’s 
mind and character) 10 another’s pattern, [ fashion one’s 
self according to, (cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. p. 130 
sq-)]: Ro. xii. 2; 1 Pet. i. 14 [ef. W. 352 (330 sq.)]. 
(πρός τι, Plut. Num. 20 com. text.) * 

Συχάρ (Ree.** Σιχάρ), ἡ, Sychar, a town of Samaria, 
near to the well of the patriarch Jacob, and not far from 
Flavia Neapolis (Συχὰρ πρὸ τῆς Νέας πόλεως, Euseb. in 
his Onomast. [p. 346, 5 ed. Larsow and Parthey]) tow- 
ards the E., the representative of which is to be found 
apparently in the modern hamlet al Askar (or ’Asker) : 
Jn. iv. 5, where οἵ. Biiumlein, Ewald, Briickner [in De 
Wette (4th and foll. edd.) ], Godet; add, Lwald, Jahrbb. 
f. bibl. Wissensch. viii. p. 255 sq.; Bddeker, Palestine, 
pp- 828, 337; [Lieut. Conder in the Palest. Explor. Fund 
for July 1877, p. 149 sq. and in Survey of West. Pal.: 
‘Special Papers’, p. 231; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, 
Appendix xv.]. The name does not seem to differ 
from 310, a place mentioned by the Talmudists in 
7310 py ‘the fountain Sucar’ and 43)0 py nypa ‘the 
valley of the fountain Sucar’; οἵ. Delitzsch in the Zeit- 
schr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1856, p. 240sqq. Most in- 
terpreters, however, think that Suydp is the same as 
Συχέμ (4: ν- 2), and explain the form as due to a soften- 
ing of the harsh vulgar pronunciation (cf. Credner, Einl. 
in d. N. T. vol. i. p. 264 sq.), or conjecture that it was 
fabricated by way of reproach by those who wished to 
suggest the noun pv, ‘falsehood’, and thereby brand 
the city as given up to idolatry [cf. Hab. ii. 18], or the 
word 3), ‘drunken’ (on account of Is. xxviii. 1), and 
thus call it the abode of μωροί, see Sir. ]. 26, where 
the Shechemites are called λαὸς μωρός ; cf. Test. xii. Patr. 
(test. Levi § 7) p. 564 Σικήμ, λεγομένη πόλις ἀσυνέτων. 
To these latter opinions there is this objection, among 


Συχέμ 


others, that the place mentioued by the Evangelist was 
very near Jacob’s well, from which Shechem, or Flavia 
Neapolis, was distant about a mile and a half. [Cf. B.D. 
s.v. Sychar; also Porter in Alex.’s Kitto, ibid.] * 

Συχέμ, Hebr. ὈΞ) [i.e. ‘shoulder,’ ‘ridge’], Shechem 
[A. V. Sychem (see below)], prop. name of l. a 
man of Canaan, son of Hamor (see "Eypop), prince in 
the city of Shechem (Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 5866.) : 
Acts vii. 16 RG. 2. a city of Samaria (in Sept. 
sometimes Συχέμ, indecl., sometimes Σίκιμα, gen. τῶν, as in 
Joseph. and Euseb.; once τὴν Σίκιμα τὴν ἐν ὄρει Edpaip, 
1 K. xii. 25 [for still other var. see B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) 
s.v. Shechem ]), Vulg. Sichem [ed. Tdf. Sychem; ef. B.D. 
u.s.], situated in a valley abounding in springs at the 
foot of Mt. Gerizim (Joseph. antt. 5, 7, 2; 11, 8, 6); laid 
waste by Abimelech (Judg. ix. 45), it was rebuilt by 
Jeroboam and made the seat of government (1 K. xii. 
25). From the time of Vespasian it was called by the 
Romans Neapolis (on coins Flavia Neapolis); whence by 
corruption comes its modern name, Nablus [or Ndbu- 
lus]; ace. to Prof. Socin (in Biideker’s Palestine p. 331) 
it contains about 13,000 inhabitants (of whom 600 are 
Christians, and 140 Samaritans) together with a few 
[about 100”] Jews: Acts vii. 16.* 

σφαγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (σφάζω), slaughter: Acts viii. 32 (after 
Is. liii. 7) ; πρόβατα σφαγῆς. sheep destined for slaughter 
(Zech. xi. 4; Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23), Ro. viii. 36; ἡμέρα 
σφαγῆς (Jer. xii. 3), 1. 4. day of destruction, das. v. 5. 
(Trage., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for N20, 7399, 
ete.) * 

σφάγιον, -ov, τό, (σφαγή). fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
that which is destined for slaughter, a victim [A.V. slain 
beast]: Acts vii. 42 [ef. W. 512 (477)] (Am. v. 25 ; Ezek. 
xxi. 10).* 

σφάζω, Attic opdrrw: fut. σφάξω, Rev. vi. 41, T Tr 
WH; 1 aor. ἔσφαξα; Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσφαγμένος ; 2 aor. 
ἐσφάγην ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for um, to 
slay, slaughter, butcher: prop., ἀρνίον, Rev. v. 6, 12; 
xiii. 8; τινά, to put to death by violence (often so in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), 1 Jn. iii. 12; Rev. v. 9; vi. 4, 
9; xvili. 24. κεφαλὴ ἐσφαγμένη εἰς θάνατον, mortally 
wounded [R.V. smitien unto death], Rev. xiii. 3. [Comr.: 
κατα-σφάζω. |” 

σφόδρα (properly neut. plur. of σφοδρός, vehement, vio- 
lent), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down, exceedingly, greatly : 
placed after adjectives, Mt.ii.10; Mk. xvi.4; Lk. xviii. 
23; Rev. xvi. 21; with verbs, Mt. xvii. 6, 23; xviii. 
$1; xix. 25; xxvi. 22; xxvii. 54; Acts vi. 7.* 

σφοδρῶς, adv., fr. Hom. Od. 12, 124 down, exceedingly: 
Acts xxvii. 18." 

σφραγίζω (Rev. vii. 3 Rec.) ; 1 aor. ἐσφράγισα; 1 aor. 
mid. ptep. σφραγισάμενος ; Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσφραγισμένος ; 
1 aor. ἐσφραγίσθην ; [in 2 Co. xi. 10 Rec." gives the form 
odpayicera “de coniectura vel errore” (Tdf.; see his 
note ad loc.)]; (σφραγίς, q-v-); Sept. for DNM; to set a 
seal upon, mark with a seal, to seal; a. for secu- 
rity: τί, Mt. xxvii. 66; sc. τὴν ἄβυσσον, to close it, 
lest Satan after being cast into it should come out; 

39 


609 


σχεδόν 


hence the addition ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ, over him i.e. Satan, Rev. 
xx. 3, (ἐν ᾧ —i. 6. δώματι ---- κεραυνός ἐστιν ἐσφραγισμένος, 
Aeschyl. Eum. 828; mid. σφραγίζομαι τὴν θύραν, Bel and 
the Dragon 14 Theodot.). b. Since things sealed up 
are concealed (as, the contents of a letter), σφραγίζω 
means trop. to hide (Deut. xxxii. 34), keep in silence, 
keep secret: τί, Rev. x. 4; xxii. 10, (τὰς ἁμαρτίας, Dan. 
ix. 24 Theodot.; ras ἀνομίας. Job xiv. 17; τοὺς λόγους 
σιγῇ. Stob. flor. 34, 9 p. 215; θαύματα πολλὰ copy σῴφρη- 
γίσσατο σιγῇ, Nonn. paraphr. evang. Ioan. 21,140). ο. 
in order to mark a person or thing; hence fo set a mark 
upon by the impress of a seal, to stamp: angels are said 
oppayite twas ἐπὶ τῶν μετώπων, i.e. with the seal of 
God (see σφραγίς, c.) to stamp his servants on their 
foreheads as destined for eternal salvation, and by 
this means to confirm their hopes, Rev. vii. 3, οἵ. Ewald 
ad loe.; [B.D.s. vv. Cuttings and Forehead]; hence οἱ 
ἐσφραγισμένοι, fourteen times in Ree. vss. 4-8, four times 
by GLTTrWH, (δεινοῖσι σημάντροισιν ἐσφραγισμένοι, 
Eur. Iph. Taur. 1372); metaph.: τινὰ τῷ πνεύματι and 
ἐν τῷ Trv., respecting God, who by the gift of the Holy 
Spirit indicates who are his, pass., Eph. i. 13; iv. 30; 
absol., mid. with τινά, 2 Co. i. 22. d. in order to 
prove, confirm, or attest a thing; hence trop. to 
confirm, authenticate, place beyond doubt, (a written 
document τῷ δακτυλίῳ, Esth. viii. 8) : foll. by ὅτε, Jn. iii. 
33; τινά, to prove by one’s testimony to a person that he 
is what he professes to be, Jn. vi. 27. Somewhat unu- 
sual is the expression σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν 
τοῦτον, when I shall have confirmed (sealed) to them 
this fruit (of love), meaning apparently, when I shall 
have given authoritative assurance that this money was 
collected for their use, Ro. xv. 28. [Comp.: xara- 
σφραγίζω.}" 

σφραγίς, -idos, ἡ, (akin, apparently, to the verb φράσσω 
or φράγνυμι), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for Onin, a seal; 1.6. 
a. the seal placed upon books [ οἵ. B.D. s.v. Writing, sub 
fin.; Gardthausen, Palaeogr. p. 27]: Rev. ν. 1; λῦσαι 
tas opp., ib. 2,5 [Ree.]; ἀνοῖξαι, ib. [5 GLT Tr WH], 
ΟΡ ὙΠ 155} 419. 12} ville 1- b. α signet-ring: 
Rev. vii. 2. ce. the inscription or impression made by 
a seal: Rey. ix. 4 (the name of God and Christ stamped 
upon their foreheads must be meant here, as is evident 
from xiv. 1); 2 Tim. ii. 19. d. that by which any- 
thing is confirmed, proved, authenticated, as by a seal, (a 
token or proof): Ro. iv. 11; 1Co.ix.2. [Cf. BB. DD. 
s. v. Seal.]* 

σφυδρόν, -οῦ, τό, i. 4. σφυρόν, q. v.: Acts iii. 7 T WH. 
(Hesych. σφυδρά- ἡ περιφέρεια τῶν ποδῶν.) * 

σφυρίς, i. 4. σπυρίς, q. ν.» (ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 113; 
Curtius p. 503; [Steph. Thesaur. s. vv.]), Lechm. in Mt. 
xvi. 10 and Mk. viii. 8; WH uniformly (see their App. 
p. 148). 

σφυρόν, -ov, τό, fr. Hom. down, the ankle [A.V. ankle- 
bone]: Acts iii. 7[T WH σφυδρόν, q. v.].* 

σχεδόν, (ἔχω, σχεῖν), adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. near, 
hard by. 2. fr. Soph. down [of degree, i.e.] well-nigh, 
nearly, almost; so in the N. T. three times before ras: 


σχῆμα 


Acts xili. 44; xix. 26; Heb. ix. 22 [but see W. 554 (515) 
n.; (R. V. I may almost say)]; (2 Mace. v. 2; 3 Mace. 
v. 14).* 

σχῆμα, -τος, τό, (ἔχω, σχεῖν), fr. Aeschyl. down, Lat. 
habitus (cf. Eng. haviour (fr. have) ], A. V. fashion, Vulg. 
Jigura [but in Phil. habitus], (tacitly opp. to the mate- 
rial or substance): τοῦ κόσμου τούτου, 1 Co. vii. 31; the 
habitus, as comprising everything in a person which 
strikes the senses, the figure, bearing, discourse, actions, 
manner of life, ete., Phil. ii. 7 (8). [Syn. see μορφή 
fin., and Schmidt ch. 182, 5.]* 

σχίζω [(Lk. v.36 RG L mrg.)]; fut. σχίσω (LE. v. 36 
L txt. T Tr txt. WH [cf. B. 37 (32 sq.)]); 1 aor. ἔσχισα ; 
Pass., pres. ptep. σχιζόμενος ; 1 aor. ἐσχίσθην ; [allied w. 
Lat. scindo, caedo, etc. (cf. Curtius § 295)]; fr. [( Hom. 
h. Merc.) ] Hesiod down ; Sept. several times for 7723, Is. 
xxxvii. 1 for DI) ; to cleave, cleave asunder, rend : rl, Lk. 
v. 36; pass. al πέτραι, Mt. xxvii. 51; οἱ οὐρανοί, Mk. i. 10; 
τὸ καταπέτασμα, Lk. xxiii. 45; with εἰς δύο added, into two 
parts, in twain [(els δύο μέρη, of a river, Polyb. 2, 16, 
11)], Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; τὸ δίκτυον, Jn. xxi. 11; 
to divide by rending, rl, Jn. xix. 24. trop. in pass. to 
be split into factions, be divided: Acts xiv. 4; xxiii. 7, 
(Xen. conv. 4, 59; τοῦ πλήθους σχιζομένου κατὰ αἵρεσιν, 
Diod. 12, 66).* 

σχίσμα, -τος, τό, (σχίζω), a cleft, rent ; a. prop. 
arent: Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21, (Aristot., Theophr.). _b. 
metaph. α division, dissension: Jn. vii. 43; ix. 16; x. 
19; 1 Co. i. 10; xi. 18; xii. 25, (eccles. writ. [Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 6, ete. ; ‘Teaching’ 4, 3 ; etc.]). [Cf. reff. 
5. V. αἵρεσις, 5. |] * 

σχοινίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of the noun σχοῖνος, ὁ and 7, a 
rush), fr. Hdt. down, prop. a cord or rope made of rushes ; 
univ. a rope: Jn. ii. 15; Acts xxvii. 32.*_ 

σχολάζω ; 1 aor. ΒΕ] πο. σχολάσω, 1 Co. vii. 5G LT 
Dr Wis; (σχολή, ἃ: νι}; 1. to cease from labor; 
to loiter. 2. to be free from labor, to be at leisure, 
to be idle ; τινί, to have leisure for a thing, i.e. to give one’s 
self to a thing: ἵνα σχολάσητε (Rec. σχολάζητε) τῇ προσ- 
εὐχῇ, 1 Co. vii. 5 (for exx. fr. prof. auth. see Passow 
s.v.; [L. and 5. s. v. III.]). 3. of things; e. g. of 
places, to be unoccupied, empty: οἶκος σχολάζων, Mt. xii. 
44; [Lk. xi. 25 WH br. Tr mrg. br.], (τόπος, Plut. Gai. 
Grac. 12; of a centurion’s vacant office, Eus. ἢ. 6. 7, 15; 
in eccl. writ. of vacant eccl. offices, [also of officers with- 
out charge; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]).* 

σχολή, -ἢς, 7, (fr. σχεῖν; hence prop. Germ. das An- 
halten; (cf. Eng. ‘to hold on,’ equiv. to either to stop or 
to persist); 1. fr. Pind. down, freedom from labor, 
leisure. 2. acc. to later Grk. usage, a place where 
there is leisure for anything, a school (cf. L. and 5. s. v. 
ΗΙ.; W. 23]: Acts xix. 9 (Dion. Hal. de jud. Isocr. 1; 
de vi Dem. 44; often in Plut.).* 

σώζω [al. σῴζω (cf. WH. Intr. § 410; Meisterhans p. 
87)]; fut. σώσω; 1 aor. ἔσωσα; pf. σέσωκα ; Pass., pres. 
σώζομαι; impf, ἐσωζόμην ; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Acts iv. 9) σέσω- 
oracand (acc. to Tdf.) σέσωται (cf. Kiihner i. 912 ; [ Photius 
s. v.; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 99; Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. 


610 


σώζα, 


ἐσώθην ; 1 fut. σωθήσομαι ; (σῶς ‘safe and sound’ [cf. Lat. 
sanus ; Curtius § 570; Vaniéek p. 1038]); fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. very often for WT, also for bom, Sx), and ΧΙ, 
sometimes for “IY; to save, to keep safe and sound, to 
rescue from danger or destruction (opp. to ἀπόλλυμι, 
4. v.); Vulg. saluumfacio (or fio), salvo, [salvifico, libero, 
etc. ] ; a. univ., τινά, one (from injury or peril) ; 
to save a suffering one (from perishing), e.g. one suffer- 
ing from disease, to make well, heal, restore to health: Mt. 
ix. 22; Mk, v. 34; x. 52; Lk. vii. 50 [al. understand this 
as including spiritual healing (see b. below)]; viii. 
48 ; xvii. 19; xviii. 42; Jas. v.15; pass., Mt. ix. 21; Mk. 
v. 23, 28; vi. 56; Lk. viii. 36, 50; Jn. xi.12; Acts iv. 9 
[ef. B. § 144, 25]; xiv. 9. to preserve one who is in 
danger of destruction, to save (i.e. rescue): Mt. viii. 25; 
xiv. 30; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 40, 42,49; Mk. xiii. 20; xv. 30 
sq.; Lk. xxiii. 35, 37, 39; pass., Acts xxvii. 20,31; 1 Pet. 
iv. 18; τὴν ψυχήν, (physical) life, Mt. xvi. 25; Mk. iii. 
4; vili.35; Lk. vi. 9; ix.24andRGLin xvii. 33; σώζειν 
τινὰ ἐκ with gen. of the place, to bring safe forth from, 
Jude 5; ἐκ τῆς ὥρας ταύτης, from the peril of this hour, 
Jn. xii. 27; with gen. of the state, ἐκ θανάτου, Heb. v.7 ; 
οἵ, Bleek, Brief an ἃ. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 70 sq.; [W.§ 30, 6a.; 
see ἐκ, I. δ]. b. to save in the technical biblical 
sense ; — negatively, to deliver from the penalties of the 
Messianic judgment, Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5); to save from the 
evils which obstruct the reception of the Messianic deliver- 
ance: ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, Mt. i. 21 ; ἀπὸ τῆς ὀργῆς SC. τοῦ θεοῦ, 
from the punitive wrath of God at the judgment of the 
last day, Ro. v. 9; ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης, Acts 
ii. 40; ψυχὴν ἐκ θανάτου (see θάνατος, 2), Jas. v. 20; [ἐκ 
πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες, Jude 23] ;— positively, to make one a 
partaker of the salvation by Christ (opp. to ἀπόλλυμι, q. V.): 
hence σώζεσθαι and εἰσέρχεσθαι eis τὴν Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ are 
interchanged, Mt. xix. 25, cf. 24; Mk. x. 26, cf. 25; Lk. 
XViil. 26, cf. 25; so σώζεσθαι and ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔχειν, Jn. 
iii. 17, cf. 16. Since salvation begins in this life (in deliv- 
erance from error and corrupt notions, in moral purity, 
in pardon of sin, and in the blessed peace of a soul recon- 
ciled to God), but on the visible return of Christ from 
heaven will be perfected in the consummate blessings of 
ὁ αἰὼν ὁ μέλλων, We can understand why τὸ cwdfecba is 
spoken of in some passages as a present possession, in 
others as a good yet future: —as a blessing beginning 
(or begun) on earth, Mt. xviii. 11 Rec.; Lk. viii. 12; 
xix. 10; Jn. v.34; x.9; xii. 47; Ro. xi. 14; 1 Co. i. 21; 
vil. 16; ix. 22. x. 989. συν. 2: 1 1551 16). ΠῚ τι ΗΠ: 
2 Tim.i.9; Tit. 111. δ; 1 Pet. iii. 21; τῇ ἐλπίδι (dat. of the 
instrument) ἐσώθημεν (aor. of the time when they turned 
to Christ), Ro. viii. 24; χάριτί ἐστε σεσωσμένοι διὰ τῆς 
πίστεως, Eph. ii. δ [ef. B. § 144, 25], 8 ;—as a thing still 
future, Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 13; [Mk. xiii. 13]; Ro. v. 10; 
1 Co. iii. 15; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Jas. iv. 12; τὴν ψυχήν, Mk. 
viii. 35; Lk. ix. 24; ψυχάς, Lk. ix. 56 Rec.; τὸ πνεῦμα, 
pass. 1 Co. v. 5; by a pregnant construction (see εἰς, C. 
1 p. 185° bot.), τινὰ εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ κυρίου αἰώνιον, 
to save and transport into etc. 2 Tim. iv. 18 (ἡ εὐσέβεια 
ἡ σώζουσα els τὴν ζωὴν αἰώνιον, 4 Macc. xv. 2; many exx. 


σῶμα 


of this constr. are given in Passow vol. ii. p. 1802*; [cf. 
L. and 5. s. v. II. 2}). univ.: [Mk. xvi. 16]; Acts ii. 
2 τον 1.2. Xie 14. xiv. 9: xv. 1. {{1]} τυ! 90 5α-; Eo: 
ix./27- x 0: 19; xi.26; 1 Tim. ii.45 iv. 16); Heb: vil. 25% 
Jas. ii. 14; ἁμαρτωλούς, 1 Tim, i. 15; τὰς ψυχάς, Jas. i. 
21; οἱ σωζόμενοι, Rev. xxi. 24 Ree.; Lk. xiii. 23; Acts 
li. 47 ; opp. to of ἀπολλύμενοι, 1 Co. i. 18; 2 Co. ii. 16, 
(see ἀπόλλυμι, 1 ἃ. B.). [Comp.: δια-, ἐκ- σώζω.] * 
σῶμα, -τος, τό, (appar. fr. σῶς ‘entire’, [but cf. Curtius 
§ 570; al. fr. r. ska, sko, ‘to cover’, ef. Vaniéek p. 1055; 
Curtius p. 696]), Sept. for “3, "3, etc.; nba3 (a 
corpse), also for Chald. BW2; α body; and 1. the 
body both of men and of animals (on the distinction be- 
tween it and σάρξ see σάρξ, esp. 2 init.; (cf. Dickson, St. 
Paul's use of ‘ Flesh’ and ‘Spirit’, p. 247 sqq.]); a. 
as everywh. in Hom. (who calls the living body δέμας) 
and not infreq. in subseq. Grk. writ., a dead body or 
corpse: univ. Lk. xvii. 37; of a man, Mt. xiv. 12 RG; 
(Mk. xv. 45 R G];, Acts ix. 40; plur. Jn. xix. 31; τὸ σ. 
τινος, Mt. xxvii. 58 sq.; Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 52,55; Jn. 
xix. 38, 40; xx. 12; Jude 9; οὗ the body of an animal 
offered in sacrifice, plur. Heb. xiii. 11 (Ex. xxix. 14; Num. 
xix. 3). b. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down, the living 
body : —of animals, Jas. iii. 3;—of man: τὸ σῶμα, ab- 
sol., Lk. xi. 84; xii. 23; 1 Co. vi. 13, ete.; ἐν σώματι 
εἶναι, of earthly life with its troubles, Heb. xiii. 3; dis- 
tinguished fr. τὸ αἷμα, 1 Co. xi. 27; τὸ σῶμα and τὰ μέλη 
of it, 1 Co, xii. 12, 14-20; Jas. ili.6; τὸ σῶμα the tem- 
ple of τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα, 1 Co. vi. 19; the instrument of 
the soul, τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώμ. SC. rpaxbévta, 2 Co. v.10; itis 
distinguished —fr. τὸ πνεῦμα, in Ro. viii. 10; 1 Co. v. 3; 
vi. 20 Rec.; vii. 34; Jas. ii. 26, (4 Macc. xi. 11);—fr. ἡ 
ψυχή, in Mt. vi. 25; x. 28; Lk. xii. 22, (Sap. i. 4; viii. 19 
sq.; 2 Mace. vii. 37; xiv. 38; 4 Macc. i. 28, etc.);—fr. 
ἡ ψυχή and τὸ πνεῦμα together, in 1 Th. v. 23 (ef. Song of 
the Three, 63); σῶμα ψυχικόν and o. πνευματικόν are dis- 
tinguished, 1 Co, xv. 44 (see πνευματικός, 1 and ψυχικός. 
a.); τὸ σ. τινος, Mt. v. 29sq.; Lk. xi. 34; Ro. iv. 19; viii. 
23 [cf. W. 187 (176)], etc.; ὁ ναὸς τοῦ σώμ. αὐτοῦ, the 
temple which was his body, Jn. ii. 21;  plur., Ro. i. 24; 
1 Co. vi. 15; Eph. v. 28; the gen. of the possessor is 
omitted where it is easily learned from the context, as 
1Co. vy. 3; 2:Co. iv. 10; v. 8 Heb. x. 22 (23), etc.; τὸ 
σῶμα τῆς ταπεινώσεως ἡμῶν, the body of our humiliation 
(subjective gen.), i.e. which we wear in this servile and 
lowly human life, opp. to τὸ σ. τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ 
Χριστοῦ), the body which Christ has in his glorified state 
with God in heaven, Phil. iii. 21; διὰ τοῦ σώμ. τοῦ Xpi- 
στοῦ, through the death of Christ’s body, Ro. vii. 4; διὰ 
THs προσφορᾶς τοῦ σώμ. Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, through the sacri- 
ficial offering of the body of Jesus Christ, Heb. x. 10; 
τὸ σ. τῆς σαρκός, the body consisting of flesh, i.e. the 
physical body (tacitly opp. to Christ’s spiritual body, 
the church, see 3 below), Col. i. 22 (differently in ii. 11 
[see just below]); σῶμα τοῦ θανάτου, the body subject to 
death, given over to it [cf. W. § 30, 2 B.], Ro. vii. 24; 
the fact that the body includes ἡ σάρξ, and in the flesh 
also the incentives to sin (see σάρξ, 4), gives origin to 


611 


σωματικῶς 


the foll. phrases: μὴ βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ 
ὑμῶν σώματι, Ro. vi. 12 [οἵ. W. 524 (488)]; αἱ πράξεις 
τοῦ σώματος, Ro. viii. 13. Since the body is the instru- 
ment of the soul (2 Co. y. 10), and its members the in- 
struments either of righteousness or of iniquity (Ro. vi. 
13, 19), the foll. expressions are easily intelligible: σῶμα 
τῆς ἁμαρτίας, the body subject to, the thrall of, sin (cf. 
W. § 30, 2 β.1, Ro. vi. 6; τὸ σ. τῆς σαρκός, subject to the 
incitements of the flesh, Col. ii. 11 (where Rec. has τὸ σ. 
τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν τῆς σαρκός). δοξάζετε τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῷ σώματι 
ὑμῶν, 1 Co. vi. 20; μεγαλύνειν τὸν Χριστὸν ἐν τῷ σώματι, 
εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς, εἴτε διὰ θανάτου, Phil. i. 20; παραστῆσαι τὰ 
σώματα θυσίαν ζῶσαν... τῷ θεῷ (i.e. by bodily purity [cf. 
Mey. ad loc. ]), Ro. xii. 1. c. Since acc. to ancient 
law in the case of slaves the body was the chief thing 
taken into account, it is a usage of later Grk. to call 
slaves simply σώματα ; once so in the N. T.: Rey. xviil. 
13, where the Vulg. correctly translates by mancipia 
[A. V. slaves], (σώματα τοῦ οἴκου, Gen. Xxxvi.6; σώματα 
καὶ κτήνη, Tob. x. 10; ᾿Ιουδαϊκὰ σώματα, 2 Mace. viii. 11; 
exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given by Lob. ad Phryn. p. 378 sq. 
[add (fr. Soph. Lex. s.v.), Polyb. 1, 29,7; 4, 38, 4, also 
3, 17, 10 bis]; the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. 
said σώματα δοῦλα, οἰκετικά, etc.). 2. The name is 
transferred to the bodies of plants, 1 Co. xv. 37 sq., 
and of stars [cf. our ‘heavenly bodies’], hence Paul 
distinguishes between σώματα ἐπουράνια, bodies celestial, 
i.e. the bodies of the heavenly luminaries and of angels 
(see ἐπουράνιος, 1), and σ. ἐπίγεια, bodies terrestrial (i. 68. 
bodies of men, animals, and plants), 1 Co. xv. 40 (ἅπαν 
σῶμα τῆς τῶν ὅλων φύσεως... τὸ σῶμα τοῦ κόσμου, Diod. 
1 11): 3. trop. σῶμα is used of a (large or small) 
number of men closely united into one society, or family as 
it were ; a social, ethical, mystical body; so in the N. T. 
of the church: Ro. xii.5; 1 Co. x. 17; xii. 13; Eph. ii. 16 ; 
iv. 16; v. 23; Col. i. 18; ii. 19; iii, 15; with rod Χριστοῦ 
added, 1 Co. x.16; xii.27; Eph.i.23; iv.12; v.30; Col. 
i. 24; of which spiritual body Christ is the head, Eph. 
iv. 15 sq.; v. 28; Col. i. 18; ii. 19, who by the influence 
of his Spirit works in the church as the soul does in the 
body. ἕν σῶμα x. ἕν πνεῦμα, Eph. iv. 4. 4. ἡ σκιά 
and τὸ σῶμα are distinguished as the shadow and the 
thing itself which casts the shadow: Col. ii. 17; σκιὰν 
αἰτησόμενος βασιλείας, ἧς ἥρπασεν ἑαυτῷ τὸ σ ὦ μα, Joseph. 
b. j. 2, 2,5; [(Philo de confus, ling. § 37; Lceian. Her- 
mot. 79) ]. 

σωματικός, -7, -όν, (σῶμα), fr. Aristot. down, corporeal 
(Vulg. corporalis), bodily ; a. having a bodily form 
or nature: σωματικῷ εἴδει, LK. iii. 22 (opp. to ἀσώματος, 
Philo de opif. mund. § 4). b. pertaining to the body : 
ἣ γυμνασία, 1 Tim. iy. 8 (ἕξις, Joseph. Ὁ. j. 6, 1, 6; ἐπι- 
θυμίαι σωμ. 4 Mace. i. 32; [ἐπιθυμίαι καὶ ἡδοναί, Aristot. 
eth. Nic. 7, 7 p. 1149>, 26; al.; ἀπέχου τῶν σαρκικῶν καὶ 
σωματικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν, ‘Teaching’ ete. 1, 47). Ἐ 

σωματικῶς, adv., bodily, corporeally (Vulg.corporaliter), 
i.qg. ἐν σωματικῷ εἴδει, yet denoting his exalted and spir- 
itual body, visible only to the inhabitants of heaven, Col. 
ii. 9, where see Meyer [οἷ. Bp. Lghtft.].* 


Σώπατρος 


Σώπατρος, -ov, 6, [cf. W. 108 (97)], Sopater, a Chris- 
tian, one of Paul’s companions: Acts xx. 4. [See Σωσί- 
πατρος.}" 

σωρεύω: fut. σωρεύσω ; pf. pass. ptep. σεσωρευμένος; 
(σωρός, ἃ heap); [fr. Aristot. down]; to heap together, 
to heap up: τὶ ἐπί τι, Ro. xii. 20 (fr. Prov. xxv. 22; see 
ἄνθραξ) ; τινά τινι, to overwhelm one with a heap of any- 
thing: trop. ἁμαρτίαις, to load one with the conscious- 
ness of many sins, pass. 2 Tim. iii. 6. [Comp.: ἐπι- 
owpeva. |* 

Σωσθένης, -ov, 6, Sosthenes ; 1. the ruler of the 
Jewish synagogue at Corinth, and an opponent of Chris- 
tianity: Acts xviii. 17. 2. a certain Christian, an 
associate of the apostle Paul: 1 Co.i.1. The name 
was a common one among the Greeks.* 

Zwolrarpos, -ov, ὁ, Sosipater, a certain Christian, one 
of Paul’s kinsmen, (perhaps the same man who in Acts 
xx. 4 is called Σώπατρος [q. v.; yet the latter was from 
Berea, Sosipater in Corinth]; ef. Σωκράτης and Swat 
κράτης, Σωκλείδης and Σωσικλείδης, see Fritzsche, Ep. ad 
Rom. vol. iii. p. 316; [ef. Fick, Gr. Personennamen, pp. 
79, 807) : Ro. xvi. 21." 

σωτήρ, -ῆρος, 6, (σώζω), fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down, 
Sept. for pur, Πρ, [yrwin], savior, deliverer; pre- 
server; (Vulg. [exe. Lk. i. 47 (where salutaris) ] salvator, 
Luth. Heiland) (cf. B. D. 5. v. Saviour, I.]; (Cie. in Verr. 
ii. 2, 63 Hoe quantum est? ita magnum, ut Latine uno 
verbo exprimi non possit. Is est nimirum ‘soter’, qui 
salutem dedit. ‘The name was given by the ancients to 
deities, esp. tutelary deities, to princes, kings, and in 
general to men who had conferred signal benefits upon 
their country, and in the more degenerate days by 
way of flattery to personages of influence; see Passow 
[or L. and 5.1 5. v.; Paulus, Exgt. Hdbch. iib. ἃ. drei 
erst. Evang. i. p. 103 sq.; [Wetstein on Lk. ii. 11; B. Ὁ. 
τι. 5.1). In the N. T. the word is applied to God, —aar. 
pou, he who signally exalts me, Lk.i.47; ὁ car. ἡμῶν, the 
author of our salvation through Jesus Christ (on the 
Christian conception of ‘to save’, see cata, b. [and 
on the use of σωτήρ cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. iv. 14]), 1 Tim. 
1.1; ii. 3; Tit.i.3; ii. 10; iii. 4; with διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 
added, Jude 25 [Rec. om. διὰ Ἰ. X.]; σωτὴρ πάντων, 
1 Tim. iv. 10 (cf. Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 53 xxvi. (xxvii.) 1; 
Is. xii. 2; xvii. 10; xlv. 15, 21; Mic. vii. 7, ete.) ;— to 
the Messiah, and Jesus as the Messiah, through 
whom God gives salvation: Lk. ii.11; Acts v.31; xiii. 
28: ὁ car. τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. iv. 42; 1 Jn. iv. 14; ἡμῶν, 
2 Tim. i. 10; Tit. 1. 4; ii. 13; iii. 6; σωτὴρ Ἰησοῦς Χρι- 
στός, 2 Pet.i.[1 (where Rec.b*° inserts ἡμῶν), 11; ii. 
20; ili. 18; ὁ κύριος καὶ σωτήρ, 2 Pet. iii. 2; σωτὴρ τοῦ 
σώματος, univ. (‘the savior’ i. 6.) preserver of the body, 
i. e. of the church, Eph. v. 23 (σωτὴρ ὄντως ἁπάντων ἐστὶ 
καὶ γενέτωρ. of God the preserver of the world, Aristot. 
de mundo, e. 6 p. 397°, 20); σωτήρ is used of Christ 
as the giver of future salvation, on his return from 
heaven, Phil. iii. 20. [The title is confined (with the 
exception of the writings of St Luke) to the later writ- 
ings of the N. T.” (Westcott u. s.)]* 


6) 


612 σωφρονέω 


σωτηρία, -as, ἡ, (σωτήρ), deliverance, preservation, safety, 
salvation: deliverance from the molestation of enemies, 
Acts vii. 25; with ἐξ ἐχθρῶν added, Lk. i. 71; preserva- 
tion (of physical life), safety, Acts xxvii. 34; Heb. xi 
7. in an ethical sense, that which conduces to the soul’s 
safety or salvation: σωτηρία τινὶ ἐγένετο, Lk. xix. 9; ἡγεῖ- 
σθαί τι σωτηρίαν, 2 Pet. iii.15; in the technical biblical 
sense, the Messianic salvation (see σώζω, b.), a: 
uniy.: Jn. iv. 22; Actsiv. 12; xiii.47; Ro. xi. 11; 2Th. ii. 
13; 2 Tim. iii.15; Heb. ii.3; vi. 9; Jude3; opp. to ἀπώ- 
λεια, Phil. i. 28; αἰώνιος σωτηρία, Heb. v. 9 (for πῃ 
orniy, Is. xlv.17); [add, Mk. xvi. WH in the (rejected) 
‘Shorter Conclusion’]; ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης, in- 
struction concerning that salvation which John tie Bap- 
tist foretold [ef. W. 237 (223) ], Acts xiii. 26; τὸ evayye- 
λιον τῆς σωτηρίας ὑμῶν, Eph. i. 13; ὁδὸς σωτηρίας, Acts 
xvi. 17 ; κέρας σωτηρίας (see κέρας, b.), Lk. i. 09; ἡμέρα 
σωτηρίας, the time in which the offer of salvation is 
made, 2 Co. vi. 2 (fr. Is. xlix. 8); κατεργάζεσθαι τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 
σωτηρίαν, Phil. ii. 12; κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν, Heb. i. 14; 
[ὁ ἀρχηγὸς τῆς σωτηρίας. Heb. ii. 10]; εἰς σωτηρίαν, unto 
(the attainment of) salvation, Ro. [i. 16]; x. [1], 10; 
1 Pet. ii. 2 [Ree. om. ]}. b. salvation as the present 
possession of all true Christians (see σώζω, b.): 2Co. 
i. 6; vii. 10; Phil. i. 19; σωτηρία ἐν ἀφέσει ἁμαρτιῶν, 
Lk. i. 77; σωτηρίας τυχεῖν pera δύξης αἰωνίου, 2 Tim. 
ii. 10. c. future salvation, the sum of benefits 
and blessings which Christians, redeemed from all 
earthly ills, will enjoy after the visible return of Christ 
from heaven in the consummated and eternal king- 
dom of God: Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Th. v. 9; Heb. ix. 28; 1 
Pet. i. 5, 10; Rev. xii. 10; ἐλπὶς σωτηρίας, 1 Th. v. 8; 
κομίζεσθαι σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν, 1 Pet. i. 9; ἡ σωτηρία τῷ θεῷ 
ἡμῶν (dat. of the possessor, se. ἐστίν [οἵ. B. § 129, 297; 
ef. Ayw MT), Ps. iii. 9), the salvation which is 
bestowed on us belongs to God, Rey. vii. 10; ἡ σωτηρία 
... τοῦ θεοῦ (gen. of the possessor [cf. B. § 132, 11, i. a.], 
for Rec. τῷ θεῷ) ἡμῶν se. ἐστίν. Rev. xix.1. (Tragg., 
[Hadt.], Thue., Xen., Plat., al. Sept. for pur, πρῶ, 
TAWA, τ 9 escape.) * 

σωτήριος, -ον, (σωτήρ), fr. Aeschyl., Eur., Thue. down, 
saving, bringing salvation: ἡ χάρις 9 σωτήριος, Tit. ii. 11 
(Sap. i. 14; 3 Mace. vii. 18; ἡ σωτήριος δίαιτα, Clem. 
Alex. Paedag. p. 48 ed. Sylb.). Neut. τὸ σωτήριον 
(Sept. often for τη )γ)}, less freq. for YW"), as often in 
Grk. writ., substantively, safety, in the N. T. (the Mes- 
sianic) salvation (see σώζω, b. and in σωτηρία) : with 
τοῦ θεοῦ added, decreed by God, Lk. iii. 6 (fr. Is. xl. 5); 
Acts xxviii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35,12; he who em- 
bodies this salvation, or through whom God is about to 
achieve it: of the Messiah, Lk. ii. 30 (τὸ oar. ἡμῶν Ἰη- 
σοῦς Xp. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 1 [where see Harnack]) ; 
simply, equiv. to the hope of (future) salvation, Eph. vi. 
17. (In the Sept. τὸ cwr. often for D9W, a thank-offer- 
ing [or ‘ peace-offering’], and the plur. occurs in the same 
sense in Xen., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Leian., Hdian.) * 

σω-φρονέω, -@; 1 aor. impv. σωφρονήσατε ; (σώφρων, 
4. v-); fr. Tragg., Xen., Plat. down; to be of sound 


σωφρονίζω 


mind, i. 6. a. to be in one’s right mind: of one 
who has ceased δαιμονίζεσθαι, Mk. v.15; LK. viii. 35; 
opp. to ἐκστῆναι, 2 Co. y. 13, (the σωφρονῶν and paveis 
are contrasted in Plat. de rep. i. p. 331 ¢c.; σωφρονοῦσαι 
and μανεῖσαι, Phaedr. p. 244b.; ὁ μεμηνὼς - . - ἐσωφρό- 
νησε, Apollod. 3, 5, 1, 6). b. to exercise self-control; 
i.e. a. to put a moderate estimate upon one’s self, 
think of one’s self soberly: opp. to ὑπερφρονεῖν, Ro. xii. 
3. B. to curb one’s passions, Tit. ii. 6; joined with 
νήφω (as in Leian. Nigrin. 6), [R. V. be of sound mind 
and be sober], 1 Pet. iv. 7.* 

σωφρονίζω, 3 pers. plur. ind. -ζουσιν, Tit. ii. 4 Lmrg. T 
Tr, al. subjune. -ζωσι; to make one σώφρων, restore one 
to his senses; to moderate, control, curb, discipline; to hold 
one to his duty; so fr. Eur. and Thue. down; to admon- 
ish, to exhort earnestly, [R. V. train]: τινά foll. by an inf. 
Tit. ii. 4.* 

σωφρονισμός, -ov, 6, (σωφρονίζωλ) ; 1. an admon- 
ishing or calling to soundness of mind, to moderation and 
self-control: Joseph. antt. 17, 9,2; Ὁ. 1. 2, 1,3; App. 
Pun. 8,65; Aesop. fab. 38; Plut.; [Philo, legs. alleg. 3, 
691. 2. self-control, moderation, (σωφρονισμοί τινες 
ἢ μετάνοιαι τῶν νέων, Plut. mor. p. 712 6. i. e. quaest. 
conviv. 8, 3): πνεῦμα σωφρονισμοῦ, 2 Tim. i. 7, where 
see Huther; [but Huther, at least in his later edd., takes 
the word transitively, i. q. correction (R. V. disci- 
line); see also Holtzmann ad loc. J.* 


613 


ταλαιπωρία 


σωφρόνως, (σώφρων), adv., fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down, 
with sound mind, soberly, temperately, discreetly: Tit. ii. 
12 (Sap. ix. 11).* 

σωφροσύνη, -ης, ἡ, (copper), fr. Hom. (where caodpo- 
σύνη) down; a. soundness of mind (opp. to pavia, 
Xen. mem. 1, 1,16; Plat. Prot. p. 323 b.): ῥήματα σωφρο- 
σύνης, words of sanity [A. V. soberness], Acts xxvi. 
25. b. self-control, sobriety, (ea virtus, cujus pro- 
prium est, motus animi appetentes regere et sedare sem- 
perque adversantem libidini moderatam im omni re ser- 
vare constantiam, Cic. Tusc. 3, 8,17; ἡ σωφροσ. ἐστὶ 
kat ἡδονῶν τινων καὶ ἐπιθυμιῶν ἐγκράτεια. Plat. rep. 4, 
480 6.; cf. Phaedo p. 68¢.; sympos. Ρ. 196 ο.; Diog. 
Laért. 8, 91; 4 Mace. i. 31; σωφροσύνη δὲ ἀρετὴ δι᾿ ἣν 
πρὸς Tas ἡδονὰς τοῦ σώματος οὕτως ἔχουσιν ὡς ὁ νόμος 
κελεύει, ἀκολασία δὲ τοὐναντίον, Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 9): 
1 Tim. ii. 15; joined with αἰδώς (as in Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 
30 54.) ibid. 9; [ef. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xx., and see 
αἰδώς }.* 

σώφρων, -ov, (fr. σάος, contr. σῶς [cf. coo, init.], and 
φρήν. hence the poet. σαόφρων; cf. ἄφρων, ταπεινόφρων, 
μεγαλόφρων), [fr. Hom. down]; a. of sound mind, 
sane, in one’s senses, (see σωφρονέω, a. and σωφροσύνη, 
a.). b. curbing one’s desires and impulses, self-con- 
trolled, temperate, [R.V. soberminded], ([ἐπιθυμεῖ 6 σώ- 
pov ὧν δεῖ καὶ ὡς δεῖ καὶ Gre, Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 15 fin.], 
see σωφροσύνη, b.): 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit. i. 8; 11, 2, δ." 


T 


[T, τ: on the receding of tr in the vocabulary of the N. T. 
before oa, see under Σ, σ, s.] 

ταβέρναι, -dv, ai, (a Lat. word [ef. B. 17 (15)]), ἑαυ- 
erns: Τρεῖς Ταβέρναι (gen. Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν), Three Tav- 
erns, the name of an inn or halting-place on the Ap- 
pian way between Rome and The Market of Appius 
[see "Amos ]; it was ten Roman miles distant from the 
latter place and thirty-three from Rome (Cie. ad Attic. 
2, 10, (12)) [ef. B.D. s. v. Three Taverns]: Acts xxviii. 
15.* 

Topida [WH Ταβειθά. see their App. p. 155, and 5. v. 
«,4; the better accent seems to be -θᾷ (see Kautzsch as 
below) ], ἡ, (8220, a Chald. name in the ‘emphatic state’ 
{Kautzsch, Gram. ἃ. Bibl.-Aram. τι. s. w. p. 11, writes it 
ἘΠ, stat. emphat. of 120], Hebr. *2¥, i. e. δορκάς, 
q.v.), Tabitha, a Christian woman of Joppa, noted for 
her works of benevolence: Acts ix. 86,40. [Cf. B. D. 
8. v. Tabitha.]* 

τάγμα, -ros, τό, (τάσσωλ); 
been arranged, thing placed in order. 


a. pron. that which has 
b. spec. a body 1 


of soldiers, a corps: 2 8. xxiii. 13; Xen. mem. 3, 1, 11; 
often in Polyb.; Diod. 17, 80; Joseph. b.j. 1, 9,1; 3, 4, 
2; [esp. for the Roman ‘legio’ (exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 
8)]; hence univ. a band, troop, class: ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ 
τάγματι (the same words occur in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 37, 
3 and 41, 1), 1 Co. xv. 23, where Paul specifies several 
distinct bands or classes of those raised from the dead 
[A. V. order. Of the ‘order’ of the Essenes in Joseph. 
Ὁ. j. 2, 8, 3. 8).* 

τακτός, -7, -dv, (τάσσω), fr. Thue. (4, 65) down, or- 
dered, arranged, fixed, stated : τακτὴ ἡμέρα (Polyb. 3, 34, 
9; Dion. Hal. 2, 74), Acts xii. 21 [A. V. sef].” 

ταλαιπωρέω, -ὦ : 1 aor. impy. ταλαιπωρήσατε; (ταλαί- 
πωρος, 4- V-); fr. Eur. and Thue. down; Sept. for 
TW; a. to toil heavily, to endure labors and hard- 
ships; to be afflicted; to feel afflicted and miserable: Jas. 
iv. 9. b. in Grk. writ. and Sept. also transitively 
{ef. L. and S. 5. v. II], to afflict: Ps. xvi. (xvii.) 9; Is. 
Xxxiii. 1.* 

ταλαιπωρία, -as, 9, (ταλαίπωρος q- V.), hardship, trouble, 


ταλαίπωρος 


calamity, misery: Ro. iii. 16 (fr. Is. lix. 7); plur. [mis- 
eries], Jas. v. 1. (Hdt., Thuc., Isoer., Polyb., Diod., 
Joseph., al.; Sept. chiefly for 1.) * 

ταλαίπωρος, -ov, (fr. TAAAQ, TAAQ, to bear, undergo, 
and πῶρος a callus [ἃ]. πωρός, but οἵ. Suidas (ed. Gaisf.) 
p. 3490 c. and note; al. connect the word with περάω, 
πειράω, cf. Curtius § 4007), enduring toils and troubles; 
afflicted, wretched: Ro. vii. 24; Rey. iii. 17. (Is. xxxiii. 
1; Tob. xiii. 10; Sap. 111. 11; xiii. 10; [Pind.], Tragg., 
Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Aesop., al.) * 

ταλαντιαῖος, -a, -ov, (τάλαντον, q. V.; like δραχμιαῖος, 
στιγμιαῖος, δακτυλιαῖος, λιτριαῖος, etc.; see Lob. ad Phryn. 
p. 544), of the weight or worth of a talent: Rey. xvi. 21. 
(Dem., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

τάλαντον, -ov, τό, [TAAAQ, TAAQ [to bear]) ; 1. 
the scale of a balance, a balance, a pair of scales (Hom.). 
2. that which is weighed, a talent, i.e. a. a weight, 
varying in different places and times. b. asum of 
money weighing a talent and varying in different states 
and ace. to the changes in the laws regulating the cur- 
rency ; the Attic talent was equal to 60 Attic minae 
or 6000 drachmae, and worth about 200 pounds sterling 
or 1000 dollars [ef. L. and 8. 5. v. II. 2b.]. But in the 
N. T. probably the Syrian talent is referred to, which 
was equal to about 237 dollars [but see BB. DD. s. v. 
Money]: Mt. xviii. 24; xxv. 15 sq. [18 Lchm.], 20, 22, 
24 sq. 28. (Sept. for 135, Luth. Centner, the heaviest 
Hebrew weight ; on which see Aneucker in Schenkel vy. 
p. 460 sq.; [BB. DD. 8. ν. Weighis].) * 

ταλιθά [WH ταλειθά, see their App. p. 155, ands. v. 
ec, ©; more correctly accented -θᾷ (see Kautzsch, as be- 
low, p. 8; ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 102)], a Chald. word ΝΡ 
[ace. to Kautzsch (τάχη. ἃ. Bibl.-Aram. p. 12) more cor- 
rectly amp, fem. of oy ‘a youth’], a damsel, maiden : 
Mk. v. 41.* 

ταμεῖον [so T WH uniformly], more correctly ταμιεῖον 
[R GL Tr in Mt. vi. 6], (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 493; W. 
94 (90); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 88 sq.]), -ov, τό, (ταμιεύω), fr. 
Thuc. and Xen. down; 1. a storechamber, store- 
room: Lk. xii. 24 (Deut. xxviii. 8; Prov. iii. 10 [Philo, 
quod omn. prob. lib. § 12]). 2. a chamber, esp. ‘an 
inner chamber’; @ secret room: Mt. vi. 6; xxiv. 26; Lk. 
xii. 3, (Xen. Hell. 5,4,5; Sir. xxix. 12; Tob. vii. 15, and 
often in Sept. for ὙΠ). Ἢ 

τανῦν, see νῦν, 1 f. a. Ὁ. 430° top. 

τάξις, -ews, ἡ, (τάσσω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 
1. an arranging, arrangement. 2. order, i.e. a fixed 
succession observing also a fixed time: Lk. i. 8. 3. 
due or right order: κατὰ τάξιν, in order, 1 Co. xiv. 40; 
orderly condition, Col. ii. 5 [some give it here a military 
sense, ‘ orderly array’, see στερέωμα, C.]. 4. the post, 
rank, or position which gne holds in civil or other affairs; 
and since this position generally depends on one’s talents, 
experience, resources, τάξις becomes equiv. to character, 
Sashion, quality, style, (2 Mace. ix. 18; i. 19; οὐ yap 
ἱστορίας, ἀλλὰ κουρεακῆς λαλιᾶς ἐμοὶ δοκοῦσι τάξιν ἔχειν, 
Polyb. 3, 20, 5): κατὰ τὴν τάξιν (for which in vii. 15 we 
have κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα) Μελχισεδέκ, after the manner 


614 


TATrELVOW 


of the priesthood ΓΑ. V. order] of Melchizedek (acc. 
to the Sept. of Ps. cix. (ex.) ὅ *N735-5y), Heb. ν. 6, 
10; vi. 20; vii. 11, 17, 21 (where T Tr WH om. the 
phrase).* 

ταπεινός, -7), -όν, fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down, Sept. 
for Ὃν, Ὁ), DEY, etc., low, i.e. a. prop. not rising 
far from the ground: Ezek. xvii. 24. b. metaph. 
a. as to condition, lowly, of low degree: with a subst. 
Jas. i. 9; substantively of ταπεινοί, opp. to δυνάσται, Lk. 
i. 52; i.g. brought low with grief, depressed, (Sir. xxv. 
23), 2 Co. vii. 6. Neut. τὰ ταπεινά, Ro. xii. 16 (on 
which see συναπάγω, fin.). B. lowly in spirit, hum- 
ble: opp. to ὑπερήφανος, Jas. iv. 6; 1 Pet. v. ὃ (fr. Prov. 
iii. 34) ; with τῇ καρδίᾳ added, Mt. xi. 29 (τῷ πνεύματι, Ps. 
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 19); in a bad sense, deporting one’s self 
abjectly, deferring servilely to others, (Xen. mem. 3, 10, 
5; Plat. legg. 6 p. 774 c.; often in Isocr.), 2 Co. x. 1. 
(Cf. reff. 5. v. ταπεινοφροσύνη, fin. ]* 

ταπεινοφροσύνη, -ης, 7, (ταπεινόφρων ; opp. to μεγαλο- 
φροσύνη, ὑψηλοφροσύνη, [cf. W. 99 (94)]), the having a 
humble opinion of one’s self ; a deep sense of one’s (moral) 
littleness ; modesty, humility, lowliness of mind; (Vulg. 
humilitas, Luth. Demuth): Acts xx. 19; Eph. iv. 2; Phil. 
ii. 3; Col. iii. 12; 1 Pet. v. 5; used of an affected and 
ostentatious humility in Col. ii. 18, 23. (The word occurs 
neither in the O. T., nor in prof. auth. — [but in Joseph. 
Ὁ. j. 4, 9, 2 in the sense of pusillanimity ; also Epictet. 
diss. 8, 24, 56 in a bad sense. See Trench, N. T. Syn. 
§ xlii.; Bp. Zghtft. on Phil.l.c.; Zezschwitz, Profangri- 
citat, u.s.w., pp. 20, 62; W. 26].) * 

ταπεινόφρων, -ov, (ταπεινός and φρήν), humble-minded, 
i.e. having a modest opinion of one’s self: 1 Pet. iii. 8, 
where Rec. φιλόφρονες. (Prov. xxix. 23; in a bad sense, 
pusillanimous, mean-spirited, μικροὺς ἡ τύχη Kal περιδεεῖς 
ποιεῖ καὶ ταπεινόφρονας, Plut. de Alex. fort. 2, 4; [de 
tranquill. animi 17. See W. § 34, 3 and reff. 5. v. ταπει- 
νοφροσύνη, fin. }.) * 

ταπεινόω, -ὥ ; fut. ταπεινώσω ; 1 aor. ἐταπείνωσα ; Pass., 
pres. ταπεινοῦμαι; 1 aor. ἐταπεινώθην; 1 fut. ταπεινωθή- 
σομαι; (ταπεινός); to make low, bring low, (Vulg. hu- 
milio) ; a. prop.: ὄρος, βουνόν, i.e. to level, reduce 
to a plain, pass. Lk. iii. 5 fr. Is. xl. 4. b. metaph. 
to bring into a humble condition, reduce to meaner circum- 
stances ; i. 6. a. to assign a lower rank or place to ; to 
abase ; τινά, pass., to be ranked below others who are hon- 
ored or rewarded [R. V. to humble]: Mt. xxiii. 12; Lk. 
xiv. 11; xviii. 14. B. ταπεινῶ ἐμαυτόν, to humble or 
abase myself, by frugal living, 2 Co. xi. 7; in pass. of 
one who submits to want, Phil. iv. 12; ἑαυτόν, of one 
who stoops to the condition of a servant, Phil. ii. 8. c. 
to lower, depress, [Eng. humble]: τινά, one’s soul, bring 
down one’s pride ; ἐμαυτόν, to have a modest opinion of 
one’s self, to behave in an unassuming manner devoid 
of all haughtiness, Mt. xviii. 4; xxiii. 12; Lk. xiv. 11; 
xviii. 14; pass. ταπεινοῦμαι ἑνώπιον κυρίου (see ἐνώπιον, 2 
b. fin.) in a mid. sense [B. 52 (46)], to confess and de- 
plore one’s spiritual littleness and unworthiness, Jas. iv. 
10 (in the same sense ταπεινοῦν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, Sir. ii. 


ταπείνωσις 


17; vii. 17; Sept. for 152) 720, he afflicted his soul, of 
persons fasting, Lev. xvi. 29, 31; xxiii. 27, 32; Is. lviii. 
8, 5, 10; τὴν ψυχήν τινος, to disturb, distress, the soul 
of one, Protev. Jac. c. 2. 13. 15 [rather, to humiliate ; see 
the passages]); ὑπὸ τὴν χεῖρα τ. θεοῦ, to submit one’s 
self in a lowly spirit to the power and will of God, 1 Pet. 
v. 6 (cf. Gen. xvi. 9) ; 1. ᾳ. to put to the blush, 2 Co. xii. 
21. ([{Hippocr.], Xen., Plat., Diod., Plut.; Sept. for 
mp, Daw and S*aviq, ΝΞ, WISN, etc.) [See reff. s. v. 
ταπεινοφροσύνη. | * j , 

ταπείνωσις, -ews, ἡ, (ταπεινόω), lowness, low estate, [hu- 
miliation]: Lk. i. 48; Acts viii. 33 (fr. Is. liii. 8); Phil. 
iii. 21 (on which see σῶμα, 1b.) ; metaph. spiritual abase- 
ment, leading one to perceive and lament his (moral) 
littleness and guilt, Jas. i. 10, see Kern ad loc. (In va- 
rious senses, by Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut.; 
Sept. for 20.) [See reff. s. v. ταπεινοφροσύνη. * 

ταράσσω ; impf. ἐτάρασσον ; 1 aor. érdpata ; Pass., pres. 
impy. 3 pers. sing. ταρασσέσθω ; impf. ἐταρασσόμην ; pf. 
τετάραγμαι ; Laor. ἐταράχθην ; fr. Hom. down; to agitate, 
trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and 
fro) ; a. prop.: τὸ ὕδωρ, Jn. v. 4 [RL], 7, (Ezek. 
Xxxii. 2; τὸν πόντον, Hom. Od. 5, 291; τὸ πέλαγος, Eur. 
Tro. 88 ; τὸν ποταμόν, Aesop. fab. 87 (25)). b. trop. 
to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of 
mind, disturb his equanimity ; to disquiet, make restless, 
(Sept. for 573, etc.; pass. ταράσσομαι for 12, to be 
stirred up, irritated); a. to stir up: τὸν ὄχλον, Acts 
Xvii. 8; [τοὺς ὄχλους, Acts xvii. 13 LT Tr WH]. B. 
to trouble: τινά, to strike one’s spirit with fear or dread, 
pass., Mt. ii. 3; xiv. 26; Mk. vi. 50; Lk. i. 12; [xxiv. 
38]; 1 Pet. iii. 14; ταράσσεται ἡ καρδία, Jn. xiv. 1, 27; 
to affect with great pain or sorrow: ἑαυτόν (cf. our to 
trouble one’s self), Jn. xi. 33 [Α΄ V. was troubled (some 
understand the word here of bodily agitation) ] (σεαυτὸν 
μὴ τάρασσε, Antonin. 4, 26); τετάρακται ἡ ψυχή, Jn. xii. 
27 (Ps. vi. 4) ; ἐταράχθη τῷ πνεύματι, In. xiii. 21. Y- 
to render anxious or distressed, to perplex the mind of 
one by suggesting scruples or doubts, (Xen. mem. 2, 6, 
17): Gal. i. 7; v. 10; τινὰ λόγοις, Acts xv. 24. [Comp.: 
δια-, ἐκ- Tapdoow. | * 

ταραχή, -ῆς, 7, (ταράσσων, fr. [Pind.], Hdt. down, dis- 
turbance, commotion: prop. τοῦ ὕδατος, Ju. v. 4 [RL]; 
metaph. a tumult, sedition: in plur. Mk. xiii. 8 RG.* 

τάραχος, -ov, ὁ, (Tapdocw), commotion, stir (of mind): 
Acts xii. 18; tumult (A.V. stir], Acts xix. 28. (Sept.; 
Xen., Plut., Leian.) * 

Tapcets, -éws, ὁ, (Tapods, q.v.), belonging to Tarsus, 
of Tarsus: Acts ix. 11; xxi. 39.* 

Tapoés, -o0, ἡ, [on its accent cf. Chandler 88 317, 
318], in prof. auth. also Tapool, -ῶὥν, αἱ, Tarsus, a mari- 
time city, the capital of Cilicia during the Roman period 
(Joseph. antt. 1, 6, 1), situated on the river Cydnus, 
which divided it into two parts (hence the plural Ταρσοί). 
It was not only large and populous, but also renowned 
for its Greek learning and its numerous schools of phi- 
losophers (Strab. 14 p. 673 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 303 
sq.]). Moreover it was a free city (Plin. 5, 22), and 


615 


rae) 
ταυτα 


exempt alike from the jurisdiction of a Roman governor, 
and the maintenance of a Roman garrison ; although it 
was not a Roman ‘colony’. It had received its free- 
dom from Antony (App. b. civ. 5, 7) on the condition 
that it might retain its own magistrates and laws, but 
should acknowledge the Roman sovereignty and furnish 
auxiliaries in time of war. It is now called Tarso or 
Tersus, a mean city of some 6000 inhabitants [others 
set the number very much higher]. It was the birth- 
place of the apostle Paul: Acts ix. 30; xi. 25; xxii. 3. 
[BB.DD. 5. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq. cf. 2.]* 

ταρταρόω, -@: 1 aor. ptcp. ταρταρώσας ; (τάρταρος, the 
name of a subterranean region, doleful and dark, re- 
garded by the ancient Greeks as the abode of the 
wicked dead, where they suffer punishment for their evil 
deeds ; it answers to the Gehenna of the Jews, see γέ- 
evva); to thrust down to Tartarus (sometimes in the Scho- 
liasts) [cf. W.25 (24) n.]; to hold captive in Tartarus : 
τινὰ σειραῖς [q. V.] ζόφου, 2 Pet. ii. 4 [A. V. cast down to 
hell (making the dat. depend on rapédwxev) ].* 

τάσσω: 1 aor. ἔταξα ; pf. inf. τεταχέναι (Acts xviii. 2 
T Tr mrg.); Pass., pres. ptep. τασσόμενος ; pf. 3 pers. 
sing. τέτακται, ptep. τεταγμένος ; 1 aor, mid. ἐταξάμην ; fr. 
[Pind., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down ; Sept. for DY, and occa- 
sionally for [D2, 7%, mw, etc.; to put in place; to sta- 
tion ; a. to place in a certain order (Xen. mem. 3, 
1,7 [9]), to arrange, to assign a place, to appoint: τινά, 
pass. αἱ ἐξουσίαι ὑπὸ θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν [A. V. or- 
dained 1, Ro. xiii. 1; [καιρούς, Acts xvii. 26 Lehm.]; ἑαυτὸν 
els διακονίαν τινί, to consecrate [R. V. set] one’s self to 
minister unto one, 1 Co. xvi. 15 (ἐπὶ τὴν διακονίαν, Plat. 
de rep. 2 p. 371 ¢.; els τὴν δουλείαν, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 11); 
ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι els ζωὴν αἰώνιον, aS Many as were 
appointed [A. V. ordained] (by God) to obtain eternal 
life, or to whom God had decreed eternal life, Acts xiii. 
48; τινὰ ὑπό τινα, to put one under another’s control 
[A. V. set wnder], pass., Mt. viii. 9 L WH in br., cod. 
Sin.; Lk. vii. 8, (ὑπό τινα, Polyb. 3, 16, 3; 5, 65, 7; Diod. 
2, 26,8; 4,9, 5); τινί τι, to assign (appoint) a thing to 
one, pass. Acts xxii. 10 (Xen. de rep. Lac. 11, 6). b. 
to appoint, ordain, order: foll. by the acc. with inf., Acts 
xv. 2; [xviii. 2T Tr mrg.]; (foll. by an inf., Xen. Hier. 
10, 4; Cyr. 4, ὅ, 11). Mid. (as often in Grk. writ.) prop. 
to appoint on one’s own responsibility or authority : οὗ 
ἐτάξατο αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς sc. πορεύεσθαι, Mt, xxviii. 16 ; 
to appoint mutually, i. 6. agree upon: ἡμέραν (Polyb. 18, 
19, 1, etc.), Acts xxviii. 28. [Comp.: ἀνα- (-μαι), ἀντι-, 
dro-, d1a-, ἐπι-δια-(- μαι), ἐπι-, Tpo-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπο- τάσσω. 
Syn. see κελεύω, fin.]* 

ταῦρος, -ov, ὁ, [fr. τ. meaning ‘thick’, ‘stout’ ; allied 
w. σταυρός, q. v.; ef. Vanicek p. 1127 ; Fick Pt. i. p. 246. 
Cf. Eng. steer], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for WWW, a bull (ox): 
Mt. xxii.4; Acts xiv. 13; Heb. ix.13; x, 4.* 

ταὐτά, by crasis for τὰ αὐτά : 1 ΤῊ. 1]. 14 RL mrg., and 
some manuscripts [(but see Tdf.on Lk. as below) ] and 
edd. also in Lk. vi. 28 [L mrg.], 26 [L mrg.]; xvii. 30 
GL. [See W. § 5,3; Β. 10; WH. App. p. 145; Meister- 
hans ὃ 18, 1: οὗ, αὐτός, III. ]* 


ταφή 


ταφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (θάπτω), fr. Hdt. down; Sept. several 
times for 7313p and 43), burial: Mt. xxvii. 7.* 

τάφος, -ov, 6, (θάπτω) ; 1. burial (so from Hom. 
down). 2. a grave, sepulchre, (so fr. Hes. down) : 
Mt. xxiii. 27, 29; xxvii. 61, 64,66; xxviii. 1; in a com- 
parison: τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν, their speech 
threatens destruction to others, it is death to some one 
whenever they open their mouth, Ro. iii. 13. Sept. for 
0: and sometimes for 1}33)?.* 

τάχα, (ταχύς), adv. ; 1. hastily, quickly, soon, (so 
fr. Hom. down). 2. as often in Grk. writ. fr. [Hes., 
Aeschyl.], Hdt. down, perhaps, peradventure: Ro. v. 7; 
Philem. 15.* 

[τάχειον, WH for τάχιον, q. v.; and cf. s. v. εἰ «J 

ταχέως, (ταχύς), adv., [fr. Hom. down], quickly, shortly: 
Lk. xiv. 21; xvi.6; Jn. xi.381; 1Co.iv.19; Gal.i.6; 
Phil. ii. 19, 24; 2 Tim. iv. 9; with the added suggestion 
of inconsiderateness [hastily]: 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Tim. v. 22.* 

ταχινός, -7, -όν, fr. Theoer. down, swift, quick: of 
events soon to come or just impending, 2 Pet. i. 14; ii. 
1, (Is. lix. 7; Sap. xiii. 2; Sir. xvili. 26).* 

τάχιον [WH τάχειον ; see their App. p. 154 and ef. 
εἰς c], (neut. of the compar. ταχίων), advy., for which the 
more ancient writ. used θᾶσσον or θᾶττον, see Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 76 sq.; W. § 11, 2a.; [B. 27 (24)]; more 
swifily, more quickly: in comparison, Jn. xx. 4 [ef. W. 
604 (562)]; with the suppression of the second mem- 
ber of the comparison [W. 243 (228)]: Heb. xiii. 19 
(sooner, sc. than would be the case without your prayers 
for me), 23 (sc. than I depart) ; In. xiii. 27 (se. than you 
seem to have resolved to); 1 Tim. iii. 14 RG T (se. than 
I anticipated).* 

τάχιστα, (neut. plur. of the superl. τάχιστος, fr. τάχυς), 
adv., [fr. Hom. down], very quickly: ὡς τάχιστα, as 
quickly as possible [A. V. with all speed], Acts xvii. 15.* 

τάχος, -ous, τό, fr. Hom. down, quickness, speed: ἐν τάχει 
(often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down), 
quickly, shortly, Acts xii. 7; xxii. 18; [xxv. 4]; Ro. xvi. 
20; speedily, soon, (Germ. in Balde), Lk. xviii. 8; 1 Tim. 
ili. 14 L Tr WH; Rev. Ὁ 1: xxii. 6.* 

ταχύ, (neut. of the adj. ταχύς), adv., [fr. Pind. down], 
quickly, speedily, (without delay): Mt. v. 25; xxviii. 7 
54.; Mk. xvi. 8 Ree.; Lk. xv. 22 L Tr br. WH; Jn. xi. 
29; ἔρχεσθαι, Rev. ii. 5 Ree.b*'7, 16; 111. 11; xi. 14; 
xxii. 7,12, 20; forthwith, i.e. while in the use of my 
name he is performing mighty works, Mk. ix. 39.* 

ταχύς. -εἴα. -v, fr. Hom. down, quick, fleel, speedy: opp. 
to βραδύς (as in Xen. mem. 4, 2, 25), εἰς τὸ ἀκοῦσαι, [A. V. 
swift to hear), Jas. i. 19.* 

τέ, (as δέ comes fr. δή, μέν fr. μήν, so τέ fr. the adv. 
TH, prop. as; [al. ally it with καί, ef. Curtius $§ 27, 647; 
Vaniéek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat. 
§ 195]), a copulative enclitie particle (on the use of 
which ef. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II. 
2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently 
in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat 
rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in 
Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times; 


616 


τέ 


nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in 
the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of 
Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from 
the particle καί in that the latter is conjunctive, τέ 
adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Baéumlein (Griech. 
Partikeln, p. 145), καί introduces something new under 
the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas τέ 
marks it as having an inner connection with what pre- 
cedes; hence καί is the more general particle, τέ the 
more special and precise; καί may often stand for τέ, 
but not τέ for καί. (Cf. Ebeling, Lex. Homer., 8. v. καί, 
init.) |. 

1. τέ, standing alone (i. 6. not followed by another τέ, 
or by καί, or other particle), joins a. parts of one 
and the same sentence, as συναχθέντες συμβούλιόν τε 
λαβόντες, Mt. xxviii. 12; ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραῦτητος, 
1 Conivs 2. 808. Acts it: 55. Χο 225) x26 χα 115 
xxiii. 10 [WH txt. om.], 24; xxiv. 5; xxvii. 30 sq.; xxviii. 
23; Heb. i. 3; vi. 5; ix. 1. b. complete sentences: 
Jn. iv. 42; vi.18; Acts ii.37; iv. 33; v.19, 35,42; vi. 
7, 12sq.; vili. 3, 13, 25,31; x. 28, 33, 48 [here TTr WH 
δέ (see 6 below)]; xi. 21; xii. 6,8 [L Tr WH δέ (see 6 
below) ], 12; xiii. 4; xv. 4,39; xvi. 13, 23 [WH txt. δέ 
(see 6 below)], 34; xvii.5 [RG], 19 [Trtxt. WH δέ (see 6 
below) ], 26; xviii. 11 [R G], 26; xix. 11, 18, 29; xx. 3, 7; 
xxi. [18° Tdf.], 18°, 20 [not Lehm.],37; xxii. 8; xxiii. 5; 
xxiv. 27; xxvii. 5, 8,17, 29 [Trmrg. δέ (see 6 below) ], 
43; Ro. ii. 19; Heb. xii. 2; introduces a sentence serv- 
ing to illustrate the matter in hand, Acts i. 15; iv. 
13. 2. ré... καί, and τὲ καί, not only... but also, 
as well... as, both...and; things are thus connected 
which are akin, or which are united to each other by 
some inner bond, whether logical or real; [ace. to W. 
439 (408); Baumlein τι. s. p. 224 sq., these particles give 
no intimation respecting the relative value of the two 
members; but ace. to Rost, Griech. Gram. § 134,4; Don- 
aldson, Gr. Gram. § 551; Jelf § 758; Alotz ad Devar. 
Il. 2, p. 740, the member with καί is the more em- 
phatic]; a. parts of one and the same sentence 
(which is completed by a single finite verb): ἐσθίειν τε 
καὶ πίνειν, Lk. xii. 45; φοβητρά τε καὶ σημεῖα. Lk. xxi. 11; 
ἀρχιερεῖς τε καὶ γραμματεῖς, Lk. xxii..66; πονηρούς τε καὶ 
ἀγαθούς, Mt. xxii. 10; Ἡρώδης τε καὶ Πόντιος Πιλᾶτος, 
Acts iv. 27; ἄνδρες τε καὶ γυναῖκες, Acts viii. 12; ix. 2; 
xxii. 4; πάντη τε x. πανταχοῦ. Acts xxiv. 3; ἀσφαλῆ τε 
καὶ βεβαίαν, Heb. vi. 19; add, Actsi1; ii. 9 sq.; ix. 29; 
Xive 155 xvi 9. xvili4s ΧΙΣΧ. 10. 17. χα. 98: eo 
xxvi. 22; Ro. i. 12, 14,16; iii. 9; χ. 12: 1Co.i. 2 [Β 6], 
24, 30; Heb. iv. 13" Rec., 12; ν. 1 [here Lom. Tr WH 
br. τέ], 7, 14; viii. 3; ix. 9,19; x. 33; xi. 32; Jas. iii. 7; 
τέ is annexed to the article, which is—either repeated 
after the καί before the following noun, Lk. ii. 16; xxiii. 
12; Jn.ii.15; Acts v. 24; viii. 38; xvii. 10; xviii. 5; 
xxi. 25 [RG]; xxvi. 30; —or (less commonly) omitted, 
Actsi. 13; xiii. 1; [xxi. 25 LT Tr WH]; Ro.i. 20. τέ 
is annexed to a preposition, which after the following 
καί is—either repeated, Acts i. 8 where L om. Tr br. the 
repeated ἐν; Phil. i. 7 [Rom.Lbr. the second év];— 


τεῖχος 


or omitted, Acts x. 39 [Trtxt. WH]; xxv. 23; xxviii. 
23. ré is annexed to a relative pronoun, although it 
does not belong so much to the pronoun as to the sub- 
stantive connected with it, Acts xxvi. 22. 1t is annexed 
to an adverb, ἔτι τε καί, [and moreover], Acts xxi. 28. 
When more than two members are joined together, the 
first two are joined by τὲ καί or τὲ - - . καί, the rest by 
καί: Lk. xii. 45; Acts 1. 18; v. 24[RG]; xxi. 25; 1Co. 
i. 30; Heb. ii. 4. b. τὲ - - - «ai connect whole sen- 
tences (each of which has its own finite verb, or its own 
subject): Acts ii. 3 sq. RG; xvi. 26 RG; τὲ ... καὶ. «- 
καί, Acts xxi. 30. 3. re... δέ are so combined 
that τέ adds a sentence to what has been previously 
said, and δέ introduces something opposed to this added 
sentence [W. 439 (409)]: Acts xix. 2LT Tr WH; 3RG 
LTrtxt. WH txt.; xxii. 28 RG. 4. τὲ... τέ pre- 
sents as parallel (or coordinate) the ideas or sen- 
tences which it connects, as...so (ef. Kiihner § 520; [Jelf 
§ 754, 3; W. § 53,4]; on the Lat. que... que ef. Herzog 
on Sallust, Cat. 9, 3): Acts ii. 46; xvi. 11 sq. RG; 
xvii. 4; xxvi. 10 L T Tr WH txt., 16; Heb. vi. 2 [Tr br. 
WH txt. om. second τέ], (Sap. vii. 13; xv. 7); 
... τέ, Acts ix. 15 [LT Tr WH]; 
Acts xxvi. 20 [L T Tr WH]. 
15; ἐάν te. - μήτε... μήτε..- 
τέ, neither ...nor...and, Acts xxvii. 20 (Xen. an. 4, 
4, 6). 5. τὲ γάρ (which began to be frequent fr. 
Aristot. down), Lat. namque, etenim, for also, for indeed, 
[W. 448 (417)], are so used that the former particle 
connects, the latter gives the reason: Ro. i. 26 (so that 
in 27 we must read ὁμοίως δὲ καί [with L Tr mrg.], see 
in 6 below); vii. 7 (4 Mace. v. 22); τὲ yap - . . καί, Heb. 
ii. 11; ἐάν τε γὰρ . - - ἐάν τε, for whether . . . or (whether), 
Ro. xiv. 8; ἐάν τε yap καί, for although (Lat. namque 
etiamsi), 2 Co. x. 8 [RG]. 6. The reading often 
varies in codd. and edd. between τέ and δέ; as, Mt. xxiii. 
6; Acts iii. 10; iv. 14; viii. 1,6; ix. 24; xiii. 46; Jude 
6, etc. [see in 1 b. above]. In Ro. i. 27, following Lchm. 
[Tr mrg.], we ought certainly to read ὁμοίως δὲ καί: cf. 
Fritzsche ad loc. p. 77; [B. 361 (309) n.]. 7. As 
respects Position (cf. Kiihner § 520 Anm.5; W. 559 
54. (520)), τέ is properly annexed to that word or idea 
which is placed in parallelism with another (as Ἰουδαῖοί 
τε καὶ Ἕλληνες) ; but writers also take considerable lib- 
erty in placing it, and readily subjoin it to an article or 
a preposition; for examples see in 2 a. above. 

τεῖχος, -ovs, τό, [ef. θιγγάνω; allied with it are Eng. 
‘dike’ and ‘ditch ᾽], fr. Hom. down, Sept. very freq. for 
main ‘wall’; the wall round a city, town-wall: Acts ix. 
25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Heb. xi. 30; Rev. xxi. 12, 14 sq., 17-19.* 

τεκμήριον, -ov, τό, (fr. τεκμαίρω to show or prove by 
sure signs; fr. τέκμαρ a sign), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
that from which something is surely and plainly known; 
an indubitable evidence, a proof, (Hesych. τεκμήριον - 
σημεῖον ἀληθές): Acts i. 3 (Sap. v.11; 3 Mace. iii. 24).* 

τεκνίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of τέκνον, 4. v-; [on the accent, 
ef. W. 52; Chandler § 3477), a little child; in the N.T. 
used as a term of kindly address by teachers to their 


: 
τὲ καὶ 

a ‘ 4 ΄ 
τὸ KQL...TE... Kal, 
εἴτε... etre, see ei, III. 


. ἐάν Te, see ἐάν, 1. 3 e. . 


617 


TEKVOD 


disciples [always in the plur. little children: Mk. x. 24 
Lehm.]; Jn. xiii. 33; Gal. iv. 19 (where L txt. T Tr WH 
mrg. τέκνα); 1Jn. ii. 1, 12, 28; iii. 7 [WH mrg. παιδία], 
18; iv. 4; ν. 21. (Anthol.)* 

τεκνογονέω, -ῶ; (τεκνογόνος, and this fr. τέκνον and 


ΓΈΝΩ); ἰο beget or bear children: 1 Tim. ν. 14. (Δη- 
thol. 9, 22, 4.)* 
rexvoyovia, -as, ἡ, child-bearing: 1 Tim. ii. 15. (Aris- 


tot. h. a. 7, 1, 8 [p.582*, 28].) * 

τέκνον, -ov, τό, (τίκτω, τεκεῖν), fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
chiefly for 13, sometimes for ΠΩΣ offspring; plur. chil- 
dren; a. prop. a. univ. and without regard to 
sex, child: Mk. xiii. 12; Lk. i. 7: Acts vii.5; Rev. xii. 
4; plur., Mt. vii. 11; x. 21; xv. 26; Mk. vii. 27; xii. 
19; Lk.i.17; xiv. 26; Actsxxi.5; 2Co. xii. 14; Eph. 
vi. 1; Col. iii. 20sq.; 1 Th. ii. 7,11; 1 Tim. iii.4; Tit. 
i.6; 2Jn.1, 4,13, and often; with emphasis: to be 
regarded as true, genuine children, Ro. ix. 7; τέκνα 
ἐπαγγελίας, children begotten by virtue of the divine 
promise, Ro. ix. 8; accounted as children begotten by 
virtue of God’s promise, Gal. iv. 28; τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκός, 
children by natural descent, Ro. ix. 8. in a broader 
sense (like the Hebr. 0°33), posterity: Mt. ii. 18; iii. 9; 
Lk. iii. 8; Acts ii. 39; xiii. 33 (32). with emphasis: 
genuine posterity, true offspring, Jn. viii. 39; (of wo 
men) to be regarded as children, 1 Pet. iii. 6. β. 
spec. ἃ male child, a son: Mt. xxi. 28; Acts xxi. 21; 
Rev. xii. 5; in the voc., in kindly address, Mt. xxi. 28 ; 
Lk. ii. 48; xv. 31. b. metaph. the name is trans- 
ferred to that intimate and reciprocal relationship formed 
between men by the bonds of love, friendship, trust, 
just as between parents and children ; a. in affec- 
tionate address, such as patrons, helpers, teachers, and 
the like, employ; voc. child (son), my child, children, 
(Lat. fili, mi fili, etc., for carissime, ete.): Mt. ix. 2; Mk. 
ii. 5; x. 24 [here Lehm. rexvia, q. v-]. B. just as in 
Hebrew, Syriac, Arabic, Persian, so in the N. T., pupils 
or disciples are called children of their teachers, because 
the latter by their instruction nourish the minds of their 
pupils and mould their characters (see γεννάω, 2 b.): 
Philem. 10; 2 Tim. i. 2; 3Jn.4; in affectionate ad- 
dress, Gal. iv. 19 L txt. T Tr WH mrg.; 1 Tim. 1.18; 2 
Tim. ii. 1; with ἐν κυρίῳ added, 1 Co. iv. 17; ἐν πίστει, 
1 Tim. i. 2; κατὰ κοινὴν πίστιν, Tit. i. 4, (D829 23, sons 
i.e. disciples of the prophets, 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 35; 2K. 
ii. 3, 5, 7; among the Persians, ‘sons of the Magi’ i. e. 
their pupils). γ- τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ, children of God, —in 
the O. T. of ‘the people of Israel’ as especially dear to 


writings, all who are animated by the Spirit of God (Ro. 
viii. 14) and thus are closely related to God: Ro. viii. 
16 sq. 21; Eph.v.1; Phil. ii. 15; those to whom, as dear- 
ly beloved of God, he has appointed salvation by Christ, 
Ro. ix.8; in the writings of John, all who ἐκ θεοῦ ἐγεν- 
νήθησαν (have been begotten of God, see γεννάω, 2d.) : Jn. 
i. 12sq.; 1 Jn. iii. 1 sq. 10; v. 2; those whom God knows 
to be qualified to obtain the nature and dignity of his 
children, Jn. xi. 52. [Cf. Westcott on the Epp. of St. 


ἢ 
τεκνοτροφέω 


John, pp. 94, 120; “In St. Paul the expressions ‘sons 
of God’, ‘children of God’, mostly convey the idea of 
liberty (see however Phil. ii. 15), in St. John of guile- 
lessness and love; in accordance with this distinction 
St. Paul uses υἱοί as well as τέκνα, St. John τέκνα only” 
(Bp. Lghtft.) ; cf. vids τοῦ θεοῦ, 4. ] δ. τέκνα τοῦ δια- 
βόλου, those who in thought and action are prompted by the 
devil, and so reflect his character: 1 Jn. iii. 10. c. 
metaph. and Hebraistically, one is called τέκνον of any- 
thing who depends upon it, is possessed by a desire or 
affection for it, is addicted to it; or who is liable to any 
Jate; thus in the N. 'T. we find a. children of a 
city, i. e. its citizens, inhabitants, (Jer. ii. 30; Joel ii. 
23; 1 Mace. i. 88 ; υἱοὶ Σιών, Ps. exlix. 2): Mt. xxiii. 
87; Lk. xiii. 34; xix. 44; Gal. iv. 25. B. τέκνα τῆς 
σοφίας, the votaries of wisdom, those whose souls have, 
as it were, been nurtured and moulded by wisdom: Mt. 
xi. 19 (where T Tr txt. WH have hastily adopted ἔργων 
for τέκνων ; ef. Keim ii. p. 369 [Eng. trans. iv. p. 43 sq.; 
per contra, see T'df.’s note and WH. App. ad loe.]); Lk. 
vii. 35; τέκνα ὑπακοῆς, those actuated by a desire to obey, 
obedient, 1 Pet. i. 14; τοῦ φωτός, both i!lumined by the 
light and loving the light, Eph. v. 8. Ὑ- κατάρας 
τέκνα, exposed to cursing, 2 Pet. ii. 14; τῆς ὀργῆς, doomed 
to God’s wrath or penalty, Eph. ii. 3; cf. Steiger on 1 
Pet. i. 14; W. 238 (223); [B. 161 (141)]. In the same 
way ἔκγονος is used sometimes in Grk. writ.; as, ἔκγ. 
ἀδικίας, δειλίας, Plat. lege. 3 p. 691¢.; 10 p. 901 6. 

[Syn. τέκνον, vids: τ. and vi. while concurring in point- 
ing to parentage, differ in that 7. gives prominence to the 
physical and outward aspects, vi. to the inward, ethical, legal. 
Cf. b. y. above; υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, fin.; παῖς, fin. and reff. (esp. 
that to Hohne).| 

τεκνο-τροφέω, -ῶ : 1 aor. erexvorpodnaa; (τεκνοτρόφος, 
and this from τέκνον and τρέφω) ; to bring up children: 
1 Tim. v.10. (φέρει ὕδωρ, ὅταν τεκνοτροφῇ, sc. the bee, 
Aristot. h. a. 9, 40 [27], 14 [p. 625», 20].) * 

τέκτων, -ονος, 6, (τεκεῖν, Tiktw; akin to τέχνη, τεύχω, 
hence prop. ‘ begetter’ [Curtius § 2857), fr. Hom. down, 
Sept. for wm ; @ worker in wood, a carpenter: Mt. xiii. 
55; Mk. vi. 3 [see WH. App. on the latter pass.].* 

τέλειος, -a, -ov, (τέλος), in classic Grk. sometimes also 
τος, τον, (cf. W. § 11, 1), fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times 
for Dow, DNA, etc.; prop. brought to its end, finished; 
wanting nothing necessary to completeness ; perfect: ἔργον, 
Jas.i.4; ἡ ἀγάπη, 1 In. iv. 18; ὁ νόμος, Jas. i. 25; [δώρημα, 
Jas. i. 17]; τελειοτέρα σκηνή, a more perfect (excellent) 
tabernacle, Heb. ix. 11; τὸ τέλειον, substantively, that 
which is perfect: consummate human integrity and vir- 
tue, Ro. xii. 2 [4]. take it here as an adj. belonging to 
θέλημα) ; the perfect state of all things, to be ushered in 
by the return of Christ from heaven, 1 Co. xiii. 10; of 
men, full-grown, adult; of full age, mature, (Aeschyl. 
Ag. 1504; Plat. lege. 11 p.929¢.): Heb. v.14; τέλ. ἀνήρ 
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4sq.; 8, 7,6; Philo de cherub. § 32; opp. 
to παιδίον νήπιον, Polyb. 5, 29,2; for other exx. fr. other 
auth. see Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 133 sq.), μέχρι 

ον εἰς ἄνδρα τέλειον, until we rise to the same level of 


618 


τελειόω. 


knowledge which we ascribe to a full-grown man, until 
we can be likened toa full-grown man, Eph. iv. 13 (opp. 
to νήπιοι, 14); τέλειοι ταῖς φρεσί (opp. to παιδία and 
νηπιάζοντες ταῖς φρεσί), 1 Co. xiv. 20 [here A. V. men]; 
absol. of τέλειοι, the perfect, i. 6. the more intelligent, 
ready to apprehend divine things, 1 Co. ii. 6[R.V. mre. 
full-grown] (opp. to νήπιοι ἐν Χριστῷ, iii. 1; in simple opp. 
to νήπιος, Philo de legg. alles. i. § 30; for 7.35, opp. to 
μανθάνων, 1 Chr. xxv. 8; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 28; 
Phil. iii. 15]); of mind and character, one who has 
reached the proper height of virtue and integrity: Mt. 
v. 48; xix. 21; Phil. iii. 15 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. u.s.]; Jas. 
i.4; in an absol. sense, of God: Mt. v.48; τέλειος 
ἀνήρ, Jas. 111. 2 (τέλ. δίκαιος, Sir. xliv. 17); as respects 
understanding and goodness, Col. iv. 12; τέλ. ἄνθρωπος 
ἐν Χριστῷ, Col. i. 28 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. u.s. Syn. see 
ὁλόκληρος, and Trench ἃ xxii.].* 

τελειότης, τητος, ἡ, (τέλειος, 4. V-), perfection ; a. 
i. 6. the state of the more intelligent : Heb. vi. 1 [here R.V. 
mrg. full growth). b. perfection: (τῆς ἀγάπης, Clem. 
Rom. 1 Cor. 50,1 [where see Harnack]); 8050]. moral 
and spiritual perfection, Col. iii. 14 [A.V. perfectness], on 
which pass. see σύνδεσμος, 1. (Prov. xi. 3 Alex.; Judg. 
ix. 16,19; Sap. vi. 16; xii.17; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 5; 
Plat. deff. p. 412 Ὁ. d.; [Aristot. phys. 3, 6 p. 207%, 21; 8, 
7 p. 261", 36]; Antonin. 5, 15.) [ΟΥ̓ reff. s. v. τέλειος, 
and B. Hartung, Der Begriff der τελειότης im N. T. 
(4to. Leipz. 1881).] * 

τελειόω (in prof. auth. also τελεόω, which Hat. uses 
everywhere [and which is “the prevailing form in Attic 
prose” (L. and S.)]; other writ. use both forms indif- 
ferently), τῶ: 1 aor. ἐτελείωσα ; pf.reredei@xa; Pass. (or 
Mid.), pres. τελειοῦμαι; pf. τετελείωμαι ; 1 aor. ἐτελειώθην; 
(τέλειος); fr. Hdt., Soph., Thue., and Plat. down; equiv. 
to τέλειον ποιῶ, to make perfect or complete ; 1. to 
carry through completely; to accomplish, finish, bring to 
an end: τὸν δρόμον, Acts xx. 243; τὸ ἔργον, Jn. iv. 34; v. 
36; xvii. 4, (Neh. vi. 16; τὸν οἶκον, 2 Chr. viii. 16); τὰς 
ἡμέρας, Lk. ii. 43; mid. [pres. ef. B. 38 (33) ] τελειοῦμαι, 
I finish, complete, what was given me to do, Lk. xiii. 32 
[some (so A. V.) take it here as pass., 7 am perfected 
(understanding it of his death; ef. Bilicott, Life of our 
Lord, Lect. vi. p. 242 n.1; Keim ii. 615 n.1)]. 2. to 
complete (perfect), i.e. add what is yet wanting in order 
to render a thing full: τὴν ἀγάπην, pass., 1 Jn. 11. 5; iv. 
12,17; ἡ δύναμίς pow ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελειοῦται, My power 
shows itself most efficacious in them that are weak, 2 Co. 
xii. 9 RG; ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη, by works 
faith was perfected, made such as it ought to be, Jas. ii. 
22; τετελείωταί τις ἐν TH ἀγάπῃ, one has been made perfect 
in love, his love lacks nothing, 1 Jn. iv. 18 (οἱ τελειω- 
θέντες ἐν ἀγάπῃ, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 3; [τελειῶσαι τὴν 
ἐκκλησίαν σου ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ σου, ‘Teaching’ ete. 10, 5]); 
ἵνα ὦσι τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν, that they may be perfected into 
one, i.e. perfectly united, Jn. xvii. 23. τινά, to bring 
one’s character to perfection: ἤδη τετελείωμαι, | am already 
made perfect, Phil. iii. 12 (Sap. iv. 13; ὦ ψυχὴ . - - ὅταν 
σελειωθῇς καὶ βραβείων καὶ στεφάνων ἀξιωθῇς, Philo de legge. 


τελείως 


alleg. 3, 28; ψυχὴ ... τελειωθεῖσα ἐν ἀρετῶν ἄθλοις καὶ 
ἐπὶ τὸν ὅρον ἐφικομένη τοῦ καλοῦ, id. de somn. 1, 21; i. q. 
to be found perfect, Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 10). 3. to 
bring to the end (goal) proposed: οὐδέν, Heb. vii. 19; 
τινά, [to perfect or consummate] i.e. to raise to the state 
befitting him: so of God exalting Jesus to the state of 
heavenly majesty, Heb. ii. 10; in pass., Heb. v. 9; vii. 
28; to raise to the state of heavenly blessedness those who 
put their faith in the expiatory death of Christ, pass., 
Heb. xi. 40; xii. 23, ([Act. Petr. et Paul. § 88, ed. Tdf. 
p- 39; Act. Barnab. ὃ 9, id. p. 68; cf. ‘Teaching’ etc. 
16, 2]; with paprupi added, of the death of the apost. 
Paul, Euseb. h. e. 2, 22, 2 [ef. Heinichen’s note on 7, 15, 
5]); to make one meet for future entrance on this state 
and give him a sure hope of it even here on earth, Heb. 
x. 1,14; τινὰ κατὰ συνείδησιν, Heb. ix. 9; ef. Bleek, Brief 
an ἃ. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 297 sqq.; C. R. Késtlin, Lehrbegriff 
des Evang. u. der Briefe Johannis (Berl. 1843) p. 421 
sqq-; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des Hebr.-Br., § 42, p. 340 sqq.; 
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 344 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. p. 72 
sqq- ]- 4. to accomplish, i.e. bring to a close or ful- 
filment by event: τὴν γραφήν, the prophecies of Scripture, 
pass., Jn. xix. 28 [cf. W. 459 (428); Β. § 151, 20].* 

τελείως, (τέλειος), adv., perfectly, completely: 1 Pet. i. 
13. [Plat., Isocr., Aristot., ete.; cf. W. 463 (431).]* 

τελείωσις, -ews, 7, (τελειόω), α completing, perfecting ; 
a. fulfilment, accomplishment; the event which verifies 
a promise (see τελειόω, 4): Lk. i. 45 [Judith x. 9; Philo 
de vit. Moys. iii. § 39]. b. consummation, perfection, 
(see τελειόω, 3): Heb. vii. 11. (In various senses in 
Aristot., Theophr., Diod.) [Cf. reff. 5. v. τελειόω, 3.] * 

τελειωτής, -00, ὁ, (τελειόω), (Vulg. consummator), a per- 
fecter: τῆς πίστεως, one who has in his own person raised 
faith to its perfection and so set before us the highest 
example of faith, Heb. xii. 2. The word occurs no- 
where else.* 

τελεσφορέω, -ῶ; (reAeopdpos, fr. τέλος and φέρω) ; to 
bring to (perfection or) maturity (sc. καρπούς) : Lk. viii. 
14. (Used alike of fruits, and of pregnant women and 
animals bringing their young to maturity; 4 Mace. xiii. 
19; Theophr., Geop., Philo, Diod., Joseph., al.; [Ps. lxiv. 
(Ixv.) 10 Symm.].) * 

τελευτάω, -@; 1 aor. ἐτελεύτησα; pf. ptep. τετελευτηκώς 
(Jn. xi. 591, T Tr WH) ; (τελευτή); fr. Hom. down; 1. 
trans. to finish; to bring to an end or close: τὸν βίον, to 
finish life, to die, often fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.down. 2. 
intrans. [cf. B. 8180, 4] fo have an end or close, come to an 
end; hence to die, very often so fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down (Sept. for ny), and always in the N.T.: Mt. ii. 
19; ix. 18; xxii. 25; Mk. ix. 44, 46 [(these two vss. T 
WH om. Tr br.)], 48; Lk. vii. 2; Jn. xi. 39 L T Tr WH; 
Acts ii. 29; vii. 15; Heb. xi. 22; θανάτῳ τελευτάτω (in 
imitation of the Hebr. ny ny, Ex. xxi. 12, 15-17, 
etc.), [A. V. let him die the death i. e.] let him surely die 
[W. 339 (319); B. § 133, 22], Mt. xv. 4; Mk. vii. 10." 

τελευτή, -ῆς, ἡ, (τελέω), End [see τέλος, 1 a. init.]; the 
end of life, decease, death: Mt. ii. 15 (and often in Grk. 
writ. fr. Pind. and Thue. down; Sept. for nin; with 


619 


τέλος 


βιότοιο added, Hom. Il. 7, 104; τοῦ βίου, Hdt. 1, 80, and 
often in Attic writ.).* 

τελέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐτέλεσα [cf. W. § 13, 3 c.]; pf. τετέλεκα 
(2 Tim. iv. 7); Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. τελεῖται (2 Co. 
xii. 9 L TTr WH); pf. τετέλεσμαι ; 1 aor. ἐτελέσθην; 
1 fut. τελεσθήσομαι; (τέλος) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. to 
bring to a close, to finish, to end : ἔτη, pass., passed, finished, 
Rev. xx. 3, 5, 7, ({so fr. Hom. and Hes. down; Aristot. 
h. a. 7, 1 init. p. 580°, 14 ἐν τοῖς ἔτεσι τοῖς δὶς ἑπτὰ τετε- 
Neopevots]; τριῶν τελουμένων ἡμερῶν, Leian. Alex. 38); 
τὸν δρόμον (Hom. Il. 23, 373, 768; Soph. Electr. 726), 
2 Tim. iv. 7; τοὺς λόγους, Mt. vii. 28 LT Tr WH; xix. 
1; xxvi.1; τὰς παραβολάς, Mt. xiii. 53; [ἄχρι τελεσθῶσιν 
ai πληγαί, Rey. xv. 8]; a rare use is τελεῖν τὰς πόλεις, 1. 6. 
your flight or journey through the cities [R. V. ye shall 
not have gone through the cities, ete.], Mt. x. 23 (similar 
are ἀνύειν τοὺς τόπους, Polyb. 5, 8, 1; τὰ ἕλη, 3, 79,5; con- 
summare Italiam, Flor. 1, (13) 18, 1; explere urbes, Ti- 
bull. 1, 4, 69; conficere aequor immensum, Verg. Georg. 
2, 541; also xii. signorum orbem, Cic. nat. deor. 2, 20, 
52); with the ptep. of a verb (like ἄρχομαι, παύομαι, cf. 
W. §45,4a.; B. § 144, 14), Mt. xi. 1. 2. to per- 
form, execute, complete, fulfil, (so that the thing done 
corresponds to what has been said, the order, command, 
etc.). i. 6. a. with special reference to the sub- 
ject-matter, fo carry out the contents of a command : 
τὸν νόμον, Ro. ii. 27 [ef. W. 134 (127)]; Jas. 11. 8; τὴν 
ἐπιθυμίαν (i. 6. τὸ ἐπιθυμούμενον), Gal. v. 16. B. with 
reference also to the form, to do just as commanded, and 
generally involving a notion of time, to perform the last 
act which completes a process, to accomplish, fulfil: 
ἅπαντα (πάντα) τὰ κατὰ νόμον, Lk. ii. 39; τὴν μαρτυρίαν, 
the duty of testifying, Rev. xi. 7; τὸ μυστήριον, pass. 
Rey. x. 7 [ef. W. 277 (260) ]; τὸ βάπτισμα, pass. Lk. xii. 
50; πάντα, pass. Jn. xix. 28 [the distinction betw. τελέω 
and τελειόω may be seen in this vs.]; τοὺς λόγους (τὰ 
ῥήματα) τοῦ θεοῦ, pass. Rev. xvii. 17; ἅπαντα (πάντα) τὰ 
γεγραμμένα, Acts xiii. 29; pass., Lk. xviii. 31 [see γράφω, 
2 6.7; with ἐν ἐμοί (in me) added, in my experience, Lk. 
xxii. 37; ἐν πληγαῖς, in the infliction of calamities, Rev. 
xv. 1; τετέλεσται, [A. V. it is finished] everything has 
been accomplished which by the appointment of the 
Father as revealed in the Scriptures I must do and bear, 
Jn. xix. 30. i.q. τελειόω, 2, q. v. (made perfect): 2 Co. 
xii. 9 L T Tr WH. 3. to pay: τὰ δίδραχμα, Mt. 
xvii. 24; φόρους, Ro. xiii. 6, (τὸν φόρον, Plat. Ale. 1 p. 
123 a.; τὰ τέλη, often in Attic writ.). [Come.: dzo-, 
δια-, €x-, ἐπι-. συν- τελέω.} * 

τέλος, -ους, τό, [cf. Curtius § 238], fr. Hom. down, Sept. 
mostly for ΤΡ; 1. end, i.e. a. termination, the 
limit at which a thing ceases to be, (in the Grk. writ. 
always of the end of some act or state, but not of the 
end of a period of time, which they call τελευτή ; in the 
Scriptures also of a temporal end; an end in space is 
everywhere called πέρας) : τῆς βασιλείας, Lk. i. 33; ζωῆς, 
Heb. vii. 3; rod καταργουμένου, 2 Co. iii. 13; τὰ τέλη τῶν 
αἰώνων, 1 Co. x. 11 (τέλος τῶν ἡμερῶν, Neh. xiii. 6; τῶν 
ἑπτὰ ἐτῶν; 2 K. viii. 3; ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος καὶ μεσότης χρόνων, 


τέλος θ 


Sap. vii. 18); i. 4. he who puts an end to: τέλος νόμου 
Χριστός, Christ has brought the law to an end (πᾶσίν 
ἐστιν ἀνθρώποις τέλος τοῦ βίου θάνατος, Dem. 1306, 25), 
Ro. x. 4; οἵ. Fritzsche ad loc., vol. ii. p. 877 586. πάντων 
τὸ τέλος, the end of all things (i. 6. of the present order 
of things), 1 Pet. iv. 7; also in the phrases ἕως τέλους, 
1 Co. i. 8; 2 Οο. 1.18; μέχρι τέλους, Heb. iii. 6 [Tr mrg. 
WH br. the cl.], 14; ἄχρι τέλους, Heb. vi. 14; Rev. ii. 
26. What ‘end’ is intended the reader must deter- 
mire by the context; thus, τὸ τέλος denotes the end of 
the Messianic pangs (dolores Messiae; see ὠδίν) in Mt. 
xxiv. 6, 14, (opp. to ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων) ; Mk. xiii. 7 (ef. 9); 
Lk. xxi. 9; τὸ τέλος in 1 Co. xv. 24 denotes either the 
end of the eschatological events, or the end of the res- 
urrection i.e. the last or third act of the resurrection (to 
include those who had not belonged to the number of of 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ), 1 Co. xv. 24 cf. 23; 
see De Wette ad loc.; Wetzel in the Theol. Stud. τι. 
Krit. for 1836, p. 978; Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wis- 
sensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 388 sqq.; [yet cf. Heinrict in 
Meyer (6te Aufl.) ad loc.J. εἰς τέλος, ---- ἰο the very end 
appointed for these evils, Mt. x. 22; xxiv.13; Mk. xiii. 
13; also at the end, at last, finally, Lk. xviii. 5 (Vulg. in 
novissimo) [i. e. lest at last by her coming she wear me 
out; but al. take it i. q. Hebr. nyo (cf. Job xiv. 20 ete. 
see Trommius) and connect it with the ptep., lest by her 
coming to the last i.e. continually; see ὑπωπιάζω, sub fin.) ; 
Jn. xiii. 1 [al. fo the utlermost, completely (cf. our to the 
very last); see Westcott, and Weiss (in Meyer 6te Aufl.) 
ad loc.; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 29], cf. ἀγαπάω, sub fin., 
(Xen. oec. 17, 10; Hes. opp. 292; Hdt. 3, 40; 9, 37; 
Soph. Phil. 409; Eur. Ion 1615; Ael. v.h. 10,16); to 
the (procurement of their) end, i.e. to destruction [A. V. 
to the uttermost (cf. reff. ἃ. s.)], 1 Th. ii. 16 (for 792, 
2 Chr. xii. 12); τέλος ἔχειν, to have an end, be finished, 
(often in Grk. writ.), Lk. xxii. 37 [al. give τέλος here 
the sense of fulfilment (cf. τελέω, 2) ]; 1. q. to perish, Mk. 
iii. 26. τὸ δὲ τέλος, adverbially, finally (denique vero): 
1 Pet. iii. 8 (Plat. legg. 6 p. 768 b.; καὶ τό ye τέλος, ibid. 
5 p. 740 e.; but generally in prof. auth. τέλος in this 
sense wants the article; οἵ. Passow ii. p. 1857"; [L. and 
S. s.v. I. 4 a.]). b. the end i.e. the last in any suc- 
cession or series: (ἡ) ἀρχὴ καὶ (τὸ) τέλος, of God, who by 
his perpetuity survives all things, i. e. eternal, Rev. i. 8 
Rec.; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. ce. that by which a thing is 
finished, its close, issue: Mt. xxvi. 58; final lot, fate, as 
if a recompense: with a gen. of the thing, Ro. vi. 21 
sq-; Heb. vi. 8; 1 Pet. i.9; with a gen. of the person 
whom the destiny befalls, 2 Co. xi. 15; Phil. iii. 19; 1 
Pet. iv. 17; τοῦ κυρίου (gen. of author), the closing ex- 
perience which befell Job by God’s command, Jas. v. 11 
(referring to Job xlii. [esp. 12]). d. the end to 
which all things relate, the aim, purpose: 1 Tim. i. 5 
(often so in philos. fr. Plat. de rep. 6 p. 494 ἃ. down; cf. 
Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 378). 2. toll, custom, [i. e. 
an indirect tax on goods; see φόρος and κῆνσος]: Mt. 
xvii. 25; Ro. xiii. 7, (Xen., Plat., Polyb., Aeschin., Dem., 
al.: 1 Mace. x. 31; xi. 35).* 


0 τεοσαρακοντατέσσαρες 


τελώνης, -ου, 6, (fr. τέλος [(4. ν. 2)] tax, and ὠνέομαι to 
buy; cf. δημοσιώνης, ὀψώνης, δεκατώνης), fr. Arstph., 
Aeschin., Aristot., Polyb. down; 1. α renter or 


| farmer of taxes (Lat. publicanus); among the Romans 


usually a man of equestrian rank. 2. a tax-gatherer, 
collector of taxes or tolls, (Vulg. publicanus incorrectly ; 
{so A. V. publican]), one employed by a publican or far- 
mer-general in collecting the taxes. The tax-collectors 
were, as ἃ class, detested not only by the Jews but by other 
nations also, both on account of their employment and of 
the harshness, greed, and deception, with which they 
prosecuted it; (hence they are classed by Artem. oneir. 
1,23; 4,57, with καπήλοις καὶ τοῖς pera ἀναιδείας ζῶσι καὶ 
λῃσταῖς καὶ ζυγοκρούσταις καὶ παραλογισταῖς ἀνθρώποις ; 
Leian. necyom. ὁ. 11 puts together μοιχοί, πορνοβοσκοὶ 
kal τελῶναι καὶ κόλακες καὶ συκοφάνται [ Theophr. charact. 
6 (περὶ ἀπονοίας) πανδοχεῦσαι, καὶ πορνοβοσκῆσαι, καὶ 
τελωνῆσαι}) : Mt. v. 46,47 Rec.; χ. ὃ; Lk. iii.12; v. 27, 
29; vii. 29; xviii. 10, 11,13; the plur. is joined with 
ἁμαρτωλοί, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; [xi. 19]; Mk. ii. 15 sq.; Lk. 
v. 30; vii. 345 xv. 1; with πόρναι, Mt. xxi. 31 sq.; ὁ ἐθνι- 
Kos κι ὁ τελώνης, Mt. xviii. 17. Cf. Win. RWB. 8. v. Zoll, 
Zollner; [BB. DD. s.v. Publican; Wetstein on Mt. v. 
46; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 515 sqq.].* 

τελώνιον, -ou, TO, (τελώνης, Cf. δεκατώνιον) ; [1. cus- 
toms, toll: Strabo 16, 1, 27. 2.1 toll-house, place of 
toll, tax-office: the place in which the tax-collector sat 
to collect the taxes [Wiclif, tolbothe]: Mt. ix.9; Mk. ii. 
14; Lk. v. 27." 

τέρας, fen. reparos, pl. τέρατα (cf. κέρας, init.), τό, (ap- 
parently akin to the verb rnpéw; accordingly something 
so strange as to cause it to be * watched’ or ‘observed’ ; 
[others connect it with ἀστήρ, ἀστραπή. etc., hence ‘asign 
in the heavens’; Vanicek p. 1146; Curtius § 205]; see 
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 270), fr. Hlom. down, Sept. 
for NaN, a prodigy, portent; miracle [A.V. wonder] per- 
formed by any one; in the N. T. it is found only in the 
plur. and joined with σημεῖα ; for the passages see σημεῖον, 
Ρ. 514", 

Τέρτιος, -ov, 6, Tertius, an amanuensis of the apostle 
Paul: Ro. xvi. 22. [B. D.s. v.]* 

Τέρτυλλος, -ov, 6, Tertullus, a Roman orator: Acts 
xxiv. 1 54. [See pyrwp.] * 

τεσσαράκοντα RG, but several times [i. 6. betw. 8 and 
14] in Lehm. and everywhere in T WH (and Tr, exe. 
Rey. xxi. 17) τεσσεράκοντα (a form originally Ionic [yet 
cf. B. as below]; see Kiihner § 187, 5; B. 28 (25) sq. 5 
ef. W.43; [Tdf. Proleg. p.80; WH. App. p. 1507), of, 
αἱ, rd, indecl. numeral, forty: Mt. iv. 2; Mz. i. 13; Lk. 
iv. 2; Jn. ii. 20; etc. 

[τεσσαρακοντα-δύο, forty-two: Rev. xi. 2 Rec.b*; xiii. 5 
Rec. δα. 

τεσσαρακονταετής (Τ Tr WH τεσσ ερ-, see τεσσαράκον- 
ta; LT accent -έτης, see ἑκατονταέτης); -ἐς, (τεσσαράκον- 
τα, and ἔτος), of forty years, forty years old: Acts vii. 
23; xiii. 18. (Hes. opp. 441.) * 

[τεσσαρακοντα-τέσσαρες, -ων, forty-four: Rev. xxi. 17 
Rec. bez elz,*] 


τέσσαρες 


τέσσαρες, -ων, οἱ, αἱ, τέσσαρα, τά, gen. τεσσάρων, dat. 
τέσσαρσιν, ({Lchm. reads τέσσερες 7 times to 33, Tdf. 6 
to 35, Tr 6 to 33, WH 6 to 34; Lchm. sometimes has 
τέσσερα, Τ Tr WH always; L.Tr sometimes have τέσ- 
σερας (see WH. App. p. 150)]; but no editor adopts € in 
the gen. or dat. ; see τεσσαράκοντα and reff.), four: Mt. 
xxiv. 31; Mk. ii. 3; Lk. ii. 37; Jn. xi. 17; Acts x. 11; 
Rey. iv. 4, ete. 

τεσσαρες-και-δέκατος, -7, -ov, the fourteenth: Acts xxvii. 
27, 33.* 

[τεσσερ- see τεσσαρ- (cf. Meisterhans § 21, 4)] 

τεταρταῖος, -a, -ov, (τέταρτος), an ordinal numeral, used 
in answer to the question on what day ? one who does or 
suffers a thing till the fourth day or on the fourth day: 
τεταρταῖός ἐστιν, i. 6. he has been four days in the tomb, 
or it is the fourth day since he was buried, [A. V. he 
hath been dead four days], Jn. xi. 39 (7δηὴ yap ἦσαν πεμ- 
πταῖοι, already five days dead, Xen. an. 6, 4 (2), 9).* 

τέταρτος, -η; -ov, (fr. τέτταρες), the fourth: Mt. xiv. 25; 
Mk. vi. 48; Acts x. 30; Rev. iv. 7, etc. [From Hom. 
down. | 

τετρα-, in composition i. 4. réropa, Aeolic [Doric 
rather] for τέσσαρα. 

[τετρααρχέω, see τετραρχέω.] 

[τετραάρχης, see τετράρχης. 

τετράγωνος, -ον; (fr. τέτρα, 4. V-, and γῶνος [i. 6. γωνία), 
quadrangular, square; [A. V. four-square] (Vulg. in 
quadro positus): Rey. xxi.16. (Sept.; Hdt., Plat., Ar- 
istot., Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

τετράδιον, -ov, τό, (τετράς, the number four), a quater- 
nion (τὸ ἐκ τεσσάρων συνεστός, Suid.) : τῶν στρατιωτῶν, 
a guard consisting of four soldiers (for among the Ro- 
mans this was the usual number of the guard to which 
the custody of captives and prisons was intrusted ; two 
soldiers were confined with the prisoner and two kept 
guard outside), Acts xii. 4, where the four quaternions 
mentioned were on guard one at a time during each of 
the four watches. (Philo in Flace. § 13 1. 6. ed. Mang. 
vol. ii. p. 533, 25.)* 

τετρακισ-χίλιοι, -ar, -a, (τετράκις and χίλιοι), four thou- 
sand: Mt. xv. 38; xvi. 10; Mk. viii. 9,20; Acts xxi. 38. 
[(Hdt., Arstph., Thuc., al.)]* 

τετρακόσιοι, -αι -a, (fr. τετράκις, and the term. -όσιος 
indicating one hundred; [ef. G. Meyer, Gr. Gram. § 16 
1.7), four hundred: Acts v. 36; vii. 6; xiii. 20; Gal. iii. 
17. [(Hadt., Thue., Xen., al.)]* 

τετράμηνος, -ov, (fr. τέτρα, q-v-, and μήν ; ef. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 549), of four months, lasting four months: τε- 
τράμηνός ἐστιν sc. χρόνος, Jn. iv. 35, where Rec. τετρά- 
μηνόν ἐστιν, as in Jude. xix. 2 Alex.; xx. 47. (Thuc., 
Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.) * 

τετραπλόος, (-ods), -όη (-7), -dov (-obdv), (fr. τέτρα, and 
πλόος, to which corresponds the Lat. -plus in duplus, 
triplus, fr. ΠΛΈΩ [but ef. Vaniéek p. 501]), quadruple, 
Sourfold: Lk. xix.8. (Sept.; Xen., Joseph., Plut., al.) * 

τετρά-πους, -ouv, gen. -odos, (fr. rérpa, q. V., and πούς a 
foot), fr. Hdt. and Thue. down, four-footed : neut. plur. 
se. beasts, Acts x. 12; xi. 6; Ro.i. 23. (Sept. for 7973.) * 


621 


τηλικοῦτος 


τετραρχέω [T WH τετρααρχ. (see WH. App. p. 145)], 
τῶ; (τετράρχης, 4: V.), to be governor of a tetrarchy, be 
tetrarch: with a gen. of the region, Lk. iii.1. [(Joseph. 
b. j- 8, 10, 7.)]* 

τετράρχης [1 WH rerpadpyns; see the preceding word, 
and ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117], -ov, ὁ, (fr. rérpa, q. v-, and 
apxw), a tetrarch; 1. 6. 1. a governor of the fourth 
part of any region. Thus Strabo, 12 p. 567, states that 
Galatia was formerly divided into three parts, each one 
of which was distributed into four smaller subdivisions 
each of which was governed by ‘a tetrarch’; again, in 
lib. 9 p. 430, he relates that Thessaly, before the time 
of Philip of Macedon, had been divided into four ‘ tet- 
rarchies’ each of which had its own ‘tetrarch’. 2. 
the word lost its strict etymological force, and came to 
denote the governor of a third part or half of a country, 
or even the ruler of an entire country or district provided 
it were of comparatively narrow limits; a petty prince 
[ef. e. g. Plut. Anton. 56, 8, 1. p. 943 4.1. Thus Antony 
made Herod (afterwards king) and Phasael, sons of 
Antipater, fetrarchs of Palestine, Joseph. antt. 14, 13, 1. 
After the death of Herod the Great, his sons, Archelaus 
styled an ethnarch but Antipas and Philip with the title 
of ‘tetrarchs’, divided and governed the kingdom left 
by their father; Joseph. antt.17, 11, 4. Cf. Fischer, 
De vitiis etc. p. 428; Win. RWB. s. v. Tetrarch, and 
esp. Keim in Schenkel v. p. 487 sqq. The tetrarch 
Herod Antipas is mentioned in Mt. xiv.1; Lk. iii. 19 ; 
ix. 7; Acts xiii. 1.* 

τεύχω, See τυγχάνω. 

τεφρόω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. τεφρώσας ; (τέφρα ashes) ; to 
reduce to ashes: 2 Pet. ii. 6. (Aristot. [?], Theophr., 
Dio Cass., Philo, Antonin., al.) * 

τέχνη, -ns, ἡ, (fr. τεκεῖν, see τέκτων), fr. Hom. down, 
art: univ. Rey. xviii. 22 [here A. V. craft]; of the plas- 
tie art, Acts xvii. 29; of a (rade (as often in Grk. writ.), 
Acts xviii. 3.* 

τεχνίτης, -ov, 6, (τέχνη), fr. Soph. [(?), Plato], Xen. 
down, Sept. several times for wn, an artificer, crafts- 
man: Acts xix. 24, 38; Rev. xviii. 22; of God the framer 
of the higher and eternal course of things, Heb. xi. 10 
(of God the architect of the world, Sap. xiii. 1, where 
ef. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. p. 234 [ef. also Trench, Syn. 
§ ev.; Piper, Monumentale Theol. § 26]).* 

τήκω: fr. Hom. down; to make liquid; pass. to become 
liquid, to melt; to perish or be destroyed by melting: 2 Pet. 
iii. 12, where for the pres. 3 pers. sing. τήκεται Lehm. 
gives the fut. τακήσεται [see WH on the pass. and in 
their App. p. 171], ef. Is. xxxiv. 4 τακήσονται πᾶσαι ai 
δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν. [Cf. Veitch s. v.] * 

τηλαυγῶς, adv., (fr. the adj. τηλαυγής, far-shining, fr. 
τῆλε afar, and αὐγή radiance), at a distance and clear- 
ly: Mk. viii. 25 [where TWH mrg. δηλαυγῶς, 4: v-]- 
(adj., Job xxxvii. 20; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 9; and esp. in 
the Grk. poets fr. Pind. down; τηλαυγέστερον ὁρᾶν, Diod. 
1, 50.)* 

τηλικ-οῦτος, -αὕτη, -οῦτο, (fr. τηλίκος and οὗτος [but 
then (it is urged) it should have been τηλιχοῦτος ; hence 


TNPEw 


better connected with αὐτός : as. al. Cf. Bitm. Ausf. 
Spr. 8. 79 A. 4; Kiihner §173, 6: Vanicek p. 268; L. and 
S. s.v. οὗτος, init.]),in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl.down; 1. 
of such an age; used of any age, of so great an age, so 
olil; also so young. 2. of so great a size, in bulk: 
πλοῖα, Jas. iii. 4. 3. intensively, such and so great 
(Lat. tantus talisque): 2 Co. i. 10; Heb. ii. 3; Rev. xvi. 
18.° 

τηρέω, -ῶ; impf. ἐτήρουν; fut. τηρήσω; 1 aor. ἐτήρησα; 
pf. τετήρηκα, 3 pers. plur. τετηρήκασιν (Jn. xvii. 6 RG) 
and τετήρηκαν (ibid. LT Tr WH, [see γίνομαι, init.]) ; 
Pass., pres. τηροῦμαι; impf. ἐτηρούμην ; pf. τετήρημαι; 
1 aor. ἐτηρήθην ; (τηρός, found only once, Aeschyl. suppl. 
248, where it is doubtful whether it means ‘ guarding’ or 
‘watching ’), fr. Pind., Soph., Thuc. down; Sept. several 
times for Dv, 1¥i, etc.; to attend to carefully, take 
care of; i.e. a. prop. to guard: twa, a prisoner, 
Mt. xxvii. 36, 54; Acts xvi. 23; pass., Acts xii. 5; 
[xxiv. 23]; xxv. 4, 21 ["]; ri, xii. 6; of τηροῦντες, [(R.V.) 
the watchers] the guards, Mt. xxviii. 4 (Cant. iii.3). Ὁ. 
metaph. to keep: τινά, one in that state in which he is, 
τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον, his own virgin daughter, sc. as a 
Virgin i. 6. unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 37; ἑαυτόν, himself such 
as he is, i. 6. begotten of God, 1 Jn. v. 18 [but here T Tr 
WH αὐτόν]; with a pred. accus. added: dyvov, 1 Tim. 
v. 22; ἄσπιλον ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου, Jas. i. 27; ἀβαρῆ τινι, 
2 Co. xi. 9, (ἁπλοῦν, Antonin. 6, 30; τινὰ ἄμεμπτον τῷ 
θεῷ, Sap. x. 5); τί with a pred. accus. 1 Tim. vi. 14 
{but see in ec. below]; pass. τηροῦμαι, with an adv., 
ἀμέμπτως, 1 Th. v. 23; with a dat. of the pers., Χριστῷ, 
devoted to Christ, [W. 421 (392)], Jude 1; τηρεῖν τινα 
ἔν τινι, to keep ini. e. cause one to persevere or stand 
firm in a thing: ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι θεοῦ (see p. 447° bot.), Jn. 
xvii. 11 sq.; ἐν ἀγάπῃ θεοῦ, Jude 21; τινὰ ἔκ twos, by 
guarding to cause one to escape in safety out of ete.: ἐκ 
Tov πονηροῦ, out of the power and assaults of Satan, Jn. 
xvii. 15 [ef. B. 327 (281); W. 410 (383)]; ἐκ τῆς Spas 
Tov πειρασμοῦ, Rev. iii. 10. ἰἰο keep: i. 6. not to leave, 
τὴν ἀρχήν, Jude 6; not to throw away, τὰ ἱμάτια, Rev. 
xvi. 15. to hold firmly: τὴν ἑνότητα τοῦ πνεύματος, Eph. 
iv. 3; anything as a mental deposit, τὴν πίστιν, 2 Tim. 
iv. 7; Rev. xiv. 12 [ef. W. 536 (499); B. 78 (68)]. to 
show one’s self to be actually holding a thing fast, 
i.e. c. to observe: sc. πῶς κτὰ. Rev. iii. 3; τί, Mt. 
xxiii. 3; Acts xxi. 25 [Ree.]; τὴν παράδοσιν, Mk. vii. 9 
[WH (rejected) mrg. στήσητε] (τὰ ἐκ παραδόσεως τῶν 
πατέρων, Joseph. antt. 13, 10, 6); τὸν νόμον, Acts xv. 5 
and Kee. in 24; Jas. ii. 10; τὸ σάββατον, the command 
respecting sabbath-keeping, Jn. ix. 16; ras ἐντολάς (of 
either God or Christ), Mt. xix.17; Jn. xiv. 15, 21; xv. 
10; 1Jn.ii.3sq.; iii. 22,24; v.2 (where LT Tr WH 
ποιῶμεν); ν. ὃ: Rey. xii. 17; xiv. 12 [see above, b. fin.]; 
τὴν ἐντολήν, 1 Tim. vi. 14 [see in b. above; πάντα ὅσα 
ἐνετειλάμην, Mt. xxviii. 20]; τὸν λόγον, either of Christ 
or of God, Jn. viii. 51 sq. 55; xiv. 23; xv. 20; xvii. 6; 
1 Jn. ii. 5; Rev. iii. 8; τοὺς λόγους, of Christ, Jn. xiv. 
24; τὸν λόγον τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου (i. 6. Ἰησοῦν), Rev. iii. 10; 
τὰ ἔργα μου, the works that I command, Rev. ii. 26; τοὺς 


622 


τίθημι 


λόγους τῆς προφητείας, Rev. xxii. 7; τοῦ βιβλίου τούτου, 
Rey. xxil. 9; τὰ ἐν τῇ προφητείᾳ γεγραμμένα, Rev. i. 3; 
cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 194 sq. d. 
lo reserve: τινὰ εἴς τι, to undergo something, 2 Pet. ii. 4 
ef. W. 342 (321); εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν, Acts 
xxv. 21*]; Jude 6; τινὰ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως, 2 Pet. ii. 9; 
τοὺς οὐρανοὺς πυρὶ (to be burned with fire) εἰς ἡμέραν 
κρίσεως, 2 Pet. iii. 7; τὶ εἴς τινα, a thing for one’s adyan- 
tage, 1 Pet. i. 4; τὶ εἰς ἡμέραν τινά, to be used some day 
for some purpose, Jn. xii. 7; τὶ ἕως ἄρτι, Jn. 11. 10; τί 
with the dat. of the pers., for rewarding or punishing 
one, pass., 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Comp.: δια-, mapa-, 
συν-τηρέω. |* 

[SYN. τηρέω, φυλάσσω: τηρ. to watch or keep, ua. to 
guard; rnp. expresses watchful care and is suggestive of 
present possession, φυλ. indicates safe custody and often 
implies assault from without; rnp. may mark the result 
of which gua. is the means (e.g. Jn. xvii. 12 where the 
words occur together, cf. Wisd. x. 5). See Westcott on Jn. 
vill. 51; Schmidt ch. 208, esp. ὃ 4.] 

τήρησις, -ews, ἡ, (THPEw) ; a. a watching: of pris- 
oners (Thue. 7, 86); the place where prisoners are 
kept, a prison, [R. V. ward]: Acts iv. 3; v. 18. b. 
a keeping, i. 6. complying with, obeying: τῶν ἐντολῶν, 
1 Co. vii. 19; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 23; νόμων, Sap. vi. 19.* 

Τιβεριάς, -ados, ἡ, (fr. Τιβέριος), a city of Galilee, near 
the Lake of Gennesaret, which Herod Antipas, tetrarch 
of Galilee, greatly enlarged [but see BB.DD. 5. ν. and 
esp. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 234 note] and beau- 
tified, and named Tiberias in honor of Tiberius Caesar 
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 8). It is now called Tubariyeh, a 
poor and wretched town of about 3000 inhabitants, 
swarming with fleas for which the place is notorious 
throughout Syria: Jn. vi. 1, 23; xxi. 1. Cf. Robinson 
ii. 380-394; Win. RWB.s. v.; Riietschi in Herzog ed. 1 
xvi. 161; Weizsdcker in Schenkel v. 526 sq.; [Miihlau 
in Riehm p. 1661 sq.]; Biadeker pp. 361-909." 

Τιβέριος, -ov, ὁ, Tiberius, the Roman emperor (fr. 
[Aug. 19] A. p. 14 to [March 16] A.D. 37) in whose 
reign Christ was crucified: Lk. iii. 1.* 

τιθέω, i. q. τίθημι, 4. V- 

τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. τιθέασιν (Mt. v.15; [W.§ 14, 1a.; 
B. 44 (38)]); impf. (fr. τιθέω) 3 pers. sing. ἐτίθει (2 Co. 
iii. 13), 3 pers. plur. ἐτίθουν (Mk. vi. 56 [RG L]; Acts iii. 
2; iv. 35) [and (T Tr WH in Mk. ]. c.) ἐτίθεσαν, cf. B. 45 
(39); WH. App. p. 167]; fut. θήσω; 1 aor. ἔθηκα; 2 aor. 
(ἔθην) subj. θῶ, [impv. 2 pers. plur. θέτε, Lk. xxi. 14 LT Tr 
WH (for RG 2 aor. mid. impv. 6é06e) |, inf. θεῖναι, ptep. 
cis; pf. τέθεικα; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. τίθεται (Mk. 
xv. 47 RG); pf. 3 pers. sing. τέθειται (Mk. xv. 47 LT 
Tr WH); 1 aor. ἐτέθην ; 2 aor. mid. ἐθέμην (2 pers. sing. 
ἔθου. Acts v. 4); (see ἐπιτίθημι); fr. Hom. down; Sept. 
mostly for pw and Dw, 102, mv and mwa, M3, 
ete. ; 1. to set, put, place, i.e. causative of κεῖσθαι; 
hence a. to place or lay: τί, as θεμέλιον, [Lk. vi. 
48]; xiv. 29; 1 Co. iii. 10 sq. (θεμείλια, Hom. II. 12, 29); 
λίθον, Ro. ix. 33; 1 Pet. ii. 6; ri, opp. to αἴρειν, Lk. xix. 
21 sq. (cf. Xen. oec. 8, 2) ; τινὶ πρόσκομμα [or (ace. to WH 
mrg.) σκάνδαλον], Ro. xiv. 13; τὶ εἴς τι, Lk. xi. 838 [W. 


τίθημι 


238 (223)]; τινὰ ποῦ, ὅπον, ἐκεῖ, [ὡς], of the dead laid 
to rest somewhere, Mk. xv. 47; xvi. 6; [Lk. xxiii. 55]; 
Jn. xi. 34; xix. 42; xx. 2,13, 15; ἐν with dat. of the 
place, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. vi. 29; [xv. 46 LTr WH]; Lk. 
xxiii. 53; Jn. xix.41; Acts vii. 16; ix. 37; εἰς μνημεῖον, 
Acts xiii. 29; Rev. xi. 9; (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, 
very often of the laying away or depositing anywhere 
of the bones or ashes of the dead ; like Lat. ponere i. q. 
sepelire, cf. Klotz, Handworterb. ἃ. Lat. Spr. ii. 822°; 
[Harpers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. pono, I. B. 107). τὶ or τινὰ 
ἐπί τινος, [Lk. viii. 1051, Τ Tr WH]; Acts v.15; Jn. 
xix.19; [Rev.x.2GLTTr WH]; ἐπί τι, [Mk. iv. 21 
LT Tr WH;; viii. 25 Trtxt. WH]; 2Co. iii. 13; Rev. 
x. 2[Rec.]; ἐπί τινα, to put upon one, τὰς χεῖρας, Mk. 
x. 16; [τὴν δεξιάν, Rev.i.17G@ LT ΤΥ ΝΗ]; τὶ ὑπό τι, 
Mt. v.15; Μκ. iv. 21; Lk. xi. 33; ὑποκάτω τινός, Lk. 
viii. 16; twa ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας (see πούς), 1 Co. xv. 25 
[ef. W. 523 (487)]; τὶ mapa τοὺς πόδας τ. to lay at one’s 
feet, Acts iv. 35, 37 [here Tdf. πρὸς]; v.2; τινὰ ἐνώπιόν 
τ Lk. v. 18; metaph. ἐπί τινα τὸ πνεῦμα, i. e. to imbue 
one with, Mt. xii. 18. Mid. to have one put or placed: 
twa eis φυλακήν, to order one to be put in prison, Acts 
xii. 4; ἐν (τῇ) φυλακῇ, Mt. xiv. 3 [here LT Tr WH ἀπο- 
τίθ.1; Acts v. 25, (Gen. xli. 10; xlii. 17, 30; [B. 329 
(283) ; W. 414 (386)]); εἰς τήρησιν, Acts iv. 3; ἐν τηρή- 
oe, Acts v.18. to place for one’s self: as βουλήν, to lay 
a plan [A. V. advised], Acts xxvii. 12 (Judg. xix. 30; 
βουλὰς ἐν ψυχῇ pov, Ps. xii. (xiii.) 3); τὰ μέλη, to set, 
dispose, 1 Co. xii. 18; [καιροὺς ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ, set 
within his own authority, Acts i. 7 (so R. V. txt.; but 
al. refer it to 2 below)]; ri εἰς τὰ ὠτά μου, to receive 
ΓΑ. V. let sink] into the ears, i.e. to fix in the mind, Lk. 
ix. 44; εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, to propose to one’s self, to pur- 
pose, foll. by an inf. Lk. xxi. 14 [RG]; also ri ἐν τῇ 
καρδίᾳ. to lay a thing up in one’s heart to be remembered 
and pondered, Lk. i. 66; [xxi. 14 L T Tr WH], (1 5. 
xxi. 12; [W.§2,1c¢., and B. as above]); to propose to 
one’s self something [A. V. conceived this thing in thine 
heart], Acts v. 4; also ἐν τῷ πνεύματι, foll. by an inf. [A.V. 
to purpose in the spirit], Acts xix. 21; to place (or posit) 
Jor the execution of one’s purpose, θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον 
τῆς καταλλαγῆς, since he has placed (deposited) in our 
minds the doctrine concerning reconciliation (se. to be 
made known to others), 2 Co. v. 19. b. to put down, 
lay down; i. e. a. to bend downwards: τὰ γόνατα, 
to bend or bow the knees, to kneel, Mk. xv. 19; Lk. xxii. 
41; Acts vii. 60; ix. 40; xx. 36; xxi. 5, (Lat. genua 
pono, Ovid. fast. 2, 438; Curt. 8, 7, 13). β. like Lat. 
pono (cf. Klotz s.-v.; [Harpers’ Dict. 5. v. I. B. 97), to lay 
off or aside, to wear or carry no longer: τὰ ἱμάτια (Lat. 
vestes pono), Jn. xiii. 4 (Plut. Ale. 8) ; τὴν ψυχήν, to lay 
down, give up, one’s life, Jn. x. 17 sq.; with ὑπέρ τινος 
added, Jn. x. 11,15; xiii. 37sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16, 
(ἔθηκε [or τέθεικεν] τὴν σάρκα αὐτοῦ κύριος, Barn. ep. 6, 3 
irrelevant; see the passage]; unlike the Lat. phrases 
vitam ponere, Cic. ad fam. 9, 24, 4; Propert. eleg. 2, 10, 
43: [animam ponere], Sil. Ital. 10, 303; spiritum ponere, 
Val. Max. 7, 8, 8, since these phrases mean only to die; 


628 


τίλλω 


more like the expression prius animam quam odium (6 
ponere, Nep. Hann. 1, 3). y- to lay by, lay aside 
money: παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, 1 Co. xvi. 2. c. to set on (serve) 
something to eat or drink: οἶνον, Jn. ii. 10 (Xen. mem. 
3,14, 1; soalso Lat. pono; cf. Klotz ἃ. 5. p. 822"; [Har- 
pers’ Dict. 5. ν. I. B. 8]). d. to set forth, something 
to be explained by discourse: τὴν βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ ἐν 
παραβολῇ, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. T Tr txt. WH (on this pass. 
see παραβολή, 2). 2. to make (Lat. constituo), τινά 
with a pred. ace.: twa ὑποπόδιον, Mt. xxii. 44 [where 
LT Tr WH ὑποκάτω, put underneath}; Mk. xii. 36 [WH 
ὑποκάτω]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x. 13, 
(fr. Ps. cix. (ex.) 1); add, Ro. iv. 17 (fr. Gen. xvii. δ); 
Heb. i. 2; pass.,1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim.4.11; τί with a 
pred. ace.: 1 Co. ix. 18 (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, 
often in the poets, rarely in prose writ., as Ael. ν. h. 13, 
6; Leian. dial. marin. 14, 2; in the O. T. ef. Gen. xvii. 
5; Lev. xxvi. 31; Is. v. 20; Sap. x. 21; 2 Mace. v. 21; 
3 Mace. v. 43). Mid. to make (or set) for one’s self or 
for one’s use: twa with a pred. ace., Acts xx. 28; 1 Co. 
xii. 28, (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, even in prose, to 
make one one’s own, as twa φίλον to make one a friend, 
see Passow p. 1893"; [L.andS.s. v. Β. 1.1). τιθέναι τινὰ 
εἴς τι, to appoint one to (destine one to be) anything, pass., 
1 Pet. ii. 8; w. eis τε instead of the pred. ace. (Hebrais- 
tically [ef. W. 228 (214); B. § 131, 7]), Acts xiii. 47 
fr. Is. xlix. 6 (Jer. i. 5). Mid. to appoint for one’s use: 
τινὰ εἰς διακονίαν, to appoint one to one’s service, 1 Tim. 
i. 12[W. § 45, 4 fin.]; to appoint with one’s self or in 
one’s mind : τινὰ eis ὀργήν, to decree one to be subject 
to wrath, 1 Th. v. 9 ; [to this use many refer Acts i. 7, see 
ἐξουσία 1, and ev, 1. 5 ἃ. B.; ef. 1 a. above]. 
τινὰ ἵνα, Jn. xv. 16; τιθέναι τὸ μέρος τινὸς μετά τινος (see 
μέρος, 1), Mt. xxiv. 51; Lk. xii. 46. 3. to set, fiz, 
establish, (Lat. statuo) ; a. to set forth (Germ. απ 
stellen) : ὑπόδειγμα, 2 Pet. ii. 6. b. to establish, or- 
dain, (Germ. feslsetzen, anordnen): νόμον, to enact, Gal. 
iii. 19 Grsb. (very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down, 
both in the act. and the mid.; cf. Passow s. v. IIL 3 b.; 
[L. and S. 5. v. A. III. 5]). 


ἀπο-, δια-, ἀντι-δια-, €k-, ἐπι-» συν-επι-, KaTa-, συν-κατα- 


τιθέναι 


[Compe.: dva-, προσ-ανα-» 


μετα-, Tapa , TeEpt-, προ-. προσ-, συν-; ὗπο- τίθημι. * 

τίκτω ; fut. τέξομαι ; 2 aor. ἔτεκον ; 1 aor. pass. ἐτέχθην; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 2: to bring forth, bear, produce 
(fruit from the seed); prop., of women giving birth: 
absol., Lk. i. 57 [B. 267 (230)]; 11. 6; Jn. xvi. 21; Gal. 
iv. 27; Heb. xi. 11 Rec.; Rev. xii. 2, 4; vidv, Mt. i. 21, 
23, 25; Lk. i. 31; ii. 7; Rev. xii. 5, 13; pass., Mt. ii. 2; 
Lk. ii. 11; of the earth bringing forth its fruits: βοτάνην, 
Heb. vi. 7 (Eur. Cycl. 333; γαῖαν, ἢ τὰ πάντα τίκτεται; 
Aeschyl. Cho. 127; γῆς τῆς πάντα τικτούσης, Philo opif. 
m. § 45, who draws out at length the comparison of the 
earth to a mother). metaph. to bear, Sring forth: 
ἁμαρτίαν, in the simile where ἢ ἐπιθυμία is likened to a 
female, Jas. i. 15 (ἀρετήν, Plat. cony. p. 212 a.).* 

τίλλω ; impf. ἔτιλλον ; fr. Hom. down; to pluck, pluck 
off: στάχυας, Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii. 23 [on this ef. p. 524> 
top]; Lk. vi. 1.* 


7ιμαῖος 


Tipatos (NO fr. Chald. x20, Hebr. δα 29, to be un- 
clean), -ov, 6, Timaus, the name of a man: Mk. x. 46.* 

τιμάω, -@; fut. τιμήσω ; 1 aor.ériunoa; pf. pass. ptep. 
τετιμημένος ; 1 aor. mid. ἐτιμησάμην ; (τιμή) ; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. fo estimate, to fix the value; mid. to fix 
the value of something belonging to one’s self (Vulg. ap- 
pretio; ef. Hagen, Sprachl. Erorterungen zur Vulgata, 
Freib. 1863, p. 99): τινά, [R. V. to price], Mt. xxvii. 9 
(on which see ἀπό, I. 2); Sept. for Pry, Lev. xxvii. 8, 
12, 14. 2. tohonor [so uniformly A. V.], to have in 
honor, to revere, venerate; Sept. for 733 : God, Mt. xv. 8; 
Mk. vii. 6; Jn. v. 23; viii. 49; Christ, Jn. v. 23; parents, 
Mt. xv.4sq.; xix.19; Mk. vii.10; x.19; Lk. xviii. 20; 
Eph. vi. 2; other men, 1 Tim. v. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 17; with 
πολλαῖς τιμαῖς added, to honor with many honors, Acts 
xxviii. 10; of God, rewarding Christians with honor 
and glory in his kingdom, Jn. xii. 26. [Comp.: ém- 
τιμάω.} * 

τιμή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. τίω, to estimate, honor, pf. pass. τέτι- 
μαι), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Σ (a valuing, rating), 
Wad, 1), 137; 1. a valuing by which the price is 
fixed; hence the price itself: of the price paid or re- 
ceived for a person or thing bought or sold, with a gen. 
of the pers. Mt. xxvii. 9; with a gen. of the thing, Acts 
v. 2sq.; plur., Acts iv. 34; xix. 19; τιμὴ αἵματος, the 
price paid for killing, [ef. ‘blood-money’], Mt. xxvii. 6 ; 
ἠγοράσθητε τιμῆς, (not gratis, but) with a price, i. e. (con- 
textually, with emphasis) at a great price [B. § 132, 13; 
yet see W. 595 (553)], 1 Co. vi. 20 [here Vulg. magno 
pretio|; vii. 23; ὠνεῖσθαι τιμῆς ἀργυρίου, to buy for a 
price reckoned in silver, i.e. for silver, Acts vii. 16; thing 
prized [A.V. honor], Rev. xxi. 24 [Ree.], 26. 2. 
honor which belongs or is shown to one: the honor of 
one who outranks others, pre-eminence, δόξα x. τιμή, 
Heb. ii. 7,9; 2 Pet.i.17; in the doxologies: τῷ θεῷ (sc. 
ἔστω (cf. B.§ 129, 22 Rem.]) τιμή or ἡ τιμή, 1 Tim. i. 17; 
vi. 16; Rev. v.13; vii. 12; xix. 1 Rec.; the honor which 
one has by reason of the rank and state of the office which 
he holds, Heb. v. 4 (and often in Grk. writ.; ef. Bleek 
on Heb. 1.¢.) ; veneration: διδόναι, λαβεῖν, τιμήν, Rev. iv. 
9,11; v.12; deference, reverence, Ro. xii. 103; xiii. 7; 
1 Tim. v. 17; vi. 1; honor appearing in the rewards of 
the future life, Ro. ii. 7,10; 1 Pet.i. 7; praise of which 
one is judged worthy, 1 Pet. ii. 7 [here R.V. txt. precious- 
ness (cf. 1 above)]; mark of honor, πολλαῖς τιμαῖς τιμᾶν 
twa, Acts xxviii. 10; univ. in phrases: ἐν τιμῇ, honor- 
ably, 1 Th. iv. 4 (on this pass. see κτάομαι) ; οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ 
τινι, not in any honor, i. 6. worthy of no honor, Col. ii. 
23 [al. value; see mAnopovn]; εἰς τιμήν, Ro. ix. 21; 2'Tim. 
ii. 20 sq., (on these pass. see σκεῦος, 1); περιτιθέναι τινὶ 
τιμήν, 1 Co. xii. 23 (see περιτίθημι, b.) 3 τιμὴν ἀπονέμειν 
τινί, to show honor to one, 1 Pet. iii. 7; διδόναι τιμήν, 
1 Co. xii. 24; ἔχειν τιμήν, to have honor, be honored, 
Jn. iv. 44; Heb. iii. 3.* 

τίμιος, -a, -ov, (τιμή), fr. Hom. down; a. prop. held 
as of great price, i.e. precious: λίθος, Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. 
12, 16; xxi. 19; plur. 1 Co. iii. 12 [R. V. costly stones] ; 
compar. τεμιώτερος, 1 Pet. i. 7 Rec.; superl. τιμιώτατος, 


624 


τις 


Rev. xviii. 12; xxi. 11. b. metaph. held in honor, 
esteemed, especially dear: Veb. xiii. 4; τινί, to one, Acts 
ν. 34; xx. 24 [here with a gen. also, ace. to the text of 
T Tr WH (οὐδενὸς λόγου ete. not worth a word; ef. Meyer 
ad loc.)]; καρπὸς τῆς γῆς, das. v.73 αἷμα, 1 Pet. i. 19; 
ἐπαγγέλματα, 2 Pet. i. 4." 

τιμιότης, τητος, 1), (τίμιος) ; a. prop. preciousness, 
costliness; an abundance of costly things: Rev. xviii. 
19. b. metaph. worth, excellence: Aristot. de partt. 
an. 1, 5 [p. 644°, 32]; eth. Nic. 10, 7 fin. [p. 11784, 1]; 
διαφέρουσι τιμιότητι ai ψυχαὶ καὶ ἀτιμίᾳ ἀλλήλων, de gen. 
anim. 2, 3 [p. 780", 811." 

Τιμόθεος, -ov, 6, voc. Τιμόθεε (1 Tim. vi. 20; cf. Kriiger 
§ 16 Anm. 2; [W.§8, 2c.; B.12]), Timothy, a resident of 
Lystra, apparently, whose father was a Greek and moth- 
er a Jewess, Acts xvi. 1 sqq. He was Paul’s companion 
in travel, and fellow-laborer: Acts xvii. 14 sq.; xviii. 5; 
xix. 22; xx. 4; Ro. xvi. 21; 1 Co.iv.17; xvi.10; 2Co. 
1. 1.1.9. ἘἘ 811... 1s 11195) 001... ls Thea sa δ 
2 Th. 1.1. 1 Tim. i. 2, 18; vi. 20; 2 Tim.i. 2; Philem. 
1; Heb. xiii. 23.* 

Τίμων [on the accent cf. W. § 6, 1, 1.7, τωνος, ὁ, Timon, 
one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem: 
Acts vi. 5.* 

τιμωρέω, -@; 1 aor. pass. ἐτιμωρήθην ; (fr. τιμωρός, and 
this fr. τιμή and οὖρος, see θυρωρός) ; fr. Soph. and 
Hdt. down; prop. to be a guardian or avenger of honor; 
hence 1. to succor, come to the help of: τινί, one, 
Soph., Hdt., Thue., al. 2. to avenge: revi, one, 
Hadt., Xen., al. 3. in the N.T. τιμωρῶ τινα, to take 
vengeance on one, to punish: Acts xxii. 5; xxvi. 11, 
(Soph. O. R.107; in Grk. writ. the mid. is more com. in 
this sense).* 

τιμωρία, -as, 7, (τιμωρός, See τιμωρέω) ; 1. aren- 
dering help; assistance, [(Hdt., Thue., al.)]. 2. 
vengeance, penalty, punishment: Heb. x. 29 (Prov. xix. 
29; xxiv. 22; in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. 
down). [SyN. see κόλασις, fin.]* 

τίνω: fut. τίσω ; fr. Hom. down; fo pay, to recompense : 
δίκην, to pay penally, suffer punishment, 2 Th. i. 9 (Plat. 
Phaedo p. 81 d.; Theaet. p.177a.; Ael. ν. ἢ. 13,2; δίκας, 
id. 1, 24; θωήν, Hom. Od. 2, 193; ποινάς, Pind. Ol. 2, 106; 
¢ypiav, Sept. Prov. xxvii. 12). [Comp.: ἀπο-τίνω.] " 

τίς, neut. ri, gen. τίνος, interrogative pronoun, [fr. 
Hom. down]; 1. who, which, what? Sept. ris for 
"Ὁ, τί for 795 a. used Adjectively, in a direct 
question: τίς βασιλεύς, Lk. xiv. 31; τίς γυνή, Lk. xv. 8; 
τί περισσόν, Mt. v. 47; τί σημεῖον, Jn. ii. 18, and many 
other passages. in an indirect question, 1 Th. iv. 2, ete.; 
τίνα ἢ ποῖον καιρόν, 1 Pet.i.11; used instead of a pred. 
in a direct quest., τίς (sc. ἐστιν) ἡ αἰτία, Acts x. 21; ris 
καὶ ποταπὴ ἡ γυνή, Lk. vii. 39; add, Ro. iii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 
18, etc.; neut., Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk.v.9; in an indir. quest. 
with the optative, Lk. viii. 9; ris foll. by ἄν, Jn. xiii. 24 
RG; Acts xxi. 33 [RG]; τί with the optative, Lk. xv. 
26 [Tr WH add ἄν, so L br.]; xviii. 36 [L br. Tr or. WH 
mrg. add dv]; with the indicative, Eph. i. 18; b. 


| used alone or Substantively: in a direct quest., τις 


τῷ 


ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν; Mt. iii. 7; Lk. iii. 7; Rev. xviii. 
18, ete. ; τίνος, Mt. xxii. 20, 28; Mk xii. 16; rim, Lk. 
xiii. 18; τίνα, Jn. xviii. 4, 7; τί θέλετέ μοι δοῦναι ; Mt. xxvi. 
15; τί ἴῃ an indirect quest., foll. by the indicative, Mt. 
vi. 3; Jn. xiii. 12; 1 Co. xiv. 16; Rev. ii. 7, 11,17, and 
very often; foll. by the aor. subjunc., Mt. vi. 25; Lk. 
xii. 11, ete.; foll. by the optative w. av, Lk. i. 62; vi. 11, 
etc. Emphatic words get prominence by being placed 
before the pronoun [B. §151, 16]: ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνα με λέγετε 
εἶναι, Mt. xvi. 15; Mk. viii. 29; Lk. ix. 20; καὶ ἡμεῖς τί 
ποιήσομεν (or ποιήσωμεν), Lk. iti. 14; οὗτος δὲ τί, Jn. xxi. 
21 [cf. 6. β.1; add, Jn. 1.19; viii. 5; ix.17; Acts xix. 
15; Ro. ix. 19> [ef. W. 274 (257)], 20; xiv.4,10; Eph. 
iv. 9; Jas. iv. 12; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given in Passow 
p- 1908»; [L. and S.s. v. B.I.1b.]. A question is often 
asked by τίς as the leading word, when the answer ex- 
pected is “no one”: Acts viii. 33; Ro. vii. 24; viii. 33 
sq-; ix.19; x.16; xi. 34sq.; 1Co.ix.7; 2Co. xi. 29; 
Heb.i.5,13. τίς εἰ μή, who... save (or but), (i.e. no one 
but), Mk. ii. 7; Lk. v. 21; Ro. xi.15; 1Co.ii.11; Heb. 
fii. 18; 1 Jn. 11: 22; v.5. c. two questions are 
blended into one: τίς τί ἄρῃ, what each should take, Mk. 
xv. 243 ris τί διεπραγματεύσατο, Lk. xix. 15 [not Tr 
WH]; ἐγὼ δὲ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν θεόν ; who 
was I? was I able to withstand God? Acts xi. 17; ef. W. 
800, 5,3; Passow p. 19099; Ast, Lex. Platon. iii. p. 394; 
Franz V. Fritzsche, Index ad Leian. dial. deor. p. 164; 
the same constr. occurs in Lat. writ.; ef. Ramshorn, Lat. 
Gram. p. 567. τίς is joined with conjunctions: καὶ tis, 
Mk. x. 26; Lk. x. 29; xviii. 26; Rev. vi. 17, (see καί, I. 
2¢g.); τίς dpa, see dpa,1; τίς οὖν, Lk. x. 36 [here TWH 
om. L Tr br. οὖν]; 1 Co. ix.18. τίς with a partitive gen.: 
Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23; Lk. x. 36; Acts vii. 52; Heb. 
i1.5,13; with ἐκ and a gen. of the class, Mt. vi. 27; Lk. 
xiv. 28; Jn. viii. 46; in an indir. quest. with the optat., 
Lk. xxii. 23 [ef. W. $41 Ὁ. 4 6.7; with ἄν added, Lk. ix. 
46. d. in indir. questions the neuter article is some- 
times placed before the pronouns ris and ri; see 6, IT. 
10 a. e. Respecting the neuter τί the following 
particulars may be noted: a. τί οὗτοί σου καταμαρ- 
τυροῦσιν; a condensed expression for τί τοῦτό ἐστιν, ὃ 
οὗτοί σου καταμ.; Mt. xxvi. 62; Mk. xiv. 60, (Β. 251 
(216) explains this expression differently); also ri τοῦτο 
ἀκούω περὶ σοῦ; [(R.V.)] what is this (that) I hear of thee? 
(unless preference be given to the rendering, ‘why do I 
hear this of thee’ [see under β. below]), Lk. xvi. 2; ef. 
Bornemann ad loc.; [W. § 66, 5, 3]. B. τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς; 
sc. ἐστίν, what is that tous? [W. 586 (545); B. 138 
(121)], Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. xxi. 22; τί ἐμοὶ κ. aot; see ἐγώ, 
45 τί por ete. what have I to do with ete. 1 Co. v. 12; 
τί σοι or ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; [what thinkest thou ete.], Mt. xvii. 
255 xxii. 17,42; xxvi. 66; Jn. xi. 56 (here before ὅτι 
supply in thought δοκεῖ ὑμῖν, to introduce a second ques- 
tion [R. V. What think ye? That he will not come etc.]}). 
τί θέλεις ; and ri θέλετε ; foll. by a subjune., our what wilt 
thou (that) I should ete.: Mt. xx. 32 [here Lehm. br. in- 
serts iva}; Mk. x. 51; xv. 12[WH om. Tr br. 6€A.]; Lk. 
xviii. 41; 1 Co. iv. 21; τί with the deliberative subj. : 


625 


τίς 


Mt. vi. 31; xxvii. 22; Mk. iv. 30 [here 1, mrg. T Tr 
txt. WH πῶς]; Lk. xii. 17; xiii. 18; Jn. xii.27; τί foll. 
by a fut.: Acts iv. 16 (where Led. ster. T Tr WH ποιή- 
σωμεν) ; 1 Co. xv. 29; τί (sc. ἐστίν [B. 358 (307); W. 
§ 64, 2 a.]) ὅτε ete., how is it that etc. i.e. why ete, 
Mk. ii. 16 RGL; Lk. ii. 49; Acts ν. 4, 9; τί γέγονεν, ὅτι 
etc. [R. V. what is come to pass that ete.], Jn. xiv. 22; 
οὗτος δὲ τί (sc. ἔσται or γενήσεται [W. 586 (546); B.394 
(338) ]), what will be his lot? Jn. xxi. 21 (ef. Acts xii. 
18 τί dpa ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο; Xen. Hell. 2, 3,17 τί ἔσοιτο 
ἡ πολιτεία). τί 1. α. διὰ τί, why? wherefore ? (Matthiae 
§ 488, 8; Kriiger § 46,3 Anm. 4; [W. § 21, 8 N. 27): 
Mt. vi. 28; vii.3; Mk. ii. 7sq.; xi.3; Lk. ii. 48; vi. 41; 
xii. 57; xxiv. 38; Jn. vii. 19; xviii. 23; Acts xiv. 15; 
xxvi. 8; Ro. iii. 7; ix.19sq.; 1 Co. iv. 7; x. 30; xv. 29 
sq-; Gal. iii. 19; v.11; Col. ii. 20, and often. {ya ri or 
ἱνατί, see s.v. p. 305%. διὰ τί [or διατί (see διά, B. I. 3 ἃ. 
p- 134°) ], why? wherefore? Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; Mk. 
vii. 5; xi. 31; Lk. xix. 23, 31; Jn. vii. 45; xiii. 37; Acts 
v.3; 1 Co.vi.7; 2 Co. xi. 11; Rev. xvii. 7,and often. εἰς 
ti, to what? to what end? to what purpose? Mt. xiv. 31; 
xxvi. 8; Mk. xiv. 4; xv. 34, (Sap-iv. 17; Sir. xxxix. 21). 
τί οὖν, ete. why then, etc. : Mt. xvii. 10; xix. 7; xxvii. 22; 
Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 15; Jn. i. 25; see also in οὖν, Ὁ. a.; 
τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, see ibid. τί yap; see γάρ, II. 5. y- 
Hebraistically for ΤΠ, how, how greatly, how much, with 
adjectives and verbs in exclamations [ W. § 21 N. 3; ef. 
B. 254 (218)]: Mt. vii. 14 G LTr; Lk. xii. 49 [on this 
see εἰ, I. 4 fin.], (Ps. iii. 2; 2S. vi. 20; Cant.i. 10; τί 
πολὺ τὸ ἀγαθόν cov; Symm. Ps. xxx. 19). 2. equiv. 
to πότερος, -a, -ov, whether of two, which of the two: Mt. 
xxi. 31; xxiii.17 [here Lri; see below]; xxvii. 17, 21; 
Lk. xxii. 27; neut. ri, Mt. ix. 5; [xxiii. 17 Lehm., 19]; 
Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23; Phil. i. 22; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. iii. 
p- 394; Matthiae § 488, 4; W.169 (159). 3. equiv. 
to ποῖος, -a, -ov, of what sort, what (kind): Mk.i. 27; vi. 
2; Lk. iv. 36; viii. 9; xxiv. 17; Jn. vii. 36; Acts xvii. 
19; 1 Co. xv. 2; Eph. i. 18 sq. Cf. Hermann on Viger 
p- 731. 4. By a somewhat inaccurate usage, yet one 
not unknown to Grk. writ., it is put for the relatives és 
and ὅστις : thus, τίνα (1, Τ Tr WH τῷ pe ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι, 
οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ (where one would expect ὃν), Acts xiii. 25; 
δοθήσεται ὑμῖν, τί λαλήσετε [-σητε T Tr WH; Libr. thecl.], 
Mt. x. 19; ἑτοίμασον, τί δειπνήσω, Lk. xvii. 8; [οἶδα τίνας 
ἐξελεξάμην, In. xiii. 18 T Tr txt. WH]; esp. after ἔχειν 
(as in the Grk. writ.): οὐκ ἔχουσι, τί φάγωσιν, Mt. xv. 
82; Mk. vi. 36; viii. 1 sq.; cf. W.§ 25,1; B. 251 (216); 
on the distinction betw. the Lat. habeo quid and habeo 
quod οἵ. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. p. 565 sq. 

τὶς, neut. ri, gen. τινός, indefinite (enclitic) pronoun 
(bearing the same relation to the interrog. ris that πού, 
πώς, ποτέ do to the interrogatives ποῦ, πῶς. πότε); 1. 
@ certain, α certain one; used of persons and things con- 
cerning which the writer either cannot or will not speak 
more particularly ; a. joined to nouns substantive, 
as well as to adjectives and to numerals used substan- 
tively ; as, Σαμαρείτης τις, Lk. x. 33; ἱερεύς, Lk. i. 5; x. 
81; ἀνήρ, Lk. viii. 27; Acts iii. 2; viii. 9; xiv. 8, ἄνθρω- 


\ 
τις 


πος, Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 80; Acts ix. 33; plur. Jude 4; 
τόπος, Lk. xi. 1; Acts xxvii. 8; κώμη, Lk. x. 38; xvii. 12, 
and in many other pass.; with proper names (as τὶς 
Σίμων), Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26; Acts ix.43; xxi. 16; 
xxv. 19. δύο τινές with a partit. gen., Lk. vii. 18 (19); 
Acts xxiii. 23; ἕτερος, Acts viii. 34; plur. Acts xxvii. 1; 
it indicates that the thing with which it is connected 
belongs to a certain class and resembles it: ἀπαρχήν 
τινα, a kind of firstfruits, Jas. i. 18, οἵ. W. § 25, 2a; 
joined to adjectives of quality and quantity, it requires 
us to conceive of their degree as the greatest possible; 
. as, φοβερά τις ἐκδοχή, a certain fearful expectation, Heb. 
x. 27, where see Delitzsch [or Alford] (δεινή τις δύναμις, 
Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; other exx. fr. the Grk. writ. are 
given in W. § 25,2c.; [L. and S.s. v. A. II. 8]; Mat- 
thiae § 487, 4; [Bnhdy. p. 442]; incredibilis quidam 
amor, Cic. pro Lig. c. 2,5); μέγας τις, Acts viil. 9. b. 
it stands alone, or substantively: univ. tis one, a certain 
one, Mt. xii. 47 [but WH in mrg. only]; Lk. ix. 49, 57; 
xili. 6, 23; Jn. xi.1; Acts v.25; xviii. 7; plur. τινές, cer- 
tain, some: Lk. xiii.1; Acts xv.1; Ro. iii.8; 1 Co. iv. 
18; xv. 34; 2Co.iii.1; Gal. ii. 12; 2 Th. iii. 11; 1 Tim. 
i. 3,19; iv.1; v.15; vi.10; 2 Pet.iii.9; τινὲς ἐν ὑμῖν, 
some among you, 1 Co. xv. 12; a participle may be 
added, — either with the article, τινὲς οἱ ete., Lk. xviii. 
9; 2Co. x. 2; Gal. i. 7; or without it, 1 Tim. vi. 21; 
ris and τινές with a partit. gen.: Lk. xi. 1; xiv. 15; 2 Co. 
x. 12. 2. a. joined to nouns and signifying 
some: χρόνον τινά, some time, a while, 1 Co. xvi. 7; ἡμέραι 
τινές, some (or certain) days, Acts ix. 19; x. 48; xv. 36; 
xvi. 12; xxiv. 24; xxv. 13; μέρος τι, Lk. xi. 36 [here WH 
mrg. br. τι]; Acts v.2; 1 Co. xi. 18; τὶ βρώσιμον, Lk. 
xxiv. 41; add, Mk. xvi. 18; Jn. v.14; Acts xvii. 21; xxiii. 
20; xxviii. 21; Heb. xi. 40; βραχύ τι, Acts v. 34 (where 
LTTrWH om. τι); Heb. ii. 7; περισσότερόν τι, 2 Co. x. 
8; μικρόν τι, 2 Co. xi. 16; it serves modestly to qualify 
or limit the measure of things, even though that is thought 
to be ample or large [cf. 1 a. sub fin.]: κοινωνία τις, a cer- 
tain contribution, Ro. xv. 26; καρπός, Ro. i. 13; χάρισμα, 
ibid. 11. with a participle, ἀθετήσας τις, if any one has 
set at nought, Heb. x. 28 [but this ex. belongs rather 
under the next head]. b. standing alone, or used 
substantively, and signifying some one, something; any 
one, anything: univ., Mt. xii. 29; Mk. ix. 30; xi. 16; Lk. 
viii. 46; Jn. ii. 25; vi.46; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. v. 7; 1Co. 
xv.35; 2 Co. xi. 20sq.; Heb. iii. 4; Jas. ii. 18; 2 Pet. ii. 
19, ete.; τὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν, Jas. ii. 16; ἐξ ὑμῶν τις, Heb. iii. 13; 
with a partitive gen., Lk. vii.36; xi.45; 1 Co. vi.1; 
neut. ri with a partit. gen., Acts iv. 32; Ro. xv. 18; Eph. 
v. 27. eis τις, see εἷς, 3 p. 187%. it answers not in- 
frequently to the indefinite one (Germ. man, French on): 
Mk. viii.4; Jn. ii. 25; xvi.30; Ro. viii. 24; Heb. v. 12 
(where some [viz. RG T Tr (ef. W. 169 (160); R. V. 
mrg. which be the rudiments etc.; cf. c. below)] incor- 
rectly read τίνα [yet ef. B. 268 (230) note, ef. 260 (223) 
note]), ete.; cf. Matthiae § 487, 2. εἴ τις, see εἰ, III. 16; 
ἐάν τις, τινος, etc.: Mt. xxi. 3; xxiv. 23; Mk. xii 19; Lk. 
Xvi. 31; Jn. vi. 51; vil. 17; viii. 51 sq.; ix. 22,31; x.9; 


626 


τὶς 


xi. 9sq.57; xii. 26,47; Acts ix. 2 [here Tdf. dv]; xii. 
41; 1Co.v.11; viii. 10; x. 28; Col. iii. 13; 1 Tim.1.8; 
2 Tim. ii. 5, 21; Jas. ii. 14; v.19; 1 Jn. ii. 15; iv. 20; v. 
16; Rev. iii. 20; xxii. 18 sq.; ἄν τινων, Jn. xx. 23 [here 
Lehm. ἐάν] ; ἐὰν μή τις, Jn. iii. 8,5; xv. 6; Acts viii. 31; 
ov... τις, nol...any one, i. 6. no one, Jn. x. 283; οὔτε 
... τις, Acts xxviii. 21; οὐδὲ . .. τις, Mt. xi. 27; xii. 19; 
οὐκ... ὑπό τινος, 1 Co. vi. 12; μή tts, lest any (man), Mt. 
xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii.5; Acts xxvii. 42: 1 Co.i.15; xvi. 11; 
2 Co. viii. 20; xi. 16; xii. 6; Eph. ii. 9; 1 Th. v. 15; Heb. 
iv.11; xii. 15; hath any (one), Jn. iv. 33 [cf. μήτις, 27; μή 
twa, 2 Co. xii. 17; πρὸς τὸ pip... τινα, 1 Th. ii. 9; ὥστε 
- +. μή τινα, Mt. viii. 28; like the Lat. aliquis, it is used 
with the verb εἶναι emphatically: tv be somebody, i. e. 
somebody of importance, some eminent personage, [ W. 
§ 25, 2¢.; B. § 127, 16], Acts v. 36 (see exx. fr. the Grk. 
writ. in Passow 8. v. B. 11. 2d.; [L. and S. ibid. A. II. 5]; 
on the phrase ti εἶναι see e. B. below). Plur. τινές, 
some (of that number or class of men indicated by the 
context): Mk. xiv. 4,65; Lk. xxi.5; Jn. xiii. 29; τινές 
are distinguished from oi πάντες, 1 Co. viii. 7; ix. 22. 
τινές with an anarthrous participle, Mk. xiv. 57; Lk. 
xiii. 1; ταῦτά τινες ἦτε, such (of this sort) were some of 
you, 1 Co. vi. 11 [ef. οὗτος, I. 2.d.]; τινές with a partitive 
gen., Mt. ix.3; xii. 38; xxviii.11; Mk. vii.1sq.; xii. 
13; Lk. vi. 2; xix. 39; Acts v.15; xvii. 18, 28, and 
often; foll. by ἐκ and a partit. gen., Lk. xi. 15; Jn. vi. 
64; vil. 25, 44; ix.16; xi.37,46; Acts xi.20; xv. 24, 
ete.; Paul employs τινές by meiosis in reference to many, 
when he would mention something censurable respecting 
them in a mild way: Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. x. 7-10. ο. 
Sometimes the subject τὶς, τινές, or the object τινά, τινάς, 
is not added to the verb, but is left to be understood by 
the reader (cf. B. § 132,6; [W. §§ 58,2; 64,4]): be- 
fore the partit. gen. Acts xxi.16; before ἀπό, Mt. xxvii. 
9 (1 Mace. vii. 33); before ἐκ, Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. xxi. 
16; [Jn. i. 24 T Tr WH (cf. R. V.mrg.); vii. 40 LT 
Tr WH (cf. R. V.mrg.)]; xvi. 17; [2 Jn. 4; Rev. ii. 
10]. [Other exx. of its apparent omission are the fol- 
lowing: as subject, — of a finite verb (W. ὃ 58, 9 Ὁ. B.; 
B. § 129,19): φησί, 2 Οο. χ. 10 RGT Tr txt. WH txt. ; 
ὅταν λαλῇ τὸ ψεῦδος, Jn. viii. 44 (ace. to one interpreta- 
tion; see R.V. marg.); .of an infin.: od χρείαν ἔχετε 
γράφειν ὑμῖν, 1 Th.iv.9 RG T Trtxt. WH; χρείαν ἔχετε 
τοῦ διδάσκειν ὑμᾶς, τίνα ete. Heb. v.12 RGT Tr (but see 
2b. above). as object: δός μοι πιεῖν, Jn. iv. 7; cf. Mk. 
y.43. See Kihner § 352¢.; Kriiger § δῦ, 3, 21.] d. 
It stands in partitions: ris... ἕτερος δέ, one... and 
another, 1 Co. iii. 4; plur. τινὲς (μὲν) - . - τινὲς (δέ), Lk. 
ix. 7 sq.; Acts xvii. 18; Phil. i. 15; cf. Passow s. v. B. 
II. 2e.; [L. and S. ibid. A. II. 11. e.]. e. Besides 
what has been already adduced, the foll. should be no- 
ticed respecting the use of the neut. ri; a. univ. 
anything, something: Mt. v. 23; Mk. viii. 23; Lk. xi. 54; 
Acts xxv. 5,11; 1 Co. x. 31, and very often; οὐδὲ - - . τά 
neither ... anything, 1 Tim. vi. 7. β. like the Lat. 
aliquid it is used emphatically, equiv. to something of 
consequence, something extraordinary (cf. Ὁ. above): in 


Τίτιος 


the phrase εἶναί τι, 1 Co. iii. 7; Gal. ii.6; νἱ. 8; cf. Pas- 
sow s.v. B. II. 2d.; [L. and 5. 5. v. A. II. 5]; and on the 
Lat. aliquid esse see Klotz, Handworterb. ἃ. Lat. Spr. i. 
298°; [Harpers’ Dict. 8. v. aliquis, Π. C. 1] (on the 
other hand, in 1 Co. x. 19 ri εἶναι means to be anything, 
actually to exist); εἰδέναι [LT Tr WH ἐγνωκέναι] τι; 1. 6. 
much, 1 Co. viii. 2. 3. As respects the Position 
of the word, when used adjectively it stands— now be- 
fore its noun (ris ἀνήρ, Acts iii. 2; xiv. 8; τὶς μαθητής, 
Acts ix. 10; τινὰς ἑτέρους, Acts xxvii. 1 ; rt ἀγαθόν, Jn. i. 
47); now, and indeed far more frequently, after it, as 
ἱερεύς τις, Lk. i. 5; x. 313 ἀνήρ τις, Lk. viii. 27, etc., etc. 
Τινές, used substantively, is found at the beginning of a 
sentence in Mt. xxvii. 47; Lk. vi. 2; Jn. xiii. 29; 1 Tim. 
v.24; Phil. i. 15; οἵ. W. § 25, 2 Note, and 559 (520). 
The particle δέ may stand betw. it and its substantive 
(as Σαμαρείτης δέ τις), as in Lk. x. 33, 38; Acts viii. 9; 
Heb. x. 27. 

Tiros, -ov, 6, the praenomen of a certain Corinthian, 
a Jewish proselyte, also surnamed Justus: Acts xviii. 7 
T Tr br. WH (see Tiros).* 

τίτλος, -ov, 6, a Lat. word, a title; an inscription, giv- 
ing the accusation or crime for which a criminal suf- 
fered: Jn. xix. 19, 20, and after it Hy. Nic. ο. 10, 1 fin. 
(Sueton. Calig. ec. 32 praecedente titulo qui causam 
poenae indicaret; again, Domit. 6. 10 canibus objecit 
cum hoe titulo: impie locutus parmularius.) * 

Τίτος [Rec.* in the subscription, Tiros; ef. Lipsius, 
Gram. Unters. p. 42 sq.; Τὰ Proleg. p. 103; Pape, 
Eigennamen, s. v.; W.§6, 1 m.], του, 6, Titus, a Gentile 
Christian, Paul’s companion in some of his journeys and 
assistant in Christian work: 2 Co. ii. 13; vii. 6, 13 sq. ; 
viii. 6, 16, 23; xii.18; Gal. ii. 1,3; 2 Tim. iv. 10; Tit. i. 
4. Heis not mentioned in the Book of Acts. But since 
Titus is the praenomen, perhaps he appears in the 
Acts under his second, or, if he was a Roman, under 
his third name; οἵ. Riickert on 2 Cor. p. 410. He is 
by no means, however, to be identified (after Wieseler, 
Com. ii. d. Brief a. d. Galater, p. 573 sq. [also his Chron. 
d. apost. Zeit. p. 204]) with the Titus of Acts xviii. 7, 
even if the reading (of some authorities [see Tdf.’s note 
ad loc.]) Τίτου [see Tiros above] Ἰούστου be the true 
one.* 

tlw, a form from which some N. T. lexicons [e. ¢. 
Wahl, Bretschneider, Robinson, Bloomfield, Schirlitz, 
Harting, al.] incorrectly derive τίσουσιν in 2 Th.i. 9; see 
Tivo. 

τοιγαροῦν, (fr. the enclitic τοί or τῷ, yap, and οὖν, Germ. 
doch denn nun; cf. Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 1; [Ellicott on 
1 Th. iv. 87), a particle introducing a conclusion with 
some special emphasis or formality, and generally occu- 
pying the first place in the sentence, wherefore then, for 
which reason, therefore, consequently: 1 ΤῊ. ἵν. 8; Heb. 
xii. 1, (for 13-5», Job xxii. 10; xxiv.22; 4 Macc. i. 34; 
vi. 28 var.; xiii.15; Soph., Xen., Plato, 544.) ; cf. Klotz 
ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 738.7 

tolye in καίτοιγε, see γέ, 3 f. 


τοίνυν, (fr. the enclitic τοί and νῦν), fr. Pind. [and 


627 


τολμάκὸ 


Hdt.] down, therefore, then, accordingly ; contrary to the 
use of the more elegant Grk. writ., found at the begin- 
ning of the sentence (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342 sq.; [W. 
559 (519 sq.); Β. § 150, 19]): Heb. xiii. 13 (Is. iii. 10; 
v.13); as in the better writ., after the first word: Lk. 
xx. 25 [yet T Tr WH put it first here also]; 1 Co. ix. 
26 and lee. in Jas. ii. 24, (Sap. i. 11; vii. 9; 4 Mace. 
i. 13, 15 sqq.).* 

τοιόσδε, τοιάδε, τοιόνδε, (τοῖος and δέ), fr. Hom. down, 
such, generally with an implied suggestion of something 
excellent or admirable: 2 Pet. i. 17.” 

τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο and τοιοῦτον (only this sec- 
ond form of the neut. occurs in the N. T., and twice [but 
in Mt. xviii. 5 T WH have -το]), (fr. τοῖος and οὗτος [al. 
say lengthened fr. τοῖος or connected with αὐτός : cf. 
τηλικοῦτος |), [fr. Hom. down], such as this, of this kind or 
sort; a. joined to nouns: Mt. ix. 8; xviii. 5; Mk. 
iv. 33; vi. 2; vii. 8 [here T WH om. Tr br. the cl.], 13; 
ix. 37 [here Tdf. τούτων]; Jn. ix. 16; Acts xvi. 24; 1 
Co. v. 1; xi. 16; 2 Co. iii. 4, 12; xii. 8; Heb. vii. 26; 
vill. 1; xii. 3; xiii. 16; Jas. iv. 16. b. oios... 
τοιοῦτος: Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co. xv. 48; 2Co. x. 11; τοιοῦ- 
ros... ὁποῖος, Acts xxvi. 293; τοιοῦτος ὧν ὡς etc. Philem. 
9 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]. c. used substantive- 
ly, a. without an article: Jn. iv. 23; neut. μηδὲν τοιοῦ- 
tov, Acts xxi. 25 Rec.; plur., Lk. ix. 9; xiii. 2 [here T 
Tr txt. WH ταῦτα]. B. with the article, ὁ τοιοῦτος 
one who is of such a character, such a one, [B. $124,5; W. 
111 (106); Kriiger § 50, 4,6; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1, 
5, 2; Ellicott on Gal. v. 21]: Acts xxii. 22; 1 Co. v. 5, 
11; 2 Co. ii. 6sq-5 Σ- 11; xii. 2,5; Gal vi 1; Tit. iit 
11; plur., Mt. xix.14; Mk.x.14; Lk. xviii. 16; Jn. viii. 
5; Ro. [ii. 14 Lmrg.]; xvi. 18; 1 Co. vii. 28; xvi. 16,18; 
(Oh ah 15: amb 1 90.: PUN 1||. 19» Ἐν Wi yan Π 
Rec.; 3 Jn. 8; neut. plur., Acts xix. 25; Βο. i. 82; ii. 2 
sq-; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v. 21,23; Eph. v.27; Heb. xi. 14." 

τοῖχος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for Vp, α 
wall {esp. of a house; ef. τεῖχος]: Acts xxiii. 3.* 

τόκος, -ov, ὁ, (fr. τίκτω, pf. τέτοκα) ; τ δῆ τ 
the act of bringing forth. b. that which has been 
brought forth, offspring; (in both senses from Homer 
down). 2. interest of money, usury, (because it 
multiplies money, and as it were ‘breeds’ [ef. 6. σ. Mer- 
chant of Venice i. 3]): Mt. xxv. 27; Lk. xix. 23, (so in 
Grk. writ. fr Pind. and Arstph. down; Sept. for 70}}}." 

τολμάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐτόλμα, plur. ἐτόλμων; 
fut. τολμήσω; 1 aor. ἐτόλμησα; (τόλμα or τόλμῃ [‘dar- 
ing’; Curtius § 236]); fr. Hom. down; to dare; a. 
not to dread or shun through fear: foll. by an inf., Mt 
xxii. 46; Mk. xii. 34; Lk. xx. 40; Jn. xxi. 12 [W. $65, 
7b.]; Acts v. 13; vii. 32; Ro. xv. 18; 2Co.x.12; Phil. 
i.14; Jude 9; τολμήσας εἰσῆλθεν, took courage and went 
in, Mk. xv. 43 [Hdian. 8, 5, 22; Plut. vit. Cam. 22, 
6]. Ὁ. to bear, endure; to bring one’s self to; [cf 
W. u.s.]: foll. by an inf., Ro. v. 7; 1 Co. vi. 1. ο. 
8.050]. to be bold; bear one’s self boldly, deal boldly: 2Co. 
xi. 21; ἐπί twa, against one, 2 Co. x. 2. [CompP.: dro 
ToApdw. | * 


τολμηρότερον 


028 


τοσοῦτος 


[ϑυν. τολμάω, θαρρέω: θ. denotes confidence in one’s | ἐφ᾽ or ἐν ᾧ, foll. by finite verbs, Mt. xxviii. 6; Mk 


own strength or capacity, τ᾿ boldness or daring in under- 
taking; @. has reference more to the character, τ. to its 
manifestation. Cf. Schmidt ch. 24,4; ch. 141. The words 
are found together in 2 Co. x. 2.] 

τολμηρότερον, (neut. compar. from the adj. τολμηρός), 
[Thuce., sqq.], more boldly: Ro. xv. 15 [L ed. ster. Tr 
txt. WII -repas; W. 243 (228)]." 

τολμητής, -οὔ, ὁ, (τολμάω), a daring man: 2 Pet. ii. 
10. (Thue. 1, 70; Joseph. b. j. 3, 10, 2; Philo de Jo- 
seph. § 38, Plut., Leian.) * 

τομώτερος, -a, -ov, (compar. fr. τομός cutting, sharp, and 
this fr. τέμνω), sharper: Heb. iv. 12 ([Pseudo-] Phoeylid. 
vs. 116 [(Gnom. Poet. Graee. ed. Brunck p. 116) ] ὅπλον 
τοι λόγος ἀνδρὶ τομώτερόν ἐστι σιδήρου ; add, Timon in 
Athen. 10 p. 445e.; Leian. Tox. 11).* 

τόξον, -ov, τό, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for np, a 
bow: Rev. vi. 2.* 

τοπάζιον, -ου, τό, (neut. of the adj. τοπάζιος, fr. τόπαζος), 
topaz, a greenish-yellow precious stone (our chrysolith 


[see BB. DD., esp. Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 18]): Rev. 


xxi. 20 (Diod., Strab.; Sept. for 7303, Ex. xxviii. 17; 
xxxvi. 17 (xxxix. 10); Ezek. xxviii. 13. The Grk. writ. 
more commonly use the form romagos).* 

τόπος, -ov, 6, in Attic fr. Aeschyl. and his contempo- 
raries on; Sept. DIP; place; i.e. 1. prop. any 
portion of space marked off, as it were, from surrounding 
space ; used of a. an inhabited place, as a city, 
village, district: Lk. iv. 37; x. 1; Acts xii. 17; xvi. 3; 
xxvii. 2,8; 1Co.i.2; 2Co. ii. 14; 1 ΤῊ. 1. 8; Rev. xviii. 
17 [GLT Tr WH]; τὸν τόπον καὶ τὸ ἔθνος, the place 
which the nation inhabit, i.e. the holy land and the 
Jewish people, Jn. xi. 48 (cf. 2 Mace. v. 19 sq.) ; τόπος 
ἅγιος, the temple (which the Sept. of Is. Ix. 13 calls ὁ 
ἅγιος τόπος τοῦ θεοῦ), Mt. xxiv. 15. of a house, Acts 
iv. 31. of uninhabited places, with adjectives: ἔρημος, 
Mt. xiv. 13,15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 31 sq.; Lk. iv. 42; ix. 
10 RGL, 12; medwos, Lk. vi. 17; ἄνυδρος, plur., Mt. xii. 
43; Lk. xi. 24. of any place whatever: κατὰ τύπους, 
[R.V. in divers places] i.e. the world over [but see xara, 
ΤΙ. 3a.a.], Mt. xxiv. 7; Mk. xiii. 8; [ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ, 2 Th. 
iii. 16 Lehm.]; of places in the sea, τραχεῖς τόποι, Acts 
xxvii. 29 [R.V. rocky ground]; rom. διθάλασσος, [ A. V. 
place where two seas met], ibid. 41. of that ‘place’ 
where what is narrated occurred: Lk. x. 32; xix. 5; 
xxii. 40; Jn.v.13; vi. 10; xviii.2. ofa place or spot 
where one can settle, abide, dwell : ἑτοιμάζειν τινὶ τόπον, 
Jn. xiv. 2sq., οἵ. Rev. xii. 6; ἔχειν τόπον, ἃ place to dwell 
in, Rev. 1. c.; οὐκ ἦν αὐτοῖς τόπος ἐν τῷ καταλύματι, Lk. 
ii. 7; διδόναι τινὶ τόπον, to give one place, give way to 
one, Lk. xiv. 9°; τόπος οὐχ εὑρέθη αὐτοῖς, Rev. xx. 11; 
of the seat which one gets in any gathering, as at a 
feast, Lk. xiv. 10; τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον κατέχειν, ibid. 9>; 
of the place or spot occupied by things placed in it, Jn. 


LK. xvi. 28; τῆς καταπαύσεως, Acts vii. 49; κρανίου, Mt. 
xxvii. 33; Mk. xv. 22; Jn. xix. 17; [τὸν τόπον τῶν ἥλων, 
Jn. xx. 2501, T Tr mrg.]; — by the addition of οὗ, ὅπου, 


xvi. 6; Jn. iv. 20; vi. 23; x.40; xi. 6, 30; xix.41; Acts 
vii. 33; Ro. ix. 26 ;— by the addition of a proper name: 
τόπος λεγόμενος, Or καλούμενος, Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk. xv. 
22; Lk. xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 13; Rev. xvi. 16; ὁ τόπος 
twos, the place which a person or thing occupies or has 
aright to: Rev. ii. 5; vi. 14; xii.8; where a thing is 
hidden, τῆς μαχαίρας i.e. its sheath, Mt. xxvi. 52. the 
abode assigned by God to one after death wherein to re- 
ceive his merited portion of bliss or of misery: (ὁ ἴδιος 
τόπος (τινός), univ. Ignat. ad Magnes. 5, 1 [cf. 6 αἰώνιος 
τόπος, Tob. iii. 6]); applied to Gehenna, Acts i. 25 (see 
ἴδιος, 1 c.); ὁ ὀφειλόμενος τόπος, of heaven, Polye. ad 
Philip. 9, 2; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 4; also ὁ ἅγιος τόπος, 
ibid. 5, 7; [6 ὡρισμένος τ. Barn. ep. 19,1; Act. Paul et 
Thecl. 28; see esp. Harnack’s note on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
5, 4]. b. a place (passage) in a book: Lk. iv. 17 
(καὶ ἐν ἄλλῳ τόπῳ φησίν, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 20[(but this 
is doubtful; cf. L. and S.s.v. 1.4; yet ef. Kiihner ad 
loc.) ; Philo de Joseph. § 26; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 4]; in 
the same sense χώρα in Joseph. antt. 1, 8, 3). ὩΣ 
metaph. a. the condition or station held by one in 
any company or assembly: ἀναπληροῦν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώ- 
του, [R. V. filleth the place of the unlearned], 1 Co. xiv. 
16; τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς, [R.V. the place in 
this ministry, ete.], Acts i. 25 LT Tr WH. b. op- 
portunity, power, occasion for acting: τόπον λαμβάνειν τῆς 
ἀπολογίας, opportunity to make his defence, Acts xxv. 
16 (ἔχειν τ. ἀπολογίας, Joseph. antt. 16, 8,5); τόπον διδό- 
ναι TH ὀργῇ (sc. τοῦ θεοῦ), Ro. xii. 19; τῷ διαβόλῳ, Eph. 
iv. 27, (τῷ ἰατρῷ, to his curative efforts in one’s case, 
Sir. xxxviii. 12; νόμῳ ὑψίστου, ibid. xix. 17; τόπον διδό- 
ναι τινί, foll. by an inf., ibid. iv. 5); τόπ. μετανοίας εὑρί- 
oxew, Heb. xii. 17, on this pass. see εὑρίσκω, 3 (διδόναι, 
Sap. xii. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 5; Lat. locum relin- 
quere paenitentiae, Liv. 44, 10; 24, 26; [Plin. ep. ad Trai. 
96 (97), 10 ef. 2]; ἔχειν τόπον μετανοίας, Tat. or. ad 
Graec. 15 fin. ; διὰ τὸ μὴ καταλείπεσθαί σφισι τόπον ἐλέους 
μηδὲ συγγνώμης, Polyb. 1, 
γελίζεσθαι, Ro. xv. 23; 7. ζητεῖν, with a gen. of the thing 
for which influence is sought among men: διαθήκης, pass. 
Heb. viii. 7 [(cf. μέμφομαι) J. 

[Syx. τόπος 1, χώρα, χωρίον: τόπ. place, indefinite ; a 
portion of space viewed in reference to its occupancy, or as 
appropriated to a thing; χώρα region, country, extensive ; 
space, yet bounded; χωρίον parcel of ground (Jn. iv. 5), cir- 
cumscribed ; a definite portion of space viewed as enclosed 
or complete in itself ; τόπος and χωρίον (plur., R. V. lands) 
occur together in Acts xxviii. 7. Cf. Schmidt ch. 41.] 

τοσοῦτος, -αὐτη. -ovTo (Heb. vii. 22 LT Tr WH) and 
-obrov, (ἴτ. τόσος and οὗτος; [4]. say lengthened fr. τόσος; 
cf. τηλικοῦτος, init.]), so great; with nouns: of quantity, 
roo. πλοῦτος. Rev. xviii. 17 (16); of internal amount, 


88, 2); τόπον ἔχειν sc. τοῦ εὐαγ- 


| πίστις, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9; [ὅσα ἐδόξασεν ἑαυτήν, το- 
xx. 7. the particular place referred to is defined by | 
the words appended: — by a genitive, τόπ. τῆς βασάνου, 


σοῦτον δότε βασανισμόν. Rev. xviii. 7]; of size, νέφος, Heb. 
xii. 1; plur. so many: ἰχθύες, Jn. xxi. 113 σημεῖα, Jn. 
xii. 37; γένη φωνῶν, 1 Co. xiv. 10; ἔτη, Lk. xv. 29 [(here 


| A.V. these many)], (in prof. writ., esp. the Attic, we 


| often find τοσοῦτος καὶ τοιοῦτος and the reverse; see Hein- 


TOTE 


dorf on Plat. Gorg. p. 34; Passow p. 1923"; [L. and 5. 
s.vv.]); foll. by ὥστε, so many as to be able, ete. [B. 244 
(210)], Mt. xv. 33; of time: so long, χρόνος, [ Jn. xiv. 9]; 
Heb. iv. 7; of length of space, τὸ μῆκος τοσοῦτόν ἐστιν 
ὅσον etc. Rey. xxi. 16 Rec.; absol., plur. so many, Jn. 
vi. 9; neut. plur. [so many things], Gal. iii. 4; τοσούτου, 
Sor so much (of price), Acts v. 8 (9); dat. τοσούτῳ, pre- 
ceded or followed by ὅσῳ (as often in the Grk. writ. fr. 
Hdi. down | W. § 38, 4 N. 27), by so much: too. κρείττων, 
by so much better, Heb. i. 4; τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον ὅσῳ ete. 
Heb. x. 25; καθ᾽ ὅσον . .. κατὰ τοσοῦτον, by how much... 
by so much, Heb. vii. 22.* 

τότε, demonstr. ady. of time, (fr. the neut. art. τό, 
and the enclit. τέ [q. v.]; answering to the relative 
ore [Kiihner $506, 2 ¢.]), fr. Hom. down, then; at that 
time; a. then i.e. at the time when the things under 
consideration were taking place, (of a concomitant 
event): Mt. ii. 17 (τότε ἐπληρώθη) ; iii. 9, 13; xii. 22, 38; 
xv. 1; xix. 13; xx. 20; xxvii.9, 16; Ro. vi. 21; foll. by 
a more precise specification of the time by means of an 
added participle, Mt. ii. 16; Gal. iv. 8; opp. to νῦν, Gal. 
iv. 29; Heb. xii. 26; 6 τότε κόσμος, the world that then 
was, 2 Pet. iii. 6. b. then i. e. when the thing un- 
der consideration had been said or done, thereupon; so 
in the historical writers (esp. Matthew), by way of transi- 
tion from one thing mentioned to another which could 
not take place before it [W. 540 (503); B. § 151, 31 
fin.]: Mt. iv. 1,5; xxvi. 14; xxvii. 38; Actsi.12; x. 48; 
xxi. 33; not infreq. of things which took place imme- 
diately afterwards, so that it is equiv. to which having 
been done or heard: Mt. ii. 7; 111. 15; iv.10sq.; viii. 26; 
xii. 45; xv. 28; xvii. 19; xxvi. 36,45; xxvii. 26 sq.; 
Lk. xi. 26; τότε οὖν, Jn. xi. 14 [Lchm. br. οὖν]: xix. 1, 
16; xx. 8; εὐθέως τότε, Acts xvii. 14; τότε preceded 
by a more definite specification of time, as pera τὸ 
ψωμίον, Jn. xiii. 27; or by an aor. ptcp. Acts xxviii. 1. 
Gre... τότε, etc., when... then: Mt. xiii. 26; xxi. 1; Jn. 
xii 16; as... τότε, ete., Jn. vii. 10; xi.6; preceded by 
a gen. absol. which specifies time, Acts xxvii. 21. ἀπὸ 
tore from that time on, see ἀπό, I. 4 Ὁ. p. 58°. ο. of 
things future; then (at length) when the thing under 
discussion takes place (or shall have taken place): τότε 
simply, Mt. xxiv. 23, 40; xxv. 1, 34,37, 41, 44sq.; opp. 
to ἄρτι, 1 Co. xiii. 12; καὶ τότε, Mt. vii. 23; xvi. 27; 
xxiv. 10, 14, 30; ΜΕ. xiii. 21, 26 sq.; Lk. xxi. 27; 1 Co. 
iv. 5; Gal. vi. 4; 2Th.ii.8; καὶ τότε preceded by πρῶ- 
τον, Mt. v. 24; vii. 5; Lk. νἱ. 42. ὅταν (with a subjune. 
pres.). . . τότε, ete. when . . . then, ete. [W. § 60, 5], 2 Co. 
xii.10; 1 Th. v.35 ὅταν (with an aor. subj. i. q. Lat. fut. 
pf.) - - - τότε, etc., Mt. ix. 15; xxiv. 16; xxv. 31; Mk. 
ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. ν. 35; xxi. 20 sq.; Jn. ii. 10 [TWH 
om. L Tr br. τότε]; viii. 28; 1 Co. xv. 28, 54; xvi. 2; 
Col. iii. 4. Of the N. T. writ. Matthew uses τότε most 
frequently, ninety-one times [(so Holtzmann, Syn. Evang. 
p- 293); rather, eighty-nine times ace. to RT, ninety 
times ace. toG L Tr WH]; it is not found in [Eph., Phil., 
Philem., the Past. Epp., the Epp. of Jn., Jas., Jude], the 
Rey. 


629 


τραχηλίξω 


τοὐναντίον (by crasis for τὸ ἐναντίον [ Β. 107), [(Arstph., 
Thue., al.)], on the contrary, contrariwise, (Vulg. e con- 
trario), accus. used adverbially [W. 230 (216)]: 2 Co. 
τι 75 Gali: 73 1 Pet: 111./9* 

τοὔνομα (by crasis for τὸ ὄνομα ᾿ Β. 10; WH. App. p. 
1451), [fr. Hom. Il. 3, 235 down], the name; accus. absol. 
[B. § 131, 12; W. 230 (216) ef. ὄνομα, 1] by name: Mt. 
XXvil. 57.* 

τουτέστι [cf. W. p. 45; B.11(10)] for τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι, and 
this for τοῦτό ἐστι, see εἰμί, 11. 3. 

τράγος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, a he-goat: plur., Heb. 
ix. 1286. 19; x. 4." 

τράπεζα, -ης, ἡ, (fr. rérpa, and πέζα a foot), fr. Hom. 
down, Sept. for mow, a table; -- a. a table 
on which food is placed, an eating-table: Mt. xv. 27; Mk. 
vii. 28; Lk. xvi. 21; xix. 23; xxii. 21, 30; the table in 
the temple at Jerusalem on which the consecrated loaves 
were placed (see πρόθεσις, 1), Heb. ix. 2. b. equiv. 
to the food placed upon the table (cf. Fritzsche on Add. 
to Esth. iv. 14): παρατιθέναι τράπεζαν, (like the Lat. 
mensam apponere [ οἵ. our ‘to set a good table’]), to set a 
table, i.e. food, before one (Thue. 1,130; Ael. v. h. 2,17), 
Acts xvi. 34; διακονεῖν ταῖς τραπέζαις (see διακονέω, 3), 
Acts vi. 2. ce. a banquet, feast, (fr. Hdt. down): Ro. 
xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23); μετέχειν τραπέζης δαιμο- 
viev, to partake of a feast prepared by [(?) see below] 
demons (the idea is this: the sacrifices of the Gentiles 
inure to the service of demons who employ them in pre- 
paring feasts for their worshippers; accordingly one who 
participates in those feasts, enters into communion and 
fellowship with the demons); κυρίου, to partake of a feast 
prepared by [(?) see below] the Lord (just as when he 
first instituted the supper), 1 Co. x. 21 [but it seems 
more natural to take the genitives daz. and κυρ. simply 
as possessive (ef. W. 189 (178); Β. § 127, 27), and 
to modify the above interpretation accordingly ]. 2. 
the table or stand of a money-changer, where he sits, ex- 
changing different kinds of money for a fee (agio), and 
paying back with interest loans or deposits, (Lys., Isocr., 
Dem., Aristot., Joseph., Plut., al.): Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 
15; Jn. ii. 15; τὸ ἀργύριον διδόναι ἐπὶ (την) τράπεζαν, to put 
the money into a (the) bank at interest, Lk. xix. 23.* 

τραπεζίτης [-ζείτης T WH; see WH. App. p. 154, and 
cf. et, ε7, του, ὁ, (τράπεζα, q. V.), a money-changer, broker, 
banker, one who exchanges money for a fee, and pays 
interest on deposits: Mt. xxv. 27. (Cebet. tab. 31; 
[Lys.], Dem., Joseph., Plut., Artem., al.) * 

τραῦμα, -ros, τό, (TPAQ, TPQQ, τιτρώσκω, to wound, 
akin to θραύω), a wound: Lk. x. 34. (From Aeschyl. 
and Hdt. down; Sept. several times for ps3.) * 

τραυματίζω: 1 aor. ptep. τραυματίσας ; pf. pass. ptep. 
τετραυματισμένος ; (τραῦμα) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down, 
to wound: Lk. xx. 12; Acts xix. 16.* 

τραχηλίζω : (τράχηλος) ; 1. to seize and twist the 
neck or throat; used of combatants who handle thus 
their antagonists (Philo, Plut., Diog. Laért., al.). = 
to bend back the neck of the victim to be slain, to lay 
bare or expose by bending back; hence trop. to ‘ay bare, 


τράχηλος 


uncover, expose: pf. pass. ptep. τετραχηλισμένος τινί, laid 
bare, laid open, made manifest to one, Heb. iv. 13.* 

τράχηλος, -ου, 6, [allied w. τρέχω ; named from its moy- 
ableness; ef. Vanicek p. 8041, fr. Eur. and Arstph. down, 
Sept. chiefly for Nix, also for ἢ)", ete., the neck: Mt. 
xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42; Lk. xv. 20; xvii. 2; Acts xv. 10; 
Xx. 37; τὸν ἑαυτοῦ τράχηλον ὑποτιθέναι (sc. ὑπὸ τὸν σίδη- 
pov), [A.V. to lay down one’s own neck i. 6.1] to be ready 
to incur the most imminent peril to life, Ro. xvi. 4." 

τραχύς, -eia, -v, fr. Hom. down, rough: ὁδοί, Lk. iii. 5 ; 
τόποι, rocky places (in the sea), Acts xxvii. 29.* 

Tpaxwviris, -idos, ἡ, Trachonitis, a rough [(Grk. rpa- 
xvs) ] region, tenanted by robbers, situated between An- 
tilibanus [on the W.] and the mountains of Batanaea [on 
the E.], and bounded on the N. by the territory of Da- 
mascus: Lk. iii. 1 (Joseph. antt. 16, 9, 3 and often). 
[See Porter in BB. DD.]* 

τρεῖς, of, ai, τρία, τά, three: Mt. xii. 40; Mk. viii. 2; 
Lk. i. 56; Jn. ii. 19, and often. [From Hom. down.] 

Tpels TaBepvar, see ταβέρναι. 

τρέμω ; used only in the pres. and impf.; fr. Hom. 
down; to tremble: Mk. v. 33; Lk. viii. 47; Acts ix. 6 
Rec.; with a ptep. (οἴ. W. § 45, 4a.; [B. § 144, 15a.]), 
to fear, be afraid, 2 Pet. ii. 10. [Syn. see φοβέω, fin.] * 

τρέφω; 1 aor. ἔθρεψα ; Pass., pres. rpépopar; pf. ptep. 
τεθραμμένος ; fr. Hom. down; to nourish, support; to feed : 
τινά, Mt. vi. 26; xxv. 37; Lk. xii. 24; Acts xii. 20; Rev. 
xii. 6, 14; to give suck, Lk. xxiii. 29 LT Tr WH; to 
fatten, Jas. v. 5 [here A. V. nourish]. to bring up, 
nurture, Lk. iv. 16 [here T WH mrg. ἀνατρέφω] (1 Mace. 
iii. 33; xi. 39, and often in prof. auth.). [Comp. : 
ἐκ-, ev- τρέφω.) * 

τρέχω ; impf. ἔτρεχον ; 2 aor. ἔδραμον ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for y95 torun; a. prop.: of persons in haste, 
Mk. v. 6; Jn. xx. 2,4; with a telic inf. Mt. xxviii. 8; 
δραμών with a finite verb, Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; 
Lk. xv. 20; τρέχω ἐπί with an ace. of place, Lk. xxiv. 
12[T om. LTr br. WH reject the vs.]; εἰς πόλεμον, 
Rey. ix. 9; of those who run in a race-course (ἐν σταδίῳ), 
1 Co. ix. 24, 26. b. metaph.: of doctrine rapidly 
propagated, 2 Th. iii. 1[R.V. run]; by a metaphor 
taken from the runners in a race, to exert one’s self, strive 
hard; to spend one’s strength in performing or attaining 
something: Ro. ix. 16; Gal. v. 7; εἰς κενόν, Gal. ii. 2 [W. 
504 (470); B. § 148, 10]; Phil. ii. 16; τὸν ἀγῶνα, Heb. 
xii. 1 (see ἀγών, 2); the same expression occurs in Grk. 
writ., denoting to incur extreme peril, which it requires 
the exertion of all one’s efforts to overcome, Hat. 8, 
102; Eur. Or. 878; Ale. 489; Electr. 883; Iph. Aul. 
1456; Dion. Hal. 7, 48, ete.; miserabile currunt certa- 
men, Stat. Theb. 3,116. [Comp.: eto-, kara-, mepi-, mpo-, 
προσ-, συν-; ἐπι- συν-, ὑπο- τρέχω." 

τρῆμα, -ατος, τό, (τιτράω, τίτρημι, TPAQ, to bore through, 
pierce), a perforation, hole: βελόνης, Lk. xviii. 25 L Τ Tr 
WH; [ῥαφίδος, Mt. xix. 24 WH txt.]. (Arstph., Plat., 
Aristot., Plut., al.) * 

τριάκοντα, οἱ, ai, τά, (τρεῖς), thirty: Mt. xiii.8; Mk. iv. 
8; Lk. iii. 23, ete. [From Hom. down.] 


> 
ava-, 


630 


τρόμος 


τριακόσιοι, -αι, -a, three hundred: Mk. xiv. 5, Jn. xii. 
5. [From Hom. down.]* 

τρίβολος, -ov, ὁ, (τρεῖς and βάλλω, [ (cf. βέλος), three- 
pointed ]), α thistle, a prickly wild plant, hurtful to other 
plants: Mt. vii. 16; Heb. vi. 8. (Arstph., al.; Sept. for 
ὙΠ, Gen. iii. 18; Hos. x. 8; for D'y3¥ thorns, Prov. 
xxii. 5.) [Cf. B. D. s. v. Thorns and Thistles, 4; Léw, 
Aram. Pflanzennamen, ὃ 302.]* 

τρίβος, -ov, ἡ, (τρίβω to rub), a worn way, a path: Mt. 
iii. 3; Mk. i. 3; Lk. iii. 4, fr. Is. xl. 8. (Hom. hymn. 
Mere. 448; Hdt., Eur., Xen., al.; Sept. for 723, NI, 
72D, IV ete.)* 

τριετία, -as, ἡ, (τρεῖς and ἔτος), a space of three years: 
Acts xx. 81. (Theophr., Plut., Artem. oneir. 4, 1; al.) * 

τρίζω ; to squeak, make a shrill ery, (Hom., Hdt., Aris- 
tot., Plut., Leian., al.) : trans. τοὺς ὀδόντας, to grind or 
gnash the teeth, Mk. ix. 18; κατά twos, Ev. Nicod. e. δ." 

τρίμηνος, -ov, (τρεῖς and μήν), of three months (Soph., 
Aristot., Theophr., al.) ; neut. used as subst. a space of 
three months (Polyb., Plut., 2 Κα. xxiv. 8): Heb. xi. 28." 

τρίς, (τρεῖς), adv., thrice: Mt. xxvi. 34, 75; Mk. xiv. 
30, 72; Lk. xxii. 34,61; Jn. xiii. 38; 2 Co. xi. 25; xii. 
8; ἐπὶ τρίς [see ἐπί. C. I. 2 ἃ. p. 285" bot.], Acts x. 165 
xi. 10. [From Hom. down.]* 

τρίστεγος, -ov, (τρεῖς and στέγη). having three roofs or 
stories: Dion. Hal. 3, 68; [ Joseph. b. 1. 5, 5, 5]; τὸ τρί- 
στεγον, the third story, Acts xx. 9 (Gen. vi. 16 Symm.); 
ἡ τριστέγη, Artem. oneir. 4, 40." 

τρισ-χίλιοι, -ar, -a, (τρίς and χίλιοι), three thousand: 
Acts ii. 41. [From Hom. down.]* 

τρίτος, -n, -ov, the third: with substantives, Mk. xv. 25; 
Lk. xxiv. 21; Actsii. 15; 2Co. xii. 2; Rev. iv. 7; vi. 5; 
viii. 10; xi. 14, ete.; τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ, Mt. xvi. 21; xvii. 235 
xx. 19; Mk. ix. 31 [Rec.]; x. 84 Rec.; Lk. xxiv. 46; Acts 
x.40; 1Co.xv.4; τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ, Lk. xviii. 33; Jn. 
ii. 1 [Lmrg. Tr WH mre. τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ] ;; ἕως τῆς τρίτ. 
ἡμέρας, Mt. xxvii. 64; τρίτον, acc. masc. substantively, 
a third [(se. servant)], Lk. xx.12; neut. τὸ τρίτον with 
a gen. of the thing, the third part of anything, Rev. viii. 
7-12; ix.15,18; xii.4; neut. adverbially, τὸ τρίτον 
the third time, Mk. xiv.41; Jn. xxi.17; also without 
the article, τρίτον a third time, Lk. xxiii. 22; τοῦτο tpi- 
τον, this is (now) the third time (see οὗτος, II.d.), Jn. 
xxi. 14; 2 Co. xii. 14 [mot Ree.]; xiii. 1; τρίτον in 
enumerations after πρῶτον, δεύτερον, in the third place, 
thirdly, 1 Co. xii. 28; ἐκ τρίτου, a third time [W. ὃ 51, 
d.], Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. ἐκ τρίτου]. 

τρίχινος, -n, -ov, (θρίξ, q- v-), made of hair (Vulg. cili- 
cinus): Rev. vi. 12 [see σάκκος, b.]. (Xen., Plat., Sept., 
al.) * 

τριχός, see θρίξ. 

τρόμος, -ov, 6, (τρέμω), fr. Hom. down, a trembling, 
quaking with fear: Mk. xvi. 8; μετὰ φόβου κ- τρόμου, 
with fear and trembling, used to describe the anxiety of 
one who distrusts his ability completely to meet all re- 
quirements, but religiously does his utmost to fulfil his 
duty, 2 Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi.5; Phil. ii. 12; ἐν @. x. ἐν tp. 
(Is. xix. 16), 1 Co. ii. 3 (φόβος and τρόμος are joined in 


τροπή 


Gen. ix. 2; Ἐχ. χν. 16; Deut. [ii. 25]; xi. 25, etc.; ἐν φ. 
«ον ἐν 7p. Ῥ5. 11. 11). [5ΥΝ. cf. φοβέω, fin.]* 

τροπή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. τρέπω to turn), a turning: of the 
heavenly bodies, Jas. i. 17 (on this see ἀποσκίασμα); often 
so in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hes. down [see L. 
and 5. s. v. 1]; ef. Job xxxviii. 33; Sap. vii. 18; Deut. 
xxxiil. 14; [Soph. Lex. 5. v.].* 

τρόπος, -ov, ὁ, (fr. τρέπω, see τροπή), fr. [Pind.], Ae- 
schyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. ἃ manner, way, fashion: 
ὅν τρόπον, as, even as, like as, [W. § 32,6; Β. 8. 131, 12]: 
Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; Actsi.11; vil.28; 2 Tim. 
111. 8, (Gen. xxvi. 29; Ex. xiv. 13; [Deut. xi. 25; Ps. xli. 
(xlii.) 2]; Ezek. xlii. 7; xlv.6; Mal. iii. 17; Xen. mem. 
1, 2,59; anab. 6,1 (3), 1; Plat. rep. 5 p. 466 e.); τὸν 
ὅμοιον τούτοις τρόπον, [in like manner with these], Jude 7; 
καθ᾽ ὃν τρύπον, as, Acts xv. 11; xxvii. 25; κατὰ πάντα 
τρόπον, Ko. iii. 2; κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον, in no wise, 2 ‘Th. 
ii. 3 (4 Mace. iv. 24; x.7; κατὰ οὐδένα τρόπον, 2 Mace. 
xi. 31; 4 Mace. v.16); παντὶ τρόπῳ, Phil. i. 18 (1 Mace. 
xiv. 35, and very often in the Grk. writ.) ; also ἐν παντὶ 
τρόπῳ, 2 Th. iii. 16 [here Lehm. ἐν 7. τόπῳ ; cf. W. § 31, 
8.4.1]. 2. manner of life, character: Heb. xiii. 5 
[R. V. mrg. ‘turn of mind’; (cf. rods τρόπους κυρίου ἔχειν, 
‘Teaching’ 11, 8) ].* 

τροπο-φορέω, -@: 1 aor. erporopdpnaa; (fr. τρόπος, and 
φέρω to bear); to bear one’s manners, endure one’s charac- 
ter: twa, Acts xiii. 18 K Tr txt. WH (see their App. ad 
loe.), after codd. δὲ B ete.; Vulg. mores eorum sustinuit; 
(Cie. ad Attic. 13,29; Schol. on Arstph. ran. 1432; 
Sept. Deut. i. 31 cod. Vat.; [Orig. in Jer. 248; Apost. 
constt. 7, 36 (p. 219, 19 ed. Lagarde) ]); see rpopodopéw.* 

τροφή, -ῆς, ἡ, (τρέφω, 2 pf. τέτροφα), food, nourish- 
ment: Mt. iii. 4; vi. 25; x. 10; χχῖν. 45; Lk. xii. 23; Jn. 
iv.8; Acts ii.46; ix. 19; xiv.17; xxvii. 33 sq. 36, 38; 
Jas. ii. 15; of the food of the mind, i.e. the substance 
of instruction, Heb. v. 12,14. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., 
sqq-; Sept. for D9, 3%, 11:2, ete.) * 

Tpddipos [on its accent ef. W.§ 6, 11.], του, 6, Trophi- 
mus, an Ephesian Christian, a friend of the apostle Paul: 
Acts xx. 4; xxi. 29; 2 Tim. iv. 20.* 

τροφός, -ov, 7, (τρέφω ; see τροφή), a nurse: 1 Th. ii. 
7. (From Hom. down; for ΠΡ2Ὁ, Gen. xxxv. 8; 2 K. 
xi. 25 Is. xlix. 23:))* 

τροφο-φορέω, -@: 1 aor. ἐτροφοφόρησα; (τροφός and 
φέρω); to bear like a nurse or mother, i. 6. to take the most 
anxious and tender care of: twa, Acts xiii. 18 GLT Tr 
mrg. [R. V. mrg. bear as a nursing-father] (Deut. i. 31 
cod. Alex. ete.; 2 Mace. vii. 27; Macar. hom. 46, 3 and 
other eccles. writ.) ; see τροποφορέω." 

τροχιά, -as, ἡ, (τροχός, q.V-), α track of a wheel, a rut; 
a track, a path: τροχιὰς ὀρθὰς ποιήσατε τοῖς ποσὶν ὑμῶν, 
i. 6. follow the path of rectitude, do right, Heb. xii. 18 
after Prov. iv. 26 (where for 53y, as in ii. 15; iv. 11; 
v. 6, 21; in some of the later poets equiv. to τροχός)" 

τροχός, -ov, 6, (τρέχω), fr. Hom. down, a wheel: Jas. iii. 
6 (on this pass. see γένεσις 3; [ef. W. 54 (53)]).* 

τρύβλιον [so T (cf. Proleg. p. 102) WH; -βλίον RG L 
Tr] (on the accent see Passow s. v.; [Chandler § 350; 


631 


τρώγω 


Géttling p. 4087), -ov, τό, a dish, a deep dish [cf. Β. D. 
s.v. Dish]: Mt. xxvi. 23; Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Plut., 
Leian., Ael. v.h. 9, 37; Sept. for TWP» for which also 
in Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 10; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 14.) * 

τρυγάω, τῶ; 1 aor. ἐτρύγησα; (fr. τρύγη (lit. ‘dryness ἢ 
fruit gathered ripe in autumn, harvest); fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. several times for 7¥3, 778, VSP; to gather in ripe 
Jruits; to gather the harvest or vintage: as in the Grk. 
writ., with ace. of the fruit gathered, Lk. vi. 44; Rev. 
xiv. 18; or of the plant from which it is gathered, Rev. 
xiv. 19." 

τρυγών, -dvos, 7, (fr. τρύζω to murmur, sigh, coo, of 
doves; cf. yoyyi¢w), a turtle-dove: Lk. ii. 24. (Arstph., 
Theocr., al.; Ael. ν. ἢ. 1,15; Sept. for 7A.) * 

τρυμαλιά, -as, ἡ, (i. 4. τρῦμα, Or τρύμη. fr. τρύω to wear 
away, perforate), a hole, [eye of a needle]: Mk. x. 25, 
and R Gin Lk. xviii. 25. (Judg. xv. 11; Jer. xiii. 4; 
xvi. 16; Sotad.in Plut. mor. p. 11 a. [i. 6. de educ. puer. 
§ 14]; Geop.) * 

τρύπημα, -τος, τό, (τρυπάω to bore), a hole, [eye of a 
needle]: Mt. xix. 24 [here WH txt. τρῆμα, 4. ν.]. (Ar- 
stph., Plut., Geop., al.) * 

ἸΤρύφαινα, -ης, ἡ, (τρυφάω, q.v.), Tryphena, a Chris- 
tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [B. D.s.v.; Bp. Lghtft. on 
Phil. p. 175 sq.]* 

τρυφάω, -@: 1 aor. ἐτρύφησα ; (τρυφή, q.v-); to live 
delicately, live luxuriously, be given to a soft and lucuri- 
ous life: Jas. v.5. (Neh. ix. 25; Is. lxvi. 11; Isoer., 
Eur., Xen., Plat., sqq.) [Comp.: ἐν-τρυφάω. Syn. cf. 
Trench § liv.]* 

τρυφή, -ἧς, ἡ, (fr. θρύπτω to break down, enervate; 
pass. and mid. to live softly and delicately), softness, 
effeminacy, luxurious living: Lk. vii. 25; 2 Pet. ii. 13. 
(Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, sqq.; Sept.) * 

Tpupaca, -ns, ἡ, (τρυφάω, 4. ν.), 7ryphosa, a Chris- 
tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [See reff. under Tpidawa.] * 

Tpwds, and (so LT WH [see I,c and reff. in Pape, 
Eigennamen, 8. v.]) Tpwds, -ddos, 7, [on the art. with it 
see W.§5, b.], Troas, a city near the Hellespont, for- 
merly called ᾿Αντιγόνεια Tp., but by Lysimachus ᾿Αλεξάν- 
δρεια ἡ Tp. in honor of Alexander the Great ; it flourished 
under the Romans [and with its environs was raised by 
Augustus to a colonia juris italici, ‘the Troad’; cf. 
Strab. 13,1, 26; Plin.5, 33]: Acts xvi. 8,11; xx.5sq.; 
2 Co. ii. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 13. [B.D.s.v.]* 

Τρωγύλλιον (so Ptolem. 5, 2, 8), or Τρωγίλιον [ (better 
-γύλιον ; see WH. App. p. 159)] (so Strab. 14, p 636), 
του, τό, Trogyllium, the name of a town and promontory 
of Ionia, not far from the island Samos, at the foot of 
Mt. Mycale, between Ephesus and the mouth of the 
river Maeander: Acts xx.15 RG. [Cf. Β. Ὁ. 5. v.]* 

τρώγω; to gnaw, craunch, chew raw vegetables or fruits 
(as nuts, almonds, ete.) : ἄγρωστιν, of mules, Hom. Od. 
6, 90, and often in other writers of animals feeding; 
also of men fr. Hdt. down (as σῦκα, Hdt. 1, 71; βότρυς, 
Arstph. eqq. 1077; blackberries, Barn. ep. 7, 8 [where 
see Harnack, Cunningham, Miiller]; κρόμυον pera δεῖ- 
mvov, Xen. conv. 4, 8) ; univ. to eat: absol. (δύο τρώγνομεν 


τυγχάνω 


ἀδελφοί, we mess together, Polyb. 32, 9, 9) joined with 
πίνειν, Mt. xxiv. 38 (so also Dem. p. 402, 21; Plut. symp. 
1,1, 2; Ev. Nicod. ο. 15, p. 640 ed. Thilo [p. 251 ed. 
Tdf.]) ; τὸν ἄρτον, Jn. xiii. 18 (see ἄρτος 2 and ἐσθίω b.); 
fizuratively, Jn. vi. 58; τὴν σάρκα, the ‘flesh’ of Christ 
(see σάρξ, 1), Jn. vi. 54, 56 sq.* 

τυγχάνω ; 2 aor. ἔτυχον ; pf. (Heb. viii. 6) τέτευχα [so 
cod. 8], and (so L T Tr mrg. WH cod. δὲ) τέτυχα a later 
and rarer form (which not a few incorrectly think is 
everywhere to be regarded as a clerical error; B. 67 
(59); Kiihner § 343 s. νος [Veitch s. v.; Phryn. ed. Lob. 
p- 595; WH. App. p.171]), in some texts also τετύχηκα 
(a form com. in the earlier writ. [2 utherford, New Phryn. 
Ρ- 483 sq., and reff. as above]); a verb in freq. use fr. 
Hom. down; “est Lat. atlingere et contingere; Germ. 
treffen, ὁ. accus. i. q. etwas erlangen, neut. es trifft sich.” 
Ast, Lex. Platon. 5. v.; hence 1. trans. ae 
prop. to hit the mark (opp. to ἁμαρτάνειν to miss the 
mark), of one discharging a javelin or arrow, (Hom., 
Xen., Leian.). b. trop. to reach, attain, obtain, get, 
become master of: with a gen. of the thing (W. 200 
(188)), Lk. xx. 35 [W. 609 (566)]; Acts xxiv. 2 (3); 
xxvi. 22; xxvii. 3; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. viii. 6; xi. 
35. 2. intrans. to happen, chance, fall out: εἰ τύχοι 
(if it so fall out), it may be, perhaps, (freq. in prof. auth.), 
1 Co. xiv. 10, where see Meyer; or, considered in ref. 
to the topic in hand, it may be i. q. to specify, to take a 
case, as, for example, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Vulg. in each pass. 
ut puta; [cf. Meyer u. s.]); τυχόν, adverbially, perhaps, 
it may be, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (cf. B. §145, 8; [W. § 45,8 N. 1]; 
see exx. fr. Grk. writ. in Passow 5. v. II. 2 b.; [L. and 8. 
s. v. B. III. 2; Soph. Lex. s.v.]). to meet one; hence ὁ 
τυχών, he who meets one or presents himself unsought, any 
chance, ordinary, common person, (see Passow s. v. IT. 2; 
[L.andS.s.v. A. II.1b.; Soph. Lex. s.v.]): οὐ τυχών, not 
common, i.e. eminent, exceptional, [A. V. special], Acts 
xix. 11; xxviii. 2, (3 Mace. iii. 7); to chance to be: 
ἡμιθανῆ τυγχάνοντα, half dead as he happened to be, just 
as he was, Lk. x. 30 RG. [Comp.: ev-, tmep-ev-, ἐπι-, 
mapa-, συν- τυγχάνω. | * 

τυμπανίζω : (τύμπανον) ; 1. to beat the drum or 
timbrel. 2. to torture with the tympanum, an in- 
strument of punishment: ἐτυμπανίσθησαν (Vulg. distenti 
sunt), Heb. xi. 35 [R. V. were tortured (with marg. Or, 
beaten to death) | (Plut. mor. p. 60 a.; joined with ἀνασκο- 
λοπίζεσθαι, Leian. Jup. trag. 19); the tympanum seems 
to have been a wheel-shaped instrument of torture, over 
which criminals were stretched as though they were 
skins, and then horribly beaten with clubs or thongs 
[ef. our ‘to break upon the wheel’; see Eng. Diets. s. v. 
Wheel]; ef. [Bleek on Heb. u. 5.7; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 
19 sq.* 

τυπικῶς, (fr. the adj. τυπικός, and this fr. τύπος), adv., 
by way of example (prefiguratively) : ταῦτα τυπικῶς συνέ- 
βαινον ἐκείνοις, these things happened unto them as a 
warning to posterity [R. V. by way of example], 1 Co. x. 
11 LTTrWH. (Eccles. writ.) * 

τύπος, -ov, ὁ, (τύπτω). fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; 


63 


2 Τύριος 


1. the mark of a stroke or blow; print: τῶν ἥλων, Jn. xx. 
25%, 25” [where LT Trmrg. τόπον], (Athen. 13 p. 585 ο. 
Tous τύπους τῶν πληγῶν ἰδοῦσα). 2. a figure formed 
hy a blow or impression; hence univ. a figure, image: of 
the images of the gods, Acts vii. 43 (Amos v. 26; Jo- 
seph. antt. 1, 19,11; 15, 9,5). (Cf. κύριοι τύπος θεοῦ, 
Barn. ep. 19, 7; ‘ Teaching’ 4, 11.] 3. form: διδα- 
xis, i. e. the teaching which embodies the sum and sub- 
stance of religion and represents it to the mind, Ro. vi. 
17; i. q. manner of writing, the contents and form of a 
letter, Acts xxiii. 25 (3 Mace. iii. 30). 4. an ex- 
ample ; a. in the technical sense, viz. the pattern in 
conformity to which a thing must be made: Acts vii. 445 
Heb. viii. 5, (Ex. xxv. 40). B. in an ethical sense, 
a dissuasive example, pattern of warning: plur. of ruin- 
ous events which serve as admonitions or warnings to 
others, 1 Co. x.6, 11 RG; an example to be imitated: of 
men worthy of imitation, Phil. iii.17; with a gen. of the 
pers. to whom the example is offered, 1 Tim. iv. 12; 1 
Pet. v. 8: τύπον ἑαυτὸν διδόναι τινί, 2 Th. iii. 9; γενέσθαι 
τύπον [τύπους R Lmrg. WH mrg.; ef. W. § 27, 1 note] 
τινί, 1 Th. i. 7; παρέχεσθαι ἑαυτὸν τύπον καλῶν ἔργων, to 
show one’s self an example of good works, ΤΊῦ. ἢ. τ. γ. 
ina doctrinal sense, a type i.e. a person or thing prefigur- 
ing a future (Messianic) person or thing: in this sense 
Adam is called τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος se. ᾿Αδάμ, i. 6. of 
Jesus Christ, each of the two having exercised a pre-emi- 
nent influence upon the human race (the former destruc- 
tive, the latter saving), Ro. v. 14.* 

τύπτω; impf. ἔτυπτον : pres. pass. inf. τύπτεσθαι; fr. 
Hom. down; Sept. for 73m; to strike, smite, beat (with 
a staff, a whip, the fist, the hand, ete.) : τινά, Mt. xxiv. 
49; Lk. xii. 45; Acts xviii. 17; xxi. 32; xxiii.3; τὸ στόμα 
τινός, Acts xxiil. 2; τὸ πρόσωπόν twos, Lk. xxii. 64 [here 
Lbr. T Tr WH om. the cl.]; τινὰ ἐπὶ [Tdf. εἰς] τὴν σια- 
γόνα, Lk. vi. 29; εἰς τ. κεφαλήν twos, Mt. xxvii. 30; [τὴν 
κεφαλήν twos, Mk. xv. 19]; ἑαυτῶν τὰ στήθη (Lat. plan- 
gere pectora), of mourners, to smite their breasts, Lk. 
xxiii. 48; also τ. εἰς τὸ στῆθος, Lk. xviii. 13 [but G LT 
Tr WII om. εἰς]. God is said τύπτειν to smite one on 
whom he inflicts punitive evil, Acts xxiii. 3 (Ex. viii. 2; 
2S. xxiv. 17; Ezek. vii. 9; 2 Mace. iii. 39). to smite 
metaph. i.e. to wound, disquiet : τὴν συνείδησίν τινος, one’s 
conscience, 1 Co. viii. 12 (iva τί τύπτει σε ἡ καρδία σου; 
1S.i. 8; τὸν δὲ ἄχος ὀξὺ κατὰ φρένα τύψε βαθεῖαν, Hom. 
Il. 19,125; Καμβύσεα ἔτυψε ἡ ἀληθηΐη τῶν λόγων, Hat. 3, 
64).* 

Tupavvos, -ov, ὁ, Tyrannus, an Ephesian in whose 
school Paul taught the gospel, but of whom we have no 
further knowledge [cf. B. D.s. v.]: Acts xix. 9.* 

τυρβάζω: pres. pass. τυρβάζομαι: (τύρβη, Lat. turba, 
confusion; [ef. Curtius § 250]); [fr. Soph. down]; to 
disturb, trouble: prop. τὸν πηλόν, Arstph. vesp. 257; trop. 
in pass. to be troubled in mind, disquieted: περὶ πολλά, 
Lk. x. 41 RG (with the same constr. in Arstph. pax 
1007; μὴ ἄγαν τυρβάζου. Nilus epist. 2, 258).* 

Τύριος, -ov, ὁ, ἡ. a Tyrian, inhabitant of Tyre: Acts 
xii. 20. Hdt., al.)]* 


Τύρος 


Τύρος, -ov, ἡ, (Hebr. ix or ὋΝ ; fr. Aram. 930 a rock), 
Tyre, a Phenician city on the Mediterranean, very an- 
cient, large, splendid, flourishing in commerce, and pow- 
erful by land and sea. In the time of Christ and the 
apostles it was subject to the Romans, but continued to 
possess considerable wealth and prosperity down to 
A.D. 1291. It is at present an obscure little place con- 
taining some five thousand inhabitants, part Mohamme- 
dans part Christians, with a few Jews (cf. Bideker’s 
Palestine p. 425sq.; [Murray’s ditto p. 370 sq.]). It is 
mentioned Acts xxi. 3, 7, and (in company with Sidon) 
in Mt. xi. 21sq.; xv. 21; Lk. vi. 17; x.13sq.; Mk. iii. 8; 
vii. 24 (where T om. Trmrg. WH br. καὶ Σιδῶνος), 31. 
[BB. DD.]* = 

τυφλός, -od, 6, (τύφω, to raise a smoke; hence prop. 
‘darkened by smoke’), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 11y, 
blind ; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 27sq.; xi. 5; Mk. viii. 22 
sq-; x. 46; Lk. vii. 21sq.; xiv. 13,21; Jn. ix. 1 sq. 13; 
x. 21, ete. b. as often in prof. auth. fr. Pind. down, 
mentally dlind: Mt. xv. 14; xxiii. 17,19, 24, 26; Jn. 
ix. 39-41; Ro. ii. 19; 2 Pet. i. 9; Rev. iii. 17. 

τυφλόω, -ῶ: 1 aor. ἐτύφλωσα; pf. τετύφλωκα ; fr. [ Pind. 
and] Hdt. down; to blind, make blind; in the N. T. 
metaph. fo blunt the mental discernment, darken the mind: 


ΤΥ, v: on the use and the omission of the mark of diaeresis 
with, see Tdf. Proleg. p.108; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 
136 sqq.; cf. Scrivener, Collation of Cod. Sin. ete. 2d ed. p. 
XXxviii.] 


633 


ὑβριστής 


Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn. ii. 11; τὰ νοήματα, 2 Co. iv. 4, (τὴν 
ψυχὴν τυφλωθείην, Plat. Phaedo p. 99 e.).* 

τυφόω, -@: Pass., pf. τετύφωμαι ; 1 aor. ptep. τυφωθείς ; 
(τύφος, smoke; pride); prop. to raise a smoke, to wrap 
in a mist; used only metaph. 1. to make proud, 
puff up with pride, render insolent; pass. to be puffed 
up with haughtiness or pride, 1 Tim. iii. 6 (Strab., Jo- 
seph., Diog. Laért., al.). 2. to blind with pride or 
conceit, to render foolish or stupid: 1 Tim. vi. 4; pf. 
ptep. beclouded, besotted, 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Dem., Aristot., 
Polyb., Plut., al.).* 

τύφω: (τῦφος, smoke); fr. Hdt. down; to cause or 
emit smoke (Plaut. fumifico), raise a smoke; pass. (pres. 
ptep. τυφόμενος) to smoke (Vulg. fumigo): Mt. xii. 20.* 

τυφωνικός, -7, -ov, (τυφῶν [cf. Chandler ed. 1 ὃ 659], 
a whirlwind, hurricane, typhoon), like a whirlwind, 
tempestuous : ἄνεμος, Acts xxvii. 14.* 

Τύχικος [so WH; W. § 6,1 1.] but RGLT Tr Τυχι- 
kos (Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 30; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; 
Chandler § 2667), -ov, 6, Tychicus, an Asiatic Christian, 
friend and companion of the apostle Paul: Acts xx. 4; 
Eph. vi. 21; Col. iv. 7; 2 Tim.iv. 12; Tit. 111. 12. [See 
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ο. ; B. Ὁ. s. v.]* 

τυχόν, See τυγχάνω, 2. 


Tt 


ὑβρίζω; 1 aor. ὕβρισα; Pass., 1 aor. ptep. ὑβρισθείς ; 
1 fut. ὑβρισθήσομαι ; (ὕβρις) ; fr. Hom. down; ae 
intrans. to be insolent; to behave insolently, wantonly, 
outrageously. 2. trans. to act insolently and shame- 


ὑακίνθινος, -η, -ov, (ὑάκινθος), of hyacinth, of the color | fully towards one (so even Hom.), to treat shamefully, 


of hyacinth, i.e. of a red color bordering on black 
(Hesych. ὑακίνθινον - ὑπομελανίζον) : Rev. ix. 17 (Hom., 
Theoer., Leian., al.; Sept.).* 

ὑάκινθος, -ov, 6, hyacinth, the name of a flower (Hom. 
and other poets; Theophr.), also of a precious stone of 
the same color, i.e. dark-blue verging towards black 
[A. V. jacinth (so R. V. with mrg. sapphire); ef. B. D. 
s.v. Jacinth; Riehm 5. v. Edelsteine 9] (Philo, Joseph., 
Galen, Heliod., al.; Plin. h. n. 37, 9, 41): Rey. xxi. 30." 

ὑάλινος, -7, -ov, (ὕαλος, 4. V-), ina fragment of Corinna 


and occasionally in the Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. down, of | ὑβριστής} :: prop., plur. 


[et. W. § 32, 1b. β.1: Mt. xxii. 6; Lk. xviii. 32; Acts 
xiv. 5; [1 Th. ii. 2]; of one who injures another by 
speaking evil of him, Lk. xi. 45. [Comp.: érv8pifo.]* 

ὕβρις, -ews, ἡ, (fr. ὑπέρ [(see Curtius p. 540); cf. Lat. 
superbus, Eng. ‘uppishness’]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 
INI, M83, 171|, ete.; a. insolence ; impudence, pride, 
Aenclaiiees, b. a wrong springing from insolence, 
an injury, affront, insult [in Grk. usage the mental in- 
jury and the wantonness of its infliction being prom- 
inent; οἵ. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 12, 26; 2, 2, 5; see 
2 Co. xii. 10 (Hesych. ὕβρεις 


glass or transparent like glass, glassy: Rey. iv. 6; xv. 2.* τραύματα. ὀνείδη) ; trop. injury inflicted by the violence of 


ὕαλος, -ov, 6, [prob. allied w. ὕει, ὑετός (q.¥.); hence 
‘rain-drop’, Curtius § 604; Wanitek p. 1046; but al. 
make it of Egypt. origin (cf. L. and 8. 5. v.)], fr. Hat. 
([3. 24] who writes ὕελος ; [ef. W. 22]) down; ale 
any stone transparent like glass. 2. glass: Rev. xxi. 
18, 21.* 


a tempest: Acts xxvii. 10,21, (τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν ὄμβρων ὕβριν, 
Joseph. antt. 3, 6,4; δείσασα θαλάττης ὕβριν, Anthol. 7, 
291, 3; [ef. Pind. Pyth. 1, 140]).* 

ὑβριστής, -ov, 6, (ὑβρίζων), fr. Hom. down, an insolent 
man, ‘one who, uplifted with pride, either heaps insulting 
language upon others or does them some shameful act of 


ὑγεαίνω 


wrong’ (Fritzsche, ἘΡ. δὰ Rom. i. p. 86; [ef. Trench, Syn. 
§ xxix. ; Schmidt ch. 177; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 5 
(see d8pis)]): Ro. i. 30; 1 Tim. i. 18." 

ὑγιαίνω; (ὑγιής); fr. Hdt. down; to be sound, to be 
well, to be in good health: prop., Lk. ν. 31; vii. 10; xv. 
27; [3 Jn. 2]; metaph. the phrase ὑγιαίνειν ἐν τῇ πίστει 
[Β. § 133, 19 ]is used of one whose Christian opinions are 
free from any admixture of error, Tit. i. 13; τῇ πίστει, 
τῇ ἀγάπῃ. τῇ ὑπομονῇ. (cf. B. u. s.], of one who keeps these 
graces sound and strong, Tit. ii. 2; ἡ ὑγιαίνουσα διδα- 
o<a\ia, tle sound i.e. true and incorrupt doctrine, 1 
Tim. i. 10; 2 Tim. iv. 3; Tit.i.9; ii. 1; also λύγοι ὑγιαί- 
vovres (Philo de Abrah. § 38), 1 Tim. vi. 3; 2 Tim. i. 13, 
(ὑγιαίνουσαι περὶ θεῶν δόξαι καὶ ἀληθεῖς, Plut. de aud. 
poet. c. 4).* 

ὑγιής, -€s, acc. ὑγιῆ (four times in the N. T., Jn. v. 11, 
15; vii. 23; Tit. ii. 8; for which ὑγιᾶ is more com. in 
Attic [ef. Meisterhans p. 66]), fr. Hom. down, sound: 
prop. ΓΑ. V. whole], of a man who is sound in body, Mt. 
xv. 31 [WH only in mrg., but Tr br. in mrg.]; Acts iv. 
10; γίνομαι, Jn. ν. 4 [RL], 6,9, 14; ποιεῖν τινα ὑγιῆ 
(Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.), to make one whole i.e. restore 
him to health, Jn. v.11,15; vii. 23; ὑγιὴς ἀπό ete. sound 
and thus free from ete. (see ἀπό, I. 3 d.), Mk. v. 34; of 
the members of the body, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5 Rec.; 
Lk. vi. 10 Rec.; metaph. λόγος dy. [A. V. sound speech] 
i. e. teaching which does not deviate from the truth (see 
ὑγιαίνω), Tit. ii. 8 (in the Grk. writ., often equiv. to whole- 
some, fit, wise: μῦθος, Il. 8, 524; λόγος οὐκ ὑγιής, Hat. 1, 
8; see other exx. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and 5. 5. v. II. 
2 and 3]).* 

ὑγρός, -d, τόν, (ὕω to moisten; [but al. fr. a different 
r. meaning ‘to moisten’, fr. which also Lat. umor, 
umidus; οἵ. Vaniéek p. 867; Curtius § 158]), fr. Hom. 
down, damp, moist, wet; opp. to ξηρός (q. v.), full of sap, 
green: ξύλον, Lk. xxiii. 31 (for 107 sappy, in Job viii. 
16).* 

ὑδρία, -as, ἡ, (ὕδωρ), a vessel for holding water; a water- 
jar, water-pot: Jn. ii. 6 sq.; iv. 28. (Arstph., Athen., al.; 
Sept. for 13. [Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 23.]) * 

ὑδροποτέω, -G@; (ὑδροπότης) ; to drink water, [he a 
drinker of water; W. 498 (464)]: 1 Tim. v. 23. (Hat. 
1,71; Xen., Plat., Leian., Athen., al.; Ael. v. h. 2, 38.)* 

ὑδρωπικός, -7, -dv, (ὕδρωψ, the dropsy, i. e. internal 
water), dropsical, suffering from dropsy: Lk. xiv. 2. 
(Hipper., [Aristot.], Polyb. 13, 2, 2; [al.].) * 

ὕδωρ, (ὕω [but ef. Curtius 8. 300]), gen. ὕδατος, τό, fr. 
Hom. down, Hebr. 0°, water: of the water in rivers, 
Mt. iii.16; Rev. xvi. 12; in wells, Jn.iv. 7; in fountains, 
Jas. iii. 12; Rev. viii. 10; xvi. 4; in pools, Jn. v. 3 56. 
[RL}, 7; of the water of the deluge, 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. 
iii. 6 [W. 604 sq. (562)]; of water in any of earth’s re- 
positories, Rev. viii. 10 sq.; xi.6; 6 ἄγγελος τῶν ὑδάτων, 
Rey. xvi. 5; of water as a primary element, out of and 
through which the world that was before the deluge 
arose and was compacted, 2 Pet. iii. 5. plur. τὰ ὕδατα, 
of the waves of the Lake of Galilee, Mt. xiv. 28 sq.; (so 
also the sing. τὸ ὕδωρ in Lk. viii. 25); of the waves of 


634 


er 
vlog 


the sea, Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2, (on both these pass. see φωνή, 
1); πολλὰ ὕδατα, many springs or fountains, Jn. iii. 23 ; 
fig. used of many peoples, Rev. xvii. 1, as the seer him- 
seif explains it in vs. 15, ef. Nah. ii. 8; of a quantity of 
water likened to a river, Rev. xii. 15; of a definite quan- 
tity of water drawn for drinking, Jn. ii. 7; ποτήριον ὕδα- 
tos, Mk. ix. 41; for washing, Mt. xxvii. 24; Lk. vii. 44; 
Jn. xiii. 5; Heb. x. 22 (23); τὸ λουτρὸν τοῦ ὕδατος, of 
baptism, Eph. v. 26 [ef. W. 138 (130)]; κεράμιον ὕδατος, 
Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxi. 10. in opp. to other things, 
whether elements or liquids: opp. to τῷ πνεύματι κ. πυρί 
[ef. B. § 133,19; W. 217 (204), 412 (384)], Mt. iii. 11; 
Lk. iii. 16; to πνεύματι alone, Jn. i. 26, 31,33; Actsi. 5, 
(in all these pass. the water of baptism is intended); to 
τῷ πυρί alone, Mt. xvii. 15; Mk. ix. 22; to τῷ οἴνῳ, Jn. ii. 
9; iv.46; to τῷ αἵματι, Jn. xix. 34; Heb. ix. 19; 1 Jn. 
v.6,8. Allegorically, that which refreshes and keeps 
alive the soul is likened to water, viz. the Spirit and truth 
of God, Jn. iv. 14 sq. (ὕδωρ σοφίας, Sir. xv. 3); on the 
expressions ὕδωρ ζῶν, τὸ ὕδωρ τ. ζωῆς, ζῶσαι πηγαὶ ὑδά- 
τῶν, see (aw, II. ἃ. and ζωή, 2 b. p. 274". 

ὑετός, -o0, 6, (ὕω to rain), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 
DW) and 102, rain: Acts xiv.17; xxviii. 2; Heb. vi. 7; 
Jas. v. 7 (where LT Tr WH om. ὑετόν : on this pass. see 
ὄψιμος and πρώϊμος) ; ibid. 18; Rev. xi. 6.* 

υἱοθεσία, -as, 7, (fr. vids and θέσις, cf. ὁροθεσία, νομο- 
@ecia; in prof. auth. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down we find 
θετὸς vids or θετὸς παῖς, an adopted son), adoption, adop- 
tion as sons (Vulg. adoptio filiorum): [Diod. 1. 31 § 27,5 
(vol. x. 31,13 Dind.)]; Diog. Laért.4,53; Inserr. In 
the N. T. it is used to denote a. that relationship 
which God was pleased to establish between himself and 
the Israelites in preference to all other nations (see vids 
τοῦ θεοῦ, 4 init.): Ro. ix. 4. b. the nature and 
condition of the true disciples of Christ, who by receiv- 
ing the Spirit of God into their souls become the sons 
of God (see vids τοῦ θεοῦ, 4): Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 5; 
Eph. i. 5; it also includes the blessed state looked for 
in the future life after the visible return of Christ from 
heaven; hence ἀπεκδέχεσθαι υἱοθεσίαν, to wait for adop- 
tion, i. e. the consummate condition of the sons of God, 
which will render it evident that they are the sons of 
God, Ro. viii. 23, cf. 19.* 

vids, -οὔ, ὁ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 13 and Chald. 53, 
a son (male offspring) ; 1. prop. a. rarely of 
the young of animals: Mt. xxi. 5 (Ps. xxviii. (xxix.) 1; 
Sir. xxxviii. 25); generally of the offspring of men, and 
in the restricted sense, male issue (one begotten by a father 
and born of a mother): Mt. x. 37; Lk. i. 18; [xiv.5 LT 
Tr WH]; Acts vii. 29; Gal. iv. 22, etc.; ὁ vids τινος, Mt. 
vii. 9; Mk. ix.17; Lk. iti. 2; Jn. i. 42 (43), and very 
often. as in Grk. writ., vids is often to be supplied by 
the reader [W. § 30, 5 p. 593 (551)]: as τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου, 
Mt. iv. 21; ΜΚ. 1.19.  plur. υἱοί twos, Mt. xx. 20 sq.; 
Lk. v.10; Jn. iv. 12: Acte ii. 17; Heb. xi. 21, ete. with 
the addition of an adj., as πρωτότοκος, Mt. i. 25,[R ΑἹ; 
Lk. ii. 7; μονογενής, Lk. vii. 12. οἱ υἱοί, genuine sons, 
are distinguished fr. of νόθοι in Heb. xii. 8. 1. q. τέκνον 


« 
vios 


with ἄρσην added, a man child [B. 80 (70)], Rev. xii. 5; 
of one (actually or to be) regarded as a son, although 
properly not one, Jn. xix. 26; Acts vii. 21; Heb. xi. 24; 
in kindly address, Heb. xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11 (see τέκνον, 
a. B.). b. in a wider sense (like θυγάτηρ, τέκνον), a 
descendant, one of the posterity of any one: τινός, Mt. i. 
20; ὁ vids Δαυΐδ, of the Messiah, Mt. xxii. 42,45; Mk. 
xii. 35,37; Lk. xx. 41,44; of Jesus the Messiah, Mt. ix. 
27; xii. 23; xv. 22; xx. 30 sq.; xxi. 9,15; Mk. x. 47sq.; 
Lk. xviii. 38 sq. plur. υἱοί twos, Mt. xxiii. 31; Heb. vii. 
5; υἱοὶ ᾿Ισραήλ, Israelites [the children of Israel], Mt. 
xxv 9.) Actsixa los) x. 38; 2 Co. 7, 15; Heb: xi. 
21 sq.; Rev. ii. 14; vii. 4; xxi. 12, (see Ἰσραήλ) ; υἱοὶ 
*ABpadp, sons of Abraham, is trop. applied to those who 
by their faith in Christ are akin to Abraham, Gal. iii. 
7. 2. trop. and ace. to the Hebr. mode of speech 
[W. 33 (32)], vids with the gen. of a person is used 
of one who depends on another or is his follower: οἱ υἱοί 
of teachers, i. q. pupils (see τέκνον, b. β. [cf. Iren. haer. 
4, 41, 2 qui enim ab aliquo edoctus est, verbo filius do- 
centis dicitur, et ille eius pater]), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi. 
19; τοῦ πονηροῦ, who in thought and action are prompted 
by the evil one and obey him, Mt. xiii. 38; vids διαβόλου, 
Acts xiii. 10; with the gen. of a thing, one who is 
connected with or belongs to a thing by any kind of 
close relationship [W. § 34, 3 N.2; B. § 132, 10]: υἱοὶ 
τοῦ νυμφῶνος (see νυμφών), Mt.ix.15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk. 
v. 34, (τῆς ἄκρας, the garrison of the citadel, 1 Mace. iv. 
2; in Ossian ‘a son of the hill’ i. 6. ‘a hunter’, ‘a son of 
the sea’ i.e. ‘a sailor’; ef. Jen. Lit. Zeit. for 1836 No. 
58 p. 462sq.); τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου. those whose character 
belongs to this age [is ‘ worldly 1, Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 34; 
τῆς ἀπειθείας, i. 6. ἀπειθεῖς, Eph. ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii. 6 
[here T Tr WH om. L br. the el.], (ἀνομίας, Ps. 1xxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 23: τῆς ὑπερηφανίας, 1 Mace. ii. 47); βροντῆς, 
who resemble thunder, thundering, (see Boavepyés), Mk. 
iii. 17; τοῦ φωτός, instructed in evangelical truth and 
devotedly obedient to it, Lk. xvi.8; Jn. xii. 36; with 
καὶ τῆς ἡμέρας added, 1 Th. v. 5; τῆς ἀναστάσεως, sharers 
in the resurrection, Lk. xx. 36; παρακλήσεως, Acts iv. 
35; one to whom anything belongs: as viol τῶν προφη- 
τῶν κ. τῆς διαθήκης, those to whom the prophetic and 
covenant promises belong, Acts iii. 25; for whom a thing 
is destined, as viol τῆς βασιλείας, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 38; 
τῆς ἀπωλείας, Jn. xvii. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3; one whois worthy 
of a thing, as γεέννης, Mt. xxiii. 15; εἰρήνης, Lk. x. 6, 
(θανάτου, 1 8. xx. 31, 2 5. xii. δ; nid0 13, Sept. ἄξιος 
πληγων, Deut. xxv. 3). [SYN. see τέκνον. 

vios τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, Sept. for DIN 13, Chald. wis 43, 
son of man; it is 1. prop. a periphrasis for ‘man’, 
esp. com. in the poet. bks. of the O. T., and usually car- 
rying with it a suggestion of weakness and mortality: 
Num. xxiii. 19; Job xvi. 21; xxv. 6; Ps. viii. 5; Is. li. 
12; Sir. xvii. 30 (25), ete.; often in Ezekiel, where God 
addresses the prophet by this name, as ii. 1, 3; iii. 1 (ii. 
10), ete.; plur. DINT °33 (because DIN wants the plur.), 
υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Gen. xi. 5; 1 S. xxvi.19: Ps. x. (xi.) 
4: Prov. viii. 31,ete. Sointhe N. T.: Mk. iii. 28; Eph. 


635 


er 
vus 


iii. 5, (Sap. ix. 6); sing. ὅμοιος vim ἀνθρ. [like unto a son 
of man], of Christ in the apocalyptic vision, Rev. i. 13 
[here υἱόν T WH txt.]; xiv. 14 [υἱόν T WH], (after Dan. 
vii. 13). 2. In Dan. vii. 13 sq., cf. 18, 22, 27, the 
appellation son of man (W}8 13) symbolically denotes 
the fifth kingdom, universal and Messianic; and by 
this term its humanity is indicated in contrast with the 
barbarity and ferocity of the four preceding kingdoms 
(the Babylonian, the Median, the Persian, the Macedo- 
nian) typified under the form of beasts (vs. 2 sqq.). 
But in the book of Enoch (written towards the close of 
the 2d cent. before Christ [but ef. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) ; 
Lipsius in Diet. of Chris. Biog. 5. v.; Dilimann in Her- 
zog (ed. 2, vol. xii. p. 350 sq.) ; Schodde, Book of Enoch, 
p- 20 sqq-]) the name ‘son of man’ is employed to desig- 
nate the person of the Messiah: 46, 2sq.; 48, 2; 62, 7. 
9.14; 63,11; 69, 26 sq.; 70,1; 71,17. (The chapters 
in which the name occurs are the work, if not of the 
first author of the book (as Ewald and Dillmann think 
[but see B. D. Am. ed. p. 740°; and Herzog as above p. 
351]), at least of a Jewish writer (cf. Schiirer, Neutest. 
Zeitgesch. § 32 V. 2 p. 626), certainly not (as Hilgen- 
feld, Volkmar, Keim, and others imagine) of a Chris- 
tian interpolator.) In the language of the Jews in Jn. 
xii. 34 the titles Χριστός and vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου are used 
as synonyms. 3. The title ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, the 
Son of Man, is used by Jesus of himself (speaking in 
the third person) in Mt. viii. 20; ix. 6; x. 23; xi. 19; 
xii. 8, 32,40; xiii. 37,41; xvi. 13, 27sq.; xvii. 9, 12, 22; 
xViii. 11 Rec.; xix. 28; xx. 18, 28; xxiv. 27, 30, 37, 39, 
44; xxiv. 30 (twice); xxv. 13 Rec., 31; xxvi. 2, 24, 45, 
64; Mk. ii. 10, 28; viii. 31,38; ix. 9, 12, 31; x. 33,45; 
Xili. 26; xiv. 21, 41,62; Lk. v.24; vi. 5, 22; vii.34; ix. 
22, 26, 44, 56 Rec., 58; xi. 30; xii. 8, 10, 40; xvii. 22, 
24, 26, 30; xviii. 8, 31; xix. 10; xxi. 27, 36; xxii. 22, 
48,69; xxiv. 7; Jn.i. 51 (52); iii. 13 sq.; vi. 27, 53, 62; 
viii. 28; xii. 23, 34; xiii. 31, (once without the article, 
Jn. v. 27), doubtless in order that (by recalling Dan. vii. 
13 sq.— not, as some suppose, Ps. viii. 5) he might thus 
intimate his Messiahship (as is plain from such pass. as 
ὄψεσθε τ. vi. τ. ἀνθρ... . ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν vede- 
λῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62, cf. Dan. 
vii. 13; τὸν vi. τ. avOp. ἐρχόμενον ev τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ, 
Mt. xvi. 28; ὅταν καθίσῃ 6 vi. τ. ἀνθρ. ἐπὶ θρόνου δόξης 
αὐτοῦ, Mt. xix. 28); and also (as appears to be the 
case at least fr. Mk. ii. 28, where 6 vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 
stands in emphatic antithesis to the repeated ὁ ἄνθρωπος 
preceding), that he might designate himself as the head 
of the human race, the man κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν, the one who 
both furnished the pattern of the perfect man and acted 
on behalf of all mankind. Christ seems to have pre- 
ferred this to the other Messianic titles, because by its 
lowliness it was least suited to foster the expectation of 
an earthly Messiah in royal splendor. There are no 
traces of the application of the name to Jesus in the 
apostolic age except in the speech of Stephen, Acts vii. 
56, and that of James, the brother of Jesus, in a frag: 
ment from Hegesippus given in Eus. ἢ. e. 2, 23 (25), 13, 


ce 
vlos 


each being a reminiscence of the words of Jesus in Mt. 
xxvi. 64,(to which may be added, fr. the apostolic fathers, 
Ienat. ad Ephes. 20, 2 ἐν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστῷ τῷ κατὰ σάρκα ἐκ 
γένους Δαυΐδ, τῷ υἱῷ ἀνθρώπου καὶ υἱῷ θεοῦ). This dis- 
use was owing no doubt to the fact that the term did not 
seem to be quite congruous with the divine nature and 
celestial majesty of Christ; hence in Barn. ep. 12,10 we 
read, Ἰησοῦς οὐχ vids ἀνθρώπου (i.e. like Joshua), ἀλλ᾽ 
vids rod θεοῦ [cf. Harnack’s note on the pass.]. On this 
title, see esp. Holtzmann in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. fiir 
wissenschaftl. Theol., 1865, p. 212 sqq.; Keim ii. p. 65 
544. [(Eng. trans. vol. iii. p. 79 sqq.) ; _Zmmer, Theol. ἃ. 
N. T. p. 105 sqq.; Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 88 sq.; and 
other reff. in Meyer on Mt. viii. 20; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. 
Son of Man].* 

vids τοῦ θεοῦ, son of God; 1. ina physical 
sense, in various applications: originating by direct 
creation, not begotten by man,—as the first man 
Adam, Lk. iii. 38; Jesus, begotten of the Holy Ghost 
without the intervention of a human father, Lk. i. 35; 
in a heathen sense, as uttered by the Roman centurion 
of Jesus, a ‘demigod’ or ‘hero’, Mt. xxvii. 54; Mk. xv. 
39. 2.ina metaphysical sense, in various ap- 
plications: plur., of men, who although the issue of hu- 
man parents yet could not come into being without the 
volition of God, the primary author of all things, Heb. 
ii. 10, ef. vss. 11, 13; of men as partaking of immortal life 
after the resurrection, and thus becoming more closely 
related to God, Lk. xx. 36; of angels, as beings superior 
to men, and more closely akin to God, Deut. xxxii. 43 ; 
for ὈΠῸΝ 23 in Sept. of Gen. vi. 2,4; Ps. xxviii. (xxix.) 
1; lxxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 7 (a phrase which in Job i. 6; ii- 
1; xxxviii. 7 is translated ἄγγελοι θεοῦ) ; in the highest 
sense Jesus Christ is called ὁ vids τοῦ θεοῦ as of a nature 
superhuman and closest to God: Ro. i. 4; viii. 3; Gal. 
iv.4; and esp. in the Ep. to the Heb., i. 2 (1), 5, 8; iii. 6; 
iv. 14; v.5,8; vi.6; vii.3, 28; χ. 29. [Cf. B.D. s.v. Son 
of God, and reff. in Am. ed.] 3. ina theocratic 
sense: of kings and magistrates, as vicegerents of God 
the supreme ruler, 2 S. vii. 14; Ps. ii. 7; υἱοὶ ὑψίστου, 
Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) 6; πρωτότοκος (sc. τοῦ θεοῦ). of the 
king of Israel, Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28. In accordance 
with Ps. ii. 7 and 2 S. vii. 14, the Jews called the Mes- 
siah 6 vids rod θεοῦ pre-eminently, as the supreme repre- 
sentative of God, and equipped for his office with the 
fulness of the Holy Spirit, i.e. endued with divine 
power beyond any of the sons of men, Enoch 105, 2. In 
the N. T. it is used of Jesus —in the utterances of the 
devil, Mt. iv. 3,6; Lk. iv. 3,9; 
is addressed by this title by others, Mt. viii. 29; xiv. 33; 
xxvii. 40, 43; Mk. iii. 11; v. 7; Lk. iv. 41; viii. 28; 
xxii. 70; Jn. xix. 7; Acts viii. 37 Rec.; ix. 20; xiii. 33; 
vids τοῦ ὑψίστου. Lk. i. 32; in the language of Jesus 
concerning himself, Mt. xxviii. 19; Jn. ix.35; x. 36, ef. 
Mt. xxi. 37 sq.; Mk. xii. 6; besides, in Rev.ii.18; 6 vi. 
τ. θ., (6) βασιλεὺς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Jn.i.49 (50); ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ 
vi. τ. θ., Mt. xxvi. 63; Jn. xi. 27; ᾿Ιησοῦς Χριστὸς vi. τ. 


[L Tr WH marg. om. τοῦ] 6. Mk. i. 1 [here T WH txt. om. 


in passages where Jesus 


636 


ὙὙμέναιος 


(see WH. App. p. 23}}; ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ vids τοῦ εὐλογητοῦ, 
Mk. xiv. 61; with the added ethical idea of one who 
enjoys intimate intercourse with God: ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ vi. τ. 
θεοῦ ζῶντος, Mt. xvi. 16, and Ree. in Jn. vi. 69. in the 
solemn utterances of God concerning Jesus: ὁ υἱός μου 
ὁ ἀγαπητός, Mt. 111. 17; xvii.5; Mk.i. 11; ix. 7; Lk. iii. 
22; ix. 35 [RGL txt.]; 2 Pet. i. 17, cf. Mt. ii. 15. 4. 
in an ethical sense with very various reference; ‘hose 
whom God esteems as sons, whom he loves, protects and 
benefits above others: so of the Jews, Deut. xiv. 1; Sap. 
xii. 19 sqq.; Xvill. 45 υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες τοῦ θεοῦ, Is. xiii. 
6; Sap. ix. 7; πρωτότοκος τοῦ θεοῦ, Ex. iv. 22; in the 
N. T. of Christians, Ro. ix. 26; Rey. xxi. 7; those whose 
character God, as a loving father, shapes by chastisement, 
Heb. xii. 5-8; those who revere God as their father, the 
pious worshippers of God, Sap. ii. 13 [here παῖς κυρίου], 
18; those who in character and life resemble God (Sir. iv. 
10 υἱοὶ ὑψίστου ; [ef. Epict. dissert. 1, 9,6]): Mt. v. 9, 
45; υἱοὶ ὑψίστου, Lk. vi. 35; υἱοὶ x. θυγατέρες, spoken of 
Christians, 2 Co. vi. 18; those who are governed by the 
Spirit of God, Ro. viii. 14 (ὅσοι πνεύματι θεοῦ ἄγονται, οὗτοι 
υἱοί εἰσι τοῦ θεοῦ), repose the same calm and joyful trust 
in God which children do in their parents, Ro. viii. 14 
sqq-; Gal. iii. 26; iv. 6 sq., and hereafter in the blessed- 
ness and glory of the life eternal will openly wear this dig- 
nity of sons of God, Ro. viii. 19 (ἀποκάλυψις τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ 
θεοῦ), cf. 1 Jn. iii. 2, (see τέκνον, b. y. [and reff.]).  pre- 
eminently of Jesus, as enjoying the supreme love of God, 
united to him in affectionate intimacy, privy to his saving 
counsels, obedient to the Father’s will in all his acts: Mt. 
xi. 27; Lk. x. 22; Jn. iii. 85 sq.; v.19sq. In many 
passages of the writings of John and of Paul, this ethi- 
cal sense so blends with the metaphysical and the theo- 
cratic, that it is often very difficult to decide which of 
these elements is predominant in a particular case: Jn. 
i. 34; 111.17; v. 21-23, 25sq.; vi. 40; viil. 35sq.; xi. 4; 
xiv. 13; xvii. 1; 1Jn.1.3, 7; ii. 22-24; iii. 8, 23; iv. 10, 
14 sq.; v. 5, 9-13, 20; 2 Jn.3,9; Ro.i. 3,9; v.10; viii. 
8, 29, 832: 1 Co. i. 9; xv. 28; 2'Co. 1.19; Gal. i. 16; ii. 
20; Eph. iv. 13; 1 Th. i. 10; ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀγάπης αὐτοῦ 
(i. ὁ. God’s), Col. i. 13; ὁ Χριστὸς 6 vi. τ. 8. Jn. xx. 313 ὁ 
μονογενὴς vi. In. i. 18 [here Tr WH povoy. θεός, L mrg. 
ὁ p. 6. (see povoy. and reff.)]; iii. 18; ὁ vi. τ. 6. ὁ povoy., 
iii. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 9, (see μονογενής). It can hardly be 
doubted that a reverent regard for the transcendent 
difference which separates Christ from all those who by 
his grace are exalted to the dignity of sons of God led 
John always to call Christians τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ, not as 
Paul does υἱοί and τέκνα τοῦ θεοῦ indiscriminately ; the 
like reverence moved Luther to translate the plur. υἱοὶ 
τ. 6. everywhere by Kinder Gottes ; [cf., however, τέκνον, 
b. y. and reff. }. This appellation is not found in 2 
Th., Phil., Philem., the Pastoral Epp., nor in 1 Pet. or in 
the Ep. of James.* 

ὕλη, -ns, 7, a forest, a wood; felled wood, fuel: Jas. iii. 
5. (From Hom. down; Sept.) * 

ὑμεῖς, see σύ. 

Ὑμέναιος [on its accent cf. W. § 6, 1}.; Chandler 


ὑμέπεμος 


8 2581, -ov, 6, (Ὑμήν, -ένος, 6, the god of marriage), Hy- 
menus, a heretic, one of the opponents of the apostle 
Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim.ii.17. [B. Ὁ. 5. v.]* 

ὑμέτερος, -a, -ov, (ὑμεῖς), possess. pron. of the 2d pers. 
plur., your, yours ; a. possessed by you: with sub- 
stantives, Jn. viii.17; 2 Co. viii. 8 [Rec.° ἡμετ.1; Gal. 
vi. 13; neut. τὸ i. substantively, opp. to τὸ ἀλλότριον, 
Lk. xvi. 12 [(WH txt. τὸ ἡμέτ.) ; cf. W. § 61,3 ἃ.1. Ὁ. al- 
lotted to you: dp. σωτηρία, Acts xxvii. 34; τὸ ip. ἔλεος, 
Re xi. 21; ὁ καιρὰς ὁ tyer., the time appointed, oppor- 
aune, for you, Jn. vii. 6; as a predicate, ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν 7 
βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. vi. 20. c. proceeding from you: 
τὸν ὑμέτ. Sc. λόγον, Jn. xv. 20; [1 Co. xvi. 17 LT Tr WH 
txt. ]. ἃ. objectively (see ἐμός, ο. 8.; [W. § 22, 7; B. 
§ 132, 3]): ὑμετέρα (Rec. ἡμετ.) καύχησις, glorying in 
you, 1 Co. xv. 31. [On the use of the word in the N. T. 
cf. B. § 127, 21.]* 

ὑμνέω, -ῶ: impf. ὕμνουν; fut. ὑμνήσω; 1 aor. ptep. 
ὑμνήσας; (ὕμνος); fr. Hes. down; Sept. often for 997, 
ain, Vw, Ὕ91: 1. trans. to sing the praise of, 
sing hymns to: τινά, Acts xvi. 25; Heb. ii. 12. 2. 
intrans. to sing a hymn, to sing: Mt. xxvi. 30; Mk. xiv. 
26, (in both pass. of the singing of the paschal hymns; 
these were Pss. exiii—cxviii. and Ps. exxxvi., which the 
Jews call the ‘great Hallel’, [but see Ginsburg in Kitto 
s. v. Hallel; Edersheim, The Temple ete. p. 191 sq.; 
Buxtorf (ed. Fischer) p. 314 sq.]); Ps. lxiv. (Ixv.) 13 
(14); 1 Mace. xiii. 47.* 

ὕμνος, -ov, 6, in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, @ song in 
praise of gods, heroes, conquerors, [cf. Trench as below, 
p- 297], but in the Scriptures of God; a sacred song, 
hymn: plur., Eph. v. 19; Col. iii. 16. (1 Mace. iv. 33; 
2 Mace. i. 30; x. 7; [Jud. xvi. 13], ete.; of the Psalms 
of David, Joseph. antt. 7, 12, 3; for nbn, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 
4; lxiv. (Ixv.) 2; for Vw, Is. xlii. 10.) * 

[ϑνν. ὕμνος, ψαλμός, φδή: φδή is the generic term; 
ψαλμ. and ὕμν. are specific, the former designating a song 
which took its general character from the O. T. ‘ Psalms’ (al- 
though not restricted tothem, see 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26), the latter 
a song of praise. “ While the leading idea of ψαλμ. is a 
musical accompaniment, and that of Suv. praise to God, 
δή is the general word for a song, whether accompanied or 
unaccompanied, whether of praise or on any other subject. 
Thus it was quite possible for the same song to be at once 
ψαλμός, ὕμνος and gdh” (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 16). The 
words occur together in Col. iii. 16 and Eph. v. 19. See 
Trench, Syn. ὃ lxxviii-] 

ὑπ-άγω ; impf. ὑπῆγον ; 1. trans. to lead under, 
bring under, (Lat. subducere); so in various applications 
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; once in the Scriptures, 
ὑπήγαγε κύριος τὴν θάλασσαν, for yin, he caused to re- 
cede, drove back, the sea, Ex. xiv. 21. 2. in the 
N. T. always intrans. (less freq. so in prof. auth. fr. Hat. 
down), (Lat. se subducere) to withdraw one’s self, to go 
away, depart, [ef. ἄγω, 4; and see B. 204 (177)]: absol., 
Mk. vi. 33; Lk. viii. 42 (where L Tr mre. πορεύεσθαι); 
xvii. 14; Jn. viii. 21; xiv. 5, 28, (Tob. xii. 5); of ἐρχό- 
μενοι καὶ of ὑπάγοντες, coming and going, Mk. vi. 31; 
ὑπάγει x. πωλεῖ, Mt. xiii. 44; ὑπῆγον x. ἐπίστευον, In. xii. 


637 


Ke ta 
ὑπακοὴ 


11; [ἵνα ὑπάγητε x. καρπὸν φέρητε, In. xv. 16]; ἀφίημί 
τινα ὑπάγειν, to permit one to depart freely wherever he 
wishes, Jn. xi. 44; xviii.8; ὕπαγε is used by one in 
dismissing another: Mt. [iv. 10 RT Tr WH]; viii. 13; 
xx. 14; Mk. [ii. 9 Tdf.]; vii. 29; x.52; with εἰς εἰρήνην 
added, Mk. v. 84; ὑπάγετε ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Jas. ii. 16; or in 
sending one somewhere to do something, Lk. x. 3; plur. 
Mt. viii. 32; with oriental circumstantiality (see ἀνί- 
στημι, 11. 1 c.) ὕπαγε is prefixed to the imperatives of 
other verbs: Mt. v. 24; viii. 4; [xviii. 15 GLT Tr WH]; 
xix. 21; xxi. 28; xxvii. 65; xxviii. 10; Mk.i. 44; x. 21; 
xvi. 7; Jn. iv.16; ix.7; Rev. x.8; with καί inserted, 
Mt. xviii. 15 Rec. ; Mk. vi. 38 [T Tr WH om. Tr br. kai]; 
Rey. xvi. 1. Particularly, ὑπάγω is used to denote the 
final departure of one who ceases to be another’s com- 
panion or attendant, Jn. vi. 67; euphemistically, of one 
who departs from life, Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. with 
designations of place: ποῦ (for ποῖ [W. § 54, 7; B. 71 
(62)]), Jn. xii. 35; xiv.5; xvi.5; 1Jn.ii.11; opp. to 
ἔρχεσθαι, to come, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14; ὅπου (for ὅποι [ W. 
and B. u.s.]), Jn. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 33, 36; xiv.4; Rev. 
xiv. 4; ἐκεῖ, Jn. xi.8; πρὸς τὸν πέμψαντά pe, πρὸς τὸν 
πατέρα, πρὸς τὸν θεόν. to depart (from earth) to the father 
(in heaven) is used by Jesus of himself, Jn. vii. 33; xiii. 
3; xvi. 5,10, 16 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. the ο].1, 17; [0]]. 
by εἰς with an ace. of the place, Mt. ix. 6; xx. 4,7; Mk. 
ii.11; xi.2; xiv.13; Lk. xix. 30; Jn. vi. 21 [ef. B. 283 
(248)]; vii. 3; ix.11; xi. 31; εἰς αἰχμαλωσίαν, Rev. xiii. 
10; εἰς ἀπώλειαν, Rev. xvii. 8,11; foll. by εἰς w. an ace. 
of the place and πρός τινα, Mt. xxvi. 18; Mk. v. 19; 
ὑπάγω ἐπί twa, Lk. xii.58; ὑπάγω with an inf. denoting 
the purpose, Jn. xxi. 3; μετά τινος with an ace. of the 
way, Mt. v.41. On the phrase ὕπαγε ὀπίσω pov [ Mt. iv. 
10 GLbr.; xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; Lk. iv. 8 RL in br.], 
see ὀπίσω, 2a. fin.* 

ὑπ-ακοή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. ὑπακούω, 4: v-), obedience, compli- 
ance, submission, (opp. to παρακοή) : 8050]. εἰς ὑπακοήν, 
unto obedience i. 6. to obey, Ro. vi. 10 [ef. W. 612 (509); 
B. § 151, 28d.]; obedience rendered to any one’s coun- 
sels: with a subject. gen., 2 Co. vii. 15; x. 6; Philem. 
21; with a gen. of the object, —of the thing to which 
one submits himself, τῆς πίστεως (see πίστις, 1 Ὁ. a. p. 
513°), Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; τῆς ἀληθείας, 1 Pet. i. 22; of the 
person, τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. x.5; the obedience of one 
who conforms his conduct to God’s commands, absol. 
1 Pet. i. 2; opp. to ἁμαρτία, Ro. vi. 16; τέκνα ὑπακοῆς, i. Θ. 
ὑπήκοοι, 1 Pet. i. 14; with a subjective gen. Ro. xv. 18; 
an obedience shown in observing the requirements of 
Christianity, ὑπ. ὑμῶν, i. 6. contextually, the report con- 
cerning your obedience, Ro. xvi.19; the obedience with 
which Christ followed out the saving purpose of God, 
esp. by his sufferings and death: absol. Heb. v. 8; with 
a gen. of the subject, Ro. v.19. (The word is not 
found in prof. auth.; nor in the Sept., except in 2S. 
xxii. 36 with the sense of favorable hearing; in 2S. 
xxiii. 23 Aq. we find 6 ἐπὶ ὑπακοήν twos, Vulg. qui alicui 
est a secretis, where it bears its primary and proper 
signification of listening; see ὑπακούω.) * 


« , 
UTTAaAKOUW 


ὑπ-ακούω ; impf. ὑπήκουον; 1 aor. ὑπήκουσα; fr. Hom. 
down ; ἰο listen, hearken; 1. prop.: of one who on 
a knock at the door comes to listen who it is, (the duty 
of the porte: ), Acts xii. 13 [where A. V. hearken, R. V. 
answer] (Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Crito p.43 a.; Phaedo 
p- 59e.; Dem., Leian., Plut., al.). 2. to hearken to 
a command, i.e. to obey, be obedient unto, submit to, (so in 
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down): absol. Phil. ii. 12 [ef. W. 594 
(552) ]; ὑπήκουσεν ἐξελθεῖν, [R. V. obeyed to go out i. e.] 
went out obediently, Heb. xi. 8; with a dat. of the pers. 
(in Grk. writ. also w. a gen.), Mt. viii. 27; Mk. i. 27; 
iv. 41; Lk. viii. 25; xvii. 6; Ro. vi.16; Eph. vi. 1,5; 
Col. iii. 20, 22; Heb. ν. 9; 1 Pet. iii.6; with a dat. of 
the thing, τῇ πίστει (see πίστις, 1 b. a. p. 513° near top), 
Acts vi. 7; ὑπηκούσατε eis ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς, 
by attraction for τῷ τύπῳ τῆς διδαχῆς εἰς ὃν κτλ. |W. § 24, 
2b.; οἵ. τύπος, 3], Ro. vi.17; τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, Ro. x. 16; 
2 Th. i. 8; τῷ λόγῳ, 2 Th. iii. 14; τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ (Rec.), ταῖς 
ἐπιθυμίαις (1, Τ Tr WH), i. 6. to allow one’s self to be 
captivated by, governed by, etc., Ro. vi. 12.* 

ὕπανδρος, -ov, (ὑπό and ἀνήρ)», under i. 6. subject to a 
man: γυνή, married, Ro. vii. 2. (Num. v. [20], 29; Sir. 
ix. 9; [ Prov. vi. 24]; xli. 21; Polyb. 10, 26, 3; [Diod. 32, 
10, 4 vol. ν. 50,17 ed. Dind.]; Plut., Artem., Heliod.) * 

ὑπ-αντάω, -@: 1 aor. ὑπήντησα; to go to meet, to meet: 
τινί, Mt. viii. 28; Lk. viii. 27; Jn. xi. 20, 30; xii. 18; also 
LT Tr WH in Mk. v. 2; Jn. iv. 51; and T Tr WH in 
Mt. xxviii. 9; Acts xvi. 16; [and T in Lk. xvii. 12 (so 
WH nore. but without the dat.) ]; ina military reference, 
of a hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 L.TTrWH. (Pind., 
Soph., Eur., Xen., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., al.) * 

ὑπ-άντησις, -ews, 7, (ὑπαντάω), a going to meet: Jn. xii. 
13, and LT Tr WH in Mt. viii. 34 [B. § 146, 3] and xxv. 
1 (cf. Β. 1. 6.10. (Judg. xi. 34; Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 4; 
App. b. ο. 4, 6.) * 

ὕπαρξις, -ews, 7, (ὑπάρχω, 4: ν.), [fr. Aristot. down], 
possessions, goods, wealth, property, (i. q. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα): 
Acts ii. 45; Heb. x. 34, (for wid, 2 Chr. xxxv. 7; Dan. 
xi. 24 Theodot.; for 1212, Ps, Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 48; Jer. 
ix. 10; for yin, Prov. xviii. 11; xix. 14; Polyb., Dion. 
Hal., Diod., Plut., Artem.).* 

ὑπάρχω: impf. ὑπῆρχον; 1. prop. to begin below, 
to make a beginning; univ. to begin; (Hom., Aeschyl., 
Hat., sqq-). 2. to come forth, hence to be there, be 
ready, be at hand, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Pind., sqq.): univ. 
and simply, Acts xix. 40 [cf. B. § 151, 29 note]; xxvii. 
12, 21; ἔν rem, to be found in one, Acts xxviii. 18; with 
a dat. of the pers. ὑπάρχει μοί τι, something is mine, I 
have something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 
8 (where Lehm. παρόντα; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17; 
Job ii. 4, ete.) ; τὰ ὑπάρχοντά τινι, one’s substance, one’s 
property, Lk. viii. 3; xii. 15 Ltxt. T Tr WH; Acts iv. 
32, (Gen. xxxi. 18; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 38,40); also τὰ 
ὑπ. τινος, Mt. xix. 21; xxiv.47; xxv. 14; Lk. xi. 21; 
xii. 15 RG Lmrg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. the 
dat.]; xiv. 33; xvi. 1; xix. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 3; Heb. x. 34, 
(often in Sept. for 1391, Wi39, 0°DD3; Sir. xli.1; Tob. i. 
20, ete.; τὰ ἴδια ὑπάρχοντα, Polyb. 4, 3,1). 3. to be, 


638 


en 
ὑπερ 


with a predicate nom. (as often in Attic) [ef. B. § 144, 
14, 15 a., 18; W. 350 (328)]: as ἄρχων τῆς συναγωγῆς 
ὑπῆρχεν, Lk. viii. 41; add, Lk. ix. 48; Acts vii. 55; 
Vili. 16; xvi. 3; xix. 36; xxi. 20; 1 Co. vii. 26; xii. 22; 
Jas. ii. 15; 2 Pet. iii. 11; the ptep. with a predicate 
nom., being i.e. who is ete., since or although he ete. is: 
Lk. xvi. 14; xxiii. 50; Acts ii. 30; iti. 2; xiv. 8 Rec.; 
xvii. 24; [xxii.3]; Ro.iv. 19; 1 Co. xi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 17; 
xii. 16; Geli. 14; i114; plur., Lk. xi. 13; Acts xvi. 20, 
37; xvii. 29; 2 Pet. ii. 19. ὑπάρχειν foll. by ἐν w. a 
dat. of the thing, to be contained in, Acts x. 12; to be in 
a place, Phil. iii. 20; in some state, Lk. xvi. 23; ἐν τῇ 
ἐξουσίᾳ τινός, to be left in one’s power or disposal, Acts 
v. 4; ἐν ἱματισμῷ ἐνδόξῳ καὶ τρυφῇ, to be gorgeously ap- 
parelled and to live delicately, Lk. vii. 25; ἐν μορφῇ 
θεοῦ ὑπάρχειν, to be in the form of God (see μορφή), Phil. 
ii. 6 [here R.V. mrg. Gr. being originally (?; yet ef. 1 Co. 
xi. 7)]; foll. by ἐν with a dat. plur. of the pers., among, 
Acts iv. 84 RG; 1Co. xi. 18. ὑπ. μακρὰν ἀπό τινος, Acts 
xvii. 27; πρὸς τῆς σωτηρίας, to be conducive to safety, 
Acts xxvii. 34. [Comp.: mpo- ὑυπάρχω.} * 

ὑπ-είκω ; fr. Hom. down; to resist no longer, but to give 
way, yield, (prop. of combatants); metaph. to yield to 
authority and admonition, to submit: Heb. xiii. 17." 

ὑπ-εναντίος, -a, -ov; a. opposite to; set over against: 
ἵπποι πεν. ἀλλήλοις, meeting one another, Hes. scut. 
847. b. trop. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.), opposed 
to, contrary to: τινί, Col. ii. 14 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]; 
ὁ ὑπεν. as subst. (Xen., Polyb., Plut.), an adversary, Heb. 
x. 27, ef. Sept. Is. xxvi. 11, (Sept. for 2.18, 1¥); often 
in the O. T. Apocr.* 

ὑπέρ, [cf. Eng. up, over, ete.], Lat. super, over, a prep- 
osition, which stands before either the gen. or the ace. 
according as it is used to express the idea of state and 
rest or of motion over and beyond a place. 

I. with the Genitive; ef. W. 382 (358) sq. τ᾿ 
prop. of place, i. 6. of position, situation, extension : 
over, above, beyond, across. In this sense it does not 
occur in the N. T.; but there it always, though joined 
to other classes of words, has a tropical signification de- 
rived from its original meaning. 2. i.q. Lat. pro, 
for, i.e. for one’s safety, for one’s advantage or henefit, 
(one who does a thing for another, is conceived of as 
standing or bending ‘over’ the one whom he would shield 
or defend [ef. W. τι. 5.7) : προσεύχομαι ὑπέρ τ. Mt. v.44; 
Lk. vi. 28 [T Tr mre. WH περί (see 6 below) }; Col. i. 3 
L Tr WH mre. (see 6 below); [Jas. v.16 L Trmrg. WH 
txt.], 9; εὔχομαι, Jas. v. 16 [RGT Tr txt. WH mrg.]; 
after δέομαι, Acts viii. 24; and nouns denoting prayer, as 
δέησις, Ro. x. 1; 2 Co. i. 115 ix. 145 Phil. i. 4; Eph. vi. 
19; προσευχή, Acts xii. 5 (here L T Tr WH περί [see 6 
below]); Ro. xv. 30; 1 Tim. ii. 1,2; εἶναι ὑπέρ τ. (opp. 
to card twos), to be for one i. 6. to be on one’s side, to 
favor and further one’s cause, Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50; 
Ro. viii. 31, cf. 2 Co. xiii. 8; τὸ ὑπέρ τ. that which is for 
one’s advantage, Phil. iv. 10 [but see ἀναθάλλω and 
φρονέω, fin.]; ἐντυγχάνω and ὑπερεντυγχάνω, Ro. viii. 26 
RG, 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, ef. ix. 24; λέγω, Acts xxvi. 1 


« 


ὑπέρ 


R WH txt. [see6 below]; μεριμνῶ, 1 Co. xii. 25; ἀγρυπνῶ, 
Heb. xiii. 17; ἀγωνίζομαι ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς, Col. iv. 12, 
cf. Ro. xv. 30; πρεσβεύω, Eph. vi. 20; 2Co.v.20; with 
subst.: ζῆλος, 2 Co. vii. 7; [Col. iv. 13 Rec.]; πόνος, Col. 
iv. 13 [GLT Tr WH]; σπουδή, 2 Co. vii. 125 viii. 16; 
διάκονος, Col. i. 7; to offer offerings for, Acts xxi. 26; 
to enter the heavenly sanctuary for (used of Christ), 
Heb. vi. 20; ἀρχιερέα καθίστασθαι, Heb.v.1; after the 
ideas of suffering, dying, giving up life, ete.: 
Ro. ix. 3; xvi.4; 2Co. xii. 15; after τὴν ψυχὴν τιθέναι 
(ὑπέρ twos), in order to avert ruin, death, etc., from 
one, Jn. x. 11; xiii. 37sq.; of Christ dying to procure 
salvation for his own, Jn. x. 15; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16; 
Christ is said τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ ἐκχύνειν, pass., Mk. xiv. 24 
LT Tr WH [see 6 below]; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the 
pass.]; ἀπολέσθαι, Jn. xviii. 14 Rec.; ἀποθνήσκειν, Jn. xi. 
50 sqq-; [xviii 14LTTrWH]; Acts xxi. 13; Ro. v. 7; 
of Christ undergoing death for man’s salvation, Ro. v. 
6, 8; xiv. 15; 1 Th.v. 10 [here T Tr WH txt. περί (see 
6 below) ; 1 Pet. iii. 181, Τ Tr WH txt.]; γεύεσθαι θανά- 
του, Heb. ii. 9; σταυρωθῆναι, 1 Co. i. 13 (here L txt. Tr 
mrg. WH mrg. περί [see 6 below]); [of God giving up 
his Son, Ro. viii. 32]; παραδιδόναι τινὰ ἑαυτόν, Gal. ii. 20; 
Eph. v. 2, 25; διδόναι ἑαυτόν, Tit. ii. 14; with a predi- 
cate accus. added, ἀντίλυτρον, 1 Tim. ii. 6; τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ 
διδόναι, pass. Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass. ], οἵ. 1 Co. 
xi. 245 τυθῆναι (θυθῆναι, see θύω, init.),1 Co. v- 7; παθεῖν, 
1 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 187 RG WHmrg.; iv. 1 RG]; ἁγιάζειν 
ἑαυτόν, Jn. xvii. 19. Since what is done for one’s ad- 
vantage frequently cannot be done without acting in 
his stead (just as the apostles teach that the death 
of Christ inures to our salvation because it has the force 
of an expiatory sacrifice and was suffered in our stead), 
we easily understand how ὑπέρ, like the Lat. pro and 
our for, comes to signify 3. in the place of, instead 
of, (which is more precisely expressed by ἀντί; hence 
the two prepositions are interchanged by Irenaeus, adv. 
haer. 5, 1, τῷ ἰδίῳ αἵματι λυτρωσαμένου ἡμᾶς τοῦ κυρίου 
καὶ δόντος τὴν ψυχὴν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἡμετέρων ψυχῶν καὶ τὴν 
σάρκα τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀντὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων σαρκῶν) : ἵνα ὑπὲρ 
σοῦ μοι διακονῇ, Philem. 18 ; ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν βαπτίζεσθαι 
(see βαπτίζω, fin.), 1 Οο. xv. 29; [add, Col. 1. 7.1, txt. Tr 
txt. WH txt.]; in expressions concerning the death of 
Christ: εἷς ὑπὲρ πάντων ἀπέθανεν (for the inference is 
drawn dpa oi πάντες ἀπέθανον, i.e. all are reckoned as 
dead), 2 Co. v.14 (15), 15; add, 21; Gal. iii. 13. [On 
this debated sense of ὑπέρ, see Meyer and Van Hengel 
on Ro. v. 6; Ellicott on Gal. and Philem. ll. ee. ; Wieseler 
on Gal. i.4; Trench, Syn. § 1xxxii.; W. 383 (358) note.] 
Since anything whether of an active or passive char- 
acter which is undertaken on behalf of a person or 
thing is undertaken ‘on account of’ that person or 
thing, ὑπέρ is used 4. of the impelling or moving 
cause; on account of, for the sake of, any person or thing: 
ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς, to procure (true) life for man- 
kind, Jn. vi. 51; lo do or suffer anything ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 
θεοῦ, Ἰησοῦ, rod κυρίου: Acts v.41; ix. 16; xv. 26; xxi. 
18; Ko. 1. 5; 3 Jn. 7; πάσχειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Phil. i. 


639 


e , 
ὑπέρ 


29; ὑπὲρ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ θεοῦ, 2 Th. i. 5; στενοχωρίαι 
ὑπὲρ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. xii. 10 [it is better to connect 
ὑπέρ etc. here with εὐδοκῶ] ; ἀποθνήσκειν ὑπὲρ θεοῦ, 
Ignat. ad Rom. 4. examples with a gen. of the thing 
are, Jn. xi. 4; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Co.i.6; xii. 19; ὑπὲρ τῆς 
εὐδοκίας, to satisfy (his) good-pleasure, Phil. ii.13; with 
a gen. of the pers., 2 Co.i.6; Eph. iii.1, 13; Coi.i. 24; 
δοξάζειν, εὐχαριστεῖν ὑπέρ τ. (gen. of the thing), Ro. xv. 
9; 1 Co. x. 30; ὑπὲρ πάντων, for all favors, Eph. v. 20; 
εὐχαριστεῖν ὑπέρ with a gen. of the pers., Ro. i. 8 (here 
LT Tr WH περί [see 6 below]); 2 Co. i. 11; Eph.i. 16; 
ἀγῶνα ἔχειν ὑπέρ with a gen. of the pers. Col. ii. 1 L T Tr 
WH [see 6 below]; ὑπὲρ (τῶν) ἁμαρτιῶν (or ἀγνοημάτων), 
to offer sacrifices, Heb. v. 1, 8 (here L T Tr WH περί [see 
6 below]); vii. 27; ix. 7; x. 12; ἀποθανεῖν, of Christ, 
1 Co. xv. 3; ἑαυτὸν δοῦναι, Gal. i.4 R WH txt. [see 6 be- 
low]. 5. Like the Lat. super (cf. Klotz, HWB. d. 
Lat. Spr. ii. p. 1497”; [Harpers’ Lat. Dict. 5. vy. II. B. 
2 b.]), it freq. refers to the object under consideration, 
concerning, of, as respects, with regard to, ([ef. B. § 147, 
21]; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in W. 383 (358 sq.)) 
so after καυχᾶσθαι, καύχημα, καύχησις, [R. V. on behalf 
of]: 2 Co. v.12; vii. 4,14; viii. 24; ix.2sq.; xii. 5; 
2 Th.i. 4[here LT Tr WH ey (or ev) καυχᾶσθαι]; φυ- 
σιοῦσθαι, 1 Co. iv. 6 [al. refer this to 4 above; see Meyer 
ed. Heinrici (cf. φυσιόω, 2 fin.)]; ἐλπίς, 2 Co. i. 7 (6); 
ἀγνοεῖν, 8 (here LT Tr WHumrg. περί [see 6 below]); 
φρονεῖν, Phil. i. 7 (2 Mace. xiv. 8); ἐρωτᾶν, 2 Th. ii. 1; 
κράζειν, to proclaim concerning, Ro. ix. 27; [παρακαλεῖν, 
1 Th. iii. 2G LT Tr WH (see 6 below)]; after εἰπεῖν, 
Jn. i. 30 LT Tr WH [see 6 below]; (so after verbs of 
saying, writing, ete., 2S. xviii.5; 2 Chr. xxxi. 9; Joel i. 
3; Judith xv. 4; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; 2 Mace. xi. 35); etre 
ὑπὲρ Τίτου, whether inquiry be made about Titus, 2 Co. 
Vili. 23; ὑπὲρ τούτου, concerning this, 2 Co. xii. 8. 6. 
In the N. T. Mss., as in those of prof. auth. also, the 
prepositions ὑπέρ and περί are confounded, [ef. W. 383 
(358) note; § 50,3; B.§ 147,21; Kiihner § 435, I. 2e.; 
Meisterhans § 49, 12; also Wieseler or Ellicott on Gal. as 
below; Meyer on 1 Co. xv. 3, (see περί I. c. 8.) ]; this oc, 
curs in the foll. pass.: Mk. xiv. 24; [Lk. vi. 28]; Jn. ἡ, 
80; Acts xii. 5; xxvi.1; Ro.i.8; 1 Co.i.13; 2Co.i. 8; 
Gal. i. 4; Col. i. 3; ii.1; [1 Th. iii. 2; v.10]; Heb. v. 3. 
[For ὑπὲρ ἐκ περισσοῦ or ὑπὲρ ἐκπερισσοῦ, see ὑπερεκπε- 
ρισσοῦ.] 

II. with the Ασούδβατινε (cf. W. § 49, e.); over, be- 
yond, away over; more than; 1. prop. of the 
place ‘over’ or ‘beyond’ which, as in the Grk. writ. fr. 
Hom. down; not thus used in the N. T., where it is 
always 2. metaph. of the measure or degree 
exceeded [cf. B. § 147, 21]; a. uniy.: εἶναι ὑπέρ 
τινα, to be above i. e. superior to one, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi. 
40; τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα se. ὄν, the name superior 
to every (other) name, Phil. ii. 9; κεφαλὴν ὑπὲρ πάντα 
sc. οὖσαν, the supreme head or lord [A.V. head over all 
things], Eph. i. 22; ὑπὲρ δοῦλο» ὄντα, more than a ser 
vant, Philem. 16; more than [R.V. beyond], ibid. 21; 
ὑπὲρ πάντα, above (i.e. more and greater than) all, Eph 


ὑπεραίρω 


iii. 20°; ὑπὲρ τὴν λαμπρότητα τοῦ ἡλίου, above (i.e. sur- 
passing) the brightness of the sun, Acts xxvi. 13; more 
(to a greater degree) than, φιλεῖν τινα ὑπέρ twa, Mt. 
x. 37 (exx. fr. prof. auth. are given by Fritzsche ad 
loc.) ; beyond, 1Co. iv. 6; 2 Co. xii. 6; ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε, 
beyond what ye are able, beyond your strength, 1 Co. 
x. 13 [ef. W. 590 (549)]; also ὑπὲρ δύναμιν, 2 Co. i. 8; 
opp. to κατὰ δύναμιν (as in Hom. II. 3, 59 κατ᾽ αἶσαν, οὐδ᾽ 
ὑπὲρ αἶσαν, cf. 6.487; 17,321. 327), 2 Co. viii. 3 (where 
LT Tr WH παρὰ δύναμιν). b. with words imply- 
ing comparison: προκόπτειν, Gal. i. 14; of the measure 
beyond which one is reduced, ἡττᾶσθαι, 2 Co. xii. 18 [W. 
§ 49 6.1, (πλεονάζω, 1 Esdr. viii. 72; περισσεύω, 1 Mace. 
iii. 30; ὑπερβάλλω, Sir. xxv. 11); after comparatives 
i. q- than, Lk. xvi. 8 ; Heb. iv. 12, (Judg. xi. 25; 1 K. xix. 
4; Sir. xxx.17); cf. W. $35, 2; [B. $147, 21]. ο. 
ὑπέρ is used adverbially; as, ὑπὲρ ἐγώ [10 ὑπερεγώ (cf. W. 
46 (45)), WH ὕπερ ἐγώ (cf. W. § 14, 2 Note) ], much more 
(or in a much greater degree) I, 2 Co. xi. 23; ef. Kypke 
ad loe.; W.423 (394). [For ὑπὲρ λίαν see ὑπερλίαν. 

111. In ΟΟΜΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝ ὑπέρ denotes 1. over, above, 
beyond: ὑπεράνω, ὑπερέκεινα, ὑπερεκτείνω. 2. excess 
of measure, more than: ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ, ὑπερνικάω. 8. 
aid, for; in defence of: ὑπερεντυγχάνω. Cf. Viger. ed. 
Hermann p. 668; Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 351; [Elli- 
cott on Eph. iii. 20].* 

tmep-alpw: pres. mid. ὑπεραίρομαι ; (ὑπέρ and αἴρω) ; 
to lift or raise up over some thing; mid. to lift one’s self 
up, be exalted, be haughty: 2 Co. xii. 7 [R.V. to be exalted 
overmuch]; ἐπί twa, above one, 2 Th. ii. 4; with a dat. 
incom. τινί, to carry one’s self haughtily to, behave inso- 
lently towards one, 2 Mace. v. 23; (very variously in 
prof. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Plato down).* 

ὑπέρακμος, -ov, (Vulg. superadultus) ; 1. beyond 
the ἀκμή or bloom of life, past prime, (Plat. de rep. 5 p. 
460 6. Gp’ οὖν σοι ξυνδοκεῖ μέτριος χρόνος ἀκμῆς τὰ εἴκοσιν 
ἔτη γυναικί, ἀνδρὶ δὲ τὰ τριάκοντα) : Eustath. 2. 
overripe, plump and ripe, (and so in greater danger of 
defilement): of a virgin [R. V. pas. the flower of her 
age], 1 Co. vii. 36.* 

ὑπερ-άνω, (ὑπέρ and ἄνω), adv., above: τινός [ef. W.§ 54, 
6], above a thing,—of place, Eph. iv. 10; Heb. ix. 5; 
of rank and power, Eph.i.21. (Sept.; [Aristot.], Polyb., 
Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., al., [W. § 50, 7 Note 1; B. 
§ 146, 4].)* 

ὑπερ-αυξάνω ; to increase beyond measure; to grow ex- 
ceedingly: 2 Th. i. 8. [Andoe., Galen, Dio Cass., al.]* 

ὑπερ-βαίνω ; fr. Hom. down; to step over, go beyond ; 
metaph. to transgress: δίκην, νόμους, etc., often fr. Hdt. 
and Pind. down; absol. to overstep the proper limits i. e. 
to transgress, trespass, do wrong, sin: joined with ἅμαρ- 
tavew, Hom. Il. 9,501; Plat. rep. 2 p. 366 a.; spec. of 
one who defrauds another in business, overreaches, 
(Luth. zu weit greifen), with καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν added, 1 Th. 
iv. 6 [but see πρᾶγμα, b.].* 

ὑπερβαλλόντως, (fr. the ptep. of the verb ὑπερβάλλω, 
as ὄντω. fr. dv), above measure: 2 Co. xi. 28. (Job xv. 
11; Xen., Plat., Polyb., al.) * 


640 


ὑπερέχω 


ὑπερ-βάλλω ; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. fo surpass 
in throwing; to throw over or beyond any thing. 2. 
intrans. fo transcend, surpass, exceed, excel; ptep. trep- 
βάλλων, excelling, exceeding; Vulg. [in Eph. i. 19; iii. 
19] supereminens; (Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Isocr., Xen., 
Plat., al.) : 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 14; Eph. i. 19; ii. 7; with 
a gen. of the object surpassed (Aeschyl. Prom. 923; 
Plat. Gorg. p. 475 b.; cf. Matthiae § 358, 2), ἡ ὑπερβάλ- 
λουσα τῆς γνώσεως ἀγάπη Χριστοῦ, the love of Christ which 
passeth knowledge, Eph. iii. 19 [ef. W. 346 (324) note].* 

ὑπερ-βολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ὑπερβάλλω, q. ν.), fr. Hat. [8, 112, 4] 
and Thue. down ; 1. prop. a throwing beyond. 2. 
metaph. superiority, excellence, pre-eminence, [R. V. ex- 
ceeding greatness]: with a gen. of the thing, 2 Co. iv. 7; 
xii. 7; καθ᾽ ὑπερβολήν, beyond measure, exceedingly, pre- 
eminently: Ro. vii. 13; 1 Co. xii. 31 [ef. W. § 54,2b.; B. 
§ 125, 11 fin.]; 2 Co. i. 8; Gal. i. 13, (4 Mace. iii. 18; 
Soph. O. R. 1196; Isocr. p. 84 ἃ. [i. 6. πρὸς Φίλ. 57; Polyb. 
3, 92, 10; Diod. 2,16; 17,47); καθ᾽ ὑπ. eis ὑπερβολήν, 
beyond all measure, [R. V. more and more exceedingly], 
2 Co. iv. 17.* 

ὑπερ-εγώ [Lehm.], i. q. ὑπὲρ ἐγώ (see ὑπέρ, II. 2 ¢.): 2 
Co. xi. 28. Cf. W. 46 (45).* 

ὑπερ-εῖδον ; (see εἴδω) ; fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down; to 
overlook, take no notice of, not attend to: ri, Acts xvii. 
30.* 

ὑπερ-έκεινα, (i. q. ὑπὲρ ἐκεῖνα, like ἐπέκεινα, i. q. én’ ἐκεῖνα 
[W. § 6,1 1.1), beyond: τὰ ὑπ. twos, the regions lying be- 
yond the country of one’s residence, 2 Co. x. 16 [cf. W. 
§ 54,6]. (Byzant. and eccles. writ.; ἐπέκεινα ῥήτορες 
λέγουσι. . . ὑπερέκεινα δὲ μόνον of σύρφακες, Thom. Mag. 
p. 336 [W. 463 (431)].) * 

ὑπερ-εκ-περισσοῦ, [Rec. ὑπὲρ exmep. and in Eph. ὑπὲρ 
ἐκ περ.; see περισσός, 1], adv., (Vulg. [in Eph. iii. 20] 
superabundanter), superabundanily; beyond measure ; 
exceedingly: 1 Th. ν. 18 RG WH txt.; iii. 10; [exceed- 
ing abundantly foll. by ὑπέρ i. q.] far more than, Eph. iii. 
20 [B. § 132, 21]. Not found elsewhere [exe. in Dan. 
iii. 22 Ald., Compl. Cf. B. § 146, 4].* 

ὑπερ-εκ-περισσῶς, adv., beyond measure: 1 Th. v. 13 
LT Tr WH nrg. [R. V. exceeding highly]; see ἐκπερισ- 
σῶς. (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11.) * 

ὑπερ-εκ-τείνω; to extend beyond the prescribed bounds, 
stretch out beyond measure, stretch out overmuch: 2 Co. x. 
14 [cf. W. 474 (442)]. (Anth. 9, 643,6 ace. to the 
emendation of Wm. Dind.; Greg. Naz., Eustath.) * 

ὑπερ-εκ-χύνω (-ύννω, LT Tr WH; see ἐκχέω, init.) ; to 
pour out beyond measure; pass. to overflow, run over, 
(Vulg. supereffluo): Lk. vi. 38; Joel ii. 24 [Alex., ete.]. 
(Not found elsewhere.) * 

ὑπερ-εν-τυγχάνω ; to intercede for one: ὑπέρ τινος [W. 
§ 52, 4,17], Ro. viii. 26; on this pass. see πνεῦμα p. 522°. 
(Eccl. writ.) * 

ὑπερέχω; fr. Hom. dowr; 1. trans. to have or 
hold over one (as τὴν χεῖρα, of a protector, with a gen. 
of the pers. protected; so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 
Joseph. antt. 6, 2, 2). 2. intrans. to stand out, rise 
above, overtop, (so prop. first in Hom. Π. 3, 210); met 


ὑπερηφανία 


aph. a. to be above, be superior in rank, authority, 
power: βασιλεῖ ὡς ὑπερέχοντι, [A. V. as supreme], 1 Pet. 
ii. 13; ἐξουσίαι ὑπερέχουσαι, of magistrates (A. V. higher 
powers), Ro. xiii. 1 (of ὑπερέχοντες, substantively, the 
prominent men, rulers, Polyb. 28, 4,9; 30,4, 17; of 
kings, Sap. vi. 6). b. to excel, to be superior: τινός, 
better than [cf. B. § 132, 22], Phil. 11. 3 (Sir. xxxvi. 7; 
Xen. venat. 1, 11; Plat. Menex. p. 237d.; Dem. p. 689, 
10; Diod. 17, 77); to surpass: τινά or τί [ef. Β. § 130, 
4], Phil. iv. 7; τὸ ὑπερέχον, subst. the excellency, sur- 
passing worth [ef. W. § 34, 2], Phil. iii. 8." 
ὑπερηφανία, -as, 7, (ὑπερήφανος, q. V-), pride, haughti- 
ness, arrogance, the characteristic of one who, with a 
swollen estimate of his own powers or merits, looks 
down on others and even treats them with insolence 
and contempt: Mk. vii.22. (From Xen. and Plat. down; 
Sept. for m3 and yia; often in the O. T. Apocr.) * 
ὑπερήφανος, -ov, (fr. ὑπέρ and φαίνομαι, with the con- 
nective [or Epie extension (ef. Curtius § 392)]y; cf. 
ὑπερη φερής, Bus  λεγής, τανη λεγής; εὐη yerns), fr. Hes. 
down; 1. showing one’s self above others, overtop- 
ping, conspicuous above others, pre-eminent, (Plat., Plut., 
al.). 2. especially in a bad sense, with an over- 
weening estimate of one’s means or merits, despising others 
or even treating them with contempt, haughty, [cf. Westcott, 
Epp. of St. John, p. 64°]: Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2; opp. 
to ταπεινοί, Jas. iv.6; 1 Pet. v. 5, (in these two pass. 
after Prov. iii. 34); with διανοίᾳ καρδίας added, Lk. i. 51. 
(Sept. for 11, 07, 78a, ete.; often in the O. T. Apocr.) 
[See Trench, Syn. § xxix.; Schmidt ch. 176, 8.]* 
ὑπερλίαν (formed like ὑπεράγαν. ὑπέρευ). and written 
separately ὑπὲρ λίαν (so R Tr [ef. W. § 50, 7 Note; B. 
§ 146, 4]), over much; pre-eminently: ot ὑπερλίαν ἀπόστο- 
Ao, the most eminent apostles, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11.* 
ὑπερ-νικάω, -@; (Cyprian supervinco); to be more than 
a conqueror, to gain a surpassing victory: Ro. viii. 37. 
(Leon. tactic. 14, 25 νικᾷ «. μὴ ὑπερνικᾷ ; Socrat. h. 6. 3, 
21 νικᾶν καλόν, ὑπερνικᾶν δὲ ἐπίφθονον. Found in other 
eccl. writ. Euseb. h. 6. 8, 14, 15, uses ὑπερ εκ νικᾶν.) * 
ὑπέρτογκος, -ov, (ὑπέρ, and ὄγκος a swelling), over- 
swollen; metaph. immoderate, extravagant: λαλεῖν, φθέγ- 
γεσθαι, ὑπέρογκα, [A.V. great swelling words] expressive 
of arrogance, Jude 16; 2 Pet. ii. 18; with ἐπὶ τὸν θεόν 
added, Dan. xi. 36 Theodot., cf. Sept. Ex. xviii. 22, 26. 
(Xen., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., Arr.) * 
ὑπεροχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. ὑπέροχος, and this fr. ὑπερέχω. q-V-), 
prop. elevation, pre-eminence, superiority, (prop. in Polyb., 
Plut., al.); metaph. excellence (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., 
Joseph., Plut., al.) : of ἐν ὕπερ. sc. ὄντες, [R. V. those that 
are in high place}, of magistrates, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (ἐν ὑπερ. 
κεῖσθαι, to have great honor and authority, 2 Mace. iii. 
11) ; καθ᾽ ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας, [A.V. with excellency 
of speech or of wisdom i. 6.1 with distinguished elo- 
quence or wisdom,,1 Co. ii. 1.* 
ὑπερ-περισσεύω: 1 aor. ὑπερεπερίσσευσα; Pres. pass. 
ὑπερπερισσεύομαι; (Vulg. superabundo); to abound be- 
yond measure, abound exceedingly: Ro. v. 20; pass. (see 
περισσεύω, 2), to overflow, to enjoy abundantly: with a 


641 


ὑπηρέτης 


dat. of the thing, 2 Co. vii. 4. (Moschion de pass. mulier. 
Ρ. 6, ed. Dewez; Byzant. writ.) * 

ὑπερ-περισσῶς, ady., beyond measure, exceedingly: Mk. 
vii. 87. Scarcely found elsewhere.* 

Uarep-rAcovdtw: 1 aor. ὑπερεπλεόνασα; (Vulg. supere 
abundo) ; to be exceedingly abundant: 1 Tim. i. 14 (τὸν 
ὑπερπλεονάζοντα ἀέρα, Heron. spirit. p. 165, 40; several 
times also in eccl. writ. [ὑπερπλεονάζει absol. overflows, 
Herm. mand. 5, 2,5]; to possess in excess, ἐὰν ὑπερπλεο- 
νάσῃ ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐξαμαρτάνει, Ps. Sal. v. 19).* 

ὑπερτυψόω, -@: 1 aor. ὑπερύψωσα; (Ambros. super- 
exalto); metaph. a. to exalt to the highest rank and 
power, raise to supreme majesty: τινά, Phil. ii. 9; pass. 
Ps. xevi. (xevii.) 9. b. to extol most highly: Song of 
the Three ete. 28 sqq.; Dan. iii. (iv.) 34 Theodot. ο. 
pass. to be lifted up with pride, exalted beyond measure; to 
carry one’s self loftily: Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 35. (Eccl. 
and Byzant. writ.) * 

ὑπερ-φρονέω, -@; (ὑπέρφρων) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt. 
down; to think more highly of one’s self than is proper : 
Ro. xii. 3.* 

ὑπερῷον, -ov, τό, (fr. ὑπερῷος or ὑπερώϊος, ‘upper,’ and 
this fr. ὑπέρ; like matpwios, πατρῷος, fr. πατήρ; [cf. W. 
96 (91)]), in the Grk. writ. (often in Hom.) the highest 
part of the house, the upper rooms or story where the wo- 
men resided; in bibl. Grk. (Sept. for 7°9y), a room in 
the upper part of a house, sometimes built upon the flat 
roof of the house (2 K. xxiii. 12), whither Orientals 
were wont to retire in order to sup, meditate, pray, 
ete.; [R. V. upper chamber; cf. B.D. 5. v. House; McC. 
and 5. 5. ν.1: Acts i. 13; ix. 37, 39; xx. 8, (Joseph. vit. 
30).* 

ὑπ-έχω ; prop. to hold under, to put under, place under- 
neath; as τὴν χεῖρα. Hom. Il. 7,188; Dem., Plat., al.; 
metaph. to sustain, undergo: δίκην, to suffer punishment, 
Jude 7 (very often so in prof. auth. fr. Soph. down; also 
δίκας, κρίσιν, τιμωρίαν, etc.; ζημίαν, Eurip. Ion 1308; 2 
Mace. iv. 48).* 

ὑπήκοος, -ov, (ἀκοή ; See ὑπακούω, 2), fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hat. down, giving ear, obedient: Phil. ii. 8; with dat. 
of the pers. Acts vii. 39; eis πάντα, 2 Co. ii. 9.* 

ὑπηρετέω, τῶ; 1 aor. Umnpérnoa; fr. Hdt. down; to be 
ὑπηρέτης (q- V-), prop. a. to act as rower, to row, 
(Diod., Ael.). b. to minister, render service: τινί, 
Acts xiii. 86; xx. 34; xxiv. 23.* 

ὑπηρέτης, -ov, 6, (tr. ὑπό, and ἐρέτης fr. ἐρέσσω to row), 
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a. prop. an under 
rower, subordinate rower. b. any one who serves with 
his hands; a servant; in the N.T. of the officers and 
attendants of magistrates as —of the officer who exe- 
cutes penalties, Mt. v. 25; of the attendants of a king, 
οἱ ὑπ. οἱ ἐμοί, my servants, retinue, the soldiers I should 
have if I were a king, Jn. xviii. 36; of the servants or 
officers of the Sanhedrin, Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54, 65; 
Jn. vii. 32, 45 sq. ; xviii. 3, 12, 22; xix.6; Acts v. 22, 26; 
joined with δοῦλος (Plat. polit. p. 289 c.), Jn. xviii. 18 ; 
of the attendant of a synagogue, Lk. iv. 20; of any one 


ministering or rendering service, Acts xiii.5. Ὁ. any 


“ 
ὑπνος 


one who aids another in any work; an assistant: of a 
preacher of the gospel [A. V. minister, q. v. in B. D.], 
Acts xxvi. 16; ὑπηρέται λόγου, Lk. i. 2; Χριστοῦ, 1 Co. 
iv. 1. [Syn. see διάκονος, fin. ]* 

ὕπνος, -ov, ὁ, [i. 6. σύπνος, cf. Lat. sopnus, somnus; 
Curtius ὃ 3911, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 713¥, sleep: prop., 
Mt. i. 24; Lk. ix. 32; Jn. xi.13; Acts xx.9; metaph. 
ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι (see ἐγείρω, 1), Ro. xiii. 11.* 

ὑπό (i. 6. Lat. sub [Curtius § 393]), prep., under, in 
prof. auth. used with the gen. dat. and ace., but in the 
N. T. with the gen. and ace. only. [On the use and 
the omission of elision with it before words beginning 
with a vowel, see WH. App. p. 146°; Tdf. Proleg. p. iv. 
(addenda et emendanda).] 

I. with the Genitive (cf. W. 364 (342), 368 sq. (346) ; 
B. § 147, 29), it is used 1. prop. in a local sense, of 
situation or position under something higher, as ὑπὸ 
χθονός, often fr. Hom. down; ὁ ἐπὶ γῆς καὶ ὑπὸ γῆς 
χουσός, Plat. lege. 5 p. 728 a.; hence 2. metaph. 
of the efficient cause, as that under the power of 
which an event is conceived of as being; here the Lat. 
uses a or ab, and the Eng. by; thus a. after pas- 
sive verbs,—with the gen. of a person: Mt. i. 22; ii. 
15sq-; Mk.i.5; 11. 8; [viii. 31 LT Tr WH]; Lk.ii.18; 
[vi. 18 Ree.]; Jn.x. 14 RG; xiv. 21; Acts iv.11; xv. 
4; [xxii. 30 LT Tr WH]; Rom. xv. 15[RGL]; 1 Co. 
1.11; 2Co.i.4,16; Gal.i.11; Eph.ii.11; Phil. iii. 12; 
1 Th.i.4; 2 Th. ii. 13; Heb. iii. 4, and in many other 
pass.; φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς μεγαλοπρεποῦς δόξης, 
when a voice was brought by the majestic glory [οἵ. R. V. 
mrg. ], i.e. came down to him from God, 2 Pet. i.17; after 
γίνομαι, to be done, effected, Lk.ix.?7 RLinbr.; xiii. 17; 
xxiii. 8; Eph. v. 12; γίνεταί τινι ἐπιβουλή, Acts xx. 3; 
ἡ ἐπιτιμία ἡ ὑπὸ τῶν πλειόνων, SC. ἐπιτιμηθεῖσα, 2 Co. ii. 6 ; 
—with the gen. of a thing: Mt. viii. 24; xi. 7; xiv. 24; 
Lk. vii. 24; viii. 14 [see πορεύω, fin.]; Jn. viii. 9; Acts 
xxvii. 41; Ro. iii. 21; xii. 21; 1 Co. x. 29; 2Co. v. 4; Eph. 
v.18; Col. ii. 18; Jas.i.14; ii. 9; iii.4,6; 2 Pet. ii. 7, 
17; Jude 12; Rev. vi. 13. b. with neuter verbs, 
and with active verbs which carry a passive meaning: 
πάσχειν ὑπό twos, Mt. xvii. 12; Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14, 
(Hom. Il. 11, 119; Thue. 1, 77; Xen. symp. 1, 9; Cyr. 
6, 1,36; Hier. 7,8); ἀπολέσθαι, to perish, 1 Co. x. 9 sq. 
(very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 3, 32 on); ὑπομένειν 
tt, Heb. xii. 8 [ef. ἀντιλογία, 2]; λαμβάνειν se. πληγάς, to 
be beaten, 2 Co. xi. 24; after a term purely active, of 
a force by which something is bidden to be done: ἀπο- 
κτεῖναι ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς, by the wild 
beasts, Rey. vi. ὃ [ef. ix. 18 Ree.], (so ὥλεσε θυμὸν ὑφ᾽ 
Ἕκτορος, Hom. Il. 17, 616; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1393; 
[B. 341 (293)]). 

11. with the Accusative (W. § 49, k.) ; 1. of 
motion, in answer to the question ‘whither?’: to come 
ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην, Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii.6; ἐπισυνάγειν, Mt. 
xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; with verbs of putting or plac- 
ing: Mt. v.15; Mk.iv. 21; Lk. xi.33; 1-Co. xv. 25; of 
placing under or subjecting, Lk. vii.8; Ro. vii. 
14; xvi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 27; Gal. iii. 22; iv.3; Eph. i. 22; 


642 


ὑπόδειγμα 


1 Pet. ν. 6; ἔχω τινὰ ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτόν, Mt. viii. 9; Lk. vii. 8; 
γίνεσθαι, born under i.e. subject to, (18]. ἵν. 4; of fall 
ing, trop. Jas. v. 12 [where R* εἰς ὑπόκρισιν. 2. 
of situation, position, tarrying: after κατασκη- 
νοῦν, Mk. iv. 32; κάθημαι, Jas. ii. 3; with the verb εἶναι 
((ο and under) in a local or prop. sense, Jn. i. 48 (49); 
Acts iv. 12; Ro. iii. 13; 1Co.x.1; ἡ ὑπὸ (τὸν) οὐρανόν 
se. χώρα, Lk. xvii. 24; πάσῃ κτίσει τῇ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρ. sc. 
οὔσῃ, Col. i. 23; τὰ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν sc. ὄντα, Acts ii. 5, 
(τὰ ὑπὸ σελήνην, Philo de vit. Moys. ii. 8.12); εἶναι ὑπό 
twa or τι; to be under, i. 6. subject to the power of, any 
person or thing: Ro. iii. 9; vi. 14,15; 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal. 
iii. 10, 25; iv. 2,21; v.18; 1 Tim. vi.1; ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν 
sc. dv, Mt. viii. 9 (where L WH br. read ὑπὸ ἐξ. τασσό- 
μενος [set under authority], so also cod. Sin.); of ὑπὸ 
νόμον 56. ὄντες, 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal. iv. 5, (ὑπὸ ἔκπληξιν εἶναι, 
Protev. Jac. 18). τηρεῖν τινα, Jude 6; φρουρεῖσθαι, Gal. 
iii. 23. 3. of time, like the Lat. sub (ef. sub vespe- 
ram), i. q. about (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ. in Passow p. 
2111"; [L. andS.s.v.C.III.]): ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον, about day- 
break, Acts v. 21. This prep. occurs with the accus. 
nowhere else in the N. T. The apostle John uses it only 
twice with the gen. (xiv. 21; 3 Jn. 12—three times, 
if x. 14 RG is counted [ef. viii. 9]), and once with the 
accus. (i. 48 (49)). 

III. in Composition ὑπό denotes 1. locality, 
under: ὑποκάτω, ὑποπόδιον, ὑπωπιάζω, ὑποδέω; of the 
goal of motion, i. 6. ὑπό τι, as ὑποδέχομαι (under one’s 
roof); ὑπολαμβάνω (to receive by standing under) ; ὑπο- 
βάλλω, ὑποτίθημι ; trop. in expressions of subjection, 
compliance, ete., as ὑπακούω, ὑπακοή, ὑπήκοος, ὑπόδικος, 
ὕπανδρος, ὑπάγω, ὑπολείπω, ὑποχωρέω. 2. small in 
degree, slightly, as ὑποπνέω. 

ὑπο-βάλλω: 2 aor. ὑπέβαλον ; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. 
to throw or put under. 2. to suggest to the mind. 3. 
to instruct privately, instigate, suborn: τινά, Acts vi. 11 
(ὑπεβλήθησαν κατήγοροι, App. bell. civ. 1, 74; Μηνυτής 
τις ὑποβλητός, Joseph. b. j. 5, 10, 4).* 

ὑπογραμμός, -ov, ὁ, (ὑπογράφω), prop. 1. a writ- 
ing-copy, including all the letters of the alphabet, given 
to beginners as an aid in learning to draw them: Clem. 
Alex. strom. 5, 8, 50. Hence 2. an example set 
before one: 1 Pet. ii. 21 (2 Mace. ii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1 
Cor. 16, 17; 33,8; [Philo, fragm. vol. ii. 667 Mang. (vi. 
229 Richter) ], and often in eccl. writ.; ὁ Παῦλος ὑπο- 
μονῆς γενόμενος μέγιστος ὑπογραμμός, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
5, 7 [where see Bp. Lehtft.]).* 

ὑπό-δειγμα, -τος, τό, (ὑποδείκνυμι, q. V.), a word rejected 
by the Atticists, and for which the earlier writ. used 
παράδειγμα; see Lob. ad Phryn. p.12; [Rutherford, New 
Phryn. p.62]. It is used by Xen. τ. eq. 2, 2, and among 
subsequent writ. by Polyb., Philo, Joseph., App., Plut., 
Hdian., al.; cf. Bleek, Brief a. ἃ. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 554; a. 
a sign suggestive of anything, delineation of a thing, repre- 
sentation, figure, copy: joined with σκιά, Heb. viii. 5; 
with a gen. of the thing represented, Heb. ix. 23. b. 
an example: for imitation, διδόναι τινί, Jn. xiii. 15; κατα- 
AeAouréva:, 2 Mace. vi. 28; with a gen. of the thing to 


ig , 
ὑποδείκνυμι 


be imitated, Jas. v. 10 (Sir. xliv. 16; 2 Mace. vi. 31); for 
warning: with a gen. of the thing to be shunned, τῆς ἀπει- 
θείας, Heb. iv. 11; with a gen. of the pers. to be warned, 
2 Pet. ii. 6 (τοὺς “Popaious ... εἰς ὑπόδειγμα τῶν ἄλλων 
ἐθνῶν καταφλέξειν τὴν ἱερὰν πόλιν, Joseph. b. j. 2, 16, 4).* 

ὑπο-δείκνυμι : fut. ὑποδείξω; 1 aor. ὑπέδειξα; fr. Hat. 
and Thue. down; Sept. several times for 17377 ; ale 
prop. to show by placing under (i.e. before) the eyes: 
ὑπέδειξεν αὐτοῖς τὸν πλοῦτον αὐτοῦ, Esth. v. 11; add, Sir. 
xlix. 8; [al. give ὑπό in this compound the force of 
‘privily’; but ef. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 126]. 2. to 
show by words and arguments, i.e. to teach (for ΤΠ ΤΊ, 2 
Chr. xv. 3) [A.V. freq. to warn]: τινί, foll. by an inf. of 
the thing, Mt. iii. 7; Lk. iii. 7; to teach by the use of a 
figure, revi, foll. by indir. disc., Lk. vi. 47; xii. 5; to show 
or teach by one’s example, foll. by ὅτι, Acts xx. 35; to 
show i.e. make known (future things), foll. by indir. 
disc. Acts ix. 16.* 

ὑπο-δέχομαι (see ὑπό, III. 1): 1 aor. imedeEdunv; pf. 
ὑποδέδεγμαι; fr. Hom. down; to receive as a guest: τινά, 
Lk. xix. 6; Acts xvii. 7; Jas. ii. 25; εἰς τὸν οἶκον, Lk. x. 
38. [Cf. δέχομαι, fin.]* 

ὑποδέω: 1 aor. ὑπέδησα ; 1 aor. mid. ὑπεδησάμην ; pe. 
pass. or mid. ptcp. ὑποδεδημένος ; fr. Hdt. down (in 
Hom. with tmesis); 10 under-bind; mostly in the mid. 
to bind under one’s self, bind on; [ptep. shod]; with an 
ace. of the thing: σανδάλια, Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii. 8, (ὑπο- 
δήματα, Xen. mem. 1,6, 6; Plat. Gorg. p.490e.); with 
an acc. of the member of the body: τοὺς πόδας with ἐν 
ἑτοιμασίᾳ added, with readiness [see ἑτοιμασία, 2], Eph. 
Vi. 15 (πόδα σανδάλῳ, σανδαλίοις, Leian. quom. hist. sit 
conscrib. 22; Ael. ν. ἢ. 1,18). [Cf. B. § 135, 2.]* 

ὑπόδημα, -τος, τό, (ὑποδέω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 
5y3, what is bound under, a sandal, a sole fastened to 
the foot with thongs: Mt. iii. 11; x. 10; Mk. i. 7; Lk. 
iii. 16; x.4; xv. 22; xxii. 35; Jn.i.27; with τῶν ποδῶν 
added, Acts vii. 33; xiii. 25, (ποδός, Plat. Ale. 1 p. 128 a.). 
[See σανδάλιον. " 

ὑπόδικος, -ον, i. q. ὑπὸ δίκην ὦν, under judgment, one who 
has lost his suit; with a dat. of the pers. debtor to one, 
owing satisfaction to: τῷ θεῷ, i. 6. liable to punishment 
from God, Ro. iii. 19 [see Morison, Critical Exposition 
of Romans Third, p. 147 sq.]. (Aeschyl., Plat., Andoc., 
Lys., Isae., Dem., al.) * 

ὑπο-ζύγιος, -a, -ov, i. 4. ὑπὸ ζυγὸν dv, under the yoke; 
Neut. τὸ ὑπ. as subst. a beast of burden (so fr. Theogn. 
and Hdt. down); in bibl. Grk. (since the ass was the 
common animal used by the Orientals on journeys and 
for carrying burdens [cf. B. D. s. v. Ass, 17) spec. an ass: 
Mt. xxi. 5 (Zech. ix. 9) ; 2 Pet. ii. 16; Sept. for von, 
an ass.* 

ὑποζώννυμι; fr. Hdt. down; to under-gird: τὸ πλοῖον, 
to bind a ship together laterally with ὑποζώματα (Plat. 
de rep. 10 p. 616 c.), i. e. with girths or cables, to enable 
it to survive the force of waves and tempest, Acts xxvii. 
17 (where see Overbeck [or Hackett ; esp. Smith, Voyage 
and Shipwreck, etc., pp. 107 sq. 204 sqq. (cf. βοήθεια) }). 
(Polyb. 27, 3, 3.)* 


643 


ὑπολήνιον 


ὑπο-κάτω, under, underneath: τινός [W. § 54,6; B. 
§ 146, 1], Mt. xxii.44 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 11; vii. 28; 
fii. 36 WH]; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. i. 50 (51); Heb. ii. 8; 
Rev. v. 3, 13 [Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; vi. 9; xii.1. (Sept.; 
Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) [Cf. W. § 50, 
7.N.1; B. § 146, 4.]* 

ὑπο-κρίνομαι ; 1. to take up another’s statements 
in reference to what one has decided for one’s self (mid. 
κρίνομαι), i.e. to reply, answer, (Hom., Hadt., al.). 2. 
to make answer (speak) on the stage, i. e. to personate 
any one, play a part, (often so fr. Dem. down). Hence 
3. to simulate, feign, pretend, (fr. Dem. and Polyb. 
down): foll. by an acc. with the inf. Lk. xx. 20. (2 
Mace. vi. 21, 24; 4 Mace, vi. 15; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 15; 
XXXVi. (xxxiii.) 2.) [Comp.: συντυποκρίνομαι.] ὃ 

ὑπό-κρισις, -ews, 1, (ὑποκρίνομαι, q. V.); 1. an 
answering; an answer (Hadt.). 2. the acting of α 
stage-player (Aristot., Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian., 
Artem., al.). 3. dissimulation, hypocrisy : Mt. xxiii. 
28; Mk. xii. 15; Lk. xii. 1; Gal. ii. 13; 1 Tim. iv. 2; 
[Jas. v. 12 Rec."]; 1 Pet. ii. 1 [ef. B. § 123, 2], (2 Mace. 
vi. 25; Polyb. 35, 2,13; Leian. am. 3; Aesop. fab. 106 
(284); [Philo, quis rer. div. haeres § 8; de Josepho 
g14]).* 

ὑπο-κριτής, -0v, 6, (ὑποκρίνομαι, q. V.) ; 1. one who 
answers, an interpreter, (Plat., Leian.). 2. an actor, 
stage-player, (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Ael., Hdian.). 3. 
in bibl. Grk. a dissembler, pretender, hypocrite: Mt. vi. 2, 
5,16; vii.5; xv.7; xvi. 3 Rec.; xxii. 18; xxiii. 13 Rec., 
14 (13 Tdf.), 15, 23, 25, 27, 29; xxiv. 51; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. 
vi. 42; xi. 44 R Linbr.; xii.56; xiii.15. (Job xxxiv. 
30; xxxvi. 13, for 41M profane, impious.) [Mention is 
made of Heimsoeth, De voce ὑποκριτής comment. (Bonnae, 
1874, 4to.).]* 

ὑπολαμβάνω; 2 aor. ὑπέλαβον; 1. to take up 
(lit. under [cf. ὑπό, III. 1]) in order to raise, to bear on 
high, (Hdt. 1, 24); to take up and carry away (ὥσπερ νῆα 
ἄνεμοι ὑπολαβόντες, Stob. serm. 6 p. 79, 17) : τινά, Acts 1. 
9 (see ὀφθαλμός, mid.). 2. to receive hospitably, wel- 
come: τινά, ὃ Jn. 8 LT Tr WH (Xen. an. 1, 1, 7). 9: 
to take up i. 6. follow in speech, in order either to reply 
to or controvert or supplement what another has said 
(very often so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): ὑπολαβὼν 
εἶπεν, Lk. x. 80 (for 73), Job ii. 4; iv. 1; vi. 1; ix. 1; 
xi. 1; xii. 1, etc.). 4. to take up in the mind, i.e. 
to assume, suppose: Acts ii. 15; foll. by ὅτι (sc. πλεῖον 
ἀγαπήσει), Lk. vii. 43, (Job xxv. 3; Tob. vi. 18; Sap. 
xvii. 2; 3 Mace. iii.8; 4 Mace. ν. 17 (18) etc., and often 
in prof. auth. fr. Xen. and Plat. down).* 

ὑπό-λειμμα [-λιμμα WH (see their App. p. 154; ef. 1, 
t) ], ros, τό, @ remnant (see κατάλειμμα) : Ro. ix. 27 LT 
TrWH. (Sept.; Aristot., Theophr., Plut., Galen.) * 

ὑπο-λείπω: 1 aor. pass. ὑπελείφθην ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for Nw and nin; to leave behind [see ὑπό, 
1Π. 1]; pass. to be left behind, left remaining, Sept. for 
Nw) and 3j3: used of a survivor, Ro. xi. 3.* 

ὑπολήνιον, -ov, Td, (1. 6. τὸ ὑπὸ THY ληνόν, cf. τὸ imo 
ζύγιον), a vessel placed under a press (and in the Orient 


« , 
ὑπολιμπάνω 


usually sunk in the earth) to receive the expressed juice 
of the grapes, a pit: [ὥρυξεν ὑπολήνιον, R. V. he digged a 
pit for the winepress], Mk. xii. 1; see ληνός [and B. D. 
8. v. Winepress]. (Demiopr. ap. Poll. 10 (29), 130; 
Geop.; Sept. for 30", Is. xvi. 10; Joel iii. 13 (iv. 18); 
Hagg. ii. 16; Zech. xiv. 10 Alex.) * 

fal ee (λιμπάνω, less common form of the verb 
λείπω) ; to leave, leave behind: 1 Pet. ii. 21. (Themist. ; 
eccl. and Byzant. writ.; to fail, Dion. Hal. 1, 23.)* 

ὑπο-μένω ; impf. ὑπέμενον ; fut. 2 pers. plur. bropeveire ; 
1 aor. ὑπέμεινα; pf. ptep. ὑπομεμενηκώς ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for map, Tan, OM; 1. to remain i.e. tarry 
behind: foll. by év with a dat. of the place, Lk. ii. 43; 
ἐκεῖ, Acts xvii. 14. 2. to remain i.e. abide, not re- 
cede or flee; trop. a. to persevere: absol. and em- 
phat., under misfortunes and trials to hold fast to one’s 
faith in Christ [R. V. commonly endure], Mt. x. 22; 
xxiv. 13; Mk. xiii. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 12 [cf. vs. 10 in b.]; 
Jas. v. 11; with τῇ θλίψει added, when trial assails 
[A. V. in tribulation (i. e. dat. of cireumstances or condi- 
tion)], (cf. Kiihner § 426, 3 [Jelf § 603, 1]), Ro. xii. 12 
(quite different is ὑπομένειν τῷ κυρίῳ, ΤῊ 2 Onin, Lam. 

iii. 21,24; Mic. vii.7; 2K. vi. 33; my 727, Ps. xxxii. 
(xxxiii.) 20, to esse faithfully to [A. V. wait for] the 
Lord, where the dat. depends on the verb contrary to 
Grk. usage [ef. W. § 52, 16]). b. to endure, bear 
bravely and calmly: absol., ill-treatment, 1 Pet. ii. 20; 
εἰς παιδείαν, i. 6. εἰς τὸ παιδεύεσθαι, [ for or unto chasten- 
ing |, Heb. xii. 7 acc. to the reading of L T Tr WH which 
is defended at length by Delitzsch ad loc. [and adopted 
by Riehm (Lehrbegriff u. s. w. p. 758 note), Alford, Moul- 
ton, al.], but successfully overthrown [?] by Fritzsche 
(De conformatione N. Ti. critica quam Lehm. edidit, 
p- 24sqq-) [and rejected by the majority of commenta- 
tors (Bleek, Liinemann, Kurtz, al.)]. with an ace. of 
the thing, 1 Co. xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. x. 32; xii. 
284. 7 RG; Jas. i. 12.” 

tro-pipvacKko; fut. ὑπομνήσω; 1 aor. inf. ὑπομνῆσαι; 1 
aor. pass. ὑπεμνήσθην; fr. Hom. down; [ef. our ‘sug- 
gest’, see ἀνάμνησις]; 1. actively, to cause one to 
remember, bring to remembrance, recall to mind: τί (to 
another), 2 Tim. ii. 14; τινά τι, Jn. xiv. 26 (Thue. 7, 
64; Xen. Hier. 1,3; Plat., Isocr., Dem.) ; with implied 
censure, 3 Jn. 10; τινὰ περί twos, to put one in remem- 
brance, admonish, of something: 2 Pet. i. 12 (Plat. Phaedr. 
Ρ. 275 ἃ.) ; τινά, foll. by ὅτι, Jude 5 (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 8; 
Plat. de rep. 5 p. 452c.; Ael.v.h. 4,17); τινά, foll. by 
an inf. (indicating what must be done), Tit. iii. 1 (Xen. 
hipparch. 8, 10). 2. passively, to be reminded, to 
remember : τινός, Lk. xxii. 61.* 

ὑπό-μνησις, -ews, 7, (ὑπομιμνήσκω), fr. Eur., Thuc., 
Plat. down; a. transitively, (Vulg. commonitio), 
a reminding (2 Mace. vi. 17): ἐν ὑπομνήσει, by putting 
you in remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1 [W. § 61. 3 
b.]. b. intrans. remembrance: with a gen. of the 
obj. 2 Tim. i. δ [(R. V. having been reminded of etc.) ; 
al. adhere to the trans. sense (see Ellicott, Huther, 
Holtzmann ad loc.). Syn. se2 ἀνάμνησις, fin.] * 


644 


2 
ὑπόστασις 


ὑπο-μονή, -7s, ἡ, (ὑπομένω) ; 1. steadfastness, con- 
stancy, endurance, (Vulg. in 1 Th. i. 3 sustinentia, in 
Jas. v. 11 sufferentia); in the N. T. the characteristic 
of a man who is unswerved from his deliberate pur- 
pose and his loyalty to faith and piety by even the 
greatest trials and sufferings: Lk. viii. 15; xxi. 19; 
Ro. v. 3 sq.; xv. 4 βα.; 2 Co. vi. 4; xii. 12; Col. i. 11; 
2 Th.i.4; 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. iii.10; Tit. ii. 2; Heb. 
x. 36; Jas. i. 3sq.; v.11; 2 Pet.i.6; Rev. ii. 2 sq. 19; 
xiii. 10; xiv. 12, (ef. 4 Mace. i. 11; ix. 8, 30; xv. 30 (27); 
xvii. 4, 12, 23); with agen. of the thing persevered 
in [W. § 30, 1 fin.]: τοῦ ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, Ro. ii. 7; τῆς ἐλπί- 
δος, 1 Th. i. 3 [ef. B. 155 (136)]; δὲ ὑπομονῆς, [with pa- 
tience (cf. W. § 51, 1b.) 1. 6.1 patiently and steadfastly, 
Ro. viii. 25; Heb. xii. 1. 2. a patient, steadfast 
waiting for; [8]. question this sense in the New Test., 
and render the gen. by ‘characterizing’, ‘in respect to’, 
ete.]: Χριστοῦ (gen. of the obj.), the return of Christ 
from heaven, 2 Th. iii.5; Rev. i. 9 (where LT Tr WH 
ἐν ᾿Ιησοῦ [which is in Jesus]); iii. 10, (cf. Ps. xxxviii. 
(xxxix.) 8; for p72, expectation, hope, 2 Esdr. x. 2; 
Jer. xiv. 8; xvii. 13; for 7 MPA, hope, Ps. [ix. 19]; Lxi. 
(Ixii.) 6; Ιχχ. Gee ) 5; [Job xiv.19]; for nonin, Prov. 
x. 28 Symm.; ὑπομένειν τινά, Xen. an. 4, 1, 21; App. b. 
civ. 5, 81). 3. a patient enduring, sustaining : τῶν 
παθημάτων, 2 Co. i. 6 (λύπης, Plat. defin. p. 412 ¢.; θανά- 
του, Plut. Pelop. 1). [Sy¥N. see μακροθυμία, fin.]* 

ὑπο-νοέω, -@; impf. ὑπενόουν; fr. Hdt. down; to sup- 
pose, surmise: Acts xxv. 18; foll. by an ace. with the 
inf., Acts xiii. 25 [(cef. ris, 4)]; xxvii. 27.* 

ὑπόνοια, -as, 7, (ὑπονοέω), fr. Thuc. down, a surmising: 
1 Tim. vi. 4.* 

ὑπο-πιαάζω, a later form of ὑποπιέζω, to keep down, keep 
in subjection: 1 Co. ix. 27 Tdf. ed. 7 after the faulty 
reading of some Mss. for ὑπωπιάζω, 4. ν- Cf. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 461; [Soph. Lex. s. v.; W.§ 5,1d.5; see 
ἀμφιάζω." 

ὑπο-πλέω: 1 aor. ὑπέπλευσα;; (Vulg. subnavigo); to 
sail under, i. 6. to sail close by, pass to the leeward of: 
with the acc. of the place, Acts xxvii. 4,7. (Dio Cass., 
Dio Chr., al.) * 

ὑπο-πνέω: 1 aor. ὑπέπνευσα; a. to blow under- 
neath (Aristot.). b. to blow sofily [see ὑπό, LI. 2]: 
Acts xxvii. 13.* 

ὑποπόδιον, -ov, τό, (ὑπό and πούς), a footstool (Lat. 
suppedaneum): Mt. v. 35; Acts vii. 49 (fr. Is. Ixvi. 1) ; 
Jas. ii. 3; τιθέναι τινὰ ὕποπ. τῶν ποδῶν Twos, to make 
one the footstool of one’s feet, i.e. to subject, reduce un- 
der one’s power, (a metaph. taken from the practice 
of conquerors who placed their feet on the necks of their 
conquered enemies) : Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36 
[here WH ὑποκάτω τῶν m.]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts 11. 35; 
Heb. i. 13; x. 13, after Ps. cix. (ex.) 2. (Leian., Athen., 
al.; Sept. for 039; [cf. W. 26].)* 

ὑπόστασις, -ews, ἡ, (ὑφίστημι), ἃ word very com. in 
Grk. auth., esp. fr. Aristot. on, in widely different 
senses, of which only those will be noticed which serve 
to illustrate N. T. usage; 1. a setting or placing 


ὑποστέλλω 


under; thing put under, substructure, foundation: Ps. 


lxviii. (Ixix.) 3; τοῦ οἴκου, Ezek. xliii. 11; τοῦ τάφου, 


Diod. 1, 66. 2. that which has foundation, is firm; 
hence, a. that which has actual existence; a sub- 
stance, real being: τῶν ἐν ἀέρι φαντασμάτων τὰ μέν ἐστι 
κατ᾽ ἔμφασιν, τὰ δὲ καθ᾽ ὑπόστασιν, Aristot. de mundo, 4, 
19 p. 395%, 80; φαντασίαν μὲν ἔχειν πλούτου, ὑπόστασιν 
δὲ μή, Artem. oneir. 8, 14; (ἡ αὐγὴ) ὑπόστασιν ἰδίαν οὐκ 
ἔχει; γεννᾶται δὲ ἐκ φλογός, Philo de incorruptibil. mundi 
§ 18; similarly in other writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s.v. 5; L. 
and S. s. v. III. 2]. b. the substantial quality, na- 
ture, of any pers. or thing: τοῦ θεοῦ [R. V. substance], 
Heb. i. 3 (Sap. xvi. 21; te... τίνος ὑποστάσεως ἢ Tivos 
εἴδους τυγχάνουσιν οὗς ἐρεῖτε καὶ νομίζετε θεούς, Epist. ad 
Diogn. 2,1; [οἵ. Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.]). c. steadi- 
ness of mind, firmness, courage, resolution, (οἱ δὲ ἱΡόδιοι 
θεωροῦντες τὴν τῶν Βυζαντίνων ὑπόστασιν, Polyb. 4, 50, 
10; οὐχ οὕτω τὴν δύναμιν, ὡς τὴν ὑπόστασιν αὐτοῦ καὶ τόλ- 
μαν καταπεπληγμένων τῶν ἐναντίων, id. 6, 55, 2; add, 
Diod. 16,32 54. ; Joseph. antt. 18, 1,6); confidence, firm 
trust, assurance: 2 Co. ix.4; xi. 17; Heb. iii. 14; xi. 1, 
(for πῆρ, Ruth i. 12; Ezek. xix. 5; for nonin, Ps. 
XXxvili. (xxxix.) 8). Cf. Bleek, Br. and. Hebr. ii. 1 pp. 
60 sqq. 462 sqq.; Schlatter, Glaube im N. T. p. 581.* 

ὑπο-στέλλω : impf. ὑπέστελλον ; 1 aor. mid. ὑπεστειλά- 
μην; 1. Act. to draw down, let down, lower : ἱστίον, 
Pind. Isthm. 2, 59; to withdraw, [draw back]: ἐμαυτόν, 
of a timid person, Gal. ii. 12 ([cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; 
often so in Polyb.). 2. Mid. to withdraw one’s self, 
i. 6. to be timid, to cower, shrink : of those who from timid- 
ity hesitate to avow what they believe, Heb. x. 38 (fr. 
Habak. ii. 4 [ef. W. 523 (487)]); to be unwilling to utter 
from fear, to shrink from declaring, to conceal, dissemble : 
foll. by rod with the inf. [W. 325 (305); B. 270 (232)], 
Acts xx. 27; οὐδέν, ibid. 20, (often so in Dem.; ef. 
Reiske, Index graecit. Dem. p. 774 sq. ; Joseph. vit. § 54; 
δ 1 0; ΠΣ 

ὑπο-στολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ὑποστέλλω, 4. ν.), prop. α withdraw- 
ing (Vulg. subtractio), [in a good sense, Plut. anim. an 
corp. aff. sint pej. § 3 sub fin.]; the timidity of one stealthi- 
ly retreating: οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑποστολῆς (see εἰμί, IV. 1 g.), 
we have no part in shrinking back ete., we are free from 
the cowardice of ete. [R.V. we are not of them that shrink 
back etc.], Heb. x. 39 (λάθρα τὰ πολλὰ καὶ μεθ᾽ ὑποστολῆς 
ἐκακούργησεν, Joseph. b. j. 2, 14, 2; ὑποστολὴν ποιοῦνται, 
antt. 16, 4, 3).* 

ὑπο-στρέφω ; impf. ὑπέστρεφον ; fut. ὑποστρέψω; 1 aor. 
ὑπέστρεψα; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 3); 5 
trans. to turn back, to turn about: as ἵππους, Hom. Il. 5, 
581. 2. intrans. to turn back i.e. to return: absol., 
Mk. xiv. 40 [here L WH πάλιν ἐλθών Tr ἐλθών] ; Lk. ii. 
20 (here Rec. ἐπιστρέφ.), 43; viii. 37,40; ix.10; x. ΤΩ: 
xvil. 15; xix. 12: xxiii. 48,56; Acts viii. 28; foll. by an 
inf. of purpose, Lk. xvii. 18; foll. by διά with a gen. of 
place, Acts xx. 3; εἰς with an ace. of place, Lk. i. 56; ii. 
89 [here T Tr mrg. WH ἐπιστρέφ.], 45; iv. 14; vii. 10; 
Vili. 39; xi. 24; xxiv. 33,52; Acts i. 12; viii. 253 xiii. 
18; xiv. 21; xxi. 6; xxii. 17; xxiii. 32; Gal. 1. 17; εἰς 


645 


ὑποφέρω 


διαφθοράν, Acts xiii. 34 ; ἀπὸ with a gen. of place, Lk. 
iv. 1; xxiv. 9 [WH br. ἀπό εἴ}. )]; ἀπό with a gen. of the 
business, Heb. vii. 1; ἐκ with ὦ gen. of place, Acts 
xii. 25; ἐκ τῆς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς, of those who after embrac- 
ing Christianity apostatize, 2 Pet. ii. 21 T Tr WH, but 
Lehm. (against the authorities) εἰς ta ὀπίσω ἀπὸ τῆς 
etc.* 

ὑπο-στρώννυμι and ὑποστρωννύω (later forms, found in 
Plut., Themist., Athen., al., for the earlier ὑποστορέννυμε 
and ὑποστόρνυμι) : impf. 3 pers. plur. ὑπεστρώννυον ; to 
strew, spread under: τί, Lk. xix. 36 (Is. lviii. 5).* 

ὑποταγή, -ῆς, ἡ, 1. the act of subjecting (Dion. 
Hal.). 2. obedience, subjection: 2 Co. ix. 13 (on 
which see ὁμολογία, Ὁ.) ; Gal. ii. 5; 1 Tim. ii. 11; iii. 4.5 

ὑποτάσσω: 1 aor. ὑπέταξα; Pass., pf. ὑποτέταγμαι; 2 
aor. ὑπετάγην ; 2 fut. ὑποταγήσομαι ; pres. mid. ὑποτάσ- 
copa ; to arrange under, to subordinate ; to subject, put in 
subjection: τινί te or τινα, 1 Co. xv. 27°; Heb. 11. δ; Phil 
iii. 21; pass., Ro. viii. 20 [see διά, B. 11. 1 b.]; 1 Co. 
xv. 27° sq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22; τινὰ or τὶ ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας 
τινός, 1 Co. xv. 27°; Eph. i. 22; ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν τινος, 
Heb. ii. 8; mid. to subject one’s self, to obey; to submit 
to one’s control; to yield to one’s admonition or advice: 
absol., Ro. xiii. 5; 1 Co. xiv. 34 [ef. B. § 151, 30]; τινί, 
10 αἱ 51/5: x. 17. 20} Ro: vill. {ν -xitt. ἢ; 1 Co, xiv. 32) 
xvi. 16; Eph. v. 21 sq. [but in 22G T WH txt. om. Tr 
mrg. br. vrordoa.], 24; Col. iii. 18; Tit. ii. δ, 9; iii. 1; 
1 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 1,5; v. 5; 2 aor. pass. with mid. force, 
to obey [R. V. subject one’s self, B. 52 (46)], Ro. x. 3; 
impv. obey, be subject: Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet.ii.13; v.5; 2 
fut. pass. Heb. xii. 9. (Sept.; [Aristot.], Polyb., Plut., 
Arr., Hdian.) * 

ὑπο-τίθημι: 1 aor. ὑπέθηκα; pres. mid. ptep. ὑποτιθέμε- 
vos; fr. Hom. down; to place under (cf. ὑπό, III. 1): τί, 
Ro. xvi. 4 (on which see τράχηλος). Mid. metaph. to 
supply, suggest, (mid. from one’s own resources) ; witha 
dat. of the pers. and ace. of the thing: ταῦτα, these in- 
structions, 1 Tim. iv. 6. (Often so in prof. auth. fr. 
Hom. down.) * 

ὑπο-τρέχω: 2 aor. ὑπέδραμον; fr. Hom. down; prop. 
to run under; in N. T. once, viz. of navigators, to run 
past a place on the shore, and therefore in a higher posi- 
tion (see ὑποπλέω) : νησίον, Acts xxvii. 16 [R. V. run- 
ning under the lee of; ef. Hackett ad loc.].* 

ὑπο-τύπωσις, -ews, ἧ, (ὑποτυπόω, to delineate, outline) ; 
a. an outline, sketch, brief and summary exposition, (Sext. 
Empir., Diog. Laért., al.). b. an example, pattern: 
πρὸς ὕποτ. τῶν μελλόντων πιστεύειν κτλ. for an example 
of those who should hereafter believe, i.e. to show by 
the example of my conversion that the same grace which 
T had obtained would not be wanting also to those who 
should hereafter believe, 1 Tim. i. 16; the pattern 
placed before one to be held fast and copied, model: 
ὑγιαινόντων λόγων, 2 Tim. i. 13.* 

ὑποφέρω; 1 aor. ὑπήνεγκα; 2 aor. inf. ὑπενεγκεῖν ; fr. 
Hom. down; to bear by being under, bear up (a thing 
placed on one’s shoulders) ; trop. to bear patienily, to ene 
dure, (often so fr. Xen. and Plat. down): ri, 1 Co. x. 


ὑποχωρεω 


13; 2 Tim. 111. 11; 1 Pet.ii.19. (Prov. νἱ. 88; Ps. xviii. 
(Ixix.) 8; Mie. vii. 9; Job ii. 10.)* 

ὑπο-χωρέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ὑπεχώρησα; fr. Hom. down; to 
go back [see ὑπό, IL. 1 fin.]; to withdraw: εἰς τόπον ἔρη- 
pov, Lk. ix. 10; with ἐν and a dat. of the place (see ἐν, 
I. 7), Lk. v. 16 [ef. W. § 50, 4 a.; B. 312 (268)].* 

ὑπωπιάζω; (fr. ὑπώπιον, compounded of ὑπό and oy, 
ὠπός, which denotes a. that part of the face which 
is under the eyes; b. a blow in that part of the face; 
a black and blue spot, a bruise); prop. to beat black and 
blue, to smite so as to cause bruises and livid spots, (Aris- 
tot. rhet. 3, 11, 15 p. 1418", 20; Plut. mor. p. 921 f.; Diog: 
Laért. 6, 89): τὸ σῶμα, like a boxer I buffet my body, 
handle it roughly, discipline it by hardships, 1 Co. ix. 27; 
metaph. (πόλεις ὑπωπιασμέναι, cities terribly scourged 
and afflicted by war, bearing the marks of devastation, 
Arstph. pax 541) to give one intolerable annoyance [‘ beat 
one out’, ‘wear one οὐδ᾽], by entreaties [ef. τέλος, 1 a. ], 
Lk. xviii. 5 (ef. aliquem rogitando obtundat, Ter. Eun. 
3, 5, 6).* 

ds, ὑός, 6, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for 
VIM}, α swine: 2 Pet. 11. 22.* 

ὕσσωπος [on the breathing see WH. App. p. 144; 
Lehm. (in both his edd.) spells it with one o in Jn.], του, 
ἡ, (Hebr. aii, Ex. xii. 22; Num. xix. 6, 18, ete.), hyssop, 
a plant a bunch of which was used by the Hebrews in 
their ritual sprinklings: Heb. ix. 19; ὑσσώπῳ, i. 4. 
καλάμῳ ὑσσώπου, Jn. xix. 29. Cf. Win. RWB.s. ν. 
Ysop; Arnold in Herzog xviii. p. 337sq.; Furrer in 
Schenkel ν. 685 sq.; [Riehm p. 1771 sq.; Léw, Aram. 
Pflanzennamen, § 93; Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 455 
sq-; B.D.s. v. (esp. Am. ed.) ].* 

ὑστερέω, -@; 1 aor. ὑστέρησα; pf. ὑστέρηκα; Pass., 
pres. ὑστεροῦμαι; 1 aor. ptep. ὑστερηθείς; (ὕστερος); 1. 
Act. to be ὕστερος i. 6. behind ; i. 6. a. to come late 
or too tardily (so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): Heb. iv. 
1; to be left behind in the race and so fail to reach the 
goal, to fall short of the end; with ἀπό and the gen. in- 
dicating the end, metaph. fail to become a partaker : ἀπὸ 
τῆς χάριτος, Heb. xii. 15 [al. render here fall back (i.e. 
away) from; cf. W.§ 30,6 b.; B. 322 (276) sq. ef. § 132, 
5] (Eccl. vi. 2). b. to be inferior, in power, influ- 
ence, rank, 1 Co. xii. 24 (where LT Tr WH pass. tore- 
ρουμένῳ) ; in virtue, τί ἔτι ὑστερῶ ; in what am I still de- 
ficient [ A.V. what lack I yet (cf. B. § 131, 10)], Mt. xix. 
20 (Sir. li. 24; ἵνα γνῶ τί ὑστερῶ ἐγώ, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 
5; μηδ᾽ ἐν ἄλλῳ μηδενὶ μέρει ἀρετῆς ὑστεροῦντας, Plat. de 
rep. 6 p.484d.); μηδέν or οὐδέν foll. by a gen. (depend- 
ing on the idea of comparison contained in the verb [B. 
§ 132, 22]) of the person, to be inferior to [A.V. to be be- 
hind] another in nothing, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11. Ὁ: 
to fail, be wanting, (Diose. 5, 86): Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.] ; 
ἕν co [T WH Trire. ce (cf. B. ἃ. s.)] ὑστερεῖ, Mk. x. 
21. d. to be in want of, lack: with a gen. of the 
thing [W. § 30, 6], Lk. xxii. 35 (Joseph. antt.2,2,1). 2. 
Pass. to suffer want [W. 260 (244)]: Lk. xv. 14; 2 Co. 
xi. 9 (8); Heb. xi. 37, (Sir. xi. 11) ; opp. to περισσεύειν, 
to abound, Phil. iv. 12; τινός, to be devoid [R. V. fall 


646 


ὑψηλοφρονέω 


short] of, Ro. iii. 28 (Diod. 18, 71; Joseph. antt. 15, 6, 
7); ἔν τινι, to suffer want in any respect, 1 Co. i. 7, opp. 
to πλουτίζεσθαι ἔν τινι, ibid. 5; to lack (be inferior) in 
excellence, worth, opp. to περισσεύειν, [ A. V. lo be the worse 
... the better], 1 Co. viii. 8. [Comp.: adp-votepéw.] * 

ὑστέρημα, -τος, τό, (ὑστερέω) ; a. deficiency, that 
which is lacking: plur. with a gen. of the thing whose 
deficiency is to be filled up, Col. i. 24 (on which see 
ἀνταναπληρόω, and θλίψις sub fin.) ; 1 Th. iii. 10; τὸ bor. 
with a gen. [or its equiv.] of the pers., the absence of one, 
1 Co. xvi. 17 [ὑμ. being taken objectively ΟΥ̓. § 22, 
7; B. 8182, 8); al. take dp. subjectively and render that 
which was lacking on your part]; τὸ ὑμῶν bor. τῆς πρός 
με λειτουργίας, your absence, owing to which something 
was lacking in the service conferred on me (by you), 
Phil. ii. 30. b. in reference to property and re- 
sources, poverty, want, destitution: Lk. xxi. 4; 2 Co. viii. 
14 (13); ix.12; xi. 9, (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10; Judg. 
xviii. 10, ete.; eccl. writ.).* 

ὑστέρησις, -ews, 7], (ὑστερέω), want, poverty: Mk. xii. 
44; καθ᾽ ὑστέρησιν, on account of want, Phil. iv. 11 [ef. 
κατά, II. 3 e. y. p. 828" bot.]. (Eccl. writ.) * 

ὕστερος, -a, -ov, latter, later, coming after: ἐν ὑστέροις 
καιροῖς, 1 Tim. iv. 1; ὁ vor. i. 4. the second, Mt. xxi. 31 
LTr WH, but ef. Fritzsche’s and Meyer’s crit. notes 
[esp. WH. App.] ad loe. Neut. ὕστερον, fr. Hom. 
down, adverbially, afterward, after this, later, lastly, used 
alike of a shorter and of a longer period: Mt. iv. 2; xxi. 
29, 32, 37; xxv. 11; xxvi. 60; Mk. xvi. 14; Lk. iv. 2 
Rec.; [xx. 32 LT Tr WH]; Jn. xiii. 36; Heb. xii. 11; 
with a gen. after one, Mt. xxii. 27; Lk. xx. 32 [RG].* 

ὑφαίνω ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 178; fo weave: Lk. 
xii. 27 T WH (rejected) mrg.* 

ὑφαντός, τή, -όν, (ὑφαίνω, q.v.), fr. Hom. down; woven: 
Jn. xix. 23. (For 208, Ex. xxxvi. 30 (xxxix. 22); 
XxxVi. 35 (xxxix. 27); for 1wn, Ex. xxvi. 31, ete.) * 

ὑψηλός, -7, -όν, (ὕψι on high, ὕψος), [fr. Hom. down], 
high; lofty; a. prop. of place: ὄρος, Mt. iv. 8; 
xvii.1; Mk. ix. 2; Lk.iv.5 RG@Lbr.; Rev. xxi. 10: τεῖχος, 
Rey. xxi. 12; neut. ra ὑψηλά (the heights of heaven; 
Sept. for Ὁ 5, Ps. xcii. (xciii.) 45 exii. (exiii.) 5; Is. 
xxxiii. 5; Ivii. 15), heaven [A.V. on high; cf. B. § 124, 
8d.], Heb.i.3; exalted on high: ὑψηλότερος τῶν οὐρανῶν, 
[made higher than the heavens], of Christ raised to the 
right hand of God, Heb. vii. 26 (cf. Eph. iv.10); pera 
βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ, with a high (uplifted) arm, i. e. with 
signal power, Acts xiii. 17 (Sept. often ἐν βραχίονι ὑψηλῷ 
for 730) pyW3, as in Ex. vi.6; Deut. v. 15). b. 
metaph. eminent, exalted: in influence and honor, Lk. 
xvi. 15; ὑψηλὰ φρονεῖν, to set the mind on, to seek, high 
things (as honors and riches), to be aspiring, Ro. xii. 
16; also Ro. xi. 20 Lmrg.T Tr WH; 1 Tim. vi. 17 T 
WH mrg.; (Leian. Icaromen. 11, Hermot. 5).* 

ὑψηλο-φρονέω, -d; (ὑψηλόφρων, and this fr. ὑψηλός 
and φρήν) ; to be high-minded, proud: Ro. xi. 20[RGL 
txt.]; 1 Tim. vi. 17 [RGL Tr WH txt.], (Schol. ad 
Pind. Pyth. 2, 91). In Grk. writ. μεγαλοφρονεῖν is more 
common.* 


ὕψιστος 


ὕψιστος, -η, -ον, (Βα 1]. ; fr. ὕψε on high), in Grk. writ. 
mostly poetic, highest, most high ; a. of place: neut. 
τὰ ὕψιστα (Sept. for 0117), the highest regions, i. e. 
heaven (see ὑψηλός, a.), Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 10; LK. ii. 
14; xix. 38, (Job xvi. 19; Is. lvii. 15). b. of rank: 
of God, ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὕψιστος, the most high God, Mk. v. 7; 
Lk. viii. 28; Acts xvi. 17; Heb. vii. 1; [Gen. xiv. 18; 
Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 23]; and simply ὁ ὕψιστος, the 
Most High, Acts vii. 48; and without the article (cf. B. 
§ 124, 8 b. note; [ WH. Intr. § 416]), Lk. i. 32, 35, 76; 
vi. 35, and very often in Sir.; (Hebr. iy, roy ON, 
oy ody, pry mim; Ζεὺς ὕψιστος, Pind. Nem. 1, 
90; 11, 2; Aeschyl. Eum. 28).* 

ὕψος, τους, τό, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for 
DIN, Dp, 732, ete., height: prop. of measure, Eph. iii. 
18; Rev. xxi. 16; of place, heaven [A.V. on high], Eph. 
iv. 8 (fr. Ps. xvii. (Ixviii.) 19); Lk. 1. 78; xxiv. 49; 
metaph. rank, high station: Jas.i. 9 (Job v.11; 1 Mace. 
1, 40; x. 24; ὕψος ἀρετῆς, Plut. Popl. 6).* 

tow, -@; fut. ὑψώσω; 1 aor. ὕψωσα; Pass., 1 aor. 
ὑψώθην; 1 fut. ὑψωθήσομαι ; (ὕψος) ; [Batr. 81; Hip- 
pocr., al.]; Sept. very often for 039, also for A232, Nw, 
513, ete.; to lift up on high, to exalt, (Vulg. exalto) : τινά 
or τί, prop. of place, Jn. iii. 14"; used of the elevation 
of Jesus on the cross, Jn. iii. 14°; viii. 28; xii. 34; with ἐκ 
τῆς γῆς added, to remove from (lit. out of) the earth by 
crucifixion (ὑψοῦν twa foll. by ἐκ, Ps. ix. 14), Jn. xii. 32 
(the Evangelist himself interprets the word of the lift- 
ing up upon the cross, but a careful comparison of viii. 28 
and xii. 32 renders it probable that Jesus spoke of the 
heavenly exaltation which he was to attain by the cru- 
cifixion (ef. xii. 23 sqq., xiii. 31 sqq., Lk. xxiv. 26), and 
employed the Aramaic word 039, the ambiguity of which 
allowed it to be understood of the crucifixion ; cf. Bleek, 


647 


alive 
φ 


Beitrage zur Evangelienkritik, p. 231 sq.; [the ‘lifting 
up’ includes death and the victory over death; the pas- 
sion itself is regarded as a glorification; cf. Westcott 
ad loc.]); τινὰ ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (opp. to καταβιβάζειν [or 
καταβαίνειν) ἕως adov), metaph. to raise to the very sum- 
mit of opulence and prosperity, pass., Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 
15, [al. understand exaltation in privilege as referred to 
in these pass. (see vs. 21in Mt.)]; simply τινά, to exalt, 
to raise to dignity, honor, and happiness: Lk. i. 52 (where 
opp. to ταπεινῶ) ; Acts xiii. 17; to that state of mind 
which ought to characterize a Christian, 2 Co. xi. 7; to 
raise the spirits by the blessings of salvation, Jas. iv. 10; 
1 Pet. v. 6; ἐμαυτόν, to exalt one’s self (with haughti- 
ness and empty pride), (opp. to ramewa), Mt. xxiii. 12; 
Lk. xiv. 11; xviii. 14;— in these same pass. ὑψωθήσεται 
occurs, he shall be raised to honor. By a union of the 
literal and the tropical senses God is said ὑψῶσαι Christ 
τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ, Acts v. 31; pass. Acts ii. 33; the dative 
in this phrase, judged according to Greek usage, hardly 
bears any other meaning chan with (by means of) his 
right hand (his power) [R. V. txt.]; but the context 
forbids it to denote anything except at (to) the right hand 
of God [so R. V. mrg.]; hence the opinion of those 
has great probability who regard Peter’s phrase as 
formed on the model of the Aramaean ros cf. Bleek, 
Einl. in das N.T. ed. 1, p. 346 [but see W. 214 (201), 
215 (202); Meyer ad loc. Comp.: imep-vydo.]* 

ὕψωμα, -ros, τό, (ὑψόω), thing elevated, height: prop. 
of space, opp. to βάθος, Ro. viii. 89 (rod ἀέρος, Philo de 
praem. et poen. §1; ὅταν ὕψωμα λάβῃ μέγιστον ὁ ἥλιος, 
Plut. mor. p. 782 ἃ.) ; spec. elevated structure i. 6. bar- 
rier, rampart, bulwark: 2 Co.x.5. [Sept. (in Jud. x. 8; 
xiii. 4, actively) ; cod. Ven. for ‘heave-offering’ in Lev. 
vil. 14, 32; Num. xviii. 24 sqq.]* 


Φ 


φάγος, -ου, ὁ, (φάγω), α voracious man, a glutton, (it 
is ἃ subst., and differs fr. φαγός the adj.; cf. φυγός, 
φειδός; see Fritzsche on Mark p. 790 sqq., but cf. 
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 28; W.§ 16, 8 6. a., [and 
§ 6, 1i.; esp. Chandler § 230]): joined with οἰνοπότης, 
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34.* 

φάγω, see ἐσθίω. 

φαιλόνης (so Rec.ers steph) or φελόνης (with most Mss. 
including cod. Sin., Rec.be=*% G LT Tr [WH (ef. their 
Intr. ὃ 404 and App. p. 151°; W. Dindorf in Steph. 
Thes. s. v. φαινόλης, col. 583)]), by metath. for the more 
com. φαινόλης (found in [Epict. 4, 8, 24]; Artem. oneir. 
2,3; 5,29; Pollux 7, (13) 61; Athen. 8 p. 97), του, 6, Lat. 


paenula, a travelling-cloak, used for protection against 
stormy weather: 2 Tim. iv. 13, where others errone- 
ously understand it to mean a case or receptacle for 


books as even the Syriac renders it lois δα." 


φαίνω; [1 aor. act. subjune. 3 pers. sing. avy, LT WH 
in Rev. viii. 12; xviii. 23, (see below and dvadaivw; W 
§15 5. v.; B.41(35))]; Pass., pres. φαίνομαι; 2 aor. 
ἐφάνην; 2 fut. φανήσομαι and (in 1 Pet. iv. 18) φανοῦμαι 
(cf. Kithner § 343s. v.; [Veitchs.v.]); (φάω) ; in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hom. down; to bring forth into the light, cause 
to shine; to show. In bibl. Grk. 1. Active intransi- 
tively, to shine, shed light, (which the Grks. [commonly 


Φαλέκ 


(cf. L. and S.s. ν. A. IT.)] express by the passive), Sept. 
for VND: τὸ φῶς φαίνει, Jn. i. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 8; ὁ λύχνος, 
Jn. v. 85; 2 Pet. i. 19, (1 Mace. iv. 50; Gen. i. 17); ὁ 
ἥλιος, Rev. i. 16 ; ὁ ἥλ. καὶ ἡ σελήνη, Rev. xxi. 23; ἡ ἡμέρα, 
Rey. viii. 12 Ree. 2. Passive, a. to shine, be 
bright or resplendent: ἡ ἡμέρα, Rev. viii. 12 Tr [(see 
above); xviii. 23 RG Tr—but see Veitchs.v.; moreover, 
the foll. exx. should be brought under the next head; see 
Meyer on Phil. ii. 15]; ὡς φωστῆρες, Phil. ii. 15; ὁ ἀστήρ, 
Mt. ii. 7; ἡ ἀστραπή, Mt. xxiv. 27. b. to become 
evident, to be brought forth into light, come to view, appear: 
Mt. xxiv. 30; opp. to ἀφανίζεσθαι, Jas. iv. 14; 
appearance of angels: τινί, Mt. i. 20; ii. 13, 19, (2 Mace. 
iii. 33; x. 29; xi. 8; of God, Joseph. antt. 7, 7, 3; for 
779) in ref. to the same, Num. xxiii. 3); of those re- 
stored to life, Lk. ix. 8; τινί, Mk. xvi. 9; of growing 
vegetation, to come to light, Mt. xiii. 26; univ. fo appear, 
be seen: φαινόμενα, Heb. xi. 3; impersonally, φαίνεται, 
it is seen, exposed to view: οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως ἐν τῷ 
Ἰσραήλ, never was it seen in such (i. e. so remarkable) 
a fashion — never was such a sight seen — in Israel, Mt. 
ix. 33. c. to meet the eyes, strike the sight, become 
clear or manifest, with a predicate nom. (be seen to be) 
[cf. B. § 144, 15 a., 18]: Mt. vi. 16, 18; xxili. 27sq.; 2 
Co. xiii. 7; ἵνα (sc. ἡ ἁμαρτία) φανῇ ἁμαρτία (equiv. to 
ἁμαρτωλός), Ro. vii. 13; with the dat. of the pers. added, 
Mt. vi. 5 (se. προσευχόμενοι praying); to be seen, appear: 
ὁ ἁμαρτωλὸς ποῦ φανεῖται ; i.e. he will nowhere be seen, 
will perish, 1 Pet. iv. 18. d. to appear to the mind, 
seem to one’s Judgment or opinion: τί ὑμῖν φαίνεται, [A.V. 
what think ye], Mk. xiv. 64 (1 Esdr. ii. 18 (21)) ; ἐφάνη- 
σαν ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ὡσεὶ ληροί, Lk. xxiv. 11[W. § 33 f.; B. 
§133, 3. Syn. see δοκέω, fin.]* 

Φαλέκ [L txt. Tr WH Φάλεκ (but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 
104); Lmrg. @adey], 6, Peleg, (aoa ‘division ’), son of 
Eber (Gen. x. 25): Lk. iii. 35.* 

φανερός, -d, -dv, (φαίνομαι), fr. [Pind.], Hdt. down, ap- 
parent, manifest, evident, known, (opp. to κρυπτός and 
ἀπόκρυφος) : Gal. ν. 19; ἐν πᾶσιν, among all, 1 Tim. iv. 
15 Rec.; ἐν αὐτοῖς, in their minds, Ro. i. 19; τινί, dat. of 
the pers., manifest to one, of a pers. or thing that has 
become known, Acts iv. 16; vii. 13; [1 Tim. iv. 15 GL 
TTr WH]; φανερὸν γίνεσθαι: Mk. vi. 14; [Lk. viii. 
17]; 1 Co. ili. 13; xiv. 25; ἐν ὑμῖν, among you, 1 Co. 
xi. 19; ἐν with a dat. of the place, Phil. i. 13 [see 
πραιτώριον, 3]; φανερὸν ποιεῖν twa, [A. V. to make one 
known, i.e.]| disclose who and what he is, Mt. xii. 16; 
Mk. iii. 12; εἰς φανερὸν ἐλθεῖν, to come to light, come to 
open view, Mk. iv. 22; Lk. viii. 17; ἐν τῷ φανερῷ, in 
public, openly (opp. to ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ), Mt. vi. 4 Rec., 6 
RG, [18 Rec.]; Ro. ii. 28 [here A.V. outward, outward- 
ly]. manifest i.e. to be plainly recognized or known: 
foll. by ἐν with a dat. of the thing in (by) which, 1 Jn. 
iii. 10. [Syn. see δῆλος, fin.]* 

φανερόω, -@; fut. φανερώσω ; 1 aor. ἐφανέρωσα; Pass., 
pres. φανεροῦμαι ; pf. πεφανέρωμαι; 1 aor. ἐφανερώθην; 1 
fut. φανερωθήσομαι ; (φανερός) ; to make manifest or visi- 
bie or known what has been hidden or unknown, to 


648 


of the | 


pavepow 


manifest, whether by words, or deeds, or in any other 
way; a. with an ace. of the thing: pass., Mk. iv. 
22; Eph. v. 13; Rev. iii. 18; τὰ ἔργα τινός, pass. Jn. iii. 
21; with ἔν τινι added, Jn. ix. 3; τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, of 
Christ, Jn. ii. 11; sc. τὴν γνῶσιν, 2 Co. xi.6 LT Tr WH; 
τὰς βουλὰς τῶν καρδιῶν, of God as judge, 1 Co. iv. 5; τὴν 
ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ bt ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τύπῳ, 2 Co. ii. 
14; τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, pass. 2 Co. vii. 
12; τὴν ζωὴν τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκί, 
pass. 2 Co. iv. 10 84. ; χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ φανερωθεῖσα διὰ τῆς 
ἐπιφανείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Tim. 1. 10; pass. used of some- 
thing hitherto non-existent but now made actual and 
visible, realized, 1 Jn. iii. 2 (Germ. verwirklicht werden, 
in die Erscheinung treten); ὁδός, Heb. ix. 8 (ef. iter 
per Alpes patefieri volebat, Caes. bell. gall. 8,1); to 
bring to light or make manifest, by the advent, life, death, 
resurrection, of Jesus Christ: τὸ μυστήριον, pass. Ro. 
xvi. 26; with τοῖς ἁγίοις added, Col. i. 26; to make 
known by teaching: τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, 
Jn. xvii. 6 ; τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Col. iv.4; τὸν λόγον 
αὐτοῦ, of God giving instruction through the preachers 
of the gospel, Tit. i. 3; τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῖς, of 
God teaching the’ Gentiles concerning himself by the 
works of nature, Ro. i. 19; pass. δικαιοσύνη θεοῦ (made 
known in the gospel [ef. δικαιοσύνη, 1 6. p. 149» bot.]), 
Ro. iii. 21; pass. to become manifest, be made known: ἐν 
τούτῳ sc. ὅτι ete. herein that, ete. [see οὗτος, I. 2 b.], 1 Jn. 
iv. 9; τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. xv. 4. b. with an 
ace. of the person, to expose to view, make manifest, show 
one: ἑαυτὸν τῷ κόσμῳ, of Christ coming forth from his 
retirement in Galilee and showing himself publicly at 
Jerusalem, Jn. vii. 4; τοῖς μαθηταῖς, of the risen Christ, 
Jn. xxi. 1; pass. to.be made manifest, to show one’s self, 
appear : 'ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Co. v. 10; 
of Christ risen from the dead, τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, Jn. 
xxi. 14; Mk. xvi. 14; with ἐν ἑτέρᾳ μορφῇ added, Mk. 
xvi. 12 (absol. φανερωθείς, Barn. ep. 15, 9); of Christ 
previously hidden from view in heaven but after his incar- 
nation made visible on earth as a man among men, Heb. 
ix. 26 (opp. to δεύτερον ὀφθήσεσθαι, of his future return 
from heaven, ibid. 28); 1 Pet. i. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 5,8; with 
ἐν σαρκί added, 1 Tim. iii. 16, (Barn. ep. 5, 6; 6, 7. 9. 
14 ete.); ἡ ζωὴ (the life embodied in Christ; the centre 
and source of life) ἐφανερώθη, 1 In. i. 25 of Christ now 
hidden from sight in heaven but hereafter to return 
visibly, Col. iii. 4 (cf. 3); 1 Pet. v.4; 1 Jn. ii. 28; [ef. 
Westcott on the Epp. of St. John p. 79 56.1. of Chris- 
tians, who after the Saviour’s return will be manifested 
ἐν δόξῃ [see δόξα, III. 4 b.], Coil. iii. 4. Pass. to be- 
come known, to be plainly recognized, thoroughly under- 
stood: who and what one is, revi, Jn. i. 831; what sort 
of person one is, τῷ θεῷ, 2 Co. v. 11; ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν 
ὑμῶν, ibid.; φανεροῦμαι foil. by ὅτι, 2 Co. iii. 3; 1 Jn. ii. 
19; ἐν παντὶ φανερωθέντες ἐν πᾶσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς, in every way 
made manifest (such as we are) among all men to you- 
ward, 2 Co. xi. 6 [but L T Tr WH give the act. φανερώ- 
σαντες, we have made it manifest]. (Hdt., Dion. Hal, 
Dio Cass., Joseph.) [S¥N. see ἀποκαλύπτω, fin.]* 


φανερῶς 


φανερῶς, (see φανερός), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], 
adv., manifestly ; i.e. a. plainly, clearly: ἰδεῖν τινα, 
Acts x. 3. Ὁ. openly: Mk. i. 45; opp. to ἐν κρυπτῷ, 
Jn. vii. 10.* 

φανέρωσις, -ews, 9, (pavepow), manifestation: with a 
gen. of the object, 1 Co. xii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 2. ([Aristot. 
de plantis 2, 1 and 9; also for Ὁ δ (Sept. δήλωσις) 
Lev. viii. 8 cod. Ven.] Eccles. writ.; Hesych.) [Syn. 
see ἀποκαλύπτω, fin. | * 

φανός, -00, ὁ, (paivw), a torch [A. V. lantern; Hesych. 
*Arrixot δὲ λυχνοῦκον ἐκάλουν ὃ ἡμεῖς viv φανόν ; cf. Phryn. 
p- 59 and Lob.’s note; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 131; 
Athen. 15 p. 699 d. sqq. and Casaubon’s notes ch. xviii. 
see λαμπάς and reff.]: Jn. xviii. 8. (Arstph., Xen., 
Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) * 

Φανουήλ, (98199 i. 6. πρόσωπον θεοῦ), indecl., Phanuel, 
the father of Anna the prophetess: Lk. ii. 36.* 

φανταάζω : (φαίνω) ; pres. pass. ptep. φανταζόμενος ; fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to cause to appear, make visi- 
ble, expose to view, show : τὸ φανταζόμενον, the appearance, 
sight, Heb. xii. 21.* 

φαντασία, -as, 9, show, showy appearance, display, 
pomp: Acts xxv. 23. (Polyb. 15, 25, 5, etc.; [Diod. 
12, 83]; al.) * 

φάντασμα, -ros, τό, (φαντάζω), an appearance; spec. 
an apparition, spectre: Mt. xiv. 26; Mk. vi. 49. (Aes- 
chyl., Eur., Plat., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.; Sap. xvii. 14 
(15).)* 

φάραγξ, -ayyos, 7, a valley shut in by cliffs and preci- 
pices; a ravine: Lk. iii. 5. (Alcm., Eur., Thuc., Dem., 
Polyb., al.; Sept.) * 

Φαραώ, (719; in Joseph. antt. 2,13 and 14 Φαραώθης 
[also Φαραών, -dvos, ὃ, 6, 2, ete.]), ὁ, [indecl. B. 15 (14)], 
Pharaoh, the common title of the ancient kings of Egypt 
(ὁ φαραὼν κατ᾽ Αἰγυπτίους βασιλέα σημαίνει, Joseph. antt. 
8, 6, 2 [ace. to Ebers (in Riehm s. v. Pharao) the name 
is only the Hebr. form of the Egyptian per-aa denoting 
(as even Horapollo 1, 62 testifies) great house, a current 
title of kings akin to the Turkish “ sublime porte”; al. 
al.; see BB. DD.s. v.]): Acts vii. 13, 21; Ro. ix.17; Heb. 
xi. 24; Φαραώ with βασιλεὺς Αἰγύπτου added in apposi- 
tion (as if Φαραώ were a proper name, as sometimes in 
the O. T.: ΟΣ 99) ΠΡῚΞ, 1 K. iii 1; ix. 16; 2K. 
xvii. 7; Is. xxxvi. 6, οί; 1 Esdr. i. 28), Acts vii. 10. 
Cf. Vaihinger in Herzog xi. p. 490 sqq.; [Ebers in Riehm 
u. 5.7." 

Φαρές [on its accent see ΤῊ Proleg. p. 104], 6, (v2 
4 breach, Gen. xxxviii. 29), Perez ΓΑ. V. Phares], a son 
of Judah by Tamar his daughter-in-law: Mt. i. 8; Lk. 
iii. 33.* 

Φαρισαῖος, -ov, 6, a Pharisee, a member of the sect or 
party of the Pharisees (Syr. Laszs, rabbinic 7 319, 
fr. #15 ‘to separate’, because deviating in their life from 
the general usage; Suidas s.v. quotes Cedrenus as fol- 
lows, Φαρισαῖοι, of ἑρμηνευόμενοι ἀφωρισμένοι" παρὰ τὸ μερί- 
(ew κ΄ ἀφορίζειν ἑαυτοὺς τῶν ἄλλων ἁπάντων εἴς τε τὸ καθα- 
ρώτατον τοῦ βίου καὶ ἀκριβέστατον, καὶ εἰς τὰ τοῦ νόμου 


649 


φαρμακεύς 


ἐντάλματα). The first and feeble beginnings of this sect 
seem to be traceable to the age immediately succeeding 
the return from exile. In addition to the books of the 
O. T. the Pharisees recognized in oral traditior (see 
παράδοσις, 2) a standard of belief and life (Joseph. antt. 
13,10, 6; Mt.xv.1; Mk. vii. 3). They sought for dis- 
tinction and praise by the observance of external rites 
and by the outward forms of piety, such as ablutions, 
fastings, prayers, and alms-giving; and, comparatively 
negligent of genuine piety, they prided themselves on 
their fancied good works. They held strenuously to a 
belief in the existence of good and evil angels, and to 
the expectation of a Messiah; and they cherished the 
hope that the dead, after a preliminary experience 
either of reward or of penalty in Hades, would be re- 
called to life by him and be requited each according to 
his individual deeds. In opposition to the usurped do- 
minion of the Herods and the rule of the Romans, they 
stoutly upheld the theocracy and their country’s cause, 
and possessed great influence with the common people. 
According to Josephus (antt. 17, 2, 4) they numbered 
more than 6000. They were bitter enemies of Jesus 
and his cause; and were in turn severely rebuked by 
him for their avarice, ambition, hollow reliance on out- 
ward works, and affectation of piety in order to gain 
notoriety: Mt. iii. 7; v. 20; vii. 29 Lchm.; ix. 11, 14, 
84; xii. 2, 14,24, 38 Lchm. om.; xv. 1, 12; xvi. 1,6, 11sq.; 
xix. 3; xxi. 45; [xxii 15, 34, 41]; xxiii. 2, 13-15, 23, 25- 
27, 293 xxvii. 62; Mk. ii. 16, 18, 24; 111. 6; vii. 1, 3, 5; 
viii. 11, 153 [ix.11 Lin br. T]; x.2; xii.13; Lk. v.17, 
21, 30, 835 vi. 2, 75; vii. 30, 36 sq. 39; xi. 37-39, 42-44 
[but in 44G T Tr WH om. Lbr. the el.], 53; xii. 1; 
xiii. 81; xiv. 1,3; xv. 2; xvi. 145; xvii. 20; xviii. 10 sq.; 
xix. 89; Jn. i. 24: 11]. 15 iv. 1; vii. 32, 45, 47sq.3 viii. 
3, 13; ix. [13], 15 sq. 40; xi. 46 sq. 57; xii. 19,425 xviii. 
3; Acts v. 34; xv. 5; xxiii. 6-9; xxvi. 5; Phil. 111. 5. 
Cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Pharisier; Reuss in Herzog xi. 
p- 496, and the works referred to above 8. v. Σαδδουκαῖος, 
fin. [esp. Sieffert’s dissertation in Herzog ed. 2 (vol. xiii. 
p- 210 544.) and the copious reff. at its close]. An ad- 
mirable idea of the opinions and practices of the Phari- 
sees may be gathered also from Paret, Ueber d. Phari- 
siismus des Josephus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 
1856, No. 4, p. 809 sqq.* 

φαρμακεία [WH «ia, so T (exe. in Gal. v. 20; cf. the 
Proleg. p. 88); see I, ¢],-as, 9, (φαρμακεύω) ; a. the 
use or the administering of drugs (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 
17). b. poisoning (Plat., Polyb., al.): Rev. ix. 21 
[here WH txt. Tr mrg. φαρμάκων ; many interpp. refer 
the pass. to next head]. ce. sorcery, magical arts, 
often found in connection with idolatry and fostered by 
it: Gal. v. 20 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] (Sap. xii. 4; 
xviii. 18; for Ὁ 33. Is. xlvii. 9; for mn, Ex. vii. 22; 
viii. 18; for 007%, Ex. vii. 11); trop. of the decep- 
tions and seductions of idolatry, Rev. xviii. 28." 

appaxets, -έως, 6, (φάρμακον), one who prepares or 
uses magical remedies; a sorcerer: Rev. xxi. 8 Rec. 
(Soph., Plat., Joseph., Leian., Plut., al.) * 

* 


φάρμακον 


φάρμακον, -ov, τό, fr. Hom. down, a drug; an enchant- 
ment: Tr mrg. WH txt. in Rev. ix. 21 (R.V. sorceries), 
for φαρμακεία, q. v. (in b.).*] 

φαρμακός, -7), -όν, (φαρμάσσω [to use a φάρμακον), [fr. 
Arstph. down]; 1. pertaining to magical arts. 2. 
ὁ φαρμακός, subst., i. 6. φαρμακεύς, q. ν-: Rev. xxi. 8 GL 
T Tr WH; xxii. 15. (Sept. several times for 93.) * 

φάσις, -ews, ἡ, (fr. paivw) ; 1. in the Attic ora- 
tors, the exposure of (informing against) those who have 
embezzled the property of the state, or violated the laws 
respecting the importation or exportation of merchandise, 
or defrauded their wards. 2. univ. a disclosure of 
secret crime (κοινῶς δὲ φάσεις ἐκαλοῦντο πᾶσαι ai μηνύσεις 
τῶν λανθανόντων ἀδικημάτων, Pollux 8, 6, 47): Susan. 55 
Theod.; of information by report [A. V. tidings], Acts 
xxi. 31.” 

φάσκω; impf. ἔφασκον; (AQ, φημί); fr. Hom. down; 
to affirm, allege, to pretend or profess: foll. by the ace. 
with the inf., Acts xxiv. 9; xxv. 19; with the inf. and 
an ace. referring to the subject, Rev. ii. 2 Ree. ; foll. by 
an inf. with a subject nom., Ro. i. 22.* 

φάτνη, -ης, ἡ, [(πατέομαι to eat; γ᾽ δηΐδοῖ p. 445)], α 
crib, manger: Lk. ii. 7, 12, 165 xiii. 15. (From Hom. 
down; Sept. for 0138, Job xxxix. 9; Prov. xiv. 4; Is. 
i. 3; plur. for 0°99, Hab. iii. 17.) * 

φαῦλος, -7, -ov, (akin to Germ. faul and flau), easy, 
slight, ordinary, mean, worthless, of no account; ethically, 
bad, wicked, base (Theogn. [?], Eur., Xen., Plat., Plut.) : 
Jas. iii. 16; φαῦλόν τι λέγειν περί τινος, Tit. ii. 8; φαῦλα 
πράσσειν, [R.V. to do ill], In. iii. 20; τὰ φ. πράσσειν opp. 
to τὰ ἀγαθὰ ποιεῖν, Jn. v. 29; φαῦλον (opp. to ἀγαθόν) 
πράσσειν, Ro. ix. 11 LT Tr WH; 2 Co. v. 10T Tr txt. 
WH. [See Trench, Syn. ὃ lxxxiv.]* 

φέγγος, -ous, τό, (akin to φαίνειν), fr. Aeschyl. and 
Pind. down, light: of the moon, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 
24; of a candle or lamp, Lk. xi. 33 R GT Trmrg. [ef. 
ἀστραπή, ib. vs. 36]. (Joel ii. 10; iii. (iv.) 15 (20); Ezek. 
i. 4, 13, 27; Hos. vii. 6.) * 

[ϑυν.: αὐγή, φέγγος, φῶς: φῶς light—the general 
term, (of the light of a fire in Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xxii. 56) ; 
éyyos amore concrete and emphatic term (ef. Lk. xi. 33), the 
bright sunshine, the beam of light, etc.; αὐγή ἃ still stronger 
term, suggesting the fiery nature of the light ; used of shoot- 
ing, heating, rays. A Greek spoke of ἡλίου φῶς, péy- 
γος, αὐγή: or, φωτὸς φέγγος, αὐγή; or, φέγγους αὐγή; but 
these formulas are not reversible. Schmidt ch. 33; cf. 
Trench ὃ xlvi.] 

φείδομαι ; fut. φείσομαι; 1 aor. ἐφεισάμην ; depon. mid.; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for on, Din, JwN (to keep back); 
to spare: absol. 2 Co. xiii. 2; τινός, to spare one [W. 
§ 30, 10d.; B. § 132, 15], Acts xx. 29; Ro. viii. 82; xi. 
21; 1 Co. vii. 28; 2Co. i. 23; 2 Pet. ii. 4sq.5 to abstain 
[A. V. forbear], an inf. denoting the act abstained from 
being supplied from the context : καυχᾶσθαι, 2 Co. xii. 6 
(μὴ φείδου -- se. διδάσκειν — εἰ ἔχεις διδάσκειν, Xen. Cyr. 
1, 6, 35; with the inf. added, λέγειν κακά, Eur. Or. 393; 
δρᾶσαϊ τι τῶν τυραννικῶν, Plat. de rep. 9 p. 574 b.).* 

φειδομένως, (fr. the ptep. φειδόμενος), adv., sparingly : 
2 Co. ix. 6 (mildly, Plut. Alex. 25).* 


650 


φέρω 


φελόνης, see φαιλόνης. 

φέρω; (allied to Germ. fahren, fahren, [Eng. bear, etc. 
Scotch bairn, ete. etc.; οἵ. Curtius §411]); impf. ἔφε- 
pov; Pass., pres. φέρομαι ; impf. ἐφερόμην ; fut. act. οἴσω 
(Jn. xxi. 18; Rev. xxi. 26) 5 1 aor. ἤνεγκα, ptep. ἐνέγκας; 
2 aor. inf. ἐνεγκεῖν (Mt. vii. 18T WH); 1 aor. pass. 
ἠνέχθην (2 Pet. i. 17, 21); [ef WH. App. p. 164; B. 68 
(60); W.90 (85sq.); esp. Veitch p. 668 sq.]; fr. Hom. 
down; Sept. for 827 and Nw); do bear, ie. 1 10 
carry; a. to carry some burden: τὸν σταυρὸν ome 
σθέν τινος, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; to bear with one’s self (which the 
Grk. writ. express by the mid.), [A. V. to bring]: τί, Lk. 
xxiv. 1; Jn. xix. 39. b. to move by bearing; pass. 
like the Lat. feror i.g. moveor, to be conveyed or borne, 
with a suggestion of speed or force (often so in prof. 
auth. fr. Hom. down): of persons borne in a ship over 
the sea, [A. V. to be driven], Acts xxvii. 15,17; of a 
gust of wind, to rush, Acts ii. 2 (ef. Jer. xviii. 14); φωνὴ 
ἐνεχθεῖσα, was brought, came, 2 Pet. i. 17, 18 (see ὑπό, 1. 
2. 8.}} of the mind, to be moved inwardly, prompted, 
ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου, 2 Pet. i. 21; φέρομαι ἐπί τι [R. V. 
press on], Heb. vi. 1. c. ace. to a less freq. use to 
bear up, i.e. uphold (keep from falling): φέρων τὰ πάντα 
τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ, of God [the Son] the pre- 
server of the universe, Heb. i. 3 (so in the Targums and 
Rabbinical writ. 530 is often used, 6. g. wip ajo, of 
God ; οὐ δυνήσομαι ἐγὼ μόνος φέρειν τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, Num. 
xi. 14, ef. 11; add, Deut. i. 9, for Nw); ὁ τὰ μὴ [μὲν] 
ὄντα φέρων καὶ τὰ πάντα γεννῶν, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 75 
fr. native Grk. writ. we have φέρειν τὴν πόλιν, Plut. 
Lucull. 6; ef. Bleek, Brief ἃ. ἃ. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 70sq.). 2. 
to bear i. e. endure (exx. without number in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. B. I. 3; [L. and S. s. v. 
A. Π1.7}: τὸν ὀνειδισμόν, Heb. xiii. 13; τί, to endure the 
rigor of a thing, Heb. xii. 20; τινά, to bear patiently 
one’s conduct, or to spare one (abstain from punishing 
or destroying), Ro. ix. 22. 3. to bring, bring to, 
bring forward ; a. prop.: τινά, Acts v.16; τί, Mk. 
[vi.27RGT Tr WH]; xi. 2T Tr WH; xii. 16; Lk. xv. 
23; Acts iv. 84, 87; v.23 2 Tim. iv. 13; τινὰ πρός τινα, 
Mk. i. 32; 11. 8 [T Tr mrg. WH]; ix. 17 |W. 278 (262)], 
19 sq.; [τινὰ ἐπί τινα, Lk. xii. 11 Tr mrg.]; τινά τινι, Mk. 
vii. 325 viii. 22; [τινὰ ἐπί τινος, Lk. ν. 18]; τί τινι, Mk. 
xii. 15; Jn. ii. 8; with ὧδε added, Mt. xiv. 18 [here Tr 
mrg. br. ὧδε]; xvii. 17; τὶ πρός τινα, Mk. xi. 7 (2 ir 
WH]; τὲ εἰς with an ace. of the place, Rev. xxi. 24, 26; 
τὶ ἐπὶ πίνακι, Mt. xiv. 11; Mk. vi. [27 Lehm.], 28; ἀπό 
τινος (a part of [see ἀπό, I. 27), In. xxi. 10; φέρω τινὶ 
φαγεῖν, Jn. iv. 33. b. to move to, apply: τὸν δάκτυ- 
λον, τὴν χεῖρα, ὧδε, εἰς with an ace. of the place, [A.V. 
reach], Jn. xx. 27. fig., φέρεται ὑμῖν τι, a thing is 
offered (lit. ‘is being brought’) to you: ἡ χάρις, 1 Pet. 
i. 13. c. to bring by announcing: διδαχήν, 2 Jn. 10 
(τινὶ ἀγγελίην, μῦθον, λόγον, φήμην, ete., in Hom., Pind., 
al.); to announce (see Passow 8. v. p. 2281"; [L. and S. 
s.v. A. IV. 4]) : θάνατον, Heb. ix. 16. ἃ. to beari.e. 
bring forth, produce ; a. prop.: καρπόν, [Mt. vii. 18* 
T WH, 18° ΤΊ; Mk. iv. 8 [on ἐν ἑξήκοντα etc. WH txt.. 


φευγω 


see ἐν, I. δ f.]; Jn. xii. 24; xv. 2, 4 sq. 8, 16; (Hom. 
Od. 4, 229; Hes. opp. 117; Xen. mem. 2, 1, 28; al.). 8B. 
to bring forward in speech: προφητεία, 2 Pet. i. 21[A. V. 
came]; κρίσιν κατά twos, 2 Pet. ii. 11; [κατηγορίαν κατά 
twos, Jn. xviii. 29 RG L Tr (but here T WH om. xara) ]; 
αἰτιώματα κατά Twos, Acts xxv. 7 RG [but G om. κατά τ.]; 
αἰτίαν, ibid. 18 L T Tr WH;; (πάσας αἰτίας, reasons, Dem. 
p- 1328, 22; ἀπολογισμούς, Polyb. 1, 32, 4). e. to 
lead, conduct, [A. V. bring, carry, ete. (Germ. fiihren)]}: 
ἐπί with an ace. of the place, Mk. xv. 22; Acts xiv. 13; 
(ἐκεῖ) ὅπου, Jn. xxi. 18; metaph. a gate is said φέρειν 
(Lat. ferre [Eng,. lead]}) εἰς τὴν πόλιν, Acts xii. 10 (ὁδὸς 
φΦ. εἰς ἱρόν, Hdt. 2, 122; διὰ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἐς τὸ πρὸς ἠῶ, id. 
2, 188 [cf. L.andS.s.v. A.VII.]). [Comp.: dva-, ἀπο-, 
dta-, eio-, παρ-εισ-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-,; κατα-, παρα-; περι-, προ-; προσ-» 
our, ὑποφέρω. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.]* 

φεύγω ; fut. φεύξομαι ; 2 aor. ἔφυγον ; fr. Hom. down; 
Sept. for 033 and m3; to 7166, 1. 6. a. to flee 
away, seek safety by flight: absol., Mt. viii. 33; xxvi. 56; 
Mk. v. 14; xiv. 50; Lk. viii. 34; Jn. x. 12, [13 (here GT 
Trtxt. WH om. L Trmrg. br. the cl.)]; Acts vii. 29; foll. 
by εἰς with an ace. of the place, Mt. ii. 13; x. 23; [xxiv. 
16, here RG TWH ore. ἐπί]; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 21; 
[Jn. vi. 15 Tdf.]; Rev. xii. 6; foll. by ἐπί with an acc. 
of the place, Mt. xxiv. 16 [here L Tr WH txt. eis]; ἐκ 
τοῦ πλοίου, Acts xxvii. 30; foll. by ἀπό with a gen. of the 
place, in a purely local sense, to leave by fleeing, as in 
Grk. writ. (cf. W. 223 (210); [B.§ 131, 1]), Mk. xvi. 8; 
by ἀπό with a gen. of the pers. inspiring fear or threat- 
ening danger (after the Hebr.), Jn. x. 5; Jas. iv. 7; 
poetically, φεύξεται aw αὐτῶν ὁ θάνατος, death shall flee 
from them, opp. to ζητήσουσι θάνατον, Rev. ix. 6. b. 
metaph. to flee (to shun or avoid by flight) something ab- 
horrent, esp. vices: with an ace. of the thing, 1 Co. vi. 
18 (Sap. i. 5; 4 Mace. viii. 18); opp. to διώκειν, 1 Tim. vi. 
11; 2 Tim. ii. 22; Hebraistically foll. by ἀπό with a gen. 
of the thing, 1 Co. x. 14 (ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας, Sir. xxi. 2). ο. 
to be saved by flight, to escape safe out of danger: absol. 
Heb. xii. 25 RG; with an ace. of the thing, Heb. xi. 34; 
Hebraistically foll. by ἀπό with a gen. — of the thing, Mt: 
iii. 7; xxiii. 33; Lk. iii. 7; of the pers. Mk. xiv. 52 [T 
Tr txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν]. ἃ. poeti- 
cally, to flee away i. q. vanish: πᾶσα νῆσος ἔφυγε καὶ ὄρη 
οὐχ εὑρέθησαν, Rey. xvi. 20; with the Hebraistie addi- 
tion ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (as in Deut. xxviii. 7; Josh. vii. 
4; viii.5; 2 Chr. x. 2, ete.; see πρόσωπον, 1 b. p. 551° 
mid.), Rev. xx. 11. [Comp. and Syn.: ἀποφ. (empha- 
sizes the inner endeavor or aversion), διαφ. (suggests 
the space which the flight must traverse), ἐκῴ. (looks 
rather to the physical possibility), xara. (points to the 
place or the person where refuge is sought) ; Schmidt, 
Syn. ch. 109.]* 

Φῆλιξ (Lehm. Φήλιξ, [so Trin Acts xxiv. 22 (by mis- 
take ?)]; cf. Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37; B. 13 
(12); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 104; and reff. s. v. xnpv&]), [lit. 
‘happy’, ‘fortunate ’], τικος, 6, (Claudius [but in Tacit. 
Aist. 5, 9 called Antonius]) Feliz, the eleventh procura- 
tor of Juda, (apparently between a.p. 52 and 60). 


651 


Φῆστος 


He was a freedman of Claudius and his mother Antonia, 
and the brother of Pallas, the powerful favorite of the 
emperor. He first married Drusilla [(?) see Dict. of 
Grk. and Rom. Biogr. s. v. 4], the granddaughter of 
Cleopatra and Antony; and afterwards Drusilla, the 
daughter of Herod Agrippa. Acc. to Tacitus “per 
omnem saevitiam ac libidinem jus regium servili in- 
genio exercuit”’, and by his cruelty and injustice he 
stimulated the rage of the turbulent Jews against the 
Roman rule. When he had retired from the province 
and come to Rome, the Jews of Cesarea accused him 
before the emperor, but through the intercession of his 
brother Pallas he was acquitted by Nero (cf. Tacit. 
hist. 5, 9, ὅ sq.; annal. 12, 54; Suet. vit. Claudii, 28; 
Joseph. antt. 20,7, 1 sq. and 8, 5 sq.; 7, 9; Ὁ. j. 2, 13): 
Acts xxiii. 24, 26; xxiv. 3, 22, 24sq. 27; xxv.14. Cf. 
Win. RWB.s. v.; Paret in Herzog iv. 354; [V. Schmidt 
in Herzog ed. 2, iv. 518 sq.]; Overbeck in Schenkel ii. 
263 sq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 303 sq. § 19, 4; 
(Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xli.].* 

φήμη. -ης, ἡ, (φημί), fame, report: Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv. 
14. [(From Hom. down.)]* 

φημί; impf. ἔφην ; (fr. φάω, to bring forth into the 
light [cf. Curtius §407]); hence [fr. Hom. down] prop. 
to make known one’s thoughts, to declare; to say: ἔφη, he 
said (once on a time), Mt. xxvi. 61; historical writers, 
in quoting the words of any one, prefix φησίν, ἔφη, (Lat. 
ait, inquit): Lk. xxii. 58; Acts viii. 36, and often; 
φησίν and ἔφη are used of a person replying, Mt. xiii. 
29; Lk. vii. 40; Jn. i. 23; ix. 38; Acts vii. 2, ete.; of 
one who asks a question, Mt. xxvii. 23; Acts xvi. 30; 
xxi. 37; ἔφη μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ, Acts xxvi. 24; ἀποκριθεὶς 
ἔφη, Mt. viii. 8; φησίν is interjected into the recorded 
speech of another [cf. W. § 61, 6], Mt. xiv.8; Acts xxv. 
5, 22; xxvi. 25; also ἔφη, Acts xxiii. 35; φησίν, like the 
Lat. ait, inquit, is employed esp. in the later Grk. usage 
with an indefinite subject (‘impersonally’) [ef. man sagt, 
on dit, they say] (inserted in a sentence containing the 
words of another [cf. W. u.s.]): 2 Co. x. 10 where L 
Tr mre. WH mre. φασίν (cf. Passow ii. p. 2238; [L. 
and S. s.v. 11.1]; Β. § 129, 19; [W. ὃ 58, 9b.B.; § 64, 
37). φησίν 6. ὁ θεός, 1 Co. vi. 16 [here Lchm. br. φησίν]; 
Heb. viii. 5; [W.522 (486 sq.)]. The constructions of 
the verb are the foll.: ἔφη αὐτῷ, αὐτοῖς, he replied to 
him, to them, Mt. iv. 7; xiii. 28; xxi. 27, ete. ; Mk. [ix. 
12 TTrtxt. WH]; xiv. 29; Lk. vii.44; Acts xxvi. 32; 
ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ ἔφη, Lk. xxiii. 3; ἔφη πρός τινα, Lk. xxii. 
70; Acts x. 28; xvi. 37; xxvi. 1; with an acc. of the 
thing, 1 Co. x. 15, 19; foll. by ὅτε, 1 Co. x. 19; τοῦτο ete. 
ὅτι, 1 Co. vii. 29 [Rec.be# εἰς ; al. om. dre]; xv. 50; foll. 
by an ace. with inf., Ro. iii. 8. [On its alleged omission, 
see W.$64, 7a. Comp.: σύμ-φημι. 

φημίζω: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. ἐφημίσθη ; esp. freq. 
in the poets fr. Hesiod down; to spread a report, to 
disseminate by report: Mt. xxviii. 15 T WH mrg. (after 
codd. 8A 33etc.) for Scadnu. 4. v.* 

Φῆστος, -ov, 5, (Porcius) Festus, a procurator of Judea, 
the successor of Felix [c. A.D. 60] (see Φῆλιξ [and reff., 


φθάνω 


esp. Schiirer p. 308 sq.]): Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 1, 4, 9, 
12-14, 22-24; xxvi. 24 sq. 32. (Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 9 
and 9, 1; b.j. 2, 14, 1.) * 

φθάνω: 1 aor. ἔφθασα [W.§ 15s. v.]; pf. ἔφθακα (1 Th. 
ii. 16 Ltxt. WH mrg.); fr. Hom. down; 1. to come 
before, precede, anticipate: ἡμεῖς od μὴ φθάσωμεν (see μή, 
IV. 2) rods κοιμηθέντας, we shall not get the start of those 
who have fallen asleep, i.e. we shall not attain to the 
fellowship of Christ sooner than the dead, nor have pre- 
cedence in blessedness, 1 Th. iv. 15; ἔφθασεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς 
ἡ ὀργή, (God’s penal) wrath came upon them unexpect- 
edly, 1 Th. ii. 15; ἔφθασεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ, 
the kingdom of God has come upon you sooner than you 
expected, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. xi. 20; [but all the preceding 
exx. except the first are referred by the majority of re- 
cent interpp. to the foll. head ;—a meaning esp. common 
when the verb is construed with prepositions]. 2. 
in the Alex. [and other later] writ. the idea of pri- 
ority disappears, fo come to, arrive at: eis τι, Phil. iii. 
16; to reach, altain to, a thing, Ro. ix. 31; ἄχρι τινός, 
2 Co. x. 14; (τινί, to a thing, Tob. v. 19; ἕως τοῦ ovpa- 
νοῦ, Test. xii. Patr. p. 530 [i. 6. test. Rub. 5 fin.]; ἡ pe- 
γαλωσύνη σου ἐμεγαλύνθη καὶ ἔφθασεν eis τὸν οὐρανόν, 
Dan. 4, 19 Theod. [ef. 17, 25; φθ. ἕως τῶν οὐρανῶν, 2 Chr. 
Xxvill. 9; ἔφθασεν 6 μὴν 6 ἕβδομος, 2 Esdr. iii. 1; Philo 
de mund. opif. $1; de legg. alleg. iii. 76 ; de confus. lings. 
§ 29; Plut. apotheg. Lacon. § 28; de Alex. s. virt. s. 
fort. orat. ii. 5. Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.; Geldart, Mod. 
Greek, p. 206; W.§2,1b.]). [Comp.: προτφθάνω. " 

φθαρτός, -7, -dv, (φθείρω), corruptible, perishable, (Vulg. 
corruptibilis): 1 Co, ix. 25; 1 Pet. i. 23; ἄνθρωπος, i. e. 
mortal, opp. to ὁ ἄφθαρτος θεός, Ro. i. 23; οὐ φθαρτοῖς 
ἀργυρίῳ ἢ χρυσίῳ, not with corruptible things, with silver 
or gold, 1 Pet. i. 18 [W. § 59, 5 fin.] (χρυσὸς x. ἄργυρος, 
οὐσίαι φθαρταί, Philo de cherub. § 14; οὐκ ἄργυρον οὐδὲ 
χρυσόν τινα, ἣ ἄλλο τῶν ev ὕλαις φθαρταῖς, de congr. eru- 
dit. grat. § 20); neut. τὸ φθαρτόν, that which is liable 
to corruption, [τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο this corruptible (A.V.)], 
1 Co. xv. 53 sq. (Diod. 1, 6; Philo de lege. alleg. 2, 1; 
de cherub. § 2; [Aristot.], Plut., Sext. Emp., al.; 2 Mace. 
vii. 16; Sap. ix. 15; xiv. 8.)* 

φθέγγομαι; 1 aor. ptep. φθεγξάμενος ; (φέγγος [but 
ef. Vaniéek p. 1176], ΦΑΩ); depon. mid.; fr. Hom. 
down; 1. to give out a sound, noise, or cry; used 
by the Grks. of any sort of sound or voice, whether of 
man or animal or inanimate object —as of thunder, mu- 
sical instruments, ete.; [φθέγγ. denotes sound in its re- 
lation to the hearer rather than to its cause; the 
μέγα λαλῶν is a braggart, the μέγα φθεγγόμενος is a lofty 
orator; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 53]. 2. to proclaim; 
to speak, utter: Acts iv. 18; ὑπέρογκα, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (ἄδικα, 
Sap. i. 8); ὑποζύγιον ἄφωνον ἐν ἀνθρωπίνῃ φωνῇ φθεγξά- 
μενον, 2 Pet. ii. 16. [Comp.: ἀπο-φθέγγομαι. * 

φθείρω; fut. φθερῶ; 1 aor. ἔφθειρα; Pass., pres. φθείρο- 
pat; 2 aor. ἐφθάρην ; 2 fut. φθαρήσομαι ; (akin to Germ. 
verderben); Sept. for nnw; [fr. Hom. down]; to cor- 
rupt, to destroy: prop. τὸν ναὸν rod θεοῦ (in the opinion 
o the Jews the temple was corrupted, or ‘destroyed’, 


652 


φθορα 


when any one defiled or in the slightest degree damaged 
anything in it, or if its guardians neglected their duties ; 
cf. Deyling, Observy. sacrae, vol. ii. p. 505 sqq.), drop= 
ping the fig., to lead away a Christian church from that 
state of knowledge and holiness in which it ought to 
abide, 1 Co. iii. 17°; τινά, to punish with death, 1 Co. 
iii. 17°; i. q. to bring to want or beggary (ef. our ruin 
[A. V. corrupt]), 2 Co. vii. 2; pass. to be destroyed, to 
perish: ἔν τινι, by a thing, Jude 10; ἐν with a dat. denot 
ing the condition, ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν, 2 Pet. ii. 12 LT Tr 
WH. ἴῃ an ethical sense, ‘o corrupt, deprave : φθείρου- 
σιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί (a saying of Menander [see 
ἦθος, 2), which seems to have passed into a proverb [see 
Wetstein ad loc.; Gataker, Advers. miscel. l.i.¢.1 p. 
174 sq.]), 1 Co. xv. 33; the character of the inhabitants 
of the earth, Rev. xix. 2; pass. φθείρομαι ἀπό τινος, to 
be so corrupted as to fall away from a thing [see ἀπό, 
1. 8 α.1, 2 Co. xi. 3; φθειρόμενον κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυμίας, 
[R. V. waxeth corrupt ete.], Eph. iv. 22. [Comp.: δια-ν 
κατα-φθείρω.} " 

φθιν-οπωρινός, -ἤ, -όν, (φθινόπωρον, late autumn; ἔτ. 
φθίνω to wane, waste away, and ὀπώρα autumn), au- 
tumnal (Polyb. 4, 37, 2; Aristot. h. a. 5,11; [Strab.], 
Plut.): δένδρα Péwor. autumn trees, i. e. trees such as 
they are at the close of autumn, dry, leafless and with- 
out fruit, hence ἄκαρπα is added; used of unfruitful, 
worthless men, Jude 12 [cef. Bp. Lghift. A Fresh Re- 
vision ete. p. 134 sq. ].* 

φθόγγος, -ov, 6, (φθέγγομαι, q. v.), α musical sound, 
whether vocal or instrumental (Sap. xix. 17): 1 Co. 
xiv. 7; Ro. x. 18, in this latter pass. Paul transfers 
what is said in Ps. xviii. (xix.) 5 to the voices of the 
preachers of the gospel. (Hom., Tragg., Xen., Plat., 
al.) * 

φθονέω, -d; (φθόνος) ; fr. Hom. down; to envy: τινί, 
one, Gal. v. 26 [here Ltxt. Tr mrg. WH mrg. read the 
aceus.; see B. § 132,15 Rem.; W. $31, 1 b.].* 

φθόνος, -ov, ὁ, fr. [Pind. and] Hadt. down, envy: Ro. i. 
29; Gal. vy. 21; 1 Tim.vi.4; Tit.iii.3; 1 Pet.ii. 1; διὰ 
φθόνον, for envy, i. e. prompted by envy [see διά, B. IL. 
2b.], Mt.xxvii.18; Mk. xv. 10; Phil. i. 15, (Dio Cass. 
44,36); πρὸς φθόνον ἐπιποθεῖ τὸ πνεῦμα ὃ κατῴκησεν [but 
see κατοικίζω] ἐν ἡμῖν ; doth the Spirit which took up its 
abode within us (i. 6. the Holy Spirit) long enviously? 
(see πρός, I. 3 g.), Jas. iv. 5 [but 7 (WH in second mrg.) 
drop the interrog.]; see on the pass. Grimm in the 
Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 934sqq. [SY¥N. see 
Gros, 2 fin.]* 

φθορά, -as, ἡ, (φθείρω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, 
1. corruption, destruction, perishing, (opp. to γένεσις, ori- 
gin, often in Plat., Aristot., Plut.; opp. to σωτηρία, Plat. 
Phileb. p. 35 e.; for τι, Ps. cii. (cili.) 4; Jon. ii. 7): 
Ro. viii. 21 (on which see δουλεία) ; 2 Pet. ii. 12" [some 
(cf. R.V. mrg.) take $6. here actively: εἰς φθοράν, to de- 
stroy|; ἐν φθορᾷ, in a state of corruption or decomposi- 
tion (of the body at burial\, 1 Co. xv. 42; by meton. 
that which is subject to corruption, what is perishable, opp. 
to ἀφθαρσία, ibid. 50; in the Christian sense, the loss of 


φιάλη 


salvation, eternal m?sery (which elsewhere is called ἀπώ- 
Reta), Col. ii. 22 (see ἀπόχρησις) ; opp. to ζωὴ αἰώνιος, 
Gal. vi. 8, cf. Schott ad loc. 2. in the N. T. inan 
ethical sense, corruption i. e. moral decay: 2 Pet. i. 4; 
ii. 12” [some take the word here actively (R.V. txt. in 
their destroying), al. refer it to 1 above],19; with τῆς 
ζωῆς added, Sap. xiv. 12.* 

φιάλη, -ης, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for py, α broad, 
shallow bowl, deep saucer [Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Patera; 
, B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Vial]: Rev. v. 8; xv. 7; xvi. 1-4 8, 
"ΠΟ; 17; xcyais oll soci 9) 

φιλ-άγαθος, -ov, (fr. φίλος and ἀγαθός), loving goodness: 
Tit.i.8. (Sap. vii. 22; Plut. praec. conjug.c.17; also 
comp. Thes. 6. Rom. 6. 2; [φιλάγαθος οὐ φίλαυτος, Aris- 
tot. magn. mor. ii. 14 p. 1212518; Polyb. 6, 53,9; Philo 
de vit. Moys. ii. § 2].)* 

Φιλαδέλφεια [TWH -ia (cf. ΤᾺΣ, Proleg. p. 87), see 
1, ε1. -as, ἡ, Phi.adelphia (now Alahshar, Allahschir, [or 
Ala-Shehr i. e. “The White City ” (Sayce)]), a city of 
Lydia in Asia Minor, situated near the eastern base 
of Mount Tmolus, founded and named by the Per- 
gamene king Attalus II. Philadelphus. After the death 
of king Attalus III. Philometor, Β. c. 133, it together 
with his entire kingdom came by his will under the 
jurisdiction of the Romans: Rev. i. 11; iii. 7.* 

φιλαδελφία, -as, ἡ, (φιλάδελφος), the love of brothers 
(or sisters), brotherly love, (prop., 4 Mace. xiii. 22; xiv. 
1; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 12]; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4; 
Leian. dial. deor. 26,2; Plut. libell. περὶ φιλαδελφίας; 
[ef. Babrius 47, 15]) ; in the N.T. the love which Chris- 
tians cherish for each other as ‘brethren’ (see ἀδελφός, 
4); [love of the brethren] (Vulg. caritas or amor fra- 
ternitatis): Ro. xii. 10; 1 ΤῊ. ἵν. 9; Heb. xiii. 1; 1 Pet. 
8 22.) 2) Pet. 1: 7; cf. 1 Jn. v. 1.* 

φιλ- ἄδελφος, -ov, (φίλος and ἀδελφός), loving brother or 
sister (Soph., Plut., Anthol.) ; in a broader sense, loving 
one like a brother, Xen. mem. 2, 3, 17; loving one’s fellow- 
countrymen, of an Israelite, 2 Mace. xv. 14; of a Chris- 
tian loving Christians, 1 Pet. iii. 8 [R.V. loving as breth- 
ren].* 

φίλανδρος, -ov, (φίλος and ἀνήρ), [fr. Aeschyl. down 
(in other senses) ], loving her husband: Tit. ii. 4 (φίλαν- 
Spor καὶ σώφρονες γυναῖκες, Plut. praec. conj. 6. 28).* 

φιλανθρωπία, -as, ἡ, (φιλάνθρωπος), fr. Xen. and Plat. 
down, love of mankind, benevolence, (Vulg. humanitas), 
[R.V. kindness]: Acts xxviii. 2; Tit. iii.4. [Cf. Field, 
Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad 1]. ce.]* 

φιλανθρώπως, adv., humanely, kindly: Acts xxvii. 3. 
(isocr., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. ix. 27.)* 

φιλαργυρία, -as, 7, (φιλάργυρος), love of money, avarice : 
i Tim. vi. 10. (Isocr., Polyb., Ceb. tab. c. 23; Diod. 5, 
26; [Diog. Laért. 6, 50; Stob. flor. 10, 38; Philo de 
mut. nom. ὃ 40]; Plut., Leian., Hdian. 6, 9, 17 (8); 4 
Mace. i. 26.) [Cf Trench, Syn. § xxiv.]* 

φιλ-άργυρος, -ον, (φίλος and ἄργυρος), loving money, 
avaricious: Lk. xvi. 14; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Soph., Xen., 
Plat., al.) * 


φίλ-αντος, -ov, (φίλος and αὐτός), loving one’s self; too 


653 


pirew 


intent on one’s own interests, selfish: 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Aris- 
tot. [(ef. φιλάγαθος) ; rhet. 1, 11, 26 (where cf. Cope) 
ἀνάγκη πάντας φιλαύτους εἶναι ἢ μᾶλλον ἢ ἧττον] ; Philo, 
lege. alleg. 1, 15; Plut., [Epict.], Leian., Sext. Emp.; 
διὰ τὸ φύσει πάντας εἶναι φιλαύτους, Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 1.) 
[Cf£. Trench, Syn. § xciii.]* 

φιλέω, -ὦ ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐφίλει ; 1 aor. ἐφίλησα; 
pf. πεφίληκα; (φίλος); fr. Hom. down; 1. ἰο love; 
to be friendly to one, (Sept. several times for 398) : τινά, 
Mt. x. 37; Jn. v. 20 [here L mrg. ἀγαπᾷ]; xi. 8, 36; xv. 
19; xvi. 27; xx. 2; xxi. 15-17; 1 Co. xvi. 22; Rev. iii. 
19; with ἐν πίστει added, with a love founded in and 
springing from faith, Tit. iii.15; τί, to love i. e. delight 
in, long for, a thing: τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν, Mt. xxiii. 6; 
ἀσπασμούς, Lk. xx. 46; τὴν ψυχήν, to be desirous of pre- 
serving one’s life (opp. to μισεῖν, to hate it when it can- 
not be kept without denying Christ), Jn. xii. 25; with 
nouns denoting virtues or vices: τὸ yevdos, Rey. xxii. 
15 (σοφίαν, Prov. xxix. 3; viii.17); foll. by an inf., like 
the Lat. amo facere, to love to do, i. 8. to do with pleasure: 
Mt. vi. 5 (Is. lvi. 10; Pind. Nem. 1,15; Aeschyl. septem 
619; Agam. 763; Suppl. 769; Eur. Iph. Taur. 1198; 
Rhes. 394; Xen. hipparch. 7, 9; Ael. ν. ἢ. 14, 37). 2. 
to kiss: τινά, Mt. xxvi. 48; Mk. xiv. 44; Lk. xxii. ἀν, 
(often in the Grk. writ.; Sept. for pw, Gen. xxvii. 26 
sq-, and often). 3. As to the distinction between 
ἀγαπᾶν and φιλεῖν : the former, by virtue of its connec- 
tion with ἄγαμαι, properly denotes a love founded in ad- 
miration, veneration, esteem, like the Lat. diligere, to 
be kindly disposed to one, wish one well; but φιλεῖν de- 
notes an inclination prompted by sense and emotion, 
Lat. amare ; 6 μή του δεόμενος οὐδέ τι ἀγαπῴη ἄν - ὁ δὲ μὴ 
ἀγαπῴη [-πῶν ()}, οὐδ᾽ ἂν φιλοῖ, Plat. Lys. p. 215b.; 
ἐφιλήσατε αὐτὸν (Julius Caesar) ὡς πατέρα καὶ ἠγαπήσατε 
ὡς εὐεργέτην, Dio Cass. 44, 48; ut scires, eum a me 
non diligi solum, verum etiam amari, Cic. ad fam. 13, 
47; L. Clodius valde me diligit vel, ut ἐμφατικώτερον 
dicam, valde me amat, id. ad Brut. 1. Hence men are 
said ἀγαπᾶν God, not φιλεῖν ; and God is said ἀγαπῆσαι 
τὸν κόσμον (Jn. iii. 16), and φιλεῖν the disciples of Christ 
(Jn. xvi. 27); Christ bids us ἀγαπᾶν (not φιλεῖν) τοὺς 
ἐχθρούς (Mt. v. 44), because love as an emotion can- 
not be commanded, but only love as a choice. Wis 
dom says, τοὺς ἐμὲ φιλοῦντας ἀγαπῶ, Prov. viii. 17. As 
a further aid in judging of the difference between the 
two words compare the foll. pass.: Jn. xi. 3, 5, 36; xxi. 
15-17; [even in some cases where they might appear 
to be used interchangeably (e.g. Jn. xiv. 23; xvi. 27) 
the difference can still be traced]. From what has 
been said, it is evident that ἀγαπᾶν is not, and cannot 
be, used of sexual love [but it is so used occasionally by 
the later writers; cf. Plut. Pericl. 24,12 p. 165e.; symp. 
7 p. 180 Ὁ. ὁ ἐρώμενος τὸν ἐραστὴν ἀγαπᾶ ; of. Steph. 
Thesaur. i. p. 209 a.; Soph. Lex. 5. v. ἀγαπάω, 2; Wool- 
sey in the Andover Rev. for Aug. 1885, p.170sq.]. Cf. 
Tittmann, Syn. N. T. i. p.50 sqq.; Cremer s. v. ἀγαπάω 
[416 Aufl. p. 9 sq.]; Trench § xii.; [Schmidt ch. 136, 
esp. §6; Cope, Aristot. rhet. vol. i. App. A. (also given 


φίλη 


in the Journ. of Philol. for 1868, Ρ. 88 sqq.) ; also Héhkne 
in (Luthardt’s) Zeitschr. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. s. w. 
for 1882, p. 6 sqq.; esp. Woolsey ἃ. 8... COMP.: κατα- 
préa.] * 

φίλη, ἡ, see φίλος, 2. 

φιλήδονος, -ον, (φίλος and ἡδονή), loving pleasure: 2 
Tim. iii. 4. (Polyb. 40, 6, 10; Plut., Leian., al.) * 

φίλημα, -ros, τό, fr. Aeschyl. down, a kiss (see φιλέω, 
2): Lk. vii. 45; xxii. 48, (Prov. xxvii. 6; Cant. i. 2); 
ἅγιον, the kiss with which, as a sign of fraternal affection, 
Christians were accustomed to welcome or dismiss their 
companions in the faith: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 
Co. xiii. 12; 1 Th. v. 26; it is also called φίλημα ἀγάπης, 
1 Pet. v. 14. Cf. Kahle, De osculo sancto (Regiom. 
1867); [B. D.s. v. Kiss; also Dict. of Christ. Antiq. 
8. v. Kiss ].* 

Φιλήμων, -ovos, 6, Philemon, of Colosse, converted to 
Christianity by Paul (Philem. 19), and the recipient of 
the lovely little letter which bears his name in the N. T.: 
Philem. 1. [BB.DD.s. v.; esp. Bp. Lghift. Com. on 
Col. and Philem., Intr.]* 

Φίλητος ([Chandler § 325; but] R LT Tr Φιλητός, see 
τυχικός [ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 103]), -ov, 6, Philetus, a heretic : 
2 Tim. ii. 17.* 

φιλία, -as, ἡ, (φίλος), friendship: with a gen. of the 
object, Jas. iv. 4. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)]* 

Φιλιππήσιος, -ov, 6, α Philippian: Phil. iv. 15." 

Φίλιπποι, -wy, of, [on the plur. cf. W. § 27, 3], Philippi, 
a city of Macedonia Prima [see B. D s. v. Macedonia], 
situated on [near] the northern coast of the Agean 
Sea, between the rivers Strymon and Nestus, and the 
cities Neapolis and Amphipolis. It took its name from 
Philip I. of Macedon, who built it up from a village called 
Kpnvides, and adorned and fortified it: Acts xvi. 12 (on 
this pass. see κολώνια) ; xx. 6; Phil. i. 1; 1 Th. ii. 2. 
[See Bp. Lghifi. Com. on Philip., Intr. 111." 

Φίλιππος, -ov, ὁ, Philip ; 1. ason of Herod the 
Great by his fifth wife, Cleopatra of Jerusalem (Joseph. 
antt. 17, 1,3), and by far the best of his sons. He was 
tetrarch of Gaulanitis, Trachonitis, Auranitis, Batanea, 
and (ace. to the disputed statement of Lk. iii. 1) of Itu- 
rea also [ef. Schiirer as below; but see B. D. Am. ed. 
s. v. Iturzea]; and the founder of the cities of Caesarea 
Philippi (in the Decapolis) and Julias. After having 
lived long in celibacy, he married Salome, the daughter 
of Herod [Philip, the disinherited ; see below] his half- 
brother (Joseph. antt. 18, 5,4). He ruled mildly, justly 
and wisely thirty-seven years, and in A. D. 84died with- 
out issue, leaving a erateful memory of his reign in the 
minds of his subjects (Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 and 4, 6; 
b. j. 2, 9,1): Mt. xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 27; Lk. iii. 1; ef. 
Keim in Schenkel iii. p. 40 sqq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeit- 
gesch. § 17, a.; [BB. DD.]. In Mt. xiv. 3; Mk. vi. 17, 
and Lk. iii. 19 Ree. it is said that his wife was Herodias 
(see Ἡρωδιάς) ; thus Herod, the son of Herod the Great 
by Mariamne the daughter of the hich-priest Simon 
(Joseph. antt. 18,5, 1; b.j. 1, 28,4), who lived as a pri- 
vate citizen in comparative obscurity and was the first 


654 


φίλος 


husband of Herodias (Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 4), seems to 
have been confounded with Philip, who as a ruler was 
better known (ef. Volkmar, Ueber ein. histor. Irrthum 
in den Evangg., in Zeller’s Theol. Jahrbb. for 1846, p. 363 
sqq-). Many interpreters (see esp. Krebs, Observwv. ete. 
Ρ. 87 sq.; [Deyling, Observv. sacr. vol. ii. (ed. 2) p. 342 
sqq-]), in vindication of the Evangelists, make the some- 
what improbable conjecture that the first husband of 
Herodias had two names, one a family name Herod, the 
other a proper name Philip; [yet so Winer, RWB. s. v. 
Philippus, 5; BB. DD.; Gerlach in the Zeitschr. f. Luth. 
Theol. for 1869, p. 32 sq.; Meyer on Mt. 1. c.; Weiss on 
ΜΚ. 1. e.]. 2. Philip of Bethsaida [in Galilee], one 
of the apostles: Mt.x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14; Jn. i. 
43-48 (44-49); vi. 5, 7; xii. 21 sq.; xiv. 8sq.; Acts i. 
18. 3. Philip, one of the seven deacons of the 
church at Jerusalem, and also an ‘evangelist’ (εὐαγγελι- 
στής, 4.ν.): Acts vi. 5; viii. 5-40; xxi. 8.* 

φιλότθεος, -ov, (φίλος and θεός), loving [A.V. lovers of] 
God: 2 Tim. iii. 4.  ({Aristot. rhet. 2, 17, 6], Philo, 
Leian., al.) * ; 

Φιλόλογος, -ov, 6, [lit. ‘fond of talk’], Philologus, a 
certain Christian: Ro. xvi.15. [Cf. Bp. Lghift. Com. 
on Philip., note on “ Czesar’s Household ” § 10.] * 

φιλονεικία, -as, ἡ, (φιλόνεικος, q. V-), love of strife, eager- 
ness to contend, (Plat., Plut., Leian., al.; 4 Mace. i. 26); 
contention: Lk. xxii. 24. (2 Mace. iv. 4; Thue. 8, 763 
Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 4; Antonin. 3, 4; in a good sense, 
emulation, Xen., Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) * 

φιλό-νεικος, -ov, (φίλος, and νεῖκος strife), fond of strife, 
contentious: 1Co. xi. 16. (Pind., Plat., Polyb., Joseph., 
Plut., al.; in a good sense, emulous, Xen., Plat., Plut., 
als))* 

φιλο-ξενία, -as, 4, (φιλόξενος, q. v-), love to strangers, 
hospitality: Ro. xii. 13; Heb. xiii. 2. (Plat.,- Polyb., 
al.) * 

φιλόξενος, -ov, (φίλος and ξένος), fr. Hom. down, hos- 
pitable, generous to guests, [given to hospitality]: 1 Tim. 
τ... 9} ΕΠ} {Ὁ}. 8.2.1 δι: ἂν- ges 

φιλο-πρωτεύω ; (φιλόπρωτος, fond of being first, striv- 
ing after the first place; fr. φίλος and πρῶτος : Artem. 
oneir. 2, 32; Plut. [Alcib. 2, 2]; mor. p. 471 6. [1. 6. de 
tranquil. an. 12; p. 793 e. i. e. an seni sit ete. 18, 8]); 
to aspire after pre-eminence, to desire to be first: 3 Jn. 9. 
(Several times in eccles. writ.) * 

φίλος, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, friendly [ef. L. and 5. 
s. v. I. and IL]: φίλον εἶναί τινι, to be friendly to one, 
wish him well, Acts xix. 31; 1. ὁ φίλος, Sept. for 
YN, IOs, subst., a friend: Lk. vii. 6; xi. 5; xv. 6; xvi. 
9; xxiii. 12; Acts xxvii.3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); joined with 
συγγενεῖς, Lk. xxi. 16; an associate, opp. to δοῦλος, Jn. xv. 
15; φίλοι ἀναγκαῖοι, [A. V.near friends] Lat. necessitate 
conjuncti, Acts x. 24; φίλε, friend, in kindly address, 
Lk. xiv. 10; with agen. of the subject, ὁ φίλος τινός, 
Lk. xi. 6, [8]; xii. 4; xiv. 12; xv. 29; Jn. xi. 11; xv. 
18 sq.; spec. he who associates familiarly with one, a com- 
panion, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34; ὁ @. τοῦ νυμφίου, the 
rabbinical ;avjw [q.v. in Buxtorf or Levy] (i.e. ‘son of 


φιλοσοφία 


gladness’), one of the bridegroom’s friends who on his 
behalf asked the hand of the bride and rendered him 
various services in closing the marriage and celebrating 
the nuptials [B. D.s. v. Marriage, Π1.; Edersheim, Jew- 
ish Social Life, p. 152], Jn. iii. 29; φίλος τοῦ Καίσαρος, on 
Caesar’s side, loyal to his interests, Jn. xix. 12; θεοῦ, esp. 
dear to God, peculiarly favored with his intimacy, Jas. 
fi. 23 ({ef. Harnack and Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
10,1; Rénsch in the Zeitschr. f. wissenschaftl. Theol. for 
1873, p.583 sq.]; also in prof. auth. cf. Grimm, Exeget. 
Hdbch. on Sap. vii. 27 p. 164); with a gen. of the thing, 
one who finds his pleasure in a thing, φίλος τοῦ κόσμου, 
Jas. iv. 4. 2. Fem. φίλη, 9,4 (female) friend: Lk. 
xy. 9." 

φιλοσοφία, -as, ἡ, (fr. φιλόσοφος), prop. love (and pur- 
suit) of wisdom; used in the Grk. writ. of either zeal for 
or skill in any art or science, any branch of knowledge, 
see Passow 8. v. [cf. L.and S.s.v.]. Once in the N. T. 
of the theology, or rather theosophy, of certain Jewish- 
Christian ascetics, which busied itself with refined and 
speculative inquiries into the nature and classes of 
angels, into the ritual of the Mosaic law and the regu- 
lations of Jewish tradition respecting practical life: Col. 
fi. 8; see Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 1 p. 298 sq.; [Bp. Lehtft. 
on Col. |. c., and Prof. Westcott in B. D. 8. v. Philoso- 
phy].* 

φιλόσοφος, -ov, ὁ, (φίλος and σοφόςῚ, a philosopher, one 
given to the pursuit of wisdom or learning [Xen., Plat., 
al.]; in a narrower sense, one who investigates and dis- 
cusses the causes of things and the highest good: Acts xvii. 
18. [See reff. under the preceding word.]* 

φιλόστοργος, -ον, (φίλος, and στεργή the mutual love of 
parents and children; also of husbands and wives), lov- 
ing affection, prone to love, loving tenderly; used chiefly 
of the reciprocal tenderness of parents and children: 
τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ (dat. of respect) εἰς ἀλλήλους, [R. V. in 
love of the brethren tenderly affectioned one to another], 
Ro. xii. 10. (Xen., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) ΟἿ, Fritzsche, 
Com. on Rom. vol. iii. p. 69.* 

φιλότεκνος, -ov, (φίλος and τέκνον), loving one’s off- 
spring or children: joined with φίλανδρος (as in Plut. 
mor. p. 769 c.), of women, Tit. ii. 4. (4 Mace. xv. 3-5; 
Hat. 2,66; Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Plut., Leian., al.) * 

φιλοτιμέομαι, -οὔμαι; (φιλότιμος, and this fr. φίλος 
and τιμή) ; depon. pass. (with fut. mid.); freq. in Grk. 
writ. fr. Andoc., Lysias, Xen., Plat. down; a. to be 
fond of honor; to be actuated by love of honor; froma 
love of honor to strive to bring something to pass. b. 
foll. by an inf., to be ambitious to ete., 1 Th. iv.11; Ro. 
xv. 20; do strive earnestly, make it one’s aim, 2 Co. ν. 9.* 

φιλοφρόνως, (φιλόφρων, q. v.), adv., kindly, in a friendly 
manner, [A.V. courteously]: Acts xxviii. 7. (2 Mace. iii. 
9; 4 Mace. viii. 5; occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. 
and] Hdt. down.)? 

φιλόφρων, -ov, (φίλος and φρήν), fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. 
down, friendly, kind: 1 Pet. iii. 8 Rec.* 

Φφιμόω, -ὦ, [inf. φιμοῖν, 1 Pet. ii. 15 WH (see their App. 
p- 166 and Intr. § 410; B. 44 (38); see ἀποδεκατόω] ; 


655 


φοβέω 


fut. φιμώσω; 1 aor. ἐφίμωσα : Pass., pf. impv. 2 pers. 
sing. πεφίμωσο; 1 aor. ἐφιμώθην; (φιμός a muzzle) ; to 
close the mouth with a muzzle, to muzzle: prop. βοῦν, the 
ox, 1 Co. ix.9 KG LWH txt. (see κημόω); 1 Tim. ν. 18, 
fr. Deut. xxv. 4 where for D0M; (univ. to fasten, come 
press, τῷ ξύλῳ τὸν αὐχένα τινός, Arstph. nub. 592); 
metaph. ἰ0 slop the mouth, make speechless, reduce to si 
lence: τινά, Mt. xxii. 34; 1 Pet. ii. 15; pass. to become 
speechless, hold one’s peace, Mt. xxii. 12; Mk. i. 25; iv. 
39; Lk. iv. 35, (Joseph. b. j. prooem. § 5; lib. 1, 22, 3; 
Leian. de morte peregr. 15; univ. to be kept in check, 
4 Mace. i. 35).* 

Φλέγων [i. 6. ‘ burning’), -ovros, 6, Phlegon, a Christian 
at Rome: Ro. xvi. 14.* 

φλογίζω ; (φλόξ, q. v-); to ignite, set on fire, (Sir. iii. 
80; Ex. ix. 24; Ps. xevi. (xevii.) 3; to burn up, 1 Mace. 
iii. 5; Soph. Philoct. 1199): in fig. dise. to operate de- 
structively, have a most pernicious power, Jas. iii. 6; in 
the pass. of that in which the destructive influences are 
kindled, ibid. (see πῦρ, p. 558” top).* 

φλόξ, gen. φλογός, ἡ, (φλέγω [to burn; cf. Lat. ‘flagro’, 
ete.]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 299 and na), a flame: 
Lk. xvi. 24; on the phrases φλὸξ πυρός and πῦρ φλογός 
see πῦρ, p. ὅ58". 

φλνυαρέω, -@; (φλύαρος, 4. V-); to uller nonsense, talk 
idly, prate, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.) ; to bring 
forward idle accusations, make empty charges, Xen. Hell. 
6,3, 12; joined with βλασφημεῖν, Isocr. 5, 33: τινὰ λόγοις 
πονηροῖς, to accuse one falsely with malicious words, 
3 Jn. 10 [A. V. prating against ete.].* P 

φλύαρος, -ov, (φλύω, ‘to boil up,’ “ throw up bubbles’, 
of water; and since bubbles are hollow and _ useless 
things, ‘to indulge in empty and foolish talk”); of per 
sons, uttering or doing silly things, garrulous, babbling, 
[A. V. tattlers]: 1 Tim. v. 13 [Dion. Hal. de comp. 
verb. 26, vol. v. 215, 3; al.]; of things, foolish, trifling, 
vain: φιλοσοφία, 4 Mace. v. 10. (Plat., Joseph. vit. 
§ 31; often in Plut.; Aeschyl. dial. Socr. 8, 13; al.)* 

φοβερός, -d, dv, (φοβέω), fr. Aeschyl. down, [fearful 
i. e.] 1. (actively) inspiring fear, terrible, formi- 
dable; Sept. for δὲ 12. 2. (passively) affected with 
fear, timid; in the N. T., only in the former (active) 
sense: Heb. x. 27, 31; xii. 21." 

oBew, -ὥ : Pass., pres. φοβοῦμαι ; impf. ἐφοβούμην; 
1 aor. ἐφοβήθην ; fut. φοβηθήσομαι ; (φόβος) ; fr. Hom. 
down; to terrify, frighten, Sap. xvii. 9; to put to flight by 
terrifying (to scare away). Pass. 1. to be put to 
Slight, to flee, (Hom.). 2. to fear, be afraid; Sept. 
very often for 83°; absol. to be struck with fear, to be 
seized with alarm: of those who fear harm or injury, Mt. 
x. 813 xiv. 30; xxv. 25; Mk. νυ. 88, 36; x. 82; xvi. 8; 
LK. viii. 50; xii. 7,32; Jn. xii. 15; xix. 8; Acts xvi. 38; 
xxii. 29; [Ro. xiii.4]; Heb. xiii.6; 1Jn.iv. 18; opp. to 
ὑψηλοφρονεῖν, Ro. xi. 20; of those startled by strange 
sights or occurrences, Mt. xiv. 27; xvii. 7; xxviii. 5, 10; 
Mk. vi. 50; Lk. i. 13, 30; ii. 10; ix. 34; [xxiv. 36 L in 
br.]; Jn. vi. 19, 20; Acts xviii.9; xxvii. 24, [but in the 
last two pass. perh. the exhortation has a wider ref.); 


φοβητρον 


Rev. i. 17; with σφόδρα added, Mt. xvii. 6; xxvii. 54; 
of those struck with amazement, [Mt.ix.8 LT Tr WH]; 
Mk. v. 15; Lk. v. 10; viii. 25, 35. with an acc. of 
the contents [cognate ace.] (see ἀγαπάω, sub fin.) : poBov 
μέγαν, lit. to ‘fear a great fear,’ fear exceedingly, Mk. 
iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9, (1 Mace. x. 8); φόβον αὐτῶν, the fear 
which they inspire [see φόβος, 1], 1 Pet. iii. 14 (Is. viii. 
12; τοῦ Ταντάλου, to be filled with the same fear as Tan- 
talus, Schol. ad Eur. Or. 6); with the synonymous πτόη- 
σιν (4. V-), 1 Pet. iii. 6. τινά, lo fear one, be afraid of 
one, lest he do harm, be displeased, ete.: Mt. x. 26; xiv. 
δ; xxi. 26,46; Mk. xi. 18, 32 [cf. B. $151, 11]; xii. 12; 
Lk. xix. 21; xx.19; xxii. 2; Jn. ix. 22; Acts v. 26[ef. 
B. § 139, 48; W. 505 (471)]; ix. 26; Ro. xiii. 3; Gal. 11. 
12; τὸν θεόν, God, the judge and avenger, Mt. x. 28; Lk. 
xii. 5; xxiii. 40, (Ex. i. 17, 21; 1 5. xii. 18); ri, to fear 
danger from something, Heb. xi. 23, 27; to fear (dread 
to undergo) some suffering, Rev. ii. 10. in imitation of 
the Hebr. (j 82), foll. by ἀπό τινος (ef. B. § 147, 3): 
Mt. x. 28; Lk. xii. 4, (Jer. i. 8, 17; x.2; Lev. xxvi. 2; 
1 Mace. ii. 62; viii. 12; Jud. v. 23). as in the Grk. 
writ., φοβοῦμαι μή, to fear lest, with the subjune. aor.: 
Acts [xxiii. 10 LT Tr WH]; xxvii. 17; μήπως, lest per- 
chance, Acts xxvii. 29 [here L μήπω (4. v. 2), al. μήπου 
(q-v.)]; 2 Co. xi. 3; xii. 20; φοβηθῶμεν (i. q. let us take 
anxious care) μήποτέ τις δοκῇ, lest any one may seem 
[see δοκέω, 2 fin.], Heb. iv. 1; φοβοῦμαι ὑμᾶς, μήπως 
κεκοπίακα, Gal. iv. 11 (see μήπως, 1 b.); φοβοῦμαι with 
an inf. to fear (i.e. hesitate) to do something (for fear 
of harm), Mt. i. 20; ii. 22; Mk. ix. 82; Lk. ix. 45, (for 
Dumerous exx. in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down see 
Passow 8. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2315°; [L. and S.s. v. B. 11. 
47). 3. to reverence, venerate, to treat with defer 
ence or reverential obedience: twa, Mk. vi. 20; Eph. v. 
83; τὸν θεόν, used of his devout worshippers, Lk. i. 50; 
xvili. 2,4; Acts x. 2, 22, 35; [Col. iii. 22 Rec.]; 1 Pet. 
ii. 17; Rev. xiv. 7; xix. 5; also τὸν κύριον, Col. iii. 22 
[GLTTr WH]; Rev. xv. 4; τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Rev. 
xi. 18, (Deut. iv. 10; v.29; vi. 2, 13, 24; xiii.4; xiv. 
22 (23); Prov. iii. 7; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10, and many 
other pass.; very often in Sir., ef. Wahl, Clavis Apocr. 
V. T. 5. v. fin.) ; of φοβούμενοι τ. θεόν spec. of proselytes : 
Acts xiii. 16, 26, (see σέβω). Comp.: ἐκ- φοβέω." 

[Syn.: ἐκπλήσσεσθαι to be astonished, prop. to be struck 
with terror, of a sudden and startling alarm; but, like our 
“astonish ” in popular use, often employed on comparative- 
ly slight occasions, and even then with strengthening parti- 
eles (as σφόδρα Mt. xix. 25, ὑπερπερισσῶς Mk. vii. 37) ; πτο- 
€tp to terrify, to agitate with fear; τρέμειν to tremble, pre- 
dominantly physical; φοβεῖν to fear, the general term; 
often used of a protracted state. Cf. Schmidt ch. 139.] 

ᾧόβητρον [or -θρον (so LTrWH; see WH. App. 
p- 149)], -ov, τό, (φοβέω), that which strikes terror, a 
terror, (cause of) fright: Lk. xxi. 11. (Plat. Ax. p. 867a.; 
Hippocr., Leian., al., (“but always in plur.” (L. and S.)]; 
for sn, Is. xix. 17.) * 

φόβος, -ov, 6, (φέβομαι ; like φόρος, τρόμος, πόνος, fr. 
Φέρω, τρέμω, πένομαι), ἔτ. Hom. down, Sept. for 7X1, ἽΠ9, 


656 


φοίνιξ 


ΤῚΣ (terror), MAM (id.) ; 1. fear, dread, terror, 
in a subjective sense (οὐδέν ἐστι φόβος εἰ μὴ προ- 
δοσία τῶν ἀπὸ λογισμοῦ βοηθημάτων, Sap. xvii. 11 ; mpoo~ 
δοκίαν λέγω κακοῦ τοῦτο, εἴτε φόβον, εἴτε δέος καλεῖτε, 
Plat. Protag. p. 358 d.): univ., 1 Jn. iv. 18; φόβος ἐπί 
twa πίπτει, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr]; Rev. xi. 11 Rec.; ére 
πίπτει, Lk. i. 12; Acts xix. 17 [RGT WH; Rev. xi. 1a 
LTTrWH]); ἐγένετο, Lk. i. 65; Acts v. 5,11; λαμβάνει 
τινά, Lk. vii. 16 (Hom. 1]. 11, 402); γίνεταί rem, Acts ii. 43; 
πλησθῆναι φόβου, Lk. v. 26; συνέχεσθαι φόβῳ, Lk. viii. 
37; ἔχειν φόβον, 1 Tim. v. 20 (Hdt.8, 12); κατεργάζεσθαί 
τινι φόβον, 2 Co. vii. 11; φοβεῖσθαι φόβον (see φοβέω, 2), 
Mk. iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9; with a gen. of the object added, 
1 Pet. iii. 14 [so W. § 82, 2; al. subject. gen.]; ἀπὸ φόβου, 
for fear, Lk. xxi. 26; ἀπὸ τοῦ of. for the fear, with 
which they were struck, Mt. xiv. 26; with a gen. of the 
object added, Mt. xxviii. 4; εἰς φόβον, unto (that ye 
may) fear, Ro. viii. 15; μετὰ φόβου, Mt. xxviii. 8; with 
καὶ τρόμου added, 2 Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. 5; Phil. ii. 12; 
ἐν φόβῳ κ. ἐν τρόμῳ (see τρόμος), 1 Co. ii. 8; τινὰ ἐν φόβῳ 
σώζειν (Rec.), ἐλεᾶν (LT Tr WH), with anxious heed 
lest ye be defiled by the wickedness of those whom ye 
are rescuing, Jude 23; plur. φόβοι, feelings of fear, 
fears, [W. 176 (166)], 2 Co. vii. 5; φόβος τινός, gen. of 
the obj. (our fear of one): τῶν Ἰουδαίων, Jn. vii. 13; xix. 
38; xx.19; βασανισμοῦ, Rev. xviii. 10, 15; θανάτου, Heb, 
ii. 15 (Xen. mem. 1, 4,7). In an objective sense, 
that which strikes terror: poBos ἀγαθῶν ἔργων, or more 
correctly (with L T Tr WH) τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ, a terror to 
(or for), Ro. xiii. 3. 2. reverence, respect, (for au- 
thority, rank, dignity): Ro. xiii. 7; 1 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 16 
(15); ἡ ἐν φόβῳ ἀναστροφή, behavior coupled with [cf. 
ev, I. 5 6.7 reverence for one’s husband, 1 Pet. iii. 25 
φόβος with a gen. of the obj.: τοῦ κυρίου, Acts ix. 31; 
2 Co. v.11; Χριστοῦ, Eph. v. 21 [not Rec.]; θεοῦ, Ro. iii. 
18; 2 Co. vii. 1; [Eph. v. 21 Ree.]; θεοῦ is omitted as 
suggested by the context, 1 Pet.i.17; (often in the O. T. 
nim ANY and ΟΣ MY). [Sy¥N. see δειλία, δέος, 
fin.; οὗ. φοβέω.] " 

Φοίβη, -ης, ἡ, (lit. ‘bright’, ‘radiant”], Phebe or Phebe, 
a deaconess of the church at Cenchrezx, near Corinth: 
Ro. xvi. 1 [(see διάκονος, 2 fin.) ].* 

Φοινίκη, -ης, ἡ, Phenice or Phenicia, in the apostolic 
age a tract of the province of Syria, situated on the 
coast of the Mediterranean between the river Eleu- 
therus and the promontory of Carmel, some thirty miles 
long and two or three broad, [but see BB. DD. 8. v.]: 
Acts xi. 19; xv. 35 xxi. 2." 

Φοινίκισσα, see Συροφοίνισσα. 

Φοίνιξ (or, as some prefer to write it, φοῖνιξ ; cf. W. 8 6, 
1c.; [and reff. s. v. κήρυξ), -ικος, 6; I. as an ap- 
pellative, a palm-tree (fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 7120) : 
τὰ Baia τῶν dow. (see Baiov), the branches of the palm- 
trees, Jn. xii. 13; but φοίνικες itself [A. V. palms] is put 
for the branches in Rev. vii. 9 (2 Mace. x. 7; xiv. 4; 
[so Aristot. magn. mor. § 34 p. 1196", 867). Il. a 
prop. name, Pheniz, a city and haven of Crete [B. Ὁ. 
(esp. Am. ed.) 8. v. Phenice]: Acts xxvii. 12." 


φονεύς 


φονεύς, -έως, ὁ, (φόνος), fr. Hom. down, α murderer, a 
homicide: Mt. xxii. 7; Acts vii. 52; xxviii. 4; 1 Pet. 
iv. 15; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15; ἀνὴρ φονεύς [cf. ἀνήρ, 3], 
Acts iii. 14.* 

[Syn.: φονεύς any murderer,—the genus of which σικάριος 
the assassin is a species; while ἀνθρωποκτόνος (q. v.) has in 
the N. T. a special emphasis. Trench § ]xxxiii.] 

hovetw; fut. hovetow; 1 aor. ἐφόνευσα; (φονεύς) ; fr. 
[Pind., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; Sept. mostly for ny, 
also for 175, 1277, ete.; to kill, slay, murder; absol. to 
commit murder [A. V. kill]: Mt. v. 21; Jas. iv. 2; οὐ (q. v. 
6) φονεύσεις, Mt. v. 21; xix. 18; Ro. xiii. 9, (Ex. xx. 
15); μὴ φονεύσῃς, Mk. x. 19; Lk. xviii. 20; Jas. ii. 11. 
twa: Mt. xxiii. 31, 35; Jas. v. 6." 

φόνος, -ov, ὁ, (ΦΕΝΩ ; cf. φόβος, init.), fr. Hom. down, 
murder, slaughter: Mk. xv. 7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts ix. 
1; Ro.i. 29; ἐν φόνῳ μαχαίρας, Heb. xi. 37 (Ex. xvii. 13; 
Num. xxi. 24; Deut. xiii.15; xx.13); plur. φόνοι, mur- 
ders: Mt.xv.19; Mk. vii. 21; Gal. v. 21 [T WH om. L 
Tr br. gov.]; Rev. ix. 21." 

φορέω, -; fut. φορέσω [1 Co. xv. 49 RG WH mrg.]; 
1 aor. ἐφόρεσα, (later forms for the earlier φορήσω and 
ἐφόρησα, cf. Btim. Ausf. Spr. ii. 315; Kiihner [and esp. 
Veitch]s. v.; W. §13,3c.; [B. 37 (32)]); (frequent. of 
φέρω, and differing from it by denoting not the simple 
and transient act of bearing, but a continuous or ha- 
bitual bearing ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 585sq.; Hermann 
on Soph. Electr. 715; [Trench § lviii.; Schmidt, ch. 105, 
6]; accordingly, ἀγγελίην φέρειν means ‘to carry a (sin- 
gle) message’, Hdt. 3,53 and 122; ἀγγελίην φορέειν, ‘to 
serve as (fill the office of) a messenger’, Hdt. 3, 34; 
hence we are said φορεῖν those things which we carry 
about with us or wear, as 6. g. our clothing) ; fr. Hom. 
down; fo bear constantly, wear: of clothing, garments, 
armor, etc., Mt. xi. 8; Jn. xix. 5; Ro. xiii. 4 (on this 
pass. see pdyatpa, 2); 1 Co. xv. 49 [see above, and WH. 
Tntr. § 404]; Jas. ii. 3, (Sir. xi. 5; xl. 4).* 

φόρον, -ov, τό, Lat. forum; see” Ammuos. 

φόρος, -ov, ὁ, (fr. φέρω, hence prop. ὃ φέρεται; cf. 
φόβος), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for Ὁ and (2 Esdr. iv. 20; 
vi. 8; Neh. v. 4) for 79, tribute, esp. the annual tax 
levied upon houses, lands, and persons [cf. Thom. Mag. 
ed. Ritschl p. 387, 13; Grotius as quoted in Trench 
§ evil. 7; see τέλος, 2]: φόρον, φόρους διδόναι Καίσαρι, 
Lk, xx. 22; xxiii. 2, (1 Mace. viii. 4, 7); ἀποδιδόναι, Ro. 
xiii. 7; τελεῖν, Ro. xiii. 6.* 

φορτίζω ; pf. pass. ptep. πεφορτισμένος ; (φόρτος, q. v-); 
to place a burden upon, to load: φορτίζειν τινὰ φορτίον 
(on the double ace. see B. 149 (130)), to load one with 
a burden (of rites and unwarranted precepts), Lk. xi. 
46; πεφορτισμένος ‘heavy laden’ (with the burdensome 
requirements of the Mosaic law and of tradition, and 
with the consciousness of sin), Mt. xi. 28. (Ezek. xvi. 
33; Hes. opp. 692; Lcian. navig. 45; Anthol. 10, 5,5; 
eccles. writ.) [Comp.: ἀπο-φορτίζομαι. " 

φορτίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of φόρτος, but dimin. only in 
form not in signif.; cf. Bim. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 440; [W. 


§ 2,1. fin.]), fr. Hes. down, Sept. for xm, a burden, 


657 


φρεναπατάω 


load: of the freight or lading of a ship (often so in Grk. 
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 645, 695 down), Acts xxvii. 10 GL 
TTr WH. Metaph.: of burdensome rites, plur., [Mt. 
xxiii.4]; Lk. xi.46; of the obligations Christ lays upon 
his followers, and styles a ‘burden’ by way of contrast 
to the precepts of the Pharisees the observance of which 
was most oppressive, Mt. xi. 30 (αὐτὸς μόνος δύναται Ba- 
στάσαι Ζήνωνος φορτίον, Diog. Laért. 7, 5, 4 (171); see 
ᾧυγός, 1 b.); of faults, the consciousness of which op- 
presses the soul, Gal. vi. 5 [yet ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. 
Syn. see ὄγκος, fin.]* 

φόρτος, -ov, 6, (fr. φέρω), fr. Hom. down, a load, bur- 
den: Acts xxvii. 10 Ree. [of a ship’s lading].* 

Φορτουνάτος (or Povpr. R G), -ov, 6, [a Lat. name, 
‘happy 3» Fortunatus, a Christian of Corinth [cf. Bp. 
Lehtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59 (65)]: 1 Co. xvi. 17.° 

φραγέλλιον, -ov, τό, (Lat. flagellum; B. 18 (16)), a 
scourge: Jn. ii. 15.* 

φραγελλόω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. φραγελλώσας; [Lat. fla- 
gello]; to scourge: twa, Mt. xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15. 
(Eccles. writ.) * 

φραγμός, -οὔ, 6, (φράσσω to fence round), a hedge, 
a fence: Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xiv. 23; trop. that 
which separates, prevents two from coming together, 
Eph. ii. 14 [A. V. partition], see μεσότοιχον. (Sept. Sir. 
xxxvi. 30 (27); Hdt., Soph., Thuc., Plut., al.) * 

φράζω: 1 aor. impy. φράσον; fr. Hom. down; Zo indi- 
cate plainly, make known, declare, whether by gesture 
(φωνῆσαι μὲν οὐκ εἶχε, τῇ δὲ χειρὶ ἔφραζεν, Hat. 4, 113), 
or by writing or speaking, or in other ways; to explain: 
τινὶ τὴν παραβολήν, the thought shadowed forth in the 
parable, Mt. xiii. 36 [RG T Trtxt.]; xv. 15. (Twice 
in Sept. for 7.311, Job vi. 24; 11n, xii. 8.) * 

φράσσω: 1 aor. ἔφραξα; Pass., 2 aor. subj. 3 pers. 
sing. φραγῇ; 2 fut. 3 pers. sing. φραγήσεται (2 Co. xi. 10 
Rezelz GLT Tr WH); [(allied w. Lat. farcio, Germ. 
Berg, Eng. borough; cf. Vaniéek p. 614); fr. Hom. 
down]; to fence in, block up, stop up, close up, (τὰ ὦτα 
τοῦ μὴ ἀκοῦσαι, Prov. xxi. 13; τὴν ὁδὸν ἐν σκόλοψιν, Hos. 
ii. 6; πηγήν, Prov. xxv. 26; στόματα λεόντων, Heb. xi. 
33): ἡ καύχησις αὕτη οὐ φραγήσεται, this glorying shall 
not be stopped, i. e. no one shall get from my conduct 
an argument to prove that it is empty, 2 Co. xi. 10 [on 
the reading of Rec." (σφραγίσεται) see σφραγίζω, init. ]; 
trop. to put to silence, [A. V. stop]: τὸ στόμα, Ro. iii. 19." 

φρέαρ, -aros, τό, fr. the Hom. hymn Cer. 99 and Hadt. 6, 
119 down; Sept. for 13 and (in 1S. xix. 22; 2 S. iil. 26; 
Jer. xlviii. (xli.) 7,9) 73 (a pit, cistern), a well: Lk. 
xiv. δ; ση. ἵν. 11 54.; pp. τῆς ἀβύσσου, the pit of the abyss 
(because the nether world is thought to increase in size 
the further it extends from the surface of the earth and 
so to resemble a cistern, the orifice of which is narrow), 
Rev. ix. 1 sq.* 

ᾧρεν-απατάω, -ῶ; (φρεναπάτης, 4: V-): τινά, to deceive 
any one’s mind, Gal. vi. 3 [more is implied by this word 
than by ἀπατᾶν, for it brings out the idea of subjec- 
tive fancies” (Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; ef. Green, Crit. 
Notes ad loc.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)* 


φρεναπάτης 


φρεναπάτης, -ov, ὁ, (φρήν and ἀπάτη), ἃ mind-deceiver ; 
Vulg. seductor; [A. V. deceiver]: Tit.i.10. (Several 
times in eccles. writ.) * 

φρήν, φρενός, ἡ, plur. φρένες, fr. Hom. down, Sept. sev- 
eral times in Prov. for 35; 1. the midriff or dia- 
phragm, the parts about the heart. 2. the mind; 
the faculty of perceiving and judging: also in the plur.; 
as, 1 Co. xiv. 20." 

φρίσσω; very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to 
be rough, Lat. horreo, horresco, i.e. 1. to bristle, 
stiffen, stand up: ἔφριξάν μου τρίχες, Job iv. 15 Sept.; 
with ὀρθαί added, Hes. opp. 510; ὀρθὰς... . φρίσσει τρίχας 
(cogn. ace. of the part affected), Hes. scut. 391; with 
cold, διὰ τὸ ψῦχος, Plut. quaest. nat. 13, 2 p.915b. 2. 
to shudder, to be struck with extreme fear, to be horrified : 
absol., Jas. ii. 19; 4 Mace. xiv. 9; like the Lat. horreo, 
horresco, constr. with an acc. of the object exciting 
the fear, Hom. ἢ. 11, 383, and often.* 

φρονέω, -@; impf., 1 pers. sing. ἐφρόνουν, 2 pers. plur. 
ἐφρονεῖτε ; fut. 2 pers. plur. φρονήσετε ; pres. pass. impv. 
3 pers. sing. φρονείσθω, Phil. ii. 5 RG (see 3 below) ; 
(φρήν) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. to have understanding, 
be wise, (Hom., al.). 2. to feel, to think: absol. ὡς 
νήπιος ἐφρόνουν, 1 Co. xiii. 11 ; το have an opinion of one’s 
self, think of one’s self: μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν map’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν, 
Ro. xii. 8 (μεῖζον φρονεῖν ἢ κατ᾽ ἄνδρα, Soph. Ant. 768) ; 
φρονεῖν eis τὸ σωφρονεῖν, [R. V. so to think as to think 
soberly], to be modest, not to let one’s opinion (though 
just) of himself exceed the bounds of modesty, ibid. ; 
ὑπὲρ 6 γέγραπται, in one’s opinion of one’s self to go be- 
yond the standard prescribed in Scripture, 1 Co. iv. 6 
RG (ef. B. 394 sq. (838); W. § 64,4]. with an ace. of 
the thing, to think, judge: ἃ φρονεῖς, what your opinion 
is, Acts xxviii. 22; οὐδὲν ἄλλο, Gal. v. 10; ti ἑτέρως, 
Phil. iii. 15; several persons are said φρονεῖν τὸ αὐτό, 
to be of the same mind, i.e. to agree together, cherish 
the same views, be harmonious: 2 Co. xiii. 11; Phil. ii. 
2; iii. 16 Rec.; iv. 2; with ἐν ἀλλήλοις added, Ro. xv. 5; 
also τὸ ἕν φρονοῦντες, having that one mind, Phil. ii. 2 
(the phrase τὸ ἕν having reference to τὸ αὐτό; see Meyer 
[but cf. Bp. Lehtft.] ad loc.) ; τὶ ὑπέρ τινος, to hold some 
opinion, judge, think, concerning one, Phil. i. 7; τὸ αὐτὸ 
eis ἀλλήλους, to be of the same mind towards one anoth- 
er, Ro. xii. 16. 3. to direct one’s mind to a thing, to 
seek or strive for; τά twos, to seek one’s interests or ad- 
vantage; to be of one’s party, side with him, (in public 
affairs, Add. to Esth. viii. 5; 1 Mace. x. 20; Dio Cass. 
51,4; Hdian. 8, 6, 14 (6); for other exx. fr. Xen. [or 
Hat. 1, 162 fin] down see Passow 8. v. II.; [L. and S. 
Il. 2 6.1; hence) τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ and τὰ τῶν ἀνθρ., to be in- 
tent on promoting what God wills (spec. his saving pur- 
poses), and what pleases men, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; 
τὰ τῆς σαρκός and τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος (σάρξ [q. ν. 4] and 
πνεῦμα [4- ν. p. 522") being personified), to pursue those 
things which gratify the flesh, ... the Holy Spirit, Ro. 
vil. 5, cf. 6. τὰ ἐπίγεια, Phil. iii. 19; τὰ ἄνω and τὰ ἐπὶ 
Tys γῆς» Col. iii. 2, (ἀνθρώπινα, θνητά, Aristot. eth. Nic. 
10, 7 p. 1177", 32) ; τοῦτο φρονεῖτε (pres. impy.) ἐν ὑμῖν, 


658 


Ppvacoae 


[R. V. have this mind in you], be intent within yourselva 
on this, Phil. ii. 5 LT Tr WH; pass. φρονεῖταί τι ἔν rev, 
some habit of thought (expressed by deeds) exists in 
one, Phil. ii. 5 RG ΓΑ. V. let this mind be in you]; ὑψηλά 
(see ὑψηλός, b.). φρονεῖν ἡμέραν, to regard a day, observe 
it as sacred, Ro. xiv. 6; gp. ὑπέρ τινος, to take thought. 
have a care, for one, Phil. iv. 10 [see ἀναθάλλω, fin. 
Comp. : kata-, mupa-, περι-» ὑπερ- φρονέω. * 

φρόνημα, -ros, τό, (φρονέω, q. V-), what one has in mind, 
the thoughts and purposes, [A. V. mind]: Ro. viii. 6 sq. 
27. (Hesych. φρόνημα: βούλημα, θέλημα. In various 
other senses also fr. Aeschy]. down.) * 

φρόνησις, -ews, 7, (φρονέω), understanding : joined with 
σοφία (as 1 K. iv. 25 (29); Dan. i. 17 Theod.; ἡ σοφία 
ἀνδρὶ τίκτει φρόνησιν, Prov. x. 23), Eph. i. 8 [A. V. pru- 
dence; see σοφία, fin.}; spec. knowledge and holy love 
of the will of God [A.V. wisdom], Lk. i. 17 (Sap. iii. 15; 
Sept. for 72°3, 7333, 723m; used variously by Grk. 
writ. fr. Soph. and Eur. down).* 

dpovipos, -ov, (φρονέω) ; a. intelligent, wise [so 
A.V. uniformly]: 1 Co. x. 15; opp. to μωρός, 1 Co. iv. 
10; opp. to ἄφρων, 2 Co. xi. 19; φρόνιμος map’ ἑαυτῷ, 
one who deems himself wise, [A. V. wise in one’s own 
conceits], Ro. xi. 253 xii. 16, (Prov. iii. 7). b. pru- 
dent, i.e. mindful of one’s interests: Mt.x.16; xxiv. 45; 
Lk. xii. 42; opp. to μωρός, Mt. vii. 24 (cf. 26); xxv. 2, 4, 
8sq. compar. φρονιμώτερος, Lk. xvi. 8. (From Soph., 
Xen., Plat. down; Sept. for 713), D3, 1.32.) [Syn. 
see σοφός, fin.]* 

φρονίμως, adv., prudently, wisely: Lk. xvi. 8. 
Arstph. down.]* 

φροντίζω; (φροντίς [‘ thought’, fr. φρονέω); fr. Theogn. 
and Hat. down; to think, to be careful; to be thoughtful 
or anxious: foll. by an inf. Tit. iii. 8.* 

dpovpéw, -&: impf. ἐφρούρουν ; fut. φρουρήσω ; Pass., 
pres. ptep. φρουρούμενος ; impf. ἐφρουρούμην ; (φρουρός, 
contr. fr. προορός fr. προοράω to see before, foresee) ; fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hat. down; 1. to guard, protect by a 
military guard, either in order to prevent hostile inva- 
sion, or to keep the inhabitants of a besieged city from 
flight; (often so fr. Thue. down): τὴν πόλιν, i. 6. not he 
surrounded the city with soldiers, but by posting sentries 
he kept the gates guarded, 2 Co. xi. 32 [R.V. guarded], οἴ. 
Acts ix. 24. 2. metaph.: τινά, pass., ὑπὸ νόμον, under 
the control of the Mosaic law, that we might not escape 
from its power, with συγκεκλεισμένοι [συν(γ)κλειόμενοι 
LT Tr WH] added, Gal. iii. 23 [R. V. kept in ward; cf. 
Plut. de defect. orac. § 29; Sap. xvii. 15]; to protect by 
guarding (Soph. O. R. 1479), to keep: τὰς καρδίας ἐν 
Χριστῷ, i. 6. in close connection with Christ, Phil. iv. 7: 
τινὰ eis τι, by watching and guarding to preserve one tor 
the attainment of something [R. V. guarded unto ete.], 
pass. 1 Pet. i. 5.* 

ᾧρυάσσω: 1 aor. 8 pers. plur. ἐφρύαξαν ; (everywhere 
in prof. auth. and also in Mace. as a depon. mid. φρυάσσο- 
μαι [W. 24]); to neigh, stamp the ground, prance, snort; 
to be high-spirited: prop. of horses (Anthol. 5, 202 4; 
Callim. lav. Pallad. vs. 2); of men, to take on lofty airs, 


[From 


φρύγανον 


behave arrogantly, (2 Mace. vii. 34; 3 Mace. ii. 2; An- 
thol., Diod., Plut., al.; [cf. Wetstein on Acts as below ]); 
active for 01 to be tumultuous, to rage, Acts iv. 25 fr. 
ῬΒ. αἱ. 1.5 

φρύγανον, -ου, τό, (fr. φρύγω or φρύσσω, φρύττω, to dry, 
parch; cf. Lat. frigo, frux, fructus), α dry stick, dry 
twig; generally in the plur. this word comprises all dry 
sticks, brush-wood, fire-wood, or similar material used 
as fuel: Acts xxviii. 8. (Hdt. 4,62; Arstph., Thuc., 
Xen., Philo, al.; Sept. for wp straw, stubble, Is. xl. 24; 
xli. 2; xlvii. 14; for 5:94 bramble, Job xxx. 7.) * 

Φρυγία, -as, ἡ, Phrygia, a region of Asia Minor, 
bounded by Bithynia, Galatia, Lycaonia, Pisidia, Lydia, 
and Mysia. Those of its cities mentioned in the N. T. 
are Laodicea, Hierapolis, and Colosse: Acts ii. 10; xvi. 
6; xviii. 23. [B.D.s.v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col., Intr., 
diss. i. esp. pp. 17 sq. 23 sq.]* 

Φύγελλος and (1, ΤΊ Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 1597) 
Φύγελος, -ov, 6, Phygellus [better Phyg’-elus], a Christian, 
who was with Paul at Rome and deserted him [see B.D. 
8. v. and the Comm.]: 2 Tim. i. 15.* 

φυγή, -ῆς, ἡ, (φεύγω), fr. Hom. down, flight: Mt. xxiv. 
20; Mk. xiii. 18 Rec.* 

φυλακή, -js, ἡ, (φυλάσσω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 
NNW, Ww, 71D (a prison), x52 (enclosure, con- 
finement), guard, watch, i. e. a. in an act. sense, 
a watching, keeping watch: φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, to keep 
watch, Lk. ii. 8 (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 6, 
10, etc.; Plat. lege. 6 p. 758 ἃ. down; [οἵ. φυλακὰς ἔχειν, 
ete. fr. Hom. (Il. 9, 1 ete.) on]; often also in Sept. for 
Το Ww). b. like the Lat. custodia and more 
freq. the plur. custodiae (see Klotz, Hdwrbch. [or Har- 
pers’ Lat. Dict.] s.v.), iq. persons keeping watch, a 
guard, sentinels: Acts xii. 10 [here A. V. ward] (and 
very often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down). c. of the 
place where captives are kept, a prison: Mt. xiv. 10; 
xxy. 36, [39], 43 sq.; Mk. vi. 17, 27 (28); Lk. iii. 20; 
xxi. 12; xxii.33; Actsv.19, 22; vili.3; xii. ὅ 5α. 17; 
xvi. 27,40; xxii.4; xxvi. 10; 2 Co. vi. 5 [here, as in 
ΗΘ}. xi. 36, A. V. imprisonment]; 2 Co. xi. 23; 1 Pet. iii. 
19; Rev. xviii. 2 [twice; rendered in A. V. hold and 
cage (R.V. hold)]; xx. 7, (Hdt. 3, 152; Thue. 3, 34; 
Plut., al.; Sept. for 77200, 823 ma, and xQ30 m3, 
Vow); βάλλειν or τιθέναι τινὰ εἰς (τ.) φυλακήν or ἐν 
(τῇ) φυλακῇ : Mt. v. 25; xiv. 5 [RG, al. ἀπέθετο] ; xviii. 
80: Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19, 25; Jn. iii. 24; Acts v. 25; 
viii. 3 [here παραδιδόναι εἰς b.]; xii. 4; xvi. 23 sq. 37; 
Rey. ii. 10. ἃ. of the time (of night) during which 
guard was kept, a watch i.e. the period of time during 
which a part of the guard were on duty, and at the end 
of which others relieved them. As the earlier Greeks 
divided the night commonly into three parts [see L. and 
S. 5. ν. I. 4], so, previously to the exile, the Israelites 
also had three watches in a night; subsequently, how- 
ever, after they became subject to Rome, they adopted 
the Roman custom of dividing the night into four 
watches: Mt. xxiv. 43; ἐν τῇ δευτέρᾳ, τρίτῃ, Lk. xii. 
38; τετάρτῃ, Mt. xiv. 25; Mk. vi. 48. Cf. Win. RWB. 


659 


φυλάσσω 


s.v. Nachtwache; [McC. and S. 8. ν. Night-watch; B. D. 
s. v. Watches of Night].* 

φυλακίζω ; (φυλακή [or PvAak]); to cast into prison, 
imprison: Acts xxii. 19. (Sap. xviii. 4; eccles. and 
Byzant. writ.) * 

φυλακτήριον, -ov, τό, (neut. of the adj. φυλακτήριος, -a, 
-ov, fr. φυλακτήρ [΄ poetic for φύλαξ ᾽)); 1. a forti- 
fied place provided with a garrison, a station for a guard 
or garrison. 2. a preservative or safeguard, an am- 
ulet: Dem. p. 71, 24; Diose. 5, 158 (159) sq., often in 
Plut. The Jews gave the name of φυλακτήρια (in the 
Talm. poan prayer-fillets, Germ. Gebetsriemen; [ οἴ. O. T. 
‘frontlets’]) to small strips of parchment on which were 
written the foll. pass. from the law of Moses, Ex. xiii. 
1-10, 11-16; Deut. vi. 4-9; xi. 13-21, and which, en- 
closed in little cases, they were accustomed when en- 
gaged in prayer to wear fastened by a leather strap to 
the forehead and to the left arm over against the heart, 
in order that they might thus be solemnly reminded of 
the duty of keeping the commands of God in the head and 
in the heart, acc. to the directions given in Ex. xiii. 16; 
Deut. vi. 8; xi. 18; (cf. Joseph. antt. 4, 8,13). These 
scrolls were thought to have power, like amulets, to 
avert various evils and to drive away demons (Targ. on 
Cant. viii. 3); hence their Greek name. [But see Ginse 
burg in Alex.’s Kitto s. vv. Phylacteries (sub fin.) and 
Mezuza.] The Pharisees were accustomed τὰ φυλα- 
κτήρια αὐτῶν πλατύνειν, to widen, make broad, their phylac- 
teries, that they might render them more conspicuous 
and show themselves to be more eager than the majority 
to be reminded of God’s law: Mt. xxiii. 5. Cf. Win. 
RWB. 5. v. Phylakterien; Leyrer in Herzog xi. 639 
sqq.; Kneucker in Schenkel i. 601 sq.; Delitzsch in Riehm 
270 sq.; [Edersheim, Jewish Social Life etc., p. 220 
sqq-; B. Ὁ. 5. ν. Frontlets; esp. Hamburger, Real-Encycl. 
s. v. Tephillin, vol. ii. p. 1203 sq. 5 Ginsburg in Alex.’s 
Kitto u. 5.7." 

Φύλαξ, -axos, ὁ, (φυλάσσω), a guard, keeper: Acts v. 
23; xii. 6,19. (From Hom. down; Sept. for 7¥7.) * 

φυλάσσω ; fut. φυλάξω; 1 aor. ἐφύλαξα; Mid., pres. 
φυλάσσομαι; 1 aor. ἐφυλαξάμην ; pres. pass. φυλάσσομαι ; 
fr. Hom. down; Sept. times too many to count for >3¥, 
occasionally for 7¥3, [ete.]; 1. Act. to guard (Lat. 
custodio) ; i. e. a. to watch, to keep watch: with 
φυλακήν added, Lk. ii. 8 (see φυλακή, a.). b. to 
guard or watch, have an eye upon: twa, one, lest he es- 
cape, Acts xii. 4; xxviii. 16; pass., Acts xxiii. 35 ; Lk. 
viii. 29; τί, any thing, lest it be carried off: τὰ ἱμάτια, 
Acts xxii. 20. c. to guard a person (or thing) that 
he may remain safe, i.e. lest he suffer violence, be de- 
spoiled, ete., i.q. to protect: τὴν αὐλήν, Lk. xi. 21; ἀπό 
twos, to protect one from a pers. or thing, 2 Th. iii. 3 
[see πονηρός, p- 531°], (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 7; Ps. exl. (exli.) 
9; cf. B. § 147, 3; [W. 223 (209)]); τὴν παραθήκην (or 
παρακαταθήκην), to keep from being snatched away, pre- 
serve safe and unimpaired, 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14; 
with the addition of εἴς τινα ἡμέραν, i.e. that it may be 
forthcoming on that day, 2 Tim. i.12; to guard from 


pury 


being lost or perishing, i. e. (with the predominant idea 
of a happy issue), to preserve: τινά, Jn. xvii. 12 (where 
ἐφύλαξα is explained by the foll. οὐδεὶς ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπώλετο 
[cf. τηρέω, fin.]) ; 2 Pet. ii. 5; τινά with a pred. accus. 
Jude 24; φυλάξει (opp. to ἀπολέσει) τ. ψυχὴν εἰς ζωὴν 
αἰών. i. e. will keep it with the result that he will have 
life eternal, Jn. xii. 25; ἑαυτὸν ἀπό τ. to guard one’s self 
from a thing, 1 Jn. v. 21 [where ef. Westcott]. d. 
to guard, i.e. to care for, take care not to violate; to ob- 
serve: τὸν νόμον, Acts vii. 53; xxi. 24; Gal. vi. 13, (Lev. 
xix. 37, ete.; Soph. Trach. 616; al.; νόμους, Xen. Hell. 
1, 7, 30; Plat. de rep. 6 p. 484b.; polit. p. 292 a.); sin- 
gle precepts of the Mosaic law, Mt. xix. 20 L T Tr WH; 
Mk. x. 20 Lehm.; Lk. xviii. 21 LT Trtxt. WH; [ra 
δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου, Ro. ii. 267 ; τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. 
xi. 28; τὰ ῥήματα of Jesus, Jn. xii. 47 LT Tr WH; 
apostolic directions, Acts xvi. 4; 1 Tim. v. 21. 2 
Mid. a. to observe for one’s self something to es- 
cape, i.e. fo avoid, shun, flee from: by ause com. in Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, with an acc. of the 
obj., ri, Acts xxi. 25 [A. V. keep themselves from]; twa, 
2 Tim. iv. 15 [A.V. be thou ware of]; ἀπό twos, to keep 
one’s self from a thing, Lk. xii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 8, 9; 
[Hell. 7, 2, 107); wa μή, 2 Pet. iii. 17 (ὅπως μή, Xen. 
mem. 1, 2, 37; other exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2360°; [L. 
and S. 8. v. C. II.]). b. by a usage foreign to Grk. 
writ. but very freq. in the Sept. (οἴ. W. 253 (238)), to 
guard for one’s self (i. e. for one’s safety’s sake) so as 
not to violate, i. e. to keep, observe: ταῦτα πάντα (the pre- 
cepts of the Mosaic law), Mt. xix. 20 RG; Mk. x. 20 
RGTTr WH; LK. xviii. 21 RG Tr mrg., (Ex. xii. 17; 
Ley. xviii. 4; xx. 8, 22; xxvi. 3, and many other pass.). 
[Come.: δια-τφυλάσσω. SYN. see τηρέω, fin.] * 

φυλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. φύω), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; aL 
a tribe; in the N.T. all the persons descended from one 
of the twelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for 792 
and viv; also for NMSwWN, see πατριά, 2): Heb. vii. 13 
sq-; with the addition of the genitives ᾿Ασήρ, Βενιαμίν, 
ete., Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. χὶ. 1 ; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. 
νυ. 5; vii. 5-8; δώδεκα φ. τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. xix. 28; Lk. 
xxii. 30; Jas.i. 1; Rev. xxi. 12; [πᾶσα φυλὴ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, 
Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people: Mt. xxiv. 
30; Rev. [i. 7]; v.9; vii. 9; [xi.9]; xiii. 7; xiv. 6.* 

φύλλον, -ov, τό, (fiw), a leaf: Mt. xxi. 19; xxiv. 32; 
MK. xi. 13; xiii. 28; Rev. xxii.2. [From Hom. down.]* 

φύραμα, -ros, τό, (φυράω to mix), any substance mixed 
with water and kneaded ; a mass, lump: of dough (Num. 
xv. 20 sq.; [plur., Ex. viii. 3; xii. 34]; Aristot. probl. 21, 
18 p. 929", 25; Plut. quaest. conv. 6, 7, 2, 15 p. 698 e.), 
1 Co. v. 6sq.; Gal. v. 9, (on the meaning of which pass. 
see ζύμη) ; Ro. xi. 16; of clay (Plut. praec. ger. reip. 15, 
4p. 811c.), Ro. ix. 21 [cf. B. § 140, 3 Rem.].* 

φυσικός, -7, -όν, (φύσις), natural; i.e. a. pro- 
duced by nature, inborn, (very often so fr. Xen. [mem. 
8, 9, 1] down). b. agreeable to nature, (Dion. Hal., 
Plut., al.) : opp. to rapa φύσιν, Ro. i. 26, [27]. ο. 
governed by (the instincts of) nature: ζῶα γεγεννημένα 
φυσικά, 2 Pet. ii. 12 [R. V. born mere animals].° 


660 


picts 


φυσικῶς, adv., in a natural manner, by nature, under 
the guidance of nature: by the aid of the bodily senses, 
Jude 10. [(Aristot., Philo, al.)]* 

φυσιόω, -ῶ ; Pass., pres. φυσιοῦμαι; pf. ptep. πεφυσιωμέ- 
vos; 1 aor. ἐφυσιώθην; 1. (fr. φύσις), to make nat- 
ural, to cause a thing to pass into nature, (Clem. Alex.; 
Simplic.). 2. i. q. φυσάω, φυσιάω (fr. φῦσα a pair 
of bellows), to inflate, blow up, blow out, to cause to swell 
up; trop. to puff up, make proud: 1 Co. viii. 1; pass. to 
be puffed up, to bear one’s self loftily, be proud: 1 Co. iv. 
18 sq.; v. 2; xiii. 4 ; ὑπὸ τοῦ vods τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ, Col. 
ii. 18; ὑπέρ τινος (see ὑπέρ, I. 2 [and cf. 67) κατά τινος, 
1 Co. iv. 6 [see ἵνα, II. 1d.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)* 

φύσις, -ews, ἡ, (fr. φύω, q. v., as Lat. natura fr. nascor, 
ingenium fr. geno, gigno), fr. Hom. Od. 10, 303 down; 
nature, i.e. a. the nature of things, the force, laws, 
order, of nature; as opp. to what is monstrous, abnor- 
mal, perverse: 6, 9, τὸ mapa φύσιν, that which is con- 
trary to nature’s laws, against nature, Ro. i. 26 (οἱ παρὰ 
φύσιν τῇ ᾿Αφροδίτῃ χρώμενοι, Athen. 13 p. 605; ὁ παιδε- 
ραστὴς . . - τὴν παρὰ φύσιν ἡδονὴν διώκει, Philo de spec. 
lege.i.§ 7); as opposed to what has been produced by the 
art of man: οἱ κατὰ φύσιν κλάδοι, the natural branches, 
i.e. branches by the operation of nature, Ro. xi. 21, 24 
[W. 193 (182)], contrasted with of ἐγκεντρισθέντες παρὰ 
φύσιν, contrary to the plan of nature, cf. 24; ἡ κατὰ 
φύσιν ἀγριέλαιος, ibid.; as opposed to what is imagi- 
nary or fictitious: of μὴ φύσει ὄντες θεοί, who are 
gods not by nature, but ace. to the mistaken opinion of 
the Gentiles (λεγόμενοι θεοί, 1 Co. viii. 5), Gal. iv. 8; 
nature, i.e. natural sense, native conviction or knowledge, 
as opp. to what is learned by instruction and accom- 
plished by training or prescribed by law: ἡ φύσις (i.e. 
the native sense of propriety) διδάσκει τι, 1 Co. xi. 145 
φύσει ποιεῖν τὰ τοῦ νόμου, natura magistra, guided by their 
natural sense of what is right and proper, Ro. ii. 14. b. 
birth, physical origin: ἡμεῖς φύσει ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, we so far as 
our origin is considered, i. e. by birth, are Jews, Gal. ii. 
15 (φύσει νεώτερος, Soph. O. C. 1295; τῷ μὲν φύσει 
πατρίς, τὸν δὲ νόμῳ πολίτην ἐπεποίηντο, Isocr. Evagr. 21; 
φύσει βάρβαροι ὄντες, νόμῳ δὲ Ἕλληνες, Plat. Menex. 
Ρ. 24 ἃ. ; ef. Grimm on Sap. xiii. 1); ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκρο- 
βυστία, who by birth is uncircumcised or a Gentile (opp. 
to one who, although circumcised, has made himself a 
Gentile by his iniquity and spiritual perversity), Ro. ii. 
2s c. a mode of feeling and acting which by long 
habit has become nature: ἦμεν φύσει τέκνα ὀργῆς, by (our 
depraved) nature we were exposed to the wrath of God, 
Eph. ii. 3 (this meaning is evident from the preceding 
context, and stands in contrast with the change of 
heart and life wrought through Christ by the blessing 
of divine grace; φύσει πρὸς τὰς κολάσεις ἐπιεικῶς ἔχουσιν 
οἱ Φαρισαῖοι. Joseph. antt. 18,10,6. [Others (see Meyer) 
would lay more stress here upon the constitution in 
which this ‘habitual course of evil’ has its origin, wheth- 
er that constitution be regarded (with some) as already 
developed at birth, or (better) as undeveloped; cf. 
Aristot. pol. 1, 2 p. 1252", 32 sq. οἷον ἕκαστόν ἐστι τῆς 


φυσίωσις 


γενέσεως τελεσθείσης, ταύτην φαμὲν τὴν φύσιν εἶναι ἑκά- 
στου, ὥσπερ ἀνθρώπου, etc.; see the exx. in Bonitz’s index 
s.v. Cf. W. ὃ 31, 6a.]). d. the sum of innate prop- 
erties and powers by which one person differs from oth- 
ers, distinctive native peculiarities, natural character- 
istics: φύσις θηρίων (the natural strength, ferocity and 
intractability of beasts [A. V. (every) kind of beasts]), ἡ 
φύσις ἡ ἀνθρωπίνη (the ability, art, skill, of men, the 
qualities which are proper to their nature and necessa- 
rily emanate from it), Jas. iii. 7 [ef. W. § 31, 10]; θείας 
κοινωνοὶ φύσεως, (the holiness distinctive of the divine 
nature is specially referred to), 2 Pet. i.4 CApevaper. . . 
θείας δοκοῦντι μετεσχηκέναι φύσεως κατά τε σοφίαν Kai 
πρόγνωσιν τῶν ἐσομένων, Joseph. 6. Ap. 1, 26).* 

φυσίωσις, -εως, 7, (φυσιόω, q-V-), (Vulg. inflatio), a 
puffing up of soul, loftiness, pride: plur.[A.V. swellings] 
2 Co. xii. 20. (Kecles. writ.) * 

φυτεία, -as, ἡ, (φυτεύω, 4. V-); 1. a planting 
(Xer., Theophr., Plut., Ael., al.). 2. thing planted, 
@ piant, (i. q. φύτευμα) : Mt. xv. 13, [Athen. 5 p. 207 d.; 
Boeckh, Corp. inserr. No. 4521 vol. iii. p. 240].* 

φυτεύω ; impf. ἐφύτευον; 1 aor. ἐφύτευσα ; pf. pass. 
ptep. πεφυτευμένος ; 1 aor. pass. impy. 2 pers. sing. φυ- 
τεύθητι ; (φυτόν) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for v3, several 
times for 9nw; to plant: absol., Lk. xvii. 28; 1 Co. iii. 
6-8; φυτείαν, Mt. xv. 13; ἀμπελῶνα, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. 
xii. 1; Lk. xx. 9; 1 Co. ix. 7; ri ἐν with a dat. of the 
place, pass., Lk. xiii. 6; xvii. 6.* 

iw; 2 aor. pass. (ἐφύην) ptep. φυέν (for which the 
Attic writ. more com. use the 2 aor. act. ἔφυν with the 
ptep. gus, φύν, in a pass. or intrans. sense; cf. Bétm. 
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 321; Kriiger § 40 s.v.; Kiihner ὃ 343 
s.v.; [Veitch s.v.]; W. § 15 s.v.; [B. 68 (60)]); [ef. 
Lat. fui, fore, ete.; Curtius § 417]; fr. Hom. down; 1. 
to beget, bring forth, produce; pass. to be born, to spring 
up, to grow: Lk. viii. 6, 8 ; 2. intrans. to shoot forth, 
spring up: Heb. xii. 15 [W. 252 (237). | Comp.: ék-, 
συμ-φύω.}7 * 

φωλεός, -οῦ, 6, α lurking-hole, burrow; a lair: of ani- 
mals, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. (Aristot., Ael., Plut., 
Geop., al.) * 

φωνέω, -4; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐφώνει; fut. φωνήσω ; 1 
aor. ἐφώνησα; 1 aor. inf. pass. φωνηθῆναι ; (φωνή); 1. 

-as fr. Hom. down, intrans. to sound, emit a sound, to 

speak: of a cock, to crow, Mt. xxvi. 84, 74 sq.; Mk. xiv. 
30, 68 [L br. WH om. the el. (see the latter’s App. ad 
loe.)], 72; Lk. xxii. 34, 60 sq.; Jn. xiii. 838; xviii. 27, (of 
the cries of other animals, Is. xxxviii. 14; Jer. xvii. 11; 
Zeph. ii. 14 ; rarely so in prof. auth. as [ Aristot. (see L. 
and S. s. v. I. 2)], Aesop. fab. 36 [225 ed. Halm]); of 
men, to ery, cry out, cry aloud, speak with a loud voice: 
foll. by the words uttered, Lk. viii. 8; with φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 
added [(cf. W. § 32, 2 fin.), Mk. i. 26 T Tr WH]; Acts 
xvi. 28; ἐφώνησε λέγων, Lk. viii. 54; φωνήσας εἶπεν, Lk. 
xvi. 24; φωνήσας φωνῇ pey. εἶπεν, Lk. xxiii. 46; ἐφών. 
κραυγῇ [LT Tr WH φωνῇ] pey. λέγων, Rev. xiv. 18; 
Ἰφωνήσαντες ἐπυνθάνοντο (WH txt. ἐπύθοντο), Acts x. 
18]. 2. as fr. [Hom. Od. 24, 5851 Soph. down, 


661 


pwvn 


trans. a. to call, call to one’s self: twa, —either 
by one’s own voice, Mt. xx. 32; xxvii. 47; Mk. ix. 35; 
x. 49 [cf. B.§ 141, 5 fin.]; xv. 35; Jn. i. 48 (49); ii. 9; 
iv. 16; x.3 LT Tr WH; xi. 28"; xviii. 33; Acts ix. 41; 
x. 7;—or through another; to send for, summon: Mk. 
iil. 31 RG; Lk. xvi. 2; Jn. ix. 18, 24; xi. 28>; εἶπε φωνη: 
θῆναι αὐτῷ τούς κτλ. LK. xix. 15; hav. τινα ἐκ, with ἃ gen 
of the place, to call out of (i.e. bid one to quit a place 
and come to one), Jn. xii. 17. b. to invite: Lk. xiv 
128 c. i. q. to address, accost, call by a name: τινά, 
foll. by a nom. of the title (see W. § 29,1; [B.§131, 87), 
ὅπ. xiii. 18. [Comp.: ἀνα-, ἐπι-, προσ-, συμ-φωνέω. * 
φωνή, -ἢς, ἡ, (φάω to shine, make clear, [ef. Curtius 
§407; L. and S.s. v. φάω]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 
Tips 1. a sound, tone: of inanimate things, as of 
musical instruments, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. ¢., WH give it 
only in mrg.; ef. B. § 132, 10]; 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; Rev. 
xiv. 2; xviii. 22, (Is. xviii. 3; xxiv. 8; Sir. 1.16; 1 Mace. 
v. 313 ὀργάνων, Plat. de rep. 3 p. 397 ἃ. ; συρίγγων, Eur. 
Tro. 127; ψαλτηρίου καὶ αὐλοῦ, Plut. mor. p. 713 ¢.); of 
wind, Jn. iii. 8; Acts ii. 6; of thunder, Rev. vi. 1; xiv. 
2; xix. 6, cf. iv. 5; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 18; noise, of a 
millstone, Rev. xviii. 22; of a thronging multitude, Rev. 
xix. 1, 6; of chariots, Rev. ix. 9; of wings, whir (Ezek. 
i. 24), ibid.; of waters (Ezek. i. 24; 4 Esdr. vi. 17), Rev. 
i. 15; xiv. 2; xix. 6; also with the gen. of a thing im- 
plying speech, the sound [A.V. voice]: τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ, 
Lk. i. 445 ῥημάτων, Heb. xii. 19; the cry (of men), φωνὴ 
μεγάλη, a loud ery, Mk. xv. 37; the clamor of men mak- 
ing a noisy demand, Lk. xxiii. 23, ef. Acts xix. 34; 
absol. a cry i. 6. wailing, lamentation, Mt. ii. 18 (fr. Jer. 
XXXVill. (xxxi.) 15). 2. a voice, i.e. the sound of 
uttered words: λαλεῖν φωνάς, Rev. x. 3; those who begin 
to ery out or call to any one are said τὴν φωνὴν αἴρειν, 
Lk. xvii. 13; πρός twa, Acts iv. 24; φωνὴν ἐπαίρειν, Lk. 
xi. 27; Acts ii. 14; xiv. 11; xxii. 22; [φ. κράζειν (or ἐκ- 
κράζειν), Acts xxiv. 21 (ef. B.§143,11)]; φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 
added to verbs: to λέγειν, Rev. v.12: viii. 18; (ἐν φωνῇ 
pey. Rev. xiv. 7 [Lchm. om. ἐν; xiv. 9]); to εἰπεῖν, Lk. 
viii. 28; Acts xiv. 10; to φάναι, Acts xxvi. 24; to αἰνεῖν τὸν 
θεόν, Lk. xix. 37; with verbs of crying out, shout- 
ing: ἀναβοᾶν, Mt. xxvii. 46 [RGLtxt.T]; βοᾶν, [Mt. 
xxvii. 46 Lmrg. Tr WH]; Mk. xv.34; Actsviii. 7; φωνεῖν, 
ΓΜ .1. 26 T Tr WH]; Lk. xxiii.46; Acts xvi. 28; [Rev. 
xiv. 18 LT Tr WH); ἀναφωνεῖν, Lk. i. 42(R GL Tr mre.]; 
κηρύσσειν (ἐν φων. pey.), Rev. ν. 2 [Rec. om. év]; xpavyd- 
ew, In. xi. 43; ἀνακράζειν, Lk. iv. 33; κράζειν, Mt. xxvii. 
50; Mk.i. 26 [RGL); v. 7; Acts vii. 57, 60; Rev. vi. 10; 
vii. 2,10; x. 3; [xviii. 2 Rec.]; xix. 17; κράζ. ἐν pov. pey- 
Rev. xiv. 15; ἐν ἰσχυρᾷ φωνῇ, Rev. xviii. 2[GLT Tr 
WH]; pera φωνῆς pey. δοξάζειν τὸν 6. Lk. xvii. 15; of 
declarations from heaven, heard though no speaker is 
seen: ἰδοὺ φωνὴ λέγουσα, Mt. iii. 17; xvii. 5; ἔρχεται 
φωνή, Mk. ix. 7[RGL Trtxt.]; ὅπ. xii. 28; ἐξέρχεται, 
Rev. xvi. 17; xix. 5; γίνεται φωνή, Mk. i. 11[T om. WH 
br. éyév.; ix. 7 T Tr mrg. WH]; Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35 sq.; 
In. xii. 30; [Acts vii. 31 (where Rec. adds πρὸς airév) ]; 
πρός twa, Acts x. 13, 15; [φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ, 2 Pet 


φῶς 
i. 17]; ἐγένοντο φωναὶ μεγάλαι, Rev. xi. 15; [ἀπεκρίθη 
φωνή, Acts xi.9]; ἀκούειν povny (cf. B. §§ 132,17; 144, 
16 a.], Acts ix. 4; xxii. 9, [14]; xxvi. 14; 2 Pet. i. 18; 
Rey. i. 10; iv.1[B. § 129, 8 0.17; vi. 6 [here ἢ Τὶ TrWH 
insert ὡς], 7 [here G om. Tr br. φων.]; ix. 13 [B. u.s.] 5 
x. 4, 8; xi. 12[RGLWHmrg.]; xii. 10; xiv. 2; xviii. 
4; xix. 63 ἀκούειν φωνῆς [Β. $132, 17; W. $30, 7 d.], 
Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii. 7; Rev. {xi. 12 T Tr WH txt.]; 
xiv. 13; xvi. 1; xxi.33 βλέπειν τὴν pov. i.e. the one 
who uttered the voice, Rev. i. 12. φωνή with a gen. of 
the subject: βοῶντος, Mt. iii. 3; Mk.i. 3; Lk. iii.4; In. 
i. 23, all fr. Is. x]. 3; [ἀγγέλου ὅταν μέλλῃ σαλπίζειν, Rey. 
x. 7]; ἡ φ. twos, the natural (familiar) sound of one’s 
voice, Acts xii. 14; Rev. iii. 20, (Cant. v. 2); the man- 
ner of speaking, as a shepherd’s (cry or eall to his 
sheep), Jn. x. 3-5; to such ‘voices’ Jesus likens his 
precepts approved (‘heard’) by all the good, Jn. x. 16, 
27, ef. xviii. 37; ἀνθρώπου, human utterance, 2 Pet. ii. 
16; φ. twos, the voice of a clamorous person, Mt. xii. 19 
(Is. xlii. 2); of one exulting, jubilant, Jn. iii. 29; Rev. 
XVili. 23; ἀγγέλων πολλῶν, singing the praises of Christ, 
Rey. v. 11 sq.; the sound of the words of Christ as he 
shall recall the dead to life (the Resurrection-cry), Jn. 
v. 25, 28; ἀρχαγγέλου, the awakening shout of the arch- 
angel, the leader of the angelic host, 1 Th. iv.16; τοῦ 
θεοῦ, of God, —teaching, admonishing, whether in the 
O. T. Scriptures or in the gospel, Jn. v. 37; Heb. iii. 7, 
15; iv. 7; shaking the earth, Heb. xii. 26; the speech, 
discourse, θεοῦ οὐκ avOp. Acts xii. 22; [ras φωνὰς τῶν 
προφητῶν, the predictions (‘read every sabbath’), Acts 
xii. 27] ; ἀλλάξαι τὴν φ. (see ἀλλάσσω), Gal.iv. 20. 3. 
speech, i.e. a language, tongue: 1 Co. xiv. 10 sq. (Joseph. 
c. Ap. 1, 1; [1, 9, 2; 1, 14, 1,ete.]; Ceb. tab. 33; Ael. 
v. h. 12, 48; Diog. Laért. 8, 3; for other exx. fr. Grk. 
writ. see Passow 8. v. p. 2377; [L. and S. 5. v. II. 3]; 
Gen. xi. 1; Deut. xxviii. 49; τῇ ἑβραΐδι φωνῇ, 4 Mace. 
xii. 7; τῇ πατρίῳ φωνῇ, 2 Mace. vii. 8, 21, 27). [Syn. 
ef. Schmidt ch. 1 §27; Trench §$]xxxix.; and see λαλέω, 
ad init. ]* 

φῶς, φωτός. τό, (contr. fr. φάος, fr. φάω to shine), fr. 
Hom. (who [as well as Pind.] uses the form φάος) down, 
Hebr. 18, light (opp. to τὸ σκότος, ἡ σκοτία) ; 1. 
prop. a. univ.: ὁ θεὸς ὁ εἰπὼν ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψαι, 
3 Co. iv. 6 (Gen. i. 3); λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς, Mt. xvii. 2; 
νεφέλη φωτός [Grsb. txt.] i. e. consisting of light, i. q. 
φωτεινή in RLT Tr WH, Mt. xvii. 5; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου, 
of the sun, Jn. xi. 9; τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ, the light 
(i.e. illumining power) is not in him, consequently he 
does not see or distinguish the things about him, Jn. xi. 
10; the light emitted bya lamp, Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33L Tr 
txt. WH]. a heavenly light, such as surrounds angels 
when they appear on earth: hence ἄγγελος φωτός, 2 Co. 
xi. 14, and illumines the place where they appear, 
Acts xii. 7; a light of this kind shone around Paul when 
he was converted to Christ, Acts xxii. 6, [9], 11[W. 371 
(848)]; with the addition of οὐρανόθεν, Acts xxvi. 13; 
of ἀπὸ [ογ ἐκ] τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Acts ix. 3. b. by meton. 
anything emitting light: a heavenly luminary (or star), 


662 


pas 


plur. Jas. i. 17 [see πατήρ, 8 a.]; fire, because it is light 
and gives light: Lk. xxii. 56; θερμαίνεσθαι πρὸς τὸ φῶς, 
Mk. xiv. 54, (1 Mace. xii. 29; Xen. Hell. 6, 2,29; Cyr. 
7, 5, 27); α lamp or torch: plur. φῶτα, Acts xvi. 29 (pas 
ἔχειν, Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 8; in plur. often in Plut.). c. 
light i.e. brightness (Lat. splendor), [see a. above]: 
ἡλίου, Rev. xxii. 5; of a lamp, Jn. v. 35 (where it sym- 
bolizes his rank, influence, worth, mighty deeds) ; with 
the addition of λύχνου, Rev. xviii. 23 (Jer. xxv. 10); of 
the divine Shechinah (see δόξα, III. 1), Rev. xxi. 24 (Ps. 
Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 16; Is. Ix. 1, 19 sq.). 2. φῶς is 
often used in poetic discourse, in metaphor, and in 
parable ; a. The extremely delicate, subtile, pure, 
brilliant quality of light has led to the use of φῶς as an 
appellation of God, i. 6. as by nature incorporeal, spot- 
less, holy, [ef. Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 15 sqq.]: 
1 Jn. i. 5 (Sap. vii. 26 where ef. Grimm); he is said εἶναι 
ἐν τῷ φωτί, in a state of supreme sanctity, 1 Jn. i. 7; 
φῶς οἰκῶν ἀπρόσιτον, a fig. describing his nature as alike 
of consummate majesty and inaccessible to human come 
prehension, 1 Tim. vi. 16 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2); used of 
that heavenly state, consummate and free from every 
imperfection, to which the true disciples of Christ will 
be exalted, i. q. the kingdom of light, Col. i. 12. b. 
By a fig. freq. in the N. T. [ef. in classie Grk. τῆς ἀλη- 
θείας τὸ φῶς, Eur. 1. T. 1046 ete.; see L. and S. s. v. 
IL. 2], φῶς is used to denote truth and its knowledge, to- 
gether with the spiritual purity congruous with it, (app. to 
τὸ σκότος b., ἣ σκοτία, 4. ν.) : ἡ ζωὴ ἣν τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώ- 
πων, had the nature of light in men, i. 6. became the 
source of human wisdom, Jn. i. 4; esp. the saving truth 
embodied in Christ and by his love and effort imparted 
to mankind, Mt. iv. 16; Jn. i. 53 iii. 19-21; Acts xxvi. 
18, 23; 2 Co. vi. 14; Eph. v. 13" [ef. below]; τὸ φῶς τὸ 
ἀληθινόν, 1 In. ii. 8; τὸ θαυμαστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ φῶς, 1 Pet. 
ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2 cf. 59, 2); τὸ φῶς ὑμῶν, 
the divine truth with which ye are imbued, Mt. v. 16; 
ἔχειν τὸ φ. τῆς ζωῆς, the light by which the true life is 
gained, Jn. viii. 12; τὰ 6mAa[Lehm. mrg. ἔργα] τοῦ φωτός, 
Ro. xiii. 12; καρπὸς τοῦ φωτός, Eph. v.9GLT Tr WH; 
ἐν τῷ φωτὶ περιπατεῖν, to live agreeably to saving wis- 
dom, 1 Jn. i. 7; ἐν τῷ φωτὶ εἶναι, to be imbued with 
saving wisdom, μένειν, to continue devoted to it, to per- 
severe in keeping it, 1 Jn. ii. 9 sq.; of viol τοῦ φωτός 
(see vids, 2 p. 635"), Lk. xvi. 8; Jn. xii. 36; 1 Th.v.5; 
τέκνα τοῦ qb. (see τέκνον, ὁ. B. p- 618"), Eph. v. 8. by 
meton. φῶς is used of one in whom wisdom and spiritual 
purity shine forth, and who imparts the same to others: 
φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει, Ro. ii. 19; [φῶς ἐθνῶν, Acts xiii. 47]; 
in a pre-eminent sense is Jesus the Messiah called 
φῶς and τὸ φῶς: Lk. ii. 32; In. i. 78q-; xii. 35 sq. 46; 
τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου, Jn. viii. 12; ix. 5, (τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμον 
τὸ δοθὲν ἐν ὑμῖν εἰς φωτισμὸν παντὸς ἀνθρώπου, Test. xii. 
Patr. test. Levi § 14); τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινόν, In. i. 9; by 
the same name the disciples of Jesus are distinguished, 
Mt. v. 14; Christians are called φῶς ἐν κυρίῳ, having 
obtained saving wisdom in communion with Christ, Eph. 
v.8. πᾶν τὸ φανερούμενον φῶς ἐστιν, everything made 


φωστήρ 


manifest by the aid of Christian truth has taken on the 
nature of light, so that its true character and quality 
are no longer hidden, Eph. ν- 13° [al. take φῶς here in 
an outward or physical sense, and regard the state- 
ment as a general truth confirmatory of the assertion 
made respecting spiritual «φωτός ᾿ just before (cf. 
above) ]. c. By a fig. borrowed from daylight φῶς 
is used of that which is exposed to the view of all: ἐν τῷ 
φωτί (opp. to ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ), openly, publicly, (ἐν φάει, 
Pind. Nem. 4, 63), Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 8. d. reason, 
mind; the power of understanding esp. moral and spir- 
itual truth: τὸ φῶς τὸ ἐν ool, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 35. 
[Syn. see φέγγος, fin.] * 

φωστήρ, -ῆρος, 6, (φῶς, Parka) ; 1. that which 
gives light, an illuminator, (Vulg. Πρ ΙΒ: of the stars 
(luminaries), Phil. ii. 15 (Sap. xiii. 2; Sir. xliii. 7; Gen. 
i. 14, 16; Heliod. 2, 24; [Anthol. Pal. 15, 17; of sun and 
moon, Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi 14]; eccles. writ.). 2. 
light, brightness: Rev. xxi. 11 (Anthol. 11, 359) [al. refer 
this to 1; cf. Trench § xlvi.].* 

φωσ-φόρος, -ov, (pas and φέρω), light-bringing, giving 
light, (Arstph., Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; as subst. ὁ φ. (Lat. 
Lucifer), the planet Venus, the morning-star, day-star, 
(Plat. Tim. Loer. p. 96 e.; Plut., al.): 2 Pet. i.19, on 
the meaning of this pass. see λύχνος." 

φωτεινός [WH φωτινός, see I, ¢], τῆ, τόν, (pas), light, 
i. 6. composed of light, of a bright character: νεφέλη, Mt. 
xvii. 5 [ποῦ Grsb.]; οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ κυρίου μυριοπλασίως ἡλίου 
φωτεινότεροι, Sir. xxiii. 19. full of light, well lighted, 
opp. to σκοτεινός, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (τὰ σκοτεινὰ 
καὶ τὰ φωτεινὰ σώματα, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1).* 

φωτίζω : fut. φωτίσω (Rev. xxii.5 L WH; 1Co. iv. 5), 
Attic φωτιῶ (Rev. xxii. 5 GT Tr); 1 aor. eparica; pf. 
pass. ptep. πεφωτισμένος ; 1 aor. pass. ἐφωτίσθην ; ib 
intrans. to give light, to shine, (Aristot., Theophr., Plut., 
al.; Sept. for "ἴδ, Num. viii. 2, etc.): ἐπί τινα, Rev. xxii. 
5 (Rom. WH br. ἐπί]. 2. trans. a. prop. to en- 
lighten, light up, illumine: τινέ, Lk. xi. 36; τὴν πόλιν, 


663 


χαίρω 


Rey. xxi. 23 (ἀκτῖσι τὸν κόσμον, of the sun, Diod. 3, 48, 
Sept. for 183); ἡ γῆ ἐφωτίσθη ἐκ τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ, [A.V 
was lightened] shone with his glory, Rev. xviii. 1. b. 
to bring to light, iangh evident: τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους, 
1 Co. iv. 5; [Eph. iii. 9 ace. to the reading of Τ L br. 
WH tat. (but see c.)], (ri af αἵρεσίν τινος, the preference, 
opinion, of one, Polyb. 23, 3,10; τὴν ἀλήθειαν, Epict. 
diss. 1, 4, 31; πεφωτισμένων τῶν πραγμάτων ὑπὸ τῆς ἀλη- 
θείας, Leian. cal. non tem. ered. 32); te cause something 
to exist and thus to come to light and become clear to all: 
ζωὴν κ. ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, Opp. to καταργῆσαι 
τὸν θάνατον, 2 Tim. ἱ. 10. c. by ause only bibl. and 
eccles. to enlighten spiritually, imbue with saving knowl- 
edge: twa, Jn.i.9; with a saving knowledge of the 
gospel: hence φωτισθέντες of those who have been 
made Christians, Heb. vi. 4; x. 32; foll. by an indir. 
quest. Eph. iii. 9 [see Ὁ. above], (Sir. xlv. 17; for 1x7, 
Ps. exviii. (exix.) 130; for 77/n, to instruct, inform, 
teach, Judg. xiii. 8 Alex.; 2 K. xii. 2; φωτιοῦσιν αὐτοὺς 
τὸ κρίμα τοῦ θεοῦ τῆς γῆς, 2 K. xvii. 27 [ef. 28; al.]); to 
give understanding to: πεφωτισμένοι τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τῆς 
καρδίας [ Rec. διανοίας, as respects the eyes of your soul, 
Eph. i. 18 [Β. § 145, 6]; [(cf. Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 20, 
etc.) ].* 

φωτισμός, -οῦ, 6, (φωτίζω) ; a. the act of enlight- 
ening, illumination : πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως, i. 4. πρὸς 
τὸ φωτίζειν τὴν γνῶσιν, that by teaching we may bring to 
light ete. 2 Co. iv. 6 (on which pass. see πρόσωπον, 1 a. 
sub fin. p. 551° top). b. brightness, bright light, (ἐξ 
ἡλίου, Sext. Emp. p. 522, 93; ἀπὸ σελήνης, Plut. [de fac. 
in orb. lun. § 16, 13] p. 929 d. [ib. ὃ 18, 4 p. 931 8.7; Sept. 
for 18, Ps. xxvi. (xxvii-) 1; ΝῊ (xliv.) 43 Ixxvii. 
(Ixxviii.) 14; Job iii. 9; for 7), Ps. Lxxxix. (xe.) 8): 
εἰς TO μὴ αὐγάσαι [καταυγάσαι L mrg. Tr mrg.] τὸν ᾧ. τοῦ 
εὐαγγελίου, that the brightness of the gospel might not 
shine forth [R. V. dawn (upon them)], i. e. (dropping 
the fig.) that the enlightening truth of the gospel might 
not be manifest or be apprehended, 2 Co. iv. 4." 


X 


χαίρω; impf. ἔχαιρον; fut. χαρήσομαι (Lk. i. 14; In. 
xvi. 20, 22; Phil. i. 18, for the earlier form χαιρήσω, cf. 
[W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60)]; Bétm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 322 sq. ; 
Matthiae ὃ 255 s.v.; Kiihner $343 s.v.; Kriiger § 40 
s.v.; [Veitchs. y.]), once χαρῶ (Rev. xi. 10 Rec., a form 
occurring nowhere else); 2 aor. [pass. as act.] ἐχάρην 
cf. συγχαίρω, init.]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for nov, 
m1, wi; to rejoice, be glad; a. in the prop. and 
strict sense: [Mk. xiv. 11]; Lk. xv. δ, [32]; xix. 6, 37; 


viii. 89; xi. 235 xiii. 48; 2 Co. [vi. 10]; vii. 7; xiii. 9,11 
ΘΒ refer this to b. in the sense of farewell]; Phil. ii. 
17, 28; Col. ii. 5; 1 Th. v.16; 1 Pet. iv. 18; 5. Jn. 3; 
opp. to κλαίειν, Ro. xii. 153 1 Co. vii. 30; opp. to κλαίειν 
x. θρηνεῖν, In. xvi. 20; opp. to λύπην ἔχειν, ib. 22; joined 
with ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι, Mt. v. 12; Rey. xix. 7; with oxiprav, 
Lk. vi. 23 ; χαίρειν ἐν κυρίῳ (see ἐν, I. 6 Ὁ. Ὁ. 211° mid. [cf. 
B. 185 (161)]), Phil. iii. 1; iv. 4, 10; χαίρειν χαρὰν 
μεγάλην [cf. χαρά, a.], to rejoice exceedingly, Mt. ii. 10; 


xxii. 5; xxiii. 8; Jn. iv. 36; viii. 56; xx. 20; Actsv.41; | also χαρᾷ χαίρειν (W. ὃ 54, 3; B. § 133, 22), Jn. iii. 29° 


χάλαζα 


ἡ χαρά ἣἧ χαίρομεν, 1 Th. iii. 9; χαίρειν ἐπί with a dat. of 
the object, Mt. xviii. 13; Lk. i.14; xiii. 17; Acts xv. 31; 
Ro. xvi. 19 L T Tr WH; 1 Co. xiii. 6; xvi. 17; 2 Co. vii. 
13; Rey. xi. 10, (Xen. mem. 2, 6,35; Cyr. 8,4, 12; Plat. 
lege. 5 p. 739d.; ef. Kihner §425 Anm. 6; [W. §33 a.; 
B. $133, 23]; in the Grk. writ. generally with a simple 
dat. of the obj. as Prov. xvii. 19); διά τι, In. iii. 29 ; 
διά twa, Jn. xi. 15; 1 Th. iii. 9; ἐν τούτῳ, Phil. i. 18; 
[ἐν τ. παθήμασί μου, Col. i. 24]; with an ace. of the obj., 
τὸ αὐτό, Phil. ii. 18 (ταὐτά, Dem. p. 323, 6; ef. Matthiae 
§ 414 p. 923; Kriiger § 46, 5, 9); τὸ ἐφ᾽ ὑμῖν (see ὁ, 11. 
8 p. 436"), Ro. xvi. 19 RG; ἀπό twos, i. q. χαρὰν ἔχειν, 
to derive joy from one, 2 Co. ii. 3; 

Jn. xiv. 28; 2 Co. vii. 9,16; 2 Jn. 4; 
x. 20; with a dat. of the cause: τῇ ἐλπίδι χαίροντες, let 
the hope of future blessedness give you joy, Ro. xii. 12 
[yet ef. W. §31,1k., 7 d.]. b. in a broader sense, 
to be well, to thrive; in salutations, the impv. χαῖρε, hail / 
Lat. salve, (so fr. Hom. down): Mt. xxvi. 49; xxvii. 29; 
Mk. χν. 18; Lk. i. 28; Jn. xix. 3; plur. χαίρετε, [A. V. 
all hail], Mt. xxviii. 9; at the beginning of letters the 
inf. χαίρειν (sc. λέγει or κελεύει): Acts xv. 233 xxiii. 
26; Jas. i. 1, (often in the bks. of Mace.; ef. Grimm on 
1 Mace. x. 18; Ovéo in the Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. for 
1867, p. 678 sqq.; ef. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 99 
sqq.; Xen. Cyr. 4,5, 27; Ael.v.h.1, 25); fully, χαίρειν 
λέγω, lo give one greeting, salute, 2Jn.10,[11]. [Comp. : 
συν-χαίρω.] * 

χάλαζα, -ης, ἡ, (χαλάω, q- ν. [so Etym. Magn. 805, 1; 
but Curtius (§ 181) says “certainly has nothing to do 
with it ”]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 37a, hail: Rev. viii. 
αὶ 197; Ἀν ee 

χαλάω, -@; fut. χαλάσω ; 1 aor. ἐχάλασα; 1 aor. pass. 
ἐχαλάσθην; fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; a. to 
loosen, slacken, relax. b. to let down from a higher 
place to a lower: τί or twa, Mk. ii. 4; Lk. v. 4 sq.; Acts 
XXvii. 17, 30, [in these two pass. in a nautical sense, fo 
lower]; τινὰ ἐν σπυρίδι, Acts ix. 25; pass. 2 Co. xi. 33.* 

“Καλδαῖος, -ov, ὁ, α Chaldwan; γῆ Χαλδαίων the land of 
the Chaldwans, Chaldzea: Acts vii. 4, where a reference 
to Gen. xi. 28, 31 and xv. 7 seems to show that southern 
Armenia is referred to. The different opinions of oth- 
er interpreters are reviewed by Dillmann on Genesis 
(3te Aufl.) p. 223 sq.; [ef. Schrader in Riehm s. v.; 
Sayce in Encyel. Brit. s. v. Babylonia].* 

χαλεπός, -7, -dv, (fr. χαλέπτω to oppress, annoy, [(?)]), 
fr. Hom. down, hard (Lat. difficilis) ; a. hard to do, 
b. hard to bear, troublesome, 
καιροὶ χαλεποί, [R.V. grievous], 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; 
harsh, fierce, savage: of men, Mt. viii. 28 (Is. xviii. 2 
and often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down).* 

XaAwaywyew, -ὦ ; 1 aor. inf. χαλιναγωγῆσαι; (χαλινός 
and dyw); to lead by a bridle, to guide, (ἵππον, Walz, 
Rhett. Graec. i. p. 425, 19); trop. to bridle, hold in check, 
restrain: τὴν γλῶσσαν. Jas. i. 26; τὸ σῶμα, Jas. iii. 2; τὰς 
τῶν ἡδονῶν ὀρέξεις, Leian. tyrann. 4. [(Poll.1§ 215.)]* 

χαλινός, -od, 6, (χαλάω), a bridle: Jas. iii. 3; Rev. xiv. 
20. (From Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) * 


xaip. foll. by ὅτι, 
ev τούτῳ ὅτι, Lk. 


to take, to approach. 
dangerous : 


664 


χαρά 


χάλκεος, -€a, -εον, contr. -ovs, -ἢ, -ovv, (χαλκός), fr. Hom. 
down, brazen, [A. V. of brass]: Rev. ix. 20.* 

χαλκεύς, -Ews, ὁ, (χαλκός), fr. Hom. down, a worker in 
copper or tron, a smith: 2 Tim. iv. 14 [A. V. copper- 
smith ].* 

Χχαλκηδών, -ovos, 6, chalcedony, a precious stone de- 
scribed by Plin. h. n. 37,5 (18), 72 [see B. D. (esp. Am. 
ed.) 8. v.]: Rev. xxi. 19.* 

χαλκίον, -ov, τό, (χαλκός), a (copper or) brazen vessel: 
Mk. vii. 4. ([Arstph.], Xen. oee. 8, 19; [al.].) * 

xaAko-AlBavov (so Suidas [but see ed. Gaisf. s. v.]), του» 
τό, more correctly χαλκολίβανος, -ov, ἡ, (acc. to the read- 
ing as it ought to be restored [(but see the edd.) ],in 
Rev.i. 15 ὡς ἐν καμίνῳ πεπυρωμένῃ ; cf. Diisterdieck’s crit. 
note [see B. 80 (69) note]), a word of doubtful meaning, 
found only in Rev. i. 15, and ii. 18, chalcolibanus, Vulg. 
aurichaleum or orichaleum (so cod. Amiat., [al. aeric.] ; 
Luther Messing, [R. V. burnished brass]); ace. to the 
testimony of an ancient Greek [ Ansonius] in Salmasius 
(Exercitt. ad Solin. p. 810 a.: 6 λίβανος ἔχει τρία εἴδη 
δένδρων, καὶ ὁ μὲν ἄῤῥην ὀνομάζεται χαλκολίβανος, ἡλιοειδὴς 
καὶ πυῤῥὸς ἤγουν ξανθός), a certain kind of (yellow) 
Jrankincense; but both the sense of the passages in Rev. 
and a comparison of Dan. x. 6 and Ezek. i. 7, which 
seem to have been in the writer’s thought, compel us to 
understand some metal, like gold if not more precious (cf. 
Hebr. 52 vin, a metal composed of gold and silver, Sept. 
ἤλεκτρον, Vulg. electrum, Ezek. i. 4,273 viii. 2); this in- 
terpretation is confirmed by the gloss of Suidas: εἶδος 
ἠλέκτρου τιμιώτερον χρυσοῦ, ἔστι δὲ τὸ ἤλεκτρον ἀλλότυπον 
χρυσίον μεμιγμένον ὑέλῳ x. λιθείᾳ. The word is com- 
pounded, no doubt, of χαλκός and λίβανος, not of χαλκός 
and 129 ‘white.’ Cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Metalle; Wetzel 
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1869, p. 92 sqq.; ef. 
Ewald, Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 117 sq.; [Lee in the 
‘Speaker’s Com.’ ad loc. ].* 

χαλκός, -od, ὁ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nwn3, brass: 
1 Co. xiii. 1; Rev. xviii. 12; (like the Lat. aes) what is 
made of brass, money, coins of brass (also of silver and 
of gold), Mt.x. 9; Mk.vi.8; xii. 41. [B.D.s. v. Brass; 
Dict. of Antiq. 8. v. aes.]* 

χαμαί, adv. ; a. on the ground, on the earth. b. 
to the ground; in both senses fr. Hom. down; in the 
latter sense Jn. ix. 6 [where, however, Eng. idiom re- 
tains on]; xviii. 6.* 

Χαναάν, ἡ, Hebr. 1335 [lit. ‘lowland’], Canaan, the 
land of Canaan, indecl. prop. name: in the narrower 
sense, of that part of Palestine lying west of the Jordan, 
Acts vii. 11; in a wider sense, of all Palestine, Acts 
Doub ey 19:5 

Xavavaios, -a, -ov, Hebr. .)}»}5, Canaanite; the name 
of the ancient inhabitants of Palestine before its eon- 
quest by the Israelites; in Christ’s time i. q. Phanician 
[R.V. Canaanitish]: Mt. xv. 22." 

χαρά, -as, ἡ, (χαίρω), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph. down, 
Sept. for ANDY and ww, joy, gladness ; ΤΠ 1] "τ σὲ 
14; χν. 7,10; Jn. χν. 11; xvi. 22, 24; xvii. 18; Acts viii. 
8; 2 Co. vii. 13; viii. 2; Gal. v. 22; Col.i.11; Phil. ii 


χάραγμα 


2; 1Jn.i.4; 2Jn.12; opp. ἴο κατήφεια, Jas. iv.9; opp. 
to λύπη, Jn. xvi. 20; 2 Co. ii.3; Heb. xii.11; ὑμῶν, 1. 6. 
the joy received from you, 2 Co. i. 24 (opp. to the ‘sor- 
row’ which Paul on returning to Corinth would both 
experience and give, ii. 1-3) ; χαρὰ τῆς πίστεως, spring- 
ing from faith, Phil. i. 25 ; χαίρειν χαρὰν pey- Mt. ii. 10 
[W. § 32, 2; B.131, 5]; ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι χαρᾷ, 1 Pet. i. 8; 
χαρὰν [Rec." χάριν] πολλὴν ἔχειν ἐπί with a dat. of the 
thing, Philem. 7; πληροῦν τινα χαρᾶς, Ro. xv. 13; πλη- 
ροῦσθαι χαρᾶς, Acts xiii. 52; 2 Tim. i. 4; ποιεῖν τινε χαρὰν 
μεγάλην, Acts xv. 33; ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς. for joy, Mt. xiii. 44; 
Lk. xxiv. 41; Acts xii. 14; ἐν χαρᾷ (ἔρχεσθαι), Ro. xv. 
325 pera xapas, with joy, Mt. xiii. 20; xxviii. 8 ; ΜΚ. iv. 
16; Lk. viii. 13; x. 17; xxiv.52; Acts xx. 24 Rec.; Phil. 
i. 4; ii. 29; Heb. x. 34; xiii. 17, (Polyb. 11, 33, 7; 22, 
17, 12; Xen. Hiero 1, 25); with πνεύματος ἁγίου added, 
joy wrought by the Holy Spirit, 1 Th. i. 6; χαρὰ ev 
πνεύματι ἁγίῳ, joyousness caused by [cf. ἐν, I. 6 (p. 211° 
bot.) and B. § 133, 23] the Holy Spirit, Ro. xiv. 17; χαρὰ 
ἐπί τινι, 2 Co. vii.4; χαίρειν χαρᾷ διά τι, Jn. iii. 29 [cf. 
χαίρω, a.]; also διά reve (a relative pron. intervening), 
1 Th. iii. 9; ἡ χαρὰ ὅτι, Jn. xvi. 21; χαρὰ iva (see ἵνα, IL. 
2d.), 3 Jn. 4. b. by meton. the cause or occasion 
of joy: Lk. ii. 10; Jas. i. 2; [so 2 Co. i. 15 WH txt. Tr 
mrg. (al. χάρις, q. v. 3 b.)]; of persons who are one’s 
‘joy’: 1 Th. ii. 19sq.; Phil. iv. 1; of a joyful condition 
or state: ἀντὶ .. . χαρᾶς, to attain to blessedness at the 
right hand of God in heaven, Heb. xii. 2; the same 
idea is expressed in the parable by the words, ἡ χαρὰ 
τοῦ κυρίου, the blessedness which the Lord enjoys, Mt. 
xxv. 21, 23.* 

χάραγμα, -ros, τό, (χαράσσω to engrave) ; a.a 
stamp, an imprinted mark: of the mark stamped on the 
forehead or the right hand as the badge of the followers 
of Antichrist, Rev. xiii. 16 sq.; xiv. 9,11; xv. 2 Rec.; 
xvi. 2; xix. 20; xx. 4, (πυρός, the mark branded upon 
horses, Anacr. 26 [55], 2). b. thing carved, sculp- 
ture, graven work: of idolatrous images, Acts xvii. 29. 
(In various other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.) * 

χαρακτήρ, -ῆρος, 6, (χαράσσω to engrave, cut into), fr. 
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. prop. the instrument 
used in engraving or carving, (cf. ζωστήρ, λαμπτήρ. λου- 
™p, φυσητήρ; cf. our ‘stamp’ or ‘die’). 2. the 
mark (figure or letters) stamped upon that instrument or 
wrought out on it; hence univ. a mark or figure burned 
in (Ley. xiii. 28) or stamped on, an impression; the 
exact expression (the image) of any person or thing, 
marked likeness, precise reproduction in every respect (cf. 
facsimile) : x. τῆς ὑποστάσεως τοῦ θεοῦ, of Christ, ace. to 
his nature as 6 θεῖος λόγος, Heb. i. 3; σφραγῖδι θεοῦ, ἧς 
ὁ χαρακτήρ ἐστιν ὁ ἀΐδιος λόγος, Philo de plant. Noé § 5; 
x: θείας δυνάμεως, of the human mind, Philo, quod det. 
potiori ins. § 23; God τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἔπλασεν τῆς ἑαυτοῦ 
εἰκόνος χαρακτῆρα, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 33,4; of πιστοὶ ἐν 
ἀγάπῃ χαρακτῆρα θεοῦ πατρὸς διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (ἔχουσιν), 
Ignat. ad Magnes. ὅ, 2. the peculiarity, by which things 
are recognized and distinguished from each other, [ef. 
Eng. characteristic]: 2 Mace. iv. 10.* 


665 


χάρις 


χάραξ, -ακος, ὁ, (χαράσσωλ) ; 1. a pale or stake, α 
palisade, [(Arstph., Dem., al.)]. 2. a palisade or 
rampart (i. e. pales between which earth, stones, trees 
and timbers are heaped and packed together): Lk. xix. 
43 (Is. xxxvii. 33; Ezek. iv. 2; xxvi. 8; Polyb.; Joseph. 
vit. 43; Arr. exp. Alex. 2, 19, 9; Plut., al.).* 

χαρίζομαι ; depon. mid.; fut. χαρίσομαι (Ro. viii. 32; 
Leian. d. mar. 9, 1, for which Grk. writ. com. use the 
Attic χαριοῦμαι [cf. WH. App. p. 163 sq.; B. 37 (52); 
W.§15s.v.]); pf. κεχάρισμαι ; 1 aor. ἐχαρισάμην; 1 aor. 
pass. ἐχαρίσθην (Acts iii. 14; 1 Co. ii. 12; Phil. i. 29, [ef. 
B. 52 (46) ]) ; fut. pass. χαρισθήσομαι with a pass. signif. 
(Philem. 22); (χάρις); often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; 
to do something pleasant or agreeable (to one), to doa 
Savor to, gratify ; a. univ. to show one’s self gra- 
cious, kind, benevolent: τινί, Gal. iii. 18 [al. (supply +. 
κληρονομίαν and) refer this to ec. below]. b. to grant 
forgiveness, to pardon: 2 Co. ii. 7; with a dat. of the 
pers., Eph. iv. 32; Col. iii. 13; with an ace. of the thing, 
2 Co. ii. 10 [ef. W. § 39,1 b. and 3 N. 3]; τινὶ τὴν ἀδικίαν, 
2 Co. xii. 13 ; τὰ παραπτώματα, Col. ii. 13. c. to give 
graciously, give freely, bestow: τινί τι, Lk. vii. 21; Ro. 
viii. 32; Phil. ii. 9; pass., 1 Co. ii. 12; Phil. i. 29; where 
a debt is referred to, to forgive [ef. Ὁ. above], Lk. vii. 
42 sq.; τινί τινα, graciously to restore one to another who 
desires his safety (e. g. a captive [R.V. grant]), pass., 
Actsiii. 14; Philem. 22; or to preserve for one a person in 
peril, Acts xxvii. 24; τινά τινι, to give up to another one 
whom he may punish or put to death, Acts xxv. 11 [(ef. 
R. V. mrg.)]; with the addition of εἰς ἀπώλειαν, ib. 16.* 

χάριν, ace. of the subst. χάρις used absol.; prop. in favor 
of, for the pleasure of : χάριν Ἕκτορος, Hom. Il. 15, 744, 
al.; 1 Mace. ix. 10; Judith viii. 19; like the Lat. abl. 
gratia, it takes on completely the nature of a preposi- 
tion, and is joined to the gen., for, on account of, for the 
sake of: Gal. iii. 19 (on which see παράβασις) ; 1 Tim. 
v. 14; Tit.i.11; Jude 16; τούτου χάριν, on this account, 
for this cause, Eph. iii. 1 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54); τούτου χ. 
ἵνα, Eph. iii. 14 [ef. W. 566 (526)]; Tit. i. 5; οὗ χάριν, 
for which cause, Lk. vii. 47; χάριν τίνος ; for what cause? 
wherefore? 1 Jn. iii.12. Except in 1 Jn. iii. 12, χάρεν is 
everywhere in the N. T. placed after the gen., as it gen- 
erally is in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. 1. 3 a. p. 2416; 
Herm. ad Vig. p. 701); in the O. T. Apocr. it is placed 
sometimes before, sometimes after; οἵ. Wahl, Clavis 
Apocr. s.v. 6 b.; Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 29.* 

χάρις, -ἰτος, ace. χάριν, and twice in LT Tr WH the 
rarer form χάριτα (Acts xxiv. 27; Jude 4) which is also 
poetic (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. 8.44 Anm.1; [WH. App. 
157; B. 13 (12)]), ace. plur. χάριτας (Acts xxiv. 27 
RG), ἡ, (χαίρω), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. jM, grace; 
i.e. 1. prop. that which affords joy, pleasure, de- 
light, sweetness, charm, loveliness : grace of speech (Eccl. 
x. 12; Sir. xxi. 16; xxxvii. 21; Hom. Od. 8,175; τῶν 
λόγων, Dem. 51, 9; 1419, 16; χάριτες μωρῶν, verbal 
pleasantries which the foolish affect in order to ingra- 
tiate themseives, Sir. xx. 13), λόγοι χάριτος (gen. of 
quality), Lk. iv. 22; χάριν διδόναι τοῖς ἀκούουσινν Eph. ἵν 


χάρις 


29; ἐν χάριτι, with grace [the subst. ἅλας being added; 
see Bp. Lghtft.], Col. iv. 6. 2. good-will, loving- 
kindness, favor: ina broad sense, χάρις mapa τινι, Lk. 
ii. 52; ἔχειν χάριν πρός twa, to have favor with one, Acts 
ii. 47; χάρις ἐναντίον τινός, Acts vii. 10; [χάριν κατά 
τινος αἰτεῖσθαι ὅπως (q. v. 11. 2), Acts xxv. 3 (but al. 
refer this to 3 b. below) ]; χάρις (of God) ἐστὶν ἐπί τινα, 
attends and assists one, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33; χάριν 
(χάριτα) χάριτας κατατίθεσθαί τινι (see κατατίθημι), Acts 
xxiv. 27; xxv. 9; favor (i.e. act of favoring [ef. W. 8. 66 
fin.]), 2 Co. viii. 4. χάρις is used of the kindness of a 
master towards his inferiors or servants, and so esp. 
of God towards men: εὑρίσκειν χάριν παρὰ τῷ 6° Lk. i. 
30; ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts vii. 46; τοῦτο χάρις Sc. ἐστίν, 
this wins for us (God’s) favor [R.V. is acceptable], 1 Pet. 
ii. 19; with παρὰ θεῷ added, ib. 20; παραδίδοσθαι τῇ x- 
τοῦ θεοῦ, to be committed or commended to the protect- 
ing and helping favor of God, Acts xiv. 26; xv. 40. The 
apostles and N. T. writers at the beginning and end of 
their Epp. crave for their readers the favor (‘grace’) of 
God or of Christ, to which all blessings, esp. spiritual, 
are due: Ro.i. 7; xvi. 20, 24[RG]; 1Co.i.3; xvi. 23; 
2Co.i. 2; xiii. 13 (14); Gal. i. 35 vi. 18; Eph. i. 2; vi. 


2 Th. i. 2; iii.18; 1 Tim.i.2; vi. 21 (22); 2 Tim.i.2; iv, 22; 
Tit. i. 4; iii. 15; Philem. 3, 25; Heb. xiii. 25; 1 Pet. i. 2; 
2 Pet. i. 2; iii. 18[ef. 3 a.]; 2Jn.3; Rev.i.4; xxii. 21; ef. 
Otto, Ueber ἃ. apostol. Segensgruss χάρις ὑμῖν ete., in the 
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1867, p. 678sqq. | More- 
over, the word χάρις contains the idea of kindness which 
bestows upon one what he has not deserved: Ro. xi. 6; 
hence κατὰ χάριν and κατὰ ὀφείλημα are contrasted in 
Ro. iv. 4, 16; χάριτε and ἐξ ἔργων in Ro. xi. 6; κατ᾽ 
ἐκλογὴν χάριτος, ib. 5; but the N. T. writers use χάρις 
pre-eminently of that kindness by which God bestows 
favors even upon the ill-deserving, and grants to 
sinners the pardon of their offences, and bids them ac- 
cept of eternal salvation through Christ: Ro. iii. 24; 
v. 17, 20 sq.; [vi. 1]; 1 Co. xv. 10; Gal.i.15; ii. 21; Eph. 
i.6, [7]; 11: 5, 7sq.; Phil.i.7; Col.i.6; 2 Th. ii. 16; 
1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim.i.9; Heb. ii. 9 [here Treg. mrg. 
χωρίς]; X. 29; xii. 155 xiii. 9; 1 Pet.i.10; Jude 4; εὑρί- 
oxew χάριν, Heb. iv. 16; ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ ἡ σωτήριος, Tit. 
ii. 11; ὁ λόγος τῆς χάριτος, the message of his grace, Acts 
Xiv. 3; xx. 32; τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts 
xx. 24; it is styled ‘the grace of Christ, in that through 
pity for sinful men Christ left his state of blessedness 
with God in heaven, and voluntarily underwent the 
hardships and miseries of human life, and by his suffer- 
ings and death procured salvation for mankind: [Acts 
xv. 11]; 2 Co. viii. 9; Ro. v. 15; Gal.i.6; [Tit. iii. 7]; 
Jn. i. 14, 17. χάρις is used of the merciful kindness 
by which God, exerting his holy influence upon souls, turns 
them to Christ, keeps, strengthens, increases them in Chris- 
tian faith, knowledge, affection, and kindles them to the 
exercise of the Christian virtues: 2 Co. iv. 15; vi. 1; 
2 Th. i. 12; of πεπιστευκότες διὰ τῆς χάριτος, Acts xviii. 
27; ὑπὸ χάριν εἶναι, to be subject to the power of grace, 


666 


χάρις 


opp. to ὑπὸ νόμον εἶναι, Ro. vi. 14 sq.; ἐκπίπτειν τῆς 
χάρ. Gal. ν. 4; προσμένειν τῇ x. Acts xiii. 48 [G LT Tr 
WH]; ἐπιμένειν, ibid. Rec.; ἐν τῇ χάριτι (RG WH txt. 
om. the art.), prompted by grace, Col. iii. 16; the grace 
of God promoting the progress and blessings of the 
Christian religion, Acts xi. 23; [prompting its posses- 
sors to benefactions, 2 Co. ix. 14]; sustaining and aiding 
the efforts of the men who labor for the cause of 
Christ, 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. i. 12; the favor of Christ, 
assisting and strengthening his followers and ministers 
to bear their troubles, 2 Co. xii. 9. 3. what is 
due to grace; a. the spiritual condition of one 
governed by the power of divine grace, what the theolo- 
gians call the ‘status gratiae’: ἑστηκέναι ἐν τῇ x. Ro. v. 
2; εἰς τὴν x. 1 Pet. v.12; αὐξάνειν ἐν χάριτι, 2 Pet. 111. 
18; ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι ev τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ, 2 Tim. ii. 
1. b. a token or proof of grace, 2 Co. i. 15 [A. V. 
benefit (WH txt. Tr mrg. χαράν, q. v- under b.)]; α gift 
of grace; benefaction, bounty: used of alms, 1 Co. xvi. 8; 
2 Co. viii. 6 sq. 19, (Sir. iii. 29 (31); xxix. 15; xxx. 6; 
4 Mace. v. 8; Xen. Ages. 4,3sq.; Hier. 8, 4) ; πᾶσα χάρις, 
all earthly blessings, wealth, ete., which are due to divine 
goodness, 2 Co. ix. 8; 6 θεὸς πάσης χάριτος, the author 
and giver of benefits of every kind, 1 Pet. v.10. the aid 
or succor of divine grace: διδόναι χάριν ταπεινοῖς, 1 Pet. 
ν. 5; Jas. iv. 6; the salvation offered to Christians is 
called χάρις, a gift of divine grace, 1 Pet.i.10,13; of the 
various blessings of Christ experienced by souls: λαβεῖν 
χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος (see ἀντί, 2 6. p. 49" bot.), Jn. 1. 165 
χάρις ζωῆς, the gift of grace seen in the reception of life 
[ef. ζωή, 2 b.], 1 Pet. iii. 7; capacity and ability due to the 
grace of God (Germ. Ginadenausriistuny), Eph. iv. 7; 
πλήρης χάριτος. Acts vi. 8G LT Tr WH; ποικίλη χάρις, 
the aggregate of the extremely diverse powers and gifts 
granted to Christians, 1 Pet.iv.10; used of the power 
to undertake and administer the apostolic office: λαβεῖν 
χάριν καὶ ἀποστολήν, i. 6. χάριν τῆς ἀποστολῆς, Ro. i. 55 ἡ 
x: ἡ δοθεῖσά μοι (Paul), Ro. xii. 3,6; xv.15; 1Co. iii. 10; 
Gal. ii. 9; Eph. iii. 2,7; 806. ὑμῖν, of the gifts of knowl- 
edge and utterance conferred upon Christians, 1 Co. i. 
4; ἐδόθη μοι ἡ x- αὕτη, foll. by an inf., Eph. iii. 8; of the 
dcsire to give alms roused by the grace of God, 2 Co. 
viii. 1. 4. thanks (for benefits, services, favors); 
prop.: χάριτι, with thanksgiving, 1 Co. x. 30; χάριν ἔχειν 
τινί (Lat. gratiam habere alicui), to be thankful to one, 
Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 3; Heb. xii. 28, (2 
Mace. iii. 33, and countless times in prof. auth.; cf. Pas- 
sow 8. v. p. 2416" sub fin.; [L. and S.s. v. II. 2]; Ast, Lex. 
Plat. ii. p. 539 sq.; Bleek, Brief a. ἃ. Hebr. ii. 2, p. 975) 5 
foll. by ἐπί with a dat. of the thing, Philem. 7 T edd. 2 
and 7, Ree." (cf. p. 233" mid.); χάρις τῷ θεῷ SC. ἔστω, 
Ro. vii. 25 LT Tr WH txt.; foll. by ὅτι, Ro. vi. 17 (x. τοῖς 
θεοῖς, ὅτι etc. Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 72; 8, 7,3; an. 3, 3, 14; oec. 
8, 16); with a ptep. added to the dat. (by apposition), 
1 Co. xv. 57; 2 Co. ii. 14; viii. 16; foll. by ἐπί with a dat. 
of the thing [cf. ἐπί, B. 2 a. δ.1, 2 Co. ix. 15. i. q. 
recompense, reward, Lk. vi. 32-34 (for which Mt. v. 46 
uses μισθός)." 


χάρισμα 


χάρισμα, -τος, τό, (χαρίζομαι), a gift of grace; a favor 
which one receives without any merit of his own; in the 
N. T. [where (exe. 1 Pet. iv. 10) used only by Paul] the 
giftcf divine grace (so also in Philo de alleg. legg. iii. § 24 
fin. δωρεὰ καὶ εὐεργεσία καὶ χάρισμα θεοῦ τὰ πάντα ὅσα ev 
κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ κόσμος ἐστίν) ; used of the natural gift 
of continence, due to the grace of God as creator, 1 Co. 
vii. 7; deliverance from great peril to life, τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς x. 
bestowed upon us, 2 Co. i. 11; the gift of faith, knowl- 
edge, holiness, virtue, Ro. i. 11; the economy of divine 
grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation 
is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of 
Christ laid hold of by faith, Ro. v. 15 sq. ; vi. 23; plur. 
of the several blessings of the Christian salvation, Ro. 
xi. 29; in the technical Pauline sense χαρίσματα [ A. V. 
gifis| denote extraordinary powers, distinguishing certain 
Christians and enabling them to serve the church of Christ, 
the reception of which is due to the power of divine grace 
operating in their souls by the Holy Spirit (cf. Cremer in 
Herzog ed. 2 vol. v. 10 sqq. 8. v. Geistesgaben] : Ro. xii. 
6; 1 C6. i. 7; xii. 4, 31; 1 Pet.iv.10; χαρίσματα ἰαμάτων, 
1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; spec. the sum of those powers requisite 
for the discharge of the office of an evangelist: 1 Tim. iv. 
14; 2 Tim.i. 6. ([ΟΥ temporal blessings, ‘Teaching’ 
1, 5 (cf. δώρημα in Herm. mand. 2, 4)]; eccl. writ.) * 

Χαριτόω, τῶ: 1 aor. ἐχαρίτωσα ; pf. pass. ptep. κεχαρι- 
τωμένος ; (χάρις); 1. to make graceful i. 6. charm- 
ing, lovely, agreeable: pass. Sir. xviii. 17; ταῖς διαλόξοις 
στροφαῖς xaptrovpevos ὀφρύν, Liban. vol. iv. p. 1071, 
14. 2. to pursue with grace, compass with favor; to 
honor with blessings: twd, Eph. i. 6; pass. Lk. i. 28, 
[some would take it in these two exx. subjectively 
(R. V.mrg. endued with grace)]; Ps. xviii. 26 Symm.; 
[Herm. sim. 9, 24,3; Test. xii. Patr. test. Joseph. 1]; 
eccles. and Byzant. writ.* 

Χαρράν, (Hebr. [ὙΠ [i. e. (prob.) ‘parched’, ‘arid’], 
Gen. xi. 31; xii. 5; xxvii. 43), Haran [so R. V.; A. V. 
(after the Grk.) Charran], called Kappa in Grk. writ. 
and Carrae in Lat., a city of Mesopotamia, of great anti- 
quity and made famous by the dee of Crassus: Acts 
vii. 2,4. Cf. Win. RWB. s.v.; Vaihinger in Herzog v. 
539; eines in Herzog ed. 2, 5. v.]; Steiner in Schenkel 
ii. 592 ; Schrader in Riehm p- 571.* 

χάρτης, του, 6, (χαράσσω), paper: 2 Jn. 12; Jer. xliii. 
(xxxvi.) 23. ([Plat. Com. fragm. 10 p. 257 (Didot) ; ef. 
inser. (B.C. 407) in Kirchhoff, Inserr. Attic. i. No. 324]; 
Ceb. tab. 4; Diose. 1, 115.) [Cf. Birt, Antikes Buch- 
wesen, index i. s.v.; Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeo- 
graphie, p. 23; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. p. 270 
sq-]* 

χάσμα, -ros, τό, (χαίνω to yawn). a gaping opening, a 
chasm, gulf: i.q. a great interval, Lk. xvi. 26. (Hes. 
theog. 740; Eur., Plat., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) * 

χεῖλος, -ους, τό, gen. plur. in the uncontr. form χειλέων 
(Heb. xiii. 15; see ὄρος), (χέω i. q. XAQ, χαίνω), fr. Hom. 
down, Sept. for ADY, a lip; a. in the N. T. of the 
speaking mouth [ef. W. 32]: Mt. xv. 8; Mk. vii.6; Ro. 

iii. 18 ; 1 Co. xiv. 21; Heb. xiii. 15 (on which see καρπός, 


667 


χεὶρ 


2c.) ; 1 Pet. iii. 10. b. metaph.: χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσ- 
ons, the sea-shore, Heb. xi. 12 (Gen. xxii. 17; Ex. vii. 
15; xiv. 30, ete.; of the shore of a lake, Joseph. b. j- 
3, 10,7; of the banks of rivers, Hdt. 2, [70]. 94; [Ar- 
istot. de mirab. aud. 46; 150; cf. hist. an. 6, 16 p- 5708, 
22]; Polyb. 3, 14, 6; [ef. W. pp. 18, 30]).* 

Χχειμάζω : pres. pass. ptep. χειμαζόμενος ; (χεῖμα stormy 
weather, winter [cf. χειμών ]); lo afflict with a tempest, to 
toss about upon the waves: pass. Acts xxvii. 18 [R. V. 
labored with the storm]. (Aeschyl., Thuc., Plat., Diod., 
Plut., Leian., al.) (Comp. : παρα-χειμάζω.}" 

Χείμαρρος, (for the more com. χειμάρροος [56. ποταμός], 
Att. contr. χειμάρρους [q. v. in L.and S. fin.], ef. Lob. ad 
Phryn. p. 234), -ov, 6, (χεῖμα winter, and ῥέω, ῥόος), fr. 
Hom. down, Sept. very often for 5m3, lit. flowing in 
winter, a torrent: Jn. xviii. 1 [where A. V. brook].* 

χειμών, -dvos, ὁ, (χεῖμα, and this fr. χέω on account of 
the ‘pouring’ rains; [al. connect it with χιτών, snow, 
frost (ef. Lat. hiems, ete.); see Curtius §194; L. and S. 
5. V. χιών, fin.]), winter ; a. stormy or rainy weather, 
a tempest (so fr. Hom. down) : Mt. xvi. 3 [Tdf. br. WH 
reject the pass.]; Acts xxvii. 20. b. winter, the 
winter season, (so fr. Thue. and Arstph. down): Jn. x. 22; 
2 Tim. iv. 21; χειμῶνος, in winter (-time), in the winter 
(Plat. de rep. Ε Ρ- 415 e.; Xen. mem. 8, 8, 9: al. [ef. W. 
§ 30,11; B. 8 132, 26]), Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk. xiii. 18.* 

χείρ, gen. χειρός, acc. χεῖραν (1 Pet. v.6 Tdf.; see ἄρσην, 
fin.), 7, [fr. τ. meaning ‘to lay hold of’; ef. Lat. heres, 
οἴου; Curtius § 189; Vanicek p. 249 sq.], fr. Hom. down, 
Hebr. 1, the hand: Mt. iii. 12; Mk. iii. 1; Lk. vi. 6; 
1 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. xii. 12, and often; the gen. with the 
verbs ἅπτομαι. ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, κρατέω, πιάζω, etc., which 
see in their places; the dat. with ἐργάζομαι, ἐσθίω, ete. ; 
6 ἀσπασμὸς TH ἐμῇ χειρί, 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col.iv.18; 2 Th. 
iii. 17; the acc. with the verbs αἴρω, δέω. ἐκπετάννυμι, 
ἐκτείνω, ἐμβάπτω. ἐπιτίθημι, καθαρίζω, κατασείω. vinta, 
ete. ἡ ἐπίθεσις τῶν χειρῶν [see ἐπίθεσις and reff.], 
1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim. i.6; Heb.vi.2; ἐν χειρί τινος, in 
imitation of the Hebr. “3. 1a [ef. Β. 8188, 20 cf. 319 sq. 
(274) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 19], by the help or agency, 
of any one, by means of any one, Acts vii. 35 Rec.; Gal. 
iii. 19; σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου, with the aid or service of the 
angel [cf. B. u.s.], Acts vii. 35 LT Tr WH; those things 
in the performance of which the hands take the princi- 
pal part (as 6. g. in working miracles), are said to be 
done διὰ Reino or χειρῶν or τῶν [ ef. B. §124, 8 d.] χειρῶν 
τινος, Mk. vi. 2; Acts v. 12; xiv. 3; xix. 113 univ., Acts 
li. 23; vil. 25; xi. 30; xv. 23; emi χειρῶν, Mt. iv. 6; Lk. 
iv. 11; ἐπὶ τὴν y., Rev. xiv. 9; xx. 1 [here Treg. mrg. 
ἐν τῇ x-], 4; ἐκ, Acts xxviii. 4; Rev. viii. 4; εἰς τὴν x. 
(on his hand), Lk. xv. 22; ἡ χείρ, as an acting subject 
(see γλῶσσα, 1), Lk. xxii. 21; plur., Acts xvii. 253; xx. 
34; 1 Jn.i.1; τὰ ἔργα τῶν x., Acts vii. 41; Rev. ix. 20; 
ἐκδικεῖν TO αἷμά τινος ἔκ Twos (see ἐκδικέω, b. and ἐκ I. 7), 


Rey. xix. 2. By meton. 7) χείρ is put for power, activity, 
(for exx. fr. prof. auth. fr. Hom. down see Passow s. v. 
p- 2431°; [L.and S.s. v. p.1720°]): παραδιδόναι τινὰ εἰς 


χεῖράς τινων; into the hostile hands (Deut. i. 27; Job xvi. 


χειραγω yew 


11), Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi.45; Mk. ix. 31; Lk. ix. 44; xxiv. 
7; Acts xxi. 11; xxviii. 17; διδόναι τι ἐν τῇ χειρί τινος, 
to commit to one’s protecting and upholding power, Jn. 
iii. 35; also εἰς τ. χεῖράς τινος, Jn. xiii. 3; τινὰ ἐκ τῶν 
χειρ. or ἐκ χειρός τινος (fr. the hostile power of any one) 
ἀπάγειν, Acts xxiv. 7 Kec.; ἐξελέσθαι, Acts xii. 11 (Gen. 
xxxiil. 11; Ex. xviii. 8 sq.); ἐξέρχεσθαι, Jn. x. 39; ῥυ- 
σθῆναι, Lk. i. 74; σωτηρία, ib. 71; ἐκφεύγειν τὰς χεῖράς 
twos, 2 Co. xi. 33. By a fig. use of language χείρ 
or χεῖρες are attributed to God, symbolizing his might, 
activity, power; conspicuous a. in creating the 
universe : ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii-) 
26). B. in upholding and preserving: Lk. 
xxiii. 46; Jn. x. 29 (cf. 28); χεὶρ κυρίου ἐστὶ pera τινος, 
God is present, protecting and aiding one, Lk. i. 66; 
Acts xi. 21. γ. in punishing: χεὶρ κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ, 
Acts xiii. 11 (1S. xii. 15); ἐμπίπτειν εἰς x. θεοῦ ζῶντος, 
Heb. x. 31. δ. in determining and controlling 
the destinies of men: Acts iv. 28; ταπεινοῦσθαι ὑπὸ 
τὴν κραταιὰν χεῖρα τοῦ θεοῦ, 1 Pet. v. 6. 

χειραγωγέω, -@; pres. pass. ptep. χειραγωγούμενος ; 
(xetpaywyds, q.v.; cf. χαλιναγωγέω) ; to lead by the hand: 
τινά, Acts ix. 8; xxii.ll. (Anacr., Diod., Plut., Leian., 
Artem., al.) * 

Xetp-aywyés, -dv, (χείρ and ἄγω), leading one by the 
hand: Acts xiii. 11. (Artem. oneir. 1, 48; Plut., al.) * 

χειρόγραφον, -ov. τό, (χείρ and γράφω), a handwriting ; 
what one has written with his own hand (Polyb. 30, 8, 4; 
Dion. Hal. 5, 8; al.) ; spee. a note of hand, or writing 
in which one acknowledges that money has either been 
deposited with him or lent to him by another, to be re- 
turned at an appointed time (Tob. v. 3; ix. 5; Plut. 
mor. p. 829 a. de vitand. aere al. 4, 3; Artem. oneir. 3, 
40); metaph. applied in Col. ii. 14 [(where R.V. bond) ] 
to the Mosaic law, which shows men to be chargeable 
with offences for which they must pay the penalty.* 

χειρο-ποίητος, -ov, (χείρ and mrorew), made by the hand 
i. 6. the skill of man (see ἀχειροποίητος) : of temples, Mk. 
xiv. 58; Acts vil. 48; xvii. 24; Heb. ix. 11, 24; of cir- 
cumcision, Eph. ii.11. (In Sept. of idols; of other things, 
occasionally in Hdt., Thue., Xen., Polyb., Diod.) * 

χειρο-τονέω, -@: 1 aor. ptep. χειροτονήσας ; 1 aor. pass. 
ptep. χειροτονηθείς; (fr. χειροτόνος extending the hand, 
and this fr. χείρ and τείνω) ; fr. [Arstph.], Xen., Plat., 
Isoer. down; a. prop. 10 vote by stretching out the 
hand (cf. Xen. an. 3, 2, 33 ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, ἀνατεινάτω 
τὴν χεῖρα: ἀνέτειναν ἅπαντες). b. fo create or appoint 
by vote: τινά, one to have charge of some office or duty, 
pass. 2 Co. viii. 19, and in the spurious subscriptions in 
2)Tim. iv. 23: Vite in. 15. c. with the loss of the 
notion of extending the hand, to elect, appoint, create: 
twa, Acts xiv. 23 (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ. in Passow 
S. Vv. p. 2440"; χειροτονεῖσθαι ὑπὸ θεοῦ βασιλέα, Philo de 
praem. et poen. ὃ ὃ; [βασιλέως ὕπαρχος ἐχειροτονεῖτο, de 
Joseph. § 41]; Joseph. antt. 6, 4, 2: [7, 11,1; of the 
choice of Jon. as high-priest, 13, 2,2; ef. Hatch in Dict. 
of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Ordination, p. 1501; Harnack on 
‘Teaching’ etc. 15,1]). [Comp.: mpo-xetporovew. ] * 


668 


χιλίαρχος 


χείρων, -ον, (compar. of κακός ; derived fr. the obsol. 
xé€pns, which has been preserved in the dat. χέρηϊ, acc. 
χέρηα, plur. xépnes, xepna; cf. Bim. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 268 
lef. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. yépns]), [fr. Hom. down], 
worse: Mt. ix. 16; xxvii. 64; Mk. ii. 21; γίνεται τὰ 
ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. 
li. 20; εἰς τὸ χεῖρον ἔρχεσθαι, [lo grow worse], of one 
whose illness increases, Mk. v. 26; ἵνα μὴ χεῖρόν σοί τι 
γένηται, lest some worse thing befall thee, εἶπ. v. 14; 
πόσῳ χείρων τιμωρία, [ A.V. how much sorer punishment], 
Heb. x. 29; ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον προκόπτειν ([A. V. war worse 
and worse]; see προκόπτω, 2), 2 Tim. iii. 13; of the moral 
character, ἀπίστου χείρων, 1 Tim. v. 8.* 

XepovBip (RG) and Χερουβείν (LT Tr WH; in Mss. 
also XepovBiv, Χερουβείμ; [οἵ. Τὰ Proleg. p. 84; WH. 
App. p. 155"; ands. v. et, 47)» τά (neut. gend. also in most 
places in the Sept.; rarely, as Ex. xxv. 18, 19, of Xep.; 
XepovBes in Ex. xxv. 18 [but this is a mistake; the 
form in -εἰς seems not to occur in the O.T.]; in Philo 
τὰ Χερουβίμ, in Joseph. of Χερουβεῖς, antt. 3, 6,5; αἱ 
Χερουβεῖς, ibid. 8, 3,3; the use of the neut. gender 
seemed most suitable, because they were ζῶα ; Χερουβεῖς 
ζῶά ἐστι πετεινά, μορφὴν δ᾽ οὐδενὶ τῶν im ἀνθρώπων éwpa- 
μένων παραπλήσια, Joseph. antt. 8, 6,5), Hebr. 02373 
(hardly of Semitic origin, but cognate to the Grk. γρύψ, 
γρυπός [for the various opinions ef. Gesenius’s Hebr. 
Lex. ed. Miihlau and Volek 5. v. 2703}, cherubim, two 
golden figures of living creatures with two wings; they 
were fastened to the lid of the ark of the covenant in 
the Holy of holies (both of the sacred tabernacle and of 
Solomon’s temple) in such a manner that their faces 
were turned towards each other and down towards the 
lid, which they overshadowed with their expanded 
wings. Between these figures God was regarded as 
having fixed his dwelling-place (see δόξα, III. 1): Heb. 
ix. 5. In Ezek. i. and x. another and far more elabor- 
ate form is ascribed to them; but the author of the 
Ep. to the Heb. has Ex. xxv. 18-20 in mind. Cf. 
Win. RWB. s. v. Cherubim; Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 710 
sq.; Dillmann in Schenkel i. 509 sqq.; Riehm, De Na- 
tura et Notione Symbolica Cheruborum (Basil. 1864) ; 
also his ‘Die Cherubim in ἃ. Stiftshiitte u. im Tempel’ 
in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1871 p. 399 sqq.; and in 
his HWB. p. 227 sqq.3 [ef. Lenormant, Beginnings of 
History, (N. Y. 1882), ch. iii.].* 

χήρα, -as, ἡ, (fem. of the adj. χῆρος, ‘bereft’; akin to 
χέρσος, sterile, barren, and the Lat. careo, [but ef. Cur- 
tius § 192]), fr. Hom. Il. 6, 408 down, Sept. for 727, 
a widow: Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Ree.; Mk. xii. 40, 42 sq.; 
Lk. ii. 37; iv. 253 vii. 12; xviii. 3,5; χχ. 47; xxi. 2sq.; 
Acts vi. 1; ix. 39,41; 1Co. vii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 3-5, 9, 11, 
16; Jas. i. 27; with γυνή added (2S. xiv. 5, and often 
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 2, 289 down), Lk. iv. 26; 
a city stripped of inhabitants and riches is represented 
under the figure of a widow, Rev. xviii. 7.* 

χθές (Rec. ; also Grsb. in Acts and Heb.), i. q. ἐχθὲς 
(q. v-), yesterday; Sept. for yon. [Hom. (h. Merc.), al.] 

χιλίαρχος, -ov, 6, (χίλιοι and dpyw; [on the form of 


“- 


χιλιάς 


the word οἵ. reff. s. v. ἑκατοντάρχης, and L. and S. s. v. 
xudpxns]), the commander of a thousand soldiers, a 
chiliarch; the commander of a Roman cohort (a military 
tribune): Jn. xviii. 12; Acts xxi. 31-33, 57; xxii. 24, 
26-29; xxiii. 10, 15, 17-19, 22; xxiv. 7 Rec., 22; xxv. 
23, (Sept. for DDN Sv and Daox WN). any military 
commander [R.V. high or chief captain, captain]: Mk. 
vi. 21; Rev. vi. 15; xix. 18. [(Aeschyl., Xen., al.)]* 

χιλιάς, -ddos, ἡ, (χίλιοι), a thousand, the number one 
thousand: plur., Lk. xiv. 31; Acts iv. 4; 1 Co. x. 8; 
Rev. v. 11; vii. 4-8; xi. 18; xiv. 1-3; xxi. 16; Sept. 
for 7x, D278, [Hdt. on.]* 

χίλιοι, -at, -α, α thousand: 2 Pet. iii. 8; Rev. xi. 3, ete. 

Χίος, -ov, ἡ, Chios, an island in the iKgean Sea, be- 
tween Samos and Lesbos, not far from the shore of 
Lydia: Acts xx. 15.* 

χιτών, -dvos, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ΠΩ. and 
NJA3, a tunic, an undergarment, usually worn next the 
skin: Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 9; Lk. iii. 11; ix.3; Jude 28. 
it is distinguished from τὸ ἱμάτιον (q. ν. 2) or τὰ ἱμάτια in 
Mt. v. 40; Lk. vi. 29; Jn. xix. 23; Acts ix. 39; univ. a 
garment, vestment (Aeschyl. suppl. 903), plur. (Plut. Tib. 
Gracch. 19), Mk. xiv. 68. [Cf. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. 8. v. 
Tunica; and reff. s.v. ἱμάτιον, u.s.] * 

χιών, -dvos, 9, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 19v, snow: 
Mt. xxviii.3; Mk. ix. 3 (where it is omitted by GT Tr 
WH); Rev. i. 14.* 

χλαμύς, -ύδος, ἡ, (acc. to the testimony of Pollux 10, 
38, 164, first used by Sappho), a chlamys, an outer gar- 
ment usually worn over the χιτών [q. v.]; spec. the Lat. 
paludamentum [q.v. in Rich, Dict. of Antiq. 8. v. sub 
fin.], a kind of short cloak worn by soldiers, military 
officers, magistrates, kings, emperors, ete. (2 Mace. xii. 
85; Joseph. antt. 5, 1,10; Hdian., Ael., al.; often in 
Plut.): Mt. xxvii. 28, 31, [A.V. robe ; see Meyer ad loc.; 
Trench, Syn. §1.; Ricb (as above) s.v. Chlamys; and 
other reff. s. v. ἱμάτιον]. ἢ 

χλεναΐζω ; impf. ἐχλεύαζον ; (χλεύη, jesting, mockery) ; 
to deride, mock, jeer: Actsii.13 Ree. ; xvii. 32. (2 Mace. 
vii. 27; Sap. xi. 15; Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., 
Leian., al.) [Comp.: δια-χλευάζω.] * 

xAtapds, -d, -όν. (χλίω, to become warm, liquefy, melt), 
tepid, lukewarm: metaph. of the condition of a soul 
wretchedly fluctuating between a torpor and a fervor of 
love, Rev. iii. 16. (Hdt., Pind., Diod., Plut., Athen., 
Geop.) * 

XAcy [(i. 6. ‘tender verdure’; an appellation of De- 
meter, ‘the Verdant ’)], -ns, 9, Chloe, a Christian woman 
of Corinth: 1 Co.i. 11. [Cf. Β. Ὁ. s. v.]* 

χλωρός, -z, -όν, (contr. fr. yAoepds, fr. χλόη, tender 
green grass or corn) ; 1. green: χόρτος, Mk. vi. 39 
(Gen. i. 30); Rev. viii. 7; πᾶν χλωρόν, ix. 4. 2. 
yellowish, pale: ἵππος, Rev. vi. 8. (In both senses fr. 
Hom. down.) * 

xés”, siz hundred and sizty-sir (x’=600; &=60; 
S’==6), a mystical number the meaning of which is clear 
when it is written in Hebr. letters, Yop 393, i. 6. Νέρων 
Καῖσαρ, ‘ Nero Caesar’, (sometimes the Jews write 10p 


669 


Xopacuw 


for the more common 1p’, the Syriac always ,220, 


ef. Ewald, Die Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 263 note; 
[Schirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. ed. 1, § 25 III. p. 449 note]; 
= 50, 7200, )=6, }=50, 7100, Ὁ- -δῦ, 9= 

200): Rey. xiii, 18 RGT Tr. [Fora digest of opin 
ions respecting this much debated number see Lee in 
the ‘Speaker’s Com.’ ad loc.]* 

χοϊκός, -ἡ -dv, (χοῦς, 4- V-), made of earth, earthy: 1 Co. 
xv. 47-49. (γυμνοῖ τούτους τοῦ χοϊκοῦ βάρους, Anon. in 
Walz, Rhett. i. p. 618, 4; {[Π|ρρο]. haer. 10, 9 p. 314, 
95].)* 

χοῖνιξ, -cxos, 7, fr. Hom. Od. 19, 28 down, a choeniz, 
a dry measure, containing four cotylae or two sextarii 
[i.e. less than our ‘quart’; ef. L. and S. s. v.] (or as 
much as would support a man of moderate appetite for 
aday; hence called in Athen. 3 § 20 p. 98 6. nueporpopis 
[ef. ἡ χοῖνιξ ἡμερήσιος τροφή, Diog. Laért. 8, 18]): Rev. 
vi. 6 [where A.V. measure (see Am. appendix ad loc.) ].* 

χοῖρος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, a swine: plur., Mt. vii. 
6; viii. 30, [31], 32; Mk. v. 11-13, 14 Ree., [16]; Lk. 
viii. 32 sq.3 xv. 15scq. (Not found in the O. T.) * 

χολάω, -@; (χολή, q-V-) 5 1. to be atrabilious; to 
be mad (Arstph. nub. 833). 2. to be angry, en- 
raged, (for χολοῦμαι;, more com. in the earlier Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. down) : τινί, Jn. vii. 23 (3 Mace. iii. 1; Artem., 
Nicand., Mosch., Diog. Laért., al.).* 

χολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (i: ᾳ. χόλος, fr. χέω to pour out [now 
thought to be connected witl. χλόη, χλωρός, ete. ‘ yellow- 
ish green’; cf. Curtius ὃ 200; Vanicek p. 247)), first 
found in Archilochus (8th cent. B. C.), afterwards in 
Aeschyl. et sqq- 1. bile, gall: Mt. xxvii. 34 (ef. 
Sept. Ps. Lxviii. (Ixix.) 22) [ef. B. D.s.v. Gall]; Acts viii. 
23 (on which see πικρία) ; for 177, Job xvi. 13. 2. 
in the O. T. it is also used of other bitter things; for 
τ) p9, wormwood, Prov. v. 4; Lam. iii. 15; hence some 
understand the word in Mt. xxvii. 34 to mean myrrh, on 
account of Mk. xv. 23; but see σμυρνίζω, 2; [B. D.u.s.].* 

Χχόος, See χοῦς. : 

Χοραζίν ([so GL, also Mt. xi. 21 Rec.; Lk. x. 13 Ree.*!"] ; 
Χοραζείν T Tr WH; [Xwpativ, Lk. x. 13 Rec.*te2; see 
et, 1; Pdf. Proleg. p. 84; WH. App. p. 1551), ἡ, indecl. 
Chorazin, a town of Galilee, which is mentioned neither 
in the O. T. nor by Josephus; acc. to Jerome (in his 
Onomast. [cf. Euseb. onomast. ed. Larsow and Parthey 
Ρ- 374]) two miles distant from Capernaum; perhaps the 
same place which in the talmud, Menach. f. 85, 1 is called 
pn [ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 139], the re- 
mains of which Robinson (Biblical Researches, iii. 347, 
359 sq.) thinks must be sought for in the ruins of the 
modern Tell Him; but Wilson (Recovery of Jerusalem 
Am. ed. pp. 270, 292 sqq.; Our Work in Palestine, 
p- 188), with whom [Thomson (Land and Book, ii. 8)], 
Socin (in Baedeker’s Palestine and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 
374), Wolff (in Riehm p. 235), [the Conders (Hdbk. to 
the Bible, p. 324), and the majority of recent scholars] 
agree, holds to the more probable opinion which identi. 
fies it with Kerdzeh, a heap of ruins lying an hour's 


χορηγέω 


journey to the N. E. of Tell Ham: Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 
13. Cf. Win. RWB. 8. v.; Keim i. p. 605 [Eng. trans. 
ii. 367] and ii. 118 [Eng. trans. iii. 143].* 

χορηγέω, -@; fut. 3 pers. sing. χορηγήσει (2 Co. ix. 10 
GLT Tr WH); 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. χορηγήσαι (ib. 
Rec.) ; (χορηγός, the leader of a chorus; fr. χορός and 
ἄγω | ἡγέομαι]) ; fr. [Simon.], Xen., Plat. down; a 
to be a chorus-leader, lead a chorus. 2. to furnish 
the chorus at one’s own expense; to procure and supply 
all things necessary lo fit out the chorus (so very often in 
the Attic writ.). 3. in later writ. ([Aristot.], Polyb., 
Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ael., al.; 1 K. iv. 7; 1 Mace. 
xiv. 10; 2 Mace. iii. 3, ete.), to supply, furnish abundant- 
ly: ri, 2 Co. ix. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 11. [Comp.: ἐπεχορη- 
yew. ]* 

χορός, -οὔ, 6, (by metath. fr. dpxos, ὀρχέομαι, [(?); prob. 
related to χύρτος (Lat. hortus), χρόνος, ete., denoting 
primarily ‘an enclosure for dancing ’; ef. Curtius § 189), 
fr. Hom. down, a band (of dancers and singers), a cir- 
cular dance, a dance, dancing: Lk. xv. 25 (for npn, 
Ex. xv. 20; Judg. xi. 34, ete.; for Sinn, Lam. v. 15; Ps, 
cl. 4).* 

χορτάζω: 1 aor. éydptaca; 1 aor. pass. ἐχορτάσθην ; 
fut. pass. χορτασθήσομαι; (χόρτος, q. v-); first in Hesiod 
(opp. 450) ; a. to feed with herbs, grass, hay, to fill 
or salisfy with food, to fatten; animals (so uniformly 
in the earlier Grk. writ. [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 12; 
W. 23]): ὄρνεα ἐκ τῶν σαρκῶν, pass. Rev. xix. 21 [here 
A.V. were filled]. b. in later (cf. Sturz, Dial. 
Maced. and Alex. p. 200 sqq.) and Biblical Greek, to 
fill or satisfy men (Sept. for pay and yravn; with 
some degree of contempt in Plat. de rep. 9 p. 586 a. 
κεκυφότες εἰς γῆν καὶ εἰς τραπέζας βόσκονται χορταζόμενοι 
καὶ ὀχεύοντες). a. prop.: τινά, Mt. xv. 33; pass., 
Mt. xiv. 20; xv.37; Mk. vi. 42; vii. 27; viii.8; Lk. ix. 
17; Jn. vi. 26; Jas. ii. 16; opp. to πεινᾶν, Phil. iv. 12; 
τινά τινος (like πίμπλημι [ef. W. § 30, 8 b.]): ἄρτων, with 
bread, Mk. viii. 4 (Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 15); τινὰ ἀπό with 
a gen. of the thing [ef. B. § 132, 12], pass. Lk. xvi. 21 
(Ps. ciii. (civ.) 13); [τινὰ ἐκ w. gen. of the thing (B. u.s.), 
pass. Lk. xv. 16 Trmrg. WIJ]. B. metaph.: τινά, 
to fulfil or satisfy the desire of any one, Mt. v. 6; Lk. 
vi. 21, (Ps. evi. (evii.) 9).* 

χόρτασμα, -ros, τό, (χορτάζω), feed, fodder, for animals 
(Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; food, (vegetable) sus- 
tenance, whether for men or flocks: plur. Acts vii. 11.* 

χόρτος, -ov, 6; 1. the place where grass grows 
and animals graze: Hom. II. 11, 774; 24, 640. 2. 
fr. Hes. down, grass, herbage, hay, provender: of green 
grass, Mt. vi. 30; xiv. 19; Lk. xii. 28; Jn. vi. 10; Jas. 
i. 10sq.; 1 Pet. i. 24 (fr. Is. xl. 6 sqq.); Rev. ix. 4; χόρτ. 
χλωρός, Mk. vi. 39; Rev. viii. 7; χόρτος of growing crops, 
Mt. xiii. 26; Mk. iv. 28; of hay, 1 Co. iii. 12. (Sept. 
for 1ST) grass, and 5})}».}" 

Xovtds, -ἃ [ΤᾺ Proleg. p.104; B. 20 (18)], 6, Chuzas 
[ A.V. (less correctly) Chusa], the steward of Herod 
Antipas: Lk. viii. 3.* 

χοῦς, -ods, acc. -οῦν, 6, (contr. for xdos, fr. yéw, to pour), 


670 


χρεία 


fr. Hdt. down; 1. prop. earth dug out, an earth-heap 
(Germ. Schult): ὃ χοῦς ὁ ἐξορυχθείς, Hdt. 2, 150. 2. 
dust (Sept. for 1537): Mk. vi. 11; Rev. xviii. 19, ([Josh. 
vii. 11; Sap. v. 15; Sir. xliv. 21, etc.]; Plut. mor. 
p- 1096 Ὁ. [i.e. non posse suaviter etc. 13, 7]).* 

Xpdopar, χρῶμαι; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐχρῶντο; 1 aor. 
ἐχρησάμην ; pf. κέχρημαι (1 Co. ix. 15 GL T Tr WH); 
fr. Hom. down ; (mid. of xpd [thought to be allied by 
metath. with χείρ (ef. Curtius §189)], ‘to grant a loan’, 
‘to lend’ [but ef. L. and S.s. v.; they regard the radical 
sense as ‘to furnish what is needful’]; hence) 1. 
prop. to receive a loan; to borrow. 2. to take for 
one’s use; lo use: τινί [W. § 31, 1i.], to make use of a 
thing, Acts xxvii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 12, 15; 1 Tim. i. 8; v. 
23; τῷ κόσμῳ, the good things of this world, 1 Co. vii. 
81 RG (see below) ; μᾶλλον χρῆσαι, sc. the opportunity 
of becoming free, ib. 21 (where others, less fitly, supply 
τῷ κληθῆναι δοῦλον [see reff. s. v. εἰ, III. 6 a.]). contrary 
to the regular usage of class. Grk. with an acc.: τὸν κό- 
σμον, 1 Co. vii. 811, Τ Tr WH; see Meyer ad loc.; B. 
§ 133, 18; W.u.s.; (also in Sap. vii. 14 ace. to some 
codd.; [L. and S. give (Pseudo-)Aristot. oecon. 2, 22 
p- 1850", 7]). with the dat. of a virtue or vice describing 
the mode of thinking or acting : τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ, [R. V. ‘shew 
fickleness’], 2 Co. i. 17; πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ, ib. iii. 12, (for 
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, see Passow 
ii. p. 2497"; [L. and S.s.v. II. a.]). with adverbs (see 
Passow ii. p. 24979; [L. and S. s.v. IV.]): ἀποτόμως, to 
deal sharply, use sharpness, 2 Co. xiii. 10. οὗ the use of 
persons: τινί, to bear one’s self towards, to deal with, 
treat, one (often so in Grk. writ.; see Passow ii. p. 2490"; 
[L. and S. s. v. III. 1 and 27), Acts xxvii. 8." 

Xpaw, see κίχρημι. 

χρεία, -as, ἡ, (χρή); fr. Aeschyl. and Soph.down; 1. 
necessity, need: τὰ πρὸς τὴν χρείαν [LT Tr WH mp. τὰς 
χρείας (cf. below)], such things as suited the exigency, 
such things as we needed for sustenance and the jour- 
ney, Acts xxviii. 10; εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας, [A. V. for 
necessary uses] i. e. to supply what is absolutely neces- 
sary for life [(ef. Babr. fab. 136, 9) ; al. understand the 
‘wants’ here as comprising those of charity or of wor- 
ship], Tit. iii. 14; πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν τῆς χρείας, for the edi- 
fication of souls, of which there is now special need, 
Eph. iv. 29 [ef. R. V. and mrg.]; ἔστι χρεία, there is 
need, foll. by an acc. with inf. Heb. vii. 11; ἔστι χρεία 
τινός, there is need of something, Rev. xxii. 5 Grsb.; Lk. 
x. 42 [(but not WH mrg.)]; ἔχω χρείαν τινός, to have 
need of (be in want of) some thing (often in the Grk. 
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, ef. Passow 8. v. 1; [L. and S. 
s.v. II.1]), Mt. vi. 8; xxi.3; Mk. xi. 8; Lk. [ix. 11; xv. 
7]; xix. 31, 34; xxii. 71; Jn. xiii. 29; 1 Co. xii. 21, 24; 
1 Th. iv. 12; Heb. x. 36; Rev. iii. 17 R G (see below) ; 
xxi. 23; xxii. 5 (not Grsb.); τοῦ with an inf. Heb. v. 
12 [W.§ 44, 4 a.; cf. ris, 2 b. p. 626* bot.]; the gen. of 
the thing is evident fr. the context, Acts ii. 45; iv. 35; 
with the gen. of a pers. whose aid, testimony, etc., is 
needed, Mt. ix. 12; xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 17; xiv. 63; Lk. 
v.31; ἔχω χρείαν, foll. by an inf. (cf. B. § 140, 3), J ete. 


χρεωφειλέτης 


have need to ete., Mt. iii.14; xiv.16; Jn. xiii. 10; 1 Th. 
i. 8; iv. 9 [with which cf. v. 1 (see W. 339 (318); B. 
§ 140, 3)]; foll. by ἵνα (see ἵνα, II. 2 c. [Β. § 139, 46; 
ef. Epictet. diss. 1, 17, 18]), Jn. ii. 25; xvi. 30; 1 Jn. ii. 
27; χρείαν ἔχω, absol., to have need: Mk. in. 25; [Eph. 
1v. 28]; 1 Jn. iii. 17; οὐδὲν χρείαν ἔχω, to have need as 
to nothing [ef. B. § 131, 10], Rev. in. 17 LT Tr WH. 
ἡ χρεία with a gen. of the subj. the condition of one de- 
prived of those things which he is scarcely able to do with- 
out, want, need: λειτουργὸς τῆς χρείας μου (see λειτουργός, 
2 fin.), Phil. ii. 25; πληροῦν τὴν χρείαν τινός (Thue. 1. 
70), Phil. iv. 19; [add, eis (Lchm. br. eis) τὴν χρείαν μοι 
ἐπέμψατε, unto (i. e. to relieve, cf. ets, B. II. 3c. y. p. 185° 
top) my need, Phil. iv. 16]; plur. one’s necessities: 
ὑπηρετεῖν ταῖς x. to provide for one’s necessities, Acts 
xx. 34; κοινωνεῖν ταῖς χ. [cf. p. 352° top}. Ro. xii.13. 2. 
duty, business, (so esp. fr. Polyb. down [cf. Jud. xii. 10; 
1 Mace. xii. 45; xiii. 37; 2 Mace. vii. 24, ete.]): Acts 
Vids 

χρεωφειλέτης (L T Tr WH χρεοῴ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
Ρ. 691; W.§5,1d.13; [WH. App. p. 152°; ΤᾺΣ Pro- 
leg. p.89; T (ἢ; seeu.s.) WH -φελέτης, cf. WH. App. 
p- 154» (see I, ¢)]), -ov, 6, (χρέος or χρέως, a loan, a debt, 
and ὀφειλέτης, 4- v-), α debtor : Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 5. (Prov. 
xxix. 13; Job xxxi. 37; Aesop. fab. 289 [ed. Coray, 11 
ed. Halm]; several times in Plut.; [also in Diod., Dion. 
Hal. ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * 

χρή; (fr. xpaw, χράει contr. χρῆ) ; impers. verb, it is 
necessary ; it behooves: foll. by an inf. Jas. iii. 10 [(B. 
§§ 131, 3; 132,12). FromHom.on. Syn. see δεῖ, fin.]” 

χρῃηΐζω; (χρή); fr. Hom. down; to have need of, to be 
in want of: with a gen. of the obi. [W. § 30, 8 4.1, Mt. 
vi. 32; Lk. xi. 8; xii. 30; Ro. xvi. 2 [here w. gen. of a 
pers.]; 2Co. iii. 1." 

χρῆμα, -ros, τό, (χράομαι), in Grk. writ. whatever is 


for use, whatever one uses, a thing, matter, affair, event, | 


business; spec. money (rarely so in the sing. in prof. 
auth., as Hdt. 3, 38; Diod. 13, 106 [ef. L.and S.s.v. I. 
sub fin.]): Actsiv. 37; plur. riches (often in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hom. Od. 2, 78; 16, 315 ete. down), Mk. x. 24 [T 
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; of ra χρήματα ἔχοντες, they 
that have riches, Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24; money, Acts 
viii. 18, 20; xxiv. 26, (for 93, silver, Job xxvii. 17; for 
0°03), riches, Josh. xxii. 8; 2 Chr. i. 11 sq.).* 
χρηματίζω ; fut. χρηματίσω (Ro. vii. 3 [οἵ B. 37 (33)]; 
in Grk. writ. everywh. the Attic «4, so too Jer. xxxii. 
16 (xxv. 30); xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2); 1 aor. ἐχρημάτισα; pf. 
pass. κεχρημάτισμαι; 1 aor. pass. ἐχρηματίσθην; (χρῆμα 
business); in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; 1. to 
transact business, esp. to manage public affairs ; to advise 
or consult with one about public affairs; to make answer 
to those who ask advice, present inquiries or requests, ete. 3 
used of judges, magistrates, rulers, kings. Hence in 
some later Grk. writ. 2. to give a response to those 
consulting an oracle (Diod. 3, 6; 15, 10; Plut. mor. 
p- 435 ce. [i. 6. de defect. oracc. 46]; several times in 
Leian.); hence used of God in Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 14; 
10, 1. 3; 11, 8, 4; univ. (dropping all ref. to a previous 


671 


χρήστος 


consultation), to gre a divine command or admonition, 
to teach from heaven, [(Jer. xxxii. 16 (xxv. 80))]: with 
8. dat. of the pers. Job xl. 3; pass. foll. by an inf. [A. V. 
revealed etc.], Lk. ii. 26 (χρηματίζειν λόγους πρός τινα, 
Jer. xxxvii. (xxx.) 2); pass. to be divinely commanded, 
admonished, instructed, [R.V. warned of God], Mt. ii. 
12, 22; Acts x. 22; Heb. viii. 5; xi. 7, (this pass. use 
is hardly found elsewh. exc. in Joseph. antt. 3, 8,8; [11, 
5,4]; cf. Β. 8. 184,4; [W.§ 39, 1a.]); tobe the mouth- 
piece of divine revelations, to promulge the commands of 
God, (τινί, Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2; xxxvi. (xxix.) 23):, 
of Moses, Heb. xii. 25 [R. V. warned]. 3. to assume 
or take to one’s self a name from one’s public business 
(Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; univ. to receive a name or 
title, be called: Acts xi. 26; Ro. vii. 3, (Joseph. antt. [8, 
6, 2]; 13, 11, 3; b.j. 2, 18, 7; [e. Apion. 2, 3,1; Philo, 
quod deus immut. § 25 fin.; leg. ad Gaium § 43]; ’Avrio- 
xov τὸν Ἐπιφανῆ χρηματίζοντα, Diod. in Miiller’s fragm. 
vol. ii. p. xvii. no. xxi. 45 Ἰάκωβον τὸν χρηματίσαντα 
ἀδελφὸν τοῦ κυρίου, Acta Philippi init. p. 75 ed. Tdf.; 
Ἰακώβου ... ὃν καὶ ἀδελφὸν τοῦ Χριστοῦ χρηματίσαι ot 
θεῖοι λόγοι περιέχουσιν, Eus. h. 6. 7, 19; [ef. Soph. Lex. 
s.v. 2]).* 

χρηματισμός, -ov, 6, (χρηματίζω, q.v-), a divine response, 
an oracle: Ro. xi. 4. (2 Mace. ii. 4; ef. Diod. 1,1; 14, 
7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17,5; [ef. Artem. oneir. 1, 2 p. 8; 
Suicer, Thesaur. 8. v. (vol. ii. col. 1532)]; in various 
other senses in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down.)* 

χρήσιμος, -7, -ov, (χράομαι), first in Theogn. 406, fit for 
use, useful: 2 Tim. ii. 14." 

χρῆσις, -ews, 7, (χράομαι), use: of the sexual use of a 
woman, Ro. i. 26 sq. (παιδική, Leian. amor. 25; ὀρέξεις 
mapa tas χρήσεις, Plut. placit. philos. 5, 5; [ef. Isocr. 
p- 386 c.; Plat. legg. 8 p. 841 a.; Aristot., al.]).* 

χρηστεύομαι ; (χρηστός, q-V-); to show one’s self mild, 
to be kind, use kindness: 1 Co. xiii. 4. (Eccles. writ., as 
Euseb ἢ. 6. 5, 1,463 τινί, towards one, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 
13, 2; 14, 3.)* 

χρηστολογία, -as, 7, (fr. χρηστολόγος, and this fr. 
χρηστός, q- V., and λέγω; ef. Jul. Capitol. in the life of 
Pertinax e. 13 “Omnes, qui libere fabulas conferebant, 
male Pertinaci loquebantur, χρηστολόγον eum appel- 
lantes, qui bene loqueretur et male faceret”), fair speak- 
ing, the smooth and plausible address which simulates 
goodness: Ro. xvi. 18. (Eustath. p. 1437, 27 [on II. 23, 
598]; eccles. writ.) * 

χρηστός, -7, -dv, (χράομαι), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for 
370; 1. prop. fit for use, useful; virtuous, good: 
ἤθη χρηστά, 1 Co. xv. 33 ([Treg. χρῆστα (but ef. B. 11)], 
see ἦθος, 3). 2. manageable, i. 6. mild, pleasant, (opp. 
to harsh, hard, sharp, bitter): of things, χρηστότερος οἶνος, 
pleasanter, Lk. v. 39 [here TTr txt. χρηστός ; so WII 
in br.] (of wine also in Plut. mor. p. 240 d. [i.e. Lacaen. 
apophtheg. (Gorg. 2); p. 1073 a. (i. e. de com. notit. 
28)]; of food and drink, Plat. de rep. 4 p. 438 a.; σῦκα, 
Sept. Jer. xxiv. 8, 5); 6 ζυγός (opp. to burdensome), 
Mt. xi. 30 [A. V. easy]; of persons, kind, benevolent: of 
God, 1 Pet. ii. 8 ΓΑ. V. gracious] fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 


χρηστότης 
9; τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ i. η. ἡ χρηστότης [W. § 34, 2], Ro. 


ii. 4; of men, εἴς τινα towards one, Eph. iv. 32; ἐπί τινα, 
Lk. vi. 35 [here of God; in both pass. A. V. kind].* 

χρηστότης, -ητος, 9, (χρηστος); 1. moral good- 
ness, integrily: Ro. iii. 12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3) [A. V. 
*doeth good’). 2. benignity, kindness: Ro.ii.4; 2 
Co. vi. 6; Gal. v. 22; Col. iii. 12; Tit. iii. 4; ἡ xp. τινὸς 
éxi twa, Ro. xi. 22 (opp. to ἀποτομία [q. v-]); Eph. ii. 7. 
(Sept.; Eur., Isae., Diod., Joseph., Ael., Hdian.; often 
in Plut.) [See Trench, Syn. § lxiii.]* 

χρίσμα (so RG Led. min. WH) and χρῖσμα (L ed. 
maj. Τ Tr; on the accent see W. § 6,1e.; Lipsius, 
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35; [ΤΠ Proleg. p. 102]), -ros, 
τό, (χρίω, q-Vv-), anything smeared on, unguent, ointment, 
usually prepared by the Hebrews from oil and aromatic 
herbs. Anointing was the inaugural ceremony for 
priests (Ex. xxviii. 37; xl. 13 (15); Lev. vi. 22; Num. 
xxxv. 25), kings (1 5. ix. 16; x.1; xv. 1; xvi. 3, 13), 
and sometimes also prophets (1 K. xix. 16 cf. Is. lxi. 1), 
and by it they were regarded as endued with the Holy 
Spirit and divine gifts (1S. xvi. 13; Is. lsi.1; Jo 
seph. antt. 6, 8, 2 πρὸς τὸν Aavidny—when anointed 
by Samuel -- μεταβαίνει τὸ θεῖον καταλιπὸν Σάουλον: «πὶ 
ὁ μὲν προφητεύειν ἤρξατο, τοῦ θείου πνεύματος εἰς αὐτὸν 
μετοικισαμένου) ; [see BB. DD. 5. vv. Ointment, Anoint- 
ing]. Hence in 1 Jn. ii. 20 (where ἀπὸ τοῦ ἁγίου is so 
used as to imply that this χρίσμα renders them ἁγίους 
[ef. Westcott ad loc.]) and 27, τὸ χρίσμα is used of the 
gift of the Holy Spirit, as the efficient aid in getting a 
knowledge of the truth; see χρίω. (Xen., Theophr., 
Diod., Philo, al.; for Amv, Ex. xxix. 7; xxx. 25; 
KEK 14 χ] 7. (ΘΝ 

Κριστιανός [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. p. 16 note], -ov, 
6, (Χριστός), a Christian, a follower of Christ: Acts xi. 
26; xxvi. 28; 1 Pet. iv. 16. ‘The name was first given 
to the worshippers of Jesus by the Gentiles, but from the 
second century (Justin Mart. [e. g. apol. 1, 4 p. 55 a.; 
dial. ο. Tryph. ὃ 35; ef. ‘ Teaching’ ete. 12, 4]) onward 
accepted by them as a title of honor. Cf. Lipsius, 
Ueber Ursprung u. iltesten Gebrauch des Christen- 
namens. 4to pp. 20, Jen. 1873. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 2; 
Farrar in Alex.’s Kitto 5. v.; on the ‘Titles of Believers 
in the N. T.’ see Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 125 sq. ; 
οἵ. Dict. of Chris. Antiqq. s. v. ‘ Faithful ’.] * 


Χριστός, τή, -dv, (xpiw), Sept. for mw, anointed: 6 | 


ἱερεὺς ὁ χριστός, Lev. iv. 5; vi. 22; of χριστοὶ ἱερεῖς, 2 
Mace. i. 10; the patriarchs are called, substantively, of 
χριστοὶ θεοῦ, Ps. civ. (cv.) 15; the sing. 6 χριστὸς τοῦ 
κυρίου (177 Mw) in the O. T. often of the king of 
Israel (see χρίσμα), as 1 S. ii. 10, 35; [xxiv. 11; xxvi. 
9, 11, 23]; 2.5. 1. 14; Ps. ii. 2; xvii. (xviii.) 51; Hab. 
iii. 13; [2 Chr. xxii. 7]; also of a foreign king, Cyrus, 
as sent of God, Is. xlv. 1; of the coming king whom the 
Jews expected to be the saviour of their nation and the 
author of their highest felicity: the name ὁ χριστός 
(mw, Chald. xmw>) is not found in the O. T. but is 
first used of him in the Book of Enoch 48, 10 [ef. 
Schodde’s note]; 52, 4 (for the arguments by which 


672 


χριστός 


some have attempted to prove that the section contain- 
ing these passages is of Christian origin are not 
convincing [cf. υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. 2 and το 8.1), after Ps. 
ii. 2 referred to the Messiah; (cf. Psalter of Sol. 17, 36; 
18, 6. 8]. Cf. Keim ii. 549 [Eng. trans. iv. 263 sq.; 
Westcott ‘ Additional Note’on1Jn.v.1. On the gen- 
eral subject see Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29.) [ἢ 
the N. T. it is used 1. of the Messiah, viewed in 
his generic aspects [the word, that is to say, being used 
as an appellative rather than a proper name], 6 χριστός : 
Mt. ii. 4; xvi.16; xxiii. 10; xxiv. 5, 23; xxvi. 63; Mk. 
vill. 29; xii. 355 xill. 21; xiv. 61; Lk. iii. 15; iv. 41; xx. 
41; xxii. 67 (66); xxiii. 39; xxiv. 26, 46; Jn. i. 20, 25, 
[41 (42) Rec.]; iii. 28; iv. 29; vi. 69 Rec.; vii. 26, 31, 


41; xi. 27; xii. 34; xx. 31; Acts ii. 30 Rec., 31; iii. 18; 
vili. 5; ix. 22; xvii. 3°; xviii. 5, 28; xxvi. 23; 1 Jn. iL 
ἜΡΟΝ Δ ὁ χριστὸς κυρίου or τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. ii. 26; ix. 


20; Actsiv. 26; without the article, Lk. ii. 11; xxiii. 2; 
Jn. 1. 41 (42) LT Tr WH; ix. 22; Acts ii. 365; 6 ype 
στός. ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, Mk. xv. 32; 6 χριστός so 
used as to refer to Jesus, Rev. xx. 4,6; with τοῦ θεοῦ 
added, Rev. xi. 15; xii. 10. 2. It is added, as an 
appellative (‘ Messiah’, ‘anointed’), to the proper name 
Ἰησοῦς; a. Ἰησοῦς ὁ χριστός, Jesus the Christ (‘Mes 
siah’): Acts v.42 RG; ix. 34[RG]; 1 Co. iii. 11 Ree.; 
1Jn.y. 6 [RGL)]; Ἰησοῦς 6 λεγόμενος χριστός, who they 
say is the Messiah [(cf. b. below) ], Mt. xxvii. 22; with- 
out the art. Ἰησοῦς yptords, Jesus as Christ or Messiah, 
Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 2; 2 Jn. 7, [but in all three exx. it 
seems better to take yp. as a prop. name (see b. below) ]; 
ὁ χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς, the Christ (Messiah) who is Jesus, [Mt. 
i. 18 WH org. (see Ὁ. below)]; Acts v. 42 LT Tr WH 
[R. V. Jesus as the Christ]; xix. 4 Ree. Ὁ. ὁ Xpe 
στός is a proper name (cf. W.§ 18,9 N.1; [as respects 
the use of a large or a small initial letter the critical edd. 
vary: Tdf. seems to use the capital initial in all cases; 
Treg. is inconsistent (using a small letter, for in- 
stance, in all the exx. under 1 above, exc. Lk. xxii. 67 
and Jn. iv. 29; in Mt.i.1 a capital, in Mk. ila 
small letter, ete.); WH have adopted the principle of 
using a capital when the art. is absent and avoiding it 
when the art. is present (1 Pet. being intentionally ex- 
cepted; the small letter being retained also in such exx. 
as Lk. ii. 11; xxiii. 2; Acts ii. 36, etc.) ; see WH. Intr. 
§$415]): Mt.i.17; xi. 2; Ro. i. 16 Ree. ; vii. 4; ix. 5; 
xiv. 18 [here L om. Tr br. the art.]; xv. 19; 1Co. i. 6, 
ete. without the article, Mk. ix. 41; Ro. vi. 4; viii. 9, 
17; 1Co.i. 12; Gal. ii. 16 sq. 19 (20), 21; iii. 27; Phil. 
i. 10, 13, 19-21, 23; ii. 16; Col. ii. 5, 8; Heb. iii. 6, and 
often. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός, Mt. i. 1,18 [here Tr om. Ἰ. WH 
txt. br. 10: al ὁ Ἶ. Xp. which is unique; see WH. App. 
ad loc.]; Mk. 1. 1; Jn. 1. 17; Acts ii. 38; iii. 6; iv.10; 
viii. 12 ; [ix.34 LT Tr WH]; x. 36; xi. 17; xv. 26; xvi. 
18, 31 [RG]; xx. 21 [here L WH txt. om. Tr br. Xp.]; 
xxviii. 31 [Tdf. om. Xp.]; Ro. i. 1 [RG WH txt. (see be- 
low)], 6, 8; ii. 16 [RG Trtxt. WH mrg. (see below) ]; 
1 Co. i. 7-9; iii. 11 [G T Tr WH (Ree. ’I. ὁ Xp.)]; xv. 
57, and very often in the Epp. of Paul and Peter; Heb. 


χρίω 
xiii. 8,21; 1Jn.i.3,7[RG]; ii-1; [v.6GTTrWH]; 
2 Jn. 7 [(see a. above) ]; Jude 4, 17,21; Rev.i. 1sq.5; 
xxii. 21 [RG (WH br. al. om. Xp.) J. Χριστὸς ᾿Ιησοῦς, 
Ro. [i. 1T Tr WH mrg. (see above) ; ii. 16 T Tr mrg. 
WH txt. (see above) ]; vi. 3[WH br. ’I.]; 1 Co.i. 2, 30; 
[iii. 11 Lehm. (see above) ]; Gal. iii. 14 [here Tr txt. 
WH txt. I. X.]; iv. 14; v. 6 [WH br. ’I.]; vi. 15; Phil. 11. 
5; iii. 3,14; Col . 6; 1 Tim.i. 2; ii. 5. Ἰησοῦς 6 λεγό- 
μενος Χριστός, surnamed ‘ Christ’ [(ef. a. above) ], Mt. i. 
16. on the phrases ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, see ev, 
I. 6b. p. 211° [ef. W. § 20, 2a.]. Χριστός and ᾿Ιησοῦς Xp. 
év τισιν, preached among, 2 Co. i. 19; Col. i. 27 [al. (so 
R.V.) would take ἐν here internally (asin the foll. exx.), 
within; cf. ἐν, 1. 2]; Χριστὸς ἔν τισιν is used of the per- 
son of Christ, who by his holy power and Spirit lives in 
the souls of his followers, and so moulds their characters 
that they bear his likeness, Ro. viii. 10 (cf. 9); 2 Co. 
xiii. 5; Gal. ii. 20; Eph. iii. 17; a mind conformed to 
the mind of Christ, Gal. iv. 19. 

χρίω: 1 aor. ἔχρισα; (akin to χείρ [(?), see Curtius 
§ 201], χραίνω ; prop. ‘to touch with the hand’, ‘to be- 
smear’); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Mw; to anoint (on 
the persons who received anointing among the Hebrews, 
see χρίσμα); in the N. T. only trop. of God a. con- 
secrating Jesus to the Messianic office, and furnishing 
him with powers necessary for its administration (see 
xpiopa): Lk. iv. 18 (after Is. lxi. 1); contrary to com- 
mon usage with an ace. of the thing, ἔλαιον (like verbs 
of clothing, putting on, ete. [ef. W. $32, 4 ἃ. ; B.§ 131, 
6]), Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8; in Theoph. ad Autol. 
1, 12 we find χρίεσθαι ἔλαιον θεοῦ and yp. φωτὶ καὶ πνεύ- 
ματι almost in the same sentence); πνεύματι ἁγίῳ καὶ 
δυνάμει, Acts x. 38; also χρίειν used absol., Acts iv. 
27. b. enduing Christians with the gifts of the 
Holy Spirit [ef. Westcott on 1 Jn. ii. 20]: 2 Co. 1. 21. 
[Comp.: év-, ἐπι- ypiw. SYN. see ἀλείφω, fin.]* 

xpovitw; fut. ypovicw (Heb. x. 37 T Tr txt. WH), Attic 
xpoue (ibid. RGL Trmrg.); (χρόνος) ; fr. Aeschyl. and 
Hdt. down; Sept. for 18; 10 linger, delay, tarry: Mt. 
xxv. 5; Heb. x. 37; foll. by ἐν with a dat. of the place, 
Lk. i. 21; foll. by an inf., Mt. xxiv. 48 [LT Tr WH om. 
inf.]: Lk. xii. 45.* 

χρόνος, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ny, ny’, etc. 
time : Heb. xi. 32; Rev. x. 6; 6 yp. τοῦ φαινομένου ἀστέρος. 
the time since the star began to shine [ef. φαίνω, 2 a.], 
Mt. ii. 7; [ὁ yp. τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν (Gen. xxv. 24), Lk. 1.51 
(B. 267 (230); ef. W. ξ 44, 4 a.)]; τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, Acts 
vii. 17; τῆς παροικίας, 1 Pet. i. 17; χρόνοι ἀποκαταστάσεως, 
Acts iii. 21; of yp. τῆς ἀγνοίας, Acts xvii. 30; χρόνου 
διαγενομένου, Acts xxvii. 9; πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν, ὡς τοῦτο 
γέγονεν, MK. ix. 21; ὁ παρεληλυθὼς xp. 1 Pet. iv. 3 (where 
Ree. adds τοῦ βίου) ; τεσσαρακονταετής, Acts vii. 23; xiii. 
18; στιγμὴ χρόνου, Lk. iv. 5; πλήρωμα τοῦ χρόνου, Gal. 
iv. 4; ποιεῖν ([q. ν. II. d.] to spend) χρόνον, Acts xv. 33; 
XVill. 23; βιῶσαι τὸν ἐπίλοιπον χρόνον. 1 Pet. iv. 2; διδόναι 
χρόνον τινί (i.e. a space of time, respite), ἵνα ete. Rev. ii. 
21 [(Joseph. b. 1. 4,3, 10)]; plur. joined with xatpoi, 
Acts i. 7: 1 Th. v. 1, (see καιρός, 2 6. p. 8195); ἐπ᾽ ἐσχάτων 


673 


χρυσίον 


(LT Tr WH ἐσχάτου) τῶν xp. (see ἔσχατος, 1 fin.), 1 Pet. 
i. 20; [add, ἐπ᾿ ἐσχάτου τοῦ (Tr WH om. τοῦ) χρόνου, 
Jude 18 LT Tr WH]. with prepositions: ἄχρι, Acts 
ll. 21; διὰ τὸν xp., on account of the length of time, 
Heb. v. 12 (Polyb. 2, 21,2; Alciphr. 1, 26,9); ἐκ χρόνων 
ἱκανῶν, for a long time, Lk. viii. 27 [RG L Tr mrg. (see 
below) ]; ἐν χρόνῳ, Acts i. 6, 21; ἐν ἐσχάτῳ χρόνῳ, Jude 
18 Rece.; ἐπὶ χρόνον, [A. V. for a while], Lk. xviii. 4; ἐπὶ 
πλείονα xp. [A. V. a longer time], Acts xviii. 20; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον 
xp- fur so long time as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 
39; Gal. iv. 1; κατὰ τὸν χρόνον, according to (the rela- 
tions of) the time, Mt. ii. 16; μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον, Mt. xxv. 
19; pera τοσοῦτον xp. Heb. iv. 7; πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων, 
[R. V. before times eternal], 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2. the 
dative is used to express the time during which some- 
thing oceurs (dat. of duration of time, ef. W. $31, 9; 
[B. § 133, 26]): [χρόνῳ ἱκανῷ, for a long time, LK. viii. 
27T Trtxt. WH]; ἱκανῷ χρόνῳ, Acts viii. 11 ; [τοσούτῳ 
χρόνῳ, Jn. xiv. 9 LT Trmrg. WH mrg.]; πολλοῖς χρόνοις 
[R. V. mrg. of a long time (A. V. oftentimes) ; cf. πολύς, 
6.1, Lk. viii. 29; αἰωνίοις, [R. V. through times eternal], 
Ro. xvi. 25. the accus. is used in answer to the 
question how long: χρόνον, for a while, Acts xix. 22; 
Rey. vi. 11 (where in R LT Tr WH μικρόν is added) ; 
also yp. τινά, [A.V. a while], 1 Co. xvi. 7; ὅσον xp. [A.V. 
while}, Mk. ii. 19; χρόνους ἱκανούς, for a long time, Lk. 
Xx. 93 μικρὸν χρόνον, Jn. vil. 33; xii. 35; Rev. xx. 3; 
πολὺν xp. Jn. ν. 6; τοσοῦτον xp. Jn. xiv. 9 [RG Tr txt. 
WH txt.]; ἱκανόν, [A. V. long time], Acts xiv. 3; οὐκ 
ὀλίγον, [R. V. no little time], Acts xiv. 28; τὸν πάντα xp. 
Acts xx. 18. [On the ellipsis of χρόνος in such phrases 
as ἀφ᾽ ov, ev τῷ ἑξῆς (LK. vii. 11 Lmrg. Tr txt. WH txt.), 
ἐν τῷ καθεξῆς (Lk. viii. 1), ἐξ ἱκανοῦ, ete., see ἀπό, 1. 4 Ὁ. 
Ρ- 58° top, ἑξῆς, καθεξῆς, ἐκ IV. 1, ete. SYN. see καιρός, 
fin.; cf. αἰών, fin.]* 

Χρονοτριβέω, -@: 1 aor. inf. χρονοτριβῆσαι; (χρόνος 
and τρίβω) ; to wear away time, spend time: Acts xx. 16. 
(Aristot. rhet. 3, 3, 3 [p. 1406", 37]; Plut., Heliod., 
Eustath., Byz. writ.) * 

χρύσεος, -έα, -eov, contr. -ovs, -7, -ovv, [but acc. sing. 
fem. -σᾶν, Rev. 1. 131, Τ Tr WH; gen. plur. -σέων, Rev. 
ii. 1 L Tr; (on its inflection cf. B. 26 (23); Phryn. ed. 
Lob. p. 207; L. and S. s. v. init.)], (χρυσός), fr. Hom. 
down, golden; made of gold; also overlaid or covered 
with gold: 2 Tim. ii. 20; Heb. ix. 4; Rev. i. 12 sq. 20; 
ii. 1; iv.4; v.8; viii. 3; ix. 7 Grsb., 18, 20; xiv. 143; xv. 
6 sq-; xvii. 4; xxi. 15." 

χρυσίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ypucos, cf. φορτίον), fr. Hdt. 
down, Sept. for 37%, gold, both that which lies imbedded 
in the earth and is dug out of it (Plat. Euthyd. p. 288 e. ; 
Sept. Gen. ii. 11; hence μεταλλευθέν, Leian. de sacr. 11) : 
xp: πεπυρωμένον ex πυρός, [R. V. refined by fire], Rev. 
iii. 18; and that which has been smelted and wrought, 
Heb. ix. 4; [1 Co. iii.12 T Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev. 
xxi. 18,21; i. q. gold coin, ‘gold’: Acts iii. 6; xx. 33; 
1 Pet. i. 18; golden ornaments, precious things made of 
gold, 1 Tim. ii. 9 L WH txt.; 1 Pet. iii. 3; Rev. xvii. 4 
GLWHtxt.; xviii. 16 GL Trtxt. WH txt. (cf. χρυσός." 


χρυσοδακτύλιος 


χρυσο-δακτύλιος, -ον, (χρυσός and δακτύλιος), gold- 
ringed, adorned with gold rings: Jas. ii. 2. (Besides 
only in Hesych. 5. v. χρυσοκόλλητος ; [W. 26].) (CE. 
B. D.s. v. Ring.]* 

χρυσό-λιθος, -ov, 6, (χρυσός and λίθος), chrysolith, chryso- 
lite, a precious stone of a golden color ; our topaz [cf. BB. 
DD. s. v. Chrysolite ; esp. Riehm, HWB. s.v. Edelsteine 
5 and 19]: Rev. xxi.20. (Diod. 2,52; Joseph. antt. 3, 
7,5; Sept. for wewnn, Ex. xxviii. 20; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix. 
13); [Ezek. i. 16 Aq.].)* 

χρυσό-πρασος [-ov Lchm.], -ov, 6, (fr. χρυσός, and πράσον 
a leek), chrysoprase, a precious stone in color like a leek, 
of a translucent golden-green [cf. BB. DD.s.v.; Riehm, 
HWB. s. v. Edelsteine 6]: Rev. xxi. 20.* 

Xpvods, -οῦὔ, ὁ, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 391, gold (6 ἐπὶ 
γῆς καὶ ὁ ὑπὸ γῆς, Plat. legg. 5 p. 728 a.): univ., Mt. ii. 
11; 1Co. iii. 12[RGL (al. χρυσίον, q. v.)]; Rev. ix. 7; 
i. q. precious things made of gold, golden ornaments, Mt. 
xxiii. 16 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 9 [here L WH txt. χρυσίον] ; Jas. 
ν. 8; Rey. xvii. 4 (L WH txt. χρυσίον) ; xviii. 12, 16 (L 
Tr txt. WH txt. χρυσίον); an image made of gold, Acts 
xvii. 29; stamped gold, gold coin, Mt. x. 9." 

χρυσοῦς, see χρύσεος. 

χρυσόω, -ῶ : pf. pass. ptep. κεχρυσωμένος ; to adorn with 
gold, to gild: κεχρυσωμένη χρυσῷ, [A.V. decked with gold], 

tev. xvii. 4; and ἐν [Ὁ 1, Trom. WH br. ἐν] χρυσῷ, 
xviii. 16, of a woman ornamented with gold so profusely 
that she seems to be gilded; Sept. for 373 73¥7 in Ex. 
xxvi. 32. (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) * 
χρώς, gen. χρωτός, 6, (cf. χροιά, the skin [οἵ. Curtius 
§ 201]), fr. Hom. down, (who [generally] uses the gen. 
xpoos ete. [ef. Hbeling, Lex. Hom., or L. and S. s. v.]), the 
surface of the body, the skin: Acts xix. 12; Sept. for 
qwa, twice for Wy, Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq. Alex." 

χωλός, -7, -όν, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for md3, lame : 
Acts iii. 2, 11 Rec.; xiv. 8; plur., Mt. xi. 5; xv. 30sq.; 
xxi. 14; Lk. vii. 225 xiv. 18, 21; Jn.v.3; Acts vill. 7; 
τὸ χωλόν, Heb. xii. 13 (on which see ἐκτρέπω, 1). de- 
prived of a foot, maimed, [A. V. halt]: Mt. xviii. 8; Mk. 
ix. 45.* 

χώρα, -as, 7, (XAQ [ef. Curtius $179], to lie open, be 
ready to receive), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for p38, 77°72 
‘a province’; 1. prop. the space lying between two 
2. a region or country; i.e. a tract 
of land: ἡ x. ἐγγὺς τῆς ἐρήμου, Jn. xi. 54; [in an ellipti- 
cal phrase, ἡ ἀστραπὴ (ἡ) ἀστράπτουσα ἐκ τῆς ὑπὸ τὸν 
οὐρανὸν εἰς τὴν ὑπ᾽ οὐρανὸν λάμπει, ΔΑ. ρατὲ. .. part, Lk. 
xvii. 24 (cf. W.§ 64, 5) ; on the ellipsis of χώρα in other 
phrases (ἐξ ἐναντίας, ἐν δεξιᾷ, ete.), see W. 1. c.; B. 82 
(72)]; land as opp. to the sea, Acts xxvii. 27; land as 
inhabited, @ province or country, Mk. v. 10; [vi. 55 L 
mrg. T Tr WH]; Lk. xv. 13-15; xix. 12; Acts xiii. 49; 
with a gen. of the name of the region added: Τραχωνί- 
τιδος, Lk. iii. 1; τῆς Ιουδαίας, Acts xxvi. 20; [(or an 
equiv. adj.) ] Γαλατική, Acts xvi. 6; xviii. 235 τῶν Ἰου- 
δαίων, Acts x. 39; plur. τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας, [A. V. 
regions}, Acts vill. 1; ἐν χώρᾳ x. σκιᾷ θανάτου, in a re- 
gion of densest darkness (see σκιά, a), Mt. iv. 16; τινός, 


places or limits. 


674 


χώριον 


the country of one, Mt. ii. 12; x. for its inhabitants, 
Mk. i. 5; Acts xii. 20; the (rural) region environing a 
city or village, the country, Lk. ii. 8; Tepyeonvav, Tepa- 
σηνῶν, Ταδαρηνῶν, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. v. 1; Lk. viii. 26; 
the region with towns and villages which surrounds the 
metropolis, Jn. xi. 55. 3. land which is ploughed 
or cultivated, ground. Lk. xii. 16; plur., Lk. xxi. 21 
[R.V. country]; Jn.iv.35[A.V. fields]; Jas. v. 4 [A. V. 
fields]. [S¥N. see τόπος, fin.]* 

[Xopatlv, see Xopativ. ] 

χωρέω, -ὦ ; fut. inf. χωρήσειν (In. xxi. 25 Tr WH); 
1 aor. ἐχώρησα ; (χῶρος, ἃ place, space, and this fr. XAQ, 
cf. χώρα); 1. prop. to leave a space (which may be 
occupied or filled by another), to make room, give place, 
yield, (Hom. Il. 12,406; 16, 592; al.); to retire, pass: 
of a thing, εἴς τι, Mt. xv. 17. metaph. to betake one’s 
self, turn one’s self: eis μετάνοιαν, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [A. V. 
come ; cf. μετάνοια, p. 406"). 2. to go forward, ad- 
vance, proceed, (prop. νύξ, Aeschyl. Pers. 384); to make 
progress, gain ground, succeed, (Plat. Eryx. p. 398 b.; 
legg. 3 p. 684e.; [χωρεῖ τὸ κακόν, Arstph. nub. 907, vesp. 
1483; al.]; Polyb. 10, 35, 4; 28,15,12; al.): ὁ λόγος 6 
ἐμὸς ov χωρεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν, gaineth no ground among you or 
within you [R. V. hath not free course (with mrg. hath 
no place) in you], Jn. viii. 37 [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars 
iii. ad loc. ]. 3. to have space or room for receiving 
or holding something (Germ. fassen) ; prop.: τί, a thing 
to fill the vacant space, Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; of a 
space large enough to hold a certain number of people, 
Mk. ii. 2 (Gen. xiii. 6 [ef. Plut. praec. ger. reipub. 8, 5 
p- 804 b.]) ; of measures, which hold a certain quantity, 
Jn. ii.6; 1 K. vii. 24 (38); 2 Chr. iv. 5, and in Grk. writ. 
fr. Hdt. down. metaph. to receive with the mind or 
understanding, to understand, (τὸ Κάτωνος φρόνημα, Plut. 
Cat. min. 64; ὅσον αὐτῷ ἡ ψυχὴ χωρεῖ, Ael. v. h. 3, 9); to 
be ready to receive, keep in mind, and practise: τὸν λόγον 
τοῦτον, this saying, Mt. xix. 11 sq. [(ef. Plut. Lycurg. 
13, 5)]; τινά, to receive one into one’s heart, make room 
for one in one’s heart, 2 Co. vii. 2. [Comp.: ἀνα-, azo-, 
ἐκ-, ὑπο- χωρέω. SYN. ef. ἔρχομαι." 

χωρίζω ; fut. χωρίσω [B. 37 (33)]; 1 aor. inf. χωρίσαι; 
pres. mid. χωρίζομαι ; pf. pass. ptep. κεχωρισμένος ; 1 aor. 
pass. ἐχωρίσθην; (χωρίς, q-v-); fr. Hdt. down; to separate, 
divide, part, pul asunder: τί, opp. to συζεύγνυμι, Mt. xix. , 
6; Mk. x. 93; τινὰ ἀπό τινος, Ro. viii. 35, 39, (Sap. i. 3);' 
pf. pass. ptep. Heb. vii. 26. Mid. and 1 aor. pass. 
with a reflex. signif. to separate one’s self from, to de- 
part; a. to leave a husband or wife: of divorce, 1 
Co. vii. 11, 15; ἀπὸ ἀνδρός. ib. 10 (a woman κεχωρισμένη 
ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνδρός, Polyb. 32, 12, 6 [al.]). b. to depart, 
go away: [absol. Philem. 15 (euphemism for ἔφυγε), 
R. V. was parted from thee]; foll. by ἀπό with a gen. of 
the place, Acts i. 4; ἐκ with a gen. of the place, Acts 
xviii. 1 sq. ([W. § 36,6a.]; εἰς with an ace. of the place, 
2 Mace. v. 21; xii. 12; Polyb., Diod., al.). [Come.: 
ἀπο-, δια- χωρίζω. * 

χωρίον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of χῶρος or χώρα), fr. Hat. 
down; 1. a space, a place; a region, district. 2 


χωρίς 


a piece of ground, a fietd, land, (Thuc., Xen., Plat., 81.): 
Mt. xxvi. 36; Mk. xiv. 32; Jn. iv. 5 [A. V. parcel of 
ground]; Acts i. 18 sq.; iv. 34 [plur. lands]; v. 3, 8; a 
farm, estate: plur. Acts xxviii. 7. [SyN. see τόπος, fin.]* 
χωρίς, (XAQ, see χώρα [cf. Curtius § 192]), adv., fr. 
Hom. down ; 1. separately, apart: Jn. xx. 7. 2. 
as a prep. with the zen. [W. § 54, 6]; a. without any 
pers. or thing (making no use of, having no association 
with, apart from, aloof from, ete.) : 1 Co. [iv. 8]; xi. 11; 
Phil. ii. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 8; v. 21; Heb. [ii. 9 Treg. mrg.]; 
sxi. 40; παραβολῆς, without making use of a parable, Mt. 
‘xiii. 34; Mk. iv. 34; ὁρκωμοσίας, Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21; 
+x: αἵματος, Heb. ix. 7, 18; αἱματεκχυσίας, Heb. ix. 22; 
without i. e. being absent or wanting: Ro. vii. 8sq. [R.V. 
apart from]; Heb. xi. 6; xii. 8,14; Jas. ii. 18 (Rec. ἐκ)» 
20, 26, [in these three exx. R. V. apart from]; without 
connection and fellowship with one, Jn. xv. 5 [R.V. 


675 


ψεύδομαι 


apart from]; destitute of the fellowship and blessings 
of one: χωρὶς Χριστοῦ [cf. W. 8 54,2 ἃ.; R. V. separate 
Srom Christ], Eph. ii. 12; without the intervention (par- 
ticipation or co-operation) of one, Jn. i. 3; Ro. iii. 21, 
[28; iv. 6; x. 14]; x. θεμελίου, without laying a foun- 
dation, Lk. vi. 49; x. τῆς σῆς γνώμης, without consulting 
you, [cf. γνώμη, fin. (Polyb. 3, 21, 1. 2. 7)], Philem. 14; 
‘without leaving room for’: x. ἀντιλογίας, Heb. vii. 7; 
οἰκτιρμῶν, X. 28. x. τοῦ σώματος, freed from the body, 
2 Co. xii. 3 L T Tr WH (Ree. ἐκτός, q.v. b. a-); χωρὶς 
ἁμαρτίας, without association with sin, i. 6. without yield- 
ing to sin, without becoming stained with it, Heb. iv. 
15; not to expiate sin, Heb. ix. 28. b. besides: 
Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38; 2 Co. xi. 28. (Syn. ef. ἄνευ. * 
χῶρος, -ov, 6, the north-west wind (Lat. Corus or 
Caurus): for the quarter of the heavens from which 
this wind blows, Acts xxvii. 12 (on which see Ady, 2).* 


Ψ 


ψάλλω; fut. ψαλῶ ; (fr. ψάω, to rub, wipe; to handle, 
touch, [but ef. Curtius p. 730]) ; a. to pluck off 
pull out: ἔθειραν, the hair, Aeschyl. Pers. 1062. b. 
to cause to vibrate by touching, to twang: τόξων vevpas 
χειρί, Eur. Bacch. 784; spec. χόρδην, to touch or strike 
the chord, to twang the strings of a musical instrument so 
that they gently vibrate (Aristot. probl. 19, 23 [p. 919°, 
27); and absol. fo play on a stringed instrument, to play 
the harp, ete.: Aristot., Plut., Arat., (in Plat. Lys. p. 209 Ὁ. 
with καὶ κρούειν τῷ πλήκτρῳ added [but not as explan- 
atory of it; the Schol. ad loc. says ψῆλαι, τὸ ἄνευ 
πλήκτρου τῷ δακτύλῳ τὰς χορδὰς emapacGar]; it is distin- 
guished from κιθαρίζειν in Hdt. 1, 155) ; Sept. for 12) and 
much oftener for 419; to sing to the music of the harp; 
in the N. T. to sing a hymn, to celebrate the praises of God 
in song, Jas. v.13 [R.V. sing praise]; τῷ κυρίῳ, τῷ ὀνόματι 
αὐτοῦ, (often so in Sept.), in honor of God, Eph. v. 19 
[here A. V. making melody]; Ro. xv. 9; ψαλῶ τῷ πνεύ- 
ματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ voi, ‘I will sing God’s praises indeed 
with my whole soul stirred and borne away by the Holy 
Spirit, but I will also follow reason as my guide, so that 
what I sing may be understood alike by myself and by 
the listeners’, 1 Co. xiv. 15.* 

ψαλμός, -οὔ, ὁ, (ψάλλω), α striking, twanging, [(Eur., 
al.)]; spee. a striking the chords of a musical instru- 
ment [(Pind., Aeschyl., al.)]; hence a pious song, a 
psalm, (Sept. chiefly for 7/719), Eph. v.19; Col. iii. 16; 
the phrase ἔχειν ψαλμόν is used of one who has it in his 
heart to sing or recite a song of the sort, 1 Co. xiv. 26 
{ef. Heinrici ad loc., and Bp. Lghtft. on Col. u. 5.1: one 
of the songs of the book of the O. T. which is entitled 


ψαλμοί, Acts xiii. $3; plur. the (book of) Psalms, Lk. 
xxiv. 44; βίβλος ψαλμῶν, Lk. xx. 42; Actsi. 20. [Syn. 
see ὕμνος, fin. ]* 

ψευδ-άδελφος, -ov, 6, (ψευδής and ddeddds), a false 
brother, i. e. one who ostentatiously professes to be a 
Christian, but is destitute of Christian knowledge and 
piety: 2Co. xi. 26; Gal. ii. 4." 

ψευδ-απόστολος, -ov, ὁ, (ψευδής and ἀπόστολος), a false 
apostle, one who falsely claims to be an ambassador of 
Christ: 2 Co. xi. 13.* 

ψευδής, -és, (ψεύδομαι), fr. Hom. Tl. 4, 235 down, lying, 
deceitful, false: Rev. ii. 2; μάρτυρες, Acts vi. 13; sub- 
stantively of ψευδεῖς, [A. V. liars], Rev. xxi. 8 [here 
Lehm. ψευστής, 4. ν.]." 

ψευδο-διδάσκαλος, -ου, 6, (ψευδής and διδάσκαλος), a 
false teacher: 2 Pet. ii. 1.* 

ψευδο-λόγος, -ov, (ψευδής and λέγω), speaking (teach- 
ing) falsely, speaking lies: 1 Tim. iv. 2. (Arstph. ran. 
1521; Polyb., Leian., Aesop, al.) * 

ψεύδομαι ; 1 aor. ἐψευσάμην ; (depon. mid. of ψεύδω 
[allied w. ψιθυρίζω ete. (Vanitek p. 1195)] ‘ to deceive’, 
‘cheat’: hence prop. to show one’s self deceitful, to play 
false); fr. Hom. down; to lie, to speak deliberate false- 
hoods: Heb. vi. 18; 1 Jn.i.6; Rev. iii. 9; οὐ ψεύδομαι, 
Ro. ix. 1; 2Co. xi. 31; Gal.i.20; 1 Tim.ii.7; τινά, to 
deceive one by a lie, to lie to, (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plut., 
| al.): Actsv. 3; like verbs of saying, with a dat. of the 
pers. (ef. W. § 31,5; B. §133,1; Green p. 100 sq.), Acts 
vy. 4 (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 45; Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 36; Ixxxviii. 
(Ixxxix.) 36; Josh. xxiv. 27; [Jer. v. 12], etc.) ; ets τινα, 
Col. iii. 9; κατά τινος, against one, Mt. v. 11 [LGom 


ψευδομάρτυρ 


Tr mrg. br. Wevd. ; al. connect καθ᾽ ὑμῶν with εἴπωσι and 
make ψευδ. a simple adjunct of mode (A. V. falsely) ]; 
κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας, Jas. iii. 14 [here Tdf. makes Weds. 
absol.; cf. W. 470 (438) n.8]. (Sept. for wma and 313.)* 

ψευδο-μάρτυρ, unless more correctly Ψψευδομάρτυς or 
rather Ψευδόμαρτυς (as αὐτόμαρτυρ; see Passow s. v. 
Ψψευδομάρτυς [esp. Lob. Paralip. p. 217; cf. Etym. Magn. 
506, 26]), -vpos, ὁ. (ψευδής and μάρτυρ [q. v-]), a false 
witness: Mt. xxvi. 60; τοῦ θεοῦ, false witnesses of i. 6. 
concerning God [W. § 30, 1 ἘΠ 1 Co. xv. 15. (Plat: 
Gorg. p. 472 b.; Aristot. pol. 2, 9, 8 [p. 1274", 6; but 
the true reading here is ψευδομαρτυριῶν (see Bentley’s 
Works ed. Dyce, vol. i. p. 408); a better ex. is Aristot. 
rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1482", 6; ef. Plut. praec. ger. reip. 
29,1; Constt. apost. 5, 9; Pollux 6, 36, 153].) * 

ψευδο-μαρτυρέω, -d: impf. ἐψευδομαρτύρουν ; fut. ψευ- 
δομαρτυρήσω ; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. sing. ψευδομαρμτυρήσῃς ; 
to utter falsehoods in giving testimony, to testify falsely, 
to bear false witness, (Xen. mem. 4, 4, 11; Plat. rep. 9, 
p- 575 b.; legg. 11 p. 937 ¢.; Aristot. rhet. 1, 14, 6 p. 
1375%, 12; [rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1432", 6]; Joseph. 
antt. 3, 5,5): Mt. xix. 18; [Mk. x. 19]; Lk. xviii. 20; 
Ro. xiii. 9 Ree.; κατά τινος, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. (as Ex. xx. 
16; Deut. v. 20).* 

ψευδο-μαρτυρία, -as, 7, (\revSouaprupew), false testimony, 
false witness: Mt. xv.19; xxvi.59. (Plat., Plut.; often 
in the Attic orators.) * 

ψευδομάρτυς, see Ψευδομάρτυρ. 

ψευδο-προφήτης, -ου, 6, (ψευδής and προφήτης), one who, 
acting the part of a divinely inspired prophet, utters false- 
hoods under the name of divine prophecies, a false prophet: 
Mt. vii. 15; xxiv. 11, 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Lk. vi. 26; Acts 
xiii. 6; 2 Pet. ii. 1; 1 Jn. iv. 1; Rev. xvi. 13; xix. 20; 
xx. 10. (Jer. vi. 13; xxxiii. (xxvi.) 8, 11, 16; 
(xxvii.) 7; xxxvi. (xxix.) 1,8; Zech. xiii. 2; Joseph. 
antt. 8, 13,1; 10, 7, 3; Ὁ. 1. 6, 5, 2; [τὸν τοιοῦτον εὐθυ- 
βόλῳ ὀνόματι ψευδοπροφήτην προσαγορεύει, κιβδηλεύοντα 
τὴν ἀληθῆ προφητείαν k. τὰ γνήσια νόθοις εὑρήμασι ἐπι- 
σκιάζοντα κτλ. Philo de spec. legg. iii. 8. 87; eccles. writ. 
[‘ Teaching’ 11, 5 ete. (where see Harnack)]; Grk. writ. 
use Ψψευδόμαντις. ) 

Ψεῦδος, -ους, τό, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for TY, 313, 
wm, a lie; conscious and intentional falsehood : univ. 
Rev. xiv. 5 (where Ree. δόλος) ; opp. to ἡ ἀλήθεια, Jn. 
vili. 44; Eph. iv. 25; οὐκ ἔστι ψεῦδος, opp. to ἀληθές 
ἐστιν, is no lie, 1 Jn. ii. 27; τέρατα ψεύδους, [A. V. lying 
wonders] exhibited for the treacherous purpose of de- 
ceiving men, 2 Th. ii. 9; in a broad sense, whatever is 
not what it professes to be: so of perverse, impious, deceit- 
ful precepts, 2 Th. ii. 11; 1 Jn. ii. 21; of idolatry, Ro. 
1. 25; ποιεῖν ψεῦδος, to act in accordance with the pre- 
cepts and principles of idolatry, Rev. xxi. 27; xxii. 15, 
[ef. xxi. 8, and p. 526 mid.].* 

Ψευδό-χριστος, -ov, 6, (ψευδής and χριστός), a false 
Christ (or Messiah), (one who falsely lays claim to the 
name and office of the Messiah): Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. 
xili. 22.* 

ψευδώνυμος, -ov, (ψεῦδος [ψευδής, rather] and ὄνομα), 


χχχῖν. 


676 


ψιθυριστής 


falsely named [A.V. falsely so called]: 1 Tim. vi. 20. 
(Aeschyl., Philo, Plut., Sext. Emp.) * 


ψεῦσμα, -ros, τό, (Wevdw), a falsehood, a lie, (Plat. Meno 


p- ΤΙ d.; Plut., Leian.; Sept.); spec. the perfidy by 
which a man by sinning breaks faith with God, Ro. iii. 
Ce 


ψεύστης, -ov, 6, (ψεύδω), fr. Hom. down, a liar: ὅπ. 
viii. 44, 55; 1Jn.i.10; ii. 4, 22: iv. 20; v.10; 1 Tim. i 

; Tit. 1. 12; [Rev. xxi. 8 Lehm. (al. ψευδής, 4. v-)]; 
one who breaks faith, a false or faithless man (see 
ψεῦσμα), Ro. iii. 4 ef. Prov. xix. 22.” 

ψηλαφάω, -@: 1 aor. ἐψηλάφησα, optat. 3 pers. plur. 
ψηλαφήσειαν (Acts xvii. 27, the Molie form; see ποιέω, 
init.) ; pres. pass. ptep. ψηλαφώμενος ; (fr. aw, to 
touch) ; to handle, touch, feel: τί or twa, Lk. xxiv. 39; 
Heb. xii. 18 [see R. V. txt. and mrg., cf. B. § 134, 8; W. 
343 (322)]; 1Jn.i.1; metaph. mentally to seek afler 
tokens of a person or thing : θεόν, Acts xvii. 27 [A.V. feel 
afier}. (Hom., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Philo, Plut. ; 
often for wi, wm, Ww.) [SYN.see ἅπτω, 2 6.1" 

noite; 1 aor. ἐψήφισα; (ψῆφος, q-Vv-); to count with 
pebbles, to compute, calculate, reckon: τὴν δαπάνην, Lk. 
xiv. 28; τὸν ἀριθμόν, to explain by computing, Rev. xiii. 
18. (Polyb., Plut., Palaeph., Anthol.; commonly and 
indeed chiefly in the mid. in the Grk. writ. to give one’s 
vole by casting a pebble into the urn; to decide by voting.) 
[Comp.: συγ- κατα-, cup- ψηφίζω.)" 

ψῆφος, -ov, ἡ, (ἔν. ψάω, see ψάλλω), a small, worn, 
smooth stone; pebble, [fr. Pind., Hdt., down; (in Hom. 
Wnois) ]; 1. since in the ancient courts of justice 
the accused were condemned by black pebbles and ae- 
quitted by white (cf. Passow s. v. ψῆφος, 2 ὁ.» vol. ii. p. 
2574»; [L.and S. s. v.4 d.]; Ovid. met. 15, 41; [Plut. 
Alcib. 22, 2]), and a man on his acquittal was spoken of 
as νικήσας (Theophr. char. 17 (19), 3) and the ψῆφος 
acquitting him called νικητήριος (Heliod. 3, 3 sub fin.), 
Christ promises that to the one who has gained eternal 
life by coming off conqueror over temptation (τῷ νικοῦντε 
ΓΔ. V. to him that overcometh]) he will give ψῆφον λευκήν, 
Rey. ii. 17; but the figure is explained differently by 
different interpp.; ef. Diisterdieck [or Lee in the ‘Speak- 
er’s Com.’] ad loc. ; [B. D.s. v. Stones, 8]. Ewald (Die 
Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 136; [ef. Lee u.s.; Plumptre in 
B. D. s. v. Hospitality, fin.]) understands it to be the 
tessera hospitalis [ef. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Tessera, 
3; Becker, Charicles, sc. i. note 17], which on being shown 
secures admission to the enjoyment of the heavenly 
manna; the Greek name, however, for this tessera, is 
not ψῆφος, but σύμβολον. 2. a vote (on account of 
the use of pebbles in voting): καταφέρω (q- v-), Acts 
xxvi. 10.* 

ψιθυρισμός, -00, ὁ, (ψιθυρίζω, to whisper, speak into 
one’s ear), a whispering, i.e. secret slandering, (Vulg. 
susurratio, Germ. Ohrenbidserei): joined w. καταλαλιά 
[ef. Ro. i. 29 (30)], 2 Co. xii. 20; Clem. Rom. 30, 3; 35, 5. 
(Plut.; Sept. for wm), of the maa murmuring of a 
charmer of snakes, Ecel. x. 11.) * 

Ψψιθυριστής, -οὔ, ὁ, (see the preced. word). a whisperer, 


ψΨιχίον 


secret slanderer, detractor, (Germ. Ohrenbldser): Ro. i. 
29 (30). (At Athens an epithet of Hermes, Dem. p. 
1358, 6; also of 6”Epws and Aphrodite, Suidas p. 3957 
c.; [ef. W. 24].)* 

Wx lov, -ov, τό, (dimin. of Wik, ψιχός, ἡ, a morsel), a little 
morsel, α crumb (of bread or meat): Mt. xv. 27; Mk. 
vii. 28; Lk. xvi. 21 [T WHom.LTrbr. y.]. (Not 
found in Grk. auth. [cf. W. 24; 96 (91)].)* 

ψυχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ψύχω, to breathe, blow), fr. Hom. down, 
Sept. times too many to count for wj, occasionally also 
for 27 and 339; 1. breath (Lat. anima),i.e. a. 
the breath of life; the vital force which animates the body 
and shows itself in breathing: Acts xx. 10; of animals, 
Rey. viii. 9, (Gen. ix. 4 34.; xxxv. 18; ἐπιστραφήτω ἡ 
Ψυχὴ τοῦ παιδαρίου, 1 K. xvii. 21); so also in those pass. 
where, in accordance with the trichotomy or threefold 
division of human nature by the Greeks, ἡ Ψυχή is dis- 
tinguished from τὸ πνεῦμα (see πνεῦμα, 2 p. 530" [and 
reff. 8. v. rv. 5]), 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. iv. 12. b. life: 
μεριμνᾶν τῇ ψυχῇ, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; τὴν ψυχὴν 
ἀγαπᾶν, Rev. xii. 11; [μισεῖν, Lk. xiv. 26]; τιθέναι, Jn. 
x. 11, 15, 17; xiii. 37 sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16; παρα- 
διδόναι, Acts xv. 26; διδόναι (λύτρον. q. v-), Mt. xx. 28; 
Mk. x. 45; ζητεῖν τὴν ψυχήν twos (see ζητέω, 1 a.), Mt. 
ii. 20; Ro. xi. 3; add, Mt. vi. 25; Mk. iii.4; Lk. vi.9; 
xii. 20, 23; Acts xx. 24; xxvii.10, 22; Ro. xvi. 4; 2 Co. 
i. 23; Phil. ii. 30; 1 Th.ii. 8; in the pointed aphorisms 
of Christ, intended to fix themselves in the minds of his 
hearers, the phrases εὑρίσκειν, σώζειν, ἀπολλύναι τὴν 
Ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, εἴο., designate as ψυχὴ in one of the anti- 
thetie members the life which is lived on earth, in the 
other, the (blessed) Jife in the eternal kingdom of God: 
Mt. x. 39; xvi. 25 sq.; Mk. viii. 35-37; Lk. ix. 24, 56 
Rec.; xvii. 33; Jn. xii. 25; the life destined to enjoy 
the Messianic salvation is meant also in the foll. phrases 
[(where R. V. soul)]: περιποίησις ψυχῆς, Heb. x. 39; 
κτᾶσθαι tas ψυχάς, Lk. xxi. 19; ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν, [here 
A.V. (not R.V.) for you; ef.c. below], 2Co. xii. 15. ὁ. 
that in which there is life; a living being: ψυχὴ ζῶσα, a 
living soul, 1 Co. xv. 45; [Rev. xvi. 3 R Tr mrg.], (Gen. 
ii. 7; plur. i. 20); πᾶσα ψυχὴ ζωῆς, Rev. xvi. 3 [G LT 
Tr txt. WH] (Lev. xi. 10); πᾶσα Ψυχή, every soul, i. e. 
every one, Acts ii. 43; iii. 23; Ro. xiii. 1, (so 32 -Ὁ3, 
Ley. vii. 17 (27); xvii. 12); with ἀνθρώπου added, every 
soul of man (DIN wai, Num. xxxi. 40, 46, [ef. 1 Mace. 
ii. 387), Ro.ii. 9. ψυχαί, souls (like the Lat. capita) i. e. 
persons (in enumerations; οἵ. Germ. Seelenzahl): Acts 
ii. 41; vii. 14; xxvii. 37; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xlvi. 15, 
18, 22, 26, 27; Ex.i.5; xii. 4; Lev. ii. 1; Num. xix. 
11, 13, 18; [Deut. x. 22]; the exx. fr. Grk. authors (cf. 
Passow 8. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2590) are of a different sort 
[yet ef. L.and 8. 5. v. IL. 37} : ψυχαὶ ἀνθρώπων of slaves 
[A. V. souls of men (R.V. with mrg. ‘ Or lives’}}, Rev. 
xviii. 13 (so [ Num. xxxi. 35]; Ezek. xxvii. 13; see σῶμα, 
1c. [ef. W. § 22, 7 N. 31}. 2. the soul (Lat. ani- 
mus), a. the seat of the feelings, desires, affections, 
aversions, (our soul, heart, ete. [R. V. almost uniformly 
soul]; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. y. 2, vol. ii. 


677 


ψυχικός 


Ρ. 2589"; [L. and. 5. v. II. 3]; Hebr. 93), cf. Gesenius, 
Thesaur. ii. p. 901in 3): Lk.i. 46; ii. 35; Jn. x. 24 [ef. 
αἴρω, 1 b.]; Acts xiv. 2, 22; xv. 24; Heb. vi.19; 2 Pet. 
ii. 8,14; ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῆς Ψ. Rev. xviii. 14; ἀνάπαυσιν ταῖς 
ψυχαῖς εὑρίσκειν, Mt. xi. 29; Ψυχή, - - - ἀναπαύου, φάγε, 
πίε [ΝῊ br. these three impvs. ], εὐφραίνου (personifica- 
tion and direct address), Lk. xii. 19, cf. 18 (ἡ Ψυχὴ ava- 
παύσεται, Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 28; εὐφραίνειν τὴν ψυχήν, Ael. 
v.h. 1,32); εὐδοκεῖ ἡ ψυχὴ μου (anthropopathically, of 
God), Mt. xii. 18; Heb. x. 38; περίλυπός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή 
pov, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34; ἡ ψυχή pou τετάρακται, 
Jn. xii. 27; ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν ἐκλυόμενοι, [ fainting in your 
souls (cf. ἐκλύω, 2 b.)], Heb. xii. 3; ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου, 
with all thy soul, Mt. xxii. 37; (Lk. x. 27 Ltxt. T Tr 
WH]; ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου (Lat. ex toto animo), with 
[lit. from (cf. ἐκ, I. 12 b.)] all thy soul, Mk. xii. 30, 33 
[here TWH om. L Tr mrg. br. the phrase]; Lk. x. 27 
[R ΑἹ, (Deut. vi. 5; [Epict. diss. 3, 22,18 (cf. Xen. anab. 
7, 7,43)]; Antonin. 3,4; [esp. 4, 31; 12, 29]; ὅλῃ τῇ 
ψυχῇ φροντίζειν τινός [rather, with xexapio@ar], Xen. 
mem. 3, 11,10); μιᾷ ψυχῇ; with one soul [cf. πνεῦμα, 2 
p- 520° bot.], Phil. i. 27; τοῦ πλήθους . . . ἦν ἡ καρδία Kat 
ἡ Ψυχὴ μία, Acts iv. 32 (ἐρωτηθεὶς τί ἐστι φίλος, ἔφη - pia 
ψυχὴ δύο σώμασιν ἐνοικοῦσα, Diog. Laért. 5, 20 [οἵ. Aristot. 
eth. Nic. 9, 8, 2 p. 1108", 7; on the elliptical ἀπὸ μιᾶς 
(sc. ψυχῆς 3), see ἀπό, III.]); ἐκ ψυχῆς, from the heart, 
heartily, [Eph. vi. 6 (Tr WH with vs. 7)]; Col. iii. 23, 
(ἐκ τῆς ψυχῆς often in Xen.; τὸ ἐκ Ψυχῆς πένθος, Joseph. 
antt. 17, 6, 5). b. the (human) soul in so far as it 
is so constituted that by the right use of the aids offered it 
by God it can attain its highest end and secure eternal 
blessedness, the soul regarded as a moral being designed 
for everlasting life: 3 Jn. 2; ἀγρυπνεῖν ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν, 
Heb. xiii. 17; ἐπιθυμίαι, αἵτινες στρατεύονται κατὰ τῆς 
ψυχῆς, 1 Pet. ii. 11; ἐπίσκοπος τῶν ψυχῶν, ib. 25; σώζειν 
τὰς ψυχάς, Jas. i. 21; ψυχὴν ἐκ θανάτου, from eternal 
death. Jas. v. 20; σωτηρία ψυχῶν, 1 Pet. i. 9; ἁγνίζειν 
τὰς ψυχὰς ἑαυτῶν, ib. 22; [τὰς ψυχὰς πιστῷ κτίστῃ παρα- 
τίθεσθαι, 1 Pet. iv. 19]. c. the soul as an essence 
which differs from the body and is not dissolved by death 
(distincuished fr. τὸ σῶμα, as the other part of human 
nature [so in Grk. writ. fr. Isocr. and Xen. down; cf. 
exx. in Passow s. v. p. 3589" bot.; i. and S. 5. v. II. 2]): 
Mt. x. 28, ef. 4 Mace. xiii. 14 (it is called ἀθάνατος, Hat. 
2, 123; Plat. Phaedr. p. 245 ¢., 246 a., ἃ]. ; ἄφθαρτος, Jo- 
seph. b. 7. 2, 8,14; διαλυθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ σώματος, 
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 14); the soul freed from the body, a 
disembodied soul, Acts ii. 27, 31 Ree.; Rev. vi. 9; xx. 
4, (Sap. iii. 1; [on the Homeric use of the word, see 
Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. 3 and reff. sub fin., also Proud jit 
in Bib. Sacer. for 1858, pp. 753-805 ]).* 

ψυχικός, -7, -όν, (ψυχή), (Vulg. animalis, Germ. sinn- 
lich), of or belonging to the ψυχῆ: a. having the 
nature and characteristics of the ψυχή i.e. of the prin- 
ciple of animal life, which men have in common with the 
brutes (see ψυχή, 1a.), [A. V. natural]: σῶμα Ψυχικόν, 
1 Co. xv. 44; substantively, τὸ ψυχικόν [W. 592 (551)], 
ib. 46; since both these expressions do not differ in 


ψῦχος 


substance or conception from σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα in vs. 50, 
Paul might have also written σαρκικόν ; but prompted 
by the phrase Ψυχὴ ζῶσα in vs. 45 (borrowed fr. Gen. ii. 
7), he wrote ψυχικόν. Ὁ. governed by the ψυχή 
i.e. the sensuous nature with its subjection to appetite 
and passion (as though made up of nothing but ψυχή) : 
ἄνθρωπος (i. q- σαρκικός [or σάρκινος, q- ν. 3] in 111. 1), 
1 Co. ii. 14; ψυχικοί, πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες, Jude 19 LA. V. 
sensual (R. V. with mrg. ‘Or natural, Or animal’); so in 
the foll. ex.]; σοφία, a wisdom in harmony with the 
corrupt desires and affections, and springing from them 
(see σοφία, a. p. 581° bot.), Jas. iii. 15. (In various 
other senses in prof. auth. fr. Aristot. and Polyb. down.)* 
ψύχος (RG Tr WH), more correctly ψῦχος (LT; ef. 
[Τὰ Proleg. p.102]; Lipsius,Grammat. Untersuch. p. 44 
sq-), τους, τό, (ψύχω, q- v), fr. Hom. down, cold: Jn. 
xviii. 18; Acts xxviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 27; for 7p, Gen. 
viii. 22; for 9p, Ps. exlvii. 6 (17), Job xxxvii. 8.* 
ψυχρός, -d, -dv, (ψύχω, q. ν.), fr. Hom. down, cold, 
cool: neut. of cold water, ποτήριον Ψυχροῦ, Mt. x. 42 
(ψυχρῷ Aodvra, Hat. 2, 37]; ψυχρὸν πίνειν, Epict. 
ench. 29, 2; πλύνεσθαι ψυχρῷ, diss. 4, 11, 19; cf. W. 
591 (550)); metaph. like the Lat. frigidus, cold i. 6. 
sluggish, inert, in mind (Ψ. τὴν ὀργήν, Leian. Tim. 2): of 


678 


ὧδε 


one destitute of warm Christian faith and the desire for 
holiness, Rey. iii. 15 sq.* 

ψύχω: 2 fut. pass. ψυγήσομαι [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 
p- 318 ; Moeris ed. Piers. p. 421 s. v.]; fr. Hom. down ; fo 
breathe, blow, cool by blowing ; pass. to be made or to grow 
cool or cold: trop. of waning love, Mt. xxiv. 12.* 

ψωμίζω; 1 aor. ἐψώμισα; (ψωμός, a bit,a morsel; see 
ψωμίον) ; a. lo feed by putting a bit or crumb (of 
food) into the mouth (of infants, the young of animals, 
etc.) : τινά τινι (Arstph., Aristot., Plut., Geop., Artem. 
oneir. 5, 62; Porphyr., Jambl.). b. univ. to feed, 
nourish, (Sept. for 2287) [W. § 2, 1 b.]: τινά, Ro. xii. 
20; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 55,2; with the ace. of the 
thing, to give a thing to feed some one, feed out to, (Vulg. 
distribuo in cibos pauperum [A. V. bestow... to feed the 
poor}): 1Co. xiii.3; inthe O. T. τινά τι, Sir. xv. 3; Sap. 
xvi. 20; Num. xi.4; Deut. xxxii.13; Ps. lxxix. (Ixxx.) 
6: Is. lviii. 14, οἵα. ; cf. W.§ 32, 4 a. note.* 

ψωμίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ψωμός), a fragment, bit, 
morsel, [A. V. sop]: Jn. xiii. 26 sq. 30. (Ruth ii. 14; 
Job xxxi. 17, [but in both ψωμός]; Antonin. 7,3; Diog. 
Laért. 6, 37.) * 

ψώχω; (fr. obsol. Wow for daw) ; to rub, rub to pieces: 
τὰς στάχυας ταῖς χερσίν, Lk. vi. 1. [(mid. in Nicand.)]* 


Q 


2, ὦ: omega, the last (24th) letter of the Grk. alpha- 
bet: ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ Q [WH ὮἮΩ, 1, ὦ, Tw], i. g. τὸ τέλος, i. 6. 
the last (see A, a, ἄλφα [and B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) 8. v. 
and art. ‘ Alpha’, also art. A and @ by Piper in Herzog 
(cf. Schaff-Herzog), and by Tyrwhitt in Dict. of Chris. 
Antiq.]), Rev. i. 8, 11 Ree.; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. [On the 
interchange of » and o in Mss. see Scrivener, Plain In- 
troduction ete. p. 627; ‘Six Lectures’ etc. p.176; WH. 
Intr. §404; cf. esp. Meisterhans, Gram. ἃ. Att. Inschr. 
p- 10.]* 

ὦ, an interjection, prefixed to vocatives (on its use in 
the N.T. ef. B. 140 (122); [W. § 29, 3]), O; it is 
used a. in address: ὦ Θεόφιλε, Acts i. 1; add, 
Acts xviii. 14; xxvii. 21 [here Tdf. ᾧ (ex errore); on 
the pass. which follow cf. B. τι. s.]; Ro. ii. 1,3; ix. 20; 
1 Tim. vi. 20; and, at the same time, reproof, Jas. ii. 
20. b. in exclamation: and that of admiration, 
Mt. xv. 28; Ro. xi. 33 [here Rec.* Lchm. ὦ; ef. Chand- 
ler §§ 902, (esp.) 904]; of reproof, Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts 
xiii. 10; Gal. iii. 1; with the nom. (W. § 29, 2), Mt. 
xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk.ix.41. [(From Hom. down.) ]* 

Ὠβηδ (RG; see Ἰωβήδ), 6, (Hebr. 32%) [i. e. ‘ser- 
vant’ sc. of Jehovah]), Obed, the grandfather of king 
David: Mt.i.5; Lk. iii. 32, (Ruth iv. 17 sq.; 1 Chr. ii. 
12).* 


ὧδε, adv., (fr. ὅδε); 1. 80, in this manner, (very 
often in Hom.). 2. adv. of place; a. hither, 
to this place (Hom. Il. 18, 392; Od. 1, 182; 17, 545; cf. 
B. ΤΙ (62 sq.) [ef. W. § 54, 7; but its use in Hom. of 
place is now generally denied; see Ebeling, Lex. 
Hom. 8. v. p. 484; L.andS.s. v.IL.]): Mt. viii. 29; xiv. 
18 [Tr mrg. br. ὧδε]; xvii. 17; xxii. 12; Mk. xi.3; Lk. 
ix. 41; xiv. 21; xix. 27; Jn. vi. 25; xx. 27; Actsix. 21; 
Rev. iv.1; xi. 12, (Sept. for Ὁ 71, Ex. iii. 5; Judg. xviii. 
3; Ruth ii. 14); ἕως ὧδε, [even unto this place], Lk. 
xxiii. 5. b. here, in this place: Mt. xii. 6, 41 sq.; 
xiv. 17; Mk. ix.1,5; xvi.6; Lk. ix. 33; xxii.38; xxiv. 
6 [WH reject the cl.]; Jn. vi. 9; xi. 21, 32, and often, 
(Sept. for 75); τὰ ὧδε, the things that are done here, 
| Col. iv. 9; ὧδε, in this city, Acts ix. 14; in this world, 
| Heb. xiii. 14; opp. to ἐκεῖ (here, i. 6. according to the 
Levitical law still in force; there, i.e. in the passage in 
Genesis concerning Melchizedek), Heb. vii. 8; ὧδε 
with some addition, Mt. xiv. 8; Mk. vi. 3; viii.4; Lk. 
iv. 23; ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἢ ὧδε, here is Christ, or there, [so 
A.V., but R. V. here is the Christ, or, Here (cf. ὧδε καὶ 
ὧδε, hither and thither, Ex. ii. 12 ete.)], Mt. xxiv. 23; 
ὧδε ἢ... ἐκεῖ, Mk. xiii. 21 [T WH om. ἢ; Tr mrg. reads 
cai]; Lk. xvii. 21, 23 [here T Tr WH mrg. ἐκεῖ... . ὧδε 
(WH txt. ἐκεῖ g . . . &8e)]; Jas. ii. 3 [here Rec. ἐκεῖ ἢ . . - 


‘ 


φδή 


ὧδε; GLT Tr WH om. ὧδε (WH txt. and marg. vary- 
ing the place of ἐκεῖ). Metaph. in this thing, Rev. xiii. 
10, 18; xiv. 12; xvii. 9, [the phrase ὧδέ ἐστιν in at 
least two of these pass. (viz. xiii. 18; xiv. 12) seems to 
be eqniv. to ‘here there is opportunity for’, ‘need of’ 
ete. (so in Epict. diss. 3, 22,105)]; in this state of things, 
under these circumstances, 1 Co. iv. 2 L [who, however, 
connects it with vs. 1] TTr WH; cf. Meyer ad loe. 
ὠδή, -ῆς, ἡ, (i. q- ἀοιδή, fr. ἀείδω i.e. ἄδω, to sing), fr. 
Soph. and Eur. down, Sept. for vw and nw, a song, 
lay, ode; in the Scriptures a song in praise of God or 
Christ: Rev. v. 9; xiv. 3; Maitoéws x. Tod apviov, the 
song which Moses and Christ taught them to sing, Rev. 
xv. 3; plur. with the epithet πνευματικαί, Eph. v. 19 
[here L br. πν.}; Col. iii. 16. [Sy¥N. see ὕμνος, fin.]* 
ὠδίν (1 Th. v. 8; Is. xxxvii. 3) for ὠδίς (the earlier 
form; cf. W. § 9,2 6. N.1), -ivos, ἡ, fr. Hom. Il. 11, 271 
down, the pain of childbirth, travail-pain, birth-pang: 
1 Th. v. 3; plur. ὠδῖνες ([ pangs, throes, R. V. travail]; 
Germ. Wehen), i.q. intolerable anguish, in reference to 
the dire calamities which the Jews supposed would pre- 
cede the advent of the Messiah, and which were called 
mvon ‘oan [see the Comm. (esp. Keil) on Mt. 1. ς.1, 
Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9); ὠδῖνες θανάτου [Tr mrg. 
ἅδου], the pangs of death, Acts ii. 24, after the Sept. 
who translated the words 7) *93m by ὠδῖνες 6., deriv- 
ing the word *93Mn not, as they ought, from ban, i i.e. 
σχοινίον ‘cord’, but from 53m, ὠδίς, “Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5; 
exiv. (exvi.) 33 2 S. xxii. 6.* 
ὠδίνω; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 5yn, thrice for San; 
to feel the pains of childbirth, to travail: Gal. iv. 27; 
Rev. xii. 2; in fig. disc. Paul uses the phrase οὖς πάλιν 
ὠδίνω, i. e. whose souls I am striving with intense effort 
and anguish to conform to the mind of Christ, Gal. iv. 
19. [Comp.: συν-ωδίνω. " 
ὦμος, -ov, 6, (OIQ i. q. φέρω [(?); allied w. Lat. umerus, 
ef. Vanicek p. 38; Curtius §487]), fr. Hom. down, the 
shoulder: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xv. 5.* 
ὠνέομαι, -οὔμαι : 1 aor. ὠνησάμην (which form, as well 
as ἐωνησάμην, belongs to later Grk., for which the earlier 
writ. used ἐπριάμην; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 137 sqq. ; 
[Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 210 sqq.; Veitch 8. v.]; 
W. §12, 2; §16s.v.); fr. Hdt. down; to buy: witha 
gen. of the price, Acts vii. 16.* 
ὠόν [so RG Tr, but LT WH ᾧόν ; see (Etym. Magn. 
822, 40) 1, ε], -ov, τό, fr. Hdt. down, an egg: Lk. xi. 12, 
(for 7¥°3, found only in the plur. o¥°3, Deut. xxii. 
6 sq.; Is. x. 14, ete.).* 
ὥρα, -as, ἡ, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nyy and in Dan. 
for NYW; 1. a certain definite time or season fixed 
by natural law and returning with the revolving year; 
of the seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn, 
winter, as ὥρα τοῦ θέρους, mpwipos K. ὄψιμος, χειμερία, 
ete.; often in the Grk. writ. [ef. L. ἀπά S.s.v. A. I. 1 α., 
and on the inherent force of the word esp. Schmidt ch. 
44 §6 sq. ]. 2. the daytime (bounded by the rising 
and the setting of the sun), a day: Spa παρῆλθεν, Mt. 
x:V. 15; ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης (or γινομένης), [ A. V. 


679 


σ΄ 
ὥρα 


when the day was now far spent}, Mk. vi. 35 (see πολύς, c. 
[but note that in the ex. fr. Polyb. there cited πολλῆς 
ὥρας means early]); ὀψίας [ὀψὲ T Tr τσ. WH txt.] ἤδη 
οὔσης τῆς Spas [WH mrg. br. τῆς ὥρας], Mk. xi. 11 
(ὀψὲ τῆς ὥρας, Polyb. 3, 83, 7; ris ὥρας ἐγίγνετο ὀψέ, 
Dem. p. 541, 28). 3. α twelfth part of the day-time, ἡ 
an hour, (the twelve hours of the day are reckoned from 
the rising to the setting of the sun, Jn. xi. 9 [cf. BB. 
DD. 5. v. Hour; Riehm’s HWB. 8. v. Uhr]): Mt. xxiv. 
36; xxv.13; ΜΚ. xiii. 32; xv. 25,33; Lk. xxii. 59; xxiii. 
44; Jn.i.39 (40), iv. 6; xix. 14; with τῆς ἡμέρας added, 
Acts ii. 15; of the hours of the night, Lk. xii. 39; 
xxii. 59; with τῆς νυκτός added, Acts xvi. 33; xxiii. 23; 
dat. Spa, in stating the time when [W. § 31, 9; B. 
§ 133, 26]: Mt. xxiv. 44; Mk. xv. 34; LK. xii. 39 sq.; 
preceded by ἐν, Mt. xxiv. 50; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xvi. 33; 
accus. to specify when [W. § 82,6; Β. § 131, 11]: Jn. 
iv.52; Acts x.3;1Co.xv. 30; Rev. iii.3; also to express 
duration [W. and B. ll. ee.]: Mt. xx. 12 [ef. ποιέω, I. 
la. fin.]; xxvi. 40; Mk.xiv.37; preceded by preposi- 
tions: ἀπό, Mt. xxvii. 45; Acts xxiii. 23; ἕως, Mt. xxvii. 
45; μέχρι, Acts x. 30; περί with the aceus. Acts x. 9. 
improp. used for a very short time: μιᾷ Spa, Rev. xviii. 
10 [Ree. ἐν, WH mrg. ace.], 17 (16), 19; πρὸς ὥραν, 
[A. V. for a season], Jn. v. 35; 2 Co. vii. 8; Gal. ii. 5 
[here A. V. for an hour]; Philem. 15; πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας, 
[for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17. 4. any definite 
time, point of time, moment: Mt. xxvi. 45 ; more precisely 
defined —by a gen. of the thing, Lk.i.10; xiv.17; Rev. 
iii. 10; xiv. 7,15; by agen. of the pers. the jit or oppor- 
tune time for one, Lk. xxii. 53; Jn.ii.4; by a pronoun 
or an adj.: ἡ ἄρτι Spa, [A. V. this present hour], 1 Co. 
iv. 11; ἐσχάτη ὥρα, the last hour 1.e. the end of this age 
and very near the return of Christ from heaven (see 
ἔσχατος, 1 p. 253), 1 Jn. ii. 18 [ef. Westcott ad loc.]; 
αὐτῇ τῇ Spa, that very hour, Lk. ii. 38 [here A.V. (not 
R.V.) that instant]; xxiv. 33; Acts xvi. 18; xxii.13; ἐν 
αὐτῇ τῇ Spa, in that very hour, Lk. vii. 21 [R G Ltxt.]; 
xii. 12; xx. 19; ἐν τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐκείνῃ, Mt. viii. 13; ἐν ἐκείνῃ 
τῇ ὥρᾳ, Mt. x. 19 [Lehm. br. the el.]; Mk. xiii. 11; [Lk. 
vii. 21 L mrg. Τ Tr WH]; Rev. xi. 13; ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνης τῆς 
ὥρας, Jn. xix. 27; ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης, Mt. ix. 22; xv. 
28; xvii.18; by a conjunction: ὥρα ὅτε, In. iv. 21, 23; 
y.25: xvi. 253 ἵνα (see ἵνα, IT. 2 d.), Jn. xii. 233; xiii. 
1; xvi. 2,32; by καί and a finite verb, Mt. xxvi. 45; 
by a relative pron. ὥρα ἐν 7, Jn. v.28; by the addition 
of an ace. with an inf. Ro. xiii. 11 (οὔπω ὥρα συναχθῆναι 
τὰ κτήνη, Gen. xxix. 7; see exx. in the Grk. writ., fr. 
Aeschyl. down, in Passow 8. v. vol. ii. p. 2620°; [L. and 
S. s.v. B. I. 3]; so the Lat. tempus est, Cie. Tuse. 1, 41, 
99; ad Att. 10,8). Owing to the context ὥρα some- 
times denotes the fatal hour, the hour of death : Mt. xxvi. 
45; Mk. xiv. 35,41; Jn. xii. 27; xvi. 4 [here L Tr WH 
read ἡ ὥρα αὐτῶν 1. 6. the time when these predictions 
are fulfilled]; xvii. 1; ἡ ὥρα τινός, ‘one’s hour’, i. 6. 
the time when one must undergo the destiny appointed 
him by God: so of Christ, Jn. vii. 30; viii. 20, ef. xvi. 21. 
[On the omission of the word see ἐξαυτῆς, (ἀφ᾽ ns? οὗ 


ὡραῖος 


p 58” top), ὟΥ. 8 64, 5 5. ν. ; Β. 82 (11); on the omission 
of the art. with it (e.g. 1 Jn. ii. 18), see W. §19s. v.] 

ὡραῖος, -a, -ov, (fr. dpa, ‘the bloom and vigor of life’, 
‘beauty’ in the Grk. writ., who sometimes join the word 
in this sense with χάρις [which suggests grace of move- 
ment] or κάλλος [which denotes, rather, symmetry of 
form]), fr. Hes. down, ripe, mature, (of fruits, of human 
age, ete.) ; hence blooming, beautiful, (of the human 
body, Xen., Plat., al.; with τῇ ὄψει added, Gen. xxvi. 
7; xxix.17; xxxix.6; 1K.i. 6): πόδες, Ro. x.15; of a 
certain gate of the temple, Acts iii. 2, 10; [τάφοι κεκο- 
νιαμένοι, Mt. xxiii. 27]; σκεῦος, 2 Chr. xxxvi. 19. [Ὁ ΄ 
Trench, Syn. 8 evi.) * 

ὠρύομαι ; depon. mid.; Sept. for INW 5; to roar, to howl, 
(of a lion, wolf, dog, and other beasts): 1 Pet. v. 8 
(Judg. xiv.5; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 14; Jer. ii. 15; Sap. xvii. 
18; Theoer., Plut., al.); of men, fo raise a loud and in- 
articulate cry: either of grief, Hdt. 3, 1173; or of joy, 
id. 4, 75; to sing with a loud voice, Pind. Ol. 9, 163.* 

ὡς [ Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 ὥς; cf. W. 
462 (431); Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebeling, Lex. 
Hom. s. v. p. 494° bot.], an adverbial form of the rela- 
tive pron. ὅς, ἥ, 6 which is used in comparison, as, like 
as, even as, according as, in the same manner as, ete. 
(Germ. wie); but it also assumes the nature of a con- 
junction, of time, of purpose, and of consequence. 
On its use in the Grk. writ. ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, 
ch. xxxv. p. 756 sqq.; [L. and S. s. ν.]. 

I. ὡς as an adverb of camparison; 1. Tt 
answers to some demonstrative word (οὕτως, or the like), 
either in the same clause or in another member of the 
same sentence [cf. W.§ 53, 5]: οὕτως ... ὡς, Jn. vii. 46 
[L WH om. Tr br. ὡς ete.]; 1 Co. 111. 15; iv. 1; ix. 26; 
Eph. v. 28, 33; Jas. ii. 12; ovras... ὡς ἐὰν [T Tr WH 
om. ἐὰν (cf. Eng. as should a man cast ete.)]... βάλῃ, 
sa ete....as if ete. Mk. iv. 26; as... οὕτως, Acts viii. 
32; xxiii. 11; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. xi.3 [RG]; 1 Th.v. 
2; ὡς ἄν (ἐάν) foll. by subj. [(cf. ἄν, I. 2 a. fin.)]... 
οὕτως, 1 Th. ii. 7sq.; ὡς . - - οὕτω καί, Ro. v. 15 [here 
WH br. καί], 18; 2 Οο.1. 7 LT Tr WH; vii. 14; ὡς [T 
Tr WI καθὼς... . κατὰ τὰ αὐτά [LG ταὐτά, Ree. ταῦτα], 
Lk. xvii. 28-30; tos... ὡς καί, Acts xi. 17; sometimes 
in the second member of the sentence the demonstrative 
word (οὕτως, or the like) is omitted and must be sup- 
plied by the mind, as Mt. viii. 13; Col. ii. 6; ds... 
καί (where οὕτω καί might have been expected [W. u.s. ; 
Β. ὃ 149, 8 c.]), Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2 [here G T Tr WH 
om. L br. the el.]; Acts vii. 51 [Lehm. καθώς ; Gal. i. 9; 
Phil. i. 20, (see καί, IT. 1 a.); to this construction must 
be referred also 2 Co. xiii. 2 ὡς παρὼν τὸ δεύτερον, καὶ 
ἀπὼν viv, as when I was present the second time, so now 
being absent [(cf. p. 317° top); al. render (cf. R. V. 
mrg.) as if I were present the second time, even though 
T am now absent]. 2. ὡς with the word or words 
forming the comparison is so subjoined to a preced- 
ing verb that οὕτως must be mentally inserted before 
the same. When thus used ὡς refers a. to the 


680 


4 
ως 


verb, and is equiv. to tn the same manner as, after the 
fashion of; it is joined in this way to the subject (nom.) 
of the verb: Mt. vi. 29; vii. 29; xiii. 43; 1 Th. ii. 11; 
2 Pet. ii. 12; Jude 10, ete.; to an ace. governed by the 
verb: as ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν, Mt. xix. 19; 
xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 81, 33; Lk. χ. 27; Ro. xiii. 9; Gal. v. 
14; Jas. ii. 8; add, Philem.17; Gal. iv. 14; [here many 
(cf. R. V. mrg.) would bring in also Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 
(cf. 6. below)]; or to another oblique case: as Phil. ii. 
22; toa subst. with a prep.: as ὡς ἐν κρυπτῷ, Jn. Vii. 
10 [Tdf. om. ὡς}; ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς, Jas. v. 5 [RG; 
al. om.@s]; ὡς διὰ ξηρᾶς, Heb. xi. 29; add, Mt. xxvi. 55; 
Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52; Ro. xiii. 18; Heb. iii. 8; 
when joined to a nom. or an ace. it can be rendered like, 
(like) as, (Lat. instar, veluti): Mt. x. 16; Lk. xxi. 35; 
xxii. 31; 1 Co. iii. 10; 1Th.v.4; 2 Tim.ii. 17; Jas. i 
10; 1 Pet. v. 8; 2 Pet. iii. 10; καλεῖν τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα 
(see καλέω, 1 b. β. sub fin.), Ro. iv. 17. Ὁ. ὡς joined 
to a verb makes reference to the ‘substance’ of the 
act expressed by the verb, i. e. the action designated by 
the verb is itself said to be done ὡς, in like manner 
(just) as, something else: Jn. xv. 6 (for τὸ βάλλεσθαι 
ἔξω is itself the very εἶπα which is declared to happen 
[1- 8. the unfruitful disciple is ‘cast forth’ just as the 
severed branch is ‘cast forth’]) ; 2 Co. iii. 1 [Lchm. ὥς 
[mep]]; generally, however, the phrase ὡς καί is employed 
[W. § 53,5], 1 Co. ix.5; xvi. 10 [here WH txt. om. καί]; 
Eph. ii. 3; 1 Th. v.6 [L T Tr WH om. καί]; 2 Tim. iii. 
9; Heb. iii. 2; 2 Pet. iii. 16. c. ὡς makes refer- 
ence to similarity or equality, in such expres- 
sions as εἶναι ὥς τινα, i. e. ‘to be like’ or ‘equal to’ one, 
Mt. xxii. 30; xxviii. 3; Mk. vi. 34; xii. 25; Lk. vi. 40; 
xi. 44; xviii. 11; xxii. 26 sq.; Ro. ix. 27; 1 Uo. vii. 7, 
29-31; 2 Co. ii. 17; 1 Pet.i. 24; 2 Pet. iii. 8; ἵνα μὴ ὡς 
kar’ ἀνάγκην τὸ ἀγαθόν σου 7, that thy benefaction may not 
be like something extorted by force, Philem. 14; γίνεσθαι 
ὥς τινα, Mt. x. 25; xviii. 8; Lk. xxii. 26; Ro. ix. 29; 1 Co. 
iv. 13; ix. 20-22 [in vs. 22 T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. 
ὡς}; Gal. iv. 12; μένειν ὥς τινα, 1 Co. vii. 8; ποιεῖν τινα 
ὥς twa, Lk. xv. 193 passages in which ἐστίν, ἦν, ὧν (or 
ὁ ὦν) is left to be supplied by the reader: as ἡ φωνὴ 
αὐτοῦ ὡς φωνὴ ὑδάτων, Rev. i. 15; ὀφθαλμούς, sc. ὄντας, 
Rev. ii. 18; πίστιν sc. οὖσαν, Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. xvii. 6; 
add, Rev. iv. 7; ix. 2, 5, 7-9,17; x. 1; xii. 15; xiii. 2; 
xiv. 2; xx. 8; xxi. 21; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37, [many (cf. 
R. V. mrg.) refer these last two pass. to a. above]; x. 
11; xi. 5, etc.; before ὡς one must sometimes supply 
ri, ‘something like’ or ‘having the appearance of’ this 
or that: thus ὡς θάλασσα, i. 6. something having the ap- 
pearance of [R. V. as it were] a sea, Rev. iv. 6 GLT Tr 
WH;; viii. 8; ix. 7; xv. 2, (so in imitation of the Hebr. 
53, cf. Deut. iv. 32; Dan. x. 18; ef. Gesenius, Thes. p. 
648° [Soph. Lex. s.v.2]); passages where the compar 
ison is added to some adjective: as, ὑγιὴς ὡς, Mt. xii. 135 
λευκὰ Os, Mt. xvii. 2; Mk. ix. 3 [R L]; add, Heb. xii. 163 
Rev. i. 14; vi. 12; viii. 10; x.9; xxi. 2; xxii. 1. a 
ὡς so makes reference to the quality of a person, 


manner (‘form’) of the action expressed by the finite + viking, ar action, as to be equiv. to such as, exactly like, as 


ως 


it were; Germ. als; and a. to a quality which 
really belongs tothe person or thing: ὡς ἐξουσίαν 
ἔχων, Mt. vii. 29; Mk. i. 22; ὡς μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρός, 
Jn. i. 14; add, [((L T Tr WH in Mt. v. 48; vi. 5, 16)]; 
Acts xvii. 22; Ro. vi. 13 [here L T Tr WH ὡσεί] ; xv. 
15; 1Co. iii. 1; vii. 25; 2 Co. vi. 4; xi. 16; Eph. v. 1, 
8, 15; Col. iii. 12; 1 Th. ii. 4; 1 Tim. v.'1 sq.; 2 Tim. 
ii. 3; Tit. i. 7; Philem. 9, 16 [where cf. Bp. Lehtft.]; 
Heb. iii. 5 sq.; vi. 19; xi. 9; xili. 17; 1 Pet. i. 14, 19; ii. 
2,5, 11; iii. 7; iv. 10, 15sq. 19[ 6]; 2 Pet. i. 19; 2Jn. 
Ὁ 9:55. 11. 19. eve te 179) γε δ; ἘΣ 21" xviii 1, δύσι: 
ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως sc. τρέχων, aS One who is not running 
ete. 1 Co. ix. 26; concisely, ὡς ἐξ εἰλικρινείας and ἐκ 
θεοῦ sc. λαλοῦντες, borrowed from the neighboring 
λαλοῦμεν, 2 Co. ii. 17; τινὰ ὥς twa or te after verbs 
of esteeming, knowing, declaring, ete. [W. 
§$ 32,4 b.; 59, 6]: as, after λογίζειν, λογίζεσθαι, Ro. 
viii. 36; 1 Co. iv. 1 (where οὕτως precedes); 2 Co. x. 
2; ἡγεῖσθαι, 2 Th. iii. 15; ἔχειν, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, 46 
[but here 1, T Tr WII read εἰς (cf. ἔχω, 1. 1 £.)], (τινὰς 
ὡς θεούς, Ev. Nicod. ὁ. 5); ἀποδεικνύναι, 1 Co. iv. 9; 
παραβάλλειν [or ὁμοιοῦν ({. v-)], Mk. iv. 31; διαβάλλειν, 
pass. Lk. xvi. 1; ἐλέγχειν, pass. Jas. 11. 9; εὑρίσκειν, pass. 
Phil. ii. 7 (8). 8. toa quality which is supposed, 
pretended, feigned, assumed: ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρί- 
νομαι, Ro. iii. 7; ὡς πονηρόν, Lk. vi. 22; add, 1 Co. iv. 7; 
viii. 7; 2 Co. vi. 8-10; xi. 15 sq.; xiii. 7; 1 Pet. ii. 12; 
frequently it can be rendered as if, as though, Acts iii. 
12; xxiii. 15, 20; xxvii. 30; 1 Co.v.3; 2 Co.x. 14; xi. 
17; Col. ii. 20; Heb. xi. 27; xiii. 3; ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δι᾽ 
ἡμῶν, SC. γεγραμμένης, 2 Th. ii. 2. 3. ws with the 
gen. absol. presents the matter spoken of — either as 
the belief of the writer, 2 Co. v. 20; 2 Pet. i. 3; or as 
some one’s erroneous opinion : 1 Co. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 12; 
cf. W. § 65, 9; [B.§ 145, 7; esp. $144, 22]. In gen- 
eral, by the use of ὡς the matter spoken of is presented — 
either as a mere matter of opinion: as in ὡς ἐξ ἔργων 
sc. ὁ Ἰσραὴλ νόμον δικαιοσύνης ἐδίωξεν, Ro. ix. 32 (where 
it marks the imaginary character of the help the 
Israelites relied on, they thought to attain righteous- 
ness in that way [A. V. as it were by works]);—or 
as a purpose: πορεύεσθαι ὡς ἐπὶ θάλασσαν, that, as 
they intended, he might go to the sea, Acts xvii. 14, ef. 
Meyer ad loc.; W. 617 (573 sq.), [but LT Tr WH 
read ἕως, as far as to ete.];—or as merely the thought 
of the writer: Gal. iii. 16; before ὅτι, 2 Co. xi. 21; — or 
as the thought and pretence of others: also before ὅτι, 
2 Th. ii. 2: cf. W. u. s.; [B. $149, 3; on ὡς ὅτε in 2 Co. 
ν. 19 (A.V. to wit) see W. and B. Il. ce. (ef. Esth. iv. 
14; Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 11,1 and Miiller’s note; L. andS. 
s.v. G. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 7)]; ὡς ἄν, as if, as though, 
2 Co. x. 9 [cf. W. 310 (291); but cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 1, 
and see ἄν, [V.]. 4. ὡς has its own verb, with which 
it forms a complete sentence ; a. ὡς with a finite 
verb is added by way of illustration, and is to be trans- 
lated as, just as, (Lat. sicut, eo modo quo): Eph. vi. 20; 
Col. iii. 18; iv. 4; 1 Pet. iii. 6; 2 Pet. ii. 1; 1Jn.i. 7; 
Rev. ii. 28 (27) [this ex. is referred by some (cf. R. V. 


681 ᾿ ὡς 


mrg.) to 2 ἃ. above]; νἱ. 18; ix. 8; xviii. 6 [here ὡς καί; 
the ex. seems to belong under 2 b. above]. in phrases 
in which there is an appeal—either to the O.T. (as 
γέγραπται), Mk. i. 2 [here T Tr WH καθώς]; vii. 6; Lk. 
iii. 4; Acts xiii. 33; or in general to the testimony of 
others, Acts xvii. 28; xxii. 5; xxv. 10; Ro. ix. 25: 1 
Co. x. 7RG (cf. ὥσπερ, b.). in phrases like ποιεῖν 
ὡς προσέταξεν or συνέταξεν, etc.: Mt. i. 24; xxvi. 19; 
xxvill. 15; Lk. xiv. 22 [here TTr txt. WH 6]; Tit. i. 
5; likewise, Mt. viii. 13; xv. 28; Rev. x. 7; se. γενηθή- 
τω μοι, Mt. xxvi. 39. in short parenthefic or inserted 
sentences: ὡς εἰώθει, Mk. x. 1; ὡς ἐνομίζετο, Lk. 111. 23 ; 
ὡς λογίζομαι, 1 Pet. v. 12; ὡς ὑπολαμβάνετε, Acts ii. 15; 
ὡς λέγουσιν, Rev. ii. 24; ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, [R. V. howsoever 
ye might be led} uteunque agebamini [cf. B. § 139, 13; 
383 sq. (329); W. § 42, 3 a.],1 Co. xii. 2. ὡς serves 
to add an explanatory extension [and is rendered in 
A. V. how (that)|: Acts x. 88; τὴν - - - ὑπακοήν, ὡς ete. 
2 Co. vii. 15; τοῦ λόγου τοῦ κυρίου, ὡς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Lk. 
Xxii. 61 ; τοῦ ῥήματος, ὡς ἔλεγεν, Acts xi. 16, (Xen. Cyr. 
8, 2,14; an. 1, 9,11); ef. Bornemann, Schol. ad Luc. 
p- 141. b. ὡς is used to present, in the form of a 
comparison, ἃ motive which is urged upon one, —as 
ἄφες ἡμῖν τὰ ὀφειλήματα ἡμῶν, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν (RG 
ἀφίεμεν) κτλ. (for which Lk. xi. 4 gives καὶ γὰρ αὐτοὶ 
ἀφίομεν), Mt. vi. 12, —or which actuates one, as χάριν 
ἔχω τῷ θεῷ .. . ὡς ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχω THY περὶ σοῦ μνείαν, 
2 Tim. i. 3 (for the dear remembrance of Timothy moves 
Paul’s gratitude to God); [ef. Jn. xix. 33 (ef. II. a. be- 
low) ]; in these examples ὡς has almost the force of a 
causal particle; ef. K/otz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 766; [L. and 
8. s. v. B. IV.; W. 448 (417)]. c. ὡς adds in a 
rather loose way something which serves to illustrate 
what precedes, and is equiv. to the case is as though 
[R. V. it is as when]: Mk. xiii. 34, where ef. Fritzsche 
p- 587; unless one prefer, with Meyer et al., to make it 
an instance of anantapodoton [ef. A. V. ‘For the Son 
of Man is as aman’ ete.]; see ὥσπερ, a. fin. 5. ac- 
cording as: Ro. xii. 3; 1 Co. iii. 5; Rev. xxii. 12. 6. 
ὡς, like the Germ. wie, after verbs of reading, nar- 
rating, testifying, and the like, introduces that 
which is read, narrated, ete. ; hence it is commonly said 
to be equivalent to ὅτι (οἴ. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 765); 
but there is this difference between the two, that ὅτε ex- 
presses the thing itself, ὡς the mode or quality 
of the thing [hence usually rendered how], (cf. W. § 53, 
9; [Meyer on Ro. i. 9; ef. L. and S. 5. ν. Β. 1.7): thus 
after ἀναγινώσκειν, Mk. xii. 26 (where T Tr WH πῶς) ; 
Lk. vi. 4 [here Tr WH br. ὡς ; Ltxt. reads πῶς]: μνησθῆ- 
va, Lk. xxiv. 6 [Lmrg. ὅσα]; θεᾶσθαι, Lk. xxiii. 55; 
ὑπομνῆσαι, Jude 5 [here ὅτε (not os) is the particle], 7 
[al. regard ὡς here as introducing a confirmatory illus- 
tration of what precedes (A.V. even as ete.) ; cf. Huther, 
or Briickner’s De Wette, ad loc.]; εἰδέναι, Acts x. 38; 
Ro. xi. 2; 1 Th. ii. 115 ἐπίστασθαι, Acts x. 28 [here many 
(ef. R. V. mrg.) connect ὡς with the adj. immediately 
following (see 8 below)]; xx. 18, 20; ἀπαγγέλλειν, Lk. 
viii. 47; ἐξηγεῖσθαι, Lk. xxiv. 35; μάρτυς, Ro. i. 9 [here 


ὡς 


al. connect ὡς with the word which follows it (cf. 8 
below) ]; Phil. i. 8. 7. ὡς before numerals denotes 
nearly, about: as, ὡς δισχίλιοι, Mk. v. 13; add, Mk. viii. 
9; Lk. ii. 37 (here 1. 1 Tr WH ἕως) ; viii. 42; Jn. i. 39 
(40); [iv. 6 LT Tr WH]; vi. 19 (here Lehm. ὡσεί) ; 
xi. 18; [xix. 39G LT TrWH)]; xxi. 8; Acts i. 15 [Τα . 
ὡσεί]; ν. 7, [86 LT Tr WH); xiii. [18 (yet not WH 
txt.) ; cf. καί, 1. 2.6.1, 20; xix. 34 [WH ὡσεί]; Rev. viii. 
1, (3,1 85. xi. 1; xiv. 2, ete.); for exx. fr. Grk. writ. 
see Passow 8. v. vol. ii. p. 2631; [L. and S. s. v. E; 
Soph. Lex. s. Vv. 3]. 8. ὡς is prefixed to adjectives 
and adverbs, and corresponds to the Lat. quam, how, 
Germ. wie, (so fr. Hom. down): ὡς ὡραῖοι, Ro. x. 15; 
add, Ro. xi. 33; ὡς ὁσίως, 1 Th. ii. 10, (Ps. xxii. (Lxxiii.) 
1); with a superlative, as much as can be: ὡς τάχιστα, 
as quickly as possible (very often in prof. auth.), Acts 
xvii. 15; ef. Viger. ed. Hermann, pp. 562, 850; Passow 
ii. 2 p. 2631» bot.; [L. and. 5. v. Ab. III.]. 

II. és as a particle of time; a. as, when, 
since; Lat. ut, cum, [W. § 41 Ὁ. 3,1; §53, 8]: with the 
indic., ds δὲ ἐπορεύοντο, Mt. xxviii. 8 (9); Mk. ix. 21 [Tr 
mre. ἐξ οὗ]; Lk. i. 23, 41, 44; ii. 15, 39; iv. 255 v. 4; 
vii. 12; xi. 1; xv. 25; xix. 5, 29; xxii. 66; xxiii. 26; 
xxiv. 32; Jn. ii. 9, 23; iv. 1, 40, [45 Tdf.]; vi. 12, 16; 
vii. 10; viii. 7; xi. 6, 20, 29, 32 sq.; xvili.6; [cf. xix. 
33 (see 1. 4 Ὁ. above)]; xx. 11; xxi.9; Actsi. 10; v. 
24; vii. 233 viii. 86; ix. 28; x. 7,17, 25; xiii. [18 WH 
txt. (see I. 7 above) ], 25, 29; xiv.5; xvi. 4,10, 15; xvii. 
135 xviii. 55 xix. 9, 215 xx. 14, 185 xxi. 1, 12) 27; xxii. 
11, 25; xxv. 14; xxvii. 1, 27; xxviii. 4, (Hom. II. 1, 
600; 2, 321; 3, 21; Hdt. 1, 65, 80; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 4. 
8. 20; oftenin the O. T. Apocr. esp. 1 Mace. ; ef. Wahl, 
Clavis apocr. V. T.,s. v. [V.e. p. 507 sq.). b. while, 
when, (Lat. dum, quando): Lk. xx.37; as long as, while, 
Jn. [ix. 4 Tr mrg. WH mrg. (ef. ἕως, 1. 2)]; xii. 35, [36], 
LT Tr WH [(cf. ἕως, u. s.)]; Lk. xii. 58; Gal. vi. 10 
[here A.V.as (so R.V. in Lk. 1. e.); T WH read the subj. 
(as we may have ete.); Meyer (on Jn. xii. 35; Gal. 1. 9.) 
everywhere denies the meaning while; but cf. L. and S. 
5. v. B. V. 2.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.]. ο. ὡς ἄν, as 
soon as: with the subj. pres. Ro. xv. 24 [A. V. here 
whensoever|; with the 2 aor. subj. having the force of 
the fut. perf., 1 Co. xi. 34 [R. V. whensoever]; Phil. ii. 
23. ([CE£. B. 232 (200); W. § 42, 5 ἃ. ; Soph. Lex. 8. v. 
6.] 

III. ὡς as a final particle (Lat. ut), in order that, 
in order to [ef. Gildersleeve in Am. Journ. of Philol. No. 
16, p. 419 sq. ]: foll. by an inf. [(cf. B. 244 (210); W. 318 
(299) ; Kriiger § 65, 3, 4), Lk. ix. 52 Lmrg. WH]; Acts 
xx. 24, (3 Mace. i. 2; 4 Mace. xiv. 1); ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, 
so to say (see εἶπον, 1 a.), Heb. vii. 9 [L mrg. εἶπεν]. 

IV. ὡς as a consecutive particle, introducing a 
consequence, so that: so (ace. to the less freq. usage) 
with the indic. (Hdt. 1, 163; 2, 135; W. 462 (431)), 
Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3, (Hebr. δ, Ps. xciv. (xev.) 
[but many interpp. question this sense with the indic. 


(the exx. fr. Hdt. are not parallel), and render ὡς in | 


Heb. Il. ce. as (so R. V.)]. 


682 


a 
aorEep 


doavva [see WH. Intr. § 408; but L'Tdc.; see Idy. 
Proleg. p. 107], (derived from Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 25 
δ Tyrwin, ie. ‘save, I pray’, Sept. σῶσον δή; [in 
form the word seems to be the Greek reproduction of 
an abbreviated pronunciation of the Hebr. (3-ywin) ; 
al. would make it Nipwin (‘save us’); cf. Hilgenfeld, 
Evang. sec. Hebraeos (ed. alt. 1884) p. 25 and p. 122; 
Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 173]), hosanna; be 
propitious: Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9sq.; Jn. xii. 13; with 
τῷ υἱῷ Δαυΐδ added, be propitious to the Messiah, Mt. 
xxi. 9, 15, [ef. ὡσαννὰ τῷ θεῷ Δαβίδ, ‘Teaching’ 10, 6 
(where see Harnack’s note) ].* 

ὡσ-αύτως, (ὡς and αὔτως), adv., [asa single word, Post- 
Homeric], in like manner, likewise: put after the verb, 
Mt. xx. 5; xxi. 30,36; put before the verb, Mk. xiv. 31; 
Lk. xiii. 3 (here L T Tr WH ὁμοίως), 5 (T Trtxt. WH); 
Ro. viii. 26; 1 Tim. v. 25; Tit. ii. 6; as often in Grk. 
writ. the verb must be supplied from the preceding con- 
text, Mt. xxv.17; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xx. 31; xxii. 20 [WH 
reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim. ii. 9 (sc. βούλομαι, 
ef. 8); iii. 8 (sc. δεῖ, cf. 7), 11; Tit. ii. 3 (se. πρέπει 
εἶναι)" 

ὡσ-εί, (ὡς and εἰ [ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 1107), adv., fr. Hom. 
down, prop. as i, i. 6. a. as it were (had been), as 
though, as, like as, like: Mt. iii. 16; ix. 36 [Treg. os]; 
Lk. iii. 22 (L T Tr WH os); Acts ii. 3; vi. 15; ix. 18 
[LT Tr WH os]; Ro. vi. 18 LT Tr WH; Heb. i. 12; 
also Rec. in Mk.i.10; Jn. i. 32; γίνεσθαι ὡσεῖ, Mt. xxviii. 
4 RG; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the 
pass.]; εἶναι ὡσεί, Mt. xxviii. 3 [LT Tr WH os], and 
Ree. in Heb. xi. 12 and Rev. i. 14; φαίνεσθαι ὡσεί τι, to 
appear like a thing, Lk. xxiv. 11. b. about, nearly: 
a. before numerals: Mt. xiv. 21; Lk. i. 56 [RG]; iii. 
23; ix. 14, 28; xxii. 41,59; xxiii. 44; Jn. vi 1O[RGL 
(al. ὡς)7 ; Acts ii. 41; iv.4[RG]; x.3 [in LT TrWH 
it is strengthened here by the addition of περί]; xix. 7; 
also, Rec. in Mk. vi. 44; R Gin Jn. iv. 6; xix. 14 [6 7], 
39; Acts y. 36; Lehm. in Jn. vi. 19, (Judg. iii. 29; Neh. 
vil. 66; Xen. Hell. 1, 2, 9; 2,4, 25). B. before a 
measure of space: ὡσεὶ λίθου βολήν, Lk. xxii. 41." 

Ὡσηέ [ἃ T Tr, but RL Ὥσ.; see WH. Intr. 8 408; 
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107], (ywin ‘deliverance’), 6, Hosea, a 
well-known Hebrew prophet, son of Beeri and contem- 
porary of Isaiah (Hos. i. 1 sq.): Ro. ix. 25.* 

ὥσ-περ, ([cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]; fr. ὡς and the enclit. 
particle πέρ, which, “in its usual way, augments and 
brings out the force of ὡς Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 768; 
see πέρ), adv., [fr. Hom. down], just as, even as ; a. 
in a protasis with a finite verb, and followed by οὕτως or 
οὕτως καί in the apodosis [cf. W. §§ 53, 5; 60, 5]: Mt. 
xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27,37 sq. 38 (LT Tr [ef. ὡς init.] 
WH és); Lk. xvii. 24; Jn. v. 21, 26; Ro. v.19, 21; vi. 
4,19; xi. 80; 1 Co. xi. 12; xv. 22; xvi.1; 2Co.i. 7 (here 


| LT Tr WH as); Gal. iv. 29; Eph. v. 24 [LT TrWH 
) 11); | os]; Jas. 11. 26; Somep... iva καί ([ef. W. § 43, 5 a.; 


B. 241 (208); ef. ἵνα, Π. 4 b.]), 2 Co. viii. 7; εὐλογίαν 
- +» ἑτοίμην εἶναι [ef. W. § 44, 1 6.1 οὕτως ὡς εὐλογίαν καὶ 


| μὴ ὥσπερ etc. ‘that your bounty might so be ready as a 


ὡσπερεί 


matter of bounty and not as if’ ete. 2 Co. ix. 5 [but only 
Ree. reads ὥσπερ, and even so the example does not 
strictly belong under this head]; the apodosis which 
should have been introduced by οὕτως is wanting [W. 
8 64,7b.; p. 569 (530) ; cf. B. § 151, 12 and 23 g.]: Ro. 
y. 12 (here what Paal subjoined in vs. 13 sq. to prove the 
truth of his statement πάντες ἥμαρτον, prevented him 
from adding the apodosis, which had it corresponded 
accurately to the terms of the protasis would have run 
as follows: οὕτω καὶ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ δικαιοσύνη εἰς τὸν 
κόσμον εἰσῆλθε καὶ διὰ τῆς δικαιοσύνης ἡ ζωή" καὶ οὕτως εἰς 
πάντας ἀνθρώπους ἡ ζωὴ διελεύσεται, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ πάντες δικαιω- 
θήσονται; this thought he unfolds in vs. 15 sqq- in an- 
other form); Mt. xxv. 14 (here the extended details of 
the parable caused the writer to forget the apodosis 
which he had in mind at the beginning; [cf. ὡς, I. 
4c.]). b. it stands in close relation to what pre- 
cedes: Mt. v. 48 (LT TrWH ὧς); vi. 2,5 (LTTr 
WH 4s), 7,16 (L T Tr WH ὡς); xx. 28; xxv. 32; Acts 
iii. 17; xi. 15; 1Co.viii.5; 1 ΤῊ. ν. 8; Heb. iv.10; vii. 
27; ix. 25; Rev. x. 3; ὥσπερ γέγραπται. 1 Co. x. 11, Τ' 
Tr WH; εἰμὶ ὥσπερ τις, to be of one’s sort or class (not 
quite identical in meaning with ὥς or ὡσεί τις, to be like 
one [cf. Bengel ad loc.]), Lk. xviii. 11 [but L Tr WH 
mrg. ὡς] ; γίνομαι, Acts ii. 2 (the gen. is apparently not 
to be explained by the omission of ἦχος, rat rather as 
gen. absol.: just as when a mighty wind blows, i. e. just 
as a sound is made when a mighty wind blows [R.V. as 
of the rushing of a mighty wind]); ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ ὁ 
ἐθνικός kth. let him be regarded by thee as belonging to 
the number of ete. Mt. xviii. 17.* 

ὡσ-περ-εἰί, (ὥσπερ and εἰ [ΤᾺ Proleg. p.110]), adv., 
fr. Aeschyl. down, as, as it were: 1 Co. xv. 8.* 

do-re, (fr. ὡς and the enclit. τέ [Tdf. Proleg. p. 1107), 
ἃ consecutive conjunction, ie. expressing conse- 
quence or result, fr. Hom. down, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 
2 p. 770 sqq-; W. § 41 Ὁ. 5 N. 1 p. 301 (282 sq.) ; [B. 
§ 139, 50]; 1. so that, [A. V. frequently insomuch 
that]; a. with an inf. (or ace. and inf.) [B. § 142, 
3; the neg. in this construction is μή, B. § 148, 6; W. 
480 (447)]: preceded by the demonstr. οὕτως, Acts xiv. 
1; τοσοῦτος, Mt. xv. 33 (so many loaves as to fill ete.) ; 
without a demonstr. preceding (where ὥστε defines 
more accurately the magnitude, extent, or quantity), 
Mt. viii. 24, 28; xii. 22; xiii. 2, 82, 54; xv. 31; xxvii. 
VAS ΚΟ 27. 10. 11:2) 12.5 11. 10; 905 ἔν. 1,32. 37: 1x- 
26; xv.5; Lk. ν- 7; χὶ 1: Acts i. 19; v.15; xv. 39; 
xvi. 26; xix. 10,12,16; Ro. vii. 6; xv.19; 1Co.i.7; v. 
the, srr OE Ὁ Of AIR GTR ώὼν 11.7.5 Ὁμδθ (ina abo Re Gia 
Th. i. 7sq.; 2 Th. i. 4; ii. 4; Heb. xiii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 21; 
it is used also of a designed result, so as to 1. 4. in 
order to, for to, Mt. x. 1; xxiv. 24 [their design]; xxvii. 
1; Lk. iv. 29 (Ree. εἰς τό); ix. 52 [Lmrg. WH ss, q. v. 
1Π.1; and L T Tr WH in Lk. xx. 20 [RGets τό], (1 
Mace. i. 49; iv. 2, 28; x. 3; 2 Mace.ii.6; Thue. 4, 23; 
Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,16; Joseph. antt. 13, 5,10; Eus. h.e. 3, 


683 


ὠφέλιμος 


28, 8 [[cf. Soph. Lex.s. ν. 57); ef. W. 818 (298); Β. 8189, 
50 Rem. b. so that, with the indicative [B. 244 
(210) ; cf. W. 301 (283); Meyer or Ellicott on Gal. 
as below]: Gal. ii. 13, and often in prof. auth. ; preceded 
by οὕτως, Jn. iii. 16. 2. so then, therefore, wherefore : 
with the indic. (cf. Passow 5.0. II. 1 b., vol. ii. p. 2639; 
[L. and S. s. v. B. I. 2; the neg. in this constr. is οὐ, 
B. § 148, 5]), Mt. xii. 12; xix. 6; xxiii. 31; Mk. ii. 28; 
x. 8; Ro. vii. 4, 12; xili.2; 1 Co. iii. 7; vii.38; xi. 27; 
xiv. 22; 2 Co.iv.12; v.16sq.; Gal. iii. 9, 24; iv. 7, 16; 
once with a hortatory subj.1 Co. v. 8 [here Lmrg. ind.}. 
before an imperative: 1 Co. iii. 21; [iv. 5]; x. 12; xi. 
39; xav..895 xv. δ8; Phil Η 125) av. 1; 1 Th iv. 185 
Jas. 1.19 [10 Ὁ Tr WH read ἔστε ; cf. p.174*top]; 1 Pet. 
ave d= 

ὠτάριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of οὖς, ὠτός ; cf. γυναικάριον 
[W. 24, 96 (91)]), ig. ὠτίον (4- v-), the ear: Mk. xiv. 
47 L TTr WH; Jn. xviii. 10 TTr WH. (Anthoi. 11, 
75, 2; Anaxandrides ap. Athen. 3, p. 95 c.) * 

ὠτίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of οὖς, ards, but without the 
dimin. force; “the speech of common life applied the 
diminutive form to most of the parts of the body, as ra 
ῥινία the nose, τὸ ὀμμάτιον, στηθίδιον. χελύνιον, σαρκίον 
the body ” Leb. ad Phryn. p. 211 sq. [ef. W. 25 (24)]), 
a later Greek word, the ear: Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. xiv. 47 
[R&-(2.@ tpov)}; Lk. xxii. 51; Jn. xviii. 10 [RGL 
(cf. ὠτάριον) |, 26. (Sept. for jis, Deut. xv. 17; 1S. ix. 
15; xx. 2,13; 2S.xxii. 45; Is. 1.4; Am. iii. 12.) * 

ὠφέλεια [WH -Ala (cf. I, ¢)], -as, ἡ, (ὠφελής), fr. [Soph. 
and] Hat. down, usefulness, advantage, profit: Ro. iii. 1; 
τῆς ὠφελείας χάριν (Polyb. 8, 82, 8 [yet in the sense of 
‘booty’]), Jude 16. (Job xxii. 8; Ps. xxix. (xxx.) 
10.)* 

aa -ῶ; fut. ὠφελήσω; 1 aor. ὠφέλησα ; Pass., pres. 
ὠφελοῦμαι; 1 aor. ὠφελήθην;: 1 fut. ὠφεληθήσομαι (Mt. 
xvi. 26 LT Tr WH); (ὄφελος) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. 
down; Sept. for Spin; to assist, to be useful or advan- 
tageous, to profit: absol. Ro. ii. 25; with acc. οὐδέν, to be 
of no use, to effect nothing, Mt. xxvii. 24; In. vi. 635 xii. 
19, [in these exx. (Jn. vi. 63 excepted) A. V. prevail]; 
τινά, to help or profit one, Heb. iv. 2; τινά τι to help, profit, 
one ina thing ({but the second acc. is a cognate ace. or 
the ace. of a neut. adj. or pron.; ef. W. 227 (213)] so fr. 
Hat. 8, 126 down) : οὐδέν τινα, 1 Co. xiv. 6; Gal. v. 23 
τί ὠφελήσει [or ὠφελεῖ (rdv)] ἄνθρωπον, ἐάν κτλ.; ((T 
WH follow with an inf.)], what will (or ‘ doth’) it profit 
aman if ete. [(or ‘to’ ete.)] ? Mk. viii. 36 ; pass. ὠφελοῦ- 
pat, to be helped or profited : Heb. xiii. 9; with ace. μηδέν, 
Mk. v. 26; οὐδέν, 1 Co. xiii. 3; with acc. of the interrog. 
τί, Mt. xvi. 26: Lk. ix. 25 [here WH mrg. gives the 
act.]; τὶ ἔκ τινος (gen. of pers.), to be profited by one 
in some particular [cf. Mey. on Mt. as below; ἐκ, II. 5], 
Mt. xv. 5; Mk. vii. 11.° 

ὠφέλιμος, -ov, (ὠφελέω), profitable: τινί (dat. of advan- 
tage), Tit. iii. 8; πρός τε (Plat. de rep. 10 p. 607 d. [W. 
213 (200)]), 1 Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim. iii. 16.* 


APPENDIX. 


PREFATORY REMARKS. 


HE lists of words herewith subjoined, as an aid to researches involving the language of the 
New Testament, require a few preliminary remarks by way of explanation. 


In the attempt to classify the vocabulary of the New Testament, words which oceur in 
secular authors down to and including Aristotle (who died B.c. 322) are regarded as belonging 
to the classical period of the language, and find no place in the lists. 

Words first met with between 8.0. 322 and 8.0. 150 are regarded as “Later Greek” and 
registered in the list which bears that heading; but between B.c. 280 and 8.0. 150 they have 
“Sept.” appended to them in case they also occur in that version. 

Words which first appear in the secular authors between B.c. 150 and B.c. 100 and are also 
found in the Septuagint are credited to “Biblical Greek” (list 1 p. 693), but with the name of 
the secular author added. 

Words which first appear between B.c. 100 and a.p. 1 are registered solely as “Later Greek.” 

Words which first occur between A.D. 1 and A.p. 50 are enrolled as “Later Greek,” but 
with the name of the author appended. 

Words which appear first in the secular authors of the last half of the first century of our 
era have an asterisk prefixed to them, and are enrolled both in the list of “Later Greek” 
and in the list of “ Biblical Greek.” 

A New Testament word credited to Biblical Greek, if not found in the Septuagint but 
occurring in the Apocryphal books of the Old Testament, is so designated by an appended 
« Apocr.”’} 

Whenever a word given in either the Biblical or the Later Greek list is also found in the 
Anthologies or the Inscriptions, that fact has been noted (as an intimation that such word 
may possibly be older than it appears to be); and if the word belong to “ Later Greek,” the 
name of the oldest determinate author in which it occurs is also given. 

The New Testament vocabulary has thus been classified according to hard and fast 
chronological lines. But to obviate in some measure the incorrect impression which the rigor 
of such a method might give, it will be noticed that a twofold recognition has been accorded 
to words belonging to the periods in which the secular usage and the sacred may be supposed to 
overlap: viz., for the period covered by the preparation of the Septuagint, for the fifty years 
which followed its completion, and for the last half of the first Christian century. Nevertheless, 
the uncertainty inseparable from the results no scholar will overlook. Indeed, the surprises 


1 Τὸ should be noted that in the following lists the term “Sept.” is used in its restricted sense to designate merely 
the canonical books of the Greek Old Testament ; but in the body of the lexicon “Sept.” often includes all the 
books of the Greek version, — as well the apocryphal as the canonical. In the lists of words peculiar to individual 
writers an appended “fr. Sept.” signifies that the word occurs only in a quotation from the Septuagint. 


688 


almost every one has experienced in investigating the age of some word in his vernacular which 
has dropped out of use for whole stretches of time and then reappeared, may admonish him of 
the precarious character of conclusions respecting the usage of an ancient language, of which 
only fragmentary relics survive, and those often but imperfectly examined. The rough and 
problematical results here given are not without interest; but they should not be taken for 
more than they are worth. 

The scheme of distribution adopted will be rendered more distinct by the subjoined 


CHRONOLOGICAL CONSPECTUS. 


Words in use before Β.0. 822. . . . . «+ + « + « - + are ranked as classical, and remain unregistered. 


Words first used between B.c. 322 and B.c. 280. . . - . . . are enrolled as Later Greek. 
receive a sy fee enrolment but double notation, viz. 
as Later Greek with Sept. usage noted. 
receive a single enrolment but double notation, viz. 
as Biblical Greek with secular usage noted. 
- are enrolled simply as Later Greek. 


Words first used between B.c. 280 and B.c. 150 . . . ae 
Ἢ are anole as Later Greek but with the name of the 


Words first used between B.c. 150 and B.c. 100 . . . 


Words first used between Β.0. 100 and a.p. 1... 

Words first used between a.p. 1 and av. 50 .. - author appended. 

receive a double enrolment, viz. both as Biblical and 
as Later Greek (with asterisk prefixed and name 
of secular author appended). 


Words first used between a.D. 50 and 2.p.100 . 


The selection of the distinctive New Testament significations has not been so simple a 
matter as might be anticipated : — 

It is obvious that the employment of a word in a figure of speech cannot be regarded as 

giving it a new and distinct signification. Accordingly, such examples as ἀνακλίνω in the 
' description of future blessedness (Mt. viii. 11), ἄνεμος to designate the ever-changing doctrinal 
currents (Eph. iv. 14), ἀπαρχή of first converts (Ro. xvi. 5), πόλις of the consummated kingdom 
ut God (Heb. xiii. 14 ete.), σταυρόω as applied to the σάρξ (Gal. v. 24 etc.), χείρ to denote God’s 
power (Lk. i. 66 etc.), and similar uses, are omitted. 

Again, the mere application of a word to spiritual or religious relations does not in general 
amount to a new signification. Accordingly, such terms as γινώσκειν θεόν, δοῦλος Χριστοῦ, ὑπηρέτης 
τοῦ λόγου, λύτρον and μαρτυρέω in the Christian reference, μένω in St. John’s phraseology, and 
the like, have been excluded. Yet this restriction has not been so rigorously enforced as to 
rule out such words as ἐκλέγομαι, καλέω, κηρύσσω, κρίνω, προφητεύω, and others, in what would be 
confessed on all hands to be characteristic or technical New Testament senses. 

In general, however, the list is a restricted rather than an inclusive one. 


An appended mark of interrogation indicates uncertainty owing to diversity of text. In 
the lists of words peculiar to individual New Testament writers — 

a. When the use of a word by an author (or book) is unquestioned in any single passage 
such word is credited to him without an interrogation-mark, even though its use be disputed by 
some edition of the text in every other passage of that author. 

ὁ. When a word is found in one author (or book) according to all editions, but though 
occurring in others is questioned there by some form of the text in every instance, it is credited 
to the first, and the name of the others is appended in parenthesis with a question-mark. 


689 


c. When a word is found in two authors (or books), but in one of them stands in a 
quotation from the Septuagint, it is credited to the one using it at first hand, and its use by 
the other is noted with “Sept.” or “fr. Sept.” appended. 

d. A word which is found in but a single author (or book) is credited to the same with a 
question-mark, even though its use be disputed by one or another form of the text in every 
instance of its occurrence. 

e. A word which is found in two or more authors (or books) yet is disputed by one or 
another form of the text in every instance, is excluded from the lists altogether. 


The monumental misjudgments committed by some who have made questions of authorship 
turn on vocabulary alone will deter students, it is to be hoped, from misusing the lists 
exhibiting the peculiarities of the several books. 


Explanations which apply only to particular lists are given at the beginning of those lists. 
Proper names of persons, countries, rivers, places, have been omitted. 

In drawing up the lists free use has been made of the collections to be found in Winer's 
Grammar, the various Introductions and Encyclopedias, the articles by Professor Potwin in 
the Bibliotheca Sacra for 1875, 1876, 1880, such works as those of Holtzmann on the Synoptical 
Gospels and the Pastoral Epistles, and especially the copious catalogues given by Zeller in his 
Theologische Jahrbiicher for 1849, pp. 445-525. 

In conclusion, a public expression of my thanks is due to W. W. Fenn, A. B., a student in 
the Theologica! department of the University, for very eflicient and painstaking assistance. 


9. H. T. 


CONTENTS. 


IL. Later, ὦ 6. post-ARISTOTELIAN, GREEK WORDS IN THE New TESTAMENT . 


IL Borrowrep Worps : ake 
1. Words borrowed oa the Hofer 
2. Words borrowed from the Latin . 
3. Words borrowed from other Foreign oie 


ΠΙ. Breticar, ὦ. 6. New TestaMENT, GREEK . 
1. Biblical Words Aided e ior 5 We 
2. Biblical Significations. . . . . ον φρο" 


LV. Worps precuriar ΤῸ InpivipvAL New TEsTAMENT WRITERS . 
1. To Matthew . 
2. To Mark 
3. To Luke Ξ : 
4. To all three Synontises 5 
5. To John 
6. To Paul ‘ 
- To the Longer Epistles a Philemon 
ὃ. To the Pastoral Epistles 
e. To both the Pastoral and the other Pauline Epistles 
7. To the Epistle to the Hebrews . 
8. To James . 
9 


SRO IP SGOT: τ. ς Ὁ ues el wie. 8 died paeeanich τἀ δ᾽ ἘΠ 
10: ‘Do cJnde:. pris. ate dcp cite ce nosio ee! wept et ole - 
11. To the Apocalypse . . citer te) tet Toles 


12. To the Apocalypse and the Fourth Gospel OG. os aia) eee 


¥.. ‘FORMS: OF *VEEBS! 3) «Ὁ ΡΞ νος deb ie) fo) (oie el Poulisl nelle oioutsinD 


ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS .΄ ὦ. © © w Te fe Ve 6) Δ᾽ 6) veurowie. ΓΟ σ᾽ 0 


125 


APPENDIX. 


L 


LATER, ts POST-ARISTOTELIAN, GREEK WORDS IN THE 


"ἀγαθοποιής Pim. 
ἀγνόημα 

ἀδηλότης 

ἀδιαλείπτως 

ἄθεσμος 

ἀθέτησις Cicero 
ἄθλησις Polyb., inser 
ἀκαιρέομαι 

ἀκατάλυτος 
ἀκατάπαυστος 

ἀκρασία 

"ἀκροατήριον Plot. 
ἀκυρόω 

ἀλάβαστρον (-rov Hit.) 
ἀλεκτοροφωνία Aesop 
᾿Αλεξανδρινός (or -8pivos) 
ἀλήθω Anthol. 
ἀλληγορέω Philo 
ἀμαράντινος Inscr.? 
ἀμετάθετος 

ἀμετανόητος 

"ἀναγεννάω Joseph. 
ἀνάδειξις 

ἀνάθεμα Anthol. 
ἀναθεωρέω 

ἀναντίρρητος 
ἀναντιρρήτως 
ἀναπολόγητος 
"ἀνατάσσομαι Plut. (Sept. 7) 
ἀνάχυσις 
"ἀνεπαίσχυντος Joseph. 
"᾿ἀνθυπατεύω Plut. 
ἀνθύπατος Inscr., Polyb. 
ἀντιδιατεθημι Philo 
"ἀντιλοιδορέω Plut. 
᾿Αντιοχεύς 

"ἄντλημα Plot. 
ἀντοφθαλμέω 


N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks. 


“ἀπείραστος Joseph. 

"ἀπεκδύομαι Joseph. ?¢ 

an(or ἀφ-)ελπίζω 

ἀπερισπάστως 

"ἀπόδεκτος Plut. 

ἀποθησαυρίζω 

ἀποκαραδοκία 

ἀπόκριμα Polyb., Inser. 

ἀπολείχω 

ἀποτομία 

ἀπολύτρωσις 

ἀποστασία Archim., Sept. 

ἀποφορτίζομαι Philo 

"ἀπόχρησις Plut. 

ἀπρόσιτος 

*Apawy Strab. 

ἀροτριάω 

ἁρπαγμός Plut. 

ἀρτέμων Vitruv. 

“ἀρχιερατικός Joseph., Inscr. 

᾿Ασιάρχης Strab., Inscr 

ἀσσάριον Anth., Dion. Hail., 
Inser. 

ἀστοχέω 


ἀφθαρσία Philo 


"ἄψινθος Aret. (τ-θιν Xer. 


on). 
βαθέως 
"Βαπτισμός Joseph. 
᾿Βαπτιστής Joseph. 
βιαστής Philo (βιατάς Pind.) 
*yayypava Plut. 
γάζα Theophr., Inser. 
γονυπετέω 
γραώδης Strab. 
"γυμνητεύω Plut. 
δεισιδαιμονία Polyb., inser. 
“δεσμοφύλαξ Joseph 
"δηνάριον Plut. 
διαγνωρίζω Philo 
διάταγμα Sap., inser. 
διαυγάζω 


| διαφημίζω 

διδακτικός Philo 
διερμηνεύω 

διετία Philo, Insecr. 
διθάλασσος 

δίψυχος Philo 
δουλαγωγέω 
δυσεντέριον(-τερία Hippocr.) 
δυσερμήνευτος 

ἐγκακέω OY €kkaxew 
ἐγκοπή OF ἐκκοπῇ 
ἐθνάρχης Philo 

ἐθνικός 

ἐκδαπανάω 

ἔκθαμβος 

ἐκθαυμάζξω Sir. 

ἐκνήφω Anthol 

ἔκπαλαι Philo 
ἐκπλήρωσις 

ἐκτένεια 

"ἐλαφρία Aret. 
ἐλεημοσύνη Sept. (Gan.) 
ἔλευσις 

"ἐμμαίνομαι Joseph. 
ἐμπλοκή 

*evddunows Joseph 
ἐνέργημα 

"ἐνορκίζω ὃ Joseph., ἔτιποτ. 
ἐνώπιον 

"ἐξαρτίζω Joseph., Laser. 
ἐξισχύω 

"ἐξορκιστής Joseph. 
"ἔξυπνος Joseph. 
"ἐπαγωνίζομαι Plut., Loser 
"ἐπαθροίζω Plut. 

ἐπάν (B.C. 265) 

ἐπαρχία 

ἐπαφρίζω 


"ἐπενδύω Joseph. (dive Hilt )| 
| καταντάω 


| "κατάρτισις Puts 


ἐπιβαρέω Dion. Hal, Inser 
ἐπιθανάτιος 
ἘἘπικούρειος 


NEW TESTAMENT. 


ἐπισκηνόω 
"ἐπισωρεύω Pum 
ἐπιταγή 
ἐπιχορηγέω 
ἑτερόγλωσσος 
εὐθυδρομέω 
εὐκαιρέω 
εὔκοπος 
"εὐνουχίζω Joseph 
"εὐποιΐα Joseph., Inser 
"εὐπρόσδεκτος Plut. 
"εὐψυχέω Joseph., Anthol, 
TInser. 
ζεστός 
ἡμιθανήῆς Anthor 
ἡμιώριον 
ἤρεμος 
"Ἡρωδιανοί Josenh 
θειότης Philo 
"θεόπνευστος Plut, Ora 
SibyL 
"θεότης Plut. 
| θηριομαχέω 
θρησκεία (-κίη Hdt-) 
| θριαμβεύω 


| θύϊνος 

| ϑυμομαχέω 

| ἱερουργέω Philo, Inser 
: ἱματισμός 
*’lovdaixéds Joseph. 
*"lovdaixas Joseph. 
ἰσότιμος Philo 
“καθεξῆς Plut., inse, 
| καθημερινός 

| κακουχέω 

| καταβαορέῳ 

| καταβαρύνωῳ 
KaTayoviCopes 
κατάκριμα 


΄ 


κατάστημα 


LATER GREEK. 


καταυγάζω ἢ Apo. Rhod., 
Anthol. 

“κατευλογέω ? Plut. 

κατηχέω 

κατοπτρίζομαι Philo 

καυματίζω 

καυστηριάζω ? 

κενοδοξία 

κενόδοξος 

κεντυρίων 

κερματιστής 

κολώνια (-νία, ete.) Inser. 

κορβᾶν (-Bavas) Joseph. 

κράβαττος or κράββατος 

κρυπτή 

κτήτωρ Diod., Inser., Anth. 

κτίσμα 

κωμύπολις 

"μαθητεύω Plut. 

μαθήτρια 

"μάκελλον Plut. 

μαργαρίτης 

"ματαιολογία Plut. 

μεθερμηνεύω 

"μεσουράνημα Plut. 

μεταμορφόω 

μετριοπαθέω Philo 

ἡμιασμός Plut. 

μίλιον 

μορφόω Anth. 

μόρφωσις 

νάρδος Anth. 

*vexpow Plut., Anth., Inser. 

Ἐνέκρωσις Aret. 

νεωτερικός 

νησίον 

"ξέστης Ὁ Joseph., Anthol. 

ξυράω (ξυρέω Ht.) 

ὁδηγός 

οἰκέτεια ὃ Strab., Inser. 


*oixcaxos Plut. 


1. Words borrowed from 
the Hebrew. 


N. B. Hebraisms in signifi- 
cation and construction 
(whether ‘proper’ or ‘improper ’) 
are excluded; so, too, are words | 
of Semitic origin which had pre- | 
viously found their way into 
Greek usage. 


᾿Αβαδδών 
*ABBa 
Axed Saud 


692 


"οἰκοδεσποτέω Plut. 

οἰκτίρμων ‘Theocr., Sept., 
Anthol. 

ὀνάριον 

παλιγγενεσία Philo 

πανδοχεῖον ? (-κεῖον Arstph.) 

πανδοχεύς ? (-κεύς Plato) 

παρατήρησις Epigr. 

παραχειμασία 

παρείσακτος 

παρεισέρχομαι 

παρεκτός 

πατροπαράδοτος Diod., 
Inser. , 

περιλάμπω 

περιοχή 

περιπείρω 

περπερεύομαι M. Antonin. 

πολλαπλασίων 

"πολυμερῶς Joseph. 

πολυτρόπως Philo 

πορισμός 

ποταπός (ποδαπός Aeschyl.) 

"πραιτώριον Joseph., Inser. 

πραῦπάθεια (-θία) ? Philo 

*zpoyveors Plut., Anthol. 

προελπίζω 

προευαγγελίζομαι Philo 

"προκαταγγέλλω Joseph. 

προκοπή 

*mpooairns Plut. 

προσανέχω ? 

πρόσκαιρος 

προσκληρόω Philo 

πρόσκλισις ? 

προσκοπή 

"προσρήγνυμι Joseph. 

πρυσφάτως 

προφητικός Philo 

ῥᾳδιούργημα 

ῥητῶς 


ῥοιζηδόν 

ῥομφαία Sept. 

"σαββατισμός Plut. 

*Saddovkaios Joseph. 

σαλπιστής Theophr., Inser. 
(-πίγκτης Thue.) 

σάπφειρος 

σαρόω 

σέβασμα 

σεβαστός Strab., Inser. 

σημειόω 

σηρικός 

"σικάριος Joseph. 

σίναπι 

"σιτιστός Joseph. 

σκοτία Apoll. Rhod., Sept., 
Anthol. 

σκύβαλον Anthol., Strab. 

σκωληκόβρωτος 

σπιλόω 

στασιαστής ? 

στρατολογέω 

στρατοπεδάρχης 

στρῆνος Lycoph., Sept., | 
Anthol. 

*ovyyevis? Plut., Inser. 

συγκατάθεσις 

"συγκαταψηφίζω Phat. 

συγκληρονόμος Philo 

συγχράομαι t | 

συζήτησις ? 

συμβασιλεύω 

συμβούλιον Inscr. 

συμμεμίζω 

σύμμορφος 

συμπνίγω 

συναθλέω 

συνέκδημος Palaeph. 

συνηλικιώτης Inser. 

συνκατανεύω ? 

"συνοδεύω Plut. 


ΤΙ. 


BORROWED WORDS. 


ἀλληλούϊα Sept. 
ἀμήν Sept. 

Baad Sept. 

Bap 

βάτος Apocr. 
Βεελζεβούλ (-Bov8) 
Βελίαρ (-λίαλ) 
Βοανεργές 
Ta83a0a 

γέεννα (γαιέν. Josh. 
Τολγοθᾶ 


Xviil. 16) 


Ἑβραϊκός 

Ἑβραῖος Sept. 

ἙἙβραϊς Apocr. 

“EBpaiori Apocr. 

ἐλωΐ (cf. nad) 

᾿Εμμανουήλ Sept. 

eppaba 

ζιζίνιον 

AL or HAL or ἡλεί (cE. EAwi) 
᾿Ιουδαΐζω Sept. 

᾿Ιουδαϊκός Apocr. and -κῶς 


BorrowED WorpDs 


συνυποκρίνομαι 
συσπαράσσω 
συστατικός (-κώτερον Aris- 
τοῦ.) 
"συστασιαστής ἵ Joseph. 
συστοιχέω 
"σωματικῶς Plut. 
σωφρονισμός Philo, Aesop 
"ταπεινοφροσύνη Joseph. 
taxivos Theocr., Sept. 
τάχιον 
τελώνιον 
τετράδιον Philo 
*rerpapxéw Joseph. 
τετράρχης 
τομώτερος 
τριετία 
τρίστεγος 
tpoxia Nicand., Sept. 
Anthol. 
"τυφωνικός Plut. 
viobecia Diod., Luser. 
ὑπερπλεονάζω 
ὑπογραμμός Philo 
υπολιμπάνω 
ὑποπόδιον Chares, Sept. 
“ὑποστολή Joseph. 
ὑποταγῇ 
ὑποτύπωσις Quint. 
φειδομένως Plut. 
φιλαδελφία (Alex. ?) Philo 
φιλήδονος Anth. 
φρυάσσω $ Callim., 
Anth. 
χάρισμα Philo 
χειρόγραφον Polyb., Inser. 
χόρτασμα Phylarch., Sept. 
ψώχω 
ὠτίον Sept., Anth. 
Torax 318 (165, 162%) 


Sept. 


Ἰουδαῖσμός Apocr. 

Kavavaios ? 

Kavavirns? 

κατήγωρ ? 

κορβᾶν or kopBavas 

kopos Sept. 

κοῦμι OF κοῦμ OT κούμ 

λαμά or λαμμᾶ or λεμά or 
λημά, ete. 

μαμωνᾶς 

μάννα Sept. 


Borrowep Worpbs. 


μαρὰν ἀθά (μαραναθά) 
Μεσσίας | 
Μολόχ Sept. 
(μωρέ 2) 

πάσχα Sept. 
mpoodgBarov? Sept. Apocr. | 
ῥαββί, -βεί 
ῥαββονί, -βουνί, -νεί Ϊ 
pakd or ῥακᾶ or ῥαχά 
oaBay bavi, -νεί 
σαβαώθ Sept. 
σαββατισμός 

σάββατον Sept. 
Σαδδουκαῖος 

σατᾶν or σατανᾶς Sept. 
σάτον Sept. 

σίκερα Sept. 

ταλιθᾶ 


693 


ὕσσωπος Sept. 
Φαρισαῖος 
Χερουβίμ, -βείν, Sept. 
ὡσαννά 

Toray 57. 


2. Words borrowed from 
the Latin. 


N. B. Proper names are ex- 
cluded, together with Latinisms 
which had already been adopted 
by profane authors. 


δηνάριον 

δίδωμι ἐργασίαν i. α- operam 
do 

ἔχω i. 4. aestimo 

κῆνσος 

κοδράντης 


κολωνία ete. 

κουστωδία 

λαμβάνω (q.v. I. 8 6.) 1. 4. 
capto 

τὸ ἱκανὸν λαμβάνειν i. q. salis 
accipere 

συμβούλιον λαμβάνειν i. q. 
consilium capere 

λεγεών (through Aram. ?) 

λέντιον 

λιβερτῖνος 

μάκελλον 

μεμβράνα 

μόδιος 

ξέστης 

πραιτώριον 

peda or -δη ἡ (cf. 3 below.) 


σικάριος 


ΠΙ. 


Βιβιισαι, Worps. 


δσιμικίνθιον 
σουδάριον (cf. TIL 1) 
σπεκουλάτωρ 
ταβέρναι (at) 
τίτλος 
φαινόλης paenula (cf. dat 
λόνης in IIT. 1) 

φόρον 
φραγέλλιον 
φραγελλόω 
χῶρος (?) 

Toray 80. 


8. Words borrowed from 
other Foreign Tongues. 

Baiov (Egyptian) 

peda or -δη (Gallic? cf. 2) 


BIBLICAL, ὁ ὁ. NEW TESTAMENT, GREEK. 


1. Biblical Words. 


᾿Αβαδδών Sept. 

᾿Αββᾶ 

ἄβυσσος, ἡ, Sept. (as adj. 
Aeschyl. et 5646.) 

dyaboepyéw (-θουργέω ?) 

ἀγαθοποιέω Sept. 

ἀγαθοποιΐα 

"ἀγαθοποιός Plut. 

ἀγαθωσύνη Sept. 

ἀγαλλίασις Sept. 

ἀγαλλιάω Sept. 

ἀγάπη Sept. 

ἀγενεαλόγητος 

ἁγιάζω Sept., Anthol. 

ἁγιασμός Sept. 

ἁγιότης Apocr. 

ἁγιωσύνη Sept. 

ἄγναφος 

ἁγνισμός Sept., Inser. 

ἁγνότης Inser. 

ἀδελφότης Apoer. 

ἀδιαφθορία Ὁ ] 

ἀθετέω Sept., Polyb., Inser. 

αἱματεκχυσία 

«ἴνεσις Sept. 

«ἰσχροκερδῶς 

αἰτίωμα Ὁ 


Ν. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks. 


αἰχμαλωσία Sept., Polyb. 

αἰχμαλωτεύω Sept. 

αἰχμαλωτίζω Sept., Inser. 

ἀκαθάρτης ? 

ἀκατάγνωστος Epigr., Inser., 
Apocer. 

ἀκατακάλυπτος Sept., Polyb. 

ἀκατάκριτος 

ἀκατάπαστος ? 

ἀκαταστασία Sept., Polyb. 

ἀκατάσχετος Sept. 

Axed Saud 

*axpoarnptov Plut. 

ἀκροβυστία Sept. 

ἀκρογωνιαῖος Sept. 

dda? 

ἀλάλητος Anthol. 

ἁλιεύω Sept. 

ἁλίσγημα 

ἀλληλούϊα Sept. 

ἀλλογενής Sept. 

ἀλλοτρι(ογεπίσκοπος 

ἀλόη Sept. ? [Apoer. 

dpapavros Orae. Sib., Inscr., 

ἀμέθυστος Sept., Anthol. 

ἀμήν Sevt. 

ἀμφιάζω Sept., Anthol. 

*avayevvaw Joseph. 

ἀναζάω Inscr. 


ἀναζώννυμι Sept. 

ἀναθεματίζω Sept., Inser. 

ἀνακαινόω 

ἀνακαίνωσις 

ἀνάπειρος ἢ Apocr. {(ς-πηρος, 
Plato 566.) 

ἀναστατόω Sept. Ὁ 

"ἀνατάσσομαι Plut. (Sept. ?) 

ἀνεκδιήγητος 

ἀνεκλάλητος 

ἀνέλεος ? 

ἀνεμίζω 

ἀνένδεκτος 

ἀνεξίκακος 

ἀνεξιχνίαστος Sept. 

"ἀνεπαίσχυντος Joseph. 

ἀνετάζω Sept.? 

ἀνεύθετος 

ἀνθρωπάρεσκος Sept. 

"ἀνθυπατεύω Plut. 

ἀνίλεως ? 

ἀνταπόδομα Sept. 

ἀνταποκρίνομαι Sept., Aesop 

Ἐἀντιλοιδορέω Plut. 

ἀντίλυτρον Sept., Orph. 

ἀντιμετρέω ? 

ἀντιμισθία 

ἀντιπαρέρχομαι Anthol. 
Apocr. 


ἀντίχριστος 
ἤἄντλημα Plut. 
ἀνυπόκριτος Apocr. 
ἀπασπάζομαι ? 
"ἀπείραστος Joseph. 
ἀπεκδέχομαι 
"ἀπεκδύομαι Joseph. ὃ 
ἀπέκδυσις 
ἀπελεγμός 
ἀπελπίζω Polyb., 
Anth. 
ἀπέναντι Sept., Polyb.,Inser. 
ἀπερίτμητος Sept. 
ἀποδεκατόω Sept. (-τεύω ?) 
"ἀπόδεκτος Plut. 
ἀποκάλυψις Sept. 
ἀποκαταλλάσσω 
ἀποκεφαλίζω Sept. (David 
over Goliath) 
ἀποκυλίω Sept. 
᾿Απολλύων 
ἀποσκίασμα 
ἀποσυνάγωγος 
ἀποφθέγγομαι Sept. 
"ἀπόχρησις Plut. 
ἀπρόσκοπος Apoer. 
ἀπροσωπολή(μγπτως 
ἀργυρόκοπος Sept., Inser. 


Sept., 


| ἀρκετός Chrysipp., Anthol. 


BrsticaL Worps. 


“Αρμαγεδών ete. 
*dpraypos Plut. 
ἄρραφος 


ἀρσενοκοίτης Anthol, Orac. 


Sibyl. 
ἀρτιγέννητος 
οἱ ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως Sept. 
ἀρχάγγελος 
“ἀρχιερατικός Joseph., Inscr. 
ἀρχιποίμην 
ἀρχισυνάγωγος ἴπβογ. 
ἀρχιτελώνης 
ἀρχιτρίκλινος 
ἀσαίνω Ἷ (α: v-) 
ἄσπιλος Anthol. 
ἀστατέω Anthol. 
ἀστήρικτος Anthol. 
ἀσφαλίζω Sept., Polyb. 
αὐθεντέω 
αὐτοκατάκριτος 
ἀφεδρών 
ἀφελότης 
apOopia? 
ἀφιλάγαθος 
ἀφιλάργυρος 
ἀφυπνόω Sept., Anthol. 
ἀφυστερέω Sept., Polyb. 
ἀχειροποίητος 
ἀχρειόω Sept., Polyb. 
"ἄψινθος Aret. (-Qcov from 
Xen. on) 
Baad Sept. 
βαθμός Sept. 
Baiov Sept.? Apocr. 
βάπτισμα 
"βαπτισμός Joseph. 
᾿βαπτιστής Joseph. 
Βάρ 
βασιλίσκος ὃ Sept. Polyb., 
Aesop, Inser. 
βάτος Apocr. 
βαττολογέω 
βδέλυγμα Sept. 
βδελυκτός Sept. 
εβηλόω Sept. 
Βεελζεβούλ (-βούβ) 
Βελίαρ (-AiaA) 
βήρυλλος Apocr., Anthol. 
βιβλαρίδιον 
βίωσις Apocr. 
βλητέος 
Boave (or) ργές 
βολίζω 
Boris Sept., Anthol. 
βραδυπλοέω 
βροχή Sept. 
βυρσεύς Inser. 
ΓΤαββαθᾶ 
“γάγγραινα Plat. 
γαζοφυλάκιον Sept. 


694 


γαμίζω 

γέεννα (Sept. Josh. xviii. 16) 

γεώργιον Sept. 

γνώστης Sept. 

γογγύζω Sept. 

γογγυσμός Sept. 

γογγυστής 

Γολγοθᾶ 

"γυμνητεύω Plut. 

γυμνότης 

δαιμονιώδης 

δειγματίζω 

δειλιάω Sept. 

δεκαδύο Sept. 

δεκαέξ Sept. 

δεκαοκτώ Sept. 

δεκαπέντε Sept., Polyb. 

δεκατέσσαρες Sept., Polyd. 

dexarow Sept. 

Sexros Sept. 

δεξιοβόλος (-λάβος) 

"δεσμοφύλαξ Joseph. 

δευτερόπρωτος ? 

*8nvaprov Plut. 

διαγογγύζω Sept. 

διαγρηγορέω 

διακαθαρίζω 

διακατελέγχομαι 

διαλιμπάνω Apocr. 

διανεύω Sept., Polyb. 

διαπαρατριβή ? 

διασκορπίζω Sept., Polyb. 

διασπορά Apocr. 

διαταγή Sept., Inscr. 

δίδραχμον Sept. 

δίδωμι ἐργασίαν 

διενθυμέομαι ὃ 

διερμηνεία Ὁ 

διερμηνευτής ? 

δικαιοκρισία Sept. ὃ 

δίλογος 

διοδεύω Sept., Polyb., Inser., 
Anthol. 

δισμυρίας ? 

διώκτης 

δογματίζω Sept., Anthol. 

δοκιμή 

δοκίμιον (-μεῖον, Plato) 

δολιόω Sept. 

δότης Sept. 

δυναμόω Sept. 

δυνατέω 

δυσβάστακτος Sept. 

δωδεκάφυλον Οτδο. Sib. 

Swpoopia? 

ἑβδομηκοντάκις Sept. 

ἑβδομηκονταπέντε Sept. 

“EBpaixos 

“EBpaios Sept. 

“EBpais Apocr. 


Ἑβραϊῖστί Apocr. 

ἐγκαίνια Sept. 

ἐγκαινίζω Sept. 

ἐγκαυχάομαι ἵ Sept., Aesop 

ἐγκομβόομαι 

ἑδραίωμα 

ἐθελοθρησκεία 

ἐθνικῶς 

εἰδωλεῖον Apoer. 

εἰδωλόθυτος Apocr. 

εἰδωλολατρεία 

εἰδωλολάτρης 

εἰρηνοποιέω Sept. 

ἐκγαμίζω Ὁ 

ἐκγαμίσκω ? 

ἐκδικέω Sept., Inser. 

ἐκδίκησις Sept., Polyb., In- 
ser. 

ἐκζητέω Sept. 

ἐκζήτησις ? 

ἐκθαμβέω Sept.? Apocr., 
Orph. 

ἐκμυκτηρίζω Sept. 

ἐκπειράζω Sept. 

ἐκπερισσῶς ? 

ἐκπορνεύω Sept. 

ἐκριζόω Sept., Orac. Sib., 
Inser. 

ἔκτρομος ? 

ἐλαιών Sept. 

*ehappia Aret. 

ἐλαχιστύτερος 

ἐλεγμός ? Sept. 

ἔλεγξις Sept. 

ἔλεος, τό, Sept., Polyb. 

ἐλλογάω (-γέω) 

ἐλωΐ Sept. (ef. nAd) 

"ἐμμαίνομαι Joseph. 

᾿Ἐμμανουήλ Sept. 

ἐμμέσῳ ? 

ἐμπαιγμονή ? 

ἐμπαιγμός Sept. 

ἐμπαίκτης Sept. 

ἐμπεριπατέω Sept. 

ἐναγκαλίζομαι Sept., Anthol. 

ἔναντι ἢ Sept. 

ἐνδιδύσκω Sept. 

"ἐνδύμησις Joseph. 

ἐνδοξάζω Sept. 

ἔνδυμα Sept. 

ἐνδυναμόω Sept. 

ἔνεδρον ? Sept. 

ἐνευλογέω ? Sept. 

ἐννενηκονταεννέα 

"ἐνορκίζω Ὁ Joseph., Inser. 

ἔνταλμα Sept. 

ἐνταφιάζω Sept., Anthol. 

ἐνταφιασμός 

ἔντρομος Sept., Anthol. 

ἐνωτίζομαι Sept. 


BrsiicaL Worps. 


ἐξαγοράζω Sept., Polyb. 
ἐξακολουθέω Sept., Polyb. 
ἐξάπινα Sept. 
ἐξαπορέω Sept., Polyb. 
"ἐξαρτίζω Joseph., Inser. 
ἐξαστράπτω Sept. 
ἐξέραμα 
ἐξηχέω Sept., Polyb. 
ἐξολοθρεύω Sept. 
ἐξομολογέω Sept. 
"ἐξορκιστής Joseph. 
ἐξουδενέω (-vdw) Sept. 
ἐξουθενέω (-vdw) Sept. 
ἐξυπνίζω Sept. 
"ἔξυπνος Joseph. 
ἐξώτερος Sept. 
"ἐπαγωνίζομαι Plut., Inser. 
"ἐπαθροίζω Plut. 
ἐπαναπαύω Sept. 
ἐπάρχειος Inser. 
ἐπαύριον Sept. 
*érevdtw Joseph. (-δύνω 
Hat.) 
ἐπιγαμβρεύω Sept. 
ἐπίγνωσις Sept., Polyb. 
ἐπιδιατάσσομαι 
ἐπιδιορθόω Inscr. 
ἐπικατάρατος Sept., Inser. 
᾿Ἐπικούρειος Anthol. 
ἐπιλείχω ? 
ἐπιλησμονή Apocr. 
ἐπιούσιος 
ἐπιπόθησις 
ἐπιπόθητος 
ἐπιποθία 
ἐπιπορεύομαι Sept., Polyb. 
ἐπιρράπτω 
ἐπισκοπή Sept. 
ἐπισυνάγω Sept. 
Aesop 
ἐπισυναγωγή Apocr. 
ἐπισυντρέχω 
ἐπισύστασις Sept. 
"ἐπισωρεύω Plut. 
ἐπιφαύσκω Sept. 
ἐπιφώσκω ἴῃβογ. 
ἐπιχορηγία 
ἐρήμωσις Sept. 
ἐρίφιον ? Apocr. 
ἑτεροδιδασκαλέω 
ἑτεροζυγέω 
εὐαγγελιστής 
εὐάρεστος Apocr. 
εὐδοκέω Sept., Polyb. 
εὐδοκία Sept., Inser. 
εὐκοπώτερον (-κοπος Polyb.) 
εὐλογητός Sept. 
εὐμετάδοτος 
πεὐνουχίζω Joseph. 
evrdpedpos? 


Polyb., 


BriBLIcAL WoRDs. 


"εὐποιΐα Joseph., Inser. 

“εὐπρόσδεκτος Plut. 

εὐπρόσεδρος 

εὐπροσωπέω 

εὐρακύλων 

εὐρο(οτ-υ-)κλύδων § 

"εὐψυχέω Joseph., Anthol., 
Inser. 

ἐφημερία Sept. 

ἐφφαθά 

ζευκτηρία 

ζιζάνιον 

ἠλί (εἴ. ἐλωΐζ) 

᾿ἯΗρωδιανοί Joseph. 

ἥττημα Sept. 

θεατρίζω 

θειώδης 

θέλησις Sept. 

θεοδίδακτος 

θεομάχος Alleg. Homer. 

*Oconvevotos Plut., Orac. 
Sibyl. 

"θεότης Plut. 

θορυβάζω ὃ 

θρῆσκος 

θυσιαστήριον Sept. 

ἱεράτευμα Sept. 

ἱερατεύω Sept., Inser. 

ixavow Sept. 

ἱλαρότης Sept. 

ἱλασμός Sept. 

ἱλαστήριος Sept. 

ἱματίζω 

᾿Ιουδαΐζω Sept. 

*Tovdaixos Apocr. 

*Jovdaixas Joseph. 

ἸἸουδαῖσμός Apocr. 

ἰσάγγελος 

καθαρίζω Sept. (Hippoer.? 

καθαρισμός Sept. 

"καθεξῆς Plut., Inser. 

καλοδιδάσκαλος 

καλοποιέω Sept. ? 

κάμιλος Ὁ 

Kavavaios? 

Kavavirns? 

καρδιογνώστης 

καταγγελεύς 

* κατάθεμα ὁ 

καταθεματίζω ἢ 

χατακαυχάομαι Sept. 

κατακληροδοτέω ὃ Sept. ὃ 

κατακληρονομέω ? Sept. 

κατακολουθέω Sept., Polyb. 

κατάκρισις 

καταλαλιά 

κατάλαλος 

κατάλειμμα Sept. 

καταλιθάζω 

κατάλυμα Sept., Polyb. 


695 


xaravdbepa? 

καταναθεματίζωϊ 

καταντάω Sept., Poly. 

κατάνυξις Sept. 

κατανύσσω Sept. 

καταπέτασμα Sept. 

*xaraptiots Plut. 

καταρτισμός 

κατασκήνωσις Sept., Polyb., 
Inser. 

κατασοφίζομαι Sept., inscr. 

καταστρηνιάω 

κατάσχεσις Sept. 

καταφρονητής Sept. 

κατείδωλος 

κατέναντι Sept., Inser. 

κατενώπιον Sept. 

κατεξουσιάζω 

"κατευλογέω ? Plut. 

κατεφίστημι 

κατήγωρ ἵ 

κατιόω Apocr. 

κατοικητήριον Sept. 

κατοικία Sept., Poiyb- 

καυσόω 

καύσων Sept. 

καύχησις Sept. 

κενοφωνία 

κεφαλιόω (-λαιόω ‘Mhne.) 

κῆνσος Inser. 

κλυδωνίζομαι Sept. 

κοδράντης 

κόκκινος Sept. 

κολαφίζω 

κολωνία ete. 

"κορβᾶν or kopBamis Joseph. 

κόρος Sept. 

κοσμοκράτωρ Orpt., inser. 

κοῦμι ete. 

κουστωδία 

κραταιόω Sept. 

κρυσταλλίζω 

κύλισμα Ὁ or κυλισμός ? 

κυριακός Inscr. 

κυριότης 

λαμά ete. 

λαξευτός Sept. 

λατομέω Sept. 

λεγιών ete. (cf. list LL. 2) 

λειτουργικός Sept. 

λέντιον 

λιβερτῖνος Inser. 

λιθοβολέω Sept. 

λογία (7) 

λογομαχέω 

λογομαχία 

λυτρωτής Sept. (Phile) 

λυχνία Sept., Inser. 

"μαθητεύω Plut. 

"μάκελλον Plut. 


μακρόθεν Sept., Poiyb. 
μακροθυμέω Sept. 
μακροθύμως 

μαμωνᾶς 

μάννα Sept. 

μαρὰν ἀθά (μαραναθά) 
"ματαιολογία Plut. 
ματαιότης Sept., Inser. 
ματαιόω Sept. 
μεγαλειότης Sept., Inscr. 
μεγαλωσύνη Sept. 
μεγιστάν Sept. 


μεθοδεία 
μελίσσιος ὃ (-αἴος, Nicand.) 
μεμβράνα 
μεριστής 


μεσίτης Sept., Polyb. 

μεσότοιχον (-xos, Eratos.) 

*yecoupavnpa Plut. 

Μεσσίας 

μετοικεσία Sept., Anthol. 

ἡμιασμός Plut. 

μισθαποδοσία 

μισθαποδότης 

μίσθιος Sept., Anthol. 

poy(y)Addos Sept. 

μόδιος 

μοιχαλίς Sept. 

μολυσμός Sept. 

μοσχοποιέω 

μυλικός Ὁ 

μύλινος Ὁ Inser. 

μύλος Sept., Anthol., Orac. 
Sibyl. 

(μωρέ ?) 

*vexpow Plut., Anthol., In- 
ser. 

*véxpwots Aret. 

veoputos Sept. (lit.; so Ar- 
stph. in Pollux 1, 231) 

νῖκος Sept., Anthol., Orph. 

νιπτήρ 

νομοδιδάσκαλος 

νοσσιάἿ Sept. (νεοσσιά Hat., 
al.) 

νυμφών Apocr. 

νυχθήμερον Orac. Sibyl. 

ξενοδοχέω Graec. Ven. (τκέω, 
Hat.) 

*£éarns? Joseph., Anthol. 

*oixcaxos Plut. 

ποἰκοδεσποτέω Plut. 

οἰκοδομή Sept. (Aristot. ?) 

oixoupyos ? 

ὀκταήμερος (Graec. Ven.) 

ὀλιγοπιστία ? 

ὀλιγόπιστος 

ὀλιγόψυχος Sept. 

ὀλίγως Anthol. 

ὀλοθρευτής 


BrisiicaL Worps 


@Ao(or -ε-) δρεύω Sept., An- 
thol. 

ὁλοκαύτωμα Sept. 

ὁλοκληρία Sept. 

ὁμείρομαι ὃ Sept. ? 

ἀπο ον 

ὀνειδισμός Sept. 

ὀνικός 

ὀπτάνω Sept. 

ὀπτασία Sept., Anthol. 

ὀρθοποδέω 

ὀρθοτομέω Sept. 

ὀρθρίζω Sept. 

ὀρθρινός ὃ Sept., Anthol. 

ὁρκωμοσία Sept. 

ὁροθεσία 

οὐά 

οὐαί Sept. 

ὀφειλή 

ὀφθαλμοδουλεία 

ὀχλοποιέω 

ὀψάριον 

παγιδεύω Sept. 

παιδιόθεν 

παμπληθεί 

παντοκράτωρ Sept., Anthol., 
Inser. 

παραβιάζομαι Sept., Polyb. 

παραβολεύομαι ? 

mapaBovAevouat? 

παραδιατριβή ? 

παραδειγματίζω Sept., Polyb. 

παραζηλόω Sept. 

παραλυτικός 

παμαπικραίνω Sept. 

παραπικρασμός Sept. 

παράπτωμα Sept., Polyb. 

mapadpovia 

παρεπίδημος Sept., Polyb. 

παροικία Sept. 

παρομοιάζω ? 

παροργισμός Sept. 

πάσχα Sept. 

πατριάρχης Sept. 

πειθός 

πειρασμός Sept. 

πεισμονή 

πελεκίζω Sept., Polyb. 

πεντεκαιδέκατος Sept. 

πεποίθησις Sept. 

περιαστράπτω Apocr. 

περίθεσις 

περικάθαρμα Sept. 

περικεφαλαία Sept., Polyb. 
Inser. 

περικρατής Apocr. 

περικρύπτω 

περιούσιος Sept. 

περισσεία Sept., Inser. 

περιτομή Sept. 


ΒΙΒΙΙΟΑΙ, Worps. 


περίψημα Sept., Inscr. 

πλημμύρα ete. Sept., Anthol. 

πληροφορία 

πνευματικῶς 

πολιτάρχης Inscr., Episr. 

"πολυμερῶς Joseph. 

πολύσπλαγχνος 

πορφυρόπωλις 

ποταμοφόρητος 

“πραιτώριον Joseph., Inser. 

πρεσβυτέριον Inser. 

προαιτιάομαι 

προαμαρτάνω 

προβλέπω Sept. 

"πρόγνωσις Plut., Acthol. 

προενάρχομαι 

προεπαγγέλλω 

"προκαταγγέλλω Joseph. 

πρόκριμα 

προκυρόω 

προμαρτύρομαι 

προμεριμνάω 

προορίζω 

προσάββατον ? Sept.?, Apo- 
erypha 

"προσαίτης Plut. 

(προσαχέω ?) 

προσδαπανάω Inser. 

προσεάω 

προσεγγίζω ἢ Sept., Polyb., 
Anthol. 

προσευχή Sept., Inser. 

προσήλυτος Sept. 

προσκαρτέρησις 

πρόσκομμα Sept. 

προσκυνητής Inser. 


προσοχθίζω Sept., Orac. 
Sibyl. 

προσπαίω ? (Soph. ?) 

πρόσπεινος 


"προσρήγνυμι Joseph. 

προσφάγιον Inser. 

πρύσχυσις 

προσωπολη(μ)πτέω 

προσωπολή(μ)γπτης 

προσωπολη(μ)ψία 

προφητεία Sept., Inser. 

mpwivds Sept. 

mpwroxabedpia 

πρωτοκλισία (ἡ) Apocr. 

πρωτοτόκια (τά) Sept. 

πρωτότοκος Sept., Anthol. 
(ττόκος, act., Hom. down) 

τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον ete. 

muppato? (-ρίζω Sept.) 

ῥαββί, -βεί 

ῥαββονί εἴο. 

ῥακά ete, 

ῥαντίζω Sept. 

ὅαντισμός Sept. 


696 


pédy or peda συναρμολογέω 

ῥυπαρεύομαι ἵ συνεγείρω Sept 

σαβαχϑανΐ, -vel συνεκλεκτός 

σαβαὼθ Sept. συνθρύπτω 

"σαββατισι:ὁς Plut. "συνοδεύω Plut. 

σάββατον ϑερΐ.» Aathol. συνομορέω 

σαγήνη Sept. σύσσημον (Menander in 


"Σαδδουκαῖος Joseph. Phryn.), Sept. 
oapdwos ? σύσσωμος 
σαρδιόνυξ ¢ Ἐσυστασιαστῆς Joseph. 
σατᾶν ΟΥ̓ σατανᾶς Sept. συσταυρόω 
σάτον Sept. σφυδρόν Ἱ 
σεληνιάζομαι "σωματικῶς Plut. 
σητόβρωτος ϑερί., Οτδο. | ταβέρναι (ai) 

Sibyl. Tada 
σθενόω ταπεινόφρων ἢ Sept. 


"σικάριος Joseph. "ταπεινοφροσύνη Joseph. 


σίκερα Sept. ταρταρόω 

σιμικίνθιον τεκνίον Anthol. 
σινιάζω τεκνογονέω Anthol. 
"σιτιστός Joseph. τελειωτής 

σιτομέτριον (-ττρον Plat.) τεσσαρακονταδύο Ἷ 
σκανδαλίζω τεσσαρακοντατέσσαρες Ἷ 
σκάνδαλον Sept. "τετραρχέω Joseph. 
σκηνοποιός τίτλος Inscr. 


τοπάζιον Sept. 
tporodopew? Sept. 
τροφοφορέω ὃ Sept. ? 


σκληροκαρδία Sept. 
σκληροτράχηλος Sept. 
σκοτίζω Sept., Polyb. 


σμαράγδινος τρυμαλιά Sept. (Sotad.) 

σμυρνίζω τυπικῶς ἵ 

σουδάριον (σωδάριον Her-) "τυφωνικός Plut. 
mippus) ὑπακοή Sept. 

σπεκουλάτωρ ὕπανδρος Sept. Polyb. 

σπλαγχνίζομαι Sept. ? ὑπάντησις Sept. 

στήκω Sept. ὑπερέκεινα 


ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ Sept. ἵ 
ὑπερεκπερισσῶς ? 
ὑπερεκτείνω Anthol.? 


στρατοπέδαρχος ? 
στυγνάζω Sept., Polyb. 
*ovyyevis? Plut., Inser. 


— εσ.ϑβ..» ς.;.ς.νΜ͵.΄΄΄΄“Ὑ΄΄ᾧὋὌὋΔἔοῦΠΕἔΕυιἔὍὋο6ἝΟἝ ὁ  “ Ἕ“Ἕ --—= a ts Ξ- -ξ- --’-΄- ποθεν πανοι 


συγκακοπαθέω ὑπερεκχύνω Sept. ? 
συγκακουχέω ὑπερεντυγχάνω 
"συγκαταψηφίζω ὑπερνικάω 
συγκοινωνός ὑπερπερισσεύω 
συζητητής ὑπερπερισσῶς 
συζωοποιέω ὑπερυψόω Sept. 
συκομορέα ὑπολήνιον Sept. 
συλαγωγέω [Inser.  ὑποπεάζω ἵ 
συλλαλέω Sept, Polyb.,| ὑποπλέω Anthol. 
συμμιμητής ᾿ὑποστολή Joseph. 
συμμορφίζω ? ὑποστρώννυμι Sept. 
συμμορφόω ἵ ὕσσωπος Sept. 
συμπρεσβύτερος ὑστέρημα Sept. 
συμφυλέτης ὑστέρησις 
συμφώνησις ὑψηλοφρονέω ? 
σύμψυχος ὕψωμα Sept., Orac. Sib. 
συναιχμάλωτος φάγος 


parlor φε-)λόνης (φαινόλης 
Rhinthon, 6. B.c. 300, in 
Pollux 7, 61) 

Φαρισαῖος 

"φειδομένως Plut. 


συνανάκειμαι Apocr. 

συναναμίγνυμι Sept.? 

ovvavaravopar? Sept. 

συναντιλαμβάνομαι 
Inser. 


Sept., 


BIBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS. 


φιλοπρωτεύω 
φόρον 
Φραγέλλιον 
φραγελλόω 
φρεναπατάω 
φρεναπάτης 
φυλακίζω Sept. 
φυσίωσις 
φωστήρ Sept., Anthol. 
φωτισμός Sept. 
χαλιναγωγέω 
χαλκηδών (Pliny) 
χαλκολίβανον 
χαριτόω Apocr. 
Χερουβίμ etc. Sept. 
χοϊκός 
χρεωφειλέτης 
Aesop 
χρηστεύομαι 
χρηστολογία 
χρυσοδακτύλιος 
χρυσόλιθος Sept. 
χρυσόπρασος 
χῶρος 
Ψευδάδελφος 
Ψψευδαπόστολος 
Ψψευδοδιδάσκαλος 
ψευδοπροφήτης ϑοτιῦ, 
Ψψευδόχριστος 
ψιθυρισμός Sent. 
ψιχίον 
ψωμίον Sept. 
ὡσαννά 


Τοται, 767, (76%, 89 7) 


etc. Sept. 


2. Biblical Significations. 


N. B. ‘* Sept.” or “ Apocr.” ig 
added to a word in case it occur 
in the same sense in the Septua 
gint version or (if not there} in 
the Apocryphal books of the O.T. 
Moreover, characteristic N. T-. 
significations which also occur 
in Philo and Josephus but inno 
other secular authors have been 
inciudea in the list, with the 
proper designations appended. 
See the Prefatory Remarks, p. 
688. 


ἡ ἄβυσσος (Sept.) 

ἀγάπη 2 

ἄγγελος 2 (Sept., Philo) 

ἀδελφή 2 

ἀδελφός 2 (Sept., Philc), 4, 
5 (Sept.) 

ἀδιάκριτος 2 

adporns 

ἀδυνατέω Ὁ. (Sept) 

αἵρεσις 5 

αἱρετικός 2 


aie wa 
BisLicaL SIGNIFICATIONS. 697 ΒΙΒΙΙΟΑΙ, SIGNIFICATIONS, 


αἰών 2 (Apocr.), 8 δικαιόω 2, 3, (Sept.) ἡμέρα 1b., 3 (Sept.) λειτουργέω 2c. (Apocr.) 
ἀλήθεια I. 1 ο. δικαίωσις ἡσυχάζω c. (Sept.) λειτουργία 3 Ὁ. 
ἀληθεύω Ὁ. δίλογος 2 θάνατος 2 (Sept., Philo) λιβανωτός 2 
ἁμαρτία 8, 4 διώκω 8 θέλω 4 (Sept.) λικμάω ὃ (Sept.) 
ἀμήτωρ 5 (Philo) δύξα 111. (Sept.) θεός 4 (Sept.) λύγος III. 
ἀνάθεμα 2 a., Ὁ. δοξάζω 4 (Sept.) θεωρέω 2 ο. sub fin. λύτρωσις fin. (Sept.) 
(ἀνασταυρόω) δύναμις Ὁ. θριαμβεύω 2 μαθητεύω 2 
ἀναφέρω 2 (Sept.) δῶμα 8 (Sept.) θροέω fin. (Sept.) μακροθυμέω 2 (Sept.) 
ἀνθομολογέομαι 8 fin. (Sept.) | δωρεά Ὁ. (Sept.) θυγάτηρ Ὁ. (Sept.) μακροθυμία 2 (Sept.) 
ἄνομος 1 ἐγγύς 1 Ὁ. θυμιατήριον 2 (Philo, Jo-| μάρτυς c. 
ἀνόμως ἐγείρω 2, 4 seph.) μεσιτεύω 2 (Philo) 
ἀνοχή ἔγερσις fin. ἴδιος 1 ἃ. (Apocr.) μεταίρω 2 
ἀντίληψις (Sept.) ἐθνικός 3 ἱερεύς Ὁ. μοιχαλίς b. (Sept.) 
ἀντιλογία 2 (Sept.) ἔθνος 4 (Sept.), 5 ἱλασμός 2 (Sept.) μοιχός fin. 
ἀντίτυπος 1, 2 εἰ I. 5 (Sept.), II. 9(Sept.) | ἱλαστήριον, τό, 1 (Sept-}, 2| μυστήριον 2, 3 (Sept.) 
ἀπάτωρ εἴδω 11. 3 (Sept.) ἰσχύω 2 ἃ. (Sept.) μωραίνω 2 (Sept.) 
ἀπαύγασμα (Apocr.) εἴδωλον 2 (Sept.) καθαρίζω 1 Ὁ. (Apocr.), 2) μωρός fin. (Sept.) 
ἁπλότης fin. (Joseph.) εἰμί II. 5 (Sept) (Sept.) νεκρός 2 
ἀποθνήσκω II. εἶπον 5 (Sept.) καθεύδω 2 Ὁ. (Sept.) νεώτερος d. 
ἀποκαλύπτω 2 c. (Sept.) εἰρήνη 3(Sept.), 4, 5,6 (Sept.) κακία 3 (Sept.) νόμος 2 (Apocr.), 3,4 (Sept.) 
ἀποκάλυψις 2 a. ἐκ 1. 7 (Sept.) κακόω 2 (Sept.) νύμφη 2 fin. (Sept.) 
ἀποκρίνω 2 (Sept.) ἔκβασις 2 (Apocr.) κακολογέω 2 (Sept.) οἰκοδομέω Ὁ. B. 
ἀπόλλυμι 1 ἃ. β. ἐκδοχή 4 καλέω 1 b. β. οἰκοδομή 1 
ἀπολύτρωσις 2 ἐκκλησία 2 (Sept.), 4 καμμύω (Sept.) ὁμολογέω 4 
ἀποστάσιον 1 (Sept.), 2 ἐκλέγομαι (Sept.) κάμπτω b. (Sept.) ὄνομα 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept), 4 
ἀποστολή 4 ἐκλεκτός (Sept.) κανών 1 ὀπίσω 2 (Sept.) 
ἀπόστολος 2, 3 ἐκλογή καρπός 2 c. (Sept.) οὐρανός 2 (Sept.) 
ἀποστοματίζω ἔκστασις 3 (Sept.) καταισχύνω 2 fin. (Sept.) ὀφειλέτης Ὁ. 
ἀποτάσσω 1 ἔλεος 2, 3 κατάπαυσις 2 (Sept.) ὀφείλημα Ὁ. 
ἀπώλεια 2 b. Ἑλληνίς 2 καταστολή 2 (Sept.) ὀφείλω c. 
ἀρεσκεία (Philo) ἐμβατεύω 2 (Apocr., Philo) | κατατομή ὀφθαλμός in phrases (Sept.) 
ἀρχή 5 ἐμβριμάομαι fin. κέρας Ὁ. (Sept.) ὀχύρωμα 2 (Sept.) 
ἀσύνετος fin. (Apoc.) ev |. 6 b., 8 b. (Sept.), 8 6. | κεφαλαιόω 2 ἡ ὀψία 
αὐγάζω 2 (Sept.) ἐναντίον 2 fin. (Sept.) κήρυγμα (Sept.) ὀψώνιον 2 
αὐτός II. 2 (Sept.) evepyew 3 κήρυξ 1 fin. παιδεία 2 Ὁ. (Sept.), ο. (Sept.) 
ἀφυπνόω Ὁ. ἐξανάστασις fin. κηρύσσω b. παιδεύω 2 b.(Sept.), ο. (Sept.) 
ἀφυστερέω 2 (Sept.) ἔξοδος fin. (Philo) κληρονομέω 2 fin. mais 2 fin. (Sept. ; i. ᾳ- 122) 
βαπτίζω II. ἐξομολογέω 2 (Sept.) kAnpovopiia 2 a., Ὁ. παράκλητος 3 (Philo) 
βαπτισμός (Joseph.) ἐξουσία 4 c. 88., ἃ. κληρονόμος 1 b., 2 (Sept.) | παραβολή 3, 4, (Sept.) 
βασιλεία 3 ἐπερωτάω 2 (Sept.) κληρόω 4 (Apocr.) παράδεισος 3, 4 
βλέπω 2 c. mid. ἐπερώτημα 3 κλῆσις 2 παρακοή 2 
yapew 2 ἐπιγαμβρεύω 2 (Sept.) κλητός a., Ὁ. παρασκευή 3 (Joseph.) 
γένεσις 3 ἐπικαλέω 2 (Sept.) κοιλία 5 (Sept.) παρθένος 2 
yevvdw 2 Ὁ. (Philo), ¢., d. | ἐπισκέπτομαι b. (Sept.) κοινός 2 (Apoer.) πάροικος 2 (Sept.) 
γλῶσσα 2 init. ἐπισκοπή b. (Sept.),e.(Sept.) | κοινόω 2 (Apocr.) παρρησία 3 (Philo) 
γράμμα 2 ο. (Philo, Joseph.) ἐπίσκοπος fin. κοινωνία 3 πατάσσω 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept.) 
γραμματεύς 2 (Sept.) ἐπιστροφή Apocr. κοπή 2 (Sept.) πειράζω 2 ἃ. (Sept.) 
δαίμων 2 (Joseph.) ἐπιτιμία Apocr. κοπιάω 2 (Sept.) πειρασμός b., c., (Sept) 
δέω 2 ο. ἐρεύγομαι 3 (Sept.) κοσμικός 2, 3 πεντηκοστή (Apocr.) 
ὁ διάβολος Sept. εὐαγγελίζω ITT. κόσμος 5 (Apocr.), 6, 7, 8| περιπατέω Ὁ. 
διαθήκη 2 (i. q. 13) εὐαγγέλιον 2 a., Ὁ. (Sept.) περιποίησις 2, 3 
διακονία 3, 4 εὐδοκέω 2 (Sept.) κρίνω 5 a. B., 6 (Sept.) περισσεία 4 
διάκονος 2 εὐλογέω 2, 3, 4, (Sept.) κρίσις 3 b., 4 (Sept.), 5(Sept.) | περίσσευμα 2 
διακρίνομαι 3 εὐλογία 3 Sept., 4, 5 (Sept.) κριτήριον 3 περισσεύω 2 
διανοίγω 2 εὔσπλαγχνος (Apocr.) κριτής 2 (Sept.) περιτομή a. γ.» Ὁ. 
διαπονοῦμαι 6. (Apocr.) ἔχω 1. 1 f. κτίσις 2 (Apocr.), 8 πιστεύω 1 Ὁ. 
διατίθεμαι διαθήκην οἷο. ζάω I. 2 κτίσμα πίστις 1 Ὁ. 

(Sept.) ζωή 2 a., b. κῶλον πνεῦμα 8 C., ἃ., 4 
δίδωμι IV. δ ζωογονέω 8 (Sept.) λαμβάνω I. 8 6. (cf. list IT. 2)} πνευματικός 3 


δικαιοσύνη 1 ο. ζωοποιέω 2 λάσκω 2 πορεία 


RIBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS. 698 INDIVIDUAL WRITEBS. 


πορεύω Ὁ. (Sept.) σάββατον 2 συνάγω ce. (Sept.) υἱοθεσία a., Ὁ. 

πορνεία b. (Sept.) σαρκικός 1 συναγωγή 2 (Joseph., Philo) | vids 2 (Sept) 

πορνεύω 3 (Sept.) σάρκινος 3 συναίρω 2 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 3 (Sept.) 
πόρνη 2 σάρξ 2 Ὁ. (Sept.), 3(Sept.),4 | συνδοξάζω 2 υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ 2, 8, (Sept.) 
ποτήριον Ὁ. σεβάζομαι 2 συνεγείρω fin. ὑποκριτής 8 (Sept.) 


σκανδαλίζω (Apocr.) 


= ; 
ὑποπνέω Ὁ. 

Cu , 
ὑποτύπωσις Ὁ. 


πρεσβύτερος 2 ἃ.» Ὁ.» 6. συνέδριον 2 Ὁ. 


προάγω 2 Ὁ. 
προσανέχω 2 
προσευχή 2 (Philo} 
προσήλυτος (Joseph.) 


σκάνδαλον b. (Sept.) 
oxnvornyia 2 (Sept.) 
σκότος Ὁ. 


σοφία b. 


συντελέω 5 (ϑερί.) 
σύντριμμα 2 (Sept.) 
σχίσμα Ὁ. 

σώζω b. (Sept.) 


φυλακτήριον 2 
φυλάσσω 2 Ὁ. (Sept.) 
φωτίζω 2 c. (Sept.) 


σῶμα 3 
σωτήρ (Sept) 
σωτηρία a. (Sept.), Ὁ.» 6. 


σταυρός 2 Ὁ. 
στέφανος Ὁ. α. 
στηρίζω Ὁ. 


προσκαλέω Ὁ. 
προστίθημι 2 sub fin. (Sept.) 
πρόσωπον 1 Ὁ.» c., 2, (Sept.) 


χαρίζομαι Ὁ. 
χάρις 2 sub fin., 3 8. 
χάρισμα (Philo) 


προφητεύω b., c., d., (Sept.) στοιχεῖον 3 σωτήριον, τό (Sept.) χαριτόω 2 
προφήτης II. 1 (Sept-) στόμα 2 (Sept.) τέκνον ο. (Sept.) χριστός 2 
πρωτότοκος Ὁ. στρατιά 8 (Sept.) τίς 1 6. y. (Sept.) χρίω a., Ὁ. 
ῥῆμα 2 (Sept.) συζητέω Ὁ. τραχηλίζω 2 Ψυχή 1 ο., 2 b. 
ῥίζα 2 (Sept.) συμβιβάζω 8 fin. τύπος 4 γ. ψωμίζω b. 


ΤΥ: 


WORDS PECULIAR TO INDIVIDUAL NEW TESTAMENT WRITERS. 


N.B. A word which occurs only in a quotation by the N. T. writer from the Septuagint isso marked. In the Apocalypse, which 
contains no express quotations, a word is so designated only when the context plainly indicates a (conscious or unconscious) 
reminiscence on the part of the writer. For other explanations see the Prefatory Remarks, p. 688 sq. 


1. To Matthew δέσμη ἐρίζω μεταίρω 
διακαθαρίζω (Lk. ?) €pigrov? μετοικεσία 
ἀγγεῖον διακωλύω ἑταῖρος μίλιον 
ἄγγος ? διαλλάσσω εὐδία Ὁ μισθόω 
ἄγκιστρον διασαφέω εὐνοέω μυλὼν ὕ 
ἀθῷος δίδραχμον εὐνουχίζω νόμισμα 
αἷμα ἀθῷον διέξοδος εὐρύχωρος νοσσίον (Lk. ?) 
αἷμα δίκαιον διετής ζιζάνιον οἰκέτεια ἵ 
αἱμορροξω διστάζω NAC οἰκιακός 
αἱρετίζω διυλίζω θαυμάσιος ὀλιγοπιστία Ὁ 
ἀκμήν διχάζω (θεέ voc.) ὄναρ (κατ᾽ ὄναρ 
ἀμφίβληστρον (ΜΕ. ἢ ἑβδομηκοντάκις θεριστής ὀνικός (Mk. ? Lk.?) 
ἀκριβόω ἔγερσις θρῆνος Ὁ οὐδαμῶς 
ἀναβιβάζω ἐγκρύπτω (Lk. ?) θυμόω βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν + 
ἀναίτιος ὁ ἐθνικός (3 In. ?) (ἰδέα, see εἰδέα) παγιδεύω 
ἄνηθον ἐνθυμέομαι (Acts 3) ἰῶτα παραθαλάσσιος 
ἀπάγχω εἰδέα (ἰδέα) καθά παρακούω (Mk. ?) 
ἀπονίπτω εἰρηνοποιός καθηγητής παρατιθέναι παραβολήν 
Bap ? ἐκλάμπω καταθεματίζω παρομοιάζω ? 
βαρύτιμος ὃ ᾿Ἐμμανουήλ fr. Sept. καταμανθάνω παροψίς 
βασανιστής ἐμπορία καταναθεματίζω Ἷ πεζός ὃ 
(βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν, see ἐμπρήθω καταποντίζω πικρῶς (Lk. ?) 
οὐρανός) ἐξορκίζω κῆτος fr. Sept. πλατύς 
βαττολογέω ἐξώτερος κουστωδία πληροῦν τὸ ῥηθέν 
βιαστής ἐπιγαμβρεύω kpudaios? πολυλογία 
βροχή ἐπικαθίζω κύμινον προβιβάζω (Acts?) 
δαίμων (ΜΚ. ὃ L&.? Rev.) | ἐπιορκέω κώνωψ [συμβ.}} προσπαίω 
δάνειον ἐπισπείρωδ (λαμβάνειν συμβούλιον, 566 προφθάνω 
ἐ δεῖνα ἐρεύγομαι μαλακία muppatw? 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


pax(or -χ-)ά (or paxa) 
ῥαπίζω 

σαγήνη 
σεληνιάζομιμ 
σιτιστός 

στατήρ 
συμβούλιον λαμβάνεω 
συναίρω (λόγον) 
συνάντησιν ? 
συναυξάνω 
συντάσσω 
τάλαντον 

ταφή 

τελευτή 

τοὔνομα ? 
τραπεζίτης 
τρύπημα ? 

τύφω 

duit? 

φράζω 

φυγή (ΜΕ. ἢ 
φυλακτήριον 
φυτεία 
Χαναναῖος 
χλαμύς 
ψευδομαρτυρία 
ψύχω 


Τοται, 187 (2 fr. Sept., 21 3) 


3. To Mark. 


ἀγρεύω 

ar αλος 
adextropopavie 
ἀλλαχοῦ ¢ 
ἀμφιβάλλωϊ 
ἄμφοδον 
ἀνακυλίω ? 
ἄναλος 

ἀναπηδάω ? 
ἀναστεναζω 
ἀπόδημος 
ἀποστεγάζω 
ἀτιμάω } ᾿ 
ἀτιμόω 

ἀφρίζω 
βοανε(οτ-η-"ργές 
γναφεύς 
δηλαυγῶς ? (οἴ. τηλαυγῶν) 
διαρπάζω (Mt. f) 
δισχίλιοι 

δύσις Ὁ 

δύσκολος 
ἔγγιστα ἕ 

cirev? 

ἐκθαμβέω 
ἐκθαυμάζω ὕ 
ἐκπερισσῶς ? 


ἔκφοβος (Heb. fr. Sept.) 


Aw 
ἐναγκαλίζομαι 
ΑΝ 

ἐνειλέω 
ἔννυχος 

ἘΣ 

ἐξάπινα 


€£ov8( οτ-θ-)ενόω ? 
ἐπιβάλλω (intr.) 


ἐπικεφάλαιον ὃ 
ἐπιρράπτω 
ἐπισυντρέχω 
ἐσχάτως (ἔχειν) 
ἐφφαθά 

θαμβέω (Acts?) 
θανάσιμος 
θυγάτριον 

τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν 
καταβαρύνω ? 
καταδιώκω 
κατακόπτω 
κατευλογέω ? 
κατοίκησις 
κεντυρίων 
κεφαλαιόω } 
κεφαλιόω 

κοῦμι etc. 

κυλίω 
κωμόπολις 
μεθόριον ? 
μηκύνω 
μογ(γ)ιλάλος 
μυρίζω 

νουνεχῶς 

ξέστης 

ὁδοποιέω ? 

(ὁδὸν ποιέω P) 
ὄμμα (Mt. ἢ 
ὅσπερ Ἷ 

οὐά 
ὀχετός 3 

ὄψιος (adj.)? 
παιδιόθεν 
πάμπολυς ὃ 
πανταχόθεν ? 
παρόμοιος 
πεῷ (Mt. ἢ 
περιτρέχω 
πρασιά 
προαύλιον 
προμεριμνάω 
προσάββατον Ἷ 
προσεγγίζω t 
προσκεφάλαιον 
προσορμίζω 
προσπορεύομαι 
πυγμή 


σκώληξ fr. Sept. 


; 
σμυρνίζω 

σπεκουλάτωρ 
στασιαστής ? 


στιβάς (στοιβας) ἕ 


699 


στίβω 
συλλυπέω 
συμβούλιον ποιεῖ» ? 
συμπόσιον 
συνθλίβω 
Συραφοινίκισσα » 
Συροφοινίκισσα } * 
Συροφοίνισσα 
σύσσημον 
συστασιαστής ? 
ταλιθᾶ 
τηλαυγῶς (οἴ. δηλαυγῶ:) 
τρίζω 
τρυμαλιά (Lk.?) 
ὑπερηφανία 
ὑπερπερισσῶς 
ὑπολήνιον 
χαλκίον 
Τοται, 102 (1 fr. Sept., 82 2) 


8. To Luke. 


N. B. Words found only in the 
Gospel are followed by a G.; 
those found only in the Acts, by 
an A.; those undesignated are 
common to beth. 


ἀγαθουργέω 4.? 
ἀγκάλη G. 

ἁγνισμός A. 
ἄγνωστος A. 
ἀγοραῖος A. 

aypa G. 
ἀγράμματος Ae 
ἀγραυλέω G. 
ἀγωνία G.? 

ἀηδία G.? 

᾿Αθηναῖος A. 
ἀθροίζω G.? 

aivos G. (Mt. fr. Sept.) 
αἰσθάνομαι G. 
αἴτιονί(τό) 

αἰτίωμα (-apa) a. 
αἰχμάλωτος 6. fr. Sept. 
ἀκατάκριτος A. 
ἀκρίβεια A 

ἀκριβής A. 
ἀκροατήριον A. 
ἀκωλύτως A. 
᾿Αλεξανδρεύς A 
᾿Αλεξανδρῖνος (or -οὖς) a. 
ἀλίσγημα A. 
ἀλλογενής 6. 
ἀλλόφυλος A. 
ἀμάρτυρος A. 
ἀμπελουργός 6. 
ἀμύνω A. 

audualor -ἐ-)ζ. G. 7 
ἀναβαθμός A. 
ἀναβάλλω 4- 


InpDIvipDUAL WRITERS 


ἀνάβλεψις ὁ. fr. Sept. 
ἀναβολή A. 

ἀναγνωρίζω a.? fr. Sept 
ἀναδείκνυμε 

ἀνάδειξις 6. 

ἀναδίδωμε A. 


ἀναζητέω 

ἀναθέματι ἀναθεματίζειν A. 
ἀνάθημα G.? 

ἀναίδεια 6. 


ἀναίρεσις A. 
ἀνακαθίζω a. (6. ἢ 
ἀνάκρισις A. 
ἀνάλη(μ)ψις 6. 
ἀναντίρρητος A. 
ἀναντιρρήτως A. 
ἀναπείθω A. 
ἀνάπειρος } Ξ 
ἀνάπηρος 
ἀναπτύσσω G-? 
ἀνασκευάζω A. 
ἀνασπάω 
ἀνατάσσομαι G. 
ἀνατρέφω A. (6-2) 
avahaiva 
ἀναφωνέω 6. 


| ἀνάψυξις A. 
| ἀνέκλειπτος Ge 


ἀνένδεκτος Ge 
ἀνετάζω A. 

ἀνεύθετος A. 
ἀνευρίσκω 
ἀνθομολογέομωε 8. 
ἀνθυπατείω A. ? 
ἀνθύπατος A. 
ἀνοικοδομέω A. fr. Sent. 
ἀντεῖπον 

ἀντιβάλλω G. 
ἀντικαλέω Ge 

ἀντικρύ ete. A- 
ἀντιπαρέρχομα. Gr 
ἀντιπέρα(-ν) | a 
ἀντίπερα Ϊ ἶ 
ἀντιπίπτω Ae 
ἀντοφθαλμέω ἃ. 
ἀνωτερικός A- 

(ἀξιύω w. inf.) 
ἀπαιτέω 6. 
ἀπαρτισμός G- 
ἀπασπάζομαι A.? 
ἄπειμι abeo A. 
ἀπελαύνω A. 
ἀπελεγμός A- 

ar(or αφ-)ελπίζω 6. 
ἀπερίτμητος A. fr. Sept. 
ἀπογραφή 
ἀποδεκατεύω G-? 
ἀποδέχομαι 
ἀποθλίβω α. 


ἀποκατάστασις A- 


[npIvipUAL WRITERS. 


ἀποκλείω G- 
ἀπολείχω G.? 
ἀπομάσσω G. 
ἀποπίπτω A. 
ἀποπλέω A. 
ἀποπλύνω G.? 
ἀποπνίγω G. (Mt. ?) 
ἀπορία G. 
ἀπορρίπτω A. 
ἀποσκευάζω A.? 
ἀποστοματίζω Ge 
ἀποτινάσσω 
ἀποφθέγγομαι A. 
ἀποφορτίζομαι As 
ἀποψύχω G. 
ἀράγε (dpa ye) A» 
ἀργυροκόπος As 
"Apa A. 
ἤΑρειος πάγος A. 
᾿Αρεοπαγίτης A- 
(ἀρήν) ἀρνός 8. 
ἄροτρον G. 
ἀρτέμων A. 
ἀρχιερατικός Ac 
ἀρχιτελώνης Ge 
ἄσημος A- 
᾿Ασιανός A. 
Ασιάρχης Ae 
ἀσιτία A. 

ἄσιτος As 

ἀσκέω A. 
ἀσμένως A. 
ἄσσον A.? 
ἀστοάπτω 6. 
ἀσυμῴωνος As 
ἀσώτως α. 
ἄτεκνος Ge 

ἄτερ 6. 

αὐγὴ A. 
Αὔγουστος Ge 
αὐστηρός α. 
αὐτόπτης α. 
αὐτόχειρ A. 
ἄφαντος G. 
ἀφελότης A. 
ἀφελπίζω (cf. ἀπελπίζω) ὁ. 
ἄφιξις A. 

ἄφνω A. 

ἀφρός ο. 
ἀφυπνόω 6. 
ἀχλύς Α. 

βαθέως G.? 
βαθύνω G. 
Bad(A)avtiov 6. 
βάπτω ο. (In.? Rev.) 
βαρύνω G.? 

τὰ βασίλεια 6. 
βάσις A. 

Βάτος (Heb. Bath) c. 
βελόνη c.f 


Bepouaios A. 

Bia A. 

βίαιος A. 

Biwous A. 

βολή G. 

βολίζω A. 
Bouvds α. fr. Sept. 
βραδυπλοέω A. 
βρύχω a. 
βρώσιμος G. 
βυρσεύς A. 
βωμός A. 

γάζα A. 
Ταλατικός As 
γελάω ὁ. 
γερουσία Ae 
γῆρας G. 
γλεῦκος As 
γνώστης A. 
δακτύλιος 6. 
δαν(ε)ιστής Ge 
δαπάνη 6. 
δεισιδαιμονία As 
δεισιδαίμων A. 
δεκαδύο a.? 
δεκαοκτώ 6. ὃ 
δεξιοβόλος ? ae 
δεξιολάβος | 
Δερβαῖος A. 
δεσμέω G.? 
δεσμοφύλαξ A. 
δεσμώτης A. 
δευτεραῖος A. 
δευτερύπρωτος G.? 
δημηγορέω A. 
δῆμος A. 
δημόσιος A. 
διαβάλλω G.- 
διαγγέλλω (Ro. fr. Sept.) 
διαγινώσκω A. 
διαγνωρίζω G.? 
διάγνωσις A. 
διαγογγύζω G. 
διαγρηγορέω 6. 
διαδέχομαι A. 
διάδοχος ΔΑ. 
διαδίδωμι (ὅπ. ὃ Rev. 7) 
διακαθαίρω G.? 
διακατελέγχομαι A- 
διακούω A, 
διαλαλέω G. 
διαλείπω 6. 
διάλεκτος A. 
διαλιμπάνω A.? 
διαλύω A. 
διαμάχομαι Ae 
διαμερισμός Ge 
διανέμω a. 
διανεύω G. 
διανόημα 6: 


700 


διανυκτερεύω G. 
διανύω A. 

διαπλέω A. 

διαπονέω A. 

διαπορέω 
διαπραγματεύομεμ G. 
διαπρίω A. 

διασείω α. 

διασπείρω A. 
διάστημα Ae 
διαταράσσω G. fr. Sept. 
διατελέω A. 

διατηρέω 

διαφεύγω A. 
διαφθορά a. 
διαφυλάσσω 6. fr. Sept. 
διαχειρίζω A. 
διαχλευάζω A. ? 
διαχωρίζω G. 
διενθυμέομαι A. ? 
διεξέρχομαι a? 
διερωτάω A. 

διετία A. 

διήγησις G. 
διθάλασσος Ae 
διΐστημι 
διϊσχυρίζομαι 

δικάζω G.? 

δικαστής A. (6. 2) 
διοδεύω 

διοπετής A. 

διόρθωμα A.? 
Διόσκουροι A. 

δούλη 

δοχή G. 

δραχμή α. 
δυσβάστακτος G. (Mt. ἢ 
δυσεντερία (-τέριον) ἃ. 
δωδεκάφυλον A. 

éa ο. (Mk. ?) 
ἑβδομήκοντα 
ἑβδομηκονταέξ A.? 
ἑβδομηκονταπέντε Α- ? 
‘EBpaikds G.? 
ἐγκάθετος G. 

ἔγκλημα A. 

éy(or ἐν-)κυος 6. 
ἐδαφίζω α. fr. Sept. 
ἔδαφος A. 

ἐθίζω G. 

εἰσκαλέομαι A. 
εἰσπηδάω A. 
εἰστρέχω A. 
ἑκατοντάρχης A. G.? (Mt. Ὁ 
ἐκβολή A. 

ἐκγαμίσκω G.? 
ἐκδιηγέομαι A. 
ἔκδοτος A. 

ἐκεῖσε A. 

ἔκθαμβος A. 


InpIvipuAL WRITERS. 


ἔκθετος A. 
ἐκκολυμβάω A. 
ἐκκομίζω G. 
ἐκκρέμαμαι (Or ἐκκρέμομαι) G. 
ἐκλαλέω A. 

ἐκλείπω G.? (Heb. fr. Sept.) 
ἐκμυκτηρίζω 6. 
ἐκπέμπω A. 

ἐκπηδάω A.? 

ἐκπλέω A. 

ἐκπληρόω A. 
ἐκπλήρωσις As 
ἐκσώζω "ΟὟ 
ἐκταράσσω As 
ἐκτελέω 6. 

ἐκτένεια Α. 
ἐκτενέστερον 9. ὃ 
ἐκτίθημι A. 

ἐκχωρέω G. 

ἐκψύχω A. 

ἐλαιών A. (6. 2) 
᾿Ελαμ(ε)έτης A 
ἔλευσις A. 

ἑλκόω G- 
“λληνιστής A. 
ἐμβάλλω 6. 
ἐμβιβάζω A. 
ἐμμαίνομαι A. 
ἐμπιπράω A.? 

ἐμίον ἐν-)πνέω A- 
ἐμφανής A. (Ro. fr. Sept.y 
ἔναντι ἵ 

ἐνδεής A. 

ἐνδέχεται (impers.) G. 
ἐνδιδύσκω 6. (Mk.?) 
ἐνέδρα A. 

ἐνεδρεύω A. (α. ἢ) 
ἔνεδρον A.? 

ἐνισχύω A. (6. ἢ) 
ἔνκυος cf. ἔγκυος 
ἐννέα 6. 

ἐν(νγεός Δ. 

ἐννεύω α. 

(τὰ) ἐνόντα 6. 
ἐνοχλέω Gat (Heb. fr. Sept.) 
ἐνπνέω οἷ. ἐμπνέω 
ἐντόπιος A. 

ἔντρομος A. (Heb. ?) 
ἐνύπνιον A. fr. Septe 
ἐνωτίζομαι A. 
ἐξαιτέω G- 
ἐξάλλομαι A. 
ἐξαστράπτω 6. 
ἔξειμι A. 

ἑξῆς 

ἐξολοθρεύω 
ἐξολεθρεύω } 
ἐξορκιστής A» 

ἐξοχή A+ 


| ἔξυπνος a. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἐξωθέω A. 
ἐπαθροίζω 6. 
ἐπαιτέω 6. 
ἐπακροάομαι A. 
ἐπάναγκες As 
ἐπανέρχομαι Ge 
ἐπάρχειος Ae? 
ἐπαρχ(ε)ία A- 
ἔπαυλις Α. fr. Sept. 
ἐπεγείρω A. 
ἐπειδήπερ 6- 
ἐπίον ἐφ-)εῖδον 
ἔπειμι (εἶμι) A. 
ἐπεισέρχομαι 9. ἕ 
ἐπέκεινα A. fr. Sept. 
τὸ ἐπιβάλλον 6. 
ἐπιβιβάζω 
ἐπιβοάω A.? 
ἐπιβουλή A. 
ἐπιγίνομαι A. 
ἐπιδημέω A. 
ἐπικέλλω Α. ὃ 
“Emixoup(e)vos A- 
ἐπικουρία A. 
ἐπικρίνω 6. 
ἐπιλείχω G.? 
ἐπιμέλεια A. 
ἐπιμελῶς G- 
ἐπινεύω Aw 
ἐπίνοια A- 
ἐπιπορεύομαι 6. [Sept.) 
ἐπιρρίπτω α. (1 Pet. fr. 
ἐπισιτισμός α. 
ἐπισκευάζω A.? 
ἐπιστάτης α. 

ἐπιστηρίζω A. 

ἐπιστροφή A. 

ἐπισφαλής Α. 

ἐπισχύω 6. 

ἐπιτοάυτό A.? 
ἐπιτροπεύω 6. ὃ 

ἐπιτροπή A. 

ἐπιφανής A.? fr. Sept. 
ἐπιφωνέω 

ἐπιχειρέω 

ἐπιχέω G- 

ἐπλήσθη χρόνος } πὶ 
ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέρω | 
ἐποκέλλω A. ὃ 

ἐρείδω A. 

ἔρημοι (ai) 6. 

ἔσθησις ὃ 

ἑσπέρα 

ἑσπερινός 6. ὃ 

εὖγε G.? 

eVepyeTéw A. 

εὐεργέτης 6. 

εὐθυδρομέω A. 

εὔθυμος A. 

εὐθύμως A.? 


701 


εὐλαβής 

εὐπορέω As 
εὐπορία As 
εὐρακύλων 
εὐροκλύδων | A 
εὐρυκλύδων 
εὐτόνως 

εὐφορέω α. 
εὐφροσύνη A. 
ἐφάλλομαι A. 
(ἐφεῖδον, cf. ἐπεῖδον) 
Ἐφέσιος A- 
ἐφημερία α. 
ζεῦγος 6. 
ζευκτηρία A- 
(ζήτημα A. 
ζωογονέω qa Tin. %) 
ἡγεμονεύω G 
ἡγεμονία Ge 
ἡμιθανής Ge 

ἦχος (τό) Ge 

ἠχώ Ge? 

θάμβος 

θάρσος A. 

θεά A. 

θεομαχέω αἵ 
θεομάχος A. 

θέρμη A 

θεωρία 6. 

θηρεύω 6. 
θορυβάζω G.? (cf. τυρβάζω) 
θραύω α. fr. Sept. 
θρόμβος ο. ὃ 
θυμιάω α. 
θυμομαχέω Α. 
ἴασις 

ἱδρώς 6. ὃ 
ἱερατεύω 6. 
ἱερόσυλος A. 

ἰκμάς G. 

ἱππεύς A. 
ἰσάγγελος 8. 

ἴσως α. 

Ἰταλικός As 
καθάπτω As 
καθεξῆς 
καθημερινός As 
καθίημι 

καθόλου A. 
καθοπλίζω Ge 
καθότι 

κἀκεῖθεν A. α. ? (Mk. ?) 
κάκωσις A. fr. Sept. 
καρδιογνώστης A. 
καρποφόρος As 
κατάβασις G. 
καταγγελεύς Ae 
καταδέω 6. 
καταδίκη A.? 
κατακλείω 


κατακληροδοτέω ? fr. 
κατακληρονομέω ? } 
κατακλίνω G 
κατακολουθέω 
κατακρημνίζω 6. 
καταλιθάζω ο. 
κατάλοιπος A. fr. Sept. 
καταμένω A. 

κατανεύω G- 
κατανύσσω A. 
καταπίπτω A. (G.?) 
καταπλέω 6. 
καταριθμέω A. 
κατασείω A. 
κατασοφίζομαι A. fr, Sept. 
καταστέλλω A- 
κατασύρω G. 
κατασφάζω 6. 
κατάσχεσις A- 
κατατρέχω A- 
καταφέρω A. 
καταφρονητής A. tr. Sept. 
καταψύχω G- 
κατείδωλος A. 
κατεφίστημε A- 
κατοικία A. 
κατόρθωμα A? 
κέραμος G- 

κεράτιον G- 

κηρίον G.? 

κίχρημι Ge 

κλάσις 

κλινάριον Ae? 

κλίνει ἡ ἡμέρα 6. 
κλινίδιον 6- 

κλισία G. 

κοιτών As 

κολυμβάω A. 

κολωνία (-νεια ete.) Ae 
κοπετός Δ. 

κοπρία 6. 

κόπριον Ge? 

κόραξ G- 

κόρος G. 

κουφίζω As 

κραιπάλη Ge 

κράτιστος 

κρυπτή (Or κρύπτη) 8. 
κτήτωρ A. 

λακτίζω A. 

λαμπρότης A- 
λαμπρῶς 6. 

λαξευτός 6. 

λάσκω Α- 

λεῖος 6. fr. Sept 
λεπίς A. 

λῆρος 6- 

λιβερτῖνος A- 

λικμάω α. (Mt. ?) 
λιμήν A. 


“ Sept. 


IxpIvIDUAL WRITERS 


λίψ a. 

λόγιος A. 
Λυκαονιστί A. 
λυμαίνομας Α. 
λυσιτελεῖ 6. 
λυτρωτής A. 
μαγεία (~via) « 
μαγεύω A. 
μαθήτρια A. 
μακροθύμως a. 
μανία A. 
μαντεύομω, ἃ. 
μαστίζω a. 
μαστός 6. (Rev ν᾽ 
μεγαλεῖος A. (6- ἢ 
μελίσσιος Gt 
μεριστής G. 
μεσημβρία A. 
μεστοὼ A. 
μεταβάλλῳ A. 
μετακαλέω A. 
μεταπέμπα Δ. 
μετεωρίζω G 
μετοικίζω Ae 
μετρίως A. 
μηδαμῶς A. 
μήπου A.? 
μίσθιος G. 
μίσθωμα As 
μνᾶ 6. 

μόγις 6. ἕ 
μοσχοποιέω As 
ναύκληρος A+ 
ναῦς A. 
νεανίας A. 


νεοσσός (νοσσόξ) & t Sept 


νεωκόρος As 
νησίον A. 
νοσσιά G.? 
VOTOOS, 8660 "arch 
ὀγδοήκοντα 8. 
ὁδεύω α. 
ὁδοιπορέω Ae 
ὀδυνάω 
ὀθόνη As 
οἴκημα Ae 
οἰκοδόμος A. ἵ 
οἰκονομέω 6. 
ὀκνέω A. 
ὁλοκληρία Ἀ- 
ὄμβρος 6. 
ὁμιλέω 
ὁμότεχνος Ap 
ὄνειδος 6. 
ὁπότε G. ἔ 
ὀπτάνω As 

Ι ὀπτός α. 

| ὀργυιά A- 

| ὀρ(ε)ινός G. 

| ὀρθρίζω ο. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS, 


ὄρθριος α. 
ὄρνιξ Get 
ὁροθεσία A. 
οὐρανόθεν A. 
οὐσία G. 
opus G- 
ὀχλέω A. (6. Ὁ 
ὀχλοποιέω A. 
παθητός A. 
παῖς. ἡ. 6. 
παμπληθεί α. 
πανδοχεῖον (ΟΥ̓ -κίον) G. 
πανδοχεύς (ΟΥ -κεύς) 6. 
πανοικί (ΟΥ̓ -κεί) A. 
πανταχῆ ΟΥ̓ πανταχῇ A.? 
πάντη (ΟΥ̓ -τῃ) A- 
παραβάλλω A. (Mk ?) 
παραβιάζομαι 
παράδοξος G. 
παραθεωρέω A. 
παραινέω A. 
παρακαθέζομαι G ? 
παρακαθίζω G.? 
παρακαλύπτω G- 
παραλέγομαι A. 
παράλιος 6. 
παρανομέω Ae 
π᾿ ραπλέω A. 
παράσημος As 
παρατείνω A- 
παρατήρησις 6. 
παρατυγχάνω 5- 
παραχειμασία A. 
παρεμβάλλω G.? 
παρενοχλέω A- 
παρθενία G. 
παροίχομαι A- 
παροτρύνω A. 
πατρῷος As 
πεδινός Ο. 
πεζεύω A. 
πειράω A. (Heb. ἢ 
πενιχρός G- 
πεντεκαιδέκατος G- 
περαιτέρω A.? 
περιάπτω G.? 
περιαστράπτοω " 
περικαθίζω G.? 

[ περικρατής A. 
περικρύπτω G. 
περικυκλόω 6. 
περιλάμπω 
περιμένω κ. 
πέριξ A. 
περιοικέω 9. 
περίοικος G. 
περιοχή A- 
περιρ(ργήγνυμε Α- 
περισπάω ἃ. 
περιτρέπω A+ 


70 


πήγανον G. 
πιέζω G. 
πιμπράω A.? 

πινακίδιον G. ? 

πινακίς G.? 

πλέω (Rev. ?) 
πλήμ(μ)γυρα (or -ὕρα) G- 
πλόος A. 

πνικτός A- 

πνοή A- 

πολίτης (Heb.?) 
πολλαπλασίων G. (Mt. Ὁ) 
πολιτάρχης A- 

Ποντικός A. [Sept.) 
πόρρω ο. (Mt. and Mk. fr. 
πορφυρόπωλις A- 
πραγματεύομαι G. 
πράκτωρ G. 

πρεσβεία α. 

πρηνής A- 

προβάλλω 
προκαταγγέλλω a. (2 Co.?) 
προκηρύσσω A. 
προμελετάω 6. 

προοράω A. 

προπορεύω 
προσαναβαίνω %- 
προσαναλίσκω G. ? 
προσανέχω A.? 
προσαπειλέω A. 
προσαχέω A.? 
προσδαπανάω G. 
προσδέομαι A. 

προσδοκία 

προσεάω A. 
προσεργάζομαι G. 
προσέχειν ἑαυτοῖς 
προσκληρόω \. 
προσκλίνω \.? 
προσλαλέω A. 
πρόσπεινος A. 
προσπήγνυμι A. 
προσποιέω G. (In. ¢ 3) 
προσρήγνυμι 6. (Mt. 7) 
προσφάτως \. 
προσψαύω ο. 
προσωπολή(μγπτης A- 
προτάσσω A.? 

προτείνω A. 

προτρέπω A. 

προὐπάρχω 

προφέρω α. 

προχειρίζω A. 
προχειροτονέω A. 

πρώ (OF -@-, OF -ᾧ") pa A. 
πρωτοστάτης A. 

πρώτως A.? 

πτοέω G. 

πτύσσω G. 

πύθων A. 


ς 
2 


πυρά A. 

ῥαβδοῦχος A. 
ῥᾳδιούργημα A. 
ῥᾳδιουργία A. 
ῥῆγμα. 

ῥήτωρ A. 
“Papaixos G. ἕ 
Povvupe A. 

σάλος G. 

σανίς A. 

σεβαστός A. 
Σιδώνιος 

σικάριος A. 

σίκερα G. 
σιμικίνθιον A. 
σινιάζω G. 
σιτευτός G. 

σιτίον \.? 
σιτομέτριον G- 
σκάπτω G. 

σκάφη A. 

σκευή Δ. 
σκηνοποιὸς A. 
σκιρτάω ἃ. 
σκληροτράχηλος A. 
σκῦλον (or σκύλον) 9. 
σκωληκύβρωτος A. 
σορός G. 
σπαργανόω G. 
σπερμολόγος A. 
στέμμα A. 
στερεόω A. 

στιγμή ο. 
στρατηγός 
στρατιά (cf. 3 Co. x. 4 Tdf.) 
στρατοπεδάρχης ? } ὰ 
στρατοπέδαρχος [ἡ 
στρατόπεδον α. 
Στωϊκός A. 
συγγένεια 
συγγενίς ο. 
συγκαλύπτω 6. 
συγκαταβαίνω A. 
συγκατατίθημι G. 
συγκαταψηφίζω A. 
συγκινέω A. 
συγκομίζω A. 
συγκύπτω Ο- 
συγκυρία 6. 
συγχέω A. 


σύγχυσις A. 
συ(ν)ζήτησις Ae? 


συκάμινος G- 
συκομορέα 
-μωρέα fs 
-μωραία 
συκοφαντέω G- 
συλλογίζομαι G. 
συμβάλλω 
συμπαραγίνομαι G.(2Tim.?) 


InpivipuaL Writers 


συμπάρειμι A. 
συμπεριλαμβάνω A. 
συμπίνω A. 

συμπίπτω G.? 
συμπληρόω 

συμφύω G. 

συμφωνία G. 
συμψηφίζω A. 
συναθροίζω A. (α. ἢ 
συνακολουθέω G. (Μκ.}} 
συναλίζω A. 
συναλλάσσω A.? 
συναρπάζω 

συνδρομή A- 

σύνειμι (εἰμί) κ-. (G.?) 
σύνειμι (εἶμι) G. 
συνελαύνω A.? 
συνεπιτίθημι κ. 
συνέπομαι A. 
συνεφίστημι A. 
συνθλάω G. (Mt. ?) 
συνθρύπτω A. 
συνκατανεύω A.? 
συνοδεύω A. 

συνοδία ὁ. 

συνομιλέω A. 
συνομορέω A. 
συντόμως A. (ΔΚ. ? ?) 
σύντροφος A. 
συντυγχάνω ὦ. 
συνωμοσία A. 

Σύρος G. (Mk. ?) 
Suptis (or σῦρτις) A. 
συσπαράσσω ο. (Mk. ὃ. 
συστρέφω A. (Mt. ?) 
συστροφή A- 

σφάγιον A. fr. Sept. 
σφοδρῶς A. 

σφυδρόν a.? 

σφυρόν A.? 

σχολή A. 

TAKTOS A. 

τανῦν (τὰ νῦν) A. 
τάραχος A. 

τάχιστα A. 

τεκμήριον A. 
τελεσφορέω G. 
τεσσαρακονταετῆς A. 
τεσσαρεσκαιδέκατος A- 
τετράδιον A. 
τετραπλόος 6. 
τετραρχέω ὦ. [καρδίᾳ 
τίθεσθαι εἰς τὰ ὦτα or ἐν 
τιμωρέω A. 

τοῖχος A. 

τραῦμα ὦ. 

τραυματίζω 

τραχύς 

τριετία A. 

τρίστεγος A. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


τρισχίλιοι A. 
Tporropopew ? 
tpoopopew ? 
τρυγών G. fr. Sept. 
τυρβάζω G. ? (cf. θορυβάζω) 
Τύριος A. 

τυφωνικός A. 

ὑγρός G. 

ὑδρωπικός G. 
ὑπερεῖδον A. 
ὑπερεκχύνω 6. 
ὑπερῷον A. 

ὑπηρετέω A. 
ὑποβάλλω A. 
ὑποζώννυμι A. 
ὑποκρίνομαι 6. 
ὑπολαμβάνω (3 Jn. ?) 
ὑπονοέω A. 

ὑποπλέω A. 

ὑποπνέω A. 
ὑποστρώννυμι G. 
ὑποτρέχω A. 
ὑποχωρέω G. 

ὑφαίνω G.? 

φαντασία A. 

φάραγξ G. fr. Sept. 
φάσις A. 

φάτνη G- 
φιλανθρώπως A. 

φίλη (ἡ) 6. 
φιλονεικία α- 
φιλόσοφος A. 
φιλοφρόνως A. 
φόβηθρον(ογ -rpov) 6. 
φόρτος κα. 

φρονίμως α. 

φρυάσσω A. fr. Sept. 
φρύγανον A. 

φυλακίζω A. 

φυλαξ a. 

Χαλδαῖος A. 

χάραξ G. 

χάσμα G. 

χειμάζω A. 
χειραγωγέω Ae 
χειραγωγός Ae 
χλευάζω A. 

χορός G. 

χόρτασμα A. 
χρεωφειλέτης (or χρεοφιλ.) 6. 
χρονοτριβέω A. 

χρώς A- 

χῶρος A. 

,, Ψώχω G. 

ὠνέομαι A. 

ὠόν G. 


} A. fr. Sept. 


Gospel 312 (11 fr. Sept., 52?) 
Acts 478 (15 fr. Sept., 49?) 
Both 61. 


108 


4. To all three Synoptists. 


ἀγανακτέω 

ἀγέλη 

ada? 

ἀλάβαστρον 
ἁλιεύς 

ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν 
ἀναβοάω ? 
ἀνακλίνω 

ἀνεκτός 

ἀπαίρω 

ἀποδημέω 
ἀποκεφαλίζω 
ἀποκυλίω 

οἱ ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως 
ἄσβεστος 

ἀσκός 

βαπτιστής 
Βεελζεβούλ (-Bovd) 
γαλήνη 

γαμίσκω ? 
διαβλέπω ? 
διαλογίζομαι (Jn. ?) 
δυσκόλως 
ἑκατονταπλασίων t 
ἐκδίδωμι 

ἐμπαίζω 

ἐμπτύω 

ἐπίβλημα 
ἐπιγραφή 
ἐπισυνάγω 
ἐρήμωσις 
εὐκοπώτερόν ἐσὶ- 
θέρος 

θηλάζω 

κακῶς ἔχειν 
κάμηλος 
καταγελάω 
κράσπεδον 
κρημνός 

κωφός 

λεγεών (-γιών) 
λέπρα 

λεπρός 

μακρός ? 

μόδιος 

νυμφών 
οἰκοδεσπότης 
ὀρχέομαι 
παραλυτικός ? 
πενθερά 
περίλυπος 

πήρα [Sept.) 
(πόρρω Mt. and Mk. fr. 
πίναξ 

προβαίνω 
πρωτοκαθεδρία 
πρωτοκλισία 


Τοται, 851 (26 fr. Sept., 101) | πύργος 


faspte? 
ῥήγνυμι (Gal. fr. Sept.) 
σίναπι 
σινδών 
σκύλλω ? 
σπλαγχνίζομαι 
τὰ σπόριμα 
στάχυς 
στέγη 
συμπνίγω 
συντηρέω 
τελώνης 
τελώνιον 
τίλλω 
τρίβος fr. Sept. 
vids Aavid 
ὑποκριτής 
φέγγος 
χοῖρος 
ψευδομαρτυρέω (Ro. ?) 
ψιχίον 
ΤΟΤΑΙ, 78 (1 ἔτ. Sept., 10 ?) 


5. To John. 


N. B. Words peculiar to the 
Gospel, or to one or another of 
the Epistles, are so marked. 


ἀγγελία 1 Ep. 

ἀγγέλλω G. ? 

ἁλιεύω G. 

ἀλλαχόθεν G- 

ἀλόη G. 

ἁμαρτίαν ἔχειν G., 1 Ep. 

ἀμὴν ἀμήν G. 

ἄν (ἐάν) G.? 1 bp? 

ἀναμάρτητος G. (vill. 7) 

ἀνάστασις | Cons he. 

| κρίσεως 

ἀνθρακιά G. 

ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἃ.» 1 Ep. 

ἀντίχριστος 1 Ep., 2 Ep. 

ἀντλέω G. 

ἄντλημα 6. 

ἀπεκρίθη καὶ εἶπε α. 

ἀπέρχομαι εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω G. 

ἀποσυνάγωγος 6. 

ἄρ(ρ)αφος ο. 

ἀρχιτρίκλινος 6. 

6 ἄρχωντοῦ κόσμου(τούτου)ο. 

αὐτόφωρος G. (viii. 4). 

βαΐον α. 

βασιλίσκος G.? 

βιβρώσκω G. 

Γαββαθᾶ α. 

γενετή Ο. 

γεννηθῆναι ἄνωθεν G., ἐκ (τοῦ) 
θεοῦ G. 1 Ep.y ἐκ (τοῦ) πνεύ- 
ματος 6. 


INDIVIDUAL WBITERS. 


γέρων G. 

γλωσσόκομον G. 

δακρύω G. 

δειλιάω 6. 

δήποτε G.? (ν. 4) 

διαζωννύω G. 

δίδυμος G. 

ἐγκαίνια G. 

εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου G., 1 EP. 

[ἐκ τῶν ἄνω } m 

| ἐκ τῶν κάτω 

ἐκνεύω } & 

ἐκνέω 

ἔλιγμα G.? 

ἐμπόριον 6. 

ἐμφυσάω G. 

ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐκ (ἀπὸ, παρὰ) 
τοῦ θεοῦ 6. 

ἐξυπνίζω α. 

ἐπάρατος G.? 

ἐπενδύτης 6. 

ἐπιδέχομαι 3 Ep. 

ἐπιχρίω 6. 

(ἡ) ἐσχάτη ἡμέρα 6. 

ζώννυμι 6. (Acts ?) 

ἧλος G. 

ἤπερ G.? 

θεοσεβής Ge 

θήκη α. 

θρέμμα α. 

ἱλασμός 1 Ep. 

καθαίρω G. (Heb. Ὁ) 

καταγράφω G.? (viii. 6). 

κέδρος G.? 

κειρία G. 

κέρμα G- 

κερματιστής 6- 

κηπουρός α. 

κίνησις G. (Vv. 8) 

κλῆμα G. 

κοίμησις G- 

κολυμβήθρα G. 

κομψότερον ἔχειν G- 

κρίθινος α. 

λέντιον G- 

λιθόστρωτος G 

λίτρα 6. 

λόγχη 8- 


μεσόω G. 


5 
εἰναι 


Μεσσίας 6- 
μετρητής 6. 
μίγμα α. 

μονή 6. 

νίκη 1 Ep. 

νιπτήρ G- 

νόσημα G.? (v. 4) 
νύσσω G. 

ὄζω G. 

ὀθόνιον G. (Lk. ?) 
ὁμοῦ G. (Lk.?) 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ὀνάριον G. 
οὐκοῦν G. 
ὀψάριον G. 
παιδάριον G. (Mt.?) 
mevOepos α. 
περιδέω G. [3 Ep. 
περιπατεῖν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 2 ur, 
περιπατεῖν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ (or 
ἐν τῷ σκότει) ἃ.» 1 1». 
περιπατεῖν ἐν τῷ φωτί 1 Er. 
ποιεῖν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἃ.» 1 Ἐν». 
πότερος ὦ. 
προβατική ἃ. 
προβάτιον α. Ὁ 
προσαιτέω α. (ΜΚ. ὃ Lk.?) 
προσκυνητής α- 
προσφάγιον G. 
πτερνα G. 
πτύσμα Ge 
pew G. 
Ῥωμαῖστι Ge 
σκέλος G. 
σκηνοπηγία G. 
Cuyxpdopus GP? 
συμμαθητῆς ἃ. 
συνεισέρχομαι 6. 
τεκνίον 6.» 1 Ep. (Mk.? Gal. ?) 
τεταρταῖος G. 
τετράμηνος G- 
τιθέναι ψυχὴν G., 1 Ep. 
τίτλος G. 
ὑδοία G. 
ὑπαντησις G. (Mt. ὃ) 
ὑφαντός G. 
φανός α. 
φιλοπρωτεύω 3 EP. 
φλυαρέω ὃ Ep. 
φραγέλλιον 6. 
χαμαί 6. 
χάρτης 2 Ep. 
χείμαρρος α. 
χολάω G. 
χρίσμα 1 ip, 
ψυχὴν τιθέναι, see τιθέναι yp. 
ψωμίον G. 
Gospel 114 (12 ὃ) 


Epp. 11 
Gospel and Epp. 8 (1 ?) 
Toran 133 (13 2) 


6. To Paul. 


a. To THE LONGER EristLes 
AND PHILEMON. 


N. B. Words peculiar to any 
single Epistle are so designated 
by the appended abbreviation. 


ἀβαρής 2 Co. 
ἀγαθωσύνη 
ἄναμος 1 Co. 


704 


ἀγανάκτησις 2 Co. 
ayevns 1 Co. 
ἁγιωσύνη 

ἁγνότης 2 Co. 
ἁγνῶς Phil. 
ἀγριέλαιος Ro. 
ἀγρυπνία 2 Co. 
ἀδάπανος 1 Co, 
ἀδήλως 1 Co. 
ἀδιαλείπτως 
ἁδροτής 2 Co. 
ada cf. papav ἀθά 
ἄθεος Eph. 
ἀθυμέω Col. 
αἴνιγμα 1 Co. 
αἴσθησις Vhil. 
αἰσχρολογία Col. 
αἰσχρότης Eph. 


αἰτιάομαι Ro. 


αἰχμαλωτεύω Eph. fr. Sept. 


(2 T.?) 
ἀκαιρέομαι Phil. 
ἀκατακάλυπτος 1 Co. 
ἄκων 1 Co. 
ἀλάλητος Ro. 
ἀληθεύω 
ἀλληγορέω Gal. 
ἄλυπος Phil. 
ἀμέμπτως 1 Th. 
ἀμετακίνητος 1 Ce. 
ἀμεταμέλητος 
ἀμετανόητος Ro. 
ἄμετρος 2 Co. 
ἀναθάλλω Phil. 
ἀνακαινόω 
ἀνακαλύπτω 2 Co. 
ἀνακεφαλαιόω 
ἀνακόπτω Gal.? 
ἀναλογία Ko. 
ἀναμένω 1 ΤῊ. 
ἀνανεόω Eph. 
ἀνάξιος 1 Co. 
ἀναξίως 1 Co. 
ἀναπολόγητος Ro. 
ἀνδρίζω 1 Co. 
ἀνεκδιήγητος 2 Co. 
ἀνελεήμων Ro. 
ἀνεξερεύ(ον -ραύτ)νητος Ra 
ἀνεξιχνίαστος 
ἀνεψιός Col. 
ἀνήκω 
ἄνθραξ Ro. fr. Sept. 
ἀνθρωπάρεσκος 
ἀνθρώπινον λέγω Ro. 
ἄνοιξις Eph. 
ἀνόμως Ro. 
ἀνοχή Ro. 
ἀνταναπληρόω Col. 
ἀνταπόδοσις Col. 


ἀντίληί(μ)ψις 1 Co. 


ἀντιμισθία 


ἀντιστρατεύομαι Ro, 


ἀπαλγέω Eph. 
ἀπαλλοτριόω 


ἀπαρασκεύαστος 2 Co. 


ἀπίον ἀφ-)εῖδον Phil 


ἄπειμι absum 
ἀπεῖπον 2 Co. 
ἀπεκδύομαι Col. 
ἀπέκδυσις Col. 
ἀπελεύθερος 1 Co. 


ἀπερισπάστως 1 Co. 


ἁπλότης 
ἀπόδειξις 1 Co. 
ἀποκαραδοκία 
ἀποκαταλλάσσω 
ἀπόκριμα 2 Co. 
ἀπορφανίζω 1 Th. 
ἀποστυγέω Ro. 
ἀποτίνω Philem. 
ἀποτολμάω Ro. 
ἀποτομία Ro. 
ἀπουσία Phil. 
ἀπόχρησις Col. 
ἄρα οὖν 

apa Ro. 
ἀρραβών 
ἀρεσκεία Col. 
ἁρμόζω 2 Co. 
ἁρπαγμός Phil. 
ἄρρητος 2 Co. 
ἀρχιτέκτων 1 Co. 
ἀσαίνω 1 ΤῊ. ὃ 
ἀσθένημα Ba 
ἄσοφος Eph. 
ἀσπίς Ko. 
ἀστατέω 1 Co. 
ἀσύνθετος Ro. 
ἀσχημονέω 1 Co, 
ἀσχήμων 1 Co. 
ἀτακτέω 2 Th. 
ἄτακτος 1 Th. 
ἀτάκτως 2 Th, 
ἄτομος 1 Co. 
αὐγάζω 2 Co.? 
αὐθαίρετος 2 Co. 
αὐλός 1 Co. 
αὔξησις 
αὐτάρκης Phil. 
ἀφειδία Col. 
ἁφή 

ἀφικνέομαι Ro, 
᾿Αχαϊκός 1 Co. 


ἀχρειόω Ro. fr. Sept. 


ἄχρηστος Philem. 
ἄψυχος 1 Co. 
Badd Ro. fr. Sept. 
βασκαίνω Gal. 


Βελίαλ or Βελίαρ 2 Co. 


βέλος Eph. 


InpDIvipUAL WRITERS 


βραβεῖον 

βραβεύω Col. 

βρόχος 1 Co. 

βυθός 2 Co. 

Ταλάτης Gal. 
γεώργιον 1 Uo. 
γνησίως Phil. 
γραπτός Ro. 
γυμνητεύω 1 Co. 
Saxvw Gal. 
Δαμασκηνός 2 Co. 
δειγματίζω Col. (Mt. ty 
διαίρεσις 1 Co. 
διαστολή 

διδακτός 1 Co. (Jn. fr. ὅδτι,, 
διερμηνεία 1 Co. ὃ 
διερμηνευτής 1 Co. 
δικαιοκρισία Ro. 
δικαίωσις Ro. 

διόπερ 1 Co. 
διχοστασία 

δίψος 1 Co. 
δογματίζω Col. 
δοκιμή 

δόλιος 2 Co. 

δολιόω Ko. fr. Sept. 
δολόω 2 Co. 

δότης 2 Co. 
δουλαγωγέω 1 Co, 
δράσσομαι 1 Co. 
δυναμόω Col. (Eph.? Heb. ἢ 
δυνατέω 2 Co. (Ro. ?) 
δυσφημέω 1 Co.? 
δυσφημία 2 Co. 
Swpodopia Ko. ἡ 
ἐγγράφω 2 Co. (Lk. ἢ 
ἐγγύτερον Ro. 
ἐγκαυχάομαι 2 Th. ὃ 
ἐγκεντρίζω Ro. 
ἐγκοπή (Or ekk-, OF ἐνκ-} 1 Co. 
ἐγκρατεύομαι 1 Co 
ἐγκρίνω 2 Co. 

ἑδραῖος 

ἐθελοθρησκεία Col, 
ἐθνάρχης 2 Co. 
ἐθνικῶς Gal. 
εἰδωλεῖον 1 Co. 

εἰκῆ. -κἢ (Mt. ἢ 

εἴκω Gal. 

εἰλικοίνεια (or -via) 
εἰρηνοποιέω Col. 
εἰσδέχομαι 2 Co. 
ἑκατονταέτης Ro. 
ἐκδαπανάω 2 Co. 
ἐκδημέω 2 Co. 

ἔκδικος 

ἐκδιώκω 1 Th. (Lk. ἢ 
ἐκκαίω Ro. 

ἐκκλάω Ro. 


InpivipuaL WRITERS. 


ἐκκοπή cf. ἐγκοπῇ 

ἐκνήφω 1 Co. 

ἑκούσιος Philem. 

ἐκπετάννυμι Ro. fr. Sept. 

ἐκπτύω Gal. 

ἐκτρέφω Eph. 

ἔκτρωμα 1 Co. 

ἐκφοβέω 2 Co. 

ἑκών 

ἐλαττονέω 2 Co. fr. Sept. 

ἐλαφρία 2 Co. 

ἐλαχιστότερος Eph. 

ἐλλογάω or -γέω 

ἐμβατεύω Col. 

ἐμπεριπατέω 2 Co. fr. Sept. 

ἐνάρχομαι 

ἔνδειγμα 2 Th. 

ἔνδειξις 

ἐνδημέω 2 Co. 

ἐνδοξάζω 2 Th. 

ἐνέργεια 

ἐνέργημα 1 Co. 

ἐνκοπή οἷ. ἐγκοπή 

ἐνορκίζω 1 Th.? 

ἑνότης Eph. 

ἐντροπή 1 Co. 

ἐντυπόω 2 Co. 

ἐξαγοράζω 

ἐξαίρω 1 Co.? and fr. Sept. 

ἐξανάστασις Phil. 

ἐξαπατάω (1 Tim. ?) 

ἐξαπορέω 2 Co. 

ἐξεγείρω 

ἐξηχέω 1 ΤῊ. 

ἐξισχύω Eph. 

ἑορτάζω 1 Co. 

ἐπακούω 2 Co. fr. Sept. 

ἐπαναμιμνήσκω Ro. 

ἐπείπερ Ko. ? 

ἐπεκτείνω Phil. 

ἐπενδύω 2 Co. 

em Bapew 

ἐπιδιατασσομαι Gal. 

ἐπιδύω Eph. 

ἐπιθανάτιος 1 Co. 

ἐπιθυμητής 1 Co. 

ἐπικαλύπτω Ro. fr. Sept. 

émtxatapatos Gal. fr. Sept. 
(Jn. Ὁ) 

ἐπιπόθησις 2 Co. 

ἐπιπόθητος Phil. 

ἐπιποθία Ro. 

ἐπισκηνόω 2 Co. 

ἐπισπάω 1 Co. 

ἐπιτιμία 2 Co. 

ἐπιφαύσκω Eph. 

ἐπιχορηγία 

ἐπονομάζω Ro. 

ἑπτακισχίλιοι Ro. 

ἐρεθίζω 2 Co. (Col.?) 


108 


ἑρμηνεία 1 Co. 

ἑρμηνευτής 1 Co.? 

τί ἐροῦμεν Ro. 

ἑτερόγλωσσος 1 Co. 

érepotuyew 2 Co. 

ἑτέρως Phil. 

ἑτοιμασία Eph. 

εὔνοια Eph. (1 Co. 4) 

εὐπάρεδρος μ Co. 

εὐπρόσεδρος 

εὐπροσωπέω Gal. 

εὔσημος 1 Co. 

εὐσχημόνως 

εὐσχημοσύνη 1 Co 

εὐτραπελία Eph. 

εὐφημία 2 Co. 

εὔφημος Phil. 

εὐχάριστος Col. 

εὐψυχέω Phil. 

εὐωδία 

ἐφευρετής Ro. 

ἐφικνέομαι 2 Co. 

ὁ ἠγαπημένος (of Christ) 
Eph. 

ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε Ra. 

ἥδιστα 2 Co. 

ἦθος 1 Co. fr. Menander 

ἡνίκα 2 Co. 

ἤτοι Ro. 

ἥττημα 

ἥττων OF ἥσσων 

ἠχέω 1 Co. (Lk. Ὁ 

θειότης Ko. 

θέλω ἐν Col. 

θεοδίδακτος 1 Th. 

θεοστυγής Ro. 

θεότης Col. 

θήρα Ro. 

θηριομαχέω 1 Co. 

Ounros 

δριαμβεύω 

θυρεός Eph. 

ἴαμα 1 Co. 

ἱερόθυτος 1 Co.? 

ἱεροσυλέω Ro. 

ἱερουργέω Ro. 

ixavorns 2 Ca. 

ixavow 

ἵλαρός 2 Co. 

ἱλαρότης Ro. 

ἱμείρομαι (? cf. duetzouac) 

ἵνα (‘where’)? 

᾿Ιουδαΐζω Gal. 

᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς Gal. 

᾿ἸΙουδαῖσμός Gal. 

ἰσότης 

ἰσόψυχος Phil. 

ἱστορέω Gal. 

καθαίρεσις 2 Co. 

καθό (1 Pet.?) 


καθοράω Ro. 
καινότης Ro. 
κακοήθεια Ko. 
καλάμη 1 Co. 
καλλιέλαιος Ro. 
καλοποιέω 2 Th. 
κάλυμμα 2 Co. 
κάμπτω 

κανών 

καπηλεύω 2 Co. 
καταβαρέω 2 Co. 
καταβραβεύω Col 
καταδουλόω 
κατακαλύπτω 1 Co. 
κατάκριμα Ro. 
κατάκρισις 2 Co. 
κατάλαλος Ro. 
κατάλειμμα Ro.? 
καταλλαγή 
καταλλάσσω 
καταναρκάω 2 Co. 
κατάνυξις Ro. fr. Sept. 
κατάρτισις 2 Co. 
καταρτισμός Eph. 
κατασκοπέω Gal. 
καταστρώννυμι 1 Co. 
κατατομή Phil. 
καταυγάζω 2 Co.? 
καταχθόνιος Phil. 
καταχράομαι 1 Co. 
κατοπτρίζομαι 2 Co. 
κατώτερος Eph. 
κέλευσμα 1 Th. 
κενοδοξία Phil. 
κενόδοξος Gal. 
κενόω 

κημόω 1 Co.? 
κίνδυνος 

κληρόω Eph. 

κλίμα 

κλυδωνίζομαι Epb. 
κολακεία 1 ‘Th. 
κομάω 1 Co. 

κόμη 1 Co. 
κοσμοκράτωρ Eph. 
κρέας 

κρυφῆ, -φῇ Eph. 
κυβεία Eph. 
κυβέρνησις 1 Co. 
κύμβαλον 1 Co. 
κυριακὸν δεῖπνον 1 Co. 
κυρόω 

Λαοδικεύς Col. (Rev. ἢ 
λάρυγξ Ro. 

λεῖμμα Ro. 

λῆψις Phil. 

λογία 1 Co. 
λογισμός 

λοίδορος 1 Co. 


λύσις 1 Co. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS 


μακαρισμός 

μάκελλον 1 Co. 

μακροχρόνιος Eph. 

papav ἀθά (wapavabd) 1 Co. 

ματαιόω Ro. 

μεγάλως Phil. 

μέγεθος Eph. 

peOodeia Eph. 

μέθυσος 1 Co. 

μεσότοιχον Eph. 

μετακινέω Col. 

μεταλλάσσω Ro. 

μετασχηματίζω 

μετοχή 2 Co. 

μήτεγε (μήτι γε, μή, τε ye) 1 
Ὁ. 


μολυσμός 2 Co. 
μομφή Col. 

μορφόω Gai. 

μόχθος 

μυέω Phil. 
μυκτηρίζω Gal 
μωμάομαι 2 Co. 
μωρία 1 Co. 
μωρολογία Eph. 
νέκρωσις 

vy 1 Co. 

νηπιάζω 1 Co. 

νόημα 

νομοθεσία Ro. 
νουμηνία Οοἱ. 
νυχθήμερον 2 Co. 
νῶτος Ro. fr. Sept. 
οἰκτείρω Ro. fr. Sept. 
ὀκταήμερος Phil. 
ὀλέθριος 2 ΤῊ. 
ὀλιγόψυχος 1 Th. 
ὀλοθρευτής 1 Co. 
ὁλοτελής 1 Th. 
ὁμείρομαι 1 ΤῊ. ὃ (cf. ἱμεὶ,.) 
ὁμιλία 1 Co. fr. Menander 
ὀνίνημι Philem. 
ὁρατός Col. 

ὄρεξις Ro. 
ὀρθοποδέω Gal. 

ὅσγε Ro. 

ὁσίως 1 Th. 
ὄσφρησις 1 Co. 
ὀφθαλμοδουλεία 
ὀχύρωμα 2 Co. 
πάθος 

παιδαγωγός 

παίζω 1 Co. ἔν. Sept. 
παλαιότης Ro. 

πάλη Eph. 
πανοῦργος 2 Co. 
παραβολεύομαι ὃ } Phil 
παραβουλεύομαι ? 
παραζηλόω 
παράκειμαι 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


παραμυθία 1 Co. 
παραμύθιον Phil. 
παραπλήσιον Phil. 
παραυτίκα 2 Co. 
mapappovew 2 Co. 


παρεδρεύω (cf. προσεδρ.) 1 


Co.? 
παρείσακτος Gal. 
παρεισέρχομαι 
πάρεσις Ro. 
παρηγορία Col. 
πάροδος 1 Co. 
παροργίζω 
παροργισμός Eph. 
πατρικός Gal. 
πειθός 1 Co. 
(Πειθώ 1 Co. ὃ) 
πεισμονή Gal. 
πένης 2 Co. fr. Sept. 
πεντάκις 2 Co. 
πεποίθησις 
περιεργάζομαι 2 Th. 
περικάθαρμα 1 Co. 


περικεφαλαία 1 Th. (Eph. 


fr. Sept.) 
περιλείπω 1 Th. 
περίψημα 1 Co. 
περπερεύομαι 1 Co, 
πέρυσι 2 Co. 
πιθα odoyia Col. 
πιότης lo. 
πλάσμα Ro. 
τὸ πλεῖστον (adv.) 1 Co. 
πλεονεκτέω 
πλεονέκτης 
πλησμονή Col. 
πλουτίζω 
ποίημα 
πολίτευμα Phil. 
πολυποίκιλος Eph. 
πρεσβεύω 
προαιρέω 2 Co. 
προαιτιάομαι Ro. 
προακούω Col. 
προαμαρτάνω 2 Co. 
προγίνομαι Ro. 
προδίδωμι Ro. 
προελπίζω Eph. 
mpoevapxoua 2 Co. 


προεπαγγέλλω Ro. (2 Co. Ὁ 


προετοιμάζω 
προευαγγελίζομαι Gai. 
προέχω Ro. 
προηγέομαι Ro. 
προθέσμιος Gal. 
προκαλέω Gal. 
προκαταρτίζω 2 Co. 
προκυρόω Gal. 
προλέγω 

προπάσχω 1 Th. 


προπάτωρ Ro. ? 
προσαγωγή 
προσαναπληρόω 2 Co. 
προσανατίθημι Gal. 


προσεδρεύω (cf. mapedp.) 1 


Co.? 
προσηλόω Col. 
προκαρτέρησις Eph. 
προσκοπή 2 Co. 
πρόσλη(μ)ψις Ro. 
προσοφείλω Philem. 
προστάτις Ro. 
προσφιλής Phil 
προτίθημι 
πρωτεύω Col. 
πτηνά (τά) 1 Co. 
πτύρω Phil. 
πτωχεύω 2 Co. 
πυκτεύω 1 Co. 
ῥιζόω 
ῥιπή Ἷ } 1 Co. 
ῥοπή ? 
puris Eph. 
σαίνεσθαι 1 ΤῊ. ὃ 
σαργάνη 2 Co. 
σατᾶν (not -vas) 2 Co.? 
σεβάζομαι Ro. 
σημειόω 2 Th. 
σκῆνος 2 Co. 
σκληρότης Ro. 
σκόλοψ 2 Co. 
σκοπός Phil. 
σκύβαλον Phil. 
Σκύθης Col. 
σπουδαῖος 2 Co. (2 T.?) 
στέγω 
στέλλω 
στενοχωρέω 2 Co. 
στενοχωρία 
στερέωμα Col. 
στίγμα Gal. 
συγγνώμη 1 Co. 
συγκαθίζω Eph. (Lk.?) 
συγκάμπτω Ro. fr. Sept. 
συγκατάθεσις 2 Co. 
συγκρίνω 
συζητητής 1 Co. 
σύζυγος Phil. 
συζωοποιέω 
συλαγωγέω Col. 
συλάω 2 Co. 
σύμβουλος Ro. fr. Sept. 
συμμαρτυρέω Ro. (Rev. ?) 
συμμερίζω 1 Co. 
συμμέτοχος Eph. 
συμμιμητής Phil. 
συμμορφίζω Phil. ὃ 
σύμμορφος 
συμμορφόω Phil. ὃ 
συμπαρακαλέω Ro. 


706 


συμπαραμένω Phil. ? 
συμπάσχω 
συμπέμπω 2 Co. 
συμπολίτης Eph. 
σύμφημι Ro. 
σύμφορον, τό, 1 Co.? 
συμφυλέτης 1 Th. 
σύμφυτος Ro. 
συμφώνησις 2 Co. 
σύμφωνος 1 Co. 
σύμψυχος Phil. 
συναγωνίζομαι Ro. 
συναθλέω Phil. 
συναιχμάλωτος 
συναναμίγνυμι 
συναναπαύομαι Ro.? 
συναποστέλλω 2 Co. 
συναρμολογέω Eph. 
συνδοξάζω Ro. 
συνεγείρω 

συνήδομαι Ko. 
συνηλικιώτης Gal. 
συνθάπτω 
συνοικοδομέω Eph. 
συντέμνω Ro. fr. Sept. 
σύντριμμα Ro. fr. Sept. 
συνυποκρίνομαι Gal. 
συνυπουργέω 2 Co. 
συνωδίνω Ro. 
σύσσωμος Eph. 
συστατικός 2 Co. 
συστενάζω Ro. 
συστοιχέω Gal. 
συστρατιώτης 

σχῆμα 

σωματικῶς Col. 
τάγμα 1 Co. 

Taxa 

tivo 2 Th. 
τολμηρότερον or -τέρως Ro. 
τράχηλον ὑποτιθέναι Ko. 
τροφός 1 ‘Th. 
τυπικῶς 1 Co. ? 

εἰ τύχοι, τυχόν, 1 Co. 
υἱοθεσία 

ὕμνος 

Umavdpos Ro. 
ὑπεραίρω 

ὑπέρακμος 1 Co. 
ὑπεραυξάνω 2 Th. 
ὑπερβαίνω 1 Th. 
ὑπερβαλλόντως 2 Co. 
ὑπερβάλλω 

ὑπερβολή 

ὑπερεγώ 2 Co. . 
ὑπερέκεινα 2 Co. 
ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ 
ὑπερεκπερισσῶς 1 ΤῊ. ὃ 
ὑπερεκτείνω 2 Co. 
ὑπερεντυγχάνω Ro. 


InpivipvuaL Writers. 


ὑπερλίαν 2 Co. 
ὑπερνικάω Ko. 
ὑπερπερισσεύω 
ὑπερυψόω Phil. 
ὑπερφρονέω Ro. 
ὑπόδικος Ro. 
ὑπόλειμμα Ro. ὃ 
ὑπολείπω Ro. 
ὑποπιάζω 1 Co.? 
ὕψωμα 
φανέρωσις 
φειδομένως 2 Co. 
φθόγγος 1 Co. (Ro. fr. Sept.’ 
φθονέω Gal. 
Φιλιππήσιος Phil. 
φιλόνεικος 1 Co. 
φιλοσοφία Col. 
φιλόστοργος Ro. 
φιλοτιμέομαι 
φρεναπατάω Gal. 
φρήν 1 Co. 
φρόνημα Ro. 
φύραμα 

φυσιόω 

φυσίωσις 2 Co. 
φωτισμός 2 Co. 
χειρόγραφον Col. 
χοϊκός 1 Co. 
χρηματισμος Ro. 
χρῆσις Ko. 
χρηστεύομαι 1 Co. 
χρηστολογία Ro. 
Ψψευδάδελφος 
ψευδαπόστολος 2 Co. 
ψεῦσμα Ro. 
ψιθυρισμός 2 Co. 
ψιθυριστής Ro. 
ψωμίζω 


ὡσπερεί 1 Co. 


Ro. 113 (13 fr. Sept., 6 %y 
1 Co. 110 (2 fr. Sept., 12 2) 
2 Co. 99 (4 fr. Sept., 4 ?) 
Gal. 34 (1 fr. Sept., 1?) 
Eph. 43 (1 fr. Sept.) 
Phil. 41 (4 ?) 
Col. 38 
1 Thess. 23 ( 5?) 
2 Thess. 11 (2 ?) 
Philem. 5. 
Common to two or more Epis 
tles 110. 
Tora. 627 (21 fr. Sept., 34 7) 


ὃ. To THE PASTORAL 
EPISTLES. 


N. B. Words peculiar to some 
single Epistle of the three are 
so designated. 


ἀγαθοεργέω 1 T. 
ἁγνεία 1 T. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἀγωγή 2 Ate 

ἀδηλύτης 1 T. 

ἀδιαφθορία Tit.? (cf. ἀφθο- 
pia) 

ἀθλέω 2 T. 

αἰδώς 1 T. (Hed. ?) 

αἱρετικός Tit. 

αἰσχροκερδής 

αἰχμαλωτεύω 2 T.?2 (Eph. 
fr. Sept.) 

ἀκαίρως 2 T. 

ἀκατάγνωστος Tit. 

ἀκρατής 2 T. 

ἄλλως 1 T. 

ἄμαχος 

ἀμοιβή 1 T. 

a αζωπυρέω 2 T. 

ἀνάλυσις 2 T. 

ἀνανήφω 2 T. 

ἀνατρέπω 

ἀναψύχω 2 T. 

ἀνδραποδιστής 1 T. 

ἀνδρόφονος 1 T. 

ἀνεξίκακος 2 T. 

ἀνεπαίσχυντος 2 T. 

ἀνεπίληπτος 1 T. 

ἀνήμερος 2 ἽΝ. 

ἀνόσιος 

ἀντιδιατίθημι 2 T. 

ἀντίθεσις 1 T. 

ἀντίλυτρον 1 11". 

ἀπαίδευτος 2 T. 

ἀπέραντος 1 T. 

ἀπόβλητος 1 T. 

ἀπόδεκτος 1 'T. 

ἀποδοχῆ ΤΣ 

ἀποθησαυρίζω 1 1. 

ἀποτρέπω 2 Τ 

ἀπρόσιτος 1. 

ἄρτιος 2 T. 

ἄσπονδος 2 'T. (Ro. ἢ 

ἀστοχέω 

αὐθεντέω 1 T. 

αὐτοκατάκριτος ‘Tit. 

ἀφθορία Tit. Ἡ (ct. ἀδιαφθο-. 
ρία) 

ἀφιλάγαθος 2 Ἵ". 

ἀψευδής Tit. 

βαθμός 1 T. 

βασιλεὺς τῶν αἰώνων 1 'T. 

βδελυκτός Tit. 

βελτίων 2 T. 

βλαβερός 1 T. 

γάγγραινα 2 T. 

yeveadoyia 

yons 2 T. 

(ra) ἱερὰ γράμματα 2 T. 

γραώδης 1 T. 

γυμνασία 1 T. 

γυναικάριον 2 T. 


101 


δειλία 2 T. 
διαβεβαιόομαι 
διάβολος (as adj.) 
διάγω 
διαπαρατριβή 1 ΤΟΥ (cf. παρα- 
διατριβή) 
διατροφή 1 T. 
διδακτικός 
δίλογος 1 T. 
διώκτης 1 T. 
ἐγκρατής Tit. 
ἑδραίωμα 1 T. 
ἔκγονα (τά) 1 T. 
ἔκδηλος 2 T. 
ἐκζήτησις 1 T.? 
ἐκλεκτοὶ ἄγγελοι 1 T. 
ἐκστρέφω Tit. 
ἔλαττον (adv.) 1 T. 
ἐλεγμός 2 T.? 
ἡ μακαρία ἐλπίς Tit. 
ἐνδύνω intrans. 2 T. 
ἔντευξις 1 T. 
ἐντρέφω 1 T. 
ἐπανόρθωσις 2 T. 
ἐπαρκέω 1 T. 
ἐπιδιορθόω Tit. 
ἐπίορκος 1 T. 
ἐπιπλήσσω 1 T. 
ἐπιστομίζω Tit. 
ἐπισωρεύω 2 T. 
ἑτεροδιδασκαλέω 1 2. 
εὐμετάδοτος 1 T. 
εὐσεβῶς 
ἤρεμος 1 T. 
θεόπνευστος 2 T. 
θεοσέβεια 1 T. 
teponpenns Tit. 
᾿Ιουδαϊκός Tit. 
καλοδιδάσκαλος ‘lit. 
καταλέγω 1 T. 
κατάστημα Tit. 
καταστολή 1 T. 


καταστρηνιάω 1 T. 
καταστροφή 2 T. (2 Pet.?) | 
καταφθείρω 2 T. (2 Pet. ὃ) 
κατηγορία (Lk. and Jn. ἢ) 
καυστηριάζω ? } iT. 
καυτηριάζω ? 

κενοφωνία 

κνήθω ΟΕ 

κοι ὠνικός 1 T. 

κόσμιος 1 T. 

κοσμίως 1 T.? 

λογομαχέω 2. T. 

λογομαχία 1 T. 

λόγος ὑγιής Tit. 

μάμμη 

ματαιολογία 1 T. 
ματαιολόγος Tit. ΓΜ. ἡ). 
μελετάω!1 T. (Acts fr. Sept., | 


μεμβράνα 2 T. 

μετάλη(μ)ψις 1 T. 

μηδέποτε 2 'T. 

μητραλῴας ? | 1T. 

μητρολῴας } 

μητρόπολις 1 T. 

povow 1 'T. 

νεόφυτος 1 T. 

νεωτερικός 2 T. 

νηφάλεος 

νομίμως 

νοσέω 1 T. 

ξενοδοχέω 1 Ὑ. 

οἰκοδεσποτεω 1 T. 

οἰκοδομία 1 T.? 

οἰκουργός ? } Tit. 

oikoupos ? 

ἡ καλὴ ὁμολογία 1 T. 

ὁμολογουμένως 1 T. 

ὀργίλος Tit. 

ὀρθοτομέω 2 T. 

παραδιατριβή 1 T.? (οἴ. δια- 
παρατριβή) 

παραθήκη 2 T. (1 T.?) 

παρακαταθήκη 2 T. (1 T.?) 

πάροινος 

πατρολῴας ? } vee 

περιίστασθαι (“ to avoid”) 

περιούσιος Tit. 

περιπείρω 1 T. 

περιφρονέω Tit. 

πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (cf. Rev. xxi. 
5 ete.) 

πιστόω 2 T. 

πλέγμα 1 T. 

πλήκτης 

πορισμός 1 T. 

πραγματεία 3 T. 

πραὐπάθεια (-θία) 1 T.? 

πρεσβῦτις Tit. 

πρόγονος 

πρύκριμα 1 T. 

πρόσκλησις ? } iT. 

πρόσκλισις ? 

προφήτης (of a poet) Tit. 

ῥητῶς 1 T. 

σεμνότης 

σκέπασμα 1 T. 

στεφανόω 2 T. (Heb. fr. 
Sept.) 

στόμαχος 1 T. 

στρατολογέω 2 1. 

στυγητός Tit. 

συγκακοπαθέω 2 T. 


πατραλῴας ? 


| σώζω εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν κτλ. 


ule 
σωτήριος (as adj.) Tit. 
σωφρονίζω Tit. 
σωφρονισμός 2 T. 


InDIVIDUAL WRITERS 


σωφρόνως Tit. 
σώφρων 
τεκνογονέω 
τεκνογονία 1 T, 
τεκνοτροφέω 1 T. 
τυφόω 
ὑγιαίνω metaph. (τῇ ἀγάπη. 
πίστει, ὑπομονή, etc.) 
ὑδροποτέω 1 T. 
ὑπερπλεονάζω 1 Τ. 
ὑπόνοια 1 T. 
ὑποτύπωσις 
φαιλόνης Ὁ)... , rr 
1 μ T. (cf. 111.1) 
φιλάγαθος Tit. 
φίλανδρος Tit. 
φιλαργυρία 1 T. 
φίλαυτος 2 T. 
φιλήδονος 2 T. 
φιλόθεος 2 T. 
| φιλότεκνος Tit. 
φλύαρος 1 T. 
φρεναπάτης Tit. 
φροντίζω Tit. 
χαλκεύς 2 T. 
χάρις, ἔλεος, elonum ἀπὸ 6. 
(as a salutation) 
χρήσιμος 2 T. 
Wevdodoyos 1 1 
Wevdavupos 1 T. 
| ὠφέλιμος 
1 Tim. 82 (6%) 
2 Tim. 53 (22) 
Tit. 33 (2 2) 
Tora. 168 (10 1) 


e. ΒΟΤῊ To THE FASTORAL 
AND THE OTHER PAULINE 
EPISTLES. 


ἀδιάλειπτος 
ἀθανασία 
αἰσχρός 
αἰχμαλωτεύω ! 
ἀλαζών 
ἀλοάω 
ἀνακαίνωσις 
ἀνέγκλητος 
ἀποτόμως 
ἀρσενοκοίτης 
] ἄσπονδος ὃ 
| ἄστοργος 
ἀτιμία 
αὐτάρκεια 
ἀφθαρσία 

> ᾿ 
ἀφορμὴ 
γνήσιος 
ἐκκαθαίρω 
ἐνοικέω 

| ἐξαπατάω Ὁ 


IypDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ἐπιταγή 
ἐπιφάνεια 
ἔρις 
εὔχρηστος 
ἤπιος ὃ 
ἱερός (ΜΚ. ?) 
κέρδος 
λουτρόν 
μνεία 
μόρφωσις 
ναυαγέω 
νουθεσία 
ὀδύνη 
οἰκεῖος 
οἰκέω 
ὄλεθρος 
ὀστράκινος 
πλάσσω 
προΐστημε 
προκοπή 
προνοέω 
σεμνός 
σπένδω 
στρατεία ὃ 
συζάω 
συμβασιλεύω 
σωρεύω 
ὑβριστής 
ὑπεροχή 
ὑποταγή 
ὑποτίθημι 
ὑψηλοφρονέω ? 
χρηστότης 
Tora 58 (6 Ὁ 


7. To the Epistle to the 
Hebrews. 


Σ ͵ 
ἀγενεαλόγητος 
ἁγιότης (2 Co. #) 
ἀγνόημα 
ἀϑέτησις 
ἄθλ noes 
αἴγειος 
αἱματεκχυσία 
αἴνεσις 

> ᾿ 
αἰσθητήριον 

a Ἢ 
αἴτιος (6) 
ἀκατάλυτος 
ee 
ἀκλινὴς 
ἀκροθίνιον 
ἀλυσιτελῆς 
ἀμετάθετος 
ἀμήτωρ 

: , 
ἀνακαινίζω 
ἀναλογίζοιιαε 
ἀναρίθμητος 
ἀνασταυρόω 
ἀνταγωνίζομαι 


ἀντικαθίστημε 
ἀπαράβατος 
ἀπάτωρ 
ἀπαύγασμα 
ἄπειρος 

ἀποβλέπω 
ἀπόστολος of Christ 
ἁρμός 

ἀφανής 

ἀφανισμός 
ἀφομοιόω 

ἀφοράω 

βοηθός fr. Sept. 
βολίς ? fr. Sept. 
βοτάνη 

γενεαλογέω 
γεωργέω 

γνύφος 

δάμαλις 

δεκάτη 

δεκατόω 

δέος ὃ 

δέρμα 

δημιουργός 

δήπου 

διάταγμα ? 
διαφορώτερος 
διηνεκής 

διϊκνέομαι 
διόρθωσις 
δοκιμασία ? 
δυσερμήνευτος 
ἐάνπερ 

(7) ἑβδόμη 

ἔγγυος 

ἐγκαινίζω 

εἰ μήν ? 

ἐκβαίνω ὃ 

ἐκδοχή 

ἐκλανθάνω 
ἔκτρομος Ὁ 

ἔλεγχος (2 Tim. 7) 
ἐμπαιγμός 
ἐνυβρίζω 

ἕξις 

ἐπεισαγωγή 
ἐπιλείπω 
ἐπισκοπέω (1 Pet. ὅ) 
ἔπος 

εὐαρεστέω 
εὐαρέστως 

εὐθύτης fr. Sept. 
εὐλάβεια 
εὐλαβέομαι ( Acts?) 
εὐπερίστατος 
εὐποιΐα 

7 μήν Ὁ (cf. εἰ μή»} 
θεατρίζω 

θέλησις 

θεμέλιον καταβάλλομαι 


108 


θεράπων 

θύελλα 

θυμιατήριον 
ἱερωσύνη 

ἱκετήριος 

καθαρότης 

καίτοι (Lk. ὃ) 
κακουχέω 

καρτερέω 
καταγωνίζομαι 
κατάδηλος 
καταναλίσκω 
κατασκιάζω 
κατάσκοπος 
κατατοξεύω Ἱ fr. Sept. 
καῦσις 

κεφαλίς fr. Sept. 
κοπή fr. Sept. 
κριτικός 

κῶλον fr. Sept. 
λειτουργικός 
Λευϊτικός 

μερισμός 

μεσιτεύω 

μετάθεσις 
μετέπειτα 
μετριοπαθέω 
μηδέπω 

μηλωτή 
μισθαποδοσία 
μισθαποδότης 
μυελός 

νέφος 

νόθος 

νομοθετέω 

νωθρός 

ὄγκος 

ἡ οἰκουμένη ἣ μέλλουσα 
ὀλιγωρέω fr. Sept. 
ὀλοθρεύω, ὀλεθρεύω 
ὁμοιότης 

ὁ ὀνειδισμὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ 
ὁρκωμοσία 
πανήγυρις 
παραδειγματίζω (Mt. ?) 
παραπικραίνω 
παραπικρασμός fr. Sept. 
παραπίπτω 
παραπλησίως 
παραρρέω 

παρίημι (Lk. ?) 
mapotxew (Lk. ὃ) 
πεῖρα 

πήγνυμι 

πολυμερῶς 
πολυτρόπως 

πρίζω (πρίω) 
προβλέπω 
πρόδρομος 
προσανορεύω 


ΙΝΡΙΨΙΡΌΑΙ, WRITERS. 


προσοχθίζω fr. Sept. 

πρόσφατος 

πρόσχυσις 

πρωτοτόκια 

ῥαντίζω (Mk.? Rev.?) 

σαββατισμός 

ὁ σκότος Ἷ 

στάμνος 

συγκακουχέω 

συμπαθέω 

συναπόλλυμε 

συνδέω 

συνεπιμαρτυρέω 

τελειωτής 

τιμωρία 

τομώτερος 

τράγος 

τρίμηνος 

τροχιά fr. Sept. 

τυμπανίζω 

ὑπείκω 

ὑποστολή 

φαντάζω 

φοβερός 

χαρακτήρ 

Χερουβίμ, -βείν 
Tora 169 (12 fr. Sept., 11 2) 


8. To James. 
aye 
ἀδιάκριτος 
ἀκατάστατος 
ἀκατάσχετος ? 
ἅλυκός 
ἀμάω 
ἀνέλεος Ὁ 
ἀνεμίζω 
ἀνίλεως ? 
ἀπείραστος 
ἁπλῶς 
ἀποκυέω 
ἀποσκίασμα 
ἀποτελέω (Lk. ὃν 
αὐχέω ὃ 
ἀφυστερέω ὃ 
βοή 
βρύω 
γέλως 
δαιμονιώδης 
δίψυχος 
EIKQ 
ἔμφυτος 
ἐνάλιος 
ἐξέλκω 
ἔοικα (see EIKQ) 
ἐπιλησμονή 
ἐπιστήμων 
ἐπιτήδειος 


InpivipuaL WRITERS. 


ὁ εὐθύνων 
εὐπειθῆς 
εὐπρέπεια 
ἐφήμερος 
θανατηφόρος 
θρῆσκος 

ios (Ro. fr. Sept-) 
κακοπάθεια 
κατήφεια 

κατιόω 

κατοικίζων 

κενῶς 

μαραίνω 
μεγαλαυχέω Ὁ 
μετάγω 
μετατρέπω ? 
νομοθέτης 
ὀλολύζω 
ὁμοίωσις fr. Sept. 
ὄψιμος 
παραλλαγῆ 
πικρός 

ποία 

ποίησις 
πολύσπλαγχνος 
προσωπολη(μ)πτέω 
mpa(or-6- )ipos 
διπίζω 

ῥυπαρία 

ῥυπαρός (Rev. ?) 
σήπω 
σητόβρωτος 
ταλαιπωρέω 
ταλαιπωρία (Ro. fr. Sept.) 
ταχύς 

τροπή 

τροχός 

τρυφάω 

ὕλη 

φιλία 

φλογίζω 

φρίσσω 
χαλιναγωγέω 

χρή 
χρυσοδακτύλιος 


Τοται, 73 (1 fr. Sept., 9 ?} 


9. To Peter. 


N. B. Words peculiar to one 
Epistle or the other are so 
marked by the numeral which 
follows them; words unmarked 
are common to both. 


ἀγαθοποιΐα 1 
ἀγαθοποιός 1 
ἀδελφότης 1 
ἀδίκως 1 


ἄδολος 1 

ἄθεσμος 2 
αἰσχροκερδῶς 1 
ἀκατάπαστος ? 
ἀκατάπαυστος } 
ἀλλοτρι(ο)επίσκοπος 1 
ἅλωσις 2 

ἀμαθῆς 2 
ἀμαράντινος 1 
ἀμάραντος 1 
ἀμώμητος 2 (Phil. ὅ) 
ἀναγεννάω 1 
ἀναγκαστῶς 1 

ἀ' αζώννυμι 1 
ἀνάχυσις 1 
ἀνεκλάλητος 1 
ἀντιλοιδορέω 1 
ἀπογίνυμαι 1 
ἀπόθεσις 
ἀπονέμω 1 
ἀποφεύγω 2 
ἀπροσωπολή(μ᾽ πτω: ἴ 
ἀργέω 2 
ἀρτιγέννητος 1 
ἀρχιποίμην 1 
ἀστήρικτος 2 
αὐχμηρός 2 

βιώω 1 

βλέμμα 2 
βόρβορος 2 
βραδυτής 2 
γυναικεῖος 1 
διαυγάζω 2 
δυσνόητος 2 
ἐγκατοικέω 2 
ἐγκομβόομαι 1 
ἑκάστοτε 2 
ἔκπαλ.ι. = 

ἐκτενής 1 (Lk. Ὁ) 
ἐκτενῶς 1 (LE. ?) 
ἔλεγξις 2 
ἐμπαιγμονή 2 
ἐμπλοκή 1 
ἔνδυσις 1 
ἐντρυφάω 2 
ἐξαγγέλλω 1 (Mk. ??) 
ἐξακολουθέω 2 
ἐξέραμα 2 
ἐξεραυνάω ? } 1 
ἐξερευνάω Ὁ 
ἐπάγγελμα 2 
ἐπερώτημα 1 
ἐπικάλυμμα 1 
ἐπίλοιπος 1 
ἐπίλυσις 2 
ἐπιμαρτυρέω 1 
ἐποπτεύω 1 
ἐπόπτης 2 
ἱεράτευμα 1 
ἰσότιμος 2 


109 


κακοποιός 1 (Jn. ?) 
κατακλύζω Z 
καυσόω 2 

κλέος 1 

κραταιός 1 

κτίστης 1 

κύλισμα ? } 
κυλισμός Ὁ 

λήθη 3 
μεγαλοπρεπής 2 
μίασμα 2 

μιασμός 2 

μνήμη 2 

μυωπάζω 2 

μώλωψ 1 fr. Sept. 
μῶμος 2 
οἰνοφλυγία 1 
ὀλίγως ? 2 

ὁμίχλη ? 2 
ὁμόφρων 1 

ὁπλίζω 1 
παρανομία 2 
παραφρονία 2 
παρεισάγω 2 
παρεισφέρω 2 
πατροπαράδοτος 1 
περίθεσις 1 
πλαστός 2 

πότος 1 

προθύμως 1 
προμαρτύρομαι 1 
πτόησις 1 

ῥοιζηδόν 2 

ῥύπος 1 

σειρά ? 

σειρός ? | 

awpos? ὁ 
σθενόω 1 
omopa 1 
στηριγμός 2 
στρεβλόω 2 
συμπαθής 1 
συμπρεσβύτερος 1 
συνεκλεκτός 1 
συνοικέω 1 
ταπεινόφρων 1? 
Taptapow 2 
ταχινός 2 
τελείως 1 
teppow 2 
τήκω 2 
τοιόσδε 2 
τολμητής 2 
ὑπογραμμός 1 
ὑποζύγιον 3 { 
ὑπολιμπάνω 1 
ὗς 2 
φιλάδελφος 1 
φιλόφρων 1? 
φωσφόρος 2 


Mt. tr. Sept.) 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


ψευδοδιδάσκαλος 2 
ὠρύομαι 1 
1 Epistle 63 (1 fr. Sept., 2?) 
2 Epistle 57 (5 2) 
Common to Both 1 
Tora 121. 


10. To Jude. 


εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας 
πρὸ παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος 
ἀποδιορίζω 
ἄπταιστος 
γογγυστής 
δεῖγμα 
ἐκπορνεύω 
ἐνυπνιάζω (Lk. fr. Sept.) 
ἐξελέγχω ? 
ἐπαγωνίζομαι 
ἐπαφρίζω 
μεμψίμοιρος 
ὀπίσω σαρκός 
παρεισδύω 
πλανήτης 
πρόσωπα θαυμάζω 
σπιλάς 
ὑπέχω 
φθινοπωρινός 
φυσικῶς 

Tora 20 (1 2) 


11. To the Apocalypse. 


τὸ A καὶ τὸ D 

᾿Αβαδδών 

αἰχμαλωσία (Eph. fr. Sept.) 
ἀκαθάρτης ? 

ἀκμάζω 

ἄκρατος tr. Sept. 
ἀλληλούϊα 

ἄλφα (see τὸ A καὶ τὸ 2) 
ἀμέθυστος 

ὁ ἀμὴν 

ἄμωμον ? 

ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος 
᾿Απολλύων 

ἄρκος OY ἄρκτος 
“Αρμαγεδών ete. 

ἄψινθος 

βάλλειν σκάνδαλον ἐνώπιον 
βασανισμός 

βάτραχος 

βΒήρυλλος 

βιβλαρίδιον 

βιβλιδάριον ? 

βότρυς 

βύσσινος 

τὸ δάκρυον ? 

τὸ δέκατον as subst. 


INDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


διάδημα 

διαυγής ὕ 

διαφανής ὃ 

διπλόω 

δισμυριάς ? 

δράκων 

δωδέκατος 

ἐγχρίω 

εἱλίσσω ἵ 

ἐλεφάντινος 

Ἑλληνικός (LE. ὃ) 

ἐμέω 

ἐμμέσῳ ? 

ἐνδόμησις (ἐνδώμησις) 

ἑξακόσιοι 

᾿Εφεσῖνος ὃ 

(neva? 

ξύλον τῆς ζωῆς fr. Sept., 
ζωῆς πηγαὶ ὑδάτων ἡ fr. 


Sept., (τὸ) ὕδωρ (τῆς) 
ζωῆς fr. Sept. 

ζεστός 

ἡμιώριον (ἡμίωρον) 

ὁ ἦν 


ὁ θάνατος ὁ δεύτερος 
θαῦμα (2 Co. 3) 

θαῦμα (μέγα) θαυμάζειν 
θειώδης 
θεολόγος ? 
θύϊνος 
ἴασπις 
ἱππικός 
ἶρις 
κατάθεμα ἵ πε ΣΕ ΣΝ 
ἐπ τ ee, 
κατασφραγίζω 
κατήγωρ ? 

καῦμα 


κεραμικός fr. Sept. 
κεράννυμι 

κιθαρῳδός 
κιννάμωμον 

κλέμμα 

κολλούριον (κολλύριου) 
κριθή 

κρυσταλλίζω 
κρύσταλλος 

κυκλεύω ? 

κυκλόθεν 

eee τς 
λευκοβύσσινον ἡ 
λιβανωτός 

λίνον ? (Mt. fr. Sept.) 
λιπαρός 

patos? 

μασθός ? } 

μάρμαρος 
μασ(σ)άομαι 
μεσουράνημα 

μέτωπον 

μηρός 

μουσικός 

μυκάομαι 

μύλινος ἵ 

νεφρός fr. Sept. 
Νικολαΐτης 

ὄλυνθος 

ὅμιλος ? 

ὅπου ἐκεῖ (Hebr. OW TW) 
ὀπώρα 

ὅρασις (Lk. fr. Sept.) 
ὅρμημα 

ὄρνεον 

ἡ οὐαί 

οὐαί w. ace. of pers. ὃ 


ed 


οὐρα 


710 


πάρδαλις 
πελεκίζω 

πέμπτος 
περιρ(ρ)αίνω ? 
(πετάομαι) πέτομαι 
πλήσσω 

πλύνω (Lk. ?) 
ποδήρης 

πόνος (Col. 2) 
ποταμοφόρητος 
πρωϊνός etc. 

ὁ πρῶτος κ. ὁ ἔσχατυς 
πύρινος 

πυρρός 

ῥέδη (ῥέδα) 
ῥυπαίνω ? 
ῥυπαρεύομα: ἑ 
ῥυπόω ? 
σαλπιστής 
σάπφειρος 
σάρδινος ? 

σάρδιον ? 
σαρδιόνυξ ὃ 
σαρδόνυξ ? } 
σεμίδαλις 

σηρικός (σιρικός) 
σίδηρος 

σκοτόω (Eph. ?) 
σμαράγδινος 
σμάραγδος 
Σμυρναῖος ? 
στρηνιάω 

στρῆνος 

σώματα slaves 
ταλαντιαῖος 
τεσσαρακονταδύο 
τεσσαρακοιτατεσσαρες ? 
τετράγωνος 


InDIVIDUAL WRITERS. 


τιμιότης 
τόξον 
τοπάζιον 
τρίχινος 
ὑακίνθινος 
ὑάκινθος 
ὑάλινος 
ὕαλος 
φαρμακεύς ὃ 
φάρμακον ἵ 
φαρμακός 
φιάλη 
χάλαζα 
χάλκεος 
χαλκηδών 
χαλκολίβανον 
χλιαρός 
χοῖνιξ 
χρυσόλιθος 
χρυσύπρασος 
χρυσόω 
τὸ Q (see τὸ A καὶ τὸ OF 
Tora 156 (7 ir. Sept., 38 ὃ) 


12. To the Apocalypse and 
the Fourth Gospel. 


βροντή (cf. MK. iii. 17) 
δέκατος 

“EBpaiott 

ἐκκεντέω 

κυκλεύω ? 

ὄψις 

πορφυροῦς 

σκηνόω 

going 


Torai 9 (1%) 


ve 


FORMS OF VERBS. 


The List which follows is not intended to be a mere museum of grammatical curiosities on the one hand, or a catalogue of all the 
verbal forms occurring in the Greek Testament on the other ; butit is a collection of those forms (or their representatives) which may 
possibly occasion a beginner some perplexity. The practical end, accordingly, for which the list has been prepared has prescribed 3 
generous liberty as respects admission to it. Yet the following classes of forms have been for the most part excluded: forms which arg 
traceable by means of the cross references given in the body of the Lexicon, or which hold so isolated a position in its alphabet that even 
a tyro can hardly miss them; forms easily recognizable as compounded, in case the simple form has been noted; forms readily explain- 
able by the analogy of some form which is given. 

Ordinarily it has been deemed sufficient to give the representative form of a tense, viz., the First Person (or in the case of the Impera- 
tive the Second Person) Singular, the Nominative Singular Masculine of a Participle, etc.; but when some other form seemed likely tc 
prove more embarrassing, or was the only one found in the New Testament, it has often been the form selected. 

The word “οὔ in the descriptions introduces not necessarily the stem from which a given form comes, but the entry in the Lexicon 
under which the form will be found. The epithet “ Alex.”, it is hardly necessary to add, has been employed only for convenience and in 
its technical sense. 


ἀγάγετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἄγω. ἀνέθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνίημι. 

ἀγάγῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἄγω. ἀνεθρέψατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνατρέφω. 
ἁγνίσθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of ἁγνίζω ἀνείλετο (-ατο, Alex.), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers, sing. of dvapéw. 
αἴσθωνται, 2 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. of αἰσθάνομαι. ἀνεῖλον (-are, -av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. of dvaipéw. 

alre(rw, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing. of airéw. ἀνειχόμην, impf. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἀκήκοα, 2 pf. act. of ἀκούω. ἀνελεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀναιρέω. 

ἀλλαγήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of ἀλλάσσω. ἀνελεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀναιρέω. 

ἀλλάξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἀλλάσσω. ἀνέλωσι, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of dvaipéw. 
ἀλλάξει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀλλάσσω ἀνενέγκαι, -κας, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptcp. of ἀναφέρω. 
ἁμαρτήσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj..3 pers. sing. of ἁμαρτάνω. ἀνενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀναφέρω. 

ἀμησάντων, 1 aor. act. ptep. gen. plur. of dudw. ἀνέντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of ἀνίημι. 
ἀνάβα and ἀνάβηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἀναβαίνω. ἀνέξομαι, fut. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἀναβέβηκα, pf. act. of ἀναβαίνω. ἀνέπεσον (-cay, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀναπίπτω. 
ἀναγαγεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvaya. ἀνέσεισα, 1 aor. act. of ἀνασείω. 

ἀναγνούς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἀναγινώσκω. ἀνεστράφημεν, 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of ἀναστρέφω. 
ἀναγνῶναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀναγινώσκω. ἀνεσχόμην, 2 aor. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἀναγνωσθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀναγενώσ «ω. | ἀνέτειλα, 1 aor. act. of ἀνατέλλω. 

ἀνακεκύλισται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνακυλίιω. ἀνετράφη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνατρέφω. 

ἀναλοῖ, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀναλίσκω. ἀνεῦρον (-av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀνευρίσκω 
ἀναλωθῆτε, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of ἀναλισκω. ἀνέῳγα, 2 pf. act. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀναμνήσω, fut. act. of ἀναμιμνήσκω. ἀνεῳγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀναπαήσομαι, fut. mid. of ἀναπαύω (cf. also παύω, init.). | dvewyéra, 2 pf. act. ptep. acc. sing. mase. of ἀνοίγω. 
ἀνάπεσαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ἀναπίπτω. ἀνέῳξα, 1 aor. act. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνάπεσε, ἀνάπεσον, 2 and 1 aor. act. impv of dvaminrw.  ἀνεῳχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνάστα and ἀνάστηθι, 2 aor. act. impy. of ἀνίστημι. ἀνήγαγον, 2 aor. act. of ἀνάγω. 

ἀνατεθραμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀνατρέφω. ἀνήγγειλα, 1 aor. act. of ἀναγγέλλω. 

ἀνατείλῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνατέλλω. ἀνηγγέλην, 2 aor. pass. of ἀναγγέλλω. 

ἀνατέταλκεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνατέλλω. ἀνήνεγκεν, 1 or 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀναφέρω. 
ἀναφάναντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur of ἀναφαίνω ἀνῃρέθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀναιρέω. 

Gvahavevres, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. of dvapaivw. | ἀνήφθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνάπτω. 


ἀναχθέντες, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of dvdyw.  ἀνήχθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀνάγω. 

ἀνάψαντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of ἀνάπτω. ἀνθέξεται, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀντέχω. 
ἀνέγνωτε, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of ἀναγινώσκω. ἀνθέστηκε, pf. ind. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνθίστημι. 
ἀνεθάλετε, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of ἀναθάλλ,,. ἀνθίστανται, pres. mid. 3 pers. plur. of ἀνθίστημι. 
ἀνεθέμην, 2 aor. mid. of ἀνατίθημι. ἀνθίστατο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνθίστημε- 


-" 


forms OF VERBS. i 


ἀνιέντες, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of avinus. 

ἀνοιγήσεται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοιγῶσιν, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοῖξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοίξῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἄνοιξον, 1 aor. act. impy. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοίσω, fut. act. of ἀναφέρω. 

ἀνοιχθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνοιχθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἀνταποδοῦναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀνταποδίδωμι. 

ἀνταποδώσω, fut. act. of ἀνταποδίδωμι. 

ἀντέστην, 2 aor. act. of ἀνθίστημι. 

ἀντιστῆναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀνθίστημι. 

ἀντίστητε, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἀνθίστημι. 

ἀνῶ, 2 aor. act. subj. of ἀνίημι. 

ἀπαλλάξῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπαλλάσσω- 

ἀπαρθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπαίρω. 

ἀπαρνησάσθω, 1 aor. mid. impv. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπαρνέομαι. 

ἀπαρνήσῃ, fut. 2 pers. sing. of ἀπαρνέομαι. 

ἀπατάτω, pres. act. impy. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπατάω. 

ἀπατηθεῖσα, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of ἀπατάω. 

ἀπέβησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀποβαίνω. 

ἀπέδειξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδείκνυμι. 

ἀπέδετο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπεδίδοσαν, ἀπεδίδουν, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of drodidaus. 

ἀπέδοτο, -δοσθε, etc., 2 aor. mid. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπέδωκεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπέθανεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of ἀποθνήσκω. 

ἀπειπάμεθα, 1 aor. mid. 1 pers. plur. of ἀπεῖπον. 

ἀπεῖχον, impf. act. of ἀπέχω. 

ἀπεκατεστάθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀποκαθίστημι. 

ἀπεκατέστην, 2 aor. act. of ἀποκαθίστημι. 

ἀπεκρίθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀποκρίνω. 

ἀπεκτάνθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀπεληλύθεισαν, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of ἀπέρχομσι- 

ἀπελθών, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἀπέρχομαι. 

ἀπενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀποφέρω. 

ἀπενεχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἀποφέρω. 

ἀπεπνίγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποπνίγω. 

ἀπέπνιξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dromviyw. 

ἀπεστάλην, 2 aor. pass. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀπέσταλκα, pf. act. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀπεσταλμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀπέστειλα, 1 aor. act. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀπέστη (-ησαν), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of ἀφέ- 
στημι. 

ἀπεστράφησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἀποστρεφω. 

ἀπετάξατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποτάσσω. 

ἀπήεσαν, impf. 3 pers. plur. of Gren. 

ἀπήλασεν, 1 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. οἱ ἀπελαύνω. 

ἀπηλγηκότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. ot ἀἄπαλνεω». 

ἀπῆλθον (Sav, Alex. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor. act. ot drepyuuase 

ἀπηλλάχθαι, pf. pass. inf. of ἀπαλλάσσω. 

ἀπηρνησάμην, 1 aor. of ἀπαρνέομαι. 

ἀπησπασάμην, 1 aor. of ἀπασπάζομαι. 

ἀποβάντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἀποβαίνω. 

ἀποβήσεται, fut. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποβαίνω. 

ἀποδεδειγμένον, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of ἀποδείκνυμι. 


12 


ῃ 


me .ι-ΦΦΦΦΦρΠ)ρ'Ρ7ὺὔἅςὉὔὙ΄΄ΦὋῃ[ἔΕῃῳΕεη;αἝ«“«΄“΄ὔὯὕ]}ὲΣῈΣε.-.΄ἷἽ΄͵ἝἝ  ς Ξς ςἘςςς-ς-- 


Forms or VERBS 


ἀποδεικνύντα (-δειγνύοντα), pres. act. ptep. acc. sing. masc. 
of ἀποδείκνυμι. 

ἀποδεῖξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἀποδείκνυμε. 

ἀποδιδόναι, -δότω, pres. act. inf. and impv. (3 pers. sing.) 
of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποδιδοῦν, pres. act. ptep. neut. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποδοθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποδοῖ, -δῷ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδίδωμε- 

ἀπόδος, -Sore, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποδοῦναι, -δούς, 2 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of ἀποδίδωμε. 

ἀποδῴη, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀποθανεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀποθνήσκω. 

ἀποκαθιστᾷ, -τάνει, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀποκαθίστημι. 

ἀποκατηλλάγητε, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ἀποκαταὰ- 
λάσσω. 

ἀποκριθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of ἀποκρίνω. 

ἀποκταίνω, -κτείνω, -κτέννω, -κτένω, PYeS.; SCC ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀποκτανθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. οἵ ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀποκτέννυντες, pres. ptep. nom. plur. masce. of ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀποκτενῶ, fut. act. of ἀποκτείνω. 

ἀπολέσαι, -λέσω, 1 aor. act. inf. and subj. of ἀπολλυμι- 

ἀπολέσω, fut. act. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπολοῦμαι, fut. mid. of ἀπόλλυμε. 

ἀπολῶ, fut. act. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπόλωλα, 2 pf. act. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπο(ρ)ρίψαντας, 1 aor. act. ptep. ace. plur. masec. of 
ἀπο(ρ)ρίπτω. 

ἀποσταλῶ, 2 aor. pass. subj. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀποστείλας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ἀποστέλλω. 

ἀποστῇ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of apiornus. 

ἀποστήσομαι, fut. mid. of ἀφίστημι. 

ἀπόστητε (-στήτω), 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (8 pers. 
sing.) of ἀφίστημι. 

ἀποστραφῇς, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing. of ἀποστρέφω. 

ἀπόστρεψον, 1 aor. act. impy. of ἀποστρέφω. 

ἀποταξάμενος, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of ἀποτάσσω.- 

ἅπτου, pres. mid. impv. of ἅπτω. 

ἀπώλεσα, 1 aor. act. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπωλόμην, 2 aor. mid. of ἀπόλλυμι. 

ἀπωσάμενος, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of ἀπωθέω. 

ἄραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of αἴρω. 

ἄρας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of αἴρω. 

ἀρέσει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀρέσκω. 

ἀρέσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀρέσκω. 

ἄρῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of αἴρω. 

ἀρθῇ (-θῶσιν), 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of 
αἴρω. 

ἀρθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. οἵ αἴρω. 

ἄρθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of αἴρω. 

ἀρκέσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing of doxéw. 

ἄρον, 1 aor. act. impv. of αἴρω. 

ἁρπαγέντα, 2 aor. pass. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of dprafe. 

ἀρῶ (-οὔσιν), fut. act. 1 pers. sing. (8 pers. plur.) of αἴρω» 

αὐξηθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of avgave. 

ἀφέθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφεῖλεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφαιρέω. 

ἀφεῖναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφεῖς, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of (ἀφέω) ἀφίημε. 


Forms ΟΕ VERBS. 


ἀφείς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφελεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. οἱ apacpew. 

ἀφελεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of aparpew. 

ἀφέλῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of apawew. 
ἄφες, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφέωνται, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφῇ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφιημε- 
ἀφῆκα, 1 aor. act. of ἀφίημι. 

ἀφίεμεν, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of ἀφίημι. 
ἀφίενται, -ovrat, pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἀφιημι.- 
ἀφίκετο, 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφικνέομαι. 
ἀφίομεν, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of (ἀφίω) ἀφίημι. 
ἀφιοῦσιν, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of (ἀφιέω) ἀφίημι. 
ἀφίστασο, pres. mid. impy. of ἀφίστημι. 
ἀφίστατο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφίστημι. 


ἀφοριεῖ, -οὔσιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. and plur- af age- 


ρίζω. 
ἀφῶμεν, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of ἀφύνμω. 
ἀφωμοιωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀφομοιόω. 
ἀχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἄγω. 
ἀχθήσεσθε, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ἄνω. 
ἅψας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of dra. 
ἅψῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of arrs. 


βαλῶ, fut. act. of βάλλω. 

βάλω, -λῃ, (-Ae), 2 aor. act. subj. (impv.) of Saree. 
βαρείσθω, pres. impv. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Bape. 
βάψῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Barre. 
βεβαμμένον, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of βάπτω. 
βέβληκεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of βάλλω. 
βεβλημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of βάλλω. 

βέβληται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of βάλλω. 

βληθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of βάλλω. 

βλήθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of βάλλω. 


γαμησάτωσαν, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. plur. of wayde. 
γεγένημαι, pf. pass. of γίνομαι. 

γεγέννημαι, pf. pass. of γεννάω. 

γέγοναν (-νώς), 2 pf. act. 3 pers. plur. (ptep.) of γινομω;. 
γεγόνει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. (without augm.) of yivouan 
γενάμενος, 2 aor. mid. ptep. (Tdf. ed. 7) of yivoun. 
γενέσθω, 2 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. of γίνομαι. 

γενηθήτω, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of γένομει. 
γένησθε, 2 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of γίνομαι. 
γένωνται, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of γίνομαι. 
γήμας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of γαμέω. 

ips, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing. of γαμέω. 

yor, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of γινώσκω. 

yous, 2 aor. act. ptep. of γινώσκω. 

γνῶ, γνῷ, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 3 pers. sing. of yowors. 
γνῶθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of γινώσκω. 

Ὑνωριοῦσιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of γνωρίζω. 
Ὑνωσθῃ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. οἱ νενώσκαν. 
γνωσθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of γενώσκω- 
γνώσομαι, fat. of γινώσκω. 

ere, 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of γινώσκω. 


713 


Forms oy VERBS. 


ϑαρήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of δέρω. 

δέδεκται, pf. 3 pers. sing. of δέχομαι. 

δεδεκώς, pf. act. ptep. of δέω. 

δέδεμαι, pf. pass. of δέω. 

δεδιωγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of διώκω. 

δέδοται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 

δεδώκεισαν, plpf. act. 8 pers. plur. of δίδωμι, 

δέῃ, pres. subj. of impers. δεῖ. 

δεθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of δέω. 

δείραντες, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of δέρω. 

δέξαι, 1 aor. impv. of δέχομαι. 

δέξηται (-wvrat), 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of δέχοιμι. 

δῆσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of δέω. 

ϑήσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of δέα. 

διαβάς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of διαβαίνω. 

διαβῆναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of διαβαίνω. 

διάδος, 2 aor. act. impv. of διαδίδωμι. 

διακαθᾶραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of διακαθαίρω. 

διαλλάγηθι, 2 aor. pass. impv. of διαλλάσσω. 

διαμείνῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of διαμένω, 

διαμεμενηκότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of diapéren 

διαμένεις, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of διαμένω. 

Stapevets, fut. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of διαμένω. 

διανοίχθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of διανοίγω. 

διαρ(ρ)ήξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of διαρρήγνυμι. 

διασπαρέντες, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of Sur 
σπείρω. 

ϑιασπασθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of διασπαω. 

διαστάσης, 2 aor. act. ptep. gen. sing. fem. of δεΐντημι, 

διαστρέψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of διαστρέφω. 

διαταγείς, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of διατάσσω. 

διαταχθέντα, 1 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of διατάσσω»- 

Siareraypevos, pf. pass. ptep. of διατάσσω. 

διατεταχέναι, pf. act. inf. of διατάσσω. 

διδόασι, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of δίδωμι. 

διέβησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of διαβαίνω. 

StetAov, 2 aor. act. of διαιρέω. 

διενέγκῃ. 1 or 2 aor. act. subj. 8 pers. sing. of διαφέρον 

διερ(ρ)ήγνυτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of διαρρήγνυμι- 

διέρ(ρ)ηξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of διαρρήγνυμι. 

διερ(ρ)ήσσετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Stappyyrigte 

διεσάφησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of διασαφέω. 

διεσπάρησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of διασπεέρω. 

διεσπᾶσθαι, pf. pass. inf. of διασπάω. 

διεστειλάμην, 1 aor. mid. of διαστέλλω. 

διέστη, 2 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of διΐστημε. 

διεστραμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of διαστρέφω. 

διέταξα, 1 aor. act. of διατάσσω. 

διεφθάρην, 2 aor. pass. of διαφθείρω. 

διεφθαρμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of διαφθείρω. 

διηκόνουν, impf. act. of διακονέω. 

Sujvoryev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. Of διανοίγω. 

διήνοιξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of διανοίγω. 

διηνοίχθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of di.avoiya. 

διορυγῆναι, 2 aor. pass. inf. of διορύσσω- 

ϑιορυχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of διορύσσω. 

διώδευε, impf. 3 pers. sing. of διοδεύω. 

διωξάτω, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of διώκω 


Forms OF VERBS. 


διώξητε, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of διώκω. 
διωχθήσονται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of διώκω. 
δοθεῖσαν, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. ace. sing. fem. of δίδωμι. 
δοθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 
δοθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of δίδωμι. 

Soi, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 

δός, δότε, δότω, 2 aor. act. impv. of δίδωμι. 
δοῦναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of δίδωμι. 

δούς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of δίδωμι. 

δύνῃ, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of δύναμαι- 

86, δώῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμε.- 
δῴη, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of δίδωμι. 


δῶμεν, δῶτε, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 2 pers. plur. of δίδωμι. 
δώσῃ (-cwpev), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. (1 pers. 


plur.) of δίδωμι. 


ἔβαλον (-av, Alex. 8 pers. plur.), 2 aor act. of βάλλω. 
ἐβάσκανε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of Baccuwe. 
ἐβδελυγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of βδελύσσω 
ἐβέβλητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of βαλλω. 
ἐβλήθην, 1 aor. pass. of βάλλω. 

ἐγγιεῖ, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of ἐγγίζω. 
ἐγγίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγγίζω. 

ἐγεγόνει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of yivopas 
ἔγειραι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ἐγείρω. 

ἐγεῖραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγείρω. 

éyelpov, pres. pass. impv. of ἐγείρω. 

ἐγενήθην, 1 aor. pass. of γίνομαι. 

ἐγεννήθην, 1 aor. pass. of γεννάω. 

ἐγερεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐγείρω- 

ἐγερθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of ἐγείρω. 
ἐγερθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ¢yepen 
ἐγέρθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of ἐγείρω. 
ἐγήγερμαι, pf. pass. of ἐγείρω. 

ἔγημα, 1 aor. act. of γαμέω. 

éykpivat, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγκρίνω. 


éyvaxay (i. q. ἐγνώκασιν), pf. act. 8 pers. plur. of γινώσκω. 


ἐγνωκέναι, pf. act. inf. of γινώσκω. 

ἔγνων, 2 aor. act. of γινώσκω. 

ἔγνωσται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of γινωεν κω. 
ἔγχρισαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. ot éyxpie. 

ἐγχρῖσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγχρίω. 

ἔγχρισον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ἐγχρίω. 

ἐδαφιοῦσιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of ἐδυΦιῴω. 
ἐδέετο, ἐδεεῖτο, ἐδεῖτο, impf. 3 pers. sing. of d<oma 
ἔδει, impf. of impers. δεῖ. 

ἔδειραν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of δέρω. 

ἔδησα, 1 aor. act. of δέω. 

ἐδίωξα, 1 aor. act. of διώκω. 

ἐδολιοῦσαν, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of d0AWe. 
ἔδραμον, 2 aor. act. of τρέχω. 

ἔδυ, ἔδυσεν, 2 and 1 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of δυνω.. 
ἔζην. ἐζῆτε, ἔζων, impf. act. of ζάω. 

ἔζησα, 1 aor. act. of Caw. 

ἐθέμην, 2 aor. mid. of τίθημι. 

ἔθετο (-evro), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of ri6rus 
ἔθηκα, 1 aor. act. of τίθημι. 


714 


Forms oF VERBS 


ἔθου, 2 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of τίθημι. 

ἔθρεψα, 1 aor. act. of τρέφω. 

ἐθύθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of θύω. 

ela, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of édw. 

εἴασα, 1 aor. act. of ἐάω. 

εἶδα, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of εἴδω. 

εἰθισμένον, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of ἐθίζω. 

εἵλατο (-ero), aor. mid. 8 pers. sing. of αἱρέω. 
εἴληπται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of λαμβάνω. 

εἴληφες (-pas), pf. act. 2 pers. sing. of λαμβάνω. 
εἴλκον, impf. act. of Axo. 

εἱλκωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἑλκόω. 

εἴξαμεν, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of εἴκω. 

εἰσδραμοῦσα, 2 aor. act. ptep. fem. of εἰστρέχω. 
εἰσελήλυθαν (-λύθασιν), pf. 3 pers. plur. of εἰσέρχομαι- 
εἰστξει, impf. 3 pers. sing. of εἴσειμι. 

εἰσίασιν, pres. ind. 3 pers. plur. of εἴσειμι. 
εἱστήκεισαν, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of torn. 

εἶχαν, εἴχοσαν, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of ἔχω. 
εἴων, impf. of ἐάω. 

ἐκαθέ(ον ἄγρισεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of καθαρίζω. 
éxa0e(or αγ)ρίσθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of καθαρίζω. 
ἐκδόσεται, -δώσεται, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκδίδωμε. 
ἐκέκραξα and ἔκραξα, 1 aor. act. of κράζω. 

ἐκέρασα, 1 aor. act. of κεράννυμι. 

ἐκέρδησα, 1 aor. act. of κερδαίνω. 

ἐκκαθάρατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἐκκαθαίρω. 
ἐκκαθάρῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκκαθαιρω. 
ἐκκεχυμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐκχέω. 

ἐκκοπήσῃ, 2 fut. pass. 2 pers. sing. of ἐκκόπτω. 
ἔκκοψον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ἐκκόπτω. 

ἔκλασα, 1 aor. act. of κλάω. 

ἔκλαυσα, 1 aor. act. of κλαίω. 

ἐκλέλησθε, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of ἐκλανθάνω. 
ἐκλήθην, 1 aor. pass. of καλέω. 

ἐκόψασθε, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. plur. of κόπτω. 
ἐκπλεῦσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐκπλέω 

ἔκραξα, 1 aor. act. of κράζω. 

ἐκρύβη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of κρύπτω. 

ἐκσῶσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐκσώζω. 

ἐκτενεῖς, fut. act. 2 pers. sing. of ἐκτείνω. 

ἐκτησάμην, 1 aor. of κτάομαι. 

ἔκτισται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of κτίζω. 

ἐκτραπῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκτρέπω. 
ἐκτραπήσονται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκτρέπω 
ἐκφύῃ, pres. subj. or 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of expuw 
ἐκφυῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of expo. 
ἐκχέαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐκχέω. 

ἐκχέατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of éxyéw. 
ἐκχέετε, pres. (or 2 aor.) act. impy. 2 pers. plur of éxyéw 
ἐκχυννόμενος, ἐκχυνόμενος, see ἐκχέω. 

ἐλάβατε (-Bere), 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of AauSurw. 
ἔλάκησε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of λάσκω. 

ἔλαχε, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of λαγχάνω. 

ἐλέησον, 1 aor. act. impy. of ἐλεέω. 

ἐλεύσομαι, fut. of ἔρχομαι. 

ἐληλακότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of ἔλαυνω. 
ἐλήλυθα, pf. of ἔρχομαι- 


Forms OF VERBS. 


ἐλιθάσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of λιθάζω. 
ἑλκύσαι or ἑλκῦσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἕλκω. 

ἐλλογᾶτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐλλογέω. 
ἑλόμενος, 2 aor. mid. ptcp. of aipéw. 

ἐλπιοῦσιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of ἐλπίζω. 

ἔμαθον, 2 aor. act. of μανθάνω. 

ἐμασσῶντο, ἐμασῶντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of μασ(σ)άομαι. 
ἐμβάς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ἐμβαίνω. 

ἐμβάψας, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of ἐμβάπτω. 

ἐμβῆναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἐμβαίνω. 

ἔμιξε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of μίγνυμι. 
ἐμπεπλησμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐμπίπλημι. 

ἐμπλακείς, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of ἐμπλήσσω. 

ἐμπλησθῶ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. sing. of ἐμπίπλημι. 
ἐνεδυναμοῦτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐνδυναμόω. 
évetxev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐνέχω. 

évévevoy, impf. act. of ἐννεύω. 

ἐνέπλησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐμπίπλημι. 
ἐνεπλήσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐμπίπλημι. 
ἐνέπρησε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐμπρήθω. 


ἐνέπτυον, -σαν, impf. and 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐμπτύω. 


ἐνεστηκότα, pf. act. ptep. ace. sing. mase. of ἐνίστημι 


ἐνεστῶτα, -ῶσαν, -ῶτος, pf. act. ptep. ace. mase. and fem. 


and gen. sing. of ἐνίστημι. 
ἐνετειλάμην, 1 aor. mid. of ἐντέλλω. 
ἐνεφάνισαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐμφανίζω. 
ἐνεφύσησε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐμφυσάω. 
ἐνεχθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of φέρω. 
ἐνήργηκα, pi. act. of evepyéw. 
ἐνκρῖναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐγκρίνω. 
ἐνοικοῦν, pres. act. ptcp. nom sing. neut. of ἐνοικέω. 
ἐντελεῖται, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing of ἐντέλλω. 
ἐντέταλται, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐντέλλω. 
évtpamy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐντρέπω. 
ἐντραπήσονται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐντρέπω. 
ἔνυξε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of νύσσω. 
ἐνύσταξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of νυστάζω. 
ἐνῴκησε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐνοικέω. 
ἐξαλ(ε)ιφθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ἐξαλείφω. 
ἐξαναστήσῃ, 1 aor. act subj. 3 pers. sing of ἐξανίστημι 
ἐξανέστησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐξανίστημι. 
ἐξάρατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἐξαίρω. 
ἐξαρεῖτε, fut act. 2 pers. plur. of ἐξαίρω. 
ἐξαρθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξαίρω. 
ἐξέδετο or ἐξέδοτο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκδίδωμε. 
ἐξείλατο or ἐξείλετο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξαιρέω. 
ἐξεκαύθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκκαίω. 
ἐξέκλιναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκκλίνω. 
ἐξεκόπης, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing. of ἐκκόπτω. 
ἔξελε, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἐξαιρέω. 
ἐξελέξω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ἐκλέγω. 
ἐξέληται, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξαιρέω 


ἐξενέγκαντες, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of ἐκφέρω. 


ἐξενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἐκῴφερω. 

ἐξένευσα, 1 aor. act. either of ἐκνεύω or éxvéw. 
ἐξεπέτασα, 1 aor. act. of ἐκπετάννυμι. 

ἐξεπλάγησαν. 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκπλήσσω. 
ἐξέπλει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκπλέω. 


715 


Forms OF VERBS. 


ἐξεστακέναι, pf. act. inf. of ἐξίστημι. 

ἐξέστραπται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκστρεφω. 

ἐξετάσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐξετάζω. 

ἐξετράπησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκτρεπω. 

ἐξέχεε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐκχέω. 

ἐξεχύθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκχεω. 

ἐξέωσεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξωθέω. 

ἐξήεσαν, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ἔξειμι. 

ἐξηραμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of Enpaive. 

ἐξήρανα and -ράνθην, 1 aor. act. and pass. of ξηραίνι». 

ἐξήρανται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Enpaive. 

ἐξηρεύνησα, 1 aor. act. of ἐξερευνάω. 

ἐξηρτισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐξαρτίζω. 

ἐξήχηται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξηχέω. 

ἐξιέναι, pres. inf. of ἔξειμι 

ἐξιστάνων, ἐξιστῶν, sce ἐξίστημι. 

ἐξοίσουσι, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐκφέρω. 

ἐξῶσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐξωθέω. 

ἔξωσεν or ἐξῶσεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐξωθέω. 

ἑόρακα, pf. act. of ὁράω. 

ἐπαγαγεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ἐπάγω. 

ἔπαθεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of πάσχω. 

ἐπαναπαήσομαι, fut. mid. of ἐπαναπαύω (see mavw). 

ἐπάξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ἐπάγω. 

ἐπάρας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of ἐπαίρω. 

ἐπειράσω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of πειράζω. 

ἐπειρᾶτο (-pavto), impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of πειράω. 

ἔπεισα, 1 aor. act. of πείθω. 

ἐπείσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πείθω. 

ἐπεῖχεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπέχω. 

ἐπέκειλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐπικέλλω. 

ἐπεκέκλητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπικαλέω. 

ἐπελάθετο (-fovto), 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of émAay 
θάνομαι 

ἔπέλειχον, impf. act. of ἐπιλείχω. 

ἐπεποίθει, 2 plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of πείθω. 

ἔπεσα, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of πίπτω. 

ἐπέστησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐφίστημι. 

ἐπέσχεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπέχω. 

ἐπετίμα, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιτιμάω. 

ἐπετράπη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιτρέπω. 

ἐπεφάνη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιφαίνω. 

ἐπέχρισεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπιχρίω. 

ἐπηκροῶντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of émaxpodopat. 

ἐπήνεσεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπαινέω. 

ἔπηξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers sing. of πήγνυμι. 

ἐπῆρα, 1 aor. act. of ἐπαίρω. 

ἐπήρθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπαίρω. 

ἐπῆρκεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπαίρω. 

ἐπῃσχύνθην and ἐπαισχύνθην, 1 aor. of ἐπαισχύνοιιαε 

ἐπίβλεψαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ἐπιβλέπω 

ἐπιβλέψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐπιβλέπω. 

ἐπίβλεψον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ἐπιβλέπω. 

ἔπιδε, impy. of ἐπεῖδον. 

ἐπίθες, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἐπιτίθημι. 

ἐπικέκλησαι, pf. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ἐπικαλέω 

ἐπικέκλητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of επικαλέω 

ἐπικληθέντα, 1 aor. pass. ptep. acc. sing. mase. of ἐπικαλεω. 


Forms oF VERBS. 


ἐπικράνθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 8 pers. plur. of rucpuire. 

ἐπιλελησμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐπιλανθάνομαι. 

ἐπιμελήθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of ἐπιμελέομαι. 

ἔπιον, 2 aor. act. of πίνω. 

ἐπιπλήξγς, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing. of ἐπιπλήσσω. 

ἐπιποθήσατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ἐπιποθέω 

ἐπιστᾶσα, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of ἐφίστημε. 

ἐπίσταται, pres. ind. mid. 3 pers. sing. of épiornus. 

ἐπίσταται, pres. ind. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπίσταμαι- 

ἐπίστηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of ἐφίστημι. 

ἐπιστώθης, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing. of πιστόω. 

ἐπιτεθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἐπετίθημι. 

ἐπιτιθέασι, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐπιτίθημι. 

ἐπιτίθει, pres. act. impv. of ἐπιτίθημε. 

ἐπιτιμῆσαι (-μήσαι), 1 aor. act. inf. (opt. 8 pers sing.) 
of ἐπιτιμάω. 

ἐπιφάναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ἐπιφαίνω. 

ἐπλανήθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πλανάω. 

ἐπλάσθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of πλάσσω. 

ἐπλήγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of πλήσσω. 

ἔπλησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of πίμπλημε. 

ἐπλήσθη (θησαν), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of 
πίμπλημι. 

ἐπλουτήσατε, 1 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of πλουτέω. 

ἐπλουτίσθητε, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of πλουτίζω 

ἔπλυναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of πλύνω. 

ἔπνευσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of πνέω. 

ἐπνίγοντο, impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πνίγω. 

ἔπνιξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of πνίγω 

ἐπράθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of πιπράσκω. 

ἐπρίσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. cf πρίζω. 

ἐπροφήτευον (-ca), impf. (1 aor.) act. of προφητεύω. 

ἔπτυσε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of πτύω. 

ἐπώκειλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἐποκέλλω. 

ἐρ(ρ)άντισε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ῥαντίζω. 

ἐρ(ρ)άπισαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ῥαπίζω. 

ἐρριζωμένοι, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of ῥιζόω. 

Ep(p)tppevor, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of ῥίπτω. 

€p(p)urrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ῥίπτω. 

Ep(p)upay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ῥίπτω. 

ἐρ(ρ)ύσατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ῥύομαι- 

ἐρ(ρ)ύσθην, 1 aor. pass. of ῥύομαι. 

ἔρρωσο, ἔρρωσθε, pf. pass. impv. of ῥώννυμε. 

ἐσάλπισε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of σαλπίζω. 

ἔσβεσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of σβέννυμι. 

ἐσείσθην, 1 aor. pass. of σείω. 

ἐσκυλμένοι, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of σ εὐλλα 

ἐσπαρμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σπείρω. 

ἐστάθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἵστημι. 

ἑστάναι, ἑστᾶναι, pf. act. inf. of ἵστημι. 

ἑστήκεισαν, -κεσαν, pipf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἔσττρω. 

ἔστηκεν, imp. 3 pers. sing. of στήκω. 

ἑστηκώς, pf. act. ptep. of ἵστημε. 

ἔστην, “ aor. act. of ἵστημι. 

ἐστηριγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of στηρίζω. 

ἐστήρικται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of στηρίζω. 

ἑστός (~ds), pt. act. ptep. neut. (mase. and neut.) of ἴστημα. 

ἐστράφησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. οὗ στρέφω. 


716 


Forms or VERBS 


ἐστρωμένον, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of στρωννύω. 
ἔστρωσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of στρωννύω. 
ἔστωσαν, imp. 3 pers. plur. of εἰμί. 

ἐσφαγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σφάζω. 
ἐσφραγισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σφραγίζω. 
ἔσχηκα, pe. act. of ἔχω. 

ἐσχηκότα, pf. act. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of ἔχω. 
ἔσχον, 2 aor. act. of ἔχω- 

ἐτάφη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of θάπτω. 
ἐτέθην, 1 aor. pass. of τίθημι. 

ἐτεθνήκει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of θνήσκω. 
ἔτεκεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of τίκτω. 

ἐτέχθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of τίκτω. 

ἐτίθει, impf. act. 8 pers. sing. of τίθημι. 

ἐτύθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of θύω. 
εὐηρεστηκέναι (εὐαρεστηκέναι), pf. act. inf. of εὐαρεστέω. 
εὐξάμην (εὐξαίμην), 1 aor. (opt.) of εὔχομαι. 
εὕραμεν, εὗραν, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of εὑρίσκω. 
εὑράμενος and εὑρόμενος, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of εὑρίσκω. 
εὑρεθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of εὑρίσκω» 
εὑρηκέναι, pf. act. inf. of εὑρίσκω. 

εὐφράνθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of εὐφραίνω. 
ἔφαγον, 2 aor. act. of ἐσθίω. 

ἐφαλλόμενος, ἐφαλόμενος, 2 aor. ptep. of ἐφάλλομαι- 
ἐφάνην, 2 aor. pass. of φαίνω. 

ἔφασκεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of φάσκω. 
ἐφείσατο, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of φείδομαι- 
ἐφεστώς, pf. act. ptep. of ἐφίστημι. 

ἔφθακα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of φθάνω. 
ἐφθάρην, 2 aor. pass. of φθείρω. 

Eide (Emde), impy. of ἐπεῖδον. 

ἐφίλει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of φιλέω. 
ἐφίσταται, pres. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ἐφίστημε, 
ἔφραξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of φράσσω. 
ἐφρύαξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of φρυάσσω. 
ἔφυγον, 2 aor. act. of φεύγω. 

ἐχάρην, 2 aor. pass. (as act.) of χαίρω. 

ἔχρισα, 1 aor. act. of χρίω. 

ἐχρῶντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of χράομαι. 

ἐψεύσω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ψεύδομαι- 
ἑώρακαν, -ράκασιν, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ὁράω. 
ἑωράκει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ὁράω. 
ἑωρακώς, pf. act. ptep. of ὁράω. 

ἑώρων, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ὁράω. 


ζβέννυτε, pres. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (Td£.) of σβϑέννυιω 
τῇ, tiv or ζῆν, ζῇς, ζῶ, see Cao. 

ζῶσαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ζώννυμε. 

ζώσει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ζώννυμει. 


ἠβουλήθην, etc., see βούλομαι. 

ἤγαγον, 2 aor. act. of ἄγω. 

ἠγάπα, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀγαπάω. 
ἠγαπηκόσι, pf. act. ptep. dat. plur. of ἀγαπάω. 
ἤγγειλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀγγέλλω. 
ἤγγικα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of ἐγγίζω. 


Forms OF VERBS. 


ἤγειρεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἐγείρω. 
ἠγέρθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἐγείρω. 


ἤγετο (-yovro), impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of ἄγω. 


ἥγημαι, pf. of ἡγέομαι. 

ἡγνικότες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of ἁγνιζω. 
ἡγνισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἁγνίζω. 

ἤγνοουν, impf. act. of ἀγνοέω 

ἤδεισαν, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of οἶδα (see εἴδω, IT). 
ἠδύνατο (ἐδύνατο), impf. 3 pers. sing. of δύναμαι. 
ἠδυνήθη, ἠδυνάσθη, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of δύναμαι. 
ἤθελον, impf. of θέλω. 

ἥκασι, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἥκω. 
ἠκολουθήκαμεν, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of ἀκολουθεω. 
ἥλατο, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing of ἅλλομαι. 
ἠλαττωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐλαττόω. 
ἠλαύνετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἐλαύνω- 
ἠλεήθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἐλεέω. 

ἠλεημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἐλεέω. 

ἠλέησα, 1 aor. act. of ἐλεέω. 

ἤλειψα, 1 aor. act. of ἀλείφω. 

ἡλκωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἑλκόω. 

ἤλλαξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἄλλασσω. 
ἥλλετο, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ἅλλομαι 

ἤλπικα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of ἐλπίζω. 
ἡμάρτηκα, pf. act. of ἁμαρτάνω. 

ἥμαρτον, 2 aor. act. of ἁμαρτάνω. 

ἤμεθα, ἦμεν, impf. 1 pers. plur. of εἰμί. 

ἤμελλον and ἔμελλον, impf. of μέλλω. 

ἤμην, impf. of εἰμί. 

ἠμφιεσμένος, pf. pass. ptep of ἀμφιέννυμε. 
ἤνεγκα, 1 aor. act. of φέρω. 

ἠνειχόμην, impf. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἠνεσχόμην, 2 aor. mid. of ἀνέχω. 

ἠνέχθην, 1 aor. pass. of depo. 

qvewypeévos, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἠνέῳξα (ἠνέωξα Tr ?), 1 aor. act. ot ἀνοίγω 
ἠνεῴχθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἀνοιγω. 

ἠνοίγην. 2 aor. pass. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἠνοιγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀνοίγω. 

ἤνοιξα, 1 aor. act. of ἀνοίγω 

ἠνοίχθην, 1 aor. pass of ἀνοίγω. 

ἥξει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἥκω. 

ἥξῃ» 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ἥκω. 

ἠξίου, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀξιόω. 

ἠξίωται. pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἀξιόω. 
ἠπατήθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of arataw. 
ἠπείθησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ἀπειθεω- 
ἠπείθουν. impf. act. of ἀπειθέω. 

ἠπείλει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπειλέω- 
ἠπίστουν, impf. act. of ἀπιστέω. 

ἠπόρει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἀπορέω. 
ἥπτοντο, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. ot ἅπτω. 

ἦρα, 1 aor. act. of αἴρω. 


tip-(elp-)yatouny, -σάμην. impf. and 1 aor. of ἐσναζοωω. 


ἠρέθισα, 1 aor. act. of ἐρεθίζω. 

ἦρεσα, 1 aor. act. of ἀρέσκω. 

ἤρεσκον, impf. act. of ἀρεσκω. 

ἠρημώθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ésyu0w. 


717 


_—_—— Eee 


ἠρημωμένην, pf. pass. ptep. acc. sing. fem. of éunuoe 
ἤρθην, 1 aor. pass. of αἴρω. 

ἤρκεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of αἴρω. 

ἡρμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of αἴρω. 

ἠρνεῖτο, impf. 8 pers. sing. of ἀρνεοιμαι. 

ἤρνημαι, pf. pass. of ἀρνέομαι. 

ἠρνημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of dpveoua. 
ἠρνησάμην, 1 aor. of ἀρνέομαι 

ἠρνήσω, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing. of ἀρνεομαι- 
ἠρξάμην, 1 aor. mid. of ἄρχω. 

ἡρπάγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dprafw. 
ἥρπασε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ἅρπάζω. 
ἡρπάσθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἁρπάζ.». 
ἠρτυμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀρτύω. 

ἤρχοντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ἔρχομαι. 
ἠρώτουν, ἠρώτων, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of épwraw 
ἧς, ἦσθα, impf. 2 pers. sing. of εἰμί. 

ἤσθιον, impf. act. of ἐσθίω. 

ἡσσώθητε, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ἡττάω. 
ἠτήκαμεν, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of αἰτέω. 

ἤτησα, -σάμην, 1 aor. act. and mid. of afrée 
ἠτίμασα, 1 aor. act. of ἀτιμάζω. 

ἠτίμησα, 1 aor. act. of ἀτιμάω. 

ἠτιμωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ἀτιμόω. 

ἡτοίμακα, pf. act. of ἑτοιμάζω. 

ἠτοῦντο, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of airéw. 
ἡττήθητε, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ἡττάω- 
ἥττηται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἡττάω. 

ἤτω, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing. of εἰμί. 

ηὐδόκησα, 1 aor. act. of εὐδοκέω. 

ηὐδοκοῦμεν, impf. act. 1 pers. plur. of εὐδοκέω. 
ηὐκαίρουν, impf. of εὐκαιρέω. 

ηὐλήσαμεν, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of αὐλέω. 
ηὐλόγει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of εὐλογέω 
ηὐλόγηκα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of εὐλογέω. 
ηὔξησα, 1 aor. act. of αὔξανω. 

ηὐπορεῖτο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of εὐπορέω. 
ηὐρίσκετο, imp. pass. 3 pers. sing. of εὑρίσκω. 
ηὕρισκον, impf. act. of εὑρίσκω. 

ηὐφόρησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of εὐφορέω. 
ηὐφράνθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of εὐφραίνω. 
ηὐχαρίστησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of εὐχαριστεω. 
ηὐχόμην, impf. of εὔχομαι. 

ἤφιε, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ἀφίημι (ἀφίω). 
ἤχθην, 1 aor. pass. of ἄγω. 

ἠχρειώθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ἀχρειόω. 
ἡψάμην, 1 aor. mid. of ἅπτω. 


θάψαι, 1 aor. act inf. of θάπτω. 

θεῖναι, θείς. 2 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of τίθημι. 
θέμενος, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of τίθημι. 

θέντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of τίθημι. 
θέσθε, 2 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. of τίθημ'. 
Gere, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of τίθημι. 


θίγῃ. θίγῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 and 3 pers. sing. of dey 


γάνω. 
θῶ, 2 aor. act. subj. of τίθημι. 


Forms oF VERBS 


Forms os VERBS. 


ἰάθη (-θῃ), 1 aor. pass. ind. (subj.) 8 pers. sing. of inouas. 
ἴαται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ἰάομαι. 

ἰᾶται, pres. 8 pers. sing. of ἰάομαι- 

ἰᾶτο, impf. 8 pers. sing. ἐάομαι. 

ἴδαν, ἴδον, collat. forms of εἶδον. 

ἴσασι, 8 pers. plur. of the 2 pf. οἶδα (see εἴδω, L.). 
ἴσθι, impv. 2 pers. sing. of εἰμί. 

ἱστάνομεν and ἱστῶμεν, pres. ind. 1 pers. plur. of ἔστημε. 
ἴστε, 2 pers. plur. ind. or impv. of οἶδα (see εἴδω. 11). 
ἱστήκειν, plpf. act. of ἵστημι. 

ἰώμενος, pres. ptep. of ἰώομαι. 


καθαριεῖ, (Attic) fut. 8 pers. sing. of καθαρίζω 

καθαρίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of καθαρίζω. 

καθαρίσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of κωϑωρμιζω. 

καθαρίσθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of καθαρίζω 

καθεῖλε, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of καθαιρευ. 

καθελῶ, fut. act. of καθαιρέω. 

κάθῃ, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of κάθημαι. 

καθῆκαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of KaOinu 

καθήσεσθε, fut. 2 pers. plur. of κάθημαι 

καθῆψε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers, sing. of καθαπτω. 

κάθου, pres. impv. of κάθημαι. 

καλέσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of καλέω. 

κάλεσον, 1 aor. act. impv. of καλέω. 

κάμητε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of κάμνω. 

κατάβα and κατάβηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of καταβαίνω. 

καταβάς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of καταβαίνω. 

καταβέβηκα, pf. act. of καταβαίνω. 

καταβῇ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of καταβαινω 

κατακαήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of κατακαίω. 

κατακαῦσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of κατακαίω. 

κατακαυχῶ, pres. impv. of κατακαυχάομαι. 

καταλάβῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of carahauSave. 

καταπίῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of καταπένω 

καταποθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of καταπινω. 

καταρτίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. or opt. (3 pers. sing.) of κα- 
ταρτίζω. 

κατασκηνοῖν (-νοῦν), pres. act. inf. of κατασκηνόω. 

κατάσχωμεν, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of κατέχω 

κατεαγῶσιν, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of κατάγνυμε. 

κατέαξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of κατάγνυμε 

κατεάξει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of κατάγνυμι. 

κατέβη (-ησαν), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of arraSuine. 

κατεγνωσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καταγινώσκω 

κατειλημμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καταλαμϑάνω. 

κατειληφέναι, pf. act. inf. of καταλαμβάνω. 

κατεκάη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of κατακαίω 

κατέκλασε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of caraxAuw. 

κατέκλεισα, 1 aor. act. of κατακλείω 

κατενεχθείς, 1 aor, pass. ptep. of καταφέρω. 

κατενύγησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of catraviavo 

κατεπέστησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of κατεῴεστ ue 

κατέπιε, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of καταπίνω. 

κατεπόθην, 1 aor. pass. of καταπίνω. 

κατεσκαμμένα, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. nevot of ταν 
σκάπτω. 


718 


Forms or VERBS. 


κατεστρεμμένος, -στραμμένος, pf. pass. ptcp. of καταστρέφω. 
κατεστρώθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of καταστρωννυμω. 
κατευθῦναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of κατευθύνω. 

κατευθύναι, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of κατευθυνω. 
κατέφαγον, 2 aor. act. of κατεσθίω. 

κατήγγειλα, 1 aor. act. of καταγγέλλω. 

κατηγγέλη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. οἱ καταγγελλω. 
κατήνεγκα, 1 aor. act. of καταφέρω. 

κατήντηκα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of «αταντάω. 
κατηράσω, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing. of Katapunua 
κατήργηται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of καταργεω. 
κατηρτισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καταρτίζω. 
κατηρτίσω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of καταρτιζω. 
κατῃσχύνθην, 1 aor. pass. of καταισχύνω. 

κατήχηνται, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of κατηχεω. 
κατηχήσω, 1 aor. act. subj. of κατηχέω. 

κατίωται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of κατιόω 

κατῴκισεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of κατοικιζω. 
καυθήσωμαι, καυχήσωμαι, 566 καίω. 

καυχᾶσαι, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing of καυχάομαι 
kexa0a(or ε)ρισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καθαριζω. 
κεκαθαρμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καθαίρω. 

κεκαλυμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καλύπτω. 

κεκαυμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of καίω. 

κεκερασμένου, pf. pass. ptep. gen. sing. mase. of κεράννυμι 
κέκλεισμαι, pf. pass. of κλείω 

κέκληκα, pf. act. of καλέω 

κέκληται, pf. pass. 3 pers sing of καλεω. 

κέκλικεν, pf. act. 3 pers. ‘sing. of κλίνω. 

κέκμηκας, pf. act. 2 pers. sing. of κάμνω. 

κεκορεσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of κορέννυμι. 

κέκραγε. 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of κράζω. 

κεκράξονται, fut. mid. 3 pers. plur. of κράζω. 
κεκρατηκέναι, pf. act. inf. of κρατέω. 

κεκράτηνται, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of κρατέω. 

κεκρίκει, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of κρίνω. 

κέκριμαι, pf. pass. of κρίνω. 

κεκρυμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of κρύπτω. 

κεράσατε, 1 aor. act. impv..2 pers. plur. of κεράννυμε. 
κερδανῶ, κερδήσω, fut. act. of κερδαίνω. 

κερδάνω, 1 aor. act. subj. of κερδαίνω. 

κεχάρισμαι, pf. of χαρίζομαι. 

κεχαριτωμένη, pf. pass. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of χαριτόω 
κέχρημαι, pf. of χράομαι. 

κεχωρισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of χωρίζω. 

κηρύξαι (al. κηρῦξαι), 1 aor. act. inf. of κηρύσσω. 
κλάσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of κλάω. 

κλαύσατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of κλαίω. 
κλαύσω, κλαύσομαι, fut. of κλαίω. 

κλεισθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of κλείω. 
κληθῇς, κληθῶμεν, κληθῆναι, κληθέν, 1 aor. pass. of καλέω. 
κλῶμεν, pres. ind. act. 1 pers. plur. of κλάω. 
κλώμενον, pres. pass. ptep. neut. of κλάω. 

κλῶντες, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. masce. of κλάω. 
κοιμώμενος, pres. pass. ptep. of κοιμάω. 

κολλήθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of κολλάω. 

κομιεῖται, (Attic) fut. mid 3 pers. sing. of κομέζω. 
κομίσασα, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem ot κομέζω, 


Forms OF VERBS. 


κορεσθέντες, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of κορέννυμε. 
κόψας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of κόπτω. 

κρᾶζον (not κράζον), pres. ptcp. neut. of κράζω. 
xpatas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of κράζω. 

κράξουσιν, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of κράζω. 

κράτει, pres. impv. of κρατέω. 

κριθήσεσθε, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of κρίνω 
κριθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of κρίνω. 
κρυβῆναι, 2 aor. pass. inf. of κρύπτω. 

κτήσασθε, 1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. of κτάομαι. 
κτήσησθε, 1 aor. mid subj. 2 pers. plur. of κτάυμαι. 


AdBe(-Bq), 2 aor. act. impv. (subj. 3 pers. sing.) of λαμβάνω 
λαθεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of λανθάνω 

λαχοῦσι, 2 aor. act. ptep. dat. plur. of λαγχάνω. 
Adxwpev, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of λαγχάνω. 
λελου(σ)μένος, pf. pass. ptep. of λούω 

λέλυσαι, pf. pass. 2 pers. sing of Avo. 

λη(μ)φθῇ, 1 aor. pass subj 3 pers. sing. of λαμϑάνω. 
ληίμ)ψομαι, fut. of λαμβάνω. 

λίπῃ» 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing of λείπω 


μάθετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of μανθάνω. 

μάθητε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers plur. of μανθάνω. 

μαϑών, 2 aor. act. ptep of μανθάνω 

μακαριοῦσι, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of μακαρίζω. 

μακροθύμησον, 1 aor act. impv of μακμυθυμέω 

μεθιστάναι, pres. act. inf. of μεθίστημι. 

μεθυσϑῶσιν. 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of μεθύσκω. 

μεῖναι, 1 aor. inf. of μένω 

μείναντες, 1 aor. ptep nom. plur mase. of μένω. 

μείνατε, μεῖνον, 1 aor. impv. of μένω. 

μείνῃ, τῆτε, τωσιν, 1 aor subj of μένω. 

μελέτα, pres. act. impv. of μελετάω 

μεμαθηκώς, pf. act. ptep of μανθάνω 

μεμενήκεισαν, plpf. act 3 pers. plur. of μένω. 

μεμιαμμένος Or -σμένος, pf. pass. ptep of μιαίνω 

μεμίανται, pf. pass 3 pers sing. or plur. of μιαίνω. 

μεμιγμένος, pi. pass. ptep. of μίγνυμι 

μέμνησθε, pf. mid. 2 pers plur of μιμνήσκω. 

μεμύημαι, pf pass. of μυέω. 

pevetre, fut. ind. 2 pers. plur. of μένω. 

μένετε, pres ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of μένω 

μετάβα μετάβηθι, 2 aor act impv. of μεταβαίνω 

μετασταθῶ, 1 aor. pass. subj of μεθίστημι 

μεταστραφήτω, 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, 
στρέφω. 

μετέθηκεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of μετατίθημι 

μετέστησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of μεθίστημι. 

μετέσχηκεν. pf. act 3 pers. sing of μετέχω. 

μετετέθησαν, 1 aor pass. 3 pers. plur. of μετατίθημι 

μετήλλαξαν, 1 aor act. 3 pers plur. of μεταλλάσσω. 

μετῆρεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers sing of peraip» 

μετοικιῶ, (Attic) fut act of μετοικίζω. 

μετῴκισεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of μετοικίζω. 


of μετα- 


719 


Forms or VERBS 


μιανθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj 3 pers. plur of μιαίνω. 
μνησθῆναι, 1 aor. pass inf. of μιμνήσκω. 

μνήσθητι, -τε, 1 aor. pass. impv. of μιμνήσκω. 
μνησθῶ, -θῇς, 1 aor. pass. subj. of μιμνήσκω. 


νενίκηκα, pf. act of νικάω 

νενομοθέτητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers sing. of νομοθετέω. 
νήψατε, 1 aor impv. 2 pers. plur. of νήφω. 

νόει, pres. act. impv. of νοέω 

νοούμενα, pres. pass. ptep. neut. plur. of νοέω. 


ὀδυνᾶσαι, pres. ind. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ὀδυνάω. 
οἴσω. fut. act. of φέρω 

ὀμνύναι, ὀμνύειν, pres. act inf. of ὀμνύω. 

ὀμόσαι. -as, 1 aor act inf and ptep. of ὀμνύω. 
ὀμόσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ὀμνύω. 
ὀναίμην, 2 aor. mid. opt. of ὀνίνημι. 

ὁρῶσαι, pres. act. ptep nom. plur. fem of dpdo. 
ὀφθείς, 1 aor pass. ptep. of dpda. 

ὄψει, ὄψῃ, fut. 2 pers. sing of ὁράω. 

ὄψεσθε, fut. 2 pers. plur. of ὁράω. 

ὄψησθε, 1 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of dpdw. 


παθεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πάσχω. 

πάθῃ, 2 aor- act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of maya. 

παίσῃ, 1 aor. act subj. 3 pers. sing. of παίω. 

παραβολευσάμενος. 1 aor ptep. of mapaBoAevouat. 

παραβουλευσάμενος, 1 aor. ptep. of παραβουλεύομαι. 

παραδεδώκεισαν, plpf. 3 pers. plur of παραδίδωμι. 

παραδιδοῖ, παραδιδῷ. pres subj. 3 pers. sing. of παραδιδωμε 

παραδιδούς (παραδούς), pres (2 aor.) ptep. of παραδίδωμι. 

mapase (-δοῖ). 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of παραδίδωμι. 

παραθεῖναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of παρατίθημι 

παράθϑου, 2 aor. mid. impv. of παρατίθημι. 

παραθῶσιν, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers plur. of παρατίθημι. 

παραιτοῦ, pres. impy. of παραιτέομαι. 

παρακεκαλυμμένος. pf. pass ptep. of παρακαλύπτω. 

παρακεχειμακότι. pf. act ptep. dat sing of παραχειμάζω. 

παρακληθῶσιν, 1 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of γγαμακαλέω 

παρακύψας, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of παρακύπτω. 

παραλη(μ)φθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing of mapadap- 
Bavo. 

παραπλεῦσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of παραπλέω. 

mrapap(p)vapev, 2 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. plur. of παραρρέω. 

παραστῆσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of παρίστημι. 

παραστήσατε, 1 aor act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of παρίστημι. 

παραστῆτε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of παρίστημι. 

παρασχών, 2 aor. act. ptep. of παρέχω 

παρατιθέσθωσαν, pres. impv. 3 pers. plur. of παρατίθημι. 

παρεδίδοσαν, impf. (Alex ) 3 pers. plur. of ταραδίδωμε 

παρέθεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of παρατίθημι. 

πάρει. pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of πάρειμε 

παρειμένος. pf pass ptep. of παρίημι 

παρεῖναι. 2 aor. act. inf. of παρίημι and pres. inf. of πάρειμι 

παρεισάξουσιν, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of παρεισάγω 


Forms OF VERBS. 


παρεισεδύησαν, 2 aor, pass. 8 pers. plur. of παρεισδύω. 

παρεισέδυσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παρεισδυω. 

παρεισενέγκαντες, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of 
παρεισφέρω. 

παρειστήκεισαν, })lpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of παρίστημει. 

παρεῖχαν, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of παρεχω. 

παρειχόμην, impf. mid. of παρέχω. 

παρέκυψεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of παρακύπτω. 

παρελάβοσαν, 2 aor. act. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of mapa- 
λαμβάνω. 

παρελεύσονται, fut. 8 pers. plur. of παρέρχομαι 

παρεληλυθέναι (-θώς), pf. act. inf. (ptcp.) of παρέρχομαι 

παρελθάτω (-θέτω), 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of 
παρέρχομαι 

παρενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of παραφέρω 

παρέξει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of παρέχω. 

παρέξῃ, fut. mid. 2 pers. sing. of παρέχω. 

παρεπίκραναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παραπικραίνω. 

παρεσκεύασται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of παρασκευάζω. 

παρεστηκότες and παρεστῶτες, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. 
mase. of παρίστημι. 

παρεστήσατε, 1 aor. act 2 pers. plur. of παρίστημε. 

παρέτεινε, 1 aor. act 3 pers. sing of παρατείνω. 

παρετήρουν, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of παρατηρέω 

παρήγγειλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παραγγέλλω 

παρηκολούθηκας (-cas), pf. (1 aor.) act. 2 pers. sing. of 
παρακολουθέω. 

παρήνει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of παραινέω 

παρῃτημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of maparreopat. 

παρῃτήσαντο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers plur. of παραιτέομαι 

παρῴκησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of παροικέω 

παρωξύνετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of παροξύνω. 

παρώτρυναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παροτρύνω. 

παρῳχημένος, pf. ptep. of παροίχομαι. 

παυσάτω, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of παύω. 

πεῖν, 2 aor act. inf. of πίνω 

πείσας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of πείθω. 

πείσω, fut. act. of πείθω. 

πέπαυται, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of παύω. 

πεπειραμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of πειράω. 

πεπειρασμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of πειράζω. 

πέπεισμαι, -μένος, pf. pass. ind and ptep. of πεέδω. 

πεπιεσμένος pf. pass ptep. of meta. 

πεπιστεύκεισαν, plpf. act. 8 pers. plur. of πεστεύω. 

πεπιστευκόσι, pi. act. ptep. dat. plur. of πιστεύω. 

πεπλάνησθε, pf. pass 2 pers. plur. of πλανάω 

πεπλάτυνται, pf. pass. 8 pers. sing. of πλατύνω. 

πεπληρωκέναι, pf. act. inf. of πληρόω. 

πέποιθα, 2 pf. of πείθω. 

πέπονθα. 2 pt. of πάσχω 

πεπότικεν. pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ποτίζω. 

πέπρακε, pf act. 3 pers. sing. of πιπράσκω- 

πεπραμένος. pf pass ptep. of πιπράσκω. 

πέπραχα, pf. act. of πράσσω 

πέπτωκα. -κες. -καν, Pf. act. of πίπτω. 

πεπυρωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of πυρόω 

πεπωκε (-kav), pt. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of wu 

πεπωρωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of πωρόω. 


720 


Forms or Verbs. 


περιάψας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of περιάπτω. 

περιδραμόντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of περιτυέχω. 

περιεδέδετο, plpf. pass. 8 pers. sing of περιδέω. 

περιεζωσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of περιζωννύω. 

περιέκρυβον, 2 aor. of περικρύπτω (or impf. Of areouxyibw) 

περιελεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of περιαιρέω. 

περιέπεσον, 2 aor. act. of περιπίπτω. 

περιεσπᾶτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of πε,»ισπάω. 

περιέσχον, 2 aor. act. of περιέχω. 

περιέτεμον, 2 aor. act. of περιτέμνω. 

περίζωσαι, 1 aor. mid impv. of περιζωννύω. 

περιῃρεῖτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of περιαιρεω. 

περιθέντες, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of περετιθημι. 

περιίστασο, pres. mid. (pass.) impy. of περιΐστημι. 

περιπέσητε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of περιπίπτω. 

περιρεραμμένον, pf pass. ptep. neut. of περιρραίνω. 

περιρ(ργήξαντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of περιρρήγννωι 

περισσεῦσαι 1 aor. act. inf., and περισσεύσαι 1 aor act. 
opt. 8 pers. sing., of περισσεύω. 

περιτετμημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of περιτέμνω. 

περιτιθέασιν, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of περιτίθημ.. 

περιτμηθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of περιτέμνω. 

πεσεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πίπτω. 

πεσεῖται (-odvrar), fut. 3 pers. sing. (plww.) of muro. 

πέσετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of πίπτω. 

πέτηται, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of πέτομαι. 

πετώμενος, pres. ptep. of πετάομαι. 

πεφανέρωται (-νερῶσθαι), pf. pass. (inf.) of φανεροω. 

πεφίμωσο, pf. pass. impy. of φιμόω. 

πιάσαι, 1 aor. act inf. of πιάζω. 

πίε, 2 aor. act. impv. of πίνω 


| πιεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πίνω. 


πίεσαι, πίεσθε, fut. 2 pers. sing. and plur. of πίνω. 

πίῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing of πίνω. 

πικρανεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of πικραίνω. 

πῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of πίνω 

πίω, 2 aor. act. subj. of πίνω. 

πλάσας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of πλάσσω. 

πλέξαντες, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of πλέκω 

πλεονάσαι, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of πλεοναζω 

πληθύναι, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of πληθύνω. 

πληθύνει, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of πληθύνω. 

πληθυνεῖ, fut. act 3 pers. sing. of πληθύνω. 

πληθυνθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of πληθύνω. 

πληρωθῇ, -θῆτε, -θῶ, -θῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. of mAnpow. 

πληρῶσαι 1 aor. inf., and πληρώσαι 1 aor. opt. 3 pers 
sing, of πληρόω. 

πλήσας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of πίμπλημι. 

πλησθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of πίμπλημι. 

πλησθῇς, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing. of πίμπλημε 

πνέῃ, pres. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of πνέω. 

ποιήσειαν, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of rovew. 

ποιμαίνει, pres. act. 8 pers. sing. of ποιμαίνω. 

ποιμάνατε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ποιμαίνω. 

ποιμανεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers, sing. of ποιμαίνω. 

πορεύου, pres. mid. impv. of πορεύω. 

πραθέν, 1 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of πιπράσκω. 

πραθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of πιπράσκω. 


Forms oF VERBS 


moods, 2 aor. act. ptep. of προβαίνω. 
προβεβηκυῖα, pf. act. ptep. fem. of προβαίνω 
προγεγονότων, pf. act. ptep. gen. plur. of mpoyivowas 
προεβίβασαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of τροβιβάζω. 
προεγνωσμένος, pi. pass. ptep of προγινώσκω. 
προελεύσεται, fut. 3 pers. sing. of προέρχομαι. 
προενήρξατο (-ασθε), 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. (2 pers. plur.) 
of προενάρχομαι. 
προεπηγγείλατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of προεπαγγέλλω. 
προεπηγγελμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of προεπαγγέλλω. 
προεστῶτες, pf. act. ptep. aom. plur. masc. of προΐστημι. 
mpoérewvay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of προτείνω. 
προεφήτενον, imp. act. of προφητεύω. 
προέφθασεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of προφθάνω 
προεωρακότες. pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of προοράω. 
προῆγεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of προάγω. 
προηλπικότας, pf. act. ptep. ace. plur. masc. of προελπιζ. 
προημαρτηκός, pf. act. ptep. of προαμαρτάνω. 
προῃτιασάμεθα, 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. of mpoarrudoun 
προητοίμασα, 1 aor. act. of προετοιμάζω. 
προκεκηρυγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of προκηρύσσω 
προκεχειρισμένος, pf. pass, ptep. of προχειρίζω. 
προκεχειροτονημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of προχειροτονεω. 
προορώμην and προωρώμην, impf. mid. of rpoopaw 
προσανέθεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of προσανατίθημι. 
προσειργάσατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of προσεργά- 
Comat. 
προσεκλίθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing of ποοσκλίνω 
προσεκολλήθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of προσκολλαω. 
προσεκύνουν, iiapf. act. of προσκυνέω. 
προσενήνοχεν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing of προσφέρω. 
προσέπεσε, -σαν, -σον, 2 aor. act of προσπιπτω. 
προσέρ(ρ)ηξα, 1 aor. act. of προσρήγνυμι 
προσέσχηκα, pf. act. of προσέχω. 
προσεφώνει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of προσφωνέω. 
προσεῶντος, pres. act. ptcp. gen. sing. of προσεάω 
προσήνεγκα (-κον), 1 aor. (2 aor.) act. of προσφέρω. 
προσηνέχθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of προσφέρω. 
προσηργάσατο, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of προσεργάζομαι. 
προσηύξατο, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of προσεύχομαι 
προσηύχετο, impf. 3 pers. sing. of προσεύχομαι. 
πρόσθες, 2 aor act. impv. of προστίθημι 
προσκύνησον, 1 aor. act. impv. of mpockuvéw, 
προσλαβοῦ, 2 aor. mid. impv. of προσλαμβάνω. 
προσμεῖναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of προσμένω 
προσπήξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of mpoompyvups. 
προστῆναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of προΐστημι. 
προσωρμίσθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of προσορ- 
pica. 
προσώχθισα, 1 aor. act. of προσοχθίζω 
προτρεψάμενος, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of προτρέπω 
προὐπῆρχον, impf. act. of προὐύπάρχω 
πταίσητε, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of wrate. 
πτοηθέντες, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of rrosw, 
πτοηθῆτε, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of πτοέω. 
πτύξας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of πτύσσω. 
πτύσας, 1 aor. act. ptep. of πτύω. 
πυθόμενος, 2 aor. ptep. of πυνθάνομαι. 


Forms oF VERBS 


ῥαντίσωνται, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ῥαντίζω 

ῥεραντισμένοι (or ῥεραντ. or ἐρραντ.), pf. pass. ptep. nom. 
plur. mase. of ῥαντίζω. 

ῥεριμμένος (or ἐρριμμένος or ἐριμμ.), pf. pass. ptep. of ῥίπτω. 

ῥεύσουσιν, fut. 3 pers. plur. of ῥέω. 

ῥῆξον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ῥήγνυμι. 

ῥήξωσιν, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ῥήγνυμι. 

ῥίψαν (better ῥῖψαν), 1 aor. act. ptep. neut. of pire. 

ῥυπανθήτω, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of ῥυπαίνω. 

ῥυπαρευθήτω, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of pumapeue 
pat 

ῥῦσαι, -σάσθω, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ῥύομαι. 

ῥυσθῶ (-θῶμεν), 1 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. sing. (plur.) of 
Avopat. 


capot, pres ind. 8 pers. sing. of σαρόω. 

σβέσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of σβέννυμι. 

σβέσει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of σβέννυμι. 

σβεσθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of σβέννυιω. 

σεσαλευμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σαλεύω. 

σεσαρωμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σαρόω. 

σέσηπε, 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of σήπω. 

σεσιγημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of σιγάω- 

σέσωκα, pf. act. of σώζω. 

σέσωσται and σέσωται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing of σώζω. 

σημᾶναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of σημαίνω. 

σθενώσαι, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of σθενόω. 

σθενώσει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of σθενόω. 

σιγήσῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of σιγαῳ. 

σκύλλου, pres. mid. impy. of σκύλλω 

σπαρείς, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of σπείρω 

σπεῦσον, 1 aor. act. impv. of σπεύδω. 

σταθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of torre. 

σταθῆναι, 1 aor pass. inf. of ἵστημι. 

στάς. 2 aor act ptep. of torn. 

στῆθι (στῆναι), 2 aor. act. impv. (inf) of tornus 

στηρίξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. or 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing af 
στηρίζω 

στήριξον and στήρισον. 1 aor. act. impv. of στηρίζω. 

στηρίξω, στηρίσω, στηριῶ, fut. act. of στηρίζω. 

στήσῃ; στήσῃς, στήσητε, ete, 1 aor. act. subj. of ἵστημε 

στήσομαι, 1 fut. mid. of ἵστημει. 

στραφείς -φέντες, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of στρέφω. 

στραφῆτε, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of στρέφω. 

στρῶσον. 1 aor. act. impy. of στρωννύω 

συγκατατεθειμένος, pf. mid. ptep. of συγκατατίθημι 

συγκατατιθέμενος, pres, mid. ptep. of συγκατατίθημι 

συγκεκερασμένος and συγκεκραμένος, pf. pass. ptcp. m 
συγκεράννυμι 

συγκέχυται, pf. pass. 8 pers. sing. of συγχέω. 

συλλαβοῦσα, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing fem. of συλλαμ- 
βάνω. 

συλλή(μ)ψῃ; fut. 2 pers. sing. of συλλαμβάνω 

συμπαρακληθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of συμπαρακαλέω. 

συμπαρόντες, pres. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of συμπάρειμε 

συμφυεῖσαι, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. tem. of συμφύω. 

συναγάγετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of συνάγω. 


Forms oF VERBs. 


συνανέκειντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of συνανάκειμαι. 

συναπαχθέντες, 1 aor. pass. ptep nom. plur. masc. of 
συναπάγω. 

συναπέθανον, 2 aor. act. of συναποθνήσκω 

συναπήχθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers sing. of συναπάγω 

συναπώλετο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of συναπόλλυμι. 

συνᾶραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of συναίρω. 

συναχθήσομαι, 1 fut. pass. of συνάγω. 

συνδεδεμένοι, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of συνδέω 

συνέζευξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of συζεύγνυμι 

συνέθεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of συντίθημι 

συνειδυίης (or-as), pf. act. ptep. gen. sing. fem. of συνεῖδον 

συνειληφυῖα, pf. act. ptep. fem. of συλλαμβάνω 

συνείπετο, impf. 3 pers. sing. of συνέπομαι 

συνείχετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing of συνέχω 

συνεκόμισαν. 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συγκομίζω 

συνεληλύθεισαν, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of συνέρχομαι 

συνεληλυθυῖαι, pf. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of συνέρχομαι 

συνεπέστη, 2 aor, act. 3 pers. sing of συνεφίστημι 

συνέπιον, 2 aor. act. of συμπίνω. 

συνεσπάραξεν, 1 aor. act 3 pers. sing. of συσπαράσσω 

συνεσταλμένος, pf. pass, ptep. of συστέλλω 

συνεστῶσα (-τῶτα). 2 pf. ptep. nom. sing. fem. (neut. 
plur.) of συνίστημι 

συνέταξα, 1 aor act. of συντάσσω. 

συνετάφημεν, 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of συνθάπτω 

σύνετε, 2 aor. act. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνετέθειντο, plpf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of συντίθημι. 

συνετήρει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of συντηρέω 

συνέφαγες, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. sing of συνεσθίω 

ovvexeay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers plur. of συγχέω. 

συνέχεον, impf. (2 aor ? cf. ἐκχέω) 3 pers. plur οἵ συγχέω 

συνεχύθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of συγχέω. 

συνεψήφισαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συμψηφίζω. 

συνηγέρθητε, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of συνεγείρω 

συνηγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συνάγω. 

συνήθλησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συναθλέω 

συνηθροισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συναθροίζω. 

συνῆκαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνήλασεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of συνελαύνω. 

συνήλλασσεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing of συναλλάσσω. 

συνήντησεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of συναντάω. 

συνήργει, impf. 3 pers. sing of συνεργέω. 

συνηρπάκει, plpf. act. 3 pers sing. of συναρπάζω 

συνήρπασαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur of συναρπαζω. 

συνῆσαν, impf. 3 pers. plur. of σύνειμι 

συνήσθιεν, impf. 3 pers. sing. of συνεσθίω. 

συνῆτε, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνήχθη (-ησαν), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of συνάγω. 

συνιᾶσι, συνιοῦσι, συνίουσι, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of 
συνίημι. 

συνιδών, ptep. of συνεῖδον. 

συνιείς, συνίων, συνιῶν (not -ἰών), pres. ptep. of συνίημε. 

συνίετε, pres. ind. or impy. 2 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

συνιόντος, ptep. gen. sing. of σύνειμι (εἶμι). 

συνιστᾶν, -ῶν, pres. inf. and ptep. of συνίστημι. 

συνίωσι and συνιῶσι, pres. subj. 3 pers. plur. of συνέημε 

συνόντων, ptep. gen. plur. of σύνειμι (εἰμί) 


722 


Forms oF VERBS. 


συνταφέντες, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase of our 
barre 

συντελεσθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of συντελέω. 

συντετμημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συντέμνω 

συντετριμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of συντρίβω. 

συντετρίφθαι or -τρῖφθαι, pf. pass. inf. of συντρίβω 

συντρίβον or -τρῖβον, pres. act. ptep. neut. of συντρίβω 

συνυπεκρίθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of συνυποόκοι 
vopat. 

συνῶσι, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of συνίημι. 

σωθῇ, -θῆναι, -θῆτε, -θῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. of σώζω. 

σῶσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of σώζω. 


τακήσεται, fut pass. 3 pers. sing. of τήκω, q. Vv. 
ταραχθῆναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ταράσσω 
τεθέαται, pf. 3 pers sing. of θεάομαι 

τέθεικα, pf. act. of τίθημι. 

τεθεμελίωτο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of θεμελίοω. 
τεθῇ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers sing. of τίθημι. 
τεθλιμμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of θλίβω. 

τεθνάναι, 2 pf. act. inf. of θνήσκω. 

τεθνηκέναι. pf act. inf. of θνήσκω 

τεθραμμένος, pf. pass. ptcp. of τρέφω. 
τεθραυσμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of θραύω. 
τεθυμένα, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of θύω. 

τεθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of τίθημι. 
τέκῃ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of τίκτω. 
τελεσθῶσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of teAew 
τέξῃ. fut. 2 pers. sing. of τίκτω 

τεταγμένος, pf. pass ptep. of τάσσω. 

τέτακται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing of τάσσω. 
τεταραγμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ταράσσω. 
τετάρακται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ταράσσω. 
τεταχέναι, pf. act. inf. of τάσσω. 

τετέλεσται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of τελεω 
τέτευχα, pf. act of τυγχάνω. 

τετήρηκαν, -ασιν, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of τηρέω 
τετιμημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of τιμάω. 
τετραχηλισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of τραχηλίζω 
τετύφωται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of τυφύω 
τέτυχα, τετύχηκα, pf. act. of τυγχάνω. 

τεχθείς, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of τίκτω. 

τιθέασιν, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. plur. of τίθημι. 
τίσουσιν, fut. act. 8 pers. plur. of rivw. 


ὑπέδειξα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποδείκνυμι. 

ὑπέθηκα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποτίθημι. 

ὑπέλαβεν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of vroAay tav~ 
ὑπελείφθην, 1 aor. pass. of ὑπολείπω 

ὑπέμεινα, 1 aor. of ὑπομένω. 

ὑπέμενον, impf. of ὑπομένω 

ὑπεμνήσθην, 1 aor. pass. of ὑπομιμνησκω. 
ὑπενεγκεῖν, 2 aor. act. inf. of vmopeoa 

ὑπενόουν, impf. act. of ὑπονοεω. 

ὑπεπλεύσαμεν, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of ὑπυπλεω 
ὑπεριδών, pten. of ὑπερεῖδον 


Forms oF VERBS. 


ὑπέστρεψα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποστρέφω. 

ὑπεστρώνννον, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ὑποστοώννυμε. 

ὑπετάγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποτάσσν. 

ὑπέταξα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑπῆγον, impf. act. of ὑπάγω. 

ὑπήκουον, impf. act. of ὑπακούω. 

ὑπήνεγκα, 1 aor. act. of ὑποφέρω. 

ὑπῆρχον, impf. act. of ὑπάρχω. 

ὑποδέδεκται, pf. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποδέχομαι. 

ὑποδεδημένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ὑποδέω. 

ὑπόδησαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ὑποδέω. 

ὑποδραμόντες, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. maac. of vmo- 
τρέχω. 

ὑπομείνας, 1 aor. act. ptcp. οὗ ὑπομένω. 

ὑπομεμενηκότα, pf. act. ptep. acc. sing. mase. of ὑπομένω. 

ὑπομνῆσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ὑπομιμνήσκω. 

ὑπομνήσω, fut. act. of ὑπομιμνήσκω. 

ὑποπνεύσαντος, 1 aor. act. ptcep. gen. sing. of ὑποπνέω 

ὑποστείληται, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποστελλω 

ὑποταγῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ὕποτων “υ. 

ὑποταγήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑποτάγητε, 2 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑποτάξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑποτασσέσθωσαν; pres. mid. impv. 8 pers. plur. of imo 
τάσσω. 

ὑποτέτακται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ὑποτάσσω. 

ὑστερηκέναι, pf. act. inf. of ὑστερέω. 

ὑψωθῶ, 1 aor. pass. subj. of ide. 


φάγεσαι, fut. 2 pers. sing. ot ἐσθίω. 

φάνῃ, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of φαίνω. 
φανῇ, -νῇς, -νῶσιν, 2 aor. pass. subj. of φαίνω. 
φανήσομαι and φανοῦμαι, 2 fut. pass. of φαίνω. 
φείσομαι, fut. of φείδομαι. 

φεύξομαι, fut. of φεύγω. 

φθαρῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 8 pers. sing. of φδείρω. 
φθαρήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of φθείρω. 

φθάσωμεν, 1 aor. subj. 1 pers. plur. of φθάνω. 
φθερεῖ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of φθείρω. 

φιμοῖν, -μοῦν, pres. act. inf. of φιμόω. 

φιμώθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. sing. of φιμόω. 
φραγῇ, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of φράσσω. 
φραγήσομαι, 2 fut. pass. of φράσσω. 

φράσον, 1 aor. impv. of φράζω. 

φρονείσθω, pres. pass. impv. 8 pers. sing of Φρονε:. 


723 


Forms or Verss 


φνίν, 2 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of diw 
φύλαξον, 1 aor. act. impv. of φυλάσσω. 
φύς, 2 aor. act. ptep. of φύω. 

φυτεύθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of φυτεύω. 
φωτιεῖ, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of φωτίζω. 


Χαλῶσιν, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of χαλάω. 

χαρῆναι, 2 aor. pass. inf. of χαίρω. 

χαρήσομαι, fut. mid. of χαίρω. 

Χχάρητε, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of χαίρω. 

χαρῆτε, 2 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. of χαίρω. 
χαροῦσιν, fut. 3 pers. plur. of χαίρω (Rev. xi. 10 unique) 
χρῆσαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of χράομαι. 

χρήσηται, 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. of χράομαι. 
χρῆσον, 1 aor. act. impv. of κίχρημι. 

Xpfirat, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of χράομαι. 

χρονιεῖ, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of χρονίζω. 

χρῶ, pres. impv. of χράομαι. 

χωρῆσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of χωρέω. 

χωρίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of χωρίζω. 

χωροῦσαι, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. fem. ot χωρεω. 
χωροῦσι, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of χωρέω. 


ψηλαφήσειαν, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of wnkadde 
ψυγήσεται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ψύχω. 
ψωμίσω, 1 aor. act. subj. of Ψψωμίζω. 


φκοδόμητο, plpf. pass. 8 pers. sing. of οἰκοδοιμέω. 
φκοδόμουν, impf. act. of οἰκοδομέω. 

ὡμίλει, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ὁμιλέω. 
ὡμολόγουν, impf. act. of ὁμολογέω. 

Gpooa, 1 aor. act. of ὄμνυμι 

ὠνείδισε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ὀνειδίζω 
dvépaca, 1 aor. act. of ὀνομάζω. 

ὥρθριζεν, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ὀρθρίζω. 
Spica, 1 aor. act. of dpite. 

ὡρισμένος, pf. pass. ptep. of ὁρίζω. 

ὥρμησα, 1 aor. act of dpuaw. 

ὥρνξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers sing. of ὀρύσσω 
ὠρχήσασϑε, 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. of ὀρχέομωι 
ὄφειλον, impf. of ὀφείλω. 

ἄφθην, 1 aor. pass. of ὁράω. 


mo ~ 
j Δ δὶ 


Δ] 
Τὶ 


"ἜΝ 


δ ον ἡ» ὦ ete Ἂς ἜΒΚΗ 
δ)ν τς δ aren | 
edt ὃ wi fs peed | 


me 


εἰ 5 eeiits ἐγ ey ee 8 aoe 
— ‘ig e119 Ἧ Tey ἘΠῚ 
a 
Υ̓ 
: hae) Ἢ i 
7” ᾿ νος ’ ΘΕ PF 
a : a Pia is 
my asi 
ool Δ πον ὁ \~ as ay 
Ε at wyntts. my ᾧ 
Beek ἊΝ ile 
ἢ © ¥ i = Ἢ seer bay 
ΝΗ , φῚ δῶ προ δεν alll Goer 
yes bh at " 
ν jae Ἴ 12 
ek 4 oF.) aye > ie 
(ay qo? ἐν - eu oe 
Ἶ Ι “ g4 χὰ A =< 7% eh 
eq \ A se tag τ nia re 
es A ἢ ‘so a img Ἢ ᾿ na 
ae es he ἕῳ τὰν μά τώρ Ρ' Ὁ} 
ὲν 7% eval δ ον 
. 7 a ᾿ 
here Ὁ» ἐγ, pete ‘ “νδ΄ ἡ 4 eve ἰ yerod a WP Paid ee a) 
εἰ ἥ Υ 8a i at o4 ἡ δενῦνθ' We te ὦ Ψ' 
aye © “an 4 wi?) Shia? mp OY el ἐμῶν et 
f ᾽ 
1 
ῃ 4 1 ξ΄ at em § ᾿ ad " 
aj δια εἱῶ ees Wren = 
᾿ ' wil) Ga wife % tend DS ν᾿ ae 
8 Λ δι Lay LY τε tate απ Ὁ ΟΜ 
ῳ j 
iA 4 
- - 9 ' 5 sf 
᾿ 
§ 
ἌΝ 
a WS 
j ‘ ive 8 
t 4 * 


been 2) ebies 


ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 


HE printing of the Lexicon was nearly finished before the plan of the Appendix, as respects its details, 
ay had been decided on. Consequently facts respecting a word’s use are occasionally assumed there 
which are not expressly stated under the word itself. Professor Grimm held it to be unnecessary to refer to 
profane usage in the case of familiarand current words. And although the number of classic vouchers for the 
age of a word has been greatly multiplied, they have not been given with that invariable completeness which 
the chronological distribution of the vocabulary in the Appendix renders desirable. Consistency would require 
that it be expressly noted that the following words ere in use as early as Homer or Hesiod: ἄγκιστρον, ἁγνῶς, 
ἄγρα, ἁδρύτης, ἀθέμι(σ)τος, ᾿Αθηναῖος, Αἰγύπτιος, Αἰθίοψ, αἰσχρός, δή, Sia(or η)κόσιοι, εἶμι, ἐκεῖθεν, ἐκεῖσε, λλάς, 
Ἕλλην, ἕνεκα, ἐντεῦθεν, ἕξ, ἐξάγω, ἐξαίρω. ἔξειμι, ἐξέρχομαι, ἑξήκοντα. ἔξω, ἐπεγείρω, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ἐπεῖδον, ἔπειτα, 
ἐπικαλύπτω. ἔπος, ἑπτά, ἥλιος. θαρσέω. θάρσος. Κρής, κτῆμα, μηκέτι, μήτις (μήτι), νίπτω, χίλιοι : that the following 
are as old as Pindar, Herodotus, or the Tragedians: ἀγνωσία. αἱμορροέω. ἐκδοχή. ἐνοικέω, ἑξακόσιοι, ἔξωθεν, 
ἔπαινος. ᾿Εφέσιος, θροέω. κοινόω. κολάζω, κράσπεδον. Μακεδών, μάταιος, μέντοι, μετέχω. μηδέποτε, μηδέπω. Μῆδος, 
μωραίνω. νή. οἰκοῦν, οὐχί, ὀχετός, παράσημος. πάροικος. πόμα. προστάτις. στάδιον. στατήρ, στοά. συνοικέω. Χαλδαῖος ; 
that the following may be found inThucydides, Aristophanes, Plato, or Xenophon: ἀγράμματος. ἀδάπανος. ἀλήθω. 
᾿Αχαΐα. ἔγγιστα. ἐγγύτερον, ἐπίθεσις, ἐπικαθίζω, ἐπισκευάζω, καταλαλέω, ματαιολόγος, μήτιγε. μνᾶ. μουσικός. νυνί, 
ὀθόνιον, πάροινος, ῥαφίς, σπουδαίως. στάμνος, συναγωγή, συναίρω. opupis, φάσις. φιλοσοφία ; that the following are 
in use from Aristotle on: ἐπεκτείνω, ἐπιστηρίζω. εὐθύτης, ἦχος, κεράτιον, Kon, μαργαρίτης (Theophr.), νάρδος 
(Theophr.), πρώτως ; that the following may be found in the 3d century before Christ: βαθέως. ἐπάν (inser. 
B. C. 265), — δεκαέξ and δεκαοκτώ in the Sept.; that the following appear in Polybius: ᾿Αλεξανδρινός, ᾿Αντιοχεύς, 
προσανέχω ; while Diod. Sic., Dion. Hal., or Strabo vouch for Apay, ᾿Ασιάρχης. ᾿Επικούρειος. τάχιον. 

Other words without vouchers either first make their appearance in the New Testament writings, or are 
so treated in the Lexicon as to furnish a student with the means of tracing their history. 


Many interesting facts relative to noteworthy New Testament forms, and even constructions, will be found 
in Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen Inschriften, Berlin, 1885 (2d much “ enlarged and improved” edition 
1888). See, for example, on the various forms of δίδωμι, ἴημι, ἵστημι, τίθημι, ὃ 74; on the intrusion into the 
2 aor. of the a of the 1 aor. (ἤνεγκαν, εἴπας, εὑράμενος, etc.) ὃ 66, 6. 7.8; on yi(y)vopa, γι(γ)γνώσκω, ὃ 63, 20. 21; 
on ἔνι and ἔνεστι, ὃ 74, 12; on (ἐ)θέλω, § 63, 23; on the fut. χαρήσομαι, § 64, 7. On anomalies or variations in 
augment, ὃ 62; on Amis, καθ᾽ ἱδίαν, ὃ 32, 2. 4; on ἕνεκεν, εἵνεκεν, ὃ 83, 26; on the use of the cases and prepo- 
sitions, §§ 82, 83; of the art. with πᾶς, § 84, 41; ete., etc. References to it (of necessity restricted to the first 
2dition, 1885) have been introduced into the body of the Lexicon where the plates easily permitted. 


p: 1°, s. v. "ABBa ; respecting its accent see Tdf. Proleg. 
p- 102; Kautzsch, Grammatik d. Biblisch-Aramidischen 
u. s. w. (Leipzig, 1884) p. 8. 

p- 4°, line 1, add “See Westcott, Epp. of St. John, 
Ρ. 48 sq.” 

Ρ. 7°, first paragraph, add to the reff. E. Issel, Der 
Begriff der Heiligkeit im N. T. (Leiden, 1887). 

p- 13°, s. v. ἄθεος, 1. 8; on the application of the term 
to Christians by the heathen see Bp. Lghtft.’s note on 
Ign. ad Trall. 3, vol. ii. p. 160. 

p- 19%, line 13 from bot. before Longin. insert οἱ ἀπ᾽ 
αἰῶνος Ῥωμαῖοι. Dion Cass. 63, 20, 2 ef. 5; 


p- 278, s. v. αληθής, fin., add to the reff. A. Schlatter, 
Der Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1885), p. 169. 

p- 72, last line but one, after “ Arabian king ” insert 
Aretas IV., styled Φιλόπατρις ‘lover of his country,’ 
who reigned B.c. 9 (or 8) to A. D. 39 (or 40) (see Gut- 
schmid’s List of Nabathaean kings in J. Euting, Nab. 
Inschriften aus Arabien, Berlin 1885, p. 84 sq.) 

p- 74%, s. v. ᾿Αρμαγεδών. fin., add But see WH u.s. 

p- 74°, s. v. ἅρπαγμός, fin., add to the reff. Wetzel in 
Stud. u. Krit. for 1887, pp. 535-552. 

p- 789, s. v. ἀρχιερεύς 3, for the application of the 
term to Christ by the early writers see Bp. Lghifi. on 


7 


Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 36 p. 118 sq., and on Ign. ad Philad. 
9 vol. ii. p. 274. 

p- 824, s. v. ᾿Ασύγκριτος, line 1, after ᾿Ασύνκρ. add (cf. 
σύν, II. last paragraph) 

p- 87, first paragraph, last line, for Rev. viii. 6, etc.). 
read Rev. vili. 6; xviii. 7; ef. Scrivener’s Greek ‘l'es- 
tament (1887) p. v. note). Tr reads αὑτῶν in Rev. 
vii. 11. 

ibid. after “ Cf.” insert Meisterhans ed. 2 § 59, 4. 5; 

Ρ. 97%, line 15, “wn mao —probably the article 
should be stricken out; cf. Prof. Geo. Fk. Moore in the 
Andover Review for July 1887, p. 105. 

Ρ. 98%, s. v. βασιλεία, fin., to the reff. add Hdersheim, 
Jesus the Messiah, i. 264 sqq. 

p. 98>, s. v. Baoragw, line 1, before fut. insert impf. 3 
pers. sing. ἐβάσταζεν: and after 1 aor. ἐβάστασα; add, 
Pass., pres. inf. βαστάζεσθαι; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐβα- 
στάζετο; 

p- 1005, s. v. Βεελζεβούλ, last line but one, add (within 
the brackets) But see Baudissin in Herzog ed. 2, vol. 
ii. p. 209 sq.; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9. 

p- 101%, top, — On the recent identification of the 
pool (‘twin pools’) of Bethesda, near the church of St. 
Anne, see Pal. Explor. Fund for July, 1888 

p- 107", line 1, for -€a WH read -6a Tr WH 

v 107, 5. v. Yaga, line 7, for 16, 30 read 16, 2, 30 

p- 108", s. v. Γαλιλαία, last line but four, for 16, 34 
read 16, 2, 34 

p- 111°, s. v. yeevva, line 29, for 2 K. i. read 2 K. i. 10-12 

p- 1288, line 2, add to the reff. (within the brackets) 
Caspari, Chron.-geogr. Einl. pp. 83-90; Schiirer, Neu- 
test. Zeitgesch. §23, I. vol. ii. p. 83 (Eng. trans. ii? 
Ρ. 94) 

p- 131%, Syn. add The words are associated in 2 Co. 
xi. 4. 

p- 1045, 5. v. Ἑβραΐς fin., add to the reff. Kautzsch 
p- 17sq.; Neubauer in Studia Biblica (Oxford, 1885) 
pp. 39-74. 

p- 198», insert in its place “ ἐκ- περισσοῦ, see ἐκπερισ- 
σῶς and ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ." 

p- 256%, s. v. ev, line 8 --- “contrary to ordinary Grk. 
usage ” etc.; yet cf. Schmidt, vol. iv. p. 398. 

p. 268, s. v. ἕως, II. 2¢., for ἕως πρός in Lk. xxiv. 
50, note the rendering given in R. V.: until they were 
over against etc. 

n. 274%, s. v. ζωή, fin., to the works referred to add 
“ Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 204 sqq.” 

p- 276%, s. v. ndvocpos, fin., add to the reff. “ Léw, 
Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 200.” 

p- 287°, s. v. θεός, 1 fin., add to the reff. “For θεοί 
in application to (deceased) Christians, see Theoph. ad 
Autol. 2, 27; Hippol. refut. omn. haer. 10, 34; Iren. 
haer. 3, 6, 1 fin.; 4, 1, 1; 4, 38, 4; cf. esp. Harnack, 
Dogmengesch. 1. p. 82 note.” 

s. v. θεός 2, add “On patristic usage cf. Harnack, 
Dogmengesch. i. pp. 131, 695; Bp. Lghifi. lonat. vol. ii. 
p. 96 " 


Ms 


26 


s. Vv. θεός 3, add “On ὁ θεός and θεός, esp. in the 
writings of John, see Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 
165 sqq.” 

p. 2924, s. v. θριαμβεύω, add to the reff. at the close 
“ Findlay in the Expositor, vol. x. p. 403 sqq.; xi. 78; 
Waite in the ‘Speaker’s Com.’ on 2 Co. 1. 6. p. 404 
sq.” : 
p- 2972, first paragraph, last line but six, κατ᾽ ἐδίαν -- 
add, On κατ᾽ ἱδίαν (WH’s ‘alt.’ in Mt. xiv. 23; xvii. 1, 
19; xx. 17; xxiv.3; Mk. iv. 34; vi. 31; ix. 28; xiii. 3), 
see their App. pp. 143, 145; Meisterhans n. 806 

p- 300% s. ν. Ἰησοῦς, line 10, read “in the Zeitschr. 
f.d. Luth. Theol. 1876, p. 209 sq.; [Keimi. 384 sq. (Eng. 
trans. ii. 97 sq.) ].”” 

p- 306%, Syn., last line, add to the reff. E. Héhne in 
the Ztschrft. f. kirchl. Wissensch. ἃ. 5. w. 1886, pp. 
607-617. 

p. 314», s. v. καθολικός, line 5, after “Smyrn. c. 8” 
insert “ [see esp. Bp. Lghtft.’s note]” 

p- 319°, s.v. καίω, line 7, to the reff. on καυχήσωμαι 
add “ Bp. Δ μι. on Col., 7th ed., p. 395 n.” 

p- 354%, line 15, the words εἰς τοὺς κόλπους αὐτῶν are 
wanting in good Mss. 

Ρ. 358%, s. v. κοῦμι; add “See Edersheim, Jesus the 
Messiah, i. 631 note.” 

p- 365%, line 18, on this use of κύριος add ref. to Bp. 
Lghtft. on Ign., mart. Polye. 8, p. 959. 

p- 376%, s. v. λέπρα. add to the reff. Clark in the 
‘Speaker's Com.’ on Lev. pp. 559 sqq. 570 sqq. ; Sir Ris- 
don Bennett, Diseases of the Bible. 1887. (“ By-Paths 
of Bible Knowledge ” vol. ix.) 

p- 382%, first paragraph, line 15, add For a transla- 
tion of Liicke’s discussion see Christian Examiner for 
1849 pp. 165 544. 412 sqq. To the reff. given may be 
added Mansel in Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Philosophy; Zeller, 
Philos. der Griechen, 3te Theil, 25, p. 369 sq. (1881) ; 
Drummond, Philo Judaeus, vol. ii. pp. 156-273. 

p- 402%, line 18 sq., on ἐν μέσῳ and ἀνὰ μέσον cf. R. F. 
Weymouth in Journ. of Philol. 1869, ii. pp. 318-322. 

p- 4175, insert in its place (before μονή) μόνας, see 
καταμόνας. 

Ρ. 420", s. v. Μωσῆς. line 1, “ constantly so in the text. 
Rec.” — not quite correct ; Rec.tt uses Μωῦσῆς in Acts 
vi. 14; vii. 35, 37; xv. 1, 5; 2 Tim. iii. 8; Heb. ix. 19. 

p- 421%, line 20, “by L Tr WH” —Tr does not seem 
to be consistent; he uses the diwresis, for example, in 
Acts xv. 1, 5; 2 Tim. iii. 8; Heb. ix. 19. ° 

Ρ. 425”, 5. v. νηστεύω. line 6, after xviii. 12 insert [(cf. 
| ‘Teaching’ 8,1 and Harnack or Schaff ad loc.) ] 

p- 433°, introduce as line 1 (before ὁ, ἡ, τὸ) — O, 0: — 
on its interchange with omega see Q, ὦ. 
| p- 445», s. v. ὁμοίωμα. last line “p. 301 sqq.” — add 
| Dickson, St. Paul’s. Use of the Terms ‘Flesh’ and 
‘Spirit’ (Glasgow, 1883). p. 322 sqq. 

p- 465», line 32 mid., add see H. Gebhardt, Der Him- 
mel im N. T., in Ztschr. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. kirchl. 


121 


p- 474%, Syn. sub fin., on the elasticity of the term παῖς 
as respects age, see Bp. Lghifi. Apostolic Fathers, Pt. 
II. vol. i. p. 432 note. 

p- 501°, under ec. δ., after Ro. viii. 3 add [al. find 
here the same idiom as in Heb. x. 6 below (cf. R. V. 
txt.) ] 

p- 508%, line 18 sq., add to the reff. Lipsius, Apokr. 
Apostelgesch. 11.1 (1887) p. 1 sqq. 

p- 5125, 5. v. πιστικός, line 9, add [but see Rev. Wm. 
Houghton in Proc. of Soc. of Bibl. Archaeol. Jan. 10, 
1888] 

p- 514%, to the reff. 8. v. πίστις add A. Schlatter, Der 
Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1885). 

p- 521%, paragraph 4 a., line 4, “the Sept. renders by ” 
etc. — not correct; the rendering of the Sept.. in both 
passages is τὸ mv. τὸ ἅγιον. 

p. 529%, par. c., line 5 sq., “so πολλῆς Spas, Polyb. 
5, 8, 3”” — but see p. 679°, line 2. 

p- 536%, line 15, after 1 Pet. v. 1 sq.insert [T WH om. ] 

Ρ. 537%, s. v. προβατικός fin.— see under Βηθεσδά, 
p- 101* above. 

p- 566%, 8. v. Σαλά insert [Lchm. Sada] 

p- 568°, line 2, add On the Christology of the Sa- 
maritans see Westcott, Introd. to the Study of the Gos- 
pels, 5th ed., p. 159 sq. 

p- 5728, first paragraph, end; add to the reff. Dorner, 
System d. Christ. Glaubenslehre, § 85, vol. ii. 1 p. 188 


ADDITIONAL 


p. 42°, line 1, after Jn. ii. 15 add [WH txt. ἀνέτρεψεν] 

p. 250%, 8. v. ἑρμηνεύω, line 1, after Ἑρμῆς insert [but see 
Curtius § 502] 

p. 268°, line 20, after Hdt. 2, 148 add [here modern 
edd. read ἐς 6] 

p. 268°, line 21, before Plut. insert [Polyb. 4, 19, 12], 

p. 281%, line 7, after 22—N.B. here WH R mrg. read 
αὐτοῦ (for αὐτῆς τῆς), and thus make the dau ghter’s 
name Herodias (as well as the mother’s); but see Schiirer, 
Gesch. § 17°, note 39, 

p. 298°, 8. v. Ἱεριχώ, last line, add see esp. Schiirer, 
Gesch. § 15, note 35. 

p. 299°, according to Professor Sayce (in 8. S. Times, 
Feb. 7, 1891, p. 88) it appears from the Tel el-Amarna 
tablets that Uru-salim is equivalent to ‘the city of the 
god Salim.’ 


sqq.; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2, xv. 358 sq.; 
esp. Weser in Stud. u. Krit. for 1882 pp. 284-303. 

p- 584%, line 24, for ** Delitzsch, Br. a. d. Rom. p. 16 
note?” read Geiger, in Zeitschr. d. deutsch. Morgen. 
Gesellsch. 1858, pp. 307-309; Delitzsch in Luth. Zeitschr. 
1877 p. 603 sq.; Driver in the Expositor for Jan. 1889 
p- 18 sq. 

p- 608, s. v. συστρατιώτης. line 1, for T Tr WH ov» 
(so Lchm. in Philem.; read L T Tr WH ovy ( 

p- 619%, 5. v. τέλος 1 a., line 2, — “in the Grk. writ.’ 
etc. add cf. Schmidt ch. 193 esp. §§ 3 and 9. 

p- 626%, line 38, before 2 Jn. 4 insert Acts xix. 33 
ΒΟΥ. mrg. (cf. συμβιβάζω. 3 fin.) ; 

p- 653%, s. v. Φιλαδέλφεια, line 3, “ The White City ” 
(Sayce), add, al. “the pied or striped city” (cf. Bp. 
Loghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. II. vol. ii. sect. i. p. 245) 

Ρ- 665°, s. v. χαρίζομαι. last line, after ib. 16 add [but 
GLTTr WH om. εἰς az.] 

p- 669%, line 7, add to ref. Schaff, Hist. i. 841 sqq.; 
the Expositor for Nov. 1885, p. 381 sq.; Salmon, Introd., 
Lect. xiv. ; 

p- 672%, s. v. Χριστιανός, line 7 sqq., add — yet see Bp. 
Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. IT. vol. i. p. 400 sqq. 

p- 678°, 5, v. ψύχω, fin., add [Comp.: ava-, ἀπο-, éx-, 
κατα-. also ev-yvye. | ; 

p- 708, col. 2, insert (in its place) “ ἐνοχλέω fr. Sept. 
(Lk.?) ” 


CORRECTIONS. 


p. 386%, s. v. μαθητής, line 5, after Jn. ix. 25; insert 
[αὐτοῦ i. 6. of Paul, Acts ix. 25 LT Tr WH]; 

p. 548°, line 9, after reject; add [in Jn. iv. 22 the un- 
expressed antecedent of 6 (dis) may be in the ace. or in 
the dat. (after the analogy of vs. 21); in vs. 23 both con- 
structions occur]; 

p. 048°, s. v. προσμένω, line 5, after τῷ κυρίῳ insert 
[WH prefix ἐν in br.] 

p. 605s, line 8 from bottom, after xvii. 13; insert [Acts 
vii. 255]; 

p. 621, line 6, for the gen. or dat. read the gen., dat., 
or nom. 

p. 630%, s. v. Tpaywriric, at end, add esp. Schiirer, 
Gesch. § 17%, note *. 

p. 658°, s. ν. φρόνιμος. line 5, after Ro. xi. 25 insert 
{here Tr txt. WH txt. ἐν éavroic, | 

p. 664°, s. v. Χαναάν, line 1, dele [lit. ‘lowland’] 


δὶ 4 call 
Ἐν 
ὐ ΒΡ 1 πώ! 


ὕψι ey aun 
nr 
a4 
ees: 


Fh ty Bod 4, ona AIT" 


«νὰ [ ᾿ i 
‘ 


y 


: 
el 
wt Le 
eS 
| 
τὴ 6 
Ἶ 4 
μ᾽ 
i j J 
| 
‘ 
Ὶ 
‘ 
1 
. 
: 
+ 


: , 
Ayr ae | . τὰ 
δὰ ἡ ὦ ary 

5 " 

7 7 / 


ῃ ᾿ ᾿ 
i it fl 
yy i 
ee 
| 
᾿ i 


uae ¥ ἣν ᾿ f “i 
ἊΝ ἡ if 
Ὶ ᾿ γι γ᾽ 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
Los Angeles 
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 


LOIURI 


AWK APR1 619 
Win 2:3 TOGA 


{ΠΠ||11|} 


3 1158 00904 6557 


Υλ 


UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILI 


vii 


0 


